Dodge - Ram 1500 4wd - Workshop Manual - 2008 - 2008

Factory Workshop Manual Make Dodge Model Ram 1500 4wd Engine and year Truck V8-4.7L (2008) Please navigate through the PDF using the options provided by OnlyManuals.com on the sidebar. This manual was submitted by Anonymous Date 1st January 2018 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Keyless Entry Module > Component Information > Locations Keyless Entry Module: Locations Component ID: 213 Component : MODULE-SENTRY KEY REMOTE ENTRY/WCM Connector: Name : MODULE-SENTRY KEY REMOTE ENTRY/WCM Color : BLACK # of pins : 8 Pin Circuit Description 1 G20 20VT/BR IGNITION SWITCH SENSE 2 D508 20WT/GY COM-LIN TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR LAN 3 F20 20PK/WT FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) 4 Z109 20BK/GY GROUND 5 A114 18GY/RD FUSED B(+) 6 D55 20WT/OR CAN B BUS (+) 7 D54 20WT CAN B BUS (-) 8-Component Location - 47 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Keyless Entry Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 7 Component Location - 41 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Keyless Entry Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 8 Component Location - 42 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Keyless Entry Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 9 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Keyless Entry Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 10 Keyless Entry Module: Diagrams Component ID: 213 Component : MODULE-SENTRY KEY REMOTE ENTRY/WCM Connector: Name : MODULE-SENTRY KEY REMOTE ENTRY/WCM Color : BLACK # of pins : 8 Pin Circuit Description 1 G20 20VT/BR IGNITION SWITCH SENSE 2 D508 20WT/GY COM-LIN TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR LAN 3 F20 20PK/WT FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) 4 Z109 20BK/GY GROUND 5 A114 18GY/RD FUSED B(+) 6 D55 20WT/OR CAN B BUS (+) 7 D54 20WT CAN B BUS (-) 8-Component Location - 47 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Keyless Entry Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 11 Component Location - 41 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Keyless Entry Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 12 Component Location - 42 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Keyless Entry Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 13 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Keyless Entry Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Remote Keyless Entry Module Keyless Entry Module: Description and Operation Remote Keyless Entry Module Description DESCRIPTION When an RKE lock message is sent to the instrument cluster, the instrument cluster actuates the door locks, the interior lighting is turned off, the horn chirps (if this feature is enabled), the park lamps flash (if this feature is enabled) and, if the vehicle is so equipped, the Vehicle Theft Security System (VTSS) is armed. When an RKE unlock message is sent to the instrument cluster, the instrument cluster actuates the driver side front door (or all doors if this feature is enabled) unlock, the interior lighting is turned on and, if the vehicle is so equipped, the VTSS is disarmed. When an RKE panic message is sent to the instrument cluster, the instrument cluster actuates the driver side front door (or all doors if this feature is enabled) unlock, the interior lighting is turned on and, if the vehicle is so equipped, the VTSS is disarmed. The panic message will also cause the exterior lamps (including the headlights) to flash, and the horn to sound for about three minutes, or until a second panic message is sent to the instrument cluster. A vehicle speed of about 25.7 Km/h(15 mph) will also cancel the panic event. Operation OPERATION Whenever the vehicle battery power is interrupted, the Remote Keyless Module (RKE) Module will retain all vehicle access codes in its memory. When replacing or adding a key fob transmitter (maximum of 4) a scan tool is required to program the RKE Module to accept the new Vehicle Access Code if a customer owned transmitter is not available. If a functioning transmitter is available, See: Accessories and Optional Equipment/Antitheft and Alarm Systems/Keyless Entry/Keyless Entry Transmitter/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Keyless Entry Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Remote Keyless Entry Module > Page 16 Keyless Entry Module: Description and Operation Sentry Key Remote Entry Module Description DESCRIPTION The Sentry Key REmote Entry Module (SKREEM) (1) is sometimes referred to as the Wireless Control Module (WCM). The SKREEM is the primary component of the Sentry Key Immobilizer System (SKIS). It is also the receiver for the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) system. The SKREEM is located on the right side of the steering column, near the ignition lock cylinder housing and is concealed beneath the steering column shrouds. The molded black plastic housing for the SKREEM has an integral molded plastic halo-like antenna ring (4) that extends from the bottom. When the SKREEM is properly installed on the steering column, the antenna ring is oriented around the circumference of the ignition lock cylinder housing. A single integral connector receptacle (3) is located just behind the antenna ring on the bottom of the SKREEM housing. An integral molded plastic mounting tab (2) on the rear corner of the SKREEM housing has a hole in the center through which a screw passes to secure the unit to the steering column. The SKREEM is connected to the vehicle electrical system through a single take out and connector of the instrument panel wire harness. Two SKREEM modules are used: one for vehicles equipped with RKE only, and one for vehicles equipped with RKE and SKIS. The SKREEM cannot be adjusted or repaired. If ineffective or damaged, the entire SKREEM unit must be replaced. Operation OPERATION The Sentry Key REmote Entry Module (SKREEM) (also known as the Wireless Control Module/WCM) contains a Radio Frequency (RF) transceiver and a microprocessor. The SKREEM transmits RF signals to, and receives RF signals from the Sentry Key transponder through a tuned antenna enclosed within the molded plastic antenna ring integral to the SKREEM housing. If this antenna ring is not mounted properly around the ignition lock cylinder housing, communication problems between the SKREEM and the transponder may arise. These communication problems will result in Sentry Key transponder-related faults. The SKREEM also serves as the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) RF receiver. See: Body and Frame/Locks/Power Locks/Description and Operation/Description . The SKREEM communicates over the Controller Area Network (CAN) data bus with the ElectroMechanical Instrument Cluster (EMIC) (also known as the Cab Compartment Node/CCN), the Powertrain Control Module (PCM)/Engine Control Module (ECM) or the diagnostic scan tool. The SKREEM and the PCM/ECM both use software that includes a rolling code algorithm strategy, which helps to reduce the possibility of unauthorized Sentry Key Immobilizer System (SKIS) disarming. The rolling code algorithm ensures security by preventing an override of the SKIS through the unauthorized substitution of the SKREEM or the PCM/ECM. However, the use of this strategy also means that replacement of either the SKREEM or the PCM/ECM units will require a system initialization procedure to restore system operation. The SKREEM retains in memory the ID numbers of any Sentry Key transponder that is programmed into it. A maximum of eight Sentry Key transponders can be programmed into the SKREEM. For added system security, each SKREEM is programmed with a unique Secret Key code. This code is stored in memory, sent over the CAN data bus to the PCM or ECM, and is encoded to the transponder of every Sentry Key that is programmed into the SKREEM. Therefore, the Secret Key code is a common element that is found in every component of the SKIS. Another security code called a PIN, is used to gain access to the SKREEM Secured Access Mode. The Secured Access Mode is required during service Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Keyless Entry Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Remote Keyless Entry Module > Page 17 to perform the SKIS initialization and Sentry Key transponder programming procedures. The SKREEM also stores the Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) in its memory, which it learns through a CAN data bus message from the PCM or ECM during SKIS initialization. In the event that a SKREEM replacement is required, the Secret Key code can be transferred to the new SKREEM from the PCM or ECM using a diagnostic scan tool and the SKIS initialization procedure. Proper completion of the SKIS initialization will allow the existing Sentry Keys to be programmed into the new SKREEM so that new keys will not be required. In the event that the original Secret Key code cannot be recovered, SKREEM replacement will also require new Sentry Keys. The diagnostic scan tool will alert the technician during the SKIS initialization procedure if new Sentry Keys are required. When the ignition switch is turned to the ON position, the SKREEM transmits an RF signal to excite the transponder in the ignition key. The SKREEM then waits for an RF signal response from the transponder. If the response received identifies the key as valid, the SKREEM sends an electronic valid key message to the PCM/ECM over the CAN bus. If the response received identifies the key as invalid or if no response is received from the key transponder, the SKREEM sends an invalid key message to the PCM/ECM. The PCM/ECM will enable or disable engine operation based upon the status of the SKREEM messages. It is important to note that the default condition in the PCM or ECM is an invalid key ; therefore, if no message is received from the SKREEM by the PCM or ECM, the engine will be disabled and the vehicle immobilized after two seconds of running. The SKREEM also sends security indicator request messages to the EMIC over the CAN data bus to tell the EMIC how to operate the security indicator. The security indicator request message from the SKREEM tells the EMIC to turn the indicator ON for about three seconds each time the ignition switch is turned to the ON position as a bulb test. After completion of the bulb test, the SKREEM sends security indicator request messages to the EMIC to turn the indicator OFF, turn the indicator ON, or to flash the indicator ON and OFF. If the security indicator flashes or stays ON solid after the bulb test, it signifies a SKIS fault. If the SKREEM detects a system malfunction or the SKIS has become ineffective, the security indicator will stay ON solid. If the SKREEM detects an invalid key or if a key transponder-related fault exists, the security indicator will flash. If the vehicle is equipped with the Customer Learn transponder programming feature, the SKREEM will also send messages to the EMIC to flash the security indicator whenever the Customer Learn programming mode is being utilized. . The SKIS performs a self-test each time the ignition switch is turned to the ON position, and will store fault information in the form of a Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) in SKREEM memory if a system malfunction is detected. The hard wired circuits of the SKREEM may be diagnosed using conventional diagnostic tools and procedures. Refer to the appropriate wiring information. However, conventional diagnostic methods will not prove conclusive in the diagnosis of the SKREEM or the electronic controls or communication between other modules and devices that provide some features of the SKIS. The most reliable, efficient, and accurate means to diagnose the SKREEM or the electronic controls and communication related to SKREEM operation requires the use of a diagnostic scan tool. Refer to the appropriate diagnostic information. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Keyless Entry Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 18 Keyless Entry Module: Testing and Inspection REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY MODULE The most reliable, efficient, and accurate means to diagnose the power lock system requires the use of a scan tool and the proper Diagnostic Procedures information. Refer to the appropriate wiring information. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Keyless Entry Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Remote Keyless Entry Module Keyless Entry Module: Service and Repair Remote Keyless Entry Module Removal REMOVAL See: Sentry Key Remote Entry Module/Removal Installation INSTALLATION See: Sentry Key Remote Entry Module/Installation Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Keyless Entry Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Remote Keyless Entry Module > Page 21 Keyless Entry Module: Service and Repair Sentry Key Remote Entry Module Removal REMOVAL WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury on vehicles equipped with airbags, disable the Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, airbag, seat belt tensioner, impact sensor, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the SRS. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment. 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. 2. Remove the screw (2) that secures the tilt steering column knob (1) and remove it from the tilt actuator (3) on the left side of the column. 3. From below the steering column, remove the two outboard screws that secure the upper column shroud (1) to the lower shroud (3). 4. Using hand pressure, push inward on both sides of the upper shroud above the parting line of the lower shroud to release the snap features that secure the two shroud halves to each other. 5. Remove the upper shroud from the lower shroud and the steering column. 6. Remove the one center screw that secures the lower shroud to the steering column (4). 7. Remove the lower shroud from the steering column. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Keyless Entry Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Remote Keyless Entry Module > Page 22 8. Disconnect the wire harness connector (2) from the Sentry Key REmote Entry Module (SKREEM) (1). 9. Remove the screw (3) that secures the SKREEM (1) to the steering column (2). 10. Disengage the antenna ring from around the ignition lock cylinder housing and remove the SKREEM. Installation INSTALLATION WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury on vehicles equipped with airbags, disable the Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, airbag, seat belt tensioner, impact sensor, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the SRS. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Keyless Entry Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Remote Keyless Entry Module > Page 23 1. Position the Sentry Key REmote Entry Module (SKREEM) (1) onto the steering column (2) with the antenna ring oriented around the ignition lock cylinder housing. 2. Install and tighten the screw (3) that secures the SKREEM to the steering column housing. Tighten the screw to 2 Nm (20 in. lbs.). 3. Reconnect the wire harness connector (2) to the SKREEM (1). 4. Position the lower shroud (3) onto the steering column (4). 5. From below the steering column, install and tighten the one center screw that secures the lower shroud to the steering column. Tighten the screw to 2 Nm (20 in. lbs.). 6. Position the upper shroud (1) onto the steering column over the lower shroud. On vehicles equipped with an automatic transmission, be certain to engage the gearshift lever gap hider into the opening in the right side of both shroud halves. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Keyless Entry Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Remote Keyless Entry Module > Page 24 7. Align the snap features on the upper shroud with the receptacles in the lower shroud and apply hand pressure to snap them together. 8. Install and tighten the two outboard screws that secure the upper shroud to the lower shroud. Tighten the screws to 2 Nm (20 in. lbs.). 9. Position the tilt steering column knob (1) onto the tilt adjuster actuator (3) on the left side of the steering column, then install and tighten the screw (2) to secure the knob to the actuator. Tighten the screw to 2 Nm (20 in. lbs.). 10. Reconnect the battery negative cable. NOTE: On vehicles equipped with the optional Sentry Key Immobilizer System (SKIS) if the SKREEM is replaced with a new unit, a diagnostic scan tool MUST be used to initialize the new SKREEM and to program at least two Sentry Key transponders before the vehicle can be operated. See: Accessories and Optional Equipment/Antitheft and Alarm Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing Module > Component Information > Locations Towing Module: Locations Component ID: 203 Component : MODULE-BRAKE PROVISION Connector: Name : MODULE-BRAKE PROVISION Color : BLUE # of pins : 4 Pin Circuit Description 1 Z998 18BK GROUND 2 L50 18WT/TN BRAKE LAMP SWITCH OUTPUT 3 B40 14DG TRAILER TOW BRAKE B(+) 4 A400 14TN/RD FUSED B(+) Component Location - 31 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 28 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 29 Towing Module: Diagrams Component ID: 203 Component : MODULE-BRAKE PROVISION Connector: Name : MODULE-BRAKE PROVISION Color : BLUE # of pins : 4 Pin Circuit Description 1 Z998 18BK GROUND 2 L50 18WT/TN BRAKE LAMP SWITCH OUTPUT 3 B40 14DG TRAILER TOW BRAKE B(+) 4 A400 14TN/RD FUSED B(+) Component Location - 31 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 30 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Voice Activation Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Voice Activation Module: > 08-028-08 > Sep > 08 > Cell Phone - Voice Recognition Screen Locks Up Voice Activation Module: Customer Interest Cell Phone - Voice Recognition Screen Locks Up NUMBER: 08-028-08 GROUP: Electrical DATE: September 18, 2008 SUBJECT: Voice Recognition Screen Lock-up on REN or REZ Radio Equipped With Hands-Free Communications OVERVIEW: This bulletin involves replacing the Hands Free Module (HFM). MODELS: 2008 (DR/DH/DC/D1) Ram Truck (1500/2500/3500) 2008 (HB) Durango 2008 (HG) Aspen 2008 (JS) Avenger/Sebring (U.S. and International Markets) 2008 (KA) Nitro (U.S. and International Markets) 2008 (KK) Liberty (U.S. and International Markets) 2008 (LX) 300C/Magnum/Charger 2008 (LE) 300/ 300C Touring (International Markets) 2008 (LC) Challenger 2008 (RI) Town & Country/Grand Caravan/Grand Voyager (U.S. and International Markets) 2008 (WK) Grand Cherokee 2008 (WH) Grand Cherokee (International Markets) 2008 (XK) Commander 2008 (XH) Commander (International Markets) NOTE: This bulletin applies to vehicles equipped with radio sales codes REN or REZ and Hands4ree Communications Sales Codes RSP or RSQ built before the following dates: ^ (HB/HG) built before November 13, 2007 (MDH 1113XX) ^ (LX/LC) built before February 28, 2008 (MDH 0228XX) ^ (DR) built before January 26, 2008 (MDH 0126XX) ^ (WK/XK) built before March 2, 2008 (MDH 0302XX) ^ (LE, WH/XH, DH, DC, D1) built before November 6, 2007 (MDH 1106XX) ^ (JS) built before May 6, 2008 (MDH 0506XX) ^ (RT) built before December 13, 2007 (MDH 1213XX) ^ (KK/KA) built before February 26, 2008 (MDH 0226XX) Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Voice Activation Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Voice Activation Module: > 08-028-08 > Sep > 08 > Cell Phone - Voice Recognition Screen Locks Up > Page 39 SYMPTOM/CONDITION: Customers may experience one of the following conditions: a. A "lock up condition of the radio screen when the Voice Recognition (VR) button is pressed b. When the VR button is pressed, the radio display changes to the phone screen and there is a lack of the "Ready" audio prompt. If the above symptom/condition is experienced, perform the following diagnostic procedure. DIAGNOSIS: 1. Turn ignition key on. 2. Using a Scan Tool (StarSCAN(R)) read and identify the current HFM part number in the vehicle. 3. Is the HFM part number 05064560AC, 05064448AE, 05064561AC, 05064482AE, 05064483AE or greater? a. Yes >> This bulletin does not apply, further diagnosis is required. b. No >> perform the repair procedure. PARTS REQUIRED: REPAIR PROCEDURE: 1. Replace the Hands Free Module. Refer to the service procedure available on DealerCONNECT/TechCONNECT, Group 8 Electrical > 8T Navigation and Telecommunications> MODULE, Hands free remove and Installation procedures. POLICY: Reimbursable within the provisions of the warranty. TIME ALLOWANCE: Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Voice Activation Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Voice Activation Module: > 08-028-08 > Sep > 08 > Cell Phone - Voice Recognition Screen Locks Up > Page 40 FAILURE CODE: Disclaimer: This bulletin is supplied as technical information only and is not an authorization for repair. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Voice Activation Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Voice Activation Module: > 08-028-08 > Sep > 08 > Cell Phone - Voice Recognition Screen Locks Up Voice Activation Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Cell Phone - Voice Recognition Screen Locks Up NUMBER: 08-028-08 GROUP: Electrical DATE: September 18, 2008 SUBJECT: Voice Recognition Screen Lock-up on REN or REZ Radio Equipped With Hands-Free Communications OVERVIEW: This bulletin involves replacing the Hands Free Module (HFM). MODELS: 2008 (DR/DH/DC/D1) Ram Truck (1500/2500/3500) 2008 (HB) Durango 2008 (HG) Aspen 2008 (JS) Avenger/Sebring (U.S. and International Markets) 2008 (KA) Nitro (U.S. and International Markets) 2008 (KK) Liberty (U.S. and International Markets) 2008 (LX) 300C/Magnum/Charger 2008 (LE) 300/ 300C Touring (International Markets) 2008 (LC) Challenger 2008 (RI) Town & Country/Grand Caravan/Grand Voyager (U.S. and International Markets) 2008 (WK) Grand Cherokee 2008 (WH) Grand Cherokee (International Markets) 2008 (XK) Commander 2008 (XH) Commander (International Markets) NOTE: This bulletin applies to vehicles equipped with radio sales codes REN or REZ and Hands4ree Communications Sales Codes RSP or RSQ built before the following dates: ^ (HB/HG) built before November 13, 2007 (MDH 1113XX) ^ (LX/LC) built before February 28, 2008 (MDH 0228XX) ^ (DR) built before January 26, 2008 (MDH 0126XX) ^ (WK/XK) built before March 2, 2008 (MDH 0302XX) ^ (LE, WH/XH, DH, DC, D1) built before November 6, 2007 (MDH 1106XX) ^ (JS) built before May 6, 2008 (MDH 0506XX) ^ (RT) built before December 13, 2007 (MDH 1213XX) ^ (KK/KA) built before February 26, 2008 (MDH 0226XX) Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Voice Activation Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Voice Activation Module: > 08-028-08 > Sep > 08 > Cell Phone - Voice Recognition Screen Locks Up > Page 46 SYMPTOM/CONDITION: Customers may experience one of the following conditions: a. A "lock up condition of the radio screen when the Voice Recognition (VR) button is pressed b. When the VR button is pressed, the radio display changes to the phone screen and there is a lack of the "Ready" audio prompt. If the above symptom/condition is experienced, perform the following diagnostic procedure. DIAGNOSIS: 1. Turn ignition key on. 2. Using a Scan Tool (StarSCAN(R)) read and identify the current HFM part number in the vehicle. 3. Is the HFM part number 05064560AC, 05064448AE, 05064561AC, 05064482AE, 05064483AE or greater? a. Yes >> This bulletin does not apply, further diagnosis is required. b. No >> perform the repair procedure. PARTS REQUIRED: REPAIR PROCEDURE: 1. Replace the Hands Free Module. Refer to the service procedure available on DealerCONNECT/TechCONNECT, Group 8 Electrical > 8T Navigation and Telecommunications> MODULE, Hands free remove and Installation procedures. POLICY: Reimbursable within the provisions of the warranty. TIME ALLOWANCE: Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Voice Activation Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Voice Activation Module: > 08-028-08 > Sep > 08 > Cell Phone - Voice Recognition Screen Locks Up > Page 47 FAILURE CODE: Disclaimer: This bulletin is supplied as technical information only and is not an authorization for repair. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Voice Activation Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 48 Voice Activation Module: Locations Component ID: 208 Component : MODULE-HANDS FREE Connector: Name : MODULE-HANDS FREE Color : DK. GRAY # of pins : 22 Pin Circuit Description 1 A114 18GY/RD FUSED B(+) 2-3-4 D54 20WT CAN B BUS (-) 5 X722 20LB/DG MICROPHONE 2 IN (+) 6-7-- 8 X716 20GY/TN LEFT AUDIO OUTPUT 9 X776 20TN/GY RIGHT AUDIO OUTPUT 10 X795 20DG COMMON AUDIO OUTPUT 11 - 12 - 13 - 14 D55 20WT/OR CAN B BUS (+) 15 - 16 X712 20DG/LB MICROPHONE 1 IN (+) 17 X792 20LB/DG MICROPHONE IN (-) 18 - 19 - 20 X793 20DG/YL MICROPHONE FEED 21 X835 20OR/GY SENSOR GROUND 22 Z970 18BK GROUND Component Location - 46 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Voice Activation Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 49 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Voice Activation Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 50 Voice Activation Module: Diagrams Component ID: 208 Component : MODULE-HANDS FREE Connector: Name : MODULE-HANDS FREE Color : DK. GRAY # of pins : 22 Pin Circuit Description 1 A114 18GY/RD FUSED B(+) 2-3-4 D54 20WT CAN B BUS (-) 5 X722 20LB/DG MICROPHONE 2 IN (+) 6-7-- 8 X716 20GY/TN LEFT AUDIO OUTPUT 9 X776 20TN/GY RIGHT AUDIO OUTPUT 10 X795 20DG COMMON AUDIO OUTPUT 11 - 12 - 13 - 14 D55 20WT/OR CAN B BUS (+) 15 - 16 X712 20DG/LB MICROPHONE 1 IN (+) 17 X792 20LB/DG MICROPHONE IN (-) 18 - 19 - 20 X793 20DG/YL MICROPHONE FEED 21 X835 20OR/GY SENSOR GROUND 22 Z970 18BK GROUND Component Location - 46 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Voice Activation Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 51 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Winch Relay > Component Information > Description and Operation Winch Relay: Description and Operation DESCRIPTION RELAY PACK Electrical operation of the control assembly consists of four heavy duty relays, a thermal-switch located on the motor armature brush holder and a Low Voltage Interrupt (LVI) located in the control assembly. The thermal-switch interrupts the power-in function and the LVI affects both the power-in and power-out functions and must be reset by allowing the charging circuit voltage to rise above 10 volts for more than 30 seconds. The thermal switch is reset only by allowing the winch motor to cool adequately (about 30 minutes). Relay number 1 and 3 control current flow through the field windings and relay number 2 and 4 supply current to the motor armature. Operation In the power-out mode, relay number 2 and 3 are energized by the remote control switch. Current flows from the positive battery terminal through relay number 3 then through the black motor cable to the number 2 and number 1 field windings. From the black motor cable current then flows through solenoid number 2 to the motor armature to ground. In power-in mode, relay number 1 and 4 are energized. Current again flows from the battery positive cable, but this time current flows through solenoid number 1 then through field winding number 1. Current flowing in the reverse direction through the field windings cause the motor to turn in the opposite direction. From the red motor cable current then flows through relay number 4 to the black cable going to the motor armature to ground. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Winch Relay > Component Information > Service and Repair > Relay Winch Relay: Service and Repair Relay Removal REMOVAL 1. Remove the relay pack (1). See: Relay Pack/Removal 2. Remove the nuts (2 & 3), disconnect the cables and remove the bus straps (4). NOTE: Relay #4 shown, all others similar. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Winch Relay > Component Information > Service and Repair > Relay > Page 57 3. Remove the nuts (1) and disconnect the control wires (2). 4. Slide the relay (1) out of the retaining tab (2) and remove. Installation INSTALLATION NOTE: Relay #4 shown, all others similar. 1. Slide the relay (1) into the retaining tab (2). 2. Install the control wires (2) and install the nuts (1). 3. Tighten the nuts to 3 Nm (25 in. lbs.). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Winch Relay > Component Information > Service and Repair > Relay > Page 58 4. Install the bus straps (4) and connect the cables. 5. Install the nuts (2 & 3) and tighten to 9.5 Nm (85 in. lbs.). 6. Install the relay pack (1). See: Relay Pack/Installation Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Winch Relay > Component Information > Service and Repair > Relay > Page 59 Winch Relay: Service and Repair Relay Pack Removal REMOVAL 1. Disconnect and isolate battery negative cable (3). 2. Remove the winch assembly (2). See: Accessories and Optional Equipment/Winch/Service and Repair/Winch/Removal 3. Remove the nut and disconnect the red battery positive cable (1). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Winch Relay > Component Information > Service and Repair > Relay > Page 60 NOTE: Relay #4 shown, all others similar. 4. Remove the control wire nuts (1) and disconnect the control wires (2) from each relay. Installation INSTALLATION NOTE: Relay #4 shown, all others similar. 1. Install the control wires (2) to all the relays and install the nuts (1). 2. Tighten the nuts to 3 Nm (25 in. lbs.). 3. Install the red battery positive cable (1) and install the switch wire. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Winch Relay > Component Information > Service and Repair > Relay > Page 61 4. Install the nut and tighten to 10 Nm (85 in. lbs.). 5. Install the relay pack cover (1) and install the three screws (2). 6. Install the winch assembly (2). See: Accessories and Optional Equipment/Winch/Service and Repair/Winch/Installation 7. Connect the battery negative cable (3) and verify winch operation. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Keyless Entry Module > Component Information > Locations Keyless Entry Module: Locations Component ID: 213 Component : MODULE-SENTRY KEY REMOTE ENTRY/WCM Connector: Name : MODULE-SENTRY KEY REMOTE ENTRY/WCM Color : BLACK # of pins : 8 Pin Circuit Description 1 G20 20VT/BR IGNITION SWITCH SENSE 2 D508 20WT/GY COM-LIN TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR LAN 3 F20 20PK/WT FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) 4 Z109 20BK/GY GROUND 5 A114 18GY/RD FUSED B(+) 6 D55 20WT/OR CAN B BUS (+) 7 D54 20WT CAN B BUS (-) 8-Component Location - 47 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Keyless Entry Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 66 Component Location - 41 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Keyless Entry Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 67 Component Location - 42 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Keyless Entry Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 68 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Keyless Entry Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 69 Keyless Entry Module: Diagrams Component ID: 213 Component : MODULE-SENTRY KEY REMOTE ENTRY/WCM Connector: Name : MODULE-SENTRY KEY REMOTE ENTRY/WCM Color : BLACK # of pins : 8 Pin Circuit Description 1 G20 20VT/BR IGNITION SWITCH SENSE 2 D508 20WT/GY COM-LIN TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR LAN 3 F20 20PK/WT FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) 4 Z109 20BK/GY GROUND 5 A114 18GY/RD FUSED B(+) 6 D55 20WT/OR CAN B BUS (+) 7 D54 20WT CAN B BUS (-) 8-Component Location - 47 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Keyless Entry Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 70 Component Location - 41 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Keyless Entry Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 71 Component Location - 42 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Keyless Entry Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 72 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Keyless Entry Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Remote Keyless Entry Module Keyless Entry Module: Description and Operation Remote Keyless Entry Module Description DESCRIPTION When an RKE lock message is sent to the instrument cluster, the instrument cluster actuates the door locks, the interior lighting is turned off, the horn chirps (if this feature is enabled), the park lamps flash (if this feature is enabled) and, if the vehicle is so equipped, the Vehicle Theft Security System (VTSS) is armed. When an RKE unlock message is sent to the instrument cluster, the instrument cluster actuates the driver side front door (or all doors if this feature is enabled) unlock, the interior lighting is turned on and, if the vehicle is so equipped, the VTSS is disarmed. When an RKE panic message is sent to the instrument cluster, the instrument cluster actuates the driver side front door (or all doors if this feature is enabled) unlock, the interior lighting is turned on and, if the vehicle is so equipped, the VTSS is disarmed. The panic message will also cause the exterior lamps (including the headlights) to flash, and the horn to sound for about three minutes, or until a second panic message is sent to the instrument cluster. A vehicle speed of about 25.7 Km/h(15 mph) will also cancel the panic event. Operation OPERATION Whenever the vehicle battery power is interrupted, the Remote Keyless Module (RKE) Module will retain all vehicle access codes in its memory. When replacing or adding a key fob transmitter (maximum of 4) a scan tool is required to program the RKE Module to accept the new Vehicle Access Code if a customer owned transmitter is not available. If a functioning transmitter is available, See: Accessories and Optional Equipment/Antitheft and Alarm Systems/Keyless Entry/Keyless Entry Transmitter/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Keyless Entry Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Remote Keyless Entry Module > Page 75 Keyless Entry Module: Description and Operation Sentry Key Remote Entry Module Description DESCRIPTION The Sentry Key REmote Entry Module (SKREEM) (1) is sometimes referred to as the Wireless Control Module (WCM). The SKREEM is the primary component of the Sentry Key Immobilizer System (SKIS). It is also the receiver for the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) system. The SKREEM is located on the right side of the steering column, near the ignition lock cylinder housing and is concealed beneath the steering column shrouds. The molded black plastic housing for the SKREEM has an integral molded plastic halo-like antenna ring (4) that extends from the bottom. When the SKREEM is properly installed on the steering column, the antenna ring is oriented around the circumference of the ignition lock cylinder housing. A single integral connector receptacle (3) is located just behind the antenna ring on the bottom of the SKREEM housing. An integral molded plastic mounting tab (2) on the rear corner of the SKREEM housing has a hole in the center through which a screw passes to secure the unit to the steering column. The SKREEM is connected to the vehicle electrical system through a single take out and connector of the instrument panel wire harness. Two SKREEM modules are used: one for vehicles equipped with RKE only, and one for vehicles equipped with RKE and SKIS. The SKREEM cannot be adjusted or repaired. If ineffective or damaged, the entire SKREEM unit must be replaced. Operation OPERATION The Sentry Key REmote Entry Module (SKREEM) (also known as the Wireless Control Module/WCM) contains a Radio Frequency (RF) transceiver and a microprocessor. The SKREEM transmits RF signals to, and receives RF signals from the Sentry Key transponder through a tuned antenna enclosed within the molded plastic antenna ring integral to the SKREEM housing. If this antenna ring is not mounted properly around the ignition lock cylinder housing, communication problems between the SKREEM and the transponder may arise. These communication problems will result in Sentry Key transponder-related faults. The SKREEM also serves as the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) RF receiver. See: Body and Frame/Locks/Power Locks/Description and Operation/Description . The SKREEM communicates over the Controller Area Network (CAN) data bus with the ElectroMechanical Instrument Cluster (EMIC) (also known as the Cab Compartment Node/CCN), the Powertrain Control Module (PCM)/Engine Control Module (ECM) or the diagnostic scan tool. The SKREEM and the PCM/ECM both use software that includes a rolling code algorithm strategy, which helps to reduce the possibility of unauthorized Sentry Key Immobilizer System (SKIS) disarming. The rolling code algorithm ensures security by preventing an override of the SKIS through the unauthorized substitution of the SKREEM or the PCM/ECM. However, the use of this strategy also means that replacement of either the SKREEM or the PCM/ECM units will require a system initialization procedure to restore system operation. The SKREEM retains in memory the ID numbers of any Sentry Key transponder that is programmed into it. A maximum of eight Sentry Key transponders can be programmed into the SKREEM. For added system security, each SKREEM is programmed with a unique Secret Key code. This code is stored in memory, sent over the CAN data bus to the PCM or ECM, and is encoded to the transponder of every Sentry Key that is programmed into the SKREEM. Therefore, the Secret Key code is a common element that is found in every component of the SKIS. Another security code called a PIN, is used to gain access to the SKREEM Secured Access Mode. The Secured Access Mode is required during service Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Keyless Entry Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Remote Keyless Entry Module > Page 76 to perform the SKIS initialization and Sentry Key transponder programming procedures. The SKREEM also stores the Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) in its memory, which it learns through a CAN data bus message from the PCM or ECM during SKIS initialization. In the event that a SKREEM replacement is required, the Secret Key code can be transferred to the new SKREEM from the PCM or ECM using a diagnostic scan tool and the SKIS initialization procedure. Proper completion of the SKIS initialization will allow the existing Sentry Keys to be programmed into the new SKREEM so that new keys will not be required. In the event that the original Secret Key code cannot be recovered, SKREEM replacement will also require new Sentry Keys. The diagnostic scan tool will alert the technician during the SKIS initialization procedure if new Sentry Keys are required. When the ignition switch is turned to the ON position, the SKREEM transmits an RF signal to excite the transponder in the ignition key. The SKREEM then waits for an RF signal response from the transponder. If the response received identifies the key as valid, the SKREEM sends an electronic valid key message to the PCM/ECM over the CAN bus. If the response received identifies the key as invalid or if no response is received from the key transponder, the SKREEM sends an invalid key message to the PCM/ECM. The PCM/ECM will enable or disable engine operation based upon the status of the SKREEM messages. It is important to note that the default condition in the PCM or ECM is an invalid key ; therefore, if no message is received from the SKREEM by the PCM or ECM, the engine will be disabled and the vehicle immobilized after two seconds of running. The SKREEM also sends security indicator request messages to the EMIC over the CAN data bus to tell the EMIC how to operate the security indicator. The security indicator request message from the SKREEM tells the EMIC to turn the indicator ON for about three seconds each time the ignition switch is turned to the ON position as a bulb test. After completion of the bulb test, the SKREEM sends security indicator request messages to the EMIC to turn the indicator OFF, turn the indicator ON, or to flash the indicator ON and OFF. If the security indicator flashes or stays ON solid after the bulb test, it signifies a SKIS fault. If the SKREEM detects a system malfunction or the SKIS has become ineffective, the security indicator will stay ON solid. If the SKREEM detects an invalid key or if a key transponder-related fault exists, the security indicator will flash. If the vehicle is equipped with the Customer Learn transponder programming feature, the SKREEM will also send messages to the EMIC to flash the security indicator whenever the Customer Learn programming mode is being utilized. . The SKIS performs a self-test each time the ignition switch is turned to the ON position, and will store fault information in the form of a Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) in SKREEM memory if a system malfunction is detected. The hard wired circuits of the SKREEM may be diagnosed using conventional diagnostic tools and procedures. Refer to the appropriate wiring information. However, conventional diagnostic methods will not prove conclusive in the diagnosis of the SKREEM or the electronic controls or communication between other modules and devices that provide some features of the SKIS. The most reliable, efficient, and accurate means to diagnose the SKREEM or the electronic controls and communication related to SKREEM operation requires the use of a diagnostic scan tool. Refer to the appropriate diagnostic information. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Keyless Entry Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 77 Keyless Entry Module: Testing and Inspection REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY MODULE The most reliable, efficient, and accurate means to diagnose the power lock system requires the use of a scan tool and the proper Diagnostic Procedures information. Refer to the appropriate wiring information. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Keyless Entry Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Remote Keyless Entry Module Keyless Entry Module: Service and Repair Remote Keyless Entry Module Removal REMOVAL See: Sentry Key Remote Entry Module/Removal Installation INSTALLATION See: Sentry Key Remote Entry Module/Installation Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Keyless Entry Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Remote Keyless Entry Module > Page 80 Keyless Entry Module: Service and Repair Sentry Key Remote Entry Module Removal REMOVAL WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury on vehicles equipped with airbags, disable the Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, airbag, seat belt tensioner, impact sensor, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the SRS. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment. 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. 2. Remove the screw (2) that secures the tilt steering column knob (1) and remove it from the tilt actuator (3) on the left side of the column. 3. From below the steering column, remove the two outboard screws that secure the upper column shroud (1) to the lower shroud (3). 4. Using hand pressure, push inward on both sides of the upper shroud above the parting line of the lower shroud to release the snap features that secure the two shroud halves to each other. 5. Remove the upper shroud from the lower shroud and the steering column. 6. Remove the one center screw that secures the lower shroud to the steering column (4). 7. Remove the lower shroud from the steering column. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Keyless Entry Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Remote Keyless Entry Module > Page 81 8. Disconnect the wire harness connector (2) from the Sentry Key REmote Entry Module (SKREEM) (1). 9. Remove the screw (3) that secures the SKREEM (1) to the steering column (2). 10. Disengage the antenna ring from around the ignition lock cylinder housing and remove the SKREEM. Installation INSTALLATION WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury on vehicles equipped with airbags, disable the Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, airbag, seat belt tensioner, impact sensor, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the SRS. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Keyless Entry Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Remote Keyless Entry Module > Page 82 1. Position the Sentry Key REmote Entry Module (SKREEM) (1) onto the steering column (2) with the antenna ring oriented around the ignition lock cylinder housing. 2. Install and tighten the screw (3) that secures the SKREEM to the steering column housing. Tighten the screw to 2 Nm (20 in. lbs.). 3. Reconnect the wire harness connector (2) to the SKREEM (1). 4. Position the lower shroud (3) onto the steering column (4). 5. From below the steering column, install and tighten the one center screw that secures the lower shroud to the steering column. Tighten the screw to 2 Nm (20 in. lbs.). 6. Position the upper shroud (1) onto the steering column over the lower shroud. On vehicles equipped with an automatic transmission, be certain to engage the gearshift lever gap hider into the opening in the right side of both shroud halves. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Keyless Entry Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Remote Keyless Entry Module > Page 83 7. Align the snap features on the upper shroud with the receptacles in the lower shroud and apply hand pressure to snap them together. 8. Install and tighten the two outboard screws that secure the upper shroud to the lower shroud. Tighten the screws to 2 Nm (20 in. lbs.). 9. Position the tilt steering column knob (1) onto the tilt adjuster actuator (3) on the left side of the steering column, then install and tighten the screw (2) to secure the knob to the actuator. Tighten the screw to 2 Nm (20 in. lbs.). 10. Reconnect the battery negative cable. NOTE: On vehicles equipped with the optional Sentry Key Immobilizer System (SKIS) if the SKREEM is replaced with a new unit, a diagnostic scan tool MUST be used to initialize the new SKREEM and to program at least two Sentry Key transponders before the vehicle can be operated. See: Accessories and Optional Equipment/Antitheft and Alarm Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Locations Electronic Brake Control Module: Locations Component ID: 201 Component : MODULE-ANTI-LOCK BRAKES Connector: Name : MODULE-ANTI-LOCK BRAKES Color : # of pins : 46 Qualifier : (AWAL) Pin Circuit Description 1-2 A111 16DG/RD FUSED B(+) 3 D65 20WT/LG CAN C BUS (+) 4-5-6-- 7-8-9-10 - 11 - 12 B9 20DG/LG LEFT FRONT WHEEL SPEED SENSOR (+) 13 B8 20DG/TN LEFT FRONT WHEEL SPEED SENSOR (-) 14 B401 20DG/BR TRAILER TOW DAMPING RELAY CONTROL 15 - 16 Z107 16BK/DG GROUND 17 - 18 D64 20WT/LB CAN C BUS (-) 19 - 20 D465 20WT/GY DYNAMICS SENSOR HIGH DATA LINK 21 - 22 - 23 - 24 - 25 - 26 B7 20DG/VT RIGHT FRONT WHEEL SPEED SENSOR (+) 27 B6 20DG/WT RIGHT FRONT WHEEL SPEED SENSOR (-) 28 - 29 - 30 - 31 A107 12TN/RD FUSED B(+) 32 F960 20PK/LG FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) 33 - 34 D464 20WT/OR DYNAMICS SENSOR LOW DATA LINK Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 88 35 - 36 - 37 - 38 - 39 - 40 - 41 B3 20DG/YL REAR WHEEL SPEED SENSOR (-) 41 B22 20DG/YL REAR WHEEL SPEED SENSOR (-) 42 B4 20DG/GY REAR WHEEL SPEED SENSOR (+) 42 B222 20DG/WT REAR WHEEL SPEED SENSOR (+) 43 B2 20DG/LB RIGHT REAR WHEEL SPEED SENSOR (+) 44 B1 20DG/OR RIGHT REAR WHEEL SPEED SENSOR (-) 45 Z127 12BK/DG GROUND 46 - Component Location - 32 Component Location - 30 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 89 Connector: Name : MODULE-ANTI-LOCK BRAKES Color : BLACK # of pins : 14 Qualifier : (RWAL) Pin Circuit Description 1 B222 18DG/WT REAR WHEEL SPEED SENSOR (+) 2 D65 18WT/LG CAN C BUS (+) 3 D64 18WT/LB CAN C BUS (-) 4 F960 20PK/LG FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 90 5 B9 18DG/LG LEFT FRONT WHEEL SPEED SENSOR (+) 6 Z107 16BK/DG GROUND 7 A111 16DG/RD FUSED B(+) 8 B22 18DG/YL REAR WHEEL SPEED SENSOR (-) 9-10 B8 18DG/TN LEFT FRONT WHEEL SPEED SENSOR (-) 11 - 12 - 13 - 14 - Component Location - 32 Component Location - 30 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 91 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 92 Electronic Brake Control Module: Diagrams Component ID: 201 Component : MODULE-ANTI-LOCK BRAKES Connector: Name : MODULE-ANTI-LOCK BRAKES Color : # of pins : 46 Qualifier : (AWAL) Pin Circuit Description 1-2 A111 16DG/RD FUSED B(+) 3 D65 20WT/LG CAN C BUS (+) 4-5-6-- 7-8-9-10 - 11 - 12 B9 20DG/LG LEFT FRONT WHEEL SPEED SENSOR (+) 13 B8 20DG/TN LEFT FRONT WHEEL SPEED SENSOR (-) 14 B401 20DG/BR TRAILER TOW DAMPING RELAY CONTROL 15 - 16 Z107 16BK/DG GROUND 17 - 18 D64 20WT/LB CAN C BUS (-) 19 - 20 D465 20WT/GY DYNAMICS SENSOR HIGH DATA LINK 21 - 22 - 23 - 24 - 25 - 26 B7 20DG/VT RIGHT FRONT WHEEL SPEED SENSOR (+) 27 B6 20DG/WT RIGHT FRONT WHEEL SPEED SENSOR (-) 28 - 29 - 30 - 31 A107 12TN/RD FUSED B(+) 32 F960 20PK/LG FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) 33 - 34 D464 20WT/OR DYNAMICS SENSOR LOW DATA LINK Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 93 35 - 36 - 37 - 38 - 39 - 40 - 41 B3 20DG/YL REAR WHEEL SPEED SENSOR (-) 41 B22 20DG/YL REAR WHEEL SPEED SENSOR (-) 42 B4 20DG/GY REAR WHEEL SPEED SENSOR (+) 42 B222 20DG/WT REAR WHEEL SPEED SENSOR (+) 43 B2 20DG/LB RIGHT REAR WHEEL SPEED SENSOR (+) 44 B1 20DG/OR RIGHT REAR WHEEL SPEED SENSOR (-) 45 Z127 12BK/DG GROUND 46 - Component Location - 32 Component Location - 30 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 94 Connector: Name : MODULE-ANTI-LOCK BRAKES Color : BLACK # of pins : 14 Qualifier : (RWAL) Pin Circuit Description 1 B222 18DG/WT REAR WHEEL SPEED SENSOR (+) 2 D65 18WT/LG CAN C BUS (+) 3 D64 18WT/LB CAN C BUS (-) 4 F960 20PK/LG FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 95 5 B9 18DG/LG LEFT FRONT WHEEL SPEED SENSOR (+) 6 Z107 16BK/DG GROUND 7 A111 16DG/RD FUSED B(+) 8 B22 18DG/YL REAR WHEEL SPEED SENSOR (-) 9-10 B8 18DG/TN LEFT FRONT WHEEL SPEED SENSOR (-) 11 - 12 - 13 - 14 - Component Location - 32 Component Location - 30 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 96 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Electronic Brake Control Module: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The Antilock Brake Module (ABM) (2) is mounted to the Hydraulic Control Unit (HCU) (3) and operates the ABS system. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 99 Electronic Brake Control Module: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The ABM voltage source is through the ignition switch in the RUN position. The ABM contains a self check program that illuminates the ABS warning light when a system fault is detected. Faults are stored in a diagnostic program memory and are accessible with the scan tool. ABS faults remain in memory until cleared, or until after the vehicle is started approximately 50 times. Stored faults are not erased if the battery is disconnected. NOTE: If the ABM is being replaced with a new ABM is must be reprogrammed with the use of a scan tool. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Electronic Brake Control Module: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL 1. Remove the negative battery cable from the battery. 2. Pull up on the ABM harness connector release and remove connector. 3. Remove the ABM mounting bolts. 4. Remove the pump connector from the ABM. 5. Remove the ABM from the HCU. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 102 Electronic Brake Control Module: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION NOTE: If the ABM is being replaced with a new ABM is must be reprogrammed with the use of a scan tool. 1. Install ABM to the HCU. 2. Install the pump connector to the ABM. 3. Install mounting bolts. Tighten to 2 Nm (16 in. lbs.). 4. Install the wiring harness connector to the ABM and push down on the release to secure the connector. 5. Install negative battery cable to the battery. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Horn Relay > Component Information > Locations Horn Relay: Locations Dodge Ram Trucks from 2006 to 2009, do not use a horn relay. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Horn Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 107 Horn Relay: Description and Operation Dodge Ram Trucks from 2006 to 2009, do not use a horn relay. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Parking Lamp Relay > Component Information > Locations Parking Lamp Relay: Locations Dodge Ram Trucks, 2006-2009 all, do not use a parking lamp relay. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Parking Lamp Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 111 Parking Lamp Relay: Description and Operation Dodge Ram Trucks, 2006-2009 all, do not use a parking lamp relay. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lighting Relay > Component Information > Locations Trailer Lighting Relay: Locations Dodge Ram Trucks, 2006-2009 all,Trailer Tow lamp relay is not serviceable. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lighting Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 115 Trailer Lighting Relay: Diagrams Dodge Ram Trucks, 2006-2009 all, do not use a trailer tow relay. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Power Distribution Module: > 08-007-08A > Jul > 08 > Antitheft System - Engine No Crank/No Start Condition Power Distribution Module: Customer Interest Antitheft System - Engine No Crank/No Start Condition NUMBER: 08-007-08 REV. A GROUP: Electrical DATE: July 04,2008 THIS BULLETIN SUPERSEDES TECHNICAL SERVICE BULLETIN 08-007-08, DATED MARCH 04, 2008. THIS IS A COMPLETE REVISION AND NO ASTERISKS HAVE BEEN USED TO HIGHLIGHT REVISIONS. DO NOT ORDER PART NUMBER 05026070AP UNTIL JULY 21, 2008. ALL OTHER PART NUMBERS ARE AVAILABLE NOW. SUBJECT: No Engine Crank Or No Engine Start Due To Electronic Lockup Of The WCM / SKREEM OVERVIEW: This bulletin involves the replacement of the Wireless Control Module (WCM), and if equipped, the replacement of the Electric Steering Column Lock (ELV). The WCM is also referred to as the Sentry Key Remote Entry Module (SKREEM). MODELS: 2007 - 2008 (DR/DH/D1/DC/DM) Ram Truck (1500/2500/3500/4500/5500) 2007 - 2008 (JK) Wrangler 2007 - 2008 (J1) Sebring (China) 2007 - 2008 (JS) Avenger/Sebring 2007 - 2008 (KA) Nitro 2008 (KK) Liberty/Cherokee 2007 - 2008 (MK) Compass/Patriot 2007 - 2008 (PM) Caliber 2006 - 2008 (PT) Chrysler PT Cruiser NOTE: This bulletin applies to vehicles built on or before May 05, 2008 (MDH 0505XX). SYMPTOM/CONDITION: The customer will experience a no engine crank AND a no engine start condition. Also, the remote keyless entry (RKE) system will not operate. This condition may be due to an electrostatic discharge (ESD) from the ignition key into the Wireless Control Module (WCM), causing the WCM to electronically lockup. This condition may occur more frequently in dry and/or cold weather conditions where a sufficient electrostatic charge is more easily produced. This condition is corrected by the replacement of the WCM. DIAGNOSIS: 1. With the condition present (i.e. the vehicle in the no crank / no start condition), connect the StarSCAN(R) scan tool to the vehicle. 2. Turn the ignition switch to the "ON position, and power up the StarSCAN(R). 3. If the WCM is electronically locked up, the StarSCAN(R) will display the WCM as being "off bus". 4. If the no crank / no start condition is present, and the WCM is "off bus", then reset the WCM by temporarily removing the IOD fuse (with the key out of the ignition switch), wait for 10 seconds and then reinstall the IOD fuse. 5. With the IOD fuse reset having been performed, verify that the vehicle will now crank, start, and run. 6. If the condition is temporarily corrected by performing the above steps, and if the part number of the WCM is earlier than the part number of the WCM listed in the part reference table in the Service Bulletin Parts Required Section below, then perform the Repair Procedure. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Power Distribution Module: > 08-007-08A > Jul > 08 > Antitheft System - Engine No Crank/No Start Condition > Page 125 PARTS REQUIRED: NOTE: The part numbers listed in the following part reference table are to be used as A GUIDE to help determine if the WCM, that is currently in the vehicle, may require replacement. If it is determined that the WCM requires replacement, then ALWAYS REFER TO THE PARTS MANUAL to determine the correct WCM for the specific vehicle in question. In some earlier model years, the WCM may rule (supersede) to one of the part numbers listed in the table. ALWAYS REFER TO THE PARTS MANUAL (not the part reference table) to determine the correct part number ruling (supercedence / substitution). MAKE CERTAIN THAT THE CORRECT WCM IS ORDERED THE FIRST TIME FOR THE SPECIFIC VEHICLE IN QUESTION. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Power Distribution Module: > 08-007-08A > Jul > 08 > Antitheft System - Engine No Crank/No Start Condition > Page 126 REPAIR PROCEDURE: NOTE: If the vehicle (a JS model vehicle in certain International markets) is equipped with an Electric Steering Column Lock (ELV), then the WCM and the ELV must be replaced. Replace the WCM and then the ELV. Next program the WCM and at least one (1) ignition key BEFORE programming the ELV. IMPORTANT: Not following this repair process correctly will cause the new ELV to fail. NOTE: Insert the ignition key into the ignition lock cylinder. This will move the shaft lock module locking bolt to the unlocked position. LEAVE the key in the lock cylinder while the shaft lock module is being removed. 1. If vehicle is equipped with a Steering Shaft Lock Module (JS - Avenger I Stratus - some International Markets), then the Shaft Lock Module will require replacement. From the Service Info tab select: 8 - Electrical > Vehicle Theft Security - Security Information > Module, Shaft Lock > Removal and Installation. NOTE: The shaft lock module cannot be removed from the steering column while the locking bolt is in the locked position without irreversibly damaging the column. Before attempting service, the ignition key must have been inserted into the ignition lock cylinder. Then rotate the steering wheel from side to side. If the steering wheel can be rotated, the locking bolt is in the unlocked position. Leave the key in the ignition lock cylinder until shaft lock module removal has been completed. If the steering wheel cannot be rotated, test and repair the wiring circuits between the module and the ignition switch as required. If no problem is found in these circuits, the module has failed with the locking bolt in the locked position and both the module and the steering column must be replaced with new units. 2. Replace the WCM/SKREEM. Refer to TechCONNECT for detailed service information. From the Service Info tab select: 8 - Electrical > Vehicle Theft Security - Service Information > Module, Sentry Key Remote Entry > Removal and Installation. NOTE: Obtain the vehicle PIN number prior to programming WCM/SKREEM or ELV. NOTE: If during the following steps the PIN number is properly entered but is rejected, then reenter the PIN number again until it is accepted. 3. After both the WCM/SKREEM and the ELV (if equipped) have been replaced, Program the WCM/SKREEM as follows: a. Turn the ignition key to the ON position, (Engine Off) b. Connect the scan tool (StarSCAN(R)) to the data link connector and turn the ignition to the RUN position, (engine off). c. Select "ECU View." d. Scroll down and select "WCM" in the list of modules. e. Select "Misc. Functions." f. Scroll to "WCM Replaced." g. Press "Start". h. Press "Next". i. Select "Show Keyboard". j. Enter the vehicle PIN number. k. Select "Next". l. Verify PIN is correct. m. Select "Next". n. Follow on-screen prompts to complete WCM function programing for Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPM) and so on. 0. Turn the ignition key to the OFF position. Wait 30 seconds. p. Turn the ignition key to the ON position, (Engine Off) Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Power Distribution Module: > 08-007-08A > Jul > 08 > Antitheft System - Engine No Crank/No Start Condition > Page 127 q. Select "ECU View". r. Scroll down and select "WCM" in the list of modules. s. Select "Misc. Functions." t. Select "Program Ign. Keys" and follow on-screen prompts. u. Select "Complete". v. Verify ignition key will start vehicle and the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) functions operate. CAUTION: If the vehicle is equipped with a Shaft Lock Module (used in some International Markets on JS model vehicles), then at least one (1 ignition key must have been programmed to the new WCM BEFORE the new Shaft Lock Module is "married" to the new WCM. 4. Is the vehicle equipped with Steering Shaft Lock Module (ELV)? a. Yes >> Proceed to Step # 5. b. No >>Repair is complete. 5. Program the ELV as follows; a. Select "ECU View". b. Scroll down and select "WCM" in the list of modules. c. Select "Misc. Functions". d. Scroll to "ELV Replaced." e. Press "Start". f. When complete, verify steering shaft lock mechanism is operating. Remove and insert key from the ignition lock cylinder and listen for solenoid "click at lower end of column. POLICY: Reimbursable within the provisions of the warranty. TIME ALLOWANCE: Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Power Distribution Module: > 08-007-08A > Jul > 08 > Antitheft System - Engine No Crank/No Start Condition > Page 128 FAILURE CODE: Disclaimer: This bulletin is supplied as technical information only and is not an authorization for repair. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Power Distribution Module: > 08-007-08A > Jul > 08 > Antitheft System - Engine No Crank/No Start Condition Power Distribution Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Antitheft System - Engine No Crank/No Start Condition NUMBER: 08-007-08 REV. A GROUP: Electrical DATE: July 04,2008 THIS BULLETIN SUPERSEDES TECHNICAL SERVICE BULLETIN 08-007-08, DATED MARCH 04, 2008. THIS IS A COMPLETE REVISION AND NO ASTERISKS HAVE BEEN USED TO HIGHLIGHT REVISIONS. DO NOT ORDER PART NUMBER 05026070AP UNTIL JULY 21, 2008. ALL OTHER PART NUMBERS ARE AVAILABLE NOW. SUBJECT: No Engine Crank Or No Engine Start Due To Electronic Lockup Of The WCM / SKREEM OVERVIEW: This bulletin involves the replacement of the Wireless Control Module (WCM), and if equipped, the replacement of the Electric Steering Column Lock (ELV). The WCM is also referred to as the Sentry Key Remote Entry Module (SKREEM). MODELS: 2007 - 2008 (DR/DH/D1/DC/DM) Ram Truck (1500/2500/3500/4500/5500) 2007 - 2008 (JK) Wrangler 2007 - 2008 (J1) Sebring (China) 2007 - 2008 (JS) Avenger/Sebring 2007 - 2008 (KA) Nitro 2008 (KK) Liberty/Cherokee 2007 - 2008 (MK) Compass/Patriot 2007 - 2008 (PM) Caliber 2006 - 2008 (PT) Chrysler PT Cruiser NOTE: This bulletin applies to vehicles built on or before May 05, 2008 (MDH 0505XX). SYMPTOM/CONDITION: The customer will experience a no engine crank AND a no engine start condition. Also, the remote keyless entry (RKE) system will not operate. This condition may be due to an electrostatic discharge (ESD) from the ignition key into the Wireless Control Module (WCM), causing the WCM to electronically lockup. This condition may occur more frequently in dry and/or cold weather conditions where a sufficient electrostatic charge is more easily produced. This condition is corrected by the replacement of the WCM. DIAGNOSIS: 1. With the condition present (i.e. the vehicle in the no crank / no start condition), connect the StarSCAN(R) scan tool to the vehicle. 2. Turn the ignition switch to the "ON position, and power up the StarSCAN(R). 3. If the WCM is electronically locked up, the StarSCAN(R) will display the WCM as being "off bus". 4. If the no crank / no start condition is present, and the WCM is "off bus", then reset the WCM by temporarily removing the IOD fuse (with the key out of the ignition switch), wait for 10 seconds and then reinstall the IOD fuse. 5. With the IOD fuse reset having been performed, verify that the vehicle will now crank, start, and run. 6. If the condition is temporarily corrected by performing the above steps, and if the part number of the WCM is earlier than the part number of the WCM listed in the part reference table in the Service Bulletin Parts Required Section below, then perform the Repair Procedure. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Power Distribution Module: > 08-007-08A > Jul > 08 > Antitheft System - Engine No Crank/No Start Condition > Page 134 PARTS REQUIRED: NOTE: The part numbers listed in the following part reference table are to be used as A GUIDE to help determine if the WCM, that is currently in the vehicle, may require replacement. If it is determined that the WCM requires replacement, then ALWAYS REFER TO THE PARTS MANUAL to determine the correct WCM for the specific vehicle in question. In some earlier model years, the WCM may rule (supersede) to one of the part numbers listed in the table. ALWAYS REFER TO THE PARTS MANUAL (not the part reference table) to determine the correct part number ruling (supercedence / substitution). MAKE CERTAIN THAT THE CORRECT WCM IS ORDERED THE FIRST TIME FOR THE SPECIFIC VEHICLE IN QUESTION. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Power Distribution Module: > 08-007-08A > Jul > 08 > Antitheft System - Engine No Crank/No Start Condition > Page 135 REPAIR PROCEDURE: NOTE: If the vehicle (a JS model vehicle in certain International markets) is equipped with an Electric Steering Column Lock (ELV), then the WCM and the ELV must be replaced. Replace the WCM and then the ELV. Next program the WCM and at least one (1) ignition key BEFORE programming the ELV. IMPORTANT: Not following this repair process correctly will cause the new ELV to fail. NOTE: Insert the ignition key into the ignition lock cylinder. This will move the shaft lock module locking bolt to the unlocked position. LEAVE the key in the lock cylinder while the shaft lock module is being removed. 1. If vehicle is equipped with a Steering Shaft Lock Module (JS - Avenger I Stratus - some International Markets), then the Shaft Lock Module will require replacement. From the Service Info tab select: 8 - Electrical > Vehicle Theft Security - Security Information > Module, Shaft Lock > Removal and Installation. NOTE: The shaft lock module cannot be removed from the steering column while the locking bolt is in the locked position without irreversibly damaging the column. Before attempting service, the ignition key must have been inserted into the ignition lock cylinder. Then rotate the steering wheel from side to side. If the steering wheel can be rotated, the locking bolt is in the unlocked position. Leave the key in the ignition lock cylinder until shaft lock module removal has been completed. If the steering wheel cannot be rotated, test and repair the wiring circuits between the module and the ignition switch as required. If no problem is found in these circuits, the module has failed with the locking bolt in the locked position and both the module and the steering column must be replaced with new units. 2. Replace the WCM/SKREEM. Refer to TechCONNECT for detailed service information. From the Service Info tab select: 8 - Electrical > Vehicle Theft Security - Service Information > Module, Sentry Key Remote Entry > Removal and Installation. NOTE: Obtain the vehicle PIN number prior to programming WCM/SKREEM or ELV. NOTE: If during the following steps the PIN number is properly entered but is rejected, then reenter the PIN number again until it is accepted. 3. After both the WCM/SKREEM and the ELV (if equipped) have been replaced, Program the WCM/SKREEM as follows: a. Turn the ignition key to the ON position, (Engine Off) b. Connect the scan tool (StarSCAN(R)) to the data link connector and turn the ignition to the RUN position, (engine off). c. Select "ECU View." d. Scroll down and select "WCM" in the list of modules. e. Select "Misc. Functions." f. Scroll to "WCM Replaced." g. Press "Start". h. Press "Next". i. Select "Show Keyboard". j. Enter the vehicle PIN number. k. Select "Next". l. Verify PIN is correct. m. Select "Next". n. Follow on-screen prompts to complete WCM function programing for Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPM) and so on. 0. Turn the ignition key to the OFF position. Wait 30 seconds. p. Turn the ignition key to the ON position, (Engine Off) Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Power Distribution Module: > 08-007-08A > Jul > 08 > Antitheft System - Engine No Crank/No Start Condition > Page 136 q. Select "ECU View". r. Scroll down and select "WCM" in the list of modules. s. Select "Misc. Functions." t. Select "Program Ign. Keys" and follow on-screen prompts. u. Select "Complete". v. Verify ignition key will start vehicle and the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) functions operate. CAUTION: If the vehicle is equipped with a Shaft Lock Module (used in some International Markets on JS model vehicles), then at least one (1 ignition key must have been programmed to the new WCM BEFORE the new Shaft Lock Module is "married" to the new WCM. 4. Is the vehicle equipped with Steering Shaft Lock Module (ELV)? a. Yes >> Proceed to Step # 5. b. No >>Repair is complete. 5. Program the ELV as follows; a. Select "ECU View". b. Scroll down and select "WCM" in the list of modules. c. Select "Misc. Functions". d. Scroll to "ELV Replaced." e. Press "Start". f. When complete, verify steering shaft lock mechanism is operating. Remove and insert key from the ignition lock cylinder and listen for solenoid "click at lower end of column. POLICY: Reimbursable within the provisions of the warranty. TIME ALLOWANCE: Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Power Distribution Module: > 08-007-08A > Jul > 08 > Antitheft System - Engine No Crank/No Start Condition > Page 137 FAILURE CODE: Disclaimer: This bulletin is supplied as technical information only and is not an authorization for repair. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 199 Power Distribution Module: Locations Component ID 199 Component ID: 199 Component : MODULE-TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER Connector: Name : MODULE-TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER C1 Color : LT. GRAY # of pins : 14 Pin Circuit Description 1 F1 20PK/WT FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (OFF-RUN-START) 2 T41 18YL/DB TRS T41 SIGNAL (P/N) 2 T41 20YL/DB TRS T41 SIGNAL (P/N) 2 T752 20DG/OR STARTER SOLENOID CONTROL 3-4 K31 20BR FUEL PUMP CONTROL 5 W7 20BR/GY WIPER PARK SWITCH SENSE 6-7-8 G932 20VT/TN WASHER FLUID SWITCH RETURN 9 W1 20BR/TN WASHER FLUID SWITCH SENSE 10 T515 20YL/DB TRANSMISSION CONTROL 11 G70 20VT/LB HOOD AJAR SWITCH SENSE 12 - 13 - 14 - Component Location - 33 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 199 > Page 140 Component Location - 34 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 199 > Page 141 Connector: Name : MODULE-TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER C10 Color : LT. GRAY # of pins : 22 Pin Circuit Description 1 K342 16BR/WT ASD CONTROL OUTPUT 2 A405 18RD/DB FUSED B(+) 3 A941 18RD FUSED B(+) 4-5 A104 20YL/RD FUSED B(+) Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 199 > Page 142 6 A310 16RD/LB FUSED B(+) 7 C15 14DB/WT REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER CONTROL OUTPUT 8 F12 14PK/RD FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) 9 T16 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT 10 - 11 X22 18GY/LB HORN CONTROL OUTPUT 12 W3 18BR/WT WIPER LOW SPEED CONTROL OUTPUT 13 Z971 18BK GROUND 14 C16 18DB/GY HEATED MIRROR CONTROL OUTPUT 15 A212 20RD/OR FUSED B(+) 16 - - 17 A121 14RD/YL FUSED B(+) 18 A109 16OR/RD FUEL PUMP CONTROL OUTPUT 19 X21 18GY/YL HORN CONTROL OUTPUT 20 Z953 20BK GROUND 21 T41 20YL/DB TRS T41 SIGNAL (P/N) 22 A400 14TN/RD FUSED B(+) Component Location - 33 Component Location - 34 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 199 > Page 143 Connector: Name : MODULE-TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER C2 Color : BLACK # of pins : 13 Pin Circuit Description 1-2 W10 20BR WASHER PUMP MOTOR CONTROL 3 F20 20PK/WT IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) 4 A72 20RD/OR ADJUSTABLE PEDALS OUTPUT 5-- Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 199 > Page 144 6-7-8-9 G304 20VT/DB FRONT AXLE LOCK CONTROL 10 C13 20LB A/C CLUTCH CONTROL 10 C13 20LB/OR A/C CLUTCH CONTROL 11 K51 20BR/WT ASD CONTROL 12 B20 20DG/OR BRAKE FLUID LEVEL SWITCH SENSE 13 Z117 20BK/WT GROUND Component Location - 33 Component Location - 34 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 199 > Page 145 Connector: Name : MODULE-TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER C3 Color : BLACK # of pins : 22 Pin Circuit Description 1 A209 10RD FUSED B(+) 2-3 F984 18PK/YL FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-ACC) 4-5 F983 20PK/YL FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-ACC) Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 199 > Page 146 6 A205 18RD/OR FUSED B(+) 7-8 A944 20RD FUSED B(+) 9 A116 16YL/RD FUSED B(+) 10 A118 18RD/OR FUSED B(+) 11 - 12 A918 20RD FUSED B(+) 12 A918 16RD FUSED B(+) 13 F921 20PK/LB FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN) 14 F504 20GY/PK FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN) 15 F202 20PK/GY FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) 16 A930 16RD FUSED B(+) 17 F942 10PK/LG FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) 18 L673 18YL TRAILER TOW LEFT TURN RELAY OUTPUT 19 L674 18LG TRAILER TOW RIGHT TURN RELAY OUTPUT 20 F960 20PK/LG FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) 21 F21 20PK/DG FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) 22 F12 14PK/RD FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) Component Location - 33 Component Location - 34 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 199 > Page 147 Connector: Name : MODULE-TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER C4 Color : LT. GRAY # of pins : 13 Pin Circuit Description 1 Z118 16BK/YL GROUND 2 T102 16YL SHIFT MOTOR CONTROL A 3 T101 16DG SHIFT MOTOR CONTROL B 4-5-- Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 199 > Page 148 6-7-8 T300 20YL/GY T-CASE MOTOR BRAKE SIGNAL 9 T103 20YL/OR 5 VOLT SUPPLY 10 D201 20WT/DG MODE SENSOR A 11 G180 20VT/YL SENSOR RETURN 12 A880 20DB/RD FUSED B(+) 13 G303 20VT/DG FRONT AXLE LOCK SIGNAL Component Location - 33 Component Location - 34 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 199 > Page 149 Connector: Name : MODULE-TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER C5 Color : BLACK # of pins : 10 Pin Circuit Description 1 L61 20WT/LG LEFT FRONT TURN LAMP DRIVER 2 L60 20WT/TN RIGHT FRONT TURN LAMP DRIVER 3 L34 20WT/GY RIGHT HIGH BEAM DRIVER 4 L43 20WT/DB LEFT LOW BEAM DRIVER 5 T340 20DG/VT INPUT SPEED SENSOR 2 (N3) SIGNAL Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 199 > Page 150 6-7-8 G31 20VT/LG AAT SIGNAL 9 G930 20VT/TN AAT RETURN 10 T71 20YL/OR INPUT SPEED SENSOR 2 (N3) RETURN Component Location - 33 Component Location - 34 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 199 > Page 151 Connector: Name : MODULE-TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER C6 Color : BROWN # of pins : 16 Pin Circuit Description 1 D65 20WT/LG CAN C BUS (+) 2 D52 20WT/LB DIAGNOSTIC CAN C (+) 3 D55 20WT/OR CAN B BUS (+) 4 L63 20WT/DG LEFT REAR TURN LAMP DRIVER 5-- Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 199 > Page 152 6 L62 20WT/YL RIGHT REAR TURN LAMP DRIVER 7 L50 20WT/TN BRAKE LAMP SWITCH OUTPUT 8-9 D64 20WT/LB CAN C BUS (-) 10 D51 20WT/BR DIAGNOSTIC CAN C (-) 11 D54 20WT CAN B BUS (-) 12 - 13 - 14 - 15 T70 20YL INPUT SPEED SENSOR 1 (N2) SIGNAL 16 T341 20DG/VT INPUT SPEED SENSOR 1 (N2) RETURN Component Location - 33 Component Location - 34 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 199 > Page 153 Connector: Name : MODULE-TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER C7 Color : BLUE # of pins : 14 Pin Circuit Description 1-2-3 L44 20WT/TN RIGHT LOW BEAM DRIVER 4 L33 20WT/LG LEFT HIGH BEAM DRIVER 5-- Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 199 > Page 154 6-7 C818 20LB/OR A/C PRESSURE 5 VOLT SUPPLY 8 L10 20WT/GY FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN) 9-10 - 11 - 12 C18 20LB/BR A/C PRESSURE SIGNAL 13 C918 20BK/LB A/C PRESSURE GROUND 14 T751 20YL IGNITION START Component Location - 33 Component Location - 34 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 199 > Page 155 Connector: Name : MODULE-TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER C8 Color : LT. GRAY # of pins : 12 Pin Circuit Description 1 A916 16RD FUSED B(+) Pin Circuit Description 1-2 A919 20RD FUSED B(+) Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 199 > Page 156 3 A106 20LB/RD FUSED B(+) 4 F201 20PK/OR FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) 5 F100 20PK/VT FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN) 6 A100 14RD/VT FUSED B(+) 7 A210 12OR/RD FUSED B(+) 8 A940 18RD FUSED B(+) 9 A103 18GY/RD FUSED B(+) 10 L89 18WT/YL FOG LAMP CONTROL OUTPUT 11 L1 18WT/LG BACKUP LAMP FEED 12 A961 14RD FUEL HEATER CONTROL OUTPUT 12 C123 12LB/WT CONDENSER FAN CONTROL OUTPUT Component Location - 33 Component Location - 34 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 199 > Page 157 Connector: Name : MODULE-TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER C9 Color : BLACK # of pins : 12 Pin Circuit Description 1 A111 16DG/RD FUSED B(+) 2 T750 14YL/GY STARTER MOTOR CONTROL OUTPUT 3 C3 20DB/YL A/C CLUTCH CONTROL OUTPUT 4 W4 16BR/OR WIPER MOTOR HIGH SPEED FEED 5 A114 18GY/RD FUSED B(+) Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 199 > Page 158 6 F30 10PK/YL FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-ACC) 7-8 L7 20WT/YL FUSED PARK LAMP FEED 9 L678 18BR FUSED PARK LAMP FEED 10 L70 20WT/GY FUSED PARK LAMP FEED 11 - 12 A107 12TN/RD FUSED B(+) Component Location - 33 Component Location - 34 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 199 > Page 159 Connector: Name : MODULE-TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER-EYELET Color : # of pins : 1 Qualifier : (DIESEL) Pin Circuit Description 1 A0 6RD B(+) Component Location - 33 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 199 > Page 160 Component Location - 34 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 199 > Page 161 Connector: Name : MODULE-TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER-EYELET Color : # of pins : 1 Qualifier : (GAS) Pin Circuit Description 1 A11 8LB B(+) Pin Circuit Description 1 A0 6RD B(+) Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 199 > Page 162 Component Location - 33 Component Location - 34 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 199 > Page 163 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 199 > Page 164 Power Distribution Module: Locations Component ID 215 Component ID: 215 Component : MODULE-TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER Connector: Name : MODULE-TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER C1 Color : LT. GRAY # of pins : 14 Pin Circuit Description 1 F1 20PK/WT FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (OFF-RUN-START) 2 T41 18YL/DB TRS T41 SIGNAL (P/N) 2 T41 20YL/DB TRS T41 SIGNAL (P/N) 2 T752 20DG/OR STARTER SOLENOID CONTROL 3-4 K31 20BR FUEL PUMP CONTROL 5 W7 20BR/GY WIPER PARK SWITCH SENSE 6-7-8 G932 20VT/TN WASHER FLUID SWITCH RETURN 9 W1 20BR/TN WASHER FLUID SWITCH SENSE 10 T515 20YL/DB TRANSMISSION CONTROL 11 G70 20VT/LB HOOD AJAR SWITCH SENSE 12 - 13 - 14 - Component Location - 33 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 199 > Page 165 Component Location - 34 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 199 > Page 166 Connector: Name : MODULE-TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER C10 Color : LT. GRAY # of pins : 22 Pin Circuit Description 1 K342 16BR/WT ASD CONTROL OUTPUT 2 A405 18RD/DB FUSED B(+) 3 A941 18RD FUSED B(+) 4-5 A104 20YL/RD FUSED B(+) Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 199 > Page 167 6 A310 16RD/LB FUSED B(+) 7 C15 14DB/WT REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER CONTROL OUTPUT 8 F12 14PK/RD FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) 9 T16 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT 10 - 11 X22 18GY/LB HORN CONTROL OUTPUT 12 W3 18BR/WT WIPER LOW SPEED CONTROL OUTPUT 13 Z971 18BK GROUND 14 C16 18DB/GY HEATED MIRROR CONTROL OUTPUT 15 A212 20RD/OR FUSED B(+) 16 - - 17 A121 14RD/YL FUSED B(+) 18 A109 16OR/RD FUEL PUMP CONTROL OUTPUT 19 X21 18GY/YL HORN CONTROL OUTPUT 20 Z953 20BK GROUND 21 T41 20YL/DB TRS T41 SIGNAL (P/N) 22 A400 14TN/RD FUSED B(+) Component Location - 33 Component Location - 34 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 199 > Page 168 Connector: Name : MODULE-TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER C2 Color : BLACK # of pins : 13 Pin Circuit Description 1-2 W10 20BR WASHER PUMP MOTOR CONTROL 3 F20 20PK/WT IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) 4 A72 20RD/OR ADJUSTABLE PEDALS OUTPUT 5-- Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 199 > Page 169 6-7-8-9 G304 20VT/DB FRONT AXLE LOCK CONTROL 10 C13 20LB A/C CLUTCH CONTROL 10 C13 20LB/OR A/C CLUTCH CONTROL 11 K51 20BR/WT ASD CONTROL 12 B20 20DG/OR BRAKE FLUID LEVEL SWITCH SENSE 13 Z117 20BK/WT GROUND Component Location - 33 Component Location - 34 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 199 > Page 170 Connector: Name : MODULE-TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER C3 Color : BLACK # of pins : 22 Pin Circuit Description 1 A209 10RD FUSED B(+) 2-3 F984 18PK/YL FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-ACC) 4-5 F983 20PK/YL FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-ACC) Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 199 > Page 171 6 A205 18RD/OR FUSED B(+) 7-8 A944 20RD FUSED B(+) 9 A116 16YL/RD FUSED B(+) 10 A118 18RD/OR FUSED B(+) 11 - 12 A918 20RD FUSED B(+) 12 A918 16RD FUSED B(+) 13 F921 20PK/LB FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN) 14 F504 20GY/PK FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN) 15 F202 20PK/GY FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) 16 A930 16RD FUSED B(+) 17 F942 10PK/LG FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) 18 L673 18YL TRAILER TOW LEFT TURN RELAY OUTPUT 19 L674 18LG TRAILER TOW RIGHT TURN RELAY OUTPUT 20 F960 20PK/LG FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) 21 F21 20PK/DG FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) 22 F12 14PK/RD FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) Component Location - 33 Component Location - 34 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 199 > Page 172 Connector: Name : MODULE-TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER C4 Color : LT. GRAY # of pins : 13 Pin Circuit Description 1 Z118 16BK/YL GROUND 2 T102 16YL SHIFT MOTOR CONTROL A 3 T101 16DG SHIFT MOTOR CONTROL B 4-5-- Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 199 > Page 173 6-7-8 T300 20YL/GY T-CASE MOTOR BRAKE SIGNAL 9 T103 20YL/OR 5 VOLT SUPPLY 10 D201 20WT/DG MODE SENSOR A 11 G180 20VT/YL SENSOR RETURN 12 A880 20DB/RD FUSED B(+) 13 G303 20VT/DG FRONT AXLE LOCK SIGNAL Component Location - 33 Component Location - 34 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 199 > Page 174 Connector: Name : MODULE-TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER C5 Color : BLACK # of pins : 10 Pin Circuit Description 1 L61 20WT/LG LEFT FRONT TURN LAMP DRIVER 2 L60 20WT/TN RIGHT FRONT TURN LAMP DRIVER 3 L34 20WT/GY RIGHT HIGH BEAM DRIVER 4 L43 20WT/DB LEFT LOW BEAM DRIVER 5 T340 20DG/VT INPUT SPEED SENSOR 2 (N3) SIGNAL Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 199 > Page 175 6-7-8 G31 20VT/LG AAT SIGNAL 9 G930 20VT/TN AAT RETURN 10 T71 20YL/OR INPUT SPEED SENSOR 2 (N3) RETURN Component Location - 33 Component Location - 34 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 199 > Page 176 Connector: Name : MODULE-TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER C6 Color : BROWN # of pins : 16 Pin Circuit Description 1 D65 20WT/LG CAN C BUS (+) 2 D52 20WT/LB DIAGNOSTIC CAN C (+) 3 D55 20WT/OR CAN B BUS (+) 4 L63 20WT/DG LEFT REAR TURN LAMP DRIVER 5-- Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 199 > Page 177 6 L62 20WT/YL RIGHT REAR TURN LAMP DRIVER 7 L50 20WT/TN BRAKE LAMP SWITCH OUTPUT 8-9 D64 20WT/LB CAN C BUS (-) 10 D51 20WT/BR DIAGNOSTIC CAN C (-) 11 D54 20WT CAN B BUS (-) 12 - 13 - 14 - 15 T70 20YL INPUT SPEED SENSOR 1 (N2) SIGNAL 16 T341 20DG/VT INPUT SPEED SENSOR 1 (N2) RETURN Component Location - 33 Component Location - 34 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 199 > Page 178 Connector: Name : MODULE-TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER C7 Color : BLUE # of pins : 14 Pin Circuit Description 1-2-3 L44 20WT/TN RIGHT LOW BEAM DRIVER 4 L33 20WT/LG LEFT HIGH BEAM DRIVER 5-- Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 199 > Page 179 6-7 C818 20LB/OR A/C PRESSURE 5 VOLT SUPPLY 8 L10 20WT/GY FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN) 9-10 - 11 - 12 C18 20LB/BR A/C PRESSURE SIGNAL 13 C918 20BK/LB A/C PRESSURE GROUND 14 T751 20YL IGNITION START Component Location - 33 Component Location - 34 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 199 > Page 180 Connector: Name : MODULE-TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER C8 Color : LT. GRAY # of pins : 12 Pin Circuit Description 1 A916 16RD FUSED B(+) Pin Circuit Description 1-2 A919 20RD FUSED B(+) Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 199 > Page 181 3 A106 20LB/RD FUSED B(+) 4 F201 20PK/OR FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) 5 F100 20PK/VT FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN) 6 A100 14RD/VT FUSED B(+) 7 A210 12OR/RD FUSED B(+) 8 A940 18RD FUSED B(+) 9 A103 18GY/RD FUSED B(+) 10 L89 18WT/YL FOG LAMP CONTROL OUTPUT 11 L1 18WT/LG BACKUP LAMP FEED 12 A961 14RD FUEL HEATER CONTROL OUTPUT 12 C123 12LB/WT CONDENSER FAN CONTROL OUTPUT Component Location - 33 Component Location - 34 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 199 > Page 182 Connector: Name : MODULE-TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER C9 Color : BLACK # of pins : 12 Pin Circuit Description 1 A111 16DG/RD FUSED B(+) 2 T750 14YL/GY STARTER MOTOR CONTROL OUTPUT 3 C3 20DB/YL A/C CLUTCH CONTROL OUTPUT 4 W4 16BR/OR WIPER MOTOR HIGH SPEED FEED 5 A114 18GY/RD FUSED B(+) Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 199 > Page 183 6 F30 10PK/YL FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-ACC) 7-8 L7 20WT/YL FUSED PARK LAMP FEED 9 L678 18BR FUSED PARK LAMP FEED 10 L70 20WT/GY FUSED PARK LAMP FEED 11 - 12 A107 12TN/RD FUSED B(+) Component Location - 33 Component Location - 34 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 199 > Page 184 Connector: Name : MODULE-TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER-EYELET Color : # of pins : 1 Qualifier : (DIESEL) Pin Circuit Description 1 A0 6RD B(+) Component Location - 33 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 199 > Page 185 Component Location - 34 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 199 > Page 186 Connector: Name : MODULE-TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER-EYELET Color : # of pins : 1 Qualifier : (GAS) Pin Circuit Description 1 A11 8LB B(+) Pin Circuit Description 1 A0 6RD B(+) Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 199 > Page 187 Component Location - 33 Component Location - 34 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 199 > Page 188 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Component ID 199 Power Distribution Module: Diagrams Component ID 199 Component ID: 199 Component : MODULE-TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER Connector: Name : MODULE-TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER C1 Color : LT. GRAY # of pins : 14 Pin Circuit Description 1 F1 20PK/WT FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (OFF-RUN-START) 2 T41 18YL/DB TRS T41 SIGNAL (P/N) 2 T41 20YL/DB TRS T41 SIGNAL (P/N) 2 T752 20DG/OR STARTER SOLENOID CONTROL 3-4 K31 20BR FUEL PUMP CONTROL 5 W7 20BR/GY WIPER PARK SWITCH SENSE 6-7-8 G932 20VT/TN WASHER FLUID SWITCH RETURN 9 W1 20BR/TN WASHER FLUID SWITCH SENSE 10 T515 20YL/DB TRANSMISSION CONTROL 11 G70 20VT/LB HOOD AJAR SWITCH SENSE 12 - 13 - 14 - Component Location - 33 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Component ID 199 > Page 191 Component Location - 34 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Component ID 199 > Page 192 Connector: Name : MODULE-TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER C10 Color : LT. GRAY # of pins : 22 Pin Circuit Description 1 K342 16BR/WT ASD CONTROL OUTPUT 2 A405 18RD/DB FUSED B(+) 3 A941 18RD FUSED B(+) 4-5 A104 20YL/RD FUSED B(+) Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Component ID 199 > Page 193 6 A310 16RD/LB FUSED B(+) 7 C15 14DB/WT REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER CONTROL OUTPUT 8 F12 14PK/RD FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) 9 T16 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT 10 - 11 X22 18GY/LB HORN CONTROL OUTPUT 12 W3 18BR/WT WIPER LOW SPEED CONTROL OUTPUT 13 Z971 18BK GROUND 14 C16 18DB/GY HEATED MIRROR CONTROL OUTPUT 15 A212 20RD/OR FUSED B(+) 16 - - 17 A121 14RD/YL FUSED B(+) 18 A109 16OR/RD FUEL PUMP CONTROL OUTPUT 19 X21 18GY/YL HORN CONTROL OUTPUT 20 Z953 20BK GROUND 21 T41 20YL/DB TRS T41 SIGNAL (P/N) 22 A400 14TN/RD FUSED B(+) Component Location - 33 Component Location - 34 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Component ID 199 > Page 194 Connector: Name : MODULE-TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER C2 Color : BLACK # of pins : 13 Pin Circuit Description 1-2 W10 20BR WASHER PUMP MOTOR CONTROL 3 F20 20PK/WT IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) 4 A72 20RD/OR ADJUSTABLE PEDALS OUTPUT 5-- Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Component ID 199 > Page 195 6-7-8-9 G304 20VT/DB FRONT AXLE LOCK CONTROL 10 C13 20LB A/C CLUTCH CONTROL 10 C13 20LB/OR A/C CLUTCH CONTROL 11 K51 20BR/WT ASD CONTROL 12 B20 20DG/OR BRAKE FLUID LEVEL SWITCH SENSE 13 Z117 20BK/WT GROUND Component Location - 33 Component Location - 34 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Component ID 199 > Page 196 Connector: Name : MODULE-TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER C3 Color : BLACK # of pins : 22 Pin Circuit Description 1 A209 10RD FUSED B(+) 2-3 F984 18PK/YL FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-ACC) 4-5 F983 20PK/YL FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-ACC) Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Component ID 199 > Page 197 6 A205 18RD/OR FUSED B(+) 7-8 A944 20RD FUSED B(+) 9 A116 16YL/RD FUSED B(+) 10 A118 18RD/OR FUSED B(+) 11 - 12 A918 20RD FUSED B(+) 12 A918 16RD FUSED B(+) 13 F921 20PK/LB FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN) 14 F504 20GY/PK FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN) 15 F202 20PK/GY FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) 16 A930 16RD FUSED B(+) 17 F942 10PK/LG FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) 18 L673 18YL TRAILER TOW LEFT TURN RELAY OUTPUT 19 L674 18LG TRAILER TOW RIGHT TURN RELAY OUTPUT 20 F960 20PK/LG FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) 21 F21 20PK/DG FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) 22 F12 14PK/RD FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) Component Location - 33 Component Location - 34 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Component ID 199 > Page 198 Connector: Name : MODULE-TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER C4 Color : LT. GRAY # of pins : 13 Pin Circuit Description 1 Z118 16BK/YL GROUND 2 T102 16YL SHIFT MOTOR CONTROL A 3 T101 16DG SHIFT MOTOR CONTROL B 4-5-- Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Component ID 199 > Page 199 6-7-8 T300 20YL/GY T-CASE MOTOR BRAKE SIGNAL 9 T103 20YL/OR 5 VOLT SUPPLY 10 D201 20WT/DG MODE SENSOR A 11 G180 20VT/YL SENSOR RETURN 12 A880 20DB/RD FUSED B(+) 13 G303 20VT/DG FRONT AXLE LOCK SIGNAL Component Location - 33 Component Location - 34 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Component ID 199 > Page 200 Connector: Name : MODULE-TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER C5 Color : BLACK # of pins : 10 Pin Circuit Description 1 L61 20WT/LG LEFT FRONT TURN LAMP DRIVER 2 L60 20WT/TN RIGHT FRONT TURN LAMP DRIVER 3 L34 20WT/GY RIGHT HIGH BEAM DRIVER 4 L43 20WT/DB LEFT LOW BEAM DRIVER 5 T340 20DG/VT INPUT SPEED SENSOR 2 (N3) SIGNAL Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Component ID 199 > Page 201 6-7-8 G31 20VT/LG AAT SIGNAL 9 G930 20VT/TN AAT RETURN 10 T71 20YL/OR INPUT SPEED SENSOR 2 (N3) RETURN Component Location - 33 Component Location - 34 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Component ID 199 > Page 202 Connector: Name : MODULE-TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER C6 Color : BROWN # of pins : 16 Pin Circuit Description 1 D65 20WT/LG CAN C BUS (+) 2 D52 20WT/LB DIAGNOSTIC CAN C (+) 3 D55 20WT/OR CAN B BUS (+) 4 L63 20WT/DG LEFT REAR TURN LAMP DRIVER 5-- Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Component ID 199 > Page 203 6 L62 20WT/YL RIGHT REAR TURN LAMP DRIVER 7 L50 20WT/TN BRAKE LAMP SWITCH OUTPUT 8-9 D64 20WT/LB CAN C BUS (-) 10 D51 20WT/BR DIAGNOSTIC CAN C (-) 11 D54 20WT CAN B BUS (-) 12 - 13 - 14 - 15 T70 20YL INPUT SPEED SENSOR 1 (N2) SIGNAL 16 T341 20DG/VT INPUT SPEED SENSOR 1 (N2) RETURN Component Location - 33 Component Location - 34 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Component ID 199 > Page 204 Connector: Name : MODULE-TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER C7 Color : BLUE # of pins : 14 Pin Circuit Description 1-2-3 L44 20WT/TN RIGHT LOW BEAM DRIVER 4 L33 20WT/LG LEFT HIGH BEAM DRIVER 5-- Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Component ID 199 > Page 205 6-7 C818 20LB/OR A/C PRESSURE 5 VOLT SUPPLY 8 L10 20WT/GY FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN) 9-10 - 11 - 12 C18 20LB/BR A/C PRESSURE SIGNAL 13 C918 20BK/LB A/C PRESSURE GROUND 14 T751 20YL IGNITION START Component Location - 33 Component Location - 34 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Component ID 199 > Page 206 Connector: Name : MODULE-TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER C8 Color : LT. GRAY # of pins : 12 Pin Circuit Description 1 A916 16RD FUSED B(+) Pin Circuit Description 1-2 A919 20RD FUSED B(+) Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Component ID 199 > Page 207 3 A106 20LB/RD FUSED B(+) 4 F201 20PK/OR FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) 5 F100 20PK/VT FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN) 6 A100 14RD/VT FUSED B(+) 7 A210 12OR/RD FUSED B(+) 8 A940 18RD FUSED B(+) 9 A103 18GY/RD FUSED B(+) 10 L89 18WT/YL FOG LAMP CONTROL OUTPUT 11 L1 18WT/LG BACKUP LAMP FEED 12 A961 14RD FUEL HEATER CONTROL OUTPUT 12 C123 12LB/WT CONDENSER FAN CONTROL OUTPUT Component Location - 33 Component Location - 34 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Component ID 199 > Page 208 Connector: Name : MODULE-TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER C9 Color : BLACK # of pins : 12 Pin Circuit Description 1 A111 16DG/RD FUSED B(+) 2 T750 14YL/GY STARTER MOTOR CONTROL OUTPUT 3 C3 20DB/YL A/C CLUTCH CONTROL OUTPUT 4 W4 16BR/OR WIPER MOTOR HIGH SPEED FEED 5 A114 18GY/RD FUSED B(+) Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Component ID 199 > Page 209 6 F30 10PK/YL FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-ACC) 7-8 L7 20WT/YL FUSED PARK LAMP FEED 9 L678 18BR FUSED PARK LAMP FEED 10 L70 20WT/GY FUSED PARK LAMP FEED 11 - 12 A107 12TN/RD FUSED B(+) Component Location - 33 Component Location - 34 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Component ID 199 > Page 210 Connector: Name : MODULE-TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER-EYELET Color : # of pins : 1 Qualifier : (DIESEL) Pin Circuit Description 1 A0 6RD B(+) Component Location - 33 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Component ID 199 > Page 211 Component Location - 34 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Component ID 199 > Page 212 Connector: Name : MODULE-TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER-EYELET Color : # of pins : 1 Qualifier : (GAS) Pin Circuit Description 1 A11 8LB B(+) Pin Circuit Description 1 A0 6RD B(+) Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Component ID 199 > Page 213 Component Location - 33 Component Location - 34 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Component ID 199 > Page 214 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Component ID 199 > Page 215 Power Distribution Module: Diagrams Component ID 215 Component ID: 215 Component : MODULE-TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER Connector: Name : MODULE-TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER C1 Color : LT. GRAY # of pins : 14 Pin Circuit Description 1 F1 20PK/WT FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (OFF-RUN-START) 2 T41 18YL/DB TRS T41 SIGNAL (P/N) 2 T41 20YL/DB TRS T41 SIGNAL (P/N) 2 T752 20DG/OR STARTER SOLENOID CONTROL 3-4 K31 20BR FUEL PUMP CONTROL 5 W7 20BR/GY WIPER PARK SWITCH SENSE 6-7-8 G932 20VT/TN WASHER FLUID SWITCH RETURN 9 W1 20BR/TN WASHER FLUID SWITCH SENSE 10 T515 20YL/DB TRANSMISSION CONTROL 11 G70 20VT/LB HOOD AJAR SWITCH SENSE 12 - 13 - 14 - Component Location - 33 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Component ID 199 > Page 216 Component Location - 34 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Component ID 199 > Page 217 Connector: Name : MODULE-TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER C10 Color : LT. GRAY # of pins : 22 Pin Circuit Description 1 K342 16BR/WT ASD CONTROL OUTPUT 2 A405 18RD/DB FUSED B(+) 3 A941 18RD FUSED B(+) 4-5 A104 20YL/RD FUSED B(+) Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Component ID 199 > Page 218 6 A310 16RD/LB FUSED B(+) 7 C15 14DB/WT REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER CONTROL OUTPUT 8 F12 14PK/RD FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) 9 T16 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT 10 - 11 X22 18GY/LB HORN CONTROL OUTPUT 12 W3 18BR/WT WIPER LOW SPEED CONTROL OUTPUT 13 Z971 18BK GROUND 14 C16 18DB/GY HEATED MIRROR CONTROL OUTPUT 15 A212 20RD/OR FUSED B(+) 16 - - 17 A121 14RD/YL FUSED B(+) 18 A109 16OR/RD FUEL PUMP CONTROL OUTPUT 19 X21 18GY/YL HORN CONTROL OUTPUT 20 Z953 20BK GROUND 21 T41 20YL/DB TRS T41 SIGNAL (P/N) 22 A400 14TN/RD FUSED B(+) Component Location - 33 Component Location - 34 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Component ID 199 > Page 219 Connector: Name : MODULE-TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER C2 Color : BLACK # of pins : 13 Pin Circuit Description 1-2 W10 20BR WASHER PUMP MOTOR CONTROL 3 F20 20PK/WT IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) 4 A72 20RD/OR ADJUSTABLE PEDALS OUTPUT 5-- Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Component ID 199 > Page 220 6-7-8-9 G304 20VT/DB FRONT AXLE LOCK CONTROL 10 C13 20LB A/C CLUTCH CONTROL 10 C13 20LB/OR A/C CLUTCH CONTROL 11 K51 20BR/WT ASD CONTROL 12 B20 20DG/OR BRAKE FLUID LEVEL SWITCH SENSE 13 Z117 20BK/WT GROUND Component Location - 33 Component Location - 34 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Component ID 199 > Page 221 Connector: Name : MODULE-TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER C3 Color : BLACK # of pins : 22 Pin Circuit Description 1 A209 10RD FUSED B(+) 2-3 F984 18PK/YL FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-ACC) 4-5 F983 20PK/YL FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-ACC) Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Component ID 199 > Page 222 6 A205 18RD/OR FUSED B(+) 7-8 A944 20RD FUSED B(+) 9 A116 16YL/RD FUSED B(+) 10 A118 18RD/OR FUSED B(+) 11 - 12 A918 20RD FUSED B(+) 12 A918 16RD FUSED B(+) 13 F921 20PK/LB FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN) 14 F504 20GY/PK FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN) 15 F202 20PK/GY FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) 16 A930 16RD FUSED B(+) 17 F942 10PK/LG FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) 18 L673 18YL TRAILER TOW LEFT TURN RELAY OUTPUT 19 L674 18LG TRAILER TOW RIGHT TURN RELAY OUTPUT 20 F960 20PK/LG FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) 21 F21 20PK/DG FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) 22 F12 14PK/RD FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) Component Location - 33 Component Location - 34 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Component ID 199 > Page 223 Connector: Name : MODULE-TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER C4 Color : LT. GRAY # of pins : 13 Pin Circuit Description 1 Z118 16BK/YL GROUND 2 T102 16YL SHIFT MOTOR CONTROL A 3 T101 16DG SHIFT MOTOR CONTROL B 4-5-- Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Component ID 199 > Page 224 6-7-8 T300 20YL/GY T-CASE MOTOR BRAKE SIGNAL 9 T103 20YL/OR 5 VOLT SUPPLY 10 D201 20WT/DG MODE SENSOR A 11 G180 20VT/YL SENSOR RETURN 12 A880 20DB/RD FUSED B(+) 13 G303 20VT/DG FRONT AXLE LOCK SIGNAL Component Location - 33 Component Location - 34 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Component ID 199 > Page 225 Connector: Name : MODULE-TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER C5 Color : BLACK # of pins : 10 Pin Circuit Description 1 L61 20WT/LG LEFT FRONT TURN LAMP DRIVER 2 L60 20WT/TN RIGHT FRONT TURN LAMP DRIVER 3 L34 20WT/GY RIGHT HIGH BEAM DRIVER 4 L43 20WT/DB LEFT LOW BEAM DRIVER 5 T340 20DG/VT INPUT SPEED SENSOR 2 (N3) SIGNAL Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Component ID 199 > Page 226 6-7-8 G31 20VT/LG AAT SIGNAL 9 G930 20VT/TN AAT RETURN 10 T71 20YL/OR INPUT SPEED SENSOR 2 (N3) RETURN Component Location - 33 Component Location - 34 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Component ID 199 > Page 227 Connector: Name : MODULE-TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER C6 Color : BROWN # of pins : 16 Pin Circuit Description 1 D65 20WT/LG CAN C BUS (+) 2 D52 20WT/LB DIAGNOSTIC CAN C (+) 3 D55 20WT/OR CAN B BUS (+) 4 L63 20WT/DG LEFT REAR TURN LAMP DRIVER 5-- Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Component ID 199 > Page 228 6 L62 20WT/YL RIGHT REAR TURN LAMP DRIVER 7 L50 20WT/TN BRAKE LAMP SWITCH OUTPUT 8-9 D64 20WT/LB CAN C BUS (-) 10 D51 20WT/BR DIAGNOSTIC CAN C (-) 11 D54 20WT CAN B BUS (-) 12 - 13 - 14 - 15 T70 20YL INPUT SPEED SENSOR 1 (N2) SIGNAL 16 T341 20DG/VT INPUT SPEED SENSOR 1 (N2) RETURN Component Location - 33 Component Location - 34 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Component ID 199 > Page 229 Connector: Name : MODULE-TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER C7 Color : BLUE # of pins : 14 Pin Circuit Description 1-2-3 L44 20WT/TN RIGHT LOW BEAM DRIVER 4 L33 20WT/LG LEFT HIGH BEAM DRIVER 5-- Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Component ID 199 > Page 230 6-7 C818 20LB/OR A/C PRESSURE 5 VOLT SUPPLY 8 L10 20WT/GY FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN) 9-10 - 11 - 12 C18 20LB/BR A/C PRESSURE SIGNAL 13 C918 20BK/LB A/C PRESSURE GROUND 14 T751 20YL IGNITION START Component Location - 33 Component Location - 34 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Component ID 199 > Page 231 Connector: Name : MODULE-TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER C8 Color : LT. GRAY # of pins : 12 Pin Circuit Description 1 A916 16RD FUSED B(+) Pin Circuit Description 1-2 A919 20RD FUSED B(+) Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Component ID 199 > Page 232 3 A106 20LB/RD FUSED B(+) 4 F201 20PK/OR FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) 5 F100 20PK/VT FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN) 6 A100 14RD/VT FUSED B(+) 7 A210 12OR/RD FUSED B(+) 8 A940 18RD FUSED B(+) 9 A103 18GY/RD FUSED B(+) 10 L89 18WT/YL FOG LAMP CONTROL OUTPUT 11 L1 18WT/LG BACKUP LAMP FEED 12 A961 14RD FUEL HEATER CONTROL OUTPUT 12 C123 12LB/WT CONDENSER FAN CONTROL OUTPUT Component Location - 33 Component Location - 34 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Component ID 199 > Page 233 Connector: Name : MODULE-TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER C9 Color : BLACK # of pins : 12 Pin Circuit Description 1 A111 16DG/RD FUSED B(+) 2 T750 14YL/GY STARTER MOTOR CONTROL OUTPUT 3 C3 20DB/YL A/C CLUTCH CONTROL OUTPUT 4 W4 16BR/OR WIPER MOTOR HIGH SPEED FEED 5 A114 18GY/RD FUSED B(+) Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Component ID 199 > Page 234 6 F30 10PK/YL FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-ACC) 7-8 L7 20WT/YL FUSED PARK LAMP FEED 9 L678 18BR FUSED PARK LAMP FEED 10 L70 20WT/GY FUSED PARK LAMP FEED 11 - 12 A107 12TN/RD FUSED B(+) Component Location - 33 Component Location - 34 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Component ID 199 > Page 235 Connector: Name : MODULE-TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER-EYELET Color : # of pins : 1 Qualifier : (DIESEL) Pin Circuit Description 1 A0 6RD B(+) Component Location - 33 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Component ID 199 > Page 236 Component Location - 34 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Component ID 199 > Page 237 Connector: Name : MODULE-TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER-EYELET Color : # of pins : 1 Qualifier : (GAS) Pin Circuit Description 1 A11 8LB B(+) Pin Circuit Description 1 A0 6RD B(+) Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Component ID 199 > Page 238 Component Location - 33 Component Location - 34 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Component ID 199 > Page 239 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Power Distribution Module: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The Totally Integrated Power Module (2)(TIPM) is a combination unit that performs the functions of the Power Distribution Center (PDC) and the Front Control Module. The TIPM is a printed circuit board based module that contains fuses, internal relays and a microprocessor that performs the functions previously executed by the FCM. The TIPM (2) is located in the engine compartment, next to the battery (1) and connects directly to the B+ cable (5) via a stud located on top of the unit. The ground connection is via electrical connectors. The TIPM provides the primary means of voltage distribution and protection for the entire vehicle. The molded plastic TIPM housing includes a base and cover. The TIPM cover is easily opened or removed for service and has a fuse and relay layout map integral to the inside surface of the cover. The TIPM housing base and cover are secured in place via mounting tabs. The mounting tabs secure the TIPM (2) to the battery tray mounting bracket (3). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 242 Power Distribution Module: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION All of the current from the battery and the generator output enters the Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) via a stud on the top of the module. The TIPM cover is removed to access the fuses or relays. Internal connections of all of the power distribution center circuits is accomplished by a combination of bus bars and a printed circuit board. For a complete wiring diagram Refer to Diagrams/Electrical. The wiring information includes wiring diagrams, proper wire and connector repair procedures, details of wire harness routing and retention, connector pin-out information and location views for the various wire harness connectors, splices and grounds. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Power Distribution Module: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. 2. Remove the B+ terminal nut (6) from the Totally Integrated Power Module (2)(TIPM) B+ terminal. Remove the B+ cable (5) from the TIPM (2). 3. Using a suitable flat blade tool, disengage the TIPM (2) upper retaining tabs from the battery tray bracket (3). 4. Grasp the TIPM (1) and rotate the assembly up to free it from its mounting bracket (3). Position the assembly upside down to access the electrical connectors located on the bottom of the unit. 5. Disconnect the electrical connectors (2) by depressing the locking tab and rotating the connector arm outboard, until the connector is free from the Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 245 TIPM assembly (1). Be certain to pull the connectors straight off. 6. Remove the TIPM (1) from the vehicle. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 246 Power Distribution Module: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION 1. Position the Totally Integrated Power Module (1)(TIPM) into the vehicle. NOTE: Totally Integrated power module electrical connectors are color coded to ease location reference. 2. Connect the electrical connectors (2) by pushing straight on and rotating the connector arm inboard, until the connector is firmly locked in place on the TIPM assembly (1). 3. Turn the TIPM (1) so that the connector side is facing down. Install the assembly onto the TIPM battery tray bracket (3) making sure to line up the lower retaining tab with the retaining slot in the tray (1). 4. Push the TIPM (1) downward to lock the upper retaining clips into the bracket (3). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 247 5. Install the B+ terminal cable (5) and nut (6) on the B+ terminal of the TIPM (2). 6. Connect the battery negative cable. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations Relay Box: Locations An integrated Power Module is located in the engine compartment near the battery. This center contains cartridge fuses and mini fuses. A description of each fuse and component may be stamped on the inside cover otherwise the cavity number of each fuse is stamped on the inside cover that corresponds to the following chart. Underhood Fuses (Integrated Power Module) Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Page 251 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Page 252 CAUTION: - When installing the Integrated Power Module cover, it is important to ensure the cover is properly positioned and fully latched. Failure to do so may allow water to get into the Integrated Power Module, and possibly result in a electrical system failure. - When replacing a blown fuse, it is important to use only a fuse having the correct amperage rating. The use of a fuse with a rating other than indicated may result in a dangerous electrical system overload. If a properly rated fuse continues to blow, it indicates a problem in the circuit that must be corrected. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Page 253 Relay Box: Application and ID An integrated Power Module is located in the engine compartment near the battery. This center contains cartridge fuses and mini fuses. A description of each fuse and component may be stamped on the inside cover otherwise the cavity number of each fuse is stamped on the inside cover that corresponds to the following chart. Underhood Fuses (Integrated Power Module) Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Page 254 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Page 255 CAUTION: - When installing the Integrated Power Module cover, it is important to ensure the cover is properly positioned and fully latched. Failure to do so may allow water to get into the Integrated Power Module, and possibly result in a electrical system failure. - When replacing a blown fuse, it is important to use only a fuse having the correct amperage rating. The use of a fuse with a rating other than indicated may result in a dangerous electrical system overload. If a properly rated fuse continues to blow, it indicates a problem in the circuit that must be corrected. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Body Control Module: Diagram Information and Instructions Warnings WARNINGS - GENERAL WARNINGS provide information to prevent personal injury and vehicle damage. Below is a list of general warnings that should be followed any time a vehicle is being serviced. WARNING: Always wear safety glasses for eye protection. WARNING: Use safety stands anytime a procedure requires being under a vehicle. WARNING: Be sure that the ignition switch always is in the off position, unless the procedure requires it to be on. WARNING: Set the parking brake when working on any vehicle. An automatic transmission should be in park. A manual transmission should be in neutral. WARNING: Operate the engine only in a well-ventilated area. WARNING: Keep away from moving parts when the engine is running, especially the fan and belts. WARNING: To prevent serious burns, avoid contact with hot parts such as the radiator, exhaust manifold(s), tail pipe, catalytic converter and muffler. WARNING: Do not allow flame or sparks near the battery. Gases are always present in and around the battery. WARNING: Always remove rings, watches, loose hanging jewelry and avoid loose clothing. How to Use Wiring Diagrams DESCRIPTION - HOW TO USE WIRING DIAGRAMS DaimlerChrysler Corporation wiring diagrams are designed to provide information regarding the vehicles wiring content. In order to effectively use the wiring diagrams to diagnose and repair DaimlerChrysler Corporation vehicles, it is important to understand all of their features and characteristics. Diagrams are arranged such that the power (B+) side of the circuit is placed near the top of the page, and the ground (B-) side of the circuit is placed near the bottom of the page. All switches, components, and modules are shown in the at rest position with the doors closed and the key removed from the ignition. Components are shown two ways. A solid line around a component indicates that the component is complete. A dashed line around the component indicates that the component is being shown is not complete. Incomplete components have a reference number to indicate the page where the component is shown complete. It is important to realize that no attempt is made on the diagrams to represent components and wiring as they appear on the vehicle. For example, a short piece of wire is treated the same as a long one. In addition, switches and other components are shown as simply as possible, with regard to function only. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 262 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 263 SYMBOLS International symbols are used throughout the wiring diagrams. These symbols are consistent with those being used around the world. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 264 TERMINOLOGY This is a list of terms and definitions used in the wiring diagrams. LHD - Left Hand Drive Vehicles RHD - Right Hand Drive Vehicles ATX - Automatic Transmissions-Front Wheel Drive MTX Manual Transmissions-Front Wheel Drive Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 265 AT - Automatic Transmissions-Rear Wheel Drive MT - Manual Transmissions-Rear Wheel Drive SOHC - Single Over Head Cam Engine DOHC - Double Over Head Cam Engine Export - Vehicles Built For Sale In Markets Other Than North America Except Export - Vehicles Built For Sale In North America Circuit Functions DESCRIPTION - CIRCUIT FUNCTIONS All circuits in the diagrams use an alpha/numeric code to identify the wire and it's function. To identify which circuit code applies to a system, refer to the Circuit Identification Code Chart. This chart shows the main circuits only and does not show the secondary codes that may apply to some models. Circuit Information DESCRIPTION - CIRCUIT INFORMATION Each wire shown in the diagrams contains a code which identifies the main circuit, a specific part of the main circuit, gage of wire, and color. An example would be A 2 18 LB/YL. This is a Battery Feed circuit, level two, eighteen gauge, light blue with a yellow tracer. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 266 Connector, Ground and Splice Information DESCRIPTION - CONNECTOR, GROUND AND SPLICE INFORMATION CAUTION: Not all connectors are serviced. Some connectors are serviced only with a harness. A typical example might be the Supplemental Restraint System connectors. Always check parts availability before attempting a repair. IDENTIFICATION In-line connectors are identified by a number, as follows: - In-line connectors located in the engine compartment are C100 series numbers. - In-line connectors located in the instrument panel area are C200 series numbers. - In-line connectors located in the body are C300 series numbers. - Jumper harness connectors are C400 series numbers. - Grounds and ground connectors are identified with a "G" and follow the same series numbering as the in-line connectors. - Splices are identified with an "S" and follow the same series numbering as the in-line connectors. In addition, S001-S099 numbers are located in the engine compartment. - Component connectors are identified by the component name instead of a number. Multiple connectors on a component use a C1, C2, etc. identifier. LOCATIONS Vehicle/Locations contains the master connector/ground/splice location index charts with hyperlinks to the applicable location illustrations. The illustrations contain the connector name (or number)/ground number/splice number and component identification. The abbreviation T/O is used in the component location section to indicate a point in which the wiring harness branches out to a component. The abbreviation N/S means Not Shown in the illustrations Section Identification and Information DESCRIPTION - SECTION IDENTIFICATION AND INFORMATION The wiring diagrams are grouped into individual sections. If a component is most likely found in a particular group, it will be shown complete (all wires, Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 267 connectors, and pins) within that group. For example, the Auto Shutdown Relay is most likely to be found in Powertrain Management, so it is shown there complete. It can, however, be shown partially in another group if it contains some associated wiring. Splice diagrams show the entire splice and provide references to other sections the splices serves. Splice Information only contains splice diagrams that are not shown in their entirety somewhere else in the wiring diagrams. Connector Pin-Outs shows each connector and the circuits involved with that connector. The connectors are identified using the name/number on the diagram pages. Removal REMOVAL 1. Disconnect battery. 2. Release Connector Lock (2). 3. Disconnect the connector (3) being repaired from its mating half/component. 4. Remove the dress cover (if applicable) (1). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 268 5. Release the Secondary Terminal Lock, if required (1). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 269 6. Position the connector locking finger away from the terminal using the proper special tool. Pull on the wire to remove the terminal from the connector. Installation Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 270 INSTALLATION 1. Insert the removed terminal in the same cavity on the repair connector. 2. Repeat steps for each terminal in the connector, being sure that all wires are inserted into the proper cavities. For additional connector pin-out identification, refer to the wiring diagrams. 3. When the connector is re-assembled, the secondary terminal lock must be placed in the locked position to prevent terminal push out. 4. Replace dress cover (if applicable). 5. Connect connector to its mating half/component. 6. Connect battery and test all affected systems. Removal REMOVAL 1. Disconnect the battery. 2. Locate the diode in the harness, and remove the protective covering. 3. Remove the diode from the harness, pay attention to the current flow direction (1) (2) (3). Installation INSTALLATION 1. Remove the insulation from the wires in the harness. Only remove enough insulation to solder in the new diode. 2. Install the new diode in the harness, making sure current flow is correct. If necessary, refer to the appropriate wiring diagram for current flow. 3. Solder the connection together using rosin core type solder only. Do not use acid core solder. 4. Tape the diode to the harness using electrical tape. Make sure the diode is completely sealed from the elements. 5. Re-connect the battery and test affected systems. Removal REMOVAL 1. Follow steps for removing terminals described in the connector removal section. 2. Cut the wire 6 inches from the back of the connector. Installation INSTALLATION 1. Select a wire from the terminal repair kit that best matches the color and gage of the wire being repaired. 2. Cut the repair wire to the proper length and remove one-half (1/2) inch of insulation. 3. Splice the repair wire to the wire harness (see wire splicing procedure). See: Service Procedures/Wire Splicing 4. Insert the repaired wire into the connector. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 271 5. Install the connector locking wedge, if required, and reconnect the connector to its mating half/component. 6. Re-tape the wire harness starting at 1-1/2 inches behind the connector and 2 inches past the repair. 7. Connect battery and test all affected systems. Wire Splicing STANDARD PROCEDURE - WIRE SPLICING When splicing a wire, it is important that the correct gage be used as shown in the wiring diagrams. 1. Remove one-half (1/2) inch of insulation from each wire that needs to be spliced. 2. Place a piece of adhesive lined heat shrink tubing on one side of the wire. Make sure the tubing will be long enough to cover and seal the entire repair area. 3. Place the strands of wire overlapping each other inside of the splice clip (1). 4. Using crimping tool (1), Mopar p/n 05019912AA, crimp the splice clip and wires together. 5. Solder (3) the connection (2) together using rosin core type solder (1) only. CAUTION: DO NOT USE ACID CORE SOLDER. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 272 6. Center the heat shrink tubing (2) over the joint and heat using a heat gun. Heat the joint until the tubing is tightly sealed and sealant (1) comes out of both ends of the tubing. Special Tools WIRING/TERMINAL PROBING TOOL PACKAGE 6807 TERMINAL PICK TOOL SET 6680 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 273 TERMINAL REMOVING TOOLS 6932 AND 8638 TERMINAL REMOVING TOOL 6934 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 274 Body Control Module: Diagnostic Aids Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) Sensitive Devices STANDARD PROCEDURE - ELECTROSTATIC DISCHARGE (ESD) SENSITIVE DEVICES All ESD sensitive components are solid state and a symbol is used to indicate this. When handling any component with this symbol, comply with the following procedures to reduce the possibility of electrostatic charge build up on the body and inadvertent discharge into the component. If it is not known whether the part is ESD sensitive, assume that it is. 1. Always touch a known good ground before handling the part. This should be repeated while handling the part and more frequently after sliding across a seat, sitting down from a standing position, or walking a distance. 2. Avoid touching electrical terminals of the part, unless instructed to do so by a written procedure. 3. When using a voltmeter, be sure to connect the ground lead first. 4. Do not remove the part from it's protective packing until it is time to install the part. 5. Before removing the part from it's package, ground the package to a known good ground on the vehicle. Testing Of Voltage Potential STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING OF VOLTAGE POTENTIAL 1. Connect the ground lead of a voltmeter to a known good ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the voltmeter to the selected test point. The vehicle ignition may need to be turned ON to check voltage. Refer to the appropriate test procedure. Testing For Continuity Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 275 STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING FOR CONTINUITY 1. Remove the fuse (1) for the circuit being checked or, disconnect the battery. 2. Connect one lead of the ohmmeter to one side of the circuit being tested 3. Connect the other lead to the other end of the circuit being tested. Low or no resistance means good continuity. Testing For A Short To Ground STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING FOR A SHORT TO GROUND 1. Remove the fuse and disconnect all items involved with the fuse. 2. Connect a test light or a voltmeter across the terminals of the fuse. 3. Starting at the fuse block, wiggle the wiring harness about six to eight inches apart and watch the voltmeter/test lamp. 4. If the voltmeter registers voltage or the test lamp glows, there is a short to ground in that general area of the wiring harness. Testing For A Short To Ground On Fuses Powering Several Loads STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING FOR A SHORT TO GROUND ON FUSES POWERING SEVERAL LOADS 1. Refer to the wiring diagrams and disconnect or isolate all items on the suspected fused circuits. 2. Replace the blown fuse. 3. Supply power to the fuse by turning ON the ignition switch or re-connecting the battery. 4. Start connecting or energizing the items in the fuse circuit one at a time. When the fuse blows the circuit with the short to ground has been isolated. Testing For A Voltage Drop STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING FOR A VOLTAGE DROP Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 276 1. Connect the positive lead of the voltmeter to the side of the circuit closest to the battery. 2. Connect the other lead of the voltmeter to the other side of the switch, component or circuit. 3. Operate the item. 4. The voltmeter will show the difference in voltage between the two points. Troubleshooting Wiring Problems DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING - WIRING HARNESS TROUBLESHOOTING TOOLS When diagnosing a problem in an electrical circuit there are several common tools necessary. These tools are listed and explained below. - Jumper Wire - This is a test wire used to connect two points of a circuit. It can be used to bypass an open in a circuit. WARNING: Never use a jumper wire across a load, such as a motor, connected between a battery feed and ground. - Voltmeter - Used to check for voltage on a circuit. Always connect the black lead to a known good ground and the red lead to the positive side of the circuit. CAUTION: Most of the electrical components used in today's vehicles are Solid State. When checking voltages in these circuits, use a meter with a 10 - megohm or greater impedance rating. - Ohmmeter - Used to check the resistance between two points of a circuit. Low or no resistance in a circuit means good continuity. CAUTION: Most of the electrical components used in today's vehicles are Solid State. When checking resistance in these circuits use a meter with a 10 - megohm or greater impedance rating. In addition, make sure the power is disconnected from the circuit. Circuits that are powered up by the vehicle's electrical system can cause damage to the equipment and provide false readings. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 277 - Probing Tools - These tools are used for probing terminals in connectors. Select the proper size tool from Special Tool Package 6807, and insert the probing end (2) into the terminal being tested. Use the other end of the tool (1) to insert the meter probe. INTERMITTENT AND POOR CONNECTIONS Most intermittent electrical problems are caused by faulty electrical connections or wiring. It is also possible for a sticking component or relay to cause a problem. Before condemning a component or wiring assembly, check the following items. - Connectors are fully seated - Spread terminals, or terminal push out - Terminals in the wiring assembly are fully seated into the connector/component and locked into position - Dirt or corrosion on the terminals. Any amount of corrosion or dirt could cause an intermittent problem - Damaged connector/component casing exposing the item to dirt or moisture - Wire insulation that has rubbed through causing a short to ground - Some or all of the wiring strands broken inside of the insulation - Wiring broken inside of the insulation TROUBLESHOOTING WIRING PROBLEMS When troubleshooting wiring problems there are six steps which can aid in the procedure. The steps are listed and explained below. Always check for non-factory items added to the vehicle before doing any diagnosis. If the vehicle is equipped with these items, disconnect them to verify these add-on items are not the cause of the problem. 1. Verify the problem. 2. Verify any related symptoms. Do this by performing operational checks on components that are in the same circuit. Refer to the wiring diagrams. 3. Analyze the symptoms. Use the wiring diagrams to determine what the circuit is doing, where the problem most likely is occurring and where the diagnosis will continue. 4. Isolate the problem area. 5. Repair the problem area. 6. Verify the proper operation. For this step, check for proper operation of all items on the repaired circuit. Refer to the wiring diagrams. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 198 Engine Control Module: Locations Component ID 198 Component ID: 198 Component : MODULE-POWERTRAIN CONTROL Connector: Name : MODULE-POWERTRAIN CONTROL C1 Color : BLACK/BLACK # of pins : 38 Qualifier : (DIESEL) Pin Circuit Description 123456- 789-10 11 F1 20PK/WT FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) 12 F1 20PK/WT FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) 13 14 15 16 17 18 - - Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 198 > Page 282 19 T160 20DG/WT SENSOR GROUND 20 T5 20DG/YL AUTOSTICK (ERS)-TOW/HAUL SIGNAL 21 22 23 24 25 26 - 27 F856 20YL/PK 5 VOLT SUPPLY 28 29 A918 20RD FUSED B(+) 30 T751 20YL IGNITION START 31 32 33 34 D65 20WT/LG CAN C BUS (+) 35 D64 20WT/LB CAN C BUS (-) 36 38 Component Location - 29 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 198 > Page 283 Component Location - 6 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 198 > Page 284 Connector: Name : MODULE-POWERTRAIN CONTROL C1 Color : BLACK/BLACK # of pins : 38 Qualifier : (GAS) Pin Circuit Description 1 K98 18DB/YL COIL CONTROL NO. 8 2-3 K97 18DB/YL COIL CONTROL NO. 7 3 K97 18BR COIL CONTROL NO. 7 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 198 > Page 285 4 K28 18BR/LB INJECTOR CONTROL NO. 8 5 K26 18BR/YL INJECTOR CONTROL NO. 7 6-7-8-9 Z130 16BK/BR GROUND 10 A918 16RD FUSED B(+) 11 F202 20PK/GY FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) 12 F1 20PK/WT FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (OFF-RUN-START) 13 - 14 - 15 - 16 - 17 - 18 Z131 16BK/DG GROUND 19 Z951 16BK/YL GROUND 20 G6 16VT/GY OIL PRESSURE SIGNAL 21 - 22 - 23 - 24 A804 18RD/GY GEN SENSE 25 - 26 - 27 F856 20YL/PK 5 VOLT SUPPLY 28 K452 20BR/LB MDS SOL CONTROL NO. 4 29 A918 16RD FUSED B(+) 30 T751 20YL IGNITION START 31 K141 20DB/YL O2 1/2 SIGNAL 32 K902 20BR/DG O2 RETURN (UPSTREAM) 33 K243 20BR O2 2/2 SIGNAL 34 D65 20WT/LG CAN C BUS (+) 35 D64 20WT/LB CAN C BUS (-) 36 - 37 - 38 K342 16BR/WT ASD CONTROL OUTPUT Component Location - 29 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 198 > Page 286 Component Location - 6 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 198 > Page 287 Connector: Name : MODULE-POWERTRAIN CONTROL C2 Color : BLACK/ORANGE # of pins : 38 Qualifier : (GAS) Pin Circuit Description 1 K10 18DB/OR COIL CONTROL NO. 6 2 K16 18DB/YL COIL CONTROL NO. 5 3 K15 18DB/GY COIL CONTROL NO. 4 4 K58 18BR/VT INJECTOR CONTROL NO. 6 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 198 > Page 288 5 K38 18BR/OR INJECTOR CONTROL NO. 5 6 K447 20TN/YL ETC MOTOR (+) 7 K18 18DB/OR COIL CONTROL NO. 3 8 K35 20DB/VT EGR SOL CONTROL 9 K17 18DB/TN COIL CONTROL NO. 2 10 K19 18DB/DG COIL CONTROL NO. 1 11 K14 18BR/TN INJECTOR CONTROL NO. 4 12 K13 18BR/LB INJECTOR CONTROL NO. 3 13 K12 18BR/DB INJECTOR CONTROL NO. 2 14 K11 18BR/YL INJECTOR CONTROL NO. 1 15 K922 20BR/DB TP SENSOR RETURN 16 K453 20BR/DG MDS SOL CONTROL NO. 6 17 K199 20BR/VT O2 2/1 HEATER CONTROL 18 K99 20BR/LG O2 1/1 HEATER CONTROL SUPPLY 19 K20 18BR/GY GEN FIELD CONTROL 20 K2 20VT/OR ECT SIGNAL 21 K22 20BR/OR TP NO. 1 SIGNAL 22 K34 20DB/LG EGR SIGNAL 23 K1 20VT/BR MAP SIGNAL 24 K942 20BR/LG KNOCK SENSOR NO. 1 RETURN 25 K42 20DB/YL KNOCK SENSOR NO. 1 SIGNAL 26 - 27 K900 20DB/DG SENSOR GROUND 28 K122 20BR/DG TP NO. 2 SIGNAL 29 F855 20PK/YL 5 VOLT SUPPLY 30 K21 20DB/LG IAT SIGNAL 31 K41 20DB/LB O2 1/1 SIGNAL 32 K904 20DB/DG O2 RETURN (DOWNSTREAM) 33 K43 20DB/LG O2 2/1 SIGNAL 34 K44 20DB/GY CMP SIGNAL 35 K24 20BR/LB CKP SIGNAL 36 K242 20BR/WT KNOCK SENSOR NO. 2 SIGNAL 37 K924 20WT/BR KNOCK SENSOR NO. 2 RETURN 38 K448 20TN/OR ETC MOTOR (-) Component Location - 29 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 198 > Page 289 Component Location - 6 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 198 > Page 290 Connector: Name : MODULE-POWERTRAIN CONTROL C3 Color : BLACK/NATURAL # of pins : 38 Qualifier : (GAS) Pin Circuit Description 1-2-3 K51 20BR/WT ASD CONTROL 4-- Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 198 > Page 291 5 V35 20VT/OR S/C VENT SOL CONTROL 5 K454 20BR/OR MDS SOL CONTROL NO. 7 6 K451 20BR/WT MDS SOL CONTROL NO. 1 7 V32 20VT/YL SPEED CONTROL SUPPLY 8-9 K299 20BR/WT O2 1/2 HEATER CONTROL SUPPLY 10 K399 18BR/GY O2 2/2 HEATER CONTROL 11 C13 20LB/OR A/C CLUTCH CONTROL 12 V36 20VT/YL S/C VACUUM SOL CONTROL 13 - 14 V32 20VT/YL BRAKE SWITCH NO. 2 SIGNAL 15 V937 20VT/BR S/C SWITCH RETURN 16 K167 20BR/YL APPS NO. 1 RETURN 17 K400 20BR/VT APPS NO. 2 RETURN 18 V38 20VT/OR S/C SWITCH NO. 2 SIGNAL 19 K342 16BR/WT ASD CONTROL OUTPUT 20 K52 20DB/WT EVAP PURGE SOL CONTROL 21 T41 20YL/DB TRS T41 SIGNAL (P/N) 22 G113 20VT PTO SENSE 22 G113 18PK/YL PTO SENSE 23 B29 20DG/WT BRAKE SWITCH NO. 1 SIGNAL 24 - 25 K23 20BR/WT APPS NO. 1 SIGNAL 26 - 27 T5 20DG/YL AUTOSTICK (ERS)-TOW/HAUL SIGNAL 28 K342 16BR/WT ASD CONTROL OUTPUT 29 K70 20DB/BR EVAP PURGE SOL SIGNAL 30 K66 20DB/WT P/S SWITCH SIGNAL 31 - 32 - 33 G24 20VT/BR OIL TEMPERATURE SIGNAL 34 V37 20VT S/C SWITCH NO. 1 SIGNAL 35 K107 20VT/WT ESM SIGNAL 36 K29 20WT/BR APPS NO. 2 SIGNAL 37 K31 20BR FUEL PUMP CONTROL 38 T752 20DG/OR STARTER SOLENOID CONTROL Component Location - 29 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 198 > Page 292 Component Location - 6 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 198 > Page 293 Connector: Name : MODULE-POWERTRAIN CONTROL C4 Color : BLACK/GREEN # of pins : 38 Qualifier : (DIESEL) Pin Circuit Description 1 T160 20YL/GY SENSOR GROUND 2 T259 20YL/DG 4C CONTROL 3- Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 198 > Page 294 4 T140 20YL/GY MS CONTROL 56 T219 20YL/LG 2C CONTROL 78 T59 20YL/LB UD CONTROL 910 T20 20DG/BK L/R CONTROL 11 T118 20DG LP VFS CONTROL 12 Z133 18BK/LG GROUND 13 Z133 18BK/LG GROUND 14 Z133 18BK/LG GROUND 15 T1 20DG/LB TRS T1 SIGNAL 16 T3 20DG/DB TRS T3 SIGNAL 17 T6 20DG TOW/HAUL OVERDRIVE OFF SWITCH SIGNAL 18 T515 20YL/DB TRANSMISSION CONTROL 19 T16 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT 20 T48 20BR/YL 4C PRESSURE SIGNAL 21 T29 20YL/WT UD PRESSURE SIGNAL 22 T9 20DG/TN OD PRESSURE SIGNAL 23 24 25 26 T4 20DG/LB TRS T2 SIGNAL 27 T41 20YL/DB TRS T41 SIGNAL (P/N) 28 T16 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT 29 T50 20DG/PK L/R PRESSURE SIGNAL 30 T147 20DG/YL 2C PRESSURE SIGNAL 31 T38 20YL/BR LINE PRESSURE SIGNAL 32 T14 20DG/BR OUTPUT SPEED SIGNAL 33 T52 20DG/OR INPUT SPEED SIGNAL 34 T13 20DG/VT SPEED SENSOR GROUND 35 T54 20DG/OR TRANSMISSION TEMPERATURE SIGNAL 36 37 T42 20DG/YL TRS T42 SIGNAL 38 T16 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT Component Location - 29 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 198 > Page 295 Component Location - 6 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 198 > Page 296 Connector: Name : MODULE-POWERTRAIN CONTROL C4 Color : BLACK/GREEN # of pins : 38 Qualifier : (GAS) Pin Circuit Description 1 T60 20YL/GY OD SOLENOID CONTROL 2 T259 20YL/DG 4C CONTROL 2 T59 20YL/LB UD CONTROL 3-- Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 198 > Page 297 4 T140 20YL/GY MS CONTROL 5-6 T219 20YL/LG 2C CONTROL 6 T19 18YL/DB 2/4 SOLENOID CONTROL 7-8 T59 20YL/LB UD CONTROL 9-10 T20 20DG/WT L/R CONTROL 11 T118 20DG LP VFS CONTROL 12 Z908 18BK GROUND 13 Z977 18BK GROUND 14 Z904 18BK GROUND 15 T1 20DG/LB TRS T1 SIGNAL 16 T3 20DG/DB TRS T3 SIGNAL 17 T6 20DG TOW/HAUL OVERDRIVE OFF SWITCH SIGNAL 18 T515 20YL/DB TRANSMISSION CONTROL 19 T16 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT 20 T48 20BR/YL 4C PRESSURE SIGNAL 21 T29 20YL/WT UD PRESSURE SIGNAL 22 T9 20DG/TN OD PRESSURE SIGNAL 23 - 24 - 25 - 26 T4 20DG/LB TRS T2 SIGNAL 27 - 28 T16 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT 29 T50 20DG/PK L/R PRESSURE SIGNAL 30 T147 20DG/YL 2C PRESSURE SIGNAL 30 T47 18YL/DG 2/4 PRESSURE SIGNAL 31 T38 20YL/BR LINE PRESSURE SIGNAL 32 T14 20DG/BR OUTPUT SPEED SIGNAL 33 T52 20DG/OR INPUT SPEED SIGNAL 34 T13 20DG/VT SPEED SENSOR GROUND 35 T54 20DG/OR TRANSMISSION TEMPERATURE SIGNAL 36 - 37 T42 20DG/YL TRS T42 SIGNAL 38 T16 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT Component Location - 29 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 198 > Page 298 Component Location - 6 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 198 > Page 299 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 198 > Page 300 Engine Control Module: Locations Component ID 211 Component ID: 211 Component : MODULE-POWERTRAIN CONTROL Connector: Name : MODULE-POWERTRAIN CONTROL C1 Color : BLACK/BLACK # of pins : 38 Qualifier : (DIESEL) Pin Circuit Description 123456- 789-10 11 F1 20PK/WT FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) 12 F1 20PK/WT FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) 13 14 15 16 17 18 - - Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 198 > Page 301 19 T160 20DG/WT SENSOR GROUND 20 T5 20DG/YL AUTOSTICK (ERS)-TOW/HAUL SIGNAL 21 22 23 24 25 26 - 27 F856 20YL/PK 5 VOLT SUPPLY 28 29 A918 20RD FUSED B(+) 30 T751 20YL IGNITION START 31 32 33 34 D65 20WT/LG CAN C BUS (+) 35 D64 20WT/LB CAN C BUS (-) 36 38 Component Location - 29 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 198 > Page 302 Component Location - 6 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 198 > Page 303 Connector: Name : MODULE-POWERTRAIN CONTROL C1 Color : BLACK/BLACK # of pins : 38 Qualifier : (GAS) Pin Circuit Description 1 K98 18DB/YL COIL CONTROL NO. 8 2-3 K97 18DB/YL COIL CONTROL NO. 7 3 K97 18BR COIL CONTROL NO. 7 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 198 > Page 304 4 K28 18BR/LB INJECTOR CONTROL NO. 8 5 K26 18BR/YL INJECTOR CONTROL NO. 7 6-7-8-9 Z130 16BK/BR GROUND 10 A918 16RD FUSED B(+) 11 F202 20PK/GY FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) 12 F1 20PK/WT FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (OFF-RUN-START) 13 - 14 - 15 - 16 - 17 - 18 Z131 16BK/DG GROUND 19 Z951 16BK/YL GROUND 20 G6 16VT/GY OIL PRESSURE SIGNAL 21 - 22 - 23 - 24 A804 18RD/GY GEN SENSE 25 - 26 - 27 F856 20YL/PK 5 VOLT SUPPLY 28 K452 20BR/LB MDS SOL CONTROL NO. 4 29 A918 16RD FUSED B(+) 30 T751 20YL IGNITION START 31 K141 20DB/YL O2 1/2 SIGNAL 32 K902 20BR/DG O2 RETURN (UPSTREAM) 33 K243 20BR O2 2/2 SIGNAL 34 D65 20WT/LG CAN C BUS (+) 35 D64 20WT/LB CAN C BUS (-) 36 - 37 - 38 K342 16BR/WT ASD CONTROL OUTPUT Component Location - 29 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 198 > Page 305 Component Location - 6 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 198 > Page 306 Connector: Name : MODULE-POWERTRAIN CONTROL C2 Color : BLACK/ORANGE # of pins : 38 Qualifier : (GAS) Pin Circuit Description 1 K10 18DB/OR COIL CONTROL NO. 6 2 K16 18DB/YL COIL CONTROL NO. 5 3 K15 18DB/GY COIL CONTROL NO. 4 4 K58 18BR/VT INJECTOR CONTROL NO. 6 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 198 > Page 307 5 K38 18BR/OR INJECTOR CONTROL NO. 5 6 K447 20TN/YL ETC MOTOR (+) 7 K18 18DB/OR COIL CONTROL NO. 3 8 K35 20DB/VT EGR SOL CONTROL 9 K17 18DB/TN COIL CONTROL NO. 2 10 K19 18DB/DG COIL CONTROL NO. 1 11 K14 18BR/TN INJECTOR CONTROL NO. 4 12 K13 18BR/LB INJECTOR CONTROL NO. 3 13 K12 18BR/DB INJECTOR CONTROL NO. 2 14 K11 18BR/YL INJECTOR CONTROL NO. 1 15 K922 20BR/DB TP SENSOR RETURN 16 K453 20BR/DG MDS SOL CONTROL NO. 6 17 K199 20BR/VT O2 2/1 HEATER CONTROL 18 K99 20BR/LG O2 1/1 HEATER CONTROL SUPPLY 19 K20 18BR/GY GEN FIELD CONTROL 20 K2 20VT/OR ECT SIGNAL 21 K22 20BR/OR TP NO. 1 SIGNAL 22 K34 20DB/LG EGR SIGNAL 23 K1 20VT/BR MAP SIGNAL 24 K942 20BR/LG KNOCK SENSOR NO. 1 RETURN 25 K42 20DB/YL KNOCK SENSOR NO. 1 SIGNAL 26 - 27 K900 20DB/DG SENSOR GROUND 28 K122 20BR/DG TP NO. 2 SIGNAL 29 F855 20PK/YL 5 VOLT SUPPLY 30 K21 20DB/LG IAT SIGNAL 31 K41 20DB/LB O2 1/1 SIGNAL 32 K904 20DB/DG O2 RETURN (DOWNSTREAM) 33 K43 20DB/LG O2 2/1 SIGNAL 34 K44 20DB/GY CMP SIGNAL 35 K24 20BR/LB CKP SIGNAL 36 K242 20BR/WT KNOCK SENSOR NO. 2 SIGNAL 37 K924 20WT/BR KNOCK SENSOR NO. 2 RETURN 38 K448 20TN/OR ETC MOTOR (-) Component Location - 29 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 198 > Page 308 Component Location - 6 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 198 > Page 309 Connector: Name : MODULE-POWERTRAIN CONTROL C3 Color : BLACK/NATURAL # of pins : 38 Qualifier : (GAS) Pin Circuit Description 1-2-3 K51 20BR/WT ASD CONTROL 4-- Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 198 > Page 310 5 V35 20VT/OR S/C VENT SOL CONTROL 5 K454 20BR/OR MDS SOL CONTROL NO. 7 6 K451 20BR/WT MDS SOL CONTROL NO. 1 7 V32 20VT/YL SPEED CONTROL SUPPLY 8-9 K299 20BR/WT O2 1/2 HEATER CONTROL SUPPLY 10 K399 18BR/GY O2 2/2 HEATER CONTROL 11 C13 20LB/OR A/C CLUTCH CONTROL 12 V36 20VT/YL S/C VACUUM SOL CONTROL 13 - 14 V32 20VT/YL BRAKE SWITCH NO. 2 SIGNAL 15 V937 20VT/BR S/C SWITCH RETURN 16 K167 20BR/YL APPS NO. 1 RETURN 17 K400 20BR/VT APPS NO. 2 RETURN 18 V38 20VT/OR S/C SWITCH NO. 2 SIGNAL 19 K342 16BR/WT ASD CONTROL OUTPUT 20 K52 20DB/WT EVAP PURGE SOL CONTROL 21 T41 20YL/DB TRS T41 SIGNAL (P/N) 22 G113 20VT PTO SENSE 22 G113 18PK/YL PTO SENSE 23 B29 20DG/WT BRAKE SWITCH NO. 1 SIGNAL 24 - 25 K23 20BR/WT APPS NO. 1 SIGNAL 26 - 27 T5 20DG/YL AUTOSTICK (ERS)-TOW/HAUL SIGNAL 28 K342 16BR/WT ASD CONTROL OUTPUT 29 K70 20DB/BR EVAP PURGE SOL SIGNAL 30 K66 20DB/WT P/S SWITCH SIGNAL 31 - 32 - 33 G24 20VT/BR OIL TEMPERATURE SIGNAL 34 V37 20VT S/C SWITCH NO. 1 SIGNAL 35 K107 20VT/WT ESM SIGNAL 36 K29 20WT/BR APPS NO. 2 SIGNAL 37 K31 20BR FUEL PUMP CONTROL 38 T752 20DG/OR STARTER SOLENOID CONTROL Component Location - 29 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 198 > Page 311 Component Location - 6 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 198 > Page 312 Connector: Name : MODULE-POWERTRAIN CONTROL C4 Color : BLACK/GREEN # of pins : 38 Qualifier : (DIESEL) Pin Circuit Description 1 T160 20YL/GY SENSOR GROUND 2 T259 20YL/DG 4C CONTROL 3- Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 198 > Page 313 4 T140 20YL/GY MS CONTROL 56 T219 20YL/LG 2C CONTROL 78 T59 20YL/LB UD CONTROL 910 T20 20DG/BK L/R CONTROL 11 T118 20DG LP VFS CONTROL 12 Z133 18BK/LG GROUND 13 Z133 18BK/LG GROUND 14 Z133 18BK/LG GROUND 15 T1 20DG/LB TRS T1 SIGNAL 16 T3 20DG/DB TRS T3 SIGNAL 17 T6 20DG TOW/HAUL OVERDRIVE OFF SWITCH SIGNAL 18 T515 20YL/DB TRANSMISSION CONTROL 19 T16 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT 20 T48 20BR/YL 4C PRESSURE SIGNAL 21 T29 20YL/WT UD PRESSURE SIGNAL 22 T9 20DG/TN OD PRESSURE SIGNAL 23 24 25 26 T4 20DG/LB TRS T2 SIGNAL 27 T41 20YL/DB TRS T41 SIGNAL (P/N) 28 T16 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT 29 T50 20DG/PK L/R PRESSURE SIGNAL 30 T147 20DG/YL 2C PRESSURE SIGNAL 31 T38 20YL/BR LINE PRESSURE SIGNAL 32 T14 20DG/BR OUTPUT SPEED SIGNAL 33 T52 20DG/OR INPUT SPEED SIGNAL 34 T13 20DG/VT SPEED SENSOR GROUND 35 T54 20DG/OR TRANSMISSION TEMPERATURE SIGNAL 36 37 T42 20DG/YL TRS T42 SIGNAL 38 T16 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT Component Location - 29 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 198 > Page 314 Component Location - 6 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 198 > Page 315 Connector: Name : MODULE-POWERTRAIN CONTROL C4 Color : BLACK/GREEN # of pins : 38 Qualifier : (GAS) Pin Circuit Description 1 T60 20YL/GY OD SOLENOID CONTROL 2 T259 20YL/DG 4C CONTROL 2 T59 20YL/LB UD CONTROL 3-- Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 198 > Page 316 4 T140 20YL/GY MS CONTROL 5-6 T219 20YL/LG 2C CONTROL 6 T19 18YL/DB 2/4 SOLENOID CONTROL 7-8 T59 20YL/LB UD CONTROL 9-10 T20 20DG/WT L/R CONTROL 11 T118 20DG LP VFS CONTROL 12 Z908 18BK GROUND 13 Z977 18BK GROUND 14 Z904 18BK GROUND 15 T1 20DG/LB TRS T1 SIGNAL 16 T3 20DG/DB TRS T3 SIGNAL 17 T6 20DG TOW/HAUL OVERDRIVE OFF SWITCH SIGNAL 18 T515 20YL/DB TRANSMISSION CONTROL 19 T16 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT 20 T48 20BR/YL 4C PRESSURE SIGNAL 21 T29 20YL/WT UD PRESSURE SIGNAL 22 T9 20DG/TN OD PRESSURE SIGNAL 23 - 24 - 25 - 26 T4 20DG/LB TRS T2 SIGNAL 27 - 28 T16 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT 29 T50 20DG/PK L/R PRESSURE SIGNAL 30 T147 20DG/YL 2C PRESSURE SIGNAL 30 T47 18YL/DG 2/4 PRESSURE SIGNAL 31 T38 20YL/BR LINE PRESSURE SIGNAL 32 T14 20DG/BR OUTPUT SPEED SIGNAL 33 T52 20DG/OR INPUT SPEED SIGNAL 34 T13 20DG/VT SPEED SENSOR GROUND 35 T54 20DG/OR TRANSMISSION TEMPERATURE SIGNAL 36 - 37 T42 20DG/YL TRS T42 SIGNAL 38 T16 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT Component Location - 29 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 198 > Page 317 Component Location - 6 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 198 > Page 318 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Engine Control Module: Diagram Information and Instructions Warnings WARNINGS - GENERAL WARNINGS provide information to prevent personal injury and vehicle damage. Below is a list of general warnings that should be followed any time a vehicle is being serviced. WARNING: Always wear safety glasses for eye protection. WARNING: Use safety stands anytime a procedure requires being under a vehicle. WARNING: Be sure that the ignition switch always is in the off position, unless the procedure requires it to be on. WARNING: Set the parking brake when working on any vehicle. An automatic transmission should be in park. A manual transmission should be in neutral. WARNING: Operate the engine only in a well-ventilated area. WARNING: Keep away from moving parts when the engine is running, especially the fan and belts. WARNING: To prevent serious burns, avoid contact with hot parts such as the radiator, exhaust manifold(s), tail pipe, catalytic converter and muffler. WARNING: Do not allow flame or sparks near the battery. Gases are always present in and around the battery. WARNING: Always remove rings, watches, loose hanging jewelry and avoid loose clothing. How to Use Wiring Diagrams DESCRIPTION - HOW TO USE WIRING DIAGRAMS DaimlerChrysler Corporation wiring diagrams are designed to provide information regarding the vehicles wiring content. In order to effectively use the wiring diagrams to diagnose and repair DaimlerChrysler Corporation vehicles, it is important to understand all of their features and characteristics. Diagrams are arranged such that the power (B+) side of the circuit is placed near the top of the page, and the ground (B-) side of the circuit is placed near the bottom of the page. All switches, components, and modules are shown in the at rest position with the doors closed and the key removed from the ignition. Components are shown two ways. A solid line around a component indicates that the component is complete. A dashed line around the component indicates that the component is being shown is not complete. Incomplete components have a reference number to indicate the page where the component is shown complete. It is important to realize that no attempt is made on the diagrams to represent components and wiring as they appear on the vehicle. For example, a short piece of wire is treated the same as a long one. In addition, switches and other components are shown as simply as possible, with regard to function only. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 321 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 322 SYMBOLS International symbols are used throughout the wiring diagrams. These symbols are consistent with those being used around the world. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 323 TERMINOLOGY This is a list of terms and definitions used in the wiring diagrams. LHD - Left Hand Drive Vehicles RHD - Right Hand Drive Vehicles ATX - Automatic Transmissions-Front Wheel Drive MTX Manual Transmissions-Front Wheel Drive Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 324 AT - Automatic Transmissions-Rear Wheel Drive MT - Manual Transmissions-Rear Wheel Drive SOHC - Single Over Head Cam Engine DOHC - Double Over Head Cam Engine Export - Vehicles Built For Sale In Markets Other Than North America Except Export - Vehicles Built For Sale In North America Circuit Functions DESCRIPTION - CIRCUIT FUNCTIONS All circuits in the diagrams use an alpha/numeric code to identify the wire and it's function. To identify which circuit code applies to a system, refer to the Circuit Identification Code Chart. This chart shows the main circuits only and does not show the secondary codes that may apply to some models. Circuit Information DESCRIPTION - CIRCUIT INFORMATION Each wire shown in the diagrams contains a code which identifies the main circuit, a specific part of the main circuit, gage of wire, and color. An example would be A 2 18 LB/YL. This is a Battery Feed circuit, level two, eighteen gauge, light blue with a yellow tracer. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 325 Connector, Ground and Splice Information DESCRIPTION - CONNECTOR, GROUND AND SPLICE INFORMATION CAUTION: Not all connectors are serviced. Some connectors are serviced only with a harness. A typical example might be the Supplemental Restraint System connectors. Always check parts availability before attempting a repair. IDENTIFICATION In-line connectors are identified by a number, as follows: - In-line connectors located in the engine compartment are C100 series numbers. - In-line connectors located in the instrument panel area are C200 series numbers. - In-line connectors located in the body are C300 series numbers. - Jumper harness connectors are C400 series numbers. - Grounds and ground connectors are identified with a "G" and follow the same series numbering as the in-line connectors. - Splices are identified with an "S" and follow the same series numbering as the in-line connectors. In addition, S001-S099 numbers are located in the engine compartment. - Component connectors are identified by the component name instead of a number. Multiple connectors on a component use a C1, C2, etc. identifier. LOCATIONS Vehicle/Locations contains the master connector/ground/splice location index charts with hyperlinks to the applicable location illustrations. The illustrations contain the connector name (or number)/ground number/splice number and component identification. The abbreviation T/O is used in the component location section to indicate a point in which the wiring harness branches out to a component. The abbreviation N/S means Not Shown in the illustrations Section Identification and Information DESCRIPTION - SECTION IDENTIFICATION AND INFORMATION The wiring diagrams are grouped into individual sections. If a component is most likely found in a particular group, it will be shown complete (all wires, Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 326 connectors, and pins) within that group. For example, the Auto Shutdown Relay is most likely to be found in Powertrain Management, so it is shown there complete. It can, however, be shown partially in another group if it contains some associated wiring. Splice diagrams show the entire splice and provide references to other sections the splices serves. Splice Information only contains splice diagrams that are not shown in their entirety somewhere else in the wiring diagrams. Connector Pin-Outs shows each connector and the circuits involved with that connector. The connectors are identified using the name/number on the diagram pages. Removal REMOVAL 1. Disconnect battery. 2. Release Connector Lock (2). 3. Disconnect the connector (3) being repaired from its mating half/component. 4. Remove the dress cover (if applicable) (1). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 327 5. Release the Secondary Terminal Lock, if required (1). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 328 6. Position the connector locking finger away from the terminal using the proper special tool. Pull on the wire to remove the terminal from the connector. Installation Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 329 INSTALLATION 1. Insert the removed terminal in the same cavity on the repair connector. 2. Repeat steps for each terminal in the connector, being sure that all wires are inserted into the proper cavities. For additional connector pin-out identification, refer to the wiring diagrams. 3. When the connector is re-assembled, the secondary terminal lock must be placed in the locked position to prevent terminal push out. 4. Replace dress cover (if applicable). 5. Connect connector to its mating half/component. 6. Connect battery and test all affected systems. Removal REMOVAL 1. Disconnect the battery. 2. Locate the diode in the harness, and remove the protective covering. 3. Remove the diode from the harness, pay attention to the current flow direction (1) (2) (3). Installation INSTALLATION 1. Remove the insulation from the wires in the harness. Only remove enough insulation to solder in the new diode. 2. Install the new diode in the harness, making sure current flow is correct. If necessary, refer to the appropriate wiring diagram for current flow. 3. Solder the connection together using rosin core type solder only. Do not use acid core solder. 4. Tape the diode to the harness using electrical tape. Make sure the diode is completely sealed from the elements. 5. Re-connect the battery and test affected systems. Removal REMOVAL 1. Follow steps for removing terminals described in the connector removal section. 2. Cut the wire 6 inches from the back of the connector. Installation INSTALLATION 1. Select a wire from the terminal repair kit that best matches the color and gage of the wire being repaired. 2. Cut the repair wire to the proper length and remove one-half (1/2) inch of insulation. 3. Splice the repair wire to the wire harness (see wire splicing procedure). See: Service Procedures/Wire Splicing 4. Insert the repaired wire into the connector. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 330 5. Install the connector locking wedge, if required, and reconnect the connector to its mating half/component. 6. Re-tape the wire harness starting at 1-1/2 inches behind the connector and 2 inches past the repair. 7. Connect battery and test all affected systems. Wire Splicing STANDARD PROCEDURE - WIRE SPLICING When splicing a wire, it is important that the correct gage be used as shown in the wiring diagrams. 1. Remove one-half (1/2) inch of insulation from each wire that needs to be spliced. 2. Place a piece of adhesive lined heat shrink tubing on one side of the wire. Make sure the tubing will be long enough to cover and seal the entire repair area. 3. Place the strands of wire overlapping each other inside of the splice clip (1). 4. Using crimping tool (1), Mopar p/n 05019912AA, crimp the splice clip and wires together. 5. Solder (3) the connection (2) together using rosin core type solder (1) only. CAUTION: DO NOT USE ACID CORE SOLDER. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 331 6. Center the heat shrink tubing (2) over the joint and heat using a heat gun. Heat the joint until the tubing is tightly sealed and sealant (1) comes out of both ends of the tubing. Special Tools WIRING/TERMINAL PROBING TOOL PACKAGE 6807 TERMINAL PICK TOOL SET 6680 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 332 TERMINAL REMOVING TOOLS 6932 AND 8638 TERMINAL REMOVING TOOL 6934 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 333 Engine Control Module: Diagnostic Aids Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) Sensitive Devices STANDARD PROCEDURE - ELECTROSTATIC DISCHARGE (ESD) SENSITIVE DEVICES All ESD sensitive components are solid state and a symbol is used to indicate this. When handling any component with this symbol, comply with the following procedures to reduce the possibility of electrostatic charge build up on the body and inadvertent discharge into the component. If it is not known whether the part is ESD sensitive, assume that it is. 1. Always touch a known good ground before handling the part. This should be repeated while handling the part and more frequently after sliding across a seat, sitting down from a standing position, or walking a distance. 2. Avoid touching electrical terminals of the part, unless instructed to do so by a written procedure. 3. When using a voltmeter, be sure to connect the ground lead first. 4. Do not remove the part from it's protective packing until it is time to install the part. 5. Before removing the part from it's package, ground the package to a known good ground on the vehicle. Testing Of Voltage Potential STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING OF VOLTAGE POTENTIAL 1. Connect the ground lead of a voltmeter to a known good ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the voltmeter to the selected test point. The vehicle ignition may need to be turned ON to check voltage. Refer to the appropriate test procedure. Testing For Continuity Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 334 STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING FOR CONTINUITY 1. Remove the fuse (1) for the circuit being checked or, disconnect the battery. 2. Connect one lead of the ohmmeter to one side of the circuit being tested 3. Connect the other lead to the other end of the circuit being tested. Low or no resistance means good continuity. Testing For A Short To Ground STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING FOR A SHORT TO GROUND 1. Remove the fuse and disconnect all items involved with the fuse. 2. Connect a test light or a voltmeter across the terminals of the fuse. 3. Starting at the fuse block, wiggle the wiring harness about six to eight inches apart and watch the voltmeter/test lamp. 4. If the voltmeter registers voltage or the test lamp glows, there is a short to ground in that general area of the wiring harness. Testing For A Short To Ground On Fuses Powering Several Loads STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING FOR A SHORT TO GROUND ON FUSES POWERING SEVERAL LOADS 1. Refer to the wiring diagrams and disconnect or isolate all items on the suspected fused circuits. 2. Replace the blown fuse. 3. Supply power to the fuse by turning ON the ignition switch or re-connecting the battery. 4. Start connecting or energizing the items in the fuse circuit one at a time. When the fuse blows the circuit with the short to ground has been isolated. Testing For A Voltage Drop STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING FOR A VOLTAGE DROP Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 335 1. Connect the positive lead of the voltmeter to the side of the circuit closest to the battery. 2. Connect the other lead of the voltmeter to the other side of the switch, component or circuit. 3. Operate the item. 4. The voltmeter will show the difference in voltage between the two points. Troubleshooting Wiring Problems DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING - WIRING HARNESS TROUBLESHOOTING TOOLS When diagnosing a problem in an electrical circuit there are several common tools necessary. These tools are listed and explained below. - Jumper Wire - This is a test wire used to connect two points of a circuit. It can be used to bypass an open in a circuit. WARNING: Never use a jumper wire across a load, such as a motor, connected between a battery feed and ground. - Voltmeter - Used to check for voltage on a circuit. Always connect the black lead to a known good ground and the red lead to the positive side of the circuit. CAUTION: Most of the electrical components used in today's vehicles are Solid State. When checking voltages in these circuits, use a meter with a 10 - megohm or greater impedance rating. - Ohmmeter - Used to check the resistance between two points of a circuit. Low or no resistance in a circuit means good continuity. CAUTION: Most of the electrical components used in today's vehicles are Solid State. When checking resistance in these circuits use a meter with a 10 - megohm or greater impedance rating. In addition, make sure the power is disconnected from the circuit. Circuits that are powered up by the vehicle's electrical system can cause damage to the equipment and provide false readings. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 336 - Probing Tools - These tools are used for probing terminals in connectors. Select the proper size tool from Special Tool Package 6807, and insert the probing end (2) into the terminal being tested. Use the other end of the tool (1) to insert the meter probe. INTERMITTENT AND POOR CONNECTIONS Most intermittent electrical problems are caused by faulty electrical connections or wiring. It is also possible for a sticking component or relay to cause a problem. Before condemning a component or wiring assembly, check the following items. - Connectors are fully seated - Spread terminals, or terminal push out - Terminals in the wiring assembly are fully seated into the connector/component and locked into position - Dirt or corrosion on the terminals. Any amount of corrosion or dirt could cause an intermittent problem - Damaged connector/component casing exposing the item to dirt or moisture - Wire insulation that has rubbed through causing a short to ground - Some or all of the wiring strands broken inside of the insulation - Wiring broken inside of the insulation TROUBLESHOOTING WIRING PROBLEMS When troubleshooting wiring problems there are six steps which can aid in the procedure. The steps are listed and explained below. Always check for non-factory items added to the vehicle before doing any diagnosis. If the vehicle is equipped with these items, disconnect them to verify these add-on items are not the cause of the problem. 1. Verify the problem. 2. Verify any related symptoms. Do this by performing operational checks on components that are in the same circuit. Refer to the wiring diagrams. 3. Analyze the symptoms. Use the wiring diagrams to determine what the circuit is doing, where the problem most likely is occurring and where the diagnosis will continue. 4. Isolate the problem area. 5. Repair the problem area. 6. Verify the proper operation. For this step, check for proper operation of all items on the repaired circuit. Refer to the wiring diagrams. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 337 Engine Control Module: Connector Views Component ID 198 Component ID: 198 Component : MODULE-POWERTRAIN CONTROL Connector: Name : MODULE-POWERTRAIN CONTROL C1 Color : BLACK/BLACK # of pins : 38 Qualifier : (DIESEL) Pin Circuit Description 12345- 6789-10 11 F1 20PK/WT FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) 12 F1 20PK/WT FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) 13 14 15 16 17 - Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 338 18 - - 19 T160 20DG/WT SENSOR GROUND 20 T5 20DG/YL AUTOSTICK (ERS)-TOW/HAUL SIGNAL 21 22 23 24 25 26 - 27 F856 20YL/PK 5 VOLT SUPPLY 28 29 A918 20RD FUSED B(+) 30 T751 20YL IGNITION START 31 32 33 34 D65 20WT/LG CAN C BUS (+) 35 D64 20WT/LB CAN C BUS (-) 36 38 Component Location - 29 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 339 Component Location - 6 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 340 Connector: Name : MODULE-POWERTRAIN CONTROL C1 Color : BLACK/BLACK # of pins : 38 Qualifier : (GAS) Pin Circuit Description 1 K98 18DB/YL COIL CONTROL NO. 8 2-3 K97 18DB/YL COIL CONTROL NO. 7 3 K97 18BR COIL CONTROL NO. 7 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 341 4 K28 18BR/LB INJECTOR CONTROL NO. 8 5 K26 18BR/YL INJECTOR CONTROL NO. 7 6-7-8-9 Z130 16BK/BR GROUND 10 A918 16RD FUSED B(+) 11 F202 20PK/GY FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) 12 F1 20PK/WT FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (OFF-RUN-START) 13 - 14 - 15 - 16 - 17 - 18 Z131 16BK/DG GROUND 19 Z951 16BK/YL GROUND 20 G6 16VT/GY OIL PRESSURE SIGNAL 21 - 22 - 23 - 24 A804 18RD/GY GEN SENSE 25 - 26 - 27 F856 20YL/PK 5 VOLT SUPPLY 28 K452 20BR/LB MDS SOL CONTROL NO. 4 29 A918 16RD FUSED B(+) 30 T751 20YL IGNITION START 31 K141 20DB/YL O2 1/2 SIGNAL 32 K902 20BR/DG O2 RETURN (UPSTREAM) 33 K243 20BR O2 2/2 SIGNAL 34 D65 20WT/LG CAN C BUS (+) 35 D64 20WT/LB CAN C BUS (-) 36 - 37 - 38 K342 16BR/WT ASD CONTROL OUTPUT Component Location - 29 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 342 Component Location - 6 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 343 Connector: Name : MODULE-POWERTRAIN CONTROL C2 Color : BLACK/ORANGE # of pins : 38 Qualifier : (GAS) Pin Circuit Description 1 K10 18DB/OR COIL CONTROL NO. 6 2 K16 18DB/YL COIL CONTROL NO. 5 3 K15 18DB/GY COIL CONTROL NO. 4 4 K58 18BR/VT INJECTOR CONTROL NO. 6 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 344 5 K38 18BR/OR INJECTOR CONTROL NO. 5 6 K447 20TN/YL ETC MOTOR (+) 7 K18 18DB/OR COIL CONTROL NO. 3 8 K35 20DB/VT EGR SOL CONTROL 9 K17 18DB/TN COIL CONTROL NO. 2 10 K19 18DB/DG COIL CONTROL NO. 1 11 K14 18BR/TN INJECTOR CONTROL NO. 4 12 K13 18BR/LB INJECTOR CONTROL NO. 3 13 K12 18BR/DB INJECTOR CONTROL NO. 2 14 K11 18BR/YL INJECTOR CONTROL NO. 1 15 K922 20BR/DB TP SENSOR RETURN 16 K453 20BR/DG MDS SOL CONTROL NO. 6 17 K199 20BR/VT O2 2/1 HEATER CONTROL 18 K99 20BR/LG O2 1/1 HEATER CONTROL SUPPLY 19 K20 18BR/GY GEN FIELD CONTROL 20 K2 20VT/OR ECT SIGNAL 21 K22 20BR/OR TP NO. 1 SIGNAL 22 K34 20DB/LG EGR SIGNAL 23 K1 20VT/BR MAP SIGNAL 24 K942 20BR/LG KNOCK SENSOR NO. 1 RETURN 25 K42 20DB/YL KNOCK SENSOR NO. 1 SIGNAL 26 - 27 K900 20DB/DG SENSOR GROUND 28 K122 20BR/DG TP NO. 2 SIGNAL 29 F855 20PK/YL 5 VOLT SUPPLY 30 K21 20DB/LG IAT SIGNAL 31 K41 20DB/LB O2 1/1 SIGNAL 32 K904 20DB/DG O2 RETURN (DOWNSTREAM) 33 K43 20DB/LG O2 2/1 SIGNAL 34 K44 20DB/GY CMP SIGNAL 35 K24 20BR/LB CKP SIGNAL 36 K242 20BR/WT KNOCK SENSOR NO. 2 SIGNAL 37 K924 20WT/BR KNOCK SENSOR NO. 2 RETURN 38 K448 20TN/OR ETC MOTOR (-) Component Location - 29 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 345 Component Location - 6 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 346 Connector: Name : MODULE-POWERTRAIN CONTROL C3 Color : BLACK/NATURAL # of pins : 38 Qualifier : (GAS) Pin Circuit Description 1-2-3 K51 20BR/WT ASD CONTROL 4-- Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 347 5 V35 20VT/OR S/C VENT SOL CONTROL 5 K454 20BR/OR MDS SOL CONTROL NO. 7 6 K451 20BR/WT MDS SOL CONTROL NO. 1 7 V32 20VT/YL SPEED CONTROL SUPPLY 8-9 K299 20BR/WT O2 1/2 HEATER CONTROL SUPPLY 10 K399 18BR/GY O2 2/2 HEATER CONTROL 11 C13 20LB/OR A/C CLUTCH CONTROL 12 V36 20VT/YL S/C VACUUM SOL CONTROL 13 - 14 V32 20VT/YL BRAKE SWITCH NO. 2 SIGNAL 15 V937 20VT/BR S/C SWITCH RETURN 16 K167 20BR/YL APPS NO. 1 RETURN 17 K400 20BR/VT APPS NO. 2 RETURN 18 V38 20VT/OR S/C SWITCH NO. 2 SIGNAL 19 K342 16BR/WT ASD CONTROL OUTPUT 20 K52 20DB/WT EVAP PURGE SOL CONTROL 21 T41 20YL/DB TRS T41 SIGNAL (P/N) 22 G113 20VT PTO SENSE 22 G113 18PK/YL PTO SENSE 23 B29 20DG/WT BRAKE SWITCH NO. 1 SIGNAL 24 - 25 K23 20BR/WT APPS NO. 1 SIGNAL 26 - 27 T5 20DG/YL AUTOSTICK (ERS)-TOW/HAUL SIGNAL 28 K342 16BR/WT ASD CONTROL OUTPUT 29 K70 20DB/BR EVAP PURGE SOL SIGNAL 30 K66 20DB/WT P/S SWITCH SIGNAL 31 - 32 - 33 G24 20VT/BR OIL TEMPERATURE SIGNAL 34 V37 20VT S/C SWITCH NO. 1 SIGNAL 35 K107 20VT/WT ESM SIGNAL 36 K29 20WT/BR APPS NO. 2 SIGNAL 37 K31 20BR FUEL PUMP CONTROL 38 T752 20DG/OR STARTER SOLENOID CONTROL Component Location - 29 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 348 Component Location - 6 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 349 Connector: Name : MODULE-POWERTRAIN CONTROL C4 Color : BLACK/GREEN # of pins : 38 Qualifier : (DIESEL) Pin Circuit Description 1 T160 20YL/GY SENSOR GROUND 2 T259 20YL/DG 4C CONTROL 3- Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 350 4 T140 20YL/GY MS CONTROL 56 T219 20YL/LG 2C CONTROL 78 T59 20YL/LB UD CONTROL 910 T20 20DG/BK L/R CONTROL 11 T118 20DG LP VFS CONTROL 12 Z133 18BK/LG GROUND 13 Z133 18BK/LG GROUND 14 Z133 18BK/LG GROUND 15 T1 20DG/LB TRS T1 SIGNAL 16 T3 20DG/DB TRS T3 SIGNAL 17 T6 20DG TOW/HAUL OVERDRIVE OFF SWITCH SIGNAL 18 T515 20YL/DB TRANSMISSION CONTROL 19 T16 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT 20 T48 20BR/YL 4C PRESSURE SIGNAL 21 T29 20YL/WT UD PRESSURE SIGNAL 22 T9 20DG/TN OD PRESSURE SIGNAL 23 24 25 26 T4 20DG/LB TRS T2 SIGNAL 27 T41 20YL/DB TRS T41 SIGNAL (P/N) 28 T16 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT 29 T50 20DG/PK L/R PRESSURE SIGNAL 30 T147 20DG/YL 2C PRESSURE SIGNAL 31 T38 20YL/BR LINE PRESSURE SIGNAL 32 T14 20DG/BR OUTPUT SPEED SIGNAL 33 T52 20DG/OR INPUT SPEED SIGNAL 34 T13 20DG/VT SPEED SENSOR GROUND 35 T54 20DG/OR TRANSMISSION TEMPERATURE SIGNAL 36 37 T42 20DG/YL TRS T42 SIGNAL 38 T16 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT Component Location - 29 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 351 Component Location - 6 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 352 Connector: Name : MODULE-POWERTRAIN CONTROL C4 Color : BLACK/GREEN # of pins : 38 Qualifier : (GAS) Pin Circuit Description 1 T60 20YL/GY OD SOLENOID CONTROL 2 T259 20YL/DG 4C CONTROL 2 T59 20YL/LB UD CONTROL 3-- Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 353 4 T140 20YL/GY MS CONTROL 5-6 T219 20YL/LG 2C CONTROL 6 T19 18YL/DB 2/4 SOLENOID CONTROL 7-8 T59 20YL/LB UD CONTROL 9-10 T20 20DG/WT L/R CONTROL 11 T118 20DG LP VFS CONTROL 12 Z908 18BK GROUND 13 Z977 18BK GROUND 14 Z904 18BK GROUND 15 T1 20DG/LB TRS T1 SIGNAL 16 T3 20DG/DB TRS T3 SIGNAL 17 T6 20DG TOW/HAUL OVERDRIVE OFF SWITCH SIGNAL 18 T515 20YL/DB TRANSMISSION CONTROL 19 T16 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT 20 T48 20BR/YL 4C PRESSURE SIGNAL 21 T29 20YL/WT UD PRESSURE SIGNAL 22 T9 20DG/TN OD PRESSURE SIGNAL 23 - 24 - 25 - 26 T4 20DG/LB TRS T2 SIGNAL 27 - 28 T16 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT 29 T50 20DG/PK L/R PRESSURE SIGNAL 30 T147 20DG/YL 2C PRESSURE SIGNAL 30 T47 18YL/DG 2/4 PRESSURE SIGNAL 31 T38 20YL/BR LINE PRESSURE SIGNAL 32 T14 20DG/BR OUTPUT SPEED SIGNAL 33 T52 20DG/OR INPUT SPEED SIGNAL 34 T13 20DG/VT SPEED SENSOR GROUND 35 T54 20DG/OR TRANSMISSION TEMPERATURE SIGNAL 36 - 37 T42 20DG/YL TRS T42 SIGNAL 38 T16 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT Component Location - 29 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 354 Component Location - 6 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 355 Component ID 211 Component ID: 211 Component : MODULE-POWERTRAIN CONTROL Connector: Name : MODULE-POWERTRAIN CONTROL C1 Color : BLACK/BLACK # of pins : 38 Qualifier : (DIESEL) Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 356 Pin Circuit Description 123456789-10 11 F1 20PK/WT FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) 12 F1 20PK/WT FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) 13 14 15 16 17 18 - 19 T160 20DG/WT SENSOR GROUND 20 T5 20DG/YL AUTOSTICK (ERS)-TOW/HAUL SIGNAL 21 22 23 24 25 26 - 27 F856 20YL/PK 5 VOLT SUPPLY 28 29 A918 20RD FUSED B(+) 30 T751 20YL IGNITION START 31 - 32 33 34 D65 20WT/LG CAN C BUS (+) 35 D64 20WT/LB CAN C BUS (-) 36 38 Component Location - 29 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 357 Component Location - 6 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 358 Connector: Name : MODULE-POWERTRAIN CONTROL C1 Color : BLACK/BLACK # of pins : 38 Qualifier : (GAS) Pin Circuit Description 1 K98 18DB/YL COIL CONTROL NO. 8 2-3 K97 18DB/YL COIL CONTROL NO. 7 3 K97 18BR COIL CONTROL NO. 7 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 359 4 K28 18BR/LB INJECTOR CONTROL NO. 8 5 K26 18BR/YL INJECTOR CONTROL NO. 7 6-7-8-9 Z130 16BK/BR GROUND 10 A918 16RD FUSED B(+) 11 F202 20PK/GY FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) 12 F1 20PK/WT FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (OFF-RUN-START) 13 - 14 - 15 - 16 - 17 - 18 Z131 16BK/DG GROUND 19 Z951 16BK/YL GROUND 20 G6 16VT/GY OIL PRESSURE SIGNAL 21 - 22 - 23 - 24 A804 18RD/GY GEN SENSE 25 - 26 - 27 F856 20YL/PK 5 VOLT SUPPLY 28 K452 20BR/LB MDS SOL CONTROL NO. 4 29 A918 16RD FUSED B(+) 30 T751 20YL IGNITION START 31 K141 20DB/YL O2 1/2 SIGNAL 32 K902 20BR/DG O2 RETURN (UPSTREAM) 33 K243 20BR O2 2/2 SIGNAL 34 D65 20WT/LG CAN C BUS (+) 35 D64 20WT/LB CAN C BUS (-) 36 - 37 - 38 K342 16BR/WT ASD CONTROL OUTPUT Component Location - 29 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 360 Component Location - 6 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 361 Connector: Name : MODULE-POWERTRAIN CONTROL C2 Color : BLACK/ORANGE # of pins : 38 Qualifier : (GAS) Pin Circuit Description 1 K10 18DB/OR COIL CONTROL NO. 6 2 K16 18DB/YL COIL CONTROL NO. 5 3 K15 18DB/GY COIL CONTROL NO. 4 4 K58 18BR/VT INJECTOR CONTROL NO. 6 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 362 5 K38 18BR/OR INJECTOR CONTROL NO. 5 6 K447 20TN/YL ETC MOTOR (+) 7 K18 18DB/OR COIL CONTROL NO. 3 8 K35 20DB/VT EGR SOL CONTROL 9 K17 18DB/TN COIL CONTROL NO. 2 10 K19 18DB/DG COIL CONTROL NO. 1 11 K14 18BR/TN INJECTOR CONTROL NO. 4 12 K13 18BR/LB INJECTOR CONTROL NO. 3 13 K12 18BR/DB INJECTOR CONTROL NO. 2 14 K11 18BR/YL INJECTOR CONTROL NO. 1 15 K922 20BR/DB TP SENSOR RETURN 16 K453 20BR/DG MDS SOL CONTROL NO. 6 17 K199 20BR/VT O2 2/1 HEATER CONTROL 18 K99 20BR/LG O2 1/1 HEATER CONTROL SUPPLY 19 K20 18BR/GY GEN FIELD CONTROL 20 K2 20VT/OR ECT SIGNAL 21 K22 20BR/OR TP NO. 1 SIGNAL 22 K34 20DB/LG EGR SIGNAL 23 K1 20VT/BR MAP SIGNAL 24 K942 20BR/LG KNOCK SENSOR NO. 1 RETURN 25 K42 20DB/YL KNOCK SENSOR NO. 1 SIGNAL 26 - 27 K900 20DB/DG SENSOR GROUND 28 K122 20BR/DG TP NO. 2 SIGNAL 29 F855 20PK/YL 5 VOLT SUPPLY 30 K21 20DB/LG IAT SIGNAL 31 K41 20DB/LB O2 1/1 SIGNAL 32 K904 20DB/DG O2 RETURN (DOWNSTREAM) 33 K43 20DB/LG O2 2/1 SIGNAL 34 K44 20DB/GY CMP SIGNAL 35 K24 20BR/LB CKP SIGNAL 36 K242 20BR/WT KNOCK SENSOR NO. 2 SIGNAL 37 K924 20WT/BR KNOCK SENSOR NO. 2 RETURN 38 K448 20TN/OR ETC MOTOR (-) Component Location - 29 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 363 Component Location - 6 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 364 Connector: Name : MODULE-POWERTRAIN CONTROL C3 Color : BLACK/NATURAL # of pins : 38 Qualifier : (GAS) Pin Circuit Description 1-2-3 K51 20BR/WT ASD CONTROL 4-- Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 365 5 V35 20VT/OR S/C VENT SOL CONTROL 5 K454 20BR/OR MDS SOL CONTROL NO. 7 6 K451 20BR/WT MDS SOL CONTROL NO. 1 7 V32 20VT/YL SPEED CONTROL SUPPLY 8-9 K299 20BR/WT O2 1/2 HEATER CONTROL SUPPLY 10 K399 18BR/GY O2 2/2 HEATER CONTROL 11 C13 20LB/OR A/C CLUTCH CONTROL 12 V36 20VT/YL S/C VACUUM SOL CONTROL 13 - 14 V32 20VT/YL BRAKE SWITCH NO. 2 SIGNAL 15 V937 20VT/BR S/C SWITCH RETURN 16 K167 20BR/YL APPS NO. 1 RETURN 17 K400 20BR/VT APPS NO. 2 RETURN 18 V38 20VT/OR S/C SWITCH NO. 2 SIGNAL 19 K342 16BR/WT ASD CONTROL OUTPUT 20 K52 20DB/WT EVAP PURGE SOL CONTROL 21 T41 20YL/DB TRS T41 SIGNAL (P/N) 22 G113 20VT PTO SENSE 22 G113 18PK/YL PTO SENSE 23 B29 20DG/WT BRAKE SWITCH NO. 1 SIGNAL 24 - 25 K23 20BR/WT APPS NO. 1 SIGNAL 26 - 27 T5 20DG/YL AUTOSTICK (ERS)-TOW/HAUL SIGNAL 28 K342 16BR/WT ASD CONTROL OUTPUT 29 K70 20DB/BR EVAP PURGE SOL SIGNAL 30 K66 20DB/WT P/S SWITCH SIGNAL 31 - 32 - 33 G24 20VT/BR OIL TEMPERATURE SIGNAL 34 V37 20VT S/C SWITCH NO. 1 SIGNAL 35 K107 20VT/WT ESM SIGNAL 36 K29 20WT/BR APPS NO. 2 SIGNAL 37 K31 20BR FUEL PUMP CONTROL 38 T752 20DG/OR STARTER SOLENOID CONTROL Component Location - 29 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 366 Component Location - 6 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 367 Connector: Name : MODULE-POWERTRAIN CONTROL C4 Color : BLACK/GREEN # of pins : 38 Qualifier : (DIESEL) Pin Circuit Description 1 T160 20YL/GY SENSOR GROUND 2 T259 20YL/DG 4C CONTROL 3- Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 368 4 T140 20YL/GY MS CONTROL 56 T219 20YL/LG 2C CONTROL 78 T59 20YL/LB UD CONTROL 910 T20 20DG/BK L/R CONTROL 11 T118 20DG LP VFS CONTROL 12 Z133 18BK/LG GROUND 13 Z133 18BK/LG GROUND 14 Z133 18BK/LG GROUND 15 T1 20DG/LB TRS T1 SIGNAL 16 T3 20DG/DB TRS T3 SIGNAL 17 T6 20DG TOW/HAUL OVERDRIVE OFF SWITCH SIGNAL 18 T515 20YL/DB TRANSMISSION CONTROL 19 T16 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT 20 T48 20BR/YL 4C PRESSURE SIGNAL 21 T29 20YL/WT UD PRESSURE SIGNAL 22 T9 20DG/TN OD PRESSURE SIGNAL 23 24 25 26 T4 20DG/LB TRS T2 SIGNAL 27 T41 20YL/DB TRS T41 SIGNAL (P/N) 28 T16 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT 29 T50 20DG/PK L/R PRESSURE SIGNAL 30 T147 20DG/YL 2C PRESSURE SIGNAL 31 T38 20YL/BR LINE PRESSURE SIGNAL 32 T14 20DG/BR OUTPUT SPEED SIGNAL 33 T52 20DG/OR INPUT SPEED SIGNAL 34 T13 20DG/VT SPEED SENSOR GROUND 35 T54 20DG/OR TRANSMISSION TEMPERATURE SIGNAL 36 37 T42 20DG/YL TRS T42 SIGNAL 38 T16 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT Component Location - 29 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 369 Component Location - 6 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 370 Connector: Name : MODULE-POWERTRAIN CONTROL C4 Color : BLACK/GREEN # of pins : 38 Qualifier : (GAS) Pin Circuit Description 1 T60 20YL/GY OD SOLENOID CONTROL 2 T259 20YL/DG 4C CONTROL 2 T59 20YL/LB UD CONTROL 3-- Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 371 4 T140 20YL/GY MS CONTROL 5-6 T219 20YL/LG 2C CONTROL 6 T19 18YL/DB 2/4 SOLENOID CONTROL 7-8 T59 20YL/LB UD CONTROL 9-10 T20 20DG/WT L/R CONTROL 11 T118 20DG LP VFS CONTROL 12 Z908 18BK GROUND 13 Z977 18BK GROUND 14 Z904 18BK GROUND 15 T1 20DG/LB TRS T1 SIGNAL 16 T3 20DG/DB TRS T3 SIGNAL 17 T6 20DG TOW/HAUL OVERDRIVE OFF SWITCH SIGNAL 18 T515 20YL/DB TRANSMISSION CONTROL 19 T16 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT 20 T48 20BR/YL 4C PRESSURE SIGNAL 21 T29 20YL/WT UD PRESSURE SIGNAL 22 T9 20DG/TN OD PRESSURE SIGNAL 23 - 24 - 25 - 26 T4 20DG/LB TRS T2 SIGNAL 27 - 28 T16 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT 29 T50 20DG/PK L/R PRESSURE SIGNAL 30 T147 20DG/YL 2C PRESSURE SIGNAL 30 T47 18YL/DG 2/4 PRESSURE SIGNAL 31 T38 20YL/BR LINE PRESSURE SIGNAL 32 T14 20DG/BR OUTPUT SPEED SIGNAL 33 T52 20DG/OR INPUT SPEED SIGNAL 34 T13 20DG/VT SPEED SENSOR GROUND 35 T54 20DG/OR TRANSMISSION TEMPERATURE SIGNAL 36 - 37 T42 20DG/YL TRS T42 SIGNAL 38 T16 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT Component Location - 29 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 372 Component Location - 6 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 373 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Powertrain Control Module - Description Engine Control Module: Description and Operation Powertrain Control Module - Description Powertrain Control Module (PCM) POWERTRAIN CONTROL MODULE (PCM) The Powertrain Control Module (PCM) is located in the right-rear section of the engine compartment under the cowl. Two different PCM's are used (JTEC and NGC). These can be easily identified. JTEC's use three 32-way connectors, NGC's use four 38-way connectors Modes Of Operation MODES OF OPERATION As input signals to the Powertrain Control Module (PCM) change, the PCM adjusts its response to the output devices. For example, the PCM must calculate different injector pulse width and ignition timing for idle than it does for wide open throttle (WOT). The PCM will operate in two different modes: Open Loop and Closed Loop. During Open Loop modes, the PCM receives input signals and responds only according to preset PCM programming. Input from the oxygen (O2S) sensors is not monitored during Open Loop modes. During Closed Loop modes, the PCM will monitor the oxygen (O2S) sensors input. This input indicates to the PCM whether or not the calculated injector pulse width results in the ideal air-fuel ratio. This ratio is 14.7 parts air-to-1 part fuel. By monitoring the exhaust oxygen content through the O2S sensor, the PCM can fine tune the injector pulse width. This is done to achieve optimum fuel economy combined with low emission engine performance. The fuel injection system has the following modes of operation: - Ignition switch ON - Engine start-up (crank) - Engine warm-up - Idle - Cruise - Acceleration - Deceleration - Wide open throttle (WOT) - Ignition switch OFF The ignition switch On, engine start-up (crank), engine warm-up, acceleration, deceleration and wide open throttle modes are Open Loop modes. The idle and cruise modes, (with the engine at operating temperature) are Closed Loop modes. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Powertrain Control Module - Description > Page 376 IGNITION SWITCH (KEY-ON) MODE This is an Open Loop mode. When the fuel system is activated by the ignition switch, the following actions occur: - The PCM pre-positions the idle air control (IAC) motor. - The PCM determines atmospheric air pressure from the MAP sensor input to determine basic fuel strategy. - The PCM monitors the engine coolant temperature sensor input. The PCM modifies fuel strategy based on this input. - Intake manifold air temperature sensor input is monitored. - Throttle position sensor (TPS) is monitored. - The auto shutdown (ASD) relay is energized by the PCM for approximately three seconds. - The fuel pump is energized through the fuel pump relay by the PCM. The fuel pump will operate for approximately three seconds unless the engine is operating or the starter motor is engaged. - The O2S sensor heater element is energized via the ASD or O2S heater relay. The O2S sensor input is not used by the PCM to calibrate air-fuel ratio during this mode of operation. ENGINE START-UP MODE This is an Open Loop mode. The following actions occur when the starter motor is engaged. The PCM receives inputs from: - Battery voltage - Engine coolant temperature sensor - Crankshaft position sensor - Intake manifold air temperature sensor - Manifold absolute pressure (MAP) sensor - Throttle position sensor (TPS) - Camshaft position sensor signal The PCM monitors the crankshaft position sensor. If the PCM does not receive a crankshaft position sensor signal within 3 seconds of cranking the engine, it will shut down the fuel injection system. The fuel pump is activated by the PCM through the fuel pump relay. Voltage is applied to the fuel injectors with the ASD relay via the PCM. The PCM will then control the injection sequence and injector pulse width by turning the ground circuit to each individual injector on and off. The PCM determines the proper ignition timing according to input received from the crankshaft position sensor. ENGINE WARM-UP MODE This is an Open Loop mode. During engine warm-up, the PCM receives inputs from: - Battery voltage - Crankshaft position sensor - Engine coolant temperature sensor - Intake manifold air temperature sensor - Manifold absolute pressure (MAP) sensor - Throttle position sensor (TPS) - Camshaft position sensor signal - Park/neutral switch (gear indicator signal-auto. trans. only) - Air conditioning select signal (if equipped) - Air conditioning request signal (if equipped) Based on these inputs the following occurs: - Voltage is applied to the fuel injectors with the ASD relay via the PCM. The PCM will then control the injection sequence and injector pulse width by turning the ground circuit to each individual injector on and off. - The PCM adjusts engine idle speed through the idle air control (IAC) motor and adjusts ignition timing. - The PCM operates the A/C compressor clutch through the A/C compressor clutch relay. This is done if A/C has been selected by the vehicle operator and specified pressures are met at the high and low-pressure A/C switches. - When engine has reached operating temperature, the PCM will begin monitoring O2S sensor input. The system will then leave the warm-up mode and go into closed loop operation. IDLE MODE Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Powertrain Control Module - Description > Page 377 When the engine is at operating temperature, this is a Closed Loop mode. At idle speed, the PCM receives inputs from: - Air conditioning select signal (if equipped) - Air conditioning request signal (if equipped) - Battery voltage - Crankshaft position sensor - Engine coolant temperature sensor - Intake manifold air temperature sensor - Manifold absolute pressure (MAP) sensor - Throttle position sensor (TPS) - Camshaft position sensor signal - Battery voltage - Park/neutral switch (gear indicator signal-auto. trans. only) - Oxygen sensors Based on these inputs, the following occurs: - Voltage is applied to the fuel injectors with the ASD relay via the PCM. The PCM will then control injection sequence and injector pulse width by turning the ground circuit to each individual injector on and off. - The PCM monitors the O2S sensor input and adjusts air-fuel ratio by varying injector pulse width. It also adjusts engine idle speed through the idle air control (IAC) motor. - The PCM adjusts ignition timing by increasing and decreasing spark advance. - The PCM operates the A/C compressor clutch through the A/C compressor clutch relay. This is done if A/C has been selected by the vehicle operator and specified pressures are met at the high and low-pressure A/C switches. CRUISE MODE When the engine is at operating temperature, this is a Closed Loop mode. At cruising speed, the PCM receives inputs from: - Air conditioning select signal (if equipped) - Air conditioning request signal (if equipped) - Battery voltage - Engine coolant temperature sensor - Crankshaft position sensor - Intake manifold air temperature sensor - Manifold absolute pressure (MAP) sensor - Throttle position sensor (TPS) - Camshaft position sensor signal - Park/neutral switch (gear indicator signal-auto. trans. only) - Oxygen (O2S) sensors Based on these inputs, the following occurs: - Voltage is applied to the fuel injectors with the ASD relay via the PCM. The PCM will then adjust the injector pulse width by turning the ground circuit to each individual injector on and off. - The PCM monitors the O2S sensor input and adjusts air-fuel ratio. It also adjusts engine idle speed through the idle air control (IAC) motor. - The PCM adjusts ignition timing by turning the ground path to the coil(s) on and off. - The PCM operates the A/C compressor clutch through the clutch relay. This happens if A/C has been selected by the vehicle operator and requested by the A/C thermostat. ACCELERATION MODE This is an Open Loop mode. The PCM recognizes an abrupt increase in throttle position or MAP pressure as a demand for increased engine output and vehicle acceleration. The PCM increases injector pulse width in response to increased throttle opening. DECELERATION MODE When the engine is at operating temperature, this is an Open Loop mode. During hard deceleration, the PCM receives the following inputs. - Air conditioning select signal (if equipped) - Air conditioning request signal (if equipped) - Battery voltage - Engine coolant temperature sensor - Crankshaft position sensor - Intake manifold air temperature sensor Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Powertrain Control Module - Description > Page 378 - Manifold absolute pressure (MAP) sensor - Throttle position sensor (TPS) - Camshaft position sensor signal - Park/neutral switch (gear indicator signal-auto. trans. only) - Vehicle speed If the vehicle is under hard deceleration with the proper rpm and closed throttle conditions, the PCM will ignore the oxygen sensor input signal. The PCM will enter a fuel cut-off strategy in which it will not supply a ground to the injectors. If a hard deceleration does not exist, the PCM will determine the proper injector pulse width and continue injection. Based on the above inputs, the PCM will adjust engine idle speed through the idle air control (IAC) motor. The PCM adjusts ignition timing by turning the ground path to the coil on and off. WIDE OPEN THROTTLE MODE This is an Open Loop mode. During wide open throttle operation, the PCM receives the following inputs. - Battery voltage - Crankshaft position sensor - Engine coolant temperature sensor - Intake manifold air temperature sensor - Manifold absolute pressure (MAP) sensor - Throttle position sensor (TPS) - Camshaft position sensor signal During wide open throttle conditions, the following occurs: - Voltage is applied to the fuel injectors with the ASD relay via the PCM. The PCM will then control the injection sequence and injector pulse width by turning the ground circuit to each individual injector on and off. The PCM ignores the oxygen sensor input signal and provides a predetermined amount of additional fuel. This is done by adjusting injector pulse width. - The PCM adjusts ignition timing by turning the ground path to the coil(s) on and off. IGNITION SWITCH OFF MODE When ignition switch is turned to OFF position, the PCM stops operating the injectors, ignition coil, ASD relay and fuel pump relay. 5 Volt Supplies 5 VOLT SUPPLIES Two different Powertrain Control Module (PCM) five volt supply circuits are used; primary and secondary. Ignition Circuit Sense IGNITION CIRCUIT SENSE This circuit ties the ignition switch to the Powertrain Control Module (PCM). Power Grounds POWER GROUNDS The Powertrain Control Module (PCM) has 2 main grounds. Both of these grounds are referred to as power grounds. All of the high-current, noisy, electrical devices are connected to these grounds as well as all of the sensor returns. The sensor return comes into the sensor return circuit, passes through noise suppression, and is then connected to the power ground. The power ground is used to control ground circuits for the following PCM loads: - Generator field winding - Fuel injectors - Ignition coil(s) - Certain relays/solenoids - Certain sensors Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Powertrain Control Module - Description > Page 379 Sensor Return SENSOR RETURN The Sensor Return circuits are internal to the Powertrain Control Module (PCM). Sensor Return provides a low-noise ground reference for all engine control system sensors. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Powertrain Control Module - Description > Page 380 Engine Control Module: Description and Operation Powertrain Control Module - Operation Powertrain Control Module (PCM) POWERTRAIN CONTROL MODULE (PCM) The PCM operates the fuel system. The PCM is a pre-programmed, triple microprocessor digital computer. It regulates ignition timing, air-fuel ratio, emission control devices, charging system, certain transmission features, speed control, air conditioning compressor clutch engagement and idle speed. The PCM can adapt its programming to meet changing operating conditions. The PCM receives input signals from various switches and sensors. Based on these inputs, the PCM regulates various engine and vehicle operations through different system components. These components are referred to as Powertrain Control Module (PCM) Outputs. The sensors and switches that provide inputs to the PCM are considered Powertrain Control Module (PCM) Inputs. The PCM adjusts ignition timing based upon inputs it receives from sensors that react to: engine rpm, manifold absolute pressure, engine coolant temperature, throttle position, transmission gear selection (automatic transmission), vehicle speed, power steering pump pressure, and the brake switch. The PCM adjusts idle speed based on inputs it receives from sensors that react to: throttle position, vehicle speed, transmission gear selection, engine coolant temperature and from inputs it receives from the air conditioning clutch switch and brake switch. Based on inputs that it receives, the PCM adjusts ignition coil dwell. The PCM also adjusts the generator charge rate through control of the generator field and provides speed control operation. NOTE: PCM Inputs: - ABS module (if equipped) - A/C request (if equipped with factory A/C) - A/C select (if equipped with factory A/C) - A/C pressure transducer - Auto shutdown (ASD) sense - Battery temperature sensor - Battery voltage - Brake switch - CAN C BUS (+) circuits - CAN C BUS (-) circuits - Camshaft position sensor signal - Crankshaft position sensor - Data link connection for a scan tool - EATX module (if equipped) - Engine coolant temperature sensor - Fuel level (through J1850 circuitry) - Generator (battery voltage) output - Ignition circuit sense (ignition switch in on/off/crank/run position) - Intake manifold air temperature sensor - Knock sensors (2 on 3.7L engine) - Leak detection pump (switch) sense (if equipped) - Manifold absolute pressure (MAP) sensor - Oil pressure - Oxygen sensors - Park/neutral switch (auto. trans. only) - Power ground - Power steering pressure switch (if equipped) - Sensor return - Signal ground - Speed control multiplexed single wire input - Throttle position sensor - Transfer case switch (4WD range position) - Vehicle speed signal NOTE: PCM Outputs: - A/C clutch relay - Auto shutdown (ASD) relay Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Powertrain Control Module - Description > Page 381 - CAN C BUS (+/-) circuits for: speedometer, voltmeter, fuel gauge, oil pressure gauge/lamp, engine temp. gauge and speed control warn. lamp - Data link connection for diagnostic scan tool - EGR valve control solenoid (if equipped) - EVAP canister purge solenoid - Five volt sensor supply (primary) - Five volt sensor supply (secondary) - Fuel injectors - Fuel pump relay - Generator field driver (-) - Generator field driver (+) - Idle air control (IAC) motor - Ignition coil(s) - Leak detection pump (if equipped) - Malfunction indicator lamp (Check engine lamp). Driven through J1850 circuits. - Oxygen sensor heater relays - Oxygen sensors (pulse width modulated) - Radiator cooling fan relay (pulse width modulated) - Speed control vacuum solenoid - Speed control vent solenoid - Tachometer (if equipped). Driven through J1850 circuits. - Transmission convertor clutch circuit. Driven through J1850 circuits. 5 Volt Supplies 5 VOLT SUPPLIES Primary 5-volt supply: - supplies the required 5 volt power source to the Crankshaft Position (CKP) sensor. - supplies the required 5 volt power source to the Camshaft Position (CMP) sensor. - supplies a reference voltage for the Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) sensor. - supplies a reference voltage for the Throttle Position Sensor (TPS) sensor. Secondary 5-volt supply: - supplies the required 5 volt power source to the oil pressure sensor. - supplies the required 5 volt power source for the Vehicle Speed Sensor (VSS) (if equipped). - supplies the 5 volt power source to the transmission pressure sensor (certain automatic transmissions). Ignition Circuit Sense IGNITION CIRCUIT SENSE The ignition circuit sense input tells the PCM the ignition switch has energized the ignition circuit. Battery voltage is also supplied to the PCM through the ignition switch when the ignition is in the RUN or START position. This is referred to as the "ignition sense" circuit and is used to "wake up" the PCM. Voltage on the ignition input can be as low as 6 volts and the PCM will still function. Voltage is supplied to this circuit to power the PCM's 8-volt regulator and to allow the PCM to perform fuel, ignition and emissions control functions. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > SKREEM Programming Engine Control Module: Testing and Inspection SKREEM Programming SKREEM PROGRAMMING When a Powertrain Control Module (PCM) for a gasoline engine, or an Engine Control Module (ECM) for a diesel engine and the Sentry Key Remote Entry Module (SKREEM) (also known as the Wireless Control Module/WCM) on vehicles equipped with the Sentry Key Immobilizer System (SKIS) are replaced at the same time, perform the following steps in order: NOTE: If the PCM and the SKREEM are replaced at the same time, program the PCM VIN into the PCM first. 1. If applicable first replace the PCM/ECM with the original WCM still connected to the vehicle. 2. Using the appropriate service information program the new PCM/ECM. (This will ensure the Secret Key Transfer from the original WCM into the new PCM/ECM). 3. Now replace and program the WCM. This will retain the Secret Key from the PCM/ECM back into the new WCM. 4. With the scan tool, select Miscellaneous Functions, WCM/Wireless Control Module. Then select the desired procedure and follow the display on the scan tool. 5. If the vehicle is equipped with Tire Pressure Monitoring System program the Placard Pressure Values into the WCM/SKREEM. 6. Ensure all the customer's keys have been programmed into the new module if necessary. NOTE: If the original keys do not successfully program to the new SKREEM after the proper procedures are followed correctly, programming new keys will be necessary. PROGRAMMING THE SKREEM The SKIS Secret Key is an ID code that is unique to each SKREEM/WCM. This code is programmed and stored in the SKREEM/WCM, the PCM/ECM, and each ignition key transponder chip. When the PCM/ECM or SKREEM/WCM is replaced, it is necessary to program the Secret Key into the new module using a diagnostic scan tool. Follow the programming steps outlined in the diagnostic scan tool for PCM REPLACED , ECM REPLACED , WCM REPLACED , or GATEWAY REPLACED under MISCELLANEOUS FUNCTIONS for the WIRELESS CONTROL MODULE/WCM menu item as appropriate. NOTE: Programming the PCM/ECM or SKREEM is done using a diagnostic scan tool and a PIN to enter secure access mode. If three attempts are made to enter secure access mode using an incorrect PIN, secure access mode will be locked out for one hour. To exit this lockout mode, turn the ignition to the RUN position for one hour then enter the correct PIN. Be certain that all accessories are turned OFF. Also monitor the battery state and connect a battery charger if necessary. NOTE: Before replacing the ECU for a failed driver, control circuit or ground circuit, be sure to check the related component/circuit integrity for failures not detected due to a double fault in the circuit. Most ECM driver/control circuit failures are caused by internal component failures (i.e. relay and solenoids) and shorted circuits (i.e. pull-ups, drivers and switched circuits). These failures are difficult to detect when a double fault has occurred and only one DTC has set. ECM/SKIM/WCM PROGRAMMING When a ECM and the SKIM are replaced at the same time perform the following steps in order: 1. Program the new SKIM 2. Program the new ECM 3. Replace all ignition keys and program them to the new SKIM. ECM/SKIM/WCM PROGRAMMING When an ECM (Bosch) and the SKIM are replaced at the same time perform the following steps in order: 1. Program the new SKIM 2. Program the new ECM (Bosch) 3. Replace all ignition keys and program them to the new SKIM. PROGRAMMING THE SKIM CAUTION: Read all notes and cautions for programming procedures. 1. Connect a battery charger to the vehicle. 2. Connect the StarSCAN(R). CAUTION: If the ECM/PCM and SKREEM/WCM are replaced at the same time, the ECM/PCM MUST be programmed before the Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > SKREEM Programming > Page 384 SKREEM/WCM. 3. Select "ECU View". 4. Select "WCM Wireless Control Module". 5. Select "Miscellaneous Functions". 6. Select WCM replaced. 7. Enter the PIN when prompted. 8. Verify the correct information. NOTE: If the ECM and the SKIM are replaced at the same time, all vehicle keys will need to be replaced and programmed to the new SKIM. PROGRAMMING IGNITION KEYS TO THE SKREEM Each ignition key transponder also has a unique ID code that is assigned at the time the key is manufactured. When a key is programmed into the SKREEM/WCM, the transponder ID code is learned by the module and the transponder acquires the unique Secret Key ID code from the SKREEM/WCM. To program ignition keys into the SKREEM/WCM, follow the programming steps outlined in the diagnostic scan tool for PROGRAM IGNITION KEYS OR KEY FOBS under MISCELLANEOUS FUNCTIONS for the WIRELESS CONTROL MODULE/WCM menu item. NOTE: If the original keys do not successfully program to the new SKREEM after the proper procedures are followed correctly, programming new keys will be necessary. NOTE: A maximum of eight keys can be learned to each SKREEM. Once a key is learned to a SKREEM, that key has acquired the Secret Key for that SKREEM and cannot be transferred to any other SKREEM or vehicle. If ignition key programming is unsuccessful, the scan tool will display one of the following error messages: - PROGRAMMING NOT ATTEMPTED - The scan tool attempts to read the programmed key status and there are no keys programmed into SKREEM memory. - PROGRAMMING KEY FAILED (POSSIBLE USED KEY FROM WRONG VEHICLE) - SKREEM is unable to program an ignition key transponder due to one of the following: - The ignition key transponder is ineffective. - The ignition key transponder is or has been already programmed to another vehicle. - 8 KEYS ALREADY LEARNED, PROGRAMMING NOT DONE - The SKREEM transponder ID memory is full. LEARNED KEY IN IGNITION - The ID for the ignition key transponder currently in the ignition lock cylinder is already programmed into SKREEM memory. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > SKREEM Programming > Page 385 Engine Control Module: Testing and Inspection PCM/ECM Reprogramming PCM/ECM REPROGRAMMING - GAS MODULE REPROGRAMING Replacement PCM's will require programming utilizing the StarSCAN(R) or equivalent. The PCM will not operate the engine until it is programmed. A Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) will be set "not programmed". CAUTION: Extreme care must be taken when programming a calibration into a generic PCM. Do not randomly select a calibration. Once a calibration is selected and programmed, the controller cannot be reprogrammed to a different calibration. The module can only be reprogrammed to a more recent version of that calibration. SPECIAL TOOLS/EQUIPMENT OR EQUIVALENT REQUIRED: **REPAIR PROCEDURE - USING THE INTERNET TO RETRIEVE THE FLASH FILE: NOTE: The StarSCAN(R) or equivalent diagnostic scan tool fully supports Internet connectivity. However, in order to take advantage of this feature you must first configure the StarSCAN(R) or equivalent for your dealership's network. For instruction on setting up your StarSCAN(R) or equivalent for the dealer's network; refer to the StarSCAN(R) or equivalent Quick Start Networking Guide available on DealerCONNECT > Service > StarSCAN(R) or equivalent and StarMOBILE Tools >Online Documentation. NOTE: If this flash process is interrupted/aborted, the flash should be restarted. 1. Open the hood, install a battery charger and verify that the charging rate provides approximately 13.5 volts. Set the battery charger timer to maintain the charging voltage for the duration of the flash process. 2. Connect the CH9410 StarSCAN(R) or equivalent ethernet cable to the StarSCAN(R) or equivalent and the dealer's network drop. 3. Connect the CH9404 StarSCAN(R) or equivalent vehicle cable to the StarSCAN(R) or equivalent and the vehicle. 4. Power ON the StarSCAN(R) or equivalent. 5. Retrieve the old ECU part number. Using the StarSCAN(R) or equivalent at the "Home" screen: a. Select "ECU View" b. Touch the screen to highlight the PCM in the list of modules. c. Select "More Options" d. Select "ECU Flash" e. Record the part number at the top of the "Flash PCM" screen for later reference. 6. Replace the PCM with the appropriate Generic PCM. 7. Program the PCM as follows: a. Using the StarSCAN(R) or equivalent at the "Home" screen, Select "ECU View" b. Touch the screen to highlight the PCM in the list of modules. c. Select "More Options" d. Select "ECU Flash" e. Select "Browse for New File". Follow the on screen instructions. f. Highlight the appropriate calibration based on the part number recorded in Step 5. g. Select "Download to Scantool". h. Select "Close" after the download is complete, then select "Back". i. Highlight the listed calibration. j. Select "Update Controller". Follow on screen instructions. k. When the update is complete, select "OK". l. Verify the part number at the top of the "Flash PCM" screen has updated to the new part number. 8. Is this a GPEC Module? a. Yes >> go to STEP 9. b. No >> go to STEP 12. 9. Do not start the engine prior to completing the following steps (a. and b.) Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > SKREEM Programming > Page 386 a. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position for no less than 15 seconds. b. Turn the ignition to the RUN position (DO NOT CRANK THE ENGINE) for no less than 20 seconds. 10. Is this vehicle equipped with a CVT? a. Yes >> go to STEP 11. b. No >> go to STEP 17. 11. The TCM must be reprogrammed as follows: a. Using the StarSCAN(R) or equivalent at the "Home" screen, Select "ECU View" b. Touch the screen to highlight the TCM in the list of modules. c. Select "More Options" d. Select "ECU Flash" e. Record the part number at the top of the "Flash TCM" screen for later reference. f. Select "Browse for New File". Follow the on screen instructions. NOTE: If the part number recorded in step "11e" is the same as the new p/n shown on the "Flash File List" screen no further action is required. Cancel the TCM reprogram procedure. Continue to step STEP 17. g. Highlight the appropriate calibration. h. Select "Download to Scantool". i. Select "Close" after the download is complete, then select "Back". j. Highlight the listed calibration. k. Select "Update Controller". Follow on screen instructions. l. When the update is complete, select "OK". m. Verify the part number at the top of the "Flash TCM" screen has updated to the new part number. n. Continue to step STEP 15 12. Is "WCM - Wireless Control Module" displayed in the "ECU Overview" screen list of modules? a. Yes >> go to STEP 13. b. No >> go to STEP 14. 13. Program the PCM to the Wireless Control Module (WCM). a. Highlight the WCM. b. Select "Misc. Function". c. Highlight "PCM Replaced". d. Select "Start" e. Follow the on screen instructions. Select "Next" after each step. Select "Finish" after completing the last step. f. When complete proceed to STEP 15. 14. Program the VIN into the PCM. a. Scroll through the list of controllers and highlight the PCM. b. Select "Misc. Function". c. Highlight "Check PCM VIN". d. Select "Start" e. Follow the on screen instructions. Select "Next" after each step. When the window appears with 17 boxes, select "Show Keyboard". Place the cursor to the right of the last box and then backspace to delete the boxes from the window. Enter the VIN. Select "Finish" after completing the last step. f. Unplug the scan tool from the Data Link Connector. g. At the "Vehicle Disconnected" screen, press "OK". h. Connect the scan tool to the Data Link Connector and verify that the VIN is visible at the top of the "Home" screen. 15. Is the vehicle equipped ETC? a. Yes >> go to STEP 17. b. No >> go to STEP 16. 16. Using the StarSCAN(R) or equivalent at the "Home" screen: a. Select ECU View b. Scroll through the list of controllers and highlight the PCM. c. Select Misc. Function. d. Highlight "Learn ETC". e. Select "Start" f. Follow the on screen instructions. Select Next after each step. Select Finish after completing the last step. NOTE: Due to the PCM programming procedure, a DTC may be set in other modules (TCM, BCM, MIC, SKREEM, etc.) within the vehicle, if so equipped. Some DTC's may cause the MIL to illuminate. From the Home screen select System View. Then select All DTCs. Press Clear All Stored DTCs if there are any DTCs shown on the list. NOTE: The following step is required by law when reprogramming a PCM and/or TCM. 17. Type the necessary information on the Authorized Modification Label p/n 04275086AB and attach near the VECI label. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > SKREEM Programming > Page 387 REPAIR PROCEDURE USING SOFTWARE UPDATE CD TO RETRIEVE THE FLASH FILE: NOTE: If this flash process is interrupted/aborted, the flash should be restarted. NOTE: For detailed information on the operation of the StarSCAN(R) or equivalent, refer to the Quick Reference documentation provided in the StarSCAN(R) or equivalent documentation kit. Look under Training Aids and also under Download Center > Frequently Asked Questions for more help. 1. Open the hood, install a battery charger and verify that the charging rate provides approximately 13.5 volts. Set the battery charger timer to maintain the charging voltage for the duration of the flash process. 2. Connect the CH9404 StarSCAN(R) or equivalent vehicle cable to the StarSCAN(R) or equivalent and the vehicle. 3. Power ON the StarSCAN(R) or equivalent. 4. Retrieve the old ECU part number. Using the StarSCAN(R) or equivalent at the "Home" screen: a. Select "ECU View" b. Touch the screen to highlight the PCM in the list of modules. c. Select "More Options" d. Select "ECU Flash" e. Record the part number at the top of the "Flash PCM" screen for later reference. 5. Replace the PCM with the appropriate Generic PCM. 6. Insert the StarSCAN(R) or equivalent Software Update CD into the TechCONNECT or equivalent PC. The StarSCAN(R) or equivalent Software Update CD will start automatically. Select "Download Flash Updates". 7. At the "Select a method for looking up controller flash updates. " screen: a. Select "Enter part number". Enter the "Part Number" recorded in STEP 4 when prompted to do so. b. Using the mouse highlight the appropriate "Calibration". Select "Next". c. Follow the on screen instructions. d. When completed, proceed to STEP 8. 8. With the StarSCAN(R) or equivalent powered OFF, connect the USB Key and Gender Changer to the StarSCAN(R) or equivalent USB port. 9. Connect the StarSCAN(R) or equivalent to the vehicle (if not already connected). 10. Power ON the StarSCAN(R) or equivalent. 11. Download the flash file from the USB key to the StarSCAN(R) or equivalent. Using the StarSCAN(R) or equivalent at the "Home" screen: a. Select "Flash Download", then select "Retrieve files from the USB storage device" b. Highlight the appropriate calibration. Select "Download to Scan Tool" c. When the download is complete, select "Close" and "Back". 12. Reprogram the ECU. Using the StarSCAN(R) or equivalent at the "Home" screen: a. Select "ECU View". b. Select More Options". Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > SKREEM Programming > Page 388 c. Select "ECU Flash". d. Highlight the appropriate calibration. e. Select "Update Controller". Follow the on screen instructions. f. When the update is complete, select "OK". g. Verify the part number at the top of the "Flash PCM" screen has updated to the new part number. 13. Is "WCM - Wireless Control Module" displayed in the "ECU Overview" screen list of modules? a. Yes >> go to STEP 14. b. No >> go to STEP 15. 14. Program the PCM to the Wireless Control Module (WCM). Using the StarSCAN(R) or equivalent at the "Home" screen: a. Select "ECU View" b. Scroll through the list of controllers and highlight the WCM. c. Select "Misc. Function". d. Highlight "PCM Replaced". e. Select "Start" f. Follow the on screen instructions. Select "Next" after each step. Select "Finish" after completing the last step. g. When complete proceed to STEP 16. 15. Program the VIN into the PCM. a. Scroll through the list of controllers and highlight the PCM. b. Select "Misc. Function". c. Highlight "Check PCM VIN". d. Select "Start" e. Follow the on screen instructions. Select "Next" after each step. When the window appears with 17 boxes, select "Show Keyboard". Place the cursor to the right of the last box and then backspace to delete the boxes from the window. Enter the VIN. Select "Finish" after completing the last step. f. Unplug the scan tool from the Data Link Connector. g. At the "Vehicle Disconnected" screen, press "OK". h. Connect the scan tool to the Data Link Connector and verify that the VIN is visible at the top of the "Home" screen. 16. Is the vehicle equipped with a 3.7L or 4.7L engine? a. Yes >> go to STEP 18. b. No >> go to STEP 17. 17. Using the StarSCAN(R) or equivalent at the "Home" screen: a. Select "ECU View" b. Scroll through the list of controllers and highlight the PCM. c. Select "Misc. Function". d. Highlight "Learn ETC". e. Select "Start" f. Follow the on screen instructions. Select "Next" after each step. Select "Finish" after completing the last step. NOTE: Due to the PCM programming procedure, a DTC may be set in other modules (TCM, BCM, MIC, SKIM, etc.) within the vehicle, if so equipped. Some DTC's may cause the MIL to illuminate. Check all modules using "ECU View" from the Home screen, record the DTC's, and erase these DTC's prior to returning the vehicle to the customer. Erase any DTC's in the PCM only after all other modules have had their DTC's erased. NOTE: The following step is required by law. 18. Type the necessary information on the "Authorized Modification Label" p/n 04275086AB and attach near the VECI label. ** Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > SKREEM Programming > Page 389 Engine Control Module: Testing and Inspection Powertrain Control Module PCM/ECM REPROGRAMMING - GAS MODULE REPROGRAMING Replacement PCM's will require programming utilizing the StarSCAN(R) or equivalent. The PCM will not operate the engine until it is programmed. A Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) will be set "not programmed". CAUTION: Extreme care must be taken when programming a calibration into a generic PCM. Do not randomly select a calibration. Once a calibration is selected and programmed, the controller cannot be reprogrammed to a different calibration. The module can only be reprogrammed to a more recent version of that calibration. SPECIAL TOOLS/EQUIPMENT OR EQUIVALENT REQUIRED: **REPAIR PROCEDURE - USING THE INTERNET TO RETRIEVE THE FLASH FILE: NOTE: The StarSCAN(R) or equivalent diagnostic scan tool fully supports Internet connectivity. However, in order to take advantage of this feature you must first configure the StarSCAN(R) or equivalent for your dealership's network. For instruction on setting up your StarSCAN(R) or equivalent for the dealer's network; refer to the StarSCAN(R) or equivalent Quick Start Networking Guide available on DealerCONNECT > Service > StarSCAN(R) or equivalent and StarMOBILE Tools > Online Documentation. NOTE: If this flash process is interrupted/aborted, the flash should be restarted. 1. Open the hood, install a battery charger and verify that the charging rate provides approximately 13.5 volts. Set the battery charger timer to maintain the charging voltage for the duration of the flash process. 2. Connect the CH9410 StarSCAN(R) or equivalent ethernet cable to the StarSCAN(R) or equivalent and the dealer's network drop. 3. Connect the CH9404 StarSCAN(R) or equivalent vehicle cable to the StarSCAN(R) or equivalent and the vehicle. 4. Power ON the StarSCAN(R) or equivalent. 5. Retrieve the old ECU part number. Using the StarSCAN(R) or equivalent at the "Home" screen: a. Select "ECU View" b. Touch the screen to highlight the PCM in the list of modules. c. Select "More Options" d. Select "ECU Flash" e. Record the part number at the top of the "Flash PCM" screen for later reference. 6. Replace the PCM with the appropriate Generic PCM. 7. Program the PCM as follows: a. Using the StarSCAN(R) or equivalent at the "Home" screen, Select "ECU View" b. Touch the screen to highlight the PCM in the list of modules. c. Select "More Options" d. Select "ECU Flash" e. Select "Browse for New File". Follow the on screen instructions. f. Highlight the appropriate calibration based on the part number recorded in Step 5. g. Select "Download to Scantool". h. Select "Close" after the download is complete, then select "Back". i. Highlight the listed calibration. j. Select "Update Controller". Follow on screen instructions. k. When the update is complete, select "OK". l. Verify the part number at the top of the "Flash PCM" screen has updated to the new part number. 8. Is this a GPEC Module? a. Yes >> go to STEP 9. b. No >> go to STEP 12. 9. Do not start the engine prior to completing the following steps (a. and b.) Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > SKREEM Programming > Page 390 a. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position for no less than 15 seconds. b. Turn the ignition to the RUN position (DO NOT CRANK THE ENGINE) for no less than 20 seconds. 10. Is this vehicle equipped with a CVT? a. Yes >> go to STEP 11. b. No >> go to STEP 17. 11. The TCM must be reprogrammed as follows: a. Using the StarSCAN(R) or equivalent at the "Home" screen, Select "ECU View" b. Touch the screen to highlight the TCM in the list of modules. c. Select "More Options" d. Select "ECU Flash" e. Record the part number at the top of the "Flash TCM" screen for later reference. f. Select "Browse for New File". Follow the on screen instructions. NOTE: If the part number recorded in step "11e" is the same as the new p/n shown on the "Flash File List" screen no further action is required. Cancel the TCM reprogram procedure. Continue to step STEP 17. g. Highlight the appropriate calibration. h. Select "Download to Scantool". i. Select "Close" after the download is complete, then select "Back". j. Highlight the listed calibration. k. Select "Update Controller". Follow on screen instructions. l. When the update is complete, select "OK". m. Verify the part number at the top of the "Flash TCM" screen has updated to the new part number. n. Continue to step STEP 15 12. Is "WCM - Wireless Control Module" displayed in the "ECU Overview" screen list of modules? a. Yes >> go to STEP 13. b. No >> go to STEP 14. 13. Program the PCM to the Wireless Control Module (WCM). a. Highlight the WCM. b. Select "Misc. Function". c. Highlight "PCM Replaced". d. Select "Start" e. Follow the on screen instructions. Select "Next" after each step. Select "Finish" after completing the last step. f. When complete proceed to STEP 15. 14. Program the VIN into the PCM. a. Scroll through the list of controllers and highlight the PCM. b. Select "Misc. Function". c. Highlight "Check PCM VIN". d. Select "Start" e. Follow the on screen instructions. Select "Next" after each step. When the window appears with 17 boxes, select "Show Keyboard". Place the cursor to the right of the last box and then backspace to delete the boxes from the window. Enter the VIN. Select "Finish" after completing the last step. f. Unplug the scan tool from the Data Link Connector. g. At the "Vehicle Disconnected" screen, press "OK". h. Connect the scan tool to the Data Link Connector and verify that the VIN is visible at the top of the "Home" screen. 15. Is the vehicle equipped ETC? a. Yes >> go to STEP 17. b. No >> go to STEP 16. 16. Using the StarSCAN(R) or equivalent at the "Home" screen: a. Select ECU View b. Scroll through the list of controllers and highlight the PCM. c. Select Misc. Function. d. Highlight "Learn ETC". e. Select "Start" f. Follow the on screen instructions. Select Next after each step. Select Finish after completing the last step. NOTE: Due to the PCM programming procedure, a DTC may be set in other modules (TCM, BCM, MIC, SKREEM, etc.) within the vehicle, if so equipped. Some DTC's may cause the MIL to illuminate. From the Home screen select System View. Then select All DTCs. Press Clear All Stored DTCs if there are any DTCs shown on the list. NOTE: The following step is required by law when reprogramming a PCM and/or TCM. 17. Type the necessary information on the Authorized Modification Label p/n 04275086AB and attach near the VECI label. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > SKREEM Programming > Page 391 REPAIR PROCEDURE USING SOFTWARE UPDATE CD TO RETRIEVE THE FLASH FILE: NOTE: If this flash process is interrupted/aborted, the flash should be restarted. NOTE: For detailed information on the operation of the StarSCAN(R) or equivalent, refer to the Quick Reference documentation provided in the StarSCAN(R) or equivalent documentation kit. Look under Training Aids and also under Download Center > Frequently Asked Questions for more help. 1. Open the hood, install a battery charger and verify that the charging rate provides approximately 13.5 volts. Set the battery charger timer to maintain the charging voltage for the duration of the flash process. 2. Connect the CH9404 StarSCAN(R) or equivalent vehicle cable to the StarSCAN(R) or equivalent and the vehicle. 3. Power ON the StarSCAN(R) or equivalent. 4. Retrieve the old ECU part number. Using the StarSCAN(R) or equivalent at the "Home" screen: a. Select "ECU View" b. Touch the screen to highlight the PCM in the list of modules. c. Select "More Options" d. Select "ECU Flash" e. Record the part number at the top of the "Flash PCM" screen for later reference. 5. Replace the PCM with the appropriate Generic PCM. 6. Insert the StarSCAN(R) or equivalent Software Update CD into the TechCONNECT or equivalent PC. The StarSCAN(R) or equivalent Software Update CD will start automatically. Select "Download Flash Updates". 7. At the "Select a method for looking up controller flash updates. " screen: a. Select "Enter part number". Enter the "Part Number" recorded in STEP 4 when prompted to do so. b. Using the mouse highlight the appropriate "Calibration". Select "Next". c. Follow the on screen instructions. d. When completed, proceed to STEP 8. 8. With the StarSCAN(R) or equivalent powered OFF, connect the USB Key and Gender Changer to the StarSCAN(R) or equivalent USB port. 9. Connect the StarSCAN(R) or equivalent to the vehicle (if not already connected). 10. Power ON the StarSCAN(R) or equivalent. 11. Download the flash file from the USB key to the StarSCAN(R) or equivalent. Using the StarSCAN(R) or equivalent at the "Home" screen: a. Select "Flash Download", then select "Retrieve files from the USB storage device" b. Highlight the appropriate calibration. Select "Download to Scan Tool" c. When the download is complete, select "Close" and "Back". 12. Reprogram the ECU. Using the StarSCAN(R) or equivalent at the "Home" screen: a. Select "ECU View". b. Select More Options". c. Select "ECU Flash". Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > SKREEM Programming > Page 392 d. Highlight the appropriate calibration. e. Select "Update Controller". Follow the on screen instructions. f. When the update is complete, select "OK". g. Verify the part number at the top of the "Flash PCM" screen has updated to the new part number. 13. Is "WCM - Wireless Control Module" displayed in the "ECU Overview" screen list of modules? a. Yes >> go to STEP 14. b. No >> go to STEP 15. 14. Program the PCM to the Wireless Control Module (WCM). Using the StarSCAN(R) or equivalent at the "Home" screen: a. Select "ECU View" b. Scroll through the list of controllers and highlight the WCM. c. Select "Misc. Function". d. Highlight "PCM Replaced". e. Select "Start" f. Follow the on screen instructions. Select "Next" after each step. Select "Finish" after completing the last step. g. When complete proceed to STEP 16. 15. Program the VIN into the PCM. a. Scroll through the list of controllers and highlight the PCM. b. Select "Misc. Function". c. Highlight "Check PCM VIN". d. Select "Start" e. Follow the on screen instructions. Select "Next" after each step. When the window appears with 17 boxes, select "Show Keyboard". Place the cursor to the right of the last box and then backspace to delete the boxes from the window. Enter the VIN. Select "Finish" after completing the last step. f. Unplug the scan tool from the Data Link Connector. g. At the "Vehicle Disconnected" screen, press "OK". h. Connect the scan tool to the Data Link Connector and verify that the VIN is visible at the top of the "Home" screen. 16. Is the vehicle equipped with a 3.7L or 4.7L engine? a. Yes >> go to STEP 18. b. No >> go to STEP 17. 17. Using the StarSCAN(R) or equivalent at the "Home" screen: a. Select "ECU View" b. Scroll through the list of controllers and highlight the PCM. c. Select "Misc. Function". d. Highlight "Learn ETC". e. Select "Start" f. Follow the on screen instructions. Select "Next" after each step. Select "Finish" after completing the last step. NOTE: Due to the PCM programming procedure, a DTC may be set in other modules (TCM, BCM, MIC, SKIM, etc.) within the vehicle, if so equipped. Some DTC's may cause the MIL to illuminate. Check all modules using "ECU View" from the Home screen, record the DTC's, and erase these DTC's prior to returning the vehicle to the customer. Erase any DTC's in the PCM only after all other modules have had their DTC's erased. NOTE: The following step is required by law. 18. Type the necessary information on the "Authorized Modification Label" p/n 04275086AB and attach near the VECI label. ** Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Engine Control Module (ECM) - Diesel Engine Control Module: Service and Repair Engine Control Module (ECM) - Diesel 5.9L Diesel 5.9L DIESEL CUMMINS FUEL SYSTEM COMPONENTS The Engine Control Module (ECM) (16) is bolted to a support bracket near the fuel filter. The support bracket mounts to the block with four capscrews and vibration isolators. A ground wire is fastened to the bracket. The other end of the wire is fastened to the engine block. 1. Record any Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTC's) found in the ECM. To avoid possible voltage spike damage to the ECM, ignition key must be off, and both negative battery cables must be disconnected before unplugging ECM connectors. 2. Disconnect both negative battery cables at both batteries. 3. Remove the 50-way and 60-way connector bolts at the ECM. Note: The connector bolt is a female allen head. As bolt is being removed, very carefully remove connectors from the ECM. 4. Remove five ECM mounting bolts and remove ECM from vehicle. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Engine Control Module (ECM) - Diesel > Page 395 6.7L Diesel 6.7L DIESEL The Engine Control Module (ECM) (5) is located on the left side of the engine. A support bracket mounts to the block with four capscrews and vibration isolators. A ground wire is fastened to the bracket. The other end of the wire is fastened to the engine block. 1. Record any Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTC's) found in the ECM. To avoid possible voltage spike damage to the ECM, ignition key must be off, and both negative battery cables must be disconnected before unplugging ECM connectors. 2. Disconnect both negative battery cables at both batteries. Access to the ECM is easier by working through the left front wheel opening. 3. Remove left front wheel. 4. Remove plastic left front fender splash shield. 5. Remove electrical connector bolts at ECM. Note: As each bolt is being removed, very carefully remove connectors from the ECM. 6. Remove three ECM mounting bolts (6) and remove ECM from engine. 5.9L Diesel 5.9L DIESEL Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Engine Control Module (ECM) - Diesel > Page 396 CUMMINS FUEL SYSTEM COMPONENTS Do not apply paint to ECM or a poor ground will result. 1. Position the ECM (16) to the ECM support bracket and install the five mounting bolts. Tighten bolts to 24 Nm (18 ft. lbs.). 2. Check pin connectors in ECM, 50-way and 60-way connectors for corrosion or damage. Repair as necessary. 3. Clean pins in the 50-way and 60-way electrical connectors with a electrical contact cleaner. 4. Install the 50-way and 60-way connectors to ECM. Tighten connector bolts to 3 Nm (27 in. lbs.). 5. Reconnect both negative battery cables. 6. Use a diagnostic scan tool to erase any Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTC's) from ECM. 6.7L Diesel 6.7L DIESEL Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Engine Control Module (ECM) - Diesel > Page 397 Do not apply paint to ECM or a poor ground will result. 1. Position ECM (5) to the ECM support bracket and install mounting bolts. Tighten bolts to 24 Nm (18 ft. lbs.). 2. Check pins in electrical connectors for corrosion, damage or dirt intrusion. Also check all pins for being bent. Repair as necessary. Damaged, dirty, bent or corroded pins could result in poor conductivity, causing intermittent electrical issues or DTC's. 3. Clean pins in electrical connectors with an electrical contact cleaner. 4. Install connectors to ECM. Tighten connector bolts to 3 Nm (27 in. lbs.). 5. Install splash shield. 6. Install left front wheel. 7. Connect both negative battery cables. 8. Use a diagnostic scan tool to erase any Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTC's) from ECM.FUEL INJECTOR ID CORRECTION CODES: Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Engine Control Module (ECM) - Diesel > Page 398 Each fuel injector has a six-digit alphanumeric correction code. The correction code is printed on the intake side of the fuel injector (1) and is used to identify injector calibration. When replacing any fuel injectors, this code must be entered into the vehicles Engine Control Module (ECM) using a diagnostic scan tool. In addition, if a new ECM is installed, use a diagnostic scan tool to program all six of the injector codes from the original fuel injectors into the new ECM. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Engine Control Module (ECM) - Diesel > Page 399 Engine Control Module: Service and Repair Powertrain Control Module - Removal REMOVAL CAUTION: Certain ABS systems rely on having the Powertrain Control Module (PCM) broadcast the Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) over the bus network. To prevent problems of DTCs and other items related to the VIN broadcast, it is recommend that you disconnect the ABS CAB (controller) temporarily when replacing the PCM. Once the PCM is replaced, write the VIN to the PCM using a scan tool. This is done from the engine main menu. Arrow over to the second page to "1. Miscellaneous". Select "Check VIN" from the choices. Make sure it has the correct VIN entered before continuing. When the VIN is complete, turn off the ignition key and reconnect the ABS module connector. This will prevent the setting of DTCs and other items associated with the lack of a VIN detected when you turn the key ON after replacing the PCM. CAUTION: Use the scan tool to reprogram the new PCM with the vehicles original identification number (VIN) and the vehicles original mileage. If this step is not done, a Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) may be set. The PCM (1) is located in the engine compartment attached to the dash panel (3). To avoid possible voltage spike damage to the PCM, ignition key must be off, and negative battery cable must be disconnected before unplugging PCM connectors. 1. Disconnect negative battery cable at battery. 2. Remove cover over electrical connectors. Cover snaps onto PCM. 3. Carefully unplug the three 32-way connectors (four 38-way connectors if equipped with NGC) from PCM (1). 4. Remove three PCM mounting bolts (4) and remove PCM from vehicle. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Engine Control Module (ECM) - Diesel > Page 400 Engine Control Module: Service and Repair Powertrain Control Module - Installation INSTALLATION CAUTION: Certain ABS systems rely on having the Powertrain Control Module (PCM) broadcast the Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) over the bus network. To prevent problems of DTCs and other items related to the VIN broadcast, it is recommend that you disconnect the ABS CAB (controller) temporarily when replacing the PCM. Once the PCM is replaced, write the VIN to the PCM using a scan tool. This is done from the engine main menu. Arrow over to the second page to "1. Miscellaneous". Select "Check VIN" from the choices. Make sure it has the correct VIN entered before continuing. When the VIN is complete, turn off the ignition key and reconnect the ABS module connector. This will prevent the setting of DTCs and other items associated with the lack of a VIN detected when you turn the key ON after replacing the PCM. CAUTION: Use the scan tool to reprogram the new PCM with the vehicles original identification number (VIN) and the vehicles original mileage. If this step is not done, a Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) may be set. 1. Install PCM (3) and 3 mounting bolts (4) to vehicle. 2. Tighten bolts. Refer to torque specifications. 3. Check pin connectors in the PCM and the three 32-way connectors (four 38-way connectors if equipped with NGC) for corrosion or damage. Also, the pin heights in connectors should all be same. Repair as necessary before installing connectors. 4. Install three 32-way connectors (four 38-way connectors if equipped with NGC). 5. Install cover over electrical connectors. Cover snaps onto PCM. 6. Install negative battery cable. 7. The 5.7L V-8 engine is equipped with a fully electronic accelerator pedal position sensor. If equipped with a 5.7L, also perform the following 3 steps: a. Connect negative battery cable to battery. b. Turn ignition switch ON, but do not crank engine. c. Leave ignition switch ON for a minimum of 10 seconds. This will allow PCM to learn electrical parameters. d. The scan tool may also be used to learn electrical parameters. Go to the Miscellaneous menu, and then select ETC Learn. 8. If the previous step is not performed, a Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) will be set. 9. If necessary, use a scan tool to erase any Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTC's) from PCM. Also use the scan tool to reprogram new PCM with vehicles original Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) and original vehicle mileage. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Diagrams Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System): Diagrams Connector - (IN TIPM) RELAY-AUTO SHUT DOWN - (IN TIPM) Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 404 Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System): Description and Operation PCM OUTPUT The 5 pin, 12 volt, Automatic Shutdown (ASD) relay is located in the Power Distribution Center (PDC). Refer to label on PDC cover for relay location. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 405 Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System): Testing and Inspection Fig.1 ASD And Fuel Pump Relay Terminals-Type 1 Fig.2 ASD And Fuel Pump Relay Terminals-Type 2 The following description of operation and tests apply only to the Automatic Shutdown (ASD) and fuel pump relays. The terminals on the bottom of each relay are numbered. Two different types of relays may be used, or. - Terminal number 30 is connected to battery voltage. For both the ASD and fuel pump relays, terminal 30 is connected to battery voltage at all times. - The PCM grounds the coil side of the relay through terminal number 85. - Terminal number 86 supplies voltage to the coil side of the relay. - When the PCM de-energizes the ASD and fuel pump relays, terminal number 87A connects to terminal 30. This is the OFF position. In the OFF position, voltage is not supplied to the rest of the circuit. Terminal 87A is the center terminal on the relay. - When the PCM energizes the ASD and fuel pump relays, terminal 87 connects to terminal 30. This is the ON position. Terminal 87 supplies voltage to the rest of the circuit. The following procedure applies to the ASD and fuel pump relays. 1. Remove relay from connector before testing. 2. With the relay removed from the vehicle, use an ohmmeter to check the resistance between terminals 85 and 86. The resistance should be 75 ohms Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 406 ± 5 ohms. 3. Connect the ohmmeter between terminals 30 and 87A. The ohmmeter should show continuity between terminals 30 and 87A. 4. Connect the ohmmeter between terminals 87 and 30. The ohmmeter should not show continuity at this time. 5. Connect one end of a jumper wire (16 gauge or smaller) to relay terminal 85. Connect the other end of the jumper wire to the ground side of a 12 volt power source. 6. Connect one end of another jumper wire (16 gauge or smaller) to the power side of the 12 volt power source. Do not attach the other end of the jumper wire to the relay at this time. WARNING: DO NOT ALLOW OHMMETER TO CONTACT TERMINALS 85 OR 86 DURING THIS TEST. DAMAGE TO OHMMETER MAY RESULT. 7. Attach the other end of the jumper wire to relay terminal 86. This activates the relay. The ohmmeter should now show continuity between relay terminals 87 and 30. The ohmmeter should not show continuity between relay terminals 87A and 30. 8. Disconnect jumper wires. 9. Replace the relay if it did not pass the continuity and resistance tests. If the relay passed the tests, it operates properly. Check the remainder of the ASD and fuel pump relay circuits. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams Oxygen Sensor Relay: Diagrams 2007-2009 Dodge Ram 3.7/4.7/5.7L engine O2 sensor heater, is controled by the powertrain control module. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 410 Oxygen Sensor Relay: Description and Operation DESCRIPTION The Oxygen Sensors (02S) are attached to, and protrude into the vehicle exhaust system Depending on the engine or emission package, the vehicle may use a total of either 2 or 4 sensors Federal Emission Packages Two sensors are used: upstream (referred to as 1/1) and downstream (referred to as 1/2) With this emission package, the upstream sensor (1/1) is located just before the main catalytic convertor The downstream sensor (1/2) is located just after the main catalytic convertor California Emission Packages: On this emissions package, 4 sensors are used: 2 upstream (referred to as ill and 2/1) and 2 downstream (referred to as 1/2 and 2/2) With this emission pack-age, the right upstream sensor (2/i) is located in the right exhaust downpipe just before the mini-catalytic convertor The left upstream sensor (1/i) is located in the left exhaust downpipe just before the mini-catalytic convertor The right downstream sensor (2/2) is located in the right exhaust downpipe just after the mini-catalytic convertor, and before the main catalytic convertor The left downstream sensor (1/2) is located in the left exhaust downpipe just after the mini-catalytic convertor, and before the main catalytic convertor Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Locations Fuel Pump Relay: Locations DESCRIPTION A separate fuel pump relay is no longer used. A circuit within the TIPM (Totally Integrated Power Module) is used to control the electric fuel pump located within the fuel pump module. The TIPM (1) is located in the engine compartment in front of the battery. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Fuel Pump Relay: Diagram Information and Instructions Warnings WARNINGS - GENERAL WARNINGS provide information to prevent personal injury and vehicle damage. Below is a list of general warnings that should be followed any time a vehicle is being serviced. WARNING: Always wear safety glasses for eye protection. WARNING: Use safety stands anytime a procedure requires being under a vehicle. WARNING: Be sure that the ignition switch always is in the off position, unless the procedure requires it to be on. WARNING: Set the parking brake when working on any vehicle. An automatic transmission should be in park. A manual transmission should be in neutral. WARNING: Operate the engine only in a well-ventilated area. WARNING: Keep away from moving parts when the engine is running, especially the fan and belts. WARNING: To prevent serious burns, avoid contact with hot parts such as the radiator, exhaust manifold(s), tail pipe, catalytic converter and muffler. WARNING: Do not allow flame or sparks near the battery. Gases are always present in and around the battery. WARNING: Always remove rings, watches, loose hanging jewelry and avoid loose clothing. How to Use Wiring Diagrams DESCRIPTION - HOW TO USE WIRING DIAGRAMS DaimlerChrysler Corporation wiring diagrams are designed to provide information regarding the vehicles wiring content. In order to effectively use the wiring diagrams to diagnose and repair DaimlerChrysler Corporation vehicles, it is important to understand all of their features and characteristics. Diagrams are arranged such that the power (B+) side of the circuit is placed near the top of the page, and the ground (B-) side of the circuit is placed near the bottom of the page. All switches, components, and modules are shown in the at rest position with the doors closed and the key removed from the ignition. Components are shown two ways. A solid line around a component indicates that the component is complete. A dashed line around the component indicates that the component is being shown is not complete. Incomplete components have a reference number to indicate the page where the component is shown complete. It is important to realize that no attempt is made on the diagrams to represent components and wiring as they appear on the vehicle. For example, a short piece of wire is treated the same as a long one. In addition, switches and other components are shown as simply as possible, with regard to function only. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 417 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 418 SYMBOLS International symbols are used throughout the wiring diagrams. These symbols are consistent with those being used around the world. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 419 TERMINOLOGY This is a list of terms and definitions used in the wiring diagrams. LHD - Left Hand Drive Vehicles RHD - Right Hand Drive Vehicles ATX - Automatic Transmissions-Front Wheel Drive MTX Manual Transmissions-Front Wheel Drive Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 420 AT - Automatic Transmissions-Rear Wheel Drive MT - Manual Transmissions-Rear Wheel Drive SOHC - Single Over Head Cam Engine DOHC - Double Over Head Cam Engine Export - Vehicles Built For Sale In Markets Other Than North America Except Export - Vehicles Built For Sale In North America Circuit Functions DESCRIPTION - CIRCUIT FUNCTIONS All circuits in the diagrams use an alpha/numeric code to identify the wire and it's function. To identify which circuit code applies to a system, refer to the Circuit Identification Code Chart. This chart shows the main circuits only and does not show the secondary codes that may apply to some models. Circuit Information DESCRIPTION - CIRCUIT INFORMATION Each wire shown in the diagrams contains a code which identifies the main circuit, a specific part of the main circuit, gage of wire, and color. An example would be A 2 18 LB/YL. This is a Battery Feed circuit, level two, eighteen gauge, light blue with a yellow tracer. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 421 Connector, Ground and Splice Information DESCRIPTION - CONNECTOR, GROUND AND SPLICE INFORMATION CAUTION: Not all connectors are serviced. Some connectors are serviced only with a harness. A typical example might be the Supplemental Restraint System connectors. Always check parts availability before attempting a repair. IDENTIFICATION In-line connectors are identified by a number, as follows: - In-line connectors located in the engine compartment are C100 series numbers. - In-line connectors located in the instrument panel area are C200 series numbers. - In-line connectors located in the body are C300 series numbers. - Jumper harness connectors are C400 series numbers. - Grounds and ground connectors are identified with a "G" and follow the same series numbering as the in-line connectors. - Splices are identified with an "S" and follow the same series numbering as the in-line connectors. In addition, S001-S099 numbers are located in the engine compartment. - Component connectors are identified by the component name instead of a number. Multiple connectors on a component use a C1, C2, etc. identifier. LOCATIONS Vehicle/Locations contains the master connector/ground/splice location index charts with hyperlinks to the applicable location illustrations. The illustrations contain the connector name (or number)/ground number/splice number and component identification. The abbreviation T/O is used in the component location section to indicate a point in which the wiring harness branches out to a component. The abbreviation N/S means Not Shown in the illustrations Section Identification and Information DESCRIPTION - SECTION IDENTIFICATION AND INFORMATION The wiring diagrams are grouped into individual sections. If a component is most likely found in a particular group, it will be shown complete (all wires, Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 422 connectors, and pins) within that group. For example, the Auto Shutdown Relay is most likely to be found in Powertrain Management, so it is shown there complete. It can, however, be shown partially in another group if it contains some associated wiring. Splice diagrams show the entire splice and provide references to other sections the splices serves. Splice Information only contains splice diagrams that are not shown in their entirety somewhere else in the wiring diagrams. Connector Pin-Outs shows each connector and the circuits involved with that connector. The connectors are identified using the name/number on the diagram pages. Removal REMOVAL 1. Disconnect battery. 2. Release Connector Lock (2). 3. Disconnect the connector (3) being repaired from its mating half/component. 4. Remove the dress cover (if applicable) (1). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 423 5. Release the Secondary Terminal Lock, if required (1). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 424 6. Position the connector locking finger away from the terminal using the proper special tool. Pull on the wire to remove the terminal from the connector. Installation Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 425 INSTALLATION 1. Insert the removed terminal in the same cavity on the repair connector. 2. Repeat steps for each terminal in the connector, being sure that all wires are inserted into the proper cavities. For additional connector pin-out identification, refer to the wiring diagrams. 3. When the connector is re-assembled, the secondary terminal lock must be placed in the locked position to prevent terminal push out. 4. Replace dress cover (if applicable). 5. Connect connector to its mating half/component. 6. Connect battery and test all affected systems. Removal REMOVAL 1. Disconnect the battery. 2. Locate the diode in the harness, and remove the protective covering. 3. Remove the diode from the harness, pay attention to the current flow direction (1) (2) (3). Installation INSTALLATION 1. Remove the insulation from the wires in the harness. Only remove enough insulation to solder in the new diode. 2. Install the new diode in the harness, making sure current flow is correct. If necessary, refer to the appropriate wiring diagram for current flow. 3. Solder the connection together using rosin core type solder only. Do not use acid core solder. 4. Tape the diode to the harness using electrical tape. Make sure the diode is completely sealed from the elements. 5. Re-connect the battery and test affected systems. Removal REMOVAL 1. Follow steps for removing terminals described in the connector removal section. 2. Cut the wire 6 inches from the back of the connector. Installation INSTALLATION 1. Select a wire from the terminal repair kit that best matches the color and gage of the wire being repaired. 2. Cut the repair wire to the proper length and remove one-half (1/2) inch of insulation. 3. Splice the repair wire to the wire harness (see wire splicing procedure). See: Service Procedures/Wire Splicing 4. Insert the repaired wire into the connector. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 426 5. Install the connector locking wedge, if required, and reconnect the connector to its mating half/component. 6. Re-tape the wire harness starting at 1-1/2 inches behind the connector and 2 inches past the repair. 7. Connect battery and test all affected systems. Wire Splicing STANDARD PROCEDURE - WIRE SPLICING When splicing a wire, it is important that the correct gage be used as shown in the wiring diagrams. 1. Remove one-half (1/2) inch of insulation from each wire that needs to be spliced. 2. Place a piece of adhesive lined heat shrink tubing on one side of the wire. Make sure the tubing will be long enough to cover and seal the entire repair area. 3. Place the strands of wire overlapping each other inside of the splice clip (1). 4. Using crimping tool (1), Mopar p/n 05019912AA, crimp the splice clip and wires together. 5. Solder (3) the connection (2) together using rosin core type solder (1) only. CAUTION: DO NOT USE ACID CORE SOLDER. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 427 6. Center the heat shrink tubing (2) over the joint and heat using a heat gun. Heat the joint until the tubing is tightly sealed and sealant (1) comes out of both ends of the tubing. Special Tools WIRING/TERMINAL PROBING TOOL PACKAGE 6807 TERMINAL PICK TOOL SET 6680 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 428 TERMINAL REMOVING TOOLS 6932 AND 8638 TERMINAL REMOVING TOOL 6934 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 429 Fuel Pump Relay: Diagnostic Aids Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) Sensitive Devices STANDARD PROCEDURE - ELECTROSTATIC DISCHARGE (ESD) SENSITIVE DEVICES All ESD sensitive components are solid state and a symbol is used to indicate this. When handling any component with this symbol, comply with the following procedures to reduce the possibility of electrostatic charge build up on the body and inadvertent discharge into the component. If it is not known whether the part is ESD sensitive, assume that it is. 1. Always touch a known good ground before handling the part. This should be repeated while handling the part and more frequently after sliding across a seat, sitting down from a standing position, or walking a distance. 2. Avoid touching electrical terminals of the part, unless instructed to do so by a written procedure. 3. When using a voltmeter, be sure to connect the ground lead first. 4. Do not remove the part from it's protective packing until it is time to install the part. 5. Before removing the part from it's package, ground the package to a known good ground on the vehicle. Testing Of Voltage Potential STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING OF VOLTAGE POTENTIAL 1. Connect the ground lead of a voltmeter to a known good ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the voltmeter to the selected test point. The vehicle ignition may need to be turned ON to check voltage. Refer to the appropriate test procedure. Testing For Continuity Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 430 STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING FOR CONTINUITY 1. Remove the fuse (1) for the circuit being checked or, disconnect the battery. 2. Connect one lead of the ohmmeter to one side of the circuit being tested 3. Connect the other lead to the other end of the circuit being tested. Low or no resistance means good continuity. Testing For A Short To Ground STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING FOR A SHORT TO GROUND 1. Remove the fuse and disconnect all items involved with the fuse. 2. Connect a test light or a voltmeter across the terminals of the fuse. 3. Starting at the fuse block, wiggle the wiring harness about six to eight inches apart and watch the voltmeter/test lamp. 4. If the voltmeter registers voltage or the test lamp glows, there is a short to ground in that general area of the wiring harness. Testing For A Short To Ground On Fuses Powering Several Loads STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING FOR A SHORT TO GROUND ON FUSES POWERING SEVERAL LOADS 1. Refer to the wiring diagrams and disconnect or isolate all items on the suspected fused circuits. 2. Replace the blown fuse. 3. Supply power to the fuse by turning ON the ignition switch or re-connecting the battery. 4. Start connecting or energizing the items in the fuse circuit one at a time. When the fuse blows the circuit with the short to ground has been isolated. Testing For A Voltage Drop STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING FOR A VOLTAGE DROP Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 431 1. Connect the positive lead of the voltmeter to the side of the circuit closest to the battery. 2. Connect the other lead of the voltmeter to the other side of the switch, component or circuit. 3. Operate the item. 4. The voltmeter will show the difference in voltage between the two points. Troubleshooting Wiring Problems DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING - WIRING HARNESS TROUBLESHOOTING TOOLS When diagnosing a problem in an electrical circuit there are several common tools necessary. These tools are listed and explained below. - Jumper Wire - This is a test wire used to connect two points of a circuit. It can be used to bypass an open in a circuit. WARNING: Never use a jumper wire across a load, such as a motor, connected between a battery feed and ground. - Voltmeter - Used to check for voltage on a circuit. Always connect the black lead to a known good ground and the red lead to the positive side of the circuit. CAUTION: Most of the electrical components used in today's vehicles are Solid State. When checking voltages in these circuits, use a meter with a 10 - megohm or greater impedance rating. - Ohmmeter - Used to check the resistance between two points of a circuit. Low or no resistance in a circuit means good continuity. CAUTION: Most of the electrical components used in today's vehicles are Solid State. When checking resistance in these circuits use a meter with a 10 - megohm or greater impedance rating. In addition, make sure the power is disconnected from the circuit. Circuits that are powered up by the vehicle's electrical system can cause damage to the equipment and provide false readings. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 432 - Probing Tools - These tools are used for probing terminals in connectors. Select the proper size tool from Special Tool Package 6807, and insert the probing end (2) into the terminal being tested. Use the other end of the tool (1) to insert the meter probe. INTERMITTENT AND POOR CONNECTIONS Most intermittent electrical problems are caused by faulty electrical connections or wiring. It is also possible for a sticking component or relay to cause a problem. Before condemning a component or wiring assembly, check the following items. - Connectors are fully seated - Spread terminals, or terminal push out - Terminals in the wiring assembly are fully seated into the connector/component and locked into position - Dirt or corrosion on the terminals. Any amount of corrosion or dirt could cause an intermittent problem - Damaged connector/component casing exposing the item to dirt or moisture - Wire insulation that has rubbed through causing a short to ground - Some or all of the wiring strands broken inside of the insulation - Wiring broken inside of the insulation TROUBLESHOOTING WIRING PROBLEMS When troubleshooting wiring problems there are six steps which can aid in the procedure. The steps are listed and explained below. Always check for non-factory items added to the vehicle before doing any diagnosis. If the vehicle is equipped with these items, disconnect them to verify these add-on items are not the cause of the problem. 1. Verify the problem. 2. Verify any related symptoms. Do this by performing operational checks on components that are in the same circuit. Refer to the wiring diagrams. 3. Analyze the symptoms. Use the wiring diagrams to determine what the circuit is doing, where the problem most likely is occurring and where the diagnosis will continue. 4. Isolate the problem area. 5. Repair the problem area. 6. Verify the proper operation. For this step, check for proper operation of all items on the repaired circuit. Refer to the wiring diagrams. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 433 Fuel Pump Relay: Connector Views Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Fuel Pump Relay: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION A separate fuel pump relay is no longer used. A circuit within the TIPM (Totally Integrated Power Module) is used to control the electric fuel pump located within the fuel pump module. The TIPM (1) is located in the engine compartment in front of the battery. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 436 Fuel Pump Relay: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The Powertrain Control Module (PCM) energizes the electric fuel pump through the fuel pump relay. The fuel pump relay is energized by first applying battery voltage to it when the ignition key is turned ON, and then applying a ground signal to the relay from the PCM. Whenever the ignition key is turned ON, the electric fuel pump will operate. But, the PCM will shut-down the ground circuit to the fuel pump relay in approximately 1-3 seconds unless the engine is operating or the starter motor is engaged. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Diagrams Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System): Diagrams Connector - (IN TIPM) RELAY-AUTO SHUT DOWN - (IN TIPM) Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 440 Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System): Description and Operation PCM OUTPUT The 5 pin, 12 volt, Automatic Shutdown (ASD) relay is located in the Power Distribution Center (PDC). Refer to label on PDC cover for relay location. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 441 Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System): Testing and Inspection Fig.1 ASD And Fuel Pump Relay Terminals-Type 1 Fig.2 ASD And Fuel Pump Relay Terminals-Type 2 The following description of operation and tests apply only to the Automatic Shutdown (ASD) and fuel pump relays. The terminals on the bottom of each relay are numbered. Two different types of relays may be used, or. - Terminal number 30 is connected to battery voltage. For both the ASD and fuel pump relays, terminal 30 is connected to battery voltage at all times. - The PCM grounds the coil side of the relay through terminal number 85. - Terminal number 86 supplies voltage to the coil side of the relay. - When the PCM de-energizes the ASD and fuel pump relays, terminal number 87A connects to terminal 30. This is the OFF position. In the OFF position, voltage is not supplied to the rest of the circuit. Terminal 87A is the center terminal on the relay. - When the PCM energizes the ASD and fuel pump relays, terminal 87 connects to terminal 30. This is the ON position. Terminal 87 supplies voltage to the rest of the circuit. The following procedure applies to the ASD and fuel pump relays. 1. Remove relay from connector before testing. 2. With the relay removed from the vehicle, use an ohmmeter to check the resistance between terminals 85 and 86. The resistance should be 75 ohms Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 442 ± 5 ohms. 3. Connect the ohmmeter between terminals 30 and 87A. The ohmmeter should show continuity between terminals 30 and 87A. 4. Connect the ohmmeter between terminals 87 and 30. The ohmmeter should not show continuity at this time. 5. Connect one end of a jumper wire (16 gauge or smaller) to relay terminal 85. Connect the other end of the jumper wire to the ground side of a 12 volt power source. 6. Connect one end of another jumper wire (16 gauge or smaller) to the power side of the 12 volt power source. Do not attach the other end of the jumper wire to the relay at this time. WARNING: DO NOT ALLOW OHMMETER TO CONTACT TERMINALS 85 OR 86 DURING THIS TEST. DAMAGE TO OHMMETER MAY RESULT. 7. Attach the other end of the jumper wire to relay terminal 86. This activates the relay. The ohmmeter should now show continuity between relay terminals 87 and 30. The ohmmeter should not show continuity between relay terminals 87A and 30. 8. Disconnect jumper wires. 9. Replace the relay if it did not pass the continuity and resistance tests. If the relay passed the tests, it operates properly. Check the remainder of the ASD and fuel pump relay circuits. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Locations Air Bag Control Module: Locations Component ID: 210 Component : MODULE-OCCUPANT RESTRAINT CONTROLLER Connector: Name : MODULE-OCCUPANT RESTRAINT CONTROLLER C1 Color : YELLOW # of pins : 24 Pin Circuit Description 1-2-3 D55 20WT/OR CAN B BUS (+) 4 D54 20WT CAN B BUS (-) 5-6 G104 20VT/GY PASSENGER AIRBAG INDICATOR DRIVER 7 R104 20LB/LG PASSENGER AIRBAG MUX SWITCH RETURN 8 R106 20LG/LB PASSENGER AIRBAG MUX SWITCH SENSE 9 R81 20LB/WT LEFT FRONT IMPACT SENSOR GROUND 10 R79 20LB/VT LEFT FRONT IMPACT SENSOR SIGNAL 11 R82 20WT/LB RIGHT FRONT IMPACT SENSOR GROUND 12 R80 20VT/LB RIGHT FRONT IMPACT SENSOR SIGNAL 13 - 14 - 15 - 16 - 17 R43 20LG/BR DRIVER SQUIB 1 LINE 1 18 R45 20LG/OR DRIVER SQUIB 1 LINE 2 19 R44 20LB/OR PASSENGER SQUIB 1 LINE 2 20 R42 20LB/BR PASSENGER SQUIB 1 LINE 1 21 R61 20LG/VT DRIVER SQUIB 2 LINE 1 22 R63 20LG/WT DRIVER SQUIB 2 LINE 2 23 R64 20LB/WT PASSENGER SQUIB 2 LINE 1 24 R62 20LB/VT PASSENGER SQUIB 2 LINE 2 Component Location - 58 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 447 Component Location - 63 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 448 Component Location - 51 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 449 Connector: Name : MODULE-OCCUPANT RESTRAINT CONTROLLER C2 Color : YELLOW # of pins : 32 Pin Circuit Description 1 R2 20WT/LB RIGHT CURTAIN SQUIB 1 LINE 2 2 R4 20OR/LB RIGHT CURTAIN SQUIB 1 LINE 1 3 R3 20LB/OR LEFT CURTAIN SQUIB 1 LINE 1 4 R1 20LB/WT LEFT CURTAIN SQUIB 1 LINE 2 5-- Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 450 6-7-8-9 R53 20LG/YL DRIVER SEAT BELT TENSIONER LINE 2 10 R55 20LG/DG DRIVER SEAT BELT TENSIONER LINE 1 11 R56 20LB/DG PASSENGER SEAT BELT TENSIONER LINE 1 12 R54 20LB/YL PASSENGER SEAT BELT TENSIONER LINE 2 13 R1 20LB/WT LEFT CURTAIN SQUIB 1 LINE 2 14 R3 20LB/OR LEFT CURTAIN SQUIB 1 LINE 1 15 R4 20OR/LB RIGHT CURTAIN SQUIB 1 LINE 1 16 R2 20WT/LB RIGHT CURTAIN SQUIB 1 LINE 2 17 F201 20PK/OR FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) 18 F100 20PK/VT FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN) 19 - 20 Z104 18BK/LG GROUND 21 - 22 - 23 - 24 - 25 R261 20LB/TN DRIVER SEAT POSITION SENSOR DATA 26 R263 20LB/GY DRIVER SEAT POSITION SENSOR VOLTAGE 27 R14 20TN/LG RIGHT SIDE IMPACT SENSOR 1 SIGNAL 28 R16 20BR/LG RIGHT SIDE IMPACT SENSOR 1 GROUND 29 R15 20LG/BR LEFT SIDE IMPACT SENSOR 1 GROUND 30 R13 20LG/TN LEFT SIDE IMPACT SENSOR 1 SIGNAL 31 - 32 - Component Location - 58 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 451 Component Location - 63 Component Location - 51 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 452 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 453 Air Bag Control Module: Diagrams Component ID: 210 Component : MODULE-OCCUPANT RESTRAINT CONTROLLER Connector: Name : MODULE-OCCUPANT RESTRAINT CONTROLLER C1 Color : YELLOW # of pins : 24 Pin Circuit Description 1-2-3 D55 20WT/OR CAN B BUS (+) 4 D54 20WT CAN B BUS (-) 5-6 G104 20VT/GY PASSENGER AIRBAG INDICATOR DRIVER 7 R104 20LB/LG PASSENGER AIRBAG MUX SWITCH RETURN 8 R106 20LG/LB PASSENGER AIRBAG MUX SWITCH SENSE 9 R81 20LB/WT LEFT FRONT IMPACT SENSOR GROUND 10 R79 20LB/VT LEFT FRONT IMPACT SENSOR SIGNAL 11 R82 20WT/LB RIGHT FRONT IMPACT SENSOR GROUND 12 R80 20VT/LB RIGHT FRONT IMPACT SENSOR SIGNAL 13 - 14 - 15 - 16 - 17 R43 20LG/BR DRIVER SQUIB 1 LINE 1 18 R45 20LG/OR DRIVER SQUIB 1 LINE 2 19 R44 20LB/OR PASSENGER SQUIB 1 LINE 2 20 R42 20LB/BR PASSENGER SQUIB 1 LINE 1 21 R61 20LG/VT DRIVER SQUIB 2 LINE 1 22 R63 20LG/WT DRIVER SQUIB 2 LINE 2 23 R64 20LB/WT PASSENGER SQUIB 2 LINE 1 24 R62 20LB/VT PASSENGER SQUIB 2 LINE 2 Component Location - 58 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 454 Component Location - 63 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 455 Component Location - 51 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 456 Connector: Name : MODULE-OCCUPANT RESTRAINT CONTROLLER C2 Color : YELLOW # of pins : 32 Pin Circuit Description 1 R2 20WT/LB RIGHT CURTAIN SQUIB 1 LINE 2 2 R4 20OR/LB RIGHT CURTAIN SQUIB 1 LINE 1 3 R3 20LB/OR LEFT CURTAIN SQUIB 1 LINE 1 4 R1 20LB/WT LEFT CURTAIN SQUIB 1 LINE 2 5-- Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 457 6-7-8-9 R53 20LG/YL DRIVER SEAT BELT TENSIONER LINE 2 10 R55 20LG/DG DRIVER SEAT BELT TENSIONER LINE 1 11 R56 20LB/DG PASSENGER SEAT BELT TENSIONER LINE 1 12 R54 20LB/YL PASSENGER SEAT BELT TENSIONER LINE 2 13 R1 20LB/WT LEFT CURTAIN SQUIB 1 LINE 2 14 R3 20LB/OR LEFT CURTAIN SQUIB 1 LINE 1 15 R4 20OR/LB RIGHT CURTAIN SQUIB 1 LINE 1 16 R2 20WT/LB RIGHT CURTAIN SQUIB 1 LINE 2 17 F201 20PK/OR FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) 18 F100 20PK/VT FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN) 19 - 20 Z104 18BK/LG GROUND 21 - 22 - 23 - 24 - 25 R261 20LB/TN DRIVER SEAT POSITION SENSOR DATA 26 R263 20LB/GY DRIVER SEAT POSITION SENSOR VOLTAGE 27 R14 20TN/LG RIGHT SIDE IMPACT SENSOR 1 SIGNAL 28 R16 20BR/LG RIGHT SIDE IMPACT SENSOR 1 GROUND 29 R15 20LG/BR LEFT SIDE IMPACT SENSOR 1 GROUND 30 R13 20LG/TN LEFT SIDE IMPACT SENSOR 1 SIGNAL 31 - 32 - Component Location - 58 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 458 Component Location - 63 Component Location - 51 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 459 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Classification Module - Air Bag > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Seat Occupant Classification Module - Air Bag: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) (1) is located in the passenger compartment of the vehicle, where it is secured by three nuts to three studs on a stamped steel mounting bracket welded onto the top of the floor panel transmission tunnel under the center front seat section or the center floor console, as the vehicle is equipped. Concealed within a hollow in the center of the die cast aluminum ORC housing is the electronic circuitry of the ORC which includes a microprocessor, an electronic impact sensor, an electronic safing sensor, and an energy storage capacitor. A stamped metal cover plate is secured to the bottom of the ORC housing with screws to enclose and protect the internal electronic circuitry and components. An arrow (2) printed on the label (3) on the top of the ORC housing provides a visual verification of the proper orientation of the unit, and should always be pointed toward the front of the vehicle. The ORC housing has integral mounting flanges on three corners. The mounting flange to the right of the connector receptacles (4) has an integral locating pin on its lower surface. Both right side flanges have round mounting holes, while the flange on the left side has a slotted mounting hole. A molded plastic electrical connector (4) with 2 receptacles, one containing 24 terminal pins and the other containing 32 terminal pins, exits the forward facing side of the ORC housing. These terminal pins connect the ORC to the vehicle electrical system through two dedicated take outs and connectors, one each from the instrument panel and the body wire harnesses. A molded plastic protective cover is installed over the ORC to provide additional moisture contamination protection to the unit. Integral latch features on each side of the cover engage a slot (5) on each side of the base of the ORC housing to secure the cover to the ORC. This protective cover must be reinstalled following any service requiring its removal. The impact sensor and safing sensor internal to the ORC are calibrated for the specific vehicle, and are only serviced as a unit with the ORC. In addition, there are unique versions of the ORC for light and heavy-duty vehicles, and for vehicles with or without the optional side curtain airbags. The ORC cannot be repaired or adjusted and, if damaged or ineffective, it must be replaced. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Classification Module - Air Bag > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 464 Seat Occupant Classification Module - Air Bag: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The microprocessor in the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) contains the Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) logic circuits and controls all of the SRS components. The ORC uses On-Board Diagnostics (OBD) and can communicate with other electronic modules in the vehicle as well as with the diagnostic scan tool using the Controller Area Network (CAN) data bus. This method of communication is used for control of the airbag indicator in the ElectroMechanical Instrument Cluster (EMIC) (also known as the Cab Compartment Node/CCN) and for SRS diagnosis and testing through the 16-way Data Link Connector (DLC) located on the driver side lower edge of the instrument panel. See: Restraint Systems/Air Bag Systems/Malfunction Lamp / Indicator/Description and Operation/Operation . The ORC microprocessor continuously monitors all of the SRS electrical circuits to determine the system readiness. If the ORC detects a monitored system fault, it sets an active and stored Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) and sends electronic messages to the EMIC over the CAN data bus to turn ON the airbag indicator. An active fault only remains for the duration of the fault, or in some cases for the duration of the current ignition switch cycle, while a stored fault causes a DTC to be stored in memory by the ORC. For some DTCs, if a fault does not recur for a number of ignition cycles, the ORC will automatically erase the stored DTC. For other internal faults, the stored DTC is latched forever. In standard cab vehicles (except light-duty DR 1500), the ORC also monitors a resistor multiplexed input from the passenger airbag on/off switch. If the passenger airbag on/off switch is set to the OFF position, the ORC turns ON the passenger airbag on/off indicator and will internally disable the passenger airbag and, on light-duty DR 1500 only, the seat belt tensioner from being deployed. The ORC receives battery current through two circuits; a fused ignition switch output (run) circuit through a fuse in the Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM), and a fused ignition switch output (run-start) circuit through a second fuse in the TIPM. The ORC receives ground through a ground circuit and take out of the instrument panel wire harness. This take out has a single eyelet terminal connector that is secured by a ground screw to the instrument panel structural support. These connections allow the ORC to be operational whenever the ignition switch is in the START or ON positions. The ORC also contains an energy-storage capacitor. When the ignition switch is in the START or ON positions, this capacitor is continually being charged with enough electrical energy to deploy the SRS components for up to one second following a battery disconnect or failure. The purpose of the capacitor is to provide backup SRS protection in case there is a loss of battery current supply to the ORC during an impact. Two sensors are contained within the ORC, an electronic impact sensor and a safing sensor. The ORC also monitors inputs from two remote front impact sensors located on the back of the right and left ends of the lower radiator crossmember near the front of the vehicle. The electronic impact sensors are accelerometers that sense the rate of vehicle deceleration, which provide verification of the direction and severity of an impact. On vehicles equipped with optional side curtain airbags the ORC also monitors inputs from two additional remote impact sensors located within both the left and right B-pillars to control deployment of the side curtain airbag units. The safing sensor is an electronic accelerometer sensor within the ORC that provides an additional logic input to the ORC microprocessor. The safing sensor is used to verify the need for a SRS deployment by detecting impact energy of a lesser magnitude than that of the primary electronic impact sensors, and must exceed a safing threshold in order for the airbags to deploy. Vehicles equipped with optional side curtain airbags feature a second safing sensor within the ORC to provide confirmation to the ORC microprocessor of side impact forces. This second safing sensor is a bi-directional unit that detects impact forces from either side of the vehicle. Pre-programmed decision algorithms in the ORC microprocessor determine when the deceleration rate as signaled by the impact sensors and the safing sensors indicate an impact that is severe enough to require SRS protection and, based upon the severity of the monitored impact, determines the level of front airbag deployment force required for each front seating position. When the programmed conditions are met, the ORC sends the proper electrical signals to deploy the dual multistage front airbags at the programmed force levels and, if the vehicle is so equipped, the front seat belt tensioners or either side curtain airbag unit. On standard cab vehicles except light-duty DR 1500, the passenger front airbag will be deployed by the ORC only if enabled by the passenger airbag on/off switch at the time of the impact. The hard wired inputs and outputs for the ORC may be diagnosed using conventional diagnostic tools and procedures. Refer to the appropriate wiring information. However, conventional diagnostic methods will not prove conclusive in the diagnosis of the ORC or the electronic controls or communication between other modules and devices that provide features of the SRS. The most reliable, efficient, and accurate means to diagnose the ORC or the electronic controls and communication related to ORC operation requires the use of a diagnostic scan tool. Refer to the appropriate diagnostic information. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Classification Module - Air Bag > Component Information > Service and Repair > Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) Module - Removal Seat Occupant Classification Module - Air Bag: Service and Repair Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) Module - Removal MODULE WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury on vehicles equipped with airbags, disable the Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, airbag, seat belt tensioner, impact sensor, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the SRS. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment. WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury, never strike or drop the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC), as it can damage the impact sensor or affect its calibration. The ORC contains the impact sensor, which enables the system to deploy the Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) components. If an ORC is accidentally dropped during service, the module must be scrapped and replaced with a new unit. Failure to observe this warning could result in accidental, incomplete, or improper SRS component deployment. 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. Wait two minutes for the system capacitor to discharge before further service. 2. Remove the protective cover from the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) (1). See: Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) Module Cover Removal . 3. Unlatch and disconnect the two wire harness connectors (3) for the ORC from the ORC connector receptacles (2 and 4) located on the forward facing side of the module. To disconnect the wire harness connectors from the ORC, depress the release tab and lift the lever arm on each connector. 4. Remove the three nuts (2) that secure the ORC (1) to the studs on the ORC mounting bracket (3) on the floor panel transmission tunnel. 5. Remove the ORC from the floor panel transmission tunnel. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Classification Module - Air Bag > Component Information > Service and Repair > Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) Module - Removal > Page 467 Seat Occupant Classification Module - Air Bag: Service and Repair Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) Module Cover - Removal COVER WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury on vehicles equipped with airbags, disable the Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, airbag, seat belt tensioner, impact sensor, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the SRS. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment. 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. Wait two minutes for the system capacitor to discharge before further service. NOTE: The front seat assembly must be unfastened from the floor panel, but need not be removed from the vehicle for access to the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) cover for service. 2. Remove the front seat from the vehicle. See: Body and Frame/Seats/Service and Repair/Seat Removal . 3. Using a trim stick or another suitable wide flat-bladed tool, gently pry the latch feature on either side of the ORC cover (1) away from the base of the ORC (2) far enough to disengage the cover from the module. 4. Remove the ORC cover from over the ORC. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Classification Module - Air Bag > Component Information > Service and Repair > Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) Module - Removal > Page 468 Seat Occupant Classification Module - Air Bag: Service and Repair Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) Module - Installation MODULE WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury on vehicles equipped with airbags, disable the Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, airbag, seat belt tensioner, impact sensor, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the SRS. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment. WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury, never strike or drop the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC), as it can damage the impact sensor or affect its calibration. The ORC contains the impact sensor, which enables the system to deploy the Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) components. If an ORC is accidentally dropped during service, the module must be scrapped and replaced with a new unit. Failure to observe this warning could result in accidental, incomplete, or improper SRS component deployment. 1. Position the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) (1) over the three studs of the ORC mounting bracket (3) on the floor panel transmission tunnel, then engage the locating pin on the bottom of the right ORC mounting flange into the locating hole in the bracket. When the ORC is correctly positioned, the arrow on the ORC label will be pointed forward in the vehicle. 2. Install and tighten the three nuts (2) that secure the ORC to the bracket on the floor panel transmission tunnel. Tighten the nuts to 10 Nm (7 ft. lbs.). 3. Reconnect the two wire harness connectors (3) for the ORC (1) to the ORC connector receptacles (2 and 4) located on the forward facing side of the module. Be certain that the latches on the connectors are each fully engaged. 4. Reinstall the ORC cover onto the ORC. See: Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) Module Cover - Installation . 5. Do not reconnect the battery negative cable at this time. The Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) verification test procedure should be performed following service of any SRS component. See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code Tests and Associated Procedures/Verification Tests . Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Classification Module - Air Bag > Component Information > Service and Repair > Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) Module - Removal > Page 469 Seat Occupant Classification Module - Air Bag: Service and Repair Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) Module Cover - Installation COVER WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury on vehicles equipped with airbags, disable the Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, airbag, seat belt tensioner, impact sensor, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the SRS. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment. 1. Position the ORC cover (1) over the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) (2). 2. Align the latch feature on each side of the ORC cover with the notch in each side at the base of the ORC housing. 3. Using hand pressure, press firmly and evenly downward on the ORC cover until each latch feature is fully engaged with the ORC housing. 4. Reinstall the front seat into the vehicle. See: Body and Frame/Seats/Service and Repair/Seat - Installation . 5. Reconnect the battery negative cable. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Steering and Suspension > Relays and Modules - Steering > Steering Mounted Controls Communication Module > Component Information > Locations Steering Mounted Controls Communication Module: Locations Component ID: 214 Component : MODULE-STEERING CONTROL Connector: Name : MODULE-STEERING CONTROL C1 Color : WHITE # of pins : 6 Pin Circuit Description 1 Z909 20BK GROUND 2 X20 20GY/WT RADIO CONTROL MUX 3 V38 20VT/OR S/C SWITCH NO. 2 SIGNAL 4 V37 20VT S/C SWITCH NO. 1 SIGNAL 5 V937 20VT/BR S/C SWITCH RETURN 6 X3 20DG/VT HORN SWITCH SENSE Component Location - 47 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Steering and Suspension > Relays and Modules - Steering > Steering Mounted Controls Communication Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 475 Component Location - 42 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Steering and Suspension > Relays and Modules - Steering > Steering Mounted Controls Communication Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 476 Component Location - 43 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Steering and Suspension > Relays and Modules - Steering > Steering Mounted Controls Communication Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 477 Connector: Name : MODULE-STEERING CONTROL C2 Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (PREMIUM) Pin Circuit Description 1 G902 22WT/BR SWITCH MUX RETURN Pin Circuit Description 1 G902 22WT/BR SWITCH MUX RETURN Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Steering and Suspension > Relays and Modules - Steering > Steering Mounted Controls Communication Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 478 2 X20 22GY/WT RADIO CONTROL MUX 2 X20 22GY/WT RADIO CONTROL MUX Component Location - 47 Component Location - 42 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Steering and Suspension > Relays and Modules - Steering > Steering Mounted Controls Communication Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 479 Component Location - 43 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Steering and Suspension > Relays and Modules - Steering > Steering Mounted Controls Communication Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 480 Connector: Name : MODULE-STEERING CONTROL C3 Color : # of pins : 4 Pin Circuit Description 1 X3 20DG/VT HORN SWITCH SENSE 2 V937 22DB/DG S/C SWITCH RETURN 2 K900 22DB/DG SENSOR GROUND 3 V37 22VT S/C SWITCH NO. 1 SIGNAL 4 V38 22VT/OR S/C SWITCH NO. 2 SIGNAL Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Steering and Suspension > Relays and Modules - Steering > Steering Mounted Controls Communication Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 481 Component Location - 47 Component Location - 42 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Steering and Suspension > Relays and Modules - Steering > Steering Mounted Controls Communication Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 482 Component Location - 43 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Steering and Suspension > Relays and Modules - Steering > Steering Mounted Controls Communication Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 483 Connector: Name : MODULE-STEERING CONTROL C4 Color : YELLOW # of pins : 4 Pin Circuit Description 1 R61 20LG/VT DRIVER SQUIB 2 LINE 1 2 R63 20LG/WT DRIVER SQUIB 2 LINE 2 3 R43 20LG/BR DRIVER SQUIB 1 LINE 1 4 R45 20LG/OR DRIVER SQUIB 1 LINE 2 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Steering and Suspension > Relays and Modules - Steering > Steering Mounted Controls Communication Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 484 Component Location - 47 Component Location - 42 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Steering and Suspension > Relays and Modules - Steering > Steering Mounted Controls Communication Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 485 Component Location - 43 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Steering and Suspension > Relays and Modules - Steering > Steering Mounted Controls Communication Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 486 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Steering and Suspension > Relays and Modules - Steering > Steering Mounted Controls Communication Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 487 Steering Mounted Controls Communication Module: Diagrams Component ID: 214 Component : MODULE-STEERING CONTROL Connector: Name : MODULE-STEERING CONTROL C1 Color : WHITE # of pins : 6 Pin Circuit Description 1 Z909 20BK GROUND 2 X20 20GY/WT RADIO CONTROL MUX 3 V38 20VT/OR S/C SWITCH NO. 2 SIGNAL 4 V37 20VT S/C SWITCH NO. 1 SIGNAL 5 V937 20VT/BR S/C SWITCH RETURN 6 X3 20DG/VT HORN SWITCH SENSE Component Location - 47 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Steering and Suspension > Relays and Modules - Steering > Steering Mounted Controls Communication Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 488 Component Location - 42 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Steering and Suspension > Relays and Modules - Steering > Steering Mounted Controls Communication Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 489 Component Location - 43 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Steering and Suspension > Relays and Modules - Steering > Steering Mounted Controls Communication Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 490 Connector: Name : MODULE-STEERING CONTROL C2 Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (PREMIUM) Pin Circuit Description 1 G902 22WT/BR SWITCH MUX RETURN Pin Circuit Description 1 G902 22WT/BR SWITCH MUX RETURN Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Steering and Suspension > Relays and Modules - Steering > Steering Mounted Controls Communication Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 491 2 X20 22GY/WT RADIO CONTROL MUX 2 X20 22GY/WT RADIO CONTROL MUX Component Location - 47 Component Location - 42 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Steering and Suspension > Relays and Modules - Steering > Steering Mounted Controls Communication Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 492 Component Location - 43 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Steering and Suspension > Relays and Modules - Steering > Steering Mounted Controls Communication Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 493 Connector: Name : MODULE-STEERING CONTROL C3 Color : # of pins : 4 Pin Circuit Description 1 X3 20DG/VT HORN SWITCH SENSE 2 V937 22DB/DG S/C SWITCH RETURN 2 K900 22DB/DG SENSOR GROUND 3 V37 22VT S/C SWITCH NO. 1 SIGNAL 4 V38 22VT/OR S/C SWITCH NO. 2 SIGNAL Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Steering and Suspension > Relays and Modules - Steering > Steering Mounted Controls Communication Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 494 Component Location - 47 Component Location - 42 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Steering and Suspension > Relays and Modules - Steering > Steering Mounted Controls Communication Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 495 Component Location - 43 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Steering and Suspension > Relays and Modules - Steering > Steering Mounted Controls Communication Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 496 Connector: Name : MODULE-STEERING CONTROL C4 Color : YELLOW # of pins : 4 Pin Circuit Description 1 R61 20LG/VT DRIVER SQUIB 2 LINE 1 2 R63 20LG/WT DRIVER SQUIB 2 LINE 2 3 R43 20LG/BR DRIVER SQUIB 1 LINE 1 4 R45 20LG/OR DRIVER SQUIB 1 LINE 2 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Steering and Suspension > Relays and Modules - Steering > Steering Mounted Controls Communication Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 497 Component Location - 47 Component Location - 42 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Steering and Suspension > Relays and Modules - Steering > Steering Mounted Controls Communication Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 498 Component Location - 43 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Steering and Suspension > Relays and Modules - Steering > Steering Mounted Controls Communication Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 499 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Steering and Suspension > Relays and Modules - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure Monitor Receiver / Transponder > Component Information > Locations > Transponder-Tire Pressure-Left Front Tire Pressure Monitor Receiver / Transponder: Locations Transponder-Tire Pressure-Left Front Component ID 521 Component ID: 521 Component : TRANSPONDER-TIRE PRESSURE-LEFT FRONT Connector: Name : TRANSPONDER-TIRE PRESSURE-LEFT FRONT Color : # of pins : 6 Pin Circuit Description 1 F504 20GY/PK FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN) 2 D508 20WT/GY COM-LIN TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR LAN 3 Z924 20BK GROUND 4 Z924 20BK GROUND 5-6-- Component Location - 32 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Steering and Suspension > Relays and Modules - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure Monitor Receiver / Transponder > Component Information > Locations > Transponder-Tire Pressure-Left Front > Page 505 Component ID 523 Component ID: 523 Component : TRANSPONDER-TIRE PRESSURE-LEFT FRONT Connector: Name : TRANSPONDER-TIRE PRESSURE-LEFT FRONT Color : # of pins : 6 Pin Circuit Description Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Steering and Suspension > Relays and Modules - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure Monitor Receiver / Transponder > Component Information > Locations > Transponder-Tire Pressure-Left Front > Page 506 1 F504 20GY/PK FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN) 2 D508 20WT/GY COM-LIN TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR LAN 3 Z924 20BK GROUND 4 Z924 20BK GROUND 5-6-Component Location - 32 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Steering and Suspension > Relays and Modules - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure Monitor Receiver / Transponder > Component Information > Locations > Transponder-Tire Pressure-Left Front > Page 507 Tire Pressure Monitor Receiver / Transponder: Locations Transponder-Tire Pressure-Right Front Component ID 522 Component ID: 522 Component : TRANSPONDER-TIRE PRESSURE-RIGHT FRONT Connector: Name : TRANSPONDER-TIRE PRESSURE-RIGHT FRONT Color : # of pins : 6 Pin Circuit Description 1 F504 20GY/PK FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN) 2 D508 20WT/GY COM-LIN TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR LAN 3 Z924 20BK GROUND 4-5 Z924 20BK GROUND 6-- Component Location - 29 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Steering and Suspension > Relays and Modules - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure Monitor Receiver / Transponder > Component Information > Locations > Transponder-Tire Pressure-Left Front > Page 508 Component ID 524 Component ID: 524 Component : TRANSPONDER-TIRE PRESSURE-RIGHT FRONT Connector: Name : TRANSPONDER-TIRE PRESSURE-RIGHT FRONT Color : # of pins : 6 Pin Circuit Description Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Steering and Suspension > Relays and Modules - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure Monitor Receiver / Transponder > Component Information > Locations > Transponder-Tire Pressure-Left Front > Page 509 1 F504 20GY/PK FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN) 2 D508 20WT/GY COM-LIN TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR LAN 3 Z924 20BK GROUND 4-5 Z924 20BK GROUND 6-Component Location - 29 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Steering and Suspension > Relays and Modules - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure Monitor Receiver / Transponder > Component Information > Diagrams > Transponder-Tire Pressure-Left Front Tire Pressure Monitor Receiver / Transponder: Diagrams Transponder-Tire Pressure-Left Front Component ID 521 Component ID: 521 Component : TRANSPONDER-TIRE PRESSURE-LEFT FRONT Connector: Name : TRANSPONDER-TIRE PRESSURE-LEFT FRONT Color : # of pins : 6 Pin Circuit Description 1 F504 20GY/PK FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN) 2 D508 20WT/GY COM-LIN TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR LAN 3 Z924 20BK GROUND 4 Z924 20BK GROUND 5-6-- Component Location - 32 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Steering and Suspension > Relays and Modules - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure Monitor Receiver / Transponder > Component Information > Diagrams > Transponder-Tire Pressure-Left Front > Page 512 Component ID 523 Component ID: 523 Component : TRANSPONDER-TIRE PRESSURE-LEFT FRONT Connector: Name : TRANSPONDER-TIRE PRESSURE-LEFT FRONT Color : # of pins : 6 Pin Circuit Description Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Steering and Suspension > Relays and Modules - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure Monitor Receiver / Transponder > Component Information > Diagrams > Transponder-Tire Pressure-Left Front > Page 513 1 F504 20GY/PK FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN) 2 D508 20WT/GY COM-LIN TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR LAN 3 Z924 20BK GROUND 4 Z924 20BK GROUND 5-6-Component Location - 32 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Steering and Suspension > Relays and Modules - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure Monitor Receiver / Transponder > Component Information > Diagrams > Transponder-Tire Pressure-Left Front > Page 514 Tire Pressure Monitor Receiver / Transponder: Diagrams Transponder-Tire Pressure-Right Front Component ID 522 Component ID: 522 Component : TRANSPONDER-TIRE PRESSURE-RIGHT FRONT Connector: Name : TRANSPONDER-TIRE PRESSURE-RIGHT FRONT Color : # of pins : 6 Pin Circuit Description 1 F504 20GY/PK FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN) 2 D508 20WT/GY COM-LIN TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR LAN 3 Z924 20BK GROUND 4-5 Z924 20BK GROUND 6-- Component Location - 29 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Steering and Suspension > Relays and Modules - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure Monitor Receiver / Transponder > Component Information > Diagrams > Transponder-Tire Pressure-Left Front > Page 515 Component ID 524 Component ID: 524 Component : TRANSPONDER-TIRE PRESSURE-RIGHT FRONT Connector: Name : TRANSPONDER-TIRE PRESSURE-RIGHT FRONT Color : # of pins : 6 Pin Circuit Description Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Steering and Suspension > Relays and Modules - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure Monitor Receiver / Transponder > Component Information > Diagrams > Transponder-Tire Pressure-Left Front > Page 516 1 F504 20GY/PK FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN) 2 D508 20WT/GY COM-LIN TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR LAN 3 Z924 20BK GROUND 4-5 Z924 20BK GROUND 6-Component Location - 29 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Steering and Suspension > Relays and Modules - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure Monitor Receiver / Transponder > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Tire Pressure Monitor Receiver / Transponder: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION A transponder (2), also known as a trigger module, is located in the front wheel wells (behind the wheelhouse splash shields) of the vehicle to provide the WCM/SKREEM with the location of the front tire pressure sensors on the vehicle. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Steering and Suspension > Relays and Modules - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure Monitor Receiver / Transponder > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 519 Tire Pressure Monitor Receiver / Transponder: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The Wireless Control Module (WCM), commonly referred to as the Sentry Key Remote Entry Module (SKREEM), uses transponders (trigger modules) located in the front wheel wells on the vehicle to provide it with the location of the front tire pressure sensors on the vehicle. Like the base system, the WCM receives RF signals from all four rotating wheel speed sensors. When the WCM needs to know which sensor is located at a particular location on the vehicle, it directs the transponder at that location to send out a low frequency signal to excite the nearby sensor. The WCM then receives that excited signal and knows where that sensor is located. This auto-locating process only happens in the first 10 minutes of any WCM cycle while traveling at speeds above 20 mph (32 km/h) (Each WCM cycle ends when the vehicle has been shut off for a time period of approximately 20 minutes or longer). If the TPMS fails to localize, the TPM indicator lamp will flash on/off for 75 seconds, and remain on solid. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Steering and Suspension > Relays and Modules - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure Monitor Receiver / Transponder > Component Information > Service and Repair > TPM Transponder - Removal Tire Pressure Monitor Receiver / Transponder: Service and Repair TPM Transponder - Removal REMOVAL 1. Raise and support the vehicle. 2. Remove the wheel well housing cover. 3. Remove the mounting screw (1) for the transponder (2). 4. Disconnect the electrical connector (3) and remove the transponder (2) from the vehicle. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Steering and Suspension > Relays and Modules - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure Monitor Receiver / Transponder > Component Information > Service and Repair > TPM Transponder - Removal > Page 522 Tire Pressure Monitor Receiver / Transponder: Service and Repair TPM Transponder - Installation INSTALLATION 1. Install the transponder (2) to the vehicle and reconnect the electrical connector (3). 2. Install the mounting screw (1) for the transponder (2) Tighten to 3 Nm (25 in. lbs.). 3. Install the wheel well housing cover. 4. Lower the vehicle. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 200 Control Module: Locations Component ID 200 Component ID: 200 Component : MODULE-TRANSMISSION CONTROL Connector: Name : MODULE-TRANSMISSION CONTROL C1 Color : # of pins : 17 Qualifier : (RC) Pin Circuit Description 1 T52 20DG/OR INPUT SPEED SIGNAL 2-3 K427 18OR/LG POWER TAKEOFF RELAY ENABLE 4-5 T803 20DG/BR PRESSURE SIGNAL 4 6 T800 20DG/BR PRESSURE SIGNAL 1 7-8-9-10 - 11 T804 20YL/DB PRESSURE SIGNAL 5 12 T802 20DG/PK PRESSURE SIGNAL 3 13 - 14 - 15 - 16 T805 20DG/OR PRESSURE SIGNAL 6 17 T801 20DG/RD PRESSURE SIGNAL 2 Component Location - 31 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 200 > Page 529 Connector: Name : MODULE-TRANSMISSION CONTROL C2 Color : # of pins : 24 Qualifier : (RC) Pin Circuit Description 1 T72 20YL/DB 8 VOLT SUPPLY 2 T14 20DG/BR OUTPUT SPEED SIGNAL 3 F916 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION RELAY OUTPUT 3 T16 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 200 > Page 530 4 F916 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION RELAY OUTPUT 4 T16 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT 5-6-7 A104 20YL/RD FUSED B(+) 8 Z133 18BK/LG GROUND 9-10 - 11 - 12 - 13 - - 14 T6 20DG TOW/HAUL OVERDRIVE OFF SWITCH SIGNAL 15 T54 20DG/OR TRANSMISSION TEMPERATURE SIGNAL 16 T819 20YL/VT TCC TEMPERATURE SIGNAL 17 Z133 18BK/LG GROUND 18 - 19 T811 20DG/LB SHIFT 4 CONTROL 20 D65 20WT/LG CAN C BUS (+) 21 D64 20WT/LB CAN C BUS (-) 22 - 23 - 24 - Component Location - 31 Connector: Name : MODULE-TRANSMISSION CONTROL C3 Color : # of pins : 31 Qualifier : (RC) Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 200 > Page 531 Pin Circuit Description 1 T808 20DG/GY SHIFT 1 CONTROL 2-3 T810 20DG/DB SHIFT 3 CONTROL 4-5 T817 20YL/BR LINEAR 3 CONTROL 6 T812 20DG/TN LINEAR 1 GROUND 7 T813 20DG/LG LINEAR 1 CONTROL 8 T815 20YL/RD LINEAR 2 CONTROL 9 T814 20YL/BR LINEAR 2 GROUND 10 T806 20DG/VT PRESSURE SIGNAL 7 11 - 12 - 13 - 14 - - 15 T816 20YL/PK LINEAR 3 GROUND 16 T828 20DG/DB TRS 1 SIGNAL 17 T42 20DG/YL TRS T42 SIGNAL 18 T3 20DG/DB TRS T3 SIGNAL 19 T827 20DG/LB TRS DRIVE SIGNAL 20 T824 20YL/DB TRS PARK SIGNAL 21 T826 20DG/DB TRS REVERSE SIGNAL 22 T809 20DG/YL SHIFT 2 CONTROL 23 - 24 - 25 - 26 T807 20DG/WT PRESSURE SIGNAL 8 27 - 28 T820 20YL/WT TEMPERATURE SENSOR GROUND 29 T825 20DG/YL TRS NEUTRAL SIGNAL 30 T821 20YL/GY LINEAR 4 CONTROL 31 T818 20YL/OR LINEAR 4 GROUND Component Location - 31 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 200 > Page 532 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 200 > Page 533 Control Module: Locations Component ID 216 Component ID: 216 Component : MODULE-TRANSMISSION CONTROL Connector: Name : MODULE-TRANSMISSION CONTROL C1 Color : # of pins : 17 Qualifier : (RC) Pin Circuit Description 1 T52 20DG/OR INPUT SPEED SIGNAL 2-3 K427 18OR/LG POWER TAKEOFF RELAY ENABLE 4-5 T803 20DG/BR PRESSURE SIGNAL 4 6 T800 20DG/BR PRESSURE SIGNAL 1 7-8-9-10 - 11 T804 20YL/DB PRESSURE SIGNAL 5 12 T802 20DG/PK PRESSURE SIGNAL 3 13 - 14 - 15 - 16 T805 20DG/OR PRESSURE SIGNAL 6 17 T801 20DG/RD PRESSURE SIGNAL 2 Component Location - 31 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 200 > Page 534 Connector: Name : MODULE-TRANSMISSION CONTROL C2 Color : # of pins : 24 Qualifier : (RC) Pin Circuit Description 1 T72 20YL/DB 8 VOLT SUPPLY 2 T14 20DG/BR OUTPUT SPEED SIGNAL 3 F916 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION RELAY OUTPUT 3 T16 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 200 > Page 535 4 F916 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION RELAY OUTPUT 4 T16 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT 5-6-7 A104 20YL/RD FUSED B(+) 8 Z133 18BK/LG GROUND 9-10 - 11 - 12 - 13 - - 14 T6 20DG TOW/HAUL OVERDRIVE OFF SWITCH SIGNAL 15 T54 20DG/OR TRANSMISSION TEMPERATURE SIGNAL 16 T819 20YL/VT TCC TEMPERATURE SIGNAL 17 Z133 18BK/LG GROUND 18 - 19 T811 20DG/LB SHIFT 4 CONTROL 20 D65 20WT/LG CAN C BUS (+) 21 D64 20WT/LB CAN C BUS (-) 22 - 23 - 24 - Component Location - 31 Connector: Name : MODULE-TRANSMISSION CONTROL C3 Color : # of pins : 31 Qualifier : (RC) Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 200 > Page 536 Pin Circuit Description 1 T808 20DG/GY SHIFT 1 CONTROL 2-3 T810 20DG/DB SHIFT 3 CONTROL 4-5 T817 20YL/BR LINEAR 3 CONTROL 6 T812 20DG/TN LINEAR 1 GROUND 7 T813 20DG/LG LINEAR 1 CONTROL 8 T815 20YL/RD LINEAR 2 CONTROL 9 T814 20YL/BR LINEAR 2 GROUND 10 T806 20DG/VT PRESSURE SIGNAL 7 11 - 12 - 13 - 14 - - 15 T816 20YL/PK LINEAR 3 GROUND 16 T828 20DG/DB TRS 1 SIGNAL 17 T42 20DG/YL TRS T42 SIGNAL 18 T3 20DG/DB TRS T3 SIGNAL 19 T827 20DG/LB TRS DRIVE SIGNAL 20 T824 20YL/DB TRS PARK SIGNAL 21 T826 20DG/DB TRS REVERSE SIGNAL 22 T809 20DG/YL SHIFT 2 CONTROL 23 - 24 - 25 - 26 T807 20DG/WT PRESSURE SIGNAL 8 27 - 28 T820 20YL/WT TEMPERATURE SENSOR GROUND 29 T825 20DG/YL TRS NEUTRAL SIGNAL 30 T821 20YL/GY LINEAR 4 CONTROL 31 T818 20YL/OR LINEAR 4 GROUND Component Location - 31 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 200 > Page 537 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Component ID 200 Control Module: Diagrams Component ID 200 Component ID: 200 Component : MODULE-TRANSMISSION CONTROL Connector: Name : MODULE-TRANSMISSION CONTROL C1 Color : # of pins : 17 Qualifier : (RC) Pin Circuit Description 1 T52 20DG/OR INPUT SPEED SIGNAL 2-3 K427 18OR/LG POWER TAKEOFF RELAY ENABLE 4-5 T803 20DG/BR PRESSURE SIGNAL 4 6 T800 20DG/BR PRESSURE SIGNAL 1 7-8-9-10 - 11 T804 20YL/DB PRESSURE SIGNAL 5 12 T802 20DG/PK PRESSURE SIGNAL 3 13 - 14 - 15 - 16 T805 20DG/OR PRESSURE SIGNAL 6 17 T801 20DG/RD PRESSURE SIGNAL 2 Component Location - 31 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Component ID 200 > Page 540 Connector: Name : MODULE-TRANSMISSION CONTROL C2 Color : # of pins : 24 Qualifier : (RC) Pin Circuit Description 1 T72 20YL/DB 8 VOLT SUPPLY 2 T14 20DG/BR OUTPUT SPEED SIGNAL 3 F916 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION RELAY OUTPUT 3 T16 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Component ID 200 > Page 541 4 F916 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION RELAY OUTPUT 4 T16 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT 5-6-7 A104 20YL/RD FUSED B(+) 8 Z133 18BK/LG GROUND 9-10 - 11 - 12 - 13 - - 14 T6 20DG TOW/HAUL OVERDRIVE OFF SWITCH SIGNAL 15 T54 20DG/OR TRANSMISSION TEMPERATURE SIGNAL 16 T819 20YL/VT TCC TEMPERATURE SIGNAL 17 Z133 18BK/LG GROUND 18 - 19 T811 20DG/LB SHIFT 4 CONTROL 20 D65 20WT/LG CAN C BUS (+) 21 D64 20WT/LB CAN C BUS (-) 22 - 23 - 24 - Component Location - 31 Connector: Name : MODULE-TRANSMISSION CONTROL C3 Color : # of pins : 31 Qualifier : (RC) Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Component ID 200 > Page 542 Pin Circuit Description 1 T808 20DG/GY SHIFT 1 CONTROL 2-3 T810 20DG/DB SHIFT 3 CONTROL 4-5 T817 20YL/BR LINEAR 3 CONTROL 6 T812 20DG/TN LINEAR 1 GROUND 7 T813 20DG/LG LINEAR 1 CONTROL 8 T815 20YL/RD LINEAR 2 CONTROL 9 T814 20YL/BR LINEAR 2 GROUND 10 T806 20DG/VT PRESSURE SIGNAL 7 11 - 12 - 13 - 14 - - 15 T816 20YL/PK LINEAR 3 GROUND 16 T828 20DG/DB TRS 1 SIGNAL 17 T42 20DG/YL TRS T42 SIGNAL 18 T3 20DG/DB TRS T3 SIGNAL 19 T827 20DG/LB TRS DRIVE SIGNAL 20 T824 20YL/DB TRS PARK SIGNAL 21 T826 20DG/DB TRS REVERSE SIGNAL 22 T809 20DG/YL SHIFT 2 CONTROL 23 - 24 - 25 - 26 T807 20DG/WT PRESSURE SIGNAL 8 27 - 28 T820 20YL/WT TEMPERATURE SENSOR GROUND 29 T825 20DG/YL TRS NEUTRAL SIGNAL 30 T821 20YL/GY LINEAR 4 CONTROL 31 T818 20YL/OR LINEAR 4 GROUND Component Location - 31 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Component ID 200 > Page 543 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Component ID 200 > Page 544 Control Module: Diagrams Component ID 216 Component ID: 216 Component : MODULE-TRANSMISSION CONTROL Connector: Name : MODULE-TRANSMISSION CONTROL C1 Color : # of pins : 17 Qualifier : (RC) Pin Circuit Description 1 T52 20DG/OR INPUT SPEED SIGNAL 2-3 K427 18OR/LG POWER TAKEOFF RELAY ENABLE 4-5 T803 20DG/BR PRESSURE SIGNAL 4 6 T800 20DG/BR PRESSURE SIGNAL 1 7-8-9-10 - 11 T804 20YL/DB PRESSURE SIGNAL 5 12 T802 20DG/PK PRESSURE SIGNAL 3 13 - 14 - 15 - 16 T805 20DG/OR PRESSURE SIGNAL 6 17 T801 20DG/RD PRESSURE SIGNAL 2 Component Location - 31 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Component ID 200 > Page 545 Connector: Name : MODULE-TRANSMISSION CONTROL C2 Color : # of pins : 24 Qualifier : (RC) Pin Circuit Description 1 T72 20YL/DB 8 VOLT SUPPLY 2 T14 20DG/BR OUTPUT SPEED SIGNAL 3 F916 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION RELAY OUTPUT 3 T16 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Component ID 200 > Page 546 4 F916 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION RELAY OUTPUT 4 T16 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT 5-6-7 A104 20YL/RD FUSED B(+) 8 Z133 18BK/LG GROUND 9-10 - 11 - 12 - 13 - - 14 T6 20DG TOW/HAUL OVERDRIVE OFF SWITCH SIGNAL 15 T54 20DG/OR TRANSMISSION TEMPERATURE SIGNAL 16 T819 20YL/VT TCC TEMPERATURE SIGNAL 17 Z133 18BK/LG GROUND 18 - 19 T811 20DG/LB SHIFT 4 CONTROL 20 D65 20WT/LG CAN C BUS (+) 21 D64 20WT/LB CAN C BUS (-) 22 - 23 - 24 - Component Location - 31 Connector: Name : MODULE-TRANSMISSION CONTROL C3 Color : # of pins : 31 Qualifier : (RC) Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Component ID 200 > Page 547 Pin Circuit Description 1 T808 20DG/GY SHIFT 1 CONTROL 2-3 T810 20DG/DB SHIFT 3 CONTROL 4-5 T817 20YL/BR LINEAR 3 CONTROL 6 T812 20DG/TN LINEAR 1 GROUND 7 T813 20DG/LG LINEAR 1 CONTROL 8 T815 20YL/RD LINEAR 2 CONTROL 9 T814 20YL/BR LINEAR 2 GROUND 10 T806 20DG/VT PRESSURE SIGNAL 7 11 - 12 - 13 - 14 - - 15 T816 20YL/PK LINEAR 3 GROUND 16 T828 20DG/DB TRS 1 SIGNAL 17 T42 20DG/YL TRS T42 SIGNAL 18 T3 20DG/DB TRS T3 SIGNAL 19 T827 20DG/LB TRS DRIVE SIGNAL 20 T824 20YL/DB TRS PARK SIGNAL 21 T826 20DG/DB TRS REVERSE SIGNAL 22 T809 20DG/YL SHIFT 2 CONTROL 23 - 24 - 25 - 26 T807 20DG/WT PRESSURE SIGNAL 8 27 - 28 T820 20YL/WT TEMPERATURE SENSOR GROUND 29 T825 20DG/YL TRS NEUTRAL SIGNAL 30 T821 20YL/GY LINEAR 4 CONTROL 31 T818 20YL/OR LINEAR 4 GROUND Component Location - 31 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Component ID 200 > Page 548 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > Transmission Control Module - Description Control Module: Description and Operation Transmission Control Module - Description DESCRIPTION On gasoline vehicles the Transmission Control Module (TCM) (2) may be sub-module within the Powertrain Control Module (PCM) (3). Vehicles equipped 68RFE transmission and a 6.7L Diesel engine, the TCM is housed in the NGC4 controller utilizing only the C1 and C4 connectors (TCM only). The controller is located at the rear of the engine compartment, near the right inner fender. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > Transmission Control Module - Description > Page 551 On Cab Chassis models equipped with the AS68RC transmission the Transmission Control Module (TCM) has three electrical connectors and is located in the passenger compartment underneath of the left side of the dash panel. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > Transmission Control Module - Description > Page 552 Control Module: Description and Operation Transmission Control Module - Operation OPERATION RLE and RFE TRANSMISSIONS The Transmission Control Module (TCM) controls all electronic operations of the transmission. The TCM receives information regarding vehicle operation from both direct and indirect inputs, and selects the operational mode of the transmission. Direct inputs are hard wired to, and used specifically by the TCM. Indirect inputs are shared with the TCM via the vehicle communication bus. Some examples of direct inputs to the TCM are: - Battery (B+) voltage - Ignition "ON" voltage - Transmission Control Relay (Switched B+) (if equipped) - Throttle Position Sensor - Crankshaft Position Sensor - Transmission Range Sensor - Pressure Switches - Transmission Temperature Sensor - Input Shaft Speed Sensor - Output Shaft Speed Sensor - Line Pressure Sensor Some examples of indirect inputs to the TCM are: - Target Idle - Torque Reduction Confirmation - Engine Coolant Temperature - Ambient/Battery Temperature - Scan Tool Communication Based on the information received from these various inputs, the TCM determines the appropriate shift schedule and shift points, depending on the present operating conditions and driver demand. This is possible through the control of various direct and indirect outputs. Some examples of TCM direct outputs are: - Transmission Control Relay - Solenoids - Torque Reduction Request Some examples of TCM indirect outputs are: - Transmission Temperature (to PCM) - PRNDL Position (to cluster/CCN) In addition to monitoring inputs and controlling outputs, the TCM has other important responsibilities and functions: - Storing and maintaining Clutch Volume Indexes (CVI) - Storing and selecting appropriate Shift Schedules - System self-diagnostics - Diagnostic capabilities (with scan tool) NOTE: If the TCM has been replaced, the "Quick Learn Procedure" must be performed. See: Powertrain Management/Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Transmission Control Module/TCM Quick Learn BATTERY FEED A fused, direct battery feed to the TCM is used for continuous power. This battery voltage is necessary to retain memory in the TCM. When the battery (B+) is disconnected, this memory is lost. When the battery (B+) is restored, this memory loss is detected by the TCM and a Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) is set. CLUTCH VOLUME INDEXES (CVI) Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > Transmission Control Module - Description > Page 553 An important function of the TCM is to monitor Clutch Volume Indexes (CVI). CVIs represent the volume of fluid needed to compress a clutch pack. The TCM monitors gear ratio changes by monitoring the Input and Output Speed Sensors. The Input, or Turbine Speed Sensor sends an electrical signal to the TCM that represents input shaft rpm. The Output Speed Sensor provides the TCM with output shaft speed information. By comparing the two inputs, the TCM can determine transmission gear position. This is important to the CVI calculation because the TCM determines CVIs by monitoring how long it takes for a gear change to occur. Gear ratios can be determined by using the Scan Tool and reading the Input/Output Speed Sensor values in the "Monitors" display. Gear ratio can be obtained by dividing the Input Speed Sensor value by the Output Speed Sensor value. For example, if the input shaft is rotating at 1000 rpm and the output shaft is rotating at 500 rpm, then the TCM can determine that the gear ratio is 2:1. In direct drive (3rd gear), the gear ratio changes to 1:1. The gear ratio changes as clutches are applied and released. By monitoring the length of time it takes for the gear ratio to change following a shift request, the TCM can determine the volume of fluid used to apply or release a friction element. The volume of transmission fluid needed to apply the friction elements are continuously updated for adaptive controls. As friction material wears, the volume of fluid need to apply the element increases. Certain mechanical problems within the input clutch assembly can cause inadequate or out-of-range element volumes. Also, defective Input/Output Speed Sensors and wiring can cause these conditions. The following charts identifies the appropriate clutch volumes and when they are monitored/updated: Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > Transmission Control Module - Description > Page 554 SHIFT SCHEDULES As mentioned earlier, the TCM has programming that allows it to select a variety of shift schedules. Shift schedule selection is dependent on the following: - Shift lever position - Throttle position - Engine load - Fluid temperature - Software level As driving conditions change, the TCM appropriately adjusts the shift schedule. Refer to the following chart to determine the appropriate operation expected, depending on driving conditions. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > Transmission Control Module - Description > Page 555 AISIN AS68RC TRANSMISSION The Transmission Control Module (TCM) controls all electronic operations of the transmission. The TCM receives information regarding vehicle operation from both direct and indirect inputs, and selects the operational mode of the transmission. Direct inputs are hard wired to, and used specifically by the TCM. Indirect inputs are shared with the TCM via the vehicle communication bus. Some examples of direct inputs to the TCM are: - Battery (B+) voltage - Ignition "ON" voltage - Transmission Range Sensor - Pressure Switches - Transmission Temperature Sensor - Input Speed Sensor - Output Speed Sensor Some examples of indirect inputs to the TCM are: - Engine/Body Identification - Manifold Pressure - Throttle position - Torque Reduction Confirmation - Engine Coolant Temperature - Exhaust Brake Status (if equipped) - PTO Request (if equipped) - Scan Tool Communication Based on the information received from these various inputs, the TCM determines the appropriate shift schedule and shift points, depending on the present operating conditions and driver demand. This is possible through the control of various direct and indirect outputs. Some examples of TCM direct outputs are: - Exhaust Brake Cut Request (if equipped). - Solenoids. - Torque Reduction Request. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > Transmission Control Module - Description > Page 556 Some examples of TCM.indirect outputs are: - Transmission Temperature (to PCM). - PRNDL Position (to cluster/CCN). - PTO Status. In addition to monitoring inputs and controlling outputs, the TCM has other important responsibilities and functions: - Storing and maintaining Clutch Volume Indexes (CVI). - Storing and selecting appropriate Shift Schedules. - System self-diagnostics. - Diagnostic capabilities (with scan tool). Clutch filling time is continuously maintained when the vehicle is running. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Transmission Control System Relay, A/T > Component Information > Locations Transmission Control System Relay: Locations Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Transmission Control System Relay, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Transmission Control System Relay: Diagram Information and Instructions Warnings WARNINGS - GENERAL WARNINGS provide information to prevent personal injury and vehicle damage. Below is a list of general warnings that should be followed any time a vehicle is being serviced. WARNING: Always wear safety glasses for eye protection. WARNING: Use safety stands anytime a procedure requires being under a vehicle. WARNING: Be sure that the ignition switch always is in the off position, unless the procedure requires it to be on. WARNING: Set the parking brake when working on any vehicle. An automatic transmission should be in park. A manual transmission should be in neutral. WARNING: Operate the engine only in a well-ventilated area. WARNING: Keep away from moving parts when the engine is running, especially the fan and belts. WARNING: To prevent serious burns, avoid contact with hot parts such as the radiator, exhaust manifold(s), tail pipe, catalytic converter and muffler. WARNING: Do not allow flame or sparks near the battery. Gases are always present in and around the battery. WARNING: Always remove rings, watches, loose hanging jewelry and avoid loose clothing. How to Use Wiring Diagrams DESCRIPTION - HOW TO USE WIRING DIAGRAMS DaimlerChrysler Corporation wiring diagrams are designed to provide information regarding the vehicles wiring content. In order to effectively use the wiring diagrams to diagnose and repair DaimlerChrysler Corporation vehicles, it is important to understand all of their features and characteristics. Diagrams are arranged such that the power (B+) side of the circuit is placed near the top of the page, and the ground (B-) side of the circuit is placed near the bottom of the page. All switches, components, and modules are shown in the at rest position with the doors closed and the key removed from the ignition. Components are shown two ways. A solid line around a component indicates that the component is complete. A dashed line around the component indicates that the component is being shown is not complete. Incomplete components have a reference number to indicate the page where the component is shown complete. It is important to realize that no attempt is made on the diagrams to represent components and wiring as they appear on the vehicle. For example, a short piece of wire is treated the same as a long one. In addition, switches and other components are shown as simply as possible, with regard to function only. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Transmission Control System Relay, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 562 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Transmission Control System Relay, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 563 SYMBOLS International symbols are used throughout the wiring diagrams. These symbols are consistent with those being used around the world. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Transmission Control System Relay, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 564 TERMINOLOGY This is a list of terms and definitions used in the wiring diagrams. LHD - Left Hand Drive Vehicles RHD - Right Hand Drive Vehicles ATX - Automatic Transmissions-Front Wheel Drive MTX Manual Transmissions-Front Wheel Drive Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Transmission Control System Relay, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 565 AT - Automatic Transmissions-Rear Wheel Drive MT - Manual Transmissions-Rear Wheel Drive SOHC - Single Over Head Cam Engine DOHC - Double Over Head Cam Engine Export - Vehicles Built For Sale In Markets Other Than North America Except Export - Vehicles Built For Sale In North America Circuit Functions DESCRIPTION - CIRCUIT FUNCTIONS All circuits in the diagrams use an alpha/numeric code to identify the wire and it's function. To identify which circuit code applies to a system, refer to the Circuit Identification Code Chart. This chart shows the main circuits only and does not show the secondary codes that may apply to some models. Circuit Information DESCRIPTION - CIRCUIT INFORMATION Each wire shown in the diagrams contains a code which identifies the main circuit, a specific part of the main circuit, gage of wire, and color. An example would be A 2 18 LB/YL. This is a Battery Feed circuit, level two, eighteen gauge, light blue with a yellow tracer. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Transmission Control System Relay, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 566 Connector, Ground and Splice Information DESCRIPTION - CONNECTOR, GROUND AND SPLICE INFORMATION CAUTION: Not all connectors are serviced. Some connectors are serviced only with a harness. A typical example might be the Supplemental Restraint System connectors. Always check parts availability before attempting a repair. IDENTIFICATION In-line connectors are identified by a number, as follows: - In-line connectors located in the engine compartment are C100 series numbers. - In-line connectors located in the instrument panel area are C200 series numbers. - In-line connectors located in the body are C300 series numbers. - Jumper harness connectors are C400 series numbers. - Grounds and ground connectors are identified with a "G" and follow the same series numbering as the in-line connectors. - Splices are identified with an "S" and follow the same series numbering as the in-line connectors. In addition, S001-S099 numbers are located in the engine compartment. - Component connectors are identified by the component name instead of a number. Multiple connectors on a component use a C1, C2, etc. identifier. LOCATIONS Vehicle/Locations contains the master connector/ground/splice location index charts with hyperlinks to the applicable location illustrations. The illustrations contain the connector name (or number)/ground number/splice number and component identification. The abbreviation T/O is used in the component location section to indicate a point in which the wiring harness branches out to a component. The abbreviation N/S means Not Shown in the illustrations Section Identification and Information DESCRIPTION - SECTION IDENTIFICATION AND INFORMATION The wiring diagrams are grouped into individual sections. If a component is most likely found in a particular group, it will be shown complete (all wires, Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Transmission Control System Relay, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 567 connectors, and pins) within that group. For example, the Auto Shutdown Relay is most likely to be found in Powertrain Management, so it is shown there complete. It can, however, be shown partially in another group if it contains some associated wiring. Splice diagrams show the entire splice and provide references to other sections the splices serves. Splice Information only contains splice diagrams that are not shown in their entirety somewhere else in the wiring diagrams. Connector Pin-Outs shows each connector and the circuits involved with that connector. The connectors are identified using the name/number on the diagram pages. Removal REMOVAL 1. Disconnect battery. 2. Release Connector Lock (2). 3. Disconnect the connector (3) being repaired from its mating half/component. 4. Remove the dress cover (if applicable) (1). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Transmission Control System Relay, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 568 5. Release the Secondary Terminal Lock, if required (1). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Transmission Control System Relay, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 569 6. Position the connector locking finger away from the terminal using the proper special tool. Pull on the wire to remove the terminal from the connector. Installation Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Transmission Control System Relay, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 570 INSTALLATION 1. Insert the removed terminal in the same cavity on the repair connector. 2. Repeat steps for each terminal in the connector, being sure that all wires are inserted into the proper cavities. For additional connector pin-out identification, refer to the wiring diagrams. 3. When the connector is re-assembled, the secondary terminal lock must be placed in the locked position to prevent terminal push out. 4. Replace dress cover (if applicable). 5. Connect connector to its mating half/component. 6. Connect battery and test all affected systems. Removal REMOVAL 1. Disconnect the battery. 2. Locate the diode in the harness, and remove the protective covering. 3. Remove the diode from the harness, pay attention to the current flow direction (1) (2) (3). Installation INSTALLATION 1. Remove the insulation from the wires in the harness. Only remove enough insulation to solder in the new diode. 2. Install the new diode in the harness, making sure current flow is correct. If necessary, refer to the appropriate wiring diagram for current flow. 3. Solder the connection together using rosin core type solder only. Do not use acid core solder. 4. Tape the diode to the harness using electrical tape. Make sure the diode is completely sealed from the elements. 5. Re-connect the battery and test affected systems. Removal REMOVAL 1. Follow steps for removing terminals described in the connector removal section. 2. Cut the wire 6 inches from the back of the connector. Installation INSTALLATION 1. Select a wire from the terminal repair kit that best matches the color and gage of the wire being repaired. 2. Cut the repair wire to the proper length and remove one-half (1/2) inch of insulation. 3. Splice the repair wire to the wire harness (see wire splicing procedure). See: Service Procedures/Wire Splicing 4. Insert the repaired wire into the connector. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Transmission Control System Relay, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 571 5. Install the connector locking wedge, if required, and reconnect the connector to its mating half/component. 6. Re-tape the wire harness starting at 1-1/2 inches behind the connector and 2 inches past the repair. 7. Connect battery and test all affected systems. Wire Splicing STANDARD PROCEDURE - WIRE SPLICING When splicing a wire, it is important that the correct gage be used as shown in the wiring diagrams. 1. Remove one-half (1/2) inch of insulation from each wire that needs to be spliced. 2. Place a piece of adhesive lined heat shrink tubing on one side of the wire. Make sure the tubing will be long enough to cover and seal the entire repair area. 3. Place the strands of wire overlapping each other inside of the splice clip (1). 4. Using crimping tool (1), Mopar p/n 05019912AA, crimp the splice clip and wires together. 5. Solder (3) the connection (2) together using rosin core type solder (1) only. CAUTION: DO NOT USE ACID CORE SOLDER. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Transmission Control System Relay, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 572 6. Center the heat shrink tubing (2) over the joint and heat using a heat gun. Heat the joint until the tubing is tightly sealed and sealant (1) comes out of both ends of the tubing. Special Tools WIRING/TERMINAL PROBING TOOL PACKAGE 6807 TERMINAL PICK TOOL SET 6680 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Transmission Control System Relay, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 573 TERMINAL REMOVING TOOLS 6932 AND 8638 TERMINAL REMOVING TOOL 6934 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Transmission Control System Relay, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 574 Transmission Control System Relay: Diagnostic Aids Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) Sensitive Devices STANDARD PROCEDURE - ELECTROSTATIC DISCHARGE (ESD) SENSITIVE DEVICES All ESD sensitive components are solid state and a symbol is used to indicate this. When handling any component with this symbol, comply with the following procedures to reduce the possibility of electrostatic charge build up on the body and inadvertent discharge into the component. If it is not known whether the part is ESD sensitive, assume that it is. 1. Always touch a known good ground before handling the part. This should be repeated while handling the part and more frequently after sliding across a seat, sitting down from a standing position, or walking a distance. 2. Avoid touching electrical terminals of the part, unless instructed to do so by a written procedure. 3. When using a voltmeter, be sure to connect the ground lead first. 4. Do not remove the part from it's protective packing until it is time to install the part. 5. Before removing the part from it's package, ground the package to a known good ground on the vehicle. Testing Of Voltage Potential STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING OF VOLTAGE POTENTIAL 1. Connect the ground lead of a voltmeter to a known good ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the voltmeter to the selected test point. The vehicle ignition may need to be turned ON to check voltage. Refer to the appropriate test procedure. Testing For Continuity Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Transmission Control System Relay, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 575 STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING FOR CONTINUITY 1. Remove the fuse (1) for the circuit being checked or, disconnect the battery. 2. Connect one lead of the ohmmeter to one side of the circuit being tested 3. Connect the other lead to the other end of the circuit being tested. Low or no resistance means good continuity. Testing For A Short To Ground STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING FOR A SHORT TO GROUND 1. Remove the fuse and disconnect all items involved with the fuse. 2. Connect a test light or a voltmeter across the terminals of the fuse. 3. Starting at the fuse block, wiggle the wiring harness about six to eight inches apart and watch the voltmeter/test lamp. 4. If the voltmeter registers voltage or the test lamp glows, there is a short to ground in that general area of the wiring harness. Testing For A Short To Ground On Fuses Powering Several Loads STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING FOR A SHORT TO GROUND ON FUSES POWERING SEVERAL LOADS 1. Refer to the wiring diagrams and disconnect or isolate all items on the suspected fused circuits. 2. Replace the blown fuse. 3. Supply power to the fuse by turning ON the ignition switch or re-connecting the battery. 4. Start connecting or energizing the items in the fuse circuit one at a time. When the fuse blows the circuit with the short to ground has been isolated. Testing For A Voltage Drop STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING FOR A VOLTAGE DROP Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Transmission Control System Relay, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 576 1. Connect the positive lead of the voltmeter to the side of the circuit closest to the battery. 2. Connect the other lead of the voltmeter to the other side of the switch, component or circuit. 3. Operate the item. 4. The voltmeter will show the difference in voltage between the two points. Troubleshooting Wiring Problems DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING - WIRING HARNESS TROUBLESHOOTING TOOLS When diagnosing a problem in an electrical circuit there are several common tools necessary. These tools are listed and explained below. - Jumper Wire - This is a test wire used to connect two points of a circuit. It can be used to bypass an open in a circuit. WARNING: Never use a jumper wire across a load, such as a motor, connected between a battery feed and ground. - Voltmeter - Used to check for voltage on a circuit. Always connect the black lead to a known good ground and the red lead to the positive side of the circuit. CAUTION: Most of the electrical components used in today's vehicles are Solid State. When checking voltages in these circuits, use a meter with a 10 - megohm or greater impedance rating. - Ohmmeter - Used to check the resistance between two points of a circuit. Low or no resistance in a circuit means good continuity. CAUTION: Most of the electrical components used in today's vehicles are Solid State. When checking resistance in these circuits use a meter with a 10 - megohm or greater impedance rating. In addition, make sure the power is disconnected from the circuit. Circuits that are powered up by the vehicle's electrical system can cause damage to the equipment and provide false readings. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Transmission Control System Relay, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 577 - Probing Tools - These tools are used for probing terminals in connectors. Select the proper size tool from Special Tool Package 6807, and insert the probing end (2) into the terminal being tested. Use the other end of the tool (1) to insert the meter probe. INTERMITTENT AND POOR CONNECTIONS Most intermittent electrical problems are caused by faulty electrical connections or wiring. It is also possible for a sticking component or relay to cause a problem. Before condemning a component or wiring assembly, check the following items. - Connectors are fully seated - Spread terminals, or terminal push out - Terminals in the wiring assembly are fully seated into the connector/component and locked into position - Dirt or corrosion on the terminals. Any amount of corrosion or dirt could cause an intermittent problem - Damaged connector/component casing exposing the item to dirt or moisture - Wire insulation that has rubbed through causing a short to ground - Some or all of the wiring strands broken inside of the insulation - Wiring broken inside of the insulation TROUBLESHOOTING WIRING PROBLEMS When troubleshooting wiring problems there are six steps which can aid in the procedure. The steps are listed and explained below. Always check for non-factory items added to the vehicle before doing any diagnosis. If the vehicle is equipped with these items, disconnect them to verify these add-on items are not the cause of the problem. 1. Verify the problem. 2. Verify any related symptoms. Do this by performing operational checks on components that are in the same circuit. Refer to the wiring diagrams. 3. Analyze the symptoms. Use the wiring diagrams to determine what the circuit is doing, where the problem most likely is occurring and where the diagnosis will continue. 4. Isolate the problem area. 5. Repair the problem area. 6. Verify the proper operation. For this step, check for proper operation of all items on the repaired circuit. Refer to the wiring diagrams. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Transmission Control System Relay, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 578 Transmission Control System Relay: Connector Views Component ID: 246 Component : RELAY-TRANSMISSION Connector: Name : RELAY-TRANSMISSION Color : # of pins : 4 Pin Circuit Description 1 A916 16RD FUSED B(+) 2 T16 16YL TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT 3 F916 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION RELAY OUTPUT 4 Z420 18BK GROUND Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Transmission Control System Relay, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Transmission Control System Relay: Description and Operation Description The Chrysler Corporation does not provide a description of the 545RFE Transmission control Relay for the 4.7/5.7L engine. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Transmission Control System Relay, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 581 Transmission Control System Relay: Description and Operation Operation The Chrysler Corporation does not provide operation information for the 545RFE Transmission control Relay for the 4.7/5.7L engine platform. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - Transfer Case > Control Module, Transfer Case > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 197 Control Module: Locations Component ID 197 Component ID: 197 Component : MODULE-FINAL DRIVE CONTROL Connector: Name : MODULE-FINAL DRIVE CONTROL Color : # of pins : 50 Qualifier : (POWER WAGON) A-A1 A121 14RD/YL FUSED B(+) A2 T520 16YL/OR FRONT LOCKER SOURCE A3 T526 16YL/WT REAR LOCKER SOURCE A4 Z935 16BK GROUND A5 Z935 16BK GROUND A6 T524 16YL/LG FRONT LOCKER RETURN A7 T528 16YL/GY REAR LOCKER RETURN A8 T521 20YL/BK LOCKER SENSOR SUPPLY A9 T537 20YL/LG LOCKER SWITCH SUPPLY A10 T523 20YL/BK LOCKER SENSOR SUPPLY A11 - A12 - A13 D65 20WT/LG CAN C BUS (+) A14 D64 20WT/LB CAN C BUS (-) B T527 20YL/TN REAR LOCKER SENSOR SENSE B1 T522 20YL/LB FRONT LOCKER SENSOR SENSE B2 T535 20YL/BR LOCKER SWITCH SENSE B3 - B4 - B5 - B6 - B7 F960 20PK/LG FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) B8 T536 20YL/WT SWITCH SUPPLY B9 - B10 - B11 T531 20YL/TN STABILIZER BAR SWITCH SENSE B12 T532 20YL/GY LOCKER OPEN ILLUMINATION SENSE B13 T533 20YL/LB LOCKER REAR ILLUMINATION SENSE B14 T534 20YL LOCKER FR/RR ILLUMINATION SENSE C T530 20YL/DG STABILIZER BAR DISENGAGE ILLUMINATION SENSE C1 T529 20YL/LG STABILIZER BAR ENGAGE ILLUMINATION SENSE C2 - C3 - - Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - Transfer Case > Control Module, Transfer Case > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 197 > Page 587 C4 - C5 - C6 - C7 - C8 - C9 - C10 - C11 - C12 - C13 - C14 - - D-E-F-G-H-Component Location - 29 Component Location - 28 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - Transfer Case > Control Module, Transfer Case > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 197 > Page 588 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - Transfer Case > Control Module, Transfer Case > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 197 > Page 589 Control Module: Locations Component ID 206 Component ID: 206 Component : MODULE-FINAL DRIVE CONTROL Connector: Name : MODULE-FINAL DRIVE CONTROL Color : # of pins : 50 Qualifier : (POWER WAGON) A-A1 A121 14RD/YL FUSED B(+) A2 T520 16YL/OR FRONT LOCKER SOURCE A3 T526 16YL/WT REAR LOCKER SOURCE A4 Z935 16BK GROUND A5 Z935 16BK GROUND A6 T524 16YL/LG FRONT LOCKER RETURN A7 T528 16YL/GY REAR LOCKER RETURN A8 T521 20YL/BK LOCKER SENSOR SUPPLY A9 T537 20YL/LG LOCKER SWITCH SUPPLY A10 T523 20YL/BK LOCKER SENSOR SUPPLY A11 - A12 - A13 D65 20WT/LG CAN C BUS (+) A14 D64 20WT/LB CAN C BUS (-) B T527 20YL/TN REAR LOCKER SENSOR SENSE B1 T522 20YL/LB FRONT LOCKER SENSOR SENSE B2 T535 20YL/BR LOCKER SWITCH SENSE B3 - B4 - B5 - B6 - B7 F960 20PK/LG FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) B8 T536 20YL/WT SWITCH SUPPLY B9 - B10 - B11 T531 20YL/TN STABILIZER BAR SWITCH SENSE B12 T532 20YL/GY LOCKER OPEN ILLUMINATION SENSE B13 T533 20YL/LB LOCKER REAR ILLUMINATION SENSE B14 T534 20YL LOCKER FR/RR ILLUMINATION SENSE C T530 20YL/DG STABILIZER BAR DISENGAGE ILLUMINATION SENSE C1 T529 20YL/LG STABILIZER BAR ENGAGE ILLUMINATION SENSE C2 - C3 - - Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - Transfer Case > Control Module, Transfer Case > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 197 > Page 590 C4 - C5 - C6 - C7 - C8 - C9 - C10 - C11 - C12 - C13 - C14 - - D-E-F-G-H-Component Location - 29 Component Location - 28 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - Transfer Case > Control Module, Transfer Case > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 197 > Page 591 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - Transfer Case > Control Module, Transfer Case > Component Information > Diagrams > Component ID 197 Control Module: Diagrams Component ID 197 Component ID: 197 Component : MODULE-FINAL DRIVE CONTROL Connector: Name : MODULE-FINAL DRIVE CONTROL Color : # of pins : 50 Qualifier : (POWER WAGON) A-A1 A121 14RD/YL FUSED B(+) A2 T520 16YL/OR FRONT LOCKER SOURCE A3 T526 16YL/WT REAR LOCKER SOURCE A4 Z935 16BK GROUND A5 Z935 16BK GROUND A6 T524 16YL/LG FRONT LOCKER RETURN A7 T528 16YL/GY REAR LOCKER RETURN A8 T521 20YL/BK LOCKER SENSOR SUPPLY A9 T537 20YL/LG LOCKER SWITCH SUPPLY A10 T523 20YL/BK LOCKER SENSOR SUPPLY A11 - A12 - A13 D65 20WT/LG CAN C BUS (+) A14 D64 20WT/LB CAN C BUS (-) B T527 20YL/TN REAR LOCKER SENSOR SENSE B1 T522 20YL/LB FRONT LOCKER SENSOR SENSE B2 T535 20YL/BR LOCKER SWITCH SENSE B3 - B4 - B5 - B6 - B7 F960 20PK/LG FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) B8 T536 20YL/WT SWITCH SUPPLY B9 - B10 - B11 T531 20YL/TN STABILIZER BAR SWITCH SENSE B12 T532 20YL/GY LOCKER OPEN ILLUMINATION SENSE B13 T533 20YL/LB LOCKER REAR ILLUMINATION SENSE B14 T534 20YL LOCKER FR/RR ILLUMINATION SENSE C T530 20YL/DG STABILIZER BAR DISENGAGE ILLUMINATION SENSE C1 T529 20YL/LG STABILIZER BAR ENGAGE ILLUMINATION SENSE C2 - C3 - - Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - Transfer Case > Control Module, Transfer Case > Component Information > Diagrams > Component ID 197 > Page 594 C4 - C5 - C6 - C7 - C8 - C9 - C10 - C11 - C12 - C13 - C14 - - D-E-F-G-H-Component Location - 29 Component Location - 28 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - Transfer Case > Control Module, Transfer Case > Component Information > Diagrams > Component ID 197 > Page 595 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - Transfer Case > Control Module, Transfer Case > Component Information > Diagrams > Component ID 197 > Page 596 Control Module: Diagrams Component ID 206 Component ID: 206 Component : MODULE-FINAL DRIVE CONTROL Connector: Name : MODULE-FINAL DRIVE CONTROL Color : # of pins : 50 Qualifier : (POWER WAGON) A-A1 A121 14RD/YL FUSED B(+) A2 T520 16YL/OR FRONT LOCKER SOURCE A3 T526 16YL/WT REAR LOCKER SOURCE A4 Z935 16BK GROUND A5 Z935 16BK GROUND A6 T524 16YL/LG FRONT LOCKER RETURN A7 T528 16YL/GY REAR LOCKER RETURN A8 T521 20YL/BK LOCKER SENSOR SUPPLY A9 T537 20YL/LG LOCKER SWITCH SUPPLY A10 T523 20YL/BK LOCKER SENSOR SUPPLY A11 - A12 - A13 D65 20WT/LG CAN C BUS (+) A14 D64 20WT/LB CAN C BUS (-) B T527 20YL/TN REAR LOCKER SENSOR SENSE B1 T522 20YL/LB FRONT LOCKER SENSOR SENSE B2 T535 20YL/BR LOCKER SWITCH SENSE B3 - B4 - B5 - B6 - B7 F960 20PK/LG FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) B8 T536 20YL/WT SWITCH SUPPLY B9 - B10 - B11 T531 20YL/TN STABILIZER BAR SWITCH SENSE B12 T532 20YL/GY LOCKER OPEN ILLUMINATION SENSE B13 T533 20YL/LB LOCKER REAR ILLUMINATION SENSE B14 T534 20YL LOCKER FR/RR ILLUMINATION SENSE C T530 20YL/DG STABILIZER BAR DISENGAGE ILLUMINATION SENSE C1 T529 20YL/LG STABILIZER BAR ENGAGE ILLUMINATION SENSE C2 - C3 - - Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - Transfer Case > Control Module, Transfer Case > Component Information > Diagrams > Component ID 197 > Page 597 C4 - C5 - C6 - C7 - C8 - C9 - C10 - C11 - C12 - C13 - C14 - - D-E-F-G-H-Component Location - 29 Component Location - 28 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - Transfer Case > Control Module, Transfer Case > Component Information > Diagrams > Component ID 197 > Page 598 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - Transfer Case > Control Module, Transfer Case > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Control Module: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The Transfer Case Control Module (TCCM) functionality now resides in the Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM), refer to the TIPM information for location and additional information. The TIPM controls the 4X4 transfer case shift functions via the actuation of a shift motor and utilizing the feedback of a mode sensor assembly. Communication is via the CAN bus. Inputs include user selectable 4X4 modes that include 2WD, AWD, 4HI, 4LO, and Neutral (selections vary with the specific transfer case). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - Transfer Case > Control Module, Transfer Case > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 601 Control Module: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The Transfer Case Control Module (TCCM) functionality in the Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) utilizes the input from the transfer case mounted mode sensor, the instrument panel mounted selector switch, and the following information from the vehicle's CAN bus to determine if a shift is allowed. - Engine RPM and Vehicle Speed - Diagnostic Requests - Manual Transmission and Brake Applied - PRNDL - Ignition Status - ABS Messages Once the TIP determines that a requested shift is allowed, it actuates the bi-directional shift motor as necessary to achieve the desired transfer case operating mode. The TIPM also monitors the mode sensor while controlling the shift motor to determine the status of the shift attempt. Several items can cause the requested shift not to be completed. If the TIPM has recognized a fault (DTC) of some variety, it will begin operation in one of four Functionality Levels. These levels are: - Level Zero - Normal Operation. - Level One - Only Mode Shifts Are Allowed. - Level Two - Only Mode Shifts and Shifts Into LOW Are Allowed (No Neutral Shifts Are Allowed). - Level Three - No Shifts Are Allowed The TIPM can also be operating in one of three possible power modes. These power modes are: - Full Power Mode is the normal operational mode of the module. This mode is achieved by normal CAN bus traffic being present and the ignition being in the RUN position. Reduced Power Mode will be entered when the ignition has been powered off. In this state, the module will shut down power supplied to external devices, and to electronic interface inputs and outputs. From this state the module can enter either Sleep Mode or Full Power Mode. To enter this mode, the module must receive an ignition message denoting that the ignition is off, or not receive any messages for 5 ±0.5 seconds. To exit this mode, the module must receive one ignition message that denotes that the ignition is in the RUN position. - Sleep Mode will be entered, from the Reduced Power Mode, when no CAN traffic has been sensed for 20 ±1 seconds. If during Sleep Mode the module detects CAN bus traffic, it will revert to the Reduced Power mode while monitoring for ignition messages. It will remain in this state as long as there is traffic other than run or start messages, and will return to Sleep mode if the bus goes without traffic for 20 ±1 seconds. SHIFT REQUIREMENTS If the TIPM is in full power mode and at functionality level zero, it uses the following criteria to determine if a shift is allowed. If any of the driver controllable conditions are not met once the shift request is recognized, the TIPM will solidly illuminate the source position's LED and flash the desired position's LED for all shifts except NEUTRAL. The NEUTRAL shift LED strategy will be discussed later. Mode shifts will be allowed regardless of transmission gear or vehicle speed, whenever the following conditions are met: - Front and rear wheel speed are within 21 km/h (13 mph). - A change in the Selector switch state indicates that a mode shift has been requested. - A valid mode sensor signal is being sensed by the TIPM. - Proper transmit/receive messages are occurring on the CAN bus. - Ignition key switch is in the RUN position. Range shifts will be allowed only if all of the following conditions are met: - Front and rear wheel speed are within 21 km/h (13 mph). - A change in the Selector Switch state indicating a range shift has been requested. - Transmission in NEUTRAL signal must be recognized for at least 1.5 seconds ±100 msec. (Automatic transmissions only) - Proper transmit/receive messages are occurring on the CAN bus. - Clutch signal is recognized for 500 msec ± 50 msec (Manual transmissions only). - Vehicle speed is less than or equal to 4.8 km/h (3 mph). - Ignition key switch is in the RUN position. - A valid mode sensor signal is being sensed by the TIPM. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - Transfer Case > Control Module, Transfer Case > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 602 A shift into transfer case Neutral will be allowed only if all of the following conditions are met: - Front and rear wheel speed are within 21 km/h (13 mph). - The recessed Neutral Selection switch has been depressed continuously for 4.0 seconds ±100 msec while all shift conditions have been continuously met. - Transmission in NEUTRAL signal recognized from the bus. (Automatic transmissions only) - Clutch signal is recognized from the bus (Manual transmissions only). - Proper message transmissions/receptions are occurring on the CAN bus. - Vehicle speed is less than or equal to 4.8 km/h (3 mph). - Ignition key switch is in the RUN position, engine off. - Foot Brake is applied. - A valid mode sensor signal is being sensed by the TIPM. A shift out of transfer case Neutral will be allowed only if all of the following conditions are met: - Front and rear wheel speed are within 21 km/h (13 mph). - The recessed Neutral Selection switch has been depressed continuously for 1.0 seconds ±100 msec while all shift conditions have been continuously met. - Transmission in NEUTRAL signal recognized from the bus.(Automatic transmissions only) - Clutch signal is recognized from the bus (Manual transmissions only). - Proper message transmissions/receptions are occurring on the CAN bus. - Vehicle speed is less than or equal to 4.8 km/h (3 mph). - Ignition key switch is in the RUN position. - Foot Brake is applied. - A valid mode sensor signal is being sensed by the TIPM. SHIFT SEQUENCES Once all the driver controllable conditions for the requested shift have been met, the TIPM begins a shift timer with a maximum duration of 1 second per 'D' channel transition. If the shift timer expires before the TIPM recognizes to correct mode sensor code, the shift is considered to have been blocked. The blocked shift will increment the blocked shift counter by one. The TIPM strategy for handling blocked shifts will be described later. The process the TIPM performs for the various shifts will be described first. RANGE AND MODE SHIFTS The process for performing all the range and mode shifts are the same. The following steps describe the process. - Allow time for Selector Switch debounce; 250 msec ±50 msec. - Extinguish the source gear's LED while flashing desired transfer case position's LED. - Engage the shift motor for a maximum of 1 second ±100 msec per 'D' channel transition in the destination gear's direction while monitoring the mode sensor channel transitions. - Disengage the shift motor when the correct mode sensor code is recognized. - Solidly illuminate the selected gear's LED. - Transmit a bus message that the transfer case shift is complete. - If the desired mode sensor code is not received after the shift timer expires (ie. a blocked or other condition exists), stop driving the motor and wait for 200 msec ±50 msec. The shift motor is then reversed in the direction back toward the source gear for up to 1.0 seconds ±100 msec. per 'D' channel. The TIPM waits for 2.0 seconds ±50 msec. and repeats the attempt to shift to the desired position. The exception to the preceding sequence is when a shift from 4L to 2WD/AWD is requested. If 2WD/AWD is requested from the 4L position, the transfer case is first driven to the 4H position. If the 4H position is reached, the transfer case is then driven back to the 2WD/AWD position and the shift is considered complete. If the transfer case does not reach any the 4H position, but is in the 2WD/AWD 'D' channel, or the 2WD/AWD between gear position on the 4H side of 2WD/AWD, the shift is also considered complete. SHIFT OUT OF NEUTRAL The following steps describe the process for a shift out of NEUTRAL. - Extinguish the Neutral LED. - Engage the shift motor for a maximum of 1 second ±100 msec toward the transfer case 4H mode position while monitoring the mode sensor channel transitions. - Disengage the shift motor when the correct mode sensor code is recognized. - Extinguish the Neutral LED. - Transmit a bus message that the transfer case shift is complete. - If the desired mode sensor code is not received after the shift timer expires (ie. a blocked or other condition exists), stop driving the motor and wait for 200 msec ±50 msec. The shift motor is then reversed in the direction back toward the source gear for up to 1.0 seconds 100 msec. The Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - Transfer Case > Control Module, Transfer Case > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 603 TIPM waits for 2.0 seconds ±50 msec. and repeats the attempt to shift to the desired position. - When the Neutral button is released, if the 4H position is the desired position, the shift is complete. Illuminate the 4H LED. - Otherwise when the Neutral button is released, if all of the shift requirements are being met then engage the shift motor towards the desired position for 1 second ±100 msec per 'D' channel. (if requirements for shifting are not met, illuminate the 4H LED and flash the destination LED as an indication to the driver that all of the driver controllable shift conditions are not being met). If this requires another range or mode shift, begin the range/mode shift process. - If the desired mode sensor code is not received after the shift timer expires (i.e. a blocked or other condition exists), refer to the Blocked Shift Strategy. BLOCKED SHIFT STRATEGY When a shift is commanded, the shift motor will be driven towards its destination position, except in the case of shifting out of Neutral if 4L was selected (the transfer case will shift to the 4H position first, before proceeding to 4L). If the shift is blocked on the way to the destination, the TIPM may attempt to drive the motor back to the original position. This process will be allowed to occur 5 times. If the transfer case has reached a non-NEUTRAL 'D' channel during the shift re-attempts, the LED for the achieved gear position is illuminated and the shift attempts are stopped. To re-attempt the desired shift, the selector switch will need to be rotated to the current position until the switch debounce timer expires then a shift will need to be requested again. At the end of the 5th blocked attempt, the shift motor is driven towards the last known 'D' channel position. If this motor drive allows the transfer case to reach the 2WD/AWD 'D' channel, or the 2WD/AWD between gear position on the 4H side of 2WD/AWD, the shift is considered complete and the shift attempts are ended. If the mode sensor is in the NEUTRAL region at the expiration of the shift timer, the TIPM will continue to make the shift attempts according to the blocked shift strategy independent of whether or not the driver controlled conditions are met. For shifts from NEUTRAL, if all 5 attempts fail to reach the desired position (which by default is 4H), the motor will be driven to stall in the direction of 4H or 4L, depending on the achieved position. If the transfer case has reached the 2WD/AWD or 4L between gear position nearest the NEUTRAL positions and the shift conditions are no longer being met, the transfer case will be driven toward the corresponding 'D' channel. Otherwise, the transfer case will be driven in the direction opposite the last attempt with the desired target being 4H or 4L. If the transfer case reaches the 2WD/AWD 'D' channel when being driven in the 4H direction, then one final 1.0 second drive toward 4H is attempted. If the transfer case then reaches any of the 4H positions, the shift is considered complete and the 4H LED is illuminated. If the transfer case is still the 2WD/AWD position, the shift is considered complete and the 2WD/AWD LED is illuminated. NOTE: If after the 5th blocked shift and reversal attempt, if the transfer case position is in the NEUTRAL region, shift attempts will continue until a non-NEUTRAL 'D' channel is reached. SHIFT REVERSAL TARGETS If the shift timer expires (1 second per 'D' channel) and the transfer case has not reached the desired position, all shifts will attempt to return to their original position with the exceptions of: - If the intended shift is going to the High rail from Low and can't make it, but it can make the 2WD/AWD position, the motor stops at that position. The TIPM will not attempt to cross back over NEUTRAL if it does not have to. This means that there was a block on the first attempt to go to 4H and the transfer case has made it through NEUTRAL to a known good position, then the motor will go back only to the 2WD/4WD position and execute the remainder of the attempts from there. - For shifts out of NEUTRAL, any time a shift is commanded out of NEUTRAL, the system needs to get out. The TIPM should never go to NEUTRAL unless the driver is commanding it and all required conditions are being met ENCODER DRIFT CORRECTION Whenever a shift is completed, the TIPM stores the position in memory as the transfer case's intended position. The TIPM continuously monitors the mode sensor and if the mode sensor drifts toward into a NEUTRAL region sensor position for 2.0 seconds, the TIPM will perform a motor drive to correct the drift. The transfer case will be driven toward the intended position for 1.0 seconds 100 msec. The TIPM will wait for 2.0 seconds ±50 msec. and repeat the attempt to shift to the desired position. This will continue until the intended position is reached. SHIFT MOTOR BRAKING Two modes of shift motor braking are employed to improve shift performance, static and dynamic. Static shift motor braking is utilized under the following conditions: - Whenever the transfer case is in the 2WD/AWD or 4L 'D' channel position. - Whenever an invalid mode sensor code is present. Static motor braking is achieved by applying +12V on both shift motor wires. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - Transfer Case > Control Module, Transfer Case > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 604 NOTE: Static Shift Motor Braking is independent of ignition key position. SHIFT ATTEMPT LIMIT To protect the transfer case system, the TIPM will impose a limit on the number of shifts that can occur over a calibrated time period. The system will monitor the number of 'D' channel segment transitions that occur in any 30 second time period. If the number of segment transitions is 30 or greater, the system will go into a default mode. The default mode of operation for shifting is that the number of allowed 'D' channel transitions permitted to occur will be 3 over each 15 second ±100 msec calibrated window of time. After 5 minutes ±100 msec, the motor can be assumed to have cooled down and the system will revert to normal operation. The following rules also apply to the shift limit: - The attempt limit will not prevent shifts coming out of NEUTRAL, they will be allowed regardless of the counter/timer. - Any shift that is in progress when the counter reaches a maximum count in time will be allowed to complete before the default mode is entered. D-channel transitions during this period will not be counted towards the default mode limit. - A block, regardless of the direction, whether towards destination or back towards reversal target (shift timer expiring), will count as a value of 2 transitions towards the 30 segment transitions to go into default mode as defined above. Current attempt limit values are 30 transitions in 30 seconds and default mode values are 3 transitions every 15 seconds for 5 minutes. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Windows and Glass > Heated Glass Element Relay > Component Information > Locations Heated Glass Element Relay: Locations Dodge Ram Trucks 2006-2009, do not use a heated window relay. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Windows and Glass > Heated Glass Element Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 609 Heated Glass Element Relay: Description and Operation Dodge Ram Trucks 2006-2009, do not use a heated window relay. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Windows and Glass > Rear Defogger Relay > Component Information > Locations Rear Defogger Relay: Locations Dodge Ram Trucks 2006-2009, do not use a heated window relay. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Windows and Glass > Rear Defogger Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 613 Rear Defogger Relay: Description and Operation Dodge Ram Trucks 2006-2009, do not use a heated window relay. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Relay > Component Information > Locations Wiper Relay: Locations Dodge Ram 2006-2008, 1500-5500 all, do not use a wiper relay. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 618 Wiper Relay: Description and Operation Dodge Ram 2006-2009, does not use a wiper relay. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm) > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 475 Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm): Locations Component ID 475 Component ID: 475 Component : SWITCH-HOOD AJAR Connector: Name : SWITCH-HOOD AJAR Color : # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (GAS) Pin Circuit Description 1 G70 20VT/LB HOOD AJAR SWITCH SENSE 2 G930 20VT/TN AAT RETURN Component Location - 29 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm) > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 475 > Page 625 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm) > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 475 > Page 626 Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm): Locations Component ID 492 Component ID: 492 Component : SWITCH-HOOD AJAR Connector: Name : SWITCH-HOOD AJAR Color : # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (GAS) Pin Circuit Description 1 G70 20VT/LB HOOD AJAR SWITCH SENSE 2 G930 20VT/TN AAT RETURN Component Location - 29 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm) > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 475 > Page 627 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm) > Component Information > Diagrams > Component ID 475 Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm): Diagrams Component ID 475 Component ID: 475 Component : SWITCH-HOOD AJAR Connector: Name : SWITCH-HOOD AJAR Color : # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (GAS) Pin Circuit Description 1 G70 20VT/LB HOOD AJAR SWITCH SENSE 2 G930 20VT/TN AAT RETURN Component Location - 29 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm) > Component Information > Diagrams > Component ID 475 > Page 630 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm) > Component Information > Diagrams > Component ID 475 > Page 631 Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm): Diagrams Component ID 492 Component ID: 492 Component : SWITCH-HOOD AJAR Connector: Name : SWITCH-HOOD AJAR Color : # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (GAS) Pin Circuit Description 1 G70 20VT/LB HOOD AJAR SWITCH SENSE 2 G930 20VT/TN AAT RETURN Component Location - 29 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm) > Component Information > Diagrams > Component ID 475 > Page 632 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm) > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm): Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The hood ajar switch is a normally closed, single pole, spring-loaded plunger actuated switch. This switch has two unique versions that are used in two different applications. One switch is used only on vehicles equipped with the Vehicle Theft Alarm (VTA) system for sale in certain export markets where protection of the underhood area is required equipment. The second switch is used only on domestic vehicles equipped with an optional remote starter system. The molded plastic switch body (5) has an integral molded connector receptacle (1) on the lower end containing two terminal pins. The switch is connected to the vehicle electrical system through a dedicated take out of the headlamp and dash wire harness. Two integral latches (2) lock the switch into a keyed mounting hole in the stamped steel switch mounting bracket. The mounting bracket is secured with screws to the inboard side of the right front fender load beam within the engine compartment. A molded plastic striker secured to the underside of the hood panel inner reinforcement actuates the switch plunger as the hood panel is closed. The switch plunger (3) extends through a mounting collar (4) and a sleeve-like retainer ring on the upper end of the switch body. The retainer ring has a one time, self-adjustment feature that is activated after the switch is installed by closing the hood. The retainer ring is also color-coded to aid in identifying the switch application. A dark brown retainer ring identifies the underhood security switch application, while a white retainer ring identifies the remote starter system application. An installed hood ajar switch cannot be readjusted or repaired. If the switch is damaged, ineffective, or requires readjustment, it must be replaced with a new unit. The hood ajar switch striker is not intended for reuse. If the striker is removed from the hood inner reinforcement for any reason, it must be replaced with a new unit. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm) > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 635 Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm): Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The hood ajar switches are interchangeable physically, but not functionally. In each case, the hood ajar switch is a normally closed switch that is held open as the spring-loaded switch plunger is depressed by the striker on the inner hood panel reinforcement when the hood panel is closed and latched. When the hood is opened, the spring-loaded switch plunger extends from the switch body and the switch contacts are closed. In the underhood security application (export vehicles only - dark brown retainer ring), the switch is connected in series between ground and the hood ajar switch sense input of the Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM). The TIPM uses an internal resistor pull up to monitor the state of the hood ajar switch contacts. In the remote starter system application (domestic vehicles only - white retainer ring) the switch has a 1 kilohm diagnostic resistor connected in parallel to the switch contacts between the two switch terminals. The switch is connected in series between an output of the TIPM and the hood ajar switch sense input of the TIPM. The TIPM continually monitors this circuit and will store a Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) for any fault that it detects. The components of the switch self-adjustment feature include an integral stop on the shaft of the plunger and a ribbed, ratcheting sleeve-like retainer ring at the top of the switch body from which the plunger extends. With the switch mounting collar secured in its mounting bracket, the plunger is depressed by the striker on the hood inner reinforcement as the hood is closed. As the plunger is depressed, the plunger stop contacts the top of the retainer ring and it is driven downward, ratcheting through the switch mounting collar until the hood is fully closed and latched. The ribs on the retainer ring are engaged within the mounting collar to maintain this adjusted position. The hood ajar switch as well as the hard wired circuits between the switch and the TIPM may be diagnosed using conventional diagnostic tools and procedures. Refer to the appropriate wiring information. However, conventional diagnostic methods will not prove conclusive in the diagnosis of the electronic controls or communication between modules and other devices related to hood ajar switch operation that provide some features of the export vehicle theft or domestic remote starter systems. The most reliable, efficient, and accurate means to diagnose the electronic controls and communication related to hood ajar switch operation requires the use of a diagnostic scan tool. Refer to the appropriate diagnostic information. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm) > Component Information > Service and Repair > Hood Ajar Switch Bracket Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm): Service and Repair Hood Ajar Switch Bracket Removal BRACKET 1. Remove the hood ajar switch (2) from the mounting bracket (3). See: Hood Ajar Switch Removal . 2. Remove the two screws (4) that secure the hood ajar switch bracket to the two rivet nuts (1) in the right front load beam (6). 3. Remove the hood ajar switch mounting bracket from the inboard side of the right front load beam. Installation BRACKET 1. Check to be certain that the two rivet nuts (1) on the inboard side of the right front load beam (6) are in good condition and properly secured. 2. Position the hood ajar switch mounting bracket (3) onto the right front load beam. 3. Install and tighten the two screws (4) that secure the mounting bracket to the load beam. Beginning with the rearward screw, tighten both screws to 8 Nm (71 in. lbs.). 4. Reinstall the hood ajar switch (2) into the mounting bracket. See: Hood Ajar Switch - Installation . Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm) > Component Information > Service and Repair > Hood Ajar Switch Bracket > Page 638 Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm): Service and Repair Hood Ajar Switch Striker Removal STRIKER NOTE: The hood ajar switch striker is not intended for reuse. If the striker is removed from the hood inner reinforcement for any reason, it must be replaced. 1. Unlatch and open the hood. 2. Using a trim stick or another suitable wide flat-bladed tool, pry the rearward end of the hood ajar switch striker (2) away from the inner hood panel reinforcement (1) far enough to disengage the integral retainers from their mounting holes. 3. Remove the striker from the inner hood panel reinforcement and discard. Installation STRIKER NOTE: The hood ajar switch striker cap is not intended for reuse. If the striker cap is removed from the hood inner reinforcement for any reason, it must be replaced. 1. Position the new hood ajar switch striker (2) to the mounting holes in the inner hood panel reinforcement (1) over the hood ajar switch (3). 2. Using hand pressure, press the hood ajar switch striker upward into the mounting holes in the inner hood panel reinforcement until both integral retainers are fully engaged. 3. Close and latch the hood. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm) > Component Information > Service and Repair > Hood Ajar Switch Bracket > Page 639 Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm): Service and Repair Hood Ajar Switch - Removal SWITCH 1. Unlatch and open the hood. 2. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. 3. From the top of the mounting bracket (3) on the right front load beam (6), squeeze the two hood ajar switch (2) latch tabs together and pull the switch upward. 4. Pull the hood ajar switch up through the hole in the mounting bracket far enough to access and disconnect the jumper wire harness connector (5) from the switch connector receptacle. 5. Remove the hood ajar switch from the mounting bracket. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm) > Component Information > Service and Repair > Hood Ajar Switch Bracket > Page 640 Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm): Service and Repair Hood Ajar Switch - Installation SWITCH 1. Position the hood ajar switch (2) near the hole in the mounting bracket (3) on the right front load beam (6). 2. Route the jumper wire harness connector (5) through the switch mounting bracket and reconnect it to the switch connector receptacle. 3. From the top of the mounting bracket, press the switch downward into the mounting hole until the integral switch latch tabs lock it into place. 4. Reconnect the battery negative cable. 5. Close and latch the hood. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Pedal Positioning Switch > Component Information > Locations Pedal Positioning Switch: Locations Component ID: 480 Component : SWITCH-ADJUSTABLE PEDALS Connector: Name : SWITCH-ADJUSTABLE PEDALS Color : BLUE # of pins : 6 Qualifier : (EXCEPT BASE) Pin Circuit Description 1 P206 18LG/LB ADJUSTABLE PEDALS MOTOR REARWARD 2 A72 18RD/OR ADJUSTABLE PEDALS OUTPUT 3-4 Z146 18BK GROUND 5 F504 20GY/PK FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN) 6 P205 18LG/WT ADJUSTABLE PEDALS MOTOR FORWARD Component Location - 44 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Pedal Positioning Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 644 Component Location - 50 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Pedal Positioning Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 645 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Pedal Positioning Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 646 Pedal Positioning Switch: Diagrams Component ID: 480 Component : SWITCH-ADJUSTABLE PEDALS Connector: Name : SWITCH-ADJUSTABLE PEDALS Color : BLUE # of pins : 6 Qualifier : (EXCEPT BASE) Pin Circuit Description 1 P206 18LG/LB ADJUSTABLE PEDALS MOTOR REARWARD 2 A72 18RD/OR ADJUSTABLE PEDALS OUTPUT 3-4 Z146 18BK GROUND 5 F504 20GY/PK FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN) 6 P205 18LG/WT ADJUSTABLE PEDALS MOTOR FORWARD Component Location - 44 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Pedal Positioning Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 647 Component Location - 50 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Pedal Positioning Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 648 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Pedal Positioning Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Pedal Positioning Switch: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL 1. Remove the lower drivers side bezel (4) See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Service and Repair/Instrument Panel Driver Side Bezel/Removal . 2. Disconnect the electrical connector (3) from the adjustable pedal switch (2). 3. Remove the switch (2) from the lower drivers side bezel (4) by squeezing the retaining clips together and pushing the switch outwards. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Pedal Positioning Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 651 Pedal Positioning Switch: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION 1. Install the switch (2) to the lower drivers side bezel (4) by pushing the switch inwards seating the retaining clips to the lower drivers side bezel (4). 2. Reconnect the electrical connector (3) to the adjustable pedal switch (2). 3. Install the lower drivers side bezel (4) See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Service and Repair/Instrument Panel Driver Side Bezel/Installation . Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Remote Switch, Audio - Stereo > Component Information > Locations > Switch-Remote Radio-Left Remote Switch: Locations Switch-Remote Radio-Left Component ID: 504 Component : SWITCH-REMOTE RADIO-LEFT Connector: Name : SWITCH-REMOTE RADIO-LEFT Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Pin Circuit Description 1 X20 22GY/WT RADIO CONTROL MUX 2 G902 22WT/BR GROUND Component Location - 43 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Remote Switch, Audio - Stereo > Component Information > Locations > Switch-Remote Radio-Left > Page 656 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Remote Switch, Audio - Stereo > Component Information > Locations > Switch-Remote Radio-Left > Page 657 Remote Switch: Locations Switch-Remote Radio-Right Component ID: 505 Component : SWITCH-REMOTE RADIO-RIGHT Connector: Name : SWITCH-REMOTE RADIO-RIGHT Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Pin Circuit Description 1 X20 22GY/WT RADIO CONTROL MUX 2 G902 22WT/BR GROUND Component Location - 43 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Remote Switch, Audio - Stereo > Component Information > Locations > Switch-Remote Radio-Left > Page 658 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Remote Switch, Audio - Stereo > Component Information > Diagrams > Switch-Remote Radio-Left Remote Switch: Diagrams Switch-Remote Radio-Left Component ID: 504 Component : SWITCH-REMOTE RADIO-LEFT Connector: Name : SWITCH-REMOTE RADIO-LEFT Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Pin Circuit Description 1 X20 22GY/WT RADIO CONTROL MUX 2 G902 22WT/BR GROUND Component Location - 43 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Remote Switch, Audio - Stereo > Component Information > Diagrams > Switch-Remote Radio-Left > Page 661 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Remote Switch, Audio - Stereo > Component Information > Diagrams > Switch-Remote Radio-Left > Page 662 Remote Switch: Diagrams Switch-Remote Radio-Right Component ID: 505 Component : SWITCH-REMOTE RADIO-RIGHT Connector: Name : SWITCH-REMOTE RADIO-RIGHT Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Pin Circuit Description 1 X20 22GY/WT RADIO CONTROL MUX 2 G902 22WT/BR GROUND Component Location - 43 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Remote Switch, Audio - Stereo > Component Information > Diagrams > Switch-Remote Radio-Left > Page 663 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Remote Switch, Audio - Stereo > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Remote Switch: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION Two rocker-type switches (if equipped) are mounted on the back (instrument panel side) of the steering wheel spokes. The switch on the left spoke is the seek switch and has seek up, seek down, and preset station advance functions. The switch on the right spoke is the volume control switch and has volume up, and volume down functions. The switch on the right spoke also includes a "mode" control that allows the driver to sequentially select AM radio, FM radio, cassette player, CD player or CD changer (if equipped). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Remote Switch, Audio - Stereo > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 666 Remote Switch: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The six switches in the two remote radio switch units are normally open, resistor multiplexed momentary switches that are hard wired to the Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) through the clockspring. The TIPM sends a five volt reference signal to both switch units on one circuit, and senses the status of all of the switches by reading the voltage drop on a second circuit. When the TIPM senses an input (voltage drop) from any one of the remote radio switches, it sends the proper switch status messages on the Programmable Communication Interface (PCI) data bus network to the radio receiver. The electronic circuitry within the radio receiver is programmed to respond to these remote radio switch status messages by adjusting the radio settings as requested. For diagnosis of the TIPM or the PCI data bus, the use of a scan tool and the proper Diagnostic Procedures information is recommended. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Remote Switch, Audio - Stereo > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 667 Remote Switch: Testing and Inspection REMOTE SWITCHES Any diagnosis of the Audio system should begin with the use of scan tool. For information on the use of the scan tool, refer to the appropriate Diagnostic Service information. For a complete wiring diagram Refer to Diagrams/Electrical. WARNING: Disable the airbag system before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, seat belt tensioner, side airbag, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the airbag system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the airbag system. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment and possible personal injury. 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. 2. Remove the remote radio switch(es) from the steering wheel See: Service and Repair/Removal . 3. Use an ohmmeter to check the switch resistances as shown in the Remote Radio Switch Test chart. If the remote radio switch resistances check OK, go to STEP 4. If not OK, replace the faulty switch. 4. Connect the battery negative cable. Turn the ignition switch to the On position. Check for 5 volts at the radio control mux circuit cavities of the steering wheel wire harness connectors for both remote radio switches. If OK, go to STEP 5. If not OK, repair the open or shorted radio control mux circuit to the Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) as required. 5. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. Disconnect the 22-way instrument panel wire harness connector from the TIPM. Check for continuity between the remote radio switch ground circuit cavities of the steering wheel wire harness connectors for both remote radio switches and a good ground. There should be no continuity. If OK, go to STEP 6. If not OK, repair the shorted remote radio switch ground circuit to the TIPM as required. 6. Check for continuity between the remote radio switch ground circuit cavities of the steering wheel wire harness connectors for both remote radio switches and the 22-way instrument panel wire harness connector for the TIPM. There should be continuity. If OK, refer to the proper Diagnostic Procedures manual to test the TIPM and the PCI data bus. If not OK, repair the open remote radio switch ground circuit as required. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Remote Switch, Audio - Stereo > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Remote Switch: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL WARNING: Disable the airbag system before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, seat belt tensioner, side airbag, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the airbag system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the airbag system. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment and possible personal injury. 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. 2. Remove the driver airbag See: Restraint Systems/Air Bag Systems/Air Bag/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Driver Airbag Removal . 3. Remove the speed control switches (2) See: Sensors and Switches - Cruise Control/Cruise Control Switch/Service and Repair/Removal . 4. Unplug the wire harness connector from the remote radio switch (1). 5. Depress the tabs on each side of each switch and push the switch through the rear steering wheel cover. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Remote Switch, Audio - Stereo > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 670 Remote Switch: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION WARNING: Disable the airbag system before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, seat belt tensioner, side airbag, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the airbag system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the airbag system. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment and possible personal injury. 1. Install remote radio switch (1) to the steering wheel. 2. Connect the wire harness to the remote radio switch. 3. Install the speed control switches (2) See: Sensors and Switches - Cruise Control/Cruise Control Switch/Service and Repair/Installation . 4. Install the driver airbag See: Restraint Systems/Air Bag Systems/Air Bag/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Driver Airbag Installation . 5. Connect the battery negative cable. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Hood Switch / Sensor > Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm) > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 475 Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm): Locations Component ID 475 Component ID: 475 Component : SWITCH-HOOD AJAR Connector: Name : SWITCH-HOOD AJAR Color : # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (GAS) Pin Circuit Description 1 G70 20VT/LB HOOD AJAR SWITCH SENSE 2 G930 20VT/TN AAT RETURN Component Location - 29 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Hood Switch / Sensor > Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm) > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 475 > Page 677 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Hood Switch / Sensor > Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm) > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 475 > Page 678 Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm): Locations Component ID 492 Component ID: 492 Component : SWITCH-HOOD AJAR Connector: Name : SWITCH-HOOD AJAR Color : # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (GAS) Pin Circuit Description 1 G70 20VT/LB HOOD AJAR SWITCH SENSE 2 G930 20VT/TN AAT RETURN Component Location - 29 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Hood Switch / Sensor > Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm) > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 475 > Page 679 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Hood Switch / Sensor > Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm) > Component Information > Diagrams > Component ID 475 Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm): Diagrams Component ID 475 Component ID: 475 Component : SWITCH-HOOD AJAR Connector: Name : SWITCH-HOOD AJAR Color : # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (GAS) Pin Circuit Description 1 G70 20VT/LB HOOD AJAR SWITCH SENSE 2 G930 20VT/TN AAT RETURN Component Location - 29 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Hood Switch / Sensor > Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm) > Component Information > Diagrams > Component ID 475 > Page 682 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Hood Switch / Sensor > Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm) > Component Information > Diagrams > Component ID 475 > Page 683 Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm): Diagrams Component ID 492 Component ID: 492 Component : SWITCH-HOOD AJAR Connector: Name : SWITCH-HOOD AJAR Color : # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (GAS) Pin Circuit Description 1 G70 20VT/LB HOOD AJAR SWITCH SENSE 2 G930 20VT/TN AAT RETURN Component Location - 29 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Hood Switch / Sensor > Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm) > Component Information > Diagrams > Component ID 475 > Page 684 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Hood Switch / Sensor > Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm) > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm): Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The hood ajar switch is a normally closed, single pole, spring-loaded plunger actuated switch. This switch has two unique versions that are used in two different applications. One switch is used only on vehicles equipped with the Vehicle Theft Alarm (VTA) system for sale in certain export markets where protection of the underhood area is required equipment. The second switch is used only on domestic vehicles equipped with an optional remote starter system. The molded plastic switch body (5) has an integral molded connector receptacle (1) on the lower end containing two terminal pins. The switch is connected to the vehicle electrical system through a dedicated take out of the headlamp and dash wire harness. Two integral latches (2) lock the switch into a keyed mounting hole in the stamped steel switch mounting bracket. The mounting bracket is secured with screws to the inboard side of the right front fender load beam within the engine compartment. A molded plastic striker secured to the underside of the hood panel inner reinforcement actuates the switch plunger as the hood panel is closed. The switch plunger (3) extends through a mounting collar (4) and a sleeve-like retainer ring on the upper end of the switch body. The retainer ring has a one time, self-adjustment feature that is activated after the switch is installed by closing the hood. The retainer ring is also color-coded to aid in identifying the switch application. A dark brown retainer ring identifies the underhood security switch application, while a white retainer ring identifies the remote starter system application. An installed hood ajar switch cannot be readjusted or repaired. If the switch is damaged, ineffective, or requires readjustment, it must be replaced with a new unit. The hood ajar switch striker is not intended for reuse. If the striker is removed from the hood inner reinforcement for any reason, it must be replaced with a new unit. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Hood Switch / Sensor > Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm) > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 687 Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm): Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The hood ajar switches are interchangeable physically, but not functionally. In each case, the hood ajar switch is a normally closed switch that is held open as the spring-loaded switch plunger is depressed by the striker on the inner hood panel reinforcement when the hood panel is closed and latched. When the hood is opened, the spring-loaded switch plunger extends from the switch body and the switch contacts are closed. In the underhood security application (export vehicles only - dark brown retainer ring), the switch is connected in series between ground and the hood ajar switch sense input of the Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM). The TIPM uses an internal resistor pull up to monitor the state of the hood ajar switch contacts. In the remote starter system application (domestic vehicles only - white retainer ring) the switch has a 1 kilohm diagnostic resistor connected in parallel to the switch contacts between the two switch terminals. The switch is connected in series between an output of the TIPM and the hood ajar switch sense input of the TIPM. The TIPM continually monitors this circuit and will store a Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) for any fault that it detects. The components of the switch self-adjustment feature include an integral stop on the shaft of the plunger and a ribbed, ratcheting sleeve-like retainer ring at the top of the switch body from which the plunger extends. With the switch mounting collar secured in its mounting bracket, the plunger is depressed by the striker on the hood inner reinforcement as the hood is closed. As the plunger is depressed, the plunger stop contacts the top of the retainer ring and it is driven downward, ratcheting through the switch mounting collar until the hood is fully closed and latched. The ribs on the retainer ring are engaged within the mounting collar to maintain this adjusted position. The hood ajar switch as well as the hard wired circuits between the switch and the TIPM may be diagnosed using conventional diagnostic tools and procedures. Refer to the appropriate wiring information. However, conventional diagnostic methods will not prove conclusive in the diagnosis of the electronic controls or communication between modules and other devices related to hood ajar switch operation that provide some features of the export vehicle theft or domestic remote starter systems. The most reliable, efficient, and accurate means to diagnose the electronic controls and communication related to hood ajar switch operation requires the use of a diagnostic scan tool. Refer to the appropriate diagnostic information. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Hood Switch / Sensor > Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm) > Component Information > Service and Repair > Hood Ajar Switch Bracket Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm): Service and Repair Hood Ajar Switch Bracket Removal BRACKET 1. Remove the hood ajar switch (2) from the mounting bracket (3). See: Hood Ajar Switch Removal . 2. Remove the two screws (4) that secure the hood ajar switch bracket to the two rivet nuts (1) in the right front load beam (6). 3. Remove the hood ajar switch mounting bracket from the inboard side of the right front load beam. Installation BRACKET 1. Check to be certain that the two rivet nuts (1) on the inboard side of the right front load beam (6) are in good condition and properly secured. 2. Position the hood ajar switch mounting bracket (3) onto the right front load beam. 3. Install and tighten the two screws (4) that secure the mounting bracket to the load beam. Beginning with the rearward screw, tighten both screws to 8 Nm (71 in. lbs.). 4. Reinstall the hood ajar switch (2) into the mounting bracket. See: Hood Ajar Switch - Installation . Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Hood Switch / Sensor > Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm) > Component Information > Service and Repair > Hood Ajar Switch Bracket > Page 690 Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm): Service and Repair Hood Ajar Switch Striker Removal STRIKER NOTE: The hood ajar switch striker is not intended for reuse. If the striker is removed from the hood inner reinforcement for any reason, it must be replaced. 1. Unlatch and open the hood. 2. Using a trim stick or another suitable wide flat-bladed tool, pry the rearward end of the hood ajar switch striker (2) away from the inner hood panel reinforcement (1) far enough to disengage the integral retainers from their mounting holes. 3. Remove the striker from the inner hood panel reinforcement and discard. Installation STRIKER NOTE: The hood ajar switch striker cap is not intended for reuse. If the striker cap is removed from the hood inner reinforcement for any reason, it must be replaced. 1. Position the new hood ajar switch striker (2) to the mounting holes in the inner hood panel reinforcement (1) over the hood ajar switch (3). 2. Using hand pressure, press the hood ajar switch striker upward into the mounting holes in the inner hood panel reinforcement until both integral retainers are fully engaged. 3. Close and latch the hood. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Hood Switch / Sensor > Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm) > Component Information > Service and Repair > Hood Ajar Switch Bracket > Page 691 Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm): Service and Repair Hood Ajar Switch - Removal SWITCH 1. Unlatch and open the hood. 2. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. 3. From the top of the mounting bracket (3) on the right front load beam (6), squeeze the two hood ajar switch (2) latch tabs together and pull the switch upward. 4. Pull the hood ajar switch up through the hole in the mounting bracket far enough to access and disconnect the jumper wire harness connector (5) from the switch connector receptacle. 5. Remove the hood ajar switch from the mounting bracket. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Hood Switch / Sensor > Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm) > Component Information > Service and Repair > Hood Ajar Switch Bracket > Page 692 Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm): Service and Repair Hood Ajar Switch - Installation SWITCH 1. Position the hood ajar switch (2) near the hole in the mounting bracket (3) on the right front load beam (6). 2. Route the jumper wire harness connector (5) through the switch mounting bracket and reconnect it to the switch connector receptacle. 3. From the top of the mounting bracket, press the switch downward into the mounting hole until the integral switch latch tabs lock it into place. 4. Reconnect the battery negative cable. 5. Close and latch the hood. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Pedal Positioning Switch > Component Information > Locations Pedal Positioning Switch: Locations Component ID: 480 Component : SWITCH-ADJUSTABLE PEDALS Connector: Name : SWITCH-ADJUSTABLE PEDALS Color : BLUE # of pins : 6 Qualifier : (EXCEPT BASE) Pin Circuit Description 1 P206 18LG/LB ADJUSTABLE PEDALS MOTOR REARWARD 2 A72 18RD/OR ADJUSTABLE PEDALS OUTPUT 3-4 Z146 18BK GROUND 5 F504 20GY/PK FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN) 6 P205 18LG/WT ADJUSTABLE PEDALS MOTOR FORWARD Component Location - 44 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Pedal Positioning Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 696 Component Location - 50 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Pedal Positioning Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 697 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Pedal Positioning Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 698 Pedal Positioning Switch: Diagrams Component ID: 480 Component : SWITCH-ADJUSTABLE PEDALS Connector: Name : SWITCH-ADJUSTABLE PEDALS Color : BLUE # of pins : 6 Qualifier : (EXCEPT BASE) Pin Circuit Description 1 P206 18LG/LB ADJUSTABLE PEDALS MOTOR REARWARD 2 A72 18RD/OR ADJUSTABLE PEDALS OUTPUT 3-4 Z146 18BK GROUND 5 F504 20GY/PK FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN) 6 P205 18LG/WT ADJUSTABLE PEDALS MOTOR FORWARD Component Location - 44 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Pedal Positioning Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 699 Component Location - 50 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Pedal Positioning Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 700 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Pedal Positioning Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Pedal Positioning Switch: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL 1. Remove the lower drivers side bezel (4) See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Service and Repair/Instrument Panel Driver Side Bezel/Removal . 2. Disconnect the electrical connector (3) from the adjustable pedal switch (2). 3. Remove the switch (2) from the lower drivers side bezel (4) by squeezing the retaining clips together and pushing the switch outwards. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Pedal Positioning Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 703 Pedal Positioning Switch: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION 1. Install the switch (2) to the lower drivers side bezel (4) by pushing the switch inwards seating the retaining clips to the lower drivers side bezel (4). 2. Reconnect the electrical connector (3) to the adjustable pedal switch (2). 3. Install the lower drivers side bezel (4) See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Service and Repair/Instrument Panel Driver Side Bezel/Installation . Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Door Lock Switch > Component Information > Locations > Switch-Door Lock-Passenger Power Door Lock Switch: Locations Switch-Door Lock-Passenger Component ID: 485 Component : SWITCH-DOOR LOCK-PASSENGER Connector: Name : SWITCH-DOOR LOCK-PASSENGER Color : NATURAL # of pins : 6 Pin Circuit Description 1 G160 20VT/LG PASSENGER DOOR LOCK SWITCH MUX 2 F21 20PK/DG FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) 3-4-5 Z917 20BK GROUND 6-Component Location - 56 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Door Lock Switch > Component Information > Locations > Switch-Door Lock-Passenger > Page 708 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Door Lock Switch > Component Information > Locations > Switch-Door Lock-Passenger > Page 709 Power Door Lock Switch: Locations Switch-Window/Door Lock-Driver Component ID: 518 Component : SWITCH-WINDOW/DOOR LOCK-DRIVER Connector: Name : SWITCH-WINDOW/DOOR LOCK-DRIVER C1 Color : BLUE # of pins : 12 Pin Circuit Description 1 Q612 14OR/DB RIGHT REAR WINDOW DRIVER (DOWN) 2 Q412 14OR/LB RIGHT REAR WINDOW DRIVER (UP) 3 Q16 12OR/TN MASTER WINDOW SWITCH RIGHT FRONT (UP) 4 Q411 14OR/WT LEFT REAR WINDOW DRIVER (UP) 5 Q11 14OR/LG LEFT FRONT WINDOW DRIVER (UP) 6 Q26 12OR/GY MASTER WINDOW SWITCH RIGHT FRONT (DOWN) 7 G161 20VT/DG DRIVER DOOR LOCK SWITCH MUX 8 Z939 12BK GROUND 9 F30 12PK/YL FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-ACC) 10 Q611 14OR/GY LEFT REAR WINDOW DRIVER (DOWN) 11 Z939 18BK GROUND 12 Q21 14OR/WT LEFT FRONT WINDOW DRIVER (DOWN) Component Location - 55 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Door Lock Switch > Component Information > Locations > Switch-Door Lock-Passenger > Page 710 Connector: Name : SWITCH-WINDOW/DOOR LOCK-DRIVER C2 Color : BLUE # of pins : 8 Pin Circuit Description 1 P71 20TN/DG LEFT MIRROR UP DRIVER 2 P195 18LG/YL LEFT MIRROR COMMON DRIVER (RIGHT/DOWN) 3 A940 18RD FUSED B(+) 4 P74 18TN/OR RIGHT MIRROR LEFT DRIVER 5 Z939 18BK GROUND Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Door Lock Switch > Component Information > Locations > Switch-Door Lock-Passenger > Page 711 6 P75 20TN/LG LEFT MIRROR LEFT DRIVER 7 P72 18TN/GY RIGHT MIRROR UP DRIVER 8 Q15 12OR/LB WINDOW LOCK OUT SWITCH OUTPUT Component Location - 55 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Door Lock Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Switch-Door Lock-Passenger Power Door Lock Switch: Diagrams Switch-Door Lock-Passenger Component ID: 485 Component : SWITCH-DOOR LOCK-PASSENGER Connector: Name : SWITCH-DOOR LOCK-PASSENGER Color : NATURAL # of pins : 6 Pin Circuit Description 1 G160 20VT/LG PASSENGER DOOR LOCK SWITCH MUX 2 F21 20PK/DG FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) 3-4-5 Z917 20BK GROUND 6-Component Location - 56 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Door Lock Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Switch-Door Lock-Passenger > Page 714 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Door Lock Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Switch-Door Lock-Passenger > Page 715 Power Door Lock Switch: Diagrams Switch-Window/Door Lock-Driver Component ID 479 Component ID: 479 Component : SWITCH-WINDOW/DOOR LOCK-DRIVER Connector: Name : SWITCH-WINDOW/DOOR LOCK-DRIVER C1 Color : BLUE # of pins : 12 Pin Circuit Description 1 Q612 14OR/DB RIGHT REAR WINDOW DRIVER (DOWN) 2 Q412 14OR/LB RIGHT REAR WINDOW DRIVER (UP) 3 Q16 12OR/TN MASTER WINDOW SWITCH RIGHT FRONT (UP) 4 Q411 14OR/WT LEFT REAR WINDOW DRIVER (UP) 5 Q11 14OR/LG LEFT FRONT WINDOW DRIVER (UP) 6 Q26 12OR/GY MASTER WINDOW SWITCH RIGHT FRONT (DOWN) 7 G161 20VT/DG DRIVER DOOR LOCK SWITCH MUX 8 Z939 12BK GROUND 9 F30 12PK/YL FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-ACC) 10 Q611 14OR/GY LEFT REAR WINDOW DRIVER (DOWN) 11 Z939 18BK GROUND 12 Q21 14OR/WT LEFT FRONT WINDOW DRIVER (DOWN) Connector: Name : SWITCH-WINDOW/DOOR LOCK-DRIVER C2 Color : BLUE # of pins : 8 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Door Lock Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Switch-Door Lock-Passenger > Page 716 Pin Circuit Description 1 P71 20TN/DG LEFT MIRROR UP DRIVER 2 P195 18LG/YL LEFT MIRROR COMMON DRIVER (RIGHT/DOWN) 3 A940 18RD FUSED B(+) 4 P74 18TN/OR RIGHT MIRROR LEFT DRIVER 5 Z939 18BK GROUND 6 P75 20TN/LG LEFT MIRROR LEFT DRIVER 7 P72 18TN/GY RIGHT MIRROR UP DRIVER 8 Q15 12OR/LB WINDOW LOCK OUT SWITCH OUTPUT Component ID 518 Component ID: 518 Component : SWITCH-WINDOW/DOOR LOCK-DRIVER Connector: Name : SWITCH-WINDOW/DOOR LOCK-DRIVER C1 Color : BLUE # of pins : 12 Pin Circuit Description 1 Q612 14OR/DB RIGHT REAR WINDOW DRIVER (DOWN) 2 Q412 14OR/LB RIGHT REAR WINDOW DRIVER (UP) 3 Q16 12OR/TN MASTER WINDOW SWITCH RIGHT FRONT (UP) 4 Q411 14OR/WT LEFT REAR WINDOW DRIVER (UP) 5 Q11 14OR/LG LEFT FRONT WINDOW DRIVER (UP) 6 Q26 12OR/GY MASTER WINDOW SWITCH RIGHT FRONT (DOWN) Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Door Lock Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Switch-Door Lock-Passenger > Page 717 7 G161 20VT/DG DRIVER DOOR LOCK SWITCH MUX 8 Z939 12BK GROUND 9 F30 12PK/YL FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-ACC) 10 Q611 14OR/GY LEFT REAR WINDOW DRIVER (DOWN) 11 Z939 18BK GROUND 12 Q21 14OR/WT LEFT FRONT WINDOW DRIVER (DOWN) Component Location - 55 Connector: Name : SWITCH-WINDOW/DOOR LOCK-DRIVER C2 Color : BLUE # of pins : 8 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Door Lock Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Switch-Door Lock-Passenger > Page 718 Pin Circuit Description 1 P71 20TN/DG LEFT MIRROR UP DRIVER 2 P195 18LG/YL LEFT MIRROR COMMON DRIVER (RIGHT/DOWN) 3 A940 18RD FUSED B(+) 4 P74 18TN/OR RIGHT MIRROR LEFT DRIVER 5 Z939 18BK GROUND 6 P75 20TN/LG LEFT MIRROR LEFT DRIVER 7 P72 18TN/GY RIGHT MIRROR UP DRIVER 8 Q15 12OR/LB WINDOW LOCK OUT SWITCH OUTPUT Component Location - 55 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Door Lock Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Switch-Door Lock-Passenger > Page 719 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Door Lock Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Power Door Lock Switch: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION A window/lock switch is used on all models equipped with power locks, power windows, and power mirrors. The window/lock switch houses the following switches: - Power Lock Switch - A two-way, momentary, resistor multiplexed switch to control the power lock system. - Power Mirror Selector Switch - A three-position rocker switch selects the right or left power mirror for adjustment, or turns the power mirror system Off. - Power Mirror Adjustment Switches - Four momentary, arrowhead shaped, directional switches allow the driver to adjust the selected power mirror in the Up, Down, Right, or Left directions. - Power Window Lockout Switch - A two-way, latching, push-button switch allows the vehicle operator to lock out the power window switches on each passenger door so that the passenger door power windows may be operated only from the master switches. - Power Window Switches - A two-way, momentary power window switch for the driver side front door. This switch also has a second detent in the Down direction and internal circuitry to provide an Auto-Down feature for the driver side front door power window. In addition to the power window switch for its own door, there are individual master switches for each passenger door power window. The window/lock switch also incorporates several green Light-Emitting Diodes (LEDs) that illuminate the power lock and power window switch paddles, and the power mirror switch directional buttons to improve switch visibility. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Door Lock Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 722 Power Door Lock Switch: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The window/lock switch combines a power lock switch, a driver power window switch with an Auto-down feature, master switches for each passenger door power window, a power window lockout switch, a power mirror selector switch, and four power mirror adjustment switches in a single unit. Power Lock Switch The power lock switch circuitry is connected in series between ground and the driver door switch mux input of the instrument cluster. Each power lock switch position (Lock, Unlock, and Neutral) provides a different resistance value to the instrument cluster input, which allows the instrument cluster to sense the switch position. Based upon the power lock switch input, the instrument cluster controls the battery and ground feed outputs to the individual power lock motors to lock or unlock the door latches. The Light-Emitting Diode (LED) in the power lock switch is connected to battery current through the power window circuit breaker in the Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) on a fused ignition switch output (run-acc) circuit. The switch will be illuminated whenever the ignition switch is in the On or Accessory positions. Power Window Switches The power window switch circuitry is connected to battery current through a circuit breaker in the Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) on a fused ignition switch output (run-acc) circuit so that the power windows will operate whenever the ignition switch is in the On or Accessory positions. Each two-way, momentary master passenger power window switch provides battery current and ground to the individual power window switches on each passenger door so that the power window switch controls the battery current and ground feeds to its respective power window motor. The switch for the driver side front door power window is labeled "Auto" and includes an auto-down feature. When this switch is depressed to a second momentary detent position and released, the driver door power window is automatically operated through an internal circuit and relay to its fully lowered position. The Auto-down event is cancelled if the switch paddle is depressed a second time in either the Up or Down direction. When the two position window lockout switch is depressed and latched in the lockout position, the battery current feed to each of the individual passenger power window switches is interrupted so that the passenger door power windows can only be operated from the master switches. The window lockout switch also controls the battery current feed for the LED in each passenger power window switch so that the switch will not be illuminated when it is locked out. Power Mirror Switches The power mirror switch circuitry is connected to battery current through a fuse in the TIPM on a fused B(+) circuit so that the power mirrors remain operational regardless of the ignition switch position. A rocker type selector switch has three positions, one to select the right mirror, one to select the left mirror, and a neutral Off position. After the right or left mirror is selected, one of four directional buttons is depressed to move the selected mirror Up, Down, Right or Left. The power mirror switch circuitry controls the battery current and ground feeds to each of the four (two in each mirror head) power mirror motors. The Light-Emitting Diode (LED) in the power mirror switch is connected to battery current through the power window circuit breaker in the TIPM on a fused ignition switch output (run-acc) circuit so that the switch directional buttons will be illuminated whenever the ignition switch is in the On or Accessory positions. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Door Lock Switch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Power Lock Switch Power Door Lock Switch: Testing and Inspection Power Lock Switch POWER LOCK SWITCH The Light-Emitting Diode (LED) illumination lamp of the power lock switch receives battery current through a fuse in the Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) on a fused ignition switch output (run) circuit. The power lock switch on the driver side front door trim panel is integral to the window/lock switch. See: Diagnosis and Testing If the power lock switch operates, but the LED is inoperative, check for battery current at the switch with the ignition switch in the On position. If OK, replace the faulty switch. Refer to the appropriate wiring information. 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. Remove the power lock switch from the door trim panel. Disconnect the door wire harness connector for the power lock switch from the switch connector receptacle. 2. Test the power lock switch resistance. See the Power Lock Switch Test chart to determine if the resistance is correct for the switch in each switch position. If not OK, replace the faulty power lock switch as required. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Door Lock Switch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Power Lock Switch > Page 725 Power Door Lock Switch: Testing and Inspection Diagnosis and Testing WINDOW/LOCK SWITCH The Light-Emitting Diode (LED) illumination lamps for all of the Driver Door Module (DDM) power window, power lock, and power mirror switches receive battery current through the power window circuit breaker in the Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM). If all of the LED's are inoperative in the DDM, be certain to diagnose the power window system before replacing the switch unit. See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code Tests and Associated Procedures . If only one LED in the DDM is inoperative, replace the faulty DDM. If the driver side front door power window operates in a normal manner, but the Auto-Down feature is inoperative, replace the faulty DDM. Refer to the appropriate wiring information. 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. Remove the DDM from the door trim panel. Disconnect the door wire harness connectors for the DDM from the DDM connector receptacles. 2. Test the DDM switch continuity. See the Driver Door Module Switch Tests chart to determine if the continuity is correct for the suspect switches in each switch position. If not OK, replace the faulty DDM as required. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Door Lock Switch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Power Lock Switch > Page 726 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Door Lock Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Power Lock Switch Power Door Lock Switch: Service and Repair Power Lock Switch Removal REMOVAL The power lock switch on the driver side front door trim panel is integral to the window/lock switch. See: Window/Door Lock Switch/Removal 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. 2. Remove the door trim panel. See: Body and Frame/Doors, Hood and Trunk/Doors/Front Door/Front Door Panel/Service and Repair/Front Door Trim Panel - Removal 3. Remove the switch from the trim panel bezel. Installation INSTALLATION 1. Insert switch to trim panel bezel. 2. Install door trim panel See: Body and Frame/Doors, Hood and Trunk/Doors/Front Door/Front Door Panel/Service and Repair/Front Door Trim Panel - Installation . 3. Connect battery negative cable. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Door Lock Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Power Lock Switch > Page 729 Power Door Lock Switch: Service and Repair Window/Door Lock Switch Removal REMOVAL 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. 2. Remove the door trim panel See: Body and Frame/Doors, Hood and Trunk/Doors/Front Door/Front Door Panel/Service and Repair/Front Door Trim Panel - Removal . 3. Remove the switch from the trim panel bezel. Installation INSTALLATION 1. Install switch to trim panel bezel. 2. Install door trim panel See: Body and Frame/Doors, Hood and Trunk/Doors/Front Door/Front Door Panel/Service and Repair/Front Door Trim Panel - Installation . 3. Connect battery negative cable. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Seat Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Switch-Seat-Driver Power Seat Switch: Diagrams Switch-Seat-Driver Component ID 476 Component ID: 476 Component : SWITCH-SEAT-DRIVER Connector: Name : SWITCH-SEAT-DRIVER Color : # of pins : 12 Qualifier : (HD) A A210 12OR/RD FUSED B(+) B Z939 14BK GROUND C-E P11 12LG/YL DRIVER SEAT REAR UP DRIVER F-G Z939 14BK GROUND H A210 12OR/RD FUSED B(+) J P13 12LG/OR DRIVER SEAT REAR DOWN DRIVER K P17 12LG/DG DRIVER SEAT HORIZONTAL REARWARD DRIVER L P15 12LG/BR DRIVER SEAT HORIZONTAL FORWARD DRIVER M P19 12LG/LB DRIVER SEAT FRONT UP DRIVER N P21 12LG/TN DRIVER SEAT FRONT DOWN DRIVER Connector: Name : SWITCH-SEAT-DRIVER Color : GRAY # of pins : 8 Qualifier : (LD) Gender : MALE Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Seat Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Switch-Seat-Driver > Page 734 Pin Circuit Description 1 P19 12LG/LB DRIVER SEAT FRONT UP DRIVER 2 Z939 14BK GROUND 3 P15 12LG/WT DRIVER SEAT HORIZONTAL FORWARD DRIVER 4 A210 12OR/RD FUSED B(+) 5 P11 12LG/YL DRIVER SEAT REAR UP DRIVER 6 P17 12LG/DG DRIVER SEAT HORIZONTAL REARWARD DRIVER 7 P13 12LG/OR DRIVER SEAT REAR DOWN DRIVER 8 P21 12LG/TN DRIVER SEAT FRONT DOWN DRIVER Component ID 507 Component ID: 507 Component : SWITCH-SEAT-DRIVER Connector: Name : SWITCH-SEAT-DRIVER Color : # of pins : 12 Qualifier : (HD) A A210 12OR/RD FUSED B(+) B Z939 14BK GROUND C-E P11 12LG/YL DRIVER SEAT REAR UP DRIVER F-G Z939 14BK GROUND H A210 12OR/RD FUSED B(+) Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Seat Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Switch-Seat-Driver > Page 735 J P13 12LG/OR DRIVER SEAT REAR DOWN DRIVER K P17 12LG/DG DRIVER SEAT HORIZONTAL REARWARD DRIVER L P15 12LG/BR DRIVER SEAT HORIZONTAL FORWARD DRIVER M P19 12LG/LB DRIVER SEAT FRONT UP DRIVER N P21 12LG/TN DRIVER SEAT FRONT DOWN DRIVER Connector: Name : SWITCH-SEAT-DRIVER Color : GRAY # of pins : 8 Qualifier : (LD) Gender : MALE Pin Circuit Description 1 P19 12LG/LB DRIVER SEAT FRONT UP DRIVER 2 Z939 14BK GROUND 3 P15 12LG/WT DRIVER SEAT HORIZONTAL FORWARD DRIVER 4 A210 12OR/RD FUSED B(+) 5 P11 12LG/YL DRIVER SEAT REAR UP DRIVER 6 P17 12LG/DG DRIVER SEAT HORIZONTAL REARWARD DRIVER 7 P13 12LG/OR DRIVER SEAT REAR DOWN DRIVER 8 P21 12LG/TN DRIVER SEAT FRONT DOWN DRIVER Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Seat Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Switch-Seat-Driver > Page 736 Power Seat Switch: Diagrams Switch-Seat-Passenger Component ID 477 Component ID: 477 Component : SWITCH-SEAT-PASSENGER Connector: Name : SWITCH-SEAT-PASSENGER Color : # of pins : 12 A A210 12OR/RD FUSED B(+) B Z939 14BK GROUND C-E P12 12LG/YL PASSENGER SEAT REAR UP DRIVER F-G Z939 14BK GROUND H A210 12OR/RD FUSED B(+) J P10 12LG/TN PASSENGER SEAT REAR DOWN DRIVER K P16 12LG/BR PASSENGER SEAT HORIZONTAL REARWARD DRIVER L P14 12LG/OR PASSENGER SEAT HORIZONTAL FORWARD DRIVER M P20 12LG/LB PASSENGER SEAT FRONT UP DRIVER N P18 12LG/OR PASSENGER SEAT FRONT DOWN DRIVER Component ID 508 Component ID: 508 Component : SWITCH-SEAT-PASSENGER Connector: Name : SWITCH-SEAT-PASSENGER Color : # of pins : 12 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Seat Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Switch-Seat-Driver > Page 737 A A210 12OR/RD FUSED B(+) B Z939 14BK GROUND C-E P12 12LG/YL PASSENGER SEAT REAR UP DRIVER F-G Z939 14BK GROUND H A210 12OR/RD FUSED B(+) J P10 12LG/TN PASSENGER SEAT REAR DOWN DRIVER K P16 12LG/BR PASSENGER SEAT HORIZONTAL REARWARD DRIVER L P14 12LG/OR PASSENGER SEAT HORIZONTAL FORWARD DRIVER M P20 12LG/LB PASSENGER SEAT FRONT UP DRIVER N P18 12LG/OR PASSENGER SEAT FRONT DOWN DRIVER Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Seat Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Power Seat Switch: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The power seats on this vehicle can be adjusted in eight different directions, up, down, front up, front down, rear up, rear down, rearward and forward. The power seat switch is located on the outboard side of the seat cushion on the seat cushion side shield. The individual switches in the power seat switch assembly cannot be repaired. If one switch is damaged or inoperative, the entire power seat switch assembly must be replaced. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Seat Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 740 Power Seat Switch: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION When a power switch control knob or knobs are actuated, a battery feed and a ground path are applied through the switch contacts to the power seat track adjuster motor. The selected adjuster motor operates to move the seat track or recliner through its drive unit in the selected direction until the switch is released, or until the travel limit of the adjuster is reached. When the switch is moved in the opposite direction, the battery feed and ground path to the motor are reversed through the switch contacts. This causes the adjuster motor to run in the opposite direction. No power seat switch should be held applied in any direction after the adjuster has reached its travel limit. The power seat adjuster motors each contain a self-resetting circuit breaker to protect them from overload. However, consecutive or frequent resetting of the circuit breaker must not be allowed to continue, or the motor may be damaged. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Seat Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 741 Power Seat Switch: Testing and Inspection POWER SEAT SWITCH For complete circuit diagrams, refer to the appropriate wiring information. The wiring information includes wiring diagrams, proper wire and connector repair procedures, details of wire harness routing and retention, connector pin-out information and location views for the various wire harness connectors, splices and grounds. 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. 2. Remove the power seat switch from the power seat. 3. Using an ohmmeter to test the continuity of the power seat switches in each position. Refer to the POWER SEAT SWITCH TEST TABLE. If OK, See: Body and Frame/Seats/Seat Track/Testing and Inspection . If not OK, replace the inoperative power seat switch. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Seat Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Power Seat Switch - Removal Power Seat Switch: Service and Repair Power Seat Switch - Removal REMOVAL 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. 2. Remove the seat cushion side shield from the seat. 3. Pull the switch bezel or side shield unit (1) out from the seat far enough to access the switch wire harness connector. Gently pry the locking tabs of the switch away from the wire harness connector and carefully unplug the connector from the power seat switch module (2). 4. Remove the screws (3) that secure the power seat switch (2) to the side shield unit (1). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Seat Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Power Seat Switch - Removal > Page 744 Power Seat Switch: Service and Repair Power Seat Switch - Installation INSTALLATION 1. Position the power seat switch (2) on the seat cushion side shield (1) and install the screws (3). 2. Connect the electrical connector. 3. Install the seat cushion side shield on the seat. 4. Connect the battery negative cable. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Switch > Component Information > Locations > Switch-Heated Seat-Driver Seat Heater Switch: Locations Switch-Heated Seat-Driver Component ID: 490 Component : SWITCH-HEATED SEAT-DRIVER Connector: Name : SWITCH-HEATED SEAT-DRIVER Color : DK. GRAY # of pins : 6 Pin Circuit Description 1 Z301 20TN/BK GROUND 2 P301 20LG/OR PANEL LAMPS DRIVER 3 P693 18LG/WT DRIVER SEAT HEATER SUPPLY 4 A930 16RD FUSED B(+) 5-6 A930 16RD FUSED B(+) Component Location - 47 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Switch > Component Information > Locations > Switch-Heated Seat-Driver > Page 749 Component Location - 45 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Switch > Component Information > Locations > Switch-Heated Seat-Driver > Page 750 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Switch > Component Information > Locations > Switch-Heated Seat-Driver > Page 751 Seat Heater Switch: Locations Switch-Heated Seat-Passenger Component ID: 491 Component : SWITCH-HEATED SEAT-PASSENGER Connector: Name : SWITCH-HEATED SEAT-PASSENGER Color : GREEN # of pins : 6 Pin Circuit Description 1 Z302 20LG/BK GROUND 2 P301 20LG/OR PANEL LAMPS DRIVER 3 P95 18LG/WT PASSENGER SEAT HEATER SUPPLY 4 A930 16RD FUSED B(+) 5-6 A930 16RD FUSED B(+) Component Location - 47 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Switch > Component Information > Locations > Switch-Heated Seat-Driver > Page 752 Component Location - 45 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Switch > Component Information > Locations > Switch-Heated Seat-Driver > Page 753 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Switch-Heated Seat-Driver Seat Heater Switch: Diagrams Switch-Heated Seat-Driver Component ID: 490 Component : SWITCH-HEATED SEAT-DRIVER Connector: Name : SWITCH-HEATED SEAT-DRIVER Color : DK. GRAY # of pins : 6 Pin Circuit Description 1 Z301 20TN/BK GROUND 2 P301 20LG/OR PANEL LAMPS DRIVER 3 P693 18LG/WT DRIVER SEAT HEATER SUPPLY 4 A930 16RD FUSED B(+) 5-6 A930 16RD FUSED B(+) Component Location - 47 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Switch-Heated Seat-Driver > Page 756 Component Location - 45 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Switch-Heated Seat-Driver > Page 757 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Switch-Heated Seat-Driver > Page 758 Seat Heater Switch: Diagrams Switch-Heated Seat-Passenger Component ID: 491 Component : SWITCH-HEATED SEAT-PASSENGER Connector: Name : SWITCH-HEATED SEAT-PASSENGER Color : GREEN # of pins : 6 Pin Circuit Description 1 Z302 20LG/BK GROUND 2 P301 20LG/OR PANEL LAMPS DRIVER 3 P95 18LG/WT PASSENGER SEAT HEATER SUPPLY 4 A930 16RD FUSED B(+) 5-6 A930 16RD FUSED B(+) Component Location - 47 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Switch-Heated Seat-Driver > Page 759 Component Location - 45 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Switch-Heated Seat-Driver > Page 760 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Seat Heater Switch: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION Momentary contact push button switch/modules mounted in the instrument panel center bezel operate the heated seat system. Each heated seat switch/module has two Light-Emitting Diode (LED) indicator lamps, which indicate the selected level (Low or High) of the seat heater. Pressing the switch/module button initiates heat. Heat remains on until switched off or until the ignition is turned off. If switched off by the ignition, a switch/module button must be pressed to restart heating. The switch/modules contain the solid state electronic control and diagnostic logic circuitry for the heated seat system. If any of the heated seat elements are inoperative or damaged one or more of the LED lamps in the switch/module for the effected seat will flash. The LED indicator lamps in each heated seat switch/module cannot be repaired. If the LED lamps are faulty or damaged, or the switch/module is inoperative or damaged the individual heated seat switch/module assembly must be replaced. See: Service and Repair/Heated Seat Switch Removal for the switch/module replacement procedure. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 763 Seat Heater Switch: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION A Heated Seat Switch/Module is used to control the heated seat system. The heated seat switch/modules receive battery current through a fused ignition switch output (run) circuit when the ignition switch is in the On position. The switch/module responds to heated seat switch/module button input and ignition switch status inputs by controlling the 12v output to the front seat heating elements through integral solid-state relays. When either of the heated seat switch/module buttons are depressed the heating element for the selected seat is energized. Amber Light Emitting Diodes (LEDS) on the side of each switch/module indicate the level of heat in use: Two LEDs are illuminated for high, one for low, and none for off. Pressing the switch/module button once will select high-level heating. Pressing the button a second time will select low-level heating. Pressing the button a third time will shut the heating elements off. The heated seat switch/module energizes an integral solid-state relay, which supplies battery current to the heating elements. When high-temperature heating is selected, the heaters provide a boosted heat level during the first four minutes of operation after heating is activated. The heat output then drops to the normal high-temperature level. If high-level heating is selected, the control system will automatically switch to the low level after two hours of continuous operation. At that time, the number of illuminated LEDs changes from two to one, indicating the change. Operation on the low setting will continue indefinitely until the switch/module button is pushed to turn the system off. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Heated Seat Switch - Removal Seat Heater Switch: Service and Repair Heated Seat Switch - Removal REMOVAL 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. 2. Remove the instrument panel center bezel, See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Service and Repair/Instrument Panel Center Bezel - Removal . 3. Disconnect the switch/module electrical connectors. 4. Using an appropriate flat bladed tool, remove the heated seat switch/module from the bezel. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Heated Seat Switch - Removal > Page 766 Seat Heater Switch: Service and Repair Heated Seat Switch - Installation INSTALLATION 1. Align the tabs of the switch/module to the instrument panel center bezel and gently push together until the tabs are securely in place. 2. Connect the switch/module electrical connectors. 3. Install the instrument panel center bezel, See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Service and Repair/Instrument Panel Center Bezel - Installation . 4. Connect the battery negative cable. 5. Verify heated seat system operation. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Sunroof / Moonroof Switch > Component Information > Locations Sunroof / Moonroof Switch: Locations Component ID: 512 Component : SWITCH-SUNROOF Connector: Name : SWITCH-SUNROOF Color : BLACK # of pins : 4 A Q4 20OR/YL SUNROOF VENT SWITCH SENSE B Q6 20OR/LG SUNROOF SWITCH SUPPLY C Q3 20OR/TN SUNROOF OPEN SWITCH SENSE D Q5 20OR/LB SUNROOF CLOSE SWITCH SENSE Component Location - 53 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Sunroof / Moonroof Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 770 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Sunroof / Moonroof Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 771 Sunroof / Moonroof Switch: Diagrams Component ID: 512 Component : SWITCH-SUNROOF Connector: Name : SWITCH-SUNROOF Color : BLACK # of pins : 4 A Q4 20OR/YL SUNROOF VENT SWITCH SENSE B Q6 20OR/LG SUNROOF SWITCH SUPPLY C Q3 20OR/TN SUNROOF OPEN SWITCH SENSE D Q5 20OR/LB SUNROOF CLOSE SWITCH SENSE Component Location - 53 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Sunroof / Moonroof Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 772 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Sunroof / Moonroof Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Sunroof Switch Sunroof / Moonroof Switch: Description and Operation Sunroof Switch Description DESCRIPTION The power sunroof switch (3) is a combination push-button and rocker switch module mounted in the overhead console. The sunroof switch is a direct contact unit that is directly wired to the sunroof motor/module assembly. The sunroof switch performs the following functions: - Power sunroof open (back of switch pushed) - Power sunroof closed (front of switch pushed) - Power sunroof vent (switch center button pushed) The power sunroof switch is part of the overhead console assembly and cannot be replaced separately. If the switch is damaged or inoperative the overhead console must be replaced, See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Console/Service and Repair/Overhead Console/Removal . Operation OPERATION The power sunroof switch is hard wired to the sunroof motor/module assembly. The switch receives battery current from the motor/module when the ignition switch is in the RUN and ACCESSORY positions. When one of the switch positions is pressed it sends battery current back to the motor/module, signaling it to move the power sunroof to the appropriate position. The motor/module will perform one of the following functions: - Power sunroof open (back of switch pushed) - Power sunroof closed (front of switch pushed) - Power sunroof vent (switch center button pushed) Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Sunroof / Moonroof Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 775 Sunroof / Moonroof Switch: Testing and Inspection SWITCH - POWER SUNROOF For complete circuit diagrams, refer to the appropriate wiring information. The wiring information includes wiring diagrams, proper wire and connector repair procedures, details of wire harness routing and retention, connector pin-out information and location views for the various wire harness connectors, splices and grounds. If completing the appropriate diagnostic information results in the sunroof switch being inoperative, perform the following test prior to switch replacement. 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. 2. Remove the overhead console, See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Console/Service and Repair/Overhead Console/Removal . 3. Disconnect the power sunroof switch wire harness connector. 4. Using an ohmmeter, test the continuity of the power sunroof switch in each switch position. Refer to the POWER SUNROOF SWITCH CONTINUITY TABLE. If OK, inspect the wiring harness and connectors for damage. Use a scan tool and the proper Diagnostic Procedures Information to complete diagnosis of the power sunroof system. If not OK, replace the overhead console. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Fluid Level Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Locations Brake Fluid Level Sensor/Switch: Locations Component ID: 404 Component : SENSOR-BRAKE FLUID LEVEL Connector: Name : SENSOR-BRAKE FLUID LEVEL Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Pin Circuit Description 1 B20 20DG/OR BRAKE FLUID LEVEL SWITCH SENSE 2 Z420 20BK/OR GROUND Component Location - 32 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Fluid Level Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 780 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Fluid Level Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 781 Brake Fluid Level Sensor/Switch: Diagrams Component ID: 404 Component : SENSOR-BRAKE FLUID LEVEL Connector: Name : SENSOR-BRAKE FLUID LEVEL Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Pin Circuit Description 1 B20 20DG/OR BRAKE FLUID LEVEL SWITCH SENSE 2 Z420 20BK/OR GROUND Component Location - 32 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Fluid Level Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 782 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Lateral Accelerometer > Component Information > Locations Lateral Accelerometer: Locations Component ID: 408 Component : SENSOR-DYNAMICS Connector: Name : SENSOR-DYNAMICS Color : # of pins : 6 Pin Circuit Description 1 F960 20PK/LG FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) 2 D465 20WT/GY DYNAMICS SENSOR HIGH DATA LINK 3 D464 20WT/OR DYNAMICS SENSOR LOW DATA LINK 4-5-6 Z608 20BK/LG GROUND Component Location - 52 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Lateral Accelerometer > Component Information > Locations > Page 786 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Lateral Accelerometer > Component Information > Locations > Page 787 Lateral Accelerometer: Diagrams Component ID: 408 Component : SENSOR-DYNAMICS Connector: Name : SENSOR-DYNAMICS Color : # of pins : 6 Pin Circuit Description 1 F960 20PK/LG FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) 2 D465 20WT/GY DYNAMICS SENSOR HIGH DATA LINK 3 D464 20WT/OR DYNAMICS SENSOR LOW DATA LINK 4-5-6 Z608 20BK/LG GROUND Component Location - 52 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Lateral Accelerometer > Component Information > Locations > Page 788 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Lateral Accelerometer > Component Information > Locations > Page 789 Lateral Accelerometer: Description and Operation DESCRIPTION The Yaw Rate and Lateral Acceleration Sensors are housed into one unit known as the Dynamics Sensor. The sensor is used to measure side-to-side (Lateral) motion and vehicle rotational sensing (how fast the vehicle is turning - Yaw). Yaw and Lateral Acceleration Sensors cannot be serviced separately. The entire Dynamics Sensor must be replaced when necessary. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Lateral Accelerometer > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Lateral Accelerometer: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL 1. Remove the center bezel lower trim panel. 2. Remove the cup holder See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Drink Holders/Service and Repair/Removal . 3. Disconnect the electrical connector (3) for the dynamics sensor (2). 4. Remove the 3 mounting nuts (1) for the sensor (2). 5. Remove the sensor (2) from the vehicle. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Lateral Accelerometer > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 792 Lateral Accelerometer: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION 1. Install the dynamics sensor on the mounting studs (2). 2. Install the mounting nuts (1) Tighten to 24 Nm (200 in. lbs.). 3. Reconnect the electrical connector (3). 4. Install the cup holder. See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Drink Holders/Service and Repair/Installation . 5. Install the center bezel lower trim panel. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake Warning Switch > Component Information > Locations Parking Brake Warning Switch: Locations Component ID: 497 Component : SWITCH-PARKING BRAKE Connector: Name : SWITCH-PARKING BRAKE Color : GRAY # of pins : 1 Pin Circuit Description 1 B25 20DG/WT PARK BRAKE SWITCH SENSE Component Location - 31 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake Warning Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 796 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake Warning Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 797 Parking Brake Warning Switch: Diagrams Component ID: 497 Component : SWITCH-PARKING BRAKE Connector: Name : SWITCH-PARKING BRAKE Color : GRAY # of pins : 1 Pin Circuit Description 1 B25 20DG/WT PARK BRAKE SWITCH SENSE Component Location - 31 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake Warning Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 798 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake Warning Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Parking Brake Warning Switch: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The park brake switch (1) is located on the park brake lever mechanism on the cowl side inner panel below the instrument panel, to the left of the steering column. This switch includes a spade-type output terminal (3) that connects the switch to the vehicle electrical system through a dedicated take out and connector of the body wire harness. The output terminal is integral to the stationary contact within a molded plastic insulator. A locating tab on the insulator engages a slot in the park brake lever mechanism for positive switch location. External to the insulator is a movable leaf contact with an integral grounding lug (4) on one end and an integral actuating lever and follower (2) on the opposite end. The switch is secured to and grounded by a single screw to the park brake lever mechanism. The park brake switch cannot be adjusted or repaired and, if ineffective or damaged, it must be replaced. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake Warning Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 801 Parking Brake Warning Switch: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The park brake switch is a normally closed, mechanically actuated leaf contact switch that is operated by the park brake lever mechanism. The switch is grounded through its mounting to the park brake lever mechanism and provides a ground input to the ElectroMechanical Instrument Cluster (EMIC) (also known as the Cab Compartment Node/CCN) on a park brake switch sense circuit whenever the park brake is applied, and opens this circuit whenever the park brake is released. The park brake switch sense input to the EMIC is used for control of the brake indicator and may also be used as a logic input for other electronic features in the vehicle. The park brake switch as well as the hard wired inputs and outputs of the switch may be diagnosed using conventional diagnostic tools and procedures. Refer to the appropriate wiring information. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake Warning Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 802 Parking Brake Warning Switch: Testing and Inspection PARK BRAKE SWITCH WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury on vehicles equipped with airbags, disable the Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, airbag, seat belt tensioner, impact sensor, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the SRS. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment. NOTE: If the brake indicator stays ON with the ignition switch in the ON position and the park brake released, or comes ON while driving, the brake system must be diagnosed and repaired prior to performing the following tests. Refer to appropriate testing. If no brake system problem is found, the following procedures will help to locate a shorted or open park brake switch sense circuit, or an ineffective park brake switch. INDICATOR ILLUMINATES DURING BULB TEST, BUT DOES NOT WHEN PARK BRAKE APPLIED 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. Disconnect the body wire harness connector for the park brake switch from the switch terminal. Apply the parking brake. Check for continuity between the park brake switch terminal and a good ground. There should be continuity. If OK, go to STEP 2. If not OK, replace the ineffective park brake switch. 2. Disconnect the instrument panel wire harness connector (Connector C1) for the instrument cluster from the cluster connector receptacle. Check for continuity between the park brake switch sense circuit cavities of the body wire harness connector for the park brake switch and the instrument panel wire harness connector for the instrument cluster. There should be continuity. If not OK, repair the open park brake switch sense circuit between the park brake switch and the instrument cluster as required. INDICATOR REMAINS ILLUMINATED - BRAKE SYSTEM CHECKS OKAY 3. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. Disconnect the body wire harness connector for the park brake switch from the switch terminal. Check for continuity between the terminal of the park brake switch and a good ground. There should be no continuity with the park brake released, and continuity with the park brake applied. If OK, go to STEP 2. If not OK, replace the ineffective park brake switch. 4. Disconnect the instrument panel wire harness connector (Connector C1) for the instrument cluster from the cluster connector receptacle. Check for continuity between the park brake switch sense circuit cavity of the body wire harness connector for the park brake switch and a good ground. There should be no continuity. If not OK, repair the shorted park brake switch sense circuit between the park brake switch and the instrument cluster as required. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake Warning Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Parking Brake Warning Switch: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury on vehicles equipped with airbags, disable the Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, airbag, seat belt tensioner, impact sensor, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the SRS. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment. 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. 2. Apply the parking brake. 3. Reach under the left end of the instrument panel to access and disconnect the body wire harness connector (2) from the terminal of the park brake switch (4) located on the park brake lever mechanism (1) on the left cowl side inner panel. 4. Remove the screw (3) that secures the park brake switch to the park brake lever mechanism. 5. Remove the switch from the park brake lever mechanism. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake Warning Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 805 Parking Brake Warning Switch: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury on vehicles equipped with airbags, disable the Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, airbag, seat belt tensioner, impact sensor, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the SRS. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment. 1. Reach under the left end of the instrument panel to position the park brake switch (4) onto the park brake lever mechanism (1) on the left cowl side inner panel. Be certain to engage the locating pin on the back of the switch insulator into the locating slot in the lever mechanism bracket. 2. Install and tighten the screw (3) that secures the park brake switch to the park brake lever mechanism. Tighten the screw to 3 Nm (24 in. lbs.). 3. Reconnect the body wire harness connector (2) to the terminal of the park brake switch. 4. Reconnect the battery negative cable. 5. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position and check for proper brake indicator operation with the parking brake applied, then release the parking brake and check that the brake indicator extinguishes. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Steering Angle Sensor, Traction Control > Component Information > Locations Steering Angle Sensor: Locations Component ID: 440 Component : SENSOR-STEERING ANGLE Connector: Name : SENSOR-STEERING ANGLE Color : BLACK # of pins : 4 Pin Circuit Description 1 D65 20WT/LG CAN C BUS (+) 2 Z455 20BK/PK GROUND 3 D64 20WT/LB CAN C BUS (-) 4 F202 20PK/GY FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) Component Location - 42 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Steering Angle Sensor, Traction Control > Component Information > Locations > Page 809 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Steering Angle Sensor, Traction Control > Component Information > Locations > Page 810 Steering Angle Sensor: Diagrams Component ID: 440 Component : SENSOR-STEERING ANGLE Connector: Name : SENSOR-STEERING ANGLE Color : BLACK # of pins : 4 Pin Circuit Description 1 D65 20WT/LG CAN C BUS (+) 2 Z455 20BK/PK GROUND 3 D64 20WT/LB CAN C BUS (-) 4 F202 20PK/GY FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) Component Location - 42 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Steering Angle Sensor, Traction Control > Component Information > Locations > Page 811 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Traction Control Switch > Component Information > Locations Traction Control Switch: Locations Component ID: 486 Component : SWITCH-ESP Connector: Name : SWITCH-ESP Color : # of pins : 6 Pin Circuit Description 1 Z936 20BK/DG GROUND 2 E11 20OR/DB PANEL LAMPS DRIVER 3 B46 20DG/WT ESP ON/OFF SENSE 4 G94 20VT/DB SENSOR GROUND 5-6-Component Location - 47 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Traction Control Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 815 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Traction Control Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 816 Traction Control Switch: Diagrams Component ID: 486 Component : SWITCH-ESP Connector: Name : SWITCH-ESP Color : # of pins : 6 Pin Circuit Description 1 Z936 20BK/DG GROUND 2 E11 20OR/DB PANEL LAMPS DRIVER 3 B46 20DG/WT ESP ON/OFF SENSE 4 G94 20VT/DB SENSOR GROUND 5-6-Component Location - 47 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Traction Control Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 817 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Traction Control Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 818 Traction Control Switch: Description and Operation DESCRIPTION The ESP switch is located just below the heater and air conditioner controls in the center stack area of the instrument panel. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Traction Control Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Traction Control Switch: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL 1. Remove the radio trim panel (1). 2. Disconnect the electrical connectors from the radio trim panel. 3. Remove the ESP switch (1) from the switch bank (2). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Traction Control Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 821 Traction Control Switch: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION 1. Install the new switch (1) in the switch bank (2). 2. Reconnect the electrical connectors for the radio trim panel. 3. Install the radio trim panel (1). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Wheel Speed-ABS-Left Front Wheel Speed Sensor: Locations Sensor-Wheel Speed-ABS-Left Front Component ID: 448 Component : SENSOR-WHEEL SPEED-ABS-LEFT FRONT Connector: Name : SENSOR-WHEEL SPEED-ABS-LEFT FRONT Color : # of pins : 2 Pin Circuit Description 1 B9 20DG/LG LEFT FRONT WHEEL SPEED SENSOR (+) Pin Circuit Description 1 B9 18DG/LG LEFT FRONT WHEEL SPEED SENSOR (+) 2 B8 20DG/TN LEFT FRONT WHEEL SPEED SENSOR (-) 2 B8 18DG/TN LEFT FRONT WHEEL SPEED SENSOR (-) Component Location - 38 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Wheel Speed-ABS-Left Front > Page 826 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Wheel Speed-ABS-Left Front > Page 827 Wheel Speed Sensor: Locations Sensor-Wheel Speed-ABS-Rear Component ID: 450 Component : SENSOR-WHEEL SPEED-ABS-REAR Connector: Name : SENSOR-WHEEL SPEED-ABS-REAR Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (EXCEPT ESP) Pin Circuit Description 1 B22 18DG/YL REAR WHEEL SPEED SENSOR (-) 2 B222 18DG/WT REAR WHEEL SPEED SENSOR (+) Component Location - 70 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Wheel Speed-ABS-Left Front > Page 828 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Wheel Speed-ABS-Left Front > Page 829 Wheel Speed Sensor: Locations Sensor-Wheel Speed-ABS-Left Rear Component ID: 449 Component : SENSOR-WHEEL SPEED-ABS-LEFT REAR Connector: Name : SENSOR-WHEEL SPEED-ABS-LEFT REAR Color : # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (ESP) Pin Circuit Description 1 B3 18DG/YL REAR WHEEL SPEED SENSOR (-) 2 B4 18DG/GY REAR WHEEL SPEED SENSOR (+) Component Location - 70 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Wheel Speed-ABS-Left Front > Page 830 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Wheel Speed-ABS-Left Front > Page 831 Wheel Speed Sensor: Locations Sensor-Wheel Speed-ABS-Right Front Component ID: 451 Component : SENSOR-WHEEL SPEED-ABS-RIGHT FRONT Connector: Name : SENSOR-WHEEL SPEED-ABS-RIGHT FRONT Color : # of pins : 2 Pin Circuit Description 1 B7 20DG/VT RIGHT FRONT WHEEL SPEED SENSOR (+) 2 B6 20DG/WT RIGHT FRONT WHEEL SPEED SENSOR (-) Component Location - 29 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Wheel Speed-ABS-Left Front > Page 832 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Wheel Speed-ABS-Left Front > Page 833 Wheel Speed Sensor: Locations Sensor-Wheel Speed-ABS-Right Rear Component ID: 452 Component : SENSOR-WHEEL SPEED-ABS-RIGHT REAR Connector: Name : SENSOR-WHEEL SPEED-ABS-RIGHT REAR Color : # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (ESP) Pin Circuit Description 1 B1 18DG/OR RIGHT REAR WHEEL SPEED SENSOR (-) 2 B2 18DG/LB RIGHT REAR WHEEL SPEED SENSOR (+) Component Location - 70 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Wheel Speed-ABS-Left Front > Page 834 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Wheel Speed-ABS-Left Front Wheel Speed Sensor: Diagrams Sensor-Wheel Speed-ABS-Left Front Component ID: 448 Component : SENSOR-WHEEL SPEED-ABS-LEFT FRONT Connector: Name : SENSOR-WHEEL SPEED-ABS-LEFT FRONT Color : # of pins : 2 Pin Circuit Description 1 B9 20DG/LG LEFT FRONT WHEEL SPEED SENSOR (+) Pin Circuit Description 1 B9 18DG/LG LEFT FRONT WHEEL SPEED SENSOR (+) 2 B8 20DG/TN LEFT FRONT WHEEL SPEED SENSOR (-) 2 B8 18DG/TN LEFT FRONT WHEEL SPEED SENSOR (-) Component Location - 38 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Wheel Speed-ABS-Left Front > Page 837 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Wheel Speed-ABS-Left Front > Page 838 Wheel Speed Sensor: Diagrams Sensor-Wheel Speed-ABS-Rear Component ID: 450 Component : SENSOR-WHEEL SPEED-ABS-REAR Connector: Name : SENSOR-WHEEL SPEED-ABS-REAR Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (EXCEPT ESP) Pin Circuit Description 1 B22 18DG/YL REAR WHEEL SPEED SENSOR (-) 2 B222 18DG/WT REAR WHEEL SPEED SENSOR (+) Component Location - 70 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Wheel Speed-ABS-Left Front > Page 839 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Wheel Speed-ABS-Left Front > Page 840 Wheel Speed Sensor: Diagrams Sensor-Wheel Speed-ABS-Left Rear Component ID: 449 Component : SENSOR-WHEEL SPEED-ABS-LEFT REAR Connector: Name : SENSOR-WHEEL SPEED-ABS-LEFT REAR Color : # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (ESP) Pin Circuit Description 1 B3 18DG/YL REAR WHEEL SPEED SENSOR (-) 2 B4 18DG/GY REAR WHEEL SPEED SENSOR (+) Component Location - 70 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Wheel Speed-ABS-Left Front > Page 841 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Wheel Speed-ABS-Left Front > Page 842 Wheel Speed Sensor: Diagrams Sensor-Wheel Speed-ABS-Right Front Component ID: 451 Component : SENSOR-WHEEL SPEED-ABS-RIGHT FRONT Connector: Name : SENSOR-WHEEL SPEED-ABS-RIGHT FRONT Color : # of pins : 2 Pin Circuit Description 1 B7 20DG/VT RIGHT FRONT WHEEL SPEED SENSOR (+) 2 B6 20DG/WT RIGHT FRONT WHEEL SPEED SENSOR (-) Component Location - 29 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Wheel Speed-ABS-Left Front > Page 843 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Wheel Speed-ABS-Left Front > Page 844 Wheel Speed Sensor: Diagrams Sensor-Wheel Speed-ABS-Right Rear Component ID: 452 Component : SENSOR-WHEEL SPEED-ABS-RIGHT REAR Connector: Name : SENSOR-WHEEL SPEED-ABS-RIGHT REAR Color : # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (ESP) Pin Circuit Description 1 B1 18DG/OR RIGHT REAR WHEEL SPEED SENSOR (-) 2 B2 18DG/LB RIGHT REAR WHEEL SPEED SENSOR (+) Component Location - 70 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Wheel Speed-ABS-Left Front > Page 845 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Wheel Speed Sensor: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The ABS brake system uses 3 wheel speed sensors. A sensor is mounted to each front hub/bearings. The third sensor is mounted on top of the rear axle differential housing. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 848 Wheel Speed Sensor: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The Wheel Speed Sensor consists of a magnet (1) surrounded by windings from a single strand of wire (5). The sensor sends a small AC signal to the ABM. This signal is generated by magnetic induction. The magnetic induction is created when a toothed sensor ring (exciter ring or tone wheel) (4) passes the stationary magnetic WSS. When the ring gear is rotated, the exciter ring (4) passes the tip of the WSS. As the exciter ring tooth approaches the tip of the WSS, the magnetic lines of force expand, causing the magnetic field to cut across the sensor's windings (5). This, in turn causes current to flow through the WSS circuit in one direction. When the exciter ring tooth moves away from the sensor tip, the magnetic lines of force collapse cutting the winding in the opposite direction. This causes the current to flow in the opposite direction. Every time a tooth of the exciter ring passes the tip of the WSS, an AC signal is generated current. Each AC signal (positive to negative signal or squarewave) is interpreted by the ABM. It then compares the frequency of the sinewave to a time value to calculate vehicle speed. The ABM continues to monitor the frequency to determine a deceleration rate that would indicate a possible wheel-locking tendency. The signal strength of any magnetic induction sensor is directly affected by: - Magnetic field strength; the stronger the magnetic field, the stronger the signal - Number of windings in the sensor; more windings provide a stronger signal - Exciter ring speed; the faster the exciter ring/tone wheel rotates, the stronger the signal will be - Distance (3) "air gap" between the exciter ring teeth and WSS; the closer the WSS is to the exciter ring/tone wheel, the stronger the signal will be. The WSS is not adjustable. A clearance specification has been established for manufacturing tolerances. If the clearance is not within these specifications, then either the WSS or other components may be damaged. The clearance between the WSS and the exciter ring is 0.005 0.050 in. The assembly plant performs a "Rolls Test" on every vehicle that leaves the assembly plant. One of the test performed is a test of the WSS. To properly test the sensor, the assembly plant connects test equipment to the Data Link Connector (DLC). This connector is located to the right of the steering column and attached to the lower portion of the instrument panel. The rolls test terminal is spliced to the WSS circuit. The vehicle is then driven on a set of rollers and the WSS output is monitored for proper operation. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 849 Wheel Speed Sensor: Testing and Inspection REAR WHEEL ANTILOCK Diagnosis of base brake conditions which are mechanical in nature should be performed first. This includes brake noise, lack of power assist, parking brake, or vehicle vibration during normal braking. The RWAL brake system performs several self-tests every time the ignition switch is turned on and the vehicle is driven. The CAB monitors the system inputs and outputs circuits to verify the system is operating properly. If the CAB senses a malfunction in the system it will set a DTC into memory and trigger the warning lamp. NOTE: A scan tool is used to diagnose the RWAL system. For test procedures refer to the ABS Electrical Diagnostic Section. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Wheel Speed Sensor - Removal Wheel Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Front Wheel Speed Sensor - Removal Removal REMOVAL 1. Remove the front rotor See: Brakes and Traction Control/Disc Brake System/Brake Rotor/Disc/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Brake Rotor - Removal . 2. Remove the wheel speed sensor mounting bolt (1) from the hub (3). 3. Remove the wheel speed sensor (2) from the hub (3). 4. Remove the wiring from the clips and disconnect the electrical connector. 4500 & 5500 4500 & 5500 1. Remove the front rotor See: Brakes and Traction Control/Disc Brake System/Brake Rotor/Disc/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Brake Rotor - Removal . 2. Remove the wheel speed sensor mounting bolt (1) from the hub. 3. Remove the wheel speed sensor (2) from the hub. 4. Remove the wiring from the clips and disconnect the electrical connector. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Wheel Speed Sensor - Removal > Page 852 Wheel Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Front Wheel Speed Sensor - Installation Installation INSTALLATION 1. Install the wiring to the clips and Reconnect the electrical connector. 2. Install the wheel speed sensor (2) to the hub (3). 3. Install the wheel speed sensor mounting bolt (1) to the hub (3). Tighten the bolt to 21 Nm (190 in. lbs.). 4. Install the front rotor and brake caliper assembly See: Brakes and Traction Control/Disc Brake System/Brake Rotor/Disc/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Brake Rotor - Installation . 4500 & 5500 4500 & 5500 1. Install the wiring to the clips and Reconnect the electrical connector. 2. Install the wheel speed sensor (2) to the hub. 3. Install the wheel speed sensor mounting bolt (1) to the hub. Tighten the bolt to 13 Nm (110 in. lbs.). 4. Install the front rotor and brake caliper assembly See: Brakes and Traction Control/Disc Brake System/Brake Rotor/Disc/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Brake Rotor - Installation . Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Wheel Speed Sensor - Removal > Page 853 Wheel Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Rear Wheel Speed Sensor - Removal RWAL REAR WHEEL SPEED SENSOR (RWAL) 1. Raise the vehicle on a hoist. 2. Remove the brake line mounting nut and remove the brake line from the sensor stud. 3. Remove the mounting stud (2) from the sensor and shield. 4. Remove the sensor (1) and shield from the differential housing (3). 5. Disconnect the sensor wire harness and remove the sensor (1). ESP REAR WHEEL SPEED SENSOR (ESP) 1. Raise the vehicle on a hoist. 2. Disconnect the wheel speed sensor electrical connector (3). 3. Remove the mounting bolt (1) from the sensor (4). 4. Remove the sensor (4) from the brake caliper adapter (2). 4500 & 5500 REAR WHEEL SPEED SENSOR - 4500 & 5500 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Wheel Speed Sensor - Removal > Page 854 1. Raise the vehicle on a hoist. 2. Disconnect the sensor wire harness (1). 3. Remove the mounting bolt (3). 4. Remove the sensor (4) from the differential housing. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Wheel Speed Sensor - Removal > Page 855 Wheel Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Rear Wheel Speed Sensor - Installation RWAL REAR WHEEL SPEED SENSOR (RWAL) 1. Connect the harness to the sensor. Be sure the seal is securely in place between the sensor and the wiring connector. 2. Install the O-ring on the sensor (if removed). 3. Insert the sensor (1) in the differential housing (3). 4. Install the sensor shield. 5. Install the sensor mounting stud (2) and tighten to 24 Nm (200 in. lbs.). 6. Install the brake line on the sensor stud (2)and install the nut. 7. Lower the vehicle. ESP REAR WHEEL SPEED SENSOR (ESP) 1. Insert the wheel speed sensor (4) in the brake caliper adapter (2). 2. Install the sensor mounting bolt (1) and tighten to 24 Nm (200 in. lbs.). 3. Reconnect the electrical wiring connector (3) to the sensor (4). 4. Lower the vehicle. 4500 & 5500 REAR WHEEL SPEED SENSOR - 4500 & 5500 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Wheel Speed Sensor - Removal > Page 856 1. Install the O-ring on the sensor (if removed). 2. Insert the sensor (4) in the differential housing. 3. Install the sensor mounting bolt (3) and tighten to 24 Nm (200 in. lbs.). 4. Connect the harness (1) to the sensor (4). Be sure the seal is securely in place between the sensor and the wiring connector. 5. Lower the vehicle. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Yaw Rate Sensor > Component Information > Locations Yaw Rate Sensor: Locations Component ID: 408 Component : SENSOR-DYNAMICS Connector: Name : SENSOR-DYNAMICS Color : # of pins : 6 Pin Circuit Description 1 F960 20PK/LG FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) 2 D465 20WT/GY DYNAMICS SENSOR HIGH DATA LINK 3 D464 20WT/OR DYNAMICS SENSOR LOW DATA LINK 4-5-6 Z608 20BK/LG GROUND Component Location - 52 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Yaw Rate Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 860 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Yaw Rate Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 861 Yaw Rate Sensor: Diagrams Component ID: 408 Component : SENSOR-DYNAMICS Connector: Name : SENSOR-DYNAMICS Color : # of pins : 6 Pin Circuit Description 1 F960 20PK/LG FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) 2 D465 20WT/GY DYNAMICS SENSOR HIGH DATA LINK 3 D464 20WT/OR DYNAMICS SENSOR LOW DATA LINK 4-5-6 Z608 20BK/LG GROUND Component Location - 52 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Yaw Rate Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 862 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Yaw Rate Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 863 Yaw Rate Sensor: Description and Operation DESCRIPTION The Yaw Rate and Lateral Acceleration Sensors are housed into one unit known as the Dynamics Sensor. The sensor is used to measure side-to-side (Lateral) motion and vehicle rotational sensing (how fast the vehicle is turning - Yaw). Yaw and Lateral Acceleration Sensors cannot be serviced separately. The entire Dynamics Sensor must be replaced when necessary. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Yaw Rate Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Yaw Rate Sensor: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL 1. Remove the center bezel lower trim panel. 2. Remove the cup holder See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Drink Holders/Service and Repair/Removal . 3. Disconnect the electrical connector (3) for the dynamics sensor (2). 4. Remove the 3 mounting nuts (1) for the sensor (2). 5. Remove the sensor (2) from the vehicle. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Yaw Rate Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 866 Yaw Rate Sensor: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION 1. Install the dynamics sensor on the mounting studs (2). 2. Install the mounting nuts (1) Tighten to 24 Nm (200 in. lbs.). 3. Reconnect the electrical connector (3). 4. Install the cup holder. See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Drink Holders/Service and Repair/Installation . 5. Install the center bezel lower trim panel. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Locations Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Locations Component ID: 410 Component : SENSOR-ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE Connector: Name : SENSOR-ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (DIESEL) A K200 18BR/YL SENSOR GROUND A K914 18BK/WT SENSOR GROUND B K2 18VT/OR ECT SIGNAL Component Location - 8 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Locations > Page 872 Component Location - 11 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Locations > Page 873 Component Location - 13 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Locations > Page 874 Connector: Name : SENSOR-ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (GAS) Pin Circuit Description 1 K2 20VT/OR ECT SIGNAL 2 K900 20DB/DG SENSOR GROUND Component Location - 8 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Locations > Page 875 Component Location - 11 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Locations > Page 876 Component Location - 13 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Locations > Page 877 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Locations > Page 878 Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Diagrams Component ID: 410 Component : SENSOR-ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE Connector: Name : SENSOR-ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (DIESEL) A K200 18BR/YL SENSOR GROUND A K914 18BK/WT SENSOR GROUND B K2 18VT/OR ECT SIGNAL Component Location - 8 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Locations > Page 879 Component Location - 11 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Locations > Page 880 Component Location - 13 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Locations > Page 881 Connector: Name : SENSOR-ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (GAS) Pin Circuit Description 1 K2 20VT/OR ECT SIGNAL 2 K900 20DB/DG SENSOR GROUND Component Location - 8 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Locations > Page 882 Component Location - 11 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Locations > Page 883 Component Location - 13 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Locations > Page 884 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cruise Control > Cruise Control Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Switch-Speed Control-Left Cruise Control Switch: Diagrams Switch-Speed Control-Left Component ID: 509 Component : SWITCH-SPEED CONTROL-LEFT Connector: Name : SWITCH-SPEED CONTROL-LEFT Color : BLACK # of pins : 3 A V38 22VT/OR S/C SWITCH NO. 2 SIGNAL B V937 22DB/DG S/C SWITCH RETURN C V37 22VT S/C SWITCH NO. 1 SIGNAL Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cruise Control > Cruise Control Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Switch-Speed Control-Left > Page 890 Cruise Control Switch: Diagrams Switch-Speed Control-Right Component ID: 510 Component : SWITCH-SPEED CONTROL-RIGHT Connector: Name : SWITCH-SPEED CONTROL-RIGHT Color : BLACK # of pins : 3 A V38 22VT/OR S/C SWITCH NO. 2 SIGNAL B V937 22DB/DG S/C SWITCH RETURN C V37 22VT S/C SWITCH NO. 1 SIGNAL Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cruise Control > Cruise Control Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Cruise Control Switch: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL Depending on engine control computer (JTEC having a 3-plug connector or 5.7L V-8 NGC having a 4-plug connector), 2 types of switches are used. Both types of switches are internally and externally different. The switches used with the NGC system have attached pigtail leads. The switch used with the JTEC system does not have an attached pigtail lead. 1. Remove switch mounting screw (2). 2. Pull switch (2) from steering wheel. 3. Unplug electrical connector from switch, or, if equipped, switch pigtail wire harness from steering wheel wire harness (4) and remove switch. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cruise Control > Cruise Control Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 893 Cruise Control Switch: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION 1. Plug electrical connector into switch, or, if equipped, connect pigtail wire harness to steering wheel wire harness. Be sure wires are not pinched. 2. Position switch to steering wheel. 3. Install switch mounting screw and tighten 15 in. lbs. ( 1.7 Nm). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Engine > Oil Pressure Sender > Component Information > Locations Oil Pressure Sender: Locations Component ID: 496 Component : SWITCH-OIL PRESSURE Connector: Name : SWITCH-OIL PRESSURE Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Pin Circuit Description 1 G6 18VT/GY OIL PRESSURE SIGNAL Pin Circuit Description 1 G6 16VT/GY OIL PRESSURE SIGNAL 2-Component Location - 8 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Engine > Oil Pressure Sender > Component Information > Locations > Page 898 Component Location - 11 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Engine > Oil Pressure Sender > Component Information > Locations > Page 899 Component Location - 12 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Engine > Oil Pressure Sender > Component Information > Locations > Page 900 Component Location - 14 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Engine > Oil Pressure Sender > Component Information > Locations > Page 901 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Engine > Oil Pressure Sender > Component Information > Locations > Page 902 Oil Pressure Sender: Diagrams Component ID: 496 Component : SWITCH-OIL PRESSURE Connector: Name : SWITCH-OIL PRESSURE Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Pin Circuit Description 1 G6 18VT/GY OIL PRESSURE SIGNAL Pin Circuit Description 1 G6 16VT/GY OIL PRESSURE SIGNAL 2-Component Location - 8 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Engine > Oil Pressure Sender > Component Information > Locations > Page 903 Component Location - 11 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Engine > Oil Pressure Sender > Component Information > Locations > Page 904 Component Location - 12 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Engine > Oil Pressure Sender > Component Information > Locations > Page 905 Component Location - 14 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Engine > Oil Pressure Sender > Component Information > Locations > Page 906 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Engine > Oil Pressure Sender > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Oil Pressure Sender: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The oil pressure switch is a pressure sensitive switch that is activated by the engine's oil pressure (in the main oil gallery). The switch is a two terminal device (one terminal is provided to the wiring harness and the other terminal is the switch's metal housing that screws into the engine block). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Engine > Oil Pressure Sender > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 909 Oil Pressure Sender: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The oil pressure switch is normally "Closed." The switch changes from a "Closed" circuit to an "Open" circuit, on increasing pressure of 7 PSIG. The oil pressure switch changes from an "Open" circuit to a "Closed" circuit, on decreasing pressure, between 2 PSIG and 4 PSIG. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Engine > Oil Pressure Sender > Component Information > Service and Repair > Engine Oil Pressure Sensor/Switch - Installation Oil Pressure Sender: Service and Repair Engine Oil Pressure Sensor/Switch - Installation INSTALLATION 1. Install oil pressure sender. 2. Connect oil pressure sender wire. 3. Install front splash shield. 4. Lower vehicle. 5. Connect the negative battery cable. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Engine > Oil Pressure Sender > Component Information > Service and Repair > Engine Oil Pressure Sensor/Switch - Installation > Page 912 Oil Pressure Sender: Service and Repair Engine Oil Pressure Sensor/Switch - Removal REMOVAL 1. Disconnect the negative cable from the battery. 2. Raise vehicle on hoist. 3. Remove front splash shield. 4. Disconnect oil pressure sender wire (4). 5. Remove the pressure sender (2). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 398 Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC: Locations Component ID 398 Component ID: 398 Component : SENSOR-AMBIENT AIR TEMPERATURE Connector: Name : SENSOR-AMBIENT AIR TEMPERATURE Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Pin Circuit Description 1 G31 20VT/LG AAT SIGNAL 2 G930 20VT/TN AAT RETURN Component Location - 30 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 398 > Page 918 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 398 > Page 919 Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC: Locations Component ID 402 Component ID: 402 Component : SENSOR-AMBIENT AIR TEMPERATURE Connector: Name : SENSOR-AMBIENT AIR TEMPERATURE Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Pin Circuit Description 1 G31 20VT/LG AAT SIGNAL 2 G930 20VT/TN AAT RETURN Component Location - 30 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 398 > Page 920 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Component ID 398 Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC: Diagrams Component ID 398 Component ID: 398 Component : SENSOR-AMBIENT AIR TEMPERATURE Connector: Name : SENSOR-AMBIENT AIR TEMPERATURE Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Pin Circuit Description 1 G31 20VT/LG AAT SIGNAL 2 G930 20VT/TN AAT RETURN Component Location - 30 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Component ID 398 > Page 923 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Component ID 398 > Page 924 Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC: Diagrams Component ID 402 Component ID: 402 Component : SENSOR-AMBIENT AIR TEMPERATURE Connector: Name : SENSOR-AMBIENT AIR TEMPERATURE Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Pin Circuit Description 1 G31 20VT/LG AAT SIGNAL 2 G930 20VT/TN AAT RETURN Component Location - 30 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Component ID 398 > Page 925 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Locations Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch: Locations Component ID: 411 Component : SENSOR-EVAPORATOR TEMPERATURE Connector: Name : SENSOR-EVAPORATOR TEMPERATURE Color : NATURAL # of pins : 2 Pin Circuit Description 1 C121 20DB/DG SENSOR GROUND 2 C21 20DB/LG EVAPORATOR TEMPERATURE SENSOR SIGNAL Component Location - 40 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 929 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 930 Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch: Diagrams Component ID: 411 Component : SENSOR-EVAPORATOR TEMPERATURE Connector: Name : SENSOR-EVAPORATOR TEMPERATURE Color : NATURAL # of pins : 2 Pin Circuit Description 1 C121 20DB/DG SENSOR GROUND 2 C21 20DB/LG EVAPORATOR TEMPERATURE SENSOR SIGNAL Component Location - 40 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 931 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION NOTE: Cutaway of HVAC housing shown for clarity. The evaporator temperature sensor (1) is an electrical thermistor located within a molded plastic case that is inserted into the top of the HVAC housing (2) to measure the temperature of the conditioned air downstream of the A/C evaporator (3). Two terminals within the connector receptacle connect the sensor to the vehicle electrical system through a wire lead and connector of the HVAC wire harness. The external location of the evaporator temperature sensor allows the sensor to be removed or installed without disturbing the refrigerant in the A/C system. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 934 Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The evaporator temperature sensor monitors the temperature of the conditioned air downstream of the A/C evaporator and supplies an input signal to the A/C-heater control. The A/C-heater control uses the evaporator temperature sensor input signal to optimize A/C system performance and to protect the A/C system from evaporator freezing. The evaporator temperature sensor will change its internal resistance in response to the temperatures it monitors and is connected to the A/C-heater control through sensor ground circuit and a 5-volt reference signal circuit. As the temperature of the A/C evaporator decreases, the internal resistance of the evaporator temperature sensor decreases. The A/C-heater control uses the monitored voltage reading as an indication of evaporator temperature. The A/C-heater control is programmed to respond to this input by requesting the powertrain control module (PCM) or the engine control module (ECM) (depending on engine application) to cycle the A/C compressor clutch as necessary to optimize A/C system performance and to protect the A/C system from evaporator freezing. The evaporator temperature sensor is diagnosed using a scan tool See: Heating and Air Conditioning/Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/Heating-A/C System Diagnostics . The evaporator temperature sensor cannot be adjusted or repaired and must be replaced if found inoperative or damaged. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL NOTE: Illustration shown with instrument panel removed for clarity. 1. Disconnect and isolate the negative battery cable. 2. Remove the glove box from the instrument panel See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Glove Compartment/Service and Repair/Instrument Panel Glove Box - Removal . 3. Disconnect the HVAC wire harness (1) from the evaporator temperature sensor (2) located on the top of the HVAC housing (3). 4. Remove the evaporator temperature sensor from the HVAC housing by pulling the sensor upward while tipping it forward. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 937 Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION NOTE: Illustration shown with instrument panel removed for clarity. 1. Install the evaporator temperature sensor (2) into the opening in the top of the HVAC housing (3). Make sure the sensor is fully engage to the housing. 2. Connect the HVAC wire harness (1) to the evaporator temperature sensor. 3. Install the glove box See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Glove Compartment/Service and Repair/Instrument Panel Glove Box Installation . 4. Reconnect the negative battery cable. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch, HVAC > Component Information > Locations Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch: Locations Component ID: 520 Component : TRANSDUCER-A/C PRESSURE Connector: Name : TRANSDUCER-A/C PRESSURE Color : BLACK # of pins : 4 Qualifier : (5.9L) Pin Circuit Description 1 C918 18BK/LB A/C PRESSURE GROUND 2 C818 18LB/OR A/C PRESSURE 5 VOLT SUPPLY 3 C18 18LB/BR A/C PRESSURE SIGNAL 4-Component Location - 8 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch, HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Page 941 Component Location - 9 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch, HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Page 942 Component Location - 12 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch, HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Page 943 Component Location - 16 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch, HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Page 944 Connector: Name : TRANSDUCER-A/C PRESSURE Color : GRAY # of pins : 4 Qualifier : (6.7L/GAS) Pin Circuit Description 1 C918 18BK/LB A/C PRESSURE GROUND Pin Circuit Description 1 C918 20BK/LB A/C PRESSURE GROUND Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch, HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Page 945 2 C818 18LB/OR A/C PRESSURE 5 VOLT SUPPLY 2 C818 20LB/OR A/C PRESSURE 5 VOLT SUPPLY 3 C18 18LB/BR A/C PRESSURE SIGNAL 3 C18 20LB/BR A/C PRESSURE SIGNAL 4-Component Location - 8 Component Location - 9 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch, HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Page 946 Component Location - 12 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch, HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Page 947 Component Location - 16 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch, HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Page 948 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch, HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Page 949 Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch: Diagrams Component ID: 520 Component : TRANSDUCER-A/C PRESSURE Connector: Name : TRANSDUCER-A/C PRESSURE Color : BLACK # of pins : 4 Qualifier : (5.9L) Pin Circuit Description 1 C918 18BK/LB A/C PRESSURE GROUND 2 C818 18LB/OR A/C PRESSURE 5 VOLT SUPPLY 3 C18 18LB/BR A/C PRESSURE SIGNAL 4-Component Location - 8 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch, HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Page 950 Component Location - 9 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch, HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Page 951 Component Location - 12 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch, HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Page 952 Component Location - 16 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch, HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Page 953 Connector: Name : TRANSDUCER-A/C PRESSURE Color : GRAY # of pins : 4 Qualifier : (6.7L/GAS) Pin Circuit Description 1 C918 18BK/LB A/C PRESSURE GROUND Pin Circuit Description 1 C918 20BK/LB A/C PRESSURE GROUND Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch, HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Page 954 2 C818 18LB/OR A/C PRESSURE 5 VOLT SUPPLY 2 C818 20LB/OR A/C PRESSURE 5 VOLT SUPPLY 3 C18 18LB/BR A/C PRESSURE SIGNAL 3 C18 20LB/BR A/C PRESSURE SIGNAL 4-Component Location - 8 Component Location - 9 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch, HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Page 955 Component Location - 12 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch, HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Page 956 Component Location - 16 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch, HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Page 957 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch, HVAC > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The A/C pressure transducer (1) is a switch that is installed on a fitting located on the A/C discharge line. An internally threaded fitting on the A/C pressure transducer connects it to the externally threaded Schrader-type fitting on the A/C discharge line. A rubber O-ring seals the connection between the A/C pressure transducer and the discharge line fitting. The A/C pressure transducer is connected to the vehicle electrical system by a molded plastic connector with three terminals. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch, HVAC > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 960 Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The A/C pressure transducer monitors the pressures in the high side of the refrigerant system through its connection to a fitting on the A/C discharge line and its internal resistance changes in response to the pressures it monitors. The powertrain control module (PCM) or the engine control module (ECM) (depending on engine application) provides a five volt reference signal and a sensor ground to the A/C pressure transducer, then monitors the output voltage of the transducer on a sensor return circuit to determine refrigerant pressure. The PCM/ECM is programmed to respond to this and other sensor inputs by controlling the operation of the A/C compressor clutch and the radiator cooling fan to help optimize A/C system performance and to protect the system components from damage. The PCM/ECM will disengage the A/C compressor clutch when high side pressure rises above 3172 kPa (460 psi) and re-engage the clutch when high side pressure drops below 1999 kPa (290 psi). The A/C pressure transducer will also disengage the A/C compressor clutch if the high side pressure drops below 193 kPa (28 psi) and will re-engage the clutch when the high side pressure rises above 234 kPa (34 psi). If the refrigerant pressure rises above 1655 kPa (240 psi), the PCM will actuate the cooling fan. The A/C pressure transducer signal to the PCM/ECM also prevents the A/C compressor clutch from engaging when ambient temperatures are below about 10° C (50° F) due to the pressure/temperature relationship of the refrigerant. A Schrader-type valve in the A/C discharge line fitting permits the A/C pressure transducer to be removed or installed without disturbing the refrigerant in the A/C system. The A/C pressure transducer is diagnosed using a scan tool. The A/C pressure transducer cannot be adjusted or repaired and must be replaced if found inoperative or damaged. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch, HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL NOTE: It is not necessary to discharge the refrigerant system to replace the A/C pressure transducer. NOTE: Typical A/C pressure transducer and refrigerant line shown. 1. Disconnect and isolate the negative battery cable. 2. Disconnect the wire harness connector (1) from the A/C pressure transducer (2) located on the A/C discharge line (3). 3. Remove the A/C pressure transducer from the fitting on the A/C discharge line and remove and discard the O-ring seal. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch, HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 963 Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION NOTE: Use only the specified O-ring as it is made of special material for R-134a. Use only refrigerant oil of the type required for the A/C compressor. NOTE: Typical A/C pressure transducer and refrigerant line shown. 1. Lubricate a new rubber O-ring seal (4) with clean refrigerant oil and install it onto the discharge line fitting (3). 2. Install the A/C pressure transducer (2) onto the A/C discharge line. Tighten the A/C pressure transducer to 5.1 Nm (45 in. lbs.). 3. Connect the wire harness connector (1) to the A/C pressure transducer. 4. Reconnect the negative battery cable. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Door Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Door Switch: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION This vehicle has up to four door ajar switches, one for each door. Each switch is concealed within and integral to its respective door latch unit. The switches are momentary leaf contact-type units that are actuated by the mechanisms internal to the door latch. A short pigtail wire and connector on each door latch connects the door ajar switch to the vehicle electrical system through its respective door wire harness. The door ajar switches cannot be adjusted or repaired and, if ineffective or damaged, the door latch unit must be replaced. See: Body and Frame/Doors, Hood and Trunk/Doors/Front Door/Front Door Latch/Service and Repair/Front Door Latch - Removal or See: Body and Frame/Doors, Hood and Trunk/Doors/Rear Door/Rear Door Latch/Service and Repair/Rear Door Latch - Removal . Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Door Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 969 Door Switch: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The door ajar switches are actuated by the mechanisms internal to the door latch. When a door is closed and properly latched, its door ajar switch is an open circuit. When a door is open or only partially latched, the door ajar switch is a closed circuit. The door ajar switches are hard wired in series between a body ground and the ElectroMechanical Instrument Cluster (EMIC) (also known as the Cab Compartment Node/CCN). The EMIC reads the hard wired door ajar switch inputs through internal pull-ups, then uses these inputs to control many electronic functions and features of the vehicle. The EMIC also sends the proper electronic door ajar switch status messages to other electronic modules in the vehicle over the Controller Area Network (CAN) data bus. The door ajar switches as well as the hard wired inputs and outputs of the switches may be diagnosed using conventional diagnostic tools and procedures. Refer to the appropriate wiring information. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Fuel Gauge Sender > Component Information > Locations Fuel Gauge Sender: Locations DESCRIPTION The fuel pump module assembly is located on the top of the fuel tank. The complete assembly contains the following components: - A combination fuel filter/fuel pressure regulator - A separate fuel pick-up, or inlet filter - An electric fuel pump - A lockring to retain pump module to tank - A soft gasket between tank flange and module - A fuel gauge sending unit (fuel level sensor) - Fuel line connection The fuel gauge sending unit may be serviced separately. If the electrical fuel pump, primary inlet filter, fuel filter or fuel pressure regulator require service, the fuel pump module must be replaced. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Fuel Gauge Sender > Component Information > Description and Operation > Fuel Level Sending Unit / Sensor Fuel Gauge Sender: Description and Operation Fuel Level Sending Unit / Sensor DESCRIPTION The fuel gauge sending unit (fuel level sensor) is attached to the fuel pump module. The sending unit consists of a float, an arm, and a variable resistor track (card). The sensor is non-serviceable. If replacement is necessary, the fuel pump module assembly must be replaced. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Fuel Gauge Sender > Component Information > Description and Operation > Fuel Level Sending Unit / Sensor > Page 975 Fuel Gauge Sender: Description and Operation Fuel Pump Module Description DESCRIPTION The fuel pump module assembly is located on the top of the fuel tank. The complete assembly contains the following components: - A combination fuel filter/fuel pressure regulator - A separate fuel pick-up, or inlet filter - An electric fuel pump - A lockring to retain pump module to tank - A soft gasket between tank flange and module - A fuel gauge sending unit (fuel level sensor) - Fuel line connection The fuel gauge sending unit may be serviced separately. If the electrical fuel pump, primary inlet filter, fuel filter or fuel pressure regulator require service, the fuel pump module must be replaced. Operation OPERATION Refer to Fuel Pump, Inlet Filter, Fuel Filter / Fuel Pressure Regulator and Fuel Gauge Sending Unit. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Fuel Gauge Sender > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Fuel Gauge Sender: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL WARNING: The fuel system may be under a constant pressure (even with the engine off). Before servicing the fuel pump module, the fuel system pressure must be released. 1. Drain and remove fuel tank. Refer to Fuel Tank Removal/Installation. 2. Remove plastic fuel pump module cover (1) by pushing pegs (2) outward. 3. Note rotational position of module before attempting removal. An indexing arrow is located on top of module for this purpose. 4. Position Special Tool 9340 (3) into notches on outside edge of lockring (5). 5. Install 1/2 inch drive breaker bar (1) to tool 9340 (3). 6. Rotate breaker bar counter-clockwise to remove lockring (5). 7. Remove lockring. The module will spring up slightly when lockring is removed. 8. Remove module from fuel tank. Be careful not to bend float arm while removing. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Fuel Gauge Sender > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 978 Fuel Gauge Sender: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION 1. Using a new seal (gasket), position fuel pump module into opening in fuel tank. 2. Position lockring (5) over top of fuel pump module. 3. Rotate module until embossed alignment arrow points to center alignment mark. This step must be performed to prevent float from contacting side of fuel tank. Also be sure fuel fitting on top of pump module is pointed to drivers side of vehicle. 4. Install Special Tool 9340 (3) to lockring. 5. Install 1/2 inch drive breaker (1) into Special Tool 9340 (3). 6. Tighten lockring (clockwise) until all seven notches have engaged. 7. Snap plastic fuel pump module cover (1) to pump module. 8. Install fuel tank. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Outside Temperature Display Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Outside Temperature Display Sensor: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The ambient temperature sensor is a variable resistor mounted to a bracket that is secured with a screw to the left side of the radiator yoke, behind the radiator grille and in front of the engine compartment. The ambient temperature sensor cannot be adjusted or repaired and, if inoperative or damaged, it must be replaced. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Outside Temperature Display Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 983 Outside Temperature Display Sensor: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The ambient temperature sensor is a variable resistor that operates on a five-volt reference signal sent by the Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM). The resistance in the sensor changes as temperature changes, changing the temperature sensor signal circuit voltage to the TIPM. Based upon the resistance in the sensor, the TIPM senses a specific voltage on the temperature sensor signal circuit. The TIPM then translates the voltage into a temperature reading that it sent over the Programmable Communications Interface (PCI) data bus circuit to other modules utilizing temperature information. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Outside Temperature Display Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 984 Outside Temperature Display Sensor: Testing and Inspection AMBIENT TEMPERATURE SENSOR The temperature function is supported by the ambient temperature sensor, a wiring circuit, and the Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM). When the sensor is exposed to temperatures above 60° C (140° F), or if the sensor circuit is shorted, 60° C (130/140° F) will appear in the display in place of the temperature. When the sensor is exposed to temperatures below - 40° C (- 40° F) or if the sensor circuit is open, - 40° C (- 40° F) will appear in the display for Compass Mini - Trip Computer (CMTC) equipped vehicles and - - ° C (- - ° F) will be displayed on Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) equipped vehicles. The ambient temperature sensor circuit can be diagnosed using the following Temperature System Test, and Sensor Test. If the temperature sensor and circuit are confirmed to be OK, but the temperature display is inoperative or incorrect, test the Compass Mini - Trip Computer (CMTC), See: Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators/Compass/Testing and Inspection or Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC), See: Accessories and Optional Equipment/Driver/Vehicle Information Display/Testing and Inspection as applicable. TEMPERATURE SYSTEM TEST For complete circuit diagrams, refer to the appropriate wiring information. The wiring information includes wiring diagrams, proper wire and connector repair procedures, details of wire harness routing and retention, connector pin-out information and location views for the various wire harness connectors, splices and grounds. NOTE: Temperature readings do not update immediately. Allow up to 60 seconds after the ignition switch is turned to the On position for readings to meet test specifications. 1. Turn the ignition switch to the Off position. Disconnect the wire harness connector from the ambient temperature sensor. 2. Turn the ignition switch to the On position. The CMTC display should now read - 40° C (- 40° F) or the EVIC display should now read - - ° C (- ° F). If OK, go to STEP 3. If not OK, repair the shorted sensor return circuit or ambient temperature sensor signal circuit to the ambient temperature sensor as required. 3. Turn the ignition switch to the Off position. Taking care not to damage the wire terminals, connect a jumper wire between the two terminals in the body half of the ambient temperature sensor harness connector. 4. Turn the ignition switch to the On position. The CMTC or EVIC display should now read 60° C (130/140° F). If OK, go to STEP 5. If not OK, repair the open sensor return circuit or ambient temperature sensor signal circuit to the ambient temperature sensor as required. 5. Clear any Diagnostic Trouble Codes that may have been set while performing the test. Perform further diagnosis of the Compass Mini - Trip Computer (CMTC), See: Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators/Compass/Testing and Inspection or Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC), See: Accessories and Optional Equipment/Driver/Vehicle Information Display/Testing and Inspection as applicable. SENSOR TEST 1. Turn the ignition switch to the Off position. Disconnect the ambient temperature sensor harness connector. 2. Measure the resistance of the ambient temperature sensor. At - 40° C (- 40° F), the sensor resistance is 336 Kohms. At 55° C (130° F), the sensor resistance is 2.488 Kohms. The sensor resistance should read between these two values. If OK, perform further diagnosis of the Compass Mini - Trip Computer (CMTC), See: Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators/Compass/Testing and Inspection or Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC), See: Accessories and Optional Equipment/Driver/Vehicle Information Display/Testing and Inspection as applicable. If not OK, replace the inoperative ambient temperature sensor. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Outside Temperature Display Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Outside Temperature Display Sensor: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL 1. Open the hood. 2. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. 3. Working on the underside of the hood, remove screw holding sensor to hood panel. 4. Disconnect the sensor electrical connector and remove sensor from vehicle. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Outside Temperature Display Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 987 Outside Temperature Display Sensor: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION 1. Connect the sensor electrical connector. 2. Working on the underside of the hood, install screw holding sensor to hood panel. 3. Connect the battery negative cable. 4. Close the hood. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Parking Brake Warning Switch > Component Information > Locations Parking Brake Warning Switch: Locations Component ID: 497 Component : SWITCH-PARKING BRAKE Connector: Name : SWITCH-PARKING BRAKE Color : GRAY # of pins : 1 Pin Circuit Description 1 B25 20DG/WT PARK BRAKE SWITCH SENSE Component Location - 31 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Parking Brake Warning Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 991 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Parking Brake Warning Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 992 Parking Brake Warning Switch: Diagrams Component ID: 497 Component : SWITCH-PARKING BRAKE Connector: Name : SWITCH-PARKING BRAKE Color : GRAY # of pins : 1 Pin Circuit Description 1 B25 20DG/WT PARK BRAKE SWITCH SENSE Component Location - 31 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Parking Brake Warning Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 993 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Parking Brake Warning Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Parking Brake Warning Switch: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The park brake switch (1) is located on the park brake lever mechanism on the cowl side inner panel below the instrument panel, to the left of the steering column. This switch includes a spade-type output terminal (3) that connects the switch to the vehicle electrical system through a dedicated take out and connector of the body wire harness. The output terminal is integral to the stationary contact within a molded plastic insulator. A locating tab on the insulator engages a slot in the park brake lever mechanism for positive switch location. External to the insulator is a movable leaf contact with an integral grounding lug (4) on one end and an integral actuating lever and follower (2) on the opposite end. The switch is secured to and grounded by a single screw to the park brake lever mechanism. The park brake switch cannot be adjusted or repaired and, if ineffective or damaged, it must be replaced. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Parking Brake Warning Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 996 Parking Brake Warning Switch: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The park brake switch is a normally closed, mechanically actuated leaf contact switch that is operated by the park brake lever mechanism. The switch is grounded through its mounting to the park brake lever mechanism and provides a ground input to the ElectroMechanical Instrument Cluster (EMIC) (also known as the Cab Compartment Node/CCN) on a park brake switch sense circuit whenever the park brake is applied, and opens this circuit whenever the park brake is released. The park brake switch sense input to the EMIC is used for control of the brake indicator and may also be used as a logic input for other electronic features in the vehicle. The park brake switch as well as the hard wired inputs and outputs of the switch may be diagnosed using conventional diagnostic tools and procedures. Refer to the appropriate wiring information. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Parking Brake Warning Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 997 Parking Brake Warning Switch: Testing and Inspection PARK BRAKE SWITCH WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury on vehicles equipped with airbags, disable the Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, airbag, seat belt tensioner, impact sensor, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the SRS. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment. NOTE: If the brake indicator stays ON with the ignition switch in the ON position and the park brake released, or comes ON while driving, the brake system must be diagnosed and repaired prior to performing the following tests. Refer to appropriate testing. If no brake system problem is found, the following procedures will help to locate a shorted or open park brake switch sense circuit, or an ineffective park brake switch. INDICATOR ILLUMINATES DURING BULB TEST, BUT DOES NOT WHEN PARK BRAKE APPLIED 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. Disconnect the body wire harness connector for the park brake switch from the switch terminal. Apply the parking brake. Check for continuity between the park brake switch terminal and a good ground. There should be continuity. If OK, go to STEP 2. If not OK, replace the ineffective park brake switch. 2. Disconnect the instrument panel wire harness connector (Connector C1) for the instrument cluster from the cluster connector receptacle. Check for continuity between the park brake switch sense circuit cavities of the body wire harness connector for the park brake switch and the instrument panel wire harness connector for the instrument cluster. There should be continuity. If not OK, repair the open park brake switch sense circuit between the park brake switch and the instrument cluster as required. INDICATOR REMAINS ILLUMINATED - BRAKE SYSTEM CHECKS OKAY 3. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. Disconnect the body wire harness connector for the park brake switch from the switch terminal. Check for continuity between the terminal of the park brake switch and a good ground. There should be no continuity with the park brake released, and continuity with the park brake applied. If OK, go to STEP 2. If not OK, replace the ineffective park brake switch. 4. Disconnect the instrument panel wire harness connector (Connector C1) for the instrument cluster from the cluster connector receptacle. Check for continuity between the park brake switch sense circuit cavity of the body wire harness connector for the park brake switch and a good ground. There should be no continuity. If not OK, repair the shorted park brake switch sense circuit between the park brake switch and the instrument cluster as required. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Parking Brake Warning Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Parking Brake Warning Switch: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury on vehicles equipped with airbags, disable the Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, airbag, seat belt tensioner, impact sensor, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the SRS. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment. 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. 2. Apply the parking brake. 3. Reach under the left end of the instrument panel to access and disconnect the body wire harness connector (2) from the terminal of the park brake switch (4) located on the park brake lever mechanism (1) on the left cowl side inner panel. 4. Remove the screw (3) that secures the park brake switch to the park brake lever mechanism. 5. Remove the switch from the park brake lever mechanism. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Parking Brake Warning Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 1000 Parking Brake Warning Switch: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury on vehicles equipped with airbags, disable the Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, airbag, seat belt tensioner, impact sensor, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the SRS. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment. 1. Reach under the left end of the instrument panel to position the park brake switch (4) onto the park brake lever mechanism (1) on the left cowl side inner panel. Be certain to engage the locating pin on the back of the switch insulator into the locating slot in the lever mechanism bracket. 2. Install and tighten the screw (3) that secures the park brake switch to the park brake lever mechanism. Tighten the screw to 3 Nm (24 in. lbs.). 3. Reconnect the body wire harness connector (2) to the terminal of the park brake switch. 4. Reconnect the battery negative cable. 5. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position and check for proper brake indicator operation with the parking brake applied, then release the parking brake and check that the brake indicator extinguishes. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Backup Lamp Switch > Component Information > Locations Backup Lamp Switch: Locations Component ID: 481 Component : SWITCH-BACKUP LAMP Connector: Name : SWITCH-BACKUP LAMP Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (3.7L M/T/4.7L M/T) Pin Circuit Description 1 Z965 20BK GROUND 2 L10 20WT/GY FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN) Component Location - 22 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Backup Lamp Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 1005 Component Location - 24 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Backup Lamp Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 1006 Component Location - 25 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Backup Lamp Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 1007 Connector: Name : SWITCH-BACKUP LAMP Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (M/T 5.7L HD/DIESEL M/T) Pin Circuit Description 1 Z965 20BK GROUND 2 L10 20WT/GY FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN) Component Location - 22 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Backup Lamp Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 1008 Component Location - 24 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Backup Lamp Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 1009 Component Location - 25 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Backup Lamp Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 1010 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Backup Lamp Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 1011 Backup Lamp Switch: Diagrams Component ID: 481 Component : SWITCH-BACKUP LAMP Connector: Name : SWITCH-BACKUP LAMP Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (3.7L M/T/4.7L M/T) Pin Circuit Description 1 Z965 20BK GROUND 2 L10 20WT/GY FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN) Component Location - 22 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Backup Lamp Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 1012 Component Location - 24 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Backup Lamp Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 1013 Component Location - 25 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Backup Lamp Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 1014 Connector: Name : SWITCH-BACKUP LAMP Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (M/T 5.7L HD/DIESEL M/T) Pin Circuit Description 1 Z965 20BK GROUND 2 L10 20WT/GY FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN) Component Location - 22 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Backup Lamp Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 1015 Component Location - 24 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Backup Lamp Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 1016 Component Location - 25 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Backup Lamp Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 1017 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Backup Lamp Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Backup Lamp Switch: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION Vehicles equipped with a manual transmission have a normally open, spring-loaded plunger type backup lamp switch (2). Vehicles with an optional electronic automatic transmission have a Transmission Range Sensor (TRS) that is used to perform several functions, including that of the backup lamp switch. The TRS is described in further detail elsewhere in this service information. Refer to the service and diagnostic information for the automatic transmission type installed in the vehicle. The backup lamp switch is located in a threaded hole on the side of the manual transmission housing. The switch has a threaded body and a hex formation near the plunger end of the switch. An integral connector receptacle at the end of the switch opposite the plunger connects the switch to the vehicle electrical system through a take out and connector of the engine wire harness. When installed, only the switch connector and the hex formation are visible on the outside of the transmission housing. The backup lamp switch cannot be adjusted or repaired and, if ineffective or damaged, the entire switch unit must be replaced. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Backup Lamp Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 1020 Backup Lamp Switch: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The backup lamp switch controls the flow of battery voltage to the backup lamp bulbs through an output on the backup lamp feed circuit. The switch plunger is mechanically actuated by the gearshift mechanism within the transmission, which will depress the switch plunger and close the switch contacts whenever the REVERSE gear has been selected. The switch receives battery voltage through a fuse in the Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) on a fused ignition switch output (run) circuit whenever the ignition switch is in the ON position. The backup lamp switch as well as the hard wired inputs and outputs of the switch may be diagnosed using conventional diagnostic tools and procedures. Refer to the appropriate wiring information. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Backup Lamp Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 1021 Backup Lamp Switch: Testing and Inspection BACKUP LAMP SWITCH 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. 2. Raise and support the vehicle. 3. Locate and disconnect the engine wire harness connector for the backup lamp switch. 4. Check for continuity between the two terminal pins in the backup lamp switch connector receptacle. a. With the gear selector lever in the REVERSE position, there should be continuity. b. With the gear selector lever in any position other than REVERSE, there should be no continuity. 5. If the switch fails either of these two continuity tests, replace the ineffective backup lamp switch. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Brake Light Switch > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 478 Brake Light Switch: Locations Component ID 478 Component ID: 478 Component : SWITCH-STOPLAMP Connector: Name : SWITCH-STOPLAMP Color : BLACK # of pins : 6 Pin Circuit Description 1 A103 18GY/RD FUSED B(+) 2 L50 18WT/TN BRAKE LAMP SWITCH OUTPUT 3 V30 20VT/WT S/C BRAKE SWITCH OUTPUT 4 V32 20VT/YL BRAKE SWITCH NO. 2 SIGNAL 5 Z429 20BK/OR GROUND 6 B29 20DG/WT BRAKE SWITCH NO. 1 SIGNAL Component Location - 41 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Brake Light Switch > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 478 > Page 1026 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Brake Light Switch > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 478 > Page 1027 Brake Light Switch: Locations Component ID 511 Component ID: 511 Component : SWITCH-STOPLAMP Connector: Name : SWITCH-STOPLAMP Color : BLACK # of pins : 6 Pin Circuit Description 1 A103 18GY/RD FUSED B(+) 2 L50 18WT/TN BRAKE LAMP SWITCH OUTPUT 3 V30 20VT/WT S/C BRAKE SWITCH OUTPUT 4 V32 20VT/YL BRAKE SWITCH NO. 2 SIGNAL 5 Z429 20BK/OR GROUND 6 B29 20DG/WT BRAKE SWITCH NO. 1 SIGNAL Component Location - 41 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Brake Light Switch > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 478 > Page 1028 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Brake Light Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Component ID 478 Brake Light Switch: Diagrams Component ID 478 Component ID: 478 Component : SWITCH-STOPLAMP Connector: Name : SWITCH-STOPLAMP Color : BLACK # of pins : 6 Pin Circuit Description 1 A103 18GY/RD FUSED B(+) 2 L50 18WT/TN BRAKE LAMP SWITCH OUTPUT 3 V30 20VT/WT S/C BRAKE SWITCH OUTPUT 4 V32 20VT/YL BRAKE SWITCH NO. 2 SIGNAL 5 Z429 20BK/OR GROUND 6 B29 20DG/WT BRAKE SWITCH NO. 1 SIGNAL Component Location - 41 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Brake Light Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Component ID 478 > Page 1031 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Brake Light Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Component ID 478 > Page 1032 Brake Light Switch: Diagrams Component ID 511 Component ID: 511 Component : SWITCH-STOPLAMP Connector: Name : SWITCH-STOPLAMP Color : BLACK # of pins : 6 Pin Circuit Description 1 A103 18GY/RD FUSED B(+) 2 L50 18WT/TN BRAKE LAMP SWITCH OUTPUT 3 V30 20VT/WT S/C BRAKE SWITCH OUTPUT 4 V32 20VT/YL BRAKE SWITCH NO. 2 SIGNAL 5 Z429 20BK/OR GROUND 6 B29 20DG/WT BRAKE SWITCH NO. 1 SIGNAL Component Location - 41 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Brake Light Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Component ID 478 > Page 1033 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Brake Light Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Brake Light Switch: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The brake lamp switch (2) is a three circuit, spring-loaded plunger actuated switch that is secured to the steering column support bracket under the instrument panel on the driver side of the vehicle. The molded plastic switch housing has an integral connector receptacle (1) containing six terminal pins and featuring a Connector Position Assurance (CPA) lock. The switch is connected to the vehicle electrical system through a dedicated take out of the instrument panel wire harness. The switch plunger (3) extends through a mounting collar (4) on one end of the switch housing. The plunger has a one time telescoping self-adjustment feature that is activated after the switch is installed by moving an adjustment release lever (5) on the opposite end of the switch housing clockwise, until it locks into a position that is horizontal and parallel to the connector receptacle. An installed brake lamp switch cannot be readjusted or repaired. If the switch is damaged, ineffective, or removed from its mounting position for any reason, it must be replaced with a new unit. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Brake Light Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 1036 Brake Light Switch: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The brake lamp switch controls three independent circuits. These circuits are described as follows: - Brake Lamp Switch Circuit - A normally open brake lamp switch circuit receives a battery voltage input, and supplies this battery voltage to the brake lamps and the Controller Antilock Brake (CAB) on a brake lamp switch output circuit only when the brake pedal is depressed (brake lamp switch plunger released). - Brake Lamp Switch Signal Circuit - A normally closed brake lamp switch signal circuit receives a direct path to ground, and supplies this ground input to the Powertrain Control Module (PCM) on a brake lamp switch sense circuit only when the brake pedal is released (brake lamp switch plunger is depressed). - Speed Control Circuit - A normally closed speed control circuit receives a battery voltage input from the Powertrain Control Module on a speed control supply circuit, and supplies this battery voltage to the speed control servo solenoids (dump, vacuum, and vent) on a speed control brake switch output circuit only when the speed control system is turned ON and the brake pedal is released (brake lamp switch plunger is depressed). The components of the self-adjusting brake switch plunger consist of a two-piece telescoping plunger, a split plunger locking collar, and a release wedge. The release lever has a shaft with a wedge that spreads the plunger locking collar to an open or released position. After the switch is installed and the brake pedal is released, the plunger telescopes to the correct adjustment position. When the release lever is moved to the release position, the wedge is disengaged from the locking collar causing the collar to apply a clamping pressure to the two plunger halves, fixing the plunger length. The brake lamp switch as well as the hard wired inputs and outputs of the switch may be diagnosed using conventional diagnostic tools and procedures. Refer to the appropriate wiring information. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Brake Light Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 1037 Brake Light Switch: Testing and Inspection BRAKE LAMP SWITCH WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury on vehicles equipped with airbags, disable the Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, airbag, seat belt tensioner, impact sensor, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the SRS. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment. 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. CAUTION: Do not remove the brake lamp switch from the mounting bracket. The self-adjusting switch plunger is a one time only feature. If the switch is removed from the mounting bracket, it MUST be replaced with a new switch. 2. Disconnect the wire harness connector from the brake lamp switch. 3. Using an ohmmeter, perform the continuity tests at the terminal pins (1) in the brake lamp switch connector receptacle as shown in the Brake Lamp Switch Tests table. 4. If the switch fails any of the continuity tests, replace the ineffective brake lamp switch as required. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Brake Light Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Brake Light Switch: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury on vehicles equipped with airbags, disable the Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, airbag, seat belt tensioner, impact sensor, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the SRS. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment. 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. 2. Locate the brake lamp switch (2) near the support bracket on the lower steering column (1). 3. Disconnect the wire harness connector (3) from the brake lamp switch. 4. Rotate the brake lamp switch housing clockwise about 30 degrees to align the tabs on the switch locking collar with the keyed hole in the switch mounting bracket. 5. Pull the switch straight back from the keyed hole to remove it from the bracket. CAUTION: The brake lamp switch self-adjusting switch plunger is a one time only feature. If the switch is removed from the mounting bracket, it MUST be replaced with a new switch. 6. Discard the removed brake lamp switch. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Brake Light Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 1040 Brake Light Switch: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury on vehicles equipped with airbags, disable the Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, airbag, seat belt tensioner, impact sensor, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the SRS. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment. CAUTION: The brake lamp switch self-adjusting switch plunger is a one time only feature. If the switch is removed from the mounting bracket, it MUST be replaced with a new switch. 1. Depress and hold the brake pedal in the depressed position. 2. Align the tabs on the brake lamp switch locking collar with the keyed hole in the switch mounting bracket on the lower steering column (1). 3. Insert the tabs on the brake lamp switch locking collar through the keyed hole in the switch mounting bracket until the switch housing (2) is firmly seated against the bracket. 4. Rotate the switch housing counterclockwise about 30 degrees to engage the tabs on the locking collar with the switch mounting bracket. CAUTION: Do not release or pull up on the brake pedal before the switch plunger adjustment has been completed. 5. Release the brake pedal, but do not pull it upward. 6. Rotate the plunger adjustment release lever (4) clockwise until it locks into place. The lever should be parallel to the brake lamp switch connector receptacle. This action will set the switch plunger length to a final adjustment position and cannot be undone. If not performed properly the first time, a new brake lamp switch must be installed. 7. Reconnect the wire harness connector (3) to the brake lamp switch. 8. Reconnect the battery negative cable. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Combination Switch > Component Information > Locations Combination Switch: Locations Component ID: 495 Component : SWITCH-MULTIFUNCTION Connector: Name : SWITCH-MULTIFUNCTION Color : BLACK # of pins : 4 Pin Circuit Description 1 G194 20VT/LG WASH/BEAM SELECT SWITCH SIGNAL 2 L900 20WT/YL WIPER/TURN/BEAM SELECT SWITCH RETURN 3 L12 20WT/OR TURN LAMPS SWITCH SIGNAL 4 W52 20BR/YL INTERMITTENT WIPER SWITCH SIGNAL Component Location - 47 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Combination Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 1044 Component Location - 42 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Combination Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 1045 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Combination Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 1046 Combination Switch: Diagrams Component ID: 495 Component : SWITCH-MULTIFUNCTION Connector: Name : SWITCH-MULTIFUNCTION Color : BLACK # of pins : 4 Pin Circuit Description 1 G194 20VT/LG WASH/BEAM SELECT SWITCH SIGNAL 2 L900 20WT/YL WIPER/TURN/BEAM SELECT SWITCH RETURN 3 L12 20WT/OR TURN LAMPS SWITCH SIGNAL 4 W52 20BR/YL INTERMITTENT WIPER SWITCH SIGNAL Component Location - 47 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Combination Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 1047 Component Location - 42 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Combination Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 1048 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Combination Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Combination Switch: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The multi-function switch (3) is located on the steering column, just below the steering wheel. The only visible components of the multi-function switch are the control stalk (2) and control knob (1) that extend through the steering column shrouds on the left side of the column, and the hazard warning push button (4) that extends through the shroud on the top of the column. The remainder of the switch including its mounting provisions, its electrical connection, and the turn signal cancel actuator (5) are concealed beneath the shrouds. The switch housing and controls are constructed of molded black plastic. Each of the switch controls has white International Control and Display Symbol graphics applied to it, which clearly identify its many functions. Three integral locating posts on the switch housing, one on the top and two on the bottom, slide into channels in a receptacle on the left side of the multi-function switch mounting housing near the top of the steering column to ensure proper positioning of the switch. Then two screws secure the switch to the mounting housing. A single integral connector receptacle containing four terminal pins on the back of the switch housing connects the switch to the vehicle electrical system through a dedicated take out and connector of the instrument panel wire harness. The multi-function switch provides the vehicle operator with a control interface for the following functions: - Hazard Warning Control - The multi-function switch hazard warning push button provides two detent positions (ON and OFF) to control the hazard warning lamps. Headlamp Beam Selection - The multi-function switch control stalk provides detent switching for selection of the headlamp HIGH or LOW beams. There is also an intermediate momentary position that allows the headlamp high beam circuits to be momentarily flashed to provide an optical horn feature (sometimes referred to as flash-to-pass) as an optical signalling device. - Turn Signal Control - The multi-function switch control stalk provides momentary non-detent (lane change) switching or detent switching with automatic cancellation for both the left and right turn signal lamps. - Washer Control - The multi-function switch control knob provides a momentary WASH position for washer system operation. - Wiper Control - The multi-function switch control knob provides two continuous wipe switch positions, LOW speed or HIGH speed; and an intermittent wipe mode with five delay interval positions. The multi-function switch cannot be adjusted or repaired. If any function of the switch is ineffective, or if the switch is damaged, the entire switch must be replaced as a unit. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Combination Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 1051 Combination Switch: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The multi-function switch uses resistor multiplexing to control the many functions and features it provides using only three hard wired output circuits. The switch receives a clean ground from the ElectroMechanical Instrument Cluster (EMIC) (also known as the Cab Compartment Node/CCN) on a multi-function switch return circuit. It then provides outputs to the EMIC on a wash/beam select switch signal circuit to control washer and headlamp beam selection, on an intermittent wiper switch signal circuit to control wipers, and on a turn lamps switch signal circuit to control turn signal and hazard warning functions. The multi-function switch operates as follows: - Hazard Warning Control - The hazard warning push button of the multi-function switch is depressed to activate the hazard warning system, and depressed again to turn the system OFF. When the push button is actuated, the multi-function switch provides an output to the EMIC, and the EMIC responds by sending electronic hazard switch status messages to the Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) over the Controller Area Network (CAN) data bus. The TIPM then energizes and flashes or de-energizes both the left and right turn signal circuits to provide the visual hazard warning. - Headlamp Beam Selection - The control stalk of the multi-function switch is pulled towards the steering wheel past a detent to actuate the integral beam select switch circuitry, or to an intermediate, momentary position before the detent to actuate the optical horn feature. Each time the control stalk is actuated to a detent position, the opposite headlamp beam from what is currently selected will be energized. Each time the control stalk is actuated to the momentary position with the headlamps turned OFF, the headlamp high beams will be illuminated for as long as the control stalk is held in this position. The multi-function switch provides an output to the EMIC, and the EMIC responds by sending electronic beam select switch status messages to the TIPM over the CAN data bus. The TIPM energizes or de-energizes the selected LOW or HIGH beam circuits. - Turn Signal Control - The control stalk of the multi-function switch is moved upward to activate the RIGHT turn signal circuitry, and, downward to activate the LEFT turn signal circuitry. The turn signal switch has a detent position in each direction that provides turn signals with automatic cancellation, and an intermediate, momentary position in each direction that automatically provides three turn signal blinks as a LANE CHANGE feature when the control stalk is tapped or will energize the turn signals for as long as the control stalk is held in the momentary position. When the control stalk is moved to a detent turn signal switch position, the cancel actuator extends toward the center of the steering column. A turn signal cancel cam that is integral to the clockspring rotates with the steering wheel and the cam lobes contact the cancel actuator when it is extended from the multi-function switch. When the steering wheel is rotated during a turning maneuver, one of the two turn signal cancel cam lobes will contact the turn signal cancel actuator. The cancel actuator latches against the cancel cam rotation in the direction opposite that which is signaled. If the LEFT turn signal detent is selected, the lobes of the cancel cam will ratchet past the cancel actuator when the steering wheel is rotated to the left, but will unlatch the cancel actuator as the steering wheel rotates to the right and returns to center, which will cancel the turn signal event and release the control stalk from the detent so it returns to the neutral OFF position. When a turn signal is activated, the multi-function switch provides an output to the EMIC, and the EMIC responds by sending electronic turn signal switch status messages to the TIPM over the CAN data bus. The TIPM energizes and flashes or de-energizes the selected left or right turn signal circuits. - Washer Control - The control knob on the end of the multi-function switch control stalk is depressed towards the steering column to momentarily activate the washer pump in the WASH mode. The washer pump will continue to operate in the washer mode until the control knob is released. The multi-function switch provides an output to the EMIC, and the EMIC responds by sending electronic washer switch status messages to the TIPM over the CAN data bus. The TIPM responds by energizing or de-energizing the washer pump in the washer mode. - Wiper Control - The control knob on the end of the multi-function switch control stalk is rotated to one of the continuous wiper detents, to one of five intermittent wiper detents, or to the OFF position to select the wiper mode. The multi-function switch provides an output to the EMIC, and the EMIC responds by sending electronic wiper switch status messages to the TIPM over the CAN data bus. The TIPM responds by energizing or de-energizing the wiper motor. The TIPM is programmed to operate the wiper motor at the selected low or high continuous wipe speed, and to provide the selected electronically controlled speed-sensitive intermittent wipe or wipe-after-wash mode features. The multi-function switch as well as the hard wired inputs and outputs of the switch may be diagnosed using conventional diagnostic tools and procedures. Refer to the appropriate wiring information. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Combination Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 1052 Combination Switch: Testing and Inspection MULTI-FUNCTION SWITCH WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury on vehicles equipped with airbags, disable the Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, airbag, seat belt tensioner, impact sensor, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the SRS. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment. 1. Remove the multi-function switch from the switch mounting housing on the steering column. See: Service and Repair/Removal . 2. Disconnect the wire harness connector from the back of the multi-function switch. 3. Using an ohmmeter, test the resistance between the terminals of the switch as shown in the Multi-Function Switch Tests table. 4. If the switch fails any of the tests, replace the ineffective multi-function switch as required. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Combination Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Combination Switch: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury on vehicles equipped with airbags, disable the Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, airbag, seat belt tensioner, impact sensor, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the SRS. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment. 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. 2. Remove the driver airbag from the steering wheel. See: Restraint Systems/Air Bag Systems/Air Bag/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Driver Airbag - Removal . 3. Disconnect the steering wheel wire harness connectors from the upper clockspring connector receptacles. CAUTION: Be certain that the screws that secure the steering wheel puller to the steering wheel are fully engaged in the steering wheel armature without passing through the steering wheel and damaging the clockspring. 4. Remove the steering wheel from the steering column. See: Steering and Suspension/Steering/Steering Wheel/Service and Repair/Removal . 5. Remove the screw (2) that secures the tilt steering column knob (1) and remove it from the tilt actuator (3) on the left side of the column. 6. From below the steering column, remove the two outboard screws that secure the upper column shroud (1) to the lower shroud (3). 7. Using hand pressure, press inward on both sides of the upper shroud above the parting line of the lower shroud to release the snap features that secure the two shroud halves to each other. 8. Remove the upper shroud from the lower shroud and the steering column. 9. Remove the one center screw that secures the lower shroud to the steering column (4). 10. Remove the lower shroud from the steering column. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Combination Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 1055 11. Disconnect the wire harness connector (2) from the back of the multi-function switch housing (1). 12. Remove the two screws (4) that secure the switch to the multi-function switch mounting housing (3). 13. Grasp the switch control stalk and pull it toward the left side of the vehicle to remove the switch from the mounting housing. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Combination Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 1056 Combination Switch: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury on vehicles equipped with airbags, disable the Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, airbag, seat belt tensioner, impact sensor, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the SRS. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment. 1. Slide the multi-function switch (1) into the multi-function switch mounting housing (3) from the left side. Be certain that the alignment pins on the top and bottom of the switch are properly engaged in the channels of the mounting housing. 2. Install and tighten the two screws (4) that secure the switch to the mounting housing. Tighten the screws to 2 Nm (20 in. lbs.). 3. Reconnect the wire harness connector (2) to the back of the switch housing. 4. Position the lower shroud (3) onto the steering column (4). 5. From below the steering column, install and tighten the one center screw that secures the lower shroud to the steering column. Tighten the screw to 2 Nm (20 in. lbs.). 6. Position the upper shroud (1) onto the steering column over the lower shroud. On vehicles equipped with an automatic transmission, be certain to engage the gearshift lever gap hider into the opening in the right side of both shroud halves. 7. Align the snap features on the upper shroud with the receptacles in the lower shroud and apply hand pressure to snap them together. 8. Install and tighten the two outboard screws that secure the upper shroud to the lower shroud. Tighten the screws to 2 Nm (20 in. lbs.). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Combination Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 1057 9. Position the tilt steering column knob (1) onto the tilt adjuster actuator (3) on the left side of the steering column, then install and tighten the screw (2) to secure the knob to the actuator. Tighten the screw to 2 Nm (20 in. lbs.). NOTE: When reinstalling the steering wheel, be certain to index the yellow rubber booted engagement dowel on the upper surface of the clockspring rotor between the two fins cast into the lower surface of the steering wheel armature hub. 10. Reinstall the steering wheel onto the steering column. See: Steering and Suspension/Steering/Steering Wheel/Service and Repair/Installation . 11. Reconnect the steering wheel wire harness connectors to the upper clockspring connector receptacles. Be certain that the steering wheel wire harness is routed between the steering wheel back trim cover and the steering wheel armature. 12. Reinstall the driver airbag onto the steering wheel. See: Restraint Systems/Air Bag Systems/Air Bag/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Driver Airbag - Installation . 13. Reconnect the battery negative cable. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Door Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Door Switch: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION This vehicle has up to four door ajar switches, one for each door. Each switch is concealed within and integral to its respective door latch unit. The switches are momentary leaf contact-type units that are actuated by the mechanisms internal to the door latch. A short pigtail wire and connector on each door latch connects the door ajar switch to the vehicle electrical system through its respective door wire harness. The door ajar switches cannot be adjusted or repaired and, if ineffective or damaged, the door latch unit must be replaced. See: Body and Frame/Doors, Hood and Trunk/Doors/Front Door/Front Door Latch/Service and Repair/Front Door Latch - Removal or See: Body and Frame/Doors, Hood and Trunk/Doors/Rear Door/Rear Door Latch/Service and Repair/Rear Door Latch - Removal . Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Door Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 1062 Door Switch: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The door ajar switches are actuated by the mechanisms internal to the door latch. When a door is closed and properly latched, its door ajar switch is an open circuit. When a door is open or only partially latched, the door ajar switch is a closed circuit. The door ajar switches are hard wired in series between a body ground and the ElectroMechanical Instrument Cluster (EMIC) (also known as the Cab Compartment Node/CCN). The EMIC reads the hard wired door ajar switch inputs through internal pull-ups, then uses these inputs to control many electronic functions and features of the vehicle. The EMIC also sends the proper electronic door ajar switch status messages to other electronic modules in the vehicle over the Controller Area Network (CAN) data bus. The door ajar switches as well as the hard wired inputs and outputs of the switches may be diagnosed using conventional diagnostic tools and procedures. Refer to the appropriate wiring information. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Glove Box Lamp Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Glove Box Lamp Switch: Service and Repair Removal LAMP/SWITCH WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury on vehicles equipped with airbags, disable the Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, airbag, seat belt tensioner, impact sensor, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the SRS. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment. 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. 2. Open the glove box door. 3. Reach through the window in the instrument panel (2) glove box opening behind the switch to access and depress the retaining latch on either side of the glove box lamp and switch unit (3). 4. While holding the retaining latch depressed, push the glove box lamp and switch unit out through the mounting hole in the face of the instrument panel. 5. Disconnect the wire harness connector (1) from the glove box lamp and switch. 6. Remove the lamp and switch unit from the instrument panel. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Glove Box Lamp Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 1067 Glove Box Lamp Switch: Service and Repair Installation LAMP/SWITCH WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury on vehicles equipped with airbags, disable the Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, airbag, seat belt tensioner, impact sensor, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the SRS. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment. 1. Position the glove box lamp and switch unit (3) to the instrument panel (2) glove box opening. 2. Reconnect the wire harness connector (1) to the lamp and switch unit. 3. Feed the wire harness back through the switch mounting hole. 4. Align the lamp and switch unit with the mounting hole in the instrument panel. 5. Using hand pressure, push the lamp and switch unit firmly and evenly into the mounting hole until it is fully seated. 6. Close the glove box door. 7. Reconnect the battery negative cable. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Headlamp Switch > Component Information > Locations Headlamp Switch: Locations Component ID: 489 Component : SWITCH-HEADLAMP Connector: Name : SWITCH-HEADLAMP Color : BLACK # of pins : 10 Pin Circuit Description 1 L116 20WT/LG HEADLAMP/FOG LAMP SWITCH SIGNAL 2 E2 20OR/BR PANEL LAMPS DIMMER SIGNAL 3 L115 20WT/YL HEADLAMP SWITCH RETURN 4 E19 20OR/BR HEADLAMP SWITCH DIMMER SIGNAL 5 Z407 20BK/OR GROUND 6 L914 20WT/LG CARGO LAMP SWITCH SIGNAL 7-- 8-9-10 - Component Location - 44 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Headlamp Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 1071 Component Location - 50 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Headlamp Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 1072 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Headlamp Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 1073 Headlamp Switch: Diagrams Component ID: 489 Component : SWITCH-HEADLAMP Connector: Name : SWITCH-HEADLAMP Color : BLACK # of pins : 10 Pin Circuit Description 1 L116 20WT/LG HEADLAMP/FOG LAMP SWITCH SIGNAL 2 E2 20OR/BR PANEL LAMPS DIMMER SIGNAL 3 L115 20WT/YL HEADLAMP SWITCH RETURN 4 E19 20OR/BR HEADLAMP SWITCH DIMMER SIGNAL 5 Z407 20BK/OR GROUND 6 L914 20WT/LG CARGO LAMP SWITCH SIGNAL 7-- 8-9-10 - Component Location - 44 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Headlamp Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 1074 Component Location - 50 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Headlamp Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 1075 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Headlamp Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Headlamp Switch: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The headlamp switch (1) is located on the instrument panel, to the left of the steering column. Two different switches are used. The standard switch features a three-position rotary knob (4) for exterior lighting control, a thumbwheel (2) for panel lamps dimming and interior lighting control, and a momentary push button (3) for cargo lamp control. An optional switch has a momentary PUSH function added to the rotary knob for front fog lamp control. Each of these switches is constructed of molded plastic. The rotary knob is molded plastic and knurled around its circumference to ease operator control. The thumbwheel is also plastic and knurled. On vehicles with optional fog lamps the rotary knob also has the text PUSH and an International Control and Display Symbol icon for Front Fog Light applied to it. The cargo lamp push button is plastic with a smooth finish and the text CARGO applied to it. The switch face plate is also labeled with graphics and icons to clearly identify the many functions of the rotary knob and thumbwheel. Three screws secure the switch to the back of the cluster bezel through integral mounting flanges that are molded to each side of the switch housing. The back of the switch housing has an integral connector receptacle containing terminal pins that connect the switch to the vehicle electrical system through a dedicated take out and connector of the instrument panel wire harness. A panel dimmer controlled incandescent bulb soldered to the circuit board within the switch provides back lighting for visibility at night, but is not serviceable. The headlamp switch cannot be repaired and, if ineffective or damaged, it must be replaced. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Headlamp Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 1078 Headlamp Switch: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The headlamp switch uses two resistor multiplexed outputs and one conventional output to control the many functions and features it provides. The switch receives a clean ground from the ElectroMechanical Instrument Cluster (EMIC) (also known as the Cab Compartment Node/CCN) on a headlamp switch return circuit. It then provides outputs to the EMIC on a headlamp switch signal circuit to control exterior lighting functions, on a panel lamps dimmer signal circuit to control panel dimmer and interior lighting functions, and on a cargo lamp return circuit to control the cargo lamps. The switch illumination circuit receives a path to ground at all times through the left instrument panel ground circuit. The illumination level is controlled by a Pulse-Width Modulated (PWM) output received from the EMIC on a headlamp switch illumination control circuit. The EMIC controls this output based upon the dimmer signal select mux input from the headlamp switch. The headlamp switch operates as follows: - Cargo Lamps Control - The cargo lamp push button on the headlamp switch is depressed to activate or deactivate the cargo lamps. The headlamp switch provides an output to the EMIC, and the EMIC responds by providing the appropriate cargo lighting control outputs through its internal cargo lamp driver circuit. Front Fog Lamps Control - For vehicles so equipped, the rotary knob on the headlamp switch is depressed to activate or deactivate the optional front fog lamps. The headlamp switch provides an output to the EMIC, and the EMIC responds by sending electronic fog lamp switch status messages to the Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) over the Controller Area Network (CAN) data bus. The TIPM responds by energizing or de-energizing the front fog lamps and by sending an electronic message back to the EMIC to control the front fog lamp indicator. - Exterior Lighting Control - The rotary knob on the headlamp switch is rotated to a detent position to activate or deactivate the exterior lighting. The headlamp switch provides an output to the EMIC, and the EMIC responds by sending electronic exterior lighting switch status messages to the TIPM over the CAN data bus. The TIPM responds by energizing or de-energizing the park lamp and the high or low beam headlamp circuits, and by sending an electronic message back to the EMIC to control the high beam indicator. The TIPM also remembers which headlamp beams were last selected with the multi-function switch, and energizes those beams by default the next time the headlamps are turned ON. - Interior Lighting Control - The thumbwheel on the headlamp switch is rotated to the dome DEFEAT, dome ON, PARADE mode, or one of the six panel dimmer detent positions to control the interior courtesy/dome and panel lamps. The headlamp switch provides an output to the EMIC, and the EMIC responds by providing the appropriate interior lighting control outputs through its internal courtesy lamp driver circuits, electronic dimming level messages to other modules over the CAN data bus, and the proper PWM outputs to control dimming levels through several panel dimmer illumination control driver circuits. The headlamp switch as well as the hard wired inputs and outputs of the switch may be diagnosed using conventional diagnostic tools and procedures. Refer to the appropriate wiring information. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Headlamp Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 1079 Headlamp Switch: Testing and Inspection HEADLAMP SWITCH WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury on vehicles equipped with airbags, disable the Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, airbag, seat belt tensioner, impact sensor, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the SRS. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment. 1. Remove the cluster bezel from the instrument panel See: Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators/Instrument Cluster / Carrier/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Instrument Panel Cluster Bezel - Removal . 2. Disconnect the wire harness connector from the back of the headlamp switch. 3. Using an ohmmeter, test the resistance or continuity between the terminals of the switch as shown in the Headlamp Switch Tests table. 4. If the switch fails any of the tests, replace the ineffective headlamp switch as required. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Headlamp Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Headlamp Switch: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury on vehicles equipped with airbags, disable the Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, airbag, seat belt tensioner, impact sensor, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the SRS. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment. 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. 2. Remove the cluster bezel (1) from the instrument panel. See: Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators/Instrument Cluster / Carrier/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Instrument Panel Cluster Bezel - Removal . 3. Disconnect the wire harness connector (3) from the back of the headlamp switch (4). 4. Place the cluster bezel face down on a suitable work surface. Be certain to take the proper precautions to protect the face of the bezel from cosmetic damage. 5. Remove the three screws (2) that secure the headlamp switch to the back of the cluster bezel. 6. Remove the headlamp switch from the cluster bezel. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Headlamp Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 1082 Headlamp Switch: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury on vehicles equipped with airbags, disable the Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, airbag, seat belt tensioner, impact sensor, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the SRS. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment. 1. Position the headlamp switch (4) to the back of the cluster bezel (1). 2. Install and tighten the three screws (2) that secure the headlamp switch to the cluster bezel. Tighten the screws to 2 Nm (20 in. lbs.). 3. Position the cluster bezel close enough to the instrument panel to reconnect the wire harness connector (3) to the back of the headlamp switch. 4. Reinstall the cluster bezel onto the instrument panel. See: Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators/Instrument Cluster / Carrier/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Instrument Panel Cluster Bezel - Installation . 5. Reconnect the battery negative cable. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Horn Switch > Component Information > Diagrams Horn Switch: Diagrams Component ID: 493 Component : SWITCH-HORN Connector: Name : SWITCH-HORN Color : WHITE # of pins : 2 Pin Circuit Description 1 X3 20DG/VT HORN SWITCH SENSE 2-- Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Locations Component ID: 401 Component : SENSOR-ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION Connector: Name : SENSOR-ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION Color : BLACK # of pins : 6 Pin Circuit Description 1 F855 20PK/YL 5 VOLT SUPPLY Pin Circuit Description 1 K852 20BR/LB 5 VOLT SUPPLY Pin Circuit Description 1 K852 20BR/VT 5 VOLT SUPPLY 2 K23 20BR/WT APPS NO. 1 SIGNAL 3 K167 20BR/YL APPS NO. 1 RETURN 3 K167 20BR/DG APPS NO. 1 RETURN 4 K400 20BR/VT APPS NO. 2 RETURN 5 K29 20WT/BR APPS NO. 2 SIGNAL 6 F856 20YL/PK 5 VOLT SUPPLY 6 K854 20VT/BR 5 VOLT SUPPLY Component Location - 31 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1091 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1092 Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Diagrams Component ID: 401 Component : SENSOR-ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION Connector: Name : SENSOR-ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION Color : BLACK # of pins : 6 Pin Circuit Description 1 F855 20PK/YL 5 VOLT SUPPLY Pin Circuit Description 1 K852 20BR/LB 5 VOLT SUPPLY Pin Circuit Description 1 K852 20BR/VT 5 VOLT SUPPLY 2 K23 20BR/WT APPS NO. 1 SIGNAL 3 K167 20BR/YL APPS NO. 1 RETURN 3 K167 20BR/DG APPS NO. 1 RETURN 4 K400 20BR/VT APPS NO. 2 RETURN 5 K29 20WT/BR APPS NO. 2 SIGNAL 6 F856 20YL/PK 5 VOLT SUPPLY 6 K854 20VT/BR 5 VOLT SUPPLY Component Location - 31 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1093 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor (APPS) (1) is located inside the vehicle. It is attached to the accelerator pedal assembly (3). It is used only with 3.7L V-6 and 5.7L V-8 gas engines, and also with diesel engines. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 1096 Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor (APPS) provides the Powertrain Control Module (PCM) with two DC voltage signals which change as the position of the accelerator pedal changes. One of the DC voltage signals will be half the voltage of the other signal. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL CAUTION: Do not attempt to separate or remove the Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor (APPS) from the accelerator pedal assembly. The APPS is replaced as an assembly along with the pedal. If sensor is removed from pedal, its electronic calibration may be destroyed. 1. Disconnect 6-way electrical connector at top of APPS (2). 2. Remove APPS lower mounting bolt (4) and two mounting nuts. 3. Remove pedal and APPS assembly from vehicle. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 1099 Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION CAUTION: Do not attempt to separate or remove the Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor (APPS) from the accelerator pedal assembly. The APPS is replaced as an assembly along with the pedal. If sensor is removed from pedal, its electronic calibration may be destroyed. 1. Position pedal and APPS assembly to its mounting bracket. 2. Connect 6-way electrical connector to top of APPS (2). 3. Install APPS lower mounting bolt (4) and two mounting nuts. 4. If necessary, use a Scan Tool to erase any Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTC's). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Battery Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Battery Temperature Sensor - Description Battery Temperature Sensor: Description and Operation Battery Temperature Sensor - Description DESCRIPTION The Battery Temperature Sensor (BTS) is used only on the diesel engine. It is attached to the battery tray located under the battery. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Battery Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Battery Temperature Sensor - Description > Page 1104 Battery Temperature Sensor: Description and Operation Battery Temperature Sensor - Operation OPERATION The BTS is used to determine the battery temperature and control battery charging rate. This temperature data, along with data from monitored line voltage, is used by the PCM (ECM Diesel) to vary the battery charging rate. System voltage will be higher at colder temperatures and is gradually reduced at warmer temperatures. The PCM sends 5 volts to the sensor and is grounded through the sensor return line. As temperature increases, resistance in the sensor decreases and the detection voltage at the PCM increases. The BTS is also used for OBD II diagnostics. Certain faults and OBD II monitors are either enabled or disabled, depending upon BTS input (for example, disable purge and enable Leak Detection Pump (LDP) and O2 sensor heater tests). Most OBD II monitors are disabled below 20°F. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Battery Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Battery Temperature Sensor - Removal Battery Temperature Sensor: Service and Repair Battery Temperature Sensor - Removal REMOVAL The battery temperature sensor (1) is located under the vehicle battery and is attached (snapped into) a mounting hole on battery tray (4). 1. Remove battery. 2. Pry sensor (1) straight up from battery tray mounting hole to gain access to electrical connector (3). 3. Disconnect sensor from engine wire harness electrical connector. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Battery Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Battery Temperature Sensor - Removal > Page 1107 Battery Temperature Sensor: Service and Repair Battery Temperature Sensor - Installation INSTALLATION NOTE: The battery temperature sensor (1) is located under the vehicle battery and is attached (snapped into) a mounting hole on battery tray (4). 1. Pull electrical connector (3) up through mounting hole in top of battery tray. 2. Connect sensor. 3. Snap sensor into battery tray. 4. Install battery. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations Camshaft Position Sensor: Locations Component ID: 405 Component : SENSOR-CAMSHAFT POSITION Connector: Name : SENSOR-CAMSHAFT POSITION Color : # of pins : 3 Qualifier : (DIESEL) Pin Circuit Description 1 F855 18PK/YL 5 VOLT SUPPLY 2 K944 18BK/GY CMP SENSOR GROUND 2 K916 18BR/OR SENSOR GROUND 3 K44 18DB/GY CMP SIGNAL Component Location - 5 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1111 Component Location - 11 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1112 Component Location - 13 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1113 Connector: Name : SENSOR-CAMSHAFT POSITION Color : GRAY # of pins : 3 Qualifier : (GAS) Pin Circuit Description 1 F856 20YL/PK 5 VOLT SUPPLY 2 K900 20DB/DG SENSOR GROUND 3 K44 20DB/GY CMP SIGNAL Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1114 Component Location - 5 Component Location - 11 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1115 Component Location - 13 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1116 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1117 Camshaft Position Sensor: Diagrams Component ID: 405 Component : SENSOR-CAMSHAFT POSITION Connector: Name : SENSOR-CAMSHAFT POSITION Color : # of pins : 3 Qualifier : (DIESEL) Pin Circuit Description 1 F855 18PK/YL 5 VOLT SUPPLY 2 K944 18BK/GY CMP SENSOR GROUND 2 K916 18BR/OR SENSOR GROUND 3 K44 18DB/GY CMP SIGNAL Component Location - 5 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1118 Component Location - 11 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1119 Component Location - 13 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1120 Connector: Name : SENSOR-CAMSHAFT POSITION Color : GRAY # of pins : 3 Qualifier : (GAS) Pin Circuit Description 1 F856 20YL/PK 5 VOLT SUPPLY 2 K900 20DB/DG SENSOR GROUND 3 K44 20DB/GY CMP SIGNAL Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1121 Component Location - 5 Component Location - 11 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1122 Component Location - 13 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1123 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Camshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation Description 3.7L & 4.7L The Camshaft Position Sensor (CMP) (3) is bolted to the right-front side of the right cylinder head (2). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 1126 Camshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation Operation 4.7L The CMP sensor engine contains a hall effect device called a sync signal generator to generate a fuel sync signal. This sync signal generator detects notches located on a tonewheel. The tonewheel (4) is located at the front of the camshaft for the right cylinder head (2). As the tonewheel rotates, the notches (1) pass through the sync signal generator. The pattern of the notches (viewed counter-clockwise from front of engine) is: 1 notch, 2 notches, 3 notches, 3 notches, 2 notches, 1 notch, 3 notches and 1 notch. The signal from the CMP sensor is used in conjunction with the crankshaft position sensor to differentiate between fuel injection and spark events. It is also used to synchronize the fuel injectors with their respective cylinders. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Camshaft Position Sensor - Removal Camshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair Camshaft Position Sensor - Removal 4.7L The Camshaft Position Sensor (CMP) (2) is bolted to the front/top of the right cylinder head (1). 1. Raise and support vehicle. 2. Disconnect electrical connector (4) at CMP sensor. 3. Remove sensor mounting bolt (3). 4. Carefully twist sensor from cylinder head. 5. Check condition of sensor O-ring. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Camshaft Position Sensor - Removal > Page 1129 Camshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair Camshaft Position Sensor - Installation 4.7L 1. Clean out machined hole in cylinder head. 2. Apply a small amount of engine oil to sensor O-ring. 3. Install sensor (2) into cylinder head (1) with a slight rocking action. Do not twist sensor into position as damage to O-ring may result. CAUTION: Before tightening sensor mounting bolt, be sure sensor is completely flush to cylinder head. If sensor is not flush, damage to sensor mounting tang may result. 4. Install mounting bolt (3) and tighten to 12 Nm (106 in.lbs.). 5. Connect electrical connector to sensor. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Locations Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Locations Component ID: 410 Component : SENSOR-ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE Connector: Name : SENSOR-ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (DIESEL) A K200 18BR/YL SENSOR GROUND A K914 18BK/WT SENSOR GROUND B K2 18VT/OR ECT SIGNAL Component Location - 8 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Locations > Page 1133 Component Location - 11 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Locations > Page 1134 Component Location - 13 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Locations > Page 1135 Connector: Name : SENSOR-ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (GAS) Pin Circuit Description 1 K2 20VT/OR ECT SIGNAL 2 K900 20DB/DG SENSOR GROUND Component Location - 8 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Locations > Page 1136 Component Location - 11 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Locations > Page 1137 Component Location - 13 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Locations > Page 1138 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Locations > Page 1139 Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Diagrams Component ID: 410 Component : SENSOR-ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE Connector: Name : SENSOR-ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (DIESEL) A K200 18BR/YL SENSOR GROUND A K914 18BK/WT SENSOR GROUND B K2 18VT/OR ECT SIGNAL Component Location - 8 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Locations > Page 1140 Component Location - 11 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Locations > Page 1141 Component Location - 13 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Locations > Page 1142 Connector: Name : SENSOR-ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (GAS) Pin Circuit Description 1 K2 20VT/OR ECT SIGNAL 2 K900 20DB/DG SENSOR GROUND Component Location - 8 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Locations > Page 1143 Component Location - 11 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Locations > Page 1144 Component Location - 13 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Locations > Page 1145 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations Crankshaft Position Sensor: Locations Component ID: 407 Component : SENSOR-CRANKSHAFT POSITION Connector: Name : SENSOR-CRANKSHAFT POSITION Color : BLACK # of pins : 3 Qualifier : (3.7L) Pin Circuit Description 1 K24 20BR/LB CKP SIGNAL 2 K900 20DB/DG SENSOR GROUND 3 F855 20PK/YL 5 VOLT SUPPLY Component Location - 5 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1149 Component Location - 11 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1150 Component Location - 19 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1151 Component Location - 13 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1152 Connector: Name : SENSOR-CRANKSHAFT POSITION Color : BLACK # of pins : 3 Qualifier : (4.7L) Pin Circuit Description 1 K24 20BR/LB CKP SIGNAL 2 K900 20DB/DG SENSOR GROUND 3 F855 20PK/YL 5 VOLT SUPPLY Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1153 Component Location - 5 Component Location - 11 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1154 Component Location - 19 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1155 Component Location - 13 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1156 Connector: Name : SENSOR-CRANKSHAFT POSITION Color : BLACK # of pins : 3 Qualifier : (5.7L) Pin Circuit Description 1 F855 20PK/YL 5 VOLT SUPPLY 2 K900 20DB/DG SENSOR GROUND 3 K24 20BR/LB CKP SIGNAL Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1157 Component Location - 5 Component Location - 11 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1158 Component Location - 19 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1159 Component Location - 13 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1160 Connector: Name : SENSOR-CRANKSHAFT POSITION Color : BLACK # of pins : 3 Qualifier : (DIESEL) Pin Circuit Description 1 K853 18DB/BR 5 VOLT SUPPLY Pin Circuit Description 1 K824 18DB/BR 5 VOLT SUPPLY Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1161 2 K975 18BR/OR CKP SENSOR GROUND 2 K925 18BR/OR CKP SENSOR GROUND 3 K24 18BR/LB CKP SIGNAL Component Location - 5 Component Location - 11 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1162 Component Location - 19 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1163 Component Location - 13 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1164 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1165 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Diagrams Component ID: 407 Component : SENSOR-CRANKSHAFT POSITION Connector: Name : SENSOR-CRANKSHAFT POSITION Color : BLACK # of pins : 3 Qualifier : (3.7L) Pin Circuit Description 1 K24 20BR/LB CKP SIGNAL 2 K900 20DB/DG SENSOR GROUND 3 F855 20PK/YL 5 VOLT SUPPLY Component Location - 5 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1166 Component Location - 11 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1167 Component Location - 19 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1168 Component Location - 13 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1169 Connector: Name : SENSOR-CRANKSHAFT POSITION Color : BLACK # of pins : 3 Qualifier : (4.7L) Pin Circuit Description 1 K24 20BR/LB CKP SIGNAL 2 K900 20DB/DG SENSOR GROUND 3 F855 20PK/YL 5 VOLT SUPPLY Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1170 Component Location - 5 Component Location - 11 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1171 Component Location - 19 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1172 Component Location - 13 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1173 Connector: Name : SENSOR-CRANKSHAFT POSITION Color : BLACK # of pins : 3 Qualifier : (5.7L) Pin Circuit Description 1 F855 20PK/YL 5 VOLT SUPPLY 2 K900 20DB/DG SENSOR GROUND 3 K24 20BR/LB CKP SIGNAL Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1174 Component Location - 5 Component Location - 11 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1175 Component Location - 19 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1176 Component Location - 13 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1177 Connector: Name : SENSOR-CRANKSHAFT POSITION Color : BLACK # of pins : 3 Qualifier : (DIESEL) Pin Circuit Description 1 K853 18DB/BR 5 VOLT SUPPLY Pin Circuit Description 1 K824 18DB/BR 5 VOLT SUPPLY Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1178 2 K975 18BR/OR CKP SENSOR GROUND 2 K925 18BR/OR CKP SENSOR GROUND 3 K24 18BR/LB CKP SIGNAL Component Location - 5 Component Location - 11 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1179 Component Location - 19 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1180 Component Location - 13 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1181 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Crankshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation Description 4.7L V-8 The Crankshaft Position (CKP) (1) sensor is mounted into the right rear side of the cylinder block. It is positioned and bolted into a machined hole. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 1184 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation Operation 4.7L V-8 Engine speed and crankshaft position are provided through the CKP (Crankshaft Position) sensor. The sensor generates pulses that are the input sent to the Powertrain Control Module (PCM). The PCM interprets the sensor input to determine the crankshaft position. The PCM then uses this position, along with other inputs, to determine injector sequence and ignition timing. The sensor is a hall effect device combined with an internal magnet. It is also sensitive to steel within a certain distance from it. A tonewheel (1) is bolted to the engine crankshaft. This tonewheel has sets of notches (2) at its outer edge. The notches cause a pulse to be generated when they pass under the sensor. The pulses are the input to the PCM. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Crankshaft Position Sensor - Removal Crankshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair Crankshaft Position Sensor - Removal 4.7L V-8 The Crankshaft Position (CKP) sensor is located at the right-rear side of the engine cylinder block. It is positioned and bolted into a machined hole in the engine block. 1. Raise vehicle. 2. Disconnect CKP electrical connector at sensor. 3. Remove CKP mounting bolt (2). 4. Carefully twist sensor (1) from cylinder block. 5. Remove sensor from vehicle. 6. Check condition of sensor O-ring. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Crankshaft Position Sensor - Removal > Page 1187 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair Crankshaft Position Sensor - Installation 4.7L V-8 1. Clean out machined hole in engine block. 2. Apply a small amount of engine oil to sensor o-ring. 3. Install sensor (1) into engine block with a slight rocking and twisting action. CAUTION: Before tightening sensor mounting bolt, be sure sensor is completely flush to cylinder block. If sensor is not flush, damage to sensor mounting tang may result. 4. Install mounting bolt and tighten to 28 Nm (21 ft. lbs.) torque. 5. Connect electrical connector to sensor. 6. Lower vehicle. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Locations Fuel Level Sensor: Locations DESCRIPTION The fuel pump module assembly is located on the top of the fuel tank. The complete assembly contains the following components: - A combination fuel filter/fuel pressure regulator - A separate fuel pick-up, or inlet filter - An electric fuel pump - A lockring to retain pump module to tank - A soft gasket between tank flange and module - A fuel gauge sending unit (fuel level sensor) - Fuel line connection The fuel gauge sending unit may be serviced separately. If the electrical fuel pump, primary inlet filter, fuel filter or fuel pressure regulator require service, the fuel pump module must be replaced. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Fuel Pump Fuel Level Sensor: Description and Operation Fuel Pump Description DESCRIPTION The electric fuel pump is located inside of the fuel pump module. A 12 volt, permanent magnet, electric motor powers the fuel pump. The electric fuel pump is not a separate, serviceable component. Operation OPERATION Voltage to operate the electric pump is supplied through the fuel pump relay. Fuel is drawn in through a filter at the bottom of the module and pushed through the electric motor gearset to the pump outlet. Check Valve Operation: The bottom section of the fuel pump module contains a one-way check valve to prevent fuel flow back into the tank and to maintain fuel supply line pressure (engine warm) when pump is not operational. It is also used to keep the fuel supply line full of gasoline when pump is not operational. After the vehicle has cooled down, fuel pressure may drop to 0 psi (cold fluid contracts), but liquid gasoline will remain in fuel supply line between the check valve and fuel injectors.Fuel pressure that has dropped to 0 psi on a cooled down vehicle (engine off) is a normal condition. The electric fuel pump is not a separate, serviceable component. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Fuel Pump > Page 1193 Fuel Level Sensor: Description and Operation Fuel Pump Module Description DESCRIPTION The fuel pump module assembly is located on the top of the fuel tank. The complete assembly contains the following components: - A combination fuel filter/fuel pressure regulator - A separate fuel pick-up, or inlet filter - An electric fuel pump - A lockring to retain pump module to tank - A soft gasket between tank flange and module - A fuel gauge sending unit (fuel level sensor) - Fuel line connection The fuel gauge sending unit may be serviced separately. If the electrical fuel pump, primary inlet filter, fuel filter or fuel pressure regulator require service, the fuel pump module must be replaced. Operation OPERATION Refer to Fuel Pump, Inlet Filter, Fuel Filter / Fuel Pressure Regulator and Fuel Gauge Sending Unit. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Fuel Level Sensor: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL WARNING: The fuel system may be under a constant pressure (even with the engine off). Before servicing the fuel pump module, the fuel system pressure must be released. 1. Drain and remove fuel tank. 2. Remove plastic fuel pump module cover (1) by pushing pegs (2) outward. 3. Note rotational position of module before attempting removal. An indexing arrow is located on top of module for this purpose. 4. Position Special Tool 9340 (3) into notches on outside edge of lockring (5). 5. Install 1/2 inch drive breaker bar (1) to tool 9340 (3). 6. Rotate breaker bar counter-clockwise to remove lockring (5). 7. Remove lockring. The module will spring up slightly when lockring is removed. 8. Remove module from fuel tank. Be careful not to bend float arm while removing. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 1196 Fuel Level Sensor: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION 1. Using a new seal (gasket), position fuel pump module into opening in fuel tank. 2. Position lockring (5) over top of fuel pump module. 3. Rotate module until embossed alignment arrow points to center alignment mark. This step must be performed to prevent float from contacting side of fuel tank. Also be sure fuel fitting on top of pump module is pointed to drivers side of vehicle. 4. Install Special Tool 9340 (3) to lockring. 5. Install 1/2 inch drive breaker (1) into Special Tool 9340 (3). 6. Tighten lockring (clockwise) until all seven notches have engaged. 7. Snap plastic fuel pump module cover (1) to pump module. 8. Install fuel tank. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Intake Air Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations Intake Air Temperature Sensor: Component Locations 4.7L V-8 The intake manifold air temperature (IAT) sensor (1) is located near the throttle body. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Intake Air Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 1201 Intake Air Temperature Sensor: Connector Locations Component ID: 421 Component : SENSOR-INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE Connector: Name : SENSOR-INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (6.7L DH) Pin Circuit Description 1 K914 18BR/WT SENSOR GROUND 2 K21 18DB/LG INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR SIGNAL Component Location - 9 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Intake Air Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 1202 Component Location - 11 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Intake Air Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 1203 Component Location - 7 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Intake Air Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 1204 Connector: Name : SENSOR-INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE Color : DK. GRAY # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (GAS) Pin Circuit Description 1 K21 20DB/LG IAT SIGNAL 2 K900 20DB/DG SENSOR GROUND Component Location - 9 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Intake Air Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 1205 Component Location - 11 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Intake Air Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 1206 Component Location - 7 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Intake Air Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 1207 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Intake Air Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1208 Intake Air Temperature Sensor: Diagrams Component ID: 421 Component : SENSOR-INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE Connector: Name : SENSOR-INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (6.7L DH) Pin Circuit Description 1 K914 18BR/WT SENSOR GROUND 2 K21 18DB/LG INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR SIGNAL Component Location - 9 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Intake Air Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1209 Component Location - 11 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Intake Air Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1210 Component Location - 7 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Intake Air Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1211 Connector: Name : SENSOR-INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE Color : DK. GRAY # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (GAS) Pin Circuit Description 1 K21 20DB/LG IAT SIGNAL 2 K900 20DB/DG SENSOR GROUND Component Location - 9 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Intake Air Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1212 Component Location - 11 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Intake Air Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1213 Component Location - 7 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Intake Air Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1214 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Intake Air Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1215 Intake Air Temperature Sensor: Description and Operation OPERATION The IAT sensor provides an input voltage to the Powertrain Control Module (PCM) indicating the density of the air entering the intake manifold based upon intake manifold temperature. At key-on, a 5-volt power circuit is supplied to the sensor from the PCM. The sensor is grounded at the PCM through a low-noise, sensor-return circuit. The PCM uses this input to calculate the following: - Injector pulse-width - Adjustment of spark timing (to help prevent spark knock with high intake manifold air-charge temperatures) The resistance values of the IAT sensor is the same as for the Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) sensor. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Intake Air Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Intake Air Temperature Sensor: Service and Repair Removal 4.7L V-8 The intake manifold air temperature (IAT) sensor (1) is located near the throttle body. 1. Disconnect electrical connector (2) from IAT sensor. 2. Clean dirt from sensor base. 3. Gently lift on small plastic release tab (3) and rotate sensor about 1/4 turn counter-clockwise for removal. 4. Check condition of sensor o-ring (2). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Intake Air Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 1218 Intake Air Temperature Sensor: Service and Repair Installation 4.7L V-8 1. Check condition of sensor o-ring (2). 2. Clean sensor mounting hole. 3. Position sensor (1) into base and rotate clockwise until past release tab (3). 4. Install electrical connector (2). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Knock 1 Knock Sensor: Locations Sensor-Knock 1 Component ID: 423 Component : SENSOR-KNOCK 1 Connector: Name : SENSOR-KNOCK 1 Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (3.7L/5.7L) Pin Circuit Description 1 K42 20DB/YL KNOCK SENSOR NO. 1 SIGNAL 2 K942 20BR/LG KNOCK SENSOR NO. 1 RETURN Component Location - 9 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Knock 1 > Page 1223 Component Location - 22 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Knock 1 > Page 1224 Component Location - 19 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Knock 1 > Page 1225 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Knock 1 > Page 1226 Knock Sensor: Locations Sensor-Knock 2 Component ID: 424 Component : SENSOR-KNOCK 2 Connector: Name : SENSOR-KNOCK 2 Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (3.7L/5.7L) Pin Circuit Description 1 K242 20BR/WT KNOCK SENSOR NO. 2 SIGNAL 2 K924 20WT/BR KNOCK SENSOR NO. 2 RETURN Component Location - 11 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Knock 1 > Page 1227 Component Location - 22 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Knock 1 > Page 1228 Component Location - 19 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Knock 1 > Page 1229 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Knock 1 Knock Sensor: Diagrams Sensor-Knock 1 Component ID: 423 Component : SENSOR-KNOCK 1 Connector: Name : SENSOR-KNOCK 1 Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (3.7L/5.7L) Pin Circuit Description 1 K42 20DB/YL KNOCK SENSOR NO. 1 SIGNAL 2 K942 20BR/LG KNOCK SENSOR NO. 1 RETURN Component Location - 9 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Knock 1 > Page 1232 Component Location - 22 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Knock 1 > Page 1233 Component Location - 19 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Knock 1 > Page 1234 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Knock 1 > Page 1235 Knock Sensor: Diagrams Sensor-Knock 2 Component ID: 424 Component : SENSOR-KNOCK 2 Connector: Name : SENSOR-KNOCK 2 Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (3.7L/5.7L) Pin Circuit Description 1 K242 20BR/WT KNOCK SENSOR NO. 2 SIGNAL 2 K924 20WT/BR KNOCK SENSOR NO. 2 RETURN Component Location - 11 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Knock 1 > Page 1236 Component Location - 22 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Knock 1 > Page 1237 Component Location - 19 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Knock 1 > Page 1238 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Knock 1 > Page 1239 Knock Sensor: Diagrams Sensor-Knock Component ID: 422 Component : SENSOR-KNOCK Connector: Name : SENSOR-KNOCK Color : BLACK # of pins : 4 Qualifier : (4.7L) Pin Circuit Description 1 K942 20BR/LG KNOCK SENSOR NO. 1 RETURN 2 K42 20DB/YL KNOCK SENSOR NO. 1 SIGNAL 3 K924 20WT/BR KNOCK SENSOR NO. 2 RETURN 4 K242 20BR/WT KNOCK SENSOR NO. 2 SIGNAL Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Knock Sensor: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION Two knock sensors are bolted into the cylinder block under the intake manifold 3.7L, 4.7L & 8.3L. Two knock sensors are also used with the 5.7L. These are bolted into each side of the cylinder block (outside) under the exhaust manifold. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 1242 Knock Sensor: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION Two knock sensors are used; one for each cylinder bank. When the knock sensor detects a knock in one of the cylinders on the corresponding bank, it sends an input signal to the Powertrain Control Module (PCM). In response, the PCM retards ignition timing for all cylinders by a scheduled amount. Knock sensors contain a piezoelectric material which constantly vibrates and sends an input voltage (signal) to the PCM while the engine operates. As the intensity of the crystal's vibration increases, the knock sensor output voltage also increases. The voltage signal produced by the knock sensor increases with the amplitude of vibration. The PCM receives the knock sensor voltage signal as an input. If the signal rises above a predetermined level, the PCM will store that value in memory and retard ignition timing to reduce engine knock. If the knock sensor voltage exceeds a preset value, the PCM retards ignition timing for all cylinders. It is not a selective cylinder retard. The PCM ignores knock sensor input during engine idle conditions. Once the engine speed exceeds a specified value, knock retard is allowed. Knock retard uses its own short term and long term memory program. Long term memory stores previous detonation information in its battery-backed RAM. The maximum authority that long term memory has over timing retard can be calibrated. Short term memory is allowed to retard timing up to a preset amount under all operating conditions (as long as rpm is above the minimum rpm) except at Wide Open Throttle (WOT). The PCM, using short term memory, can respond quickly to retard timing when engine knock is detected. Short term memory is lost any time the ignition key is turned off. NOTE: Over or under tightening the sensor mounting bolts will affect knock sensor performance, possibly causing improper spark control. Always use the specified torque when installing the knock sensors. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Knock Sensor: Service and Repair Removal 4.7L The two knock sensors (1) are bolted into the cylinder block under the intake manifold (3). NOTE: The left sensor is identified by an identification tag (LEFT). It is also identified by a larger bolt head. The Powertrain Control Module (PCM) must have and know the correct sensor left/right positions. Do not mix the sensor locations. 1. Disconnect knock sensor dual pigtail harness from engine wiring harness. This connection is made near rear of engine. 2. Remove intake manifold See: Engine, Cooling and Exhaust/Engine/Intake Manifold/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Intake Manifold - Removal . 3. Remove sensor mounting bolts (2). Note foam strip on bolt threads. This foam is used only to retain the bolts to sensors for plant assembly. It is not used as a sealant. Do not apply any adhesive, sealant or thread locking compound to these bolts. 4. Remove sensors (1) from engine. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 1245 Knock Sensor: Service and Repair Installation 4.7L NOTE: The left sensor is identified by an identification tag (LEFT). It is also identified by a larger bolt head. The Powertrain Control Module (PCM) must have and know the correct sensor left/right positions. Do not mix the sensor locations. 1. Thoroughly clean knock sensor mounting holes. 2. Install sensors (1) into cylinder block. NOTE: Over or under tightening the sensor mounting bolts will affect knock sensor performance, possibly causing improper spark control. Always use the specified torque when installing the knock sensors. The torque for the knock sensor bolt is relatively light for an 8 mm bolt. NOTE: Note foam strip on bolt threads. This foam is used only to retain the bolts to sensors for plant assembly. It is not used as a sealant. Do not apply any adhesive, sealant or thread locking compound to these bolts. 3. Install and tighten mounting bolts. Tighten to 15 +/- 2 ft. lbs. (20 Nm) (176 in.lbs.). 4. Install intake manifold See: Engine, Cooling and Exhaust/Engine/Intake Manifold/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Intake Manifold - Installation . 5. Connect knock sensor wiring harness to engine harness (4) at rear of intake manifold. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Locations Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor: Locations Component ID: 426 Component : SENSOR-MANIFOLD ABSOLUTE PRESSURE Connector: Name : SENSOR-MANIFOLD ABSOLUTE PRESSURE Color : GRAY # of pins : 3 Qualifier : (NGC) Pin Circuit Description 1 K1 20VT/BR MAP SIGNAL 2 K900 20DB/DG SENSOR GROUND 3 F856 20YL/PK 5 VOLT SUPPLY Component Location - 8 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1249 Component Location - 9 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1250 Component Location - 11 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1251 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1252 Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor: Diagrams Component ID: 426 Component : SENSOR-MANIFOLD ABSOLUTE PRESSURE Connector: Name : SENSOR-MANIFOLD ABSOLUTE PRESSURE Color : GRAY # of pins : 3 Qualifier : (NGC) Pin Circuit Description 1 K1 20VT/BR MAP SIGNAL 2 K900 20DB/DG SENSOR GROUND 3 F856 20YL/PK 5 VOLT SUPPLY Component Location - 8 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1253 Component Location - 9 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1254 Component Location - 11 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1255 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1256 Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor: Description and Operation OPERATION The MAP sensor is used as an input to the Powertrain Control Module (PCM). It contains a silicon based sensing unit to provide data on the manifold vacuum that draws the air/fuel mixture into the combustion chamber. The PCM requires this information to determine injector pulse width and spark advance. When manifold absolute pressure (MAP) equals Barometric pressure, the pulse width will be at maximum. A 5 volt reference is supplied from the PCM and returns a voltage signal to the PCM that reflects manifold pressure. The zero pressure reading is 0.5V and full scale is 4.5V. For a pressure swing of 0-15 psi, the voltage changes 4.0V. To operate the sensor, it is supplied a regulated 4.8 to 5.1 volts. Ground is provided through the low-noise, sensor return circuit at the PCM. The MAP sensor input is the number one contributor to fuel injector pulse width. The most important function of the MAP sensor is to determine barometric pressure. The PCM needs to know if the vehicle is at sea level or at a higher altitude, because the air density changes with altitude. It will also help to correct for varying barometric pressure. Barometric pressure and altitude have a direct inverse correlation; as altitude goes up, barometric goes down. At key-on, the PCM powers up and looks at MAP voltage, and based upon the voltage it sees, it knows the current barometric pressure (relative to altitude). Once the engine starts, the PCM looks at the voltage again, continuously every 12 milliseconds, and compares the current voltage to what it was at key-on. The difference between current voltage and what it was at key-on, is manifold vacuum. During key-on (engine not running) the sensor reads (updates) barometric pressure. A normal range can be obtained by monitoring a known good sensor. As the altitude increases, the air becomes thinner (less oxygen). If a vehicle is started and driven to a very different altitude than where it was at key-on, the barometric pressure needs to be updated. Any time the PCM sees Wide Open Throttle (WOT), based upon Throttle Position Sensor (TPS) angle and RPM, it will update barometric pressure in the MAP memory cell. With periodic updates, the PCM can make its calculations more effectively. The PCM uses the MAP sensor input to aid in calculating the following: - Manifold pressure - Barometric pressure - Engine load - Injector pulse-width - Spark-advance programs - Shift-point strategies (certain automatic transmissions only) - Idle speed - Decel fuel shutoff The MAP sensor signal is provided from a single piezoresistive element located in the center of a diaphragm. The element and diaphragm are both made of silicone. As manifold pressure changes, the diaphragm moves causing the element to deflect, which stresses the silicone. When silicone is exposed to stress, its resistance changes. As manifold vacuum increases, the MAP sensor input voltage decreases proportionally. The sensor also contains electronics that condition the signal and provide temperature compensation. The PCM recognizes a decrease in manifold pressure by monitoring a decrease in voltage from the reading stored in the barometric pressure memory cell. The MAP sensor is a linear sensor; meaning as pressure changes, voltage changes proportionately. The range of voltage output from the sensor is usually between 4.6 volts at sea level to as low as 0.3 volts at 26 in. of Hg. Barometric pressure is the pressure exerted by the atmosphere upon an object. At sea level on a standard day, no storm, barometric pressure is approximately 29.92 in Hg. For every 100 feet of altitude, barometric pressure drops 0.10 in. Hg. If a storm goes through, it can change barometric pressure from what should be present for that altitude. You should know what the average pressure and corresponding barometric pressure is for your area. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor - Oxygen 1/1 Oxygen Sensor: Locations Sensor - Oxygen 1/1 Component ID: 431 Component : SENSOR-OXYGEN 1/1 Connector: Name : SENSOR-OXYGEN 1/1 Color : # of pins : 6 Qualifier : (6.7L DIESEL) Pin Circuit Description 1 K89 20BR/LG 02 1/1 PUMP CURRENT 2 K902 20BR/DG O2 1/1 RETURN 3 K79 20BR/LB O2 1/1 HEATER CONTROL RETURN 4 K99 20BR/LG O2 1/1 HEATER CONTROL SUPPLY 5 K103 20BR/LB O2 1/1 PUMP CELL CURRENT TRIM 6 K41 20DB/LB O2 1/1 SIGNAL Component Location - 21 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor - Oxygen 1/1 > Page 1261 Component Location - 22 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor - Oxygen 1/1 > Page 1262 Component Location - 24 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor - Oxygen 1/1 > Page 1263 Component Location - 19 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor - Oxygen 1/1 > Page 1264 Connector: Name : SENSOR-OXYGEN 1/1 Color : # of pins : 6 Qualifier : (6.7L DIESEL) Pin Circuit Description 1 K89 20BR/LG 02 1/1 PUMP CURRENT 2 K902 20BR/DG O2 1/1 RETURN 3 K79 20BR/LB O2 1/1 HEATER CONTROL RETURN 4 K99 20BR/LG O2 1/1 HEATER CONTROL SUPPLY Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor - Oxygen 1/1 > Page 1265 5 K103 20BR/LB O2 1/1 PUMP CELL CURRENT TRIM 6 K41 20DB/LB O2 1/1 SIGNAL Component Location - 21 Component Location - 22 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor - Oxygen 1/1 > Page 1266 Component Location - 24 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor - Oxygen 1/1 > Page 1267 Component Location - 19 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor - Oxygen 1/1 > Page 1268 Connector: Name : SENSOR-OXYGEN 1/1 Color : BLACK # of pins : 4 Qualifier : (GAS) Pin Circuit Description 1 K99 20BR/LG O2 1/1 HEATER CONTROL SUPPLY 2 Z42 20BK/LG GROUND 3 K902 20BR/DG O2 RETURN (UPSTREAM) 4 K41 20DB/LB O2 1/1 SIGNAL Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor - Oxygen 1/1 > Page 1269 Component Location - 21 Component Location - 22 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor - Oxygen 1/1 > Page 1270 Component Location - 24 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor - Oxygen 1/1 > Page 1271 Component Location - 19 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor - Oxygen 1/1 > Page 1272 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor - Oxygen 1/1 > Page 1273 Oxygen Sensor: Locations Sensor - Oxygen 1/2 Component ID: 432 Component : SENSOR-OXYGEN 1/2 Connector: Name : SENSOR-OXYGEN 1/2 Color : # of pins : 6 Qualifier : (6.7L DIESEL) Pin Circuit Description 1 K734 20BR/DG 02 1/2 PUMP CURRENT 2 K904 20DB/DG O2 1/2 RETURN 3 K80 20BR/TN O2 1/2 HEATER CONTROL RETURN 4 K299 20BR/WT O2 1/2 HEATER CONTROL SUPPLY 5 K733 20BR O2 1/2 PUMP CELL CURRENT TRIM 6 K141 20DB/YL O2 1/2 SIGNAL Component Location - 21 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor - Oxygen 1/1 > Page 1274 Component Location - 22 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor - Oxygen 1/1 > Page 1275 Component Location - 19 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor - Oxygen 1/1 > Page 1276 Connector: Name : SENSOR-OXYGEN 1/2 Color : # of pins : 6 Qualifier : (6.7L DIESEL) Pin Circuit Description 1 K734 20BR/DG 02 1/2 PUMP CURRENT 2 K904 20DB/DG O2 1/2 RETURN 3 K80 20BR/TN O2 1/2 HEATER CONTROL RETURN 4 K299 20BR/WT O2 1/2 HEATER CONTROL SUPPLY Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor - Oxygen 1/1 > Page 1277 5 K733 20BR O2 1/2 PUMP CELL CURRENT TRIM 6 K141 20DB/YL O2 1/2 SIGNAL Component Location - 21 Component Location - 22 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor - Oxygen 1/1 > Page 1278 Component Location - 19 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor - Oxygen 1/1 > Page 1279 Connector: Name : SENSOR-OXYGEN 1/2 Color : # of pins : 4 Qualifier : (GAS) Pin Circuit Description 1 K299 20BR/WT O2 1/2 HEATER CONTROL SUPPLY 2 Z43 20BK/LB GROUND 3 K904 20DB/DG O2 RETURN (DOWNSTREAM) 4 K141 20DB/YL O2 1/2 SIGNAL Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor - Oxygen 1/1 > Page 1280 Component Location - 21 Component Location - 22 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor - Oxygen 1/1 > Page 1281 Component Location - 19 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor - Oxygen 1/1 > Page 1282 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor - Oxygen 1/1 > Page 1283 Oxygen Sensor: Locations Sensor - Oxygen 2/1 Component ID: 433 Component : SENSOR-OXYGEN 2/1 Connector: Name : SENSOR-OXYGEN 2/1 Color : BLACK # of pins : 4 Qualifier : (3.7L/5.7L) Pin Circuit Description 1 K199 20BR/VT O2 2/1 HEATER CONTROL 2 Z934 20BK GROUND 3 K902 20BR/DG O2 RETURN (UPSTREAM) 4 K43 20DB/LG O2 2/1 SIGNAL Component Location - 22 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor - Oxygen 1/1 > Page 1284 Component Location - 23 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor - Oxygen 1/1 > Page 1285 Component Location - 19 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor - Oxygen 1/1 > Page 1286 Connector: Name : SENSOR-OXYGEN 2/1 Color : GRAY # of pins : 4 Qualifier : (4.7L) Pin Circuit Description 1 K199 20BR/VT O2 2/1 HEATER CONTROL 2 Z934 20BK GROUND 3 K902 20BR/DG O2 RETURN (UPSTREAM) 4 K43 20DB/LG O2 2/1 SIGNAL Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor - Oxygen 1/1 > Page 1287 Component Location - 22 Component Location - 23 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor - Oxygen 1/1 > Page 1288 Component Location - 19 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor - Oxygen 1/1 > Page 1289 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor - Oxygen 1/1 > Page 1290 Oxygen Sensor: Locations Sensor - Oxygen 2/2 Component ID: 434 Component : SENSOR-OXYGEN 2/2 Connector: Name : SENSOR-OXYGEN 2/2 Color : GRAY # of pins : 4 Qualifier : (4.7L/5.7L HD) Pin Circuit Description 1 K399 20BR/GY O2 2/2 HEATER CONTROL 2 Z992 20BK GROUND 3 K904 20DB/DG O2 RETURN (DOWNSTREAM) 4 K243 20BR O2 2/2 SIGNAL Component Location - 22 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor - Oxygen 1/1 > Page 1291 Component Location - 23 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor - Oxygen 1/1 > Page 1292 Component Location - 24 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor - Oxygen 1/1 > Page 1293 Component Location - 19 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor - Oxygen 1/1 > Page 1294 Connector: Name : SENSOR-OXYGEN 2/2 Color : BLACK # of pins : 4 Qualifier : (GAS LD) Pin Circuit Description 1 K399 20BR/GY O2 2/2 HEATER CONTROL 2 Z992 20BK GROUND 3 K904 20DB/DG O2 RETURN (DOWNSTREAM) 4 K243 20BR O2 2/2 SIGNAL Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor - Oxygen 1/1 > Page 1295 Component Location - 22 Component Location - 23 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor - Oxygen 1/1 > Page 1296 Component Location - 24 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor - Oxygen 1/1 > Page 1297 Component Location - 19 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor - Oxygen 1/1 > Page 1298 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Oxygen 1/1 Oxygen Sensor: Diagrams Sensor-Oxygen 1/1 Component ID: 431 Component : SENSOR-OXYGEN 1/1 Connector: Name : SENSOR-OXYGEN 1/1 Color : # of pins : 6 Qualifier : (6.7L DIESEL) Pin Circuit Description 1 K89 20BR/LG 02 1/1 PUMP CURRENT 2 K902 20BR/DG O2 1/1 RETURN 3 K79 20BR/LB O2 1/1 HEATER CONTROL RETURN 4 K99 20BR/LG O2 1/1 HEATER CONTROL SUPPLY 5 K103 20BR/LB O2 1/1 PUMP CELL CURRENT TRIM 6 K41 20DB/LB O2 1/1 SIGNAL Component Location - 21 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Oxygen 1/1 > Page 1301 Component Location - 22 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Oxygen 1/1 > Page 1302 Component Location - 24 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Oxygen 1/1 > Page 1303 Component Location - 19 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Oxygen 1/1 > Page 1304 Connector: Name : SENSOR-OXYGEN 1/1 Color : # of pins : 6 Qualifier : (6.7L DIESEL) Pin Circuit Description 1 K89 20BR/LG 02 1/1 PUMP CURRENT 2 K902 20BR/DG O2 1/1 RETURN 3 K79 20BR/LB O2 1/1 HEATER CONTROL RETURN 4 K99 20BR/LG O2 1/1 HEATER CONTROL SUPPLY Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Oxygen 1/1 > Page 1305 5 K103 20BR/LB O2 1/1 PUMP CELL CURRENT TRIM 6 K41 20DB/LB O2 1/1 SIGNAL Component Location - 21 Component Location - 22 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Oxygen 1/1 > Page 1306 Component Location - 24 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Oxygen 1/1 > Page 1307 Component Location - 19 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Oxygen 1/1 > Page 1308 Connector: Name : SENSOR-OXYGEN 1/1 Color : BLACK # of pins : 4 Qualifier : (GAS) Pin Circuit Description 1 K99 20BR/LG O2 1/1 HEATER CONTROL SUPPLY 2 Z42 20BK/LG GROUND 3 K902 20BR/DG O2 RETURN (UPSTREAM) 4 K41 20DB/LB O2 1/1 SIGNAL Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Oxygen 1/1 > Page 1309 Component Location - 21 Component Location - 22 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Oxygen 1/1 > Page 1310 Component Location - 24 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Oxygen 1/1 > Page 1311 Component Location - 19 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Oxygen 1/1 > Page 1312 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Oxygen 1/1 > Page 1313 Oxygen Sensor: Diagrams Sensor-Oxygen 1/2 Component ID: 432 Component : SENSOR-OXYGEN 1/2 Connector: Name : SENSOR-OXYGEN 1/2 Color : # of pins : 6 Qualifier : (6.7L DIESEL) Pin Circuit Description 1 K734 20BR/DG 02 1/2 PUMP CURRENT 2 K904 20DB/DG O2 1/2 RETURN 3 K80 20BR/TN O2 1/2 HEATER CONTROL RETURN 4 K299 20BR/WT O2 1/2 HEATER CONTROL SUPPLY 5 K733 20BR O2 1/2 PUMP CELL CURRENT TRIM 6 K141 20DB/YL O2 1/2 SIGNAL Component Location - 21 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Oxygen 1/1 > Page 1314 Component Location - 22 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Oxygen 1/1 > Page 1315 Component Location - 19 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Oxygen 1/1 > Page 1316 Connector: Name : SENSOR-OXYGEN 1/2 Color : # of pins : 6 Qualifier : (6.7L DIESEL) Pin Circuit Description 1 K734 20BR/DG 02 1/2 PUMP CURRENT 2 K904 20DB/DG O2 1/2 RETURN 3 K80 20BR/TN O2 1/2 HEATER CONTROL RETURN 4 K299 20BR/WT O2 1/2 HEATER CONTROL SUPPLY Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Oxygen 1/1 > Page 1317 5 K733 20BR O2 1/2 PUMP CELL CURRENT TRIM 6 K141 20DB/YL O2 1/2 SIGNAL Component Location - 21 Component Location - 22 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Oxygen 1/1 > Page 1318 Component Location - 19 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Oxygen 1/1 > Page 1319 Connector: Name : SENSOR-OXYGEN 1/2 Color : # of pins : 4 Qualifier : (GAS) Pin Circuit Description 1 K299 20BR/WT O2 1/2 HEATER CONTROL SUPPLY 2 Z43 20BK/LB GROUND 3 K904 20DB/DG O2 RETURN (DOWNSTREAM) 4 K141 20DB/YL O2 1/2 SIGNAL Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Oxygen 1/1 > Page 1320 Component Location - 21 Component Location - 22 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Oxygen 1/1 > Page 1321 Component Location - 19 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Oxygen 1/1 > Page 1322 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Oxygen 1/1 > Page 1323 Oxygen Sensor: Diagrams Sensor-Oxygen 2/1 Component ID: 433 Component : SENSOR-OXYGEN 2/1 Connector: Name : SENSOR-OXYGEN 2/1 Color : BLACK # of pins : 4 Qualifier : (3.7L/5.7L) Pin Circuit Description 1 K199 20BR/VT O2 2/1 HEATER CONTROL 2 Z934 20BK GROUND 3 K902 20BR/DG O2 RETURN (UPSTREAM) 4 K43 20DB/LG O2 2/1 SIGNAL Component Location - 22 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Oxygen 1/1 > Page 1324 Component Location - 23 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Oxygen 1/1 > Page 1325 Component Location - 19 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Oxygen 1/1 > Page 1326 Connector: Name : SENSOR-OXYGEN 2/1 Color : GRAY # of pins : 4 Qualifier : (4.7L) Pin Circuit Description 1 K199 20BR/VT O2 2/1 HEATER CONTROL 2 Z934 20BK GROUND 3 K902 20BR/DG O2 RETURN (UPSTREAM) 4 K43 20DB/LG O2 2/1 SIGNAL Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Oxygen 1/1 > Page 1327 Component Location - 22 Component Location - 23 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Oxygen 1/1 > Page 1328 Component Location - 19 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Oxygen 1/1 > Page 1329 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Oxygen 1/1 > Page 1330 Oxygen Sensor: Diagrams Sensor-Oxygen 2/2 Component ID: 434 Component : SENSOR-OXYGEN 2/2 Connector: Name : SENSOR-OXYGEN 2/2 Color : GRAY # of pins : 4 Qualifier : (4.7L/5.7L HD) Pin Circuit Description 1 K399 20BR/GY O2 2/2 HEATER CONTROL 2 Z992 20BK GROUND 3 K904 20DB/DG O2 RETURN (DOWNSTREAM) 4 K243 20BR O2 2/2 SIGNAL Component Location - 22 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Oxygen 1/1 > Page 1331 Component Location - 23 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Oxygen 1/1 > Page 1332 Component Location - 24 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Oxygen 1/1 > Page 1333 Component Location - 19 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Oxygen 1/1 > Page 1334 Connector: Name : SENSOR-OXYGEN 2/2 Color : BLACK # of pins : 4 Qualifier : (GAS LD) Pin Circuit Description 1 K399 20BR/GY O2 2/2 HEATER CONTROL 2 Z992 20BK GROUND 3 K904 20DB/DG O2 RETURN (DOWNSTREAM) 4 K243 20BR O2 2/2 SIGNAL Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Oxygen 1/1 > Page 1335 Component Location - 22 Component Location - 23 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Oxygen 1/1 > Page 1336 Component Location - 24 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Oxygen 1/1 > Page 1337 Component Location - 19 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Oxygen 1/1 > Page 1338 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 1339 Oxygen Sensor: Application and ID - Cylinder bank number one is the bank that contains number one cylinder. See: Engine, Cooling and Exhaust/Engine/Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks/Firing Order Cylinder #1 on left side. Cylinder #1 on right side. - The first oxygen sensor in cylinder bank # 1 is numbered O2 Sensor 1/1. - The second oxygen sensor in cylinder bank # 1 is numbered O2 Sensor 1/2. - A third oxygen sensor in cylinder bank # 1 would be numbered O2 Sensor 1/3. - The first oxygen sensor in cylinder bank # 2 is numbered O2 Sensor 2/1. - The second oxygen sensor in cylinder bank # 2 is numbered O2 Sensor 1/1. - If a V-6 or V-8 vehicle only uses one downstream Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) it is numbered O2 Sensor 1/2, even if it uses two upstream HO2S. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 1340 Oxygen Sensor: Description and Operation DESCRIPTION The Oxygen Sensors (O2S) are attached to, and protrude into the vehicle exhaust system. Depending on the engine or emission package, the vehicle may use a total of either 2 or 4 sensors. Federal Emission Packages : Two sensors are used: upstream (referred to as 1/1) and downstream (referred to as 1/2). With this emission package, the upstream sensor (1/1) is located just before the main catalytic convertor. The downstream sensor (1/2) is located just after the main catalytic convertor. California Emission Packages: On this emissions package, 4 sensors are used: 2 upstream (referred to as 1/1 and 2/1) and 2 downstream (referred to as 1/2 and 2/2). With this emission package, the right upstream sensor (2/1) is located in the right exhaust downpipe just before the mini-catalytic convertor. The left upstream sensor (1/1) is located in the left exhaust downpipe just before the mini-catalytic convertor. The right downstream sensor (2/2) is located in the right exhaust downpipe just after the mini-catalytic convertor, and before the main catalytic convertor. The left downstream sensor (1/2) is located in the left exhaust downpipe just after the mini-catalytic convertor, and before the main catalytic convertor. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Oxygen Sensor: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL CAUTION: Never apply any type of grease to the oxygen sensor electrical connector, or attempt any soldering of the sensor wiring harness. WARNING: The exhaust manifold, exhaust pipes and catalytic converter become very hot during engine operation. Allow engine to cool before removing oxygen sensor. 1. Raise and support vehicle. 2. Disconnect wire connector from O2S sensor. CAUTION: When disconnecting sensor electrical connector, do not pull directly on wire going into sensor. 3. Remove O2S sensor with an oxygen sensor removal and installation tool. 4. Clean threads in exhaust pipe using appropriate tap. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 1343 Oxygen Sensor: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION Threads of new oxygen sensors are factory coated with anti-seize compound to aid in removal.DO NOT add any additional anti-seize compound to threads of a new oxygen sensor. 1. Install O2S sensor. Tighten to 41 Nm (30 ft. lbs.) torque. 2. Connect O2S sensor wire connector. 3. Lower vehicle. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL 1. Disconnect exhaust gas pressure sensor electrical connector (1). 2. Using a 6 point deepwell socket, remove exhaust gas sensor (2). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 1348 Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION 1. Using a 6 point deepwell socket, install exhaust gas pressure sensor. 2. Tighten sensor to 18 Nm (13 ft. lbs.). 3. Connect exhaust gas pressure sensor electrical connector (3). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Transmission Range Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Locations Sensor-Transmission Range Component ID: 444 Component : SENSOR-TRANSMISSION RANGE Connector: Name : SENSOR-TRANSMISSION RANGE Color : # of pins : 10 Qualifier : (RC) Pin Circuit Description 1 T825 20DG/YL TRS NEUTRAL SIGNAL 2 T3 20DG/DB TRS T3 SIGNAL 3 T828 20DG/DB TRS 1 SIGNAL 4 F1 20PK/WT FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (OFF-RUN-START) 5 T824 20YL/DB TRS PARK SIGNAL 6 Z157 16BK/LG GROUND 7 T42 20DG/YL TRS T42 SIGNAL 8 T827 20DG/LB TRS DRIVE SIGNAL 9 T826 20DG/DB TRS REVERSE SIGNAL 10 T41 20YL/DB TRS T41 SIGNAL (P/N) Component Location - 20 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Transmission Range > Page 1353 Component Location - 19 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Transmission Range > Page 1354 Component Location - 26 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Transmission Range > Page 1355 Connector: Name : SENSOR-TRANSMISSION RANGE Color : # of pins : 6 Qualifier : (RE) Pin Circuit Description 1-2 T117 20DG/YL TRS SIGNAL 3-4-- Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Transmission Range > Page 1356 5 T917 20YL/TN TRS RETURN 6 T41 20YL/DB TRS T41 SIGNAL (P/N) Component Location - 20 Component Location - 19 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Transmission Range > Page 1357 Component Location - 26 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Transmission Range > Page 1358 Connector: Name : SENSOR-TRANSMISSION RANGE Color : LT. GREEN # of pins : 10 Qualifier : (RLE) Pin Circuit Description 1 T16 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT 2-3 K900 20DB/DG SENSOR GROUND 4 T54 20DG/OR TRANSMISSION TEMPERATURE SIGNAL Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Transmission Range > Page 1359 5-6-7 T1 20DG/LB TRS T1 SIGNAL 8 T3 20DG/DB TRS T3 SIGNAL 9 T42 20DG/YL TRS T42 SIGNAL 10 T41 20YL/DB TRS T41 SIGNAL (P/N) Component Location - 20 Component Location - 19 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Transmission Range > Page 1360 Component Location - 26 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Transmission Range > Page 1361 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Transmission Range > Page 1362 Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Locations Assembly-Transmission Solenoid/TRS Component ID: 21 Component : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID/TRS Connector: Name : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID/TRS Color : BLACK # of pins : 23 Qualifier : (RFE) Pin Circuit Description 1-2 T20 20DG/WT L/R CONTROL 3-4 T41 20YL/DB TRS T41 SIGNAL (P/N) 5 T42 20DG/YL TRS T42 SIGNAL 6-- 7 T60 20YL/GY OD SOLENOID CONTROL 8 T3 20DG/DB TRS T3 SIGNAL 9 T1 20DG/LB TRS T1 SIGNAL 10 T16 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT 11 T48 20BR/YL 4C PRESSURE SIGNAL 12 T118 20DG LINE PRESSURE CONTROL 13 T4 20DG/RD TRS T2 SIGNAL 13 T4 20DG/LB TRS T2 SIGNAL 14 T50 20DG/PK L/R PRESSURE SIGNAL 14 T50 20YL/TN L/R PRESSURE SIGNAL 15 T147 20DG/YL 2C PRESSURE SIGNAL 16 T9 20DG/TN OD PRESSURE SIGNAL 17 T59 20YL/LB UD CONTROL 18 T29 20YL/WT UD PRESSURE SIGNAL 19 T259 20YL/DG 4C CONTROL 20 T219 20YL/LG 2C CONTROL 21 T140 20YL/GY MS CONTROL 22 T160 20DG/WT SENSOR GROUND 22 K900 20DB/DG SENSOR GROUND 23 T54 20DG/OR TRANSMISSION TEMPERATURE SIGNAL Component Location - 21 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Transmission Range > Page 1363 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Transmission Range Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Diagrams Sensor-Transmission Range Component ID: 444 Component : SENSOR-TRANSMISSION RANGE Connector: Name : SENSOR-TRANSMISSION RANGE Color : # of pins : 10 Qualifier : (RC) Pin Circuit Description 1 T825 20DG/YL TRS NEUTRAL SIGNAL 2 T3 20DG/DB TRS T3 SIGNAL 3 T828 20DG/DB TRS 1 SIGNAL 4 F1 20PK/WT FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (OFF-RUN-START) 5 T824 20YL/DB TRS PARK SIGNAL 6 Z157 16BK/LG GROUND 7 T42 20DG/YL TRS T42 SIGNAL 8 T827 20DG/LB TRS DRIVE SIGNAL 9 T826 20DG/DB TRS REVERSE SIGNAL 10 T41 20YL/DB TRS T41 SIGNAL (P/N) Component Location - 20 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Transmission Range > Page 1366 Component Location - 19 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Transmission Range > Page 1367 Component Location - 26 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Transmission Range > Page 1368 Connector: Name : SENSOR-TRANSMISSION RANGE Color : # of pins : 6 Qualifier : (RE) Pin Circuit Description 1-2 T117 20DG/YL TRS SIGNAL 3-4-- Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Transmission Range > Page 1369 5 T917 20YL/TN TRS RETURN 6 T41 20YL/DB TRS T41 SIGNAL (P/N) Component Location - 20 Component Location - 19 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Transmission Range > Page 1370 Component Location - 26 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Transmission Range > Page 1371 Connector: Name : SENSOR-TRANSMISSION RANGE Color : LT. GREEN # of pins : 10 Qualifier : (RLE) Pin Circuit Description 1 T16 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT 2-3 K900 20DB/DG SENSOR GROUND 4 T54 20DG/OR TRANSMISSION TEMPERATURE SIGNAL Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Transmission Range > Page 1372 5-6-7 T1 20DG/LB TRS T1 SIGNAL 8 T3 20DG/DB TRS T3 SIGNAL 9 T42 20DG/YL TRS T42 SIGNAL 10 T41 20YL/DB TRS T41 SIGNAL (P/N) Component Location - 20 Component Location - 19 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Transmission Range > Page 1373 Component Location - 26 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Transmission Range > Page 1374 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Transmission Range > Page 1375 Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Diagrams Assembly-Transmission Solenoid/TRS Component ID: 21 Component : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID/TRS Connector: Name : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID/TRS Color : BLACK # of pins : 23 Qualifier : (RFE) Pin Circuit Description 1-2 T20 20DG/WT L/R CONTROL 3-4 T41 20YL/DB TRS T41 SIGNAL (P/N) 5 T42 20DG/YL TRS T42 SIGNAL 6-- 7 T60 20YL/GY OD SOLENOID CONTROL 8 T3 20DG/DB TRS T3 SIGNAL 9 T1 20DG/LB TRS T1 SIGNAL 10 T16 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT 11 T48 20BR/YL 4C PRESSURE SIGNAL 12 T118 20DG LINE PRESSURE CONTROL 13 T4 20DG/RD TRS T2 SIGNAL 13 T4 20DG/LB TRS T2 SIGNAL 14 T50 20DG/PK L/R PRESSURE SIGNAL 14 T50 20YL/TN L/R PRESSURE SIGNAL 15 T147 20DG/YL 2C PRESSURE SIGNAL 16 T9 20DG/TN OD PRESSURE SIGNAL 17 T59 20YL/LB UD CONTROL 18 T29 20YL/WT UD PRESSURE SIGNAL 19 T259 20YL/DG 4C CONTROL 20 T219 20YL/LG 2C CONTROL 21 T140 20YL/GY MS CONTROL 22 T160 20DG/WT SENSOR GROUND 22 K900 20DB/DG SENSOR GROUND 23 T54 20DG/OR TRANSMISSION TEMPERATURE SIGNAL Component Location - 21 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Transmission Range > Page 1376 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > 42RLE Automatic Transmission Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Description and Operation 42RLE Automatic Transmission Description DESCRIPTION The Transmission Range Sensor (TRS) (2) is mounted to the top of the valve body inside the transmission and can only be serviced by removing the valve body assembly. The electrical connector extends through the transmission case. The Transmission Range Sensor (TRS) has four switch contacts that monitor shift lever position and send the information to the PCM. Operation OPERATION The Transmission Range Sensor (TRS) communicates shift lever position (SLP) to the TCM as a combination of open and closed switches. Each shift lever position has an assigned combination of switch states (open/closed) that the TCM receives from four sense circuits. The TCM interprets this information and determines the appropriate transmission gear position and shift schedule. Since there are four switches, there are 16 possible combinations of open and closed switches (codes). Seven of these codes are related to gear position and three are recognized as "between gear" codes. This results in six codes which should never occur. These are called "invalid" codes. An invalid code will result in a DTC, and the TCM will then determine the shift lever position based on pressure switch data. This allows reasonably normal transmission operation with a TRS failure. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 1379 Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Description and Operation 545RFE Automatic Transmission Description DESCRIPTION The Transmission Range Sensor (TRS) is part of the solenoid module, which is mounted to the top of the valve body inside the transmission. The Transmission Range Sensor (TRS) has five switch contact pins that: - Determine shift lever position - Supply ground to the Starter Relay in Park and Neutral only. - Supply +12 V to the backup lamps in Reverse only. The TRS also has an integrated temperature sensor (thermistor) that communicates transmission temperature to the TCM and PCM. Operation OPERATION The Transmission Range Sensor (TRS) communicates shift lever position to the TCM as a combination of open and closed switches. Each shift lever position has an assigned combination of switch states (open/closed) that the TCM receives from four sense circuits. The TCM interprets this information and determines the appropriate transmission gear position and shift schedule. There are many possible combinations of open and closed switches (codes). Seven of these possible codes are related to gear position and five are recognized as "between gear" codes. This results in many codes which should never occur. These are called "invalid" codes. An invalid code will result in a DTC, and the TCM will then determine the shift lever position based on pressure switch data. This allows reasonably normal transmission operation with a TRS failure. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 1380 Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Description and Operation 68RFE Automatic Transmission Description DESCRIPTION The Transmission Range Sensor (TRS) is part of the solenoid module, which is mounted to the top of the valve body inside the transmission. The Transmission Range Sensor (TRS) has five switch contact pins that: - Determine shift lever position - Supply ground to the Starter Relay in Park and Neutral only. The TRS also has an integrated temperature sensor (thermistor) that communicates transmission temperature to the TCM and PCM. Operation OPERATION The Transmission Range Sensor (TRS) communicates shift lever position to the TCM as a combination of open and closed switches. Each shift lever position has an assigned combination of switch states (open/closed) that the TCM receives from four sense circuits. The TCM interprets this information and determines the appropriate transmission gear position and shift schedule. There are many possible combinations of open and closed switches (codes). Five of these possible codes correspond to valid gear position, there are two codes for the neutral position and three are recognized as "between gear" codes. This results in many codes which should never occur. These are called "invalid" codes. An invalid code will result in a DTC, and the TCM will then determine the shift lever position based on pressure switch data. This allows reasonably normal transmission operation with a TRS failure. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 1381 Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Description and Operation 48RE Automatic Transmission Description DESCRIPTION The Transmission Range Sensor (TRS) has 3 primary functions: - Provide a PARK/NEUTRAL start signal to the engine controller and the starter relay. - Turn the Back-up lamps on when the transmission is in REVERSE and the engine (ignition) is on. - Provide a transmission range signal to the instrument cluster. The sensor is mounted in the transmission housing near the valve body, just above the pan rail. It's in the same position as the Park/Neutral switch on other transmissions. The TRS contacts a cammed surface on the manual valve lever. The cammed surface translates the rotational motion of the manual lever into the linear motion of the sensor. The cammed surface on the manual lever is comprised of two parts controlling the TRS signal: The insulator portion contacts the switch poppet when the manual lever is not in PARK or NEUTRAL. The manual lever itself contacts the poppet when the lever is in PARK or NEUTRAL; providing a ground for the signal from the starter relay and the appropriate engine controller. Operation OPERATION Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 1382 As the switch moves through its linear motion contacts slide across a circuit board which changes the resistance between the range sensing pins of the switch. A power supply on the instrument cluster provides a regulated voltage signal to the switch. The return signal is decoded by the cluster, which then controls the PRNDL display to correspond with the correct transmission range. A bus message of transmission range is also sent by the cluster. In REVERSE range a second contact set closes the circuit providing power to the reverse lamps. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 1383 Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Description and Operation AS68RC Automatic Transmission Description DESCRIPTION TRANSMISSION RANGE SENSOR The transmission range sensor (1) is mounted externally on the left side of the transmission case. Operation OPERATION The transmission range sensor prohibits the vehicle from starting in any gear other than park and neutral. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 1384 Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Testing and Inspection DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING - TRANSMISSION RANGE SENSOR (TRS) NOTE: For all circuit identification in the following steps, Refer to the appropriate Wiring Information. 1. Raise vehicle on suitable hoist. 2. Disconnect the vehicle's shift cable from the manual lever. 3. With the manual lever in the PARK position (the PARK position is with the manual lever moved to the full rearward position), measure the resistance between the Park/Neutral Position Sense pin of the TRS and the transmission case. The resistance should be less than 5 ohms. 4. With the manual lever in the NEUTRAL position (the NEUTRAL position is with the manual lever moved two detents forward of the full rearward position), measure the resistance between the Park/Neutral Position Sense pin of the TRS and the transmission case. The resistance should be less than 5 ohms. 5. If the resistance is greater than 5 ohms in either of the previous steps, check for a dirty contact between the tip of the TRS rod and the valve body manual lever. If the contact is OK, replace the TRS. 6. With the manual lever in the REVERSE position (the REVERSE position is with the manual lever moved one detent forward of the full rearward position), measure the resistance between the Fused Ignition Switch Output and the Back-up Lamp feed pins of the TRS. The resistance should be less than 5 ohms. If the resistance is greater than 5 ohms, replace the TRS. 7. With the manual lever in the PARK position (the PARK position is with the manual lever moved to the full rearward position), measure the resistance between the Transmission Range Sensor MUX and the Transmission Range Sensor 5V Supply pins of the TRS. The resistance should be 522.2 ohms. If the resistance is not correct, replace the TRS. 8. With the manual lever in the REVERSE position (the REVERSE position is with the manual lever moved one detent forward of the full rearward position), measure the resistance between the Transmission Range Sensor MUX and the Transmission Range Sensor 5V Supply pins of the TRS. The resistance should be 206.2 ohms. If the resistance is not correct, replace the TRS. 9. With the manual lever in the NEUTRAL position (the NEUTRAL position is with the manual lever moved two detents forward of the full rearward position), measure the resistance between the Transmission Range Sensor MUX and the Transmission Range Sensor 5V Supply pins of the TRS. The resistance should be 108.6 ohms. If the resistance is not correct, replace the TRS. 10. With the manual lever in the DRIVE position (the DRIVE position is with the manual lever moved three detents forward of the full rearward position), measure the resistance between the Transmission Range Sensor MUX and the Transmission Range Sensor 5V Supply pins of the TRS. The resistance should be 59.9 ohms. If the resistance is not correct, replace the TRS. 11. With the manual lever in the SECOND position (the SECOND position is with the manual lever moved one detent rearward of the full forward position), measure the resistance between the Transmission Range Sensor MUX and the Back-up Lamp feed pins of the TRS. The resistance should be 31.9 ohms. If the resistance is not correct, replace the TRS. 12. With the manual lever in the LOW position (the LOW position is with the manual lever moved to the full forward position), measure the resistance between the Transmission Range Sensor MUX and the Back-up Lamp feed pins of the TRS. The resistance should be 13.7 ohms. If the resistance is not correct, replace the TRS. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 42RLE Automatic Transmission Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Service and Repair 42RLE Automatic Transmission Removal REMOVAL 1. Remove valve body assembly from vehicle. See: Transmission and Drivetrain/Automatic Transmission/Transaxle/Valve Body/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/42RLE Automatic Transmission/Removal 2. Remove the manual shaft seal (1). 3. Remove manual shaft/TRS retaining screw (1). 4. Slide TRS off of manual valve shaft. Installation INSTALLATION Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 1387 1. Install the TRS (2) to the manual shaft. Make sure TRS locating pin rests in manual valve bore slot. 2. Install the TRS/manual shaft retaining screw (1) and torque to 5 Nm (45 in. lbs.) torque. 3. Install the manual shaft seal (1). 4. Install valve body to the transmission. See: Transmission and Drivetrain/Automatic Transmission/Transaxle/Valve Body/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/42RLE Automatic Transmission/Installation Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 1388 Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Service and Repair 48RE Automatic Transmission Removal REMOVAL 1. Raise vehicle and position drain pan under the transmission range sensor (TRS). 2. Move the transmission manual lever to the manual LOW position. The manual LOW position is with the manual lever in the forward-most detent. 3. Disengage the wiring connector from the TRS. 4. Remove the two screws holding the TRS to the TRS mounting bracket. 5. Remove the TRS (3) from the TRS mounting bracket by pulling it straight out of the bracket. 6. If necessary, loosen the TRS mounting bracket (2) in the transmission case using Adapter 8581 (3). 7. If necessary, remove the TRS mounting bracket (2) from the transmission case. Installation INSTALLATION Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 1389 1. Move the transmission manual shaft lever to the manual LOW position. 2. If necessary, install the TRS mounting bracket (2) into the transmission case. Using Adapter 8581 (3), tighten the mounting bracket to 34 Nm (300 in.lbs.). 3. Install the TRS (3) into the mounting bracket (2) with the wiring connector facing the front of the transmission. 4. Install the two screws to hold the TRS to the mounting bracket. Tighten the screws to 5 Nm (45 in.lbs.). 5. Verify proper sensor operation (1-4). 6. Move the transmission manual shaft lever to the PARK position. 7. Connect TRS wiring connector to the TRS and lower vehicle. 8. Refill the transmission fluid to the correct level. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 1390 Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Service and Repair AS68RC Automatic Transmission Removal REMOVAL NOTE: Be certain the transmission is in the park lock position. TRANSMISSION RANGE SENSOR 1. Remove the shift cable from the manual shift lever (2). 2. Disconnect the wire harness from the transmission range sensor. 3. Remove the two nuts (3) from the control shaft. TRS REMOVAL/INSTALLATION Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 1391 4. Pry open the tabs on the stake washer (5), remove the nut (3) and the stake washer (5). 5. Remove the bolts (2). 6. Remove the transmission range sensor (1) from the transmission control shaft (4). Installation INSTALLATION 1. Install the transmission range sensor (3) onto the control shaft (5). 2. Install the stake washer and the nut (4) and hand tighten. 3. With the transmission in neutral install the alignment tool 9983 (6) onto the control shaft (5) and into the alignment hole (1). 4. Install the bolts (2). 5. After aligning the transmission range sensor, tighten the bolts (2) 12.5 Nm (9 ft.lbs.) 6. Remove the alignment tool 9983 (6) 7. Tighten the control shaft nut to 7 Nm (62 in.lbs.) 8. Bend the tabs on the stake washer and nut (4) in at least two places to lock in position. TRANSMISSION RANGE SENSOR Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 1392 9. Install the manual shift lever (2) onto the control shaft. 10. Install the inner nut (3) onto the control shaft. Tighten the inner nut to 12.5 Nm (9 ft.lbs). 11. Install the outer nut (3) onto the control shaft. While holding the inner nut, tighten the outer not to 12.5 Nm (9 ft.lbs) Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Vehicle Speed Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions Warnings WARNINGS - GENERAL WARNINGS provide information to prevent personal injury and vehicle damage. Below is a list of general warnings that should be followed any time a vehicle is being serviced. WARNING: Always wear safety glasses for eye protection. WARNING: Use safety stands anytime a procedure requires being under a vehicle. WARNING: Be sure that the ignition switch always is in the off position, unless the procedure requires it to be on. WARNING: Set the parking brake when working on any vehicle. An automatic transmission should be in park. A manual transmission should be in neutral. WARNING: Operate the engine only in a well-ventilated area. WARNING: Keep away from moving parts when the engine is running, especially the fan and belts. WARNING: To prevent serious burns, avoid contact with hot parts such as the radiator, exhaust manifold(s), tail pipe, catalytic converter and muffler. WARNING: Do not allow flame or sparks near the battery. Gases are always present in and around the battery. WARNING: Always remove rings, watches, loose hanging jewelry and avoid loose clothing. How to Use Wiring Diagrams DESCRIPTION - HOW TO USE WIRING DIAGRAMS DaimlerChrysler Corporation wiring diagrams are designed to provide information regarding the vehicles wiring content. In order to effectively use the wiring diagrams to diagnose and repair DaimlerChrysler Corporation vehicles, it is important to understand all of their features and characteristics. Diagrams are arranged such that the power (B+) side of the circuit is placed near the top of the page, and the ground (B-) side of the circuit is placed near the bottom of the page. All switches, components, and modules are shown in the at rest position with the doors closed and the key removed from the ignition. Components are shown two ways. A solid line around a component indicates that the component is complete. A dashed line around the component indicates that the component is being shown is not complete. Incomplete components have a reference number to indicate the page where the component is shown complete. It is important to realize that no attempt is made on the diagrams to represent components and wiring as they appear on the vehicle. For example, a short piece of wire is treated the same as a long one. In addition, switches and other components are shown as simply as possible, with regard to function only. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1397 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1398 SYMBOLS International symbols are used throughout the wiring diagrams. These symbols are consistent with those being used around the world. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1399 TERMINOLOGY This is a list of terms and definitions used in the wiring diagrams. LHD - Left Hand Drive Vehicles RHD - Right Hand Drive Vehicles ATX - Automatic Transmissions-Front Wheel Drive MTX Manual Transmissions-Front Wheel Drive Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1400 AT - Automatic Transmissions-Rear Wheel Drive MT - Manual Transmissions-Rear Wheel Drive SOHC - Single Over Head Cam Engine DOHC - Double Over Head Cam Engine Export - Vehicles Built For Sale In Markets Other Than North America Except Export - Vehicles Built For Sale In North America Circuit Functions DESCRIPTION - CIRCUIT FUNCTIONS All circuits in the diagrams use an alpha/numeric code to identify the wire and it's function. To identify which circuit code applies to a system, refer to the Circuit Identification Code Chart. This chart shows the main circuits only and does not show the secondary codes that may apply to some models. Circuit Information DESCRIPTION - CIRCUIT INFORMATION Each wire shown in the diagrams contains a code which identifies the main circuit, a specific part of the main circuit, gage of wire, and color. An example would be A 2 18 LB/YL. This is a Battery Feed circuit, level two, eighteen gauge, light blue with a yellow tracer. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1401 Connector, Ground and Splice Information DESCRIPTION - CONNECTOR, GROUND AND SPLICE INFORMATION CAUTION: Not all connectors are serviced. Some connectors are serviced only with a harness. A typical example might be the Supplemental Restraint System connectors. Always check parts availability before attempting a repair. IDENTIFICATION In-line connectors are identified by a number, as follows: - In-line connectors located in the engine compartment are C100 series numbers. - In-line connectors located in the instrument panel area are C200 series numbers. - In-line connectors located in the body are C300 series numbers. - Jumper harness connectors are C400 series numbers. - Grounds and ground connectors are identified with a "G" and follow the same series numbering as the in-line connectors. - Splices are identified with an "S" and follow the same series numbering as the in-line connectors. In addition, S001-S099 numbers are located in the engine compartment. - Component connectors are identified by the component name instead of a number. Multiple connectors on a component use a C1, C2, etc. identifier. LOCATIONS Vehicle/Locations contains the master connector/ground/splice location index charts with hyperlinks to the applicable location illustrations. The illustrations contain the connector name (or number)/ground number/splice number and component identification. The abbreviation T/O is used in the component location section to indicate a point in which the wiring harness branches out to a component. The abbreviation N/S means Not Shown in the illustrations Section Identification and Information DESCRIPTION - SECTION IDENTIFICATION AND INFORMATION The wiring diagrams are grouped into individual sections. If a component is most likely found in a particular group, it will be shown complete (all wires, Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1402 connectors, and pins) within that group. For example, the Auto Shutdown Relay is most likely to be found in Powertrain Management, so it is shown there complete. It can, however, be shown partially in another group if it contains some associated wiring. Splice diagrams show the entire splice and provide references to other sections the splices serves. Splice Information only contains splice diagrams that are not shown in their entirety somewhere else in the wiring diagrams. Connector Pin-Outs shows each connector and the circuits involved with that connector. The connectors are identified using the name/number on the diagram pages. Removal REMOVAL 1. Disconnect battery. 2. Release Connector Lock (2). 3. Disconnect the connector (3) being repaired from its mating half/component. 4. Remove the dress cover (if applicable) (1). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1403 5. Release the Secondary Terminal Lock, if required (1). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1404 6. Position the connector locking finger away from the terminal using the proper special tool. Pull on the wire to remove the terminal from the connector. Installation Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1405 INSTALLATION 1. Insert the removed terminal in the same cavity on the repair connector. 2. Repeat steps for each terminal in the connector, being sure that all wires are inserted into the proper cavities. For additional connector pin-out identification, refer to the wiring diagrams. 3. When the connector is re-assembled, the secondary terminal lock must be placed in the locked position to prevent terminal push out. 4. Replace dress cover (if applicable). 5. Connect connector to its mating half/component. 6. Connect battery and test all affected systems. Removal REMOVAL 1. Disconnect the battery. 2. Locate the diode in the harness, and remove the protective covering. 3. Remove the diode from the harness, pay attention to the current flow direction (1) (2) (3). Installation INSTALLATION 1. Remove the insulation from the wires in the harness. Only remove enough insulation to solder in the new diode. 2. Install the new diode in the harness, making sure current flow is correct. If necessary, refer to the appropriate wiring diagram for current flow. 3. Solder the connection together using rosin core type solder only. Do not use acid core solder. 4. Tape the diode to the harness using electrical tape. Make sure the diode is completely sealed from the elements. 5. Re-connect the battery and test affected systems. Removal REMOVAL 1. Follow steps for removing terminals described in the connector removal section. 2. Cut the wire 6 inches from the back of the connector. Installation INSTALLATION 1. Select a wire from the terminal repair kit that best matches the color and gage of the wire being repaired. 2. Cut the repair wire to the proper length and remove one-half (1/2) inch of insulation. 3. Splice the repair wire to the wire harness (see wire splicing procedure). See: Service Procedures/Wire Splicing 4. Insert the repaired wire into the connector. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1406 5. Install the connector locking wedge, if required, and reconnect the connector to its mating half/component. 6. Re-tape the wire harness starting at 1-1/2 inches behind the connector and 2 inches past the repair. 7. Connect battery and test all affected systems. Wire Splicing STANDARD PROCEDURE - WIRE SPLICING When splicing a wire, it is important that the correct gage be used as shown in the wiring diagrams. 1. Remove one-half (1/2) inch of insulation from each wire that needs to be spliced. 2. Place a piece of adhesive lined heat shrink tubing on one side of the wire. Make sure the tubing will be long enough to cover and seal the entire repair area. 3. Place the strands of wire overlapping each other inside of the splice clip (1). 4. Using crimping tool (1), Mopar p/n 05019912AA, crimp the splice clip and wires together. 5. Solder (3) the connection (2) together using rosin core type solder (1) only. CAUTION: DO NOT USE ACID CORE SOLDER. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1407 6. Center the heat shrink tubing (2) over the joint and heat using a heat gun. Heat the joint until the tubing is tightly sealed and sealant (1) comes out of both ends of the tubing. Special Tools WIRING/TERMINAL PROBING TOOL PACKAGE 6807 TERMINAL PICK TOOL SET 6680 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1408 TERMINAL REMOVING TOOLS 6932 AND 8638 TERMINAL REMOVING TOOL 6934 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1409 Vehicle Speed Sensor: Diagnostic Aids Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) Sensitive Devices STANDARD PROCEDURE - ELECTROSTATIC DISCHARGE (ESD) SENSITIVE DEVICES All ESD sensitive components are solid state and a symbol is used to indicate this. When handling any component with this symbol, comply with the following procedures to reduce the possibility of electrostatic charge build up on the body and inadvertent discharge into the component. If it is not known whether the part is ESD sensitive, assume that it is. 1. Always touch a known good ground before handling the part. This should be repeated while handling the part and more frequently after sliding across a seat, sitting down from a standing position, or walking a distance. 2. Avoid touching electrical terminals of the part, unless instructed to do so by a written procedure. 3. When using a voltmeter, be sure to connect the ground lead first. 4. Do not remove the part from it's protective packing until it is time to install the part. 5. Before removing the part from it's package, ground the package to a known good ground on the vehicle. Testing Of Voltage Potential STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING OF VOLTAGE POTENTIAL 1. Connect the ground lead of a voltmeter to a known good ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the voltmeter to the selected test point. The vehicle ignition may need to be turned ON to check voltage. Refer to the appropriate test procedure. Testing For Continuity Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1410 STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING FOR CONTINUITY 1. Remove the fuse (1) for the circuit being checked or, disconnect the battery. 2. Connect one lead of the ohmmeter to one side of the circuit being tested 3. Connect the other lead to the other end of the circuit being tested. Low or no resistance means good continuity. Testing For A Short To Ground STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING FOR A SHORT TO GROUND 1. Remove the fuse and disconnect all items involved with the fuse. 2. Connect a test light or a voltmeter across the terminals of the fuse. 3. Starting at the fuse block, wiggle the wiring harness about six to eight inches apart and watch the voltmeter/test lamp. 4. If the voltmeter registers voltage or the test lamp glows, there is a short to ground in that general area of the wiring harness. Testing For A Short To Ground On Fuses Powering Several Loads STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING FOR A SHORT TO GROUND ON FUSES POWERING SEVERAL LOADS 1. Refer to the wiring diagrams and disconnect or isolate all items on the suspected fused circuits. 2. Replace the blown fuse. 3. Supply power to the fuse by turning ON the ignition switch or re-connecting the battery. 4. Start connecting or energizing the items in the fuse circuit one at a time. When the fuse blows the circuit with the short to ground has been isolated. Testing For A Voltage Drop STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING FOR A VOLTAGE DROP Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1411 1. Connect the positive lead of the voltmeter to the side of the circuit closest to the battery. 2. Connect the other lead of the voltmeter to the other side of the switch, component or circuit. 3. Operate the item. 4. The voltmeter will show the difference in voltage between the two points. Troubleshooting Wiring Problems DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING - WIRING HARNESS TROUBLESHOOTING TOOLS When diagnosing a problem in an electrical circuit there are several common tools necessary. These tools are listed and explained below. - Jumper Wire - This is a test wire used to connect two points of a circuit. It can be used to bypass an open in a circuit. WARNING: Never use a jumper wire across a load, such as a motor, connected between a battery feed and ground. - Voltmeter - Used to check for voltage on a circuit. Always connect the black lead to a known good ground and the red lead to the positive side of the circuit. CAUTION: Most of the electrical components used in today's vehicles are Solid State. When checking voltages in these circuits, use a meter with a 10 - megohm or greater impedance rating. - Ohmmeter - Used to check the resistance between two points of a circuit. Low or no resistance in a circuit means good continuity. CAUTION: Most of the electrical components used in today's vehicles are Solid State. When checking resistance in these circuits use a meter with a 10 - megohm or greater impedance rating. In addition, make sure the power is disconnected from the circuit. Circuits that are powered up by the vehicle's electrical system can cause damage to the equipment and provide false readings. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1412 - Probing Tools - These tools are used for probing terminals in connectors. Select the proper size tool from Special Tool Package 6807, and insert the probing end (2) into the terminal being tested. Use the other end of the tool (1) to insert the meter probe. INTERMITTENT AND POOR CONNECTIONS Most intermittent electrical problems are caused by faulty electrical connections or wiring. It is also possible for a sticking component or relay to cause a problem. Before condemning a component or wiring assembly, check the following items. - Connectors are fully seated - Spread terminals, or terminal push out - Terminals in the wiring assembly are fully seated into the connector/component and locked into position - Dirt or corrosion on the terminals. Any amount of corrosion or dirt could cause an intermittent problem - Damaged connector/component casing exposing the item to dirt or moisture - Wire insulation that has rubbed through causing a short to ground - Some or all of the wiring strands broken inside of the insulation - Wiring broken inside of the insulation TROUBLESHOOTING WIRING PROBLEMS When troubleshooting wiring problems there are six steps which can aid in the procedure. The steps are listed and explained below. Always check for non-factory items added to the vehicle before doing any diagnosis. If the vehicle is equipped with these items, disconnect them to verify these add-on items are not the cause of the problem. 1. Verify the problem. 2. Verify any related symptoms. Do this by performing operational checks on components that are in the same circuit. Refer to the wiring diagrams. 3. Analyze the symptoms. Use the wiring diagrams to determine what the circuit is doing, where the problem most likely is occurring and where the diagnosis will continue. 4. Isolate the problem area. 5. Repair the problem area. 6. Verify the proper operation. For this step, check for proper operation of all items on the repaired circuit. Refer to the wiring diagrams. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Emission Control Systems > EGR Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Operation-Cab/Chassis Models EGR Temperature Sensor: Description and Operation Operation-Cab/Chassis Models OPERATION-CAB/CHASSIS MODELS The EGR Temperature Sensor (1) is located on the EGR crossover tube (6) near the EGR valve. The EGR temperature sensor is a negative temperature coefficient thermistor used to measure the temperature of the EGR gas flow after it exits the EGR cooler. The ECM (Engine Control Module) supplies 5-volts to the EGR temperature signal circuit. To determine the temperature of the EGR gas flow, the ECM monitors the change in voltage caused by changes in the resistance of the sensor. The ECM uses the exhaust gas recirculation temperature value for the engine protection system, and also for engine emissions control. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Emission Control Systems > EGR Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Operation-Cab/Chassis Models > Page 1418 EGR Temperature Sensor: Description and Operation Operation-Pick Up Models OPERATION-PICK UP MODELS The EGR Temperature Sensor (1) is located on the intake manifold, below, and to the rear of the EGR valve (5). A temperature probe (1) is located at the end of the sensor assembly (3). The EGR temperature sensor is a negative temperature coefficient thermistor used to measure the temperature of the EGR gas flow after it exits the EGR cooler. The ECM (Engine Control Module) supplies 5-volts to the EGR temperature signal circuit. To determine the temperature of the EGR gas flow, the ECM monitors the change in voltage caused by changes in the resistance of the sensor. The ECM uses the exhaust gas recirculation temperature value for the engine protection system, and also for engine emissions control. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Emission Control Systems > EGR Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal EGR Temperature Sensor: Service and Repair Removal Removal-Cab/Chassis Models REMOVAL-CAB/CHASSIS MODELS The EGR Temperature Sensor (1) is located on the EGR crossover tube (6) near EGR valve. 1. Disconnect electrical connector (2) at sensor. 2. Remove sensor (1) from EGR tube (6). Removal-Pick Up Models REMOVAL-PICK UP MODELS The EGR Temperature Sensor (1) is located on the intake manifold, below, and to the rear of the EGR valve (5). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Emission Control Systems > EGR Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 1421 1. If equipped, remove four cover bolts (2) and remove EGR crossover tube cover (1). 2. If equipped, remove EGR valve cover (2). 3. A pigtail wiring harness connects sensor to engine wiring harness. 4. Unscrew nut (2) at intake manifold. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Emission Control Systems > EGR Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 1422 5. Disconnect sensor pigtail harness electrical connector from engine wiring harness and remove sensor assembly. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Emission Control Systems > EGR Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 1423 EGR Temperature Sensor: Service and Repair Installation Installation-Cab/Chassis Models INSTALLATION-CAB/CHASSIS MODELS The EGR Temperature Sensor (1) is located on the EGR crossover tube (6) near the EGR valve. 1. Clean EGR crossover tube at sensor mounting point. 2. Check condition of the sensors metal gasket and replace if necessary. 3. Install sensor (1) to EGR tube (6). Tighten to 18 Nm (13 ft. lbs.). 4. Connect electrical connector (2) to sensor. Installation-Pick Up Models INSTALLATION-PICK UP MODELS The EGR Temperature Sensor (1) is located on the intake manifold, below, and to the rear of the EGR valve (5). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Emission Control Systems > EGR Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 1424 1. A pigtail wiring harness (3) connects the sensor to the engine wiring harness. 2. Position sensor probe (1) into intake manifold. 3. Screw and tighten nut (2) into intake manifold. 4. Connect electrical connector (4) to engine wiring harness. 5. Install EGR valve cover (2). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Emission Control Systems > EGR Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 1425 6. Install EGR crossover tube cover (1) and four cover bolts (2). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Emission Control Systems > Exhaust Pressure Differential Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Exhaust Pressure Differential Sensor: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL 1. Raise and support vehicle. 2. Disconnect electrical connector. 3. Disconnect hoses at pressure differential pressure sensor. 4. Remove mounting bolt and differential pressure sensor. 5. Remove mounting bolts (1). PRESSURE DIFFERENTIAL TUBING Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Emission Control Systems > Exhaust Pressure Differential Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 1430 6. Remove pressure differential pressure tubing. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Emission Control Systems > Exhaust Pressure Differential Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 1431 Exhaust Pressure Differential Sensor: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION PRESSURE DIFFERENTIAL TUBING 1. Install differential pressure tubing, if removed. Tighten fittings to 30 Nm (22 ft. lbs.). 2. Position differential pressure sensor (1). 3. Install mounting nuts (5) and bolts. Tighten to 10 Nm (89 in. lbs.). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Emission Control Systems > Exhaust Pressure Differential Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 1432 NOTE: Make sure there is not a dip in the pressure differential hoses. 4. Install hose (2) to the rear DPF tubing. 5. Install hose (3) to the front DPF tubing. 6. Connect electrical connector (6). 7. Lower vehicle. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Emission Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL 1. Disconnect exhaust gas pressure sensor electrical connector (1). 2. Using a 6 point deepwell socket, remove exhaust gas sensor (2). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Emission Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 1437 Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION 1. Using a 6 point deepwell socket, install exhaust gas pressure sensor. 2. Tighten sensor to 18 Nm (13 ft. lbs.). 3. Connect exhaust gas pressure sensor electrical connector (3). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Locations Component ID: 401 Component : SENSOR-ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION Connector: Name : SENSOR-ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION Color : BLACK # of pins : 6 Pin Circuit Description 1 F855 20PK/YL 5 VOLT SUPPLY Pin Circuit Description 1 K852 20BR/LB 5 VOLT SUPPLY Pin Circuit Description 1 K852 20BR/VT 5 VOLT SUPPLY 2 K23 20BR/WT APPS NO. 1 SIGNAL 3 K167 20BR/YL APPS NO. 1 RETURN 3 K167 20BR/DG APPS NO. 1 RETURN 4 K400 20BR/VT APPS NO. 2 RETURN 5 K29 20WT/BR APPS NO. 2 SIGNAL 6 F856 20YL/PK 5 VOLT SUPPLY 6 K854 20VT/BR 5 VOLT SUPPLY Component Location - 31 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1442 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1443 Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Diagrams Component ID: 401 Component : SENSOR-ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION Connector: Name : SENSOR-ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION Color : BLACK # of pins : 6 Pin Circuit Description 1 F855 20PK/YL 5 VOLT SUPPLY Pin Circuit Description 1 K852 20BR/LB 5 VOLT SUPPLY Pin Circuit Description 1 K852 20BR/VT 5 VOLT SUPPLY 2 K23 20BR/WT APPS NO. 1 SIGNAL 3 K167 20BR/YL APPS NO. 1 RETURN 3 K167 20BR/DG APPS NO. 1 RETURN 4 K400 20BR/VT APPS NO. 2 RETURN 5 K29 20WT/BR APPS NO. 2 SIGNAL 6 F856 20YL/PK 5 VOLT SUPPLY 6 K854 20VT/BR 5 VOLT SUPPLY Component Location - 31 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1444 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor (APPS) (1) is located inside the vehicle. It is attached to the accelerator pedal assembly (3). It is used only with 3.7L V-6 and 5.7L V-8 gas engines, and also with diesel engines. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 1447 Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor (APPS) provides the Powertrain Control Module (PCM) with two DC voltage signals which change as the position of the accelerator pedal changes. One of the DC voltage signals will be half the voltage of the other signal. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL CAUTION: Do not attempt to separate or remove the Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor (APPS) from the accelerator pedal assembly. The APPS is replaced as an assembly along with the pedal. If sensor is removed from pedal, its electronic calibration may be destroyed. 1. Disconnect 6-way electrical connector at top of APPS (2). 2. Remove APPS lower mounting bolt (4) and two mounting nuts. 3. Remove pedal and APPS assembly from vehicle. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 1450 Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION CAUTION: Do not attempt to separate or remove the Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor (APPS) from the accelerator pedal assembly. The APPS is replaced as an assembly along with the pedal. If sensor is removed from pedal, its electronic calibration may be destroyed. 1. Position pedal and APPS assembly to its mounting bracket. 2. Connect 6-way electrical connector to top of APPS (2). 3. Install APPS lower mounting bolt (4) and two mounting nuts. 4. If necessary, use a Scan Tool to erase any Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTC's). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations Camshaft Position Sensor: Locations Component ID: 405 Component : SENSOR-CAMSHAFT POSITION Connector: Name : SENSOR-CAMSHAFT POSITION Color : # of pins : 3 Qualifier : (DIESEL) Pin Circuit Description 1 F855 18PK/YL 5 VOLT SUPPLY 2 K944 18BK/GY CMP SENSOR GROUND 2 K916 18BR/OR SENSOR GROUND 3 K44 18DB/GY CMP SIGNAL Component Location - 5 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1455 Component Location - 11 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1456 Component Location - 13 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1457 Connector: Name : SENSOR-CAMSHAFT POSITION Color : GRAY # of pins : 3 Qualifier : (GAS) Pin Circuit Description 1 F856 20YL/PK 5 VOLT SUPPLY 2 K900 20DB/DG SENSOR GROUND 3 K44 20DB/GY CMP SIGNAL Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1458 Component Location - 5 Component Location - 11 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1459 Component Location - 13 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1460 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1461 Camshaft Position Sensor: Diagrams Component ID: 405 Component : SENSOR-CAMSHAFT POSITION Connector: Name : SENSOR-CAMSHAFT POSITION Color : # of pins : 3 Qualifier : (DIESEL) Pin Circuit Description 1 F855 18PK/YL 5 VOLT SUPPLY 2 K944 18BK/GY CMP SENSOR GROUND 2 K916 18BR/OR SENSOR GROUND 3 K44 18DB/GY CMP SIGNAL Component Location - 5 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1462 Component Location - 11 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1463 Component Location - 13 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1464 Connector: Name : SENSOR-CAMSHAFT POSITION Color : GRAY # of pins : 3 Qualifier : (GAS) Pin Circuit Description 1 F856 20YL/PK 5 VOLT SUPPLY 2 K900 20DB/DG SENSOR GROUND 3 K44 20DB/GY CMP SIGNAL Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1465 Component Location - 5 Component Location - 11 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1466 Component Location - 13 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1467 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Camshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation Description 3.7L & 4.7L The Camshaft Position Sensor (CMP) (3) is bolted to the right-front side of the right cylinder head (2). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 1470 Camshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation Operation 4.7L The CMP sensor engine contains a hall effect device called a sync signal generator to generate a fuel sync signal. This sync signal generator detects notches located on a tonewheel. The tonewheel (4) is located at the front of the camshaft for the right cylinder head (2). As the tonewheel rotates, the notches (1) pass through the sync signal generator. The pattern of the notches (viewed counter-clockwise from front of engine) is: 1 notch, 2 notches, 3 notches, 3 notches, 2 notches, 1 notch, 3 notches and 1 notch. The signal from the CMP sensor is used in conjunction with the crankshaft position sensor to differentiate between fuel injection and spark events. It is also used to synchronize the fuel injectors with their respective cylinders. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Camshaft Position Sensor - Removal Camshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair Camshaft Position Sensor - Removal 4.7L The Camshaft Position Sensor (CMP) (2) is bolted to the front/top of the right cylinder head (1). 1. Raise and support vehicle. 2. Disconnect electrical connector (4) at CMP sensor. 3. Remove sensor mounting bolt (3). 4. Carefully twist sensor from cylinder head. 5. Check condition of sensor O-ring. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Camshaft Position Sensor - Removal > Page 1473 Camshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair Camshaft Position Sensor - Installation 4.7L 1. Clean out machined hole in cylinder head. 2. Apply a small amount of engine oil to sensor O-ring. 3. Install sensor (2) into cylinder head (1) with a slight rocking action. Do not twist sensor into position as damage to O-ring may result. CAUTION: Before tightening sensor mounting bolt, be sure sensor is completely flush to cylinder head. If sensor is not flush, damage to sensor mounting tang may result. 4. Install mounting bolt (3) and tighten to 12 Nm (106 in.lbs.). 5. Connect electrical connector to sensor. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations Crankshaft Position Sensor: Locations Component ID: 407 Component : SENSOR-CRANKSHAFT POSITION Connector: Name : SENSOR-CRANKSHAFT POSITION Color : BLACK # of pins : 3 Qualifier : (3.7L) Pin Circuit Description 1 K24 20BR/LB CKP SIGNAL 2 K900 20DB/DG SENSOR GROUND 3 F855 20PK/YL 5 VOLT SUPPLY Component Location - 5 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1477 Component Location - 11 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1478 Component Location - 19 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1479 Component Location - 13 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1480 Connector: Name : SENSOR-CRANKSHAFT POSITION Color : BLACK # of pins : 3 Qualifier : (4.7L) Pin Circuit Description 1 K24 20BR/LB CKP SIGNAL 2 K900 20DB/DG SENSOR GROUND 3 F855 20PK/YL 5 VOLT SUPPLY Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1481 Component Location - 5 Component Location - 11 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1482 Component Location - 19 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1483 Component Location - 13 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1484 Connector: Name : SENSOR-CRANKSHAFT POSITION Color : BLACK # of pins : 3 Qualifier : (5.7L) Pin Circuit Description 1 F855 20PK/YL 5 VOLT SUPPLY 2 K900 20DB/DG SENSOR GROUND 3 K24 20BR/LB CKP SIGNAL Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1485 Component Location - 5 Component Location - 11 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1486 Component Location - 19 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1487 Component Location - 13 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1488 Connector: Name : SENSOR-CRANKSHAFT POSITION Color : BLACK # of pins : 3 Qualifier : (DIESEL) Pin Circuit Description 1 K853 18DB/BR 5 VOLT SUPPLY Pin Circuit Description 1 K824 18DB/BR 5 VOLT SUPPLY Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1489 2 K975 18BR/OR CKP SENSOR GROUND 2 K925 18BR/OR CKP SENSOR GROUND 3 K24 18BR/LB CKP SIGNAL Component Location - 5 Component Location - 11 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1490 Component Location - 19 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1491 Component Location - 13 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1492 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1493 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Diagrams Component ID: 407 Component : SENSOR-CRANKSHAFT POSITION Connector: Name : SENSOR-CRANKSHAFT POSITION Color : BLACK # of pins : 3 Qualifier : (3.7L) Pin Circuit Description 1 K24 20BR/LB CKP SIGNAL 2 K900 20DB/DG SENSOR GROUND 3 F855 20PK/YL 5 VOLT SUPPLY Component Location - 5 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1494 Component Location - 11 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1495 Component Location - 19 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1496 Component Location - 13 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1497 Connector: Name : SENSOR-CRANKSHAFT POSITION Color : BLACK # of pins : 3 Qualifier : (4.7L) Pin Circuit Description 1 K24 20BR/LB CKP SIGNAL 2 K900 20DB/DG SENSOR GROUND 3 F855 20PK/YL 5 VOLT SUPPLY Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1498 Component Location - 5 Component Location - 11 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1499 Component Location - 19 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1500 Component Location - 13 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1501 Connector: Name : SENSOR-CRANKSHAFT POSITION Color : BLACK # of pins : 3 Qualifier : (5.7L) Pin Circuit Description 1 F855 20PK/YL 5 VOLT SUPPLY 2 K900 20DB/DG SENSOR GROUND 3 K24 20BR/LB CKP SIGNAL Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1502 Component Location - 5 Component Location - 11 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1503 Component Location - 19 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1504 Component Location - 13 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1505 Connector: Name : SENSOR-CRANKSHAFT POSITION Color : BLACK # of pins : 3 Qualifier : (DIESEL) Pin Circuit Description 1 K853 18DB/BR 5 VOLT SUPPLY Pin Circuit Description 1 K824 18DB/BR 5 VOLT SUPPLY Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1506 2 K975 18BR/OR CKP SENSOR GROUND 2 K925 18BR/OR CKP SENSOR GROUND 3 K24 18BR/LB CKP SIGNAL Component Location - 5 Component Location - 11 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1507 Component Location - 19 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1508 Component Location - 13 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1509 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Crankshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation Description 4.7L V-8 The Crankshaft Position (CKP) (1) sensor is mounted into the right rear side of the cylinder block. It is positioned and bolted into a machined hole. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 1512 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation Operation 4.7L V-8 Engine speed and crankshaft position are provided through the CKP (Crankshaft Position) sensor. The sensor generates pulses that are the input sent to the Powertrain Control Module (PCM). The PCM interprets the sensor input to determine the crankshaft position. The PCM then uses this position, along with other inputs, to determine injector sequence and ignition timing. The sensor is a hall effect device combined with an internal magnet. It is also sensitive to steel within a certain distance from it. A tonewheel (1) is bolted to the engine crankshaft. This tonewheel has sets of notches (2) at its outer edge. The notches cause a pulse to be generated when they pass under the sensor. The pulses are the input to the PCM. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Crankshaft Position Sensor - Removal Crankshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair Crankshaft Position Sensor - Removal 4.7L V-8 The Crankshaft Position (CKP) sensor is located at the right-rear side of the engine cylinder block. It is positioned and bolted into a machined hole in the engine block. 1. Raise vehicle. 2. Disconnect CKP electrical connector at sensor. 3. Remove CKP mounting bolt (2). 4. Carefully twist sensor (1) from cylinder block. 5. Remove sensor from vehicle. 6. Check condition of sensor O-ring. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Crankshaft Position Sensor - Removal > Page 1515 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair Crankshaft Position Sensor - Installation 4.7L V-8 1. Clean out machined hole in engine block. 2. Apply a small amount of engine oil to sensor o-ring. 3. Install sensor (1) into engine block with a slight rocking and twisting action. CAUTION: Before tightening sensor mounting bolt, be sure sensor is completely flush to cylinder block. If sensor is not flush, damage to sensor mounting tang may result. 4. Install mounting bolt and tighten to 28 Nm (21 ft. lbs.) torque. 5. Connect electrical connector to sensor. 6. Lower vehicle. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL The ignition key must be in the key cylinder (1) for cylinder removal. 1. Disconnect negative cable from battery. 2. Remove upper and lower covers (shrouds) from steering column. 3. Place shifter in PARK position. 4. A retaining pin is located at the underside of the key cylinder assembly. a. Rotate key to RUN position. b. Press in on retaining pin while pulling key cylinder (1) from ignition switch. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 1521 Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION The ignition key must be in the key cylinder (3) for cylinder installation. 1. Install the key cylinder into the housing using care to align the end of the key cylinder (3) with the ignition switch (1). 2. Push the key cylinder (3) in until it clicks. 3. Replace the upper and lower shrouds. 4. Reconnect the battery. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Knock 1 Knock Sensor: Locations Sensor-Knock 1 Component ID: 423 Component : SENSOR-KNOCK 1 Connector: Name : SENSOR-KNOCK 1 Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (3.7L/5.7L) Pin Circuit Description 1 K42 20DB/YL KNOCK SENSOR NO. 1 SIGNAL 2 K942 20BR/LG KNOCK SENSOR NO. 1 RETURN Component Location - 9 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Knock 1 > Page 1526 Component Location - 22 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Knock 1 > Page 1527 Component Location - 19 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Knock 1 > Page 1528 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Knock 1 > Page 1529 Knock Sensor: Locations Sensor-Knock 2 Component ID: 424 Component : SENSOR-KNOCK 2 Connector: Name : SENSOR-KNOCK 2 Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (3.7L/5.7L) Pin Circuit Description 1 K242 20BR/WT KNOCK SENSOR NO. 2 SIGNAL 2 K924 20WT/BR KNOCK SENSOR NO. 2 RETURN Component Location - 11 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Knock 1 > Page 1530 Component Location - 22 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Knock 1 > Page 1531 Component Location - 19 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Knock 1 > Page 1532 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Knock 1 Knock Sensor: Diagrams Sensor-Knock 1 Component ID: 423 Component : SENSOR-KNOCK 1 Connector: Name : SENSOR-KNOCK 1 Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (3.7L/5.7L) Pin Circuit Description 1 K42 20DB/YL KNOCK SENSOR NO. 1 SIGNAL 2 K942 20BR/LG KNOCK SENSOR NO. 1 RETURN Component Location - 9 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Knock 1 > Page 1535 Component Location - 22 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Knock 1 > Page 1536 Component Location - 19 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Knock 1 > Page 1537 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Knock 1 > Page 1538 Knock Sensor: Diagrams Sensor-Knock 2 Component ID: 424 Component : SENSOR-KNOCK 2 Connector: Name : SENSOR-KNOCK 2 Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (3.7L/5.7L) Pin Circuit Description 1 K242 20BR/WT KNOCK SENSOR NO. 2 SIGNAL 2 K924 20WT/BR KNOCK SENSOR NO. 2 RETURN Component Location - 11 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Knock 1 > Page 1539 Component Location - 22 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Knock 1 > Page 1540 Component Location - 19 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Knock 1 > Page 1541 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Knock 1 > Page 1542 Knock Sensor: Diagrams Sensor-Knock Component ID: 422 Component : SENSOR-KNOCK Connector: Name : SENSOR-KNOCK Color : BLACK # of pins : 4 Qualifier : (4.7L) Pin Circuit Description 1 K942 20BR/LG KNOCK SENSOR NO. 1 RETURN 2 K42 20DB/YL KNOCK SENSOR NO. 1 SIGNAL 3 K924 20WT/BR KNOCK SENSOR NO. 2 RETURN 4 K242 20BR/WT KNOCK SENSOR NO. 2 SIGNAL Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Knock Sensor: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION Two knock sensors are bolted into the cylinder block under the intake manifold 3.7L, 4.7L & 8.3L. Two knock sensors are also used with the 5.7L. These are bolted into each side of the cylinder block (outside) under the exhaust manifold. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 1545 Knock Sensor: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION Two knock sensors are used; one for each cylinder bank. When the knock sensor detects a knock in one of the cylinders on the corresponding bank, it sends an input signal to the Powertrain Control Module (PCM). In response, the PCM retards ignition timing for all cylinders by a scheduled amount. Knock sensors contain a piezoelectric material which constantly vibrates and sends an input voltage (signal) to the PCM while the engine operates. As the intensity of the crystal's vibration increases, the knock sensor output voltage also increases. The voltage signal produced by the knock sensor increases with the amplitude of vibration. The PCM receives the knock sensor voltage signal as an input. If the signal rises above a predetermined level, the PCM will store that value in memory and retard ignition timing to reduce engine knock. If the knock sensor voltage exceeds a preset value, the PCM retards ignition timing for all cylinders. It is not a selective cylinder retard. The PCM ignores knock sensor input during engine idle conditions. Once the engine speed exceeds a specified value, knock retard is allowed. Knock retard uses its own short term and long term memory program. Long term memory stores previous detonation information in its battery-backed RAM. The maximum authority that long term memory has over timing retard can be calibrated. Short term memory is allowed to retard timing up to a preset amount under all operating conditions (as long as rpm is above the minimum rpm) except at Wide Open Throttle (WOT). The PCM, using short term memory, can respond quickly to retard timing when engine knock is detected. Short term memory is lost any time the ignition key is turned off. NOTE: Over or under tightening the sensor mounting bolts will affect knock sensor performance, possibly causing improper spark control. Always use the specified torque when installing the knock sensors. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Knock Sensor: Service and Repair Removal 4.7L The two knock sensors (1) are bolted into the cylinder block under the intake manifold (3). NOTE: The left sensor is identified by an identification tag (LEFT). It is also identified by a larger bolt head. The Powertrain Control Module (PCM) must have and know the correct sensor left/right positions. Do not mix the sensor locations. 1. Disconnect knock sensor dual pigtail harness from engine wiring harness. This connection is made near rear of engine. 2. Remove intake manifold See: Engine, Cooling and Exhaust/Engine/Intake Manifold/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Intake Manifold - Removal . 3. Remove sensor mounting bolts (2). Note foam strip on bolt threads. This foam is used only to retain the bolts to sensors for plant assembly. It is not used as a sealant. Do not apply any adhesive, sealant or thread locking compound to these bolts. 4. Remove sensors (1) from engine. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 1548 Knock Sensor: Service and Repair Installation 4.7L NOTE: The left sensor is identified by an identification tag (LEFT). It is also identified by a larger bolt head. The Powertrain Control Module (PCM) must have and know the correct sensor left/right positions. Do not mix the sensor locations. 1. Thoroughly clean knock sensor mounting holes. 2. Install sensors (1) into cylinder block. NOTE: Over or under tightening the sensor mounting bolts will affect knock sensor performance, possibly causing improper spark control. Always use the specified torque when installing the knock sensors. The torque for the knock sensor bolt is relatively light for an 8 mm bolt. NOTE: Note foam strip on bolt threads. This foam is used only to retain the bolts to sensors for plant assembly. It is not used as a sealant. Do not apply any adhesive, sealant or thread locking compound to these bolts. 3. Install and tighten mounting bolts. Tighten to 15 +/- 2 ft. lbs. (20 Nm) (176 in.lbs.). 4. Install intake manifold See: Engine, Cooling and Exhaust/Engine/Intake Manifold/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Intake Manifold - Installation . 5. Connect knock sensor wiring harness to engine harness (4) at rear of intake manifold. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Deactivation Switch > Component Information > Locations Air Bag Deactivation Switch: Locations Component ID: 498 Component : SWITCH-PASSENGER AIRBAG ON/OFF Connector: Name : SWITCH-PASSENGER AIRBAG ON/OFF Color : BLACK # of pins : 6 Pin Circuit Description 1 R106 20LG/LB PASSENGER AIRBAG MUX SWITCH SENSE 2 R104 20LB/LG PASSENGER AIRBAG MUX SWITCH RETURN 3 G104 20VT/GY PASSENGER AIRBAG INDICATOR DRIVER 4 F201 20PK/OR FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) 5-6-Component Location - 47 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Deactivation Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 1553 Component Location - 45 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Deactivation Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 1554 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Deactivation Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 1555 Air Bag Deactivation Switch: Diagrams Component ID: 498 Component : SWITCH-PASSENGER AIRBAG ON/OFF Connector: Name : SWITCH-PASSENGER AIRBAG ON/OFF Color : BLACK # of pins : 6 Pin Circuit Description 1 R106 20LG/LB PASSENGER AIRBAG MUX SWITCH SENSE 2 R104 20LB/LG PASSENGER AIRBAG MUX SWITCH RETURN 3 G104 20VT/GY PASSENGER AIRBAG INDICATOR DRIVER 4 F201 20PK/OR FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) 5-6-Component Location - 47 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Deactivation Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 1556 Component Location - 45 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Deactivation Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 1557 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Deactivation Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Air Bag Deactivation Switch: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The passenger airbag on/off switch (1) is standard equipment on all standard cab versions of this vehicle (except light-duty DR 1500) equipped with the dual front airbag system. This switch is a two-position, resistor multiplexed switch with a single integral amber Light-Emitting Diode (LED), and a non-coded key cylinder-type actuator. The switch is located in the lower right corner of the instrument panel center bezel, near the center of the instrument panel. When the switch is in its installed position, the only components visible through the dedicated opening of the center bezel are the switch bezel (2) and lens, the nomenclature imprinted on the lens, and the key cylinder actuator (3). The OFF position nomenclature of the switch is illuminated and visible only when that switch position is selected. The ON position of the switch is neither visible or illuminated but can be determined by the orientation of the slot of the key cylinder actuator. The remainder of the switch is concealed behind the switch bezel and the instrument panel center bezel. The passenger airbag on/off switch housing is constructed of molded plastic and has three integral mounting tabs. These mounting tabs are used to secure the switch to the back of the molded plastic switch bezel with three small screws. The molded plastic switch bezel also has three integral mounting tabs that are used to secure the switch and bezel unit to the instrument panel center bezel with three additional screws. A molded plastic connector receptacle on the back of the switch housing connects the switch to the vehicle electrical system through a dedicated take out and connector of the instrument panel wire harness. The molded plastic harness connector insulator is keyed and latched to ensure proper and secure switch electrical connections. The passenger airbag on/off switch cannot be adjusted or repaired and, if ineffective or damaged, the switch must be replaced. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Deactivation Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 1560 Air Bag Deactivation Switch: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The passenger airbag on/off switch allows the customer to turn the passenger airbag function ON or OFF to accommodate certain uses of the right front seating position where airbag protection may not be desired. The OFF indicator of the switch will be illuminated whenever the switch is turned to the OFF position and the ignition switch is in the ON position. The ignition key is the only key or object that should ever be inserted into the key cylinder actuator of the switch. The on/off switch requires only a partial key insertion to fully depress a spring-loaded locking plunger. The spring-loaded locking plunger prevents the user from leaving the key in the switch. The key will be automatically ejected when force is not applied. To actuate the passenger airbag on/off switch, insert the ignition key into the switch key actuator far enough to fully depress the plunger, then rotate the actuator to the desired switch position. When the switch key actuator is rotated to its clockwise stop (the key actuator slot will be aligned with the OFF nomenclature), the OFF indicator is illuminated and the passenger airbag is disabled. When the switch is rotated to its counterclockwise stop (the key actuator slot will be in a vertical position) the OFF indicator will be extinguished and the passenger airbag is enabled. The OFF indicator and the enabling or disabling of the passenger airbag is controlled electronically by the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) based upon inputs it receives from the on/off switch. The passenger airbag on/off switch connects one of two internal resistors in series between the passenger airbag mux switch sense and passenger airbag mux switch return circuits of the ORC. The ORC continually monitors the resistance in these circuits to determine the switch position that has been selected. When the switch is in the OFF position, the ORC provides a ground input to the OFF indicator through the passenger airbag indicator driver circuit, which energizes the Light-Emitting Diode (LED) that illuminates the indicator. The ORC will store a Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) for any fault it detects in the passenger airbag on/off switch or OFF indicator circuits, and will illuminate the airbag indicator in the instrument cluster if a fault is detected. The hard wired circuits between the passenger airbag on/off switch and the ORC may be diagnosed using conventional diagnostic tools and procedures. However, conventional diagnostic methods will not prove conclusive in the diagnosis of the passenger airbag on/off switch or the electronic controls and communication between other modules and devices that provide some features of the supplemental restraint system. The most reliable, efficient, and accurate means to diagnose the passenger airbag on/off switch or the electronic controls and communication related to passenger airbag on/off switch operation requires the use of a diagnostic scan tool. Refer to the appropriate diagnostic information. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Deactivation Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Air Bag Deactivation Switch: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury on vehicles equipped with airbags, disable the Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, airbag, seat belt tensioner, impact sensor, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the SRS. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment. NOTE: A passenger airbag on/off switch is used only on standard cab vehicles (except light-duty DR 1500) equipped with dual front airbags. Quad cab, mega cab and light-duty DR 1500 standard cab vehicles have a cubby bin installed in the instrument panel center bezel in place of the on/off switch. 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. Wait two minutes for the system capacitor to discharge before further service. 2. Remove the center bezel (1) from the instrument panel. See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Service and Repair/Instrument Panel Center Bezel - Removal . 3. From the back of the center bezel, remove the three screws (2) that secure the passenger airbag on/off switch and bezel unit (3) to the back of the center bezel. 4. Remove the passenger airbag on/off switch and bezel from the center bezel as a unit. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Deactivation Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 1563 Air Bag Deactivation Switch: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury on vehicles equipped with airbags, disable the Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, airbag, seat belt tensioner, impact sensor, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the SRS. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment. NOTE: A passenger airbag on/off switch is used only on standard cab vehicles (except light-duty DR 1500) equipped with dual front airbags. Quad cab, mega cab and light-duty DR 1500 standard cab vehicles have a cubby bin installed in the instrument panel center bezel in place of the on/off switch. 1. Position the passenger airbag on/off switch and bezel unit (3) to the back of the center bezel (1). 2. Install and tighten the three screws (2) that secure the passenger airbag on/off switch bezel to the back of the center bezel. Tighten the screws to 2 Nm (17 in. lbs.). 3. Reinstall the center bezel onto the instrument panel. See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Service and Repair/Instrument Panel Center Bezel - Installation . 4. Do not reconnect the battery negative cable at this time. The Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) verification test procedure should be performed following service of any SRS component. See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code Tests and Associated Procedures/Verification Tests . Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Front Impact-Left Impact Sensor: Locations Sensor-Front Impact-Left Component ID: 417 Component : SENSOR-FRONT IMPACT-LEFT Connector: Name : SENSOR-FRONT IMPACT-LEFT Color : YELLOW # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (GAS) Pin Circuit Description 1 R81 20LB/WT LEFT FRONT IMPACT SENSOR GROUND 2 R79 20LB/VT LEFT FRONT IMPACT SENSOR SIGNAL Component Location - 30 Fig.30-Left Engine Compartment Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Front Impact-Left > Page 1568 Impact Sensor: Locations Sensor-Front Impact-Right Component ID: 418 Component : SENSOR-FRONT IMPACT-RIGHT Connector: Name : SENSOR-FRONT IMPACT-RIGHT Color : YELLOW # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (GAS) Pin Circuit Description 1 R82 20WT/LB RIGHT FRONT IMPACT SENSOR GROUND 2 R80 20VT/LB RIGHT FRONT IMPACT SENSOR SIGNAL Component Location - 29 Fig. 29-Right Side Engine Compartment Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Front Impact-Left > Page 1569 Impact Sensor: Locations Sensor-Side Impact-Left 1 Component ID: 438 Component : SENSOR-SIDE IMPACT-LEFT 1 Connector: Name : SENSOR-SIDE IMPACT-LEFT 1 Color : YELLOW # of pins : 4 Pin Circuit Description 1 R13 20LG/TN LEFT SIDE IMPACT SENSOR 1 SIGNAL 2 R15 20LG/BR LEFT SIDE IMPACT SENSOR 1 GROUND 3-4-Component Location - 58 Fig. 58-Left Side Body (Standard Cab) Component Location - 63 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Front Impact-Left > Page 1570 Fig. 63-Left Side Body (Quad Cab/Mega Cab) Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Front Impact-Left > Page 1571 Impact Sensor: Locations Sensor-Side Impact-Right 1 Component ID: 439 Component : SENSOR-SIDE IMPACT-RIGHT 1 Connector: Name : SENSOR-SIDE IMPACT-RIGHT 1 Color : YELLOW # of pins : 4 Pin Circuit Description 1 R14 20TN/LG RIGHT SIDE IMPACT SENSOR 1 SIGNAL 2 R16 20BR/LG RIGHT SIDE IMPACT SENSOR 1 GROUND 3-4-Component Location - 61 Fig. 61-Right Side Body (Standard Cab) Component Location - 64 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Front Impact-Left > Page 1572 Fig. 64-Right Side Body (Quad Cab/Mega Cab) Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Front Impact-Left Impact Sensor: Diagrams Sensor-Front Impact-Left Component ID: 417 Component : SENSOR-FRONT IMPACT-LEFT Connector: Name : SENSOR-FRONT IMPACT-LEFT Color : YELLOW # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (GAS) Pin Circuit Description 1 R81 20LB/WT LEFT FRONT IMPACT SENSOR GROUND 2 R79 20LB/VT LEFT FRONT IMPACT SENSOR SIGNAL Component Location - 30 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Front Impact-Left > Page 1575 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Front Impact-Left > Page 1576 Impact Sensor: Diagrams Sensor-Front Impact-Right Component ID: 418 Component : SENSOR-FRONT IMPACT-RIGHT Connector: Name : SENSOR-FRONT IMPACT-RIGHT Color : YELLOW # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (GAS) Pin Circuit Description 1 R82 20WT/LB RIGHT FRONT IMPACT SENSOR GROUND 2 R80 20VT/LB RIGHT FRONT IMPACT SENSOR SIGNAL Component Location - 29 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Front Impact-Left > Page 1577 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Front Impact-Left > Page 1578 Impact Sensor: Diagrams Sensor-Side Impact-Left 1 Component ID: 438 Component : SENSOR-SIDE IMPACT-LEFT 1 Connector: Name : SENSOR-SIDE IMPACT-LEFT 1 Color : YELLOW # of pins : 4 Pin Circuit Description 1 R13 20LG/TN LEFT SIDE IMPACT SENSOR 1 SIGNAL 2 R15 20LG/BR LEFT SIDE IMPACT SENSOR 1 GROUND 3-4-Component Location - 58 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Front Impact-Left > Page 1579 Component Location - 63 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Front Impact-Left > Page 1580 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Front Impact-Left > Page 1581 Impact Sensor: Diagrams Sensor-Side Impact-Right 1 Component ID: 439 Component : SENSOR-SIDE IMPACT-RIGHT 1 Connector: Name : SENSOR-SIDE IMPACT-RIGHT 1 Color : YELLOW # of pins : 4 Pin Circuit Description 1 R14 20TN/LG RIGHT SIDE IMPACT SENSOR 1 SIGNAL 2 R16 20BR/LG RIGHT SIDE IMPACT SENSOR 1 GROUND 3-4-Component Location - 61 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Front Impact-Left > Page 1582 Component Location - 64 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Front Impact-Left > Page 1583 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Impact Sensor: Description and Operation Description Front FRONT Two front impact sensors (1) are used on this vehicle, one each for the left and right sides of the vehicle. These sensors are mounted remotely from the impact sensor that is internal to the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC). Each front impact sensor is secured with a screw to the back of the right or left end of the lower radiator crossmember within the engine compartment. The sensor housing has an integral connector receptacle (4), an integral anti-rotation pin (3), and an integral mounting hole (2) with a metal sleeve to provide crush protection. The right and left front impact sensors are identical in construction and calibration. A cavity in the center of the molded black plastic impact sensor housing contains the electronic circuitry of the sensor which includes an electronic communication chip and an electronic impact sensor. Potting material fills the cavity to seal and protect the internal electronic circuitry and components. The front impact sensors are each connected to the vehicle electrical system through a dedicated take out and connector of the headlamp and dash wire harness. The front impact sensors cannot be repaired or adjusted and, if damaged or ineffective, they must be replaced. Side SIDE Two side impact sensors (1) are used on this vehicle when it is equipped with the optional side curtain airbags, one each for the left and right sides of the vehicle. These sensors are mounted remotely from the impact sensor that is internal to the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC). Each side sensor is secured with a nut within the right or left B-pillar just above the front seat belt retractors and behind the lower B-pillar trim within the passenger compartment. The sensor housing has an integral connector receptacle (2), an integral mounting stud (3), and an integral anti-rotation pin. The right and left side impact sensors are identical in construction and calibration. A cavity in the center of the molded plastic impact sensor housing contains the electronic circuitry of the sensor which includes an electronic communication chip and an electronic impact sensor. Potting material fills the cavity to seal and protect the internal electronic circuitry and components. The side impact sensors are each connected to the vehicle electrical system through a dedicated take out and connector of the body wire harness. The side impact sensors cannot be repaired or adjusted and, if damaged or ineffective, they must be replaced. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 1586 Impact Sensor: Description and Operation Operation Front FRONT The front impact sensors are electronic accelerometers that sense the rate of vehicle deceleration, which provides verification of the direction and severity of an impact. Each sensor also contains an electronic communication chip that allows the unit to communicate the sensor status as well as sensor fault information to the microprocessor in the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC). The ORC microprocessor continuously monitors all of the passive restraint system electrical circuits to determine the system readiness. If the ORC detects a monitored system fault, it sets a Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) and controls the airbag indicator operation accordingly. The impact sensors each receive battery current and ground through dedicated left and right sensor plus and minus circuits from the ORC. The impact sensors and the ORC communicate by modulating the voltage in the sensor plus circuit. The hard wired circuits between the front impact sensors and the ORC may be diagnosed using conventional diagnostic tools and procedures. Refer to the appropriate wiring information. However, conventional diagnostic methods will not prove conclusive in the diagnosis of the impact sensors or the electronic controls or communication between other modules and devices that provide features of the Supplemental Restraint System (SRS). The most reliable, efficient, and accurate means to diagnose the impact sensors or the electronic controls and communication related to front impact sensor operation requires the use of a diagnostic scan tool. Refer to the appropriate diagnostic information. Side SIDE The side impact sensors are electronic accelerometers that sense the rate of vehicle deceleration, which provides verification of the direction and severity of an impact. Each sensor also contains an electronic communication chip that allows the unit to communicate the sensor status as well as sensor fault information to the microprocessor in the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC). The ORC microprocessor continuously monitors all of the side passive restraint system electrical circuits to determine the system readiness. If the ORC detects a monitored system fault, it sets a Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) and controls the airbag indicator operation accordingly. The impact sensors each receive battery current and ground through left or right sensor plus and minus circuits from the ORC. The impact sensors and the ORC communicate by modulating the voltage in the sensor plus circuit. The hard wired circuits between the side impact sensors and the ORC may be diagnosed using conventional diagnostic tools and procedures. Refer to the appropriate wiring information. However, conventional diagnostic methods will not prove conclusive in the diagnosis of the impact sensors or the electronic controls or communication between other modules and devices that provide features of the Supplemental Restraint System (SRS). The most reliable, efficient, and accurate means to diagnose the impact sensors or the electronic controls and communication related to side impact sensor operation requires the use of a diagnostic scan tool. Refer to the appropriate diagnostic information. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Impact Sensor: Service and Repair Removal Front FRONT WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury on vehicles equipped with airbags, disable the Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, airbag, seat belt tensioner, impact sensor, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the SRS. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment. WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury, never strike or drop the front impact sensor, as it can damage the impact sensor or affect its calibration. The front impact sensor enables the system to deploy the front Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) components. If an impact sensor is accidentally dropped during service, the sensor must be scrapped and replaced with a new unit. Failure to observe this warning could result in accidental, incomplete, or improper front SRS component deployment. 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. Wait two minutes for the system capacitor to discharge before further service. 2. Remove the screw (4) that secures the right or left front impact sensor (3) to the back of the right or left end of the lower radiator crossmember (1). 3. Disconnect the headlamp and dash wire harness connector (2) from the sensor connector receptacle. 4. Remove the right or left front impact sensor from the engine compartment. Side - Mega Cab SIDE - MEGA CAB WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury on vehicles equipped with airbags, disable the Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, airbag, seat belt tensioner, impact sensor, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the SRS. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment. WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury, never strike or drop the side impact sensor, as it can damage the impact sensor or affect its calibration. The side impact sensor enables the system to deploy the side Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) components. If an impact sensor is accidentally dropped during service, the sensor must be scrapped and replaced with a new unit. Failure to observe this warning could result in accidental, incomplete, or improper side SRS component deployment. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 1589 1. Adjust the front seat to its most forward position for easiest access to the B-pillar trim. 2. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. Wait two minutes for the system capacitor to discharge before further service. 3. Remove the nut (3) that secures the stud of the side impact sensor (4) to the inner B-pillar (2). 4. Reach through the large hole above the retractor mounting hole in the inner B-pillar to access the side impact sensor and disengage the anti-rotation pin and mounting stud from the holes in the inner B-pillar. 5. Pull the side impact sensor out through the large hole in the B-pillar far enough to access and disconnect the body wire harness connector (1) from the sensor connector receptacle. 6. Remove the side impact sensor from the B-pillar. Side - Quad Cab SIDE - QUAD CAB WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury on vehicles equipped with airbags, disable the Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, airbag, seat belt tensioner, impact sensor, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the SRS. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment. WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury, never strike or drop the side impact sensor, as it can damage the impact sensor or affect its calibration. The side impact sensor enables the system to deploy the side Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) components. If an impact sensor is accidentally dropped during service, the sensor must be scrapped and replaced with a new unit. Failure to observe this warning could result in accidental, incomplete, or improper side SRS component deployment. 1. Adjust the front seat to its most forward position for easiest access to the B-pillar trim. 2. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. Wait two minutes for the system capacitor to discharge before further service. 3. Remove the nut (3) that secures the stud of the side impact sensor (2) to the inner B-pillar (1). 4. Reach through the large hole above the retractor mounting hole in the inner B-pillar to access the side impact sensor and disengage the anti-rotation pin and mounting stud from the holes in the inner B-pillar. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 1590 5. Pull the side impact sensor out through the large hole in the B-pillar far enough to access and disconnect the body wire harness connector (4) from the sensor connector receptacle. 6. Remove the side impact sensor from the B-pillar. Side - Standard Cab SIDE - STANDARD CAB WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury on vehicles equipped with airbags, disable the Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, airbag, seat belt tensioner, impact sensor, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the SRS. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment. WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury, never strike or drop the side impact sensor, as it can damage the impact sensor or affect its calibration. The side impact sensor enables the system to deploy the side Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) components. If an impact sensor is accidentally dropped during service, the sensor must be scrapped and replaced with a new unit. Failure to observe this warning could result in accidental, incomplete, or improper side SRS component deployment. 1. Adjust the driver or passenger side front seat to its most forward position for easiest access to the B-pillar trim. 2. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. Wait two minutes for the system capacitor to discharge before further service. 3. Remove the front outboard seat belt and retractor from the inside of the B-pillar. See: Restraint Systems/Seat Belt Systems/Seat Belt Retractor/Service and Repair/Seat Belt and Retractor - Removal . 4. Remove the nut (4) that secures the stud of the side impact sensor (1) to the inner B-pillar. 5. Reach through the retractor mounting hole (3) in the inner B-pillar to access the side impact sensor and disengage the anti-rotation pin and mounting stud from the holes in the inner B-pillar. 6. Pull the side impact sensor out of the B-pillar far enough to access and disconnect the body wire harness connector (2) from the sensor connector receptacle. 7. Remove the sensor from the B-pillar. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 1591 Impact Sensor: Service and Repair Installation Front FRONT WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury on vehicles equipped with airbags, disable the Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, airbag, seat belt tensioner, impact sensor, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the SRS. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment. WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury, never strike or drop the front impact sensor, as it can damage the impact sensor or affect its calibration. The front impact sensor enables the system to deploy the front Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) components. If an impact sensor is accidentally dropped during service, the sensor must be scrapped and replaced with a new unit. Failure to observe this warning could result in accidental, incomplete, or improper front SRS component deployment. 1. Position the right or left front impact sensor (3) into the engine compartment. 2. Reconnect the headlamp and dash wire harness connector (2) to the sensor connector receptacle. 3. Carefully position the sensor onto the back of the right or left end of the lower radiator crossmember (1). Be certain that the anti-rotation pin on the back of the sensor is engaged in the clearance hole of the crossmember. 4. Install and tighten the screw (4) that secures the sensor to the back of the crossmember. Tighten the screw to 10 Nm (90 in. lbs.). 5. Do not reconnect the battery negative cable at this time. The Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) verification test procedure should be performed following service of any SRS component. See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code Tests and Associated Procedures/Verification Tests . Side - Mega Cab SIDE - MEGA CAB WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury on vehicles equipped with airbags, disable the Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, airbag, seat belt tensioner, impact sensor, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the SRS. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment. WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury, never strike or drop the side impact sensor, as it can damage the impact sensor or affect its calibration. The side impact sensor enables the system to deploy the side Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) components. If an impact sensor is accidentally dropped during service, the sensor must be scrapped and replaced with a new unit. Failure to observe this warning could result in accidental, incomplete, or improper side SRS component deployment. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 1592 1. Position the side impact sensor (4) to the large hole above the retractor mounting hole in the inner B-pillar (2). 2. Reconnect the body wire harness connector (1) to the sensor connector receptacle. 3. Reach through the large hole above the retractor mounting hole in the inner B-pillar to position and engage the anti-rotation pin and the stud on the side impact sensor to the locating slot and mounting hole from the inside of the B-pillar. 4. Install and tighten the nut (3) that secures the side impact sensor stud to the inner B-pillar. Tighten the nut to 8 Nm (70 in. lbs.). 5. Do not reconnect the battery negative cable at this time. The Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) verification test procedure should be performed following service of any SRS component. See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code Tests and Associated Procedures/Verification Tests . Side - Quad Cab SIDE - QUAD CAB WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury on vehicles equipped with airbags, disable the Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, airbag, seat belt tensioner, impact sensor, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the SRS. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment. WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury, never strike or drop the side impact sensor, as it can damage the impact sensor or affect its calibration. The side impact sensor enables the system to deploy the side Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) components. If an impact sensor is accidentally dropped during service, the sensor must be scrapped and replaced with a new unit. Failure to observe this warning could result in accidental, incomplete, or improper side SRS component deployment. 1. Position the side impact sensor (2) to the large hole above the retractor mounting hole in the inner B-pillar (1). 2. Reconnect the body wire harness connector (4) to the sensor connector receptacle. 3. Reach through the large hole above the retractor mounting hole in the inner B-pillar to position and engage the anti-rotation pin and the stud on the side impact sensor to the locating slot and mounting hole from the inside of the B-pillar. 4. Install and tighten the nut (3) that secures the side impact sensor stud to the inner B-pillar. Tighten the nut to 8 Nm (70 in. lbs.). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 1593 5. Do not reconnect the battery negative cable at this time. The Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) verification test procedure should be performed following service of any SRS component. See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code Tests and Associated Procedures/Verification Tests . Side - Standard Cab SIDE - STANDARD CAB WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury on vehicles equipped with airbags, disable the Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, airbag, seat belt tensioner, impact sensor, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the SRS. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment. WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury, never strike or drop the side impact sensor, as it can damage the impact sensor or affect its calibration. The side impact sensor enables the system to deploy the side Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) components. If an impact sensor is accidentally dropped during service, the sensor must be scrapped and replaced with a new unit. Failure to observe this warning could result in accidental, incomplete, or improper side SRS component deployment. 1. Position the side impact sensor (1) to the retractor mounting hole (3) in the inner B-pillar. 2. Reconnect the body wire harness connector (2) to the sensor connector receptacle. 3. Reach through the retractor mounting hole in the inner B-pillar to position and engage the anti-rotation pin and the stud on the side impact sensor to the locating slot and mounting hole from the inside of the B-pillar. 4. Install and tighten the nut (4) that secures the side impact sensor stud to the inner B-pillar. Tighten the nut to 8 Nm (70 in. lbs.). 5. Reinstall the front outboard seat belt and retractor to the inside of the B-pillar. See: Restraint Systems/Seat Belt Systems/Seat Belt Retractor/Service and Repair/Seat Belt and Retractor - Installation . 6. Do not reconnect the battery negative cable at this time. The Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) verification test procedure should be performed following service of any SRS component. See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code Tests and Associated Procedures/Verification Tests . Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Buckle Switch > Component Information > Locations Seat Belt Buckle Switch: Locations Component ID: 506 Component : SWITCH-SEAT BELT-DRIVER Connector: Name : SWITCH-SEAT BELT-DRIVER Color : # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (HD) Pin Circuit Description 1 Z951 18BK GROUND 2 G10 20VT/LG SEAT BELT SWITCH SENSE Component Location - 66 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Buckle Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 1597 Connector: Name : SWITCH-SEAT BELT-DRIVER Color : LT. GRAY # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (LD) Pin Circuit Description 1 Z917 20BK GROUND 2 R57 20LG/GY DRIVER SEAT BELT SWITCH SENSE Component Location - 66 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Buckle Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 1598 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Buckle Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 1599 Seat Belt Buckle Switch: Diagrams Component ID: 506 Component : SWITCH-SEAT BELT-DRIVER Connector: Name : SWITCH-SEAT BELT-DRIVER Color : # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (HD) Pin Circuit Description 1 Z951 18BK GROUND 2 G10 20VT/LG SEAT BELT SWITCH SENSE Component Location - 66 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Buckle Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 1600 Connector: Name : SWITCH-SEAT BELT-DRIVER Color : LT. GRAY # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (LD) Pin Circuit Description 1 Z917 20BK GROUND 2 R57 20LG/GY DRIVER SEAT BELT SWITCH SENSE Component Location - 66 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Buckle Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 1601 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Buckle Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Seat Belt Buckle Switch: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION All vehicles are equipped with a driver side seat belt switch that is a small, normally open, single pole, single throw, leaf contact, momentary switch. The driver side seat belt switch is integral to the buckle (1) of the driver side front seat belt buckle, which is located on a stamped steel stanchion secured by a screw (3) to the inboard side of the driver side front seat cushion frame. The seat belt switch is connected to the vehicle electrical system through a two-lead pigtail wire and connector (4) on the seat belt buckle-half, which is connected to a wire harness connector and take out of the seat wire harness routed beneath the driver side front seat cushion in the passenger compartment. The seat belt switch cannot be adjusted or repaired. If ineffective or damaged, the entire driver side front seat belt buckle-half unit must be replaced. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Buckle Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 1604 Seat Belt Buckle Switch: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The driver side seat belt switch is designed to control a path to ground for the seat belt switch sense input of the ElectroMechanical Instrument Cluster (EMIC) (also known as the Cab Compartment Node/CCN). When the driver side front seat belt tip-half is inserted into the seat belt buckle, the switch closes the path to ground; and, when the driver side front seat belt tip-half is removed from the seat belt buckle, the switch opens the ground path. The switch is actuated by the latch mechanism within the seat belt buckle. The seat belt switch is connected in series between ground and the seat belt switch sense input of the instrument cluster. The seat belt switch receives ground at all times through its pigtail wire connection to the seat wire harness from a take out of the body wire harness. An eyelet terminal connector on the body wire harness ground take out is secured beneath a ground screw on the left cowl side inner panel, beneath the instrument panel. The seat belt switch as well as the hard wired inputs and outputs of the switch may be diagnosed using conventional diagnostic tools and procedures. Refer to the appropriate wiring information. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Locations Seat Sensor/Switch: Locations Component ID: 437 Component : SENSOR-SEAT TRACK POSITION-DRIVER Connector: Name : SENSOR-SEAT TRACK POSITION-DRIVER Color : DK. GRAY # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (EXCEPT HEATED SEATS) Pin Circuit Description 1 R261 20LB/TN DRIVER SEAT POSITION SENSOR DATA 2 R263 20LB/GY DRIVER SEAT POSITION SENSOR VOLTAGE Component Location - 66 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 1608 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 1609 Seat Sensor/Switch: Diagrams Component ID: 437 Component : SENSOR-SEAT TRACK POSITION-DRIVER Connector: Name : SENSOR-SEAT TRACK POSITION-DRIVER Color : DK. GRAY # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (EXCEPT HEATED SEATS) Pin Circuit Description 1 R261 20LB/TN DRIVER SEAT POSITION SENSOR DATA 2 R263 20LB/GY DRIVER SEAT POSITION SENSOR VOLTAGE Component Location - 66 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 1610 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Starting and Charging > Battery Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Battery Temperature Sensor - Description Battery Temperature Sensor: Description and Operation Battery Temperature Sensor - Description DESCRIPTION The Battery Temperature Sensor (BTS) is used only on the diesel engine. It is attached to the battery tray located under the battery. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Starting and Charging > Battery Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Battery Temperature Sensor - Description > Page 1616 Battery Temperature Sensor: Description and Operation Battery Temperature Sensor - Operation OPERATION The BTS is used to determine the battery temperature and control battery charging rate. This temperature data, along with data from monitored line voltage, is used by the PCM (ECM Diesel) to vary the battery charging rate. System voltage will be higher at colder temperatures and is gradually reduced at warmer temperatures. The PCM sends 5 volts to the sensor and is grounded through the sensor return line. As temperature increases, resistance in the sensor decreases and the detection voltage at the PCM increases. The BTS is also used for OBD II diagnostics. Certain faults and OBD II monitors are either enabled or disabled, depending upon BTS input (for example, disable purge and enable Leak Detection Pump (LDP) and O2 sensor heater tests). Most OBD II monitors are disabled below 20°F. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Starting and Charging > Battery Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Battery Temperature Sensor - Removal Battery Temperature Sensor: Service and Repair Battery Temperature Sensor - Removal REMOVAL The battery temperature sensor (1) is located under the vehicle battery and is attached (snapped into) a mounting hole on battery tray (4). 1. Remove battery. 2. Pry sensor (1) straight up from battery tray mounting hole to gain access to electrical connector (3). 3. Disconnect sensor from engine wire harness electrical connector. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Starting and Charging > Battery Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Battery Temperature Sensor - Removal > Page 1619 Battery Temperature Sensor: Service and Repair Battery Temperature Sensor - Installation INSTALLATION NOTE: The battery temperature sensor (1) is located under the vehicle battery and is attached (snapped into) a mounting hole on battery tray (4). 1. Pull electrical connector (3) up through mounting hole in top of battery tray. 2. Connect sensor. 3. Snap sensor into battery tray. 4. Install battery. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Starting and Charging > Clutch Switch > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 472 Clutch Switch: Locations Component ID 472 Component ID: 472 Component : SWITCH-CLUTCH INTERLOCK Connector: Name : SWITCH-CLUTCH INTERLOCK Color : GREEN # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (M/T) Pin Circuit Description 1 T41 20YL/DB TRS T41 SIGNAL (P/N) 2 Z911 20BK GROUND Component Location - 31 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Starting and Charging > Clutch Switch > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 472 > Page 1624 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Starting and Charging > Clutch Switch > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 472 > Page 1625 Clutch Switch: Locations Component ID 482 Component ID: 482 Component : SWITCH-CLUTCH INTERLOCK Connector: Name : SWITCH-CLUTCH INTERLOCK Color : GREEN # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (M/T) Pin Circuit Description 1 T41 20YL/DB TRS T41 SIGNAL (P/N) 2 Z911 20BK GROUND Component Location - 31 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Starting and Charging > Clutch Switch > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 472 > Page 1626 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Starting and Charging > Clutch Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Component ID 472 Clutch Switch: Diagrams Component ID 472 Component ID: 472 Component : SWITCH-CLUTCH INTERLOCK Connector: Name : SWITCH-CLUTCH INTERLOCK Color : GREEN # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (M/T) Pin Circuit Description 1 T41 20YL/DB TRS T41 SIGNAL (P/N) 2 Z911 20BK GROUND Component Location - 31 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Starting and Charging > Clutch Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Component ID 472 > Page 1629 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Starting and Charging > Clutch Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Component ID 472 > Page 1630 Clutch Switch: Diagrams Component ID 482 Component ID: 482 Component : SWITCH-CLUTCH INTERLOCK Connector: Name : SWITCH-CLUTCH INTERLOCK Color : GREEN # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (M/T) Pin Circuit Description 1 T41 20YL/DB TRS T41 SIGNAL (P/N) 2 Z911 20BK GROUND Component Location - 31 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Starting and Charging > Clutch Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Component ID 472 > Page 1631 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Starting and Charging > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL The ignition key must be in the key cylinder (1) for cylinder removal. 1. Disconnect negative cable from battery. 2. Remove upper and lower covers (shrouds) from steering column. 3. Place shifter in PARK position. 4. A retaining pin is located at the underside of the key cylinder assembly. a. Rotate key to RUN position. b. Press in on retaining pin while pulling key cylinder (1) from ignition switch. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Starting and Charging > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 1637 Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION The ignition key must be in the key cylinder (3) for cylinder installation. 1. Install the key cylinder into the housing using care to align the end of the key cylinder (3) with the ignition switch (1). 2. Push the key cylinder (3) in until it clicks. 3. Replace the upper and lower shrouds. 4. Reconnect the battery. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Starting and Charging > Neutral Safety Switch > Component Information > Locations > Switch-Clutch Interlock Neutral Safety Switch: Locations Switch-Clutch Interlock Component ID 472 Component ID: 472 Component : SWITCH-CLUTCH INTERLOCK Connector: Name : SWITCH-CLUTCH INTERLOCK Color : GREEN # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (M/T) Pin Circuit Description 1 T41 20YL/DB TRS T41 SIGNAL (P/N) 2 Z911 20BK GROUND Component Location - 31 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Starting and Charging > Neutral Safety Switch > Component Information > Locations > Switch-Clutch Interlock > Page 1642 Component ID 482 Component ID: 482 Component : SWITCH-CLUTCH INTERLOCK Connector: Name : SWITCH-CLUTCH INTERLOCK Color : GREEN # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (M/T) Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Starting and Charging > Neutral Safety Switch > Component Information > Locations > Switch-Clutch Interlock > Page 1643 Pin Circuit Description 1 T41 20YL/DB TRS T41 SIGNAL (P/N) 2 Z911 20BK GROUND Component Location - 31 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Starting and Charging > Neutral Safety Switch > Component Information > Locations > Switch-Clutch Interlock > Page 1644 Neutral Safety Switch: Locations Switch-Clutch Interlock/Upstop Component ID: 483 Component : SWITCH-CLUTCH INTERLOCK/UPSTOP Connector: Name : SWITCH-CLUTCH INTERLOCK/UPSTOP Color : # of pins : 6 Qualifier : (6.7L) Pin Circuit Description 1-2-3 T26 18DG/OR CLUTCH INTERLOCK/UPSTOP SWITCH OUTPUT 4 Z993 18BK GROUND 5-6-- Component Location - 31 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Starting and Charging > Neutral Safety Switch > Component Information > Locations > Switch-Clutch Interlock > Page 1645 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Starting and Charging > Neutral Safety Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Switch-Clutch Interlock Neutral Safety Switch: Diagrams Switch-Clutch Interlock Component ID 472 Component ID: 472 Component : SWITCH-CLUTCH INTERLOCK Connector: Name : SWITCH-CLUTCH INTERLOCK Color : GREEN # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (M/T) Pin Circuit Description 1 T41 20YL/DB TRS T41 SIGNAL (P/N) 2 Z911 20BK GROUND Component Location - 31 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Starting and Charging > Neutral Safety Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Switch-Clutch Interlock > Page 1648 Component ID 482 Component ID: 482 Component : SWITCH-CLUTCH INTERLOCK Connector: Name : SWITCH-CLUTCH INTERLOCK Color : GREEN # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (M/T) Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Starting and Charging > Neutral Safety Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Switch-Clutch Interlock > Page 1649 Pin Circuit Description 1 T41 20YL/DB TRS T41 SIGNAL (P/N) 2 Z911 20BK GROUND Component Location - 31 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Starting and Charging > Neutral Safety Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Switch-Clutch Interlock > Page 1650 Neutral Safety Switch: Diagrams Switch-Clutch Interlock/Upstop Component ID: 483 Component : SWITCH-CLUTCH INTERLOCK/UPSTOP Connector: Name : SWITCH-CLUTCH INTERLOCK/UPSTOP Color : # of pins : 6 Qualifier : (6.7L) Pin Circuit Description 1-2-3 T26 18DG/OR CLUTCH INTERLOCK/UPSTOP SWITCH OUTPUT 4 Z993 18BK GROUND 5-6-- Component Location - 31 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Starting and Charging > Neutral Safety Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Switch-Clutch Interlock > Page 1651 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Suspension > Suspension Mode Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Component ID 473 Suspension Mode Switch: Diagrams Component ID 473 Component ID: 473 Component : SWITCH-DISCONNECTING STABILIZER BAR Connector: Name : SWITCH-DISCONNECTING STABILIZER BAR Color : BLACK # of pins : 12 Pin Circuit Description 1 T537 20YL/LG LOCKER SWITCH SUPPLY 2 T535 20YL/BR LOCKER SWITCH SENSE 3 T531 20YL/TN STABILIZER BAR SWITCH SENSE 4 T536 20YL/WT SWITCH SUPPLY 5 T532 20YL/GY LOCKER OPEN ILLUMINATION SENSE 6 T533 20YL/LB LOCKER REAR ILLUMINATION SENSE 7 T534 20YL LOCKER FR/RR ILLUMINATION SENSE 8 T530 20YL/DG STABILIZER BAR DISENGAGE ILLUMINATION SENSE 9 T529 20YL/LG STABILIZER BAR ENGAGE ILLUMINATION SENSE 10 - 11 E11 20OR/DB PANEL LAMPS DRIVER 12 Z952 20BK GROUND Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Suspension > Suspension Mode Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Component ID 473 > Page 1658 Suspension Mode Switch: Diagrams Component ID 484 Component ID: 484 Component : SWITCH-DISCONNECTING STABILIZER BAR Connector: Name : SWITCH-DISCONNECTING STABILIZER BAR Color : BLACK # of pins : 12 Pin Circuit Description 1 T537 20YL/LG LOCKER SWITCH SUPPLY 2 T535 20YL/BR LOCKER SWITCH SENSE 3 T531 20YL/TN STABILIZER BAR SWITCH SENSE 4 T536 20YL/WT SWITCH SUPPLY 5 T532 20YL/GY LOCKER OPEN ILLUMINATION SENSE 6 T533 20YL/LB LOCKER REAR ILLUMINATION SENSE 7 T534 20YL LOCKER FR/RR ILLUMINATION SENSE 8 T530 20YL/DG STABILIZER BAR DISENGAGE ILLUMINATION SENSE 9 T529 20YL/LG STABILIZER BAR ENGAGE ILLUMINATION SENSE 10 - 11 E11 20OR/DB PANEL LAMPS DRIVER 12 Z952 20BK GROUND Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Service Precautions Tire Pressure Sensor: Service Precautions CAUTION CAUTION: The use of tire sealants is not recommended for vehicles equipped with the Tire Pressure Monitoring system. Tire sealants may clog tire pressure sensors. CAUTION: Tire pressure sensor valve stem caps and cores are specially designed for the sensors. Due to risk of corrosion, do not use a standard valve stem cap or core in a tire pressure sensor in place of the original equipment style sensor cap and core. CAUTION: It is not recommended to install a tire pressure sensor in an aftermarket wheel. Use tire pressure sensors in original style factory wheels only. CAUTION: Any time a sensor is to be reinstalled in a wheel, a new seal, cap and valve core must be installed on the stem to ensure air tight sealing. NOTE: TPM thresholds have been established for the original tire size equipped on the vehicle. Use original size tires only to maintain system accuracy. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Tire Pressure Sensor: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION On vehicles equipped with Tire Pressure Monitoring System, one tire pressure sensor (6) is mounted to each wheel in place of the traditional tire valve stem. Each sensor has an internal battery that lasts up to 10 years. The battery is not serviceable. At the time of battery failure, the sensor (6) must be replaced. The TPM system operates on a 315 MHz radio frequency. The 315 MHz sensors can be easily identified by a GREEN sensor body, with (an triangle insignia) (1). The 433 MHz sensors can be identified by a grey sensor body with an oval insignia. For car applications, there is a 315 MHz TPM sensor with a Black sensor body with an oval insignia. NOTE: This vehicle uses the 315 MHz TPM sensor with the GREEN sensor body. Although 315 MHz and 433 MHz sensors are identical in size and shape, they are not interchangeable. Always make sure the correct color sensor is being used. A RKE-TPM Analyzer can be used to determine the sensor's frequency without having to dismount the tire. The TPM sensors are designed for original style factory wheels. It is not recommended to install a tire pressure sensor in an aftermarket wheel. (This could cause sealing and system performance issues.) The serviceable components of the tire pressure sensor are: - Sensor-To-Wheel Seal (4) - Valve Stem Cap (2) - Valve Stem Core - Valve Stem Nut (3) The valve stem caps and cores used are specifically designed for the tire pressure monitoring sensors. Although similar to standard valve stem caps and cores, they are different. The valve stem cap has a special seal inside to keep moisture and corrosion out. The valve stem core has a special nickel coating to protect from corrosion. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 1665 Tire Pressure Sensor: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION CAUTION: The TPMS has been optimized for the original equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures have been established for the tire size equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system operation or sensor damage may result when using replacement equipment that is not of the same size, type, and/or style. After-market wheels can cause sensor damage. Do not use aftermarket tire sealants or balance beads if your vehicle is equipped with a TPMS, as damage to the sensors may result. CAUTION: After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure always reinstall the valve stem cap. This will prevent moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem, which could damage the Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensor. CAUTION: Tire pressure sensor valve stem caps and cores are specially designed for the sensors. Due to risk of corrosion, do not use a standard valve stem cap or core in a tire pressure sensor in place of the original equipment style sensor cap and core. CAUTION: Any time a sensor is to be reinstalled in a wheel, a new seal, nut, cap and valve core must be installed on the stem to ensure air tight sealing. NOTE: TPM thresholds have been established for the original tire size equipped on the vehicle. Use original size tires only to maintain system accuracy. The battery operated tire pressure sensor is both a transmitter and a receiver. The TPM sensor can be forced to transmit if using a special tool such as a TPM-RKE Analyzer, or from a transponder. The TPM-RKE Analyzer has the ability to change the sensor mode and to diagnose a faulty TPM sensor. Using a TPM-RKE Analyzer can take up to a minute to force a transmission from a sensor. The High Pressure TPM sensor can be in one of the following modes: Sleep Mode - A new TPM sensor will be in this mode. If placed on the vehicle as a road tire, the TPM sensor will transmit once every 20 seconds when the vehicle is driven at speeds over 15 mph (24 km/h). If the vehicle is not moving, the sensor will only transmit on a pressure change greater then 2 psi (13.8 kPA). Driving the vehicle continuously at speeds over 15 mph (24 km/h) for more then 4 minutes will change the sensor state into 30 BLOCK MODE. The TPM sensor will not return to SLEEP MODE. Now, if the vehicle has been stopped for 20 minutes, the TPM sensor state will change to PARK MODE. - Park Mode - This is the correct mode when the vehicle is not moving. The sensor will transmit once every 13 hours to update the WCM, or will transmit on a 2 psi (13.8 kPA) delta change. The sensors will internally take a measurement of the tire pressure every minute to determine a change in tire pressure. - 30 Block Mode - If the vehicle has not been moving for more then 20 minutes, or if the sensor's mode was forced to Park Mode using a TPM-RKE Analyzer, the sensor's operating mode will transition from PARK MODE to 30 BLOCK MODE once the vehicle is driven over 15 mph. In this mode, the sensor will transmit once every 15 seconds when the vehicle is driven at speeds over 15 mph (24 km/h) for the first 30 transmissions. After 8 minutes of continuous driving above 15 mph (24 km/h), the TPM sensor will change to DRIVE MODE. Drive Mode - In this mode, the sensor will transmit once every minute when the vehicle is driven at speeds over 15 mph (24 km/h). At any time that the vehicle speed drops below 15mph, the sensor will not transmit. The sensor mode will still be in drive mode when the sensor reaches speeds over 15 mph (24 km/h). If the vehicle has been stationary for more then 20 minutes, the TPM sensor will change to PARK MODE. Each sensor's (transmitter) broadcast is uniquely coded so that the wireless control module (WCM) can monitor the state of each of the sensors on the four rotating road wheels. The WCM can automatically learn and store the sensor's ID while driving "within 10 minutes continuously above 15 m.p.h. (24 Km/h)" after a sensor has been replaced. The vehicle must be stationary for more then 20 minutes in order to initiate the learning sequence. The sensor IDs can also be programmed using the TPM-RKE Analyzer Tool. Scan each TPM sensor at each road wheel, and store each Sensor ID in the correct location. (LEFT FRONT, LEFT REAR, RIGHT FRONT, and RIGHT REAR) Connect the TPM-RKE Analyzer Tool to the Scan Tool. Then follow the programming steps outlined in the diagnostic Scan Tool for "Program Tire Pressure Sensor ID w/ TPM Tool" under "MISC" for the "WCM/WIRELESS CONTROL MODULE". Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 1666 Tire Pressure Sensor: Testing and Inspection TIRE PRESSURE SENSOR NOTE: Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi (14 to 41 kPa) during normal driving conditions. Do NOT reduce this normal pressure build up. NOTE: Tire pressure will vary with temperature by about 1 psi (6.9 kPa) for every 12 F (6.5 C). This means that when the outside temperature decreases, the tire pressure will also decrease. Tire pressure should always be set based on cold inflation tire pressure. When diagnosing a tire pressure issue, always check air pressure in the tires first with a known accurate air gauge. Adjust air pressure as necessary to that listed on the Tire Inflation Pressure Label (Placard) provided with the vehicle (usually applied to the driver's side B-pillar). After adjusting air pressure in a tire on the vehicle, allow approximately two minutes for the message or indicator lamp to go out. Check the tire pressure indicator lamp in the instrument cluster. If the lamp is illuminating continuously, inspect all the tires for leaks. A water "dunk tank" or other water test may be used to check for leaks around the sensor as long as any water at the valve core is removed once the procedure is completed. The water can be easily expelled from the core area by pushing in on the core for several seconds, allowing escaping air to drive out any moisture. Reinflate the tire as necessary. Always make sure the original valve stem cap is securely installed to keep moisture out of the sensor. If the gauge-read pressure in the tires does not indicate a tire pressure issue, refer to the appropriate diagnostic information. If the indicator lamp is flashing on/off for 75 seconds and then remains on solid, a system fault was detected. Refer to the appropriate diagnostic information. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Tire Pressure Sensor: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL 1. Raise and support vehicle. 2. Remove the tire and wheel assembly. See: Maintenance/Wheels and Tires/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement CAUTION: The cap used on this valve stem contains an O-ring seal to prevent contamination and moisture from entering the valve stem. Retain this valve stem cap for reuse. Do not substitute a regular valve stem cap in its place. CAUTION: The valve stem used on this vehicle is made of aluminum and the core is nickel plated brass. The original valve stem core must be reinstalled and not substituted with a valve stem core made of a different material. This is required to prevent corrosion in the valve stem caused by the different metals. 3. Let the air out of the tire. 4. Remove the nut (3). 5. Push the sensor into the tire (1) (so the sensor is loose inside the tire). 6. Remove the tire from the rim. 7. Retrieve the sensor (1) from the tire. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 1669 Tire Pressure Sensor: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION NOTE: Before reinstalling an existing tire pressure sensor (6), replace valve cap (2), nut (3), valve core and sensor seal (4) to ensure proper sealing. NOTE: The notch/flat should be lined up together and facing towards the wheel during installation. 1. Wipe area clean around sensor/valve stem mounting hole in wheel. Make sure surface of wheel is not damaged. 2. Insert sensor (1) through wheel (2) as shown keeping pressure against rear of metal valve stem (See Arrow). Potted side of sensor is to be positioned toward wheel. Damage to the sensor may occur if the sensor is installed incorrectly. NOTE: A flat on the seal seat is used to key the seat to the sensor housing. The notch/flat should be lined up together and facing towards the wheel during installation. 3. Install sensor nut (3) and hand tighten. NOTE: Before tightening sensor nut, push downward on sensor housing (2) in an attempt to make it flush with interior contour of wheel (1). 4. While holding sensor in position, tighten sensor nut to 6 Nm (53 in. lbs.). CAUTION: Over-tightening the sensor to as much as 10 Nm (88 in. lbs.) may result in sensor separation from the valve stem. Under this condition, the sensor may still function, however, the condition should be corrected immediately. 5. Mount tire on wheel following tire changer manufacturer's instructions, paying special attention to the following to avoid damaging tire pressure sensor: a. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 1670 Rotating Wheel Tire Changers- Once the wheel is mounted to the changer, position the sensor valve stem (2) approximately 180° from the head of the changer (located at 1) in a clockwise direction before rotating the wheel (also in a clockwise direction) to mount the tire. Use this procedure on both the upper and lower tire beads. b. Rotating Tool Tire Changers - Position the wheel on the changer so that the sensor valve stem (1) is located approximately 180° clockwise from the installation end of the mounting/dismounting tool (2) once the tool is mounted for tire installation. Make sure the sensor is clear of the lower bead breaker area (3) to avoid damaging the sensor when the breaker rises. Rotate the tool (2) in a counterclockwise direction to mount the tire. Use this procedure on both the upper and lower tire beads. 6. Adjust air pressure to that listed on Tire Inflation Pressure Label (Placard) provided with vehicle (usually applied to driver's side B-pillar). Make sure original style valve stem cap is securely installed to keep moisture out of sensor. 7. Install tire and wheel assembly on vehicle. See: Maintenance/Wheels and Tires/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement 8. Lower vehicle. 9. If the vehicle has been stationary for more then 20 minutes, drive the vehicle for a minimum of 10 minutes while maintaining a continuous speed above 15 mph (24 km/h). During this time, the system will learn the new sensor ID. A new sensor ID can also be programmed directly into the WCM by using a RKE-TPM Analyzer in conjunction with a Scan Tool. Once the new sensor ID has been programmed, the RKE-TPM Analyzer can be used to update the TPMS by activating the sensor. NOTE: If a sensor cannot be trained, refer to appropriate diagnostic information. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure Warning Reset Switch > Component Information > Locations Tire Pressure Warning Reset Switch: Locations Component ID: 513 Component : SWITCH-TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR Connector: Name : SWITCH-TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR Color : BROWN # of pins : 6 Pin Circuit Description 1 G561 20VT TPM INDICATOR CONTROL 2 E11 20OR/DB PANEL LAMPS DRIVER 3 G562 20VT/YL TPM SWITCH SIGNAL 4 Z600 20BK GROUND 5 F504 20GY/PK NO FUNCTION DEFINED 6-Component Location - 47 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure Warning Reset Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 1674 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure Warning Reset Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 1675 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure Warning Reset Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 1676 Tire Pressure Warning Reset Switch: Diagrams Component ID: 513 Component : SWITCH-TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR Connector: Name : SWITCH-TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR Color : BROWN # of pins : 6 Pin Circuit Description 1 G561 20VT TPM INDICATOR CONTROL 2 E11 20OR/DB PANEL LAMPS DRIVER 3 G562 20VT/YL TPM SWITCH SIGNAL 4 Z600 20BK GROUND 5 F504 20GY/PK NO FUNCTION DEFINED 6-Component Location - 47 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure Warning Reset Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 1677 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Assembly-Line Pressure Sensor/Variable Force Solenoid Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch: Locations Assembly-Line Pressure Sensor/Variable Force Solenoid Component ID: 17 Component : ASSEMBLY-LINE PRESSURE SENSOR/VARIABLE FORCE SOLENOID Connector: Name : ASSEMBLY-LINE PRESSURE SENSOR/VARIABLE FORCE SOLENOID Color : BLACK # of pins : 6 Qualifier : (RLE) Pin Circuit Description 1-2 F856 20YL/PK 5 VOLT SUPPLY 3 T38 20YL/BR LINE PRESSURE SIGNAL 4 K900 20DB/DG SENSOR GROUND 5 T16 18YL/OR TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT 6 T118 20DG LP VFS CONTROL Component Location - 19 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Assembly-Line Pressure Sensor/Variable Force Solenoid > Page 1684 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Assembly-Line Pressure Sensor/Variable Force Solenoid > Page 1685 Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch: Locations Assembly-Transmission Solenoid/Pressure Switch Component ID: 20 Component : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID/PRESSURE SWITCH Connector: Name : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID/PRESSURE SWITCH Color : LT. BROWN # of pins : 10 Qualifier : (RLE) Pin Circuit Description 1 T60 20YL/GY OD CONTROL 2 T59 20YL/LB UD CONTROL 3 T16 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT 4 T19 18YL/DB 2-4 CONTROL 5 T47 18YL/DG 2-4 PRESSURE SIGNAL 6 T9 20DG/TN OD PRESSURE SIGNAL 7 T20 20DG/WT L/R CONTROL 8-9-10 T50 20YL/TN L/R PRESSURE SIGNAL Component Location - 19 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Assembly-Line Pressure Sensor/Variable Force Solenoid > Page 1686 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Assembly-Line Pressure Sensor/Variable Force Solenoid > Page 1687 Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch: Locations Sensor-Line Pressure Component ID: 425 Component : SENSOR-LINE PRESSURE Connector: Name : SENSOR-LINE PRESSURE Color : BLACK # of pins : 4 Qualifier : (RFE) Pin Circuit Description 1 T160 20DG/WT SENSOR GROUND Pin Circuit Description 1 K900 20DB/DG SENSOR GROUND 2 F856 20YL/PK 5 VOLT SUPPLY 3 T38 20YL/BR LINE PRESSURE SIGNAL 4-- Component Location - 23 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Assembly-Line Pressure Sensor/Variable Force Solenoid > Page 1688 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Assembly-Line Pressure Sensor/Variable Force Solenoid Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch: Diagrams Assembly-Line Pressure Sensor/Variable Force Solenoid Component ID: 17 Component : ASSEMBLY-LINE PRESSURE SENSOR/VARIABLE FORCE SOLENOID Connector: Name : ASSEMBLY-LINE PRESSURE SENSOR/VARIABLE FORCE SOLENOID Color : BLACK # of pins : 6 Qualifier : (RLE) Pin Circuit Description 1-2 F856 20YL/PK 5 VOLT SUPPLY 3 T38 20YL/BR LINE PRESSURE SIGNAL 4 K900 20DB/DG SENSOR GROUND 5 T16 18YL/OR TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT 6 T118 20DG LP VFS CONTROL Component Location - 19 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Assembly-Line Pressure Sensor/Variable Force Solenoid > Page 1691 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Assembly-Line Pressure Sensor/Variable Force Solenoid > Page 1692 Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch: Diagrams Assembly-Transmission Solenoid/Pressure Switch Component ID: 20 Component : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID/PRESSURE SWITCH Connector: Name : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID/PRESSURE SWITCH Color : LT. BROWN # of pins : 10 Qualifier : (RLE) Pin Circuit Description 1 T60 20YL/GY OD CONTROL 2 T59 20YL/LB UD CONTROL 3 T16 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT 4 T19 18YL/DB 2-4 CONTROL 5 T47 18YL/DG 2-4 PRESSURE SIGNAL 6 T9 20DG/TN OD PRESSURE SIGNAL 7 T20 20DG/WT L/R CONTROL 8-9-10 T50 20YL/TN L/R PRESSURE SIGNAL Component Location - 19 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Assembly-Line Pressure Sensor/Variable Force Solenoid > Page 1693 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Assembly-Line Pressure Sensor/Variable Force Solenoid > Page 1694 Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch: Diagrams Sensor-Line Pressure Component ID: 425 Component : SENSOR-LINE PRESSURE Connector: Name : SENSOR-LINE PRESSURE Color : BLACK # of pins : 4 Qualifier : (RFE) Pin Circuit Description 1 T160 20DG/WT SENSOR GROUND Pin Circuit Description 1 K900 20DB/DG SENSOR GROUND 2 F856 20YL/PK 5 VOLT SUPPLY 3 T38 20YL/BR LINE PRESSURE SIGNAL 4-- Component Location - 23 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Assembly-Line Pressure Sensor/Variable Force Solenoid > Page 1695 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > 42RLE Automatic Transmission Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch: Description and Operation 42RLE Automatic Transmission Description DESCRIPTION The line pressure sensor (2) is mounted on the top of the valve body, next to the pressure control solenoid (1). The TCM utilizes a closed-loop system to control transmission line pressure. The system contains a variable force style solenoid, the Pressure Control Solenoid. The solenoid is duty cycle controlled by the TCM to vent the unnecessary line pressure supplied by the oil pump back to the sump. The system also contains a variable pressure style sensor, the Line Pressure Sensor, which is a direct input to the TCM. The line pressure solenoid monitors the transmission line pressure and completes the feedback loop to the TCM. The TCM uses this information to adjust its control of the pressure control solenoid to achieve the desired line pressure. Operation OPERATION The TCM calculates the desired line pressure based upon inputs from the transmission and engine. The TCM calculates the torque input to the transmission and uses that information as the primary input to the calculation. The line pressure is set to a predetermined value during shifts and when the transmission is in the PARK and NEUTRAL positions. This is done to ensure consistent shift quality. During all other operation, the actual line pressure is compared to the desired line pressure and adjustments are made to the pressure control solenoid duty cycle. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 1698 Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch: Description and Operation 545RFE Automatic Transmission Description DESCRIPTION The TCM utilizes a closed-loop system to control transmission line pressure. The system contains a variable force style solenoid, the Pressure Control Solenoid, which is part of the pressure switch assembly. The solenoid is duty cycle controlled by the TCM to vent the unnecessary line pressure supplied by the oil pump back to the pump inlet. The system contains a Line Pressure Sensor, which is a direct input to the TCM. The line pressure sensor monitors the transmission line pressure and completes the feedback loop to the TCM. The TCM uses this information to adjust its control of the pressure control solenoid to achieve the desired line pressure. Operation OPERATION The TCM calculates the desired line pressure based upon inputs from the transmission and engine. The TCM calculates the torque input to the transmission and uses that information as the primary input to the calculation. The line pressure is set to a predetermined value during shifts, to ensure consistent shift quality. During all other operation, the desired line pressure value is adjusted based on torque level and other transmission requirements. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 1699 Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch: Description and Operation 68RFE Automatic Transmission Description DESCRIPTION The TCM utilizes a closed-loop system to control transmission line pressure. The system contains a variable force style solenoid, the Pressure Control Solenoid, which is part of the pressure switch assembly. The solenoid is duty cycle controlled by the TCM to vent the unnecessary line pressure supplied by the oil pump back to the pump inlet. The system contains a Line Pressure Sensor, which is a direct input to the TCM. The line pressure sensor monitors the transmission line pressure and completes the feedback loop to the TCM. The TCM uses this information to adjust its control of the pressure control solenoid to achieve the desired line pressure. Operation OPERATION The TCM calculates the desired line pressure based upon inputs from the transmission and engine. The TCM calculates the torque input to the transmission and uses that information as the primary input to the calculation. The line pressure is set to a predetermined value during shifts, to ensure consistent shift quality. During all other operation, the desired line pressure value is adjusted based on torque level and other transmission requirements. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 42RLE Automatic Transmission Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch: Service and Repair 42RLE Automatic Transmission Removal REMOVAL 1. Remove the valve body from the transmission. See: Transmission and Drivetrain/Automatic Transmission/Transaxle/Valve Body/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/42RLE Automatic Transmission/Removal 2. Remove the electrical connectors from the pressure control solenoid (1) and the line pressure sensor (2). 3. Remove the screws (6) holding the pressure control solenoid (1) and line pressure sensor (2) to the valve body. 4. Remove the pressure control solenoid and line pressure sensor from the valve body. Installation INSTALLATION 1. Install the pressure control solenoid (1) and line pressure sensor (2) into the valve body. 2. Install the screws (6) to hold the pressure control solenoid (1) and line pressure sensor (2) to the valve body. 3. Install the electrical connectors to the pressure control solenoid (1) and the line pressure sensor (2). 4. Install the valve body into the transmission. See: Transmission and Drivetrain/Automatic Transmission/Transaxle/Valve Body/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/42RLE Automatic Transmission/Installation Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 1702 Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch: Service and Repair 545RFE Automatic Transmission Removal REMOVAL 1. Raise vehicle. 2. Place a suitable fluid catch pan under the transmission. 3. Remove the wiring connector from the line pressure sensor (2). 4. Remove the bolt holding the line pressure sensor (2) to the transmission case. 5. Remove the line pressure sensor (2) from the transmission case. Installation INSTALLATION 1. Install the line pressure sensor (2) into the transmission case. 2. Install the bolt to hold the line pressure sensor (2) into the transmission case. Tighten the bolt to 12 Nm (105 in.lbs.). 3. Install the wiring connector onto the line pressure sensor (2). 4. Verify the transmission fluid level. Add fluid as necessary. 5. Lower vehicle. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 1703 Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch: Service and Repair 68RFE Automatic Transmission Removal REMOVAL 1. Raise vehicle. 2. Place a suitable fluid catch pan under the transmission. 3. Remove the wiring connector from the line pressure sensor (2). 4. Remove the bolt holding the line pressure sensor (2) to the transmission case. 5. Remove the line pressure sensor (2) from the transmission case. Installation INSTALLATION 1. Install the line pressure sensor (2) into the transmission case. 2. Install the bolt to hold the line pressure sensor (2) into the transmission case. Tighten the bolt to 12 Nm (105 in.lbs.). 3. Install the wiring connector onto the line pressure sensor (2). 4. Verify the transmission fluid level. Add fluid as necessary. 5. Lower vehicle. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Overdrive Switch, A/T > Component Information > Locations Overdrive Switch: Locations Component ID: 514 Component : SWITCH-TOW/HAUL OVERDRIVE OFF Connector: Name : SWITCH-TOW/HAUL OVERDRIVE OFF Color : NATURAL # of pins : 6 Pin Circuit Description 123 T6 20DG TOW/HAUL OVERDRIVE OFF SWITCH SIGNAL 4 Z71 20LB/BK GROUND 5 T5 20DG/YL AUTOSTICK (ERS)-TOW/HAUL SIGNAL 6 T160 20DG/WT SENSOR GROUND Component Location - 47 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Overdrive Switch, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 1707 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Overdrive Switch, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 1708 Overdrive Switch: Diagrams Component ID: 514 Component : SWITCH-TOW/HAUL OVERDRIVE OFF Connector: Name : SWITCH-TOW/HAUL OVERDRIVE OFF Color : NATURAL # of pins : 6 Pin Circuit Description 123 T6 20DG TOW/HAUL OVERDRIVE OFF SWITCH SIGNAL 4 Z71 20LB/BK GROUND 5 T5 20DG/YL AUTOSTICK (ERS)-TOW/HAUL SIGNAL 6 T160 20DG/WT SENSOR GROUND Component Location - 47 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Overdrive Switch, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 1709 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Overdrive Switch, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 1710 Overdrive Switch: Testing and Inspection DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING - OVERDRIVE ELECTRICAL CONTROLS The tow/haul overdrive off switch, valve body solenoid, case connectors and related wiring can all be tested with a 12 volt test lamp or a volt/ohmmeter. Check continuity of each component when diagnosis indicates this is necessary. Switch and solenoid continuity should be checked whenever the transmission fails to shift into fourth gear range. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Overdrive Switch, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 42RLE Automatic Transmission Overdrive Switch: Service and Repair 42RLE Automatic Transmission Removal REMOVAL 1. Using a plastic trim tool, remove the tow/haul overdrive off switch retainer (2) from the shift lever (1). 2. Pull the switch (2) outwards to release it from the connector in the lever (1). Installation INSTALLATION NOTE: There is enough slack in the wire to pull out the connector from the lever. 1. Pull the connector (2) out of the lever (1) just enough to grasp it. CAUTION: Be careful not to bend the pins on the tow/haul overdrive off switch. Use care when installing the switch, as it is not indexed, and can be accidentally installed incorrectly. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Overdrive Switch, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 1713 2. Install the tow/haul overdrive off switch (3) into the connector (2). 3. Push the tow/haul overdrive off switch (3) and wiring into the shift lever (1). 4. Install the tow/haul overdrive off switch retainer onto the shift lever. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Overdrive Switch, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 1714 Overdrive Switch: Service and Repair 545RFE Automatic Transmission Removal REMOVAL 1. Using a plastic trim tool, remove the tow/haul overdrive off switch retainer (2) from the shift lever (1). 2. Pull the switch (2) outwards to release it from the connector in the lever (1). Installation INSTALLATION NOTE: There is enough slack in the wire to pull out the connector from the lever. 1. Pull the connector (2) out of the lever (1) just enough to grasp it. CAUTION: Be careful not to bend the pins on the tow/haul overdrive off switch. Use care when installing the switch, as it is not indexed, and can be accidentally installed incorrectly. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Overdrive Switch, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 1715 2. Install the tow/haul overdrive off switch (3) into the connector (2). 3. Push the tow/haul overdrive off switch (3) and wiring into the shift lever (1). 4. Install the tow/haul overdrive off switch retainer onto the shift lever. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Overdrive Switch, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 1716 Overdrive Switch: Service and Repair 48RE Automatic Transmission Removal REMOVAL 1. Using a plastic trim tool, remove the tow/haul overdrive off switch retainer (2) from the shift lever (1). 2. Pull the switch (2) outwards to release it from the connector in the lever (1). Installation INSTALLATION NOTE: There is enough slack in the wire to pull out the connector from the lever. 1. Pull the connector (2) out of the lever (1) just enough to grasp it. CAUTION: Be careful not to bend the pins on the tow/haul overdrive off switch. Use care when installing the switch, as it is not indexed, and can be accidentally installed incorrectly. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Overdrive Switch, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 1717 2. Install the tow/haul overdrive off switch (3) into the connector (2). 3. Push the tow/haul overdrive off switch (3) and wiring into the shift lever (1). 4. Install the tow/haul overdrive off switch retainer onto the shift lever. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Overdrive Switch, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 1718 Overdrive Switch: Service and Repair AS68RC Automatic Transmission Removal REMOVAL 1. Using a plastic trim tool, remove the tow/haul overdrive off switch retainer (2) from the shift lever (1). 2. Pull the switch (2) outwards to release it from the connector in the lever (1). Installation INSTALLATION NOTE: There is enough slack in the wire to pull out the connector from the lever. 1. Pull the connector (2) out of the lever (1) just enough to grasp it. CAUTION: Be careful not to bend the pins on the tow/haul overdrive off switch. Use care when installing the switch, as it is not indexed, and can be accidentally installed incorrectly. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Overdrive Switch, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 1719 2. Install the tow/haul overdrive off switch (3) into the connector (2). 3. Push the tow/haul overdrive off switch (3) and wiring into the shift lever (1). 4. Install the tow/haul overdrive off switch retainer onto the shift lever. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Shift Solenoid Position Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Shift Solenoid Position Sensor/Switch: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The transmission solenoid/TRS assembly is internal to the transmission and mounted on the valve body assembly. The assembly consists of six solenoids that control hydraulic pressure to the six friction elements (transmission clutches), and the torque converter clutch. The pressure control solenoid is located on the side of the solenoid/TRS assembly. The solenoid/TRS assembly also contains the Transmission Range Sensor (TRS) and five pressure switches that feed information to the TCM. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Shift Solenoid Position Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 1724 Shift Solenoid Position Sensor/Switch: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION SOLENOIDS Solenoids are used to control the L/R, 2C, 4C, OD, and UD friction elements. The reverse clutch is controlled by line pressure and the position of the manual valve in the valve body. All the solenoids are contained within the Solenoid and Pressure Switch Assembly. The solenoid and pressure switch assembly contains one additional solenoid, Multi-Select (MS), which serves primarily to provide 2nd and 3rd gear limp-in operation. The solenoids receive electrical power from the Transmission Control Relay through a single wire. The TCM energizes or operates the solenoids individually by grounding the return wire of the solenoid as necessary. When a solenoid is energized, the solenoid valve shifts, and a fluid passage is opened or closed (vented or applied), depending on its default operating state. The result is an apply or release of a frictional element. The MS and UD solenoids are normally applied to allow transmission limp-in in the event of an electrical failure. The continuity of the solenoids and circuits are periodically tested. Each solenoid is turned on or off depending on its current state. An inductive spike should be detected by the TCM during this test. If no spike is detected, the circuit is tested again to verify the failure. In addition to the periodic testing, the solenoid circuits are tested if a speed ratio or pressure switch error occurs. PRESSURE SWITCHES The TCM relies on five pressure switches to monitor fluid pressure in the L/R, 2C, 4C, UD, and OD hydraulic circuits. The primary purpose of these switches is to help the TCM detect when clutch circuit hydraulic failures occur. The switches close at 23 psi and open at 11 psi, and simply indicate whether or not pressure exists. The switches are continuously monitored by the TCM for the correct states (open or closed) in each gear as shown in the following charts and 545RFE PRESSURE SWITCH STATES: A Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) will set if the TCM senses any switch open or closed at the wrong time in a given gear. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Shift Solenoid Position Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Shift Solenoid Position Sensor/Switch: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL NOTE: If the Transmission Solenoid/TRS Assembly is being replaced, the Quick Learn Procedure must be performed. See: Powertrain Management/Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Transmission Control Module/TCM Quick Learn 1. Remove the valve body from the transmission. See: Transmission and Drivetrain/Automatic Transmission/Transaxle/Valve Body/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/545RFE Automatic Transmission/Removal 2. Remove the bolts (1) holding the transmission solenoid/TRS assembly onto the valve body. 3. Separate the transmission solenoid/TRS assembly from the valve body. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Shift Solenoid Position Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 1727 Shift Solenoid Position Sensor/Switch: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION 1. Place TRS selector plate in the PARK position. 2. Position the transmission solenoid/TRS assembly onto the valve body. Be sure that both alignment dowels are fully seated in the valve body and that the TRS switch contacts are properly positioned in the selector plate 3. Install the bolts (1) to hold the transmission solenoid/TRS assembly onto the valve body. 4. Tighten the solenoid assembly screws adjacent to the arrows cast into the bottom of the valve body first. Tighten the screws to 6 Nm (50 in.lbs.). 5. Tighten the remainder of the solenoid assembly screws to 6 Nm (50 in.lbs.). 6. Install the valve body into the transmission. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Transmission Range Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Locations Sensor-Transmission Range Component ID: 444 Component : SENSOR-TRANSMISSION RANGE Connector: Name : SENSOR-TRANSMISSION RANGE Color : # of pins : 10 Qualifier : (RC) Pin Circuit Description 1 T825 20DG/YL TRS NEUTRAL SIGNAL 2 T3 20DG/DB TRS T3 SIGNAL 3 T828 20DG/DB TRS 1 SIGNAL 4 F1 20PK/WT FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (OFF-RUN-START) 5 T824 20YL/DB TRS PARK SIGNAL 6 Z157 16BK/LG GROUND 7 T42 20DG/YL TRS T42 SIGNAL 8 T827 20DG/LB TRS DRIVE SIGNAL 9 T826 20DG/DB TRS REVERSE SIGNAL 10 T41 20YL/DB TRS T41 SIGNAL (P/N) Component Location - 20 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Transmission Range > Page 1732 Component Location - 19 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Transmission Range > Page 1733 Component Location - 26 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Transmission Range > Page 1734 Connector: Name : SENSOR-TRANSMISSION RANGE Color : # of pins : 6 Qualifier : (RE) Pin Circuit Description 1-2 T117 20DG/YL TRS SIGNAL 3-4-- Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Transmission Range > Page 1735 5 T917 20YL/TN TRS RETURN 6 T41 20YL/DB TRS T41 SIGNAL (P/N) Component Location - 20 Component Location - 19 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Transmission Range > Page 1736 Component Location - 26 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Transmission Range > Page 1737 Connector: Name : SENSOR-TRANSMISSION RANGE Color : LT. GREEN # of pins : 10 Qualifier : (RLE) Pin Circuit Description 1 T16 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT 2-3 K900 20DB/DG SENSOR GROUND 4 T54 20DG/OR TRANSMISSION TEMPERATURE SIGNAL Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Transmission Range > Page 1738 5-6-7 T1 20DG/LB TRS T1 SIGNAL 8 T3 20DG/DB TRS T3 SIGNAL 9 T42 20DG/YL TRS T42 SIGNAL 10 T41 20YL/DB TRS T41 SIGNAL (P/N) Component Location - 20 Component Location - 19 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Transmission Range > Page 1739 Component Location - 26 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Transmission Range > Page 1740 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Transmission Range > Page 1741 Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Locations Assembly-Transmission Solenoid/TRS Component ID: 21 Component : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID/TRS Connector: Name : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID/TRS Color : BLACK # of pins : 23 Qualifier : (RFE) Pin Circuit Description 1-2 T20 20DG/WT L/R CONTROL 3-4 T41 20YL/DB TRS T41 SIGNAL (P/N) 5 T42 20DG/YL TRS T42 SIGNAL 6-- 7 T60 20YL/GY OD SOLENOID CONTROL 8 T3 20DG/DB TRS T3 SIGNAL 9 T1 20DG/LB TRS T1 SIGNAL 10 T16 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT 11 T48 20BR/YL 4C PRESSURE SIGNAL 12 T118 20DG LINE PRESSURE CONTROL 13 T4 20DG/RD TRS T2 SIGNAL 13 T4 20DG/LB TRS T2 SIGNAL 14 T50 20DG/PK L/R PRESSURE SIGNAL 14 T50 20YL/TN L/R PRESSURE SIGNAL 15 T147 20DG/YL 2C PRESSURE SIGNAL 16 T9 20DG/TN OD PRESSURE SIGNAL 17 T59 20YL/LB UD CONTROL 18 T29 20YL/WT UD PRESSURE SIGNAL 19 T259 20YL/DG 4C CONTROL 20 T219 20YL/LG 2C CONTROL 21 T140 20YL/GY MS CONTROL 22 T160 20DG/WT SENSOR GROUND 22 K900 20DB/DG SENSOR GROUND 23 T54 20DG/OR TRANSMISSION TEMPERATURE SIGNAL Component Location - 21 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Transmission Range > Page 1742 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Transmission Range Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Diagrams Sensor-Transmission Range Component ID: 444 Component : SENSOR-TRANSMISSION RANGE Connector: Name : SENSOR-TRANSMISSION RANGE Color : # of pins : 10 Qualifier : (RC) Pin Circuit Description 1 T825 20DG/YL TRS NEUTRAL SIGNAL 2 T3 20DG/DB TRS T3 SIGNAL 3 T828 20DG/DB TRS 1 SIGNAL 4 F1 20PK/WT FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (OFF-RUN-START) 5 T824 20YL/DB TRS PARK SIGNAL 6 Z157 16BK/LG GROUND 7 T42 20DG/YL TRS T42 SIGNAL 8 T827 20DG/LB TRS DRIVE SIGNAL 9 T826 20DG/DB TRS REVERSE SIGNAL 10 T41 20YL/DB TRS T41 SIGNAL (P/N) Component Location - 20 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Transmission Range > Page 1745 Component Location - 19 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Transmission Range > Page 1746 Component Location - 26 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Transmission Range > Page 1747 Connector: Name : SENSOR-TRANSMISSION RANGE Color : # of pins : 6 Qualifier : (RE) Pin Circuit Description 1-2 T117 20DG/YL TRS SIGNAL 3-4-- Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Transmission Range > Page 1748 5 T917 20YL/TN TRS RETURN 6 T41 20YL/DB TRS T41 SIGNAL (P/N) Component Location - 20 Component Location - 19 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Transmission Range > Page 1749 Component Location - 26 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Transmission Range > Page 1750 Connector: Name : SENSOR-TRANSMISSION RANGE Color : LT. GREEN # of pins : 10 Qualifier : (RLE) Pin Circuit Description 1 T16 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT 2-3 K900 20DB/DG SENSOR GROUND 4 T54 20DG/OR TRANSMISSION TEMPERATURE SIGNAL Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Transmission Range > Page 1751 5-6-7 T1 20DG/LB TRS T1 SIGNAL 8 T3 20DG/DB TRS T3 SIGNAL 9 T42 20DG/YL TRS T42 SIGNAL 10 T41 20YL/DB TRS T41 SIGNAL (P/N) Component Location - 20 Component Location - 19 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Transmission Range > Page 1752 Component Location - 26 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Transmission Range > Page 1753 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Transmission Range > Page 1754 Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Diagrams Assembly-Transmission Solenoid/TRS Component ID: 21 Component : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID/TRS Connector: Name : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID/TRS Color : BLACK # of pins : 23 Qualifier : (RFE) Pin Circuit Description 1-2 T20 20DG/WT L/R CONTROL 3-4 T41 20YL/DB TRS T41 SIGNAL (P/N) 5 T42 20DG/YL TRS T42 SIGNAL 6-- 7 T60 20YL/GY OD SOLENOID CONTROL 8 T3 20DG/DB TRS T3 SIGNAL 9 T1 20DG/LB TRS T1 SIGNAL 10 T16 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT 11 T48 20BR/YL 4C PRESSURE SIGNAL 12 T118 20DG LINE PRESSURE CONTROL 13 T4 20DG/RD TRS T2 SIGNAL 13 T4 20DG/LB TRS T2 SIGNAL 14 T50 20DG/PK L/R PRESSURE SIGNAL 14 T50 20YL/TN L/R PRESSURE SIGNAL 15 T147 20DG/YL 2C PRESSURE SIGNAL 16 T9 20DG/TN OD PRESSURE SIGNAL 17 T59 20YL/LB UD CONTROL 18 T29 20YL/WT UD PRESSURE SIGNAL 19 T259 20YL/DG 4C CONTROL 20 T219 20YL/LG 2C CONTROL 21 T140 20YL/GY MS CONTROL 22 T160 20DG/WT SENSOR GROUND 22 K900 20DB/DG SENSOR GROUND 23 T54 20DG/OR TRANSMISSION TEMPERATURE SIGNAL Component Location - 21 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Transmission Range > Page 1755 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > 42RLE Automatic Transmission Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Description and Operation 42RLE Automatic Transmission Description DESCRIPTION The Transmission Range Sensor (TRS) (2) is mounted to the top of the valve body inside the transmission and can only be serviced by removing the valve body assembly. The electrical connector extends through the transmission case. The Transmission Range Sensor (TRS) has four switch contacts that monitor shift lever position and send the information to the PCM. Operation OPERATION The Transmission Range Sensor (TRS) communicates shift lever position (SLP) to the TCM as a combination of open and closed switches. Each shift lever position has an assigned combination of switch states (open/closed) that the TCM receives from four sense circuits. The TCM interprets this information and determines the appropriate transmission gear position and shift schedule. Since there are four switches, there are 16 possible combinations of open and closed switches (codes). Seven of these codes are related to gear position and three are recognized as "between gear" codes. This results in six codes which should never occur. These are called "invalid" codes. An invalid code will result in a DTC, and the TCM will then determine the shift lever position based on pressure switch data. This allows reasonably normal transmission operation with a TRS failure. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 1758 Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Description and Operation 545RFE Automatic Transmission Description DESCRIPTION The Transmission Range Sensor (TRS) is part of the solenoid module, which is mounted to the top of the valve body inside the transmission. The Transmission Range Sensor (TRS) has five switch contact pins that: - Determine shift lever position - Supply ground to the Starter Relay in Park and Neutral only. - Supply +12 V to the backup lamps in Reverse only. The TRS also has an integrated temperature sensor (thermistor) that communicates transmission temperature to the TCM and PCM. Operation OPERATION The Transmission Range Sensor (TRS) communicates shift lever position to the TCM as a combination of open and closed switches. Each shift lever position has an assigned combination of switch states (open/closed) that the TCM receives from four sense circuits. The TCM interprets this information and determines the appropriate transmission gear position and shift schedule. There are many possible combinations of open and closed switches (codes). Seven of these possible codes are related to gear position and five are recognized as "between gear" codes. This results in many codes which should never occur. These are called "invalid" codes. An invalid code will result in a DTC, and the TCM will then determine the shift lever position based on pressure switch data. This allows reasonably normal transmission operation with a TRS failure. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 1759 Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Description and Operation 68RFE Automatic Transmission Description DESCRIPTION The Transmission Range Sensor (TRS) is part of the solenoid module, which is mounted to the top of the valve body inside the transmission. The Transmission Range Sensor (TRS) has five switch contact pins that: - Determine shift lever position - Supply ground to the Starter Relay in Park and Neutral only. The TRS also has an integrated temperature sensor (thermistor) that communicates transmission temperature to the TCM and PCM. Operation OPERATION The Transmission Range Sensor (TRS) communicates shift lever position to the TCM as a combination of open and closed switches. Each shift lever position has an assigned combination of switch states (open/closed) that the TCM receives from four sense circuits. The TCM interprets this information and determines the appropriate transmission gear position and shift schedule. There are many possible combinations of open and closed switches (codes). Five of these possible codes correspond to valid gear position, there are two codes for the neutral position and three are recognized as "between gear" codes. This results in many codes which should never occur. These are called "invalid" codes. An invalid code will result in a DTC, and the TCM will then determine the shift lever position based on pressure switch data. This allows reasonably normal transmission operation with a TRS failure. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 1760 Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Description and Operation 48RE Automatic Transmission Description DESCRIPTION The Transmission Range Sensor (TRS) has 3 primary functions: - Provide a PARK/NEUTRAL start signal to the engine controller and the starter relay. - Turn the Back-up lamps on when the transmission is in REVERSE and the engine (ignition) is on. - Provide a transmission range signal to the instrument cluster. The sensor is mounted in the transmission housing near the valve body, just above the pan rail. It's in the same position as the Park/Neutral switch on other transmissions. The TRS contacts a cammed surface on the manual valve lever. The cammed surface translates the rotational motion of the manual lever into the linear motion of the sensor. The cammed surface on the manual lever is comprised of two parts controlling the TRS signal: The insulator portion contacts the switch poppet when the manual lever is not in PARK or NEUTRAL. The manual lever itself contacts the poppet when the lever is in PARK or NEUTRAL; providing a ground for the signal from the starter relay and the appropriate engine controller. Operation OPERATION Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 1761 As the switch moves through its linear motion contacts slide across a circuit board which changes the resistance between the range sensing pins of the switch. A power supply on the instrument cluster provides a regulated voltage signal to the switch. The return signal is decoded by the cluster, which then controls the PRNDL display to correspond with the correct transmission range. A bus message of transmission range is also sent by the cluster. In REVERSE range a second contact set closes the circuit providing power to the reverse lamps. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 1762 Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Description and Operation AS68RC Automatic Transmission Description DESCRIPTION TRANSMISSION RANGE SENSOR The transmission range sensor (1) is mounted externally on the left side of the transmission case. Operation OPERATION The transmission range sensor prohibits the vehicle from starting in any gear other than park and neutral. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 1763 Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Testing and Inspection DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING - TRANSMISSION RANGE SENSOR (TRS) NOTE: For all circuit identification in the following steps, Refer to the appropriate Wiring Information. 1. Raise vehicle on suitable hoist. 2. Disconnect the vehicle's shift cable from the manual lever. 3. With the manual lever in the PARK position (the PARK position is with the manual lever moved to the full rearward position), measure the resistance between the Park/Neutral Position Sense pin of the TRS and the transmission case. The resistance should be less than 5 ohms. 4. With the manual lever in the NEUTRAL position (the NEUTRAL position is with the manual lever moved two detents forward of the full rearward position), measure the resistance between the Park/Neutral Position Sense pin of the TRS and the transmission case. The resistance should be less than 5 ohms. 5. If the resistance is greater than 5 ohms in either of the previous steps, check for a dirty contact between the tip of the TRS rod and the valve body manual lever. If the contact is OK, replace the TRS. 6. With the manual lever in the REVERSE position (the REVERSE position is with the manual lever moved one detent forward of the full rearward position), measure the resistance between the Fused Ignition Switch Output and the Back-up Lamp feed pins of the TRS. The resistance should be less than 5 ohms. If the resistance is greater than 5 ohms, replace the TRS. 7. With the manual lever in the PARK position (the PARK position is with the manual lever moved to the full rearward position), measure the resistance between the Transmission Range Sensor MUX and the Transmission Range Sensor 5V Supply pins of the TRS. The resistance should be 522.2 ohms. If the resistance is not correct, replace the TRS. 8. With the manual lever in the REVERSE position (the REVERSE position is with the manual lever moved one detent forward of the full rearward position), measure the resistance between the Transmission Range Sensor MUX and the Transmission Range Sensor 5V Supply pins of the TRS. The resistance should be 206.2 ohms. If the resistance is not correct, replace the TRS. 9. With the manual lever in the NEUTRAL position (the NEUTRAL position is with the manual lever moved two detents forward of the full rearward position), measure the resistance between the Transmission Range Sensor MUX and the Transmission Range Sensor 5V Supply pins of the TRS. The resistance should be 108.6 ohms. If the resistance is not correct, replace the TRS. 10. With the manual lever in the DRIVE position (the DRIVE position is with the manual lever moved three detents forward of the full rearward position), measure the resistance between the Transmission Range Sensor MUX and the Transmission Range Sensor 5V Supply pins of the TRS. The resistance should be 59.9 ohms. If the resistance is not correct, replace the TRS. 11. With the manual lever in the SECOND position (the SECOND position is with the manual lever moved one detent rearward of the full forward position), measure the resistance between the Transmission Range Sensor MUX and the Back-up Lamp feed pins of the TRS. The resistance should be 31.9 ohms. If the resistance is not correct, replace the TRS. 12. With the manual lever in the LOW position (the LOW position is with the manual lever moved to the full forward position), measure the resistance between the Transmission Range Sensor MUX and the Back-up Lamp feed pins of the TRS. The resistance should be 13.7 ohms. If the resistance is not correct, replace the TRS. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 42RLE Automatic Transmission Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Service and Repair 42RLE Automatic Transmission Removal REMOVAL 1. Remove valve body assembly from vehicle. See: Transmission and Drivetrain/Automatic Transmission/Transaxle/Valve Body/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/42RLE Automatic Transmission/Removal 2. Remove the manual shaft seal (1). 3. Remove manual shaft/TRS retaining screw (1). 4. Slide TRS off of manual valve shaft. Installation INSTALLATION Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 1766 1. Install the TRS (2) to the manual shaft. Make sure TRS locating pin rests in manual valve bore slot. 2. Install the TRS/manual shaft retaining screw (1) and torque to 5 Nm (45 in. lbs.) torque. 3. Install the manual shaft seal (1). 4. Install valve body to the transmission. See: Transmission and Drivetrain/Automatic Transmission/Transaxle/Valve Body/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/42RLE Automatic Transmission/Installation Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 1767 Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Service and Repair 48RE Automatic Transmission Removal REMOVAL 1. Raise vehicle and position drain pan under the transmission range sensor (TRS). 2. Move the transmission manual lever to the manual LOW position. The manual LOW position is with the manual lever in the forward-most detent. 3. Disengage the wiring connector from the TRS. 4. Remove the two screws holding the TRS to the TRS mounting bracket. 5. Remove the TRS (3) from the TRS mounting bracket by pulling it straight out of the bracket. 6. If necessary, loosen the TRS mounting bracket (2) in the transmission case using Adapter 8581 (3). 7. If necessary, remove the TRS mounting bracket (2) from the transmission case. Installation INSTALLATION Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 1768 1. Move the transmission manual shaft lever to the manual LOW position. 2. If necessary, install the TRS mounting bracket (2) into the transmission case. Using Adapter 8581 (3), tighten the mounting bracket to 34 Nm (300 in.lbs.). 3. Install the TRS (3) into the mounting bracket (2) with the wiring connector facing the front of the transmission. 4. Install the two screws to hold the TRS to the mounting bracket. Tighten the screws to 5 Nm (45 in.lbs.). 5. Verify proper sensor operation (1-4). 6. Move the transmission manual shaft lever to the PARK position. 7. Connect TRS wiring connector to the TRS and lower vehicle. 8. Refill the transmission fluid to the correct level. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 1769 Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Service and Repair AS68RC Automatic Transmission Removal REMOVAL NOTE: Be certain the transmission is in the park lock position. TRANSMISSION RANGE SENSOR 1. Remove the shift cable from the manual shift lever (2). 2. Disconnect the wire harness from the transmission range sensor. 3. Remove the two nuts (3) from the control shaft. TRS REMOVAL/INSTALLATION Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 1770 4. Pry open the tabs on the stake washer (5), remove the nut (3) and the stake washer (5). 5. Remove the bolts (2). 6. Remove the transmission range sensor (1) from the transmission control shaft (4). Installation INSTALLATION 1. Install the transmission range sensor (3) onto the control shaft (5). 2. Install the stake washer and the nut (4) and hand tighten. 3. With the transmission in neutral install the alignment tool 9983 (6) onto the control shaft (5) and into the alignment hole (1). 4. Install the bolts (2). 5. After aligning the transmission range sensor, tighten the bolts (2) 12.5 Nm (9 ft.lbs.) 6. Remove the alignment tool 9983 (6) 7. Tighten the control shaft nut to 7 Nm (62 in.lbs.) 8. Bend the tabs on the stake washer and nut (4) in at least two places to lock in position. TRANSMISSION RANGE SENSOR Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 1771 9. Install the manual shift lever (2) onto the control shaft. 10. Install the inner nut (3) onto the control shaft. Tighten the inner nut to 12.5 Nm (9 ft.lbs). 11. Install the outer nut (3) onto the control shaft. While holding the inner nut, tighten the outer not to 12.5 Nm (9 ft.lbs) Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Input Speed Transmission Speed Sensor: Locations Sensor-Input Speed Component ID 399 Component ID: 399 Component : SENSOR-INPUT SPEED Connector: Name : SENSOR-INPUT SPEED Color : # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (RC) Pin Circuit Description 1 T52 20DG/OR INPUT SPEED SIGNAL 2 T72 20YL/DB 8 VOLT SUPPLY Component Location - 21 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 1776 Component Location - 19 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 1777 Component Location - 26 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 1778 Connector: Name : SENSOR-INPUT SPEED Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (RFE/RLE) Pin Circuit Description 1 T52 20DG/OR INPUT SPEED SIGNAL 2 T13 20DG/VT SPEED SENSOR GROUND Component Location - 21 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 1779 Component Location - 19 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 1780 Component Location - 26 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 1781 Component ID 420 Component ID: 420 Component : SENSOR-INPUT SPEED Connector: Name : SENSOR-INPUT SPEED Color : # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (RC) Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 1782 Pin Circuit Description 1 T52 20DG/OR INPUT SPEED SIGNAL 2 T72 20YL/DB 8 VOLT SUPPLY Component Location - 21 Component Location - 19 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 1783 Component Location - 26 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 1784 Connector: Name : SENSOR-INPUT SPEED Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (RFE/RLE) Pin Circuit Description 1 T52 20DG/OR INPUT SPEED SIGNAL 2 T13 20DG/VT SPEED SENSOR GROUND Component Location - 21 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 1785 Component Location - 19 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 1786 Component Location - 26 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 1787 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 1788 Transmission Speed Sensor: Locations Sensor-Output Speed Component ID 400 Component ID: 400 Component : SENSOR-OUTPUT SPEED Connector: Name : SENSOR-OUTPUT SPEED Color : # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (RC) Pin Circuit Description 1 T14 20DG/BR OUTPUT SPEED SIGNAL 2 T72 20YL/DB 8 VOLT SUPPLY Component Location - 20 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 1789 Component Location - 21 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 1790 Component Location - 19 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 1791 Component Location - 26 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 1792 Connector: Name : SENSOR-OUTPUT SPEED Color : # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (RE) Pin Circuit Description 1 T14 18DG/BR OUTPUT SPEED SIGNAL 2 T13 18DG/VT SPEED SENSOR GROUND Component Location - 20 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 1793 Component Location - 21 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 1794 Component Location - 19 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 1795 Component Location - 26 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 1796 Connector: Name : SENSOR-OUTPUT SPEED Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (RFE/RLE) Pin Circuit Description 1 T14 20DG/BR OUTPUT SPEED SIGNAL Pin Circuit Description 1 T13 20DG/VT SPEED SENSOR GROUND Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 1797 2 T13 20DG/VT SPEED SENSOR GROUND 2 T14 20DG/BR OUTPUT SPEED SIGNAL Component Location - 20 Component Location - 21 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 1798 Component Location - 19 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 1799 Component Location - 26 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 1800 Component ID 430 Component ID: 430 Component : SENSOR-OUTPUT SPEED Connector: Name : SENSOR-OUTPUT SPEED Color : # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (RC) Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 1801 Pin Circuit Description 1 T14 20DG/BR OUTPUT SPEED SIGNAL 2 T72 20YL/DB 8 VOLT SUPPLY Component Location - 20 Component Location - 21 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 1802 Component Location - 19 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 1803 Component Location - 26 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 1804 Connector: Name : SENSOR-OUTPUT SPEED Color : # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (RE) Pin Circuit Description 1 T14 18DG/BR OUTPUT SPEED SIGNAL 2 T13 18DG/VT SPEED SENSOR GROUND Component Location - 20 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 1805 Component Location - 21 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 1806 Component Location - 19 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 1807 Component Location - 26 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 1808 Connector: Name : SENSOR-OUTPUT SPEED Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (RFE/RLE) Pin Circuit Description 1 T14 20DG/BR OUTPUT SPEED SIGNAL Pin Circuit Description 1 T13 20DG/VT SPEED SENSOR GROUND Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 1809 2 T13 20DG/VT SPEED SENSOR GROUND 2 T14 20DG/BR OUTPUT SPEED SIGNAL Component Location - 20 Component Location - 21 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 1810 Component Location - 19 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 1811 Component Location - 26 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 1812 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Input Speed Transmission Speed Sensor: Diagrams Sensor-Input Speed Component ID 399 Component ID: 399 Component : SENSOR-INPUT SPEED Connector: Name : SENSOR-INPUT SPEED Color : # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (RC) Pin Circuit Description 1 T52 20DG/OR INPUT SPEED SIGNAL 2 T72 20YL/DB 8 VOLT SUPPLY Component Location - 21 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 1815 Component Location - 19 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 1816 Component Location - 26 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 1817 Connector: Name : SENSOR-INPUT SPEED Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (RFE/RLE) Pin Circuit Description 1 T52 20DG/OR INPUT SPEED SIGNAL 2 T13 20DG/VT SPEED SENSOR GROUND Component Location - 21 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 1818 Component Location - 19 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 1819 Component Location - 26 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 1820 Component ID 420 Component ID: 420 Component : SENSOR-INPUT SPEED Connector: Name : SENSOR-INPUT SPEED Color : # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (RC) Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 1821 Pin Circuit Description 1 T52 20DG/OR INPUT SPEED SIGNAL 2 T72 20YL/DB 8 VOLT SUPPLY Component Location - 21 Component Location - 19 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 1822 Component Location - 26 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 1823 Connector: Name : SENSOR-INPUT SPEED Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (RFE/RLE) Pin Circuit Description 1 T52 20DG/OR INPUT SPEED SIGNAL 2 T13 20DG/VT SPEED SENSOR GROUND Component Location - 21 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 1824 Component Location - 19 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 1825 Component Location - 26 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 1826 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 1827 Transmission Speed Sensor: Diagrams Sensor-Output Speed Component ID 400 Component ID: 400 Component : SENSOR-OUTPUT SPEED Connector: Name : SENSOR-OUTPUT SPEED Color : # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (RC) Pin Circuit Description 1 T14 20DG/BR OUTPUT SPEED SIGNAL 2 T72 20YL/DB 8 VOLT SUPPLY Component Location - 20 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 1828 Component Location - 21 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 1829 Component Location - 19 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 1830 Component Location - 26 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 1831 Connector: Name : SENSOR-OUTPUT SPEED Color : # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (RE) Pin Circuit Description 1 T14 18DG/BR OUTPUT SPEED SIGNAL 2 T13 18DG/VT SPEED SENSOR GROUND Component Location - 20 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 1832 Component Location - 21 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 1833 Component Location - 19 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 1834 Component Location - 26 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 1835 Connector: Name : SENSOR-OUTPUT SPEED Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (RFE/RLE) Pin Circuit Description 1 T14 20DG/BR OUTPUT SPEED SIGNAL Pin Circuit Description 1 T13 20DG/VT SPEED SENSOR GROUND Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 1836 2 T13 20DG/VT SPEED SENSOR GROUND 2 T14 20DG/BR OUTPUT SPEED SIGNAL Component Location - 20 Component Location - 21 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 1837 Component Location - 19 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 1838 Component Location - 26 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 1839 Component ID 430 Component ID: 430 Component : SENSOR-OUTPUT SPEED Connector: Name : SENSOR-OUTPUT SPEED Color : # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (RC) Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 1840 Pin Circuit Description 1 T14 20DG/BR OUTPUT SPEED SIGNAL 2 T72 20YL/DB 8 VOLT SUPPLY Component Location - 20 Component Location - 21 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 1841 Component Location - 19 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 1842 Component Location - 26 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 1843 Connector: Name : SENSOR-OUTPUT SPEED Color : # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (RE) Pin Circuit Description 1 T14 18DG/BR OUTPUT SPEED SIGNAL 2 T13 18DG/VT SPEED SENSOR GROUND Component Location - 20 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 1844 Component Location - 21 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 1845 Component Location - 19 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 1846 Component Location - 26 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 1847 Connector: Name : SENSOR-OUTPUT SPEED Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (RFE/RLE) Pin Circuit Description 1 T14 20DG/BR OUTPUT SPEED SIGNAL Pin Circuit Description 1 T13 20DG/VT SPEED SENSOR GROUND Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 1848 2 T13 20DG/VT SPEED SENSOR GROUND 2 T14 20DG/BR OUTPUT SPEED SIGNAL Component Location - 20 Component Location - 21 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 1849 Component Location - 19 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 1850 Component Location - 26 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 1851 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > 42RLE Automatic Transmission Transmission Speed Sensor: Description and Operation 42RLE Automatic Transmission Description DESCRIPTION The Input (1) and Output (2) Speed Sensors are two-wire magnetic pickup devices that generate AC signals as rotation occurs. They are mounted in the left side of the transmission case and are considered primary inputs to the Transmission Control Module (TCM). Operation OPERATION The Input Speed Sensor provides information on how fast the input shaft is rotating. As the teeth of the input clutch hub pass by the sensor coil, an AC voltage is generated and sent to the TCM. The TCM interprets this information as input shaft rpm. The Output Speed Sensor generates an AC signal in a similar fashion, though its coil is excited by rotation of the rear planetary carrier lugs. The TCM interprets this information as output shaft rpm. The TCM compares the input and output speed signals to determine the following: - Transmission gear ratio - Speed ratio error detection - CVI calculation The TCM also compares the input speed signal and the engine speed signal to determine the following: - Torque converter clutch slippage - Torque converter element speed ratio Description DESCRIPTION Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 1854 The Input (1) and Output (2) Speed Sensors are two-wire magnetic pickup devices that generate AC signals as rotation occurs. They are mounted in the left side of the transmission case and are considered primary inputs to the Transmission Control Module (TCM). Operation OPERATION The Input Speed Sensor provides information on how fast the input shaft is rotating. As the teeth of the input clutch hub pass by the sensor coil, an AC voltage is generated and sent to the TCM. The TCM interprets this information as input shaft rpm. The Output Speed Sensor generates an AC signal in a similar fashion, though its coil is excited by rotation of the rear planetary carrier lugs. The TCM interprets this information as output shaft rpm. The TCM compares the input and output speed signals to determine the following: - Transmission gear ratio - Speed ratio error detection - CVI calculation The TCM also compares the input speed signal and the engine speed signal to determine the following: - Torque converter clutch slippage - Torque converter element speed ratio Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 1855 Transmission Speed Sensor: Description and Operation 545RFE Automatic Transmission Description DESCRIPTION The Input and Output Speed Sensors are two-wire magnetic pickup devices that generate AC signals as rotation occurs. They are mounted in the left side of the transmission case and are considered primary inputs to the Transmission Control Module (TCM). Operation OPERATION The Input Speed Sensor provides information on how fast the input shaft is rotating. As the teeth of the input clutch hub pass by the sensor coil, an AC voltage is generated and sent to the TCM. The TCM interprets this information as input shaft rpm. The Output Speed Sensor generates an AC signal in a similar fashion, though its coil is excited by rotation of the park gear teeth. The TCM interprets this information as output shaft rpm. The TCM compares the input and output speed signals to determine the following: - Transmission gear ratio - Speed ratio error detection - CVI calculation The TCM also compares the input speed signal and the engine speed signal to determine the following: - Torque converter clutch slippage - Torque converter element speed ratio Description DESCRIPTION The Input and Output Speed Sensors are two-wire magnetic pickup devices that generate AC signals as rotation occurs. They are mounted in the left side of the transmission case and are considered primary inputs to the Transmission Control Module (TCM). Operation OPERATION The Input Speed Sensor provides information on how fast the input shaft is rotating. As the teeth of the input clutch hub pass by the sensor coil, an AC voltage is generated and sent to the TCM. The TCM interprets this information as input shaft rpm. The Output Speed Sensor generates an AC signal in a similar fashion, though its coil is excited by rotation of the park gear teeth. The TCM interprets this information as output shaft rpm. The TCM compares the input and output speed signals to determine the following: - Transmission gear ratio - Speed ratio error detection - CVI calculation The TCM also compares the input speed signal and the engine speed signal to determine the following: - Torque converter clutch slippage - Torque converter element speed ratio Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 1856 Transmission Speed Sensor: Description and Operation 68RFE Automatic Transmission Description DESCRIPTION The Input and Output Speed Sensors are two-wire magnetic pickup devices that generate AC signals as rotation occurs. They are mounted in the left side of the transmission case and are considered primary inputs to the Transmission Control Module (TCM). Operation OPERATION The Input Speed Sensor provides information on how fast the input shaft is rotating. As the teeth of the input clutch hub pass by the sensor coil, an AC voltage is generated and sent to the TCM. The TCM interprets this information as input shaft rpm. The Output Speed Sensor generates an AC signal in a similar fashion, though its coil is excited by rotation of the park gear teeth. The TCM interprets this information as output shaft rpm. The TCM compares the input and output speed signals to determine the following: - Transmission gear ratio - Speed ratio error detection - CVI calculation The TCM also compares the input speed signal and the engine speed signal to determine the following: - Torque converter clutch slippage - Torque converter element speed ratio Description DESCRIPTION The Input and Output Speed Sensors are two-wire magnetic pickup devices that generate AC signals as rotation occurs. They are mounted in the left side of the transmission case and are considered primary inputs to the Transmission Control Module (TCM). Operation OPERATION The Input Speed Sensor provides information on how fast the input shaft is rotating. As the teeth of the input clutch hub pass by the sensor coil, an AC voltage is generated and sent to the TCM. The TCM interprets this information as input shaft rpm. The Output Speed Sensor generates an AC signal in a similar fashion, though its coil is excited by rotation of the park gear teeth. The TCM interprets this information as output shaft rpm. The TCM compares the input and output speed signals to determine the following: - Transmission gear ratio - Speed ratio error detection - CVI calculation The TCM also compares the input speed signal and the engine speed signal to determine the following: - Torque converter clutch slippage - Torque converter element speed ratio Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 1857 Transmission Speed Sensor: Description and Operation 48RE Automatic Transmission Description DESCRIPTION The speed sensor (1) is located in the overdrive gear case. The sensor is positioned over the park gear and monitors transmission output shaft rotating speed. Operation OPERATION Speed sensor signals are triggered by the park gear lugs as they rotate past the sensor pickup face. Input signals from the sensor are sent to the transmission control module for processing. Signals from this sensor are shared with the powertrain control module. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 1858 Transmission Speed Sensor: Description and Operation AS68RC Automatic Transmission Description DESCRIPTION INPUT AND OUTPUT SPEED SENSORS The Input and Output Speed Sensors are two-wire magnetic pickup devices that generate DC square wave signals as rotation occurs. They are mounted in the left side of the transmission case and are considered primary inputs to the Transmission Control Module (TCM). Operation OPERATION The Input Speed Sensor provides information on how fast the input shaft is rotating. As the "teeth" of the gear pass by the sensor coil, an DC square wave is generated and sent to the TCM. The TCM interprets this information as input shaft rpm. The Output Speed Sensor generates an DC signal in a similar fashion, though its coil is excited by rotation of the rear planetary carrier lugs. The TCM interprets this information as output shaft rpm. The TCM compares the input and output speed signals to determine the following: - Transmission gear ratio - Speed ratio error detection - CVI calculation The TCM also compares the input speed signal and the engine speed signal to determine the following: - Torque converter clutch slippage - Torque converter element speed ratio Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 42RLE Automatic Transmission Transmission Speed Sensor: Service and Repair 42RLE Automatic Transmission Removal REMOVAL 1. Raise vehicle. 2. Place a suitable fluid catch pan under the transmission. 3. Remove the wiring connector from the input speed sensor. NOTE: The speed sensor bolt has a sealing patch applied from the factory. Be sure to reuse the same bolt. 4. Remove the bolt holding the input speed sensor to the transmission case. 5. Remove the input speed sensor from the transmission case. Installation INSTALLATION 1. Install the input speed sensor (1) into the transmission case. NOTE: Before installing the speed sensor bolt, it will be necessary to replenish the sealing patch on the bolt using MOPAR(R) Lock & Seal Adhesive. 2. Install the bolt to hold the input speed sensor into the transmission case. Tighten the bolt to 9 Nm (80 in.lbs.). 3. Install the wiring connector onto the input speed sensor 4. Verify the transmission fluid level. Add fluid as necessary. 5. Lower vehicle. Removal REMOVAL Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 1861 1. Raise vehicle. 2. Place a suitable fluid catch pan under the transmission. 3. Remove the wiring connector from the output speed sensor (2). NOTE: The speed sensor bolt has a sealing patch applied from the factory. Be sure to reuse the same bolt. 4. Remove the bolt holding the output speed sensor to the transmission case. 5. Remove the output speed sensor (2) from the transmission case. Installation INSTALLATION 1. Install the output speed sensor (2) into the transmission case. NOTE: Before installing the speed sensor bolt, it will be necessary to replenish the sealing patch on the bolt using MOPAR(R) Lock & Seal Adhesive. 2. Install the bolt to hold the output speed sensor into the transmission case. Tighten the bolt to 9 Nm (80 in.lbs.). 3. Install the wiring connector onto the output speed sensor 4. Verify the transmission fluid level. Add fluid as necessary. 5. Lower vehicle. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 1862 Transmission Speed Sensor: Service and Repair 545RFE Automatic Transmission Removal REMOVAL 1. Raise vehicle. 2. Place a suitable fluid catch pan under the transmission. 3. Remove the wiring connector from the input speed sensor (3). 4. Remove the bolt holding the input speed sensor to the transmission case. 5. Remove the input speed sensor (3) from the transmission case. Installation INSTALLATION 1. Install the input speed sensor (3) into the transmission case. 2. Install the bolt to hold the input speed sensor (3) into the transmission case. Tighten the bolt to 12 Nm (105 in.lbs.). 3. Install the wiring connector onto the input speed sensor. 4. Verify the transmission fluid level. Add fluid as necessary. 5. Lower vehicle. Removal REMOVAL Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 1863 1. Raise vehicle. 2. Place a suitable fluid catch pan under the transmission. 3. Remove the wiring connector from the output speed sensor (1). 4. Remove the bolt holding the output speed sensor (1) to the transmission case. 5. Remove the output speed sensor (1) from the transmission case. Installation INSTALLATION 1. Install the output speed sensor (1) into the transmission case. 2. Install the bolt to hold the output speed sensor (1) into the transmission case. Tighten the bolt to 12 Nm (105 in.lbs.). 3. Install the wiring connector onto the output speed sensor (1). 4. Verify the transmission fluid level. Add fluid as necessary. 5. Lower vehicle. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 1864 Transmission Speed Sensor: Service and Repair 68RFE Automatic Transmission Removal REMOVAL 1. Raise vehicle. 2. Place a suitable fluid catch pan under the transmission. 3. Remove the wiring connector from the input speed sensor (3). 4. Remove the bolt holding the input speed sensor to the transmission case. 5. Remove the input speed sensor (3) from the transmission case. Installation INSTALLATION 1. Install the input speed sensor (3) into the transmission case. 2. Install the bolt to hold the input speed sensor (3) into the transmission case. Tighten the bolt to 12 Nm (105 in.lbs.). 3. Install the wiring connector onto the input speed sensor. 4. Verify the transmission fluid level. Add fluid as necessary. 5. Lower vehicle. Removal REMOVAL Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 1865 1. Raise vehicle. 2. Place a suitable fluid catch pan under the transmission. 3. Remove the wiring connector from the output speed sensor (1). 4. Remove the bolt holding the output speed sensor (1) to the transmission case. 5. Remove the output speed sensor (1) from the transmission case. Installation INSTALLATION 1. Install the output speed sensor (1) into the transmission case. 2. Install the bolt to hold the output speed sensor (1) into the transmission case. Tighten the bolt to 12 Nm (105 in.lbs.). 3. Install the wiring connector onto the output speed sensor (1). 4. Verify the transmission fluid level. Add fluid as necessary. 5. Lower vehicle. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 1866 Transmission Speed Sensor: Service and Repair AS68RC Automatic Transmission Output Speed Sensor OUTPUT SPEED SENSOR OUTPUT SPEED SENSOR 1. Raise and support the vehicle. 2. Place a suitable fluid catch pan under the transmission. 3. Remove the wiring connector from the output speed sensor. 4. Remove the bolt holding the output speed sensor to the transmission case. 5. Remove the output speed sensor from the transmission case. Input Speed Sensor INPUT SPEED SENSOR INPUT SPEED SENSOR 1. Raise and support the vehicle. 2. Place a suitable fluid catch pan under the transmission. 3. Remove the wiring connector from the input speed sensor. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 1867 4. Remove the bolt holding the input speed sensor to the transmission case. 5. Remove the input speed sensor from the transmission case. Output Speed Sensor OUTPUT SPEED SENSOR NOTE: Apply trans jell to all slide portions, rolling contacts surfaces, thrust surfaces etc. to prevent burnout during initial operation. Lubricate O-rings and O-ring seals with MOPAR(R) AS68RC ATF. Soak all friction disks in MOPAR(R) AS68RC ATF for at least two hours before assembly of clutch packs. OUTPUT SPEED SENSOR 1. Lubricate the output speed sensor o-ring with MOPAR(R) AS68RC ATF. 2. Install the output speed sensor into the transmission case. 3. Tighten the bolt to 8 Nm (70 in.lbs.). 4. Install the wiring connector onto the output speed sensor. 5. Lower vehicle. 6. Verify the transmission fluid level. Add MOPAR(R) AS68RC ATF as necessary. Input Speed Sensor INPUT SPEED SENSOR NOTE: Apply trans jell to all slide portions, rolling contacts surfaces, thrust surfaces etc. to prevent burnout during initial operation. Lubricate O-rings and O-ring seals with MOPAR(R) AS68RC ATF. Soak all friction disks in MOPAR(R) AS68RC ATF for at least two hours before assembly of clutch packs. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 1868 INPUT SPEED SENSOR 1. Lubricate the output speed sensor o-ring with MOPAR(R) AS68RC ATF. 2. Install the input speed sensor into the transmission case. 3. Tighten the bolt to 8 Nm (70 in.lbs.). 4. Install the electrical wiring connector onto the input speed sensor. 5. Lower vehicle. 6. Verify the transmission fluid level. Add MOPAR(R) AS68RC as necessary. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Locations Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch: Locations Component ID: 445 Component : SENSOR-TRANSMISSION TEMPERATURE Connector: Name : SENSOR-TRANSMISSION TEMPERATURE Color : # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (RC) Pin Circuit Description 1 T819 20YL/VT TCC TEMPERATURE SIGNAL 2 T820 20YL/WT TEMPERATURE SENSOR GROUND Component Location - 26 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 1872 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 1873 Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch: Diagrams Component ID: 445 Component : SENSOR-TRANSMISSION TEMPERATURE Connector: Name : SENSOR-TRANSMISSION TEMPERATURE Color : # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (RC) Pin Circuit Description 1 T819 20YL/VT TCC TEMPERATURE SIGNAL 2 T820 20YL/WT TEMPERATURE SENSOR GROUND Component Location - 26 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 1874 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > 545RFE Automatic Transmission Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch: Description and Operation 545RFE Automatic Transmission Description DESCRIPTION The Transmission Range Sensor (TRS) is part of the solenoid module, which is mounted to the top of the valve body inside the transmission. The Transmission Range Sensor (TRS) has five switch contact pins that: - Determine shift lever position - Supply ground to the Starter Relay in Park and Neutral only. - Supply +12 V to the backup lamps in Reverse only. The TRS also has an integrated temperature sensor (thermistor) that communicates transmission temperature to the TCM and PCM. Operation OPERATION The Transmission Range Sensor (TRS) communicates shift lever position to the TCM as a combination of open and closed switches. Each shift lever position has an assigned combination of switch states (open/closed) that the TCM receives from four sense circuits. The TCM interprets this information and determines the appropriate transmission gear position and shift schedule. There are many possible combinations of open and closed switches (codes). Seven of these possible codes are related to gear position and five are recognized as "between gear" codes. This results in many codes which should never occur. These are called "invalid" codes. An invalid code will result in a DTC, and the TCM will then determine the shift lever position based on pressure switch data. This allows reasonably normal transmission operation with a TRS failure. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > 545RFE Automatic Transmission > Page 1877 Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch: Description and Operation 68RFE Automatic Transmission Description DESCRIPTION The Transmission Range Sensor (TRS) is part of the solenoid module, which is mounted to the top of the valve body inside the transmission. The Transmission Range Sensor (TRS) has five switch contact pins that: - Determine shift lever position - Supply ground to the Starter Relay in Park and Neutral only. The TRS also has an integrated temperature sensor (thermistor) that communicates transmission temperature to the TCM and PCM. Operation OPERATION The Transmission Range Sensor (TRS) communicates shift lever position to the TCM as a combination of open and closed switches. Each shift lever position has an assigned combination of switch states (open/closed) that the TCM receives from four sense circuits. The TCM interprets this information and determines the appropriate transmission gear position and shift schedule. There are many possible combinations of open and closed switches (codes). Five of these possible codes correspond to valid gear position, there are two codes for the neutral position and three are recognized as "between gear" codes. This results in many codes which should never occur. These are called "invalid" codes. An invalid code will result in a DTC, and the TCM will then determine the shift lever position based on pressure switch data. This allows reasonably normal transmission operation with a TRS failure. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 42RLE Automatic Transmission Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch: Service and Repair 42RLE Automatic Transmission Removal REMOVAL 1. Remove valve body assembly from vehicle. See: Transmission and Drivetrain/Automatic Transmission/Transaxle/Valve Body/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/42RLE Automatic Transmission/Removal 2. Remove the manual shaft seal (1). 3. Remove manual shaft/TRS retaining screw (1). 4. Slide TRS off of manual valve shaft. Installation INSTALLATION Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 1880 1. Install the TRS (2) to the manual shaft. Make sure TRS locating pin rests in manual valve bore slot. 2. Install the TRS/manual shaft retaining screw (1) and torque to 5 Nm (45 in. lbs.) torque. 3. Install the manual shaft seal (1). 4. Install valve body to the transmission. See: Transmission and Drivetrain/Automatic Transmission/Transaxle/Valve Body/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/42RLE Automatic Transmission/Installation Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 1881 Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch: Service and Repair 48RE Automatic Transmission Removal REMOVAL 1. Raise vehicle and position drain pan under the transmission range sensor (TRS). 2. Move the transmission manual lever to the manual LOW position. The manual LOW position is with the manual lever in the forward-most detent. 3. Disengage the wiring connector from the TRS. 4. Remove the two screws holding the TRS to the TRS mounting bracket. 5. Remove the TRS (3) from the TRS mounting bracket by pulling it straight out of the bracket. 6. If necessary, loosen the TRS mounting bracket (2) in the transmission case using Adapter 8581 (3). 7. If necessary, remove the TRS mounting bracket (2) from the transmission case. Installation INSTALLATION Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 1882 1. Move the transmission manual shaft lever to the manual LOW position. 2. If necessary, install the TRS mounting bracket (2) into the transmission case. Using Adapter 8581 (3), tighten the mounting bracket to 34 Nm (300 in.lbs.). 3. Install the TRS (3) into the mounting bracket (2) with the wiring connector facing the front of the transmission. 4. Install the two screws to hold the TRS to the mounting bracket. Tighten the screws to 5 Nm (45 in.lbs.). 5. Verify proper sensor operation (1-4). 6. Move the transmission manual shaft lever to the PARK position. 7. Connect TRS wiring connector to the TRS and lower vehicle. 8. Refill the transmission fluid to the correct level. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 1883 Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch: Service and Repair AS68RC Automatic Transmission Removal REMOVAL NOTE: Be certain the transmission is in the park lock position. TRANSMISSION RANGE SENSOR 1. Remove the shift cable from the manual shift lever (2). 2. Disconnect the wire harness from the transmission range sensor. 3. Remove the two nuts (3) from the control shaft. TRS REMOVAL/INSTALLATION Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 1884 4. Pry open the tabs on the stake washer (5), remove the nut (3) and the stake washer (5). 5. Remove the bolts (2). 6. Remove the transmission range sensor (1) from the transmission control shaft (4). Installation INSTALLATION 1. Install the transmission range sensor (3) onto the control shaft (5). 2. Install the stake washer and the nut (4) and hand tighten. 3. With the transmission in neutral install the alignment tool 9983 (6) onto the control shaft (5) and into the alignment hole (1). 4. Install the bolts (2). 5. After aligning the transmission range sensor, tighten the bolts (2) 12.5 Nm (9 ft.lbs.) 6. Remove the alignment tool 9983 (6) 7. Tighten the control shaft nut to 7 Nm (62 in.lbs.) 8. Bend the tabs on the stake washer and nut (4) in at least two places to lock in position. TRANSMISSION RANGE SENSOR Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 1885 9. Install the manual shift lever (2) onto the control shaft. 10. Install the inner nut (3) onto the control shaft. Tighten the inner nut to 12.5 Nm (9 ft.lbs). 11. Install the outer nut (3) onto the control shaft. While holding the inner nut, tighten the outer not to 12.5 Nm (9 ft.lbs) Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - M/T > Clutch Pedal Position Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection Clutch Pedal Position Sensor / Switch: Testing and Inspection SWITCH-CLUTCH PEDAL POSITION 1. Disconnect switch 2-wire connector (2) attached to pedal support bracket (1), under instrument panel to left of clutch pedal. 2. Check switch continuity with an ohmmeter while operating clutch pedal. - Pedal Depressed - Continuity - Pedal Released - No Continuity 3. If continuity is not present or always present, replace clutch master cylinder. Switch is not serviced separately. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Four Wheel Drive Selector Switch > Component Information > Locations Four Wheel Drive Selector Switch: Locations Component ID: 515 Component : SWITCH-TRANSFER CASE SELECTOR Connector: Name : SWITCH-TRANSFER CASE SELECTOR Color : BLACK # of pins : 10 Qualifier : (ETC) Pin Circuit Description 1 K77 20BR/WT TRANSFER CASE POSITION SENSOR INPUT 2-3 K977 20BR/WT MODE SELECT 4 E11 20OR/DB PANEL LAMPS CONTROL 5 Z905 20BK GROUND 6 G95 20VT/BR NEUTRAL INDICATOR 7 F21 20PK/DG FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) 8-9-10 - Component Location - 47 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Four Wheel Drive Selector Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 1894 Component Location - 45 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Four Wheel Drive Selector Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 1895 Component Location - 20 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Four Wheel Drive Selector Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 1896 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Four Wheel Drive Selector Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 1897 Four Wheel Drive Selector Switch: Diagrams Component ID: 515 Component : SWITCH-TRANSFER CASE SELECTOR Connector: Name : SWITCH-TRANSFER CASE SELECTOR Color : BLACK # of pins : 10 Qualifier : (ETC) Pin Circuit Description 1 K77 20BR/WT TRANSFER CASE POSITION SENSOR INPUT 2-3 K977 20BR/WT MODE SELECT 4 E11 20OR/DB PANEL LAMPS CONTROL 5 Z905 20BK GROUND 6 G95 20VT/BR NEUTRAL INDICATOR 7 F21 20PK/DG FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) 8-9-10 - Component Location - 47 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Four Wheel Drive Selector Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 1898 Component Location - 45 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Four Wheel Drive Selector Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 1899 Component Location - 20 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Four Wheel Drive Selector Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 1900 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Four Wheel Drive Selector Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > NV243 Transfer Case Four Wheel Drive Selector Switch: Description and Operation NV243 Transfer Case Description DESCRIPTION The selector switch assembly is mounted in the left side of the vehicle's Instrument Panel (IP) and consists of a rotary knob connected to a resistive network for the mode and range shift selections. Also located in this assembly is a recessed, normally open momentary switch for making shifts into and out of transfer case NEUTRAL. A pen, or similar instrument, is used to make a NEUTRAL shift selection, thus reducing the likelihood of an inadvertent shift request. The selector switch also contains four light emitting diode's (LED's) to indicate the transfer case position and whether a shift is in progress. Operation OPERATION As the position of the selector switch varies, the resistance between the Mode Sensor supply voltage pin and the Mode Sensor output will vary. Hardware, software, and calibrations within the Transfer Case Control Module (TCCM) are provided that interpret the selector switch resistance as given in the table below: For resistances between the ranges B-E shown for each valid position (T-Case NEUTRAL, 4LO, 4HI, 2WD), the TCCM may interpret the resistance as: - either of the neighboring valid positions. - as an invalid fault position. For resistances between the ranges E and F shown for 2WD and in-between positions, the TCCM may interpret the resistance as: - the 2WD position. - an invalid fault position. - a valid in-between position. For resistances between the ranges F and G shown for in-between positions and fault condition (open), the TCCM may interpret the resistance as: Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Four Wheel Drive Selector Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > NV243 Transfer Case > Page 1903 - a valid in-between position. - an invalid fault position. For resistances between the ranges A and B shown for the fault condition (short) and T-Case NEUTRAL, the TCCM may interpret the resistance as: - the T-Case NEUTRAL position. - an invalid fault position. The LED's in the selector assembly are illuminated/flashed in the following manner to indicate a particular condition or state. - A solidly illuminated LED indicates a successfully completed shift and the current operating mode of the transfer case. While a shift has been requested but not yet completed, the LED for the desired transfer case position is flashed. - A flashing operating mode LED for the desired gear indicates that a shift to that position has been requested, but all of the driver controllable conditions have not been met. This is in an attempt to notify the driver that the transmission needs to be put into NEUTRAL, the vehicle speed is too great, or some other condition outlined (other than a diagnostic failure that would prevent this shift) elsewhere See: Powertrain Management/Transmission Control Systems/Relays and Modules Transmission and Drivetrain/Relays and Modules - Transfer Case/Control Module/Description and Operation/Operation is not met. Note that this flashing will continue indefinitely until the conditions are eventually met, or the selector switch position is changed, or if diagnostic routines no longer allow the requested shift. - If the driver attempts to make a shift into transfer case NEUTRAL, and any of the driver controllable conditions are not met, the request will be ignored until all of the conditions are met or until the NEUTRAL select button is released. Additionally the neutral lamp will flash, or begin to flash while the button is depressed and operator controllable conditions are not being met. All of the LED's except the Neutral will flash if any of the operator controllable conditions for shifting are not met while the Neutral button is depressed. This "toggle" type of feature is necessary because the TCCM would interpret another request immediately after the shift into transfer case NEUTRAL has completed. - No LED's illuminated indicate a fault in the transfer case control system. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Four Wheel Drive Selector Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > NV243 Transfer Case > Page 1904 Four Wheel Drive Selector Switch: Description and Operation NV244 GENII Transfer Case Description DESCRIPTION The selector switch assembly is mounted in the left side of the vehicle's Instrument Panel (IP) and consists of a rotary knob connected to a resistive network for the mode and range shift selections. Also located in this assembly is a recessed, normally open momentary switch for making shifts into and out of transfer case NEUTRAL. A pen, or similar instrument, is used to make a NEUTRAL shift selection, thus reducing the likelihood of an inadvertent shift request. The selector switch also contains light emitting diode's (LED's) to indicate the transfer case position and whether a shift is in progress. Operation OPERATION As the position of the selector switch varies, the resistance between the Mode Sensor supply voltage pin and the Mode Sensor output will vary. Hardware, software, and calibrations within the Transfer Case Control Module (TCCM) are provided that interpret the selector switch resistance as given in the table below: For resistances between the ranges B-E shown for each valid position (T-Case NEUTRAL, 4LO, 4HI, AWD), the TCCM may interpret the resistance as: - either of the neighboring valid positions. - as an invalid fault position. For resistances between the ranges E and F shown for AWD and in-between positions, the TCCM may interpret the resistance as: - the AWD position. - an invalid fault position. - a valid in-between position. For resistances between the ranges F and G shown for in-between positions and fault condition (open), the TCCM may interpret the resistance as: - a valid in-between position. - an invalid fault position. For resistances between the ranges A and B shown for the fault condition (short) and , T-Case NEUTRAL, the TCCM may interpret the resistance as: - the T-Case NEUTRAL position. - an invalid fault position. The LED's in the selector assembly are illuminated/flashed in the following manner to indicate a particular condition or state. - A solidly illuminated LED indicates a successfully completed shift and the current operating mode of the transfer case. While a shift has been requested but not yet completed, the LED for the desired transfer case position is flashed. - A flashing operating mode LED for the desired gear indicates that a shift to that position has been requested, but all of the driver controllable conditions have not been met. This is in an attempt to notify the driver that the transmission needs to be put into NEUTRAL, the vehicle speed is too great, or some other condition outlined (other than a diagnostic failure that would prevent this shift) elsewhere See: Powertrain Management/Transmission Control Systems/Relays and Modules Transmission and Drivetrain/Relays and Modules - Transfer Case/Control Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Four Wheel Drive Selector Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > NV243 Transfer Case > Page 1905 Module/Description and Operation/Operation is not met. Note that this flashing will continue indefinitely until the conditions are eventually met, or the selector switch position is changed, or if diagnostic routines no longer allow the requested shift. - If the driver attempts to make a shift into transfer case NEUTRAL, and any of the driver controllable conditions are not met, the request will be ignored until all of the conditions are met or until the NEUTRAL select button is released. Additionally the neutral lamp will flash, or begin to flash while the button is depressed and operator controllable conditions are not being met. All of the LED's except the Neutral will flash if any of the operator controllable conditions for shifting are not met while the Neutral button is depressed. This "toggle" type of feature is necessary because the TCCM would interpret another request immediately after the shift into transfer case NEUTRAL has completed. - No LED's illuminated indicate a fault in the transfer case control system. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Four Wheel Drive Selector Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > NV243 Transfer Case > Page 1906 Four Wheel Drive Selector Switch: Description and Operation NV246 Transfer Case Description DESCRIPTION The selector switch assembly is mounted in the left side of the vehicle's Instrument Panel (IP) and consists of a rotary knob connected to a resistive network for the mode and range shift selections. Also located in this assembly is a recessed, normally open momentary switch for making shifts into and out of transfer case NEUTRAL. A pen, or similar instrument, is used to make a NEUTRAL shift selection, thus reducing the likelihood of an inadvertent shift request. The selector switch also contains light emitting diode's (LED's) to indicate the transfer case position and whether a shift is in progress. Operation OPERATION As the position of the selector switch varies, the resistance between the Mode Sensor supply voltage pin and the Mode Sensor output will vary. Hardware, software, and calibrations within the Transfer Case Control Module (TCCM) are provided that interpret the selector switch resistance as given in the table below: For resistances between the ranges B-E shown for each valid position (T-Case NEUTRAL, 4LO, 4HI, AWD), the TCCM may interpret the resistance as: - either of the neighboring valid positions. - as an invalid fault position. For resistances between the ranges E and F shown for AWD and in-between positions, the TCCM may interpret the resistance as: - the AWD position. - an invalid fault position. - a valid in-between position. For resistances between the ranges F and G shown for in-between positions and fault condition (open), the TCCM may interpret the resistance as: - a valid in-between position. - an invalid fault position. For resistances between the ranges A and B shown for the fault condition (short) and , T-Case NEUTRAL, the TCCM may interpret the resistance as: - the T-Case NEUTRAL position. - an invalid fault position. The LED's in the selector assembly are illuminated/flashed in the following manner to indicate a particular condition or state. - A solidly illuminated LED indicates a successfully completed shift and the current operating mode of the transfer case. While a shift has been requested but not yet completed, the LED for the desired transfer case position is flashed. - A flashing operating mode LED for the desired gear indicates that a shift to that position has been requested, but all of the driver controllable conditions have not been met. This is in an attempt to notify the driver that the transmission needs to be put into NEUTRAL, the vehicle speed is too great, or some other condition outlined (other than a diagnostic failure that would prevent this shift) elsewhere See: Powertrain Management/Transmission Control Systems/Relays and Modules Transmission and Drivetrain/Relays and Modules - Transfer Case/Control Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Four Wheel Drive Selector Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > NV243 Transfer Case > Page 1907 Module/Description and Operation/Operation is not met. Note that this flashing will continue indefinitely until the conditions are eventually met, or the selector switch position is changed, or if diagnostic routines no longer allow the requested shift. - If the driver attempts to make a shift into transfer case NEUTRAL, and any of the driver controllable conditions are not met, the request will be ignored until all of the conditions are met or until the NEUTRAL select button is released. Additionally the neutral lamp will flash, or begin to flash while the button is depressed and operator controllable conditions are not being met. All of the LED's except the Neutral will flash if any of the operator controllable conditions for shifting are not met while the Neutral button is depressed. This "toggle" type of feature is necessary because the TCCM would interpret another request immediately after the shift into transfer case NEUTRAL has completed. - No LED's illuminated indicate a fault in the transfer case control system. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Four Wheel Drive Selector Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > NV243 Transfer Case > Page 1908 Four Wheel Drive Selector Switch: Description and Operation NV273 Transfer Case Description DESCRIPTION The selector switch assembly is mounted in the left side of the vehicle's Instrument Panel (IP) and consists of a rotary knob connected to a resistive network for the mode and range shift selections. Also located in this assembly is a recessed, normally open momentary switch for making shifts into and out of transfer case NEUTRAL. A pen, or similar instrument, is used to make a NEUTRAL shift selection, thus reducing the likelihood of an inadvertent shift request. The selector switch also contains four light emitting diode's (LED's) to indicate the transfer case position and whether a shift is in progress. Operation OPERATION As the position of the selector switch varies, the resistance between the Mode Sensor supply voltage pin and the Mode Sensor output will vary. Hardware, software, and calibrations within the Transfer Case Control Module (TCCM) are provided that interpret the selector switch resistance as given in the table below: For resistances between the ranges B-E shown for each valid position (T-Case NEUTRAL, 4LO, 4HI, 2WD), the TCCM may interpret the resistance as: - either of the neighboring valid positions. - as an invalid fault position. For resistances between the ranges E and F shown for 2WD and in-between positions, the TCCM may interpret the resistance as: - the 2WD position. - an invalid fault position. - a valid in-between position. For resistances between the ranges F and G shown for in-between positions and fault condition (open), the TCCM may interpret the resistance as: Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Four Wheel Drive Selector Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > NV243 Transfer Case > Page 1909 - a valid in-between position. - an invalid fault position. For resistances between the ranges A and B shown for the fault condition (short) and T-Case NEUTRAL, the TCCM may interpret the resistance as: - the T-Case NEUTRAL position. - an invalid fault position. The LED's in the selector assembly are illuminated/flashed in the following manner to indicate a particular condition or state. - A solidly illuminated LED indicates a successfully completed shift and the current operating mode of the transfer case. While a shift has been requested but not yet completed, the LED for the desired transfer case position is flashed. - A flashing operating mode LED for the desired gear indicates that a shift to that position has been requested, but all of the driver controllable conditions have not been met. This is in an attempt to notify the driver that the transmission needs to be put into NEUTRAL, the vehicle speed is too great, or some other condition outlined (other than a diagnostic failure that would prevent this shift) elsewhere See: Powertrain Management/Transmission Control Systems/Relays and Modules Transmission and Drivetrain/Relays and Modules - Transfer Case/Control Module/Description and Operation/Operation is not met. Note that this flashing will continue indefinitely until the conditions are eventually met, or the selector switch position is changed, or if diagnostic routines no longer allow the requested shift. - If the driver attempts to make a shift into transfer case NEUTRAL, and any of the driver controllable conditions are not met, the request will be ignored until all of the conditions are met or until the NEUTRAL select button is released. Additionally the neutral lamp will flash, or begin to flash while the button is depressed and operator controllable conditions are not being met. All of the LED's except the Neutral will flash if any of the operator controllable conditions for shifting are not met while the Neutral button is depressed. This "toggle" type of feature is necessary because the TCCM would interpret another request immediately after the shift into transfer case NEUTRAL has completed. - No LED's illuminated indicate a fault in the transfer case control system. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Gear Sensor/Switch, Transfer Case > Component Information > Locations > Assembly-Shift Motor/Mode Sensor Gear Sensor/Switch: Locations Assembly-Shift Motor/Mode Sensor Component ID: 18 Component : ASSEMBLY-SHIFT MOTOR/MODE SENSOR Connector: Name : ASSEMBLY-SHIFT MOTOR/MODE SENSOR Color : BLACK # of pins : 8 Qualifier : (RFE FULL TIME ETC) Pin Circuit Description 1 T103 20YL/OR 5 VOLT SUPPLY 2 D201 20WT/DG MODE SENSOR A 3 G180 20VT/YL SENSOR RETURN 4 T101 16DG SHIFT MOTOR CONTROL B 5 T102 16YL SHIFT MOTOR CONTROL A 6 A940 20RD FUSED B(+) 7 T300 20YL/GY T-CASE MOTOR BRAKE SIGNAL 8-Component Location - 21 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Gear Sensor/Switch, Transfer Case > Component Information > Locations > Assembly-Shift Motor/Mode Sensor > Page 1914 Component Location - 24 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Gear Sensor/Switch, Transfer Case > Component Information > Locations > Assembly-Shift Motor/Mode Sensor > Page 1915 Component Location - 26 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Gear Sensor/Switch, Transfer Case > Component Information > Locations > Assembly-Shift Motor/Mode Sensor > Page 1916 Connector: Name : ASSEMBLY-SHIFT MOTOR/MODE SENSOR Color : DK. GRAY # of pins : 8 Qualifier : (RFE PART TIME ETC/RE ETC) Pin Circuit Description 1 T103 20YL/OR 5 VOLT SUPPLY 2 D201 20WT/DG MODE SENSOR A 3 G180 20VT/YL SENSOR RETURN 4 T101 16DG SHIFT MOTOR CONTROL B Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Gear Sensor/Switch, Transfer Case > Component Information > Locations > Assembly-Shift Motor/Mode Sensor > Page 1917 5 T102 16YL SHIFT MOTOR CONTROL A 6 A918 20RD FUSED B(+) 7-8-Component Location - 21 Component Location - 24 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Gear Sensor/Switch, Transfer Case > Component Information > Locations > Assembly-Shift Motor/Mode Sensor > Page 1918 Component Location - 26 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Gear Sensor/Switch, Transfer Case > Component Information > Locations > Assembly-Shift Motor/Mode Sensor > Page 1919 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Gear Sensor/Switch, Transfer Case > Component Information > Locations > Assembly-Shift Motor/Mode Sensor > Page 1920 Gear Sensor/Switch: Locations Sensor-Transfer Case Position Component ID: 443 Component : SENSOR-TRANSFER CASE POSITION Connector: Name : SENSOR-TRANSFER CASE POSITION Color : # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (MTC EXCEPT POWER WAGON) Pin Circuit Description 1 D201 20WT/DG MODE SENSOR A Pin Circuit Description 1 D201 18WT/DG MODE SENSOR A 2 Z955 20BK GROUND 2 Z955 18BK GROUND 2 Z901 20BK GROUND Component Location - 22 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Gear Sensor/Switch, Transfer Case > Component Information > Locations > Assembly-Shift Motor/Mode Sensor > Page 1921 Component Location - 25 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Gear Sensor/Switch, Transfer Case > Component Information > Locations > Assembly-Shift Motor/Mode Sensor > Page 1922 Connector: Name : SENSOR-TRANSFER CASE POSITION Color : # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (MTC POWER WAGON) Pin Circuit Description 1 D201 18WT/DG MODE SENSOR A Pin Circuit Description 1 D201 20WT/DG MODE SENSOR A Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Gear Sensor/Switch, Transfer Case > Component Information > Locations > Assembly-Shift Motor/Mode Sensor > Page 1923 2 G180 18VT/YL SENSOR RETURN 2 G180 20VT/YL SENSOR RETURN Component Location - 22 Component Location - 25 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Gear Sensor/Switch, Transfer Case > Component Information > Locations > Assembly-Shift Motor/Mode Sensor > Page 1924 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Gear Sensor/Switch, Transfer Case > Component Information > Diagrams > Assembly-Shift Motor/Mode Sensor Gear Sensor/Switch: Diagrams Assembly-Shift Motor/Mode Sensor Component ID 14 Component ID: 14 Component : ASSEMBLY-SHIFT MOTOR/MODE SENSOR Connector: Name : ASSEMBLY-SHIFT MOTOR/MODE SENSOR Color : BLACK # of pins : 8 Qualifier : (RFE FULL TIME ETC) Pin Circuit Description 1 T103 20YL/OR 5 VOLT SUPPLY 2 D201 20WT/DG MODE SENSOR A 3 G180 20VT/YL SENSOR RETURN 4 T101 16DG SHIFT MOTOR CONTROL B 5 T102 16YL SHIFT MOTOR CONTROL A 6 A940 20RD FUSED B(+) 7 T300 20YL/GY T-CASE MOTOR BRAKE SIGNAL 8-Connector: Name : ASSEMBLY-SHIFT MOTOR/MODE SENSOR Color : DK. GRAY # of pins : 8 Qualifier : (RFE PART TIME ETC/RE ETC) Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Gear Sensor/Switch, Transfer Case > Component Information > Diagrams > Assembly-Shift Motor/Mode Sensor > Page 1927 Pin Circuit Description 1 T103 20YL/OR 5 VOLT SUPPLY 2 D201 20WT/DG MODE SENSOR A 3 G180 20VT/YL SENSOR RETURN 4 T101 16DG SHIFT MOTOR CONTROL B 5 T102 16YL SHIFT MOTOR CONTROL A 6 A918 20RD FUSED B(+) 7-8-Component ID 18 Component ID: 18 Component : ASSEMBLY-SHIFT MOTOR/MODE SENSOR Connector: Name : ASSEMBLY-SHIFT MOTOR/MODE SENSOR Color : BLACK # of pins : 8 Qualifier : (RFE FULL TIME ETC) Pin Circuit Description 1 T103 20YL/OR 5 VOLT SUPPLY 2 D201 20WT/DG MODE SENSOR A 3 G180 20VT/YL SENSOR RETURN 4 T101 16DG SHIFT MOTOR CONTROL B 5 T102 16YL SHIFT MOTOR CONTROL A Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Gear Sensor/Switch, Transfer Case > Component Information > Diagrams > Assembly-Shift Motor/Mode Sensor > Page 1928 6 A940 20RD FUSED B(+) 7 T300 20YL/GY T-CASE MOTOR BRAKE SIGNAL 8-Component Location - 21 Component Location - 24 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Gear Sensor/Switch, Transfer Case > Component Information > Diagrams > Assembly-Shift Motor/Mode Sensor > Page 1929 Component Location - 26 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Gear Sensor/Switch, Transfer Case > Component Information > Diagrams > Assembly-Shift Motor/Mode Sensor > Page 1930 Connector: Name : ASSEMBLY-SHIFT MOTOR/MODE SENSOR Color : DK. GRAY # of pins : 8 Qualifier : (RFE PART TIME ETC/RE ETC) Pin Circuit Description 1 T103 20YL/OR 5 VOLT SUPPLY 2 D201 20WT/DG MODE SENSOR A 3 G180 20VT/YL SENSOR RETURN 4 T101 16DG SHIFT MOTOR CONTROL B Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Gear Sensor/Switch, Transfer Case > Component Information > Diagrams > Assembly-Shift Motor/Mode Sensor > Page 1931 5 T102 16YL SHIFT MOTOR CONTROL A 6 A918 20RD FUSED B(+) 7-8-Component Location - 21 Component Location - 24 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Gear Sensor/Switch, Transfer Case > Component Information > Diagrams > Assembly-Shift Motor/Mode Sensor > Page 1932 Component Location - 26 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Gear Sensor/Switch, Transfer Case > Component Information > Diagrams > Assembly-Shift Motor/Mode Sensor > Page 1933 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Gear Sensor/Switch, Transfer Case > Component Information > Diagrams > Assembly-Shift Motor/Mode Sensor > Page 1934 Gear Sensor/Switch: Diagrams Sensor-Transfer Case Position Component ID: 443 Component : SENSOR-TRANSFER CASE POSITION Connector: Name : SENSOR-TRANSFER CASE POSITION Color : # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (MTC EXCEPT POWER WAGON) Pin Circuit Description 1 D201 20WT/DG MODE SENSOR A Pin Circuit Description 1 D201 18WT/DG MODE SENSOR A 2 Z955 20BK GROUND 2 Z955 18BK GROUND 2 Z901 20BK GROUND Component Location - 22 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Gear Sensor/Switch, Transfer Case > Component Information > Diagrams > Assembly-Shift Motor/Mode Sensor > Page 1935 Component Location - 25 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Gear Sensor/Switch, Transfer Case > Component Information > Diagrams > Assembly-Shift Motor/Mode Sensor > Page 1936 Connector: Name : SENSOR-TRANSFER CASE POSITION Color : # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (MTC POWER WAGON) Pin Circuit Description 1 D201 18WT/DG MODE SENSOR A Pin Circuit Description 1 D201 20WT/DG MODE SENSOR A Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Gear Sensor/Switch, Transfer Case > Component Information > Diagrams > Assembly-Shift Motor/Mode Sensor > Page 1937 2 G180 18VT/YL SENSOR RETURN 2 G180 20VT/YL SENSOR RETURN Component Location - 22 Component Location - 25 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Gear Sensor/Switch, Transfer Case > Component Information > Diagrams > Assembly-Shift Motor/Mode Sensor > Page 1938 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Gear Sensor/Switch, Transfer Case > Component Information > Description and Operation > NV244 GENII Transfer Case Gear Sensor/Switch: Description and Operation NV244 GENII Transfer Case Description DESCRIPTION The transfer case mode sensor is an electronic device whose output can be interpreted to indicate the shift motor shaft's rotary position. The sensor consists of a magnetic ring and four Hall Effect Transistors to create a 4 channel digital device (non-contacting) whose output converts the motor shaft position into a coded signal. The TCCM must supply 5VDC (+/- 0.5v) to the sensor and monitor the shift motor position. The four channels are denoted A, B, C, and D. The sensor is mechanically linked to the shaft of the cam which causes the transfer case shifting. The mode sensor draws less than 53 mA. Operation OPERATION During normal vehicle operation, the Transfer Case Control Module (TCCM) monitors the mode sensor outputs at least every 250 (+/-50) milliseconds when the shift motor is stationary and 400 microseconds when the shift motor is active. A mode sensor signal between 3.8 Volts and 0.8 Volts is considered to be undefined. Refer to SECTOR ANGLES vs.TRANSFER CASE POSITION for the relative angles of the transfer case shift sector versus the interpreted transfer case gear operating mode. Refer to MODE SENSOR CHANNEL STATES for the sensor codes returned to the TCCM for each transfer case mode sensor position. The various between gears positions can also be referred as the transfer case's coarse position. These coarse positions come into play during shift attempts. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Gear Sensor/Switch, Transfer Case > Component Information > Description and Operation > NV244 GENII Transfer Case > Page 1941 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Gear Sensor/Switch, Transfer Case > Component Information > Description and Operation > NV244 GENII Transfer Case > Page 1942 Gear Sensor/Switch: Description and Operation NV246 Transfer Case Description DESCRIPTION The transfer case mode sensor is an electronic device whose output can be interpreted to indicate the shift motor shaft's rotary position. The sensor consists of a magnetic ring and four Hall Effect Transistors to create a 4 channel digital device (non-contacting) whose output converts the motor shaft position into a coded signal. The FCM must supply 5VDC (+/- 0.5v) to the sensor and monitor the shift motor position. The four channels are denoted A, B, C, and D. The sensor is mechanically linked to the shaft of the cam which causes the transfer case shifting. The mode sensor draws less than 53 mA. Operation OPERATION During normal vehicle operation, the Front Control Module (FCM) monitors the mode sensor outputs at least every 250 (+/-50) milliseconds when the shift motor is stationary and 400 microseconds when the shift motor is active. A mode sensor signal between 3.8 Volts and 0.8 Volts is considered to be undefined. Refer to for the relative angles of the transfer case shift sector versus the interpreted transfer case gear operating mode. Refer to the sensor codes returned to the FCM for each transfer case mode sensor position. The various between gears positions can also be referred as the transfer case's coarse position. These coarse positions come into play during shift attempts. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Gear Sensor/Switch, Transfer Case > Component Information > Description and Operation > NV244 GENII Transfer Case > Page 1943 Gear Sensor/Switch: Description and Operation NV271 Transfer Case Description DESCRIPTION The transfer case position sensor is an electronic device whose output can be interpreted to indicate the transfer case's current operating mode. The sensor consists of a five position, resistive multiplexed circuit which returns a specific resistance value to the Powertrain Control Module (PCM) for each transfer case operating mode. The sensor is located on the top of the transfer case, just left of the transfer case centerline and rides against the sector plate roostercomb. The PCM supplies 5VDC (+/- 0.5V) to the sensor and monitors the return voltage to determine the sector plate, and therefore the transfer case, position. Operation OPERATION Position Sensor Linear Movement During normal vehicle operation, the Powertrain Control Module (PCM) monitors the transfer case position sensor return voltage to determine the operating mode of the transfer case. Refer to the Operating Mode Versus Resistance table for the correct resistance for each position. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Gear Sensor/Switch, Transfer Case > Component Information > Description and Operation > NV244 GENII Transfer Case > Page 1944 Gear Sensor/Switch: Description and Operation NV243 Transfer Case Description DESCRIPTION The transfer case mode sensor (1) is an electronic device whose output can be interpreted to indicate the shift motor shaft's rotary position. The sensor consists of a magnetic ring and four Hall Effect Transistors to create a 4 channel digital device (non-contacting) whose output converts the motor shaft position into a coded signal. The TCCM must supply 5VDC (+/- 0.5v) to the sensor and monitor the shift motor position. The four channels are denoted A, B, C, and D. The sensor is mechanically linked to the shaft of the cam which causes the transfer case shifting. The mode sensor draws less than 53 mA. Operation OPERATION During normal vehicle operation, the Transfer Case Control Module (TCCM) monitors the mode sensor outputs at least every 250 (+/-50) milliseconds when the shift motor is stationary and 400 microseconds when the shift motor is active. A mode sensor signal between 3.8 Volts and 0.8 Volts is considered to be undefined. Refer to SECTOR ANGLES vs.TRANSFER CASE POSITION for the relative angles of the transfer case shift sector versus the interpreted transfer case gear operating mode. Refer to MODE SENSOR CHANNEL STATES for the sensor codes returned to the TCCM for each transfer case mode sensor position. The various between gears positions can also be referred as the transfer case's coarse position. These coarse positions come into play during shift attempts. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Gear Sensor/Switch, Transfer Case > Component Information > Description and Operation > NV244 GENII Transfer Case > Page 1945 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Gear Sensor/Switch, Transfer Case > Component Information > Description and Operation > NV244 GENII Transfer Case > Page 1946 Gear Sensor/Switch: Description and Operation NV273 Transfer Case Description DESCRIPTION The transfer case mode sensor (1) is an electronic device whose output can be interpreted to indicate the shift motor shaft's rotary position. The sensor consists of a magnetic ring and four Hall Effect Transistors to create a 4 channel digital device (non-contacting) whose output converts the motor shaft position into a coded signal. The TCCM must supply 5VDC (+/- 0.5v) to the sensor and monitor the shift motor position. The four channels are denoted A, B, C, and D. The sensor is mechanically linked to the shaft of the cam which causes the transfer case shifting. The mode sensor draws less than 53 mA. Operation OPERATION During normal vehicle operation, the Transfer Case Control Module (TCCM) monitors the mode sensor outputs at least every 250 (+/-50) milliseconds when the shift motor is stationary and 400 microseconds when the shift motor is active. A mode sensor signal between 3.8 Volts and 0.8 Volts is considered to be undefined. Refer to SECTOR ANGLES vs.TRANSFER CASE POSITION for the relative angles of the transfer case shift sector versus the interpreted transfer case gear operating mode. Refer to MODE SENSOR CHANNEL STATES for the sensor codes returned to the TCCM for each transfer case mode sensor position. The various between gears positions can also be referred as the transfer case's coarse position. These coarse positions come into play during shift attempts. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Gear Sensor/Switch, Transfer Case > Component Information > Description and Operation > NV244 GENII Transfer Case > Page 1947 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Gear Sensor/Switch, Transfer Case > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Gear Sensor/Switch: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL 1. Raise and support the vehicle. 2. Disengage the transfer case position sensor connector from the position sensor. 3. Remove the position sensor from the transfer case. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Gear Sensor/Switch, Transfer Case > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 1950 Gear Sensor/Switch: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION 1. Inspect the o-ring seal on the transfer case position sensor. Replace the o-ring if necessary. 2. Install the transfer case position sensor into the transfer case. Torque the sensor to 27 Nm (20 ft.lbs.). 3. Engage the transfer case position sensor connector to the position sensor. 4. Lower vehicle. 5. Verify proper sensor operation. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Speed Sensor, Transfer Case > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Prop Shaft Speed-Front Speed Sensor: Locations Sensor-Prop Shaft Speed-Front Component ID: 435 Component : SENSOR-PROP SHAFT SPEED-FRONT Connector: Name : SENSOR-PROP SHAFT SPEED-FRONT Color : # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (FULL TIME ETC) Pin Circuit Description 1 T71 20YL/OR INPUT SPEED SENSOR 2 (N3) RETURN 2 T340 20DG/VT INPUT SPEED SENSOR 2 (N3) SIGNAL Component Location - 21 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Speed Sensor, Transfer Case > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Prop Shaft Speed-Front > Page 1955 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Speed Sensor, Transfer Case > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Prop Shaft Speed-Front > Page 1956 Speed Sensor: Locations Sensor-Prop Shaft Speed-Rear Component ID: 436 Component : SENSOR-PROP SHAFT SPEED-REAR Connector: Name : SENSOR-PROP SHAFT SPEED-REAR Color : # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (FULL TIME ETC) Pin Circuit Description 1 T70 20YL INPUT SPEED SENSOR 1 (N2) SIGNAL 2 T341 20DG/VT INPUT SPEED SENSOR 1 (N2) RETURN Component Location - 21 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Speed Sensor, Transfer Case > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Prop Shaft Speed-Front > Page 1957 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Speed Sensor, Transfer Case > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Prop Shaft Speed-Front Speed Sensor: Diagrams Sensor-Prop Shaft Speed-Front Component ID: 435 Component : SENSOR-PROP SHAFT SPEED-FRONT Connector: Name : SENSOR-PROP SHAFT SPEED-FRONT Color : # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (FULL TIME ETC) Pin Circuit Description 1 T71 20YL/OR INPUT SPEED SENSOR 2 (N3) RETURN 2 T340 20DG/VT INPUT SPEED SENSOR 2 (N3) SIGNAL Component Location - 21 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Speed Sensor, Transfer Case > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Prop Shaft Speed-Front > Page 1960 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Speed Sensor, Transfer Case > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Prop Shaft Speed-Front > Page 1961 Speed Sensor: Diagrams Sensor-Prop Shaft Speed-Rear Component ID: 436 Component : SENSOR-PROP SHAFT SPEED-REAR Connector: Name : SENSOR-PROP SHAFT SPEED-REAR Color : # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (FULL TIME ETC) Pin Circuit Description 1 T70 20YL INPUT SPEED SENSOR 1 (N2) SIGNAL 2 T341 20DG/VT INPUT SPEED SENSOR 1 (N2) RETURN Component Location - 21 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Speed Sensor, Transfer Case > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Prop Shaft Speed-Front > Page 1962 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Speed Sensor, Transfer Case > Component Information > Service and Repair > Sensor-Output Shaft Speed-Front Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Sensor-Output Shaft Speed-Front Removal REMOVAL 1. Raise the vehicle on a suitable hoist. 2. Disengage the wiring connector from the front output shaft speed sensor (1). 3. Remove the front output shaft speed sensor from the transfer case. Installation INSTALLATION 1. Install the front output shaft speed sensor (1) into the transfer case. Tighten the speed sensor to 17 Nm (12.5 ft.lbs.). 2. Engage the wiring connector to the front output shaft speed sensor. 3. Lower the vehicle. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Speed Sensor, Transfer Case > Component Information > Service and Repair > Sensor-Output Shaft Speed-Front > Page 1965 Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Sensor-Output Shaft Speed-Rear Removal REMOVAL 1. Raise the vehicle on a suitable hoist. 2. Disengage the wiring connector from the rear output shaft speed sensor (1). 3. Remove the rear output shaft speed sensor from the transfer case. Installation INSTALLATION 1. Install the rear output shaft speed sensor (1) into the transfer case. Tighten the speed sensor to 17 Nm (12.5 ft.lbs.). 2. Engage the wiring connector to the rear output shaft speed sensor. 3. Lower the vehicle. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Heated Glass Element Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Heated Glass Element Switch: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The switch for the rear window defogger (EBL) system (1) is integrated into the A/C-heater control (2), which is located in the center of the instrument panel. When the rear window defogger switch is pressed to ON, a request signal is sent on the CAN-B Bus to the totally integrated power module (TIPM) to operate the EBL system. When the high side driver in the totally integrated power module (TIPM) is energized, current is directed to the rear defogger grid lines and to the heated side view mirrors. The grid lines heat the glass to help clear the surface of fog or frost. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Heated Glass Element Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 1971 Heated Glass Element Switch: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION An amber indicator will illuminate when the rear window defogger switch is activated. When activated, the switch sends a request signal to the to the totally integrated power module (TIPM) to energize the internal EBL high side driver to provide battery current to the rear window defogger grid lines and to the heated side view mirrors. NOTE: The EBL system turns off automatically after 15 minutes of initial operation. Each following activation cycle of the EBL system will last 10 minutes. The EBL system will be automatically turned off after an initial programmed time interval of about 15 minutes, as long as the ignition switch is in RUN. After the initial time interval has expired, if the rear window defogger switch is pressed to ON again during the same ignition cycle, the EBL system will automatically turn off after about 10 minutes. The EBL system will automatically shut off if the ignition switch is turned to any position other than RUN, or it can be turned off manually by pressing the rear window defogger switch a second time. The rear window defogger switch is diagnosed using a scan tool. The rear window defogger switch and the rear window defogger indicator cannot be repaired and the A/C-heater control must be replaced if found inoperative or damaged See: Heating and Air Conditioning/Control Assembly/Service and Repair/A/C Heater Control - Removal . Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Locations > Switch-Power Sliding Backlite Power Window Switch: Locations Switch-Power Sliding Backlite Component ID: 499 Component : SWITCH-POWER SLIDING BACKLITE Connector: Name : SWITCH-POWER SLIDING BACKLITE Color : BLACK # of pins : 8 Qualifier : (QUAD CAB/EXCEPT BASE) Pin Circuit Description 1-2 Z974 12BK GROUND 3 Z975 12BK GROUND 4 F30 12PK/YL FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-ACC) 5 Q950 12OR/LG POWER BACKLITE OPEN (+) 6 P301 20LG/OR PANEL LAMPS DRIVER 7 Z976 20BK GROUND 8 Q951 12OR/VT POWER BACKLITE OPEN (-) Component Location - 47 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Locations > Switch-Power Sliding Backlite > Page 1976 Component Location - 45 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Locations > Switch-Power Sliding Backlite > Page 1977 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Locations > Switch-Power Sliding Backlite > Page 1978 Power Window Switch: Locations Switch-Power Window-Left Rear Component ID: 500 Component : SWITCH-POWER WINDOW-LEFT REAR Connector: Name : SWITCH-POWER WINDOW-LEFT REAR Color : BLUE # of pins : 6 Pin Circuit Description 1 Q111 14TN/YL DRIVER REAR WINDOW DRIVER (UP) Pin Circuit Description 1 Q211 14TN/LB DRIVER REAR WINDOW DRIVER (DOWN) 2 Q611 14OR/GY LEFT REAR WINDOW DRIVER (DOWN) 3-4 Q411 14OR/WT LEFT REAR WINDOW DRIVER (UP) 5 Q211 14TN/LB DRIVER REAR WINDOW DRIVER (DOWN) 5 Q111 14TN/YL DRIVER REAR WINDOW DRIVER (UP) 6 Q15 14OR/LB POWER WINDOW SWITCH FEED Component Location - 57 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Locations > Switch-Power Sliding Backlite > Page 1979 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Locations > Switch-Power Sliding Backlite > Page 1980 Power Window Switch: Locations Switch-Power Window-Passenger Component ID: 501 Component : SWITCH-POWER WINDOW-PASSENGER Connector: Name : SWITCH-POWER WINDOW-PASSENGER Color : BLUE # of pins : 6 Pin Circuit Description 1 Q12 12OR/BR RIGHT FRONT WINDOW DRIVER (UP) 2 Q26 12OR/GY MASTER WINDOW SWITCH RIGHT FRONT (DOWN) 3-4 Q16 12OR/TN MASTER WINDOW SWITCH RIGHT FRONT (UP) 5 Q22 12OR/VT RIGHT FRONT WINDOW DRIVER (DOWN) 6 Q15 12OR/LB POWER WINDOW SWITCH FEED Component Location - 56 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Locations > Switch-Power Sliding Backlite > Page 1981 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Locations > Switch-Power Sliding Backlite > Page 1982 Power Window Switch: Locations Switch-Power Window-Right Rear Component ID: 502 Component : SWITCH-POWER WINDOW-RIGHT REAR Connector: Name : SWITCH-POWER WINDOW-RIGHT REAR Color : BLUE # of pins : 6 Pin Circuit Description 1 Q112 14TN/YL PASSENGER REAR WINDOW DRIVER (UP) Pin Circuit Description 1 Q212 14TN/LB PASSENGER REAR WINDOW DRIVER (DOWN) 2 Q612 14OR/GY RIGHT REAR WINDOW DRIVER (DOWN) 3-4 Q412 14OR/WT RIGHT REAR WINDOW DRIVER (UP) 5 Q212 14TN/LB PASSENGER REAR WINDOW DRIVER (DOWN) 5 Q112 14TN/YL PASSENGER REAR WINDOW DRIVER (UP) 6 Q15 14TN/LG POWER WINDOW SWITCH FEED Component Location - 57 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Locations > Switch-Power Sliding Backlite > Page 1983 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Locations > Switch-Power Sliding Backlite > Page 1984 Power Window Switch: Locations Switch-Window/Door Lock-Driver Component ID: 518 Component : SWITCH-WINDOW/DOOR LOCK-DRIVER Connector: Name : SWITCH-WINDOW/DOOR LOCK-DRIVER C1 Color : BLUE # of pins : 12 Pin Circuit Description 1 Q612 14OR/DB RIGHT REAR WINDOW DRIVER (DOWN) 2 Q412 14OR/LB RIGHT REAR WINDOW DRIVER (UP) 3 Q16 12OR/TN MASTER WINDOW SWITCH RIGHT FRONT (UP) 4 Q411 14OR/WT LEFT REAR WINDOW DRIVER (UP) 5 Q11 14OR/LG LEFT FRONT WINDOW DRIVER (UP) 6 Q26 12OR/GY MASTER WINDOW SWITCH RIGHT FRONT (DOWN) 7 G161 20VT/DG DRIVER DOOR LOCK SWITCH MUX 8 Z939 12BK GROUND 9 F30 12PK/YL FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-ACC) 10 Q611 14OR/GY LEFT REAR WINDOW DRIVER (DOWN) 11 Z939 18BK GROUND 12 Q21 14OR/WT LEFT FRONT WINDOW DRIVER (DOWN) Component Location - 55 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Locations > Switch-Power Sliding Backlite > Page 1985 Connector: Name : SWITCH-WINDOW/DOOR LOCK-DRIVER C2 Color : BLUE # of pins : 8 Pin Circuit Description 1 P71 20TN/DG LEFT MIRROR UP DRIVER 2 P195 18LG/YL LEFT MIRROR COMMON DRIVER (RIGHT/DOWN) 3 A940 18RD FUSED B(+) 4 P74 18TN/OR RIGHT MIRROR LEFT DRIVER 5 Z939 18BK GROUND Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Locations > Switch-Power Sliding Backlite > Page 1986 6 P75 20TN/LG LEFT MIRROR LEFT DRIVER 7 P72 18TN/GY RIGHT MIRROR UP DRIVER 8 Q15 12OR/LB WINDOW LOCK OUT SWITCH OUTPUT Component Location - 55 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Switch-Power Sliding Backlite Power Window Switch: Diagrams Switch-Power Sliding Backlite Component ID: 499 Component : SWITCH-POWER SLIDING BACKLITE Connector: Name : SWITCH-POWER SLIDING BACKLITE Color : BLACK # of pins : 8 Qualifier : (QUAD CAB/EXCEPT BASE) Pin Circuit Description 1-2 Z974 12BK GROUND 3 Z975 12BK GROUND 4 F30 12PK/YL FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-ACC) 5 Q950 12OR/LG POWER BACKLITE OPEN (+) 6 P301 20LG/OR PANEL LAMPS DRIVER 7 Z976 20BK GROUND 8 Q951 12OR/VT POWER BACKLITE OPEN (-) Component Location - 47 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Switch-Power Sliding Backlite > Page 1989 Component Location - 45 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Switch-Power Sliding Backlite > Page 1990 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Switch-Power Sliding Backlite > Page 1991 Power Window Switch: Diagrams Switch-Power Window-Left Rear Component ID: 500 Component : SWITCH-POWER WINDOW-LEFT REAR Connector: Name : SWITCH-POWER WINDOW-LEFT REAR Color : BLUE # of pins : 6 Pin Circuit Description 1 Q111 14TN/YL DRIVER REAR WINDOW DRIVER (UP) Pin Circuit Description 1 Q211 14TN/LB DRIVER REAR WINDOW DRIVER (DOWN) 2 Q611 14OR/GY LEFT REAR WINDOW DRIVER (DOWN) 3-4 Q411 14OR/WT LEFT REAR WINDOW DRIVER (UP) 5 Q211 14TN/LB DRIVER REAR WINDOW DRIVER (DOWN) 5 Q111 14TN/YL DRIVER REAR WINDOW DRIVER (UP) 6 Q15 14OR/LB POWER WINDOW SWITCH FEED Component Location - 57 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Switch-Power Sliding Backlite > Page 1992 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Switch-Power Sliding Backlite > Page 1993 Power Window Switch: Diagrams Switch-Power Window-Passenger Component ID: 501 Component : SWITCH-POWER WINDOW-PASSENGER Connector: Name : SWITCH-POWER WINDOW-PASSENGER Color : BLUE # of pins : 6 Pin Circuit Description 1 Q12 12OR/BR RIGHT FRONT WINDOW DRIVER (UP) 2 Q26 12OR/GY MASTER WINDOW SWITCH RIGHT FRONT (DOWN) 3-4 Q16 12OR/TN MASTER WINDOW SWITCH RIGHT FRONT (UP) 5 Q22 12OR/VT RIGHT FRONT WINDOW DRIVER (DOWN) 6 Q15 12OR/LB POWER WINDOW SWITCH FEED Component Location - 56 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Switch-Power Sliding Backlite > Page 1994 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Switch-Power Sliding Backlite > Page 1995 Power Window Switch: Diagrams Switch-Power Window-Right Rear Component ID: 502 Component : SWITCH-POWER WINDOW-RIGHT REAR Connector: Name : SWITCH-POWER WINDOW-RIGHT REAR Color : BLUE # of pins : 6 Pin Circuit Description 1 Q112 14TN/YL PASSENGER REAR WINDOW DRIVER (UP) Pin Circuit Description 1 Q212 14TN/LB PASSENGER REAR WINDOW DRIVER (DOWN) 2 Q612 14OR/GY RIGHT REAR WINDOW DRIVER (DOWN) 3-4 Q412 14OR/WT RIGHT REAR WINDOW DRIVER (UP) 5 Q212 14TN/LB PASSENGER REAR WINDOW DRIVER (DOWN) 5 Q112 14TN/YL PASSENGER REAR WINDOW DRIVER (UP) 6 Q15 14TN/LG POWER WINDOW SWITCH FEED Component Location - 57 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Switch-Power Sliding Backlite > Page 1996 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Switch-Power Sliding Backlite > Page 1997 Power Window Switch: Diagrams Switch-Window/Door Lock-Driver Component ID 479 Component ID: 479 Component : SWITCH-WINDOW/DOOR LOCK-DRIVER Connector: Name : SWITCH-WINDOW/DOOR LOCK-DRIVER C1 Color : BLUE # of pins : 12 Pin Circuit Description 1 Q612 14OR/DB RIGHT REAR WINDOW DRIVER (DOWN) 2 Q412 14OR/LB RIGHT REAR WINDOW DRIVER (UP) 3 Q16 12OR/TN MASTER WINDOW SWITCH RIGHT FRONT (UP) 4 Q411 14OR/WT LEFT REAR WINDOW DRIVER (UP) 5 Q11 14OR/LG LEFT FRONT WINDOW DRIVER (UP) 6 Q26 12OR/GY MASTER WINDOW SWITCH RIGHT FRONT (DOWN) 7 G161 20VT/DG DRIVER DOOR LOCK SWITCH MUX 8 Z939 12BK GROUND 9 F30 12PK/YL FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-ACC) 10 Q611 14OR/GY LEFT REAR WINDOW DRIVER (DOWN) 11 Z939 18BK GROUND 12 Q21 14OR/WT LEFT FRONT WINDOW DRIVER (DOWN) Connector: Name : SWITCH-WINDOW/DOOR LOCK-DRIVER C2 Color : BLUE # of pins : 8 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Switch-Power Sliding Backlite > Page 1998 Pin Circuit Description 1 P71 20TN/DG LEFT MIRROR UP DRIVER 2 P195 18LG/YL LEFT MIRROR COMMON DRIVER (RIGHT/DOWN) 3 A940 18RD FUSED B(+) 4 P74 18TN/OR RIGHT MIRROR LEFT DRIVER 5 Z939 18BK GROUND 6 P75 20TN/LG LEFT MIRROR LEFT DRIVER 7 P72 18TN/GY RIGHT MIRROR UP DRIVER 8 Q15 12OR/LB WINDOW LOCK OUT SWITCH OUTPUT Component ID 518 Component ID: 518 Component : SWITCH-WINDOW/DOOR LOCK-DRIVER Connector: Name : SWITCH-WINDOW/DOOR LOCK-DRIVER C1 Color : BLUE # of pins : 12 Pin Circuit Description 1 Q612 14OR/DB RIGHT REAR WINDOW DRIVER (DOWN) 2 Q412 14OR/LB RIGHT REAR WINDOW DRIVER (UP) 3 Q16 12OR/TN MASTER WINDOW SWITCH RIGHT FRONT (UP) 4 Q411 14OR/WT LEFT REAR WINDOW DRIVER (UP) 5 Q11 14OR/LG LEFT FRONT WINDOW DRIVER (UP) 6 Q26 12OR/GY MASTER WINDOW SWITCH RIGHT FRONT (DOWN) Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Switch-Power Sliding Backlite > Page 1999 7 G161 20VT/DG DRIVER DOOR LOCK SWITCH MUX 8 Z939 12BK GROUND 9 F30 12PK/YL FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-ACC) 10 Q611 14OR/GY LEFT REAR WINDOW DRIVER (DOWN) 11 Z939 18BK GROUND 12 Q21 14OR/WT LEFT FRONT WINDOW DRIVER (DOWN) Component Location - 55 Connector: Name : SWITCH-WINDOW/DOOR LOCK-DRIVER C2 Color : BLUE # of pins : 8 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Switch-Power Sliding Backlite > Page 2000 Pin Circuit Description 1 P71 20TN/DG LEFT MIRROR UP DRIVER 2 P195 18LG/YL LEFT MIRROR COMMON DRIVER (RIGHT/DOWN) 3 A940 18RD FUSED B(+) 4 P74 18TN/OR RIGHT MIRROR LEFT DRIVER 5 Z939 18BK GROUND 6 P75 20TN/LG LEFT MIRROR LEFT DRIVER 7 P72 18TN/GY RIGHT MIRROR UP DRIVER 8 Q15 12OR/LB WINDOW LOCK OUT SWITCH OUTPUT Component Location - 55 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Switch-Power Sliding Backlite > Page 2001 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 2002 Power Window Switch: Testing and Inspection WINDOW SWITCH The Light-Emitting Diode (LED) illumination lamps for all of the power window and lock switch and bezel unit switch paddles receive battery current through the power window circuit breaker in the junction block. If all of the LEDs are inoperative in both the power window and lock switch units and the power windows are inoperative. See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code Tests and Associated Procedures If the power windows operate, but any or all of the LEDs are inoperative, the power window and lock switch units with the inoperative LED(s) is faulty and must be replaced. For complete circuit diagrams, refer to the appropriate wiring information. 1. Check the fuse in the Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) and the circuit breaker located near the park brake pedal. If OK, go to STEP 2. If not OK, replace the faulty fuse or circuit breaker. 2. Turn the ignition switch to the On position. Check for battery voltage at the fuse in the Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM). If OK, turn the ignition switch to the Off position and go to STEP 3. If not OK, check circuit breaker and repair the circuit to the ignition switch as required. 3. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. Remove the power window switch unit from the door trim panel (passenger doors). The drivers door switch is included with the window/lock switch See: Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame/Power Door Lock Switch/Testing and Inspection/Diagnosis and Testing for service procedures. Unplug the wire harness connector from the switch unit. 4. Test the power window switch continuity. See the Power Window Switch Continuity charts to determine if the continuity is correct in the Off, Up and Down switch positions. If OK, See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code Tests and Associated Procedures . If not OK, replace the faulty switch. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Power Window Switch: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL FRONT PASSENGER 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. 2. Remove the door trim panel. See: Body and Frame/Doors, Hood and Trunk/Doors/Front Door/Front Door Panel/Service and Repair/Front Door Trim Panel - Removal 3. Remove the switch from the trim panel bezel. REAR PASSENGER 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. 2. Remove the door trim panel. See: Body and Frame/Doors, Hood and Trunk/Doors/Rear Door/Rear Door Panel/Service and Repair/Rear Door Trim Panel - Removal 3. Gently pry switch from door trim panel. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 2005 Power Window Switch: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION FRONT PASSENGER 1. Insert switch to trim panel bezel. 2. Install door trim panel. See: Body and Frame/Doors, Hood and Trunk/Doors/Front Door/Front Door Panel/Service and Repair/Front Door Trim Panel - Installation 3. Connect battery negative cable. REAR PASSENGER 1. Install switch to door trim panel 2. Install door trim panel. See: Body and Frame/Doors, Hood and Trunk/Doors/Rear Door/Rear Door Panel/Service and Repair/Rear Door Trim Panel - Installation 3. Connect battery negative cable. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Wiper and Washer Systems > Washer Fluid Level Switch > Component Information > Locations Washer Fluid Level Switch: Locations Component ID: 516 Component : SWITCH-WASHER FLUID LEVEL Connector: Name : SWITCH-WASHER FLUID LEVEL Color : LT. GRAY # of pins : 2 Pin Circuit Description 1 G932 20VT/TN WASHER FLUID SWITCH RETURN 2 W1 20BR/TN WASHER FLUID SWITCH SENSE Component Location - 29 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Wiper and Washer Systems > Washer Fluid Level Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 2010 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Wiper and Washer Systems > Washer Fluid Level Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 2011 Washer Fluid Level Switch: Diagrams Component ID: 516 Component : SWITCH-WASHER FLUID LEVEL Connector: Name : SWITCH-WASHER FLUID LEVEL Color : LT. GRAY # of pins : 2 Pin Circuit Description 1 G932 20VT/TN WASHER FLUID SWITCH RETURN 2 W1 20BR/TN WASHER FLUID SWITCH SENSE Component Location - 29 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Wiper and Washer Systems > Washer Fluid Level Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 2012 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Wiper and Washer Systems > Washer Fluid Level Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Washer Fluid Level Switch: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The washer fluid level switch (3) is a two-pin conductivity sensor with no moving parts mounted on the rearward facing side of the washer reservoir adjacent to the washer pump/motor unit in the engine compartment. Only the molded plastic switch mounting flange and the integral connector receptacle (4) are visible when the switch is installed in the reservoir. A short nipple formation (1) extends from the inner surface of the switch mounting flange, and a barb on the nipple is pressed through a rubber grommet seal installed in the mounting hole of the reservoir. Two over-molded pins or electrodes (2) extend from the back of the nipple formation. The washer fluid level switch cannot be adjusted or repaired. If ineffective or damaged, the switch must be replaced. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Wiper and Washer Systems > Washer Fluid Level Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 2015 Washer Fluid Level Switch: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The washer fluid level switch uses fluid conductivity to monitor the level of the washer fluid in the washer reservoir. Electricity is conducted between the two switch pins or electrodes only when they are immersed in the washer fluid, which closes the switch circuit. When the fluid level in the washer reservoir falls below the pins, electrical current cannot be conducted and the switch becomes an open circuit, which signals a low fluid condition. In order to prevent an electrical charge from accumulating in the electrical leads of the switch, the switch receives current that is pulsed from the Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) located in the engine compartment near the battery. The TIPM monitors the switch return signal and is programmed to respond to three consecutive open switch readings by sending an electronic washer fluid indicator lamp-ON message to the ElectroMechanical Instrument Cluster (EMIC) (also known as the Cab Compartment Node/CCN) over the Controller Area Network (CAN) data bus. The EMIC responds to this message by illuminating the washer fluid indicator and by sounding an audible chime tone warning. The washer fluid level switch is connected to the vehicle electrical system through a dedicated take out and connector of the right (gasoline engines) or left (diesel engines) headlamp and dash wire harness. The switch is connected in series between a sensor return circuit and the washer fluid switch sense input to the TIPM. The washer fluid level switch and the hard wired circuits between the switch and the TIPM may be diagnosed using conventional diagnostic tools and procedures. Refer to the appropriate wiring information. However, conventional diagnostic methods will not prove conclusive in the diagnosis of the washer fluid level switch or the electronic controls or communication between other modules and devices that provide some features of the wiper and washer systems. The most reliable, efficient, and accurate means to diagnose the washer fluid level switch or the electronic controls and communication related to washer fluid level switch operation requires the use of a diagnostic scan tool. Refer to the appropriate diagnostic information. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Wiper and Washer Systems > Washer Fluid Level Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Washer Fluid Level Switch: Service and Repair Removal Diesel Engine DIESEL ENGINE NOTE: The washer fluid level switch can be removed from the washer reservoir without removing the reservoir from the vehicle. 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. 2. Disconnect the washer hose (4) from the barbed outlet nipple of the washer pump/motor unit (3) and allow the washer fluid to drain into a clean container for reuse. 3. Disconnect the left headlamp and dash wire harness (1) connector for the washer fluid level switch (5) from the switch connector receptacle. 4. Using a trim stick or another suitable wide flat-bladed tool, gently pry the barbed nipple of the washer fluid level switch out of the rubber grommet seal in the washer reservoir sump (2). Care must be taken not to damage the reservoir. 5. Remove the switch from the reservoir. 6. Remove the rubber grommet seal from the mounting hole in the washer reservoir and discard. Gasoline Engine GASOLINE ENGINE NOTE: The washer fluid level switch can be removed from the washer reservoir without removing the reservoir from the vehicle. 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. 2. Disconnect the washer hose (1) from the barbed outlet nipple of the washer pump/motor unit (5) and allow the washer fluid to drain into a clean container for reuse. 3. Disconnect the right headlamp and dash wire harness (4) connector for the washer fluid level switch (3) from the switch connector receptacle. 4. Using a trim stick or another suitable wide flat-bladed tool, gently pry the barbed nipple of the washer fluid level switch out of the rubber grommet seal in the washer reservoir sump (2). Care must be taken not to damage the reservoir. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Wiper and Washer Systems > Washer Fluid Level Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 2018 5. Remove the switch from the reservoir. 6. Remove the rubber grommet seal from the mounting hole in the washer reservoir and discard. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Wiper and Washer Systems > Washer Fluid Level Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 2019 Washer Fluid Level Switch: Service and Repair Installation Diesel Engine DIESEL ENGINE 1. Install a new rubber grommet seal into the washer fluid level switch mounting hole in the washer reservoir (2). Always use a new rubber grommet seal on the reservoir. 2. Insert the nipple formation of the switch (5) through the rubber grommet seal and in the reservoir. 3. Using hand pressure, press firmly and evenly on the switch mounting flange until the barbed nipple is fully seated in the rubber grommet seal in the reservoir. The flat edge of the switch mounting flange should be pointed upward. 4. Reconnect the left headlamp and dash wire harness (1) connector for the switch to the switch connector receptacle. 5. Reconnect the removed washer hose (4) to the barbed outlet nipple of the washer pump/motor unit (3). 6. Refill the washer reservoir with the washer fluid drained from the reservoir during the removal procedure. 7. Reconnect the battery negative cable. Gasoline Engine GASOLINE ENGINE 1. Install a new rubber grommet seal into the washer fluid level switch mounting hole in the washer reservoir (2). Always use a new rubber grommet seal on the reservoir. 2. Insert the nipple formation of the switch (3) through the rubber grommet seal in the reservoir. 3. Using hand pressure, press firmly and evenly on the switch mounting flange until the barbed nipple is fully seated in the rubber grommet seal in the reservoir. The flat edge of the switch mounting flange should be pointed upward. 4. Reconnect the right headlamp and dash wire harness (4) connector to the switch connector receptacle. 5. Reconnect the removed washer hose (1) to the barbed outlet nipple of the washer pump/motor unit (5). 6. Refill the washer reservoir with the washer fluid drained from the reservoir during the removal procedure. 7. Reconnect the battery negative cable. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Specifications > Curb Height Measurement (LD) Alignment: Specifications Curb Height Measurement (LD) CURB HEIGHT MEASUREMENT (LD) The wheel alignment is to be checked and all alignment adjustments made with the vehicle at its required curb height specification. Vehicle height is to be checked with the vehicle on a flat, level surface, preferably a vehicle alignment rack. The tires are to be inflated to the recommended pressure. All tires are to be the same size as standard equipment. Vehicle height is checked with the fuel tank full of fuel, and no passenger or luggage compartment load. Inspect the vehicle for bent or weak suspension components. Compare the parts tag on the suspect coil spring(s) to the parts book and the vehicle sales code, checking for a match. Once removed from the vehicle, compare the coil spring height to a correct new or known good coil spring. The heights should vary if the suspect spring is weak. 1. Front - On each side of the vehicle, measure the distance from the center of the rear lower control arm bolt (1) to the ground (2) Record the measurement. Next measure the distance from the spindle center (3) to the ground (4) Record the measurement. 2. Take the two measurements and subtract them to get the curb height specification. 3. Rear 4X2 LD - On each side of the vehicle, measure the distance at the axle tube (1) to the jounce bumper flange (2). 4. Rear 4X4 LD - On each side of the vehicle, measure the distance at the jounce pad welded to the axle tube (1) to the jounce bumper flange (2). 5. Compare the measurements to the specifications listed in the following Curb Height Specifications chart. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Specifications > Curb Height Measurement (LD) > Page 2025 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Specifications > Curb Height Measurement (LD) > Page 2026 Alignment: Specifications Curb Height Measurement (HD) CURB HEIGHT MEASUREMENT (HD) The wheel alignment is to be checked and all alignment adjustments made with the vehicle at its required curb height specification. Vehicle height is to be checked with the vehicle on a flat, level surface, preferably a vehicle alignment rack. The tires are to be inflated to the recommended pressure. All tires are to be the same size as standard equipment. Vehicle height is checked with the fuel tank full of fuel, and no passenger or luggage compartment load. Inspect the vehicle for bent or weak suspension components. Compare the parts tag on the suspect coil spring(s) to the parts book and the vehicle sales code, checking for a match. Once removed from the vehicle, compare the coil spring height to a correct new or known good coil spring. The heights should vary if the suspect spring is weak. 1. Front 4X2 On each side of the vehicle, measure the distance from the top of the jounce bumper flange (2) to the bottom of the frame rail (1). 2. Front 4X4 On each side of the vehicle, measure the distance from the top of the axle (2) to the bottom of the jounce bumper flange (1). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Specifications > Curb Height Measurement (LD) > Page 2027 3. Rear ALL - On each side of the vehicle, measure the distance at the top of the axle tube (2) to the bottom of the frame rail (1). 4. Compare the measurements to the specifications listed in the following Curb Height Specifications chart. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Specifications > Curb Height Measurement (LD) > Page 2028 Alignment: Specifications Wheel Alignment Specifications Ram 1500 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Specifications > Curb Height Measurement (LD) > Page 2029 Ram 2500 SERIES - 4X2 Ram 2500 SERIES - 4X4 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Specifications > Curb Height Measurement (LD) > Page 2030 Ram 2500 SERIES MEGA CAB 4X4 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Specifications > Curb Height Measurement (LD) > Page 2031 Ram 3500 SERIES 4X2 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Specifications > Curb Height Measurement (LD) > Page 2032 Ram 3500 SERIES 4X4 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Specifications > Curb Height Measurement (LD) > Page 2033 Ram 3500 SERIES CAB CHASSIS Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Specifications > Curb Height Measurement (LD) > Page 2034 Ram 4500 SERIES Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Specifications > Curb Height Measurement (LD) > Page 2035 Ram 5500 SERIES Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Description and Operation > Description Alignment: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION NOTE: Suspension components with rubber/urethane bushings should be tightened with the vehicle at normal ride height. It is important to have the springs supporting the weight of the vehicle when the fasteners are torqued. If springs are not at their normal ride position, vehicle ride comfort could be affected and premature bushing wear may occur. Wheel alignment involves the correct positioning of the wheels in relation to the vehicle. The positioning is accomplished through suspension and steering linkage adjustments. An alignment is considered essential for efficient steering, good directional stability and to minimize tire wear. The most important measurements of an alignment are caster, camber and toe. CAUTION: Never attempt to modify suspension or steering components by heating or bending. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 2038 Alignment: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION - CASTER is the forward or rearward tilt of the steering knuckle from vertical. Tilting the top of the knuckle forward provides less positive caster. Tilting the top of the knuckle rearward provides more positive caster. Positive caster promotes directional stability. This angle enables the front wheels to return to a straight ahead position after turns - CAMBER is the inward or outward tilt of the wheel relative to the center of the vehicle. Tilting the top of the wheel inward provides negative camber. Tilting the top of the wheel outward provides positive camber. Incorrect camber will cause wear on the inside or outside edge of the tire - TOE is the difference between the leading inside edges and trailing inside edges of the front tires. Wheel toe position out of specification cause's unstable steering, uneven tire wear and steering wheel off- center. The wheel toe position is the final front wheel alignment adjustment - THRUST ANGLE is the angle of the rear axle relative to the centerline of the vehicle. Incorrect thrust angle can cause off-center steering and excessive tire wear. This angle is not adjustable, damaged component(s) must be replaced to correct the thrust angle Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Description and Operation > Page 2039 Alignment: Testing and Inspection PRE-ALIGNMENT INSPECTION Before starting wheel alignment, the following inspection and necessary corrections must be completed. Refer to Suspension and Steering System Diagnosis Chart below for additional information. 1. Inspect tires for size, air pressure and tread wear. 2. Inspect front wheel bearings for wear. 3. Inspect front wheels for excessive radial or lateral runout and balance. 4. Inspect ball studs, linkage pivot points and steering gear for looseness, roughness or binding. 5. Inspect suspension components for wear and noise. 6. Road test the vehicle. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Service and Repair > Camber and Caster Adjustment Alignment: Service and Repair Camber and Caster Adjustment CAMBER AND CASTER ADJUSTMENT Camber and caster angle adjustments involve changing the position of the lower control arm (2) in conjunction with the slotted holes in the frame brackets (1). Vehicle should be at normal ride height. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Service and Repair > Camber and Caster Adjustment > Page 2042 Alignment: Service and Repair Alignment - Rack and Pinion Steering System ALIGNMENT - RACK AND PINION STEERING SYSTEM CAMBER, CASTER AND TOE ADJUSTMENT Camber and caster angle adjustments involve changing the position of the lower control arm with the slots in the frame brackets (1). CASTER Moving the front or rear position of the lower control arm in or out, will change the caster angle and camber angle significantly. To maintain the camber angle while adjusting caster, move one pivot bolt of the lower control arm in or out. Then move the other pivot bolt of the lower control arm in the opposite direction. To increase positive caster angle, move the rear position of the lower control arm inward (toward the engine). Move the front of the lower control arm outward (away from the engine) slightly until the desired camber angle is obtained. CAMBER Move both pivot bolts of the lower control arm together in or out. This will change the camber angle significantly and little effect on the caster angle. After adjustment is made tighten the lower control arm nuts to proper torque specification. TOE ADJUSTMENT The wheel toe position adjustment is the final adjustment. 1. Start the engine and turn wheels both ways before straightening the wheels. Secure the steering wheel with the front wheels in the straight-ahead position. 2. Loosen the tie rod jam nuts (1). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Service and Repair > Camber and Caster Adjustment > Page 2043 NOTE: Each front wheel should be adjusted for one-half of the total toe position specification. This will ensure the steering wheel will be centered when the wheels are positioned straight-ahead. 3. Adjust the wheel toe position by turning the inner tie rod (2) as necessary. 4. Tighten the tie rod jam nut (1) to 127 Nm (94 ft. lbs.). NOTE: Make sure the toe setting does not change during tightening. 5. Verify the specifications 6. Turn off engine. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Service and Repair > Camber and Caster Adjustment > Page 2044 Alignment: Service and Repair Toe Adjustment - Rack and Pinion Steering System TOE ADJUSTMENT - RACK AND PINION STEERING SYSTEM 1. Start the engine and turn wheels both ways before straightening the wheels. Secure the steering wheel with the front wheels in the straight-ahead position. 2. Loosen the tie rod jam nuts (1). NOTE: Each front wheel should be adjusted for one-half of the total toe position specification. This will ensure the steering wheel will be centered when the wheels are positioned straight-ahead. 3. Adjust the wheel toe position by turning the inner tie rod (2) as necessary. NOTE: Make sure the toe setting does not change during tightening. 4. Tighten the tie rod jam nut (1) to 127 Nm (94 ft. lbs.). 5. Verify the specifications. 6. Road test the vehicle. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Service and Repair > Camber and Caster Adjustment > Page 2045 Alignment: Service and Repair Curb Height Measurement (LD) CURB HEIGHT MEASUREMENT (LD) The wheel alignment is to be checked and all alignment adjustments made with the vehicle at its required curb height specification. Vehicle height is to be checked with the vehicle on a flat, level surface, preferably a vehicle alignment rack. The tires are to be inflated to the recommended pressure. All tires are to be the same size as standard equipment. Vehicle height is checked with the fuel tank full of fuel, and no passenger or luggage compartment load. Inspect the vehicle for bent or weak suspension components. Compare the parts tag on the suspect coil spring(s) to the parts book and the vehicle sales code, checking for a match. Once removed from the vehicle, compare the coil spring height to a correct new or known good coil spring. The heights should vary if the suspect spring is weak. 1. Front - On each side of the vehicle, measure the distance from the center of the rear lower control arm bolt (1) to the ground (2) Record the measurement. Next measure the distance from the spindle center (3) to the ground (4) Record the measurement. 2. Take the two measurements and subtract them to get the curb height specification. 3. Rear 4X2 LD - On each side of the vehicle, measure the distance at the axle tube (1) to the jounce bumper flange (2). 4. Rear 4X4 LD - On each side of the vehicle, measure the distance at the jounce pad welded to the axle tube (1) to the jounce bumper flange (2). 5. Compare the measurements to the specifications listed in the following Curb Height Specifications chart. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Service and Repair > Camber and Caster Adjustment > Page 2046 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Service and Repair > Camber and Caster Adjustment > Page 2047 Alignment: Service and Repair Curb Height Measurement (HD) CURB HEIGHT MEASUREMENT (HD) The wheel alignment is to be checked and all alignment adjustments made with the vehicle at its required curb height specification. Vehicle height is to be checked with the vehicle on a flat, level surface, preferably a vehicle alignment rack. The tires are to be inflated to the recommended pressure. All tires are to be the same size as standard equipment. Vehicle height is checked with the fuel tank full of fuel, and no passenger or luggage compartment load. Inspect the vehicle for bent or weak suspension components. Compare the parts tag on the suspect coil spring(s) to the parts book and the vehicle sales code, checking for a match. Once removed from the vehicle, compare the coil spring height to a correct new or known good coil spring. The heights should vary if the suspect spring is weak. 1. Front 4X2 On each side of the vehicle, measure the distance from the top of the jounce bumper flange (2) to the bottom of the frame rail (1). 2. Front 4X4 On each side of the vehicle, measure the distance from the top of the axle (2) to the bottom of the jounce bumper flange (1). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Service and Repair > Camber and Caster Adjustment > Page 2048 3. Rear ALL - On each side of the vehicle, measure the distance at the top of the axle tube (2) to the bottom of the frame rail (1). 4. Compare the measurements to the specifications listed in the following Curb Height Specifications chart. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Fuel Pressure > System Information > Specifications Fuel Pressure: Specifications FUEL SYSTEM PRESSURE 58 psi +/- 2 psi Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Fuel Pressure > System Information > Specifications > Page 2053 Fuel Pressure: Testing and Inspection *FUEL PRESSURE LEAK DOWN For a complete wiring diagram Refer to Diagrams/Electrical. Diagnostic Test 1. FUEL PUMP MODULE NOTE: Before continuing visually and physically inspect the fuel delivery system for external leaks or damage. Repair/replace as necessary. WARNING: The fuel system is under a constant pressure (even with the engine off). Before testing or servicing any fuel system hose, fitting or line, the fuel system pressure must be released. Failure to follow these instructions can result in personal injury or death. Turn the ignition off. Install special tool #6539 (5/16") or #6631 (3/8") fuel line adapter. Install the fuel pressure gauge. Start the engine and allow the fuel system to reach maximum pressure. Turn the ignition off. NOTE: Fuel specification is 407 KPa +/- 34 KPa (59 psi +/- 5 psi). Using special tool #C4390, Hose Clamp Pliers, pinch the rubber fuel line between the fuel pressure gauge and the engine. Monitor the fuel pressure gauge for a minimum of 5 minutes. NOTE: The pressure should not fall below 241 KPa (35 psi) Does the fuel pressure drop? Yes - Replace Fuel Pump Module. - Perform the POWERTRAIN VERIFICATION TEST. See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code Tests and Associated Procedures/Verification Tests/Powertrain Verification Test No - Go To 2 2. FUEL INJECTOR(S) WARNING: The fuel system is under a constant pressure (even with the engine off). Before testing or servicing any fuel system hose, fitting or line, the fuel system pressure must be released. Failure to follow these instructions can result in personal injury or death. Remove special tool #C4390. Start the engine and allow the fuel system to reach maximum pressure. Turn the ignition off. NOTE: Fuel specification is 407 KPa +/- 34 KPa (59 psi +/- 5 psi). Move special tool #C4390, Hose Clamp Pliers, from between the fuel pressure gauge and the engine to between the fuel pressure gauge and fuel pump module. Monitor the fuel pressure gauge for a minimum of 5 minutes. NOTE: The pressure should not fall below 241 KPa (35 psi) Does the fuel pressure drop? Yes - Replace the leaking fuel injectors. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Fuel Pressure > System Information > Specifications > Page 2054 - Perform the POWERTRAIN VERIFICATION TEST. See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code Tests and Associated Procedures/Verification Tests/Powertrain Verification Test No - Test Complete. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Idle Speed > System Information > Specifications Idle Speed: Specifications Idle Speed Information Not Supplied by the Manufacturer Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Air Cleaner Housing > Air Filter Element > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Air Filter Element: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL 1. Loosen clamp (1) and disconnect air duct (2) at air cleaner cover (3). 2. Pry over 4 spring clips (5) from housing cover (3). 3. Release housing cover (3) from locating tabs on housing and remove cover. 4. Remove air cleaner element (filter) from housing. 5. Clean inside of housing before replacing element. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Air Cleaner Housing > Air Filter Element > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 2063 Air Filter Element: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION 1. Install filter element into housing. 2. Position housing cover (3) into housing locating tabs. 3. Pry up 4 spring clips (5) and lock cover to housing. 4. Install air duct (2) to air cleaner cover (3) and tighten hose clamp (1) to 3 Nm (30 in. lbs.). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Fuel Filter > Fuel Pressure Release > System Information > Service and Repair Fuel Pressure Release: Service and Repair STANDARD PROCEDURE - FUEL SYSTEM PRESSURE RELEASE Use following procedure if the fuel injector rail is, or is not equipped with a fuel pressure test port. A separate fuel pump relay is no longer used. A circuit within the TIPM (Totally Integrated Power Module) is used to control the electric fuel pump located within the fuel pump module. The TIPM (1) is located in the engine compartment in front of the battery. 1. Remove fuel fill cap. 2. On bottom of vehicle, disconnect fuel pump module electrical connector. This can be accomplished at either of the two connectors (1) or (2). 3. Start and run engine until it stalls. 4. Attempt restarting engine until it will no longer run. 5. Turn ignition key to OFF position. 6. Place a rag or towel below fuel line quick-connect fitting at fuel rail. 7. Disconnect quick-connect fitting at fuel rail. 8. Reconnect fuel pump module electrical connector on bottom of vehicle. 9. One or more Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTC's) may have been stored in PCM memory due to disconnecting fuel pump module circuit. A diagnostic scan tool must be used to erase a DTC. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Firing Order > Component Information > Specifications > Electrical Specifications Firing Order: Electrical Specifications ENGINE FIRING ORDER - 4.7L V-8 4.7L ENGINE DESCRIPTION Fig. 1 The 4.7 liter (287 CID) eight-cylinder engine is an 90° single overhead camshaft engine. The cast iron cylinder block is made up of two different components; the first component is the cylinder bore and upper block, the second component is the bedplate that comprises the lower portion of the cylinder block and houses the lower half of the crankshaft main bearings. The cylinders are numbered from front to rear with the left bank being numbered 1,3,5 and 7, and the right bank being numbered 2,4,6 and 8. The firing order is 1-8-4-3-6-5-7-2. The engine serial number is located at the Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Firing Order > Component Information > Specifications > Electrical Specifications > Page 2072 right front side of the engine block (Fig. 1). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Firing Order > Component Information > Specifications > Electrical Specifications > Page 2073 Firing Order: Mechanical Specifications ENGINE FIRING ORDER - 4.7L V-8 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Ignition Timing > System Information > Specifications Ignition Timing: Specifications IGNITION TIMING Ignition timing is not adjustable on any engine. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Spark Plug > Component Information > Specifications Spark Plug: Specifications SPARK PLUGS Torque Not Supplied by Manufacturer Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Spark Plug > Component Information > Service and Repair > Spark Plug - Removal Spark Plug: Service and Repair Spark Plug - Removal REMOVAL - 4.7L V-8 CAUTION: This engine uses TWO DIFFERENT types of spark plugs. A total of 16 plugs is used. The plugs are mounted in two rows (banks). The upper row (5) is used on the intake valve side of the cylinder head. The lower row (6) is used on the exhaust valve side of the cylinder head. The upper row (5) uses Bosch Nickel Yttrium plugs #05149050AB. The lower row (6) uses Bosch Iridium plugs #05149888AA. DO NOT INTERCHANGE THESE PLUGS. CAUTION: Do not attempt to clean any of the spark plugs. Replace only. 1. Remove necessary air filter tubing and air intake components at top of engine and at throttle body. 2. To remove the upper row of plugs (5), each individual ignition coil (2) must first be removed. Prior to removing ignition coil, spray compressed air around coil base at cylinder head. 3. Prior to removing spark plug, spray compressed air into cylinder head opening. This will help prevent foreign material from entering combustion chamber. CAUTION: Due to tight clearances between UPPER row of plugs (5) and cylinder head, a conventional deep, thick-wall spark plug socket will not fit. Use a deep, THIN-WALL 5/8" spark plug socket for plug removal and installation. 4. Inspect spark plug condition. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Spark Plug > Component Information > Service and Repair > Spark Plug - Removal > Page 2082 Spark Plug: Service and Repair Spark Plug - Installation INSTALLATION - 4.7L V-8 CAUTION: This engine uses TWO DIFFERENT types of spark plugs. A total of 16 plugs is used. The plugs are mounted in two rows (banks). The upper row (5) is used on the intake valve side of the cylinder head. The lower row (6) is used on the exhaust valve side of the cylinder head. The upper row (5) uses Bosch Nickel Yttrium plugs #05149050AB. The lower row (6) uses Bosch Iridium plugs #05149888AA. DO NOT INTERCHANGE THESE PLUGS. CAUTION: Never use a motorized wire wheel brush to clean spark plugs. Metallic deposits will remain on spark plug insulator and will cause plug misfire. CAUTION: Do not attempt to clean any of the spark plugs. Replace only. 1. To aid in coil installation, apply silicone based grease such as Mopar(R) Dielectric Grease # J8126688 into spark plug end of rubber boots (4) and (7). Also apply this grease to the tops of spark plugs (5) and (6). 2. Check and adjust spark plug gap with a gap gauging tool (1). Two different gaps are used. 3. Start the spark plug into the cylinder head by hand to avoid cross threading. Special care should be taken when installing spark plugs into the cylinder head spark plug wells. Be sure the plugs do not drop into the plug wells as electrodes can be damaged. CAUTION: Due to tight clearances between upper row of plugs (5) and cylinder head, a conventional deep, thick-wall spark plug socket will not fit. Use a deep, THIN-WALL 5/8" spark plug socket for plug removal and installation. Always tighten spark plugs to the specified torque. Certain engines use torque sensitive spark plugs. It is a good practice to always tighten spark plugs to Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Spark Plug > Component Information > Service and Repair > Spark Plug - Removal > Page 2083 a specific torque. Over tightening can cause distortion resulting in a change in the spark plug gap, or a cracked porcelain insulator. 4. Install ignition coil(s). 5. Install necessary air filter tubing and air intake components to top of engine and to throttle body. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Compression Check > System Information > Specifications Compression Check: Specifications Compression Specifications Compression Ratio .............................................................................................................................. ......................................................................... 9.0 : 1 Compression Pressure ........................................................................................................................ ............................................................... Not available Max Variation Between Cylinders ........................................................................................................ .......................................................................... 25% Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Drive Belt > Component Information > Diagrams Drive Belt: Diagrams Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Drive Belt > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 2090 Drive Belt: Description and Operation DESCRIPTION The accessory drive belt is a serpentine type belt. Satisfactory performance of these belts depends on belt condition and proper belt tension. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Drive Belt > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 2091 Drive Belt: Testing and Inspection DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING VISUAL DIAGNOSIS NOTE: Diesel Engine - If a belt is broken or frayed, inspect engine speed sensor ( located near the crankshaft damper) for damage. When diagnosing serpentine accessory drive belts, small cracks that run across the ribbed surface of the belt from rib to rib , are considered normal. These are not a reason to replace the belt. However, cracks running along a rib (not across) are not normal. Any belt with cracks running along a rib must be replaced. Also replace the belt if it has excessive wear, frayed cords or severe glazing. Refer to ACCESSORY DRIVE BELT DIAGNOSIS CHART for further belt diagnosis. NOISE DIAGNOSIS Noises generated by the accessory drive belt are most noticeable at idle. Before replacing a belt to resolve a noise condition, inspect all of the accessory drive pulleys for alignment, glazing, or excessive end play. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Drive Belt > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 2092 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Drive Belt > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 2093 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Drive Belt > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures Drive Belt: Procedures CLEANING Clean all foreign debris from belt pulley grooves. The belt pulleys must be free of oil, grease, and coolants before installing the drive belt. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Drive Belt > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 2096 Drive Belt: Removal and Replacement Accessory Drive Belt - Removal 3.7L/4.7L ENGINE BELT ROUTING 3.7L/4.7L CAUTION: Do not let tensioner arm snap back to the free arm position, sever damage may occur to the tensioner. 1. Disconnect negative battery cable from battery. 2. Rotate belt tensioner until it contacts it's stop. Remove belt, then slowly rotate the tensioner (6) into the free arm position. Accessory Drive Belt - Installation 3.7L/4.7L ENGINE Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Drive Belt > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 2097 BELT ROUTING 3.7L/4.7L 1. Check condition of all pulleys. CAUTION: When installing the serpentine accessory drive belt, the belt MUST be routed correctly. If not, the engine may overheat due to the water pump rotating in the wrong direction. NOTE: When installing accessory drive belt onto pulleys, make sure that belt is properly routed and all V-grooves make proper contact with pulleys. 2. Install new belt. Route the belt around all pulleys except the idler pulley. Rotate the tensioner arm until it contacts it's stop position. Route the belt around the idler and slowly let the tensioner rotate into the belt. Make sure the belt is seated onto all pulleys. 3. With the drive belt installed, inspect the belt wear indicator. On 4.7L Engines only, the gap between the tang and the housing stop (measurement A) must not exceed 24 mm (.94 inches). If the measurement exceeds this specification replace the serpentine accessory drive belt. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Filters > Air Cleaner Housing > Air Filter Element > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Air Filter Element: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL 1. Loosen clamp (1) and disconnect air duct (2) at air cleaner cover (3). 2. Pry over 4 spring clips (5) from housing cover (3). 3. Release housing cover (3) from locating tabs on housing and remove cover. 4. Remove air cleaner element (filter) from housing. 5. Clean inside of housing before replacing element. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Filters > Air Cleaner Housing > Air Filter Element > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 2104 Air Filter Element: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION 1. Install filter element into housing. 2. Position housing cover (3) into housing locating tabs. 3. Pry up 4 spring clips (5) and lock cover to housing. 4. Install air duct (2) to air cleaner cover (3) and tighten hose clamp (1) to 3 Nm (30 in. lbs.). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Filters > Cabin Air Filter > Component Information > Service and Repair Cabin Air Filter: Service and Repair Chrysler provides no information on a Cabin Air Filter for this vehicle. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Filters > Fluid Filter - A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 42RLE Automatic Transmission Fluid Filter - A/T: Service and Repair 42RLE Automatic Transmission FLUID/FILTER SERVICE NOTE: Only fluids of the type labeled Mopar(R) ATF+4, Automatic Transmission Fluid, should be used in the transmission sump. A filter change should be made at the time of the transmission oil change. The magnet (on the inside of the oil pan) should also be cleaned with a clean, dry cloth. NOTE: If the transmission is disassembled for any reason, the fluid and filter should be changed. 1. Raise vehicle on a hoist. Place a drain container with a large opening, under transmission oil pan. NOTE: One of the oil pan bolts (5) has a sealing patch applied from the factory. Separate this bolt for reuse. 2. Loosen pan bolts and tap the pan at one corner to break it loose allowing fluid to drain, then remove the oil pan. 3. Install a new filter and o-ring on bottom of the valve body and tighten retaining screws to 5 Nm (45 in. lbs.). NOTE: Before installing the oil pan bolt (5) in the bolt hole located between the torque converter clutch on and U/D clutch pressure tap circuits, it will be necessary to replenish the sealing patch on the bolt using Mopar(R) Lock & Seal Adhesive. 4. Clean the oil pan and magnet. Reinstall pan using new Mopar(R) Silicone Adhesive sealant. Tighten oil pan bolts to 20 Nm (14.5 ft. lbs.). 5. Pour four quarts of Mopar(R) ATF+4, Automatic Transmission Fluid, through the dipstick opening. 6. Start engine and allow to idle for at least one minute. Then, with parking and service brakes applied, move selector lever momentarily to each position, ending in the park or neutral position. 7. Check the transmission fluid level and add an appropriate amount to bring the transmission fluid level to 3mm (1/8 in.) below the lowest mark on the dipstick. 8. Recheck the fluid level after the transmission has reached normal operating temperature, 82° C (180°F). 9. To prevent dirt from entering transmission, make certain that dipstick is fully seated into the dipstick opening. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Filters > Fluid Filter - A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 2112 Fluid Filter - A/T: Service and Repair 545RFE Automatic Transmission FLUID AND FILTER REPLACEMENT For proper service intervals See: . REMOVAL 1. Hoist and support vehicle on safety stands. 2. Place a large diameter shallow drain pan beneath the transmission pan. 3. Remove bolts holding front and sides of pan to transmission. 4. Loosen bolts holding rear of pan to transmission. 5. Slowly separate front of pan away from transmission allowing the fluid to drain into drain pan. 6. Hold up pan and remove remaining bolts holding pan to transmission. 7. While holding pan level, lower pan away from transmission. 8. Pour remaining fluid in pan into drain pan. Transmission Filters - 4X4 Shown 9. Remove the screw holding the primary oil filter (1) to valve body. 10. Separate filter from valve body and oil pump and pour fluid in filter into drain pan. 11. Inspect the oil filter seal in the bottom of the oil pump. If the seal is not installed completely in the oil pump, or is otherwise damaged, then remove and discard the oil filter seal from the bottom of the oil pump. If the seal is installed correctly and is in good condition, it can be reused. 12. If replacing the cooler return filter (2), use Oil Filter Wrench 8321 to remove the filter from the transmission. 13. Dispose of used trans fluid and filter(s) properly. INSPECTION Inspect bottom of pan and magnet for excessive amounts of metal. A light coating of clutch material on the bottom of the pan does not indicate a problem unless accompanied by a slipping condition or shift lag. If fluid and pan are contaminated with excessive amounts of debris, refer to the appropriate diagnostic procedure. CLEANING 1. Using a suitable solvent, clean pan and magnet. 2. Using a suitable gasket scraper, clean original sealing material from surface of transmission case and the transmission pan. INSTALLATION Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Filters > Fluid Filter - A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 2113 Transmission Filters - 4X4 Shown CAUTION: The primary oil filter seal MUST be fully installed flush against the oil pump body. DO NOT install the seal onto the filter neck and attempt to install the filter and seal as an assembly. Damage to the transmission will result. 1. If necessary, install a new primary oil filter seal in the oil pump inlet bore. Seat the seal in the bore with Installer 6960-A or another suitable tool (appropriately sized drift or socket, the butt end of a hammer etc.). 2. Place replacement filter in position on valve body and into the oil pump. 3. Install screw to hold the primary oil filter (1) to valve body. Tighten screw to 4.5 Nm (40 in. lbs.) torque. 4. Install new cooler return filter (2) onto the transmission, if necessary. Torque the filter to 9.5 Nm (84 in.lbs.). 5. Place bead of Mopar(R) RTV sealant onto the transmission case sealing surface. 6. Place pan in position on transmission. 7. Install bolts to hold pan to transmission. Tighten bolts to 12 Nm (105 in. lbs.) torque. 8. Lower vehicle and fill transmission with MOPAR(R) ATF +4. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Filters > Fluid Filter - A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 2114 Fluid Filter - A/T: Service and Repair 68RFE Automatic Transmission FLUID AND FILTER REPLACEMENT For proper service intervals See: . REMOVAL 1. Hoist and support vehicle on safety stands. 2. Place a large diameter shallow drain pan beneath the transmission pan. 3. Remove bolts holding front and sides of pan to transmission. 4. Loosen bolts holding rear of pan to transmission. 5. Slowly separate front of pan away from transmission allowing the fluid to drain into drain pan. 6. Hold up pan and remove remaining bolts holding pan to transmission. 7. While holding pan level, lower pan away from transmission. 8. Pour remaining fluid in pan into drain pan. Transmission Filters - 4X4 Shown 9. Remove the screw holding the primary oil filter (1) to valve body. 10. Separate filter from valve body and oil pump and pour fluid in filter into drain pan. 11. Inspect the oil filter seal in the bottom of the oil pump. If the seal is not installed completely in the oil pump, or is otherwise damaged, then remove and discard the oil filter seal from the bottom of the oil pump. If the seal is installed correctly and is in good condition, it can be reused. 12. If replacing the cooler return filter (2), use Oil Filter Wrench 8321 to remove the filter from the transmission. 13. Dispose of used trans fluid and filter(s) properly. INSPECTION Inspect bottom of pan and magnet for excessive amounts of metal. A light coating of clutch material on the bottom of the pan does not indicate a problem unless accompanied by a slipping condition or shift lag. If fluid and pan are contaminated with excessive amounts of debris, refer to the appropriate diagnostic procedure. CLEANING 1. Using a suitable solvent, clean pan and magnet. 2. Using a suitable gasket scraper, clean original sealing material from surface of transmission case and the transmission pan. INSTALLATION Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Filters > Fluid Filter - A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 2115 Transmission Filters - 4X4 Shown CAUTION: The primary oil filter seal MUST be fully installed flush against the oil pump body. DO NOT install the seal onto the filter neck and attempt to install the filter and seal as an assembly. Damage to the transmission will result. 1. If necessary, install a new primary oil filter seal in the oil pump inlet bore. Seat the seal in the bore with Installer 6960-A or another suitable tool (appropriately sized drift or socket, the butt end of a hammer etc.). 2. Place replacement filter in position on valve body and into the oil pump. 3. Install screw to hold the primary oil filter (1) to valve body. Tighten screw to 4.5 Nm (40 in. lbs.) torque. 4. Install new cooler return filter (2) onto the transmission, if necessary. Torque the filter to 9.5 Nm (84 in.lbs.). 5. Place bead of Mopar(R) RTV sealant onto the transmission case sealing surface. 6. Place pan in position on transmission. 7. Install bolts to hold pan to transmission. Tighten bolts to 12 Nm (105 in. lbs.) torque. 8. Lower vehicle and fill transmission with MOPAR(R) ATF +4. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Filters > Fluid Filter - A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 2116 Fluid Filter - A/T: Service and Repair 48RE Automatic Transmission FLUID AND FILTER REPLACEMENT For proper service intervals See: . The service fluid fill after a filter change is approximately 3.8 liters (4.0 quarts). REMOVAL 1. Hoist and support vehicle on safety stands. 2. Place a large diameter shallow drain pan beneath the transmission pan (3). 3. Remove bolts holding front and sides of pan to transmission (1). 4. Loosen bolts holding rear of pan to transmission. 5. Slowly separate front of pan and reusable gasket (2) away from transmission allowing the fluid to drain into drain pan. 6. Hold up pan and remove remaining bolt holding pan to transmission. 7. While holding pan level, lower pan and gasket away from transmission. 8. Pour remaining fluid in pan into drain pan. 9. Remove screws holding filter (2) to valve body. 10. Separate filter from valve body and pour fluid in filter into drain pan. 11. Dispose of used trans fluid and filter properly. INSTALLATION Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Filters > Fluid Filter - A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 2117 1. Position a new transmission oil filter (2) onto the valve body. 2. Install the screws to hold the filter to the valve body. Tighten the screws to 4 Nm (35 in.lbs.). 3. Clean the gasket surfaces of the transmission oil pan (3) and transmission pan rail. NOTE: The transmission pan oil gasket (2) is reusable. Inspect the sealing surfaces of the gasket. If the sealing ribs on both surfaces appear to be in good condition, clean the gasket of any foreign material and reinstall. 4. Position the oil pan gasket (2) onto the oil pan (3). 5. Position the oil pan and gasket onto the transmission and install several bolts to hold the pan and gasket to the transmission. 6. Install the remainder of the oil pan bolts. Tighten the bolts to 13.6 Nm (125 in.lbs.). 7. Lower vehicle and fill transmission. See: Transmission and Drivetrain/Automatic Transmission/Transaxle/Service and Repair/Procedures/48RE Automatic Transmission/Transmission Fill - 48RE Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Filters > Fluid Filter - A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 2118 Fluid Filter - A/T: Service and Repair AS68RC Automatic Transmission FLUID AND FILTER REPLACEMENT REMOVAL DRAIN PLUG 1. Raise vehicle. 2. Place a large diameter drain pan beneath the transmission pan. 3. Remove the drain plug bolt (1) and allow the oil to drain from the transmission pan. 4. Remove the drain pan bolts from the transmission case. 5. Remove the drain pan. TRANSMISSION OIL FILTER 6. Remove the transmission oil filter bolts (3). 7. Remove the transmission oil filter and o-ring seal from the valve body (1). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Filters > Fluid Filter - A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 2119 INSPECTION OIL PAN MAGNETS Inspect bottom of pan, pick-up magnets (1) and magnetic drain plug (2) and fluid filter for excessive amounts of metal. A light coating of clutch material on the bottom of the pan does not indicate a problem unless accompanied by a slipping condition or shift lag. If fluid and pan are contaminated with excessive amounts of debris, refer to the appropriate diagnostic procedure. CLEANING 1. Using a suitable solvent, clean pan and magnet. 2. Using a suitable gasket scraper, clean original sealing material from surface of transmission case and the transmission pan. INSTALLATION TRANSMISSION OIL FILTER Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Filters > Fluid Filter - A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 2120 1. Lubricate the transmission oil filter seal with MOPAR(R) AS68RC ATF. 2. Install the new transmission oil filter (2) in position on valve body (1) and into the oil pump. 3. Install the transmission oil filter bolts (3). 4. Tighten bolts to 10 Nm ( 88 in.lbs. ) torque. 5. Install a new transmission oil pan gasket. 6. Place pan in position on transmission. 7. Install bolts to hold pan to transmission. Tighten bolts to 7 Nm (62 in. lbs.) torque. DRAIN PLUG 8. Install transmission drain plug bolt (1). 9. Tighten oil pan drain plug to 27 Nm ( 20 ft.lbs) torque. 10. Lower vehicle and fill transmission with MOPAR(R) AS68RC ATF. See: Transmission and Drivetrain/Automatic Transmission/Transaxle/Service and Repair/Procedures/AS68RC Automatic Transmission/Transmission Fill - AS68RC Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Filters > Fuel Filter > Fuel Pressure Release > System Information > Service and Repair Fuel Pressure Release: Service and Repair STANDARD PROCEDURE - FUEL SYSTEM PRESSURE RELEASE Use following procedure if the fuel injector rail is, or is not equipped with a fuel pressure test port. A separate fuel pump relay is no longer used. A circuit within the TIPM (Totally Integrated Power Module) is used to control the electric fuel pump located within the fuel pump module. The TIPM (1) is located in the engine compartment in front of the battery. 1. Remove fuel fill cap. 2. On bottom of vehicle, disconnect fuel pump module electrical connector. This can be accomplished at either of the two connectors (1) or (2). 3. Start and run engine until it stalls. 4. Attempt restarting engine until it will no longer run. 5. Turn ignition key to OFF position. 6. Place a rag or towel below fuel line quick-connect fitting at fuel rail. 7. Disconnect quick-connect fitting at fuel rail. 8. Reconnect fuel pump module electrical connector on bottom of vehicle. 9. One or more Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTC's) may have been stored in PCM memory due to disconnecting fuel pump module circuit. A diagnostic scan tool must be used to erase a DTC. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Filters > Fuel Pump Pickup Filter > Component Information > Locations Fuel Pump Pickup Filter: Locations DESCRIPTION The fuel pump module assembly is located on the top of the fuel tank. The complete assembly contains the following components: - A combination fuel filter/fuel pressure regulator - A separate fuel pick-up, or inlet filter - An electric fuel pump - A lockring to retain pump module to tank - A soft gasket between tank flange and module - A fuel gauge sending unit (fuel level sensor) - Fuel line connection The fuel gauge sending unit may be serviced separately. If the electrical fuel pump, primary inlet filter, fuel filter or fuel pressure regulator require service, the fuel pump module must be replaced. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Filters > Oil Filter, Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Oil Filter: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL All engines are equipped with a high quality full-flow, disposable type oil filter. DaimlerChrysler Corporation recommends a Mopar(R) or equivalent oil filter be used. 1. Position a drain pan under the oil filter. 2. Using a suitable oil filter wrench loosen filter. 3. Rotate the oil filter counterclockwise to remove it from the cylinder block oil filter boss. 4. When filter separates from cylinder block oil filter boss, tip gasket end upward to minimize oil spill. Remove filter from vehicle. NOTE: Make sure filter gasket was removed with filter. 5. With a wiping cloth, clean the gasket sealing surface of oil and grime. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Filters > Oil Filter, Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 2132 Oil Filter: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION 1. Lightly lubricate oil filter gasket (2) with engine oil. 2. Thread filter (3) onto adapter nipple. When gasket makes contact with sealing surface, hand tighten filter one full turn, do not over tighten. 3. Add oil, verify crankcase oil level and start engine. Inspect for oil leaks. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Hose/Line HVAC > Component Information > Description and Operation > Discharge Line Hose/Line HVAC: Description and Operation Discharge Line DESCRIPTION The A/C discharge line is the refrigerant line that goes from the A/C compressor to the A/C condenser and has an integral fitting for the A/C pressure transducer See: Heating and Air Conditioning/Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch/Description and Operation/Description . The A/C discharge line is made from light-weight aluminum tubing with braze-less and crimp type fittings and nylon tubes with rubber barrier hose See: Heating and Air Conditioning/Description and Operation/Plumbing/Description . The A/C discharge line for the 5.9L and 6.7L diesel engines is serviced as an assembly with the A/C suction line. NOTE: Replacement of the refrigerant line O-ring seals and gaskets is required anytime a refrigerant line is opened. Failure to replace the rubber O-ring seals and metal gaskets could result in a refrigerant system leak. The A/C discharge line has no serviceable parts except the O-ring seals and gaskets. The O-ring seals used on the connections are made from a special type of rubber not affected by R-134a refrigerant. The O-ring seals and gaskets must be replaced whenever the A/C discharge line is removed. The A/C discharge line cannot be repaired and must be replaced if found to be leaking or damaged. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Hose/Line HVAC > Component Information > Description and Operation > Discharge Line > Page 2138 Hose/Line HVAC: Description and Operation Liquid Line DESCRIPTION The A/C liquid line is the refrigerant line that carries refrigerant from the A/C condenser to the A/C evaporator. The A/C liquid line consists of two separate lines that connect to each other using a spring-lock type refrigerant line coupler See: Heating and Air Conditioning/Coupler HVAC/Description and Operation/Description . The A/C liquid line is made from light-weight aluminum tubing with braze-less and crimp type fittings and nylon tubes with rubber barrier hose. NOTE: A/C orifice tube size is different between gasoline and diesel engines. Be sure to use the correct A/C liquid line when replacement of the A/C orifice tube is required. The front section of the A/C liquid line includes the high-side service port and the rear section of the A/C liquid line includes the A/C fixed orifice tube. NOTE: Replacement of the refrigerant line O-ring seals and gaskets is required anytime a refrigerant line is opened. Failure to replace the rubber O-ring seals and metal gaskets could result in a refrigerant system leak. The A/C liquid line has no serviceable parts except for the O-ring seals and gaskets, high-side service port valve, cap and secondary retaining clip. The O-ring seals used on the connections are made from a special type of rubber not affected by R-134a refrigerant. The O-ring seals and gaskets must be replaced whenever the A/C liquid line is removed. The A/C liquid line cannot be repaired and must be replaced if found to be leaking or damaged, or if the fixed orifice tube is inoperative. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Hose/Line HVAC > Component Information > Description and Operation > Discharge Line > Page 2139 Hose/Line HVAC: Description and Operation Suction Line DESCRIPTION The A/C suction line is the refrigerant line that goes from the A/C evaporator to the A/C compressor. The A/C suction line is made from light-weight aluminum tubing with braze-less and crimp type fittings and nylon tubes with rubber barrier hose See: Heating and Air Conditioning/Description and Operation/Plumbing/Description . The A/C suction line for the 5.9L and 6.7L diesel engines is serviced as an assembly with the A/C discharge line. NOTE: Replacement of the refrigerant line O-ring seals and gaskets is required anytime a refrigerant line is opened. Failure to replace the rubber O-ring seals and metal gaskets could result in a refrigerant system leak. The A/C suction line has no serviceable parts except for the O-ring seals and the secondary retaining clip. The O-ring seals used on the connections are made from a special type of rubber not affected by R-134a refrigerant. The O-ring seals must be replaced whenever the A/C suction line is removed. The A/C suction line cannot be repaired and must be replaced if found to be leaking or damaged. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Hose/Line HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > A/C Line - Removal Hose/Line HVAC: Service and Repair A/C Line - Removal Discharge Line 3.7L/4.7L ENGINES WARNING: Refer to the applicable warnings and cautions for this system before performing the following operation See: Heating and Air Conditioning/Service Precautions/Warning and See: Heating and Air Conditioning/Service Precautions/Caution. Failure to follow the warnings and cautions could result in possible personal injury or death. NOTE: 3.7L engine shown, 4.7L engine similar. 1. Disconnect and isolate the negative battery cable. 2. Recover the refrigerant from the refrigerant system See: Heating and Air Conditioning/Service and Repair/Refrigerant System Recovery . 3. Disconnect the wire harness connector (8) from the A/C pressure transducer (7). 4. Remove the nut (1) that secures the A/C discharge line (9) to the condenser inlet port (3) located near the top of the A/C condenser (2). 5. Disconnect the A/C discharge line from the A/C condenser and remove and discard the O-ring seal and gasket. 6. Install plugs in, or tape over the discharge line fitting and condenser port. 7. Remove the nut (4) that secures the A/C discharge line to the A/C compressor (6). 8. Disconnect the A/C discharge line from the A/C compressor and remove and discard the O-ring seal and gasket. 9. Install plugs in, or tape over the opened refrigerant line fitting and the compressor port. 10. Remove the A/C discharge line from the engine compartment. 11. If necessary, remove the A/C pressure transducer from the A/C discharge line See: Heating and Air Conditioning/Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch/Service and Repair/Removal . Liquid Line 3.7L/4.7L/5.7L ENGINES WARNING: Refer to the applicable warnings and cautions for this system before performing the following operation See: Heating and Air Conditioning/Service Precautions/Warning and See: Heating and Air Conditioning/Service Precautions/Caution. Failure to follow the warnings and cautions could result in possible personal injury or death. NOTE: The A/C liquid line is serviced in two sections. FRONT SECTION Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Hose/Line HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > A/C Line - Removal > Page 2142 1. Disconnect and isolate the negative battery cable. 2. Recover the refrigerant from the refrigerant system See: Heating and Air Conditioning/Service and Repair/Refrigerant System Recovery . 3. Remove the air filter housing and mounting bracket. 4. Remove the plastic cover from the condenser outlet stud. 5. Remove the nut (8) that secures the front section of the A/C liquid line (10) to the A/C condenser (7). 6. Disconnect the A/C liquid line from the A/C condenser and remove and discard the O-ring and gasket. 7. Disengage the A/C liquid line from the body retaining clips (1 and 9). 8. Remove the secondary retaining clip (2) from the spring-lock coupler that secures the front section of the A/C liquid line to the rear section of the liquid line (4). 9. Using the proper A/C line disconnect tool, disconnect the front section of the A/C liquid line from the rear section of the liquid line and remove and discard the O-ring seals See: Heating and Air Conditioning/Coupler HVAC/Service and Repair/Removal . 10. Install plugs in, or tape over the opened ends of the A/C liquid lines and the condenser port. 11. Remove the front section of the A/C liquid line from the engine compartment. REAR SECTION 12. Disconnect and isolate the negative battery cable. 13. Recover the refrigerant from the refrigerant system See: Heating and Air Conditioning/Service and Repair/Refrigerant System Recovery . 14. Remove the air filter housing and mounting bracket. 15. Disengage the rear section of the A/C liquid line (4) from the body retaining clip (3). 16. Remove the secondary retaining clip (2) from the spring-lock coupler that secures the front section of the A/C liquid line (10) to the rear section of the liquid line. 17. Using the proper A/C line disconnect tool (Special Tool Kit 7193 or equivalent), disconnect the front section of the A/C liquid line from the rear section of the liquid line and remove and discard the O-ring seals See: Heating and Air Conditioning/Coupler HVAC/Service and Repair/Removal . 18. Remove the secondary retaining clip (5) from the spring-lock coupler that secures the rear section of the A/C liquid line to the evaporator tube (6). 19. Using the proper A/C line disconnect tool (Special Tool Kit 7193 or equivalent), disconnect the A/C liquid line from the evaporator tube and Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Hose/Line HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > A/C Line - Removal > Page 2143 remove and discard the O-ring seals See: Heating and Air Conditioning/Coupler HVAC/Service and Repair/Removal . 20. Install plugs in, or tape over the opened ends of the A/C liquid lines and the evaporator tube. 21. Remove the rear section of the A/C liquid line from the engine compartment. Suction Line 3.7L/4.7L ENGINES WARNING: Refer to the applicable warnings and cautions for this system before performing the following operation See: Heating and Air Conditioning/Service Precautions/Warning and See: Heating and Air Conditioning/Service Precautions/Caution. Failure to follow the warnings and cautions could result in possible personal injury or death. 1. Disconnect and isolate the negative battery cable. 2. Recover the refrigerant from the refrigerant system See: Heating and Air Conditioning/Service and Repair/Refrigerant System Recovery . 3. Remove the air filter housing cover. 4. Remove the nut (4) that secures the A/C suction line (5) to the A/C compressor (6). 5. Disconnect the A/C suction line from the A/C compressor and remove and discard the O-ring seal and gasket. 6. Install plugs in, or tape over the opened refrigerant line fitting and the compressor port. 7. Remove the secondary retaining clip (7) from the spring-lock coupler (1) that secures the A/C suction line (6) to the accumulator (5). 8. Using the proper A/C line disconnect tool (Special Tool Kit 7193 or equivalent), disconnect the A/C suction line from the A/C accumulator See: Heating and Air Conditioning/Coupler HVAC/Service and Repair/Removal . 9. Remove the O-ring seals from the accumulator tube fitting and discard the seals. 10. Install plugs in, or tape over the opened suction line fitting and the accumulator tube. 11. Remove the A/C suction line from the engine compartment. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Hose/Line HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > A/C Line - Removal > Page 2144 Hose/Line HVAC: Service and Repair A/C Line - Installation Discharge Line 3.7L/4.7L ENGINES CAUTION: Be certain to adjust the refrigerant oil level when servicing the A/C refrigerant system See: Heating and Air Conditioning/Service and Repair/Refrigerant Oil Level. Failure to properly adjust the refrigerant oil level will prevent the A/C system from operating as designed and can cause serious A/C compressor damage. NOTE: When replacing multiple A/C system components, refer to the Refrigerant Oil Capacities chart to determine how much oil should be added to the refrigerant system See: Heating and Air Conditioning/Service and Repair/Refrigerant Oil Level. NOTE: Replacement of the refrigerant line O-ring seals and gaskets is required anytime a refrigerant line is opened. Failure to replace the rubber O-ring seals and metal gaskets could result in a refrigerant system leak. NOTE: 3.7L engine shown, 4.7L engine similar. 1. If removed, install the A/C pressure transducer (7) onto the A/C discharge line (9) See: Heating and Air Conditioning/Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch/Service and Repair/Installation . 2. Position the A/C discharge line into the engine compartment. 3. Remove the tape or plugs from the opened discharge line fitting and the condenser port. 4. Lubricate a new O-ring seal with clean refrigerant oil and install it and a new gasket onto the discharge line fitting. Use only the specified O-ring seal as it is made of a special material for the R-134a system. Use only refrigerant oil of the type recommended for the A/C compressor in the vehicle. 5. Install the A/C discharge line onto the A/C condenser (3). 6. Install the nut (1) that secures the A/C discharge line to the A/C condenser. Tighten the nut to 23 Nm (17 ft. lbs.). 7. Remove the tape or plugs from the opened fitting on the A/C discharge line and the compressor port. 8. Lubricate a new O-ring seal with clean refrigerant oil and install it and a new gasket onto the discharge line fitting. Use only the specified seal as it is made of a special material for the R-134a system. Use only refrigerant oil of the type recommended for the A/C compressor in the vehicle. 9. Install the A/C discharge line onto the A/C compressor (6). 10. Install the nut (4) that secures the A/C discharge line to the A/C compressor. Tighten the nut to 23 Nm (17 ft. lbs.). 11. Connect the wire harness connector (8) to the A/C pressure transducer. 12. Reconnect the negative battery cable. 13. Evacuate the refrigerant system See: Heating and Air Conditioning/Service and Repair/Refrigerant System Evacuate . 14. Adjust the refrigerant oil level See: Heating and Air Conditioning/Service and Repair/Refrigerant Oil Level . 15. Charge the refrigerant system See: Heating and Air Conditioning/Service and Repair/Refrigerant System Charge . Liquid Line 3.7L/4.7L/5.7L ENGINES CAUTION: Be certain to adjust the refrigerant oil level when servicing the A/C refrigerant system See: Heating and Air Conditioning/Service and Repair/Refrigerant Oil Level. Failure to properly adjust the refrigerant oil level will prevent the A/C system from operating as designed Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Hose/Line HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > A/C Line - Removal > Page 2145 and can cause serious A/C compressor damage. NOTE: When replacing multiple A/C system components, refer to the Refrigerant Oil Capacities chart to determine how much oil should be added to the refrigerant system See: Heating and Air Conditioning/Service and Repair/Refrigerant Oil Level. NOTE: Replacement of the refrigerant line O-ring seals and gaskets is required anytime a refrigerant line is opened. Failure to replace the rubber O-ring seals and metal gaskets could result in a refrigerant system leak. NOTE: The A/C liquid line is serviced in two sections. FRONT SECTION 1. Position the front section of the A/C liquid line (10) into the engine compartment. 2. Remove the tape or plugs from the opened ends of the A/C liquid lines and the condenser port. 3. Lubricate new O-ring seals with clean refrigerant oil and install them onto the front liquid line spring-lock coupler fitting. Use only the specified O-ring seals as they are made of a special material for the R-134a system. Use only refrigerant oil of the type recommended for the A/C compressor in the vehicle. 4. Connect the front section of the A/C liquid line to the rear section of the liquid line (4) See: Heating and Air Conditioning/Coupler HVAC/Service and Repair/Installation . 5. Install the secondary retaining clip (2) onto the spring-lock coupler that secures the front section of the A/C liquid line onto the rear section of the liquid line. 6. Engage the A/C liquid line into the body retaining clips (1 and 9). 7. Lubricate a new O-ring with clean refrigerant oil and install it and a new gasket onto the front liquid line fitting. Use only the specified O-ring sea as it is made of a special material for the R-134a system. Use only refrigerant oil of the type recommended for the A/C compressor in the vehicle. 8. Connect the front section of the A/C liquid line to the outlet port of the A/C condenser (7). 9. Install the nut (8) that secures the A/C liquid line to the A/C condenser. Tighten the nut to 23 Nm (17 ft. lbs.). 10. Install the plastic cover onto the condenser outlet stud. 11. Install the air filter housing mounting bracket and air filter housing. 12. Reconnect the negative battery cable(s). 13. Evacuate the refrigerant system See: Heating and Air Conditioning/Service and Repair/Refrigerant System Evacuate . 14. Adjust the refrigerant oil level See: Heating and Air Conditioning/Service and Repair/Refrigerant Oil Level . 15. Charge the refrigerant system See: Heating and Air Conditioning/Service and Repair/Refrigerant System Charge . REAR SECTION Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Hose/Line HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > A/C Line - Removal > Page 2146 16. Position the rear section of the A/C liquid line (4) into the engine compartment. 17. Remove the tape or plugs from the opened ends of the A/C liquid lines and the evaporator tube (6). 18. Lubricate new O-ring seals with clean refrigerant oil and install them onto the rear liquid line spring-lock coupler fitting. Use only the specified O-ring seals as they are made of a special material for the R-134a system. Use only refrigerant oil of the type recommended for the A/C compressor in the vehicle. 19. Connect the rear section of the A/C liquid line to the evaporator tube See: Heating and Air Conditioning/Coupler HVAC/Service and Repair/Installation . 20. Install the secondary retaining clip (5) onto the spring-lock coupler that secures the rear section of the A/C liquid line onto the evaporator tube. 21. Engage the A/C liquid line into the body retaining clip (3). 22. Lubricate new O-ring seals with clean refrigerant oil and install them onto the front liquid line spring-lock coupler fitting. Use only the specified O-ring seals as they are made of a special material for the R-134a system. Use only refrigerant oil of the type recommended for the A/C compressor in the vehicle. 23. Connect the rear section of the A/C liquid line to the front section of the liquid line (10) See: Heating and Air Conditioning/Coupler HVAC/Service and Repair/Installation . 24. Install the secondary retaining clip (2) onto the spring-lock coupler that secures the front section of the A/C liquid line to the rear section of the liquid line. 25. Install the air filter housing mounting bracket and air filter housing. 26. Reconnect the negative battery cable. 27. Evacuate the refrigerant system See: Heating and Air Conditioning/Service and Repair/Refrigerant System Evacuate . 28. Adjust the refrigerant oil level See: Heating and Air Conditioning/Service and Repair/Refrigerant Oil Level . 29. Charge the refrigerant system See: Heating and Air Conditioning/Service and Repair/Refrigerant System Charge . Suction Line 3.7L/4.7L ENGINES CAUTION: Be certain to adjust the refrigerant oil level when servicing the A/C refrigerant system See: Heating and Air Conditioning/Service and Repair/Refrigerant Oil Level. Failure to properly adjust the refrigerant oil level will prevent the A/C system from operating as designed and can cause serious A/C compressor damage. NOTE: When replacing multiple A/C system components, refer to the Refrigerant Oil Capacities chart to determine how much oil should be added to the refrigerant system See: Heating and Air Conditioning/Service and Repair/Refrigerant Oil Level. NOTE: Replacement of the refrigerant line O-ring seals and gaskets is required anytime a refrigerant line is opened. Failure to replace the rubber O-ring seals and metal gaskets could result in a refrigerant system leak. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Hose/Line HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > A/C Line - Removal > Page 2147 1. Position the A/C suction line (5) into the engine compartment. 2. Remove the tape or plugs from the opened suction line fitting and the compressor port. 3. Lubricate a new O-ring seal with clean refrigerant oil and install it and a new gasket onto the suction line fitting. Use only the specified O-ring seal as it is made of a special material for the R-134a system. Use only refrigerant oil of the type recommended for the A/C compressor in the vehicle. 4. Install the A/C suction line onto the A/C compressor (6). 5. Install the nut (4) that secures the A/C discharge line to the A/C compressor. Tighten the nut to 23 Nm (17 ft. lbs.). 6. Remove the tape or plugs from the opened suction line fitting and the accumulator tube. 7. Lubricate new rubber O-ring seals with clean refrigerant oil and install them onto the accumulator tube fitting. Use only the specified O-rings as they are made of a special material for the R-134a system. Use only refrigerant oil of the type recommended for the A/C compressor in the vehicle. 8. Connect the A/C suction line (6) to the spring-lock coupler (1) on the accumulator (5) and install the secondary retaining clip (7) See: Heating and Air Conditioning/Coupler HVAC/Service and Repair/Installation . 9. Install the air filter housing cover. 10. Reconnect the negative battery cable. 11. Evacuate the refrigerant system See: Heating and Air Conditioning/Service and Repair/Refrigerant System Evacuate . 12. Adjust the refrigerant oil level See: Heating and Air Conditioning/Service and Repair/Refrigerant Oil Level . 13. Charge the refrigerant system See: Heating and Air Conditioning/Service and Repair/Refrigerant System Charge . Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Power Steering Line/Hose > Component Information > Service and Repair > Power Steering Hoses - Removal Power Steering Line/Hose: Service and Repair Power Steering Hoses - Removal I.F.S. - Return Hose - Gear To Cooler RETURN HOSE - GEAR TO COOLER 1. Drain and siphon the power steering system. 2. Raise and support the vehicle. 3. Disconnect the return hose at the cooler. 4. Disconnect the return hose (1) at the gear. 5. Remove the return hose from the routing clamp at the fan shroud and then remove from the vehicle. I.F.S. - Pressure Hose PRESSURE HOSE 1. Drain and siphon the power steering system. 2. Raise and support the vehicle. 3. Disconnect the pressure hose at the pump. 4. Disconnect the pressure hose (2) at the gear. 5. Remove the pressure hose from the vehicle. I.F.S. - Return Hose - Reservoir To Cooler RETURN HOSE - RESERVOIR TO COOLER 1. Drain and siphon the power steering system. 2. Disconnect the return hose at the reservoir. 3. Raise and support the vehicle. 4. Remove the return hose from the routing clamp at the fan shroud. 5. Disconnect the return hose at the cooler. 6. Remove the hose from the vehicle. Link/Coil - Return Hose - Gear To Cooler RETURN HOSE - GEAR TO COOLER Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Power Steering Line/Hose > Component Information > Service and Repair > Power Steering Hoses - Removal > Page 2152 1. Drain and siphon the power steering system. 2. Raise and support the vehicle. 3. Disconnect the return hose at the cooler. 4. Disconnect the return hose (2) at the gear. 5. Remove the return hose from the routing clamp at the fan shroud and then remove from the vehicle. Link/Coil - Pressure Hose PRESSURE HOSE 1. Drain and siphon the power steering system. 2. Raise and support the vehicle. 3. Disconnect the pressure hose at the pump. 4. Disconnect the pressure hose (2) at the gear (4). 5. Remove the pressure hose from the vehicle. Link/Coil - Return Hose - Reservoir To Cooler RETURN HOSE - RESERVOIR TO COOLER 1. Drain and siphon the power steering system. 2. Disconnect the return hose at the reservoir. 3. Raise and support the vehicle. 4. Remove the return hose from the routing clamp at the fan shroud. 5. Disconnect the return hose at the cooler. 6. Remove the hose from the vehicle. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Power Steering Line/Hose > Component Information > Service and Repair > Power Steering Hoses - Removal > Page 2153 Power Steering Line/Hose: Service and Repair Power Steering Hoses - Installation I.F.S. - Return Hose - Gear To Cooler RETURN HOSE - GEAR TO COOLER 1. Install the return hose to the vehicle. 2. Reconnect the return hose at the cooler. 3. Reconnect the return hose (1) at the gear. Tighten the hose to 50 Nm (37 ft. lbs.). 4. Reattach the hose to the routing clip at the fan shroud. 5. Remove the support and lower the vehicle. 6. Refill the power steering system. See: Steering and Suspension/Steering/Power Steering/Power Steering Bleeding/Service and Repair I.F.S. - Pressure Hose PRESSURE HOSE NOTE: Be sure to align the pressure hose so it does not contact the fan shroud or the frame rail. 1. Install the pressure hose to the vehicle. 2. Reconnect the pressure hose (2) at the gear. Tighten the hose to 32 Nm (23 ft. lbs.). 3. Reconnect the pressure hose at the pump. Tighten the hose to 31 Nm (23 ft. lbs.). 4. Remove the support and lower the vehicle. 5. Refill the power steering system. See: Steering and Suspension/Steering/Power Steering/Power Steering Bleeding/Service and Repair I.F.S. - Return Hose - Reservoir To Cooler RETURN HOSE - RESERVOIR TO COOLER 1. Install the return hose to the vehicle. 2. Reconnect the return hose at the cooler. 3. Reattach the hose to the routing clip at the fan shroud. 4. Remove the support and lower the vehicle. 5. Reconnect the return hose at the reservoir. 6. Refill the power steering system. See: Steering and Suspension/Steering/Power Steering/Power Steering Bleeding/Service and Repair Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Power Steering Line/Hose > Component Information > Service and Repair > Power Steering Hoses - Removal > Page 2154 Link/Coil - Return Hose - Gear To Cooler RETURN HOSE - GEAR TO COOLER 1. Install the return hose to the vehicle. 2. Reconnect the return hose at the cooler. 3. Reconnect the return hose (2) at the gear. Tighten the hose to 51 Nm (38 ft. lbs.). 4. Reattach the hose to the routing clip at the fan shroud. 5. Remove the support and lower the vehicle. 6. Refill the power steering system. See: Steering and Suspension/Steering/Power Steering/Power Steering Bleeding/Service and Repair Link/Coil - Pressure Hose PRESSURE HOSE NOTE: Be sure to align the pressure hose so it does not contact the fan shroud or the frame rail. 1. Install the pressure hose to the vehicle. 2. Reconnect the pressure hose (2) at the gear (4). Tighten the hose to 32 Nm (23 ft. lbs.). 3. Reconnect the pressure hose at the pump. Tighten the hose to 36 Nm (27 ft. lbs.). 4. Remove the support and lower the vehicle. 5. Refill the power steering system. See: Steering and Suspension/Steering/Power Steering/Power Steering Bleeding/Service and Repair Link/Coil - Return Hose - Reservoir To Cooler RETURN HOSE - RESERVOIR TO COOLER 1. Install the return hose to the vehicle. 2. Reconnect the return hose at the cooler. 3. Reattach the hose to the routing clip at the fan shroud. 4. Remove the support and lower the vehicle. 5. Reconnect the return hose at the reservoir. 6. Refill the power steering system. See: Steering and Suspension/Steering/Power Steering/Power Steering Bleeding/Service and Repair Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Brake Fluid > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Maintenance - Fluid Flushing Information Brake Fluid: Technical Service Bulletins Maintenance - Fluid Flushing Information NUMBER: 26-001-09 GROUP: Miscellaneous DATE: September 24, 2009 THIS BULLETIN SUPERSEDES TECHNICAL SERVICE BULLETIN 26-003-07, DATED MARCH 30, 2007, WHICH SHOULD BE REMOVED FROM YOUR FILES. THIS IS A COMPLETE REVISION AND NO ASTERISKS HAVE BEEN USED TO HIGHLIGHT REVISIONS. SUBJECT: Fluid Flushing Requirements MODELS: 2005 - 2008 (CS) Pacifica 2006 - 2009 (D1) Ram Truck (3500 Pick Up) 2010 (D2) Ram Truck (3500 Pick Up) 2007 - 2010 (DC) Ram Truck (3500 Chassis Cab) 2005 - 2009 (DH) Ram Truck (1500/2500 Pick Up) 2010 (DJ) Ram Truck (2500 Pick Up) 2005 - 2008 (DR) Ram Truck (1500/2500 Pick Up) 2009 - 2010 (DS) Ram Truck (1500) 2005 - 2009 (HB) Durango 2007 - 2009 (HG) Aspen 2009 - 2010 (JC) Journey 2007 - 2010 (JK) Wrangler 2005 - 2006 (JR) Sebring Sedan & Convertible/Stratus Sedan 2007 - 2010 (JS) Avenger/Sebring 2008 - 2010 (KK) Liberty 2007 - 2010 (KA) Nitro 2005 - 2007 (KJ) Liberty 2009 - 2010 (LC) Challenger 2005 - 2010 (LE) 300C/300C Touring (International Markets) 2005 - 2010 (LX) 300/Magnum/Charger 2007 - 2010 (MK) Compass/Patriot 2005 - 2010 (ND) Dakota 2005 - 2006 (PL) Neon 2007 - 2010 (PM) Caliber 2005 - 2010 (PT) Chrysler PT Cruiser Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Brake Fluid > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Maintenance - Fluid Flushing Information > Page 2160 2005 - 2007 (RG) Chrysler Voyager (International Markets) 2005 - 2007 (RS) Town & Country/Caravan/Voyager 2009 - 2010 (RT) Town & Country/Grand Caravan 2005 - 2006 (TJ) Wrangler 2005 - 2006 (VA) Sprinter 2007 - 2010 (VB) Sprinter 2005 - 2010 (WH) Grand Cherokee (International Markets) 2005 - 2010 (WK) Grand Cherokee 2006 - 2010 (XH) Commander (International Markets) 2006 - 2010 (XK) Commander 2005 - 2010 (ZB) Viper 2005 - 2007 (ZH) Crossfire DISCUSSION: Chrysler Group vehicle fluid systems do NOT require regular flushing. These systems include: engine oil, transmission oil, axle lube, brake fluid, power steering fluid, and refrigerant. The only exception to this requirement are published in the vehicle maintenance schedules, e.g. engine coolant. Exceptions to this recommendation include only those instances where a failure has occurred and/or the system has become compromised, contaminated or overheated beyond the normal operating range. Chrysler Group does NOT recommend aftermarket chemicals to flush the engine, transmission, brake or steering systems. Chemicals contained in these products can damage the system elastomeric components, and contaminate the component fluid, leading to loss of system/component durability and service life. When necessary, only the original approved system fluid should be used to flush these components using teamPSE(R) approved equipment. If the engine coolant contains a considerable amount of sediment, clean and flush with Mopar Cooling System Flush, p/n 04856977, or equivalent. Follow with a thorough rinsing to remove all deposits and chemicals. Refill with a minimum of a 50% mixture of the specified coolant and distilled water. POLICY: Information Only Disclaimer: This bulletin is supplied as technical information only and is not an authorization for repair. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Brake Fluid > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 2161 Brake Fluid: Specifications BRAKE FLUID Mopar DOT 3 and SAE J1703 or equivalent. NOTE: If DOT 3 is not available, the DOT 4 is acceptable. Use only recommended brake fluids. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Brake Fluid > Component Information > Description and Operation > Fluid Brake Fluid: Description and Operation Fluid BRAKE FLUID The brake fluid used in this vehicle must conform to DOT 3 specifications and SAE J1703 standards. No other type of brake fluid is recommended or approved for usage in the vehicle brake system. Use only Mopar brake fluid or an equivalent from a tightly sealed container. CAUTION: Never use reclaimed brake fluid or fluid from a container which has been left open. An open container of brake fluid will absorb moisture from the air and contaminate the fluid. CAUTION: Never use any type of a petroleum-based fluid in the brake hydraulic system. Use of such type fluids will result in seal damage of the vehicle brake hydraulic system causing a failure of the vehicle brake system. Petroleum based fluids would be items such as engine oil, transmission fluid, power steering fluid, etc. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Brake Fluid > Component Information > Description and Operation > Fluid > Page 2164 Brake Fluid: Description and Operation Brake Fluid BRAKE FLUID The brake fluid used in this vehicle must conform to DOT 3 specifications and SAE J1703 standards. No other type of brake fluid is recommended or approved for usage in the vehicle brake system. Use only Mopar brake fluid or an equivalent from a tightly sealed container. CAUTION: Never use reclaimed brake fluid or fluid from a container which has been left open. An open container of brake fluid will absorb moisture from the air and contaminate the fluid. CAUTION: Never use any type of a petroleum-based fluid in the brake hydraulic system. Use of such type fluids will result in seal damage of the vehicle brake hydraulic system causing a failure of the vehicle brake system. Petroleum based fluids would be items such as engine oil, transmission fluid, power steering fluid, etc. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Brake Fluid > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 2165 Brake Fluid: Testing and Inspection BRAKE FLUID CONTAMINATION Indications of fluid contamination are swollen or deteriorated rubber parts. Swollen rubber parts indicate the presence of petroleum in the brake fluid. To test for contamination, put a small amount of drained brake fluid in clear glass jar. If fluid separates into layers, there is mineral oil or other fluid contamination of the brake fluid. If brake fluid is contaminated, drain and thoroughly flush system. Replace master cylinder, proportioning valve, caliper seals, wheel cylinder seals, Antilock Brakes hydraulic unit and all hydraulic fluid hoses. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Brake Fluid > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 2166 Brake Fluid: Service and Repair BRAKE FLUID LEVEL Always clean the master cylinder reservoir (1) and cap (2) before checking fluid level. If not cleaned, dirt could enter the fluid. The fluid fill level is indicated on the side of the master cylinder reservoir (1). The correct fluid level is to the MAX indicator on the side of the reservoir. If necessary, add fluid to the proper level. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Clutch Fluid > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Maintenance - Fluid Flushing Information Clutch Fluid: Technical Service Bulletins Maintenance - Fluid Flushing Information NUMBER: 26-001-09 GROUP: Miscellaneous DATE: September 24, 2009 THIS BULLETIN SUPERSEDES TECHNICAL SERVICE BULLETIN 26-003-07, DATED MARCH 30, 2007, WHICH SHOULD BE REMOVED FROM YOUR FILES. THIS IS A COMPLETE REVISION AND NO ASTERISKS HAVE BEEN USED TO HIGHLIGHT REVISIONS. SUBJECT: Fluid Flushing Requirements MODELS: 2005 - 2008 (CS) Pacifica 2006 - 2009 (D1) Ram Truck (3500 Pick Up) 2010 (D2) Ram Truck (3500 Pick Up) 2007 - 2010 (DC) Ram Truck (3500 Chassis Cab) 2005 - 2009 (DH) Ram Truck (1500/2500 Pick Up) 2010 (DJ) Ram Truck (2500 Pick Up) 2005 - 2008 (DR) Ram Truck (1500/2500 Pick Up) 2009 - 2010 (DS) Ram Truck (1500) 2005 - 2009 (HB) Durango 2007 - 2009 (HG) Aspen 2009 - 2010 (JC) Journey 2007 - 2010 (JK) Wrangler 2005 - 2006 (JR) Sebring Sedan & Convertible/Stratus Sedan 2007 - 2010 (JS) Avenger/Sebring 2008 - 2010 (KK) Liberty 2007 - 2010 (KA) Nitro 2005 - 2007 (KJ) Liberty 2009 - 2010 (LC) Challenger 2005 - 2010 (LE) 300C/300C Touring (International Markets) 2005 - 2010 (LX) 300/Magnum/Charger 2007 - 2010 (MK) Compass/Patriot 2005 - 2010 (ND) Dakota 2005 - 2006 (PL) Neon 2007 - 2010 (PM) Caliber 2005 - 2010 (PT) Chrysler PT Cruiser Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Clutch Fluid > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Maintenance - Fluid Flushing Information > Page 2171 2005 - 2007 (RG) Chrysler Voyager (International Markets) 2005 - 2007 (RS) Town & Country/Caravan/Voyager 2009 - 2010 (RT) Town & Country/Grand Caravan 2005 - 2006 (TJ) Wrangler 2005 - 2006 (VA) Sprinter 2007 - 2010 (VB) Sprinter 2005 - 2010 (WH) Grand Cherokee (International Markets) 2005 - 2010 (WK) Grand Cherokee 2006 - 2010 (XH) Commander (International Markets) 2006 - 2010 (XK) Commander 2005 - 2010 (ZB) Viper 2005 - 2007 (ZH) Crossfire DISCUSSION: Chrysler Group vehicle fluid systems do NOT require regular flushing. These systems include: engine oil, transmission oil, axle lube, brake fluid, power steering fluid, and refrigerant. The only exception to this requirement are published in the vehicle maintenance schedules, e.g. engine coolant. Exceptions to this recommendation include only those instances where a failure has occurred and/or the system has become compromised, contaminated or overheated beyond the normal operating range. Chrysler Group does NOT recommend aftermarket chemicals to flush the engine, transmission, brake or steering systems. Chemicals contained in these products can damage the system elastomeric components, and contaminate the component fluid, leading to loss of system/component durability and service life. When necessary, only the original approved system fluid should be used to flush these components using teamPSE(R) approved equipment. If the engine coolant contains a considerable amount of sediment, clean and flush with Mopar Cooling System Flush, p/n 04856977, or equivalent. Follow with a thorough rinsing to remove all deposits and chemicals. Refill with a minimum of a 50% mixture of the specified coolant and distilled water. POLICY: Information Only Disclaimer: This bulletin is supplied as technical information only and is not an authorization for repair. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Clutch Fluid > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 2172 Clutch Fluid: Specifications Chrysler does not provide a fluid type specification for the master/slave cylinder. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Coolant > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Maintenance - Fluid Flushing Information Coolant: Technical Service Bulletins Maintenance - Fluid Flushing Information NUMBER: 26-001-09 GROUP: Miscellaneous DATE: September 24, 2009 THIS BULLETIN SUPERSEDES TECHNICAL SERVICE BULLETIN 26-003-07, DATED MARCH 30, 2007, WHICH SHOULD BE REMOVED FROM YOUR FILES. THIS IS A COMPLETE REVISION AND NO ASTERISKS HAVE BEEN USED TO HIGHLIGHT REVISIONS. SUBJECT: Fluid Flushing Requirements MODELS: 2005 - 2008 (CS) Pacifica 2006 - 2009 (D1) Ram Truck (3500 Pick Up) 2010 (D2) Ram Truck (3500 Pick Up) 2007 - 2010 (DC) Ram Truck (3500 Chassis Cab) 2005 - 2009 (DH) Ram Truck (1500/2500 Pick Up) 2010 (DJ) Ram Truck (2500 Pick Up) 2005 - 2008 (DR) Ram Truck (1500/2500 Pick Up) 2009 - 2010 (DS) Ram Truck (1500) 2005 - 2009 (HB) Durango 2007 - 2009 (HG) Aspen 2009 - 2010 (JC) Journey 2007 - 2010 (JK) Wrangler 2005 - 2006 (JR) Sebring Sedan & Convertible/Stratus Sedan 2007 - 2010 (JS) Avenger/Sebring 2008 - 2010 (KK) Liberty 2007 - 2010 (KA) Nitro 2005 - 2007 (KJ) Liberty 2009 - 2010 (LC) Challenger 2005 - 2010 (LE) 300C/300C Touring (International Markets) 2005 - 2010 (LX) 300/Magnum/Charger 2007 - 2010 (MK) Compass/Patriot 2005 - 2010 (ND) Dakota 2005 - 2006 (PL) Neon 2007 - 2010 (PM) Caliber 2005 - 2010 (PT) Chrysler PT Cruiser Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Coolant > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Maintenance - Fluid Flushing Information > Page 2177 2005 - 2007 (RG) Chrysler Voyager (International Markets) 2005 - 2007 (RS) Town & Country/Caravan/Voyager 2009 - 2010 (RT) Town & Country/Grand Caravan 2005 - 2006 (TJ) Wrangler 2005 - 2006 (VA) Sprinter 2007 - 2010 (VB) Sprinter 2005 - 2010 (WH) Grand Cherokee (International Markets) 2005 - 2010 (WK) Grand Cherokee 2006 - 2010 (XH) Commander (International Markets) 2006 - 2010 (XK) Commander 2005 - 2010 (ZB) Viper 2005 - 2007 (ZH) Crossfire DISCUSSION: Chrysler Group vehicle fluid systems do NOT require regular flushing. These systems include: engine oil, transmission oil, axle lube, brake fluid, power steering fluid, and refrigerant. The only exception to this requirement are published in the vehicle maintenance schedules, e.g. engine coolant. Exceptions to this recommendation include only those instances where a failure has occurred and/or the system has become compromised, contaminated or overheated beyond the normal operating range. Chrysler Group does NOT recommend aftermarket chemicals to flush the engine, transmission, brake or steering systems. Chemicals contained in these products can damage the system elastomeric components, and contaminate the component fluid, leading to loss of system/component durability and service life. When necessary, only the original approved system fluid should be used to flush these components using teamPSE(R) approved equipment. If the engine coolant contains a considerable amount of sediment, clean and flush with Mopar Cooling System Flush, p/n 04856977, or equivalent. Follow with a thorough rinsing to remove all deposits and chemicals. Refill with a minimum of a 50% mixture of the specified coolant and distilled water. POLICY: Information Only Disclaimer: This bulletin is supplied as technical information only and is not an authorization for repair. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Coolant > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications Coolant: Capacity Specifications Coolant Capacity ................................................................................................................................. ............................................................. 17 qts. (16 L) Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Coolant > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications > Page 2180 Coolant: Fluid Type Specifications Mopar Antifreeze/Coolant 5 Year/100,000 Mile Formula HOAT (Hybrid Organic Additive Technology) or equivalent. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Coolant > Component Information > Description and Operation > Engine Coolant Coolant: Description and Operation Engine Coolant ENGINE COOLANT WARNING: Antifreeze is an ethylene-glycol base coolant and is harmful if swallowed or inhaled. If swallowed, drink two glasses of water and induce vomiting. If inhaled, move to fresh air area. Seek medical attention immediately. Do not store in open or unmarked containers. Wash skin and clothing thoroughly after coming in contact with ethylene-glycol. Keep out of reach of children. Dispose of glycol base coolant properly, contact your dealer or government agency for location of collection center in your area. Do not open a cooling system when the engine is at operating temperature or hot under pressure, personal injury can result. Avoid radiator cooling fan when engine compartment related service is performed, personal injury can result. CAUTION: Use of Propylene-Glycol based coolants is not recommended, as they provide less freeze protection and less corrosion protection. The cooling system is designed around the coolant. The coolant must accept heat from engine metal, in the cylinder head area near the exhaust valves and engine block. Then coolant carries the heat to the radiator where the tube/fin radiator can transfer the heat to the air. The use of aluminum cylinder blocks, cylinder heads, and water pumps requires special corrosion protection. Mopar(R) Antifreeze/Coolant, 5 Year/100,000 Mile Formula (MS-9769), or the equivalent ethylene-glycol base coolant with organic corrosion inhibitors (called HOAT, for Hybrid Organic Additive Technology) is recommended. This coolant offers the best engine cooling without corrosion when mixed with 50% ethylene-glycol and 50% distilled water to obtain a freeze point of -37°C (-35°F). If it loses color or becomes contaminated, drain, flush, and replace with fresh properly mixed coolant solution. CAUTION: Mopar(R) Antifreeze/Coolant, 5 Year/100,000 Mile Formula (MS-9769) may not be mixed with any other type of antifreeze. Mixing of coolants other than specified (non-HOAT or other HOAT) may result in engine damage that may not be covered under the new vehicle warranty, and decreased corrosion protection. COOLANT PERFORMANCE The required ethylene-glycol and water mixture depends upon climate and vehicle operating conditions. The coolant performance of various mixtures follows: Pure Water- Water can absorb more heat than a mixture of water and ethylene-glycol. This is for purpose of heat transfer only. Water also freezes at a higher temperature and allows corrosion. 100 percent Ethylene-Glycol - The corrosion inhibiting additives in ethylene-glycol need the presence of water to dissolve. Without water, additives form deposits in system. These act as insulation causing temperature to rise to as high as 149°C (300°F). This temperature is hot enough to melt plastic. The increased temperature can result in sever engine damage. In addition, 100 percent ethylene-glycol freezes at -22°C (-8°F). 50/50 Ethylene-Glycol and Water - Is the recommended mixture, it provides protection against freezing to -37°C (-34°F). The antifreeze concentration must always be a minimum of 44 percent, year-round in all climates. If percentage is lower, engine parts may be eroded by cavitation. Maximum protection against freezing is provided with a 68 percent antifreeze concentration, which prevents freezing down to -67.7°C (-90°F). A higher percentage will freeze at a warmer temperature. Also, a higher percentage of antifreeze can cause the engine to overheat because specific heat of antifreeze is lower than that of water. CAUTION: Richer antifreeze mixtures cannot be measured with normal field equipment and can cause problems associated with 100 percent ethylene-glycol. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Coolant > Component Information > Description and Operation > Engine Coolant > Page 2183 Coolant: Description and Operation Coolant Description HOAT COOLANT WARNING: Antifreeze is an ethylene-glycol base coolant and is harmful if swallowed or inhaled. If swallowed, drink two glasses of water and induce vomiting. If inhaled, move to fresh air area. Seek medical attention immediately. Do not store in open or unmarked containers. Wash skin and clothing thoroughly after coming in contact with ethylene-glycol. Keep out of reach of children. Dispose of glycol based coolant properly, contact your dealer or government agency for location of collection center in your area. Do not open a cooling system when the engine is at operating temperature or hot under pressure, personal injury can result. Avoid radiator cooling fan when engine compartment related service is performed, personal injury can result. CAUTION: Use of Propylene-Glycol based coolants is not recommended, as they provide less freeze protection and less corrosion protection. The cooling system is designed around the coolant. The coolant must accept heat from engine metal, in the cylinder head area near the exhaust valves and engine block. Then coolant carries the heat to the radiator where the tube/fin radiator can transfer the heat to the air. The use of aluminum cylinder blocks, cylinder heads, and water pumps requires special corrosion protection. Mopar(R) Antifreeze/Coolant, 5 Year/100,000 Mile Formula (MS-9769), or the equivalent ethylene-glycol base coolant with organic corrosion inhibitors (called HOAT, for Hybrid Organic Additive Technology) is recommended. This coolant offers the best engine cooling without corrosion when mixed with 50% ethylene-glycol and 50% distilled water to obtain a freeze point of -37°C (-35°F). If it loses color or becomes contaminated, drain, flush, and replace with fresh properly mixed coolant solution. CAUTION: Mopar(R) Antifreeze/Coolant, 5 Year/100,000 Mile Formula (MS-9769) may not be mixed with any other type of antifreeze. Mixing of coolants other than specified (non-HOAT or other HOAT) may result in engine damage that may not be covered under the new vehicle warranty, and decreased corrosion protection. COOLANT PERFORMANCE The required ethylene-glycol and water mixture depends upon climate and vehicle operating conditions. The coolant performance of various mixtures follows: Pure Water- Water can absorb more heat than a mixture of water and ethylene-glycol. This is for purpose of heat transfer only. Water also freezes at a higher temperature and allows corrosion. 100 percent Ethylene-Glycol - The corrosion inhibiting additives in ethylene-glycol need the presence of water to dissolve. Without water, additives form deposits in system. These act as insulation causing temperature to rise to as high as 149°C (300°F). This temperature is hot enough to melt plastic. The increased temperature can result in severe engine damage. In addition, 100 percent ethylene-glycol freezes at -22°C (-8°F). 50/50 Ethylene-Glycol and Water - Is the recommended mixture, it provides protection against freezing to -37°C (-34°F). The antifreeze concentration must always be a minimum of 44 percent, year-round in all climates. If percentage is lower, engine parts may be eroded by cavitation. Maximum protection against freezing is provided with a 68 percent antifreeze concentration, which prevents freezing down to -67.7°C (-90°F). A higher percentage will freeze at a warmer temperature. Also, a higher percentage of antifreeze can cause the engine to overheat because specific heat of antifreeze is lower than that of water. CAUTION: Richer antifreeze mixtures cannot be measured with normal field equipment and can cause problems associated with 100 percent ethylene-glycol. Operation OPERATION Coolant flows through the engine block, cylinder head, absorbing the heat from the engine, then flows to the radiator where the cooling fins in the radiator transfers the heat from the coolant to the atmosphere. On the 6.7L diesel engine, coolant also flows through the EGR cooler and turbocharger actuator. During cold weather the ethylene-glycol or propylene-glycol coolant prevents water present in the cooling system from freezing within temperatures indicated by mixture ratio of coolant to water. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Coolant > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 2184 Coolant: Testing and Inspection COOLANT CONCENTRATION TESTING Coolant concentration should be checked when any additional coolant was added to system or after a coolant drain, flush and refill. The coolant mixture offers optimum engine cooling and protection against corrosion when mixed to a freeze point of -37°C (-34°F) to -46°C (-50°F). The use of a hydrometer or Tool 8266, refractometer can be used to test coolant concentration. A hydrometer will test the amount of glycol in a mixture by measuring the specific gravity of the mixture. The higher the concentration of ethylene glycol, the larger the number of balls that will float, and higher the freeze protection (up to a maximum of 60% by volume glycol). A Refractometer Tool 8286 will test the amount of glycol in a coolant mixture by measuring the amount a beam of light bends as it passes through the fluid. Some coolant manufactures use other types of glycols into their coolant formulations. Propylene glycol is the most common new coolant. However, propylene glycol based coolants do not provide the same freezing protection and corrosion protection and are not recommended. CAUTION: Do not mix types of coolant - corrosion protection will be severely reduced. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Differential Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Maintenance - Fluid Flushing Information Differential Fluid - A/T: Technical Service Bulletins Maintenance - Fluid Flushing Information NUMBER: 26-001-09 GROUP: Miscellaneous DATE: September 24, 2009 THIS BULLETIN SUPERSEDES TECHNICAL SERVICE BULLETIN 26-003-07, DATED MARCH 30, 2007, WHICH SHOULD BE REMOVED FROM YOUR FILES. THIS IS A COMPLETE REVISION AND NO ASTERISKS HAVE BEEN USED TO HIGHLIGHT REVISIONS. SUBJECT: Fluid Flushing Requirements MODELS: 2005 - 2008 (CS) Pacifica 2006 - 2009 (D1) Ram Truck (3500 Pick Up) 2010 (D2) Ram Truck (3500 Pick Up) 2007 - 2010 (DC) Ram Truck (3500 Chassis Cab) 2005 - 2009 (DH) Ram Truck (1500/2500 Pick Up) 2010 (DJ) Ram Truck (2500 Pick Up) 2005 - 2008 (DR) Ram Truck (1500/2500 Pick Up) 2009 - 2010 (DS) Ram Truck (1500) 2005 - 2009 (HB) Durango 2007 - 2009 (HG) Aspen 2009 - 2010 (JC) Journey 2007 - 2010 (JK) Wrangler 2005 - 2006 (JR) Sebring Sedan & Convertible/Stratus Sedan 2007 - 2010 (JS) Avenger/Sebring 2008 - 2010 (KK) Liberty 2007 - 2010 (KA) Nitro 2005 - 2007 (KJ) Liberty 2009 - 2010 (LC) Challenger 2005 - 2010 (LE) 300C/300C Touring (International Markets) 2005 - 2010 (LX) 300/Magnum/Charger 2007 - 2010 (MK) Compass/Patriot 2005 - 2010 (ND) Dakota 2005 - 2006 (PL) Neon 2007 - 2010 (PM) Caliber 2005 - 2010 (PT) Chrysler PT Cruiser Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Differential Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Maintenance - Fluid Flushing Information > Page 2189 2005 - 2007 (RG) Chrysler Voyager (International Markets) 2005 - 2007 (RS) Town & Country/Caravan/Voyager 2009 - 2010 (RT) Town & Country/Grand Caravan 2005 - 2006 (TJ) Wrangler 2005 - 2006 (VA) Sprinter 2007 - 2010 (VB) Sprinter 2005 - 2010 (WH) Grand Cherokee (International Markets) 2005 - 2010 (WK) Grand Cherokee 2006 - 2010 (XH) Commander (International Markets) 2006 - 2010 (XK) Commander 2005 - 2010 (ZB) Viper 2005 - 2007 (ZH) Crossfire DISCUSSION: Chrysler Group vehicle fluid systems do NOT require regular flushing. These systems include: engine oil, transmission oil, axle lube, brake fluid, power steering fluid, and refrigerant. The only exception to this requirement are published in the vehicle maintenance schedules, e.g. engine coolant. Exceptions to this recommendation include only those instances where a failure has occurred and/or the system has become compromised, contaminated or overheated beyond the normal operating range. Chrysler Group does NOT recommend aftermarket chemicals to flush the engine, transmission, brake or steering systems. Chemicals contained in these products can damage the system elastomeric components, and contaminate the component fluid, leading to loss of system/component durability and service life. When necessary, only the original approved system fluid should be used to flush these components using teamPSE(R) approved equipment. If the engine coolant contains a considerable amount of sediment, clean and flush with Mopar Cooling System Flush, p/n 04856977, or equivalent. Follow with a thorough rinsing to remove all deposits and chemicals. Refill with a minimum of a 50% mixture of the specified coolant and distilled water. POLICY: Information Only Disclaimer: This bulletin is supplied as technical information only and is not an authorization for repair. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Differential Fluid - CVT > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Maintenance - Fluid Flushing Information Differential Fluid - CVT: Technical Service Bulletins Maintenance - Fluid Flushing Information NUMBER: 26-001-09 GROUP: Miscellaneous DATE: September 24, 2009 THIS BULLETIN SUPERSEDES TECHNICAL SERVICE BULLETIN 26-003-07, DATED MARCH 30, 2007, WHICH SHOULD BE REMOVED FROM YOUR FILES. THIS IS A COMPLETE REVISION AND NO ASTERISKS HAVE BEEN USED TO HIGHLIGHT REVISIONS. SUBJECT: Fluid Flushing Requirements MODELS: 2005 - 2008 (CS) Pacifica 2006 - 2009 (D1) Ram Truck (3500 Pick Up) 2010 (D2) Ram Truck (3500 Pick Up) 2007 - 2010 (DC) Ram Truck (3500 Chassis Cab) 2005 - 2009 (DH) Ram Truck (1500/2500 Pick Up) 2010 (DJ) Ram Truck (2500 Pick Up) 2005 - 2008 (DR) Ram Truck (1500/2500 Pick Up) 2009 - 2010 (DS) Ram Truck (1500) 2005 - 2009 (HB) Durango 2007 - 2009 (HG) Aspen 2009 - 2010 (JC) Journey 2007 - 2010 (JK) Wrangler 2005 - 2006 (JR) Sebring Sedan & Convertible/Stratus Sedan 2007 - 2010 (JS) Avenger/Sebring 2008 - 2010 (KK) Liberty 2007 - 2010 (KA) Nitro 2005 - 2007 (KJ) Liberty 2009 - 2010 (LC) Challenger 2005 - 2010 (LE) 300C/300C Touring (International Markets) 2005 - 2010 (LX) 300/Magnum/Charger 2007 - 2010 (MK) Compass/Patriot 2005 - 2010 (ND) Dakota 2005 - 2006 (PL) Neon 2007 - 2010 (PM) Caliber 2005 - 2010 (PT) Chrysler PT Cruiser Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Differential Fluid - CVT > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Maintenance - Fluid Flushing Information > Page 2194 2005 - 2007 (RG) Chrysler Voyager (International Markets) 2005 - 2007 (RS) Town & Country/Caravan/Voyager 2009 - 2010 (RT) Town & Country/Grand Caravan 2005 - 2006 (TJ) Wrangler 2005 - 2006 (VA) Sprinter 2007 - 2010 (VB) Sprinter 2005 - 2010 (WH) Grand Cherokee (International Markets) 2005 - 2010 (WK) Grand Cherokee 2006 - 2010 (XH) Commander (International Markets) 2006 - 2010 (XK) Commander 2005 - 2010 (ZB) Viper 2005 - 2007 (ZH) Crossfire DISCUSSION: Chrysler Group vehicle fluid systems do NOT require regular flushing. These systems include: engine oil, transmission oil, axle lube, brake fluid, power steering fluid, and refrigerant. The only exception to this requirement are published in the vehicle maintenance schedules, e.g. engine coolant. Exceptions to this recommendation include only those instances where a failure has occurred and/or the system has become compromised, contaminated or overheated beyond the normal operating range. Chrysler Group does NOT recommend aftermarket chemicals to flush the engine, transmission, brake or steering systems. Chemicals contained in these products can damage the system elastomeric components, and contaminate the component fluid, leading to loss of system/component durability and service life. When necessary, only the original approved system fluid should be used to flush these components using teamPSE(R) approved equipment. If the engine coolant contains a considerable amount of sediment, clean and flush with Mopar Cooling System Flush, p/n 04856977, or equivalent. Follow with a thorough rinsing to remove all deposits and chemicals. Refill with a minimum of a 50% mixture of the specified coolant and distilled water. POLICY: Information Only Disclaimer: This bulletin is supplied as technical information only and is not an authorization for repair. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Differential Fluid - M/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Maintenance - Fluid Flushing Information Differential Fluid - M/T: Technical Service Bulletins Maintenance - Fluid Flushing Information NUMBER: 26-001-09 GROUP: Miscellaneous DATE: September 24, 2009 THIS BULLETIN SUPERSEDES TECHNICAL SERVICE BULLETIN 26-003-07, DATED MARCH 30, 2007, WHICH SHOULD BE REMOVED FROM YOUR FILES. THIS IS A COMPLETE REVISION AND NO ASTERISKS HAVE BEEN USED TO HIGHLIGHT REVISIONS. SUBJECT: Fluid Flushing Requirements MODELS: 2005 - 2008 (CS) Pacifica 2006 - 2009 (D1) Ram Truck (3500 Pick Up) 2010 (D2) Ram Truck (3500 Pick Up) 2007 - 2010 (DC) Ram Truck (3500 Chassis Cab) 2005 - 2009 (DH) Ram Truck (1500/2500 Pick Up) 2010 (DJ) Ram Truck (2500 Pick Up) 2005 - 2008 (DR) Ram Truck (1500/2500 Pick Up) 2009 - 2010 (DS) Ram Truck (1500) 2005 - 2009 (HB) Durango 2007 - 2009 (HG) Aspen 2009 - 2010 (JC) Journey 2007 - 2010 (JK) Wrangler 2005 - 2006 (JR) Sebring Sedan & Convertible/Stratus Sedan 2007 - 2010 (JS) Avenger/Sebring 2008 - 2010 (KK) Liberty 2007 - 2010 (KA) Nitro 2005 - 2007 (KJ) Liberty 2009 - 2010 (LC) Challenger 2005 - 2010 (LE) 300C/300C Touring (International Markets) 2005 - 2010 (LX) 300/Magnum/Charger 2007 - 2010 (MK) Compass/Patriot 2005 - 2010 (ND) Dakota 2005 - 2006 (PL) Neon 2007 - 2010 (PM) Caliber 2005 - 2010 (PT) Chrysler PT Cruiser Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Differential Fluid - M/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Maintenance - Fluid Flushing Information > Page 2199 2005 - 2007 (RG) Chrysler Voyager (International Markets) 2005 - 2007 (RS) Town & Country/Caravan/Voyager 2009 - 2010 (RT) Town & Country/Grand Caravan 2005 - 2006 (TJ) Wrangler 2005 - 2006 (VA) Sprinter 2007 - 2010 (VB) Sprinter 2005 - 2010 (WH) Grand Cherokee (International Markets) 2005 - 2010 (WK) Grand Cherokee 2006 - 2010 (XH) Commander (International Markets) 2006 - 2010 (XK) Commander 2005 - 2010 (ZB) Viper 2005 - 2007 (ZH) Crossfire DISCUSSION: Chrysler Group vehicle fluid systems do NOT require regular flushing. These systems include: engine oil, transmission oil, axle lube, brake fluid, power steering fluid, and refrigerant. The only exception to this requirement are published in the vehicle maintenance schedules, e.g. engine coolant. Exceptions to this recommendation include only those instances where a failure has occurred and/or the system has become compromised, contaminated or overheated beyond the normal operating range. Chrysler Group does NOT recommend aftermarket chemicals to flush the engine, transmission, brake or steering systems. Chemicals contained in these products can damage the system elastomeric components, and contaminate the component fluid, leading to loss of system/component durability and service life. When necessary, only the original approved system fluid should be used to flush these components using teamPSE(R) approved equipment. If the engine coolant contains a considerable amount of sediment, clean and flush with Mopar Cooling System Flush, p/n 04856977, or equivalent. Follow with a thorough rinsing to remove all deposits and chemicals. Refill with a minimum of a 50% mixture of the specified coolant and distilled water. POLICY: Information Only Disclaimer: This bulletin is supplied as technical information only and is not an authorization for repair. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Differential Fluid - Transfer Case > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Maintenance - Fluid Flushing Information Differential Fluid - Transfer Case: Technical Service Bulletins Maintenance - Fluid Flushing Information NUMBER: 26-001-09 GROUP: Miscellaneous DATE: September 24, 2009 THIS BULLETIN SUPERSEDES TECHNICAL SERVICE BULLETIN 26-003-07, DATED MARCH 30, 2007, WHICH SHOULD BE REMOVED FROM YOUR FILES. THIS IS A COMPLETE REVISION AND NO ASTERISKS HAVE BEEN USED TO HIGHLIGHT REVISIONS. SUBJECT: Fluid Flushing Requirements MODELS: 2005 - 2008 (CS) Pacifica 2006 - 2009 (D1) Ram Truck (3500 Pick Up) 2010 (D2) Ram Truck (3500 Pick Up) 2007 - 2010 (DC) Ram Truck (3500 Chassis Cab) 2005 - 2009 (DH) Ram Truck (1500/2500 Pick Up) 2010 (DJ) Ram Truck (2500 Pick Up) 2005 - 2008 (DR) Ram Truck (1500/2500 Pick Up) 2009 - 2010 (DS) Ram Truck (1500) 2005 - 2009 (HB) Durango 2007 - 2009 (HG) Aspen 2009 - 2010 (JC) Journey 2007 - 2010 (JK) Wrangler 2005 - 2006 (JR) Sebring Sedan & Convertible/Stratus Sedan 2007 - 2010 (JS) Avenger/Sebring 2008 - 2010 (KK) Liberty 2007 - 2010 (KA) Nitro 2005 - 2007 (KJ) Liberty 2009 - 2010 (LC) Challenger 2005 - 2010 (LE) 300C/300C Touring (International Markets) 2005 - 2010 (LX) 300/Magnum/Charger 2007 - 2010 (MK) Compass/Patriot 2005 - 2010 (ND) Dakota 2005 - 2006 (PL) Neon 2007 - 2010 (PM) Caliber 2005 - 2010 (PT) Chrysler PT Cruiser Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Differential Fluid - Transfer Case > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Maintenance - Fluid Flushing Information > Page 2204 2005 - 2007 (RG) Chrysler Voyager (International Markets) 2005 - 2007 (RS) Town & Country/Caravan/Voyager 2009 - 2010 (RT) Town & Country/Grand Caravan 2005 - 2006 (TJ) Wrangler 2005 - 2006 (VA) Sprinter 2007 - 2010 (VB) Sprinter 2005 - 2010 (WH) Grand Cherokee (International Markets) 2005 - 2010 (WK) Grand Cherokee 2006 - 2010 (XH) Commander (International Markets) 2006 - 2010 (XK) Commander 2005 - 2010 (ZB) Viper 2005 - 2007 (ZH) Crossfire DISCUSSION: Chrysler Group vehicle fluid systems do NOT require regular flushing. These systems include: engine oil, transmission oil, axle lube, brake fluid, power steering fluid, and refrigerant. The only exception to this requirement are published in the vehicle maintenance schedules, e.g. engine coolant. Exceptions to this recommendation include only those instances where a failure has occurred and/or the system has become compromised, contaminated or overheated beyond the normal operating range. Chrysler Group does NOT recommend aftermarket chemicals to flush the engine, transmission, brake or steering systems. Chemicals contained in these products can damage the system elastomeric components, and contaminate the component fluid, leading to loss of system/component durability and service life. When necessary, only the original approved system fluid should be used to flush these components using teamPSE(R) approved equipment. If the engine coolant contains a considerable amount of sediment, clean and flush with Mopar Cooling System Flush, p/n 04856977, or equivalent. Follow with a thorough rinsing to remove all deposits and chemicals. Refill with a minimum of a 50% mixture of the specified coolant and distilled water. POLICY: Information Only Disclaimer: This bulletin is supplied as technical information only and is not an authorization for repair. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Maintenance - Fluid Flushing Information Fluid - A/T: Technical Service Bulletins Maintenance - Fluid Flushing Information NUMBER: 26-001-09 GROUP: Miscellaneous DATE: September 24, 2009 THIS BULLETIN SUPERSEDES TECHNICAL SERVICE BULLETIN 26-003-07, DATED MARCH 30, 2007, WHICH SHOULD BE REMOVED FROM YOUR FILES. THIS IS A COMPLETE REVISION AND NO ASTERISKS HAVE BEEN USED TO HIGHLIGHT REVISIONS. SUBJECT: Fluid Flushing Requirements MODELS: 2005 - 2008 (CS) Pacifica 2006 - 2009 (D1) Ram Truck (3500 Pick Up) 2010 (D2) Ram Truck (3500 Pick Up) 2007 - 2010 (DC) Ram Truck (3500 Chassis Cab) 2005 - 2009 (DH) Ram Truck (1500/2500 Pick Up) 2010 (DJ) Ram Truck (2500 Pick Up) 2005 - 2008 (DR) Ram Truck (1500/2500 Pick Up) 2009 - 2010 (DS) Ram Truck (1500) 2005 - 2009 (HB) Durango 2007 - 2009 (HG) Aspen 2009 - 2010 (JC) Journey 2007 - 2010 (JK) Wrangler 2005 - 2006 (JR) Sebring Sedan & Convertible/Stratus Sedan 2007 - 2010 (JS) Avenger/Sebring 2008 - 2010 (KK) Liberty 2007 - 2010 (KA) Nitro 2005 - 2007 (KJ) Liberty 2009 - 2010 (LC) Challenger 2005 - 2010 (LE) 300C/300C Touring (International Markets) 2005 - 2010 (LX) 300/Magnum/Charger 2007 - 2010 (MK) Compass/Patriot 2005 - 2010 (ND) Dakota 2005 - 2006 (PL) Neon 2007 - 2010 (PM) Caliber 2005 - 2010 (PT) Chrysler PT Cruiser Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Maintenance - Fluid Flushing Information > Page 2209 2005 - 2007 (RG) Chrysler Voyager (International Markets) 2005 - 2007 (RS) Town & Country/Caravan/Voyager 2009 - 2010 (RT) Town & Country/Grand Caravan 2005 - 2006 (TJ) Wrangler 2005 - 2006 (VA) Sprinter 2007 - 2010 (VB) Sprinter 2005 - 2010 (WH) Grand Cherokee (International Markets) 2005 - 2010 (WK) Grand Cherokee 2006 - 2010 (XH) Commander (International Markets) 2006 - 2010 (XK) Commander 2005 - 2010 (ZB) Viper 2005 - 2007 (ZH) Crossfire DISCUSSION: Chrysler Group vehicle fluid systems do NOT require regular flushing. These systems include: engine oil, transmission oil, axle lube, brake fluid, power steering fluid, and refrigerant. The only exception to this requirement are published in the vehicle maintenance schedules, e.g. engine coolant. Exceptions to this recommendation include only those instances where a failure has occurred and/or the system has become compromised, contaminated or overheated beyond the normal operating range. Chrysler Group does NOT recommend aftermarket chemicals to flush the engine, transmission, brake or steering systems. Chemicals contained in these products can damage the system elastomeric components, and contaminate the component fluid, leading to loss of system/component durability and service life. When necessary, only the original approved system fluid should be used to flush these components using teamPSE(R) approved equipment. If the engine coolant contains a considerable amount of sediment, clean and flush with Mopar Cooling System Flush, p/n 04856977, or equivalent. Follow with a thorough rinsing to remove all deposits and chemicals. Refill with a minimum of a 50% mixture of the specified coolant and distilled water. POLICY: Information Only Disclaimer: This bulletin is supplied as technical information only and is not an authorization for repair. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Maintenance - Fluid Flushing Information > Page 2210 Fluid - A/T: Technical Service Bulletins A/T - ATF + 4 Fluid Usage NUMBER: 21-014-07 GROUP: Transmission DATE: October 16, 2007 THIS BULLETIN SUPERSEDES TECHNICAL SERVICE BULLETIN 21-010-06, DATED APRIL 14, 2006, WHICH SHOULD BE REMOVED FROM YOUR FILES. ALL REVISIONS ARE HIGHLIGHTED WITH **ASTERISKS** AND INCLUDES THE ADDITION OF THE ASIAN WARNER (AW4) TRANSMISSION AND ADDITIONAL MODELS AND YEARS. SUBJECT: Automatic Transmission Fluid Usage ATF+4 (Type M59602) MODELS: 1989 - 1995 (AA) Spirit/Acclaim/Lebaron Sedan 1989 - 2003 (AB) Ram Van/Wagon 1989 - 1993 (AC) Dynasty/New Yorker/New Yorker Salon 1989 - 1993 (AD) Ram Truck 1989 - 1994 (AG) Daytona 1989 (AH) Lancer/Lebaron GTS 1989 - 1995 (AJ) Lebaron Coupe/Lebaron Convertible 1989 - 1990 (AK) Aries/Reliant 1989 - 1990 (AL) Horizon/Omni 1989 (AM) Diplomat/Gran Fury/New Yorker fifth Avenue 1989 - 2004 (AN) Dakota 1989 - 1994 (AP) Shadow/Sundance 1990 - 1991 (AQ) Maserati 1990 - 1993 (AY) Imperial/New Yorker Fifth Avenue 1994 - 2003 (BR/BE) Ram Truck 2004 - **2008** (CS) Pacifica 1998-2003 (DN) Durango 2002 - **2008** (DR/DH/D1) Ram Truck 2007 - **2008** (DC) Ram 3500 Cab Chassis 1995 - 2000 (FJ) Sebring/Avenger/Talon 1996 - 2000 (GS) Chrysler Voyager (International Market) 2004 - **2008** (HB) Durango **2008 (HG) Aspen** 1995 - 2000 (JA) Cirrus/Stratus/Breeze Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Maintenance - Fluid Flushing Information > Page 2211 2007 - **2008** (JK) Wrangler 2001 - 2006 (JR) Sebring Sedan & Convertible/Stratus Sedan 2007 - **2008** (JS) Avenger/Sebring/Sebring Convertible 1996 - 2000 (JX) Sebring Convertible **2007 - 2008 (KA) Nitro** 2002 - 2007 (KJ) Liberty **2008 (KK) Liberty** **2008 (L2) 300C (China)** 1993 - 2004 (LH) Concorde/Intrepid/Vision/LHS/New Yorker /300M 2005 - **2008** (LX/LE) 300/Magnum/Charger 1996 - 2000 (NS) Town & Country/Caravan/Voyager 1995 - 2005 (PL) Neon 2002 - 2003 (PG) PT Cruiser (International Markets) 2001 - **2008** (PT) PT Cruiser 1997 - 2002 (PR) Prowler 2001 - 2007 (RG) Chrysler Voyager (International Markets) 2001 - 2007 (RS) Town & Country/Caravan/Voyager **2008 (RT) Town & Country/Grand Caravan/Grand Voyager (U.S. & International Markets)** 1997-2006 (TJ) Wrangler 2001 - 2004 (WG) Grand Cherokee (International Markets) Vehicles equipped with Gas engines 1999 - 2004 (WJ) Grand Cherokee 2005 - **2008** (WK/WH) Grand Cherokee 2006 - **2008** (XK/XH) Commander 1989 - 1995 (YJ) Wrangler **1989 - 2001 (XJ) Cherokee** **1989 - 1993 (MJ) Comanche** 1996 - 1998 (ZG) Grand Cherokee (International Markets) 1994 - 1998 (ZJ) Grand Cherokee/Grand Wagoneer NOTE: **AWA (Asian Warner) transmission are now included in this Service Bulletin. ATF+4(R) is recommended for AW-4 (Asian Warner) transmissions** NOTE: This Service Bulletin DOES NOT apply to Sprinter transmissions, Crossfire transmissions, MK/PM vehicles equipped with Continuously Variable Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Maintenance - Fluid Flushing Information > Page 2212 Transmission (CVT) and WG vehicles equipped with a diesel engine (sales code ENF) and a W5J400 or NAG1 transmission (sales code DGJ). DISCUSSION: ATF+4(R) - (Type 9602) is being used as factory fill for Chrysler Group automatic transmissions. ATF+4(R) is recommended for all vehicles equipped with Chrysler Group automatic transmissions EXCEPT FOR THOSE LISTED IN THE NOTE ABOVE. NOTE: ATF+4(R) must always be used in vehicles that were originally filled with ATF+4(R). DO NOT USE ANY OTHER FLUID. NOTE: ATF+4(R) is backward compatible with ATF+3, ATF+2, and ATF+. Additionally, ATF+4(R) can be used to top off vehicles that used ATF+3, ATF+2, or ATF+. NOTE: If ATF+4® is used to service models originally filled with ATF+3, ATF+2, and ATF+ the fluid maintenance schedules listed for that model does not change. The service interval currently in effect for a given model should continue to be followed. Refer to the Service or Owners manual for maintenance schedule directions. In general terms, If ATF+, ATF+2 or ATF+3 was the recommended fluid, it is now recommended to use ATF+4® BENEFITS ^ Better anti-wear properties ^ Improved rust/corrosion prevention ^ Controls oxidation ^ Eliminates deposits ^ Controls friction ^ Retains anti-foaming properties ^ Superior properties for low temperature operation FLUID COLOR Mopar ATF+4(R) has exceptional durability. However, the red dye used in ATF+4(R) is not permanent; as the fluid ages it may become darker or appear brown in color. ATF+4(R) also has a unique odor that may change with age. With ATF+4(R) fluid, color and odor are no longer indicators of fluid condition and do not necessarily support a fluid change. PARTS REQUIRED: POLICY: Information Only Disclaimer: This bulletin is supplied as technical information only and is not an authorization for repair. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications Fluid - A/T: Capacity Specifications Service Fill 42RLE .................................................................................................................................................. ............................................................. 3.8L (4.0 Qt) 45RFE/545RFE 4X2 ............................................................................................................................ ........................................................................................ 5.2L (5.5 Qt) 4X4 ........................................ .............................................................................................................................................................. .............. 6.2L (6.5 Qt) 48RE .................................................................................................................................................... ............................................................. 3.8L (4.0 Qt) 68RFE 4X2 .......................................................................................................................................... .......................................................................... 5.2L (5.5 Qt) 4X4 ...................................................... .............................................................................................................................................................. 6.2L (6.5 Qt) AS68RC ............................................................................................................................................... ............................................................. 6.8L (7.2 Qt) Overhaul * 42RLE .................................................................................................................................................. ............................................................. 8.3L (8.7 Qt) 45RFE/545RFE ................................................................................................................................... ............................................... 14-16L (14.8-16.9 Qt) 48RE .................................................................................................................................................... ............................................... 14-16L (14.8-16.9 Qt) 68RFE ................................................................................................................................................. .......................................... 15.6-16.6L (16.4-17.5 Qt) AS68RC ............................................................................................................................................... ....................................................... 13.0L (13.74 Qt) *Dry fill capacity. Depending on type and size of internal cooler, length and inside diameter of cooler lines, or use of an auxiliary cooler, these figures may vary. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications > Page 2215 Fluid - A/T: Fluid Type Specifications Automatic Transmission Fluid ............................................................................................................. .......................................................... Mopar ATF +4 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Fluid - A/T: Description and Operation Description AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION FLUID AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION (ALL BUT AISIN TRANSMISSION) NOTE: Refer to fluid level checking procedures. Mopar(R) ATF +4, Automatic Transmission Fluid is the recommended fluid for DaimlerChrysler automatic transmissions. Dexron II fluid IS NOT recommended. Clutch chatter can result from the use of improper fluid. Mopar(R) ATF +4, Automatic Transmission Fluid when new is red in color. The ATF is dyed red so it can be identified from other fluids used in the vehicle such as engine oil or antifreeze. The red color is not permanent and is not an indicator of fluid condition. As the vehicle is driven, the ATF will begin to look darker in color and may eventually become brown. This is normal. ATF+4 also has a unique odor that may change with age. Consequently, odor and color cannot be used to indicate the fluid condition or the need for a fluid change. AISIN TRANSMISSION Mopar(R) AS68RC, Automatic Transmission Fluid is the recommended fluid for AISIN AS68RC TRANSMISSION. Mopar(R) AS68RC, Automatic Transmission Fluid when new is red in color. The ATF is dyed red so it can be identified from other fluids used in the vehicle such as engine oil or antifreeze. The red color is not permanent and is not an indicator of fluid condition. As the vehicle is driven, the ATF will begin to look darker in color and may eventually become brown. This is normal. Mopar(R) AS68RC, also has a unique odor that may change with age. Consequently, odor and color cannot be used to indicate the fluid condition or the need for a fluid change. FLUID ADDITIVES Chrysler strongly recommends against the addition of any fluids to the transmission, other than those automatic transmission fluids listed above. Exceptions to this policy are the use of special dyes to aid in detecting fluid leaks. Various "special" additives and supplements exist that claim to improve shift feel and/or quality. These additives and others also claim to improve converter clutch operation and inhibit overheating, oxidation, varnish, and sludge. These claims have not been supported to the satisfaction of Chrysler and these additives must not be used. The use of transmission "sealers" should also be avoided, since they may adversely affect the integrity of transmission seals. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 2218 Fluid - A/T: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION - AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION FLUID The automatic transmission fluid is selected based upon several qualities. The fluid must provide a high level of protection for the internal components by providing a lubricating film between adjacent metal components. The fluid must also be thermally stable so that it can maintain a consistent viscosity through a large temperature range. If the viscosity stays constant through the temperature range of operation, transmission operation and shift feel will remain consistent. Transmission fluid must also be a good conductor of heat. The fluid must absorb heat from the internal transmission components and transfer that heat to the transmission case. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > 42RLE Automatic Transmission Fluid - A/T: Testing and Inspection 42RLE Automatic Transmission Causes Of Burnt Fluid CAUSES OF BURNT FLUID Burnt, discolored fluid is a result of overheating which has two primary causes. 1. A result of restricted fluid flow through the main and/or auxiliary cooler. This condition is usually the result of a faulty or improperly installed drainback valve, a damaged oil cooler, or severe restrictions in the coolers and lines caused by debris or kinked lines. 2. Heavy duty operation with a vehicle not properly equipped for this type of operation. Trailer towing or similar high load operation will overheat the transmission fluid if the vehicle is improperly equipped. Such vehicles should have an auxiliary transmission fluid cooler, a heavy duty cooling system, and the engine/axle ratio combination needed to handle heavy loads. Effects Of Incorrect Fluid Level EFFECTS OF INCORRECT FLUID LEVEL A low fluid level allows the pump to take in air along with the fluid. Air in the fluid will cause fluid pressures to be low and develop slower than normal. If the transmission is overfilled, the gears churn the fluid into foam. This aerates the fluid and causing the same conditions occurring with a low level. In either case, air bubbles cause fluid overheating, oxidation, and varnish buildup which interferes with valve and clutch operation. Foaming also causes fluid expansion which can result in fluid overflow from the transmission vent or fill tube. Fluid overflow can easily be mistaken for a leak if inspection is not careful. Fluid Contamination FLUID CONTAMINATION Transmission fluid contamination is generally a result of: - adding incorrect fluid - failure to clean dipstick and fill tube when checking level - engine coolant entering the fluid - internal failure that generates debris - overheat that generates sludge (fluid breakdown) - failure to replace contaminated converter after repair The use of non-recommended fluids can result in transmission failure. The usual results are erratic shifts, slippage, abnormal wear and eventual failure due to fluid breakdown and sludge formation. Avoid this condition by using recommended fluids only. The dipstick cap and fill tube should be wiped clean before checking fluid level. Dirt, grease and other foreign material on the cap and tube could fall into the tube if not removed beforehand. Take the time to wipe the cap and tube clean before withdrawing the dipstick. Engine coolant in the transmission fluid is generally caused by a cooler malfunction. The only remedy is to replace the radiator as the cooler in the radiator is not a serviceable part. If coolant has circulated through the transmission, an overhaul is necessary. The torque converter should also be replaced whenever a failure generates sludge and debris. This is necessary because normal converter flushing procedures will not remove all contaminants. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 2221 Fluid - A/T: Testing and Inspection 545RFE Automatic Transmission Effects Of Incorrect Fluid Level EFFECTS OF INCORRECT FLUID LEVEL A low fluid level allows the pump to take in air along with the fluid. Air in the fluid will cause fluid pressures to be low and develop slower than normal. If the transmission is overfilled, the gears churn the fluid into foam. This aerates the fluid and causing the same conditions occurring with a low level. In either case, air bubbles cause fluid overheating, oxidation, and varnish buildup which interferes with valve and clutch operation. Foaming also causes fluid expansion which can result in fluid overflow from the transmission vent or fill tube. Fluid overflow can easily be mistaken for a leak if inspection is not careful. Causes Of Burnt Fluid CAUSES OF BURNT FLUID Burnt, discolored fluid is a result of overheating which has three primary causes. 1. Internal clutch slippage, usually caused by low line pressure, inadequate clutch apply pressure, or clutch seal failure. 2. A result of restricted fluid flow through the main and auxiliary cooler. This condition is usually the result of a faulty or improperly installed drainback valve, a damaged oil cooler, or severe restrictions in the coolers and lines caused by debris or kinked lines. 3. Heavy duty operation with a vehicle not properly equipped for this type of operation. Trailer towing or similar high load operation will overheat the transmission fluid if the vehicle is improperly equipped. Such vehicles should have an auxiliary transmission fluid cooler, a heavy duty cooling system, and the engine/axle ratio combination needed to handle heavy loads. Fluid Contamination FLUID CONTAMINATION Transmission fluid contamination is generally a result of: - adding incorrect fluid - failure to clean dipstick and fill tube when checking level - engine coolant entering the fluid - internal failure that generates debris - overheat that generates sludge (fluid breakdown) - failure to replace contaminated converter after repair The use of non-recommended fluids can result in transmission failure. The usual results are erratic shifts, slippage, abnormal wear and eventual failure due to fluid breakdown and sludge formation. Avoid this condition by using recommended fluids only. The dipstick cap and fill tube should be wiped clean before checking fluid level. Dirt, grease and other foreign material on the cap and tube could fall into the tube if not removed beforehand. Take the time to wipe the cap and tube clean before withdrawing the dipstick. Engine coolant in the transmission fluid is generally caused by a cooler malfunction. The only remedy is to replace the radiator as the cooler in the radiator is not a serviceable part. If coolant has circulated through the transmission, an overhaul is necessary. The torque converter should also be replaced whenever a failure generates sludge and debris. This is necessary because normal converter flushing procedures will not remove all contaminants. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 2222 Fluid - A/T: Testing and Inspection 68RFE Automatic Transmission Effects Of Incorrect Fluid Level EFFECTS OF INCORRECT FLUID LEVEL A low fluid level allows the pump to take in air along with the fluid. Air in the fluid will cause fluid pressures to be low and develop slower than normal. If the transmission is overfilled, the gears churn the fluid into foam. This aerates the fluid and causing the same conditions occurring with a low level. In either case, air bubbles cause fluid overheating, oxidation, and varnish buildup which interferes with valve and clutch operation. Foaming also causes fluid expansion which can result in fluid overflow from the transmission vent or fill tube. Fluid overflow can easily be mistaken for a leak if inspection is not careful. Causes Of Burnt Fluid CAUSES OF BURNT FLUID Burnt, discolored fluid is a result of overheating which has three primary causes. 1. Internal clutch slippage, usually caused by low line pressure, inadequate clutch apply pressure, or clutch seal failure. 2. A result of restricted fluid flow through the main and auxiliary cooler. This condition is usually the result of a faulty or improperly installed drainback valve, a damaged oil cooler, or severe restrictions in the coolers and lines caused by debris or kinked lines. 3. Heavy duty operation with a vehicle not properly equipped for this type of operation. Trailer towing or similar high load operation will overheat the transmission fluid if the vehicle is improperly equipped. Such vehicles should have an auxiliary transmission fluid cooler, a heavy duty cooling system, and the engine/axle ratio combination needed to handle heavy loads. Fluid Contamination FLUID CONTAMINATION Transmission fluid contamination is generally a result of: - adding incorrect fluid - failure to clean dipstick and fill tube when checking level - engine coolant entering the fluid - internal failure that generates debris - overheat that generates sludge (fluid breakdown) - failure to replace contaminated converter after repair The use of non-recommended fluids can result in transmission failure. The usual results are erratic shifts, slippage, abnormal wear and eventual failure due to fluid breakdown and sludge formation. Avoid this condition by using recommended fluids only. The dipstick cap and fill tube should be wiped clean before checking fluid level. Dirt, grease and other foreign material on the cap and tube could fall into the tube if not removed beforehand. Take the time to wipe the cap and tube clean before withdrawing the dipstick. Engine coolant in the transmission fluid is generally caused by a cooler malfunction. The only remedy is to replace the radiator as the cooler in the radiator is not a serviceable part. If coolant has circulated through the transmission, an overhaul is necessary. The torque converter should also be replaced whenever a failure generates sludge and debris. This is necessary because normal converter flushing procedures will not remove all contaminants. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 2223 Fluid - A/T: Testing and Inspection 48RE Automatic Transmission Effects Of Incorrect Fluid Level EFFECTS OF INCORRECT FLUID LEVEL A low fluid level allows the pump to take in air along with the fluid. Air in the fluid will cause fluid pressures to be low and develop slower than normal. If the transmission is overfilled, the gears churn the fluid into foam. This aerates the fluid and causing the same conditions occurring with a low level. In either case, air bubbles cause fluid overheating, oxidation, and varnish buildup which interferes with valve and clutch operation. Foaming also causes fluid expansion which can result in fluid overflow from the transmission vent or fill tube. Fluid overflow can easily be mistaken for a leak if inspection is not careful. Causes Of Burnt Fluid CAUSES OF BURNT FLUID Burnt, discolored fluid is a result of overheating which has two primary causes. 1. A result of restricted fluid flow through the main and/or auxiliary cooler. This condition is usually the result of a faulty or improperly installed drainback valve, a damaged oil cooler, or severe restrictions in the coolers and lines caused by debris or kinked lines. 2. Heavy duty operation with a vehicle not properly equipped for this type of operation. Trailer towing or similar high load operation will overheat the transmission fluid if the vehicle is improperly equipped. Such vehicles should have an auxiliary transmission fluid cooler, a heavy duty cooling system, and the engine/axle ratio combination needed to handle heavy loads. Fluid Contamination FLUID CONTAMINATION Transmission fluid contamination is generally a result of: - adding incorrect fluid - failure to clean dipstick and fill tube when checking level - engine coolant entering the fluid - internal failure that generates debris - overheat that generates sludge (fluid breakdown) - failure to replace contaminated converter after repair The use of non-recommended fluids can result in transmission failure. The usual results are erratic shifts, slippage, abnormal wear and eventual failure due to fluid breakdown and sludge formation. Avoid this condition by using recommended fluids only. The dipstick cap and fill tube should be wiped clean before checking fluid level. Dirt, grease and other foreign material on the cap and tube could fall into the tube if not removed beforehand. Take the time to wipe the cap and tube clean before withdrawing the dipstick. Engine coolant in the transmission fluid is generally caused by a cooler malfunction. The only remedy is to replace the radiator as the cooler in the radiator is not a serviceable part. If coolant has circulated through the transmission, an overhaul is necessary. The torque converter should also be replaced whenever a failure generates sludge and debris. This is necessary because normal converter flushing procedures will not remove all contaminants. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 2224 Fluid - A/T: Testing and Inspection AS68RC Automatic Transmission Effects Of Incorrect Fluid Level EFFECTS OF INCORRECT FLUID LEVEL A low fluid level allows the pump to take in air along with the fluid. Air in the fluid will cause fluid pressures to be low and develop slower than normal. If the transmission is overfilled, the gears churn the fluid into foam. This aerates the fluid and causing the same conditions occurring with a low level. In either case, air bubbles cause fluid overheating, oxidation, and varnish buildup which interferes with valve and clutch operation. Foaming also causes fluid expansion which can result in fluid overflow from the transmission vent or fill tube. Fluid overflow can easily be mistaken for a leak if inspection is not careful. Causes Of Burnt Fluid CAUSES OF BURNT FLUID Burnt, discolored fluid is a result of overheating which has three primary causes. 1. Internal clutch slippage, usually caused by low line pressure, inadequate clutch apply pressure, or clutch seal failure. 2. A result of restricted fluid flow through the main and/or auxiliary cooler. 3. Heavy duty operation with a vehicle not properly equipped for this type of operation. Trailer towing or similar high load operation will overheat the transmission fluid if the vehicle is improperly equipped. Such vehicles should have an auxiliary transmission fluid cooler, a heavy duty cooling system, and the engine/axle ratio combination needed to handle heavy loads. Fluid Contamination FLUID CONTAMINATION Transmission fluid contamination is generally a result of: - adding incorrect fluid. - failure to clean dipstick and fill tube when checking level. - engine coolant entering the fluid. - internal failure that generates debris. - overheat that generates sludge (fluid breakdown). - failure to replace contaminated converter after repair. The use of non-recommended fluids can result in transmission failure. The usual results are erratic shifts, slippage, abnormal wear and eventual failure due to fluid breakdown and sludge formation. Avoid this condition by using recommended fluids only. The dipstick cap and fill tube should be wiped clean before checking fluid level. Dirt, grease and other foreign material on the cap and tube could fall into the tube if not removed beforehand. Take the time to wipe the cap and tube clean before withdrawing the dipstick. Engine coolant in the transmission fluid is generally caused by a cooler malfunction. The only remedy is to replace the radiator as the cooler in the radiator is not a serviceable part. If coolant has circulated through the transmission, an overhaul is necessary. The torque converter should be replaced whenever a failure generates sludge and debris. This is necessary because normal converter flushing procedures will not remove all contaminants. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 42RLE Automatic Transmission Fluid - A/T: Service and Repair 42RLE Automatic Transmission Fluid Level Check - 42RLE FLUID LEVEL CHECK The transmission sump has a dipstick to check oil similar to most automatic transmissions. It is located on the left side of the engine. Be sure to wipe all dirt from dipstick handle before removing. The torque converter fills in both the PARK and NEUTRAL positions. Place the selector lever in PARK to be sure that the fluid level check is accurate. The engine should be running at idle speed for at least one minute, with the vehicle on level ground. At normal operating temperature (approximately 82° C or 180° F), the fluid level is correct if it is in the HOT region (cross-hatched area) on the oil level indicator. The fluid level should be in COLD region at 21° C (70° F) fluid temperature. Adjust fluid level as necessary. Use only Mopar(R) ATF+4, Automatic Transmission Fluid. FILL TUBE EQUIPPED WITH INDICATOR 42RLE Fluid Temperature Chart NOTE: Engine and Transmission should be at normal operating temperature before performing this procedure. 1. Start engine and apply parking brake. 2. Connect scan tool and select transmission. 3. Select sensors. 4. Read the transmission temperature value. 5. Compare the fluid temperature value with the chart. 6. Adjust transmission fluid level shown on the dipstick according to the 42RLE Fluid Temperature Chart. Use only Mopar(R) ATF+4, Automatic Transmission Fluid. 7. Check transmission for leaks. CAPPED FILL TUBE 1. Verify that the vehicle is parked on a level surface. 2. Remove the dipstick tube cap. WARNING: There is a risk of accident from vehicle starting off by itself when engine running. There is a risk of injury from contusions and burns if you insert your hands into the engine when it is started or when it is running. Secure vehicle to prevent it from moving off by itself. Wear properly fastened and close-fitting work clothes. Do not touch hot or rotating parts. 3. Actuate the service brake. Start engine and let it run at idle speed in selector lever position "P". 4. Shift through the transmission modes several times with the vehicle stationary and the engine idling 5. Warm up the transmission, wait at least 2 minutes and check the oil level with the engine running. Push the Oil Dipstick 9336 into transmission fill tube until the dipstick tip contacts the oil pan and pull out again, read off oil level, repeat if necessary. NOTE: The dipstick will protrude from the fill tube when installed. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 2227 6. Check transmission oil temperature using the appropriate scan tool. NOTE: The true transmission oil temperature can only be read by a scan tool in REVERSE or any forward gear position. 7. The transmission Oil Dipstick 9336 has indicator marks every 10mm. Determine the height of the oil level on the dipstick and using the height, the transmission temperature, and the Transmission Fluid Graph, determine if the transmission oil level is correct. 8. Add or remove oil as necessary and recheck the oil level. 9. Once the oil level is correct, install the dipstick tube cap. Fluid/Filter Service - 42RLE FLUID/FILTER SERVICE NOTE: Only fluids of the type labeled Mopar(R) ATF+4, Automatic Transmission Fluid, should be used in the transmission sump. A filter change should be made at the time of the transmission oil change. The magnet (on the inside of the oil pan) should also be cleaned with a clean, dry cloth. NOTE: If the transmission is disassembled for any reason, the fluid and filter should be changed. 1. Raise vehicle on a hoist. Place a drain container with a large opening, under transmission oil pan. NOTE: One of the oil pan bolts (5) has a sealing patch applied from the factory. Separate this bolt for reuse. 2. Loosen pan bolts and tap the pan at one corner to break it loose allowing fluid to drain, then remove the oil pan. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 2228 3. Install a new filter and o-ring on bottom of the valve body and tighten retaining screws to 5 Nm (45 in. lbs.). NOTE: Before installing the oil pan bolt (5) in the bolt hole located between the torque converter clutch on and U/D clutch pressure tap circuits, it will be necessary to replenish the sealing patch on the bolt using Mopar(R) Lock & Seal Adhesive. 4. Clean the oil pan and magnet. Reinstall pan using new Mopar(R) Silicone Adhesive sealant. Tighten oil pan bolts to 20 Nm (14.5 ft. lbs.). 5. Pour four quarts of Mopar(R) ATF+4, Automatic Transmission Fluid, through the dipstick opening. 6. Start engine and allow to idle for at least one minute. Then, with parking and service brakes applied, move selector lever momentarily to each position, ending in the park or neutral position. 7. Check the transmission fluid level and add an appropriate amount to bring the transmission fluid level to 3mm (1/8 in.) below the lowest mark on the dipstick. 8. Recheck the fluid level after the transmission has reached normal operating temperature, 82° C (180°F). 9. To prevent dirt from entering transmission, make certain that dipstick is fully seated into the dipstick opening. Transmission Fill - 42RLE TRANSMISSION FILL To avoid overfilling transmission after a fluid change or overhaul, perform the following procedure: 1. Remove dipstick and insert clean funnel in transmission fill tube. 2. Add following initial quantity of Mopar(R) ATF +4 to transmission: a. If only fluid and filter were changed, add 3 pints (1-1/2 quarts) of ATF +4 to transmission. b. If transmission was completely overhauled, torque converter was replaced or drained, and cooler was flushed, add 12 pints (6 quarts) of ATF +4 to transmission. 3. Apply parking brakes. 4. Start and run engine at normal curb idle speed. 5. Apply service brakes, shift transmission through all gear ranges then back to NEUTRAL, set parking brake, and leave engine running at curb idle speed. 6. Remove funnel, insert dipstick and check fluid level. If level is low, add fluid to bring level to MIN mark on dipstick. Check to see if the oil level is equal on both sides of the dipstick. If one side is noticeably higher than the other, the dipstick has picked up some oil from the dipstick tube. Allow the oil to drain down the dipstick tube and re-check. 7. Drive vehicle until transmission fluid is at normal operating temperature. 8. With the engine running at curb idle speed, the gear selector in NEUTRAL, and the parking brake applied, check the transmission fluid level. CAUTION: Do not overfill transmission, fluid foaming and shifting problems can result. 9. Add fluid to bring level up to MAX arrow mark. When fluid level is correct, shut engine off, release park brake, remove funnel, and install dipstick in fill tube. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 2229 Fluid - A/T: Service and Repair 545RFE Automatic Transmission Fluid Level Check - 545RFE FLUID LEVEL CHECK Low fluid level can cause a variety of conditions because it allows the pump to take in air along with the fluid. As in any hydraulic system, air bubbles make the fluid spongy, therefore, pressures will be low and build up slowly. Improper filling can also raise the fluid level too high. When the transmssion has too much fluid, the geartrain churns up foam and cause the same conditions which occur with a low fluid level. In either case, air bubbles can cause overheating and fluid oxidation, and varnishing. This can interfere with normal valve, clutch, and accumulator operation. Foaming can also result in fluid escaping from the transmission vent where it may be mistaken for a leak. The transmission has a dipstick to check oil level. It is located on the right side of the engine. Be sure to wipe all dirt from dipstick handle before removing. The torque converter fills in both the P (PARK) and N (NEUTRAL) positions. Place the selector lever in P (PARK) to be sure that the fluid level check is accurate. The engine should be running at idle speed for at least one minute, with the vehicle on level ground. At normal operating temperature (approximately 82° C. or 180° F), the fluid level is correct if it is in the HOT region (cross-hatched area) on the oil level indicator. The fluid level will be approximately at the upper COLD hole of the dipstick at 21° C (70° F) fluid temperature. FILL TUBE EQUIPPED WITH INDICATOR Transmission Fluid Temperature Chart NOTE: Engine and Transmission should be at normal operating temperature before performing this procedure. After the fluid has been checked, seat the dipstick fully to seal out water and dirt. 1. Start engine and apply parking brake. 2. Shift the transmission into DRIVE for approximately 2 seconds. 3. Shift the transmission into REVERSE for approximately 2 seconds. 4. Shift the transmission into PARK. 5. Hook up scan tool and select transmission. 6. Select sensors. 7. Read the transmission temperature value. 8. Compare the fluid temperature value with the chart. 9. Adjust transmission fluid level shown on the dipstick according to the Transmission Fluid Temperature Chart. NOTE: After adding any fluid to the transmission, wait a minimum of 2 minutes for the oil to fully drain from the fill tube into the transmission before rechecking the fluid level. 10. Check transmission for leaks. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 2230 CAPPED FILL TUBE 1. Verify that the vehicle is parked on a level surface. 2. Remove the dipstick tube cap. WARNING: There is a risk of accident from vehicle starting off by itself when engine is running. There is a risk of injury from contusions and burns if you insert your hands into the engine when it is started or when it is running. Secure vehicle to prevent it from moving off by itself. Wear properly fastened and close-fitting work clothes. Do not touch hot or rotating parts. 3. Actuate the service brake. Start engine and let it run at idle speed in selector lever position "P". 4. Shift through the transmission modes several times with the vehicle stationary and the engine idling. 5. Warm up the transmission, wait at least 2 minutes and check the oil level with the engine running. Push the Oil Dipstick 9336 into transmission fill tube until the dipstick tip contacts the oil pan and pull out again, read off oil level, repeat if necessary. NOTE: The dipstick will protrude from the fill tube when installed. 6. Check transmission oil temperature using the appropriate scan tool. NOTE: The true transmission oil temperature can only be read by a scan tool in REVERSE or any forward gear position. 7. The transmission Oil Dipstick 9336 has indicator marks every 10 mm. Determine the height of the oil level on the dipstick and using the height, the transmission temperature, and the Transmission Fluid Graph, determine if the transmission oil level is correct. 8. Add or remove oil as necessary and recheck the oil level. 9. Once the oil level is correct, install the dipstick tube cap. Fluid And Filter Replacement FLUID AND FILTER REPLACEMENT For proper service intervals See: . REMOVAL 1. Hoist and support vehicle on safety stands. 2. Place a large diameter shallow drain pan beneath the transmission pan. 3. Remove bolts holding front and sides of pan to transmission. 4. Loosen bolts holding rear of pan to transmission. 5. Slowly separate front of pan away from transmission allowing the fluid to drain into drain pan. 6. Hold up pan and remove remaining bolts holding pan to transmission. 7. While holding pan level, lower pan away from transmission. 8. Pour remaining fluid in pan into drain pan. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 2231 Transmission Filters - 4X4 Shown 9. Remove the screw holding the primary oil filter (1) to valve body. 10. Separate filter from valve body and oil pump and pour fluid in filter into drain pan. 11. Inspect the oil filter seal in the bottom of the oil pump. If the seal is not installed completely in the oil pump, or is otherwise damaged, then remove and discard the oil filter seal from the bottom of the oil pump. If the seal is installed correctly and is in good condition, it can be reused. 12. If replacing the cooler return filter (2), use Oil Filter Wrench 8321 to remove the filter from the transmission. 13. Dispose of used trans fluid and filter(s) properly. INSPECTION Inspect bottom of pan and magnet for excessive amounts of metal. A light coating of clutch material on the bottom of the pan does not indicate a problem unless accompanied by a slipping condition or shift lag. If fluid and pan are contaminated with excessive amounts of debris, refer to the appropriate diagnostic procedure. CLEANING 1. Using a suitable solvent, clean pan and magnet. 2. Using a suitable gasket scraper, clean original sealing material from surface of transmission case and the transmission pan. INSTALLATION Transmission Filters - 4X4 Shown Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 2232 CAUTION: The primary oil filter seal MUST be fully installed flush against the oil pump body. DO NOT install the seal onto the filter neck and attempt to install the filter and seal as an assembly. Damage to the transmission will result. 1. If necessary, install a new primary oil filter seal in the oil pump inlet bore. Seat the seal in the bore with Installer 6960-A or another suitable tool (appropriately sized drift or socket, the butt end of a hammer etc.). 2. Place replacement filter in position on valve body and into the oil pump. 3. Install screw to hold the primary oil filter (1) to valve body. Tighten screw to 4.5 Nm (40 in. lbs.) torque. 4. Install new cooler return filter (2) onto the transmission, if necessary. Torque the filter to 9.5 Nm (84 in.lbs.). 5. Place bead of Mopar(R) RTV sealant onto the transmission case sealing surface. 6. Place pan in position on transmission. 7. Install bolts to hold pan to transmission. Tighten bolts to 12 Nm (105 in. lbs.) torque. 8. Lower vehicle and fill transmission with MOPAR(R) ATF +4. Transmission Fill TRANSMISSION FILL To avoid overfilling transmission after a fluid change or overhaul, perform the following procedure: 1. Remove dipstick and insert clean funnel in transmission fill tube. 2. Add following initial quantity of Mopar(R) ATF +4 to transmission: a. If only fluid and filter were changed, add 10 pints (5 quarts) of ATF +4 to transmission. b. If transmission was completely overhauled and the torque converter was replaced or drained, add 24 pints (12 quarts) of ATF +4 to transmission. 3. Check the transmission fluid See: Transmission and Drivetrain/Automatic Transmission/Transaxle/Service and Repair/Procedures/545RFE Automatic Transmission/Fluid Level Check - 545RFE and adjust as required. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 2233 Fluid - A/T: Service and Repair 68RFE Automatic Transmission Fluid And Filter Replacement FLUID AND FILTER REPLACEMENT For proper service intervals See: . REMOVAL 1. Hoist and support vehicle on safety stands. 2. Place a large diameter shallow drain pan beneath the transmission pan. 3. Remove bolts holding front and sides of pan to transmission. 4. Loosen bolts holding rear of pan to transmission. 5. Slowly separate front of pan away from transmission allowing the fluid to drain into drain pan. 6. Hold up pan and remove remaining bolts holding pan to transmission. 7. While holding pan level, lower pan away from transmission. 8. Pour remaining fluid in pan into drain pan. Transmission Filters - 4X4 Shown 9. Remove the screw holding the primary oil filter (1) to valve body. 10. Separate filter from valve body and oil pump and pour fluid in filter into drain pan. 11. Inspect the oil filter seal in the bottom of the oil pump. If the seal is not installed completely in the oil pump, or is otherwise damaged, then remove and discard the oil filter seal from the bottom of the oil pump. If the seal is installed correctly and is in good condition, it can be reused. 12. If replacing the cooler return filter (2), use Oil Filter Wrench 8321 to remove the filter from the transmission. 13. Dispose of used trans fluid and filter(s) properly. INSPECTION Inspect bottom of pan and magnet for excessive amounts of metal. A light coating of clutch material on the bottom of the pan does not indicate a problem unless accompanied by a slipping condition or shift lag. If fluid and pan are contaminated with excessive amounts of debris, refer to the appropriate diagnostic procedure. CLEANING 1. Using a suitable solvent, clean pan and magnet. 2. Using a suitable gasket scraper, clean original sealing material from surface of transmission case and the transmission pan. INSTALLATION Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 2234 Transmission Filters - 4X4 Shown CAUTION: The primary oil filter seal MUST be fully installed flush against the oil pump body. DO NOT install the seal onto the filter neck and attempt to install the filter and seal as an assembly. Damage to the transmission will result. 1. If necessary, install a new primary oil filter seal in the oil pump inlet bore. Seat the seal in the bore with Installer 6960-A or another suitable tool (appropriately sized drift or socket, the butt end of a hammer etc.). 2. Place replacement filter in position on valve body and into the oil pump. 3. Install screw to hold the primary oil filter (1) to valve body. Tighten screw to 4.5 Nm (40 in. lbs.) torque. 4. Install new cooler return filter (2) onto the transmission, if necessary. Torque the filter to 9.5 Nm (84 in.lbs.). 5. Place bead of Mopar(R) RTV sealant onto the transmission case sealing surface. 6. Place pan in position on transmission. 7. Install bolts to hold pan to transmission. Tighten bolts to 12 Nm (105 in. lbs.) torque. 8. Lower vehicle and fill transmission with MOPAR(R) ATF +4. Fluid Level Check - 68RFE FLUID LEVEL CHECK Low fluid level can cause a variety of conditions because it allows the pump to take in air along with the fluid. As in any hydraulic system, air bubbles make the fluid spongy, therefore, pressures will be low and build up slowly. Improper filling can also raise the fluid level too high. When the transmssion has too much fluid, the geartrain churns up foam and cause the same conditions which occur with a low fluid level. In either case, air bubbles can cause overheating and fluid oxidation, and varnishing. This can interfere with normal valve, clutch, and accumulator operation. Foaming can also result in fluid escaping from the transmission vent where it may be mistaken for a leak. The transmission has a dipstick to check oil level. It is located on the right side of the engine. Be sure to wipe all dirt from dipstick handle before removing. The torque converter fills in both the P (PARK) and N (NEUTRAL) positions. Place the selector lever in P (PARK) to be sure that the fluid level check is accurate. The engine should be running at idle speed for at least one minute, with the vehicle on level ground. At normal operating temperature (approximately 82° C. or 180° F), the fluid level is correct if it is in the HOT region (cross-hatched area) on the oil level indicator. The fluid level will be approximately at the upper COLD hole of the dipstick at 21° C (70° F) fluid temperature. FILL TUBE EQUIPPED WITH INDICATOR Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 2235 68RFE FLUID FILL CHART NOTE: Engine and Transmission should be at normal operating temperature before performing this procedure. After the fluid has been checked, seat the dipstick fully to seal out water and dirt. 1. Start engine and apply parking brake. 2. Shift the transmission into DRIVE for approximately 2 seconds. 3. Shift the transmission into REVERSE for approximately 2 seconds. 4. Shift the transmission into PARK. 5. Hook up scan tool and select transmission. 6. Select sensors. 7. Read the transmission temperature value. 8. Compare the fluid temperature value with the chart. 9. Adjust transmission fluid level shown on the dipstick according to the Transmission Fluid Temperature Chart. NOTE: After adding any fluid to the transmission, wait a minimum of 2 minutes for the oil to fully drain from the fill tube into the transmission before rechecking the fluid level. 10. Check transmission for leaks. CAPPED FILL TUBE 1. Verify that the vehicle is parked on a level surface. 2. Remove the dipstick tube cap. WARNING: There is a risk of accident from vehicle starting off by itself when engine is running. There is a risk of injury from contusions and burns if you insert your hands into the engine when it is started or when it is running. Secure vehicle to prevent it from moving off by itself. Wear properly fastened and close-fitting work clothes. Do not touch hot or rotating parts. 3. Actuate the service brake. Start engine and let it run at idle speed in selector lever position "P". 4. Shift through the transmission modes several times with the vehicle stationary and the engine idling. 5. Warm up the transmission, wait at least 2 minutes and check the oil level with the engine running. Push the Oil Dipstick 9336 into transmission fill tube until the dipstick tip contacts the oil pan and pull out again, read off oil level, repeat if necessary. NOTE: The dipstick will protrude from the fill tube when installed. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 2236 6. Check transmission oil temperature using the appropriate scan tool. NOTE: The true transmission oil temperature can only be read by a scan tool in REVERSE or any forward gear position. 7. The transmission Oil Dipstick 9336 has indicator marks every 10 mm. Determine the height of the oil level on the dipstick and using the height, the transmission temperature, and the Transmission Fluid Graph, determine if the transmission oil level is correct. 8. Add or remove oil as necessary and recheck the oil level. 9. Once the oil level is correct, install the dipstick tube cap. Transmission Fill TRANSMISSION FILL To avoid overfilling transmission after a fluid change or overhaul, perform the following procedure: 1. Remove dipstick and insert clean funnel in transmission fill tube. 2. Add following initial quantity of Mopar(R) ATF +4 to transmission: a. If only fluid and filter were changed, add 10 pints (5 quarts) of ATF +4 to transmission. b. If transmission was completely overhauled and the torque converter was replaced or drained, add 24 pints (12 quarts) of ATF +4 to transmission. 3. Check the transmission fluid See: Transmission and Drivetrain/Automatic Transmission/Transaxle/Service and Repair/Procedures/545RFE Automatic Transmission/Fluid Level Check - 545RFE and adjust as required. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 2237 Fluid - A/T: Service and Repair 48RE Automatic Transmission Fluid Level Check FLUID LEVEL CHECK Low fluid level can cause a variety of conditions because it allows the pump to take in air along with the fluid. As in any hydraulic system, air bubbles make the fluid spongy, therefore, pressures will be low and build up slowly. Improper filling can also raise the fluid level too high. When the transmssion has too much fluid, the geartrain churns up foam and cause the same conditions which occur with a low fluid level. In either case, air bubbles can cause overheating and/or fluid oxidation, and varnishing. This can interfere with normal valve, clutch, and accumulator operation. Foaming can also result in fluid escaping from the transmission vent where it may be mistaken for a leak. After the fluid has been checked, seat the dipstick fully to seal out water and dirt. The transmission has a dipstick to check oil level. It is located on the right side of the engine. Be sure to wipe all dirt from dipstick handle before removing. Fluid level is checked with the engine running at curb idle speed, the transmission in NEUTRAL and the transmission fluid at normal operating temperature. The engine should be running at idle speed for at least one minute, with the vehicle on level ground. The transmission fluid level can be checked two ways. PROCEDURE ONE 1. Transmission fluid must be at normal operating temperature for accurate fluid level check. Drive vehicle if necessary to bring fluid temperature up to normal hot operating temperature of 82°C (180°F). 2. Position vehicle on level surface. 3. Start and run engine at curb idle speed. 4. Apply parking brakes. 5. Shift transmission momentarily into all gear ranges. Then shift transmission back to NEUTRAL. 6. Clean top of filler tube and dipstick to keep dirt from entering tube. 7. Remove dipstick (1) and check fluid level as follows: a. Correct acceptable level is in crosshatch area. b. Correct maximum level is to MAX arrow mark. c. Incorrect level is at or below MIN line. d. If fluid is low, add only enough Mopar(R) ATF +4 to restore correct level. Do not overfill. PROCEDURE TWO Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 2238 1. Start engine and apply parking brake. 2. Shift the transmission into DRIVE for approximately 2 seconds. 3. Shift the transmission into REVERSE for approximately 2 seconds. 4. Shift the transmission into NEUTRAL. 5. Hook up scan tool and select engine. 6. Select sensors. 7. Read the transmission temperature value. 8. Compare the fluid temperature value with the chart. 9. Adjust transmission fluid level shown on the dipstick according to the chart. NOTE: After adding any fluid to the transmission, wait a minimum of 2 minutes for the oil to fully drain from the fill tube into the transmission before rechecking the fluid level. 10. Check transmission for leaks. Fluid And Filter Replacement FLUID AND FILTER REPLACEMENT For proper service intervals See: . The service fluid fill after a filter change is approximately 3.8 liters (4.0 quarts). REMOVAL 1. Hoist and support vehicle on safety stands. 2. Place a large diameter shallow drain pan beneath the transmission pan (3). 3. Remove bolts holding front and sides of pan to transmission (1). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 2239 4. Loosen bolts holding rear of pan to transmission. 5. Slowly separate front of pan and reusable gasket (2) away from transmission allowing the fluid to drain into drain pan. 6. Hold up pan and remove remaining bolt holding pan to transmission. 7. While holding pan level, lower pan and gasket away from transmission. 8. Pour remaining fluid in pan into drain pan. 9. Remove screws holding filter (2) to valve body. 10. Separate filter from valve body and pour fluid in filter into drain pan. 11. Dispose of used trans fluid and filter properly. INSTALLATION 1. Position a new transmission oil filter (2) onto the valve body. 2. Install the screws to hold the filter to the valve body. Tighten the screws to 4 Nm (35 in.lbs.). 3. Clean the gasket surfaces of the transmission oil pan (3) and transmission pan rail. NOTE: The transmission pan oil gasket (2) is reusable. Inspect the sealing surfaces of the gasket. If the sealing ribs on both surfaces Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 2240 appear to be in good condition, clean the gasket of any foreign material and reinstall. 4. Position the oil pan gasket (2) onto the oil pan (3). 5. Position the oil pan and gasket onto the transmission and install several bolts to hold the pan and gasket to the transmission. 6. Install the remainder of the oil pan bolts. Tighten the bolts to 13.6 Nm (125 in.lbs.). 7. Lower vehicle and fill transmission. See: Transmission and Drivetrain/Automatic Transmission/Transaxle/Service and Repair/Procedures/48RE Automatic Transmission/Transmission Fill - 48RE Transmission Fill - 48RE TRANSMISSION FILL To avoid overfilling transmission after a fluid change or overhaul, perform the following procedure: 1. Remove dipstick and insert clean funnel in transmission fill tube. 2. Add following initial quantity of Mopar(R) ATF +4 to transmission: a. If only fluid and filter were changed, add 3 pints (1-1/2 quarts) of ATF +4 to transmission. b. If transmission was completely overhauled, torque converter was replaced or drained, and cooler was flushed, add 12 pints (6 quarts) of ATF +4 to transmission. 3. Apply parking brakes. 4. Start and run engine at normal curb idle speed. 5. Apply service brakes, shift transmission through all gear ranges then back to NEUTRAL, set parking brake, and leave engine running at curb idle speed. 6. Remove funnel, insert dipstick and check fluid level. If level is low, add fluid to bring level to MIN mark on dipstick. Check to see if the oil level is equal on both sides of the dipstick. If one side is noticeably higher than the other, the dipstick has picked up some oil from the dipstick tube. Allow the oil to drain down the dipstick tube and re-check. 7. Drive vehicle until transmission fluid is at normal operating temperature. 8. With the engine running at curb idle speed, the gear selector in NEUTRAL, and the parking brake applied, check the transmission fluid level. CAUTION: Do not overfill transmission, fluid foaming and shifting problems can result. 9. Add fluid to bring level up to MAX arrow mark. When fluid level is correct, shut engine off, release park brake, remove funnel, and install dipstick in fill tube. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 2241 Fluid - A/T: Service and Repair AS68RC Automatic Transmission Fluid Level Check FLUID LEVEL CHECK Low fluid level can cause a variety of conditions because it allows the pump to take in air along with the fluid. As in any hydraulic system, air bubbles make the fluid spongy, therefore, pressures will be low and build up slowly. Improper filling can also raise the fluid level too high. When the transmission has too much fluid, the gear train churns up foam and cause the same conditions which occur with a low fluid level. In either case, air bubbles can cause overheating and/or fluid oxidation, and varnishing. This can interfere with normal valve, clutch, and accumulator operation. Foaming can also result in fluid escaping from the transmission vent where it may be mistaken for a leak. After the fluid has been checked, seat the dipstick fully to seal out water and dirt. The transmission has a dipstick to check oil level. Be sure to wipe all dirt from dipstick handle before removing. The torque converter fills in both the P (PARK) and N (NEUTRAL) positions. Place the selector lever in P (PARK) to be sure that the fluid level check is accurate. The engine should be running at idle speed for at least one minute, with the vehicle on level ground. At normal operating temperature (approximately 82° C. or 180° F), the fluid level is correct if it is in the HOT region (cross-hatched area) on the oil level indicator. The fluid level will be approximately at the upper COLD hole of the dipstick at 21° C (70° F) fluid temperature. NOTE: Engine and Transmission should be at normal operating temperature before performing this procedure. Optimum fluid temperature for checking the level should be between 70°C (158°F) and 80°C ( 176°F). 1. Start engine and apply parking brake. 2. Shift the transmission into DRIVE for approximately 2 seconds. 3. Shift the transmission into REVERSE for approximately 2 seconds. 4. Shift the transmission into PARK. 5. Connect the scan tool and select transmission. 6. Select sensors. 7. Read the transmission temperature value. 8. Compare the fluid temperature value with the chart. 9. Adjust transmission fluid level shown on the dipstick according to the Transmission Fluid Temperature Chart. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 2242 NOTE: After adding any fluid to the transmission, wait a minimum of 2 minutes for the oil to fully drain from the fill tube into the transmission before rechecking the fluid level. 10. Check transmission for leaks. Fluid And Filter Replacement FLUID AND FILTER REPLACEMENT REMOVAL DRAIN PLUG 1. Raise vehicle. 2. Place a large diameter drain pan beneath the transmission pan. 3. Remove the drain plug bolt (1) and allow the oil to drain from the transmission pan. 4. Remove the drain pan bolts from the transmission case. 5. Remove the drain pan. TRANSMISSION OIL FILTER Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 2243 6. Remove the transmission oil filter bolts (3). 7. Remove the transmission oil filter and o-ring seal from the valve body (1). INSPECTION OIL PAN MAGNETS Inspect bottom of pan, pick-up magnets (1) and magnetic drain plug (2) and fluid filter for excessive amounts of metal. A light coating of clutch material on the bottom of the pan does not indicate a problem unless accompanied by a slipping condition or shift lag. If fluid and pan are contaminated with excessive amounts of debris, refer to the appropriate diagnostic procedure. CLEANING 1. Using a suitable solvent, clean pan and magnet. 2. Using a suitable gasket scraper, clean original sealing material from surface of transmission case and the transmission pan. INSTALLATION Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 2244 TRANSMISSION OIL FILTER 1. Lubricate the transmission oil filter seal with MOPAR(R) AS68RC ATF. 2. Install the new transmission oil filter (2) in position on valve body (1) and into the oil pump. 3. Install the transmission oil filter bolts (3). 4. Tighten bolts to 10 Nm ( 88 in.lbs. ) torque. 5. Install a new transmission oil pan gasket. 6. Place pan in position on transmission. 7. Install bolts to hold pan to transmission. Tighten bolts to 7 Nm (62 in. lbs.) torque. DRAIN PLUG 8. Install transmission drain plug bolt (1). 9. Tighten oil pan drain plug to 27 Nm ( 20 ft.lbs) torque. 10. Lower vehicle and fill transmission with MOPAR(R) AS68RC ATF. See: Transmission and Drivetrain/Automatic Transmission/Transaxle/Service and Repair/Procedures/AS68RC Automatic Transmission/Transmission Fill - AS68RC Transmission Fill - AS68RC TRANSMISSION FILL Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 2245 To avoid overfilling transmission after a fluid change or overhaul, perform the following procedure: 1. Remove dipstick and insert clean funnel in transmission fill tube. 2. Add following initial quantity of Mopar(R) AS68RC ATF to transmission: a. If only fluid and filter were changed, add 6.8L (7.2 quarts) of AS68RC to transmission. b. If transmission was completely overhauled and the torque converter was replaced or drained, add 13L (13.75 quarts) of Mopar(R) AS68RC ATF to transmission. 3. Check the transmission fluid and adjust as required. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - CVT > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Maintenance - Fluid Flushing Information Fluid - CVT: Technical Service Bulletins Maintenance - Fluid Flushing Information NUMBER: 26-001-09 GROUP: Miscellaneous DATE: September 24, 2009 THIS BULLETIN SUPERSEDES TECHNICAL SERVICE BULLETIN 26-003-07, DATED MARCH 30, 2007, WHICH SHOULD BE REMOVED FROM YOUR FILES. THIS IS A COMPLETE REVISION AND NO ASTERISKS HAVE BEEN USED TO HIGHLIGHT REVISIONS. SUBJECT: Fluid Flushing Requirements MODELS: 2005 - 2008 (CS) Pacifica 2006 - 2009 (D1) Ram Truck (3500 Pick Up) 2010 (D2) Ram Truck (3500 Pick Up) 2007 - 2010 (DC) Ram Truck (3500 Chassis Cab) 2005 - 2009 (DH) Ram Truck (1500/2500 Pick Up) 2010 (DJ) Ram Truck (2500 Pick Up) 2005 - 2008 (DR) Ram Truck (1500/2500 Pick Up) 2009 - 2010 (DS) Ram Truck (1500) 2005 - 2009 (HB) Durango 2007 - 2009 (HG) Aspen 2009 - 2010 (JC) Journey 2007 - 2010 (JK) Wrangler 2005 - 2006 (JR) Sebring Sedan & Convertible/Stratus Sedan 2007 - 2010 (JS) Avenger/Sebring 2008 - 2010 (KK) Liberty 2007 - 2010 (KA) Nitro 2005 - 2007 (KJ) Liberty 2009 - 2010 (LC) Challenger 2005 - 2010 (LE) 300C/300C Touring (International Markets) 2005 - 2010 (LX) 300/Magnum/Charger 2007 - 2010 (MK) Compass/Patriot 2005 - 2010 (ND) Dakota 2005 - 2006 (PL) Neon 2007 - 2010 (PM) Caliber 2005 - 2010 (PT) Chrysler PT Cruiser Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - CVT > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Maintenance - Fluid Flushing Information > Page 2250 2005 - 2007 (RG) Chrysler Voyager (International Markets) 2005 - 2007 (RS) Town & Country/Caravan/Voyager 2009 - 2010 (RT) Town & Country/Grand Caravan 2005 - 2006 (TJ) Wrangler 2005 - 2006 (VA) Sprinter 2007 - 2010 (VB) Sprinter 2005 - 2010 (WH) Grand Cherokee (International Markets) 2005 - 2010 (WK) Grand Cherokee 2006 - 2010 (XH) Commander (International Markets) 2006 - 2010 (XK) Commander 2005 - 2010 (ZB) Viper 2005 - 2007 (ZH) Crossfire DISCUSSION: Chrysler Group vehicle fluid systems do NOT require regular flushing. These systems include: engine oil, transmission oil, axle lube, brake fluid, power steering fluid, and refrigerant. The only exception to this requirement are published in the vehicle maintenance schedules, e.g. engine coolant. Exceptions to this recommendation include only those instances where a failure has occurred and/or the system has become compromised, contaminated or overheated beyond the normal operating range. Chrysler Group does NOT recommend aftermarket chemicals to flush the engine, transmission, brake or steering systems. Chemicals contained in these products can damage the system elastomeric components, and contaminate the component fluid, leading to loss of system/component durability and service life. When necessary, only the original approved system fluid should be used to flush these components using teamPSE(R) approved equipment. If the engine coolant contains a considerable amount of sediment, clean and flush with Mopar Cooling System Flush, p/n 04856977, or equivalent. Follow with a thorough rinsing to remove all deposits and chemicals. Refill with a minimum of a 50% mixture of the specified coolant and distilled water. POLICY: Information Only Disclaimer: This bulletin is supplied as technical information only and is not an authorization for repair. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - M/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Maintenance - Fluid Flushing Information Fluid - M/T: Technical Service Bulletins Maintenance - Fluid Flushing Information NUMBER: 26-001-09 GROUP: Miscellaneous DATE: September 24, 2009 THIS BULLETIN SUPERSEDES TECHNICAL SERVICE BULLETIN 26-003-07, DATED MARCH 30, 2007, WHICH SHOULD BE REMOVED FROM YOUR FILES. THIS IS A COMPLETE REVISION AND NO ASTERISKS HAVE BEEN USED TO HIGHLIGHT REVISIONS. SUBJECT: Fluid Flushing Requirements MODELS: 2005 - 2008 (CS) Pacifica 2006 - 2009 (D1) Ram Truck (3500 Pick Up) 2010 (D2) Ram Truck (3500 Pick Up) 2007 - 2010 (DC) Ram Truck (3500 Chassis Cab) 2005 - 2009 (DH) Ram Truck (1500/2500 Pick Up) 2010 (DJ) Ram Truck (2500 Pick Up) 2005 - 2008 (DR) Ram Truck (1500/2500 Pick Up) 2009 - 2010 (DS) Ram Truck (1500) 2005 - 2009 (HB) Durango 2007 - 2009 (HG) Aspen 2009 - 2010 (JC) Journey 2007 - 2010 (JK) Wrangler 2005 - 2006 (JR) Sebring Sedan & Convertible/Stratus Sedan 2007 - 2010 (JS) Avenger/Sebring 2008 - 2010 (KK) Liberty 2007 - 2010 (KA) Nitro 2005 - 2007 (KJ) Liberty 2009 - 2010 (LC) Challenger 2005 - 2010 (LE) 300C/300C Touring (International Markets) 2005 - 2010 (LX) 300/Magnum/Charger 2007 - 2010 (MK) Compass/Patriot 2005 - 2010 (ND) Dakota 2005 - 2006 (PL) Neon 2007 - 2010 (PM) Caliber 2005 - 2010 (PT) Chrysler PT Cruiser Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - M/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Maintenance - Fluid Flushing Information > Page 2255 2005 - 2007 (RG) Chrysler Voyager (International Markets) 2005 - 2007 (RS) Town & Country/Caravan/Voyager 2009 - 2010 (RT) Town & Country/Grand Caravan 2005 - 2006 (TJ) Wrangler 2005 - 2006 (VA) Sprinter 2007 - 2010 (VB) Sprinter 2005 - 2010 (WH) Grand Cherokee (International Markets) 2005 - 2010 (WK) Grand Cherokee 2006 - 2010 (XH) Commander (International Markets) 2006 - 2010 (XK) Commander 2005 - 2010 (ZB) Viper 2005 - 2007 (ZH) Crossfire DISCUSSION: Chrysler Group vehicle fluid systems do NOT require regular flushing. These systems include: engine oil, transmission oil, axle lube, brake fluid, power steering fluid, and refrigerant. The only exception to this requirement are published in the vehicle maintenance schedules, e.g. engine coolant. Exceptions to this recommendation include only those instances where a failure has occurred and/or the system has become compromised, contaminated or overheated beyond the normal operating range. Chrysler Group does NOT recommend aftermarket chemicals to flush the engine, transmission, brake or steering systems. Chemicals contained in these products can damage the system elastomeric components, and contaminate the component fluid, leading to loss of system/component durability and service life. When necessary, only the original approved system fluid should be used to flush these components using teamPSE(R) approved equipment. If the engine coolant contains a considerable amount of sediment, clean and flush with Mopar Cooling System Flush, p/n 04856977, or equivalent. Follow with a thorough rinsing to remove all deposits and chemicals. Refill with a minimum of a 50% mixture of the specified coolant and distilled water. POLICY: Information Only Disclaimer: This bulletin is supplied as technical information only and is not an authorization for repair. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - M/T > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications Fluid - M/T: Capacity Specifications Manual Transmission Fluid Capacity G56 ...................................................................................................................................................... ......................................................... 5.1 L ( 10.7 Pt ) GETRAG 238 ...................................................................................................................................... ........................................................... 2.2 L ( 4.6 Pt ) Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - M/T > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications > Page 2258 Fluid - M/T: Fluid Type Specifications MANUAL TRANSMISSION LUBRICANT G56 ...................................................................................................................................................... ........................... Mopar ATF +4 Transmission Fluid G238 ................................................................ ............................................................................................................... Mopar ATF +4 Transmission Fluid Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - M/T > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2259 Fluid - M/T: Description and Operation MANUAL TRANSMISSION NOTE: DaimlerChrysler recommends using Mopar(R) lubricants or lubricants of equal quality. - Getrag 238 - Mopar(R) ATF+4 Transmission Fluid - G 56 - Mopar(R) ATF+4 Transmission Fluid Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - Differential > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Maintenance - Fluid Flushing Information Fluid - Differential: Technical Service Bulletins Maintenance - Fluid Flushing Information NUMBER: 26-001-09 GROUP: Miscellaneous DATE: September 24, 2009 THIS BULLETIN SUPERSEDES TECHNICAL SERVICE BULLETIN 26-003-07, DATED MARCH 30, 2007, WHICH SHOULD BE REMOVED FROM YOUR FILES. THIS IS A COMPLETE REVISION AND NO ASTERISKS HAVE BEEN USED TO HIGHLIGHT REVISIONS. SUBJECT: Fluid Flushing Requirements MODELS: 2005 - 2008 (CS) Pacifica 2006 - 2009 (D1) Ram Truck (3500 Pick Up) 2010 (D2) Ram Truck (3500 Pick Up) 2007 - 2010 (DC) Ram Truck (3500 Chassis Cab) 2005 - 2009 (DH) Ram Truck (1500/2500 Pick Up) 2010 (DJ) Ram Truck (2500 Pick Up) 2005 - 2008 (DR) Ram Truck (1500/2500 Pick Up) 2009 - 2010 (DS) Ram Truck (1500) 2005 - 2009 (HB) Durango 2007 - 2009 (HG) Aspen 2009 - 2010 (JC) Journey 2007 - 2010 (JK) Wrangler 2005 - 2006 (JR) Sebring Sedan & Convertible/Stratus Sedan 2007 - 2010 (JS) Avenger/Sebring 2008 - 2010 (KK) Liberty 2007 - 2010 (KA) Nitro 2005 - 2007 (KJ) Liberty 2009 - 2010 (LC) Challenger 2005 - 2010 (LE) 300C/300C Touring (International Markets) 2005 - 2010 (LX) 300/Magnum/Charger 2007 - 2010 (MK) Compass/Patriot 2005 - 2010 (ND) Dakota 2005 - 2006 (PL) Neon 2007 - 2010 (PM) Caliber 2005 - 2010 (PT) Chrysler PT Cruiser Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - Differential > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Maintenance - Fluid Flushing Information > Page 2264 2005 - 2007 (RG) Chrysler Voyager (International Markets) 2005 - 2007 (RS) Town & Country/Caravan/Voyager 2009 - 2010 (RT) Town & Country/Grand Caravan 2005 - 2006 (TJ) Wrangler 2005 - 2006 (VA) Sprinter 2007 - 2010 (VB) Sprinter 2005 - 2010 (WH) Grand Cherokee (International Markets) 2005 - 2010 (WK) Grand Cherokee 2006 - 2010 (XH) Commander (International Markets) 2006 - 2010 (XK) Commander 2005 - 2010 (ZB) Viper 2005 - 2007 (ZH) Crossfire DISCUSSION: Chrysler Group vehicle fluid systems do NOT require regular flushing. These systems include: engine oil, transmission oil, axle lube, brake fluid, power steering fluid, and refrigerant. The only exception to this requirement are published in the vehicle maintenance schedules, e.g. engine coolant. Exceptions to this recommendation include only those instances where a failure has occurred and/or the system has become compromised, contaminated or overheated beyond the normal operating range. Chrysler Group does NOT recommend aftermarket chemicals to flush the engine, transmission, brake or steering systems. Chemicals contained in these products can damage the system elastomeric components, and contaminate the component fluid, leading to loss of system/component durability and service life. When necessary, only the original approved system fluid should be used to flush these components using teamPSE(R) approved equipment. If the engine coolant contains a considerable amount of sediment, clean and flush with Mopar Cooling System Flush, p/n 04856977, or equivalent. Follow with a thorough rinsing to remove all deposits and chemicals. Refill with a minimum of a 50% mixture of the specified coolant and distilled water. POLICY: Information Only Disclaimer: This bulletin is supplied as technical information only and is not an authorization for repair. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - Differential > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications Fluid - Differential: Capacity Specifications CORPORATE AXLES Front Axle C205F OPEN ................................................................................. .................................................................................................. 1.6L (56 oz) Front Axle C200F OPEN ..................................................................................................................... .................................................... 1.7L (57.5 ounces) Front Axle C200FE ANTI-SPIN .............................................................................................................................................................. 1.7L (57.5 ounces) Friction Modifier .................................................................................................... ................................................................................ 4.0 ounces (118 ml) Rear Axle 8.25 OPEN .......................................................................................................................... .................................................... 2.08L (4.4 ounces) Rear Axle 8.25 ANTI-SPIN .................................................................................................................. ...................................................... 2.1L (72 ounces) Friction Modifier ................................................ .................................................................................................................................... 4.0 ounces (118 ml) Rear Axle 9.25 OPEN .......................................................................................................................... ....................................................... 2.2L (74 ounces) Rear Axle 9.25 ANTI-SPIN .................................................................................................................. ...................................................... 2.1L (72 ounces) Friction Modifier ................................................ .................................................................................................................................... 4.0 ounces (118 ml) Rear Axle C213R OPEN ..................................................................................................................... ...................................................... 2.07L (70 ounces) Rear Axle C213RE ANTI-SPIN ......................................................................................................................................................... 2.24L (75.5 ounces) Friction Modifier .................................................................................................. .................................................................................. 4.0 ounces (118 ml) DANA AXLES Front Axle 186 FBI OPEN ............................................................................................ .................................................................................... 1.0L (2.1 Pt) Front Axle 186 FIA OPEN ................................................................................................................... ........................................................... 1.24L (2.6 Pt) Front Axle 216 FBI ANTI-SPIN ............................................................................................................ ........................................................... 1.3L (2.7 Pt) Rear Axle 226 RBI OPEN .................................................................................................................... ......................................................... 2.25L (4.75 Pt) Rear Axle 226 RBI ANTI-SPIN ............................................................................................................ ........................................................ 2.25L (4.75 Pt) Friction Modifier ................................................. ........................................................................................................................................... 0.1 ml (3.4 oz) Rear Axle 226 RIA ANTI-SPIN ............................................................................................................ ....................................................................... 1.35L Rear Axle 302 RBI OPEN .................................................................................................................... .......................................................................... 6.6L Rear Axle 302 RBI ANTI-SPIN ............................................................................................................ ......................................................................... 6.6L AMERICAN AXLES Front Axle 9.25 OPEN ........................................................................................ ........................................................................................................... 2.2L Front Axle 9.25 ANTI-SPIN ................................................................................................................. ......................................................................... 2.0L Rear Axle 10.5 OPEN .......................................................................................................................... ........................................................................... 2.5L Rear Axle 10.5 ANTI-SPIN .................................................................................................................. .......................................................................... 2.5L Rear Axle 11.5 OPEN .......................................................................................................................... ........................................................................... 4.2L Rear Axle 11.5 ANTI-SPIN .................................................................................................................. .......................................................................... 4.0L MAGNA AXLES FRONT AXLE 275 FBI OPEN .................................................................................. .................................................................................................... 5.1L Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - Differential > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications > Page 2267 Fluid - Differential: Fluid Type Specifications Front Axle Front Axle Fluid ................................................................................................................................... ............................. GL-5 SAE 75W-90 or equivalent Rear Axle Rear Axle Fluid .......................................................................................................................................... Mopar Synthetic Gear Lubricant SAE 75W-140 Note: Limited-Slip rear axles require the addition of 118 ml (4 oz) Mopar Limited Slip Additive or equivalent. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - Transfer Case > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Maintenance - Fluid Flushing Information Fluid - Transfer Case: Technical Service Bulletins Maintenance - Fluid Flushing Information NUMBER: 26-001-09 GROUP: Miscellaneous DATE: September 24, 2009 THIS BULLETIN SUPERSEDES TECHNICAL SERVICE BULLETIN 26-003-07, DATED MARCH 30, 2007, WHICH SHOULD BE REMOVED FROM YOUR FILES. THIS IS A COMPLETE REVISION AND NO ASTERISKS HAVE BEEN USED TO HIGHLIGHT REVISIONS. SUBJECT: Fluid Flushing Requirements MODELS: 2005 - 2008 (CS) Pacifica 2006 - 2009 (D1) Ram Truck (3500 Pick Up) 2010 (D2) Ram Truck (3500 Pick Up) 2007 - 2010 (DC) Ram Truck (3500 Chassis Cab) 2005 - 2009 (DH) Ram Truck (1500/2500 Pick Up) 2010 (DJ) Ram Truck (2500 Pick Up) 2005 - 2008 (DR) Ram Truck (1500/2500 Pick Up) 2009 - 2010 (DS) Ram Truck (1500) 2005 - 2009 (HB) Durango 2007 - 2009 (HG) Aspen 2009 - 2010 (JC) Journey 2007 - 2010 (JK) Wrangler 2005 - 2006 (JR) Sebring Sedan & Convertible/Stratus Sedan 2007 - 2010 (JS) Avenger/Sebring 2008 - 2010 (KK) Liberty 2007 - 2010 (KA) Nitro 2005 - 2007 (KJ) Liberty 2009 - 2010 (LC) Challenger 2005 - 2010 (LE) 300C/300C Touring (International Markets) 2005 - 2010 (LX) 300/Magnum/Charger 2007 - 2010 (MK) Compass/Patriot 2005 - 2010 (ND) Dakota 2005 - 2006 (PL) Neon 2007 - 2010 (PM) Caliber 2005 - 2010 (PT) Chrysler PT Cruiser Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - Transfer Case > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Maintenance - Fluid Flushing Information > Page 2272 2005 - 2007 (RG) Chrysler Voyager (International Markets) 2005 - 2007 (RS) Town & Country/Caravan/Voyager 2009 - 2010 (RT) Town & Country/Grand Caravan 2005 - 2006 (TJ) Wrangler 2005 - 2006 (VA) Sprinter 2007 - 2010 (VB) Sprinter 2005 - 2010 (WH) Grand Cherokee (International Markets) 2005 - 2010 (WK) Grand Cherokee 2006 - 2010 (XH) Commander (International Markets) 2006 - 2010 (XK) Commander 2005 - 2010 (ZB) Viper 2005 - 2007 (ZH) Crossfire DISCUSSION: Chrysler Group vehicle fluid systems do NOT require regular flushing. These systems include: engine oil, transmission oil, axle lube, brake fluid, power steering fluid, and refrigerant. The only exception to this requirement are published in the vehicle maintenance schedules, e.g. engine coolant. Exceptions to this recommendation include only those instances where a failure has occurred and/or the system has become compromised, contaminated or overheated beyond the normal operating range. Chrysler Group does NOT recommend aftermarket chemicals to flush the engine, transmission, brake or steering systems. Chemicals contained in these products can damage the system elastomeric components, and contaminate the component fluid, leading to loss of system/component durability and service life. When necessary, only the original approved system fluid should be used to flush these components using teamPSE(R) approved equipment. If the engine coolant contains a considerable amount of sediment, clean and flush with Mopar Cooling System Flush, p/n 04856977, or equivalent. Follow with a thorough rinsing to remove all deposits and chemicals. Refill with a minimum of a 50% mixture of the specified coolant and distilled water. POLICY: Information Only Disclaimer: This bulletin is supplied as technical information only and is not an authorization for repair. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - Transfer Case > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications Fluid - Transfer Case: Capacity Specifications Transfer Case Fluid Capacity NV241 GEN II ...................................................................................................................................... ......................................................... 1.6 L ( 3.4 Pt ) NV243 ................................................................ ............................................................................................................................................ 1.6 L ( 3.4 Pt ) NV244 GEN II ............................................................................................................................... ................................................................ 1.6 L ( 3.4 Pt ) NV246 ......................................................... ................................................................................................................................................... 1.9 L ( 4.0 Pt ) NV271 ................................................................................................................................... ....................................................................... 1.89 L ( 4.0 Pt ) NV273 ................................................ .......................................................................................................................................................... 1.89 L ( 4.0 Pt ) Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - Transfer Case > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications > Page 2275 Fluid - Transfer Case: Fluid Type Specifications Transfer Case Fluid Type All except NVG 246 Automatic Transfer Case Mopar ATF +4, Automatic Transmission Fluid NVG 246 Automatic Transfer Case Only Mopar PN 05179014AA, NVG 246 Automatic Transmission Fluid or equivalent Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - Transfer Case > Component Information > Description and Operation > Transfer Case - All Except NV246 Fluid - Transfer Case: Description and Operation Transfer Case - All Except NV246 TRANSFER CASE - ALL EXCEPT NV246 Recommended lubricant for the NV241 GENII, NV271, NV243, NV244 GENII, and NV273 transfer cases is Mopar(R) ATF +4, Automatic Transmission Fluid. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - Transfer Case > Component Information > Description and Operation > Transfer Case - All Except NV246 > Page 2278 Fluid - Transfer Case: Description and Operation Transfer Case - NV246 TRANSFER CASE - NV246 Recommended lubricant for the NV246 transfer case is Mopar(R) NVG 246 Automatic Transmission Fluid or equivalent. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - Transfer Case > Component Information > Service and Repair > NV241 GENII Transfer Case Fluid - Transfer Case: Service and Repair NV241 GENII Transfer Case STANDARD PROCEDURE - FLUID DRAIN AND REFILL The fill (2) and drain (3) plugs are both in the rear case. 1. Raise vehicle. 2. Position drain pan under transfer case. NOTE: It may be necessary to remove the exhaust y-pipe at the exhaust manifold to properly access the fill and drain plugs. Lowering the exhaust will allow the plugs to be accessed for torquing during installation. See: Engine, Cooling and Exhaust/Exhaust System/Exhaust Pipe/Service and Repair/Exhaust Pipe - Removal 3. Remove drain and fill plugs and drain lubricant completely. 4. Install drain plug. Tighten plug to 20-34 Nm (15-25 ft. lbs.). 5. Remove drain pan. 6. Fill transfer case to bottom edge of fill plug opening with Mopar(R) ATF +4, Automatic Transmission fluid. 7. Install and tighten fill plug to 20-34 Nm (15-25 ft. lbs.). 8. Install the exhaust y-pipe to the exhaust manifold, if removed. See: Engine, Cooling and Exhaust/Exhaust System/Exhaust Pipe/Service and Repair/Exhaust Pipe - Installation 9. Wipe any excess fluid that may have spilled onto the exhaust. 10. Lower vehicle. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - Transfer Case > Component Information > Service and Repair > NV241 GENII Transfer Case > Page 2281 Fluid - Transfer Case: Service and Repair NV271 Transfer Case STANDARD PROCEDURE - FLUID DRAIN AND REFILL The fill (1) and drain (2) plugs are both in the rear case. 1. Raise vehicle. 2. Position drain pan under transfer case. NOTE: It may be necessary to remove the exhaust y-pipe at the exhaust manifold to properly access the fill and drain plugs. Lowering the exhaust will allow the plugs to be accessed for torquing during installation. See: Engine, Cooling and Exhaust/Exhaust System/Exhaust Pipe/Service and Repair/Exhaust Pipe - Removal 3. Remove drain and fill plugs and drain lubricant completely. 4. Install drain plug. Tighten plug to 20-34 Nm (15-25 ft. lbs.). 5. Remove drain pan. 6. Fill transfer case to bottom edge of fill plug opening with Mopar(R) ATF +4, Automatic Transmission fluid. 7. Install and tighten fill plug to 20-34 Nm (15-25 ft. lbs.). 8. Install the exhaust y-pipe to the exhaust manifold, if removed. See: Engine, Cooling and Exhaust/Exhaust System/Exhaust Pipe/Service and Repair/Exhaust Pipe - Installation 9. Wipe any excess fluid that may have spilled onto the exhaust. 10. Lower vehicle. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - Transfer Case > Component Information > Service and Repair > NV241 GENII Transfer Case > Page 2282 Fluid - Transfer Case: Service and Repair NV243 Transfer Case STANDARD PROCEDURE - FLUID DRAIN AND REFILL The fill (2) and drain (3) plugs are both in the rear case. 1. Raise vehicle. 2. Position drain pan under transfer case. NOTE: It may be necessary to remove the exhaust y-pipe at the exhaust manifold to properly access the fill and drain plugs. Lowering the exhaust will allow the plugs to be accessed for torquing during installation. See: Engine, Cooling and Exhaust/Exhaust System/Exhaust Pipe/Service and Repair/Exhaust Pipe - Removal 3. Remove drain and fill plugs and drain lubricant completely. 4. Install drain plug. Tighten plug to 20-34 Nm (15-25 ft. lbs.). 5. Remove drain pan. 6. Fill transfer case to bottom edge of fill plug opening with Mopar(R) ATF +4, Automatic Transmission fluid. 7. Install and tighten fill plug to 20-34 Nm (15-25 ft. lbs.). 8. Install the exhaust y-pipe to the exhaust manifold, if removed. See: Engine, Cooling and Exhaust/Exhaust System/Exhaust Pipe/Service and Repair/Exhaust Pipe - Installation 9. Wipe any excess fluid that may have spilled onto the exhaust. 10. Lower vehicle. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - Transfer Case > Component Information > Service and Repair > NV241 GENII Transfer Case > Page 2283 Fluid - Transfer Case: Service and Repair NV244 GENII Transfer Case STANDARD PROCEDURE - FLUID DRAIN AND REFILL NOTE: The fill (2) and drain (3) plugs are both in the rear case. 1. Raise vehicle. 2. Position drain pan under transfer case. NOTE: It may be necessary to remove the exhaust y-pipe at the exhaust manifold to properly access the fill and drain plugs. Lowering the exhaust will allow the plugs to be accessed for torquing during installation. 3. Remove drain (3) and fill (2) plugs and drain lubricant completely. 4. Install drain plug (3). Tighten plug to 20-34 Nm (15-25 ft. lbs.). 5. Remove drain pan. 6. Fill transfer case to bottom edge of fill plug opening with Mopar(R) ATF +4, Automatic Transmission fluid. 7. Install and tighten fill plug (2) to 20-34 Nm (15-25 ft. lbs.). 8. Install the exhaust y-pipe to the exhaust manifold, if removed. 9. Wipe any excess fluid that may have spilled onto the exhaust. 10. Lower vehicle. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - Transfer Case > Component Information > Service and Repair > NV241 GENII Transfer Case > Page 2284 Fluid - Transfer Case: Service and Repair NV241 GENII Transfer Case STANDARD PROCEDURE - FLUID DRAIN AND REFILL The fill (2) and drain (3) plugs are both in the rear case. 1. Raise vehicle. 2. Position drain pan under transfer case. NOTE: It may be necessary to remove the exhaust y-pipe at the exhaust manifold to properly access the fill and drain plugs. Lowering the exhaust will allow the plugs to be accessed for torquing during installation. See: Engine, Cooling and Exhaust/Exhaust System/Exhaust Pipe/Service and Repair/Exhaust Pipe - Removal 3. Remove drain and fill plugs and drain lubricant completely. 4. Install drain plug. Tighten plug to 20-34 Nm (15-25 ft. lbs.). 5. Remove drain pan. 6. Fill transfer case to bottom edge of fill plug opening with Mopar(R) ATF +4, Automatic Transmission fluid. 7. Install and tighten fill plug to 20-34 Nm (15-25 ft. lbs.). 8. Install the exhaust y-pipe to the exhaust manifold, if removed. See: Engine, Cooling and Exhaust/Exhaust System/Exhaust Pipe/Service and Repair/Exhaust Pipe - Installation 9. Wipe any excess fluid that may have spilled onto the exhaust. 10. Lower vehicle. NV271 Transfer Case STANDARD PROCEDURE - FLUID DRAIN AND REFILL The fill (1) and drain (2) plugs are both in the rear case. 1. Raise vehicle. 2. Position drain pan under transfer case. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - Transfer Case > Component Information > Service and Repair > NV241 GENII Transfer Case > Page 2285 NOTE: It may be necessary to remove the exhaust y-pipe at the exhaust manifold to properly access the fill and drain plugs. Lowering the exhaust will allow the plugs to be accessed for torquing during installation. See: Engine, Cooling and Exhaust/Exhaust System/Exhaust Pipe/Service and Repair/Exhaust Pipe - Removal 3. Remove drain and fill plugs and drain lubricant completely. 4. Install drain plug. Tighten plug to 20-34 Nm (15-25 ft. lbs.). 5. Remove drain pan. 6. Fill transfer case to bottom edge of fill plug opening with Mopar(R) ATF +4, Automatic Transmission fluid. 7. Install and tighten fill plug to 20-34 Nm (15-25 ft. lbs.). 8. Install the exhaust y-pipe to the exhaust manifold, if removed. See: Engine, Cooling and Exhaust/Exhaust System/Exhaust Pipe/Service and Repair/Exhaust Pipe - Installation 9. Wipe any excess fluid that may have spilled onto the exhaust. 10. Lower vehicle. NV243 Transfer Case STANDARD PROCEDURE - FLUID DRAIN AND REFILL The fill (2) and drain (3) plugs are both in the rear case. 1. Raise vehicle. 2. Position drain pan under transfer case. NOTE: It may be necessary to remove the exhaust y-pipe at the exhaust manifold to properly access the fill and drain plugs. Lowering the exhaust will allow the plugs to be accessed for torquing during installation. See: Engine, Cooling and Exhaust/Exhaust System/Exhaust Pipe/Service and Repair/Exhaust Pipe - Removal 3. Remove drain and fill plugs and drain lubricant completely. 4. Install drain plug. Tighten plug to 20-34 Nm (15-25 ft. lbs.). 5. Remove drain pan. 6. Fill transfer case to bottom edge of fill plug opening with Mopar(R) ATF +4, Automatic Transmission fluid. 7. Install and tighten fill plug to 20-34 Nm (15-25 ft. lbs.). 8. Install the exhaust y-pipe to the exhaust manifold, if removed. See: Engine, Cooling and Exhaust/Exhaust System/Exhaust Pipe/Service and Repair/Exhaust Pipe - Installation 9. Wipe any excess fluid that may have spilled onto the exhaust. 10. Lower vehicle. NV244 GENII Transfer Case STANDARD PROCEDURE - FLUID DRAIN AND REFILL Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - Transfer Case > Component Information > Service and Repair > NV241 GENII Transfer Case > Page 2286 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - Transfer Case > Component Information > Service and Repair > NV241 GENII Transfer Case > Page 2287 ERROR: stackunderflow OFFENDING COMMAND: ~ STACK: Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Engine Oil > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Maintenance - Fluid Flushing Information Engine Oil: Technical Service Bulletins Maintenance - Fluid Flushing Information NUMBER: 26-001-09 GROUP: Miscellaneous DATE: September 24, 2009 THIS BULLETIN SUPERSEDES TECHNICAL SERVICE BULLETIN 26-003-07, DATED MARCH 30, 2007, WHICH SHOULD BE REMOVED FROM YOUR FILES. THIS IS A COMPLETE REVISION AND NO ASTERISKS HAVE BEEN USED TO HIGHLIGHT REVISIONS. SUBJECT: Fluid Flushing Requirements MODELS: 2005 - 2008 (CS) Pacifica 2006 - 2009 (D1) Ram Truck (3500 Pick Up) 2010 (D2) Ram Truck (3500 Pick Up) 2007 - 2010 (DC) Ram Truck (3500 Chassis Cab) 2005 - 2009 (DH) Ram Truck (1500/2500 Pick Up) 2010 (DJ) Ram Truck (2500 Pick Up) 2005 - 2008 (DR) Ram Truck (1500/2500 Pick Up) 2009 - 2010 (DS) Ram Truck (1500) 2005 - 2009 (HB) Durango 2007 - 2009 (HG) Aspen 2009 - 2010 (JC) Journey 2007 - 2010 (JK) Wrangler 2005 - 2006 (JR) Sebring Sedan & Convertible/Stratus Sedan 2007 - 2010 (JS) Avenger/Sebring 2008 - 2010 (KK) Liberty 2007 - 2010 (KA) Nitro 2005 - 2007 (KJ) Liberty 2009 - 2010 (LC) Challenger 2005 - 2010 (LE) 300C/300C Touring (International Markets) 2005 - 2010 (LX) 300/Magnum/Charger 2007 - 2010 (MK) Compass/Patriot 2005 - 2010 (ND) Dakota 2005 - 2006 (PL) Neon 2007 - 2010 (PM) Caliber 2005 - 2010 (PT) Chrysler PT Cruiser Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Engine Oil > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Maintenance - Fluid Flushing Information > Page 2292 2005 - 2007 (RG) Chrysler Voyager (International Markets) 2005 - 2007 (RS) Town & Country/Caravan/Voyager 2009 - 2010 (RT) Town & Country/Grand Caravan 2005 - 2006 (TJ) Wrangler 2005 - 2006 (VA) Sprinter 2007 - 2010 (VB) Sprinter 2005 - 2010 (WH) Grand Cherokee (International Markets) 2005 - 2010 (WK) Grand Cherokee 2006 - 2010 (XH) Commander (International Markets) 2006 - 2010 (XK) Commander 2005 - 2010 (ZB) Viper 2005 - 2007 (ZH) Crossfire DISCUSSION: Chrysler Group vehicle fluid systems do NOT require regular flushing. These systems include: engine oil, transmission oil, axle lube, brake fluid, power steering fluid, and refrigerant. The only exception to this requirement are published in the vehicle maintenance schedules, e.g. engine coolant. Exceptions to this recommendation include only those instances where a failure has occurred and/or the system has become compromised, contaminated or overheated beyond the normal operating range. Chrysler Group does NOT recommend aftermarket chemicals to flush the engine, transmission, brake or steering systems. Chemicals contained in these products can damage the system elastomeric components, and contaminate the component fluid, leading to loss of system/component durability and service life. When necessary, only the original approved system fluid should be used to flush these components using teamPSE(R) approved equipment. If the engine coolant contains a considerable amount of sediment, clean and flush with Mopar Cooling System Flush, p/n 04856977, or equivalent. Follow with a thorough rinsing to remove all deposits and chemicals. Refill with a minimum of a 50% mixture of the specified coolant and distilled water. POLICY: Information Only Disclaimer: This bulletin is supplied as technical information only and is not an authorization for repair. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Engine Oil > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications Engine Oil: Capacity Specifications Engine Oil ............................................................................................................................................ ............................................................. 5.7L (6.0 Qt) Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Engine Oil > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications > Page 2295 Engine Oil: Fluid Type Specifications Engine Oil Type ................................................................................................................................... ............................................................... SAE 5W-30 API Certified, meeting material standard MS-6395 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Engine Oil > Component Information > Description and Operation > Engine Oil Engine Oil: Description and Operation Engine Oil ENGINE OIL WARNING: New or used engine oil can be irritating to the skin. Avoid prolonged or repeated skin contact with engine oil. Contaminants in used engine oil, caused by internal combustion, can be hazardous to your health. Thoroughly wash exposed skin with soap and water. Do not wash skin with gasoline, diesel fuel, thinner, or solvents, health problems can result. Do not pollute, dispose of used engine oil properly. Contact your dealer or government agency for location of collection center in your area. Only lubricants bearing designations defined by the following organization should be used. - Society of Automotive Engineers (SAE) - American Petroleum Institute (API) - National Lubricating Grease Institute (NLGI) - Association des Constructeurs EuropA■©ens d' Automobiles (European Automobile Manufacturers Association) (ACEA) API SERVICE GRADE CERTIFIED Use an engine oil that is API Certified. MOPAR(R) provides engine oils, that meet or exceed this requirement. SAE VISCOSITY An SAE viscosity grade is used to specify the viscosity of engine oil. Use only engine oils with multiple viscosities such as 5W-20 or 5W-30. These are specified with a dual SAE viscosity grade which indicates the cold-to-hot temperature viscosity range. Select an engine oil that is best suited to your particular temperature range and variation. For 3.7L/4.7L engines SAE 5W-20 engine oil is recommended for all operating temperatures. For 5.7L engines SAE 5W-20 engine oil is recommended for all operating temperatures.These engine oils improve low temperature starting and vehicle fuel economy. Refer to your engine oil filler cap for the recommended engine oil viscosity for your vehicle. Vehicles with 5.7L engines equipped with Multiple Displacement System (MDS) must use SAE 5W-20 oil. Failure to do so may result in improper operation of the Multiple Displacement System (MDS). Refer to the engine oil filler cap for the recommended engine oil viscosity for each vehicle. ACEA Categories For countries that use the ACEA European Oil Categories for Service Fill Oils, use engine oils that meet the requirements of ACEA A1/B1, A2/B2, or A3/B3. ENERGY CONSERVING OIL An Energy Conserving type oil is recommended for gasoline engines. The designation of ENERGY CONSERVING is located on the label of an engine oil container. CONTAINER IDENTIFICATION Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Engine Oil > Component Information > Description and Operation > Engine Oil > Page 2298 Standard engine oil identification notations have been adopted to aid in the proper selection of engine oil. The identifying notations are located on the front label of engine oil plastic bottles and the top of engine oil cans. This symbol means that the oil has been certified by the American Petroleum Institute (API). Daimler/Chrysler only recommend API Certified engine oils. Use Mopar(R) engine oil or equivalent. SYNTHETIC ENGINE OILS There are a number of engine oils being promoted as either synthetic or semi-synthetic. If you chose to use such a product, use only those oils that meet the American Petroleum Institute (API) and SAE viscosity standard. Follow the service schedule that describes your driving type. ENGINE OIL ADDITIVES/SUPPLEMENTS The manufacturer does not recommend the addition of any engine oil additives/supplements to the specified engine oil. Engine oil additives/supplements should not be used to enhance engine oil performance. Engine oil additives/supplements should not be used to extend engine oil change intervals. No additive is known to be safe for engine durability and can degrade emission components. Additives can contain undesirable materials that harm the long term durability of engines by: - Doubling the level of phosphorus in the engine oil. The ILSAC (International Lubricant Standard Approval Committee) GF-2 and GF-3 standards require that engine oil contain no more than 0.10% phosphorus to protect the vehicles emissions performance. Addition of engine oil additives/supplements can poison, from the added sulfur and phosphorus, catalysts and hinder efforts to guarantee emissions performance to 80,000 miles. - Altering the viscosity characteristics of the engine oil so that it no longer meets the requirements of the specified viscosity grade. - Creating potential for an undesirable additive compatibility interaction in the engine crankcase. Generally it is not desirable to mix additive packages from different suppliers in the crankcase; there have been reports of low temperature engine failures caused by additive package incompatibility with such mixtures. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Engine Oil > Component Information > Description and Operation > Engine Oil > Page 2299 Engine Oil: Description and Operation Engine Oil - Flexible Fuel Engines FLEXIBLE FUEL ENGINE OIL This information is for Flexible Fuel Vehicles (FFV) only. These vehicles can be identified by the unique Fuel Filler Door Label that states Ethanol (E-85) or Unleaded Gasoline Only. This information only covers those subjects that are unique to these vehicles. ETHANOL FUEL (E-85) E-85 is a mixture of approximately 85% fuel ethanol and 15% unleaded gasoline. WARNING: Ethanol vapors are extremely flammable and could cause serious personal injury. Never have any smoking materials lit in or near the vehicle when removing the fuel filler tube cap (gas cap) or filling the tank. Do not use E-85 as a cleaning agent and never use it near an open flame. FUEL REQUIREMENTS The vehicle will operate on both unleaded gasoline with an octane rating of 87, or E-85 fuel, or any mixture of these two. For best results, a refueling pattern that alternates between E-85 and unleaded gasoline should be avoided. When you do switch fuels, it is recommended that - you do not switch when the fuel gauge indicates less than 1/4 full - you do not add less than 5 gallons when refueling - you operate the vehicle immediately after refueling for a period of at least 5 minutes Observing these precautions will avoid possible hard starting and/or significant deterioration in driveability during warm up. FFV STARTING The characteristics of E-85 fuel make it unsuitable for use when ambient temperatures fall below -18°C (0°F). In the range of -18°C (0°F) to 0°C (32°F), you may experience an increase in the time it takes for your engine to start, and a deterioration in driveability (sags and/or hesitations) until the engine is fully warmed up. Engine Operating on E-85 Fuel If vehicle operates on E-85 fuel either full or part-time, use only Mopar(R) Flexible Fuel 5W-30 engine oil or an equivalent that meets DaimlerChrysler Standard MS-9214. Equivalent commercial Flexible Fuel engine oils may be labeled as Multi-Fuel, Variable Fuel, Flexible Fuel, etc. These engine oils may be satisfactory if they meet the DaimlerChrysler Standard. SAE 5W-30 engine oil is preferred for use in Flexible Fuel engines. CAUTION: If Flexible Fuel engine oil is not used when using E-85 fuel, engine wear or damage may result. CRUISING RANGE Because E-85 fuel contains less energy per gallon than gasoline, you will experience an increase in fuel consumption. You can expect your MPG and your driving range to decrease by about 30% compared to gasoline operation. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Engine Oil > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 2300 Engine Oil: Service and Repair STANDARD PROCEDURE - ENGINE OIL SERVICE The engine oil level indicator (2) is located at the right rear of the engine on the 4.7L engines. CRANKCASE OIL LEVEL INSPECTION CAUTION: Do not overfill crankcase with engine oil, pressure loss or oil foaming can result. Inspect engine oil level approximately every 800 kilometers (500 miles). Unless the engine has exhibited loss of oil pressure, run the engine for about five minutes before checking oil level. Checking engine oil level on a cold engine is not accurate. To ensure proper lubrication of an engine, the engine oil must be maintained at an acceptable level. The acceptable levels are indicated between the ADD and SAFE marks on the engine oil dipstick. 1. Position vehicle on level surface. 2. With engine OFF, allow approximately ten minutes for oil to settle to bottom of crankcase, remove engine oil dipstick. 3. Wipe dipstick clean. 4. Install dipstick and verify it is seated in the tube. 5. Remove dipstick, with handle held above the tip, take oil level reading. 6. Add oil only if level is below the ADD mark on dipstick. ENGINE OIL CHANGE Change engine oil at mileage and time intervals described in Maintenance Schedules. Run engine until achieving normal operating temperature. 1. Position the vehicle on a level surface and turn engine off. 2. Hoist and support vehicle on safety stands. 3. Remove oil fill cap. 4. Place a suitable drain pan under crankcase drain. 5. Remove drain plug from crankcase and allow oil to drain into pan. Inspect drain plug threads for stretching or other damage. Replace drain plug if damaged. 6. Install drain plug in crankcase. 7. Lower vehicle and fill crankcase with specified type and amount of engine oil. 8. Install oil fill cap. 9. Start engine and inspect for leaks. 10. Stop engine and inspect oil level. NOTE: Care should be exercised when disposing used engine oil after it has been drained from a vehicle engine. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Power Steering Fluid > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Maintenance - Fluid Flushing Information Power Steering Fluid: Technical Service Bulletins Maintenance - Fluid Flushing Information NUMBER: 26-001-09 GROUP: Miscellaneous DATE: September 24, 2009 THIS BULLETIN SUPERSEDES TECHNICAL SERVICE BULLETIN 26-003-07, DATED MARCH 30, 2007, WHICH SHOULD BE REMOVED FROM YOUR FILES. THIS IS A COMPLETE REVISION AND NO ASTERISKS HAVE BEEN USED TO HIGHLIGHT REVISIONS. SUBJECT: Fluid Flushing Requirements MODELS: 2005 - 2008 (CS) Pacifica 2006 - 2009 (D1) Ram Truck (3500 Pick Up) 2010 (D2) Ram Truck (3500 Pick Up) 2007 - 2010 (DC) Ram Truck (3500 Chassis Cab) 2005 - 2009 (DH) Ram Truck (1500/2500 Pick Up) 2010 (DJ) Ram Truck (2500 Pick Up) 2005 - 2008 (DR) Ram Truck (1500/2500 Pick Up) 2009 - 2010 (DS) Ram Truck (1500) 2005 - 2009 (HB) Durango 2007 - 2009 (HG) Aspen 2009 - 2010 (JC) Journey 2007 - 2010 (JK) Wrangler 2005 - 2006 (JR) Sebring Sedan & Convertible/Stratus Sedan 2007 - 2010 (JS) Avenger/Sebring 2008 - 2010 (KK) Liberty 2007 - 2010 (KA) Nitro 2005 - 2007 (KJ) Liberty 2009 - 2010 (LC) Challenger 2005 - 2010 (LE) 300C/300C Touring (International Markets) 2005 - 2010 (LX) 300/Magnum/Charger 2007 - 2010 (MK) Compass/Patriot 2005 - 2010 (ND) Dakota 2005 - 2006 (PL) Neon 2007 - 2010 (PM) Caliber 2005 - 2010 (PT) Chrysler PT Cruiser Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Power Steering Fluid > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Maintenance - Fluid Flushing Information > Page 2305 2005 - 2007 (RG) Chrysler Voyager (International Markets) 2005 - 2007 (RS) Town & Country/Caravan/Voyager 2009 - 2010 (RT) Town & Country/Grand Caravan 2005 - 2006 (TJ) Wrangler 2005 - 2006 (VA) Sprinter 2007 - 2010 (VB) Sprinter 2005 - 2010 (WH) Grand Cherokee (International Markets) 2005 - 2010 (WK) Grand Cherokee 2006 - 2010 (XH) Commander (International Markets) 2006 - 2010 (XK) Commander 2005 - 2010 (ZB) Viper 2005 - 2007 (ZH) Crossfire DISCUSSION: Chrysler Group vehicle fluid systems do NOT require regular flushing. These systems include: engine oil, transmission oil, axle lube, brake fluid, power steering fluid, and refrigerant. The only exception to this requirement are published in the vehicle maintenance schedules, e.g. engine coolant. Exceptions to this recommendation include only those instances where a failure has occurred and/or the system has become compromised, contaminated or overheated beyond the normal operating range. Chrysler Group does NOT recommend aftermarket chemicals to flush the engine, transmission, brake or steering systems. Chemicals contained in these products can damage the system elastomeric components, and contaminate the component fluid, leading to loss of system/component durability and service life. When necessary, only the original approved system fluid should be used to flush these components using teamPSE(R) approved equipment. If the engine coolant contains a considerable amount of sediment, clean and flush with Mopar Cooling System Flush, p/n 04856977, or equivalent. Follow with a thorough rinsing to remove all deposits and chemicals. Refill with a minimum of a 50% mixture of the specified coolant and distilled water. POLICY: Information Only Disclaimer: This bulletin is supplied as technical information only and is not an authorization for repair. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Power Steering Fluid > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 2306 Power Steering Fluid: Specifications POWER STEERING FLUID Mopar ATF +4 Automatic Transmission Fluid. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Power Steering Fluid > Component Information > Description and Operation > Power Steering Fluid Power Steering Fluid: Description and Operation Power Steering Fluid POWER STEERING FLUID Mopar(R) ATF +4, Automatic Transmission Fluid is required in the power steering system. Substitute fluids can induce power steering system failure. Mopar(R) ATF +4, Automatic Transmission Fluid when new is red in color. The ATF is dyed red so it can be identified from other fluids used in the vehicle such as engine oil or antifreeze. The red color is not permanent and is not an indicator of fluid condition. As the vehicle is driven, the ATF will begin to look darker in color and may eventually become brown. This is normal. ATF+4 also has a unique odor that may change with age. Consequently, odor and color cannot be used to indicate the fluid condition or the need for a fluid change. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Power Steering Fluid > Component Information > Description and Operation > Power Steering Fluid > Page 2309 Power Steering Fluid: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION NOTE: It is normal that some pressure will build up inside the reservoir, especially, with a warm vehicle. A slight popping noise upon removal of the cap is normal. The fluid level should read between the ADD and the FULL COLD marks. When the fluid is hot it should read between ADD and FULL HOT marks. Only add fluid when the vehicle is cold. The recommended fluid for the power steering system is Mopar(R) ATF +4. Mopar(R) ATF+4, when new is red in color. The ATF+4 is dyed red so it can be identified from other fluids used in the vehicle such as engine oil or antifreeze. The red color is not permanent and is not an indicator of fluid condition, As the vehicle is driven, the ATF+4 will begin to look darker in color and may eventually become brown. THIS IS NORMAL. ATF+4 also has a unique odor that may change with age. Consequently, odor and color cannot be used to indicate the fluid condition or the need for a fluid change. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Power Steering Fluid > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 2310 Power Steering Fluid: Testing and Inspection POWER STEERING FLUID LEVEL CHECKING WARNING: FLUID LEVEL SHOULD BE CHECKED WITH THE ENGINE OFF TO PREVENT PERSONAL INJURY FROM MOVING PARTS. CAUTION: MOPAR(R) ATF+4 is to be used in the power steering system. No other power steering or automatic transmission fluid is to be used in the system. Damage may result to the power steering pump and system if any other fluid is used, and do not overfill. The power steering fluid level can be viewed on the dipstick attached to the filler cap. There are two ranges listed on the dipstick, COLD and HOT. Before opening power steering system, wipe the reservoir filler cap free of dirt and debris. Remove the cap and check the fluid level on its dipstick. When the fluid is at normal ambient temperature, approximately 21°C to 27°C (70°F to 80°F), the fluid level should read between the minimum and maximum area of the cold range. When the fluid is hot, fluid level is allowed to read up to the highest end of the HOT range. Only add fluid when the vehicle is cold. Use only Mopar(R) ATF+4. Do not overfill the power steering system. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Refrigerant > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications Refrigerant: Capacity Specifications REFRIGERANT CHARGE LEVEL Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Refrigerant > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications > Page 2315 Refrigerant: Fluid Type Specifications A/C SYSTEM Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Refrigerant > Component Information > Description and Operation > A/C Refrigerant Refrigerant: Description and Operation A/C Refrigerant A/C REFRIGERANT The refrigerant used in this air conditioning system is a HydroFluoroCarbon (HFC), type R-134a. Unlike R-12, which is a ChloroFluoroCarbon (CFC), R-134a refrigerant does not contain ozone-depleting chlorine. R-134a refrigerant is a non-toxic, non-flammable, clear and colorless liquefied gas. CAUTION: R-134a refrigerant is not compatible with R-12 refrigerant in an A/C system. Even a small amount of R-12 refrigerant added to an R-134a refrigerant system will cause A/C compressor failure. The A/C refrigerant system is filled-for-life at the factory and requires no regular maintenance. Although not required at specific intervals, the charge level should be checked if system performance deteriorates or if a noise or leak is suspected See: Heating and Air Conditioning/Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/Refrigerant System Leaks . Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Refrigerant > Component Information > Description and Operation > A/C Refrigerant > Page 2318 Refrigerant: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The refrigerant used in this air conditioning system is a HydroFluoroCarbon (HFC), type R-134a. Unlike R-12, which is a ChloroFluoroCarbon (CFC), R-134a refrigerant does not contain ozone-depleting chlorine. R-134a refrigerant is a non-toxic, non-flammable, clear, and colorless liquefied gas. Even though R-134a does not contain chlorine, it must be reclaimed and recycled just like CFC-type refrigerants. This is because R-134a is a greenhouse gas and can contribute to global warming See: Heating and Air Conditioning/Service and Repair/Refrigerant System Recovery . Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Refrigerant > Component Information > Description and Operation > A/C Refrigerant > Page 2319 Refrigerant: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION R-134a refrigerant is not compatible with R-12 refrigerant in an A/C system. Even a small amount of R-12 refrigerant added to an R-134a refrigerant system will cause A/C compressor failure, refrigerant oil sludge or poor A/C system performance. In addition, the polyalkylene glycol (PAG) synthetic refrigerant oils used in an R-134a refrigerant system are not compatible with the mineral-based refrigerant oils used in an R-12 refrigerant system. R-134a refrigerant system service ports, service tool couplers and refrigerant dispensing bottles have all been designed with unique fittings to ensure that an R-134a refrigerant system is not accidentally contaminated with the wrong refrigerant (R-12). There are also labels posted in the engine compartment of the vehicle and on the A/C compressor to identify that the A/C system is equipped with R-134a refrigerant. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Refrigerant > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 2320 Refrigerant: Testing and Inspection REFRIGERANT SYSTEM LEAKS WARNING: R-134a service equipment or vehicle A/C system should not be pressure tested or leak tested with compressed air. Mixture of air and R-134a can be combustible at elevated pressures. These mixtures are potentially dangerous and may result in fire or explosion causing property damage and serious or fatal injury. Avoid breathing A/C refrigerant and lubricant vapor or mist. Exposure may irritate eyes, nose and throat. Use only approved service equipment meeting SAE requirements to discharge an R-134a system. If accidental system discharge occurs, ventilate work area before resuming service. NOTE: If the A/C refrigerant system charge is empty or low, a leak in the A/C system is likely. Visually inspect all A/C lines, fittings and components for an oily residue. Oil residue can be an indicator of an A/C system leak location. NOTE: The only way to correctly determine if the refrigerant system is fully charged with R-134a is to completely evacuate and recharge the A/C system. Connect a suitable manifold gauge set and determine if the static A/C system pressure is above or below 345 kPa (50 psi) See: Heating and Air Conditioning/Tools and Equipment/Refrigerant System Service Equipment . If less than 345 kPa (50 psi), proceed to SYSTEM EMPTY. If greater than 345 kPa (50 psi), go to SYSTEM LOW. SYSTEM EMPTY 1. Evacuate the refrigerant system to the lowest degree of vacuum possible (approximately -88 kPa (- 26 in. Hg) or greater vacuum) See: Heating and Air Conditioning/Service and Repair/Refrigerant System Evacuate . Determine if the system holds a vacuum for 15 minutes. If vacuum is held, a leak is probably not present. If system will not maintain vacuum level, proceed to STEP 2. 2. Prepare and dispense 0.284 kilograms (10 ounces) of R-134a refrigerant into the evacuated refrigerant system See: Heating and Air Conditioning/Service and Repair/Refrigerant System Charge and proceed to STEP 1 of the System Low procedure. SYSTEM LOW 3. Position the vehicle in a wind-free work area. This will aid in detecting small leaks. 4. Operate the heating-A/C system with the engine at idle under the following conditions for at least 5 minutes. - Doors or windows open - Transmission in Park or Neutral with the parking brake set (depending on application) - A/C-heater controls set to outside air, full cool, panel mode, high blower and with A/C compressor engaged CAUTION: A leak detector only designed for R-12 refrigerant will not detect leaks in an R-134a refrigerant system. 5. Shut the vehicle Off and wait 2-7 minutes. Then use an electronic leak detector that is designed to detect R-134a refrigerant and search for leaks. Fittings, lines or components that appear to be oily usually indicate a refrigerant leak. To inspect the A/C evaporator for leaks, insert the leak detector probe into the drain tube opening or an air outlet. A dye for R-134a is available to aid in leak detection. Use only DaimlerChrysler approved refrigerant dye. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Refrigerant > Component Information > Service and Repair > Refrigerant System - Recovery Refrigerant: Service and Repair Refrigerant System - Recovery REFRIGERANT SYSTEM RECOVERY WARNING: Refer to the applicable warnings and cautions for this system before performing the following operation See: Heating and Air Conditioning/Service Precautions/Warning and See: Heating and Air Conditioning/Service Precautions/Caution. Failure to follow the warnings and cautions may result in serious or fatal injury. An R-134a refrigerant recovery/recycling/charging station (1) that meets SAE standard J2210 must be used to recover the refrigerant from the R-134a refrigerant system. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Refrigerant > Component Information > Service and Repair > Refrigerant System - Recovery > Page 2323 Refrigerant: Service and Repair Refrigerant System - Evacuate REFRIGERANT SYSTEM EVACUATE NOTE: Special effort must be used to prevent moisture from entering the A/C system oil. Moisture in the oil is very difficult to remove and will cause a reliability problem with the A/C compressor. If an A/C compressor designed to use R-134a refrigerant is left open to the atmosphere for an extended period of time. It is recommended that the refrigerant oil be drained and replaced with new oil or a new A/C compressor be used. This will eliminate the possibility of contaminating the refrigerant system. If the refrigerant system has been open to the atmosphere, it must be evacuated before the system can be filled. Moisture and air mixed with the refrigerant will raise the compressor head pressure above acceptable operating levels. This will reduce the performance of the A/C system and damage the A/C compressor. Moisture will boil at near room temperature when exposed to vacuum. To evacuate the refrigerant system: NOTE: When connecting the service equipment coupling to the line fitting, verify that the valve of the coupling is fully closed. This will reduce the amount of effort required to make the connection. 1. Recover the refrigerant system See: Heating and Air Conditioning/Service and Repair/Refrigerant System Recovery . 2. Connect a suitable charging station, refrigerant recovery machine or a manifold gauge set with vacuum pump and refrigerant recovery equipment See: Heating and Air Conditioning/Tools and Equipment/Refrigerant System Service Equipment . 3. Open the suction and discharge valves and start the vacuum pump. The vacuum pump should run a minimum of 45 minutes prior to charge to eliminate all moisture in system. When the suction gauge reads to the lowest degree of vacuum possible (approximately -88 kPa (- 26 in. Hg) or greater) for 30 minutes, close all valves and turn off vacuum pump. If the system fails to reach specified vacuum, the refrigerant system likely has a leak that must be corrected. If the refrigerant system maintains specified vacuum for at least 30 minutes, start the vacuum pump, open the suction and discharge valves. Then allow the system to evacuate an additional 10 minutes. 4. Close all valves. Turn off and disconnect the vacuum pump. 5. Charge the refrigerant system See: Heating and Air Conditioning/Service and Repair/Refrigerant System Charge . Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Refrigerant > Component Information > Service and Repair > Refrigerant System - Recovery > Page 2324 Refrigerant: Service and Repair Refrigerant System - Charge REFRIGERANT SYSTEM CHARGE WARNING: Refer to the applicable warnings and cautions for this system before performing the following operation See: Heating and Air Conditioning/Service Precautions/Warning and See: Heating and Air Conditioning/Service Precautions/Caution. Failure to follow the warnings and cautions may result in serious or fatal injury. NOTE: The Underhood HVAC Specification Label contains the refrigerant fill specification of the vehicle being serviced. After all refrigerant system leaks have been repaired and the refrigerant system has been evacuated, a refrigerant charge can be injected into the system or the Underhood HVAC Specification Label for the proper amount of the refrigerant charge. See: Heating and Air Conditioning/Specifications/Capacity Specifications . An R-134a refrigerant recovery/recycling/charging station that meets SAE Standard J2210 must be used to charge the refrigerant system with R-134a refrigerant. Refer to the operating instructions supplied by the equipment manufacturer for proper care and use of this equipment. CHARGING PROCEDURE CAUTION: A small amount of refrigerant oil is removed from the A/C system each time the refrigerant system is recovered and evacuated. Before charging the A/C system, you MUST replenish any oil lost during the recovery process. Refer the equipment manufacturer instructions for more information. 1. Evacuate the refrigerant system See: Heating and Air Conditioning/Service and Repair/Refrigerant System Evacuate . 2. Connect an R-134a refrigerant recovery/recycling/charging station that meets SAE standard J2210 to the refrigerant system. 3. Refer to A/C SPECIFICATIONS or the Underhood HVAC Specification Label for the proper amount of the refrigerant charge. 4. Measure the proper amount of refrigerant and heat it to 52° C (125° F) with the charging station. See the operating instructions supplied by the equipment manufacturer for proper use of this equipment. 5. Open both the suction and discharge valves, then open the charge valve to allow the heated refrigerant to flow into the system. 6. When the transfer of refrigerant has stopped, close both the suction and discharge valves. 7. If all of the refrigerant charge did not transfer from the dispensing device, open all of the windows in the vehicle and set the heating-A/C system controls so that the A/C compressor is engaged and the blower motor is operating at its lowest speed setting. Run the engine at a steady high idle (about 1400 rpm). If the A/C compressor does not engage, test the compressor clutch circuits and repair as required. WARNING: Take care not to open the discharge (high pressure) valve at this time. Failure to follow this warning may result in serious or fatal injury. 8. Open the low-side valve to allow the remaining refrigerant to transfer to the refrigerant system. 9. Disconnect the charging station from the refrigerant system service ports. 10. Reinstall the caps onto the refrigerant system service ports. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Refrigerant > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 2325 Refrigerant: Tools and Equipment REFRIGERANT SYSTEM SERVICE EQUIPMENT WARNING: Eye protection must be worn when servicing an A/C refrigerant system. Turn all valves off (rotate clockwise) on the equipment being used before connecting or disconnecting service equipment from the refrigerant system. Failure to observe these warnings may result in personal injury or death. WARNING: Refer to the applicable warnings and cautions for this system before performing the following operation See: Heating and Air Conditioning/Service Precautions/Warning and See: Heating and Air Conditioning/Service Precautions/Caution. Failure to follow the warnings and cautions could result in possible personal injury or death. When servicing the A/C system, an R-134a refrigerant recovery/recycling/charging station (1) that meets SAE standard J2210 must be used. Contact an automotive service equipment supplier for refrigerant recovery/recycling/charging equipment. Refer to the operating instructions supplied by the equipment manufacturer for proper care and use of this equipment. A manifold gauge set (1) may be needed with some recovery/recycling/charging equipment. The manifold gauge set should have manual shut-off valves (2 and 6), or automatic back-flow valves located at the service port connector end of the manifold gauge set hoses (4 and 5). This will prevent refrigerant from being released into the atmosphere. MANIFOLD GAUGE SET CONNECTIONS CAUTION: Do not use an R-12 manifold gauge set on an R-134a system. The refrigerants are not compatible and system damage will result. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Refrigerant > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 2326 RECOVERY/RECYCLING/EVACUATION/CHARGING HOSE - The center manifold hose (Yellow, or White, with Black stripe) (3) is used to recover, evacuate, and charge the refrigerant system. When the low or high pressure valves on the manifold gauge set are opened, the refrigerant in the system will escape through this hose. HIGH PRESSURE GAUGE HOSE - The high pressure hose (Red with Black stripe) (4) attaches to the high side service port. This service port is located on the A/C discharge line. On this model, an A/C pressure transducer is installed on the high side service port. A/C high-side pressures can be read using a scan tool. LOW PRESSURE GAUGE HOSE - The low pressure hose (Blue with Black stripe) (5) attaches to the low side service port. This service port is located either on the top of the A/C accumulator or on the A/C suction line near the accumulator, depending on engine application. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Refrigerant Oil > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications Refrigerant Oil: Capacity Specifications REFRIGERANT OIL LEVEL When an A/C system is assembled at the factory, all components except the A/C compressor are refrigerant oil free. After the refrigerant system has been charged and operated, the refrigerant oil in the A/C compressor is dispersed throughout the refrigerant system. The accumulator, A/C evaporator, A/C condenser and the A/C compressor will each retain a significant amount of the needed refrigerant oil. It is important to have the correct amount of refrigerant oil in the A/C system. This ensures proper lubrication of the A/C compressor. Too little oil will result in damage to the A/C compressor, while too much oil will reduce the cooling capacity of the A/C system and consequently result in higher discharge air temperatures. CAUTION: The refrigerant oil in the R-134a A/C system is unique depending on the A/C compressor used. Use only PAG oils that are designed to work with R-134a refrigerant and the A/C compressor in the vehicle. Always refer to the A/C Underhood Specification Label for the correct oil designation. The oil container should be kept tightly capped until it is ready for use and then tightly capped after use to prevent contamination from dirt and moisture. Refrigerant oil will quickly absorb any moisture it comes in contact with, therefore, special effort must be used to keep all R-134a system components moisture-free. Moisture in the refrigerant oil is very difficult to remove and will cause a reliability problem with the A/C compressor. NOTE: Most reclaim/recycling equipment will measure the lubricant being removed during recovery. This amount of lubricant should be added back into the system. It will not be necessary to check the oil level in the A/C compressor or to add oil, unless there has been an oil loss. An oil loss may occur due to a rupture or leak from a refrigerant line, a connector fitting, a component, or a component seal. If a leak occurs, add 30 milliliters (1 fluid ounce) of refrigerant oil to the refrigerant system after the repair has been made. Refrigerant oil loss will be evident at the leak point by the presence of a wet, shiny surface around the leak. Refrigerant oil must be added when an A/C accumulator, A/C evaporator or A/C condenser is replaced. See the Refrigerant Oil Capacities chart. The refrigerant oil level in a new A/C compressor must first be adjusted prior to compressor installation (refer to COMPRESSOR OIL DRAIN PROCEDURE). COMPRESSOR OIL DRAIN PROCEDURE CAUTION: Be certain to adjust the refrigerant system oil level when replacing an A/C compressor. Failure to properly drain and measure the refrigerant oil from the A/C compressor can prevent the A/C system from operating as designed and cause serious compressor damage. The A/C compressor is filled with refrigerant oil from the factory. Use the following procedure to drain and measure refrigerant oil from the A/C compressor. 1. Drain all of the refrigerant oil from the old A/C compressor into a clean measured container. 2. Drain all of the refrigerant oil from the new A/C compressor into a clean measured container. 3. Refill the new A/C compressor with the same amount of refrigerant oil that was drained out of the old compressor. Use only clean refrigerant oil of the type recommended for the A/C compressor in the vehicle. 4. Install the new A/C compressor onto the engine See: Heating and Air Conditioning/Compressor HVAC/Service and Repair/A/C Compressor Installation . Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Refrigerant Oil > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications > Page 2331 Refrigerant Oil: Fluid Type Specifications A/C SYSTEM Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Refrigerant Oil > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Refrigerant Oil: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The refrigerant oil used in R-134a refrigerant systems is a synthetic-based, polyalkylene glycol (PAG), wax-free lubricant. Mineral-based R-12 refrigerant oils are not compatible with PAG oils, and should never be introduced to an R-134a refrigerant system. There are different PAG oils available, and each contains a different additive package. Use only refrigerant oil of the same type as recommended to service the refrigerant system (always refer to the specification tag included with the replacement A/C compressor or the A/C Underhood Specification Label located in the engine compartment). The Denso 10S17 A/C compressor used in this vehicle when equipped with the 3.7L, 4.7L or 5.7L engine is designed to use ND-8 PAG refrigerant oil. Use only this type of refrigerant oil when servicing the A/C compressor for these engines. The Visteon HS-18 A/C compressor used in this vehicle when equipped with 5.9L or 6.7L diesel engine is designed to use VC-46 PAG refrigerant oil. Use only this type of refrigerant oil when servicing this A/C compressor. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Refrigerant Oil > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 2334 Refrigerant Oil: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION After performing any refrigerant recovery or recycling operation, always replenish the refrigerant system with the same amount of the recommended refrigerant oil as was removed. Too little refrigerant oil can cause A/C compressor damage, and too much can reduce A/C system performance. PAG refrigerant oil is more hygroscopic than mineral oil, and will absorb any moisture it comes into contact with, even moisture in the air. The PAG oil container should always be kept tightly capped until it is ready to be used. After use, recap the oil container immediately to prevent moisture contamination. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Refrigerant Oil > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 2335 Refrigerant Oil: Service and Repair REFRIGERANT OIL LEVEL When an A/C system is assembled at the factory, all components except the A/C compressor are refrigerant oil free. After the refrigerant system has been charged and operated, the refrigerant oil in the A/C compressor is dispersed throughout the refrigerant system. The accumulator, A/C evaporator, A/C condenser and the A/C compressor will each retain a significant amount of the needed refrigerant oil. It is important to have the correct amount of refrigerant oil in the A/C system. This ensures proper lubrication of the A/C compressor. Too little oil will result in damage to the A/C compressor, while too much oil will reduce the cooling capacity of the A/C system and consequently result in higher discharge air temperatures. CAUTION: The refrigerant oil in the R-134a A/C system is unique depending on the A/C compressor used. Use only PAG oils that are designed to work with R-134a refrigerant and the A/C compressor in the vehicle. Always refer to the A/C Underhood Specification Label for the correct oil designation. The oil container should be kept tightly capped until it is ready for use and then tightly capped after use to prevent contamination from dirt and moisture. Refrigerant oil will quickly absorb any moisture it comes in contact with, therefore, special effort must be used to keep all R-134a system components moisture-free. Moisture in the refrigerant oil is very difficult to remove and will cause a reliability problem with the A/C compressor. NOTE: Most reclaim/recycling equipment will measure the lubricant being removed during recovery. This amount of lubricant should be added back into the system. It will not be necessary to check the oil level in the A/C compressor or to add oil, unless there has been an oil loss. An oil loss may occur due to a rupture or leak from a refrigerant line, a connector fitting, a component, or a component seal. If a leak occurs, add 30 milliliters (1 fluid ounce) of refrigerant oil to the refrigerant system after the repair has been made. Refrigerant oil loss will be evident at the leak point by the presence of a wet, shiny surface around the leak. Refrigerant oil must be added when an A/C accumulator, A/C evaporator or A/C condenser is replaced. See the Refrigerant Oil Capacities chart. The refrigerant oil level in a new A/C compressor must first be adjusted prior to compressor installation (refer to COMPRESSOR OIL DRAIN PROCEDURE). COMPRESSOR OIL DRAIN PROCEDURE CAUTION: Be certain to adjust the refrigerant system oil level when replacing an A/C compressor. Failure to properly drain and measure the refrigerant oil from the A/C compressor can prevent the A/C system from operating as designed and cause serious compressor damage. The A/C compressor is filled with refrigerant oil from the factory. Use the following procedure to drain and measure refrigerant oil from the A/C compressor. 1. Drain all of the refrigerant oil from the old A/C compressor into a clean measured container. 2. Drain all of the refrigerant oil from the new A/C compressor into a clean measured container. 3. Refill the new A/C compressor with the same amount of refrigerant oil that was drained out of the old compressor. Use only clean refrigerant oil of the type recommended for the A/C compressor in the vehicle. 4. Install the new A/C compressor onto the engine See: Heating and Air Conditioning/Compressor HVAC/Service and Repair/A/C Compressor Installation . Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Brake Bleeding > System Information > Service and Repair > Master Cylinder Bleeding Brake Bleeding: Service and Repair Master Cylinder Bleeding MASTER CYLINDER BLEEDING A new master cylinder should be bled before installation on the vehicle. Required bleeding tools include bleed tubes and a wood dowel to stroke the pistons. Bleed tubes can be fabricated from brake line. 1. Mount master cylinder in vise. 2. Attach bleed tubes to cylinder outlet ports (1). Then position each tube end into reservoir (2). 3. Fill reservoir with fresh brake fluid. 4. Press cylinder pistons inward with wood dowel. Then release pistons and allow them to return under spring pressure. Continue bleeding operations until air bubbles are no longer visible in fluid. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Brake Bleeding > System Information > Service and Repair > Master Cylinder Bleeding > Page 2340 Brake Bleeding: Service and Repair ABS Brake Bleeding ABS BRAKE BLEEDING ABS system bleeding requires conventional bleeding methods plus use of a scan tool. The procedure involves performing a base brake bleeding, followed by use of the scan tool to cycle and bleed the HCU pump and solenoids. A second base brake bleeding procedure is then required to remove any air remaining in the system. 1. Perform base brake bleeding, OR . 2. Connect scan tool to the Data Link Connector. 3. Select ANTILOCK BRAKES, followed by MISCELLANEOUS, then ABS BRAKES. Follow the instructions displayed. When scan tool displays TEST COMPLETE, disconnect scan tool and proceed. 4. Perform base brake bleeding a second time, OR . 5. Top off master cylinder fluid level and verify proper brake operation before moving vehicle. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Brake Bleeding > System Information > Service and Repair > Master Cylinder Bleeding > Page 2341 Brake Bleeding: Service and Repair Base Brakes - Manual Bleeding MANUAL BLEEDING Use Mopar brake fluid, or an equivalent quality fluid meeting SAE J1703-F and DOT 3 standards only. Use fresh, clean fluid from a sealed container at all times. 1. Remove reservoir filler caps and fill reservoir. 2. If calipers were overhauled, open all caliper bleed screws. Then close each bleed screw as fluid starts to drip from it. Top off master cylinder reservoir once more before proceeding. 3. Attach one end of bleed hose (1) to bleed screw and insert opposite end in glass container (2) partially filled with brake fluid. Be sure end of bleed hose is immersed in fluid. NOTE: Bleed procedure should be in this order (1) Right rear (2) Left rear (3) Right front (4) Left front. 4. Open up bleeder, then have a helper press down the brake pedal. Once the pedal is down close the bleeder. Repeat bleeding until fluid stream is clear and free of bubbles. Then move to the next wheel. 5. Before moving the vehicle verify the pedal is firm and not mushy. 6. Top off the brake fluid and install the reservoir cap. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Brake Bleeding > System Information > Service and Repair > Master Cylinder Bleeding > Page 2342 Brake Bleeding: Service and Repair Base Brakes - Pressure Bleeding PRESSURE BLEEDING Use Mopar brake fluid, or an equivalent quality fluid meeting SAE J1703-F and DOT 3 standards only. Use fresh, clean fluid from a sealed container at all times. Follow the manufacturers instructions carefully when using pressure equipment. Do not exceed the tank manufacturers pressure recommendations. Generally, a tank pressure of 15-20 psi is sufficient for bleeding. Fill the bleeder tank with recommended fluid and purge air from the tank lines before bleeding. Do not pressure bleed without a proper master cylinder adapter. The wrong adapter can lead to leakage, or drawing air back into the system. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Brake Bleeding > System Information > Service and Repair > Master Cylinder Bleeding > Page 2343 Brake Bleeding: Service and Repair Booster-Hydro-Boost Brake BLEEDING The hydraulic booster is generally self-bleeding, this procedure will normally bleed the air from the booster. Normal driving and operation of the unit will remove any remaining trapped air. 1. Fill power steering pump reservoir. 2. Disconnect fuel shutdown relay and crank the engine for several seconds. 3. Check fluid level and add if necessary. 4. Connect fuel shutdown relay and start the engine. 5. Turn the steering wheel slowly from lock to lock twice. 6. Stop the engine and discharge the accumulator by depressing the brake pedal 5 times. 7. Start the engine and turn the steering wheel slowly from lock to lock twice. 8. Turn off the engine and check fluid level and add if necessary. NOTE: If fluid foaming occurs, wait for foam to dissipate and repeat steps 7 and 8. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Locations Fuse: Locations An integrated Power Module is located in the engine compartment near the battery. This center contains cartridge fuses and mini fuses. A description of each fuse and component may be stamped on the inside cover otherwise the cavity number of each fuse is stamped on the inside cover that corresponds to the following chart. Underhood Fuses (Integrated Power Module) Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Locations > Page 2348 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Locations > Page 2349 CAUTION: - When installing the Integrated Power Module cover, it is important to ensure the cover is properly positioned and fully latched. Failure to do so may allow water to get into the Integrated Power Module, and possibly result in a electrical system failure. - When replacing a blown fuse, it is important to use only a fuse having the correct amperage rating. The use of a fuse with a rating other than indicated may result in a dangerous electrical system overload. If a properly rated fuse continues to blow, it indicates a problem in the circuit that must be corrected. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Fuse: Diagram Information and Instructions Warnings WARNINGS - GENERAL WARNINGS provide information to prevent personal injury and vehicle damage. Below is a list of general warnings that should be followed any time a vehicle is being serviced. WARNING: Always wear safety glasses for eye protection. WARNING: Use safety stands anytime a procedure requires being under a vehicle. WARNING: Be sure that the ignition switch always is in the off position, unless the procedure requires it to be on. WARNING: Set the parking brake when working on any vehicle. An automatic transmission should be in park. A manual transmission should be in neutral. WARNING: Operate the engine only in a well-ventilated area. WARNING: Keep away from moving parts when the engine is running, especially the fan and belts. WARNING: To prevent serious burns, avoid contact with hot parts such as the radiator, exhaust manifold(s), tail pipe, catalytic converter and muffler. WARNING: Do not allow flame or sparks near the battery. Gases are always present in and around the battery. WARNING: Always remove rings, watches, loose hanging jewelry and avoid loose clothing. How to Use Wiring Diagrams DESCRIPTION - HOW TO USE WIRING DIAGRAMS DaimlerChrysler Corporation wiring diagrams are designed to provide information regarding the vehicles wiring content. In order to effectively use the wiring diagrams to diagnose and repair DaimlerChrysler Corporation vehicles, it is important to understand all of their features and characteristics. Diagrams are arranged such that the power (B+) side of the circuit is placed near the top of the page, and the ground (B-) side of the circuit is placed near the bottom of the page. All switches, components, and modules are shown in the at rest position with the doors closed and the key removed from the ignition. Components are shown two ways. A solid line around a component indicates that the component is complete. A dashed line around the component indicates that the component is being shown is not complete. Incomplete components have a reference number to indicate the page where the component is shown complete. It is important to realize that no attempt is made on the diagrams to represent components and wiring as they appear on the vehicle. For example, a short piece of wire is treated the same as a long one. In addition, switches and other components are shown as simply as possible, with regard to function only. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2352 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2353 SYMBOLS International symbols are used throughout the wiring diagrams. These symbols are consistent with those being used around the world. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2354 TERMINOLOGY This is a list of terms and definitions used in the wiring diagrams. LHD - Left Hand Drive Vehicles RHD - Right Hand Drive Vehicles ATX - Automatic Transmissions-Front Wheel Drive MTX Manual Transmissions-Front Wheel Drive Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2355 AT - Automatic Transmissions-Rear Wheel Drive MT - Manual Transmissions-Rear Wheel Drive SOHC - Single Over Head Cam Engine DOHC - Double Over Head Cam Engine Export - Vehicles Built For Sale In Markets Other Than North America Except Export - Vehicles Built For Sale In North America Circuit Functions DESCRIPTION - CIRCUIT FUNCTIONS All circuits in the diagrams use an alpha/numeric code to identify the wire and it's function. To identify which circuit code applies to a system, refer to the Circuit Identification Code Chart. This chart shows the main circuits only and does not show the secondary codes that may apply to some models. Circuit Information DESCRIPTION - CIRCUIT INFORMATION Each wire shown in the diagrams contains a code which identifies the main circuit, a specific part of the main circuit, gage of wire, and color. An example would be A 2 18 LB/YL. This is a Battery Feed circuit, level two, eighteen gauge, light blue with a yellow tracer. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2356 Connector, Ground and Splice Information DESCRIPTION - CONNECTOR, GROUND AND SPLICE INFORMATION CAUTION: Not all connectors are serviced. Some connectors are serviced only with a harness. A typical example might be the Supplemental Restraint System connectors. Always check parts availability before attempting a repair. IDENTIFICATION In-line connectors are identified by a number, as follows: - In-line connectors located in the engine compartment are C100 series numbers. - In-line connectors located in the instrument panel area are C200 series numbers. - In-line connectors located in the body are C300 series numbers. - Jumper harness connectors are C400 series numbers. - Grounds and ground connectors are identified with a "G" and follow the same series numbering as the in-line connectors. - Splices are identified with an "S" and follow the same series numbering as the in-line connectors. In addition, S001-S099 numbers are located in the engine compartment. - Component connectors are identified by the component name instead of a number. Multiple connectors on a component use a C1, C2, etc. identifier. LOCATIONS Vehicle/Locations contains the master connector/ground/splice location index charts with hyperlinks to the applicable location illustrations. The illustrations contain the connector name (or number)/ground number/splice number and component identification. The abbreviation T/O is used in the component location section to indicate a point in which the wiring harness branches out to a component. The abbreviation N/S means Not Shown in the illustrations Section Identification and Information DESCRIPTION - SECTION IDENTIFICATION AND INFORMATION The wiring diagrams are grouped into individual sections. If a component is most likely found in a particular group, it will be shown complete (all wires, Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2357 connectors, and pins) within that group. For example, the Auto Shutdown Relay is most likely to be found in Powertrain Management, so it is shown there complete. It can, however, be shown partially in another group if it contains some associated wiring. Splice diagrams show the entire splice and provide references to other sections the splices serves. Splice Information only contains splice diagrams that are not shown in their entirety somewhere else in the wiring diagrams. Connector Pin-Outs shows each connector and the circuits involved with that connector. The connectors are identified using the name/number on the diagram pages. Removal REMOVAL 1. Disconnect battery. 2. Release Connector Lock (2). 3. Disconnect the connector (3) being repaired from its mating half/component. 4. Remove the dress cover (if applicable) (1). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2358 5. Release the Secondary Terminal Lock, if required (1). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2359 6. Position the connector locking finger away from the terminal using the proper special tool. Pull on the wire to remove the terminal from the connector. Installation Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2360 INSTALLATION 1. Insert the removed terminal in the same cavity on the repair connector. 2. Repeat steps for each terminal in the connector, being sure that all wires are inserted into the proper cavities. For additional connector pin-out identification, refer to the wiring diagrams. 3. When the connector is re-assembled, the secondary terminal lock must be placed in the locked position to prevent terminal push out. 4. Replace dress cover (if applicable). 5. Connect connector to its mating half/component. 6. Connect battery and test all affected systems. Removal REMOVAL 1. Disconnect the battery. 2. Locate the diode in the harness, and remove the protective covering. 3. Remove the diode from the harness, pay attention to the current flow direction (1) (2) (3). Installation INSTALLATION 1. Remove the insulation from the wires in the harness. Only remove enough insulation to solder in the new diode. 2. Install the new diode in the harness, making sure current flow is correct. If necessary, refer to the appropriate wiring diagram for current flow. 3. Solder the connection together using rosin core type solder only. Do not use acid core solder. 4. Tape the diode to the harness using electrical tape. Make sure the diode is completely sealed from the elements. 5. Re-connect the battery and test affected systems. Removal REMOVAL 1. Follow steps for removing terminals described in the connector removal section. 2. Cut the wire 6 inches from the back of the connector. Installation INSTALLATION 1. Select a wire from the terminal repair kit that best matches the color and gage of the wire being repaired. 2. Cut the repair wire to the proper length and remove one-half (1/2) inch of insulation. 3. Splice the repair wire to the wire harness (see wire splicing procedure). See: Service Procedures/Wire Splicing 4. Insert the repaired wire into the connector. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2361 5. Install the connector locking wedge, if required, and reconnect the connector to its mating half/component. 6. Re-tape the wire harness starting at 1-1/2 inches behind the connector and 2 inches past the repair. 7. Connect battery and test all affected systems. Wire Splicing STANDARD PROCEDURE - WIRE SPLICING When splicing a wire, it is important that the correct gage be used as shown in the wiring diagrams. 1. Remove one-half (1/2) inch of insulation from each wire that needs to be spliced. 2. Place a piece of adhesive lined heat shrink tubing on one side of the wire. Make sure the tubing will be long enough to cover and seal the entire repair area. 3. Place the strands of wire overlapping each other inside of the splice clip (1). 4. Using crimping tool (1), Mopar p/n 05019912AA, crimp the splice clip and wires together. 5. Solder (3) the connection (2) together using rosin core type solder (1) only. CAUTION: DO NOT USE ACID CORE SOLDER. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2362 6. Center the heat shrink tubing (2) over the joint and heat using a heat gun. Heat the joint until the tubing is tightly sealed and sealant (1) comes out of both ends of the tubing. Special Tools WIRING/TERMINAL PROBING TOOL PACKAGE 6807 TERMINAL PICK TOOL SET 6680 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2363 TERMINAL REMOVING TOOLS 6932 AND 8638 TERMINAL REMOVING TOOL 6934 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2364 Fuse: Diagnostic Aids Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) Sensitive Devices STANDARD PROCEDURE - ELECTROSTATIC DISCHARGE (ESD) SENSITIVE DEVICES All ESD sensitive components are solid state and a symbol is used to indicate this. When handling any component with this symbol, comply with the following procedures to reduce the possibility of electrostatic charge build up on the body and inadvertent discharge into the component. If it is not known whether the part is ESD sensitive, assume that it is. 1. Always touch a known good ground before handling the part. This should be repeated while handling the part and more frequently after sliding across a seat, sitting down from a standing position, or walking a distance. 2. Avoid touching electrical terminals of the part, unless instructed to do so by a written procedure. 3. When using a voltmeter, be sure to connect the ground lead first. 4. Do not remove the part from it's protective packing until it is time to install the part. 5. Before removing the part from it's package, ground the package to a known good ground on the vehicle. Testing Of Voltage Potential STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING OF VOLTAGE POTENTIAL 1. Connect the ground lead of a voltmeter to a known good ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the voltmeter to the selected test point. The vehicle ignition may need to be turned ON to check voltage. Refer to the appropriate test procedure. Testing For Continuity Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2365 STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING FOR CONTINUITY 1. Remove the fuse (1) for the circuit being checked or, disconnect the battery. 2. Connect one lead of the ohmmeter to one side of the circuit being tested 3. Connect the other lead to the other end of the circuit being tested. Low or no resistance means good continuity. Testing For A Short To Ground STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING FOR A SHORT TO GROUND 1. Remove the fuse and disconnect all items involved with the fuse. 2. Connect a test light or a voltmeter across the terminals of the fuse. 3. Starting at the fuse block, wiggle the wiring harness about six to eight inches apart and watch the voltmeter/test lamp. 4. If the voltmeter registers voltage or the test lamp glows, there is a short to ground in that general area of the wiring harness. Testing For A Short To Ground On Fuses Powering Several Loads STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING FOR A SHORT TO GROUND ON FUSES POWERING SEVERAL LOADS 1. Refer to the wiring diagrams and disconnect or isolate all items on the suspected fused circuits. 2. Replace the blown fuse. 3. Supply power to the fuse by turning ON the ignition switch or re-connecting the battery. 4. Start connecting or energizing the items in the fuse circuit one at a time. When the fuse blows the circuit with the short to ground has been isolated. Testing For A Voltage Drop STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING FOR A VOLTAGE DROP Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2366 1. Connect the positive lead of the voltmeter to the side of the circuit closest to the battery. 2. Connect the other lead of the voltmeter to the other side of the switch, component or circuit. 3. Operate the item. 4. The voltmeter will show the difference in voltage between the two points. Troubleshooting Wiring Problems DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING - WIRING HARNESS TROUBLESHOOTING TOOLS When diagnosing a problem in an electrical circuit there are several common tools necessary. These tools are listed and explained below. - Jumper Wire - This is a test wire used to connect two points of a circuit. It can be used to bypass an open in a circuit. WARNING: Never use a jumper wire across a load, such as a motor, connected between a battery feed and ground. - Voltmeter - Used to check for voltage on a circuit. Always connect the black lead to a known good ground and the red lead to the positive side of the circuit. CAUTION: Most of the electrical components used in today's vehicles are Solid State. When checking voltages in these circuits, use a meter with a 10 - megohm or greater impedance rating. - Ohmmeter - Used to check the resistance between two points of a circuit. Low or no resistance in a circuit means good continuity. CAUTION: Most of the electrical components used in today's vehicles are Solid State. When checking resistance in these circuits use a meter with a 10 - megohm or greater impedance rating. In addition, make sure the power is disconnected from the circuit. Circuits that are powered up by the vehicle's electrical system can cause damage to the equipment and provide false readings. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2367 - Probing Tools - These tools are used for probing terminals in connectors. Select the proper size tool from Special Tool Package 6807, and insert the probing end (2) into the terminal being tested. Use the other end of the tool (1) to insert the meter probe. INTERMITTENT AND POOR CONNECTIONS Most intermittent electrical problems are caused by faulty electrical connections or wiring. It is also possible for a sticking component or relay to cause a problem. Before condemning a component or wiring assembly, check the following items. - Connectors are fully seated - Spread terminals, or terminal push out - Terminals in the wiring assembly are fully seated into the connector/component and locked into position - Dirt or corrosion on the terminals. Any amount of corrosion or dirt could cause an intermittent problem - Damaged connector/component casing exposing the item to dirt or moisture - Wire insulation that has rubbed through causing a short to ground - Some or all of the wiring strands broken inside of the insulation - Wiring broken inside of the insulation TROUBLESHOOTING WIRING PROBLEMS When troubleshooting wiring problems there are six steps which can aid in the procedure. The steps are listed and explained below. Always check for non-factory items added to the vehicle before doing any diagnosis. If the vehicle is equipped with these items, disconnect them to verify these add-on items are not the cause of the problem. 1. Verify the problem. 2. Verify any related symptoms. Do this by performing operational checks on components that are in the same circuit. Refer to the wiring diagrams. 3. Analyze the symptoms. Use the wiring diagrams to determine what the circuit is doing, where the problem most likely is occurring and where the diagnosis will continue. 4. Isolate the problem area. 5. Repair the problem area. 6. Verify the proper operation. For this step, check for proper operation of all items on the repaired circuit. Refer to the wiring diagrams. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 2368 Fuse: Application and ID An integrated Power Module is located in the engine compartment near the battery. This center contains cartridge fuses and mini fuses. A description of each fuse and component may be stamped on the inside cover otherwise the cavity number of each fuse is stamped on the inside cover that corresponds to the following chart. Underhood Fuses (Integrated Power Module) Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 2369 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 2370 CAUTION: - When installing the Integrated Power Module cover, it is important to ensure the cover is properly positioned and fully latched. Failure to do so may allow water to get into the Integrated Power Module, and possibly result in a electrical system failure. - When replacing a blown fuse, it is important to use only a fuse having the correct amperage rating. The use of a fuse with a rating other than indicated may result in a dangerous electrical system overload. If a properly rated fuse continues to blow, it indicates a problem in the circuit that must be corrected. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Fuse: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION All vehicles are equipped with an Ignition-Off Draw (IOD) fuse that is disconnected within the Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) when the vehicle is shipped from the factory. Dealer personnel are to reconnect the IOD fuse in the TIPM as part of the new vehicle preparation procedures and then disconnect it again until new vehicle delivery to the customer. A laser printed fuse layout map is integral to the TIPM cover to ensure proper fuse identification. The IOD fuse is a 20 ampere mini blade-type fuse. The fuse is secured within a black molded plastic fuse holder and puller unit that serves both as a tool for disconnecting and reconnecting the fuse in the TIPM cavity, and as a fuse holder that conveniently stores the fuse in the same cavity after it has been disconnected. CIRCUITS INCLUDED WITH IOD FUSE - Cluster (CCN) - Diagnostic Connector - Map Lamps - Glove Box Lamp - Courtesy Lamps - Radio - Underhood Lamp Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 2373 Fuse: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The term Ignition-Off Draw (IOD) identifies a normal condition where power is being drained from the battery with the ignition switch in the Off position. The IOD fuse feeds the memory and sleep mode functions for some of the electronic modules in the vehicle as well as various other accessories that require battery current when the ignition switch is in the Off position. The only reason the IOD fuse is disconnected is to reduce the normal IOD of the vehicle electrical system during new vehicle transportation and pre-delivery storage to reduce battery depletion, while still allowing vehicle operation so that the vehicle can be loaded, unloaded and moved as needed by both vehicle transportation company and dealer personnel. The IOD fuse is disconnected from Integrated Power Module (IPM) fuse cavity # 51 when the vehicle is shipped from the assembly plant. Dealer personnel must reconnect the IOD fuse when the vehicle is being prepared for delivery in order to restore full electrical system operation. Once the vehicle is prepared for delivery, the IOD function of this fuse becomes transparent and the fuse that has been assigned the IOD designation becomes only another Fused B(+) circuit fuse. The IOD fuse can be used by the vehicle owner as a convenient means of reducing battery depletion when a vehicle is to be stored for periods not to exceed about thirty days. However, it must be remembered that disconnecting the IOD fuse will not eliminate IOD, but only reduce this normal condition. If a vehicle will be stored for more than about thirty days, the battery negative cable should be disconnected to eliminate normal IOD; and, the battery should be tested and recharged at regular intervals during the vehicle storage period to prevent the battery from becoming discharged or damaged. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Locations Fuse Block: Locations An integrated Power Module is located in the engine compartment near the battery. This center contains cartridge fuses and mini fuses. A description of each fuse and component may be stamped on the inside cover otherwise the cavity number of each fuse is stamped on the inside cover that corresponds to the following chart. Underhood Fuses (Integrated Power Module) Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Locations > Page 2377 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Locations > Page 2378 CAUTION: - When installing the Integrated Power Module cover, it is important to ensure the cover is properly positioned and fully latched. Failure to do so may allow water to get into the Integrated Power Module, and possibly result in a electrical system failure. - When replacing a blown fuse, it is important to use only a fuse having the correct amperage rating. The use of a fuse with a rating other than indicated may result in a dangerous electrical system overload. If a properly rated fuse continues to blow, it indicates a problem in the circuit that must be corrected. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Fuse Block: Diagram Information and Instructions Warnings WARNINGS - GENERAL WARNINGS provide information to prevent personal injury and vehicle damage. Below is a list of general warnings that should be followed any time a vehicle is being serviced. WARNING: Always wear safety glasses for eye protection. WARNING: Use safety stands anytime a procedure requires being under a vehicle. WARNING: Be sure that the ignition switch always is in the off position, unless the procedure requires it to be on. WARNING: Set the parking brake when working on any vehicle. An automatic transmission should be in park. A manual transmission should be in neutral. WARNING: Operate the engine only in a well-ventilated area. WARNING: Keep away from moving parts when the engine is running, especially the fan and belts. WARNING: To prevent serious burns, avoid contact with hot parts such as the radiator, exhaust manifold(s), tail pipe, catalytic converter and muffler. WARNING: Do not allow flame or sparks near the battery. Gases are always present in and around the battery. WARNING: Always remove rings, watches, loose hanging jewelry and avoid loose clothing. How to Use Wiring Diagrams DESCRIPTION - HOW TO USE WIRING DIAGRAMS DaimlerChrysler Corporation wiring diagrams are designed to provide information regarding the vehicles wiring content. In order to effectively use the wiring diagrams to diagnose and repair DaimlerChrysler Corporation vehicles, it is important to understand all of their features and characteristics. Diagrams are arranged such that the power (B+) side of the circuit is placed near the top of the page, and the ground (B-) side of the circuit is placed near the bottom of the page. All switches, components, and modules are shown in the at rest position with the doors closed and the key removed from the ignition. Components are shown two ways. A solid line around a component indicates that the component is complete. A dashed line around the component indicates that the component is being shown is not complete. Incomplete components have a reference number to indicate the page where the component is shown complete. It is important to realize that no attempt is made on the diagrams to represent components and wiring as they appear on the vehicle. For example, a short piece of wire is treated the same as a long one. In addition, switches and other components are shown as simply as possible, with regard to function only. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2381 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2382 SYMBOLS International symbols are used throughout the wiring diagrams. These symbols are consistent with those being used around the world. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2383 TERMINOLOGY This is a list of terms and definitions used in the wiring diagrams. LHD - Left Hand Drive Vehicles RHD - Right Hand Drive Vehicles ATX - Automatic Transmissions-Front Wheel Drive MTX Manual Transmissions-Front Wheel Drive Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2384 AT - Automatic Transmissions-Rear Wheel Drive MT - Manual Transmissions-Rear Wheel Drive SOHC - Single Over Head Cam Engine DOHC - Double Over Head Cam Engine Export - Vehicles Built For Sale In Markets Other Than North America Except Export - Vehicles Built For Sale In North America Circuit Functions DESCRIPTION - CIRCUIT FUNCTIONS All circuits in the diagrams use an alpha/numeric code to identify the wire and it's function. To identify which circuit code applies to a system, refer to the Circuit Identification Code Chart. This chart shows the main circuits only and does not show the secondary codes that may apply to some models. Circuit Information DESCRIPTION - CIRCUIT INFORMATION Each wire shown in the diagrams contains a code which identifies the main circuit, a specific part of the main circuit, gage of wire, and color. An example would be A 2 18 LB/YL. This is a Battery Feed circuit, level two, eighteen gauge, light blue with a yellow tracer. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2385 Connector, Ground and Splice Information DESCRIPTION - CONNECTOR, GROUND AND SPLICE INFORMATION CAUTION: Not all connectors are serviced. Some connectors are serviced only with a harness. A typical example might be the Supplemental Restraint System connectors. Always check parts availability before attempting a repair. IDENTIFICATION In-line connectors are identified by a number, as follows: - In-line connectors located in the engine compartment are C100 series numbers. - In-line connectors located in the instrument panel area are C200 series numbers. - In-line connectors located in the body are C300 series numbers. - Jumper harness connectors are C400 series numbers. - Grounds and ground connectors are identified with a "G" and follow the same series numbering as the in-line connectors. - Splices are identified with an "S" and follow the same series numbering as the in-line connectors. In addition, S001-S099 numbers are located in the engine compartment. - Component connectors are identified by the component name instead of a number. Multiple connectors on a component use a C1, C2, etc. identifier. LOCATIONS Vehicle/Locations contains the master connector/ground/splice location index charts with hyperlinks to the applicable location illustrations. The illustrations contain the connector name (or number)/ground number/splice number and component identification. The abbreviation T/O is used in the component location section to indicate a point in which the wiring harness branches out to a component. The abbreviation N/S means Not Shown in the illustrations Section Identification and Information DESCRIPTION - SECTION IDENTIFICATION AND INFORMATION The wiring diagrams are grouped into individual sections. If a component is most likely found in a particular group, it will be shown complete (all wires, Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2386 connectors, and pins) within that group. For example, the Auto Shutdown Relay is most likely to be found in Powertrain Management, so it is shown there complete. It can, however, be shown partially in another group if it contains some associated wiring. Splice diagrams show the entire splice and provide references to other sections the splices serves. Splice Information only contains splice diagrams that are not shown in their entirety somewhere else in the wiring diagrams. Connector Pin-Outs shows each connector and the circuits involved with that connector. The connectors are identified using the name/number on the diagram pages. Removal REMOVAL 1. Disconnect battery. 2. Release Connector Lock (2). 3. Disconnect the connector (3) being repaired from its mating half/component. 4. Remove the dress cover (if applicable) (1). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2387 5. Release the Secondary Terminal Lock, if required (1). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2388 6. Position the connector locking finger away from the terminal using the proper special tool. Pull on the wire to remove the terminal from the connector. Installation Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2389 INSTALLATION 1. Insert the removed terminal in the same cavity on the repair connector. 2. Repeat steps for each terminal in the connector, being sure that all wires are inserted into the proper cavities. For additional connector pin-out identification, refer to the wiring diagrams. 3. When the connector is re-assembled, the secondary terminal lock must be placed in the locked position to prevent terminal push out. 4. Replace dress cover (if applicable). 5. Connect connector to its mating half/component. 6. Connect battery and test all affected systems. Removal REMOVAL 1. Disconnect the battery. 2. Locate the diode in the harness, and remove the protective covering. 3. Remove the diode from the harness, pay attention to the current flow direction (1) (2) (3). Installation INSTALLATION 1. Remove the insulation from the wires in the harness. Only remove enough insulation to solder in the new diode. 2. Install the new diode in the harness, making sure current flow is correct. If necessary, refer to the appropriate wiring diagram for current flow. 3. Solder the connection together using rosin core type solder only. Do not use acid core solder. 4. Tape the diode to the harness using electrical tape. Make sure the diode is completely sealed from the elements. 5. Re-connect the battery and test affected systems. Removal REMOVAL 1. Follow steps for removing terminals described in the connector removal section. 2. Cut the wire 6 inches from the back of the connector. Installation INSTALLATION 1. Select a wire from the terminal repair kit that best matches the color and gage of the wire being repaired. 2. Cut the repair wire to the proper length and remove one-half (1/2) inch of insulation. 3. Splice the repair wire to the wire harness (see wire splicing procedure). See: Service Procedures/Wire Splicing 4. Insert the repaired wire into the connector. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2390 5. Install the connector locking wedge, if required, and reconnect the connector to its mating half/component. 6. Re-tape the wire harness starting at 1-1/2 inches behind the connector and 2 inches past the repair. 7. Connect battery and test all affected systems. Wire Splicing STANDARD PROCEDURE - WIRE SPLICING When splicing a wire, it is important that the correct gage be used as shown in the wiring diagrams. 1. Remove one-half (1/2) inch of insulation from each wire that needs to be spliced. 2. Place a piece of adhesive lined heat shrink tubing on one side of the wire. Make sure the tubing will be long enough to cover and seal the entire repair area. 3. Place the strands of wire overlapping each other inside of the splice clip (1). 4. Using crimping tool (1), Mopar p/n 05019912AA, crimp the splice clip and wires together. 5. Solder (3) the connection (2) together using rosin core type solder (1) only. CAUTION: DO NOT USE ACID CORE SOLDER. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2391 6. Center the heat shrink tubing (2) over the joint and heat using a heat gun. Heat the joint until the tubing is tightly sealed and sealant (1) comes out of both ends of the tubing. Special Tools WIRING/TERMINAL PROBING TOOL PACKAGE 6807 TERMINAL PICK TOOL SET 6680 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2392 TERMINAL REMOVING TOOLS 6932 AND 8638 TERMINAL REMOVING TOOL 6934 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2393 Fuse Block: Diagnostic Aids Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) Sensitive Devices STANDARD PROCEDURE - ELECTROSTATIC DISCHARGE (ESD) SENSITIVE DEVICES All ESD sensitive components are solid state and a symbol is used to indicate this. When handling any component with this symbol, comply with the following procedures to reduce the possibility of electrostatic charge build up on the body and inadvertent discharge into the component. If it is not known whether the part is ESD sensitive, assume that it is. 1. Always touch a known good ground before handling the part. This should be repeated while handling the part and more frequently after sliding across a seat, sitting down from a standing position, or walking a distance. 2. Avoid touching electrical terminals of the part, unless instructed to do so by a written procedure. 3. When using a voltmeter, be sure to connect the ground lead first. 4. Do not remove the part from it's protective packing until it is time to install the part. 5. Before removing the part from it's package, ground the package to a known good ground on the vehicle. Testing Of Voltage Potential STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING OF VOLTAGE POTENTIAL 1. Connect the ground lead of a voltmeter to a known good ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the voltmeter to the selected test point. The vehicle ignition may need to be turned ON to check voltage. Refer to the appropriate test procedure. Testing For Continuity Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2394 STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING FOR CONTINUITY 1. Remove the fuse (1) for the circuit being checked or, disconnect the battery. 2. Connect one lead of the ohmmeter to one side of the circuit being tested 3. Connect the other lead to the other end of the circuit being tested. Low or no resistance means good continuity. Testing For A Short To Ground STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING FOR A SHORT TO GROUND 1. Remove the fuse and disconnect all items involved with the fuse. 2. Connect a test light or a voltmeter across the terminals of the fuse. 3. Starting at the fuse block, wiggle the wiring harness about six to eight inches apart and watch the voltmeter/test lamp. 4. If the voltmeter registers voltage or the test lamp glows, there is a short to ground in that general area of the wiring harness. Testing For A Short To Ground On Fuses Powering Several Loads STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING FOR A SHORT TO GROUND ON FUSES POWERING SEVERAL LOADS 1. Refer to the wiring diagrams and disconnect or isolate all items on the suspected fused circuits. 2. Replace the blown fuse. 3. Supply power to the fuse by turning ON the ignition switch or re-connecting the battery. 4. Start connecting or energizing the items in the fuse circuit one at a time. When the fuse blows the circuit with the short to ground has been isolated. Testing For A Voltage Drop STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING FOR A VOLTAGE DROP Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2395 1. Connect the positive lead of the voltmeter to the side of the circuit closest to the battery. 2. Connect the other lead of the voltmeter to the other side of the switch, component or circuit. 3. Operate the item. 4. The voltmeter will show the difference in voltage between the two points. Troubleshooting Wiring Problems DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING - WIRING HARNESS TROUBLESHOOTING TOOLS When diagnosing a problem in an electrical circuit there are several common tools necessary. These tools are listed and explained below. - Jumper Wire - This is a test wire used to connect two points of a circuit. It can be used to bypass an open in a circuit. WARNING: Never use a jumper wire across a load, such as a motor, connected between a battery feed and ground. - Voltmeter - Used to check for voltage on a circuit. Always connect the black lead to a known good ground and the red lead to the positive side of the circuit. CAUTION: Most of the electrical components used in today's vehicles are Solid State. When checking voltages in these circuits, use a meter with a 10 - megohm or greater impedance rating. - Ohmmeter - Used to check the resistance between two points of a circuit. Low or no resistance in a circuit means good continuity. CAUTION: Most of the electrical components used in today's vehicles are Solid State. When checking resistance in these circuits use a meter with a 10 - megohm or greater impedance rating. In addition, make sure the power is disconnected from the circuit. Circuits that are powered up by the vehicle's electrical system can cause damage to the equipment and provide false readings. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2396 - Probing Tools - These tools are used for probing terminals in connectors. Select the proper size tool from Special Tool Package 6807, and insert the probing end (2) into the terminal being tested. Use the other end of the tool (1) to insert the meter probe. INTERMITTENT AND POOR CONNECTIONS Most intermittent electrical problems are caused by faulty electrical connections or wiring. It is also possible for a sticking component or relay to cause a problem. Before condemning a component or wiring assembly, check the following items. - Connectors are fully seated - Spread terminals, or terminal push out - Terminals in the wiring assembly are fully seated into the connector/component and locked into position - Dirt or corrosion on the terminals. Any amount of corrosion or dirt could cause an intermittent problem - Damaged connector/component casing exposing the item to dirt or moisture - Wire insulation that has rubbed through causing a short to ground - Some or all of the wiring strands broken inside of the insulation - Wiring broken inside of the insulation TROUBLESHOOTING WIRING PROBLEMS When troubleshooting wiring problems there are six steps which can aid in the procedure. The steps are listed and explained below. Always check for non-factory items added to the vehicle before doing any diagnosis. If the vehicle is equipped with these items, disconnect them to verify these add-on items are not the cause of the problem. 1. Verify the problem. 2. Verify any related symptoms. Do this by performing operational checks on components that are in the same circuit. Refer to the wiring diagrams. 3. Analyze the symptoms. Use the wiring diagrams to determine what the circuit is doing, where the problem most likely is occurring and where the diagnosis will continue. 4. Isolate the problem area. 5. Repair the problem area. 6. Verify the proper operation. For this step, check for proper operation of all items on the repaired circuit. Refer to the wiring diagrams. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 2397 Fuse Block: Application and ID An integrated Power Module is located in the engine compartment near the battery. This center contains cartridge fuses and mini fuses. A description of each fuse and component may be stamped on the inside cover otherwise the cavity number of each fuse is stamped on the inside cover that corresponds to the following chart. Underhood Fuses (Integrated Power Module) Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 2398 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 2399 CAUTION: - When installing the Integrated Power Module cover, it is important to ensure the cover is properly positioned and fully latched. Failure to do so may allow water to get into the Integrated Power Module, and possibly result in a electrical system failure. - When replacing a blown fuse, it is important to use only a fuse having the correct amperage rating. The use of a fuse with a rating other than indicated may result in a dangerous electrical system overload. If a properly rated fuse continues to blow, it indicates a problem in the circuit that must be corrected. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations Relay Box: Locations An integrated Power Module is located in the engine compartment near the battery. This center contains cartridge fuses and mini fuses. A description of each fuse and component may be stamped on the inside cover otherwise the cavity number of each fuse is stamped on the inside cover that corresponds to the following chart. Underhood Fuses (Integrated Power Module) Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Page 2403 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Page 2404 CAUTION: - When installing the Integrated Power Module cover, it is important to ensure the cover is properly positioned and fully latched. Failure to do so may allow water to get into the Integrated Power Module, and possibly result in a electrical system failure. - When replacing a blown fuse, it is important to use only a fuse having the correct amperage rating. The use of a fuse with a rating other than indicated may result in a dangerous electrical system overload. If a properly rated fuse continues to blow, it indicates a problem in the circuit that must be corrected. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Page 2405 Relay Box: Application and ID An integrated Power Module is located in the engine compartment near the battery. This center contains cartridge fuses and mini fuses. A description of each fuse and component may be stamped on the inside cover otherwise the cavity number of each fuse is stamped on the inside cover that corresponds to the following chart. Underhood Fuses (Integrated Power Module) Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Page 2406 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Page 2407 CAUTION: - When installing the Integrated Power Module cover, it is important to ensure the cover is properly positioned and fully latched. Failure to do so may allow water to get into the Integrated Power Module, and possibly result in a electrical system failure. - When replacing a blown fuse, it is important to use only a fuse having the correct amperage rating. The use of a fuse with a rating other than indicated may result in a dangerous electrical system overload. If a properly rated fuse continues to blow, it indicates a problem in the circuit that must be corrected. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Service Reminder Indicators > Low Tire Pressure Indicator > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Low Tire Pressure Indicator: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION A Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM) indicator is standard equipment on all instrument clusters. However, on vehicles not equipped with the optional TPM, this indicator is electronically disabled. This indicator is located in the lower portion of the tachometer dial face in the instrument cluster overlay. The TPM indicator consists of a stencil-like cutout of an icon that represents a cross-section of a tire with a centered exclamation point in the opaque layer of the instrument cluster overlay. The dark outer layer of the overlay prevents the indicator from being clearly visible when it is not illuminated. An amber Light Emitting Diode (LED) behind the cutout in the opaque layer of the overlay causes the indicator to appear in amber through the translucent outer layer of the overlay when it is illuminated from behind by the LED, which is soldered onto the instrument cluster electronic circuit board. The TPM indicator is serviced as a unit with the instrument cluster. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Service Reminder Indicators > Low Tire Pressure Indicator > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 2413 Low Tire Pressure Indicator: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM) indicator gives an indication to the vehicle operator of the status of the TPM system. This indicator is controlled by a transistor on the instrument cluster circuit board based upon cluster programming and electronic messages received by the cluster from the Sentry Key REmote Entry Module (SKREEM) over the Controller Area Network (CAN) data bus. The TPM indicator Light Emitting Diode (LED) is completely controlled by the instrument cluster logic circuit, and that logic will only allow this indicator to operate when the instrument cluster receives a battery current input on the fused ignition switch output (run-start) circuit. Therefore, the LED will always be OFF when the ignition switch is in any position except ON or START. The LED only illuminates when it is provide a path to ground by the instrument cluster transistor. The instrument cluster will turn ON the TPM indicator for the following reasons: - Bulb Test - Each time the ignition switch is turned to the ON position, the SKREEM sends an electronic TPM indicator lamp-ON message to the cluster to illuminate the TPM indicator for about three seconds as a bulb test. - TPM Indicator Lamp-On Message - Each time the cluster receives an electronic TPM indicator lamp-ON message from the SKREEM, the TPM indicator will be illuminated. The indicator can be flashed ON and OFF, or illuminated solid, as dictated by the SKREEM message. The indicator remains illuminated until the cluster receives a lamp-OFF message from the SKREEM or until the ignition switch is turned to the OFF position, whichever occurs first. - Communication Error - If the cluster receives no TPM lamp-ON or lamp-OFF messages from the SKREEM for six consecutive seconds, the TPM indicator is illuminated by the instrument cluster. The indicator remains controlled and illuminated by the cluster until a valid lamp-ON or lamp-OFF message is received from the SKREEM. - Actuator Test - Each time the cluster is put through the actuator test, the TPM indicator will be turned ON, then OFF again during the bulb check portion of the test to confirm the functionality of the LED and the cluster control circuitry. The SKREEM performs a self-test each time the ignition switch is turned to the ON position to decide whether the TPM system is in good operating condition and whether the tire inflation pressures are too high or too low. The SKREEM then sends the proper lamp-ON or lamp-OFF message to the ElectroMechanical Instrument Cluster (EMIC) (also known as the Cab Compartment Node/CCN). If the instrument cluster turns ON the TPM indicator after the bulb test, it indicates that the inflation pressure of a tire is too low or that a malfunction has occurred and the TPM system is ineffective. For proper diagnosis of the TPM system, the SKREEM, the EMIC, the CAN data bus or the electronic communication related to TPM indicator operation a diagnostic scan tool is required. Refer to the appropriate diagnostic information. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Service Reminder Indicators > Maintenance Required Lamp/Indicator > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Instruments - Oil Change Indicator System Service Maintenance Required Lamp/Indicator: Technical Service Bulletins Instruments - Oil Change Indicator System Service NUMBER: 08-014-07 GROUP: Electrical DATE: July 11, 2007 SUBJECT: Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) Oil Change Indicator System Service MODELS: 2008 (DR) Ram Truck 2008 (LX) 300 / Magnum / Charger NOTE: This Bulletin applies to vehicles equipped with a programmable EVIC (sales code LAZ). DISCUSSION: The oil change indicator system is being introduced on most 2008 models. This system displays a "Oil change Required" or "Oil Change" message at appropriate intervals on the instrument cluster. The vehicles listed above may be equipped with a programmable display on the Electronic Vehicle Information Center, (EVIC). The "Oil Change Required" message may also include the dealerships name and phone number which can be programmed into the vehicle with the StarSCAN(R) or StarMOBILE(R) scan tool. The following procedure describes the steps to add, delete or change a dealership name and phone number on the display. NOTE: If NOT programmed during vehicle prep, customer approval MUST be obtained before adding or changing this information. NOTE: When performing this Procedure, the software release level in the StarSCAN(R) or StarMOBILE(R); must be programmed with 8.01 level software or higher. The software release level is visible in the blue header at the top of the StarSCAN(R) or StarMOBILE(R) screen. 1. Connect the StarSCAN(R) or StarMOBILE(R).(in Pass-Through Mode) NOTE: To use the StarMOBILE(R) in Pass-Through Mode requires that StarMOBILE(R) be connected to the dealership network via a wired or wireless connection. For more information on how to use the StarMOBILE(R) in Pass-Through Mode, see the StarMOBILE(R) training tutorials available on DealerCONNECT > Service > Repair > StarSCAN(R) and StarMOBILE(R) Tools link or at the website. 2. From the Home Screen, enter "ECU VIEW" or "VEHICLE PREP". 3. Select "CCN". 4. Select "Misc. Functions". 5. Select "Enable/Disable Dealer Contact Information". 6. Select "Enable" or "Disable" as desired. 7. If enabled, select "Program Dealer Contact Information" and follow on screen prompts. 8. "Reset" will cause display to read: "Contact Dealer" as default. 9. Select finish to exit. POLICY: Information Only Disclaimer: This bulletin is supplied as technical information only and is not an authorization for repair. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Service Reminder Indicators > Maintenance Required Lamp/Indicator > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 2418 Maintenance Required Lamp/Indicator: Service and Repair DaimlerChrysler provides no information regarding a Maintenance Required Lamp/Indicator. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Service Reminder Indicators > Malfunction Indicator Lamp > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Malfunction Indicator Lamp: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION A Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) is standard equipment on all instrument clusters. This indicator is located near the lower edge of the instrument cluster, between the tachometer and the speedometer. The MIL consists of a stencil-like cutout of the International Control and Display Symbol icon for Engine in the opaque layer of the instrument cluster overlay. The dark outer layer of the overlay prevents the indicator from being clearly visible when it is not illuminated. An amber Light Emitting Diode (LED) behind the cutout in the opaque layer of the overlay causes the indicator to appear in amber through the translucent outer layer of the overlay when it is illuminated from behind by the LED, which is soldered onto the instrument cluster electronic circuit board. The MIL is serviced as a unit with the instrument cluster. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Service Reminder Indicators > Malfunction Indicator Lamp > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 2423 Malfunction Indicator Lamp: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) gives an indication to the vehicle operator when the Powertrain Control Module (PCM) on vehicles with a gasoline engine, or the Engine Control Module (ECM) on vehicles with a diesel engine has recorded a Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) for an On-Board Diagnostics II (OBDII) emissions-related circuit or component malfunction. The MIL is controlled by a transistor on the instrument cluster circuit board based upon cluster programming and electronic messages received by the cluster from the PCM or ECM over the Controller Area Network (CAN) data bus. The MIL Light Emitting Diode (LED) is completely controlled by the instrument cluster logic circuit, and that logic will only allow this indicator to operate when the instrument cluster receives a battery current input on the fused ignition switch output (run-start) circuit. Therefore, the LED will always be OFF when the ignition switch is in any position except ON or START. The LED only illuminates when it is provided a path to ground by the instrument cluster transistor. The instrument cluster will turn ON the MIL for the following reasons: - Bulb Test - Each time the ignition switch is turned to the ON position the indicator is illuminated for about two seconds as a bulb test. The entire bulb test is a function of the PCM or ECM. - MIL Lamp-On Message - Each time the cluster receives an electronic MIL lamp-ON message from the PCM or ECM, the indicator will be illuminated. The indicator can be flashed ON and OFF, or illuminated solid, as dictated by the PCM or ECM message. For some DTCs, if a problem does not recur, the PCM or ECM will send a lamp-OFF message automatically. Other DTCs may require that a fault be repaired and the PCM or ECM be reset before a lamp-OFF message will be sent. - Communication Error - If the cluster receives no lamp-ON or lamp-OFF messages from the PCM or ECM for about 10 seconds, the MIL is illuminated by the instrument cluster to indicate a loss of bus communication. The indicator remains controlled and illuminated by the cluster until a valid message is received from the PCM or ECM. - Actuator Test - Each time the cluster is put through the actuator test, the MIL indicator will be turned ON during the bulb check portion of the test to confirm the functionality of the LED and the cluster control circuitry. The PCM or ECM continually monitors the fuel and emissions system circuits and sensors to decide whether the system is in good operating condition. The PCM or ECM then sends the proper lamp-ON or lamp-OFF message to the ElectroMechanical Instrument Cluster (EMIC) (also known as the Cab Compartment Node/CCN). If the EMIC turns ON the MIL after the bulb test, it may indicate that a malfunction has occurred and that the fuel and emissions systems may require service. For proper diagnosis of the fuel and emissions systems, the PCM, the ECM, the EMIC, the CAN data bus or the electronic communication related to MIL operation a diagnostic scan tool is required. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Service Reminder Indicators > Oil Change Reminder Lamp > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 18-005-08B > Aug > 08 > Engine Controls - False Oil Change Indicator Oil Change Reminder Lamp: Customer Interest Engine Controls - False Oil Change Indicator NUMBER: 18-005-08 REV. B GROUP: Vehicle Performance DATE: August 20, 2008 THIS BULLETIN SUPERSEDES TECHNICAL SERVICE BULLETIN 18-005-08 REV. A, DATED JUNE 13, 2008, WHICH SHOULD BE REMOVED FROM YOUR FILES. ALL REVISIONS ARE HIGHLIGHTED WITH **ASTERISKS** AND INCLUDE ADDITIONAL MODELS. THE StarSCAN(R) FLASH FILES FOR THIS BULLETIN MUST BE RETRIEVED FROM THE INTERNET. StarSCAN(R) SOFTWARE LEVEL MUST BE AT RELEASE 8.05 OR HIGHER FOR THIS BULLETIN. StarMOBILE STANDALONE MODE OR StarMOBILE DESKTOP CLIENT MAY ALSO BE USED TO PERFORM THIS PROCEDURE. SUBJECT: FLASH: Turn Off Oil Change Indicator Message OVERVIEW: This bulletin involves selectively erasing and reprogramming the Powertrain Control Module (PCM). MODELS: **2008 (DR) Ram Truck (International Markets)** **2008 (HB) Durango (International Markets)** **2007 - 2008 (JK) Wrangler (International Markets)** **2007 (JK) wrangler** **2008 (KA) Nitro (International Markets)** **2008 (ND) Dakota (International Markets)** 2008 (WH) Grand Cherokee (International Markets) 2008 (XH) Commander (International Markets) NOTE: This bulletin applies to: - **2007 JK vehicles built with a 3.8L engine (sales code EGK) after June 17, 2008 (MDH 0617XX)** - **2008 JK vehicles built with a 3.8L engine (sales code EGK) before April 28, 2008 (MDH 0428XX)** - **2008 DR/HB/ND vehicles built with a 4.7L engine (sales code EVE )** - WK/WH vehicles built with a 4.7L engine (sales code EVE) built before January 25, 2008 (0125XXMDH) - KA vehicles equipped with a 4.0L engine (sales code EGS) built before July 8.2008 (MDH 0708XX) SYMPTOM/CONDITION: Some international vehicle's may experience message on the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) or in the Odometer that tells the driver an oil change is necessary after 3000 miles. This message should not be displayed for these international vehicles and this PCM flash will turn this feature off. DIAGNOSIS: Using a Scan Tool (StarSCAN(R)) with the appropriate Diagnostic Procedures available in TechCONNECT, verify all engine systems are functioning as designed. If DTC's are present record them on the repair order and repair as necessary before proceeding further with this bulletin. If no DTC's are present, perform the Repair Procedure. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Service Reminder Indicators > Oil Change Reminder Lamp > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 18-005-08B > Aug > 08 > Engine Controls - False Oil Change Indicator > Page 2432 SPECIAL TOOLS / EQUIPMENT REQUIRED: REPAIR PROCEDURE - USING THE INTERNET TO RETRIEVE THE FLASH FILE: NOTE: Before performing this Repair Procedure, the operating software in the StarSCAN(R) must be programmed with software release level 8.05 or higher. The software release level is visible in the blue header at the top of the StarSCAN(R) screen. NOTE: The StarSCAN(R) diagnostic scan tool fully supports Internet connectivity. However, to take advantage of this feature you must first configure the StarSCAN(R) for your dealership's network. Make sure the StarSCAN(R) is configured to the dealership's network before proceeding. For instruction on setting up your StarSCAN(R) for the dealer's network refer to either: "DealerCONNECT > Service > StarSCAN and StarMOBILE tools > Online Documentation", or refer to the StarSCAN(R) Quick Start Networking Guide. The StarSCAN(R) Quick Start Networking Guide is also available on the website under the "Download Center". NOTE: If this flash process is interrupted/aborted, the flash should be restarted. 1. Open the hood and install a battery charger. Using a voltmeter, verify that the charging rate provides 13.2 - 13.5 volts. Set the battery charger to continuous charge. Do not allow the charger to time out during the flash process. Remove the charger from the battery when the flash process is complete. NOTE: Do not allow the charging voltage to climb above 13.5 volts during the flash process. 2. Connect the CH9410 StarSCAN(R) ethernet cable to the StarSCAN(R) and the dealer's network drop. 3. Connect the CH9404D StarSCAN(R) vehicle cable to the StarSCAN(R) and the vehicle. 4. Power ON the StarSCAN(R). 5. Turn the ignition switch on. 6. Retrieve the old PCM part number. Using the StarSCAN(R) at the "Home" screen: a. Select "ECU View" b. Touch the screen to highlight the PCM in the list of modules. c. Select "More Options" d. Select "ECU Flash". e. Record the part number at the top of the "Flash PCM" screen for later reference. f. Select "Browse for New File". Follow the on screen instructions. g. Select "Download to Scantool". h. Select "Close" after the download is complete, then select "Back". i. Highlight the listed calibration. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Service Reminder Indicators > Oil Change Reminder Lamp > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 18-005-08B > Aug > 08 > Engine Controls - False Oil Change Indicator > Page 2433 j. Select "Update Controller". k. When the update is complete, select "OK". 7. Verify the part number at the top of the "Flash PCM" screen has updated to the new part number. NOTE: Due to the PCM programming procedure, a DTC may be set in other modules within the vehicle, if so equipped. Some DTC's may cause the MIL to illuminate. From the "Home" screen select "System View". Then select "All DTCs". Press "Clear All Stored DTCs" if there are any DTCs shown on the list. POLICY: Reimbursable within the provisions of the warranty. TIME ALLOWANCE: FAILURE CODE: Disclaimer: This bulletin is supplied as technical information only and is not an authorization for repair. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Service Reminder Indicators > Oil Change Reminder Lamp > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 08-002-09 > Feb > 09 > Instruments - Vehicle Information Center Setup Oil Change Reminder Lamp: All Technical Service Bulletins Instruments - Vehicle Information Center Setup NUMBER: 08-002-09 GROUP: Electrical DATE: February 4, 2009 THIS BULLETIN SUPERSEDES TECHNICAL SERVICE BULLETIN 08-014-07, DATED JULY 11, 2007, WHICH SHOULD BE REMOVED FROM YOUR FILES. ALL REVISIONS ARE HIGHLIGHTED WITH **ASTERISKS** AND INCLUDES ADDITIONAL YEARS AND MODELS. SUBJECT: Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) Oil Change Indicator System - Dealer Preferences During Prep MODELS: 2008 (DR) Ram Truck **2009 (HB) Durango** **2009 (HG) Aspen** **2009 (JC) Journey** **2008 - 2009 (KA) Nitro** **2008 - 2009 (KK) Liberty** **2009 (LC) Challenger** **2008 - 2009 (LX) 300 / Magnum / Charger** **2008 - 2009 (RI) Caravan / Town & Country** NOTE: This Bulletin applies to vehicles equipped with a programmable EVIC. DISCUSSION: **Many models now include an oil change indicator system**. This system displays an "Oil Change Required" or "Oil Change" message at appropriate intervals on the instrument cluster. The vehicles listed above may be equipped with a programmable display on the Electronic Vehicle Information Center, (EVIC). The "Oil Change Required message may also include the dealerships name and phone number which can be programmed into the vehicle with the StarSCAN(R) or StarMOBILE(R) scan tool. NOTE: **Other vehicles may be added at any time. Dealers can determine if the feature is available by following the procedures below. If Enable/Disable Dealer Contact Information is active, the feature can be used to enter the servicing dealer's information.** The following procedure describes the steps to add, delete or change a dealership name and phone number on the display. NOTE: If NOT programmed during vehicle prep, customer approval MUST be obtained before adding or changing this information. NOTE: When performing this Procedure, the software release level in the StarSCAN(R) or StarMOBILE(R); must be programmed with the latest level software. The software release level is visible in the blue header at the top of the StarSCAN(R) or StarMOBILE(R) screen. 1. Connect the StarSCAN(R) or StarMOBILE(R). (in Pass-Through Mode) NOTE: To use the StarMOBILE(R) in Pass-Through Mode requires that StarMOBILE(R) be connected to the dealership network via a wired or wireless connection. For more information on how to use the StarMOBILE(R) in Pass-Through Mode, see the StarMOBILE(R) training tutorials available on DealerCONNECT > Service > Repair > StarSCAN(R) and StarMOBILE(R) Tools link or at the website. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Service Reminder Indicators > Oil Change Reminder Lamp > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 08-002-09 > Feb > 09 > Instruments - Vehicle Information Center Setup > Page 2439 2. From the Home Screen, enter "ECU VIEW or "VEHICLE PREP". 3. Select "CCN". 4. Select "Misc. Functions". 5. Select "Enable/Disable Dealer Contact Information". 6. Select "Enable" or "Disable" as desired. 7. If enabled, select "Program Dealer Contact Information" and follow on screen prompts. 8. "Reset will cause display to read: "Contact Dealer" as default. 9. Select finish to exit. POLICY: Information Only Disclaimer: This bulletin is supplied as technical information only and is not an authorization for repair. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Service Reminder Indicators > Oil Change Reminder Lamp > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 18-005-08B > Aug > 08 > Engine Controls False Oil Change Indicator Oil Change Reminder Lamp: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine Controls - False Oil Change Indicator NUMBER: 18-005-08 REV. B GROUP: Vehicle Performance DATE: August 20, 2008 THIS BULLETIN SUPERSEDES TECHNICAL SERVICE BULLETIN 18-005-08 REV. A, DATED JUNE 13, 2008, WHICH SHOULD BE REMOVED FROM YOUR FILES. ALL REVISIONS ARE HIGHLIGHTED WITH **ASTERISKS** AND INCLUDE ADDITIONAL MODELS. THE StarSCAN(R) FLASH FILES FOR THIS BULLETIN MUST BE RETRIEVED FROM THE INTERNET. StarSCAN(R) SOFTWARE LEVEL MUST BE AT RELEASE 8.05 OR HIGHER FOR THIS BULLETIN. StarMOBILE STANDALONE MODE OR StarMOBILE DESKTOP CLIENT MAY ALSO BE USED TO PERFORM THIS PROCEDURE. SUBJECT: FLASH: Turn Off Oil Change Indicator Message OVERVIEW: This bulletin involves selectively erasing and reprogramming the Powertrain Control Module (PCM). MODELS: **2008 (DR) Ram Truck (International Markets)** **2008 (HB) Durango (International Markets)** **2007 - 2008 (JK) Wrangler (International Markets)** **2007 (JK) wrangler** **2008 (KA) Nitro (International Markets)** **2008 (ND) Dakota (International Markets)** 2008 (WH) Grand Cherokee (International Markets) 2008 (XH) Commander (International Markets) NOTE: This bulletin applies to: - **2007 JK vehicles built with a 3.8L engine (sales code EGK) after June 17, 2008 (MDH 0617XX)** - **2008 JK vehicles built with a 3.8L engine (sales code EGK) before April 28, 2008 (MDH 0428XX)** - **2008 DR/HB/ND vehicles built with a 4.7L engine (sales code EVE )** - WK/WH vehicles built with a 4.7L engine (sales code EVE) built before January 25, 2008 (0125XXMDH) - KA vehicles equipped with a 4.0L engine (sales code EGS) built before July 8.2008 (MDH 0708XX) SYMPTOM/CONDITION: Some international vehicle's may experience message on the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) or in the Odometer that tells the driver an oil change is necessary after 3000 miles. This message should not be displayed for these international vehicles and this PCM flash will turn this feature off. DIAGNOSIS: Using a Scan Tool (StarSCAN(R)) with the appropriate Diagnostic Procedures available in TechCONNECT, verify all engine systems are functioning as designed. If DTC's are present record them on the repair order and repair as necessary before proceeding further with this bulletin. If no DTC's are present, perform the Repair Procedure. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Service Reminder Indicators > Oil Change Reminder Lamp > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 18-005-08B > Aug > 08 > Engine Controls False Oil Change Indicator > Page 2444 SPECIAL TOOLS / EQUIPMENT REQUIRED: REPAIR PROCEDURE - USING THE INTERNET TO RETRIEVE THE FLASH FILE: NOTE: Before performing this Repair Procedure, the operating software in the StarSCAN(R) must be programmed with software release level 8.05 or higher. The software release level is visible in the blue header at the top of the StarSCAN(R) screen. NOTE: The StarSCAN(R) diagnostic scan tool fully supports Internet connectivity. However, to take advantage of this feature you must first configure the StarSCAN(R) for your dealership's network. Make sure the StarSCAN(R) is configured to the dealership's network before proceeding. For instruction on setting up your StarSCAN(R) for the dealer's network refer to either: "DealerCONNECT > Service > StarSCAN and StarMOBILE tools > Online Documentation", or refer to the StarSCAN(R) Quick Start Networking Guide. The StarSCAN(R) Quick Start Networking Guide is also available on the website under the "Download Center". NOTE: If this flash process is interrupted/aborted, the flash should be restarted. 1. Open the hood and install a battery charger. Using a voltmeter, verify that the charging rate provides 13.2 - 13.5 volts. Set the battery charger to continuous charge. Do not allow the charger to time out during the flash process. Remove the charger from the battery when the flash process is complete. NOTE: Do not allow the charging voltage to climb above 13.5 volts during the flash process. 2. Connect the CH9410 StarSCAN(R) ethernet cable to the StarSCAN(R) and the dealer's network drop. 3. Connect the CH9404D StarSCAN(R) vehicle cable to the StarSCAN(R) and the vehicle. 4. Power ON the StarSCAN(R). 5. Turn the ignition switch on. 6. Retrieve the old PCM part number. Using the StarSCAN(R) at the "Home" screen: a. Select "ECU View" b. Touch the screen to highlight the PCM in the list of modules. c. Select "More Options" d. Select "ECU Flash". e. Record the part number at the top of the "Flash PCM" screen for later reference. f. Select "Browse for New File". Follow the on screen instructions. g. Select "Download to Scantool". h. Select "Close" after the download is complete, then select "Back". i. Highlight the listed calibration. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Service Reminder Indicators > Oil Change Reminder Lamp > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 18-005-08B > Aug > 08 > Engine Controls False Oil Change Indicator > Page 2445 j. Select "Update Controller". k. When the update is complete, select "OK". 7. Verify the part number at the top of the "Flash PCM" screen has updated to the new part number. NOTE: Due to the PCM programming procedure, a DTC may be set in other modules within the vehicle, if so equipped. Some DTC's may cause the MIL to illuminate. From the "Home" screen select "System View". Then select "All DTCs". Press "Clear All Stored DTCs" if there are any DTCs shown on the list. POLICY: Reimbursable within the provisions of the warranty. TIME ALLOWANCE: FAILURE CODE: Disclaimer: This bulletin is supplied as technical information only and is not an authorization for repair. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Service Reminder Indicators > Oil Change Reminder Lamp > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Oil Change Reminder Lamp: > 14-001-09A > Sep > 09 > Fuel System - Difficult Fuel Fill/Nozzle Shuts Off Evaporative Emissions Hose: All Technical Service Bulletins Fuel System - Difficult Fuel Fill/Nozzle Shuts Off NUMBER: 14-001-09 REV. A GROUP: Fuel DATE: September 1, 2009 THIS BULLETIN SUPERSEDES TECHNICAL SERVICE BULLETIN 14-001-09, DATED APRIL 15, 2009, WHICH SHOULD BE REMOVED FROM YOUR FILES. THIS IS A COMPLETE REVISION AND NO ASTERISKS HAVE BEEN USED TO HIGHLIGHT REVISIONS. SUBJECT: Hard To Fill With Fuel Or Fuel Nozzle Shuts Off Repeatedly MODELS: 2004-2008 (CS) Pacifica 2009 (DS) Ram Truck (1500) 2007 - 2009 (DH) Ram Truck (1500/2500 Pick Up) 2004 - 2009 (DR) Ram Truck (1500 / 2500 Pick Up) 2005 - 2009 (HB) Durango 2007-2009 (HG) Aspen 2005 - 2009 (ND) Dakota 2009 (JC) Journey 2007 - 2009 (JK) Wrangler 2007 - 2009 (J1) Sebring (China CKD) 2007 - 2009 (JS) Sebring/Sebring Convertible/Avenger 2006 - 2009 (K1) Cherokee (CKD) 2007 - 2009 (KA) Nitro 2008 - 2009 (KK) Liberty 2008 - 2009 (KK) Cherokee (International Markets) 2005-2007 (KJ) Liberty 2005 - 2007 (KJ) Cherokee (International Markets) 2005 - 2009 (LE) 300C/300C Touring (International Markets) 2005 - 2009 (LX) 300/Magnum/Charger 2007 (L2) 300 (China) 2008 - 2009 (LC) Challenger 2004 - 2009 (PT) Chrysler PT Cruiser 2007 (R2) Caravan/Voyager(CKD) 2005 - 2007 (RG) Chrysler Voyager (International Markets) 2003 - 2007 (RS) Town & Country/Caravan/Voyager Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Service Reminder Indicators > Oil Change Reminder Lamp > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Oil Change Reminder Lamp: > 14-001-09A > Sep > 09 > Fuel System - Difficult Fuel Fill/Nozzle Shuts Off > Page 2451 2008 - 2009 (RI) Town & Country/Grand Caravan 2008 - 2009 (RI) Town & Country/Grand Voyager (International Markets) 2005 - 2006 (TJ) Wrangler 2005 - 2009 (WH) Grand Cherokee (International Markets) 2005 - 2009 (WK) Grand Cherokee 2006 - 2009 (XH) Commander (International Markets) 2006 - 2009 (XK) Commander NOTE: This bulletin applies to all vehicles equipped with a gasoline engine. DISCUSSION: Customer may report that the vehicle is hard to fill with fuel or that the fuel pump nozzle shuts off repeatedly while trying to fill vehicle. This customer complaint can occur due to a number of different causes. The fuel tank is the least likely cause of this condition. The following Diagnostic procedure can be used to diagnose the issues. DIAGNOSIS: 1. Is the vehicle a LX/LE/LC/L2? a. Yes >> proceed to Step # 2 b. No >> proceed to Step # 4 2. Idle the vehicle 60 to 90 seconds upon stopping. 3. Does tank refill properly? a. No >> proceed to Step # 4 b. Yes >> Inform the customer to idle the vehicle for 60 to 90 seconds upon stopping if vehicle was driven aggressively. This is due to the fact that on the LX/LE/LC/L2 the fuel tank is a unique saddle tank design and needs 30 to 60 seconds while the engine is running to level the fuel in both half's of the fuel tank. Allowing the vehicle to idle for this amount of time will let the fuel pump transfer fuel to the left side tank, opening the control valve and allowing normal fuel filling. 4. Disconnect the vapor recirculation tube at the fuel tank. 5. Attempt to refill fuel tank. 6. Does tank refill properly? a. Yes >> Proceed to Step # 7 b. No >> Proceed to Step # 11. 7. Reconnect the vapor recirculation tube at the fuel tank. 8. Disconnect the other end of the vapor recirculation tube at the fuel filler tube. 9. Attempt to refill fuel tank. 10. Does tank refill properly? a. Yes >> Replace fuel filler tube. b. No >> Replace the vapor recirculation tube. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Service Reminder Indicators > Oil Change Reminder Lamp > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Oil Change Reminder Lamp: > 14-001-09A > Sep > 09 > Fuel System - Difficult Fuel Fill/Nozzle Shuts Off > Page 2452 11. Disconnect the control valve to EVAP canister tube at the fuel tank. 12. Reconnect the vapor recirculation tube at the fuel tank. 13. Does tank refill properly? a. No >> Replace Fuel Tank. b. Yes >> Proceed to 14. Reconnect the control valve to EVAP canister tube at the fuel tank. 15. Disconnect the control valve to EVAP canister tube at the EVAP canister. 16. Attempt to refill fuel tank. 17. Does tank refill properly? a. Yes >> Blockage is in the EVAP Canister, or ESIM, or Clean air hose (ESIM vent hose), or filter. Diagnose appropriately. b. No >> Replace the control valve to EVAP canister tube. POLICY: Information Only Disclaimer: This bulletin is supplied as technical information only and is not an authorization for repair. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Service Reminder Indicators > Oil Change Reminder Lamp > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Oil Change Reminder Lamp: > 14-001-09A > Sep > 09 > Fuel System - Difficult Fuel Fill/Nozzle Shuts Off > Page 2458 2008 - 2009 (RI) Town & Country/Grand Caravan 2008 - 2009 (RI) Town & Country/Grand Voyager (International Markets) 2005 - 2006 (TJ) Wrangler 2005 - 2009 (WH) Grand Cherokee (International Markets) 2005 - 2009 (WK) Grand Cherokee 2006 - 2009 (XH) Commander (International Markets) 2006 - 2009 (XK) Commander NOTE: This bulletin applies to all vehicles equipped with a gasoline engine. DISCUSSION: Customer may report that the vehicle is hard to fill with fuel or that the fuel pump nozzle shuts off repeatedly while trying to fill vehicle. This customer complaint can occur due to a number of different causes. The fuel tank is the least likely cause of this condition. The following Diagnostic procedure can be used to diagnose the issues. DIAGNOSIS: 1. Is the vehicle a LX/LE/LC/L2? a. Yes >> proceed to Step # 2 b. No >> proceed to Step # 4 2. Idle the vehicle 60 to 90 seconds upon stopping. 3. Does tank refill properly? a. No >> proceed to Step # 4 b. Yes >> Inform the customer to idle the vehicle for 60 to 90 seconds upon stopping if vehicle was driven aggressively. This is due to the fact that on the LX/LE/LC/L2 the fuel tank is a unique saddle tank design and needs 30 to 60 seconds while the engine is running to level the fuel in both half's of the fuel tank. Allowing the vehicle to idle for this amount of time will let the fuel pump transfer fuel to the left side tank, opening the control valve and allowing normal fuel filling. 4. Disconnect the vapor recirculation tube at the fuel tank. 5. Attempt to refill fuel tank. 6. Does tank refill properly? a. Yes >> Proceed to Step # 7 b. No >> Proceed to Step # 11. 7. Reconnect the vapor recirculation tube at the fuel tank. 8. Disconnect the other end of the vapor recirculation tube at the fuel filler tube. 9. Attempt to refill fuel tank. 10. Does tank refill properly? a. Yes >> Replace fuel filler tube. b. No >> Replace the vapor recirculation tube. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Service Reminder Indicators > Oil Change Reminder Lamp > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Oil Change Reminder Lamp: > 14-001-09A > Sep > 09 > Fuel System - Difficult Fuel Fill/Nozzle Shuts Off > Page 2459 11. Disconnect the control valve to EVAP canister tube at the fuel tank. 12. Reconnect the vapor recirculation tube at the fuel tank. 13. Does tank refill properly? a. No >> Replace Fuel Tank. b. Yes >> Proceed to 14. Reconnect the control valve to EVAP canister tube at the fuel tank. 15. Disconnect the control valve to EVAP canister tube at the EVAP canister. 16. Attempt to refill fuel tank. 17. Does tank refill properly? a. Yes >> Blockage is in the EVAP Canister, or ESIM, or Clean air hose (ESIM vent hose), or filter. Diagnose appropriately. b. No >> Replace the control valve to EVAP canister tube. POLICY: Information Only Disclaimer: This bulletin is supplied as technical information only and is not an authorization for repair. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Service Reminder Indicators > Oil Change Reminder Lamp > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Oil Change Reminder Lamp: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION A change oil indicator is standard equipment on all instrument clusters. However, on vehicles manufactured for export markets or vehicles equipped with the optional diesel engine, this indicator is electronically disabled. The change oil indication appears within the odometer Vacuum Fluorescent Display (VFD) unit. The change oil indicator consists of cycling textual CHAngE and OIL messages which appear in place of the odometer information in the odometer display. The odometer VFD is soldered onto the cluster electronic circuit board, and is visible through a window with a smoked clear lens located on the lower edge of the speedometer gauge dial face of the cluster overlay. The dark lens over the VFD prevents it from being clearly visible when it is not illuminated. The change oil textual messages appear in the same blue-green color and at the same lighting level as the odometer information when they are illuminated by the instrument cluster electronic circuit board. The change oil indicator is serviced as a unit with the VFD in the instrument cluster. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Service Reminder Indicators > Oil Change Reminder Lamp > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 2462 Oil Change Reminder Lamp: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The change oil indicator gives an indication to the vehicle operator when a duty-cycle algorithm contained within the software of the Powertrain Control Module (PCM) determines that a recommended oil change interval has been attained. This indicator is controlled by the instrument cluster logic circuit based upon cluster programming and electronic messages received over the Controller Area Network (CAN) data bus from the PCM. The change oil indicator function of the odometer Vacuum Fluorescent Display (VFD) unit is completely controlled by the instrument cluster logic circuit, and that logic will only allow this indicator to operate when the instrument cluster receives a battery current input on the fused ignition switch output (run-start) circuit. Therefore, the odometer VFD change oil indication will always be OFF when the ignition switch is in any position except ON or START. The instrument cluster will turn ON the change oil indicator for the following reasons: - Change Oil Indicator Lamp-On Message - Each time the ignition switch is turned to the ON position and the cluster receives an electronic change oil indicator lamp-ON message from the PCM indicating that a duty-cycle based recommended oil change interval has been attained, the change oil indicator will be illuminated for about three seconds, until the trip odometer reset switch button is depressed, or until the ignition switch is turned to the OFF position, whichever occurs first. - Change Oil Indicator Reset Procedure - Once an engine oil change has been completed, the PCM duty cycle counters can be reset using the following procedure. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position, but DO NOT start the engine. Slowly depress and release the accelerator pedal fully three times within ten seconds. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position. If the change oil indicator illuminates the next time the engine is started, repeat this procedure. The PCM continually monitors numerous sensor inputs to determine the duty-cycles to which the engine is being subjected. A pre-programmed algorithm within the PCM then determines when to send the proper lamp-ON or lamp-OFF message to the ElectroMechanical Instrument Cluster (EMIC) (also known as the Cab Compartment Node/CCN). For proper diagnosis of the change oil indicator, the PCM, the EMIC, the CAN data bus or the electronic communication related to change oil indicator operation a diagnostic scan tool is required. Refer to the appropriate diagnostic information. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Service Reminder Indicators > Oil Change Reminder Lamp > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 2463 Oil Change Reminder Lamp: Service and Repair OIL CHANGE INDICATOR - RESET To reset the "Oil Change Required" indicator (after performing the scheduled maintenance) refer to the following procedure: - 1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position (Do not start engine). - 2. Fully depress the accelerator pedal slowly three times within 10 seconds. - 3. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF/LOCK position. NOTE: If the "Oil Change Required" indicator message illuminates when you start the vehicle, the indicator did not reset. If necessary repeat this procedure. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Vehicle Lifting > Component Information > Service and Repair Vehicle Lifting: Service and Repair STANDARD PROCEDURE WARNING: The hoisting and jack lifting points provided are for a complete vehicle. When a chassis or drivetrain component is removed from a vehicle, the center of gravity is altered making some hoisting conditions unstable. Properly support or secure vehicle to hoisting device when these conditions exist. FLOOR JACK When properly positioned, a floor jack can be used to lift a vehicle. Support the vehicle in the raised position with jack stands at the front and rear ends of the frame rails. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Vehicle Lifting > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 2468 CAUTION: Do not lift vehicle with a floor jack positioned under: - An axle tube. - A body side sill. - A steering linkage component. - A drive shaft. - The engine or transmission oil pan. - The fuel tank. - A front suspension arm. NOTE: Use the correct front frame rail lifting locations only. NOTE: Use the correct rear frame rail lifting locations only. HOIST Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Vehicle Lifting > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 2469 A vehicle can be lifted with: - A single-post, frame-contact hoist. - A twin-post, chassis hoist. - A ramp-type, drive-on hoist. NOTE: When a frame-contact type hoist is used, verify that the lifting pads are positioned properly. NOTE: The forward lifting pads should be positioned against the forward flange of the transmission crossmember brackets at the bottom of the frame rail. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Vehicle Lifting > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 2470 NOTE: The rear lifting pads should be wedged between the forward flange of the leaf spring bracket and the frame rail. Safety stands should be placed under the frame rails at the front and rear ends. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Relays and Modules - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure Monitor Receiver / Transponder > Component Information > Locations > Transponder-Tire Pressure-Left Front Tire Pressure Monitor Receiver / Transponder: Locations Transponder-Tire Pressure-Left Front Component ID 521 Component ID: 521 Component : TRANSPONDER-TIRE PRESSURE-LEFT FRONT Connector: Name : TRANSPONDER-TIRE PRESSURE-LEFT FRONT Color : # of pins : 6 Pin Circuit Description 1 F504 20GY/PK FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN) 2 D508 20WT/GY COM-LIN TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR LAN 3 Z924 20BK GROUND 4 Z924 20BK GROUND 5-6-- Component Location - 32 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Relays and Modules - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure Monitor Receiver / Transponder > Component Information > Locations > Transponder-Tire Pressure-Left Front > Page 2476 Component ID 523 Component ID: 523 Component : TRANSPONDER-TIRE PRESSURE-LEFT FRONT Connector: Name : TRANSPONDER-TIRE PRESSURE-LEFT FRONT Color : # of pins : 6 Pin Circuit Description Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Relays and Modules - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure Monitor Receiver / Transponder > Component Information > Locations > Transponder-Tire Pressure-Left Front > Page 2477 1 F504 20GY/PK FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN) 2 D508 20WT/GY COM-LIN TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR LAN 3 Z924 20BK GROUND 4 Z924 20BK GROUND 5-6-Component Location - 32 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Relays and Modules - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure Monitor Receiver / Transponder > Component Information > Locations > Transponder-Tire Pressure-Left Front > Page 2478 Tire Pressure Monitor Receiver / Transponder: Locations Transponder-Tire Pressure-Right Front Component ID 522 Component ID: 522 Component : TRANSPONDER-TIRE PRESSURE-RIGHT FRONT Connector: Name : TRANSPONDER-TIRE PRESSURE-RIGHT FRONT Color : # of pins : 6 Pin Circuit Description 1 F504 20GY/PK FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN) 2 D508 20WT/GY COM-LIN TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR LAN 3 Z924 20BK GROUND 4-5 Z924 20BK GROUND 6-- Component Location - 29 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Relays and Modules - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure Monitor Receiver / Transponder > Component Information > Locations > Transponder-Tire Pressure-Left Front > Page 2479 Component ID 524 Component ID: 524 Component : TRANSPONDER-TIRE PRESSURE-RIGHT FRONT Connector: Name : TRANSPONDER-TIRE PRESSURE-RIGHT FRONT Color : # of pins : 6 Pin Circuit Description Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Relays and Modules - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure Monitor Receiver / Transponder > Component Information > Locations > Transponder-Tire Pressure-Left Front > Page 2480 1 F504 20GY/PK FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN) 2 D508 20WT/GY COM-LIN TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR LAN 3 Z924 20BK GROUND 4-5 Z924 20BK GROUND 6-Component Location - 29 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Relays and Modules - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure Monitor Receiver / Transponder > Component Information > Diagrams > Transponder-Tire Pressure-Left Front Tire Pressure Monitor Receiver / Transponder: Diagrams Transponder-Tire Pressure-Left Front Component ID 521 Component ID: 521 Component : TRANSPONDER-TIRE PRESSURE-LEFT FRONT Connector: Name : TRANSPONDER-TIRE PRESSURE-LEFT FRONT Color : # of pins : 6 Pin Circuit Description 1 F504 20GY/PK FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN) 2 D508 20WT/GY COM-LIN TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR LAN 3 Z924 20BK GROUND 4 Z924 20BK GROUND 5-6-- Component Location - 32 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Relays and Modules - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure Monitor Receiver / Transponder > Component Information > Diagrams > Transponder-Tire Pressure-Left Front > Page 2483 Component ID 523 Component ID: 523 Component : TRANSPONDER-TIRE PRESSURE-LEFT FRONT Connector: Name : TRANSPONDER-TIRE PRESSURE-LEFT FRONT Color : # of pins : 6 Pin Circuit Description Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Relays and Modules - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure Monitor Receiver / Transponder > Component Information > Diagrams > Transponder-Tire Pressure-Left Front > Page 2484 1 F504 20GY/PK FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN) 2 D508 20WT/GY COM-LIN TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR LAN 3 Z924 20BK GROUND 4 Z924 20BK GROUND 5-6-Component Location - 32 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Relays and Modules - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure Monitor Receiver / Transponder > Component Information > Diagrams > Transponder-Tire Pressure-Left Front > Page 2485 Tire Pressure Monitor Receiver / Transponder: Diagrams Transponder-Tire Pressure-Right Front Component ID 522 Component ID: 522 Component : TRANSPONDER-TIRE PRESSURE-RIGHT FRONT Connector: Name : TRANSPONDER-TIRE PRESSURE-RIGHT FRONT Color : # of pins : 6 Pin Circuit Description 1 F504 20GY/PK FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN) 2 D508 20WT/GY COM-LIN TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR LAN 3 Z924 20BK GROUND 4-5 Z924 20BK GROUND 6-- Component Location - 29 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Relays and Modules - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure Monitor Receiver / Transponder > Component Information > Diagrams > Transponder-Tire Pressure-Left Front > Page 2486 Component ID 524 Component ID: 524 Component : TRANSPONDER-TIRE PRESSURE-RIGHT FRONT Connector: Name : TRANSPONDER-TIRE PRESSURE-RIGHT FRONT Color : # of pins : 6 Pin Circuit Description Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Relays and Modules - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure Monitor Receiver / Transponder > Component Information > Diagrams > Transponder-Tire Pressure-Left Front > Page 2487 1 F504 20GY/PK FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN) 2 D508 20WT/GY COM-LIN TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR LAN 3 Z924 20BK GROUND 4-5 Z924 20BK GROUND 6-Component Location - 29 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Relays and Modules - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure Monitor Receiver / Transponder > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Tire Pressure Monitor Receiver / Transponder: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION A transponder (2), also known as a trigger module, is located in the front wheel wells (behind the wheelhouse splash shields) of the vehicle to provide the WCM/SKREEM with the location of the front tire pressure sensors on the vehicle. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Relays and Modules - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure Monitor Receiver / Transponder > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 2490 Tire Pressure Monitor Receiver / Transponder: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The Wireless Control Module (WCM), commonly referred to as the Sentry Key Remote Entry Module (SKREEM), uses transponders (trigger modules) located in the front wheel wells on the vehicle to provide it with the location of the front tire pressure sensors on the vehicle. Like the base system, the WCM receives RF signals from all four rotating wheel speed sensors. When the WCM needs to know which sensor is located at a particular location on the vehicle, it directs the transponder at that location to send out a low frequency signal to excite the nearby sensor. The WCM then receives that excited signal and knows where that sensor is located. This auto-locating process only happens in the first 10 minutes of any WCM cycle while traveling at speeds above 20 mph (32 km/h) (Each WCM cycle ends when the vehicle has been shut off for a time period of approximately 20 minutes or longer). If the TPMS fails to localize, the TPM indicator lamp will flash on/off for 75 seconds, and remain on solid. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Relays and Modules - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure Monitor Receiver / Transponder > Component Information > Service and Repair > TPM Transponder - Removal Tire Pressure Monitor Receiver / Transponder: Service and Repair TPM Transponder - Removal REMOVAL 1. Raise and support the vehicle. 2. Remove the wheel well housing cover. 3. Remove the mounting screw (1) for the transponder (2). 4. Disconnect the electrical connector (3) and remove the transponder (2) from the vehicle. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Relays and Modules - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure Monitor Receiver / Transponder > Component Information > Service and Repair > TPM Transponder - Removal > Page 2493 Tire Pressure Monitor Receiver / Transponder: Service and Repair TPM Transponder - Installation INSTALLATION 1. Install the transponder (2) to the vehicle and reconnect the electrical connector (3). 2. Install the mounting screw (1) for the transponder (2) Tighten to 3 Nm (25 in. lbs.). 3. Install the wheel well housing cover. 4. Lower the vehicle. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Sensors and Switches - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Service Precautions Tire Pressure Sensor: Service Precautions CAUTION CAUTION: The use of tire sealants is not recommended for vehicles equipped with the Tire Pressure Monitoring system. Tire sealants may clog tire pressure sensors. CAUTION: Tire pressure sensor valve stem caps and cores are specially designed for the sensors. Due to risk of corrosion, do not use a standard valve stem cap or core in a tire pressure sensor in place of the original equipment style sensor cap and core. CAUTION: It is not recommended to install a tire pressure sensor in an aftermarket wheel. Use tire pressure sensors in original style factory wheels only. CAUTION: Any time a sensor is to be reinstalled in a wheel, a new seal, cap and valve core must be installed on the stem to ensure air tight sealing. NOTE: TPM thresholds have been established for the original tire size equipped on the vehicle. Use original size tires only to maintain system accuracy. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Sensors and Switches - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Tire Pressure Sensor: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION On vehicles equipped with Tire Pressure Monitoring System, one tire pressure sensor (6) is mounted to each wheel in place of the traditional tire valve stem. Each sensor has an internal battery that lasts up to 10 years. The battery is not serviceable. At the time of battery failure, the sensor (6) must be replaced. The TPM system operates on a 315 MHz radio frequency. The 315 MHz sensors can be easily identified by a GREEN sensor body, with (an triangle insignia) (1). The 433 MHz sensors can be identified by a grey sensor body with an oval insignia. For car applications, there is a 315 MHz TPM sensor with a Black sensor body with an oval insignia. NOTE: This vehicle uses the 315 MHz TPM sensor with the GREEN sensor body. Although 315 MHz and 433 MHz sensors are identical in size and shape, they are not interchangeable. Always make sure the correct color sensor is being used. A RKE-TPM Analyzer can be used to determine the sensor's frequency without having to dismount the tire. The TPM sensors are designed for original style factory wheels. It is not recommended to install a tire pressure sensor in an aftermarket wheel. (This could cause sealing and system performance issues.) The serviceable components of the tire pressure sensor are: - Sensor-To-Wheel Seal (4) - Valve Stem Cap (2) - Valve Stem Core - Valve Stem Nut (3) The valve stem caps and cores used are specifically designed for the tire pressure monitoring sensors. Although similar to standard valve stem caps and cores, they are different. The valve stem cap has a special seal inside to keep moisture and corrosion out. The valve stem core has a special nickel coating to protect from corrosion. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Sensors and Switches - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 2500 Tire Pressure Sensor: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION CAUTION: The TPMS has been optimized for the original equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures have been established for the tire size equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system operation or sensor damage may result when using replacement equipment that is not of the same size, type, and/or style. After-market wheels can cause sensor damage. Do not use aftermarket tire sealants or balance beads if your vehicle is equipped with a TPMS, as damage to the sensors may result. CAUTION: After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure always reinstall the valve stem cap. This will prevent moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem, which could damage the Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensor. CAUTION: Tire pressure sensor valve stem caps and cores are specially designed for the sensors. Due to risk of corrosion, do not use a standard valve stem cap or core in a tire pressure sensor in place of the original equipment style sensor cap and core. CAUTION: Any time a sensor is to be reinstalled in a wheel, a new seal, nut, cap and valve core must be installed on the stem to ensure air tight sealing. NOTE: TPM thresholds have been established for the original tire size equipped on the vehicle. Use original size tires only to maintain system accuracy. The battery operated tire pressure sensor is both a transmitter and a receiver. The TPM sensor can be forced to transmit if using a special tool such as a TPM-RKE Analyzer, or from a transponder. The TPM-RKE Analyzer has the ability to change the sensor mode and to diagnose a faulty TPM sensor. Using a TPM-RKE Analyzer can take up to a minute to force a transmission from a sensor. The High Pressure TPM sensor can be in one of the following modes: Sleep Mode - A new TPM sensor will be in this mode. If placed on the vehicle as a road tire, the TPM sensor will transmit once every 20 seconds when the vehicle is driven at speeds over 15 mph (24 km/h). If the vehicle is not moving, the sensor will only transmit on a pressure change greater then 2 psi (13.8 kPA). Driving the vehicle continuously at speeds over 15 mph (24 km/h) for more then 4 minutes will change the sensor state into 30 BLOCK MODE. The TPM sensor will not return to SLEEP MODE. Now, if the vehicle has been stopped for 20 minutes, the TPM sensor state will change to PARK MODE. - Park Mode - This is the correct mode when the vehicle is not moving. The sensor will transmit once every 13 hours to update the WCM, or will transmit on a 2 psi (13.8 kPA) delta change. The sensors will internally take a measurement of the tire pressure every minute to determine a change in tire pressure. - 30 Block Mode - If the vehicle has not been moving for more then 20 minutes, or if the sensor's mode was forced to Park Mode using a TPM-RKE Analyzer, the sensor's operating mode will transition from PARK MODE to 30 BLOCK MODE once the vehicle is driven over 15 mph. In this mode, the sensor will transmit once every 15 seconds when the vehicle is driven at speeds over 15 mph (24 km/h) for the first 30 transmissions. After 8 minutes of continuous driving above 15 mph (24 km/h), the TPM sensor will change to DRIVE MODE. Drive Mode - In this mode, the sensor will transmit once every minute when the vehicle is driven at speeds over 15 mph (24 km/h). At any time that the vehicle speed drops below 15mph, the sensor will not transmit. The sensor mode will still be in drive mode when the sensor reaches speeds over 15 mph (24 km/h). If the vehicle has been stationary for more then 20 minutes, the TPM sensor will change to PARK MODE. Each sensor's (transmitter) broadcast is uniquely coded so that the wireless control module (WCM) can monitor the state of each of the sensors on the four rotating road wheels. The WCM can automatically learn and store the sensor's ID while driving "within 10 minutes continuously above 15 m.p.h. (24 Km/h)" after a sensor has been replaced. The vehicle must be stationary for more then 20 minutes in order to initiate the learning sequence. The sensor IDs can also be programmed using the TPM-RKE Analyzer Tool. Scan each TPM sensor at each road wheel, and store each Sensor ID in the correct location. (LEFT FRONT, LEFT REAR, RIGHT FRONT, and RIGHT REAR) Connect the TPM-RKE Analyzer Tool to the Scan Tool. Then follow the programming steps outlined in the diagnostic Scan Tool for "Program Tire Pressure Sensor ID w/ TPM Tool" under "MISC" for the "WCM/WIRELESS CONTROL MODULE". Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Sensors and Switches - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 2501 Tire Pressure Sensor: Testing and Inspection TIRE PRESSURE SENSOR NOTE: Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi (14 to 41 kPa) during normal driving conditions. Do NOT reduce this normal pressure build up. NOTE: Tire pressure will vary with temperature by about 1 psi (6.9 kPa) for every 12 F (6.5 C). This means that when the outside temperature decreases, the tire pressure will also decrease. Tire pressure should always be set based on cold inflation tire pressure. When diagnosing a tire pressure issue, always check air pressure in the tires first with a known accurate air gauge. Adjust air pressure as necessary to that listed on the Tire Inflation Pressure Label (Placard) provided with the vehicle (usually applied to the driver's side B-pillar). After adjusting air pressure in a tire on the vehicle, allow approximately two minutes for the message or indicator lamp to go out. Check the tire pressure indicator lamp in the instrument cluster. If the lamp is illuminating continuously, inspect all the tires for leaks. A water "dunk tank" or other water test may be used to check for leaks around the sensor as long as any water at the valve core is removed once the procedure is completed. The water can be easily expelled from the core area by pushing in on the core for several seconds, allowing escaping air to drive out any moisture. Reinflate the tire as necessary. Always make sure the original valve stem cap is securely installed to keep moisture out of the sensor. If the gauge-read pressure in the tires does not indicate a tire pressure issue, refer to the appropriate diagnostic information. If the indicator lamp is flashing on/off for 75 seconds and then remains on solid, a system fault was detected. Refer to the appropriate diagnostic information. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Sensors and Switches - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Tire Pressure Sensor: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL 1. Raise and support vehicle. 2. Remove the tire and wheel assembly. See: Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement CAUTION: The cap used on this valve stem contains an O-ring seal to prevent contamination and moisture from entering the valve stem. Retain this valve stem cap for reuse. Do not substitute a regular valve stem cap in its place. CAUTION: The valve stem used on this vehicle is made of aluminum and the core is nickel plated brass. The original valve stem core must be reinstalled and not substituted with a valve stem core made of a different material. This is required to prevent corrosion in the valve stem caused by the different metals. 3. Let the air out of the tire. 4. Remove the nut (3). 5. Push the sensor into the tire (1) (so the sensor is loose inside the tire). 6. Remove the tire from the rim. 7. Retrieve the sensor (1) from the tire. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Sensors and Switches - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 2504 Tire Pressure Sensor: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION NOTE: Before reinstalling an existing tire pressure sensor (6), replace valve cap (2), nut (3), valve core and sensor seal (4) to ensure proper sealing. NOTE: The notch/flat should be lined up together and facing towards the wheel during installation. 1. Wipe area clean around sensor/valve stem mounting hole in wheel. Make sure surface of wheel is not damaged. 2. Insert sensor (1) through wheel (2) as shown keeping pressure against rear of metal valve stem (See Arrow). Potted side of sensor is to be positioned toward wheel. Damage to the sensor may occur if the sensor is installed incorrectly. NOTE: A flat on the seal seat is used to key the seat to the sensor housing. The notch/flat should be lined up together and facing towards the wheel during installation. 3. Install sensor nut (3) and hand tighten. NOTE: Before tightening sensor nut, push downward on sensor housing (2) in an attempt to make it flush with interior contour of wheel (1). 4. While holding sensor in position, tighten sensor nut to 6 Nm (53 in. lbs.). CAUTION: Over-tightening the sensor to as much as 10 Nm (88 in. lbs.) may result in sensor separation from the valve stem. Under this condition, the sensor may still function, however, the condition should be corrected immediately. 5. Mount tire on wheel following tire changer manufacturer's instructions, paying special attention to the following to avoid damaging tire pressure sensor: a. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Sensors and Switches - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 2505 Rotating Wheel Tire Changers- Once the wheel is mounted to the changer, position the sensor valve stem (2) approximately 180° from the head of the changer (located at 1) in a clockwise direction before rotating the wheel (also in a clockwise direction) to mount the tire. Use this procedure on both the upper and lower tire beads. b. Rotating Tool Tire Changers - Position the wheel on the changer so that the sensor valve stem (1) is located approximately 180° clockwise from the installation end of the mounting/dismounting tool (2) once the tool is mounted for tire installation. Make sure the sensor is clear of the lower bead breaker area (3) to avoid damaging the sensor when the breaker rises. Rotate the tool (2) in a counterclockwise direction to mount the tire. Use this procedure on both the upper and lower tire beads. 6. Adjust air pressure to that listed on Tire Inflation Pressure Label (Placard) provided with vehicle (usually applied to driver's side B-pillar). Make sure original style valve stem cap is securely installed to keep moisture out of sensor. 7. Install tire and wheel assembly on vehicle. See: Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement 8. Lower vehicle. 9. If the vehicle has been stationary for more then 20 minutes, drive the vehicle for a minimum of 10 minutes while maintaining a continuous speed above 15 mph (24 km/h). During this time, the system will learn the new sensor ID. A new sensor ID can also be programmed directly into the WCM by using a RKE-TPM Analyzer in conjunction with a Scan Tool. Once the new sensor ID has been programmed, the RKE-TPM Analyzer can be used to update the TPMS by activating the sensor. NOTE: If a sensor cannot be trained, refer to appropriate diagnostic information. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Sensors and Switches - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure Warning Reset Switch > Component Information > Locations Tire Pressure Warning Reset Switch: Locations Component ID: 513 Component : SWITCH-TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR Connector: Name : SWITCH-TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR Color : BROWN # of pins : 6 Pin Circuit Description 1 G561 20VT TPM INDICATOR CONTROL 2 E11 20OR/DB PANEL LAMPS DRIVER 3 G562 20VT/YL TPM SWITCH SIGNAL 4 Z600 20BK GROUND 5 F504 20GY/PK NO FUNCTION DEFINED 6-Component Location - 47 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Sensors and Switches - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure Warning Reset Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 2509 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Sensors and Switches - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure Warning Reset Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 2510 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Sensors and Switches - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure Warning Reset Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 2511 Tire Pressure Warning Reset Switch: Diagrams Component ID: 513 Component : SWITCH-TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR Connector: Name : SWITCH-TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR Color : BROWN # of pins : 6 Pin Circuit Description 1 G561 20VT TPM INDICATOR CONTROL 2 E11 20OR/DB PANEL LAMPS DRIVER 3 G562 20VT/YL TPM SWITCH SIGNAL 4 Z600 20BK GROUND 5 F504 20GY/PK NO FUNCTION DEFINED 6-Component Location - 47 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Sensors and Switches - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure Warning Reset Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 2512 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tire Monitoring System > Low Tire Pressure Indicator > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Low Tire Pressure Indicator: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION A Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM) indicator is standard equipment on all instrument clusters. However, on vehicles not equipped with the optional TPM, this indicator is electronically disabled. This indicator is located in the lower portion of the tachometer dial face in the instrument cluster overlay. The TPM indicator consists of a stencil-like cutout of an icon that represents a cross-section of a tire with a centered exclamation point in the opaque layer of the instrument cluster overlay. The dark outer layer of the overlay prevents the indicator from being clearly visible when it is not illuminated. An amber Light Emitting Diode (LED) behind the cutout in the opaque layer of the overlay causes the indicator to appear in amber through the translucent outer layer of the overlay when it is illuminated from behind by the LED, which is soldered onto the instrument cluster electronic circuit board. The TPM indicator is serviced as a unit with the instrument cluster. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tire Monitoring System > Low Tire Pressure Indicator > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 2518 Low Tire Pressure Indicator: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM) indicator gives an indication to the vehicle operator of the status of the TPM system. This indicator is controlled by a transistor on the instrument cluster circuit board based upon cluster programming and electronic messages received by the cluster from the Sentry Key REmote Entry Module (SKREEM) over the Controller Area Network (CAN) data bus. The TPM indicator Light Emitting Diode (LED) is completely controlled by the instrument cluster logic circuit, and that logic will only allow this indicator to operate when the instrument cluster receives a battery current input on the fused ignition switch output (run-start) circuit. Therefore, the LED will always be OFF when the ignition switch is in any position except ON or START. The LED only illuminates when it is provide a path to ground by the instrument cluster transistor. The instrument cluster will turn ON the TPM indicator for the following reasons: - Bulb Test - Each time the ignition switch is turned to the ON position, the SKREEM sends an electronic TPM indicator lamp-ON message to the cluster to illuminate the TPM indicator for about three seconds as a bulb test. - TPM Indicator Lamp-On Message - Each time the cluster receives an electronic TPM indicator lamp-ON message from the SKREEM, the TPM indicator will be illuminated. The indicator can be flashed ON and OFF, or illuminated solid, as dictated by the SKREEM message. The indicator remains illuminated until the cluster receives a lamp-OFF message from the SKREEM or until the ignition switch is turned to the OFF position, whichever occurs first. - Communication Error - If the cluster receives no TPM lamp-ON or lamp-OFF messages from the SKREEM for six consecutive seconds, the TPM indicator is illuminated by the instrument cluster. The indicator remains controlled and illuminated by the cluster until a valid lamp-ON or lamp-OFF message is received from the SKREEM. - Actuator Test - Each time the cluster is put through the actuator test, the TPM indicator will be turned ON, then OFF again during the bulb check portion of the test to confirm the functionality of the LED and the cluster control circuitry. The SKREEM performs a self-test each time the ignition switch is turned to the ON position to decide whether the TPM system is in good operating condition and whether the tire inflation pressures are too high or too low. The SKREEM then sends the proper lamp-ON or lamp-OFF message to the ElectroMechanical Instrument Cluster (EMIC) (also known as the Cab Compartment Node/CCN). If the instrument cluster turns ON the TPM indicator after the bulb test, it indicates that the inflation pressure of a tire is too low or that a malfunction has occurred and the TPM system is ineffective. For proper diagnosis of the TPM system, the SKREEM, the EMIC, the CAN data bus or the electronic communication related to TPM indicator operation a diagnostic scan tool is required. Refer to the appropriate diagnostic information. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tire Monitoring System > Tire Pressure Monitor Receiver / Transponder > Component Information > Locations > Transponder-Tire Pressure-Left Front Tire Pressure Monitor Receiver / Transponder: Locations Transponder-Tire Pressure-Left Front Component ID 521 Component ID: 521 Component : TRANSPONDER-TIRE PRESSURE-LEFT FRONT Connector: Name : TRANSPONDER-TIRE PRESSURE-LEFT FRONT Color : # of pins : 6 Pin Circuit Description 1 F504 20GY/PK FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN) 2 D508 20WT/GY COM-LIN TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR LAN 3 Z924 20BK GROUND 4 Z924 20BK GROUND 5-6-- Component Location - 32 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tire Monitoring System > Tire Pressure Monitor Receiver / Transponder > Component Information > Locations > Transponder-Tire Pressure-Left Front > Page 2523 Component ID 523 Component ID: 523 Component : TRANSPONDER-TIRE PRESSURE-LEFT FRONT Connector: Name : TRANSPONDER-TIRE PRESSURE-LEFT FRONT Color : # of pins : 6 Pin Circuit Description Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tire Monitoring System > Tire Pressure Monitor Receiver / Transponder > Component Information > Locations > Transponder-Tire Pressure-Left Front > Page 2524 1 F504 20GY/PK FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN) 2 D508 20WT/GY COM-LIN TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR LAN 3 Z924 20BK GROUND 4 Z924 20BK GROUND 5-6-Component Location - 32 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tire Monitoring System > Tire Pressure Monitor Receiver / Transponder > Component Information > Locations > Transponder-Tire Pressure-Left Front > Page 2525 Tire Pressure Monitor Receiver / Transponder: Locations Transponder-Tire Pressure-Right Front Component ID 522 Component ID: 522 Component : TRANSPONDER-TIRE PRESSURE-RIGHT FRONT Connector: Name : TRANSPONDER-TIRE PRESSURE-RIGHT FRONT Color : # of pins : 6 Pin Circuit Description 1 F504 20GY/PK FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN) 2 D508 20WT/GY COM-LIN TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR LAN 3 Z924 20BK GROUND 4-5 Z924 20BK GROUND 6-- Component Location - 29 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tire Monitoring System > Tire Pressure Monitor Receiver / Transponder > Component Information > Locations > Transponder-Tire Pressure-Left Front > Page 2526 Component ID 524 Component ID: 524 Component : TRANSPONDER-TIRE PRESSURE-RIGHT FRONT Connector: Name : TRANSPONDER-TIRE PRESSURE-RIGHT FRONT Color : # of pins : 6 Pin Circuit Description Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tire Monitoring System > Tire Pressure Monitor Receiver / Transponder > Component Information > Locations > Transponder-Tire Pressure-Left Front > Page 2527 1 F504 20GY/PK FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN) 2 D508 20WT/GY COM-LIN TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR LAN 3 Z924 20BK GROUND 4-5 Z924 20BK GROUND 6-Component Location - 29 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tire Monitoring System > Tire Pressure Monitor Receiver / Transponder > Component Information > Diagrams > Transponder-Tire Pressure-Left Front Tire Pressure Monitor Receiver / Transponder: Diagrams Transponder-Tire Pressure-Left Front Component ID 521 Component ID: 521 Component : TRANSPONDER-TIRE PRESSURE-LEFT FRONT Connector: Name : TRANSPONDER-TIRE PRESSURE-LEFT FRONT Color : # of pins : 6 Pin Circuit Description 1 F504 20GY/PK FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN) 2 D508 20WT/GY COM-LIN TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR LAN 3 Z924 20BK GROUND 4 Z924 20BK GROUND 5-6-- Component Location - 32 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tire Monitoring System > Tire Pressure Monitor Receiver / Transponder > Component Information > Diagrams > Transponder-Tire Pressure-Left Front > Page 2530 Component ID 523 Component ID: 523 Component : TRANSPONDER-TIRE PRESSURE-LEFT FRONT Connector: Name : TRANSPONDER-TIRE PRESSURE-LEFT FRONT Color : # of pins : 6 Pin Circuit Description Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tire Monitoring System > Tire Pressure Monitor Receiver / Transponder > Component Information > Diagrams > Transponder-Tire Pressure-Left Front > Page 2531 1 F504 20GY/PK FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN) 2 D508 20WT/GY COM-LIN TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR LAN 3 Z924 20BK GROUND 4 Z924 20BK GROUND 5-6-Component Location - 32 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tire Monitoring System > Tire Pressure Monitor Receiver / Transponder > Component Information > Diagrams > Transponder-Tire Pressure-Left Front > Page 2532 Tire Pressure Monitor Receiver / Transponder: Diagrams Transponder-Tire Pressure-Right Front Component ID 522 Component ID: 522 Component : TRANSPONDER-TIRE PRESSURE-RIGHT FRONT Connector: Name : TRANSPONDER-TIRE PRESSURE-RIGHT FRONT Color : # of pins : 6 Pin Circuit Description 1 F504 20GY/PK FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN) 2 D508 20WT/GY COM-LIN TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR LAN 3 Z924 20BK GROUND 4-5 Z924 20BK GROUND 6-- Component Location - 29 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tire Monitoring System > Tire Pressure Monitor Receiver / Transponder > Component Information > Diagrams > Transponder-Tire Pressure-Left Front > Page 2533 Component ID 524 Component ID: 524 Component : TRANSPONDER-TIRE PRESSURE-RIGHT FRONT Connector: Name : TRANSPONDER-TIRE PRESSURE-RIGHT FRONT Color : # of pins : 6 Pin Circuit Description Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tire Monitoring System > Tire Pressure Monitor Receiver / Transponder > Component Information > Diagrams > Transponder-Tire Pressure-Left Front > Page 2534 1 F504 20GY/PK FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN) 2 D508 20WT/GY COM-LIN TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR LAN 3 Z924 20BK GROUND 4-5 Z924 20BK GROUND 6-Component Location - 29 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tire Monitoring System > Tire Pressure Monitor Receiver / Transponder > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Tire Pressure Monitor Receiver / Transponder: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION A transponder (2), also known as a trigger module, is located in the front wheel wells (behind the wheelhouse splash shields) of the vehicle to provide the WCM/SKREEM with the location of the front tire pressure sensors on the vehicle. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tire Monitoring System > Tire Pressure Monitor Receiver / Transponder > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 2537 Tire Pressure Monitor Receiver / Transponder: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The Wireless Control Module (WCM), commonly referred to as the Sentry Key Remote Entry Module (SKREEM), uses transponders (trigger modules) located in the front wheel wells on the vehicle to provide it with the location of the front tire pressure sensors on the vehicle. Like the base system, the WCM receives RF signals from all four rotating wheel speed sensors. When the WCM needs to know which sensor is located at a particular location on the vehicle, it directs the transponder at that location to send out a low frequency signal to excite the nearby sensor. The WCM then receives that excited signal and knows where that sensor is located. This auto-locating process only happens in the first 10 minutes of any WCM cycle while traveling at speeds above 20 mph (32 km/h) (Each WCM cycle ends when the vehicle has been shut off for a time period of approximately 20 minutes or longer). If the TPMS fails to localize, the TPM indicator lamp will flash on/off for 75 seconds, and remain on solid. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tire Monitoring System > Tire Pressure Monitor Receiver / Transponder > Component Information > Service and Repair > TPM Transponder - Removal Tire Pressure Monitor Receiver / Transponder: Service and Repair TPM Transponder - Removal REMOVAL 1. Raise and support the vehicle. 2. Remove the wheel well housing cover. 3. Remove the mounting screw (1) for the transponder (2). 4. Disconnect the electrical connector (3) and remove the transponder (2) from the vehicle. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tire Monitoring System > Tire Pressure Monitor Receiver / Transponder > Component Information > Service and Repair > TPM Transponder - Removal > Page 2540 Tire Pressure Monitor Receiver / Transponder: Service and Repair TPM Transponder - Installation INSTALLATION 1. Install the transponder (2) to the vehicle and reconnect the electrical connector (3). 2. Install the mounting screw (1) for the transponder (2) Tighten to 3 Nm (25 in. lbs.). 3. Install the wheel well housing cover. 4. Lower the vehicle. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tire Monitoring System > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Service Precautions Tire Pressure Sensor: Service Precautions CAUTION CAUTION: The use of tire sealants is not recommended for vehicles equipped with the Tire Pressure Monitoring system. Tire sealants may clog tire pressure sensors. CAUTION: Tire pressure sensor valve stem caps and cores are specially designed for the sensors. Due to risk of corrosion, do not use a standard valve stem cap or core in a tire pressure sensor in place of the original equipment style sensor cap and core. CAUTION: It is not recommended to install a tire pressure sensor in an aftermarket wheel. Use tire pressure sensors in original style factory wheels only. CAUTION: Any time a sensor is to be reinstalled in a wheel, a new seal, cap and valve core must be installed on the stem to ensure air tight sealing. NOTE: TPM thresholds have been established for the original tire size equipped on the vehicle. Use original size tires only to maintain system accuracy. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tire Monitoring System > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Tire Pressure Sensor: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION On vehicles equipped with Tire Pressure Monitoring System, one tire pressure sensor (6) is mounted to each wheel in place of the traditional tire valve stem. Each sensor has an internal battery that lasts up to 10 years. The battery is not serviceable. At the time of battery failure, the sensor (6) must be replaced. The TPM system operates on a 315 MHz radio frequency. The 315 MHz sensors can be easily identified by a GREEN sensor body, with (an triangle insignia) (1). The 433 MHz sensors can be identified by a grey sensor body with an oval insignia. For car applications, there is a 315 MHz TPM sensor with a Black sensor body with an oval insignia. NOTE: This vehicle uses the 315 MHz TPM sensor with the GREEN sensor body. Although 315 MHz and 433 MHz sensors are identical in size and shape, they are not interchangeable. Always make sure the correct color sensor is being used. A RKE-TPM Analyzer can be used to determine the sensor's frequency without having to dismount the tire. The TPM sensors are designed for original style factory wheels. It is not recommended to install a tire pressure sensor in an aftermarket wheel. (This could cause sealing and system performance issues.) The serviceable components of the tire pressure sensor are: - Sensor-To-Wheel Seal (4) - Valve Stem Cap (2) - Valve Stem Core - Valve Stem Nut (3) The valve stem caps and cores used are specifically designed for the tire pressure monitoring sensors. Although similar to standard valve stem caps and cores, they are different. The valve stem cap has a special seal inside to keep moisture and corrosion out. The valve stem core has a special nickel coating to protect from corrosion. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tire Monitoring System > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 2546 Tire Pressure Sensor: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION CAUTION: The TPMS has been optimized for the original equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures have been established for the tire size equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system operation or sensor damage may result when using replacement equipment that is not of the same size, type, and/or style. After-market wheels can cause sensor damage. Do not use aftermarket tire sealants or balance beads if your vehicle is equipped with a TPMS, as damage to the sensors may result. CAUTION: After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure always reinstall the valve stem cap. This will prevent moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem, which could damage the Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensor. CAUTION: Tire pressure sensor valve stem caps and cores are specially designed for the sensors. Due to risk of corrosion, do not use a standard valve stem cap or core in a tire pressure sensor in place of the original equipment style sensor cap and core. CAUTION: Any time a sensor is to be reinstalled in a wheel, a new seal, nut, cap and valve core must be installed on the stem to ensure air tight sealing. NOTE: TPM thresholds have been established for the original tire size equipped on the vehicle. Use original size tires only to maintain system accuracy. The battery operated tire pressure sensor is both a transmitter and a receiver. The TPM sensor can be forced to transmit if using a special tool such as a TPM-RKE Analyzer, or from a transponder. The TPM-RKE Analyzer has the ability to change the sensor mode and to diagnose a faulty TPM sensor. Using a TPM-RKE Analyzer can take up to a minute to force a transmission from a sensor. The High Pressure TPM sensor can be in one of the following modes: Sleep Mode - A new TPM sensor will be in this mode. If placed on the vehicle as a road tire, the TPM sensor will transmit once every 20 seconds when the vehicle is driven at speeds over 15 mph (24 km/h). If the vehicle is not moving, the sensor will only transmit on a pressure change greater then 2 psi (13.8 kPA). Driving the vehicle continuously at speeds over 15 mph (24 km/h) for more then 4 minutes will change the sensor state into 30 BLOCK MODE. The TPM sensor will not return to SLEEP MODE. Now, if the vehicle has been stopped for 20 minutes, the TPM sensor state will change to PARK MODE. - Park Mode - This is the correct mode when the vehicle is not moving. The sensor will transmit once every 13 hours to update the WCM, or will transmit on a 2 psi (13.8 kPA) delta change. The sensors will internally take a measurement of the tire pressure every minute to determine a change in tire pressure. - 30 Block Mode - If the vehicle has not been moving for more then 20 minutes, or if the sensor's mode was forced to Park Mode using a TPM-RKE Analyzer, the sensor's operating mode will transition from PARK MODE to 30 BLOCK MODE once the vehicle is driven over 15 mph. In this mode, the sensor will transmit once every 15 seconds when the vehicle is driven at speeds over 15 mph (24 km/h) for the first 30 transmissions. After 8 minutes of continuous driving above 15 mph (24 km/h), the TPM sensor will change to DRIVE MODE. Drive Mode - In this mode, the sensor will transmit once every minute when the vehicle is driven at speeds over 15 mph (24 km/h). At any time that the vehicle speed drops below 15mph, the sensor will not transmit. The sensor mode will still be in drive mode when the sensor reaches speeds over 15 mph (24 km/h). If the vehicle has been stationary for more then 20 minutes, the TPM sensor will change to PARK MODE. Each sensor's (transmitter) broadcast is uniquely coded so that the wireless control module (WCM) can monitor the state of each of the sensors on the four rotating road wheels. The WCM can automatically learn and store the sensor's ID while driving "within 10 minutes continuously above 15 m.p.h. (24 Km/h)" after a sensor has been replaced. The vehicle must be stationary for more then 20 minutes in order to initiate the learning sequence. The sensor IDs can also be programmed using the TPM-RKE Analyzer Tool. Scan each TPM sensor at each road wheel, and store each Sensor ID in the correct location. (LEFT FRONT, LEFT REAR, RIGHT FRONT, and RIGHT REAR) Connect the TPM-RKE Analyzer Tool to the Scan Tool. Then follow the programming steps outlined in the diagnostic Scan Tool for "Program Tire Pressure Sensor ID w/ TPM Tool" under "MISC" for the "WCM/WIRELESS CONTROL MODULE". Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tire Monitoring System > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 2547 Tire Pressure Sensor: Testing and Inspection TIRE PRESSURE SENSOR NOTE: Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi (14 to 41 kPa) during normal driving conditions. Do NOT reduce this normal pressure build up. NOTE: Tire pressure will vary with temperature by about 1 psi (6.9 kPa) for every 12 F (6.5 C). This means that when the outside temperature decreases, the tire pressure will also decrease. Tire pressure should always be set based on cold inflation tire pressure. When diagnosing a tire pressure issue, always check air pressure in the tires first with a known accurate air gauge. Adjust air pressure as necessary to that listed on the Tire Inflation Pressure Label (Placard) provided with the vehicle (usually applied to the driver's side B-pillar). After adjusting air pressure in a tire on the vehicle, allow approximately two minutes for the message or indicator lamp to go out. Check the tire pressure indicator lamp in the instrument cluster. If the lamp is illuminating continuously, inspect all the tires for leaks. A water "dunk tank" or other water test may be used to check for leaks around the sensor as long as any water at the valve core is removed once the procedure is completed. The water can be easily expelled from the core area by pushing in on the core for several seconds, allowing escaping air to drive out any moisture. Reinflate the tire as necessary. Always make sure the original valve stem cap is securely installed to keep moisture out of the sensor. If the gauge-read pressure in the tires does not indicate a tire pressure issue, refer to the appropriate diagnostic information. If the indicator lamp is flashing on/off for 75 seconds and then remains on solid, a system fault was detected. Refer to the appropriate diagnostic information. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tire Monitoring System > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Tire Pressure Sensor: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL 1. Raise and support vehicle. 2. Remove the tire and wheel assembly. See: Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement CAUTION: The cap used on this valve stem contains an O-ring seal to prevent contamination and moisture from entering the valve stem. Retain this valve stem cap for reuse. Do not substitute a regular valve stem cap in its place. CAUTION: The valve stem used on this vehicle is made of aluminum and the core is nickel plated brass. The original valve stem core must be reinstalled and not substituted with a valve stem core made of a different material. This is required to prevent corrosion in the valve stem caused by the different metals. 3. Let the air out of the tire. 4. Remove the nut (3). 5. Push the sensor into the tire (1) (so the sensor is loose inside the tire). 6. Remove the tire from the rim. 7. Retrieve the sensor (1) from the tire. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tire Monitoring System > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 2550 Tire Pressure Sensor: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION NOTE: Before reinstalling an existing tire pressure sensor (6), replace valve cap (2), nut (3), valve core and sensor seal (4) to ensure proper sealing. NOTE: The notch/flat should be lined up together and facing towards the wheel during installation. 1. Wipe area clean around sensor/valve stem mounting hole in wheel. Make sure surface of wheel is not damaged. 2. Insert sensor (1) through wheel (2) as shown keeping pressure against rear of metal valve stem (See Arrow). Potted side of sensor is to be positioned toward wheel. Damage to the sensor may occur if the sensor is installed incorrectly. NOTE: A flat on the seal seat is used to key the seat to the sensor housing. The notch/flat should be lined up together and facing towards the wheel during installation. 3. Install sensor nut (3) and hand tighten. NOTE: Before tightening sensor nut, push downward on sensor housing (2) in an attempt to make it flush with interior contour of wheel (1). 4. While holding sensor in position, tighten sensor nut to 6 Nm (53 in. lbs.). CAUTION: Over-tightening the sensor to as much as 10 Nm (88 in. lbs.) may result in sensor separation from the valve stem. Under this condition, the sensor may still function, however, the condition should be corrected immediately. 5. Mount tire on wheel following tire changer manufacturer's instructions, paying special attention to the following to avoid damaging tire pressure sensor: a. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tire Monitoring System > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 2551 Rotating Wheel Tire Changers- Once the wheel is mounted to the changer, position the sensor valve stem (2) approximately 180° from the head of the changer (located at 1) in a clockwise direction before rotating the wheel (also in a clockwise direction) to mount the tire. Use this procedure on both the upper and lower tire beads. b. Rotating Tool Tire Changers - Position the wheel on the changer so that the sensor valve stem (1) is located approximately 180° clockwise from the installation end of the mounting/dismounting tool (2) once the tool is mounted for tire installation. Make sure the sensor is clear of the lower bead breaker area (3) to avoid damaging the sensor when the breaker rises. Rotate the tool (2) in a counterclockwise direction to mount the tire. Use this procedure on both the upper and lower tire beads. 6. Adjust air pressure to that listed on Tire Inflation Pressure Label (Placard) provided with vehicle (usually applied to driver's side B-pillar). Make sure original style valve stem cap is securely installed to keep moisture out of sensor. 7. Install tire and wheel assembly on vehicle. See: Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement 8. Lower vehicle. 9. If the vehicle has been stationary for more then 20 minutes, drive the vehicle for a minimum of 10 minutes while maintaining a continuous speed above 15 mph (24 km/h). During this time, the system will learn the new sensor ID. A new sensor ID can also be programmed directly into the WCM by using a RKE-TPM Analyzer in conjunction with a Scan Tool. Once the new sensor ID has been programmed, the RKE-TPM Analyzer can be used to update the TPMS by activating the sensor. NOTE: If a sensor cannot be trained, refer to appropriate diagnostic information. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tire Monitoring System > Tire Pressure Warning Reset Switch > Component Information > Locations Tire Pressure Warning Reset Switch: Locations Component ID: 513 Component : SWITCH-TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR Connector: Name : SWITCH-TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR Color : BROWN # of pins : 6 Pin Circuit Description 1 G561 20VT TPM INDICATOR CONTROL 2 E11 20OR/DB PANEL LAMPS DRIVER 3 G562 20VT/YL TPM SWITCH SIGNAL 4 Z600 20BK GROUND 5 F504 20GY/PK NO FUNCTION DEFINED 6-Component Location - 47 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tire Monitoring System > Tire Pressure Warning Reset Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 2555 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tire Monitoring System > Tire Pressure Warning Reset Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 2556 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tire Monitoring System > Tire Pressure Warning Reset Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 2557 Tire Pressure Warning Reset Switch: Diagrams Component ID: 513 Component : SWITCH-TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR Connector: Name : SWITCH-TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR Color : BROWN # of pins : 6 Pin Circuit Description 1 G561 20VT TPM INDICATOR CONTROL 2 E11 20OR/DB PANEL LAMPS DRIVER 3 G562 20VT/YL TPM SWITCH SIGNAL 4 Z600 20BK GROUND 5 F504 20GY/PK NO FUNCTION DEFINED 6-Component Location - 47 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tire Monitoring System > Tire Pressure Warning Reset Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 2558 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Specifications Tires: Specifications TIRE REVOLUTIONS PER MILE Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Description and Operation > Spare Tire Tires: Description and Operation Spare Tire Spare / Temporary Tire SPARE / TEMPORARY TIRE The temporary spare tire is designed for emergency use only. The original tire should be repaired or replaced at the first opportunity, then reinstalled. Do not exceed speeds of 80 KMH (50 MPH). when using the temporary spare tire. Full Size, Spare Wheel With Matching Tire FULL SIZE, SPARE WHEEL WITH MATCHING TIRE The spare is a full usage wheel with a matching tire, It can be used within the (posted legal) speed limits or distance limitations as of the rest of the vehicles four tires. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Description and Operation > Spare Tire > Page 2564 Tires: Description and Operation Pressure Gauges PRESSURE GAUGES A quality air pressure gauge is recommended to check tire pressure. After checking the air pressure, replace valve cap finger tight. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Description and Operation > Spare Tire > Page 2565 Tires: Description and Operation Tires - Description Tires TIRES Tires are designed and engineered for each specific vehicle. They provide the best overall performance for normal operation. The ride and handling characteristics match the vehicle's requirements. With proper care they will give excellent reliability, traction, skid resistance, and tread life. Driving habits have more effect on tire life than any other factor. Careful drivers will obtain in most cases, much greater mileage than severe use or careless drivers. A few of the driving habits which will shorten the life of any tire are: - Rapid acceleration - Severe brake applications - High speed driving - Excessive speeds on turns - Striking curbs and other obstacles Radial-ply tires are more prone to irregular tread wear. It is important to follow the tire rotation interval See: Service and Repair/Procedures . This will help to achieve a greater tread life. TIRE IDENTIFICATION Tire type, size, aspect ratio and speed rating are encoded in the letters and numbers imprinted on the side wall of the tire. Refer to the chart to decipher the tire identification code. Performance tires have a speed rating letter after the aspect ratio number. The speed rating is not always printed on the tire sidewall. These ratings are: - Q up to 99 mph - S up to 112 mph - T up to 118 mph - U up to 124 mph - H up to 130 mph V up to 149 mph W (consult the tire manufacturer for the specific speed rating) - Z more than 149 mph (consult the tire manufacturer for the specific speed rating) An All Season type tire will have either M + S, M & S or M-S (indicating mud and snow traction) imprinted on the side wall. TIRE CHAINS Tire snow chains may be used on certain models. Radial - Ply Tires RADIAL - PLY TIRES Radial-ply tires improve handling, tread life and ride quality, and decrease rolling resistance. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Description and Operation > Spare Tire > Page 2566 Radial-ply tires must always be used in sets of four. Under no circumstances should they be used on the front only. They may be mixed with temporary spare tires when necessary. A maximum speed of 80 KMH (50 MPH) is recommended while a temporary spare is in use. Radial-ply tires have the same load-carrying capacity as other types of tires of the same size. They also use the same recommended inflation pressures. The use of oversized tires, either in the front or rear of the vehicle, can cause vehicle drive train failure. This could also cause inaccurate wheel speed signals when the vehicle is equipped with Anti-Lock Brakes. The use of tires from different manufactures on the same vehicle is NOT recommended. The proper tire pressure should be maintained on all four tires. Tire Pressure For High Speeds TIRE PRESSURE FOR HIGH SPEEDS For proper tire pressure specification refer to the Owners Manual. Tire Inflation Pressures TIRE INFLATION PRESSURES WARNING: Over or under inflated tires can affect vehicle handling and tread wear. This may cause the tire to fail suddenly, resulting in loss of vehicle control. Under inflation will cause rapid shoulder wear (1), tire flexing, and possible tire failure. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Description and Operation > Spare Tire > Page 2567 Over inflation will cause rapid center wear (1) reduction in the tire's ability to cushion shocks. Improper inflation can cause: - Uneven wear patterns - Reduced tread life - Reduced fuel economy - Unsatisfactory ride - Vehicle drift For proper tire pressure specification refer to the tire label placard usually located on the drivers door latch pillar. Spare / Temporary Tire SPARE / TEMPORARY TIRE The temporary spare tire is designed for emergency use only. The original tire should be repaired or replaced at the first opportunity, then reinstalled. Do not exceed speeds of 80 KMH (50 MPH). when using the temporary spare tire. Replacement Tires REPLACEMENT TIRES The original equipment tires provide a proper balance of many characteristics such as: - Ride - Noise - Handling - Durability - Tread life - Traction - Rolling resistance - Speed capability It is recommended that tires equivalent to the original equipment tires be used when replacement is needed. Failure to use equivalent replacement tires may adversely affect the safety and handling of the vehicle. The use of oversize tires may cause interference with vehicle components. Under extremes of suspension and steering travel, interference with vehicle components may cause tire damage. WARNING: Failure to equip the vehicle with tires having adequate speed capability can result in sudden tire failure. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Tread Wear Indicators Tires: Testing and Inspection Tread Wear Indicators TREAD WEAR INDICATORS Tread wear indicators (3) are molded into the bottom of the tread grooves. When tread depth is 1.6 mm (1/16 in.), the tread wear indicators (3) will appear as a 13 mm (1/2 in.) band. Tire replacement is necessary when indicators appear in two or more grooves or if localized balding occurs. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Tread Wear Indicators > Page 2570 Tires: Testing and Inspection Tire Wear Patterns TIRE WEAR PATTERNS Under inflation will cause wear on the shoulders of tire. Over inflation will cause wear at the center of tire. Excessive camber causes the tire to run at an angle to the road. One side of tread is then worn more than the other. Excessive toe-in or toe-out causes wear on the tread edges and a feathered effect across the tread. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Tread Wear Indicators > Page 2571 Tires: Testing and Inspection Tire Noise Or Vibration TIRE NOISE OR VIBRATION Radial-ply tires are sensitive to force impulses caused by improper mounting, vibration, wheel defects, or possibly tire imbalance. To find out if tires are causing the noise or vibration, drive the vehicle over a smooth road at varying speeds. Note the noise level during acceleration and deceleration. The engine, differential and exhaust noises will change as speed varies, while the tire noise will usually remain constant. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Tread Wear Indicators > Page 2572 Tires: Testing and Inspection Tire / Vehicle Lead TIRE/VEHICLE LEAD Use the following Vehicle Lead Diagnosis And Correction Chart to diagnose and correct a vehicle lead or drift problem. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures Tires: Procedures TIRES Remove the protective coating on the tires before delivery of a vehicle. This coating may cause deterioration of the tires. To remove the protective coating, apply warm water and let it soak for a few minutes. Afterwards, scrub the coating away with a soft bristle brush. Steam cleaning may also be used to remove the coating. NOTE: DO NOT use gasoline, mineral oil, oil-based solvent or a wire brush for cleaning. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 2575 Tires: Removal and Replacement TIRE REPAIR AREA For proper repairing, a radial tire must be removed from the wheel. Repairs should only be made if the defect, or puncture, is in the tread area (1). The tire should be replaced if the puncture is located in the sidewall. Deflate tire completely before removing the tire from the wheel. Use lubrication such as a mild soap solution when dismounting or mounting tire. Use tools free of burrs or sharp edges which could damage the tire or wheel rim. Before mounting tire on wheel, make sure all rust is removed from the rim bead and repaint if necessary. Install wheel on vehicle, and tighten to proper torque specification. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Wheels/Tires - Chrome Clad Wheel Balancing Information Wheels: Technical Service Bulletins Wheels/Tires - Chrome Clad Wheel Balancing Information NUMBER: 22-002-09 GROUP: Wheels/Tires DATE: July 29, 2009 SUBJECT: Chrome Clad Wheel Adapters For Proper Balancing OVERVIEW: This bulletin describes the use of proper wheel adapters when mounting Chrome Clad wheels to wheel balancing equipment. MODELS: 2004-2008 (CS) Pacifica 2007 - 2009 (D1) Ram Truck (3500 Pick Up) 2007 - 2010 DC) Ram Truck (3500 Chassis Cab) 2005 - 2009 (DH) Ram Truck (1500/2500 Pick Up) 2009 - 2010 (DS) Ram Truck (1500) 2004 - 2009 (HB) Durango 2007-2009 (HG) Aspen 2009-2010 (JC) Journey 2007 - 2010 (JK) Wrangler 2008 - 2010 (JS27) Sebring Convertible 2007 - 2010 (JS41) Sebring/Avenger 2007-2010 (KA) Nitro 2002-2007 (KJ) Liberty 2002 - 2007 (KJ) Cherokee (International Markets) 2008 - 2010 (KK) Liberty 2009 - 2010 (LC) Challenger 2005 - 2010 (LE) 300C/300C Touring (International Markets) 2005 - 2010 (LX) 300/Magnum/Charger 2007 - 2010 (MK) Compass/Patriot 2005-2010 (ND) Dakota 2007 - 2001 (PM) Caliber 2001 - 2009 (PT) Chrysler PT Cruiser 2001 - 2007 (RG) Chrysler Voyager (International Markets) 2001 - 2007 (RS) Town & Country/Caravan/Voyager 2008 - 2010 (RI) Town & Country/Grand Caravan Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Wheels/Tires - Chrome Clad Wheel Balancing Information > Page 2580 2008 - 2010 (RI) Town & Country/Grand Voyager (International Markets) 2005 - 2010 (WH) Grand Cherokee (International Markets) 2005-2010 (WK) Grand Cherokee 2006 - 2010 (XH) Commander (International Markets) 2006 - 2010 (XK) Commander NOTE: This information applies to any model equipped with Chrome Clad Wheels. DISCUSSION: Models equipped with Chrome Clad wheels require specific piloting on balance equipment to properly center the wheel and prevent damage to the chrome clad surface. The chrome cladding is not removable or replaceable and has cladding tabs that extend into the wheel bore. Traditional high-taper cones will come into contact with the cladding tabs rather than properly seat on the hub bore chamfer. Many modern aluminum wheel designs cannot be mounted with traditional cones. Direct-Fit Collets should be used to properly mount clad wheels on balance equipment (Fig 1). SPECIAL TOOLS/EQUIPMENT REQUIRED: NOTE: This kit includes the adapters for all Dodge, Chrysler & Jeep models with clad wheels. Individual adapters for specific wheel sizes can be ordered separately. To order a kit or individual adapters, contact Pentastar Service Equipment @ 1-800-223-5623. POLICY: Information Only Disclaimer: This bulletin is supplied as technical information only and is not an authorization for repair. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Description and Operation > Wheel Design Wheels: Description and Operation Wheel Design WHEEL DESIGN The rim size is on the vehicle safety certification label located on the drivers door shut face. Original equipment wheels/rims are designed for operation up to the specified maximum vehicle capacity. All models use stamped steel, cast aluminum or forged aluminum wheels. Every wheel has raised sections between the rim flanges (1) and rim drop well (3) called safety humps. Initial inflation of the tire forces the bead over these raised sections. In case of rapid loss of air pressure, the raised sections help hold the tire on the wheel. The wheel studs and nuts are designed for specific applications. All aluminum and some steel wheels have wheel stud nuts with an enlarged nose. This enlarged nose is necessary to ensure proper retention of the wheels. Do not use replacement studs or nuts with a different design or lesser quality. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Description and Operation > Wheel Design > Page 2583 Wheels: Description and Operation Wheels WHEELS Original equipment wheels are designed for the specified Maximum Vehicle Capacity. All models use steel or aluminum drop center wheels. Aluminum wheels require special balance weights and alignment equipment. 1. On vehicles equipped with dual rear wheels, the rim is an eight stud hole pattern wheel. The wheels have a flat mounting surface (1). 2. The slots (1) in the wheel must be aligned to provide access to the valve stem. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 2584 Wheels: Testing and Inspection WHEEL INSPECTION Inspect wheels for: - Excessive run out - Dents or cracks - Damaged wheel lug nut holes - Air Leaks from any area or surface of the rim NOTE: Do not attempt to repair a wheel by hammering, heating or welding. If a wheel is damaged an original equipment replacement wheel should be used. When obtaining replacement wheels, they should be equivalent in load carrying capacity. The diameter, width, offset, pilot hole and bolt circle of the wheel should be the same as the original wheel. WARNING: Failure to use equivalent replacement wheels may adversely affect the safety and handling of the vehicle. Used wheels are not recommended. The service history of the wheel may have included severe treatment or very high mileage. The rim could fail without warning. WARNING: Daimlerchrysler corporation does not recommend that customers use "reconditioned" wheels (wheels that have been damaged and repaired) because they can result in a sudden catastrophic wheel failure which could cause loss of control and result in injury or death. For Clarification: - Cosmetic refinishing for the purpose of repairing a superficial flaw is an acceptable procedure providing it is limited to paint or clear coat only, the wheel is not modified in any way, and there is no exposure to paint curing heat over 200 degrees Fahrenheit. - Damaged wheels are those which have been bent, broken, cracked or sustained some other physical damage which may have compromised the wheel structure - Repaired indicates that the wheel has been modified through bending, welding, heating, straightening, or material removal to rectify damage. - Re-plating of chrome plated wheels is not an acceptable procedure nor is chrome plating of original equipment painted or polished wheels, as this may alter mechanical properties and affect fatigue life. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Specifications Wheel Bearing: Specifications Wheel Bearing Grease ............................................................................................................. Mopar Multi-Purpose Lubricant NLGI Grade 2 EP, GC-LB Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Hub / Bearing - Removal Wheel Bearing: Service and Repair Front Hub / Bearing - Removal 4X4 - Independent Front Suspension 4X4 1. Raise and support the vehicle. 2. Remove the wheel and tire assembly. 3. Remove the brake caliper and rotor See: Brakes and Traction Control/Disc Brake System/Brake Rotor/Disc/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Brake Rotor - Removal . 4. Remove the ABS wheel speed sensor if equipped, See: Brakes and Traction Control/Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems/Wheel Speed Sensor/Service and Repair/Front Wheel Speed Sensor - Removal . 5. Remove the halfshaft nut. NOTE: Do not strike the knuckle with a hammer to remove the tie rod end or the ball joint. Damage to the steering knuckle will occur. 6. Remove the tie rod end nut and separate the tie rod from the knuckle using remover 9360. 7. Remove the upper ball joint nut and separate the upper ball joint from the knuckle using remover 9360. 8. Pull down on the steering knuckle to separate the halfshaft (2) from the hub/bearing. 9. Remove the three hub/bearing mounting bolts (1) from the steering knuckle. 10. Slide the hub/bearing out of the steering knuckle. 11. Remove the brake dust shield. 2500 & 3500 - 4WD - Link/Coil 2500 & 3500 - 4WD 1. Raise and support the vehicle. 2. Remove the wheel and tire assembly. 3. Remove the hub extension (1) mounting nuts and remove the extension from the rotor if equipped. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Hub / Bearing - Removal > Page 2590 4. Remove the brake caliper, See: Brakes and Traction Control/Disc Brake System/Brake Caliper/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Disc Brake Caliper - Removal . 5. Remove the cotter pin (2) and the hub nut (1) from the axle shaft. 6. Remove the caliper adapter. See: Brakes and Traction Control/Disc Brake System/Brake Caliper/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Disc Brake Caliper Adapter - Removal . 7. Remove the disc brake rotor. See: Brakes and Traction Control/Disc Brake System/Brake Rotor/Disc/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Brake Rotor - Removal . 8. Disconnect the wheel speed sensor wire. 9. Remove the hub/bearing 4 mounting bolts and remove the hub/bearing. 4500 & 5500 - Link/Coil 4500 & 5500 1. Raise and support the vehicle. 2. Remove the wheel and tire assembly. 3. Remove the brake caliper, See: Brakes and Traction Control/Disc Brake System/Brake Caliper/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Disc Brake Caliper - Removal . 4. Remove the caliper adapter. See: Brakes and Traction Control/Disc Brake System/Brake Caliper/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Disc Brake Caliper Adapter - Removal . 5. Remove the hub extension (2) and disc brake rotor (1) See: Brakes and Traction Control/Disc Brake System/Brake Rotor/Disc/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Brake Rotor - Removal . 6. Remove the axle shaft nut (3) from the axle shaft. 7. Disconnect the wheel speed sensor wire and remove the wheel speed sensor bolt (1) from the hub/bearing then remove the sensor (2). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Hub / Bearing - Removal > Page 2591 8. Remove the hub/bearing 4 mounting bolts (1) and remove the hub/bearing. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Hub / Bearing - Removal > Page 2592 Wheel Bearing: Service and Repair Front Hub / Bearing - Installation 4X4 - Independent Front Suspension 4X4 1. Install the brake dust shield (2). 2. Install the hub/bearing (1) into the steering knuckle (3) and tighten the bolts to 163 Nm (120 ft. lbs.). 3. Install the brake rotor and caliper See: Brakes and Traction Control/Disc Brake System/Brake Rotor/Disc/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Brake Rotor - Installation . 4. Install the ABS wheel speed sensor if equipped See: Brakes and Traction Control/Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems/Wheel Speed Sensor/Service and Repair/Front Wheel Speed Sensor - Installation . 5. Install the upper ball joint nut to the steering knuckle and tighten to 54 Nm (40 ft. lbs.) (on 1500 series only an additional 90° turn). 6. Install the tie rod end nut to the steering knuckle and tighten to 61 Nm (45 ft. lbs.) then an additional 90°. 7. Install the halfshaft nut and tighten to 251 Nm (185 ft. lbs.). 8. Install the wheel and tire assembly See: Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement . 9. Remove the support and lower vehicle. 2500 & 3500 - 4WD - Link/Coil 2500 & 3500 - 4WD 1. Position the brake shield (1) on bolts. 2. Install the hub/bearing to the knuckle. Tighten the hub/bearing bolts (2) to 202 Nm (149 ft. lbs. 3. Install the hub nut and tighten to 356 Nm (263 ft. lbs.). 4. Install the wheel speed sensor to the hub. See: Brakes and Traction Control/Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems/Wheel Speed Sensor/Service and Repair/Front Wheel Speed Sensor - Installation . 5. Install the disc brake rotor. See: Brakes and Traction Control/Disc Brake System/Brake Rotor/Disc/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Brake Rotor - Installation . Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Hub / Bearing - Removal > Page 2593 6. Install the brake caliper adapter with the caliper, See: Brakes and Traction Control/Disc Brake System/Brake Caliper/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Disc Brake Caliper Adapter - Installation . 7. Install the hub extension and nuts to the front rotor. Tighten nuts to 130 Nm (96 ft.lbs). HD DRW ONLY. 8. Install the wheel and tire assemblies, See: Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement . 9. Remove the support and lower the vehicle. 10. Apply the brakes several times to seat the brake shoes and caliper piston. Do not move the vehicle until a firm brake pedal is obtained. 4500 & 5500 - Link/Coil 4500 & 5500 NOTE: If installing a NEW hub/bearing on a 4X4 only Steps 1-3 should be followed for the correct shim size. 1. Measure from the new hub/bearing unit crimp (2) to the flange (3). 2. Choose the correct shim according to the table: 3. Check the shim (2) on the axle shaft (3). Be sure that the shim (2) is placed with the radius side (1) to the joint. 4. Install the hub/bearing to the knuckle. Tighten the hub/bearing bolts (1) to 202 Nm (149 ft. lbs. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Hub / Bearing - Removal > Page 2594 5. Install the axle nut (3) and tighten to 356 Nm (263 ft. lbs.). 6. Install the wheel speed sensor 2) to the hub and tighten the bolt (1). See: Brakes and Traction Control/Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems/Wheel Speed Sensor/Service and Repair/Front Wheel Speed Sensor - Installation . 7. Install the disc brake rotor (1). See: Brakes and Traction Control/Disc Brake System/Brake Rotor/Disc/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Brake Rotor - Installation . 8. Install the hub extension (2) and nuts to the front rotor. Tighten nuts to 130 Nm (96 ft.lbs). 9. Install the brake caliper adapter with the caliper, See: Brakes and Traction Control/Disc Brake System/Brake Caliper/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Disc Brake Caliper Adapter - Installation . 10. Install the wheel and tire assemblies, See: Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement . 11. Remove the support and lower the vehicle. 12. Apply the brakes several times to seat the brake shoes and caliper piston. Do not move the vehicle until a firm brake pedal is obtained. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Cover > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Wheel Cover: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL NOTE: The hub caps must be removed before raising the vehicle off the ground. NOTE: You must use the flat end of the hub/cap remover/installer combination tool to pry off the wheel skins. Insert the flat tip completely and using a back and forth motion, loosen the wheel skin. repeat this procedure around the tire until the wheel skin pops off. 1. On 2500/3500 single rear wheel (SRW) models, insert a hub/cap remover/installer combination tool using the blade on the end of the tool to pry the cap off in a back and forth motion. 2. On 3500 models with dual rear wheels (DRW), you must first remove the hub caps. The hub/cap remover/installer combination tool must be inserted in the pry off notch of the rear hub caps. 3. Position the hub/cap remover/installer combination tool and pull out on the tool firmly. The cap should come off. NOTE: Failure to use a back and forth motion could damage the wheel skin chrome finish. 4. The wheel skins can now be removed from the wheel. Use the flat end of the lug nut wrench to pry off the wheel skins. Make sure that the flat end is inserted and use a back and forth motion to remove the wheel skin. 5. On 3500 models front hub caps use the hub/cap remover/installer combination tool to pry off the cap in a back and forth motion. The wheel skins can now be removed. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Cover > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 2599 Wheel Cover: Service and Repair Installation Front FRONT 1. Align the valve stem with the notch in the wheel skin. 2. Seat on side of the wheel skin's wire retainer on to the wheel. 3. Using a rubber mallet, strike the opposite side of the wheel skin until the skin is properly seated. NOTE: The wheel skin and the hub cap are fully seated when there is a consistant gap between the skin/ cap and the wheel. 4. Tug on the hub cap/wheel skin to ensure that they are properly installed. Rear REAR 1. Install one 1 1/2 in. valve stem extension on each rear inner wheel. NOTE: A 3/8 in. drive 10mm deep wheel socket with a 10 in. or greater extension can be used to remove the existing valve stem cap and install the extension. 2. Install one 1 in. valve stem extension on each outer wheel. 3. Align the cooling windows of the wheel skin with the cooling windows of the wheel. Seat one side of the wheel skin's retainer onto the wheel. Using a rubber mallet, strike thew wheel skin on the outer circumference. Strike at several locations around the circumference until the skin is fully seated. NOTE: The wheel skin and the hub cap are fully seated when there is a consistent gap between the skin/cap and the wheel. 4. Tug on the hub/cap wheel skin to ensure that they are properly installed. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Hub > Axle Nut > Component Information > Specifications > 4X4 - Independent Front Suspension Axle Nut: Specifications 4X4 - Independent Front Suspension 4X4 Install the halfshaft nut and tighten to 251 Nm (185 ft. lbs.). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Hub > Axle Nut > Component Information > Specifications > 4X4 - Independent Front Suspension > Page 2605 Axle Nut: Specifications 2500 & 3500 - 4WD - Link/Coil 2500 & 3500 - 4WD Install the hub nut and tighten to 356 Nm (263 ft. lbs.). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Hub > Axle Nut > Component Information > Specifications > 4X4 - Independent Front Suspension > Page 2606 Axle Nut: Specifications 4500 & 5500 - Link/Coil 4500 & 5500 Install the axle nut (3) and tighten to 356 Nm (263 ft. lbs.). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Fastener > Component Information > Specifications Wheel Fastener: Specifications TORQUE Torque Specifications Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Fastener > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Wheel Fastener: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL 1. Raise and support the vehicle. 2. Remove the wheel and tire assembly. 3. Remove the brake caliper, caliper adapter and rotor, See: Brakes and Traction Control/Disc Brake System/Brake Rotor/Disc/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Brake Rotor - Removal . 4. Remove the wheel speed sensor from the hub. 5. Press the stud from the hub using remover C-4150A (1). 6. Remove the stud (2) from the hub (1) through the backing plate access hole (3). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Fastener > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 2612 Wheel Fastener: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION 1. Install the new stud (2) into the hub flange (1). 2. Install three proper sized washers onto the stud, then install lug nut with the flat side of the nut against the washers. 3. Tighten the lug nut until the stud is pulled into the hub flange. Verify that the stud is properly seated into the flange. 4. Remove the lug nut and washers. 5. Install the brake rotor, caliper adapter, and caliper, See: Brakes and Traction Control/Disc Brake System/Brake Rotor/Disc/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Brake Rotor - Installation . 6. Install the wheel speed sensor. 7. Install the wheel and tire assembly, use new lug nut on the stud or studs that were replaced. 8. Remove the support and lower the vehicle. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Jump Starting > System Information > Service and Repair Jump Starting: Service and Repair STANDARD PROCEDURE WARNING: review all safety precautions and warnings in the battery system section. See: Starting and Charging/Battery/Service and Repair/Procedures/Battery Charging - Do not jump start a frozen battery, personal injury can result. - If equipped, do not jump start when maintenance free battery indicator dot is yellow or bright color. - Do not jump start a vehicle when the battery fluid is below the top of lead plates. - Do not allow jumper cable clamps to touch each other when connected to a booster source. - Do not use open flame near battery. - Remove metallic jewelry worn on hands or wrists to avoid injury by accidental arcing of battery current. - When using a high output boosting device, do not allow battery voltage to exceed 16 volts. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. CAUTION: When using another vehicle as a booster, do not allow vehicles to touch. Electrical systems can be damaged on either vehicle. TO JUMP START A DISABLED VEHICLE: 1. Raise hood on disabled vehicle and visually inspect engine compartment for: - Battery cable clamp condition, clean if necessary. - Frozen battery. - Yellow or bright color test indicator, if equipped. - Low battery fluid level. - Generator drive belt condition and tension. - Fuel fumes or leakage, correct if necessary. CAUTION: If the cause of starting problem on disabled vehicle is severe, damage to booster vehicle charging system can result. 2. When using another vehicle as a booster source, park the booster vehicle within cable reach. Turn off all accessories, set the parking brake, place the automatic transmission in PARK or the manual transmission in NEUTRAL and turn the ignition OFF. 3. On disabled vehicle, place gear selector in park or neutral and set park brake. Turn off all accessories. 4. Connect jumper cables to booster battery. RED clamp to positive terminal (+). BLACK clamp to negative terminal (-). DO NOT allow clamps at opposite end of cables to touch, electrical arc will result. Review all warnings in this procedure. 5. On disabled vehicle, connect RED jumper cable clamp to positive (+) terminal. Connect BLACK jumper cable clamp to engine ground as close to the ground cable attaching point as possible. 6. Start the engine in the vehicle which has the booster battery, let the engine idle a few minutes, then start the engine in the vehicle with the discharged battery. CAUTION: Do not crank starter motor on disabled vehicle for more than 15 seconds, starter will overheat and could fail. 7. Allow battery in disabled vehicle to charge to at least 12.4 volts (75% charge) before attempting to start engine. If engine does not start within 15 seconds, stop cranking engine and allow starter to cool (15 min.), before cranking again. DISCONNECT CABLE CLAMPS AS FOLLOWS: - Disconnect BLACK cable clamp from engine ground on disabled vehicle. - When using a Booster vehicle, disconnect BLACK cable clamp from battery negative terminal. Disconnect RED cable clamp from battery positive terminal. - Disconnect RED cable clamp from battery positive terminal on disabled vehicle. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Towing Information > System Information > Service and Repair > Towing Towing Information: Service and Repair Towing STANDARD PROCEDURE A vehicle equipped with SAE approved sling-type towing equipment can be used to tow all vehicles. When towing a 4WD vehicle using a wheel-lift towing device, use tow dollies under the opposite end of the vehicle. A vehicle with flat-bed device can also be used to transport a disabled vehicle. A wooden crossbeam may be required for proper connection when using the sling-type, front-end towing method. SAFETY PRECAUTIONS CAUTION: The following safety precautions must be observed when towing a vehicle: - Secure loose and protruding parts. - Always use a safety chain system that is independent of the lifting and towing equipment. - Do not allow towing equipment to contact the disabled vehicle's fuel tank. - Do not allow anyone under the disabled vehicle while it is lifted by the towing device. - Do not allow passengers to ride in a vehicle being towed. - Always observe state and local laws regarding towing regulations. - Do not tow a vehicle in a manner that could jeopardize the safety of the operator, pedestrians or other motorists. - Do not attach tow chains, T-hooks, J-hooks, or a tow sling to a bumper, steering linkage, drive shafts or a non-reinforced frame hole. - Do not tow a heavily loaded vehicle. Damage to the cab, cargo box or frame may result. Use a flatbed device to transport a loaded vehicle. GROUND CLEARANCE CAUTION: If vehicle is towed with wheels removed, install lug nuts to retain brake drums or rotors. A towed vehicle should be raised until lifted wheels are a minimum 100 mm (4 in) from the ground. Be sure there is adequate ground clearance at the opposite end of the vehicle, especially when towing over rough terrain or steep rises in the road. If necessary, remove the wheels from the lifted end of the vehicle and lower the vehicle closer to the ground, to increase the ground clearance at the opposite end of the vehicle. Install lug nuts on wheel attaching studs to retain brake drums or rotors. RAMP ANGLE If a vehicle with flat-bed towing equipment is used, the approach ramp angle should not exceed 15 degrees. TOWING WHEN KEYS ARE NOT AVAILABLE When the vehicle is locked and keys are not available, use a flat bed hauler. A Wheel-lift or Sling-type device can be used on 4WD vehicles provided all the wheels are lifted off the ground using tow dollies. FOUR-WHEEL-DRIVE VEHICLE TOWING DaimlerChrysler Corporation recommends that a vehicle be transported on a flat-bed device. A Wheel-lift or Sling-type device can be used provided all Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Towing Information > System Information > Service and Repair > Towing > Page 2620 the wheels are lifted off the ground using tow dollies. WARNING: When towing a disabled vehicle and the drive wheels are secured in a wheel lift or tow dollies, ensure the transmission is in the park position (automatic transmission) or a forward drive gear (manual transmission). CAUTION: Many vehicles are equipped with air dams, spoilers, and/or ground effect panels. To avoid component damage, a wheel-lift towing vehicle or a flat-bed hauling vehicle is recommended. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Towing Information > System Information > Service and Repair > Towing > Page 2621 Towing Information: Service and Repair Trailer Towing - NAFTA TRAILER TOWING - NAFTA In this section you will find safety tips and information on limits to the type of towing you can reasonably do with your vehicle. Before towing a trailer carefully review this information to tow your load as efficiently and safely as possible. To maintain warranty coverage, follow the requirements and recommendations concerning vehicles used for trailer towing. Common Towing Definitions The following trailer towing related definitions will assist you in understanding the following information: Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle. This includes driver, passengers, cargo and tongue weight. The total load must be limited so that you do not exceed the GVWR. Gross Trailer Weight (GTW) The gross trailer weight (GTW) is the weight of the trailer plus the weight of all cargo, consumables and equipment (permanent or temporary) loaded in or on the trailer in its "loaded and ready for operation" condition. The recommended way to measure GTW is to put your fully loaded trailer on a vehicle scale. The entire weight of the trailer must be supported by the scale. Gross Combination Weight Rating (GCWR) The gross combination weight rating (GCWR) is the total permissible weight of your vehicle and trailer when weighed in combination. (Note that GCWR ratings include a 68 kg (150 lbs) allowance for the presence of a driver). Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front and rear axles. Distribute the load over the front and rear axles evenly. Make sure that you do not exceed either front or rear GAWR. WARNING: It is important that you do not exceed the maximum front or rear GAWR. A dangerous driving condition can result if either rating is exceeded. You could lose control of the vehicle and have an accident. Tongue Weight (TW) The downward force exerted on the hitch ball by the trailer. In most cases it should not be less than 10% or more than 15% of the trailer load. You must consider this as part of the load on your vehicle. Frontal Area The maximum height and maximum width of the front of a trailer. Trailer Sway Control The trailer sway control is a telescoping link that can be installed between the hitch receiver and the trailer tongue that typically provides adjustable friction associated with the telescoping motion to dampen any unwanted trailer swaying motions while traveling. Weight-Carrying Hitch A weight-carrying hitch supports the trailer tongue weight, just as if it were luggage located at a hitch ball or some other connecting point of the truck. These kind of hitches are the most popular on the market today and they're commonly used to tow small- and medium-sized trailers. Weight-Distributing Hitch A weight-distributing system works by applying leverage through spring (load) bars. They are typically used for heavier loads, to distribute trailer tongue weight to the tow vehicle's front axle and the trailer axle(s). When used in accordance with the manufacturers' directions, it provides for a more level ride, offering more consistent steering and brake control thereby enhancing towing safety. The addition of a friction / hydraulic sway control also dampens sway caused by traffic and crosswinds and contributes positively to tow vehicle and trailer stability. Trailer sway control and a weight distributing (load equalizing) hitch are recommended for heavier Tongue Weights (TW) and may be required depending on Vehicle and Trailer configuration / loading to comply with gross axle weight rating (GAWR) requirements. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Towing Information > System Information > Service and Repair > Towing > Page 2622 WARNING: An improperly adjusted Weight Distributing Hitch system may reduce handling, stability, braking performance, and could result in an accident. Weight Distributing Systems may not be compatible with Surge Brake Couplers. Consult with your hitch and trailer manufacturer or a reputable Recreational Vehicle dealer for additional information. Fifth-Wheel Hitch A special high platform with a coupling that mounts over the rear axle of the tow vehicle in the truck bed. Connects a vehicle and fifth-wheel trailer with a coupling king pin. Gooseneck Hitch The gooseneck hitch employs a pivoted coupling arm which attaches to a ball mounted in the bed of a pickup truck. The coupling arm connects to the hitch mounted over the rear axle in the truck bed. Trailer Hitch Classification The rear bumper is intended to tow trailers up to 2,000 lbs (907 kg) without added equipment or alterations to the standard equipment. Your vehicle may be factory equipped for safe towing of trailers weighing over 2,000 lbs (907 kg) with the optional Trailer Tow Prep Package. See your dealer for package content. The following chart provides the industry standard for the maximum trailer weight a given trailer hitch class can tow and should be used to assist you in selecting the correct trailer hitch for your intended towing condition. All trailer hitches should be professionally installed on your vehicle. Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings) Trailer and Tongue Weight Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Towing Information > System Information > Service and Repair > Towing > Page 2623 Always load a trailer with 60% to 65% of the weight in the front of the trailer. This places 10% to 15% of the Gross Trailer Weight (GTW) on the tow hitch of your vehicle. Loads balanced over the wheels or heavier in the rear can cause the trailer to swayseverely side to side which will cause loss of control of vehicle and trailer. Failure to load trailers heavier in front is the cause of many trailer accidents. Never exceed the maximum tongue weight stamped on your bumper or trailer hitch. Consider the following items when computing the weight on the rear axle of the vehicle: - The tongue weight of the trailer. - The weight of any other type of cargo or equipment put in or on your vehicle. - The weight of the driver and all passengers. NOTE: Remember that everything put into or on the trailer adds to the load on your vehicle. Also, additional factory-installed options, or dealer-installed options, must be considered as part of the total load on your vehicle. Towing Requirements To promote proper break-in of your new vehicle drivetrain components the following guidelines are recommended: CAUTION: - Avoid towing a trailer for the first 500 miles (805 km) of vehicle operation. Doing so may damage your vehicle. - During the first 500 miles (805 km) of trailer towing, limit your speed to 50 mph (80 km/h). WARNING: Your vehicle may require special axle lubricant. Perform the maintenance listed of this manual. When towing a trailer, never exceed the GAWR, or GCWR, ratings. WARNING: Improper towing can lead to an injury accident. Follow these guidelines to make your trailer towing as safe as possible: Make certain that the load is secured in the trailer and will not shift during travel. When trailering cargo that is not fully secured, dynamic load shifts can occur that may be difficult for the driver to control. You could lose control of your vehicle and have an accident. - When hauling cargo or towing a trailer, do not overload your vehicle or trailer. Overloading can cause a loss of control, poor performance or damage to brakes, axle, engine, transmission, steering, suspension, chassis structure or tires. - Safety chains must always be used between your vehicle and trailer. Always connect the chains to the frame or hook retainers of the vehicle hitch. Cross the chains under the trailer tongue and allow enough slack for turning corners. - Vehicles with trailers should not be parked on a grade. When parking, apply the parking brake on the tow vehicle. Put the tow vehicle automatic transmission in P for Park. With a manual transmission, shift the transmission into reverse. And with four-wheel-drive vehicles, make sure the transfer case is not in neutral. Always, block or "chock" the trailer wheels. - GCWR must not be exceeded. - Total weight must be distributed between the tow vehicle and the trailer such that the following four ratings are not exceeded: - GVWR - GTW - GAWR - Tongue weight rating for the trailer hitch utilized (This requirement may limit the ability to always achieve the 10% to 15% range of tongue weight as a percentage of total trailer weight). Towing Requirements - Tires - Do not attempt to tow a trailer while using a compact spare tire. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Towing Information > System Information > Service and Repair > Towing > Page 2624 - Proper tire inflation pressures are essential to the safe and satisfactory operation of your vehicle. - Also, check the trailer tires for proper tire inflation pressures before trailer usage. - Check for signs of tire wear or visible tire damage before towing a trailer. - When replacing tires, Replacing tires with a higher load carrying capacity will not increase the vehicle's GVWR and GAWR limits. Towing Requirements - Trailer Brakes - Do not interconnect the hydraulic brake system or vacuum system of your vehicle with that of the trailer. This could cause inadequate braking and possible personal injury. - An electronically actuated trailer brake controller is required when towing a trailer with electronically actuated brakes. When towing a trailer equipped with a hydraulic surge actuated brake system, an electronic brake controller is not required. - Trailer brakes are recommended for trailers over 1,000 lbs (454 kg) and required for trailers in excess of 2,000 lbs (907 kg). CAUTION: If the trailer weighs more than 1,000 lbs (454 kg) loaded, it should have its own brakes and they should be of adequate capacity. Failure to do this could lead to accelerated brake lining wear, higher brake pedal effort, and longer stopping distances. WARNING: Do not connect trailer brakes to your vehicle's hydraulic brake lines. It can overload your brake system and cause it to fail. You might not have brakes when you need them and could have an accident. Towing any trailer will increase your stopping distance. When towing you should allow for additional space between your vehicle and the vehicle in front of you. Failure to do so could result in an accident. Towing Requirements - Trailer Lights & Wiring Whenever you pull a trailer, regardless of the trailer size, stop lights and turn signals on the trailer are required for motoring safety. The Trailer Tow Package may include a 4 and 7 pin wiring harness. Use a factory approved trailer harness and connector. NOTE: Do not cut or splice wiring into the vehicles wiring harness. The electrical connections are all complete to the vehicle but you must mate the harness to a trailer connector. Refer to the following illustrations. Towing Tips Before setting out on a trip, practice turning, stopping and backing the trailer in an area away from heavy traffic. If using a manual transmission vehicle for trailer towing, all starts must be in FIRST gear to avoid excessive clutch slippage. Towing Tips - Automatic Transmission Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Towing Information > System Information > Service and Repair > Towing > Page 2625 The "D" range can be selected when towing. However, if frequent shifting occurs while in this range, the "TOW HAUL" or "OD/OFF" range should be selected. NOTE: Using the "TOW HAUL" or "OD/OFF" range while operating the vehicle under heavy operating conditions will improve performance and extend transmission life by reducing excessive shifting and heat build up. This action will also provide better engine braking. The automatic transmission fluid and filter should be changed if you REGULARLY tow a trailer for more than 45 minutes of continuous operation. NOTE: Check the automatic transmission fluid level before towing. Towing Tips - Tow/Haul (If Equipped) To reduce potential for automatic transmission overheating, turn the "TOW HAUL OD/OFF" feature ON when driving in hilly areas or shift the transmission to Drive position 2 on more severe grades. Towing Tips - Electronic Speed Control (If Equipped) - Don't use in hilly terrain or with heavy loads. - When using the speed control, if you experience speed drops greater than 10 mph (16 km/h), disengage until you can get back to cruising speed. - Use speed control in flat terrain and with light loads to maximize fuel efficiency. Towing Tips - Cooling System To reduce potential for engine and transmission overheating, take the following actions: - City Driving - When stopped for short periods of time, put transmission in neutral and increase engine idle speed. - Highway Driving - Reduce speed. - Air Conditioning - Turn off temporarily. - refer to Cooling System Operating information in the Maintenance section of this manual for more information. Trailer Towing Mirrors - If Equipped These mirrors are designed with an adjustable mirror head to provide a greater vision range when towing extra-wide loads. To change position inboard or outboard, the mirror head should be rotated (flipped Out or In). A small blindspot mirror is integrated onto the main mirror surface. NOTE: Fold the 7 x 10 inch trailer towing mirrors rearward prior to entering an automated car wash. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Vehicle Lifting > Component Information > Service and Repair Vehicle Lifting: Service and Repair STANDARD PROCEDURE WARNING: The hoisting and jack lifting points provided are for a complete vehicle. When a chassis or drivetrain component is removed from a vehicle, the center of gravity is altered making some hoisting conditions unstable. Properly support or secure vehicle to hoisting device when these conditions exist. FLOOR JACK When properly positioned, a floor jack can be used to lift a vehicle. Support the vehicle in the raised position with jack stands at the front and rear ends of the frame rails. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Vehicle Lifting > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 2629 CAUTION: Do not lift vehicle with a floor jack positioned under: - An axle tube. - A body side sill. - A steering linkage component. - A drive shaft. - The engine or transmission oil pan. - The fuel tank. - A front suspension arm. NOTE: Use the correct front frame rail lifting locations only. NOTE: Use the correct rear frame rail lifting locations only. HOIST Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Vehicle Lifting > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 2630 A vehicle can be lifted with: - A single-post, frame-contact hoist. - A twin-post, chassis hoist. - A ramp-type, drive-on hoist. NOTE: When a frame-contact type hoist is used, verify that the lifting pads are positioned properly. NOTE: The forward lifting pads should be positioned against the forward flange of the transmission crossmember brackets at the bottom of the frame rail. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Vehicle Lifting > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 2631 NOTE: The rear lifting pads should be wedged between the forward flange of the leaf spring bracket and the frame rail. Safety stands should be placed under the frame rails at the front and rear ends. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Compression Check > System Information > Specifications Compression Check: Specifications Compression Specifications Compression Ratio .............................................................................................................................. ......................................................................... 9.0 : 1 Compression Pressure ........................................................................................................................ ............................................................... Not available Max Variation Between Cylinders ........................................................................................................ .......................................................................... 25% Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Camshaft Bearing > Component Information > Specifications Camshaft Bearing: Specifications Bolt-Camshaft Bearing Cap Bolts ................................................................................................................................ .................................................. 11Nm (100 In.Lbs.) Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Camshaft Gear/Sprocket > Component Information > Specifications Camshaft Gear/Sprocket: Specifications Bolt-Camshaft Non-Oiled Sprocket Bolt ...................................................................................................................... .................................................. 122 Nm (90 Ft.Lbs.) Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Camshaft, Engine > Component Information > Description and Operation > Left Camshaft Camshaft: Description and Operation Left Camshaft DESCRIPTION The camshafts consist of powdered metal steel lobes which are sinter-bonded to a steel tube. A steel post or nose piece is friction-welded to the steel camshaft tube. Five bearing journals are machined into the camshaft, four on the steel tube and one on the steel nose piece. Camshaft end play is controlled by two thrust walls that border the nose piece journal. Engine oil enters the hollow camshafts at the third journal and lubricates every intake lobe rocker through a drilled passage in the intake lobe. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Camshaft, Engine > Component Information > Description and Operation > Left Camshaft > Page 2648 Camshaft: Description and Operation Right Camshaft DESCRIPTION The camshafts consist of powdered metal steel lobes which are sinter-bonded to a steel tube. A steel post or nose piece is friction-welded to the steel camshaft tube. Five bearing journals are machined into the camshaft, four on the steel tube and one on the steel nose piece. Camshaft end play is controlled by two thrust walls that border the nose piece journal. Engine oil enters the hollow camshafts at the third journal and lubricates every intake lobe rocker through a drilled passage in the intake lobe. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Camshaft, Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Camshaft - Removal Camshaft: Service and Repair Camshaft - Removal Camshaft - Left REMOVAL 1. Remove cylinder head cover (1) See: Cylinder Head Assembly/Valve Cover/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Cylinder Head Cover Removal . CAUTION: When the timing chain is removed and the cylinder heads are still installed, DO NOT forcefully rotate the camshafts or crankshaft independently of each other. Severe valve and/or piston damage can occur. CAUTION: When removing the cam sprocket, timing chains or camshaft, Failure to use Special Tool 8350 will result in hydraulic tensioner ratchet over extension, requiring timing chain cover removal to reset the tensioner ratchet. 2. Set engine to TDC cylinder #1, camshaft sprocket V8 marks at the 12 o'clock position. 3. Mark one link on the secondary timing chain on both sides of the V8 mark on the camshaft sprocket to aid in installation. CAUTION: Do not hold or pry on the camshaft target wheel (Located on the right side camshaft sprocket) for any reason, Severe damage will occur to the target wheel resulting in a vehicle no start condition. 4. Loosen but DO NOT remove the camshaft sprocket retaining bolt. Leave the bolt snug against the sprocket. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Camshaft, Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Camshaft - Removal > Page 2651 NOTE: The timing chain tensioners must be secured prior to removing the camshaft sprockets. Failure to secure tensioners will allow the tensioners to extend, requiring timing chain cover removal in order to reset tensioners. CAUTION: Do not force wedge past the narrowest point between the chain strands. Damage to the tensioners may occur. 5. Position Locking Wedge Tool 9867 (4) timing chain wedge between the timing chain strands, tap the tool to securely wedge the timing chain against the tensioner arm and guide. NOTE: When gripping the camshaft, place the pliers on the tube portion of the camshaft only. Do not grip the lobes or the sprocket areas. 6. Hold the camshaft (3) with adjustable pliers (2) while removing the camshaft sprocket bolt and sprocket (1). 7. Using the pliers, gently allow the camshaft to rotate 15° clockwise until the camshaft is in the neutral position (no valve load). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Camshaft, Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Camshaft - Removal > Page 2652 8. Starting at the outside working inward, loosen the camshaft bearing cap retaining bolts 1/2 turn at a time. Repeat until all load is off the bearing caps. CAUTION: DO NOT STAMP OR STRIKE THE CAMSHAFT BEARING CAPS. SEVERE DAMAGE WILL OCCUR TO THE BEARING CAPS. NOTE: When the camshaft is removed the rocker arms may slide downward, mark the rocker arms before removing camshaft. 9. Remove the camshaft bearing caps and the camshaft. Camshaft - Right REMOVAL 1. Remove the cylinder head covers (1) See: Cylinder Head Assembly/Valve Cover/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Cylinder Head Cover - Removal . Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Camshaft, Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Camshaft - Removal > Page 2653 CAUTION: When the timing chain is removed and the cylinder heads are still installed, DO NOT forcefully rotate the camshafts or crankshaft independently of each other. Severe valve and/or piston damage can occur. CAUTION: When removing the cam sprocket, timing chains or camshaft, Failure to use locking wedge tool 9867 will result in hydraulic tensioner ratchet over extension, Requiring timing chain cover removal to re-set the tensioner ratchet. 2. Set engine to TDC cylinder #1, camshaft sprocket V8 marks at the 12 o'clock position. 3. Mark one link on the secondary timing chain on both sides of the V8 mark on the camshaft sprocket to aid in installation. CAUTION: Do not hold or pry on the camshaft target wheel for any reason, Severe damage will occur to the target wheel. A damaged target wheel could cause a vehicle no start condition. 4. Loosen but DO NOT remove the camshaft sprocket retaining bolt (2). Leave bolt snug against sprocket (3). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Camshaft, Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Camshaft - Removal > Page 2654 NOTE: The timing chain tensioners must be secured prior to removing the camshaft sprockets. Failure to secure tensioners will allow the tensioners to extend, requiring timing chain cover removal in order to reset tensioners. CAUTION: Do not force wedge (3) past the narrowest point between the chain strands. Damage to the tensioners may occur. 5. Position Locking Wedge Tool 9867 timing chain wedge (3) between the timing chain strands. Tap the tool to securely wedge the timing chain against the tensioner arm and guide. 6. Remove the camshaft position sensor (3). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Camshaft, Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Camshaft - Removal > Page 2655 NOTE: When gripping the camshaft, place the pliers (1) on the tube portion of the camshaft only. Do not grip the lobes or the sprocket areas. 7. Hold the camshaft with adjustable pliers (1) while removing the camshaft sprocket bolt (2) and sprocket (3). 8. Using the pliers (1), gently allow the camshaft to rotate 45° counter-clockwise until the camshaft is in the neutral position (no valve load). 9. Starting at the outside working inward, loosen the camshaft bearing cap retaining bolts 1/2 turn at a time. Repeat until all load is off the bearing caps. CAUTION: DO NOT STAMP OR STRIKE THE CAMSHAFT BEARING CAPS. SEVERE DAMAGE WILL OCCUR TO THE BEARING CAPS. NOTE: When the camshaft is removed the rocker arms may slide downward, mark the rocker arms before removing camshaft. 10. Remove the camshaft bearing caps and the camshaft. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Camshaft, Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Camshaft - Removal > Page 2656 Camshaft: Service and Repair Camshaft - Installation Camshaft - Left INSTALLATION 1. Lubricate camshaft journals with clean engine oil. NOTE: Position the left side camshaft so that the camshaft sprocket dowel is near the 1 o'clock position, This will place the camshaft at the neutral position easing the installation of the camshaft bearing caps. 2. Position the camshaft into the cylinder head. 3. Install the camshaft bearing caps, hand tighten the retaining bolts. 4. Working in 1/2 turn increments, tighten the bearing cap retaining bolts following the torque sequence. 5. Tighten the camshaft bearing cap retaining bolts to 11 Nm (100 in. lbs.). 6. Position the camshaft drive gear into the timing chain aligning the V8 mark between the two marked chain links (Two links marked during removal) (1). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Camshaft, Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Camshaft - Removal > Page 2657 NOTE: When gripping the camshaft, place the pliers on the tube portion of the camshaft only. Do not grip the lobes or the sprocket areas. 7. Using the adjustable pliers (1), rotate the camshaft until the camshaft sprocket dowel (2) is aligned with the slot in the camshaft sprocket. Install the sprocket onto the camshaft. CAUTION: Remove excess oil from camshaft sprocket bolt. Failure to do so can cause bolt over-torque resulting in bolt failure. 8. Remove excess oil from bolt, then install the camshaft sprocket retaining bolt and hand tighten. 9. Remove Locking Wedge Tool 9867 timing chain wedge (4). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Camshaft, Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Camshaft - Removal > Page 2658 10. Using Spanner Wrench 6958 (4) with adapter pins 8346, tighten the camshaft sprocket retaining bolt (2) to 122 Nm (90 ft. lbs.). 11. Install the cylinder head cover (1). Camshaft - Right INSTALLATION 1. Lubricate camshaft journals with clean engine oil. NOTE: Position the right side camshaft so that the camshaft sprocket dowel is near the 10 o'clock position, This will place the camshaft at the neutral position easing the installation of the camshaft bearing caps. 2. Position the camshaft into the cylinder head. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Camshaft, Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Camshaft - Removal > Page 2659 3. Install the camshaft bearing caps, hand tighten the retaining bolts. 4. Working in 1/2 turn increments, tighten the bearing cap retaining bolts starting with the middle cap working outward. 5. Torque the camshaft bearing cap retaining bolts to 11 Nm (100 in. lbs.). 6. Position the camshaft drive gear into the timing chain aligning the V8 mark (2) between the two marked chain links (Two links marked during removal). NOTE: When gripping the camshaft, place the pliers on the tube portion of the camshaft only. Do not grip the lobes or the sprocket areas. 7. Using the adjustable pliers (1), rotate the camshaft until the camshaft sprocket dowel (2) is aligned with the slot in the camshaft sprocket (2). Install the sprocket onto the camshaft. CAUTION: Remove excess oil from camshaft sprocket bolt. Failure to do so can cause bolt over-torque resulting in bolt failure. 8. Remove excess oil from camshaft sprocket bolt, then install the camshaft sprocket retaining bolt and hand tighten. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Camshaft, Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Camshaft - Removal > Page 2660 9. Remove locking wedge tool 9867 (3). 10. Using spanner wrench 6958 with adapter pins 8346 (2), tighten the camshaft sprocket retaining bolt (4) to 122 Nm (90 ft. lbs.). 11. Install the camshaft position sensor (3). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Camshaft, Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Camshaft - Removal > Page 2661 12. Install the cylinder head cover (1) See: Cylinder Head Assembly/Valve Cover/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Cylinder Head Cover - Installation . Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Rocker Arm Assembly > Component Information > Description and Operation Rocker Arm Assembly: Description and Operation DESCRIPTION The rocker arms are steel stampings with an integral roller bearing. The rocker arms incorporate an 0.5 mm (0.019 inch) oil hole in the ball socket for roller and camshaft lubrication. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Rocker Arm Assembly > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 2665 Rocker Arm Assembly: Testing and Inspection DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING - HYDRAULIC LASH ADJUSTER A tappet-like noise may be produced from several items. Check the following items. 1. Engine oil level too high or too low. This may cause aerated oil to enter the adjusters and cause them to be spongy. 2. Insufficient running time after rebuilding cylinder head. Low speed running up to 1 hour may be required. 3. Turn engine off and let set for a few minutes before restarting. Repeat this several times after engine has reached normal operating temperature. 4. Low oil pressure. 5. The oil restrictor in cylinder head gasket or the oil passage to the cylinder head is plugged with debris. 6. Air ingested into oil due to broken or cracked oil pump pick up. 7. Worn valve guides. 8. Rocker arm ears contacting valve spring retainer. 9. Rocker arm loose, adjuster stuck or at maximum extension and still leaves lash in the system. 10. Oil leak or excessive cam bore wear in cylinder head. 11. Faulty lash adjuster. - Check lash adjusters for sponginess while installed in cylinder head and cam on camshaft at base circle. Depress part of rocker arm over adjuster. Normal adjusters should feel very firm. Spongy adjusters can be bottomed out easily. - Remove suspected lash adjusters, and replace. - Before installation, make sure adjusters are at least partially full of oil. This can be verified by little or no plunger travel when lash adjuster is depressed. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Rocker Arm Assembly > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Rocker Arm Assembly: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL NOTE: Disconnect the battery negative cable to prevent accidental starter engagement. 1. Remove the cylinder head cover See: Cylinder Head Assembly/Valve Cover/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Cylinder Head Cover - Removal . 2. For rocker arm removal on cylinders 3 and 5 Rotate the crankshaft until cylinder #1 is at TDC exhaust stroke. 3. For rocker arm removal on cylinders 2 and 8 Rotate the crankshaft until cylinder #1 is at TDC compression stroke. 4. For rocker arm removal on cylinders 4 and 6 Rotate the crankshaft until cylinder #3 is at TDC compression stroke. 5. For rocker arm removal on cylinders 1 and 7 Rotate the crankshaft until cylinder #2 is at TDC compression stroke. 6. Using special tool 8516 Rocker Arm Remover (2), press downward on the valve spring, remove rocker arm. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Rocker Arm Assembly > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 2668 Rocker Arm Assembly: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION CAUTION: Make sure the rocker arms are installed with the concave pocket over the lash adjusters. Failure to do so may cause severe damage to the rocker arms and/or lash adjusters. NOTE: Coat the rocker arms with clean engine oil prior to installation. 1. For rocker arm installation on cylinders 3 and 5 Rotate the crankshaft until cylinder #1 is at TDC exhaust stroke. 2. For rocker arm installation on cylinders 2 and 8 Rotate the crankshaft until cylinder #1 is at TDC compression stroke. 3. For rocker arm installation on cylinders 4 and 6 Rotate the crankshaft until cylinder #3 is at TDC compression stroke. 4. For rocker arm installation on cylinders 1 and 7 Rotate the crankshaft until cylinder #2 is at TDC compression stroke. 5. Using valve spring compressor 10102 press downward on the valve spring, install rocker arm. 6. Install the cylinder head cover See: Cylinder Head Assembly/Valve Cover/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Cylinder Head Cover Installation . Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Balance Shaft > Component Information > Service and Repair > Idler Shaft - Removal Balance Shaft: Service and Repair Idler Shaft - Removal REMOVAL 1. Remove the primary and secondary timing chains and sprockets See: Timing Components/Timing Chain/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Timing Chain & Sprockets - Removal . NOTE: To remove the idler shaft, it is necessary to tap threads into the shaft, to install the removal tool. 2. Using a 12 mm X 1.75 tap, cut threads in the idler shaft center bore. 3. Cover the radiator core with a suitable cover. CAUTION: Use care when removing the idler shaft, Do not strike the radiator cooling fins with the slide hammer. 4. Using Special Tool 8517 Slide Hammer, remove the idler shaft. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Balance Shaft > Component Information > Service and Repair > Idler Shaft - Removal > Page 2674 Balance Shaft: Service and Repair Idler Shaft - Installation INSTALLATION 1. Thoroughly clean the idler shaft bore. 2. Position the idler shaft in the bore. NOTE: The two lubrication holes in the idler shaft do not require any special alignment. NOTE: Before using the retaining bolt to install the idler shaft, coat the threads and the pilot on the idler shaft, with clean engine oil. 3. Using the primary idler sprocket retaining bolt and washer, carefully draw the idler shaft into the bore until fully seated. 4. Coat the idler shaft with clean engine oil. 5. Install the timing chains and sprockets See: Timing Components/Timing Chain/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Timing Chain & Sprockets - Installation . Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Connecting Rod Bearing > Component Information > Specifications Connecting Rod Bearing: Specifications Connecting Rod Cap Connecting Rod Cap ........................................................................................................................... .................................................. 27 Nm (20 Ft.Lb.) Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Connecting Rod Bearing > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2678 Connecting Rod Bearing: Service and Repair STANDARD PROCEDURE - CONNECTING ROD BEARING FITTING Inspect the connecting rod bearings for scoring. Check the bearings for normal wear patterns, scoring, grooving, fatigue and pitting. Replace any bearing that shows abnormal wear. Inspect the connecting rod journals for signs of scoring, nicks and burrs. Misaligned or bent connecting rods can cause abnormal wear on pistons, piston rings, cylinder walls, connecting rod bearings and crankshaft connecting rod journals. If wear patterns or damage to any of these components indicate the probability of a misaligned connecting rod, inspect it for correct rod alignment. Replace misaligned, bent or twisted connecting rods. 1. Wipe the oil from the connecting rod journal. 2. Lubricate the upper bearing insert (2) and install in connecting rod (1). Center bearing insert (2) in connecting rod. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Connecting Rod Bearing > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2679 3. Use piston ring compressor (3) and Guide Pins Special Tool 8507 (4) to install the rod and piston assemblies. The oil slinger slots in the rods must face front of the engine. The "F"'s near the piston wrist pin bore should point to the front of the engine. 4. Install the lower bearing insert in the bearing cap Center bearing insert (2) in connecting rod (1).. The lower insert must be dry. Place strip of Plastigage across full width of the lower insert at the center of bearing cap. Plastigage must not crumble in use. If brittle, obtain fresh stock. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Connecting Rod Bearing > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2680 5. Install bearing cap and connecting rod on the journal and tighten bolts to 27 Nm (20 ft. lbs.) plus a 90° turn. DO NOT rotate crankshaft. Plastigage will smear, resulting in inaccurate indication. 6. Remove the bearing cap and determine amount of bearing-to-journal clearance by measuring the width of compressed Plastigage (2). Refer to Engine Specifications for the proper clearance. Plastigage should indicate the same clearance across the entire width of the insert. If the clearance varies, it may be caused by either a tapered journal, bent connecting rod or foreign material trapped between the insert and cap or rod. 7. If the correct clearance is indicated, replacement of the bearing inserts is not necessary. Remove the Plastigage (2) from crankshaft journal and bearing insert. Proceed with installation. 8. If bearing-to-journal clearance exceeds the specification, determine which service bearing set to use, using the chart above. CAUTION: Connecting Rod Bolts are Torque to Yield Bolts and Must Not Be Reused. Always replace the Rod Bolts whenever they are loosened or removed. 9. Repeat the Plastigage measurement to verify your bearing selection prior to final assembly. 10. Once you have selected the proper insert, install the insert and cap. Tighten the connecting rod bolts to 27 Nm (20 ft. lbs.) plus a 90° turn. Slide snug-fitting feeler gauge between the connecting rod and crankshaft journal flange. Refer to Engine Specifications for the proper clearance. Replace the connecting rod if the side clearance is not within specification. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Connecting Rod, Engine > Component Information > Specifications Connecting Rod: Specifications SPECIFICATIONS - 4.7L ENGINE Piston Pins Connecting Rods Crankshaft Torque Specifications Connecting Rod Cap ........................................................................................................................... .................................................. 27 Nm (20 Ft.Lb.) Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Connecting Rod, Engine > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2684 Connecting Rod: Description and Operation DESCRIPTION CAUTION: Do not use a metal stamp to mark connecting rods as damage may result, instead use ink or a scratch awl. The pistons are made of a high strength aluminum alloy. The anodized top ring groove and crown has been replaced with a coated top ring that is blue in color on the bottom surface. Piston skirts are coated with a solid lubricant (Molykote) to reduce friction and provide scuff resistance. The connecting rods are made of forged powdered metal, with a "fractured cap" design. A pressed fit piston pin is used to attach the piston and connecting rod. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Connecting Rod, Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures Connecting Rod: Procedures Piston and Connecting Rod - Cleaning CLEANING CAUTION: DO NOT use a wire wheel or other abrasive cleaning devise to clean the pistons or connecting rods. The pistons have a Moly coating, this coating must not be damaged. 1. Using a suitable cleaning solvent clean the pistons in warm water and towel dry. 2. Use a wood or plastic scraper to clean the ring land grooves. CAUTION: DO NOT remove the piston pin from the piston and connecting rod assembly. Piston and Connecting Rod - Inspection INSPECTION Check the connecting rod journal for excessive wear, taper and scoring See: Connecting Rod Bearing/Service and Repair . Check the connecting rod for signs of twist or bending. Check the piston for taper and elliptical shape before it is fitted into the cylinder bore See: Piston/Service and Repair/Procedures/Piston Fitting . Check the piston for scoring, or scraping marks in the piston skirts. Check the ring lands for cracks and/or deterioration. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Connecting Rod, Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 2687 Connecting Rod: Removal and Replacement Piston and Connecting Rod - Removal REMOVAL 1. Disconnect negative cable from battery. 2. Remove the following components: - Oil pan and gasket/windage tray See: Engine Lubrication/Oil Pan/Service and Repair/Engine Oil Pan - Removal . - Cylinder head covers See: Cylinder Head Assembly/Valve Cover/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Cylinder Head Cover - Removal and See: Cylinder Head Assembly/Valve Cover/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Cylinder Head Cover - Removal . - Timing chain cover See: Timing Components/Timing Cover/Service and Repair/Timing Cover Removal . - Cylinder head(s) See: Cylinder Head Assembly/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Cylinder Head - Removal and See: Cylinder Head Assembly/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Cylinder Head - Removal . 3. If necessary, remove top ridge of cylinder bores with a reliable ridge reamer before removing pistons from cylinder block. Be sure to keep tops of pistons covered during this operation. Pistons and connecting rods must be removed from top of cylinder block. When removing piston and connecting rod assemblies from the engine, rotate crankshaft so the each connecting rod is centered in cylinder bore. CAUTION: DO NOT use a number stamp or a punch to mark connecting rods or caps, as damage to connecting rods could occur NOTE: Connecting rods and bearing caps are not interchangeable and should be marked before removing to ensure correct reassembly. 4. Mark connecting rod and bearing cap positions using a permanent ink marker or scribe tool. CAUTION: Care must be taken not to damage the fractured rod and cap joint face surfaces, as engine damage may occur. 5. Remove connecting rod cap. Install Special Tool 8507 Connecting Rod Guides into the connecting rod being removed. Remove piston from cylinder bore. Repeat this procedure for each piston being removed. CAUTION: Care must be taken not to nick crankshaft journals, as engine damage may occur 6. Immediately after piston and connecting rod removal, install bearing cap on the mating connecting rod to prevent damage to the fractured cap and rod surfaces. 7. Carefully remove piston rings from piston(s), starting from the top ring down. Piston and Connecting Rod - Installation INSTALLATION Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Connecting Rod, Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 2688 1. Before installing piston and connecting rod assemblies into the bore, install the piston rings. 2. Immerse the piston head and rings in clean engine oil. Position a ring compressor (3) over the piston and rings. Tighten ring compressor. Ensure position of rings do not change during this operation. 3. Position bearing onto connecting rod. Ensure that hole in bearing shell aligns with hole in connecting rod. Lubricate bearing surface with clean engine oil. 4. Install Special Tool 8507 Connecting Rod Guides (4) into connecting rod bolt threads. 5. The pistons are marked on the piston pin bore surface with an raised "F" indicating installation position (1). This mark must be pointing toward the front of engine on both cylinder banks. The connecting rod oil slinger slot faces the front of the engine. 6. Wipe cylinder bore clean and lubricate with engine oil. 7. Rotate crankshaft until connecting rod journal is on the center of cylinder bore. Insert rod and piston into cylinder bore and carefully position connecting rod guides over crankshaft journal. 8. Tap piston down in cylinder bore using a hammer handle. While at the same time, guide connecting rod into position on rod journal. CAUTION: Connecting Rod Bolts are Torque to Yield Bolts and Must Not Be Reused. Always replace the Rod Bolts whenever they are loosened or removed. 9. Lubricate rod bolts and bearing surfaces with engine oil. Install connecting rod cap and bearing. Tighten bolts to 27 Nm (20 ft. lbs.) plus 90°. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Connecting Rod, Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 2689 10. Install the following components: - Cylinder head(s). See: Cylinder Head Assembly/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Cylinder Head - Installation . - Timing chain and cover. See: Timing Components/Timing Cover/Service and Repair/Timing Cover - Installation . - Cylinder head covers See: Cylinder Head Assembly/Valve Cover/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Cylinder Head Cover - Installation . - Oil pan and gasket/windage tray. See: Engine Lubrication/Oil Pan/Service and Repair/Engine Oil Pan - Installation . 11. Fill crankcase with proper engine oil to correct level. 12. Connect negative cable to battery. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Crankshaft Gear/Sprocket > Component Information > Specifications Crankshaft Gear/Sprocket: Specifications Torque Specifications Crankshaft Damper ............................................................................................................................. .............................................. 175 Nm (130 Ft.Lb.) Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Crankshaft Main Bearing > Component Information > Specifications Crankshaft Main Bearing: Specifications SPECIFICATIONS - 4.7L ENGINE Crankshaft Torque Specifications Bed Plate ............................................................................................................................................. ................................................. Refer to Procedure Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Crankshaft Main Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Crankshaft Main Bearing Fitting Crankshaft Main Bearing: Service and Repair Crankshaft Main Bearing Fitting STANDARD PROCEDURE - CRANKSHAFT MAIN BEARING - FITTING MAIN BEARING JOURNAL DIAMETER (CRANKSHAFT REMOVED) Crankshaft removed from the cylinder block. Clean the oil off the main bearing journal. Determine the maximum diameter of the journal with a micrometer. Measure at two locations 90° apart at each end of the journal. The maximum allowable taper is 0.008mm (0.0004 inch.) and maximum out of round is 0.005mm (0.002 inch). Compare the measured diameter with the journal diameter specification (Main Bearing Fitting Chart). Select inserts required to obtain the specified bearing-to-journal clearance. CRANKSHAFT MAIN BEARING SELECTION The main bearings are "select fit" to achieve proper oil clearances. For main bearing selection, the crankshaft position sensor target wheel has grade identification marks stamped into it (3). These marks are read from left to right, corresponding with journal number 1, 2, 3, 4 and 5. The crankshaft position sensor target wheel (2) is mounted to the number 8 counter weight (1) on the crankshaft. NOTE: Service main bearings are coded. These codes identify what size (grade) the bearing is. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Crankshaft Main Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Crankshaft Main Bearing Fitting > Page 2698 Crankshaft Main Bearing: Service and Repair Crankshaft Main Bearing Inspection INSPECTION Wipe the inserts clean and inspect for abnormal wear patterns and for metal or other foreign material imbedded in the lining. Normal main bearing insert wear patterns are illustrated. NOTE: If any of the crankshaft journals are scored, the crankshaft must be repaired or replaced. Inspect the back of the inserts for fractures, scrapings or irregular wear patterns. Inspect the upper insert locking tabs for damage. Replace all damaged or worn bearing inserts. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Crankshaft, Engine > Component Information > Specifications Crankshaft: Specifications SPECIFICATIONS - 4.7L ENGINE Crankshaft Torque Specifications Bed Plate ............................................................................................................................................. ................................................. Refer to Procedure Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Crankshaft, Engine > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2702 Crankshaft: Description and Operation DESCRIPTION The crankshaft is constructed of nodular cast iron. The crankshaft is a Cross shaped four throw design with eight counterweights for balancing purposes. The crankshaft is supported by five select fit main bearings with the number three serving as the thrust washer location. The main journals of the crankshaft are cross drilled to improve rod bearing lubrication. The number eight counterweight has provisions for crankshaft position sensor target wheel mounting. The select fit main bearing markings are located on the rear side of the target wheel. The crankshaft oil seals are one piece design. The front oil seal is retained in the timing chain cover, and the rear seal is pressed in to a bore formed by the cylinder block and the bedplate assembly. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Crankshaft, Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures Crankshaft: Procedures INSPECTION NOTE: Thoroughly inspect the connecting rod bearing bores and main bearing bores for scoring, blueing or severe scratches. Further disassembly may be required. If connecting rod bearing bores show damage, the cylinder heads must be removed to service the piston and rod assemblies. If the bedplate or the cylinder block main bearing bores show damage the engine must be replaced. 1. If required, remove the main bearing halves from the cylinder block and bedplate. 2. Thoroughly clean the bedplate to cylinder block sealing surfaces and main bearing bores. Remove all oil and sealant residue. 3. Inspect the bedplate main bearing bores for cracks, scoring or severe blueing. If either condition exists the engine must be replaced. 4. Inspect the crankshaft thrust washers for scoring, scratches, wear or blueing. If either condition exist replace the thrust washer. 5. Inspect the oil pan gasket/windage tray for splits, tears or cracks in the gasket sealing surfaces. Replace gasket as necessary. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Crankshaft, Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 2705 Crankshaft: Removal and Replacement Crankshaft - Removal REMOVAL NOTE: To remove the crankshaft from the engine, the engine must be removed from the vehicle. 1. Remove the engine. See: Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Engine - Removal . 2. Remove the engine oil pump. See: Engine Lubrication/Oil Pump/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Engine Oil Pump - Removal . CAUTION: DO NOT pry on the oil pan gasket when removing the oil pan, The oil pan gasket is mounted to the cylinder block in three locations and will remain attached to block when removing oil pan. Gasket can not be removed with oil pan. 3. Remove oil pan. See: Engine Lubrication/Oil Pan/Service and Repair/Engine Oil Pan - Removal . 4. Remove the oil pump pickup tube and oil pan gasket /windage tray. 5. Remove the bedplate mounting bolts. Note the location of the three stud bolts for installation. 6. Remove the connecting rods from the crankshaft. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Crankshaft, Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 2706 CAUTION: The bedplate to cylinder block mating surface is a critical sealing surface. Do not pry on or damage this surface in any way. NOTE: The bedplate contains the lower main bearing halves. Use care when handling bedplate as not to drop or damage bearing halves. Installing main bearing halves in the wrong position will cause sever damage to the crankshaft. NOTE: The bedplate has pry points cast into it. Use these points only. The pry points are on both the left and right sides, only the left side is shown. 7. Carefully pry on the pry points (3) to loosen the bedplate (2) then remove the bedplate. CAUTION: When removing the crankshaft, use care not to damage bearing surfaces on the crankshaft. 8. Remove the crankshaft. Crankshaft - Installation INSTALLATION CAUTION: Main bearings are select fit. (Refer to ENGINE/ENGINE BLOCK/CRANKSHAFT MAIN BEARINGS - STANDARD PROCEDURE) for proper bearing selections. 1. Lubricate upper main bearing halves with clean engine oil. CAUTION: When installing crankshaft, use care not to damage bearing surfaces on the crankshaft. 2. Position crankshaft in cylinder block. 3. Install the thrust washers (1). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Crankshaft, Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 2707 CAUTION: The bedplate to cylinder block mateing surface must be coated with sealant prior to installation. Failure to do so will cause severe oil leaks. NOTE: The parts must assembled and tightened within 10 after applying sealer. NOTE: Make sure that the bedplate and cylinder block sealing surfaces are clean and free of oil or other contaminants. Contaminants on the sealing surfaces may cause main bearing distortion and/or oil leaks. 4. Apply a 2.5 mm (0.100 inch) bead of Mopar(R) Gen II Silicone Rubber Adhesive sealant (2) to the cylinder block-to-bedplate mating surface (1) as shown. 5. Coat the crankshaft main bearing journals with clean engine oil and position the bedplate onto the cylinder block. NOTE: Lubricate the bedplate retaining bolts with clean engine oil prior to installation. 6. Install the bedplate retaining bolts, making sure to place the stud bolts in the correct location, Torque the bolts in the sequence shown. - Tighten bolts A - L to 54 Nm (40 ft. lbs.) - Tighten bolts 1-10 to 2.8 Nm (25 in. lbs.) - Turn bolts 1-10 an additional 90°. - Tighten bolts A1- A6 to 27 Nm (20 ft. lbs.) 7. Measure crankshaft end play. See: Specifications/Engine Specifications . 8. Install the connecting rods and measure side clearance. See: Connecting Rod Bearing/Service and Repair . Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Crankshaft, Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 2708 9. Position the oil pan gasket/windage tray, using a new o-ring, install the oil pickup tube. Tighten the bolt to 28 NM (20 ft. lbs.) torque the nuts to 28 Nm (20 ft. lbs.). 10. Install the oil pan. Tighten the retaining bolts to 15 Nm (11 ft. lbs.) in the sequence shown. 11. Install the engine See: Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Engine - Installation . Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Engine Block Heater > Component Information > Description and Operation > Engine Block Heater - Description Engine Block Heater: Description and Operation Engine Block Heater - Description DESCRIPTION WARNING: Do not operate engine unless block heater cord has been disconnected from power source and secured in place. The power cord must be secured in its retaining clips and routed away from exhaust manifolds and moving parts. An optional engine block heater is available with all models. The heater is equipped with a power cord. The cord is attached to an engine compartment component with tie-straps. The heater warms the engine providing easier engine starting and faster warm-up in low temperatures. The heater is mounted in a core hole of the engine cylinder block in place of a freeze plug with the heating element immersed in engine coolant. The 3.7L/4.7L gas powered engines have the block heater located to the rear on the right side of the engine. The diesel engine has the block heater located on the right side of the engine below the exhaust manifold next to the oil cooler (1). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Engine Block Heater > Component Information > Description and Operation > Engine Block Heater - Description > Page 2713 The 5.7L engine has the block heater (1) located on the left side of the engine below the exhaust manifold in the rear of the engine and is not immersed in engine coolant but makes direct contact with the block. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Engine Block Heater > Component Information > Description and Operation > Engine Block Heater - Description > Page 2714 Engine Block Heater: Description and Operation Engine Block Heater - Operation OPERATION The heater warms the engine coolant providing easier engine starting and faster warm-up in low temperatures. Connecting the power cord to a grounded 110-120 volt AC electrical outlet with a grounded three wire extension cord provides the electricity needed to heat the element. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Engine Block Heater > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 2715 Engine Block Heater: Testing and Inspection ENGINE BLOCK HEATER If the unit does not operate, possible causes can be either the power cord or the heater element. Test the power cord for continuity with a 110-volt voltmeter or 110-volt test light. Test heater element continuity with an ohmmeter or a 12-volt test light. CAUTION: To prevent damage, the power cord must be secured in it's retainer clips and away from any components that may cause abrasion or damage, such as linkages, exhaust components, etc. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Engine Block Heater > Component Information > Service and Repair > Engine Block Heater - Removal Engine Block Heater: Service and Repair Engine Block Heater - Removal 3.7L/4.7L ENGINE 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable. 2. Drain the coolant See: Cooling System/Service and Repair . 3. Remove the power cord from the heater by unplugging. 4. Loosen (but do not completely remove) the screw at center of block heater. 5. Remove the block heater (1) by carefully prying from side-to-side. Note the direction of the heating element coil (up or down). The element coil must be installed correctly to prevent damage. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Engine Block Heater > Component Information > Service and Repair > Engine Block Heater - Removal > Page 2718 Engine Block Heater: Service and Repair Engine Block Heater - Installation 3.7L/4.7L ENGINE 1. Clean and inspect the block heater hole. 2. Install the new O-ring seal(s) to heater. 3. Insert the block heater (1) into cylinder block and position the element properly. 4. With the heater fully seated, tighten center screw to 2 Nm (17 in. lbs.). 5. Fill the cooling system with the recommended coolant. See: Cooling System/Service and Repair . 6. Start and warm the engine. 7. Check the block heater for leaks. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Expansion/Freeze Plug > Component Information > Service and Repair > Core Plug - Removal Expansion/Freeze Plug: Service and Repair Core Plug - Removal REMOVAL 1. Drain the cooling system See: Cooling System/Service and Repair . 2. Using a blunt tool such as a drift or a screw driver and a hammer, strike the bottom edge of the cup plug (5). 3. Using a suitable pair of pliers, grasp the core plug (5) and remove. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Expansion/Freeze Plug > Component Information > Service and Repair > Core Plug - Removal > Page 2723 Expansion/Freeze Plug: Service and Repair Core Plug - Installation INSTALLATION NOTE: Thoroughly clean core plug bore, remove all of the old sealer. 1. Coat the edges of the engine core plug and the core plug bore with Mopar Gasket Maker, or equivalent. NOTE: It is not necessary to wait for the sealant to cure on the core plugs. The cooling system can be filled and the vehicle returned to service immediately. 2. Using proper plug driver, drive core plug into the core plug bore. The sharp edge of the core plug should be at least 0.50 mm (0.020 in.) inside the lead in chamfer. 3. Refill the cooling system See: Cooling System/Service and Repair . Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Harmonic Balancer Crankshaft Pulley > Component Information > Specifications Harmonic Balancer - Crankshaft Pulley: Specifications Torque Specifications Crankshaft Damper ............................................................................................................................. .............................................. 175 Nm (130 Ft.Lb.) Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Harmonic Balancer Crankshaft Pulley > Component Information > Service and Repair > Vibration Damper - Removal Harmonic Balancer - Crankshaft Pulley: Service and Repair Vibration Damper - Removal REMOVAL 1. Disconnect negative cable from battery. 2. Remove accessory drive belt See: Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories/Drive Belt/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Accessory Drive Belt - Removal . 3. Drain cooling system See: Cooling System/Service and Repair . 4. Remove radiator upper hose. 5. Remove upper fan shroud. 6. Using Special Tools 6958 Spanner with Adapter Pins 8346 (1), loosen fan and viscous assembly from water pump. 7. Remove fan and viscous assembly. 8. Disconnect electrical connector for fan mounted inside radiator shroud. NOTE: Transmission cooler line snaps into shroud lower right hand corner. 9. Remove vibration damper bolt. 10. Remove damper using Special Tools 8513 Insert and 1026 Three Jaw Puller (2). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Harmonic Balancer Crankshaft Pulley > Component Information > Service and Repair > Vibration Damper - Removal > Page 2729 Harmonic Balancer - Crankshaft Pulley: Service and Repair Vibration Damper - Installation INSTALLATION CAUTION: To prevent severe damage to the Crankshaft, Damper or Special Tool 8512-A, thoroughly clean the damper bore and the crankshaft nose before installing Damper. 1. Align vibration damper slot with key in crankshaft. Slide damper onto crankshaft slightly. CAUTION: Special Tool 8512-A, is assembled in a specific sequence. Failure to assemble this tool in this sequence can result in tool failure and severe damage to either the tool or the crankshaft. 2. Assemble Special Tool 8512-A as follows, The nut (2) is threaded onto the shaft first. Then the roller bearing (1) is placed onto the threaded rod (3) (The hardened bearing surface of the bearing (1) MUST face the nut (2). Then the hardened washer (5) slides onto the threaded rod. Once assembled coat the threaded rod's threads with MOPAR (R) Nickel Anti-Seize or equivalent. 3. Using Special Tool 8512-A, press damper onto crankshaft (1). 4. Install then tighten vibration damper bolt to 175 Nm (130 ft. lbs.). 5. Install cooling fan assembly. 6. Install radiator upper shroud and tighten fasteners to 11 Nm (95 in. lbs.). 7. Connect electrical connector for shroud fan. 8. Install radiator upper hose. 9. Install accessory drive belt. 10. Refill cooling system See: Cooling System/Service and Repair . 11. Connect negative cable to battery. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Piston, Engine > Component Information > Specifications Piston: Specifications Piston Specifications Pistons Piston Pins Piston Rings Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Piston, Engine > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2733 Piston: Description and Operation DESCRIPTION CAUTION: Do not use a metal stamp to mark connecting rods as damage may result, instead use ink or a scratch awl. The pistons are made of a high strength aluminum alloy. The anodized top ring groove and crown has been replaced with a coated top ring that is blue in color on the bottom surface. Piston skirts are coated with a solid lubricant (Molykote) to reduce friction and provide scuff resistance. The connecting rods are made of forged powdered metal, with a "fractured cap" design. A pressed fit piston pin is used to attach the piston and connecting rod. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Piston, Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures Piston: Procedures Piston and Connecting Rod - Cleaning CLEANING CAUTION: DO NOT use a wire wheel or other abrasive cleaning devise to clean the pistons or connecting rods. The pistons have a Moly coating, this coating must not be damaged. 1. Using a suitable cleaning solvent clean the pistons in warm water and towel dry. 2. Use a wood or plastic scraper to clean the ring land grooves. CAUTION: DO NOT remove the piston pin from the piston and connecting rod assembly. Piston and Connecting Rod - Inspection INSPECTION Check the connecting rod journal for excessive wear, taper and scoring See: Connecting Rod Bearing/Service and Repair . Check the connecting rod for signs of twist or bending. Check the piston for taper and elliptical shape before it is fitted into the cylinder bore See: Piston Fitting . Check the piston for scoring, or scraping marks in the piston skirts. Check the ring lands for cracks and/or deterioration. Piston Fitting STANDARD PROCEDURE - PISTON FITTING 1. To correctly select the proper size piston, a cylinder bore gauge (2), capable of reading in 0.003 mm (.0001 in.) INCREMENTS is required. If a bore gauge is not available, do not use an inside micrometer. 2. Measure the inside diameter of the cylinder bore (3) at a point 38.0 mm (1.5 inches) below top of bore. Start perpendicular (across or at 90 degrees) to the axis of the crankshaft at point A and then take an additional bore reading 90 degrees to that at point B. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Piston, Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 2736 3. The coated pistons (1,2) will be serviced with the piston pin and connecting rod pre-assembled. 4. The coating material is applied to the piston after the final piston machining process. Measuring the outside diameter of a coated piston (1,2) will not provide accurate results. Therefore measuring the inside diameter of the cylinder bore with a dial Bore Gauge is MANDATORY. To correctly select the proper size piston, a cylinder bore gauge capable of reading in 0.003 mm (.0001 in.) increments is required. 5. Piston installation into the cylinder bore requires slightly more pressure than that required for non-coated pistons. The bonded coating on the piston will give the appearance of a line-to-line fit with the cylinder bore. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Piston, Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 2737 Piston: Removal and Replacement Piston and Connecting Rod - Removal REMOVAL 1. Disconnect negative cable from battery. 2. Remove the following components: - Oil pan and gasket/windage tray See: Engine Lubrication/Oil Pan/Service and Repair/Engine Oil Pan - Removal . - Cylinder head covers See: Cylinder Head Assembly/Valve Cover/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Cylinder Head Cover - Removal and See: Cylinder Head Assembly/Valve Cover/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Cylinder Head Cover - Removal . - Timing chain cover See: Timing Components/Timing Cover/Service and Repair/Timing Cover Removal . - Cylinder head(s) See: Cylinder Head Assembly/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Cylinder Head - Removal and See: Cylinder Head Assembly/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Cylinder Head - Removal . 3. If necessary, remove top ridge of cylinder bores with a reliable ridge reamer before removing pistons from cylinder block. Be sure to keep tops of pistons covered during this operation. Pistons and connecting rods must be removed from top of cylinder block. When removing piston and connecting rod assemblies from the engine, rotate crankshaft so the each connecting rod is centered in cylinder bore. CAUTION: DO NOT use a number stamp or a punch to mark connecting rods or caps, as damage to connecting rods could occur NOTE: Connecting rods and bearing caps are not interchangeable and should be marked before removing to ensure correct reassembly. 4. Mark connecting rod and bearing cap positions using a permanent ink marker or scribe tool. CAUTION: Care must be taken not to damage the fractured rod and cap joint face surfaces, as engine damage may occur. 5. Remove connecting rod cap. Install Special Tool 8507 Connecting Rod Guides into the connecting rod being removed. Remove piston from cylinder bore. Repeat this procedure for each piston being removed. CAUTION: Care must be taken not to nick crankshaft journals, as engine damage may occur 6. Immediately after piston and connecting rod removal, install bearing cap on the mating connecting rod to prevent damage to the fractured cap and rod surfaces. 7. Carefully remove piston rings from piston(s), starting from the top ring down. Piston and Connecting Rod - Installation INSTALLATION Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Piston, Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 2738 1. Before installing piston and connecting rod assemblies into the bore, install the piston rings. 2. Immerse the piston head and rings in clean engine oil. Position a ring compressor (3) over the piston and rings. Tighten ring compressor. Ensure position of rings do not change during this operation. 3. Position bearing onto connecting rod. Ensure that hole in bearing shell aligns with hole in connecting rod. Lubricate bearing surface with clean engine oil. 4. Install Special Tool 8507 Connecting Rod Guides (4) into connecting rod bolt threads. 5. The pistons are marked on the piston pin bore surface with an raised "F" indicating installation position (1). This mark must be pointing toward the front of engine on both cylinder banks. The connecting rod oil slinger slot faces the front of the engine. 6. Wipe cylinder bore clean and lubricate with engine oil. 7. Rotate crankshaft until connecting rod journal is on the center of cylinder bore. Insert rod and piston into cylinder bore and carefully position connecting rod guides over crankshaft journal. 8. Tap piston down in cylinder bore using a hammer handle. While at the same time, guide connecting rod into position on rod journal. CAUTION: Connecting Rod Bolts are Torque to Yield Bolts and Must Not Be Reused. Always replace the Rod Bolts whenever they are loosened or removed. 9. Lubricate rod bolts and bearing surfaces with engine oil. Install connecting rod cap and bearing. Tighten bolts to 27 Nm (20 ft. lbs.) plus 90°. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Piston, Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 2739 10. Install the following components: - Cylinder head(s). See: Cylinder Head Assembly/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Cylinder Head - Installation . - Timing chain and cover. See: Timing Components/Timing Cover/Service and Repair/Timing Cover - Installation . - Cylinder head covers See: Cylinder Head Assembly/Valve Cover/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Cylinder Head Cover - Installation . - Oil pan and gasket/windage tray. See: Engine Lubrication/Oil Pan/Service and Repair/Engine Oil Pan - Installation . 11. Fill crankcase with proper engine oil to correct level. 12. Connect negative cable to battery. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Piston Ring, Engine > Component Information > Specifications Piston Ring: Specifications Piston Specifications Pistons Piston Pins Piston Rings Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Piston Ring, Engine > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2743 Piston Ring: Service and Repair STANDARD PROCEDURE - PISTON RING FITTING Before reinstalling used rings or installing new rings, the ring clearances must be checked. 1. Wipe the cylinder bore clean. 2. Insert the ring in the cylinder bore. NOTE: The ring gap measurement must be made with the ring positioned at least 12mm (0.50 inch.) from bottom of cylinder bore. 3. Using a piston, to ensure that the ring is squared in the cylinder bore, slide the ring downward into the cylinder. 4. Using a feeler gauge (1) check the ring end gap. Replace any rings not within specification. PISTON RING SIDE CLEARANCE NOTE: Make sure the piston ring grooves are clean and free of nicks and burrs. 5. Measure the ring side clearance as shown make sure the feeler gauge (1) fits snugly between the ring land and the ring. Replace any ring not within specification. 6. Rotate the ring around the piston, the ring must rotate in the groove with out binding. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Piston Ring, Engine > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2744 7. The No. 1 and No. 2 piston rings have a different cross section. Ensure No. 2 ring is installed with manufacturers I.D. mark (Dot) facing up, towards top of the piston. NOTE: Piston rings are installed in the following order: - Oil ring expander. - Upper oil ring side rail. - Lower oil ring side rail. - No. 2 Intermediate piston ring. - No. 1 Upper piston ring. 8. Install the oil ring expander. 9. Install upper side rail (1) by placing one end between the piston ring groove and the expander ring. Hold end firmly and press down the portion to be installed until side rail is in position. Repeat this step for the lower side rail. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Piston Ring, Engine > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2745 10. Install No. 2 intermediate piston ring using a piston ring installer. 11. Install No. 1 upper piston ring using a piston ring installer. 12. Position piston ring end gaps as shown. It is important that expander ring gap (5) is at least 45° from the side rail gaps, but not on the piston pin center or on the thrust direction. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Fuel Pressure Release > System Information > Service and Repair Fuel Pressure Release: Service and Repair STANDARD PROCEDURE - FUEL SYSTEM PRESSURE RELEASE Use following procedure if the fuel injector rail is, or is not equipped with a fuel pressure test port. A separate fuel pump relay is no longer used. A circuit within the TIPM (Totally Integrated Power Module) is used to control the electric fuel pump located within the fuel pump module. The TIPM (1) is located in the engine compartment in front of the battery. 1. Remove fuel fill cap. 2. On bottom of vehicle, disconnect fuel pump module electrical connector. This can be accomplished at either of the two connectors (1) or (2). 3. Start and run engine until it stalls. 4. Attempt restarting engine until it will no longer run. 5. Turn ignition key to OFF position. 6. Place a rag or towel below fuel line quick-connect fitting at fuel rail. 7. Disconnect quick-connect fitting at fuel rail. 8. Reconnect fuel pump module electrical connector on bottom of vehicle. 9. One or more Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTC's) may have been stored in PCM memory due to disconnecting fuel pump module circuit. A diagnostic scan tool must be used to erase a DTC. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Rocker Arm Assembly > Component Information > Description and Operation Rocker Arm Assembly: Description and Operation DESCRIPTION The rocker arms are steel stampings with an integral roller bearing. The rocker arms incorporate an 0.5 mm (0.019 inch) oil hole in the ball socket for roller and camshaft lubrication. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Rocker Arm Assembly > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 2753 Rocker Arm Assembly: Testing and Inspection DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING - HYDRAULIC LASH ADJUSTER A tappet-like noise may be produced from several items. Check the following items. 1. Engine oil level too high or too low. This may cause aerated oil to enter the adjusters and cause them to be spongy. 2. Insufficient running time after rebuilding cylinder head. Low speed running up to 1 hour may be required. 3. Turn engine off and let set for a few minutes before restarting. Repeat this several times after engine has reached normal operating temperature. 4. Low oil pressure. 5. The oil restrictor in cylinder head gasket or the oil passage to the cylinder head is plugged with debris. 6. Air ingested into oil due to broken or cracked oil pump pick up. 7. Worn valve guides. 8. Rocker arm ears contacting valve spring retainer. 9. Rocker arm loose, adjuster stuck or at maximum extension and still leaves lash in the system. 10. Oil leak or excessive cam bore wear in cylinder head. 11. Faulty lash adjuster. - Check lash adjusters for sponginess while installed in cylinder head and cam on camshaft at base circle. Depress part of rocker arm over adjuster. Normal adjusters should feel very firm. Spongy adjusters can be bottomed out easily. - Remove suspected lash adjusters, and replace. - Before installation, make sure adjusters are at least partially full of oil. This can be verified by little or no plunger travel when lash adjuster is depressed. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Rocker Arm Assembly > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Rocker Arm Assembly: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL NOTE: Disconnect the battery negative cable to prevent accidental starter engagement. 1. Remove the cylinder head cover See: Valve Cover/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Cylinder Head Cover - Removal . 2. For rocker arm removal on cylinders 3 and 5 Rotate the crankshaft until cylinder #1 is at TDC exhaust stroke. 3. For rocker arm removal on cylinders 2 and 8 Rotate the crankshaft until cylinder #1 is at TDC compression stroke. 4. For rocker arm removal on cylinders 4 and 6 Rotate the crankshaft until cylinder #3 is at TDC compression stroke. 5. For rocker arm removal on cylinders 1 and 7 Rotate the crankshaft until cylinder #2 is at TDC compression stroke. 6. Using special tool 8516 Rocker Arm Remover (2), press downward on the valve spring, remove rocker arm. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Rocker Arm Assembly > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 2756 Rocker Arm Assembly: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION CAUTION: Make sure the rocker arms are installed with the concave pocket over the lash adjusters. Failure to do so may cause severe damage to the rocker arms and/or lash adjusters. NOTE: Coat the rocker arms with clean engine oil prior to installation. 1. For rocker arm installation on cylinders 3 and 5 Rotate the crankshaft until cylinder #1 is at TDC exhaust stroke. 2. For rocker arm installation on cylinders 2 and 8 Rotate the crankshaft until cylinder #1 is at TDC compression stroke. 3. For rocker arm installation on cylinders 4 and 6 Rotate the crankshaft until cylinder #3 is at TDC compression stroke. 4. For rocker arm installation on cylinders 1 and 7 Rotate the crankshaft until cylinder #2 is at TDC compression stroke. 5. Using valve spring compressor 10102 press downward on the valve spring, install rocker arm. 6. Install the cylinder head cover See: Valve Cover/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Cylinder Head Cover - Installation . Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Valve Cover > Component Information > Description and Operation Valve Cover: Description and Operation DESCRIPTION The cylinder head covers are made of injection molded thermo-set plastic, and are not interchangeable from side-to-side. It is imperative that nothing rest on the cylinder head covers. Prolonged contact with other items may wear a hole in the cylinder head cover. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Valve Cover > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures Valve Cover: Procedures CLEANING Clean cylinder head cover gasket surface. Clean head rail, if necessary. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Valve Cover > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 2762 Valve Cover: Removal and Replacement Left LEFT SIDE 1. Disconnect negative cable from battery. 2. Remove the resonator assemble and air inlet hose. 3. Remove the spark plug wires (3). 4. Route injector harness in front of cylinder head cover. 5. Disconnect the left side breather tube and remove the breather tube. 6. Remove the cylinder head cover mounting bolts. 7. Remove cylinder head cover and gasket. NOTE: The gasket may be used again, provided no cuts, tears, or deformation has occurred. Right RIGHT SIDE 1. Disconnect battery negative cable. 2. Remove air cleaner assembly, resonator assembly and air inlet hose. 3. Drain cooling system See: Cooling System/Service and Repair . 4. Remove accessory drive belt See: Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories/Drive Belt/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Accessory Drive Belt - Removal . 5. Remove air conditioning compressor retaining bolts and move compressor to the left. 6. Remove heater hoses. 7. Disconnect and remove positive crankcase ventilation (PCV) hose. 8. Remove oil fill tube. 9. Remove spark plug wires (3). 10. Remove right rear breather tube and filter assembly. 11. Remove cylinder head cover retaining bolts. 12. Remove cylinder head cover. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Valve Cover > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 2763 NOTE: The gasket may be used again, provided no cuts, tears, or deformation has occurred. Left LEFT SIDE CAUTION: Do not use harsh cleaners to clean the cylinder head covers. Severe damage to covers may occur. 1. Clean cylinder head cover and both sealing surfaces. Inspect and replace gasket as necessary. 2. Install cylinder head cover and hand start all fasteners. Verify that all studs are in the correct location as shown. 3. Tighten cylinder head cover bolts and double ended studs to 12 Nm (105 in. lbs.). 4. Install left side breather and connect breather tube. 5. Install the spark plug wires (3). 6. Install the resonator and air inlet hose. 7. Connect negative cable to battery. Right RIGHT SIDE CAUTION: Do not use harsh cleaners to clean the cylinder head covers. Severe damage to covers may occur. 1. Clean cylinder head cover and both sealing surfaces. Inspect and replace gasket as necessary. 2. Install cylinder head cover and hand start all fasteners. 3. Tighten cylinder head cover bolts and double ended studs to 12 Nm (105 in. lbs). 4. Install right rear breather tube and filter assembly. 5. Install spark plug wires (3). 6. Install the oil fill tube. 7. Install PCV hose. 8. Install heater hoses. 9. Install air conditioning compressor retaining bolts. 10. Install accessory drive belt See: Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories/Drive Belt/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Accessory Drive Belt - Installation . 11. Fill Cooling system See: Cooling System/Service and Repair . Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Valve Cover > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 2764 12. Install air cleaner assembly, resonator assembly and air inlet hose. 13. Connect battery negative cable. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Valve Guide > Component Information > Description and Operation Valve Guide: Description and Operation VALVE GUIDES The valve guides are made of powered metal and are pressed into the cylinder head. The guides are not replaceable or serviceable, and valve guide reaming is not recommended. If the guides are worn beyond acceptable limits, replace the cylinder heads. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Valve Guide > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 2768 Valve Guide: Testing and Inspection VALVE GUIDES The valve guides are made of powered metal and are pressed into the cylinder head. The guides are not replaceable or serviceable, and valve guide reaming is not recommended. If the guides are worn beyond acceptable limits, replace the cylinder heads. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Valve Spring > Component Information > Description and Operation Valve Spring: Description and Operation DESCRIPTION The valve springs are made from high strength chrome silicon steel. The springs are common for intake and exhaust applications. The valve spring seat is integral with the valve stem seal, which is a positive type seal to control lubrication. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Valve Spring > Component Information > Service and Repair > Valve Springs - Removal Valve Spring: Service and Repair Valve Springs - Removal REMOVAL 1. Remove the cylinder head cover See: Valve Cover/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Cylinder Head Cover - Removal . 2. Using Valve Spring Compressor 10102 (2), remove the rocker arms and the hydraulic lash adjusters. 3. Remove the spark plug for the cylinder the valve spring and seal are to be removed from. 4. Apply shop air to the cylinder to hold the valves in place when the spring is removed NOTE: All eight valve springs and seals are removed in the same manner; this procedure only covers one valve seal and valve spring. 5. Using Valve Spring Compressor 10102, compress the valve spring. NOTE: It may be necessary to tap the top of the valve spring to loosen the spring retainers locks enough to be removed. 6. Remove the two spring retainer lock halves. NOTE: the valve spring is under tension use care when releasing the valve spring compressor. 7. Remove the valve spring compressor. 8. Remove the spring retainer, and the spring. 9. Remove the valve stem seal. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Valve Spring > Component Information > Service and Repair > Valve Springs - Removal > Page 2774 Valve Spring: Service and Repair Valve Springs - Installation INSTALLATION 1. Coat the valve stem with clean engine oil and install the valve stem seal. Make sure the seal is fully seated and that the garter spring at the top of the seal is intact. 2. Install the spring (6) and the spring retainer (2). 3. Using Valve Spring Compressor 10102, compress the spring and install the two valve spring retainer halves. 4. Release the valve spring compressor and make sure the two spring retainer halves and the spring retainer are fully seated. 5. Position the hydraulic lash adjusters and rocker arms. 6. Install the cylinder head cover See: Valve Cover/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Cylinder Head Cover - Installation . 7. Install spark plugs and plug wires. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Valve, Intake/Exhaust > Component Information > Description and Operation Valve: Description and Operation DESCRIPTION The valves are made of heat resistant steel and have chrome plated stems to prevent scuffing. Each valve is actuated by a roller rocker arm which pivots on a stationary lash adjuster. All valves use three bead lock keepers to retain the springs and promote valve rotation. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Valve, Intake/Exhaust > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 2778 Valve: Testing and Inspection VALVE GUIDES The valve guides are made of powered metal and are pressed into the cylinder head. The guides are not replaceable or serviceable, and valve guide reaming is not recommended. If the guides are worn beyond acceptable limits, replace the cylinder heads. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Valve, Intake/Exhaust > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Valve: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL NOTE: The cylinder heads must be removed in order to perform this procedure. 1. Remove rocker arms and lash adjusters See: Rocker Arm Assembly/Service and Repair/Removal . 2. Remove the camshaft bearing caps and the camshaft. NOTE: All valve springs and valves are removed in the same manner; this procedure only covers one valve and valve spring. 3. Using Valve Spring Compressor C-3422-B or C-3422-C and Adapter 8519, compress the valve spring. NOTE: It may be necessary to tap the top of the valve spring to loosen the spring retainers locks enough to be removed. 4. Remove the two spring retainer lock halves. NOTE: the valve spring is under tension use care when releasing the valve spring compressor. 5. Remove the valve spring compressor. 6. Remove the spring retainer, and the spring. NOTE: Check for sharp edges on the keeper grooves. Remove any burrs from the valve stem before removing the valve from the cylinder head. 7. Remove the valve from the cylinder head. NOTE: The valve stem seals are common between intake and exhaust. 8. Remove the valve stem seal. Mark the valve for proper installation. TESTING VALVE SPRINGS Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Valve, Intake/Exhaust > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 2781 NOTE: Whenever the valves are removed from the cylinder head it is recommended that the valve springs be inspected and tested for reuse. Inspect the valve springs for physical signs of wear or damage. Turn table of tool C-647 (1) until surface is in line with the 40.12 mm (1.579 in.) mark on the threaded stud and the zero mark on the front. Place spring over the stud on the table and lift compressing lever to set tone device. Pull on torque wrench until a Ping is heard. Take reading on torque wrench at this instant. Multiply this reading by two. This will give the spring load at test length. Fractional measurements are indicated on the table for finer adjustments. Refer to Specifications to obtain specified height and allowable tensions. Replace any springs that do not meet specifications. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Valve, Intake/Exhaust > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 2782 Valve: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION 1. Coat the valve stem (4,5) with clean engine oil and insert it into the cylinder head. 2. Install the valve stem seal (3). Make sure the seal is fully seated and that the garter spring at the top of the seal is intact. 3. Install the spring (6) and the spring retainer (2). 4. Using the valve spring compressor, compress the spring (6) and install the two valve locks (1). 5. Release the valve spring compressor and make sure the two valve locks and the spring retainer are fully seated. 6. lubricate the camshaft journal with clean engine oil then Position the camshaft (with the sprocket dowel on the left camshaft at 11 o'clock and the right camshaft at 12 o'clock), then position the camshaft bearing caps. 7. Install the camshaft bearing cap retaining bolts. Tighten the bolts 9 - 13 Nm (100 in. lbs.) in 1/2 turn increments in the sequence shown. 8. Position the hydraulic lash adjusters and rocker arms. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Drive Belt > Component Information > Diagrams Drive Belt: Diagrams Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Drive Belt > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 2787 Drive Belt: Description and Operation DESCRIPTION The accessory drive belt is a serpentine type belt. Satisfactory performance of these belts depends on belt condition and proper belt tension. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Drive Belt > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 2788 Drive Belt: Testing and Inspection DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING VISUAL DIAGNOSIS NOTE: Diesel Engine - If a belt is broken or frayed, inspect engine speed sensor ( located near the crankshaft damper) for damage. When diagnosing serpentine accessory drive belts, small cracks that run across the ribbed surface of the belt from rib to rib , are considered normal. These are not a reason to replace the belt. However, cracks running along a rib (not across) are not normal. Any belt with cracks running along a rib must be replaced. Also replace the belt if it has excessive wear, frayed cords or severe glazing. Refer to ACCESSORY DRIVE BELT DIAGNOSIS CHART for further belt diagnosis. NOISE DIAGNOSIS Noises generated by the accessory drive belt are most noticeable at idle. Before replacing a belt to resolve a noise condition, inspect all of the accessory drive pulleys for alignment, glazing, or excessive end play. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Drive Belt > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 2789 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Drive Belt > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 2790 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Drive Belt > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures Drive Belt: Procedures CLEANING Clean all foreign debris from belt pulley grooves. The belt pulleys must be free of oil, grease, and coolants before installing the drive belt. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Drive Belt > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 2793 Drive Belt: Removal and Replacement Accessory Drive Belt - Removal 3.7L/4.7L ENGINE BELT ROUTING 3.7L/4.7L CAUTION: Do not let tensioner arm snap back to the free arm position, sever damage may occur to the tensioner. 1. Disconnect negative battery cable from battery. 2. Rotate belt tensioner until it contacts it's stop. Remove belt, then slowly rotate the tensioner (6) into the free arm position. Accessory Drive Belt - Installation 3.7L/4.7L ENGINE Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Drive Belt > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 2794 BELT ROUTING 3.7L/4.7L 1. Check condition of all pulleys. CAUTION: When installing the serpentine accessory drive belt, the belt MUST be routed correctly. If not, the engine may overheat due to the water pump rotating in the wrong direction. NOTE: When installing accessory drive belt onto pulleys, make sure that belt is properly routed and all V-grooves make proper contact with pulleys. 2. Install new belt. Route the belt around all pulleys except the idler pulley. Rotate the tensioner arm until it contacts it's stop position. Route the belt around the idler and slowly let the tensioner rotate into the belt. Make sure the belt is seated onto all pulleys. 3. With the drive belt installed, inspect the belt wear indicator. On 4.7L Engines only, the gap between the tang and the housing stop (measurement A) must not exceed 24 mm (.94 inches). If the measurement exceeds this specification replace the serpentine accessory drive belt. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Drive Belt Tensioner > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Drive Belt Tensioner: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION Correct drive belt tension is required to ensure optimum performance of the belt driven engine accessories. If specified tension is not maintained, belt slippage may cause; engine overheating, lack of power steering assist, loss of air conditioning capacity, reduced generator output rate, and greatly reduced belt life. It is not necessary to adjust belt tension. All engines are equipped with an automatic belt tensioner. The tensioner maintains correct belt tension at all times. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Drive Belt Tensioner > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 2799 Drive Belt Tensioner: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The automatic belt tensioner maintains belt tension by using internal spring pressure, a pivoting arm and pulley to press against the drive belt. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Drive Belt Tensioner > Component Information > Service and Repair > Accessory Drive Belt Tensioner - Removal Drive Belt Tensioner: Service and Repair Accessory Drive Belt Tensioner - Removal 3.7L/4.7L ENGINE On 3.7L and 4.7L engines, the tensioner is equipped with an indexing tang on back of tensioner and an indexing stop on tensioner housing. If a new belt is being installed, tang must be within approximately 24 mm (.94 inches) of indexing stop. Belt is considered new if it has been used 15 minutes or less. If the above specification cannot be met, check for: - The wrong belt being installed (incorrect length/width) - Worn bearings on an engine accessory (A/C compressor, power steering pump, water pump, idler pulley or generator) - A pulley on an engine accessory being loose - Misalignment of an engine accessory - Belt incorrectly routed. NOTE: A used belt should be replaced if tensioner indexing arrow has moved to the minimum tension indicator. Tensioner travel stops at this point. 1. Remove accessory drive belt See: Drive Belt/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Accessory Drive Belt - Removal . 2. Remove tensioner (3) assembly from mounting bracket. WARNING: Because of high spring pressure, do not attempt to disassemble automatic tensioner. Unit is serviced as an assembly except for pulley on tensioner. 3. Remove pulley bolt. Remove pulley from tensioner. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Drive Belt Tensioner > Component Information > Service and Repair > Accessory Drive Belt Tensioner - Removal > Page 2802 Drive Belt Tensioner: Service and Repair Accessory Drive Belt Tensioner - Installation 3.7L/4.7L ENGINE NOTE: When installing accessory drive belt onto pulleys, make sure that belt is properly routed and all V-grooves make proper contact with pulleys. 1. Install pulley and pulley bolt to tensioner (3). Tighten bolt to 61 Nm (45 ft. lbs.) torque. 2. An indexing slot is located on back of tensioner (3). Align this slot to the head of the bolt on the front cover. Install the mounting bolt. Tighten bolt (2) to 41 Nm (30 ft. lbs.). 3. Install accessory drive belt See: Drive Belt/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Accessory Drive Belt - Installation . 4. Check tensioner indexing marks. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Engine Mount > Component Information > Service and Repair > Engine Mount - Removal Engine Mount: Service and Repair Engine Mount - Removal Front Engine Mount REMOVAL 2WD 1. Disconnect the negative cable from the battery. CAUTION: Remove the viscous fan before raising engine. Failure to do so may cause damage to the fan blade, fan clutch and fan shroud. 2. Remove the viscous fan. 3. Raise the vehicle. 4. Remove the engine oil filter. 5. Remove the oil drain trough. 6. Support the engine with a suitable jack and a block of wood across the full width of the engine oil pan. 7. Support the front axle with a suitable jack. 8. Remove the (4) bolts that attach the engine mounts to the front axle. 9. Remove the (3) bolts that attach the front axle to the left engine bracket. 10. Lower the front axle. 11. Remove the through bolts 12. Raise the engine far enough to be able to remove the left and right engine mounts. 13. Remove the (8) mount to engine attaching bolts 14. Remove the engine mounts. 4WD 1. Disconnect the negative cable from the battery. 2. Remove the viscous fan. 3. Raise the vehicle. 4. Remove the skid plate. 5. Remove the front crossmember. 6. Remove the engine oil filter. 7. Remove the oil drain trough. 8. Support the engine with a suitable jack and a block of wood across the full width of the engine oil pan. 9. Support the front axle with a suitable jack. 10. Remove the 4 bolts that attach the engine mounts to the front axle (6). 11. Remove the 3 bolts (3) that attach the front axle to the left engine bracket. 12. Lower the front axle. 13. Remove the through bolts 14. Raise the engine far enough to be able to remove the left and right engine mounts. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Engine Mount > Component Information > Service and Repair > Engine Mount - Removal > Page 2807 15. Remove the engine mounts (4,8). 16. Remove the engine mount brackets (2). Rear Engine Mount REMOVAL Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Engine Mount > Component Information > Service and Repair > Engine Mount - Removal > Page 2808 1. Raise the vehicle on a hoist. 2. Using a suitable jack, support transmission. 3. Remove the nuts from the transmission mount (1). 4. Remove the two bolts that attach the transmission mount to the engine bracket. 5. Raise the transmission enough to remove the mount from the crossmember (2). 6. Remove the mount (1). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Engine Mount > Component Information > Service and Repair > Engine Mount - Removal > Page 2809 Engine Mount: Service and Repair Engine Mount - Installation Front Engine Mount INSTALLATION 2WD NOTE: For mount to engine block and left engine bracket to front axle bolts, apply Mopar(R) Lock and Seal Adhesive, Medium Strength Threadlocker. 1. Install the right and left side engine mounts to the engine block with (8) bolts. Torque bolts to 54 Nm (40 ft. lbs.). 2. Insert the (2) through bolts into the right and left side engine mounts and loose assemble the two nuts onto the through bolts. 3. Lower the engine until the through bolts rest onto the slots in the frame brackets. 4. Tighten the through bolt nuts to 94 Nm (70 ft. lbs.). 5. Install the oil drain trough. 6. Install the engine oil filter. 7. Lower the vehicle. 8. Install the viscous fan. 9. Reconnect the negative battery cable. 4WD NOTE: For mount to engine block and left engine bracket to front axle bolts, apply Mopar(R) Lock and Seal Adhesive, Medium Strength Threadlocker. 1. Install the right and left side engine mounts (4,8) to the front axle (6). Torque nuts to 94 Nm (70 ft. lbs.). 2. Raise the front axle into the frame and install the left and right side through bolts. Torque nuts to 94 Nm (70 ft. lbs.). 3. Insert the two upper through bolts into the right and left side engine mounts and loose assemble the two nuts onto the through bolts. 4. Lower the engine until the left and right side engine brackets rest on the through bolts, and the lower engine bracket through holes align with the engine mounts, and the left engine bracket holes align with the front axle slots. 5. Loose assemble the (3) bolts that attach the front axle to the left engine bracket. 6. Loose assemble the lower through bolts. 7. Torque the nuts for the (4) through bolts to 101 Nm (75 ft. lbs.). 8. Torque the (3) bolts that attach the front axle to the left engine bracket to 101 Nm (75 ft. lbs.). 9. Install the oil drain trough. 10. Install the engine oil filter. 11. Install the front crossmember. 12. Install the skid plate. 13. Lower the vehicle. 14. Install the viscous fan. 15. Reconnect the negative battery cable. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Engine Mount > Component Information > Service and Repair > Engine Mount - Removal > Page 2810 Rear Engine Mount INSTALLATION NOTE: Threadlocking compound must be applied to the bolts before installation. 1. Install the two bolts that attach the transmission mount to the transmission bracket. 2. Torque the bolts to 61 Nm (45 ft.lbs.) torque. 3. Lower the transmission so the transmission mount rests on the crossmember, and the studs of the transmission mount are aligned in the slots in the crossmember. 4. Install the nuts onto the transmission mount studs through the crossmember access slot. 5. Torque the nuts to 54 Nm (40 ft. lbs.). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Engine Oil Pressure > Component Information > Specifications Engine Oil Pressure: Specifications ENGINE OIL PRESSURE CAUTION: If oil pressure is 0 at idle, do not perform the 3000 RPM test. Oil Pressure: Curb Idle - 25 kPa (4 psi) minimum - 3000 rpm - 170 - 758 kPa (25 - 110 psi) Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Engine Oil Pressure > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2815 Engine Oil Pressure: Testing and Inspection CHECKING ENGINE OIL PRESSURE 1. Remove oil pressure sending unit (2) and install gauge assembly C-3292. 2. Run engine until thermostat opens. 3. Oil Pressure: - Curb Idle - 25 kPa (4 psi) minimum - 3000 rpm - 170 - 758 kPa (25 - 110 psi) 4. If oil pressure is 0 at idle, shut off engine. Check for a clogged oil pick-up screen or a pressure relief valve stuck open. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Engine Oil > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Maintenance - Fluid Flushing Information Engine Oil: Technical Service Bulletins Maintenance - Fluid Flushing Information NUMBER: 26-001-09 GROUP: Miscellaneous DATE: September 24, 2009 THIS BULLETIN SUPERSEDES TECHNICAL SERVICE BULLETIN 26-003-07, DATED MARCH 30, 2007, WHICH SHOULD BE REMOVED FROM YOUR FILES. THIS IS A COMPLETE REVISION AND NO ASTERISKS HAVE BEEN USED TO HIGHLIGHT REVISIONS. SUBJECT: Fluid Flushing Requirements MODELS: 2005 - 2008 (CS) Pacifica 2006 - 2009 (D1) Ram Truck (3500 Pick Up) 2010 (D2) Ram Truck (3500 Pick Up) 2007 - 2010 (DC) Ram Truck (3500 Chassis Cab) 2005 - 2009 (DH) Ram Truck (1500/2500 Pick Up) 2010 (DJ) Ram Truck (2500 Pick Up) 2005 - 2008 (DR) Ram Truck (1500/2500 Pick Up) 2009 - 2010 (DS) Ram Truck (1500) 2005 - 2009 (HB) Durango 2007 - 2009 (HG) Aspen 2009 - 2010 (JC) Journey 2007 - 2010 (JK) Wrangler 2005 - 2006 (JR) Sebring Sedan & Convertible/Stratus Sedan 2007 - 2010 (JS) Avenger/Sebring 2008 - 2010 (KK) Liberty 2007 - 2010 (KA) Nitro 2005 - 2007 (KJ) Liberty 2009 - 2010 (LC) Challenger 2005 - 2010 (LE) 300C/300C Touring (International Markets) 2005 - 2010 (LX) 300/Magnum/Charger 2007 - 2010 (MK) Compass/Patriot 2005 - 2010 (ND) Dakota 2005 - 2006 (PL) Neon 2007 - 2010 (PM) Caliber 2005 - 2010 (PT) Chrysler PT Cruiser Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Engine Oil > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Maintenance - Fluid Flushing Information > Page 2820 2005 - 2007 (RG) Chrysler Voyager (International Markets) 2005 - 2007 (RS) Town & Country/Caravan/Voyager 2009 - 2010 (RT) Town & Country/Grand Caravan 2005 - 2006 (TJ) Wrangler 2005 - 2006 (VA) Sprinter 2007 - 2010 (VB) Sprinter 2005 - 2010 (WH) Grand Cherokee (International Markets) 2005 - 2010 (WK) Grand Cherokee 2006 - 2010 (XH) Commander (International Markets) 2006 - 2010 (XK) Commander 2005 - 2010 (ZB) Viper 2005 - 2007 (ZH) Crossfire DISCUSSION: Chrysler Group vehicle fluid systems do NOT require regular flushing. These systems include: engine oil, transmission oil, axle lube, brake fluid, power steering fluid, and refrigerant. The only exception to this requirement are published in the vehicle maintenance schedules, e.g. engine coolant. Exceptions to this recommendation include only those instances where a failure has occurred and/or the system has become compromised, contaminated or overheated beyond the normal operating range. Chrysler Group does NOT recommend aftermarket chemicals to flush the engine, transmission, brake or steering systems. Chemicals contained in these products can damage the system elastomeric components, and contaminate the component fluid, leading to loss of system/component durability and service life. When necessary, only the original approved system fluid should be used to flush these components using teamPSE(R) approved equipment. If the engine coolant contains a considerable amount of sediment, clean and flush with Mopar Cooling System Flush, p/n 04856977, or equivalent. Follow with a thorough rinsing to remove all deposits and chemicals. Refill with a minimum of a 50% mixture of the specified coolant and distilled water. POLICY: Information Only Disclaimer: This bulletin is supplied as technical information only and is not an authorization for repair. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Engine Oil > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications Engine Oil: Capacity Specifications Engine Oil ............................................................................................................................................ ............................................................. 5.7L (6.0 Qt) Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Engine Oil > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications > Page 2823 Engine Oil: Fluid Type Specifications Engine Oil Type ................................................................................................................................... ............................................................... SAE 5W-30 API Certified, meeting material standard MS-6395 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Engine Oil > Component Information > Description and Operation > Engine Oil Engine Oil: Description and Operation Engine Oil ENGINE OIL WARNING: New or used engine oil can be irritating to the skin. Avoid prolonged or repeated skin contact with engine oil. Contaminants in used engine oil, caused by internal combustion, can be hazardous to your health. Thoroughly wash exposed skin with soap and water. Do not wash skin with gasoline, diesel fuel, thinner, or solvents, health problems can result. Do not pollute, dispose of used engine oil properly. Contact your dealer or government agency for location of collection center in your area. Only lubricants bearing designations defined by the following organization should be used. - Society of Automotive Engineers (SAE) - American Petroleum Institute (API) - National Lubricating Grease Institute (NLGI) - Association des Constructeurs EuropA■©ens d' Automobiles (European Automobile Manufacturers Association) (ACEA) API SERVICE GRADE CERTIFIED Use an engine oil that is API Certified. MOPAR(R) provides engine oils, that meet or exceed this requirement. SAE VISCOSITY An SAE viscosity grade is used to specify the viscosity of engine oil. Use only engine oils with multiple viscosities such as 5W-20 or 5W-30. These are specified with a dual SAE viscosity grade which indicates the cold-to-hot temperature viscosity range. Select an engine oil that is best suited to your particular temperature range and variation. For 3.7L/4.7L engines SAE 5W-20 engine oil is recommended for all operating temperatures. For 5.7L engines SAE 5W-20 engine oil is recommended for all operating temperatures.These engine oils improve low temperature starting and vehicle fuel economy. Refer to your engine oil filler cap for the recommended engine oil viscosity for your vehicle. Vehicles with 5.7L engines equipped with Multiple Displacement System (MDS) must use SAE 5W-20 oil. Failure to do so may result in improper operation of the Multiple Displacement System (MDS). Refer to the engine oil filler cap for the recommended engine oil viscosity for each vehicle. ACEA Categories For countries that use the ACEA European Oil Categories for Service Fill Oils, use engine oils that meet the requirements of ACEA A1/B1, A2/B2, or A3/B3. ENERGY CONSERVING OIL An Energy Conserving type oil is recommended for gasoline engines. The designation of ENERGY CONSERVING is located on the label of an engine oil container. CONTAINER IDENTIFICATION Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Engine Oil > Component Information > Description and Operation > Engine Oil > Page 2826 Standard engine oil identification notations have been adopted to aid in the proper selection of engine oil. The identifying notations are located on the front label of engine oil plastic bottles and the top of engine oil cans. This symbol means that the oil has been certified by the American Petroleum Institute (API). Daimler/Chrysler only recommend API Certified engine oils. Use Mopar(R) engine oil or equivalent. SYNTHETIC ENGINE OILS There are a number of engine oils being promoted as either synthetic or semi-synthetic. If you chose to use such a product, use only those oils that meet the American Petroleum Institute (API) and SAE viscosity standard. Follow the service schedule that describes your driving type. ENGINE OIL ADDITIVES/SUPPLEMENTS The manufacturer does not recommend the addition of any engine oil additives/supplements to the specified engine oil. Engine oil additives/supplements should not be used to enhance engine oil performance. Engine oil additives/supplements should not be used to extend engine oil change intervals. No additive is known to be safe for engine durability and can degrade emission components. Additives can contain undesirable materials that harm the long term durability of engines by: - Doubling the level of phosphorus in the engine oil. The ILSAC (International Lubricant Standard Approval Committee) GF-2 and GF-3 standards require that engine oil contain no more than 0.10% phosphorus to protect the vehicles emissions performance. Addition of engine oil additives/supplements can poison, from the added sulfur and phosphorus, catalysts and hinder efforts to guarantee emissions performance to 80,000 miles. - Altering the viscosity characteristics of the engine oil so that it no longer meets the requirements of the specified viscosity grade. - Creating potential for an undesirable additive compatibility interaction in the engine crankcase. Generally it is not desirable to mix additive packages from different suppliers in the crankcase; there have been reports of low temperature engine failures caused by additive package incompatibility with such mixtures. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Engine Oil > Component Information > Description and Operation > Engine Oil > Page 2827 Engine Oil: Description and Operation Engine Oil - Flexible Fuel Engines FLEXIBLE FUEL ENGINE OIL This information is for Flexible Fuel Vehicles (FFV) only. These vehicles can be identified by the unique Fuel Filler Door Label that states Ethanol (E-85) or Unleaded Gasoline Only. This information only covers those subjects that are unique to these vehicles. ETHANOL FUEL (E-85) E-85 is a mixture of approximately 85% fuel ethanol and 15% unleaded gasoline. WARNING: Ethanol vapors are extremely flammable and could cause serious personal injury. Never have any smoking materials lit in or near the vehicle when removing the fuel filler tube cap (gas cap) or filling the tank. Do not use E-85 as a cleaning agent and never use it near an open flame. FUEL REQUIREMENTS The vehicle will operate on both unleaded gasoline with an octane rating of 87, or E-85 fuel, or any mixture of these two. For best results, a refueling pattern that alternates between E-85 and unleaded gasoline should be avoided. When you do switch fuels, it is recommended that - you do not switch when the fuel gauge indicates less than 1/4 full - you do not add less than 5 gallons when refueling - you operate the vehicle immediately after refueling for a period of at least 5 minutes Observing these precautions will avoid possible hard starting and/or significant deterioration in driveability during warm up. FFV STARTING The characteristics of E-85 fuel make it unsuitable for use when ambient temperatures fall below -18°C (0°F). In the range of -18°C (0°F) to 0°C (32°F), you may experience an increase in the time it takes for your engine to start, and a deterioration in driveability (sags and/or hesitations) until the engine is fully warmed up. Engine Operating on E-85 Fuel If vehicle operates on E-85 fuel either full or part-time, use only Mopar(R) Flexible Fuel 5W-30 engine oil or an equivalent that meets DaimlerChrysler Standard MS-9214. Equivalent commercial Flexible Fuel engine oils may be labeled as Multi-Fuel, Variable Fuel, Flexible Fuel, etc. These engine oils may be satisfactory if they meet the DaimlerChrysler Standard. SAE 5W-30 engine oil is preferred for use in Flexible Fuel engines. CAUTION: If Flexible Fuel engine oil is not used when using E-85 fuel, engine wear or damage may result. CRUISING RANGE Because E-85 fuel contains less energy per gallon than gasoline, you will experience an increase in fuel consumption. You can expect your MPG and your driving range to decrease by about 30% compared to gasoline operation. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Engine Oil > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 2828 Engine Oil: Service and Repair STANDARD PROCEDURE - ENGINE OIL SERVICE The engine oil level indicator (2) is located at the right rear of the engine on the 4.7L engines. CRANKCASE OIL LEVEL INSPECTION CAUTION: Do not overfill crankcase with engine oil, pressure loss or oil foaming can result. Inspect engine oil level approximately every 800 kilometers (500 miles). Unless the engine has exhibited loss of oil pressure, run the engine for about five minutes before checking oil level. Checking engine oil level on a cold engine is not accurate. To ensure proper lubrication of an engine, the engine oil must be maintained at an acceptable level. The acceptable levels are indicated between the ADD and SAFE marks on the engine oil dipstick. 1. Position vehicle on level surface. 2. With engine OFF, allow approximately ten minutes for oil to settle to bottom of crankcase, remove engine oil dipstick. 3. Wipe dipstick clean. 4. Install dipstick and verify it is seated in the tube. 5. Remove dipstick, with handle held above the tip, take oil level reading. 6. Add oil only if level is below the ADD mark on dipstick. ENGINE OIL CHANGE Change engine oil at mileage and time intervals described in Maintenance Schedules. Run engine until achieving normal operating temperature. 1. Position the vehicle on a level surface and turn engine off. 2. Hoist and support vehicle on safety stands. 3. Remove oil fill cap. 4. Place a suitable drain pan under crankcase drain. 5. Remove drain plug from crankcase and allow oil to drain into pan. Inspect drain plug threads for stretching or other damage. Replace drain plug if damaged. 6. Install drain plug in crankcase. 7. Lower vehicle and fill crankcase with specified type and amount of engine oil. 8. Install oil fill cap. 9. Start engine and inspect for leaks. 10. Stop engine and inspect oil level. NOTE: Care should be exercised when disposing used engine oil after it has been drained from a vehicle engine. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Filter, Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Oil Filter: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL All engines are equipped with a high quality full-flow, disposable type oil filter. DaimlerChrysler Corporation recommends a Mopar(R) or equivalent oil filter be used. 1. Position a drain pan under the oil filter. 2. Using a suitable oil filter wrench loosen filter. 3. Rotate the oil filter counterclockwise to remove it from the cylinder block oil filter boss. 4. When filter separates from cylinder block oil filter boss, tip gasket end upward to minimize oil spill. Remove filter from vehicle. NOTE: Make sure filter gasket was removed with filter. 5. With a wiping cloth, clean the gasket sealing surface of oil and grime. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Filter, Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 2833 Oil Filter: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION 1. Lightly lubricate oil filter gasket (2) with engine oil. 2. Thread filter (3) onto adapter nipple. When gasket makes contact with sealing surface, hand tighten filter one full turn, do not over tighten. 3. Add oil, verify crankcase oil level and start engine. Inspect for oil leaks. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pan, Engine > Component Information > Specifications Oil Pan: Specifications Oil Pan Position the oil pan and install the mounting bolts. Tighten the mounting bolts to 15 Nm (11 ft. lbs.) in the sequence shown. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pan, Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Engine Oil Pan - Removal Oil Pan: Service and Repair Engine Oil Pan - Removal REMOVAL 1. Disconnect the negative battery cable. 2. Install engine support fixture special tool # 8534. Do not raise engine at this time. 3. Loosen both left and right side engine mount through bolts. Do not remove bolts. 4. Remove the structural dust cover, if equipped. 5. Drain engine oil. 6. Remove the front crossmember See: Body and Frame/Frame/Cross-Member/Front Cross-Member/Service and Repair . CAUTION: Only raise the engine enough to provide clearance for oil pan removal. Check for proper clearance at fan shroud to fan and cowl to intake manifold. 7. Raise engine using special tool # 8534 to provide clearance to remove oil pan. NOTE: Do not pry on oil pan or oil pan gasket. Gasket is integral to engine windage tray and does not come out with oil pan. 8. Remove the oil pan mounting bolts and oil pan. 9. Unbolt oil pump pickup tube and remove tube. 10. Inspect the integral windage tray and gasket and replace as needed. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pan, Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Engine Oil Pan - Removal > Page 2839 Oil Pan: Service and Repair Engine Oil Pan - Installation INSTALLATION 1. Clean the oil pan gasket mating surface of the bedplate and oil pan. 2. Position the oil pan gasket and pickup tube with new o-ring. Install the mounting bolt and nuts. Tighten bolt and nuts to 28 Nm (20 ft. lbs.). 3. Position the oil pan and install the mounting bolts. Tighten the mounting bolts to 15 Nm (11 ft. lbs.) in the sequence shown. 4. Lower the engine into mounts using special tool # 8534. 5. Install both the left and right side engine mount through bolts. Tighten the nuts to 68 Nm (50 ft. lbs.). 6. Remove special tool # 8534. 7. Install structural dust cover, if equipped. 8. Install the front crossmember See: Body and Frame/Frame/Cross-Member/Front Cross-Member/Service and Repair . 9. Fill engine oil. 10. Reconnect the negative battery cable. 11. Start engine and check for leaks. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pressure Gauge > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Oil Pressure Gauge: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION An oil pressure gauge is standard equipment on all instrument clusters except for ST vehicles with a gasoline engine. This gauge is located in the upper right quadrant of the instrument cluster, above the coolant temperature gauge. This gauge consists of a movable gauge needle or pointer controlled by the instrument cluster circuitry and a fixed 90 degree scale on the cluster overlay that reads left-to-right from L (or Low) to H (or High) for gasoline engines. On vehicles with a diesel engine the scale reads from 0 kPa to 760 kPa in markets where a metric instrument cluster is specified, or from 0 psi to 110 psi in all other markets. An International Control and Display Symbol icon for Engine Oil is located on the cluster overlay, directly below the left end of the gauge scale. The oil pressure gauge graphics are black against a white field except for a single red graduation at the low end of the gauge scale making them clearly visible within the instrument cluster in daylight. When illuminated from behind by the panel lamps dimmer controlled cluster general illumination lighting with the exterior lamps turned ON, the black graphics appear blue-green and the red graphics still appear red. The gauge needle has internal optical illumination. Gauge illumination is provided by replaceable incandescent bulb and holder units located on the instrument cluster electronic circuit board. The oil pressure gauge is serviced as a unit with the instrument cluster. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pressure Gauge > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 2844 Oil Pressure Gauge: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The oil pressure gauge gives an indication to the vehicle operator of the engine oil pressure. This gauge is controlled by the instrument cluster circuit board based upon cluster programming and electronic messages received by the cluster from the Powertrain Control Module (PCM) on vehicles with a gasoline engine, or from the Engine Control Module (ECM) on vehicles equipped with a diesel engine over the Controller Area Network (CAN) data bus. The oil pressure gauge is an air core magnetic unit that receives battery current on the instrument cluster electronic circuit board through the fused ignition switch output (run-start) circuit whenever the ignition switch is in the ON or START positions. The cluster is programmed to move the gauge needle back to the low end of the scale after the ignition switch is turned to the OFF position. The instrument cluster circuitry controls the gauge needle position and provides the following features: - Engine Oil Pressure Message - The instrument cluster circuitry restricts the oil pressure gauge needle operation in order to provide readings that are consistent with customer expectations. Each time the cluster receives an electronic engine oil pressure message from the PCM or ECM indicating the pressure is above about 41 kPa (6 psi) the cluster holds the gauge needle at a point near the middle increment within the normal range on the gauge scale. Engine Oil Pressure Low Message - Each time the cluster receives three consecutive electronic engine oil pressure messages from the PCM or ECM indicating the pressure is below about 41 kPa (6 psi), the gauge needle is moved to the red graduation at the far left end of the gauge scale, the check gauges indicator is illuminated, and a single chime tone is generated. The gauge needle remains at the left end of the gauge scale and the check gauges indicator remains illuminated until the cluster receives a message from the PCM or ECM indicating that the pressure is above about 41 kPa (6 psi), or until the ignition switch is turned to the OFF position, whichever occurs first. The cluster will only turn ON the check gauges indicator in response to a low pressure message if the engine speed is greater than zero. - Communication Error - If the cluster fails to receive an engine oil pressure message, it will hold the gauge needle at the last indication for about 10 seconds, or until the ignition switch is turned to the OFF position, whichever occurs first. After 10 seconds, the cluster will move the gauge needle to the low end of the gauge scale. - Actuator Test - Each time the cluster is put through the actuator test, the oil pressure gauge needle will be swept to several calibration points on the gauge scale in a prescribed sequence in order to confirm the functionality of the gauge and the cluster control circuitry. The PCM (gasoline engines) or ECM (diesel engines) continually monitors the engine oil pressure sensor to determine the engine oil pressure. The PCM or ECM then sends the proper messages to the ElectroMechanical Instrument Cluster (EMIC) (also known as the Cab Compartment Node/CCN). If the instrument cluster turns ON the check gauges indicator due to a low oil pressure gauge reading, it may indicate that the engine or the engine oiling system requires service. For proper diagnosis of the engine oil pressure sensor, the PCM, the ECM, the EMIC, the CAN data bus or the electronic communication related to oil pressure gauge operation a diagnostic scan tool is required. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pressure Sender > Component Information > Locations Oil Pressure Sender: Locations Component ID: 496 Component : SWITCH-OIL PRESSURE Connector: Name : SWITCH-OIL PRESSURE Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Pin Circuit Description 1 G6 18VT/GY OIL PRESSURE SIGNAL Pin Circuit Description 1 G6 16VT/GY OIL PRESSURE SIGNAL 2-Component Location - 8 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pressure Sender > Component Information > Locations > Page 2848 Component Location - 11 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pressure Sender > Component Information > Locations > Page 2849 Component Location - 12 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pressure Sender > Component Information > Locations > Page 2850 Component Location - 14 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pressure Sender > Component Information > Locations > Page 2851 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pressure Sender > Component Information > Locations > Page 2852 Oil Pressure Sender: Diagrams Component ID: 496 Component : SWITCH-OIL PRESSURE Connector: Name : SWITCH-OIL PRESSURE Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Pin Circuit Description 1 G6 18VT/GY OIL PRESSURE SIGNAL Pin Circuit Description 1 G6 16VT/GY OIL PRESSURE SIGNAL 2-Component Location - 8 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pressure Sender > Component Information > Locations > Page 2853 Component Location - 11 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pressure Sender > Component Information > Locations > Page 2854 Component Location - 12 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pressure Sender > Component Information > Locations > Page 2855 Component Location - 14 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pressure Sender > Component Information > Locations > Page 2856 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pressure Sender > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Oil Pressure Sender: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The oil pressure switch is a pressure sensitive switch that is activated by the engine's oil pressure (in the main oil gallery). The switch is a two terminal device (one terminal is provided to the wiring harness and the other terminal is the switch's metal housing that screws into the engine block). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pressure Sender > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 2859 Oil Pressure Sender: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The oil pressure switch is normally "Closed." The switch changes from a "Closed" circuit to an "Open" circuit, on increasing pressure of 7 PSIG. The oil pressure switch changes from an "Open" circuit to a "Closed" circuit, on decreasing pressure, between 2 PSIG and 4 PSIG. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pressure Sender > Component Information > Service and Repair > Engine Oil Pressure Sensor/Switch - Installation Oil Pressure Sender: Service and Repair Engine Oil Pressure Sensor/Switch - Installation INSTALLATION 1. Install oil pressure sender. 2. Connect oil pressure sender wire. 3. Install front splash shield. 4. Lower vehicle. 5. Connect the negative battery cable. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pressure Sender > Component Information > Service and Repair > Engine Oil Pressure Sensor/Switch - Installation > Page 2862 Oil Pressure Sender: Service and Repair Engine Oil Pressure Sensor/Switch - Removal REMOVAL 1. Disconnect the negative cable from the battery. 2. Raise vehicle on hoist. 3. Remove front splash shield. 4. Disconnect oil pressure sender wire (4). 5. Remove the pressure sender (2). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pressure Warning Lamp/Indicator > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Oil Pressure Warning Lamp/Indicator: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION A low oil pressure indicator is standard equipment only in the four-gauge instrument clusters of all ST vehicles with a gasoline engine. This indicator is located on the left side of the instrument cluster, to the left of the fuel gauge. The low oil pressure indicator consists of a stencil-like cutout of the International Control and Display Symbol icon for Engine Oil in the opaque layer of the instrument cluster overlay. The dark outer layer of the overlay prevents the indicator from being clearly visible when it is not illuminated. A red Light Emitting Diode (LED) behind the cutout in the opaque layer of the overlay causes the icon to appear in red through the translucent outer layer of the overlay when it is illuminated from behind by the LED, which is soldered onto the instrument cluster electronic circuit board. The low oil pressure indicator is serviced as a unit with the instrument cluster. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pressure Warning Lamp/Indicator > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 2867 Oil Pressure Warning Lamp/Indicator: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The low oil pressure indicator gives an indication to the vehicle operator when the engine oil pressure reading reflects a condition requiring immediate attention. This indicator is controlled by a transistor on the instrument cluster circuit board based upon cluster programming and electronic messages received by the cluster from the Powertrain Control Module (PCM) over the Controller Area Network (CAN) data bus. The low oil pressure indicator Light Emitting Diode (LED) is completely controlled by the instrument cluster logic circuit, and that logic will only allow this indicator to operate when the instrument cluster receives a battery current input on the fused ignition switch output (run-start) circuit. Therefore, the LED will always be OFF when the ignition switch is in any position except ON or START. The LED only illuminates when it is provided a path to ground by the instrument cluster transistor. The instrument cluster will turn ON the low oil pressure indicator for the following reasons: - Engine Oil Pressure Low Message - Each time the cluster receives an electronic engine oil pressure message from the PCM indicating the pressure is about 6.9 kPa (1 psi) or lower, the low oil pressure indicator will be illuminated. The indicator remains illuminated until the cluster receives a message from the PCM indicating that the pressure is above about 6.9 kPa (1 psi), or until the ignition switch is turned to the OFF position, whichever occurs first. The cluster will only turn the indicator ON in response to low engine oil pressure if the engine speed is greater than zero. Actuator Test - Each time the cluster is put through the actuator test, the low oil pressure indicator will be turned ON, then OFF again during the bulb check portion of the test to confirm the functionality of the LED and the cluster control circuitry. The PCM continually monitors the engine oil pressure sensor to determine the engine oil pressure. The PCM then sends the proper messages to the ElectroMechanical Instrument Cluster (EMIC) (also known as the Cab Compartment Node/CCN). For further diagnosis of the low oil pressure indicator or the instrument cluster circuitry that controls the LED, Refer to appropriate testing. For proper diagnosis of the engine oil pressure sensor, the PCM, the EMIC, the CAN data bus or the electronic communication related to low oil pressure indicator operation a diagnostic scan tool is required. Refer to the appropriate diagnostic information. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pump, Engine > Engine Oil Pressure > Component Information > Specifications Engine Oil Pressure: Specifications ENGINE OIL PRESSURE CAUTION: If oil pressure is 0 at idle, do not perform the 3000 RPM test. Oil Pressure: Curb Idle - 25 kPa (4 psi) minimum - 3000 rpm - 170 - 758 kPa (25 - 110 psi) Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pump, Engine > Engine Oil Pressure > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2872 Engine Oil Pressure: Testing and Inspection CHECKING ENGINE OIL PRESSURE 1. Remove oil pressure sending unit (2) and install gauge assembly C-3292. 2. Run engine until thermostat opens. 3. Oil Pressure: - Curb Idle - 25 kPa (4 psi) minimum - 3000 rpm - 170 - 758 kPa (25 - 110 psi) 4. If oil pressure is 0 at idle, shut off engine. Check for a clogged oil pick-up screen or a pressure relief valve stuck open. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Intake Manifold > Component Information > Specifications Intake Manifold: Specifications Intake Manifold Install the intake manifold retaining bolts and tighten in sequence shown to 12 Nm (105 in. lbs.). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Intake Manifold > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2876 Intake Manifold: Description and Operation DESCRIPTION The intake manifold is made of a composite material and features long runners which maximizes low end torque. The intake manifold uses single plane sealing which consist of eight individual press in place port gaskets to prevent leaks. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Intake Manifold > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2877 Intake Manifold: Testing and Inspection DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING - INTAKE MANIFOLD LEAKAGE An intake manifold air leak is characterized by lower than normal manifold vacuum. Also, one or more cylinders may not be functioning. WARNING: USE EXTREME CAUTION WHEN THE ENGINE IS OPERATING. DO NOT STAND IN A DIRECT LINE WITH THE FAN. DO NOT PUT YOUR HANDS NEAR THE PULLEYS, BELTS OR THE FAN. DO NOT WEAR LOOSE CLOTHING. 1. Start the engine. 2. Spray a small stream of water at the suspected leak area. 3. If a change in RPM is observed the area of the suspected leak has been found. 4. Repair as required. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Intake Manifold > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures Intake Manifold: Procedures Intake Manifold - Cleaning CLEANING NOTE: There is NO approved repair procedure for the intake manifold. If severe damage is found during inspection, the intake manifold must be replaced. Before installing the intake manifold thoroughly clean the mating surfaces. Use a suitable cleaning solvent, then air dry. Intake Manifold - Inspection INSPECTION 1. Inspect the intake sealing surface for cracks, nicks and distortion. 2. Inspect the intake manifold vacuum hose fittings for looseness or blockage. 3. Inspect the manifold to throttle body mating surface for cracks, nicks and distortion. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Intake Manifold > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 2880 Intake Manifold: Removal and Replacement Intake Manifold - Removal REMOVAL 1. Disconnect negative cable from battery. 2. Remove resonator assembly and air inlet hose. 3. Disconnect throttle and speed control cables. 4. Disconnect electrical connectors for the following components: - Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) Sensor - Intake Air Temperature (IAT) Sensor - Throttle Position (TPS) Sensor - Coolant Temperature (CTS) Sensor - Idle Air Control (IAC) Motor 5. Disconnect brake booster hose and positive crankcase ventilation (PCV) hose. 6. Disconnect generator electrical connections. 7. Disconnect air conditioning compressor electrical connections. 8. Disconnect left and right radio suppressor straps. 9. Disconnect and remove ignition coil towers. 10. Remove top oil dipstick tube retaining bolt and ground strap. 11. Bleed fuel system See: Cylinder Head Assembly/Fuel Pressure Release/Service and Repair . 12. Remove fuel rail See: Powertrain Management/Fuel Delivery and Air Induction/Fuel Rail/Service and Repair/Fuel Rail Removal . 13. Remove throttle body assembly and mounting bracket. 14. Drain cooling system below coolant temperature level See: Cooling System/Service and Repair . 15. Remove the heater hoses (1) from the engine front cover and the heater core. 16. Unclip (2) and remove heater hoses and tubes from intake manifold. 17. Remove coolant temperature sensor. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Intake Manifold > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 2881 18. Remove intake manifold retaining fasteners in reverse order of tightening sequence. 19. Remove intake manifold. Intake Manifold - Installation INSTALLATION 1. Install intake manifold gaskets. 2. Position intake manifold. 3. Install intake manifold retaining bolts and tighten in sequence shown in to 12 Nm (105 in. lbs.). 4. Install left and right radio suppressor straps. 5. Install throttle body assembly. 6. Install throttle cable bracket. 7. Connect throttle cable and speed control cable to throttle body. 8. Install fuel rail See: Powertrain Management/Fuel Delivery and Air Induction/Fuel Rail/Service and Repair/Fuel Rail - Installation . 9. Install ignition coil towers. 10. Position and install heater hoses and tubes onto intake manifold. 11. Install the heater hoses to the heater core and engine front cover. 12. Connect electrical connectors for the following components: - Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) Sensor - Intake Air Temperature (IAT) Sensor - Throttle Position (TPS) Sensor - Coolant Temperature (CTS) Sensor - Idle Air Control (IAC) Motor - Ignition coil towers - Fuel injectors 13. Install top oil dipstick tube retaining bolt and ground strap. 14. Connect generator electrical connections. 15. Connect Brake booster hose and Positive crankcase ventilation (PCV) hose. 16. Fill cooling system See: Cooling System/Service and Repair . 17. Install resonator assembly and air inlet hose. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Intake Manifold > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 2882 18. Connect negative cable to battery. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Lamps and Indicators - Engine > Oil Pressure Gauge > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Oil Pressure Gauge: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION An oil pressure gauge is standard equipment on all instrument clusters except for ST vehicles with a gasoline engine. This gauge is located in the upper right quadrant of the instrument cluster, above the coolant temperature gauge. This gauge consists of a movable gauge needle or pointer controlled by the instrument cluster circuitry and a fixed 90 degree scale on the cluster overlay that reads left-to-right from L (or Low) to H (or High) for gasoline engines. On vehicles with a diesel engine the scale reads from 0 kPa to 760 kPa in markets where a metric instrument cluster is specified, or from 0 psi to 110 psi in all other markets. An International Control and Display Symbol icon for Engine Oil is located on the cluster overlay, directly below the left end of the gauge scale. The oil pressure gauge graphics are black against a white field except for a single red graduation at the low end of the gauge scale making them clearly visible within the instrument cluster in daylight. When illuminated from behind by the panel lamps dimmer controlled cluster general illumination lighting with the exterior lamps turned ON, the black graphics appear blue-green and the red graphics still appear red. The gauge needle has internal optical illumination. Gauge illumination is provided by replaceable incandescent bulb and holder units located on the instrument cluster electronic circuit board. The oil pressure gauge is serviced as a unit with the instrument cluster. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Lamps and Indicators - Engine > Oil Pressure Gauge > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 2888 Oil Pressure Gauge: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The oil pressure gauge gives an indication to the vehicle operator of the engine oil pressure. This gauge is controlled by the instrument cluster circuit board based upon cluster programming and electronic messages received by the cluster from the Powertrain Control Module (PCM) on vehicles with a gasoline engine, or from the Engine Control Module (ECM) on vehicles equipped with a diesel engine over the Controller Area Network (CAN) data bus. The oil pressure gauge is an air core magnetic unit that receives battery current on the instrument cluster electronic circuit board through the fused ignition switch output (run-start) circuit whenever the ignition switch is in the ON or START positions. The cluster is programmed to move the gauge needle back to the low end of the scale after the ignition switch is turned to the OFF position. The instrument cluster circuitry controls the gauge needle position and provides the following features: - Engine Oil Pressure Message - The instrument cluster circuitry restricts the oil pressure gauge needle operation in order to provide readings that are consistent with customer expectations. Each time the cluster receives an electronic engine oil pressure message from the PCM or ECM indicating the pressure is above about 41 kPa (6 psi) the cluster holds the gauge needle at a point near the middle increment within the normal range on the gauge scale. Engine Oil Pressure Low Message - Each time the cluster receives three consecutive electronic engine oil pressure messages from the PCM or ECM indicating the pressure is below about 41 kPa (6 psi), the gauge needle is moved to the red graduation at the far left end of the gauge scale, the check gauges indicator is illuminated, and a single chime tone is generated. The gauge needle remains at the left end of the gauge scale and the check gauges indicator remains illuminated until the cluster receives a message from the PCM or ECM indicating that the pressure is above about 41 kPa (6 psi), or until the ignition switch is turned to the OFF position, whichever occurs first. The cluster will only turn ON the check gauges indicator in response to a low pressure message if the engine speed is greater than zero. - Communication Error - If the cluster fails to receive an engine oil pressure message, it will hold the gauge needle at the last indication for about 10 seconds, or until the ignition switch is turned to the OFF position, whichever occurs first. After 10 seconds, the cluster will move the gauge needle to the low end of the gauge scale. - Actuator Test - Each time the cluster is put through the actuator test, the oil pressure gauge needle will be swept to several calibration points on the gauge scale in a prescribed sequence in order to confirm the functionality of the gauge and the cluster control circuitry. The PCM (gasoline engines) or ECM (diesel engines) continually monitors the engine oil pressure sensor to determine the engine oil pressure. The PCM or ECM then sends the proper messages to the ElectroMechanical Instrument Cluster (EMIC) (also known as the Cab Compartment Node/CCN). If the instrument cluster turns ON the check gauges indicator due to a low oil pressure gauge reading, it may indicate that the engine or the engine oiling system requires service. For proper diagnosis of the engine oil pressure sensor, the PCM, the ECM, the EMIC, the CAN data bus or the electronic communication related to oil pressure gauge operation a diagnostic scan tool is required. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Lamps and Indicators - Engine > Oil Pressure Warning Lamp/Indicator > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Oil Pressure Warning Lamp/Indicator: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION A low oil pressure indicator is standard equipment only in the four-gauge instrument clusters of all ST vehicles with a gasoline engine. This indicator is located on the left side of the instrument cluster, to the left of the fuel gauge. The low oil pressure indicator consists of a stencil-like cutout of the International Control and Display Symbol icon for Engine Oil in the opaque layer of the instrument cluster overlay. The dark outer layer of the overlay prevents the indicator from being clearly visible when it is not illuminated. A red Light Emitting Diode (LED) behind the cutout in the opaque layer of the overlay causes the icon to appear in red through the translucent outer layer of the overlay when it is illuminated from behind by the LED, which is soldered onto the instrument cluster electronic circuit board. The low oil pressure indicator is serviced as a unit with the instrument cluster. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Lamps and Indicators - Engine > Oil Pressure Warning Lamp/Indicator > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 2893 Oil Pressure Warning Lamp/Indicator: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The low oil pressure indicator gives an indication to the vehicle operator when the engine oil pressure reading reflects a condition requiring immediate attention. This indicator is controlled by a transistor on the instrument cluster circuit board based upon cluster programming and electronic messages received by the cluster from the Powertrain Control Module (PCM) over the Controller Area Network (CAN) data bus. The low oil pressure indicator Light Emitting Diode (LED) is completely controlled by the instrument cluster logic circuit, and that logic will only allow this indicator to operate when the instrument cluster receives a battery current input on the fused ignition switch output (run-start) circuit. Therefore, the LED will always be OFF when the ignition switch is in any position except ON or START. The LED only illuminates when it is provided a path to ground by the instrument cluster transistor. The instrument cluster will turn ON the low oil pressure indicator for the following reasons: - Engine Oil Pressure Low Message - Each time the cluster receives an electronic engine oil pressure message from the PCM indicating the pressure is about 6.9 kPa (1 psi) or lower, the low oil pressure indicator will be illuminated. The indicator remains illuminated until the cluster receives a message from the PCM indicating that the pressure is above about 6.9 kPa (1 psi), or until the ignition switch is turned to the OFF position, whichever occurs first. The cluster will only turn the indicator ON in response to low engine oil pressure if the engine speed is greater than zero. Actuator Test - Each time the cluster is put through the actuator test, the low oil pressure indicator will be turned ON, then OFF again during the bulb check portion of the test to confirm the functionality of the LED and the cluster control circuitry. The PCM continually monitors the engine oil pressure sensor to determine the engine oil pressure. The PCM then sends the proper messages to the ElectroMechanical Instrument Cluster (EMIC) (also known as the Cab Compartment Node/CCN). For further diagnosis of the low oil pressure indicator or the instrument cluster circuitry that controls the LED, Refer to appropriate testing. For proper diagnosis of the engine oil pressure sensor, the PCM, the EMIC, the CAN data bus or the electronic communication related to low oil pressure indicator operation a diagnostic scan tool is required. Refer to the appropriate diagnostic information. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Seals and Gaskets, Engine > Crankshaft Main Bearing Seal > Component Information > Testing and Inspection Crankshaft Main Bearing Seal: Testing and Inspection REAR SEAL AREA LEAKS Since it is sometimes difficult to determine the source of an oil leak in the rear seal area of the engine, a more involved inspection is necessary. The following steps should be followed to help pinpoint the source of the leak. If the leakage occurs at the crankshaft rear oil seal area: 1. Disconnect the battery. 2. Raise the vehicle. 3. Remove torque converter or clutch housing cover and inspect rear of block for evidence of oil. Use a black light to check for the oil leak: a. Circular spray pattern generally indicates seal leakage or crankshaft damage. b. Where leakage tends to run straight down, possible causes are a porous block, oil galley pipe plugs, oil filter runoff, and main bearing cap to cylinder block mating surfaces. See Engine, for proper repair procedures of these items. 4. If no leaks are detected, pressurize the crankcase as outlined in, Inspection (Engine oil Leaks in general) CAUTION: Do not exceed 20.6 kPa (3 psi). 5. If the leak is not detected, very slowly turn the crankshaft and watch for leakage. If a leak is detected between the crankshaft and seal while slowly turning the crankshaft, it is possible the crankshaft seal surface is damaged. The seal area on the crankshaft could have minor nicks or scratches that can be polished out with emery cloth. CAUTION: Use extreme caution when crankshaft polishing is necessary to remove minor nicks or scratches. The crankshaft seal flange is specially machined to complement the function of the rear oil seal. 6. For bubbles that remain steady with shaft rotation, no further inspection can be done until disassembled. Refer to appropriate testing. 7. After the oil leak root cause and appropriate corrective action have been identified, See: Service and Repair/Removal . Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Seals and Gaskets, Engine > Crankshaft Main Bearing Seal > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Crankshaft Main Bearing Seal: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL NOTE: This procedure can be performed in vehicle. 1. If being performed in vehicle, remove the transmission. 2. Remove the flexplate See: Transmission and Drivetrain/Flex Plate/Service and Repair/Removal . NOTE: The crankshaft oil seal CAN NOT be reused after removal. NOTE: The crankshaft rear oil seal remover 8506 must be installed deeply into the seal. Continue to tighten the removal tool into the seal until the tool can not be turned farther. Failure to install tool correctly the first time will cause tool to pull free of seal without removing seal from engine. 3. Using Seal Remover 8506 (2), remove the crankshaft rear oil seal (1). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Seals and Gaskets, Engine > Crankshaft Main Bearing Seal > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 2900 Crankshaft Main Bearing Seal: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION 1. Lubricate the crankshaft flange with engine oil. 2. Position the magnetic seal guide 8349-2 onto the crankshaft rear face. Then position the crankshaft rear oil seal (1) onto the guide (2). 3. Using Crankshaft Rear Oil Seal Installer 8349 (2) and Driver Handle C-4171 (3), with a hammer, tap the seal (1) into place. Continue to tap on the driver handle until the seal installer seats against the cylinder block crankshaft bore. 4. Install the flexplate. 5. Install the transmission. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Seals and Gaskets, Engine > Front Crankshaft Seal > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Front Crankshaft Seal: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL 1. Disconnect negative cable from battery. 2. Remove accessory drive belt See: Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories/Drive Belt/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Accessory Drive Belt - Removal . 3. Remove A/C compressor mounting fasteners and set compressor aside. 4. Drain cooling system See: Cooling System/Service and Repair . 5. Remove upper radiator hose. 6. Disconnect electrical connector for fan mounted inside radiator shroud. 7. Remove radiator shroud attaching fasteners. NOTE: Transmission cooler line snaps into shroud lower right hand corner. 8. Remove radiator cooling fan and shroud See: Cooling System/Radiator Cooling Fan/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Radiator Fan - Removal . 9. Remove crankshaft damper bolt. 10. Remove damper using Crankshaft Insert 8513 (1) and 1026 Three Jaw Puller (2). 11. Using Crankshaft Front Seal Remover 8511 (1), remove crankshaft front seal. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Seals and Gaskets, Engine > Front Crankshaft Seal > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 2905 Front Crankshaft Seal: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION CAUTION: To prevent severe damage to the Crankshaft, Damper or Special Tool 8512, thoroughly clean the damper bore and the crankshaft nose before installing Damper. 1. Using Special Tool 8348 and 8512 (2,3), install crankshaft front seal. 2. Install vibration damper See: Cylinder Block Assembly/Harmonic Balancer - Crankshaft Pulley/Service and Repair/Vibration Damper Installation . 3. Install radiator cooling fan and shroud. 4. Install upper radiator hose. 5. Install A/C compressor and tighten fasteners to 54 Nm (40 ft. lbs.). 6. Install accessory drive belt refer See: Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories/Drive Belt/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Accessory Drive Belt - Installation . 7. Refill cooling system See: Cooling System/Service and Repair . 8. Connect negative cable to battery. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Seals and Gaskets, Engine > Valve Guide Seal > Component Information > Description and Operation Valve Guide Seal: Description and Operation DESCRIPTION The valve stem seals are made of rubber and incorporate an integral steel valve spring seat. The integral garter spring maintains consistent lubrication control to the valve stems. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Sensors and Switches - Engine > Oil Pressure Sender > Component Information > Locations Oil Pressure Sender: Locations Component ID: 496 Component : SWITCH-OIL PRESSURE Connector: Name : SWITCH-OIL PRESSURE Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Pin Circuit Description 1 G6 18VT/GY OIL PRESSURE SIGNAL Pin Circuit Description 1 G6 16VT/GY OIL PRESSURE SIGNAL 2-Component Location - 8 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Sensors and Switches - Engine > Oil Pressure Sender > Component Information > Locations > Page 2913 Component Location - 11 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Sensors and Switches - Engine > Oil Pressure Sender > Component Information > Locations > Page 2914 Component Location - 12 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Sensors and Switches - Engine > Oil Pressure Sender > Component Information > Locations > Page 2915 Component Location - 14 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Sensors and Switches - Engine > Oil Pressure Sender > Component Information > Locations > Page 2916 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Sensors and Switches - Engine > Oil Pressure Sender > Component Information > Locations > Page 2917 Oil Pressure Sender: Diagrams Component ID: 496 Component : SWITCH-OIL PRESSURE Connector: Name : SWITCH-OIL PRESSURE Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Pin Circuit Description 1 G6 18VT/GY OIL PRESSURE SIGNAL Pin Circuit Description 1 G6 16VT/GY OIL PRESSURE SIGNAL 2-Component Location - 8 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Sensors and Switches - Engine > Oil Pressure Sender > Component Information > Locations > Page 2918 Component Location - 11 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Sensors and Switches - Engine > Oil Pressure Sender > Component Information > Locations > Page 2919 Component Location - 12 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Sensors and Switches - Engine > Oil Pressure Sender > Component Information > Locations > Page 2920 Component Location - 14 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Sensors and Switches - Engine > Oil Pressure Sender > Component Information > Locations > Page 2921 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Sensors and Switches - Engine > Oil Pressure Sender > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Oil Pressure Sender: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The oil pressure switch is a pressure sensitive switch that is activated by the engine's oil pressure (in the main oil gallery). The switch is a two terminal device (one terminal is provided to the wiring harness and the other terminal is the switch's metal housing that screws into the engine block). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Sensors and Switches - Engine > Oil Pressure Sender > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 2924 Oil Pressure Sender: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The oil pressure switch is normally "Closed." The switch changes from a "Closed" circuit to an "Open" circuit, on increasing pressure of 7 PSIG. The oil pressure switch changes from an "Open" circuit to a "Closed" circuit, on decreasing pressure, between 2 PSIG and 4 PSIG. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Sensors and Switches - Engine > Oil Pressure Sender > Component Information > Service and Repair > Engine Oil Pressure Sensor/Switch - Installation Oil Pressure Sender: Service and Repair Engine Oil Pressure Sensor/Switch - Installation INSTALLATION 1. Install oil pressure sender. 2. Connect oil pressure sender wire. 3. Install front splash shield. 4. Lower vehicle. 5. Connect the negative battery cable. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Sensors and Switches - Engine > Oil Pressure Sender > Component Information > Service and Repair > Engine Oil Pressure Sensor/Switch - Installation > Page 2927 Oil Pressure Sender: Service and Repair Engine Oil Pressure Sensor/Switch - Removal REMOVAL 1. Disconnect the negative cable from the battery. 2. Raise vehicle on hoist. 3. Remove front splash shield. 4. Disconnect oil pressure sender wire (4). 5. Remove the pressure sender (2). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Balance Shaft > Component Information > Service and Repair > Idler Shaft - Removal Balance Shaft: Service and Repair Idler Shaft - Removal REMOVAL 1. Remove the primary and secondary timing chains and sprockets See: Timing Chain/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Timing Chain & Sprockets - Removal . NOTE: To remove the idler shaft, it is necessary to tap threads into the shaft, to install the removal tool. 2. Using a 12 mm X 1.75 tap, cut threads in the idler shaft center bore. 3. Cover the radiator core with a suitable cover. CAUTION: Use care when removing the idler shaft, Do not strike the radiator cooling fins with the slide hammer. 4. Using Special Tool 8517 Slide Hammer, remove the idler shaft. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Balance Shaft > Component Information > Service and Repair > Idler Shaft - Removal > Page 2933 Balance Shaft: Service and Repair Idler Shaft - Installation INSTALLATION 1. Thoroughly clean the idler shaft bore. 2. Position the idler shaft in the bore. NOTE: The two lubrication holes in the idler shaft do not require any special alignment. NOTE: Before using the retaining bolt to install the idler shaft, coat the threads and the pilot on the idler shaft, with clean engine oil. 3. Using the primary idler sprocket retaining bolt and washer, carefully draw the idler shaft into the bore until fully seated. 4. Coat the idler shaft with clean engine oil. 5. Install the timing chains and sprockets See: Timing Chain/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Timing Chain & Sprockets - Installation . Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Camshaft Gear/Sprocket > Component Information > Specifications Camshaft Gear/Sprocket: Specifications Bolt-Camshaft Non-Oiled Sprocket Bolt ...................................................................................................................... .................................................. 122 Nm (90 Ft.Lbs.) Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Crankshaft Gear/Sprocket > Component Information > Specifications Crankshaft Gear/Sprocket: Specifications Torque Specifications Crankshaft Damper ............................................................................................................................. .............................................. 175 Nm (130 Ft.Lb.) Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Timing Chain > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures Timing Chain: Procedures INSPECTION Inspect the following components: - Sprockets for excessive tooth wear. Some tooth markings are normal and not a cause for sprocket replacement. - Idler sprocket assembly bushing and shaft for excessive wear. - Idler sprocket assembly spline joint. The joint should be tight with no backlash or axial movement. - Chain guides and tensioner arms. Replace these parts if grooving in plastic face is more than 1 mm (0.039 in.) deep. If plastic face is severely grooved or melted, the tensioner lube jet may be clogged. The tensioner should be replaced. - Secondary chain tensioner piston and ratcheting device. Inspect for evidence of heavy contact between tensioner piston and tensioner arm. If this condition exist the tensioner and tensioner arm should be replaced. - Primary chain tensioner plastic faces. Replace as required. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Timing Chain > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 2944 Timing Chain: Removal and Replacement Timing Chain & Sprockets - Removal REMOVAL 1. Disconnect negative cable from battery. 2. Drain cooling system See: Cooling System/Service and Repair . 3. Remove right and left cylinder head covers See: Cylinder Head Assembly/Valve Cover/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Cylinder Head Cover - Removal . 4. Remove radiator fan shroud. 5. Rotate engine until timing mark (2) on crankshaft damper aligns with TDC mark on timing chain cover (2) (#1 cylinder exhaust stroke) and the camshaft sprocket "V8" marks are at the 12 o'clock position (1,2). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Timing Chain > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 2945 6. Remove power steering pump See: Steering and Suspension/Steering/Power Steering/Power Steering Pump/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Power Steering Pump - Removal . 7. Remove access plugs (1,2) from left and right cylinder heads for access to chain guide fasteners. 8. Remove the oil fill housing to gain access to the right side tensioner arm fastener. 9. Remove crankshaft damper See: Cylinder Block Assembly/Harmonic Balancer - Crankshaft Pulley/Service and Repair/Vibration Damper Removal and timing chain cover See: Timing Cover/Service and Repair/Timing Cover - Removal . 10. Collapse and pin primary chain tensioner (1). CAUTION: Plate behind left secondary chain tensioner could fall into oil pan. Therefore, cover pan opening. 11. Remove secondary chain tensioners. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Timing Chain > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 2946 12. Remove camshaft position sensor (1) from right cylinder head. CAUTION: Care should be taken not to damage camshaft target wheel. Do not hold target wheel while loosening or tightening camshaft Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Timing Chain > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 2947 sprocket. Do not place the target wheel near a magnetic source of any kind. A damaged or magnetized target wheel could cause a vehicle no start condition. CAUTION: Do not forcefully rotate the camshafts or crankshaft independently of each other. Damaging intake valve to piston contact will occur. Ensure negative battery cable is disconnected to guard against accidental starter engagement. 13. Remove left and right camshaft sprocket bolts. 14. While holding the left camshaft steel tube with adjustable pliers (1), remove the left camshaft sprocket. Slowly rotate the camshaft approximately 15 degrees clockwise to a neutral position. 15. While holding the right camshaft steel tube with adjustable pliers (1), remove the right camshaft sprocket. Slowly rotate the camshaft approximately 45 degrees counterclockwise to a neutral position. 16. Remove idler sprocket assembly bolt. 17. Slide the idler sprocket assembly and crank sprocket forward simultaneously to remove the primary and secondary chains. 18. Remove both pivoting tensioner arms and chain guides. 19. Remove chain tensioner. Timing Chain & Sprockets - Installation INSTALLATION 1. Using a vise, lightly compress the secondary chain tensioner piston until the piston step is flush with the tensioner body. Using a pin or suitable tool, release ratchet pawl by pulling pawl back against spring force through access hole on side of tensioner. While continuing to hold pawl back, Push ratchet device to approximately 2 mm from the tensioner body. Install Special Tool 8514 lock pin (3) into hole on front of tensioner (2). Slowly open vise to transfer piston spring force to lock pin. 2. Position primary chain tensioner over oil pump and insert bolts into lower two holes on tensioner bracket. Tighten bolts to 28 Nm (250 in. lbs.). 3. Install right side chain tensioner arm. Apply Mopar(R) Lock N, Seal to torx(R) bolt, tighten bolt to 28 Nm (250 in. lbs.). NOTE: The silver bolts retain the guides to the cylinder heads and the black bolts retain the guides to the engine block. 4. Install the left side chain guide. Tighten the bolts to 28 Nm (250 in. lbs.). CAUTION: Overtightening the tensioner arm torx(R) bolt can cause severe damage to the cylinder head. Tighten torx(R) bolt to specified torque only. 5. Install left side chain tensioner arm. Apply Mopar(R) Lock N, Seal to torx(R) bolt, tighten bolt to 28 Nm (250 in. lbs.). 6. Install the right side chain guide. Tighten the bolts to 28 Nm (250 in. lbs.). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Timing Chain > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 2948 7. Install both secondary chains onto the idler sprocket. Align two plated links on the secondary chains to be visible through the two lower openings on the idler sprocket (4 o'clock and 8 o'clock). Once the secondary timing chains are installed, position special tool 8429 (6) to hold chains in place for installation. 8. Align primary chain double plated links with the timing mark at 12 o'clock (1) on the idler sprocket. Align the primary chain single plated link with the timing mark at 6 o'clock on the crankshaft sprocket (3). 9. Lubricate idler shaft and bushings with clean engine oil. 10. Install all chains, crankshaft sprocket, and idler sprocket as an assembly. After guiding both secondary chains through the block and cylinder head openings, affix chains with a elastic strap or the equivalent, This will maintain tension on chains to aid in installation. NOTE: It will be necessary to slightly rotate camshafts for sprocket installation. 11. Align left camshaft sprocket "L" dot to plated link on chain. 12. Align right camshaft sprocket "R" dot to plated link on chain. CAUTION: Remove excess oil from the camshaft sprocket bolt. Failure to do so can result in over-torque of bolt resulting in bolt failure. 13. Remove Special Tool 8429, then attach both sprockets to camshafts. Remove excess oil from bolts, then Install sprocket bolts, but do not tighten at this time. 14. Verify that all plated links are aligned with the marks on all sprockets and the "V8" marks on camshaft sprockets are at the 12 o'clock position. CAUTION: Ensure the plate between the left secondary chain tensioner and block is correctly installed. 15. Install both secondary chain tensioners. Tighten bolts to 28 Nm (250 in. lbs.). NOTE: Left and right secondary chain tensioners are not common. 16. Before installing idler sprocket bolt, lubricate washer with oil, and tighten idler sprocket assembly retaining bolt to 34 Nm (25 ft. lbs.). 17. Remove all locking pins from tensioners. CAUTION: After pulling locking pins out of each tensioner, DO NOT manually extend the tensioner(s) ratchet. Doing so will over tension the chains, resulting in noise and/or high timing chain loads. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Timing Chain > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 2949 18. Using Special Tool 6958, Spanner with Adaptor Pins 8346, tighten left (3) and right (4), camshaft sprocket bolts to 122 Nm (90 ft. lbs.). 19. Rotate engine two full revolutions. Verify timing marks are at the follow locations: - primary chain idler sprocket dot is at 12 o'clock - primary chain crankshaft sprocket dot is at 6 o'clock - secondary chain camshaft sprockets "V8" marks are at 12 o'clock 20. Lubricate all three chains with engine oil. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Timing Chain > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 2950 21. After installing all chains, it is recommended that the idler gear (1) end play be checked. The end play must be within 0.10-0.25 mm (0.004-0.010 in.). If not within specification, the idler gear must be replaced. 22. Install timing chain cover See: Timing Cover/Service and Repair/Timing Cover - Installation and crankshaft damper See: Cylinder Block Assembly/Harmonic Balancer - Crankshaft Pulley/Service and Repair/Vibration Damper Installation . 23. Install cylinder head covers See: Cylinder Head Assembly/Valve Cover/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Cylinder Head Cover Installation . NOTE: Before installing threaded plug in right cylinder head, the plug must be coated with sealant to prevent leaks. 24. Coat the large threaded access plug with Mopar(R) Thread Sealant with Teflon , then install into the right cylinder head and tighten to 81 Nm (60 ft. lbs.). 25. Install the oil fill housing. 26. Install access plug in left cylinder head. 27. Install power steering pump See: Steering and Suspension/Steering/Power Steering/Power Steering Pump/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Power Steering Pump - Installation . 28. Install radiator fan shroud. 29. Fill cooling system See: Cooling System/Service and Repair . 30. Connect negative cable to battery. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Timing Chain Tensioner > Component Information > Specifications Timing Chain Tensioner: Specifications Timing Chain Tensioner Hydraulic Tensioner ............................................................................................................................. ............................................ 28 Nm (250 In. Lbs.) Timing chain guide ................................................ ........................................................................................................................... 28 Nm (250 In. Lbs.) Timing chain Tensioner arm ............................................................................................................................................................. 28 Nm (250 In. Lbs.) Timing chain Primary Tensioner ...................................................................................................................................................... 28 Nm (250 In. Lbs.) Timing Drive Idler Sprocket .................................................................................... ............................................................................. 34 Nm (25 Ft.Lb.) Crankshaft Pulley Crankshaft Damper ............................................................................................................................. .............................................. 175 Nm (130 Ft.Lb.) Timing Cover Install cover. Tighten fasteners in sequence as shown to 58 Nm (43 ft. lbs.). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Timing Cover > Component Information > Specifications Timing Cover: Specifications Timing Components Timing Chain Tensioner Hydraulic Tensioner ............................................................................................................................. ............................................ 28 Nm (250 In. Lbs.) Timing chain guide ................................................ ........................................................................................................................... 28 Nm (250 In. Lbs.) Timing chain Tensioner arm ............................................................................................................................................................. 28 Nm (250 In. Lbs.) Timing chain Primary Tensioner ...................................................................................................................................................... 28 Nm (250 In. Lbs.) Timing Drive Idler Sprocket .................................................................................... ............................................................................. 34 Nm (25 Ft.Lb.) Crankshaft Pulley Crankshaft Damper ............................................................................................................................. .............................................. 175 Nm (130 Ft.Lb.) Timing Cover Install cover. Tighten fasteners in sequence as shown to 58 Nm (43 ft. lbs.). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Timing Cover > Component Information > Service and Repair > Timing Cover - Removal Timing Cover: Service and Repair Timing Cover - Removal REMOVAL 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable. 2. Drain cooling system See: Cooling System/Service and Repair . 3. Disconnect both heater hoses at timing cover. 4. Disconnect lower radiator hose at engine. 5. Remove crankshaft damper See: Cylinder Block Assembly/Harmonic Balancer Crankshaft Pulley/Service and Repair/Vibration Damper Removal . 6. Remove accessory drive belt tensioner assembly (1). 7. Remove the generator and A/C compressor. CAUTION: The 4.7L engine uses an RTV sealer instead of a gasket to seal the front cover to the engine block, from the factory. For service, Mopar(R) Grey Engine RTV sealant must be substituted. NOTE: It is not necessary to remove the water pump for timing cover removal. 8. Remove the bolts holding the timing cover to engine block. 9. Remove cover. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Timing Cover > Component Information > Service and Repair > Timing Cover - Removal > Page 2959 Timing Cover: Service and Repair Timing Cover - Installation INSTALLATION CAUTION: Do not use oil based liquids to clean timing cover or block surfaces. Use only rubbing alcohol, along with plastic or wooden scrapers. Use no wire brushes or abrasive wheels or metal scrapers, or damage to surfaces could result. 1. Clean timing chain cover and block surface using rubbing alcohol. CAUTION: The 4.7L can use a special RTV sealer instead of a carrier gasket to seal the timing cover to the engine block, from the factory. For service repairs, Mopar(R) Grey Engine RTV must be used as a substitute, if RTV is present. If the front cover being used has no provisions for the water passage o-rings, then Mopar(R) Grey Engine RTV must be applied around the water passages. 2. Inspect the water passage o-rings, if equipped for any damage, and replace as necessary. 3. Apply Mopar(R) Grey Engine RTV sealer to the front cover following the path above, using a 3 to 4mm thick bead. 4. Install cover. Tighten flange head fasteners in sequence as shown in to 58 Nm (43 ft. lbs.). 5. Install the A/C compressor and generator. 6. Install crankshaft damper See: Cylinder Block Assembly/Harmonic Balancer - Crankshaft Pulley/Service and Repair/Vibration Damper Installation . 7. Install accessory drive belt tensioner assembly. Tighten fastener to 54 Nm (40 ft. lbs.). 8. Install lower radiator hose. 9. Install both heater hoses. 10. Fill cooling system See: Cooling System/Service and Repair . 11. Connect the battery negative cable. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Fuel Pressure > System Information > Specifications Fuel Pressure: Specifications FUEL SYSTEM PRESSURE 58 psi +/- 2 psi Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Fuel Pressure > System Information > Specifications > Page 2964 Fuel Pressure: Testing and Inspection *FUEL PRESSURE LEAK DOWN For a complete wiring diagram Refer to Diagrams/Electrical. Diagnostic Test 1. FUEL PUMP MODULE NOTE: Before continuing visually and physically inspect the fuel delivery system for external leaks or damage. Repair/replace as necessary. WARNING: The fuel system is under a constant pressure (even with the engine off). Before testing or servicing any fuel system hose, fitting or line, the fuel system pressure must be released. Failure to follow these instructions can result in personal injury or death. Turn the ignition off. Install special tool #6539 (5/16") or #6631 (3/8") fuel line adapter. Install the fuel pressure gauge. Start the engine and allow the fuel system to reach maximum pressure. Turn the ignition off. NOTE: Fuel specification is 407 KPa +/- 34 KPa (59 psi +/- 5 psi). Using special tool #C4390, Hose Clamp Pliers, pinch the rubber fuel line between the fuel pressure gauge and the engine. Monitor the fuel pressure gauge for a minimum of 5 minutes. NOTE: The pressure should not fall below 241 KPa (35 psi) Does the fuel pressure drop? Yes - Replace Fuel Pump Module. - Perform the POWERTRAIN VERIFICATION TEST. See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code Tests and Associated Procedures/Verification Tests/Powertrain Verification Test No - Go To 2 2. FUEL INJECTOR(S) WARNING: The fuel system is under a constant pressure (even with the engine off). Before testing or servicing any fuel system hose, fitting or line, the fuel system pressure must be released. Failure to follow these instructions can result in personal injury or death. Remove special tool #C4390. Start the engine and allow the fuel system to reach maximum pressure. Turn the ignition off. NOTE: Fuel specification is 407 KPa +/- 34 KPa (59 psi +/- 5 psi). Move special tool #C4390, Hose Clamp Pliers, from between the fuel pressure gauge and the engine to between the fuel pressure gauge and fuel pump module. Monitor the fuel pressure gauge for a minimum of 5 minutes. NOTE: The pressure should not fall below 241 KPa (35 psi) Does the fuel pressure drop? Yes - Replace the leaking fuel injectors. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Fuel Pressure > System Information > Specifications > Page 2965 - Perform the POWERTRAIN VERIFICATION TEST. See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code Tests and Associated Procedures/Verification Tests/Powertrain Verification Test No - Test Complete. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Idle Speed > System Information > Specifications Idle Speed: Specifications Idle Speed Information Not Supplied by the Manufacturer Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Air Cleaner Housing > Air Filter Element > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Air Filter Element: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL 1. Loosen clamp (1) and disconnect air duct (2) at air cleaner cover (3). 2. Pry over 4 spring clips (5) from housing cover (3). 3. Release housing cover (3) from locating tabs on housing and remove cover. 4. Remove air cleaner element (filter) from housing. 5. Clean inside of housing before replacing element. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Air Cleaner Housing > Air Filter Element > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 2974 Air Filter Element: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION 1. Install filter element into housing. 2. Position housing cover (3) into housing locating tabs. 3. Pry up 4 spring clips (5) and lock cover to housing. 4. Install air duct (2) to air cleaner cover (3) and tighten hose clamp (1) to 3 Nm (30 in. lbs.). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Fuel Filter > Fuel Pressure Release > System Information > Service and Repair Fuel Pressure Release: Service and Repair STANDARD PROCEDURE - FUEL SYSTEM PRESSURE RELEASE Use following procedure if the fuel injector rail is, or is not equipped with a fuel pressure test port. A separate fuel pump relay is no longer used. A circuit within the TIPM (Totally Integrated Power Module) is used to control the electric fuel pump located within the fuel pump module. The TIPM (1) is located in the engine compartment in front of the battery. 1. Remove fuel fill cap. 2. On bottom of vehicle, disconnect fuel pump module electrical connector. This can be accomplished at either of the two connectors (1) or (2). 3. Start and run engine until it stalls. 4. Attempt restarting engine until it will no longer run. 5. Turn ignition key to OFF position. 6. Place a rag or towel below fuel line quick-connect fitting at fuel rail. 7. Disconnect quick-connect fitting at fuel rail. 8. Reconnect fuel pump module electrical connector on bottom of vehicle. 9. One or more Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTC's) may have been stored in PCM memory due to disconnecting fuel pump module circuit. A diagnostic scan tool must be used to erase a DTC. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Firing Order > Component Information > Specifications > Electrical Specifications Firing Order: Electrical Specifications ENGINE FIRING ORDER - 4.7L V-8 4.7L ENGINE DESCRIPTION Fig. 1 The 4.7 liter (287 CID) eight-cylinder engine is an 90° single overhead camshaft engine. The cast iron cylinder block is made up of two different components; the first component is the cylinder bore and upper block, the second component is the bedplate that comprises the lower portion of the cylinder block and houses the lower half of the crankshaft main bearings. The cylinders are numbered from front to rear with the left bank being numbered 1,3,5 and 7, and the right bank being numbered 2,4,6 and 8. The firing order is 1-8-4-3-6-5-7-2. The engine serial number is located at the Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Firing Order > Component Information > Specifications > Electrical Specifications > Page 2983 right front side of the engine block (Fig. 1). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Firing Order > Component Information > Specifications > Electrical Specifications > Page 2984 Firing Order: Mechanical Specifications ENGINE FIRING ORDER - 4.7L V-8 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Ignition Timing > System Information > Specifications Ignition Timing: Specifications IGNITION TIMING Ignition timing is not adjustable on any engine. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Spark Plug > Component Information > Specifications Spark Plug: Specifications SPARK PLUGS Torque Not Supplied by Manufacturer Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Spark Plug > Component Information > Service and Repair > Spark Plug - Removal Spark Plug: Service and Repair Spark Plug - Removal REMOVAL - 4.7L V-8 CAUTION: This engine uses TWO DIFFERENT types of spark plugs. A total of 16 plugs is used. The plugs are mounted in two rows (banks). The upper row (5) is used on the intake valve side of the cylinder head. The lower row (6) is used on the exhaust valve side of the cylinder head. The upper row (5) uses Bosch Nickel Yttrium plugs #05149050AB. The lower row (6) uses Bosch Iridium plugs #05149888AA. DO NOT INTERCHANGE THESE PLUGS. CAUTION: Do not attempt to clean any of the spark plugs. Replace only. 1. Remove necessary air filter tubing and air intake components at top of engine and at throttle body. 2. To remove the upper row of plugs (5), each individual ignition coil (2) must first be removed. Prior to removing ignition coil, spray compressed air around coil base at cylinder head. 3. Prior to removing spark plug, spray compressed air into cylinder head opening. This will help prevent foreign material from entering combustion chamber. CAUTION: Due to tight clearances between UPPER row of plugs (5) and cylinder head, a conventional deep, thick-wall spark plug socket will not fit. Use a deep, THIN-WALL 5/8" spark plug socket for plug removal and installation. 4. Inspect spark plug condition. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Spark Plug > Component Information > Service and Repair > Spark Plug - Removal > Page 2993 Spark Plug: Service and Repair Spark Plug - Installation INSTALLATION - 4.7L V-8 CAUTION: This engine uses TWO DIFFERENT types of spark plugs. A total of 16 plugs is used. The plugs are mounted in two rows (banks). The upper row (5) is used on the intake valve side of the cylinder head. The lower row (6) is used on the exhaust valve side of the cylinder head. The upper row (5) uses Bosch Nickel Yttrium plugs #05149050AB. The lower row (6) uses Bosch Iridium plugs #05149888AA. DO NOT INTERCHANGE THESE PLUGS. CAUTION: Never use a motorized wire wheel brush to clean spark plugs. Metallic deposits will remain on spark plug insulator and will cause plug misfire. CAUTION: Do not attempt to clean any of the spark plugs. Replace only. 1. To aid in coil installation, apply silicone based grease such as Mopar(R) Dielectric Grease # J8126688 into spark plug end of rubber boots (4) and (7). Also apply this grease to the tops of spark plugs (5) and (6). 2. Check and adjust spark plug gap with a gap gauging tool (1). Two different gaps are used. 3. Start the spark plug into the cylinder head by hand to avoid cross threading. Special care should be taken when installing spark plugs into the cylinder head spark plug wells. Be sure the plugs do not drop into the plug wells as electrodes can be damaged. CAUTION: Due to tight clearances between upper row of plugs (5) and cylinder head, a conventional deep, thick-wall spark plug socket will not fit. Use a deep, THIN-WALL 5/8" spark plug socket for plug removal and installation. Always tighten spark plugs to the specified torque. Certain engines use torque sensitive spark plugs. It is a good practice to always tighten spark plugs to Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Spark Plug > Component Information > Service and Repair > Spark Plug - Removal > Page 2994 a specific torque. Over tightening can cause distortion resulting in a change in the spark plug gap, or a cracked porcelain insulator. 4. Install ignition coil(s). 5. Install necessary air filter tubing and air intake components to top of engine and to throttle body. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Compression Check > System Information > Specifications Compression Check: Specifications Compression Specifications Compression Ratio .............................................................................................................................. ......................................................................... 9.0 : 1 Compression Pressure ........................................................................................................................ ............................................................... Not available Max Variation Between Cylinders ........................................................................................................ .......................................................................... 25% Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Water Pump > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Water Pump: Description and Operation Description Water Pump WATER PUMP A centrifugal water pump circulates coolant through the water jackets, passages, intake manifold, radiator core, cooling system hoses and heater core. The pump is driven from the engine crankshaft by a single serpentine drive belt. The water pump impeller is pressed onto the rear of a shaft that rotates in bearings pressed into the housing. The housing has two small holes to allow seepage to escape. The water pump seals are lubricated by the antifreeze in the coolant mixture. No additional lubrication is necessary. Water Pump Bypass WATER PUMP BYPASS The 3.7L and 4.7L engine uses an internal water/coolant bypass system. The design uses galleries in the timing chain cover to circulate coolant during Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Water Pump > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 3002 engine warm-up preventing the coolant from flowing through the radiator. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Water Pump > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 3003 Water Pump: Description and Operation Operation Water Pump WATER PUMP A centrifugal water pump circulates coolant through the water jackets, passages, intake manifold, radiator core, cooling system hoses and heater core, this coolant absorbs the heat generated when the engine is running. The pump is driven by the engine crankshaft via a drive belt. Water Pump Bypass - 3.7L/4.7L WATER PUMP BYPASS - 3.7L/4.7L When the thermostat is in the closed position the bypass gallery is not obstructed allowing 100% flow. When the thermostat is in the open position the pill partially covers the bypass hole, reducing the amount of bypass flow. This design allows the coolant to reach operating temperature quickly when cold, while adding extra cooling during normal temperature operation. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Water Pump > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 3004 Water Pump: Testing and Inspection WATER PUMP A quick test to determine if pump is working is to check if heater warms properly. A defective water pump will not be able to circulate heated coolant through the long heater hose to the heater core. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Water Pump > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures Water Pump: Procedures Cleaning CLEANING Clean the gasket mating surface. Use caution not to damage the gasket sealing surface. Inspection INSPECTION Inspect the water pump assembly for cracks in the housing, water leaks from shaft seal, worn bearing or impeller rubbing either the pump body or timing chain case/cover. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Water Pump > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 3007 Water Pump: Removal and Replacement Water Pump - Removal 3.7L/4.7L ENGINE The water pump on 3.7L/4.7L engines is bolted directly to the engine timing chain case cover. 1. Disconnect the negative battery cable. 2. Drain cooling system See: Cooling System/Service and Repair . 3. Remove fan/viscous fan drive assembly from water pump See: Cooling System/Radiator Cooling Fan/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Radiator Fan - Removal . Do not attempt to remove fan/viscous fan drive assembly from vehicle at this time. 4. If the water pump is being replaced, do not unbolt the fan blade assembly from the thermal viscous fan drive. 5. Remove the radiator fan See: Cooling System/Radiator Cooling Fan/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Radiator Fan - Removal . 6. Remove accessory drive belt See: Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories/Drive Belt/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Accessory Drive Belt - Removal . 7. Remove the lower radiator hose clamp and remove the lower hose at the water pump. 8. Remove the water pump mounting bolts. CAUTION: Do not pry water pump at timing chain case/cover. The machined surfaces may be damaged resulting in leaks. 9. Remove the water pump and gasket. Discard gasket. Water Pump - Installation Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Water Pump > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 3008 3.7L/4.7L ENGINE 1. Clean the gasket mating surfaces. 2. Using a new gasket, position water pump and install the mounting bolts. Tighten the water pump mounting bolts to 58 Nm (43 ft. lbs.). 3. Spin the water pump to be sure that the pump impeller does not rub against the timing chain case/cover. 4. Connect the radiator lower hose to the water pump. 5. Install accessory drive belt tensioner See: Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories/Drive Belt/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Accessory Drive Belt - Installation 6. Install the drive belt See: Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories/Drive Belt/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Accessory Drive Belt - Installation . 7. Install the radiator fan. 8. Fill cooling system See: Cooling System/Service and Repair . 9. Connect the negative battery cable. 10. Start and warm the engine. Check for leaks. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Coolant > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Maintenance - Fluid Flushing Information Coolant: Technical Service Bulletins Maintenance - Fluid Flushing Information NUMBER: 26-001-09 GROUP: Miscellaneous DATE: September 24, 2009 THIS BULLETIN SUPERSEDES TECHNICAL SERVICE BULLETIN 26-003-07, DATED MARCH 30, 2007, WHICH SHOULD BE REMOVED FROM YOUR FILES. THIS IS A COMPLETE REVISION AND NO ASTERISKS HAVE BEEN USED TO HIGHLIGHT REVISIONS. SUBJECT: Fluid Flushing Requirements MODELS: 2005 - 2008 (CS) Pacifica 2006 - 2009 (D1) Ram Truck (3500 Pick Up) 2010 (D2) Ram Truck (3500 Pick Up) 2007 - 2010 (DC) Ram Truck (3500 Chassis Cab) 2005 - 2009 (DH) Ram Truck (1500/2500 Pick Up) 2010 (DJ) Ram Truck (2500 Pick Up) 2005 - 2008 (DR) Ram Truck (1500/2500 Pick Up) 2009 - 2010 (DS) Ram Truck (1500) 2005 - 2009 (HB) Durango 2007 - 2009 (HG) Aspen 2009 - 2010 (JC) Journey 2007 - 2010 (JK) Wrangler 2005 - 2006 (JR) Sebring Sedan & Convertible/Stratus Sedan 2007 - 2010 (JS) Avenger/Sebring 2008 - 2010 (KK) Liberty 2007 - 2010 (KA) Nitro 2005 - 2007 (KJ) Liberty 2009 - 2010 (LC) Challenger 2005 - 2010 (LE) 300C/300C Touring (International Markets) 2005 - 2010 (LX) 300/Magnum/Charger 2007 - 2010 (MK) Compass/Patriot 2005 - 2010 (ND) Dakota 2005 - 2006 (PL) Neon 2007 - 2010 (PM) Caliber 2005 - 2010 (PT) Chrysler PT Cruiser Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Coolant > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Maintenance - Fluid Flushing Information > Page 3014 2005 - 2007 (RG) Chrysler Voyager (International Markets) 2005 - 2007 (RS) Town & Country/Caravan/Voyager 2009 - 2010 (RT) Town & Country/Grand Caravan 2005 - 2006 (TJ) Wrangler 2005 - 2006 (VA) Sprinter 2007 - 2010 (VB) Sprinter 2005 - 2010 (WH) Grand Cherokee (International Markets) 2005 - 2010 (WK) Grand Cherokee 2006 - 2010 (XH) Commander (International Markets) 2006 - 2010 (XK) Commander 2005 - 2010 (ZB) Viper 2005 - 2007 (ZH) Crossfire DISCUSSION: Chrysler Group vehicle fluid systems do NOT require regular flushing. These systems include: engine oil, transmission oil, axle lube, brake fluid, power steering fluid, and refrigerant. The only exception to this requirement are published in the vehicle maintenance schedules, e.g. engine coolant. Exceptions to this recommendation include only those instances where a failure has occurred and/or the system has become compromised, contaminated or overheated beyond the normal operating range. Chrysler Group does NOT recommend aftermarket chemicals to flush the engine, transmission, brake or steering systems. Chemicals contained in these products can damage the system elastomeric components, and contaminate the component fluid, leading to loss of system/component durability and service life. When necessary, only the original approved system fluid should be used to flush these components using teamPSE(R) approved equipment. If the engine coolant contains a considerable amount of sediment, clean and flush with Mopar Cooling System Flush, p/n 04856977, or equivalent. Follow with a thorough rinsing to remove all deposits and chemicals. Refill with a minimum of a 50% mixture of the specified coolant and distilled water. POLICY: Information Only Disclaimer: This bulletin is supplied as technical information only and is not an authorization for repair. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Coolant > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications Coolant: Capacity Specifications Coolant Capacity ................................................................................................................................. ............................................................. 17 qts. (16 L) Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Coolant > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications > Page 3017 Coolant: Fluid Type Specifications Mopar Antifreeze/Coolant 5 Year/100,000 Mile Formula HOAT (Hybrid Organic Additive Technology) or equivalent. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Coolant > Component Information > Description and Operation > Engine Coolant Coolant: Description and Operation Engine Coolant ENGINE COOLANT WARNING: Antifreeze is an ethylene-glycol base coolant and is harmful if swallowed or inhaled. If swallowed, drink two glasses of water and induce vomiting. If inhaled, move to fresh air area. Seek medical attention immediately. Do not store in open or unmarked containers. Wash skin and clothing thoroughly after coming in contact with ethylene-glycol. Keep out of reach of children. Dispose of glycol base coolant properly, contact your dealer or government agency for location of collection center in your area. Do not open a cooling system when the engine is at operating temperature or hot under pressure, personal injury can result. Avoid radiator cooling fan when engine compartment related service is performed, personal injury can result. CAUTION: Use of Propylene-Glycol based coolants is not recommended, as they provide less freeze protection and less corrosion protection. The cooling system is designed around the coolant. The coolant must accept heat from engine metal, in the cylinder head area near the exhaust valves and engine block. Then coolant carries the heat to the radiator where the tube/fin radiator can transfer the heat to the air. The use of aluminum cylinder blocks, cylinder heads, and water pumps requires special corrosion protection. Mopar(R) Antifreeze/Coolant, 5 Year/100,000 Mile Formula (MS-9769), or the equivalent ethylene-glycol base coolant with organic corrosion inhibitors (called HOAT, for Hybrid Organic Additive Technology) is recommended. This coolant offers the best engine cooling without corrosion when mixed with 50% ethylene-glycol and 50% distilled water to obtain a freeze point of -37°C (-35°F). If it loses color or becomes contaminated, drain, flush, and replace with fresh properly mixed coolant solution. CAUTION: Mopar(R) Antifreeze/Coolant, 5 Year/100,000 Mile Formula (MS-9769) may not be mixed with any other type of antifreeze. Mixing of coolants other than specified (non-HOAT or other HOAT) may result in engine damage that may not be covered under the new vehicle warranty, and decreased corrosion protection. COOLANT PERFORMANCE The required ethylene-glycol and water mixture depends upon climate and vehicle operating conditions. The coolant performance of various mixtures follows: Pure Water- Water can absorb more heat than a mixture of water and ethylene-glycol. This is for purpose of heat transfer only. Water also freezes at a higher temperature and allows corrosion. 100 percent Ethylene-Glycol - The corrosion inhibiting additives in ethylene-glycol need the presence of water to dissolve. Without water, additives form deposits in system. These act as insulation causing temperature to rise to as high as 149°C (300°F). This temperature is hot enough to melt plastic. The increased temperature can result in sever engine damage. In addition, 100 percent ethylene-glycol freezes at -22°C (-8°F). 50/50 Ethylene-Glycol and Water - Is the recommended mixture, it provides protection against freezing to -37°C (-34°F). The antifreeze concentration must always be a minimum of 44 percent, year-round in all climates. If percentage is lower, engine parts may be eroded by cavitation. Maximum protection against freezing is provided with a 68 percent antifreeze concentration, which prevents freezing down to -67.7°C (-90°F). A higher percentage will freeze at a warmer temperature. Also, a higher percentage of antifreeze can cause the engine to overheat because specific heat of antifreeze is lower than that of water. CAUTION: Richer antifreeze mixtures cannot be measured with normal field equipment and can cause problems associated with 100 percent ethylene-glycol. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Coolant > Component Information > Description and Operation > Engine Coolant > Page 3020 Coolant: Description and Operation Coolant Description HOAT COOLANT WARNING: Antifreeze is an ethylene-glycol base coolant and is harmful if swallowed or inhaled. If swallowed, drink two glasses of water and induce vomiting. If inhaled, move to fresh air area. Seek medical attention immediately. Do not store in open or unmarked containers. Wash skin and clothing thoroughly after coming in contact with ethylene-glycol. Keep out of reach of children. Dispose of glycol based coolant properly, contact your dealer or government agency for location of collection center in your area. Do not open a cooling system when the engine is at operating temperature or hot under pressure, personal injury can result. Avoid radiator cooling fan when engine compartment related service is performed, personal injury can result. CAUTION: Use of Propylene-Glycol based coolants is not recommended, as they provide less freeze protection and less corrosion protection. The cooling system is designed around the coolant. The coolant must accept heat from engine metal, in the cylinder head area near the exhaust valves and engine block. Then coolant carries the heat to the radiator where the tube/fin radiator can transfer the heat to the air. The use of aluminum cylinder blocks, cylinder heads, and water pumps requires special corrosion protection. Mopar(R) Antifreeze/Coolant, 5 Year/100,000 Mile Formula (MS-9769), or the equivalent ethylene-glycol base coolant with organic corrosion inhibitors (called HOAT, for Hybrid Organic Additive Technology) is recommended. This coolant offers the best engine cooling without corrosion when mixed with 50% ethylene-glycol and 50% distilled water to obtain a freeze point of -37°C (-35°F). If it loses color or becomes contaminated, drain, flush, and replace with fresh properly mixed coolant solution. CAUTION: Mopar(R) Antifreeze/Coolant, 5 Year/100,000 Mile Formula (MS-9769) may not be mixed with any other type of antifreeze. Mixing of coolants other than specified (non-HOAT or other HOAT) may result in engine damage that may not be covered under the new vehicle warranty, and decreased corrosion protection. COOLANT PERFORMANCE The required ethylene-glycol and water mixture depends upon climate and vehicle operating conditions. The coolant performance of various mixtures follows: Pure Water- Water can absorb more heat than a mixture of water and ethylene-glycol. This is for purpose of heat transfer only. Water also freezes at a higher temperature and allows corrosion. 100 percent Ethylene-Glycol - The corrosion inhibiting additives in ethylene-glycol need the presence of water to dissolve. Without water, additives form deposits in system. These act as insulation causing temperature to rise to as high as 149°C (300°F). This temperature is hot enough to melt plastic. The increased temperature can result in severe engine damage. In addition, 100 percent ethylene-glycol freezes at -22°C (-8°F). 50/50 Ethylene-Glycol and Water - Is the recommended mixture, it provides protection against freezing to -37°C (-34°F). The antifreeze concentration must always be a minimum of 44 percent, year-round in all climates. If percentage is lower, engine parts may be eroded by cavitation. Maximum protection against freezing is provided with a 68 percent antifreeze concentration, which prevents freezing down to -67.7°C (-90°F). A higher percentage will freeze at a warmer temperature. Also, a higher percentage of antifreeze can cause the engine to overheat because specific heat of antifreeze is lower than that of water. CAUTION: Richer antifreeze mixtures cannot be measured with normal field equipment and can cause problems associated with 100 percent ethylene-glycol. Operation OPERATION Coolant flows through the engine block, cylinder head, absorbing the heat from the engine, then flows to the radiator where the cooling fins in the radiator transfers the heat from the coolant to the atmosphere. On the 6.7L diesel engine, coolant also flows through the EGR cooler and turbocharger actuator. During cold weather the ethylene-glycol or propylene-glycol coolant prevents water present in the cooling system from freezing within temperatures indicated by mixture ratio of coolant to water. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Coolant > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 3021 Coolant: Testing and Inspection COOLANT CONCENTRATION TESTING Coolant concentration should be checked when any additional coolant was added to system or after a coolant drain, flush and refill. The coolant mixture offers optimum engine cooling and protection against corrosion when mixed to a freeze point of -37°C (-34°F) to -46°C (-50°F). The use of a hydrometer or Tool 8266, refractometer can be used to test coolant concentration. A hydrometer will test the amount of glycol in a mixture by measuring the specific gravity of the mixture. The higher the concentration of ethylene glycol, the larger the number of balls that will float, and higher the freeze protection (up to a maximum of 60% by volume glycol). A Refractometer Tool 8286 will test the amount of glycol in a coolant mixture by measuring the amount a beam of light bends as it passes through the fluid. Some coolant manufactures use other types of glycols into their coolant formulations. Propylene glycol is the most common new coolant. However, propylene glycol based coolants do not provide the same freezing protection and corrosion protection and are not recommended. CAUTION: Do not mix types of coolant - corrosion protection will be severely reduced. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Coolant Reservoir > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Coolant Reservoir: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The coolant reserve/overflow tank is mounted on top of the fan shroud, and is made of high temperature plastic. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Coolant Reservoir > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 3026 Coolant Reservoir: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The coolant reserve/overflow system works in conjunction with the radiator pressure cap. It utilizes thermal expansion and contraction of coolant to keep coolant free of trapped air. It provides a volume for expansion and contraction of coolant. It also provides a convenient and safe method for checking coolant level and adjusting level at atmospheric pressure. This is done without removing the radiator pressure cap. The system also provides some reserve coolant to the radiator to cover minor leaks and evaporation or boiling losses. As the engine cools, a vacuum is formed in the cooling system of both the radiator and engine. Coolant will then be drawn from the coolant tank and returned to a proper level in the radiator. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Coolant Reservoir > Component Information > Service and Repair > Coolant Recovery Container - Removal Coolant Reservoir: Service and Repair Coolant Recovery Container - Removal 3.7L/4.7L/5.7L ENGINE 1. Disconnect washer pump electrical connector. 2. Remove recovery hose (3) from radiator (4). 3. Remove the coolant container to fan shroud mounting bolts (1). 4. Tilt the container (2) backward towards the engine to disengage the mounting pin locking features and lift the container away from the fan shroud (5). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Coolant Reservoir > Component Information > Service and Repair > Coolant Recovery Container - Removal > Page 3029 Coolant Reservoir: Service and Repair Coolant Recovery Container - Installation 3.7L/4.7L/5.7L ENGINE 1. Align the coolant container mounting pins into the slots on the fan shroud (5) and push the container onto the fan shroud. 2. Secure the container to the fan shroud with the bolts (1). Tighten to 8.5 Nm (75 in. lbs). NOTE: Ensure that the locking feature on the mounting pins has engaged. 3. Connect the recovery hose (3) to the radiator (4). 4. Connect washer pump electrical connector. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Radiator Cooling Fan Motor: Diagram Information and Instructions Warnings WARNINGS - GENERAL WARNINGS provide information to prevent personal injury and vehicle damage. Below is a list of general warnings that should be followed any time a vehicle is being serviced. WARNING: Always wear safety glasses for eye protection. WARNING: Use safety stands anytime a procedure requires being under a vehicle. WARNING: Be sure that the ignition switch always is in the off position, unless the procedure requires it to be on. WARNING: Set the parking brake when working on any vehicle. An automatic transmission should be in park. A manual transmission should be in neutral. WARNING: Operate the engine only in a well-ventilated area. WARNING: Keep away from moving parts when the engine is running, especially the fan and belts. WARNING: To prevent serious burns, avoid contact with hot parts such as the radiator, exhaust manifold(s), tail pipe, catalytic converter and muffler. WARNING: Do not allow flame or sparks near the battery. Gases are always present in and around the battery. WARNING: Always remove rings, watches, loose hanging jewelry and avoid loose clothing. How to Use Wiring Diagrams DESCRIPTION - HOW TO USE WIRING DIAGRAMS DaimlerChrysler Corporation wiring diagrams are designed to provide information regarding the vehicles wiring content. In order to effectively use the wiring diagrams to diagnose and repair DaimlerChrysler Corporation vehicles, it is important to understand all of their features and characteristics. Diagrams are arranged such that the power (B+) side of the circuit is placed near the top of the page, and the ground (B-) side of the circuit is placed near the bottom of the page. All switches, components, and modules are shown in the at rest position with the doors closed and the key removed from the ignition. Components are shown two ways. A solid line around a component indicates that the component is complete. A dashed line around the component indicates that the component is being shown is not complete. Incomplete components have a reference number to indicate the page where the component is shown complete. It is important to realize that no attempt is made on the diagrams to represent components and wiring as they appear on the vehicle. For example, a short piece of wire is treated the same as a long one. In addition, switches and other components are shown as simply as possible, with regard to function only. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3035 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3036 SYMBOLS International symbols are used throughout the wiring diagrams. These symbols are consistent with those being used around the world. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3037 TERMINOLOGY This is a list of terms and definitions used in the wiring diagrams. LHD - Left Hand Drive Vehicles RHD - Right Hand Drive Vehicles ATX - Automatic Transmissions-Front Wheel Drive MTX Manual Transmissions-Front Wheel Drive Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3038 AT - Automatic Transmissions-Rear Wheel Drive MT - Manual Transmissions-Rear Wheel Drive SOHC - Single Over Head Cam Engine DOHC - Double Over Head Cam Engine Export - Vehicles Built For Sale In Markets Other Than North America Except Export - Vehicles Built For Sale In North America Circuit Functions DESCRIPTION - CIRCUIT FUNCTIONS All circuits in the diagrams use an alpha/numeric code to identify the wire and it's function. To identify which circuit code applies to a system, refer to the Circuit Identification Code Chart. This chart shows the main circuits only and does not show the secondary codes that may apply to some models. Circuit Information DESCRIPTION - CIRCUIT INFORMATION Each wire shown in the diagrams contains a code which identifies the main circuit, a specific part of the main circuit, gage of wire, and color. An example would be A 2 18 LB/YL. This is a Battery Feed circuit, level two, eighteen gauge, light blue with a yellow tracer. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3039 Connector, Ground and Splice Information DESCRIPTION - CONNECTOR, GROUND AND SPLICE INFORMATION CAUTION: Not all connectors are serviced. Some connectors are serviced only with a harness. A typical example might be the Supplemental Restraint System connectors. Always check parts availability before attempting a repair. IDENTIFICATION In-line connectors are identified by a number, as follows: - In-line connectors located in the engine compartment are C100 series numbers. - In-line connectors located in the instrument panel area are C200 series numbers. - In-line connectors located in the body are C300 series numbers. - Jumper harness connectors are C400 series numbers. - Grounds and ground connectors are identified with a "G" and follow the same series numbering as the in-line connectors. - Splices are identified with an "S" and follow the same series numbering as the in-line connectors. In addition, S001-S099 numbers are located in the engine compartment. - Component connectors are identified by the component name instead of a number. Multiple connectors on a component use a C1, C2, etc. identifier. LOCATIONS Vehicle/Locations contains the master connector/ground/splice location index charts with hyperlinks to the applicable location illustrations. The illustrations contain the connector name (or number)/ground number/splice number and component identification. The abbreviation T/O is used in the component location section to indicate a point in which the wiring harness branches out to a component. The abbreviation N/S means Not Shown in the illustrations Section Identification and Information DESCRIPTION - SECTION IDENTIFICATION AND INFORMATION The wiring diagrams are grouped into individual sections. If a component is most likely found in a particular group, it will be shown complete (all wires, Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3040 connectors, and pins) within that group. For example, the Auto Shutdown Relay is most likely to be found in Powertrain Management, so it is shown there complete. It can, however, be shown partially in another group if it contains some associated wiring. Splice diagrams show the entire splice and provide references to other sections the splices serves. Splice Information only contains splice diagrams that are not shown in their entirety somewhere else in the wiring diagrams. Connector Pin-Outs shows each connector and the circuits involved with that connector. The connectors are identified using the name/number on the diagram pages. Removal REMOVAL 1. Disconnect battery. 2. Release Connector Lock (2). 3. Disconnect the connector (3) being repaired from its mating half/component. 4. Remove the dress cover (if applicable) (1). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3041 5. Release the Secondary Terminal Lock, if required (1). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3042 6. Position the connector locking finger away from the terminal using the proper special tool. Pull on the wire to remove the terminal from the connector. Installation Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3043 INSTALLATION 1. Insert the removed terminal in the same cavity on the repair connector. 2. Repeat steps for each terminal in the connector, being sure that all wires are inserted into the proper cavities. For additional connector pin-out identification, refer to the wiring diagrams. 3. When the connector is re-assembled, the secondary terminal lock must be placed in the locked position to prevent terminal push out. 4. Replace dress cover (if applicable). 5. Connect connector to its mating half/component. 6. Connect battery and test all affected systems. Removal REMOVAL 1. Disconnect the battery. 2. Locate the diode in the harness, and remove the protective covering. 3. Remove the diode from the harness, pay attention to the current flow direction (1) (2) (3). Installation INSTALLATION 1. Remove the insulation from the wires in the harness. Only remove enough insulation to solder in the new diode. 2. Install the new diode in the harness, making sure current flow is correct. If necessary, refer to the appropriate wiring diagram for current flow. 3. Solder the connection together using rosin core type solder only. Do not use acid core solder. 4. Tape the diode to the harness using electrical tape. Make sure the diode is completely sealed from the elements. 5. Re-connect the battery and test affected systems. Removal REMOVAL 1. Follow steps for removing terminals described in the connector removal section. 2. Cut the wire 6 inches from the back of the connector. Installation INSTALLATION 1. Select a wire from the terminal repair kit that best matches the color and gage of the wire being repaired. 2. Cut the repair wire to the proper length and remove one-half (1/2) inch of insulation. 3. Splice the repair wire to the wire harness (see wire splicing procedure). See: Service Procedures/Wire Splicing 4. Insert the repaired wire into the connector. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3044 5. Install the connector locking wedge, if required, and reconnect the connector to its mating half/component. 6. Re-tape the wire harness starting at 1-1/2 inches behind the connector and 2 inches past the repair. 7. Connect battery and test all affected systems. Wire Splicing STANDARD PROCEDURE - WIRE SPLICING When splicing a wire, it is important that the correct gage be used as shown in the wiring diagrams. 1. Remove one-half (1/2) inch of insulation from each wire that needs to be spliced. 2. Place a piece of adhesive lined heat shrink tubing on one side of the wire. Make sure the tubing will be long enough to cover and seal the entire repair area. 3. Place the strands of wire overlapping each other inside of the splice clip (1). 4. Using crimping tool (1), Mopar p/n 05019912AA, crimp the splice clip and wires together. 5. Solder (3) the connection (2) together using rosin core type solder (1) only. CAUTION: DO NOT USE ACID CORE SOLDER. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3045 6. Center the heat shrink tubing (2) over the joint and heat using a heat gun. Heat the joint until the tubing is tightly sealed and sealant (1) comes out of both ends of the tubing. Special Tools WIRING/TERMINAL PROBING TOOL PACKAGE 6807 TERMINAL PICK TOOL SET 6680 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3046 TERMINAL REMOVING TOOLS 6932 AND 8638 TERMINAL REMOVING TOOL 6934 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3047 Radiator Cooling Fan Motor: Diagnostic Aids Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) Sensitive Devices STANDARD PROCEDURE - ELECTROSTATIC DISCHARGE (ESD) SENSITIVE DEVICES All ESD sensitive components are solid state and a symbol is used to indicate this. When handling any component with this symbol, comply with the following procedures to reduce the possibility of electrostatic charge build up on the body and inadvertent discharge into the component. If it is not known whether the part is ESD sensitive, assume that it is. 1. Always touch a known good ground before handling the part. This should be repeated while handling the part and more frequently after sliding across a seat, sitting down from a standing position, or walking a distance. 2. Avoid touching electrical terminals of the part, unless instructed to do so by a written procedure. 3. When using a voltmeter, be sure to connect the ground lead first. 4. Do not remove the part from it's protective packing until it is time to install the part. 5. Before removing the part from it's package, ground the package to a known good ground on the vehicle. Testing Of Voltage Potential STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING OF VOLTAGE POTENTIAL 1. Connect the ground lead of a voltmeter to a known good ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the voltmeter to the selected test point. The vehicle ignition may need to be turned ON to check voltage. Refer to the appropriate test procedure. Testing For Continuity Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3048 STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING FOR CONTINUITY 1. Remove the fuse (1) for the circuit being checked or, disconnect the battery. 2. Connect one lead of the ohmmeter to one side of the circuit being tested 3. Connect the other lead to the other end of the circuit being tested. Low or no resistance means good continuity. Testing For A Short To Ground STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING FOR A SHORT TO GROUND 1. Remove the fuse and disconnect all items involved with the fuse. 2. Connect a test light or a voltmeter across the terminals of the fuse. 3. Starting at the fuse block, wiggle the wiring harness about six to eight inches apart and watch the voltmeter/test lamp. 4. If the voltmeter registers voltage or the test lamp glows, there is a short to ground in that general area of the wiring harness. Testing For A Short To Ground On Fuses Powering Several Loads STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING FOR A SHORT TO GROUND ON FUSES POWERING SEVERAL LOADS 1. Refer to the wiring diagrams and disconnect or isolate all items on the suspected fused circuits. 2. Replace the blown fuse. 3. Supply power to the fuse by turning ON the ignition switch or re-connecting the battery. 4. Start connecting or energizing the items in the fuse circuit one at a time. When the fuse blows the circuit with the short to ground has been isolated. Testing For A Voltage Drop STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING FOR A VOLTAGE DROP Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3049 1. Connect the positive lead of the voltmeter to the side of the circuit closest to the battery. 2. Connect the other lead of the voltmeter to the other side of the switch, component or circuit. 3. Operate the item. 4. The voltmeter will show the difference in voltage between the two points. Troubleshooting Wiring Problems DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING - WIRING HARNESS TROUBLESHOOTING TOOLS When diagnosing a problem in an electrical circuit there are several common tools necessary. These tools are listed and explained below. - Jumper Wire - This is a test wire used to connect two points of a circuit. It can be used to bypass an open in a circuit. WARNING: Never use a jumper wire across a load, such as a motor, connected between a battery feed and ground. - Voltmeter - Used to check for voltage on a circuit. Always connect the black lead to a known good ground and the red lead to the positive side of the circuit. CAUTION: Most of the electrical components used in today's vehicles are Solid State. When checking voltages in these circuits, use a meter with a 10 - megohm or greater impedance rating. - Ohmmeter - Used to check the resistance between two points of a circuit. Low or no resistance in a circuit means good continuity. CAUTION: Most of the electrical components used in today's vehicles are Solid State. When checking resistance in these circuits use a meter with a 10 - megohm or greater impedance rating. In addition, make sure the power is disconnected from the circuit. Circuits that are powered up by the vehicle's electrical system can cause damage to the equipment and provide false readings. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3050 - Probing Tools - These tools are used for probing terminals in connectors. Select the proper size tool from Special Tool Package 6807, and insert the probing end (2) into the terminal being tested. Use the other end of the tool (1) to insert the meter probe. INTERMITTENT AND POOR CONNECTIONS Most intermittent electrical problems are caused by faulty electrical connections or wiring. It is also possible for a sticking component or relay to cause a problem. Before condemning a component or wiring assembly, check the following items. - Connectors are fully seated - Spread terminals, or terminal push out - Terminals in the wiring assembly are fully seated into the connector/component and locked into position - Dirt or corrosion on the terminals. Any amount of corrosion or dirt could cause an intermittent problem - Damaged connector/component casing exposing the item to dirt or moisture - Wire insulation that has rubbed through causing a short to ground - Some or all of the wiring strands broken inside of the insulation - Wiring broken inside of the insulation TROUBLESHOOTING WIRING PROBLEMS When troubleshooting wiring problems there are six steps which can aid in the procedure. The steps are listed and explained below. Always check for non-factory items added to the vehicle before doing any diagnosis. If the vehicle is equipped with these items, disconnect them to verify these add-on items are not the cause of the problem. 1. Verify the problem. 2. Verify any related symptoms. Do this by performing operational checks on components that are in the same circuit. Refer to the wiring diagrams. 3. Analyze the symptoms. Use the wiring diagrams to determine what the circuit is doing, where the problem most likely is occurring and where the diagnosis will continue. 4. Isolate the problem area. 5. Repair the problem area. 6. Verify the proper operation. For this step, check for proper operation of all items on the repaired circuit. Refer to the wiring diagrams. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Locations Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Locations Component ID: 410 Component : SENSOR-ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE Connector: Name : SENSOR-ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (DIESEL) A K200 18BR/YL SENSOR GROUND A K914 18BK/WT SENSOR GROUND B K2 18VT/OR ECT SIGNAL Component Location - 8 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Locations > Page 3055 Component Location - 11 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Locations > Page 3056 Component Location - 13 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Locations > Page 3057 Connector: Name : SENSOR-ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (GAS) Pin Circuit Description 1 K2 20VT/OR ECT SIGNAL 2 K900 20DB/DG SENSOR GROUND Component Location - 8 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Locations > Page 3058 Component Location - 11 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Locations > Page 3059 Component Location - 13 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Locations > Page 3060 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Locations > Page 3061 Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Diagrams Component ID: 410 Component : SENSOR-ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE Connector: Name : SENSOR-ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (DIESEL) A K200 18BR/YL SENSOR GROUND A K914 18BK/WT SENSOR GROUND B K2 18VT/OR ECT SIGNAL Component Location - 8 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Locations > Page 3062 Component Location - 11 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Locations > Page 3063 Component Location - 13 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Locations > Page 3064 Connector: Name : SENSOR-ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (GAS) Pin Circuit Description 1 K2 20VT/OR ECT SIGNAL 2 K900 20DB/DG SENSOR GROUND Component Location - 8 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Locations > Page 3065 Component Location - 11 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Locations > Page 3066 Component Location - 13 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Locations > Page 3067 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Heater Core > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Heater Core: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The heater core (1) is a heat exchanger made of rows of tubes and fins. The heater core is positioned within the HVAC housing through the panel (2) located at the front of the HVAC housing. The heater core tubes (3) are attached to the front of the heater core and are secured to the HVAC housing by a bracket. The heater core can be serviced by removing the HVAC housing assembly from the vehicle. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Heater Core > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 3072 Heater Core: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION Engine coolant is circulated through the heater hoses to the heater core at all times. As the coolant flows through the heater core, heat is removed from the engine and is transferred to the heater core tubes and fins. Air directed through the heater core picks up the heat from the heater core fins. The blend-air door(s) allows control of the heater output air temperature by regulating the amount of air flowing through the heater core. The blower motor speed controls the volume of air flowing through the HVAC housing. The heater core cannot be repaired and must be replaced if restricted, leaking or damaged. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Heater Core > Component Information > Service and Repair > Installation Heater Core: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION 1. Carefully install the heater core (3) into the front of the HVAC housing. 2. Position the heater core tube bracket (2) onto the HVAC housing. 3. Install the two screws (1) that secure the heater core bracket to the HVAC housing. Tighten the screws to 1.1 Nm (10 in. lbs.). 4. If equipped with the dual zone heating-A/C system, install the linkage rod (4). 5. Install the foam seal onto the heater core tubes. NOTE: If the heater core is being replaced, flush the cooling system See: Service and Repair. 6. Install the HVAC housing See: Heating and Air Conditioning/Housing Assembly HVAC/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/HVAC Housing - Installation . Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Heater Core > Component Information > Service and Repair > Installation > Page 3075 Heater Core: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL WARNING: Disable the airbag system before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Disconnect and isolate the negative battery (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the airbag system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the airbag system. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment and possible personal injury or death. NOTE: Disassembly of the HVAC housing is not required to remove heater core. 1. Remove the HVAC housing See: Heating and Air Conditioning/Housing Assembly HVAC/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/HVAC Housing - Removal and Installation . 2. Remove the foam seal from the heater core tubes. 3. If equipped with the dual zone heating-A/C system, remove the linkage rod (4) to gain access to the heater core (3). 4. Remove the two screws (1) that secure the heater core tube bracket (2) to the HVAC housing and remove the bracket. 5. Carefully pull the heater core out of the front of the HVAC housing. 6. Inspect all foam seals and replace as required. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Lamps and Indicators - Cooling System > Temperature Gauge > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Temperature Gauge: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION An engine coolant temperature gauge is standard equipment on all instrument clusters. The engine coolant temperature gauge is located in the lower right quadrant of the instrument cluster, below the oil pressure gauge. The gauge consists of a movable gauge needle or pointer controlled by the instrument cluster circuitry and a fixed 90 degree scale on the cluster overlay that reads left-to-right from C (or Cold) to H (or Hot) for gasoline engines. On vehicles with a diesel engine, the scale reads from 60 °C to 120 °C in markets where a metric instrument cluster is specified, or from 140 °F to 245 °F in all other markets. An International Control and Display Symbol icon for Engine Coolant Temperature is located on the cluster overlay, directly below the left end of the gauge scale. The engine coolant temperature gauge graphics are black against a white field except for a single red graduation at the high end of the gauge scale making them clearly visible within the instrument cluster in daylight. When illuminated from behind by the panel lamps dimmer controlled cluster illumination lighting with the exterior lamps turned ON, the black gauge graphics appear blue-green and the red graphics still appear red. The gauge needle has internal optical illumination. Gauge illumination is provided by replaceable incandescent bulb and holder units located on the instrument cluster electronic circuit board. The engine coolant temperature gauge is serviced as a unit with the instrument cluster. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Lamps and Indicators - Cooling System > Temperature Gauge > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 3081 Temperature Gauge: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The engine coolant temperature gauge gives an indication to the vehicle operator of the engine coolant temperature. This gauge is controlled by the instrument cluster circuit board based upon cluster programming and electronic messages received by the cluster from the Powertrain Control Module (PCM) on vehicles equipped with a gasoline engine, or the Engine Control Module (ECM) on vehicles equipped with a diesel engine over the Controller Area Network (CAN) data bus. The engine coolant temperature gauge is an air core magnetic unit that receives battery current on the instrument cluster electronic circuit board through the fused ignition switch output (run-start) circuit whenever the ignition switch is in the ON or START positions. The cluster is programmed to move the gauge needle back to the low end of the scale after the ignition switch is turned to the OFF position. The instrument cluster circuitry controls the gauge needle position and provides the following features: - Engine Temperature Message - Each time the cluster receives an electronic engine temperature message from the PCM or ECM indicating the temperature is between the low end of normal [about 54 °C (130 °F) for gasoline engines, or about 60 °C (140 °F) for diesel engines] and the high end of normal [about 122 °C (252 °F) for gasoline engines, or about 116 °C (240 °F) for diesel engines], the gauge needle is moved to the actual relative temperature position on the gauge scale. Engine Temperature Low Message - Each time the cluster receives an electronic engine temperature message from the PCM or ECM indicating the temperature is below the low end of normal [about 54 °C (130 °F) for gasoline engines, or about 60 °C (140 °F) for diesel engines], the gauge needle is held at the graduation on the far left end of the gauge scale. The gauge needle remains at the low end of the gauge scale until the cluster receives a message from the PCM or ECM indicating the temperature is above about 54 °C (130 °F) for gasoline engines, or about 60 ° C (140 °F) for diesel engines, or until the ignition switch is turned to the OFF position, whichever occurs first. - Engine Temperature High Message - Each time the cluster receives three consecutive electronic engine temperature messages from the PCM or ECM indicating the temperature is above about 122 °C (252 °F) for gasoline engines, or about 116 °C (240 °F) for diesel engines, the gauge needle is moved to the red increment or zone at the far right end of gauge scale, the check gauges indicator is illuminated, and a single chime tone is sounded. The gauge needle remains at the high end of the gauge scale and the check gauges indicator remains illuminated until the cluster receives a message from the PCM or ECM indicating that the temperature is below about 122 °C (252 °F) for gasoline engines, or about 116 °C (240 °F) for diesel engines, or until the ignition switch is turned to the OFF position, whichever occurs first. The chime tone feature will only repeat during the same ignition cycle if the check gauges indicator is cycled OFF and then ON again by the appropriate messages from the PCM or ECM. - Communication Error - If the cluster fails to receive an engine temperature message, it will hold the gauge needle at the last indication for about 10 seconds or until the ignition switch is turned to the OFF position, whichever occurs first. After 10 seconds, the cluster will move the gauge needle to the low end of the gauge scale. - Actuator Test - Each time the cluster is put through the actuator test, the engine coolant temperature gauge needle will be swept to several calibration points on the gauge scale in a prescribed sequence in order to confirm the functionality of the gauge and the cluster control circuitry. The PCM (gasoline engine) or ECM (diesel engine) continually monitors the engine coolant temperature sensor to determine the engine operating temperature. The PCM or ECM then sends the proper messages to the ElectroMechanical Instrument Cluster (EMIC) (also known as the Cab Compartment Node/CCN). If the instrument cluster turns ON the check gauges indicator due to a high engine temperature gauge reading, it may indicate that the engine or the engine cooling system requires service. For proper diagnosis of the engine coolant temperature sensor, the PCM, the ECM, the EMIC, the CAN data bus or the electronic communication related to engine coolant temperature gauge operation a diagnostic scan tool is required. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Radiator: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The radiator is a aluminum cross-flow design with horizontal tubes through the radiator core and vertical plastic side tanks. This radiator does not contain an internal transmission oil cooler. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 3086 Radiator: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The radiator supplies sufficient heat transfer using the cooling fins interlaced between the horizontal tubes in the radiator core to cool the engine. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 3087 Radiator: Testing and Inspection RADIATOR COOLANT FLOW Use the following procedure to determine if coolant is flowing through the cooling system. 1. Idle engine until operating temperature is reached. If the upper radiator hose is warm to the touch, the thermostat is opening and coolant is flowing to the radiator. WARNING: Hot, pressurized coolant can cause injury by scalding. Using a rag to cover the radiator pressure cap, open radiator cap slowly to the first stop. This will allow any built-up pressure to vent to the reserve/overflow tank. After pressure build-up has been released, remove cap from filler neck. 2. Drain a small amount of coolant from the radiator until the ends of the radiator tubes are visible through the filler neck. Idle the engine at normal operating temperature. If coolant is flowing past the exposed tubes, the coolant is circulating. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures Radiator: Procedures Cleaning CLEANING Clean radiator fins are necessary for good heat transfer. The radiator and oil cooler fins should be cleaned when an accumulation of debris has occurred. With the engine cold, apply cold water and compressed air to the back (engine side) of the radiator to flush the radiator and/or oil coolers of debris. Inspection INSPECTION Inspect the radiator side tanks for cracks, and broken or missing fittings. Inspect the joint where the tanks seam up to the radiator core for signs of leakage and/or deteriorating seals. Inspect radiator core for corroded, bent or missing cooling fins. Inspect the core for bent or damaged cooling tubes. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 3090 Radiator: Removal and Replacement Radiator - Removal 3.7L/4.7L/5.7L ENGINE 1. Disconnect battery negative cables. WARNING: Do not remove the cylinder block drain plugs or loosen the radiator draincock with the system hot and under pressure. Serious burns from the coolant can occur. 2. Drain the cooling system See: Service and Repair . 3. Remove the hose clamps and hoses from radiator. 4. Remove the coolant reserve/overflow tank hose from the radiator filler neck. 5. Remove the coolant reserve/overflow tank from the fan shroud (pull straight up). The tank slips into slots on the fan shroud. 6. Unclip the power steering hoses from the fan shroud. 7. Disconnect the electrical connectors at the windshield washer reservoir tank and remove the tank. 8. Remove the fan shroud mounting bolts and pull up and out of the radiator tank clips. Position shroud rearward over the fan blades towards engine. 9. Disconnect the transmission cooler lines from the transmission cooler See: Transmission and Drivetrain/Automatic Transmission/Transaxle/Transmission Cooler/Service and Repair/Procedures, then plug the transmission lines and cooler to prevent leakage. 10. Disconnect the power steering lines from the power steering cooler, then plug the power steering lines and cooler to prevent leakage. 11. Remove the two radiator upper mounting bolts. 12. Lift the radiator straight up and out of the engine compartment. Take care not to damage cooling fins or tubes on the radiator and oil coolers when removing. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 3091 Radiator - Installation 3.7L/4.7L/5.7L ENGINE NOTE: The radiator is equipped with one alignment dowel on the bottom of the outlet tank and one retaining bracket on the front side of the inlet tank. Both features have rubber insulators attached to them that must be present. The alignment dowel fits into a hole at the bottom of the front end sheet metal vertical support post and the support bracket rests on top of the lower radiator closure tube. 1. Position the fan shroud over the fan blades rearward towards engine. 2. Install the rubber insulators to the lower radiator mounting features (alignment dowel and support bracket at the lower part of the radiator). 3. Lower the radiator into position while guiding the alignment dowel into the vertical post bracket. Position and seat the lower radiator support bracket onto the lower radiator closure tube. 4. Install the upper radiator mounting bolts. Tighten bolts to 10 Nm (90 in. lbs.). 5. Connect the lower radiator hose and install the clamp in the proper position. 6. Connect the power steering hoses to the power steering oil cooler and install the clamps. 7. Connect the transmission oil cooler lines to the transmission oil cooler and install the secondary latches. 8. Position the fan shroud into the mounting clips on the radiator tanks and secure with bolts. Tighten the bolts to 8 Nm (75 in. lbs.). 9. Secure the power steering hoses into the clip on the lower fan shroud. 10. Install the windshield washer reservoir tank and connect the hose and electrical connector. 11. Install coolant reserve/overflow container hose(s) to radiator filler neck and secure properly with clamps. 12. Install coolant reserve/overflow container or degas container to fan shroud and tighten the bolts to 8 Nm (75 in. lbs.). 13. Connect upper radiator hose and install clamp. 14. Install battery negative cable. 15. Fill cooling system with coolant See: Service and Repair . Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 3092 16. Operate the engine until it reaches normal operating temperature. Check cooling system fluid levels. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cap > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Radiator Cap: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION All cooling systems are equipped with a pressure cap. For all engines, the pressure cap is located on top of the radiator outlet tank. The cap releases pressure at some point within a range of 97-to-124 kPa (14-to-18 psi). The pressure relief point (in pounds) is engraved on top of the cap The cooling system will operate at pressures slightly above atmospheric pressure. This results in a higher coolant boiling point allowing increased radiator cooling capacity. The cap contains a spring-loaded pressure relief valve. This valve opens when system pressure reaches the release range of 97-to-124 kPa (14-to-18 psi). A rubber gasket seals the radiator filler neck. This is done to maintain vacuum during coolant cool-down and to prevent leakage when system is under pressure. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cap > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 3097 Radiator Cap: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION A vent valve in the center of the cap will remain shut as long as the cooling system is pressurized. As the coolant cools, it contracts and creates a vacuum in the cooling system. This causes the vacuum valve to open and coolant in the reserve/overflow container to be drawn through the recovery hose connecting the filler neck and reserve/overflow container. If the vacuum valve is stuck shut, or the recovery hose is kinked, radiator hoses will collapse on cool down. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cap > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Radiator Cap Radiator Cap: Testing and Inspection Radiator Cap RADIATOR CAP Remove the cap from the radiator. Be sure that the sealing surfaces are clean. Moisten the rubber gasket with water and install the cap on the pressure tester 7700 or an equivalent. Operate the tester pump to bring the pressure to 104 kPa (15 psi) on the gauge. If the pressure cap fails to hold pressure of at least 97 kPa (14 psi) replace the cap. CAUTION. The pressure cap may test properly while positioned on tool 7700 (or equivalent). It may not hold pressure or vacuum when installed on the radiator. If so, inspect the radiator filler neck and radiator cap's top gasket for damage. Also inspect for dirt or distortion that may prevent the cap from sealing properly. CAUTION: Radiator pressure testing tools are very sensitive to small air leaks which will not cause cooling system problems. A pressure cap that does not have a history of coolant loss should not be replaced just because it leaks slowly when tested with this tool. Add water to tool. Turn tool upside down and recheck pressure cap to confirm that cap needs replacement. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cap > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Radiator Cap > Page 3100 Radiator Cap: Testing and Inspection Radiator Cap To Filler Neck Seal RADIATOR CAP-TO-FILLER NECK SEAL The pressure cap upper gasket (seal) pressure relief can be tested by removing overflow hose from the radiator filler neck tube. Attach the hose of the pressure tester tool 7700 (or equivalent) to the tube. It will be necessary to disconnect hose from its adapter for the filler neck. Pump air into radiator. The pressure cap upper gasket should relieve at 69 to 124kPa (10 to 18 psi) and hold pressure at a minimum of 55 kPa (8 psi). WARNING: The warning words, "DO NOT OPEN HOT", on radiator pressure cap, are a safety precaution. When hot, pressure builds up in cooling system. To prevent scalding or injury, radiator cap should not be removed while system is hot and/or under pressure. Do not remove the radiator cap at any time except for the following purposes: - Check and adjust antifreeze freeze point. - Refill the system with new antifreeze. - Conducting service procedures. - Checking for vacuum leaks. WARNING: If vehicle has been run recently, wait at least 15 minutes before removing radiator cap. With a rag, squeeze radiator upper hose to check if system is under pressure. Place a rag over cap and without pushing cap down, rotate it counter-clockwise to first stop. Allow fluid to escape through the coolant reserve/overflow hose into reserve/overflow tank. Squeeze radiator upper hose to determine when pressure has been released. When coolant and steam stop being pushed into tank and system pressure drops, remove radiator cap completely. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cap > Component Information > Service and Repair > Cleaning Radiator Cap: Service and Repair Cleaning CLEANING Use only a mild soap and water to clean the radiator cap. Using any type of solvent may cause damage to the seal in the radiator cap. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cap > Component Information > Service and Repair > Cleaning > Page 3103 Radiator Cap: Service and Repair Inspection INSPECTION Hold cap at eye level, right side up. The vent valve at bottom of cap should closed. A slight downward pull on the vent valve should open it. If the rubber gasket has swollen and prevents vent valve from opening, replace cap. Hold cap at eye level, upside down. If any light can be seen between vent valve and rubber gasket, replace cap. A replacement cap must be the type designed for a coolant reserve/overflow system with a completely sealed diaphragm spring and a rubber gasket. This gasket is used to seal to radiator filler neck top surface. Use of proper cap will allow coolant return to radiator. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Locations Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Locations Component ID: 410 Component : SENSOR-ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE Connector: Name : SENSOR-ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (DIESEL) A K200 18BR/YL SENSOR GROUND A K914 18BK/WT SENSOR GROUND B K2 18VT/OR ECT SIGNAL Component Location - 8 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Locations > Page 3109 Component Location - 11 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Locations > Page 3110 Component Location - 13 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Locations > Page 3111 Connector: Name : SENSOR-ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (GAS) Pin Circuit Description 1 K2 20VT/OR ECT SIGNAL 2 K900 20DB/DG SENSOR GROUND Component Location - 8 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Locations > Page 3112 Component Location - 11 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Locations > Page 3113 Component Location - 13 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Locations > Page 3114 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Locations > Page 3115 Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Diagrams Component ID: 410 Component : SENSOR-ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE Connector: Name : SENSOR-ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (DIESEL) A K200 18BR/YL SENSOR GROUND A K914 18BK/WT SENSOR GROUND B K2 18VT/OR ECT SIGNAL Component Location - 8 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Locations > Page 3116 Component Location - 11 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Locations > Page 3117 Component Location - 13 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Locations > Page 3118 Connector: Name : SENSOR-ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (GAS) Pin Circuit Description 1 K2 20VT/OR ECT SIGNAL 2 K900 20DB/DG SENSOR GROUND Component Location - 8 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Locations > Page 3119 Component Location - 11 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Locations > Page 3120 Component Location - 13 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Locations > Page 3121 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Temperature Gauge > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Temperature Gauge: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION An engine coolant temperature gauge is standard equipment on all instrument clusters. The engine coolant temperature gauge is located in the lower right quadrant of the instrument cluster, below the oil pressure gauge. The gauge consists of a movable gauge needle or pointer controlled by the instrument cluster circuitry and a fixed 90 degree scale on the cluster overlay that reads left-to-right from C (or Cold) to H (or Hot) for gasoline engines. On vehicles with a diesel engine, the scale reads from 60 °C to 120 °C in markets where a metric instrument cluster is specified, or from 140 °F to 245 °F in all other markets. An International Control and Display Symbol icon for Engine Coolant Temperature is located on the cluster overlay, directly below the left end of the gauge scale. The engine coolant temperature gauge graphics are black against a white field except for a single red graduation at the high end of the gauge scale making them clearly visible within the instrument cluster in daylight. When illuminated from behind by the panel lamps dimmer controlled cluster illumination lighting with the exterior lamps turned ON, the black gauge graphics appear blue-green and the red graphics still appear red. The gauge needle has internal optical illumination. Gauge illumination is provided by replaceable incandescent bulb and holder units located on the instrument cluster electronic circuit board. The engine coolant temperature gauge is serviced as a unit with the instrument cluster. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Temperature Gauge > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 3126 Temperature Gauge: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The engine coolant temperature gauge gives an indication to the vehicle operator of the engine coolant temperature. This gauge is controlled by the instrument cluster circuit board based upon cluster programming and electronic messages received by the cluster from the Powertrain Control Module (PCM) on vehicles equipped with a gasoline engine, or the Engine Control Module (ECM) on vehicles equipped with a diesel engine over the Controller Area Network (CAN) data bus. The engine coolant temperature gauge is an air core magnetic unit that receives battery current on the instrument cluster electronic circuit board through the fused ignition switch output (run-start) circuit whenever the ignition switch is in the ON or START positions. The cluster is programmed to move the gauge needle back to the low end of the scale after the ignition switch is turned to the OFF position. The instrument cluster circuitry controls the gauge needle position and provides the following features: - Engine Temperature Message - Each time the cluster receives an electronic engine temperature message from the PCM or ECM indicating the temperature is between the low end of normal [about 54 °C (130 °F) for gasoline engines, or about 60 °C (140 °F) for diesel engines] and the high end of normal [about 122 °C (252 °F) for gasoline engines, or about 116 °C (240 °F) for diesel engines], the gauge needle is moved to the actual relative temperature position on the gauge scale. Engine Temperature Low Message - Each time the cluster receives an electronic engine temperature message from the PCM or ECM indicating the temperature is below the low end of normal [about 54 °C (130 °F) for gasoline engines, or about 60 °C (140 °F) for diesel engines], the gauge needle is held at the graduation on the far left end of the gauge scale. The gauge needle remains at the low end of the gauge scale until the cluster receives a message from the PCM or ECM indicating the temperature is above about 54 °C (130 °F) for gasoline engines, or about 60 ° C (140 °F) for diesel engines, or until the ignition switch is turned to the OFF position, whichever occurs first. - Engine Temperature High Message - Each time the cluster receives three consecutive electronic engine temperature messages from the PCM or ECM indicating the temperature is above about 122 °C (252 °F) for gasoline engines, or about 116 °C (240 °F) for diesel engines, the gauge needle is moved to the red increment or zone at the far right end of gauge scale, the check gauges indicator is illuminated, and a single chime tone is sounded. The gauge needle remains at the high end of the gauge scale and the check gauges indicator remains illuminated until the cluster receives a message from the PCM or ECM indicating that the temperature is below about 122 °C (252 °F) for gasoline engines, or about 116 °C (240 °F) for diesel engines, or until the ignition switch is turned to the OFF position, whichever occurs first. The chime tone feature will only repeat during the same ignition cycle if the check gauges indicator is cycled OFF and then ON again by the appropriate messages from the PCM or ECM. - Communication Error - If the cluster fails to receive an engine temperature message, it will hold the gauge needle at the last indication for about 10 seconds or until the ignition switch is turned to the OFF position, whichever occurs first. After 10 seconds, the cluster will move the gauge needle to the low end of the gauge scale. - Actuator Test - Each time the cluster is put through the actuator test, the engine coolant temperature gauge needle will be swept to several calibration points on the gauge scale in a prescribed sequence in order to confirm the functionality of the gauge and the cluster control circuitry. The PCM (gasoline engine) or ECM (diesel engine) continually monitors the engine coolant temperature sensor to determine the engine operating temperature. The PCM or ECM then sends the proper messages to the ElectroMechanical Instrument Cluster (EMIC) (also known as the Cab Compartment Node/CCN). If the instrument cluster turns ON the check gauges indicator due to a high engine temperature gauge reading, it may indicate that the engine or the engine cooling system requires service. For proper diagnosis of the engine coolant temperature sensor, the PCM, the ECM, the EMIC, the CAN data bus or the electronic communication related to engine coolant temperature gauge operation a diagnostic scan tool is required. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Thermostat, Engine Cooling > Component Information > Specifications Thermostat: Specifications Thermostat Specification Begin to open at 85.5 - 89.4°C. (186 - 193°F ) Fully open (valve will stop moving) at 97°C (207°F Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Thermostat, Engine Cooling > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Thermostat: Description and Operation Description GAS ENGINE CAUTION: Do not operate the engine without a thermostat, except for servicing or testing. The 3.7L/4.7L/5.7L engines use a pellet-type thermostat that controls the operating temperature of the engine by controlling the amount of coolant flow to the radiator. The 8.3L engine uses a movable sleeve type thermostat. On all engines the thermostat is closed below 195°F (90°C). Above this temperature, coolant is allowed to flow to the radiator. This provides quick engine warm up and overall temperature control. Coolant leakage into the pellet container will cause the thermostat to fail in the open position. Thermostats very rarely stick. Do not attempt to free a thermostat with a prying device. On the 3.7L/4.7L engine the thermostat is designed to block the flow of the coolant bypass journal by 50% instead of completely blocking the flow. This design controls coolant temperature more accurately. The same thermostat is used for winter and summer seasons. An engine should not be operated without a thermostat, except for servicing or testing. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Thermostat, Engine Cooling > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 3132 Operating without a thermostat causes other problems. These are: longer engine warm-up time, unreliable warm-up performance, increased exhaust emissions and crankcase condensation. This condensation can result in sludge formation. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Thermostat, Engine Cooling > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 3133 Thermostat: Description and Operation Operation 3.7L/4.7L/5.7L ENGINE The wax pellet is located in a sealed container at the spring end of the thermostat. When heated, the pellet expands, overcoming closing spring tension and water pump pressure to force the valve to open. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Thermostat, Engine Cooling > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 3134 Thermostat: Testing and Inspection DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTICS All models are equipped with On-Board Diagnostics for certain cooling system components. If the powertrain control module (PCM) detects low engine coolant temperature, it will record a Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) in the PCM memory. Do not change a thermostat for lack of heat as indicated by the instrument panel gauge or by poor heater performance unless a DTC is present. The DTC can also be accessed through the scan tool. DIESEL ENGINE The cooling system used with the diesel engine provides the extra coolant capacity and extra cooling protection needed for higher GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating) and GCWR (Gross Combined Weight Rating) vehicles. This system capacity will not affect warm up or cold weather operating characteristics if the thermostat is operating properly. This is because coolant will be held in the engine until it reaches the thermostat "set" temperature. Diesel engines, due to their inherent efficiency are slower to warm up than gasoline powered engines, and will operate at lower temperatures when the vehicle is unloaded. Because of this, lower temperature gauge readings for diesel versus gasoline engines may, at times be normal. Typically, complaints of low engine coolant temperature are observed as low heater output when combined with cool or cold outside temperatures. To help promote faster engine warm-up, the electric engine block heater must be used with cool or cold outside temperatures. This will help keep the engine coolant warm when the vehicle is parked. A "Cold Weather Cover" is available from the parts department through the Mopar Accessories product line. This accessory cover is designed to block airflow entering the radiator and engine compartment to promote faster engine warm-up. It attaches to the front of the vehicle at the grill opening. The cover is to be used with cool or cold temperatures only. If used with high outside temperatures, serious engine damage could result. For engines equipped with exhaust brakes, this device can be used to aid engine warm-up while the engine is idling. 1. To determine if the thermostat is defective, it must be removed from the vehicle See: Service and Repair/Engine Coolant Thermostat - Removal . 2. After the thermostat has been removed, examine the thermostat and inside of thermostat housing for contaminants. If contaminants are found, the thermostat may already be in a "stuck open" position. Flush the cooling system before replacing thermostat See: Service and Repair . 3. Place the thermostat into a container filled with water. 4. Place the container on a hot plate or other suitable heating device. 5. Place a commercially available radiator thermometer into the water. 6. Apply heat to the water while observing the thermostat and thermometer. 7. The thermostat will begin to open at 85.5 - 89.4°C. (186 - 193°F ). If the valve starts to move before this temperature is reached, it is opening too early. Replace thermostat. The thermostat should be fully open (valve will stop moving) at 97°C (207°F). If the valve is still moving when the water temperature reaches 97°C (207°F), it is opening too late. Replace thermostat. If the valve refuses to move at any time, replace thermostat. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Thermostat, Engine Cooling > Component Information > Service and Repair > Engine Coolant Thermostat - Removal Thermostat: Service and Repair Engine Coolant Thermostat - Removal 3.7L/4.7L ENGINE WARNING: Do not loosen the radiator draincock with the cooling system hot and pressurized. Serious burns from the coolant can occur. 1. Disconnect the negative battery cable. 2. Drain the cooling system See: Service and Repair . 3. Raise and support the vehicle. 4. Remove the splash shield. 5. Remove the lower radiator hose clamp and the lower radiator hose at the thermostat housing. 6. Remove the thermostat housing mounting bolts, thermostat housing and thermostat. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Thermostat, Engine Cooling > Component Information > Service and Repair > Engine Coolant Thermostat - Removal > Page 3137 Thermostat: Service and Repair Engine Coolant Thermostat - Installation 3.7L/4.7L ENGINE 1. Clean the mating areas of the timing chain cover and the thermostat housing. 2. Install the thermostat (spring side down) into the recessed machined groove on the timing chain cover. CAUTION: The housing must be tightened evenly and the thermostat must be centered into the recessed groove in the timing chain cover. If not, it may result in a cracked housing, damaged timing chain cover threads or coolant leaks. 3. Position the thermostat housing on the timing chain cover. 4. Install the housing-to-timing chain cover bolts. Tighten the bolts to 13 Nm (112 in. lbs.). 5. Install the lower radiator hose on the thermostat housing. 6. Install the splash shield. 7. Lower the vehicle. 8. Fill the cooling system See: Service and Repair . 9. Connect negative battery cable. 10. Start and warm the engine. Check for leaks. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Water Pump > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Water Pump: Description and Operation Description Water Pump WATER PUMP A centrifugal water pump circulates coolant through the water jackets, passages, intake manifold, radiator core, cooling system hoses and heater core. The pump is driven from the engine crankshaft by a single serpentine drive belt. The water pump impeller is pressed onto the rear of a shaft that rotates in bearings pressed into the housing. The housing has two small holes to allow seepage to escape. The water pump seals are lubricated by the antifreeze in the coolant mixture. No additional lubrication is necessary. Water Pump Bypass WATER PUMP BYPASS The 3.7L and 4.7L engine uses an internal water/coolant bypass system. The design uses galleries in the timing chain cover to circulate coolant during Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Water Pump > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 3142 engine warm-up preventing the coolant from flowing through the radiator. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Water Pump > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 3143 Water Pump: Description and Operation Operation Water Pump WATER PUMP A centrifugal water pump circulates coolant through the water jackets, passages, intake manifold, radiator core, cooling system hoses and heater core, this coolant absorbs the heat generated when the engine is running. The pump is driven by the engine crankshaft via a drive belt. Water Pump Bypass - 3.7L/4.7L WATER PUMP BYPASS - 3.7L/4.7L When the thermostat is in the closed position the bypass gallery is not obstructed allowing 100% flow. When the thermostat is in the open position the pill partially covers the bypass hole, reducing the amount of bypass flow. This design allows the coolant to reach operating temperature quickly when cold, while adding extra cooling during normal temperature operation. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Water Pump > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 3144 Water Pump: Testing and Inspection WATER PUMP A quick test to determine if pump is working is to check if heater warms properly. A defective water pump will not be able to circulate heated coolant through the long heater hose to the heater core. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Water Pump > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures Water Pump: Procedures Cleaning CLEANING Clean the gasket mating surface. Use caution not to damage the gasket sealing surface. Inspection INSPECTION Inspect the water pump assembly for cracks in the housing, water leaks from shaft seal, worn bearing or impeller rubbing either the pump body or timing chain case/cover. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Water Pump > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 3147 Water Pump: Removal and Replacement Water Pump - Removal 3.7L/4.7L ENGINE The water pump on 3.7L/4.7L engines is bolted directly to the engine timing chain case cover. 1. Disconnect the negative battery cable. 2. Drain cooling system See: Service and Repair . 3. Remove fan/viscous fan drive assembly from water pump See: Radiator Cooling Fan/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Radiator Fan Removal . Do not attempt to remove fan/viscous fan drive assembly from vehicle at this time. 4. If the water pump is being replaced, do not unbolt the fan blade assembly from the thermal viscous fan drive. 5. Remove the radiator fan See: Radiator Cooling Fan/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Radiator Fan - Removal . 6. Remove accessory drive belt See: Engine/Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories/Drive Belt/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Accessory Drive Belt - Removal . 7. Remove the lower radiator hose clamp and remove the lower hose at the water pump. 8. Remove the water pump mounting bolts. CAUTION: Do not pry water pump at timing chain case/cover. The machined surfaces may be damaged resulting in leaks. 9. Remove the water pump and gasket. Discard gasket. Water Pump - Installation Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Water Pump > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 3148 3.7L/4.7L ENGINE 1. Clean the gasket mating surfaces. 2. Using a new gasket, position water pump and install the mounting bolts. Tighten the water pump mounting bolts to 58 Nm (43 ft. lbs.). 3. Spin the water pump to be sure that the pump impeller does not rub against the timing chain case/cover. 4. Connect the radiator lower hose to the water pump. 5. Install accessory drive belt tensioner See: Engine/Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories/Drive Belt/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Accessory Drive Belt - Installation 6. Install the drive belt See: Engine/Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories/Drive Belt/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Accessory Drive Belt - Installation . 7. Install the radiator fan. 8. Fill cooling system See: Service and Repair . 9. Connect the negative battery cable. 10. Start and warm the engine. Check for leaks. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Catalytic Converter > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Catalytic Converter: Description and Operation Description GAS ENGINE Exhaust System 4.7L Engine - Typical WARNING: The normal operating temperature of the exhaust system is very high. Therefore, never work around or attempt to service any part of the exhaust system until it is cooled. Special care should be taken when working near the catalytic converter. The temperature of the converter rises to a high level after a short period of engine operation time. CAUTION: DO NOT remove spark plug wires from plugs or by any other means short out cylinders. Failure of the catalytic converter can occur due to a temperature increase caused by unburned fuel passing through the converter. The stainless steel catalytic converter body is designed to last the life of the vehicle. Excessive heat can result in bulging or other distortion, but excessive heat will not be the fault of the converter. If unburned fuel enters the converter, overheating may occur. If a converter is heat-damaged, correct the cause of the damage at the same time the converter is replaced. Also, inspect all other components of the exhaust system for heat damage. Unleaded gasoline must be used to avoid contaminating the catalyst core. 50 State emission vehicles incorporate two mini catalytic converters located after the exhaust manifolds and before the inline catalytic converter. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Catalytic Converter > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 3154 Catalytic Converter: Description and Operation Operation GAS ENGINE The catalytic converter captures and burns any unburned fuel mixture exiting the combustion chambers during the exhaust stroke of the engine. This process aids in reducing emissions output. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Catalytic Converter > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures Catalytic Converter: Procedures INSPECTION ON VEHICLE Look at the stainless steel body of the Catalytic Converter or Diesel Oxidation Catalyst (DOC)/ Diesel Particulate Filter (DPF) assembly, inspect for bulging or other distortion that could be a result of overheating. Inspect for: - Indiction of exhaust gas leakage such as soot trails. - DOC/DPF pressure fittings and temperature sensor wiring for damage - Joint misalignment - Denting of greater then 6.3 mm (0.25 in.) - Outer shell torn, cracked or otherwise damaged - Loose or damaged core OFF VEHICLE With DOC/DPF of vehicle and separated, visually inspect DOC/DPF creamic faces (Inlet and Outlet) for indication of damage from: - Fuel fouling - Oil fouling - Coolant fouling - Shifted or move ceramic element - Ceramic element appears to be plugged and the soot is wet - More then 20 cells are damaged (broken through), showing soot on the outlet face of the filter. A fluid soaked DOC/DPF element will have a glossy sheen and a strong fuel, coolant, or oil odor. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Catalytic Converter > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 3157 Catalytic Converter: Removal and Replacement Catalytic Converter - Removal 3.7L/4.7L ENGINE 1. Raise and support vehicle. 2. Saturate the bolts and nuts with heat valve lubricant. Allow 5 minutes for penetration. 3. Disconnect oxygen sensor electrical connectors. 4. Remove clamp (4). 5. Remove bolts exhaust to manifold (2). 6. Remove catalytic converter (3). Catalytic Converter - Installation 3.7L/4.7L ENGINE 1. Install RH catalytic converter to exhaust clamp (4) on RH catalytic converter (3) and position into exhaust pipe (5). 2. Install and hand tighten RH catalytic converter to exhaust manifold bolts (2). 3. Install c-clip nut (1) and bolt (2) to converter (3) to manifold. 4. Tighten catalytic converter to exhaust manifold bolts (1) to 31 Nm (23 ft. lbs.). 5. Tighten all clamp nuts (4) to 52.2 Nm (40 ft. lbs.) torque. 6. Check the exhaust system for contact with the body panels. A minimum of 25 mm (1.0 in.) is required between the exhaust system components and body/frame parts. Make the necessary adjustments, if needed. 7. Check to ensure you have at least 25 mm clearance to oil pan. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Catalytic Converter > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 3158 8. Plug in O2 sensor wiring. 9. Lower the vehicle. 10. Start the engine and inspect for exhaust leaks. Repair exhaust leaks as necessary. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Continuous Trap Oxidizer, Diesel Emissions > Exhaust Pressure Differential Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Exhaust Pressure Differential Sensor: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL 1. Raise and support vehicle. 2. Disconnect electrical connector. 3. Disconnect hoses at pressure differential pressure sensor. 4. Remove mounting bolt and differential pressure sensor. 5. Remove mounting bolts (1). PRESSURE DIFFERENTIAL TUBING Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Continuous Trap Oxidizer, Diesel Emissions > Exhaust Pressure Differential Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 3164 6. Remove pressure differential pressure tubing. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Continuous Trap Oxidizer, Diesel Emissions > Exhaust Pressure Differential Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 3165 Exhaust Pressure Differential Sensor: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION PRESSURE DIFFERENTIAL TUBING 1. Install differential pressure tubing, if removed. Tighten fittings to 30 Nm (22 ft. lbs.). 2. Position differential pressure sensor (1). 3. Install mounting nuts (5) and bolts. Tighten to 10 Nm (89 in. lbs.). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Continuous Trap Oxidizer, Diesel Emissions > Exhaust Pressure Differential Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 3166 NOTE: Make sure there is not a dip in the pressure differential hoses. 4. Install hose (2) to the rear DPF tubing. 5. Install hose (3) to the front DPF tubing. 6. Connect electrical connector (6). 7. Lower vehicle. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Exhaust Manifold > Component Information > Specifications Exhaust Manifold: Specifications Exhaust Manifold Starting at the center and working outward, tighten the bolts and nuts to 25 Nm (18 ft. lbs.) Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Exhaust Manifold > Component Information > Specifications > Page 3170 Exhaust Manifold: Description and Operation DESCRIPTION The exhaust manifolds are log style with a patented flow enhancing design to maximize performance. The exhaust manifolds are made of high silicon molybdenum cast iron. A perforated core graphite exhaust manifold gasket is used to improve sealing to the cylinder head. The exhaust manifolds are covered by a three layer laminated heat shield for thermal protection and noise reduction. The heat shields are fastened with a torque prevailing nut that is backed off slightly to allow for the thermal expansion of the exhaust manifold. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Exhaust Manifold > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures Exhaust Manifold: Procedures Exhaust Manifold - Cleaning CLEANING 1. Clean the exhaust manifold using a suitable cleaning solvent, then allow to air dry. 2. Clean all gasket residue from the manifold mating surface. Exhaust Manifold - Inspection INSPECTION 1. Inspect the exhaust manifold for cracks in the mating surface and at every mounting bolt hole. 2. Using a straight edge and a feeler gauge, check the mating surface for warp and twist. 3. Inspect the manifold to exhaust pipe mating surface for cracks, gouges, or other damage that would prevent sealing. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Exhaust Manifold > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 3173 Exhaust Manifold: Removal and Replacement Exhaust Manifold - Removal REMOVAL RIGHT EXHAUST MANIFOLD 1. Disconnect the negative battery cable. 2. Remove the air cleaner assembly. See: Engine/Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks/Air Cleaner Housing/Service and Repair 3. Remove the accessory drive belt. See: Engine/Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories/Drive Belt/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement 4. Remove the A/C compressor. See: Heating and Air Conditioning/Compressor HVAC/Service and Repair 5. Remove A/C accumulator support bracket fastener. 6. Drain the coolant below heater hose level. See: Cooling System/Service and Repair 7. Remove the heater hoses at the engine. 8. Remove the exhaust manifold heat shield retaining nuts (4,5) and remove the heat shield. 9. Remove the upper exhaust manifold retaining bolts (1, 2, 3). 10. Raise and support the vehicle. CAUTION: When servicing or replacing exhaust system components, disconnect the oxygen sensor connector(s). Allowing the exhaust to hang by the oxygen sensor wires will damage the harness and/or sensor. 11. Saturate the exhaust pipe/catalytic converter assembly flanged nuts at the exhaust manifold with heat valve lubricant, allow 5 minutes for penetration. 12. Disconnect the exhaust pipe/catalytic converter at the exhaust manifold. See: Catalytic Converter/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement 13. Remove the starter. See: Starting and Charging/Starting System/Starter Motor/Service and Repair 14. Remove the lower exhaust manifold retaining bolts (1, 2, 3). NOTE:The exhaust manifold is removed from below the engine compartment. 15. Remove the exhaust manifold and gasket. 16. Clean the mating surfaces. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Exhaust Manifold > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 3174 LEFT EXHAUST MANIFOLD 1. Disconnect the negative battery cable. 2. Remove the engine cover. 3. Remove the front two exhaust manifold heat shield retaining nuts (4). 4. Raise and support the vehicle. CAUTION: When servicing or replacing exhaust system components, disconnect the oxygen sensor connector(s). Allowing the exhaust to hang by the oxygen sensor wires will damage the harness and/or sensor. 5. Saturate the exhaust pipe/catalytic converter assembly flanged nuts at the exhaust manifold with heat valve lubricant, allow 5 minutes for penetration. 6. Disconnect the exhaust pipe at the exhaust manifold See: Catalytic Converter/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement 7. Remove the rear heat shield (5) retaining nuts and remove the heat shield. 8. Lower the vehicle. 9. Remove the upper exhaust manifold retaining bolts (1, 2, 3). NOTE:The exhaust manifold is removed from below the engine compartment. 10. Raise and support the vehicle. 11. Remove the lower exhaust manifold retaining bolts (1, 2, 3). 12. Remove the exhaust manifold and gasket. 13. Clean the mating surfaces. Exhaust Manifold - Installation INSTALLATION RIGHT EXHAUST MANIFOLD Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Exhaust Manifold > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 3175 1. Install exhaust manifold and gasket from below engine compartment. 2. Install lower exhaust manifold fasteners. DO NOT tighten until all fasteners are in place. 3. Lower vehicle and install upper exhaust manifold fasteners. Tighten all manifold bolts 91,2,3) starting at center and working outward to 25 Nm (18 ft. lbs.). CAUTION: Over tightening heat shield fasteners, may cause shield to distort and/or crack. 4. Install exhaust manifold heat shield. Tighten fasteners (4,5) to 8 Nm (72 in. lbs.), then loosen 45 degrees. 5. Install starter and fasteners. 6. Connect exhaust pipe to manifold. 7. Connect heater hoses at engine. 8. Install fastener attaching A/C accumulator. 9. Install A/C compressor and fasteners. 10. Install accessory drive belt . 11. Install air cleaner assembly, resonator assembly and air inlet hose. 12. Install battery and connect cables. 13. Fill cooling system See: Cooling System/Service and Repair. LEFT EXHAUST MANIFOLD Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Exhaust Manifold > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 3176 1. Install exhaust manifold and gasket from below engine compartment. 2. Install lower exhaust manifold fasteners. DO NOT tighten until all fasteners are in place. 3. Lower vehicle and install upper exhaust manifold fasteners. Tighten all manifold bolts (2,3) starting at center and working outward to 25 Nm (18 ft. lbs.). CAUTION: Over tightening heat shield fasteners, may cause shield to distort and/or crack. 4. Install exhaust manifold heat shield. Tighten fasteners (4,5) to 8 Nm (72 in. lbs.), then loosen 45 degrees. 5. Connect exhaust pipe to manifold. 6. Connect negative cable to battery. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Exhaust Pipe > Component Information > Service and Repair > Exhaust Pipe - Removal Exhaust Pipe: Service and Repair Exhaust Pipe - Removal 3.7L/4.7L/5.7L ENGINE 1. Raise and support the vehicle. 2. Saturate the bolts and nuts with heat valve lubricant. Allow 5 minutes for penetration. 3. Remove exhaust pipe to manifold bolts and nuts. 4. Remove the clamp nuts. 5. Remove the exhaust pipe. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Exhaust Pipe > Component Information > Service and Repair > Exhaust Pipe - Removal > Page 3181 Exhaust Pipe: Service and Repair Exhaust Pipe - Inspection INSPECTION Discard rusted clamps, broken or worn supports and attaching parts. Replace a component with original equipment parts, or equivalent. This will assure proper alignment with other parts in the system and provide acceptable exhaust noise levels. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Exhaust Pipe > Component Information > Service and Repair > Exhaust Pipe - Removal > Page 3182 Exhaust Pipe: Service and Repair Exhaust Pipe - Installation 3.7L/4.7L/5.7L ENGINE 1. Position the exhaust pipe for proper clearance with the frame and underbody parts. A minimum clearance of 25 mm (1.0 in.) is required. 2. Position the exhaust pipe to manifold. Install the bolts and nuts. Tighten the nuts to 31 Nm (23 ft. lbs.) torque. 3. Tighten the clamp nuts to 54 Nm (40 ft. lbs.) torque. 4. Lower the vehicle. 5. Start the engine and inspect for exhaust leaks and exhaust system contact with the body panels. Adjust the alignment, if needed. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Exhaust Pipe > Component Information > Service and Repair > Exhaust Pipe - Removal > Page 3183 Exhaust Pipe: Service and Repair Tailpipe Removal 3.7L/4.7L/5.7L ENGINE 1. Raise and support the vehicle. 2. Saturate the clamp nuts with heat valve lubricant. Allow 5 minutes for penetration. 3. Disconnect the exhaust tailpipe support hanger. 4. Remove clamps and nuts. 5. Remove the exhaust tailpipe. Inspection INSPECTION Discard rusted clamps, broken or worn supports and attaching parts. Replace a component with original equipment parts, or equivalent. This will assure proper alignment with other parts in the system and provide acceptable exhaust noise levels. Installation 3.7L/4.7L/5.7L ENGINE Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Exhaust Pipe > Component Information > Service and Repair > Exhaust Pipe - Removal > Page 3184 1. Loosely assemble exhaust tailpipe to permit proper alignment of all parts. 2. Connect the support hangers. 3. Position the exhaust tailpipe for proper clearance with the underbody parts. 4. Tighten all clamp nuts to 54 Nm (40 ft. lbs.) torque. 5. Check the exhaust system for contact with the body panels. A minimum of 25 mm (1.0 in.) is required between the exhaust system components and body/frame parts. Make the necessary adjustments, if needed. 6. Lower the vehicle. 7. Start the engine and inspect for exhaust leaks. Repair exhaust leaks as necessary. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Heat Shield, Exhaust > Component Information > Description and Operation Heat Shield: Description and Operation DESCRIPTION There are two types of heat shields used. One is stamped steel the other is molded foil sheets. The shields attach to the vehicle around the exhaust system to prevent heat from the exhaust system from entering the passenger area and other areas where the heat can cause damage to other components. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Heat Shield, Exhaust > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Heat Shield: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL 1. Raise and support the vehicle. 2. Remove the nuts or bolts holding the exhaust heat shield to the floor pan, crossmember or bracket. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Heat Shield, Exhaust > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 3190 3. Slide the shield out around the exhaust system. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Heat Shield, Exhaust > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 3191 Heat Shield: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION 1. Position the exhaust heat shield to the floor pan, crossmember or bracket and install the nuts or bolts. 2. Tighten the nuts and bolts 11 Nm (100 in. lbs.). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Heat Shield, Exhaust > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 3192 3. Lower the vehicle. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Muffler > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Muffler: Service and Repair Removal 3.7L/4.7L/5.7L ENGINE 1. Raise and support the vehicle. 2. Saturate the clamp nuts with heat valve lubricant. Allow 5 minutes for penetration. 3. Disconnect the muffler hangers. 4. Remove clamps and nuts. 5. Remove the muffler. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Muffler > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 3197 Muffler: Service and Repair Installation 3.7L/4.7L/5.7L ENGINE 1. Assemble muffler and clamps loosely to permit proper alignment of all parts. 2. Connect the muffler hangers. 3. Tighten the clamp nuts to 54 Nm (40 ft. lbs.) torque. 4. Insure isolators are fully seated on exhaust hangers. 5. Check the exhaust system for contact with the body panels. A minimum of 25 mm (1.0 in.) is required between the exhaust system components and body/frame parts. Make the necessary adjustments, if needed. 6. Lower the vehicle. 7. Start the engine and inspect for exhaust leaks. Repair exhaust leaks as necessary. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Body Control Module: Diagram Information and Instructions Warnings WARNINGS - GENERAL WARNINGS provide information to prevent personal injury and vehicle damage. Below is a list of general warnings that should be followed any time a vehicle is being serviced. WARNING: Always wear safety glasses for eye protection. WARNING: Use safety stands anytime a procedure requires being under a vehicle. WARNING: Be sure that the ignition switch always is in the off position, unless the procedure requires it to be on. WARNING: Set the parking brake when working on any vehicle. An automatic transmission should be in park. A manual transmission should be in neutral. WARNING: Operate the engine only in a well-ventilated area. WARNING: Keep away from moving parts when the engine is running, especially the fan and belts. WARNING: To prevent serious burns, avoid contact with hot parts such as the radiator, exhaust manifold(s), tail pipe, catalytic converter and muffler. WARNING: Do not allow flame or sparks near the battery. Gases are always present in and around the battery. WARNING: Always remove rings, watches, loose hanging jewelry and avoid loose clothing. How to Use Wiring Diagrams DESCRIPTION - HOW TO USE WIRING DIAGRAMS DaimlerChrysler Corporation wiring diagrams are designed to provide information regarding the vehicles wiring content. In order to effectively use the wiring diagrams to diagnose and repair DaimlerChrysler Corporation vehicles, it is important to understand all of their features and characteristics. Diagrams are arranged such that the power (B+) side of the circuit is placed near the top of the page, and the ground (B-) side of the circuit is placed near the bottom of the page. All switches, components, and modules are shown in the at rest position with the doors closed and the key removed from the ignition. Components are shown two ways. A solid line around a component indicates that the component is complete. A dashed line around the component indicates that the component is being shown is not complete. Incomplete components have a reference number to indicate the page where the component is shown complete. It is important to realize that no attempt is made on the diagrams to represent components and wiring as they appear on the vehicle. For example, a short piece of wire is treated the same as a long one. In addition, switches and other components are shown as simply as possible, with regard to function only. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3205 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3206 SYMBOLS International symbols are used throughout the wiring diagrams. These symbols are consistent with those being used around the world. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3207 TERMINOLOGY This is a list of terms and definitions used in the wiring diagrams. LHD - Left Hand Drive Vehicles RHD - Right Hand Drive Vehicles ATX - Automatic Transmissions-Front Wheel Drive MTX Manual Transmissions-Front Wheel Drive Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3208 AT - Automatic Transmissions-Rear Wheel Drive MT - Manual Transmissions-Rear Wheel Drive SOHC - Single Over Head Cam Engine DOHC - Double Over Head Cam Engine Export - Vehicles Built For Sale In Markets Other Than North America Except Export - Vehicles Built For Sale In North America Circuit Functions DESCRIPTION - CIRCUIT FUNCTIONS All circuits in the diagrams use an alpha/numeric code to identify the wire and it's function. To identify which circuit code applies to a system, refer to the Circuit Identification Code Chart. This chart shows the main circuits only and does not show the secondary codes that may apply to some models. Circuit Information DESCRIPTION - CIRCUIT INFORMATION Each wire shown in the diagrams contains a code which identifies the main circuit, a specific part of the main circuit, gage of wire, and color. An example would be A 2 18 LB/YL. This is a Battery Feed circuit, level two, eighteen gauge, light blue with a yellow tracer. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3209 Connector, Ground and Splice Information DESCRIPTION - CONNECTOR, GROUND AND SPLICE INFORMATION CAUTION: Not all connectors are serviced. Some connectors are serviced only with a harness. A typical example might be the Supplemental Restraint System connectors. Always check parts availability before attempting a repair. IDENTIFICATION In-line connectors are identified by a number, as follows: - In-line connectors located in the engine compartment are C100 series numbers. - In-line connectors located in the instrument panel area are C200 series numbers. - In-line connectors located in the body are C300 series numbers. - Jumper harness connectors are C400 series numbers. - Grounds and ground connectors are identified with a "G" and follow the same series numbering as the in-line connectors. - Splices are identified with an "S" and follow the same series numbering as the in-line connectors. In addition, S001-S099 numbers are located in the engine compartment. - Component connectors are identified by the component name instead of a number. Multiple connectors on a component use a C1, C2, etc. identifier. LOCATIONS Vehicle/Locations contains the master connector/ground/splice location index charts with hyperlinks to the applicable location illustrations. The illustrations contain the connector name (or number)/ground number/splice number and component identification. The abbreviation T/O is used in the component location section to indicate a point in which the wiring harness branches out to a component. The abbreviation N/S means Not Shown in the illustrations Section Identification and Information DESCRIPTION - SECTION IDENTIFICATION AND INFORMATION The wiring diagrams are grouped into individual sections. If a component is most likely found in a particular group, it will be shown complete (all wires, Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3210 connectors, and pins) within that group. For example, the Auto Shutdown Relay is most likely to be found in Powertrain Management, so it is shown there complete. It can, however, be shown partially in another group if it contains some associated wiring. Splice diagrams show the entire splice and provide references to other sections the splices serves. Splice Information only contains splice diagrams that are not shown in their entirety somewhere else in the wiring diagrams. Connector Pin-Outs shows each connector and the circuits involved with that connector. The connectors are identified using the name/number on the diagram pages. Removal REMOVAL 1. Disconnect battery. 2. Release Connector Lock (2). 3. Disconnect the connector (3) being repaired from its mating half/component. 4. Remove the dress cover (if applicable) (1). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3211 5. Release the Secondary Terminal Lock, if required (1). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3212 6. Position the connector locking finger away from the terminal using the proper special tool. Pull on the wire to remove the terminal from the connector. Installation Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3213 INSTALLATION 1. Insert the removed terminal in the same cavity on the repair connector. 2. Repeat steps for each terminal in the connector, being sure that all wires are inserted into the proper cavities. For additional connector pin-out identification, refer to the wiring diagrams. 3. When the connector is re-assembled, the secondary terminal lock must be placed in the locked position to prevent terminal push out. 4. Replace dress cover (if applicable). 5. Connect connector to its mating half/component. 6. Connect battery and test all affected systems. Removal REMOVAL 1. Disconnect the battery. 2. Locate the diode in the harness, and remove the protective covering. 3. Remove the diode from the harness, pay attention to the current flow direction (1) (2) (3). Installation INSTALLATION 1. Remove the insulation from the wires in the harness. Only remove enough insulation to solder in the new diode. 2. Install the new diode in the harness, making sure current flow is correct. If necessary, refer to the appropriate wiring diagram for current flow. 3. Solder the connection together using rosin core type solder only. Do not use acid core solder. 4. Tape the diode to the harness using electrical tape. Make sure the diode is completely sealed from the elements. 5. Re-connect the battery and test affected systems. Removal REMOVAL 1. Follow steps for removing terminals described in the connector removal section. 2. Cut the wire 6 inches from the back of the connector. Installation INSTALLATION 1. Select a wire from the terminal repair kit that best matches the color and gage of the wire being repaired. 2. Cut the repair wire to the proper length and remove one-half (1/2) inch of insulation. 3. Splice the repair wire to the wire harness (see wire splicing procedure). See: Service Procedures/Wire Splicing 4. Insert the repaired wire into the connector. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3214 5. Install the connector locking wedge, if required, and reconnect the connector to its mating half/component. 6. Re-tape the wire harness starting at 1-1/2 inches behind the connector and 2 inches past the repair. 7. Connect battery and test all affected systems. Wire Splicing STANDARD PROCEDURE - WIRE SPLICING When splicing a wire, it is important that the correct gage be used as shown in the wiring diagrams. 1. Remove one-half (1/2) inch of insulation from each wire that needs to be spliced. 2. Place a piece of adhesive lined heat shrink tubing on one side of the wire. Make sure the tubing will be long enough to cover and seal the entire repair area. 3. Place the strands of wire overlapping each other inside of the splice clip (1). 4. Using crimping tool (1), Mopar p/n 05019912AA, crimp the splice clip and wires together. 5. Solder (3) the connection (2) together using rosin core type solder (1) only. CAUTION: DO NOT USE ACID CORE SOLDER. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3215 6. Center the heat shrink tubing (2) over the joint and heat using a heat gun. Heat the joint until the tubing is tightly sealed and sealant (1) comes out of both ends of the tubing. Special Tools WIRING/TERMINAL PROBING TOOL PACKAGE 6807 TERMINAL PICK TOOL SET 6680 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3216 TERMINAL REMOVING TOOLS 6932 AND 8638 TERMINAL REMOVING TOOL 6934 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3217 Body Control Module: Diagnostic Aids Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) Sensitive Devices STANDARD PROCEDURE - ELECTROSTATIC DISCHARGE (ESD) SENSITIVE DEVICES All ESD sensitive components are solid state and a symbol is used to indicate this. When handling any component with this symbol, comply with the following procedures to reduce the possibility of electrostatic charge build up on the body and inadvertent discharge into the component. If it is not known whether the part is ESD sensitive, assume that it is. 1. Always touch a known good ground before handling the part. This should be repeated while handling the part and more frequently after sliding across a seat, sitting down from a standing position, or walking a distance. 2. Avoid touching electrical terminals of the part, unless instructed to do so by a written procedure. 3. When using a voltmeter, be sure to connect the ground lead first. 4. Do not remove the part from it's protective packing until it is time to install the part. 5. Before removing the part from it's package, ground the package to a known good ground on the vehicle. Testing Of Voltage Potential STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING OF VOLTAGE POTENTIAL 1. Connect the ground lead of a voltmeter to a known good ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the voltmeter to the selected test point. The vehicle ignition may need to be turned ON to check voltage. Refer to the appropriate test procedure. Testing For Continuity Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3218 STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING FOR CONTINUITY 1. Remove the fuse (1) for the circuit being checked or, disconnect the battery. 2. Connect one lead of the ohmmeter to one side of the circuit being tested 3. Connect the other lead to the other end of the circuit being tested. Low or no resistance means good continuity. Testing For A Short To Ground STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING FOR A SHORT TO GROUND 1. Remove the fuse and disconnect all items involved with the fuse. 2. Connect a test light or a voltmeter across the terminals of the fuse. 3. Starting at the fuse block, wiggle the wiring harness about six to eight inches apart and watch the voltmeter/test lamp. 4. If the voltmeter registers voltage or the test lamp glows, there is a short to ground in that general area of the wiring harness. Testing For A Short To Ground On Fuses Powering Several Loads STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING FOR A SHORT TO GROUND ON FUSES POWERING SEVERAL LOADS 1. Refer to the wiring diagrams and disconnect or isolate all items on the suspected fused circuits. 2. Replace the blown fuse. 3. Supply power to the fuse by turning ON the ignition switch or re-connecting the battery. 4. Start connecting or energizing the items in the fuse circuit one at a time. When the fuse blows the circuit with the short to ground has been isolated. Testing For A Voltage Drop STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING FOR A VOLTAGE DROP Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3219 1. Connect the positive lead of the voltmeter to the side of the circuit closest to the battery. 2. Connect the other lead of the voltmeter to the other side of the switch, component or circuit. 3. Operate the item. 4. The voltmeter will show the difference in voltage between the two points. Troubleshooting Wiring Problems DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING - WIRING HARNESS TROUBLESHOOTING TOOLS When diagnosing a problem in an electrical circuit there are several common tools necessary. These tools are listed and explained below. - Jumper Wire - This is a test wire used to connect two points of a circuit. It can be used to bypass an open in a circuit. WARNING: Never use a jumper wire across a load, such as a motor, connected between a battery feed and ground. - Voltmeter - Used to check for voltage on a circuit. Always connect the black lead to a known good ground and the red lead to the positive side of the circuit. CAUTION: Most of the electrical components used in today's vehicles are Solid State. When checking voltages in these circuits, use a meter with a 10 - megohm or greater impedance rating. - Ohmmeter - Used to check the resistance between two points of a circuit. Low or no resistance in a circuit means good continuity. CAUTION: Most of the electrical components used in today's vehicles are Solid State. When checking resistance in these circuits use a meter with a 10 - megohm or greater impedance rating. In addition, make sure the power is disconnected from the circuit. Circuits that are powered up by the vehicle's electrical system can cause damage to the equipment and provide false readings. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3220 - Probing Tools - These tools are used for probing terminals in connectors. Select the proper size tool from Special Tool Package 6807, and insert the probing end (2) into the terminal being tested. Use the other end of the tool (1) to insert the meter probe. INTERMITTENT AND POOR CONNECTIONS Most intermittent electrical problems are caused by faulty electrical connections or wiring. It is also possible for a sticking component or relay to cause a problem. Before condemning a component or wiring assembly, check the following items. - Connectors are fully seated - Spread terminals, or terminal push out - Terminals in the wiring assembly are fully seated into the connector/component and locked into position - Dirt or corrosion on the terminals. Any amount of corrosion or dirt could cause an intermittent problem - Damaged connector/component casing exposing the item to dirt or moisture - Wire insulation that has rubbed through causing a short to ground - Some or all of the wiring strands broken inside of the insulation - Wiring broken inside of the insulation TROUBLESHOOTING WIRING PROBLEMS When troubleshooting wiring problems there are six steps which can aid in the procedure. The steps are listed and explained below. Always check for non-factory items added to the vehicle before doing any diagnosis. If the vehicle is equipped with these items, disconnect them to verify these add-on items are not the cause of the problem. 1. Verify the problem. 2. Verify any related symptoms. Do this by performing operational checks on components that are in the same circuit. Refer to the wiring diagrams. 3. Analyze the symptoms. Use the wiring diagrams to determine what the circuit is doing, where the problem most likely is occurring and where the diagnosis will continue. 4. Isolate the problem area. 5. Repair the problem area. 6. Verify the proper operation. For this step, check for proper operation of all items on the repaired circuit. Refer to the wiring diagrams. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 198 Engine Control Module: Locations Component ID 198 Component ID: 198 Component : MODULE-POWERTRAIN CONTROL Connector: Name : MODULE-POWERTRAIN CONTROL C1 Color : BLACK/BLACK # of pins : 38 Qualifier : (DIESEL) Pin Circuit Description 123456- 789-10 11 F1 20PK/WT FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) 12 F1 20PK/WT FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) 13 14 15 16 17 18 - - Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 198 > Page 3225 19 T160 20DG/WT SENSOR GROUND 20 T5 20DG/YL AUTOSTICK (ERS)-TOW/HAUL SIGNAL 21 22 23 24 25 26 - 27 F856 20YL/PK 5 VOLT SUPPLY 28 29 A918 20RD FUSED B(+) 30 T751 20YL IGNITION START 31 32 33 34 D65 20WT/LG CAN C BUS (+) 35 D64 20WT/LB CAN C BUS (-) 36 38 Component Location - 29 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 198 > Page 3226 Component Location - 6 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 198 > Page 3227 Connector: Name : MODULE-POWERTRAIN CONTROL C1 Color : BLACK/BLACK # of pins : 38 Qualifier : (GAS) Pin Circuit Description 1 K98 18DB/YL COIL CONTROL NO. 8 2-3 K97 18DB/YL COIL CONTROL NO. 7 3 K97 18BR COIL CONTROL NO. 7 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 198 > Page 3228 4 K28 18BR/LB INJECTOR CONTROL NO. 8 5 K26 18BR/YL INJECTOR CONTROL NO. 7 6-7-8-9 Z130 16BK/BR GROUND 10 A918 16RD FUSED B(+) 11 F202 20PK/GY FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) 12 F1 20PK/WT FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (OFF-RUN-START) 13 - 14 - 15 - 16 - 17 - 18 Z131 16BK/DG GROUND 19 Z951 16BK/YL GROUND 20 G6 16VT/GY OIL PRESSURE SIGNAL 21 - 22 - 23 - 24 A804 18RD/GY GEN SENSE 25 - 26 - 27 F856 20YL/PK 5 VOLT SUPPLY 28 K452 20BR/LB MDS SOL CONTROL NO. 4 29 A918 16RD FUSED B(+) 30 T751 20YL IGNITION START 31 K141 20DB/YL O2 1/2 SIGNAL 32 K902 20BR/DG O2 RETURN (UPSTREAM) 33 K243 20BR O2 2/2 SIGNAL 34 D65 20WT/LG CAN C BUS (+) 35 D64 20WT/LB CAN C BUS (-) 36 - 37 - 38 K342 16BR/WT ASD CONTROL OUTPUT Component Location - 29 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 198 > Page 3229 Component Location - 6 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 198 > Page 3230 Connector: Name : MODULE-POWERTRAIN CONTROL C2 Color : BLACK/ORANGE # of pins : 38 Qualifier : (GAS) Pin Circuit Description 1 K10 18DB/OR COIL CONTROL NO. 6 2 K16 18DB/YL COIL CONTROL NO. 5 3 K15 18DB/GY COIL CONTROL NO. 4 4 K58 18BR/VT INJECTOR CONTROL NO. 6 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 198 > Page 3231 5 K38 18BR/OR INJECTOR CONTROL NO. 5 6 K447 20TN/YL ETC MOTOR (+) 7 K18 18DB/OR COIL CONTROL NO. 3 8 K35 20DB/VT EGR SOL CONTROL 9 K17 18DB/TN COIL CONTROL NO. 2 10 K19 18DB/DG COIL CONTROL NO. 1 11 K14 18BR/TN INJECTOR CONTROL NO. 4 12 K13 18BR/LB INJECTOR CONTROL NO. 3 13 K12 18BR/DB INJECTOR CONTROL NO. 2 14 K11 18BR/YL INJECTOR CONTROL NO. 1 15 K922 20BR/DB TP SENSOR RETURN 16 K453 20BR/DG MDS SOL CONTROL NO. 6 17 K199 20BR/VT O2 2/1 HEATER CONTROL 18 K99 20BR/LG O2 1/1 HEATER CONTROL SUPPLY 19 K20 18BR/GY GEN FIELD CONTROL 20 K2 20VT/OR ECT SIGNAL 21 K22 20BR/OR TP NO. 1 SIGNAL 22 K34 20DB/LG EGR SIGNAL 23 K1 20VT/BR MAP SIGNAL 24 K942 20BR/LG KNOCK SENSOR NO. 1 RETURN 25 K42 20DB/YL KNOCK SENSOR NO. 1 SIGNAL 26 - 27 K900 20DB/DG SENSOR GROUND 28 K122 20BR/DG TP NO. 2 SIGNAL 29 F855 20PK/YL 5 VOLT SUPPLY 30 K21 20DB/LG IAT SIGNAL 31 K41 20DB/LB O2 1/1 SIGNAL 32 K904 20DB/DG O2 RETURN (DOWNSTREAM) 33 K43 20DB/LG O2 2/1 SIGNAL 34 K44 20DB/GY CMP SIGNAL 35 K24 20BR/LB CKP SIGNAL 36 K242 20BR/WT KNOCK SENSOR NO. 2 SIGNAL 37 K924 20WT/BR KNOCK SENSOR NO. 2 RETURN 38 K448 20TN/OR ETC MOTOR (-) Component Location - 29 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 198 > Page 3232 Component Location - 6 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 198 > Page 3233 Connector: Name : MODULE-POWERTRAIN CONTROL C3 Color : BLACK/NATURAL # of pins : 38 Qualifier : (GAS) Pin Circuit Description 1-2-3 K51 20BR/WT ASD CONTROL 4-- Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 198 > Page 3234 5 V35 20VT/OR S/C VENT SOL CONTROL 5 K454 20BR/OR MDS SOL CONTROL NO. 7 6 K451 20BR/WT MDS SOL CONTROL NO. 1 7 V32 20VT/YL SPEED CONTROL SUPPLY 8-9 K299 20BR/WT O2 1/2 HEATER CONTROL SUPPLY 10 K399 18BR/GY O2 2/2 HEATER CONTROL 11 C13 20LB/OR A/C CLUTCH CONTROL 12 V36 20VT/YL S/C VACUUM SOL CONTROL 13 - 14 V32 20VT/YL BRAKE SWITCH NO. 2 SIGNAL 15 V937 20VT/BR S/C SWITCH RETURN 16 K167 20BR/YL APPS NO. 1 RETURN 17 K400 20BR/VT APPS NO. 2 RETURN 18 V38 20VT/OR S/C SWITCH NO. 2 SIGNAL 19 K342 16BR/WT ASD CONTROL OUTPUT 20 K52 20DB/WT EVAP PURGE SOL CONTROL 21 T41 20YL/DB TRS T41 SIGNAL (P/N) 22 G113 20VT PTO SENSE 22 G113 18PK/YL PTO SENSE 23 B29 20DG/WT BRAKE SWITCH NO. 1 SIGNAL 24 - 25 K23 20BR/WT APPS NO. 1 SIGNAL 26 - 27 T5 20DG/YL AUTOSTICK (ERS)-TOW/HAUL SIGNAL 28 K342 16BR/WT ASD CONTROL OUTPUT 29 K70 20DB/BR EVAP PURGE SOL SIGNAL 30 K66 20DB/WT P/S SWITCH SIGNAL 31 - 32 - 33 G24 20VT/BR OIL TEMPERATURE SIGNAL 34 V37 20VT S/C SWITCH NO. 1 SIGNAL 35 K107 20VT/WT ESM SIGNAL 36 K29 20WT/BR APPS NO. 2 SIGNAL 37 K31 20BR FUEL PUMP CONTROL 38 T752 20DG/OR STARTER SOLENOID CONTROL Component Location - 29 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 198 > Page 3235 Component Location - 6 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 198 > Page 3236 Connector: Name : MODULE-POWERTRAIN CONTROL C4 Color : BLACK/GREEN # of pins : 38 Qualifier : (DIESEL) Pin Circuit Description 1 T160 20YL/GY SENSOR GROUND 2 T259 20YL/DG 4C CONTROL 3- Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 198 > Page 3237 4 T140 20YL/GY MS CONTROL 56 T219 20YL/LG 2C CONTROL 78 T59 20YL/LB UD CONTROL 910 T20 20DG/BK L/R CONTROL 11 T118 20DG LP VFS CONTROL 12 Z133 18BK/LG GROUND 13 Z133 18BK/LG GROUND 14 Z133 18BK/LG GROUND 15 T1 20DG/LB TRS T1 SIGNAL 16 T3 20DG/DB TRS T3 SIGNAL 17 T6 20DG TOW/HAUL OVERDRIVE OFF SWITCH SIGNAL 18 T515 20YL/DB TRANSMISSION CONTROL 19 T16 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT 20 T48 20BR/YL 4C PRESSURE SIGNAL 21 T29 20YL/WT UD PRESSURE SIGNAL 22 T9 20DG/TN OD PRESSURE SIGNAL 23 24 25 26 T4 20DG/LB TRS T2 SIGNAL 27 T41 20YL/DB TRS T41 SIGNAL (P/N) 28 T16 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT 29 T50 20DG/PK L/R PRESSURE SIGNAL 30 T147 20DG/YL 2C PRESSURE SIGNAL 31 T38 20YL/BR LINE PRESSURE SIGNAL 32 T14 20DG/BR OUTPUT SPEED SIGNAL 33 T52 20DG/OR INPUT SPEED SIGNAL 34 T13 20DG/VT SPEED SENSOR GROUND 35 T54 20DG/OR TRANSMISSION TEMPERATURE SIGNAL 36 37 T42 20DG/YL TRS T42 SIGNAL 38 T16 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT Component Location - 29 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 198 > Page 3238 Component Location - 6 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 198 > Page 3239 Connector: Name : MODULE-POWERTRAIN CONTROL C4 Color : BLACK/GREEN # of pins : 38 Qualifier : (GAS) Pin Circuit Description 1 T60 20YL/GY OD SOLENOID CONTROL 2 T259 20YL/DG 4C CONTROL 2 T59 20YL/LB UD CONTROL 3-- Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 198 > Page 3240 4 T140 20YL/GY MS CONTROL 5-6 T219 20YL/LG 2C CONTROL 6 T19 18YL/DB 2/4 SOLENOID CONTROL 7-8 T59 20YL/LB UD CONTROL 9-10 T20 20DG/WT L/R CONTROL 11 T118 20DG LP VFS CONTROL 12 Z908 18BK GROUND 13 Z977 18BK GROUND 14 Z904 18BK GROUND 15 T1 20DG/LB TRS T1 SIGNAL 16 T3 20DG/DB TRS T3 SIGNAL 17 T6 20DG TOW/HAUL OVERDRIVE OFF SWITCH SIGNAL 18 T515 20YL/DB TRANSMISSION CONTROL 19 T16 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT 20 T48 20BR/YL 4C PRESSURE SIGNAL 21 T29 20YL/WT UD PRESSURE SIGNAL 22 T9 20DG/TN OD PRESSURE SIGNAL 23 - 24 - 25 - 26 T4 20DG/LB TRS T2 SIGNAL 27 - 28 T16 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT 29 T50 20DG/PK L/R PRESSURE SIGNAL 30 T147 20DG/YL 2C PRESSURE SIGNAL 30 T47 18YL/DG 2/4 PRESSURE SIGNAL 31 T38 20YL/BR LINE PRESSURE SIGNAL 32 T14 20DG/BR OUTPUT SPEED SIGNAL 33 T52 20DG/OR INPUT SPEED SIGNAL 34 T13 20DG/VT SPEED SENSOR GROUND 35 T54 20DG/OR TRANSMISSION TEMPERATURE SIGNAL 36 - 37 T42 20DG/YL TRS T42 SIGNAL 38 T16 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT Component Location - 29 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 198 > Page 3241 Component Location - 6 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 198 > Page 3242 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 198 > Page 3243 Engine Control Module: Locations Component ID 211 Component ID: 211 Component : MODULE-POWERTRAIN CONTROL Connector: Name : MODULE-POWERTRAIN CONTROL C1 Color : BLACK/BLACK # of pins : 38 Qualifier : (DIESEL) Pin Circuit Description 123456- 789-10 11 F1 20PK/WT FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) 12 F1 20PK/WT FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) 13 14 15 16 17 18 - - Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 198 > Page 3244 19 T160 20DG/WT SENSOR GROUND 20 T5 20DG/YL AUTOSTICK (ERS)-TOW/HAUL SIGNAL 21 22 23 24 25 26 - 27 F856 20YL/PK 5 VOLT SUPPLY 28 29 A918 20RD FUSED B(+) 30 T751 20YL IGNITION START 31 32 33 34 D65 20WT/LG CAN C BUS (+) 35 D64 20WT/LB CAN C BUS (-) 36 38 Component Location - 29 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 198 > Page 3245 Component Location - 6 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 198 > Page 3246 Connector: Name : MODULE-POWERTRAIN CONTROL C1 Color : BLACK/BLACK # of pins : 38 Qualifier : (GAS) Pin Circuit Description 1 K98 18DB/YL COIL CONTROL NO. 8 2-3 K97 18DB/YL COIL CONTROL NO. 7 3 K97 18BR COIL CONTROL NO. 7 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 198 > Page 3247 4 K28 18BR/LB INJECTOR CONTROL NO. 8 5 K26 18BR/YL INJECTOR CONTROL NO. 7 6-7-8-9 Z130 16BK/BR GROUND 10 A918 16RD FUSED B(+) 11 F202 20PK/GY FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) 12 F1 20PK/WT FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (OFF-RUN-START) 13 - 14 - 15 - 16 - 17 - 18 Z131 16BK/DG GROUND 19 Z951 16BK/YL GROUND 20 G6 16VT/GY OIL PRESSURE SIGNAL 21 - 22 - 23 - 24 A804 18RD/GY GEN SENSE 25 - 26 - 27 F856 20YL/PK 5 VOLT SUPPLY 28 K452 20BR/LB MDS SOL CONTROL NO. 4 29 A918 16RD FUSED B(+) 30 T751 20YL IGNITION START 31 K141 20DB/YL O2 1/2 SIGNAL 32 K902 20BR/DG O2 RETURN (UPSTREAM) 33 K243 20BR O2 2/2 SIGNAL 34 D65 20WT/LG CAN C BUS (+) 35 D64 20WT/LB CAN C BUS (-) 36 - 37 - 38 K342 16BR/WT ASD CONTROL OUTPUT Component Location - 29 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 198 > Page 3248 Component Location - 6 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 198 > Page 3249 Connector: Name : MODULE-POWERTRAIN CONTROL C2 Color : BLACK/ORANGE # of pins : 38 Qualifier : (GAS) Pin Circuit Description 1 K10 18DB/OR COIL CONTROL NO. 6 2 K16 18DB/YL COIL CONTROL NO. 5 3 K15 18DB/GY COIL CONTROL NO. 4 4 K58 18BR/VT INJECTOR CONTROL NO. 6 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 198 > Page 3250 5 K38 18BR/OR INJECTOR CONTROL NO. 5 6 K447 20TN/YL ETC MOTOR (+) 7 K18 18DB/OR COIL CONTROL NO. 3 8 K35 20DB/VT EGR SOL CONTROL 9 K17 18DB/TN COIL CONTROL NO. 2 10 K19 18DB/DG COIL CONTROL NO. 1 11 K14 18BR/TN INJECTOR CONTROL NO. 4 12 K13 18BR/LB INJECTOR CONTROL NO. 3 13 K12 18BR/DB INJECTOR CONTROL NO. 2 14 K11 18BR/YL INJECTOR CONTROL NO. 1 15 K922 20BR/DB TP SENSOR RETURN 16 K453 20BR/DG MDS SOL CONTROL NO. 6 17 K199 20BR/VT O2 2/1 HEATER CONTROL 18 K99 20BR/LG O2 1/1 HEATER CONTROL SUPPLY 19 K20 18BR/GY GEN FIELD CONTROL 20 K2 20VT/OR ECT SIGNAL 21 K22 20BR/OR TP NO. 1 SIGNAL 22 K34 20DB/LG EGR SIGNAL 23 K1 20VT/BR MAP SIGNAL 24 K942 20BR/LG KNOCK SENSOR NO. 1 RETURN 25 K42 20DB/YL KNOCK SENSOR NO. 1 SIGNAL 26 - 27 K900 20DB/DG SENSOR GROUND 28 K122 20BR/DG TP NO. 2 SIGNAL 29 F855 20PK/YL 5 VOLT SUPPLY 30 K21 20DB/LG IAT SIGNAL 31 K41 20DB/LB O2 1/1 SIGNAL 32 K904 20DB/DG O2 RETURN (DOWNSTREAM) 33 K43 20DB/LG O2 2/1 SIGNAL 34 K44 20DB/GY CMP SIGNAL 35 K24 20BR/LB CKP SIGNAL 36 K242 20BR/WT KNOCK SENSOR NO. 2 SIGNAL 37 K924 20WT/BR KNOCK SENSOR NO. 2 RETURN 38 K448 20TN/OR ETC MOTOR (-) Component Location - 29 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 198 > Page 3251 Component Location - 6 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 198 > Page 3252 Connector: Name : MODULE-POWERTRAIN CONTROL C3 Color : BLACK/NATURAL # of pins : 38 Qualifier : (GAS) Pin Circuit Description 1-2-3 K51 20BR/WT ASD CONTROL 4-- Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 198 > Page 3253 5 V35 20VT/OR S/C VENT SOL CONTROL 5 K454 20BR/OR MDS SOL CONTROL NO. 7 6 K451 20BR/WT MDS SOL CONTROL NO. 1 7 V32 20VT/YL SPEED CONTROL SUPPLY 8-9 K299 20BR/WT O2 1/2 HEATER CONTROL SUPPLY 10 K399 18BR/GY O2 2/2 HEATER CONTROL 11 C13 20LB/OR A/C CLUTCH CONTROL 12 V36 20VT/YL S/C VACUUM SOL CONTROL 13 - 14 V32 20VT/YL BRAKE SWITCH NO. 2 SIGNAL 15 V937 20VT/BR S/C SWITCH RETURN 16 K167 20BR/YL APPS NO. 1 RETURN 17 K400 20BR/VT APPS NO. 2 RETURN 18 V38 20VT/OR S/C SWITCH NO. 2 SIGNAL 19 K342 16BR/WT ASD CONTROL OUTPUT 20 K52 20DB/WT EVAP PURGE SOL CONTROL 21 T41 20YL/DB TRS T41 SIGNAL (P/N) 22 G113 20VT PTO SENSE 22 G113 18PK/YL PTO SENSE 23 B29 20DG/WT BRAKE SWITCH NO. 1 SIGNAL 24 - 25 K23 20BR/WT APPS NO. 1 SIGNAL 26 - 27 T5 20DG/YL AUTOSTICK (ERS)-TOW/HAUL SIGNAL 28 K342 16BR/WT ASD CONTROL OUTPUT 29 K70 20DB/BR EVAP PURGE SOL SIGNAL 30 K66 20DB/WT P/S SWITCH SIGNAL 31 - 32 - 33 G24 20VT/BR OIL TEMPERATURE SIGNAL 34 V37 20VT S/C SWITCH NO. 1 SIGNAL 35 K107 20VT/WT ESM SIGNAL 36 K29 20WT/BR APPS NO. 2 SIGNAL 37 K31 20BR FUEL PUMP CONTROL 38 T752 20DG/OR STARTER SOLENOID CONTROL Component Location - 29 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 198 > Page 3254 Component Location - 6 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 198 > Page 3255 Connector: Name : MODULE-POWERTRAIN CONTROL C4 Color : BLACK/GREEN # of pins : 38 Qualifier : (DIESEL) Pin Circuit Description 1 T160 20YL/GY SENSOR GROUND 2 T259 20YL/DG 4C CONTROL 3- Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 198 > Page 3256 4 T140 20YL/GY MS CONTROL 56 T219 20YL/LG 2C CONTROL 78 T59 20YL/LB UD CONTROL 910 T20 20DG/BK L/R CONTROL 11 T118 20DG LP VFS CONTROL 12 Z133 18BK/LG GROUND 13 Z133 18BK/LG GROUND 14 Z133 18BK/LG GROUND 15 T1 20DG/LB TRS T1 SIGNAL 16 T3 20DG/DB TRS T3 SIGNAL 17 T6 20DG TOW/HAUL OVERDRIVE OFF SWITCH SIGNAL 18 T515 20YL/DB TRANSMISSION CONTROL 19 T16 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT 20 T48 20BR/YL 4C PRESSURE SIGNAL 21 T29 20YL/WT UD PRESSURE SIGNAL 22 T9 20DG/TN OD PRESSURE SIGNAL 23 24 25 26 T4 20DG/LB TRS T2 SIGNAL 27 T41 20YL/DB TRS T41 SIGNAL (P/N) 28 T16 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT 29 T50 20DG/PK L/R PRESSURE SIGNAL 30 T147 20DG/YL 2C PRESSURE SIGNAL 31 T38 20YL/BR LINE PRESSURE SIGNAL 32 T14 20DG/BR OUTPUT SPEED SIGNAL 33 T52 20DG/OR INPUT SPEED SIGNAL 34 T13 20DG/VT SPEED SENSOR GROUND 35 T54 20DG/OR TRANSMISSION TEMPERATURE SIGNAL 36 37 T42 20DG/YL TRS T42 SIGNAL 38 T16 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT Component Location - 29 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 198 > Page 3257 Component Location - 6 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 198 > Page 3258 Connector: Name : MODULE-POWERTRAIN CONTROL C4 Color : BLACK/GREEN # of pins : 38 Qualifier : (GAS) Pin Circuit Description 1 T60 20YL/GY OD SOLENOID CONTROL 2 T259 20YL/DG 4C CONTROL 2 T59 20YL/LB UD CONTROL 3-- Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 198 > Page 3259 4 T140 20YL/GY MS CONTROL 5-6 T219 20YL/LG 2C CONTROL 6 T19 18YL/DB 2/4 SOLENOID CONTROL 7-8 T59 20YL/LB UD CONTROL 9-10 T20 20DG/WT L/R CONTROL 11 T118 20DG LP VFS CONTROL 12 Z908 18BK GROUND 13 Z977 18BK GROUND 14 Z904 18BK GROUND 15 T1 20DG/LB TRS T1 SIGNAL 16 T3 20DG/DB TRS T3 SIGNAL 17 T6 20DG TOW/HAUL OVERDRIVE OFF SWITCH SIGNAL 18 T515 20YL/DB TRANSMISSION CONTROL 19 T16 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT 20 T48 20BR/YL 4C PRESSURE SIGNAL 21 T29 20YL/WT UD PRESSURE SIGNAL 22 T9 20DG/TN OD PRESSURE SIGNAL 23 - 24 - 25 - 26 T4 20DG/LB TRS T2 SIGNAL 27 - 28 T16 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT 29 T50 20DG/PK L/R PRESSURE SIGNAL 30 T147 20DG/YL 2C PRESSURE SIGNAL 30 T47 18YL/DG 2/4 PRESSURE SIGNAL 31 T38 20YL/BR LINE PRESSURE SIGNAL 32 T14 20DG/BR OUTPUT SPEED SIGNAL 33 T52 20DG/OR INPUT SPEED SIGNAL 34 T13 20DG/VT SPEED SENSOR GROUND 35 T54 20DG/OR TRANSMISSION TEMPERATURE SIGNAL 36 - 37 T42 20DG/YL TRS T42 SIGNAL 38 T16 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT Component Location - 29 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 198 > Page 3260 Component Location - 6 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 198 > Page 3261 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Engine Control Module: Diagram Information and Instructions Warnings WARNINGS - GENERAL WARNINGS provide information to prevent personal injury and vehicle damage. Below is a list of general warnings that should be followed any time a vehicle is being serviced. WARNING: Always wear safety glasses for eye protection. WARNING: Use safety stands anytime a procedure requires being under a vehicle. WARNING: Be sure that the ignition switch always is in the off position, unless the procedure requires it to be on. WARNING: Set the parking brake when working on any vehicle. An automatic transmission should be in park. A manual transmission should be in neutral. WARNING: Operate the engine only in a well-ventilated area. WARNING: Keep away from moving parts when the engine is running, especially the fan and belts. WARNING: To prevent serious burns, avoid contact with hot parts such as the radiator, exhaust manifold(s), tail pipe, catalytic converter and muffler. WARNING: Do not allow flame or sparks near the battery. Gases are always present in and around the battery. WARNING: Always remove rings, watches, loose hanging jewelry and avoid loose clothing. How to Use Wiring Diagrams DESCRIPTION - HOW TO USE WIRING DIAGRAMS DaimlerChrysler Corporation wiring diagrams are designed to provide information regarding the vehicles wiring content. In order to effectively use the wiring diagrams to diagnose and repair DaimlerChrysler Corporation vehicles, it is important to understand all of their features and characteristics. Diagrams are arranged such that the power (B+) side of the circuit is placed near the top of the page, and the ground (B-) side of the circuit is placed near the bottom of the page. All switches, components, and modules are shown in the at rest position with the doors closed and the key removed from the ignition. Components are shown two ways. A solid line around a component indicates that the component is complete. A dashed line around the component indicates that the component is being shown is not complete. Incomplete components have a reference number to indicate the page where the component is shown complete. It is important to realize that no attempt is made on the diagrams to represent components and wiring as they appear on the vehicle. For example, a short piece of wire is treated the same as a long one. In addition, switches and other components are shown as simply as possible, with regard to function only. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3264 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3265 SYMBOLS International symbols are used throughout the wiring diagrams. These symbols are consistent with those being used around the world. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3266 TERMINOLOGY This is a list of terms and definitions used in the wiring diagrams. LHD - Left Hand Drive Vehicles RHD - Right Hand Drive Vehicles ATX - Automatic Transmissions-Front Wheel Drive MTX Manual Transmissions-Front Wheel Drive Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3267 AT - Automatic Transmissions-Rear Wheel Drive MT - Manual Transmissions-Rear Wheel Drive SOHC - Single Over Head Cam Engine DOHC - Double Over Head Cam Engine Export - Vehicles Built For Sale In Markets Other Than North America Except Export - Vehicles Built For Sale In North America Circuit Functions DESCRIPTION - CIRCUIT FUNCTIONS All circuits in the diagrams use an alpha/numeric code to identify the wire and it's function. To identify which circuit code applies to a system, refer to the Circuit Identification Code Chart. This chart shows the main circuits only and does not show the secondary codes that may apply to some models. Circuit Information DESCRIPTION - CIRCUIT INFORMATION Each wire shown in the diagrams contains a code which identifies the main circuit, a specific part of the main circuit, gage of wire, and color. An example would be A 2 18 LB/YL. This is a Battery Feed circuit, level two, eighteen gauge, light blue with a yellow tracer. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3268 Connector, Ground and Splice Information DESCRIPTION - CONNECTOR, GROUND AND SPLICE INFORMATION CAUTION: Not all connectors are serviced. Some connectors are serviced only with a harness. A typical example might be the Supplemental Restraint System connectors. Always check parts availability before attempting a repair. IDENTIFICATION In-line connectors are identified by a number, as follows: - In-line connectors located in the engine compartment are C100 series numbers. - In-line connectors located in the instrument panel area are C200 series numbers. - In-line connectors located in the body are C300 series numbers. - Jumper harness connectors are C400 series numbers. - Grounds and ground connectors are identified with a "G" and follow the same series numbering as the in-line connectors. - Splices are identified with an "S" and follow the same series numbering as the in-line connectors. In addition, S001-S099 numbers are located in the engine compartment. - Component connectors are identified by the component name instead of a number. Multiple connectors on a component use a C1, C2, etc. identifier. LOCATIONS Vehicle/Locations contains the master connector/ground/splice location index charts with hyperlinks to the applicable location illustrations. The illustrations contain the connector name (or number)/ground number/splice number and component identification. The abbreviation T/O is used in the component location section to indicate a point in which the wiring harness branches out to a component. The abbreviation N/S means Not Shown in the illustrations Section Identification and Information DESCRIPTION - SECTION IDENTIFICATION AND INFORMATION The wiring diagrams are grouped into individual sections. If a component is most likely found in a particular group, it will be shown complete (all wires, Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3269 connectors, and pins) within that group. For example, the Auto Shutdown Relay is most likely to be found in Powertrain Management, so it is shown there complete. It can, however, be shown partially in another group if it contains some associated wiring. Splice diagrams show the entire splice and provide references to other sections the splices serves. Splice Information only contains splice diagrams that are not shown in their entirety somewhere else in the wiring diagrams. Connector Pin-Outs shows each connector and the circuits involved with that connector. The connectors are identified using the name/number on the diagram pages. Removal REMOVAL 1. Disconnect battery. 2. Release Connector Lock (2). 3. Disconnect the connector (3) being repaired from its mating half/component. 4. Remove the dress cover (if applicable) (1). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3270 5. Release the Secondary Terminal Lock, if required (1). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3271 6. Position the connector locking finger away from the terminal using the proper special tool. Pull on the wire to remove the terminal from the connector. Installation Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3272 INSTALLATION 1. Insert the removed terminal in the same cavity on the repair connector. 2. Repeat steps for each terminal in the connector, being sure that all wires are inserted into the proper cavities. For additional connector pin-out identification, refer to the wiring diagrams. 3. When the connector is re-assembled, the secondary terminal lock must be placed in the locked position to prevent terminal push out. 4. Replace dress cover (if applicable). 5. Connect connector to its mating half/component. 6. Connect battery and test all affected systems. Removal REMOVAL 1. Disconnect the battery. 2. Locate the diode in the harness, and remove the protective covering. 3. Remove the diode from the harness, pay attention to the current flow direction (1) (2) (3). Installation INSTALLATION 1. Remove the insulation from the wires in the harness. Only remove enough insulation to solder in the new diode. 2. Install the new diode in the harness, making sure current flow is correct. If necessary, refer to the appropriate wiring diagram for current flow. 3. Solder the connection together using rosin core type solder only. Do not use acid core solder. 4. Tape the diode to the harness using electrical tape. Make sure the diode is completely sealed from the elements. 5. Re-connect the battery and test affected systems. Removal REMOVAL 1. Follow steps for removing terminals described in the connector removal section. 2. Cut the wire 6 inches from the back of the connector. Installation INSTALLATION 1. Select a wire from the terminal repair kit that best matches the color and gage of the wire being repaired. 2. Cut the repair wire to the proper length and remove one-half (1/2) inch of insulation. 3. Splice the repair wire to the wire harness (see wire splicing procedure). See: Service Procedures/Wire Splicing 4. Insert the repaired wire into the connector. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3273 5. Install the connector locking wedge, if required, and reconnect the connector to its mating half/component. 6. Re-tape the wire harness starting at 1-1/2 inches behind the connector and 2 inches past the repair. 7. Connect battery and test all affected systems. Wire Splicing STANDARD PROCEDURE - WIRE SPLICING When splicing a wire, it is important that the correct gage be used as shown in the wiring diagrams. 1. Remove one-half (1/2) inch of insulation from each wire that needs to be spliced. 2. Place a piece of adhesive lined heat shrink tubing on one side of the wire. Make sure the tubing will be long enough to cover and seal the entire repair area. 3. Place the strands of wire overlapping each other inside of the splice clip (1). 4. Using crimping tool (1), Mopar p/n 05019912AA, crimp the splice clip and wires together. 5. Solder (3) the connection (2) together using rosin core type solder (1) only. CAUTION: DO NOT USE ACID CORE SOLDER. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3274 6. Center the heat shrink tubing (2) over the joint and heat using a heat gun. Heat the joint until the tubing is tightly sealed and sealant (1) comes out of both ends of the tubing. Special Tools WIRING/TERMINAL PROBING TOOL PACKAGE 6807 TERMINAL PICK TOOL SET 6680 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3275 TERMINAL REMOVING TOOLS 6932 AND 8638 TERMINAL REMOVING TOOL 6934 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3276 Engine Control Module: Diagnostic Aids Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) Sensitive Devices STANDARD PROCEDURE - ELECTROSTATIC DISCHARGE (ESD) SENSITIVE DEVICES All ESD sensitive components are solid state and a symbol is used to indicate this. When handling any component with this symbol, comply with the following procedures to reduce the possibility of electrostatic charge build up on the body and inadvertent discharge into the component. If it is not known whether the part is ESD sensitive, assume that it is. 1. Always touch a known good ground before handling the part. This should be repeated while handling the part and more frequently after sliding across a seat, sitting down from a standing position, or walking a distance. 2. Avoid touching electrical terminals of the part, unless instructed to do so by a written procedure. 3. When using a voltmeter, be sure to connect the ground lead first. 4. Do not remove the part from it's protective packing until it is time to install the part. 5. Before removing the part from it's package, ground the package to a known good ground on the vehicle. Testing Of Voltage Potential STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING OF VOLTAGE POTENTIAL 1. Connect the ground lead of a voltmeter to a known good ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the voltmeter to the selected test point. The vehicle ignition may need to be turned ON to check voltage. Refer to the appropriate test procedure. Testing For Continuity Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3277 STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING FOR CONTINUITY 1. Remove the fuse (1) for the circuit being checked or, disconnect the battery. 2. Connect one lead of the ohmmeter to one side of the circuit being tested 3. Connect the other lead to the other end of the circuit being tested. Low or no resistance means good continuity. Testing For A Short To Ground STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING FOR A SHORT TO GROUND 1. Remove the fuse and disconnect all items involved with the fuse. 2. Connect a test light or a voltmeter across the terminals of the fuse. 3. Starting at the fuse block, wiggle the wiring harness about six to eight inches apart and watch the voltmeter/test lamp. 4. If the voltmeter registers voltage or the test lamp glows, there is a short to ground in that general area of the wiring harness. Testing For A Short To Ground On Fuses Powering Several Loads STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING FOR A SHORT TO GROUND ON FUSES POWERING SEVERAL LOADS 1. Refer to the wiring diagrams and disconnect or isolate all items on the suspected fused circuits. 2. Replace the blown fuse. 3. Supply power to the fuse by turning ON the ignition switch or re-connecting the battery. 4. Start connecting or energizing the items in the fuse circuit one at a time. When the fuse blows the circuit with the short to ground has been isolated. Testing For A Voltage Drop STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING FOR A VOLTAGE DROP Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3278 1. Connect the positive lead of the voltmeter to the side of the circuit closest to the battery. 2. Connect the other lead of the voltmeter to the other side of the switch, component or circuit. 3. Operate the item. 4. The voltmeter will show the difference in voltage between the two points. Troubleshooting Wiring Problems DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING - WIRING HARNESS TROUBLESHOOTING TOOLS When diagnosing a problem in an electrical circuit there are several common tools necessary. These tools are listed and explained below. - Jumper Wire - This is a test wire used to connect two points of a circuit. It can be used to bypass an open in a circuit. WARNING: Never use a jumper wire across a load, such as a motor, connected between a battery feed and ground. - Voltmeter - Used to check for voltage on a circuit. Always connect the black lead to a known good ground and the red lead to the positive side of the circuit. CAUTION: Most of the electrical components used in today's vehicles are Solid State. When checking voltages in these circuits, use a meter with a 10 - megohm or greater impedance rating. - Ohmmeter - Used to check the resistance between two points of a circuit. Low or no resistance in a circuit means good continuity. CAUTION: Most of the electrical components used in today's vehicles are Solid State. When checking resistance in these circuits use a meter with a 10 - megohm or greater impedance rating. In addition, make sure the power is disconnected from the circuit. Circuits that are powered up by the vehicle's electrical system can cause damage to the equipment and provide false readings. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3279 - Probing Tools - These tools are used for probing terminals in connectors. Select the proper size tool from Special Tool Package 6807, and insert the probing end (2) into the terminal being tested. Use the other end of the tool (1) to insert the meter probe. INTERMITTENT AND POOR CONNECTIONS Most intermittent electrical problems are caused by faulty electrical connections or wiring. It is also possible for a sticking component or relay to cause a problem. Before condemning a component or wiring assembly, check the following items. - Connectors are fully seated - Spread terminals, or terminal push out - Terminals in the wiring assembly are fully seated into the connector/component and locked into position - Dirt or corrosion on the terminals. Any amount of corrosion or dirt could cause an intermittent problem - Damaged connector/component casing exposing the item to dirt or moisture - Wire insulation that has rubbed through causing a short to ground - Some or all of the wiring strands broken inside of the insulation - Wiring broken inside of the insulation TROUBLESHOOTING WIRING PROBLEMS When troubleshooting wiring problems there are six steps which can aid in the procedure. The steps are listed and explained below. Always check for non-factory items added to the vehicle before doing any diagnosis. If the vehicle is equipped with these items, disconnect them to verify these add-on items are not the cause of the problem. 1. Verify the problem. 2. Verify any related symptoms. Do this by performing operational checks on components that are in the same circuit. Refer to the wiring diagrams. 3. Analyze the symptoms. Use the wiring diagrams to determine what the circuit is doing, where the problem most likely is occurring and where the diagnosis will continue. 4. Isolate the problem area. 5. Repair the problem area. 6. Verify the proper operation. For this step, check for proper operation of all items on the repaired circuit. Refer to the wiring diagrams. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3280 Engine Control Module: Connector Views Component ID 198 Component ID: 198 Component : MODULE-POWERTRAIN CONTROL Connector: Name : MODULE-POWERTRAIN CONTROL C1 Color : BLACK/BLACK # of pins : 38 Qualifier : (DIESEL) Pin Circuit Description 12345- 6789-10 11 F1 20PK/WT FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) 12 F1 20PK/WT FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) 13 14 15 16 17 - Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3281 18 - - 19 T160 20DG/WT SENSOR GROUND 20 T5 20DG/YL AUTOSTICK (ERS)-TOW/HAUL SIGNAL 21 22 23 24 25 26 - 27 F856 20YL/PK 5 VOLT SUPPLY 28 29 A918 20RD FUSED B(+) 30 T751 20YL IGNITION START 31 32 33 34 D65 20WT/LG CAN C BUS (+) 35 D64 20WT/LB CAN C BUS (-) 36 38 Component Location - 29 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3282 Component Location - 6 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3283 Connector: Name : MODULE-POWERTRAIN CONTROL C1 Color : BLACK/BLACK # of pins : 38 Qualifier : (GAS) Pin Circuit Description 1 K98 18DB/YL COIL CONTROL NO. 8 2-3 K97 18DB/YL COIL CONTROL NO. 7 3 K97 18BR COIL CONTROL NO. 7 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3284 4 K28 18BR/LB INJECTOR CONTROL NO. 8 5 K26 18BR/YL INJECTOR CONTROL NO. 7 6-7-8-9 Z130 16BK/BR GROUND 10 A918 16RD FUSED B(+) 11 F202 20PK/GY FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) 12 F1 20PK/WT FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (OFF-RUN-START) 13 - 14 - 15 - 16 - 17 - 18 Z131 16BK/DG GROUND 19 Z951 16BK/YL GROUND 20 G6 16VT/GY OIL PRESSURE SIGNAL 21 - 22 - 23 - 24 A804 18RD/GY GEN SENSE 25 - 26 - 27 F856 20YL/PK 5 VOLT SUPPLY 28 K452 20BR/LB MDS SOL CONTROL NO. 4 29 A918 16RD FUSED B(+) 30 T751 20YL IGNITION START 31 K141 20DB/YL O2 1/2 SIGNAL 32 K902 20BR/DG O2 RETURN (UPSTREAM) 33 K243 20BR O2 2/2 SIGNAL 34 D65 20WT/LG CAN C BUS (+) 35 D64 20WT/LB CAN C BUS (-) 36 - 37 - 38 K342 16BR/WT ASD CONTROL OUTPUT Component Location - 29 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3285 Component Location - 6 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3286 Connector: Name : MODULE-POWERTRAIN CONTROL C2 Color : BLACK/ORANGE # of pins : 38 Qualifier : (GAS) Pin Circuit Description 1 K10 18DB/OR COIL CONTROL NO. 6 2 K16 18DB/YL COIL CONTROL NO. 5 3 K15 18DB/GY COIL CONTROL NO. 4 4 K58 18BR/VT INJECTOR CONTROL NO. 6 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3287 5 K38 18BR/OR INJECTOR CONTROL NO. 5 6 K447 20TN/YL ETC MOTOR (+) 7 K18 18DB/OR COIL CONTROL NO. 3 8 K35 20DB/VT EGR SOL CONTROL 9 K17 18DB/TN COIL CONTROL NO. 2 10 K19 18DB/DG COIL CONTROL NO. 1 11 K14 18BR/TN INJECTOR CONTROL NO. 4 12 K13 18BR/LB INJECTOR CONTROL NO. 3 13 K12 18BR/DB INJECTOR CONTROL NO. 2 14 K11 18BR/YL INJECTOR CONTROL NO. 1 15 K922 20BR/DB TP SENSOR RETURN 16 K453 20BR/DG MDS SOL CONTROL NO. 6 17 K199 20BR/VT O2 2/1 HEATER CONTROL 18 K99 20BR/LG O2 1/1 HEATER CONTROL SUPPLY 19 K20 18BR/GY GEN FIELD CONTROL 20 K2 20VT/OR ECT SIGNAL 21 K22 20BR/OR TP NO. 1 SIGNAL 22 K34 20DB/LG EGR SIGNAL 23 K1 20VT/BR MAP SIGNAL 24 K942 20BR/LG KNOCK SENSOR NO. 1 RETURN 25 K42 20DB/YL KNOCK SENSOR NO. 1 SIGNAL 26 - 27 K900 20DB/DG SENSOR GROUND 28 K122 20BR/DG TP NO. 2 SIGNAL 29 F855 20PK/YL 5 VOLT SUPPLY 30 K21 20DB/LG IAT SIGNAL 31 K41 20DB/LB O2 1/1 SIGNAL 32 K904 20DB/DG O2 RETURN (DOWNSTREAM) 33 K43 20DB/LG O2 2/1 SIGNAL 34 K44 20DB/GY CMP SIGNAL 35 K24 20BR/LB CKP SIGNAL 36 K242 20BR/WT KNOCK SENSOR NO. 2 SIGNAL 37 K924 20WT/BR KNOCK SENSOR NO. 2 RETURN 38 K448 20TN/OR ETC MOTOR (-) Component Location - 29 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3288 Component Location - 6 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3289 Connector: Name : MODULE-POWERTRAIN CONTROL C3 Color : BLACK/NATURAL # of pins : 38 Qualifier : (GAS) Pin Circuit Description 1-2-3 K51 20BR/WT ASD CONTROL 4-- Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3290 5 V35 20VT/OR S/C VENT SOL CONTROL 5 K454 20BR/OR MDS SOL CONTROL NO. 7 6 K451 20BR/WT MDS SOL CONTROL NO. 1 7 V32 20VT/YL SPEED CONTROL SUPPLY 8-9 K299 20BR/WT O2 1/2 HEATER CONTROL SUPPLY 10 K399 18BR/GY O2 2/2 HEATER CONTROL 11 C13 20LB/OR A/C CLUTCH CONTROL 12 V36 20VT/YL S/C VACUUM SOL CONTROL 13 - 14 V32 20VT/YL BRAKE SWITCH NO. 2 SIGNAL 15 V937 20VT/BR S/C SWITCH RETURN 16 K167 20BR/YL APPS NO. 1 RETURN 17 K400 20BR/VT APPS NO. 2 RETURN 18 V38 20VT/OR S/C SWITCH NO. 2 SIGNAL 19 K342 16BR/WT ASD CONTROL OUTPUT 20 K52 20DB/WT EVAP PURGE SOL CONTROL 21 T41 20YL/DB TRS T41 SIGNAL (P/N) 22 G113 20VT PTO SENSE 22 G113 18PK/YL PTO SENSE 23 B29 20DG/WT BRAKE SWITCH NO. 1 SIGNAL 24 - 25 K23 20BR/WT APPS NO. 1 SIGNAL 26 - 27 T5 20DG/YL AUTOSTICK (ERS)-TOW/HAUL SIGNAL 28 K342 16BR/WT ASD CONTROL OUTPUT 29 K70 20DB/BR EVAP PURGE SOL SIGNAL 30 K66 20DB/WT P/S SWITCH SIGNAL 31 - 32 - 33 G24 20VT/BR OIL TEMPERATURE SIGNAL 34 V37 20VT S/C SWITCH NO. 1 SIGNAL 35 K107 20VT/WT ESM SIGNAL 36 K29 20WT/BR APPS NO. 2 SIGNAL 37 K31 20BR FUEL PUMP CONTROL 38 T752 20DG/OR STARTER SOLENOID CONTROL Component Location - 29 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3291 Component Location - 6 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3292 Connector: Name : MODULE-POWERTRAIN CONTROL C4 Color : BLACK/GREEN # of pins : 38 Qualifier : (DIESEL) Pin Circuit Description 1 T160 20YL/GY SENSOR GROUND 2 T259 20YL/DG 4C CONTROL 3- Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3293 4 T140 20YL/GY MS CONTROL 56 T219 20YL/LG 2C CONTROL 78 T59 20YL/LB UD CONTROL 910 T20 20DG/BK L/R CONTROL 11 T118 20DG LP VFS CONTROL 12 Z133 18BK/LG GROUND 13 Z133 18BK/LG GROUND 14 Z133 18BK/LG GROUND 15 T1 20DG/LB TRS T1 SIGNAL 16 T3 20DG/DB TRS T3 SIGNAL 17 T6 20DG TOW/HAUL OVERDRIVE OFF SWITCH SIGNAL 18 T515 20YL/DB TRANSMISSION CONTROL 19 T16 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT 20 T48 20BR/YL 4C PRESSURE SIGNAL 21 T29 20YL/WT UD PRESSURE SIGNAL 22 T9 20DG/TN OD PRESSURE SIGNAL 23 24 25 26 T4 20DG/LB TRS T2 SIGNAL 27 T41 20YL/DB TRS T41 SIGNAL (P/N) 28 T16 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT 29 T50 20DG/PK L/R PRESSURE SIGNAL 30 T147 20DG/YL 2C PRESSURE SIGNAL 31 T38 20YL/BR LINE PRESSURE SIGNAL 32 T14 20DG/BR OUTPUT SPEED SIGNAL 33 T52 20DG/OR INPUT SPEED SIGNAL 34 T13 20DG/VT SPEED SENSOR GROUND 35 T54 20DG/OR TRANSMISSION TEMPERATURE SIGNAL 36 37 T42 20DG/YL TRS T42 SIGNAL 38 T16 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT Component Location - 29 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3294 Component Location - 6 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3295 Connector: Name : MODULE-POWERTRAIN CONTROL C4 Color : BLACK/GREEN # of pins : 38 Qualifier : (GAS) Pin Circuit Description 1 T60 20YL/GY OD SOLENOID CONTROL 2 T259 20YL/DG 4C CONTROL 2 T59 20YL/LB UD CONTROL 3-- Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3296 4 T140 20YL/GY MS CONTROL 5-6 T219 20YL/LG 2C CONTROL 6 T19 18YL/DB 2/4 SOLENOID CONTROL 7-8 T59 20YL/LB UD CONTROL 9-10 T20 20DG/WT L/R CONTROL 11 T118 20DG LP VFS CONTROL 12 Z908 18BK GROUND 13 Z977 18BK GROUND 14 Z904 18BK GROUND 15 T1 20DG/LB TRS T1 SIGNAL 16 T3 20DG/DB TRS T3 SIGNAL 17 T6 20DG TOW/HAUL OVERDRIVE OFF SWITCH SIGNAL 18 T515 20YL/DB TRANSMISSION CONTROL 19 T16 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT 20 T48 20BR/YL 4C PRESSURE SIGNAL 21 T29 20YL/WT UD PRESSURE SIGNAL 22 T9 20DG/TN OD PRESSURE SIGNAL 23 - 24 - 25 - 26 T4 20DG/LB TRS T2 SIGNAL 27 - 28 T16 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT 29 T50 20DG/PK L/R PRESSURE SIGNAL 30 T147 20DG/YL 2C PRESSURE SIGNAL 30 T47 18YL/DG 2/4 PRESSURE SIGNAL 31 T38 20YL/BR LINE PRESSURE SIGNAL 32 T14 20DG/BR OUTPUT SPEED SIGNAL 33 T52 20DG/OR INPUT SPEED SIGNAL 34 T13 20DG/VT SPEED SENSOR GROUND 35 T54 20DG/OR TRANSMISSION TEMPERATURE SIGNAL 36 - 37 T42 20DG/YL TRS T42 SIGNAL 38 T16 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT Component Location - 29 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3297 Component Location - 6 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3298 Component ID 211 Component ID: 211 Component : MODULE-POWERTRAIN CONTROL Connector: Name : MODULE-POWERTRAIN CONTROL C1 Color : BLACK/BLACK # of pins : 38 Qualifier : (DIESEL) Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3299 Pin Circuit Description 123456789-10 11 F1 20PK/WT FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) 12 F1 20PK/WT FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) 13 14 15 16 17 18 - 19 T160 20DG/WT SENSOR GROUND 20 T5 20DG/YL AUTOSTICK (ERS)-TOW/HAUL SIGNAL 21 22 23 24 25 26 - 27 F856 20YL/PK 5 VOLT SUPPLY 28 29 A918 20RD FUSED B(+) 30 T751 20YL IGNITION START 31 - 32 33 34 D65 20WT/LG CAN C BUS (+) 35 D64 20WT/LB CAN C BUS (-) 36 38 Component Location - 29 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3300 Component Location - 6 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3301 Connector: Name : MODULE-POWERTRAIN CONTROL C1 Color : BLACK/BLACK # of pins : 38 Qualifier : (GAS) Pin Circuit Description 1 K98 18DB/YL COIL CONTROL NO. 8 2-3 K97 18DB/YL COIL CONTROL NO. 7 3 K97 18BR COIL CONTROL NO. 7 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3302 4 K28 18BR/LB INJECTOR CONTROL NO. 8 5 K26 18BR/YL INJECTOR CONTROL NO. 7 6-7-8-9 Z130 16BK/BR GROUND 10 A918 16RD FUSED B(+) 11 F202 20PK/GY FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) 12 F1 20PK/WT FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (OFF-RUN-START) 13 - 14 - 15 - 16 - 17 - 18 Z131 16BK/DG GROUND 19 Z951 16BK/YL GROUND 20 G6 16VT/GY OIL PRESSURE SIGNAL 21 - 22 - 23 - 24 A804 18RD/GY GEN SENSE 25 - 26 - 27 F856 20YL/PK 5 VOLT SUPPLY 28 K452 20BR/LB MDS SOL CONTROL NO. 4 29 A918 16RD FUSED B(+) 30 T751 20YL IGNITION START 31 K141 20DB/YL O2 1/2 SIGNAL 32 K902 20BR/DG O2 RETURN (UPSTREAM) 33 K243 20BR O2 2/2 SIGNAL 34 D65 20WT/LG CAN C BUS (+) 35 D64 20WT/LB CAN C BUS (-) 36 - 37 - 38 K342 16BR/WT ASD CONTROL OUTPUT Component Location - 29 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3303 Component Location - 6 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3304 Connector: Name : MODULE-POWERTRAIN CONTROL C2 Color : BLACK/ORANGE # of pins : 38 Qualifier : (GAS) Pin Circuit Description 1 K10 18DB/OR COIL CONTROL NO. 6 2 K16 18DB/YL COIL CONTROL NO. 5 3 K15 18DB/GY COIL CONTROL NO. 4 4 K58 18BR/VT INJECTOR CONTROL NO. 6 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3305 5 K38 18BR/OR INJECTOR CONTROL NO. 5 6 K447 20TN/YL ETC MOTOR (+) 7 K18 18DB/OR COIL CONTROL NO. 3 8 K35 20DB/VT EGR SOL CONTROL 9 K17 18DB/TN COIL CONTROL NO. 2 10 K19 18DB/DG COIL CONTROL NO. 1 11 K14 18BR/TN INJECTOR CONTROL NO. 4 12 K13 18BR/LB INJECTOR CONTROL NO. 3 13 K12 18BR/DB INJECTOR CONTROL NO. 2 14 K11 18BR/YL INJECTOR CONTROL NO. 1 15 K922 20BR/DB TP SENSOR RETURN 16 K453 20BR/DG MDS SOL CONTROL NO. 6 17 K199 20BR/VT O2 2/1 HEATER CONTROL 18 K99 20BR/LG O2 1/1 HEATER CONTROL SUPPLY 19 K20 18BR/GY GEN FIELD CONTROL 20 K2 20VT/OR ECT SIGNAL 21 K22 20BR/OR TP NO. 1 SIGNAL 22 K34 20DB/LG EGR SIGNAL 23 K1 20VT/BR MAP SIGNAL 24 K942 20BR/LG KNOCK SENSOR NO. 1 RETURN 25 K42 20DB/YL KNOCK SENSOR NO. 1 SIGNAL 26 - 27 K900 20DB/DG SENSOR GROUND 28 K122 20BR/DG TP NO. 2 SIGNAL 29 F855 20PK/YL 5 VOLT SUPPLY 30 K21 20DB/LG IAT SIGNAL 31 K41 20DB/LB O2 1/1 SIGNAL 32 K904 20DB/DG O2 RETURN (DOWNSTREAM) 33 K43 20DB/LG O2 2/1 SIGNAL 34 K44 20DB/GY CMP SIGNAL 35 K24 20BR/LB CKP SIGNAL 36 K242 20BR/WT KNOCK SENSOR NO. 2 SIGNAL 37 K924 20WT/BR KNOCK SENSOR NO. 2 RETURN 38 K448 20TN/OR ETC MOTOR (-) Component Location - 29 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3306 Component Location - 6 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3307 Connector: Name : MODULE-POWERTRAIN CONTROL C3 Color : BLACK/NATURAL # of pins : 38 Qualifier : (GAS) Pin Circuit Description 1-2-3 K51 20BR/WT ASD CONTROL 4-- Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3308 5 V35 20VT/OR S/C VENT SOL CONTROL 5 K454 20BR/OR MDS SOL CONTROL NO. 7 6 K451 20BR/WT MDS SOL CONTROL NO. 1 7 V32 20VT/YL SPEED CONTROL SUPPLY 8-9 K299 20BR/WT O2 1/2 HEATER CONTROL SUPPLY 10 K399 18BR/GY O2 2/2 HEATER CONTROL 11 C13 20LB/OR A/C CLUTCH CONTROL 12 V36 20VT/YL S/C VACUUM SOL CONTROL 13 - 14 V32 20VT/YL BRAKE SWITCH NO. 2 SIGNAL 15 V937 20VT/BR S/C SWITCH RETURN 16 K167 20BR/YL APPS NO. 1 RETURN 17 K400 20BR/VT APPS NO. 2 RETURN 18 V38 20VT/OR S/C SWITCH NO. 2 SIGNAL 19 K342 16BR/WT ASD CONTROL OUTPUT 20 K52 20DB/WT EVAP PURGE SOL CONTROL 21 T41 20YL/DB TRS T41 SIGNAL (P/N) 22 G113 20VT PTO SENSE 22 G113 18PK/YL PTO SENSE 23 B29 20DG/WT BRAKE SWITCH NO. 1 SIGNAL 24 - 25 K23 20BR/WT APPS NO. 1 SIGNAL 26 - 27 T5 20DG/YL AUTOSTICK (ERS)-TOW/HAUL SIGNAL 28 K342 16BR/WT ASD CONTROL OUTPUT 29 K70 20DB/BR EVAP PURGE SOL SIGNAL 30 K66 20DB/WT P/S SWITCH SIGNAL 31 - 32 - 33 G24 20VT/BR OIL TEMPERATURE SIGNAL 34 V37 20VT S/C SWITCH NO. 1 SIGNAL 35 K107 20VT/WT ESM SIGNAL 36 K29 20WT/BR APPS NO. 2 SIGNAL 37 K31 20BR FUEL PUMP CONTROL 38 T752 20DG/OR STARTER SOLENOID CONTROL Component Location - 29 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3309 Component Location - 6 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3310 Connector: Name : MODULE-POWERTRAIN CONTROL C4 Color : BLACK/GREEN # of pins : 38 Qualifier : (DIESEL) Pin Circuit Description 1 T160 20YL/GY SENSOR GROUND 2 T259 20YL/DG 4C CONTROL 3- Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3311 4 T140 20YL/GY MS CONTROL 56 T219 20YL/LG 2C CONTROL 78 T59 20YL/LB UD CONTROL 910 T20 20DG/BK L/R CONTROL 11 T118 20DG LP VFS CONTROL 12 Z133 18BK/LG GROUND 13 Z133 18BK/LG GROUND 14 Z133 18BK/LG GROUND 15 T1 20DG/LB TRS T1 SIGNAL 16 T3 20DG/DB TRS T3 SIGNAL 17 T6 20DG TOW/HAUL OVERDRIVE OFF SWITCH SIGNAL 18 T515 20YL/DB TRANSMISSION CONTROL 19 T16 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT 20 T48 20BR/YL 4C PRESSURE SIGNAL 21 T29 20YL/WT UD PRESSURE SIGNAL 22 T9 20DG/TN OD PRESSURE SIGNAL 23 24 25 26 T4 20DG/LB TRS T2 SIGNAL 27 T41 20YL/DB TRS T41 SIGNAL (P/N) 28 T16 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT 29 T50 20DG/PK L/R PRESSURE SIGNAL 30 T147 20DG/YL 2C PRESSURE SIGNAL 31 T38 20YL/BR LINE PRESSURE SIGNAL 32 T14 20DG/BR OUTPUT SPEED SIGNAL 33 T52 20DG/OR INPUT SPEED SIGNAL 34 T13 20DG/VT SPEED SENSOR GROUND 35 T54 20DG/OR TRANSMISSION TEMPERATURE SIGNAL 36 37 T42 20DG/YL TRS T42 SIGNAL 38 T16 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT Component Location - 29 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3312 Component Location - 6 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3313 Connector: Name : MODULE-POWERTRAIN CONTROL C4 Color : BLACK/GREEN # of pins : 38 Qualifier : (GAS) Pin Circuit Description 1 T60 20YL/GY OD SOLENOID CONTROL 2 T259 20YL/DG 4C CONTROL 2 T59 20YL/LB UD CONTROL 3-- Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3314 4 T140 20YL/GY MS CONTROL 5-6 T219 20YL/LG 2C CONTROL 6 T19 18YL/DB 2/4 SOLENOID CONTROL 7-8 T59 20YL/LB UD CONTROL 9-10 T20 20DG/WT L/R CONTROL 11 T118 20DG LP VFS CONTROL 12 Z908 18BK GROUND 13 Z977 18BK GROUND 14 Z904 18BK GROUND 15 T1 20DG/LB TRS T1 SIGNAL 16 T3 20DG/DB TRS T3 SIGNAL 17 T6 20DG TOW/HAUL OVERDRIVE OFF SWITCH SIGNAL 18 T515 20YL/DB TRANSMISSION CONTROL 19 T16 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT 20 T48 20BR/YL 4C PRESSURE SIGNAL 21 T29 20YL/WT UD PRESSURE SIGNAL 22 T9 20DG/TN OD PRESSURE SIGNAL 23 - 24 - 25 - 26 T4 20DG/LB TRS T2 SIGNAL 27 - 28 T16 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT 29 T50 20DG/PK L/R PRESSURE SIGNAL 30 T147 20DG/YL 2C PRESSURE SIGNAL 30 T47 18YL/DG 2/4 PRESSURE SIGNAL 31 T38 20YL/BR LINE PRESSURE SIGNAL 32 T14 20DG/BR OUTPUT SPEED SIGNAL 33 T52 20DG/OR INPUT SPEED SIGNAL 34 T13 20DG/VT SPEED SENSOR GROUND 35 T54 20DG/OR TRANSMISSION TEMPERATURE SIGNAL 36 - 37 T42 20DG/YL TRS T42 SIGNAL 38 T16 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT Component Location - 29 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3315 Component Location - 6 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3316 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Powertrain Control Module - Description Engine Control Module: Description and Operation Powertrain Control Module - Description Powertrain Control Module (PCM) POWERTRAIN CONTROL MODULE (PCM) The Powertrain Control Module (PCM) is located in the right-rear section of the engine compartment under the cowl. Two different PCM's are used (JTEC and NGC). These can be easily identified. JTEC's use three 32-way connectors, NGC's use four 38-way connectors Modes Of Operation MODES OF OPERATION As input signals to the Powertrain Control Module (PCM) change, the PCM adjusts its response to the output devices. For example, the PCM must calculate different injector pulse width and ignition timing for idle than it does for wide open throttle (WOT). The PCM will operate in two different modes: Open Loop and Closed Loop. During Open Loop modes, the PCM receives input signals and responds only according to preset PCM programming. Input from the oxygen (O2S) sensors is not monitored during Open Loop modes. During Closed Loop modes, the PCM will monitor the oxygen (O2S) sensors input. This input indicates to the PCM whether or not the calculated injector pulse width results in the ideal air-fuel ratio. This ratio is 14.7 parts air-to-1 part fuel. By monitoring the exhaust oxygen content through the O2S sensor, the PCM can fine tune the injector pulse width. This is done to achieve optimum fuel economy combined with low emission engine performance. The fuel injection system has the following modes of operation: - Ignition switch ON - Engine start-up (crank) - Engine warm-up - Idle - Cruise - Acceleration - Deceleration - Wide open throttle (WOT) - Ignition switch OFF The ignition switch On, engine start-up (crank), engine warm-up, acceleration, deceleration and wide open throttle modes are Open Loop modes. The idle and cruise modes, (with the engine at operating temperature) are Closed Loop modes. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Powertrain Control Module - Description > Page 3319 IGNITION SWITCH (KEY-ON) MODE This is an Open Loop mode. When the fuel system is activated by the ignition switch, the following actions occur: - The PCM pre-positions the idle air control (IAC) motor. - The PCM determines atmospheric air pressure from the MAP sensor input to determine basic fuel strategy. - The PCM monitors the engine coolant temperature sensor input. The PCM modifies fuel strategy based on this input. - Intake manifold air temperature sensor input is monitored. - Throttle position sensor (TPS) is monitored. - The auto shutdown (ASD) relay is energized by the PCM for approximately three seconds. - The fuel pump is energized through the fuel pump relay by the PCM. The fuel pump will operate for approximately three seconds unless the engine is operating or the starter motor is engaged. - The O2S sensor heater element is energized via the ASD or O2S heater relay. The O2S sensor input is not used by the PCM to calibrate air-fuel ratio during this mode of operation. ENGINE START-UP MODE This is an Open Loop mode. The following actions occur when the starter motor is engaged. The PCM receives inputs from: - Battery voltage - Engine coolant temperature sensor - Crankshaft position sensor - Intake manifold air temperature sensor - Manifold absolute pressure (MAP) sensor - Throttle position sensor (TPS) - Camshaft position sensor signal The PCM monitors the crankshaft position sensor. If the PCM does not receive a crankshaft position sensor signal within 3 seconds of cranking the engine, it will shut down the fuel injection system. The fuel pump is activated by the PCM through the fuel pump relay. Voltage is applied to the fuel injectors with the ASD relay via the PCM. The PCM will then control the injection sequence and injector pulse width by turning the ground circuit to each individual injector on and off. The PCM determines the proper ignition timing according to input received from the crankshaft position sensor. ENGINE WARM-UP MODE This is an Open Loop mode. During engine warm-up, the PCM receives inputs from: - Battery voltage - Crankshaft position sensor - Engine coolant temperature sensor - Intake manifold air temperature sensor - Manifold absolute pressure (MAP) sensor - Throttle position sensor (TPS) - Camshaft position sensor signal - Park/neutral switch (gear indicator signal-auto. trans. only) - Air conditioning select signal (if equipped) - Air conditioning request signal (if equipped) Based on these inputs the following occurs: - Voltage is applied to the fuel injectors with the ASD relay via the PCM. The PCM will then control the injection sequence and injector pulse width by turning the ground circuit to each individual injector on and off. - The PCM adjusts engine idle speed through the idle air control (IAC) motor and adjusts ignition timing. - The PCM operates the A/C compressor clutch through the A/C compressor clutch relay. This is done if A/C has been selected by the vehicle operator and specified pressures are met at the high and low-pressure A/C switches. - When engine has reached operating temperature, the PCM will begin monitoring O2S sensor input. The system will then leave the warm-up mode and go into closed loop operation. IDLE MODE Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Powertrain Control Module - Description > Page 3320 When the engine is at operating temperature, this is a Closed Loop mode. At idle speed, the PCM receives inputs from: - Air conditioning select signal (if equipped) - Air conditioning request signal (if equipped) - Battery voltage - Crankshaft position sensor - Engine coolant temperature sensor - Intake manifold air temperature sensor - Manifold absolute pressure (MAP) sensor - Throttle position sensor (TPS) - Camshaft position sensor signal - Battery voltage - Park/neutral switch (gear indicator signal-auto. trans. only) - Oxygen sensors Based on these inputs, the following occurs: - Voltage is applied to the fuel injectors with the ASD relay via the PCM. The PCM will then control injection sequence and injector pulse width by turning the ground circuit to each individual injector on and off. - The PCM monitors the O2S sensor input and adjusts air-fuel ratio by varying injector pulse width. It also adjusts engine idle speed through the idle air control (IAC) motor. - The PCM adjusts ignition timing by increasing and decreasing spark advance. - The PCM operates the A/C compressor clutch through the A/C compressor clutch relay. This is done if A/C has been selected by the vehicle operator and specified pressures are met at the high and low-pressure A/C switches. CRUISE MODE When the engine is at operating temperature, this is a Closed Loop mode. At cruising speed, the PCM receives inputs from: - Air conditioning select signal (if equipped) - Air conditioning request signal (if equipped) - Battery voltage - Engine coolant temperature sensor - Crankshaft position sensor - Intake manifold air temperature sensor - Manifold absolute pressure (MAP) sensor - Throttle position sensor (TPS) - Camshaft position sensor signal - Park/neutral switch (gear indicator signal-auto. trans. only) - Oxygen (O2S) sensors Based on these inputs, the following occurs: - Voltage is applied to the fuel injectors with the ASD relay via the PCM. The PCM will then adjust the injector pulse width by turning the ground circuit to each individual injector on and off. - The PCM monitors the O2S sensor input and adjusts air-fuel ratio. It also adjusts engine idle speed through the idle air control (IAC) motor. - The PCM adjusts ignition timing by turning the ground path to the coil(s) on and off. - The PCM operates the A/C compressor clutch through the clutch relay. This happens if A/C has been selected by the vehicle operator and requested by the A/C thermostat. ACCELERATION MODE This is an Open Loop mode. The PCM recognizes an abrupt increase in throttle position or MAP pressure as a demand for increased engine output and vehicle acceleration. The PCM increases injector pulse width in response to increased throttle opening. DECELERATION MODE When the engine is at operating temperature, this is an Open Loop mode. During hard deceleration, the PCM receives the following inputs. - Air conditioning select signal (if equipped) - Air conditioning request signal (if equipped) - Battery voltage - Engine coolant temperature sensor - Crankshaft position sensor - Intake manifold air temperature sensor Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Powertrain Control Module - Description > Page 3321 - Manifold absolute pressure (MAP) sensor - Throttle position sensor (TPS) - Camshaft position sensor signal - Park/neutral switch (gear indicator signal-auto. trans. only) - Vehicle speed If the vehicle is under hard deceleration with the proper rpm and closed throttle conditions, the PCM will ignore the oxygen sensor input signal. The PCM will enter a fuel cut-off strategy in which it will not supply a ground to the injectors. If a hard deceleration does not exist, the PCM will determine the proper injector pulse width and continue injection. Based on the above inputs, the PCM will adjust engine idle speed through the idle air control (IAC) motor. The PCM adjusts ignition timing by turning the ground path to the coil on and off. WIDE OPEN THROTTLE MODE This is an Open Loop mode. During wide open throttle operation, the PCM receives the following inputs. - Battery voltage - Crankshaft position sensor - Engine coolant temperature sensor - Intake manifold air temperature sensor - Manifold absolute pressure (MAP) sensor - Throttle position sensor (TPS) - Camshaft position sensor signal During wide open throttle conditions, the following occurs: - Voltage is applied to the fuel injectors with the ASD relay via the PCM. The PCM will then control the injection sequence and injector pulse width by turning the ground circuit to each individual injector on and off. The PCM ignores the oxygen sensor input signal and provides a predetermined amount of additional fuel. This is done by adjusting injector pulse width. - The PCM adjusts ignition timing by turning the ground path to the coil(s) on and off. IGNITION SWITCH OFF MODE When ignition switch is turned to OFF position, the PCM stops operating the injectors, ignition coil, ASD relay and fuel pump relay. 5 Volt Supplies 5 VOLT SUPPLIES Two different Powertrain Control Module (PCM) five volt supply circuits are used; primary and secondary. Ignition Circuit Sense IGNITION CIRCUIT SENSE This circuit ties the ignition switch to the Powertrain Control Module (PCM). Power Grounds POWER GROUNDS The Powertrain Control Module (PCM) has 2 main grounds. Both of these grounds are referred to as power grounds. All of the high-current, noisy, electrical devices are connected to these grounds as well as all of the sensor returns. The sensor return comes into the sensor return circuit, passes through noise suppression, and is then connected to the power ground. The power ground is used to control ground circuits for the following PCM loads: - Generator field winding - Fuel injectors - Ignition coil(s) - Certain relays/solenoids - Certain sensors Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Powertrain Control Module - Description > Page 3322 Sensor Return SENSOR RETURN The Sensor Return circuits are internal to the Powertrain Control Module (PCM). Sensor Return provides a low-noise ground reference for all engine control system sensors. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Powertrain Control Module - Description > Page 3323 Engine Control Module: Description and Operation Powertrain Control Module - Operation Powertrain Control Module (PCM) POWERTRAIN CONTROL MODULE (PCM) The PCM operates the fuel system. The PCM is a pre-programmed, triple microprocessor digital computer. It regulates ignition timing, air-fuel ratio, emission control devices, charging system, certain transmission features, speed control, air conditioning compressor clutch engagement and idle speed. The PCM can adapt its programming to meet changing operating conditions. The PCM receives input signals from various switches and sensors. Based on these inputs, the PCM regulates various engine and vehicle operations through different system components. These components are referred to as Powertrain Control Module (PCM) Outputs. The sensors and switches that provide inputs to the PCM are considered Powertrain Control Module (PCM) Inputs. The PCM adjusts ignition timing based upon inputs it receives from sensors that react to: engine rpm, manifold absolute pressure, engine coolant temperature, throttle position, transmission gear selection (automatic transmission), vehicle speed, power steering pump pressure, and the brake switch. The PCM adjusts idle speed based on inputs it receives from sensors that react to: throttle position, vehicle speed, transmission gear selection, engine coolant temperature and from inputs it receives from the air conditioning clutch switch and brake switch. Based on inputs that it receives, the PCM adjusts ignition coil dwell. The PCM also adjusts the generator charge rate through control of the generator field and provides speed control operation. NOTE: PCM Inputs: - ABS module (if equipped) - A/C request (if equipped with factory A/C) - A/C select (if equipped with factory A/C) - A/C pressure transducer - Auto shutdown (ASD) sense - Battery temperature sensor - Battery voltage - Brake switch - CAN C BUS (+) circuits - CAN C BUS (-) circuits - Camshaft position sensor signal - Crankshaft position sensor - Data link connection for a scan tool - EATX module (if equipped) - Engine coolant temperature sensor - Fuel level (through J1850 circuitry) - Generator (battery voltage) output - Ignition circuit sense (ignition switch in on/off/crank/run position) - Intake manifold air temperature sensor - Knock sensors (2 on 3.7L engine) - Leak detection pump (switch) sense (if equipped) - Manifold absolute pressure (MAP) sensor - Oil pressure - Oxygen sensors - Park/neutral switch (auto. trans. only) - Power ground - Power steering pressure switch (if equipped) - Sensor return - Signal ground - Speed control multiplexed single wire input - Throttle position sensor - Transfer case switch (4WD range position) - Vehicle speed signal NOTE: PCM Outputs: - A/C clutch relay - Auto shutdown (ASD) relay Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Powertrain Control Module - Description > Page 3324 - CAN C BUS (+/-) circuits for: speedometer, voltmeter, fuel gauge, oil pressure gauge/lamp, engine temp. gauge and speed control warn. lamp - Data link connection for diagnostic scan tool - EGR valve control solenoid (if equipped) - EVAP canister purge solenoid - Five volt sensor supply (primary) - Five volt sensor supply (secondary) - Fuel injectors - Fuel pump relay - Generator field driver (-) - Generator field driver (+) - Idle air control (IAC) motor - Ignition coil(s) - Leak detection pump (if equipped) - Malfunction indicator lamp (Check engine lamp). Driven through J1850 circuits. - Oxygen sensor heater relays - Oxygen sensors (pulse width modulated) - Radiator cooling fan relay (pulse width modulated) - Speed control vacuum solenoid - Speed control vent solenoid - Tachometer (if equipped). Driven through J1850 circuits. - Transmission convertor clutch circuit. Driven through J1850 circuits. 5 Volt Supplies 5 VOLT SUPPLIES Primary 5-volt supply: - supplies the required 5 volt power source to the Crankshaft Position (CKP) sensor. - supplies the required 5 volt power source to the Camshaft Position (CMP) sensor. - supplies a reference voltage for the Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) sensor. - supplies a reference voltage for the Throttle Position Sensor (TPS) sensor. Secondary 5-volt supply: - supplies the required 5 volt power source to the oil pressure sensor. - supplies the required 5 volt power source for the Vehicle Speed Sensor (VSS) (if equipped). - supplies the 5 volt power source to the transmission pressure sensor (certain automatic transmissions). Ignition Circuit Sense IGNITION CIRCUIT SENSE The ignition circuit sense input tells the PCM the ignition switch has energized the ignition circuit. Battery voltage is also supplied to the PCM through the ignition switch when the ignition is in the RUN or START position. This is referred to as the "ignition sense" circuit and is used to "wake up" the PCM. Voltage on the ignition input can be as low as 6 volts and the PCM will still function. Voltage is supplied to this circuit to power the PCM's 8-volt regulator and to allow the PCM to perform fuel, ignition and emissions control functions. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > SKREEM Programming Engine Control Module: Testing and Inspection SKREEM Programming SKREEM PROGRAMMING When a Powertrain Control Module (PCM) for a gasoline engine, or an Engine Control Module (ECM) for a diesel engine and the Sentry Key Remote Entry Module (SKREEM) (also known as the Wireless Control Module/WCM) on vehicles equipped with the Sentry Key Immobilizer System (SKIS) are replaced at the same time, perform the following steps in order: NOTE: If the PCM and the SKREEM are replaced at the same time, program the PCM VIN into the PCM first. 1. If applicable first replace the PCM/ECM with the original WCM still connected to the vehicle. 2. Using the appropriate service information program the new PCM/ECM. (This will ensure the Secret Key Transfer from the original WCM into the new PCM/ECM). 3. Now replace and program the WCM. This will retain the Secret Key from the PCM/ECM back into the new WCM. 4. With the scan tool, select Miscellaneous Functions, WCM/Wireless Control Module. Then select the desired procedure and follow the display on the scan tool. 5. If the vehicle is equipped with Tire Pressure Monitoring System program the Placard Pressure Values into the WCM/SKREEM. 6. Ensure all the customer's keys have been programmed into the new module if necessary. NOTE: If the original keys do not successfully program to the new SKREEM after the proper procedures are followed correctly, programming new keys will be necessary. PROGRAMMING THE SKREEM The SKIS Secret Key is an ID code that is unique to each SKREEM/WCM. This code is programmed and stored in the SKREEM/WCM, the PCM/ECM, and each ignition key transponder chip. When the PCM/ECM or SKREEM/WCM is replaced, it is necessary to program the Secret Key into the new module using a diagnostic scan tool. Follow the programming steps outlined in the diagnostic scan tool for PCM REPLACED , ECM REPLACED , WCM REPLACED , or GATEWAY REPLACED under MISCELLANEOUS FUNCTIONS for the WIRELESS CONTROL MODULE/WCM menu item as appropriate. NOTE: Programming the PCM/ECM or SKREEM is done using a diagnostic scan tool and a PIN to enter secure access mode. If three attempts are made to enter secure access mode using an incorrect PIN, secure access mode will be locked out for one hour. To exit this lockout mode, turn the ignition to the RUN position for one hour then enter the correct PIN. Be certain that all accessories are turned OFF. Also monitor the battery state and connect a battery charger if necessary. NOTE: Before replacing the ECU for a failed driver, control circuit or ground circuit, be sure to check the related component/circuit integrity for failures not detected due to a double fault in the circuit. Most ECM driver/control circuit failures are caused by internal component failures (i.e. relay and solenoids) and shorted circuits (i.e. pull-ups, drivers and switched circuits). These failures are difficult to detect when a double fault has occurred and only one DTC has set. ECM/SKIM/WCM PROGRAMMING When a ECM and the SKIM are replaced at the same time perform the following steps in order: 1. Program the new SKIM 2. Program the new ECM 3. Replace all ignition keys and program them to the new SKIM. ECM/SKIM/WCM PROGRAMMING When an ECM (Bosch) and the SKIM are replaced at the same time perform the following steps in order: 1. Program the new SKIM 2. Program the new ECM (Bosch) 3. Replace all ignition keys and program them to the new SKIM. PROGRAMMING THE SKIM CAUTION: Read all notes and cautions for programming procedures. 1. Connect a battery charger to the vehicle. 2. Connect the StarSCAN(R). CAUTION: If the ECM/PCM and SKREEM/WCM are replaced at the same time, the ECM/PCM MUST be programmed before the Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > SKREEM Programming > Page 3327 SKREEM/WCM. 3. Select "ECU View". 4. Select "WCM Wireless Control Module". 5. Select "Miscellaneous Functions". 6. Select WCM replaced. 7. Enter the PIN when prompted. 8. Verify the correct information. NOTE: If the ECM and the SKIM are replaced at the same time, all vehicle keys will need to be replaced and programmed to the new SKIM. PROGRAMMING IGNITION KEYS TO THE SKREEM Each ignition key transponder also has a unique ID code that is assigned at the time the key is manufactured. When a key is programmed into the SKREEM/WCM, the transponder ID code is learned by the module and the transponder acquires the unique Secret Key ID code from the SKREEM/WCM. To program ignition keys into the SKREEM/WCM, follow the programming steps outlined in the diagnostic scan tool for PROGRAM IGNITION KEYS OR KEY FOBS under MISCELLANEOUS FUNCTIONS for the WIRELESS CONTROL MODULE/WCM menu item. NOTE: If the original keys do not successfully program to the new SKREEM after the proper procedures are followed correctly, programming new keys will be necessary. NOTE: A maximum of eight keys can be learned to each SKREEM. Once a key is learned to a SKREEM, that key has acquired the Secret Key for that SKREEM and cannot be transferred to any other SKREEM or vehicle. If ignition key programming is unsuccessful, the scan tool will display one of the following error messages: - PROGRAMMING NOT ATTEMPTED - The scan tool attempts to read the programmed key status and there are no keys programmed into SKREEM memory. - PROGRAMMING KEY FAILED (POSSIBLE USED KEY FROM WRONG VEHICLE) - SKREEM is unable to program an ignition key transponder due to one of the following: - The ignition key transponder is ineffective. - The ignition key transponder is or has been already programmed to another vehicle. - 8 KEYS ALREADY LEARNED, PROGRAMMING NOT DONE - The SKREEM transponder ID memory is full. LEARNED KEY IN IGNITION - The ID for the ignition key transponder currently in the ignition lock cylinder is already programmed into SKREEM memory. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > SKREEM Programming > Page 3328 Engine Control Module: Testing and Inspection PCM/ECM Reprogramming PCM/ECM REPROGRAMMING - GAS MODULE REPROGRAMING Replacement PCM's will require programming utilizing the StarSCAN(R) or equivalent. The PCM will not operate the engine until it is programmed. A Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) will be set "not programmed". CAUTION: Extreme care must be taken when programming a calibration into a generic PCM. Do not randomly select a calibration. Once a calibration is selected and programmed, the controller cannot be reprogrammed to a different calibration. The module can only be reprogrammed to a more recent version of that calibration. SPECIAL TOOLS/EQUIPMENT OR EQUIVALENT REQUIRED: **REPAIR PROCEDURE - USING THE INTERNET TO RETRIEVE THE FLASH FILE: NOTE: The StarSCAN(R) or equivalent diagnostic scan tool fully supports Internet connectivity. However, in order to take advantage of this feature you must first configure the StarSCAN(R) or equivalent for your dealership's network. For instruction on setting up your StarSCAN(R) or equivalent for the dealer's network; refer to the StarSCAN(R) or equivalent Quick Start Networking Guide available on DealerCONNECT > Service > StarSCAN(R) or equivalent and StarMOBILE Tools >Online Documentation. NOTE: If this flash process is interrupted/aborted, the flash should be restarted. 1. Open the hood, install a battery charger and verify that the charging rate provides approximately 13.5 volts. Set the battery charger timer to maintain the charging voltage for the duration of the flash process. 2. Connect the CH9410 StarSCAN(R) or equivalent ethernet cable to the StarSCAN(R) or equivalent and the dealer's network drop. 3. Connect the CH9404 StarSCAN(R) or equivalent vehicle cable to the StarSCAN(R) or equivalent and the vehicle. 4. Power ON the StarSCAN(R) or equivalent. 5. Retrieve the old ECU part number. Using the StarSCAN(R) or equivalent at the "Home" screen: a. Select "ECU View" b. Touch the screen to highlight the PCM in the list of modules. c. Select "More Options" d. Select "ECU Flash" e. Record the part number at the top of the "Flash PCM" screen for later reference. 6. Replace the PCM with the appropriate Generic PCM. 7. Program the PCM as follows: a. Using the StarSCAN(R) or equivalent at the "Home" screen, Select "ECU View" b. Touch the screen to highlight the PCM in the list of modules. c. Select "More Options" d. Select "ECU Flash" e. Select "Browse for New File". Follow the on screen instructions. f. Highlight the appropriate calibration based on the part number recorded in Step 5. g. Select "Download to Scantool". h. Select "Close" after the download is complete, then select "Back". i. Highlight the listed calibration. j. Select "Update Controller". Follow on screen instructions. k. When the update is complete, select "OK". l. Verify the part number at the top of the "Flash PCM" screen has updated to the new part number. 8. Is this a GPEC Module? a. Yes >> go to STEP 9. b. No >> go to STEP 12. 9. Do not start the engine prior to completing the following steps (a. and b.) Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > SKREEM Programming > Page 3329 a. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position for no less than 15 seconds. b. Turn the ignition to the RUN position (DO NOT CRANK THE ENGINE) for no less than 20 seconds. 10. Is this vehicle equipped with a CVT? a. Yes >> go to STEP 11. b. No >> go to STEP 17. 11. The TCM must be reprogrammed as follows: a. Using the StarSCAN(R) or equivalent at the "Home" screen, Select "ECU View" b. Touch the screen to highlight the TCM in the list of modules. c. Select "More Options" d. Select "ECU Flash" e. Record the part number at the top of the "Flash TCM" screen for later reference. f. Select "Browse for New File". Follow the on screen instructions. NOTE: If the part number recorded in step "11e" is the same as the new p/n shown on the "Flash File List" screen no further action is required. Cancel the TCM reprogram procedure. Continue to step STEP 17. g. Highlight the appropriate calibration. h. Select "Download to Scantool". i. Select "Close" after the download is complete, then select "Back". j. Highlight the listed calibration. k. Select "Update Controller". Follow on screen instructions. l. When the update is complete, select "OK". m. Verify the part number at the top of the "Flash TCM" screen has updated to the new part number. n. Continue to step STEP 15 12. Is "WCM - Wireless Control Module" displayed in the "ECU Overview" screen list of modules? a. Yes >> go to STEP 13. b. No >> go to STEP 14. 13. Program the PCM to the Wireless Control Module (WCM). a. Highlight the WCM. b. Select "Misc. Function". c. Highlight "PCM Replaced". d. Select "Start" e. Follow the on screen instructions. Select "Next" after each step. Select "Finish" after completing the last step. f. When complete proceed to STEP 15. 14. Program the VIN into the PCM. a. Scroll through the list of controllers and highlight the PCM. b. Select "Misc. Function". c. Highlight "Check PCM VIN". d. Select "Start" e. Follow the on screen instructions. Select "Next" after each step. When the window appears with 17 boxes, select "Show Keyboard". Place the cursor to the right of the last box and then backspace to delete the boxes from the window. Enter the VIN. Select "Finish" after completing the last step. f. Unplug the scan tool from the Data Link Connector. g. At the "Vehicle Disconnected" screen, press "OK". h. Connect the scan tool to the Data Link Connector and verify that the VIN is visible at the top of the "Home" screen. 15. Is the vehicle equipped ETC? a. Yes >> go to STEP 17. b. No >> go to STEP 16. 16. Using the StarSCAN(R) or equivalent at the "Home" screen: a. Select ECU View b. Scroll through the list of controllers and highlight the PCM. c. Select Misc. Function. d. Highlight "Learn ETC". e. Select "Start" f. Follow the on screen instructions. Select Next after each step. Select Finish after completing the last step. NOTE: Due to the PCM programming procedure, a DTC may be set in other modules (TCM, BCM, MIC, SKREEM, etc.) within the vehicle, if so equipped. Some DTC's may cause the MIL to illuminate. From the Home screen select System View. Then select All DTCs. Press Clear All Stored DTCs if there are any DTCs shown on the list. NOTE: The following step is required by law when reprogramming a PCM and/or TCM. 17. Type the necessary information on the Authorized Modification Label p/n 04275086AB and attach near the VECI label. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > SKREEM Programming > Page 3330 REPAIR PROCEDURE USING SOFTWARE UPDATE CD TO RETRIEVE THE FLASH FILE: NOTE: If this flash process is interrupted/aborted, the flash should be restarted. NOTE: For detailed information on the operation of the StarSCAN(R) or equivalent, refer to the Quick Reference documentation provided in the StarSCAN(R) or equivalent documentation kit. Look under Training Aids and also under Download Center > Frequently Asked Questions for more help. 1. Open the hood, install a battery charger and verify that the charging rate provides approximately 13.5 volts. Set the battery charger timer to maintain the charging voltage for the duration of the flash process. 2. Connect the CH9404 StarSCAN(R) or equivalent vehicle cable to the StarSCAN(R) or equivalent and the vehicle. 3. Power ON the StarSCAN(R) or equivalent. 4. Retrieve the old ECU part number. Using the StarSCAN(R) or equivalent at the "Home" screen: a. Select "ECU View" b. Touch the screen to highlight the PCM in the list of modules. c. Select "More Options" d. Select "ECU Flash" e. Record the part number at the top of the "Flash PCM" screen for later reference. 5. Replace the PCM with the appropriate Generic PCM. 6. Insert the StarSCAN(R) or equivalent Software Update CD into the TechCONNECT or equivalent PC. The StarSCAN(R) or equivalent Software Update CD will start automatically. Select "Download Flash Updates". 7. At the "Select a method for looking up controller flash updates. " screen: a. Select "Enter part number". Enter the "Part Number" recorded in STEP 4 when prompted to do so. b. Using the mouse highlight the appropriate "Calibration". Select "Next". c. Follow the on screen instructions. d. When completed, proceed to STEP 8. 8. With the StarSCAN(R) or equivalent powered OFF, connect the USB Key and Gender Changer to the StarSCAN(R) or equivalent USB port. 9. Connect the StarSCAN(R) or equivalent to the vehicle (if not already connected). 10. Power ON the StarSCAN(R) or equivalent. 11. Download the flash file from the USB key to the StarSCAN(R) or equivalent. Using the StarSCAN(R) or equivalent at the "Home" screen: a. Select "Flash Download", then select "Retrieve files from the USB storage device" b. Highlight the appropriate calibration. Select "Download to Scan Tool" c. When the download is complete, select "Close" and "Back". 12. Reprogram the ECU. Using the StarSCAN(R) or equivalent at the "Home" screen: a. Select "ECU View". b. Select More Options". Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > SKREEM Programming > Page 3331 c. Select "ECU Flash". d. Highlight the appropriate calibration. e. Select "Update Controller". Follow the on screen instructions. f. When the update is complete, select "OK". g. Verify the part number at the top of the "Flash PCM" screen has updated to the new part number. 13. Is "WCM - Wireless Control Module" displayed in the "ECU Overview" screen list of modules? a. Yes >> go to STEP 14. b. No >> go to STEP 15. 14. Program the PCM to the Wireless Control Module (WCM). Using the StarSCAN(R) or equivalent at the "Home" screen: a. Select "ECU View" b. Scroll through the list of controllers and highlight the WCM. c. Select "Misc. Function". d. Highlight "PCM Replaced". e. Select "Start" f. Follow the on screen instructions. Select "Next" after each step. Select "Finish" after completing the last step. g. When complete proceed to STEP 16. 15. Program the VIN into the PCM. a. Scroll through the list of controllers and highlight the PCM. b. Select "Misc. Function". c. Highlight "Check PCM VIN". d. Select "Start" e. Follow the on screen instructions. Select "Next" after each step. When the window appears with 17 boxes, select "Show Keyboard". Place the cursor to the right of the last box and then backspace to delete the boxes from the window. Enter the VIN. Select "Finish" after completing the last step. f. Unplug the scan tool from the Data Link Connector. g. At the "Vehicle Disconnected" screen, press "OK". h. Connect the scan tool to the Data Link Connector and verify that the VIN is visible at the top of the "Home" screen. 16. Is the vehicle equipped with a 3.7L or 4.7L engine? a. Yes >> go to STEP 18. b. No >> go to STEP 17. 17. Using the StarSCAN(R) or equivalent at the "Home" screen: a. Select "ECU View" b. Scroll through the list of controllers and highlight the PCM. c. Select "Misc. Function". d. Highlight "Learn ETC". e. Select "Start" f. Follow the on screen instructions. Select "Next" after each step. Select "Finish" after completing the last step. NOTE: Due to the PCM programming procedure, a DTC may be set in other modules (TCM, BCM, MIC, SKIM, etc.) within the vehicle, if so equipped. Some DTC's may cause the MIL to illuminate. Check all modules using "ECU View" from the Home screen, record the DTC's, and erase these DTC's prior to returning the vehicle to the customer. Erase any DTC's in the PCM only after all other modules have had their DTC's erased. NOTE: The following step is required by law. 18. Type the necessary information on the "Authorized Modification Label" p/n 04275086AB and attach near the VECI label. ** Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > SKREEM Programming > Page 3332 Engine Control Module: Testing and Inspection Powertrain Control Module PCM/ECM REPROGRAMMING - GAS MODULE REPROGRAMING Replacement PCM's will require programming utilizing the StarSCAN(R) or equivalent. The PCM will not operate the engine until it is programmed. A Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) will be set "not programmed". CAUTION: Extreme care must be taken when programming a calibration into a generic PCM. Do not randomly select a calibration. Once a calibration is selected and programmed, the controller cannot be reprogrammed to a different calibration. The module can only be reprogrammed to a more recent version of that calibration. SPECIAL TOOLS/EQUIPMENT OR EQUIVALENT REQUIRED: **REPAIR PROCEDURE - USING THE INTERNET TO RETRIEVE THE FLASH FILE: NOTE: The StarSCAN(R) or equivalent diagnostic scan tool fully supports Internet connectivity. However, in order to take advantage of this feature you must first configure the StarSCAN(R) or equivalent for your dealership's network. For instruction on setting up your StarSCAN(R) or equivalent for the dealer's network; refer to the StarSCAN(R) or equivalent Quick Start Networking Guide available on DealerCONNECT > Service > StarSCAN(R) or equivalent and StarMOBILE Tools > Online Documentation. NOTE: If this flash process is interrupted/aborted, the flash should be restarted. 1. Open the hood, install a battery charger and verify that the charging rate provides approximately 13.5 volts. Set the battery charger timer to maintain the charging voltage for the duration of the flash process. 2. Connect the CH9410 StarSCAN(R) or equivalent ethernet cable to the StarSCAN(R) or equivalent and the dealer's network drop. 3. Connect the CH9404 StarSCAN(R) or equivalent vehicle cable to the StarSCAN(R) or equivalent and the vehicle. 4. Power ON the StarSCAN(R) or equivalent. 5. Retrieve the old ECU part number. Using the StarSCAN(R) or equivalent at the "Home" screen: a. Select "ECU View" b. Touch the screen to highlight the PCM in the list of modules. c. Select "More Options" d. Select "ECU Flash" e. Record the part number at the top of the "Flash PCM" screen for later reference. 6. Replace the PCM with the appropriate Generic PCM. 7. Program the PCM as follows: a. Using the StarSCAN(R) or equivalent at the "Home" screen, Select "ECU View" b. Touch the screen to highlight the PCM in the list of modules. c. Select "More Options" d. Select "ECU Flash" e. Select "Browse for New File". Follow the on screen instructions. f. Highlight the appropriate calibration based on the part number recorded in Step 5. g. Select "Download to Scantool". h. Select "Close" after the download is complete, then select "Back". i. Highlight the listed calibration. j. Select "Update Controller". Follow on screen instructions. k. When the update is complete, select "OK". l. Verify the part number at the top of the "Flash PCM" screen has updated to the new part number. 8. Is this a GPEC Module? a. Yes >> go to STEP 9. b. No >> go to STEP 12. 9. Do not start the engine prior to completing the following steps (a. and b.) Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > SKREEM Programming > Page 3333 a. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position for no less than 15 seconds. b. Turn the ignition to the RUN position (DO NOT CRANK THE ENGINE) for no less than 20 seconds. 10. Is this vehicle equipped with a CVT? a. Yes >> go to STEP 11. b. No >> go to STEP 17. 11. The TCM must be reprogrammed as follows: a. Using the StarSCAN(R) or equivalent at the "Home" screen, Select "ECU View" b. Touch the screen to highlight the TCM in the list of modules. c. Select "More Options" d. Select "ECU Flash" e. Record the part number at the top of the "Flash TCM" screen for later reference. f. Select "Browse for New File". Follow the on screen instructions. NOTE: If the part number recorded in step "11e" is the same as the new p/n shown on the "Flash File List" screen no further action is required. Cancel the TCM reprogram procedure. Continue to step STEP 17. g. Highlight the appropriate calibration. h. Select "Download to Scantool". i. Select "Close" after the download is complete, then select "Back". j. Highlight the listed calibration. k. Select "Update Controller". Follow on screen instructions. l. When the update is complete, select "OK". m. Verify the part number at the top of the "Flash TCM" screen has updated to the new part number. n. Continue to step STEP 15 12. Is "WCM - Wireless Control Module" displayed in the "ECU Overview" screen list of modules? a. Yes >> go to STEP 13. b. No >> go to STEP 14. 13. Program the PCM to the Wireless Control Module (WCM). a. Highlight the WCM. b. Select "Misc. Function". c. Highlight "PCM Replaced". d. Select "Start" e. Follow the on screen instructions. Select "Next" after each step. Select "Finish" after completing the last step. f. When complete proceed to STEP 15. 14. Program the VIN into the PCM. a. Scroll through the list of controllers and highlight the PCM. b. Select "Misc. Function". c. Highlight "Check PCM VIN". d. Select "Start" e. Follow the on screen instructions. Select "Next" after each step. When the window appears with 17 boxes, select "Show Keyboard". Place the cursor to the right of the last box and then backspace to delete the boxes from the window. Enter the VIN. Select "Finish" after completing the last step. f. Unplug the scan tool from the Data Link Connector. g. At the "Vehicle Disconnected" screen, press "OK". h. Connect the scan tool to the Data Link Connector and verify that the VIN is visible at the top of the "Home" screen. 15. Is the vehicle equipped ETC? a. Yes >> go to STEP 17. b. No >> go to STEP 16. 16. Using the StarSCAN(R) or equivalent at the "Home" screen: a. Select ECU View b. Scroll through the list of controllers and highlight the PCM. c. Select Misc. Function. d. Highlight "Learn ETC". e. Select "Start" f. Follow the on screen instructions. Select Next after each step. Select Finish after completing the last step. NOTE: Due to the PCM programming procedure, a DTC may be set in other modules (TCM, BCM, MIC, SKREEM, etc.) within the vehicle, if so equipped. Some DTC's may cause the MIL to illuminate. From the Home screen select System View. Then select All DTCs. Press Clear All Stored DTCs if there are any DTCs shown on the list. NOTE: The following step is required by law when reprogramming a PCM and/or TCM. 17. Type the necessary information on the Authorized Modification Label p/n 04275086AB and attach near the VECI label. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > SKREEM Programming > Page 3334 REPAIR PROCEDURE USING SOFTWARE UPDATE CD TO RETRIEVE THE FLASH FILE: NOTE: If this flash process is interrupted/aborted, the flash should be restarted. NOTE: For detailed information on the operation of the StarSCAN(R) or equivalent, refer to the Quick Reference documentation provided in the StarSCAN(R) or equivalent documentation kit. Look under Training Aids and also under Download Center > Frequently Asked Questions for more help. 1. Open the hood, install a battery charger and verify that the charging rate provides approximately 13.5 volts. Set the battery charger timer to maintain the charging voltage for the duration of the flash process. 2. Connect the CH9404 StarSCAN(R) or equivalent vehicle cable to the StarSCAN(R) or equivalent and the vehicle. 3. Power ON the StarSCAN(R) or equivalent. 4. Retrieve the old ECU part number. Using the StarSCAN(R) or equivalent at the "Home" screen: a. Select "ECU View" b. Touch the screen to highlight the PCM in the list of modules. c. Select "More Options" d. Select "ECU Flash" e. Record the part number at the top of the "Flash PCM" screen for later reference. 5. Replace the PCM with the appropriate Generic PCM. 6. Insert the StarSCAN(R) or equivalent Software Update CD into the TechCONNECT or equivalent PC. The StarSCAN(R) or equivalent Software Update CD will start automatically. Select "Download Flash Updates". 7. At the "Select a method for looking up controller flash updates. " screen: a. Select "Enter part number". Enter the "Part Number" recorded in STEP 4 when prompted to do so. b. Using the mouse highlight the appropriate "Calibration". Select "Next". c. Follow the on screen instructions. d. When completed, proceed to STEP 8. 8. With the StarSCAN(R) or equivalent powered OFF, connect the USB Key and Gender Changer to the StarSCAN(R) or equivalent USB port. 9. Connect the StarSCAN(R) or equivalent to the vehicle (if not already connected). 10. Power ON the StarSCAN(R) or equivalent. 11. Download the flash file from the USB key to the StarSCAN(R) or equivalent. Using the StarSCAN(R) or equivalent at the "Home" screen: a. Select "Flash Download", then select "Retrieve files from the USB storage device" b. Highlight the appropriate calibration. Select "Download to Scan Tool" c. When the download is complete, select "Close" and "Back". 12. Reprogram the ECU. Using the StarSCAN(R) or equivalent at the "Home" screen: a. Select "ECU View". b. Select More Options". c. Select "ECU Flash". Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > SKREEM Programming > Page 3335 d. Highlight the appropriate calibration. e. Select "Update Controller". Follow the on screen instructions. f. When the update is complete, select "OK". g. Verify the part number at the top of the "Flash PCM" screen has updated to the new part number. 13. Is "WCM - Wireless Control Module" displayed in the "ECU Overview" screen list of modules? a. Yes >> go to STEP 14. b. No >> go to STEP 15. 14. Program the PCM to the Wireless Control Module (WCM). Using the StarSCAN(R) or equivalent at the "Home" screen: a. Select "ECU View" b. Scroll through the list of controllers and highlight the WCM. c. Select "Misc. Function". d. Highlight "PCM Replaced". e. Select "Start" f. Follow the on screen instructions. Select "Next" after each step. Select "Finish" after completing the last step. g. When complete proceed to STEP 16. 15. Program the VIN into the PCM. a. Scroll through the list of controllers and highlight the PCM. b. Select "Misc. Function". c. Highlight "Check PCM VIN". d. Select "Start" e. Follow the on screen instructions. Select "Next" after each step. When the window appears with 17 boxes, select "Show Keyboard". Place the cursor to the right of the last box and then backspace to delete the boxes from the window. Enter the VIN. Select "Finish" after completing the last step. f. Unplug the scan tool from the Data Link Connector. g. At the "Vehicle Disconnected" screen, press "OK". h. Connect the scan tool to the Data Link Connector and verify that the VIN is visible at the top of the "Home" screen. 16. Is the vehicle equipped with a 3.7L or 4.7L engine? a. Yes >> go to STEP 18. b. No >> go to STEP 17. 17. Using the StarSCAN(R) or equivalent at the "Home" screen: a. Select "ECU View" b. Scroll through the list of controllers and highlight the PCM. c. Select "Misc. Function". d. Highlight "Learn ETC". e. Select "Start" f. Follow the on screen instructions. Select "Next" after each step. Select "Finish" after completing the last step. NOTE: Due to the PCM programming procedure, a DTC may be set in other modules (TCM, BCM, MIC, SKIM, etc.) within the vehicle, if so equipped. Some DTC's may cause the MIL to illuminate. Check all modules using "ECU View" from the Home screen, record the DTC's, and erase these DTC's prior to returning the vehicle to the customer. Erase any DTC's in the PCM only after all other modules have had their DTC's erased. NOTE: The following step is required by law. 18. Type the necessary information on the "Authorized Modification Label" p/n 04275086AB and attach near the VECI label. ** Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Engine Control Module (ECM) - Diesel Engine Control Module: Service and Repair Engine Control Module (ECM) - Diesel 5.9L Diesel 5.9L DIESEL CUMMINS FUEL SYSTEM COMPONENTS The Engine Control Module (ECM) (16) is bolted to a support bracket near the fuel filter. The support bracket mounts to the block with four capscrews and vibration isolators. A ground wire is fastened to the bracket. The other end of the wire is fastened to the engine block. 1. Record any Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTC's) found in the ECM. To avoid possible voltage spike damage to the ECM, ignition key must be off, and both negative battery cables must be disconnected before unplugging ECM connectors. 2. Disconnect both negative battery cables at both batteries. 3. Remove the 50-way and 60-way connector bolts at the ECM. Note: The connector bolt is a female allen head. As bolt is being removed, very carefully remove connectors from the ECM. 4. Remove five ECM mounting bolts and remove ECM from vehicle. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Engine Control Module (ECM) - Diesel > Page 3338 6.7L Diesel 6.7L DIESEL The Engine Control Module (ECM) (5) is located on the left side of the engine. A support bracket mounts to the block with four capscrews and vibration isolators. A ground wire is fastened to the bracket. The other end of the wire is fastened to the engine block. 1. Record any Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTC's) found in the ECM. To avoid possible voltage spike damage to the ECM, ignition key must be off, and both negative battery cables must be disconnected before unplugging ECM connectors. 2. Disconnect both negative battery cables at both batteries. Access to the ECM is easier by working through the left front wheel opening. 3. Remove left front wheel. 4. Remove plastic left front fender splash shield. 5. Remove electrical connector bolts at ECM. Note: As each bolt is being removed, very carefully remove connectors from the ECM. 6. Remove three ECM mounting bolts (6) and remove ECM from engine. 5.9L Diesel 5.9L DIESEL Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Engine Control Module (ECM) - Diesel > Page 3339 CUMMINS FUEL SYSTEM COMPONENTS Do not apply paint to ECM or a poor ground will result. 1. Position the ECM (16) to the ECM support bracket and install the five mounting bolts. Tighten bolts to 24 Nm (18 ft. lbs.). 2. Check pin connectors in ECM, 50-way and 60-way connectors for corrosion or damage. Repair as necessary. 3. Clean pins in the 50-way and 60-way electrical connectors with a electrical contact cleaner. 4. Install the 50-way and 60-way connectors to ECM. Tighten connector bolts to 3 Nm (27 in. lbs.). 5. Reconnect both negative battery cables. 6. Use a diagnostic scan tool to erase any Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTC's) from ECM. 6.7L Diesel 6.7L DIESEL Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Engine Control Module (ECM) - Diesel > Page 3340 Do not apply paint to ECM or a poor ground will result. 1. Position ECM (5) to the ECM support bracket and install mounting bolts. Tighten bolts to 24 Nm (18 ft. lbs.). 2. Check pins in electrical connectors for corrosion, damage or dirt intrusion. Also check all pins for being bent. Repair as necessary. Damaged, dirty, bent or corroded pins could result in poor conductivity, causing intermittent electrical issues or DTC's. 3. Clean pins in electrical connectors with an electrical contact cleaner. 4. Install connectors to ECM. Tighten connector bolts to 3 Nm (27 in. lbs.). 5. Install splash shield. 6. Install left front wheel. 7. Connect both negative battery cables. 8. Use a diagnostic scan tool to erase any Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTC's) from ECM.FUEL INJECTOR ID CORRECTION CODES: Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Engine Control Module (ECM) - Diesel > Page 3341 Each fuel injector has a six-digit alphanumeric correction code. The correction code is printed on the intake side of the fuel injector (1) and is used to identify injector calibration. When replacing any fuel injectors, this code must be entered into the vehicles Engine Control Module (ECM) using a diagnostic scan tool. In addition, if a new ECM is installed, use a diagnostic scan tool to program all six of the injector codes from the original fuel injectors into the new ECM. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Engine Control Module (ECM) - Diesel > Page 3342 Engine Control Module: Service and Repair Powertrain Control Module - Removal REMOVAL CAUTION: Certain ABS systems rely on having the Powertrain Control Module (PCM) broadcast the Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) over the bus network. To prevent problems of DTCs and other items related to the VIN broadcast, it is recommend that you disconnect the ABS CAB (controller) temporarily when replacing the PCM. Once the PCM is replaced, write the VIN to the PCM using a scan tool. This is done from the engine main menu. Arrow over to the second page to "1. Miscellaneous". Select "Check VIN" from the choices. Make sure it has the correct VIN entered before continuing. When the VIN is complete, turn off the ignition key and reconnect the ABS module connector. This will prevent the setting of DTCs and other items associated with the lack of a VIN detected when you turn the key ON after replacing the PCM. CAUTION: Use the scan tool to reprogram the new PCM with the vehicles original identification number (VIN) and the vehicles original mileage. If this step is not done, a Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) may be set. The PCM (1) is located in the engine compartment attached to the dash panel (3). To avoid possible voltage spike damage to the PCM, ignition key must be off, and negative battery cable must be disconnected before unplugging PCM connectors. 1. Disconnect negative battery cable at battery. 2. Remove cover over electrical connectors. Cover snaps onto PCM. 3. Carefully unplug the three 32-way connectors (four 38-way connectors if equipped with NGC) from PCM (1). 4. Remove three PCM mounting bolts (4) and remove PCM from vehicle. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Engine Control Module (ECM) - Diesel > Page 3343 Engine Control Module: Service and Repair Powertrain Control Module - Installation INSTALLATION CAUTION: Certain ABS systems rely on having the Powertrain Control Module (PCM) broadcast the Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) over the bus network. To prevent problems of DTCs and other items related to the VIN broadcast, it is recommend that you disconnect the ABS CAB (controller) temporarily when replacing the PCM. Once the PCM is replaced, write the VIN to the PCM using a scan tool. This is done from the engine main menu. Arrow over to the second page to "1. Miscellaneous". Select "Check VIN" from the choices. Make sure it has the correct VIN entered before continuing. When the VIN is complete, turn off the ignition key and reconnect the ABS module connector. This will prevent the setting of DTCs and other items associated with the lack of a VIN detected when you turn the key ON after replacing the PCM. CAUTION: Use the scan tool to reprogram the new PCM with the vehicles original identification number (VIN) and the vehicles original mileage. If this step is not done, a Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) may be set. 1. Install PCM (3) and 3 mounting bolts (4) to vehicle. 2. Tighten bolts. Refer to torque specifications. 3. Check pin connectors in the PCM and the three 32-way connectors (four 38-way connectors if equipped with NGC) for corrosion or damage. Also, the pin heights in connectors should all be same. Repair as necessary before installing connectors. 4. Install three 32-way connectors (four 38-way connectors if equipped with NGC). 5. Install cover over electrical connectors. Cover snaps onto PCM. 6. Install negative battery cable. 7. The 5.7L V-8 engine is equipped with a fully electronic accelerator pedal position sensor. If equipped with a 5.7L, also perform the following 3 steps: a. Connect negative battery cable to battery. b. Turn ignition switch ON, but do not crank engine. c. Leave ignition switch ON for a minimum of 10 seconds. This will allow PCM to learn electrical parameters. d. The scan tool may also be used to learn electrical parameters. Go to the Miscellaneous menu, and then select ETC Learn. 8. If the previous step is not performed, a Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) will be set. 9. If necessary, use a scan tool to erase any Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTC's) from PCM. Also use the scan tool to reprogram new PCM with vehicles original Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) and original vehicle mileage. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Diagrams Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System): Diagrams Connector - (IN TIPM) RELAY-AUTO SHUT DOWN - (IN TIPM) Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3347 Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System): Description and Operation PCM OUTPUT The 5 pin, 12 volt, Automatic Shutdown (ASD) relay is located in the Power Distribution Center (PDC). Refer to label on PDC cover for relay location. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3348 Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System): Testing and Inspection Fig.1 ASD And Fuel Pump Relay Terminals-Type 1 Fig.2 ASD And Fuel Pump Relay Terminals-Type 2 The following description of operation and tests apply only to the Automatic Shutdown (ASD) and fuel pump relays. The terminals on the bottom of each relay are numbered. Two different types of relays may be used, or. - Terminal number 30 is connected to battery voltage. For both the ASD and fuel pump relays, terminal 30 is connected to battery voltage at all times. - The PCM grounds the coil side of the relay through terminal number 85. - Terminal number 86 supplies voltage to the coil side of the relay. - When the PCM de-energizes the ASD and fuel pump relays, terminal number 87A connects to terminal 30. This is the OFF position. In the OFF position, voltage is not supplied to the rest of the circuit. Terminal 87A is the center terminal on the relay. - When the PCM energizes the ASD and fuel pump relays, terminal 87 connects to terminal 30. This is the ON position. Terminal 87 supplies voltage to the rest of the circuit. The following procedure applies to the ASD and fuel pump relays. 1. Remove relay from connector before testing. 2. With the relay removed from the vehicle, use an ohmmeter to check the resistance between terminals 85 and 86. The resistance should be 75 ohms Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3349 ± 5 ohms. 3. Connect the ohmmeter between terminals 30 and 87A. The ohmmeter should show continuity between terminals 30 and 87A. 4. Connect the ohmmeter between terminals 87 and 30. The ohmmeter should not show continuity at this time. 5. Connect one end of a jumper wire (16 gauge or smaller) to relay terminal 85. Connect the other end of the jumper wire to the ground side of a 12 volt power source. 6. Connect one end of another jumper wire (16 gauge or smaller) to the power side of the 12 volt power source. Do not attach the other end of the jumper wire to the relay at this time. WARNING: DO NOT ALLOW OHMMETER TO CONTACT TERMINALS 85 OR 86 DURING THIS TEST. DAMAGE TO OHMMETER MAY RESULT. 7. Attach the other end of the jumper wire to relay terminal 86. This activates the relay. The ohmmeter should now show continuity between relay terminals 87 and 30. The ohmmeter should not show continuity between relay terminals 87A and 30. 8. Disconnect jumper wires. 9. Replace the relay if it did not pass the continuity and resistance tests. If the relay passed the tests, it operates properly. Check the remainder of the ASD and fuel pump relay circuits. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams Oxygen Sensor Relay: Diagrams 2007-2009 Dodge Ram 3.7/4.7/5.7L engine O2 sensor heater, is controled by the powertrain control module. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3353 Oxygen Sensor Relay: Description and Operation DESCRIPTION The Oxygen Sensors (02S) are attached to, and protrude into the vehicle exhaust system Depending on the engine or emission package, the vehicle may use a total of either 2 or 4 sensors Federal Emission Packages Two sensors are used: upstream (referred to as 1/1) and downstream (referred to as 1/2) With this emission package, the upstream sensor (1/1) is located just before the main catalytic convertor The downstream sensor (1/2) is located just after the main catalytic convertor California Emission Packages: On this emissions package, 4 sensors are used: 2 upstream (referred to as ill and 2/1) and 2 downstream (referred to as 1/2 and 2/2) With this emission pack-age, the right upstream sensor (2/i) is located in the right exhaust downpipe just before the mini-catalytic convertor The left upstream sensor (1/i) is located in the left exhaust downpipe just before the mini-catalytic convertor The right downstream sensor (2/2) is located in the right exhaust downpipe just after the mini-catalytic convertor, and before the main catalytic convertor The left downstream sensor (1/2) is located in the left exhaust downpipe just after the mini-catalytic convertor, and before the main catalytic convertor Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Locations Fuel Pump Relay: Locations DESCRIPTION A separate fuel pump relay is no longer used. A circuit within the TIPM (Totally Integrated Power Module) is used to control the electric fuel pump located within the fuel pump module. The TIPM (1) is located in the engine compartment in front of the battery. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Fuel Pump Relay: Diagram Information and Instructions Warnings WARNINGS - GENERAL WARNINGS provide information to prevent personal injury and vehicle damage. Below is a list of general warnings that should be followed any time a vehicle is being serviced. WARNING: Always wear safety glasses for eye protection. WARNING: Use safety stands anytime a procedure requires being under a vehicle. WARNING: Be sure that the ignition switch always is in the off position, unless the procedure requires it to be on. WARNING: Set the parking brake when working on any vehicle. An automatic transmission should be in park. A manual transmission should be in neutral. WARNING: Operate the engine only in a well-ventilated area. WARNING: Keep away from moving parts when the engine is running, especially the fan and belts. WARNING: To prevent serious burns, avoid contact with hot parts such as the radiator, exhaust manifold(s), tail pipe, catalytic converter and muffler. WARNING: Do not allow flame or sparks near the battery. Gases are always present in and around the battery. WARNING: Always remove rings, watches, loose hanging jewelry and avoid loose clothing. How to Use Wiring Diagrams DESCRIPTION - HOW TO USE WIRING DIAGRAMS DaimlerChrysler Corporation wiring diagrams are designed to provide information regarding the vehicles wiring content. In order to effectively use the wiring diagrams to diagnose and repair DaimlerChrysler Corporation vehicles, it is important to understand all of their features and characteristics. Diagrams are arranged such that the power (B+) side of the circuit is placed near the top of the page, and the ground (B-) side of the circuit is placed near the bottom of the page. All switches, components, and modules are shown in the at rest position with the doors closed and the key removed from the ignition. Components are shown two ways. A solid line around a component indicates that the component is complete. A dashed line around the component indicates that the component is being shown is not complete. Incomplete components have a reference number to indicate the page where the component is shown complete. It is important to realize that no attempt is made on the diagrams to represent components and wiring as they appear on the vehicle. For example, a short piece of wire is treated the same as a long one. In addition, switches and other components are shown as simply as possible, with regard to function only. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3360 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3361 SYMBOLS International symbols are used throughout the wiring diagrams. These symbols are consistent with those being used around the world. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3362 TERMINOLOGY This is a list of terms and definitions used in the wiring diagrams. LHD - Left Hand Drive Vehicles RHD - Right Hand Drive Vehicles ATX - Automatic Transmissions-Front Wheel Drive MTX Manual Transmissions-Front Wheel Drive Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3363 AT - Automatic Transmissions-Rear Wheel Drive MT - Manual Transmissions-Rear Wheel Drive SOHC - Single Over Head Cam Engine DOHC - Double Over Head Cam Engine Export - Vehicles Built For Sale In Markets Other Than North America Except Export - Vehicles Built For Sale In North America Circuit Functions DESCRIPTION - CIRCUIT FUNCTIONS All circuits in the diagrams use an alpha/numeric code to identify the wire and it's function. To identify which circuit code applies to a system, refer to the Circuit Identification Code Chart. This chart shows the main circuits only and does not show the secondary codes that may apply to some models. Circuit Information DESCRIPTION - CIRCUIT INFORMATION Each wire shown in the diagrams contains a code which identifies the main circuit, a specific part of the main circuit, gage of wire, and color. An example would be A 2 18 LB/YL. This is a Battery Feed circuit, level two, eighteen gauge, light blue with a yellow tracer. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3364 Connector, Ground and Splice Information DESCRIPTION - CONNECTOR, GROUND AND SPLICE INFORMATION CAUTION: Not all connectors are serviced. Some connectors are serviced only with a harness. A typical example might be the Supplemental Restraint System connectors. Always check parts availability before attempting a repair. IDENTIFICATION In-line connectors are identified by a number, as follows: - In-line connectors located in the engine compartment are C100 series numbers. - In-line connectors located in the instrument panel area are C200 series numbers. - In-line connectors located in the body are C300 series numbers. - Jumper harness connectors are C400 series numbers. - Grounds and ground connectors are identified with a "G" and follow the same series numbering as the in-line connectors. - Splices are identified with an "S" and follow the same series numbering as the in-line connectors. In addition, S001-S099 numbers are located in the engine compartment. - Component connectors are identified by the component name instead of a number. Multiple connectors on a component use a C1, C2, etc. identifier. LOCATIONS Vehicle/Locations contains the master connector/ground/splice location index charts with hyperlinks to the applicable location illustrations. The illustrations contain the connector name (or number)/ground number/splice number and component identification. The abbreviation T/O is used in the component location section to indicate a point in which the wiring harness branches out to a component. The abbreviation N/S means Not Shown in the illustrations Section Identification and Information DESCRIPTION - SECTION IDENTIFICATION AND INFORMATION The wiring diagrams are grouped into individual sections. If a component is most likely found in a particular group, it will be shown complete (all wires, Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3365 connectors, and pins) within that group. For example, the Auto Shutdown Relay is most likely to be found in Powertrain Management, so it is shown there complete. It can, however, be shown partially in another group if it contains some associated wiring. Splice diagrams show the entire splice and provide references to other sections the splices serves. Splice Information only contains splice diagrams that are not shown in their entirety somewhere else in the wiring diagrams. Connector Pin-Outs shows each connector and the circuits involved with that connector. The connectors are identified using the name/number on the diagram pages. Removal REMOVAL 1. Disconnect battery. 2. Release Connector Lock (2). 3. Disconnect the connector (3) being repaired from its mating half/component. 4. Remove the dress cover (if applicable) (1). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3366 5. Release the Secondary Terminal Lock, if required (1). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3367 6. Position the connector locking finger away from the terminal using the proper special tool. Pull on the wire to remove the terminal from the connector. Installation Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3368 INSTALLATION 1. Insert the removed terminal in the same cavity on the repair connector. 2. Repeat steps for each terminal in the connector, being sure that all wires are inserted into the proper cavities. For additional connector pin-out identification, refer to the wiring diagrams. 3. When the connector is re-assembled, the secondary terminal lock must be placed in the locked position to prevent terminal push out. 4. Replace dress cover (if applicable). 5. Connect connector to its mating half/component. 6. Connect battery and test all affected systems. Removal REMOVAL 1. Disconnect the battery. 2. Locate the diode in the harness, and remove the protective covering. 3. Remove the diode from the harness, pay attention to the current flow direction (1) (2) (3). Installation INSTALLATION 1. Remove the insulation from the wires in the harness. Only remove enough insulation to solder in the new diode. 2. Install the new diode in the harness, making sure current flow is correct. If necessary, refer to the appropriate wiring diagram for current flow. 3. Solder the connection together using rosin core type solder only. Do not use acid core solder. 4. Tape the diode to the harness using electrical tape. Make sure the diode is completely sealed from the elements. 5. Re-connect the battery and test affected systems. Removal REMOVAL 1. Follow steps for removing terminals described in the connector removal section. 2. Cut the wire 6 inches from the back of the connector. Installation INSTALLATION 1. Select a wire from the terminal repair kit that best matches the color and gage of the wire being repaired. 2. Cut the repair wire to the proper length and remove one-half (1/2) inch of insulation. 3. Splice the repair wire to the wire harness (see wire splicing procedure). See: Service Procedures/Wire Splicing 4. Insert the repaired wire into the connector. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3369 5. Install the connector locking wedge, if required, and reconnect the connector to its mating half/component. 6. Re-tape the wire harness starting at 1-1/2 inches behind the connector and 2 inches past the repair. 7. Connect battery and test all affected systems. Wire Splicing STANDARD PROCEDURE - WIRE SPLICING When splicing a wire, it is important that the correct gage be used as shown in the wiring diagrams. 1. Remove one-half (1/2) inch of insulation from each wire that needs to be spliced. 2. Place a piece of adhesive lined heat shrink tubing on one side of the wire. Make sure the tubing will be long enough to cover and seal the entire repair area. 3. Place the strands of wire overlapping each other inside of the splice clip (1). 4. Using crimping tool (1), Mopar p/n 05019912AA, crimp the splice clip and wires together. 5. Solder (3) the connection (2) together using rosin core type solder (1) only. CAUTION: DO NOT USE ACID CORE SOLDER. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3370 6. Center the heat shrink tubing (2) over the joint and heat using a heat gun. Heat the joint until the tubing is tightly sealed and sealant (1) comes out of both ends of the tubing. Special Tools WIRING/TERMINAL PROBING TOOL PACKAGE 6807 TERMINAL PICK TOOL SET 6680 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3371 TERMINAL REMOVING TOOLS 6932 AND 8638 TERMINAL REMOVING TOOL 6934 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3372 Fuel Pump Relay: Diagnostic Aids Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) Sensitive Devices STANDARD PROCEDURE - ELECTROSTATIC DISCHARGE (ESD) SENSITIVE DEVICES All ESD sensitive components are solid state and a symbol is used to indicate this. When handling any component with this symbol, comply with the following procedures to reduce the possibility of electrostatic charge build up on the body and inadvertent discharge into the component. If it is not known whether the part is ESD sensitive, assume that it is. 1. Always touch a known good ground before handling the part. This should be repeated while handling the part and more frequently after sliding across a seat, sitting down from a standing position, or walking a distance. 2. Avoid touching electrical terminals of the part, unless instructed to do so by a written procedure. 3. When using a voltmeter, be sure to connect the ground lead first. 4. Do not remove the part from it's protective packing until it is time to install the part. 5. Before removing the part from it's package, ground the package to a known good ground on the vehicle. Testing Of Voltage Potential STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING OF VOLTAGE POTENTIAL 1. Connect the ground lead of a voltmeter to a known good ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the voltmeter to the selected test point. The vehicle ignition may need to be turned ON to check voltage. Refer to the appropriate test procedure. Testing For Continuity Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3373 STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING FOR CONTINUITY 1. Remove the fuse (1) for the circuit being checked or, disconnect the battery. 2. Connect one lead of the ohmmeter to one side of the circuit being tested 3. Connect the other lead to the other end of the circuit being tested. Low or no resistance means good continuity. Testing For A Short To Ground STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING FOR A SHORT TO GROUND 1. Remove the fuse and disconnect all items involved with the fuse. 2. Connect a test light or a voltmeter across the terminals of the fuse. 3. Starting at the fuse block, wiggle the wiring harness about six to eight inches apart and watch the voltmeter/test lamp. 4. If the voltmeter registers voltage or the test lamp glows, there is a short to ground in that general area of the wiring harness. Testing For A Short To Ground On Fuses Powering Several Loads STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING FOR A SHORT TO GROUND ON FUSES POWERING SEVERAL LOADS 1. Refer to the wiring diagrams and disconnect or isolate all items on the suspected fused circuits. 2. Replace the blown fuse. 3. Supply power to the fuse by turning ON the ignition switch or re-connecting the battery. 4. Start connecting or energizing the items in the fuse circuit one at a time. When the fuse blows the circuit with the short to ground has been isolated. Testing For A Voltage Drop STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING FOR A VOLTAGE DROP Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3374 1. Connect the positive lead of the voltmeter to the side of the circuit closest to the battery. 2. Connect the other lead of the voltmeter to the other side of the switch, component or circuit. 3. Operate the item. 4. The voltmeter will show the difference in voltage between the two points. Troubleshooting Wiring Problems DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING - WIRING HARNESS TROUBLESHOOTING TOOLS When diagnosing a problem in an electrical circuit there are several common tools necessary. These tools are listed and explained below. - Jumper Wire - This is a test wire used to connect two points of a circuit. It can be used to bypass an open in a circuit. WARNING: Never use a jumper wire across a load, such as a motor, connected between a battery feed and ground. - Voltmeter - Used to check for voltage on a circuit. Always connect the black lead to a known good ground and the red lead to the positive side of the circuit. CAUTION: Most of the electrical components used in today's vehicles are Solid State. When checking voltages in these circuits, use a meter with a 10 - megohm or greater impedance rating. - Ohmmeter - Used to check the resistance between two points of a circuit. Low or no resistance in a circuit means good continuity. CAUTION: Most of the electrical components used in today's vehicles are Solid State. When checking resistance in these circuits use a meter with a 10 - megohm or greater impedance rating. In addition, make sure the power is disconnected from the circuit. Circuits that are powered up by the vehicle's electrical system can cause damage to the equipment and provide false readings. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3375 - Probing Tools - These tools are used for probing terminals in connectors. Select the proper size tool from Special Tool Package 6807, and insert the probing end (2) into the terminal being tested. Use the other end of the tool (1) to insert the meter probe. INTERMITTENT AND POOR CONNECTIONS Most intermittent electrical problems are caused by faulty electrical connections or wiring. It is also possible for a sticking component or relay to cause a problem. Before condemning a component or wiring assembly, check the following items. - Connectors are fully seated - Spread terminals, or terminal push out - Terminals in the wiring assembly are fully seated into the connector/component and locked into position - Dirt or corrosion on the terminals. Any amount of corrosion or dirt could cause an intermittent problem - Damaged connector/component casing exposing the item to dirt or moisture - Wire insulation that has rubbed through causing a short to ground - Some or all of the wiring strands broken inside of the insulation - Wiring broken inside of the insulation TROUBLESHOOTING WIRING PROBLEMS When troubleshooting wiring problems there are six steps which can aid in the procedure. The steps are listed and explained below. Always check for non-factory items added to the vehicle before doing any diagnosis. If the vehicle is equipped with these items, disconnect them to verify these add-on items are not the cause of the problem. 1. Verify the problem. 2. Verify any related symptoms. Do this by performing operational checks on components that are in the same circuit. Refer to the wiring diagrams. 3. Analyze the symptoms. Use the wiring diagrams to determine what the circuit is doing, where the problem most likely is occurring and where the diagnosis will continue. 4. Isolate the problem area. 5. Repair the problem area. 6. Verify the proper operation. For this step, check for proper operation of all items on the repaired circuit. Refer to the wiring diagrams. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3376 Fuel Pump Relay: Connector Views Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Fuel Pump Relay: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION A separate fuel pump relay is no longer used. A circuit within the TIPM (Totally Integrated Power Module) is used to control the electric fuel pump located within the fuel pump module. The TIPM (1) is located in the engine compartment in front of the battery. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 3379 Fuel Pump Relay: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The Powertrain Control Module (PCM) energizes the electric fuel pump through the fuel pump relay. The fuel pump relay is energized by first applying battery voltage to it when the ignition key is turned ON, and then applying a ground signal to the relay from the PCM. Whenever the ignition key is turned ON, the electric fuel pump will operate. But, the PCM will shut-down the ground circuit to the fuel pump relay in approximately 1-3 seconds unless the engine is operating or the starter motor is engaged. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Diagrams Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System): Diagrams Connector - (IN TIPM) RELAY-AUTO SHUT DOWN - (IN TIPM) Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3383 Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System): Description and Operation PCM OUTPUT The 5 pin, 12 volt, Automatic Shutdown (ASD) relay is located in the Power Distribution Center (PDC). Refer to label on PDC cover for relay location. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3384 Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System): Testing and Inspection Fig.1 ASD And Fuel Pump Relay Terminals-Type 1 Fig.2 ASD And Fuel Pump Relay Terminals-Type 2 The following description of operation and tests apply only to the Automatic Shutdown (ASD) and fuel pump relays. The terminals on the bottom of each relay are numbered. Two different types of relays may be used, or. - Terminal number 30 is connected to battery voltage. For both the ASD and fuel pump relays, terminal 30 is connected to battery voltage at all times. - The PCM grounds the coil side of the relay through terminal number 85. - Terminal number 86 supplies voltage to the coil side of the relay. - When the PCM de-energizes the ASD and fuel pump relays, terminal number 87A connects to terminal 30. This is the OFF position. In the OFF position, voltage is not supplied to the rest of the circuit. Terminal 87A is the center terminal on the relay. - When the PCM energizes the ASD and fuel pump relays, terminal 87 connects to terminal 30. This is the ON position. Terminal 87 supplies voltage to the rest of the circuit. The following procedure applies to the ASD and fuel pump relays. 1. Remove relay from connector before testing. 2. With the relay removed from the vehicle, use an ohmmeter to check the resistance between terminals 85 and 86. The resistance should be 75 ohms Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3385 ± 5 ohms. 3. Connect the ohmmeter between terminals 30 and 87A. The ohmmeter should show continuity between terminals 30 and 87A. 4. Connect the ohmmeter between terminals 87 and 30. The ohmmeter should not show continuity at this time. 5. Connect one end of a jumper wire (16 gauge or smaller) to relay terminal 85. Connect the other end of the jumper wire to the ground side of a 12 volt power source. 6. Connect one end of another jumper wire (16 gauge or smaller) to the power side of the 12 volt power source. Do not attach the other end of the jumper wire to the relay at this time. WARNING: DO NOT ALLOW OHMMETER TO CONTACT TERMINALS 85 OR 86 DURING THIS TEST. DAMAGE TO OHMMETER MAY RESULT. 7. Attach the other end of the jumper wire to relay terminal 86. This activates the relay. The ohmmeter should now show continuity between relay terminals 87 and 30. The ohmmeter should not show continuity between relay terminals 87A and 30. 8. Disconnect jumper wires. 9. Replace the relay if it did not pass the continuity and resistance tests. If the relay passed the tests, it operates properly. Check the remainder of the ASD and fuel pump relay circuits. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Locations Component ID: 401 Component : SENSOR-ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION Connector: Name : SENSOR-ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION Color : BLACK # of pins : 6 Pin Circuit Description 1 F855 20PK/YL 5 VOLT SUPPLY Pin Circuit Description 1 K852 20BR/LB 5 VOLT SUPPLY Pin Circuit Description 1 K852 20BR/VT 5 VOLT SUPPLY 2 K23 20BR/WT APPS NO. 1 SIGNAL 3 K167 20BR/YL APPS NO. 1 RETURN 3 K167 20BR/DG APPS NO. 1 RETURN 4 K400 20BR/VT APPS NO. 2 RETURN 5 K29 20WT/BR APPS NO. 2 SIGNAL 6 F856 20YL/PK 5 VOLT SUPPLY 6 K854 20VT/BR 5 VOLT SUPPLY Component Location - 31 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3391 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3392 Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Diagrams Component ID: 401 Component : SENSOR-ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION Connector: Name : SENSOR-ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION Color : BLACK # of pins : 6 Pin Circuit Description 1 F855 20PK/YL 5 VOLT SUPPLY Pin Circuit Description 1 K852 20BR/LB 5 VOLT SUPPLY Pin Circuit Description 1 K852 20BR/VT 5 VOLT SUPPLY 2 K23 20BR/WT APPS NO. 1 SIGNAL 3 K167 20BR/YL APPS NO. 1 RETURN 3 K167 20BR/DG APPS NO. 1 RETURN 4 K400 20BR/VT APPS NO. 2 RETURN 5 K29 20WT/BR APPS NO. 2 SIGNAL 6 F856 20YL/PK 5 VOLT SUPPLY 6 K854 20VT/BR 5 VOLT SUPPLY Component Location - 31 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3393 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor (APPS) (1) is located inside the vehicle. It is attached to the accelerator pedal assembly (3). It is used only with 3.7L V-6 and 5.7L V-8 gas engines, and also with diesel engines. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 3396 Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor (APPS) provides the Powertrain Control Module (PCM) with two DC voltage signals which change as the position of the accelerator pedal changes. One of the DC voltage signals will be half the voltage of the other signal. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL CAUTION: Do not attempt to separate or remove the Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor (APPS) from the accelerator pedal assembly. The APPS is replaced as an assembly along with the pedal. If sensor is removed from pedal, its electronic calibration may be destroyed. 1. Disconnect 6-way electrical connector at top of APPS (2). 2. Remove APPS lower mounting bolt (4) and two mounting nuts. 3. Remove pedal and APPS assembly from vehicle. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 3399 Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION CAUTION: Do not attempt to separate or remove the Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor (APPS) from the accelerator pedal assembly. The APPS is replaced as an assembly along with the pedal. If sensor is removed from pedal, its electronic calibration may be destroyed. 1. Position pedal and APPS assembly to its mounting bracket. 2. Connect 6-way electrical connector to top of APPS (2). 3. Install APPS lower mounting bolt (4) and two mounting nuts. 4. If necessary, use a Scan Tool to erase any Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTC's). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Battery Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Battery Temperature Sensor - Description Battery Temperature Sensor: Description and Operation Battery Temperature Sensor - Description DESCRIPTION The Battery Temperature Sensor (BTS) is used only on the diesel engine. It is attached to the battery tray located under the battery. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Battery Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Battery Temperature Sensor - Description > Page 3404 Battery Temperature Sensor: Description and Operation Battery Temperature Sensor - Operation OPERATION The BTS is used to determine the battery temperature and control battery charging rate. This temperature data, along with data from monitored line voltage, is used by the PCM (ECM Diesel) to vary the battery charging rate. System voltage will be higher at colder temperatures and is gradually reduced at warmer temperatures. The PCM sends 5 volts to the sensor and is grounded through the sensor return line. As temperature increases, resistance in the sensor decreases and the detection voltage at the PCM increases. The BTS is also used for OBD II diagnostics. Certain faults and OBD II monitors are either enabled or disabled, depending upon BTS input (for example, disable purge and enable Leak Detection Pump (LDP) and O2 sensor heater tests). Most OBD II monitors are disabled below 20°F. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Battery Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Battery Temperature Sensor - Removal Battery Temperature Sensor: Service and Repair Battery Temperature Sensor - Removal REMOVAL The battery temperature sensor (1) is located under the vehicle battery and is attached (snapped into) a mounting hole on battery tray (4). 1. Remove battery. 2. Pry sensor (1) straight up from battery tray mounting hole to gain access to electrical connector (3). 3. Disconnect sensor from engine wire harness electrical connector. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Battery Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Battery Temperature Sensor - Removal > Page 3407 Battery Temperature Sensor: Service and Repair Battery Temperature Sensor - Installation INSTALLATION NOTE: The battery temperature sensor (1) is located under the vehicle battery and is attached (snapped into) a mounting hole on battery tray (4). 1. Pull electrical connector (3) up through mounting hole in top of battery tray. 2. Connect sensor. 3. Snap sensor into battery tray. 4. Install battery. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations Camshaft Position Sensor: Locations Component ID: 405 Component : SENSOR-CAMSHAFT POSITION Connector: Name : SENSOR-CAMSHAFT POSITION Color : # of pins : 3 Qualifier : (DIESEL) Pin Circuit Description 1 F855 18PK/YL 5 VOLT SUPPLY 2 K944 18BK/GY CMP SENSOR GROUND 2 K916 18BR/OR SENSOR GROUND 3 K44 18DB/GY CMP SIGNAL Component Location - 5 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3411 Component Location - 11 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3412 Component Location - 13 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3413 Connector: Name : SENSOR-CAMSHAFT POSITION Color : GRAY # of pins : 3 Qualifier : (GAS) Pin Circuit Description 1 F856 20YL/PK 5 VOLT SUPPLY 2 K900 20DB/DG SENSOR GROUND 3 K44 20DB/GY CMP SIGNAL Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3414 Component Location - 5 Component Location - 11 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3415 Component Location - 13 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3416 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3417 Camshaft Position Sensor: Diagrams Component ID: 405 Component : SENSOR-CAMSHAFT POSITION Connector: Name : SENSOR-CAMSHAFT POSITION Color : # of pins : 3 Qualifier : (DIESEL) Pin Circuit Description 1 F855 18PK/YL 5 VOLT SUPPLY 2 K944 18BK/GY CMP SENSOR GROUND 2 K916 18BR/OR SENSOR GROUND 3 K44 18DB/GY CMP SIGNAL Component Location - 5 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3418 Component Location - 11 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3419 Component Location - 13 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3420 Connector: Name : SENSOR-CAMSHAFT POSITION Color : GRAY # of pins : 3 Qualifier : (GAS) Pin Circuit Description 1 F856 20YL/PK 5 VOLT SUPPLY 2 K900 20DB/DG SENSOR GROUND 3 K44 20DB/GY CMP SIGNAL Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3421 Component Location - 5 Component Location - 11 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3422 Component Location - 13 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3423 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Camshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation Description 3.7L & 4.7L The Camshaft Position Sensor (CMP) (3) is bolted to the right-front side of the right cylinder head (2). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 3426 Camshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation Operation 4.7L The CMP sensor engine contains a hall effect device called a sync signal generator to generate a fuel sync signal. This sync signal generator detects notches located on a tonewheel. The tonewheel (4) is located at the front of the camshaft for the right cylinder head (2). As the tonewheel rotates, the notches (1) pass through the sync signal generator. The pattern of the notches (viewed counter-clockwise from front of engine) is: 1 notch, 2 notches, 3 notches, 3 notches, 2 notches, 1 notch, 3 notches and 1 notch. The signal from the CMP sensor is used in conjunction with the crankshaft position sensor to differentiate between fuel injection and spark events. It is also used to synchronize the fuel injectors with their respective cylinders. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Camshaft Position Sensor - Removal Camshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair Camshaft Position Sensor - Removal 4.7L The Camshaft Position Sensor (CMP) (2) is bolted to the front/top of the right cylinder head (1). 1. Raise and support vehicle. 2. Disconnect electrical connector (4) at CMP sensor. 3. Remove sensor mounting bolt (3). 4. Carefully twist sensor from cylinder head. 5. Check condition of sensor O-ring. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Camshaft Position Sensor - Removal > Page 3429 Camshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair Camshaft Position Sensor - Installation 4.7L 1. Clean out machined hole in cylinder head. 2. Apply a small amount of engine oil to sensor O-ring. 3. Install sensor (2) into cylinder head (1) with a slight rocking action. Do not twist sensor into position as damage to O-ring may result. CAUTION: Before tightening sensor mounting bolt, be sure sensor is completely flush to cylinder head. If sensor is not flush, damage to sensor mounting tang may result. 4. Install mounting bolt (3) and tighten to 12 Nm (106 in.lbs.). 5. Connect electrical connector to sensor. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Locations Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Locations Component ID: 410 Component : SENSOR-ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE Connector: Name : SENSOR-ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (DIESEL) A K200 18BR/YL SENSOR GROUND A K914 18BK/WT SENSOR GROUND B K2 18VT/OR ECT SIGNAL Component Location - 8 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Locations > Page 3433 Component Location - 11 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Locations > Page 3434 Component Location - 13 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Locations > Page 3435 Connector: Name : SENSOR-ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (GAS) Pin Circuit Description 1 K2 20VT/OR ECT SIGNAL 2 K900 20DB/DG SENSOR GROUND Component Location - 8 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Locations > Page 3436 Component Location - 11 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Locations > Page 3437 Component Location - 13 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Locations > Page 3438 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Locations > Page 3439 Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Diagrams Component ID: 410 Component : SENSOR-ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE Connector: Name : SENSOR-ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (DIESEL) A K200 18BR/YL SENSOR GROUND A K914 18BK/WT SENSOR GROUND B K2 18VT/OR ECT SIGNAL Component Location - 8 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Locations > Page 3440 Component Location - 11 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Locations > Page 3441 Component Location - 13 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Locations > Page 3442 Connector: Name : SENSOR-ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (GAS) Pin Circuit Description 1 K2 20VT/OR ECT SIGNAL 2 K900 20DB/DG SENSOR GROUND Component Location - 8 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Locations > Page 3443 Component Location - 11 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Locations > Page 3444 Component Location - 13 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Locations > Page 3445 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations Crankshaft Position Sensor: Locations Component ID: 407 Component : SENSOR-CRANKSHAFT POSITION Connector: Name : SENSOR-CRANKSHAFT POSITION Color : BLACK # of pins : 3 Qualifier : (3.7L) Pin Circuit Description 1 K24 20BR/LB CKP SIGNAL 2 K900 20DB/DG SENSOR GROUND 3 F855 20PK/YL 5 VOLT SUPPLY Component Location - 5 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3449 Component Location - 11 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3450 Component Location - 19 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3451 Component Location - 13 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3452 Connector: Name : SENSOR-CRANKSHAFT POSITION Color : BLACK # of pins : 3 Qualifier : (4.7L) Pin Circuit Description 1 K24 20BR/LB CKP SIGNAL 2 K900 20DB/DG SENSOR GROUND 3 F855 20PK/YL 5 VOLT SUPPLY Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3453 Component Location - 5 Component Location - 11 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3454 Component Location - 19 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3455 Component Location - 13 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3456 Connector: Name : SENSOR-CRANKSHAFT POSITION Color : BLACK # of pins : 3 Qualifier : (5.7L) Pin Circuit Description 1 F855 20PK/YL 5 VOLT SUPPLY 2 K900 20DB/DG SENSOR GROUND 3 K24 20BR/LB CKP SIGNAL Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3457 Component Location - 5 Component Location - 11 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3458 Component Location - 19 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3459 Component Location - 13 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3460 Connector: Name : SENSOR-CRANKSHAFT POSITION Color : BLACK # of pins : 3 Qualifier : (DIESEL) Pin Circuit Description 1 K853 18DB/BR 5 VOLT SUPPLY Pin Circuit Description 1 K824 18DB/BR 5 VOLT SUPPLY Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3461 2 K975 18BR/OR CKP SENSOR GROUND 2 K925 18BR/OR CKP SENSOR GROUND 3 K24 18BR/LB CKP SIGNAL Component Location - 5 Component Location - 11 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3462 Component Location - 19 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3463 Component Location - 13 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3464 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3465 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Diagrams Component ID: 407 Component : SENSOR-CRANKSHAFT POSITION Connector: Name : SENSOR-CRANKSHAFT POSITION Color : BLACK # of pins : 3 Qualifier : (3.7L) Pin Circuit Description 1 K24 20BR/LB CKP SIGNAL 2 K900 20DB/DG SENSOR GROUND 3 F855 20PK/YL 5 VOLT SUPPLY Component Location - 5 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3466 Component Location - 11 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3467 Component Location - 19 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3468 Component Location - 13 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3469 Connector: Name : SENSOR-CRANKSHAFT POSITION Color : BLACK # of pins : 3 Qualifier : (4.7L) Pin Circuit Description 1 K24 20BR/LB CKP SIGNAL 2 K900 20DB/DG SENSOR GROUND 3 F855 20PK/YL 5 VOLT SUPPLY Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3470 Component Location - 5 Component Location - 11 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3471 Component Location - 19 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3472 Component Location - 13 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3473 Connector: Name : SENSOR-CRANKSHAFT POSITION Color : BLACK # of pins : 3 Qualifier : (5.7L) Pin Circuit Description 1 F855 20PK/YL 5 VOLT SUPPLY 2 K900 20DB/DG SENSOR GROUND 3 K24 20BR/LB CKP SIGNAL Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3474 Component Location - 5 Component Location - 11 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3475 Component Location - 19 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3476 Component Location - 13 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3477 Connector: Name : SENSOR-CRANKSHAFT POSITION Color : BLACK # of pins : 3 Qualifier : (DIESEL) Pin Circuit Description 1 K853 18DB/BR 5 VOLT SUPPLY Pin Circuit Description 1 K824 18DB/BR 5 VOLT SUPPLY Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3478 2 K975 18BR/OR CKP SENSOR GROUND 2 K925 18BR/OR CKP SENSOR GROUND 3 K24 18BR/LB CKP SIGNAL Component Location - 5 Component Location - 11 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3479 Component Location - 19 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3480 Component Location - 13 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3481 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Crankshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation Description 4.7L V-8 The Crankshaft Position (CKP) (1) sensor is mounted into the right rear side of the cylinder block. It is positioned and bolted into a machined hole. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 3484 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation Operation 4.7L V-8 Engine speed and crankshaft position are provided through the CKP (Crankshaft Position) sensor. The sensor generates pulses that are the input sent to the Powertrain Control Module (PCM). The PCM interprets the sensor input to determine the crankshaft position. The PCM then uses this position, along with other inputs, to determine injector sequence and ignition timing. The sensor is a hall effect device combined with an internal magnet. It is also sensitive to steel within a certain distance from it. A tonewheel (1) is bolted to the engine crankshaft. This tonewheel has sets of notches (2) at its outer edge. The notches cause a pulse to be generated when they pass under the sensor. The pulses are the input to the PCM. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Crankshaft Position Sensor - Removal Crankshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair Crankshaft Position Sensor - Removal 4.7L V-8 The Crankshaft Position (CKP) sensor is located at the right-rear side of the engine cylinder block. It is positioned and bolted into a machined hole in the engine block. 1. Raise vehicle. 2. Disconnect CKP electrical connector at sensor. 3. Remove CKP mounting bolt (2). 4. Carefully twist sensor (1) from cylinder block. 5. Remove sensor from vehicle. 6. Check condition of sensor O-ring. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Crankshaft Position Sensor - Removal > Page 3487 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair Crankshaft Position Sensor - Installation 4.7L V-8 1. Clean out machined hole in engine block. 2. Apply a small amount of engine oil to sensor o-ring. 3. Install sensor (1) into engine block with a slight rocking and twisting action. CAUTION: Before tightening sensor mounting bolt, be sure sensor is completely flush to cylinder block. If sensor is not flush, damage to sensor mounting tang may result. 4. Install mounting bolt and tighten to 28 Nm (21 ft. lbs.) torque. 5. Connect electrical connector to sensor. 6. Lower vehicle. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Locations Fuel Level Sensor: Locations DESCRIPTION The fuel pump module assembly is located on the top of the fuel tank. The complete assembly contains the following components: - A combination fuel filter/fuel pressure regulator - A separate fuel pick-up, or inlet filter - An electric fuel pump - A lockring to retain pump module to tank - A soft gasket between tank flange and module - A fuel gauge sending unit (fuel level sensor) - Fuel line connection The fuel gauge sending unit may be serviced separately. If the electrical fuel pump, primary inlet filter, fuel filter or fuel pressure regulator require service, the fuel pump module must be replaced. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Fuel Pump Fuel Level Sensor: Description and Operation Fuel Pump Description DESCRIPTION The electric fuel pump is located inside of the fuel pump module. A 12 volt, permanent magnet, electric motor powers the fuel pump. The electric fuel pump is not a separate, serviceable component. Operation OPERATION Voltage to operate the electric pump is supplied through the fuel pump relay. Fuel is drawn in through a filter at the bottom of the module and pushed through the electric motor gearset to the pump outlet. Check Valve Operation: The bottom section of the fuel pump module contains a one-way check valve to prevent fuel flow back into the tank and to maintain fuel supply line pressure (engine warm) when pump is not operational. It is also used to keep the fuel supply line full of gasoline when pump is not operational. After the vehicle has cooled down, fuel pressure may drop to 0 psi (cold fluid contracts), but liquid gasoline will remain in fuel supply line between the check valve and fuel injectors.Fuel pressure that has dropped to 0 psi on a cooled down vehicle (engine off) is a normal condition. The electric fuel pump is not a separate, serviceable component. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Fuel Pump > Page 3493 Fuel Level Sensor: Description and Operation Fuel Pump Module Description DESCRIPTION The fuel pump module assembly is located on the top of the fuel tank. The complete assembly contains the following components: - A combination fuel filter/fuel pressure regulator - A separate fuel pick-up, or inlet filter - An electric fuel pump - A lockring to retain pump module to tank - A soft gasket between tank flange and module - A fuel gauge sending unit (fuel level sensor) - Fuel line connection The fuel gauge sending unit may be serviced separately. If the electrical fuel pump, primary inlet filter, fuel filter or fuel pressure regulator require service, the fuel pump module must be replaced. Operation OPERATION Refer to Fuel Pump, Inlet Filter, Fuel Filter / Fuel Pressure Regulator and Fuel Gauge Sending Unit. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Fuel Level Sensor: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL WARNING: The fuel system may be under a constant pressure (even with the engine off). Before servicing the fuel pump module, the fuel system pressure must be released. 1. Drain and remove fuel tank. 2. Remove plastic fuel pump module cover (1) by pushing pegs (2) outward. 3. Note rotational position of module before attempting removal. An indexing arrow is located on top of module for this purpose. 4. Position Special Tool 9340 (3) into notches on outside edge of lockring (5). 5. Install 1/2 inch drive breaker bar (1) to tool 9340 (3). 6. Rotate breaker bar counter-clockwise to remove lockring (5). 7. Remove lockring. The module will spring up slightly when lockring is removed. 8. Remove module from fuel tank. Be careful not to bend float arm while removing. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 3496 Fuel Level Sensor: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION 1. Using a new seal (gasket), position fuel pump module into opening in fuel tank. 2. Position lockring (5) over top of fuel pump module. 3. Rotate module until embossed alignment arrow points to center alignment mark. This step must be performed to prevent float from contacting side of fuel tank. Also be sure fuel fitting on top of pump module is pointed to drivers side of vehicle. 4. Install Special Tool 9340 (3) to lockring. 5. Install 1/2 inch drive breaker (1) into Special Tool 9340 (3). 6. Tighten lockring (clockwise) until all seven notches have engaged. 7. Snap plastic fuel pump module cover (1) to pump module. 8. Install fuel tank. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Intake Air Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations Intake Air Temperature Sensor: Component Locations 4.7L V-8 The intake manifold air temperature (IAT) sensor (1) is located near the throttle body. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Intake Air Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 3501 Intake Air Temperature Sensor: Connector Locations Component ID: 421 Component : SENSOR-INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE Connector: Name : SENSOR-INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (6.7L DH) Pin Circuit Description 1 K914 18BR/WT SENSOR GROUND 2 K21 18DB/LG INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR SIGNAL Component Location - 9 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Intake Air Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 3502 Component Location - 11 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Intake Air Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 3503 Component Location - 7 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Intake Air Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 3504 Connector: Name : SENSOR-INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE Color : DK. GRAY # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (GAS) Pin Circuit Description 1 K21 20DB/LG IAT SIGNAL 2 K900 20DB/DG SENSOR GROUND Component Location - 9 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Intake Air Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 3505 Component Location - 11 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Intake Air Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 3506 Component Location - 7 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Intake Air Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 3507 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Intake Air Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3508 Intake Air Temperature Sensor: Diagrams Component ID: 421 Component : SENSOR-INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE Connector: Name : SENSOR-INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (6.7L DH) Pin Circuit Description 1 K914 18BR/WT SENSOR GROUND 2 K21 18DB/LG INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR SIGNAL Component Location - 9 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Intake Air Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3509 Component Location - 11 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Intake Air Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3510 Component Location - 7 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Intake Air Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3511 Connector: Name : SENSOR-INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE Color : DK. GRAY # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (GAS) Pin Circuit Description 1 K21 20DB/LG IAT SIGNAL 2 K900 20DB/DG SENSOR GROUND Component Location - 9 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Intake Air Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3512 Component Location - 11 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Intake Air Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3513 Component Location - 7 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Intake Air Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3514 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Intake Air Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3515 Intake Air Temperature Sensor: Description and Operation OPERATION The IAT sensor provides an input voltage to the Powertrain Control Module (PCM) indicating the density of the air entering the intake manifold based upon intake manifold temperature. At key-on, a 5-volt power circuit is supplied to the sensor from the PCM. The sensor is grounded at the PCM through a low-noise, sensor-return circuit. The PCM uses this input to calculate the following: - Injector pulse-width - Adjustment of spark timing (to help prevent spark knock with high intake manifold air-charge temperatures) The resistance values of the IAT sensor is the same as for the Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) sensor. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Intake Air Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Intake Air Temperature Sensor: Service and Repair Removal 4.7L V-8 The intake manifold air temperature (IAT) sensor (1) is located near the throttle body. 1. Disconnect electrical connector (2) from IAT sensor. 2. Clean dirt from sensor base. 3. Gently lift on small plastic release tab (3) and rotate sensor about 1/4 turn counter-clockwise for removal. 4. Check condition of sensor o-ring (2). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Intake Air Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 3518 Intake Air Temperature Sensor: Service and Repair Installation 4.7L V-8 1. Check condition of sensor o-ring (2). 2. Clean sensor mounting hole. 3. Position sensor (1) into base and rotate clockwise until past release tab (3). 4. Install electrical connector (2). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Knock 1 Knock Sensor: Locations Sensor-Knock 1 Component ID: 423 Component : SENSOR-KNOCK 1 Connector: Name : SENSOR-KNOCK 1 Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (3.7L/5.7L) Pin Circuit Description 1 K42 20DB/YL KNOCK SENSOR NO. 1 SIGNAL 2 K942 20BR/LG KNOCK SENSOR NO. 1 RETURN Component Location - 9 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Knock 1 > Page 3523 Component Location - 22 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Knock 1 > Page 3524 Component Location - 19 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Knock 1 > Page 3525 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Knock 1 > Page 3526 Knock Sensor: Locations Sensor-Knock 2 Component ID: 424 Component : SENSOR-KNOCK 2 Connector: Name : SENSOR-KNOCK 2 Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (3.7L/5.7L) Pin Circuit Description 1 K242 20BR/WT KNOCK SENSOR NO. 2 SIGNAL 2 K924 20WT/BR KNOCK SENSOR NO. 2 RETURN Component Location - 11 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Knock 1 > Page 3527 Component Location - 22 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Knock 1 > Page 3528 Component Location - 19 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Knock 1 > Page 3529 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Knock 1 Knock Sensor: Diagrams Sensor-Knock 1 Component ID: 423 Component : SENSOR-KNOCK 1 Connector: Name : SENSOR-KNOCK 1 Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (3.7L/5.7L) Pin Circuit Description 1 K42 20DB/YL KNOCK SENSOR NO. 1 SIGNAL 2 K942 20BR/LG KNOCK SENSOR NO. 1 RETURN Component Location - 9 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Knock 1 > Page 3532 Component Location - 22 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Knock 1 > Page 3533 Component Location - 19 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Knock 1 > Page 3534 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Knock 1 > Page 3535 Knock Sensor: Diagrams Sensor-Knock 2 Component ID: 424 Component : SENSOR-KNOCK 2 Connector: Name : SENSOR-KNOCK 2 Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (3.7L/5.7L) Pin Circuit Description 1 K242 20BR/WT KNOCK SENSOR NO. 2 SIGNAL 2 K924 20WT/BR KNOCK SENSOR NO. 2 RETURN Component Location - 11 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Knock 1 > Page 3536 Component Location - 22 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Knock 1 > Page 3537 Component Location - 19 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Knock 1 > Page 3538 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Knock 1 > Page 3539 Knock Sensor: Diagrams Sensor-Knock Component ID: 422 Component : SENSOR-KNOCK Connector: Name : SENSOR-KNOCK Color : BLACK # of pins : 4 Qualifier : (4.7L) Pin Circuit Description 1 K942 20BR/LG KNOCK SENSOR NO. 1 RETURN 2 K42 20DB/YL KNOCK SENSOR NO. 1 SIGNAL 3 K924 20WT/BR KNOCK SENSOR NO. 2 RETURN 4 K242 20BR/WT KNOCK SENSOR NO. 2 SIGNAL Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Knock Sensor: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION Two knock sensors are bolted into the cylinder block under the intake manifold 3.7L, 4.7L & 8.3L. Two knock sensors are also used with the 5.7L. These are bolted into each side of the cylinder block (outside) under the exhaust manifold. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 3542 Knock Sensor: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION Two knock sensors are used; one for each cylinder bank. When the knock sensor detects a knock in one of the cylinders on the corresponding bank, it sends an input signal to the Powertrain Control Module (PCM). In response, the PCM retards ignition timing for all cylinders by a scheduled amount. Knock sensors contain a piezoelectric material which constantly vibrates and sends an input voltage (signal) to the PCM while the engine operates. As the intensity of the crystal's vibration increases, the knock sensor output voltage also increases. The voltage signal produced by the knock sensor increases with the amplitude of vibration. The PCM receives the knock sensor voltage signal as an input. If the signal rises above a predetermined level, the PCM will store that value in memory and retard ignition timing to reduce engine knock. If the knock sensor voltage exceeds a preset value, the PCM retards ignition timing for all cylinders. It is not a selective cylinder retard. The PCM ignores knock sensor input during engine idle conditions. Once the engine speed exceeds a specified value, knock retard is allowed. Knock retard uses its own short term and long term memory program. Long term memory stores previous detonation information in its battery-backed RAM. The maximum authority that long term memory has over timing retard can be calibrated. Short term memory is allowed to retard timing up to a preset amount under all operating conditions (as long as rpm is above the minimum rpm) except at Wide Open Throttle (WOT). The PCM, using short term memory, can respond quickly to retard timing when engine knock is detected. Short term memory is lost any time the ignition key is turned off. NOTE: Over or under tightening the sensor mounting bolts will affect knock sensor performance, possibly causing improper spark control. Always use the specified torque when installing the knock sensors. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Knock Sensor: Service and Repair Removal 4.7L The two knock sensors (1) are bolted into the cylinder block under the intake manifold (3). NOTE: The left sensor is identified by an identification tag (LEFT). It is also identified by a larger bolt head. The Powertrain Control Module (PCM) must have and know the correct sensor left/right positions. Do not mix the sensor locations. 1. Disconnect knock sensor dual pigtail harness from engine wiring harness. This connection is made near rear of engine. 2. Remove intake manifold See: Engine, Cooling and Exhaust/Engine/Intake Manifold/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Intake Manifold - Removal . 3. Remove sensor mounting bolts (2). Note foam strip on bolt threads. This foam is used only to retain the bolts to sensors for plant assembly. It is not used as a sealant. Do not apply any adhesive, sealant or thread locking compound to these bolts. 4. Remove sensors (1) from engine. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 3545 Knock Sensor: Service and Repair Installation 4.7L NOTE: The left sensor is identified by an identification tag (LEFT). It is also identified by a larger bolt head. The Powertrain Control Module (PCM) must have and know the correct sensor left/right positions. Do not mix the sensor locations. 1. Thoroughly clean knock sensor mounting holes. 2. Install sensors (1) into cylinder block. NOTE: Over or under tightening the sensor mounting bolts will affect knock sensor performance, possibly causing improper spark control. Always use the specified torque when installing the knock sensors. The torque for the knock sensor bolt is relatively light for an 8 mm bolt. NOTE: Note foam strip on bolt threads. This foam is used only to retain the bolts to sensors for plant assembly. It is not used as a sealant. Do not apply any adhesive, sealant or thread locking compound to these bolts. 3. Install and tighten mounting bolts. Tighten to 15 +/- 2 ft. lbs. (20 Nm) (176 in.lbs.). 4. Install intake manifold See: Engine, Cooling and Exhaust/Engine/Intake Manifold/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Intake Manifold - Installation . 5. Connect knock sensor wiring harness to engine harness (4) at rear of intake manifold. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Locations Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor: Locations Component ID: 426 Component : SENSOR-MANIFOLD ABSOLUTE PRESSURE Connector: Name : SENSOR-MANIFOLD ABSOLUTE PRESSURE Color : GRAY # of pins : 3 Qualifier : (NGC) Pin Circuit Description 1 K1 20VT/BR MAP SIGNAL 2 K900 20DB/DG SENSOR GROUND 3 F856 20YL/PK 5 VOLT SUPPLY Component Location - 8 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3549 Component Location - 9 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3550 Component Location - 11 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3551 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3552 Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor: Diagrams Component ID: 426 Component : SENSOR-MANIFOLD ABSOLUTE PRESSURE Connector: Name : SENSOR-MANIFOLD ABSOLUTE PRESSURE Color : GRAY # of pins : 3 Qualifier : (NGC) Pin Circuit Description 1 K1 20VT/BR MAP SIGNAL 2 K900 20DB/DG SENSOR GROUND 3 F856 20YL/PK 5 VOLT SUPPLY Component Location - 8 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3553 Component Location - 9 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3554 Component Location - 11 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3555 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3556 Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor: Description and Operation OPERATION The MAP sensor is used as an input to the Powertrain Control Module (PCM). It contains a silicon based sensing unit to provide data on the manifold vacuum that draws the air/fuel mixture into the combustion chamber. The PCM requires this information to determine injector pulse width and spark advance. When manifold absolute pressure (MAP) equals Barometric pressure, the pulse width will be at maximum. A 5 volt reference is supplied from the PCM and returns a voltage signal to the PCM that reflects manifold pressure. The zero pressure reading is 0.5V and full scale is 4.5V. For a pressure swing of 0-15 psi, the voltage changes 4.0V. To operate the sensor, it is supplied a regulated 4.8 to 5.1 volts. Ground is provided through the low-noise, sensor return circuit at the PCM. The MAP sensor input is the number one contributor to fuel injector pulse width. The most important function of the MAP sensor is to determine barometric pressure. The PCM needs to know if the vehicle is at sea level or at a higher altitude, because the air density changes with altitude. It will also help to correct for varying barometric pressure. Barometric pressure and altitude have a direct inverse correlation; as altitude goes up, barometric goes down. At key-on, the PCM powers up and looks at MAP voltage, and based upon the voltage it sees, it knows the current barometric pressure (relative to altitude). Once the engine starts, the PCM looks at the voltage again, continuously every 12 milliseconds, and compares the current voltage to what it was at key-on. The difference between current voltage and what it was at key-on, is manifold vacuum. During key-on (engine not running) the sensor reads (updates) barometric pressure. A normal range can be obtained by monitoring a known good sensor. As the altitude increases, the air becomes thinner (less oxygen). If a vehicle is started and driven to a very different altitude than where it was at key-on, the barometric pressure needs to be updated. Any time the PCM sees Wide Open Throttle (WOT), based upon Throttle Position Sensor (TPS) angle and RPM, it will update barometric pressure in the MAP memory cell. With periodic updates, the PCM can make its calculations more effectively. The PCM uses the MAP sensor input to aid in calculating the following: - Manifold pressure - Barometric pressure - Engine load - Injector pulse-width - Spark-advance programs - Shift-point strategies (certain automatic transmissions only) - Idle speed - Decel fuel shutoff The MAP sensor signal is provided from a single piezoresistive element located in the center of a diaphragm. The element and diaphragm are both made of silicone. As manifold pressure changes, the diaphragm moves causing the element to deflect, which stresses the silicone. When silicone is exposed to stress, its resistance changes. As manifold vacuum increases, the MAP sensor input voltage decreases proportionally. The sensor also contains electronics that condition the signal and provide temperature compensation. The PCM recognizes a decrease in manifold pressure by monitoring a decrease in voltage from the reading stored in the barometric pressure memory cell. The MAP sensor is a linear sensor; meaning as pressure changes, voltage changes proportionately. The range of voltage output from the sensor is usually between 4.6 volts at sea level to as low as 0.3 volts at 26 in. of Hg. Barometric pressure is the pressure exerted by the atmosphere upon an object. At sea level on a standard day, no storm, barometric pressure is approximately 29.92 in Hg. For every 100 feet of altitude, barometric pressure drops 0.10 in. Hg. If a storm goes through, it can change barometric pressure from what should be present for that altitude. You should know what the average pressure and corresponding barometric pressure is for your area. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor - Oxygen 1/1 Oxygen Sensor: Locations Sensor - Oxygen 1/1 Component ID: 431 Component : SENSOR-OXYGEN 1/1 Connector: Name : SENSOR-OXYGEN 1/1 Color : # of pins : 6 Qualifier : (6.7L DIESEL) Pin Circuit Description 1 K89 20BR/LG 02 1/1 PUMP CURRENT 2 K902 20BR/DG O2 1/1 RETURN 3 K79 20BR/LB O2 1/1 HEATER CONTROL RETURN 4 K99 20BR/LG O2 1/1 HEATER CONTROL SUPPLY 5 K103 20BR/LB O2 1/1 PUMP CELL CURRENT TRIM 6 K41 20DB/LB O2 1/1 SIGNAL Component Location - 21 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor - Oxygen 1/1 > Page 3561 Component Location - 22 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor - Oxygen 1/1 > Page 3562 Component Location - 24 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor - Oxygen 1/1 > Page 3563 Component Location - 19 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor - Oxygen 1/1 > Page 3564 Connector: Name : SENSOR-OXYGEN 1/1 Color : # of pins : 6 Qualifier : (6.7L DIESEL) Pin Circuit Description 1 K89 20BR/LG 02 1/1 PUMP CURRENT 2 K902 20BR/DG O2 1/1 RETURN 3 K79 20BR/LB O2 1/1 HEATER CONTROL RETURN 4 K99 20BR/LG O2 1/1 HEATER CONTROL SUPPLY Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor - Oxygen 1/1 > Page 3565 5 K103 20BR/LB O2 1/1 PUMP CELL CURRENT TRIM 6 K41 20DB/LB O2 1/1 SIGNAL Component Location - 21 Component Location - 22 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor - Oxygen 1/1 > Page 3566 Component Location - 24 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor - Oxygen 1/1 > Page 3567 Component Location - 19 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor - Oxygen 1/1 > Page 3568 Connector: Name : SENSOR-OXYGEN 1/1 Color : BLACK # of pins : 4 Qualifier : (GAS) Pin Circuit Description 1 K99 20BR/LG O2 1/1 HEATER CONTROL SUPPLY 2 Z42 20BK/LG GROUND 3 K902 20BR/DG O2 RETURN (UPSTREAM) 4 K41 20DB/LB O2 1/1 SIGNAL Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor - Oxygen 1/1 > Page 3569 Component Location - 21 Component Location - 22 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor - Oxygen 1/1 > Page 3570 Component Location - 24 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor - Oxygen 1/1 > Page 3571 Component Location - 19 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor - Oxygen 1/1 > Page 3572 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor - Oxygen 1/1 > Page 3573 Oxygen Sensor: Locations Sensor - Oxygen 1/2 Component ID: 432 Component : SENSOR-OXYGEN 1/2 Connector: Name : SENSOR-OXYGEN 1/2 Color : # of pins : 6 Qualifier : (6.7L DIESEL) Pin Circuit Description 1 K734 20BR/DG 02 1/2 PUMP CURRENT 2 K904 20DB/DG O2 1/2 RETURN 3 K80 20BR/TN O2 1/2 HEATER CONTROL RETURN 4 K299 20BR/WT O2 1/2 HEATER CONTROL SUPPLY 5 K733 20BR O2 1/2 PUMP CELL CURRENT TRIM 6 K141 20DB/YL O2 1/2 SIGNAL Component Location - 21 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor - Oxygen 1/1 > Page 3574 Component Location - 22 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor - Oxygen 1/1 > Page 3575 Component Location - 19 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor - Oxygen 1/1 > Page 3576 Connector: Name : SENSOR-OXYGEN 1/2 Color : # of pins : 6 Qualifier : (6.7L DIESEL) Pin Circuit Description 1 K734 20BR/DG 02 1/2 PUMP CURRENT 2 K904 20DB/DG O2 1/2 RETURN 3 K80 20BR/TN O2 1/2 HEATER CONTROL RETURN 4 K299 20BR/WT O2 1/2 HEATER CONTROL SUPPLY Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor - Oxygen 1/1 > Page 3577 5 K733 20BR O2 1/2 PUMP CELL CURRENT TRIM 6 K141 20DB/YL O2 1/2 SIGNAL Component Location - 21 Component Location - 22 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor - Oxygen 1/1 > Page 3578 Component Location - 19 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor - Oxygen 1/1 > Page 3579 Connector: Name : SENSOR-OXYGEN 1/2 Color : # of pins : 4 Qualifier : (GAS) Pin Circuit Description 1 K299 20BR/WT O2 1/2 HEATER CONTROL SUPPLY 2 Z43 20BK/LB GROUND 3 K904 20DB/DG O2 RETURN (DOWNSTREAM) 4 K141 20DB/YL O2 1/2 SIGNAL Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor - Oxygen 1/1 > Page 3580 Component Location - 21 Component Location - 22 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor - Oxygen 1/1 > Page 3581 Component Location - 19 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor - Oxygen 1/1 > Page 3582 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor - Oxygen 1/1 > Page 3583 Oxygen Sensor: Locations Sensor - Oxygen 2/1 Component ID: 433 Component : SENSOR-OXYGEN 2/1 Connector: Name : SENSOR-OXYGEN 2/1 Color : BLACK # of pins : 4 Qualifier : (3.7L/5.7L) Pin Circuit Description 1 K199 20BR/VT O2 2/1 HEATER CONTROL 2 Z934 20BK GROUND 3 K902 20BR/DG O2 RETURN (UPSTREAM) 4 K43 20DB/LG O2 2/1 SIGNAL Component Location - 22 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor - Oxygen 1/1 > Page 3584 Component Location - 23 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor - Oxygen 1/1 > Page 3585 Component Location - 19 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor - Oxygen 1/1 > Page 3586 Connector: Name : SENSOR-OXYGEN 2/1 Color : GRAY # of pins : 4 Qualifier : (4.7L) Pin Circuit Description 1 K199 20BR/VT O2 2/1 HEATER CONTROL 2 Z934 20BK GROUND 3 K902 20BR/DG O2 RETURN (UPSTREAM) 4 K43 20DB/LG O2 2/1 SIGNAL Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor - Oxygen 1/1 > Page 3587 Component Location - 22 Component Location - 23 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor - Oxygen 1/1 > Page 3588 Component Location - 19 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor - Oxygen 1/1 > Page 3589 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor - Oxygen 1/1 > Page 3590 Oxygen Sensor: Locations Sensor - Oxygen 2/2 Component ID: 434 Component : SENSOR-OXYGEN 2/2 Connector: Name : SENSOR-OXYGEN 2/2 Color : GRAY # of pins : 4 Qualifier : (4.7L/5.7L HD) Pin Circuit Description 1 K399 20BR/GY O2 2/2 HEATER CONTROL 2 Z992 20BK GROUND 3 K904 20DB/DG O2 RETURN (DOWNSTREAM) 4 K243 20BR O2 2/2 SIGNAL Component Location - 22 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor - Oxygen 1/1 > Page 3591 Component Location - 23 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor - Oxygen 1/1 > Page 3592 Component Location - 24 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor - Oxygen 1/1 > Page 3593 Component Location - 19 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor - Oxygen 1/1 > Page 3594 Connector: Name : SENSOR-OXYGEN 2/2 Color : BLACK # of pins : 4 Qualifier : (GAS LD) Pin Circuit Description 1 K399 20BR/GY O2 2/2 HEATER CONTROL 2 Z992 20BK GROUND 3 K904 20DB/DG O2 RETURN (DOWNSTREAM) 4 K243 20BR O2 2/2 SIGNAL Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor - Oxygen 1/1 > Page 3595 Component Location - 22 Component Location - 23 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor - Oxygen 1/1 > Page 3596 Component Location - 24 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor - Oxygen 1/1 > Page 3597 Component Location - 19 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor - Oxygen 1/1 > Page 3598 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Oxygen 1/1 Oxygen Sensor: Diagrams Sensor-Oxygen 1/1 Component ID: 431 Component : SENSOR-OXYGEN 1/1 Connector: Name : SENSOR-OXYGEN 1/1 Color : # of pins : 6 Qualifier : (6.7L DIESEL) Pin Circuit Description 1 K89 20BR/LG 02 1/1 PUMP CURRENT 2 K902 20BR/DG O2 1/1 RETURN 3 K79 20BR/LB O2 1/1 HEATER CONTROL RETURN 4 K99 20BR/LG O2 1/1 HEATER CONTROL SUPPLY 5 K103 20BR/LB O2 1/1 PUMP CELL CURRENT TRIM 6 K41 20DB/LB O2 1/1 SIGNAL Component Location - 21 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Oxygen 1/1 > Page 3601 Component Location - 22 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Oxygen 1/1 > Page 3602 Component Location - 24 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Oxygen 1/1 > Page 3603 Component Location - 19 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Oxygen 1/1 > Page 3604 Connector: Name : SENSOR-OXYGEN 1/1 Color : # of pins : 6 Qualifier : (6.7L DIESEL) Pin Circuit Description 1 K89 20BR/LG 02 1/1 PUMP CURRENT 2 K902 20BR/DG O2 1/1 RETURN 3 K79 20BR/LB O2 1/1 HEATER CONTROL RETURN 4 K99 20BR/LG O2 1/1 HEATER CONTROL SUPPLY Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Oxygen 1/1 > Page 3605 5 K103 20BR/LB O2 1/1 PUMP CELL CURRENT TRIM 6 K41 20DB/LB O2 1/1 SIGNAL Component Location - 21 Component Location - 22 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Oxygen 1/1 > Page 3606 Component Location - 24 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Oxygen 1/1 > Page 3607 Component Location - 19 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Oxygen 1/1 > Page 3608 Connector: Name : SENSOR-OXYGEN 1/1 Color : BLACK # of pins : 4 Qualifier : (GAS) Pin Circuit Description 1 K99 20BR/LG O2 1/1 HEATER CONTROL SUPPLY 2 Z42 20BK/LG GROUND 3 K902 20BR/DG O2 RETURN (UPSTREAM) 4 K41 20DB/LB O2 1/1 SIGNAL Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Oxygen 1/1 > Page 3609 Component Location - 21 Component Location - 22 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Oxygen 1/1 > Page 3610 Component Location - 24 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Oxygen 1/1 > Page 3611 Component Location - 19 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Oxygen 1/1 > Page 3612 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Oxygen 1/1 > Page 3613 Oxygen Sensor: Diagrams Sensor-Oxygen 1/2 Component ID: 432 Component : SENSOR-OXYGEN 1/2 Connector: Name : SENSOR-OXYGEN 1/2 Color : # of pins : 6 Qualifier : (6.7L DIESEL) Pin Circuit Description 1 K734 20BR/DG 02 1/2 PUMP CURRENT 2 K904 20DB/DG O2 1/2 RETURN 3 K80 20BR/TN O2 1/2 HEATER CONTROL RETURN 4 K299 20BR/WT O2 1/2 HEATER CONTROL SUPPLY 5 K733 20BR O2 1/2 PUMP CELL CURRENT TRIM 6 K141 20DB/YL O2 1/2 SIGNAL Component Location - 21 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Oxygen 1/1 > Page 3614 Component Location - 22 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Oxygen 1/1 > Page 3615 Component Location - 19 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Oxygen 1/1 > Page 3616 Connector: Name : SENSOR-OXYGEN 1/2 Color : # of pins : 6 Qualifier : (6.7L DIESEL) Pin Circuit Description 1 K734 20BR/DG 02 1/2 PUMP CURRENT 2 K904 20DB/DG O2 1/2 RETURN 3 K80 20BR/TN O2 1/2 HEATER CONTROL RETURN 4 K299 20BR/WT O2 1/2 HEATER CONTROL SUPPLY Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Oxygen 1/1 > Page 3617 5 K733 20BR O2 1/2 PUMP CELL CURRENT TRIM 6 K141 20DB/YL O2 1/2 SIGNAL Component Location - 21 Component Location - 22 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Oxygen 1/1 > Page 3618 Component Location - 19 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Oxygen 1/1 > Page 3619 Connector: Name : SENSOR-OXYGEN 1/2 Color : # of pins : 4 Qualifier : (GAS) Pin Circuit Description 1 K299 20BR/WT O2 1/2 HEATER CONTROL SUPPLY 2 Z43 20BK/LB GROUND 3 K904 20DB/DG O2 RETURN (DOWNSTREAM) 4 K141 20DB/YL O2 1/2 SIGNAL Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Oxygen 1/1 > Page 3620 Component Location - 21 Component Location - 22 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Oxygen 1/1 > Page 3621 Component Location - 19 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Oxygen 1/1 > Page 3622 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Oxygen 1/1 > Page 3623 Oxygen Sensor: Diagrams Sensor-Oxygen 2/1 Component ID: 433 Component : SENSOR-OXYGEN 2/1 Connector: Name : SENSOR-OXYGEN 2/1 Color : BLACK # of pins : 4 Qualifier : (3.7L/5.7L) Pin Circuit Description 1 K199 20BR/VT O2 2/1 HEATER CONTROL 2 Z934 20BK GROUND 3 K902 20BR/DG O2 RETURN (UPSTREAM) 4 K43 20DB/LG O2 2/1 SIGNAL Component Location - 22 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Oxygen 1/1 > Page 3624 Component Location - 23 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Oxygen 1/1 > Page 3625 Component Location - 19 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Oxygen 1/1 > Page 3626 Connector: Name : SENSOR-OXYGEN 2/1 Color : GRAY # of pins : 4 Qualifier : (4.7L) Pin Circuit Description 1 K199 20BR/VT O2 2/1 HEATER CONTROL 2 Z934 20BK GROUND 3 K902 20BR/DG O2 RETURN (UPSTREAM) 4 K43 20DB/LG O2 2/1 SIGNAL Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Oxygen 1/1 > Page 3627 Component Location - 22 Component Location - 23 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Oxygen 1/1 > Page 3628 Component Location - 19 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Oxygen 1/1 > Page 3629 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Oxygen 1/1 > Page 3630 Oxygen Sensor: Diagrams Sensor-Oxygen 2/2 Component ID: 434 Component : SENSOR-OXYGEN 2/2 Connector: Name : SENSOR-OXYGEN 2/2 Color : GRAY # of pins : 4 Qualifier : (4.7L/5.7L HD) Pin Circuit Description 1 K399 20BR/GY O2 2/2 HEATER CONTROL 2 Z992 20BK GROUND 3 K904 20DB/DG O2 RETURN (DOWNSTREAM) 4 K243 20BR O2 2/2 SIGNAL Component Location - 22 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Oxygen 1/1 > Page 3631 Component Location - 23 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Oxygen 1/1 > Page 3632 Component Location - 24 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Oxygen 1/1 > Page 3633 Component Location - 19 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Oxygen 1/1 > Page 3634 Connector: Name : SENSOR-OXYGEN 2/2 Color : BLACK # of pins : 4 Qualifier : (GAS LD) Pin Circuit Description 1 K399 20BR/GY O2 2/2 HEATER CONTROL 2 Z992 20BK GROUND 3 K904 20DB/DG O2 RETURN (DOWNSTREAM) 4 K243 20BR O2 2/2 SIGNAL Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Oxygen 1/1 > Page 3635 Component Location - 22 Component Location - 23 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Oxygen 1/1 > Page 3636 Component Location - 24 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Oxygen 1/1 > Page 3637 Component Location - 19 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Oxygen 1/1 > Page 3638 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3639 Oxygen Sensor: Application and ID - Cylinder bank number one is the bank that contains number one cylinder. See: Ignition System/Firing Order Cylinder #1 on left side. Cylinder #1 on right side. - The first oxygen sensor in cylinder bank # 1 is numbered O2 Sensor 1/1. - The second oxygen sensor in cylinder bank # 1 is numbered O2 Sensor 1/2. - A third oxygen sensor in cylinder bank # 1 would be numbered O2 Sensor 1/3. - The first oxygen sensor in cylinder bank # 2 is numbered O2 Sensor 2/1. - The second oxygen sensor in cylinder bank # 2 is numbered O2 Sensor 1/1. - If a V-6 or V-8 vehicle only uses one downstream Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) it is numbered O2 Sensor 1/2, even if it uses two upstream HO2S. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3640 Oxygen Sensor: Description and Operation DESCRIPTION The Oxygen Sensors (O2S) are attached to, and protrude into the vehicle exhaust system. Depending on the engine or emission package, the vehicle may use a total of either 2 or 4 sensors. Federal Emission Packages : Two sensors are used: upstream (referred to as 1/1) and downstream (referred to as 1/2). With this emission package, the upstream sensor (1/1) is located just before the main catalytic convertor. The downstream sensor (1/2) is located just after the main catalytic convertor. California Emission Packages: On this emissions package, 4 sensors are used: 2 upstream (referred to as 1/1 and 2/1) and 2 downstream (referred to as 1/2 and 2/2). With this emission package, the right upstream sensor (2/1) is located in the right exhaust downpipe just before the mini-catalytic convertor. The left upstream sensor (1/1) is located in the left exhaust downpipe just before the mini-catalytic convertor. The right downstream sensor (2/2) is located in the right exhaust downpipe just after the mini-catalytic convertor, and before the main catalytic convertor. The left downstream sensor (1/2) is located in the left exhaust downpipe just after the mini-catalytic convertor, and before the main catalytic convertor. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Oxygen Sensor: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL CAUTION: Never apply any type of grease to the oxygen sensor electrical connector, or attempt any soldering of the sensor wiring harness. WARNING: The exhaust manifold, exhaust pipes and catalytic converter become very hot during engine operation. Allow engine to cool before removing oxygen sensor. 1. Raise and support vehicle. 2. Disconnect wire connector from O2S sensor. CAUTION: When disconnecting sensor electrical connector, do not pull directly on wire going into sensor. 3. Remove O2S sensor with an oxygen sensor removal and installation tool. 4. Clean threads in exhaust pipe using appropriate tap. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 3643 Oxygen Sensor: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION Threads of new oxygen sensors are factory coated with anti-seize compound to aid in removal.DO NOT add any additional anti-seize compound to threads of a new oxygen sensor. 1. Install O2S sensor. Tighten to 41 Nm (30 ft. lbs.) torque. 2. Connect O2S sensor wire connector. 3. Lower vehicle. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL 1. Disconnect exhaust gas pressure sensor electrical connector (1). 2. Using a 6 point deepwell socket, remove exhaust gas sensor (2). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 3648 Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION 1. Using a 6 point deepwell socket, install exhaust gas pressure sensor. 2. Tighten sensor to 18 Nm (13 ft. lbs.). 3. Connect exhaust gas pressure sensor electrical connector (3). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Transmission Range Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Locations Sensor-Transmission Range Component ID: 444 Component : SENSOR-TRANSMISSION RANGE Connector: Name : SENSOR-TRANSMISSION RANGE Color : # of pins : 10 Qualifier : (RC) Pin Circuit Description 1 T825 20DG/YL TRS NEUTRAL SIGNAL 2 T3 20DG/DB TRS T3 SIGNAL 3 T828 20DG/DB TRS 1 SIGNAL 4 F1 20PK/WT FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (OFF-RUN-START) 5 T824 20YL/DB TRS PARK SIGNAL 6 Z157 16BK/LG GROUND 7 T42 20DG/YL TRS T42 SIGNAL 8 T827 20DG/LB TRS DRIVE SIGNAL 9 T826 20DG/DB TRS REVERSE SIGNAL 10 T41 20YL/DB TRS T41 SIGNAL (P/N) Component Location - 20 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Transmission Range > Page 3653 Component Location - 19 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Transmission Range > Page 3654 Component Location - 26 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Transmission Range > Page 3655 Connector: Name : SENSOR-TRANSMISSION RANGE Color : # of pins : 6 Qualifier : (RE) Pin Circuit Description 1-2 T117 20DG/YL TRS SIGNAL 3-4-- Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Transmission Range > Page 3656 5 T917 20YL/TN TRS RETURN 6 T41 20YL/DB TRS T41 SIGNAL (P/N) Component Location - 20 Component Location - 19 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Transmission Range > Page 3657 Component Location - 26 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Transmission Range > Page 3658 Connector: Name : SENSOR-TRANSMISSION RANGE Color : LT. GREEN # of pins : 10 Qualifier : (RLE) Pin Circuit Description 1 T16 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT 2-3 K900 20DB/DG SENSOR GROUND 4 T54 20DG/OR TRANSMISSION TEMPERATURE SIGNAL Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Transmission Range > Page 3659 5-6-7 T1 20DG/LB TRS T1 SIGNAL 8 T3 20DG/DB TRS T3 SIGNAL 9 T42 20DG/YL TRS T42 SIGNAL 10 T41 20YL/DB TRS T41 SIGNAL (P/N) Component Location - 20 Component Location - 19 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Transmission Range > Page 3660 Component Location - 26 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Transmission Range > Page 3661 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Transmission Range > Page 3662 Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Locations Assembly-Transmission Solenoid/TRS Component ID: 21 Component : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID/TRS Connector: Name : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID/TRS Color : BLACK # of pins : 23 Qualifier : (RFE) Pin Circuit Description 1-2 T20 20DG/WT L/R CONTROL 3-4 T41 20YL/DB TRS T41 SIGNAL (P/N) 5 T42 20DG/YL TRS T42 SIGNAL 6-- 7 T60 20YL/GY OD SOLENOID CONTROL 8 T3 20DG/DB TRS T3 SIGNAL 9 T1 20DG/LB TRS T1 SIGNAL 10 T16 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT 11 T48 20BR/YL 4C PRESSURE SIGNAL 12 T118 20DG LINE PRESSURE CONTROL 13 T4 20DG/RD TRS T2 SIGNAL 13 T4 20DG/LB TRS T2 SIGNAL 14 T50 20DG/PK L/R PRESSURE SIGNAL 14 T50 20YL/TN L/R PRESSURE SIGNAL 15 T147 20DG/YL 2C PRESSURE SIGNAL 16 T9 20DG/TN OD PRESSURE SIGNAL 17 T59 20YL/LB UD CONTROL 18 T29 20YL/WT UD PRESSURE SIGNAL 19 T259 20YL/DG 4C CONTROL 20 T219 20YL/LG 2C CONTROL 21 T140 20YL/GY MS CONTROL 22 T160 20DG/WT SENSOR GROUND 22 K900 20DB/DG SENSOR GROUND 23 T54 20DG/OR TRANSMISSION TEMPERATURE SIGNAL Component Location - 21 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Transmission Range > Page 3663 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Transmission Range Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Diagrams Sensor-Transmission Range Component ID: 444 Component : SENSOR-TRANSMISSION RANGE Connector: Name : SENSOR-TRANSMISSION RANGE Color : # of pins : 10 Qualifier : (RC) Pin Circuit Description 1 T825 20DG/YL TRS NEUTRAL SIGNAL 2 T3 20DG/DB TRS T3 SIGNAL 3 T828 20DG/DB TRS 1 SIGNAL 4 F1 20PK/WT FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (OFF-RUN-START) 5 T824 20YL/DB TRS PARK SIGNAL 6 Z157 16BK/LG GROUND 7 T42 20DG/YL TRS T42 SIGNAL 8 T827 20DG/LB TRS DRIVE SIGNAL 9 T826 20DG/DB TRS REVERSE SIGNAL 10 T41 20YL/DB TRS T41 SIGNAL (P/N) Component Location - 20 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Transmission Range > Page 3666 Component Location - 19 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Transmission Range > Page 3667 Component Location - 26 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Transmission Range > Page 3668 Connector: Name : SENSOR-TRANSMISSION RANGE Color : # of pins : 6 Qualifier : (RE) Pin Circuit Description 1-2 T117 20DG/YL TRS SIGNAL 3-4-- Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Transmission Range > Page 3669 5 T917 20YL/TN TRS RETURN 6 T41 20YL/DB TRS T41 SIGNAL (P/N) Component Location - 20 Component Location - 19 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Transmission Range > Page 3670 Component Location - 26 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Transmission Range > Page 3671 Connector: Name : SENSOR-TRANSMISSION RANGE Color : LT. GREEN # of pins : 10 Qualifier : (RLE) Pin Circuit Description 1 T16 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT 2-3 K900 20DB/DG SENSOR GROUND 4 T54 20DG/OR TRANSMISSION TEMPERATURE SIGNAL Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Transmission Range > Page 3672 5-6-7 T1 20DG/LB TRS T1 SIGNAL 8 T3 20DG/DB TRS T3 SIGNAL 9 T42 20DG/YL TRS T42 SIGNAL 10 T41 20YL/DB TRS T41 SIGNAL (P/N) Component Location - 20 Component Location - 19 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Transmission Range > Page 3673 Component Location - 26 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Transmission Range > Page 3674 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Transmission Range > Page 3675 Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Diagrams Assembly-Transmission Solenoid/TRS Component ID: 21 Component : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID/TRS Connector: Name : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID/TRS Color : BLACK # of pins : 23 Qualifier : (RFE) Pin Circuit Description 1-2 T20 20DG/WT L/R CONTROL 3-4 T41 20YL/DB TRS T41 SIGNAL (P/N) 5 T42 20DG/YL TRS T42 SIGNAL 6-- 7 T60 20YL/GY OD SOLENOID CONTROL 8 T3 20DG/DB TRS T3 SIGNAL 9 T1 20DG/LB TRS T1 SIGNAL 10 T16 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT 11 T48 20BR/YL 4C PRESSURE SIGNAL 12 T118 20DG LINE PRESSURE CONTROL 13 T4 20DG/RD TRS T2 SIGNAL 13 T4 20DG/LB TRS T2 SIGNAL 14 T50 20DG/PK L/R PRESSURE SIGNAL 14 T50 20YL/TN L/R PRESSURE SIGNAL 15 T147 20DG/YL 2C PRESSURE SIGNAL 16 T9 20DG/TN OD PRESSURE SIGNAL 17 T59 20YL/LB UD CONTROL 18 T29 20YL/WT UD PRESSURE SIGNAL 19 T259 20YL/DG 4C CONTROL 20 T219 20YL/LG 2C CONTROL 21 T140 20YL/GY MS CONTROL 22 T160 20DG/WT SENSOR GROUND 22 K900 20DB/DG SENSOR GROUND 23 T54 20DG/OR TRANSMISSION TEMPERATURE SIGNAL Component Location - 21 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Transmission Range > Page 3676 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > 42RLE Automatic Transmission Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Description and Operation 42RLE Automatic Transmission Description DESCRIPTION The Transmission Range Sensor (TRS) (2) is mounted to the top of the valve body inside the transmission and can only be serviced by removing the valve body assembly. The electrical connector extends through the transmission case. The Transmission Range Sensor (TRS) has four switch contacts that monitor shift lever position and send the information to the PCM. Operation OPERATION The Transmission Range Sensor (TRS) communicates shift lever position (SLP) to the TCM as a combination of open and closed switches. Each shift lever position has an assigned combination of switch states (open/closed) that the TCM receives from four sense circuits. The TCM interprets this information and determines the appropriate transmission gear position and shift schedule. Since there are four switches, there are 16 possible combinations of open and closed switches (codes). Seven of these codes are related to gear position and three are recognized as "between gear" codes. This results in six codes which should never occur. These are called "invalid" codes. An invalid code will result in a DTC, and the TCM will then determine the shift lever position based on pressure switch data. This allows reasonably normal transmission operation with a TRS failure. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 3679 Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Description and Operation 545RFE Automatic Transmission Description DESCRIPTION The Transmission Range Sensor (TRS) is part of the solenoid module, which is mounted to the top of the valve body inside the transmission. The Transmission Range Sensor (TRS) has five switch contact pins that: - Determine shift lever position - Supply ground to the Starter Relay in Park and Neutral only. - Supply +12 V to the backup lamps in Reverse only. The TRS also has an integrated temperature sensor (thermistor) that communicates transmission temperature to the TCM and PCM. Operation OPERATION The Transmission Range Sensor (TRS) communicates shift lever position to the TCM as a combination of open and closed switches. Each shift lever position has an assigned combination of switch states (open/closed) that the TCM receives from four sense circuits. The TCM interprets this information and determines the appropriate transmission gear position and shift schedule. There are many possible combinations of open and closed switches (codes). Seven of these possible codes are related to gear position and five are recognized as "between gear" codes. This results in many codes which should never occur. These are called "invalid" codes. An invalid code will result in a DTC, and the TCM will then determine the shift lever position based on pressure switch data. This allows reasonably normal transmission operation with a TRS failure. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 3680 Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Description and Operation 68RFE Automatic Transmission Description DESCRIPTION The Transmission Range Sensor (TRS) is part of the solenoid module, which is mounted to the top of the valve body inside the transmission. The Transmission Range Sensor (TRS) has five switch contact pins that: - Determine shift lever position - Supply ground to the Starter Relay in Park and Neutral only. The TRS also has an integrated temperature sensor (thermistor) that communicates transmission temperature to the TCM and PCM. Operation OPERATION The Transmission Range Sensor (TRS) communicates shift lever position to the TCM as a combination of open and closed switches. Each shift lever position has an assigned combination of switch states (open/closed) that the TCM receives from four sense circuits. The TCM interprets this information and determines the appropriate transmission gear position and shift schedule. There are many possible combinations of open and closed switches (codes). Five of these possible codes correspond to valid gear position, there are two codes for the neutral position and three are recognized as "between gear" codes. This results in many codes which should never occur. These are called "invalid" codes. An invalid code will result in a DTC, and the TCM will then determine the shift lever position based on pressure switch data. This allows reasonably normal transmission operation with a TRS failure. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 3681 Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Description and Operation 48RE Automatic Transmission Description DESCRIPTION The Transmission Range Sensor (TRS) has 3 primary functions: - Provide a PARK/NEUTRAL start signal to the engine controller and the starter relay. - Turn the Back-up lamps on when the transmission is in REVERSE and the engine (ignition) is on. - Provide a transmission range signal to the instrument cluster. The sensor is mounted in the transmission housing near the valve body, just above the pan rail. It's in the same position as the Park/Neutral switch on other transmissions. The TRS contacts a cammed surface on the manual valve lever. The cammed surface translates the rotational motion of the manual lever into the linear motion of the sensor. The cammed surface on the manual lever is comprised of two parts controlling the TRS signal: The insulator portion contacts the switch poppet when the manual lever is not in PARK or NEUTRAL. The manual lever itself contacts the poppet when the lever is in PARK or NEUTRAL; providing a ground for the signal from the starter relay and the appropriate engine controller. Operation OPERATION Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 3682 As the switch moves through its linear motion contacts slide across a circuit board which changes the resistance between the range sensing pins of the switch. A power supply on the instrument cluster provides a regulated voltage signal to the switch. The return signal is decoded by the cluster, which then controls the PRNDL display to correspond with the correct transmission range. A bus message of transmission range is also sent by the cluster. In REVERSE range a second contact set closes the circuit providing power to the reverse lamps. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 3683 Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Description and Operation AS68RC Automatic Transmission Description DESCRIPTION TRANSMISSION RANGE SENSOR The transmission range sensor (1) is mounted externally on the left side of the transmission case. Operation OPERATION The transmission range sensor prohibits the vehicle from starting in any gear other than park and neutral. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 3684 Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Testing and Inspection DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING - TRANSMISSION RANGE SENSOR (TRS) NOTE: For all circuit identification in the following steps, Refer to the appropriate Wiring Information. 1. Raise vehicle on suitable hoist. 2. Disconnect the vehicle's shift cable from the manual lever. 3. With the manual lever in the PARK position (the PARK position is with the manual lever moved to the full rearward position), measure the resistance between the Park/Neutral Position Sense pin of the TRS and the transmission case. The resistance should be less than 5 ohms. 4. With the manual lever in the NEUTRAL position (the NEUTRAL position is with the manual lever moved two detents forward of the full rearward position), measure the resistance between the Park/Neutral Position Sense pin of the TRS and the transmission case. The resistance should be less than 5 ohms. 5. If the resistance is greater than 5 ohms in either of the previous steps, check for a dirty contact between the tip of the TRS rod and the valve body manual lever. If the contact is OK, replace the TRS. 6. With the manual lever in the REVERSE position (the REVERSE position is with the manual lever moved one detent forward of the full rearward position), measure the resistance between the Fused Ignition Switch Output and the Back-up Lamp feed pins of the TRS. The resistance should be less than 5 ohms. If the resistance is greater than 5 ohms, replace the TRS. 7. With the manual lever in the PARK position (the PARK position is with the manual lever moved to the full rearward position), measure the resistance between the Transmission Range Sensor MUX and the Transmission Range Sensor 5V Supply pins of the TRS. The resistance should be 522.2 ohms. If the resistance is not correct, replace the TRS. 8. With the manual lever in the REVERSE position (the REVERSE position is with the manual lever moved one detent forward of the full rearward position), measure the resistance between the Transmission Range Sensor MUX and the Transmission Range Sensor 5V Supply pins of the TRS. The resistance should be 206.2 ohms. If the resistance is not correct, replace the TRS. 9. With the manual lever in the NEUTRAL position (the NEUTRAL position is with the manual lever moved two detents forward of the full rearward position), measure the resistance between the Transmission Range Sensor MUX and the Transmission Range Sensor 5V Supply pins of the TRS. The resistance should be 108.6 ohms. If the resistance is not correct, replace the TRS. 10. With the manual lever in the DRIVE position (the DRIVE position is with the manual lever moved three detents forward of the full rearward position), measure the resistance between the Transmission Range Sensor MUX and the Transmission Range Sensor 5V Supply pins of the TRS. The resistance should be 59.9 ohms. If the resistance is not correct, replace the TRS. 11. With the manual lever in the SECOND position (the SECOND position is with the manual lever moved one detent rearward of the full forward position), measure the resistance between the Transmission Range Sensor MUX and the Back-up Lamp feed pins of the TRS. The resistance should be 31.9 ohms. If the resistance is not correct, replace the TRS. 12. With the manual lever in the LOW position (the LOW position is with the manual lever moved to the full forward position), measure the resistance between the Transmission Range Sensor MUX and the Back-up Lamp feed pins of the TRS. The resistance should be 13.7 ohms. If the resistance is not correct, replace the TRS. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 42RLE Automatic Transmission Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Service and Repair 42RLE Automatic Transmission Removal REMOVAL 1. Remove valve body assembly from vehicle. See: Transmission and Drivetrain/Automatic Transmission/Transaxle/Valve Body/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/42RLE Automatic Transmission/Removal 2. Remove the manual shaft seal (1). 3. Remove manual shaft/TRS retaining screw (1). 4. Slide TRS off of manual valve shaft. Installation INSTALLATION Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 3687 1. Install the TRS (2) to the manual shaft. Make sure TRS locating pin rests in manual valve bore slot. 2. Install the TRS/manual shaft retaining screw (1) and torque to 5 Nm (45 in. lbs.) torque. 3. Install the manual shaft seal (1). 4. Install valve body to the transmission. See: Transmission and Drivetrain/Automatic Transmission/Transaxle/Valve Body/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/42RLE Automatic Transmission/Installation Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 3688 Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Service and Repair 48RE Automatic Transmission Removal REMOVAL 1. Raise vehicle and position drain pan under the transmission range sensor (TRS). 2. Move the transmission manual lever to the manual LOW position. The manual LOW position is with the manual lever in the forward-most detent. 3. Disengage the wiring connector from the TRS. 4. Remove the two screws holding the TRS to the TRS mounting bracket. 5. Remove the TRS (3) from the TRS mounting bracket by pulling it straight out of the bracket. 6. If necessary, loosen the TRS mounting bracket (2) in the transmission case using Adapter 8581 (3). 7. If necessary, remove the TRS mounting bracket (2) from the transmission case. Installation INSTALLATION Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 3689 1. Move the transmission manual shaft lever to the manual LOW position. 2. If necessary, install the TRS mounting bracket (2) into the transmission case. Using Adapter 8581 (3), tighten the mounting bracket to 34 Nm (300 in.lbs.). 3. Install the TRS (3) into the mounting bracket (2) with the wiring connector facing the front of the transmission. 4. Install the two screws to hold the TRS to the mounting bracket. Tighten the screws to 5 Nm (45 in.lbs.). 5. Verify proper sensor operation (1-4). 6. Move the transmission manual shaft lever to the PARK position. 7. Connect TRS wiring connector to the TRS and lower vehicle. 8. Refill the transmission fluid to the correct level. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 3690 Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Service and Repair AS68RC Automatic Transmission Removal REMOVAL NOTE: Be certain the transmission is in the park lock position. TRANSMISSION RANGE SENSOR 1. Remove the shift cable from the manual shift lever (2). 2. Disconnect the wire harness from the transmission range sensor. 3. Remove the two nuts (3) from the control shaft. TRS REMOVAL/INSTALLATION Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 3691 4. Pry open the tabs on the stake washer (5), remove the nut (3) and the stake washer (5). 5. Remove the bolts (2). 6. Remove the transmission range sensor (1) from the transmission control shaft (4). Installation INSTALLATION 1. Install the transmission range sensor (3) onto the control shaft (5). 2. Install the stake washer and the nut (4) and hand tighten. 3. With the transmission in neutral install the alignment tool 9983 (6) onto the control shaft (5) and into the alignment hole (1). 4. Install the bolts (2). 5. After aligning the transmission range sensor, tighten the bolts (2) 12.5 Nm (9 ft.lbs.) 6. Remove the alignment tool 9983 (6) 7. Tighten the control shaft nut to 7 Nm (62 in.lbs.) 8. Bend the tabs on the stake washer and nut (4) in at least two places to lock in position. TRANSMISSION RANGE SENSOR Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 3692 9. Install the manual shift lever (2) onto the control shaft. 10. Install the inner nut (3) onto the control shaft. Tighten the inner nut to 12.5 Nm (9 ft.lbs). 11. Install the outer nut (3) onto the control shaft. While holding the inner nut, tighten the outer not to 12.5 Nm (9 ft.lbs) Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Vehicle Speed Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions Warnings WARNINGS - GENERAL WARNINGS provide information to prevent personal injury and vehicle damage. Below is a list of general warnings that should be followed any time a vehicle is being serviced. WARNING: Always wear safety glasses for eye protection. WARNING: Use safety stands anytime a procedure requires being under a vehicle. WARNING: Be sure that the ignition switch always is in the off position, unless the procedure requires it to be on. WARNING: Set the parking brake when working on any vehicle. An automatic transmission should be in park. A manual transmission should be in neutral. WARNING: Operate the engine only in a well-ventilated area. WARNING: Keep away from moving parts when the engine is running, especially the fan and belts. WARNING: To prevent serious burns, avoid contact with hot parts such as the radiator, exhaust manifold(s), tail pipe, catalytic converter and muffler. WARNING: Do not allow flame or sparks near the battery. Gases are always present in and around the battery. WARNING: Always remove rings, watches, loose hanging jewelry and avoid loose clothing. How to Use Wiring Diagrams DESCRIPTION - HOW TO USE WIRING DIAGRAMS DaimlerChrysler Corporation wiring diagrams are designed to provide information regarding the vehicles wiring content. In order to effectively use the wiring diagrams to diagnose and repair DaimlerChrysler Corporation vehicles, it is important to understand all of their features and characteristics. Diagrams are arranged such that the power (B+) side of the circuit is placed near the top of the page, and the ground (B-) side of the circuit is placed near the bottom of the page. All switches, components, and modules are shown in the at rest position with the doors closed and the key removed from the ignition. Components are shown two ways. A solid line around a component indicates that the component is complete. A dashed line around the component indicates that the component is being shown is not complete. Incomplete components have a reference number to indicate the page where the component is shown complete. It is important to realize that no attempt is made on the diagrams to represent components and wiring as they appear on the vehicle. For example, a short piece of wire is treated the same as a long one. In addition, switches and other components are shown as simply as possible, with regard to function only. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3697 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3698 SYMBOLS International symbols are used throughout the wiring diagrams. These symbols are consistent with those being used around the world. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3699 TERMINOLOGY This is a list of terms and definitions used in the wiring diagrams. LHD - Left Hand Drive Vehicles RHD - Right Hand Drive Vehicles ATX - Automatic Transmissions-Front Wheel Drive MTX Manual Transmissions-Front Wheel Drive Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3700 AT - Automatic Transmissions-Rear Wheel Drive MT - Manual Transmissions-Rear Wheel Drive SOHC - Single Over Head Cam Engine DOHC - Double Over Head Cam Engine Export - Vehicles Built For Sale In Markets Other Than North America Except Export - Vehicles Built For Sale In North America Circuit Functions DESCRIPTION - CIRCUIT FUNCTIONS All circuits in the diagrams use an alpha/numeric code to identify the wire and it's function. To identify which circuit code applies to a system, refer to the Circuit Identification Code Chart. This chart shows the main circuits only and does not show the secondary codes that may apply to some models. Circuit Information DESCRIPTION - CIRCUIT INFORMATION Each wire shown in the diagrams contains a code which identifies the main circuit, a specific part of the main circuit, gage of wire, and color. An example would be A 2 18 LB/YL. This is a Battery Feed circuit, level two, eighteen gauge, light blue with a yellow tracer. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3701 Connector, Ground and Splice Information DESCRIPTION - CONNECTOR, GROUND AND SPLICE INFORMATION CAUTION: Not all connectors are serviced. Some connectors are serviced only with a harness. A typical example might be the Supplemental Restraint System connectors. Always check parts availability before attempting a repair. IDENTIFICATION In-line connectors are identified by a number, as follows: - In-line connectors located in the engine compartment are C100 series numbers. - In-line connectors located in the instrument panel area are C200 series numbers. - In-line connectors located in the body are C300 series numbers. - Jumper harness connectors are C400 series numbers. - Grounds and ground connectors are identified with a "G" and follow the same series numbering as the in-line connectors. - Splices are identified with an "S" and follow the same series numbering as the in-line connectors. In addition, S001-S099 numbers are located in the engine compartment. - Component connectors are identified by the component name instead of a number. Multiple connectors on a component use a C1, C2, etc. identifier. LOCATIONS Vehicle/Locations contains the master connector/ground/splice location index charts with hyperlinks to the applicable location illustrations. The illustrations contain the connector name (or number)/ground number/splice number and component identification. The abbreviation T/O is used in the component location section to indicate a point in which the wiring harness branches out to a component. The abbreviation N/S means Not Shown in the illustrations Section Identification and Information DESCRIPTION - SECTION IDENTIFICATION AND INFORMATION The wiring diagrams are grouped into individual sections. If a component is most likely found in a particular group, it will be shown complete (all wires, Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3702 connectors, and pins) within that group. For example, the Auto Shutdown Relay is most likely to be found in Powertrain Management, so it is shown there complete. It can, however, be shown partially in another group if it contains some associated wiring. Splice diagrams show the entire splice and provide references to other sections the splices serves. Splice Information only contains splice diagrams that are not shown in their entirety somewhere else in the wiring diagrams. Connector Pin-Outs shows each connector and the circuits involved with that connector. The connectors are identified using the name/number on the diagram pages. Removal REMOVAL 1. Disconnect battery. 2. Release Connector Lock (2). 3. Disconnect the connector (3) being repaired from its mating half/component. 4. Remove the dress cover (if applicable) (1). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3703 5. Release the Secondary Terminal Lock, if required (1). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3704 6. Position the connector locking finger away from the terminal using the proper special tool. Pull on the wire to remove the terminal from the connector. Installation Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3705 INSTALLATION 1. Insert the removed terminal in the same cavity on the repair connector. 2. Repeat steps for each terminal in the connector, being sure that all wires are inserted into the proper cavities. For additional connector pin-out identification, refer to the wiring diagrams. 3. When the connector is re-assembled, the secondary terminal lock must be placed in the locked position to prevent terminal push out. 4. Replace dress cover (if applicable). 5. Connect connector to its mating half/component. 6. Connect battery and test all affected systems. Removal REMOVAL 1. Disconnect the battery. 2. Locate the diode in the harness, and remove the protective covering. 3. Remove the diode from the harness, pay attention to the current flow direction (1) (2) (3). Installation INSTALLATION 1. Remove the insulation from the wires in the harness. Only remove enough insulation to solder in the new diode. 2. Install the new diode in the harness, making sure current flow is correct. If necessary, refer to the appropriate wiring diagram for current flow. 3. Solder the connection together using rosin core type solder only. Do not use acid core solder. 4. Tape the diode to the harness using electrical tape. Make sure the diode is completely sealed from the elements. 5. Re-connect the battery and test affected systems. Removal REMOVAL 1. Follow steps for removing terminals described in the connector removal section. 2. Cut the wire 6 inches from the back of the connector. Installation INSTALLATION 1. Select a wire from the terminal repair kit that best matches the color and gage of the wire being repaired. 2. Cut the repair wire to the proper length and remove one-half (1/2) inch of insulation. 3. Splice the repair wire to the wire harness (see wire splicing procedure). See: Service Procedures/Wire Splicing 4. Insert the repaired wire into the connector. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3706 5. Install the connector locking wedge, if required, and reconnect the connector to its mating half/component. 6. Re-tape the wire harness starting at 1-1/2 inches behind the connector and 2 inches past the repair. 7. Connect battery and test all affected systems. Wire Splicing STANDARD PROCEDURE - WIRE SPLICING When splicing a wire, it is important that the correct gage be used as shown in the wiring diagrams. 1. Remove one-half (1/2) inch of insulation from each wire that needs to be spliced. 2. Place a piece of adhesive lined heat shrink tubing on one side of the wire. Make sure the tubing will be long enough to cover and seal the entire repair area. 3. Place the strands of wire overlapping each other inside of the splice clip (1). 4. Using crimping tool (1), Mopar p/n 05019912AA, crimp the splice clip and wires together. 5. Solder (3) the connection (2) together using rosin core type solder (1) only. CAUTION: DO NOT USE ACID CORE SOLDER. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3707 6. Center the heat shrink tubing (2) over the joint and heat using a heat gun. Heat the joint until the tubing is tightly sealed and sealant (1) comes out of both ends of the tubing. Special Tools WIRING/TERMINAL PROBING TOOL PACKAGE 6807 TERMINAL PICK TOOL SET 6680 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3708 TERMINAL REMOVING TOOLS 6932 AND 8638 TERMINAL REMOVING TOOL 6934 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3709 Vehicle Speed Sensor: Diagnostic Aids Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) Sensitive Devices STANDARD PROCEDURE - ELECTROSTATIC DISCHARGE (ESD) SENSITIVE DEVICES All ESD sensitive components are solid state and a symbol is used to indicate this. When handling any component with this symbol, comply with the following procedures to reduce the possibility of electrostatic charge build up on the body and inadvertent discharge into the component. If it is not known whether the part is ESD sensitive, assume that it is. 1. Always touch a known good ground before handling the part. This should be repeated while handling the part and more frequently after sliding across a seat, sitting down from a standing position, or walking a distance. 2. Avoid touching electrical terminals of the part, unless instructed to do so by a written procedure. 3. When using a voltmeter, be sure to connect the ground lead first. 4. Do not remove the part from it's protective packing until it is time to install the part. 5. Before removing the part from it's package, ground the package to a known good ground on the vehicle. Testing Of Voltage Potential STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING OF VOLTAGE POTENTIAL 1. Connect the ground lead of a voltmeter to a known good ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the voltmeter to the selected test point. The vehicle ignition may need to be turned ON to check voltage. Refer to the appropriate test procedure. Testing For Continuity Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3710 STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING FOR CONTINUITY 1. Remove the fuse (1) for the circuit being checked or, disconnect the battery. 2. Connect one lead of the ohmmeter to one side of the circuit being tested 3. Connect the other lead to the other end of the circuit being tested. Low or no resistance means good continuity. Testing For A Short To Ground STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING FOR A SHORT TO GROUND 1. Remove the fuse and disconnect all items involved with the fuse. 2. Connect a test light or a voltmeter across the terminals of the fuse. 3. Starting at the fuse block, wiggle the wiring harness about six to eight inches apart and watch the voltmeter/test lamp. 4. If the voltmeter registers voltage or the test lamp glows, there is a short to ground in that general area of the wiring harness. Testing For A Short To Ground On Fuses Powering Several Loads STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING FOR A SHORT TO GROUND ON FUSES POWERING SEVERAL LOADS 1. Refer to the wiring diagrams and disconnect or isolate all items on the suspected fused circuits. 2. Replace the blown fuse. 3. Supply power to the fuse by turning ON the ignition switch or re-connecting the battery. 4. Start connecting or energizing the items in the fuse circuit one at a time. When the fuse blows the circuit with the short to ground has been isolated. Testing For A Voltage Drop STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING FOR A VOLTAGE DROP Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3711 1. Connect the positive lead of the voltmeter to the side of the circuit closest to the battery. 2. Connect the other lead of the voltmeter to the other side of the switch, component or circuit. 3. Operate the item. 4. The voltmeter will show the difference in voltage between the two points. Troubleshooting Wiring Problems DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING - WIRING HARNESS TROUBLESHOOTING TOOLS When diagnosing a problem in an electrical circuit there are several common tools necessary. These tools are listed and explained below. - Jumper Wire - This is a test wire used to connect two points of a circuit. It can be used to bypass an open in a circuit. WARNING: Never use a jumper wire across a load, such as a motor, connected between a battery feed and ground. - Voltmeter - Used to check for voltage on a circuit. Always connect the black lead to a known good ground and the red lead to the positive side of the circuit. CAUTION: Most of the electrical components used in today's vehicles are Solid State. When checking voltages in these circuits, use a meter with a 10 - megohm or greater impedance rating. - Ohmmeter - Used to check the resistance between two points of a circuit. Low or no resistance in a circuit means good continuity. CAUTION: Most of the electrical components used in today's vehicles are Solid State. When checking resistance in these circuits use a meter with a 10 - megohm or greater impedance rating. In addition, make sure the power is disconnected from the circuit. Circuits that are powered up by the vehicle's electrical system can cause damage to the equipment and provide false readings. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3712 - Probing Tools - These tools are used for probing terminals in connectors. Select the proper size tool from Special Tool Package 6807, and insert the probing end (2) into the terminal being tested. Use the other end of the tool (1) to insert the meter probe. INTERMITTENT AND POOR CONNECTIONS Most intermittent electrical problems are caused by faulty electrical connections or wiring. It is also possible for a sticking component or relay to cause a problem. Before condemning a component or wiring assembly, check the following items. - Connectors are fully seated - Spread terminals, or terminal push out - Terminals in the wiring assembly are fully seated into the connector/component and locked into position - Dirt or corrosion on the terminals. Any amount of corrosion or dirt could cause an intermittent problem - Damaged connector/component casing exposing the item to dirt or moisture - Wire insulation that has rubbed through causing a short to ground - Some or all of the wiring strands broken inside of the insulation - Wiring broken inside of the insulation TROUBLESHOOTING WIRING PROBLEMS When troubleshooting wiring problems there are six steps which can aid in the procedure. The steps are listed and explained below. Always check for non-factory items added to the vehicle before doing any diagnosis. If the vehicle is equipped with these items, disconnect them to verify these add-on items are not the cause of the problem. 1. Verify the problem. 2. Verify any related symptoms. Do this by performing operational checks on components that are in the same circuit. Refer to the wiring diagrams. 3. Analyze the symptoms. Use the wiring diagrams to determine what the circuit is doing, where the problem most likely is occurring and where the diagnosis will continue. 4. Isolate the problem area. 5. Repair the problem area. 6. Verify the proper operation. For this step, check for proper operation of all items on the repaired circuit. Refer to the wiring diagrams. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Emission Control Systems > EGR Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Operation-Cab/Chassis Models EGR Temperature Sensor: Description and Operation Operation-Cab/Chassis Models OPERATION-CAB/CHASSIS MODELS The EGR Temperature Sensor (1) is located on the EGR crossover tube (6) near the EGR valve. The EGR temperature sensor is a negative temperature coefficient thermistor used to measure the temperature of the EGR gas flow after it exits the EGR cooler. The ECM (Engine Control Module) supplies 5-volts to the EGR temperature signal circuit. To determine the temperature of the EGR gas flow, the ECM monitors the change in voltage caused by changes in the resistance of the sensor. The ECM uses the exhaust gas recirculation temperature value for the engine protection system, and also for engine emissions control. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Emission Control Systems > EGR Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Operation-Cab/Chassis Models > Page 3718 EGR Temperature Sensor: Description and Operation Operation-Pick Up Models OPERATION-PICK UP MODELS The EGR Temperature Sensor (1) is located on the intake manifold, below, and to the rear of the EGR valve (5). A temperature probe (1) is located at the end of the sensor assembly (3). The EGR temperature sensor is a negative temperature coefficient thermistor used to measure the temperature of the EGR gas flow after it exits the EGR cooler. The ECM (Engine Control Module) supplies 5-volts to the EGR temperature signal circuit. To determine the temperature of the EGR gas flow, the ECM monitors the change in voltage caused by changes in the resistance of the sensor. The ECM uses the exhaust gas recirculation temperature value for the engine protection system, and also for engine emissions control. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Emission Control Systems > EGR Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal EGR Temperature Sensor: Service and Repair Removal Removal-Cab/Chassis Models REMOVAL-CAB/CHASSIS MODELS The EGR Temperature Sensor (1) is located on the EGR crossover tube (6) near EGR valve. 1. Disconnect electrical connector (2) at sensor. 2. Remove sensor (1) from EGR tube (6). Removal-Pick Up Models REMOVAL-PICK UP MODELS The EGR Temperature Sensor (1) is located on the intake manifold, below, and to the rear of the EGR valve (5). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Emission Control Systems > EGR Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 3721 1. If equipped, remove four cover bolts (2) and remove EGR crossover tube cover (1). 2. If equipped, remove EGR valve cover (2). 3. A pigtail wiring harness connects sensor to engine wiring harness. 4. Unscrew nut (2) at intake manifold. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Emission Control Systems > EGR Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 3722 5. Disconnect sensor pigtail harness electrical connector from engine wiring harness and remove sensor assembly. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Emission Control Systems > EGR Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 3723 EGR Temperature Sensor: Service and Repair Installation Installation-Cab/Chassis Models INSTALLATION-CAB/CHASSIS MODELS The EGR Temperature Sensor (1) is located on the EGR crossover tube (6) near the EGR valve. 1. Clean EGR crossover tube at sensor mounting point. 2. Check condition of the sensors metal gasket and replace if necessary. 3. Install sensor (1) to EGR tube (6). Tighten to 18 Nm (13 ft. lbs.). 4. Connect electrical connector (2) to sensor. Installation-Pick Up Models INSTALLATION-PICK UP MODELS The EGR Temperature Sensor (1) is located on the intake manifold, below, and to the rear of the EGR valve (5). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Emission Control Systems > EGR Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 3724 1. A pigtail wiring harness (3) connects the sensor to the engine wiring harness. 2. Position sensor probe (1) into intake manifold. 3. Screw and tighten nut (2) into intake manifold. 4. Connect electrical connector (4) to engine wiring harness. 5. Install EGR valve cover (2). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Emission Control Systems > EGR Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 3725 6. Install EGR crossover tube cover (1) and four cover bolts (2). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Emission Control Systems > Exhaust Pressure Differential Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Exhaust Pressure Differential Sensor: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL 1. Raise and support vehicle. 2. Disconnect electrical connector. 3. Disconnect hoses at pressure differential pressure sensor. 4. Remove mounting bolt and differential pressure sensor. 5. Remove mounting bolts (1). PRESSURE DIFFERENTIAL TUBING Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Emission Control Systems > Exhaust Pressure Differential Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 3730 6. Remove pressure differential pressure tubing. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Emission Control Systems > Exhaust Pressure Differential Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 3731 Exhaust Pressure Differential Sensor: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION PRESSURE DIFFERENTIAL TUBING 1. Install differential pressure tubing, if removed. Tighten fittings to 30 Nm (22 ft. lbs.). 2. Position differential pressure sensor (1). 3. Install mounting nuts (5) and bolts. Tighten to 10 Nm (89 in. lbs.). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Emission Control Systems > Exhaust Pressure Differential Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 3732 NOTE: Make sure there is not a dip in the pressure differential hoses. 4. Install hose (2) to the rear DPF tubing. 5. Install hose (3) to the front DPF tubing. 6. Connect electrical connector (6). 7. Lower vehicle. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Emission Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL 1. Disconnect exhaust gas pressure sensor electrical connector (1). 2. Using a 6 point deepwell socket, remove exhaust gas sensor (2). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Emission Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 3737 Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION 1. Using a 6 point deepwell socket, install exhaust gas pressure sensor. 2. Tighten sensor to 18 Nm (13 ft. lbs.). 3. Connect exhaust gas pressure sensor electrical connector (3). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Locations Component ID: 401 Component : SENSOR-ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION Connector: Name : SENSOR-ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION Color : BLACK # of pins : 6 Pin Circuit Description 1 F855 20PK/YL 5 VOLT SUPPLY Pin Circuit Description 1 K852 20BR/LB 5 VOLT SUPPLY Pin Circuit Description 1 K852 20BR/VT 5 VOLT SUPPLY 2 K23 20BR/WT APPS NO. 1 SIGNAL 3 K167 20BR/YL APPS NO. 1 RETURN 3 K167 20BR/DG APPS NO. 1 RETURN 4 K400 20BR/VT APPS NO. 2 RETURN 5 K29 20WT/BR APPS NO. 2 SIGNAL 6 F856 20YL/PK 5 VOLT SUPPLY 6 K854 20VT/BR 5 VOLT SUPPLY Component Location - 31 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3742 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3743 Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Diagrams Component ID: 401 Component : SENSOR-ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION Connector: Name : SENSOR-ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION Color : BLACK # of pins : 6 Pin Circuit Description 1 F855 20PK/YL 5 VOLT SUPPLY Pin Circuit Description 1 K852 20BR/LB 5 VOLT SUPPLY Pin Circuit Description 1 K852 20BR/VT 5 VOLT SUPPLY 2 K23 20BR/WT APPS NO. 1 SIGNAL 3 K167 20BR/YL APPS NO. 1 RETURN 3 K167 20BR/DG APPS NO. 1 RETURN 4 K400 20BR/VT APPS NO. 2 RETURN 5 K29 20WT/BR APPS NO. 2 SIGNAL 6 F856 20YL/PK 5 VOLT SUPPLY 6 K854 20VT/BR 5 VOLT SUPPLY Component Location - 31 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3744 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor (APPS) (1) is located inside the vehicle. It is attached to the accelerator pedal assembly (3). It is used only with 3.7L V-6 and 5.7L V-8 gas engines, and also with diesel engines. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 3747 Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor (APPS) provides the Powertrain Control Module (PCM) with two DC voltage signals which change as the position of the accelerator pedal changes. One of the DC voltage signals will be half the voltage of the other signal. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL CAUTION: Do not attempt to separate or remove the Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor (APPS) from the accelerator pedal assembly. The APPS is replaced as an assembly along with the pedal. If sensor is removed from pedal, its electronic calibration may be destroyed. 1. Disconnect 6-way electrical connector at top of APPS (2). 2. Remove APPS lower mounting bolt (4) and two mounting nuts. 3. Remove pedal and APPS assembly from vehicle. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 3750 Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION CAUTION: Do not attempt to separate or remove the Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor (APPS) from the accelerator pedal assembly. The APPS is replaced as an assembly along with the pedal. If sensor is removed from pedal, its electronic calibration may be destroyed. 1. Position pedal and APPS assembly to its mounting bracket. 2. Connect 6-way electrical connector to top of APPS (2). 3. Install APPS lower mounting bolt (4) and two mounting nuts. 4. If necessary, use a Scan Tool to erase any Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTC's). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations Camshaft Position Sensor: Locations Component ID: 405 Component : SENSOR-CAMSHAFT POSITION Connector: Name : SENSOR-CAMSHAFT POSITION Color : # of pins : 3 Qualifier : (DIESEL) Pin Circuit Description 1 F855 18PK/YL 5 VOLT SUPPLY 2 K944 18BK/GY CMP SENSOR GROUND 2 K916 18BR/OR SENSOR GROUND 3 K44 18DB/GY CMP SIGNAL Component Location - 5 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3755 Component Location - 11 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3756 Component Location - 13 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3757 Connector: Name : SENSOR-CAMSHAFT POSITION Color : GRAY # of pins : 3 Qualifier : (GAS) Pin Circuit Description 1 F856 20YL/PK 5 VOLT SUPPLY 2 K900 20DB/DG SENSOR GROUND 3 K44 20DB/GY CMP SIGNAL Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3758 Component Location - 5 Component Location - 11 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3759 Component Location - 13 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3760 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3761 Camshaft Position Sensor: Diagrams Component ID: 405 Component : SENSOR-CAMSHAFT POSITION Connector: Name : SENSOR-CAMSHAFT POSITION Color : # of pins : 3 Qualifier : (DIESEL) Pin Circuit Description 1 F855 18PK/YL 5 VOLT SUPPLY 2 K944 18BK/GY CMP SENSOR GROUND 2 K916 18BR/OR SENSOR GROUND 3 K44 18DB/GY CMP SIGNAL Component Location - 5 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3762 Component Location - 11 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3763 Component Location - 13 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3764 Connector: Name : SENSOR-CAMSHAFT POSITION Color : GRAY # of pins : 3 Qualifier : (GAS) Pin Circuit Description 1 F856 20YL/PK 5 VOLT SUPPLY 2 K900 20DB/DG SENSOR GROUND 3 K44 20DB/GY CMP SIGNAL Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3765 Component Location - 5 Component Location - 11 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3766 Component Location - 13 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3767 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Camshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation Description 3.7L & 4.7L The Camshaft Position Sensor (CMP) (3) is bolted to the right-front side of the right cylinder head (2). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 3770 Camshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation Operation 4.7L The CMP sensor engine contains a hall effect device called a sync signal generator to generate a fuel sync signal. This sync signal generator detects notches located on a tonewheel. The tonewheel (4) is located at the front of the camshaft for the right cylinder head (2). As the tonewheel rotates, the notches (1) pass through the sync signal generator. The pattern of the notches (viewed counter-clockwise from front of engine) is: 1 notch, 2 notches, 3 notches, 3 notches, 2 notches, 1 notch, 3 notches and 1 notch. The signal from the CMP sensor is used in conjunction with the crankshaft position sensor to differentiate between fuel injection and spark events. It is also used to synchronize the fuel injectors with their respective cylinders. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Camshaft Position Sensor - Removal Camshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair Camshaft Position Sensor - Removal 4.7L The Camshaft Position Sensor (CMP) (2) is bolted to the front/top of the right cylinder head (1). 1. Raise and support vehicle. 2. Disconnect electrical connector (4) at CMP sensor. 3. Remove sensor mounting bolt (3). 4. Carefully twist sensor from cylinder head. 5. Check condition of sensor O-ring. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Camshaft Position Sensor - Removal > Page 3773 Camshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair Camshaft Position Sensor - Installation 4.7L 1. Clean out machined hole in cylinder head. 2. Apply a small amount of engine oil to sensor O-ring. 3. Install sensor (2) into cylinder head (1) with a slight rocking action. Do not twist sensor into position as damage to O-ring may result. CAUTION: Before tightening sensor mounting bolt, be sure sensor is completely flush to cylinder head. If sensor is not flush, damage to sensor mounting tang may result. 4. Install mounting bolt (3) and tighten to 12 Nm (106 in.lbs.). 5. Connect electrical connector to sensor. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations Crankshaft Position Sensor: Locations Component ID: 407 Component : SENSOR-CRANKSHAFT POSITION Connector: Name : SENSOR-CRANKSHAFT POSITION Color : BLACK # of pins : 3 Qualifier : (3.7L) Pin Circuit Description 1 K24 20BR/LB CKP SIGNAL 2 K900 20DB/DG SENSOR GROUND 3 F855 20PK/YL 5 VOLT SUPPLY Component Location - 5 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3777 Component Location - 11 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3778 Component Location - 19 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3779 Component Location - 13 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3780 Connector: Name : SENSOR-CRANKSHAFT POSITION Color : BLACK # of pins : 3 Qualifier : (4.7L) Pin Circuit Description 1 K24 20BR/LB CKP SIGNAL 2 K900 20DB/DG SENSOR GROUND 3 F855 20PK/YL 5 VOLT SUPPLY Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3781 Component Location - 5 Component Location - 11 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3782 Component Location - 19 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3783 Component Location - 13 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3784 Connector: Name : SENSOR-CRANKSHAFT POSITION Color : BLACK # of pins : 3 Qualifier : (5.7L) Pin Circuit Description 1 F855 20PK/YL 5 VOLT SUPPLY 2 K900 20DB/DG SENSOR GROUND 3 K24 20BR/LB CKP SIGNAL Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3785 Component Location - 5 Component Location - 11 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3786 Component Location - 19 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3787 Component Location - 13 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3788 Connector: Name : SENSOR-CRANKSHAFT POSITION Color : BLACK # of pins : 3 Qualifier : (DIESEL) Pin Circuit Description 1 K853 18DB/BR 5 VOLT SUPPLY Pin Circuit Description 1 K824 18DB/BR 5 VOLT SUPPLY Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3789 2 K975 18BR/OR CKP SENSOR GROUND 2 K925 18BR/OR CKP SENSOR GROUND 3 K24 18BR/LB CKP SIGNAL Component Location - 5 Component Location - 11 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3790 Component Location - 19 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3791 Component Location - 13 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3792 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3793 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Diagrams Component ID: 407 Component : SENSOR-CRANKSHAFT POSITION Connector: Name : SENSOR-CRANKSHAFT POSITION Color : BLACK # of pins : 3 Qualifier : (3.7L) Pin Circuit Description 1 K24 20BR/LB CKP SIGNAL 2 K900 20DB/DG SENSOR GROUND 3 F855 20PK/YL 5 VOLT SUPPLY Component Location - 5 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3794 Component Location - 11 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3795 Component Location - 19 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3796 Component Location - 13 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3797 Connector: Name : SENSOR-CRANKSHAFT POSITION Color : BLACK # of pins : 3 Qualifier : (4.7L) Pin Circuit Description 1 K24 20BR/LB CKP SIGNAL 2 K900 20DB/DG SENSOR GROUND 3 F855 20PK/YL 5 VOLT SUPPLY Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3798 Component Location - 5 Component Location - 11 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3799 Component Location - 19 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3800 Component Location - 13 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3801 Connector: Name : SENSOR-CRANKSHAFT POSITION Color : BLACK # of pins : 3 Qualifier : (5.7L) Pin Circuit Description 1 F855 20PK/YL 5 VOLT SUPPLY 2 K900 20DB/DG SENSOR GROUND 3 K24 20BR/LB CKP SIGNAL Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3802 Component Location - 5 Component Location - 11 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3803 Component Location - 19 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3804 Component Location - 13 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3805 Connector: Name : SENSOR-CRANKSHAFT POSITION Color : BLACK # of pins : 3 Qualifier : (DIESEL) Pin Circuit Description 1 K853 18DB/BR 5 VOLT SUPPLY Pin Circuit Description 1 K824 18DB/BR 5 VOLT SUPPLY Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3806 2 K975 18BR/OR CKP SENSOR GROUND 2 K925 18BR/OR CKP SENSOR GROUND 3 K24 18BR/LB CKP SIGNAL Component Location - 5 Component Location - 11 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3807 Component Location - 19 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3808 Component Location - 13 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3809 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Crankshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation Description 4.7L V-8 The Crankshaft Position (CKP) (1) sensor is mounted into the right rear side of the cylinder block. It is positioned and bolted into a machined hole. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 3812 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation Operation 4.7L V-8 Engine speed and crankshaft position are provided through the CKP (Crankshaft Position) sensor. The sensor generates pulses that are the input sent to the Powertrain Control Module (PCM). The PCM interprets the sensor input to determine the crankshaft position. The PCM then uses this position, along with other inputs, to determine injector sequence and ignition timing. The sensor is a hall effect device combined with an internal magnet. It is also sensitive to steel within a certain distance from it. A tonewheel (1) is bolted to the engine crankshaft. This tonewheel has sets of notches (2) at its outer edge. The notches cause a pulse to be generated when they pass under the sensor. The pulses are the input to the PCM. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Crankshaft Position Sensor - Removal Crankshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair Crankshaft Position Sensor - Removal 4.7L V-8 The Crankshaft Position (CKP) sensor is located at the right-rear side of the engine cylinder block. It is positioned and bolted into a machined hole in the engine block. 1. Raise vehicle. 2. Disconnect CKP electrical connector at sensor. 3. Remove CKP mounting bolt (2). 4. Carefully twist sensor (1) from cylinder block. 5. Remove sensor from vehicle. 6. Check condition of sensor O-ring. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Crankshaft Position Sensor - Removal > Page 3815 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair Crankshaft Position Sensor - Installation 4.7L V-8 1. Clean out machined hole in engine block. 2. Apply a small amount of engine oil to sensor o-ring. 3. Install sensor (1) into engine block with a slight rocking and twisting action. CAUTION: Before tightening sensor mounting bolt, be sure sensor is completely flush to cylinder block. If sensor is not flush, damage to sensor mounting tang may result. 4. Install mounting bolt and tighten to 28 Nm (21 ft. lbs.) torque. 5. Connect electrical connector to sensor. 6. Lower vehicle. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL The ignition key must be in the key cylinder (1) for cylinder removal. 1. Disconnect negative cable from battery. 2. Remove upper and lower covers (shrouds) from steering column. 3. Place shifter in PARK position. 4. A retaining pin is located at the underside of the key cylinder assembly. a. Rotate key to RUN position. b. Press in on retaining pin while pulling key cylinder (1) from ignition switch. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 3821 Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION The ignition key must be in the key cylinder (3) for cylinder installation. 1. Install the key cylinder into the housing using care to align the end of the key cylinder (3) with the ignition switch (1). 2. Push the key cylinder (3) in until it clicks. 3. Replace the upper and lower shrouds. 4. Reconnect the battery. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Knock 1 Knock Sensor: Locations Sensor-Knock 1 Component ID: 423 Component : SENSOR-KNOCK 1 Connector: Name : SENSOR-KNOCK 1 Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (3.7L/5.7L) Pin Circuit Description 1 K42 20DB/YL KNOCK SENSOR NO. 1 SIGNAL 2 K942 20BR/LG KNOCK SENSOR NO. 1 RETURN Component Location - 9 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Knock 1 > Page 3826 Component Location - 22 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Knock 1 > Page 3827 Component Location - 19 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Knock 1 > Page 3828 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Knock 1 > Page 3829 Knock Sensor: Locations Sensor-Knock 2 Component ID: 424 Component : SENSOR-KNOCK 2 Connector: Name : SENSOR-KNOCK 2 Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (3.7L/5.7L) Pin Circuit Description 1 K242 20BR/WT KNOCK SENSOR NO. 2 SIGNAL 2 K924 20WT/BR KNOCK SENSOR NO. 2 RETURN Component Location - 11 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Knock 1 > Page 3830 Component Location - 22 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Knock 1 > Page 3831 Component Location - 19 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Knock 1 > Page 3832 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Knock 1 Knock Sensor: Diagrams Sensor-Knock 1 Component ID: 423 Component : SENSOR-KNOCK 1 Connector: Name : SENSOR-KNOCK 1 Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (3.7L/5.7L) Pin Circuit Description 1 K42 20DB/YL KNOCK SENSOR NO. 1 SIGNAL 2 K942 20BR/LG KNOCK SENSOR NO. 1 RETURN Component Location - 9 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Knock 1 > Page 3835 Component Location - 22 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Knock 1 > Page 3836 Component Location - 19 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Knock 1 > Page 3837 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Knock 1 > Page 3838 Knock Sensor: Diagrams Sensor-Knock 2 Component ID: 424 Component : SENSOR-KNOCK 2 Connector: Name : SENSOR-KNOCK 2 Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (3.7L/5.7L) Pin Circuit Description 1 K242 20BR/WT KNOCK SENSOR NO. 2 SIGNAL 2 K924 20WT/BR KNOCK SENSOR NO. 2 RETURN Component Location - 11 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Knock 1 > Page 3839 Component Location - 22 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Knock 1 > Page 3840 Component Location - 19 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Knock 1 > Page 3841 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Knock 1 > Page 3842 Knock Sensor: Diagrams Sensor-Knock Component ID: 422 Component : SENSOR-KNOCK Connector: Name : SENSOR-KNOCK Color : BLACK # of pins : 4 Qualifier : (4.7L) Pin Circuit Description 1 K942 20BR/LG KNOCK SENSOR NO. 1 RETURN 2 K42 20DB/YL KNOCK SENSOR NO. 1 SIGNAL 3 K924 20WT/BR KNOCK SENSOR NO. 2 RETURN 4 K242 20BR/WT KNOCK SENSOR NO. 2 SIGNAL Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Knock Sensor: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION Two knock sensors are bolted into the cylinder block under the intake manifold 3.7L, 4.7L & 8.3L. Two knock sensors are also used with the 5.7L. These are bolted into each side of the cylinder block (outside) under the exhaust manifold. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 3845 Knock Sensor: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION Two knock sensors are used; one for each cylinder bank. When the knock sensor detects a knock in one of the cylinders on the corresponding bank, it sends an input signal to the Powertrain Control Module (PCM). In response, the PCM retards ignition timing for all cylinders by a scheduled amount. Knock sensors contain a piezoelectric material which constantly vibrates and sends an input voltage (signal) to the PCM while the engine operates. As the intensity of the crystal's vibration increases, the knock sensor output voltage also increases. The voltage signal produced by the knock sensor increases with the amplitude of vibration. The PCM receives the knock sensor voltage signal as an input. If the signal rises above a predetermined level, the PCM will store that value in memory and retard ignition timing to reduce engine knock. If the knock sensor voltage exceeds a preset value, the PCM retards ignition timing for all cylinders. It is not a selective cylinder retard. The PCM ignores knock sensor input during engine idle conditions. Once the engine speed exceeds a specified value, knock retard is allowed. Knock retard uses its own short term and long term memory program. Long term memory stores previous detonation information in its battery-backed RAM. The maximum authority that long term memory has over timing retard can be calibrated. Short term memory is allowed to retard timing up to a preset amount under all operating conditions (as long as rpm is above the minimum rpm) except at Wide Open Throttle (WOT). The PCM, using short term memory, can respond quickly to retard timing when engine knock is detected. Short term memory is lost any time the ignition key is turned off. NOTE: Over or under tightening the sensor mounting bolts will affect knock sensor performance, possibly causing improper spark control. Always use the specified torque when installing the knock sensors. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Knock Sensor: Service and Repair Removal 4.7L The two knock sensors (1) are bolted into the cylinder block under the intake manifold (3). NOTE: The left sensor is identified by an identification tag (LEFT). It is also identified by a larger bolt head. The Powertrain Control Module (PCM) must have and know the correct sensor left/right positions. Do not mix the sensor locations. 1. Disconnect knock sensor dual pigtail harness from engine wiring harness. This connection is made near rear of engine. 2. Remove intake manifold See: Engine, Cooling and Exhaust/Engine/Intake Manifold/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Intake Manifold - Removal . 3. Remove sensor mounting bolts (2). Note foam strip on bolt threads. This foam is used only to retain the bolts to sensors for plant assembly. It is not used as a sealant. Do not apply any adhesive, sealant or thread locking compound to these bolts. 4. Remove sensors (1) from engine. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 3848 Knock Sensor: Service and Repair Installation 4.7L NOTE: The left sensor is identified by an identification tag (LEFT). It is also identified by a larger bolt head. The Powertrain Control Module (PCM) must have and know the correct sensor left/right positions. Do not mix the sensor locations. 1. Thoroughly clean knock sensor mounting holes. 2. Install sensors (1) into cylinder block. NOTE: Over or under tightening the sensor mounting bolts will affect knock sensor performance, possibly causing improper spark control. Always use the specified torque when installing the knock sensors. The torque for the knock sensor bolt is relatively light for an 8 mm bolt. NOTE: Note foam strip on bolt threads. This foam is used only to retain the bolts to sensors for plant assembly. It is not used as a sealant. Do not apply any adhesive, sealant or thread locking compound to these bolts. 3. Install and tighten mounting bolts. Tighten to 15 +/- 2 ft. lbs. (20 Nm) (176 in.lbs.). 4. Install intake manifold See: Engine, Cooling and Exhaust/Engine/Intake Manifold/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Intake Manifold - Installation . 5. Connect knock sensor wiring harness to engine harness (4) at rear of intake manifold. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Fuel Pressure > System Information > Specifications Fuel Pressure: Specifications FUEL SYSTEM PRESSURE 58 psi +/- 2 psi Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Fuel Pressure > System Information > Specifications > Page 3853 Fuel Pressure: Testing and Inspection *FUEL PRESSURE LEAK DOWN For a complete wiring diagram Refer to Diagrams/Electrical. Diagnostic Test 1. FUEL PUMP MODULE NOTE: Before continuing visually and physically inspect the fuel delivery system for external leaks or damage. Repair/replace as necessary. WARNING: The fuel system is under a constant pressure (even with the engine off). Before testing or servicing any fuel system hose, fitting or line, the fuel system pressure must be released. Failure to follow these instructions can result in personal injury or death. Turn the ignition off. Install special tool #6539 (5/16") or #6631 (3/8") fuel line adapter. Install the fuel pressure gauge. Start the engine and allow the fuel system to reach maximum pressure. Turn the ignition off. NOTE: Fuel specification is 407 KPa +/- 34 KPa (59 psi +/- 5 psi). Using special tool #C4390, Hose Clamp Pliers, pinch the rubber fuel line between the fuel pressure gauge and the engine. Monitor the fuel pressure gauge for a minimum of 5 minutes. NOTE: The pressure should not fall below 241 KPa (35 psi) Does the fuel pressure drop? Yes - Replace Fuel Pump Module. - Perform the POWERTRAIN VERIFICATION TEST. See: Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code Tests and Associated Procedures/Verification Tests/Powertrain Verification Test No - Go To 2 2. FUEL INJECTOR(S) WARNING: The fuel system is under a constant pressure (even with the engine off). Before testing or servicing any fuel system hose, fitting or line, the fuel system pressure must be released. Failure to follow these instructions can result in personal injury or death. Remove special tool #C4390. Start the engine and allow the fuel system to reach maximum pressure. Turn the ignition off. NOTE: Fuel specification is 407 KPa +/- 34 KPa (59 psi +/- 5 psi). Move special tool #C4390, Hose Clamp Pliers, from between the fuel pressure gauge and the engine to between the fuel pressure gauge and fuel pump module. Monitor the fuel pressure gauge for a minimum of 5 minutes. NOTE: The pressure should not fall below 241 KPa (35 psi) Does the fuel pressure drop? Yes - Replace the leaking fuel injectors. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Fuel Pressure > System Information > Specifications > Page 3854 - Perform the POWERTRAIN VERIFICATION TEST. See: Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code Tests and Associated Procedures/Verification Tests/Powertrain Verification Test No - Test Complete. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Idle Speed > System Information > Specifications Idle Speed: Specifications Idle Speed Information Not Supplied by the Manufacturer Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Air Cleaner Housing > Air Filter Element > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Air Filter Element: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL 1. Loosen clamp (1) and disconnect air duct (2) at air cleaner cover (3). 2. Pry over 4 spring clips (5) from housing cover (3). 3. Release housing cover (3) from locating tabs on housing and remove cover. 4. Remove air cleaner element (filter) from housing. 5. Clean inside of housing before replacing element. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Air Cleaner Housing > Air Filter Element > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 3863 Air Filter Element: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION 1. Install filter element into housing. 2. Position housing cover (3) into housing locating tabs. 3. Pry up 4 spring clips (5) and lock cover to housing. 4. Install air duct (2) to air cleaner cover (3) and tighten hose clamp (1) to 3 Nm (30 in. lbs.). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Fuel Filter > Fuel Pressure Release > System Information > Service and Repair Fuel Pressure Release: Service and Repair STANDARD PROCEDURE - FUEL SYSTEM PRESSURE RELEASE Use following procedure if the fuel injector rail is, or is not equipped with a fuel pressure test port. A separate fuel pump relay is no longer used. A circuit within the TIPM (Totally Integrated Power Module) is used to control the electric fuel pump located within the fuel pump module. The TIPM (1) is located in the engine compartment in front of the battery. 1. Remove fuel fill cap. 2. On bottom of vehicle, disconnect fuel pump module electrical connector. This can be accomplished at either of the two connectors (1) or (2). 3. Start and run engine until it stalls. 4. Attempt restarting engine until it will no longer run. 5. Turn ignition key to OFF position. 6. Place a rag or towel below fuel line quick-connect fitting at fuel rail. 7. Disconnect quick-connect fitting at fuel rail. 8. Reconnect fuel pump module electrical connector on bottom of vehicle. 9. One or more Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTC's) may have been stored in PCM memory due to disconnecting fuel pump module circuit. A diagnostic scan tool must be used to erase a DTC. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Firing Order > Component Information > Specifications > Electrical Specifications Firing Order: Electrical Specifications ENGINE FIRING ORDER - 4.7L V-8 4.7L ENGINE DESCRIPTION Fig. 1 The 4.7 liter (287 CID) eight-cylinder engine is an 90° single overhead camshaft engine. The cast iron cylinder block is made up of two different components; the first component is the cylinder bore and upper block, the second component is the bedplate that comprises the lower portion of the cylinder block and houses the lower half of the crankshaft main bearings. The cylinders are numbered from front to rear with the left bank being numbered 1,3,5 and 7, and the right bank being numbered 2,4,6 and 8. The firing order is 1-8-4-3-6-5-7-2. The engine serial number is located at the Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Firing Order > Component Information > Specifications > Electrical Specifications > Page 3872 right front side of the engine block (Fig. 1). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Firing Order > Component Information > Specifications > Electrical Specifications > Page 3873 Firing Order: Mechanical Specifications ENGINE FIRING ORDER - 4.7L V-8 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Ignition Timing > System Information > Specifications Ignition Timing: Specifications IGNITION TIMING Ignition timing is not adjustable on any engine. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Spark Plug > Component Information > Specifications Spark Plug: Specifications SPARK PLUGS Torque Not Supplied by Manufacturer Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Spark Plug > Component Information > Service and Repair > Spark Plug - Removal Spark Plug: Service and Repair Spark Plug - Removal REMOVAL - 4.7L V-8 CAUTION: This engine uses TWO DIFFERENT types of spark plugs. A total of 16 plugs is used. The plugs are mounted in two rows (banks). The upper row (5) is used on the intake valve side of the cylinder head. The lower row (6) is used on the exhaust valve side of the cylinder head. The upper row (5) uses Bosch Nickel Yttrium plugs #05149050AB. The lower row (6) uses Bosch Iridium plugs #05149888AA. DO NOT INTERCHANGE THESE PLUGS. CAUTION: Do not attempt to clean any of the spark plugs. Replace only. 1. Remove necessary air filter tubing and air intake components at top of engine and at throttle body. 2. To remove the upper row of plugs (5), each individual ignition coil (2) must first be removed. Prior to removing ignition coil, spray compressed air around coil base at cylinder head. 3. Prior to removing spark plug, spray compressed air into cylinder head opening. This will help prevent foreign material from entering combustion chamber. CAUTION: Due to tight clearances between UPPER row of plugs (5) and cylinder head, a conventional deep, thick-wall spark plug socket will not fit. Use a deep, THIN-WALL 5/8" spark plug socket for plug removal and installation. 4. Inspect spark plug condition. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Spark Plug > Component Information > Service and Repair > Spark Plug - Removal > Page 3882 Spark Plug: Service and Repair Spark Plug - Installation INSTALLATION - 4.7L V-8 CAUTION: This engine uses TWO DIFFERENT types of spark plugs. A total of 16 plugs is used. The plugs are mounted in two rows (banks). The upper row (5) is used on the intake valve side of the cylinder head. The lower row (6) is used on the exhaust valve side of the cylinder head. The upper row (5) uses Bosch Nickel Yttrium plugs #05149050AB. The lower row (6) uses Bosch Iridium plugs #05149888AA. DO NOT INTERCHANGE THESE PLUGS. CAUTION: Never use a motorized wire wheel brush to clean spark plugs. Metallic deposits will remain on spark plug insulator and will cause plug misfire. CAUTION: Do not attempt to clean any of the spark plugs. Replace only. 1. To aid in coil installation, apply silicone based grease such as Mopar(R) Dielectric Grease # J8126688 into spark plug end of rubber boots (4) and (7). Also apply this grease to the tops of spark plugs (5) and (6). 2. Check and adjust spark plug gap with a gap gauging tool (1). Two different gaps are used. 3. Start the spark plug into the cylinder head by hand to avoid cross threading. Special care should be taken when installing spark plugs into the cylinder head spark plug wells. Be sure the plugs do not drop into the plug wells as electrodes can be damaged. CAUTION: Due to tight clearances between upper row of plugs (5) and cylinder head, a conventional deep, thick-wall spark plug socket will not fit. Use a deep, THIN-WALL 5/8" spark plug socket for plug removal and installation. Always tighten spark plugs to the specified torque. Certain engines use torque sensitive spark plugs. It is a good practice to always tighten spark plugs to Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Spark Plug > Component Information > Service and Repair > Spark Plug - Removal > Page 3883 a specific torque. Over tightening can cause distortion resulting in a change in the spark plug gap, or a cracked porcelain insulator. 4. Install ignition coil(s). 5. Install necessary air filter tubing and air intake components to top of engine and to throttle body. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Compression Check > System Information > Specifications Compression Check: Specifications Compression Specifications Compression Ratio .............................................................................................................................. ......................................................................... 9.0 : 1 Compression Pressure ........................................................................................................................ ............................................................... Not available Max Variation Between Cylinders ........................................................................................................ .......................................................................... 25% Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Locations Component ID: 401 Component : SENSOR-ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION Connector: Name : SENSOR-ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION Color : BLACK # of pins : 6 Pin Circuit Description 1 F855 20PK/YL 5 VOLT SUPPLY Pin Circuit Description 1 K852 20BR/LB 5 VOLT SUPPLY Pin Circuit Description 1 K852 20BR/VT 5 VOLT SUPPLY 2 K23 20BR/WT APPS NO. 1 SIGNAL 3 K167 20BR/YL APPS NO. 1 RETURN 3 K167 20BR/DG APPS NO. 1 RETURN 4 K400 20BR/VT APPS NO. 2 RETURN 5 K29 20WT/BR APPS NO. 2 SIGNAL 6 F856 20YL/PK 5 VOLT SUPPLY 6 K854 20VT/BR 5 VOLT SUPPLY Component Location - 31 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3891 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3892 Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Diagrams Component ID: 401 Component : SENSOR-ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION Connector: Name : SENSOR-ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION Color : BLACK # of pins : 6 Pin Circuit Description 1 F855 20PK/YL 5 VOLT SUPPLY Pin Circuit Description 1 K852 20BR/LB 5 VOLT SUPPLY Pin Circuit Description 1 K852 20BR/VT 5 VOLT SUPPLY 2 K23 20BR/WT APPS NO. 1 SIGNAL 3 K167 20BR/YL APPS NO. 1 RETURN 3 K167 20BR/DG APPS NO. 1 RETURN 4 K400 20BR/VT APPS NO. 2 RETURN 5 K29 20WT/BR APPS NO. 2 SIGNAL 6 F856 20YL/PK 5 VOLT SUPPLY 6 K854 20VT/BR 5 VOLT SUPPLY Component Location - 31 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3893 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor (APPS) (1) is located inside the vehicle. It is attached to the accelerator pedal assembly (3). It is used only with 3.7L V-6 and 5.7L V-8 gas engines, and also with diesel engines. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 3896 Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor (APPS) provides the Powertrain Control Module (PCM) with two DC voltage signals which change as the position of the accelerator pedal changes. One of the DC voltage signals will be half the voltage of the other signal. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL CAUTION: Do not attempt to separate or remove the Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor (APPS) from the accelerator pedal assembly. The APPS is replaced as an assembly along with the pedal. If sensor is removed from pedal, its electronic calibration may be destroyed. 1. Disconnect 6-way electrical connector at top of APPS (2). 2. Remove APPS lower mounting bolt (4) and two mounting nuts. 3. Remove pedal and APPS assembly from vehicle. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 3899 Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION CAUTION: Do not attempt to separate or remove the Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor (APPS) from the accelerator pedal assembly. The APPS is replaced as an assembly along with the pedal. If sensor is removed from pedal, its electronic calibration may be destroyed. 1. Position pedal and APPS assembly to its mounting bracket. 2. Connect 6-way electrical connector to top of APPS (2). 3. Install APPS lower mounting bolt (4) and two mounting nuts. 4. If necessary, use a Scan Tool to erase any Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTC's). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Intake Air Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations Intake Air Temperature Sensor: Component Locations 4.7L V-8 The intake manifold air temperature (IAT) sensor (1) is located near the throttle body. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Intake Air Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 3904 Intake Air Temperature Sensor: Connector Locations Component ID: 421 Component : SENSOR-INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE Connector: Name : SENSOR-INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (6.7L DH) Pin Circuit Description 1 K914 18BR/WT SENSOR GROUND 2 K21 18DB/LG INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR SIGNAL Component Location - 9 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Intake Air Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 3905 Component Location - 11 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Intake Air Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 3906 Component Location - 7 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Intake Air Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 3907 Connector: Name : SENSOR-INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE Color : DK. GRAY # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (GAS) Pin Circuit Description 1 K21 20DB/LG IAT SIGNAL 2 K900 20DB/DG SENSOR GROUND Component Location - 9 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Intake Air Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 3908 Component Location - 11 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Intake Air Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 3909 Component Location - 7 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Intake Air Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 3910 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Intake Air Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3911 Intake Air Temperature Sensor: Diagrams Component ID: 421 Component : SENSOR-INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE Connector: Name : SENSOR-INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (6.7L DH) Pin Circuit Description 1 K914 18BR/WT SENSOR GROUND 2 K21 18DB/LG INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR SIGNAL Component Location - 9 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Intake Air Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3912 Component Location - 11 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Intake Air Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3913 Component Location - 7 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Intake Air Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3914 Connector: Name : SENSOR-INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE Color : DK. GRAY # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (GAS) Pin Circuit Description 1 K21 20DB/LG IAT SIGNAL 2 K900 20DB/DG SENSOR GROUND Component Location - 9 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Intake Air Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3915 Component Location - 11 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Intake Air Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3916 Component Location - 7 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Intake Air Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3917 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Intake Air Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3918 Intake Air Temperature Sensor: Description and Operation OPERATION The IAT sensor provides an input voltage to the Powertrain Control Module (PCM) indicating the density of the air entering the intake manifold based upon intake manifold temperature. At key-on, a 5-volt power circuit is supplied to the sensor from the PCM. The sensor is grounded at the PCM through a low-noise, sensor-return circuit. The PCM uses this input to calculate the following: - Injector pulse-width - Adjustment of spark timing (to help prevent spark knock with high intake manifold air-charge temperatures) The resistance values of the IAT sensor is the same as for the Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) sensor. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Intake Air Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Intake Air Temperature Sensor: Service and Repair Removal 4.7L V-8 The intake manifold air temperature (IAT) sensor (1) is located near the throttle body. 1. Disconnect electrical connector (2) from IAT sensor. 2. Clean dirt from sensor base. 3. Gently lift on small plastic release tab (3) and rotate sensor about 1/4 turn counter-clockwise for removal. 4. Check condition of sensor o-ring (2). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Intake Air Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 3921 Intake Air Temperature Sensor: Service and Repair Installation 4.7L V-8 1. Check condition of sensor o-ring (2). 2. Clean sensor mounting hole. 3. Position sensor (1) into base and rotate clockwise until past release tab (3). 4. Install electrical connector (2). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Battery Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Battery Temperature Sensor - Description Battery Temperature Sensor: Description and Operation Battery Temperature Sensor - Description DESCRIPTION The Battery Temperature Sensor (BTS) is used only on the diesel engine. It is attached to the battery tray located under the battery. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Battery Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Battery Temperature Sensor - Description > Page 3926 Battery Temperature Sensor: Description and Operation Battery Temperature Sensor - Operation OPERATION The BTS is used to determine the battery temperature and control battery charging rate. This temperature data, along with data from monitored line voltage, is used by the PCM (ECM Diesel) to vary the battery charging rate. System voltage will be higher at colder temperatures and is gradually reduced at warmer temperatures. The PCM sends 5 volts to the sensor and is grounded through the sensor return line. As temperature increases, resistance in the sensor decreases and the detection voltage at the PCM increases. The BTS is also used for OBD II diagnostics. Certain faults and OBD II monitors are either enabled or disabled, depending upon BTS input (for example, disable purge and enable Leak Detection Pump (LDP) and O2 sensor heater tests). Most OBD II monitors are disabled below 20°F. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Battery Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Battery Temperature Sensor - Removal Battery Temperature Sensor: Service and Repair Battery Temperature Sensor - Removal REMOVAL The battery temperature sensor (1) is located under the vehicle battery and is attached (snapped into) a mounting hole on battery tray (4). 1. Remove battery. 2. Pry sensor (1) straight up from battery tray mounting hole to gain access to electrical connector (3). 3. Disconnect sensor from engine wire harness electrical connector. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Battery Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Battery Temperature Sensor - Removal > Page 3929 Battery Temperature Sensor: Service and Repair Battery Temperature Sensor - Installation INSTALLATION NOTE: The battery temperature sensor (1) is located under the vehicle battery and is attached (snapped into) a mounting hole on battery tray (4). 1. Pull electrical connector (3) up through mounting hole in top of battery tray. 2. Connect sensor. 3. Snap sensor into battery tray. 4. Install battery. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Body Control Module: Diagram Information and Instructions Warnings WARNINGS - GENERAL WARNINGS provide information to prevent personal injury and vehicle damage. Below is a list of general warnings that should be followed any time a vehicle is being serviced. WARNING: Always wear safety glasses for eye protection. WARNING: Use safety stands anytime a procedure requires being under a vehicle. WARNING: Be sure that the ignition switch always is in the off position, unless the procedure requires it to be on. WARNING: Set the parking brake when working on any vehicle. An automatic transmission should be in park. A manual transmission should be in neutral. WARNING: Operate the engine only in a well-ventilated area. WARNING: Keep away from moving parts when the engine is running, especially the fan and belts. WARNING: To prevent serious burns, avoid contact with hot parts such as the radiator, exhaust manifold(s), tail pipe, catalytic converter and muffler. WARNING: Do not allow flame or sparks near the battery. Gases are always present in and around the battery. WARNING: Always remove rings, watches, loose hanging jewelry and avoid loose clothing. How to Use Wiring Diagrams DESCRIPTION - HOW TO USE WIRING DIAGRAMS DaimlerChrysler Corporation wiring diagrams are designed to provide information regarding the vehicles wiring content. In order to effectively use the wiring diagrams to diagnose and repair DaimlerChrysler Corporation vehicles, it is important to understand all of their features and characteristics. Diagrams are arranged such that the power (B+) side of the circuit is placed near the top of the page, and the ground (B-) side of the circuit is placed near the bottom of the page. All switches, components, and modules are shown in the at rest position with the doors closed and the key removed from the ignition. Components are shown two ways. A solid line around a component indicates that the component is complete. A dashed line around the component indicates that the component is being shown is not complete. Incomplete components have a reference number to indicate the page where the component is shown complete. It is important to realize that no attempt is made on the diagrams to represent components and wiring as they appear on the vehicle. For example, a short piece of wire is treated the same as a long one. In addition, switches and other components are shown as simply as possible, with regard to function only. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3934 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3935 SYMBOLS International symbols are used throughout the wiring diagrams. These symbols are consistent with those being used around the world. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3936 TERMINOLOGY This is a list of terms and definitions used in the wiring diagrams. LHD - Left Hand Drive Vehicles RHD - Right Hand Drive Vehicles ATX - Automatic Transmissions-Front Wheel Drive MTX Manual Transmissions-Front Wheel Drive Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3937 AT - Automatic Transmissions-Rear Wheel Drive MT - Manual Transmissions-Rear Wheel Drive SOHC - Single Over Head Cam Engine DOHC - Double Over Head Cam Engine Export - Vehicles Built For Sale In Markets Other Than North America Except Export - Vehicles Built For Sale In North America Circuit Functions DESCRIPTION - CIRCUIT FUNCTIONS All circuits in the diagrams use an alpha/numeric code to identify the wire and it's function. To identify which circuit code applies to a system, refer to the Circuit Identification Code Chart. This chart shows the main circuits only and does not show the secondary codes that may apply to some models. Circuit Information DESCRIPTION - CIRCUIT INFORMATION Each wire shown in the diagrams contains a code which identifies the main circuit, a specific part of the main circuit, gage of wire, and color. An example would be A 2 18 LB/YL. This is a Battery Feed circuit, level two, eighteen gauge, light blue with a yellow tracer. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3938 Connector, Ground and Splice Information DESCRIPTION - CONNECTOR, GROUND AND SPLICE INFORMATION CAUTION: Not all connectors are serviced. Some connectors are serviced only with a harness. A typical example might be the Supplemental Restraint System connectors. Always check parts availability before attempting a repair. IDENTIFICATION In-line connectors are identified by a number, as follows: - In-line connectors located in the engine compartment are C100 series numbers. - In-line connectors located in the instrument panel area are C200 series numbers. - In-line connectors located in the body are C300 series numbers. - Jumper harness connectors are C400 series numbers. - Grounds and ground connectors are identified with a "G" and follow the same series numbering as the in-line connectors. - Splices are identified with an "S" and follow the same series numbering as the in-line connectors. In addition, S001-S099 numbers are located in the engine compartment. - Component connectors are identified by the component name instead of a number. Multiple connectors on a component use a C1, C2, etc. identifier. LOCATIONS Vehicle/Locations contains the master connector/ground/splice location index charts with hyperlinks to the applicable location illustrations. The illustrations contain the connector name (or number)/ground number/splice number and component identification. The abbreviation T/O is used in the component location section to indicate a point in which the wiring harness branches out to a component. The abbreviation N/S means Not Shown in the illustrations Section Identification and Information DESCRIPTION - SECTION IDENTIFICATION AND INFORMATION The wiring diagrams are grouped into individual sections. If a component is most likely found in a particular group, it will be shown complete (all wires, Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3939 connectors, and pins) within that group. For example, the Auto Shutdown Relay is most likely to be found in Powertrain Management, so it is shown there complete. It can, however, be shown partially in another group if it contains some associated wiring. Splice diagrams show the entire splice and provide references to other sections the splices serves. Splice Information only contains splice diagrams that are not shown in their entirety somewhere else in the wiring diagrams. Connector Pin-Outs shows each connector and the circuits involved with that connector. The connectors are identified using the name/number on the diagram pages. Removal REMOVAL 1. Disconnect battery. 2. Release Connector Lock (2). 3. Disconnect the connector (3) being repaired from its mating half/component. 4. Remove the dress cover (if applicable) (1). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3940 5. Release the Secondary Terminal Lock, if required (1). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3941 6. Position the connector locking finger away from the terminal using the proper special tool. Pull on the wire to remove the terminal from the connector. Installation Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3942 INSTALLATION 1. Insert the removed terminal in the same cavity on the repair connector. 2. Repeat steps for each terminal in the connector, being sure that all wires are inserted into the proper cavities. For additional connector pin-out identification, refer to the wiring diagrams. 3. When the connector is re-assembled, the secondary terminal lock must be placed in the locked position to prevent terminal push out. 4. Replace dress cover (if applicable). 5. Connect connector to its mating half/component. 6. Connect battery and test all affected systems. Removal REMOVAL 1. Disconnect the battery. 2. Locate the diode in the harness, and remove the protective covering. 3. Remove the diode from the harness, pay attention to the current flow direction (1) (2) (3). Installation INSTALLATION 1. Remove the insulation from the wires in the harness. Only remove enough insulation to solder in the new diode. 2. Install the new diode in the harness, making sure current flow is correct. If necessary, refer to the appropriate wiring diagram for current flow. 3. Solder the connection together using rosin core type solder only. Do not use acid core solder. 4. Tape the diode to the harness using electrical tape. Make sure the diode is completely sealed from the elements. 5. Re-connect the battery and test affected systems. Removal REMOVAL 1. Follow steps for removing terminals described in the connector removal section. 2. Cut the wire 6 inches from the back of the connector. Installation INSTALLATION 1. Select a wire from the terminal repair kit that best matches the color and gage of the wire being repaired. 2. Cut the repair wire to the proper length and remove one-half (1/2) inch of insulation. 3. Splice the repair wire to the wire harness (see wire splicing procedure). See: Service Procedures/Wire Splicing 4. Insert the repaired wire into the connector. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3943 5. Install the connector locking wedge, if required, and reconnect the connector to its mating half/component. 6. Re-tape the wire harness starting at 1-1/2 inches behind the connector and 2 inches past the repair. 7. Connect battery and test all affected systems. Wire Splicing STANDARD PROCEDURE - WIRE SPLICING When splicing a wire, it is important that the correct gage be used as shown in the wiring diagrams. 1. Remove one-half (1/2) inch of insulation from each wire that needs to be spliced. 2. Place a piece of adhesive lined heat shrink tubing on one side of the wire. Make sure the tubing will be long enough to cover and seal the entire repair area. 3. Place the strands of wire overlapping each other inside of the splice clip (1). 4. Using crimping tool (1), Mopar p/n 05019912AA, crimp the splice clip and wires together. 5. Solder (3) the connection (2) together using rosin core type solder (1) only. CAUTION: DO NOT USE ACID CORE SOLDER. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3944 6. Center the heat shrink tubing (2) over the joint and heat using a heat gun. Heat the joint until the tubing is tightly sealed and sealant (1) comes out of both ends of the tubing. Special Tools WIRING/TERMINAL PROBING TOOL PACKAGE 6807 TERMINAL PICK TOOL SET 6680 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3945 TERMINAL REMOVING TOOLS 6932 AND 8638 TERMINAL REMOVING TOOL 6934 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3946 Body Control Module: Diagnostic Aids Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) Sensitive Devices STANDARD PROCEDURE - ELECTROSTATIC DISCHARGE (ESD) SENSITIVE DEVICES All ESD sensitive components are solid state and a symbol is used to indicate this. When handling any component with this symbol, comply with the following procedures to reduce the possibility of electrostatic charge build up on the body and inadvertent discharge into the component. If it is not known whether the part is ESD sensitive, assume that it is. 1. Always touch a known good ground before handling the part. This should be repeated while handling the part and more frequently after sliding across a seat, sitting down from a standing position, or walking a distance. 2. Avoid touching electrical terminals of the part, unless instructed to do so by a written procedure. 3. When using a voltmeter, be sure to connect the ground lead first. 4. Do not remove the part from it's protective packing until it is time to install the part. 5. Before removing the part from it's package, ground the package to a known good ground on the vehicle. Testing Of Voltage Potential STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING OF VOLTAGE POTENTIAL 1. Connect the ground lead of a voltmeter to a known good ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the voltmeter to the selected test point. The vehicle ignition may need to be turned ON to check voltage. Refer to the appropriate test procedure. Testing For Continuity Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3947 STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING FOR CONTINUITY 1. Remove the fuse (1) for the circuit being checked or, disconnect the battery. 2. Connect one lead of the ohmmeter to one side of the circuit being tested 3. Connect the other lead to the other end of the circuit being tested. Low or no resistance means good continuity. Testing For A Short To Ground STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING FOR A SHORT TO GROUND 1. Remove the fuse and disconnect all items involved with the fuse. 2. Connect a test light or a voltmeter across the terminals of the fuse. 3. Starting at the fuse block, wiggle the wiring harness about six to eight inches apart and watch the voltmeter/test lamp. 4. If the voltmeter registers voltage or the test lamp glows, there is a short to ground in that general area of the wiring harness. Testing For A Short To Ground On Fuses Powering Several Loads STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING FOR A SHORT TO GROUND ON FUSES POWERING SEVERAL LOADS 1. Refer to the wiring diagrams and disconnect or isolate all items on the suspected fused circuits. 2. Replace the blown fuse. 3. Supply power to the fuse by turning ON the ignition switch or re-connecting the battery. 4. Start connecting or energizing the items in the fuse circuit one at a time. When the fuse blows the circuit with the short to ground has been isolated. Testing For A Voltage Drop STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING FOR A VOLTAGE DROP Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3948 1. Connect the positive lead of the voltmeter to the side of the circuit closest to the battery. 2. Connect the other lead of the voltmeter to the other side of the switch, component or circuit. 3. Operate the item. 4. The voltmeter will show the difference in voltage between the two points. Troubleshooting Wiring Problems DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING - WIRING HARNESS TROUBLESHOOTING TOOLS When diagnosing a problem in an electrical circuit there are several common tools necessary. These tools are listed and explained below. - Jumper Wire - This is a test wire used to connect two points of a circuit. It can be used to bypass an open in a circuit. WARNING: Never use a jumper wire across a load, such as a motor, connected between a battery feed and ground. - Voltmeter - Used to check for voltage on a circuit. Always connect the black lead to a known good ground and the red lead to the positive side of the circuit. CAUTION: Most of the electrical components used in today's vehicles are Solid State. When checking voltages in these circuits, use a meter with a 10 - megohm or greater impedance rating. - Ohmmeter - Used to check the resistance between two points of a circuit. Low or no resistance in a circuit means good continuity. CAUTION: Most of the electrical components used in today's vehicles are Solid State. When checking resistance in these circuits use a meter with a 10 - megohm or greater impedance rating. In addition, make sure the power is disconnected from the circuit. Circuits that are powered up by the vehicle's electrical system can cause damage to the equipment and provide false readings. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3949 - Probing Tools - These tools are used for probing terminals in connectors. Select the proper size tool from Special Tool Package 6807, and insert the probing end (2) into the terminal being tested. Use the other end of the tool (1) to insert the meter probe. INTERMITTENT AND POOR CONNECTIONS Most intermittent electrical problems are caused by faulty electrical connections or wiring. It is also possible for a sticking component or relay to cause a problem. Before condemning a component or wiring assembly, check the following items. - Connectors are fully seated - Spread terminals, or terminal push out - Terminals in the wiring assembly are fully seated into the connector/component and locked into position - Dirt or corrosion on the terminals. Any amount of corrosion or dirt could cause an intermittent problem - Damaged connector/component casing exposing the item to dirt or moisture - Wire insulation that has rubbed through causing a short to ground - Some or all of the wiring strands broken inside of the insulation - Wiring broken inside of the insulation TROUBLESHOOTING WIRING PROBLEMS When troubleshooting wiring problems there are six steps which can aid in the procedure. The steps are listed and explained below. Always check for non-factory items added to the vehicle before doing any diagnosis. If the vehicle is equipped with these items, disconnect them to verify these add-on items are not the cause of the problem. 1. Verify the problem. 2. Verify any related symptoms. Do this by performing operational checks on components that are in the same circuit. Refer to the wiring diagrams. 3. Analyze the symptoms. Use the wiring diagrams to determine what the circuit is doing, where the problem most likely is occurring and where the diagnosis will continue. 4. Isolate the problem area. 5. Repair the problem area. 6. Verify the proper operation. For this step, check for proper operation of all items on the repaired circuit. Refer to the wiring diagrams. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations Camshaft Position Sensor: Locations Component ID: 405 Component : SENSOR-CAMSHAFT POSITION Connector: Name : SENSOR-CAMSHAFT POSITION Color : # of pins : 3 Qualifier : (DIESEL) Pin Circuit Description 1 F855 18PK/YL 5 VOLT SUPPLY 2 K944 18BK/GY CMP SENSOR GROUND 2 K916 18BR/OR SENSOR GROUND 3 K44 18DB/GY CMP SIGNAL Component Location - 5 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3953 Component Location - 11 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3954 Component Location - 13 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3955 Connector: Name : SENSOR-CAMSHAFT POSITION Color : GRAY # of pins : 3 Qualifier : (GAS) Pin Circuit Description 1 F856 20YL/PK 5 VOLT SUPPLY 2 K900 20DB/DG SENSOR GROUND 3 K44 20DB/GY CMP SIGNAL Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3956 Component Location - 5 Component Location - 11 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3957 Component Location - 13 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3958 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3959 Camshaft Position Sensor: Diagrams Component ID: 405 Component : SENSOR-CAMSHAFT POSITION Connector: Name : SENSOR-CAMSHAFT POSITION Color : # of pins : 3 Qualifier : (DIESEL) Pin Circuit Description 1 F855 18PK/YL 5 VOLT SUPPLY 2 K944 18BK/GY CMP SENSOR GROUND 2 K916 18BR/OR SENSOR GROUND 3 K44 18DB/GY CMP SIGNAL Component Location - 5 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3960 Component Location - 11 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3961 Component Location - 13 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3962 Connector: Name : SENSOR-CAMSHAFT POSITION Color : GRAY # of pins : 3 Qualifier : (GAS) Pin Circuit Description 1 F856 20YL/PK 5 VOLT SUPPLY 2 K900 20DB/DG SENSOR GROUND 3 K44 20DB/GY CMP SIGNAL Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3963 Component Location - 5 Component Location - 11 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3964 Component Location - 13 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3965 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Camshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation Description 3.7L & 4.7L The Camshaft Position Sensor (CMP) (3) is bolted to the right-front side of the right cylinder head (2). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 3968 Camshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation Operation 4.7L The CMP sensor engine contains a hall effect device called a sync signal generator to generate a fuel sync signal. This sync signal generator detects notches located on a tonewheel. The tonewheel (4) is located at the front of the camshaft for the right cylinder head (2). As the tonewheel rotates, the notches (1) pass through the sync signal generator. The pattern of the notches (viewed counter-clockwise from front of engine) is: 1 notch, 2 notches, 3 notches, 3 notches, 2 notches, 1 notch, 3 notches and 1 notch. The signal from the CMP sensor is used in conjunction with the crankshaft position sensor to differentiate between fuel injection and spark events. It is also used to synchronize the fuel injectors with their respective cylinders. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Camshaft Position Sensor - Removal Camshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair Camshaft Position Sensor - Removal 4.7L The Camshaft Position Sensor (CMP) (2) is bolted to the front/top of the right cylinder head (1). 1. Raise and support vehicle. 2. Disconnect electrical connector (4) at CMP sensor. 3. Remove sensor mounting bolt (3). 4. Carefully twist sensor from cylinder head. 5. Check condition of sensor O-ring. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Camshaft Position Sensor - Removal > Page 3971 Camshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair Camshaft Position Sensor - Installation 4.7L 1. Clean out machined hole in cylinder head. 2. Apply a small amount of engine oil to sensor O-ring. 3. Install sensor (2) into cylinder head (1) with a slight rocking action. Do not twist sensor into position as damage to O-ring may result. CAUTION: Before tightening sensor mounting bolt, be sure sensor is completely flush to cylinder head. If sensor is not flush, damage to sensor mounting tang may result. 4. Install mounting bolt (3) and tighten to 12 Nm (106 in.lbs.). 5. Connect electrical connector to sensor. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Locations Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Locations Component ID: 410 Component : SENSOR-ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE Connector: Name : SENSOR-ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (DIESEL) A K200 18BR/YL SENSOR GROUND A K914 18BK/WT SENSOR GROUND B K2 18VT/OR ECT SIGNAL Component Location - 8 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Locations > Page 3975 Component Location - 11 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Locations > Page 3976 Component Location - 13 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Locations > Page 3977 Connector: Name : SENSOR-ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (GAS) Pin Circuit Description 1 K2 20VT/OR ECT SIGNAL 2 K900 20DB/DG SENSOR GROUND Component Location - 8 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Locations > Page 3978 Component Location - 11 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Locations > Page 3979 Component Location - 13 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Locations > Page 3980 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Locations > Page 3981 Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Diagrams Component ID: 410 Component : SENSOR-ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE Connector: Name : SENSOR-ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (DIESEL) A K200 18BR/YL SENSOR GROUND A K914 18BK/WT SENSOR GROUND B K2 18VT/OR ECT SIGNAL Component Location - 8 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Locations > Page 3982 Component Location - 11 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Locations > Page 3983 Component Location - 13 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Locations > Page 3984 Connector: Name : SENSOR-ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (GAS) Pin Circuit Description 1 K2 20VT/OR ECT SIGNAL 2 K900 20DB/DG SENSOR GROUND Component Location - 8 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Locations > Page 3985 Component Location - 11 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Locations > Page 3986 Component Location - 13 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Locations > Page 3987 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations Crankshaft Position Sensor: Locations Component ID: 407 Component : SENSOR-CRANKSHAFT POSITION Connector: Name : SENSOR-CRANKSHAFT POSITION Color : BLACK # of pins : 3 Qualifier : (3.7L) Pin Circuit Description 1 K24 20BR/LB CKP SIGNAL 2 K900 20DB/DG SENSOR GROUND 3 F855 20PK/YL 5 VOLT SUPPLY Component Location - 5 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3991 Component Location - 11 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3992 Component Location - 19 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3993 Component Location - 13 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3994 Connector: Name : SENSOR-CRANKSHAFT POSITION Color : BLACK # of pins : 3 Qualifier : (4.7L) Pin Circuit Description 1 K24 20BR/LB CKP SIGNAL 2 K900 20DB/DG SENSOR GROUND 3 F855 20PK/YL 5 VOLT SUPPLY Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3995 Component Location - 5 Component Location - 11 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3996 Component Location - 19 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3997 Component Location - 13 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3998 Connector: Name : SENSOR-CRANKSHAFT POSITION Color : BLACK # of pins : 3 Qualifier : (5.7L) Pin Circuit Description 1 F855 20PK/YL 5 VOLT SUPPLY 2 K900 20DB/DG SENSOR GROUND 3 K24 20BR/LB CKP SIGNAL Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3999 Component Location - 5 Component Location - 11 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 4000 Component Location - 19 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 4001 Component Location - 13 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 4002 Connector: Name : SENSOR-CRANKSHAFT POSITION Color : BLACK # of pins : 3 Qualifier : (DIESEL) Pin Circuit Description 1 K853 18DB/BR 5 VOLT SUPPLY Pin Circuit Description 1 K824 18DB/BR 5 VOLT SUPPLY Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 4003 2 K975 18BR/OR CKP SENSOR GROUND 2 K925 18BR/OR CKP SENSOR GROUND 3 K24 18BR/LB CKP SIGNAL Component Location - 5 Component Location - 11 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 4004 Component Location - 19 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 4005 Component Location - 13 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 4006 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 4007 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Diagrams Component ID: 407 Component : SENSOR-CRANKSHAFT POSITION Connector: Name : SENSOR-CRANKSHAFT POSITION Color : BLACK # of pins : 3 Qualifier : (3.7L) Pin Circuit Description 1 K24 20BR/LB CKP SIGNAL 2 K900 20DB/DG SENSOR GROUND 3 F855 20PK/YL 5 VOLT SUPPLY Component Location - 5 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 4008 Component Location - 11 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 4009 Component Location - 19 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 4010 Component Location - 13 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 4011 Connector: Name : SENSOR-CRANKSHAFT POSITION Color : BLACK # of pins : 3 Qualifier : (4.7L) Pin Circuit Description 1 K24 20BR/LB CKP SIGNAL 2 K900 20DB/DG SENSOR GROUND 3 F855 20PK/YL 5 VOLT SUPPLY Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 4012 Component Location - 5 Component Location - 11 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 4013 Component Location - 19 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 4014 Component Location - 13 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 4015 Connector: Name : SENSOR-CRANKSHAFT POSITION Color : BLACK # of pins : 3 Qualifier : (5.7L) Pin Circuit Description 1 F855 20PK/YL 5 VOLT SUPPLY 2 K900 20DB/DG SENSOR GROUND 3 K24 20BR/LB CKP SIGNAL Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 4016 Component Location - 5 Component Location - 11 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 4017 Component Location - 19 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 4018 Component Location - 13 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 4019 Connector: Name : SENSOR-CRANKSHAFT POSITION Color : BLACK # of pins : 3 Qualifier : (DIESEL) Pin Circuit Description 1 K853 18DB/BR 5 VOLT SUPPLY Pin Circuit Description 1 K824 18DB/BR 5 VOLT SUPPLY Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 4020 2 K975 18BR/OR CKP SENSOR GROUND 2 K925 18BR/OR CKP SENSOR GROUND 3 K24 18BR/LB CKP SIGNAL Component Location - 5 Component Location - 11 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 4021 Component Location - 19 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 4022 Component Location - 13 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 4023 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Crankshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation Description 4.7L V-8 The Crankshaft Position (CKP) (1) sensor is mounted into the right rear side of the cylinder block. It is positioned and bolted into a machined hole. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 4026 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation Operation 4.7L V-8 Engine speed and crankshaft position are provided through the CKP (Crankshaft Position) sensor. The sensor generates pulses that are the input sent to the Powertrain Control Module (PCM). The PCM interprets the sensor input to determine the crankshaft position. The PCM then uses this position, along with other inputs, to determine injector sequence and ignition timing. The sensor is a hall effect device combined with an internal magnet. It is also sensitive to steel within a certain distance from it. A tonewheel (1) is bolted to the engine crankshaft. This tonewheel has sets of notches (2) at its outer edge. The notches cause a pulse to be generated when they pass under the sensor. The pulses are the input to the PCM. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Crankshaft Position Sensor - Removal Crankshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair Crankshaft Position Sensor - Removal 4.7L V-8 The Crankshaft Position (CKP) sensor is located at the right-rear side of the engine cylinder block. It is positioned and bolted into a machined hole in the engine block. 1. Raise vehicle. 2. Disconnect CKP electrical connector at sensor. 3. Remove CKP mounting bolt (2). 4. Carefully twist sensor (1) from cylinder block. 5. Remove sensor from vehicle. 6. Check condition of sensor O-ring. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Crankshaft Position Sensor - Removal > Page 4029 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair Crankshaft Position Sensor - Installation 4.7L V-8 1. Clean out machined hole in engine block. 2. Apply a small amount of engine oil to sensor o-ring. 3. Install sensor (1) into engine block with a slight rocking and twisting action. CAUTION: Before tightening sensor mounting bolt, be sure sensor is completely flush to cylinder block. If sensor is not flush, damage to sensor mounting tang may result. 4. Install mounting bolt and tighten to 28 Nm (21 ft. lbs.) torque. 5. Connect electrical connector to sensor. 6. Lower vehicle. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Data Link Connector > Component Information > Locations Data Link Connector: Locations Component ID: 82 Component : DATA LINK CONNECTOR Connector: Name : DATA LINK CONNECTOR Color : BLACK # of pins : 16 Pin Circuit Description 1-2-3-4 Z11 18BK/LG GROUND 5 Z111 18BK/WT GROUND 6 D52 20WT/LB DIAGNOSTIC CAN C (+) 7 D21 18WT/BR SCI TRANSMIT (ECM) 8-9-10 - 11 - 12 D20 20WT/LG SCI RECEIVE (ECM) 13 - 14 D51 20WT/BR DIAGNOSTIC CAN C (-) 15 - 16 A114 18GY/RD FUSED B(+) Component Location - 49 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Data Link Connector > Component Information > Locations > Page 4033 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Data Link Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Data Link Connector: Diagram Information and Instructions Warnings WARNINGS - GENERAL WARNINGS provide information to prevent personal injury and vehicle damage. Below is a list of general warnings that should be followed any time a vehicle is being serviced. WARNING: Always wear safety glasses for eye protection. WARNING: Use safety stands anytime a procedure requires being under a vehicle. WARNING: Be sure that the ignition switch always is in the off position, unless the procedure requires it to be on. WARNING: Set the parking brake when working on any vehicle. An automatic transmission should be in park. A manual transmission should be in neutral. WARNING: Operate the engine only in a well-ventilated area. WARNING: Keep away from moving parts when the engine is running, especially the fan and belts. WARNING: To prevent serious burns, avoid contact with hot parts such as the radiator, exhaust manifold(s), tail pipe, catalytic converter and muffler. WARNING: Do not allow flame or sparks near the battery. Gases are always present in and around the battery. WARNING: Always remove rings, watches, loose hanging jewelry and avoid loose clothing. How to Use Wiring Diagrams DESCRIPTION - HOW TO USE WIRING DIAGRAMS DaimlerChrysler Corporation wiring diagrams are designed to provide information regarding the vehicles wiring content. In order to effectively use the wiring diagrams to diagnose and repair DaimlerChrysler Corporation vehicles, it is important to understand all of their features and characteristics. Diagrams are arranged such that the power (B+) side of the circuit is placed near the top of the page, and the ground (B-) side of the circuit is placed near the bottom of the page. All switches, components, and modules are shown in the at rest position with the doors closed and the key removed from the ignition. Components are shown two ways. A solid line around a component indicates that the component is complete. A dashed line around the component indicates that the component is being shown is not complete. Incomplete components have a reference number to indicate the page where the component is shown complete. It is important to realize that no attempt is made on the diagrams to represent components and wiring as they appear on the vehicle. For example, a short piece of wire is treated the same as a long one. In addition, switches and other components are shown as simply as possible, with regard to function only. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Data Link Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4036 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Data Link Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4037 SYMBOLS International symbols are used throughout the wiring diagrams. These symbols are consistent with those being used around the world. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Data Link Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4038 TERMINOLOGY This is a list of terms and definitions used in the wiring diagrams. LHD - Left Hand Drive Vehicles RHD - Right Hand Drive Vehicles ATX - Automatic Transmissions-Front Wheel Drive MTX Manual Transmissions-Front Wheel Drive Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Data Link Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4039 AT - Automatic Transmissions-Rear Wheel Drive MT - Manual Transmissions-Rear Wheel Drive SOHC - Single Over Head Cam Engine DOHC - Double Over Head Cam Engine Export - Vehicles Built For Sale In Markets Other Than North America Except Export - Vehicles Built For Sale In North America Circuit Functions DESCRIPTION - CIRCUIT FUNCTIONS All circuits in the diagrams use an alpha/numeric code to identify the wire and it's function. To identify which circuit code applies to a system, refer to the Circuit Identification Code Chart. This chart shows the main circuits only and does not show the secondary codes that may apply to some models. Circuit Information DESCRIPTION - CIRCUIT INFORMATION Each wire shown in the diagrams contains a code which identifies the main circuit, a specific part of the main circuit, gage of wire, and color. An example would be A 2 18 LB/YL. This is a Battery Feed circuit, level two, eighteen gauge, light blue with a yellow tracer. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Data Link Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4040 Connector, Ground and Splice Information DESCRIPTION - CONNECTOR, GROUND AND SPLICE INFORMATION CAUTION: Not all connectors are serviced. Some connectors are serviced only with a harness. A typical example might be the Supplemental Restraint System connectors. Always check parts availability before attempting a repair. IDENTIFICATION In-line connectors are identified by a number, as follows: - In-line connectors located in the engine compartment are C100 series numbers. - In-line connectors located in the instrument panel area are C200 series numbers. - In-line connectors located in the body are C300 series numbers. - Jumper harness connectors are C400 series numbers. - Grounds and ground connectors are identified with a "G" and follow the same series numbering as the in-line connectors. - Splices are identified with an "S" and follow the same series numbering as the in-line connectors. In addition, S001-S099 numbers are located in the engine compartment. - Component connectors are identified by the component name instead of a number. Multiple connectors on a component use a C1, C2, etc. identifier. LOCATIONS Vehicle/Locations contains the master connector/ground/splice location index charts with hyperlinks to the applicable location illustrations. The illustrations contain the connector name (or number)/ground number/splice number and component identification. The abbreviation T/O is used in the component location section to indicate a point in which the wiring harness branches out to a component. The abbreviation N/S means Not Shown in the illustrations Section Identification and Information DESCRIPTION - SECTION IDENTIFICATION AND INFORMATION The wiring diagrams are grouped into individual sections. If a component is most likely found in a particular group, it will be shown complete (all wires, Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Data Link Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4041 connectors, and pins) within that group. For example, the Auto Shutdown Relay is most likely to be found in Powertrain Management, so it is shown there complete. It can, however, be shown partially in another group if it contains some associated wiring. Splice diagrams show the entire splice and provide references to other sections the splices serves. Splice Information only contains splice diagrams that are not shown in their entirety somewhere else in the wiring diagrams. Connector Pin-Outs shows each connector and the circuits involved with that connector. The connectors are identified using the name/number on the diagram pages. Removal REMOVAL 1. Disconnect battery. 2. Release Connector Lock (2). 3. Disconnect the connector (3) being repaired from its mating half/component. 4. Remove the dress cover (if applicable) (1). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Data Link Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4042 5. Release the Secondary Terminal Lock, if required (1). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Data Link Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4043 6. Position the connector locking finger away from the terminal using the proper special tool. Pull on the wire to remove the terminal from the connector. Installation Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Data Link Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4044 INSTALLATION 1. Insert the removed terminal in the same cavity on the repair connector. 2. Repeat steps for each terminal in the connector, being sure that all wires are inserted into the proper cavities. For additional connector pin-out identification, refer to the wiring diagrams. 3. When the connector is re-assembled, the secondary terminal lock must be placed in the locked position to prevent terminal push out. 4. Replace dress cover (if applicable). 5. Connect connector to its mating half/component. 6. Connect battery and test all affected systems. Removal REMOVAL 1. Disconnect the battery. 2. Locate the diode in the harness, and remove the protective covering. 3. Remove the diode from the harness, pay attention to the current flow direction (1) (2) (3). Installation INSTALLATION 1. Remove the insulation from the wires in the harness. Only remove enough insulation to solder in the new diode. 2. Install the new diode in the harness, making sure current flow is correct. If necessary, refer to the appropriate wiring diagram for current flow. 3. Solder the connection together using rosin core type solder only. Do not use acid core solder. 4. Tape the diode to the harness using electrical tape. Make sure the diode is completely sealed from the elements. 5. Re-connect the battery and test affected systems. Removal REMOVAL 1. Follow steps for removing terminals described in the connector removal section. 2. Cut the wire 6 inches from the back of the connector. Installation INSTALLATION 1. Select a wire from the terminal repair kit that best matches the color and gage of the wire being repaired. 2. Cut the repair wire to the proper length and remove one-half (1/2) inch of insulation. 3. Splice the repair wire to the wire harness (see wire splicing procedure). See: Service Procedures/Wire Splicing 4. Insert the repaired wire into the connector. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Data Link Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4045 5. Install the connector locking wedge, if required, and reconnect the connector to its mating half/component. 6. Re-tape the wire harness starting at 1-1/2 inches behind the connector and 2 inches past the repair. 7. Connect battery and test all affected systems. Wire Splicing STANDARD PROCEDURE - WIRE SPLICING When splicing a wire, it is important that the correct gage be used as shown in the wiring diagrams. 1. Remove one-half (1/2) inch of insulation from each wire that needs to be spliced. 2. Place a piece of adhesive lined heat shrink tubing on one side of the wire. Make sure the tubing will be long enough to cover and seal the entire repair area. 3. Place the strands of wire overlapping each other inside of the splice clip (1). 4. Using crimping tool (1), Mopar p/n 05019912AA, crimp the splice clip and wires together. 5. Solder (3) the connection (2) together using rosin core type solder (1) only. CAUTION: DO NOT USE ACID CORE SOLDER. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Data Link Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4046 6. Center the heat shrink tubing (2) over the joint and heat using a heat gun. Heat the joint until the tubing is tightly sealed and sealant (1) comes out of both ends of the tubing. Special Tools WIRING/TERMINAL PROBING TOOL PACKAGE 6807 TERMINAL PICK TOOL SET 6680 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Data Link Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4047 TERMINAL REMOVING TOOLS 6932 AND 8638 TERMINAL REMOVING TOOL 6934 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Data Link Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4048 Data Link Connector: Diagnostic Aids Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) Sensitive Devices STANDARD PROCEDURE - ELECTROSTATIC DISCHARGE (ESD) SENSITIVE DEVICES All ESD sensitive components are solid state and a symbol is used to indicate this. When handling any component with this symbol, comply with the following procedures to reduce the possibility of electrostatic charge build up on the body and inadvertent discharge into the component. If it is not known whether the part is ESD sensitive, assume that it is. 1. Always touch a known good ground before handling the part. This should be repeated while handling the part and more frequently after sliding across a seat, sitting down from a standing position, or walking a distance. 2. Avoid touching electrical terminals of the part, unless instructed to do so by a written procedure. 3. When using a voltmeter, be sure to connect the ground lead first. 4. Do not remove the part from it's protective packing until it is time to install the part. 5. Before removing the part from it's package, ground the package to a known good ground on the vehicle. Testing Of Voltage Potential STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING OF VOLTAGE POTENTIAL 1. Connect the ground lead of a voltmeter to a known good ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the voltmeter to the selected test point. The vehicle ignition may need to be turned ON to check voltage. Refer to the appropriate test procedure. Testing For Continuity Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Data Link Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4049 STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING FOR CONTINUITY 1. Remove the fuse (1) for the circuit being checked or, disconnect the battery. 2. Connect one lead of the ohmmeter to one side of the circuit being tested 3. Connect the other lead to the other end of the circuit being tested. Low or no resistance means good continuity. Testing For A Short To Ground STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING FOR A SHORT TO GROUND 1. Remove the fuse and disconnect all items involved with the fuse. 2. Connect a test light or a voltmeter across the terminals of the fuse. 3. Starting at the fuse block, wiggle the wiring harness about six to eight inches apart and watch the voltmeter/test lamp. 4. If the voltmeter registers voltage or the test lamp glows, there is a short to ground in that general area of the wiring harness. Testing For A Short To Ground On Fuses Powering Several Loads STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING FOR A SHORT TO GROUND ON FUSES POWERING SEVERAL LOADS 1. Refer to the wiring diagrams and disconnect or isolate all items on the suspected fused circuits. 2. Replace the blown fuse. 3. Supply power to the fuse by turning ON the ignition switch or re-connecting the battery. 4. Start connecting or energizing the items in the fuse circuit one at a time. When the fuse blows the circuit with the short to ground has been isolated. Testing For A Voltage Drop STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING FOR A VOLTAGE DROP Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Data Link Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4050 1. Connect the positive lead of the voltmeter to the side of the circuit closest to the battery. 2. Connect the other lead of the voltmeter to the other side of the switch, component or circuit. 3. Operate the item. 4. The voltmeter will show the difference in voltage between the two points. Troubleshooting Wiring Problems DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING - WIRING HARNESS TROUBLESHOOTING TOOLS When diagnosing a problem in an electrical circuit there are several common tools necessary. These tools are listed and explained below. - Jumper Wire - This is a test wire used to connect two points of a circuit. It can be used to bypass an open in a circuit. WARNING: Never use a jumper wire across a load, such as a motor, connected between a battery feed and ground. - Voltmeter - Used to check for voltage on a circuit. Always connect the black lead to a known good ground and the red lead to the positive side of the circuit. CAUTION: Most of the electrical components used in today's vehicles are Solid State. When checking voltages in these circuits, use a meter with a 10 - megohm or greater impedance rating. - Ohmmeter - Used to check the resistance between two points of a circuit. Low or no resistance in a circuit means good continuity. CAUTION: Most of the electrical components used in today's vehicles are Solid State. When checking resistance in these circuits use a meter with a 10 - megohm or greater impedance rating. In addition, make sure the power is disconnected from the circuit. Circuits that are powered up by the vehicle's electrical system can cause damage to the equipment and provide false readings. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Data Link Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4051 - Probing Tools - These tools are used for probing terminals in connectors. Select the proper size tool from Special Tool Package 6807, and insert the probing end (2) into the terminal being tested. Use the other end of the tool (1) to insert the meter probe. INTERMITTENT AND POOR CONNECTIONS Most intermittent electrical problems are caused by faulty electrical connections or wiring. It is also possible for a sticking component or relay to cause a problem. Before condemning a component or wiring assembly, check the following items. - Connectors are fully seated - Spread terminals, or terminal push out - Terminals in the wiring assembly are fully seated into the connector/component and locked into position - Dirt or corrosion on the terminals. Any amount of corrosion or dirt could cause an intermittent problem - Damaged connector/component casing exposing the item to dirt or moisture - Wire insulation that has rubbed through causing a short to ground - Some or all of the wiring strands broken inside of the insulation - Wiring broken inside of the insulation TROUBLESHOOTING WIRING PROBLEMS When troubleshooting wiring problems there are six steps which can aid in the procedure. The steps are listed and explained below. Always check for non-factory items added to the vehicle before doing any diagnosis. If the vehicle is equipped with these items, disconnect them to verify these add-on items are not the cause of the problem. 1. Verify the problem. 2. Verify any related symptoms. Do this by performing operational checks on components that are in the same circuit. Refer to the wiring diagrams. 3. Analyze the symptoms. Use the wiring diagrams to determine what the circuit is doing, where the problem most likely is occurring and where the diagnosis will continue. 4. Isolate the problem area. 5. Repair the problem area. 6. Verify the proper operation. For this step, check for proper operation of all items on the repaired circuit. Refer to the wiring diagrams. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Data Link Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4052 Data Link Connector: Connector Views Component ID: 82 Component : DATA LINK CONNECTOR Connector: Name : DATA LINK CONNECTOR Color : BLACK # of pins : 16 Pin Circuit Description 1-2-3-4 Z11 18BK/LG GROUND 5 Z111 18BK/WT GROUND 6 D52 20WT/LB DIAGNOSTIC CAN C (+) 7 D21 18WT/BR SCI TRANSMIT (ECM) 8-9-10 - 11 - 12 D20 20WT/LG SCI RECEIVE (ECM) 13 - 14 D51 20WT/BR DIAGNOSTIC CAN C (-) 15 - 16 A114 18GY/RD FUSED B(+) Component Location - 49 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Data Link Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4053 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Data Link Connector > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Data Link Connector: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The Data Link Connector (DLC) (3) is a 16-way molded plastic connector insulator on a dedicated take out of the instrument panel wire harness. This connector is located at the lower edge of the instrument panel, outboard of the steering column. The connector insulator is retained by integral snap features within a rectangular cutout in the lower instrument panel reinforcement (2), just below the lower edge of the instrument panel steering column opening cover (1). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Data Link Connector > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 4056 Data Link Connector: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The Data Link Connector (DLC) is an industry-standard 16-way connector that permits the connection of a diagnostic scan tool to the Controller Area Network (CAN) data bus for interfacing with, configuring, and retrieving Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) data from the electronic modules that reside on the data bus network of the vehicle. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Electronic Throttle Control Indicator > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Electronic Throttle Control Indicator: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION An Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) indicator is standard equipment on all instrument clusters. However, on vehicles not equipped with the optional 5.7 liter gasoline engine, this indicator is electronically disabled. This indicator is located in the lower portion of the tachometer dial face in the instrument cluster overlay. The ETC indicator consists of a stencil-like cutout of the International Control and Display Symbol icon for Electronic Throttle Control in the opaque layer of the instrument cluster overlay. The dark outer layer of the overlay prevents the indicator from being clearly visible when it is not illuminated. A red Light Emitting Diode (LED) behind the cutout in the opaque layer of the overlay causes the indicator to appear in red through the translucent outer layer of the overlay when it is illuminated from behind by the LED, which is soldered onto the instrument cluster electronic circuit board. The ETC indicator is serviced as a unit with the instrument cluster. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Electronic Throttle Control Indicator > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 4061 Electronic Throttle Control Indicator: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) indicator gives an indication to the vehicle operator when the ETC system, or a circuit or component of the system is ineffective. The ETC indicator is controlled by a transistor on the instrument cluster circuit board based upon cluster programming and electronic messages received by the cluster from the Powertrain Control Module (PCM) over the Controller Area Network (CAN) data bus. The ETC indicator Light Emitting Diode (LED) is completely controlled by the instrument cluster logic circuit, and that logic will only allow this indicator to operate when the instrument cluster receives a battery current input on the fused ignition switch output (run-start) circuit. Therefore, the LED will always be OFF when the ignition switch is in any position except ON or START. The LED only illuminates when it is provided a path to ground by the instrument cluster transistor. The instrument cluster will turn ON the ETC indicator for the following reasons: - Bulb Test - Each time the ignition switch is turned to the ON position the ETC indicator is illuminated for about six seconds. The entire bulb test is a function of the PCM. - ETC Indicator Lamp-On Message - Each time the cluster receives an electronic ETC indicator lamp-ON message from the PCM, the ETC indicator will be illuminated. The indicator can be flashed ON and OFF, or illuminated solid, as dictated by the PCM message. The indicator remains illuminated solid or continues to flash for about 12 seconds or until the cluster receives a lamp-OFF message from the PCM, whichever is longer. If the indicator is illuminated solid with the engine running the vehicle will usually remain drivable. If the indicator is flashing with the engine running the vehicle may require towing. A flashing indicator means the ETC system requires immediate service. The indicator will be extinguished when the ignition switch is turned to the OFF position. - Communication Error - If the cluster receives no lamp-ON or lamp-OFF messages from the PCM for three consecutive seconds, the ETC indicator is illuminated. The indicator remains illuminated until the cluster receives a single lamp-OFF message from the PCM. - Actuator Test - Each time the cluster is put through the actuator test, the ETC indicator will be turned ON, then OFF again during the bulb check portion of the test to confirm the functionality of the LED and the cluster control circuitry. The actuator test illumination of the ETC indicator is a function of the PCM. The PCM continually monitors the ETC system circuits and sensors to decide whether the system is in good operating condition. The PCM then sends the proper lamp-ON or lamp-OFF message to the ElectroMechanical Instrument Cluster (EMIC) (also known as the Cab Compartment Node/CCN). If the PCM sends a lamp-ON message after the bulb test, it indicates that the PCM has detected an ETC system malfunction or that the ETC system is ineffective. The PCM will store a Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) for any malfunction it detects. Each time the ETC indicator fails to illuminate due to an open or short in the cluster ETC indicator circuit, the cluster sends a message notifying the PCM of the condition, then the EMIC and the PCM will each store a DTC. For proper diagnosis of the ETC system, the PCM, the EMIC, the CAN data bus or the electronic communication related to ETC indicator operation a diagnostic scan tool is required. Refer to the appropriate diagnostic information. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 198 Engine Control Module: Locations Component ID 198 Component ID: 198 Component : MODULE-POWERTRAIN CONTROL Connector: Name : MODULE-POWERTRAIN CONTROL C1 Color : BLACK/BLACK # of pins : 38 Qualifier : (DIESEL) Pin Circuit Description 123456- 789-10 11 F1 20PK/WT FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) 12 F1 20PK/WT FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) 13 14 15 16 17 18 - - Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 198 > Page 4066 19 T160 20DG/WT SENSOR GROUND 20 T5 20DG/YL AUTOSTICK (ERS)-TOW/HAUL SIGNAL 21 22 23 24 25 26 - 27 F856 20YL/PK 5 VOLT SUPPLY 28 29 A918 20RD FUSED B(+) 30 T751 20YL IGNITION START 31 32 33 34 D65 20WT/LG CAN C BUS (+) 35 D64 20WT/LB CAN C BUS (-) 36 38 Component Location - 29 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 198 > Page 4067 Component Location - 6 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 198 > Page 4068 Connector: Name : MODULE-POWERTRAIN CONTROL C1 Color : BLACK/BLACK # of pins : 38 Qualifier : (GAS) Pin Circuit Description 1 K98 18DB/YL COIL CONTROL NO. 8 2-3 K97 18DB/YL COIL CONTROL NO. 7 3 K97 18BR COIL CONTROL NO. 7 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 198 > Page 4069 4 K28 18BR/LB INJECTOR CONTROL NO. 8 5 K26 18BR/YL INJECTOR CONTROL NO. 7 6-7-8-9 Z130 16BK/BR GROUND 10 A918 16RD FUSED B(+) 11 F202 20PK/GY FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) 12 F1 20PK/WT FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (OFF-RUN-START) 13 - 14 - 15 - 16 - 17 - 18 Z131 16BK/DG GROUND 19 Z951 16BK/YL GROUND 20 G6 16VT/GY OIL PRESSURE SIGNAL 21 - 22 - 23 - 24 A804 18RD/GY GEN SENSE 25 - 26 - 27 F856 20YL/PK 5 VOLT SUPPLY 28 K452 20BR/LB MDS SOL CONTROL NO. 4 29 A918 16RD FUSED B(+) 30 T751 20YL IGNITION START 31 K141 20DB/YL O2 1/2 SIGNAL 32 K902 20BR/DG O2 RETURN (UPSTREAM) 33 K243 20BR O2 2/2 SIGNAL 34 D65 20WT/LG CAN C BUS (+) 35 D64 20WT/LB CAN C BUS (-) 36 - 37 - 38 K342 16BR/WT ASD CONTROL OUTPUT Component Location - 29 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 198 > Page 4070 Component Location - 6 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 198 > Page 4071 Connector: Name : MODULE-POWERTRAIN CONTROL C2 Color : BLACK/ORANGE # of pins : 38 Qualifier : (GAS) Pin Circuit Description 1 K10 18DB/OR COIL CONTROL NO. 6 2 K16 18DB/YL COIL CONTROL NO. 5 3 K15 18DB/GY COIL CONTROL NO. 4 4 K58 18BR/VT INJECTOR CONTROL NO. 6 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 198 > Page 4072 5 K38 18BR/OR INJECTOR CONTROL NO. 5 6 K447 20TN/YL ETC MOTOR (+) 7 K18 18DB/OR COIL CONTROL NO. 3 8 K35 20DB/VT EGR SOL CONTROL 9 K17 18DB/TN COIL CONTROL NO. 2 10 K19 18DB/DG COIL CONTROL NO. 1 11 K14 18BR/TN INJECTOR CONTROL NO. 4 12 K13 18BR/LB INJECTOR CONTROL NO. 3 13 K12 18BR/DB INJECTOR CONTROL NO. 2 14 K11 18BR/YL INJECTOR CONTROL NO. 1 15 K922 20BR/DB TP SENSOR RETURN 16 K453 20BR/DG MDS SOL CONTROL NO. 6 17 K199 20BR/VT O2 2/1 HEATER CONTROL 18 K99 20BR/LG O2 1/1 HEATER CONTROL SUPPLY 19 K20 18BR/GY GEN FIELD CONTROL 20 K2 20VT/OR ECT SIGNAL 21 K22 20BR/OR TP NO. 1 SIGNAL 22 K34 20DB/LG EGR SIGNAL 23 K1 20VT/BR MAP SIGNAL 24 K942 20BR/LG KNOCK SENSOR NO. 1 RETURN 25 K42 20DB/YL KNOCK SENSOR NO. 1 SIGNAL 26 - 27 K900 20DB/DG SENSOR GROUND 28 K122 20BR/DG TP NO. 2 SIGNAL 29 F855 20PK/YL 5 VOLT SUPPLY 30 K21 20DB/LG IAT SIGNAL 31 K41 20DB/LB O2 1/1 SIGNAL 32 K904 20DB/DG O2 RETURN (DOWNSTREAM) 33 K43 20DB/LG O2 2/1 SIGNAL 34 K44 20DB/GY CMP SIGNAL 35 K24 20BR/LB CKP SIGNAL 36 K242 20BR/WT KNOCK SENSOR NO. 2 SIGNAL 37 K924 20WT/BR KNOCK SENSOR NO. 2 RETURN 38 K448 20TN/OR ETC MOTOR (-) Component Location - 29 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 198 > Page 4073 Component Location - 6 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 198 > Page 4074 Connector: Name : MODULE-POWERTRAIN CONTROL C3 Color : BLACK/NATURAL # of pins : 38 Qualifier : (GAS) Pin Circuit Description 1-2-3 K51 20BR/WT ASD CONTROL 4-- Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 198 > Page 4075 5 V35 20VT/OR S/C VENT SOL CONTROL 5 K454 20BR/OR MDS SOL CONTROL NO. 7 6 K451 20BR/WT MDS SOL CONTROL NO. 1 7 V32 20VT/YL SPEED CONTROL SUPPLY 8-9 K299 20BR/WT O2 1/2 HEATER CONTROL SUPPLY 10 K399 18BR/GY O2 2/2 HEATER CONTROL 11 C13 20LB/OR A/C CLUTCH CONTROL 12 V36 20VT/YL S/C VACUUM SOL CONTROL 13 - 14 V32 20VT/YL BRAKE SWITCH NO. 2 SIGNAL 15 V937 20VT/BR S/C SWITCH RETURN 16 K167 20BR/YL APPS NO. 1 RETURN 17 K400 20BR/VT APPS NO. 2 RETURN 18 V38 20VT/OR S/C SWITCH NO. 2 SIGNAL 19 K342 16BR/WT ASD CONTROL OUTPUT 20 K52 20DB/WT EVAP PURGE SOL CONTROL 21 T41 20YL/DB TRS T41 SIGNAL (P/N) 22 G113 20VT PTO SENSE 22 G113 18PK/YL PTO SENSE 23 B29 20DG/WT BRAKE SWITCH NO. 1 SIGNAL 24 - 25 K23 20BR/WT APPS NO. 1 SIGNAL 26 - 27 T5 20DG/YL AUTOSTICK (ERS)-TOW/HAUL SIGNAL 28 K342 16BR/WT ASD CONTROL OUTPUT 29 K70 20DB/BR EVAP PURGE SOL SIGNAL 30 K66 20DB/WT P/S SWITCH SIGNAL 31 - 32 - 33 G24 20VT/BR OIL TEMPERATURE SIGNAL 34 V37 20VT S/C SWITCH NO. 1 SIGNAL 35 K107 20VT/WT ESM SIGNAL 36 K29 20WT/BR APPS NO. 2 SIGNAL 37 K31 20BR FUEL PUMP CONTROL 38 T752 20DG/OR STARTER SOLENOID CONTROL Component Location - 29 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 198 > Page 4076 Component Location - 6 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 198 > Page 4077 Connector: Name : MODULE-POWERTRAIN CONTROL C4 Color : BLACK/GREEN # of pins : 38 Qualifier : (DIESEL) Pin Circuit Description 1 T160 20YL/GY SENSOR GROUND 2 T259 20YL/DG 4C CONTROL 3- Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 198 > Page 4078 4 T140 20YL/GY MS CONTROL 56 T219 20YL/LG 2C CONTROL 78 T59 20YL/LB UD CONTROL 910 T20 20DG/BK L/R CONTROL 11 T118 20DG LP VFS CONTROL 12 Z133 18BK/LG GROUND 13 Z133 18BK/LG GROUND 14 Z133 18BK/LG GROUND 15 T1 20DG/LB TRS T1 SIGNAL 16 T3 20DG/DB TRS T3 SIGNAL 17 T6 20DG TOW/HAUL OVERDRIVE OFF SWITCH SIGNAL 18 T515 20YL/DB TRANSMISSION CONTROL 19 T16 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT 20 T48 20BR/YL 4C PRESSURE SIGNAL 21 T29 20YL/WT UD PRESSURE SIGNAL 22 T9 20DG/TN OD PRESSURE SIGNAL 23 24 25 26 T4 20DG/LB TRS T2 SIGNAL 27 T41 20YL/DB TRS T41 SIGNAL (P/N) 28 T16 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT 29 T50 20DG/PK L/R PRESSURE SIGNAL 30 T147 20DG/YL 2C PRESSURE SIGNAL 31 T38 20YL/BR LINE PRESSURE SIGNAL 32 T14 20DG/BR OUTPUT SPEED SIGNAL 33 T52 20DG/OR INPUT SPEED SIGNAL 34 T13 20DG/VT SPEED SENSOR GROUND 35 T54 20DG/OR TRANSMISSION TEMPERATURE SIGNAL 36 37 T42 20DG/YL TRS T42 SIGNAL 38 T16 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT Component Location - 29 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 198 > Page 4079 Component Location - 6 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 198 > Page 4080 Connector: Name : MODULE-POWERTRAIN CONTROL C4 Color : BLACK/GREEN # of pins : 38 Qualifier : (GAS) Pin Circuit Description 1 T60 20YL/GY OD SOLENOID CONTROL 2 T259 20YL/DG 4C CONTROL 2 T59 20YL/LB UD CONTROL 3-- Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 198 > Page 4081 4 T140 20YL/GY MS CONTROL 5-6 T219 20YL/LG 2C CONTROL 6 T19 18YL/DB 2/4 SOLENOID CONTROL 7-8 T59 20YL/LB UD CONTROL 9-10 T20 20DG/WT L/R CONTROL 11 T118 20DG LP VFS CONTROL 12 Z908 18BK GROUND 13 Z977 18BK GROUND 14 Z904 18BK GROUND 15 T1 20DG/LB TRS T1 SIGNAL 16 T3 20DG/DB TRS T3 SIGNAL 17 T6 20DG TOW/HAUL OVERDRIVE OFF SWITCH SIGNAL 18 T515 20YL/DB TRANSMISSION CONTROL 19 T16 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT 20 T48 20BR/YL 4C PRESSURE SIGNAL 21 T29 20YL/WT UD PRESSURE SIGNAL 22 T9 20DG/TN OD PRESSURE SIGNAL 23 - 24 - 25 - 26 T4 20DG/LB TRS T2 SIGNAL 27 - 28 T16 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT 29 T50 20DG/PK L/R PRESSURE SIGNAL 30 T147 20DG/YL 2C PRESSURE SIGNAL 30 T47 18YL/DG 2/4 PRESSURE SIGNAL 31 T38 20YL/BR LINE PRESSURE SIGNAL 32 T14 20DG/BR OUTPUT SPEED SIGNAL 33 T52 20DG/OR INPUT SPEED SIGNAL 34 T13 20DG/VT SPEED SENSOR GROUND 35 T54 20DG/OR TRANSMISSION TEMPERATURE SIGNAL 36 - 37 T42 20DG/YL TRS T42 SIGNAL 38 T16 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT Component Location - 29 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 198 > Page 4082 Component Location - 6 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 198 > Page 4083 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 198 > Page 4084 Engine Control Module: Locations Component ID 211 Component ID: 211 Component : MODULE-POWERTRAIN CONTROL Connector: Name : MODULE-POWERTRAIN CONTROL C1 Color : BLACK/BLACK # of pins : 38 Qualifier : (DIESEL) Pin Circuit Description 123456- 789-10 11 F1 20PK/WT FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) 12 F1 20PK/WT FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) 13 14 15 16 17 18 - - Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 198 > Page 4085 19 T160 20DG/WT SENSOR GROUND 20 T5 20DG/YL AUTOSTICK (ERS)-TOW/HAUL SIGNAL 21 22 23 24 25 26 - 27 F856 20YL/PK 5 VOLT SUPPLY 28 29 A918 20RD FUSED B(+) 30 T751 20YL IGNITION START 31 32 33 34 D65 20WT/LG CAN C BUS (+) 35 D64 20WT/LB CAN C BUS (-) 36 38 Component Location - 29 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 198 > Page 4086 Component Location - 6 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 198 > Page 4087 Connector: Name : MODULE-POWERTRAIN CONTROL C1 Color : BLACK/BLACK # of pins : 38 Qualifier : (GAS) Pin Circuit Description 1 K98 18DB/YL COIL CONTROL NO. 8 2-3 K97 18DB/YL COIL CONTROL NO. 7 3 K97 18BR COIL CONTROL NO. 7 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 198 > Page 4088 4 K28 18BR/LB INJECTOR CONTROL NO. 8 5 K26 18BR/YL INJECTOR CONTROL NO. 7 6-7-8-9 Z130 16BK/BR GROUND 10 A918 16RD FUSED B(+) 11 F202 20PK/GY FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) 12 F1 20PK/WT FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (OFF-RUN-START) 13 - 14 - 15 - 16 - 17 - 18 Z131 16BK/DG GROUND 19 Z951 16BK/YL GROUND 20 G6 16VT/GY OIL PRESSURE SIGNAL 21 - 22 - 23 - 24 A804 18RD/GY GEN SENSE 25 - 26 - 27 F856 20YL/PK 5 VOLT SUPPLY 28 K452 20BR/LB MDS SOL CONTROL NO. 4 29 A918 16RD FUSED B(+) 30 T751 20YL IGNITION START 31 K141 20DB/YL O2 1/2 SIGNAL 32 K902 20BR/DG O2 RETURN (UPSTREAM) 33 K243 20BR O2 2/2 SIGNAL 34 D65 20WT/LG CAN C BUS (+) 35 D64 20WT/LB CAN C BUS (-) 36 - 37 - 38 K342 16BR/WT ASD CONTROL OUTPUT Component Location - 29 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 198 > Page 4089 Component Location - 6 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 198 > Page 4090 Connector: Name : MODULE-POWERTRAIN CONTROL C2 Color : BLACK/ORANGE # of pins : 38 Qualifier : (GAS) Pin Circuit Description 1 K10 18DB/OR COIL CONTROL NO. 6 2 K16 18DB/YL COIL CONTROL NO. 5 3 K15 18DB/GY COIL CONTROL NO. 4 4 K58 18BR/VT INJECTOR CONTROL NO. 6 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 198 > Page 4091 5 K38 18BR/OR INJECTOR CONTROL NO. 5 6 K447 20TN/YL ETC MOTOR (+) 7 K18 18DB/OR COIL CONTROL NO. 3 8 K35 20DB/VT EGR SOL CONTROL 9 K17 18DB/TN COIL CONTROL NO. 2 10 K19 18DB/DG COIL CONTROL NO. 1 11 K14 18BR/TN INJECTOR CONTROL NO. 4 12 K13 18BR/LB INJECTOR CONTROL NO. 3 13 K12 18BR/DB INJECTOR CONTROL NO. 2 14 K11 18BR/YL INJECTOR CONTROL NO. 1 15 K922 20BR/DB TP SENSOR RETURN 16 K453 20BR/DG MDS SOL CONTROL NO. 6 17 K199 20BR/VT O2 2/1 HEATER CONTROL 18 K99 20BR/LG O2 1/1 HEATER CONTROL SUPPLY 19 K20 18BR/GY GEN FIELD CONTROL 20 K2 20VT/OR ECT SIGNAL 21 K22 20BR/OR TP NO. 1 SIGNAL 22 K34 20DB/LG EGR SIGNAL 23 K1 20VT/BR MAP SIGNAL 24 K942 20BR/LG KNOCK SENSOR NO. 1 RETURN 25 K42 20DB/YL KNOCK SENSOR NO. 1 SIGNAL 26 - 27 K900 20DB/DG SENSOR GROUND 28 K122 20BR/DG TP NO. 2 SIGNAL 29 F855 20PK/YL 5 VOLT SUPPLY 30 K21 20DB/LG IAT SIGNAL 31 K41 20DB/LB O2 1/1 SIGNAL 32 K904 20DB/DG O2 RETURN (DOWNSTREAM) 33 K43 20DB/LG O2 2/1 SIGNAL 34 K44 20DB/GY CMP SIGNAL 35 K24 20BR/LB CKP SIGNAL 36 K242 20BR/WT KNOCK SENSOR NO. 2 SIGNAL 37 K924 20WT/BR KNOCK SENSOR NO. 2 RETURN 38 K448 20TN/OR ETC MOTOR (-) Component Location - 29 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 198 > Page 4092 Component Location - 6 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 198 > Page 4093 Connector: Name : MODULE-POWERTRAIN CONTROL C3 Color : BLACK/NATURAL # of pins : 38 Qualifier : (GAS) Pin Circuit Description 1-2-3 K51 20BR/WT ASD CONTROL 4-- Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 198 > Page 4094 5 V35 20VT/OR S/C VENT SOL CONTROL 5 K454 20BR/OR MDS SOL CONTROL NO. 7 6 K451 20BR/WT MDS SOL CONTROL NO. 1 7 V32 20VT/YL SPEED CONTROL SUPPLY 8-9 K299 20BR/WT O2 1/2 HEATER CONTROL SUPPLY 10 K399 18BR/GY O2 2/2 HEATER CONTROL 11 C13 20LB/OR A/C CLUTCH CONTROL 12 V36 20VT/YL S/C VACUUM SOL CONTROL 13 - 14 V32 20VT/YL BRAKE SWITCH NO. 2 SIGNAL 15 V937 20VT/BR S/C SWITCH RETURN 16 K167 20BR/YL APPS NO. 1 RETURN 17 K400 20BR/VT APPS NO. 2 RETURN 18 V38 20VT/OR S/C SWITCH NO. 2 SIGNAL 19 K342 16BR/WT ASD CONTROL OUTPUT 20 K52 20DB/WT EVAP PURGE SOL CONTROL 21 T41 20YL/DB TRS T41 SIGNAL (P/N) 22 G113 20VT PTO SENSE 22 G113 18PK/YL PTO SENSE 23 B29 20DG/WT BRAKE SWITCH NO. 1 SIGNAL 24 - 25 K23 20BR/WT APPS NO. 1 SIGNAL 26 - 27 T5 20DG/YL AUTOSTICK (ERS)-TOW/HAUL SIGNAL 28 K342 16BR/WT ASD CONTROL OUTPUT 29 K70 20DB/BR EVAP PURGE SOL SIGNAL 30 K66 20DB/WT P/S SWITCH SIGNAL 31 - 32 - 33 G24 20VT/BR OIL TEMPERATURE SIGNAL 34 V37 20VT S/C SWITCH NO. 1 SIGNAL 35 K107 20VT/WT ESM SIGNAL 36 K29 20WT/BR APPS NO. 2 SIGNAL 37 K31 20BR FUEL PUMP CONTROL 38 T752 20DG/OR STARTER SOLENOID CONTROL Component Location - 29 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 198 > Page 4095 Component Location - 6 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 198 > Page 4096 Connector: Name : MODULE-POWERTRAIN CONTROL C4 Color : BLACK/GREEN # of pins : 38 Qualifier : (DIESEL) Pin Circuit Description 1 T160 20YL/GY SENSOR GROUND 2 T259 20YL/DG 4C CONTROL 3- Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 198 > Page 4097 4 T140 20YL/GY MS CONTROL 56 T219 20YL/LG 2C CONTROL 78 T59 20YL/LB UD CONTROL 910 T20 20DG/BK L/R CONTROL 11 T118 20DG LP VFS CONTROL 12 Z133 18BK/LG GROUND 13 Z133 18BK/LG GROUND 14 Z133 18BK/LG GROUND 15 T1 20DG/LB TRS T1 SIGNAL 16 T3 20DG/DB TRS T3 SIGNAL 17 T6 20DG TOW/HAUL OVERDRIVE OFF SWITCH SIGNAL 18 T515 20YL/DB TRANSMISSION CONTROL 19 T16 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT 20 T48 20BR/YL 4C PRESSURE SIGNAL 21 T29 20YL/WT UD PRESSURE SIGNAL 22 T9 20DG/TN OD PRESSURE SIGNAL 23 24 25 26 T4 20DG/LB TRS T2 SIGNAL 27 T41 20YL/DB TRS T41 SIGNAL (P/N) 28 T16 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT 29 T50 20DG/PK L/R PRESSURE SIGNAL 30 T147 20DG/YL 2C PRESSURE SIGNAL 31 T38 20YL/BR LINE PRESSURE SIGNAL 32 T14 20DG/BR OUTPUT SPEED SIGNAL 33 T52 20DG/OR INPUT SPEED SIGNAL 34 T13 20DG/VT SPEED SENSOR GROUND 35 T54 20DG/OR TRANSMISSION TEMPERATURE SIGNAL 36 37 T42 20DG/YL TRS T42 SIGNAL 38 T16 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT Component Location - 29 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 198 > Page 4098 Component Location - 6 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 198 > Page 4099 Connector: Name : MODULE-POWERTRAIN CONTROL C4 Color : BLACK/GREEN # of pins : 38 Qualifier : (GAS) Pin Circuit Description 1 T60 20YL/GY OD SOLENOID CONTROL 2 T259 20YL/DG 4C CONTROL 2 T59 20YL/LB UD CONTROL 3-- Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 198 > Page 4100 4 T140 20YL/GY MS CONTROL 5-6 T219 20YL/LG 2C CONTROL 6 T19 18YL/DB 2/4 SOLENOID CONTROL 7-8 T59 20YL/LB UD CONTROL 9-10 T20 20DG/WT L/R CONTROL 11 T118 20DG LP VFS CONTROL 12 Z908 18BK GROUND 13 Z977 18BK GROUND 14 Z904 18BK GROUND 15 T1 20DG/LB TRS T1 SIGNAL 16 T3 20DG/DB TRS T3 SIGNAL 17 T6 20DG TOW/HAUL OVERDRIVE OFF SWITCH SIGNAL 18 T515 20YL/DB TRANSMISSION CONTROL 19 T16 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT 20 T48 20BR/YL 4C PRESSURE SIGNAL 21 T29 20YL/WT UD PRESSURE SIGNAL 22 T9 20DG/TN OD PRESSURE SIGNAL 23 - 24 - 25 - 26 T4 20DG/LB TRS T2 SIGNAL 27 - 28 T16 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT 29 T50 20DG/PK L/R PRESSURE SIGNAL 30 T147 20DG/YL 2C PRESSURE SIGNAL 30 T47 18YL/DG 2/4 PRESSURE SIGNAL 31 T38 20YL/BR LINE PRESSURE SIGNAL 32 T14 20DG/BR OUTPUT SPEED SIGNAL 33 T52 20DG/OR INPUT SPEED SIGNAL 34 T13 20DG/VT SPEED SENSOR GROUND 35 T54 20DG/OR TRANSMISSION TEMPERATURE SIGNAL 36 - 37 T42 20DG/YL TRS T42 SIGNAL 38 T16 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT Component Location - 29 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 198 > Page 4101 Component Location - 6 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 198 > Page 4102 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Engine Control Module: Diagram Information and Instructions Warnings WARNINGS - GENERAL WARNINGS provide information to prevent personal injury and vehicle damage. Below is a list of general warnings that should be followed any time a vehicle is being serviced. WARNING: Always wear safety glasses for eye protection. WARNING: Use safety stands anytime a procedure requires being under a vehicle. WARNING: Be sure that the ignition switch always is in the off position, unless the procedure requires it to be on. WARNING: Set the parking brake when working on any vehicle. An automatic transmission should be in park. A manual transmission should be in neutral. WARNING: Operate the engine only in a well-ventilated area. WARNING: Keep away from moving parts when the engine is running, especially the fan and belts. WARNING: To prevent serious burns, avoid contact with hot parts such as the radiator, exhaust manifold(s), tail pipe, catalytic converter and muffler. WARNING: Do not allow flame or sparks near the battery. Gases are always present in and around the battery. WARNING: Always remove rings, watches, loose hanging jewelry and avoid loose clothing. How to Use Wiring Diagrams DESCRIPTION - HOW TO USE WIRING DIAGRAMS DaimlerChrysler Corporation wiring diagrams are designed to provide information regarding the vehicles wiring content. In order to effectively use the wiring diagrams to diagnose and repair DaimlerChrysler Corporation vehicles, it is important to understand all of their features and characteristics. Diagrams are arranged such that the power (B+) side of the circuit is placed near the top of the page, and the ground (B-) side of the circuit is placed near the bottom of the page. All switches, components, and modules are shown in the at rest position with the doors closed and the key removed from the ignition. Components are shown two ways. A solid line around a component indicates that the component is complete. A dashed line around the component indicates that the component is being shown is not complete. Incomplete components have a reference number to indicate the page where the component is shown complete. It is important to realize that no attempt is made on the diagrams to represent components and wiring as they appear on the vehicle. For example, a short piece of wire is treated the same as a long one. In addition, switches and other components are shown as simply as possible, with regard to function only. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4105 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4106 SYMBOLS International symbols are used throughout the wiring diagrams. These symbols are consistent with those being used around the world. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4107 TERMINOLOGY This is a list of terms and definitions used in the wiring diagrams. LHD - Left Hand Drive Vehicles RHD - Right Hand Drive Vehicles ATX - Automatic Transmissions-Front Wheel Drive MTX Manual Transmissions-Front Wheel Drive Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4108 AT - Automatic Transmissions-Rear Wheel Drive MT - Manual Transmissions-Rear Wheel Drive SOHC - Single Over Head Cam Engine DOHC - Double Over Head Cam Engine Export - Vehicles Built For Sale In Markets Other Than North America Except Export - Vehicles Built For Sale In North America Circuit Functions DESCRIPTION - CIRCUIT FUNCTIONS All circuits in the diagrams use an alpha/numeric code to identify the wire and it's function. To identify which circuit code applies to a system, refer to the Circuit Identification Code Chart. This chart shows the main circuits only and does not show the secondary codes that may apply to some models. Circuit Information DESCRIPTION - CIRCUIT INFORMATION Each wire shown in the diagrams contains a code which identifies the main circuit, a specific part of the main circuit, gage of wire, and color. An example would be A 2 18 LB/YL. This is a Battery Feed circuit, level two, eighteen gauge, light blue with a yellow tracer. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4109 Connector, Ground and Splice Information DESCRIPTION - CONNECTOR, GROUND AND SPLICE INFORMATION CAUTION: Not all connectors are serviced. Some connectors are serviced only with a harness. A typical example might be the Supplemental Restraint System connectors. Always check parts availability before attempting a repair. IDENTIFICATION In-line connectors are identified by a number, as follows: - In-line connectors located in the engine compartment are C100 series numbers. - In-line connectors located in the instrument panel area are C200 series numbers. - In-line connectors located in the body are C300 series numbers. - Jumper harness connectors are C400 series numbers. - Grounds and ground connectors are identified with a "G" and follow the same series numbering as the in-line connectors. - Splices are identified with an "S" and follow the same series numbering as the in-line connectors. In addition, S001-S099 numbers are located in the engine compartment. - Component connectors are identified by the component name instead of a number. Multiple connectors on a component use a C1, C2, etc. identifier. LOCATIONS Vehicle/Locations contains the master connector/ground/splice location index charts with hyperlinks to the applicable location illustrations. The illustrations contain the connector name (or number)/ground number/splice number and component identification. The abbreviation T/O is used in the component location section to indicate a point in which the wiring harness branches out to a component. The abbreviation N/S means Not Shown in the illustrations Section Identification and Information DESCRIPTION - SECTION IDENTIFICATION AND INFORMATION The wiring diagrams are grouped into individual sections. If a component is most likely found in a particular group, it will be shown complete (all wires, Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4110 connectors, and pins) within that group. For example, the Auto Shutdown Relay is most likely to be found in Powertrain Management, so it is shown there complete. It can, however, be shown partially in another group if it contains some associated wiring. Splice diagrams show the entire splice and provide references to other sections the splices serves. Splice Information only contains splice diagrams that are not shown in their entirety somewhere else in the wiring diagrams. Connector Pin-Outs shows each connector and the circuits involved with that connector. The connectors are identified using the name/number on the diagram pages. Removal REMOVAL 1. Disconnect battery. 2. Release Connector Lock (2). 3. Disconnect the connector (3) being repaired from its mating half/component. 4. Remove the dress cover (if applicable) (1). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4111 5. Release the Secondary Terminal Lock, if required (1). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4112 6. Position the connector locking finger away from the terminal using the proper special tool. Pull on the wire to remove the terminal from the connector. Installation Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4113 INSTALLATION 1. Insert the removed terminal in the same cavity on the repair connector. 2. Repeat steps for each terminal in the connector, being sure that all wires are inserted into the proper cavities. For additional connector pin-out identification, refer to the wiring diagrams. 3. When the connector is re-assembled, the secondary terminal lock must be placed in the locked position to prevent terminal push out. 4. Replace dress cover (if applicable). 5. Connect connector to its mating half/component. 6. Connect battery and test all affected systems. Removal REMOVAL 1. Disconnect the battery. 2. Locate the diode in the harness, and remove the protective covering. 3. Remove the diode from the harness, pay attention to the current flow direction (1) (2) (3). Installation INSTALLATION 1. Remove the insulation from the wires in the harness. Only remove enough insulation to solder in the new diode. 2. Install the new diode in the harness, making sure current flow is correct. If necessary, refer to the appropriate wiring diagram for current flow. 3. Solder the connection together using rosin core type solder only. Do not use acid core solder. 4. Tape the diode to the harness using electrical tape. Make sure the diode is completely sealed from the elements. 5. Re-connect the battery and test affected systems. Removal REMOVAL 1. Follow steps for removing terminals described in the connector removal section. 2. Cut the wire 6 inches from the back of the connector. Installation INSTALLATION 1. Select a wire from the terminal repair kit that best matches the color and gage of the wire being repaired. 2. Cut the repair wire to the proper length and remove one-half (1/2) inch of insulation. 3. Splice the repair wire to the wire harness (see wire splicing procedure). See: Service Procedures/Wire Splicing 4. Insert the repaired wire into the connector. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4114 5. Install the connector locking wedge, if required, and reconnect the connector to its mating half/component. 6. Re-tape the wire harness starting at 1-1/2 inches behind the connector and 2 inches past the repair. 7. Connect battery and test all affected systems. Wire Splicing STANDARD PROCEDURE - WIRE SPLICING When splicing a wire, it is important that the correct gage be used as shown in the wiring diagrams. 1. Remove one-half (1/2) inch of insulation from each wire that needs to be spliced. 2. Place a piece of adhesive lined heat shrink tubing on one side of the wire. Make sure the tubing will be long enough to cover and seal the entire repair area. 3. Place the strands of wire overlapping each other inside of the splice clip (1). 4. Using crimping tool (1), Mopar p/n 05019912AA, crimp the splice clip and wires together. 5. Solder (3) the connection (2) together using rosin core type solder (1) only. CAUTION: DO NOT USE ACID CORE SOLDER. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4115 6. Center the heat shrink tubing (2) over the joint and heat using a heat gun. Heat the joint until the tubing is tightly sealed and sealant (1) comes out of both ends of the tubing. Special Tools WIRING/TERMINAL PROBING TOOL PACKAGE 6807 TERMINAL PICK TOOL SET 6680 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4116 TERMINAL REMOVING TOOLS 6932 AND 8638 TERMINAL REMOVING TOOL 6934 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4117 Engine Control Module: Diagnostic Aids Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) Sensitive Devices STANDARD PROCEDURE - ELECTROSTATIC DISCHARGE (ESD) SENSITIVE DEVICES All ESD sensitive components are solid state and a symbol is used to indicate this. When handling any component with this symbol, comply with the following procedures to reduce the possibility of electrostatic charge build up on the body and inadvertent discharge into the component. If it is not known whether the part is ESD sensitive, assume that it is. 1. Always touch a known good ground before handling the part. This should be repeated while handling the part and more frequently after sliding across a seat, sitting down from a standing position, or walking a distance. 2. Avoid touching electrical terminals of the part, unless instructed to do so by a written procedure. 3. When using a voltmeter, be sure to connect the ground lead first. 4. Do not remove the part from it's protective packing until it is time to install the part. 5. Before removing the part from it's package, ground the package to a known good ground on the vehicle. Testing Of Voltage Potential STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING OF VOLTAGE POTENTIAL 1. Connect the ground lead of a voltmeter to a known good ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the voltmeter to the selected test point. The vehicle ignition may need to be turned ON to check voltage. Refer to the appropriate test procedure. Testing For Continuity Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4118 STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING FOR CONTINUITY 1. Remove the fuse (1) for the circuit being checked or, disconnect the battery. 2. Connect one lead of the ohmmeter to one side of the circuit being tested 3. Connect the other lead to the other end of the circuit being tested. Low or no resistance means good continuity. Testing For A Short To Ground STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING FOR A SHORT TO GROUND 1. Remove the fuse and disconnect all items involved with the fuse. 2. Connect a test light or a voltmeter across the terminals of the fuse. 3. Starting at the fuse block, wiggle the wiring harness about six to eight inches apart and watch the voltmeter/test lamp. 4. If the voltmeter registers voltage or the test lamp glows, there is a short to ground in that general area of the wiring harness. Testing For A Short To Ground On Fuses Powering Several Loads STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING FOR A SHORT TO GROUND ON FUSES POWERING SEVERAL LOADS 1. Refer to the wiring diagrams and disconnect or isolate all items on the suspected fused circuits. 2. Replace the blown fuse. 3. Supply power to the fuse by turning ON the ignition switch or re-connecting the battery. 4. Start connecting or energizing the items in the fuse circuit one at a time. When the fuse blows the circuit with the short to ground has been isolated. Testing For A Voltage Drop STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING FOR A VOLTAGE DROP Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4119 1. Connect the positive lead of the voltmeter to the side of the circuit closest to the battery. 2. Connect the other lead of the voltmeter to the other side of the switch, component or circuit. 3. Operate the item. 4. The voltmeter will show the difference in voltage between the two points. Troubleshooting Wiring Problems DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING - WIRING HARNESS TROUBLESHOOTING TOOLS When diagnosing a problem in an electrical circuit there are several common tools necessary. These tools are listed and explained below. - Jumper Wire - This is a test wire used to connect two points of a circuit. It can be used to bypass an open in a circuit. WARNING: Never use a jumper wire across a load, such as a motor, connected between a battery feed and ground. - Voltmeter - Used to check for voltage on a circuit. Always connect the black lead to a known good ground and the red lead to the positive side of the circuit. CAUTION: Most of the electrical components used in today's vehicles are Solid State. When checking voltages in these circuits, use a meter with a 10 - megohm or greater impedance rating. - Ohmmeter - Used to check the resistance between two points of a circuit. Low or no resistance in a circuit means good continuity. CAUTION: Most of the electrical components used in today's vehicles are Solid State. When checking resistance in these circuits use a meter with a 10 - megohm or greater impedance rating. In addition, make sure the power is disconnected from the circuit. Circuits that are powered up by the vehicle's electrical system can cause damage to the equipment and provide false readings. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4120 - Probing Tools - These tools are used for probing terminals in connectors. Select the proper size tool from Special Tool Package 6807, and insert the probing end (2) into the terminal being tested. Use the other end of the tool (1) to insert the meter probe. INTERMITTENT AND POOR CONNECTIONS Most intermittent electrical problems are caused by faulty electrical connections or wiring. It is also possible for a sticking component or relay to cause a problem. Before condemning a component or wiring assembly, check the following items. - Connectors are fully seated - Spread terminals, or terminal push out - Terminals in the wiring assembly are fully seated into the connector/component and locked into position - Dirt or corrosion on the terminals. Any amount of corrosion or dirt could cause an intermittent problem - Damaged connector/component casing exposing the item to dirt or moisture - Wire insulation that has rubbed through causing a short to ground - Some or all of the wiring strands broken inside of the insulation - Wiring broken inside of the insulation TROUBLESHOOTING WIRING PROBLEMS When troubleshooting wiring problems there are six steps which can aid in the procedure. The steps are listed and explained below. Always check for non-factory items added to the vehicle before doing any diagnosis. If the vehicle is equipped with these items, disconnect them to verify these add-on items are not the cause of the problem. 1. Verify the problem. 2. Verify any related symptoms. Do this by performing operational checks on components that are in the same circuit. Refer to the wiring diagrams. 3. Analyze the symptoms. Use the wiring diagrams to determine what the circuit is doing, where the problem most likely is occurring and where the diagnosis will continue. 4. Isolate the problem area. 5. Repair the problem area. 6. Verify the proper operation. For this step, check for proper operation of all items on the repaired circuit. Refer to the wiring diagrams. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4121 Engine Control Module: Connector Views Component ID 198 Component ID: 198 Component : MODULE-POWERTRAIN CONTROL Connector: Name : MODULE-POWERTRAIN CONTROL C1 Color : BLACK/BLACK # of pins : 38 Qualifier : (DIESEL) Pin Circuit Description 12345- 6789-10 11 F1 20PK/WT FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) 12 F1 20PK/WT FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) 13 14 15 16 17 - Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4122 18 - 19 T160 20DG/WT SENSOR GROUND 20 T5 20DG/YL AUTOSTICK (ERS)-TOW/HAUL SIGNAL 21 22 23 24 25 26 - 27 F856 20YL/PK 5 VOLT SUPPLY 28 29 A918 20RD FUSED B(+) 30 T751 20YL IGNITION START 31 32 33 34 D65 20WT/LG CAN C BUS (+) 35 D64 20WT/LB CAN C BUS (-) 36 38 Component Location - 29 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4123 Component Location - 6 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4124 Connector: Name : MODULE-POWERTRAIN CONTROL C1 Color : BLACK/BLACK # of pins : 38 Qualifier : (GAS) Pin Circuit Description 1 K98 18DB/YL COIL CONTROL NO. 8 2-3 K97 18DB/YL COIL CONTROL NO. 7 3 K97 18BR COIL CONTROL NO. 7 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4125 4 K28 18BR/LB INJECTOR CONTROL NO. 8 5 K26 18BR/YL INJECTOR CONTROL NO. 7 6-7-8-9 Z130 16BK/BR GROUND 10 A918 16RD FUSED B(+) 11 F202 20PK/GY FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) 12 F1 20PK/WT FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (OFF-RUN-START) 13 - 14 - 15 - 16 - 17 - 18 Z131 16BK/DG GROUND 19 Z951 16BK/YL GROUND 20 G6 16VT/GY OIL PRESSURE SIGNAL 21 - 22 - 23 - 24 A804 18RD/GY GEN SENSE 25 - 26 - 27 F856 20YL/PK 5 VOLT SUPPLY 28 K452 20BR/LB MDS SOL CONTROL NO. 4 29 A918 16RD FUSED B(+) 30 T751 20YL IGNITION START 31 K141 20DB/YL O2 1/2 SIGNAL 32 K902 20BR/DG O2 RETURN (UPSTREAM) 33 K243 20BR O2 2/2 SIGNAL 34 D65 20WT/LG CAN C BUS (+) 35 D64 20WT/LB CAN C BUS (-) 36 - 37 - 38 K342 16BR/WT ASD CONTROL OUTPUT Component Location - 29 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4126 Component Location - 6 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4127 Connector: Name : MODULE-POWERTRAIN CONTROL C2 Color : BLACK/ORANGE # of pins : 38 Qualifier : (GAS) Pin Circuit Description 1 K10 18DB/OR COIL CONTROL NO. 6 2 K16 18DB/YL COIL CONTROL NO. 5 3 K15 18DB/GY COIL CONTROL NO. 4 4 K58 18BR/VT INJECTOR CONTROL NO. 6 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4128 5 K38 18BR/OR INJECTOR CONTROL NO. 5 6 K447 20TN/YL ETC MOTOR (+) 7 K18 18DB/OR COIL CONTROL NO. 3 8 K35 20DB/VT EGR SOL CONTROL 9 K17 18DB/TN COIL CONTROL NO. 2 10 K19 18DB/DG COIL CONTROL NO. 1 11 K14 18BR/TN INJECTOR CONTROL NO. 4 12 K13 18BR/LB INJECTOR CONTROL NO. 3 13 K12 18BR/DB INJECTOR CONTROL NO. 2 14 K11 18BR/YL INJECTOR CONTROL NO. 1 15 K922 20BR/DB TP SENSOR RETURN 16 K453 20BR/DG MDS SOL CONTROL NO. 6 17 K199 20BR/VT O2 2/1 HEATER CONTROL 18 K99 20BR/LG O2 1/1 HEATER CONTROL SUPPLY 19 K20 18BR/GY GEN FIELD CONTROL 20 K2 20VT/OR ECT SIGNAL 21 K22 20BR/OR TP NO. 1 SIGNAL 22 K34 20DB/LG EGR SIGNAL 23 K1 20VT/BR MAP SIGNAL 24 K942 20BR/LG KNOCK SENSOR NO. 1 RETURN 25 K42 20DB/YL KNOCK SENSOR NO. 1 SIGNAL 26 - 27 K900 20DB/DG SENSOR GROUND 28 K122 20BR/DG TP NO. 2 SIGNAL 29 F855 20PK/YL 5 VOLT SUPPLY 30 K21 20DB/LG IAT SIGNAL 31 K41 20DB/LB O2 1/1 SIGNAL 32 K904 20DB/DG O2 RETURN (DOWNSTREAM) 33 K43 20DB/LG O2 2/1 SIGNAL 34 K44 20DB/GY CMP SIGNAL 35 K24 20BR/LB CKP SIGNAL 36 K242 20BR/WT KNOCK SENSOR NO. 2 SIGNAL 37 K924 20WT/BR KNOCK SENSOR NO. 2 RETURN 38 K448 20TN/OR ETC MOTOR (-) Component Location - 29 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4129 Component Location - 6 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4130 Connector: Name : MODULE-POWERTRAIN CONTROL C3 Color : BLACK/NATURAL # of pins : 38 Qualifier : (GAS) Pin Circuit Description 1-2-3 K51 20BR/WT ASD CONTROL 4-- Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4131 5 V35 20VT/OR S/C VENT SOL CONTROL 5 K454 20BR/OR MDS SOL CONTROL NO. 7 6 K451 20BR/WT MDS SOL CONTROL NO. 1 7 V32 20VT/YL SPEED CONTROL SUPPLY 8-9 K299 20BR/WT O2 1/2 HEATER CONTROL SUPPLY 10 K399 18BR/GY O2 2/2 HEATER CONTROL 11 C13 20LB/OR A/C CLUTCH CONTROL 12 V36 20VT/YL S/C VACUUM SOL CONTROL 13 - 14 V32 20VT/YL BRAKE SWITCH NO. 2 SIGNAL 15 V937 20VT/BR S/C SWITCH RETURN 16 K167 20BR/YL APPS NO. 1 RETURN 17 K400 20BR/VT APPS NO. 2 RETURN 18 V38 20VT/OR S/C SWITCH NO. 2 SIGNAL 19 K342 16BR/WT ASD CONTROL OUTPUT 20 K52 20DB/WT EVAP PURGE SOL CONTROL 21 T41 20YL/DB TRS T41 SIGNAL (P/N) 22 G113 20VT PTO SENSE 22 G113 18PK/YL PTO SENSE 23 B29 20DG/WT BRAKE SWITCH NO. 1 SIGNAL 24 - 25 K23 20BR/WT APPS NO. 1 SIGNAL 26 - 27 T5 20DG/YL AUTOSTICK (ERS)-TOW/HAUL SIGNAL 28 K342 16BR/WT ASD CONTROL OUTPUT 29 K70 20DB/BR EVAP PURGE SOL SIGNAL 30 K66 20DB/WT P/S SWITCH SIGNAL 31 - 32 - 33 G24 20VT/BR OIL TEMPERATURE SIGNAL 34 V37 20VT S/C SWITCH NO. 1 SIGNAL 35 K107 20VT/WT ESM SIGNAL 36 K29 20WT/BR APPS NO. 2 SIGNAL 37 K31 20BR FUEL PUMP CONTROL 38 T752 20DG/OR STARTER SOLENOID CONTROL Component Location - 29 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4132 Component Location - 6 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4133 Connector: Name : MODULE-POWERTRAIN CONTROL C4 Color : BLACK/GREEN # of pins : 38 Qualifier : (DIESEL) Pin Circuit Description 1 T160 20YL/GY SENSOR GROUND 2 T259 20YL/DG 4C CONTROL 3- Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4134 4 T140 20YL/GY MS CONTROL 56 T219 20YL/LG 2C CONTROL 78 T59 20YL/LB UD CONTROL 910 T20 20DG/BK L/R CONTROL 11 T118 20DG LP VFS CONTROL 12 Z133 18BK/LG GROUND 13 Z133 18BK/LG GROUND 14 Z133 18BK/LG GROUND 15 T1 20DG/LB TRS T1 SIGNAL 16 T3 20DG/DB TRS T3 SIGNAL 17 T6 20DG TOW/HAUL OVERDRIVE OFF SWITCH SIGNAL 18 T515 20YL/DB TRANSMISSION CONTROL 19 T16 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT 20 T48 20BR/YL 4C PRESSURE SIGNAL 21 T29 20YL/WT UD PRESSURE SIGNAL 22 T9 20DG/TN OD PRESSURE SIGNAL 23 24 25 26 T4 20DG/LB TRS T2 SIGNAL 27 T41 20YL/DB TRS T41 SIGNAL (P/N) 28 T16 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT 29 T50 20DG/PK L/R PRESSURE SIGNAL 30 T147 20DG/YL 2C PRESSURE SIGNAL 31 T38 20YL/BR LINE PRESSURE SIGNAL 32 T14 20DG/BR OUTPUT SPEED SIGNAL 33 T52 20DG/OR INPUT SPEED SIGNAL 34 T13 20DG/VT SPEED SENSOR GROUND 35 T54 20DG/OR TRANSMISSION TEMPERATURE SIGNAL 36 37 T42 20DG/YL TRS T42 SIGNAL 38 T16 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT Component Location - 29 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4135 Component Location - 6 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4136 Connector: Name : MODULE-POWERTRAIN CONTROL C4 Color : BLACK/GREEN # of pins : 38 Qualifier : (GAS) Pin Circuit Description 1 T60 20YL/GY OD SOLENOID CONTROL 2 T259 20YL/DG 4C CONTROL 2 T59 20YL/LB UD CONTROL 3-- Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4137 4 T140 20YL/GY MS CONTROL 5-6 T219 20YL/LG 2C CONTROL 6 T19 18YL/DB 2/4 SOLENOID CONTROL 7-8 T59 20YL/LB UD CONTROL 9-10 T20 20DG/WT L/R CONTROL 11 T118 20DG LP VFS CONTROL 12 Z908 18BK GROUND 13 Z977 18BK GROUND 14 Z904 18BK GROUND 15 T1 20DG/LB TRS T1 SIGNAL 16 T3 20DG/DB TRS T3 SIGNAL 17 T6 20DG TOW/HAUL OVERDRIVE OFF SWITCH SIGNAL 18 T515 20YL/DB TRANSMISSION CONTROL 19 T16 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT 20 T48 20BR/YL 4C PRESSURE SIGNAL 21 T29 20YL/WT UD PRESSURE SIGNAL 22 T9 20DG/TN OD PRESSURE SIGNAL 23 - 24 - 25 - 26 T4 20DG/LB TRS T2 SIGNAL 27 - 28 T16 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT 29 T50 20DG/PK L/R PRESSURE SIGNAL 30 T147 20DG/YL 2C PRESSURE SIGNAL 30 T47 18YL/DG 2/4 PRESSURE SIGNAL 31 T38 20YL/BR LINE PRESSURE SIGNAL 32 T14 20DG/BR OUTPUT SPEED SIGNAL 33 T52 20DG/OR INPUT SPEED SIGNAL 34 T13 20DG/VT SPEED SENSOR GROUND 35 T54 20DG/OR TRANSMISSION TEMPERATURE SIGNAL 36 - 37 T42 20DG/YL TRS T42 SIGNAL 38 T16 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT Component Location - 29 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4138 Component Location - 6 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4139 Component ID 211 Component ID: 211 Component : MODULE-POWERTRAIN CONTROL Connector: Name : MODULE-POWERTRAIN CONTROL C1 Color : BLACK/BLACK # of pins : 38 Qualifier : (DIESEL) Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4140 Pin Circuit Description 123456789-10 11 F1 20PK/WT FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) 12 F1 20PK/WT FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) 13 14 15 16 17 18 - 19 T160 20DG/WT SENSOR GROUND 20 T5 20DG/YL AUTOSTICK (ERS)-TOW/HAUL SIGNAL 21 22 23 24 25 26 - 27 F856 20YL/PK 5 VOLT SUPPLY 28 29 A918 20RD FUSED B(+) 30 T751 20YL IGNITION START 31 32 33 34 D65 20WT/LG CAN C BUS (+) 35 D64 20WT/LB CAN C BUS (-) 36 38 Component Location - 29 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4141 Component Location - 6 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4142 Connector: Name : MODULE-POWERTRAIN CONTROL C1 Color : BLACK/BLACK # of pins : 38 Qualifier : (GAS) Pin Circuit Description 1 K98 18DB/YL COIL CONTROL NO. 8 2-3 K97 18DB/YL COIL CONTROL NO. 7 3 K97 18BR COIL CONTROL NO. 7 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4143 4 K28 18BR/LB INJECTOR CONTROL NO. 8 5 K26 18BR/YL INJECTOR CONTROL NO. 7 6-7-8-9 Z130 16BK/BR GROUND 10 A918 16RD FUSED B(+) 11 F202 20PK/GY FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) 12 F1 20PK/WT FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (OFF-RUN-START) 13 - 14 - 15 - 16 - 17 - 18 Z131 16BK/DG GROUND 19 Z951 16BK/YL GROUND 20 G6 16VT/GY OIL PRESSURE SIGNAL 21 - 22 - 23 - 24 A804 18RD/GY GEN SENSE 25 - 26 - 27 F856 20YL/PK 5 VOLT SUPPLY 28 K452 20BR/LB MDS SOL CONTROL NO. 4 29 A918 16RD FUSED B(+) 30 T751 20YL IGNITION START 31 K141 20DB/YL O2 1/2 SIGNAL 32 K902 20BR/DG O2 RETURN (UPSTREAM) 33 K243 20BR O2 2/2 SIGNAL 34 D65 20WT/LG CAN C BUS (+) 35 D64 20WT/LB CAN C BUS (-) 36 - 37 - 38 K342 16BR/WT ASD CONTROL OUTPUT Component Location - 29 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4144 Component Location - 6 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4145 Connector: Name : MODULE-POWERTRAIN CONTROL C2 Color : BLACK/ORANGE # of pins : 38 Qualifier : (GAS) Pin Circuit Description 1 K10 18DB/OR COIL CONTROL NO. 6 2 K16 18DB/YL COIL CONTROL NO. 5 3 K15 18DB/GY COIL CONTROL NO. 4 4 K58 18BR/VT INJECTOR CONTROL NO. 6 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4146 5 K38 18BR/OR INJECTOR CONTROL NO. 5 6 K447 20TN/YL ETC MOTOR (+) 7 K18 18DB/OR COIL CONTROL NO. 3 8 K35 20DB/VT EGR SOL CONTROL 9 K17 18DB/TN COIL CONTROL NO. 2 10 K19 18DB/DG COIL CONTROL NO. 1 11 K14 18BR/TN INJECTOR CONTROL NO. 4 12 K13 18BR/LB INJECTOR CONTROL NO. 3 13 K12 18BR/DB INJECTOR CONTROL NO. 2 14 K11 18BR/YL INJECTOR CONTROL NO. 1 15 K922 20BR/DB TP SENSOR RETURN 16 K453 20BR/DG MDS SOL CONTROL NO. 6 17 K199 20BR/VT O2 2/1 HEATER CONTROL 18 K99 20BR/LG O2 1/1 HEATER CONTROL SUPPLY 19 K20 18BR/GY GEN FIELD CONTROL 20 K2 20VT/OR ECT SIGNAL 21 K22 20BR/OR TP NO. 1 SIGNAL 22 K34 20DB/LG EGR SIGNAL 23 K1 20VT/BR MAP SIGNAL 24 K942 20BR/LG KNOCK SENSOR NO. 1 RETURN 25 K42 20DB/YL KNOCK SENSOR NO. 1 SIGNAL 26 - 27 K900 20DB/DG SENSOR GROUND 28 K122 20BR/DG TP NO. 2 SIGNAL 29 F855 20PK/YL 5 VOLT SUPPLY 30 K21 20DB/LG IAT SIGNAL 31 K41 20DB/LB O2 1/1 SIGNAL 32 K904 20DB/DG O2 RETURN (DOWNSTREAM) 33 K43 20DB/LG O2 2/1 SIGNAL 34 K44 20DB/GY CMP SIGNAL 35 K24 20BR/LB CKP SIGNAL 36 K242 20BR/WT KNOCK SENSOR NO. 2 SIGNAL 37 K924 20WT/BR KNOCK SENSOR NO. 2 RETURN 38 K448 20TN/OR ETC MOTOR (-) Component Location - 29 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4147 Component Location - 6 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4148 Connector: Name : MODULE-POWERTRAIN CONTROL C3 Color : BLACK/NATURAL # of pins : 38 Qualifier : (GAS) Pin Circuit Description 1-2-3 K51 20BR/WT ASD CONTROL 4-- Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4149 5 V35 20VT/OR S/C VENT SOL CONTROL 5 K454 20BR/OR MDS SOL CONTROL NO. 7 6 K451 20BR/WT MDS SOL CONTROL NO. 1 7 V32 20VT/YL SPEED CONTROL SUPPLY 8-9 K299 20BR/WT O2 1/2 HEATER CONTROL SUPPLY 10 K399 18BR/GY O2 2/2 HEATER CONTROL 11 C13 20LB/OR A/C CLUTCH CONTROL 12 V36 20VT/YL S/C VACUUM SOL CONTROL 13 - 14 V32 20VT/YL BRAKE SWITCH NO. 2 SIGNAL 15 V937 20VT/BR S/C SWITCH RETURN 16 K167 20BR/YL APPS NO. 1 RETURN 17 K400 20BR/VT APPS NO. 2 RETURN 18 V38 20VT/OR S/C SWITCH NO. 2 SIGNAL 19 K342 16BR/WT ASD CONTROL OUTPUT 20 K52 20DB/WT EVAP PURGE SOL CONTROL 21 T41 20YL/DB TRS T41 SIGNAL (P/N) 22 G113 20VT PTO SENSE 22 G113 18PK/YL PTO SENSE 23 B29 20DG/WT BRAKE SWITCH NO. 1 SIGNAL 24 - 25 K23 20BR/WT APPS NO. 1 SIGNAL 26 - 27 T5 20DG/YL AUTOSTICK (ERS)-TOW/HAUL SIGNAL 28 K342 16BR/WT ASD CONTROL OUTPUT 29 K70 20DB/BR EVAP PURGE SOL SIGNAL 30 K66 20DB/WT P/S SWITCH SIGNAL 31 - 32 - 33 G24 20VT/BR OIL TEMPERATURE SIGNAL 34 V37 20VT S/C SWITCH NO. 1 SIGNAL 35 K107 20VT/WT ESM SIGNAL 36 K29 20WT/BR APPS NO. 2 SIGNAL 37 K31 20BR FUEL PUMP CONTROL 38 T752 20DG/OR STARTER SOLENOID CONTROL Component Location - 29 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4150 Component Location - 6 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4151 Connector: Name : MODULE-POWERTRAIN CONTROL C4 Color : BLACK/GREEN # of pins : 38 Qualifier : (DIESEL) Pin Circuit Description 1 T160 20YL/GY SENSOR GROUND 2 T259 20YL/DG 4C CONTROL 3- Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4152 4 T140 20YL/GY MS CONTROL 56 T219 20YL/LG 2C CONTROL 78 T59 20YL/LB UD CONTROL 910 T20 20DG/BK L/R CONTROL 11 T118 20DG LP VFS CONTROL 12 Z133 18BK/LG GROUND 13 Z133 18BK/LG GROUND 14 Z133 18BK/LG GROUND 15 T1 20DG/LB TRS T1 SIGNAL 16 T3 20DG/DB TRS T3 SIGNAL 17 T6 20DG TOW/HAUL OVERDRIVE OFF SWITCH SIGNAL 18 T515 20YL/DB TRANSMISSION CONTROL 19 T16 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT 20 T48 20BR/YL 4C PRESSURE SIGNAL 21 T29 20YL/WT UD PRESSURE SIGNAL 22 T9 20DG/TN OD PRESSURE SIGNAL 23 24 25 26 T4 20DG/LB TRS T2 SIGNAL 27 T41 20YL/DB TRS T41 SIGNAL (P/N) 28 T16 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT 29 T50 20DG/PK L/R PRESSURE SIGNAL 30 T147 20DG/YL 2C PRESSURE SIGNAL 31 T38 20YL/BR LINE PRESSURE SIGNAL 32 T14 20DG/BR OUTPUT SPEED SIGNAL 33 T52 20DG/OR INPUT SPEED SIGNAL 34 T13 20DG/VT SPEED SENSOR GROUND 35 T54 20DG/OR TRANSMISSION TEMPERATURE SIGNAL 36 37 T42 20DG/YL TRS T42 SIGNAL 38 T16 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT Component Location - 29 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4153 Component Location - 6 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4154 Connector: Name : MODULE-POWERTRAIN CONTROL C4 Color : BLACK/GREEN # of pins : 38 Qualifier : (GAS) Pin Circuit Description 1 T60 20YL/GY OD SOLENOID CONTROL 2 T259 20YL/DG 4C CONTROL 2 T59 20YL/LB UD CONTROL 3-- Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4155 4 T140 20YL/GY MS CONTROL 5-6 T219 20YL/LG 2C CONTROL 6 T19 18YL/DB 2/4 SOLENOID CONTROL 7-8 T59 20YL/LB UD CONTROL 9-10 T20 20DG/WT L/R CONTROL 11 T118 20DG LP VFS CONTROL 12 Z908 18BK GROUND 13 Z977 18BK GROUND 14 Z904 18BK GROUND 15 T1 20DG/LB TRS T1 SIGNAL 16 T3 20DG/DB TRS T3 SIGNAL 17 T6 20DG TOW/HAUL OVERDRIVE OFF SWITCH SIGNAL 18 T515 20YL/DB TRANSMISSION CONTROL 19 T16 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT 20 T48 20BR/YL 4C PRESSURE SIGNAL 21 T29 20YL/WT UD PRESSURE SIGNAL 22 T9 20DG/TN OD PRESSURE SIGNAL 23 - 24 - 25 - 26 T4 20DG/LB TRS T2 SIGNAL 27 - 28 T16 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT 29 T50 20DG/PK L/R PRESSURE SIGNAL 30 T147 20DG/YL 2C PRESSURE SIGNAL 30 T47 18YL/DG 2/4 PRESSURE SIGNAL 31 T38 20YL/BR LINE PRESSURE SIGNAL 32 T14 20DG/BR OUTPUT SPEED SIGNAL 33 T52 20DG/OR INPUT SPEED SIGNAL 34 T13 20DG/VT SPEED SENSOR GROUND 35 T54 20DG/OR TRANSMISSION TEMPERATURE SIGNAL 36 - 37 T42 20DG/YL TRS T42 SIGNAL 38 T16 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT Component Location - 29 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4156 Component Location - 6 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4157 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Powertrain Control Module - Description Engine Control Module: Description and Operation Powertrain Control Module - Description Powertrain Control Module (PCM) POWERTRAIN CONTROL MODULE (PCM) The Powertrain Control Module (PCM) is located in the right-rear section of the engine compartment under the cowl. Two different PCM's are used (JTEC and NGC). These can be easily identified. JTEC's use three 32-way connectors, NGC's use four 38-way connectors Modes Of Operation MODES OF OPERATION As input signals to the Powertrain Control Module (PCM) change, the PCM adjusts its response to the output devices. For example, the PCM must calculate different injector pulse width and ignition timing for idle than it does for wide open throttle (WOT). The PCM will operate in two different modes: Open Loop and Closed Loop. During Open Loop modes, the PCM receives input signals and responds only according to preset PCM programming. Input from the oxygen (O2S) sensors is not monitored during Open Loop modes. During Closed Loop modes, the PCM will monitor the oxygen (O2S) sensors input. This input indicates to the PCM whether or not the calculated injector pulse width results in the ideal air-fuel ratio. This ratio is 14.7 parts air-to-1 part fuel. By monitoring the exhaust oxygen content through the O2S sensor, the PCM can fine tune the injector pulse width. This is done to achieve optimum fuel economy combined with low emission engine performance. The fuel injection system has the following modes of operation: - Ignition switch ON - Engine start-up (crank) - Engine warm-up - Idle - Cruise - Acceleration - Deceleration - Wide open throttle (WOT) - Ignition switch OFF The ignition switch On, engine start-up (crank), engine warm-up, acceleration, deceleration and wide open throttle modes are Open Loop modes. The idle and cruise modes, (with the engine at operating temperature) are Closed Loop modes. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Powertrain Control Module - Description > Page 4160 IGNITION SWITCH (KEY-ON) MODE This is an Open Loop mode. When the fuel system is activated by the ignition switch, the following actions occur: - The PCM pre-positions the idle air control (IAC) motor. - The PCM determines atmospheric air pressure from the MAP sensor input to determine basic fuel strategy. - The PCM monitors the engine coolant temperature sensor input. The PCM modifies fuel strategy based on this input. - Intake manifold air temperature sensor input is monitored. - Throttle position sensor (TPS) is monitored. - The auto shutdown (ASD) relay is energized by the PCM for approximately three seconds. - The fuel pump is energized through the fuel pump relay by the PCM. The fuel pump will operate for approximately three seconds unless the engine is operating or the starter motor is engaged. - The O2S sensor heater element is energized via the ASD or O2S heater relay. The O2S sensor input is not used by the PCM to calibrate air-fuel ratio during this mode of operation. ENGINE START-UP MODE This is an Open Loop mode. The following actions occur when the starter motor is engaged. The PCM receives inputs from: - Battery voltage - Engine coolant temperature sensor - Crankshaft position sensor - Intake manifold air temperature sensor - Manifold absolute pressure (MAP) sensor - Throttle position sensor (TPS) - Camshaft position sensor signal The PCM monitors the crankshaft position sensor. If the PCM does not receive a crankshaft position sensor signal within 3 seconds of cranking the engine, it will shut down the fuel injection system. The fuel pump is activated by the PCM through the fuel pump relay. Voltage is applied to the fuel injectors with the ASD relay via the PCM. The PCM will then control the injection sequence and injector pulse width by turning the ground circuit to each individual injector on and off. The PCM determines the proper ignition timing according to input received from the crankshaft position sensor. ENGINE WARM-UP MODE This is an Open Loop mode. During engine warm-up, the PCM receives inputs from: - Battery voltage - Crankshaft position sensor - Engine coolant temperature sensor - Intake manifold air temperature sensor - Manifold absolute pressure (MAP) sensor - Throttle position sensor (TPS) - Camshaft position sensor signal - Park/neutral switch (gear indicator signal-auto. trans. only) - Air conditioning select signal (if equipped) - Air conditioning request signal (if equipped) Based on these inputs the following occurs: - Voltage is applied to the fuel injectors with the ASD relay via the PCM. The PCM will then control the injection sequence and injector pulse width by turning the ground circuit to each individual injector on and off. - The PCM adjusts engine idle speed through the idle air control (IAC) motor and adjusts ignition timing. - The PCM operates the A/C compressor clutch through the A/C compressor clutch relay. This is done if A/C has been selected by the vehicle operator and specified pressures are met at the high and low-pressure A/C switches. - When engine has reached operating temperature, the PCM will begin monitoring O2S sensor input. The system will then leave the warm-up mode and go into closed loop operation. IDLE MODE Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Powertrain Control Module - Description > Page 4161 When the engine is at operating temperature, this is a Closed Loop mode. At idle speed, the PCM receives inputs from: - Air conditioning select signal (if equipped) - Air conditioning request signal (if equipped) - Battery voltage - Crankshaft position sensor - Engine coolant temperature sensor - Intake manifold air temperature sensor - Manifold absolute pressure (MAP) sensor - Throttle position sensor (TPS) - Camshaft position sensor signal - Battery voltage - Park/neutral switch (gear indicator signal-auto. trans. only) - Oxygen sensors Based on these inputs, the following occurs: - Voltage is applied to the fuel injectors with the ASD relay via the PCM. The PCM will then control injection sequence and injector pulse width by turning the ground circuit to each individual injector on and off. - The PCM monitors the O2S sensor input and adjusts air-fuel ratio by varying injector pulse width. It also adjusts engine idle speed through the idle air control (IAC) motor. - The PCM adjusts ignition timing by increasing and decreasing spark advance. - The PCM operates the A/C compressor clutch through the A/C compressor clutch relay. This is done if A/C has been selected by the vehicle operator and specified pressures are met at the high and low-pressure A/C switches. CRUISE MODE When the engine is at operating temperature, this is a Closed Loop mode. At cruising speed, the PCM receives inputs from: - Air conditioning select signal (if equipped) - Air conditioning request signal (if equipped) - Battery voltage - Engine coolant temperature sensor - Crankshaft position sensor - Intake manifold air temperature sensor - Manifold absolute pressure (MAP) sensor - Throttle position sensor (TPS) - Camshaft position sensor signal - Park/neutral switch (gear indicator signal-auto. trans. only) - Oxygen (O2S) sensors Based on these inputs, the following occurs: - Voltage is applied to the fuel injectors with the ASD relay via the PCM. The PCM will then adjust the injector pulse width by turning the ground circuit to each individual injector on and off. - The PCM monitors the O2S sensor input and adjusts air-fuel ratio. It also adjusts engine idle speed through the idle air control (IAC) motor. - The PCM adjusts ignition timing by turning the ground path to the coil(s) on and off. - The PCM operates the A/C compressor clutch through the clutch relay. This happens if A/C has been selected by the vehicle operator and requested by the A/C thermostat. ACCELERATION MODE This is an Open Loop mode. The PCM recognizes an abrupt increase in throttle position or MAP pressure as a demand for increased engine output and vehicle acceleration. The PCM increases injector pulse width in response to increased throttle opening. DECELERATION MODE When the engine is at operating temperature, this is an Open Loop mode. During hard deceleration, the PCM receives the following inputs. - Air conditioning select signal (if equipped) - Air conditioning request signal (if equipped) - Battery voltage - Engine coolant temperature sensor - Crankshaft position sensor - Intake manifold air temperature sensor Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Powertrain Control Module - Description > Page 4162 - Manifold absolute pressure (MAP) sensor - Throttle position sensor (TPS) - Camshaft position sensor signal - Park/neutral switch (gear indicator signal-auto. trans. only) - Vehicle speed If the vehicle is under hard deceleration with the proper rpm and closed throttle conditions, the PCM will ignore the oxygen sensor input signal. The PCM will enter a fuel cut-off strategy in which it will not supply a ground to the injectors. If a hard deceleration does not exist, the PCM will determine the proper injector pulse width and continue injection. Based on the above inputs, the PCM will adjust engine idle speed through the idle air control (IAC) motor. The PCM adjusts ignition timing by turning the ground path to the coil on and off. WIDE OPEN THROTTLE MODE This is an Open Loop mode. During wide open throttle operation, the PCM receives the following inputs. - Battery voltage - Crankshaft position sensor - Engine coolant temperature sensor - Intake manifold air temperature sensor - Manifold absolute pressure (MAP) sensor - Throttle position sensor (TPS) - Camshaft position sensor signal During wide open throttle conditions, the following occurs: - Voltage is applied to the fuel injectors with the ASD relay via the PCM. The PCM will then control the injection sequence and injector pulse width by turning the ground circuit to each individual injector on and off. The PCM ignores the oxygen sensor input signal and provides a predetermined amount of additional fuel. This is done by adjusting injector pulse width. - The PCM adjusts ignition timing by turning the ground path to the coil(s) on and off. IGNITION SWITCH OFF MODE When ignition switch is turned to OFF position, the PCM stops operating the injectors, ignition coil, ASD relay and fuel pump relay. 5 Volt Supplies 5 VOLT SUPPLIES Two different Powertrain Control Module (PCM) five volt supply circuits are used; primary and secondary. Ignition Circuit Sense IGNITION CIRCUIT SENSE This circuit ties the ignition switch to the Powertrain Control Module (PCM). Power Grounds POWER GROUNDS The Powertrain Control Module (PCM) has 2 main grounds. Both of these grounds are referred to as power grounds. All of the high-current, noisy, electrical devices are connected to these grounds as well as all of the sensor returns. The sensor return comes into the sensor return circuit, passes through noise suppression, and is then connected to the power ground. The power ground is used to control ground circuits for the following PCM loads: - Generator field winding - Fuel injectors - Ignition coil(s) - Certain relays/solenoids - Certain sensors Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Powertrain Control Module - Description > Page 4163 Sensor Return SENSOR RETURN The Sensor Return circuits are internal to the Powertrain Control Module (PCM). Sensor Return provides a low-noise ground reference for all engine control system sensors. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Powertrain Control Module - Description > Page 4164 Engine Control Module: Description and Operation Powertrain Control Module - Operation Powertrain Control Module (PCM) POWERTRAIN CONTROL MODULE (PCM) The PCM operates the fuel system. The PCM is a pre-programmed, triple microprocessor digital computer. It regulates ignition timing, air-fuel ratio, emission control devices, charging system, certain transmission features, speed control, air conditioning compressor clutch engagement and idle speed. The PCM can adapt its programming to meet changing operating conditions. The PCM receives input signals from various switches and sensors. Based on these inputs, the PCM regulates various engine and vehicle operations through different system components. These components are referred to as Powertrain Control Module (PCM) Outputs. The sensors and switches that provide inputs to the PCM are considered Powertrain Control Module (PCM) Inputs. The PCM adjusts ignition timing based upon inputs it receives from sensors that react to: engine rpm, manifold absolute pressure, engine coolant temperature, throttle position, transmission gear selection (automatic transmission), vehicle speed, power steering pump pressure, and the brake switch. The PCM adjusts idle speed based on inputs it receives from sensors that react to: throttle position, vehicle speed, transmission gear selection, engine coolant temperature and from inputs it receives from the air conditioning clutch switch and brake switch. Based on inputs that it receives, the PCM adjusts ignition coil dwell. The PCM also adjusts the generator charge rate through control of the generator field and provides speed control operation. NOTE: PCM Inputs: - ABS module (if equipped) - A/C request (if equipped with factory A/C) - A/C select (if equipped with factory A/C) - A/C pressure transducer - Auto shutdown (ASD) sense - Battery temperature sensor - Battery voltage - Brake switch - CAN C BUS (+) circuits - CAN C BUS (-) circuits - Camshaft position sensor signal - Crankshaft position sensor - Data link connection for a scan tool - EATX module (if equipped) - Engine coolant temperature sensor - Fuel level (through J1850 circuitry) - Generator (battery voltage) output - Ignition circuit sense (ignition switch in on/off/crank/run position) - Intake manifold air temperature sensor - Knock sensors (2 on 3.7L engine) - Leak detection pump (switch) sense (if equipped) - Manifold absolute pressure (MAP) sensor - Oil pressure - Oxygen sensors - Park/neutral switch (auto. trans. only) - Power ground - Power steering pressure switch (if equipped) - Sensor return - Signal ground - Speed control multiplexed single wire input - Throttle position sensor - Transfer case switch (4WD range position) - Vehicle speed signal NOTE: PCM Outputs: - A/C clutch relay - Auto shutdown (ASD) relay Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Powertrain Control Module - Description > Page 4165 - CAN C BUS (+/-) circuits for: speedometer, voltmeter, fuel gauge, oil pressure gauge/lamp, engine temp. gauge and speed control warn. lamp - Data link connection for diagnostic scan tool - EGR valve control solenoid (if equipped) - EVAP canister purge solenoid - Five volt sensor supply (primary) - Five volt sensor supply (secondary) - Fuel injectors - Fuel pump relay - Generator field driver (-) - Generator field driver (+) - Idle air control (IAC) motor - Ignition coil(s) - Leak detection pump (if equipped) - Malfunction indicator lamp (Check engine lamp). Driven through J1850 circuits. - Oxygen sensor heater relays - Oxygen sensors (pulse width modulated) - Radiator cooling fan relay (pulse width modulated) - Speed control vacuum solenoid - Speed control vent solenoid - Tachometer (if equipped). Driven through J1850 circuits. - Transmission convertor clutch circuit. Driven through J1850 circuits. 5 Volt Supplies 5 VOLT SUPPLIES Primary 5-volt supply: - supplies the required 5 volt power source to the Crankshaft Position (CKP) sensor. - supplies the required 5 volt power source to the Camshaft Position (CMP) sensor. - supplies a reference voltage for the Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) sensor. - supplies a reference voltage for the Throttle Position Sensor (TPS) sensor. Secondary 5-volt supply: - supplies the required 5 volt power source to the oil pressure sensor. - supplies the required 5 volt power source for the Vehicle Speed Sensor (VSS) (if equipped). - supplies the 5 volt power source to the transmission pressure sensor (certain automatic transmissions). Ignition Circuit Sense IGNITION CIRCUIT SENSE The ignition circuit sense input tells the PCM the ignition switch has energized the ignition circuit. Battery voltage is also supplied to the PCM through the ignition switch when the ignition is in the RUN or START position. This is referred to as the "ignition sense" circuit and is used to "wake up" the PCM. Voltage on the ignition input can be as low as 6 volts and the PCM will still function. Voltage is supplied to this circuit to power the PCM's 8-volt regulator and to allow the PCM to perform fuel, ignition and emissions control functions. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > SKREEM Programming Engine Control Module: Testing and Inspection SKREEM Programming SKREEM PROGRAMMING When a Powertrain Control Module (PCM) for a gasoline engine, or an Engine Control Module (ECM) for a diesel engine and the Sentry Key Remote Entry Module (SKREEM) (also known as the Wireless Control Module/WCM) on vehicles equipped with the Sentry Key Immobilizer System (SKIS) are replaced at the same time, perform the following steps in order: NOTE: If the PCM and the SKREEM are replaced at the same time, program the PCM VIN into the PCM first. 1. If applicable first replace the PCM/ECM with the original WCM still connected to the vehicle. 2. Using the appropriate service information program the new PCM/ECM. (This will ensure the Secret Key Transfer from the original WCM into the new PCM/ECM). 3. Now replace and program the WCM. This will retain the Secret Key from the PCM/ECM back into the new WCM. 4. With the scan tool, select Miscellaneous Functions, WCM/Wireless Control Module. Then select the desired procedure and follow the display on the scan tool. 5. If the vehicle is equipped with Tire Pressure Monitoring System program the Placard Pressure Values into the WCM/SKREEM. 6. Ensure all the customer's keys have been programmed into the new module if necessary. NOTE: If the original keys do not successfully program to the new SKREEM after the proper procedures are followed correctly, programming new keys will be necessary. PROGRAMMING THE SKREEM The SKIS Secret Key is an ID code that is unique to each SKREEM/WCM. This code is programmed and stored in the SKREEM/WCM, the PCM/ECM, and each ignition key transponder chip. When the PCM/ECM or SKREEM/WCM is replaced, it is necessary to program the Secret Key into the new module using a diagnostic scan tool. Follow the programming steps outlined in the diagnostic scan tool for PCM REPLACED , ECM REPLACED , WCM REPLACED , or GATEWAY REPLACED under MISCELLANEOUS FUNCTIONS for the WIRELESS CONTROL MODULE/WCM menu item as appropriate. NOTE: Programming the PCM/ECM or SKREEM is done using a diagnostic scan tool and a PIN to enter secure access mode. If three attempts are made to enter secure access mode using an incorrect PIN, secure access mode will be locked out for one hour. To exit this lockout mode, turn the ignition to the RUN position for one hour then enter the correct PIN. Be certain that all accessories are turned OFF. Also monitor the battery state and connect a battery charger if necessary. NOTE: Before replacing the ECU for a failed driver, control circuit or ground circuit, be sure to check the related component/circuit integrity for failures not detected due to a double fault in the circuit. Most ECM driver/control circuit failures are caused by internal component failures (i.e. relay and solenoids) and shorted circuits (i.e. pull-ups, drivers and switched circuits). These failures are difficult to detect when a double fault has occurred and only one DTC has set. ECM/SKIM/WCM PROGRAMMING When a ECM and the SKIM are replaced at the same time perform the following steps in order: 1. Program the new SKIM 2. Program the new ECM 3. Replace all ignition keys and program them to the new SKIM. ECM/SKIM/WCM PROGRAMMING When an ECM (Bosch) and the SKIM are replaced at the same time perform the following steps in order: 1. Program the new SKIM 2. Program the new ECM (Bosch) 3. Replace all ignition keys and program them to the new SKIM. PROGRAMMING THE SKIM CAUTION: Read all notes and cautions for programming procedures. 1. Connect a battery charger to the vehicle. 2. Connect the StarSCAN(R). CAUTION: If the ECM/PCM and SKREEM/WCM are replaced at the same time, the ECM/PCM MUST be programmed before the Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > SKREEM Programming > Page 4168 SKREEM/WCM. 3. Select "ECU View". 4. Select "WCM Wireless Control Module". 5. Select "Miscellaneous Functions". 6. Select WCM replaced. 7. Enter the PIN when prompted. 8. Verify the correct information. NOTE: If the ECM and the SKIM are replaced at the same time, all vehicle keys will need to be replaced and programmed to the new SKIM. PROGRAMMING IGNITION KEYS TO THE SKREEM Each ignition key transponder also has a unique ID code that is assigned at the time the key is manufactured. When a key is programmed into the SKREEM/WCM, the transponder ID code is learned by the module and the transponder acquires the unique Secret Key ID code from the SKREEM/WCM. To program ignition keys into the SKREEM/WCM, follow the programming steps outlined in the diagnostic scan tool for PROGRAM IGNITION KEYS OR KEY FOBS under MISCELLANEOUS FUNCTIONS for the WIRELESS CONTROL MODULE/WCM menu item. NOTE: If the original keys do not successfully program to the new SKREEM after the proper procedures are followed correctly, programming new keys will be necessary. NOTE: A maximum of eight keys can be learned to each SKREEM. Once a key is learned to a SKREEM, that key has acquired the Secret Key for that SKREEM and cannot be transferred to any other SKREEM or vehicle. If ignition key programming is unsuccessful, the scan tool will display one of the following error messages: - PROGRAMMING NOT ATTEMPTED - The scan tool attempts to read the programmed key status and there are no keys programmed into SKREEM memory. - PROGRAMMING KEY FAILED (POSSIBLE USED KEY FROM WRONG VEHICLE) - SKREEM is unable to program an ignition key transponder due to one of the following: - The ignition key transponder is ineffective. - The ignition key transponder is or has been already programmed to another vehicle. - 8 KEYS ALREADY LEARNED, PROGRAMMING NOT DONE - The SKREEM transponder ID memory is full. LEARNED KEY IN IGNITION - The ID for the ignition key transponder currently in the ignition lock cylinder is already programmed into SKREEM memory. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > SKREEM Programming > Page 4169 Engine Control Module: Testing and Inspection PCM/ECM Reprogramming PCM/ECM REPROGRAMMING - GAS MODULE REPROGRAMING Replacement PCM's will require programming utilizing the StarSCAN(R) or equivalent. The PCM will not operate the engine until it is programmed. A Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) will be set "not programmed". CAUTION: Extreme care must be taken when programming a calibration into a generic PCM. Do not randomly select a calibration. Once a calibration is selected and programmed, the controller cannot be reprogrammed to a different calibration. The module can only be reprogrammed to a more recent version of that calibration. SPECIAL TOOLS/EQUIPMENT OR EQUIVALENT REQUIRED: **REPAIR PROCEDURE - USING THE INTERNET TO RETRIEVE THE FLASH FILE: NOTE: The StarSCAN(R) or equivalent diagnostic scan tool fully supports Internet connectivity. However, in order to take advantage of this feature you must first configure the StarSCAN(R) or equivalent for your dealership's network. For instruction on setting up your StarSCAN(R) or equivalent for the dealer's network; refer to the StarSCAN(R) or equivalent Quick Start Networking Guide available on DealerCONNECT > Service > StarSCAN(R) or equivalent and StarMOBILE Tools >Online Documentation. NOTE: If this flash process is interrupted/aborted, the flash should be restarted. 1. Open the hood, install a battery charger and verify that the charging rate provides approximately 13.5 volts. Set the battery charger timer to maintain the charging voltage for the duration of the flash process. 2. Connect the CH9410 StarSCAN(R) or equivalent ethernet cable to the StarSCAN(R) or equivalent and the dealer's network drop. 3. Connect the CH9404 StarSCAN(R) or equivalent vehicle cable to the StarSCAN(R) or equivalent and the vehicle. 4. Power ON the StarSCAN(R) or equivalent. 5. Retrieve the old ECU part number. Using the StarSCAN(R) or equivalent at the "Home" screen: a. Select "ECU View" b. Touch the screen to highlight the PCM in the list of modules. c. Select "More Options" d. Select "ECU Flash" e. Record the part number at the top of the "Flash PCM" screen for later reference. 6. Replace the PCM with the appropriate Generic PCM. 7. Program the PCM as follows: a. Using the StarSCAN(R) or equivalent at the "Home" screen, Select "ECU View" b. Touch the screen to highlight the PCM in the list of modules. c. Select "More Options" d. Select "ECU Flash" e. Select "Browse for New File". Follow the on screen instructions. f. Highlight the appropriate calibration based on the part number recorded in Step 5. g. Select "Download to Scantool". h. Select "Close" after the download is complete, then select "Back". i. Highlight the listed calibration. j. Select "Update Controller". Follow on screen instructions. k. When the update is complete, select "OK". l. Verify the part number at the top of the "Flash PCM" screen has updated to the new part number. 8. Is this a GPEC Module? a. Yes >> go to STEP 9. b. No >> go to STEP 12. 9. Do not start the engine prior to completing the following steps (a. and b.) Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > SKREEM Programming > Page 4170 a. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position for no less than 15 seconds. b. Turn the ignition to the RUN position (DO NOT CRANK THE ENGINE) for no less than 20 seconds. 10. Is this vehicle equipped with a CVT? a. Yes >> go to STEP 11. b. No >> go to STEP 17. 11. The TCM must be reprogrammed as follows: a. Using the StarSCAN(R) or equivalent at the "Home" screen, Select "ECU View" b. Touch the screen to highlight the TCM in the list of modules. c. Select "More Options" d. Select "ECU Flash" e. Record the part number at the top of the "Flash TCM" screen for later reference. f. Select "Browse for New File". Follow the on screen instructions. NOTE: If the part number recorded in step "11e" is the same as the new p/n shown on the "Flash File List" screen no further action is required. Cancel the TCM reprogram procedure. Continue to step STEP 17. g. Highlight the appropriate calibration. h. Select "Download to Scantool". i. Select "Close" after the download is complete, then select "Back". j. Highlight the listed calibration. k. Select "Update Controller". Follow on screen instructions. l. When the update is complete, select "OK". m. Verify the part number at the top of the "Flash TCM" screen has updated to the new part number. n. Continue to step STEP 15 12. Is "WCM - Wireless Control Module" displayed in the "ECU Overview" screen list of modules? a. Yes >> go to STEP 13. b. No >> go to STEP 14. 13. Program the PCM to the Wireless Control Module (WCM). a. Highlight the WCM. b. Select "Misc. Function". c. Highlight "PCM Replaced". d. Select "Start" e. Follow the on screen instructions. Select "Next" after each step. Select "Finish" after completing the last step. f. When complete proceed to STEP 15. 14. Program the VIN into the PCM. a. Scroll through the list of controllers and highlight the PCM. b. Select "Misc. Function". c. Highlight "Check PCM VIN". d. Select "Start" e. Follow the on screen instructions. Select "Next" after each step. When the window appears with 17 boxes, select "Show Keyboard". Place the cursor to the right of the last box and then backspace to delete the boxes from the window. Enter the VIN. Select "Finish" after completing the last step. f. Unplug the scan tool from the Data Link Connector. g. At the "Vehicle Disconnected" screen, press "OK". h. Connect the scan tool to the Data Link Connector and verify that the VIN is visible at the top of the "Home" screen. 15. Is the vehicle equipped ETC? a. Yes >> go to STEP 17. b. No >> go to STEP 16. 16. Using the StarSCAN(R) or equivalent at the "Home" screen: a. Select ECU View b. Scroll through the list of controllers and highlight the PCM. c. Select Misc. Function. d. Highlight "Learn ETC". e. Select "Start" f. Follow the on screen instructions. Select Next after each step. Select Finish after completing the last step. NOTE: Due to the PCM programming procedure, a DTC may be set in other modules (TCM, BCM, MIC, SKREEM, etc.) within the vehicle, if so equipped. Some DTC's may cause the MIL to illuminate. From the Home screen select System View. Then select All DTCs. Press Clear All Stored DTCs if there are any DTCs shown on the list. NOTE: The following step is required by law when reprogramming a PCM and/or TCM. 17. Type the necessary information on the Authorized Modification Label p/n 04275086AB and attach near the VECI label. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > SKREEM Programming > Page 4171 REPAIR PROCEDURE USING SOFTWARE UPDATE CD TO RETRIEVE THE FLASH FILE: NOTE: If this flash process is interrupted/aborted, the flash should be restarted. NOTE: For detailed information on the operation of the StarSCAN(R) or equivalent, refer to the Quick Reference documentation provided in the StarSCAN(R) or equivalent documentation kit. Look under Training Aids and also under Download Center > Frequently Asked Questions for more help. 1. Open the hood, install a battery charger and verify that the charging rate provides approximately 13.5 volts. Set the battery charger timer to maintain the charging voltage for the duration of the flash process. 2. Connect the CH9404 StarSCAN(R) or equivalent vehicle cable to the StarSCAN(R) or equivalent and the vehicle. 3. Power ON the StarSCAN(R) or equivalent. 4. Retrieve the old ECU part number. Using the StarSCAN(R) or equivalent at the "Home" screen: a. Select "ECU View" b. Touch the screen to highlight the PCM in the list of modules. c. Select "More Options" d. Select "ECU Flash" e. Record the part number at the top of the "Flash PCM" screen for later reference. 5. Replace the PCM with the appropriate Generic PCM. 6. Insert the StarSCAN(R) or equivalent Software Update CD into the TechCONNECT or equivalent PC. The StarSCAN(R) or equivalent Software Update CD will start automatically. Select "Download Flash Updates". 7. At the "Select a method for looking up controller flash updates. " screen: a. Select "Enter part number". Enter the "Part Number" recorded in STEP 4 when prompted to do so. b. Using the mouse highlight the appropriate "Calibration". Select "Next". c. Follow the on screen instructions. d. When completed, proceed to STEP 8. 8. With the StarSCAN(R) or equivalent powered OFF, connect the USB Key and Gender Changer to the StarSCAN(R) or equivalent USB port. 9. Connect the StarSCAN(R) or equivalent to the vehicle (if not already connected). 10. Power ON the StarSCAN(R) or equivalent. 11. Download the flash file from the USB key to the StarSCAN(R) or equivalent. Using the StarSCAN(R) or equivalent at the "Home" screen: a. Select "Flash Download", then select "Retrieve files from the USB storage device" b. Highlight the appropriate calibration. Select "Download to Scan Tool" c. When the download is complete, select "Close" and "Back". 12. Reprogram the ECU. Using the StarSCAN(R) or equivalent at the "Home" screen: a. Select "ECU View". b. Select More Options". Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > SKREEM Programming > Page 4172 c. Select "ECU Flash". d. Highlight the appropriate calibration. e. Select "Update Controller". Follow the on screen instructions. f. When the update is complete, select "OK". g. Verify the part number at the top of the "Flash PCM" screen has updated to the new part number. 13. Is "WCM - Wireless Control Module" displayed in the "ECU Overview" screen list of modules? a. Yes >> go to STEP 14. b. No >> go to STEP 15. 14. Program the PCM to the Wireless Control Module (WCM). Using the StarSCAN(R) or equivalent at the "Home" screen: a. Select "ECU View" b. Scroll through the list of controllers and highlight the WCM. c. Select "Misc. Function". d. Highlight "PCM Replaced". e. Select "Start" f. Follow the on screen instructions. Select "Next" after each step. Select "Finish" after completing the last step. g. When complete proceed to STEP 16. 15. Program the VIN into the PCM. a. Scroll through the list of controllers and highlight the PCM. b. Select "Misc. Function". c. Highlight "Check PCM VIN". d. Select "Start" e. Follow the on screen instructions. Select "Next" after each step. When the window appears with 17 boxes, select "Show Keyboard". Place the cursor to the right of the last box and then backspace to delete the boxes from the window. Enter the VIN. Select "Finish" after completing the last step. f. Unplug the scan tool from the Data Link Connector. g. At the "Vehicle Disconnected" screen, press "OK". h. Connect the scan tool to the Data Link Connector and verify that the VIN is visible at the top of the "Home" screen. 16. Is the vehicle equipped with a 3.7L or 4.7L engine? a. Yes >> go to STEP 18. b. No >> go to STEP 17. 17. Using the StarSCAN(R) or equivalent at the "Home" screen: a. Select "ECU View" b. Scroll through the list of controllers and highlight the PCM. c. Select "Misc. Function". d. Highlight "Learn ETC". e. Select "Start" f. Follow the on screen instructions. Select "Next" after each step. Select "Finish" after completing the last step. NOTE: Due to the PCM programming procedure, a DTC may be set in other modules (TCM, BCM, MIC, SKIM, etc.) within the vehicle, if so equipped. Some DTC's may cause the MIL to illuminate. Check all modules using "ECU View" from the Home screen, record the DTC's, and erase these DTC's prior to returning the vehicle to the customer. Erase any DTC's in the PCM only after all other modules have had their DTC's erased. NOTE: The following step is required by law. 18. Type the necessary information on the "Authorized Modification Label" p/n 04275086AB and attach near the VECI label. ** Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > SKREEM Programming > Page 4173 Engine Control Module: Testing and Inspection Powertrain Control Module PCM/ECM REPROGRAMMING - GAS MODULE REPROGRAMING Replacement PCM's will require programming utilizing the StarSCAN(R) or equivalent. The PCM will not operate the engine until it is programmed. A Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) will be set "not programmed". CAUTION: Extreme care must be taken when programming a calibration into a generic PCM. Do not randomly select a calibration. Once a calibration is selected and programmed, the controller cannot be reprogrammed to a different calibration. The module can only be reprogrammed to a more recent version of that calibration. SPECIAL TOOLS/EQUIPMENT OR EQUIVALENT REQUIRED: **REPAIR PROCEDURE - USING THE INTERNET TO RETRIEVE THE FLASH FILE: NOTE: The StarSCAN(R) or equivalent diagnostic scan tool fully supports Internet connectivity. However, in order to take advantage of this feature you must first configure the StarSCAN(R) or equivalent for your dealership's network. For instruction on setting up your StarSCAN(R) or equivalent for the dealer's network; refer to the StarSCAN(R) or equivalent Quick Start Networking Guide available on DealerCONNECT > Service > StarSCAN(R) or equivalent and StarMOBILE Tools > Online Documentation. NOTE: If this flash process is interrupted/aborted, the flash should be restarted. 1. Open the hood, install a battery charger and verify that the charging rate provides approximately 13.5 volts. Set the battery charger timer to maintain the charging voltage for the duration of the flash process. 2. Connect the CH9410 StarSCAN(R) or equivalent ethernet cable to the StarSCAN(R) or equivalent and the dealer's network drop. 3. Connect the CH9404 StarSCAN(R) or equivalent vehicle cable to the StarSCAN(R) or equivalent and the vehicle. 4. Power ON the StarSCAN(R) or equivalent. 5. Retrieve the old ECU part number. Using the StarSCAN(R) or equivalent at the "Home" screen: a. Select "ECU View" b. Touch the screen to highlight the PCM in the list of modules. c. Select "More Options" d. Select "ECU Flash" e. Record the part number at the top of the "Flash PCM" screen for later reference. 6. Replace the PCM with the appropriate Generic PCM. 7. Program the PCM as follows: a. Using the StarSCAN(R) or equivalent at the "Home" screen, Select "ECU View" b. Touch the screen to highlight the PCM in the list of modules. c. Select "More Options" d. Select "ECU Flash" e. Select "Browse for New File". Follow the on screen instructions. f. Highlight the appropriate calibration based on the part number recorded in Step 5. g. Select "Download to Scantool". h. Select "Close" after the download is complete, then select "Back". i. Highlight the listed calibration. j. Select "Update Controller". Follow on screen instructions. k. When the update is complete, select "OK". l. Verify the part number at the top of the "Flash PCM" screen has updated to the new part number. 8. Is this a GPEC Module? a. Yes >> go to STEP 9. b. No >> go to STEP 12. 9. Do not start the engine prior to completing the following steps (a. and b.) Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > SKREEM Programming > Page 4174 a. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position for no less than 15 seconds. b. Turn the ignition to the RUN position (DO NOT CRANK THE ENGINE) for no less than 20 seconds. 10. Is this vehicle equipped with a CVT? a. Yes >> go to STEP 11. b. No >> go to STEP 17. 11. The TCM must be reprogrammed as follows: a. Using the StarSCAN(R) or equivalent at the "Home" screen, Select "ECU View" b. Touch the screen to highlight the TCM in the list of modules. c. Select "More Options" d. Select "ECU Flash" e. Record the part number at the top of the "Flash TCM" screen for later reference. f. Select "Browse for New File". Follow the on screen instructions. NOTE: If the part number recorded in step "11e" is the same as the new p/n shown on the "Flash File List" screen no further action is required. Cancel the TCM reprogram procedure. Continue to step STEP 17. g. Highlight the appropriate calibration. h. Select "Download to Scantool". i. Select "Close" after the download is complete, then select "Back". j. Highlight the listed calibration. k. Select "Update Controller". Follow on screen instructions. l. When the update is complete, select "OK". m. Verify the part number at the top of the "Flash TCM" screen has updated to the new part number. n. Continue to step STEP 15 12. Is "WCM - Wireless Control Module" displayed in the "ECU Overview" screen list of modules? a. Yes >> go to STEP 13. b. No >> go to STEP 14. 13. Program the PCM to the Wireless Control Module (WCM). a. Highlight the WCM. b. Select "Misc. Function". c. Highlight "PCM Replaced". d. Select "Start" e. Follow the on screen instructions. Select "Next" after each step. Select "Finish" after completing the last step. f. When complete proceed to STEP 15. 14. Program the VIN into the PCM. a. Scroll through the list of controllers and highlight the PCM. b. Select "Misc. Function". c. Highlight "Check PCM VIN". d. Select "Start" e. Follow the on screen instructions. Select "Next" after each step. When the window appears with 17 boxes, select "Show Keyboard". Place the cursor to the right of the last box and then backspace to delete the boxes from the window. Enter the VIN. Select "Finish" after completing the last step. f. Unplug the scan tool from the Data Link Connector. g. At the "Vehicle Disconnected" screen, press "OK". h. Connect the scan tool to the Data Link Connector and verify that the VIN is visible at the top of the "Home" screen. 15. Is the vehicle equipped ETC? a. Yes >> go to STEP 17. b. No >> go to STEP 16. 16. Using the StarSCAN(R) or equivalent at the "Home" screen: a. Select ECU View b. Scroll through the list of controllers and highlight the PCM. c. Select Misc. Function. d. Highlight "Learn ETC". e. Select "Start" f. Follow the on screen instructions. Select Next after each step. Select Finish after completing the last step. NOTE: Due to the PCM programming procedure, a DTC may be set in other modules (TCM, BCM, MIC, SKREEM, etc.) within the vehicle, if so equipped. Some DTC's may cause the MIL to illuminate. From the Home screen select System View. Then select All DTCs. Press Clear All Stored DTCs if there are any DTCs shown on the list. NOTE: The following step is required by law when reprogramming a PCM and/or TCM. 17. Type the necessary information on the Authorized Modification Label p/n 04275086AB and attach near the VECI label. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > SKREEM Programming > Page 4175 REPAIR PROCEDURE USING SOFTWARE UPDATE CD TO RETRIEVE THE FLASH FILE: NOTE: If this flash process is interrupted/aborted, the flash should be restarted. NOTE: For detailed information on the operation of the StarSCAN(R) or equivalent, refer to the Quick Reference documentation provided in the StarSCAN(R) or equivalent documentation kit. Look under Training Aids and also under Download Center > Frequently Asked Questions for more help. 1. Open the hood, install a battery charger and verify that the charging rate provides approximately 13.5 volts. Set the battery charger timer to maintain the charging voltage for the duration of the flash process. 2. Connect the CH9404 StarSCAN(R) or equivalent vehicle cable to the StarSCAN(R) or equivalent and the vehicle. 3. Power ON the StarSCAN(R) or equivalent. 4. Retrieve the old ECU part number. Using the StarSCAN(R) or equivalent at the "Home" screen: a. Select "ECU View" b. Touch the screen to highlight the PCM in the list of modules. c. Select "More Options" d. Select "ECU Flash" e. Record the part number at the top of the "Flash PCM" screen for later reference. 5. Replace the PCM with the appropriate Generic PCM. 6. Insert the StarSCAN(R) or equivalent Software Update CD into the TechCONNECT or equivalent PC. The StarSCAN(R) or equivalent Software Update CD will start automatically. Select "Download Flash Updates". 7. At the "Select a method for looking up controller flash updates. " screen: a. Select "Enter part number". Enter the "Part Number" recorded in STEP 4 when prompted to do so. b. Using the mouse highlight the appropriate "Calibration". Select "Next". c. Follow the on screen instructions. d. When completed, proceed to STEP 8. 8. With the StarSCAN(R) or equivalent powered OFF, connect the USB Key and Gender Changer to the StarSCAN(R) or equivalent USB port. 9. Connect the StarSCAN(R) or equivalent to the vehicle (if not already connected). 10. Power ON the StarSCAN(R) or equivalent. 11. Download the flash file from the USB key to the StarSCAN(R) or equivalent. Using the StarSCAN(R) or equivalent at the "Home" screen: a. Select "Flash Download", then select "Retrieve files from the USB storage device" b. Highlight the appropriate calibration. Select "Download to Scan Tool" c. When the download is complete, select "Close" and "Back". 12. Reprogram the ECU. Using the StarSCAN(R) or equivalent at the "Home" screen: a. Select "ECU View". b. Select More Options". c. Select "ECU Flash". Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > SKREEM Programming > Page 4176 d. Highlight the appropriate calibration. e. Select "Update Controller". Follow the on screen instructions. f. When the update is complete, select "OK". g. Verify the part number at the top of the "Flash PCM" screen has updated to the new part number. 13. Is "WCM - Wireless Control Module" displayed in the "ECU Overview" screen list of modules? a. Yes >> go to STEP 14. b. No >> go to STEP 15. 14. Program the PCM to the Wireless Control Module (WCM). Using the StarSCAN(R) or equivalent at the "Home" screen: a. Select "ECU View" b. Scroll through the list of controllers and highlight the WCM. c. Select "Misc. Function". d. Highlight "PCM Replaced". e. Select "Start" f. Follow the on screen instructions. Select "Next" after each step. Select "Finish" after completing the last step. g. When complete proceed to STEP 16. 15. Program the VIN into the PCM. a. Scroll through the list of controllers and highlight the PCM. b. Select "Misc. Function". c. Highlight "Check PCM VIN". d. Select "Start" e. Follow the on screen instructions. Select "Next" after each step. When the window appears with 17 boxes, select "Show Keyboard". Place the cursor to the right of the last box and then backspace to delete the boxes from the window. Enter the VIN. Select "Finish" after completing the last step. f. Unplug the scan tool from the Data Link Connector. g. At the "Vehicle Disconnected" screen, press "OK". h. Connect the scan tool to the Data Link Connector and verify that the VIN is visible at the top of the "Home" screen. 16. Is the vehicle equipped with a 3.7L or 4.7L engine? a. Yes >> go to STEP 18. b. No >> go to STEP 17. 17. Using the StarSCAN(R) or equivalent at the "Home" screen: a. Select "ECU View" b. Scroll through the list of controllers and highlight the PCM. c. Select "Misc. Function". d. Highlight "Learn ETC". e. Select "Start" f. Follow the on screen instructions. Select "Next" after each step. Select "Finish" after completing the last step. NOTE: Due to the PCM programming procedure, a DTC may be set in other modules (TCM, BCM, MIC, SKIM, etc.) within the vehicle, if so equipped. Some DTC's may cause the MIL to illuminate. Check all modules using "ECU View" from the Home screen, record the DTC's, and erase these DTC's prior to returning the vehicle to the customer. Erase any DTC's in the PCM only after all other modules have had their DTC's erased. NOTE: The following step is required by law. 18. Type the necessary information on the "Authorized Modification Label" p/n 04275086AB and attach near the VECI label. ** Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Engine Control Module (ECM) - Diesel Engine Control Module: Service and Repair Engine Control Module (ECM) - Diesel 5.9L Diesel 5.9L DIESEL CUMMINS FUEL SYSTEM COMPONENTS The Engine Control Module (ECM) (16) is bolted to a support bracket near the fuel filter. The support bracket mounts to the block with four capscrews and vibration isolators. A ground wire is fastened to the bracket. The other end of the wire is fastened to the engine block. 1. Record any Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTC's) found in the ECM. To avoid possible voltage spike damage to the ECM, ignition key must be off, and both negative battery cables must be disconnected before unplugging ECM connectors. 2. Disconnect both negative battery cables at both batteries. 3. Remove the 50-way and 60-way connector bolts at the ECM. Note: The connector bolt is a female allen head. As bolt is being removed, very carefully remove connectors from the ECM. 4. Remove five ECM mounting bolts and remove ECM from vehicle. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Engine Control Module (ECM) - Diesel > Page 4179 6.7L Diesel 6.7L DIESEL The Engine Control Module (ECM) (5) is located on the left side of the engine. A support bracket mounts to the block with four capscrews and vibration isolators. A ground wire is fastened to the bracket. The other end of the wire is fastened to the engine block. 1. Record any Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTC's) found in the ECM. To avoid possible voltage spike damage to the ECM, ignition key must be off, and both negative battery cables must be disconnected before unplugging ECM connectors. 2. Disconnect both negative battery cables at both batteries. Access to the ECM is easier by working through the left front wheel opening. 3. Remove left front wheel. 4. Remove plastic left front fender splash shield. 5. Remove electrical connector bolts at ECM. Note: As each bolt is being removed, very carefully remove connectors from the ECM. 6. Remove three ECM mounting bolts (6) and remove ECM from engine. 5.9L Diesel 5.9L DIESEL Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Engine Control Module (ECM) - Diesel > Page 4180 CUMMINS FUEL SYSTEM COMPONENTS Do not apply paint to ECM or a poor ground will result. 1. Position the ECM (16) to the ECM support bracket and install the five mounting bolts. Tighten bolts to 24 Nm (18 ft. lbs.). 2. Check pin connectors in ECM, 50-way and 60-way connectors for corrosion or damage. Repair as necessary. 3. Clean pins in the 50-way and 60-way electrical connectors with a electrical contact cleaner. 4. Install the 50-way and 60-way connectors to ECM. Tighten connector bolts to 3 Nm (27 in. lbs.). 5. Reconnect both negative battery cables. 6. Use a diagnostic scan tool to erase any Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTC's) from ECM. 6.7L Diesel 6.7L DIESEL Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Engine Control Module (ECM) - Diesel > Page 4181 Do not apply paint to ECM or a poor ground will result. 1. Position ECM (5) to the ECM support bracket and install mounting bolts. Tighten bolts to 24 Nm (18 ft. lbs.). 2. Check pins in electrical connectors for corrosion, damage or dirt intrusion. Also check all pins for being bent. Repair as necessary. Damaged, dirty, bent or corroded pins could result in poor conductivity, causing intermittent electrical issues or DTC's. 3. Clean pins in electrical connectors with an electrical contact cleaner. 4. Install connectors to ECM. Tighten connector bolts to 3 Nm (27 in. lbs.). 5. Install splash shield. 6. Install left front wheel. 7. Connect both negative battery cables. 8. Use a diagnostic scan tool to erase any Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTC's) from ECM.FUEL INJECTOR ID CORRECTION CODES: Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Engine Control Module (ECM) - Diesel > Page 4182 Each fuel injector has a six-digit alphanumeric correction code. The correction code is printed on the intake side of the fuel injector (1) and is used to identify injector calibration. When replacing any fuel injectors, this code must be entered into the vehicles Engine Control Module (ECM) using a diagnostic scan tool. In addition, if a new ECM is installed, use a diagnostic scan tool to program all six of the injector codes from the original fuel injectors into the new ECM. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Engine Control Module (ECM) - Diesel > Page 4183 Engine Control Module: Service and Repair Powertrain Control Module - Removal REMOVAL CAUTION: Certain ABS systems rely on having the Powertrain Control Module (PCM) broadcast the Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) over the bus network. To prevent problems of DTCs and other items related to the VIN broadcast, it is recommend that you disconnect the ABS CAB (controller) temporarily when replacing the PCM. Once the PCM is replaced, write the VIN to the PCM using a scan tool. This is done from the engine main menu. Arrow over to the second page to "1. Miscellaneous". Select "Check VIN" from the choices. Make sure it has the correct VIN entered before continuing. When the VIN is complete, turn off the ignition key and reconnect the ABS module connector. This will prevent the setting of DTCs and other items associated with the lack of a VIN detected when you turn the key ON after replacing the PCM. CAUTION: Use the scan tool to reprogram the new PCM with the vehicles original identification number (VIN) and the vehicles original mileage. If this step is not done, a Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) may be set. The PCM (1) is located in the engine compartment attached to the dash panel (3). To avoid possible voltage spike damage to the PCM, ignition key must be off, and negative battery cable must be disconnected before unplugging PCM connectors. 1. Disconnect negative battery cable at battery. 2. Remove cover over electrical connectors. Cover snaps onto PCM. 3. Carefully unplug the three 32-way connectors (four 38-way connectors if equipped with NGC) from PCM (1). 4. Remove three PCM mounting bolts (4) and remove PCM from vehicle. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Engine Control Module (ECM) - Diesel > Page 4184 Engine Control Module: Service and Repair Powertrain Control Module - Installation INSTALLATION CAUTION: Certain ABS systems rely on having the Powertrain Control Module (PCM) broadcast the Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) over the bus network. To prevent problems of DTCs and other items related to the VIN broadcast, it is recommend that you disconnect the ABS CAB (controller) temporarily when replacing the PCM. Once the PCM is replaced, write the VIN to the PCM using a scan tool. This is done from the engine main menu. Arrow over to the second page to "1. Miscellaneous". Select "Check VIN" from the choices. Make sure it has the correct VIN entered before continuing. When the VIN is complete, turn off the ignition key and reconnect the ABS module connector. This will prevent the setting of DTCs and other items associated with the lack of a VIN detected when you turn the key ON after replacing the PCM. CAUTION: Use the scan tool to reprogram the new PCM with the vehicles original identification number (VIN) and the vehicles original mileage. If this step is not done, a Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) may be set. 1. Install PCM (3) and 3 mounting bolts (4) to vehicle. 2. Tighten bolts. Refer to torque specifications. 3. Check pin connectors in the PCM and the three 32-way connectors (four 38-way connectors if equipped with NGC) for corrosion or damage. Also, the pin heights in connectors should all be same. Repair as necessary before installing connectors. 4. Install three 32-way connectors (four 38-way connectors if equipped with NGC). 5. Install cover over electrical connectors. Cover snaps onto PCM. 6. Install negative battery cable. 7. The 5.7L V-8 engine is equipped with a fully electronic accelerator pedal position sensor. If equipped with a 5.7L, also perform the following 3 steps: a. Connect negative battery cable to battery. b. Turn ignition switch ON, but do not crank engine. c. Leave ignition switch ON for a minimum of 10 seconds. This will allow PCM to learn electrical parameters. d. The scan tool may also be used to learn electrical parameters. Go to the Miscellaneous menu, and then select ETC Learn. 8. If the previous step is not performed, a Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) will be set. 9. If necessary, use a scan tool to erase any Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTC's) from PCM. Also use the scan tool to reprogram new PCM with vehicles original Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) and original vehicle mileage. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Locations Fuel Level Sensor: Locations DESCRIPTION The fuel pump module assembly is located on the top of the fuel tank. The complete assembly contains the following components: - A combination fuel filter/fuel pressure regulator - A separate fuel pick-up, or inlet filter - An electric fuel pump - A lockring to retain pump module to tank - A soft gasket between tank flange and module - A fuel gauge sending unit (fuel level sensor) - Fuel line connection The fuel gauge sending unit may be serviced separately. If the electrical fuel pump, primary inlet filter, fuel filter or fuel pressure regulator require service, the fuel pump module must be replaced. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Fuel Pump Fuel Level Sensor: Description and Operation Fuel Pump Description DESCRIPTION The electric fuel pump is located inside of the fuel pump module. A 12 volt, permanent magnet, electric motor powers the fuel pump. The electric fuel pump is not a separate, serviceable component. Operation OPERATION Voltage to operate the electric pump is supplied through the fuel pump relay. Fuel is drawn in through a filter at the bottom of the module and pushed through the electric motor gearset to the pump outlet. Check Valve Operation: The bottom section of the fuel pump module contains a one-way check valve to prevent fuel flow back into the tank and to maintain fuel supply line pressure (engine warm) when pump is not operational. It is also used to keep the fuel supply line full of gasoline when pump is not operational. After the vehicle has cooled down, fuel pressure may drop to 0 psi (cold fluid contracts), but liquid gasoline will remain in fuel supply line between the check valve and fuel injectors.Fuel pressure that has dropped to 0 psi on a cooled down vehicle (engine off) is a normal condition. The electric fuel pump is not a separate, serviceable component. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Fuel Pump > Page 4190 Fuel Level Sensor: Description and Operation Fuel Pump Module Description DESCRIPTION The fuel pump module assembly is located on the top of the fuel tank. The complete assembly contains the following components: - A combination fuel filter/fuel pressure regulator - A separate fuel pick-up, or inlet filter - An electric fuel pump - A lockring to retain pump module to tank - A soft gasket between tank flange and module - A fuel gauge sending unit (fuel level sensor) - Fuel line connection The fuel gauge sending unit may be serviced separately. If the electrical fuel pump, primary inlet filter, fuel filter or fuel pressure regulator require service, the fuel pump module must be replaced. Operation OPERATION Refer to Fuel Pump, Inlet Filter, Fuel Filter / Fuel Pressure Regulator and Fuel Gauge Sending Unit. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Fuel Level Sensor: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL WARNING: The fuel system may be under a constant pressure (even with the engine off). Before servicing the fuel pump module, the fuel system pressure must be released. 1. Drain and remove fuel tank. 2. Remove plastic fuel pump module cover (1) by pushing pegs (2) outward. 3. Note rotational position of module before attempting removal. An indexing arrow is located on top of module for this purpose. 4. Position Special Tool 9340 (3) into notches on outside edge of lockring (5). 5. Install 1/2 inch drive breaker bar (1) to tool 9340 (3). 6. Rotate breaker bar counter-clockwise to remove lockring (5). 7. Remove lockring. The module will spring up slightly when lockring is removed. 8. Remove module from fuel tank. Be careful not to bend float arm while removing. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 4193 Fuel Level Sensor: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION 1. Using a new seal (gasket), position fuel pump module into opening in fuel tank. 2. Position lockring (5) over top of fuel pump module. 3. Rotate module until embossed alignment arrow points to center alignment mark. This step must be performed to prevent float from contacting side of fuel tank. Also be sure fuel fitting on top of pump module is pointed to drivers side of vehicle. 4. Install Special Tool 9340 (3) to lockring. 5. Install 1/2 inch drive breaker (1) into Special Tool 9340 (3). 6. Tighten lockring (clockwise) until all seven notches have engaged. 7. Snap plastic fuel pump module cover (1) to pump module. 8. Install fuel tank. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Idle Speed/Throttle Actuator Electronic > Component Information > Diagrams Idle Speed/Throttle Actuator - Electronic: Diagrams Component ID: 221 Component : MOTOR-IAC Connector: Name : MOTOR-IAC Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (4.7L) Pin Circuit Description 1 K961 20BR/VT IAC SIGNAL 2 K61 20VT/GY IAC CONTROL Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Information Bus: Diagram Information and Instructions Warnings WARNINGS - GENERAL WARNINGS provide information to prevent personal injury and vehicle damage. Below is a list of general warnings that should be followed any time a vehicle is being serviced. WARNING: Always wear safety glasses for eye protection. WARNING: Use safety stands anytime a procedure requires being under a vehicle. WARNING: Be sure that the ignition switch always is in the off position, unless the procedure requires it to be on. WARNING: Set the parking brake when working on any vehicle. An automatic transmission should be in park. A manual transmission should be in neutral. WARNING: Operate the engine only in a well-ventilated area. WARNING: Keep away from moving parts when the engine is running, especially the fan and belts. WARNING: To prevent serious burns, avoid contact with hot parts such as the radiator, exhaust manifold(s), tail pipe, catalytic converter and muffler. WARNING: Do not allow flame or sparks near the battery. Gases are always present in and around the battery. WARNING: Always remove rings, watches, loose hanging jewelry and avoid loose clothing. How to Use Wiring Diagrams DESCRIPTION - HOW TO USE WIRING DIAGRAMS DaimlerChrysler Corporation wiring diagrams are designed to provide information regarding the vehicles wiring content. In order to effectively use the wiring diagrams to diagnose and repair DaimlerChrysler Corporation vehicles, it is important to understand all of their features and characteristics. Diagrams are arranged such that the power (B+) side of the circuit is placed near the top of the page, and the ground (B-) side of the circuit is placed near the bottom of the page. All switches, components, and modules are shown in the at rest position with the doors closed and the key removed from the ignition. Components are shown two ways. A solid line around a component indicates that the component is complete. A dashed line around the component indicates that the component is being shown is not complete. Incomplete components have a reference number to indicate the page where the component is shown complete. It is important to realize that no attempt is made on the diagrams to represent components and wiring as they appear on the vehicle. For example, a short piece of wire is treated the same as a long one. In addition, switches and other components are shown as simply as possible, with regard to function only. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4201 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4202 SYMBOLS International symbols are used throughout the wiring diagrams. These symbols are consistent with those being used around the world. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4203 TERMINOLOGY This is a list of terms and definitions used in the wiring diagrams. LHD - Left Hand Drive Vehicles RHD - Right Hand Drive Vehicles ATX - Automatic Transmissions-Front Wheel Drive MTX Manual Transmissions-Front Wheel Drive Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4204 AT - Automatic Transmissions-Rear Wheel Drive MT - Manual Transmissions-Rear Wheel Drive SOHC - Single Over Head Cam Engine DOHC - Double Over Head Cam Engine Export - Vehicles Built For Sale In Markets Other Than North America Except Export - Vehicles Built For Sale In North America Circuit Functions DESCRIPTION - CIRCUIT FUNCTIONS All circuits in the diagrams use an alpha/numeric code to identify the wire and it's function. To identify which circuit code applies to a system, refer to the Circuit Identification Code Chart. This chart shows the main circuits only and does not show the secondary codes that may apply to some models. Circuit Information DESCRIPTION - CIRCUIT INFORMATION Each wire shown in the diagrams contains a code which identifies the main circuit, a specific part of the main circuit, gage of wire, and color. An example would be A 2 18 LB/YL. This is a Battery Feed circuit, level two, eighteen gauge, light blue with a yellow tracer. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4205 Connector, Ground and Splice Information DESCRIPTION - CONNECTOR, GROUND AND SPLICE INFORMATION CAUTION: Not all connectors are serviced. Some connectors are serviced only with a harness. A typical example might be the Supplemental Restraint System connectors. Always check parts availability before attempting a repair. IDENTIFICATION In-line connectors are identified by a number, as follows: - In-line connectors located in the engine compartment are C100 series numbers. - In-line connectors located in the instrument panel area are C200 series numbers. - In-line connectors located in the body are C300 series numbers. - Jumper harness connectors are C400 series numbers. - Grounds and ground connectors are identified with a "G" and follow the same series numbering as the in-line connectors. - Splices are identified with an "S" and follow the same series numbering as the in-line connectors. In addition, S001-S099 numbers are located in the engine compartment. - Component connectors are identified by the component name instead of a number. Multiple connectors on a component use a C1, C2, etc. identifier. LOCATIONS Vehicle/Locations contains the master connector/ground/splice location index charts with hyperlinks to the applicable location illustrations. The illustrations contain the connector name (or number)/ground number/splice number and component identification. The abbreviation T/O is used in the component location section to indicate a point in which the wiring harness branches out to a component. The abbreviation N/S means Not Shown in the illustrations Section Identification and Information DESCRIPTION - SECTION IDENTIFICATION AND INFORMATION The wiring diagrams are grouped into individual sections. If a component is most likely found in a particular group, it will be shown complete (all wires, Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4206 connectors, and pins) within that group. For example, the Auto Shutdown Relay is most likely to be found in Powertrain Management, so it is shown there complete. It can, however, be shown partially in another group if it contains some associated wiring. Splice diagrams show the entire splice and provide references to other sections the splices serves. Splice Information only contains splice diagrams that are not shown in their entirety somewhere else in the wiring diagrams. Connector Pin-Outs shows each connector and the circuits involved with that connector. The connectors are identified using the name/number on the diagram pages. Removal REMOVAL 1. Disconnect battery. 2. Release Connector Lock (2). 3. Disconnect the connector (3) being repaired from its mating half/component. 4. Remove the dress cover (if applicable) (1). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4207 5. Release the Secondary Terminal Lock, if required (1). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4208 6. Position the connector locking finger away from the terminal using the proper special tool. Pull on the wire to remove the terminal from the connector. Installation Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4209 INSTALLATION 1. Insert the removed terminal in the same cavity on the repair connector. 2. Repeat steps for each terminal in the connector, being sure that all wires are inserted into the proper cavities. For additional connector pin-out identification, refer to the wiring diagrams. 3. When the connector is re-assembled, the secondary terminal lock must be placed in the locked position to prevent terminal push out. 4. Replace dress cover (if applicable). 5. Connect connector to its mating half/component. 6. Connect battery and test all affected systems. Removal REMOVAL 1. Disconnect the battery. 2. Locate the diode in the harness, and remove the protective covering. 3. Remove the diode from the harness, pay attention to the current flow direction (1) (2) (3). Installation INSTALLATION 1. Remove the insulation from the wires in the harness. Only remove enough insulation to solder in the new diode. 2. Install the new diode in the harness, making sure current flow is correct. If necessary, refer to the appropriate wiring diagram for current flow. 3. Solder the connection together using rosin core type solder only. Do not use acid core solder. 4. Tape the diode to the harness using electrical tape. Make sure the diode is completely sealed from the elements. 5. Re-connect the battery and test affected systems. Removal REMOVAL 1. Follow steps for removing terminals described in the connector removal section. 2. Cut the wire 6 inches from the back of the connector. Installation INSTALLATION 1. Select a wire from the terminal repair kit that best matches the color and gage of the wire being repaired. 2. Cut the repair wire to the proper length and remove one-half (1/2) inch of insulation. 3. Splice the repair wire to the wire harness (see wire splicing procedure). See: Service Procedures/Wire Splicing 4. Insert the repaired wire into the connector. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4210 5. Install the connector locking wedge, if required, and reconnect the connector to its mating half/component. 6. Re-tape the wire harness starting at 1-1/2 inches behind the connector and 2 inches past the repair. 7. Connect battery and test all affected systems. Wire Splicing STANDARD PROCEDURE - WIRE SPLICING When splicing a wire, it is important that the correct gage be used as shown in the wiring diagrams. 1. Remove one-half (1/2) inch of insulation from each wire that needs to be spliced. 2. Place a piece of adhesive lined heat shrink tubing on one side of the wire. Make sure the tubing will be long enough to cover and seal the entire repair area. 3. Place the strands of wire overlapping each other inside of the splice clip (1). 4. Using crimping tool (1), Mopar p/n 05019912AA, crimp the splice clip and wires together. 5. Solder (3) the connection (2) together using rosin core type solder (1) only. CAUTION: DO NOT USE ACID CORE SOLDER. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4211 6. Center the heat shrink tubing (2) over the joint and heat using a heat gun. Heat the joint until the tubing is tightly sealed and sealant (1) comes out of both ends of the tubing. Special Tools WIRING/TERMINAL PROBING TOOL PACKAGE 6807 TERMINAL PICK TOOL SET 6680 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4212 TERMINAL REMOVING TOOLS 6932 AND 8638 TERMINAL REMOVING TOOL 6934 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4213 Information Bus: Diagnostic Aids Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) Sensitive Devices STANDARD PROCEDURE - ELECTROSTATIC DISCHARGE (ESD) SENSITIVE DEVICES All ESD sensitive components are solid state and a symbol is used to indicate this. When handling any component with this symbol, comply with the following procedures to reduce the possibility of electrostatic charge build up on the body and inadvertent discharge into the component. If it is not known whether the part is ESD sensitive, assume that it is. 1. Always touch a known good ground before handling the part. This should be repeated while handling the part and more frequently after sliding across a seat, sitting down from a standing position, or walking a distance. 2. Avoid touching electrical terminals of the part, unless instructed to do so by a written procedure. 3. When using a voltmeter, be sure to connect the ground lead first. 4. Do not remove the part from it's protective packing until it is time to install the part. 5. Before removing the part from it's package, ground the package to a known good ground on the vehicle. Testing Of Voltage Potential STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING OF VOLTAGE POTENTIAL 1. Connect the ground lead of a voltmeter to a known good ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the voltmeter to the selected test point. The vehicle ignition may need to be turned ON to check voltage. Refer to the appropriate test procedure. Testing For Continuity Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4214 STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING FOR CONTINUITY 1. Remove the fuse (1) for the circuit being checked or, disconnect the battery. 2. Connect one lead of the ohmmeter to one side of the circuit being tested 3. Connect the other lead to the other end of the circuit being tested. Low or no resistance means good continuity. Testing For A Short To Ground STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING FOR A SHORT TO GROUND 1. Remove the fuse and disconnect all items involved with the fuse. 2. Connect a test light or a voltmeter across the terminals of the fuse. 3. Starting at the fuse block, wiggle the wiring harness about six to eight inches apart and watch the voltmeter/test lamp. 4. If the voltmeter registers voltage or the test lamp glows, there is a short to ground in that general area of the wiring harness. Testing For A Short To Ground On Fuses Powering Several Loads STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING FOR A SHORT TO GROUND ON FUSES POWERING SEVERAL LOADS 1. Refer to the wiring diagrams and disconnect or isolate all items on the suspected fused circuits. 2. Replace the blown fuse. 3. Supply power to the fuse by turning ON the ignition switch or re-connecting the battery. 4. Start connecting or energizing the items in the fuse circuit one at a time. When the fuse blows the circuit with the short to ground has been isolated. Testing For A Voltage Drop STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING FOR A VOLTAGE DROP Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4215 1. Connect the positive lead of the voltmeter to the side of the circuit closest to the battery. 2. Connect the other lead of the voltmeter to the other side of the switch, component or circuit. 3. Operate the item. 4. The voltmeter will show the difference in voltage between the two points. Troubleshooting Wiring Problems DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING - WIRING HARNESS TROUBLESHOOTING TOOLS When diagnosing a problem in an electrical circuit there are several common tools necessary. These tools are listed and explained below. - Jumper Wire - This is a test wire used to connect two points of a circuit. It can be used to bypass an open in a circuit. WARNING: Never use a jumper wire across a load, such as a motor, connected between a battery feed and ground. - Voltmeter - Used to check for voltage on a circuit. Always connect the black lead to a known good ground and the red lead to the positive side of the circuit. CAUTION: Most of the electrical components used in today's vehicles are Solid State. When checking voltages in these circuits, use a meter with a 10 - megohm or greater impedance rating. - Ohmmeter - Used to check the resistance between two points of a circuit. Low or no resistance in a circuit means good continuity. CAUTION: Most of the electrical components used in today's vehicles are Solid State. When checking resistance in these circuits use a meter with a 10 - megohm or greater impedance rating. In addition, make sure the power is disconnected from the circuit. Circuits that are powered up by the vehicle's electrical system can cause damage to the equipment and provide false readings. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4216 - Probing Tools - These tools are used for probing terminals in connectors. Select the proper size tool from Special Tool Package 6807, and insert the probing end (2) into the terminal being tested. Use the other end of the tool (1) to insert the meter probe. INTERMITTENT AND POOR CONNECTIONS Most intermittent electrical problems are caused by faulty electrical connections or wiring. It is also possible for a sticking component or relay to cause a problem. Before condemning a component or wiring assembly, check the following items. - Connectors are fully seated - Spread terminals, or terminal push out - Terminals in the wiring assembly are fully seated into the connector/component and locked into position - Dirt or corrosion on the terminals. Any amount of corrosion or dirt could cause an intermittent problem - Damaged connector/component casing exposing the item to dirt or moisture - Wire insulation that has rubbed through causing a short to ground - Some or all of the wiring strands broken inside of the insulation - Wiring broken inside of the insulation TROUBLESHOOTING WIRING PROBLEMS When troubleshooting wiring problems there are six steps which can aid in the procedure. The steps are listed and explained below. Always check for non-factory items added to the vehicle before doing any diagnosis. If the vehicle is equipped with these items, disconnect them to verify these add-on items are not the cause of the problem. 1. Verify the problem. 2. Verify any related symptoms. Do this by performing operational checks on components that are in the same circuit. Refer to the wiring diagrams. 3. Analyze the symptoms. Use the wiring diagrams to determine what the circuit is doing, where the problem most likely is occurring and where the diagnosis will continue. 4. Isolate the problem area. 5. Repair the problem area. 6. Verify the proper operation. For this step, check for proper operation of all items on the repaired circuit. Refer to the wiring diagrams. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4217 Information Bus: Electrical Diagrams PLEASE NOTE: Some diagrams may appear to be missing because of gaps in the number sequences. These "gaps" are actually for diagrams that do not apply to the vehicle model selected. 8w-18-02 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4218 8w-18-03 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4219 8w-18-04 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4220 8w-18-05 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4221 8w-18-06 Other Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by number (i.e. 8W-70-2, etc.) within these diagrams can be found at the vehicle level under Diagrams by Number. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Number Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Knock 1 Knock Sensor: Locations Sensor-Knock 1 Component ID: 423 Component : SENSOR-KNOCK 1 Connector: Name : SENSOR-KNOCK 1 Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (3.7L/5.7L) Pin Circuit Description 1 K42 20DB/YL KNOCK SENSOR NO. 1 SIGNAL 2 K942 20BR/LG KNOCK SENSOR NO. 1 RETURN Component Location - 9 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Knock 1 > Page 4226 Component Location - 22 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Knock 1 > Page 4227 Component Location - 19 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Knock 1 > Page 4228 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Knock 1 > Page 4229 Knock Sensor: Locations Sensor-Knock 2 Component ID: 424 Component : SENSOR-KNOCK 2 Connector: Name : SENSOR-KNOCK 2 Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (3.7L/5.7L) Pin Circuit Description 1 K242 20BR/WT KNOCK SENSOR NO. 2 SIGNAL 2 K924 20WT/BR KNOCK SENSOR NO. 2 RETURN Component Location - 11 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Knock 1 > Page 4230 Component Location - 22 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Knock 1 > Page 4231 Component Location - 19 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Knock 1 > Page 4232 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Knock 1 Knock Sensor: Diagrams Sensor-Knock 1 Component ID: 423 Component : SENSOR-KNOCK 1 Connector: Name : SENSOR-KNOCK 1 Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (3.7L/5.7L) Pin Circuit Description 1 K42 20DB/YL KNOCK SENSOR NO. 1 SIGNAL 2 K942 20BR/LG KNOCK SENSOR NO. 1 RETURN Component Location - 9 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Knock 1 > Page 4235 Component Location - 22 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Knock 1 > Page 4236 Component Location - 19 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Knock 1 > Page 4237 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Knock 1 > Page 4238 Knock Sensor: Diagrams Sensor-Knock 2 Component ID: 424 Component : SENSOR-KNOCK 2 Connector: Name : SENSOR-KNOCK 2 Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (3.7L/5.7L) Pin Circuit Description 1 K242 20BR/WT KNOCK SENSOR NO. 2 SIGNAL 2 K924 20WT/BR KNOCK SENSOR NO. 2 RETURN Component Location - 11 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Knock 1 > Page 4239 Component Location - 22 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Knock 1 > Page 4240 Component Location - 19 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Knock 1 > Page 4241 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Knock 1 > Page 4242 Knock Sensor: Diagrams Sensor-Knock Component ID: 422 Component : SENSOR-KNOCK Connector: Name : SENSOR-KNOCK Color : BLACK # of pins : 4 Qualifier : (4.7L) Pin Circuit Description 1 K942 20BR/LG KNOCK SENSOR NO. 1 RETURN 2 K42 20DB/YL KNOCK SENSOR NO. 1 SIGNAL 3 K924 20WT/BR KNOCK SENSOR NO. 2 RETURN 4 K242 20BR/WT KNOCK SENSOR NO. 2 SIGNAL Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Knock Sensor: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION Two knock sensors are bolted into the cylinder block under the intake manifold 3.7L, 4.7L & 8.3L. Two knock sensors are also used with the 5.7L. These are bolted into each side of the cylinder block (outside) under the exhaust manifold. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 4245 Knock Sensor: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION Two knock sensors are used; one for each cylinder bank. When the knock sensor detects a knock in one of the cylinders on the corresponding bank, it sends an input signal to the Powertrain Control Module (PCM). In response, the PCM retards ignition timing for all cylinders by a scheduled amount. Knock sensors contain a piezoelectric material which constantly vibrates and sends an input voltage (signal) to the PCM while the engine operates. As the intensity of the crystal's vibration increases, the knock sensor output voltage also increases. The voltage signal produced by the knock sensor increases with the amplitude of vibration. The PCM receives the knock sensor voltage signal as an input. If the signal rises above a predetermined level, the PCM will store that value in memory and retard ignition timing to reduce engine knock. If the knock sensor voltage exceeds a preset value, the PCM retards ignition timing for all cylinders. It is not a selective cylinder retard. The PCM ignores knock sensor input during engine idle conditions. Once the engine speed exceeds a specified value, knock retard is allowed. Knock retard uses its own short term and long term memory program. Long term memory stores previous detonation information in its battery-backed RAM. The maximum authority that long term memory has over timing retard can be calibrated. Short term memory is allowed to retard timing up to a preset amount under all operating conditions (as long as rpm is above the minimum rpm) except at Wide Open Throttle (WOT). The PCM, using short term memory, can respond quickly to retard timing when engine knock is detected. Short term memory is lost any time the ignition key is turned off. NOTE: Over or under tightening the sensor mounting bolts will affect knock sensor performance, possibly causing improper spark control. Always use the specified torque when installing the knock sensors. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Knock Sensor: Service and Repair Removal 4.7L The two knock sensors (1) are bolted into the cylinder block under the intake manifold (3). NOTE: The left sensor is identified by an identification tag (LEFT). It is also identified by a larger bolt head. The Powertrain Control Module (PCM) must have and know the correct sensor left/right positions. Do not mix the sensor locations. 1. Disconnect knock sensor dual pigtail harness from engine wiring harness. This connection is made near rear of engine. 2. Remove intake manifold See: Engine, Cooling and Exhaust/Engine/Intake Manifold/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Intake Manifold - Removal . 3. Remove sensor mounting bolts (2). Note foam strip on bolt threads. This foam is used only to retain the bolts to sensors for plant assembly. It is not used as a sealant. Do not apply any adhesive, sealant or thread locking compound to these bolts. 4. Remove sensors (1) from engine. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 4248 Knock Sensor: Service and Repair Installation 4.7L NOTE: The left sensor is identified by an identification tag (LEFT). It is also identified by a larger bolt head. The Powertrain Control Module (PCM) must have and know the correct sensor left/right positions. Do not mix the sensor locations. 1. Thoroughly clean knock sensor mounting holes. 2. Install sensors (1) into cylinder block. NOTE: Over or under tightening the sensor mounting bolts will affect knock sensor performance, possibly causing improper spark control. Always use the specified torque when installing the knock sensors. The torque for the knock sensor bolt is relatively light for an 8 mm bolt. NOTE: Note foam strip on bolt threads. This foam is used only to retain the bolts to sensors for plant assembly. It is not used as a sealant. Do not apply any adhesive, sealant or thread locking compound to these bolts. 3. Install and tighten mounting bolts. Tighten to 15 +/- 2 ft. lbs. (20 Nm) (176 in.lbs.). 4. Install intake manifold See: Engine, Cooling and Exhaust/Engine/Intake Manifold/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Intake Manifold - Installation . 5. Connect knock sensor wiring harness to engine harness (4) at rear of intake manifold. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Diagrams Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System): Diagrams Connector - (IN TIPM) RELAY-AUTO SHUT DOWN - (IN TIPM) Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4252 Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System): Description and Operation PCM OUTPUT The 5 pin, 12 volt, Automatic Shutdown (ASD) relay is located in the Power Distribution Center (PDC). Refer to label on PDC cover for relay location. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4253 Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System): Testing and Inspection Fig.1 ASD And Fuel Pump Relay Terminals-Type 1 Fig.2 ASD And Fuel Pump Relay Terminals-Type 2 The following description of operation and tests apply only to the Automatic Shutdown (ASD) and fuel pump relays. The terminals on the bottom of each relay are numbered. Two different types of relays may be used, or. - Terminal number 30 is connected to battery voltage. For both the ASD and fuel pump relays, terminal 30 is connected to battery voltage at all times. - The PCM grounds the coil side of the relay through terminal number 85. - Terminal number 86 supplies voltage to the coil side of the relay. - When the PCM de-energizes the ASD and fuel pump relays, terminal number 87A connects to terminal 30. This is the OFF position. In the OFF position, voltage is not supplied to the rest of the circuit. Terminal 87A is the center terminal on the relay. - When the PCM energizes the ASD and fuel pump relays, terminal 87 connects to terminal 30. This is the ON position. Terminal 87 supplies voltage to the rest of the circuit. The following procedure applies to the ASD and fuel pump relays. 1. Remove relay from connector before testing. 2. With the relay removed from the vehicle, use an ohmmeter to check the resistance between terminals 85 and 86. The resistance should be 75 ohms Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4254 ± 5 ohms. 3. Connect the ohmmeter between terminals 30 and 87A. The ohmmeter should show continuity between terminals 30 and 87A. 4. Connect the ohmmeter between terminals 87 and 30. The ohmmeter should not show continuity at this time. 5. Connect one end of a jumper wire (16 gauge or smaller) to relay terminal 85. Connect the other end of the jumper wire to the ground side of a 12 volt power source. 6. Connect one end of another jumper wire (16 gauge or smaller) to the power side of the 12 volt power source. Do not attach the other end of the jumper wire to the relay at this time. WARNING: DO NOT ALLOW OHMMETER TO CONTACT TERMINALS 85 OR 86 DURING THIS TEST. DAMAGE TO OHMMETER MAY RESULT. 7. Attach the other end of the jumper wire to relay terminal 86. This activates the relay. The ohmmeter should now show continuity between relay terminals 87 and 30. The ohmmeter should not show continuity between relay terminals 87A and 30. 8. Disconnect jumper wires. 9. Replace the relay if it did not pass the continuity and resistance tests. If the relay passed the tests, it operates properly. Check the remainder of the ASD and fuel pump relay circuits. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Malfunction Indicator Lamp > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Malfunction Indicator Lamp: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION A Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) is standard equipment on all instrument clusters. This indicator is located near the lower edge of the instrument cluster, between the tachometer and the speedometer. The MIL consists of a stencil-like cutout of the International Control and Display Symbol icon for Engine in the opaque layer of the instrument cluster overlay. The dark outer layer of the overlay prevents the indicator from being clearly visible when it is not illuminated. An amber Light Emitting Diode (LED) behind the cutout in the opaque layer of the overlay causes the indicator to appear in amber through the translucent outer layer of the overlay when it is illuminated from behind by the LED, which is soldered onto the instrument cluster electronic circuit board. The MIL is serviced as a unit with the instrument cluster. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Malfunction Indicator Lamp > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 4259 Malfunction Indicator Lamp: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) gives an indication to the vehicle operator when the Powertrain Control Module (PCM) on vehicles with a gasoline engine, or the Engine Control Module (ECM) on vehicles with a diesel engine has recorded a Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) for an On-Board Diagnostics II (OBDII) emissions-related circuit or component malfunction. The MIL is controlled by a transistor on the instrument cluster circuit board based upon cluster programming and electronic messages received by the cluster from the PCM or ECM over the Controller Area Network (CAN) data bus. The MIL Light Emitting Diode (LED) is completely controlled by the instrument cluster logic circuit, and that logic will only allow this indicator to operate when the instrument cluster receives a battery current input on the fused ignition switch output (run-start) circuit. Therefore, the LED will always be OFF when the ignition switch is in any position except ON or START. The LED only illuminates when it is provided a path to ground by the instrument cluster transistor. The instrument cluster will turn ON the MIL for the following reasons: - Bulb Test - Each time the ignition switch is turned to the ON position the indicator is illuminated for about two seconds as a bulb test. The entire bulb test is a function of the PCM or ECM. - MIL Lamp-On Message - Each time the cluster receives an electronic MIL lamp-ON message from the PCM or ECM, the indicator will be illuminated. The indicator can be flashed ON and OFF, or illuminated solid, as dictated by the PCM or ECM message. For some DTCs, if a problem does not recur, the PCM or ECM will send a lamp-OFF message automatically. Other DTCs may require that a fault be repaired and the PCM or ECM be reset before a lamp-OFF message will be sent. - Communication Error - If the cluster receives no lamp-ON or lamp-OFF messages from the PCM or ECM for about 10 seconds, the MIL is illuminated by the instrument cluster to indicate a loss of bus communication. The indicator remains controlled and illuminated by the cluster until a valid message is received from the PCM or ECM. - Actuator Test - Each time the cluster is put through the actuator test, the MIL indicator will be turned ON during the bulb check portion of the test to confirm the functionality of the LED and the cluster control circuitry. The PCM or ECM continually monitors the fuel and emissions system circuits and sensors to decide whether the system is in good operating condition. The PCM or ECM then sends the proper lamp-ON or lamp-OFF message to the ElectroMechanical Instrument Cluster (EMIC) (also known as the Cab Compartment Node/CCN). If the EMIC turns ON the MIL after the bulb test, it may indicate that a malfunction has occurred and that the fuel and emissions systems may require service. For proper diagnosis of the fuel and emissions systems, the PCM, the ECM, the EMIC, the CAN data bus or the electronic communication related to MIL operation a diagnostic scan tool is required. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Locations Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor: Locations Component ID: 426 Component : SENSOR-MANIFOLD ABSOLUTE PRESSURE Connector: Name : SENSOR-MANIFOLD ABSOLUTE PRESSURE Color : GRAY # of pins : 3 Qualifier : (NGC) Pin Circuit Description 1 K1 20VT/BR MAP SIGNAL 2 K900 20DB/DG SENSOR GROUND 3 F856 20YL/PK 5 VOLT SUPPLY Component Location - 8 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 4263 Component Location - 9 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 4264 Component Location - 11 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 4265 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 4266 Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor: Diagrams Component ID: 426 Component : SENSOR-MANIFOLD ABSOLUTE PRESSURE Connector: Name : SENSOR-MANIFOLD ABSOLUTE PRESSURE Color : GRAY # of pins : 3 Qualifier : (NGC) Pin Circuit Description 1 K1 20VT/BR MAP SIGNAL 2 K900 20DB/DG SENSOR GROUND 3 F856 20YL/PK 5 VOLT SUPPLY Component Location - 8 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 4267 Component Location - 9 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 4268 Component Location - 11 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 4269 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 4270 Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor: Description and Operation OPERATION The MAP sensor is used as an input to the Powertrain Control Module (PCM). It contains a silicon based sensing unit to provide data on the manifold vacuum that draws the air/fuel mixture into the combustion chamber. The PCM requires this information to determine injector pulse width and spark advance. When manifold absolute pressure (MAP) equals Barometric pressure, the pulse width will be at maximum. A 5 volt reference is supplied from the PCM and returns a voltage signal to the PCM that reflects manifold pressure. The zero pressure reading is 0.5V and full scale is 4.5V. For a pressure swing of 0-15 psi, the voltage changes 4.0V. To operate the sensor, it is supplied a regulated 4.8 to 5.1 volts. Ground is provided through the low-noise, sensor return circuit at the PCM. The MAP sensor input is the number one contributor to fuel injector pulse width. The most important function of the MAP sensor is to determine barometric pressure. The PCM needs to know if the vehicle is at sea level or at a higher altitude, because the air density changes with altitude. It will also help to correct for varying barometric pressure. Barometric pressure and altitude have a direct inverse correlation; as altitude goes up, barometric goes down. At key-on, the PCM powers up and looks at MAP voltage, and based upon the voltage it sees, it knows the current barometric pressure (relative to altitude). Once the engine starts, the PCM looks at the voltage again, continuously every 12 milliseconds, and compares the current voltage to what it was at key-on. The difference between current voltage and what it was at key-on, is manifold vacuum. During key-on (engine not running) the sensor reads (updates) barometric pressure. A normal range can be obtained by monitoring a known good sensor. As the altitude increases, the air becomes thinner (less oxygen). If a vehicle is started and driven to a very different altitude than where it was at key-on, the barometric pressure needs to be updated. Any time the PCM sees Wide Open Throttle (WOT), based upon Throttle Position Sensor (TPS) angle and RPM, it will update barometric pressure in the MAP memory cell. With periodic updates, the PCM can make its calculations more effectively. The PCM uses the MAP sensor input to aid in calculating the following: - Manifold pressure - Barometric pressure - Engine load - Injector pulse-width - Spark-advance programs - Shift-point strategies (certain automatic transmissions only) - Idle speed - Decel fuel shutoff The MAP sensor signal is provided from a single piezoresistive element located in the center of a diaphragm. The element and diaphragm are both made of silicone. As manifold pressure changes, the diaphragm moves causing the element to deflect, which stresses the silicone. When silicone is exposed to stress, its resistance changes. As manifold vacuum increases, the MAP sensor input voltage decreases proportionally. The sensor also contains electronics that condition the signal and provide temperature compensation. The PCM recognizes a decrease in manifold pressure by monitoring a decrease in voltage from the reading stored in the barometric pressure memory cell. The MAP sensor is a linear sensor; meaning as pressure changes, voltage changes proportionately. The range of voltage output from the sensor is usually between 4.6 volts at sea level to as low as 0.3 volts at 26 in. of Hg. Barometric pressure is the pressure exerted by the atmosphere upon an object. At sea level on a standard day, no storm, barometric pressure is approximately 29.92 in Hg. For every 100 feet of altitude, barometric pressure drops 0.10 in. Hg. If a storm goes through, it can change barometric pressure from what should be present for that altitude. You should know what the average pressure and corresponding barometric pressure is for your area. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor - Oxygen 1/1 Oxygen Sensor: Locations Sensor - Oxygen 1/1 Component ID: 431 Component : SENSOR-OXYGEN 1/1 Connector: Name : SENSOR-OXYGEN 1/1 Color : # of pins : 6 Qualifier : (6.7L DIESEL) Pin Circuit Description 1 K89 20BR/LG 02 1/1 PUMP CURRENT 2 K902 20BR/DG O2 1/1 RETURN 3 K79 20BR/LB O2 1/1 HEATER CONTROL RETURN 4 K99 20BR/LG O2 1/1 HEATER CONTROL SUPPLY 5 K103 20BR/LB O2 1/1 PUMP CELL CURRENT TRIM 6 K41 20DB/LB O2 1/1 SIGNAL Component Location - 21 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor - Oxygen 1/1 > Page 4275 Component Location - 22 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor - Oxygen 1/1 > Page 4276 Component Location - 24 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor - Oxygen 1/1 > Page 4277 Component Location - 19 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor - Oxygen 1/1 > Page 4278 Connector: Name : SENSOR-OXYGEN 1/1 Color : # of pins : 6 Qualifier : (6.7L DIESEL) Pin Circuit Description 1 K89 20BR/LG 02 1/1 PUMP CURRENT 2 K902 20BR/DG O2 1/1 RETURN 3 K79 20BR/LB O2 1/1 HEATER CONTROL RETURN 4 K99 20BR/LG O2 1/1 HEATER CONTROL SUPPLY Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor - Oxygen 1/1 > Page 4279 5 K103 20BR/LB O2 1/1 PUMP CELL CURRENT TRIM 6 K41 20DB/LB O2 1/1 SIGNAL Component Location - 21 Component Location - 22 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor - Oxygen 1/1 > Page 4280 Component Location - 24 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor - Oxygen 1/1 > Page 4281 Component Location - 19 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor - Oxygen 1/1 > Page 4282 Connector: Name : SENSOR-OXYGEN 1/1 Color : BLACK # of pins : 4 Qualifier : (GAS) Pin Circuit Description 1 K99 20BR/LG O2 1/1 HEATER CONTROL SUPPLY 2 Z42 20BK/LG GROUND 3 K902 20BR/DG O2 RETURN (UPSTREAM) 4 K41 20DB/LB O2 1/1 SIGNAL Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor - Oxygen 1/1 > Page 4283 Component Location - 21 Component Location - 22 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor - Oxygen 1/1 > Page 4284 Component Location - 24 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor - Oxygen 1/1 > Page 4285 Component Location - 19 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor - Oxygen 1/1 > Page 4286 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor - Oxygen 1/1 > Page 4287 Oxygen Sensor: Locations Sensor - Oxygen 1/2 Component ID: 432 Component : SENSOR-OXYGEN 1/2 Connector: Name : SENSOR-OXYGEN 1/2 Color : # of pins : 6 Qualifier : (6.7L DIESEL) Pin Circuit Description 1 K734 20BR/DG 02 1/2 PUMP CURRENT 2 K904 20DB/DG O2 1/2 RETURN 3 K80 20BR/TN O2 1/2 HEATER CONTROL RETURN 4 K299 20BR/WT O2 1/2 HEATER CONTROL SUPPLY 5 K733 20BR O2 1/2 PUMP CELL CURRENT TRIM 6 K141 20DB/YL O2 1/2 SIGNAL Component Location - 21 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor - Oxygen 1/1 > Page 4288 Component Location - 22 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor - Oxygen 1/1 > Page 4289 Component Location - 19 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor - Oxygen 1/1 > Page 4290 Connector: Name : SENSOR-OXYGEN 1/2 Color : # of pins : 6 Qualifier : (6.7L DIESEL) Pin Circuit Description 1 K734 20BR/DG 02 1/2 PUMP CURRENT 2 K904 20DB/DG O2 1/2 RETURN 3 K80 20BR/TN O2 1/2 HEATER CONTROL RETURN 4 K299 20BR/WT O2 1/2 HEATER CONTROL SUPPLY Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor - Oxygen 1/1 > Page 4291 5 K733 20BR O2 1/2 PUMP CELL CURRENT TRIM 6 K141 20DB/YL O2 1/2 SIGNAL Component Location - 21 Component Location - 22 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor - Oxygen 1/1 > Page 4292 Component Location - 19 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor - Oxygen 1/1 > Page 4293 Connector: Name : SENSOR-OXYGEN 1/2 Color : # of pins : 4 Qualifier : (GAS) Pin Circuit Description 1 K299 20BR/WT O2 1/2 HEATER CONTROL SUPPLY 2 Z43 20BK/LB GROUND 3 K904 20DB/DG O2 RETURN (DOWNSTREAM) 4 K141 20DB/YL O2 1/2 SIGNAL Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor - Oxygen 1/1 > Page 4294 Component Location - 21 Component Location - 22 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor - Oxygen 1/1 > Page 4295 Component Location - 19 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor - Oxygen 1/1 > Page 4296 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor - Oxygen 1/1 > Page 4297 Oxygen Sensor: Locations Sensor - Oxygen 2/1 Component ID: 433 Component : SENSOR-OXYGEN 2/1 Connector: Name : SENSOR-OXYGEN 2/1 Color : BLACK # of pins : 4 Qualifier : (3.7L/5.7L) Pin Circuit Description 1 K199 20BR/VT O2 2/1 HEATER CONTROL 2 Z934 20BK GROUND 3 K902 20BR/DG O2 RETURN (UPSTREAM) 4 K43 20DB/LG O2 2/1 SIGNAL Component Location - 22 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor - Oxygen 1/1 > Page 4298 Component Location - 23 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor - Oxygen 1/1 > Page 4299 Component Location - 19 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor - Oxygen 1/1 > Page 4300 Connector: Name : SENSOR-OXYGEN 2/1 Color : GRAY # of pins : 4 Qualifier : (4.7L) Pin Circuit Description 1 K199 20BR/VT O2 2/1 HEATER CONTROL 2 Z934 20BK GROUND 3 K902 20BR/DG O2 RETURN (UPSTREAM) 4 K43 20DB/LG O2 2/1 SIGNAL Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor - Oxygen 1/1 > Page 4301 Component Location - 22 Component Location - 23 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor - Oxygen 1/1 > Page 4302 Component Location - 19 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor - Oxygen 1/1 > Page 4303 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor - Oxygen 1/1 > Page 4304 Oxygen Sensor: Locations Sensor - Oxygen 2/2 Component ID: 434 Component : SENSOR-OXYGEN 2/2 Connector: Name : SENSOR-OXYGEN 2/2 Color : GRAY # of pins : 4 Qualifier : (4.7L/5.7L HD) Pin Circuit Description 1 K399 20BR/GY O2 2/2 HEATER CONTROL 2 Z992 20BK GROUND 3 K904 20DB/DG O2 RETURN (DOWNSTREAM) 4 K243 20BR O2 2/2 SIGNAL Component Location - 22 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor - Oxygen 1/1 > Page 4305 Component Location - 23 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor - Oxygen 1/1 > Page 4306 Component Location - 24 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor - Oxygen 1/1 > Page 4307 Component Location - 19 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor - Oxygen 1/1 > Page 4308 Connector: Name : SENSOR-OXYGEN 2/2 Color : BLACK # of pins : 4 Qualifier : (GAS LD) Pin Circuit Description 1 K399 20BR/GY O2 2/2 HEATER CONTROL 2 Z992 20BK GROUND 3 K904 20DB/DG O2 RETURN (DOWNSTREAM) 4 K243 20BR O2 2/2 SIGNAL Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor - Oxygen 1/1 > Page 4309 Component Location - 22 Component Location - 23 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor - Oxygen 1/1 > Page 4310 Component Location - 24 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor - Oxygen 1/1 > Page 4311 Component Location - 19 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor - Oxygen 1/1 > Page 4312 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Oxygen 1/1 Oxygen Sensor: Diagrams Sensor-Oxygen 1/1 Component ID: 431 Component : SENSOR-OXYGEN 1/1 Connector: Name : SENSOR-OXYGEN 1/1 Color : # of pins : 6 Qualifier : (6.7L DIESEL) Pin Circuit Description 1 K89 20BR/LG 02 1/1 PUMP CURRENT 2 K902 20BR/DG O2 1/1 RETURN 3 K79 20BR/LB O2 1/1 HEATER CONTROL RETURN 4 K99 20BR/LG O2 1/1 HEATER CONTROL SUPPLY 5 K103 20BR/LB O2 1/1 PUMP CELL CURRENT TRIM 6 K41 20DB/LB O2 1/1 SIGNAL Component Location - 21 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Oxygen 1/1 > Page 4315 Component Location - 22 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Oxygen 1/1 > Page 4316 Component Location - 24 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Oxygen 1/1 > Page 4317 Component Location - 19 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Oxygen 1/1 > Page 4318 Connector: Name : SENSOR-OXYGEN 1/1 Color : # of pins : 6 Qualifier : (6.7L DIESEL) Pin Circuit Description 1 K89 20BR/LG 02 1/1 PUMP CURRENT 2 K902 20BR/DG O2 1/1 RETURN 3 K79 20BR/LB O2 1/1 HEATER CONTROL RETURN 4 K99 20BR/LG O2 1/1 HEATER CONTROL SUPPLY Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Oxygen 1/1 > Page 4319 5 K103 20BR/LB O2 1/1 PUMP CELL CURRENT TRIM 6 K41 20DB/LB O2 1/1 SIGNAL Component Location - 21 Component Location - 22 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Oxygen 1/1 > Page 4320 Component Location - 24 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Oxygen 1/1 > Page 4321 Component Location - 19 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Oxygen 1/1 > Page 4322 Connector: Name : SENSOR-OXYGEN 1/1 Color : BLACK # of pins : 4 Qualifier : (GAS) Pin Circuit Description 1 K99 20BR/LG O2 1/1 HEATER CONTROL SUPPLY 2 Z42 20BK/LG GROUND 3 K902 20BR/DG O2 RETURN (UPSTREAM) 4 K41 20DB/LB O2 1/1 SIGNAL Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Oxygen 1/1 > Page 4323 Component Location - 21 Component Location - 22 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Oxygen 1/1 > Page 4324 Component Location - 24 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Oxygen 1/1 > Page 4325 Component Location - 19 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Oxygen 1/1 > Page 4326 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Oxygen 1/1 > Page 4327 Oxygen Sensor: Diagrams Sensor-Oxygen 1/2 Component ID: 432 Component : SENSOR-OXYGEN 1/2 Connector: Name : SENSOR-OXYGEN 1/2 Color : # of pins : 6 Qualifier : (6.7L DIESEL) Pin Circuit Description 1 K734 20BR/DG 02 1/2 PUMP CURRENT 2 K904 20DB/DG O2 1/2 RETURN 3 K80 20BR/TN O2 1/2 HEATER CONTROL RETURN 4 K299 20BR/WT O2 1/2 HEATER CONTROL SUPPLY 5 K733 20BR O2 1/2 PUMP CELL CURRENT TRIM 6 K141 20DB/YL O2 1/2 SIGNAL Component Location - 21 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Oxygen 1/1 > Page 4328 Component Location - 22 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Oxygen 1/1 > Page 4329 Component Location - 19 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Oxygen 1/1 > Page 4330 Connector: Name : SENSOR-OXYGEN 1/2 Color : # of pins : 6 Qualifier : (6.7L DIESEL) Pin Circuit Description 1 K734 20BR/DG 02 1/2 PUMP CURRENT 2 K904 20DB/DG O2 1/2 RETURN 3 K80 20BR/TN O2 1/2 HEATER CONTROL RETURN 4 K299 20BR/WT O2 1/2 HEATER CONTROL SUPPLY Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Oxygen 1/1 > Page 4331 5 K733 20BR O2 1/2 PUMP CELL CURRENT TRIM 6 K141 20DB/YL O2 1/2 SIGNAL Component Location - 21 Component Location - 22 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Oxygen 1/1 > Page 4332 Component Location - 19 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Oxygen 1/1 > Page 4333 Connector: Name : SENSOR-OXYGEN 1/2 Color : # of pins : 4 Qualifier : (GAS) Pin Circuit Description 1 K299 20BR/WT O2 1/2 HEATER CONTROL SUPPLY 2 Z43 20BK/LB GROUND 3 K904 20DB/DG O2 RETURN (DOWNSTREAM) 4 K141 20DB/YL O2 1/2 SIGNAL Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Oxygen 1/1 > Page 4334 Component Location - 21 Component Location - 22 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Oxygen 1/1 > Page 4335 Component Location - 19 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Oxygen 1/1 > Page 4336 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Oxygen 1/1 > Page 4337 Oxygen Sensor: Diagrams Sensor-Oxygen 2/1 Component ID: 433 Component : SENSOR-OXYGEN 2/1 Connector: Name : SENSOR-OXYGEN 2/1 Color : BLACK # of pins : 4 Qualifier : (3.7L/5.7L) Pin Circuit Description 1 K199 20BR/VT O2 2/1 HEATER CONTROL 2 Z934 20BK GROUND 3 K902 20BR/DG O2 RETURN (UPSTREAM) 4 K43 20DB/LG O2 2/1 SIGNAL Component Location - 22 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Oxygen 1/1 > Page 4338 Component Location - 23 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Oxygen 1/1 > Page 4339 Component Location - 19 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Oxygen 1/1 > Page 4340 Connector: Name : SENSOR-OXYGEN 2/1 Color : GRAY # of pins : 4 Qualifier : (4.7L) Pin Circuit Description 1 K199 20BR/VT O2 2/1 HEATER CONTROL 2 Z934 20BK GROUND 3 K902 20BR/DG O2 RETURN (UPSTREAM) 4 K43 20DB/LG O2 2/1 SIGNAL Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Oxygen 1/1 > Page 4341 Component Location - 22 Component Location - 23 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Oxygen 1/1 > Page 4342 Component Location - 19 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Oxygen 1/1 > Page 4343 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Oxygen 1/1 > Page 4344 Oxygen Sensor: Diagrams Sensor-Oxygen 2/2 Component ID: 434 Component : SENSOR-OXYGEN 2/2 Connector: Name : SENSOR-OXYGEN 2/2 Color : GRAY # of pins : 4 Qualifier : (4.7L/5.7L HD) Pin Circuit Description 1 K399 20BR/GY O2 2/2 HEATER CONTROL 2 Z992 20BK GROUND 3 K904 20DB/DG O2 RETURN (DOWNSTREAM) 4 K243 20BR O2 2/2 SIGNAL Component Location - 22 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Oxygen 1/1 > Page 4345 Component Location - 23 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Oxygen 1/1 > Page 4346 Component Location - 24 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Oxygen 1/1 > Page 4347 Component Location - 19 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Oxygen 1/1 > Page 4348 Connector: Name : SENSOR-OXYGEN 2/2 Color : BLACK # of pins : 4 Qualifier : (GAS LD) Pin Circuit Description 1 K399 20BR/GY O2 2/2 HEATER CONTROL 2 Z992 20BK GROUND 3 K904 20DB/DG O2 RETURN (DOWNSTREAM) 4 K243 20BR O2 2/2 SIGNAL Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Oxygen 1/1 > Page 4349 Component Location - 22 Component Location - 23 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Oxygen 1/1 > Page 4350 Component Location - 24 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Oxygen 1/1 > Page 4351 Component Location - 19 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Oxygen 1/1 > Page 4352 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4353 Oxygen Sensor: Application and ID - Cylinder bank number one is the bank that contains number one cylinder. See: Ignition System/Firing Order Cylinder #1 on left side. Cylinder #1 on right side. - The first oxygen sensor in cylinder bank # 1 is numbered O2 Sensor 1/1. - The second oxygen sensor in cylinder bank # 1 is numbered O2 Sensor 1/2. - A third oxygen sensor in cylinder bank # 1 would be numbered O2 Sensor 1/3. - The first oxygen sensor in cylinder bank # 2 is numbered O2 Sensor 2/1. - The second oxygen sensor in cylinder bank # 2 is numbered O2 Sensor 1/1. - If a V-6 or V-8 vehicle only uses one downstream Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) it is numbered O2 Sensor 1/2, even if it uses two upstream HO2S. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4354 Oxygen Sensor: Description and Operation DESCRIPTION The Oxygen Sensors (O2S) are attached to, and protrude into the vehicle exhaust system. Depending on the engine or emission package, the vehicle may use a total of either 2 or 4 sensors. Federal Emission Packages : Two sensors are used: upstream (referred to as 1/1) and downstream (referred to as 1/2). With this emission package, the upstream sensor (1/1) is located just before the main catalytic convertor. The downstream sensor (1/2) is located just after the main catalytic convertor. California Emission Packages: On this emissions package, 4 sensors are used: 2 upstream (referred to as 1/1 and 2/1) and 2 downstream (referred to as 1/2 and 2/2). With this emission package, the right upstream sensor (2/1) is located in the right exhaust downpipe just before the mini-catalytic convertor. The left upstream sensor (1/1) is located in the left exhaust downpipe just before the mini-catalytic convertor. The right downstream sensor (2/2) is located in the right exhaust downpipe just after the mini-catalytic convertor, and before the main catalytic convertor. The left downstream sensor (1/2) is located in the left exhaust downpipe just after the mini-catalytic convertor, and before the main catalytic convertor. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Oxygen Sensor: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL CAUTION: Never apply any type of grease to the oxygen sensor electrical connector, or attempt any soldering of the sensor wiring harness. WARNING: The exhaust manifold, exhaust pipes and catalytic converter become very hot during engine operation. Allow engine to cool before removing oxygen sensor. 1. Raise and support vehicle. 2. Disconnect wire connector from O2S sensor. CAUTION: When disconnecting sensor electrical connector, do not pull directly on wire going into sensor. 3. Remove O2S sensor with an oxygen sensor removal and installation tool. 4. Clean threads in exhaust pipe using appropriate tap. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 4357 Oxygen Sensor: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION Threads of new oxygen sensors are factory coated with anti-seize compound to aid in removal.DO NOT add any additional anti-seize compound to threads of a new oxygen sensor. 1. Install O2S sensor. Tighten to 41 Nm (30 ft. lbs.) torque. 2. Connect O2S sensor wire connector. 3. Lower vehicle. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams Oxygen Sensor Relay: Diagrams 2007-2009 Dodge Ram 3.7/4.7/5.7L engine O2 sensor heater, is controled by the powertrain control module. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4361 Oxygen Sensor Relay: Description and Operation DESCRIPTION The Oxygen Sensors (02S) are attached to, and protrude into the vehicle exhaust system Depending on the engine or emission package, the vehicle may use a total of either 2 or 4 sensors Federal Emission Packages Two sensors are used: upstream (referred to as 1/1) and downstream (referred to as 1/2) With this emission package, the upstream sensor (1/1) is located just before the main catalytic convertor The downstream sensor (1/2) is located just after the main catalytic convertor California Emission Packages: On this emissions package, 4 sensors are used: 2 upstream (referred to as ill and 2/1) and 2 downstream (referred to as 1/2 and 2/2) With this emission pack-age, the right upstream sensor (2/i) is located in the right exhaust downpipe just before the mini-catalytic convertor The left upstream sensor (1/i) is located in the left exhaust downpipe just before the mini-catalytic convertor The right downstream sensor (2/2) is located in the right exhaust downpipe just after the mini-catalytic convertor, and before the main catalytic convertor The left downstream sensor (1/2) is located in the left exhaust downpipe just after the mini-catalytic convertor, and before the main catalytic convertor Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL 1. Disconnect exhaust gas pressure sensor electrical connector (1). 2. Using a 6 point deepwell socket, remove exhaust gas sensor (2). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 4366 Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION 1. Using a 6 point deepwell socket, install exhaust gas pressure sensor. 2. Tighten sensor to 18 Nm (13 ft. lbs.). 3. Connect exhaust gas pressure sensor electrical connector (3). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Body Control Module: Diagram Information and Instructions Warnings WARNINGS - GENERAL WARNINGS provide information to prevent personal injury and vehicle damage. Below is a list of general warnings that should be followed any time a vehicle is being serviced. WARNING: Always wear safety glasses for eye protection. WARNING: Use safety stands anytime a procedure requires being under a vehicle. WARNING: Be sure that the ignition switch always is in the off position, unless the procedure requires it to be on. WARNING: Set the parking brake when working on any vehicle. An automatic transmission should be in park. A manual transmission should be in neutral. WARNING: Operate the engine only in a well-ventilated area. WARNING: Keep away from moving parts when the engine is running, especially the fan and belts. WARNING: To prevent serious burns, avoid contact with hot parts such as the radiator, exhaust manifold(s), tail pipe, catalytic converter and muffler. WARNING: Do not allow flame or sparks near the battery. Gases are always present in and around the battery. WARNING: Always remove rings, watches, loose hanging jewelry and avoid loose clothing. How to Use Wiring Diagrams DESCRIPTION - HOW TO USE WIRING DIAGRAMS DaimlerChrysler Corporation wiring diagrams are designed to provide information regarding the vehicles wiring content. In order to effectively use the wiring diagrams to diagnose and repair DaimlerChrysler Corporation vehicles, it is important to understand all of their features and characteristics. Diagrams are arranged such that the power (B+) side of the circuit is placed near the top of the page, and the ground (B-) side of the circuit is placed near the bottom of the page. All switches, components, and modules are shown in the at rest position with the doors closed and the key removed from the ignition. Components are shown two ways. A solid line around a component indicates that the component is complete. A dashed line around the component indicates that the component is being shown is not complete. Incomplete components have a reference number to indicate the page where the component is shown complete. It is important to realize that no attempt is made on the diagrams to represent components and wiring as they appear on the vehicle. For example, a short piece of wire is treated the same as a long one. In addition, switches and other components are shown as simply as possible, with regard to function only. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4372 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4373 SYMBOLS International symbols are used throughout the wiring diagrams. These symbols are consistent with those being used around the world. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4374 TERMINOLOGY This is a list of terms and definitions used in the wiring diagrams. LHD - Left Hand Drive Vehicles RHD - Right Hand Drive Vehicles ATX - Automatic Transmissions-Front Wheel Drive MTX Manual Transmissions-Front Wheel Drive Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4375 AT - Automatic Transmissions-Rear Wheel Drive MT - Manual Transmissions-Rear Wheel Drive SOHC - Single Over Head Cam Engine DOHC - Double Over Head Cam Engine Export - Vehicles Built For Sale In Markets Other Than North America Except Export - Vehicles Built For Sale In North America Circuit Functions DESCRIPTION - CIRCUIT FUNCTIONS All circuits in the diagrams use an alpha/numeric code to identify the wire and it's function. To identify which circuit code applies to a system, refer to the Circuit Identification Code Chart. This chart shows the main circuits only and does not show the secondary codes that may apply to some models. Circuit Information DESCRIPTION - CIRCUIT INFORMATION Each wire shown in the diagrams contains a code which identifies the main circuit, a specific part of the main circuit, gage of wire, and color. An example would be A 2 18 LB/YL. This is a Battery Feed circuit, level two, eighteen gauge, light blue with a yellow tracer. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4376 Connector, Ground and Splice Information DESCRIPTION - CONNECTOR, GROUND AND SPLICE INFORMATION CAUTION: Not all connectors are serviced. Some connectors are serviced only with a harness. A typical example might be the Supplemental Restraint System connectors. Always check parts availability before attempting a repair. IDENTIFICATION In-line connectors are identified by a number, as follows: - In-line connectors located in the engine compartment are C100 series numbers. - In-line connectors located in the instrument panel area are C200 series numbers. - In-line connectors located in the body are C300 series numbers. - Jumper harness connectors are C400 series numbers. - Grounds and ground connectors are identified with a "G" and follow the same series numbering as the in-line connectors. - Splices are identified with an "S" and follow the same series numbering as the in-line connectors. In addition, S001-S099 numbers are located in the engine compartment. - Component connectors are identified by the component name instead of a number. Multiple connectors on a component use a C1, C2, etc. identifier. LOCATIONS Vehicle/Locations contains the master connector/ground/splice location index charts with hyperlinks to the applicable location illustrations. The illustrations contain the connector name (or number)/ground number/splice number and component identification. The abbreviation T/O is used in the component location section to indicate a point in which the wiring harness branches out to a component. The abbreviation N/S means Not Shown in the illustrations Section Identification and Information DESCRIPTION - SECTION IDENTIFICATION AND INFORMATION The wiring diagrams are grouped into individual sections. If a component is most likely found in a particular group, it will be shown complete (all wires, Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4377 connectors, and pins) within that group. For example, the Auto Shutdown Relay is most likely to be found in Powertrain Management, so it is shown there complete. It can, however, be shown partially in another group if it contains some associated wiring. Splice diagrams show the entire splice and provide references to other sections the splices serves. Splice Information only contains splice diagrams that are not shown in their entirety somewhere else in the wiring diagrams. Connector Pin-Outs shows each connector and the circuits involved with that connector. The connectors are identified using the name/number on the diagram pages. Removal REMOVAL 1. Disconnect battery. 2. Release Connector Lock (2). 3. Disconnect the connector (3) being repaired from its mating half/component. 4. Remove the dress cover (if applicable) (1). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4378 5. Release the Secondary Terminal Lock, if required (1). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4379 6. Position the connector locking finger away from the terminal using the proper special tool. Pull on the wire to remove the terminal from the connector. Installation Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4380 INSTALLATION 1. Insert the removed terminal in the same cavity on the repair connector. 2. Repeat steps for each terminal in the connector, being sure that all wires are inserted into the proper cavities. For additional connector pin-out identification, refer to the wiring diagrams. 3. When the connector is re-assembled, the secondary terminal lock must be placed in the locked position to prevent terminal push out. 4. Replace dress cover (if applicable). 5. Connect connector to its mating half/component. 6. Connect battery and test all affected systems. Removal REMOVAL 1. Disconnect the battery. 2. Locate the diode in the harness, and remove the protective covering. 3. Remove the diode from the harness, pay attention to the current flow direction (1) (2) (3). Installation INSTALLATION 1. Remove the insulation from the wires in the harness. Only remove enough insulation to solder in the new diode. 2. Install the new diode in the harness, making sure current flow is correct. If necessary, refer to the appropriate wiring diagram for current flow. 3. Solder the connection together using rosin core type solder only. Do not use acid core solder. 4. Tape the diode to the harness using electrical tape. Make sure the diode is completely sealed from the elements. 5. Re-connect the battery and test affected systems. Removal REMOVAL 1. Follow steps for removing terminals described in the connector removal section. 2. Cut the wire 6 inches from the back of the connector. Installation INSTALLATION 1. Select a wire from the terminal repair kit that best matches the color and gage of the wire being repaired. 2. Cut the repair wire to the proper length and remove one-half (1/2) inch of insulation. 3. Splice the repair wire to the wire harness (see wire splicing procedure). See: Service Procedures/Wire Splicing 4. Insert the repaired wire into the connector. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4381 5. Install the connector locking wedge, if required, and reconnect the connector to its mating half/component. 6. Re-tape the wire harness starting at 1-1/2 inches behind the connector and 2 inches past the repair. 7. Connect battery and test all affected systems. Wire Splicing STANDARD PROCEDURE - WIRE SPLICING When splicing a wire, it is important that the correct gage be used as shown in the wiring diagrams. 1. Remove one-half (1/2) inch of insulation from each wire that needs to be spliced. 2. Place a piece of adhesive lined heat shrink tubing on one side of the wire. Make sure the tubing will be long enough to cover and seal the entire repair area. 3. Place the strands of wire overlapping each other inside of the splice clip (1). 4. Using crimping tool (1), Mopar p/n 05019912AA, crimp the splice clip and wires together. 5. Solder (3) the connection (2) together using rosin core type solder (1) only. CAUTION: DO NOT USE ACID CORE SOLDER. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4382 6. Center the heat shrink tubing (2) over the joint and heat using a heat gun. Heat the joint until the tubing is tightly sealed and sealant (1) comes out of both ends of the tubing. Special Tools WIRING/TERMINAL PROBING TOOL PACKAGE 6807 TERMINAL PICK TOOL SET 6680 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4383 TERMINAL REMOVING TOOLS 6932 AND 8638 TERMINAL REMOVING TOOL 6934 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4384 Body Control Module: Diagnostic Aids Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) Sensitive Devices STANDARD PROCEDURE - ELECTROSTATIC DISCHARGE (ESD) SENSITIVE DEVICES All ESD sensitive components are solid state and a symbol is used to indicate this. When handling any component with this symbol, comply with the following procedures to reduce the possibility of electrostatic charge build up on the body and inadvertent discharge into the component. If it is not known whether the part is ESD sensitive, assume that it is. 1. Always touch a known good ground before handling the part. This should be repeated while handling the part and more frequently after sliding across a seat, sitting down from a standing position, or walking a distance. 2. Avoid touching electrical terminals of the part, unless instructed to do so by a written procedure. 3. When using a voltmeter, be sure to connect the ground lead first. 4. Do not remove the part from it's protective packing until it is time to install the part. 5. Before removing the part from it's package, ground the package to a known good ground on the vehicle. Testing Of Voltage Potential STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING OF VOLTAGE POTENTIAL 1. Connect the ground lead of a voltmeter to a known good ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the voltmeter to the selected test point. The vehicle ignition may need to be turned ON to check voltage. Refer to the appropriate test procedure. Testing For Continuity Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4385 STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING FOR CONTINUITY 1. Remove the fuse (1) for the circuit being checked or, disconnect the battery. 2. Connect one lead of the ohmmeter to one side of the circuit being tested 3. Connect the other lead to the other end of the circuit being tested. Low or no resistance means good continuity. Testing For A Short To Ground STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING FOR A SHORT TO GROUND 1. Remove the fuse and disconnect all items involved with the fuse. 2. Connect a test light or a voltmeter across the terminals of the fuse. 3. Starting at the fuse block, wiggle the wiring harness about six to eight inches apart and watch the voltmeter/test lamp. 4. If the voltmeter registers voltage or the test lamp glows, there is a short to ground in that general area of the wiring harness. Testing For A Short To Ground On Fuses Powering Several Loads STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING FOR A SHORT TO GROUND ON FUSES POWERING SEVERAL LOADS 1. Refer to the wiring diagrams and disconnect or isolate all items on the suspected fused circuits. 2. Replace the blown fuse. 3. Supply power to the fuse by turning ON the ignition switch or re-connecting the battery. 4. Start connecting or energizing the items in the fuse circuit one at a time. When the fuse blows the circuit with the short to ground has been isolated. Testing For A Voltage Drop STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING FOR A VOLTAGE DROP Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4386 1. Connect the positive lead of the voltmeter to the side of the circuit closest to the battery. 2. Connect the other lead of the voltmeter to the other side of the switch, component or circuit. 3. Operate the item. 4. The voltmeter will show the difference in voltage between the two points. Troubleshooting Wiring Problems DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING - WIRING HARNESS TROUBLESHOOTING TOOLS When diagnosing a problem in an electrical circuit there are several common tools necessary. These tools are listed and explained below. - Jumper Wire - This is a test wire used to connect two points of a circuit. It can be used to bypass an open in a circuit. WARNING: Never use a jumper wire across a load, such as a motor, connected between a battery feed and ground. - Voltmeter - Used to check for voltage on a circuit. Always connect the black lead to a known good ground and the red lead to the positive side of the circuit. CAUTION: Most of the electrical components used in today's vehicles are Solid State. When checking voltages in these circuits, use a meter with a 10 - megohm or greater impedance rating. - Ohmmeter - Used to check the resistance between two points of a circuit. Low or no resistance in a circuit means good continuity. CAUTION: Most of the electrical components used in today's vehicles are Solid State. When checking resistance in these circuits use a meter with a 10 - megohm or greater impedance rating. In addition, make sure the power is disconnected from the circuit. Circuits that are powered up by the vehicle's electrical system can cause damage to the equipment and provide false readings. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4387 - Probing Tools - These tools are used for probing terminals in connectors. Select the proper size tool from Special Tool Package 6807, and insert the probing end (2) into the terminal being tested. Use the other end of the tool (1) to insert the meter probe. INTERMITTENT AND POOR CONNECTIONS Most intermittent electrical problems are caused by faulty electrical connections or wiring. It is also possible for a sticking component or relay to cause a problem. Before condemning a component or wiring assembly, check the following items. - Connectors are fully seated - Spread terminals, or terminal push out - Terminals in the wiring assembly are fully seated into the connector/component and locked into position - Dirt or corrosion on the terminals. Any amount of corrosion or dirt could cause an intermittent problem - Damaged connector/component casing exposing the item to dirt or moisture - Wire insulation that has rubbed through causing a short to ground - Some or all of the wiring strands broken inside of the insulation - Wiring broken inside of the insulation TROUBLESHOOTING WIRING PROBLEMS When troubleshooting wiring problems there are six steps which can aid in the procedure. The steps are listed and explained below. Always check for non-factory items added to the vehicle before doing any diagnosis. If the vehicle is equipped with these items, disconnect them to verify these add-on items are not the cause of the problem. 1. Verify the problem. 2. Verify any related symptoms. Do this by performing operational checks on components that are in the same circuit. Refer to the wiring diagrams. 3. Analyze the symptoms. Use the wiring diagrams to determine what the circuit is doing, where the problem most likely is occurring and where the diagnosis will continue. 4. Isolate the problem area. 5. Repair the problem area. 6. Verify the proper operation. For this step, check for proper operation of all items on the repaired circuit. Refer to the wiring diagrams. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 198 Engine Control Module: Locations Component ID 198 Component ID: 198 Component : MODULE-POWERTRAIN CONTROL Connector: Name : MODULE-POWERTRAIN CONTROL C1 Color : BLACK/BLACK # of pins : 38 Qualifier : (DIESEL) Pin Circuit Description 123456- 789-10 11 F1 20PK/WT FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) 12 F1 20PK/WT FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) 13 14 15 16 17 18 - - Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 198 > Page 4392 19 T160 20DG/WT SENSOR GROUND 20 T5 20DG/YL AUTOSTICK (ERS)-TOW/HAUL SIGNAL 21 22 23 24 25 26 - 27 F856 20YL/PK 5 VOLT SUPPLY 28 29 A918 20RD FUSED B(+) 30 T751 20YL IGNITION START 31 32 33 34 D65 20WT/LG CAN C BUS (+) 35 D64 20WT/LB CAN C BUS (-) 36 38 Component Location - 29 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 198 > Page 4393 Component Location - 6 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 198 > Page 4394 Connector: Name : MODULE-POWERTRAIN CONTROL C1 Color : BLACK/BLACK # of pins : 38 Qualifier : (GAS) Pin Circuit Description 1 K98 18DB/YL COIL CONTROL NO. 8 2-3 K97 18DB/YL COIL CONTROL NO. 7 3 K97 18BR COIL CONTROL NO. 7 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 198 > Page 4395 4 K28 18BR/LB INJECTOR CONTROL NO. 8 5 K26 18BR/YL INJECTOR CONTROL NO. 7 6-7-8-9 Z130 16BK/BR GROUND 10 A918 16RD FUSED B(+) 11 F202 20PK/GY FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) 12 F1 20PK/WT FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (OFF-RUN-START) 13 - 14 - 15 - 16 - 17 - 18 Z131 16BK/DG GROUND 19 Z951 16BK/YL GROUND 20 G6 16VT/GY OIL PRESSURE SIGNAL 21 - 22 - 23 - 24 A804 18RD/GY GEN SENSE 25 - 26 - 27 F856 20YL/PK 5 VOLT SUPPLY 28 K452 20BR/LB MDS SOL CONTROL NO. 4 29 A918 16RD FUSED B(+) 30 T751 20YL IGNITION START 31 K141 20DB/YL O2 1/2 SIGNAL 32 K902 20BR/DG O2 RETURN (UPSTREAM) 33 K243 20BR O2 2/2 SIGNAL 34 D65 20WT/LG CAN C BUS (+) 35 D64 20WT/LB CAN C BUS (-) 36 - 37 - 38 K342 16BR/WT ASD CONTROL OUTPUT Component Location - 29 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 198 > Page 4396 Component Location - 6 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 198 > Page 4397 Connector: Name : MODULE-POWERTRAIN CONTROL C2 Color : BLACK/ORANGE # of pins : 38 Qualifier : (GAS) Pin Circuit Description 1 K10 18DB/OR COIL CONTROL NO. 6 2 K16 18DB/YL COIL CONTROL NO. 5 3 K15 18DB/GY COIL CONTROL NO. 4 4 K58 18BR/VT INJECTOR CONTROL NO. 6 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 198 > Page 4398 5 K38 18BR/OR INJECTOR CONTROL NO. 5 6 K447 20TN/YL ETC MOTOR (+) 7 K18 18DB/OR COIL CONTROL NO. 3 8 K35 20DB/VT EGR SOL CONTROL 9 K17 18DB/TN COIL CONTROL NO. 2 10 K19 18DB/DG COIL CONTROL NO. 1 11 K14 18BR/TN INJECTOR CONTROL NO. 4 12 K13 18BR/LB INJECTOR CONTROL NO. 3 13 K12 18BR/DB INJECTOR CONTROL NO. 2 14 K11 18BR/YL INJECTOR CONTROL NO. 1 15 K922 20BR/DB TP SENSOR RETURN 16 K453 20BR/DG MDS SOL CONTROL NO. 6 17 K199 20BR/VT O2 2/1 HEATER CONTROL 18 K99 20BR/LG O2 1/1 HEATER CONTROL SUPPLY 19 K20 18BR/GY GEN FIELD CONTROL 20 K2 20VT/OR ECT SIGNAL 21 K22 20BR/OR TP NO. 1 SIGNAL 22 K34 20DB/LG EGR SIGNAL 23 K1 20VT/BR MAP SIGNAL 24 K942 20BR/LG KNOCK SENSOR NO. 1 RETURN 25 K42 20DB/YL KNOCK SENSOR NO. 1 SIGNAL 26 - 27 K900 20DB/DG SENSOR GROUND 28 K122 20BR/DG TP NO. 2 SIGNAL 29 F855 20PK/YL 5 VOLT SUPPLY 30 K21 20DB/LG IAT SIGNAL 31 K41 20DB/LB O2 1/1 SIGNAL 32 K904 20DB/DG O2 RETURN (DOWNSTREAM) 33 K43 20DB/LG O2 2/1 SIGNAL 34 K44 20DB/GY CMP SIGNAL 35 K24 20BR/LB CKP SIGNAL 36 K242 20BR/WT KNOCK SENSOR NO. 2 SIGNAL 37 K924 20WT/BR KNOCK SENSOR NO. 2 RETURN 38 K448 20TN/OR ETC MOTOR (-) Component Location - 29 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 198 > Page 4399 Component Location - 6 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 198 > Page 4400 Connector: Name : MODULE-POWERTRAIN CONTROL C3 Color : BLACK/NATURAL # of pins : 38 Qualifier : (GAS) Pin Circuit Description 1-2-3 K51 20BR/WT ASD CONTROL 4-- Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 198 > Page 4401 5 V35 20VT/OR S/C VENT SOL CONTROL 5 K454 20BR/OR MDS SOL CONTROL NO. 7 6 K451 20BR/WT MDS SOL CONTROL NO. 1 7 V32 20VT/YL SPEED CONTROL SUPPLY 8-9 K299 20BR/WT O2 1/2 HEATER CONTROL SUPPLY 10 K399 18BR/GY O2 2/2 HEATER CONTROL 11 C13 20LB/OR A/C CLUTCH CONTROL 12 V36 20VT/YL S/C VACUUM SOL CONTROL 13 - 14 V32 20VT/YL BRAKE SWITCH NO. 2 SIGNAL 15 V937 20VT/BR S/C SWITCH RETURN 16 K167 20BR/YL APPS NO. 1 RETURN 17 K400 20BR/VT APPS NO. 2 RETURN 18 V38 20VT/OR S/C SWITCH NO. 2 SIGNAL 19 K342 16BR/WT ASD CONTROL OUTPUT 20 K52 20DB/WT EVAP PURGE SOL CONTROL 21 T41 20YL/DB TRS T41 SIGNAL (P/N) 22 G113 20VT PTO SENSE 22 G113 18PK/YL PTO SENSE 23 B29 20DG/WT BRAKE SWITCH NO. 1 SIGNAL 24 - 25 K23 20BR/WT APPS NO. 1 SIGNAL 26 - 27 T5 20DG/YL AUTOSTICK (ERS)-TOW/HAUL SIGNAL 28 K342 16BR/WT ASD CONTROL OUTPUT 29 K70 20DB/BR EVAP PURGE SOL SIGNAL 30 K66 20DB/WT P/S SWITCH SIGNAL 31 - 32 - 33 G24 20VT/BR OIL TEMPERATURE SIGNAL 34 V37 20VT S/C SWITCH NO. 1 SIGNAL 35 K107 20VT/WT ESM SIGNAL 36 K29 20WT/BR APPS NO. 2 SIGNAL 37 K31 20BR FUEL PUMP CONTROL 38 T752 20DG/OR STARTER SOLENOID CONTROL Component Location - 29 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 198 > Page 4402 Component Location - 6 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 198 > Page 4403 Connector: Name : MODULE-POWERTRAIN CONTROL C4 Color : BLACK/GREEN # of pins : 38 Qualifier : (DIESEL) Pin Circuit Description 1 T160 20YL/GY SENSOR GROUND 2 T259 20YL/DG 4C CONTROL 3- Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 198 > Page 4404 4 T140 20YL/GY MS CONTROL 56 T219 20YL/LG 2C CONTROL 78 T59 20YL/LB UD CONTROL 910 T20 20DG/BK L/R CONTROL 11 T118 20DG LP VFS CONTROL 12 Z133 18BK/LG GROUND 13 Z133 18BK/LG GROUND 14 Z133 18BK/LG GROUND 15 T1 20DG/LB TRS T1 SIGNAL 16 T3 20DG/DB TRS T3 SIGNAL 17 T6 20DG TOW/HAUL OVERDRIVE OFF SWITCH SIGNAL 18 T515 20YL/DB TRANSMISSION CONTROL 19 T16 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT 20 T48 20BR/YL 4C PRESSURE SIGNAL 21 T29 20YL/WT UD PRESSURE SIGNAL 22 T9 20DG/TN OD PRESSURE SIGNAL 23 24 25 26 T4 20DG/LB TRS T2 SIGNAL 27 T41 20YL/DB TRS T41 SIGNAL (P/N) 28 T16 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT 29 T50 20DG/PK L/R PRESSURE SIGNAL 30 T147 20DG/YL 2C PRESSURE SIGNAL 31 T38 20YL/BR LINE PRESSURE SIGNAL 32 T14 20DG/BR OUTPUT SPEED SIGNAL 33 T52 20DG/OR INPUT SPEED SIGNAL 34 T13 20DG/VT SPEED SENSOR GROUND 35 T54 20DG/OR TRANSMISSION TEMPERATURE SIGNAL 36 37 T42 20DG/YL TRS T42 SIGNAL 38 T16 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT Component Location - 29 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 198 > Page 4405 Component Location - 6 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 198 > Page 4406 Connector: Name : MODULE-POWERTRAIN CONTROL C4 Color : BLACK/GREEN # of pins : 38 Qualifier : (GAS) Pin Circuit Description 1 T60 20YL/GY OD SOLENOID CONTROL 2 T259 20YL/DG 4C CONTROL 2 T59 20YL/LB UD CONTROL 3-- Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 198 > Page 4407 4 T140 20YL/GY MS CONTROL 5-6 T219 20YL/LG 2C CONTROL 6 T19 18YL/DB 2/4 SOLENOID CONTROL 7-8 T59 20YL/LB UD CONTROL 9-10 T20 20DG/WT L/R CONTROL 11 T118 20DG LP VFS CONTROL 12 Z908 18BK GROUND 13 Z977 18BK GROUND 14 Z904 18BK GROUND 15 T1 20DG/LB TRS T1 SIGNAL 16 T3 20DG/DB TRS T3 SIGNAL 17 T6 20DG TOW/HAUL OVERDRIVE OFF SWITCH SIGNAL 18 T515 20YL/DB TRANSMISSION CONTROL 19 T16 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT 20 T48 20BR/YL 4C PRESSURE SIGNAL 21 T29 20YL/WT UD PRESSURE SIGNAL 22 T9 20DG/TN OD PRESSURE SIGNAL 23 - 24 - 25 - 26 T4 20DG/LB TRS T2 SIGNAL 27 - 28 T16 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT 29 T50 20DG/PK L/R PRESSURE SIGNAL 30 T147 20DG/YL 2C PRESSURE SIGNAL 30 T47 18YL/DG 2/4 PRESSURE SIGNAL 31 T38 20YL/BR LINE PRESSURE SIGNAL 32 T14 20DG/BR OUTPUT SPEED SIGNAL 33 T52 20DG/OR INPUT SPEED SIGNAL 34 T13 20DG/VT SPEED SENSOR GROUND 35 T54 20DG/OR TRANSMISSION TEMPERATURE SIGNAL 36 - 37 T42 20DG/YL TRS T42 SIGNAL 38 T16 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT Component Location - 29 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 198 > Page 4408 Component Location - 6 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 198 > Page 4409 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 198 > Page 4410 Engine Control Module: Locations Component ID 211 Component ID: 211 Component : MODULE-POWERTRAIN CONTROL Connector: Name : MODULE-POWERTRAIN CONTROL C1 Color : BLACK/BLACK # of pins : 38 Qualifier : (DIESEL) Pin Circuit Description 123456- 789-10 11 F1 20PK/WT FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) 12 F1 20PK/WT FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) 13 14 15 16 17 18 - - Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 198 > Page 4411 19 T160 20DG/WT SENSOR GROUND 20 T5 20DG/YL AUTOSTICK (ERS)-TOW/HAUL SIGNAL 21 22 23 24 25 26 - 27 F856 20YL/PK 5 VOLT SUPPLY 28 29 A918 20RD FUSED B(+) 30 T751 20YL IGNITION START 31 32 33 34 D65 20WT/LG CAN C BUS (+) 35 D64 20WT/LB CAN C BUS (-) 36 38 Component Location - 29 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 198 > Page 4412 Component Location - 6 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 198 > Page 4413 Connector: Name : MODULE-POWERTRAIN CONTROL C1 Color : BLACK/BLACK # of pins : 38 Qualifier : (GAS) Pin Circuit Description 1 K98 18DB/YL COIL CONTROL NO. 8 2-3 K97 18DB/YL COIL CONTROL NO. 7 3 K97 18BR COIL CONTROL NO. 7 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 198 > Page 4414 4 K28 18BR/LB INJECTOR CONTROL NO. 8 5 K26 18BR/YL INJECTOR CONTROL NO. 7 6-7-8-9 Z130 16BK/BR GROUND 10 A918 16RD FUSED B(+) 11 F202 20PK/GY FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) 12 F1 20PK/WT FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (OFF-RUN-START) 13 - 14 - 15 - 16 - 17 - 18 Z131 16BK/DG GROUND 19 Z951 16BK/YL GROUND 20 G6 16VT/GY OIL PRESSURE SIGNAL 21 - 22 - 23 - 24 A804 18RD/GY GEN SENSE 25 - 26 - 27 F856 20YL/PK 5 VOLT SUPPLY 28 K452 20BR/LB MDS SOL CONTROL NO. 4 29 A918 16RD FUSED B(+) 30 T751 20YL IGNITION START 31 K141 20DB/YL O2 1/2 SIGNAL 32 K902 20BR/DG O2 RETURN (UPSTREAM) 33 K243 20BR O2 2/2 SIGNAL 34 D65 20WT/LG CAN C BUS (+) 35 D64 20WT/LB CAN C BUS (-) 36 - 37 - 38 K342 16BR/WT ASD CONTROL OUTPUT Component Location - 29 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 198 > Page 4415 Component Location - 6 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 198 > Page 4416 Connector: Name : MODULE-POWERTRAIN CONTROL C2 Color : BLACK/ORANGE # of pins : 38 Qualifier : (GAS) Pin Circuit Description 1 K10 18DB/OR COIL CONTROL NO. 6 2 K16 18DB/YL COIL CONTROL NO. 5 3 K15 18DB/GY COIL CONTROL NO. 4 4 K58 18BR/VT INJECTOR CONTROL NO. 6 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 198 > Page 4417 5 K38 18BR/OR INJECTOR CONTROL NO. 5 6 K447 20TN/YL ETC MOTOR (+) 7 K18 18DB/OR COIL CONTROL NO. 3 8 K35 20DB/VT EGR SOL CONTROL 9 K17 18DB/TN COIL CONTROL NO. 2 10 K19 18DB/DG COIL CONTROL NO. 1 11 K14 18BR/TN INJECTOR CONTROL NO. 4 12 K13 18BR/LB INJECTOR CONTROL NO. 3 13 K12 18BR/DB INJECTOR CONTROL NO. 2 14 K11 18BR/YL INJECTOR CONTROL NO. 1 15 K922 20BR/DB TP SENSOR RETURN 16 K453 20BR/DG MDS SOL CONTROL NO. 6 17 K199 20BR/VT O2 2/1 HEATER CONTROL 18 K99 20BR/LG O2 1/1 HEATER CONTROL SUPPLY 19 K20 18BR/GY GEN FIELD CONTROL 20 K2 20VT/OR ECT SIGNAL 21 K22 20BR/OR TP NO. 1 SIGNAL 22 K34 20DB/LG EGR SIGNAL 23 K1 20VT/BR MAP SIGNAL 24 K942 20BR/LG KNOCK SENSOR NO. 1 RETURN 25 K42 20DB/YL KNOCK SENSOR NO. 1 SIGNAL 26 - 27 K900 20DB/DG SENSOR GROUND 28 K122 20BR/DG TP NO. 2 SIGNAL 29 F855 20PK/YL 5 VOLT SUPPLY 30 K21 20DB/LG IAT SIGNAL 31 K41 20DB/LB O2 1/1 SIGNAL 32 K904 20DB/DG O2 RETURN (DOWNSTREAM) 33 K43 20DB/LG O2 2/1 SIGNAL 34 K44 20DB/GY CMP SIGNAL 35 K24 20BR/LB CKP SIGNAL 36 K242 20BR/WT KNOCK SENSOR NO. 2 SIGNAL 37 K924 20WT/BR KNOCK SENSOR NO. 2 RETURN 38 K448 20TN/OR ETC MOTOR (-) Component Location - 29 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 198 > Page 4418 Component Location - 6 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 198 > Page 4419 Connector: Name : MODULE-POWERTRAIN CONTROL C3 Color : BLACK/NATURAL # of pins : 38 Qualifier : (GAS) Pin Circuit Description 1-2-3 K51 20BR/WT ASD CONTROL 4-- Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 198 > Page 4420 5 V35 20VT/OR S/C VENT SOL CONTROL 5 K454 20BR/OR MDS SOL CONTROL NO. 7 6 K451 20BR/WT MDS SOL CONTROL NO. 1 7 V32 20VT/YL SPEED CONTROL SUPPLY 8-9 K299 20BR/WT O2 1/2 HEATER CONTROL SUPPLY 10 K399 18BR/GY O2 2/2 HEATER CONTROL 11 C13 20LB/OR A/C CLUTCH CONTROL 12 V36 20VT/YL S/C VACUUM SOL CONTROL 13 - 14 V32 20VT/YL BRAKE SWITCH NO. 2 SIGNAL 15 V937 20VT/BR S/C SWITCH RETURN 16 K167 20BR/YL APPS NO. 1 RETURN 17 K400 20BR/VT APPS NO. 2 RETURN 18 V38 20VT/OR S/C SWITCH NO. 2 SIGNAL 19 K342 16BR/WT ASD CONTROL OUTPUT 20 K52 20DB/WT EVAP PURGE SOL CONTROL 21 T41 20YL/DB TRS T41 SIGNAL (P/N) 22 G113 20VT PTO SENSE 22 G113 18PK/YL PTO SENSE 23 B29 20DG/WT BRAKE SWITCH NO. 1 SIGNAL 24 - 25 K23 20BR/WT APPS NO. 1 SIGNAL 26 - 27 T5 20DG/YL AUTOSTICK (ERS)-TOW/HAUL SIGNAL 28 K342 16BR/WT ASD CONTROL OUTPUT 29 K70 20DB/BR EVAP PURGE SOL SIGNAL 30 K66 20DB/WT P/S SWITCH SIGNAL 31 - 32 - 33 G24 20VT/BR OIL TEMPERATURE SIGNAL 34 V37 20VT S/C SWITCH NO. 1 SIGNAL 35 K107 20VT/WT ESM SIGNAL 36 K29 20WT/BR APPS NO. 2 SIGNAL 37 K31 20BR FUEL PUMP CONTROL 38 T752 20DG/OR STARTER SOLENOID CONTROL Component Location - 29 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 198 > Page 4421 Component Location - 6 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 198 > Page 4422 Connector: Name : MODULE-POWERTRAIN CONTROL C4 Color : BLACK/GREEN # of pins : 38 Qualifier : (DIESEL) Pin Circuit Description 1 T160 20YL/GY SENSOR GROUND 2 T259 20YL/DG 4C CONTROL 3- Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 198 > Page 4423 4 T140 20YL/GY MS CONTROL 56 T219 20YL/LG 2C CONTROL 78 T59 20YL/LB UD CONTROL 910 T20 20DG/BK L/R CONTROL 11 T118 20DG LP VFS CONTROL 12 Z133 18BK/LG GROUND 13 Z133 18BK/LG GROUND 14 Z133 18BK/LG GROUND 15 T1 20DG/LB TRS T1 SIGNAL 16 T3 20DG/DB TRS T3 SIGNAL 17 T6 20DG TOW/HAUL OVERDRIVE OFF SWITCH SIGNAL 18 T515 20YL/DB TRANSMISSION CONTROL 19 T16 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT 20 T48 20BR/YL 4C PRESSURE SIGNAL 21 T29 20YL/WT UD PRESSURE SIGNAL 22 T9 20DG/TN OD PRESSURE SIGNAL 23 24 25 26 T4 20DG/LB TRS T2 SIGNAL 27 T41 20YL/DB TRS T41 SIGNAL (P/N) 28 T16 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT 29 T50 20DG/PK L/R PRESSURE SIGNAL 30 T147 20DG/YL 2C PRESSURE SIGNAL 31 T38 20YL/BR LINE PRESSURE SIGNAL 32 T14 20DG/BR OUTPUT SPEED SIGNAL 33 T52 20DG/OR INPUT SPEED SIGNAL 34 T13 20DG/VT SPEED SENSOR GROUND 35 T54 20DG/OR TRANSMISSION TEMPERATURE SIGNAL 36 37 T42 20DG/YL TRS T42 SIGNAL 38 T16 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT Component Location - 29 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 198 > Page 4424 Component Location - 6 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 198 > Page 4425 Connector: Name : MODULE-POWERTRAIN CONTROL C4 Color : BLACK/GREEN # of pins : 38 Qualifier : (GAS) Pin Circuit Description 1 T60 20YL/GY OD SOLENOID CONTROL 2 T259 20YL/DG 4C CONTROL 2 T59 20YL/LB UD CONTROL 3-- Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 198 > Page 4426 4 T140 20YL/GY MS CONTROL 5-6 T219 20YL/LG 2C CONTROL 6 T19 18YL/DB 2/4 SOLENOID CONTROL 7-8 T59 20YL/LB UD CONTROL 9-10 T20 20DG/WT L/R CONTROL 11 T118 20DG LP VFS CONTROL 12 Z908 18BK GROUND 13 Z977 18BK GROUND 14 Z904 18BK GROUND 15 T1 20DG/LB TRS T1 SIGNAL 16 T3 20DG/DB TRS T3 SIGNAL 17 T6 20DG TOW/HAUL OVERDRIVE OFF SWITCH SIGNAL 18 T515 20YL/DB TRANSMISSION CONTROL 19 T16 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT 20 T48 20BR/YL 4C PRESSURE SIGNAL 21 T29 20YL/WT UD PRESSURE SIGNAL 22 T9 20DG/TN OD PRESSURE SIGNAL 23 - 24 - 25 - 26 T4 20DG/LB TRS T2 SIGNAL 27 - 28 T16 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT 29 T50 20DG/PK L/R PRESSURE SIGNAL 30 T147 20DG/YL 2C PRESSURE SIGNAL 30 T47 18YL/DG 2/4 PRESSURE SIGNAL 31 T38 20YL/BR LINE PRESSURE SIGNAL 32 T14 20DG/BR OUTPUT SPEED SIGNAL 33 T52 20DG/OR INPUT SPEED SIGNAL 34 T13 20DG/VT SPEED SENSOR GROUND 35 T54 20DG/OR TRANSMISSION TEMPERATURE SIGNAL 36 - 37 T42 20DG/YL TRS T42 SIGNAL 38 T16 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT Component Location - 29 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 198 > Page 4427 Component Location - 6 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 198 > Page 4428 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Engine Control Module: Diagram Information and Instructions Warnings WARNINGS - GENERAL WARNINGS provide information to prevent personal injury and vehicle damage. Below is a list of general warnings that should be followed any time a vehicle is being serviced. WARNING: Always wear safety glasses for eye protection. WARNING: Use safety stands anytime a procedure requires being under a vehicle. WARNING: Be sure that the ignition switch always is in the off position, unless the procedure requires it to be on. WARNING: Set the parking brake when working on any vehicle. An automatic transmission should be in park. A manual transmission should be in neutral. WARNING: Operate the engine only in a well-ventilated area. WARNING: Keep away from moving parts when the engine is running, especially the fan and belts. WARNING: To prevent serious burns, avoid contact with hot parts such as the radiator, exhaust manifold(s), tail pipe, catalytic converter and muffler. WARNING: Do not allow flame or sparks near the battery. Gases are always present in and around the battery. WARNING: Always remove rings, watches, loose hanging jewelry and avoid loose clothing. How to Use Wiring Diagrams DESCRIPTION - HOW TO USE WIRING DIAGRAMS DaimlerChrysler Corporation wiring diagrams are designed to provide information regarding the vehicles wiring content. In order to effectively use the wiring diagrams to diagnose and repair DaimlerChrysler Corporation vehicles, it is important to understand all of their features and characteristics. Diagrams are arranged such that the power (B+) side of the circuit is placed near the top of the page, and the ground (B-) side of the circuit is placed near the bottom of the page. All switches, components, and modules are shown in the at rest position with the doors closed and the key removed from the ignition. Components are shown two ways. A solid line around a component indicates that the component is complete. A dashed line around the component indicates that the component is being shown is not complete. Incomplete components have a reference number to indicate the page where the component is shown complete. It is important to realize that no attempt is made on the diagrams to represent components and wiring as they appear on the vehicle. For example, a short piece of wire is treated the same as a long one. In addition, switches and other components are shown as simply as possible, with regard to function only. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4431 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4432 SYMBOLS International symbols are used throughout the wiring diagrams. These symbols are consistent with those being used around the world. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4433 TERMINOLOGY This is a list of terms and definitions used in the wiring diagrams. LHD - Left Hand Drive Vehicles RHD - Right Hand Drive Vehicles ATX - Automatic Transmissions-Front Wheel Drive MTX Manual Transmissions-Front Wheel Drive Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4434 AT - Automatic Transmissions-Rear Wheel Drive MT - Manual Transmissions-Rear Wheel Drive SOHC - Single Over Head Cam Engine DOHC - Double Over Head Cam Engine Export - Vehicles Built For Sale In Markets Other Than North America Except Export - Vehicles Built For Sale In North America Circuit Functions DESCRIPTION - CIRCUIT FUNCTIONS All circuits in the diagrams use an alpha/numeric code to identify the wire and it's function. To identify which circuit code applies to a system, refer to the Circuit Identification Code Chart. This chart shows the main circuits only and does not show the secondary codes that may apply to some models. Circuit Information DESCRIPTION - CIRCUIT INFORMATION Each wire shown in the diagrams contains a code which identifies the main circuit, a specific part of the main circuit, gage of wire, and color. An example would be A 2 18 LB/YL. This is a Battery Feed circuit, level two, eighteen gauge, light blue with a yellow tracer. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4435 Connector, Ground and Splice Information DESCRIPTION - CONNECTOR, GROUND AND SPLICE INFORMATION CAUTION: Not all connectors are serviced. Some connectors are serviced only with a harness. A typical example might be the Supplemental Restraint System connectors. Always check parts availability before attempting a repair. IDENTIFICATION In-line connectors are identified by a number, as follows: - In-line connectors located in the engine compartment are C100 series numbers. - In-line connectors located in the instrument panel area are C200 series numbers. - In-line connectors located in the body are C300 series numbers. - Jumper harness connectors are C400 series numbers. - Grounds and ground connectors are identified with a "G" and follow the same series numbering as the in-line connectors. - Splices are identified with an "S" and follow the same series numbering as the in-line connectors. In addition, S001-S099 numbers are located in the engine compartment. - Component connectors are identified by the component name instead of a number. Multiple connectors on a component use a C1, C2, etc. identifier. LOCATIONS Vehicle/Locations contains the master connector/ground/splice location index charts with hyperlinks to the applicable location illustrations. The illustrations contain the connector name (or number)/ground number/splice number and component identification. The abbreviation T/O is used in the component location section to indicate a point in which the wiring harness branches out to a component. The abbreviation N/S means Not Shown in the illustrations Section Identification and Information DESCRIPTION - SECTION IDENTIFICATION AND INFORMATION The wiring diagrams are grouped into individual sections. If a component is most likely found in a particular group, it will be shown complete (all wires, Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4436 connectors, and pins) within that group. For example, the Auto Shutdown Relay is most likely to be found in Powertrain Management, so it is shown there complete. It can, however, be shown partially in another group if it contains some associated wiring. Splice diagrams show the entire splice and provide references to other sections the splices serves. Splice Information only contains splice diagrams that are not shown in their entirety somewhere else in the wiring diagrams. Connector Pin-Outs shows each connector and the circuits involved with that connector. The connectors are identified using the name/number on the diagram pages. Removal REMOVAL 1. Disconnect battery. 2. Release Connector Lock (2). 3. Disconnect the connector (3) being repaired from its mating half/component. 4. Remove the dress cover (if applicable) (1). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4437 5. Release the Secondary Terminal Lock, if required (1). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4438 6. Position the connector locking finger away from the terminal using the proper special tool. Pull on the wire to remove the terminal from the connector. Installation Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4439 INSTALLATION 1. Insert the removed terminal in the same cavity on the repair connector. 2. Repeat steps for each terminal in the connector, being sure that all wires are inserted into the proper cavities. For additional connector pin-out identification, refer to the wiring diagrams. 3. When the connector is re-assembled, the secondary terminal lock must be placed in the locked position to prevent terminal push out. 4. Replace dress cover (if applicable). 5. Connect connector to its mating half/component. 6. Connect battery and test all affected systems. Removal REMOVAL 1. Disconnect the battery. 2. Locate the diode in the harness, and remove the protective covering. 3. Remove the diode from the harness, pay attention to the current flow direction (1) (2) (3). Installation INSTALLATION 1. Remove the insulation from the wires in the harness. Only remove enough insulation to solder in the new diode. 2. Install the new diode in the harness, making sure current flow is correct. If necessary, refer to the appropriate wiring diagram for current flow. 3. Solder the connection together using rosin core type solder only. Do not use acid core solder. 4. Tape the diode to the harness using electrical tape. Make sure the diode is completely sealed from the elements. 5. Re-connect the battery and test affected systems. Removal REMOVAL 1. Follow steps for removing terminals described in the connector removal section. 2. Cut the wire 6 inches from the back of the connector. Installation INSTALLATION 1. Select a wire from the terminal repair kit that best matches the color and gage of the wire being repaired. 2. Cut the repair wire to the proper length and remove one-half (1/2) inch of insulation. 3. Splice the repair wire to the wire harness (see wire splicing procedure). See: Service Procedures/Wire Splicing 4. Insert the repaired wire into the connector. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4440 5. Install the connector locking wedge, if required, and reconnect the connector to its mating half/component. 6. Re-tape the wire harness starting at 1-1/2 inches behind the connector and 2 inches past the repair. 7. Connect battery and test all affected systems. Wire Splicing STANDARD PROCEDURE - WIRE SPLICING When splicing a wire, it is important that the correct gage be used as shown in the wiring diagrams. 1. Remove one-half (1/2) inch of insulation from each wire that needs to be spliced. 2. Place a piece of adhesive lined heat shrink tubing on one side of the wire. Make sure the tubing will be long enough to cover and seal the entire repair area. 3. Place the strands of wire overlapping each other inside of the splice clip (1). 4. Using crimping tool (1), Mopar p/n 05019912AA, crimp the splice clip and wires together. 5. Solder (3) the connection (2) together using rosin core type solder (1) only. CAUTION: DO NOT USE ACID CORE SOLDER. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4441 6. Center the heat shrink tubing (2) over the joint and heat using a heat gun. Heat the joint until the tubing is tightly sealed and sealant (1) comes out of both ends of the tubing. Special Tools WIRING/TERMINAL PROBING TOOL PACKAGE 6807 TERMINAL PICK TOOL SET 6680 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4442 TERMINAL REMOVING TOOLS 6932 AND 8638 TERMINAL REMOVING TOOL 6934 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4443 Engine Control Module: Diagnostic Aids Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) Sensitive Devices STANDARD PROCEDURE - ELECTROSTATIC DISCHARGE (ESD) SENSITIVE DEVICES All ESD sensitive components are solid state and a symbol is used to indicate this. When handling any component with this symbol, comply with the following procedures to reduce the possibility of electrostatic charge build up on the body and inadvertent discharge into the component. If it is not known whether the part is ESD sensitive, assume that it is. 1. Always touch a known good ground before handling the part. This should be repeated while handling the part and more frequently after sliding across a seat, sitting down from a standing position, or walking a distance. 2. Avoid touching electrical terminals of the part, unless instructed to do so by a written procedure. 3. When using a voltmeter, be sure to connect the ground lead first. 4. Do not remove the part from it's protective packing until it is time to install the part. 5. Before removing the part from it's package, ground the package to a known good ground on the vehicle. Testing Of Voltage Potential STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING OF VOLTAGE POTENTIAL 1. Connect the ground lead of a voltmeter to a known good ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the voltmeter to the selected test point. The vehicle ignition may need to be turned ON to check voltage. Refer to the appropriate test procedure. Testing For Continuity Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4444 STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING FOR CONTINUITY 1. Remove the fuse (1) for the circuit being checked or, disconnect the battery. 2. Connect one lead of the ohmmeter to one side of the circuit being tested 3. Connect the other lead to the other end of the circuit being tested. Low or no resistance means good continuity. Testing For A Short To Ground STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING FOR A SHORT TO GROUND 1. Remove the fuse and disconnect all items involved with the fuse. 2. Connect a test light or a voltmeter across the terminals of the fuse. 3. Starting at the fuse block, wiggle the wiring harness about six to eight inches apart and watch the voltmeter/test lamp. 4. If the voltmeter registers voltage or the test lamp glows, there is a short to ground in that general area of the wiring harness. Testing For A Short To Ground On Fuses Powering Several Loads STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING FOR A SHORT TO GROUND ON FUSES POWERING SEVERAL LOADS 1. Refer to the wiring diagrams and disconnect or isolate all items on the suspected fused circuits. 2. Replace the blown fuse. 3. Supply power to the fuse by turning ON the ignition switch or re-connecting the battery. 4. Start connecting or energizing the items in the fuse circuit one at a time. When the fuse blows the circuit with the short to ground has been isolated. Testing For A Voltage Drop STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING FOR A VOLTAGE DROP Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4445 1. Connect the positive lead of the voltmeter to the side of the circuit closest to the battery. 2. Connect the other lead of the voltmeter to the other side of the switch, component or circuit. 3. Operate the item. 4. The voltmeter will show the difference in voltage between the two points. Troubleshooting Wiring Problems DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING - WIRING HARNESS TROUBLESHOOTING TOOLS When diagnosing a problem in an electrical circuit there are several common tools necessary. These tools are listed and explained below. - Jumper Wire - This is a test wire used to connect two points of a circuit. It can be used to bypass an open in a circuit. WARNING: Never use a jumper wire across a load, such as a motor, connected between a battery feed and ground. - Voltmeter - Used to check for voltage on a circuit. Always connect the black lead to a known good ground and the red lead to the positive side of the circuit. CAUTION: Most of the electrical components used in today's vehicles are Solid State. When checking voltages in these circuits, use a meter with a 10 - megohm or greater impedance rating. - Ohmmeter - Used to check the resistance between two points of a circuit. Low or no resistance in a circuit means good continuity. CAUTION: Most of the electrical components used in today's vehicles are Solid State. When checking resistance in these circuits use a meter with a 10 - megohm or greater impedance rating. In addition, make sure the power is disconnected from the circuit. Circuits that are powered up by the vehicle's electrical system can cause damage to the equipment and provide false readings. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4446 - Probing Tools - These tools are used for probing terminals in connectors. Select the proper size tool from Special Tool Package 6807, and insert the probing end (2) into the terminal being tested. Use the other end of the tool (1) to insert the meter probe. INTERMITTENT AND POOR CONNECTIONS Most intermittent electrical problems are caused by faulty electrical connections or wiring. It is also possible for a sticking component or relay to cause a problem. Before condemning a component or wiring assembly, check the following items. - Connectors are fully seated - Spread terminals, or terminal push out - Terminals in the wiring assembly are fully seated into the connector/component and locked into position - Dirt or corrosion on the terminals. Any amount of corrosion or dirt could cause an intermittent problem - Damaged connector/component casing exposing the item to dirt or moisture - Wire insulation that has rubbed through causing a short to ground - Some or all of the wiring strands broken inside of the insulation - Wiring broken inside of the insulation TROUBLESHOOTING WIRING PROBLEMS When troubleshooting wiring problems there are six steps which can aid in the procedure. The steps are listed and explained below. Always check for non-factory items added to the vehicle before doing any diagnosis. If the vehicle is equipped with these items, disconnect them to verify these add-on items are not the cause of the problem. 1. Verify the problem. 2. Verify any related symptoms. Do this by performing operational checks on components that are in the same circuit. Refer to the wiring diagrams. 3. Analyze the symptoms. Use the wiring diagrams to determine what the circuit is doing, where the problem most likely is occurring and where the diagnosis will continue. 4. Isolate the problem area. 5. Repair the problem area. 6. Verify the proper operation. For this step, check for proper operation of all items on the repaired circuit. Refer to the wiring diagrams. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4447 Engine Control Module: Connector Views Component ID 198 Component ID: 198 Component : MODULE-POWERTRAIN CONTROL Connector: Name : MODULE-POWERTRAIN CONTROL C1 Color : BLACK/BLACK # of pins : 38 Qualifier : (DIESEL) Pin Circuit Description 12345- 6789-10 11 F1 20PK/WT FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) 12 F1 20PK/WT FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) 13 14 15 16 17 - Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4448 18 - - 19 T160 20DG/WT SENSOR GROUND 20 T5 20DG/YL AUTOSTICK (ERS)-TOW/HAUL SIGNAL 21 22 23 24 25 26 - 27 F856 20YL/PK 5 VOLT SUPPLY 28 29 A918 20RD FUSED B(+) 30 T751 20YL IGNITION START 31 32 33 34 D65 20WT/LG CAN C BUS (+) 35 D64 20WT/LB CAN C BUS (-) 36 38 Component Location - 29 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4449 Component Location - 6 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4450 Connector: Name : MODULE-POWERTRAIN CONTROL C1 Color : BLACK/BLACK # of pins : 38 Qualifier : (GAS) Pin Circuit Description 1 K98 18DB/YL COIL CONTROL NO. 8 2-3 K97 18DB/YL COIL CONTROL NO. 7 3 K97 18BR COIL CONTROL NO. 7 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4451 4 K28 18BR/LB INJECTOR CONTROL NO. 8 5 K26 18BR/YL INJECTOR CONTROL NO. 7 6-7-8-9 Z130 16BK/BR GROUND 10 A918 16RD FUSED B(+) 11 F202 20PK/GY FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) 12 F1 20PK/WT FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (OFF-RUN-START) 13 - 14 - 15 - 16 - 17 - 18 Z131 16BK/DG GROUND 19 Z951 16BK/YL GROUND 20 G6 16VT/GY OIL PRESSURE SIGNAL 21 - 22 - 23 - 24 A804 18RD/GY GEN SENSE 25 - 26 - 27 F856 20YL/PK 5 VOLT SUPPLY 28 K452 20BR/LB MDS SOL CONTROL NO. 4 29 A918 16RD FUSED B(+) 30 T751 20YL IGNITION START 31 K141 20DB/YL O2 1/2 SIGNAL 32 K902 20BR/DG O2 RETURN (UPSTREAM) 33 K243 20BR O2 2/2 SIGNAL 34 D65 20WT/LG CAN C BUS (+) 35 D64 20WT/LB CAN C BUS (-) 36 - 37 - 38 K342 16BR/WT ASD CONTROL OUTPUT Component Location - 29 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4452 Component Location - 6 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4453 Connector: Name : MODULE-POWERTRAIN CONTROL C2 Color : BLACK/ORANGE # of pins : 38 Qualifier : (GAS) Pin Circuit Description 1 K10 18DB/OR COIL CONTROL NO. 6 2 K16 18DB/YL COIL CONTROL NO. 5 3 K15 18DB/GY COIL CONTROL NO. 4 4 K58 18BR/VT INJECTOR CONTROL NO. 6 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4454 5 K38 18BR/OR INJECTOR CONTROL NO. 5 6 K447 20TN/YL ETC MOTOR (+) 7 K18 18DB/OR COIL CONTROL NO. 3 8 K35 20DB/VT EGR SOL CONTROL 9 K17 18DB/TN COIL CONTROL NO. 2 10 K19 18DB/DG COIL CONTROL NO. 1 11 K14 18BR/TN INJECTOR CONTROL NO. 4 12 K13 18BR/LB INJECTOR CONTROL NO. 3 13 K12 18BR/DB INJECTOR CONTROL NO. 2 14 K11 18BR/YL INJECTOR CONTROL NO. 1 15 K922 20BR/DB TP SENSOR RETURN 16 K453 20BR/DG MDS SOL CONTROL NO. 6 17 K199 20BR/VT O2 2/1 HEATER CONTROL 18 K99 20BR/LG O2 1/1 HEATER CONTROL SUPPLY 19 K20 18BR/GY GEN FIELD CONTROL 20 K2 20VT/OR ECT SIGNAL 21 K22 20BR/OR TP NO. 1 SIGNAL 22 K34 20DB/LG EGR SIGNAL 23 K1 20VT/BR MAP SIGNAL 24 K942 20BR/LG KNOCK SENSOR NO. 1 RETURN 25 K42 20DB/YL KNOCK SENSOR NO. 1 SIGNAL 26 - 27 K900 20DB/DG SENSOR GROUND 28 K122 20BR/DG TP NO. 2 SIGNAL 29 F855 20PK/YL 5 VOLT SUPPLY 30 K21 20DB/LG IAT SIGNAL 31 K41 20DB/LB O2 1/1 SIGNAL 32 K904 20DB/DG O2 RETURN (DOWNSTREAM) 33 K43 20DB/LG O2 2/1 SIGNAL 34 K44 20DB/GY CMP SIGNAL 35 K24 20BR/LB CKP SIGNAL 36 K242 20BR/WT KNOCK SENSOR NO. 2 SIGNAL 37 K924 20WT/BR KNOCK SENSOR NO. 2 RETURN 38 K448 20TN/OR ETC MOTOR (-) Component Location - 29 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4455 Component Location - 6 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4456 Connector: Name : MODULE-POWERTRAIN CONTROL C3 Color : BLACK/NATURAL # of pins : 38 Qualifier : (GAS) Pin Circuit Description 1-2-3 K51 20BR/WT ASD CONTROL 4-- Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4457 5 V35 20VT/OR S/C VENT SOL CONTROL 5 K454 20BR/OR MDS SOL CONTROL NO. 7 6 K451 20BR/WT MDS SOL CONTROL NO. 1 7 V32 20VT/YL SPEED CONTROL SUPPLY 8-9 K299 20BR/WT O2 1/2 HEATER CONTROL SUPPLY 10 K399 18BR/GY O2 2/2 HEATER CONTROL 11 C13 20LB/OR A/C CLUTCH CONTROL 12 V36 20VT/YL S/C VACUUM SOL CONTROL 13 - 14 V32 20VT/YL BRAKE SWITCH NO. 2 SIGNAL 15 V937 20VT/BR S/C SWITCH RETURN 16 K167 20BR/YL APPS NO. 1 RETURN 17 K400 20BR/VT APPS NO. 2 RETURN 18 V38 20VT/OR S/C SWITCH NO. 2 SIGNAL 19 K342 16BR/WT ASD CONTROL OUTPUT 20 K52 20DB/WT EVAP PURGE SOL CONTROL 21 T41 20YL/DB TRS T41 SIGNAL (P/N) 22 G113 20VT PTO SENSE 22 G113 18PK/YL PTO SENSE 23 B29 20DG/WT BRAKE SWITCH NO. 1 SIGNAL 24 - 25 K23 20BR/WT APPS NO. 1 SIGNAL 26 - 27 T5 20DG/YL AUTOSTICK (ERS)-TOW/HAUL SIGNAL 28 K342 16BR/WT ASD CONTROL OUTPUT 29 K70 20DB/BR EVAP PURGE SOL SIGNAL 30 K66 20DB/WT P/S SWITCH SIGNAL 31 - 32 - 33 G24 20VT/BR OIL TEMPERATURE SIGNAL 34 V37 20VT S/C SWITCH NO. 1 SIGNAL 35 K107 20VT/WT ESM SIGNAL 36 K29 20WT/BR APPS NO. 2 SIGNAL 37 K31 20BR FUEL PUMP CONTROL 38 T752 20DG/OR STARTER SOLENOID CONTROL Component Location - 29 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4458 Component Location - 6 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4459 Connector: Name : MODULE-POWERTRAIN CONTROL C4 Color : BLACK/GREEN # of pins : 38 Qualifier : (DIESEL) Pin Circuit Description 1 T160 20YL/GY SENSOR GROUND 2 T259 20YL/DG 4C CONTROL 3- Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4460 4 T140 20YL/GY MS CONTROL 56 T219 20YL/LG 2C CONTROL 78 T59 20YL/LB UD CONTROL 910 T20 20DG/BK L/R CONTROL 11 T118 20DG LP VFS CONTROL 12 Z133 18BK/LG GROUND 13 Z133 18BK/LG GROUND 14 Z133 18BK/LG GROUND 15 T1 20DG/LB TRS T1 SIGNAL 16 T3 20DG/DB TRS T3 SIGNAL 17 T6 20DG TOW/HAUL OVERDRIVE OFF SWITCH SIGNAL 18 T515 20YL/DB TRANSMISSION CONTROL 19 T16 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT 20 T48 20BR/YL 4C PRESSURE SIGNAL 21 T29 20YL/WT UD PRESSURE SIGNAL 22 T9 20DG/TN OD PRESSURE SIGNAL 23 24 25 26 T4 20DG/LB TRS T2 SIGNAL 27 T41 20YL/DB TRS T41 SIGNAL (P/N) 28 T16 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT 29 T50 20DG/PK L/R PRESSURE SIGNAL 30 T147 20DG/YL 2C PRESSURE SIGNAL 31 T38 20YL/BR LINE PRESSURE SIGNAL 32 T14 20DG/BR OUTPUT SPEED SIGNAL 33 T52 20DG/OR INPUT SPEED SIGNAL 34 T13 20DG/VT SPEED SENSOR GROUND 35 T54 20DG/OR TRANSMISSION TEMPERATURE SIGNAL 36 37 T42 20DG/YL TRS T42 SIGNAL 38 T16 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT Component Location - 29 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4461 Component Location - 6 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4462 Connector: Name : MODULE-POWERTRAIN CONTROL C4 Color : BLACK/GREEN # of pins : 38 Qualifier : (GAS) Pin Circuit Description 1 T60 20YL/GY OD SOLENOID CONTROL 2 T259 20YL/DG 4C CONTROL 2 T59 20YL/LB UD CONTROL 3-- Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4463 4 T140 20YL/GY MS CONTROL 5-6 T219 20YL/LG 2C CONTROL 6 T19 18YL/DB 2/4 SOLENOID CONTROL 7-8 T59 20YL/LB UD CONTROL 9-10 T20 20DG/WT L/R CONTROL 11 T118 20DG LP VFS CONTROL 12 Z908 18BK GROUND 13 Z977 18BK GROUND 14 Z904 18BK GROUND 15 T1 20DG/LB TRS T1 SIGNAL 16 T3 20DG/DB TRS T3 SIGNAL 17 T6 20DG TOW/HAUL OVERDRIVE OFF SWITCH SIGNAL 18 T515 20YL/DB TRANSMISSION CONTROL 19 T16 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT 20 T48 20BR/YL 4C PRESSURE SIGNAL 21 T29 20YL/WT UD PRESSURE SIGNAL 22 T9 20DG/TN OD PRESSURE SIGNAL 23 - 24 - 25 - 26 T4 20DG/LB TRS T2 SIGNAL 27 - 28 T16 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT 29 T50 20DG/PK L/R PRESSURE SIGNAL 30 T147 20DG/YL 2C PRESSURE SIGNAL 30 T47 18YL/DG 2/4 PRESSURE SIGNAL 31 T38 20YL/BR LINE PRESSURE SIGNAL 32 T14 20DG/BR OUTPUT SPEED SIGNAL 33 T52 20DG/OR INPUT SPEED SIGNAL 34 T13 20DG/VT SPEED SENSOR GROUND 35 T54 20DG/OR TRANSMISSION TEMPERATURE SIGNAL 36 - 37 T42 20DG/YL TRS T42 SIGNAL 38 T16 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT Component Location - 29 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4464 Component Location - 6 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4465 Component ID 211 Component ID: 211 Component : MODULE-POWERTRAIN CONTROL Connector: Name : MODULE-POWERTRAIN CONTROL C1 Color : BLACK/BLACK # of pins : 38 Qualifier : (DIESEL) Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4466 Pin Circuit Description 123456789-10 11 F1 20PK/WT FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) 12 F1 20PK/WT FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) 13 14 15 16 17 18 - 19 T160 20DG/WT SENSOR GROUND 20 T5 20DG/YL AUTOSTICK (ERS)-TOW/HAUL SIGNAL 21 22 23 24 25 26 - 27 F856 20YL/PK 5 VOLT SUPPLY 28 29 A918 20RD FUSED B(+) 30 T751 20YL IGNITION START 31 - 32 33 34 D65 20WT/LG CAN C BUS (+) 35 D64 20WT/LB CAN C BUS (-) 36 38 Component Location - 29 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4467 Component Location - 6 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4468 Connector: Name : MODULE-POWERTRAIN CONTROL C1 Color : BLACK/BLACK # of pins : 38 Qualifier : (GAS) Pin Circuit Description 1 K98 18DB/YL COIL CONTROL NO. 8 2-3 K97 18DB/YL COIL CONTROL NO. 7 3 K97 18BR COIL CONTROL NO. 7 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4469 4 K28 18BR/LB INJECTOR CONTROL NO. 8 5 K26 18BR/YL INJECTOR CONTROL NO. 7 6-7-8-9 Z130 16BK/BR GROUND 10 A918 16RD FUSED B(+) 11 F202 20PK/GY FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) 12 F1 20PK/WT FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (OFF-RUN-START) 13 - 14 - 15 - 16 - 17 - 18 Z131 16BK/DG GROUND 19 Z951 16BK/YL GROUND 20 G6 16VT/GY OIL PRESSURE SIGNAL 21 - 22 - 23 - 24 A804 18RD/GY GEN SENSE 25 - 26 - 27 F856 20YL/PK 5 VOLT SUPPLY 28 K452 20BR/LB MDS SOL CONTROL NO. 4 29 A918 16RD FUSED B(+) 30 T751 20YL IGNITION START 31 K141 20DB/YL O2 1/2 SIGNAL 32 K902 20BR/DG O2 RETURN (UPSTREAM) 33 K243 20BR O2 2/2 SIGNAL 34 D65 20WT/LG CAN C BUS (+) 35 D64 20WT/LB CAN C BUS (-) 36 - 37 - 38 K342 16BR/WT ASD CONTROL OUTPUT Component Location - 29 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4470 Component Location - 6 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4471 Connector: Name : MODULE-POWERTRAIN CONTROL C2 Color : BLACK/ORANGE # of pins : 38 Qualifier : (GAS) Pin Circuit Description 1 K10 18DB/OR COIL CONTROL NO. 6 2 K16 18DB/YL COIL CONTROL NO. 5 3 K15 18DB/GY COIL CONTROL NO. 4 4 K58 18BR/VT INJECTOR CONTROL NO. 6 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4472 5 K38 18BR/OR INJECTOR CONTROL NO. 5 6 K447 20TN/YL ETC MOTOR (+) 7 K18 18DB/OR COIL CONTROL NO. 3 8 K35 20DB/VT EGR SOL CONTROL 9 K17 18DB/TN COIL CONTROL NO. 2 10 K19 18DB/DG COIL CONTROL NO. 1 11 K14 18BR/TN INJECTOR CONTROL NO. 4 12 K13 18BR/LB INJECTOR CONTROL NO. 3 13 K12 18BR/DB INJECTOR CONTROL NO. 2 14 K11 18BR/YL INJECTOR CONTROL NO. 1 15 K922 20BR/DB TP SENSOR RETURN 16 K453 20BR/DG MDS SOL CONTROL NO. 6 17 K199 20BR/VT O2 2/1 HEATER CONTROL 18 K99 20BR/LG O2 1/1 HEATER CONTROL SUPPLY 19 K20 18BR/GY GEN FIELD CONTROL 20 K2 20VT/OR ECT SIGNAL 21 K22 20BR/OR TP NO. 1 SIGNAL 22 K34 20DB/LG EGR SIGNAL 23 K1 20VT/BR MAP SIGNAL 24 K942 20BR/LG KNOCK SENSOR NO. 1 RETURN 25 K42 20DB/YL KNOCK SENSOR NO. 1 SIGNAL 26 - 27 K900 20DB/DG SENSOR GROUND 28 K122 20BR/DG TP NO. 2 SIGNAL 29 F855 20PK/YL 5 VOLT SUPPLY 30 K21 20DB/LG IAT SIGNAL 31 K41 20DB/LB O2 1/1 SIGNAL 32 K904 20DB/DG O2 RETURN (DOWNSTREAM) 33 K43 20DB/LG O2 2/1 SIGNAL 34 K44 20DB/GY CMP SIGNAL 35 K24 20BR/LB CKP SIGNAL 36 K242 20BR/WT KNOCK SENSOR NO. 2 SIGNAL 37 K924 20WT/BR KNOCK SENSOR NO. 2 RETURN 38 K448 20TN/OR ETC MOTOR (-) Component Location - 29 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4473 Component Location - 6 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4474 Connector: Name : MODULE-POWERTRAIN CONTROL C3 Color : BLACK/NATURAL # of pins : 38 Qualifier : (GAS) Pin Circuit Description 1-2-3 K51 20BR/WT ASD CONTROL 4-- Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4475 5 V35 20VT/OR S/C VENT SOL CONTROL 5 K454 20BR/OR MDS SOL CONTROL NO. 7 6 K451 20BR/WT MDS SOL CONTROL NO. 1 7 V32 20VT/YL SPEED CONTROL SUPPLY 8-9 K299 20BR/WT O2 1/2 HEATER CONTROL SUPPLY 10 K399 18BR/GY O2 2/2 HEATER CONTROL 11 C13 20LB/OR A/C CLUTCH CONTROL 12 V36 20VT/YL S/C VACUUM SOL CONTROL 13 - 14 V32 20VT/YL BRAKE SWITCH NO. 2 SIGNAL 15 V937 20VT/BR S/C SWITCH RETURN 16 K167 20BR/YL APPS NO. 1 RETURN 17 K400 20BR/VT APPS NO. 2 RETURN 18 V38 20VT/OR S/C SWITCH NO. 2 SIGNAL 19 K342 16BR/WT ASD CONTROL OUTPUT 20 K52 20DB/WT EVAP PURGE SOL CONTROL 21 T41 20YL/DB TRS T41 SIGNAL (P/N) 22 G113 20VT PTO SENSE 22 G113 18PK/YL PTO SENSE 23 B29 20DG/WT BRAKE SWITCH NO. 1 SIGNAL 24 - 25 K23 20BR/WT APPS NO. 1 SIGNAL 26 - 27 T5 20DG/YL AUTOSTICK (ERS)-TOW/HAUL SIGNAL 28 K342 16BR/WT ASD CONTROL OUTPUT 29 K70 20DB/BR EVAP PURGE SOL SIGNAL 30 K66 20DB/WT P/S SWITCH SIGNAL 31 - 32 - 33 G24 20VT/BR OIL TEMPERATURE SIGNAL 34 V37 20VT S/C SWITCH NO. 1 SIGNAL 35 K107 20VT/WT ESM SIGNAL 36 K29 20WT/BR APPS NO. 2 SIGNAL 37 K31 20BR FUEL PUMP CONTROL 38 T752 20DG/OR STARTER SOLENOID CONTROL Component Location - 29 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4476 Component Location - 6 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4477 Connector: Name : MODULE-POWERTRAIN CONTROL C4 Color : BLACK/GREEN # of pins : 38 Qualifier : (DIESEL) Pin Circuit Description 1 T160 20YL/GY SENSOR GROUND 2 T259 20YL/DG 4C CONTROL 3- Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4478 4 T140 20YL/GY MS CONTROL 56 T219 20YL/LG 2C CONTROL 78 T59 20YL/LB UD CONTROL 910 T20 20DG/BK L/R CONTROL 11 T118 20DG LP VFS CONTROL 12 Z133 18BK/LG GROUND 13 Z133 18BK/LG GROUND 14 Z133 18BK/LG GROUND 15 T1 20DG/LB TRS T1 SIGNAL 16 T3 20DG/DB TRS T3 SIGNAL 17 T6 20DG TOW/HAUL OVERDRIVE OFF SWITCH SIGNAL 18 T515 20YL/DB TRANSMISSION CONTROL 19 T16 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT 20 T48 20BR/YL 4C PRESSURE SIGNAL 21 T29 20YL/WT UD PRESSURE SIGNAL 22 T9 20DG/TN OD PRESSURE SIGNAL 23 24 25 26 T4 20DG/LB TRS T2 SIGNAL 27 T41 20YL/DB TRS T41 SIGNAL (P/N) 28 T16 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT 29 T50 20DG/PK L/R PRESSURE SIGNAL 30 T147 20DG/YL 2C PRESSURE SIGNAL 31 T38 20YL/BR LINE PRESSURE SIGNAL 32 T14 20DG/BR OUTPUT SPEED SIGNAL 33 T52 20DG/OR INPUT SPEED SIGNAL 34 T13 20DG/VT SPEED SENSOR GROUND 35 T54 20DG/OR TRANSMISSION TEMPERATURE SIGNAL 36 37 T42 20DG/YL TRS T42 SIGNAL 38 T16 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT Component Location - 29 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4479 Component Location - 6 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4480 Connector: Name : MODULE-POWERTRAIN CONTROL C4 Color : BLACK/GREEN # of pins : 38 Qualifier : (GAS) Pin Circuit Description 1 T60 20YL/GY OD SOLENOID CONTROL 2 T259 20YL/DG 4C CONTROL 2 T59 20YL/LB UD CONTROL 3-- Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4481 4 T140 20YL/GY MS CONTROL 5-6 T219 20YL/LG 2C CONTROL 6 T19 18YL/DB 2/4 SOLENOID CONTROL 7-8 T59 20YL/LB UD CONTROL 9-10 T20 20DG/WT L/R CONTROL 11 T118 20DG LP VFS CONTROL 12 Z908 18BK GROUND 13 Z977 18BK GROUND 14 Z904 18BK GROUND 15 T1 20DG/LB TRS T1 SIGNAL 16 T3 20DG/DB TRS T3 SIGNAL 17 T6 20DG TOW/HAUL OVERDRIVE OFF SWITCH SIGNAL 18 T515 20YL/DB TRANSMISSION CONTROL 19 T16 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT 20 T48 20BR/YL 4C PRESSURE SIGNAL 21 T29 20YL/WT UD PRESSURE SIGNAL 22 T9 20DG/TN OD PRESSURE SIGNAL 23 - 24 - 25 - 26 T4 20DG/LB TRS T2 SIGNAL 27 - 28 T16 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT 29 T50 20DG/PK L/R PRESSURE SIGNAL 30 T147 20DG/YL 2C PRESSURE SIGNAL 30 T47 18YL/DG 2/4 PRESSURE SIGNAL 31 T38 20YL/BR LINE PRESSURE SIGNAL 32 T14 20DG/BR OUTPUT SPEED SIGNAL 33 T52 20DG/OR INPUT SPEED SIGNAL 34 T13 20DG/VT SPEED SENSOR GROUND 35 T54 20DG/OR TRANSMISSION TEMPERATURE SIGNAL 36 - 37 T42 20DG/YL TRS T42 SIGNAL 38 T16 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT Component Location - 29 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4482 Component Location - 6 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4483 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Powertrain Control Module - Description Engine Control Module: Description and Operation Powertrain Control Module - Description Powertrain Control Module (PCM) POWERTRAIN CONTROL MODULE (PCM) The Powertrain Control Module (PCM) is located in the right-rear section of the engine compartment under the cowl. Two different PCM's are used (JTEC and NGC). These can be easily identified. JTEC's use three 32-way connectors, NGC's use four 38-way connectors Modes Of Operation MODES OF OPERATION As input signals to the Powertrain Control Module (PCM) change, the PCM adjusts its response to the output devices. For example, the PCM must calculate different injector pulse width and ignition timing for idle than it does for wide open throttle (WOT). The PCM will operate in two different modes: Open Loop and Closed Loop. During Open Loop modes, the PCM receives input signals and responds only according to preset PCM programming. Input from the oxygen (O2S) sensors is not monitored during Open Loop modes. During Closed Loop modes, the PCM will monitor the oxygen (O2S) sensors input. This input indicates to the PCM whether or not the calculated injector pulse width results in the ideal air-fuel ratio. This ratio is 14.7 parts air-to-1 part fuel. By monitoring the exhaust oxygen content through the O2S sensor, the PCM can fine tune the injector pulse width. This is done to achieve optimum fuel economy combined with low emission engine performance. The fuel injection system has the following modes of operation: - Ignition switch ON - Engine start-up (crank) - Engine warm-up - Idle - Cruise - Acceleration - Deceleration - Wide open throttle (WOT) - Ignition switch OFF The ignition switch On, engine start-up (crank), engine warm-up, acceleration, deceleration and wide open throttle modes are Open Loop modes. The idle and cruise modes, (with the engine at operating temperature) are Closed Loop modes. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Powertrain Control Module - Description > Page 4486 IGNITION SWITCH (KEY-ON) MODE This is an Open Loop mode. When the fuel system is activated by the ignition switch, the following actions occur: - The PCM pre-positions the idle air control (IAC) motor. - The PCM determines atmospheric air pressure from the MAP sensor input to determine basic fuel strategy. - The PCM monitors the engine coolant temperature sensor input. The PCM modifies fuel strategy based on this input. - Intake manifold air temperature sensor input is monitored. - Throttle position sensor (TPS) is monitored. - The auto shutdown (ASD) relay is energized by the PCM for approximately three seconds. - The fuel pump is energized through the fuel pump relay by the PCM. The fuel pump will operate for approximately three seconds unless the engine is operating or the starter motor is engaged. - The O2S sensor heater element is energized via the ASD or O2S heater relay. The O2S sensor input is not used by the PCM to calibrate air-fuel ratio during this mode of operation. ENGINE START-UP MODE This is an Open Loop mode. The following actions occur when the starter motor is engaged. The PCM receives inputs from: - Battery voltage - Engine coolant temperature sensor - Crankshaft position sensor - Intake manifold air temperature sensor - Manifold absolute pressure (MAP) sensor - Throttle position sensor (TPS) - Camshaft position sensor signal The PCM monitors the crankshaft position sensor. If the PCM does not receive a crankshaft position sensor signal within 3 seconds of cranking the engine, it will shut down the fuel injection system. The fuel pump is activated by the PCM through the fuel pump relay. Voltage is applied to the fuel injectors with the ASD relay via the PCM. The PCM will then control the injection sequence and injector pulse width by turning the ground circuit to each individual injector on and off. The PCM determines the proper ignition timing according to input received from the crankshaft position sensor. ENGINE WARM-UP MODE This is an Open Loop mode. During engine warm-up, the PCM receives inputs from: - Battery voltage - Crankshaft position sensor - Engine coolant temperature sensor - Intake manifold air temperature sensor - Manifold absolute pressure (MAP) sensor - Throttle position sensor (TPS) - Camshaft position sensor signal - Park/neutral switch (gear indicator signal-auto. trans. only) - Air conditioning select signal (if equipped) - Air conditioning request signal (if equipped) Based on these inputs the following occurs: - Voltage is applied to the fuel injectors with the ASD relay via the PCM. The PCM will then control the injection sequence and injector pulse width by turning the ground circuit to each individual injector on and off. - The PCM adjusts engine idle speed through the idle air control (IAC) motor and adjusts ignition timing. - The PCM operates the A/C compressor clutch through the A/C compressor clutch relay. This is done if A/C has been selected by the vehicle operator and specified pressures are met at the high and low-pressure A/C switches. - When engine has reached operating temperature, the PCM will begin monitoring O2S sensor input. The system will then leave the warm-up mode and go into closed loop operation. IDLE MODE Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Powertrain Control Module - Description > Page 4487 When the engine is at operating temperature, this is a Closed Loop mode. At idle speed, the PCM receives inputs from: - Air conditioning select signal (if equipped) - Air conditioning request signal (if equipped) - Battery voltage - Crankshaft position sensor - Engine coolant temperature sensor - Intake manifold air temperature sensor - Manifold absolute pressure (MAP) sensor - Throttle position sensor (TPS) - Camshaft position sensor signal - Battery voltage - Park/neutral switch (gear indicator signal-auto. trans. only) - Oxygen sensors Based on these inputs, the following occurs: - Voltage is applied to the fuel injectors with the ASD relay via the PCM. The PCM will then control injection sequence and injector pulse width by turning the ground circuit to each individual injector on and off. - The PCM monitors the O2S sensor input and adjusts air-fuel ratio by varying injector pulse width. It also adjusts engine idle speed through the idle air control (IAC) motor. - The PCM adjusts ignition timing by increasing and decreasing spark advance. - The PCM operates the A/C compressor clutch through the A/C compressor clutch relay. This is done if A/C has been selected by the vehicle operator and specified pressures are met at the high and low-pressure A/C switches. CRUISE MODE When the engine is at operating temperature, this is a Closed Loop mode. At cruising speed, the PCM receives inputs from: - Air conditioning select signal (if equipped) - Air conditioning request signal (if equipped) - Battery voltage - Engine coolant temperature sensor - Crankshaft position sensor - Intake manifold air temperature sensor - Manifold absolute pressure (MAP) sensor - Throttle position sensor (TPS) - Camshaft position sensor signal - Park/neutral switch (gear indicator signal-auto. trans. only) - Oxygen (O2S) sensors Based on these inputs, the following occurs: - Voltage is applied to the fuel injectors with the ASD relay via the PCM. The PCM will then adjust the injector pulse width by turning the ground circuit to each individual injector on and off. - The PCM monitors the O2S sensor input and adjusts air-fuel ratio. It also adjusts engine idle speed through the idle air control (IAC) motor. - The PCM adjusts ignition timing by turning the ground path to the coil(s) on and off. - The PCM operates the A/C compressor clutch through the clutch relay. This happens if A/C has been selected by the vehicle operator and requested by the A/C thermostat. ACCELERATION MODE This is an Open Loop mode. The PCM recognizes an abrupt increase in throttle position or MAP pressure as a demand for increased engine output and vehicle acceleration. The PCM increases injector pulse width in response to increased throttle opening. DECELERATION MODE When the engine is at operating temperature, this is an Open Loop mode. During hard deceleration, the PCM receives the following inputs. - Air conditioning select signal (if equipped) - Air conditioning request signal (if equipped) - Battery voltage - Engine coolant temperature sensor - Crankshaft position sensor - Intake manifold air temperature sensor Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Powertrain Control Module - Description > Page 4488 - Manifold absolute pressure (MAP) sensor - Throttle position sensor (TPS) - Camshaft position sensor signal - Park/neutral switch (gear indicator signal-auto. trans. only) - Vehicle speed If the vehicle is under hard deceleration with the proper rpm and closed throttle conditions, the PCM will ignore the oxygen sensor input signal. The PCM will enter a fuel cut-off strategy in which it will not supply a ground to the injectors. If a hard deceleration does not exist, the PCM will determine the proper injector pulse width and continue injection. Based on the above inputs, the PCM will adjust engine idle speed through the idle air control (IAC) motor. The PCM adjusts ignition timing by turning the ground path to the coil on and off. WIDE OPEN THROTTLE MODE This is an Open Loop mode. During wide open throttle operation, the PCM receives the following inputs. - Battery voltage - Crankshaft position sensor - Engine coolant temperature sensor - Intake manifold air temperature sensor - Manifold absolute pressure (MAP) sensor - Throttle position sensor (TPS) - Camshaft position sensor signal During wide open throttle conditions, the following occurs: - Voltage is applied to the fuel injectors with the ASD relay via the PCM. The PCM will then control the injection sequence and injector pulse width by turning the ground circuit to each individual injector on and off. The PCM ignores the oxygen sensor input signal and provides a predetermined amount of additional fuel. This is done by adjusting injector pulse width. - The PCM adjusts ignition timing by turning the ground path to the coil(s) on and off. IGNITION SWITCH OFF MODE When ignition switch is turned to OFF position, the PCM stops operating the injectors, ignition coil, ASD relay and fuel pump relay. 5 Volt Supplies 5 VOLT SUPPLIES Two different Powertrain Control Module (PCM) five volt supply circuits are used; primary and secondary. Ignition Circuit Sense IGNITION CIRCUIT SENSE This circuit ties the ignition switch to the Powertrain Control Module (PCM). Power Grounds POWER GROUNDS The Powertrain Control Module (PCM) has 2 main grounds. Both of these grounds are referred to as power grounds. All of the high-current, noisy, electrical devices are connected to these grounds as well as all of the sensor returns. The sensor return comes into the sensor return circuit, passes through noise suppression, and is then connected to the power ground. The power ground is used to control ground circuits for the following PCM loads: - Generator field winding - Fuel injectors - Ignition coil(s) - Certain relays/solenoids - Certain sensors Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Powertrain Control Module - Description > Page 4489 Sensor Return SENSOR RETURN The Sensor Return circuits are internal to the Powertrain Control Module (PCM). Sensor Return provides a low-noise ground reference for all engine control system sensors. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Powertrain Control Module - Description > Page 4490 Engine Control Module: Description and Operation Powertrain Control Module - Operation Powertrain Control Module (PCM) POWERTRAIN CONTROL MODULE (PCM) The PCM operates the fuel system. The PCM is a pre-programmed, triple microprocessor digital computer. It regulates ignition timing, air-fuel ratio, emission control devices, charging system, certain transmission features, speed control, air conditioning compressor clutch engagement and idle speed. The PCM can adapt its programming to meet changing operating conditions. The PCM receives input signals from various switches and sensors. Based on these inputs, the PCM regulates various engine and vehicle operations through different system components. These components are referred to as Powertrain Control Module (PCM) Outputs. The sensors and switches that provide inputs to the PCM are considered Powertrain Control Module (PCM) Inputs. The PCM adjusts ignition timing based upon inputs it receives from sensors that react to: engine rpm, manifold absolute pressure, engine coolant temperature, throttle position, transmission gear selection (automatic transmission), vehicle speed, power steering pump pressure, and the brake switch. The PCM adjusts idle speed based on inputs it receives from sensors that react to: throttle position, vehicle speed, transmission gear selection, engine coolant temperature and from inputs it receives from the air conditioning clutch switch and brake switch. Based on inputs that it receives, the PCM adjusts ignition coil dwell. The PCM also adjusts the generator charge rate through control of the generator field and provides speed control operation. NOTE: PCM Inputs: - ABS module (if equipped) - A/C request (if equipped with factory A/C) - A/C select (if equipped with factory A/C) - A/C pressure transducer - Auto shutdown (ASD) sense - Battery temperature sensor - Battery voltage - Brake switch - CAN C BUS (+) circuits - CAN C BUS (-) circuits - Camshaft position sensor signal - Crankshaft position sensor - Data link connection for a scan tool - EATX module (if equipped) - Engine coolant temperature sensor - Fuel level (through J1850 circuitry) - Generator (battery voltage) output - Ignition circuit sense (ignition switch in on/off/crank/run position) - Intake manifold air temperature sensor - Knock sensors (2 on 3.7L engine) - Leak detection pump (switch) sense (if equipped) - Manifold absolute pressure (MAP) sensor - Oil pressure - Oxygen sensors - Park/neutral switch (auto. trans. only) - Power ground - Power steering pressure switch (if equipped) - Sensor return - Signal ground - Speed control multiplexed single wire input - Throttle position sensor - Transfer case switch (4WD range position) - Vehicle speed signal NOTE: PCM Outputs: - A/C clutch relay - Auto shutdown (ASD) relay Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Powertrain Control Module - Description > Page 4491 - CAN C BUS (+/-) circuits for: speedometer, voltmeter, fuel gauge, oil pressure gauge/lamp, engine temp. gauge and speed control warn. lamp - Data link connection for diagnostic scan tool - EGR valve control solenoid (if equipped) - EVAP canister purge solenoid - Five volt sensor supply (primary) - Five volt sensor supply (secondary) - Fuel injectors - Fuel pump relay - Generator field driver (-) - Generator field driver (+) - Idle air control (IAC) motor - Ignition coil(s) - Leak detection pump (if equipped) - Malfunction indicator lamp (Check engine lamp). Driven through J1850 circuits. - Oxygen sensor heater relays - Oxygen sensors (pulse width modulated) - Radiator cooling fan relay (pulse width modulated) - Speed control vacuum solenoid - Speed control vent solenoid - Tachometer (if equipped). Driven through J1850 circuits. - Transmission convertor clutch circuit. Driven through J1850 circuits. 5 Volt Supplies 5 VOLT SUPPLIES Primary 5-volt supply: - supplies the required 5 volt power source to the Crankshaft Position (CKP) sensor. - supplies the required 5 volt power source to the Camshaft Position (CMP) sensor. - supplies a reference voltage for the Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) sensor. - supplies a reference voltage for the Throttle Position Sensor (TPS) sensor. Secondary 5-volt supply: - supplies the required 5 volt power source to the oil pressure sensor. - supplies the required 5 volt power source for the Vehicle Speed Sensor (VSS) (if equipped). - supplies the 5 volt power source to the transmission pressure sensor (certain automatic transmissions). Ignition Circuit Sense IGNITION CIRCUIT SENSE The ignition circuit sense input tells the PCM the ignition switch has energized the ignition circuit. Battery voltage is also supplied to the PCM through the ignition switch when the ignition is in the RUN or START position. This is referred to as the "ignition sense" circuit and is used to "wake up" the PCM. Voltage on the ignition input can be as low as 6 volts and the PCM will still function. Voltage is supplied to this circuit to power the PCM's 8-volt regulator and to allow the PCM to perform fuel, ignition and emissions control functions. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > SKREEM Programming Engine Control Module: Testing and Inspection SKREEM Programming SKREEM PROGRAMMING When a Powertrain Control Module (PCM) for a gasoline engine, or an Engine Control Module (ECM) for a diesel engine and the Sentry Key Remote Entry Module (SKREEM) (also known as the Wireless Control Module/WCM) on vehicles equipped with the Sentry Key Immobilizer System (SKIS) are replaced at the same time, perform the following steps in order: NOTE: If the PCM and the SKREEM are replaced at the same time, program the PCM VIN into the PCM first. 1. If applicable first replace the PCM/ECM with the original WCM still connected to the vehicle. 2. Using the appropriate service information program the new PCM/ECM. (This will ensure the Secret Key Transfer from the original WCM into the new PCM/ECM). 3. Now replace and program the WCM. This will retain the Secret Key from the PCM/ECM back into the new WCM. 4. With the scan tool, select Miscellaneous Functions, WCM/Wireless Control Module. Then select the desired procedure and follow the display on the scan tool. 5. If the vehicle is equipped with Tire Pressure Monitoring System program the Placard Pressure Values into the WCM/SKREEM. 6. Ensure all the customer's keys have been programmed into the new module if necessary. NOTE: If the original keys do not successfully program to the new SKREEM after the proper procedures are followed correctly, programming new keys will be necessary. PROGRAMMING THE SKREEM The SKIS Secret Key is an ID code that is unique to each SKREEM/WCM. This code is programmed and stored in the SKREEM/WCM, the PCM/ECM, and each ignition key transponder chip. When the PCM/ECM or SKREEM/WCM is replaced, it is necessary to program the Secret Key into the new module using a diagnostic scan tool. Follow the programming steps outlined in the diagnostic scan tool for PCM REPLACED , ECM REPLACED , WCM REPLACED , or GATEWAY REPLACED under MISCELLANEOUS FUNCTIONS for the WIRELESS CONTROL MODULE/WCM menu item as appropriate. NOTE: Programming the PCM/ECM or SKREEM is done using a diagnostic scan tool and a PIN to enter secure access mode. If three attempts are made to enter secure access mode using an incorrect PIN, secure access mode will be locked out for one hour. To exit this lockout mode, turn the ignition to the RUN position for one hour then enter the correct PIN. Be certain that all accessories are turned OFF. Also monitor the battery state and connect a battery charger if necessary. NOTE: Before replacing the ECU for a failed driver, control circuit or ground circuit, be sure to check the related component/circuit integrity for failures not detected due to a double fault in the circuit. Most ECM driver/control circuit failures are caused by internal component failures (i.e. relay and solenoids) and shorted circuits (i.e. pull-ups, drivers and switched circuits). These failures are difficult to detect when a double fault has occurred and only one DTC has set. ECM/SKIM/WCM PROGRAMMING When a ECM and the SKIM are replaced at the same time perform the following steps in order: 1. Program the new SKIM 2. Program the new ECM 3. Replace all ignition keys and program them to the new SKIM. ECM/SKIM/WCM PROGRAMMING When an ECM (Bosch) and the SKIM are replaced at the same time perform the following steps in order: 1. Program the new SKIM 2. Program the new ECM (Bosch) 3. Replace all ignition keys and program them to the new SKIM. PROGRAMMING THE SKIM CAUTION: Read all notes and cautions for programming procedures. 1. Connect a battery charger to the vehicle. 2. Connect the StarSCAN(R). CAUTION: If the ECM/PCM and SKREEM/WCM are replaced at the same time, the ECM/PCM MUST be programmed before the Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > SKREEM Programming > Page 4494 SKREEM/WCM. 3. Select "ECU View". 4. Select "WCM Wireless Control Module". 5. Select "Miscellaneous Functions". 6. Select WCM replaced. 7. Enter the PIN when prompted. 8. Verify the correct information. NOTE: If the ECM and the SKIM are replaced at the same time, all vehicle keys will need to be replaced and programmed to the new SKIM. PROGRAMMING IGNITION KEYS TO THE SKREEM Each ignition key transponder also has a unique ID code that is assigned at the time the key is manufactured. When a key is programmed into the SKREEM/WCM, the transponder ID code is learned by the module and the transponder acquires the unique Secret Key ID code from the SKREEM/WCM. To program ignition keys into the SKREEM/WCM, follow the programming steps outlined in the diagnostic scan tool for PROGRAM IGNITION KEYS OR KEY FOBS under MISCELLANEOUS FUNCTIONS for the WIRELESS CONTROL MODULE/WCM menu item. NOTE: If the original keys do not successfully program to the new SKREEM after the proper procedures are followed correctly, programming new keys will be necessary. NOTE: A maximum of eight keys can be learned to each SKREEM. Once a key is learned to a SKREEM, that key has acquired the Secret Key for that SKREEM and cannot be transferred to any other SKREEM or vehicle. If ignition key programming is unsuccessful, the scan tool will display one of the following error messages: - PROGRAMMING NOT ATTEMPTED - The scan tool attempts to read the programmed key status and there are no keys programmed into SKREEM memory. - PROGRAMMING KEY FAILED (POSSIBLE USED KEY FROM WRONG VEHICLE) - SKREEM is unable to program an ignition key transponder due to one of the following: - The ignition key transponder is ineffective. - The ignition key transponder is or has been already programmed to another vehicle. - 8 KEYS ALREADY LEARNED, PROGRAMMING NOT DONE - The SKREEM transponder ID memory is full. LEARNED KEY IN IGNITION - The ID for the ignition key transponder currently in the ignition lock cylinder is already programmed into SKREEM memory. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > SKREEM Programming > Page 4495 Engine Control Module: Testing and Inspection PCM/ECM Reprogramming PCM/ECM REPROGRAMMING - GAS MODULE REPROGRAMING Replacement PCM's will require programming utilizing the StarSCAN(R) or equivalent. The PCM will not operate the engine until it is programmed. A Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) will be set "not programmed". CAUTION: Extreme care must be taken when programming a calibration into a generic PCM. Do not randomly select a calibration. Once a calibration is selected and programmed, the controller cannot be reprogrammed to a different calibration. The module can only be reprogrammed to a more recent version of that calibration. SPECIAL TOOLS/EQUIPMENT OR EQUIVALENT REQUIRED: **REPAIR PROCEDURE - USING THE INTERNET TO RETRIEVE THE FLASH FILE: NOTE: The StarSCAN(R) or equivalent diagnostic scan tool fully supports Internet connectivity. However, in order to take advantage of this feature you must first configure the StarSCAN(R) or equivalent for your dealership's network. For instruction on setting up your StarSCAN(R) or equivalent for the dealer's network; refer to the StarSCAN(R) or equivalent Quick Start Networking Guide available on DealerCONNECT > Service > StarSCAN(R) or equivalent and StarMOBILE Tools >Online Documentation. NOTE: If this flash process is interrupted/aborted, the flash should be restarted. 1. Open the hood, install a battery charger and verify that the charging rate provides approximately 13.5 volts. Set the battery charger timer to maintain the charging voltage for the duration of the flash process. 2. Connect the CH9410 StarSCAN(R) or equivalent ethernet cable to the StarSCAN(R) or equivalent and the dealer's network drop. 3. Connect the CH9404 StarSCAN(R) or equivalent vehicle cable to the StarSCAN(R) or equivalent and the vehicle. 4. Power ON the StarSCAN(R) or equivalent. 5. Retrieve the old ECU part number. Using the StarSCAN(R) or equivalent at the "Home" screen: a. Select "ECU View" b. Touch the screen to highlight the PCM in the list of modules. c. Select "More Options" d. Select "ECU Flash" e. Record the part number at the top of the "Flash PCM" screen for later reference. 6. Replace the PCM with the appropriate Generic PCM. 7. Program the PCM as follows: a. Using the StarSCAN(R) or equivalent at the "Home" screen, Select "ECU View" b. Touch the screen to highlight the PCM in the list of modules. c. Select "More Options" d. Select "ECU Flash" e. Select "Browse for New File". Follow the on screen instructions. f. Highlight the appropriate calibration based on the part number recorded in Step 5. g. Select "Download to Scantool". h. Select "Close" after the download is complete, then select "Back". i. Highlight the listed calibration. j. Select "Update Controller". Follow on screen instructions. k. When the update is complete, select "OK". l. Verify the part number at the top of the "Flash PCM" screen has updated to the new part number. 8. Is this a GPEC Module? a. Yes >> go to STEP 9. b. No >> go to STEP 12. 9. Do not start the engine prior to completing the following steps (a. and b.) Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > SKREEM Programming > Page 4496 a. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position for no less than 15 seconds. b. Turn the ignition to the RUN position (DO NOT CRANK THE ENGINE) for no less than 20 seconds. 10. Is this vehicle equipped with a CVT? a. Yes >> go to STEP 11. b. No >> go to STEP 17. 11. The TCM must be reprogrammed as follows: a. Using the StarSCAN(R) or equivalent at the "Home" screen, Select "ECU View" b. Touch the screen to highlight the TCM in the list of modules. c. Select "More Options" d. Select "ECU Flash" e. Record the part number at the top of the "Flash TCM" screen for later reference. f. Select "Browse for New File". Follow the on screen instructions. NOTE: If the part number recorded in step "11e" is the same as the new p/n shown on the "Flash File List" screen no further action is required. Cancel the TCM reprogram procedure. Continue to step STEP 17. g. Highlight the appropriate calibration. h. Select "Download to Scantool". i. Select "Close" after the download is complete, then select "Back". j. Highlight the listed calibration. k. Select "Update Controller". Follow on screen instructions. l. When the update is complete, select "OK". m. Verify the part number at the top of the "Flash TCM" screen has updated to the new part number. n. Continue to step STEP 15 12. Is "WCM - Wireless Control Module" displayed in the "ECU Overview" screen list of modules? a. Yes >> go to STEP 13. b. No >> go to STEP 14. 13. Program the PCM to the Wireless Control Module (WCM). a. Highlight the WCM. b. Select "Misc. Function". c. Highlight "PCM Replaced". d. Select "Start" e. Follow the on screen instructions. Select "Next" after each step. Select "Finish" after completing the last step. f. When complete proceed to STEP 15. 14. Program the VIN into the PCM. a. Scroll through the list of controllers and highlight the PCM. b. Select "Misc. Function". c. Highlight "Check PCM VIN". d. Select "Start" e. Follow the on screen instructions. Select "Next" after each step. When the window appears with 17 boxes, select "Show Keyboard". Place the cursor to the right of the last box and then backspace to delete the boxes from the window. Enter the VIN. Select "Finish" after completing the last step. f. Unplug the scan tool from the Data Link Connector. g. At the "Vehicle Disconnected" screen, press "OK". h. Connect the scan tool to the Data Link Connector and verify that the VIN is visible at the top of the "Home" screen. 15. Is the vehicle equipped ETC? a. Yes >> go to STEP 17. b. No >> go to STEP 16. 16. Using the StarSCAN(R) or equivalent at the "Home" screen: a. Select ECU View b. Scroll through the list of controllers and highlight the PCM. c. Select Misc. Function. d. Highlight "Learn ETC". e. Select "Start" f. Follow the on screen instructions. Select Next after each step. Select Finish after completing the last step. NOTE: Due to the PCM programming procedure, a DTC may be set in other modules (TCM, BCM, MIC, SKREEM, etc.) within the vehicle, if so equipped. Some DTC's may cause the MIL to illuminate. From the Home screen select System View. Then select All DTCs. Press Clear All Stored DTCs if there are any DTCs shown on the list. NOTE: The following step is required by law when reprogramming a PCM and/or TCM. 17. Type the necessary information on the Authorized Modification Label p/n 04275086AB and attach near the VECI label. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > SKREEM Programming > Page 4497 REPAIR PROCEDURE USING SOFTWARE UPDATE CD TO RETRIEVE THE FLASH FILE: NOTE: If this flash process is interrupted/aborted, the flash should be restarted. NOTE: For detailed information on the operation of the StarSCAN(R) or equivalent, refer to the Quick Reference documentation provided in the StarSCAN(R) or equivalent documentation kit. Look under Training Aids and also under Download Center > Frequently Asked Questions for more help. 1. Open the hood, install a battery charger and verify that the charging rate provides approximately 13.5 volts. Set the battery charger timer to maintain the charging voltage for the duration of the flash process. 2. Connect the CH9404 StarSCAN(R) or equivalent vehicle cable to the StarSCAN(R) or equivalent and the vehicle. 3. Power ON the StarSCAN(R) or equivalent. 4. Retrieve the old ECU part number. Using the StarSCAN(R) or equivalent at the "Home" screen: a. Select "ECU View" b. Touch the screen to highlight the PCM in the list of modules. c. Select "More Options" d. Select "ECU Flash" e. Record the part number at the top of the "Flash PCM" screen for later reference. 5. Replace the PCM with the appropriate Generic PCM. 6. Insert the StarSCAN(R) or equivalent Software Update CD into the TechCONNECT or equivalent PC. The StarSCAN(R) or equivalent Software Update CD will start automatically. Select "Download Flash Updates". 7. At the "Select a method for looking up controller flash updates. " screen: a. Select "Enter part number". Enter the "Part Number" recorded in STEP 4 when prompted to do so. b. Using the mouse highlight the appropriate "Calibration". Select "Next". c. Follow the on screen instructions. d. When completed, proceed to STEP 8. 8. With the StarSCAN(R) or equivalent powered OFF, connect the USB Key and Gender Changer to the StarSCAN(R) or equivalent USB port. 9. Connect the StarSCAN(R) or equivalent to the vehicle (if not already connected). 10. Power ON the StarSCAN(R) or equivalent. 11. Download the flash file from the USB key to the StarSCAN(R) or equivalent. Using the StarSCAN(R) or equivalent at the "Home" screen: a. Select "Flash Download", then select "Retrieve files from the USB storage device" b. Highlight the appropriate calibration. Select "Download to Scan Tool" c. When the download is complete, select "Close" and "Back". 12. Reprogram the ECU. Using the StarSCAN(R) or equivalent at the "Home" screen: a. Select "ECU View". b. Select More Options". Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > SKREEM Programming > Page 4498 c. Select "ECU Flash". d. Highlight the appropriate calibration. e. Select "Update Controller". Follow the on screen instructions. f. When the update is complete, select "OK". g. Verify the part number at the top of the "Flash PCM" screen has updated to the new part number. 13. Is "WCM - Wireless Control Module" displayed in the "ECU Overview" screen list of modules? a. Yes >> go to STEP 14. b. No >> go to STEP 15. 14. Program the PCM to the Wireless Control Module (WCM). Using the StarSCAN(R) or equivalent at the "Home" screen: a. Select "ECU View" b. Scroll through the list of controllers and highlight the WCM. c. Select "Misc. Function". d. Highlight "PCM Replaced". e. Select "Start" f. Follow the on screen instructions. Select "Next" after each step. Select "Finish" after completing the last step. g. When complete proceed to STEP 16. 15. Program the VIN into the PCM. a. Scroll through the list of controllers and highlight the PCM. b. Select "Misc. Function". c. Highlight "Check PCM VIN". d. Select "Start" e. Follow the on screen instructions. Select "Next" after each step. When the window appears with 17 boxes, select "Show Keyboard". Place the cursor to the right of the last box and then backspace to delete the boxes from the window. Enter the VIN. Select "Finish" after completing the last step. f. Unplug the scan tool from the Data Link Connector. g. At the "Vehicle Disconnected" screen, press "OK". h. Connect the scan tool to the Data Link Connector and verify that the VIN is visible at the top of the "Home" screen. 16. Is the vehicle equipped with a 3.7L or 4.7L engine? a. Yes >> go to STEP 18. b. No >> go to STEP 17. 17. Using the StarSCAN(R) or equivalent at the "Home" screen: a. Select "ECU View" b. Scroll through the list of controllers and highlight the PCM. c. Select "Misc. Function". d. Highlight "Learn ETC". e. Select "Start" f. Follow the on screen instructions. Select "Next" after each step. Select "Finish" after completing the last step. NOTE: Due to the PCM programming procedure, a DTC may be set in other modules (TCM, BCM, MIC, SKIM, etc.) within the vehicle, if so equipped. Some DTC's may cause the MIL to illuminate. Check all modules using "ECU View" from the Home screen, record the DTC's, and erase these DTC's prior to returning the vehicle to the customer. Erase any DTC's in the PCM only after all other modules have had their DTC's erased. NOTE: The following step is required by law. 18. Type the necessary information on the "Authorized Modification Label" p/n 04275086AB and attach near the VECI label. ** Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > SKREEM Programming > Page 4499 Engine Control Module: Testing and Inspection Powertrain Control Module PCM/ECM REPROGRAMMING - GAS MODULE REPROGRAMING Replacement PCM's will require programming utilizing the StarSCAN(R) or equivalent. The PCM will not operate the engine until it is programmed. A Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) will be set "not programmed". CAUTION: Extreme care must be taken when programming a calibration into a generic PCM. Do not randomly select a calibration. Once a calibration is selected and programmed, the controller cannot be reprogrammed to a different calibration. The module can only be reprogrammed to a more recent version of that calibration. SPECIAL TOOLS/EQUIPMENT OR EQUIVALENT REQUIRED: **REPAIR PROCEDURE - USING THE INTERNET TO RETRIEVE THE FLASH FILE: NOTE: The StarSCAN(R) or equivalent diagnostic scan tool fully supports Internet connectivity. However, in order to take advantage of this feature you must first configure the StarSCAN(R) or equivalent for your dealership's network. For instruction on setting up your StarSCAN(R) or equivalent for the dealer's network; refer to the StarSCAN(R) or equivalent Quick Start Networking Guide available on DealerCONNECT > Service > StarSCAN(R) or equivalent and StarMOBILE Tools > Online Documentation. NOTE: If this flash process is interrupted/aborted, the flash should be restarted. 1. Open the hood, install a battery charger and verify that the charging rate provides approximately 13.5 volts. Set the battery charger timer to maintain the charging voltage for the duration of the flash process. 2. Connect the CH9410 StarSCAN(R) or equivalent ethernet cable to the StarSCAN(R) or equivalent and the dealer's network drop. 3. Connect the CH9404 StarSCAN(R) or equivalent vehicle cable to the StarSCAN(R) or equivalent and the vehicle. 4. Power ON the StarSCAN(R) or equivalent. 5. Retrieve the old ECU part number. Using the StarSCAN(R) or equivalent at the "Home" screen: a. Select "ECU View" b. Touch the screen to highlight the PCM in the list of modules. c. Select "More Options" d. Select "ECU Flash" e. Record the part number at the top of the "Flash PCM" screen for later reference. 6. Replace the PCM with the appropriate Generic PCM. 7. Program the PCM as follows: a. Using the StarSCAN(R) or equivalent at the "Home" screen, Select "ECU View" b. Touch the screen to highlight the PCM in the list of modules. c. Select "More Options" d. Select "ECU Flash" e. Select "Browse for New File". Follow the on screen instructions. f. Highlight the appropriate calibration based on the part number recorded in Step 5. g. Select "Download to Scantool". h. Select "Close" after the download is complete, then select "Back". i. Highlight the listed calibration. j. Select "Update Controller". Follow on screen instructions. k. When the update is complete, select "OK". l. Verify the part number at the top of the "Flash PCM" screen has updated to the new part number. 8. Is this a GPEC Module? a. Yes >> go to STEP 9. b. No >> go to STEP 12. 9. Do not start the engine prior to completing the following steps (a. and b.) Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > SKREEM Programming > Page 4500 a. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position for no less than 15 seconds. b. Turn the ignition to the RUN position (DO NOT CRANK THE ENGINE) for no less than 20 seconds. 10. Is this vehicle equipped with a CVT? a. Yes >> go to STEP 11. b. No >> go to STEP 17. 11. The TCM must be reprogrammed as follows: a. Using the StarSCAN(R) or equivalent at the "Home" screen, Select "ECU View" b. Touch the screen to highlight the TCM in the list of modules. c. Select "More Options" d. Select "ECU Flash" e. Record the part number at the top of the "Flash TCM" screen for later reference. f. Select "Browse for New File". Follow the on screen instructions. NOTE: If the part number recorded in step "11e" is the same as the new p/n shown on the "Flash File List" screen no further action is required. Cancel the TCM reprogram procedure. Continue to step STEP 17. g. Highlight the appropriate calibration. h. Select "Download to Scantool". i. Select "Close" after the download is complete, then select "Back". j. Highlight the listed calibration. k. Select "Update Controller". Follow on screen instructions. l. When the update is complete, select "OK". m. Verify the part number at the top of the "Flash TCM" screen has updated to the new part number. n. Continue to step STEP 15 12. Is "WCM - Wireless Control Module" displayed in the "ECU Overview" screen list of modules? a. Yes >> go to STEP 13. b. No >> go to STEP 14. 13. Program the PCM to the Wireless Control Module (WCM). a. Highlight the WCM. b. Select "Misc. Function". c. Highlight "PCM Replaced". d. Select "Start" e. Follow the on screen instructions. Select "Next" after each step. Select "Finish" after completing the last step. f. When complete proceed to STEP 15. 14. Program the VIN into the PCM. a. Scroll through the list of controllers and highlight the PCM. b. Select "Misc. Function". c. Highlight "Check PCM VIN". d. Select "Start" e. Follow the on screen instructions. Select "Next" after each step. When the window appears with 17 boxes, select "Show Keyboard". Place the cursor to the right of the last box and then backspace to delete the boxes from the window. Enter the VIN. Select "Finish" after completing the last step. f. Unplug the scan tool from the Data Link Connector. g. At the "Vehicle Disconnected" screen, press "OK". h. Connect the scan tool to the Data Link Connector and verify that the VIN is visible at the top of the "Home" screen. 15. Is the vehicle equipped ETC? a. Yes >> go to STEP 17. b. No >> go to STEP 16. 16. Using the StarSCAN(R) or equivalent at the "Home" screen: a. Select ECU View b. Scroll through the list of controllers and highlight the PCM. c. Select Misc. Function. d. Highlight "Learn ETC". e. Select "Start" f. Follow the on screen instructions. Select Next after each step. Select Finish after completing the last step. NOTE: Due to the PCM programming procedure, a DTC may be set in other modules (TCM, BCM, MIC, SKREEM, etc.) within the vehicle, if so equipped. Some DTC's may cause the MIL to illuminate. From the Home screen select System View. Then select All DTCs. Press Clear All Stored DTCs if there are any DTCs shown on the list. NOTE: The following step is required by law when reprogramming a PCM and/or TCM. 17. Type the necessary information on the Authorized Modification Label p/n 04275086AB and attach near the VECI label. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > SKREEM Programming > Page 4501 REPAIR PROCEDURE USING SOFTWARE UPDATE CD TO RETRIEVE THE FLASH FILE: NOTE: If this flash process is interrupted/aborted, the flash should be restarted. NOTE: For detailed information on the operation of the StarSCAN(R) or equivalent, refer to the Quick Reference documentation provided in the StarSCAN(R) or equivalent documentation kit. Look under Training Aids and also under Download Center > Frequently Asked Questions for more help. 1. Open the hood, install a battery charger and verify that the charging rate provides approximately 13.5 volts. Set the battery charger timer to maintain the charging voltage for the duration of the flash process. 2. Connect the CH9404 StarSCAN(R) or equivalent vehicle cable to the StarSCAN(R) or equivalent and the vehicle. 3. Power ON the StarSCAN(R) or equivalent. 4. Retrieve the old ECU part number. Using the StarSCAN(R) or equivalent at the "Home" screen: a. Select "ECU View" b. Touch the screen to highlight the PCM in the list of modules. c. Select "More Options" d. Select "ECU Flash" e. Record the part number at the top of the "Flash PCM" screen for later reference. 5. Replace the PCM with the appropriate Generic PCM. 6. Insert the StarSCAN(R) or equivalent Software Update CD into the TechCONNECT or equivalent PC. The StarSCAN(R) or equivalent Software Update CD will start automatically. Select "Download Flash Updates". 7. At the "Select a method for looking up controller flash updates. " screen: a. Select "Enter part number". Enter the "Part Number" recorded in STEP 4 when prompted to do so. b. Using the mouse highlight the appropriate "Calibration". Select "Next". c. Follow the on screen instructions. d. When completed, proceed to STEP 8. 8. With the StarSCAN(R) or equivalent powered OFF, connect the USB Key and Gender Changer to the StarSCAN(R) or equivalent USB port. 9. Connect the StarSCAN(R) or equivalent to the vehicle (if not already connected). 10. Power ON the StarSCAN(R) or equivalent. 11. Download the flash file from the USB key to the StarSCAN(R) or equivalent. Using the StarSCAN(R) or equivalent at the "Home" screen: a. Select "Flash Download", then select "Retrieve files from the USB storage device" b. Highlight the appropriate calibration. Select "Download to Scan Tool" c. When the download is complete, select "Close" and "Back". 12. Reprogram the ECU. Using the StarSCAN(R) or equivalent at the "Home" screen: a. Select "ECU View". b. Select More Options". c. Select "ECU Flash". Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > SKREEM Programming > Page 4502 d. Highlight the appropriate calibration. e. Select "Update Controller". Follow the on screen instructions. f. When the update is complete, select "OK". g. Verify the part number at the top of the "Flash PCM" screen has updated to the new part number. 13. Is "WCM - Wireless Control Module" displayed in the "ECU Overview" screen list of modules? a. Yes >> go to STEP 14. b. No >> go to STEP 15. 14. Program the PCM to the Wireless Control Module (WCM). Using the StarSCAN(R) or equivalent at the "Home" screen: a. Select "ECU View" b. Scroll through the list of controllers and highlight the WCM. c. Select "Misc. Function". d. Highlight "PCM Replaced". e. Select "Start" f. Follow the on screen instructions. Select "Next" after each step. Select "Finish" after completing the last step. g. When complete proceed to STEP 16. 15. Program the VIN into the PCM. a. Scroll through the list of controllers and highlight the PCM. b. Select "Misc. Function". c. Highlight "Check PCM VIN". d. Select "Start" e. Follow the on screen instructions. Select "Next" after each step. When the window appears with 17 boxes, select "Show Keyboard". Place the cursor to the right of the last box and then backspace to delete the boxes from the window. Enter the VIN. Select "Finish" after completing the last step. f. Unplug the scan tool from the Data Link Connector. g. At the "Vehicle Disconnected" screen, press "OK". h. Connect the scan tool to the Data Link Connector and verify that the VIN is visible at the top of the "Home" screen. 16. Is the vehicle equipped with a 3.7L or 4.7L engine? a. Yes >> go to STEP 18. b. No >> go to STEP 17. 17. Using the StarSCAN(R) or equivalent at the "Home" screen: a. Select "ECU View" b. Scroll through the list of controllers and highlight the PCM. c. Select "Misc. Function". d. Highlight "Learn ETC". e. Select "Start" f. Follow the on screen instructions. Select "Next" after each step. Select "Finish" after completing the last step. NOTE: Due to the PCM programming procedure, a DTC may be set in other modules (TCM, BCM, MIC, SKIM, etc.) within the vehicle, if so equipped. Some DTC's may cause the MIL to illuminate. Check all modules using "ECU View" from the Home screen, record the DTC's, and erase these DTC's prior to returning the vehicle to the customer. Erase any DTC's in the PCM only after all other modules have had their DTC's erased. NOTE: The following step is required by law. 18. Type the necessary information on the "Authorized Modification Label" p/n 04275086AB and attach near the VECI label. ** Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Engine Control Module (ECM) - Diesel Engine Control Module: Service and Repair Engine Control Module (ECM) - Diesel 5.9L Diesel 5.9L DIESEL CUMMINS FUEL SYSTEM COMPONENTS The Engine Control Module (ECM) (16) is bolted to a support bracket near the fuel filter. The support bracket mounts to the block with four capscrews and vibration isolators. A ground wire is fastened to the bracket. The other end of the wire is fastened to the engine block. 1. Record any Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTC's) found in the ECM. To avoid possible voltage spike damage to the ECM, ignition key must be off, and both negative battery cables must be disconnected before unplugging ECM connectors. 2. Disconnect both negative battery cables at both batteries. 3. Remove the 50-way and 60-way connector bolts at the ECM. Note: The connector bolt is a female allen head. As bolt is being removed, very carefully remove connectors from the ECM. 4. Remove five ECM mounting bolts and remove ECM from vehicle. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Engine Control Module (ECM) - Diesel > Page 4505 6.7L Diesel 6.7L DIESEL The Engine Control Module (ECM) (5) is located on the left side of the engine. A support bracket mounts to the block with four capscrews and vibration isolators. A ground wire is fastened to the bracket. The other end of the wire is fastened to the engine block. 1. Record any Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTC's) found in the ECM. To avoid possible voltage spike damage to the ECM, ignition key must be off, and both negative battery cables must be disconnected before unplugging ECM connectors. 2. Disconnect both negative battery cables at both batteries. Access to the ECM is easier by working through the left front wheel opening. 3. Remove left front wheel. 4. Remove plastic left front fender splash shield. 5. Remove electrical connector bolts at ECM. Note: As each bolt is being removed, very carefully remove connectors from the ECM. 6. Remove three ECM mounting bolts (6) and remove ECM from engine. 5.9L Diesel 5.9L DIESEL Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Engine Control Module (ECM) - Diesel > Page 4506 CUMMINS FUEL SYSTEM COMPONENTS Do not apply paint to ECM or a poor ground will result. 1. Position the ECM (16) to the ECM support bracket and install the five mounting bolts. Tighten bolts to 24 Nm (18 ft. lbs.). 2. Check pin connectors in ECM, 50-way and 60-way connectors for corrosion or damage. Repair as necessary. 3. Clean pins in the 50-way and 60-way electrical connectors with a electrical contact cleaner. 4. Install the 50-way and 60-way connectors to ECM. Tighten connector bolts to 3 Nm (27 in. lbs.). 5. Reconnect both negative battery cables. 6. Use a diagnostic scan tool to erase any Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTC's) from ECM. 6.7L Diesel 6.7L DIESEL Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Engine Control Module (ECM) - Diesel > Page 4507 Do not apply paint to ECM or a poor ground will result. 1. Position ECM (5) to the ECM support bracket and install mounting bolts. Tighten bolts to 24 Nm (18 ft. lbs.). 2. Check pins in electrical connectors for corrosion, damage or dirt intrusion. Also check all pins for being bent. Repair as necessary. Damaged, dirty, bent or corroded pins could result in poor conductivity, causing intermittent electrical issues or DTC's. 3. Clean pins in electrical connectors with an electrical contact cleaner. 4. Install connectors to ECM. Tighten connector bolts to 3 Nm (27 in. lbs.). 5. Install splash shield. 6. Install left front wheel. 7. Connect both negative battery cables. 8. Use a diagnostic scan tool to erase any Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTC's) from ECM.FUEL INJECTOR ID CORRECTION CODES: Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Engine Control Module (ECM) - Diesel > Page 4508 Each fuel injector has a six-digit alphanumeric correction code. The correction code is printed on the intake side of the fuel injector (1) and is used to identify injector calibration. When replacing any fuel injectors, this code must be entered into the vehicles Engine Control Module (ECM) using a diagnostic scan tool. In addition, if a new ECM is installed, use a diagnostic scan tool to program all six of the injector codes from the original fuel injectors into the new ECM. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Engine Control Module (ECM) - Diesel > Page 4509 Engine Control Module: Service and Repair Powertrain Control Module - Removal REMOVAL CAUTION: Certain ABS systems rely on having the Powertrain Control Module (PCM) broadcast the Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) over the bus network. To prevent problems of DTCs and other items related to the VIN broadcast, it is recommend that you disconnect the ABS CAB (controller) temporarily when replacing the PCM. Once the PCM is replaced, write the VIN to the PCM using a scan tool. This is done from the engine main menu. Arrow over to the second page to "1. Miscellaneous". Select "Check VIN" from the choices. Make sure it has the correct VIN entered before continuing. When the VIN is complete, turn off the ignition key and reconnect the ABS module connector. This will prevent the setting of DTCs and other items associated with the lack of a VIN detected when you turn the key ON after replacing the PCM. CAUTION: Use the scan tool to reprogram the new PCM with the vehicles original identification number (VIN) and the vehicles original mileage. If this step is not done, a Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) may be set. The PCM (1) is located in the engine compartment attached to the dash panel (3). To avoid possible voltage spike damage to the PCM, ignition key must be off, and negative battery cable must be disconnected before unplugging PCM connectors. 1. Disconnect negative battery cable at battery. 2. Remove cover over electrical connectors. Cover snaps onto PCM. 3. Carefully unplug the three 32-way connectors (four 38-way connectors if equipped with NGC) from PCM (1). 4. Remove three PCM mounting bolts (4) and remove PCM from vehicle. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Engine Control Module (ECM) - Diesel > Page 4510 Engine Control Module: Service and Repair Powertrain Control Module - Installation INSTALLATION CAUTION: Certain ABS systems rely on having the Powertrain Control Module (PCM) broadcast the Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) over the bus network. To prevent problems of DTCs and other items related to the VIN broadcast, it is recommend that you disconnect the ABS CAB (controller) temporarily when replacing the PCM. Once the PCM is replaced, write the VIN to the PCM using a scan tool. This is done from the engine main menu. Arrow over to the second page to "1. Miscellaneous". Select "Check VIN" from the choices. Make sure it has the correct VIN entered before continuing. When the VIN is complete, turn off the ignition key and reconnect the ABS module connector. This will prevent the setting of DTCs and other items associated with the lack of a VIN detected when you turn the key ON after replacing the PCM. CAUTION: Use the scan tool to reprogram the new PCM with the vehicles original identification number (VIN) and the vehicles original mileage. If this step is not done, a Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) may be set. 1. Install PCM (3) and 3 mounting bolts (4) to vehicle. 2. Tighten bolts. Refer to torque specifications. 3. Check pin connectors in the PCM and the three 32-way connectors (four 38-way connectors if equipped with NGC) for corrosion or damage. Also, the pin heights in connectors should all be same. Repair as necessary before installing connectors. 4. Install three 32-way connectors (four 38-way connectors if equipped with NGC). 5. Install cover over electrical connectors. Cover snaps onto PCM. 6. Install negative battery cable. 7. The 5.7L V-8 engine is equipped with a fully electronic accelerator pedal position sensor. If equipped with a 5.7L, also perform the following 3 steps: a. Connect negative battery cable to battery. b. Turn ignition switch ON, but do not crank engine. c. Leave ignition switch ON for a minimum of 10 seconds. This will allow PCM to learn electrical parameters. d. The scan tool may also be used to learn electrical parameters. Go to the Miscellaneous menu, and then select ETC Learn. 8. If the previous step is not performed, a Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) will be set. 9. If necessary, use a scan tool to erase any Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTC's) from PCM. Also use the scan tool to reprogram new PCM with vehicles original Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) and original vehicle mileage. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Diagrams Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System): Diagrams Connector - (IN TIPM) RELAY-AUTO SHUT DOWN - (IN TIPM) Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4514 Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System): Description and Operation PCM OUTPUT The 5 pin, 12 volt, Automatic Shutdown (ASD) relay is located in the Power Distribution Center (PDC). Refer to label on PDC cover for relay location. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4515 Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System): Testing and Inspection Fig.1 ASD And Fuel Pump Relay Terminals-Type 1 Fig.2 ASD And Fuel Pump Relay Terminals-Type 2 The following description of operation and tests apply only to the Automatic Shutdown (ASD) and fuel pump relays. The terminals on the bottom of each relay are numbered. Two different types of relays may be used, or. - Terminal number 30 is connected to battery voltage. For both the ASD and fuel pump relays, terminal 30 is connected to battery voltage at all times. - The PCM grounds the coil side of the relay through terminal number 85. - Terminal number 86 supplies voltage to the coil side of the relay. - When the PCM de-energizes the ASD and fuel pump relays, terminal number 87A connects to terminal 30. This is the OFF position. In the OFF position, voltage is not supplied to the rest of the circuit. Terminal 87A is the center terminal on the relay. - When the PCM energizes the ASD and fuel pump relays, terminal 87 connects to terminal 30. This is the ON position. Terminal 87 supplies voltage to the rest of the circuit. The following procedure applies to the ASD and fuel pump relays. 1. Remove relay from connector before testing. 2. With the relay removed from the vehicle, use an ohmmeter to check the resistance between terminals 85 and 86. The resistance should be 75 ohms Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4516 ± 5 ohms. 3. Connect the ohmmeter between terminals 30 and 87A. The ohmmeter should show continuity between terminals 30 and 87A. 4. Connect the ohmmeter between terminals 87 and 30. The ohmmeter should not show continuity at this time. 5. Connect one end of a jumper wire (16 gauge or smaller) to relay terminal 85. Connect the other end of the jumper wire to the ground side of a 12 volt power source. 6. Connect one end of another jumper wire (16 gauge or smaller) to the power side of the 12 volt power source. Do not attach the other end of the jumper wire to the relay at this time. WARNING: DO NOT ALLOW OHMMETER TO CONTACT TERMINALS 85 OR 86 DURING THIS TEST. DAMAGE TO OHMMETER MAY RESULT. 7. Attach the other end of the jumper wire to relay terminal 86. This activates the relay. The ohmmeter should now show continuity between relay terminals 87 and 30. The ohmmeter should not show continuity between relay terminals 87A and 30. 8. Disconnect jumper wires. 9. Replace the relay if it did not pass the continuity and resistance tests. If the relay passed the tests, it operates properly. Check the remainder of the ASD and fuel pump relay circuits. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams Oxygen Sensor Relay: Diagrams 2007-2009 Dodge Ram 3.7/4.7/5.7L engine O2 sensor heater, is controled by the powertrain control module. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4520 Oxygen Sensor Relay: Description and Operation DESCRIPTION The Oxygen Sensors (02S) are attached to, and protrude into the vehicle exhaust system Depending on the engine or emission package, the vehicle may use a total of either 2 or 4 sensors Federal Emission Packages Two sensors are used: upstream (referred to as 1/1) and downstream (referred to as 1/2) With this emission package, the upstream sensor (1/1) is located just before the main catalytic convertor The downstream sensor (1/2) is located just after the main catalytic convertor California Emission Packages: On this emissions package, 4 sensors are used: 2 upstream (referred to as ill and 2/1) and 2 downstream (referred to as 1/2 and 2/2) With this emission pack-age, the right upstream sensor (2/i) is located in the right exhaust downpipe just before the mini-catalytic convertor The left upstream sensor (1/i) is located in the left exhaust downpipe just before the mini-catalytic convertor The right downstream sensor (2/2) is located in the right exhaust downpipe just after the mini-catalytic convertor, and before the main catalytic convertor The left downstream sensor (1/2) is located in the left exhaust downpipe just after the mini-catalytic convertor, and before the main catalytic convertor Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Locations Component ID: 401 Component : SENSOR-ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION Connector: Name : SENSOR-ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION Color : BLACK # of pins : 6 Pin Circuit Description 1 F855 20PK/YL 5 VOLT SUPPLY Pin Circuit Description 1 K852 20BR/LB 5 VOLT SUPPLY Pin Circuit Description 1 K852 20BR/VT 5 VOLT SUPPLY 2 K23 20BR/WT APPS NO. 1 SIGNAL 3 K167 20BR/YL APPS NO. 1 RETURN 3 K167 20BR/DG APPS NO. 1 RETURN 4 K400 20BR/VT APPS NO. 2 RETURN 5 K29 20WT/BR APPS NO. 2 SIGNAL 6 F856 20YL/PK 5 VOLT SUPPLY 6 K854 20VT/BR 5 VOLT SUPPLY Component Location - 31 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 4525 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 4526 Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Diagrams Component ID: 401 Component : SENSOR-ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION Connector: Name : SENSOR-ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION Color : BLACK # of pins : 6 Pin Circuit Description 1 F855 20PK/YL 5 VOLT SUPPLY Pin Circuit Description 1 K852 20BR/LB 5 VOLT SUPPLY Pin Circuit Description 1 K852 20BR/VT 5 VOLT SUPPLY 2 K23 20BR/WT APPS NO. 1 SIGNAL 3 K167 20BR/YL APPS NO. 1 RETURN 3 K167 20BR/DG APPS NO. 1 RETURN 4 K400 20BR/VT APPS NO. 2 RETURN 5 K29 20WT/BR APPS NO. 2 SIGNAL 6 F856 20YL/PK 5 VOLT SUPPLY 6 K854 20VT/BR 5 VOLT SUPPLY Component Location - 31 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 4527 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor (APPS) (1) is located inside the vehicle. It is attached to the accelerator pedal assembly (3). It is used only with 3.7L V-6 and 5.7L V-8 gas engines, and also with diesel engines. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 4530 Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor (APPS) provides the Powertrain Control Module (PCM) with two DC voltage signals which change as the position of the accelerator pedal changes. One of the DC voltage signals will be half the voltage of the other signal. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL CAUTION: Do not attempt to separate or remove the Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor (APPS) from the accelerator pedal assembly. The APPS is replaced as an assembly along with the pedal. If sensor is removed from pedal, its electronic calibration may be destroyed. 1. Disconnect 6-way electrical connector at top of APPS (2). 2. Remove APPS lower mounting bolt (4) and two mounting nuts. 3. Remove pedal and APPS assembly from vehicle. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 4533 Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION CAUTION: Do not attempt to separate or remove the Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor (APPS) from the accelerator pedal assembly. The APPS is replaced as an assembly along with the pedal. If sensor is removed from pedal, its electronic calibration may be destroyed. 1. Position pedal and APPS assembly to its mounting bracket. 2. Connect 6-way electrical connector to top of APPS (2). 3. Install APPS lower mounting bolt (4) and two mounting nuts. 4. If necessary, use a Scan Tool to erase any Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTC's). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Battery Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Battery Temperature Sensor - Description Battery Temperature Sensor: Description and Operation Battery Temperature Sensor - Description DESCRIPTION The Battery Temperature Sensor (BTS) is used only on the diesel engine. It is attached to the battery tray located under the battery. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Battery Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Battery Temperature Sensor - Description > Page 4538 Battery Temperature Sensor: Description and Operation Battery Temperature Sensor - Operation OPERATION The BTS is used to determine the battery temperature and control battery charging rate. This temperature data, along with data from monitored line voltage, is used by the PCM (ECM Diesel) to vary the battery charging rate. System voltage will be higher at colder temperatures and is gradually reduced at warmer temperatures. The PCM sends 5 volts to the sensor and is grounded through the sensor return line. As temperature increases, resistance in the sensor decreases and the detection voltage at the PCM increases. The BTS is also used for OBD II diagnostics. Certain faults and OBD II monitors are either enabled or disabled, depending upon BTS input (for example, disable purge and enable Leak Detection Pump (LDP) and O2 sensor heater tests). Most OBD II monitors are disabled below 20°F. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Battery Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Battery Temperature Sensor - Removal Battery Temperature Sensor: Service and Repair Battery Temperature Sensor - Removal REMOVAL The battery temperature sensor (1) is located under the vehicle battery and is attached (snapped into) a mounting hole on battery tray (4). 1. Remove battery. 2. Pry sensor (1) straight up from battery tray mounting hole to gain access to electrical connector (3). 3. Disconnect sensor from engine wire harness electrical connector. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Battery Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Battery Temperature Sensor - Removal > Page 4541 Battery Temperature Sensor: Service and Repair Battery Temperature Sensor - Installation INSTALLATION NOTE: The battery temperature sensor (1) is located under the vehicle battery and is attached (snapped into) a mounting hole on battery tray (4). 1. Pull electrical connector (3) up through mounting hole in top of battery tray. 2. Connect sensor. 3. Snap sensor into battery tray. 4. Install battery. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations Camshaft Position Sensor: Locations Component ID: 405 Component : SENSOR-CAMSHAFT POSITION Connector: Name : SENSOR-CAMSHAFT POSITION Color : # of pins : 3 Qualifier : (DIESEL) Pin Circuit Description 1 F855 18PK/YL 5 VOLT SUPPLY 2 K944 18BK/GY CMP SENSOR GROUND 2 K916 18BR/OR SENSOR GROUND 3 K44 18DB/GY CMP SIGNAL Component Location - 5 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 4545 Component Location - 11 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 4546 Component Location - 13 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 4547 Connector: Name : SENSOR-CAMSHAFT POSITION Color : GRAY # of pins : 3 Qualifier : (GAS) Pin Circuit Description 1 F856 20YL/PK 5 VOLT SUPPLY 2 K900 20DB/DG SENSOR GROUND 3 K44 20DB/GY CMP SIGNAL Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 4548 Component Location - 5 Component Location - 11 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 4549 Component Location - 13 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 4550 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 4551 Camshaft Position Sensor: Diagrams Component ID: 405 Component : SENSOR-CAMSHAFT POSITION Connector: Name : SENSOR-CAMSHAFT POSITION Color : # of pins : 3 Qualifier : (DIESEL) Pin Circuit Description 1 F855 18PK/YL 5 VOLT SUPPLY 2 K944 18BK/GY CMP SENSOR GROUND 2 K916 18BR/OR SENSOR GROUND 3 K44 18DB/GY CMP SIGNAL Component Location - 5 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 4552 Component Location - 11 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 4553 Component Location - 13 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 4554 Connector: Name : SENSOR-CAMSHAFT POSITION Color : GRAY # of pins : 3 Qualifier : (GAS) Pin Circuit Description 1 F856 20YL/PK 5 VOLT SUPPLY 2 K900 20DB/DG SENSOR GROUND 3 K44 20DB/GY CMP SIGNAL Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 4555 Component Location - 5 Component Location - 11 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 4556 Component Location - 13 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 4557 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Camshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation Description 3.7L & 4.7L The Camshaft Position Sensor (CMP) (3) is bolted to the right-front side of the right cylinder head (2). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 4560 Camshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation Operation 4.7L The CMP sensor engine contains a hall effect device called a sync signal generator to generate a fuel sync signal. This sync signal generator detects notches located on a tonewheel. The tonewheel (4) is located at the front of the camshaft for the right cylinder head (2). As the tonewheel rotates, the notches (1) pass through the sync signal generator. The pattern of the notches (viewed counter-clockwise from front of engine) is: 1 notch, 2 notches, 3 notches, 3 notches, 2 notches, 1 notch, 3 notches and 1 notch. The signal from the CMP sensor is used in conjunction with the crankshaft position sensor to differentiate between fuel injection and spark events. It is also used to synchronize the fuel injectors with their respective cylinders. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Camshaft Position Sensor - Removal Camshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair Camshaft Position Sensor - Removal 4.7L The Camshaft Position Sensor (CMP) (2) is bolted to the front/top of the right cylinder head (1). 1. Raise and support vehicle. 2. Disconnect electrical connector (4) at CMP sensor. 3. Remove sensor mounting bolt (3). 4. Carefully twist sensor from cylinder head. 5. Check condition of sensor O-ring. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Camshaft Position Sensor - Removal > Page 4563 Camshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair Camshaft Position Sensor - Installation 4.7L 1. Clean out machined hole in cylinder head. 2. Apply a small amount of engine oil to sensor O-ring. 3. Install sensor (2) into cylinder head (1) with a slight rocking action. Do not twist sensor into position as damage to O-ring may result. CAUTION: Before tightening sensor mounting bolt, be sure sensor is completely flush to cylinder head. If sensor is not flush, damage to sensor mounting tang may result. 4. Install mounting bolt (3) and tighten to 12 Nm (106 in.lbs.). 5. Connect electrical connector to sensor. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Locations Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Locations Component ID: 410 Component : SENSOR-ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE Connector: Name : SENSOR-ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (DIESEL) A K200 18BR/YL SENSOR GROUND A K914 18BK/WT SENSOR GROUND B K2 18VT/OR ECT SIGNAL Component Location - 8 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Locations > Page 4567 Component Location - 11 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Locations > Page 4568 Component Location - 13 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Locations > Page 4569 Connector: Name : SENSOR-ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (GAS) Pin Circuit Description 1 K2 20VT/OR ECT SIGNAL 2 K900 20DB/DG SENSOR GROUND Component Location - 8 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Locations > Page 4570 Component Location - 11 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Locations > Page 4571 Component Location - 13 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Locations > Page 4572 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Locations > Page 4573 Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Diagrams Component ID: 410 Component : SENSOR-ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE Connector: Name : SENSOR-ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (DIESEL) A K200 18BR/YL SENSOR GROUND A K914 18BK/WT SENSOR GROUND B K2 18VT/OR ECT SIGNAL Component Location - 8 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Locations > Page 4574 Component Location - 11 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Locations > Page 4575 Component Location - 13 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Locations > Page 4576 Connector: Name : SENSOR-ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (GAS) Pin Circuit Description 1 K2 20VT/OR ECT SIGNAL 2 K900 20DB/DG SENSOR GROUND Component Location - 8 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Locations > Page 4577 Component Location - 11 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Locations > Page 4578 Component Location - 13 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Locations > Page 4579 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations Crankshaft Position Sensor: Locations Component ID: 407 Component : SENSOR-CRANKSHAFT POSITION Connector: Name : SENSOR-CRANKSHAFT POSITION Color : BLACK # of pins : 3 Qualifier : (3.7L) Pin Circuit Description 1 K24 20BR/LB CKP SIGNAL 2 K900 20DB/DG SENSOR GROUND 3 F855 20PK/YL 5 VOLT SUPPLY Component Location - 5 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 4583 Component Location - 11 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 4584 Component Location - 19 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 4585 Component Location - 13 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 4586 Connector: Name : SENSOR-CRANKSHAFT POSITION Color : BLACK # of pins : 3 Qualifier : (4.7L) Pin Circuit Description 1 K24 20BR/LB CKP SIGNAL 2 K900 20DB/DG SENSOR GROUND 3 F855 20PK/YL 5 VOLT SUPPLY Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 4587 Component Location - 5 Component Location - 11 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 4588 Component Location - 19 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 4589 Component Location - 13 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 4590 Connector: Name : SENSOR-CRANKSHAFT POSITION Color : BLACK # of pins : 3 Qualifier : (5.7L) Pin Circuit Description 1 F855 20PK/YL 5 VOLT SUPPLY 2 K900 20DB/DG SENSOR GROUND 3 K24 20BR/LB CKP SIGNAL Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 4591 Component Location - 5 Component Location - 11 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 4592 Component Location - 19 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 4593 Component Location - 13 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 4594 Connector: Name : SENSOR-CRANKSHAFT POSITION Color : BLACK # of pins : 3 Qualifier : (DIESEL) Pin Circuit Description 1 K853 18DB/BR 5 VOLT SUPPLY Pin Circuit Description 1 K824 18DB/BR 5 VOLT SUPPLY Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 4595 2 K975 18BR/OR CKP SENSOR GROUND 2 K925 18BR/OR CKP SENSOR GROUND 3 K24 18BR/LB CKP SIGNAL Component Location - 5 Component Location - 11 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 4596 Component Location - 19 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 4597 Component Location - 13 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 4598 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 4599 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Diagrams Component ID: 407 Component : SENSOR-CRANKSHAFT POSITION Connector: Name : SENSOR-CRANKSHAFT POSITION Color : BLACK # of pins : 3 Qualifier : (3.7L) Pin Circuit Description 1 K24 20BR/LB CKP SIGNAL 2 K900 20DB/DG SENSOR GROUND 3 F855 20PK/YL 5 VOLT SUPPLY Component Location - 5 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 4600 Component Location - 11 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 4601 Component Location - 19 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 4602 Component Location - 13 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 4603 Connector: Name : SENSOR-CRANKSHAFT POSITION Color : BLACK # of pins : 3 Qualifier : (4.7L) Pin Circuit Description 1 K24 20BR/LB CKP SIGNAL 2 K900 20DB/DG SENSOR GROUND 3 F855 20PK/YL 5 VOLT SUPPLY Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 4604 Component Location - 5 Component Location - 11 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 4605 Component Location - 19 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 4606 Component Location - 13 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 4607 Connector: Name : SENSOR-CRANKSHAFT POSITION Color : BLACK # of pins : 3 Qualifier : (5.7L) Pin Circuit Description 1 F855 20PK/YL 5 VOLT SUPPLY 2 K900 20DB/DG SENSOR GROUND 3 K24 20BR/LB CKP SIGNAL Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 4608 Component Location - 5 Component Location - 11 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 4609 Component Location - 19 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 4610 Component Location - 13 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 4611 Connector: Name : SENSOR-CRANKSHAFT POSITION Color : BLACK # of pins : 3 Qualifier : (DIESEL) Pin Circuit Description 1 K853 18DB/BR 5 VOLT SUPPLY Pin Circuit Description 1 K824 18DB/BR 5 VOLT SUPPLY Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 4612 2 K975 18BR/OR CKP SENSOR GROUND 2 K925 18BR/OR CKP SENSOR GROUND 3 K24 18BR/LB CKP SIGNAL Component Location - 5 Component Location - 11 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 4613 Component Location - 19 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 4614 Component Location - 13 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 4615 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Crankshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation Description 4.7L V-8 The Crankshaft Position (CKP) (1) sensor is mounted into the right rear side of the cylinder block. It is positioned and bolted into a machined hole. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 4618 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation Operation 4.7L V-8 Engine speed and crankshaft position are provided through the CKP (Crankshaft Position) sensor. The sensor generates pulses that are the input sent to the Powertrain Control Module (PCM). The PCM interprets the sensor input to determine the crankshaft position. The PCM then uses this position, along with other inputs, to determine injector sequence and ignition timing. The sensor is a hall effect device combined with an internal magnet. It is also sensitive to steel within a certain distance from it. A tonewheel (1) is bolted to the engine crankshaft. This tonewheel has sets of notches (2) at its outer edge. The notches cause a pulse to be generated when they pass under the sensor. The pulses are the input to the PCM. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Crankshaft Position Sensor - Removal Crankshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair Crankshaft Position Sensor - Removal 4.7L V-8 The Crankshaft Position (CKP) sensor is located at the right-rear side of the engine cylinder block. It is positioned and bolted into a machined hole in the engine block. 1. Raise vehicle. 2. Disconnect CKP electrical connector at sensor. 3. Remove CKP mounting bolt (2). 4. Carefully twist sensor (1) from cylinder block. 5. Remove sensor from vehicle. 6. Check condition of sensor O-ring. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Crankshaft Position Sensor - Removal > Page 4621 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair Crankshaft Position Sensor - Installation 4.7L V-8 1. Clean out machined hole in engine block. 2. Apply a small amount of engine oil to sensor o-ring. 3. Install sensor (1) into engine block with a slight rocking and twisting action. CAUTION: Before tightening sensor mounting bolt, be sure sensor is completely flush to cylinder block. If sensor is not flush, damage to sensor mounting tang may result. 4. Install mounting bolt and tighten to 28 Nm (21 ft. lbs.) torque. 5. Connect electrical connector to sensor. 6. Lower vehicle. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Locations Fuel Level Sensor: Locations DESCRIPTION The fuel pump module assembly is located on the top of the fuel tank. The complete assembly contains the following components: - A combination fuel filter/fuel pressure regulator - A separate fuel pick-up, or inlet filter - An electric fuel pump - A lockring to retain pump module to tank - A soft gasket between tank flange and module - A fuel gauge sending unit (fuel level sensor) - Fuel line connection The fuel gauge sending unit may be serviced separately. If the electrical fuel pump, primary inlet filter, fuel filter or fuel pressure regulator require service, the fuel pump module must be replaced. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Fuel Pump Fuel Level Sensor: Description and Operation Fuel Pump Description DESCRIPTION The electric fuel pump is located inside of the fuel pump module. A 12 volt, permanent magnet, electric motor powers the fuel pump. The electric fuel pump is not a separate, serviceable component. Operation OPERATION Voltage to operate the electric pump is supplied through the fuel pump relay. Fuel is drawn in through a filter at the bottom of the module and pushed through the electric motor gearset to the pump outlet. Check Valve Operation: The bottom section of the fuel pump module contains a one-way check valve to prevent fuel flow back into the tank and to maintain fuel supply line pressure (engine warm) when pump is not operational. It is also used to keep the fuel supply line full of gasoline when pump is not operational. After the vehicle has cooled down, fuel pressure may drop to 0 psi (cold fluid contracts), but liquid gasoline will remain in fuel supply line between the check valve and fuel injectors.Fuel pressure that has dropped to 0 psi on a cooled down vehicle (engine off) is a normal condition. The electric fuel pump is not a separate, serviceable component. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Fuel Pump > Page 4627 Fuel Level Sensor: Description and Operation Fuel Pump Module Description DESCRIPTION The fuel pump module assembly is located on the top of the fuel tank. The complete assembly contains the following components: - A combination fuel filter/fuel pressure regulator - A separate fuel pick-up, or inlet filter - An electric fuel pump - A lockring to retain pump module to tank - A soft gasket between tank flange and module - A fuel gauge sending unit (fuel level sensor) - Fuel line connection The fuel gauge sending unit may be serviced separately. If the electrical fuel pump, primary inlet filter, fuel filter or fuel pressure regulator require service, the fuel pump module must be replaced. Operation OPERATION Refer to Fuel Pump, Inlet Filter, Fuel Filter / Fuel Pressure Regulator and Fuel Gauge Sending Unit. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Fuel Level Sensor: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL WARNING: The fuel system may be under a constant pressure (even with the engine off). Before servicing the fuel pump module, the fuel system pressure must be released. 1. Drain and remove fuel tank. 2. Remove plastic fuel pump module cover (1) by pushing pegs (2) outward. 3. Note rotational position of module before attempting removal. An indexing arrow is located on top of module for this purpose. 4. Position Special Tool 9340 (3) into notches on outside edge of lockring (5). 5. Install 1/2 inch drive breaker bar (1) to tool 9340 (3). 6. Rotate breaker bar counter-clockwise to remove lockring (5). 7. Remove lockring. The module will spring up slightly when lockring is removed. 8. Remove module from fuel tank. Be careful not to bend float arm while removing. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 4630 Fuel Level Sensor: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION 1. Using a new seal (gasket), position fuel pump module into opening in fuel tank. 2. Position lockring (5) over top of fuel pump module. 3. Rotate module until embossed alignment arrow points to center alignment mark. This step must be performed to prevent float from contacting side of fuel tank. Also be sure fuel fitting on top of pump module is pointed to drivers side of vehicle. 4. Install Special Tool 9340 (3) to lockring. 5. Install 1/2 inch drive breaker (1) into Special Tool 9340 (3). 6. Tighten lockring (clockwise) until all seven notches have engaged. 7. Snap plastic fuel pump module cover (1) to pump module. 8. Install fuel tank. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Intake Air Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations Intake Air Temperature Sensor: Component Locations 4.7L V-8 The intake manifold air temperature (IAT) sensor (1) is located near the throttle body. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Intake Air Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 4635 Intake Air Temperature Sensor: Connector Locations Component ID: 421 Component : SENSOR-INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE Connector: Name : SENSOR-INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (6.7L DH) Pin Circuit Description 1 K914 18BR/WT SENSOR GROUND 2 K21 18DB/LG INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR SIGNAL Component Location - 9 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Intake Air Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 4636 Component Location - 11 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Intake Air Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 4637 Component Location - 7 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Intake Air Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 4638 Connector: Name : SENSOR-INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE Color : DK. GRAY # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (GAS) Pin Circuit Description 1 K21 20DB/LG IAT SIGNAL 2 K900 20DB/DG SENSOR GROUND Component Location - 9 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Intake Air Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 4639 Component Location - 11 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Intake Air Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 4640 Component Location - 7 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Intake Air Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 4641 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Intake Air Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 4642 Intake Air Temperature Sensor: Diagrams Component ID: 421 Component : SENSOR-INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE Connector: Name : SENSOR-INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (6.7L DH) Pin Circuit Description 1 K914 18BR/WT SENSOR GROUND 2 K21 18DB/LG INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR SIGNAL Component Location - 9 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Intake Air Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 4643 Component Location - 11 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Intake Air Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 4644 Component Location - 7 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Intake Air Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 4645 Connector: Name : SENSOR-INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE Color : DK. GRAY # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (GAS) Pin Circuit Description 1 K21 20DB/LG IAT SIGNAL 2 K900 20DB/DG SENSOR GROUND Component Location - 9 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Intake Air Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 4646 Component Location - 11 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Intake Air Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 4647 Component Location - 7 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Intake Air Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 4648 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Intake Air Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 4649 Intake Air Temperature Sensor: Description and Operation OPERATION The IAT sensor provides an input voltage to the Powertrain Control Module (PCM) indicating the density of the air entering the intake manifold based upon intake manifold temperature. At key-on, a 5-volt power circuit is supplied to the sensor from the PCM. The sensor is grounded at the PCM through a low-noise, sensor-return circuit. The PCM uses this input to calculate the following: - Injector pulse-width - Adjustment of spark timing (to help prevent spark knock with high intake manifold air-charge temperatures) The resistance values of the IAT sensor is the same as for the Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) sensor. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Intake Air Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Intake Air Temperature Sensor: Service and Repair Removal 4.7L V-8 The intake manifold air temperature (IAT) sensor (1) is located near the throttle body. 1. Disconnect electrical connector (2) from IAT sensor. 2. Clean dirt from sensor base. 3. Gently lift on small plastic release tab (3) and rotate sensor about 1/4 turn counter-clockwise for removal. 4. Check condition of sensor o-ring (2). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Intake Air Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 4652 Intake Air Temperature Sensor: Service and Repair Installation 4.7L V-8 1. Check condition of sensor o-ring (2). 2. Clean sensor mounting hole. 3. Position sensor (1) into base and rotate clockwise until past release tab (3). 4. Install electrical connector (2). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Knock 1 Knock Sensor: Locations Sensor-Knock 1 Component ID: 423 Component : SENSOR-KNOCK 1 Connector: Name : SENSOR-KNOCK 1 Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (3.7L/5.7L) Pin Circuit Description 1 K42 20DB/YL KNOCK SENSOR NO. 1 SIGNAL 2 K942 20BR/LG KNOCK SENSOR NO. 1 RETURN Component Location - 9 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Knock 1 > Page 4657 Component Location - 22 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Knock 1 > Page 4658 Component Location - 19 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Knock 1 > Page 4659 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Knock 1 > Page 4660 Knock Sensor: Locations Sensor-Knock 2 Component ID: 424 Component : SENSOR-KNOCK 2 Connector: Name : SENSOR-KNOCK 2 Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (3.7L/5.7L) Pin Circuit Description 1 K242 20BR/WT KNOCK SENSOR NO. 2 SIGNAL 2 K924 20WT/BR KNOCK SENSOR NO. 2 RETURN Component Location - 11 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Knock 1 > Page 4661 Component Location - 22 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Knock 1 > Page 4662 Component Location - 19 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Knock 1 > Page 4663 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Knock 1 Knock Sensor: Diagrams Sensor-Knock 1 Component ID: 423 Component : SENSOR-KNOCK 1 Connector: Name : SENSOR-KNOCK 1 Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (3.7L/5.7L) Pin Circuit Description 1 K42 20DB/YL KNOCK SENSOR NO. 1 SIGNAL 2 K942 20BR/LG KNOCK SENSOR NO. 1 RETURN Component Location - 9 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Knock 1 > Page 4666 Component Location - 22 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Knock 1 > Page 4667 Component Location - 19 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Knock 1 > Page 4668 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Knock 1 > Page 4669 Knock Sensor: Diagrams Sensor-Knock 2 Component ID: 424 Component : SENSOR-KNOCK 2 Connector: Name : SENSOR-KNOCK 2 Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (3.7L/5.7L) Pin Circuit Description 1 K242 20BR/WT KNOCK SENSOR NO. 2 SIGNAL 2 K924 20WT/BR KNOCK SENSOR NO. 2 RETURN Component Location - 11 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Knock 1 > Page 4670 Component Location - 22 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Knock 1 > Page 4671 Component Location - 19 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Knock 1 > Page 4672 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Knock 1 > Page 4673 Knock Sensor: Diagrams Sensor-Knock Component ID: 422 Component : SENSOR-KNOCK Connector: Name : SENSOR-KNOCK Color : BLACK # of pins : 4 Qualifier : (4.7L) Pin Circuit Description 1 K942 20BR/LG KNOCK SENSOR NO. 1 RETURN 2 K42 20DB/YL KNOCK SENSOR NO. 1 SIGNAL 3 K924 20WT/BR KNOCK SENSOR NO. 2 RETURN 4 K242 20BR/WT KNOCK SENSOR NO. 2 SIGNAL Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Knock Sensor: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION Two knock sensors are bolted into the cylinder block under the intake manifold 3.7L, 4.7L & 8.3L. Two knock sensors are also used with the 5.7L. These are bolted into each side of the cylinder block (outside) under the exhaust manifold. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 4676 Knock Sensor: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION Two knock sensors are used; one for each cylinder bank. When the knock sensor detects a knock in one of the cylinders on the corresponding bank, it sends an input signal to the Powertrain Control Module (PCM). In response, the PCM retards ignition timing for all cylinders by a scheduled amount. Knock sensors contain a piezoelectric material which constantly vibrates and sends an input voltage (signal) to the PCM while the engine operates. As the intensity of the crystal's vibration increases, the knock sensor output voltage also increases. The voltage signal produced by the knock sensor increases with the amplitude of vibration. The PCM receives the knock sensor voltage signal as an input. If the signal rises above a predetermined level, the PCM will store that value in memory and retard ignition timing to reduce engine knock. If the knock sensor voltage exceeds a preset value, the PCM retards ignition timing for all cylinders. It is not a selective cylinder retard. The PCM ignores knock sensor input during engine idle conditions. Once the engine speed exceeds a specified value, knock retard is allowed. Knock retard uses its own short term and long term memory program. Long term memory stores previous detonation information in its battery-backed RAM. The maximum authority that long term memory has over timing retard can be calibrated. Short term memory is allowed to retard timing up to a preset amount under all operating conditions (as long as rpm is above the minimum rpm) except at Wide Open Throttle (WOT). The PCM, using short term memory, can respond quickly to retard timing when engine knock is detected. Short term memory is lost any time the ignition key is turned off. NOTE: Over or under tightening the sensor mounting bolts will affect knock sensor performance, possibly causing improper spark control. Always use the specified torque when installing the knock sensors. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Knock Sensor: Service and Repair Removal 4.7L The two knock sensors (1) are bolted into the cylinder block under the intake manifold (3). NOTE: The left sensor is identified by an identification tag (LEFT). It is also identified by a larger bolt head. The Powertrain Control Module (PCM) must have and know the correct sensor left/right positions. Do not mix the sensor locations. 1. Disconnect knock sensor dual pigtail harness from engine wiring harness. This connection is made near rear of engine. 2. Remove intake manifold See: Engine, Cooling and Exhaust/Engine/Intake Manifold/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Intake Manifold - Removal . 3. Remove sensor mounting bolts (2). Note foam strip on bolt threads. This foam is used only to retain the bolts to sensors for plant assembly. It is not used as a sealant. Do not apply any adhesive, sealant or thread locking compound to these bolts. 4. Remove sensors (1) from engine. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 4679 Knock Sensor: Service and Repair Installation 4.7L NOTE: The left sensor is identified by an identification tag (LEFT). It is also identified by a larger bolt head. The Powertrain Control Module (PCM) must have and know the correct sensor left/right positions. Do not mix the sensor locations. 1. Thoroughly clean knock sensor mounting holes. 2. Install sensors (1) into cylinder block. NOTE: Over or under tightening the sensor mounting bolts will affect knock sensor performance, possibly causing improper spark control. Always use the specified torque when installing the knock sensors. The torque for the knock sensor bolt is relatively light for an 8 mm bolt. NOTE: Note foam strip on bolt threads. This foam is used only to retain the bolts to sensors for plant assembly. It is not used as a sealant. Do not apply any adhesive, sealant or thread locking compound to these bolts. 3. Install and tighten mounting bolts. Tighten to 15 +/- 2 ft. lbs. (20 Nm) (176 in.lbs.). 4. Install intake manifold See: Engine, Cooling and Exhaust/Engine/Intake Manifold/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Intake Manifold - Installation . 5. Connect knock sensor wiring harness to engine harness (4) at rear of intake manifold. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Locations Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor: Locations Component ID: 426 Component : SENSOR-MANIFOLD ABSOLUTE PRESSURE Connector: Name : SENSOR-MANIFOLD ABSOLUTE PRESSURE Color : GRAY # of pins : 3 Qualifier : (NGC) Pin Circuit Description 1 K1 20VT/BR MAP SIGNAL 2 K900 20DB/DG SENSOR GROUND 3 F856 20YL/PK 5 VOLT SUPPLY Component Location - 8 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 4683 Component Location - 9 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 4684 Component Location - 11 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 4685 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 4686 Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor: Diagrams Component ID: 426 Component : SENSOR-MANIFOLD ABSOLUTE PRESSURE Connector: Name : SENSOR-MANIFOLD ABSOLUTE PRESSURE Color : GRAY # of pins : 3 Qualifier : (NGC) Pin Circuit Description 1 K1 20VT/BR MAP SIGNAL 2 K900 20DB/DG SENSOR GROUND 3 F856 20YL/PK 5 VOLT SUPPLY Component Location - 8 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 4687 Component Location - 9 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 4688 Component Location - 11 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 4689 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 4690 Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor: Description and Operation OPERATION The MAP sensor is used as an input to the Powertrain Control Module (PCM). It contains a silicon based sensing unit to provide data on the manifold vacuum that draws the air/fuel mixture into the combustion chamber. The PCM requires this information to determine injector pulse width and spark advance. When manifold absolute pressure (MAP) equals Barometric pressure, the pulse width will be at maximum. A 5 volt reference is supplied from the PCM and returns a voltage signal to the PCM that reflects manifold pressure. The zero pressure reading is 0.5V and full scale is 4.5V. For a pressure swing of 0-15 psi, the voltage changes 4.0V. To operate the sensor, it is supplied a regulated 4.8 to 5.1 volts. Ground is provided through the low-noise, sensor return circuit at the PCM. The MAP sensor input is the number one contributor to fuel injector pulse width. The most important function of the MAP sensor is to determine barometric pressure. The PCM needs to know if the vehicle is at sea level or at a higher altitude, because the air density changes with altitude. It will also help to correct for varying barometric pressure. Barometric pressure and altitude have a direct inverse correlation; as altitude goes up, barometric goes down. At key-on, the PCM powers up and looks at MAP voltage, and based upon the voltage it sees, it knows the current barometric pressure (relative to altitude). Once the engine starts, the PCM looks at the voltage again, continuously every 12 milliseconds, and compares the current voltage to what it was at key-on. The difference between current voltage and what it was at key-on, is manifold vacuum. During key-on (engine not running) the sensor reads (updates) barometric pressure. A normal range can be obtained by monitoring a known good sensor. As the altitude increases, the air becomes thinner (less oxygen). If a vehicle is started and driven to a very different altitude than where it was at key-on, the barometric pressure needs to be updated. Any time the PCM sees Wide Open Throttle (WOT), based upon Throttle Position Sensor (TPS) angle and RPM, it will update barometric pressure in the MAP memory cell. With periodic updates, the PCM can make its calculations more effectively. The PCM uses the MAP sensor input to aid in calculating the following: - Manifold pressure - Barometric pressure - Engine load - Injector pulse-width - Spark-advance programs - Shift-point strategies (certain automatic transmissions only) - Idle speed - Decel fuel shutoff The MAP sensor signal is provided from a single piezoresistive element located in the center of a diaphragm. The element and diaphragm are both made of silicone. As manifold pressure changes, the diaphragm moves causing the element to deflect, which stresses the silicone. When silicone is exposed to stress, its resistance changes. As manifold vacuum increases, the MAP sensor input voltage decreases proportionally. The sensor also contains electronics that condition the signal and provide temperature compensation. The PCM recognizes a decrease in manifold pressure by monitoring a decrease in voltage from the reading stored in the barometric pressure memory cell. The MAP sensor is a linear sensor; meaning as pressure changes, voltage changes proportionately. The range of voltage output from the sensor is usually between 4.6 volts at sea level to as low as 0.3 volts at 26 in. of Hg. Barometric pressure is the pressure exerted by the atmosphere upon an object. At sea level on a standard day, no storm, barometric pressure is approximately 29.92 in Hg. For every 100 feet of altitude, barometric pressure drops 0.10 in. Hg. If a storm goes through, it can change barometric pressure from what should be present for that altitude. You should know what the average pressure and corresponding barometric pressure is for your area. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor - Oxygen 1/1 Oxygen Sensor: Locations Sensor - Oxygen 1/1 Component ID: 431 Component : SENSOR-OXYGEN 1/1 Connector: Name : SENSOR-OXYGEN 1/1 Color : # of pins : 6 Qualifier : (6.7L DIESEL) Pin Circuit Description 1 K89 20BR/LG 02 1/1 PUMP CURRENT 2 K902 20BR/DG O2 1/1 RETURN 3 K79 20BR/LB O2 1/1 HEATER CONTROL RETURN 4 K99 20BR/LG O2 1/1 HEATER CONTROL SUPPLY 5 K103 20BR/LB O2 1/1 PUMP CELL CURRENT TRIM 6 K41 20DB/LB O2 1/1 SIGNAL Component Location - 21 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor - Oxygen 1/1 > Page 4695 Component Location - 22 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor - Oxygen 1/1 > Page 4696 Component Location - 24 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor - Oxygen 1/1 > Page 4697 Component Location - 19 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor - Oxygen 1/1 > Page 4698 Connector: Name : SENSOR-OXYGEN 1/1 Color : # of pins : 6 Qualifier : (6.7L DIESEL) Pin Circuit Description 1 K89 20BR/LG 02 1/1 PUMP CURRENT 2 K902 20BR/DG O2 1/1 RETURN 3 K79 20BR/LB O2 1/1 HEATER CONTROL RETURN 4 K99 20BR/LG O2 1/1 HEATER CONTROL SUPPLY Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor - Oxygen 1/1 > Page 4699 5 K103 20BR/LB O2 1/1 PUMP CELL CURRENT TRIM 6 K41 20DB/LB O2 1/1 SIGNAL Component Location - 21 Component Location - 22 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor - Oxygen 1/1 > Page 4700 Component Location - 24 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor - Oxygen 1/1 > Page 4701 Component Location - 19 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor - Oxygen 1/1 > Page 4702 Connector: Name : SENSOR-OXYGEN 1/1 Color : BLACK # of pins : 4 Qualifier : (GAS) Pin Circuit Description 1 K99 20BR/LG O2 1/1 HEATER CONTROL SUPPLY 2 Z42 20BK/LG GROUND 3 K902 20BR/DG O2 RETURN (UPSTREAM) 4 K41 20DB/LB O2 1/1 SIGNAL Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor - Oxygen 1/1 > Page 4703 Component Location - 21 Component Location - 22 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor - Oxygen 1/1 > Page 4704 Component Location - 24 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor - Oxygen 1/1 > Page 4705 Component Location - 19 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor - Oxygen 1/1 > Page 4706 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor - Oxygen 1/1 > Page 4707 Oxygen Sensor: Locations Sensor - Oxygen 1/2 Component ID: 432 Component : SENSOR-OXYGEN 1/2 Connector: Name : SENSOR-OXYGEN 1/2 Color : # of pins : 6 Qualifier : (6.7L DIESEL) Pin Circuit Description 1 K734 20BR/DG 02 1/2 PUMP CURRENT 2 K904 20DB/DG O2 1/2 RETURN 3 K80 20BR/TN O2 1/2 HEATER CONTROL RETURN 4 K299 20BR/WT O2 1/2 HEATER CONTROL SUPPLY 5 K733 20BR O2 1/2 PUMP CELL CURRENT TRIM 6 K141 20DB/YL O2 1/2 SIGNAL Component Location - 21 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor - Oxygen 1/1 > Page 4708 Component Location - 22 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor - Oxygen 1/1 > Page 4709 Component Location - 19 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor - Oxygen 1/1 > Page 4710 Connector: Name : SENSOR-OXYGEN 1/2 Color : # of pins : 6 Qualifier : (6.7L DIESEL) Pin Circuit Description 1 K734 20BR/DG 02 1/2 PUMP CURRENT 2 K904 20DB/DG O2 1/2 RETURN 3 K80 20BR/TN O2 1/2 HEATER CONTROL RETURN 4 K299 20BR/WT O2 1/2 HEATER CONTROL SUPPLY Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor - Oxygen 1/1 > Page 4711 5 K733 20BR O2 1/2 PUMP CELL CURRENT TRIM 6 K141 20DB/YL O2 1/2 SIGNAL Component Location - 21 Component Location - 22 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor - Oxygen 1/1 > Page 4712 Component Location - 19 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor - Oxygen 1/1 > Page 4713 Connector: Name : SENSOR-OXYGEN 1/2 Color : # of pins : 4 Qualifier : (GAS) Pin Circuit Description 1 K299 20BR/WT O2 1/2 HEATER CONTROL SUPPLY 2 Z43 20BK/LB GROUND 3 K904 20DB/DG O2 RETURN (DOWNSTREAM) 4 K141 20DB/YL O2 1/2 SIGNAL Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor - Oxygen 1/1 > Page 4714 Component Location - 21 Component Location - 22 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor - Oxygen 1/1 > Page 4715 Component Location - 19 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor - Oxygen 1/1 > Page 4716 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor - Oxygen 1/1 > Page 4717 Oxygen Sensor: Locations Sensor - Oxygen 2/1 Component ID: 433 Component : SENSOR-OXYGEN 2/1 Connector: Name : SENSOR-OXYGEN 2/1 Color : BLACK # of pins : 4 Qualifier : (3.7L/5.7L) Pin Circuit Description 1 K199 20BR/VT O2 2/1 HEATER CONTROL 2 Z934 20BK GROUND 3 K902 20BR/DG O2 RETURN (UPSTREAM) 4 K43 20DB/LG O2 2/1 SIGNAL Component Location - 22 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor - Oxygen 1/1 > Page 4718 Component Location - 23 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor - Oxygen 1/1 > Page 4719 Component Location - 19 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor - Oxygen 1/1 > Page 4720 Connector: Name : SENSOR-OXYGEN 2/1 Color : GRAY # of pins : 4 Qualifier : (4.7L) Pin Circuit Description 1 K199 20BR/VT O2 2/1 HEATER CONTROL 2 Z934 20BK GROUND 3 K902 20BR/DG O2 RETURN (UPSTREAM) 4 K43 20DB/LG O2 2/1 SIGNAL Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor - Oxygen 1/1 > Page 4721 Component Location - 22 Component Location - 23 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor - Oxygen 1/1 > Page 4722 Component Location - 19 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor - Oxygen 1/1 > Page 4723 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor - Oxygen 1/1 > Page 4724 Oxygen Sensor: Locations Sensor - Oxygen 2/2 Component ID: 434 Component : SENSOR-OXYGEN 2/2 Connector: Name : SENSOR-OXYGEN 2/2 Color : GRAY # of pins : 4 Qualifier : (4.7L/5.7L HD) Pin Circuit Description 1 K399 20BR/GY O2 2/2 HEATER CONTROL 2 Z992 20BK GROUND 3 K904 20DB/DG O2 RETURN (DOWNSTREAM) 4 K243 20BR O2 2/2 SIGNAL Component Location - 22 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor - Oxygen 1/1 > Page 4725 Component Location - 23 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor - Oxygen 1/1 > Page 4726 Component Location - 24 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor - Oxygen 1/1 > Page 4727 Component Location - 19 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor - Oxygen 1/1 > Page 4728 Connector: Name : SENSOR-OXYGEN 2/2 Color : BLACK # of pins : 4 Qualifier : (GAS LD) Pin Circuit Description 1 K399 20BR/GY O2 2/2 HEATER CONTROL 2 Z992 20BK GROUND 3 K904 20DB/DG O2 RETURN (DOWNSTREAM) 4 K243 20BR O2 2/2 SIGNAL Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor - Oxygen 1/1 > Page 4729 Component Location - 22 Component Location - 23 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor - Oxygen 1/1 > Page 4730 Component Location - 24 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor - Oxygen 1/1 > Page 4731 Component Location - 19 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor - Oxygen 1/1 > Page 4732 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Oxygen 1/1 Oxygen Sensor: Diagrams Sensor-Oxygen 1/1 Component ID: 431 Component : SENSOR-OXYGEN 1/1 Connector: Name : SENSOR-OXYGEN 1/1 Color : # of pins : 6 Qualifier : (6.7L DIESEL) Pin Circuit Description 1 K89 20BR/LG 02 1/1 PUMP CURRENT 2 K902 20BR/DG O2 1/1 RETURN 3 K79 20BR/LB O2 1/1 HEATER CONTROL RETURN 4 K99 20BR/LG O2 1/1 HEATER CONTROL SUPPLY 5 K103 20BR/LB O2 1/1 PUMP CELL CURRENT TRIM 6 K41 20DB/LB O2 1/1 SIGNAL Component Location - 21 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Oxygen 1/1 > Page 4735 Component Location - 22 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Oxygen 1/1 > Page 4736 Component Location - 24 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Oxygen 1/1 > Page 4737 Component Location - 19 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Oxygen 1/1 > Page 4738 Connector: Name : SENSOR-OXYGEN 1/1 Color : # of pins : 6 Qualifier : (6.7L DIESEL) Pin Circuit Description 1 K89 20BR/LG 02 1/1 PUMP CURRENT 2 K902 20BR/DG O2 1/1 RETURN 3 K79 20BR/LB O2 1/1 HEATER CONTROL RETURN 4 K99 20BR/LG O2 1/1 HEATER CONTROL SUPPLY Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Oxygen 1/1 > Page 4739 5 K103 20BR/LB O2 1/1 PUMP CELL CURRENT TRIM 6 K41 20DB/LB O2 1/1 SIGNAL Component Location - 21 Component Location - 22 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Oxygen 1/1 > Page 4740 Component Location - 24 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Oxygen 1/1 > Page 4741 Component Location - 19 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Oxygen 1/1 > Page 4742 Connector: Name : SENSOR-OXYGEN 1/1 Color : BLACK # of pins : 4 Qualifier : (GAS) Pin Circuit Description 1 K99 20BR/LG O2 1/1 HEATER CONTROL SUPPLY 2 Z42 20BK/LG GROUND 3 K902 20BR/DG O2 RETURN (UPSTREAM) 4 K41 20DB/LB O2 1/1 SIGNAL Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Oxygen 1/1 > Page 4743 Component Location - 21 Component Location - 22 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Oxygen 1/1 > Page 4744 Component Location - 24 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Oxygen 1/1 > Page 4745 Component Location - 19 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Oxygen 1/1 > Page 4746 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Oxygen 1/1 > Page 4747 Oxygen Sensor: Diagrams Sensor-Oxygen 1/2 Component ID: 432 Component : SENSOR-OXYGEN 1/2 Connector: Name : SENSOR-OXYGEN 1/2 Color : # of pins : 6 Qualifier : (6.7L DIESEL) Pin Circuit Description 1 K734 20BR/DG 02 1/2 PUMP CURRENT 2 K904 20DB/DG O2 1/2 RETURN 3 K80 20BR/TN O2 1/2 HEATER CONTROL RETURN 4 K299 20BR/WT O2 1/2 HEATER CONTROL SUPPLY 5 K733 20BR O2 1/2 PUMP CELL CURRENT TRIM 6 K141 20DB/YL O2 1/2 SIGNAL Component Location - 21 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Oxygen 1/1 > Page 4748 Component Location - 22 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Oxygen 1/1 > Page 4749 Component Location - 19 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Oxygen 1/1 > Page 4750 Connector: Name : SENSOR-OXYGEN 1/2 Color : # of pins : 6 Qualifier : (6.7L DIESEL) Pin Circuit Description 1 K734 20BR/DG 02 1/2 PUMP CURRENT 2 K904 20DB/DG O2 1/2 RETURN 3 K80 20BR/TN O2 1/2 HEATER CONTROL RETURN 4 K299 20BR/WT O2 1/2 HEATER CONTROL SUPPLY Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Oxygen 1/1 > Page 4751 5 K733 20BR O2 1/2 PUMP CELL CURRENT TRIM 6 K141 20DB/YL O2 1/2 SIGNAL Component Location - 21 Component Location - 22 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Oxygen 1/1 > Page 4752 Component Location - 19 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Oxygen 1/1 > Page 4753 Connector: Name : SENSOR-OXYGEN 1/2 Color : # of pins : 4 Qualifier : (GAS) Pin Circuit Description 1 K299 20BR/WT O2 1/2 HEATER CONTROL SUPPLY 2 Z43 20BK/LB GROUND 3 K904 20DB/DG O2 RETURN (DOWNSTREAM) 4 K141 20DB/YL O2 1/2 SIGNAL Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Oxygen 1/1 > Page 4754 Component Location - 21 Component Location - 22 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Oxygen 1/1 > Page 4755 Component Location - 19 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Oxygen 1/1 > Page 4756 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Oxygen 1/1 > Page 4757 Oxygen Sensor: Diagrams Sensor-Oxygen 2/1 Component ID: 433 Component : SENSOR-OXYGEN 2/1 Connector: Name : SENSOR-OXYGEN 2/1 Color : BLACK # of pins : 4 Qualifier : (3.7L/5.7L) Pin Circuit Description 1 K199 20BR/VT O2 2/1 HEATER CONTROL 2 Z934 20BK GROUND 3 K902 20BR/DG O2 RETURN (UPSTREAM) 4 K43 20DB/LG O2 2/1 SIGNAL Component Location - 22 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Oxygen 1/1 > Page 4758 Component Location - 23 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Oxygen 1/1 > Page 4759 Component Location - 19 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Oxygen 1/1 > Page 4760 Connector: Name : SENSOR-OXYGEN 2/1 Color : GRAY # of pins : 4 Qualifier : (4.7L) Pin Circuit Description 1 K199 20BR/VT O2 2/1 HEATER CONTROL 2 Z934 20BK GROUND 3 K902 20BR/DG O2 RETURN (UPSTREAM) 4 K43 20DB/LG O2 2/1 SIGNAL Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Oxygen 1/1 > Page 4761 Component Location - 22 Component Location - 23 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Oxygen 1/1 > Page 4762 Component Location - 19 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Oxygen 1/1 > Page 4763 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Oxygen 1/1 > Page 4764 Oxygen Sensor: Diagrams Sensor-Oxygen 2/2 Component ID: 434 Component : SENSOR-OXYGEN 2/2 Connector: Name : SENSOR-OXYGEN 2/2 Color : GRAY # of pins : 4 Qualifier : (4.7L/5.7L HD) Pin Circuit Description 1 K399 20BR/GY O2 2/2 HEATER CONTROL 2 Z992 20BK GROUND 3 K904 20DB/DG O2 RETURN (DOWNSTREAM) 4 K243 20BR O2 2/2 SIGNAL Component Location - 22 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Oxygen 1/1 > Page 4765 Component Location - 23 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Oxygen 1/1 > Page 4766 Component Location - 24 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Oxygen 1/1 > Page 4767 Component Location - 19 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Oxygen 1/1 > Page 4768 Connector: Name : SENSOR-OXYGEN 2/2 Color : BLACK # of pins : 4 Qualifier : (GAS LD) Pin Circuit Description 1 K399 20BR/GY O2 2/2 HEATER CONTROL 2 Z992 20BK GROUND 3 K904 20DB/DG O2 RETURN (DOWNSTREAM) 4 K243 20BR O2 2/2 SIGNAL Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Oxygen 1/1 > Page 4769 Component Location - 22 Component Location - 23 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Oxygen 1/1 > Page 4770 Component Location - 24 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Oxygen 1/1 > Page 4771 Component Location - 19 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Oxygen 1/1 > Page 4772 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4773 Oxygen Sensor: Application and ID - Cylinder bank number one is the bank that contains number one cylinder. See: Ignition System/Firing Order Cylinder #1 on left side. Cylinder #1 on right side. - The first oxygen sensor in cylinder bank # 1 is numbered O2 Sensor 1/1. - The second oxygen sensor in cylinder bank # 1 is numbered O2 Sensor 1/2. - A third oxygen sensor in cylinder bank # 1 would be numbered O2 Sensor 1/3. - The first oxygen sensor in cylinder bank # 2 is numbered O2 Sensor 2/1. - The second oxygen sensor in cylinder bank # 2 is numbered O2 Sensor 1/1. - If a V-6 or V-8 vehicle only uses one downstream Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) it is numbered O2 Sensor 1/2, even if it uses two upstream HO2S. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4774 Oxygen Sensor: Description and Operation DESCRIPTION The Oxygen Sensors (O2S) are attached to, and protrude into the vehicle exhaust system. Depending on the engine or emission package, the vehicle may use a total of either 2 or 4 sensors. Federal Emission Packages : Two sensors are used: upstream (referred to as 1/1) and downstream (referred to as 1/2). With this emission package, the upstream sensor (1/1) is located just before the main catalytic convertor. The downstream sensor (1/2) is located just after the main catalytic convertor. California Emission Packages: On this emissions package, 4 sensors are used: 2 upstream (referred to as 1/1 and 2/1) and 2 downstream (referred to as 1/2 and 2/2). With this emission package, the right upstream sensor (2/1) is located in the right exhaust downpipe just before the mini-catalytic convertor. The left upstream sensor (1/1) is located in the left exhaust downpipe just before the mini-catalytic convertor. The right downstream sensor (2/2) is located in the right exhaust downpipe just after the mini-catalytic convertor, and before the main catalytic convertor. The left downstream sensor (1/2) is located in the left exhaust downpipe just after the mini-catalytic convertor, and before the main catalytic convertor. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Oxygen Sensor: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL CAUTION: Never apply any type of grease to the oxygen sensor electrical connector, or attempt any soldering of the sensor wiring harness. WARNING: The exhaust manifold, exhaust pipes and catalytic converter become very hot during engine operation. Allow engine to cool before removing oxygen sensor. 1. Raise and support vehicle. 2. Disconnect wire connector from O2S sensor. CAUTION: When disconnecting sensor electrical connector, do not pull directly on wire going into sensor. 3. Remove O2S sensor with an oxygen sensor removal and installation tool. 4. Clean threads in exhaust pipe using appropriate tap. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 4777 Oxygen Sensor: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION Threads of new oxygen sensors are factory coated with anti-seize compound to aid in removal.DO NOT add any additional anti-seize compound to threads of a new oxygen sensor. 1. Install O2S sensor. Tighten to 41 Nm (30 ft. lbs.) torque. 2. Connect O2S sensor wire connector. 3. Lower vehicle. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL 1. Disconnect exhaust gas pressure sensor electrical connector (1). 2. Using a 6 point deepwell socket, remove exhaust gas sensor (2). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 4782 Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION 1. Using a 6 point deepwell socket, install exhaust gas pressure sensor. 2. Tighten sensor to 18 Nm (13 ft. lbs.). 3. Connect exhaust gas pressure sensor electrical connector (3). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Transmission Range Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Locations Sensor-Transmission Range Component ID: 444 Component : SENSOR-TRANSMISSION RANGE Connector: Name : SENSOR-TRANSMISSION RANGE Color : # of pins : 10 Qualifier : (RC) Pin Circuit Description 1 T825 20DG/YL TRS NEUTRAL SIGNAL 2 T3 20DG/DB TRS T3 SIGNAL 3 T828 20DG/DB TRS 1 SIGNAL 4 F1 20PK/WT FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (OFF-RUN-START) 5 T824 20YL/DB TRS PARK SIGNAL 6 Z157 16BK/LG GROUND 7 T42 20DG/YL TRS T42 SIGNAL 8 T827 20DG/LB TRS DRIVE SIGNAL 9 T826 20DG/DB TRS REVERSE SIGNAL 10 T41 20YL/DB TRS T41 SIGNAL (P/N) Component Location - 20 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Transmission Range > Page 4787 Component Location - 19 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Transmission Range > Page 4788 Component Location - 26 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Transmission Range > Page 4789 Connector: Name : SENSOR-TRANSMISSION RANGE Color : # of pins : 6 Qualifier : (RE) Pin Circuit Description 1-2 T117 20DG/YL TRS SIGNAL 3-4-- Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Transmission Range > Page 4790 5 T917 20YL/TN TRS RETURN 6 T41 20YL/DB TRS T41 SIGNAL (P/N) Component Location - 20 Component Location - 19 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Transmission Range > Page 4791 Component Location - 26 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Transmission Range > Page 4792 Connector: Name : SENSOR-TRANSMISSION RANGE Color : LT. GREEN # of pins : 10 Qualifier : (RLE) Pin Circuit Description 1 T16 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT 2-3 K900 20DB/DG SENSOR GROUND 4 T54 20DG/OR TRANSMISSION TEMPERATURE SIGNAL Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Transmission Range > Page 4793 5-6-7 T1 20DG/LB TRS T1 SIGNAL 8 T3 20DG/DB TRS T3 SIGNAL 9 T42 20DG/YL TRS T42 SIGNAL 10 T41 20YL/DB TRS T41 SIGNAL (P/N) Component Location - 20 Component Location - 19 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Transmission Range > Page 4794 Component Location - 26 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Transmission Range > Page 4795 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Transmission Range > Page 4796 Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Locations Assembly-Transmission Solenoid/TRS Component ID: 21 Component : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID/TRS Connector: Name : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID/TRS Color : BLACK # of pins : 23 Qualifier : (RFE) Pin Circuit Description 1-2 T20 20DG/WT L/R CONTROL 3-4 T41 20YL/DB TRS T41 SIGNAL (P/N) 5 T42 20DG/YL TRS T42 SIGNAL 6-- 7 T60 20YL/GY OD SOLENOID CONTROL 8 T3 20DG/DB TRS T3 SIGNAL 9 T1 20DG/LB TRS T1 SIGNAL 10 T16 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT 11 T48 20BR/YL 4C PRESSURE SIGNAL 12 T118 20DG LINE PRESSURE CONTROL 13 T4 20DG/RD TRS T2 SIGNAL 13 T4 20DG/LB TRS T2 SIGNAL 14 T50 20DG/PK L/R PRESSURE SIGNAL 14 T50 20YL/TN L/R PRESSURE SIGNAL 15 T147 20DG/YL 2C PRESSURE SIGNAL 16 T9 20DG/TN OD PRESSURE SIGNAL 17 T59 20YL/LB UD CONTROL 18 T29 20YL/WT UD PRESSURE SIGNAL 19 T259 20YL/DG 4C CONTROL 20 T219 20YL/LG 2C CONTROL 21 T140 20YL/GY MS CONTROL 22 T160 20DG/WT SENSOR GROUND 22 K900 20DB/DG SENSOR GROUND 23 T54 20DG/OR TRANSMISSION TEMPERATURE SIGNAL Component Location - 21 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Transmission Range > Page 4797 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Transmission Range Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Diagrams Sensor-Transmission Range Component ID: 444 Component : SENSOR-TRANSMISSION RANGE Connector: Name : SENSOR-TRANSMISSION RANGE Color : # of pins : 10 Qualifier : (RC) Pin Circuit Description 1 T825 20DG/YL TRS NEUTRAL SIGNAL 2 T3 20DG/DB TRS T3 SIGNAL 3 T828 20DG/DB TRS 1 SIGNAL 4 F1 20PK/WT FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (OFF-RUN-START) 5 T824 20YL/DB TRS PARK SIGNAL 6 Z157 16BK/LG GROUND 7 T42 20DG/YL TRS T42 SIGNAL 8 T827 20DG/LB TRS DRIVE SIGNAL 9 T826 20DG/DB TRS REVERSE SIGNAL 10 T41 20YL/DB TRS T41 SIGNAL (P/N) Component Location - 20 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Transmission Range > Page 4800 Component Location - 19 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Transmission Range > Page 4801 Component Location - 26 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Transmission Range > Page 4802 Connector: Name : SENSOR-TRANSMISSION RANGE Color : # of pins : 6 Qualifier : (RE) Pin Circuit Description 1-2 T117 20DG/YL TRS SIGNAL 3-4-- Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Transmission Range > Page 4803 5 T917 20YL/TN TRS RETURN 6 T41 20YL/DB TRS T41 SIGNAL (P/N) Component Location - 20 Component Location - 19 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Transmission Range > Page 4804 Component Location - 26 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Transmission Range > Page 4805 Connector: Name : SENSOR-TRANSMISSION RANGE Color : LT. GREEN # of pins : 10 Qualifier : (RLE) Pin Circuit Description 1 T16 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT 2-3 K900 20DB/DG SENSOR GROUND 4 T54 20DG/OR TRANSMISSION TEMPERATURE SIGNAL Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Transmission Range > Page 4806 5-6-7 T1 20DG/LB TRS T1 SIGNAL 8 T3 20DG/DB TRS T3 SIGNAL 9 T42 20DG/YL TRS T42 SIGNAL 10 T41 20YL/DB TRS T41 SIGNAL (P/N) Component Location - 20 Component Location - 19 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Transmission Range > Page 4807 Component Location - 26 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Transmission Range > Page 4808 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Transmission Range > Page 4809 Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Diagrams Assembly-Transmission Solenoid/TRS Component ID: 21 Component : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID/TRS Connector: Name : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID/TRS Color : BLACK # of pins : 23 Qualifier : (RFE) Pin Circuit Description 1-2 T20 20DG/WT L/R CONTROL 3-4 T41 20YL/DB TRS T41 SIGNAL (P/N) 5 T42 20DG/YL TRS T42 SIGNAL 6-- 7 T60 20YL/GY OD SOLENOID CONTROL 8 T3 20DG/DB TRS T3 SIGNAL 9 T1 20DG/LB TRS T1 SIGNAL 10 T16 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT 11 T48 20BR/YL 4C PRESSURE SIGNAL 12 T118 20DG LINE PRESSURE CONTROL 13 T4 20DG/RD TRS T2 SIGNAL 13 T4 20DG/LB TRS T2 SIGNAL 14 T50 20DG/PK L/R PRESSURE SIGNAL 14 T50 20YL/TN L/R PRESSURE SIGNAL 15 T147 20DG/YL 2C PRESSURE SIGNAL 16 T9 20DG/TN OD PRESSURE SIGNAL 17 T59 20YL/LB UD CONTROL 18 T29 20YL/WT UD PRESSURE SIGNAL 19 T259 20YL/DG 4C CONTROL 20 T219 20YL/LG 2C CONTROL 21 T140 20YL/GY MS CONTROL 22 T160 20DG/WT SENSOR GROUND 22 K900 20DB/DG SENSOR GROUND 23 T54 20DG/OR TRANSMISSION TEMPERATURE SIGNAL Component Location - 21 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Transmission Range > Page 4810 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > 42RLE Automatic Transmission Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Description and Operation 42RLE Automatic Transmission Description DESCRIPTION The Transmission Range Sensor (TRS) (2) is mounted to the top of the valve body inside the transmission and can only be serviced by removing the valve body assembly. The electrical connector extends through the transmission case. The Transmission Range Sensor (TRS) has four switch contacts that monitor shift lever position and send the information to the PCM. Operation OPERATION The Transmission Range Sensor (TRS) communicates shift lever position (SLP) to the TCM as a combination of open and closed switches. Each shift lever position has an assigned combination of switch states (open/closed) that the TCM receives from four sense circuits. The TCM interprets this information and determines the appropriate transmission gear position and shift schedule. Since there are four switches, there are 16 possible combinations of open and closed switches (codes). Seven of these codes are related to gear position and three are recognized as "between gear" codes. This results in six codes which should never occur. These are called "invalid" codes. An invalid code will result in a DTC, and the TCM will then determine the shift lever position based on pressure switch data. This allows reasonably normal transmission operation with a TRS failure. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 4813 Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Description and Operation 545RFE Automatic Transmission Description DESCRIPTION The Transmission Range Sensor (TRS) is part of the solenoid module, which is mounted to the top of the valve body inside the transmission. The Transmission Range Sensor (TRS) has five switch contact pins that: - Determine shift lever position - Supply ground to the Starter Relay in Park and Neutral only. - Supply +12 V to the backup lamps in Reverse only. The TRS also has an integrated temperature sensor (thermistor) that communicates transmission temperature to the TCM and PCM. Operation OPERATION The Transmission Range Sensor (TRS) communicates shift lever position to the TCM as a combination of open and closed switches. Each shift lever position has an assigned combination of switch states (open/closed) that the TCM receives from four sense circuits. The TCM interprets this information and determines the appropriate transmission gear position and shift schedule. There are many possible combinations of open and closed switches (codes). Seven of these possible codes are related to gear position and five are recognized as "between gear" codes. This results in many codes which should never occur. These are called "invalid" codes. An invalid code will result in a DTC, and the TCM will then determine the shift lever position based on pressure switch data. This allows reasonably normal transmission operation with a TRS failure. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 4814 Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Description and Operation 68RFE Automatic Transmission Description DESCRIPTION The Transmission Range Sensor (TRS) is part of the solenoid module, which is mounted to the top of the valve body inside the transmission. The Transmission Range Sensor (TRS) has five switch contact pins that: - Determine shift lever position - Supply ground to the Starter Relay in Park and Neutral only. The TRS also has an integrated temperature sensor (thermistor) that communicates transmission temperature to the TCM and PCM. Operation OPERATION The Transmission Range Sensor (TRS) communicates shift lever position to the TCM as a combination of open and closed switches. Each shift lever position has an assigned combination of switch states (open/closed) that the TCM receives from four sense circuits. The TCM interprets this information and determines the appropriate transmission gear position and shift schedule. There are many possible combinations of open and closed switches (codes). Five of these possible codes correspond to valid gear position, there are two codes for the neutral position and three are recognized as "between gear" codes. This results in many codes which should never occur. These are called "invalid" codes. An invalid code will result in a DTC, and the TCM will then determine the shift lever position based on pressure switch data. This allows reasonably normal transmission operation with a TRS failure. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 4815 Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Description and Operation 48RE Automatic Transmission Description DESCRIPTION The Transmission Range Sensor (TRS) has 3 primary functions: - Provide a PARK/NEUTRAL start signal to the engine controller and the starter relay. - Turn the Back-up lamps on when the transmission is in REVERSE and the engine (ignition) is on. - Provide a transmission range signal to the instrument cluster. The sensor is mounted in the transmission housing near the valve body, just above the pan rail. It's in the same position as the Park/Neutral switch on other transmissions. The TRS contacts a cammed surface on the manual valve lever. The cammed surface translates the rotational motion of the manual lever into the linear motion of the sensor. The cammed surface on the manual lever is comprised of two parts controlling the TRS signal: The insulator portion contacts the switch poppet when the manual lever is not in PARK or NEUTRAL. The manual lever itself contacts the poppet when the lever is in PARK or NEUTRAL; providing a ground for the signal from the starter relay and the appropriate engine controller. Operation OPERATION Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 4816 As the switch moves through its linear motion contacts slide across a circuit board which changes the resistance between the range sensing pins of the switch. A power supply on the instrument cluster provides a regulated voltage signal to the switch. The return signal is decoded by the cluster, which then controls the PRNDL display to correspond with the correct transmission range. A bus message of transmission range is also sent by the cluster. In REVERSE range a second contact set closes the circuit providing power to the reverse lamps. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 4817 Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Description and Operation AS68RC Automatic Transmission Description DESCRIPTION TRANSMISSION RANGE SENSOR The transmission range sensor (1) is mounted externally on the left side of the transmission case. Operation OPERATION The transmission range sensor prohibits the vehicle from starting in any gear other than park and neutral. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 4818 Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Testing and Inspection DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING - TRANSMISSION RANGE SENSOR (TRS) NOTE: For all circuit identification in the following steps, Refer to the appropriate Wiring Information. 1. Raise vehicle on suitable hoist. 2. Disconnect the vehicle's shift cable from the manual lever. 3. With the manual lever in the PARK position (the PARK position is with the manual lever moved to the full rearward position), measure the resistance between the Park/Neutral Position Sense pin of the TRS and the transmission case. The resistance should be less than 5 ohms. 4. With the manual lever in the NEUTRAL position (the NEUTRAL position is with the manual lever moved two detents forward of the full rearward position), measure the resistance between the Park/Neutral Position Sense pin of the TRS and the transmission case. The resistance should be less than 5 ohms. 5. If the resistance is greater than 5 ohms in either of the previous steps, check for a dirty contact between the tip of the TRS rod and the valve body manual lever. If the contact is OK, replace the TRS. 6. With the manual lever in the REVERSE position (the REVERSE position is with the manual lever moved one detent forward of the full rearward position), measure the resistance between the Fused Ignition Switch Output and the Back-up Lamp feed pins of the TRS. The resistance should be less than 5 ohms. If the resistance is greater than 5 ohms, replace the TRS. 7. With the manual lever in the PARK position (the PARK position is with the manual lever moved to the full rearward position), measure the resistance between the Transmission Range Sensor MUX and the Transmission Range Sensor 5V Supply pins of the TRS. The resistance should be 522.2 ohms. If the resistance is not correct, replace the TRS. 8. With the manual lever in the REVERSE position (the REVERSE position is with the manual lever moved one detent forward of the full rearward position), measure the resistance between the Transmission Range Sensor MUX and the Transmission Range Sensor 5V Supply pins of the TRS. The resistance should be 206.2 ohms. If the resistance is not correct, replace the TRS. 9. With the manual lever in the NEUTRAL position (the NEUTRAL position is with the manual lever moved two detents forward of the full rearward position), measure the resistance between the Transmission Range Sensor MUX and the Transmission Range Sensor 5V Supply pins of the TRS. The resistance should be 108.6 ohms. If the resistance is not correct, replace the TRS. 10. With the manual lever in the DRIVE position (the DRIVE position is with the manual lever moved three detents forward of the full rearward position), measure the resistance between the Transmission Range Sensor MUX and the Transmission Range Sensor 5V Supply pins of the TRS. The resistance should be 59.9 ohms. If the resistance is not correct, replace the TRS. 11. With the manual lever in the SECOND position (the SECOND position is with the manual lever moved one detent rearward of the full forward position), measure the resistance between the Transmission Range Sensor MUX and the Back-up Lamp feed pins of the TRS. The resistance should be 31.9 ohms. If the resistance is not correct, replace the TRS. 12. With the manual lever in the LOW position (the LOW position is with the manual lever moved to the full forward position), measure the resistance between the Transmission Range Sensor MUX and the Back-up Lamp feed pins of the TRS. The resistance should be 13.7 ohms. If the resistance is not correct, replace the TRS. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 42RLE Automatic Transmission Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Service and Repair 42RLE Automatic Transmission Removal REMOVAL 1. Remove valve body assembly from vehicle. See: Transmission and Drivetrain/Automatic Transmission/Transaxle/Valve Body/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/42RLE Automatic Transmission/Removal 2. Remove the manual shaft seal (1). 3. Remove manual shaft/TRS retaining screw (1). 4. Slide TRS off of manual valve shaft. Installation INSTALLATION Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 4821 1. Install the TRS (2) to the manual shaft. Make sure TRS locating pin rests in manual valve bore slot. 2. Install the TRS/manual shaft retaining screw (1) and torque to 5 Nm (45 in. lbs.) torque. 3. Install the manual shaft seal (1). 4. Install valve body to the transmission. See: Transmission and Drivetrain/Automatic Transmission/Transaxle/Valve Body/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/42RLE Automatic Transmission/Installation Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 4822 Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Service and Repair 48RE Automatic Transmission Removal REMOVAL 1. Raise vehicle and position drain pan under the transmission range sensor (TRS). 2. Move the transmission manual lever to the manual LOW position. The manual LOW position is with the manual lever in the forward-most detent. 3. Disengage the wiring connector from the TRS. 4. Remove the two screws holding the TRS to the TRS mounting bracket. 5. Remove the TRS (3) from the TRS mounting bracket by pulling it straight out of the bracket. 6. If necessary, loosen the TRS mounting bracket (2) in the transmission case using Adapter 8581 (3). 7. If necessary, remove the TRS mounting bracket (2) from the transmission case. Installation INSTALLATION Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 4823 1. Move the transmission manual shaft lever to the manual LOW position. 2. If necessary, install the TRS mounting bracket (2) into the transmission case. Using Adapter 8581 (3), tighten the mounting bracket to 34 Nm (300 in.lbs.). 3. Install the TRS (3) into the mounting bracket (2) with the wiring connector facing the front of the transmission. 4. Install the two screws to hold the TRS to the mounting bracket. Tighten the screws to 5 Nm (45 in.lbs.). 5. Verify proper sensor operation (1-4). 6. Move the transmission manual shaft lever to the PARK position. 7. Connect TRS wiring connector to the TRS and lower vehicle. 8. Refill the transmission fluid to the correct level. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 4824 Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Service and Repair AS68RC Automatic Transmission Removal REMOVAL NOTE: Be certain the transmission is in the park lock position. TRANSMISSION RANGE SENSOR 1. Remove the shift cable from the manual shift lever (2). 2. Disconnect the wire harness from the transmission range sensor. 3. Remove the two nuts (3) from the control shaft. TRS REMOVAL/INSTALLATION Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 4825 4. Pry open the tabs on the stake washer (5), remove the nut (3) and the stake washer (5). 5. Remove the bolts (2). 6. Remove the transmission range sensor (1) from the transmission control shaft (4). Installation INSTALLATION 1. Install the transmission range sensor (3) onto the control shaft (5). 2. Install the stake washer and the nut (4) and hand tighten. 3. With the transmission in neutral install the alignment tool 9983 (6) onto the control shaft (5) and into the alignment hole (1). 4. Install the bolts (2). 5. After aligning the transmission range sensor, tighten the bolts (2) 12.5 Nm (9 ft.lbs.) 6. Remove the alignment tool 9983 (6) 7. Tighten the control shaft nut to 7 Nm (62 in.lbs.) 8. Bend the tabs on the stake washer and nut (4) in at least two places to lock in position. TRANSMISSION RANGE SENSOR Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 4826 9. Install the manual shift lever (2) onto the control shaft. 10. Install the inner nut (3) onto the control shaft. Tighten the inner nut to 12.5 Nm (9 ft.lbs). 11. Install the outer nut (3) onto the control shaft. While holding the inner nut, tighten the outer not to 12.5 Nm (9 ft.lbs) Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Vehicle Speed Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions Warnings WARNINGS - GENERAL WARNINGS provide information to prevent personal injury and vehicle damage. Below is a list of general warnings that should be followed any time a vehicle is being serviced. WARNING: Always wear safety glasses for eye protection. WARNING: Use safety stands anytime a procedure requires being under a vehicle. WARNING: Be sure that the ignition switch always is in the off position, unless the procedure requires it to be on. WARNING: Set the parking brake when working on any vehicle. An automatic transmission should be in park. A manual transmission should be in neutral. WARNING: Operate the engine only in a well-ventilated area. WARNING: Keep away from moving parts when the engine is running, especially the fan and belts. WARNING: To prevent serious burns, avoid contact with hot parts such as the radiator, exhaust manifold(s), tail pipe, catalytic converter and muffler. WARNING: Do not allow flame or sparks near the battery. Gases are always present in and around the battery. WARNING: Always remove rings, watches, loose hanging jewelry and avoid loose clothing. How to Use Wiring Diagrams DESCRIPTION - HOW TO USE WIRING DIAGRAMS DaimlerChrysler Corporation wiring diagrams are designed to provide information regarding the vehicles wiring content. In order to effectively use the wiring diagrams to diagnose and repair DaimlerChrysler Corporation vehicles, it is important to understand all of their features and characteristics. Diagrams are arranged such that the power (B+) side of the circuit is placed near the top of the page, and the ground (B-) side of the circuit is placed near the bottom of the page. All switches, components, and modules are shown in the at rest position with the doors closed and the key removed from the ignition. Components are shown two ways. A solid line around a component indicates that the component is complete. A dashed line around the component indicates that the component is being shown is not complete. Incomplete components have a reference number to indicate the page where the component is shown complete. It is important to realize that no attempt is made on the diagrams to represent components and wiring as they appear on the vehicle. For example, a short piece of wire is treated the same as a long one. In addition, switches and other components are shown as simply as possible, with regard to function only. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4831 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4832 SYMBOLS International symbols are used throughout the wiring diagrams. These symbols are consistent with those being used around the world. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4833 TERMINOLOGY This is a list of terms and definitions used in the wiring diagrams. LHD - Left Hand Drive Vehicles RHD - Right Hand Drive Vehicles ATX - Automatic Transmissions-Front Wheel Drive MTX Manual Transmissions-Front Wheel Drive Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4834 AT - Automatic Transmissions-Rear Wheel Drive MT - Manual Transmissions-Rear Wheel Drive SOHC - Single Over Head Cam Engine DOHC - Double Over Head Cam Engine Export - Vehicles Built For Sale In Markets Other Than North America Except Export - Vehicles Built For Sale In North America Circuit Functions DESCRIPTION - CIRCUIT FUNCTIONS All circuits in the diagrams use an alpha/numeric code to identify the wire and it's function. To identify which circuit code applies to a system, refer to the Circuit Identification Code Chart. This chart shows the main circuits only and does not show the secondary codes that may apply to some models. Circuit Information DESCRIPTION - CIRCUIT INFORMATION Each wire shown in the diagrams contains a code which identifies the main circuit, a specific part of the main circuit, gage of wire, and color. An example would be A 2 18 LB/YL. This is a Battery Feed circuit, level two, eighteen gauge, light blue with a yellow tracer. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4835 Connector, Ground and Splice Information DESCRIPTION - CONNECTOR, GROUND AND SPLICE INFORMATION CAUTION: Not all connectors are serviced. Some connectors are serviced only with a harness. A typical example might be the Supplemental Restraint System connectors. Always check parts availability before attempting a repair. IDENTIFICATION In-line connectors are identified by a number, as follows: - In-line connectors located in the engine compartment are C100 series numbers. - In-line connectors located in the instrument panel area are C200 series numbers. - In-line connectors located in the body are C300 series numbers. - Jumper harness connectors are C400 series numbers. - Grounds and ground connectors are identified with a "G" and follow the same series numbering as the in-line connectors. - Splices are identified with an "S" and follow the same series numbering as the in-line connectors. In addition, S001-S099 numbers are located in the engine compartment. - Component connectors are identified by the component name instead of a number. Multiple connectors on a component use a C1, C2, etc. identifier. LOCATIONS Vehicle/Locations contains the master connector/ground/splice location index charts with hyperlinks to the applicable location illustrations. The illustrations contain the connector name (or number)/ground number/splice number and component identification. The abbreviation T/O is used in the component location section to indicate a point in which the wiring harness branches out to a component. The abbreviation N/S means Not Shown in the illustrations Section Identification and Information DESCRIPTION - SECTION IDENTIFICATION AND INFORMATION The wiring diagrams are grouped into individual sections. If a component is most likely found in a particular group, it will be shown complete (all wires, Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4836 connectors, and pins) within that group. For example, the Auto Shutdown Relay is most likely to be found in Powertrain Management, so it is shown there complete. It can, however, be shown partially in another group if it contains some associated wiring. Splice diagrams show the entire splice and provide references to other sections the splices serves. Splice Information only contains splice diagrams that are not shown in their entirety somewhere else in the wiring diagrams. Connector Pin-Outs shows each connector and the circuits involved with that connector. The connectors are identified using the name/number on the diagram pages. Removal REMOVAL 1. Disconnect battery. 2. Release Connector Lock (2). 3. Disconnect the connector (3) being repaired from its mating half/component. 4. Remove the dress cover (if applicable) (1). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4837 5. Release the Secondary Terminal Lock, if required (1). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4838 6. Position the connector locking finger away from the terminal using the proper special tool. Pull on the wire to remove the terminal from the connector. Installation Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4839 INSTALLATION 1. Insert the removed terminal in the same cavity on the repair connector. 2. Repeat steps for each terminal in the connector, being sure that all wires are inserted into the proper cavities. For additional connector pin-out identification, refer to the wiring diagrams. 3. When the connector is re-assembled, the secondary terminal lock must be placed in the locked position to prevent terminal push out. 4. Replace dress cover (if applicable). 5. Connect connector to its mating half/component. 6. Connect battery and test all affected systems. Removal REMOVAL 1. Disconnect the battery. 2. Locate the diode in the harness, and remove the protective covering. 3. Remove the diode from the harness, pay attention to the current flow direction (1) (2) (3). Installation INSTALLATION 1. Remove the insulation from the wires in the harness. Only remove enough insulation to solder in the new diode. 2. Install the new diode in the harness, making sure current flow is correct. If necessary, refer to the appropriate wiring diagram for current flow. 3. Solder the connection together using rosin core type solder only. Do not use acid core solder. 4. Tape the diode to the harness using electrical tape. Make sure the diode is completely sealed from the elements. 5. Re-connect the battery and test affected systems. Removal REMOVAL 1. Follow steps for removing terminals described in the connector removal section. 2. Cut the wire 6 inches from the back of the connector. Installation INSTALLATION 1. Select a wire from the terminal repair kit that best matches the color and gage of the wire being repaired. 2. Cut the repair wire to the proper length and remove one-half (1/2) inch of insulation. 3. Splice the repair wire to the wire harness (see wire splicing procedure). See: Service Procedures/Wire Splicing 4. Insert the repaired wire into the connector. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4840 5. Install the connector locking wedge, if required, and reconnect the connector to its mating half/component. 6. Re-tape the wire harness starting at 1-1/2 inches behind the connector and 2 inches past the repair. 7. Connect battery and test all affected systems. Wire Splicing STANDARD PROCEDURE - WIRE SPLICING When splicing a wire, it is important that the correct gage be used as shown in the wiring diagrams. 1. Remove one-half (1/2) inch of insulation from each wire that needs to be spliced. 2. Place a piece of adhesive lined heat shrink tubing on one side of the wire. Make sure the tubing will be long enough to cover and seal the entire repair area. 3. Place the strands of wire overlapping each other inside of the splice clip (1). 4. Using crimping tool (1), Mopar p/n 05019912AA, crimp the splice clip and wires together. 5. Solder (3) the connection (2) together using rosin core type solder (1) only. CAUTION: DO NOT USE ACID CORE SOLDER. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4841 6. Center the heat shrink tubing (2) over the joint and heat using a heat gun. Heat the joint until the tubing is tightly sealed and sealant (1) comes out of both ends of the tubing. Special Tools WIRING/TERMINAL PROBING TOOL PACKAGE 6807 TERMINAL PICK TOOL SET 6680 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4842 TERMINAL REMOVING TOOLS 6932 AND 8638 TERMINAL REMOVING TOOL 6934 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4843 Vehicle Speed Sensor: Diagnostic Aids Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) Sensitive Devices STANDARD PROCEDURE - ELECTROSTATIC DISCHARGE (ESD) SENSITIVE DEVICES All ESD sensitive components are solid state and a symbol is used to indicate this. When handling any component with this symbol, comply with the following procedures to reduce the possibility of electrostatic charge build up on the body and inadvertent discharge into the component. If it is not known whether the part is ESD sensitive, assume that it is. 1. Always touch a known good ground before handling the part. This should be repeated while handling the part and more frequently after sliding across a seat, sitting down from a standing position, or walking a distance. 2. Avoid touching electrical terminals of the part, unless instructed to do so by a written procedure. 3. When using a voltmeter, be sure to connect the ground lead first. 4. Do not remove the part from it's protective packing until it is time to install the part. 5. Before removing the part from it's package, ground the package to a known good ground on the vehicle. Testing Of Voltage Potential STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING OF VOLTAGE POTENTIAL 1. Connect the ground lead of a voltmeter to a known good ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the voltmeter to the selected test point. The vehicle ignition may need to be turned ON to check voltage. Refer to the appropriate test procedure. Testing For Continuity Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4844 STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING FOR CONTINUITY 1. Remove the fuse (1) for the circuit being checked or, disconnect the battery. 2. Connect one lead of the ohmmeter to one side of the circuit being tested 3. Connect the other lead to the other end of the circuit being tested. Low or no resistance means good continuity. Testing For A Short To Ground STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING FOR A SHORT TO GROUND 1. Remove the fuse and disconnect all items involved with the fuse. 2. Connect a test light or a voltmeter across the terminals of the fuse. 3. Starting at the fuse block, wiggle the wiring harness about six to eight inches apart and watch the voltmeter/test lamp. 4. If the voltmeter registers voltage or the test lamp glows, there is a short to ground in that general area of the wiring harness. Testing For A Short To Ground On Fuses Powering Several Loads STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING FOR A SHORT TO GROUND ON FUSES POWERING SEVERAL LOADS 1. Refer to the wiring diagrams and disconnect or isolate all items on the suspected fused circuits. 2. Replace the blown fuse. 3. Supply power to the fuse by turning ON the ignition switch or re-connecting the battery. 4. Start connecting or energizing the items in the fuse circuit one at a time. When the fuse blows the circuit with the short to ground has been isolated. Testing For A Voltage Drop STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING FOR A VOLTAGE DROP Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4845 1. Connect the positive lead of the voltmeter to the side of the circuit closest to the battery. 2. Connect the other lead of the voltmeter to the other side of the switch, component or circuit. 3. Operate the item. 4. The voltmeter will show the difference in voltage between the two points. Troubleshooting Wiring Problems DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING - WIRING HARNESS TROUBLESHOOTING TOOLS When diagnosing a problem in an electrical circuit there are several common tools necessary. These tools are listed and explained below. - Jumper Wire - This is a test wire used to connect two points of a circuit. It can be used to bypass an open in a circuit. WARNING: Never use a jumper wire across a load, such as a motor, connected between a battery feed and ground. - Voltmeter - Used to check for voltage on a circuit. Always connect the black lead to a known good ground and the red lead to the positive side of the circuit. CAUTION: Most of the electrical components used in today's vehicles are Solid State. When checking voltages in these circuits, use a meter with a 10 - megohm or greater impedance rating. - Ohmmeter - Used to check the resistance between two points of a circuit. Low or no resistance in a circuit means good continuity. CAUTION: Most of the electrical components used in today's vehicles are Solid State. When checking resistance in these circuits use a meter with a 10 - megohm or greater impedance rating. In addition, make sure the power is disconnected from the circuit. Circuits that are powered up by the vehicle's electrical system can cause damage to the equipment and provide false readings. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4846 - Probing Tools - These tools are used for probing terminals in connectors. Select the proper size tool from Special Tool Package 6807, and insert the probing end (2) into the terminal being tested. Use the other end of the tool (1) to insert the meter probe. INTERMITTENT AND POOR CONNECTIONS Most intermittent electrical problems are caused by faulty electrical connections or wiring. It is also possible for a sticking component or relay to cause a problem. Before condemning a component or wiring assembly, check the following items. - Connectors are fully seated - Spread terminals, or terminal push out - Terminals in the wiring assembly are fully seated into the connector/component and locked into position - Dirt or corrosion on the terminals. Any amount of corrosion or dirt could cause an intermittent problem - Damaged connector/component casing exposing the item to dirt or moisture - Wire insulation that has rubbed through causing a short to ground - Some or all of the wiring strands broken inside of the insulation - Wiring broken inside of the insulation TROUBLESHOOTING WIRING PROBLEMS When troubleshooting wiring problems there are six steps which can aid in the procedure. The steps are listed and explained below. Always check for non-factory items added to the vehicle before doing any diagnosis. If the vehicle is equipped with these items, disconnect them to verify these add-on items are not the cause of the problem. 1. Verify the problem. 2. Verify any related symptoms. Do this by performing operational checks on components that are in the same circuit. Refer to the wiring diagrams. 3. Analyze the symptoms. Use the wiring diagrams to determine what the circuit is doing, where the problem most likely is occurring and where the diagnosis will continue. 4. Isolate the problem area. 5. Repair the problem area. 6. Verify the proper operation. For this step, check for proper operation of all items on the repaired circuit. Refer to the wiring diagrams. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Transmission Range Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Locations Sensor-Transmission Range Component ID: 444 Component : SENSOR-TRANSMISSION RANGE Connector: Name : SENSOR-TRANSMISSION RANGE Color : # of pins : 10 Qualifier : (RC) Pin Circuit Description 1 T825 20DG/YL TRS NEUTRAL SIGNAL 2 T3 20DG/DB TRS T3 SIGNAL 3 T828 20DG/DB TRS 1 SIGNAL 4 F1 20PK/WT FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (OFF-RUN-START) 5 T824 20YL/DB TRS PARK SIGNAL 6 Z157 16BK/LG GROUND 7 T42 20DG/YL TRS T42 SIGNAL 8 T827 20DG/LB TRS DRIVE SIGNAL 9 T826 20DG/DB TRS REVERSE SIGNAL 10 T41 20YL/DB TRS T41 SIGNAL (P/N) Component Location - 20 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Transmission Range > Page 4851 Component Location - 19 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Transmission Range > Page 4852 Component Location - 26 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Transmission Range > Page 4853 Connector: Name : SENSOR-TRANSMISSION RANGE Color : # of pins : 6 Qualifier : (RE) Pin Circuit Description 1-2 T117 20DG/YL TRS SIGNAL 3-4-- Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Transmission Range > Page 4854 5 T917 20YL/TN TRS RETURN 6 T41 20YL/DB TRS T41 SIGNAL (P/N) Component Location - 20 Component Location - 19 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Transmission Range > Page 4855 Component Location - 26 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Transmission Range > Page 4856 Connector: Name : SENSOR-TRANSMISSION RANGE Color : LT. GREEN # of pins : 10 Qualifier : (RLE) Pin Circuit Description 1 T16 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT 2-3 K900 20DB/DG SENSOR GROUND 4 T54 20DG/OR TRANSMISSION TEMPERATURE SIGNAL Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Transmission Range > Page 4857 5-6-7 T1 20DG/LB TRS T1 SIGNAL 8 T3 20DG/DB TRS T3 SIGNAL 9 T42 20DG/YL TRS T42 SIGNAL 10 T41 20YL/DB TRS T41 SIGNAL (P/N) Component Location - 20 Component Location - 19 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Transmission Range > Page 4858 Component Location - 26 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Transmission Range > Page 4859 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Transmission Range > Page 4860 Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Locations Assembly-Transmission Solenoid/TRS Component ID: 21 Component : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID/TRS Connector: Name : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID/TRS Color : BLACK # of pins : 23 Qualifier : (RFE) Pin Circuit Description 1-2 T20 20DG/WT L/R CONTROL 3-4 T41 20YL/DB TRS T41 SIGNAL (P/N) 5 T42 20DG/YL TRS T42 SIGNAL 6-- 7 T60 20YL/GY OD SOLENOID CONTROL 8 T3 20DG/DB TRS T3 SIGNAL 9 T1 20DG/LB TRS T1 SIGNAL 10 T16 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT 11 T48 20BR/YL 4C PRESSURE SIGNAL 12 T118 20DG LINE PRESSURE CONTROL 13 T4 20DG/RD TRS T2 SIGNAL 13 T4 20DG/LB TRS T2 SIGNAL 14 T50 20DG/PK L/R PRESSURE SIGNAL 14 T50 20YL/TN L/R PRESSURE SIGNAL 15 T147 20DG/YL 2C PRESSURE SIGNAL 16 T9 20DG/TN OD PRESSURE SIGNAL 17 T59 20YL/LB UD CONTROL 18 T29 20YL/WT UD PRESSURE SIGNAL 19 T259 20YL/DG 4C CONTROL 20 T219 20YL/LG 2C CONTROL 21 T140 20YL/GY MS CONTROL 22 T160 20DG/WT SENSOR GROUND 22 K900 20DB/DG SENSOR GROUND 23 T54 20DG/OR TRANSMISSION TEMPERATURE SIGNAL Component Location - 21 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Transmission Range > Page 4861 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Transmission Range Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Diagrams Sensor-Transmission Range Component ID: 444 Component : SENSOR-TRANSMISSION RANGE Connector: Name : SENSOR-TRANSMISSION RANGE Color : # of pins : 10 Qualifier : (RC) Pin Circuit Description 1 T825 20DG/YL TRS NEUTRAL SIGNAL 2 T3 20DG/DB TRS T3 SIGNAL 3 T828 20DG/DB TRS 1 SIGNAL 4 F1 20PK/WT FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (OFF-RUN-START) 5 T824 20YL/DB TRS PARK SIGNAL 6 Z157 16BK/LG GROUND 7 T42 20DG/YL TRS T42 SIGNAL 8 T827 20DG/LB TRS DRIVE SIGNAL 9 T826 20DG/DB TRS REVERSE SIGNAL 10 T41 20YL/DB TRS T41 SIGNAL (P/N) Component Location - 20 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Transmission Range > Page 4864 Component Location - 19 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Transmission Range > Page 4865 Component Location - 26 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Transmission Range > Page 4866 Connector: Name : SENSOR-TRANSMISSION RANGE Color : # of pins : 6 Qualifier : (RE) Pin Circuit Description 1-2 T117 20DG/YL TRS SIGNAL 3-4-- Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Transmission Range > Page 4867 5 T917 20YL/TN TRS RETURN 6 T41 20YL/DB TRS T41 SIGNAL (P/N) Component Location - 20 Component Location - 19 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Transmission Range > Page 4868 Component Location - 26 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Transmission Range > Page 4869 Connector: Name : SENSOR-TRANSMISSION RANGE Color : LT. GREEN # of pins : 10 Qualifier : (RLE) Pin Circuit Description 1 T16 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT 2-3 K900 20DB/DG SENSOR GROUND 4 T54 20DG/OR TRANSMISSION TEMPERATURE SIGNAL Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Transmission Range > Page 4870 5-6-7 T1 20DG/LB TRS T1 SIGNAL 8 T3 20DG/DB TRS T3 SIGNAL 9 T42 20DG/YL TRS T42 SIGNAL 10 T41 20YL/DB TRS T41 SIGNAL (P/N) Component Location - 20 Component Location - 19 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Transmission Range > Page 4871 Component Location - 26 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Transmission Range > Page 4872 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Transmission Range > Page 4873 Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Diagrams Assembly-Transmission Solenoid/TRS Component ID: 21 Component : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID/TRS Connector: Name : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID/TRS Color : BLACK # of pins : 23 Qualifier : (RFE) Pin Circuit Description 1-2 T20 20DG/WT L/R CONTROL 3-4 T41 20YL/DB TRS T41 SIGNAL (P/N) 5 T42 20DG/YL TRS T42 SIGNAL 6-- 7 T60 20YL/GY OD SOLENOID CONTROL 8 T3 20DG/DB TRS T3 SIGNAL 9 T1 20DG/LB TRS T1 SIGNAL 10 T16 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT 11 T48 20BR/YL 4C PRESSURE SIGNAL 12 T118 20DG LINE PRESSURE CONTROL 13 T4 20DG/RD TRS T2 SIGNAL 13 T4 20DG/LB TRS T2 SIGNAL 14 T50 20DG/PK L/R PRESSURE SIGNAL 14 T50 20YL/TN L/R PRESSURE SIGNAL 15 T147 20DG/YL 2C PRESSURE SIGNAL 16 T9 20DG/TN OD PRESSURE SIGNAL 17 T59 20YL/LB UD CONTROL 18 T29 20YL/WT UD PRESSURE SIGNAL 19 T259 20YL/DG 4C CONTROL 20 T219 20YL/LG 2C CONTROL 21 T140 20YL/GY MS CONTROL 22 T160 20DG/WT SENSOR GROUND 22 K900 20DB/DG SENSOR GROUND 23 T54 20DG/OR TRANSMISSION TEMPERATURE SIGNAL Component Location - 21 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Transmission Range > Page 4874 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > 42RLE Automatic Transmission Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Description and Operation 42RLE Automatic Transmission Description DESCRIPTION The Transmission Range Sensor (TRS) (2) is mounted to the top of the valve body inside the transmission and can only be serviced by removing the valve body assembly. The electrical connector extends through the transmission case. The Transmission Range Sensor (TRS) has four switch contacts that monitor shift lever position and send the information to the PCM. Operation OPERATION The Transmission Range Sensor (TRS) communicates shift lever position (SLP) to the TCM as a combination of open and closed switches. Each shift lever position has an assigned combination of switch states (open/closed) that the TCM receives from four sense circuits. The TCM interprets this information and determines the appropriate transmission gear position and shift schedule. Since there are four switches, there are 16 possible combinations of open and closed switches (codes). Seven of these codes are related to gear position and three are recognized as "between gear" codes. This results in six codes which should never occur. These are called "invalid" codes. An invalid code will result in a DTC, and the TCM will then determine the shift lever position based on pressure switch data. This allows reasonably normal transmission operation with a TRS failure. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 4877 Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Description and Operation 545RFE Automatic Transmission Description DESCRIPTION The Transmission Range Sensor (TRS) is part of the solenoid module, which is mounted to the top of the valve body inside the transmission. The Transmission Range Sensor (TRS) has five switch contact pins that: - Determine shift lever position - Supply ground to the Starter Relay in Park and Neutral only. - Supply +12 V to the backup lamps in Reverse only. The TRS also has an integrated temperature sensor (thermistor) that communicates transmission temperature to the TCM and PCM. Operation OPERATION The Transmission Range Sensor (TRS) communicates shift lever position to the TCM as a combination of open and closed switches. Each shift lever position has an assigned combination of switch states (open/closed) that the TCM receives from four sense circuits. The TCM interprets this information and determines the appropriate transmission gear position and shift schedule. There are many possible combinations of open and closed switches (codes). Seven of these possible codes are related to gear position and five are recognized as "between gear" codes. This results in many codes which should never occur. These are called "invalid" codes. An invalid code will result in a DTC, and the TCM will then determine the shift lever position based on pressure switch data. This allows reasonably normal transmission operation with a TRS failure. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 4878 Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Description and Operation 68RFE Automatic Transmission Description DESCRIPTION The Transmission Range Sensor (TRS) is part of the solenoid module, which is mounted to the top of the valve body inside the transmission. The Transmission Range Sensor (TRS) has five switch contact pins that: - Determine shift lever position - Supply ground to the Starter Relay in Park and Neutral only. The TRS also has an integrated temperature sensor (thermistor) that communicates transmission temperature to the TCM and PCM. Operation OPERATION The Transmission Range Sensor (TRS) communicates shift lever position to the TCM as a combination of open and closed switches. Each shift lever position has an assigned combination of switch states (open/closed) that the TCM receives from four sense circuits. The TCM interprets this information and determines the appropriate transmission gear position and shift schedule. There are many possible combinations of open and closed switches (codes). Five of these possible codes correspond to valid gear position, there are two codes for the neutral position and three are recognized as "between gear" codes. This results in many codes which should never occur. These are called "invalid" codes. An invalid code will result in a DTC, and the TCM will then determine the shift lever position based on pressure switch data. This allows reasonably normal transmission operation with a TRS failure. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 4879 Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Description and Operation 48RE Automatic Transmission Description DESCRIPTION The Transmission Range Sensor (TRS) has 3 primary functions: - Provide a PARK/NEUTRAL start signal to the engine controller and the starter relay. - Turn the Back-up lamps on when the transmission is in REVERSE and the engine (ignition) is on. - Provide a transmission range signal to the instrument cluster. The sensor is mounted in the transmission housing near the valve body, just above the pan rail. It's in the same position as the Park/Neutral switch on other transmissions. The TRS contacts a cammed surface on the manual valve lever. The cammed surface translates the rotational motion of the manual lever into the linear motion of the sensor. The cammed surface on the manual lever is comprised of two parts controlling the TRS signal: The insulator portion contacts the switch poppet when the manual lever is not in PARK or NEUTRAL. The manual lever itself contacts the poppet when the lever is in PARK or NEUTRAL; providing a ground for the signal from the starter relay and the appropriate engine controller. Operation OPERATION Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 4880 As the switch moves through its linear motion contacts slide across a circuit board which changes the resistance between the range sensing pins of the switch. A power supply on the instrument cluster provides a regulated voltage signal to the switch. The return signal is decoded by the cluster, which then controls the PRNDL display to correspond with the correct transmission range. A bus message of transmission range is also sent by the cluster. In REVERSE range a second contact set closes the circuit providing power to the reverse lamps. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 4881 Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Description and Operation AS68RC Automatic Transmission Description DESCRIPTION TRANSMISSION RANGE SENSOR The transmission range sensor (1) is mounted externally on the left side of the transmission case. Operation OPERATION The transmission range sensor prohibits the vehicle from starting in any gear other than park and neutral. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 4882 Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Testing and Inspection DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING - TRANSMISSION RANGE SENSOR (TRS) NOTE: For all circuit identification in the following steps, Refer to the appropriate Wiring Information. 1. Raise vehicle on suitable hoist. 2. Disconnect the vehicle's shift cable from the manual lever. 3. With the manual lever in the PARK position (the PARK position is with the manual lever moved to the full rearward position), measure the resistance between the Park/Neutral Position Sense pin of the TRS and the transmission case. The resistance should be less than 5 ohms. 4. With the manual lever in the NEUTRAL position (the NEUTRAL position is with the manual lever moved two detents forward of the full rearward position), measure the resistance between the Park/Neutral Position Sense pin of the TRS and the transmission case. The resistance should be less than 5 ohms. 5. If the resistance is greater than 5 ohms in either of the previous steps, check for a dirty contact between the tip of the TRS rod and the valve body manual lever. If the contact is OK, replace the TRS. 6. With the manual lever in the REVERSE position (the REVERSE position is with the manual lever moved one detent forward of the full rearward position), measure the resistance between the Fused Ignition Switch Output and the Back-up Lamp feed pins of the TRS. The resistance should be less than 5 ohms. If the resistance is greater than 5 ohms, replace the TRS. 7. With the manual lever in the PARK position (the PARK position is with the manual lever moved to the full rearward position), measure the resistance between the Transmission Range Sensor MUX and the Transmission Range Sensor 5V Supply pins of the TRS. The resistance should be 522.2 ohms. If the resistance is not correct, replace the TRS. 8. With the manual lever in the REVERSE position (the REVERSE position is with the manual lever moved one detent forward of the full rearward position), measure the resistance between the Transmission Range Sensor MUX and the Transmission Range Sensor 5V Supply pins of the TRS. The resistance should be 206.2 ohms. If the resistance is not correct, replace the TRS. 9. With the manual lever in the NEUTRAL position (the NEUTRAL position is with the manual lever moved two detents forward of the full rearward position), measure the resistance between the Transmission Range Sensor MUX and the Transmission Range Sensor 5V Supply pins of the TRS. The resistance should be 108.6 ohms. If the resistance is not correct, replace the TRS. 10. With the manual lever in the DRIVE position (the DRIVE position is with the manual lever moved three detents forward of the full rearward position), measure the resistance between the Transmission Range Sensor MUX and the Transmission Range Sensor 5V Supply pins of the TRS. The resistance should be 59.9 ohms. If the resistance is not correct, replace the TRS. 11. With the manual lever in the SECOND position (the SECOND position is with the manual lever moved one detent rearward of the full forward position), measure the resistance between the Transmission Range Sensor MUX and the Back-up Lamp feed pins of the TRS. The resistance should be 31.9 ohms. If the resistance is not correct, replace the TRS. 12. With the manual lever in the LOW position (the LOW position is with the manual lever moved to the full forward position), measure the resistance between the Transmission Range Sensor MUX and the Back-up Lamp feed pins of the TRS. The resistance should be 13.7 ohms. If the resistance is not correct, replace the TRS. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 42RLE Automatic Transmission Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Service and Repair 42RLE Automatic Transmission Removal REMOVAL 1. Remove valve body assembly from vehicle. See: Transmission and Drivetrain/Automatic Transmission/Transaxle/Valve Body/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/42RLE Automatic Transmission/Removal 2. Remove the manual shaft seal (1). 3. Remove manual shaft/TRS retaining screw (1). 4. Slide TRS off of manual valve shaft. Installation INSTALLATION Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 4885 1. Install the TRS (2) to the manual shaft. Make sure TRS locating pin rests in manual valve bore slot. 2. Install the TRS/manual shaft retaining screw (1) and torque to 5 Nm (45 in. lbs.) torque. 3. Install the manual shaft seal (1). 4. Install valve body to the transmission. See: Transmission and Drivetrain/Automatic Transmission/Transaxle/Valve Body/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/42RLE Automatic Transmission/Installation Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 4886 Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Service and Repair 48RE Automatic Transmission Removal REMOVAL 1. Raise vehicle and position drain pan under the transmission range sensor (TRS). 2. Move the transmission manual lever to the manual LOW position. The manual LOW position is with the manual lever in the forward-most detent. 3. Disengage the wiring connector from the TRS. 4. Remove the two screws holding the TRS to the TRS mounting bracket. 5. Remove the TRS (3) from the TRS mounting bracket by pulling it straight out of the bracket. 6. If necessary, loosen the TRS mounting bracket (2) in the transmission case using Adapter 8581 (3). 7. If necessary, remove the TRS mounting bracket (2) from the transmission case. Installation INSTALLATION Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 4887 1. Move the transmission manual shaft lever to the manual LOW position. 2. If necessary, install the TRS mounting bracket (2) into the transmission case. Using Adapter 8581 (3), tighten the mounting bracket to 34 Nm (300 in.lbs.). 3. Install the TRS (3) into the mounting bracket (2) with the wiring connector facing the front of the transmission. 4. Install the two screws to hold the TRS to the mounting bracket. Tighten the screws to 5 Nm (45 in.lbs.). 5. Verify proper sensor operation (1-4). 6. Move the transmission manual shaft lever to the PARK position. 7. Connect TRS wiring connector to the TRS and lower vehicle. 8. Refill the transmission fluid to the correct level. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 4888 Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Service and Repair AS68RC Automatic Transmission Removal REMOVAL NOTE: Be certain the transmission is in the park lock position. TRANSMISSION RANGE SENSOR 1. Remove the shift cable from the manual shift lever (2). 2. Disconnect the wire harness from the transmission range sensor. 3. Remove the two nuts (3) from the control shaft. TRS REMOVAL/INSTALLATION Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 4889 4. Pry open the tabs on the stake washer (5), remove the nut (3) and the stake washer (5). 5. Remove the bolts (2). 6. Remove the transmission range sensor (1) from the transmission control shaft (4). Installation INSTALLATION 1. Install the transmission range sensor (3) onto the control shaft (5). 2. Install the stake washer and the nut (4) and hand tighten. 3. With the transmission in neutral install the alignment tool 9983 (6) onto the control shaft (5) and into the alignment hole (1). 4. Install the bolts (2). 5. After aligning the transmission range sensor, tighten the bolts (2) 12.5 Nm (9 ft.lbs.) 6. Remove the alignment tool 9983 (6) 7. Tighten the control shaft nut to 7 Nm (62 in.lbs.) 8. Bend the tabs on the stake washer and nut (4) in at least two places to lock in position. TRANSMISSION RANGE SENSOR Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 4890 9. Install the manual shift lever (2) onto the control shaft. 10. Install the inner nut (3) onto the control shaft. Tighten the inner nut to 12.5 Nm (9 ft.lbs). 11. Install the outer nut (3) onto the control shaft. While holding the inner nut, tighten the outer not to 12.5 Nm (9 ft.lbs) Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Vehicle Speed Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions Warnings WARNINGS - GENERAL WARNINGS provide information to prevent personal injury and vehicle damage. Below is a list of general warnings that should be followed any time a vehicle is being serviced. WARNING: Always wear safety glasses for eye protection. WARNING: Use safety stands anytime a procedure requires being under a vehicle. WARNING: Be sure that the ignition switch always is in the off position, unless the procedure requires it to be on. WARNING: Set the parking brake when working on any vehicle. An automatic transmission should be in park. A manual transmission should be in neutral. WARNING: Operate the engine only in a well-ventilated area. WARNING: Keep away from moving parts when the engine is running, especially the fan and belts. WARNING: To prevent serious burns, avoid contact with hot parts such as the radiator, exhaust manifold(s), tail pipe, catalytic converter and muffler. WARNING: Do not allow flame or sparks near the battery. Gases are always present in and around the battery. WARNING: Always remove rings, watches, loose hanging jewelry and avoid loose clothing. How to Use Wiring Diagrams DESCRIPTION - HOW TO USE WIRING DIAGRAMS DaimlerChrysler Corporation wiring diagrams are designed to provide information regarding the vehicles wiring content. In order to effectively use the wiring diagrams to diagnose and repair DaimlerChrysler Corporation vehicles, it is important to understand all of their features and characteristics. Diagrams are arranged such that the power (B+) side of the circuit is placed near the top of the page, and the ground (B-) side of the circuit is placed near the bottom of the page. All switches, components, and modules are shown in the at rest position with the doors closed and the key removed from the ignition. Components are shown two ways. A solid line around a component indicates that the component is complete. A dashed line around the component indicates that the component is being shown is not complete. Incomplete components have a reference number to indicate the page where the component is shown complete. It is important to realize that no attempt is made on the diagrams to represent components and wiring as they appear on the vehicle. For example, a short piece of wire is treated the same as a long one. In addition, switches and other components are shown as simply as possible, with regard to function only. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4895 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4896 SYMBOLS International symbols are used throughout the wiring diagrams. These symbols are consistent with those being used around the world. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4897 TERMINOLOGY This is a list of terms and definitions used in the wiring diagrams. LHD - Left Hand Drive Vehicles RHD - Right Hand Drive Vehicles ATX - Automatic Transmissions-Front Wheel Drive MTX Manual Transmissions-Front Wheel Drive Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4898 AT - Automatic Transmissions-Rear Wheel Drive MT - Manual Transmissions-Rear Wheel Drive SOHC - Single Over Head Cam Engine DOHC - Double Over Head Cam Engine Export - Vehicles Built For Sale In Markets Other Than North America Except Export - Vehicles Built For Sale In North America Circuit Functions DESCRIPTION - CIRCUIT FUNCTIONS All circuits in the diagrams use an alpha/numeric code to identify the wire and it's function. To identify which circuit code applies to a system, refer to the Circuit Identification Code Chart. This chart shows the main circuits only and does not show the secondary codes that may apply to some models. Circuit Information DESCRIPTION - CIRCUIT INFORMATION Each wire shown in the diagrams contains a code which identifies the main circuit, a specific part of the main circuit, gage of wire, and color. An example would be A 2 18 LB/YL. This is a Battery Feed circuit, level two, eighteen gauge, light blue with a yellow tracer. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4899 Connector, Ground and Splice Information DESCRIPTION - CONNECTOR, GROUND AND SPLICE INFORMATION CAUTION: Not all connectors are serviced. Some connectors are serviced only with a harness. A typical example might be the Supplemental Restraint System connectors. Always check parts availability before attempting a repair. IDENTIFICATION In-line connectors are identified by a number, as follows: - In-line connectors located in the engine compartment are C100 series numbers. - In-line connectors located in the instrument panel area are C200 series numbers. - In-line connectors located in the body are C300 series numbers. - Jumper harness connectors are C400 series numbers. - Grounds and ground connectors are identified with a "G" and follow the same series numbering as the in-line connectors. - Splices are identified with an "S" and follow the same series numbering as the in-line connectors. In addition, S001-S099 numbers are located in the engine compartment. - Component connectors are identified by the component name instead of a number. Multiple connectors on a component use a C1, C2, etc. identifier. LOCATIONS Vehicle/Locations contains the master connector/ground/splice location index charts with hyperlinks to the applicable location illustrations. The illustrations contain the connector name (or number)/ground number/splice number and component identification. The abbreviation T/O is used in the component location section to indicate a point in which the wiring harness branches out to a component. The abbreviation N/S means Not Shown in the illustrations Section Identification and Information DESCRIPTION - SECTION IDENTIFICATION AND INFORMATION The wiring diagrams are grouped into individual sections. If a component is most likely found in a particular group, it will be shown complete (all wires, Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4900 connectors, and pins) within that group. For example, the Auto Shutdown Relay is most likely to be found in Powertrain Management, so it is shown there complete. It can, however, be shown partially in another group if it contains some associated wiring. Splice diagrams show the entire splice and provide references to other sections the splices serves. Splice Information only contains splice diagrams that are not shown in their entirety somewhere else in the wiring diagrams. Connector Pin-Outs shows each connector and the circuits involved with that connector. The connectors are identified using the name/number on the diagram pages. Removal REMOVAL 1. Disconnect battery. 2. Release Connector Lock (2). 3. Disconnect the connector (3) being repaired from its mating half/component. 4. Remove the dress cover (if applicable) (1). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4901 5. Release the Secondary Terminal Lock, if required (1). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4902 6. Position the connector locking finger away from the terminal using the proper special tool. Pull on the wire to remove the terminal from the connector. Installation Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4903 INSTALLATION 1. Insert the removed terminal in the same cavity on the repair connector. 2. Repeat steps for each terminal in the connector, being sure that all wires are inserted into the proper cavities. For additional connector pin-out identification, refer to the wiring diagrams. 3. When the connector is re-assembled, the secondary terminal lock must be placed in the locked position to prevent terminal push out. 4. Replace dress cover (if applicable). 5. Connect connector to its mating half/component. 6. Connect battery and test all affected systems. Removal REMOVAL 1. Disconnect the battery. 2. Locate the diode in the harness, and remove the protective covering. 3. Remove the diode from the harness, pay attention to the current flow direction (1) (2) (3). Installation INSTALLATION 1. Remove the insulation from the wires in the harness. Only remove enough insulation to solder in the new diode. 2. Install the new diode in the harness, making sure current flow is correct. If necessary, refer to the appropriate wiring diagram for current flow. 3. Solder the connection together using rosin core type solder only. Do not use acid core solder. 4. Tape the diode to the harness using electrical tape. Make sure the diode is completely sealed from the elements. 5. Re-connect the battery and test affected systems. Removal REMOVAL 1. Follow steps for removing terminals described in the connector removal section. 2. Cut the wire 6 inches from the back of the connector. Installation INSTALLATION 1. Select a wire from the terminal repair kit that best matches the color and gage of the wire being repaired. 2. Cut the repair wire to the proper length and remove one-half (1/2) inch of insulation. 3. Splice the repair wire to the wire harness (see wire splicing procedure). See: Service Procedures/Wire Splicing 4. Insert the repaired wire into the connector. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4904 5. Install the connector locking wedge, if required, and reconnect the connector to its mating half/component. 6. Re-tape the wire harness starting at 1-1/2 inches behind the connector and 2 inches past the repair. 7. Connect battery and test all affected systems. Wire Splicing STANDARD PROCEDURE - WIRE SPLICING When splicing a wire, it is important that the correct gage be used as shown in the wiring diagrams. 1. Remove one-half (1/2) inch of insulation from each wire that needs to be spliced. 2. Place a piece of adhesive lined heat shrink tubing on one side of the wire. Make sure the tubing will be long enough to cover and seal the entire repair area. 3. Place the strands of wire overlapping each other inside of the splice clip (1). 4. Using crimping tool (1), Mopar p/n 05019912AA, crimp the splice clip and wires together. 5. Solder (3) the connection (2) together using rosin core type solder (1) only. CAUTION: DO NOT USE ACID CORE SOLDER. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4905 6. Center the heat shrink tubing (2) over the joint and heat using a heat gun. Heat the joint until the tubing is tightly sealed and sealant (1) comes out of both ends of the tubing. Special Tools WIRING/TERMINAL PROBING TOOL PACKAGE 6807 TERMINAL PICK TOOL SET 6680 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4906 TERMINAL REMOVING TOOLS 6932 AND 8638 TERMINAL REMOVING TOOL 6934 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4907 Vehicle Speed Sensor: Diagnostic Aids Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) Sensitive Devices STANDARD PROCEDURE - ELECTROSTATIC DISCHARGE (ESD) SENSITIVE DEVICES All ESD sensitive components are solid state and a symbol is used to indicate this. When handling any component with this symbol, comply with the following procedures to reduce the possibility of electrostatic charge build up on the body and inadvertent discharge into the component. If it is not known whether the part is ESD sensitive, assume that it is. 1. Always touch a known good ground before handling the part. This should be repeated while handling the part and more frequently after sliding across a seat, sitting down from a standing position, or walking a distance. 2. Avoid touching electrical terminals of the part, unless instructed to do so by a written procedure. 3. When using a voltmeter, be sure to connect the ground lead first. 4. Do not remove the part from it's protective packing until it is time to install the part. 5. Before removing the part from it's package, ground the package to a known good ground on the vehicle. Testing Of Voltage Potential STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING OF VOLTAGE POTENTIAL 1. Connect the ground lead of a voltmeter to a known good ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the voltmeter to the selected test point. The vehicle ignition may need to be turned ON to check voltage. Refer to the appropriate test procedure. Testing For Continuity Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4908 STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING FOR CONTINUITY 1. Remove the fuse (1) for the circuit being checked or, disconnect the battery. 2. Connect one lead of the ohmmeter to one side of the circuit being tested 3. Connect the other lead to the other end of the circuit being tested. Low or no resistance means good continuity. Testing For A Short To Ground STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING FOR A SHORT TO GROUND 1. Remove the fuse and disconnect all items involved with the fuse. 2. Connect a test light or a voltmeter across the terminals of the fuse. 3. Starting at the fuse block, wiggle the wiring harness about six to eight inches apart and watch the voltmeter/test lamp. 4. If the voltmeter registers voltage or the test lamp glows, there is a short to ground in that general area of the wiring harness. Testing For A Short To Ground On Fuses Powering Several Loads STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING FOR A SHORT TO GROUND ON FUSES POWERING SEVERAL LOADS 1. Refer to the wiring diagrams and disconnect or isolate all items on the suspected fused circuits. 2. Replace the blown fuse. 3. Supply power to the fuse by turning ON the ignition switch or re-connecting the battery. 4. Start connecting or energizing the items in the fuse circuit one at a time. When the fuse blows the circuit with the short to ground has been isolated. Testing For A Voltage Drop STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING FOR A VOLTAGE DROP Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4909 1. Connect the positive lead of the voltmeter to the side of the circuit closest to the battery. 2. Connect the other lead of the voltmeter to the other side of the switch, component or circuit. 3. Operate the item. 4. The voltmeter will show the difference in voltage between the two points. Troubleshooting Wiring Problems DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING - WIRING HARNESS TROUBLESHOOTING TOOLS When diagnosing a problem in an electrical circuit there are several common tools necessary. These tools are listed and explained below. - Jumper Wire - This is a test wire used to connect two points of a circuit. It can be used to bypass an open in a circuit. WARNING: Never use a jumper wire across a load, such as a motor, connected between a battery feed and ground. - Voltmeter - Used to check for voltage on a circuit. Always connect the black lead to a known good ground and the red lead to the positive side of the circuit. CAUTION: Most of the electrical components used in today's vehicles are Solid State. When checking voltages in these circuits, use a meter with a 10 - megohm or greater impedance rating. - Ohmmeter - Used to check the resistance between two points of a circuit. Low or no resistance in a circuit means good continuity. CAUTION: Most of the electrical components used in today's vehicles are Solid State. When checking resistance in these circuits use a meter with a 10 - megohm or greater impedance rating. In addition, make sure the power is disconnected from the circuit. Circuits that are powered up by the vehicle's electrical system can cause damage to the equipment and provide false readings. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4910 - Probing Tools - These tools are used for probing terminals in connectors. Select the proper size tool from Special Tool Package 6807, and insert the probing end (2) into the terminal being tested. Use the other end of the tool (1) to insert the meter probe. INTERMITTENT AND POOR CONNECTIONS Most intermittent electrical problems are caused by faulty electrical connections or wiring. It is also possible for a sticking component or relay to cause a problem. Before condemning a component or wiring assembly, check the following items. - Connectors are fully seated - Spread terminals, or terminal push out - Terminals in the wiring assembly are fully seated into the connector/component and locked into position - Dirt or corrosion on the terminals. Any amount of corrosion or dirt could cause an intermittent problem - Damaged connector/component casing exposing the item to dirt or moisture - Wire insulation that has rubbed through causing a short to ground - Some or all of the wiring strands broken inside of the insulation - Wiring broken inside of the insulation TROUBLESHOOTING WIRING PROBLEMS When troubleshooting wiring problems there are six steps which can aid in the procedure. The steps are listed and explained below. Always check for non-factory items added to the vehicle before doing any diagnosis. If the vehicle is equipped with these items, disconnect them to verify these add-on items are not the cause of the problem. 1. Verify the problem. 2. Verify any related symptoms. Do this by performing operational checks on components that are in the same circuit. Refer to the wiring diagrams. 3. Analyze the symptoms. Use the wiring diagrams to determine what the circuit is doing, where the problem most likely is occurring and where the diagnosis will continue. 4. Isolate the problem area. 5. Repair the problem area. 6. Verify the proper operation. For this step, check for proper operation of all items on the repaired circuit. Refer to the wiring diagrams. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Catalytic Converter > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Catalytic Converter: Description and Operation Description GAS ENGINE Exhaust System 4.7L Engine - Typical WARNING: The normal operating temperature of the exhaust system is very high. Therefore, never work around or attempt to service any part of the exhaust system until it is cooled. Special care should be taken when working near the catalytic converter. The temperature of the converter rises to a high level after a short period of engine operation time. CAUTION: DO NOT remove spark plug wires from plugs or by any other means short out cylinders. Failure of the catalytic converter can occur due to a temperature increase caused by unburned fuel passing through the converter. The stainless steel catalytic converter body is designed to last the life of the vehicle. Excessive heat can result in bulging or other distortion, but excessive heat will not be the fault of the converter. If unburned fuel enters the converter, overheating may occur. If a converter is heat-damaged, correct the cause of the damage at the same time the converter is replaced. Also, inspect all other components of the exhaust system for heat damage. Unleaded gasoline must be used to avoid contaminating the catalyst core. 50 State emission vehicles incorporate two mini catalytic converters located after the exhaust manifolds and before the inline catalytic converter. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Catalytic Converter > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 4916 Catalytic Converter: Description and Operation Operation GAS ENGINE The catalytic converter captures and burns any unburned fuel mixture exiting the combustion chambers during the exhaust stroke of the engine. This process aids in reducing emissions output. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Catalytic Converter > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures Catalytic Converter: Procedures INSPECTION ON VEHICLE Look at the stainless steel body of the Catalytic Converter or Diesel Oxidation Catalyst (DOC)/ Diesel Particulate Filter (DPF) assembly, inspect for bulging or other distortion that could be a result of overheating. Inspect for: - Indiction of exhaust gas leakage such as soot trails. - DOC/DPF pressure fittings and temperature sensor wiring for damage - Joint misalignment - Denting of greater then 6.3 mm (0.25 in.) - Outer shell torn, cracked or otherwise damaged - Loose or damaged core OFF VEHICLE With DOC/DPF of vehicle and separated, visually inspect DOC/DPF creamic faces (Inlet and Outlet) for indication of damage from: - Fuel fouling - Oil fouling - Coolant fouling - Shifted or move ceramic element - Ceramic element appears to be plugged and the soot is wet - More then 20 cells are damaged (broken through), showing soot on the outlet face of the filter. A fluid soaked DOC/DPF element will have a glossy sheen and a strong fuel, coolant, or oil odor. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Catalytic Converter > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 4919 Catalytic Converter: Removal and Replacement Catalytic Converter - Removal 3.7L/4.7L ENGINE 1. Raise and support vehicle. 2. Saturate the bolts and nuts with heat valve lubricant. Allow 5 minutes for penetration. 3. Disconnect oxygen sensor electrical connectors. 4. Remove clamp (4). 5. Remove bolts exhaust to manifold (2). 6. Remove catalytic converter (3). Catalytic Converter - Installation 3.7L/4.7L ENGINE 1. Install RH catalytic converter to exhaust clamp (4) on RH catalytic converter (3) and position into exhaust pipe (5). 2. Install and hand tighten RH catalytic converter to exhaust manifold bolts (2). 3. Install c-clip nut (1) and bolt (2) to converter (3) to manifold. 4. Tighten catalytic converter to exhaust manifold bolts (1) to 31 Nm (23 ft. lbs.). 5. Tighten all clamp nuts (4) to 52.2 Nm (40 ft. lbs.) torque. 6. Check the exhaust system for contact with the body panels. A minimum of 25 mm (1.0 in.) is required between the exhaust system components and body/frame parts. Make the necessary adjustments, if needed. 7. Check to ensure you have at least 25 mm clearance to oil pan. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Catalytic Converter > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 4920 8. Plug in O2 sensor wiring. 9. Lower the vehicle. 10. Start the engine and inspect for exhaust leaks. Repair exhaust leaks as necessary. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Continuous Trap Oxidizer, Diesel Emissions > Exhaust Pressure Differential Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Exhaust Pressure Differential Sensor: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL 1. Raise and support vehicle. 2. Disconnect electrical connector. 3. Disconnect hoses at pressure differential pressure sensor. 4. Remove mounting bolt and differential pressure sensor. 5. Remove mounting bolts (1). PRESSURE DIFFERENTIAL TUBING Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Continuous Trap Oxidizer, Diesel Emissions > Exhaust Pressure Differential Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 4926 6. Remove pressure differential pressure tubing. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Continuous Trap Oxidizer, Diesel Emissions > Exhaust Pressure Differential Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 4927 Exhaust Pressure Differential Sensor: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION PRESSURE DIFFERENTIAL TUBING 1. Install differential pressure tubing, if removed. Tighten fittings to 30 Nm (22 ft. lbs.). 2. Position differential pressure sensor (1). 3. Install mounting nuts (5) and bolts. Tighten to 10 Nm (89 in. lbs.). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Continuous Trap Oxidizer, Diesel Emissions > Exhaust Pressure Differential Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 4928 NOTE: Make sure there is not a dip in the pressure differential hoses. 4. Install hose (2) to the rear DPF tubing. 5. Install hose (3) to the front DPF tubing. 6. Connect electrical connector (6). 7. Lower vehicle. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Canister Purge Solenoid > Component Information > Locations Canister Purge Solenoid: Locations Component ID: 456 Component : SOLENOID-EVAP PURGE Connector: Name : SOLENOID-EVAP PURGE Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (NGC) Pin Circuit Description 1 K52 20DB/WT EVAP PURGE CONTROL 2 K70 20DB/BR EVAP PURGE SOL SIGNAL Component Location - 32 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Canister Purge Solenoid > Component Information > Locations > Page 4933 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Canister Purge Solenoid > Component Information > Locations > Page 4934 Canister Purge Solenoid: Diagrams Component ID: 456 Component : SOLENOID-EVAP PURGE Connector: Name : SOLENOID-EVAP PURGE Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (NGC) Pin Circuit Description 1 K52 20DB/WT EVAP PURGE CONTROL 2 K70 20DB/BR EVAP PURGE SOL SIGNAL Component Location - 32 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Canister Purge Solenoid > Component Information > Locations > Page 4935 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Canister Purge Solenoid > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Canister Purge Solenoid: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL The duty cycle EVAP canister purge solenoid (1) is located in the engine compartment below and near the battery. 1. Carefully pull the solenoid assembly straight up from the tongue-type bracket without bending the two vapor lines. 2. Disconnect electrical wiring connector (2) at solenoid. 3. Disconnect vapor line quick-connect fitting (3) at solenoid. 4. Disconnect vapor line quick-connect fitting (4) at solenoid. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Canister Purge Solenoid > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 4938 Canister Purge Solenoid: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION 1. Connect vapor line quick-connect fitting (3) to solenoid. 2. Connect vapor line quick-connect fitting (4) to solenoid. 3. Connect electrical wiring connector (2) to solenoid. 4. Carefully push the solenoid assembly (1) straight down onto the tongue-type bracket without bending the two vapor lines. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Evaporative Check Valve > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Evaporative Check Valve: > 14-001-09A > Sep > 09 > Fuel System - Difficult Fuel Fill/Nozzle Shuts Off Evaporative Check Valve: Customer Interest Fuel System - Difficult Fuel Fill/Nozzle Shuts Off NUMBER: 14-001-09 REV. A GROUP: Fuel DATE: September 1, 2009 THIS BULLETIN SUPERSEDES TECHNICAL SERVICE BULLETIN 14-001-09, DATED APRIL 15, 2009, WHICH SHOULD BE REMOVED FROM YOUR FILES. THIS IS A COMPLETE REVISION AND NO ASTERISKS HAVE BEEN USED TO HIGHLIGHT REVISIONS. SUBJECT: Hard To Fill With Fuel Or Fuel Nozzle Shuts Off Repeatedly MODELS: 2004-2008 (CS) Pacifica 2009 (DS) Ram Truck (1500) 2007 - 2009 (DH) Ram Truck (1500/2500 Pick Up) 2004 - 2009 (DR) Ram Truck (1500 / 2500 Pick Up) 2005 - 2009 (HB) Durango 2007-2009 (HG) Aspen 2005 - 2009 (ND) Dakota 2009 (JC) Journey 2007 - 2009 (JK) Wrangler 2007 - 2009 (J1) Sebring (China CKD) 2007 - 2009 (JS) Sebring/Sebring Convertible/Avenger 2006 - 2009 (K1) Cherokee (CKD) 2007 - 2009 (KA) Nitro 2008 - 2009 (KK) Liberty 2008 - 2009 (KK) Cherokee (International Markets) 2005-2007 (KJ) Liberty 2005 - 2007 (KJ) Cherokee (International Markets) 2005 - 2009 (LE) 300C/300C Touring (International Markets) 2005 - 2009 (LX) 300/Magnum/Charger 2007 (L2) 300 (China) 2008 - 2009 (LC) Challenger 2004 - 2009 (PT) Chrysler PT Cruiser 2007 (R2) Caravan/Voyager(CKD) 2005 - 2007 (RG) Chrysler Voyager (International Markets) 2003 - 2007 (RS) Town & Country/Caravan/Voyager Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Evaporative Check Valve > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Evaporative Check Valve: > 14-001-09A > Sep > 09 > Fuel System - Difficult Fuel Fill/Nozzle Shuts Off > Page 4947 2008 - 2009 (RI) Town & Country/Grand Caravan 2008 - 2009 (RI) Town & Country/Grand Voyager (International Markets) 2005 - 2006 (TJ) Wrangler 2005 - 2009 (WH) Grand Cherokee (International Markets) 2005 - 2009 (WK) Grand Cherokee 2006 - 2009 (XH) Commander (International Markets) 2006 - 2009 (XK) Commander NOTE: This bulletin applies to all vehicles equipped with a gasoline engine. DISCUSSION: Customer may report that the vehicle is hard to fill with fuel or that the fuel pump nozzle shuts off repeatedly while trying to fill vehicle. This customer complaint can occur due to a number of different causes. The fuel tank is the least likely cause of this condition. The following Diagnostic procedure can be used to diagnose the issues. DIAGNOSIS: 1. Is the vehicle a LX/LE/LC/L2? a. Yes >> proceed to Step # 2 b. No >> proceed to Step # 4 2. Idle the vehicle 60 to 90 seconds upon stopping. 3. Does tank refill properly? a. No >> proceed to Step # 4 b. Yes >> Inform the customer to idle the vehicle for 60 to 90 seconds upon stopping if vehicle was driven aggressively. This is due to the fact that on the LX/LE/LC/L2 the fuel tank is a unique saddle tank design and needs 30 to 60 seconds while the engine is running to level the fuel in both half's of the fuel tank. Allowing the vehicle to idle for this amount of time will let the fuel pump transfer fuel to the left side tank, opening the control valve and allowing normal fuel filling. 4. Disconnect the vapor recirculation tube at the fuel tank. 5. Attempt to refill fuel tank. 6. Does tank refill properly? a. Yes >> Proceed to Step # 7 b. No >> Proceed to Step # 11. 7. Reconnect the vapor recirculation tube at the fuel tank. 8. Disconnect the other end of the vapor recirculation tube at the fuel filler tube. 9. Attempt to refill fuel tank. 10. Does tank refill properly? a. Yes >> Replace fuel filler tube. b. No >> Replace the vapor recirculation tube. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Evaporative Check Valve > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Evaporative Check Valve: > 14-001-09A > Sep > 09 > Fuel System - Difficult Fuel Fill/Nozzle Shuts Off > Page 4948 11. Disconnect the control valve to EVAP canister tube at the fuel tank. 12. Reconnect the vapor recirculation tube at the fuel tank. 13. Does tank refill properly? a. No >> Replace Fuel Tank. b. Yes >> Proceed to 14. Reconnect the control valve to EVAP canister tube at the fuel tank. 15. Disconnect the control valve to EVAP canister tube at the EVAP canister. 16. Attempt to refill fuel tank. 17. Does tank refill properly? a. Yes >> Blockage is in the EVAP Canister, or ESIM, or Clean air hose (ESIM vent hose), or filter. Diagnose appropriately. b. No >> Replace the control valve to EVAP canister tube. POLICY: Information Only Disclaimer: This bulletin is supplied as technical information only and is not an authorization for repair. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Evaporative Check Valve > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Evaporative Check Valve: > 14-001-09A > Sep > 09 > Fuel System - Difficult Fuel Fill/Nozzle Shuts Off Evaporative Check Valve: All Technical Service Bulletins Fuel System - Difficult Fuel Fill/Nozzle Shuts Off NUMBER: 14-001-09 REV. A GROUP: Fuel DATE: September 1, 2009 THIS BULLETIN SUPERSEDES TECHNICAL SERVICE BULLETIN 14-001-09, DATED APRIL 15, 2009, WHICH SHOULD BE REMOVED FROM YOUR FILES. THIS IS A COMPLETE REVISION AND NO ASTERISKS HAVE BEEN USED TO HIGHLIGHT REVISIONS. SUBJECT: Hard To Fill With Fuel Or Fuel Nozzle Shuts Off Repeatedly MODELS: 2004-2008 (CS) Pacifica 2009 (DS) Ram Truck (1500) 2007 - 2009 (DH) Ram Truck (1500/2500 Pick Up) 2004 - 2009 (DR) Ram Truck (1500 / 2500 Pick Up) 2005 - 2009 (HB) Durango 2007-2009 (HG) Aspen 2005 - 2009 (ND) Dakota 2009 (JC) Journey 2007 - 2009 (JK) Wrangler 2007 - 2009 (J1) Sebring (China CKD) 2007 - 2009 (JS) Sebring/Sebring Convertible/Avenger 2006 - 2009 (K1) Cherokee (CKD) 2007 - 2009 (KA) Nitro 2008 - 2009 (KK) Liberty 2008 - 2009 (KK) Cherokee (International Markets) 2005-2007 (KJ) Liberty 2005 - 2007 (KJ) Cherokee (International Markets) 2005 - 2009 (LE) 300C/300C Touring (International Markets) 2005 - 2009 (LX) 300/Magnum/Charger 2007 (L2) 300 (China) 2008 - 2009 (LC) Challenger 2004 - 2009 (PT) Chrysler PT Cruiser 2007 (R2) Caravan/Voyager(CKD) 2005 - 2007 (RG) Chrysler Voyager (International Markets) 2003 - 2007 (RS) Town & Country/Caravan/Voyager Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Evaporative Check Valve > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Evaporative Check Valve: > 14-001-09A > Sep > 09 > Fuel System - Difficult Fuel Fill/Nozzle Shuts Off > Page 4954 2008 - 2009 (RI) Town & Country/Grand Caravan 2008 - 2009 (RI) Town & Country/Grand Voyager (International Markets) 2005 - 2006 (TJ) Wrangler 2005 - 2009 (WH) Grand Cherokee (International Markets) 2005 - 2009 (WK) Grand Cherokee 2006 - 2009 (XH) Commander (International Markets) 2006 - 2009 (XK) Commander NOTE: This bulletin applies to all vehicles equipped with a gasoline engine. DISCUSSION: Customer may report that the vehicle is hard to fill with fuel or that the fuel pump nozzle shuts off repeatedly while trying to fill vehicle. This customer complaint can occur due to a number of different causes. The fuel tank is the least likely cause of this condition. The following Diagnostic procedure can be used to diagnose the issues. DIAGNOSIS: 1. Is the vehicle a LX/LE/LC/L2? a. Yes >> proceed to Step # 2 b. No >> proceed to Step # 4 2. Idle the vehicle 60 to 90 seconds upon stopping. 3. Does tank refill properly? a. No >> proceed to Step # 4 b. Yes >> Inform the customer to idle the vehicle for 60 to 90 seconds upon stopping if vehicle was driven aggressively. This is due to the fact that on the LX/LE/LC/L2 the fuel tank is a unique saddle tank design and needs 30 to 60 seconds while the engine is running to level the fuel in both half's of the fuel tank. Allowing the vehicle to idle for this amount of time will let the fuel pump transfer fuel to the left side tank, opening the control valve and allowing normal fuel filling. 4. Disconnect the vapor recirculation tube at the fuel tank. 5. Attempt to refill fuel tank. 6. Does tank refill properly? a. Yes >> Proceed to Step # 7 b. No >> Proceed to Step # 11. 7. Reconnect the vapor recirculation tube at the fuel tank. 8. Disconnect the other end of the vapor recirculation tube at the fuel filler tube. 9. Attempt to refill fuel tank. 10. Does tank refill properly? a. Yes >> Replace fuel filler tube. b. No >> Replace the vapor recirculation tube. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Evaporative Check Valve > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Evaporative Check Valve: > 14-001-09A > Sep > 09 > Fuel System - Difficult Fuel Fill/Nozzle Shuts Off > Page 4955 11. Disconnect the control valve to EVAP canister tube at the fuel tank. 12. Reconnect the vapor recirculation tube at the fuel tank. 13. Does tank refill properly? a. No >> Replace Fuel Tank. b. Yes >> Proceed to 14. Reconnect the control valve to EVAP canister tube at the fuel tank. 15. Disconnect the control valve to EVAP canister tube at the EVAP canister. 16. Attempt to refill fuel tank. 17. Does tank refill properly? a. Yes >> Blockage is in the EVAP Canister, or ESIM, or Clean air hose (ESIM vent hose), or filter. Diagnose appropriately. b. No >> Replace the control valve to EVAP canister tube. POLICY: Information Only Disclaimer: This bulletin is supplied as technical information only and is not an authorization for repair. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Evaporative Emission Control Canister > Component Information > Locations Evaporative Emission Control Canister: Locations Evaporative Emissions Canisters Type-1 Canisters A single, vertically mounted EVAP canister (1) is used with Type 1. The ESIM (Emission System Integrity Monitor) switch (3) is mounted to the canister. Type-2 Canisters A single, vertically mounted EVAP canister (1) is used with Type 2. The ESIM (Emission System Integrity Monitor) switch (2) is mounted to the canister. Type-3 Canisters Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Evaporative Emission Control Canister > Component Information > Locations > Page 4959 Dual, vertically mounted EVAP canisters (1) and (4) are used with Type 3. The ESIM (Emission System Integrity Monitor) switch (2) is mounted to the main canister (1). Canister (4) is considered a secondary canister. Type-4 Canisters Dual, horizontally mounted EVAP canisters (1) and (7) are used with Type 4. The ESIM (Emission System Integrity Monitor) switch (3) is mounted to the main, primary canister (1). Canister (7) is considered a secondary canister. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Evaporative Emission Control Canister > Component Information > Locations > Page 4960 Evaporative Emission Control Canister: Description and Operation OPERATION Depending on engine displacement, either one or two EVAP canisters may be used. Also depending on vehicle model and fuel tank size, the canisters may be mounted either vertically or horizontally. The ESIM (Emission System Integrity Monitor) switch is mounted to the EVAP canister. The NVLD system is no longer used on any engine. The EVAP canister(s) are filled with granules of an activated carbon mixture. Fuel vapors entering the EVAP canisters are absorbed by the charcoal granules. Fuel tank pressure vents into the EVAP canisters. Fuel vapors are temporarily held in the canisters until they can be drawn into the intake manifold. The duty cycle EVAP canister purge solenoid allows the EVAP canisters to be purged at predetermined times and at certain engine operating conditions. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Evaporative Emission Control Canister > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Evaporative Emission Control Canister: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL Type-1 Canisters A single, vertically mounted EVAP canister (1) is used with Type 1. The ESIM (Emission System Integrity Monitor) switch (3) is mounted to the canister. 1. Raise and support vehicle. 2. If equipped, remove necessary skid plates. Certain models, equipped with a certain fuel tank size, may require the removal of the fuel tank skid plate and/or the transfer case skid plate to gain access to the EVAP canister(s). 3. Disconnect electrical wiring connector from ESIM switch (3). 4. Disconnect vapor line (6) from ESIM switch. 5. Disconnect quick-connect vapor line (5) from canister. 6. Remove canister mounting bracket bolt. This is located below and near the ESIM switch. 7. Pull canister from mounting bracket while guiding two canister locating pins from mounting bracket. Type-2 Canisters A single, vertically mounted EVAP canister (1) is used with Type 2. The ESIM (Emission System Integrity Monitor) switch (2) is mounted to the canister. 1. Raise and support vehicle. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Evaporative Emission Control Canister > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 4963 2. If equipped, remove necessary skid plates. Certain models, equipped with a certain fuel tank size, may require the removal of the fuel tank skid plate and/or the transfer case skid plate to gain access to the EVAP canister(s). 3. Disconnect electrical wiring connector from ESIM switch (3). 4. Disconnect vapor line (7) from ESIM switch. 5. Disconnect quick-connect vapor line (5) at canister. 6. Remove canister mounting bracket bolt (6). 7. Pull canister from mounting bracket while guiding two canister locating pins from mounting bracket. Type-3 Canisters Dual, vertically mounted EVAP canisters (1) and (4) are used with Type 3. The ESIM (Emission System Integrity Monitor) switch (2) is mounted to the main canister (1). Canister (4) is considered a secondary canister. 1. Raise and support vehicle. 2. If equipped, remove necessary skid plates. Certain models, equipped with a certain fuel tank size, may require the removal of the fuel tank skid plate and/or the transfer case skid plate to gain access to the EVAP canister(s). 3. Disconnect electrical wiring connector from ESIM switch (3). 4. Disconnect vapor line (9) from ESIM switch. 5. Disconnect quick-connect vapor line (7) at main canister. 6. Remove canister mounting bracket bolt (8). 7. Pull canister from mounting bracket while guiding two canister locating pins from mounting bracket. 8. To remove the secondary canister (4), remove mounting bolt. Pull canister from mounting bracket while guiding two canister locating pins (6) from mounting bracket. Type-4 Canisters Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Evaporative Emission Control Canister > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 4964 Dual, horizontally mounted EVAP canisters (1) and (7) are used with Type 4. The ESIM (Emission System Integrity Monitor) switch (3) is mounted to the main, primary canister (1). Canister (7) is considered a secondary canister. 1. Raise and support vehicle. 2. If equipped, remove necessary skid plates. Certain models, equipped with a certain fuel tank size, may require the removal of the fuel tank skid plate and/or the transfer case skid plate to gain access to the EVAP canister(s). 3. Disconnect electrical wiring connector from ESIM switch (4). 4. Disconnect vapor line (5) from ESIM switch. 5. Disconnect quick-connect vapor line (8) at main canister. 6. Remove primary canister mounting bracket nut (9). 7. Pull canister from mounting bracket while guiding two canister locating pins from mounting bracket. 8. To remove the secondary canister (7), remove mounting nut (6). Pull canister from mounting bracket while guiding two canister locating pins from mounting bracket. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Evaporative Emission Control Canister > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 4965 Evaporative Emission Control Canister: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION Type-1 Canisters CAUTION: After installing any EVAP canister or ESIM switch, the electrical connector on the switch MUST be in the 3 O'clock position (as viewed from front). This step must be done for proper ESIM switch operation. A single, vertically mounted EVAP canister (1) is used with Type 1. The ESIM (Emission System Integrity Monitor) switch (3) is mounted to the canister. 1. Two locating pins are located at rear of canister. Push these two pins into canister mounting bracket. 2. Install canister mounting bracket bolt. This is located below and near the ESIM switch. 3. Connect quick-connect vapor line (5) to canister. 4. Connect vapor line (6) to ESIM switch. 5. Connect electrical wiring connector to ESIM switch (3). 6. If equipped, install necessary skid plates. 7. All vapor/vacuum lines and hoses must be firmly connected. Also check the vapor/vacuum lines at the EVAP canister purge solenoid for damage or leaks. If a leak is present, a Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) may be set. 8. Lower vehicle. Type-2 Canisters CAUTION: After installing any EVAP canister or ESIM switch, the electrical connector on the switch MUST be in the 3 O'clock position (as viewed from front). This step must be done for proper ESIM switch operation. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Evaporative Emission Control Canister > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 4966 A single, vertically mounted EVAP canister (1) is used with Type 2. The ESIM (Emission System Integrity Monitor) switch (2) is mounted to the canister. 1. Two locating pins are located at rear of canister. Push these two pins into canister mounting bracket. 2. Install canister mounting bracket bolt (6). 3. Connect quick-connect vapor line (5) to canister. 4. Connect vapor line (7) to ESIM switch. 5. Connect electrical wiring connector to ESIM switch (3). 6. If equipped, install necessary skid plates. 7. All vapor/vacuum lines and hoses must be firmly connected. Also check the vapor/vacuum lines at the EVAP canister purge solenoid for damage or leaks. If a leak is present, a Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) may be set. 8. Lower vehicle. Type-3 Canisters CAUTION: After installing any EVAP canister or ESIM switch, the electrical connector on the switch MUST be in the 3 O'clock position (as viewed from front). This step must be done for proper ESIM switch operation. Dual, vertically mounted EVAP canisters (1) and (4) are used with Type 3. The ESIM (Emission System Integrity Monitor) switch (2) is mounted to the main canister (1). Canister (4) is considered a secondary canister. 1. Push secondary canister (4) into mounting bracket while guiding two canister locating pins (6) into mounting bracket. Install mounting bolt. 2. Push main, primary canister (1) into mounting bracket while guiding two canister locating pins into mounting bracket. 3. Install main canister mounting bracket bolt (8). 4. Connect quick-connect vapor line (7) to main canister. 5. Connect vapor line (9) to ESIM switch. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Evaporative Emission Control Canister > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 4967 6. Connect electrical wiring connector to ESIM switch (3). 7. If equipped, install necessary skid plates. 8. All vapor/vacuum lines and hoses must be firmly connected. Also check the vapor/vacuum lines at the EVAP canister purge solenoid for damage or leaks. If a leak is present, a Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) may be set. 9. Lower vehicle. Type-4 Canisters CAUTION: After installing any EVAP canister or ESIM switch, the electrical connector on the switch MUST be in the 3 O'clock position (as viewed from front). This step must be done for proper ESIM switch operation. Dual, horizontally mounted EVAP canisters (1) and (7) are used with Type 4. The ESIM (Emission System Integrity Monitor) switch (3) is mounted to the main, primary canister (1). Canister (7) is considered a secondary canister. 1. Position two secondary canister locating pins into mounting bracket. Install mounting nut (6). 2. Position two primary canister locating pins into mounting bracket. 3. Install primary canister mounting bracket nut (9). 4. Connect quick-connect vapor line (8) to main canister. 5. Connect vapor line (5) to ESIM switch. 6. Connect electrical wiring connector to ESIM switch (4). 7. If equipped, install necessary skid plates. 8. All vapor/vacuum lines and hoses must be firmly connected. Also check the vapor/vacuum lines at the EVAP canister purge solenoid for damage or leaks. If a leak is present, a Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) may be set. 9. Lower vehicle. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Evaporative Emissions Hose > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Evaporative Emissions Hose: > 14-001-09A > Sep > 09 > Fuel System - Difficult Fuel Fill/Nozzle Shuts Off Evaporative Emissions Hose: Customer Interest Fuel System - Difficult Fuel Fill/Nozzle Shuts Off NUMBER: 14-001-09 REV. A GROUP: Fuel DATE: September 1, 2009 THIS BULLETIN SUPERSEDES TECHNICAL SERVICE BULLETIN 14-001-09, DATED APRIL 15, 2009, WHICH SHOULD BE REMOVED FROM YOUR FILES. THIS IS A COMPLETE REVISION AND NO ASTERISKS HAVE BEEN USED TO HIGHLIGHT REVISIONS. SUBJECT: Hard To Fill With Fuel Or Fuel Nozzle Shuts Off Repeatedly MODELS: 2004-2008 (CS) Pacifica 2009 (DS) Ram Truck (1500) 2007 - 2009 (DH) Ram Truck (1500/2500 Pick Up) 2004 - 2009 (DR) Ram Truck (1500 / 2500 Pick Up) 2005 - 2009 (HB) Durango 2007-2009 (HG) Aspen 2005 - 2009 (ND) Dakota 2009 (JC) Journey 2007 - 2009 (JK) Wrangler 2007 - 2009 (J1) Sebring (China CKD) 2007 - 2009 (JS) Sebring/Sebring Convertible/Avenger 2006 - 2009 (K1) Cherokee (CKD) 2007 - 2009 (KA) Nitro 2008 - 2009 (KK) Liberty 2008 - 2009 (KK) Cherokee (International Markets) 2005-2007 (KJ) Liberty 2005 - 2007 (KJ) Cherokee (International Markets) 2005 - 2009 (LE) 300C/300C Touring (International Markets) 2005 - 2009 (LX) 300/Magnum/Charger 2007 (L2) 300 (China) 2008 - 2009 (LC) Challenger 2004 - 2009 (PT) Chrysler PT Cruiser 2007 (R2) Caravan/Voyager(CKD) 2005 - 2007 (RG) Chrysler Voyager (International Markets) 2003 - 2007 (RS) Town & Country/Caravan/Voyager Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Evaporative Emissions Hose > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Evaporative Emissions Hose: > 14-001-09A > Sep > 09 > Fuel System - Difficult Fuel Fill/Nozzle Shuts Off > Page 4976 2008 - 2009 (RI) Town & Country/Grand Caravan 2008 - 2009 (RI) Town & Country/Grand Voyager (International Markets) 2005 - 2006 (TJ) Wrangler 2005 - 2009 (WH) Grand Cherokee (International Markets) 2005 - 2009 (WK) Grand Cherokee 2006 - 2009 (XH) Commander (International Markets) 2006 - 2009 (XK) Commander NOTE: This bulletin applies to all vehicles equipped with a gasoline engine. DISCUSSION: Customer may report that the vehicle is hard to fill with fuel or that the fuel pump nozzle shuts off repeatedly while trying to fill vehicle. This customer complaint can occur due to a number of different causes. The fuel tank is the least likely cause of this condition. The following Diagnostic procedure can be used to diagnose the issues. DIAGNOSIS: 1. Is the vehicle a LX/LE/LC/L2? a. Yes >> proceed to Step # 2 b. No >> proceed to Step # 4 2. Idle the vehicle 60 to 90 seconds upon stopping. 3. Does tank refill properly? a. No >> proceed to Step # 4 b. Yes >> Inform the customer to idle the vehicle for 60 to 90 seconds upon stopping if vehicle was driven aggressively. This is due to the fact that on the LX/LE/LC/L2 the fuel tank is a unique saddle tank design and needs 30 to 60 seconds while the engine is running to level the fuel in both half's of the fuel tank. Allowing the vehicle to idle for this amount of time will let the fuel pump transfer fuel to the left side tank, opening the control valve and allowing normal fuel filling. 4. Disconnect the vapor recirculation tube at the fuel tank. 5. Attempt to refill fuel tank. 6. Does tank refill properly? a. Yes >> Proceed to Step # 7 b. No >> Proceed to Step # 11. 7. Reconnect the vapor recirculation tube at the fuel tank. 8. Disconnect the other end of the vapor recirculation tube at the fuel filler tube. 9. Attempt to refill fuel tank. 10. Does tank refill properly? a. Yes >> Replace fuel filler tube. b. No >> Replace the vapor recirculation tube. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Evaporative Emissions Hose > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Evaporative Emissions Hose: > 14-001-09A > Sep > 09 > Fuel System - Difficult Fuel Fill/Nozzle Shuts Off > Page 4977 11. Disconnect the control valve to EVAP canister tube at the fuel tank. 12. Reconnect the vapor recirculation tube at the fuel tank. 13. Does tank refill properly? a. No >> Replace Fuel Tank. b. Yes >> Proceed to 14. Reconnect the control valve to EVAP canister tube at the fuel tank. 15. Disconnect the control valve to EVAP canister tube at the EVAP canister. 16. Attempt to refill fuel tank. 17. Does tank refill properly? a. Yes >> Blockage is in the EVAP Canister, or ESIM, or Clean air hose (ESIM vent hose), or filter. Diagnose appropriately. b. No >> Replace the control valve to EVAP canister tube. POLICY: Information Only Disclaimer: This bulletin is supplied as technical information only and is not an authorization for repair. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Evaporative Emissions Hose > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Evaporative Emissions Hose: > 14-001-09A > Sep > 09 > Fuel System - Difficult Fuel Fill/Nozzle Shuts Off Evaporative Emissions Hose: All Technical Service Bulletins Fuel System - Difficult Fuel Fill/Nozzle Shuts Off NUMBER: 14-001-09 REV. A GROUP: Fuel DATE: September 1, 2009 THIS BULLETIN SUPERSEDES TECHNICAL SERVICE BULLETIN 14-001-09, DATED APRIL 15, 2009, WHICH SHOULD BE REMOVED FROM YOUR FILES. THIS IS A COMPLETE REVISION AND NO ASTERISKS HAVE BEEN USED TO HIGHLIGHT REVISIONS. SUBJECT: Hard To Fill With Fuel Or Fuel Nozzle Shuts Off Repeatedly MODELS: 2004-2008 (CS) Pacifica 2009 (DS) Ram Truck (1500) 2007 - 2009 (DH) Ram Truck (1500/2500 Pick Up) 2004 - 2009 (DR) Ram Truck (1500 / 2500 Pick Up) 2005 - 2009 (HB) Durango 2007-2009 (HG) Aspen 2005 - 2009 (ND) Dakota 2009 (JC) Journey 2007 - 2009 (JK) Wrangler 2007 - 2009 (J1) Sebring (China CKD) 2007 - 2009 (JS) Sebring/Sebring Convertible/Avenger 2006 - 2009 (K1) Cherokee (CKD) 2007 - 2009 (KA) Nitro 2008 - 2009 (KK) Liberty 2008 - 2009 (KK) Cherokee (International Markets) 2005-2007 (KJ) Liberty 2005 - 2007 (KJ) Cherokee (International Markets) 2005 - 2009 (LE) 300C/300C Touring (International Markets) 2005 - 2009 (LX) 300/Magnum/Charger 2007 (L2) 300 (China) 2008 - 2009 (LC) Challenger 2004 - 2009 (PT) Chrysler PT Cruiser 2007 (R2) Caravan/Voyager(CKD) 2005 - 2007 (RG) Chrysler Voyager (International Markets) 2003 - 2007 (RS) Town & Country/Caravan/Voyager Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Evaporative Emissions Hose > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Evaporative Emissions Hose: > 14-001-09A > Sep > 09 > Fuel System - Difficult Fuel Fill/Nozzle Shuts Off > Page 4983 2008 - 2009 (RI) Town & Country/Grand Caravan 2008 - 2009 (RI) Town & Country/Grand Voyager (International Markets) 2005 - 2006 (TJ) Wrangler 2005 - 2009 (WH) Grand Cherokee (International Markets) 2005 - 2009 (WK) Grand Cherokee 2006 - 2009 (XH) Commander (International Markets) 2006 - 2009 (XK) Commander NOTE: This bulletin applies to all vehicles equipped with a gasoline engine. DISCUSSION: Customer may report that the vehicle is hard to fill with fuel or that the fuel pump nozzle shuts off repeatedly while trying to fill vehicle. This customer complaint can occur due to a number of different causes. The fuel tank is the least likely cause of this condition. The following Diagnostic procedure can be used to diagnose the issues. DIAGNOSIS: 1. Is the vehicle a LX/LE/LC/L2? a. Yes >> proceed to Step # 2 b. No >> proceed to Step # 4 2. Idle the vehicle 60 to 90 seconds upon stopping. 3. Does tank refill properly? a. No >> proceed to Step # 4 b. Yes >> Inform the customer to idle the vehicle for 60 to 90 seconds upon stopping if vehicle was driven aggressively. This is due to the fact that on the LX/LE/LC/L2 the fuel tank is a unique saddle tank design and needs 30 to 60 seconds while the engine is running to level the fuel in both half's of the fuel tank. Allowing the vehicle to idle for this amount of time will let the fuel pump transfer fuel to the left side tank, opening the control valve and allowing normal fuel filling. 4. Disconnect the vapor recirculation tube at the fuel tank. 5. Attempt to refill fuel tank. 6. Does tank refill properly? a. Yes >> Proceed to Step # 7 b. No >> Proceed to Step # 11. 7. Reconnect the vapor recirculation tube at the fuel tank. 8. Disconnect the other end of the vapor recirculation tube at the fuel filler tube. 9. Attempt to refill fuel tank. 10. Does tank refill properly? a. Yes >> Replace fuel filler tube. b. No >> Replace the vapor recirculation tube. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Evaporative Emissions Hose > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Evaporative Emissions Hose: > 14-001-09A > Sep > 09 > Fuel System - Difficult Fuel Fill/Nozzle Shuts Off > Page 4984 11. Disconnect the control valve to EVAP canister tube at the fuel tank. 12. Reconnect the vapor recirculation tube at the fuel tank. 13. Does tank refill properly? a. No >> Replace Fuel Tank. b. Yes >> Proceed to 14. Reconnect the control valve to EVAP canister tube at the fuel tank. 15. Disconnect the control valve to EVAP canister tube at the EVAP canister. 16. Attempt to refill fuel tank. 17. Does tank refill properly? a. Yes >> Blockage is in the EVAP Canister, or ESIM, or Clean air hose (ESIM vent hose), or filter. Diagnose appropriately. b. No >> Replace the control valve to EVAP canister tube. POLICY: Information Only Disclaimer: This bulletin is supplied as technical information only and is not an authorization for repair. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Evaporative Emissions Hose > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 4985 Evaporative Emissions Hose: Description and Operation DESCRIPTION A vacuum schematic for emission related items can be found on the vehicles VECI label. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Leak Detector, Evaporative System > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 474 Leak Detector: Locations Component ID 474 Component ID: 474 Component : SWITCH-EVAP SYSTEM MONITOR Connector: Name : SWITCH-EVAP SYSTEM MONITOR Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (NGC) Pin Circuit Description 1 Z910 20BK GROUND 2 K107 20VT/WT ESM SIGNAL Component Location - 23 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Leak Detector, Evaporative System > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 474 > Page 4990 Component Location - 69 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Leak Detector, Evaporative System > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 474 > Page 4991 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Leak Detector, Evaporative System > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 474 > Page 4992 Leak Detector: Locations Component ID 487 Component ID: 487 Component : SWITCH-EVAP SYSTEM MONITOR Connector: Name : SWITCH-EVAP SYSTEM MONITOR Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (NGC) Pin Circuit Description 1 Z910 20BK GROUND 2 K107 20VT/WT ESM SIGNAL Component Location - 23 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Leak Detector, Evaporative System > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 474 > Page 4993 Component Location - 69 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Leak Detector, Evaporative System > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 474 > Page 4994 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Leak Detector, Evaporative System > Component Information > Diagrams > Component ID 474 Leak Detector: Diagrams Component ID 474 Component ID: 474 Component : SWITCH-EVAP SYSTEM MONITOR Connector: Name : SWITCH-EVAP SYSTEM MONITOR Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (NGC) Pin Circuit Description 1 Z910 20BK GROUND 2 K107 20VT/WT ESM SIGNAL Component Location - 23 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Leak Detector, Evaporative System > Component Information > Diagrams > Component ID 474 > Page 4997 Component Location - 69 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Leak Detector, Evaporative System > Component Information > Diagrams > Component ID 474 > Page 4998 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Leak Detector, Evaporative System > Component Information > Diagrams > Component ID 474 > Page 4999 Leak Detector: Diagrams Component ID 487 Component ID: 487 Component : SWITCH-EVAP SYSTEM MONITOR Connector: Name : SWITCH-EVAP SYSTEM MONITOR Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (NGC) Pin Circuit Description 1 Z910 20BK GROUND 2 K107 20VT/WT ESM SIGNAL Component Location - 23 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Leak Detector, Evaporative System > Component Information > Diagrams > Component ID 474 > Page 5000 Component Location - 69 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Leak Detector, Evaporative System > Component Information > Diagrams > Component ID 474 > Page 5001 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Refueling Vapor Recovery System > System Information > Description and Operation > Description Refueling Vapor Recovery System: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The ORVR (On-Board Refueling Vapor Recovery) system consists of a unique fuel tank, flow management valve, fluid control valve, one-way check valve and vapor canister. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Refueling Vapor Recovery System > System Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 5006 Refueling Vapor Recovery System: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The ORVR (On-Board Refueling Vapor Recovery) system is used to remove excess fuel tank vapors. This is done while the vehicle is being refueled. Fuel flowing into the fuel filler tube (approx. 1" I.D.) creates an aspiration effect drawing air into the fuel fill tube. During refueling, the fuel tank is vented to the EVAP canister to capture escaping vapors. With air flowing into the filler tube, there are no fuel vapors escaping to the atmosphere. Once the refueling vapors are captured by the EVAP canister, the vehicle's computer controlled purge system draws vapor out of the canister for the engine to burn. The vapor flow is metered by the purge solenoid so that there is no, or minimal impact on driveability or tailpipe emissions. As fuel starts to flow through the fuel fill tube, it opens the normally closed check valve and enters the fuel tank. Vapor or air is expelled from the tank through the control valve and on to the vapor canister. Vapor is absorbed in the EVAP canister until vapor flow in the lines stops. This stoppage occurs following fuel shut-off, or by having the fuel level in the tank rise high enough to close the control valve. This control valve contains a float that rises to seal the large diameter vent path to the EVAP canister. At this point in the refueling process, fuel tank pressure increases, the check valve closes (preventing liquid fuel from spiting back at the operator), and fuel then rises up the fuel filler tube to shut off the dispensing nozzle. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Exhaust Gas Recirculation > EGR Cooler > Component Information > Locations EGR Cooler: Locations Location The Exhaust Gas Recycling cooler is located above the exhaust manifold on the right side of the engine. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Exhaust Gas Recirculation > EGR Cooler > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description EGR Cooler: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The Exhaust Gas Recycling cooler is located above the exhaust manifold on the right side of the engine. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Exhaust Gas Recirculation > EGR Cooler > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 5013 EGR Cooler: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION Exhaust gas enter the rear portion of the EGR Cooler from the exhaust manifold. The gas is cooled as it passes through the EGR Cooler and then enters the EGR crossover tube and is routed to the EGR valve. Coolant enters the rear of the EGR Cooler and flow the same direction as the exhaust gases. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Exhaust Gas Recirculation > EGR Cooler > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures EGR Cooler: Procedures CLEANING 1. Remove EGR Cooler See: Removal and Replacement/EGR Cooler - Removal . 2. Spray the internal cavity of EGR Cooler with hot tap water for 10 minutes. 3. Plug EGR Cooler outlet (1) with a locally obtained rubber expansion plug to make a watertight seal. 4. Following instruction on the container, mix MOPAR(R) EGR System Cleaner and hot tap water with a ratio of one part EGR Cleaner, four parts water. 5. Position EGR Cooler with the outlet (1) facing up. Fill EGR Cooler with hot tap water and MOPAR(R) EGR System Cleaner until cooler is completely full. Soak for one hour. 6. Remove plug from EGR Cooler outlet (1). Drain cleaning solution from cooler. Discard according to local governmental regulations. 7. Rinse cooler using hot tap water until all cleaning solution has been rinsed clean. Dry completely. 8. Install EGR Cooler See: Removal and Replacement/EGR Cooler - Installation Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Exhaust Gas Recirculation > EGR Cooler > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 5016 EGR Cooler: Removal and Replacement P/U P/U WARNING: Locking constant tension hose clamps are used on the EGR cooler system hoses. When removing, use only tools designed for servicing this type of clamp. Always wear safety glasses when servicing locking constant tension clamps. 1. Remove engine cover (1). 2. Drain cooling system below level of EGR cooler See: Engine, Cooling and Exhaust/Cooling System/Service and Repair . 3. Disconnect EGR bypass control electrical connector (1). 4. Remove EGR bypass control assembly mounting bolts (2) and position aside. 5. Remove air transfer tube assembly heat shield. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Exhaust Gas Recirculation > EGR Cooler > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 5017 6. Loosen EGR valve mounting bolts. Do not remove bolts. 7. Remove EGR crossover tube to EGR cooler and EGR valve clamps (1 and 3). 8. Remove EGR crossover tube clamp (5). 9. Remove EGR crossover tube (2). 10. Remove clamp at front of EGR cooler. 11. Remove Air Transfer Tube assembly. 12. If damaged, separate Air Transfer Tube from Brace assembly. Discard gasket. EGR COOLER - 6.7L DIESEL - CAB-CHASSIS 13. Using Tool 6094, remove forward coolant tube (6) from EGR cooler (2). 14. Using Tool 6094, remove breather tube (7). 15. Using Tool 6094, remove rear coolant tube (8) from EGR cooler (2). 16. Remove EGR Transfer Connection Tube from casting. 17. Remove EGR cooler flange nuts (1). 18. Remove EGR cooler mount bolts. 19. Remove EGR cooler. Discard flange gasket. 20. If damaged, remove EGR cooler mounting support. Cab Chassis CAB CHASSIS Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Exhaust Gas Recirculation > EGR Cooler > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 5018 WARNING: Locking constant tension hose clamps are used on the EGR cooler system hoses. When removing, use only tools designed for servicing this type of clamp. Always wear safety glasses when servicing locking constant tension clamps. 1. Remove engine cover (1). 2. Drain cooling system below level of EGR cooler See: Engine, Cooling and Exhaust/Cooling System/Service and Repair . 3. Remove EGR heat shield. 4. Disconnect EGR temperature sensor electrical connector (4). 5. Loosen EGR valve mounting bolts. Do not remove. 6. Remove EGR crossover tube clamp (5). 7. Remove EGR crossover tube clamp (3). 8. Remove EGR crossover tube clamp (1 and 3). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Exhaust Gas Recirculation > EGR Cooler > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 5019 EGR COOLER - 6.7L DIESEL - CAB-CHASSIS 9. Using Tool 6094, remove forward coolant tube (6) from EGR cooler (2). 10. Using Tool 6094, remove breather tube (7). 11. Using Tool 6094, remove rear coolant tube (8) from EGR cooler (2). 12. Remove EGR Transfer Connection Tube from casting, (if equipped). 13. Remove EGR cooler flange nuts (1). 14. Remove EGR cooler mount bolts. 15. Remove EGR cooler. Discard flange gasket. 16. If damaged, remove EGR Cooler support bracket. P/U P/U EGR COOLER - 6.7L DIESEL Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Exhaust Gas Recirculation > EGR Cooler > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 5020 WARNING: Locking constant tension hose clamps are used on the EGR cooler system hoses. When removing or installing, use only tools designed for servicing this type of clamp. Always wear safety glasses when servicing locking constant tension clamps. 1. Install EGR cooler support bracket, if removed. Tighten mounting bolts to 32 Nm (24 ft. lbs.). 2. Using a new gasket, position EGR cooler (2) on exhaust manifold flange. Tighten flange nuts to 43 Nm (32 ft. lbs). 3. Install EGR Cooler mounting bolts. Using a criss-cross pattern, tighten bolts to 24 Nm (18 ft. lbs.). 4. If separated, using a new gasket, assemble brace and Air Transfer tube. Tighten bolts to 24 Nm (18 ft.lbs). 5. Using a new gasket, install Air Transfer Tube assembly on exhaust manifold. Tighten nuts to 43 Nm (32 ft.lbs). 6. Install clamp at EGR Cooler. Tighten clamp to 10 Nm (89 in. lbs.). 7. Using new gasket (5), position EGR crossover tube (4) to EGR Cooler. Install clamp (6) finger tight. 8. Using new gasket (2), position EGR crossover tube (4) to EGR Valve. Install clamp (1) finger tight. 9. Tighten clamps (1 and 6) to 10 Nm (89 in. lbs.). 10. Install brace bolt (3). Tighten bolt (3) to 24 Nm (18 ft. lbs.). 11. Tighten EGR Valve mounting bolts to 24 Nm (18 ft. lbs.) 12. Install EGR Valve heat shield. Tighten mounting nut to 10 Nm (89 in. lbs.). 13. Install Air Transfer Tube heat shield. Tighten bolt to 10 Nm (89 in. lbs.). 14. Install EGR Control Assembly so that wire cable restraint is tight. Tighten mounting bolts to 24 Nm (18 ft. lbs.). 15. Install EGR Control Assembly electrical connector (1). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Exhaust Gas Recirculation > EGR Cooler > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 5021 CAUTION: Locking constant tension clamps will SNAP when released. NOTE: Locking constant tension clamps can be released using a suitable screwdriver. 16. Position locking constant tension clamp (1) on froward coolant tube (4) and install tube. 17. Using a suitable screwdriver (3), release constant tension clamp (1). 18. Position locking constant tension clamp on rear coolant tube and install tube. 19. Using a suitable screwdriver, release constant tension clamp 20. Position locking constant tension clamp on breather tube and install tube. 21. Using a suitable screwdriver, release constant tension clamp. 22. Fill coolant system See: Engine, Cooling and Exhaust/Cooling System/Service and Repair . 23. Install engine cover. 24. Connect negative battery cable(s). 25. Start engine and check for coolant or exhaust leaks. Cab Chassis INSTALLATION - CAB CHASSIS EGR COOLER - 6.7L DIESEL - CAB-CHASSIS Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Exhaust Gas Recirculation > EGR Cooler > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 5022 WARNING: Locking constant tension hose clamps are used on the EGR cooler system hoses. When removing or installing, use only tools designed for servicing this type of clamp. Always wear safety glasses when servicing locking constant tension clamps. 1. Install EGR cooler support bracket, if removed. Tighten mounting bolts to 32 Nm (24 ft. lbs.). 2. Using a new gasket, position EGR cooler (2) on exhaust manifold flange. Tighten flange nuts to 43 Nm (32 ft. lbs). 3. Install EGR Cooler mounting bolts. Using a criss-cross pattern, tighten bolts to 24 Nm (18 ft. lbs.). CAUTION: Locking constant tension clamps will SNAP when released. NOTE: Locking constant tension clamps can be released using a suitable screwdriver. 4. Position locking constant tension clamp (1) on froward coolant tube (4) and install tube. 5. Using a suitable screwdriver (3), release constant tension clamp (1). 6. Position locking constant tension clamp on rear coolant tube and install tube. 7. Using a suitable screwdriver, release constant tension clamp 8. Position locking constant tension clamp on breather tube and install tube. 9. Using a suitable screwdriver, release constant tension clamp. 10. Using new gasket, position EGR crossover tube (2) to EGR Cooler. Install clamp (1) finger tight. 11. Using new gasket, position EGR crossover tube (2) to EGR Valve (3). Install clamp (1) finger tight. 12. Tighten clamps (1 and 3) to 10 Nm (89 in. lbs.). 13. Install clamp (5). Tighten clamp to 10 Nm (89 in. lbs.). 14. Tighten EGR Valve mounting bolts to 24 Nm (18 ft. lbs.) 15. Install EGR Valve heat shield. Tighten mounting nut to 10 Nm (89 in. lbs.). 16. Connect EGR valve electrical connector (4). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Exhaust Gas Recirculation > EGR Cooler > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 5023 17. Install engine cover (1). 18. Connect negative battery cable. 19. Fill cooling system See: Engine, Cooling and Exhaust/Cooling System/Service and Repair . Removal-Pick Up Models REMOVAL-PICK UP MODELS The EGR Cooler Bypass Valve Assembly (1) is mounted between the EGR crossover tube and the EGR cooler. Two mechanical cables (3) join the units together. An electrical drive servo (4) moves the cables (3) to operate a butterfly plate (2) within a cast manifold. Parts 1, 2, 3 and 4 are serviced as one entire assembly. Do not attempt to disassemble unit. 1. Disconnect and isolate both negative battery cables at both batteries. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Exhaust Gas Recirculation > EGR Cooler > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 5024 2. Remove four bolts (2) and remove EGR tube cover (1). 3. Loosen and remove two clamps (1) and (6) at ends of EGR Crossover Tube. 4. Remove clamp mounting bolt (3) at center of EGR Crossover Tube. 5. Remove EGR Crossover Tube (4). 6. Remove and discard gaskets (doughnuts) at each end of tube (2) and (5). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Exhaust Gas Recirculation > EGR Cooler > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 5025 7. Remove nuts (7) and remove upper heat shield (6). 8. Remove bolts (10), nut (8) and remove lower heat shield (9). 9. Remove bolts (5) and (14). 10. Separate casting (4) from casting (15) and discard gasket (3). 11. Disconnect electrical connector (1). 12. Remove bracket bolts (2) at outside of mounting bracket. 13. Remove bracket bolts at inside of mounting bracket. 14. Remove EGR cooler bypass valve assembly from engine. Installation-Pick Up Models INSTALLATION-PICK UP MODELS Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Exhaust Gas Recirculation > EGR Cooler > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 5026 1. Clean gasket mating surfaces on castings (4) and (15). 2. Position EGR cooler bypass valve assembly to engine. 3. Position new gasket (3) between castings (4) and (15). 4. Install bolts (5) and (14). Do not tighten these bolts at this time. 5. Install bracket bolts (2) at outside of mounting bracket. Do not tighten these bolts at this time. 6. Install bracket bolts at inside of mounting bracket. Do not tighten these bolts at this time. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Exhaust Gas Recirculation > EGR Cooler > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 5027 7. Tighten bolts (5) and (14) to 24 Nm (18 ft. lbs.) torque. 8. Tighten bracket bolts (2) at outside of mounting bracket to 24 Nm (18 ft. lbs.) torque. 9. Tighten bracket bolts at inside of mounting bracket to 24 Nm (18 ft. lbs.) torque. 10. Connect electrical connector (1). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Exhaust Gas Recirculation > EGR Cooler > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 5028 11. Clean each end of EGR crossover tube and its connection points of any old gasket material 12. Install new gaskets (doughnuts) (2) and (5) to each end of tube. 13. Position EGR crossover tube (4) to engine. 14. Position bolt (3) at center of EGR crossover tube. Install bolt loosely (finger tight). 15. First, tighten EGR tube clamp (1) to 10 Nm (7 ft. lbs.), then tighten clamp (6) to 10 Nm (7 ft. lbs.). 16. Tighten clamp bolt (3) to 10 Nm (7 ft. lbs.). 17. Install upper heat shield (6) and nuts (7). Tighten nuts to 24 Nm (18 ft. lbs.) torque. 18. Install lower heat shield (9), bolts (10), and nut (8). Tighten nut/bolts to 24 Nm (18 ft. lbs.) torque. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Exhaust Gas Recirculation > EGR Cooler > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 5029 19. Install EGR tube cover (1) and four bolts (2). 20. Connect and both negative battery cables to both batteries. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Exhaust Gas Recirculation > EGR Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Operation-Cab/Chassis Models EGR Temperature Sensor: Description and Operation Operation-Cab/Chassis Models OPERATION-CAB/CHASSIS MODELS The EGR Temperature Sensor (1) is located on the EGR crossover tube (6) near the EGR valve. The EGR temperature sensor is a negative temperature coefficient thermistor used to measure the temperature of the EGR gas flow after it exits the EGR cooler. The ECM (Engine Control Module) supplies 5-volts to the EGR temperature signal circuit. To determine the temperature of the EGR gas flow, the ECM monitors the change in voltage caused by changes in the resistance of the sensor. The ECM uses the exhaust gas recirculation temperature value for the engine protection system, and also for engine emissions control. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Exhaust Gas Recirculation > EGR Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Operation-Cab/Chassis Models > Page 5034 EGR Temperature Sensor: Description and Operation Operation-Pick Up Models OPERATION-PICK UP MODELS The EGR Temperature Sensor (1) is located on the intake manifold, below, and to the rear of the EGR valve (5). A temperature probe (1) is located at the end of the sensor assembly (3). The EGR temperature sensor is a negative temperature coefficient thermistor used to measure the temperature of the EGR gas flow after it exits the EGR cooler. The ECM (Engine Control Module) supplies 5-volts to the EGR temperature signal circuit. To determine the temperature of the EGR gas flow, the ECM monitors the change in voltage caused by changes in the resistance of the sensor. The ECM uses the exhaust gas recirculation temperature value for the engine protection system, and also for engine emissions control. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Exhaust Gas Recirculation > EGR Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal EGR Temperature Sensor: Service and Repair Removal Removal-Cab/Chassis Models REMOVAL-CAB/CHASSIS MODELS The EGR Temperature Sensor (1) is located on the EGR crossover tube (6) near EGR valve. 1. Disconnect electrical connector (2) at sensor. 2. Remove sensor (1) from EGR tube (6). Removal-Pick Up Models REMOVAL-PICK UP MODELS The EGR Temperature Sensor (1) is located on the intake manifold, below, and to the rear of the EGR valve (5). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Exhaust Gas Recirculation > EGR Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 5037 1. If equipped, remove four cover bolts (2) and remove EGR crossover tube cover (1). 2. If equipped, remove EGR valve cover (2). 3. A pigtail wiring harness connects sensor to engine wiring harness. 4. Unscrew nut (2) at intake manifold. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Exhaust Gas Recirculation > EGR Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 5038 5. Disconnect sensor pigtail harness electrical connector from engine wiring harness and remove sensor assembly. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Exhaust Gas Recirculation > EGR Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 5039 EGR Temperature Sensor: Service and Repair Installation Installation-Cab/Chassis Models INSTALLATION-CAB/CHASSIS MODELS The EGR Temperature Sensor (1) is located on the EGR crossover tube (6) near the EGR valve. 1. Clean EGR crossover tube at sensor mounting point. 2. Check condition of the sensors metal gasket and replace if necessary. 3. Install sensor (1) to EGR tube (6). Tighten to 18 Nm (13 ft. lbs.). 4. Connect electrical connector (2) to sensor. Installation-Pick Up Models INSTALLATION-PICK UP MODELS The EGR Temperature Sensor (1) is located on the intake manifold, below, and to the rear of the EGR valve (5). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Exhaust Gas Recirculation > EGR Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 5040 1. A pigtail wiring harness (3) connects the sensor to the engine wiring harness. 2. Position sensor probe (1) into intake manifold. 3. Screw and tighten nut (2) into intake manifold. 4. Connect electrical connector (4) to engine wiring harness. 5. Install EGR valve cover (2). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Exhaust Gas Recirculation > EGR Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 5041 6. Install EGR crossover tube cover (1) and four cover bolts (2). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Exhaust Gas Recirculation > EGR Tube > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal EGR Tube: Service and Repair Removal Removal-Cab/Chassis Models INSTALLATION-CAB/CHASSIS MODELS 1. Clean each end of EGR crossover tube, and its connection points of any old gasket material 2. Install new gaskets (doughnuts) to each end of tube. 3. Position EGR crossover tube (2) to engine. 4. Position "P" clamp (5) at center of EGR crossover tube. Install "P" clamp bolt loosely (finger tight). 5. First, tighten EGR tube clamp (1) to 10 Nm (7 ft. lbs.), then tighten clamp (3) to 10 Nm (7 ft. lbs.). 6. Tighten "P" clamp bolt (5) to 10 Nm (7 ft. lbs.). 7. Connect electrical connector (4) to EGR temperature sensor. 8. Install heat shield (2) over EGR valve (1). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Exhaust Gas Recirculation > EGR Tube > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 5046 9. Install cover (1) and four cover bolts (2). 10. Connect both negative battery cables to both batteries. Removal-Pick Up Models INSTALLATION-PICK UP MODELS 1. Clean each end of EGR crossover tube and its connection points of any old gasket material 2. Install new gaskets (doughnuts) (2) and (5) to each end of tube. 3. Position EGR crossover tube (4) to engine. 4. Position bolt (3) at center of EGR crossover tube. Install bolt loosely (finger tight). 5. First, tighten EGR tube clamp (1) to 10 Nm (7 ft. lbs.), then tighten clamp (6) to 10 Nm (7 ft. lbs.). 6. Tighten clamp bolt (3) to 10 Nm (7 ft. lbs.). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Exhaust Gas Recirculation > EGR Tube > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 5047 7. Install heat shield (2) over EGR valve (1). 8. Install cover (1) and four cover bolts (2). 9. Connect both negative battery cables to both batteries. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Exhaust Gas Recirculation > EGR Tube > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 5048 EGR Tube: Service and Repair Installation Installation-Cab/Chassis Models REMOVAL-CAB/CHASSIS MODELS 1. Disconnect and isolate both negative battery cables at batteries. 2. Remove four bolts (2) and EGR crossover tube cover (1). 3. Remove heat shield (2) over EGR valve (1). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Exhaust Gas Recirculation > EGR Tube > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 5049 4. Disconnect electrical connector (4) at EGR Temperature Sensor. 5. Loosen and remove two clamps (1) and (3) at ends of EGR Crossover Tube. 6. Remove "P" clamp mounting bolt (5) at center of EGR Crossover Tube. 7. Remove EGR Crossover Tube (2). 8. Remove and discard gaskets (doughnuts) at each end of tube. Installation-Pick Up Models REMOVAL-PICK UP MODELS 1. Disconnect and isolate both negative battery cables at batteries. 2. Remove four bolts (2) and EGR crossover tube cover (1). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Exhaust Gas Recirculation > EGR Tube > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 5050 3. Remove heat shield (2) over EGR valve (1). 4. Loosen and remove two clamps (1) and (6) at ends of EGR Crossover Tube. 5. Remove clamp mounting bolt (3) at center of EGR Crossover Tube. 6. Remove EGR Crossover Tube (4). 7. Remove and discard gaskets (doughnuts) at each end of tube (2) and (5). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Exhaust Gas Recirculation > EGR Valve > Component Information > Locations EGR Valve: Locations Component ID: 16 Component : ASSEMBLY-EGR VALVE Connector: Name : ASSEMBLY-EGR VALVE Color : # of pins : 8 Qualifier : (6.7L) Pin Circuit Description 1 F855 18PK/YL 5 VOLT SUPPLY 2 K687 18DB/LB EGR SIGNAL NO. 3 3 K685 18DB EGR SIGNAL NO. 2 4 K683 18DB/GY EGR SIGNAL NO. 1 5 K916 18BR/OR SENSOR GROUND 6 K686 18GY/DB EGR CONTROL NO. 3 7 K684 18DB/YL EGR CONTROL NO. 2 8 K682 18DB/WT EGR CONTROL NO. 1 Component Location - 11 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Exhaust Gas Recirculation > EGR Valve > Component Information > Locations > Page 5054 Connector: Name : ASSEMBLY-EGR VALVE Color : PINK # of pins : 8 Qualifier : (6.7L) Pin Circuit Description 1 F855 18PK/YL 5 VOLT SUPPLY 2 K687 18DB/LB EGR SIGNAL NO. 3 3 K685 18DB EGR SIGNAL NO. 2 4 K683 18DB/GY EGR SIGNAL NO. 1 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Exhaust Gas Recirculation > EGR Valve > Component Information > Locations > Page 5055 5 K916 18BR/OR SENSOR GROUND 6 K686 18GY/DB EGR CONTROL NO. 3 7 K684 18DB/YL EGR CONTROL NO. 2 8 K682 18DB/WT EGR CONTROL NO. 1 Component Location - 11 Connector: Name : ASSEMBLY-EGR VALVE Color : BLACK # of pins : 6 Qualifier : (GAS EXCEPT 5.7L HD) Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Exhaust Gas Recirculation > EGR Valve > Component Information > Locations > Page 5056 Pin Circuit Description 1 K34 20DB/LG EGR SIGNAL 2 F856 20YL/PK 5 VOLT SUPPLY 3 K900 20DB/DG SENSOR GROUND 4 Z335 20BK/WT GROUND 5-6 K35 20DB/VT EGR SOL CONTROL Component Location - 11 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Exhaust Gas Recirculation > EGR Valve > Component Information > Locations > Page 5057 EGR Valve: Diagrams Component ID: 16 Component : ASSEMBLY-EGR VALVE Connector: Name : ASSEMBLY-EGR VALVE Color : # of pins : 8 Qualifier : (6.7L) Pin Circuit Description 1 F855 18PK/YL 5 VOLT SUPPLY 2 K687 18DB/LB EGR SIGNAL NO. 3 3 K685 18DB EGR SIGNAL NO. 2 4 K683 18DB/GY EGR SIGNAL NO. 1 5 K916 18BR/OR SENSOR GROUND 6 K686 18GY/DB EGR CONTROL NO. 3 7 K684 18DB/YL EGR CONTROL NO. 2 8 K682 18DB/WT EGR CONTROL NO. 1 Component Location - 11 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Exhaust Gas Recirculation > EGR Valve > Component Information > Locations > Page 5058 Connector: Name : ASSEMBLY-EGR VALVE Color : PINK # of pins : 8 Qualifier : (6.7L) Pin Circuit Description 1 F855 18PK/YL 5 VOLT SUPPLY 2 K687 18DB/LB EGR SIGNAL NO. 3 3 K685 18DB EGR SIGNAL NO. 2 4 K683 18DB/GY EGR SIGNAL NO. 1 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Exhaust Gas Recirculation > EGR Valve > Component Information > Locations > Page 5059 5 K916 18BR/OR SENSOR GROUND 6 K686 18GY/DB EGR CONTROL NO. 3 7 K684 18DB/YL EGR CONTROL NO. 2 8 K682 18DB/WT EGR CONTROL NO. 1 Component Location - 11 Connector: Name : ASSEMBLY-EGR VALVE Color : BLACK # of pins : 6 Qualifier : (GAS EXCEPT 5.7L HD) Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Exhaust Gas Recirculation > EGR Valve > Component Information > Locations > Page 5060 Pin Circuit Description 1 K34 20DB/LG EGR SIGNAL 2 F856 20YL/PK 5 VOLT SUPPLY 3 K900 20DB/DG SENSOR GROUND 4 Z335 20BK/WT GROUND 5-6 K35 20DB/VT EGR SOL CONTROL Component Location - 11 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Exhaust Gas Recirculation > EGR Valve > Component Information > Service and Repair > EGR Valve - Removal EGR Valve: Service and Repair EGR Valve - Removal REMOVAL - 4.7L The electronic EGR valve and solenoid assembly (4) is attached to the rear of the left cylinder head. An exhaust gas routing tube (3) connects the EGR valve to the intake manifold. 1. Use a diagnostic scan tool to record any DTC's (Diagnostic Trouble Codes). 2. Disconnect and isolate the negative battery cable. 3. Remove electrical connector (5) at top of EGR valve solenoid. 4. Remove tube mounting bolt (1) at intake manifold. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Exhaust Gas Recirculation > EGR Valve > Component Information > Service and Repair > EGR Valve - Removal > Page 5063 5. Remove two bolts (4) connecting EGR tube (1) to valve assembly. 6. Remove gasket located between EGR tube flange and EGR valve assembly. 7. Remove two EGR valve mounting bolts (5). 8. Separate valve assembly (3) from engine. 9. Remove and discard metal gasket located between cylinder head and valve assembly. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Exhaust Gas Recirculation > EGR Valve > Component Information > Service and Repair > EGR Valve - Removal > Page 5064 EGR Valve: Service and Repair EGR Valve - Cleaning CLEANING 6.7L EGR VALVE CLEANING PROCEDURE 1. Remove EGR valve assembly from engine. 2. Remove four mounting screws (4) from EGR valve motor (3). 3. Remove valve motor (6) and shim (5) from EGR valve housing (1). Motor (6) and shim (5) must be kept for reassembly. The original EGR valve motor and its shim must be reinstalled onto the original EGR valve housing. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Exhaust Gas Recirculation > EGR Valve > Component Information > Service and Repair > EGR Valve - Removal > Page 5065 4. Use two fingers to press down on valve spring retainer (3) to unlock two valve keepers (2). If valve keepers will not release using finger pressure, locate a 5/8" deep socket to the spring retainer (3). Gently tap on the socket with a small hammer to release keepers, then use two fingers and press for keeper removal. 5. Remove valve spring retainer (3) and valve spring (2). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Exhaust Gas Recirculation > EGR Valve > Component Information > Service and Repair > EGR Valve - Removal > Page 5066 6. Lightly press on valve stem (1) about 3/8" to force valve faces from valve seats. 7. Using a small nylon scrubbing brush, lightly brush away loose soot from EGR valve housing. 8. The EGR valve shaft stem (3) is comprised of two valve faces (1) on two valve seats. Using the same small nylon scrubbing brush, lightly brush away loose soot from stem (3), valve seat (2) and also from valve seat on EGR valve housing. 9. Completely submerge valve housing using a mixture of hot tap water and MOPAR(R) EGR System Cleaner (ESC). Mix cleaning solution 1 part Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Exhaust Gas Recirculation > EGR Valve > Component Information > Service and Repair > EGR Valve - Removal > Page 5067 ESC and 4 parts water. Allow cleaning solution to soak for 1 hour. 10. Remove assembly from cleaning solution. Completely remove remaining soot from valve stems, both valve seats, and both valve faces using a small nylon scrubbing brush. Dispose of cleaning solution per local governmental regulations. 11. Rinse EGR valve housing in hot tap water until all cleaning solution is rinsed clean. Dry completely. 12. Assemble valve spring (2) and retainer (3) to housing. 13. Position valve keepers (2). Press down on retainer (3) until groves on valve keepers lock into valve stem (1). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Exhaust Gas Recirculation > EGR Valve > Component Information > Service and Repair > EGR Valve - Removal > Page 5068 14. Install original shim (5) and original motor (6) to housing. Motor is not indexed. Rotate motor until its electrical connector is pointed towards front of vehicle. Install four mounting screws (7). 15. Install EGR valve assembly to engine. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Exhaust Gas Recirculation > EGR Valve > Component Information > Service and Repair > EGR Valve - Removal > Page 5069 EGR Valve: Service and Repair EGR Valve - Installation INSTALLATION - 4.7L 1. Clean area at rear of left cylinder head where it joins base of EGR valve. 2. Clean EGR tube where it joins EGR valve. 3. Position new gasket between EGR valve and cylinder head. 4. Position EGR valve to cylinder head. Install and tighten two bolts (5). Torque to 9 Nm (80 in. lbs.). 5. Position new gasket between EGR tube flange and EGR valve assembly. 6. Position EGR tube (1) to side of EGR valve and into intake manifold. Install two bolts (4) finger tight (temporarily). 7. Install EGR tube flange bolt (1) at intake manifold. Torque to 11 Nm (8.5 ft. lbs.). 8. Connect electrical connector (5) to top of EGR valve solenoid (4). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Exhaust Gas Recirculation > EGR Valve > Component Information > Service and Repair > EGR Valve - Removal > Page 5070 9. Do a final tightening of two EGR tube bolts (4). Torque to 11 Nm (8.5 ft. lbs.). 10. Connect negative battery cable. 11. Using a diagnostic scan tool, erase any previously recorded DTC's (Diagnostic Trouble Codes). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Exhaust Gas Recirculation > EGR Valve > Component Information > Service and Repair > EGR Valve - Removal > Page 5071 EGR Valve: Service and Repair EGR Valve Air Flow Control Removal REMOVAL The EGR Air Flow Control Valve (5) is bolted to the end of the air intake connection (2). 1. Remove clamp for charge air cooler duct at point (5). Disconnect air cooler duct at this point. 2. Disconnect electrical connector at point (2). This point is located at bottom/inside of air control valve (1). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Exhaust Gas Recirculation > EGR Valve > Component Information > Service and Repair > EGR Valve - Removal > Page 5072 3. Remove four mounting bolts (4) and (6) and remove air flow control valve (5). 4. Remove gasket (3) and discard. Installation INSTALLATION The EGR Air Flow Control Valve (5) is bolted to the end of the air intake connection (2). 1. Obtain new gasket (3). Before positioning new gasket (3), be sure to clean mating surfaces at top of air flow control valve and bottom of air intake connection (2). 2. Install four mounting bolts (4) and (6). Tighten four bolts to 18 Nm (13 ft. lbs.) (160 in. lbs.) torque. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Exhaust Gas Recirculation > EGR Valve > Component Information > Service and Repair > EGR Valve - Removal > Page 5073 3. Connect electrical connector at point (2). 4. Connect air cooler duct to bottom of air flow control valve. Install and tighten duct clamp Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Exhaust Gas Recirculation > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL 1. Disconnect exhaust gas pressure sensor electrical connector (1). 2. Using a 6 point deepwell socket, remove exhaust gas sensor (2). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Exhaust Gas Recirculation > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 5078 Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION 1. Using a 6 point deepwell socket, install exhaust gas pressure sensor. 2. Tighten sensor to 18 Nm (13 ft. lbs.). 3. Connect exhaust gas pressure sensor electrical connector (3). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Positive Crankcase Ventilation > Positive Crankcase Ventilation Valve > Component Information > Locations Positive Crankcase Ventilation Valve: Locations REMOVAL - 4.7L V-8 The PCV valve (2) is mounted into the top/rear of the left valve cover. 1. Disconnect plastic line (1) from end of PCV valve. 2. Use a small screwdriver to disengage PCV valve from valve cover. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Positive Crankcase Ventilation > Positive Crankcase Ventilation Valve > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Positive Crankcase Ventilation Valve: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL - 4.7L V-8 The PCV valve (2) is mounted into the top/rear of the left valve cover. 1. Disconnect plastic line (1) from end of PCV valve. 2. Use a small screwdriver to disengage PCV valve from valve cover. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Positive Crankcase Ventilation > Positive Crankcase Ventilation Valve > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 5085 Positive Crankcase Ventilation Valve: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION - 4.7L V-8 1. Clean out PCV valve opening at valve cover. 2. Check condition of PCV valve o-ring. 3. Apply engine oil to o-ring. 4. Place PCV valve (2) into valve cover. 5. Attach plastic line (1) to valve. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches - Emission Control Systems > EGR Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Operation-Cab/Chassis Models EGR Temperature Sensor: Description and Operation Operation-Cab/Chassis Models OPERATION-CAB/CHASSIS MODELS The EGR Temperature Sensor (1) is located on the EGR crossover tube (6) near the EGR valve. The EGR temperature sensor is a negative temperature coefficient thermistor used to measure the temperature of the EGR gas flow after it exits the EGR cooler. The ECM (Engine Control Module) supplies 5-volts to the EGR temperature signal circuit. To determine the temperature of the EGR gas flow, the ECM monitors the change in voltage caused by changes in the resistance of the sensor. The ECM uses the exhaust gas recirculation temperature value for the engine protection system, and also for engine emissions control. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches - Emission Control Systems > EGR Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Operation-Cab/Chassis Models > Page 5091 EGR Temperature Sensor: Description and Operation Operation-Pick Up Models OPERATION-PICK UP MODELS The EGR Temperature Sensor (1) is located on the intake manifold, below, and to the rear of the EGR valve (5). A temperature probe (1) is located at the end of the sensor assembly (3). The EGR temperature sensor is a negative temperature coefficient thermistor used to measure the temperature of the EGR gas flow after it exits the EGR cooler. The ECM (Engine Control Module) supplies 5-volts to the EGR temperature signal circuit. To determine the temperature of the EGR gas flow, the ECM monitors the change in voltage caused by changes in the resistance of the sensor. The ECM uses the exhaust gas recirculation temperature value for the engine protection system, and also for engine emissions control. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches - Emission Control Systems > EGR Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal EGR Temperature Sensor: Service and Repair Removal Removal-Cab/Chassis Models REMOVAL-CAB/CHASSIS MODELS The EGR Temperature Sensor (1) is located on the EGR crossover tube (6) near EGR valve. 1. Disconnect electrical connector (2) at sensor. 2. Remove sensor (1) from EGR tube (6). Removal-Pick Up Models REMOVAL-PICK UP MODELS The EGR Temperature Sensor (1) is located on the intake manifold, below, and to the rear of the EGR valve (5). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches - Emission Control Systems > EGR Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 5094 1. If equipped, remove four cover bolts (2) and remove EGR crossover tube cover (1). 2. If equipped, remove EGR valve cover (2). 3. A pigtail wiring harness connects sensor to engine wiring harness. 4. Unscrew nut (2) at intake manifold. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches - Emission Control Systems > EGR Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 5095 5. Disconnect sensor pigtail harness electrical connector from engine wiring harness and remove sensor assembly. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches - Emission Control Systems > EGR Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 5096 EGR Temperature Sensor: Service and Repair Installation Installation-Cab/Chassis Models INSTALLATION-CAB/CHASSIS MODELS The EGR Temperature Sensor (1) is located on the EGR crossover tube (6) near the EGR valve. 1. Clean EGR crossover tube at sensor mounting point. 2. Check condition of the sensors metal gasket and replace if necessary. 3. Install sensor (1) to EGR tube (6). Tighten to 18 Nm (13 ft. lbs.). 4. Connect electrical connector (2) to sensor. Installation-Pick Up Models INSTALLATION-PICK UP MODELS The EGR Temperature Sensor (1) is located on the intake manifold, below, and to the rear of the EGR valve (5). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches - Emission Control Systems > EGR Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 5097 1. A pigtail wiring harness (3) connects the sensor to the engine wiring harness. 2. Position sensor probe (1) into intake manifold. 3. Screw and tighten nut (2) into intake manifold. 4. Connect electrical connector (4) to engine wiring harness. 5. Install EGR valve cover (2). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches - Emission Control Systems > EGR Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 5098 6. Install EGR crossover tube cover (1) and four cover bolts (2). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches - Emission Control Systems > Exhaust Pressure Differential Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Exhaust Pressure Differential Sensor: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL 1. Raise and support vehicle. 2. Disconnect electrical connector. 3. Disconnect hoses at pressure differential pressure sensor. 4. Remove mounting bolt and differential pressure sensor. 5. Remove mounting bolts (1). PRESSURE DIFFERENTIAL TUBING Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches - Emission Control Systems > Exhaust Pressure Differential Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 5103 6. Remove pressure differential pressure tubing. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches - Emission Control Systems > Exhaust Pressure Differential Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 5104 Exhaust Pressure Differential Sensor: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION PRESSURE DIFFERENTIAL TUBING 1. Install differential pressure tubing, if removed. Tighten fittings to 30 Nm (22 ft. lbs.). 2. Position differential pressure sensor (1). 3. Install mounting nuts (5) and bolts. Tighten to 10 Nm (89 in. lbs.). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches - Emission Control Systems > Exhaust Pressure Differential Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 5105 NOTE: Make sure there is not a dip in the pressure differential hoses. 4. Install hose (2) to the rear DPF tubing. 5. Install hose (3) to the front DPF tubing. 6. Connect electrical connector (6). 7. Lower vehicle. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches - Emission Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL 1. Disconnect exhaust gas pressure sensor electrical connector (1). 2. Using a 6 point deepwell socket, remove exhaust gas sensor (2). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches - Emission Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 5110 Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION 1. Using a 6 point deepwell socket, install exhaust gas pressure sensor. 2. Tighten sensor to 18 Nm (13 ft. lbs.). 3. Connect exhaust gas pressure sensor electrical connector (3). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pressure > System Information > Specifications Fuel Pressure: Specifications FUEL SYSTEM PRESSURE 58 psi +/- 2 psi Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pressure > System Information > Specifications > Page 5115 Fuel Pressure: Testing and Inspection *FUEL PRESSURE LEAK DOWN For a complete wiring diagram Refer to Diagrams/Electrical. Diagnostic Test 1. FUEL PUMP MODULE NOTE: Before continuing visually and physically inspect the fuel delivery system for external leaks or damage. Repair/replace as necessary. WARNING: The fuel system is under a constant pressure (even with the engine off). Before testing or servicing any fuel system hose, fitting or line, the fuel system pressure must be released. Failure to follow these instructions can result in personal injury or death. Turn the ignition off. Install special tool #6539 (5/16") or #6631 (3/8") fuel line adapter. Install the fuel pressure gauge. Start the engine and allow the fuel system to reach maximum pressure. Turn the ignition off. NOTE: Fuel specification is 407 KPa +/- 34 KPa (59 psi +/- 5 psi). Using special tool #C4390, Hose Clamp Pliers, pinch the rubber fuel line between the fuel pressure gauge and the engine. Monitor the fuel pressure gauge for a minimum of 5 minutes. NOTE: The pressure should not fall below 241 KPa (35 psi) Does the fuel pressure drop? Yes - Replace Fuel Pump Module. - Perform the POWERTRAIN VERIFICATION TEST. See: Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code Tests and Associated Procedures/Verification Tests/Powertrain Verification Test No - Go To 2 2. FUEL INJECTOR(S) WARNING: The fuel system is under a constant pressure (even with the engine off). Before testing or servicing any fuel system hose, fitting or line, the fuel system pressure must be released. Failure to follow these instructions can result in personal injury or death. Remove special tool #C4390. Start the engine and allow the fuel system to reach maximum pressure. Turn the ignition off. NOTE: Fuel specification is 407 KPa +/- 34 KPa (59 psi +/- 5 psi). Move special tool #C4390, Hose Clamp Pliers, from between the fuel pressure gauge and the engine to between the fuel pressure gauge and fuel pump module. Monitor the fuel pressure gauge for a minimum of 5 minutes. NOTE: The pressure should not fall below 241 KPa (35 psi) Does the fuel pressure drop? Yes - Replace the leaking fuel injectors. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pressure > System Information > Specifications > Page 5116 - Perform the POWERTRAIN VERIFICATION TEST. See: Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code Tests and Associated Procedures/Verification Tests/Powertrain Verification Test No - Test Complete. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pressure Release > System Information > Service and Repair Fuel Pressure Release: Service and Repair STANDARD PROCEDURE - FUEL SYSTEM PRESSURE RELEASE Use following procedure if the fuel injector rail is, or is not equipped with a fuel pressure test port. A separate fuel pump relay is no longer used. A circuit within the TIPM (Totally Integrated Power Module) is used to control the electric fuel pump located within the fuel pump module. The TIPM (1) is located in the engine compartment in front of the battery. 1. Remove fuel fill cap. 2. On bottom of vehicle, disconnect fuel pump module electrical connector. This can be accomplished at either of the two connectors (1) or (2). 3. Start and run engine until it stalls. 4. Attempt restarting engine until it will no longer run. 5. Turn ignition key to OFF position. 6. Place a rag or towel below fuel line quick-connect fitting at fuel rail. 7. Disconnect quick-connect fitting at fuel rail. 8. Reconnect fuel pump module electrical connector on bottom of vehicle. 9. One or more Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTC's) may have been stored in PCM memory due to disconnecting fuel pump module circuit. A diagnostic scan tool must be used to erase a DTC. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Idle Speed > System Information > Specifications Idle Speed: Specifications Idle Speed Information Not Supplied by the Manufacturer Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Accelerator Pedal > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Accelerator Pedal: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL The following procedure applies only to vehicles without the Adjustable Pedal Package (code XAP). The accelerator pedal is serviced as a complete assembly including the bracket. The accelerator cable is connected to the upper part of the accelerator pedal arm by a plastic retainer (clip) (2). This plastic retainer snaps into the top of the accelerator pedal arm. 1. From inside the vehicle, hold up accelerator pedal. Remove plastic cable retainer (clip) and throttle cable core wire from upper end of accelerator pedal arm. Plastic cable retainer (clip) snaps into pedal arm. 2. Remove 2 accelerator pedal mounting bracket nuts. Remove accelerator pedal assembly. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Accelerator Pedal > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 5127 Accelerator Pedal: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION 1. Place accelerator pedal assembly over 2 studs. 2. Install and tighten 2 mounting nuts. 3. Slide throttle cable into opening slot in top of pedal arm. 4. Push plastic cable retainer (clip) into accelerator pedal arm opening until it snaps into place. 5. Before starting engine, operate accelerator pedal to check for any binding. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Locations Component ID: 401 Component : SENSOR-ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION Connector: Name : SENSOR-ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION Color : BLACK # of pins : 6 Pin Circuit Description 1 F855 20PK/YL 5 VOLT SUPPLY Pin Circuit Description 1 K852 20BR/LB 5 VOLT SUPPLY Pin Circuit Description 1 K852 20BR/VT 5 VOLT SUPPLY 2 K23 20BR/WT APPS NO. 1 SIGNAL 3 K167 20BR/YL APPS NO. 1 RETURN 3 K167 20BR/DG APPS NO. 1 RETURN 4 K400 20BR/VT APPS NO. 2 RETURN 5 K29 20WT/BR APPS NO. 2 SIGNAL 6 F856 20YL/PK 5 VOLT SUPPLY 6 K854 20VT/BR 5 VOLT SUPPLY Component Location - 31 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 5131 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 5132 Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Diagrams Component ID: 401 Component : SENSOR-ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION Connector: Name : SENSOR-ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION Color : BLACK # of pins : 6 Pin Circuit Description 1 F855 20PK/YL 5 VOLT SUPPLY Pin Circuit Description 1 K852 20BR/LB 5 VOLT SUPPLY Pin Circuit Description 1 K852 20BR/VT 5 VOLT SUPPLY 2 K23 20BR/WT APPS NO. 1 SIGNAL 3 K167 20BR/YL APPS NO. 1 RETURN 3 K167 20BR/DG APPS NO. 1 RETURN 4 K400 20BR/VT APPS NO. 2 RETURN 5 K29 20WT/BR APPS NO. 2 SIGNAL 6 F856 20YL/PK 5 VOLT SUPPLY 6 K854 20VT/BR 5 VOLT SUPPLY Component Location - 31 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 5133 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor (APPS) (1) is located inside the vehicle. It is attached to the accelerator pedal assembly (3). It is used only with 3.7L V-6 and 5.7L V-8 gas engines, and also with diesel engines. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 5136 Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor (APPS) provides the Powertrain Control Module (PCM) with two DC voltage signals which change as the position of the accelerator pedal changes. One of the DC voltage signals will be half the voltage of the other signal. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL CAUTION: Do not attempt to separate or remove the Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor (APPS) from the accelerator pedal assembly. The APPS is replaced as an assembly along with the pedal. If sensor is removed from pedal, its electronic calibration may be destroyed. 1. Disconnect 6-way electrical connector at top of APPS (2). 2. Remove APPS lower mounting bolt (4) and two mounting nuts. 3. Remove pedal and APPS assembly from vehicle. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 5139 Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION CAUTION: Do not attempt to separate or remove the Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor (APPS) from the accelerator pedal assembly. The APPS is replaced as an assembly along with the pedal. If sensor is removed from pedal, its electronic calibration may be destroyed. 1. Position pedal and APPS assembly to its mounting bracket. 2. Connect 6-way electrical connector to top of APPS (2). 3. Install APPS lower mounting bolt (4) and two mounting nuts. 4. If necessary, use a Scan Tool to erase any Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTC's). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Cleaner Housing > Air Filter Element > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Air Filter Element: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL 1. Loosen clamp (1) and disconnect air duct (2) at air cleaner cover (3). 2. Pry over 4 spring clips (5) from housing cover (3). 3. Release housing cover (3) from locating tabs on housing and remove cover. 4. Remove air cleaner element (filter) from housing. 5. Clean inside of housing before replacing element. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Cleaner Housing > Air Filter Element > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 5145 Air Filter Element: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION 1. Install filter element into housing. 2. Position housing cover (3) into housing locating tabs. 3. Pry up 4 spring clips (5) and lock cover to housing. 4. Install air duct (2) to air cleaner cover (3) and tighten hose clamp (1) to 3 Nm (30 in. lbs.). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Filler Cap > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Fuel Filler Cap: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The plastic fuel tank filler tube cap is threaded onto the end of the fuel fill tube. Certain models are equipped with a 1/4 turn cap. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Filler Cap > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 5150 Fuel Filler Cap: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The loss of any fuel or vapor out of fuel filler tube is prevented by the use of a pressure-vacuum fuel fill cap. Relief valves inside the cap will release fuel tank pressure at predetermined pressures. Fuel tank vacuum will also be released at predetermined values. This cap must be replaced by a similar unit if replacement is necessary. This is in order for the system to remain effective. CAUTION: Remove fill cap before servicing any fuel system component to relieve tank pressure. If equipped with an ORVR system and an ESIM switch, the cap must be tightened securely. If cap is left loose, a Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) may be set. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Filler Cap Warning Indicator > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Fuel Filler Cap Warning Indicator: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION A gas cap indicator is standard equipment on all instrument clusters. However, on vehicles equipped with the optional diesel engine, this indicator is electronically disabled. The gas cap indication appears within the odometer Vacuum Fluorescent Display (VFD) unit. The gas cap indicator consists of a textual gASCAP message which appears in place of the odometer/trip odometer information in the display. The odometer VFD is soldered onto the cluster electronic circuit board, and is visible through a window with a smoked clear lens located on the lower edge of the speedometer gauge dial face of the cluster overlay. The dark lens over the VFD prevents it from being clearly visible when it is not illuminated. The gas cap textual message appears in the same blue-green color and at the same lighting level as the odometer/trip odometer information when it is illuminated by the instrument cluster electronic circuit board. The gas cap indicator is serviced as a unit with the VFD in the instrument cluster. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Filler Cap Warning Indicator > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 5155 Fuel Filler Cap Warning Indicator: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The gas cap indicator gives an indication to the vehicle operator when there is a gross leak detected in the on-board fuel vapor recovery system. This indicator is controlled by the instrument cluster logic circuit based upon cluster programming and electronic messages received over the Controller Area Network (CAN) data bus from the Powertrain Control Module (PCM). The gas cap indicator function of the odometer Vacuum Fluorescent Display (VFD) unit is completely controlled by the instrument cluster logic circuit, and that logic will only allow this indicator to operate when the instrument cluster receives a battery current input on the fused ignition switch output (run-start) circuit. Therefore, the VFD gas cap indication will always be OFF when the ignition switch is in any position except ON or START. The instrument cluster will turn ON the gas cap indicator for the following reasons: - Gas Cap Indicator Lamp-On Message - Each time the cluster receives an electronic gas cap indicator lamp-ON message from the PCM indicating there is a gross leak in the vapor recovery system, the gas cap indicator will be illuminated. If the ignition switch is in the ON position and the vehicle is not moving when the message is received, the VFD will repeatedly and sequentially cycle the gas cap indication in two second intervals with the odometer/trip odometer information and any other active textual warnings. If the vehicle is moving, or once the cluster of a non-moving vehicle receives an electronic vehicle speed message from the PCM indicating a speed greater than zero, the warning sequence will consist of three complete display cycles with an audible single chime tone accompanying each cycle, then revert to only the visual gas cap indication and odometer/trip odometer display cycling until the cluster receives a message indicating there is no gross leak in the vapor recovery system, or until the ignition switch is turned to the OFF position, whichever occurs first. The VFD can be reverted to the odometer display and any currently displayed textual messages suspended by momentarily depressing and releasing the odometer/trip odometer reset switch button on the front of the cluster. The PCM continually monitors the on board vapor recovery system to determine whether there are air leaks in the system. The PCM then sends the proper electronic messages to the ElectroMechanical Instrument Cluster (EMIC) (also known as the Cab Compartment Node/CCN). If the EMIC turns ON the gas cap indicator due to a monitored gross leak in the vapor recovery system, it may indicate that the gas cap has been removed or is improperly installed. For proper diagnosis of the on board vapor recovery system, the PCM, the EMIC, the CAN data bus or the electronic communication related to gas cap indicator operation a diagnostic scan tool is required. Refer to the appropriate diagnostic information. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Filter > Fuel Pressure Release > System Information > Service and Repair Fuel Pressure Release: Service and Repair STANDARD PROCEDURE - FUEL SYSTEM PRESSURE RELEASE Use following procedure if the fuel injector rail is, or is not equipped with a fuel pressure test port. A separate fuel pump relay is no longer used. A circuit within the TIPM (Totally Integrated Power Module) is used to control the electric fuel pump located within the fuel pump module. The TIPM (1) is located in the engine compartment in front of the battery. 1. Remove fuel fill cap. 2. On bottom of vehicle, disconnect fuel pump module electrical connector. This can be accomplished at either of the two connectors (1) or (2). 3. Start and run engine until it stalls. 4. Attempt restarting engine until it will no longer run. 5. Turn ignition key to OFF position. 6. Place a rag or towel below fuel line quick-connect fitting at fuel rail. 7. Disconnect quick-connect fitting at fuel rail. 8. Reconnect fuel pump module electrical connector on bottom of vehicle. 9. One or more Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTC's) may have been stored in PCM memory due to disconnecting fuel pump module circuit. A diagnostic scan tool must be used to erase a DTC. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Locations > Injector-Fuel 1 Fuel Injector: Locations Injector-Fuel 1 Component ID: 148 Component : INJECTOR-FUEL 1 Connector: Name : INJECTOR-FUEL 1 Color : # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (DIESEL) Gender : MALE Pin Circuit Description 1 K227 14BK INJECTOR HIGH SIDE DRIVER-BANK 1 Pin Circuit Description 1 K611 14BK INJECTOR HIGH SIDE DRIVER NO. 1 2 K11 14BK INJECTOR CONTROL NO. 1 Component Location - 8 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Locations > Injector-Fuel 1 > Page 5164 Component Location - 9 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Locations > Injector-Fuel 1 > Page 5165 Component Location - 15 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Locations > Injector-Fuel 1 > Page 5166 Connector: Name : INJECTOR-FUEL 1 Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (NGC) Pin Circuit Description 1 K11 18BR/YL INJECTOR CONTROL NO. 1 2 K342 16BR/WT ASD CONTROL OUTPUT Component Location - 8 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Locations > Injector-Fuel 1 > Page 5167 Component Location - 9 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Locations > Injector-Fuel 1 > Page 5168 Component Location - 15 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Locations > Injector-Fuel 1 > Page 5169 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Locations > Injector-Fuel 1 > Page 5170 Fuel Injector: Locations Injector-Fuel 2 Component ID: 149 Component : INJECTOR-FUEL 2 Connector: Name : INJECTOR-FUEL 2 Color : # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (DIESEL) Gender : MALE Pin Circuit Description 1 K227 14BK INJECTOR HIGH SIDE DRIVER-BANK 1 Pin Circuit Description 1 K612 14BK INJECTOR HIGH SIDE DRIVER NO. 2 2 K12 14BK INJECTOR CONTROL NO. 2 Component Location - 5 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Locations > Injector-Fuel 1 > Page 5171 Component Location - 11 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Locations > Injector-Fuel 1 > Page 5172 Component Location - 15 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Locations > Injector-Fuel 1 > Page 5173 Connector: Name : INJECTOR-FUEL 2 Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (NGC) Pin Circuit Description 1 K12 18BR/DB INJECTOR CONTROL NO. 2 2 K342 16BR/WT ASD CONTROL OUTPUT Component Location - 5 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Locations > Injector-Fuel 1 > Page 5174 Component Location - 11 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Locations > Injector-Fuel 1 > Page 5175 Component Location - 15 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Locations > Injector-Fuel 1 > Page 5176 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Locations > Injector-Fuel 1 > Page 5177 Fuel Injector: Locations Injector-Fuel 3 Component ID: 150 Component : INJECTOR-FUEL 3 Connector: Name : INJECTOR-FUEL 3 Color : # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (DIESEL) Gender : MALE Pin Circuit Description 1 K227 14BK INJECTOR HIGH SIDE DRIVER-BANK 1 Pin Circuit Description 1 K613 14BK INJECTOR HIGH SIDE DRIVER NO. 3 2 K13 14BK INJECTOR CONTROL NO. 3 Component Location - 8 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Locations > Injector-Fuel 1 > Page 5178 Component Location - 9 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Locations > Injector-Fuel 1 > Page 5179 Component Location - 15 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Locations > Injector-Fuel 1 > Page 5180 Connector: Name : INJECTOR-FUEL 3 Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (NGC) Pin Circuit Description 1 K13 18BR/LB INJECTOR CONTROL NO. 3 2 K342 16BR/WT ASD CONTROL OUTPUT Component Location - 8 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Locations > Injector-Fuel 1 > Page 5181 Component Location - 9 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Locations > Injector-Fuel 1 > Page 5182 Component Location - 15 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Locations > Injector-Fuel 1 > Page 5183 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Locations > Injector-Fuel 1 > Page 5184 Fuel Injector: Locations Injector-Fuel 4 Component ID: 151 Component : INJECTOR-FUEL 4 Connector: Name : INJECTOR-FUEL 4 Color : # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (DIESEL) Gender : MALE Pin Circuit Description 1 K229 14BK INJECTOR HIGH SIDE DRIVER-BANK 2 Pin Circuit Description 1 K614 14BK INJECTOR HIGH SIDE DRIVER NO. 4 2 K14 14BK INJECTOR CONTROL NO. 4 Component Location - 5 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Locations > Injector-Fuel 1 > Page 5185 Component Location - 11 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Locations > Injector-Fuel 1 > Page 5186 Component Location - 15 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Locations > Injector-Fuel 1 > Page 5187 Connector: Name : INJECTOR-FUEL 4 Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (NGC) Pin Circuit Description 1 K14 18BR/TN INJECTOR CONTROL NO. 4 2 K342 16BR/WT ASD CONTROL OUTPUT Component Location - 5 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Locations > Injector-Fuel 1 > Page 5188 Component Location - 11 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Locations > Injector-Fuel 1 > Page 5189 Component Location - 15 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Locations > Injector-Fuel 1 > Page 5190 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Locations > Injector-Fuel 1 > Page 5191 Fuel Injector: Locations Injector-Fuel 1 Component ID: 148 Component : INJECTOR-FUEL 1 Connector: Name : INJECTOR-FUEL 1 Color : # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (DIESEL) Gender : MALE Pin Circuit Description 1 K227 14BK INJECTOR HIGH SIDE DRIVER-BANK 1 Pin Circuit Description 1 K611 14BK INJECTOR HIGH SIDE DRIVER NO. 1 2 K11 14BK INJECTOR CONTROL NO. 1 Component Location - 8 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Locations > Injector-Fuel 1 > Page 5192 Component Location - 9 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Locations > Injector-Fuel 1 > Page 5193 Component Location - 15 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Locations > Injector-Fuel 1 > Page 5194 Connector: Name : INJECTOR-FUEL 1 Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (NGC) Pin Circuit Description 1 K11 18BR/YL INJECTOR CONTROL NO. 1 2 K342 16BR/WT ASD CONTROL OUTPUT Component Location - 8 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Locations > Injector-Fuel 1 > Page 5195 Component Location - 9 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Locations > Injector-Fuel 1 > Page 5196 Component Location - 15 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Locations > Injector-Fuel 1 > Page 5197 Injector-Fuel 2 Component ID: 149 Component : INJECTOR-FUEL 2 Connector: Name : INJECTOR-FUEL 2 Color : # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (DIESEL) Gender : MALE Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Locations > Injector-Fuel 1 > Page 5198 Pin Circuit Description 1 K227 14BK INJECTOR HIGH SIDE DRIVER-BANK 1 Pin Circuit Description 1 K612 14BK INJECTOR HIGH SIDE DRIVER NO. 2 2 K12 14BK INJECTOR CONTROL NO. 2 Component Location - 5 Component Location - 11 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Locations > Injector-Fuel 1 > Page 5199 Component Location - 15 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Locations > Injector-Fuel 1 > Page 5200 Connector: Name : INJECTOR-FUEL 2 Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (NGC) Pin Circuit Description 1 K12 18BR/DB INJECTOR CONTROL NO. 2 2 K342 16BR/WT ASD CONTROL OUTPUT Component Location - 5 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Locations > Injector-Fuel 1 > Page 5201 Component Location - 11 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Locations > Injector-Fuel 1 > Page 5202 Component Location - 15 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Locations > Injector-Fuel 1 > Page 5203 Injector-Fuel 3 Component ID: 150 Component : INJECTOR-FUEL 3 Connector: Name : INJECTOR-FUEL 3 Color : # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (DIESEL) Gender : MALE Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Locations > Injector-Fuel 1 > Page 5204 Pin Circuit Description 1 K227 14BK INJECTOR HIGH SIDE DRIVER-BANK 1 Pin Circuit Description 1 K613 14BK INJECTOR HIGH SIDE DRIVER NO. 3 2 K13 14BK INJECTOR CONTROL NO. 3 Component Location - 8 Component Location - 9 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Locations > Injector-Fuel 1 > Page 5205 Component Location - 15 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Locations > Injector-Fuel 1 > Page 5206 Connector: Name : INJECTOR-FUEL 3 Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (NGC) Pin Circuit Description 1 K13 18BR/LB INJECTOR CONTROL NO. 3 2 K342 16BR/WT ASD CONTROL OUTPUT Component Location - 8 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Locations > Injector-Fuel 1 > Page 5207 Component Location - 9 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Locations > Injector-Fuel 1 > Page 5208 Component Location - 15 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Locations > Injector-Fuel 1 > Page 5209 Injector-Fuel 4 Component ID: 151 Component : INJECTOR-FUEL 4 Connector: Name : INJECTOR-FUEL 4 Color : # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (DIESEL) Gender : MALE Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Locations > Injector-Fuel 1 > Page 5210 Pin Circuit Description 1 K229 14BK INJECTOR HIGH SIDE DRIVER-BANK 2 Pin Circuit Description 1 K614 14BK INJECTOR HIGH SIDE DRIVER NO. 4 2 K14 14BK INJECTOR CONTROL NO. 4 Component Location - 5 Component Location - 11 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Locations > Injector-Fuel 1 > Page 5211 Component Location - 15 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Locations > Injector-Fuel 1 > Page 5212 Connector: Name : INJECTOR-FUEL 4 Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (NGC) Pin Circuit Description 1 K14 18BR/TN INJECTOR CONTROL NO. 4 2 K342 16BR/WT ASD CONTROL OUTPUT Component Location - 5 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Locations > Injector-Fuel 1 > Page 5213 Component Location - 11 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Locations > Injector-Fuel 1 > Page 5214 Component Location - 15 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Locations > Injector-Fuel 1 > Page 5215 Injector-Fuel 5 Component ID: 152 Component : INJECTOR-FUEL 5 Connector: Name : INJECTOR-FUEL 5 Color : # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (DIESEL) Gender : MALE Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Locations > Injector-Fuel 1 > Page 5216 Pin Circuit Description 1 K229 14BK INJECTOR HIGH SIDE DRIVER-BANK 2 Pin Circuit Description 1 K638 14BK INJECTOR HIGH SIDE DRIVER NO. 5 2 K38 14BK INJECTOR CONTROL NO. 5 Component Location - 8 Component Location - 9 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Locations > Injector-Fuel 1 > Page 5217 Component Location - 15 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Locations > Injector-Fuel 1 > Page 5218 Connector: Name : INJECTOR-FUEL 5 Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (NGC) Pin Circuit Description 1 K38 18BR/OR INJECTOR CONTROL NO. 5 2 K342 16BR/WT ASD CONTROL OUTPUT Component Location - 8 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Locations > Injector-Fuel 1 > Page 5219 Component Location - 9 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Locations > Injector-Fuel 1 > Page 5220 Component Location - 15 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Locations > Injector-Fuel 1 > Page 5221 Injector-Fuel 6 Component ID: 153 Component : INJECTOR-FUEL 6 Connector: Name : INJECTOR-FUEL 6 Color : # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (DIESEL) Gender : MALE Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Locations > Injector-Fuel 1 > Page 5222 Pin Circuit Description 1 K229 14BK INJECTOR HIGH SIDE DRIVER-BANK 2 Pin Circuit Description 1 K658 14BK INJECTOR HIGH SIDE DRIVER NO. 6 2 K58 14BK INJECTOR CONTROL NO. 6 Component Location - 5 Component Location - 11 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Locations > Injector-Fuel 1 > Page 5223 Component Location - 15 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Locations > Injector-Fuel 1 > Page 5224 Connector: Name : INJECTOR-FUEL 6 Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (NGC) Pin Circuit Description 1 K58 18BR/VT INJECTOR CONTROL NO. 6 2 K342 16BR/WT ASD CONTROL OUTPUT Component Location - 5 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Locations > Injector-Fuel 1 > Page 5225 Component Location - 11 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Locations > Injector-Fuel 1 > Page 5226 Component Location - 15 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Locations > Injector-Fuel 1 > Page 5227 Injector-Fuel 7 Component ID: 154 Component : INJECTOR-FUEL 7 Connector: Name : INJECTOR-FUEL 7 Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (NGC) Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Locations > Injector-Fuel 1 > Page 5228 Pin Circuit Description 1 K26 18BR/YL INJECTOR CONTROL NO. 7 2 K342 16BR/WT ASD CONTROL OUTPUT Component Location - 8 Component Location - 9 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Locations > Injector-Fuel 1 > Page 5229 Injector-Fuel 8 Component ID: 155 Component : INJECTOR-FUEL 8 Connector: Name : INJECTOR-FUEL 8 Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (NGC) Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Locations > Injector-Fuel 1 > Page 5230 Pin Circuit Description 1 K28 18BR/LB INJECTOR CONTROL NO. 8 2 K342 16BR/WT ASD CONTROL OUTPUT Component Location - 5 Component Location - 11 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Locations > Injector-Fuel 1 > Page 5231 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Diagrams > Injector-Fuel 1 Fuel Injector: Diagrams Injector-Fuel 1 Component ID: 148 Component : INJECTOR-FUEL 1 Connector: Name : INJECTOR-FUEL 1 Color : # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (DIESEL) Gender : MALE Pin Circuit Description 1 K227 14BK INJECTOR HIGH SIDE DRIVER-BANK 1 Pin Circuit Description 1 K611 14BK INJECTOR HIGH SIDE DRIVER NO. 1 2 K11 14BK INJECTOR CONTROL NO. 1 Component Location - 8 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Diagrams > Injector-Fuel 1 > Page 5234 Component Location - 9 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Diagrams > Injector-Fuel 1 > Page 5235 Component Location - 15 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Diagrams > Injector-Fuel 1 > Page 5236 Connector: Name : INJECTOR-FUEL 1 Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (NGC) Pin Circuit Description 1 K11 18BR/YL INJECTOR CONTROL NO. 1 2 K342 16BR/WT ASD CONTROL OUTPUT Component Location - 8 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Diagrams > Injector-Fuel 1 > Page 5237 Component Location - 9 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Diagrams > Injector-Fuel 1 > Page 5238 Component Location - 15 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Diagrams > Injector-Fuel 1 > Page 5239 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Diagrams > Injector-Fuel 1 > Page 5240 Fuel Injector: Diagrams Injector-Fuel 2 Component ID: 149 Component : INJECTOR-FUEL 2 Connector: Name : INJECTOR-FUEL 2 Color : # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (DIESEL) Gender : MALE Pin Circuit Description 1 K227 14BK INJECTOR HIGH SIDE DRIVER-BANK 1 Pin Circuit Description 1 K612 14BK INJECTOR HIGH SIDE DRIVER NO. 2 2 K12 14BK INJECTOR CONTROL NO. 2 Component Location - 5 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Diagrams > Injector-Fuel 1 > Page 5241 Component Location - 11 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Diagrams > Injector-Fuel 1 > Page 5242 Component Location - 15 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Diagrams > Injector-Fuel 1 > Page 5243 Connector: Name : INJECTOR-FUEL 2 Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (NGC) Pin Circuit Description 1 K12 18BR/DB INJECTOR CONTROL NO. 2 2 K342 16BR/WT ASD CONTROL OUTPUT Component Location - 5 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Diagrams > Injector-Fuel 1 > Page 5244 Component Location - 11 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Diagrams > Injector-Fuel 1 > Page 5245 Component Location - 15 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Diagrams > Injector-Fuel 1 > Page 5246 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Diagrams > Injector-Fuel 1 > Page 5247 Fuel Injector: Diagrams Injector-Fuel 3 Component ID: 150 Component : INJECTOR-FUEL 3 Connector: Name : INJECTOR-FUEL 3 Color : # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (DIESEL) Gender : MALE Pin Circuit Description 1 K227 14BK INJECTOR HIGH SIDE DRIVER-BANK 1 Pin Circuit Description 1 K613 14BK INJECTOR HIGH SIDE DRIVER NO. 3 2 K13 14BK INJECTOR CONTROL NO. 3 Component Location - 8 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Diagrams > Injector-Fuel 1 > Page 5248 Component Location - 9 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Diagrams > Injector-Fuel 1 > Page 5249 Component Location - 15 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Diagrams > Injector-Fuel 1 > Page 5250 Connector: Name : INJECTOR-FUEL 3 Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (NGC) Pin Circuit Description 1 K13 18BR/LB INJECTOR CONTROL NO. 3 2 K342 16BR/WT ASD CONTROL OUTPUT Component Location - 8 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Diagrams > Injector-Fuel 1 > Page 5251 Component Location - 9 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Diagrams > Injector-Fuel 1 > Page 5252 Component Location - 15 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Diagrams > Injector-Fuel 1 > Page 5253 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Diagrams > Injector-Fuel 1 > Page 5254 Fuel Injector: Diagrams Injector-Fuel 4 Component ID: 151 Component : INJECTOR-FUEL 4 Connector: Name : INJECTOR-FUEL 4 Color : # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (DIESEL) Gender : MALE Pin Circuit Description 1 K229 14BK INJECTOR HIGH SIDE DRIVER-BANK 2 Pin Circuit Description 1 K614 14BK INJECTOR HIGH SIDE DRIVER NO. 4 2 K14 14BK INJECTOR CONTROL NO. 4 Component Location - 5 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Diagrams > Injector-Fuel 1 > Page 5255 Component Location - 11 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Diagrams > Injector-Fuel 1 > Page 5256 Component Location - 15 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Diagrams > Injector-Fuel 1 > Page 5257 Connector: Name : INJECTOR-FUEL 4 Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (NGC) Pin Circuit Description 1 K14 18BR/TN INJECTOR CONTROL NO. 4 2 K342 16BR/WT ASD CONTROL OUTPUT Component Location - 5 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Diagrams > Injector-Fuel 1 > Page 5258 Component Location - 11 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Diagrams > Injector-Fuel 1 > Page 5259 Component Location - 15 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Diagrams > Injector-Fuel 1 > Page 5260 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Diagrams > Injector-Fuel 1 > Page 5261 Fuel Injector: Diagrams Injector-Fuel 1 Component ID: 148 Component : INJECTOR-FUEL 1 Connector: Name : INJECTOR-FUEL 1 Color : # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (DIESEL) Gender : MALE Pin Circuit Description 1 K227 14BK INJECTOR HIGH SIDE DRIVER-BANK 1 Pin Circuit Description 1 K611 14BK INJECTOR HIGH SIDE DRIVER NO. 1 2 K11 14BK INJECTOR CONTROL NO. 1 Component Location - 8 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Diagrams > Injector-Fuel 1 > Page 5262 Component Location - 9 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Diagrams > Injector-Fuel 1 > Page 5263 Component Location - 15 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Diagrams > Injector-Fuel 1 > Page 5264 Connector: Name : INJECTOR-FUEL 1 Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (NGC) Pin Circuit Description 1 K11 18BR/YL INJECTOR CONTROL NO. 1 2 K342 16BR/WT ASD CONTROL OUTPUT Component Location - 8 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Diagrams > Injector-Fuel 1 > Page 5265 Component Location - 9 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Diagrams > Injector-Fuel 1 > Page 5266 Component Location - 15 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Diagrams > Injector-Fuel 1 > Page 5267 Injector-Fuel 2 Component ID: 149 Component : INJECTOR-FUEL 2 Connector: Name : INJECTOR-FUEL 2 Color : # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (DIESEL) Gender : MALE Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Diagrams > Injector-Fuel 1 > Page 5268 Pin Circuit Description 1 K227 14BK INJECTOR HIGH SIDE DRIVER-BANK 1 Pin Circuit Description 1 K612 14BK INJECTOR HIGH SIDE DRIVER NO. 2 2 K12 14BK INJECTOR CONTROL NO. 2 Component Location - 5 Component Location - 11 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Diagrams > Injector-Fuel 1 > Page 5269 Component Location - 15 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Diagrams > Injector-Fuel 1 > Page 5270 Connector: Name : INJECTOR-FUEL 2 Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (NGC) Pin Circuit Description 1 K12 18BR/DB INJECTOR CONTROL NO. 2 2 K342 16BR/WT ASD CONTROL OUTPUT Component Location - 5 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Diagrams > Injector-Fuel 1 > Page 5271 Component Location - 11 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Diagrams > Injector-Fuel 1 > Page 5272 Component Location - 15 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Diagrams > Injector-Fuel 1 > Page 5273 Injector-Fuel 3 Component ID: 150 Component : INJECTOR-FUEL 3 Connector: Name : INJECTOR-FUEL 3 Color : # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (DIESEL) Gender : MALE Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Diagrams > Injector-Fuel 1 > Page 5274 Pin Circuit Description 1 K227 14BK INJECTOR HIGH SIDE DRIVER-BANK 1 Pin Circuit Description 1 K613 14BK INJECTOR HIGH SIDE DRIVER NO. 3 2 K13 14BK INJECTOR CONTROL NO. 3 Component Location - 8 Component Location - 9 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Diagrams > Injector-Fuel 1 > Page 5275 Component Location - 15 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Diagrams > Injector-Fuel 1 > Page 5276 Connector: Name : INJECTOR-FUEL 3 Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (NGC) Pin Circuit Description 1 K13 18BR/LB INJECTOR CONTROL NO. 3 2 K342 16BR/WT ASD CONTROL OUTPUT Component Location - 8 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Diagrams > Injector-Fuel 1 > Page 5277 Component Location - 9 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Diagrams > Injector-Fuel 1 > Page 5278 Component Location - 15 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Diagrams > Injector-Fuel 1 > Page 5279 Injector-Fuel 4 Component ID: 151 Component : INJECTOR-FUEL 4 Connector: Name : INJECTOR-FUEL 4 Color : # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (DIESEL) Gender : MALE Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Diagrams > Injector-Fuel 1 > Page 5280 Pin Circuit Description 1 K229 14BK INJECTOR HIGH SIDE DRIVER-BANK 2 Pin Circuit Description 1 K614 14BK INJECTOR HIGH SIDE DRIVER NO. 4 2 K14 14BK INJECTOR CONTROL NO. 4 Component Location - 5 Component Location - 11 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Diagrams > Injector-Fuel 1 > Page 5281 Component Location - 15 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Diagrams > Injector-Fuel 1 > Page 5282 Connector: Name : INJECTOR-FUEL 4 Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (NGC) Pin Circuit Description 1 K14 18BR/TN INJECTOR CONTROL NO. 4 2 K342 16BR/WT ASD CONTROL OUTPUT Component Location - 5 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Diagrams > Injector-Fuel 1 > Page 5283 Component Location - 11 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Diagrams > Injector-Fuel 1 > Page 5284 Component Location - 15 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Diagrams > Injector-Fuel 1 > Page 5285 Injector-Fuel 5 Component ID: 152 Component : INJECTOR-FUEL 5 Connector: Name : INJECTOR-FUEL 5 Color : # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (DIESEL) Gender : MALE Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Diagrams > Injector-Fuel 1 > Page 5286 Pin Circuit Description 1 K229 14BK INJECTOR HIGH SIDE DRIVER-BANK 2 Pin Circuit Description 1 K638 14BK INJECTOR HIGH SIDE DRIVER NO. 5 2 K38 14BK INJECTOR CONTROL NO. 5 Component Location - 8 Component Location - 9 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Diagrams > Injector-Fuel 1 > Page 5287 Component Location - 15 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Diagrams > Injector-Fuel 1 > Page 5288 Connector: Name : INJECTOR-FUEL 5 Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (NGC) Pin Circuit Description 1 K38 18BR/OR INJECTOR CONTROL NO. 5 2 K342 16BR/WT ASD CONTROL OUTPUT Component Location - 8 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Diagrams > Injector-Fuel 1 > Page 5289 Component Location - 9 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Diagrams > Injector-Fuel 1 > Page 5290 Component Location - 15 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Diagrams > Injector-Fuel 1 > Page 5291 Injector-Fuel 6 Component ID: 153 Component : INJECTOR-FUEL 6 Connector: Name : INJECTOR-FUEL 6 Color : # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (DIESEL) Gender : MALE Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Diagrams > Injector-Fuel 1 > Page 5292 Pin Circuit Description 1 K229 14BK INJECTOR HIGH SIDE DRIVER-BANK 2 Pin Circuit Description 1 K658 14BK INJECTOR HIGH SIDE DRIVER NO. 6 2 K58 14BK INJECTOR CONTROL NO. 6 Component Location - 5 Component Location - 11 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Diagrams > Injector-Fuel 1 > Page 5293 Component Location - 15 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Diagrams > Injector-Fuel 1 > Page 5294 Connector: Name : INJECTOR-FUEL 6 Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (NGC) Pin Circuit Description 1 K58 18BR/VT INJECTOR CONTROL NO. 6 2 K342 16BR/WT ASD CONTROL OUTPUT Component Location - 5 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Diagrams > Injector-Fuel 1 > Page 5295 Component Location - 11 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Diagrams > Injector-Fuel 1 > Page 5296 Component Location - 15 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Diagrams > Injector-Fuel 1 > Page 5297 Injector-Fuel 7 Component ID: 154 Component : INJECTOR-FUEL 7 Connector: Name : INJECTOR-FUEL 7 Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (NGC) Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Diagrams > Injector-Fuel 1 > Page 5298 Pin Circuit Description 1 K26 18BR/YL INJECTOR CONTROL NO. 7 2 K342 16BR/WT ASD CONTROL OUTPUT Component Location - 8 Component Location - 9 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Diagrams > Injector-Fuel 1 > Page 5299 Injector-Fuel 8 Component ID: 155 Component : INJECTOR-FUEL 8 Connector: Name : INJECTOR-FUEL 8 Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (NGC) Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Diagrams > Injector-Fuel 1 > Page 5300 Pin Circuit Description 1 K28 18BR/LB INJECTOR CONTROL NO. 8 2 K342 16BR/WT ASD CONTROL OUTPUT Component Location - 5 Component Location - 11 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Diagrams > Injector-Fuel 1 > Page 5301 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Description and Operation > Fuel Injector - Description Fuel Injector: Description and Operation Fuel Injector - Description DESCRIPTION An individual fuel injector (1) is used for each individual cylinder. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Description and Operation > Fuel Injector - Description > Page 5304 Fuel Injector: Description and Operation Fuel Injector - Operation Fuel Injector FUEL INJECTOR The top (fuel entry) end of the injector (1) is attached into an opening on the fuel rail. The fuel injectors are electrical solenoids. The injector contains a pintle that closes off an orifice at the nozzle end. When electric current is supplied to the injector, the armature and needle move a short distance against a spring, allowing fuel to flow out the orifice. Because the fuel is under high pressure, a fine spray is developed in the shape of a pencil stream. The spraying action atomizes the fuel, adding it to the air entering the combustion chamber. The nozzle (outlet) ends of the injectors are positioned into openings in the intake manifold just above the intake valve ports of the cylinder head. The engine wiring harness connector for each fuel injector is equipped with an attached numerical tag (INJ 1, INJ 2 etc.). This is used to identify each fuel injector. The injectors are energized individually in a sequential order by the Powertrain Control Module (PCM). The PCM will adjust injector pulse width by switching the ground path to each individual injector on and off. Injector pulse width is the period of time that the injector is energized. The PCM will adjust injector pulse width based on various inputs it receives. Battery voltage is supplied to the injectors through the ASD relay. The PCM determines injector pulse width based on various inputs. PCM Output PCM OUTPUT The nozzle ends of the injectors are positioned into openings in the intake manifold just above the intake valve ports of the cylinder head. The engine wiring harness connector for each fuel injector is equipped with an attached numerical tag (INJ 1, INJ 2 etc.). This is used to identify each fuel injector with its respective cylinder number. The injectors are energized individually in a sequential order by the Powertrain Control Module (PCM). The PCM will adjust injector pulse width by switching the ground path to each individual injector on and off. Injector pulse width is the period of time that the injector is energized. The PCM will adjust injector pulse width based on various inputs it receives. Battery voltage (12 volts +) is supplied to the injectors through the ASD relay. The ASD relay will shut-down the 12 volt power source to the fuel injectors if the PCM senses the ignition is on, but the engine is not running. This occurs after the engine has not been running for approximately 1.8 seconds. The PCM determines injector on-time (pulse width) based on various inputs. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Injector - Installation Fuel Injector: Service and Repair Fuel Injector - Installation 3.7/ 4.7/ 5.7L 1. Install fuel injector(s) into fuel rail assembly and install retaining clip(s). 2. If same injector(s) is being reinstalled, install new O-ring(s). 3. Apply a small amount of clean engine oil to each injector O-ring. This will aid in installation. 4. Install fuel rail. See: Fuel Rail/Service and Repair/Fuel Rail Installation 5. Start engine and check for fuel leaks. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Line Coupler > Component Information > Description and Operation Fuel Line Coupler: Description and Operation DESCRIPTION Different types of quick-connect fittings are used to attach the various fuel system components, lines and tubes. These are: a single-button type, a two-button type, a pinch type, a single-tab type, a two-tab type or a plastic retainer ring type. Some are equipped with safety latch clips. Some may require the use of a special tool for disconnection and removal. See: Service and Repair CAUTION: Before separating a quick-connect fitting, pay attention to what type of fitting is being used by referring to Quick-Connect Fitting Removal. This will prevent unnecessary fitting or fitting latch breakage. CAUTION: The interior components (O-rings, clips) of quick-connect fittings are not serviced separately, but new plastic spacers and latches are available for some types. If service parts are not available, do not attempt to repair the damaged fitting or fuel line (tube). If repair is necessary, replace the complete fuel line (tube) assembly. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Line Coupler > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 5310 Fuel Line Coupler: Service and Repair STANDARD PROCEDURE - QUICK-CONNECT FITTINGS Different types of quick-connect fittings are used to attach the various fuel system components, lines and tubes. These are: a single-button type, a two-button type, a pinch type, a single-tab type, a two-tab type or a plastic retainer ring type. Some are equipped with safety latch clips. Some may require the use of a special tool for disconnection and removal. DISCONNECTING WARNING: The fuel system is under a constant pressure (even with engine off). Before servicing any fuel system hose, fitting or line, fuel system pressure must be released. Refer to fuel system pressure release procedure. CAUTION: Before separating a quick-connect fitting, pay attention to what type of fitting is being used by referring to Quick-Connect Fitting Removal. This will prevent unnecessary fitting or fitting latch breakage. CAUTION: The interior components (O-rings, clips) of quick-connect fittings are not serviced separately, but new plastic spacers and latches are available for some types. If service parts are not available, do not attempt to repair the damaged fitting or fuel line (tube). If repair is necessary, replace the complete fuel line (tube) assembly. 1. Perform fuel pressure release procedure. Refer to Fuel Pressure Release Procedure. 2. Disconnect negative battery cable from battery. 3. Clean fitting of any foreign material before disassembly. 4. Single-Button Type Fitting: This type of fitting is equipped with a single push-button (2) located on the quick-connect fitting. 5. The push-button is attached to two internal latches (1). To disconnect, press on push-button with your thumb and unlatch fitting from fuel line. Special tools are not required for disconnection. DO NOT ATTEMPT TO PRY OR PULL UP ON PUSH-BUTTON. LATCHES WILL BE BROKEN. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Line Coupler > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 5311 6. Perform fuel pressure release procedure. Refer to Fuel Pressure Release Procedure. 7. Disconnect negative battery cable from battery. 8. Clean fitting of any foreign material before disassembly. 9. 2-Button Type Fitting: This type of fitting (1) is equipped with a push-button located on each side of quick-connect fitting (2). Press on both buttons simultaneously for removal. Special tools are not required for disconnection. 10. Pinch-Type Fitting: This fitting (1) is equipped with two finger tabs (2). Pinch both tabs together while removing fitting. Special tools are not required for disconnection. 11. Single-Tab Type Fitting: This type of fitting (3) is equipped with a single pull tab (1). The tab is removable. After tab is removed, quick-connect fitting can be separated from fuel system component. Special tools are not required for disconnection. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Line Coupler > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 5312 12. Press release tab on side of fitting to release pull tab (1). If release tab is not pressed prior to releasing pull tab, pull tab will be damaged. 13. While pressing release tab on side of fitting, use screwdriver (2) to pry up pull tab. 14. Raise pull tab until it separates from quick-connect fitting. 15. Two-Tab Type Fitting: This type of fitting (2) is equipped with tabs located on both sides of fitting (1). The tabs are supplied for disconnecting quick-connect fitting from component being serviced. a. To disconnect quick-connect fitting, squeeze plastic retainer tabs (1) against sides of quick-connect fitting with your fingers. Tool use is not required for removal and may damage plastic retainer. b. Pull fitting from fuel system component being serviced. c. The plastic retainer will remain on component being serviced after fitting is disconnected. The O-rings and spacer will remain in quick-connect fitting connector body. 16. Plastic Retainer Ring Type Fitting: This type of fitting can be identified by the use of a full-round plastic retainer ring (4) usually black in color. a. To release fuel system component from quick-connect fitting, firmly push fitting towards component being serviced while firmly pushing Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Line Coupler > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 5313 plastic retainer ring into fitting (6). With plastic ring depressed, pull fitting from component. The plastic retainer ring must be pressed squarely into fitting body. If this retainer is cocked during removal, it may be difficult to disconnect fitting. Use an open-end wrench on shoulder of plastic retainer ring to aid in disconnection. b. After disconnection, plastic retainer ring will remain with quick-connect fitting connector body. c. Inspect fitting connector body, plastic retainer ring and fuel system component for damage. Replace as necessary. 17. Latch Clips - Type 1: Depending on vehicle model and engine, 2 different types of safety latch clips are used. Type-1 (4) is tethered to fuel line and type-2 is not. A special tool will be necessary to disconnect fuel line after latch clip is removed. The latch clip may be used on certain fuel line/fuel rail connection, or to join fuel lines together. 18. Pry up on latch clip with a screwdriver (3). 19. Slide latch clip toward fuel rail while lifting with screwdriver. 20. Insert special fuel line removal tool (Snap-On number FIH 9055-1 or equivalent) into fuel line (1). Use tool to release locking fingers in end of line. 21. With special tool still inserted, pull fuel line from fuel rail. 22. After disconnection, locking fingers will remain within quick-connect fitting at end of fuel line. 23. Disconnect quick-connect fitting from fuel system component being serviced. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Line Coupler > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 5314 24. Latch Clips - Type 2: Depending on vehicle model and engine, 2 different types of safety latch clips are used. Type-1 is tethered to fuel line and type-2 is not. A special tool will be necessary to disconnect fuel line after latch clip is removed. The latch clip may be used on certain fuel line/fuel rail connection, or to join fuel lines together. 25. Type 2: Separate and unlatch small arms on end of clip and swing away from fuel line. 26. Slide latch clip toward fuel rail while lifting with screwdriver. 27. Insert special fuel line removal tool (Snap-On number FIH 9055-1 or equivalent) into fuel line (1). Use tool to release locking fingers in end of line. 28. With special tool still inserted, pull fuel line from fuel rail. 29. After disconnection, locking fingers will remain within quick-connect fitting at end of fuel line. 30. Disconnect quick-connect fitting from fuel system component being serviced. 31. Wing Type: A special tool will not be necessary to disconnect this type of fitting (2). This line is used on different fuel and emission components. The graphic shows the fitting used on an EVAP canister. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Line Coupler > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 5315 32. Use two fingers to push on fitting wings (2) 33. Pull and disconnect fitting while holding wings. 34. After disconnection, locking fingers will remain within quick-connect fitting. CONNECTING 1. Inspect quick-connect fitting body and fuel system component for damage. Replace as necessary. 2. Prior to connecting quick-connect fitting to component being serviced, check condition of fitting and component. Clean parts with a lint-free cloth. Lubricate with clean engine oil. 3. Insert quick-connect fitting into fuel tube or fuel system component until built-on stop on fuel tube or component rests against back of fitting. 4. Continue pushing until a click is felt. 5. Single-tab type fitting: Push new tab down until it locks into place in quick-connect fitting. 6. Verify a locked condition by firmly pulling on fuel tube and fitting (15-30 lbs.). 7. Latch Clip Equipped: Install latch clip (snaps into position). If latch clip will not fit, this indicates fuel line is not properly installed to fuel rail (or other fuel line). Recheck fuel line connection. 8. Connect negative cable to battery. 9. Start engine and check for leaks. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pressure Regulator > Component Information > Locations Fuel Pressure Regulator: Locations DESCRIPTION The fuel pump module assembly is located on the top of the fuel tank. The complete assembly contains the following components: - A combination fuel filter/fuel pressure regulator - A separate fuel pick-up, or inlet filter - An electric fuel pump - A lockring to retain pump module to tank - A soft gasket between tank flange and module - A fuel gauge sending unit (fuel level sensor) - Fuel line connection The fuel gauge sending unit may be serviced separately. If the electrical fuel pump, primary inlet filter, fuel filter or fuel pressure regulator require service, the fuel pump module must be replaced. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pressure Regulator > Component Information > Locations > Page 5319 Fuel Pressure Regulator: Description and Operation DESCRIPTION The fuel pressure regulator is located in the fuel pump module assembly and is non-serviceable. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump > Fuel Pressure > System Information > Specifications Fuel Pressure: Specifications FUEL SYSTEM PRESSURE 58 psi +/- 2 psi Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump > Fuel Pressure > System Information > Specifications > Page 5324 Fuel Pressure: Testing and Inspection *FUEL PRESSURE LEAK DOWN For a complete wiring diagram Refer to Diagrams/Electrical. Diagnostic Test 1. FUEL PUMP MODULE NOTE: Before continuing visually and physically inspect the fuel delivery system for external leaks or damage. Repair/replace as necessary. WARNING: The fuel system is under a constant pressure (even with the engine off). Before testing or servicing any fuel system hose, fitting or line, the fuel system pressure must be released. Failure to follow these instructions can result in personal injury or death. Turn the ignition off. Install special tool #6539 (5/16") or #6631 (3/8") fuel line adapter. Install the fuel pressure gauge. Start the engine and allow the fuel system to reach maximum pressure. Turn the ignition off. NOTE: Fuel specification is 407 KPa +/- 34 KPa (59 psi +/- 5 psi). Using special tool #C4390, Hose Clamp Pliers, pinch the rubber fuel line between the fuel pressure gauge and the engine. Monitor the fuel pressure gauge for a minimum of 5 minutes. NOTE: The pressure should not fall below 241 KPa (35 psi) Does the fuel pressure drop? Yes - Replace Fuel Pump Module. - Perform the POWERTRAIN VERIFICATION TEST. See: Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code Tests and Associated Procedures/Verification Tests/Powertrain Verification Test No - Go To 2 2. FUEL INJECTOR(S) WARNING: The fuel system is under a constant pressure (even with the engine off). Before testing or servicing any fuel system hose, fitting or line, the fuel system pressure must be released. Failure to follow these instructions can result in personal injury or death. Remove special tool #C4390. Start the engine and allow the fuel system to reach maximum pressure. Turn the ignition off. NOTE: Fuel specification is 407 KPa +/- 34 KPa (59 psi +/- 5 psi). Move special tool #C4390, Hose Clamp Pliers, from between the fuel pressure gauge and the engine to between the fuel pressure gauge and fuel pump module. Monitor the fuel pressure gauge for a minimum of 5 minutes. NOTE: The pressure should not fall below 241 KPa (35 psi) Does the fuel pressure drop? Yes - Replace the leaking fuel injectors. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump > Fuel Pressure > System Information > Specifications > Page 5325 - Perform the POWERTRAIN VERIFICATION TEST. See: Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code Tests and Associated Procedures/Verification Tests/Powertrain Verification Test No - Test Complete. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Locations Fuel Pump Relay: Locations DESCRIPTION A separate fuel pump relay is no longer used. A circuit within the TIPM (Totally Integrated Power Module) is used to control the electric fuel pump located within the fuel pump module. The TIPM (1) is located in the engine compartment in front of the battery. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Fuel Pump Relay: Diagram Information and Instructions Warnings WARNINGS - GENERAL WARNINGS provide information to prevent personal injury and vehicle damage. Below is a list of general warnings that should be followed any time a vehicle is being serviced. WARNING: Always wear safety glasses for eye protection. WARNING: Use safety stands anytime a procedure requires being under a vehicle. WARNING: Be sure that the ignition switch always is in the off position, unless the procedure requires it to be on. WARNING: Set the parking brake when working on any vehicle. An automatic transmission should be in park. A manual transmission should be in neutral. WARNING: Operate the engine only in a well-ventilated area. WARNING: Keep away from moving parts when the engine is running, especially the fan and belts. WARNING: To prevent serious burns, avoid contact with hot parts such as the radiator, exhaust manifold(s), tail pipe, catalytic converter and muffler. WARNING: Do not allow flame or sparks near the battery. Gases are always present in and around the battery. WARNING: Always remove rings, watches, loose hanging jewelry and avoid loose clothing. How to Use Wiring Diagrams DESCRIPTION - HOW TO USE WIRING DIAGRAMS DaimlerChrysler Corporation wiring diagrams are designed to provide information regarding the vehicles wiring content. In order to effectively use the wiring diagrams to diagnose and repair DaimlerChrysler Corporation vehicles, it is important to understand all of their features and characteristics. Diagrams are arranged such that the power (B+) side of the circuit is placed near the top of the page, and the ground (B-) side of the circuit is placed near the bottom of the page. All switches, components, and modules are shown in the at rest position with the doors closed and the key removed from the ignition. Components are shown two ways. A solid line around a component indicates that the component is complete. A dashed line around the component indicates that the component is being shown is not complete. Incomplete components have a reference number to indicate the page where the component is shown complete. It is important to realize that no attempt is made on the diagrams to represent components and wiring as they appear on the vehicle. For example, a short piece of wire is treated the same as a long one. In addition, switches and other components are shown as simply as possible, with regard to function only. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5331 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5332 SYMBOLS International symbols are used throughout the wiring diagrams. These symbols are consistent with those being used around the world. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5333 TERMINOLOGY This is a list of terms and definitions used in the wiring diagrams. LHD - Left Hand Drive Vehicles RHD - Right Hand Drive Vehicles ATX - Automatic Transmissions-Front Wheel Drive MTX Manual Transmissions-Front Wheel Drive Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5334 AT - Automatic Transmissions-Rear Wheel Drive MT - Manual Transmissions-Rear Wheel Drive SOHC - Single Over Head Cam Engine DOHC - Double Over Head Cam Engine Export - Vehicles Built For Sale In Markets Other Than North America Except Export - Vehicles Built For Sale In North America Circuit Functions DESCRIPTION - CIRCUIT FUNCTIONS All circuits in the diagrams use an alpha/numeric code to identify the wire and it's function. To identify which circuit code applies to a system, refer to the Circuit Identification Code Chart. This chart shows the main circuits only and does not show the secondary codes that may apply to some models. Circuit Information DESCRIPTION - CIRCUIT INFORMATION Each wire shown in the diagrams contains a code which identifies the main circuit, a specific part of the main circuit, gage of wire, and color. An example would be A 2 18 LB/YL. This is a Battery Feed circuit, level two, eighteen gauge, light blue with a yellow tracer. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5335 Connector, Ground and Splice Information DESCRIPTION - CONNECTOR, GROUND AND SPLICE INFORMATION CAUTION: Not all connectors are serviced. Some connectors are serviced only with a harness. A typical example might be the Supplemental Restraint System connectors. Always check parts availability before attempting a repair. IDENTIFICATION In-line connectors are identified by a number, as follows: - In-line connectors located in the engine compartment are C100 series numbers. - In-line connectors located in the instrument panel area are C200 series numbers. - In-line connectors located in the body are C300 series numbers. - Jumper harness connectors are C400 series numbers. - Grounds and ground connectors are identified with a "G" and follow the same series numbering as the in-line connectors. - Splices are identified with an "S" and follow the same series numbering as the in-line connectors. In addition, S001-S099 numbers are located in the engine compartment. - Component connectors are identified by the component name instead of a number. Multiple connectors on a component use a C1, C2, etc. identifier. LOCATIONS Vehicle/Locations contains the master connector/ground/splice location index charts with hyperlinks to the applicable location illustrations. The illustrations contain the connector name (or number)/ground number/splice number and component identification. The abbreviation T/O is used in the component location section to indicate a point in which the wiring harness branches out to a component. The abbreviation N/S means Not Shown in the illustrations Section Identification and Information DESCRIPTION - SECTION IDENTIFICATION AND INFORMATION The wiring diagrams are grouped into individual sections. If a component is most likely found in a particular group, it will be shown complete (all wires, Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5336 connectors, and pins) within that group. For example, the Auto Shutdown Relay is most likely to be found in Powertrain Management, so it is shown there complete. It can, however, be shown partially in another group if it contains some associated wiring. Splice diagrams show the entire splice and provide references to other sections the splices serves. Splice Information only contains splice diagrams that are not shown in their entirety somewhere else in the wiring diagrams. Connector Pin-Outs shows each connector and the circuits involved with that connector. The connectors are identified using the name/number on the diagram pages. Removal REMOVAL 1. Disconnect battery. 2. Release Connector Lock (2). 3. Disconnect the connector (3) being repaired from its mating half/component. 4. Remove the dress cover (if applicable) (1). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5337 5. Release the Secondary Terminal Lock, if required (1). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5338 6. Position the connector locking finger away from the terminal using the proper special tool. Pull on the wire to remove the terminal from the connector. Installation Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5339 INSTALLATION 1. Insert the removed terminal in the same cavity on the repair connector. 2. Repeat steps for each terminal in the connector, being sure that all wires are inserted into the proper cavities. For additional connector pin-out identification, refer to the wiring diagrams. 3. When the connector is re-assembled, the secondary terminal lock must be placed in the locked position to prevent terminal push out. 4. Replace dress cover (if applicable). 5. Connect connector to its mating half/component. 6. Connect battery and test all affected systems. Removal REMOVAL 1. Disconnect the battery. 2. Locate the diode in the harness, and remove the protective covering. 3. Remove the diode from the harness, pay attention to the current flow direction (1) (2) (3). Installation INSTALLATION 1. Remove the insulation from the wires in the harness. Only remove enough insulation to solder in the new diode. 2. Install the new diode in the harness, making sure current flow is correct. If necessary, refer to the appropriate wiring diagram for current flow. 3. Solder the connection together using rosin core type solder only. Do not use acid core solder. 4. Tape the diode to the harness using electrical tape. Make sure the diode is completely sealed from the elements. 5. Re-connect the battery and test affected systems. Removal REMOVAL 1. Follow steps for removing terminals described in the connector removal section. 2. Cut the wire 6 inches from the back of the connector. Installation INSTALLATION 1. Select a wire from the terminal repair kit that best matches the color and gage of the wire being repaired. 2. Cut the repair wire to the proper length and remove one-half (1/2) inch of insulation. 3. Splice the repair wire to the wire harness (see wire splicing procedure). See: Service Procedures/Wire Splicing 4. Insert the repaired wire into the connector. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5340 5. Install the connector locking wedge, if required, and reconnect the connector to its mating half/component. 6. Re-tape the wire harness starting at 1-1/2 inches behind the connector and 2 inches past the repair. 7. Connect battery and test all affected systems. Wire Splicing STANDARD PROCEDURE - WIRE SPLICING When splicing a wire, it is important that the correct gage be used as shown in the wiring diagrams. 1. Remove one-half (1/2) inch of insulation from each wire that needs to be spliced. 2. Place a piece of adhesive lined heat shrink tubing on one side of the wire. Make sure the tubing will be long enough to cover and seal the entire repair area. 3. Place the strands of wire overlapping each other inside of the splice clip (1). 4. Using crimping tool (1), Mopar p/n 05019912AA, crimp the splice clip and wires together. 5. Solder (3) the connection (2) together using rosin core type solder (1) only. CAUTION: DO NOT USE ACID CORE SOLDER. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5341 6. Center the heat shrink tubing (2) over the joint and heat using a heat gun. Heat the joint until the tubing is tightly sealed and sealant (1) comes out of both ends of the tubing. Special Tools WIRING/TERMINAL PROBING TOOL PACKAGE 6807 TERMINAL PICK TOOL SET 6680 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5342 TERMINAL REMOVING TOOLS 6932 AND 8638 TERMINAL REMOVING TOOL 6934 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5343 Fuel Pump Relay: Diagnostic Aids Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) Sensitive Devices STANDARD PROCEDURE - ELECTROSTATIC DISCHARGE (ESD) SENSITIVE DEVICES All ESD sensitive components are solid state and a symbol is used to indicate this. When handling any component with this symbol, comply with the following procedures to reduce the possibility of electrostatic charge build up on the body and inadvertent discharge into the component. If it is not known whether the part is ESD sensitive, assume that it is. 1. Always touch a known good ground before handling the part. This should be repeated while handling the part and more frequently after sliding across a seat, sitting down from a standing position, or walking a distance. 2. Avoid touching electrical terminals of the part, unless instructed to do so by a written procedure. 3. When using a voltmeter, be sure to connect the ground lead first. 4. Do not remove the part from it's protective packing until it is time to install the part. 5. Before removing the part from it's package, ground the package to a known good ground on the vehicle. Testing Of Voltage Potential STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING OF VOLTAGE POTENTIAL 1. Connect the ground lead of a voltmeter to a known good ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the voltmeter to the selected test point. The vehicle ignition may need to be turned ON to check voltage. Refer to the appropriate test procedure. Testing For Continuity Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5344 STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING FOR CONTINUITY 1. Remove the fuse (1) for the circuit being checked or, disconnect the battery. 2. Connect one lead of the ohmmeter to one side of the circuit being tested 3. Connect the other lead to the other end of the circuit being tested. Low or no resistance means good continuity. Testing For A Short To Ground STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING FOR A SHORT TO GROUND 1. Remove the fuse and disconnect all items involved with the fuse. 2. Connect a test light or a voltmeter across the terminals of the fuse. 3. Starting at the fuse block, wiggle the wiring harness about six to eight inches apart and watch the voltmeter/test lamp. 4. If the voltmeter registers voltage or the test lamp glows, there is a short to ground in that general area of the wiring harness. Testing For A Short To Ground On Fuses Powering Several Loads STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING FOR A SHORT TO GROUND ON FUSES POWERING SEVERAL LOADS 1. Refer to the wiring diagrams and disconnect or isolate all items on the suspected fused circuits. 2. Replace the blown fuse. 3. Supply power to the fuse by turning ON the ignition switch or re-connecting the battery. 4. Start connecting or energizing the items in the fuse circuit one at a time. When the fuse blows the circuit with the short to ground has been isolated. Testing For A Voltage Drop STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING FOR A VOLTAGE DROP Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5345 1. Connect the positive lead of the voltmeter to the side of the circuit closest to the battery. 2. Connect the other lead of the voltmeter to the other side of the switch, component or circuit. 3. Operate the item. 4. The voltmeter will show the difference in voltage between the two points. Troubleshooting Wiring Problems DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING - WIRING HARNESS TROUBLESHOOTING TOOLS When diagnosing a problem in an electrical circuit there are several common tools necessary. These tools are listed and explained below. - Jumper Wire - This is a test wire used to connect two points of a circuit. It can be used to bypass an open in a circuit. WARNING: Never use a jumper wire across a load, such as a motor, connected between a battery feed and ground. - Voltmeter - Used to check for voltage on a circuit. Always connect the black lead to a known good ground and the red lead to the positive side of the circuit. CAUTION: Most of the electrical components used in today's vehicles are Solid State. When checking voltages in these circuits, use a meter with a 10 - megohm or greater impedance rating. - Ohmmeter - Used to check the resistance between two points of a circuit. Low or no resistance in a circuit means good continuity. CAUTION: Most of the electrical components used in today's vehicles are Solid State. When checking resistance in these circuits use a meter with a 10 - megohm or greater impedance rating. In addition, make sure the power is disconnected from the circuit. Circuits that are powered up by the vehicle's electrical system can cause damage to the equipment and provide false readings. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5346 - Probing Tools - These tools are used for probing terminals in connectors. Select the proper size tool from Special Tool Package 6807, and insert the probing end (2) into the terminal being tested. Use the other end of the tool (1) to insert the meter probe. INTERMITTENT AND POOR CONNECTIONS Most intermittent electrical problems are caused by faulty electrical connections or wiring. It is also possible for a sticking component or relay to cause a problem. Before condemning a component or wiring assembly, check the following items. - Connectors are fully seated - Spread terminals, or terminal push out - Terminals in the wiring assembly are fully seated into the connector/component and locked into position - Dirt or corrosion on the terminals. Any amount of corrosion or dirt could cause an intermittent problem - Damaged connector/component casing exposing the item to dirt or moisture - Wire insulation that has rubbed through causing a short to ground - Some or all of the wiring strands broken inside of the insulation - Wiring broken inside of the insulation TROUBLESHOOTING WIRING PROBLEMS When troubleshooting wiring problems there are six steps which can aid in the procedure. The steps are listed and explained below. Always check for non-factory items added to the vehicle before doing any diagnosis. If the vehicle is equipped with these items, disconnect them to verify these add-on items are not the cause of the problem. 1. Verify the problem. 2. Verify any related symptoms. Do this by performing operational checks on components that are in the same circuit. Refer to the wiring diagrams. 3. Analyze the symptoms. Use the wiring diagrams to determine what the circuit is doing, where the problem most likely is occurring and where the diagnosis will continue. 4. Isolate the problem area. 5. Repair the problem area. 6. Verify the proper operation. For this step, check for proper operation of all items on the repaired circuit. Refer to the wiring diagrams. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5347 Fuel Pump Relay: Connector Views Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Fuel Pump Relay: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION A separate fuel pump relay is no longer used. A circuit within the TIPM (Totally Integrated Power Module) is used to control the electric fuel pump located within the fuel pump module. The TIPM (1) is located in the engine compartment in front of the battery. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 5350 Fuel Pump Relay: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The Powertrain Control Module (PCM) energizes the electric fuel pump through the fuel pump relay. The fuel pump relay is energized by first applying battery voltage to it when the ignition key is turned ON, and then applying a ground signal to the relay from the PCM. Whenever the ignition key is turned ON, the electric fuel pump will operate. But, the PCM will shut-down the ground circuit to the fuel pump relay in approximately 1-3 seconds unless the engine is operating or the starter motor is engaged. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Pickup Filter > Component Information > Locations Fuel Pump Pickup Filter: Locations DESCRIPTION The fuel pump module assembly is located on the top of the fuel tank. The complete assembly contains the following components: - A combination fuel filter/fuel pressure regulator - A separate fuel pick-up, or inlet filter - An electric fuel pump - A lockring to retain pump module to tank - A soft gasket between tank flange and module - A fuel gauge sending unit (fuel level sensor) - Fuel line connection The fuel gauge sending unit may be serviced separately. If the electrical fuel pump, primary inlet filter, fuel filter or fuel pressure regulator require service, the fuel pump module must be replaced. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Rail > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Fuel Rail: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The fuel injector rail is used to mount the fuel injectors to the engine. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Rail > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 5358 Fuel Rail: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION High pressure from the fuel pump is routed to the fuel rail. The fuel rail then supplies the necessary fuel to each individual fuel injector. A quick-connect fitting with a safety latch clip is used to attach the fuel line to the fuel rail. The fuel rail is not repairable. CAUTION: The left and right sections of the fuel rail are connected with either a flexible connecting hose, or joints. Do not attempt to separate the rail halves at these connecting hose or joints. Due to the design of the connecting hose or joint, it does not use any clamps. Never attempt to install a clamping device of any kind to the hose or joint. When removing the fuel rail assembly for any reason, be careful not to bend or kink the connecting hose or joint. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Rail > Component Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Rail - Removal Fuel Rail: Service and Repair Fuel Rail - Removal 3.7L V-6 3.7L V-6 WARNING: The fuel system is under constant pressure even with engine off. Before servicing fuel rail, fuel system pressure must be released. CAUTION: The left and right fuel rails are replaced as an assembly. Do not attempt to separate rail halves at connector tubes. Due to design of tubes, it does not use any clamps. Never attempt to install a clamping device of any kind to tubes. When removing fuel rail assembly for any reason, be careful not to bend or kink tubes. 1. Remove fuel tank filler tube cap. 2. Perform Fuel System Pressure Release Procedure. See: Fuel Filter/Fuel Pressure Release/Service and Repair 3. Remove negative battery cable at battery. 4. Remove air duct at throttle body air box. 5. Remove air box at throttle body. 6. Remove air resonator mounting bracket at front of throttle body (2 bolts). 7. Disconnect fuel line latch clip and fuel line at fuel rail. A special tool will be necessary for fuel line disconnection. See: Fuel Line Coupler/Service and Repair 8. Remove necessary vacuum lines at throttle body. 9. Disconnect electrical connectors at all 6 fuel injectors. To remove connector. Push red colored slider away from injector (1). While pushing slider, depress tab (2) and remove connector (3) from injector. The factory fuel injection wiring harness is numerically tagged (INJ 1, INJ 2, etc.) for injector position identification. If harness is not tagged, note wiring location before removal. 10. Disconnect electrical connectors at all throttle body sensors. 11. Remove 6 ignition coils. See: Ignition System/Ignition Coil/Service and Repair/Ignition Coil - Removal Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Rail > Component Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Rail - Removal > Page 5361 12. Remove 4 fuel rail mounting bolts (1). 13. Gently rock and pull left side of fuel rail until fuel injectors just start to clear machined holes in cylinder head. Gently rock and pull right side of rail until injectors just start to clear cylinder head holes. Repeat this procedure (left/right) until all injectors have cleared cylinder head holes. 14. Remove fuel rail (with injectors attached) from engine. 15. If fuel injectors are to be removed, See: Fuel Injector/Service and Repair/Fuel Injector - Removal . 4.7L V-8 4.7L V-8 WARNING: The fuel system is under constant pressure even with engine off. Before servicing fuel rail, fuel system pressure must be released. CAUTION: The left and right fuel rails are replaced as an assembly. Do not attempt to separate rail halves at connector tubes. Due to design of tubes, it does not use any clamps. Never attempt to install a clamping device of any kind to tubes. When removing fuel rail assembly for any reason, be careful not to bend or kink tubes. 1. Remove fuel tank filler tube cap. 2. Perform Fuel System Pressure Release Procedure. See: Fuel Filter/Fuel Pressure Release/Service and Repair 3. Remove negative battery cable at battery. 4. Remove air duct at throttle body air box. 5. Remove air box at throttle body. 6. Remove air resonator mounting bracket at front of throttle body (2 bolts). 7. Disconnect fuel line latch clip and fuel line at fuel rail. A special tool will be necessary for fuel line disconnection. See: Fuel Line Coupler/Service and Repair 8. Remove necessary vacuum lines at throttle body. 9. Disconnect electrical connectors at all 8 fuel injectors. To remove connector . Push red colored slider away from injector (1). While pushing Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Rail > Component Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Rail - Removal > Page 5362 slider, depress tab (2) and remove connector (3) from injector. The factory fuel injection wiring harness is numerically tagged (INJ 1, INJ 2, etc.) for injector position identification. If harness is not tagged, note wiring location before removal. 10. Disconnect electrical connectors at all throttle body sensors. 11. Remove 8 ignition coils. See: Ignition System/Ignition Coil/Service and Repair/Ignition Coil - Removal 12. Remove 4 fuel rail mounting bolts (1). 13. Gently rock and pull left side of fuel rail until fuel injectors just start to clear machined holes in cylinder head. Gently rock and pull right side of rail until injectors just start to clear cylinder head holes. Repeat this procedure (left/right) until all injectors have cleared cylinder head holes. 14. Remove fuel rail (with injectors attached) from engine. 15. If fuel injectors are to be removed, See: Fuel Injector/Service and Repair/Fuel Injector - Removal . 5.7L 5.7L WARNING: The fuel system is under constant pressure even with engine off. Before servicing fuel rail, fuel system pressure must be released. See: Fuel Filter/Fuel Pressure Release/Service and Repair CAUTION: The left and right fuel rails are replaced as an assembly. Do not attempt to separate rail halves at connector tube. Due to design of tube, it does not use any clamps. Never attempt to install a clamping device of any kind to tube. When removing fuel rail assembly for any reason, be careful not to bend or kink tube. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Rail > Component Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Rail - Removal > Page 5363 1. Remove fuel tank filler tube cap. 2. Perform fuel system pressure release procedure. See: Fuel Filter/Fuel Pressure Release/Service and Repair 3. Remove negative battery cable at battery. 4. Remove flex tube (air cleaner housing to engine). 5. Remove air resonator box at throttle body. 6. Disconnect electrical connectors at all 8 fuel injectors. Push red colored slider away from injector (1). While pushing slider, depress tab (2) and remove connector (3) from injector. The factory fuel injection wiring harness is numerically tagged (INJ 1, INJ 2, etc.) for injector position identification. If harness is not tagged, note wiring location before removal. 7. Disconnect electrical connectors at all throttle body sensors. 8. Disconnect fuel supply tube quick connect fitting at the fuel rail, See: Fuel Line Coupler/Service and Repair . 9. Remove four fuel rail mounting bolts (1) and holddown clamps. 10. Gently rock and pull left side of fuel rail until fuel injectors just start to clear machined holes in intake manifold. Gently rock and pull right side of rail until injectors just start to clear intake manifold head holes. Repeat this procedure (left/right) until all injectors have cleared machined holes. 11. Remove fuel rail (with injectors attached) from engine. 12. If fuel injectors are to be removed, See: Fuel Injector/Service and Repair/Fuel Injector - Removal . Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Rail > Component Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Rail - Removal > Page 5364 Fuel Rail: Service and Repair Fuel Rail - Installation 3.7L 3.7L 1. If fuel injectors are to be installed, See: Fuel Injector/Service and Repair/Fuel Injector Installation . 2. Clean out fuel injector machined bores in intake manifold. 3. Apply a small amount of engine oil to each fuel injector O-ring. This will help in fuel rail installation. 4. Position fuel rail/fuel injector assembly to machined injector openings in cylinder head. 5. Guide each injector into cylinder head. Be careful not to tear injector O-rings. 6. Push right side of fuel rail down until fuel injectors have bottomed on cylinder head shoulder. Push left fuel rail down until injectors have bottomed on cylinder head shoulder. 7. Install 4 fuel rail mounting bolts and tighten. See: Specifications 8. Install 6 ignition coils. See: Ignition System/Ignition Coil/Service and Repair/Ignition Coil - Installation 9. Connect electrical connectors to throttle body. 10. Connect electrical connectors at all fuel injectors. To install connector, Push connector onto injector (1) and then push and lock red colored slider (2). Verify connector is locked to injector by lightly tugging on connector. 11. Connect necessary vacuum lines to throttle body. 12. Install air resonator mounting bracket near front of throttle body (2 bolts). 13. Connect fuel line latch clip and fuel line to fuel rail. See: Fuel Line Coupler/Service and Repair 14. Install air box to throttle body. 15. Install air duct to air box. 16. Connect battery cable to battery. 17. Start engine and check for leaks. 4.7L 4.7L Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Rail > Component Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Rail - Removal > Page 5365 1. If fuel injectors are to be installed, See: Fuel Injector/Service and Repair/Fuel Injector Installation . 2. Clean out fuel injector machined bores in intake manifold. 3. Apply a small amount of engine oil to each fuel injector O-ring. This will help in fuel rail installation. 4. Position fuel rail/fuel injector assembly to machined injector openings in cylinder head. 5. Guide each injector into cylinder head. Be careful not to tear injector O-rings. 6. Push right side of fuel rail down until fuel injectors have bottomed on cylinder head shoulder. Push left fuel rail down until injectors have bottomed on cylinder head shoulder. 7. Install 4 fuel rail mounting bolts and tighten. See: Specifications 8. Install 8 ignition coils. See: Ignition System/Ignition Coil/Service and Repair/Ignition Coil - Installation 9. Connect electrical connectors to throttle body. 10. Connect electrical connectors at all fuel injectors. To install connector, Push connector onto injector (1) and then push and lock red colored slider (2). Verify connector is locked to injector by lightly tugging on connector. 11. Connect necessary vacuum lines to throttle body. 12. Install air resonator mounting bracket near front of throttle body (2 bolts). 13. Connect fuel line latch clip and fuel line to fuel rail. See: Fuel Line Coupler/Service and Repair 14. Install air box to throttle body. 15. Install air duct to air box. 16. Connect battery cable to battery. 17. Start engine and check for leaks. 5.7L 5.7L Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Rail > Component Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Rail - Removal > Page 5366 1. If fuel injectors are to be installed, See: Fuel Injector/Service and Repair/Fuel Injector Installation . 2. Clean out fuel injector machined bores in intake manifold. 3. Apply a small amount of engine oil to each fuel injector O-ring. This will help in fuel rail installation. 4. Position fuel rail/fuel injector assembly to machined injector openings in intake manifold. 5. Guide each injector into intake manifold. Be careful not to tear injector O-rings. 6. Push right side of fuel rail down until fuel injectors have bottomed on shoulders. Push left fuel rail down until injectors have bottomed on shoulders. 7. Install 4 fuel rail holddown clamps and 4 mounting bolts (1) See: Specifications . 8. Connect electrical connector to throttle body. 9. Connect electrical connectors at all fuel injectors. Push connector onto injector (1) and then push and lock red colored slider (2). Verify connector is locked to injector by lightly tugging on connector. 10. Connect fuel line latch clip and fuel line to fuel rail. See: Fuel Line Coupler/Service and Repair . 11. Install air resonator to throttle body (2 bolts). 12. Install flexible air duct to air box. 13. Connect battery cable to battery. 14. Start engine and check for leaks. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Supply Line > Component Information > Description and Operation Fuel Supply Line: Description and Operation DESCRIPTION Also refer to Quick-Connect Fittings. WARNING: The fuel system may be under a constant pressure (even with the engine off). Before servicing any fuel system hoses, fittings, lines, or most components, fuel system pressure must be released. Refer to the fuel system pressure release procedure. The lines/tubes/hoses used on fuel injected vehicles are of a special construction. This is due to the higher fuel pressures and the possibility of contaminated fuel in this system. If it is necessary to replace these lines/tubes/hoses, only those marked EFM/EFI may be used. If equipped: The hose clamps used to secure rubber hoses on fuel injected vehicles are of a special rolled edge construction. This construction is used to prevent the edge of the clamp from cutting into the hose. Only these rolled edge type clamps may be used in this system. All other types of clamps may cut into the hoses and cause high-pressure fuel leaks. Use new original equipment type hose clamps. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Tank > Fuel Filler Neck > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Fuel Filler Neck: > 14-001-09A > Sep > 09 > Fuel System - Difficult Fuel Fill/Nozzle Shuts Off Fuel Filler Neck: Customer Interest Fuel System - Difficult Fuel Fill/Nozzle Shuts Off NUMBER: 14-001-09 REV. A GROUP: Fuel DATE: September 1, 2009 THIS BULLETIN SUPERSEDES TECHNICAL SERVICE BULLETIN 14-001-09, DATED APRIL 15, 2009, WHICH SHOULD BE REMOVED FROM YOUR FILES. THIS IS A COMPLETE REVISION AND NO ASTERISKS HAVE BEEN USED TO HIGHLIGHT REVISIONS. SUBJECT: Hard To Fill With Fuel Or Fuel Nozzle Shuts Off Repeatedly MODELS: 2004-2008 (CS) Pacifica 2009 (DS) Ram Truck (1500) 2007 - 2009 (DH) Ram Truck (1500/2500 Pick Up) 2004 - 2009 (DR) Ram Truck (1500 / 2500 Pick Up) 2005 - 2009 (HB) Durango 2007-2009 (HG) Aspen 2005 - 2009 (ND) Dakota 2009 (JC) Journey 2007 - 2009 (JK) Wrangler 2007 - 2009 (J1) Sebring (China CKD) 2007 - 2009 (JS) Sebring/Sebring Convertible/Avenger 2006 - 2009 (K1) Cherokee (CKD) 2007 - 2009 (KA) Nitro 2008 - 2009 (KK) Liberty 2008 - 2009 (KK) Cherokee (International Markets) 2005-2007 (KJ) Liberty 2005 - 2007 (KJ) Cherokee (International Markets) 2005 - 2009 (LE) 300C/300C Touring (International Markets) 2005 - 2009 (LX) 300/Magnum/Charger 2007 (L2) 300 (China) 2008 - 2009 (LC) Challenger 2004 - 2009 (PT) Chrysler PT Cruiser 2007 (R2) Caravan/Voyager(CKD) 2005 - 2007 (RG) Chrysler Voyager (International Markets) 2003 - 2007 (RS) Town & Country/Caravan/Voyager Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Tank > Fuel Filler Neck > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Fuel Filler Neck: > 14-001-09A > Sep > 09 > Fuel System - Difficult Fuel Fill/Nozzle Shuts Off > Page 5379 2008 - 2009 (RI) Town & Country/Grand Caravan 2008 - 2009 (RI) Town & Country/Grand Voyager (International Markets) 2005 - 2006 (TJ) Wrangler 2005 - 2009 (WH) Grand Cherokee (International Markets) 2005 - 2009 (WK) Grand Cherokee 2006 - 2009 (XH) Commander (International Markets) 2006 - 2009 (XK) Commander NOTE: This bulletin applies to all vehicles equipped with a gasoline engine. DISCUSSION: Customer may report that the vehicle is hard to fill with fuel or that the fuel pump nozzle shuts off repeatedly while trying to fill vehicle. This customer complaint can occur due to a number of different causes. The fuel tank is the least likely cause of this condition. The following Diagnostic procedure can be used to diagnose the issues. DIAGNOSIS: 1. Is the vehicle a LX/LE/LC/L2? a. Yes >> proceed to Step # 2 b. No >> proceed to Step # 4 2. Idle the vehicle 60 to 90 seconds upon stopping. 3. Does tank refill properly? a. No >> proceed to Step # 4 b. Yes >> Inform the customer to idle the vehicle for 60 to 90 seconds upon stopping if vehicle was driven aggressively. This is due to the fact that on the LX/LE/LC/L2 the fuel tank is a unique saddle tank design and needs 30 to 60 seconds while the engine is running to level the fuel in both half's of the fuel tank. Allowing the vehicle to idle for this amount of time will let the fuel pump transfer fuel to the left side tank, opening the control valve and allowing normal fuel filling. 4. Disconnect the vapor recirculation tube at the fuel tank. 5. Attempt to refill fuel tank. 6. Does tank refill properly? a. Yes >> Proceed to Step # 7 b. No >> Proceed to Step # 11. 7. Reconnect the vapor recirculation tube at the fuel tank. 8. Disconnect the other end of the vapor recirculation tube at the fuel filler tube. 9. Attempt to refill fuel tank. 10. Does tank refill properly? a. Yes >> Replace fuel filler tube. b. No >> Replace the vapor recirculation tube. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Tank > Fuel Filler Neck > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Fuel Filler Neck: > 14-001-09A > Sep > 09 > Fuel System - Difficult Fuel Fill/Nozzle Shuts Off > Page 5380 11. Disconnect the control valve to EVAP canister tube at the fuel tank. 12. Reconnect the vapor recirculation tube at the fuel tank. 13. Does tank refill properly? a. No >> Replace Fuel Tank. b. Yes >> Proceed to 14. Reconnect the control valve to EVAP canister tube at the fuel tank. 15. Disconnect the control valve to EVAP canister tube at the EVAP canister. 16. Attempt to refill fuel tank. 17. Does tank refill properly? a. Yes >> Blockage is in the EVAP Canister, or ESIM, or Clean air hose (ESIM vent hose), or filter. Diagnose appropriately. b. No >> Replace the control valve to EVAP canister tube. POLICY: Information Only Disclaimer: This bulletin is supplied as technical information only and is not an authorization for repair. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Tank > Fuel Filler Neck > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Fuel Filler Neck: > 14-001-09A > Sep > 09 > Fuel System - Difficult Fuel Fill/Nozzle Shuts Off Fuel Filler Neck: All Technical Service Bulletins Fuel System - Difficult Fuel Fill/Nozzle Shuts Off NUMBER: 14-001-09 REV. A GROUP: Fuel DATE: September 1, 2009 THIS BULLETIN SUPERSEDES TECHNICAL SERVICE BULLETIN 14-001-09, DATED APRIL 15, 2009, WHICH SHOULD BE REMOVED FROM YOUR FILES. THIS IS A COMPLETE REVISION AND NO ASTERISKS HAVE BEEN USED TO HIGHLIGHT REVISIONS. SUBJECT: Hard To Fill With Fuel Or Fuel Nozzle Shuts Off Repeatedly MODELS: 2004-2008 (CS) Pacifica 2009 (DS) Ram Truck (1500) 2007 - 2009 (DH) Ram Truck (1500/2500 Pick Up) 2004 - 2009 (DR) Ram Truck (1500 / 2500 Pick Up) 2005 - 2009 (HB) Durango 2007-2009 (HG) Aspen 2005 - 2009 (ND) Dakota 2009 (JC) Journey 2007 - 2009 (JK) Wrangler 2007 - 2009 (J1) Sebring (China CKD) 2007 - 2009 (JS) Sebring/Sebring Convertible/Avenger 2006 - 2009 (K1) Cherokee (CKD) 2007 - 2009 (KA) Nitro 2008 - 2009 (KK) Liberty 2008 - 2009 (KK) Cherokee (International Markets) 2005-2007 (KJ) Liberty 2005 - 2007 (KJ) Cherokee (International Markets) 2005 - 2009 (LE) 300C/300C Touring (International Markets) 2005 - 2009 (LX) 300/Magnum/Charger 2007 (L2) 300 (China) 2008 - 2009 (LC) Challenger 2004 - 2009 (PT) Chrysler PT Cruiser 2007 (R2) Caravan/Voyager(CKD) 2005 - 2007 (RG) Chrysler Voyager (International Markets) 2003 - 2007 (RS) Town & Country/Caravan/Voyager Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Tank > Fuel Filler Neck > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Fuel Filler Neck: > 14-001-09A > Sep > 09 > Fuel System - Difficult Fuel Fill/Nozzle Shuts Off > Page 5386 2008 - 2009 (RI) Town & Country/Grand Caravan 2008 - 2009 (RI) Town & Country/Grand Voyager (International Markets) 2005 - 2006 (TJ) Wrangler 2005 - 2009 (WH) Grand Cherokee (International Markets) 2005 - 2009 (WK) Grand Cherokee 2006 - 2009 (XH) Commander (International Markets) 2006 - 2009 (XK) Commander NOTE: This bulletin applies to all vehicles equipped with a gasoline engine. DISCUSSION: Customer may report that the vehicle is hard to fill with fuel or that the fuel pump nozzle shuts off repeatedly while trying to fill vehicle. This customer complaint can occur due to a number of different causes. The fuel tank is the least likely cause of this condition. The following Diagnostic procedure can be used to diagnose the issues. DIAGNOSIS: 1. Is the vehicle a LX/LE/LC/L2? a. Yes >> proceed to Step # 2 b. No >> proceed to Step # 4 2. Idle the vehicle 60 to 90 seconds upon stopping. 3. Does tank refill properly? a. No >> proceed to Step # 4 b. Yes >> Inform the customer to idle the vehicle for 60 to 90 seconds upon stopping if vehicle was driven aggressively. This is due to the fact that on the LX/LE/LC/L2 the fuel tank is a unique saddle tank design and needs 30 to 60 seconds while the engine is running to level the fuel in both half's of the fuel tank. Allowing the vehicle to idle for this amount of time will let the fuel pump transfer fuel to the left side tank, opening the control valve and allowing normal fuel filling. 4. Disconnect the vapor recirculation tube at the fuel tank. 5. Attempt to refill fuel tank. 6. Does tank refill properly? a. Yes >> Proceed to Step # 7 b. No >> Proceed to Step # 11. 7. Reconnect the vapor recirculation tube at the fuel tank. 8. Disconnect the other end of the vapor recirculation tube at the fuel filler tube. 9. Attempt to refill fuel tank. 10. Does tank refill properly? a. Yes >> Replace fuel filler tube. b. No >> Replace the vapor recirculation tube. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Tank > Fuel Filler Neck > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Fuel Filler Neck: > 14-001-09A > Sep > 09 > Fuel System - Difficult Fuel Fill/Nozzle Shuts Off > Page 5387 11. Disconnect the control valve to EVAP canister tube at the fuel tank. 12. Reconnect the vapor recirculation tube at the fuel tank. 13. Does tank refill properly? a. No >> Replace Fuel Tank. b. Yes >> Proceed to 14. Reconnect the control valve to EVAP canister tube at the fuel tank. 15. Disconnect the control valve to EVAP canister tube at the EVAP canister. 16. Attempt to refill fuel tank. 17. Does tank refill properly? a. Yes >> Blockage is in the EVAP Canister, or ESIM, or Clean air hose (ESIM vent hose), or filter. Diagnose appropriately. b. No >> Replace the control valve to EVAP canister tube. POLICY: Information Only Disclaimer: This bulletin is supplied as technical information only and is not an authorization for repair. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Tank > Fuel Gauge Sender > Component Information > Locations Fuel Gauge Sender: Locations DESCRIPTION The fuel pump module assembly is located on the top of the fuel tank. The complete assembly contains the following components: - A combination fuel filter/fuel pressure regulator - A separate fuel pick-up, or inlet filter - An electric fuel pump - A lockring to retain pump module to tank - A soft gasket between tank flange and module - A fuel gauge sending unit (fuel level sensor) - Fuel line connection The fuel gauge sending unit may be serviced separately. If the electrical fuel pump, primary inlet filter, fuel filter or fuel pressure regulator require service, the fuel pump module must be replaced. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Tank > Fuel Gauge Sender > Component Information > Description and Operation > Fuel Level Sending Unit / Sensor Fuel Gauge Sender: Description and Operation Fuel Level Sending Unit / Sensor DESCRIPTION The fuel gauge sending unit (fuel level sensor) is attached to the fuel pump module. The sending unit consists of a float, an arm, and a variable resistor track (card). The sensor is non-serviceable. If replacement is necessary, the fuel pump module assembly must be replaced. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Tank > Fuel Gauge Sender > Component Information > Description and Operation > Fuel Level Sending Unit / Sensor > Page 5393 Fuel Gauge Sender: Description and Operation Fuel Pump Module Description DESCRIPTION The fuel pump module assembly is located on the top of the fuel tank. The complete assembly contains the following components: - A combination fuel filter/fuel pressure regulator - A separate fuel pick-up, or inlet filter - An electric fuel pump - A lockring to retain pump module to tank - A soft gasket between tank flange and module - A fuel gauge sending unit (fuel level sensor) - Fuel line connection The fuel gauge sending unit may be serviced separately. If the electrical fuel pump, primary inlet filter, fuel filter or fuel pressure regulator require service, the fuel pump module must be replaced. Operation OPERATION Refer to Fuel Pump, Inlet Filter, Fuel Filter / Fuel Pressure Regulator and Fuel Gauge Sending Unit. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Tank > Fuel Gauge Sender > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Fuel Gauge Sender: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL WARNING: The fuel system may be under a constant pressure (even with the engine off). Before servicing the fuel pump module, the fuel system pressure must be released. 1. Drain and remove fuel tank. Refer to Fuel Tank Removal/Installation. 2. Remove plastic fuel pump module cover (1) by pushing pegs (2) outward. 3. Note rotational position of module before attempting removal. An indexing arrow is located on top of module for this purpose. 4. Position Special Tool 9340 (3) into notches on outside edge of lockring (5). 5. Install 1/2 inch drive breaker bar (1) to tool 9340 (3). 6. Rotate breaker bar counter-clockwise to remove lockring (5). 7. Remove lockring. The module will spring up slightly when lockring is removed. 8. Remove module from fuel tank. Be careful not to bend float arm while removing. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Tank > Fuel Gauge Sender > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 5396 Fuel Gauge Sender: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION 1. Using a new seal (gasket), position fuel pump module into opening in fuel tank. 2. Position lockring (5) over top of fuel pump module. 3. Rotate module until embossed alignment arrow points to center alignment mark. This step must be performed to prevent float from contacting side of fuel tank. Also be sure fuel fitting on top of pump module is pointed to drivers side of vehicle. 4. Install Special Tool 9340 (3) to lockring. 5. Install 1/2 inch drive breaker (1) into Special Tool 9340 (3). 6. Tighten lockring (clockwise) until all seven notches have engaged. 7. Snap plastic fuel pump module cover (1) to pump module. 8. Install fuel tank. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Tank > Fuel Tank Vent > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Fuel Tank Vent: > 14-001-09A > Sep > 09 > Fuel System - Difficult Fuel Fill/Nozzle Shuts Off Fuel Tank Vent: Customer Interest Fuel System - Difficult Fuel Fill/Nozzle Shuts Off NUMBER: 14-001-09 REV. A GROUP: Fuel DATE: September 1, 2009 THIS BULLETIN SUPERSEDES TECHNICAL SERVICE BULLETIN 14-001-09, DATED APRIL 15, 2009, WHICH SHOULD BE REMOVED FROM YOUR FILES. THIS IS A COMPLETE REVISION AND NO ASTERISKS HAVE BEEN USED TO HIGHLIGHT REVISIONS. SUBJECT: Hard To Fill With Fuel Or Fuel Nozzle Shuts Off Repeatedly MODELS: 2004-2008 (CS) Pacifica 2009 (DS) Ram Truck (1500) 2007 - 2009 (DH) Ram Truck (1500/2500 Pick Up) 2004 - 2009 (DR) Ram Truck (1500 / 2500 Pick Up) 2005 - 2009 (HB) Durango 2007-2009 (HG) Aspen 2005 - 2009 (ND) Dakota 2009 (JC) Journey 2007 - 2009 (JK) Wrangler 2007 - 2009 (J1) Sebring (China CKD) 2007 - 2009 (JS) Sebring/Sebring Convertible/Avenger 2006 - 2009 (K1) Cherokee (CKD) 2007 - 2009 (KA) Nitro 2008 - 2009 (KK) Liberty 2008 - 2009 (KK) Cherokee (International Markets) 2005-2007 (KJ) Liberty 2005 - 2007 (KJ) Cherokee (International Markets) 2005 - 2009 (LE) 300C/300C Touring (International Markets) 2005 - 2009 (LX) 300/Magnum/Charger 2007 (L2) 300 (China) 2008 - 2009 (LC) Challenger 2004 - 2009 (PT) Chrysler PT Cruiser 2007 (R2) Caravan/Voyager(CKD) 2005 - 2007 (RG) Chrysler Voyager (International Markets) 2003 - 2007 (RS) Town & Country/Caravan/Voyager Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Tank > Fuel Tank Vent > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Fuel Tank Vent: > 14-001-09A > Sep > 09 > Fuel System - Difficult Fuel Fill/Nozzle Shuts Off > Page 5405 2008 - 2009 (RI) Town & Country/Grand Caravan 2008 - 2009 (RI) Town & Country/Grand Voyager (International Markets) 2005 - 2006 (TJ) Wrangler 2005 - 2009 (WH) Grand Cherokee (International Markets) 2005 - 2009 (WK) Grand Cherokee 2006 - 2009 (XH) Commander (International Markets) 2006 - 2009 (XK) Commander NOTE: This bulletin applies to all vehicles equipped with a gasoline engine. DISCUSSION: Customer may report that the vehicle is hard to fill with fuel or that the fuel pump nozzle shuts off repeatedly while trying to fill vehicle. This customer complaint can occur due to a number of different causes. The fuel tank is the least likely cause of this condition. The following Diagnostic procedure can be used to diagnose the issues. DIAGNOSIS: 1. Is the vehicle a LX/LE/LC/L2? a. Yes >> proceed to Step # 2 b. No >> proceed to Step # 4 2. Idle the vehicle 60 to 90 seconds upon stopping. 3. Does tank refill properly? a. No >> proceed to Step # 4 b. Yes >> Inform the customer to idle the vehicle for 60 to 90 seconds upon stopping if vehicle was driven aggressively. This is due to the fact that on the LX/LE/LC/L2 the fuel tank is a unique saddle tank design and needs 30 to 60 seconds while the engine is running to level the fuel in both half's of the fuel tank. Allowing the vehicle to idle for this amount of time will let the fuel pump transfer fuel to the left side tank, opening the control valve and allowing normal fuel filling. 4. Disconnect the vapor recirculation tube at the fuel tank. 5. Attempt to refill fuel tank. 6. Does tank refill properly? a. Yes >> Proceed to Step # 7 b. No >> Proceed to Step # 11. 7. Reconnect the vapor recirculation tube at the fuel tank. 8. Disconnect the other end of the vapor recirculation tube at the fuel filler tube. 9. Attempt to refill fuel tank. 10. Does tank refill properly? a. Yes >> Replace fuel filler tube. b. No >> Replace the vapor recirculation tube. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Tank > Fuel Tank Vent > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Fuel Tank Vent: > 14-001-09A > Sep > 09 > Fuel System - Difficult Fuel Fill/Nozzle Shuts Off > Page 5406 11. Disconnect the control valve to EVAP canister tube at the fuel tank. 12. Reconnect the vapor recirculation tube at the fuel tank. 13. Does tank refill properly? a. No >> Replace Fuel Tank. b. Yes >> Proceed to 14. Reconnect the control valve to EVAP canister tube at the fuel tank. 15. Disconnect the control valve to EVAP canister tube at the EVAP canister. 16. Attempt to refill fuel tank. 17. Does tank refill properly? a. Yes >> Blockage is in the EVAP Canister, or ESIM, or Clean air hose (ESIM vent hose), or filter. Diagnose appropriately. b. No >> Replace the control valve to EVAP canister tube. POLICY: Information Only Disclaimer: This bulletin is supplied as technical information only and is not an authorization for repair. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Tank > Fuel Tank Vent > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Fuel Tank Vent: > 14-001-09A > Sep > 09 > Fuel System - Difficult Fuel Fill/Nozzle Shuts Off Fuel Tank Vent: All Technical Service Bulletins Fuel System - Difficult Fuel Fill/Nozzle Shuts Off NUMBER: 14-001-09 REV. A GROUP: Fuel DATE: September 1, 2009 THIS BULLETIN SUPERSEDES TECHNICAL SERVICE BULLETIN 14-001-09, DATED APRIL 15, 2009, WHICH SHOULD BE REMOVED FROM YOUR FILES. THIS IS A COMPLETE REVISION AND NO ASTERISKS HAVE BEEN USED TO HIGHLIGHT REVISIONS. SUBJECT: Hard To Fill With Fuel Or Fuel Nozzle Shuts Off Repeatedly MODELS: 2004-2008 (CS) Pacifica 2009 (DS) Ram Truck (1500) 2007 - 2009 (DH) Ram Truck (1500/2500 Pick Up) 2004 - 2009 (DR) Ram Truck (1500 / 2500 Pick Up) 2005 - 2009 (HB) Durango 2007-2009 (HG) Aspen 2005 - 2009 (ND) Dakota 2009 (JC) Journey 2007 - 2009 (JK) Wrangler 2007 - 2009 (J1) Sebring (China CKD) 2007 - 2009 (JS) Sebring/Sebring Convertible/Avenger 2006 - 2009 (K1) Cherokee (CKD) 2007 - 2009 (KA) Nitro 2008 - 2009 (KK) Liberty 2008 - 2009 (KK) Cherokee (International Markets) 2005-2007 (KJ) Liberty 2005 - 2007 (KJ) Cherokee (International Markets) 2005 - 2009 (LE) 300C/300C Touring (International Markets) 2005 - 2009 (LX) 300/Magnum/Charger 2007 (L2) 300 (China) 2008 - 2009 (LC) Challenger 2004 - 2009 (PT) Chrysler PT Cruiser 2007 (R2) Caravan/Voyager(CKD) 2005 - 2007 (RG) Chrysler Voyager (International Markets) 2003 - 2007 (RS) Town & Country/Caravan/Voyager Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Tank > Fuel Tank Vent > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Fuel Tank Vent: > 14-001-09A > Sep > 09 > Fuel System - Difficult Fuel Fill/Nozzle Shuts Off > Page 5412 2008 - 2009 (RI) Town & Country/Grand Caravan 2008 - 2009 (RI) Town & Country/Grand Voyager (International Markets) 2005 - 2006 (TJ) Wrangler 2005 - 2009 (WH) Grand Cherokee (International Markets) 2005 - 2009 (WK) Grand Cherokee 2006 - 2009 (XH) Commander (International Markets) 2006 - 2009 (XK) Commander NOTE: This bulletin applies to all vehicles equipped with a gasoline engine. DISCUSSION: Customer may report that the vehicle is hard to fill with fuel or that the fuel pump nozzle shuts off repeatedly while trying to fill vehicle. This customer complaint can occur due to a number of different causes. The fuel tank is the least likely cause of this condition. The following Diagnostic procedure can be used to diagnose the issues. DIAGNOSIS: 1. Is the vehicle a LX/LE/LC/L2? a. Yes >> proceed to Step # 2 b. No >> proceed to Step # 4 2. Idle the vehicle 60 to 90 seconds upon stopping. 3. Does tank refill properly? a. No >> proceed to Step # 4 b. Yes >> Inform the customer to idle the vehicle for 60 to 90 seconds upon stopping if vehicle was driven aggressively. This is due to the fact that on the LX/LE/LC/L2 the fuel tank is a unique saddle tank design and needs 30 to 60 seconds while the engine is running to level the fuel in both half's of the fuel tank. Allowing the vehicle to idle for this amount of time will let the fuel pump transfer fuel to the left side tank, opening the control valve and allowing normal fuel filling. 4. Disconnect the vapor recirculation tube at the fuel tank. 5. Attempt to refill fuel tank. 6. Does tank refill properly? a. Yes >> Proceed to Step # 7 b. No >> Proceed to Step # 11. 7. Reconnect the vapor recirculation tube at the fuel tank. 8. Disconnect the other end of the vapor recirculation tube at the fuel filler tube. 9. Attempt to refill fuel tank. 10. Does tank refill properly? a. Yes >> Replace fuel filler tube. b. No >> Replace the vapor recirculation tube. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Tank > Fuel Tank Vent > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Fuel Tank Vent: > 14-001-09A > Sep > 09 > Fuel System - Difficult Fuel Fill/Nozzle Shuts Off > Page 5413 11. Disconnect the control valve to EVAP canister tube at the fuel tank. 12. Reconnect the vapor recirculation tube at the fuel tank. 13. Does tank refill properly? a. No >> Replace Fuel Tank. b. Yes >> Proceed to 14. Reconnect the control valve to EVAP canister tube at the fuel tank. 15. Disconnect the control valve to EVAP canister tube at the EVAP canister. 16. Attempt to refill fuel tank. 17. Does tank refill properly? a. Yes >> Blockage is in the EVAP Canister, or ESIM, or Clean air hose (ESIM vent hose), or filter. Diagnose appropriately. b. No >> Replace the control valve to EVAP canister tube. POLICY: Information Only Disclaimer: This bulletin is supplied as technical information only and is not an authorization for repair. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Idle Speed/Throttle Actuator Electronic > Component Information > Diagrams Idle Speed/Throttle Actuator - Electronic: Diagrams Component ID: 221 Component : MOTOR-IAC Connector: Name : MOTOR-IAC Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (4.7L) Pin Circuit Description 1 K961 20BR/VT IAC SIGNAL 2 K61 20VT/GY IAC CONTROL Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Diagrams Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System): Diagrams Connector - (IN TIPM) RELAY-AUTO SHUT DOWN - (IN TIPM) Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 5420 Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System): Description and Operation PCM OUTPUT The 5 pin, 12 volt, Automatic Shutdown (ASD) relay is located in the Power Distribution Center (PDC). Refer to label on PDC cover for relay location. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 5421 Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System): Testing and Inspection Fig.1 ASD And Fuel Pump Relay Terminals-Type 1 Fig.2 ASD And Fuel Pump Relay Terminals-Type 2 The following description of operation and tests apply only to the Automatic Shutdown (ASD) and fuel pump relays. The terminals on the bottom of each relay are numbered. Two different types of relays may be used, or. - Terminal number 30 is connected to battery voltage. For both the ASD and fuel pump relays, terminal 30 is connected to battery voltage at all times. - The PCM grounds the coil side of the relay through terminal number 85. - Terminal number 86 supplies voltage to the coil side of the relay. - When the PCM de-energizes the ASD and fuel pump relays, terminal number 87A connects to terminal 30. This is the OFF position. In the OFF position, voltage is not supplied to the rest of the circuit. Terminal 87A is the center terminal on the relay. - When the PCM energizes the ASD and fuel pump relays, terminal 87 connects to terminal 30. This is the ON position. Terminal 87 supplies voltage to the rest of the circuit. The following procedure applies to the ASD and fuel pump relays. 1. Remove relay from connector before testing. 2. With the relay removed from the vehicle, use an ohmmeter to check the resistance between terminals 85 and 86. The resistance should be 75 ohms Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 5422 ± 5 ohms. 3. Connect the ohmmeter between terminals 30 and 87A. The ohmmeter should show continuity between terminals 30 and 87A. 4. Connect the ohmmeter between terminals 87 and 30. The ohmmeter should not show continuity at this time. 5. Connect one end of a jumper wire (16 gauge or smaller) to relay terminal 85. Connect the other end of the jumper wire to the ground side of a 12 volt power source. 6. Connect one end of another jumper wire (16 gauge or smaller) to the power side of the 12 volt power source. Do not attach the other end of the jumper wire to the relay at this time. WARNING: DO NOT ALLOW OHMMETER TO CONTACT TERMINALS 85 OR 86 DURING THIS TEST. DAMAGE TO OHMMETER MAY RESULT. 7. Attach the other end of the jumper wire to relay terminal 86. This activates the relay. The ohmmeter should now show continuity between relay terminals 87 and 30. The ohmmeter should not show continuity between relay terminals 87A and 30. 8. Disconnect jumper wires. 9. Replace the relay if it did not pass the continuity and resistance tests. If the relay passed the tests, it operates properly. Check the remainder of the ASD and fuel pump relay circuits. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Locations Fuel Pump Relay: Locations DESCRIPTION A separate fuel pump relay is no longer used. A circuit within the TIPM (Totally Integrated Power Module) is used to control the electric fuel pump located within the fuel pump module. The TIPM (1) is located in the engine compartment in front of the battery. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Fuel Pump Relay: Diagram Information and Instructions Warnings WARNINGS - GENERAL WARNINGS provide information to prevent personal injury and vehicle damage. Below is a list of general warnings that should be followed any time a vehicle is being serviced. WARNING: Always wear safety glasses for eye protection. WARNING: Use safety stands anytime a procedure requires being under a vehicle. WARNING: Be sure that the ignition switch always is in the off position, unless the procedure requires it to be on. WARNING: Set the parking brake when working on any vehicle. An automatic transmission should be in park. A manual transmission should be in neutral. WARNING: Operate the engine only in a well-ventilated area. WARNING: Keep away from moving parts when the engine is running, especially the fan and belts. WARNING: To prevent serious burns, avoid contact with hot parts such as the radiator, exhaust manifold(s), tail pipe, catalytic converter and muffler. WARNING: Do not allow flame or sparks near the battery. Gases are always present in and around the battery. WARNING: Always remove rings, watches, loose hanging jewelry and avoid loose clothing. How to Use Wiring Diagrams DESCRIPTION - HOW TO USE WIRING DIAGRAMS DaimlerChrysler Corporation wiring diagrams are designed to provide information regarding the vehicles wiring content. In order to effectively use the wiring diagrams to diagnose and repair DaimlerChrysler Corporation vehicles, it is important to understand all of their features and characteristics. Diagrams are arranged such that the power (B+) side of the circuit is placed near the top of the page, and the ground (B-) side of the circuit is placed near the bottom of the page. All switches, components, and modules are shown in the at rest position with the doors closed and the key removed from the ignition. Components are shown two ways. A solid line around a component indicates that the component is complete. A dashed line around the component indicates that the component is being shown is not complete. Incomplete components have a reference number to indicate the page where the component is shown complete. It is important to realize that no attempt is made on the diagrams to represent components and wiring as they appear on the vehicle. For example, a short piece of wire is treated the same as a long one. In addition, switches and other components are shown as simply as possible, with regard to function only. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5429 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5430 SYMBOLS International symbols are used throughout the wiring diagrams. These symbols are consistent with those being used around the world. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5431 TERMINOLOGY This is a list of terms and definitions used in the wiring diagrams. LHD - Left Hand Drive Vehicles RHD - Right Hand Drive Vehicles ATX - Automatic Transmissions-Front Wheel Drive MTX Manual Transmissions-Front Wheel Drive Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5432 AT - Automatic Transmissions-Rear Wheel Drive MT - Manual Transmissions-Rear Wheel Drive SOHC - Single Over Head Cam Engine DOHC - Double Over Head Cam Engine Export - Vehicles Built For Sale In Markets Other Than North America Except Export - Vehicles Built For Sale In North America Circuit Functions DESCRIPTION - CIRCUIT FUNCTIONS All circuits in the diagrams use an alpha/numeric code to identify the wire and it's function. To identify which circuit code applies to a system, refer to the Circuit Identification Code Chart. This chart shows the main circuits only and does not show the secondary codes that may apply to some models. Circuit Information DESCRIPTION - CIRCUIT INFORMATION Each wire shown in the diagrams contains a code which identifies the main circuit, a specific part of the main circuit, gage of wire, and color. An example would be A 2 18 LB/YL. This is a Battery Feed circuit, level two, eighteen gauge, light blue with a yellow tracer. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5433 Connector, Ground and Splice Information DESCRIPTION - CONNECTOR, GROUND AND SPLICE INFORMATION CAUTION: Not all connectors are serviced. Some connectors are serviced only with a harness. A typical example might be the Supplemental Restraint System connectors. Always check parts availability before attempting a repair. IDENTIFICATION In-line connectors are identified by a number, as follows: - In-line connectors located in the engine compartment are C100 series numbers. - In-line connectors located in the instrument panel area are C200 series numbers. - In-line connectors located in the body are C300 series numbers. - Jumper harness connectors are C400 series numbers. - Grounds and ground connectors are identified with a "G" and follow the same series numbering as the in-line connectors. - Splices are identified with an "S" and follow the same series numbering as the in-line connectors. In addition, S001-S099 numbers are located in the engine compartment. - Component connectors are identified by the component name instead of a number. Multiple connectors on a component use a C1, C2, etc. identifier. LOCATIONS Vehicle/Locations contains the master connector/ground/splice location index charts with hyperlinks to the applicable location illustrations. The illustrations contain the connector name (or number)/ground number/splice number and component identification. The abbreviation T/O is used in the component location section to indicate a point in which the wiring harness branches out to a component. The abbreviation N/S means Not Shown in the illustrations Section Identification and Information DESCRIPTION - SECTION IDENTIFICATION AND INFORMATION The wiring diagrams are grouped into individual sections. If a component is most likely found in a particular group, it will be shown complete (all wires, Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5434 connectors, and pins) within that group. For example, the Auto Shutdown Relay is most likely to be found in Powertrain Management, so it is shown there complete. It can, however, be shown partially in another group if it contains some associated wiring. Splice diagrams show the entire splice and provide references to other sections the splices serves. Splice Information only contains splice diagrams that are not shown in their entirety somewhere else in the wiring diagrams. Connector Pin-Outs shows each connector and the circuits involved with that connector. The connectors are identified using the name/number on the diagram pages. Removal REMOVAL 1. Disconnect battery. 2. Release Connector Lock (2). 3. Disconnect the connector (3) being repaired from its mating half/component. 4. Remove the dress cover (if applicable) (1). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5435 5. Release the Secondary Terminal Lock, if required (1). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5436 6. Position the connector locking finger away from the terminal using the proper special tool. Pull on the wire to remove the terminal from the connector. Installation Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5437 INSTALLATION 1. Insert the removed terminal in the same cavity on the repair connector. 2. Repeat steps for each terminal in the connector, being sure that all wires are inserted into the proper cavities. For additional connector pin-out identification, refer to the wiring diagrams. 3. When the connector is re-assembled, the secondary terminal lock must be placed in the locked position to prevent terminal push out. 4. Replace dress cover (if applicable). 5. Connect connector to its mating half/component. 6. Connect battery and test all affected systems. Removal REMOVAL 1. Disconnect the battery. 2. Locate the diode in the harness, and remove the protective covering. 3. Remove the diode from the harness, pay attention to the current flow direction (1) (2) (3). Installation INSTALLATION 1. Remove the insulation from the wires in the harness. Only remove enough insulation to solder in the new diode. 2. Install the new diode in the harness, making sure current flow is correct. If necessary, refer to the appropriate wiring diagram for current flow. 3. Solder the connection together using rosin core type solder only. Do not use acid core solder. 4. Tape the diode to the harness using electrical tape. Make sure the diode is completely sealed from the elements. 5. Re-connect the battery and test affected systems. Removal REMOVAL 1. Follow steps for removing terminals described in the connector removal section. 2. Cut the wire 6 inches from the back of the connector. Installation INSTALLATION 1. Select a wire from the terminal repair kit that best matches the color and gage of the wire being repaired. 2. Cut the repair wire to the proper length and remove one-half (1/2) inch of insulation. 3. Splice the repair wire to the wire harness (see wire splicing procedure). See: Service Procedures/Wire Splicing 4. Insert the repaired wire into the connector. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5438 5. Install the connector locking wedge, if required, and reconnect the connector to its mating half/component. 6. Re-tape the wire harness starting at 1-1/2 inches behind the connector and 2 inches past the repair. 7. Connect battery and test all affected systems. Wire Splicing STANDARD PROCEDURE - WIRE SPLICING When splicing a wire, it is important that the correct gage be used as shown in the wiring diagrams. 1. Remove one-half (1/2) inch of insulation from each wire that needs to be spliced. 2. Place a piece of adhesive lined heat shrink tubing on one side of the wire. Make sure the tubing will be long enough to cover and seal the entire repair area. 3. Place the strands of wire overlapping each other inside of the splice clip (1). 4. Using crimping tool (1), Mopar p/n 05019912AA, crimp the splice clip and wires together. 5. Solder (3) the connection (2) together using rosin core type solder (1) only. CAUTION: DO NOT USE ACID CORE SOLDER. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5439 6. Center the heat shrink tubing (2) over the joint and heat using a heat gun. Heat the joint until the tubing is tightly sealed and sealant (1) comes out of both ends of the tubing. Special Tools WIRING/TERMINAL PROBING TOOL PACKAGE 6807 TERMINAL PICK TOOL SET 6680 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5440 TERMINAL REMOVING TOOLS 6932 AND 8638 TERMINAL REMOVING TOOL 6934 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5441 Fuel Pump Relay: Diagnostic Aids Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) Sensitive Devices STANDARD PROCEDURE - ELECTROSTATIC DISCHARGE (ESD) SENSITIVE DEVICES All ESD sensitive components are solid state and a symbol is used to indicate this. When handling any component with this symbol, comply with the following procedures to reduce the possibility of electrostatic charge build up on the body and inadvertent discharge into the component. If it is not known whether the part is ESD sensitive, assume that it is. 1. Always touch a known good ground before handling the part. This should be repeated while handling the part and more frequently after sliding across a seat, sitting down from a standing position, or walking a distance. 2. Avoid touching electrical terminals of the part, unless instructed to do so by a written procedure. 3. When using a voltmeter, be sure to connect the ground lead first. 4. Do not remove the part from it's protective packing until it is time to install the part. 5. Before removing the part from it's package, ground the package to a known good ground on the vehicle. Testing Of Voltage Potential STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING OF VOLTAGE POTENTIAL 1. Connect the ground lead of a voltmeter to a known good ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the voltmeter to the selected test point. The vehicle ignition may need to be turned ON to check voltage. Refer to the appropriate test procedure. Testing For Continuity Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5442 STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING FOR CONTINUITY 1. Remove the fuse (1) for the circuit being checked or, disconnect the battery. 2. Connect one lead of the ohmmeter to one side of the circuit being tested 3. Connect the other lead to the other end of the circuit being tested. Low or no resistance means good continuity. Testing For A Short To Ground STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING FOR A SHORT TO GROUND 1. Remove the fuse and disconnect all items involved with the fuse. 2. Connect a test light or a voltmeter across the terminals of the fuse. 3. Starting at the fuse block, wiggle the wiring harness about six to eight inches apart and watch the voltmeter/test lamp. 4. If the voltmeter registers voltage or the test lamp glows, there is a short to ground in that general area of the wiring harness. Testing For A Short To Ground On Fuses Powering Several Loads STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING FOR A SHORT TO GROUND ON FUSES POWERING SEVERAL LOADS 1. Refer to the wiring diagrams and disconnect or isolate all items on the suspected fused circuits. 2. Replace the blown fuse. 3. Supply power to the fuse by turning ON the ignition switch or re-connecting the battery. 4. Start connecting or energizing the items in the fuse circuit one at a time. When the fuse blows the circuit with the short to ground has been isolated. Testing For A Voltage Drop STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING FOR A VOLTAGE DROP Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5443 1. Connect the positive lead of the voltmeter to the side of the circuit closest to the battery. 2. Connect the other lead of the voltmeter to the other side of the switch, component or circuit. 3. Operate the item. 4. The voltmeter will show the difference in voltage between the two points. Troubleshooting Wiring Problems DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING - WIRING HARNESS TROUBLESHOOTING TOOLS When diagnosing a problem in an electrical circuit there are several common tools necessary. These tools are listed and explained below. - Jumper Wire - This is a test wire used to connect two points of a circuit. It can be used to bypass an open in a circuit. WARNING: Never use a jumper wire across a load, such as a motor, connected between a battery feed and ground. - Voltmeter - Used to check for voltage on a circuit. Always connect the black lead to a known good ground and the red lead to the positive side of the circuit. CAUTION: Most of the electrical components used in today's vehicles are Solid State. When checking voltages in these circuits, use a meter with a 10 - megohm or greater impedance rating. - Ohmmeter - Used to check the resistance between two points of a circuit. Low or no resistance in a circuit means good continuity. CAUTION: Most of the electrical components used in today's vehicles are Solid State. When checking resistance in these circuits use a meter with a 10 - megohm or greater impedance rating. In addition, make sure the power is disconnected from the circuit. Circuits that are powered up by the vehicle's electrical system can cause damage to the equipment and provide false readings. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5444 - Probing Tools - These tools are used for probing terminals in connectors. Select the proper size tool from Special Tool Package 6807, and insert the probing end (2) into the terminal being tested. Use the other end of the tool (1) to insert the meter probe. INTERMITTENT AND POOR CONNECTIONS Most intermittent electrical problems are caused by faulty electrical connections or wiring. It is also possible for a sticking component or relay to cause a problem. Before condemning a component or wiring assembly, check the following items. - Connectors are fully seated - Spread terminals, or terminal push out - Terminals in the wiring assembly are fully seated into the connector/component and locked into position - Dirt or corrosion on the terminals. Any amount of corrosion or dirt could cause an intermittent problem - Damaged connector/component casing exposing the item to dirt or moisture - Wire insulation that has rubbed through causing a short to ground - Some or all of the wiring strands broken inside of the insulation - Wiring broken inside of the insulation TROUBLESHOOTING WIRING PROBLEMS When troubleshooting wiring problems there are six steps which can aid in the procedure. The steps are listed and explained below. Always check for non-factory items added to the vehicle before doing any diagnosis. If the vehicle is equipped with these items, disconnect them to verify these add-on items are not the cause of the problem. 1. Verify the problem. 2. Verify any related symptoms. Do this by performing operational checks on components that are in the same circuit. Refer to the wiring diagrams. 3. Analyze the symptoms. Use the wiring diagrams to determine what the circuit is doing, where the problem most likely is occurring and where the diagnosis will continue. 4. Isolate the problem area. 5. Repair the problem area. 6. Verify the proper operation. For this step, check for proper operation of all items on the repaired circuit. Refer to the wiring diagrams. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5445 Fuel Pump Relay: Connector Views Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Fuel Pump Relay: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION A separate fuel pump relay is no longer used. A circuit within the TIPM (Totally Integrated Power Module) is used to control the electric fuel pump located within the fuel pump module. The TIPM (1) is located in the engine compartment in front of the battery. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 5448 Fuel Pump Relay: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The Powertrain Control Module (PCM) energizes the electric fuel pump through the fuel pump relay. The fuel pump relay is energized by first applying battery voltage to it when the ignition key is turned ON, and then applying a ground signal to the relay from the PCM. Whenever the ignition key is turned ON, the electric fuel pump will operate. But, the PCM will shut-down the ground circuit to the fuel pump relay in approximately 1-3 seconds unless the engine is operating or the starter motor is engaged. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Diagrams Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System): Diagrams Connector - (IN TIPM) RELAY-AUTO SHUT DOWN - (IN TIPM) Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 5452 Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System): Description and Operation PCM OUTPUT The 5 pin, 12 volt, Automatic Shutdown (ASD) relay is located in the Power Distribution Center (PDC). Refer to label on PDC cover for relay location. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 5453 Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System): Testing and Inspection Fig.1 ASD And Fuel Pump Relay Terminals-Type 1 Fig.2 ASD And Fuel Pump Relay Terminals-Type 2 The following description of operation and tests apply only to the Automatic Shutdown (ASD) and fuel pump relays. The terminals on the bottom of each relay are numbered. Two different types of relays may be used, or. - Terminal number 30 is connected to battery voltage. For both the ASD and fuel pump relays, terminal 30 is connected to battery voltage at all times. - The PCM grounds the coil side of the relay through terminal number 85. - Terminal number 86 supplies voltage to the coil side of the relay. - When the PCM de-energizes the ASD and fuel pump relays, terminal number 87A connects to terminal 30. This is the OFF position. In the OFF position, voltage is not supplied to the rest of the circuit. Terminal 87A is the center terminal on the relay. - When the PCM energizes the ASD and fuel pump relays, terminal 87 connects to terminal 30. This is the ON position. Terminal 87 supplies voltage to the rest of the circuit. The following procedure applies to the ASD and fuel pump relays. 1. Remove relay from connector before testing. 2. With the relay removed from the vehicle, use an ohmmeter to check the resistance between terminals 85 and 86. The resistance should be 75 ohms Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 5454 ± 5 ohms. 3. Connect the ohmmeter between terminals 30 and 87A. The ohmmeter should show continuity between terminals 30 and 87A. 4. Connect the ohmmeter between terminals 87 and 30. The ohmmeter should not show continuity at this time. 5. Connect one end of a jumper wire (16 gauge or smaller) to relay terminal 85. Connect the other end of the jumper wire to the ground side of a 12 volt power source. 6. Connect one end of another jumper wire (16 gauge or smaller) to the power side of the 12 volt power source. Do not attach the other end of the jumper wire to the relay at this time. WARNING: DO NOT ALLOW OHMMETER TO CONTACT TERMINALS 85 OR 86 DURING THIS TEST. DAMAGE TO OHMMETER MAY RESULT. 7. Attach the other end of the jumper wire to relay terminal 86. This activates the relay. The ohmmeter should now show continuity between relay terminals 87 and 30. The ohmmeter should not show continuity between relay terminals 87A and 30. 8. Disconnect jumper wires. 9. Replace the relay if it did not pass the continuity and resistance tests. If the relay passed the tests, it operates properly. Check the remainder of the ASD and fuel pump relay circuits. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Locations Component ID: 401 Component : SENSOR-ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION Connector: Name : SENSOR-ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION Color : BLACK # of pins : 6 Pin Circuit Description 1 F855 20PK/YL 5 VOLT SUPPLY Pin Circuit Description 1 K852 20BR/LB 5 VOLT SUPPLY Pin Circuit Description 1 K852 20BR/VT 5 VOLT SUPPLY 2 K23 20BR/WT APPS NO. 1 SIGNAL 3 K167 20BR/YL APPS NO. 1 RETURN 3 K167 20BR/DG APPS NO. 1 RETURN 4 K400 20BR/VT APPS NO. 2 RETURN 5 K29 20WT/BR APPS NO. 2 SIGNAL 6 F856 20YL/PK 5 VOLT SUPPLY 6 K854 20VT/BR 5 VOLT SUPPLY Component Location - 31 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 5459 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 5460 Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Diagrams Component ID: 401 Component : SENSOR-ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION Connector: Name : SENSOR-ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION Color : BLACK # of pins : 6 Pin Circuit Description 1 F855 20PK/YL 5 VOLT SUPPLY Pin Circuit Description 1 K852 20BR/LB 5 VOLT SUPPLY Pin Circuit Description 1 K852 20BR/VT 5 VOLT SUPPLY 2 K23 20BR/WT APPS NO. 1 SIGNAL 3 K167 20BR/YL APPS NO. 1 RETURN 3 K167 20BR/DG APPS NO. 1 RETURN 4 K400 20BR/VT APPS NO. 2 RETURN 5 K29 20WT/BR APPS NO. 2 SIGNAL 6 F856 20YL/PK 5 VOLT SUPPLY 6 K854 20VT/BR 5 VOLT SUPPLY Component Location - 31 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 5461 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor (APPS) (1) is located inside the vehicle. It is attached to the accelerator pedal assembly (3). It is used only with 3.7L V-6 and 5.7L V-8 gas engines, and also with diesel engines. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 5464 Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor (APPS) provides the Powertrain Control Module (PCM) with two DC voltage signals which change as the position of the accelerator pedal changes. One of the DC voltage signals will be half the voltage of the other signal. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL CAUTION: Do not attempt to separate or remove the Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor (APPS) from the accelerator pedal assembly. The APPS is replaced as an assembly along with the pedal. If sensor is removed from pedal, its electronic calibration may be destroyed. 1. Disconnect 6-way electrical connector at top of APPS (2). 2. Remove APPS lower mounting bolt (4) and two mounting nuts. 3. Remove pedal and APPS assembly from vehicle. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 5467 Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION CAUTION: Do not attempt to separate or remove the Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor (APPS) from the accelerator pedal assembly. The APPS is replaced as an assembly along with the pedal. If sensor is removed from pedal, its electronic calibration may be destroyed. 1. Position pedal and APPS assembly to its mounting bracket. 2. Connect 6-way electrical connector to top of APPS (2). 3. Install APPS lower mounting bolt (4) and two mounting nuts. 4. If necessary, use a Scan Tool to erase any Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTC's). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Body > Component Information > Locations Throttle Body: Locations Component ID: 519 Component : THROTTLE BODY Connector: Name : THROTTLE BODY Color : BLACK # of pins : 6 Qualifier : (3.7L/4.7L) Pin Circuit Description 1 K447 20TN/YL ETC MOTOR (+) 2 F855 20PK/YL 5 VOLT SUPPLY 3 K922 20BR/DB TP SENSOR RETURN 4 K448 20TN/OR ETC MOTOR (-) 5 K122 20BR/DG TP NO. 2 SIGNAL 6 K22 20BR/OR TP NO. 1 SIGNAL Component Location - 8 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Body > Component Information > Locations > Page 5471 Component Location - 11 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Body > Component Information > Locations > Page 5472 Component Location - 10 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Body > Component Information > Locations > Page 5473 Connector: Name : THROTTLE BODY Color : BLACK # of pins : 6 Qualifier : (5.7L) Pin Circuit Description 1 K22 20BR/OR TP NO. 1 SIGNAL 2 F855 20PK/YL 5 VOLT SUPPLY 3 K447 20TN/YL ETC MOTOR (+) 4 K122 20BR/DG TP NO. 2 SIGNAL Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Body > Component Information > Locations > Page 5474 5 K448 20TN/OR ETC MOTOR (-) 6 K922 20BR/DB TP SENSOR RETURN Component Location - 8 Component Location - 11 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Body > Component Information > Locations > Page 5475 Component Location - 10 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Body > Component Information > Locations > Page 5476 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Body > Component Information > Locations > Page 5477 Throttle Body: Diagrams Component ID: 519 Component : THROTTLE BODY Connector: Name : THROTTLE BODY Color : BLACK # of pins : 6 Qualifier : (3.7L/4.7L) Pin Circuit Description 1 K447 20TN/YL ETC MOTOR (+) 2 F855 20PK/YL 5 VOLT SUPPLY 3 K922 20BR/DB TP SENSOR RETURN 4 K448 20TN/OR ETC MOTOR (-) 5 K122 20BR/DG TP NO. 2 SIGNAL 6 K22 20BR/OR TP NO. 1 SIGNAL Component Location - 8 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Body > Component Information > Locations > Page 5478 Component Location - 11 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Body > Component Information > Locations > Page 5479 Component Location - 10 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Body > Component Information > Locations > Page 5480 Connector: Name : THROTTLE BODY Color : BLACK # of pins : 6 Qualifier : (5.7L) Pin Circuit Description 1 K22 20BR/OR TP NO. 1 SIGNAL 2 F855 20PK/YL 5 VOLT SUPPLY 3 K447 20TN/YL ETC MOTOR (+) 4 K122 20BR/DG TP NO. 2 SIGNAL Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Body > Component Information > Locations > Page 5481 5 K448 20TN/OR ETC MOTOR (-) 6 K922 20BR/DB TP SENSOR RETURN Component Location - 8 Component Location - 11 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Body > Component Information > Locations > Page 5482 Component Location - 10 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Body > Component Information > Locations > Page 5483 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Body > Component Information > Locations > Page 5484 Throttle Body: Description and Operation DESCRIPTION The throttle body is located on the intake manifold. Fuel does not enter the intake manifold through the throttle body. Fuel is sprayed into the manifold by the fuel injectors. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Body > Component Information > Service and Repair > Throttle Body - Removal Throttle Body: Service and Repair Throttle Body - Removal 3.7L - V6 3.7L - V6 CAUTION: Using a diagnostic scan tool, record any previous DTC's (Diagnostic Trouble Codes). CAUTION: Never have the ignition key in the ON position when/if checking the throttle body shaft for a binding condition. This may set DTC's. A (factory adjusted) set screw is used to mechanically limit the position of the throttle body throttle plate. Never attempt to adjust the engine idle speed using this screw. All idle speed functions are controlled by the Powertrain Control Module (PCM). 1. Disconnect and isolate negative battery cable at battery. 2. Remove air intake tube at throttle body flange (1). 3. Disconnect throttle body electrical connector (3). 4. Disconnect necessary vacuum lines at throttle body. 5. Remove four throttle body mounting bolts (2). 6. Remove throttle body from intake manifold. 7. Check condition of old throttle body-to-intake manifold o-ring. 4.7L V-8 4.7L V-8 CAUTION: Using a diagnostic scan tool, record any previous DTC's (Diagnostic Trouble Codes). CAUTION: Never have the ignition key in the ON position when/if checking the throttle body shaft for a binding condition. This may set DTC's. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Body > Component Information > Service and Repair > Throttle Body - Removal > Page 5487 1. Disconnect and isolate negative battery cable at battery. 2. Remove air duct and air resonator box at throttle body (3). 3. Disconnect throttle body electrical connector (2). 4. Disconnect necessary vacuum lines at throttle body. 5. Remove four throttle body mounting bolts (1). 6. Remove throttle body from intake manifold. 7. Check condition of old throttle body-to-intake manifold o-ring. 5.7L V-8 5.7L V-8 CAUTION: Using a diagnostic scan tool, record any previous DTC's (Diagnostic Trouble Codes). CAUTION: Never have the ignition key in the ON position when/if checking the throttle body shaft for a binding condition. This may set DTC's. 1. Disconnect and isolate negative battery cable from battery. 2. Remove air duct and air resonator box at throttle body. 3. Disconnect electrical connector (2) at throttle body. 4. Remove four throttle body mounting bolts (4). 5. Remove throttle body from intake manifold. 6. Check condition of throttle body O-ring (2). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Body > Component Information > Service and Repair > Throttle Body - Removal > Page 5488 Throttle Body: Service and Repair Throttle Body - Installation 3.7L - V6 3.7L - V6 1. Check condition of throttle body-to-intake manifold O-ring. Replace as necessary. 2. Clean mating surfaces of throttle body and intake manifold. 3. Install O-ring between throttle body and intake manifold. 4. Position throttle body (1) to intake manifold. 5. Install all throttle body mounting bolts (2) finger tight. CAUTION: The throttle body mounting bolts MUST be torqued to specifications. DO NOT OVER TIGHTEN MOUNTING BOLTS. Over tightening can cause damage to the throttle body, throttle plate, gaskets, bolts and/or the intake manifold. Proper torque of the mounting bolts is critical to normal operation. 6. Obtain a torque wrench. Tighten mounting bolts (as shown) in a mandatory torque criss-cross pattern sequence to 7.5 Nm (65 in. lbs.). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Body > Component Information > Service and Repair > Throttle Body - Removal > Page 5489 7. Install electrical connector (3). 8. Install necessary vacuum lines. 9. Install air cleaner duct at throttle body. 10. Connect negative battery cable. 11. Using the diagnostic scan tool, erase all previous DTC's and perform the ETC Relearn function. 4.7L V-8 4.7L V-8 1. Check condition of throttle body-to-intake manifold O-ring. Replace as necessary. 2. Clean mating surfaces of throttle body and intake manifold. 3. Install throttle body-to-intake manifold O-ring. 4. Install all throttle body mounting bolts (1) finger tight. CAUTION: The throttle body mounting bolts MUST be torqued to specifications. DO NOT OVER TIGHTEN MOUNTING BOLTS. Over tightening can cause damage to the throttle body, throttle plate, gaskets, bolts and/or the intake manifold. Proper torque of the mounting bolts is critical to normal operation. 5. Obtain a torque wrench. Tighten mounting bolts (as shown) in a mandatory torque criss-cross pattern sequence to 7.5 Nm (65 in. lbs.). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Body > Component Information > Service and Repair > Throttle Body - Removal > Page 5490 6. Install electrical connector (2). 7. Install necessary vacuum lines. 8. Install air cleaner duct and plenum at throttle body. 9. Connect negative battery cable. 10. Using the diagnostic scan tool, erase all previous DTC's and perform the ETC Relearn function. 5.7L V-8 5.7L V-8 1. Clean and check condition of throttle body-to-intake manifold O-ring (2). 2. Clean mating surfaces of throttle body and intake manifold. 3. Install O-ring (2) between throttle body and intake manifold. 4. Install throttle body to intake manifold by positioning throttle body to manifold alignment pins. 5. Install all throttle body mounting bolts finger tight. CAUTION: The throttle body mounting bolts MUST be torqued to specifications. DO NOT OVER TIGHTEN MOUNTING BOLTS. Over tightening can cause damage to the throttle body, throttle plate, gaskets, bolts and/or the intake manifold. Proper torque of the mounting bolts Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Body > Component Information > Service and Repair > Throttle Body - Removal > Page 5491 is critical to normal operation. 6. Obtain a torque wrench. Tighten mounting bolts (as shown) in a mandatory torque criss-cross pattern sequence to 5.6 Nm (50 in. lbs.). 7. Install electrical connector (2). 8. Install air plenum to flange (3). 9. Connect negative battery cable. 10. Using the diagnostic scan tool, erase all previous DTC's and perform the ETC Relearn function. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Turbocharger > Intercooler > Component Information > Description and Operation Intercooler: Description and Operation OPERATION Intake air is drawn through the air cleaner and into the turbocharger compressor housing. Pressurized air from the turbocharger then flows forward through the charge air cooler located in front of the radiator. From the charge air cooler the air flows back into the intake manifold. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Firing Order > Component Information > Specifications > Electrical Specifications Firing Order: Electrical Specifications ENGINE FIRING ORDER - 4.7L V-8 4.7L ENGINE DESCRIPTION Fig. 1 The 4.7 liter (287 CID) eight-cylinder engine is an 90° single overhead camshaft engine. The cast iron cylinder block is made up of two different components; the first component is the cylinder bore and upper block, the second component is the bedplate that comprises the lower portion of the cylinder block and houses the lower half of the crankshaft main bearings. The cylinders are numbered from front to rear with the left bank being numbered 1,3,5 and 7, and the right bank being numbered 2,4,6 and 8. The firing order is 1-8-4-3-6-5-7-2. The engine serial number is located at the Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Firing Order > Component Information > Specifications > Electrical Specifications > Page 5501 right front side of the engine block (Fig. 1). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Firing Order > Component Information > Specifications > Electrical Specifications > Page 5502 Firing Order: Mechanical Specifications ENGINE FIRING ORDER - 4.7L V-8 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Timing > System Information > Specifications Ignition Timing: Specifications IGNITION TIMING Ignition timing is not adjustable on any engine. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations Camshaft Position Sensor: Locations Component ID: 405 Component : SENSOR-CAMSHAFT POSITION Connector: Name : SENSOR-CAMSHAFT POSITION Color : # of pins : 3 Qualifier : (DIESEL) Pin Circuit Description 1 F855 18PK/YL 5 VOLT SUPPLY 2 K944 18BK/GY CMP SENSOR GROUND 2 K916 18BR/OR SENSOR GROUND 3 K44 18DB/GY CMP SIGNAL Component Location - 5 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 5509 Component Location - 11 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 5510 Component Location - 13 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 5511 Connector: Name : SENSOR-CAMSHAFT POSITION Color : GRAY # of pins : 3 Qualifier : (GAS) Pin Circuit Description 1 F856 20YL/PK 5 VOLT SUPPLY 2 K900 20DB/DG SENSOR GROUND 3 K44 20DB/GY CMP SIGNAL Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 5512 Component Location - 5 Component Location - 11 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 5513 Component Location - 13 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 5514 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 5515 Camshaft Position Sensor: Diagrams Component ID: 405 Component : SENSOR-CAMSHAFT POSITION Connector: Name : SENSOR-CAMSHAFT POSITION Color : # of pins : 3 Qualifier : (DIESEL) Pin Circuit Description 1 F855 18PK/YL 5 VOLT SUPPLY 2 K944 18BK/GY CMP SENSOR GROUND 2 K916 18BR/OR SENSOR GROUND 3 K44 18DB/GY CMP SIGNAL Component Location - 5 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 5516 Component Location - 11 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 5517 Component Location - 13 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 5518 Connector: Name : SENSOR-CAMSHAFT POSITION Color : GRAY # of pins : 3 Qualifier : (GAS) Pin Circuit Description 1 F856 20YL/PK 5 VOLT SUPPLY 2 K900 20DB/DG SENSOR GROUND 3 K44 20DB/GY CMP SIGNAL Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 5519 Component Location - 5 Component Location - 11 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 5520 Component Location - 13 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 5521 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Camshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation Description 3.7L & 4.7L The Camshaft Position Sensor (CMP) (3) is bolted to the right-front side of the right cylinder head (2). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 5524 Camshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation Operation 4.7L The CMP sensor engine contains a hall effect device called a sync signal generator to generate a fuel sync signal. This sync signal generator detects notches located on a tonewheel. The tonewheel (4) is located at the front of the camshaft for the right cylinder head (2). As the tonewheel rotates, the notches (1) pass through the sync signal generator. The pattern of the notches (viewed counter-clockwise from front of engine) is: 1 notch, 2 notches, 3 notches, 3 notches, 2 notches, 1 notch, 3 notches and 1 notch. The signal from the CMP sensor is used in conjunction with the crankshaft position sensor to differentiate between fuel injection and spark events. It is also used to synchronize the fuel injectors with their respective cylinders. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Camshaft Position Sensor - Removal Camshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair Camshaft Position Sensor - Removal 4.7L The Camshaft Position Sensor (CMP) (2) is bolted to the front/top of the right cylinder head (1). 1. Raise and support vehicle. 2. Disconnect electrical connector (4) at CMP sensor. 3. Remove sensor mounting bolt (3). 4. Carefully twist sensor from cylinder head. 5. Check condition of sensor O-ring. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Camshaft Position Sensor - Removal > Page 5527 Camshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair Camshaft Position Sensor - Installation 4.7L 1. Clean out machined hole in cylinder head. 2. Apply a small amount of engine oil to sensor O-ring. 3. Install sensor (2) into cylinder head (1) with a slight rocking action. Do not twist sensor into position as damage to O-ring may result. CAUTION: Before tightening sensor mounting bolt, be sure sensor is completely flush to cylinder head. If sensor is not flush, damage to sensor mounting tang may result. 4. Install mounting bolt (3) and tighten to 12 Nm (106 in.lbs.). 5. Connect electrical connector to sensor. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations Crankshaft Position Sensor: Locations Component ID: 407 Component : SENSOR-CRANKSHAFT POSITION Connector: Name : SENSOR-CRANKSHAFT POSITION Color : BLACK # of pins : 3 Qualifier : (3.7L) Pin Circuit Description 1 K24 20BR/LB CKP SIGNAL 2 K900 20DB/DG SENSOR GROUND 3 F855 20PK/YL 5 VOLT SUPPLY Component Location - 5 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 5531 Component Location - 11 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 5532 Component Location - 19 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 5533 Component Location - 13 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 5534 Connector: Name : SENSOR-CRANKSHAFT POSITION Color : BLACK # of pins : 3 Qualifier : (4.7L) Pin Circuit Description 1 K24 20BR/LB CKP SIGNAL 2 K900 20DB/DG SENSOR GROUND 3 F855 20PK/YL 5 VOLT SUPPLY Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 5535 Component Location - 5 Component Location - 11 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 5536 Component Location - 19 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 5537 Component Location - 13 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 5538 Connector: Name : SENSOR-CRANKSHAFT POSITION Color : BLACK # of pins : 3 Qualifier : (5.7L) Pin Circuit Description 1 F855 20PK/YL 5 VOLT SUPPLY 2 K900 20DB/DG SENSOR GROUND 3 K24 20BR/LB CKP SIGNAL Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 5539 Component Location - 5 Component Location - 11 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 5540 Component Location - 19 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 5541 Component Location - 13 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 5542 Connector: Name : SENSOR-CRANKSHAFT POSITION Color : BLACK # of pins : 3 Qualifier : (DIESEL) Pin Circuit Description 1 K853 18DB/BR 5 VOLT SUPPLY Pin Circuit Description 1 K824 18DB/BR 5 VOLT SUPPLY Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 5543 2 K975 18BR/OR CKP SENSOR GROUND 2 K925 18BR/OR CKP SENSOR GROUND 3 K24 18BR/LB CKP SIGNAL Component Location - 5 Component Location - 11 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 5544 Component Location - 19 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 5545 Component Location - 13 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 5546 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 5547 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Diagrams Component ID: 407 Component : SENSOR-CRANKSHAFT POSITION Connector: Name : SENSOR-CRANKSHAFT POSITION Color : BLACK # of pins : 3 Qualifier : (3.7L) Pin Circuit Description 1 K24 20BR/LB CKP SIGNAL 2 K900 20DB/DG SENSOR GROUND 3 F855 20PK/YL 5 VOLT SUPPLY Component Location - 5 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 5548 Component Location - 11 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 5549 Component Location - 19 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 5550 Component Location - 13 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 5551 Connector: Name : SENSOR-CRANKSHAFT POSITION Color : BLACK # of pins : 3 Qualifier : (4.7L) Pin Circuit Description 1 K24 20BR/LB CKP SIGNAL 2 K900 20DB/DG SENSOR GROUND 3 F855 20PK/YL 5 VOLT SUPPLY Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 5552 Component Location - 5 Component Location - 11 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 5553 Component Location - 19 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 5554 Component Location - 13 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 5555 Connector: Name : SENSOR-CRANKSHAFT POSITION Color : BLACK # of pins : 3 Qualifier : (5.7L) Pin Circuit Description 1 F855 20PK/YL 5 VOLT SUPPLY 2 K900 20DB/DG SENSOR GROUND 3 K24 20BR/LB CKP SIGNAL Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 5556 Component Location - 5 Component Location - 11 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 5557 Component Location - 19 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 5558 Component Location - 13 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 5559 Connector: Name : SENSOR-CRANKSHAFT POSITION Color : BLACK # of pins : 3 Qualifier : (DIESEL) Pin Circuit Description 1 K853 18DB/BR 5 VOLT SUPPLY Pin Circuit Description 1 K824 18DB/BR 5 VOLT SUPPLY Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 5560 2 K975 18BR/OR CKP SENSOR GROUND 2 K925 18BR/OR CKP SENSOR GROUND 3 K24 18BR/LB CKP SIGNAL Component Location - 5 Component Location - 11 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 5561 Component Location - 19 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 5562 Component Location - 13 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 5563 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Crankshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation Description 4.7L V-8 The Crankshaft Position (CKP) (1) sensor is mounted into the right rear side of the cylinder block. It is positioned and bolted into a machined hole. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 5566 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation Operation 4.7L V-8 Engine speed and crankshaft position are provided through the CKP (Crankshaft Position) sensor. The sensor generates pulses that are the input sent to the Powertrain Control Module (PCM). The PCM interprets the sensor input to determine the crankshaft position. The PCM then uses this position, along with other inputs, to determine injector sequence and ignition timing. The sensor is a hall effect device combined with an internal magnet. It is also sensitive to steel within a certain distance from it. A tonewheel (1) is bolted to the engine crankshaft. This tonewheel has sets of notches (2) at its outer edge. The notches cause a pulse to be generated when they pass under the sensor. The pulses are the input to the PCM. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Crankshaft Position Sensor - Removal Crankshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair Crankshaft Position Sensor - Removal 4.7L V-8 The Crankshaft Position (CKP) sensor is located at the right-rear side of the engine cylinder block. It is positioned and bolted into a machined hole in the engine block. 1. Raise vehicle. 2. Disconnect CKP electrical connector at sensor. 3. Remove CKP mounting bolt (2). 4. Carefully twist sensor (1) from cylinder block. 5. Remove sensor from vehicle. 6. Check condition of sensor O-ring. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Crankshaft Position Sensor - Removal > Page 5569 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair Crankshaft Position Sensor - Installation 4.7L V-8 1. Clean out machined hole in engine block. 2. Apply a small amount of engine oil to sensor o-ring. 3. Install sensor (1) into engine block with a slight rocking and twisting action. CAUTION: Before tightening sensor mounting bolt, be sure sensor is completely flush to cylinder block. If sensor is not flush, damage to sensor mounting tang may result. 4. Install mounting bolt and tighten to 28 Nm (21 ft. lbs.) torque. 5. Connect electrical connector to sensor. 6. Lower vehicle. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information > Specifications Ignition Coil: Specifications IGNITION COIL RESISTANCE - 4.7L Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information > Locations > Capacitor-Ignition Ignition Coil: Locations Capacitor-Ignition Component ID: 69 Component : CAPACITOR-IGNITION Connector: Name : CAPACITOR-IGNITION Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (3.7L/4.7L) Pin Circuit Description 1 K342 16BR/WT ASD CONTROL OUTPUT 2-Component Location - 6 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information > Locations > Capacitor-Ignition > Page 5575 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information > Locations > Capacitor-Ignition > Page 5576 Ignition Coil: Locations Coil-Ignition 1 Component ID: 72 Component : COIL-IGNITION 1 Connector: Name : COIL-IGNITION 1 Color : BLACK # of pins : 3 Qualifier : (NGC) Pin Circuit Description 1 K19 18DB/DG COIL CONTROL NO. 1 2 K342 16BR/WT ASD CONTROL OUTPUT 3-Component Location - 8 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information > Locations > Capacitor-Ignition > Page 5577 Component Location - 9 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information > Locations > Capacitor-Ignition > Page 5578 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information > Locations > Capacitor-Ignition > Page 5579 Ignition Coil: Locations Coil-Ignition 2 Component ID: 73 Component : COIL-IGNITION 2 Connector: Name : COIL-IGNITION 2 Color : BLACK # of pins : 3 Qualifier : (NGC) Pin Circuit Description 1 K17 18DB/TN COIL CONTROL NO. 2 2 K342 16BR/WT ASD CONTROL OUTPUT 3-Component Location - 5 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information > Locations > Capacitor-Ignition > Page 5580 Component Location - 11 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information > Locations > Capacitor-Ignition > Page 5581 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information > Locations > Capacitor-Ignition > Page 5582 Ignition Coil: Locations Coil-Ignition 3 Component ID: 74 Component : COIL-IGNITION 3 Connector: Name : COIL-IGNITION 3 Color : BLACK # of pins : 3 Qualifier : (NGC) Pin Circuit Description 1 K18 18DB/OR COIL CONTROL NO. 3 2 K342 16BR/WT ASD CONTROL OUTPUT 3-Component Location - 8 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information > Locations > Capacitor-Ignition > Page 5583 Component Location - 9 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information > Locations > Capacitor-Ignition > Page 5584 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information > Locations > Capacitor-Ignition > Page 5585 Ignition Coil: Locations Capacitor-Ignition Component ID: 69 Component : CAPACITOR-IGNITION Connector: Name : CAPACITOR-IGNITION Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (3.7L/4.7L) Pin Circuit Description 1 K342 16BR/WT ASD CONTROL OUTPUT 2-Component Location - 6 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information > Locations > Capacitor-Ignition > Page 5586 Coil-Ignition 1 Component ID: 72 Component : COIL-IGNITION 1 Connector: Name : COIL-IGNITION 1 Color : BLACK # of pins : 3 Qualifier : (NGC) Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information > Locations > Capacitor-Ignition > Page 5587 Pin Circuit Description 1 K19 18DB/DG COIL CONTROL NO. 1 2 K342 16BR/WT ASD CONTROL OUTPUT 3-Component Location - 8 Component Location - 9 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information > Locations > Capacitor-Ignition > Page 5588 Coil-Ignition 2 Component ID: 73 Component : COIL-IGNITION 2 Connector: Name : COIL-IGNITION 2 Color : BLACK # of pins : 3 Qualifier : (NGC) Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information > Locations > Capacitor-Ignition > Page 5589 Pin Circuit Description 1 K17 18DB/TN COIL CONTROL NO. 2 2 K342 16BR/WT ASD CONTROL OUTPUT 3-Component Location - 5 Component Location - 11 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information > Locations > Capacitor-Ignition > Page 5590 Coil-Ignition 3 Component ID: 74 Component : COIL-IGNITION 3 Connector: Name : COIL-IGNITION 3 Color : BLACK # of pins : 3 Qualifier : (NGC) Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information > Locations > Capacitor-Ignition > Page 5591 Pin Circuit Description 1 K18 18DB/OR COIL CONTROL NO. 3 2 K342 16BR/WT ASD CONTROL OUTPUT 3-Component Location - 8 Component Location - 9 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information > Locations > Capacitor-Ignition > Page 5592 Coil-Ignition 4 Component ID: 75 Component : COIL-IGNITION 4 Connector: Name : COIL-IGNITION 4 Color : BLACK # of pins : 3 Qualifier : (NGC) Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information > Locations > Capacitor-Ignition > Page 5593 Pin Circuit Description 1 K15 18DB/GY COIL CONTROL NO. 4 2 K342 16BR/WT ASD CONTROL OUTPUT 3-Component Location - 5 Component Location - 11 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information > Locations > Capacitor-Ignition > Page 5594 Coil-Ignition 5 Component ID: 76 Component : COIL-IGNITION 5 Connector: Name : COIL-IGNITION 5 Color : BLACK # of pins : 3 Qualifier : (NGC) Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information > Locations > Capacitor-Ignition > Page 5595 Pin Circuit Description 1 K16 18DB/YL COIL CONTROL NO. 5 2 K342 16BR/WT ASD CONTROL OUTPUT 3-Component Location - 8 Component Location - 9 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information > Locations > Capacitor-Ignition > Page 5596 Coil-Ignition 6 Component ID: 77 Component : COIL-IGNITION 6 Connector: Name : COIL-IGNITION 6 Color : BLACK # of pins : 3 Qualifier : (NGC) Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information > Locations > Capacitor-Ignition > Page 5597 Pin Circuit Description 1 K10 18DB/OR COIL CONTROL NO. 6 2 K342 16BR/WT ASD CONTROL OUTPUT 3-Component Location - 5 Component Location - 11 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information > Locations > Capacitor-Ignition > Page 5598 Coil-Ignition 7 Component ID: 78 Component : COIL-IGNITION 7 Connector: Name : COIL-IGNITION 7 Color : BLACK # of pins : 3 Qualifier : (4.7L/5.7L) Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information > Locations > Capacitor-Ignition > Page 5599 Pin Circuit Description 1 K97 18DB/YL COIL CONTROL NO. 7 Pin Circuit Description 1 K97 18BR COIL CONTROL NO. 7 2 K342 16BR/WT ASD CONTROL OUTPUT 3-Component Location - 8 Component Location - 9 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information > Locations > Capacitor-Ignition > Page 5600 Coil-Ignition 8 Component ID: 79 Component : COIL-IGNITION 8 Connector: Name : COIL-IGNITION 8 Color : BLACK # of pins : 3 Qualifier : (4.7L/5.7L) Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information > Locations > Capacitor-Ignition > Page 5601 Pin Circuit Description 1 K98 18DB/YL COIL CONTROL NO. 8 2 K342 16BR/WT ASD CONTROL OUTPUT 3-Component Location - 5 Component Location - 11 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information > Locations > Capacitor-Ignition > Page 5602 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information > Diagrams > Capacitor-Ignition Ignition Coil: Diagrams Capacitor-Ignition Component ID: 69 Component : CAPACITOR-IGNITION Connector: Name : CAPACITOR-IGNITION Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (3.7L/4.7L) Pin Circuit Description 1 K342 16BR/WT ASD CONTROL OUTPUT 2-Component Location - 6 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information > Diagrams > Capacitor-Ignition > Page 5605 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information > Diagrams > Capacitor-Ignition > Page 5606 Ignition Coil: Diagrams Coil-Ignition 1 Component ID: 72 Component : COIL-IGNITION 1 Connector: Name : COIL-IGNITION 1 Color : BLACK # of pins : 3 Qualifier : (NGC) Pin Circuit Description 1 K19 18DB/DG COIL CONTROL NO. 1 2 K342 16BR/WT ASD CONTROL OUTPUT 3-Component Location - 8 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information > Diagrams > Capacitor-Ignition > Page 5607 Component Location - 9 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information > Diagrams > Capacitor-Ignition > Page 5608 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information > Diagrams > Capacitor-Ignition > Page 5609 Ignition Coil: Diagrams Coil-Ignition 2 Component ID: 73 Component : COIL-IGNITION 2 Connector: Name : COIL-IGNITION 2 Color : BLACK # of pins : 3 Qualifier : (NGC) Pin Circuit Description 1 K17 18DB/TN COIL CONTROL NO. 2 2 K342 16BR/WT ASD CONTROL OUTPUT 3-Component Location - 5 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information > Diagrams > Capacitor-Ignition > Page 5610 Component Location - 11 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information > Diagrams > Capacitor-Ignition > Page 5611 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information > Diagrams > Capacitor-Ignition > Page 5612 Ignition Coil: Diagrams Coil-Ignition 3 Component ID: 74 Component : COIL-IGNITION 3 Connector: Name : COIL-IGNITION 3 Color : BLACK # of pins : 3 Qualifier : (NGC) Pin Circuit Description 1 K18 18DB/OR COIL CONTROL NO. 3 2 K342 16BR/WT ASD CONTROL OUTPUT 3-Component Location - 8 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information > Diagrams > Capacitor-Ignition > Page 5613 Component Location - 9 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information > Diagrams > Capacitor-Ignition > Page 5614 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information > Diagrams > Capacitor-Ignition > Page 5615 Ignition Coil: Diagrams Capacitor-Ignition Component ID: 69 Component : CAPACITOR-IGNITION Connector: Name : CAPACITOR-IGNITION Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (3.7L/4.7L) Pin Circuit Description 1 K342 16BR/WT ASD CONTROL OUTPUT 2-Component Location - 6 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information > Diagrams > Capacitor-Ignition > Page 5616 Coil-Ignition 1 Component ID: 72 Component : COIL-IGNITION 1 Connector: Name : COIL-IGNITION 1 Color : BLACK # of pins : 3 Qualifier : (NGC) Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information > Diagrams > Capacitor-Ignition > Page 5617 Pin Circuit Description 1 K19 18DB/DG COIL CONTROL NO. 1 2 K342 16BR/WT ASD CONTROL OUTPUT 3-Component Location - 8 Component Location - 9 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information > Diagrams > Capacitor-Ignition > Page 5618 Coil-Ignition 2 Component ID: 73 Component : COIL-IGNITION 2 Connector: Name : COIL-IGNITION 2 Color : BLACK # of pins : 3 Qualifier : (NGC) Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information > Diagrams > Capacitor-Ignition > Page 5619 Pin Circuit Description 1 K17 18DB/TN COIL CONTROL NO. 2 2 K342 16BR/WT ASD CONTROL OUTPUT 3-Component Location - 5 Component Location - 11 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information > Diagrams > Capacitor-Ignition > Page 5620 Coil-Ignition 3 Component ID: 74 Component : COIL-IGNITION 3 Connector: Name : COIL-IGNITION 3 Color : BLACK # of pins : 3 Qualifier : (NGC) Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information > Diagrams > Capacitor-Ignition > Page 5621 Pin Circuit Description 1 K18 18DB/OR COIL CONTROL NO. 3 2 K342 16BR/WT ASD CONTROL OUTPUT 3-Component Location - 8 Component Location - 9 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information > Diagrams > Capacitor-Ignition > Page 5622 Coil-Ignition 4 Component ID: 75 Component : COIL-IGNITION 4 Connector: Name : COIL-IGNITION 4 Color : BLACK # of pins : 3 Qualifier : (NGC) Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information > Diagrams > Capacitor-Ignition > Page 5623 Pin Circuit Description 1 K15 18DB/GY COIL CONTROL NO. 4 2 K342 16BR/WT ASD CONTROL OUTPUT 3-Component Location - 5 Component Location - 11 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information > Diagrams > Capacitor-Ignition > Page 5624 Coil-Ignition 5 Component ID: 76 Component : COIL-IGNITION 5 Connector: Name : COIL-IGNITION 5 Color : BLACK # of pins : 3 Qualifier : (NGC) Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information > Diagrams > Capacitor-Ignition > Page 5625 Pin Circuit Description 1 K16 18DB/YL COIL CONTROL NO. 5 2 K342 16BR/WT ASD CONTROL OUTPUT 3-Component Location - 8 Component Location - 9 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information > Diagrams > Capacitor-Ignition > Page 5626 Coil-Ignition 6 Component ID: 77 Component : COIL-IGNITION 6 Connector: Name : COIL-IGNITION 6 Color : BLACK # of pins : 3 Qualifier : (NGC) Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information > Diagrams > Capacitor-Ignition > Page 5627 Pin Circuit Description 1 K10 18DB/OR COIL CONTROL NO. 6 2 K342 16BR/WT ASD CONTROL OUTPUT 3-Component Location - 5 Component Location - 11 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information > Diagrams > Capacitor-Ignition > Page 5628 Coil-Ignition 7 Component ID: 78 Component : COIL-IGNITION 7 Connector: Name : COIL-IGNITION 7 Color : BLACK # of pins : 3 Qualifier : (4.7L/5.7L) Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information > Diagrams > Capacitor-Ignition > Page 5629 Pin Circuit Description 1 K97 18DB/YL COIL CONTROL NO. 7 Pin Circuit Description 1 K97 18BR COIL CONTROL NO. 7 2 K342 16BR/WT ASD CONTROL OUTPUT 3-Component Location - 8 Component Location - 9 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information > Diagrams > Capacitor-Ignition > Page 5630 Coil-Ignition 8 Component ID: 79 Component : COIL-IGNITION 8 Connector: Name : COIL-IGNITION 8 Color : BLACK # of pins : 3 Qualifier : (4.7L/5.7L) Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information > Diagrams > Capacitor-Ignition > Page 5631 Pin Circuit Description 1 K98 18DB/YL COIL CONTROL NO. 8 2 K342 16BR/WT ASD CONTROL OUTPUT 3-Component Location - 5 Component Location - 11 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information > Diagrams > Capacitor-Ignition > Page 5632 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Ignition Coil: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION One coil capacitor (1) is used. It is located in the right-rear section of the engine compartment. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 5635 Ignition Coil: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The coil capacitor(s) help dampen the amount of conducted electrical noise to the camshaft position sensor, crankshaft position sensor, and throttle position sensor. This noise is generated on the 12V supply wire to the ignition coils and fuel injectors. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information > Service and Repair > Ignition Coil - Removal Ignition Coil: Service and Repair Ignition Coil - Removal 4.7L V-8 An individual ignition coil (1) is used for each pair of spark plugs. Each coil attaches directly to the top of the eight upper bank of spark plugs. Secondary cables (3) connect each coil to the eight lower bank of spark plugs. The coils themselves fit into machined holes in the cylinder head. Each coil also has its own individual electrical connector (2). Note: The bolt used to mount the ignition coil is also the same bolt used to mount the intake manifold. If replacing either one, or, all eight coils, check and re-torque all eight bolts. A mounting bolt (3) secures each coil to the top of the intake manifold. The bottom of the coil is equipped with a rubber boot (4) to seal the spark plug (5) to the coil. Inside each rubber boot is a spring. The spring is used for a mechanical contact between the coil and the top of the upper bank of spark plugs. These rubber boots and springs are a permanent part of the coil and are not serviced separately. The rubber boot (4) is also used to seal the coil at the opening into the cylinder head. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information > Service and Repair > Ignition Coil - Removal > Page 5638 1. Depending on which coil is being removed, the throttle body air intake tube or intake box may need to be removed to gain access to coil. 2. Disconnect electrical connector (2) from coil by pushing downward on release lock on top of connector and pull connector from coil. 3. Disconnect secondary cable (3) at coil. 4. Clean area at base of coil with compressed air before removal. 5. Remove coil mounting bolt (3). 6. Carefully pull up coil assembly (2) from cylinder head opening with a slight twisting action. This will help to disengage rubber boot (4) from spark plug (5). 7. Remove coil from engine. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information > Service and Repair > Ignition Coil - Removal > Page 5639 Ignition Coil: Service and Repair Ignition Coil - Installation 4.7L V-8 1. Using compressed air, blow out any dirt or contaminants from around top of spark plug. 2. Check condition of coil rubber boot (4). To aid in coil installation, apply silicone based grease such as Mopar(R) Dielectric Grease # J8126688 into spark plug end of rubber boot (4). Also apply this grease to the top of spark plug (5). 3. Position ignition coil into cylinder head opening and using a twisting action, push onto spark plug. 4. Tighten coil mounting bolt (3) to 12 Nm (106 in.lbs.) torque. Note: The bolt used to mount the ignition coil is also the same bolt used to mount the intake manifold. If replacing either one, or, all eight coils, check and re-torque all eight bolts. 5. Connect electrical connector (2) to coil by snapping into position. 6. Connect secondary cable (3) to coil (1). 7. If necessary, install throttle body air intake tube, or intake air box. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information > Service and Repair > Ignition Coil - Removal > Page 5640 Ignition Coil: Service and Repair Ignition Coil Capacitor Removal REMOVAL The coil capacitor is located in the right-rear section of the engine compartment. It is attached with a mounting stud and nut. 1. Disconnect electrical connector (5) at capacitor. 2. Remove mounting nut and remove ground strap. 3. Remove capacitor (1). Installation INSTALLATION 1. Position capacitor (1) to mounting stud (2). 2. Position ground strap (3) to mounting stud (2). 3. Tighten nut (4) to 7 Nm (60 in. lbs.) torque. 4. Connect electrical connector (5) to coil capacitor. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Knock 1 Knock Sensor: Locations Sensor-Knock 1 Component ID: 423 Component : SENSOR-KNOCK 1 Connector: Name : SENSOR-KNOCK 1 Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (3.7L/5.7L) Pin Circuit Description 1 K42 20DB/YL KNOCK SENSOR NO. 1 SIGNAL 2 K942 20BR/LG KNOCK SENSOR NO. 1 RETURN Component Location - 9 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Knock 1 > Page 5645 Component Location - 22 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Knock 1 > Page 5646 Component Location - 19 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Knock 1 > Page 5647 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Knock 1 > Page 5648 Knock Sensor: Locations Sensor-Knock 2 Component ID: 424 Component : SENSOR-KNOCK 2 Connector: Name : SENSOR-KNOCK 2 Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (3.7L/5.7L) Pin Circuit Description 1 K242 20BR/WT KNOCK SENSOR NO. 2 SIGNAL 2 K924 20WT/BR KNOCK SENSOR NO. 2 RETURN Component Location - 11 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Knock 1 > Page 5649 Component Location - 22 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Knock 1 > Page 5650 Component Location - 19 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Knock 1 > Page 5651 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Knock 1 Knock Sensor: Diagrams Sensor-Knock 1 Component ID: 423 Component : SENSOR-KNOCK 1 Connector: Name : SENSOR-KNOCK 1 Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (3.7L/5.7L) Pin Circuit Description 1 K42 20DB/YL KNOCK SENSOR NO. 1 SIGNAL 2 K942 20BR/LG KNOCK SENSOR NO. 1 RETURN Component Location - 9 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Knock 1 > Page 5654 Component Location - 22 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Knock 1 > Page 5655 Component Location - 19 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Knock 1 > Page 5656 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Knock 1 > Page 5657 Knock Sensor: Diagrams Sensor-Knock 2 Component ID: 424 Component : SENSOR-KNOCK 2 Connector: Name : SENSOR-KNOCK 2 Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (3.7L/5.7L) Pin Circuit Description 1 K242 20BR/WT KNOCK SENSOR NO. 2 SIGNAL 2 K924 20WT/BR KNOCK SENSOR NO. 2 RETURN Component Location - 11 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Knock 1 > Page 5658 Component Location - 22 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Knock 1 > Page 5659 Component Location - 19 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Knock 1 > Page 5660 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Knock 1 > Page 5661 Knock Sensor: Diagrams Sensor-Knock Component ID: 422 Component : SENSOR-KNOCK Connector: Name : SENSOR-KNOCK Color : BLACK # of pins : 4 Qualifier : (4.7L) Pin Circuit Description 1 K942 20BR/LG KNOCK SENSOR NO. 1 RETURN 2 K42 20DB/YL KNOCK SENSOR NO. 1 SIGNAL 3 K924 20WT/BR KNOCK SENSOR NO. 2 RETURN 4 K242 20BR/WT KNOCK SENSOR NO. 2 SIGNAL Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Knock Sensor: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION Two knock sensors are bolted into the cylinder block under the intake manifold 3.7L, 4.7L & 8.3L. Two knock sensors are also used with the 5.7L. These are bolted into each side of the cylinder block (outside) under the exhaust manifold. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 5664 Knock Sensor: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION Two knock sensors are used; one for each cylinder bank. When the knock sensor detects a knock in one of the cylinders on the corresponding bank, it sends an input signal to the Powertrain Control Module (PCM). In response, the PCM retards ignition timing for all cylinders by a scheduled amount. Knock sensors contain a piezoelectric material which constantly vibrates and sends an input voltage (signal) to the PCM while the engine operates. As the intensity of the crystal's vibration increases, the knock sensor output voltage also increases. The voltage signal produced by the knock sensor increases with the amplitude of vibration. The PCM receives the knock sensor voltage signal as an input. If the signal rises above a predetermined level, the PCM will store that value in memory and retard ignition timing to reduce engine knock. If the knock sensor voltage exceeds a preset value, the PCM retards ignition timing for all cylinders. It is not a selective cylinder retard. The PCM ignores knock sensor input during engine idle conditions. Once the engine speed exceeds a specified value, knock retard is allowed. Knock retard uses its own short term and long term memory program. Long term memory stores previous detonation information in its battery-backed RAM. The maximum authority that long term memory has over timing retard can be calibrated. Short term memory is allowed to retard timing up to a preset amount under all operating conditions (as long as rpm is above the minimum rpm) except at Wide Open Throttle (WOT). The PCM, using short term memory, can respond quickly to retard timing when engine knock is detected. Short term memory is lost any time the ignition key is turned off. NOTE: Over or under tightening the sensor mounting bolts will affect knock sensor performance, possibly causing improper spark control. Always use the specified torque when installing the knock sensors. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Knock Sensor: Service and Repair Removal 4.7L The two knock sensors (1) are bolted into the cylinder block under the intake manifold (3). NOTE: The left sensor is identified by an identification tag (LEFT). It is also identified by a larger bolt head. The Powertrain Control Module (PCM) must have and know the correct sensor left/right positions. Do not mix the sensor locations. 1. Disconnect knock sensor dual pigtail harness from engine wiring harness. This connection is made near rear of engine. 2. Remove intake manifold See: Engine, Cooling and Exhaust/Engine/Intake Manifold/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Intake Manifold - Removal . 3. Remove sensor mounting bolts (2). Note foam strip on bolt threads. This foam is used only to retain the bolts to sensors for plant assembly. It is not used as a sealant. Do not apply any adhesive, sealant or thread locking compound to these bolts. 4. Remove sensors (1) from engine. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 5667 Knock Sensor: Service and Repair Installation 4.7L NOTE: The left sensor is identified by an identification tag (LEFT). It is also identified by a larger bolt head. The Powertrain Control Module (PCM) must have and know the correct sensor left/right positions. Do not mix the sensor locations. 1. Thoroughly clean knock sensor mounting holes. 2. Install sensors (1) into cylinder block. NOTE: Over or under tightening the sensor mounting bolts will affect knock sensor performance, possibly causing improper spark control. Always use the specified torque when installing the knock sensors. The torque for the knock sensor bolt is relatively light for an 8 mm bolt. NOTE: Note foam strip on bolt threads. This foam is used only to retain the bolts to sensors for plant assembly. It is not used as a sealant. Do not apply any adhesive, sealant or thread locking compound to these bolts. 3. Install and tighten mounting bolts. Tighten to 15 +/- 2 ft. lbs. (20 Nm) (176 in.lbs.). 4. Install intake manifold See: Engine, Cooling and Exhaust/Engine/Intake Manifold/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Intake Manifold - Installation . 5. Connect knock sensor wiring harness to engine harness (4) at rear of intake manifold. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations Camshaft Position Sensor: Locations Component ID: 405 Component : SENSOR-CAMSHAFT POSITION Connector: Name : SENSOR-CAMSHAFT POSITION Color : # of pins : 3 Qualifier : (DIESEL) Pin Circuit Description 1 F855 18PK/YL 5 VOLT SUPPLY 2 K944 18BK/GY CMP SENSOR GROUND 2 K916 18BR/OR SENSOR GROUND 3 K44 18DB/GY CMP SIGNAL Component Location - 5 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 5672 Component Location - 11 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 5673 Component Location - 13 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 5674 Connector: Name : SENSOR-CAMSHAFT POSITION Color : GRAY # of pins : 3 Qualifier : (GAS) Pin Circuit Description 1 F856 20YL/PK 5 VOLT SUPPLY 2 K900 20DB/DG SENSOR GROUND 3 K44 20DB/GY CMP SIGNAL Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 5675 Component Location - 5 Component Location - 11 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 5676 Component Location - 13 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 5677 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 5678 Camshaft Position Sensor: Diagrams Component ID: 405 Component : SENSOR-CAMSHAFT POSITION Connector: Name : SENSOR-CAMSHAFT POSITION Color : # of pins : 3 Qualifier : (DIESEL) Pin Circuit Description 1 F855 18PK/YL 5 VOLT SUPPLY 2 K944 18BK/GY CMP SENSOR GROUND 2 K916 18BR/OR SENSOR GROUND 3 K44 18DB/GY CMP SIGNAL Component Location - 5 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 5679 Component Location - 11 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 5680 Component Location - 13 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 5681 Connector: Name : SENSOR-CAMSHAFT POSITION Color : GRAY # of pins : 3 Qualifier : (GAS) Pin Circuit Description 1 F856 20YL/PK 5 VOLT SUPPLY 2 K900 20DB/DG SENSOR GROUND 3 K44 20DB/GY CMP SIGNAL Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 5682 Component Location - 5 Component Location - 11 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 5683 Component Location - 13 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 5684 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Camshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation Description 3.7L & 4.7L The Camshaft Position Sensor (CMP) (3) is bolted to the right-front side of the right cylinder head (2). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 5687 Camshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation Operation 4.7L The CMP sensor engine contains a hall effect device called a sync signal generator to generate a fuel sync signal. This sync signal generator detects notches located on a tonewheel. The tonewheel (4) is located at the front of the camshaft for the right cylinder head (2). As the tonewheel rotates, the notches (1) pass through the sync signal generator. The pattern of the notches (viewed counter-clockwise from front of engine) is: 1 notch, 2 notches, 3 notches, 3 notches, 2 notches, 1 notch, 3 notches and 1 notch. The signal from the CMP sensor is used in conjunction with the crankshaft position sensor to differentiate between fuel injection and spark events. It is also used to synchronize the fuel injectors with their respective cylinders. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Camshaft Position Sensor - Removal Camshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair Camshaft Position Sensor - Removal 4.7L The Camshaft Position Sensor (CMP) (2) is bolted to the front/top of the right cylinder head (1). 1. Raise and support vehicle. 2. Disconnect electrical connector (4) at CMP sensor. 3. Remove sensor mounting bolt (3). 4. Carefully twist sensor from cylinder head. 5. Check condition of sensor O-ring. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Camshaft Position Sensor - Removal > Page 5690 Camshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair Camshaft Position Sensor - Installation 4.7L 1. Clean out machined hole in cylinder head. 2. Apply a small amount of engine oil to sensor O-ring. 3. Install sensor (2) into cylinder head (1) with a slight rocking action. Do not twist sensor into position as damage to O-ring may result. CAUTION: Before tightening sensor mounting bolt, be sure sensor is completely flush to cylinder head. If sensor is not flush, damage to sensor mounting tang may result. 4. Install mounting bolt (3) and tighten to 12 Nm (106 in.lbs.). 5. Connect electrical connector to sensor. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations Crankshaft Position Sensor: Locations Component ID: 407 Component : SENSOR-CRANKSHAFT POSITION Connector: Name : SENSOR-CRANKSHAFT POSITION Color : BLACK # of pins : 3 Qualifier : (3.7L) Pin Circuit Description 1 K24 20BR/LB CKP SIGNAL 2 K900 20DB/DG SENSOR GROUND 3 F855 20PK/YL 5 VOLT SUPPLY Component Location - 5 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 5694 Component Location - 11 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 5695 Component Location - 19 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 5696 Component Location - 13 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 5697 Connector: Name : SENSOR-CRANKSHAFT POSITION Color : BLACK # of pins : 3 Qualifier : (4.7L) Pin Circuit Description 1 K24 20BR/LB CKP SIGNAL 2 K900 20DB/DG SENSOR GROUND 3 F855 20PK/YL 5 VOLT SUPPLY Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 5698 Component Location - 5 Component Location - 11 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 5699 Component Location - 19 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 5700 Component Location - 13 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 5701 Connector: Name : SENSOR-CRANKSHAFT POSITION Color : BLACK # of pins : 3 Qualifier : (5.7L) Pin Circuit Description 1 F855 20PK/YL 5 VOLT SUPPLY 2 K900 20DB/DG SENSOR GROUND 3 K24 20BR/LB CKP SIGNAL Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 5702 Component Location - 5 Component Location - 11 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 5703 Component Location - 19 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 5704 Component Location - 13 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 5705 Connector: Name : SENSOR-CRANKSHAFT POSITION Color : BLACK # of pins : 3 Qualifier : (DIESEL) Pin Circuit Description 1 K853 18DB/BR 5 VOLT SUPPLY Pin Circuit Description 1 K824 18DB/BR 5 VOLT SUPPLY Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 5706 2 K975 18BR/OR CKP SENSOR GROUND 2 K925 18BR/OR CKP SENSOR GROUND 3 K24 18BR/LB CKP SIGNAL Component Location - 5 Component Location - 11 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 5707 Component Location - 19 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 5708 Component Location - 13 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 5709 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 5710 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Diagrams Component ID: 407 Component : SENSOR-CRANKSHAFT POSITION Connector: Name : SENSOR-CRANKSHAFT POSITION Color : BLACK # of pins : 3 Qualifier : (3.7L) Pin Circuit Description 1 K24 20BR/LB CKP SIGNAL 2 K900 20DB/DG SENSOR GROUND 3 F855 20PK/YL 5 VOLT SUPPLY Component Location - 5 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 5711 Component Location - 11 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 5712 Component Location - 19 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 5713 Component Location - 13 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 5714 Connector: Name : SENSOR-CRANKSHAFT POSITION Color : BLACK # of pins : 3 Qualifier : (4.7L) Pin Circuit Description 1 K24 20BR/LB CKP SIGNAL 2 K900 20DB/DG SENSOR GROUND 3 F855 20PK/YL 5 VOLT SUPPLY Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 5715 Component Location - 5 Component Location - 11 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 5716 Component Location - 19 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 5717 Component Location - 13 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 5718 Connector: Name : SENSOR-CRANKSHAFT POSITION Color : BLACK # of pins : 3 Qualifier : (5.7L) Pin Circuit Description 1 F855 20PK/YL 5 VOLT SUPPLY 2 K900 20DB/DG SENSOR GROUND 3 K24 20BR/LB CKP SIGNAL Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 5719 Component Location - 5 Component Location - 11 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 5720 Component Location - 19 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 5721 Component Location - 13 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 5722 Connector: Name : SENSOR-CRANKSHAFT POSITION Color : BLACK # of pins : 3 Qualifier : (DIESEL) Pin Circuit Description 1 K853 18DB/BR 5 VOLT SUPPLY Pin Circuit Description 1 K824 18DB/BR 5 VOLT SUPPLY Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 5723 2 K975 18BR/OR CKP SENSOR GROUND 2 K925 18BR/OR CKP SENSOR GROUND 3 K24 18BR/LB CKP SIGNAL Component Location - 5 Component Location - 11 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 5724 Component Location - 19 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 5725 Component Location - 13 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 5726 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Crankshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation Description 4.7L V-8 The Crankshaft Position (CKP) (1) sensor is mounted into the right rear side of the cylinder block. It is positioned and bolted into a machined hole. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 5729 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation Operation 4.7L V-8 Engine speed and crankshaft position are provided through the CKP (Crankshaft Position) sensor. The sensor generates pulses that are the input sent to the Powertrain Control Module (PCM). The PCM interprets the sensor input to determine the crankshaft position. The PCM then uses this position, along with other inputs, to determine injector sequence and ignition timing. The sensor is a hall effect device combined with an internal magnet. It is also sensitive to steel within a certain distance from it. A tonewheel (1) is bolted to the engine crankshaft. This tonewheel has sets of notches (2) at its outer edge. The notches cause a pulse to be generated when they pass under the sensor. The pulses are the input to the PCM. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Crankshaft Position Sensor - Removal Crankshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair Crankshaft Position Sensor - Removal 4.7L V-8 The Crankshaft Position (CKP) sensor is located at the right-rear side of the engine cylinder block. It is positioned and bolted into a machined hole in the engine block. 1. Raise vehicle. 2. Disconnect CKP electrical connector at sensor. 3. Remove CKP mounting bolt (2). 4. Carefully twist sensor (1) from cylinder block. 5. Remove sensor from vehicle. 6. Check condition of sensor O-ring. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Crankshaft Position Sensor - Removal > Page 5732 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair Crankshaft Position Sensor - Installation 4.7L V-8 1. Clean out machined hole in engine block. 2. Apply a small amount of engine oil to sensor o-ring. 3. Install sensor (1) into engine block with a slight rocking and twisting action. CAUTION: Before tightening sensor mounting bolt, be sure sensor is completely flush to cylinder block. If sensor is not flush, damage to sensor mounting tang may result. 4. Install mounting bolt and tighten to 28 Nm (21 ft. lbs.) torque. 5. Connect electrical connector to sensor. 6. Lower vehicle. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL The ignition key must be in the key cylinder (1) for cylinder removal. 1. Disconnect negative cable from battery. 2. Remove upper and lower covers (shrouds) from steering column. 3. Place shifter in PARK position. 4. A retaining pin is located at the underside of the key cylinder assembly. a. Rotate key to RUN position. b. Press in on retaining pin while pulling key cylinder (1) from ignition switch. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 5738 Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION The ignition key must be in the key cylinder (3) for cylinder installation. 1. Install the key cylinder into the housing using care to align the end of the key cylinder (3) with the ignition switch (1). 2. Push the key cylinder (3) in until it clicks. 3. Replace the upper and lower shrouds. 4. Reconnect the battery. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Knock 1 Knock Sensor: Locations Sensor-Knock 1 Component ID: 423 Component : SENSOR-KNOCK 1 Connector: Name : SENSOR-KNOCK 1 Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (3.7L/5.7L) Pin Circuit Description 1 K42 20DB/YL KNOCK SENSOR NO. 1 SIGNAL 2 K942 20BR/LG KNOCK SENSOR NO. 1 RETURN Component Location - 9 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Knock 1 > Page 5743 Component Location - 22 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Knock 1 > Page 5744 Component Location - 19 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Knock 1 > Page 5745 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Knock 1 > Page 5746 Knock Sensor: Locations Sensor-Knock 2 Component ID: 424 Component : SENSOR-KNOCK 2 Connector: Name : SENSOR-KNOCK 2 Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (3.7L/5.7L) Pin Circuit Description 1 K242 20BR/WT KNOCK SENSOR NO. 2 SIGNAL 2 K924 20WT/BR KNOCK SENSOR NO. 2 RETURN Component Location - 11 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Knock 1 > Page 5747 Component Location - 22 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Knock 1 > Page 5748 Component Location - 19 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Knock 1 > Page 5749 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Knock 1 Knock Sensor: Diagrams Sensor-Knock 1 Component ID: 423 Component : SENSOR-KNOCK 1 Connector: Name : SENSOR-KNOCK 1 Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (3.7L/5.7L) Pin Circuit Description 1 K42 20DB/YL KNOCK SENSOR NO. 1 SIGNAL 2 K942 20BR/LG KNOCK SENSOR NO. 1 RETURN Component Location - 9 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Knock 1 > Page 5752 Component Location - 22 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Knock 1 > Page 5753 Component Location - 19 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Knock 1 > Page 5754 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Knock 1 > Page 5755 Knock Sensor: Diagrams Sensor-Knock 2 Component ID: 424 Component : SENSOR-KNOCK 2 Connector: Name : SENSOR-KNOCK 2 Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (3.7L/5.7L) Pin Circuit Description 1 K242 20BR/WT KNOCK SENSOR NO. 2 SIGNAL 2 K924 20WT/BR KNOCK SENSOR NO. 2 RETURN Component Location - 11 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Knock 1 > Page 5756 Component Location - 22 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Knock 1 > Page 5757 Component Location - 19 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Knock 1 > Page 5758 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Knock 1 > Page 5759 Knock Sensor: Diagrams Sensor-Knock Component ID: 422 Component : SENSOR-KNOCK Connector: Name : SENSOR-KNOCK Color : BLACK # of pins : 4 Qualifier : (4.7L) Pin Circuit Description 1 K942 20BR/LG KNOCK SENSOR NO. 1 RETURN 2 K42 20DB/YL KNOCK SENSOR NO. 1 SIGNAL 3 K924 20WT/BR KNOCK SENSOR NO. 2 RETURN 4 K242 20BR/WT KNOCK SENSOR NO. 2 SIGNAL Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Knock Sensor: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION Two knock sensors are bolted into the cylinder block under the intake manifold 3.7L, 4.7L & 8.3L. Two knock sensors are also used with the 5.7L. These are bolted into each side of the cylinder block (outside) under the exhaust manifold. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 5762 Knock Sensor: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION Two knock sensors are used; one for each cylinder bank. When the knock sensor detects a knock in one of the cylinders on the corresponding bank, it sends an input signal to the Powertrain Control Module (PCM). In response, the PCM retards ignition timing for all cylinders by a scheduled amount. Knock sensors contain a piezoelectric material which constantly vibrates and sends an input voltage (signal) to the PCM while the engine operates. As the intensity of the crystal's vibration increases, the knock sensor output voltage also increases. The voltage signal produced by the knock sensor increases with the amplitude of vibration. The PCM receives the knock sensor voltage signal as an input. If the signal rises above a predetermined level, the PCM will store that value in memory and retard ignition timing to reduce engine knock. If the knock sensor voltage exceeds a preset value, the PCM retards ignition timing for all cylinders. It is not a selective cylinder retard. The PCM ignores knock sensor input during engine idle conditions. Once the engine speed exceeds a specified value, knock retard is allowed. Knock retard uses its own short term and long term memory program. Long term memory stores previous detonation information in its battery-backed RAM. The maximum authority that long term memory has over timing retard can be calibrated. Short term memory is allowed to retard timing up to a preset amount under all operating conditions (as long as rpm is above the minimum rpm) except at Wide Open Throttle (WOT). The PCM, using short term memory, can respond quickly to retard timing when engine knock is detected. Short term memory is lost any time the ignition key is turned off. NOTE: Over or under tightening the sensor mounting bolts will affect knock sensor performance, possibly causing improper spark control. Always use the specified torque when installing the knock sensors. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Knock Sensor: Service and Repair Removal 4.7L The two knock sensors (1) are bolted into the cylinder block under the intake manifold (3). NOTE: The left sensor is identified by an identification tag (LEFT). It is also identified by a larger bolt head. The Powertrain Control Module (PCM) must have and know the correct sensor left/right positions. Do not mix the sensor locations. 1. Disconnect knock sensor dual pigtail harness from engine wiring harness. This connection is made near rear of engine. 2. Remove intake manifold See: Engine, Cooling and Exhaust/Engine/Intake Manifold/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Intake Manifold - Removal . 3. Remove sensor mounting bolts (2). Note foam strip on bolt threads. This foam is used only to retain the bolts to sensors for plant assembly. It is not used as a sealant. Do not apply any adhesive, sealant or thread locking compound to these bolts. 4. Remove sensors (1) from engine. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 5765 Knock Sensor: Service and Repair Installation 4.7L NOTE: The left sensor is identified by an identification tag (LEFT). It is also identified by a larger bolt head. The Powertrain Control Module (PCM) must have and know the correct sensor left/right positions. Do not mix the sensor locations. 1. Thoroughly clean knock sensor mounting holes. 2. Install sensors (1) into cylinder block. NOTE: Over or under tightening the sensor mounting bolts will affect knock sensor performance, possibly causing improper spark control. Always use the specified torque when installing the knock sensors. The torque for the knock sensor bolt is relatively light for an 8 mm bolt. NOTE: Note foam strip on bolt threads. This foam is used only to retain the bolts to sensors for plant assembly. It is not used as a sealant. Do not apply any adhesive, sealant or thread locking compound to these bolts. 3. Install and tighten mounting bolts. Tighten to 15 +/- 2 ft. lbs. (20 Nm) (176 in.lbs.). 4. Install intake manifold See: Engine, Cooling and Exhaust/Engine/Intake Manifold/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Intake Manifold - Installation . 5. Connect knock sensor wiring harness to engine harness (4) at rear of intake manifold. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Spark Plug > Component Information > Specifications Spark Plug: Specifications SPARK PLUGS Torque Not Supplied by Manufacturer Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Spark Plug > Component Information > Service and Repair > Spark Plug - Removal Spark Plug: Service and Repair Spark Plug - Removal REMOVAL - 4.7L V-8 CAUTION: This engine uses TWO DIFFERENT types of spark plugs. A total of 16 plugs is used. The plugs are mounted in two rows (banks). The upper row (5) is used on the intake valve side of the cylinder head. The lower row (6) is used on the exhaust valve side of the cylinder head. The upper row (5) uses Bosch Nickel Yttrium plugs #05149050AB. The lower row (6) uses Bosch Iridium plugs #05149888AA. DO NOT INTERCHANGE THESE PLUGS. CAUTION: Do not attempt to clean any of the spark plugs. Replace only. 1. Remove necessary air filter tubing and air intake components at top of engine and at throttle body. 2. To remove the upper row of plugs (5), each individual ignition coil (2) must first be removed. Prior to removing ignition coil, spray compressed air around coil base at cylinder head. 3. Prior to removing spark plug, spray compressed air into cylinder head opening. This will help prevent foreign material from entering combustion chamber. CAUTION: Due to tight clearances between UPPER row of plugs (5) and cylinder head, a conventional deep, thick-wall spark plug socket will not fit. Use a deep, THIN-WALL 5/8" spark plug socket for plug removal and installation. 4. Inspect spark plug condition. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Spark Plug > Component Information > Service and Repair > Spark Plug - Removal > Page 5771 Spark Plug: Service and Repair Spark Plug - Installation INSTALLATION - 4.7L V-8 CAUTION: This engine uses TWO DIFFERENT types of spark plugs. A total of 16 plugs is used. The plugs are mounted in two rows (banks). The upper row (5) is used on the intake valve side of the cylinder head. The lower row (6) is used on the exhaust valve side of the cylinder head. The upper row (5) uses Bosch Nickel Yttrium plugs #05149050AB. The lower row (6) uses Bosch Iridium plugs #05149888AA. DO NOT INTERCHANGE THESE PLUGS. CAUTION: Never use a motorized wire wheel brush to clean spark plugs. Metallic deposits will remain on spark plug insulator and will cause plug misfire. CAUTION: Do not attempt to clean any of the spark plugs. Replace only. 1. To aid in coil installation, apply silicone based grease such as Mopar(R) Dielectric Grease # J8126688 into spark plug end of rubber boots (4) and (7). Also apply this grease to the tops of spark plugs (5) and (6). 2. Check and adjust spark plug gap with a gap gauging tool (1). Two different gaps are used. 3. Start the spark plug into the cylinder head by hand to avoid cross threading. Special care should be taken when installing spark plugs into the cylinder head spark plug wells. Be sure the plugs do not drop into the plug wells as electrodes can be damaged. CAUTION: Due to tight clearances between upper row of plugs (5) and cylinder head, a conventional deep, thick-wall spark plug socket will not fit. Use a deep, THIN-WALL 5/8" spark plug socket for plug removal and installation. Always tighten spark plugs to the specified torque. Certain engines use torque sensitive spark plugs. It is a good practice to always tighten spark plugs to Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Spark Plug > Component Information > Service and Repair > Spark Plug - Removal > Page 5772 a specific torque. Over tightening can cause distortion resulting in a change in the spark plug gap, or a cracked porcelain insulator. 4. Install ignition coil(s). 5. Install necessary air filter tubing and air intake components to top of engine and to throttle body. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Overdrive Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > 42RLE Automatic Transmission Overdrive Solenoid: Description and Operation 42RLE Automatic Transmission Description DESCRIPTION The Solenoid/Pressure Switch Assembly (1) is inside the transmission and mounted to the valve body assembly. The assembly consists of four solenoids that control hydraulic pressure to the L/R, 2/4, OD, and UD friction elements (transmission clutches), and the torque converter clutch. The reverse clutch is controlled by line pressure from the manual valve in the valve body. The solenoids are contained within the Solenoid/Pressure Switch Assembly, and can only be serviced by replacing the assembly. The solenoid assembly also contains pressure switches that monitor and send hydraulic circuit information to the TCM. Likewise, the pressure switches can only be service by replacing the assembly. Operation OPERATION SOLENOIDS The solenoids receive electrical power from the Transmission Control Relay through a single wire. The TCM energizes or operates the solenoids individually by grounding the return wire of the solenoid needed. When a solenoid is energized, the solenoid valve shifts, and a fluid passage is opened or closed (vented or applied), depending on its default operating state. The result is an apply or release of a frictional element. The 2/4 and UD solenoids are normally applied, which allows fluid to pass through in their relaxed or "off" state. By design, this allows transmission limp-in (P,R,N,2) in the event of an electrical failure. The continuity of the solenoids and circuits are periodically tested. Each solenoid is turned on or off depending on its current state. An inductive spike should be detected by the TCM during this test. If no spike is detected, the circuit is tested again to verify the failure. In addition to the periodic testing, the solenoid circuits are tested if a speed ratio or pressure switch error occurs. PRESSURE SWITCHES The TCM relies on three pressure switches to monitor fluid pressure in the L/R, 2/4, and OD hydraulic circuits. The primary purpose of these switches is to help the TCM detect when clutch circuit hydraulic failures occur. The range for the pressure switch closing and opening points is 11-23 psi. Typically the switch opening point will be approximately one psi lower than the closing point. For example, a switch may close at 18 psi and open at 17 psi. The switches are continuously monitored by the TCM for the correct states (open or closed) in each gear as shown in the following chart: Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Overdrive Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 5780 A Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) will set if the TCM senses any switch open or closed at the wrong time in a given gear. The TCM also tests the 2/4 and OD pressure switches when they are normally off (OD and 2/4 are tested in 1st gear, OD in 2nd gear, and 2/4 in 3rd gear). The test simply verifies that they are operational, by looking for a closed state when the corresponding element is applied. Immediately after a shift into 1st, 2nd, or 3rd gear with the engine speed above 1000 rpm, the TCM momentarily turns on element pressure to the 2/4 and/or OD clutch circuits to identify that the appropriate switch has closed. If it doesn't close, it is tested again. If the switch fails to close the second time, the appropriate Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) will set. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Overdrive Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 5781 Overdrive Solenoid: Description and Operation 545RFE Automatic Transmission Description DESCRIPTION The transmission solenoid/TRS assembly is internal to the transmission and mounted on the valve body assembly. The assembly consists of six solenoids that control hydraulic pressure to the six friction elements (transmission clutches), and the torque converter clutch. The pressure control solenoid is located on the side of the solenoid/TRS assembly. The solenoid/TRS assembly also contains the Transmission Range Sensor (TRS) and five pressure switches that feed information to the TCM. Operation OPERATION SOLENOIDS Solenoids are used to control the L/R, 2C, 4C, OD, and UD friction elements. The reverse clutch is controlled by line pressure and the position of the manual valve in the valve body. All the solenoids are contained within the Solenoid and Pressure Switch Assembly. The solenoid and pressure switch assembly contains one additional solenoid, Multi-Select (MS), which serves primarily to provide 2nd and 3rd gear limp-in operation. The solenoids receive electrical power from the Transmission Control Relay through a single wire. The TCM energizes or operates the solenoids individually by grounding the return wire of the solenoid as necessary. When a solenoid is energized, the solenoid valve shifts, and a fluid passage is opened or closed (vented or applied), depending on its default operating state. The result is an apply or release of a frictional element. The MS and UD solenoids are normally applied to allow transmission limp-in in the event of an electrical failure. The continuity of the solenoids and circuits are periodically tested. Each solenoid is turned on or off depending on its current state. An inductive spike should be detected by the TCM during this test. If no spike is detected, the circuit is tested again to verify the failure. In addition to the periodic testing, the solenoid circuits are tested if a speed ratio or pressure switch error occurs. PRESSURE SWITCHES The TCM relies on five pressure switches to monitor fluid pressure in the L/R, 2C, 4C, UD, and OD hydraulic circuits. The primary purpose of these switches is to help the TCM detect when clutch circuit hydraulic failures occur. The switches close at 23 psi and open at 11 psi, and simply indicate whether or not pressure exists. The switches are continuously monitored by the TCM for the correct states (open or closed) in each gear as shown in the following charts and 545RFE PRESSURE SWITCH STATES: Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Overdrive Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 5782 A Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) will set if the TCM senses any switch open or closed at the wrong time in a given gear. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Overdrive Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 5783 Overdrive Solenoid: Description and Operation 68RFE Automatic Transmission Description DESCRIPTION The transmission solenoid/TRS assembly is internal to the transmission and mounted on the valve body assembly. The assembly consists of six solenoids that control hydraulic pressure to the six friction elements (transmission clutches), and the torque converter clutch. The pressure control solenoid is located on the side of the solenoid/TRS assembly. The solenoid/TRS assembly also contains the Transmission Range Sensor (TRS) and five pressure switches that feed information to the TCM. Operation OPERATION SOLENOIDS Solenoids are used to control the L/R, 2C, 4C, OD, and UD friction elements. The reverse clutch is controlled by line pressure and the position of the manual valve in the valve body. All the solenoids are contained within the Solenoid and Pressure Switch Assembly. The solenoid and pressure switch assembly contains one additional solenoid, Multi-Select (MS), which serves primarily to provide 3rd gear and reverse limp-in operation. The TCM energizes or operates the solenoids individually by grounding the return wire of the solenoid as necessary. When a solenoid is energized, the solenoid valve shifts, and a fluid passage is opened or closed (vented or applied), depending on its default operating state. The result is an apply or release of a frictional element. The MS and UD solenoids are normally applied to allow transmission limp-in in the event of an electrical failure. The continuity of the solenoids and circuits are periodically tested. Each solenoid is turned on or off depending on its current state. An inductive spike should be detected by the TCM during this test. If no spike is detected, the circuit is tested again to verify the failure. In addition to the periodic testing, the solenoid circuits are tested if a speed ratio or pressure switch error occurs. PRESSURE SWITCHES The TCM relies on five pressure switches to monitor fluid pressure in the L/R, 2C, 4C, UD, and OD hydraulic circuits. The primary purpose of these switches is to help the TCM detect when clutch circuit hydraulic failures occur. The switches close at 23 psi and open at 11 psi, and simply indicate whether or not pressure exists. The switches are continuously monitored by the TCM for the correct states (open or closed) in each gear as shown in the following charts and Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Overdrive Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 5784 A Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) will set if the TCM senses any switch open or closed at the wrong time in a given gear. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Overdrive Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 42RLE Automatic Transmission Overdrive Solenoid: Service and Repair 42RLE Automatic Transmission Removal REMOVAL NOTE: If the Solenoid/Pressure Switch Assembly is being replaced, the Quick Learn Procedure must be performed. See: Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Transmission Control Module/TCM Quick Learn 1. Raise vehicle on hoist. 2. Remove valve body assembly from transmission. See: Transmission and Drivetrain/Automatic Transmission/Transaxle/Valve Body/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/42RLE Automatic Transmission/Removal 3. Remove Solenoid/Pressure Switch Assembly retaining screws (2) from solenoid. 4. Remove Solenoid/Pressure Switch Assembly (1) and screen from valve body (2). Installation INSTALLATION NOTE: If the Solenoid/Pressure Switch assembly is being replaced, the Quick Learn Procedure must be performed. See: Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Transmission Control Module/TCM Quick Learn Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Overdrive Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 5787 1. Install Solenoid/Pressure Switch Assembly (1) and screen (3) to the separator and transfer plates. 2. Install and tighten retaining screws (2) to 5.5 Nm (50 in. lbs.) torque. 3. Install valve body. See: Transmission and Drivetrain/Automatic Transmission/Transaxle/Valve Body/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/42RLE Automatic Transmission/Installation Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Overdrive Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 5788 Overdrive Solenoid: Service and Repair 545RFE Automatic Transmission Removal REMOVAL NOTE: If the Transmission Solenoid/TRS Assembly is being replaced, the Quick Learn Procedure must be performed. See: Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Transmission Control Module/TCM Quick Learn 1. Remove the valve body from the transmission. See: Transmission and Drivetrain/Automatic Transmission/Transaxle/Valve Body/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/545RFE Automatic Transmission/Removal 2. Remove the bolts (1) holding the transmission solenoid/TRS assembly onto the valve body. 3. Separate the transmission solenoid/TRS assembly from the valve body. Installation INSTALLATION Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Overdrive Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 5789 1. Place TRS selector plate in the PARK position. 2. Position the transmission solenoid/TRS assembly onto the valve body. Be sure that both alignment dowels are fully seated in the valve body and that the TRS switch contacts are properly positioned in the selector plate 3. Install the bolts (1) to hold the transmission solenoid/TRS assembly onto the valve body. 4. Tighten the solenoid assembly screws adjacent to the arrows cast into the bottom of the valve body first. Tighten the screws to 6 Nm (50 in.lbs.). 5. Tighten the remainder of the solenoid assembly screws to 6 Nm (50 in.lbs.). 6. Install the valve body into the transmission. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Overdrive Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 5790 Overdrive Solenoid: Service and Repair 68RFE Automatic Transmission Removal REMOVAL NOTE: If the Transmission Solenoid/TRS Assembly is being replaced, the Quick Learn Procedure must be performed. See: Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Transmission Control Module/TCM Quick Learn 1. Remove the valve body from the transmission. 2. Remove the bolts (1) holding the transmission solenoid/TRS assembly onto the valve body. 3. Separate the transmission solenoid/TRS assembly from the valve body. Installation INSTALLATION Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Overdrive Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 5791 1. Place TRS selector plate in the PARK position. 2. Position the transmission solenoid/TRS assembly onto the valve body. Be sure that both alignment dowels are fully seated in the valve body and that the TRS switch contacts are properly positioned in the selector plate 3. Install the bolts (1) to hold the transmission solenoid/TRS assembly onto the valve body. 4. Tighten the solenoid assembly screws adjacent to the arrows cast into the bottom of the valve body first. Tighten the screws to 6 Nm (50 in.lbs.). 5. Tighten the remainder of the solenoid assembly screws to 6 Nm (50 in.lbs.). 6. Install the valve body into the transmission. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Assembly-Line Pressure Sensor/Variable Force Solenoid Pressure Regulating Solenoid: Locations Assembly-Line Pressure Sensor/Variable Force Solenoid Component ID: 17 Component : ASSEMBLY-LINE PRESSURE SENSOR/VARIABLE FORCE SOLENOID Connector: Name : ASSEMBLY-LINE PRESSURE SENSOR/VARIABLE FORCE SOLENOID Color : BLACK # of pins : 6 Qualifier : (RLE) Pin Circuit Description 1-2 F856 20YL/PK 5 VOLT SUPPLY 3 T38 20YL/BR LINE PRESSURE SIGNAL 4 K900 20DB/DG SENSOR GROUND 5 T16 18YL/OR TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT 6 T118 20DG LP VFS CONTROL Component Location - 19 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Assembly-Line Pressure Sensor/Variable Force Solenoid > Page 5796 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Assembly-Line Pressure Sensor/Variable Force Solenoid > Page 5797 Pressure Regulating Solenoid: Locations Assembly-Transmission Solenoid Component ID 15 Component ID: 15 Component : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID Connector: Name : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID Color : # of pins : 8 Qualifier : (RE) Pin Circuit Description 1 T16 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT 2 F856 18YL/PK 5 VOLT SUPPLY 3 K900 20DB/DG SENSOR GROUND 4 T38 18YL/BR GOVERNOR PRESSURE SENSOR SIGNAL 5 T118 18DG GOVERNOR PRESSURE SOLENOID CONTROL 6 T9 18DG/TN 3-4 SOLENOID CONTROL 7 T75 18YL/LB TORQUE CONVERTER CLUTCH SOLENOID CONTROL 8 T54 18DG/OR TRANSMISSION TEMPERATURE SIGNAL Component Location - 20 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Assembly-Line Pressure Sensor/Variable Force Solenoid > Page 5798 Component Location - 26 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Assembly-Line Pressure Sensor/Variable Force Solenoid > Page 5799 Connector: Name : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID C1 Color : # of pins : 10 Qualifier : (RC) Pin Circuit Description 1 T806 20DG/VT PRESSURE SIGNAL 7 2 T804 20YL/DB PRESSURE SIGNAL 5 3 T54 20DG/OR TRANSMISSION TEMPERATURE SIGNAL 4 T817 20YL/BR LINEAR 3 CONTROL Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Assembly-Line Pressure Sensor/Variable Force Solenoid > Page 5800 5 T813 20DG/LG LINEAR 1 CONTROL 6 T807 20DG/WT PRESSURE SIGNAL 8 7 T803 20DG/BR PRESSURE SIGNAL 4 8 T820 20YL/WT TEMPERATURE SENSOR GROUND 9 T816 20YL/PK LINEAR 3 GROUND 10 T812 20DG/TN LINEAR 1 GROUND Component Location - 20 Component Location - 26 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Assembly-Line Pressure Sensor/Variable Force Solenoid > Page 5801 Connector: Name : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID C2 Color : # of pins : 12 Qualifier : (RC) Pin Circuit Description 1 T800 20DG/BR PRESSURE SIGNAL 1 2 T805 20DG/OR PRESSURE SIGNAL 6 3 T809 20DG/YL SHIFT 2 CONTROL 4 T811 20DG/LB SHIFT 4 CONTROL Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Assembly-Line Pressure Sensor/Variable Force Solenoid > Page 5802 5 T818 20YL/OR LINEAR 4 GROUND 6 T814 20YL/BR LINEAR 2 GROUND 7 T801 20DG/RD PRESSURE SIGNAL 2 8 T802 20DG/PK PRESSURE SIGNAL 3 9 T810 20DG/DB SHIFT 3 CONTROL 10 T808 20DG/GY SHIFT 1 CONTROL 11 T821 20YL/GY LINEAR 4 CONTROL 12 T815 20YL/RD LINEAR 2 CONTROL Component Location - 20 Component Location - 26 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Assembly-Line Pressure Sensor/Variable Force Solenoid > Page 5803 Component ID 19 Component ID: 19 Component : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID Connector: Name : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID Color : # of pins : 8 Qualifier : (RE) Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Assembly-Line Pressure Sensor/Variable Force Solenoid > Page 5804 Pin Circuit Description 1 T16 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT 2 F856 18YL/PK 5 VOLT SUPPLY 3 K900 20DB/DG SENSOR GROUND 4 T38 18YL/BR GOVERNOR PRESSURE SENSOR SIGNAL 5 T118 18DG GOVERNOR PRESSURE SOLENOID CONTROL 6 T9 18DG/TN 3-4 SOLENOID CONTROL 7 T75 18YL/LB TORQUE CONVERTER CLUTCH SOLENOID CONTROL 8 T54 18DG/OR TRANSMISSION TEMPERATURE SIGNAL Component Location - 20 Component Location - 26 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Assembly-Line Pressure Sensor/Variable Force Solenoid > Page 5805 Connector: Name : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID C1 Color : # of pins : 10 Qualifier : (RC) Pin Circuit Description 1 T806 20DG/VT PRESSURE SIGNAL 7 2 T804 20YL/DB PRESSURE SIGNAL 5 3 T54 20DG/OR TRANSMISSION TEMPERATURE SIGNAL 4 T817 20YL/BR LINEAR 3 CONTROL Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Assembly-Line Pressure Sensor/Variable Force Solenoid > Page 5806 5 T813 20DG/LG LINEAR 1 CONTROL 6 T807 20DG/WT PRESSURE SIGNAL 8 7 T803 20DG/BR PRESSURE SIGNAL 4 8 T820 20YL/WT TEMPERATURE SENSOR GROUND 9 T816 20YL/PK LINEAR 3 GROUND 10 T812 20DG/TN LINEAR 1 GROUND Component Location - 20 Component Location - 26 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Assembly-Line Pressure Sensor/Variable Force Solenoid > Page 5807 Connector: Name : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID C2 Color : # of pins : 12 Qualifier : (RC) Pin Circuit Description 1 T800 20DG/BR PRESSURE SIGNAL 1 2 T805 20DG/OR PRESSURE SIGNAL 6 3 T809 20DG/YL SHIFT 2 CONTROL 4 T811 20DG/LB SHIFT 4 CONTROL Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Assembly-Line Pressure Sensor/Variable Force Solenoid > Page 5808 5 T818 20YL/OR LINEAR 4 GROUND 6 T814 20YL/BR LINEAR 2 GROUND 7 T801 20DG/RD PRESSURE SIGNAL 2 8 T802 20DG/PK PRESSURE SIGNAL 3 9 T810 20DG/DB SHIFT 3 CONTROL 10 T808 20DG/GY SHIFT 1 CONTROL 11 T821 20YL/GY LINEAR 4 CONTROL 12 T815 20YL/RD LINEAR 2 CONTROL Component Location - 20 Component Location - 26 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Assembly-Line Pressure Sensor/Variable Force Solenoid > Page 5809 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Assembly-Line Pressure Sensor/Variable Force Solenoid > Page 5810 Pressure Regulating Solenoid: Locations Assembly-Transmission Solenoid/Pressure Switch Component ID: 20 Component : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID/PRESSURE SWITCH Connector: Name : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID/PRESSURE SWITCH Color : LT. BROWN # of pins : 10 Qualifier : (RLE) Pin Circuit Description 1 T60 20YL/GY OD CONTROL 2 T59 20YL/LB UD CONTROL 3 T16 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT 4 T19 18YL/DB 2-4 CONTROL 5 T47 18YL/DG 2-4 PRESSURE SIGNAL 6 T9 20DG/TN OD PRESSURE SIGNAL 7 T20 20DG/WT L/R CONTROL 8-9-10 T50 20YL/TN L/R PRESSURE SIGNAL Component Location - 19 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Assembly-Line Pressure Sensor/Variable Force Solenoid > Page 5811 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Assembly-Line Pressure Sensor/Variable Force Solenoid > Page 5812 Pressure Regulating Solenoid: Locations Assembly-Transmission Solenoid/TRS Component ID: 21 Component : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID/TRS Connector: Name : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID/TRS Color : BLACK # of pins : 23 Qualifier : (RFE) Pin Circuit Description 1-2 T20 20DG/WT L/R CONTROL 3-4 T41 20YL/DB TRS T41 SIGNAL (P/N) 5 T42 20DG/YL TRS T42 SIGNAL 6-- 7 T60 20YL/GY OD SOLENOID CONTROL 8 T3 20DG/DB TRS T3 SIGNAL 9 T1 20DG/LB TRS T1 SIGNAL 10 T16 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT 11 T48 20BR/YL 4C PRESSURE SIGNAL 12 T118 20DG LINE PRESSURE CONTROL 13 T4 20DG/RD TRS T2 SIGNAL 13 T4 20DG/LB TRS T2 SIGNAL 14 T50 20DG/PK L/R PRESSURE SIGNAL 14 T50 20YL/TN L/R PRESSURE SIGNAL 15 T147 20DG/YL 2C PRESSURE SIGNAL 16 T9 20DG/TN OD PRESSURE SIGNAL 17 T59 20YL/LB UD CONTROL 18 T29 20YL/WT UD PRESSURE SIGNAL 19 T259 20YL/DG 4C CONTROL 20 T219 20YL/LG 2C CONTROL 21 T140 20YL/GY MS CONTROL 22 T160 20DG/WT SENSOR GROUND 22 K900 20DB/DG SENSOR GROUND 23 T54 20DG/OR TRANSMISSION TEMPERATURE SIGNAL Component Location - 21 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Assembly-Line Pressure Sensor/Variable Force Solenoid > Page 5813 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Assembly-Line Pressure Sensor/Variable Force Solenoid Pressure Regulating Solenoid: Diagrams Assembly-Line Pressure Sensor/Variable Force Solenoid Component ID: 17 Component : ASSEMBLY-LINE PRESSURE SENSOR/VARIABLE FORCE SOLENOID Connector: Name : ASSEMBLY-LINE PRESSURE SENSOR/VARIABLE FORCE SOLENOID Color : BLACK # of pins : 6 Qualifier : (RLE) Pin Circuit Description 1-2 F856 20YL/PK 5 VOLT SUPPLY 3 T38 20YL/BR LINE PRESSURE SIGNAL 4 K900 20DB/DG SENSOR GROUND 5 T16 18YL/OR TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT 6 T118 20DG LP VFS CONTROL Component Location - 19 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Assembly-Line Pressure Sensor/Variable Force Solenoid > Page 5816 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Assembly-Line Pressure Sensor/Variable Force Solenoid > Page 5817 Pressure Regulating Solenoid: Diagrams Assembly-Transmission Solenoid Component ID 15 Component ID: 15 Component : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID Connector: Name : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID Color : # of pins : 8 Qualifier : (RE) Pin Circuit Description 1 T16 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT 2 F856 18YL/PK 5 VOLT SUPPLY 3 K900 20DB/DG SENSOR GROUND 4 T38 18YL/BR GOVERNOR PRESSURE SENSOR SIGNAL 5 T118 18DG GOVERNOR PRESSURE SOLENOID CONTROL 6 T9 18DG/TN 3-4 SOLENOID CONTROL 7 T75 18YL/LB TORQUE CONVERTER CLUTCH SOLENOID CONTROL 8 T54 18DG/OR TRANSMISSION TEMPERATURE SIGNAL Component Location - 20 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Assembly-Line Pressure Sensor/Variable Force Solenoid > Page 5818 Component Location - 26 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Assembly-Line Pressure Sensor/Variable Force Solenoid > Page 5819 Connector: Name : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID C1 Color : # of pins : 10 Qualifier : (RC) Pin Circuit Description 1 T806 20DG/VT PRESSURE SIGNAL 7 2 T804 20YL/DB PRESSURE SIGNAL 5 3 T54 20DG/OR TRANSMISSION TEMPERATURE SIGNAL 4 T817 20YL/BR LINEAR 3 CONTROL Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Assembly-Line Pressure Sensor/Variable Force Solenoid > Page 5820 5 T813 20DG/LG LINEAR 1 CONTROL 6 T807 20DG/WT PRESSURE SIGNAL 8 7 T803 20DG/BR PRESSURE SIGNAL 4 8 T820 20YL/WT TEMPERATURE SENSOR GROUND 9 T816 20YL/PK LINEAR 3 GROUND 10 T812 20DG/TN LINEAR 1 GROUND Component Location - 20 Component Location - 26 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Assembly-Line Pressure Sensor/Variable Force Solenoid > Page 5821 Connector: Name : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID C2 Color : # of pins : 12 Qualifier : (RC) Pin Circuit Description 1 T800 20DG/BR PRESSURE SIGNAL 1 2 T805 20DG/OR PRESSURE SIGNAL 6 3 T809 20DG/YL SHIFT 2 CONTROL 4 T811 20DG/LB SHIFT 4 CONTROL Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Assembly-Line Pressure Sensor/Variable Force Solenoid > Page 5822 5 T818 20YL/OR LINEAR 4 GROUND 6 T814 20YL/BR LINEAR 2 GROUND 7 T801 20DG/RD PRESSURE SIGNAL 2 8 T802 20DG/PK PRESSURE SIGNAL 3 9 T810 20DG/DB SHIFT 3 CONTROL 10 T808 20DG/GY SHIFT 1 CONTROL 11 T821 20YL/GY LINEAR 4 CONTROL 12 T815 20YL/RD LINEAR 2 CONTROL Component Location - 20 Component Location - 26 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Assembly-Line Pressure Sensor/Variable Force Solenoid > Page 5823 Component ID 19 Component ID: 19 Component : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID Connector: Name : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID Color : # of pins : 8 Qualifier : (RE) Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Assembly-Line Pressure Sensor/Variable Force Solenoid > Page 5824 Pin Circuit Description 1 T16 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT 2 F856 18YL/PK 5 VOLT SUPPLY 3 K900 20DB/DG SENSOR GROUND 4 T38 18YL/BR GOVERNOR PRESSURE SENSOR SIGNAL 5 T118 18DG GOVERNOR PRESSURE SOLENOID CONTROL 6 T9 18DG/TN 3-4 SOLENOID CONTROL 7 T75 18YL/LB TORQUE CONVERTER CLUTCH SOLENOID CONTROL 8 T54 18DG/OR TRANSMISSION TEMPERATURE SIGNAL Component Location - 20 Component Location - 26 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Assembly-Line Pressure Sensor/Variable Force Solenoid > Page 5825 Connector: Name : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID C1 Color : # of pins : 10 Qualifier : (RC) Pin Circuit Description 1 T806 20DG/VT PRESSURE SIGNAL 7 2 T804 20YL/DB PRESSURE SIGNAL 5 3 T54 20DG/OR TRANSMISSION TEMPERATURE SIGNAL 4 T817 20YL/BR LINEAR 3 CONTROL Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Assembly-Line Pressure Sensor/Variable Force Solenoid > Page 5826 5 T813 20DG/LG LINEAR 1 CONTROL 6 T807 20DG/WT PRESSURE SIGNAL 8 7 T803 20DG/BR PRESSURE SIGNAL 4 8 T820 20YL/WT TEMPERATURE SENSOR GROUND 9 T816 20YL/PK LINEAR 3 GROUND 10 T812 20DG/TN LINEAR 1 GROUND Component Location - 20 Component Location - 26 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Assembly-Line Pressure Sensor/Variable Force Solenoid > Page 5827 Connector: Name : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID C2 Color : # of pins : 12 Qualifier : (RC) Pin Circuit Description 1 T800 20DG/BR PRESSURE SIGNAL 1 2 T805 20DG/OR PRESSURE SIGNAL 6 3 T809 20DG/YL SHIFT 2 CONTROL 4 T811 20DG/LB SHIFT 4 CONTROL Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Assembly-Line Pressure Sensor/Variable Force Solenoid > Page 5828 5 T818 20YL/OR LINEAR 4 GROUND 6 T814 20YL/BR LINEAR 2 GROUND 7 T801 20DG/RD PRESSURE SIGNAL 2 8 T802 20DG/PK PRESSURE SIGNAL 3 9 T810 20DG/DB SHIFT 3 CONTROL 10 T808 20DG/GY SHIFT 1 CONTROL 11 T821 20YL/GY LINEAR 4 CONTROL 12 T815 20YL/RD LINEAR 2 CONTROL Component Location - 20 Component Location - 26 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Assembly-Line Pressure Sensor/Variable Force Solenoid > Page 5829 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Assembly-Line Pressure Sensor/Variable Force Solenoid > Page 5830 Pressure Regulating Solenoid: Diagrams Assembly-Transmission Solenoid/Pressure Switch Component ID: 20 Component : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID/PRESSURE SWITCH Connector: Name : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID/PRESSURE SWITCH Color : LT. BROWN # of pins : 10 Qualifier : (RLE) Pin Circuit Description 1 T60 20YL/GY OD CONTROL 2 T59 20YL/LB UD CONTROL 3 T16 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT 4 T19 18YL/DB 2-4 CONTROL 5 T47 18YL/DG 2-4 PRESSURE SIGNAL 6 T9 20DG/TN OD PRESSURE SIGNAL 7 T20 20DG/WT L/R CONTROL 8-9-10 T50 20YL/TN L/R PRESSURE SIGNAL Component Location - 19 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Assembly-Line Pressure Sensor/Variable Force Solenoid > Page 5831 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Assembly-Line Pressure Sensor/Variable Force Solenoid > Page 5832 Pressure Regulating Solenoid: Diagrams Assembly-Transmission Solenoid/TRS Component ID: 21 Component : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID/TRS Connector: Name : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID/TRS Color : BLACK # of pins : 23 Qualifier : (RFE) Pin Circuit Description 1-2 T20 20DG/WT L/R CONTROL 3-4 T41 20YL/DB TRS T41 SIGNAL (P/N) 5 T42 20DG/YL TRS T42 SIGNAL 6-- 7 T60 20YL/GY OD SOLENOID CONTROL 8 T3 20DG/DB TRS T3 SIGNAL 9 T1 20DG/LB TRS T1 SIGNAL 10 T16 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT 11 T48 20BR/YL 4C PRESSURE SIGNAL 12 T118 20DG LINE PRESSURE CONTROL 13 T4 20DG/RD TRS T2 SIGNAL 13 T4 20DG/LB TRS T2 SIGNAL 14 T50 20DG/PK L/R PRESSURE SIGNAL 14 T50 20YL/TN L/R PRESSURE SIGNAL 15 T147 20DG/YL 2C PRESSURE SIGNAL 16 T9 20DG/TN OD PRESSURE SIGNAL 17 T59 20YL/LB UD CONTROL 18 T29 20YL/WT UD PRESSURE SIGNAL 19 T259 20YL/DG 4C CONTROL 20 T219 20YL/LG 2C CONTROL 21 T140 20YL/GY MS CONTROL 22 T160 20DG/WT SENSOR GROUND 22 K900 20DB/DG SENSOR GROUND 23 T54 20DG/OR TRANSMISSION TEMPERATURE SIGNAL Component Location - 21 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Assembly-Line Pressure Sensor/Variable Force Solenoid > Page 5833 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > 42RLE Automatic Transmission Pressure Regulating Solenoid: Description and Operation 42RLE Automatic Transmission Description DESCRIPTION The pressure control solenoid (1) is mounted on the top of the valve body, next to the line pressure sensor (2). The TCM utilizes a closed-loop system to control transmission line pressure. The system contains a variable force style solenoid, the Pressure Control Solenoid. The solenoid is duty cycle controlled by the TCM to vent the unnecessary line pressure supplied by the oil pump back to the sump. The system also contains a variable pressure style sensor, the Line Pressure Sensor, which is a direct input to the TCM. The line pressure solenoid monitors the transmission line pressure and completes the feedback loop to the TCM. The TCM uses this information to adjust its control of the pressure control solenoid to achieve the desired line pressure. Operation OPERATION The pressure control solenoid (PCS) is a variable force (VFS) style solenoid. A VFS solenoid is an electro-hydraulic actuator, combining a solenoid and a regulating valve. The transmission control module varies the current for the PCS, which varies the pressure in the line pressure hydraulic circuit. When the current (duty cycle) of the PCS is low, the pressure in the circuit is higher. At 0 current (0% duty cycle), the pressure is at the maximum value. Conversely, when the current is maximized (100% duty cycle), the pressure in the circuit is at the lowest possible value. Description DESCRIPTION Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 5836 The Solenoid/Pressure Switch Assembly (1) is inside the transmission and mounted to the valve body assembly. The assembly consists of four solenoids that control hydraulic pressure to the L/R, 2/4, OD, and UD friction elements (transmission clutches), and the torque converter clutch. The reverse clutch is controlled by line pressure from the manual valve in the valve body. The solenoids are contained within the Solenoid/Pressure Switch Assembly, and can only be serviced by replacing the assembly. The solenoid assembly also contains pressure switches that monitor and send hydraulic circuit information to the TCM. Likewise, the pressure switches can only be service by replacing the assembly. Operation OPERATION SOLENOIDS The solenoids receive electrical power from the Transmission Control Relay through a single wire. The TCM energizes or operates the solenoids individually by grounding the return wire of the solenoid needed. When a solenoid is energized, the solenoid valve shifts, and a fluid passage is opened or closed (vented or applied), depending on its default operating state. The result is an apply or release of a frictional element. The 2/4 and UD solenoids are normally applied, which allows fluid to pass through in their relaxed or "off" state. By design, this allows transmission limp-in (P,R,N,2) in the event of an electrical failure. The continuity of the solenoids and circuits are periodically tested. Each solenoid is turned on or off depending on its current state. An inductive spike should be detected by the TCM during this test. If no spike is detected, the circuit is tested again to verify the failure. In addition to the periodic testing, the solenoid circuits are tested if a speed ratio or pressure switch error occurs. PRESSURE SWITCHES The TCM relies on three pressure switches to monitor fluid pressure in the L/R, 2/4, and OD hydraulic circuits. The primary purpose of these switches is to help the TCM detect when clutch circuit hydraulic failures occur. The range for the pressure switch closing and opening points is 11-23 psi. Typically the switch opening point will be approximately one psi lower than the closing point. For example, a switch may close at 18 psi and open at 17 psi. The switches are continuously monitored by the TCM for the correct states (open or closed) in each gear as shown in the following chart: Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 5837 A Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) will set if the TCM senses any switch open or closed at the wrong time in a given gear. The TCM also tests the 2/4 and OD pressure switches when they are normally off (OD and 2/4 are tested in 1st gear, OD in 2nd gear, and 2/4 in 3rd gear). The test simply verifies that they are operational, by looking for a closed state when the corresponding element is applied. Immediately after a shift into 1st, 2nd, or 3rd gear with the engine speed above 1000 rpm, the TCM momentarily turns on element pressure to the 2/4 and/or OD clutch circuits to identify that the appropriate switch has closed. If it doesn't close, it is tested again. If the switch fails to close the second time, the appropriate Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) will set. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 5838 Pressure Regulating Solenoid: Description and Operation 545RFE Automatic Transmission Description DESCRIPTION The transmission solenoid/TRS assembly is internal to the transmission and mounted on the valve body assembly. The assembly consists of six solenoids that control hydraulic pressure to the six friction elements (transmission clutches), and the torque converter clutch. The pressure control solenoid is located on the side of the solenoid/TRS assembly. The solenoid/TRS assembly also contains the Transmission Range Sensor (TRS) and five pressure switches that feed information to the TCM. Operation OPERATION SOLENOIDS Solenoids are used to control the L/R, 2C, 4C, OD, and UD friction elements. The reverse clutch is controlled by line pressure and the position of the manual valve in the valve body. All the solenoids are contained within the Solenoid and Pressure Switch Assembly. The solenoid and pressure switch assembly contains one additional solenoid, Multi-Select (MS), which serves primarily to provide 2nd and 3rd gear limp-in operation. The solenoids receive electrical power from the Transmission Control Relay through a single wire. The TCM energizes or operates the solenoids individually by grounding the return wire of the solenoid as necessary. When a solenoid is energized, the solenoid valve shifts, and a fluid passage is opened or closed (vented or applied), depending on its default operating state. The result is an apply or release of a frictional element. The MS and UD solenoids are normally applied to allow transmission limp-in in the event of an electrical failure. The continuity of the solenoids and circuits are periodically tested. Each solenoid is turned on or off depending on its current state. An inductive spike should be detected by the TCM during this test. If no spike is detected, the circuit is tested again to verify the failure. In addition to the periodic testing, the solenoid circuits are tested if a speed ratio or pressure switch error occurs. PRESSURE SWITCHES The TCM relies on five pressure switches to monitor fluid pressure in the L/R, 2C, 4C, UD, and OD hydraulic circuits. The primary purpose of these switches is to help the TCM detect when clutch circuit hydraulic failures occur. The switches close at 23 psi and open at 11 psi, and simply indicate whether or not pressure exists. The switches are continuously monitored by the TCM for the correct states (open or closed) in each gear as shown in the following charts and 545RFE PRESSURE SWITCH STATES: Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 5839 A Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) will set if the TCM senses any switch open or closed at the wrong time in a given gear. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 5840 Pressure Regulating Solenoid: Description and Operation 68RFE Automatic Transmission Description DESCRIPTION The transmission solenoid/TRS assembly is internal to the transmission and mounted on the valve body assembly. The assembly consists of six solenoids that control hydraulic pressure to the six friction elements (transmission clutches), and the torque converter clutch. The pressure control solenoid is located on the side of the solenoid/TRS assembly. The solenoid/TRS assembly also contains the Transmission Range Sensor (TRS) and five pressure switches that feed information to the TCM. Operation OPERATION SOLENOIDS Solenoids are used to control the L/R, 2C, 4C, OD, and UD friction elements. The reverse clutch is controlled by line pressure and the position of the manual valve in the valve body. All the solenoids are contained within the Solenoid and Pressure Switch Assembly. The solenoid and pressure switch assembly contains one additional solenoid, Multi-Select (MS), which serves primarily to provide 3rd gear and reverse limp-in operation. The TCM energizes or operates the solenoids individually by grounding the return wire of the solenoid as necessary. When a solenoid is energized, the solenoid valve shifts, and a fluid passage is opened or closed (vented or applied), depending on its default operating state. The result is an apply or release of a frictional element. The MS and UD solenoids are normally applied to allow transmission limp-in in the event of an electrical failure. The continuity of the solenoids and circuits are periodically tested. Each solenoid is turned on or off depending on its current state. An inductive spike should be detected by the TCM during this test. If no spike is detected, the circuit is tested again to verify the failure. In addition to the periodic testing, the solenoid circuits are tested if a speed ratio or pressure switch error occurs. PRESSURE SWITCHES The TCM relies on five pressure switches to monitor fluid pressure in the L/R, 2C, 4C, UD, and OD hydraulic circuits. The primary purpose of these switches is to help the TCM detect when clutch circuit hydraulic failures occur. The switches close at 23 psi and open at 11 psi, and simply indicate whether or not pressure exists. The switches are continuously monitored by the TCM for the correct states (open or closed) in each gear as shown in the following charts and Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 5841 A Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) will set if the TCM senses any switch open or closed at the wrong time in a given gear. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 42RLE Automatic Transmission Pressure Regulating Solenoid: Service and Repair 42RLE Automatic Transmission Removal REMOVAL 1. Remove the valve body from the transmission. See: Transmission and Drivetrain/Automatic Transmission/Transaxle/Valve Body/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/42RLE Automatic Transmission/Removal 2. Remove the electrical connectors from the pressure control solenoid (1) and the line pressure sensor (2). 3. Remove the screws (6) holding the pressure control solenoid (1) and line pressure sensor (2) to the valve body. 4. Remove the pressure control solenoid and line pressure sensor from the valve body. Installation INSTALLATION 1. Install the pressure control solenoid (1) and line pressure sensor (2) into the valve body. 2. Install the screws (6) to hold the pressure control solenoid (1) and line pressure sensor (2) to the valve body. 3. Install the electrical connectors to the pressure control solenoid (1) and the line pressure sensor (2). 4. Install the valve body into the transmission. See: Transmission and Drivetrain/Automatic Transmission/Transaxle/Valve Body/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/42RLE Automatic Transmission/Installation Removal Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 5844 REMOVAL NOTE: If the Solenoid/Pressure Switch Assembly is being replaced, the Quick Learn Procedure must be performed. See: Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Transmission Control Module/TCM Quick Learn 1. Raise vehicle on hoist. 2. Remove valve body assembly from transmission. See: Transmission and Drivetrain/Automatic Transmission/Transaxle/Valve Body/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/42RLE Automatic Transmission/Removal 3. Remove Solenoid/Pressure Switch Assembly retaining screws (2) from solenoid. 4. Remove Solenoid/Pressure Switch Assembly (1) and screen from valve body (2). Installation INSTALLATION NOTE: If the Solenoid/Pressure Switch assembly is being replaced, the Quick Learn Procedure must be performed. See: Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Transmission Control Module/TCM Quick Learn 1. Install Solenoid/Pressure Switch Assembly (1) and screen (3) to the separator and transfer plates. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 5845 2. Install and tighten retaining screws (2) to 5.5 Nm (50 in. lbs.) torque. 3. Install valve body. See: Transmission and Drivetrain/Automatic Transmission/Transaxle/Valve Body/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/42RLE Automatic Transmission/Installation Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 5846 Pressure Regulating Solenoid: Service and Repair 545RFE Automatic Transmission Removal REMOVAL NOTE: If the Transmission Solenoid/TRS Assembly is being replaced, the Quick Learn Procedure must be performed. See: Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Transmission Control Module/TCM Quick Learn 1. Remove the valve body from the transmission. See: Transmission and Drivetrain/Automatic Transmission/Transaxle/Valve Body/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/545RFE Automatic Transmission/Removal 2. Remove the bolts (1) holding the transmission solenoid/TRS assembly onto the valve body. 3. Separate the transmission solenoid/TRS assembly from the valve body. Installation INSTALLATION Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 5847 1. Place TRS selector plate in the PARK position. 2. Position the transmission solenoid/TRS assembly onto the valve body. Be sure that both alignment dowels are fully seated in the valve body and that the TRS switch contacts are properly positioned in the selector plate 3. Install the bolts (1) to hold the transmission solenoid/TRS assembly onto the valve body. 4. Tighten the solenoid assembly screws adjacent to the arrows cast into the bottom of the valve body first. Tighten the screws to 6 Nm (50 in.lbs.). 5. Tighten the remainder of the solenoid assembly screws to 6 Nm (50 in.lbs.). 6. Install the valve body into the transmission. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 5848 Pressure Regulating Solenoid: Service and Repair 68RFE Automatic Transmission Removal REMOVAL NOTE: If the Transmission Solenoid/TRS Assembly is being replaced, the Quick Learn Procedure must be performed. See: Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Transmission Control Module/TCM Quick Learn 1. Remove the valve body from the transmission. 2. Remove the bolts (1) holding the transmission solenoid/TRS assembly onto the valve body. 3. Separate the transmission solenoid/TRS assembly from the valve body. Installation INSTALLATION Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 5849 1. Place TRS selector plate in the PARK position. 2. Position the transmission solenoid/TRS assembly onto the valve body. Be sure that both alignment dowels are fully seated in the valve body and that the TRS switch contacts are properly positioned in the selector plate 3. Install the bolts (1) to hold the transmission solenoid/TRS assembly onto the valve body. 4. Tighten the solenoid assembly screws adjacent to the arrows cast into the bottom of the valve body first. Tighten the screws to 6 Nm (50 in.lbs.). 5. Tighten the remainder of the solenoid assembly screws to 6 Nm (50 in.lbs.). 6. Install the valve body into the transmission. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Interlock Solenoid > Component Information > Locations Shift Interlock Solenoid: Locations Component ID: 455 Component : SOLENOID-BRAKE TRANSMISSION SHIFT INTERLOCK Connector: Name : SOLENOID-BRAKE TRANSMISSION SHIFT INTERLOCK Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Pin Circuit Description 1 K32 18DB/YL BTSI SOLENOID CONTROL 2 Z101 18BK/VT GROUND Component Location - 47 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Interlock Solenoid > Component Information > Locations > Page 5853 Component Location - 42 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Interlock Solenoid > Component Information > Locations > Page 5854 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Interlock Solenoid > Component Information > Locations > Page 5855 Shift Interlock Solenoid: Diagrams Component ID: 455 Component : SOLENOID-BRAKE TRANSMISSION SHIFT INTERLOCK Connector: Name : SOLENOID-BRAKE TRANSMISSION SHIFT INTERLOCK Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Pin Circuit Description 1 K32 18DB/YL BTSI SOLENOID CONTROL 2 Z101 18BK/VT GROUND Component Location - 47 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Interlock Solenoid > Component Information > Locations > Page 5856 Component Location - 42 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Interlock Solenoid > Component Information > Locations > Page 5857 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Assembly-Transmission Solenoid Shift Solenoid: Locations Assembly-Transmission Solenoid Component ID 15 Component ID: 15 Component : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID Connector: Name : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID Color : # of pins : 8 Qualifier : (RE) Pin Circuit Description 1 T16 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT 2 F856 18YL/PK 5 VOLT SUPPLY 3 K900 20DB/DG SENSOR GROUND 4 T38 18YL/BR GOVERNOR PRESSURE SENSOR SIGNAL 5 T118 18DG GOVERNOR PRESSURE SOLENOID CONTROL 6 T9 18DG/TN 3-4 SOLENOID CONTROL 7 T75 18YL/LB TORQUE CONVERTER CLUTCH SOLENOID CONTROL 8 T54 18DG/OR TRANSMISSION TEMPERATURE SIGNAL Component Location - 20 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Assembly-Transmission Solenoid > Page 5862 Component Location - 26 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Assembly-Transmission Solenoid > Page 5863 Connector: Name : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID C1 Color : # of pins : 10 Qualifier : (RC) Pin Circuit Description 1 T806 20DG/VT PRESSURE SIGNAL 7 2 T804 20YL/DB PRESSURE SIGNAL 5 3 T54 20DG/OR TRANSMISSION TEMPERATURE SIGNAL 4 T817 20YL/BR LINEAR 3 CONTROL Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Assembly-Transmission Solenoid > Page 5864 5 T813 20DG/LG LINEAR 1 CONTROL 6 T807 20DG/WT PRESSURE SIGNAL 8 7 T803 20DG/BR PRESSURE SIGNAL 4 8 T820 20YL/WT TEMPERATURE SENSOR GROUND 9 T816 20YL/PK LINEAR 3 GROUND 10 T812 20DG/TN LINEAR 1 GROUND Component Location - 20 Component Location - 26 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Assembly-Transmission Solenoid > Page 5865 Connector: Name : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID C2 Color : # of pins : 12 Qualifier : (RC) Pin Circuit Description 1 T800 20DG/BR PRESSURE SIGNAL 1 2 T805 20DG/OR PRESSURE SIGNAL 6 3 T809 20DG/YL SHIFT 2 CONTROL 4 T811 20DG/LB SHIFT 4 CONTROL Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Assembly-Transmission Solenoid > Page 5866 5 T818 20YL/OR LINEAR 4 GROUND 6 T814 20YL/BR LINEAR 2 GROUND 7 T801 20DG/RD PRESSURE SIGNAL 2 8 T802 20DG/PK PRESSURE SIGNAL 3 9 T810 20DG/DB SHIFT 3 CONTROL 10 T808 20DG/GY SHIFT 1 CONTROL 11 T821 20YL/GY LINEAR 4 CONTROL 12 T815 20YL/RD LINEAR 2 CONTROL Component Location - 20 Component Location - 26 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Assembly-Transmission Solenoid > Page 5867 Component ID 19 Component ID: 19 Component : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID Connector: Name : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID Color : # of pins : 8 Qualifier : (RE) Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Assembly-Transmission Solenoid > Page 5868 Pin Circuit Description 1 T16 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT 2 F856 18YL/PK 5 VOLT SUPPLY 3 K900 20DB/DG SENSOR GROUND 4 T38 18YL/BR GOVERNOR PRESSURE SENSOR SIGNAL 5 T118 18DG GOVERNOR PRESSURE SOLENOID CONTROL 6 T9 18DG/TN 3-4 SOLENOID CONTROL 7 T75 18YL/LB TORQUE CONVERTER CLUTCH SOLENOID CONTROL 8 T54 18DG/OR TRANSMISSION TEMPERATURE SIGNAL Component Location - 20 Component Location - 26 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Assembly-Transmission Solenoid > Page 5869 Connector: Name : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID C1 Color : # of pins : 10 Qualifier : (RC) Pin Circuit Description 1 T806 20DG/VT PRESSURE SIGNAL 7 2 T804 20YL/DB PRESSURE SIGNAL 5 3 T54 20DG/OR TRANSMISSION TEMPERATURE SIGNAL 4 T817 20YL/BR LINEAR 3 CONTROL Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Assembly-Transmission Solenoid > Page 5870 5 T813 20DG/LG LINEAR 1 CONTROL 6 T807 20DG/WT PRESSURE SIGNAL 8 7 T803 20DG/BR PRESSURE SIGNAL 4 8 T820 20YL/WT TEMPERATURE SENSOR GROUND 9 T816 20YL/PK LINEAR 3 GROUND 10 T812 20DG/TN LINEAR 1 GROUND Component Location - 20 Component Location - 26 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Assembly-Transmission Solenoid > Page 5871 Connector: Name : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID C2 Color : # of pins : 12 Qualifier : (RC) Pin Circuit Description 1 T800 20DG/BR PRESSURE SIGNAL 1 2 T805 20DG/OR PRESSURE SIGNAL 6 3 T809 20DG/YL SHIFT 2 CONTROL 4 T811 20DG/LB SHIFT 4 CONTROL Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Assembly-Transmission Solenoid > Page 5872 5 T818 20YL/OR LINEAR 4 GROUND 6 T814 20YL/BR LINEAR 2 GROUND 7 T801 20DG/RD PRESSURE SIGNAL 2 8 T802 20DG/PK PRESSURE SIGNAL 3 9 T810 20DG/DB SHIFT 3 CONTROL 10 T808 20DG/GY SHIFT 1 CONTROL 11 T821 20YL/GY LINEAR 4 CONTROL 12 T815 20YL/RD LINEAR 2 CONTROL Component Location - 20 Component Location - 26 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Assembly-Transmission Solenoid > Page 5873 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Assembly-Transmission Solenoid > Page 5874 Shift Solenoid: Locations Assembly-Transmission Solenoid/Pressure Switch Component ID: 20 Component : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID/PRESSURE SWITCH Connector: Name : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID/PRESSURE SWITCH Color : LT. BROWN # of pins : 10 Qualifier : (RLE) Pin Circuit Description 1 T60 20YL/GY OD CONTROL 2 T59 20YL/LB UD CONTROL 3 T16 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT 4 T19 18YL/DB 2-4 CONTROL 5 T47 18YL/DG 2-4 PRESSURE SIGNAL 6 T9 20DG/TN OD PRESSURE SIGNAL 7 T20 20DG/WT L/R CONTROL 8-9-10 T50 20YL/TN L/R PRESSURE SIGNAL Component Location - 19 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Assembly-Transmission Solenoid > Page 5875 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Assembly-Transmission Solenoid > Page 5876 Shift Solenoid: Locations Assembly-Transmission Solenoid/TRS Component ID: 21 Component : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID/TRS Connector: Name : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID/TRS Color : BLACK # of pins : 23 Qualifier : (RFE) Pin Circuit Description 1-2 T20 20DG/WT L/R CONTROL 3-4 T41 20YL/DB TRS T41 SIGNAL (P/N) 5 T42 20DG/YL TRS T42 SIGNAL 6-- 7 T60 20YL/GY OD SOLENOID CONTROL 8 T3 20DG/DB TRS T3 SIGNAL 9 T1 20DG/LB TRS T1 SIGNAL 10 T16 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT 11 T48 20BR/YL 4C PRESSURE SIGNAL 12 T118 20DG LINE PRESSURE CONTROL 13 T4 20DG/RD TRS T2 SIGNAL 13 T4 20DG/LB TRS T2 SIGNAL 14 T50 20DG/PK L/R PRESSURE SIGNAL 14 T50 20YL/TN L/R PRESSURE SIGNAL 15 T147 20DG/YL 2C PRESSURE SIGNAL 16 T9 20DG/TN OD PRESSURE SIGNAL 17 T59 20YL/LB UD CONTROL 18 T29 20YL/WT UD PRESSURE SIGNAL 19 T259 20YL/DG 4C CONTROL 20 T219 20YL/LG 2C CONTROL 21 T140 20YL/GY MS CONTROL 22 T160 20DG/WT SENSOR GROUND 22 K900 20DB/DG SENSOR GROUND 23 T54 20DG/OR TRANSMISSION TEMPERATURE SIGNAL Component Location - 21 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Assembly-Transmission Solenoid > Page 5877 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Assembly-Transmission Solenoid Shift Solenoid: Diagrams Assembly-Transmission Solenoid Component ID 15 Component ID: 15 Component : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID Connector: Name : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID Color : # of pins : 8 Qualifier : (RE) Pin Circuit Description 1 T16 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT 2 F856 18YL/PK 5 VOLT SUPPLY 3 K900 20DB/DG SENSOR GROUND 4 T38 18YL/BR GOVERNOR PRESSURE SENSOR SIGNAL 5 T118 18DG GOVERNOR PRESSURE SOLENOID CONTROL 6 T9 18DG/TN 3-4 SOLENOID CONTROL 7 T75 18YL/LB TORQUE CONVERTER CLUTCH SOLENOID CONTROL 8 T54 18DG/OR TRANSMISSION TEMPERATURE SIGNAL Component Location - 20 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Assembly-Transmission Solenoid > Page 5880 Component Location - 26 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Assembly-Transmission Solenoid > Page 5881 Connector: Name : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID C1 Color : # of pins : 10 Qualifier : (RC) Pin Circuit Description 1 T806 20DG/VT PRESSURE SIGNAL 7 2 T804 20YL/DB PRESSURE SIGNAL 5 3 T54 20DG/OR TRANSMISSION TEMPERATURE SIGNAL 4 T817 20YL/BR LINEAR 3 CONTROL Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Assembly-Transmission Solenoid > Page 5882 5 T813 20DG/LG LINEAR 1 CONTROL 6 T807 20DG/WT PRESSURE SIGNAL 8 7 T803 20DG/BR PRESSURE SIGNAL 4 8 T820 20YL/WT TEMPERATURE SENSOR GROUND 9 T816 20YL/PK LINEAR 3 GROUND 10 T812 20DG/TN LINEAR 1 GROUND Component Location - 20 Component Location - 26 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Assembly-Transmission Solenoid > Page 5883 Connector: Name : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID C2 Color : # of pins : 12 Qualifier : (RC) Pin Circuit Description 1 T800 20DG/BR PRESSURE SIGNAL 1 2 T805 20DG/OR PRESSURE SIGNAL 6 3 T809 20DG/YL SHIFT 2 CONTROL 4 T811 20DG/LB SHIFT 4 CONTROL Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Assembly-Transmission Solenoid > Page 5884 5 T818 20YL/OR LINEAR 4 GROUND 6 T814 20YL/BR LINEAR 2 GROUND 7 T801 20DG/RD PRESSURE SIGNAL 2 8 T802 20DG/PK PRESSURE SIGNAL 3 9 T810 20DG/DB SHIFT 3 CONTROL 10 T808 20DG/GY SHIFT 1 CONTROL 11 T821 20YL/GY LINEAR 4 CONTROL 12 T815 20YL/RD LINEAR 2 CONTROL Component Location - 20 Component Location - 26 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Assembly-Transmission Solenoid > Page 5885 Component ID 19 Component ID: 19 Component : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID Connector: Name : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID Color : # of pins : 8 Qualifier : (RE) Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Assembly-Transmission Solenoid > Page 5886 Pin Circuit Description 1 T16 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT 2 F856 18YL/PK 5 VOLT SUPPLY 3 K900 20DB/DG SENSOR GROUND 4 T38 18YL/BR GOVERNOR PRESSURE SENSOR SIGNAL 5 T118 18DG GOVERNOR PRESSURE SOLENOID CONTROL 6 T9 18DG/TN 3-4 SOLENOID CONTROL 7 T75 18YL/LB TORQUE CONVERTER CLUTCH SOLENOID CONTROL 8 T54 18DG/OR TRANSMISSION TEMPERATURE SIGNAL Component Location - 20 Component Location - 26 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Assembly-Transmission Solenoid > Page 5887 Connector: Name : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID C1 Color : # of pins : 10 Qualifier : (RC) Pin Circuit Description 1 T806 20DG/VT PRESSURE SIGNAL 7 2 T804 20YL/DB PRESSURE SIGNAL 5 3 T54 20DG/OR TRANSMISSION TEMPERATURE SIGNAL 4 T817 20YL/BR LINEAR 3 CONTROL Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Assembly-Transmission Solenoid > Page 5888 5 T813 20DG/LG LINEAR 1 CONTROL 6 T807 20DG/WT PRESSURE SIGNAL 8 7 T803 20DG/BR PRESSURE SIGNAL 4 8 T820 20YL/WT TEMPERATURE SENSOR GROUND 9 T816 20YL/PK LINEAR 3 GROUND 10 T812 20DG/TN LINEAR 1 GROUND Component Location - 20 Component Location - 26 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Assembly-Transmission Solenoid > Page 5889 Connector: Name : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID C2 Color : # of pins : 12 Qualifier : (RC) Pin Circuit Description 1 T800 20DG/BR PRESSURE SIGNAL 1 2 T805 20DG/OR PRESSURE SIGNAL 6 3 T809 20DG/YL SHIFT 2 CONTROL 4 T811 20DG/LB SHIFT 4 CONTROL Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Assembly-Transmission Solenoid > Page 5890 5 T818 20YL/OR LINEAR 4 GROUND 6 T814 20YL/BR LINEAR 2 GROUND 7 T801 20DG/RD PRESSURE SIGNAL 2 8 T802 20DG/PK PRESSURE SIGNAL 3 9 T810 20DG/DB SHIFT 3 CONTROL 10 T808 20DG/GY SHIFT 1 CONTROL 11 T821 20YL/GY LINEAR 4 CONTROL 12 T815 20YL/RD LINEAR 2 CONTROL Component Location - 20 Component Location - 26 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Assembly-Transmission Solenoid > Page 5891 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Assembly-Transmission Solenoid > Page 5892 Shift Solenoid: Diagrams Assembly-Transmission Solenoid/Pressure Switch Component ID: 20 Component : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID/PRESSURE SWITCH Connector: Name : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID/PRESSURE SWITCH Color : LT. BROWN # of pins : 10 Qualifier : (RLE) Pin Circuit Description 1 T60 20YL/GY OD CONTROL 2 T59 20YL/LB UD CONTROL 3 T16 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT 4 T19 18YL/DB 2-4 CONTROL 5 T47 18YL/DG 2-4 PRESSURE SIGNAL 6 T9 20DG/TN OD PRESSURE SIGNAL 7 T20 20DG/WT L/R CONTROL 8-9-10 T50 20YL/TN L/R PRESSURE SIGNAL Component Location - 19 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Assembly-Transmission Solenoid > Page 5893 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Assembly-Transmission Solenoid > Page 5894 Shift Solenoid: Diagrams Assembly-Transmission Solenoid/TRS Component ID: 21 Component : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID/TRS Connector: Name : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID/TRS Color : BLACK # of pins : 23 Qualifier : (RFE) Pin Circuit Description 1-2 T20 20DG/WT L/R CONTROL 3-4 T41 20YL/DB TRS T41 SIGNAL (P/N) 5 T42 20DG/YL TRS T42 SIGNAL 6-- 7 T60 20YL/GY OD SOLENOID CONTROL 8 T3 20DG/DB TRS T3 SIGNAL 9 T1 20DG/LB TRS T1 SIGNAL 10 T16 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT 11 T48 20BR/YL 4C PRESSURE SIGNAL 12 T118 20DG LINE PRESSURE CONTROL 13 T4 20DG/RD TRS T2 SIGNAL 13 T4 20DG/LB TRS T2 SIGNAL 14 T50 20DG/PK L/R PRESSURE SIGNAL 14 T50 20YL/TN L/R PRESSURE SIGNAL 15 T147 20DG/YL 2C PRESSURE SIGNAL 16 T9 20DG/TN OD PRESSURE SIGNAL 17 T59 20YL/LB UD CONTROL 18 T29 20YL/WT UD PRESSURE SIGNAL 19 T259 20YL/DG 4C CONTROL 20 T219 20YL/LG 2C CONTROL 21 T140 20YL/GY MS CONTROL 22 T160 20DG/WT SENSOR GROUND 22 K900 20DB/DG SENSOR GROUND 23 T54 20DG/OR TRANSMISSION TEMPERATURE SIGNAL Component Location - 21 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Assembly-Transmission Solenoid > Page 5895 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > 42RLE Automatic Transmission Shift Solenoid: Description and Operation 42RLE Automatic Transmission Description DESCRIPTION The Solenoid/Pressure Switch Assembly (1) is inside the transmission and mounted to the valve body assembly. The assembly consists of four solenoids that control hydraulic pressure to the L/R, 2/4, OD, and UD friction elements (transmission clutches), and the torque converter clutch. The reverse clutch is controlled by line pressure from the manual valve in the valve body. The solenoids are contained within the Solenoid/Pressure Switch Assembly, and can only be serviced by replacing the assembly. The solenoid assembly also contains pressure switches that monitor and send hydraulic circuit information to the TCM. Likewise, the pressure switches can only be service by replacing the assembly. Operation OPERATION SOLENOIDS The solenoids receive electrical power from the Transmission Control Relay through a single wire. The TCM energizes or operates the solenoids individually by grounding the return wire of the solenoid needed. When a solenoid is energized, the solenoid valve shifts, and a fluid passage is opened or closed (vented or applied), depending on its default operating state. The result is an apply or release of a frictional element. The 2/4 and UD solenoids are normally applied, which allows fluid to pass through in their relaxed or "off" state. By design, this allows transmission limp-in (P,R,N,2) in the event of an electrical failure. The continuity of the solenoids and circuits are periodically tested. Each solenoid is turned on or off depending on its current state. An inductive spike should be detected by the TCM during this test. If no spike is detected, the circuit is tested again to verify the failure. In addition to the periodic testing, the solenoid circuits are tested if a speed ratio or pressure switch error occurs. PRESSURE SWITCHES The TCM relies on three pressure switches to monitor fluid pressure in the L/R, 2/4, and OD hydraulic circuits. The primary purpose of these switches is to help the TCM detect when clutch circuit hydraulic failures occur. The range for the pressure switch closing and opening points is 11-23 psi. Typically the switch opening point will be approximately one psi lower than the closing point. For example, a switch may close at 18 psi and open at 17 psi. The switches are continuously monitored by the TCM for the correct states (open or closed) in each gear as shown in the following chart: Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 5898 A Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) will set if the TCM senses any switch open or closed at the wrong time in a given gear. The TCM also tests the 2/4 and OD pressure switches when they are normally off (OD and 2/4 are tested in 1st gear, OD in 2nd gear, and 2/4 in 3rd gear). The test simply verifies that they are operational, by looking for a closed state when the corresponding element is applied. Immediately after a shift into 1st, 2nd, or 3rd gear with the engine speed above 1000 rpm, the TCM momentarily turns on element pressure to the 2/4 and/or OD clutch circuits to identify that the appropriate switch has closed. If it doesn't close, it is tested again. If the switch fails to close the second time, the appropriate Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) will set. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 5899 Shift Solenoid: Description and Operation 545RFE Automatic Transmission Description DESCRIPTION The transmission solenoid/TRS assembly is internal to the transmission and mounted on the valve body assembly. The assembly consists of six solenoids that control hydraulic pressure to the six friction elements (transmission clutches), and the torque converter clutch. The pressure control solenoid is located on the side of the solenoid/TRS assembly. The solenoid/TRS assembly also contains the Transmission Range Sensor (TRS) and five pressure switches that feed information to the TCM. Operation OPERATION SOLENOIDS Solenoids are used to control the L/R, 2C, 4C, OD, and UD friction elements. The reverse clutch is controlled by line pressure and the position of the manual valve in the valve body. All the solenoids are contained within the Solenoid and Pressure Switch Assembly. The solenoid and pressure switch assembly contains one additional solenoid, Multi-Select (MS), which serves primarily to provide 2nd and 3rd gear limp-in operation. The solenoids receive electrical power from the Transmission Control Relay through a single wire. The TCM energizes or operates the solenoids individually by grounding the return wire of the solenoid as necessary. When a solenoid is energized, the solenoid valve shifts, and a fluid passage is opened or closed (vented or applied), depending on its default operating state. The result is an apply or release of a frictional element. The MS and UD solenoids are normally applied to allow transmission limp-in in the event of an electrical failure. The continuity of the solenoids and circuits are periodically tested. Each solenoid is turned on or off depending on its current state. An inductive spike should be detected by the TCM during this test. If no spike is detected, the circuit is tested again to verify the failure. In addition to the periodic testing, the solenoid circuits are tested if a speed ratio or pressure switch error occurs. PRESSURE SWITCHES The TCM relies on five pressure switches to monitor fluid pressure in the L/R, 2C, 4C, UD, and OD hydraulic circuits. The primary purpose of these switches is to help the TCM detect when clutch circuit hydraulic failures occur. The switches close at 23 psi and open at 11 psi, and simply indicate whether or not pressure exists. The switches are continuously monitored by the TCM for the correct states (open or closed) in each gear as shown in the following charts and 545RFE PRESSURE SWITCH STATES: Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 5900 A Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) will set if the TCM senses any switch open or closed at the wrong time in a given gear. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 5901 Shift Solenoid: Description and Operation 68RFE Automatic Transmission Description DESCRIPTION The transmission solenoid/TRS assembly is internal to the transmission and mounted on the valve body assembly. The assembly consists of six solenoids that control hydraulic pressure to the six friction elements (transmission clutches), and the torque converter clutch. The pressure control solenoid is located on the side of the solenoid/TRS assembly. The solenoid/TRS assembly also contains the Transmission Range Sensor (TRS) and five pressure switches that feed information to the TCM. Operation OPERATION SOLENOIDS Solenoids are used to control the L/R, 2C, 4C, OD, and UD friction elements. The reverse clutch is controlled by line pressure and the position of the manual valve in the valve body. All the solenoids are contained within the Solenoid and Pressure Switch Assembly. The solenoid and pressure switch assembly contains one additional solenoid, Multi-Select (MS), which serves primarily to provide 3rd gear and reverse limp-in operation. The TCM energizes or operates the solenoids individually by grounding the return wire of the solenoid as necessary. When a solenoid is energized, the solenoid valve shifts, and a fluid passage is opened or closed (vented or applied), depending on its default operating state. The result is an apply or release of a frictional element. The MS and UD solenoids are normally applied to allow transmission limp-in in the event of an electrical failure. The continuity of the solenoids and circuits are periodically tested. Each solenoid is turned on or off depending on its current state. An inductive spike should be detected by the TCM during this test. If no spike is detected, the circuit is tested again to verify the failure. In addition to the periodic testing, the solenoid circuits are tested if a speed ratio or pressure switch error occurs. PRESSURE SWITCHES The TCM relies on five pressure switches to monitor fluid pressure in the L/R, 2C, 4C, UD, and OD hydraulic circuits. The primary purpose of these switches is to help the TCM detect when clutch circuit hydraulic failures occur. The switches close at 23 psi and open at 11 psi, and simply indicate whether or not pressure exists. The switches are continuously monitored by the TCM for the correct states (open or closed) in each gear as shown in the following charts and Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 5902 A Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) will set if the TCM senses any switch open or closed at the wrong time in a given gear. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 42RLE Automatic Transmission Shift Solenoid: Service and Repair 42RLE Automatic Transmission Removal REMOVAL NOTE: If the Solenoid/Pressure Switch Assembly is being replaced, the Quick Learn Procedure must be performed. See: Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Transmission Control Module/TCM Quick Learn 1. Raise vehicle on hoist. 2. Remove valve body assembly from transmission. See: Transmission and Drivetrain/Automatic Transmission/Transaxle/Valve Body/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/42RLE Automatic Transmission/Removal 3. Remove Solenoid/Pressure Switch Assembly retaining screws (2) from solenoid. 4. Remove Solenoid/Pressure Switch Assembly (1) and screen from valve body (2). Installation INSTALLATION NOTE: If the Solenoid/Pressure Switch assembly is being replaced, the Quick Learn Procedure must be performed. See: Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Transmission Control Module/TCM Quick Learn Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 5905 1. Install Solenoid/Pressure Switch Assembly (1) and screen (3) to the separator and transfer plates. 2. Install and tighten retaining screws (2) to 5.5 Nm (50 in. lbs.) torque. 3. Install valve body. See: Transmission and Drivetrain/Automatic Transmission/Transaxle/Valve Body/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/42RLE Automatic Transmission/Installation Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 5906 Shift Solenoid: Service and Repair 545RFE Automatic Transmission Removal REMOVAL NOTE: If the Transmission Solenoid/TRS Assembly is being replaced, the Quick Learn Procedure must be performed. See: Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Transmission Control Module/TCM Quick Learn 1. Remove the valve body from the transmission. See: Transmission and Drivetrain/Automatic Transmission/Transaxle/Valve Body/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/545RFE Automatic Transmission/Removal 2. Remove the bolts (1) holding the transmission solenoid/TRS assembly onto the valve body. 3. Separate the transmission solenoid/TRS assembly from the valve body. Installation INSTALLATION Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 5907 1. Place TRS selector plate in the PARK position. 2. Position the transmission solenoid/TRS assembly onto the valve body. Be sure that both alignment dowels are fully seated in the valve body and that the TRS switch contacts are properly positioned in the selector plate 3. Install the bolts (1) to hold the transmission solenoid/TRS assembly onto the valve body. 4. Tighten the solenoid assembly screws adjacent to the arrows cast into the bottom of the valve body first. Tighten the screws to 6 Nm (50 in.lbs.). 5. Tighten the remainder of the solenoid assembly screws to 6 Nm (50 in.lbs.). 6. Install the valve body into the transmission. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 5908 Shift Solenoid: Service and Repair 68RFE Automatic Transmission Removal REMOVAL NOTE: If the Transmission Solenoid/TRS Assembly is being replaced, the Quick Learn Procedure must be performed. See: Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Transmission Control Module/TCM Quick Learn 1. Remove the valve body from the transmission. 2. Remove the bolts (1) holding the transmission solenoid/TRS assembly onto the valve body. 3. Separate the transmission solenoid/TRS assembly from the valve body. Installation INSTALLATION Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 5909 1. Place TRS selector plate in the PARK position. 2. Position the transmission solenoid/TRS assembly onto the valve body. Be sure that both alignment dowels are fully seated in the valve body and that the TRS switch contacts are properly positioned in the selector plate 3. Install the bolts (1) to hold the transmission solenoid/TRS assembly onto the valve body. 4. Tighten the solenoid assembly screws adjacent to the arrows cast into the bottom of the valve body first. Tighten the screws to 6 Nm (50 in.lbs.). 5. Tighten the remainder of the solenoid assembly screws to 6 Nm (50 in.lbs.). 6. Install the valve body into the transmission. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Throttle Valve Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation Throttle Valve Solenoid: Description and Operation DESCRIPTION On vehicles equipped with a Cummins diesel engine, the transmission throttle valve cable has been replace by the transmission throttle valve actuator (TTVA). The TTVA consists of an electric DC motor, two potentiometers, and a gear drive system. The TTVA is mechanically connected to the transmission throttle valve in the valve body by the "D" shaped opening in the bottom of the TTVA shaft. Changes in the TTVA position are therefore transferred to the throttle valve and cause changes in the transmission throttle pressure. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Throttle Valve Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 5913 Throttle Valve Solenoid: Adjustments ADJUSTMENT The Transmission Throttle Valve Actuator (TTVA) does not require any mechanical adjustments. All changes in throttle valve position are controlled by the Engine Control Module (ECM). The TTVA does require an initialization period after the actuator has been removed or replaced. After the actuator has been removed or replaced, move the ignition to the ON position for thirty (30) seconds. This will allow the ECM sufficient time to perform the internal calibration procedures to learn the TTVA's current "zero" position. Once this is done, check the ECM for diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs). If no DTCs are set relating to the TTVA, the TTVA is fully calibrated and ready for use. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Throttle Valve Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Throttle Valve Solenoid: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL 1. Remove the bolts (2) holding the transmission throttle valve actuator (TTVA) (1) to the transmission case. 2. Allow the TTVA (1) to rotate clockwise away from the transmission. 3. Remove the wiring connector (2) from the TTVA (1). 4. Lift the TTVA (1) straight upward and off the throttle valve shaft (3). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Throttle Valve Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 5916 Throttle Valve Solenoid: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION 1. Position the transmission throttle valve actuator (TTVA) (1) over the throttle valve shaft (3). 2. Align the D-shaped opening in the bottom of the TTVA to the throttle valve shaft and install the TTVA onto the shaft. 3. Install the wiring connector (2) to the TTVA (1). 4. Rotate the TTVA (1) to the transmission case and install the bolts (2) to hold the TTVA to the transmission. 5. Tighten the bolts to 8.5 Nm (75 in.lbs.). 6. Initialize the TTVA See: Adjustments . Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > 42RLE Automatic Transmission Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid: Description and Operation 42RLE Automatic Transmission Description DESCRIPTION The Solenoid/Pressure Switch Assembly (1) is inside the transmission and mounted to the valve body assembly. The assembly consists of four solenoids that control hydraulic pressure to the L/R, 2/4, OD, and UD friction elements (transmission clutches), and the torque converter clutch. The reverse clutch is controlled by line pressure from the manual valve in the valve body. The solenoids are contained within the Solenoid/Pressure Switch Assembly, and can only be serviced by replacing the assembly. The solenoid assembly also contains pressure switches that monitor and send hydraulic circuit information to the TCM. Likewise, the pressure switches can only be service by replacing the assembly. Operation OPERATION SOLENOIDS The solenoids receive electrical power from the Transmission Control Relay through a single wire. The TCM energizes or operates the solenoids individually by grounding the return wire of the solenoid needed. When a solenoid is energized, the solenoid valve shifts, and a fluid passage is opened or closed (vented or applied), depending on its default operating state. The result is an apply or release of a frictional element. The 2/4 and UD solenoids are normally applied, which allows fluid to pass through in their relaxed or "off" state. By design, this allows transmission limp-in (P,R,N,2) in the event of an electrical failure. The continuity of the solenoids and circuits are periodically tested. Each solenoid is turned on or off depending on its current state. An inductive spike should be detected by the TCM during this test. If no spike is detected, the circuit is tested again to verify the failure. In addition to the periodic testing, the solenoid circuits are tested if a speed ratio or pressure switch error occurs. PRESSURE SWITCHES The TCM relies on three pressure switches to monitor fluid pressure in the L/R, 2/4, and OD hydraulic circuits. The primary purpose of these switches is to help the TCM detect when clutch circuit hydraulic failures occur. The range for the pressure switch closing and opening points is 11-23 psi. Typically the switch opening point will be approximately one psi lower than the closing point. For example, a switch may close at 18 psi and open at 17 psi. The switches are continuously monitored by the TCM for the correct states (open or closed) in each gear as shown in the following chart: Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 5921 A Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) will set if the TCM senses any switch open or closed at the wrong time in a given gear. The TCM also tests the 2/4 and OD pressure switches when they are normally off (OD and 2/4 are tested in 1st gear, OD in 2nd gear, and 2/4 in 3rd gear). The test simply verifies that they are operational, by looking for a closed state when the corresponding element is applied. Immediately after a shift into 1st, 2nd, or 3rd gear with the engine speed above 1000 rpm, the TCM momentarily turns on element pressure to the 2/4 and/or OD clutch circuits to identify that the appropriate switch has closed. If it doesn't close, it is tested again. If the switch fails to close the second time, the appropriate Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) will set. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 5922 Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid: Description and Operation 545RFE Automatic Transmission Description DESCRIPTION The transmission solenoid/TRS assembly is internal to the transmission and mounted on the valve body assembly. The assembly consists of six solenoids that control hydraulic pressure to the six friction elements (transmission clutches), and the torque converter clutch. The pressure control solenoid is located on the side of the solenoid/TRS assembly. The solenoid/TRS assembly also contains the Transmission Range Sensor (TRS) and five pressure switches that feed information to the TCM. Operation OPERATION SOLENOIDS Solenoids are used to control the L/R, 2C, 4C, OD, and UD friction elements. The reverse clutch is controlled by line pressure and the position of the manual valve in the valve body. All the solenoids are contained within the Solenoid and Pressure Switch Assembly. The solenoid and pressure switch assembly contains one additional solenoid, Multi-Select (MS), which serves primarily to provide 2nd and 3rd gear limp-in operation. The solenoids receive electrical power from the Transmission Control Relay through a single wire. The TCM energizes or operates the solenoids individually by grounding the return wire of the solenoid as necessary. When a solenoid is energized, the solenoid valve shifts, and a fluid passage is opened or closed (vented or applied), depending on its default operating state. The result is an apply or release of a frictional element. The MS and UD solenoids are normally applied to allow transmission limp-in in the event of an electrical failure. The continuity of the solenoids and circuits are periodically tested. Each solenoid is turned on or off depending on its current state. An inductive spike should be detected by the TCM during this test. If no spike is detected, the circuit is tested again to verify the failure. In addition to the periodic testing, the solenoid circuits are tested if a speed ratio or pressure switch error occurs. PRESSURE SWITCHES The TCM relies on five pressure switches to monitor fluid pressure in the L/R, 2C, 4C, UD, and OD hydraulic circuits. The primary purpose of these switches is to help the TCM detect when clutch circuit hydraulic failures occur. The switches close at 23 psi and open at 11 psi, and simply indicate whether or not pressure exists. The switches are continuously monitored by the TCM for the correct states (open or closed) in each gear as shown in the following charts and 545RFE PRESSURE SWITCH STATES: Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 5923 A Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) will set if the TCM senses any switch open or closed at the wrong time in a given gear. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 5924 Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid: Description and Operation 68RFE Automatic Transmission Description DESCRIPTION The transmission solenoid/TRS assembly is internal to the transmission and mounted on the valve body assembly. The assembly consists of six solenoids that control hydraulic pressure to the six friction elements (transmission clutches), and the torque converter clutch. The pressure control solenoid is located on the side of the solenoid/TRS assembly. The solenoid/TRS assembly also contains the Transmission Range Sensor (TRS) and five pressure switches that feed information to the TCM. Operation OPERATION SOLENOIDS Solenoids are used to control the L/R, 2C, 4C, OD, and UD friction elements. The reverse clutch is controlled by line pressure and the position of the manual valve in the valve body. All the solenoids are contained within the Solenoid and Pressure Switch Assembly. The solenoid and pressure switch assembly contains one additional solenoid, Multi-Select (MS), which serves primarily to provide 3rd gear and reverse limp-in operation. The TCM energizes or operates the solenoids individually by grounding the return wire of the solenoid as necessary. When a solenoid is energized, the solenoid valve shifts, and a fluid passage is opened or closed (vented or applied), depending on its default operating state. The result is an apply or release of a frictional element. The MS and UD solenoids are normally applied to allow transmission limp-in in the event of an electrical failure. The continuity of the solenoids and circuits are periodically tested. Each solenoid is turned on or off depending on its current state. An inductive spike should be detected by the TCM during this test. If no spike is detected, the circuit is tested again to verify the failure. In addition to the periodic testing, the solenoid circuits are tested if a speed ratio or pressure switch error occurs. PRESSURE SWITCHES The TCM relies on five pressure switches to monitor fluid pressure in the L/R, 2C, 4C, UD, and OD hydraulic circuits. The primary purpose of these switches is to help the TCM detect when clutch circuit hydraulic failures occur. The switches close at 23 psi and open at 11 psi, and simply indicate whether or not pressure exists. The switches are continuously monitored by the TCM for the correct states (open or closed) in each gear as shown in the following charts and Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 5925 A Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) will set if the TCM senses any switch open or closed at the wrong time in a given gear. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 42RLE Automatic Transmission Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid: Service and Repair 42RLE Automatic Transmission Removal REMOVAL NOTE: If the Solenoid/Pressure Switch Assembly is being replaced, the Quick Learn Procedure must be performed. See: Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Transmission Control Module/TCM Quick Learn 1. Raise vehicle on hoist. 2. Remove valve body assembly from transmission. See: Transmission and Drivetrain/Automatic Transmission/Transaxle/Valve Body/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/42RLE Automatic Transmission/Removal 3. Remove Solenoid/Pressure Switch Assembly retaining screws (2) from solenoid. 4. Remove Solenoid/Pressure Switch Assembly (1) and screen from valve body (2). Installation INSTALLATION NOTE: If the Solenoid/Pressure Switch assembly is being replaced, the Quick Learn Procedure must be performed. See: Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Transmission Control Module/TCM Quick Learn Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 5928 1. Install Solenoid/Pressure Switch Assembly (1) and screen (3) to the separator and transfer plates. 2. Install and tighten retaining screws (2) to 5.5 Nm (50 in. lbs.) torque. 3. Install valve body. See: Transmission and Drivetrain/Automatic Transmission/Transaxle/Valve Body/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/42RLE Automatic Transmission/Installation Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 5929 Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid: Service and Repair 545RFE Automatic Transmission Removal REMOVAL NOTE: If the Transmission Solenoid/TRS Assembly is being replaced, the Quick Learn Procedure must be performed. See: Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Transmission Control Module/TCM Quick Learn 1. Remove the valve body from the transmission. See: Transmission and Drivetrain/Automatic Transmission/Transaxle/Valve Body/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/545RFE Automatic Transmission/Removal 2. Remove the bolts (1) holding the transmission solenoid/TRS assembly onto the valve body. 3. Separate the transmission solenoid/TRS assembly from the valve body. Installation INSTALLATION Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 5930 1. Place TRS selector plate in the PARK position. 2. Position the transmission solenoid/TRS assembly onto the valve body. Be sure that both alignment dowels are fully seated in the valve body and that the TRS switch contacts are properly positioned in the selector plate 3. Install the bolts (1) to hold the transmission solenoid/TRS assembly onto the valve body. 4. Tighten the solenoid assembly screws adjacent to the arrows cast into the bottom of the valve body first. Tighten the screws to 6 Nm (50 in.lbs.). 5. Tighten the remainder of the solenoid assembly screws to 6 Nm (50 in.lbs.). 6. Install the valve body into the transmission. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 5931 Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid: Service and Repair 68RFE Automatic Transmission Removal REMOVAL NOTE: If the Transmission Solenoid/TRS Assembly is being replaced, the Quick Learn Procedure must be performed. See: Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Transmission Control Module/TCM Quick Learn 1. Remove the valve body from the transmission. 2. Remove the bolts (1) holding the transmission solenoid/TRS assembly onto the valve body. 3. Separate the transmission solenoid/TRS assembly from the valve body. Installation INSTALLATION Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 5932 1. Place TRS selector plate in the PARK position. 2. Position the transmission solenoid/TRS assembly onto the valve body. Be sure that both alignment dowels are fully seated in the valve body and that the TRS switch contacts are properly positioned in the selector plate 3. Install the bolts (1) to hold the transmission solenoid/TRS assembly onto the valve body. 4. Tighten the solenoid assembly screws adjacent to the arrows cast into the bottom of the valve body first. Tighten the screws to 6 Nm (50 in.lbs.). 5. Tighten the remainder of the solenoid assembly screws to 6 Nm (50 in.lbs.). 6. Install the valve body into the transmission. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Differential > Actuator, Differential Lock > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Actuator: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL 1. Remove actuator wiring connector. 2. Remove actuator (1) bolts (2). 3. Remove actuator (1) from disconnect pocket (2). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Differential > Actuator, Differential Lock > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 5938 Actuator: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION 1. Clean actuator (1) sealing surface and install new gasket (2) if necessary. 2. Align actuator shift fork (1) with disconnect collar (2) and install actuator on disconnect pocket. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Differential > Actuator, Differential Lock > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 5939 3. Install actuator (1) bolts (2) and tighten to 27 Nm (20 ft. lbs.). 4. Install disconnect actuator wiring connector. 5. Verify differential fluid level and add fluid if necessary. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Differential > Solenoid, Differential Lock > Component Information > Locations > Module-Axle Disconnect-Front Solenoid: Locations Module-Axle Disconnect-Front Component ID: 202 Component : MODULE-AXLE DISCONNECT-FRONT Connector: Name : MODULE-AXLE DISCONNECT-FRONT Color : DK. GRAY # of pins : 4 Qualifier : (LD 4WD) Pin Circuit Description 1 Z906 20BK GROUND 2 G304 20VT/DB FRONT AXLE LOCK CONTROL 3 A880 20DB/RD FUSED B(+) 4 G303 20VT/DG FRONT AXLE LOCK SIGNAL Component Location - 35 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Differential > Solenoid, Differential Lock > Component Information > Locations > Module-Axle Disconnect-Front > Page 5944 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Differential > Solenoid, Differential Lock > Component Information > Locations > Module-Axle Disconnect-Front > Page 5945 Solenoid: Locations Solenoid-Locker-Front Component ID: 457 Component : SOLENOID-LOCKER-FRONT Connector: Name : SOLENOID-LOCKER-FRONT Color : BLACK # of pins : 4 Qualifier : (POWER WAGON) Pin Circuit Description 1 T520 16YL/OR FRONT LOCKER SOURCE 2 T521 18YL/BK LOCKER SENSOR SUPPLY 3 T522 18YL/LB FRONT LOCKER SENSOR SENSE 4 T524 16YL/LG FRONT LOCKER RETURN Component Location - 36 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Differential > Solenoid, Differential Lock > Component Information > Locations > Module-Axle Disconnect-Front > Page 5946 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Differential > Solenoid, Differential Lock > Component Information > Locations > Module-Axle Disconnect-Front > Page 5947 Solenoid: Locations Solenoid-Locker-Rear Component ID: 458 Component : SOLENOID-LOCKER-REAR Connector: Name : SOLENOID-LOCKER-REAR Color : BLACK # of pins : 4 Qualifier : (POWER WAGON) Pin Circuit Description 1 T526 16YL/WT REAR LOCKER SOURCE 2 T523 18YL/BK LOCKER SENSOR SUPPLY 3 T527 18YL/TN REAR LOCKER SENSOR SENSE 4 T528 16YL/GY REAR LOCKER RETURN Component Location - 70 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Differential > Solenoid, Differential Lock > Component Information > Locations > Module-Axle Disconnect-Front > Page 5948 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Differential > Solenoid, Differential Lock > Component Information > Diagrams > Module-Axle Disconnect-Front Solenoid: Diagrams Module-Axle Disconnect-Front Component ID: 202 Component : MODULE-AXLE DISCONNECT-FRONT Connector: Name : MODULE-AXLE DISCONNECT-FRONT Color : DK. GRAY # of pins : 4 Qualifier : (LD 4WD) Pin Circuit Description 1 Z906 20BK GROUND 2 G304 20VT/DB FRONT AXLE LOCK CONTROL 3 A880 20DB/RD FUSED B(+) 4 G303 20VT/DG FRONT AXLE LOCK SIGNAL Component Location - 35 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Differential > Solenoid, Differential Lock > Component Information > Diagrams > Module-Axle Disconnect-Front > Page 5951 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Differential > Solenoid, Differential Lock > Component Information > Diagrams > Module-Axle Disconnect-Front > Page 5952 Solenoid: Diagrams Solenoid-Locker-Front Component ID: 457 Component : SOLENOID-LOCKER-FRONT Connector: Name : SOLENOID-LOCKER-FRONT Color : BLACK # of pins : 4 Qualifier : (POWER WAGON) Pin Circuit Description 1 T520 16YL/OR FRONT LOCKER SOURCE 2 T521 18YL/BK LOCKER SENSOR SUPPLY 3 T522 18YL/LB FRONT LOCKER SENSOR SENSE 4 T524 16YL/LG FRONT LOCKER RETURN Component Location - 36 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Differential > Solenoid, Differential Lock > Component Information > Diagrams > Module-Axle Disconnect-Front > Page 5953 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Differential > Solenoid, Differential Lock > Component Information > Diagrams > Module-Axle Disconnect-Front > Page 5954 Solenoid: Diagrams Solenoid-Locker-Rear Component ID: 458 Component : SOLENOID-LOCKER-REAR Connector: Name : SOLENOID-LOCKER-REAR Color : BLACK # of pins : 4 Qualifier : (POWER WAGON) Pin Circuit Description 1 T526 16YL/WT REAR LOCKER SOURCE 2 T523 18YL/BK LOCKER SENSOR SUPPLY 3 T527 18YL/TN REAR LOCKER SENSOR SENSE 4 T528 16YL/GY REAR LOCKER RETURN Component Location - 70 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Differential > Solenoid, Differential Lock > Component Information > Diagrams > Module-Axle Disconnect-Front > Page 5955 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transfer Case > Transfer Case Actuator > Component Information > Locations Transfer Case Actuator: Locations Component ID: 18 Component : ASSEMBLY-SHIFT MOTOR/MODE SENSOR Connector: Name : ASSEMBLY-SHIFT MOTOR/MODE SENSOR Color : BLACK # of pins : 8 Qualifier : (RFE FULL TIME ETC) Pin Circuit Description 1 T103 20YL/OR 5 VOLT SUPPLY 2 D201 20WT/DG MODE SENSOR A 3 G180 20VT/YL SENSOR RETURN 4 T101 16DG SHIFT MOTOR CONTROL B 5 T102 16YL SHIFT MOTOR CONTROL A 6 A940 20RD FUSED B(+) 7 T300 20YL/GY T-CASE MOTOR BRAKE SIGNAL 8-Component Location - 21 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transfer Case > Transfer Case Actuator > Component Information > Locations > Page 5960 Component Location - 24 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transfer Case > Transfer Case Actuator > Component Information > Locations > Page 5961 Component Location - 26 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transfer Case > Transfer Case Actuator > Component Information > Locations > Page 5962 Connector: Name : ASSEMBLY-SHIFT MOTOR/MODE SENSOR Color : DK. GRAY # of pins : 8 Qualifier : (RFE PART TIME ETC/RE ETC) Pin Circuit Description 1 T103 20YL/OR 5 VOLT SUPPLY 2 D201 20WT/DG MODE SENSOR A 3 G180 20VT/YL SENSOR RETURN 4 T101 16DG SHIFT MOTOR CONTROL B Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transfer Case > Transfer Case Actuator > Component Information > Locations > Page 5963 5 T102 16YL SHIFT MOTOR CONTROL A 6 A918 20RD FUSED B(+) 7-8-Component Location - 21 Component Location - 24 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transfer Case > Transfer Case Actuator > Component Information > Locations > Page 5964 Component Location - 26 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transfer Case > Transfer Case Actuator > Component Information > Locations > Page 5965 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transfer Case > Transfer Case Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Component ID 14 Transfer Case Actuator: Diagrams Component ID 14 Component ID: 14 Component : ASSEMBLY-SHIFT MOTOR/MODE SENSOR Connector: Name : ASSEMBLY-SHIFT MOTOR/MODE SENSOR Color : BLACK # of pins : 8 Qualifier : (RFE FULL TIME ETC) Pin Circuit Description 1 T103 20YL/OR 5 VOLT SUPPLY 2 D201 20WT/DG MODE SENSOR A 3 G180 20VT/YL SENSOR RETURN 4 T101 16DG SHIFT MOTOR CONTROL B 5 T102 16YL SHIFT MOTOR CONTROL A 6 A940 20RD FUSED B(+) 7 T300 20YL/GY T-CASE MOTOR BRAKE SIGNAL 8-Connector: Name : ASSEMBLY-SHIFT MOTOR/MODE SENSOR Color : DK. GRAY # of pins : 8 Qualifier : (RFE PART TIME ETC/RE ETC) Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transfer Case > Transfer Case Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Component ID 14 > Page 5968 Pin Circuit Description 1 T103 20YL/OR 5 VOLT SUPPLY 2 D201 20WT/DG MODE SENSOR A 3 G180 20VT/YL SENSOR RETURN 4 T101 16DG SHIFT MOTOR CONTROL B 5 T102 16YL SHIFT MOTOR CONTROL A 6 A918 20RD FUSED B(+) 7-8-- Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transfer Case > Transfer Case Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Component ID 14 > Page 5969 Transfer Case Actuator: Diagrams Component ID 18 Component ID: 18 Component : ASSEMBLY-SHIFT MOTOR/MODE SENSOR Connector: Name : ASSEMBLY-SHIFT MOTOR/MODE SENSOR Color : BLACK # of pins : 8 Qualifier : (RFE FULL TIME ETC) Pin Circuit Description 1 T103 20YL/OR 5 VOLT SUPPLY 2 D201 20WT/DG MODE SENSOR A 3 G180 20VT/YL SENSOR RETURN 4 T101 16DG SHIFT MOTOR CONTROL B 5 T102 16YL SHIFT MOTOR CONTROL A 6 A940 20RD FUSED B(+) 7 T300 20YL/GY T-CASE MOTOR BRAKE SIGNAL 8-Component Location - 21 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transfer Case > Transfer Case Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Component ID 14 > Page 5970 Component Location - 24 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transfer Case > Transfer Case Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Component ID 14 > Page 5971 Component Location - 26 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transfer Case > Transfer Case Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Component ID 14 > Page 5972 Connector: Name : ASSEMBLY-SHIFT MOTOR/MODE SENSOR Color : DK. GRAY # of pins : 8 Qualifier : (RFE PART TIME ETC/RE ETC) Pin Circuit Description 1 T103 20YL/OR 5 VOLT SUPPLY 2 D201 20WT/DG MODE SENSOR A 3 G180 20VT/YL SENSOR RETURN 4 T101 16DG SHIFT MOTOR CONTROL B Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transfer Case > Transfer Case Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Component ID 14 > Page 5973 5 T102 16YL SHIFT MOTOR CONTROL A 6 A918 20RD FUSED B(+) 7-8-Component Location - 21 Component Location - 24 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transfer Case > Transfer Case Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Component ID 14 > Page 5974 Component Location - 26 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transfer Case > Transfer Case Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Component ID 14 > Page 5975 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transfer Case > Transfer Case Actuator > Component Information > Description and Operation > NV243 Transfer Case Transfer Case Actuator: Description and Operation NV243 Transfer Case Description DESCRIPTION The shift motor (2) consists of a permanent magnet D.C. motor with gear reduction to convert a high speed-low torque device into a low speed-high torque device. The output of the device is coupled to a shaft which internally moves the mode and range forks that change the transfer case operating ranges. The motor is rated at 25 amps maximum at 23° C (72° F) with 10 volts at the motor leads. Operation OPERATION The transfer case shift motor responds to the Transfer Case Control Module (TCCM) commands to move the transfer case shift sector bi-directionally, as required, to obtain the transfer case operating mode indicated by the instrument panel mounted selector switch. Description DESCRIPTION The shift motor (2) consists of a permanent magnet D.C. motor with gear reduction to convert a high speed-low torque device into a low speed-high torque device. The output of the device is coupled to a shaft which internally moves the mode and range forks that change the transfer case operating ranges. The motor is rated at 25 amps maximum at 23° C (72° F) with 10 volts at the motor leads. Operation OPERATION The transfer case shift motor responds to the Transfer Case Control Module (TCCM) commands to move the transfer case shift sector bi-directionally, as required, to obtain the transfer case operating mode indicated by the instrument panel mounted selector switch. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transfer Case > Transfer Case Actuator > Component Information > Description and Operation > NV243 Transfer Case > Page 5978 Transfer Case Actuator: Description and Operation NV244 GENII Transfer Case Description DESCRIPTION The shift motor (2) consists of a permanent magnet D.C. motor with gear reduction to convert a high speed-low torque device into a low speed-high torque device. The output of the device is coupled to a shaft which internally moves the mode and range forks that change the transfer case operating ranges. The motor is rated at 25 amps maximum at 23° C (72° F) with 10 volts at the motor leads. Operation OPERATION The transfer case shift motor responds to the Transfer Case Control Module (TCCM) commands to move the transfer case shift sector bi-directionally, as required, to obtain the transfer case operating mode indicated by the instrument panel mounted selector switch. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transfer Case > Transfer Case Actuator > Component Information > Description and Operation > NV243 Transfer Case > Page 5979 Transfer Case Actuator: Description and Operation NV246 Transfer Case Description DESCRIPTION The shift motor consists of a permanent magnet D.C. motor with gear reduction to convert a high speed-low torque device into a low speed-high torque device. The output of the device is coupled to a shaft which internally moves the mode and range forks that change the transfer case operating ranges. The motor is rated at 25 amps maximum at 23° C (72° F) with 10 volts at the motor leads. Operation OPERATION The transfer case shift motor responds to the Front Control Module (FCM) commands to move the transfer case shift sector bi-directionally, as required, to obtain the transfer case operating mode indicated by the instrument panel mounted selector switch. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transfer Case > Transfer Case Actuator > Component Information > Description and Operation > NV243 Transfer Case > Page 5980 Transfer Case Actuator: Description and Operation NV273 Transfer Case Description DESCRIPTION The shift motor (2) consists of a permanent magnet D.C. motor with gear reduction to convert a high speed-low torque device into a low speed-high torque device. The output of the device is coupled to a shaft which internally moves the mode and range forks that change the transfer case operating ranges. The motor is rated at 25 amps maximum at 23° C (72° F) with 10 volts at the motor leads. Operation OPERATION The transfer case shift motor responds to the Transfer Case Control Module (TCCM) commands to move the transfer case shift sector bi-directionally, as required, to obtain the transfer case operating mode indicated by the instrument panel mounted selector switch. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transfer Case > Transfer Case Actuator > Component Information > Service and Repair > NV243 Transfer Case Transfer Case Actuator: Service and Repair NV243 Transfer Case Removal REMOVAL NOTE: New shift motor assemblies are shipped in the 2WD/AWD position. If a new shift motor assembly will be installed, it will be necessary to shift the transfer case to the 2WD/AWD position prior to motor removal. 1. Raise the vehicle on a suitable hoist. 2. Disengage the wiring connectors from the shift motor and mode sensor. 3. Remove the bolts (3) holding the shift motor and mode sensor assembly (2) onto the transfer case (1). 4. Separate the shift motor and mode sensor assembly (2) from the transfer case. Installation INSTALLATION 1. Verify that the shift sector o-ring is clean and properly positioned over the shift sector and against the transfer case. NOTE: Verify that the shift motor position and sector shaft orientation are aligned. It may be necessary to manually shift the transfer case if the shift motor and sector shaft are not aligned. 2. Position the shift motor and mode sensor assembly (2) onto the transfer case (1). 3. Install the bolts (3) to hold the assembly onto the transfer case. Tighten the bolts to 16-24 Nm (12-18 ft.lbs.). CAUTION: If the original shift motor and mode sensor assembly bolts are reused, be sure to use Mopar(R) Lock & Seal or Loctite(TM) 242 to replenish the lock patch material originally found on the bolts 4. Engage the wiring connectors to the shift motor and mode sensor. 5. Refill the transfer case as necessary. 6. Lower vehicle and verify transfer case operation. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transfer Case > Transfer Case Actuator > Component Information > Service and Repair > NV243 Transfer Case > Page 5983 Transfer Case Actuator: Service and Repair NV244 GENII Transfer Case Removal REMOVAL NOTE: New shift motor assemblies are shipped in the 2WD/AWD position. If a new shift motor assembly will be installed, it will be necessary to shift the transfer case to the 2WD/AWD position prior to motor removal. 1. Raise the vehicle on a suitable hoist. 2. Disengage the wiring connectors from the shift motor and mode sensor. 3. Remove the bolts (3) holding the shift motor and mode sensor assembly (2) onto the transfer case (1). 4. Separate the shift motor and mode sensor assembly (2) from the transfer case. Installation INSTALLATION 1. Verify that the shift sector o-ring is clean and properly positioned over the shift sector and against the transfer case. NOTE: Verify that the shift motor position and sector shaft orientation are aligned. It may be necessary to manually shift the transfer case if the shift motor and sector shaft are not aligned. 2. Position the shift motor and mode sensor assembly (2) onto the transfer case (1). 3. Install the bolts (3) to hold the assembly onto the transfer case. Tighten the bolts to 16-24 Nm (12-18 ft.lbs.). CAUTION: If the original shift motor and mode sensor assembly bolts are reused, be sure to use Mopar(R) Lock & Seal or Loctite(TM) 242 to replenish the lock patch material originally found on the bolts 4. Engage the wiring connectors to the shift motor and mode sensor. 5. Refill the transfer case as necessary. 6. Lower vehicle and verify transfer case operation. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transfer Case > Transfer Case Actuator > Component Information > Service and Repair > NV243 Transfer Case > Page 5984 Transfer Case Actuator: Service and Repair NV246 Transfer Case Removal REMOVAL Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transfer Case > Transfer Case Actuator > Component Information > Service and Repair > NV243 Transfer Case > Page 5985 ERROR: stackunderflow OFFENDING COMMAND: ~ STACK: Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transfer Case > Transfer Case Actuator > Component Information > Service and Repair > NV243 Transfer Case > Page 5986 Transfer Case Actuator: Service and Repair NV273 Transfer Case Removal REMOVAL NOTE: New shift motor assemblies are shipped in the 2WD/AWD position. If a new shift motor assembly will be installed, it will be necessary to shift the transfer case to the 2WD/AWD position prior to motor removal. 1. Raise the vehicle on a suitable hoist. 2. Disengage the wiring connectors from the shift motor and mode sensor. 3. Remove the bolts (3) holding the shift motor and mode sensor assembly (2) onto the transfer case (1). 4. Separate the shift motor and mode sensor assembly (2) from the transfer case. Installation INSTALLATION 1. Verify that the shift sector o-ring is clean and properly positioned over the shift sector and against the transfer case. NOTE: Verify that the shift motor position and sector shaft orientation are aligned. It may be necessary to manually shift the transfer case if the shift motor and sector shaft are not aligned. 2. Position the shift motor and mode sensor assembly (2) onto the transfer case (1). 3. Install the bolts (3) to hold the assembly onto the transfer case. Tighten the bolts to 16-24 Nm (12-18 ft.lbs.). CAUTION: If the original shift motor and mode sensor assembly bolts are reused, be sure to use Mopar(R) Lock & Seal or Loctite(TM) 242 to replenish the lock patch material originally found on the bolts 4. Engage the wiring connectors to the shift motor and mode sensor. 5. Refill the transfer case as necessary. 6. Lower vehicle and verify transfer case operation. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Lamps and Indicators Transmission and Drivetrain > Lamps and Indicators - A/T > Overdrive Indicator Lamp > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Overdrive Indicator Lamp: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION An overdrive off indicator is standard equipment on all instrument clusters. However, on vehicles not equipped with an optional overdrive automatic transmission, this indicator is electronically disabled. This indicator is located on the right side of the instrument cluster, to the right of the coolant temperature gauge. The overdrive off indicator consists of a stencil-like cutout of the text O/D OFF in the opaque layer of the instrument cluster overlay. The dark outer layer of the overlay prevents the indicator from being clearly visible when it is not illuminated. An amber Light Emitting Diode (LED) behind the cutout in the opaque layer of the overlay causes the indicator to appear in amber through the translucent outer layer of the overlay when it is illuminated from behind by the LED, which is soldered onto the instrument cluster electronic circuit board. When the exterior lighting is turned ON, the illumination intensity of the overdrive off indicator is dimmable, which is adjusted along with the cluster general illumination lighting using the panel lamps dimmer thumbwheel on the headlamp switch. The overdrive off indicator is serviced as a unit with the instrument cluster. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Lamps and Indicators Transmission and Drivetrain > Lamps and Indicators - A/T > Overdrive Indicator Lamp > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 5993 Overdrive Indicator Lamp: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The overdrive off indicator gives an indication to the vehicle operator when the overdrive-OFF position of the tow/haul switch has been selected, disabling the electronically controlled overdrive feature of the automatic transmission. This indicator is controlled by a transistor on the instrument cluster circuit board based upon cluster programming and electronic messages received by the cluster from the Powertrain Control Module (PCM) over the Controller Area Network (CAN) data bus. The overdrive off indicator Light Emitting Diode (LED) is completely controlled by the instrument cluster logic circuit, and that logic will only allow this indicator to operate when the instrument cluster receives a battery current input on the fused ignition switch output (run-start) circuit. Therefore, the LED will always be OFF when the ignition switch is in any position except ON or START. The LED only illuminates when it is provided a path to ground by the instrument cluster transistor. The instrument cluster will turn ON the overdrive off indicator for the following reasons: - Overdrive Off Indicator Lamp-On Message - Each time the cluster receives an electronic overdrive off indicator lamp-ON message from the PCM indicating that the overdrive-OFF position of the tow/haul switch has been selected, the indicator will be illuminated. The indicator remains illuminated until the cluster receives a lamp-OFF message from the PCM, or until the ignition switch is turned to the OFF position, whichever occurs first. Actuator Test - Each time the cluster is put through the actuator test, the overdrive off indicator will be turned ON, then OFF again during the bulb check portion of the test to confirm the functionality of the LED and the cluster control circuitry. The PCM continually monitors the tow/haul switch to determine the proper outputs to the automatic transmission. The PCM then sends the proper lamp-ON or lamp-OFF message to the ElectroMechanical Instrument Cluster (EMIC) (also known as the Cab Compartment Node/CCN). For further diagnosis of the overdrive off indicator or the instrument cluster circuitry that controls the indicator, Refer to appropriate testing. For proper diagnosis of the transmission control system, the PCM, the EMIC, the CAN data bus or the electronic communication related to overdrive off indicator operation a diagnostic scan tool is required. Refer to the appropriate diagnostic information. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Lamps and Indicators Transmission and Drivetrain > Lamps and Indicators - A/T > Temperature Warning Indicator - A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Temperature Warning Indicator - A/T: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION A transmission over-temperature indicator is standard equipment on all instrument clusters. However, on vehicles not equipped with an optional automatic transmission, this indicator is electronically disabled. This indicator is located in the lower portion of the tachometer dial face in the instrument cluster overlay. The transmission over-temperature indicator consists of a stencil-like cutout of the International Control and Display Symbol icon for Transmission Temperature in the opaque layer of the instrument cluster overlay. The dark outer layer of the overlay prevents the indicator from being clearly visible when it is not illuminated. A red Light Emitting Diode (LED) behind the cutout in the opaque layer of the overlay causes the indicator to appear in red through the translucent outer layer of the overlay when it is illuminated from behind by the LED, which is soldered onto the instrument cluster electronic circuit board. The transmission over-temperature indicator is serviced as a unit with the instrument cluster. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Lamps and Indicators Transmission and Drivetrain > Lamps and Indicators - A/T > Temperature Warning Indicator - A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 5998 Temperature Warning Indicator - A/T: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The transmission over-temperature indicator gives an indication to the vehicle operator when the transmission fluid temperature is excessive, which may lead to accelerated transmission component wear or failure. This indicator is controlled by a transistor on the instrument cluster circuit board based upon cluster programming and electronic messages received over the Controller Area Network (CAN) data bus from the Powertrain Control Module (PCM). The transmission over-temperature indicator Light Emitting Diode (LED) is completely controlled by the instrument cluster logic circuit, and that logic will only allow this indicator to operate when the instrument cluster receives a battery current input on the fused ignition switch output (run-start) circuit. Therefore, the LED will always be OFF when the ignition switch is in any position except ON or START. The LED only illuminates when it is provided a path to ground by the instrument cluster transistor. The instrument cluster will turn ON the transmission over-temperature indicator for the following reasons: - Bulb Test - Each time the ignition switch is turned to the ON position the transmission over-temperature indicator is illuminated for about two seconds as a bulb test. - Trans Over-Temp Indicator Lamp-On Message - Each time the cluster receives an electronic trans over-temp indicator lamp-ON message from the PCM indicating that the transmission fluid temperature is 135 °C (275 °F) or higher, the indicator will be illuminated and a single chime tone is sounded. The indicator remains illuminated until the cluster receives a lamp-OFF message from the PCM, or until the ignition switch is turned to the OFF position, whichever occurs first. The chime tone feature will only repeat during the same ignition cycle if the indicator is cycled OFF and then ON again by the appropriate lamp-ON and lamp-OFF messages from the PCM. - Actuator Test - Each time the cluster is put through the actuator test, the transmission over-temperature indicator will be turned ON, then OFF again during the bulb check portion of the test to confirm the functionality of the LED and the cluster control circuitry. The PCM continually monitors the transmission temperature sensor to determine the transmission operating condition. The PCM then sends the proper lamp-ON or lamp-OFF message to the ElectroMechanical Instrument Cluster (EMIC) (also known as the Cab Compartment Node/CCN). If the instrument cluster illuminates the transmission over-temperature indicator due to a high transmission oil temperature condition, it may indicate that the transmission or the transmission cooling system are being overloaded, or that they require service. For further diagnosis of the transmission over-temperature indicator or the instrument cluster circuitry that controls the LED, Refer to appropriate testing. For proper diagnosis of the transmission temperature sensor, the PCM, the EMIC, the CAN data bus or the electronic communication related to transmission over-temperature indicator operation a diagnostic scan tool is required. Refer to the appropriate diagnostic information. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Lamps and Indicators Transmission and Drivetrain > Lamps and Indicators - A/T > Transmission Mode Indicator - A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Transmission Mode Indicator - A/T: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION An electronic automatic transmission gear selector indicator is standard factory-installed equipment on this vehicle. However, on vehicles not equipped with an optional automatic transmission, this indicator is electronically disabled. The gear selector indicator information is displayed in an electronic, blue-green Vacuum-Fluorescent Display (VFD) unit. This VFD unit is soldered onto the cluster electronic circuit board and is visible through a window with a smoked clear lens located on the lower edge of the speedometer dial face of the cluster overlay. The dark lens over the VFD prevents the indicator from being clearly visible when it is not illuminated. The gear selector indicator displays the following characters from left to right: P, R, N, D, 2, and 1. Each character appears in a blue-green color and at the same lighting level as the odometer information. Respectively, these characters represent the PARK, REVERSE, NEUTRAL, DRIVE, second gear, and first gear positions of the transmission gear selector lever on the steering column. The indicator illuminates a rectangular box around the character that represents the currently selected lever position. During daylight hours (exterior lamps are OFF) the gear selector indicator is illuminated at full brightness for clear visibility. At night (exterior lamps are ON), the indicator lighting level is adjusted with the other cluster general illumination lamps using the panel lamps dimmer thumbwheel on the headlamp switch. However, a PARADE mode position of the panel lamps dimmer thumbwheel allows the indicator to be illuminated at full brightness if the exterior lamps are turned ON during daylight hours. The gear selector indicator is serviced as a unit with the VFD unit in the instrument cluster. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Lamps and Indicators Transmission and Drivetrain > Lamps and Indicators - A/T > Transmission Mode Indicator - A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 6003 Transmission Mode Indicator - A/T: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The electronic gear selector indicator gives an indication to the vehicle operator of the transmission gear that has been selected with the automatic transmission gear selector lever. This indicator is controlled by the instrument cluster circuit board based upon cluster programming. The cluster circuitry automatically configures itself for the proper transmission type based upon the hard wired transmission range sensor mux circuit input to the cluster. The gear selector indicator information is displayed by the odometer/trip odometer Vacuum Fluorescent Display (VFD) unit soldered onto the instrument cluster electronic circuit board, and the VFD will not display the gear selector indicator information after the ignition switch is turned to the OFF position. Each time the cluster is disconnected from battery current for more than about five minutes, it must configure itself for the automatic transmission type that is in the vehicle once it is reconnected to battery current. The instrument cluster circuitry configures the gear selector indicator based upon the following inputs from the transmission range sensor: - Open Circuit - If the cluster is configured for an automatic transmission and the transmission range sensor mux circuit is open, the cluster circuitry controls the gear selector indicator display based upon an electronic selected gear message received from the Transmission Control Module (TCM) over the Controller Area Network (CAN) data bus. If the Transmission Range Sensor (TRS) mux circuit is open and no electronic selected gear messages are received from the TCM within two seconds, the instrument cluster circuitry will not display any gear selector position until the condition is resolved or until the ignition switch is turned to the OFF position, whichever occurs first. - Resolved Circuit - If the transmission range sensor mux circuit is resolved, the cluster circuitry controls the gear selector indicator display based upon the resistance value of the hard wired input from the TRS. If the cluster is configured for an automatic transmission with a TRS input and detects a short to ground or an open in the TRS mux input, the instrument cluster circuitry will not display any gear selector position in the VFD. The VFD display for the short-to-ground and open circuit conditions will continue until the condition is resolved or until the ignition switch is turned to the OFF position, whichever occurs first. - Actuator Test - Each time the cluster is put through the actuator test, the odometer/trip odometer VFD will display all of its characters at once, then step through each character segment individually during the VFD portion of the test to confirm the functionality of the VFD and the cluster control circuitry. On vehicles with a TCM, the TCM continually monitors the TRS, then sends the proper message to the ElectroMechanical Instrument Cluster (EMIC) (also known as the Cab Compartment Node/CCN). On vehicles without a TCM, the EMIC continually monitors the hard wired TRS multiplexed input. On vehicles with a TCM, for proper diagnosis of the TRS, the TCM, the EMIC, the CAN data bus or the electronic communication related to gear selector indicator operation a diagnostic scan tool is required. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Lamps and Indicators Transmission and Drivetrain > Lamps and Indicators - Transfer Case > Four Wheel Drive Indicator Lamp > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Four Wheel Drive Indicator Lamp: Description and Operation Description 4WD Auto Indicator 4WD AUTO INDICATOR A 4WD auto indicator is standard equipment on all instrument clusters. However, on vehicles not equipped with the optional four-wheel drive system and electronically shifted transfer case, this indicator is electronically disabled. The 4WD auto indicator is located on the right side of the instrument cluster, to the right of the oil pressure gauge. The 4WD auto indicator consists of a stencil-like cutout of the text 4WD AUTO in the opaque layer of the instrument cluster overlay. The dark outer layer of the overlay prevents the indicator from being clearly visible when it is not illuminated. An amber Light Emitting Diode (LED) behind the cutout in the opaque layer of the overlay causes the indicator to appear in amber through the translucent outer layer of the overlay when it is illuminated from behind by the LED, which is soldered onto the instrument cluster electronic circuit board. When the exterior lighting is turned ON, the illumination intensity of the 4WD auto indicator is dimmable, which is adjusted along with the cluster general illumination lighting using the panel lamps dimmer thumbwheel on the headlamp switch. The 4WD auto indicator is serviced as a unit with the instrument cluster. 4WD Indicator 4WD INDICATOR Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Lamps and Indicators Transmission and Drivetrain > Lamps and Indicators - Transfer Case > Four Wheel Drive Indicator Lamp > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 6009 A 4WD indicator is standard equipment on all instrument clusters. However, on vehicles not equipped with an optional four-wheel drive system, this indicator is electronically disabled. The 4WD indicator is located on the right side of the instrument cluster, to the right of the oil pressure gauge. The 4WD indicator consists of a stencil-like cutout of the text 4WD in the opaque layer of the instrument cluster overlay. The dark outer layer of the overlay prevents the indicator from being clearly visible when it is not illuminated. An amber Light Emitting Diode (LED) behind the cutout in the opaque layer of the overlay causes the indicator to appear in amber through the translucent outer layer of the overlay when it is illuminated from behind by the LED, which is soldered onto the instrument cluster electronic circuit board. When the exterior lighting is turned ON, the illumination intensity of the 4WD indicator is dimmable, which is adjusted along with the cluster general illumination lighting using the panel lamps dimmer thumbwheel on the headlamp switch. The 4WD indicator is serviced as a unit with the instrument cluster. 4 Low Indicator 4 LOW INDICATOR A 4 low indicator is standard equipment on all instrument clusters. However, on vehicles not equipped with the optional four-wheel drive system and electronically shifted transfer case, this indicator is electronically disabled. The 4 low indicator is located on the right side of the instrument cluster, to the right of the coolant temperature gauge. The 4 low indicator consists of a stencil-like cutout of the text 4 LOW in the opaque layer of the instrument cluster overlay. The dark outer layer of the overlay prevents the indicator from being clearly visible when it is not illuminated. An amber Light Emitting Diode (LED) behind the cutout in the opaque layer of the overlay causes the indicator to appear in amber through the translucent outer layer of the overlay when it is illuminated from behind by the LED, which is soldered onto the instrument cluster electronic circuit board. When the exterior lighting is turned ON, the illumination intensity of the 4 low indicator is dimmable, which is adjusted along with the cluster general illumination lighting using the panel lamps dimmer thumbwheel on the headlamp switch. The 4 low indicator is serviced as a unit with the instrument cluster. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Lamps and Indicators Transmission and Drivetrain > Lamps and Indicators - Transfer Case > Four Wheel Drive Indicator Lamp > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 6010 Four Wheel Drive Indicator Lamp: Description and Operation Operation 4WD Auto Indicator 4WD AUTO INDICATOR The 4WD auto indicator gives an indication to the vehicle operator when the electronic transfer case has been shifted into the 4WD auto mode. This indicator is controlled by a transistor on the instrument cluster circuit board based upon cluster programming and electronic messages received by the cluster from the Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) over the Controller Area Network (CAN) data bus. The 4WD auto indicator Light Emitting Diode (LED) is completely controlled by the instrument cluster logic circuit, and that logic will only allow this indicator to operate when the instrument cluster receives a battery current input on the fused ignition switch output (run-start) circuit. Therefore, the LED will always be OFF when the ignition switch is in any position except ON or START. The LED only illuminates when it is provided a path to ground by the instrument cluster transistor. The instrument cluster will turn ON the 4WD auto indicator for the following reasons: - 4WD Auto Indicator Lamp-On Message - Each time the cluster receives an electronic 4WD auto indicator lamp-ON message from the TIPM, the indicator will be illuminated. The indicator remains illuminated until the cluster receives a lamp-OFF message from the TIPM, or until the ignition switch is turned to the OFF position, whichever occurs first. - Actuator Test - Each time the cluster is put through the actuator test, the 4WD auto indicator will be turned ON, then OFF again during the bulb check portion of the test to confirm the functionality of the LED and the cluster control circuitry. The TIPM continually monitors the electronic transfer case through the transfer case shift motor/mode sensor assembly to determine when the 4WD auto mode is engaged. The TIPM then sends the proper lamp-ON or lamp-OFF message to the ElectroMechanical Instrument Cluster (EMIC) (also known as the Cab Compartment Node/CCN). For further diagnosis of the 4WD auto indicator or the instrument cluster circuitry that controls the LED, Refer to appropriate testing. For proper diagnosis of the transfer case shift motor/mode sensor, the TIPM, the EMIC, the CAN data bus or the electronic communication related to 4WD auto indicator operation a diagnostic scan tool is required. Refer to the appropriate diagnostic information. 4WD Indicator 4WD INDICATOR The 4WD indicator gives an indication to the vehicle operator when the transfer case has been shifted into a 4WD mode. This indicator is controlled by a transistor on the instrument cluster circuit board based upon cluster programming and electronic messages received by the cluster from the Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) over the Controller Area Network (CAN) data bus. The 4WD indicator Light Emitting Diode (LED) is completely controlled by the instrument cluster logic circuit, and that logic will only allow this indicator to operate when the instrument cluster receives a battery current input on the fused ignition switch output (run-start) circuit. Therefore, the LED will always be OFF when the ignition switch is in any position except ON or START. The LED only illuminates when it is provided a path to ground by the instrument cluster transistor. The instrument cluster will turn ON the 4WD indicator for the following reasons: - 4WD Indicator Lamp-On Message - Each time the cluster receives an electronic 4WD indicator lamp-ON message from the TIPM, the indicator will be illuminated. The indicator remains illuminated until the cluster receives a lamp-OFF message from the TIPM, or until the ignition switch is turned to the OFF position, whichever occurs first. - Actuator Test - Each time the cluster is put through the actuator test, the 4WD indicator will be turned ON, then OFF again during the bulb check portion of the test to confirm the functionality of the LED and the cluster control circuitry. The TIPM continually monitors the electronic transfer case through the transfer case shift motor/mode sensor assembly or the manual transfer case through the transfer case switch to determine when the 4WD mode is engaged. The TIPM then sends the proper lamp-ON or lamp-OFF message to the ElectroMechanical Instrument Cluster (EMIC) (also known as the Cab Compartment Node/CCN). For further diagnosis of the 4WD indicator or the instrument cluster circuitry that controls the LED, Refer to appropriate testing. For proper diagnosis of the transfer case shift motor/mode sensor, the transfer case switch, the TIPM, the EMIC, the CAN data bus or the electronic communication related to 4WD indicator operation a diagnostic scan tool is required. Refer to the appropriate diagnostic information. 4 Low Indicator 4 LOW INDICATOR The 4 low indicator gives an indication to the vehicle operator when the electronic transfer case has been shifted into the 4WD low mode. This indicator is controlled by a transistor on the instrument cluster circuit board based upon cluster programming and electronic messages received by the cluster from Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Lamps and Indicators Transmission and Drivetrain > Lamps and Indicators - Transfer Case > Four Wheel Drive Indicator Lamp > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 6011 the Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) over the Controller Area Network (CAN) data bus. The 4 low indicator Light Emitting Diode (LED) is completely controlled by the instrument cluster logic circuit, and that logic will only allow this indicator to operate when the instrument cluster receives a battery current input on the fused ignition switch output (run-start) circuit. Therefore, the LED will always be OFF when the ignition switch is in any position except ON or START. The LED only illuminates when it is provided a path to ground by the instrument cluster transistor. The instrument cluster will turn ON the 4 low indicator for the following reasons: - 4 Low Indicator Lamp-On Message - Each time the cluster receives an electronic 4 low indicator lamp-ON message from the TIPM, the indicator will be illuminated. The indicator remains illuminated until the cluster receives a lamp-OFF message from the TIPM, or until the ignition switch is turned to the OFF position, whichever occurs first. - Actuator Test - Each time the cluster is put through the actuator test, the 4 low indicator will be turned ON, then OFF again during the LED portion of the test to confirm the functionality of the LED and the cluster control circuitry. The TIPM continually monitors the electronic transfer case through the transfer case shift motor/mode sensor assembly to determine when the 4WD low mode is engaged. The TIPM then sends the proper lamp-ON or lamp-OFF message to the ElectroMechanical Instrument Cluster (EMIC) (also known as the Cab Compartment Node/CCN). For further diagnosis of the 4 low indicator or the instrument cluster circuitry that controls the LED, Refer to appropriate testing. For proper diagnosis of the transfer case shift motor/mode sensor, the TIPM, the EMIC, the CAN data bus or the electronic communication related to 4 low indicator operation a diagnostic scan tool is required. Refer to the appropriate diagnostic information. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Lamps and Indicators Transmission and Drivetrain > Lamps and Indicators - Transfer Case > Malfunction Indicator Lamp - Transfer Case > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Malfunction Indicator Lamp - Transfer Case: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION A service 4WD indicator is standard equipment on all instrument clusters. However, on vehicles not equipped with the optional four-wheel drive system and electronically shifted transfer case, this indicator is electronically disabled. This indicator is located in the lower portion of the tachometer dial face in the instrument cluster overlay. The service 4WD indicator consists of a stencil-like cutout of the text SVC 4WD in the opaque layer of the instrument cluster overlay. The dark outer layer of the overlay prevents the indicator from being clearly visible when it is not illuminated. An amber Light Emitting Diode (LED) behind the cutout in the opaque layer of the overlay causes the indicator to appear in amber through the translucent outer layer of the overlay when it is illuminated from behind by the LED, which is soldered onto the instrument cluster electronic circuit board. The service 4WD indicator is serviced as a unit with the instrument cluster. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Lamps and Indicators Transmission and Drivetrain > Lamps and Indicators - Transfer Case > Malfunction Indicator Lamp - Transfer Case > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 6016 Malfunction Indicator Lamp - Transfer Case: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The service 4WD indicator gives an indication to the vehicle operator when the Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) has recorded a Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) for an electronic transfer case circuit or component malfunction. This indicator is controlled by a transistor on the instrument cluster circuit board based upon cluster programming and electronic messages received by the cluster from the TIPM over the Controller Area Network (CAN) data bus. The service 4WD indicator Light Emitting Diode (LED) is completely controlled by the instrument cluster logic circuit, and that logic will only allow this indicator to operate when the instrument cluster receives a battery current input on the fused ignition switch output (run-start) circuit. Therefore, the LED will always be OFF when the ignition switch is in any position except ON or START. The LED only illuminates when it is provided a path to ground by the instrument cluster transistor. The instrument cluster will turn ON the service 4WD indicator for the following reasons: - Bulb Test - Each time the ignition switch is turned to the ON position the service 4WD indicator is illuminated for about two seconds as a bulb test. - Service 4WD Indicator Lamp-On Message - Each time the cluster receives an electronic service 4WD indicator lamp-ON message from the TIPM, the service 4WD indicator will be illuminated. The indicator remains illuminated until the cluster receives a lamp-OFF message from the TIPM, or until the ignition switch is turned to the OFF position, whichever occurs first. - Communication Error - If the cluster receives no lamp-ON or lamp-OFF messages from the TIPM for 10 seconds the service 4WD indicator is illuminated by the cluster to indicate a loss of TIPM communication. The indicator remains controlled and illuminated by the cluster until a valid message is received from the TIPM. - Actuator Test - Each time the cluster is put through the actuator test, the service 4WD indicator will be turned ON, then OFF again during the bulb check portion of the test to confirm the functionality of the LED and the cluster control circuitry. The TIPM continually monitors the electronic transfer case control circuits and transfer case shift motor/mode sensor assembly to determine the condition of the system. The TIPM then sends the proper lamp-ON or lamp-OFF message to the ElectroMechanical Instrument Cluster (EMIC) (also known as the Cab Compartment Node/CCN). For further diagnosis of the service 4WD indicator or the instrument cluster circuitry that controls the LED, Refer to appropriate testing. For proper diagnosis of the TIPM, the EMIC, the CAN data bus or the electronic communication related to service 4WD indicator operation a diagnostic scan tool is required. Refer to the appropriate diagnostic information. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 200 Control Module: Locations Component ID 200 Component ID: 200 Component : MODULE-TRANSMISSION CONTROL Connector: Name : MODULE-TRANSMISSION CONTROL C1 Color : # of pins : 17 Qualifier : (RC) Pin Circuit Description 1 T52 20DG/OR INPUT SPEED SIGNAL 2-3 K427 18OR/LG POWER TAKEOFF RELAY ENABLE 4-5 T803 20DG/BR PRESSURE SIGNAL 4 6 T800 20DG/BR PRESSURE SIGNAL 1 7-8-9-10 - 11 T804 20YL/DB PRESSURE SIGNAL 5 12 T802 20DG/PK PRESSURE SIGNAL 3 13 - 14 - 15 - 16 T805 20DG/OR PRESSURE SIGNAL 6 17 T801 20DG/RD PRESSURE SIGNAL 2 Component Location - 31 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 200 > Page 6023 Connector: Name : MODULE-TRANSMISSION CONTROL C2 Color : # of pins : 24 Qualifier : (RC) Pin Circuit Description 1 T72 20YL/DB 8 VOLT SUPPLY 2 T14 20DG/BR OUTPUT SPEED SIGNAL 3 F916 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION RELAY OUTPUT 3 T16 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 200 > Page 6024 4 F916 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION RELAY OUTPUT 4 T16 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT 5-6-7 A104 20YL/RD FUSED B(+) 8 Z133 18BK/LG GROUND 9-10 - 11 - 12 - 13 - - 14 T6 20DG TOW/HAUL OVERDRIVE OFF SWITCH SIGNAL 15 T54 20DG/OR TRANSMISSION TEMPERATURE SIGNAL 16 T819 20YL/VT TCC TEMPERATURE SIGNAL 17 Z133 18BK/LG GROUND 18 - 19 T811 20DG/LB SHIFT 4 CONTROL 20 D65 20WT/LG CAN C BUS (+) 21 D64 20WT/LB CAN C BUS (-) 22 - 23 - 24 - Component Location - 31 Connector: Name : MODULE-TRANSMISSION CONTROL C3 Color : # of pins : 31 Qualifier : (RC) Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 200 > Page 6025 Pin Circuit Description 1 T808 20DG/GY SHIFT 1 CONTROL 2-3 T810 20DG/DB SHIFT 3 CONTROL 4-5 T817 20YL/BR LINEAR 3 CONTROL 6 T812 20DG/TN LINEAR 1 GROUND 7 T813 20DG/LG LINEAR 1 CONTROL 8 T815 20YL/RD LINEAR 2 CONTROL 9 T814 20YL/BR LINEAR 2 GROUND 10 T806 20DG/VT PRESSURE SIGNAL 7 11 - 12 - 13 - 14 - - 15 T816 20YL/PK LINEAR 3 GROUND 16 T828 20DG/DB TRS 1 SIGNAL 17 T42 20DG/YL TRS T42 SIGNAL 18 T3 20DG/DB TRS T3 SIGNAL 19 T827 20DG/LB TRS DRIVE SIGNAL 20 T824 20YL/DB TRS PARK SIGNAL 21 T826 20DG/DB TRS REVERSE SIGNAL 22 T809 20DG/YL SHIFT 2 CONTROL 23 - 24 - 25 - 26 T807 20DG/WT PRESSURE SIGNAL 8 27 - 28 T820 20YL/WT TEMPERATURE SENSOR GROUND 29 T825 20DG/YL TRS NEUTRAL SIGNAL 30 T821 20YL/GY LINEAR 4 CONTROL 31 T818 20YL/OR LINEAR 4 GROUND Component Location - 31 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 200 > Page 6026 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 200 > Page 6027 Control Module: Locations Component ID 216 Component ID: 216 Component : MODULE-TRANSMISSION CONTROL Connector: Name : MODULE-TRANSMISSION CONTROL C1 Color : # of pins : 17 Qualifier : (RC) Pin Circuit Description 1 T52 20DG/OR INPUT SPEED SIGNAL 2-3 K427 18OR/LG POWER TAKEOFF RELAY ENABLE 4-5 T803 20DG/BR PRESSURE SIGNAL 4 6 T800 20DG/BR PRESSURE SIGNAL 1 7-8-9-10 - 11 T804 20YL/DB PRESSURE SIGNAL 5 12 T802 20DG/PK PRESSURE SIGNAL 3 13 - 14 - 15 - 16 T805 20DG/OR PRESSURE SIGNAL 6 17 T801 20DG/RD PRESSURE SIGNAL 2 Component Location - 31 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 200 > Page 6028 Connector: Name : MODULE-TRANSMISSION CONTROL C2 Color : # of pins : 24 Qualifier : (RC) Pin Circuit Description 1 T72 20YL/DB 8 VOLT SUPPLY 2 T14 20DG/BR OUTPUT SPEED SIGNAL 3 F916 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION RELAY OUTPUT 3 T16 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 200 > Page 6029 4 F916 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION RELAY OUTPUT 4 T16 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT 5-6-7 A104 20YL/RD FUSED B(+) 8 Z133 18BK/LG GROUND 9-10 - 11 - 12 - 13 - - 14 T6 20DG TOW/HAUL OVERDRIVE OFF SWITCH SIGNAL 15 T54 20DG/OR TRANSMISSION TEMPERATURE SIGNAL 16 T819 20YL/VT TCC TEMPERATURE SIGNAL 17 Z133 18BK/LG GROUND 18 - 19 T811 20DG/LB SHIFT 4 CONTROL 20 D65 20WT/LG CAN C BUS (+) 21 D64 20WT/LB CAN C BUS (-) 22 - 23 - 24 - Component Location - 31 Connector: Name : MODULE-TRANSMISSION CONTROL C3 Color : # of pins : 31 Qualifier : (RC) Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 200 > Page 6030 Pin Circuit Description 1 T808 20DG/GY SHIFT 1 CONTROL 2-3 T810 20DG/DB SHIFT 3 CONTROL 4-5 T817 20YL/BR LINEAR 3 CONTROL 6 T812 20DG/TN LINEAR 1 GROUND 7 T813 20DG/LG LINEAR 1 CONTROL 8 T815 20YL/RD LINEAR 2 CONTROL 9 T814 20YL/BR LINEAR 2 GROUND 10 T806 20DG/VT PRESSURE SIGNAL 7 11 - 12 - 13 - 14 - - 15 T816 20YL/PK LINEAR 3 GROUND 16 T828 20DG/DB TRS 1 SIGNAL 17 T42 20DG/YL TRS T42 SIGNAL 18 T3 20DG/DB TRS T3 SIGNAL 19 T827 20DG/LB TRS DRIVE SIGNAL 20 T824 20YL/DB TRS PARK SIGNAL 21 T826 20DG/DB TRS REVERSE SIGNAL 22 T809 20DG/YL SHIFT 2 CONTROL 23 - 24 - 25 - 26 T807 20DG/WT PRESSURE SIGNAL 8 27 - 28 T820 20YL/WT TEMPERATURE SENSOR GROUND 29 T825 20DG/YL TRS NEUTRAL SIGNAL 30 T821 20YL/GY LINEAR 4 CONTROL 31 T818 20YL/OR LINEAR 4 GROUND Component Location - 31 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 200 > Page 6031 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Component ID 200 Control Module: Diagrams Component ID 200 Component ID: 200 Component : MODULE-TRANSMISSION CONTROL Connector: Name : MODULE-TRANSMISSION CONTROL C1 Color : # of pins : 17 Qualifier : (RC) Pin Circuit Description 1 T52 20DG/OR INPUT SPEED SIGNAL 2-3 K427 18OR/LG POWER TAKEOFF RELAY ENABLE 4-5 T803 20DG/BR PRESSURE SIGNAL 4 6 T800 20DG/BR PRESSURE SIGNAL 1 7-8-9-10 - 11 T804 20YL/DB PRESSURE SIGNAL 5 12 T802 20DG/PK PRESSURE SIGNAL 3 13 - 14 - 15 - 16 T805 20DG/OR PRESSURE SIGNAL 6 17 T801 20DG/RD PRESSURE SIGNAL 2 Component Location - 31 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Component ID 200 > Page 6034 Connector: Name : MODULE-TRANSMISSION CONTROL C2 Color : # of pins : 24 Qualifier : (RC) Pin Circuit Description 1 T72 20YL/DB 8 VOLT SUPPLY 2 T14 20DG/BR OUTPUT SPEED SIGNAL 3 F916 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION RELAY OUTPUT 3 T16 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Component ID 200 > Page 6035 4 F916 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION RELAY OUTPUT 4 T16 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT 5-6-7 A104 20YL/RD FUSED B(+) 8 Z133 18BK/LG GROUND 9-10 - 11 - 12 - 13 - - 14 T6 20DG TOW/HAUL OVERDRIVE OFF SWITCH SIGNAL 15 T54 20DG/OR TRANSMISSION TEMPERATURE SIGNAL 16 T819 20YL/VT TCC TEMPERATURE SIGNAL 17 Z133 18BK/LG GROUND 18 - 19 T811 20DG/LB SHIFT 4 CONTROL 20 D65 20WT/LG CAN C BUS (+) 21 D64 20WT/LB CAN C BUS (-) 22 - 23 - 24 - Component Location - 31 Connector: Name : MODULE-TRANSMISSION CONTROL C3 Color : # of pins : 31 Qualifier : (RC) Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Component ID 200 > Page 6036 Pin Circuit Description 1 T808 20DG/GY SHIFT 1 CONTROL 2-3 T810 20DG/DB SHIFT 3 CONTROL 4-5 T817 20YL/BR LINEAR 3 CONTROL 6 T812 20DG/TN LINEAR 1 GROUND 7 T813 20DG/LG LINEAR 1 CONTROL 8 T815 20YL/RD LINEAR 2 CONTROL 9 T814 20YL/BR LINEAR 2 GROUND 10 T806 20DG/VT PRESSURE SIGNAL 7 11 - 12 - 13 - 14 - - 15 T816 20YL/PK LINEAR 3 GROUND 16 T828 20DG/DB TRS 1 SIGNAL 17 T42 20DG/YL TRS T42 SIGNAL 18 T3 20DG/DB TRS T3 SIGNAL 19 T827 20DG/LB TRS DRIVE SIGNAL 20 T824 20YL/DB TRS PARK SIGNAL 21 T826 20DG/DB TRS REVERSE SIGNAL 22 T809 20DG/YL SHIFT 2 CONTROL 23 - 24 - 25 - 26 T807 20DG/WT PRESSURE SIGNAL 8 27 - 28 T820 20YL/WT TEMPERATURE SENSOR GROUND 29 T825 20DG/YL TRS NEUTRAL SIGNAL 30 T821 20YL/GY LINEAR 4 CONTROL 31 T818 20YL/OR LINEAR 4 GROUND Component Location - 31 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Component ID 200 > Page 6037 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Component ID 200 > Page 6038 Control Module: Diagrams Component ID 216 Component ID: 216 Component : MODULE-TRANSMISSION CONTROL Connector: Name : MODULE-TRANSMISSION CONTROL C1 Color : # of pins : 17 Qualifier : (RC) Pin Circuit Description 1 T52 20DG/OR INPUT SPEED SIGNAL 2-3 K427 18OR/LG POWER TAKEOFF RELAY ENABLE 4-5 T803 20DG/BR PRESSURE SIGNAL 4 6 T800 20DG/BR PRESSURE SIGNAL 1 7-8-9-10 - 11 T804 20YL/DB PRESSURE SIGNAL 5 12 T802 20DG/PK PRESSURE SIGNAL 3 13 - 14 - 15 - 16 T805 20DG/OR PRESSURE SIGNAL 6 17 T801 20DG/RD PRESSURE SIGNAL 2 Component Location - 31 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Component ID 200 > Page 6039 Connector: Name : MODULE-TRANSMISSION CONTROL C2 Color : # of pins : 24 Qualifier : (RC) Pin Circuit Description 1 T72 20YL/DB 8 VOLT SUPPLY 2 T14 20DG/BR OUTPUT SPEED SIGNAL 3 F916 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION RELAY OUTPUT 3 T16 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Component ID 200 > Page 6040 4 F916 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION RELAY OUTPUT 4 T16 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT 5-6-7 A104 20YL/RD FUSED B(+) 8 Z133 18BK/LG GROUND 9-10 - 11 - 12 - 13 - - 14 T6 20DG TOW/HAUL OVERDRIVE OFF SWITCH SIGNAL 15 T54 20DG/OR TRANSMISSION TEMPERATURE SIGNAL 16 T819 20YL/VT TCC TEMPERATURE SIGNAL 17 Z133 18BK/LG GROUND 18 - 19 T811 20DG/LB SHIFT 4 CONTROL 20 D65 20WT/LG CAN C BUS (+) 21 D64 20WT/LB CAN C BUS (-) 22 - 23 - 24 - Component Location - 31 Connector: Name : MODULE-TRANSMISSION CONTROL C3 Color : # of pins : 31 Qualifier : (RC) Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Component ID 200 > Page 6041 Pin Circuit Description 1 T808 20DG/GY SHIFT 1 CONTROL 2-3 T810 20DG/DB SHIFT 3 CONTROL 4-5 T817 20YL/BR LINEAR 3 CONTROL 6 T812 20DG/TN LINEAR 1 GROUND 7 T813 20DG/LG LINEAR 1 CONTROL 8 T815 20YL/RD LINEAR 2 CONTROL 9 T814 20YL/BR LINEAR 2 GROUND 10 T806 20DG/VT PRESSURE SIGNAL 7 11 - 12 - 13 - 14 - - 15 T816 20YL/PK LINEAR 3 GROUND 16 T828 20DG/DB TRS 1 SIGNAL 17 T42 20DG/YL TRS T42 SIGNAL 18 T3 20DG/DB TRS T3 SIGNAL 19 T827 20DG/LB TRS DRIVE SIGNAL 20 T824 20YL/DB TRS PARK SIGNAL 21 T826 20DG/DB TRS REVERSE SIGNAL 22 T809 20DG/YL SHIFT 2 CONTROL 23 - 24 - 25 - 26 T807 20DG/WT PRESSURE SIGNAL 8 27 - 28 T820 20YL/WT TEMPERATURE SENSOR GROUND 29 T825 20DG/YL TRS NEUTRAL SIGNAL 30 T821 20YL/GY LINEAR 4 CONTROL 31 T818 20YL/OR LINEAR 4 GROUND Component Location - 31 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Component ID 200 > Page 6042 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > Transmission Control Module - Description Control Module: Description and Operation Transmission Control Module - Description DESCRIPTION On gasoline vehicles the Transmission Control Module (TCM) (2) may be sub-module within the Powertrain Control Module (PCM) (3). Vehicles equipped 68RFE transmission and a 6.7L Diesel engine, the TCM is housed in the NGC4 controller utilizing only the C1 and C4 connectors (TCM only). The controller is located at the rear of the engine compartment, near the right inner fender. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > Transmission Control Module - Description > Page 6045 On Cab Chassis models equipped with the AS68RC transmission the Transmission Control Module (TCM) has three electrical connectors and is located in the passenger compartment underneath of the left side of the dash panel. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > Transmission Control Module - Description > Page 6046 Control Module: Description and Operation Transmission Control Module - Operation OPERATION RLE and RFE TRANSMISSIONS The Transmission Control Module (TCM) controls all electronic operations of the transmission. The TCM receives information regarding vehicle operation from both direct and indirect inputs, and selects the operational mode of the transmission. Direct inputs are hard wired to, and used specifically by the TCM. Indirect inputs are shared with the TCM via the vehicle communication bus. Some examples of direct inputs to the TCM are: - Battery (B+) voltage - Ignition "ON" voltage - Transmission Control Relay (Switched B+) (if equipped) - Throttle Position Sensor - Crankshaft Position Sensor - Transmission Range Sensor - Pressure Switches - Transmission Temperature Sensor - Input Shaft Speed Sensor - Output Shaft Speed Sensor - Line Pressure Sensor Some examples of indirect inputs to the TCM are: - Target Idle - Torque Reduction Confirmation - Engine Coolant Temperature - Ambient/Battery Temperature - Scan Tool Communication Based on the information received from these various inputs, the TCM determines the appropriate shift schedule and shift points, depending on the present operating conditions and driver demand. This is possible through the control of various direct and indirect outputs. Some examples of TCM direct outputs are: - Transmission Control Relay - Solenoids - Torque Reduction Request Some examples of TCM indirect outputs are: - Transmission Temperature (to PCM) - PRNDL Position (to cluster/CCN) In addition to monitoring inputs and controlling outputs, the TCM has other important responsibilities and functions: - Storing and maintaining Clutch Volume Indexes (CVI) - Storing and selecting appropriate Shift Schedules - System self-diagnostics - Diagnostic capabilities (with scan tool) NOTE: If the TCM has been replaced, the "Quick Learn Procedure" must be performed. See: Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Transmission Control Module/TCM Quick Learn BATTERY FEED A fused, direct battery feed to the TCM is used for continuous power. This battery voltage is necessary to retain memory in the TCM. When the battery (B+) is disconnected, this memory is lost. When the battery (B+) is restored, this memory loss is detected by the TCM and a Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) is set. CLUTCH VOLUME INDEXES (CVI) Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > Transmission Control Module - Description > Page 6047 An important function of the TCM is to monitor Clutch Volume Indexes (CVI). CVIs represent the volume of fluid needed to compress a clutch pack. The TCM monitors gear ratio changes by monitoring the Input and Output Speed Sensors. The Input, or Turbine Speed Sensor sends an electrical signal to the TCM that represents input shaft rpm. The Output Speed Sensor provides the TCM with output shaft speed information. By comparing the two inputs, the TCM can determine transmission gear position. This is important to the CVI calculation because the TCM determines CVIs by monitoring how long it takes for a gear change to occur. Gear ratios can be determined by using the Scan Tool and reading the Input/Output Speed Sensor values in the "Monitors" display. Gear ratio can be obtained by dividing the Input Speed Sensor value by the Output Speed Sensor value. For example, if the input shaft is rotating at 1000 rpm and the output shaft is rotating at 500 rpm, then the TCM can determine that the gear ratio is 2:1. In direct drive (3rd gear), the gear ratio changes to 1:1. The gear ratio changes as clutches are applied and released. By monitoring the length of time it takes for the gear ratio to change following a shift request, the TCM can determine the volume of fluid used to apply or release a friction element. The volume of transmission fluid needed to apply the friction elements are continuously updated for adaptive controls. As friction material wears, the volume of fluid need to apply the element increases. Certain mechanical problems within the input clutch assembly can cause inadequate or out-of-range element volumes. Also, defective Input/Output Speed Sensors and wiring can cause these conditions. The following charts identifies the appropriate clutch volumes and when they are monitored/updated: Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > Transmission Control Module - Description > Page 6048 SHIFT SCHEDULES As mentioned earlier, the TCM has programming that allows it to select a variety of shift schedules. Shift schedule selection is dependent on the following: - Shift lever position - Throttle position - Engine load - Fluid temperature - Software level As driving conditions change, the TCM appropriately adjusts the shift schedule. Refer to the following chart to determine the appropriate operation expected, depending on driving conditions. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > Transmission Control Module - Description > Page 6049 AISIN AS68RC TRANSMISSION The Transmission Control Module (TCM) controls all electronic operations of the transmission. The TCM receives information regarding vehicle operation from both direct and indirect inputs, and selects the operational mode of the transmission. Direct inputs are hard wired to, and used specifically by the TCM. Indirect inputs are shared with the TCM via the vehicle communication bus. Some examples of direct inputs to the TCM are: - Battery (B+) voltage - Ignition "ON" voltage - Transmission Range Sensor - Pressure Switches - Transmission Temperature Sensor - Input Speed Sensor - Output Speed Sensor Some examples of indirect inputs to the TCM are: - Engine/Body Identification - Manifold Pressure - Throttle position - Torque Reduction Confirmation - Engine Coolant Temperature - Exhaust Brake Status (if equipped) - PTO Request (if equipped) - Scan Tool Communication Based on the information received from these various inputs, the TCM determines the appropriate shift schedule and shift points, depending on the present operating conditions and driver demand. This is possible through the control of various direct and indirect outputs. Some examples of TCM direct outputs are: - Exhaust Brake Cut Request (if equipped). - Solenoids. - Torque Reduction Request. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > Transmission Control Module - Description > Page 6050 Some examples of TCM.indirect outputs are: - Transmission Temperature (to PCM). - PRNDL Position (to cluster/CCN). - PTO Status. In addition to monitoring inputs and controlling outputs, the TCM has other important responsibilities and functions: - Storing and maintaining Clutch Volume Indexes (CVI). - Storing and selecting appropriate Shift Schedules. - System self-diagnostics. - Diagnostic capabilities (with scan tool). Clutch filling time is continuously maintained when the vehicle is running. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Transmission Control System Relay, A/T > Component Information > Locations Transmission Control System Relay: Locations Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Transmission Control System Relay, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Transmission Control System Relay: Diagram Information and Instructions Warnings WARNINGS - GENERAL WARNINGS provide information to prevent personal injury and vehicle damage. Below is a list of general warnings that should be followed any time a vehicle is being serviced. WARNING: Always wear safety glasses for eye protection. WARNING: Use safety stands anytime a procedure requires being under a vehicle. WARNING: Be sure that the ignition switch always is in the off position, unless the procedure requires it to be on. WARNING: Set the parking brake when working on any vehicle. An automatic transmission should be in park. A manual transmission should be in neutral. WARNING: Operate the engine only in a well-ventilated area. WARNING: Keep away from moving parts when the engine is running, especially the fan and belts. WARNING: To prevent serious burns, avoid contact with hot parts such as the radiator, exhaust manifold(s), tail pipe, catalytic converter and muffler. WARNING: Do not allow flame or sparks near the battery. Gases are always present in and around the battery. WARNING: Always remove rings, watches, loose hanging jewelry and avoid loose clothing. How to Use Wiring Diagrams DESCRIPTION - HOW TO USE WIRING DIAGRAMS DaimlerChrysler Corporation wiring diagrams are designed to provide information regarding the vehicles wiring content. In order to effectively use the wiring diagrams to diagnose and repair DaimlerChrysler Corporation vehicles, it is important to understand all of their features and characteristics. Diagrams are arranged such that the power (B+) side of the circuit is placed near the top of the page, and the ground (B-) side of the circuit is placed near the bottom of the page. All switches, components, and modules are shown in the at rest position with the doors closed and the key removed from the ignition. Components are shown two ways. A solid line around a component indicates that the component is complete. A dashed line around the component indicates that the component is being shown is not complete. Incomplete components have a reference number to indicate the page where the component is shown complete. It is important to realize that no attempt is made on the diagrams to represent components and wiring as they appear on the vehicle. For example, a short piece of wire is treated the same as a long one. In addition, switches and other components are shown as simply as possible, with regard to function only. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Transmission Control System Relay, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6056 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Transmission Control System Relay, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6057 SYMBOLS International symbols are used throughout the wiring diagrams. These symbols are consistent with those being used around the world. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Transmission Control System Relay, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6058 TERMINOLOGY This is a list of terms and definitions used in the wiring diagrams. LHD - Left Hand Drive Vehicles RHD - Right Hand Drive Vehicles ATX - Automatic Transmissions-Front Wheel Drive MTX Manual Transmissions-Front Wheel Drive Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Transmission Control System Relay, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6059 AT - Automatic Transmissions-Rear Wheel Drive MT - Manual Transmissions-Rear Wheel Drive SOHC - Single Over Head Cam Engine DOHC - Double Over Head Cam Engine Export - Vehicles Built For Sale In Markets Other Than North America Except Export - Vehicles Built For Sale In North America Circuit Functions DESCRIPTION - CIRCUIT FUNCTIONS All circuits in the diagrams use an alpha/numeric code to identify the wire and it's function. To identify which circuit code applies to a system, refer to the Circuit Identification Code Chart. This chart shows the main circuits only and does not show the secondary codes that may apply to some models. Circuit Information DESCRIPTION - CIRCUIT INFORMATION Each wire shown in the diagrams contains a code which identifies the main circuit, a specific part of the main circuit, gage of wire, and color. An example would be A 2 18 LB/YL. This is a Battery Feed circuit, level two, eighteen gauge, light blue with a yellow tracer. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Transmission Control System Relay, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6060 Connector, Ground and Splice Information DESCRIPTION - CONNECTOR, GROUND AND SPLICE INFORMATION CAUTION: Not all connectors are serviced. Some connectors are serviced only with a harness. A typical example might be the Supplemental Restraint System connectors. Always check parts availability before attempting a repair. IDENTIFICATION In-line connectors are identified by a number, as follows: - In-line connectors located in the engine compartment are C100 series numbers. - In-line connectors located in the instrument panel area are C200 series numbers. - In-line connectors located in the body are C300 series numbers. - Jumper harness connectors are C400 series numbers. - Grounds and ground connectors are identified with a "G" and follow the same series numbering as the in-line connectors. - Splices are identified with an "S" and follow the same series numbering as the in-line connectors. In addition, S001-S099 numbers are located in the engine compartment. - Component connectors are identified by the component name instead of a number. Multiple connectors on a component use a C1, C2, etc. identifier. LOCATIONS Vehicle/Locations contains the master connector/ground/splice location index charts with hyperlinks to the applicable location illustrations. The illustrations contain the connector name (or number)/ground number/splice number and component identification. The abbreviation T/O is used in the component location section to indicate a point in which the wiring harness branches out to a component. The abbreviation N/S means Not Shown in the illustrations Section Identification and Information DESCRIPTION - SECTION IDENTIFICATION AND INFORMATION The wiring diagrams are grouped into individual sections. If a component is most likely found in a particular group, it will be shown complete (all wires, Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Transmission Control System Relay, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6061 connectors, and pins) within that group. For example, the Auto Shutdown Relay is most likely to be found in Powertrain Management, so it is shown there complete. It can, however, be shown partially in another group if it contains some associated wiring. Splice diagrams show the entire splice and provide references to other sections the splices serves. Splice Information only contains splice diagrams that are not shown in their entirety somewhere else in the wiring diagrams. Connector Pin-Outs shows each connector and the circuits involved with that connector. The connectors are identified using the name/number on the diagram pages. Removal REMOVAL 1. Disconnect battery. 2. Release Connector Lock (2). 3. Disconnect the connector (3) being repaired from its mating half/component. 4. Remove the dress cover (if applicable) (1). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Transmission Control System Relay, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6062 5. Release the Secondary Terminal Lock, if required (1). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Transmission Control System Relay, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6063 6. Position the connector locking finger away from the terminal using the proper special tool. Pull on the wire to remove the terminal from the connector. Installation Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Transmission Control System Relay, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6064 INSTALLATION 1. Insert the removed terminal in the same cavity on the repair connector. 2. Repeat steps for each terminal in the connector, being sure that all wires are inserted into the proper cavities. For additional connector pin-out identification, refer to the wiring diagrams. 3. When the connector is re-assembled, the secondary terminal lock must be placed in the locked position to prevent terminal push out. 4. Replace dress cover (if applicable). 5. Connect connector to its mating half/component. 6. Connect battery and test all affected systems. Removal REMOVAL 1. Disconnect the battery. 2. Locate the diode in the harness, and remove the protective covering. 3. Remove the diode from the harness, pay attention to the current flow direction (1) (2) (3). Installation INSTALLATION 1. Remove the insulation from the wires in the harness. Only remove enough insulation to solder in the new diode. 2. Install the new diode in the harness, making sure current flow is correct. If necessary, refer to the appropriate wiring diagram for current flow. 3. Solder the connection together using rosin core type solder only. Do not use acid core solder. 4. Tape the diode to the harness using electrical tape. Make sure the diode is completely sealed from the elements. 5. Re-connect the battery and test affected systems. Removal REMOVAL 1. Follow steps for removing terminals described in the connector removal section. 2. Cut the wire 6 inches from the back of the connector. Installation INSTALLATION 1. Select a wire from the terminal repair kit that best matches the color and gage of the wire being repaired. 2. Cut the repair wire to the proper length and remove one-half (1/2) inch of insulation. 3. Splice the repair wire to the wire harness (see wire splicing procedure). See: Service Procedures/Wire Splicing 4. Insert the repaired wire into the connector. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Transmission Control System Relay, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6065 5. Install the connector locking wedge, if required, and reconnect the connector to its mating half/component. 6. Re-tape the wire harness starting at 1-1/2 inches behind the connector and 2 inches past the repair. 7. Connect battery and test all affected systems. Wire Splicing STANDARD PROCEDURE - WIRE SPLICING When splicing a wire, it is important that the correct gage be used as shown in the wiring diagrams. 1. Remove one-half (1/2) inch of insulation from each wire that needs to be spliced. 2. Place a piece of adhesive lined heat shrink tubing on one side of the wire. Make sure the tubing will be long enough to cover and seal the entire repair area. 3. Place the strands of wire overlapping each other inside of the splice clip (1). 4. Using crimping tool (1), Mopar p/n 05019912AA, crimp the splice clip and wires together. 5. Solder (3) the connection (2) together using rosin core type solder (1) only. CAUTION: DO NOT USE ACID CORE SOLDER. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Transmission Control System Relay, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6066 6. Center the heat shrink tubing (2) over the joint and heat using a heat gun. Heat the joint until the tubing is tightly sealed and sealant (1) comes out of both ends of the tubing. Special Tools WIRING/TERMINAL PROBING TOOL PACKAGE 6807 TERMINAL PICK TOOL SET 6680 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Transmission Control System Relay, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6067 TERMINAL REMOVING TOOLS 6932 AND 8638 TERMINAL REMOVING TOOL 6934 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Transmission Control System Relay, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6068 Transmission Control System Relay: Diagnostic Aids Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) Sensitive Devices STANDARD PROCEDURE - ELECTROSTATIC DISCHARGE (ESD) SENSITIVE DEVICES All ESD sensitive components are solid state and a symbol is used to indicate this. When handling any component with this symbol, comply with the following procedures to reduce the possibility of electrostatic charge build up on the body and inadvertent discharge into the component. If it is not known whether the part is ESD sensitive, assume that it is. 1. Always touch a known good ground before handling the part. This should be repeated while handling the part and more frequently after sliding across a seat, sitting down from a standing position, or walking a distance. 2. Avoid touching electrical terminals of the part, unless instructed to do so by a written procedure. 3. When using a voltmeter, be sure to connect the ground lead first. 4. Do not remove the part from it's protective packing until it is time to install the part. 5. Before removing the part from it's package, ground the package to a known good ground on the vehicle. Testing Of Voltage Potential STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING OF VOLTAGE POTENTIAL 1. Connect the ground lead of a voltmeter to a known good ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the voltmeter to the selected test point. The vehicle ignition may need to be turned ON to check voltage. Refer to the appropriate test procedure. Testing For Continuity Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Transmission Control System Relay, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6069 STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING FOR CONTINUITY 1. Remove the fuse (1) for the circuit being checked or, disconnect the battery. 2. Connect one lead of the ohmmeter to one side of the circuit being tested 3. Connect the other lead to the other end of the circuit being tested. Low or no resistance means good continuity. Testing For A Short To Ground STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING FOR A SHORT TO GROUND 1. Remove the fuse and disconnect all items involved with the fuse. 2. Connect a test light or a voltmeter across the terminals of the fuse. 3. Starting at the fuse block, wiggle the wiring harness about six to eight inches apart and watch the voltmeter/test lamp. 4. If the voltmeter registers voltage or the test lamp glows, there is a short to ground in that general area of the wiring harness. Testing For A Short To Ground On Fuses Powering Several Loads STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING FOR A SHORT TO GROUND ON FUSES POWERING SEVERAL LOADS 1. Refer to the wiring diagrams and disconnect or isolate all items on the suspected fused circuits. 2. Replace the blown fuse. 3. Supply power to the fuse by turning ON the ignition switch or re-connecting the battery. 4. Start connecting or energizing the items in the fuse circuit one at a time. When the fuse blows the circuit with the short to ground has been isolated. Testing For A Voltage Drop STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING FOR A VOLTAGE DROP Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Transmission Control System Relay, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6070 1. Connect the positive lead of the voltmeter to the side of the circuit closest to the battery. 2. Connect the other lead of the voltmeter to the other side of the switch, component or circuit. 3. Operate the item. 4. The voltmeter will show the difference in voltage between the two points. Troubleshooting Wiring Problems DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING - WIRING HARNESS TROUBLESHOOTING TOOLS When diagnosing a problem in an electrical circuit there are several common tools necessary. These tools are listed and explained below. - Jumper Wire - This is a test wire used to connect two points of a circuit. It can be used to bypass an open in a circuit. WARNING: Never use a jumper wire across a load, such as a motor, connected between a battery feed and ground. - Voltmeter - Used to check for voltage on a circuit. Always connect the black lead to a known good ground and the red lead to the positive side of the circuit. CAUTION: Most of the electrical components used in today's vehicles are Solid State. When checking voltages in these circuits, use a meter with a 10 - megohm or greater impedance rating. - Ohmmeter - Used to check the resistance between two points of a circuit. Low or no resistance in a circuit means good continuity. CAUTION: Most of the electrical components used in today's vehicles are Solid State. When checking resistance in these circuits use a meter with a 10 - megohm or greater impedance rating. In addition, make sure the power is disconnected from the circuit. Circuits that are powered up by the vehicle's electrical system can cause damage to the equipment and provide false readings. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Transmission Control System Relay, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6071 - Probing Tools - These tools are used for probing terminals in connectors. Select the proper size tool from Special Tool Package 6807, and insert the probing end (2) into the terminal being tested. Use the other end of the tool (1) to insert the meter probe. INTERMITTENT AND POOR CONNECTIONS Most intermittent electrical problems are caused by faulty electrical connections or wiring. It is also possible for a sticking component or relay to cause a problem. Before condemning a component or wiring assembly, check the following items. - Connectors are fully seated - Spread terminals, or terminal push out - Terminals in the wiring assembly are fully seated into the connector/component and locked into position - Dirt or corrosion on the terminals. Any amount of corrosion or dirt could cause an intermittent problem - Damaged connector/component casing exposing the item to dirt or moisture - Wire insulation that has rubbed through causing a short to ground - Some or all of the wiring strands broken inside of the insulation - Wiring broken inside of the insulation TROUBLESHOOTING WIRING PROBLEMS When troubleshooting wiring problems there are six steps which can aid in the procedure. The steps are listed and explained below. Always check for non-factory items added to the vehicle before doing any diagnosis. If the vehicle is equipped with these items, disconnect them to verify these add-on items are not the cause of the problem. 1. Verify the problem. 2. Verify any related symptoms. Do this by performing operational checks on components that are in the same circuit. Refer to the wiring diagrams. 3. Analyze the symptoms. Use the wiring diagrams to determine what the circuit is doing, where the problem most likely is occurring and where the diagnosis will continue. 4. Isolate the problem area. 5. Repair the problem area. 6. Verify the proper operation. For this step, check for proper operation of all items on the repaired circuit. Refer to the wiring diagrams. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Transmission Control System Relay, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6072 Transmission Control System Relay: Connector Views Component ID: 246 Component : RELAY-TRANSMISSION Connector: Name : RELAY-TRANSMISSION Color : # of pins : 4 Pin Circuit Description 1 A916 16RD FUSED B(+) 2 T16 16YL TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT 3 F916 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION RELAY OUTPUT 4 Z420 18BK GROUND Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Transmission Control System Relay, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Transmission Control System Relay: Description and Operation Description The Chrysler Corporation does not provide a description of the 545RFE Transmission control Relay for the 4.7/5.7L engine. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Transmission Control System Relay, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 6075 Transmission Control System Relay: Description and Operation Operation The Chrysler Corporation does not provide operation information for the 545RFE Transmission control Relay for the 4.7/5.7L engine platform. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - Transfer Case > Control Module, Transfer Case > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 197 Control Module: Locations Component ID 197 Component ID: 197 Component : MODULE-FINAL DRIVE CONTROL Connector: Name : MODULE-FINAL DRIVE CONTROL Color : # of pins : 50 Qualifier : (POWER WAGON) A-A1 A121 14RD/YL FUSED B(+) A2 T520 16YL/OR FRONT LOCKER SOURCE A3 T526 16YL/WT REAR LOCKER SOURCE A4 Z935 16BK GROUND A5 Z935 16BK GROUND A6 T524 16YL/LG FRONT LOCKER RETURN A7 T528 16YL/GY REAR LOCKER RETURN A8 T521 20YL/BK LOCKER SENSOR SUPPLY A9 T537 20YL/LG LOCKER SWITCH SUPPLY A10 T523 20YL/BK LOCKER SENSOR SUPPLY A11 - A12 - A13 D65 20WT/LG CAN C BUS (+) A14 D64 20WT/LB CAN C BUS (-) B T527 20YL/TN REAR LOCKER SENSOR SENSE B1 T522 20YL/LB FRONT LOCKER SENSOR SENSE B2 T535 20YL/BR LOCKER SWITCH SENSE B3 - B4 - B5 - B6 - B7 F960 20PK/LG FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) B8 T536 20YL/WT SWITCH SUPPLY B9 - B10 - B11 T531 20YL/TN STABILIZER BAR SWITCH SENSE B12 T532 20YL/GY LOCKER OPEN ILLUMINATION SENSE B13 T533 20YL/LB LOCKER REAR ILLUMINATION SENSE B14 T534 20YL LOCKER FR/RR ILLUMINATION SENSE C T530 20YL/DG STABILIZER BAR DISENGAGE ILLUMINATION SENSE C1 T529 20YL/LG STABILIZER BAR ENGAGE ILLUMINATION SENSE C2 - C3 - - Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - Transfer Case > Control Module, Transfer Case > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 197 > Page 6081 C4 - C5 - C6 - C7 - C8 - C9 - C10 - C11 - C12 - C13 - C14 - - D-E-F-G-H-Component Location - 29 Component Location - 28 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - Transfer Case > Control Module, Transfer Case > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 197 > Page 6082 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - Transfer Case > Control Module, Transfer Case > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 197 > Page 6083 Control Module: Locations Component ID 206 Component ID: 206 Component : MODULE-FINAL DRIVE CONTROL Connector: Name : MODULE-FINAL DRIVE CONTROL Color : # of pins : 50 Qualifier : (POWER WAGON) A-A1 A121 14RD/YL FUSED B(+) A2 T520 16YL/OR FRONT LOCKER SOURCE A3 T526 16YL/WT REAR LOCKER SOURCE A4 Z935 16BK GROUND A5 Z935 16BK GROUND A6 T524 16YL/LG FRONT LOCKER RETURN A7 T528 16YL/GY REAR LOCKER RETURN A8 T521 20YL/BK LOCKER SENSOR SUPPLY A9 T537 20YL/LG LOCKER SWITCH SUPPLY A10 T523 20YL/BK LOCKER SENSOR SUPPLY A11 - A12 - A13 D65 20WT/LG CAN C BUS (+) A14 D64 20WT/LB CAN C BUS (-) B T527 20YL/TN REAR LOCKER SENSOR SENSE B1 T522 20YL/LB FRONT LOCKER SENSOR SENSE B2 T535 20YL/BR LOCKER SWITCH SENSE B3 - B4 - B5 - B6 - B7 F960 20PK/LG FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) B8 T536 20YL/WT SWITCH SUPPLY B9 - B10 - B11 T531 20YL/TN STABILIZER BAR SWITCH SENSE B12 T532 20YL/GY LOCKER OPEN ILLUMINATION SENSE B13 T533 20YL/LB LOCKER REAR ILLUMINATION SENSE B14 T534 20YL LOCKER FR/RR ILLUMINATION SENSE C T530 20YL/DG STABILIZER BAR DISENGAGE ILLUMINATION SENSE C1 T529 20YL/LG STABILIZER BAR ENGAGE ILLUMINATION SENSE C2 - C3 - - Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - Transfer Case > Control Module, Transfer Case > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 197 > Page 6084 C4 - C5 - C6 - C7 - C8 - C9 - C10 - C11 - C12 - C13 - C14 - - D-E-F-G-H-Component Location - 29 Component Location - 28 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - Transfer Case > Control Module, Transfer Case > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 197 > Page 6085 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - Transfer Case > Control Module, Transfer Case > Component Information > Diagrams > Component ID 197 Control Module: Diagrams Component ID 197 Component ID: 197 Component : MODULE-FINAL DRIVE CONTROL Connector: Name : MODULE-FINAL DRIVE CONTROL Color : # of pins : 50 Qualifier : (POWER WAGON) A-A1 A121 14RD/YL FUSED B(+) A2 T520 16YL/OR FRONT LOCKER SOURCE A3 T526 16YL/WT REAR LOCKER SOURCE A4 Z935 16BK GROUND A5 Z935 16BK GROUND A6 T524 16YL/LG FRONT LOCKER RETURN A7 T528 16YL/GY REAR LOCKER RETURN A8 T521 20YL/BK LOCKER SENSOR SUPPLY A9 T537 20YL/LG LOCKER SWITCH SUPPLY A10 T523 20YL/BK LOCKER SENSOR SUPPLY A11 - A12 - A13 D65 20WT/LG CAN C BUS (+) A14 D64 20WT/LB CAN C BUS (-) B T527 20YL/TN REAR LOCKER SENSOR SENSE B1 T522 20YL/LB FRONT LOCKER SENSOR SENSE B2 T535 20YL/BR LOCKER SWITCH SENSE B3 - B4 - B5 - B6 - B7 F960 20PK/LG FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) B8 T536 20YL/WT SWITCH SUPPLY B9 - B10 - B11 T531 20YL/TN STABILIZER BAR SWITCH SENSE B12 T532 20YL/GY LOCKER OPEN ILLUMINATION SENSE B13 T533 20YL/LB LOCKER REAR ILLUMINATION SENSE B14 T534 20YL LOCKER FR/RR ILLUMINATION SENSE C T530 20YL/DG STABILIZER BAR DISENGAGE ILLUMINATION SENSE C1 T529 20YL/LG STABILIZER BAR ENGAGE ILLUMINATION SENSE C2 - C3 - - Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - Transfer Case > Control Module, Transfer Case > Component Information > Diagrams > Component ID 197 > Page 6088 C4 - C5 - C6 - C7 - C8 - C9 - C10 - C11 - C12 - C13 - C14 - - D-E-F-G-H-Component Location - 29 Component Location - 28 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - Transfer Case > Control Module, Transfer Case > Component Information > Diagrams > Component ID 197 > Page 6089 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - Transfer Case > Control Module, Transfer Case > Component Information > Diagrams > Component ID 197 > Page 6090 Control Module: Diagrams Component ID 206 Component ID: 206 Component : MODULE-FINAL DRIVE CONTROL Connector: Name : MODULE-FINAL DRIVE CONTROL Color : # of pins : 50 Qualifier : (POWER WAGON) A-A1 A121 14RD/YL FUSED B(+) A2 T520 16YL/OR FRONT LOCKER SOURCE A3 T526 16YL/WT REAR LOCKER SOURCE A4 Z935 16BK GROUND A5 Z935 16BK GROUND A6 T524 16YL/LG FRONT LOCKER RETURN A7 T528 16YL/GY REAR LOCKER RETURN A8 T521 20YL/BK LOCKER SENSOR SUPPLY A9 T537 20YL/LG LOCKER SWITCH SUPPLY A10 T523 20YL/BK LOCKER SENSOR SUPPLY A11 - A12 - A13 D65 20WT/LG CAN C BUS (+) A14 D64 20WT/LB CAN C BUS (-) B T527 20YL/TN REAR LOCKER SENSOR SENSE B1 T522 20YL/LB FRONT LOCKER SENSOR SENSE B2 T535 20YL/BR LOCKER SWITCH SENSE B3 - B4 - B5 - B6 - B7 F960 20PK/LG FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) B8 T536 20YL/WT SWITCH SUPPLY B9 - B10 - B11 T531 20YL/TN STABILIZER BAR SWITCH SENSE B12 T532 20YL/GY LOCKER OPEN ILLUMINATION SENSE B13 T533 20YL/LB LOCKER REAR ILLUMINATION SENSE B14 T534 20YL LOCKER FR/RR ILLUMINATION SENSE C T530 20YL/DG STABILIZER BAR DISENGAGE ILLUMINATION SENSE C1 T529 20YL/LG STABILIZER BAR ENGAGE ILLUMINATION SENSE C2 - C3 - - Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - Transfer Case > Control Module, Transfer Case > Component Information > Diagrams > Component ID 197 > Page 6091 C4 - C5 - C6 - C7 - C8 - C9 - C10 - C11 - C12 - C13 - C14 - - D-E-F-G-H-Component Location - 29 Component Location - 28 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - Transfer Case > Control Module, Transfer Case > Component Information > Diagrams > Component ID 197 > Page 6092 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - Transfer Case > Control Module, Transfer Case > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Control Module: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The Transfer Case Control Module (TCCM) functionality now resides in the Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM), refer to the TIPM information for location and additional information. The TIPM controls the 4X4 transfer case shift functions via the actuation of a shift motor and utilizing the feedback of a mode sensor assembly. Communication is via the CAN bus. Inputs include user selectable 4X4 modes that include 2WD, AWD, 4HI, 4LO, and Neutral (selections vary with the specific transfer case). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - Transfer Case > Control Module, Transfer Case > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 6095 Control Module: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The Transfer Case Control Module (TCCM) functionality in the Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) utilizes the input from the transfer case mounted mode sensor, the instrument panel mounted selector switch, and the following information from the vehicle's CAN bus to determine if a shift is allowed. - Engine RPM and Vehicle Speed - Diagnostic Requests - Manual Transmission and Brake Applied - PRNDL - Ignition Status - ABS Messages Once the TIP determines that a requested shift is allowed, it actuates the bi-directional shift motor as necessary to achieve the desired transfer case operating mode. The TIPM also monitors the mode sensor while controlling the shift motor to determine the status of the shift attempt. Several items can cause the requested shift not to be completed. If the TIPM has recognized a fault (DTC) of some variety, it will begin operation in one of four Functionality Levels. These levels are: - Level Zero - Normal Operation. - Level One - Only Mode Shifts Are Allowed. - Level Two - Only Mode Shifts and Shifts Into LOW Are Allowed (No Neutral Shifts Are Allowed). - Level Three - No Shifts Are Allowed The TIPM can also be operating in one of three possible power modes. These power modes are: - Full Power Mode is the normal operational mode of the module. This mode is achieved by normal CAN bus traffic being present and the ignition being in the RUN position. Reduced Power Mode will be entered when the ignition has been powered off. In this state, the module will shut down power supplied to external devices, and to electronic interface inputs and outputs. From this state the module can enter either Sleep Mode or Full Power Mode. To enter this mode, the module must receive an ignition message denoting that the ignition is off, or not receive any messages for 5 ±0.5 seconds. To exit this mode, the module must receive one ignition message that denotes that the ignition is in the RUN position. - Sleep Mode will be entered, from the Reduced Power Mode, when no CAN traffic has been sensed for 20 ±1 seconds. If during Sleep Mode the module detects CAN bus traffic, it will revert to the Reduced Power mode while monitoring for ignition messages. It will remain in this state as long as there is traffic other than run or start messages, and will return to Sleep mode if the bus goes without traffic for 20 ±1 seconds. SHIFT REQUIREMENTS If the TIPM is in full power mode and at functionality level zero, it uses the following criteria to determine if a shift is allowed. If any of the driver controllable conditions are not met once the shift request is recognized, the TIPM will solidly illuminate the source position's LED and flash the desired position's LED for all shifts except NEUTRAL. The NEUTRAL shift LED strategy will be discussed later. Mode shifts will be allowed regardless of transmission gear or vehicle speed, whenever the following conditions are met: - Front and rear wheel speed are within 21 km/h (13 mph). - A change in the Selector switch state indicates that a mode shift has been requested. - A valid mode sensor signal is being sensed by the TIPM. - Proper transmit/receive messages are occurring on the CAN bus. - Ignition key switch is in the RUN position. Range shifts will be allowed only if all of the following conditions are met: - Front and rear wheel speed are within 21 km/h (13 mph). - A change in the Selector Switch state indicating a range shift has been requested. - Transmission in NEUTRAL signal must be recognized for at least 1.5 seconds ±100 msec. (Automatic transmissions only) - Proper transmit/receive messages are occurring on the CAN bus. - Clutch signal is recognized for 500 msec ± 50 msec (Manual transmissions only). - Vehicle speed is less than or equal to 4.8 km/h (3 mph). - Ignition key switch is in the RUN position. - A valid mode sensor signal is being sensed by the TIPM. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - Transfer Case > Control Module, Transfer Case > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 6096 A shift into transfer case Neutral will be allowed only if all of the following conditions are met: - Front and rear wheel speed are within 21 km/h (13 mph). - The recessed Neutral Selection switch has been depressed continuously for 4.0 seconds ±100 msec while all shift conditions have been continuously met. - Transmission in NEUTRAL signal recognized from the bus. (Automatic transmissions only) - Clutch signal is recognized from the bus (Manual transmissions only). - Proper message transmissions/receptions are occurring on the CAN bus. - Vehicle speed is less than or equal to 4.8 km/h (3 mph). - Ignition key switch is in the RUN position, engine off. - Foot Brake is applied. - A valid mode sensor signal is being sensed by the TIPM. A shift out of transfer case Neutral will be allowed only if all of the following conditions are met: - Front and rear wheel speed are within 21 km/h (13 mph). - The recessed Neutral Selection switch has been depressed continuously for 1.0 seconds ±100 msec while all shift conditions have been continuously met. - Transmission in NEUTRAL signal recognized from the bus.(Automatic transmissions only) - Clutch signal is recognized from the bus (Manual transmissions only). - Proper message transmissions/receptions are occurring on the CAN bus. - Vehicle speed is less than or equal to 4.8 km/h (3 mph). - Ignition key switch is in the RUN position. - Foot Brake is applied. - A valid mode sensor signal is being sensed by the TIPM. SHIFT SEQUENCES Once all the driver controllable conditions for the requested shift have been met, the TIPM begins a shift timer with a maximum duration of 1 second per 'D' channel transition. If the shift timer expires before the TIPM recognizes to correct mode sensor code, the shift is considered to have been blocked. The blocked shift will increment the blocked shift counter by one. The TIPM strategy for handling blocked shifts will be described later. The process the TIPM performs for the various shifts will be described first. RANGE AND MODE SHIFTS The process for performing all the range and mode shifts are the same. The following steps describe the process. - Allow time for Selector Switch debounce; 250 msec ±50 msec. - Extinguish the source gear's LED while flashing desired transfer case position's LED. - Engage the shift motor for a maximum of 1 second ±100 msec per 'D' channel transition in the destination gear's direction while monitoring the mode sensor channel transitions. - Disengage the shift motor when the correct mode sensor code is recognized. - Solidly illuminate the selected gear's LED. - Transmit a bus message that the transfer case shift is complete. - If the desired mode sensor code is not received after the shift timer expires (ie. a blocked or other condition exists), stop driving the motor and wait for 200 msec ±50 msec. The shift motor is then reversed in the direction back toward the source gear for up to 1.0 seconds ±100 msec. per 'D' channel. The TIPM waits for 2.0 seconds ±50 msec. and repeats the attempt to shift to the desired position. The exception to the preceding sequence is when a shift from 4L to 2WD/AWD is requested. If 2WD/AWD is requested from the 4L position, the transfer case is first driven to the 4H position. If the 4H position is reached, the transfer case is then driven back to the 2WD/AWD position and the shift is considered complete. If the transfer case does not reach any the 4H position, but is in the 2WD/AWD 'D' channel, or the 2WD/AWD between gear position on the 4H side of 2WD/AWD, the shift is also considered complete. SHIFT OUT OF NEUTRAL The following steps describe the process for a shift out of NEUTRAL. - Extinguish the Neutral LED. - Engage the shift motor for a maximum of 1 second ±100 msec toward the transfer case 4H mode position while monitoring the mode sensor channel transitions. - Disengage the shift motor when the correct mode sensor code is recognized. - Extinguish the Neutral LED. - Transmit a bus message that the transfer case shift is complete. - If the desired mode sensor code is not received after the shift timer expires (ie. a blocked or other condition exists), stop driving the motor and wait for 200 msec ±50 msec. The shift motor is then reversed in the direction back toward the source gear for up to 1.0 seconds 100 msec. The Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - Transfer Case > Control Module, Transfer Case > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 6097 TIPM waits for 2.0 seconds ±50 msec. and repeats the attempt to shift to the desired position. - When the Neutral button is released, if the 4H position is the desired position, the shift is complete. Illuminate the 4H LED. - Otherwise when the Neutral button is released, if all of the shift requirements are being met then engage the shift motor towards the desired position for 1 second ±100 msec per 'D' channel. (if requirements for shifting are not met, illuminate the 4H LED and flash the destination LED as an indication to the driver that all of the driver controllable shift conditions are not being met). If this requires another range or mode shift, begin the range/mode shift process. - If the desired mode sensor code is not received after the shift timer expires (i.e. a blocked or other condition exists), refer to the Blocked Shift Strategy. BLOCKED SHIFT STRATEGY When a shift is commanded, the shift motor will be driven towards its destination position, except in the case of shifting out of Neutral if 4L was selected (the transfer case will shift to the 4H position first, before proceeding to 4L). If the shift is blocked on the way to the destination, the TIPM may attempt to drive the motor back to the original position. This process will be allowed to occur 5 times. If the transfer case has reached a non-NEUTRAL 'D' channel during the shift re-attempts, the LED for the achieved gear position is illuminated and the shift attempts are stopped. To re-attempt the desired shift, the selector switch will need to be rotated to the current position until the switch debounce timer expires then a shift will need to be requested again. At the end of the 5th blocked attempt, the shift motor is driven towards the last known 'D' channel position. If this motor drive allows the transfer case to reach the 2WD/AWD 'D' channel, or the 2WD/AWD between gear position on the 4H side of 2WD/AWD, the shift is considered complete and the shift attempts are ended. If the mode sensor is in the NEUTRAL region at the expiration of the shift timer, the TIPM will continue to make the shift attempts according to the blocked shift strategy independent of whether or not the driver controlled conditions are met. For shifts from NEUTRAL, if all 5 attempts fail to reach the desired position (which by default is 4H), the motor will be driven to stall in the direction of 4H or 4L, depending on the achieved position. If the transfer case has reached the 2WD/AWD or 4L between gear position nearest the NEUTRAL positions and the shift conditions are no longer being met, the transfer case will be driven toward the corresponding 'D' channel. Otherwise, the transfer case will be driven in the direction opposite the last attempt with the desired target being 4H or 4L. If the transfer case reaches the 2WD/AWD 'D' channel when being driven in the 4H direction, then one final 1.0 second drive toward 4H is attempted. If the transfer case then reaches any of the 4H positions, the shift is considered complete and the 4H LED is illuminated. If the transfer case is still the 2WD/AWD position, the shift is considered complete and the 2WD/AWD LED is illuminated. NOTE: If after the 5th blocked shift and reversal attempt, if the transfer case position is in the NEUTRAL region, shift attempts will continue until a non-NEUTRAL 'D' channel is reached. SHIFT REVERSAL TARGETS If the shift timer expires (1 second per 'D' channel) and the transfer case has not reached the desired position, all shifts will attempt to return to their original position with the exceptions of: - If the intended shift is going to the High rail from Low and can't make it, but it can make the 2WD/AWD position, the motor stops at that position. The TIPM will not attempt to cross back over NEUTRAL if it does not have to. This means that there was a block on the first attempt to go to 4H and the transfer case has made it through NEUTRAL to a known good position, then the motor will go back only to the 2WD/4WD position and execute the remainder of the attempts from there. - For shifts out of NEUTRAL, any time a shift is commanded out of NEUTRAL, the system needs to get out. The TIPM should never go to NEUTRAL unless the driver is commanding it and all required conditions are being met ENCODER DRIFT CORRECTION Whenever a shift is completed, the TIPM stores the position in memory as the transfer case's intended position. The TIPM continuously monitors the mode sensor and if the mode sensor drifts toward into a NEUTRAL region sensor position for 2.0 seconds, the TIPM will perform a motor drive to correct the drift. The transfer case will be driven toward the intended position for 1.0 seconds 100 msec. The TIPM will wait for 2.0 seconds ±50 msec. and repeat the attempt to shift to the desired position. This will continue until the intended position is reached. SHIFT MOTOR BRAKING Two modes of shift motor braking are employed to improve shift performance, static and dynamic. Static shift motor braking is utilized under the following conditions: - Whenever the transfer case is in the 2WD/AWD or 4L 'D' channel position. - Whenever an invalid mode sensor code is present. Static motor braking is achieved by applying +12V on both shift motor wires. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - Transfer Case > Control Module, Transfer Case > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 6098 NOTE: Static Shift Motor Braking is independent of ignition key position. SHIFT ATTEMPT LIMIT To protect the transfer case system, the TIPM will impose a limit on the number of shifts that can occur over a calibrated time period. The system will monitor the number of 'D' channel segment transitions that occur in any 30 second time period. If the number of segment transitions is 30 or greater, the system will go into a default mode. The default mode of operation for shifting is that the number of allowed 'D' channel transitions permitted to occur will be 3 over each 15 second ±100 msec calibrated window of time. After 5 minutes ±100 msec, the motor can be assumed to have cooled down and the system will revert to normal operation. The following rules also apply to the shift limit: - The attempt limit will not prevent shifts coming out of NEUTRAL, they will be allowed regardless of the counter/timer. - Any shift that is in progress when the counter reaches a maximum count in time will be allowed to complete before the default mode is entered. D-channel transitions during this period will not be counted towards the default mode limit. - A block, regardless of the direction, whether towards destination or back towards reversal target (shift timer expiring), will count as a value of 2 transitions towards the 30 segment transitions to go into default mode as defined above. Current attempt limit values are 30 transitions in 30 seconds and default mode values are 3 transitions every 15 seconds for 5 minutes. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Assembly-Line Pressure Sensor/Variable Force Solenoid Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch: Locations Assembly-Line Pressure Sensor/Variable Force Solenoid Component ID: 17 Component : ASSEMBLY-LINE PRESSURE SENSOR/VARIABLE FORCE SOLENOID Connector: Name : ASSEMBLY-LINE PRESSURE SENSOR/VARIABLE FORCE SOLENOID Color : BLACK # of pins : 6 Qualifier : (RLE) Pin Circuit Description 1-2 F856 20YL/PK 5 VOLT SUPPLY 3 T38 20YL/BR LINE PRESSURE SIGNAL 4 K900 20DB/DG SENSOR GROUND 5 T16 18YL/OR TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT 6 T118 20DG LP VFS CONTROL Component Location - 19 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Assembly-Line Pressure Sensor/Variable Force Solenoid > Page 6105 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Assembly-Line Pressure Sensor/Variable Force Solenoid > Page 6106 Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch: Locations Assembly-Transmission Solenoid/Pressure Switch Component ID: 20 Component : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID/PRESSURE SWITCH Connector: Name : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID/PRESSURE SWITCH Color : LT. BROWN # of pins : 10 Qualifier : (RLE) Pin Circuit Description 1 T60 20YL/GY OD CONTROL 2 T59 20YL/LB UD CONTROL 3 T16 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT 4 T19 18YL/DB 2-4 CONTROL 5 T47 18YL/DG 2-4 PRESSURE SIGNAL 6 T9 20DG/TN OD PRESSURE SIGNAL 7 T20 20DG/WT L/R CONTROL 8-9-10 T50 20YL/TN L/R PRESSURE SIGNAL Component Location - 19 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Assembly-Line Pressure Sensor/Variable Force Solenoid > Page 6107 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Assembly-Line Pressure Sensor/Variable Force Solenoid > Page 6108 Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch: Locations Sensor-Line Pressure Component ID: 425 Component : SENSOR-LINE PRESSURE Connector: Name : SENSOR-LINE PRESSURE Color : BLACK # of pins : 4 Qualifier : (RFE) Pin Circuit Description 1 T160 20DG/WT SENSOR GROUND Pin Circuit Description 1 K900 20DB/DG SENSOR GROUND 2 F856 20YL/PK 5 VOLT SUPPLY 3 T38 20YL/BR LINE PRESSURE SIGNAL 4-- Component Location - 23 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Assembly-Line Pressure Sensor/Variable Force Solenoid > Page 6109 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Assembly-Line Pressure Sensor/Variable Force Solenoid Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch: Diagrams Assembly-Line Pressure Sensor/Variable Force Solenoid Component ID: 17 Component : ASSEMBLY-LINE PRESSURE SENSOR/VARIABLE FORCE SOLENOID Connector: Name : ASSEMBLY-LINE PRESSURE SENSOR/VARIABLE FORCE SOLENOID Color : BLACK # of pins : 6 Qualifier : (RLE) Pin Circuit Description 1-2 F856 20YL/PK 5 VOLT SUPPLY 3 T38 20YL/BR LINE PRESSURE SIGNAL 4 K900 20DB/DG SENSOR GROUND 5 T16 18YL/OR TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT 6 T118 20DG LP VFS CONTROL Component Location - 19 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Assembly-Line Pressure Sensor/Variable Force Solenoid > Page 6112 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Assembly-Line Pressure Sensor/Variable Force Solenoid > Page 6113 Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch: Diagrams Assembly-Transmission Solenoid/Pressure Switch Component ID: 20 Component : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID/PRESSURE SWITCH Connector: Name : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID/PRESSURE SWITCH Color : LT. BROWN # of pins : 10 Qualifier : (RLE) Pin Circuit Description 1 T60 20YL/GY OD CONTROL 2 T59 20YL/LB UD CONTROL 3 T16 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT 4 T19 18YL/DB 2-4 CONTROL 5 T47 18YL/DG 2-4 PRESSURE SIGNAL 6 T9 20DG/TN OD PRESSURE SIGNAL 7 T20 20DG/WT L/R CONTROL 8-9-10 T50 20YL/TN L/R PRESSURE SIGNAL Component Location - 19 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Assembly-Line Pressure Sensor/Variable Force Solenoid > Page 6114 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Assembly-Line Pressure Sensor/Variable Force Solenoid > Page 6115 Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch: Diagrams Sensor-Line Pressure Component ID: 425 Component : SENSOR-LINE PRESSURE Connector: Name : SENSOR-LINE PRESSURE Color : BLACK # of pins : 4 Qualifier : (RFE) Pin Circuit Description 1 T160 20DG/WT SENSOR GROUND Pin Circuit Description 1 K900 20DB/DG SENSOR GROUND 2 F856 20YL/PK 5 VOLT SUPPLY 3 T38 20YL/BR LINE PRESSURE SIGNAL 4-- Component Location - 23 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Assembly-Line Pressure Sensor/Variable Force Solenoid > Page 6116 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > 42RLE Automatic Transmission Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch: Description and Operation 42RLE Automatic Transmission Description DESCRIPTION The line pressure sensor (2) is mounted on the top of the valve body, next to the pressure control solenoid (1). The TCM utilizes a closed-loop system to control transmission line pressure. The system contains a variable force style solenoid, the Pressure Control Solenoid. The solenoid is duty cycle controlled by the TCM to vent the unnecessary line pressure supplied by the oil pump back to the sump. The system also contains a variable pressure style sensor, the Line Pressure Sensor, which is a direct input to the TCM. The line pressure solenoid monitors the transmission line pressure and completes the feedback loop to the TCM. The TCM uses this information to adjust its control of the pressure control solenoid to achieve the desired line pressure. Operation OPERATION The TCM calculates the desired line pressure based upon inputs from the transmission and engine. The TCM calculates the torque input to the transmission and uses that information as the primary input to the calculation. The line pressure is set to a predetermined value during shifts and when the transmission is in the PARK and NEUTRAL positions. This is done to ensure consistent shift quality. During all other operation, the actual line pressure is compared to the desired line pressure and adjustments are made to the pressure control solenoid duty cycle. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 6119 Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch: Description and Operation 545RFE Automatic Transmission Description DESCRIPTION The TCM utilizes a closed-loop system to control transmission line pressure. The system contains a variable force style solenoid, the Pressure Control Solenoid, which is part of the pressure switch assembly. The solenoid is duty cycle controlled by the TCM to vent the unnecessary line pressure supplied by the oil pump back to the pump inlet. The system contains a Line Pressure Sensor, which is a direct input to the TCM. The line pressure sensor monitors the transmission line pressure and completes the feedback loop to the TCM. The TCM uses this information to adjust its control of the pressure control solenoid to achieve the desired line pressure. Operation OPERATION The TCM calculates the desired line pressure based upon inputs from the transmission and engine. The TCM calculates the torque input to the transmission and uses that information as the primary input to the calculation. The line pressure is set to a predetermined value during shifts, to ensure consistent shift quality. During all other operation, the desired line pressure value is adjusted based on torque level and other transmission requirements. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 6120 Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch: Description and Operation 68RFE Automatic Transmission Description DESCRIPTION The TCM utilizes a closed-loop system to control transmission line pressure. The system contains a variable force style solenoid, the Pressure Control Solenoid, which is part of the pressure switch assembly. The solenoid is duty cycle controlled by the TCM to vent the unnecessary line pressure supplied by the oil pump back to the pump inlet. The system contains a Line Pressure Sensor, which is a direct input to the TCM. The line pressure sensor monitors the transmission line pressure and completes the feedback loop to the TCM. The TCM uses this information to adjust its control of the pressure control solenoid to achieve the desired line pressure. Operation OPERATION The TCM calculates the desired line pressure based upon inputs from the transmission and engine. The TCM calculates the torque input to the transmission and uses that information as the primary input to the calculation. The line pressure is set to a predetermined value during shifts, to ensure consistent shift quality. During all other operation, the desired line pressure value is adjusted based on torque level and other transmission requirements. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 42RLE Automatic Transmission Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch: Service and Repair 42RLE Automatic Transmission Removal REMOVAL 1. Remove the valve body from the transmission. See: Transmission and Drivetrain/Automatic Transmission/Transaxle/Valve Body/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/42RLE Automatic Transmission/Removal 2. Remove the electrical connectors from the pressure control solenoid (1) and the line pressure sensor (2). 3. Remove the screws (6) holding the pressure control solenoid (1) and line pressure sensor (2) to the valve body. 4. Remove the pressure control solenoid and line pressure sensor from the valve body. Installation INSTALLATION 1. Install the pressure control solenoid (1) and line pressure sensor (2) into the valve body. 2. Install the screws (6) to hold the pressure control solenoid (1) and line pressure sensor (2) to the valve body. 3. Install the electrical connectors to the pressure control solenoid (1) and the line pressure sensor (2). 4. Install the valve body into the transmission. See: Transmission and Drivetrain/Automatic Transmission/Transaxle/Valve Body/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/42RLE Automatic Transmission/Installation Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 6123 Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch: Service and Repair 545RFE Automatic Transmission Removal REMOVAL 1. Raise vehicle. 2. Place a suitable fluid catch pan under the transmission. 3. Remove the wiring connector from the line pressure sensor (2). 4. Remove the bolt holding the line pressure sensor (2) to the transmission case. 5. Remove the line pressure sensor (2) from the transmission case. Installation INSTALLATION 1. Install the line pressure sensor (2) into the transmission case. 2. Install the bolt to hold the line pressure sensor (2) into the transmission case. Tighten the bolt to 12 Nm (105 in.lbs.). 3. Install the wiring connector onto the line pressure sensor (2). 4. Verify the transmission fluid level. Add fluid as necessary. 5. Lower vehicle. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 6124 Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch: Service and Repair 68RFE Automatic Transmission Removal REMOVAL 1. Raise vehicle. 2. Place a suitable fluid catch pan under the transmission. 3. Remove the wiring connector from the line pressure sensor (2). 4. Remove the bolt holding the line pressure sensor (2) to the transmission case. 5. Remove the line pressure sensor (2) from the transmission case. Installation INSTALLATION 1. Install the line pressure sensor (2) into the transmission case. 2. Install the bolt to hold the line pressure sensor (2) into the transmission case. Tighten the bolt to 12 Nm (105 in.lbs.). 3. Install the wiring connector onto the line pressure sensor (2). 4. Verify the transmission fluid level. Add fluid as necessary. 5. Lower vehicle. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Overdrive Switch, A/T > Component Information > Locations Overdrive Switch: Locations Component ID: 514 Component : SWITCH-TOW/HAUL OVERDRIVE OFF Connector: Name : SWITCH-TOW/HAUL OVERDRIVE OFF Color : NATURAL # of pins : 6 Pin Circuit Description 123 T6 20DG TOW/HAUL OVERDRIVE OFF SWITCH SIGNAL 4 Z71 20LB/BK GROUND 5 T5 20DG/YL AUTOSTICK (ERS)-TOW/HAUL SIGNAL 6 T160 20DG/WT SENSOR GROUND Component Location - 47 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Overdrive Switch, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 6128 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Overdrive Switch, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 6129 Overdrive Switch: Diagrams Component ID: 514 Component : SWITCH-TOW/HAUL OVERDRIVE OFF Connector: Name : SWITCH-TOW/HAUL OVERDRIVE OFF Color : NATURAL # of pins : 6 Pin Circuit Description 123 T6 20DG TOW/HAUL OVERDRIVE OFF SWITCH SIGNAL 4 Z71 20LB/BK GROUND 5 T5 20DG/YL AUTOSTICK (ERS)-TOW/HAUL SIGNAL 6 T160 20DG/WT SENSOR GROUND Component Location - 47 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Overdrive Switch, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 6130 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Overdrive Switch, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 6131 Overdrive Switch: Testing and Inspection DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING - OVERDRIVE ELECTRICAL CONTROLS The tow/haul overdrive off switch, valve body solenoid, case connectors and related wiring can all be tested with a 12 volt test lamp or a volt/ohmmeter. Check continuity of each component when diagnosis indicates this is necessary. Switch and solenoid continuity should be checked whenever the transmission fails to shift into fourth gear range. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Overdrive Switch, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 42RLE Automatic Transmission Overdrive Switch: Service and Repair 42RLE Automatic Transmission Removal REMOVAL 1. Using a plastic trim tool, remove the tow/haul overdrive off switch retainer (2) from the shift lever (1). 2. Pull the switch (2) outwards to release it from the connector in the lever (1). Installation INSTALLATION NOTE: There is enough slack in the wire to pull out the connector from the lever. 1. Pull the connector (2) out of the lever (1) just enough to grasp it. CAUTION: Be careful not to bend the pins on the tow/haul overdrive off switch. Use care when installing the switch, as it is not indexed, and can be accidentally installed incorrectly. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Overdrive Switch, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 6134 2. Install the tow/haul overdrive off switch (3) into the connector (2). 3. Push the tow/haul overdrive off switch (3) and wiring into the shift lever (1). 4. Install the tow/haul overdrive off switch retainer onto the shift lever. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Overdrive Switch, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 6135 Overdrive Switch: Service and Repair 545RFE Automatic Transmission Removal REMOVAL 1. Using a plastic trim tool, remove the tow/haul overdrive off switch retainer (2) from the shift lever (1). 2. Pull the switch (2) outwards to release it from the connector in the lever (1). Installation INSTALLATION NOTE: There is enough slack in the wire to pull out the connector from the lever. 1. Pull the connector (2) out of the lever (1) just enough to grasp it. CAUTION: Be careful not to bend the pins on the tow/haul overdrive off switch. Use care when installing the switch, as it is not indexed, and can be accidentally installed incorrectly. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Overdrive Switch, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 6136 2. Install the tow/haul overdrive off switch (3) into the connector (2). 3. Push the tow/haul overdrive off switch (3) and wiring into the shift lever (1). 4. Install the tow/haul overdrive off switch retainer onto the shift lever. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Overdrive Switch, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 6137 Overdrive Switch: Service and Repair 48RE Automatic Transmission Removal REMOVAL 1. Using a plastic trim tool, remove the tow/haul overdrive off switch retainer (2) from the shift lever (1). 2. Pull the switch (2) outwards to release it from the connector in the lever (1). Installation INSTALLATION NOTE: There is enough slack in the wire to pull out the connector from the lever. 1. Pull the connector (2) out of the lever (1) just enough to grasp it. CAUTION: Be careful not to bend the pins on the tow/haul overdrive off switch. Use care when installing the switch, as it is not indexed, and can be accidentally installed incorrectly. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Overdrive Switch, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 6138 2. Install the tow/haul overdrive off switch (3) into the connector (2). 3. Push the tow/haul overdrive off switch (3) and wiring into the shift lever (1). 4. Install the tow/haul overdrive off switch retainer onto the shift lever. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Overdrive Switch, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 6139 Overdrive Switch: Service and Repair AS68RC Automatic Transmission Removal REMOVAL 1. Using a plastic trim tool, remove the tow/haul overdrive off switch retainer (2) from the shift lever (1). 2. Pull the switch (2) outwards to release it from the connector in the lever (1). Installation INSTALLATION NOTE: There is enough slack in the wire to pull out the connector from the lever. 1. Pull the connector (2) out of the lever (1) just enough to grasp it. CAUTION: Be careful not to bend the pins on the tow/haul overdrive off switch. Use care when installing the switch, as it is not indexed, and can be accidentally installed incorrectly. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Overdrive Switch, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 6140 2. Install the tow/haul overdrive off switch (3) into the connector (2). 3. Push the tow/haul overdrive off switch (3) and wiring into the shift lever (1). 4. Install the tow/haul overdrive off switch retainer onto the shift lever. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Shift Solenoid Position Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Shift Solenoid Position Sensor/Switch: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The transmission solenoid/TRS assembly is internal to the transmission and mounted on the valve body assembly. The assembly consists of six solenoids that control hydraulic pressure to the six friction elements (transmission clutches), and the torque converter clutch. The pressure control solenoid is located on the side of the solenoid/TRS assembly. The solenoid/TRS assembly also contains the Transmission Range Sensor (TRS) and five pressure switches that feed information to the TCM. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Shift Solenoid Position Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 6145 Shift Solenoid Position Sensor/Switch: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION SOLENOIDS Solenoids are used to control the L/R, 2C, 4C, OD, and UD friction elements. The reverse clutch is controlled by line pressure and the position of the manual valve in the valve body. All the solenoids are contained within the Solenoid and Pressure Switch Assembly. The solenoid and pressure switch assembly contains one additional solenoid, Multi-Select (MS), which serves primarily to provide 2nd and 3rd gear limp-in operation. The solenoids receive electrical power from the Transmission Control Relay through a single wire. The TCM energizes or operates the solenoids individually by grounding the return wire of the solenoid as necessary. When a solenoid is energized, the solenoid valve shifts, and a fluid passage is opened or closed (vented or applied), depending on its default operating state. The result is an apply or release of a frictional element. The MS and UD solenoids are normally applied to allow transmission limp-in in the event of an electrical failure. The continuity of the solenoids and circuits are periodically tested. Each solenoid is turned on or off depending on its current state. An inductive spike should be detected by the TCM during this test. If no spike is detected, the circuit is tested again to verify the failure. In addition to the periodic testing, the solenoid circuits are tested if a speed ratio or pressure switch error occurs. PRESSURE SWITCHES The TCM relies on five pressure switches to monitor fluid pressure in the L/R, 2C, 4C, UD, and OD hydraulic circuits. The primary purpose of these switches is to help the TCM detect when clutch circuit hydraulic failures occur. The switches close at 23 psi and open at 11 psi, and simply indicate whether or not pressure exists. The switches are continuously monitored by the TCM for the correct states (open or closed) in each gear as shown in the following charts and 545RFE PRESSURE SWITCH STATES: A Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) will set if the TCM senses any switch open or closed at the wrong time in a given gear. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Shift Solenoid Position Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Shift Solenoid Position Sensor/Switch: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL NOTE: If the Transmission Solenoid/TRS Assembly is being replaced, the Quick Learn Procedure must be performed. See: Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Transmission Control Module/TCM Quick Learn 1. Remove the valve body from the transmission. See: Transmission and Drivetrain/Automatic Transmission/Transaxle/Valve Body/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/545RFE Automatic Transmission/Removal 2. Remove the bolts (1) holding the transmission solenoid/TRS assembly onto the valve body. 3. Separate the transmission solenoid/TRS assembly from the valve body. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Shift Solenoid Position Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 6148 Shift Solenoid Position Sensor/Switch: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION 1. Place TRS selector plate in the PARK position. 2. Position the transmission solenoid/TRS assembly onto the valve body. Be sure that both alignment dowels are fully seated in the valve body and that the TRS switch contacts are properly positioned in the selector plate 3. Install the bolts (1) to hold the transmission solenoid/TRS assembly onto the valve body. 4. Tighten the solenoid assembly screws adjacent to the arrows cast into the bottom of the valve body first. Tighten the screws to 6 Nm (50 in.lbs.). 5. Tighten the remainder of the solenoid assembly screws to 6 Nm (50 in.lbs.). 6. Install the valve body into the transmission. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Transmission Range Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Locations Sensor-Transmission Range Component ID: 444 Component : SENSOR-TRANSMISSION RANGE Connector: Name : SENSOR-TRANSMISSION RANGE Color : # of pins : 10 Qualifier : (RC) Pin Circuit Description 1 T825 20DG/YL TRS NEUTRAL SIGNAL 2 T3 20DG/DB TRS T3 SIGNAL 3 T828 20DG/DB TRS 1 SIGNAL 4 F1 20PK/WT FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (OFF-RUN-START) 5 T824 20YL/DB TRS PARK SIGNAL 6 Z157 16BK/LG GROUND 7 T42 20DG/YL TRS T42 SIGNAL 8 T827 20DG/LB TRS DRIVE SIGNAL 9 T826 20DG/DB TRS REVERSE SIGNAL 10 T41 20YL/DB TRS T41 SIGNAL (P/N) Component Location - 20 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Transmission Range > Page 6153 Component Location - 19 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Transmission Range > Page 6154 Component Location - 26 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Transmission Range > Page 6155 Connector: Name : SENSOR-TRANSMISSION RANGE Color : # of pins : 6 Qualifier : (RE) Pin Circuit Description 1-2 T117 20DG/YL TRS SIGNAL 3-4-- Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Transmission Range > Page 6156 5 T917 20YL/TN TRS RETURN 6 T41 20YL/DB TRS T41 SIGNAL (P/N) Component Location - 20 Component Location - 19 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Transmission Range > Page 6157 Component Location - 26 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Transmission Range > Page 6158 Connector: Name : SENSOR-TRANSMISSION RANGE Color : LT. GREEN # of pins : 10 Qualifier : (RLE) Pin Circuit Description 1 T16 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT 2-3 K900 20DB/DG SENSOR GROUND 4 T54 20DG/OR TRANSMISSION TEMPERATURE SIGNAL Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Transmission Range > Page 6159 5-6-7 T1 20DG/LB TRS T1 SIGNAL 8 T3 20DG/DB TRS T3 SIGNAL 9 T42 20DG/YL TRS T42 SIGNAL 10 T41 20YL/DB TRS T41 SIGNAL (P/N) Component Location - 20 Component Location - 19 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Transmission Range > Page 6160 Component Location - 26 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Transmission Range > Page 6161 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Transmission Range > Page 6162 Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Locations Assembly-Transmission Solenoid/TRS Component ID: 21 Component : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID/TRS Connector: Name : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID/TRS Color : BLACK # of pins : 23 Qualifier : (RFE) Pin Circuit Description 1-2 T20 20DG/WT L/R CONTROL 3-4 T41 20YL/DB TRS T41 SIGNAL (P/N) 5 T42 20DG/YL TRS T42 SIGNAL 6-- 7 T60 20YL/GY OD SOLENOID CONTROL 8 T3 20DG/DB TRS T3 SIGNAL 9 T1 20DG/LB TRS T1 SIGNAL 10 T16 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT 11 T48 20BR/YL 4C PRESSURE SIGNAL 12 T118 20DG LINE PRESSURE CONTROL 13 T4 20DG/RD TRS T2 SIGNAL 13 T4 20DG/LB TRS T2 SIGNAL 14 T50 20DG/PK L/R PRESSURE SIGNAL 14 T50 20YL/TN L/R PRESSURE SIGNAL 15 T147 20DG/YL 2C PRESSURE SIGNAL 16 T9 20DG/TN OD PRESSURE SIGNAL 17 T59 20YL/LB UD CONTROL 18 T29 20YL/WT UD PRESSURE SIGNAL 19 T259 20YL/DG 4C CONTROL 20 T219 20YL/LG 2C CONTROL 21 T140 20YL/GY MS CONTROL 22 T160 20DG/WT SENSOR GROUND 22 K900 20DB/DG SENSOR GROUND 23 T54 20DG/OR TRANSMISSION TEMPERATURE SIGNAL Component Location - 21 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Transmission Range > Page 6163 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Transmission Range Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Diagrams Sensor-Transmission Range Component ID: 444 Component : SENSOR-TRANSMISSION RANGE Connector: Name : SENSOR-TRANSMISSION RANGE Color : # of pins : 10 Qualifier : (RC) Pin Circuit Description 1 T825 20DG/YL TRS NEUTRAL SIGNAL 2 T3 20DG/DB TRS T3 SIGNAL 3 T828 20DG/DB TRS 1 SIGNAL 4 F1 20PK/WT FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (OFF-RUN-START) 5 T824 20YL/DB TRS PARK SIGNAL 6 Z157 16BK/LG GROUND 7 T42 20DG/YL TRS T42 SIGNAL 8 T827 20DG/LB TRS DRIVE SIGNAL 9 T826 20DG/DB TRS REVERSE SIGNAL 10 T41 20YL/DB TRS T41 SIGNAL (P/N) Component Location - 20 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Transmission Range > Page 6166 Component Location - 19 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Transmission Range > Page 6167 Component Location - 26 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Transmission Range > Page 6168 Connector: Name : SENSOR-TRANSMISSION RANGE Color : # of pins : 6 Qualifier : (RE) Pin Circuit Description 1-2 T117 20DG/YL TRS SIGNAL 3-4-- Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Transmission Range > Page 6169 5 T917 20YL/TN TRS RETURN 6 T41 20YL/DB TRS T41 SIGNAL (P/N) Component Location - 20 Component Location - 19 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Transmission Range > Page 6170 Component Location - 26 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Transmission Range > Page 6171 Connector: Name : SENSOR-TRANSMISSION RANGE Color : LT. GREEN # of pins : 10 Qualifier : (RLE) Pin Circuit Description 1 T16 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT 2-3 K900 20DB/DG SENSOR GROUND 4 T54 20DG/OR TRANSMISSION TEMPERATURE SIGNAL Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Transmission Range > Page 6172 5-6-7 T1 20DG/LB TRS T1 SIGNAL 8 T3 20DG/DB TRS T3 SIGNAL 9 T42 20DG/YL TRS T42 SIGNAL 10 T41 20YL/DB TRS T41 SIGNAL (P/N) Component Location - 20 Component Location - 19 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Transmission Range > Page 6173 Component Location - 26 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Transmission Range > Page 6174 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Transmission Range > Page 6175 Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Diagrams Assembly-Transmission Solenoid/TRS Component ID: 21 Component : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID/TRS Connector: Name : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID/TRS Color : BLACK # of pins : 23 Qualifier : (RFE) Pin Circuit Description 1-2 T20 20DG/WT L/R CONTROL 3-4 T41 20YL/DB TRS T41 SIGNAL (P/N) 5 T42 20DG/YL TRS T42 SIGNAL 6-- 7 T60 20YL/GY OD SOLENOID CONTROL 8 T3 20DG/DB TRS T3 SIGNAL 9 T1 20DG/LB TRS T1 SIGNAL 10 T16 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT 11 T48 20BR/YL 4C PRESSURE SIGNAL 12 T118 20DG LINE PRESSURE CONTROL 13 T4 20DG/RD TRS T2 SIGNAL 13 T4 20DG/LB TRS T2 SIGNAL 14 T50 20DG/PK L/R PRESSURE SIGNAL 14 T50 20YL/TN L/R PRESSURE SIGNAL 15 T147 20DG/YL 2C PRESSURE SIGNAL 16 T9 20DG/TN OD PRESSURE SIGNAL 17 T59 20YL/LB UD CONTROL 18 T29 20YL/WT UD PRESSURE SIGNAL 19 T259 20YL/DG 4C CONTROL 20 T219 20YL/LG 2C CONTROL 21 T140 20YL/GY MS CONTROL 22 T160 20DG/WT SENSOR GROUND 22 K900 20DB/DG SENSOR GROUND 23 T54 20DG/OR TRANSMISSION TEMPERATURE SIGNAL Component Location - 21 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Transmission Range > Page 6176 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > 42RLE Automatic Transmission Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Description and Operation 42RLE Automatic Transmission Description DESCRIPTION The Transmission Range Sensor (TRS) (2) is mounted to the top of the valve body inside the transmission and can only be serviced by removing the valve body assembly. The electrical connector extends through the transmission case. The Transmission Range Sensor (TRS) has four switch contacts that monitor shift lever position and send the information to the PCM. Operation OPERATION The Transmission Range Sensor (TRS) communicates shift lever position (SLP) to the TCM as a combination of open and closed switches. Each shift lever position has an assigned combination of switch states (open/closed) that the TCM receives from four sense circuits. The TCM interprets this information and determines the appropriate transmission gear position and shift schedule. Since there are four switches, there are 16 possible combinations of open and closed switches (codes). Seven of these codes are related to gear position and three are recognized as "between gear" codes. This results in six codes which should never occur. These are called "invalid" codes. An invalid code will result in a DTC, and the TCM will then determine the shift lever position based on pressure switch data. This allows reasonably normal transmission operation with a TRS failure. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 6179 Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Description and Operation 545RFE Automatic Transmission Description DESCRIPTION The Transmission Range Sensor (TRS) is part of the solenoid module, which is mounted to the top of the valve body inside the transmission. The Transmission Range Sensor (TRS) has five switch contact pins that: - Determine shift lever position - Supply ground to the Starter Relay in Park and Neutral only. - Supply +12 V to the backup lamps in Reverse only. The TRS also has an integrated temperature sensor (thermistor) that communicates transmission temperature to the TCM and PCM. Operation OPERATION The Transmission Range Sensor (TRS) communicates shift lever position to the TCM as a combination of open and closed switches. Each shift lever position has an assigned combination of switch states (open/closed) that the TCM receives from four sense circuits. The TCM interprets this information and determines the appropriate transmission gear position and shift schedule. There are many possible combinations of open and closed switches (codes). Seven of these possible codes are related to gear position and five are recognized as "between gear" codes. This results in many codes which should never occur. These are called "invalid" codes. An invalid code will result in a DTC, and the TCM will then determine the shift lever position based on pressure switch data. This allows reasonably normal transmission operation with a TRS failure. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 6180 Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Description and Operation 68RFE Automatic Transmission Description DESCRIPTION The Transmission Range Sensor (TRS) is part of the solenoid module, which is mounted to the top of the valve body inside the transmission. The Transmission Range Sensor (TRS) has five switch contact pins that: - Determine shift lever position - Supply ground to the Starter Relay in Park and Neutral only. The TRS also has an integrated temperature sensor (thermistor) that communicates transmission temperature to the TCM and PCM. Operation OPERATION The Transmission Range Sensor (TRS) communicates shift lever position to the TCM as a combination of open and closed switches. Each shift lever position has an assigned combination of switch states (open/closed) that the TCM receives from four sense circuits. The TCM interprets this information and determines the appropriate transmission gear position and shift schedule. There are many possible combinations of open and closed switches (codes). Five of these possible codes correspond to valid gear position, there are two codes for the neutral position and three are recognized as "between gear" codes. This results in many codes which should never occur. These are called "invalid" codes. An invalid code will result in a DTC, and the TCM will then determine the shift lever position based on pressure switch data. This allows reasonably normal transmission operation with a TRS failure. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 6181 Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Description and Operation 48RE Automatic Transmission Description DESCRIPTION The Transmission Range Sensor (TRS) has 3 primary functions: - Provide a PARK/NEUTRAL start signal to the engine controller and the starter relay. - Turn the Back-up lamps on when the transmission is in REVERSE and the engine (ignition) is on. - Provide a transmission range signal to the instrument cluster. The sensor is mounted in the transmission housing near the valve body, just above the pan rail. It's in the same position as the Park/Neutral switch on other transmissions. The TRS contacts a cammed surface on the manual valve lever. The cammed surface translates the rotational motion of the manual lever into the linear motion of the sensor. The cammed surface on the manual lever is comprised of two parts controlling the TRS signal: The insulator portion contacts the switch poppet when the manual lever is not in PARK or NEUTRAL. The manual lever itself contacts the poppet when the lever is in PARK or NEUTRAL; providing a ground for the signal from the starter relay and the appropriate engine controller. Operation OPERATION Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 6182 As the switch moves through its linear motion contacts slide across a circuit board which changes the resistance between the range sensing pins of the switch. A power supply on the instrument cluster provides a regulated voltage signal to the switch. The return signal is decoded by the cluster, which then controls the PRNDL display to correspond with the correct transmission range. A bus message of transmission range is also sent by the cluster. In REVERSE range a second contact set closes the circuit providing power to the reverse lamps. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 6183 Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Description and Operation AS68RC Automatic Transmission Description DESCRIPTION TRANSMISSION RANGE SENSOR The transmission range sensor (1) is mounted externally on the left side of the transmission case. Operation OPERATION The transmission range sensor prohibits the vehicle from starting in any gear other than park and neutral. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 6184 Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Testing and Inspection DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING - TRANSMISSION RANGE SENSOR (TRS) NOTE: For all circuit identification in the following steps, Refer to the appropriate Wiring Information. 1. Raise vehicle on suitable hoist. 2. Disconnect the vehicle's shift cable from the manual lever. 3. With the manual lever in the PARK position (the PARK position is with the manual lever moved to the full rearward position), measure the resistance between the Park/Neutral Position Sense pin of the TRS and the transmission case. The resistance should be less than 5 ohms. 4. With the manual lever in the NEUTRAL position (the NEUTRAL position is with the manual lever moved two detents forward of the full rearward position), measure the resistance between the Park/Neutral Position Sense pin of the TRS and the transmission case. The resistance should be less than 5 ohms. 5. If the resistance is greater than 5 ohms in either of the previous steps, check for a dirty contact between the tip of the TRS rod and the valve body manual lever. If the contact is OK, replace the TRS. 6. With the manual lever in the REVERSE position (the REVERSE position is with the manual lever moved one detent forward of the full rearward position), measure the resistance between the Fused Ignition Switch Output and the Back-up Lamp feed pins of the TRS. The resistance should be less than 5 ohms. If the resistance is greater than 5 ohms, replace the TRS. 7. With the manual lever in the PARK position (the PARK position is with the manual lever moved to the full rearward position), measure the resistance between the Transmission Range Sensor MUX and the Transmission Range Sensor 5V Supply pins of the TRS. The resistance should be 522.2 ohms. If the resistance is not correct, replace the TRS. 8. With the manual lever in the REVERSE position (the REVERSE position is with the manual lever moved one detent forward of the full rearward position), measure the resistance between the Transmission Range Sensor MUX and the Transmission Range Sensor 5V Supply pins of the TRS. The resistance should be 206.2 ohms. If the resistance is not correct, replace the TRS. 9. With the manual lever in the NEUTRAL position (the NEUTRAL position is with the manual lever moved two detents forward of the full rearward position), measure the resistance between the Transmission Range Sensor MUX and the Transmission Range Sensor 5V Supply pins of the TRS. The resistance should be 108.6 ohms. If the resistance is not correct, replace the TRS. 10. With the manual lever in the DRIVE position (the DRIVE position is with the manual lever moved three detents forward of the full rearward position), measure the resistance between the Transmission Range Sensor MUX and the Transmission Range Sensor 5V Supply pins of the TRS. The resistance should be 59.9 ohms. If the resistance is not correct, replace the TRS. 11. With the manual lever in the SECOND position (the SECOND position is with the manual lever moved one detent rearward of the full forward position), measure the resistance between the Transmission Range Sensor MUX and the Back-up Lamp feed pins of the TRS. The resistance should be 31.9 ohms. If the resistance is not correct, replace the TRS. 12. With the manual lever in the LOW position (the LOW position is with the manual lever moved to the full forward position), measure the resistance between the Transmission Range Sensor MUX and the Back-up Lamp feed pins of the TRS. The resistance should be 13.7 ohms. If the resistance is not correct, replace the TRS. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 42RLE Automatic Transmission Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Service and Repair 42RLE Automatic Transmission Removal REMOVAL 1. Remove valve body assembly from vehicle. See: Transmission and Drivetrain/Automatic Transmission/Transaxle/Valve Body/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/42RLE Automatic Transmission/Removal 2. Remove the manual shaft seal (1). 3. Remove manual shaft/TRS retaining screw (1). 4. Slide TRS off of manual valve shaft. Installation INSTALLATION Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 6187 1. Install the TRS (2) to the manual shaft. Make sure TRS locating pin rests in manual valve bore slot. 2. Install the TRS/manual shaft retaining screw (1) and torque to 5 Nm (45 in. lbs.) torque. 3. Install the manual shaft seal (1). 4. Install valve body to the transmission. See: Transmission and Drivetrain/Automatic Transmission/Transaxle/Valve Body/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/42RLE Automatic Transmission/Installation Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 6188 Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Service and Repair 48RE Automatic Transmission Removal REMOVAL 1. Raise vehicle and position drain pan under the transmission range sensor (TRS). 2. Move the transmission manual lever to the manual LOW position. The manual LOW position is with the manual lever in the forward-most detent. 3. Disengage the wiring connector from the TRS. 4. Remove the two screws holding the TRS to the TRS mounting bracket. 5. Remove the TRS (3) from the TRS mounting bracket by pulling it straight out of the bracket. 6. If necessary, loosen the TRS mounting bracket (2) in the transmission case using Adapter 8581 (3). 7. If necessary, remove the TRS mounting bracket (2) from the transmission case. Installation INSTALLATION Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 6189 1. Move the transmission manual shaft lever to the manual LOW position. 2. If necessary, install the TRS mounting bracket (2) into the transmission case. Using Adapter 8581 (3), tighten the mounting bracket to 34 Nm (300 in.lbs.). 3. Install the TRS (3) into the mounting bracket (2) with the wiring connector facing the front of the transmission. 4. Install the two screws to hold the TRS to the mounting bracket. Tighten the screws to 5 Nm (45 in.lbs.). 5. Verify proper sensor operation (1-4). 6. Move the transmission manual shaft lever to the PARK position. 7. Connect TRS wiring connector to the TRS and lower vehicle. 8. Refill the transmission fluid to the correct level. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 6190 Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Service and Repair AS68RC Automatic Transmission Removal REMOVAL NOTE: Be certain the transmission is in the park lock position. TRANSMISSION RANGE SENSOR 1. Remove the shift cable from the manual shift lever (2). 2. Disconnect the wire harness from the transmission range sensor. 3. Remove the two nuts (3) from the control shaft. TRS REMOVAL/INSTALLATION Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 6191 4. Pry open the tabs on the stake washer (5), remove the nut (3) and the stake washer (5). 5. Remove the bolts (2). 6. Remove the transmission range sensor (1) from the transmission control shaft (4). Installation INSTALLATION 1. Install the transmission range sensor (3) onto the control shaft (5). 2. Install the stake washer and the nut (4) and hand tighten. 3. With the transmission in neutral install the alignment tool 9983 (6) onto the control shaft (5) and into the alignment hole (1). 4. Install the bolts (2). 5. After aligning the transmission range sensor, tighten the bolts (2) 12.5 Nm (9 ft.lbs.) 6. Remove the alignment tool 9983 (6) 7. Tighten the control shaft nut to 7 Nm (62 in.lbs.) 8. Bend the tabs on the stake washer and nut (4) in at least two places to lock in position. TRANSMISSION RANGE SENSOR Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 6192 9. Install the manual shift lever (2) onto the control shaft. 10. Install the inner nut (3) onto the control shaft. Tighten the inner nut to 12.5 Nm (9 ft.lbs). 11. Install the outer nut (3) onto the control shaft. While holding the inner nut, tighten the outer not to 12.5 Nm (9 ft.lbs) Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Input Speed Transmission Speed Sensor: Locations Sensor-Input Speed Component ID 399 Component ID: 399 Component : SENSOR-INPUT SPEED Connector: Name : SENSOR-INPUT SPEED Color : # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (RC) Pin Circuit Description 1 T52 20DG/OR INPUT SPEED SIGNAL 2 T72 20YL/DB 8 VOLT SUPPLY Component Location - 21 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 6197 Component Location - 19 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 6198 Component Location - 26 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 6199 Connector: Name : SENSOR-INPUT SPEED Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (RFE/RLE) Pin Circuit Description 1 T52 20DG/OR INPUT SPEED SIGNAL 2 T13 20DG/VT SPEED SENSOR GROUND Component Location - 21 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 6200 Component Location - 19 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 6201 Component Location - 26 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 6202 Component ID 420 Component ID: 420 Component : SENSOR-INPUT SPEED Connector: Name : SENSOR-INPUT SPEED Color : # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (RC) Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 6203 Pin Circuit Description 1 T52 20DG/OR INPUT SPEED SIGNAL 2 T72 20YL/DB 8 VOLT SUPPLY Component Location - 21 Component Location - 19 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 6204 Component Location - 26 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 6205 Connector: Name : SENSOR-INPUT SPEED Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (RFE/RLE) Pin Circuit Description 1 T52 20DG/OR INPUT SPEED SIGNAL 2 T13 20DG/VT SPEED SENSOR GROUND Component Location - 21 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 6206 Component Location - 19 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 6207 Component Location - 26 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 6208 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 6209 Transmission Speed Sensor: Locations Sensor-Output Speed Component ID 400 Component ID: 400 Component : SENSOR-OUTPUT SPEED Connector: Name : SENSOR-OUTPUT SPEED Color : # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (RC) Pin Circuit Description 1 T14 20DG/BR OUTPUT SPEED SIGNAL 2 T72 20YL/DB 8 VOLT SUPPLY Component Location - 20 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 6210 Component Location - 21 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 6211 Component Location - 19 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 6212 Component Location - 26 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 6213 Connector: Name : SENSOR-OUTPUT SPEED Color : # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (RE) Pin Circuit Description 1 T14 18DG/BR OUTPUT SPEED SIGNAL 2 T13 18DG/VT SPEED SENSOR GROUND Component Location - 20 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 6214 Component Location - 21 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 6215 Component Location - 19 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 6216 Component Location - 26 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 6217 Connector: Name : SENSOR-OUTPUT SPEED Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (RFE/RLE) Pin Circuit Description 1 T14 20DG/BR OUTPUT SPEED SIGNAL Pin Circuit Description 1 T13 20DG/VT SPEED SENSOR GROUND Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 6218 2 T13 20DG/VT SPEED SENSOR GROUND 2 T14 20DG/BR OUTPUT SPEED SIGNAL Component Location - 20 Component Location - 21 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 6219 Component Location - 19 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 6220 Component Location - 26 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 6221 Component ID 430 Component ID: 430 Component : SENSOR-OUTPUT SPEED Connector: Name : SENSOR-OUTPUT SPEED Color : # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (RC) Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 6222 Pin Circuit Description 1 T14 20DG/BR OUTPUT SPEED SIGNAL 2 T72 20YL/DB 8 VOLT SUPPLY Component Location - 20 Component Location - 21 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 6223 Component Location - 19 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 6224 Component Location - 26 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 6225 Connector: Name : SENSOR-OUTPUT SPEED Color : # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (RE) Pin Circuit Description 1 T14 18DG/BR OUTPUT SPEED SIGNAL 2 T13 18DG/VT SPEED SENSOR GROUND Component Location - 20 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 6226 Component Location - 21 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 6227 Component Location - 19 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 6228 Component Location - 26 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 6229 Connector: Name : SENSOR-OUTPUT SPEED Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (RFE/RLE) Pin Circuit Description 1 T14 20DG/BR OUTPUT SPEED SIGNAL Pin Circuit Description 1 T13 20DG/VT SPEED SENSOR GROUND Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 6230 2 T13 20DG/VT SPEED SENSOR GROUND 2 T14 20DG/BR OUTPUT SPEED SIGNAL Component Location - 20 Component Location - 21 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 6231 Component Location - 19 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 6232 Component Location - 26 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 6233 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Input Speed Transmission Speed Sensor: Diagrams Sensor-Input Speed Component ID 399 Component ID: 399 Component : SENSOR-INPUT SPEED Connector: Name : SENSOR-INPUT SPEED Color : # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (RC) Pin Circuit Description 1 T52 20DG/OR INPUT SPEED SIGNAL 2 T72 20YL/DB 8 VOLT SUPPLY Component Location - 21 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 6236 Component Location - 19 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 6237 Component Location - 26 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 6238 Connector: Name : SENSOR-INPUT SPEED Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (RFE/RLE) Pin Circuit Description 1 T52 20DG/OR INPUT SPEED SIGNAL 2 T13 20DG/VT SPEED SENSOR GROUND Component Location - 21 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 6239 Component Location - 19 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 6240 Component Location - 26 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 6241 Component ID 420 Component ID: 420 Component : SENSOR-INPUT SPEED Connector: Name : SENSOR-INPUT SPEED Color : # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (RC) Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 6242 Pin Circuit Description 1 T52 20DG/OR INPUT SPEED SIGNAL 2 T72 20YL/DB 8 VOLT SUPPLY Component Location - 21 Component Location - 19 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 6243 Component Location - 26 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 6244 Connector: Name : SENSOR-INPUT SPEED Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (RFE/RLE) Pin Circuit Description 1 T52 20DG/OR INPUT SPEED SIGNAL 2 T13 20DG/VT SPEED SENSOR GROUND Component Location - 21 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 6245 Component Location - 19 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 6246 Component Location - 26 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 6247 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 6248 Transmission Speed Sensor: Diagrams Sensor-Output Speed Component ID 400 Component ID: 400 Component : SENSOR-OUTPUT SPEED Connector: Name : SENSOR-OUTPUT SPEED Color : # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (RC) Pin Circuit Description 1 T14 20DG/BR OUTPUT SPEED SIGNAL 2 T72 20YL/DB 8 VOLT SUPPLY Component Location - 20 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 6249 Component Location - 21 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 6250 Component Location - 19 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 6251 Component Location - 26 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 6252 Connector: Name : SENSOR-OUTPUT SPEED Color : # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (RE) Pin Circuit Description 1 T14 18DG/BR OUTPUT SPEED SIGNAL 2 T13 18DG/VT SPEED SENSOR GROUND Component Location - 20 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 6253 Component Location - 21 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 6254 Component Location - 19 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 6255 Component Location - 26 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 6256 Connector: Name : SENSOR-OUTPUT SPEED Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (RFE/RLE) Pin Circuit Description 1 T14 20DG/BR OUTPUT SPEED SIGNAL Pin Circuit Description 1 T13 20DG/VT SPEED SENSOR GROUND Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 6257 2 T13 20DG/VT SPEED SENSOR GROUND 2 T14 20DG/BR OUTPUT SPEED SIGNAL Component Location - 20 Component Location - 21 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 6258 Component Location - 19 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 6259 Component Location - 26 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 6260 Component ID 430 Component ID: 430 Component : SENSOR-OUTPUT SPEED Connector: Name : SENSOR-OUTPUT SPEED Color : # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (RC) Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 6261 Pin Circuit Description 1 T14 20DG/BR OUTPUT SPEED SIGNAL 2 T72 20YL/DB 8 VOLT SUPPLY Component Location - 20 Component Location - 21 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 6262 Component Location - 19 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 6263 Component Location - 26 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 6264 Connector: Name : SENSOR-OUTPUT SPEED Color : # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (RE) Pin Circuit Description 1 T14 18DG/BR OUTPUT SPEED SIGNAL 2 T13 18DG/VT SPEED SENSOR GROUND Component Location - 20 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 6265 Component Location - 21 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 6266 Component Location - 19 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 6267 Component Location - 26 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 6268 Connector: Name : SENSOR-OUTPUT SPEED Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (RFE/RLE) Pin Circuit Description 1 T14 20DG/BR OUTPUT SPEED SIGNAL Pin Circuit Description 1 T13 20DG/VT SPEED SENSOR GROUND Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 6269 2 T13 20DG/VT SPEED SENSOR GROUND 2 T14 20DG/BR OUTPUT SPEED SIGNAL Component Location - 20 Component Location - 21 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 6270 Component Location - 19 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 6271 Component Location - 26 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 6272 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > 42RLE Automatic Transmission Transmission Speed Sensor: Description and Operation 42RLE Automatic Transmission Description DESCRIPTION The Input (1) and Output (2) Speed Sensors are two-wire magnetic pickup devices that generate AC signals as rotation occurs. They are mounted in the left side of the transmission case and are considered primary inputs to the Transmission Control Module (TCM). Operation OPERATION The Input Speed Sensor provides information on how fast the input shaft is rotating. As the teeth of the input clutch hub pass by the sensor coil, an AC voltage is generated and sent to the TCM. The TCM interprets this information as input shaft rpm. The Output Speed Sensor generates an AC signal in a similar fashion, though its coil is excited by rotation of the rear planetary carrier lugs. The TCM interprets this information as output shaft rpm. The TCM compares the input and output speed signals to determine the following: - Transmission gear ratio - Speed ratio error detection - CVI calculation The TCM also compares the input speed signal and the engine speed signal to determine the following: - Torque converter clutch slippage - Torque converter element speed ratio Description DESCRIPTION Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 6275 The Input (1) and Output (2) Speed Sensors are two-wire magnetic pickup devices that generate AC signals as rotation occurs. They are mounted in the left side of the transmission case and are considered primary inputs to the Transmission Control Module (TCM). Operation OPERATION The Input Speed Sensor provides information on how fast the input shaft is rotating. As the teeth of the input clutch hub pass by the sensor coil, an AC voltage is generated and sent to the TCM. The TCM interprets this information as input shaft rpm. The Output Speed Sensor generates an AC signal in a similar fashion, though its coil is excited by rotation of the rear planetary carrier lugs. The TCM interprets this information as output shaft rpm. The TCM compares the input and output speed signals to determine the following: - Transmission gear ratio - Speed ratio error detection - CVI calculation The TCM also compares the input speed signal and the engine speed signal to determine the following: - Torque converter clutch slippage - Torque converter element speed ratio Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 6276 Transmission Speed Sensor: Description and Operation 545RFE Automatic Transmission Description DESCRIPTION The Input and Output Speed Sensors are two-wire magnetic pickup devices that generate AC signals as rotation occurs. They are mounted in the left side of the transmission case and are considered primary inputs to the Transmission Control Module (TCM). Operation OPERATION The Input Speed Sensor provides information on how fast the input shaft is rotating. As the teeth of the input clutch hub pass by the sensor coil, an AC voltage is generated and sent to the TCM. The TCM interprets this information as input shaft rpm. The Output Speed Sensor generates an AC signal in a similar fashion, though its coil is excited by rotation of the park gear teeth. The TCM interprets this information as output shaft rpm. The TCM compares the input and output speed signals to determine the following: - Transmission gear ratio - Speed ratio error detection - CVI calculation The TCM also compares the input speed signal and the engine speed signal to determine the following: - Torque converter clutch slippage - Torque converter element speed ratio Description DESCRIPTION The Input and Output Speed Sensors are two-wire magnetic pickup devices that generate AC signals as rotation occurs. They are mounted in the left side of the transmission case and are considered primary inputs to the Transmission Control Module (TCM). Operation OPERATION The Input Speed Sensor provides information on how fast the input shaft is rotating. As the teeth of the input clutch hub pass by the sensor coil, an AC voltage is generated and sent to the TCM. The TCM interprets this information as input shaft rpm. The Output Speed Sensor generates an AC signal in a similar fashion, though its coil is excited by rotation of the park gear teeth. The TCM interprets this information as output shaft rpm. The TCM compares the input and output speed signals to determine the following: - Transmission gear ratio - Speed ratio error detection - CVI calculation The TCM also compares the input speed signal and the engine speed signal to determine the following: - Torque converter clutch slippage - Torque converter element speed ratio Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 6277 Transmission Speed Sensor: Description and Operation 68RFE Automatic Transmission Description DESCRIPTION The Input and Output Speed Sensors are two-wire magnetic pickup devices that generate AC signals as rotation occurs. They are mounted in the left side of the transmission case and are considered primary inputs to the Transmission Control Module (TCM). Operation OPERATION The Input Speed Sensor provides information on how fast the input shaft is rotating. As the teeth of the input clutch hub pass by the sensor coil, an AC voltage is generated and sent to the TCM. The TCM interprets this information as input shaft rpm. The Output Speed Sensor generates an AC signal in a similar fashion, though its coil is excited by rotation of the park gear teeth. The TCM interprets this information as output shaft rpm. The TCM compares the input and output speed signals to determine the following: - Transmission gear ratio - Speed ratio error detection - CVI calculation The TCM also compares the input speed signal and the engine speed signal to determine the following: - Torque converter clutch slippage - Torque converter element speed ratio Description DESCRIPTION The Input and Output Speed Sensors are two-wire magnetic pickup devices that generate AC signals as rotation occurs. They are mounted in the left side of the transmission case and are considered primary inputs to the Transmission Control Module (TCM). Operation OPERATION The Input Speed Sensor provides information on how fast the input shaft is rotating. As the teeth of the input clutch hub pass by the sensor coil, an AC voltage is generated and sent to the TCM. The TCM interprets this information as input shaft rpm. The Output Speed Sensor generates an AC signal in a similar fashion, though its coil is excited by rotation of the park gear teeth. The TCM interprets this information as output shaft rpm. The TCM compares the input and output speed signals to determine the following: - Transmission gear ratio - Speed ratio error detection - CVI calculation The TCM also compares the input speed signal and the engine speed signal to determine the following: - Torque converter clutch slippage - Torque converter element speed ratio Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 6278 Transmission Speed Sensor: Description and Operation 48RE Automatic Transmission Description DESCRIPTION The speed sensor (1) is located in the overdrive gear case. The sensor is positioned over the park gear and monitors transmission output shaft rotating speed. Operation OPERATION Speed sensor signals are triggered by the park gear lugs as they rotate past the sensor pickup face. Input signals from the sensor are sent to the transmission control module for processing. Signals from this sensor are shared with the powertrain control module. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 6279 Transmission Speed Sensor: Description and Operation AS68RC Automatic Transmission Description DESCRIPTION INPUT AND OUTPUT SPEED SENSORS The Input and Output Speed Sensors are two-wire magnetic pickup devices that generate DC square wave signals as rotation occurs. They are mounted in the left side of the transmission case and are considered primary inputs to the Transmission Control Module (TCM). Operation OPERATION The Input Speed Sensor provides information on how fast the input shaft is rotating. As the "teeth" of the gear pass by the sensor coil, an DC square wave is generated and sent to the TCM. The TCM interprets this information as input shaft rpm. The Output Speed Sensor generates an DC signal in a similar fashion, though its coil is excited by rotation of the rear planetary carrier lugs. The TCM interprets this information as output shaft rpm. The TCM compares the input and output speed signals to determine the following: - Transmission gear ratio - Speed ratio error detection - CVI calculation The TCM also compares the input speed signal and the engine speed signal to determine the following: - Torque converter clutch slippage - Torque converter element speed ratio Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 42RLE Automatic Transmission Transmission Speed Sensor: Service and Repair 42RLE Automatic Transmission Removal REMOVAL 1. Raise vehicle. 2. Place a suitable fluid catch pan under the transmission. 3. Remove the wiring connector from the input speed sensor. NOTE: The speed sensor bolt has a sealing patch applied from the factory. Be sure to reuse the same bolt. 4. Remove the bolt holding the input speed sensor to the transmission case. 5. Remove the input speed sensor from the transmission case. Installation INSTALLATION 1. Install the input speed sensor (1) into the transmission case. NOTE: Before installing the speed sensor bolt, it will be necessary to replenish the sealing patch on the bolt using MOPAR(R) Lock & Seal Adhesive. 2. Install the bolt to hold the input speed sensor into the transmission case. Tighten the bolt to 9 Nm (80 in.lbs.). 3. Install the wiring connector onto the input speed sensor 4. Verify the transmission fluid level. Add fluid as necessary. 5. Lower vehicle. Removal REMOVAL Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 6282 1. Raise vehicle. 2. Place a suitable fluid catch pan under the transmission. 3. Remove the wiring connector from the output speed sensor (2). NOTE: The speed sensor bolt has a sealing patch applied from the factory. Be sure to reuse the same bolt. 4. Remove the bolt holding the output speed sensor to the transmission case. 5. Remove the output speed sensor (2) from the transmission case. Installation INSTALLATION 1. Install the output speed sensor (2) into the transmission case. NOTE: Before installing the speed sensor bolt, it will be necessary to replenish the sealing patch on the bolt using MOPAR(R) Lock & Seal Adhesive. 2. Install the bolt to hold the output speed sensor into the transmission case. Tighten the bolt to 9 Nm (80 in.lbs.). 3. Install the wiring connector onto the output speed sensor 4. Verify the transmission fluid level. Add fluid as necessary. 5. Lower vehicle. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 6283 Transmission Speed Sensor: Service and Repair 545RFE Automatic Transmission Removal REMOVAL 1. Raise vehicle. 2. Place a suitable fluid catch pan under the transmission. 3. Remove the wiring connector from the input speed sensor (3). 4. Remove the bolt holding the input speed sensor to the transmission case. 5. Remove the input speed sensor (3) from the transmission case. Installation INSTALLATION 1. Install the input speed sensor (3) into the transmission case. 2. Install the bolt to hold the input speed sensor (3) into the transmission case. Tighten the bolt to 12 Nm (105 in.lbs.). 3. Install the wiring connector onto the input speed sensor. 4. Verify the transmission fluid level. Add fluid as necessary. 5. Lower vehicle. Removal REMOVAL Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 6284 1. Raise vehicle. 2. Place a suitable fluid catch pan under the transmission. 3. Remove the wiring connector from the output speed sensor (1). 4. Remove the bolt holding the output speed sensor (1) to the transmission case. 5. Remove the output speed sensor (1) from the transmission case. Installation INSTALLATION 1. Install the output speed sensor (1) into the transmission case. 2. Install the bolt to hold the output speed sensor (1) into the transmission case. Tighten the bolt to 12 Nm (105 in.lbs.). 3. Install the wiring connector onto the output speed sensor (1). 4. Verify the transmission fluid level. Add fluid as necessary. 5. Lower vehicle. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 6285 Transmission Speed Sensor: Service and Repair 68RFE Automatic Transmission Removal REMOVAL 1. Raise vehicle. 2. Place a suitable fluid catch pan under the transmission. 3. Remove the wiring connector from the input speed sensor (3). 4. Remove the bolt holding the input speed sensor to the transmission case. 5. Remove the input speed sensor (3) from the transmission case. Installation INSTALLATION 1. Install the input speed sensor (3) into the transmission case. 2. Install the bolt to hold the input speed sensor (3) into the transmission case. Tighten the bolt to 12 Nm (105 in.lbs.). 3. Install the wiring connector onto the input speed sensor. 4. Verify the transmission fluid level. Add fluid as necessary. 5. Lower vehicle. Removal REMOVAL Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 6286 1. Raise vehicle. 2. Place a suitable fluid catch pan under the transmission. 3. Remove the wiring connector from the output speed sensor (1). 4. Remove the bolt holding the output speed sensor (1) to the transmission case. 5. Remove the output speed sensor (1) from the transmission case. Installation INSTALLATION 1. Install the output speed sensor (1) into the transmission case. 2. Install the bolt to hold the output speed sensor (1) into the transmission case. Tighten the bolt to 12 Nm (105 in.lbs.). 3. Install the wiring connector onto the output speed sensor (1). 4. Verify the transmission fluid level. Add fluid as necessary. 5. Lower vehicle. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 6287 Transmission Speed Sensor: Service and Repair AS68RC Automatic Transmission Output Speed Sensor OUTPUT SPEED SENSOR OUTPUT SPEED SENSOR 1. Raise and support the vehicle. 2. Place a suitable fluid catch pan under the transmission. 3. Remove the wiring connector from the output speed sensor. 4. Remove the bolt holding the output speed sensor to the transmission case. 5. Remove the output speed sensor from the transmission case. Input Speed Sensor INPUT SPEED SENSOR INPUT SPEED SENSOR 1. Raise and support the vehicle. 2. Place a suitable fluid catch pan under the transmission. 3. Remove the wiring connector from the input speed sensor. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 6288 4. Remove the bolt holding the input speed sensor to the transmission case. 5. Remove the input speed sensor from the transmission case. Output Speed Sensor OUTPUT SPEED SENSOR NOTE: Apply trans jell to all slide portions, rolling contacts surfaces, thrust surfaces etc. to prevent burnout during initial operation. Lubricate O-rings and O-ring seals with MOPAR(R) AS68RC ATF. Soak all friction disks in MOPAR(R) AS68RC ATF for at least two hours before assembly of clutch packs. OUTPUT SPEED SENSOR 1. Lubricate the output speed sensor o-ring with MOPAR(R) AS68RC ATF. 2. Install the output speed sensor into the transmission case. 3. Tighten the bolt to 8 Nm (70 in.lbs.). 4. Install the wiring connector onto the output speed sensor. 5. Lower vehicle. 6. Verify the transmission fluid level. Add MOPAR(R) AS68RC ATF as necessary. Input Speed Sensor INPUT SPEED SENSOR NOTE: Apply trans jell to all slide portions, rolling contacts surfaces, thrust surfaces etc. to prevent burnout during initial operation. Lubricate O-rings and O-ring seals with MOPAR(R) AS68RC ATF. Soak all friction disks in MOPAR(R) AS68RC ATF for at least two hours before assembly of clutch packs. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 6289 INPUT SPEED SENSOR 1. Lubricate the output speed sensor o-ring with MOPAR(R) AS68RC ATF. 2. Install the input speed sensor into the transmission case. 3. Tighten the bolt to 8 Nm (70 in.lbs.). 4. Install the electrical wiring connector onto the input speed sensor. 5. Lower vehicle. 6. Verify the transmission fluid level. Add MOPAR(R) AS68RC as necessary. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Locations Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch: Locations Component ID: 445 Component : SENSOR-TRANSMISSION TEMPERATURE Connector: Name : SENSOR-TRANSMISSION TEMPERATURE Color : # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (RC) Pin Circuit Description 1 T819 20YL/VT TCC TEMPERATURE SIGNAL 2 T820 20YL/WT TEMPERATURE SENSOR GROUND Component Location - 26 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 6293 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 6294 Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch: Diagrams Component ID: 445 Component : SENSOR-TRANSMISSION TEMPERATURE Connector: Name : SENSOR-TRANSMISSION TEMPERATURE Color : # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (RC) Pin Circuit Description 1 T819 20YL/VT TCC TEMPERATURE SIGNAL 2 T820 20YL/WT TEMPERATURE SENSOR GROUND Component Location - 26 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 6295 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > 545RFE Automatic Transmission Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch: Description and Operation 545RFE Automatic Transmission Description DESCRIPTION The Transmission Range Sensor (TRS) is part of the solenoid module, which is mounted to the top of the valve body inside the transmission. The Transmission Range Sensor (TRS) has five switch contact pins that: - Determine shift lever position - Supply ground to the Starter Relay in Park and Neutral only. - Supply +12 V to the backup lamps in Reverse only. The TRS also has an integrated temperature sensor (thermistor) that communicates transmission temperature to the TCM and PCM. Operation OPERATION The Transmission Range Sensor (TRS) communicates shift lever position to the TCM as a combination of open and closed switches. Each shift lever position has an assigned combination of switch states (open/closed) that the TCM receives from four sense circuits. The TCM interprets this information and determines the appropriate transmission gear position and shift schedule. There are many possible combinations of open and closed switches (codes). Seven of these possible codes are related to gear position and five are recognized as "between gear" codes. This results in many codes which should never occur. These are called "invalid" codes. An invalid code will result in a DTC, and the TCM will then determine the shift lever position based on pressure switch data. This allows reasonably normal transmission operation with a TRS failure. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > 545RFE Automatic Transmission > Page 6298 Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch: Description and Operation 68RFE Automatic Transmission Description DESCRIPTION The Transmission Range Sensor (TRS) is part of the solenoid module, which is mounted to the top of the valve body inside the transmission. The Transmission Range Sensor (TRS) has five switch contact pins that: - Determine shift lever position - Supply ground to the Starter Relay in Park and Neutral only. The TRS also has an integrated temperature sensor (thermistor) that communicates transmission temperature to the TCM and PCM. Operation OPERATION The Transmission Range Sensor (TRS) communicates shift lever position to the TCM as a combination of open and closed switches. Each shift lever position has an assigned combination of switch states (open/closed) that the TCM receives from four sense circuits. The TCM interprets this information and determines the appropriate transmission gear position and shift schedule. There are many possible combinations of open and closed switches (codes). Five of these possible codes correspond to valid gear position, there are two codes for the neutral position and three are recognized as "between gear" codes. This results in many codes which should never occur. These are called "invalid" codes. An invalid code will result in a DTC, and the TCM will then determine the shift lever position based on pressure switch data. This allows reasonably normal transmission operation with a TRS failure. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 42RLE Automatic Transmission Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch: Service and Repair 42RLE Automatic Transmission Removal REMOVAL 1. Remove valve body assembly from vehicle. See: Transmission and Drivetrain/Automatic Transmission/Transaxle/Valve Body/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/42RLE Automatic Transmission/Removal 2. Remove the manual shaft seal (1). 3. Remove manual shaft/TRS retaining screw (1). 4. Slide TRS off of manual valve shaft. Installation INSTALLATION Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 6301 1. Install the TRS (2) to the manual shaft. Make sure TRS locating pin rests in manual valve bore slot. 2. Install the TRS/manual shaft retaining screw (1) and torque to 5 Nm (45 in. lbs.) torque. 3. Install the manual shaft seal (1). 4. Install valve body to the transmission. See: Transmission and Drivetrain/Automatic Transmission/Transaxle/Valve Body/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/42RLE Automatic Transmission/Installation Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 6302 Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch: Service and Repair 48RE Automatic Transmission Removal REMOVAL 1. Raise vehicle and position drain pan under the transmission range sensor (TRS). 2. Move the transmission manual lever to the manual LOW position. The manual LOW position is with the manual lever in the forward-most detent. 3. Disengage the wiring connector from the TRS. 4. Remove the two screws holding the TRS to the TRS mounting bracket. 5. Remove the TRS (3) from the TRS mounting bracket by pulling it straight out of the bracket. 6. If necessary, loosen the TRS mounting bracket (2) in the transmission case using Adapter 8581 (3). 7. If necessary, remove the TRS mounting bracket (2) from the transmission case. Installation INSTALLATION Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 6303 1. Move the transmission manual shaft lever to the manual LOW position. 2. If necessary, install the TRS mounting bracket (2) into the transmission case. Using Adapter 8581 (3), tighten the mounting bracket to 34 Nm (300 in.lbs.). 3. Install the TRS (3) into the mounting bracket (2) with the wiring connector facing the front of the transmission. 4. Install the two screws to hold the TRS to the mounting bracket. Tighten the screws to 5 Nm (45 in.lbs.). 5. Verify proper sensor operation (1-4). 6. Move the transmission manual shaft lever to the PARK position. 7. Connect TRS wiring connector to the TRS and lower vehicle. 8. Refill the transmission fluid to the correct level. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 6304 Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch: Service and Repair AS68RC Automatic Transmission Removal REMOVAL NOTE: Be certain the transmission is in the park lock position. TRANSMISSION RANGE SENSOR 1. Remove the shift cable from the manual shift lever (2). 2. Disconnect the wire harness from the transmission range sensor. 3. Remove the two nuts (3) from the control shaft. TRS REMOVAL/INSTALLATION Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 6305 4. Pry open the tabs on the stake washer (5), remove the nut (3) and the stake washer (5). 5. Remove the bolts (2). 6. Remove the transmission range sensor (1) from the transmission control shaft (4). Installation INSTALLATION 1. Install the transmission range sensor (3) onto the control shaft (5). 2. Install the stake washer and the nut (4) and hand tighten. 3. With the transmission in neutral install the alignment tool 9983 (6) onto the control shaft (5) and into the alignment hole (1). 4. Install the bolts (2). 5. After aligning the transmission range sensor, tighten the bolts (2) 12.5 Nm (9 ft.lbs.) 6. Remove the alignment tool 9983 (6) 7. Tighten the control shaft nut to 7 Nm (62 in.lbs.) 8. Bend the tabs on the stake washer and nut (4) in at least two places to lock in position. TRANSMISSION RANGE SENSOR Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 6306 9. Install the manual shift lever (2) onto the control shaft. 10. Install the inner nut (3) onto the control shaft. Tighten the inner nut to 12.5 Nm (9 ft.lbs). 11. Install the outer nut (3) onto the control shaft. While holding the inner nut, tighten the outer not to 12.5 Nm (9 ft.lbs) Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - M/T > Clutch Pedal Position Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection Clutch Pedal Position Sensor / Switch: Testing and Inspection SWITCH-CLUTCH PEDAL POSITION 1. Disconnect switch 2-wire connector (2) attached to pedal support bracket (1), under instrument panel to left of clutch pedal. 2. Check switch continuity with an ohmmeter while operating clutch pedal. - Pedal Depressed - Continuity - Pedal Released - No Continuity 3. If continuity is not present or always present, replace clutch master cylinder. Switch is not serviced separately. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Four Wheel Drive Selector Switch > Component Information > Locations Four Wheel Drive Selector Switch: Locations Component ID: 515 Component : SWITCH-TRANSFER CASE SELECTOR Connector: Name : SWITCH-TRANSFER CASE SELECTOR Color : BLACK # of pins : 10 Qualifier : (ETC) Pin Circuit Description 1 K77 20BR/WT TRANSFER CASE POSITION SENSOR INPUT 2-3 K977 20BR/WT MODE SELECT 4 E11 20OR/DB PANEL LAMPS CONTROL 5 Z905 20BK GROUND 6 G95 20VT/BR NEUTRAL INDICATOR 7 F21 20PK/DG FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) 8-9-10 - Component Location - 47 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Four Wheel Drive Selector Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 6315 Component Location - 45 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Four Wheel Drive Selector Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 6316 Component Location - 20 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Four Wheel Drive Selector Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 6317 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Four Wheel Drive Selector Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 6318 Four Wheel Drive Selector Switch: Diagrams Component ID: 515 Component : SWITCH-TRANSFER CASE SELECTOR Connector: Name : SWITCH-TRANSFER CASE SELECTOR Color : BLACK # of pins : 10 Qualifier : (ETC) Pin Circuit Description 1 K77 20BR/WT TRANSFER CASE POSITION SENSOR INPUT 2-3 K977 20BR/WT MODE SELECT 4 E11 20OR/DB PANEL LAMPS CONTROL 5 Z905 20BK GROUND 6 G95 20VT/BR NEUTRAL INDICATOR 7 F21 20PK/DG FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) 8-9-10 - Component Location - 47 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Four Wheel Drive Selector Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 6319 Component Location - 45 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Four Wheel Drive Selector Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 6320 Component Location - 20 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Four Wheel Drive Selector Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 6321 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Four Wheel Drive Selector Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > NV243 Transfer Case Four Wheel Drive Selector Switch: Description and Operation NV243 Transfer Case Description DESCRIPTION The selector switch assembly is mounted in the left side of the vehicle's Instrument Panel (IP) and consists of a rotary knob connected to a resistive network for the mode and range shift selections. Also located in this assembly is a recessed, normally open momentary switch for making shifts into and out of transfer case NEUTRAL. A pen, or similar instrument, is used to make a NEUTRAL shift selection, thus reducing the likelihood of an inadvertent shift request. The selector switch also contains four light emitting diode's (LED's) to indicate the transfer case position and whether a shift is in progress. Operation OPERATION As the position of the selector switch varies, the resistance between the Mode Sensor supply voltage pin and the Mode Sensor output will vary. Hardware, software, and calibrations within the Transfer Case Control Module (TCCM) are provided that interpret the selector switch resistance as given in the table below: For resistances between the ranges B-E shown for each valid position (T-Case NEUTRAL, 4LO, 4HI, 2WD), the TCCM may interpret the resistance as: - either of the neighboring valid positions. - as an invalid fault position. For resistances between the ranges E and F shown for 2WD and in-between positions, the TCCM may interpret the resistance as: - the 2WD position. - an invalid fault position. - a valid in-between position. For resistances between the ranges F and G shown for in-between positions and fault condition (open), the TCCM may interpret the resistance as: Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Four Wheel Drive Selector Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > NV243 Transfer Case > Page 6324 - a valid in-between position. - an invalid fault position. For resistances between the ranges A and B shown for the fault condition (short) and T-Case NEUTRAL, the TCCM may interpret the resistance as: - the T-Case NEUTRAL position. - an invalid fault position. The LED's in the selector assembly are illuminated/flashed in the following manner to indicate a particular condition or state. - A solidly illuminated LED indicates a successfully completed shift and the current operating mode of the transfer case. While a shift has been requested but not yet completed, the LED for the desired transfer case position is flashed. - A flashing operating mode LED for the desired gear indicates that a shift to that position has been requested, but all of the driver controllable conditions have not been met. This is in an attempt to notify the driver that the transmission needs to be put into NEUTRAL, the vehicle speed is too great, or some other condition outlined (other than a diagnostic failure that would prevent this shift) elsewhere See: Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain/Relays and Modules - Transfer Case/Control Module/Description and Operation/Operation is not met. Note that this flashing will continue indefinitely until the conditions are eventually met, or the selector switch position is changed, or if diagnostic routines no longer allow the requested shift. - If the driver attempts to make a shift into transfer case NEUTRAL, and any of the driver controllable conditions are not met, the request will be ignored until all of the conditions are met or until the NEUTRAL select button is released. Additionally the neutral lamp will flash, or begin to flash while the button is depressed and operator controllable conditions are not being met. All of the LED's except the Neutral will flash if any of the operator controllable conditions for shifting are not met while the Neutral button is depressed. This "toggle" type of feature is necessary because the TCCM would interpret another request immediately after the shift into transfer case NEUTRAL has completed. - No LED's illuminated indicate a fault in the transfer case control system. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Four Wheel Drive Selector Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > NV243 Transfer Case > Page 6325 Four Wheel Drive Selector Switch: Description and Operation NV244 GENII Transfer Case Description DESCRIPTION The selector switch assembly is mounted in the left side of the vehicle's Instrument Panel (IP) and consists of a rotary knob connected to a resistive network for the mode and range shift selections. Also located in this assembly is a recessed, normally open momentary switch for making shifts into and out of transfer case NEUTRAL. A pen, or similar instrument, is used to make a NEUTRAL shift selection, thus reducing the likelihood of an inadvertent shift request. The selector switch also contains light emitting diode's (LED's) to indicate the transfer case position and whether a shift is in progress. Operation OPERATION As the position of the selector switch varies, the resistance between the Mode Sensor supply voltage pin and the Mode Sensor output will vary. Hardware, software, and calibrations within the Transfer Case Control Module (TCCM) are provided that interpret the selector switch resistance as given in the table below: For resistances between the ranges B-E shown for each valid position (T-Case NEUTRAL, 4LO, 4HI, AWD), the TCCM may interpret the resistance as: - either of the neighboring valid positions. - as an invalid fault position. For resistances between the ranges E and F shown for AWD and in-between positions, the TCCM may interpret the resistance as: - the AWD position. - an invalid fault position. - a valid in-between position. For resistances between the ranges F and G shown for in-between positions and fault condition (open), the TCCM may interpret the resistance as: - a valid in-between position. - an invalid fault position. For resistances between the ranges A and B shown for the fault condition (short) and , T-Case NEUTRAL, the TCCM may interpret the resistance as: - the T-Case NEUTRAL position. - an invalid fault position. The LED's in the selector assembly are illuminated/flashed in the following manner to indicate a particular condition or state. - A solidly illuminated LED indicates a successfully completed shift and the current operating mode of the transfer case. While a shift has been requested but not yet completed, the LED for the desired transfer case position is flashed. - A flashing operating mode LED for the desired gear indicates that a shift to that position has been requested, but all of the driver controllable conditions have not been met. This is in an attempt to notify the driver that the transmission needs to be put into NEUTRAL, the vehicle speed is too great, or some other condition outlined (other than a diagnostic failure that would prevent this shift) elsewhere See: Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain/Relays and Modules - Transfer Case/Control Module/Description and Operation/Operation is not met. Note that this Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Four Wheel Drive Selector Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > NV243 Transfer Case > Page 6326 flashing will continue indefinitely until the conditions are eventually met, or the selector switch position is changed, or if diagnostic routines no longer allow the requested shift. - If the driver attempts to make a shift into transfer case NEUTRAL, and any of the driver controllable conditions are not met, the request will be ignored until all of the conditions are met or until the NEUTRAL select button is released. Additionally the neutral lamp will flash, or begin to flash while the button is depressed and operator controllable conditions are not being met. All of the LED's except the Neutral will flash if any of the operator controllable conditions for shifting are not met while the Neutral button is depressed. This "toggle" type of feature is necessary because the TCCM would interpret another request immediately after the shift into transfer case NEUTRAL has completed. - No LED's illuminated indicate a fault in the transfer case control system. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Four Wheel Drive Selector Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > NV243 Transfer Case > Page 6327 Four Wheel Drive Selector Switch: Description and Operation NV246 Transfer Case Description DESCRIPTION The selector switch assembly is mounted in the left side of the vehicle's Instrument Panel (IP) and consists of a rotary knob connected to a resistive network for the mode and range shift selections. Also located in this assembly is a recessed, normally open momentary switch for making shifts into and out of transfer case NEUTRAL. A pen, or similar instrument, is used to make a NEUTRAL shift selection, thus reducing the likelihood of an inadvertent shift request. The selector switch also contains light emitting diode's (LED's) to indicate the transfer case position and whether a shift is in progress. Operation OPERATION As the position of the selector switch varies, the resistance between the Mode Sensor supply voltage pin and the Mode Sensor output will vary. Hardware, software, and calibrations within the Transfer Case Control Module (TCCM) are provided that interpret the selector switch resistance as given in the table below: For resistances between the ranges B-E shown for each valid position (T-Case NEUTRAL, 4LO, 4HI, AWD), the TCCM may interpret the resistance as: - either of the neighboring valid positions. - as an invalid fault position. For resistances between the ranges E and F shown for AWD and in-between positions, the TCCM may interpret the resistance as: - the AWD position. - an invalid fault position. - a valid in-between position. For resistances between the ranges F and G shown for in-between positions and fault condition (open), the TCCM may interpret the resistance as: - a valid in-between position. - an invalid fault position. For resistances between the ranges A and B shown for the fault condition (short) and , T-Case NEUTRAL, the TCCM may interpret the resistance as: - the T-Case NEUTRAL position. - an invalid fault position. The LED's in the selector assembly are illuminated/flashed in the following manner to indicate a particular condition or state. - A solidly illuminated LED indicates a successfully completed shift and the current operating mode of the transfer case. While a shift has been requested but not yet completed, the LED for the desired transfer case position is flashed. - A flashing operating mode LED for the desired gear indicates that a shift to that position has been requested, but all of the driver controllable conditions have not been met. This is in an attempt to notify the driver that the transmission needs to be put into NEUTRAL, the vehicle speed is too great, or some other condition outlined (other than a diagnostic failure that would prevent this shift) elsewhere See: Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain/Relays and Modules - Transfer Case/Control Module/Description and Operation/Operation is not met. Note that this Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Four Wheel Drive Selector Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > NV243 Transfer Case > Page 6328 flashing will continue indefinitely until the conditions are eventually met, or the selector switch position is changed, or if diagnostic routines no longer allow the requested shift. - If the driver attempts to make a shift into transfer case NEUTRAL, and any of the driver controllable conditions are not met, the request will be ignored until all of the conditions are met or until the NEUTRAL select button is released. Additionally the neutral lamp will flash, or begin to flash while the button is depressed and operator controllable conditions are not being met. All of the LED's except the Neutral will flash if any of the operator controllable conditions for shifting are not met while the Neutral button is depressed. This "toggle" type of feature is necessary because the TCCM would interpret another request immediately after the shift into transfer case NEUTRAL has completed. - No LED's illuminated indicate a fault in the transfer case control system. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Four Wheel Drive Selector Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > NV243 Transfer Case > Page 6329 Four Wheel Drive Selector Switch: Description and Operation NV273 Transfer Case Description DESCRIPTION The selector switch assembly is mounted in the left side of the vehicle's Instrument Panel (IP) and consists of a rotary knob connected to a resistive network for the mode and range shift selections. Also located in this assembly is a recessed, normally open momentary switch for making shifts into and out of transfer case NEUTRAL. A pen, or similar instrument, is used to make a NEUTRAL shift selection, thus reducing the likelihood of an inadvertent shift request. The selector switch also contains four light emitting diode's (LED's) to indicate the transfer case position and whether a shift is in progress. Operation OPERATION As the position of the selector switch varies, the resistance between the Mode Sensor supply voltage pin and the Mode Sensor output will vary. Hardware, software, and calibrations within the Transfer Case Control Module (TCCM) are provided that interpret the selector switch resistance as given in the table below: For resistances between the ranges B-E shown for each valid position (T-Case NEUTRAL, 4LO, 4HI, 2WD), the TCCM may interpret the resistance as: - either of the neighboring valid positions. - as an invalid fault position. For resistances between the ranges E and F shown for 2WD and in-between positions, the TCCM may interpret the resistance as: - the 2WD position. - an invalid fault position. - a valid in-between position. For resistances between the ranges F and G shown for in-between positions and fault condition (open), the TCCM may interpret the resistance as: Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Four Wheel Drive Selector Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > NV243 Transfer Case > Page 6330 - a valid in-between position. - an invalid fault position. For resistances between the ranges A and B shown for the fault condition (short) and T-Case NEUTRAL, the TCCM may interpret the resistance as: - the T-Case NEUTRAL position. - an invalid fault position. The LED's in the selector assembly are illuminated/flashed in the following manner to indicate a particular condition or state. - A solidly illuminated LED indicates a successfully completed shift and the current operating mode of the transfer case. While a shift has been requested but not yet completed, the LED for the desired transfer case position is flashed. - A flashing operating mode LED for the desired gear indicates that a shift to that position has been requested, but all of the driver controllable conditions have not been met. This is in an attempt to notify the driver that the transmission needs to be put into NEUTRAL, the vehicle speed is too great, or some other condition outlined (other than a diagnostic failure that would prevent this shift) elsewhere See: Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain/Relays and Modules - Transfer Case/Control Module/Description and Operation/Operation is not met. Note that this flashing will continue indefinitely until the conditions are eventually met, or the selector switch position is changed, or if diagnostic routines no longer allow the requested shift. - If the driver attempts to make a shift into transfer case NEUTRAL, and any of the driver controllable conditions are not met, the request will be ignored until all of the conditions are met or until the NEUTRAL select button is released. Additionally the neutral lamp will flash, or begin to flash while the button is depressed and operator controllable conditions are not being met. All of the LED's except the Neutral will flash if any of the operator controllable conditions for shifting are not met while the Neutral button is depressed. This "toggle" type of feature is necessary because the TCCM would interpret another request immediately after the shift into transfer case NEUTRAL has completed. - No LED's illuminated indicate a fault in the transfer case control system. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Gear Sensor/Switch, Transfer Case > Component Information > Locations > Assembly-Shift Motor/Mode Sensor Gear Sensor/Switch: Locations Assembly-Shift Motor/Mode Sensor Component ID: 18 Component : ASSEMBLY-SHIFT MOTOR/MODE SENSOR Connector: Name : ASSEMBLY-SHIFT MOTOR/MODE SENSOR Color : BLACK # of pins : 8 Qualifier : (RFE FULL TIME ETC) Pin Circuit Description 1 T103 20YL/OR 5 VOLT SUPPLY 2 D201 20WT/DG MODE SENSOR A 3 G180 20VT/YL SENSOR RETURN 4 T101 16DG SHIFT MOTOR CONTROL B 5 T102 16YL SHIFT MOTOR CONTROL A 6 A940 20RD FUSED B(+) 7 T300 20YL/GY T-CASE MOTOR BRAKE SIGNAL 8-Component Location - 21 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Gear Sensor/Switch, Transfer Case > Component Information > Locations > Assembly-Shift Motor/Mode Sensor > Page 6335 Component Location - 24 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Gear Sensor/Switch, Transfer Case > Component Information > Locations > Assembly-Shift Motor/Mode Sensor > Page 6336 Component Location - 26 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Gear Sensor/Switch, Transfer Case > Component Information > Locations > Assembly-Shift Motor/Mode Sensor > Page 6337 Connector: Name : ASSEMBLY-SHIFT MOTOR/MODE SENSOR Color : DK. GRAY # of pins : 8 Qualifier : (RFE PART TIME ETC/RE ETC) Pin Circuit Description 1 T103 20YL/OR 5 VOLT SUPPLY 2 D201 20WT/DG MODE SENSOR A 3 G180 20VT/YL SENSOR RETURN 4 T101 16DG SHIFT MOTOR CONTROL B Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Gear Sensor/Switch, Transfer Case > Component Information > Locations > Assembly-Shift Motor/Mode Sensor > Page 6338 5 T102 16YL SHIFT MOTOR CONTROL A 6 A918 20RD FUSED B(+) 7-8-Component Location - 21 Component Location - 24 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Gear Sensor/Switch, Transfer Case > Component Information > Locations > Assembly-Shift Motor/Mode Sensor > Page 6339 Component Location - 26 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Gear Sensor/Switch, Transfer Case > Component Information > Locations > Assembly-Shift Motor/Mode Sensor > Page 6340 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Gear Sensor/Switch, Transfer Case > Component Information > Locations > Assembly-Shift Motor/Mode Sensor > Page 6341 Gear Sensor/Switch: Locations Sensor-Transfer Case Position Component ID: 443 Component : SENSOR-TRANSFER CASE POSITION Connector: Name : SENSOR-TRANSFER CASE POSITION Color : # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (MTC EXCEPT POWER WAGON) Pin Circuit Description 1 D201 20WT/DG MODE SENSOR A Pin Circuit Description 1 D201 18WT/DG MODE SENSOR A 2 Z955 20BK GROUND 2 Z955 18BK GROUND 2 Z901 20BK GROUND Component Location - 22 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Gear Sensor/Switch, Transfer Case > Component Information > Locations > Assembly-Shift Motor/Mode Sensor > Page 6342 Component Location - 25 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Gear Sensor/Switch, Transfer Case > Component Information > Locations > Assembly-Shift Motor/Mode Sensor > Page 6343 Connector: Name : SENSOR-TRANSFER CASE POSITION Color : # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (MTC POWER WAGON) Pin Circuit Description 1 D201 18WT/DG MODE SENSOR A Pin Circuit Description 1 D201 20WT/DG MODE SENSOR A Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Gear Sensor/Switch, Transfer Case > Component Information > Locations > Assembly-Shift Motor/Mode Sensor > Page 6344 2 G180 18VT/YL SENSOR RETURN 2 G180 20VT/YL SENSOR RETURN Component Location - 22 Component Location - 25 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Gear Sensor/Switch, Transfer Case > Component Information > Locations > Assembly-Shift Motor/Mode Sensor > Page 6345 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Gear Sensor/Switch, Transfer Case > Component Information > Diagrams > Assembly-Shift Motor/Mode Sensor Gear Sensor/Switch: Diagrams Assembly-Shift Motor/Mode Sensor Component ID 14 Component ID: 14 Component : ASSEMBLY-SHIFT MOTOR/MODE SENSOR Connector: Name : ASSEMBLY-SHIFT MOTOR/MODE SENSOR Color : BLACK # of pins : 8 Qualifier : (RFE FULL TIME ETC) Pin Circuit Description 1 T103 20YL/OR 5 VOLT SUPPLY 2 D201 20WT/DG MODE SENSOR A 3 G180 20VT/YL SENSOR RETURN 4 T101 16DG SHIFT MOTOR CONTROL B 5 T102 16YL SHIFT MOTOR CONTROL A 6 A940 20RD FUSED B(+) 7 T300 20YL/GY T-CASE MOTOR BRAKE SIGNAL 8-Connector: Name : ASSEMBLY-SHIFT MOTOR/MODE SENSOR Color : DK. GRAY # of pins : 8 Qualifier : (RFE PART TIME ETC/RE ETC) Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Gear Sensor/Switch, Transfer Case > Component Information > Diagrams > Assembly-Shift Motor/Mode Sensor > Page 6348 Pin Circuit Description 1 T103 20YL/OR 5 VOLT SUPPLY 2 D201 20WT/DG MODE SENSOR A 3 G180 20VT/YL SENSOR RETURN 4 T101 16DG SHIFT MOTOR CONTROL B 5 T102 16YL SHIFT MOTOR CONTROL A 6 A918 20RD FUSED B(+) 7-8-Component ID 18 Component ID: 18 Component : ASSEMBLY-SHIFT MOTOR/MODE SENSOR Connector: Name : ASSEMBLY-SHIFT MOTOR/MODE SENSOR Color : BLACK # of pins : 8 Qualifier : (RFE FULL TIME ETC) Pin Circuit Description 1 T103 20YL/OR 5 VOLT SUPPLY 2 D201 20WT/DG MODE SENSOR A 3 G180 20VT/YL SENSOR RETURN 4 T101 16DG SHIFT MOTOR CONTROL B 5 T102 16YL SHIFT MOTOR CONTROL A Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Gear Sensor/Switch, Transfer Case > Component Information > Diagrams > Assembly-Shift Motor/Mode Sensor > Page 6349 6 A940 20RD FUSED B(+) 7 T300 20YL/GY T-CASE MOTOR BRAKE SIGNAL 8-Component Location - 21 Component Location - 24 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Gear Sensor/Switch, Transfer Case > Component Information > Diagrams > Assembly-Shift Motor/Mode Sensor > Page 6350 Component Location - 26 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Gear Sensor/Switch, Transfer Case > Component Information > Diagrams > Assembly-Shift Motor/Mode Sensor > Page 6351 Connector: Name : ASSEMBLY-SHIFT MOTOR/MODE SENSOR Color : DK. GRAY # of pins : 8 Qualifier : (RFE PART TIME ETC/RE ETC) Pin Circuit Description 1 T103 20YL/OR 5 VOLT SUPPLY 2 D201 20WT/DG MODE SENSOR A 3 G180 20VT/YL SENSOR RETURN 4 T101 16DG SHIFT MOTOR CONTROL B Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Gear Sensor/Switch, Transfer Case > Component Information > Diagrams > Assembly-Shift Motor/Mode Sensor > Page 6352 5 T102 16YL SHIFT MOTOR CONTROL A 6 A918 20RD FUSED B(+) 7-8-Component Location - 21 Component Location - 24 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Gear Sensor/Switch, Transfer Case > Component Information > Diagrams > Assembly-Shift Motor/Mode Sensor > Page 6353 Component Location - 26 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Gear Sensor/Switch, Transfer Case > Component Information > Diagrams > Assembly-Shift Motor/Mode Sensor > Page 6354 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Gear Sensor/Switch, Transfer Case > Component Information > Diagrams > Assembly-Shift Motor/Mode Sensor > Page 6355 Gear Sensor/Switch: Diagrams Sensor-Transfer Case Position Component ID: 443 Component : SENSOR-TRANSFER CASE POSITION Connector: Name : SENSOR-TRANSFER CASE POSITION Color : # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (MTC EXCEPT POWER WAGON) Pin Circuit Description 1 D201 20WT/DG MODE SENSOR A Pin Circuit Description 1 D201 18WT/DG MODE SENSOR A 2 Z955 20BK GROUND 2 Z955 18BK GROUND 2 Z901 20BK GROUND Component Location - 22 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Gear Sensor/Switch, Transfer Case > Component Information > Diagrams > Assembly-Shift Motor/Mode Sensor > Page 6356 Component Location - 25 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Gear Sensor/Switch, Transfer Case > Component Information > Diagrams > Assembly-Shift Motor/Mode Sensor > Page 6357 Connector: Name : SENSOR-TRANSFER CASE POSITION Color : # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (MTC POWER WAGON) Pin Circuit Description 1 D201 18WT/DG MODE SENSOR A Pin Circuit Description 1 D201 20WT/DG MODE SENSOR A Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Gear Sensor/Switch, Transfer Case > Component Information > Diagrams > Assembly-Shift Motor/Mode Sensor > Page 6358 2 G180 18VT/YL SENSOR RETURN 2 G180 20VT/YL SENSOR RETURN Component Location - 22 Component Location - 25 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Gear Sensor/Switch, Transfer Case > Component Information > Diagrams > Assembly-Shift Motor/Mode Sensor > Page 6359 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Gear Sensor/Switch, Transfer Case > Component Information > Description and Operation > NV244 GENII Transfer Case Gear Sensor/Switch: Description and Operation NV244 GENII Transfer Case Description DESCRIPTION The transfer case mode sensor is an electronic device whose output can be interpreted to indicate the shift motor shaft's rotary position. The sensor consists of a magnetic ring and four Hall Effect Transistors to create a 4 channel digital device (non-contacting) whose output converts the motor shaft position into a coded signal. The TCCM must supply 5VDC (+/- 0.5v) to the sensor and monitor the shift motor position. The four channels are denoted A, B, C, and D. The sensor is mechanically linked to the shaft of the cam which causes the transfer case shifting. The mode sensor draws less than 53 mA. Operation OPERATION During normal vehicle operation, the Transfer Case Control Module (TCCM) monitors the mode sensor outputs at least every 250 (+/-50) milliseconds when the shift motor is stationary and 400 microseconds when the shift motor is active. A mode sensor signal between 3.8 Volts and 0.8 Volts is considered to be undefined. Refer to SECTOR ANGLES vs.TRANSFER CASE POSITION for the relative angles of the transfer case shift sector versus the interpreted transfer case gear operating mode. Refer to MODE SENSOR CHANNEL STATES for the sensor codes returned to the TCCM for each transfer case mode sensor position. The various between gears positions can also be referred as the transfer case's coarse position. These coarse positions come into play during shift attempts. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Gear Sensor/Switch, Transfer Case > Component Information > Description and Operation > NV244 GENII Transfer Case > Page 6362 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Gear Sensor/Switch, Transfer Case > Component Information > Description and Operation > NV244 GENII Transfer Case > Page 6363 Gear Sensor/Switch: Description and Operation NV246 Transfer Case Description DESCRIPTION The transfer case mode sensor is an electronic device whose output can be interpreted to indicate the shift motor shaft's rotary position. The sensor consists of a magnetic ring and four Hall Effect Transistors to create a 4 channel digital device (non-contacting) whose output converts the motor shaft position into a coded signal. The FCM must supply 5VDC (+/- 0.5v) to the sensor and monitor the shift motor position. The four channels are denoted A, B, C, and D. The sensor is mechanically linked to the shaft of the cam which causes the transfer case shifting. The mode sensor draws less than 53 mA. Operation OPERATION During normal vehicle operation, the Front Control Module (FCM) monitors the mode sensor outputs at least every 250 (+/-50) milliseconds when the shift motor is stationary and 400 microseconds when the shift motor is active. A mode sensor signal between 3.8 Volts and 0.8 Volts is considered to be undefined. Refer to for the relative angles of the transfer case shift sector versus the interpreted transfer case gear operating mode. Refer to the sensor codes returned to the FCM for each transfer case mode sensor position. The various between gears positions can also be referred as the transfer case's coarse position. These coarse positions come into play during shift attempts. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Gear Sensor/Switch, Transfer Case > Component Information > Description and Operation > NV244 GENII Transfer Case > Page 6364 Gear Sensor/Switch: Description and Operation NV271 Transfer Case Description DESCRIPTION The transfer case position sensor is an electronic device whose output can be interpreted to indicate the transfer case's current operating mode. The sensor consists of a five position, resistive multiplexed circuit which returns a specific resistance value to the Powertrain Control Module (PCM) for each transfer case operating mode. The sensor is located on the top of the transfer case, just left of the transfer case centerline and rides against the sector plate roostercomb. The PCM supplies 5VDC (+/- 0.5V) to the sensor and monitors the return voltage to determine the sector plate, and therefore the transfer case, position. Operation OPERATION Position Sensor Linear Movement During normal vehicle operation, the Powertrain Control Module (PCM) monitors the transfer case position sensor return voltage to determine the operating mode of the transfer case. Refer to the Operating Mode Versus Resistance table for the correct resistance for each position. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Gear Sensor/Switch, Transfer Case > Component Information > Description and Operation > NV244 GENII Transfer Case > Page 6365 Gear Sensor/Switch: Description and Operation NV243 Transfer Case Description DESCRIPTION The transfer case mode sensor (1) is an electronic device whose output can be interpreted to indicate the shift motor shaft's rotary position. The sensor consists of a magnetic ring and four Hall Effect Transistors to create a 4 channel digital device (non-contacting) whose output converts the motor shaft position into a coded signal. The TCCM must supply 5VDC (+/- 0.5v) to the sensor and monitor the shift motor position. The four channels are denoted A, B, C, and D. The sensor is mechanically linked to the shaft of the cam which causes the transfer case shifting. The mode sensor draws less than 53 mA. Operation OPERATION During normal vehicle operation, the Transfer Case Control Module (TCCM) monitors the mode sensor outputs at least every 250 (+/-50) milliseconds when the shift motor is stationary and 400 microseconds when the shift motor is active. A mode sensor signal between 3.8 Volts and 0.8 Volts is considered to be undefined. Refer to SECTOR ANGLES vs.TRANSFER CASE POSITION for the relative angles of the transfer case shift sector versus the interpreted transfer case gear operating mode. Refer to MODE SENSOR CHANNEL STATES for the sensor codes returned to the TCCM for each transfer case mode sensor position. The various between gears positions can also be referred as the transfer case's coarse position. These coarse positions come into play during shift attempts. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Gear Sensor/Switch, Transfer Case > Component Information > Description and Operation > NV244 GENII Transfer Case > Page 6366 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Gear Sensor/Switch, Transfer Case > Component Information > Description and Operation > NV244 GENII Transfer Case > Page 6367 Gear Sensor/Switch: Description and Operation NV273 Transfer Case Description DESCRIPTION The transfer case mode sensor (1) is an electronic device whose output can be interpreted to indicate the shift motor shaft's rotary position. The sensor consists of a magnetic ring and four Hall Effect Transistors to create a 4 channel digital device (non-contacting) whose output converts the motor shaft position into a coded signal. The TCCM must supply 5VDC (+/- 0.5v) to the sensor and monitor the shift motor position. The four channels are denoted A, B, C, and D. The sensor is mechanically linked to the shaft of the cam which causes the transfer case shifting. The mode sensor draws less than 53 mA. Operation OPERATION During normal vehicle operation, the Transfer Case Control Module (TCCM) monitors the mode sensor outputs at least every 250 (+/-50) milliseconds when the shift motor is stationary and 400 microseconds when the shift motor is active. A mode sensor signal between 3.8 Volts and 0.8 Volts is considered to be undefined. Refer to SECTOR ANGLES vs.TRANSFER CASE POSITION for the relative angles of the transfer case shift sector versus the interpreted transfer case gear operating mode. Refer to MODE SENSOR CHANNEL STATES for the sensor codes returned to the TCCM for each transfer case mode sensor position. The various between gears positions can also be referred as the transfer case's coarse position. These coarse positions come into play during shift attempts. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Gear Sensor/Switch, Transfer Case > Component Information > Description and Operation > NV244 GENII Transfer Case > Page 6368 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Gear Sensor/Switch, Transfer Case > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Gear Sensor/Switch: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL 1. Raise and support the vehicle. 2. Disengage the transfer case position sensor connector from the position sensor. 3. Remove the position sensor from the transfer case. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Gear Sensor/Switch, Transfer Case > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 6371 Gear Sensor/Switch: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION 1. Inspect the o-ring seal on the transfer case position sensor. Replace the o-ring if necessary. 2. Install the transfer case position sensor into the transfer case. Torque the sensor to 27 Nm (20 ft.lbs.). 3. Engage the transfer case position sensor connector to the position sensor. 4. Lower vehicle. 5. Verify proper sensor operation. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Speed Sensor, Transfer Case > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Prop Shaft Speed-Front Speed Sensor: Locations Sensor-Prop Shaft Speed-Front Component ID: 435 Component : SENSOR-PROP SHAFT SPEED-FRONT Connector: Name : SENSOR-PROP SHAFT SPEED-FRONT Color : # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (FULL TIME ETC) Pin Circuit Description 1 T71 20YL/OR INPUT SPEED SENSOR 2 (N3) RETURN 2 T340 20DG/VT INPUT SPEED SENSOR 2 (N3) SIGNAL Component Location - 21 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Speed Sensor, Transfer Case > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Prop Shaft Speed-Front > Page 6376 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Speed Sensor, Transfer Case > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Prop Shaft Speed-Front > Page 6377 Speed Sensor: Locations Sensor-Prop Shaft Speed-Rear Component ID: 436 Component : SENSOR-PROP SHAFT SPEED-REAR Connector: Name : SENSOR-PROP SHAFT SPEED-REAR Color : # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (FULL TIME ETC) Pin Circuit Description 1 T70 20YL INPUT SPEED SENSOR 1 (N2) SIGNAL 2 T341 20DG/VT INPUT SPEED SENSOR 1 (N2) RETURN Component Location - 21 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Speed Sensor, Transfer Case > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Prop Shaft Speed-Front > Page 6378 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Speed Sensor, Transfer Case > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Prop Shaft Speed-Front Speed Sensor: Diagrams Sensor-Prop Shaft Speed-Front Component ID: 435 Component : SENSOR-PROP SHAFT SPEED-FRONT Connector: Name : SENSOR-PROP SHAFT SPEED-FRONT Color : # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (FULL TIME ETC) Pin Circuit Description 1 T71 20YL/OR INPUT SPEED SENSOR 2 (N3) RETURN 2 T340 20DG/VT INPUT SPEED SENSOR 2 (N3) SIGNAL Component Location - 21 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Speed Sensor, Transfer Case > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Prop Shaft Speed-Front > Page 6381 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Speed Sensor, Transfer Case > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Prop Shaft Speed-Front > Page 6382 Speed Sensor: Diagrams Sensor-Prop Shaft Speed-Rear Component ID: 436 Component : SENSOR-PROP SHAFT SPEED-REAR Connector: Name : SENSOR-PROP SHAFT SPEED-REAR Color : # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (FULL TIME ETC) Pin Circuit Description 1 T70 20YL INPUT SPEED SENSOR 1 (N2) SIGNAL 2 T341 20DG/VT INPUT SPEED SENSOR 1 (N2) RETURN Component Location - 21 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Speed Sensor, Transfer Case > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Prop Shaft Speed-Front > Page 6383 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Speed Sensor, Transfer Case > Component Information > Service and Repair > Sensor-Output Shaft Speed-Front Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Sensor-Output Shaft Speed-Front Removal REMOVAL 1. Raise the vehicle on a suitable hoist. 2. Disengage the wiring connector from the front output shaft speed sensor (1). 3. Remove the front output shaft speed sensor from the transfer case. Installation INSTALLATION 1. Install the front output shaft speed sensor (1) into the transfer case. Tighten the speed sensor to 17 Nm (12.5 ft.lbs.). 2. Engage the wiring connector to the front output shaft speed sensor. 3. Lower the vehicle. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Speed Sensor, Transfer Case > Component Information > Service and Repair > Sensor-Output Shaft Speed-Front > Page 6386 Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Sensor-Output Shaft Speed-Rear Removal REMOVAL 1. Raise the vehicle on a suitable hoist. 2. Disengage the wiring connector from the rear output shaft speed sensor (1). 3. Remove the rear output shaft speed sensor from the transfer case. Installation INSTALLATION 1. Install the rear output shaft speed sensor (1) into the transfer case. Tighten the speed sensor to 17 Nm (12.5 ft.lbs.). 2. Engage the wiring connector to the rear output shaft speed sensor. 3. Lower the vehicle. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 18-005-08B > Aug > 08 > Engine Controls - False Oil Change Indicator PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: Customer Interest Engine Controls - False Oil Change Indicator NUMBER: 18-005-08 REV. B GROUP: Vehicle Performance DATE: August 20, 2008 THIS BULLETIN SUPERSEDES TECHNICAL SERVICE BULLETIN 18-005-08 REV. A, DATED JUNE 13, 2008, WHICH SHOULD BE REMOVED FROM YOUR FILES. ALL REVISIONS ARE HIGHLIGHTED WITH **ASTERISKS** AND INCLUDE ADDITIONAL MODELS. THE StarSCAN(R) FLASH FILES FOR THIS BULLETIN MUST BE RETRIEVED FROM THE INTERNET. StarSCAN(R) SOFTWARE LEVEL MUST BE AT RELEASE 8.05 OR HIGHER FOR THIS BULLETIN. StarMOBILE STANDALONE MODE OR StarMOBILE DESKTOP CLIENT MAY ALSO BE USED TO PERFORM THIS PROCEDURE. SUBJECT: FLASH: Turn Off Oil Change Indicator Message OVERVIEW: This bulletin involves selectively erasing and reprogramming the Powertrain Control Module (PCM). MODELS: **2008 (DR) Ram Truck (International Markets)** **2008 (HB) Durango (International Markets)** **2007 - 2008 (JK) Wrangler (International Markets)** **2007 (JK) wrangler** **2008 (KA) Nitro (International Markets)** **2008 (ND) Dakota (International Markets)** 2008 (WH) Grand Cherokee (International Markets) 2008 (XH) Commander (International Markets) NOTE: This bulletin applies to: - **2007 JK vehicles built with a 3.8L engine (sales code EGK) after June 17, 2008 (MDH 0617XX)** - **2008 JK vehicles built with a 3.8L engine (sales code EGK) before April 28, 2008 (MDH 0428XX)** - **2008 DR/HB/ND vehicles built with a 4.7L engine (sales code EVE )** - WK/WH vehicles built with a 4.7L engine (sales code EVE) built before January 25, 2008 (0125XXMDH) - KA vehicles equipped with a 4.0L engine (sales code EGS) built before July 8.2008 (MDH 0708XX) SYMPTOM/CONDITION: Some international vehicle's may experience message on the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) or in the Odometer that tells the driver an oil change is necessary after 3000 miles. This message should not be displayed for these international vehicles and this PCM flash will turn this feature off. DIAGNOSIS: Using a Scan Tool (StarSCAN(R)) with the appropriate Diagnostic Procedures available in TechCONNECT, verify all engine systems are functioning as designed. If DTC's are present record them on the repair order and repair as necessary before proceeding further with this bulletin. If no DTC's are present, perform the Repair Procedure. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 18-005-08B > Aug > 08 > Engine Controls - False Oil Change Indicator > Page 6395 SPECIAL TOOLS / EQUIPMENT REQUIRED: REPAIR PROCEDURE - USING THE INTERNET TO RETRIEVE THE FLASH FILE: NOTE: Before performing this Repair Procedure, the operating software in the StarSCAN(R) must be programmed with software release level 8.05 or higher. The software release level is visible in the blue header at the top of the StarSCAN(R) screen. NOTE: The StarSCAN(R) diagnostic scan tool fully supports Internet connectivity. However, to take advantage of this feature you must first configure the StarSCAN(R) for your dealership's network. Make sure the StarSCAN(R) is configured to the dealership's network before proceeding. For instruction on setting up your StarSCAN(R) for the dealer's network refer to either: "DealerCONNECT > Service > StarSCAN and StarMOBILE tools > Online Documentation", or refer to the StarSCAN(R) Quick Start Networking Guide. The StarSCAN(R) Quick Start Networking Guide is also available on the website under the "Download Center". NOTE: If this flash process is interrupted/aborted, the flash should be restarted. 1. Open the hood and install a battery charger. Using a voltmeter, verify that the charging rate provides 13.2 - 13.5 volts. Set the battery charger to continuous charge. Do not allow the charger to time out during the flash process. Remove the charger from the battery when the flash process is complete. NOTE: Do not allow the charging voltage to climb above 13.5 volts during the flash process. 2. Connect the CH9410 StarSCAN(R) ethernet cable to the StarSCAN(R) and the dealer's network drop. 3. Connect the CH9404D StarSCAN(R) vehicle cable to the StarSCAN(R) and the vehicle. 4. Power ON the StarSCAN(R). 5. Turn the ignition switch on. 6. Retrieve the old PCM part number. Using the StarSCAN(R) at the "Home" screen: a. Select "ECU View" b. Touch the screen to highlight the PCM in the list of modules. c. Select "More Options" d. Select "ECU Flash". e. Record the part number at the top of the "Flash PCM" screen for later reference. f. Select "Browse for New File". Follow the on screen instructions. g. Select "Download to Scantool". h. Select "Close" after the download is complete, then select "Back". i. Highlight the listed calibration. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 18-005-08B > Aug > 08 > Engine Controls - False Oil Change Indicator > Page 6396 j. Select "Update Controller". k. When the update is complete, select "OK". 7. Verify the part number at the top of the "Flash PCM" screen has updated to the new part number. NOTE: Due to the PCM programming procedure, a DTC may be set in other modules within the vehicle, if so equipped. Some DTC's may cause the MIL to illuminate. From the "Home" screen select "System View". Then select "All DTCs". Press "Clear All Stored DTCs" if there are any DTCs shown on the list. POLICY: Reimbursable within the provisions of the warranty. TIME ALLOWANCE: FAILURE CODE: Disclaimer: This bulletin is supplied as technical information only and is not an authorization for repair. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 18-005-08B > Aug > 08 > Engine Controls - False Oil Change Indicator PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine Controls False Oil Change Indicator NUMBER: 18-005-08 REV. B GROUP: Vehicle Performance DATE: August 20, 2008 THIS BULLETIN SUPERSEDES TECHNICAL SERVICE BULLETIN 18-005-08 REV. A, DATED JUNE 13, 2008, WHICH SHOULD BE REMOVED FROM YOUR FILES. ALL REVISIONS ARE HIGHLIGHTED WITH **ASTERISKS** AND INCLUDE ADDITIONAL MODELS. THE StarSCAN(R) FLASH FILES FOR THIS BULLETIN MUST BE RETRIEVED FROM THE INTERNET. StarSCAN(R) SOFTWARE LEVEL MUST BE AT RELEASE 8.05 OR HIGHER FOR THIS BULLETIN. StarMOBILE STANDALONE MODE OR StarMOBILE DESKTOP CLIENT MAY ALSO BE USED TO PERFORM THIS PROCEDURE. SUBJECT: FLASH: Turn Off Oil Change Indicator Message OVERVIEW: This bulletin involves selectively erasing and reprogramming the Powertrain Control Module (PCM). MODELS: **2008 (DR) Ram Truck (International Markets)** **2008 (HB) Durango (International Markets)** **2007 - 2008 (JK) Wrangler (International Markets)** **2007 (JK) wrangler** **2008 (KA) Nitro (International Markets)** **2008 (ND) Dakota (International Markets)** 2008 (WH) Grand Cherokee (International Markets) 2008 (XH) Commander (International Markets) NOTE: This bulletin applies to: - **2007 JK vehicles built with a 3.8L engine (sales code EGK) after June 17, 2008 (MDH 0617XX)** - **2008 JK vehicles built with a 3.8L engine (sales code EGK) before April 28, 2008 (MDH 0428XX)** - **2008 DR/HB/ND vehicles built with a 4.7L engine (sales code EVE )** - WK/WH vehicles built with a 4.7L engine (sales code EVE) built before January 25, 2008 (0125XXMDH) - KA vehicles equipped with a 4.0L engine (sales code EGS) built before July 8.2008 (MDH 0708XX) SYMPTOM/CONDITION: Some international vehicle's may experience message on the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) or in the Odometer that tells the driver an oil change is necessary after 3000 miles. This message should not be displayed for these international vehicles and this PCM flash will turn this feature off. DIAGNOSIS: Using a Scan Tool (StarSCAN(R)) with the appropriate Diagnostic Procedures available in TechCONNECT, verify all engine systems are functioning as designed. If DTC's are present record them on the repair order and repair as necessary before proceeding further with this bulletin. If no DTC's are present, perform the Repair Procedure. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 18-005-08B > Aug > 08 > Engine Controls - False Oil Change Indicator > Page 6402 SPECIAL TOOLS / EQUIPMENT REQUIRED: REPAIR PROCEDURE - USING THE INTERNET TO RETRIEVE THE FLASH FILE: NOTE: Before performing this Repair Procedure, the operating software in the StarSCAN(R) must be programmed with software release level 8.05 or higher. The software release level is visible in the blue header at the top of the StarSCAN(R) screen. NOTE: The StarSCAN(R) diagnostic scan tool fully supports Internet connectivity. However, to take advantage of this feature you must first configure the StarSCAN(R) for your dealership's network. Make sure the StarSCAN(R) is configured to the dealership's network before proceeding. For instruction on setting up your StarSCAN(R) for the dealer's network refer to either: "DealerCONNECT > Service > StarSCAN and StarMOBILE tools > Online Documentation", or refer to the StarSCAN(R) Quick Start Networking Guide. The StarSCAN(R) Quick Start Networking Guide is also available on the website under the "Download Center". NOTE: If this flash process is interrupted/aborted, the flash should be restarted. 1. Open the hood and install a battery charger. Using a voltmeter, verify that the charging rate provides 13.2 - 13.5 volts. Set the battery charger to continuous charge. Do not allow the charger to time out during the flash process. Remove the charger from the battery when the flash process is complete. NOTE: Do not allow the charging voltage to climb above 13.5 volts during the flash process. 2. Connect the CH9410 StarSCAN(R) ethernet cable to the StarSCAN(R) and the dealer's network drop. 3. Connect the CH9404D StarSCAN(R) vehicle cable to the StarSCAN(R) and the vehicle. 4. Power ON the StarSCAN(R). 5. Turn the ignition switch on. 6. Retrieve the old PCM part number. Using the StarSCAN(R) at the "Home" screen: a. Select "ECU View" b. Touch the screen to highlight the PCM in the list of modules. c. Select "More Options" d. Select "ECU Flash". e. Record the part number at the top of the "Flash PCM" screen for later reference. f. Select "Browse for New File". Follow the on screen instructions. g. Select "Download to Scantool". h. Select "Close" after the download is complete, then select "Back". i. Highlight the listed calibration. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 18-005-08B > Aug > 08 > Engine Controls - False Oil Change Indicator > Page 6403 j. Select "Update Controller". k. When the update is complete, select "OK". 7. Verify the part number at the top of the "Flash PCM" screen has updated to the new part number. NOTE: Due to the PCM programming procedure, a DTC may be set in other modules within the vehicle, if so equipped. Some DTC's may cause the MIL to illuminate. From the "Home" screen select "System View". Then select "All DTCs". Press "Clear All Stored DTCs" if there are any DTCs shown on the list. POLICY: Reimbursable within the provisions of the warranty. TIME ALLOWANCE: FAILURE CODE: Disclaimer: This bulletin is supplied as technical information only and is not an authorization for repair. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Overdrive Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > 42RLE Automatic Transmission Overdrive Solenoid: Description and Operation 42RLE Automatic Transmission Description DESCRIPTION The Solenoid/Pressure Switch Assembly (1) is inside the transmission and mounted to the valve body assembly. The assembly consists of four solenoids that control hydraulic pressure to the L/R, 2/4, OD, and UD friction elements (transmission clutches), and the torque converter clutch. The reverse clutch is controlled by line pressure from the manual valve in the valve body. The solenoids are contained within the Solenoid/Pressure Switch Assembly, and can only be serviced by replacing the assembly. The solenoid assembly also contains pressure switches that monitor and send hydraulic circuit information to the TCM. Likewise, the pressure switches can only be service by replacing the assembly. Operation OPERATION SOLENOIDS The solenoids receive electrical power from the Transmission Control Relay through a single wire. The TCM energizes or operates the solenoids individually by grounding the return wire of the solenoid needed. When a solenoid is energized, the solenoid valve shifts, and a fluid passage is opened or closed (vented or applied), depending on its default operating state. The result is an apply or release of a frictional element. The 2/4 and UD solenoids are normally applied, which allows fluid to pass through in their relaxed or "off" state. By design, this allows transmission limp-in (P,R,N,2) in the event of an electrical failure. The continuity of the solenoids and circuits are periodically tested. Each solenoid is turned on or off depending on its current state. An inductive spike should be detected by the TCM during this test. If no spike is detected, the circuit is tested again to verify the failure. In addition to the periodic testing, the solenoid circuits are tested if a speed ratio or pressure switch error occurs. PRESSURE SWITCHES The TCM relies on three pressure switches to monitor fluid pressure in the L/R, 2/4, and OD hydraulic circuits. The primary purpose of these switches is to help the TCM detect when clutch circuit hydraulic failures occur. The range for the pressure switch closing and opening points is 11-23 psi. Typically the switch opening point will be approximately one psi lower than the closing point. For example, a switch may close at 18 psi and open at 17 psi. The switches are continuously monitored by the TCM for the correct states (open or closed) in each gear as shown in the following chart: Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Overdrive Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 6411 A Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) will set if the TCM senses any switch open or closed at the wrong time in a given gear. The TCM also tests the 2/4 and OD pressure switches when they are normally off (OD and 2/4 are tested in 1st gear, OD in 2nd gear, and 2/4 in 3rd gear). The test simply verifies that they are operational, by looking for a closed state when the corresponding element is applied. Immediately after a shift into 1st, 2nd, or 3rd gear with the engine speed above 1000 rpm, the TCM momentarily turns on element pressure to the 2/4 and/or OD clutch circuits to identify that the appropriate switch has closed. If it doesn't close, it is tested again. If the switch fails to close the second time, the appropriate Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) will set. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Overdrive Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 6412 Overdrive Solenoid: Description and Operation 545RFE Automatic Transmission Description DESCRIPTION The transmission solenoid/TRS assembly is internal to the transmission and mounted on the valve body assembly. The assembly consists of six solenoids that control hydraulic pressure to the six friction elements (transmission clutches), and the torque converter clutch. The pressure control solenoid is located on the side of the solenoid/TRS assembly. The solenoid/TRS assembly also contains the Transmission Range Sensor (TRS) and five pressure switches that feed information to the TCM. Operation OPERATION SOLENOIDS Solenoids are used to control the L/R, 2C, 4C, OD, and UD friction elements. The reverse clutch is controlled by line pressure and the position of the manual valve in the valve body. All the solenoids are contained within the Solenoid and Pressure Switch Assembly. The solenoid and pressure switch assembly contains one additional solenoid, Multi-Select (MS), which serves primarily to provide 2nd and 3rd gear limp-in operation. The solenoids receive electrical power from the Transmission Control Relay through a single wire. The TCM energizes or operates the solenoids individually by grounding the return wire of the solenoid as necessary. When a solenoid is energized, the solenoid valve shifts, and a fluid passage is opened or closed (vented or applied), depending on its default operating state. The result is an apply or release of a frictional element. The MS and UD solenoids are normally applied to allow transmission limp-in in the event of an electrical failure. The continuity of the solenoids and circuits are periodically tested. Each solenoid is turned on or off depending on its current state. An inductive spike should be detected by the TCM during this test. If no spike is detected, the circuit is tested again to verify the failure. In addition to the periodic testing, the solenoid circuits are tested if a speed ratio or pressure switch error occurs. PRESSURE SWITCHES The TCM relies on five pressure switches to monitor fluid pressure in the L/R, 2C, 4C, UD, and OD hydraulic circuits. The primary purpose of these switches is to help the TCM detect when clutch circuit hydraulic failures occur. The switches close at 23 psi and open at 11 psi, and simply indicate whether or not pressure exists. The switches are continuously monitored by the TCM for the correct states (open or closed) in each gear as shown in the following charts and 545RFE PRESSURE SWITCH STATES: Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Overdrive Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 6413 A Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) will set if the TCM senses any switch open or closed at the wrong time in a given gear. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Overdrive Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 6414 Overdrive Solenoid: Description and Operation 68RFE Automatic Transmission Description DESCRIPTION The transmission solenoid/TRS assembly is internal to the transmission and mounted on the valve body assembly. The assembly consists of six solenoids that control hydraulic pressure to the six friction elements (transmission clutches), and the torque converter clutch. The pressure control solenoid is located on the side of the solenoid/TRS assembly. The solenoid/TRS assembly also contains the Transmission Range Sensor (TRS) and five pressure switches that feed information to the TCM. Operation OPERATION SOLENOIDS Solenoids are used to control the L/R, 2C, 4C, OD, and UD friction elements. The reverse clutch is controlled by line pressure and the position of the manual valve in the valve body. All the solenoids are contained within the Solenoid and Pressure Switch Assembly. The solenoid and pressure switch assembly contains one additional solenoid, Multi-Select (MS), which serves primarily to provide 3rd gear and reverse limp-in operation. The TCM energizes or operates the solenoids individually by grounding the return wire of the solenoid as necessary. When a solenoid is energized, the solenoid valve shifts, and a fluid passage is opened or closed (vented or applied), depending on its default operating state. The result is an apply or release of a frictional element. The MS and UD solenoids are normally applied to allow transmission limp-in in the event of an electrical failure. The continuity of the solenoids and circuits are periodically tested. Each solenoid is turned on or off depending on its current state. An inductive spike should be detected by the TCM during this test. If no spike is detected, the circuit is tested again to verify the failure. In addition to the periodic testing, the solenoid circuits are tested if a speed ratio or pressure switch error occurs. PRESSURE SWITCHES The TCM relies on five pressure switches to monitor fluid pressure in the L/R, 2C, 4C, UD, and OD hydraulic circuits. The primary purpose of these switches is to help the TCM detect when clutch circuit hydraulic failures occur. The switches close at 23 psi and open at 11 psi, and simply indicate whether or not pressure exists. The switches are continuously monitored by the TCM for the correct states (open or closed) in each gear as shown in the following charts and Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Overdrive Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 6415 A Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) will set if the TCM senses any switch open or closed at the wrong time in a given gear. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Overdrive Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 42RLE Automatic Transmission Overdrive Solenoid: Service and Repair 42RLE Automatic Transmission Removal REMOVAL NOTE: If the Solenoid/Pressure Switch Assembly is being replaced, the Quick Learn Procedure must be performed. See: Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Transmission Control Module/TCM Quick Learn 1. Raise vehicle on hoist. 2. Remove valve body assembly from transmission. See: Automatic Transmission/Transaxle/Valve Body/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/42RLE Automatic Transmission/Removal 3. Remove Solenoid/Pressure Switch Assembly retaining screws (2) from solenoid. 4. Remove Solenoid/Pressure Switch Assembly (1) and screen from valve body (2). Installation INSTALLATION NOTE: If the Solenoid/Pressure Switch assembly is being replaced, the Quick Learn Procedure must be performed. See: Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Transmission Control Module/TCM Quick Learn Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Overdrive Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 6418 1. Install Solenoid/Pressure Switch Assembly (1) and screen (3) to the separator and transfer plates. 2. Install and tighten retaining screws (2) to 5.5 Nm (50 in. lbs.) torque. 3. Install valve body. See: Automatic Transmission/Transaxle/Valve Body/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/42RLE Automatic Transmission/Installation Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Overdrive Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 6419 Overdrive Solenoid: Service and Repair 545RFE Automatic Transmission Removal REMOVAL NOTE: If the Transmission Solenoid/TRS Assembly is being replaced, the Quick Learn Procedure must be performed. See: Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Transmission Control Module/TCM Quick Learn 1. Remove the valve body from the transmission. See: Automatic Transmission/Transaxle/Valve Body/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/545RFE Automatic Transmission/Removal 2. Remove the bolts (1) holding the transmission solenoid/TRS assembly onto the valve body. 3. Separate the transmission solenoid/TRS assembly from the valve body. Installation INSTALLATION Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Overdrive Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 6420 1. Place TRS selector plate in the PARK position. 2. Position the transmission solenoid/TRS assembly onto the valve body. Be sure that both alignment dowels are fully seated in the valve body and that the TRS switch contacts are properly positioned in the selector plate 3. Install the bolts (1) to hold the transmission solenoid/TRS assembly onto the valve body. 4. Tighten the solenoid assembly screws adjacent to the arrows cast into the bottom of the valve body first. Tighten the screws to 6 Nm (50 in.lbs.). 5. Tighten the remainder of the solenoid assembly screws to 6 Nm (50 in.lbs.). 6. Install the valve body into the transmission. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Overdrive Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 6421 Overdrive Solenoid: Service and Repair 68RFE Automatic Transmission Removal REMOVAL NOTE: If the Transmission Solenoid/TRS Assembly is being replaced, the Quick Learn Procedure must be performed. See: Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Transmission Control Module/TCM Quick Learn 1. Remove the valve body from the transmission. 2. Remove the bolts (1) holding the transmission solenoid/TRS assembly onto the valve body. 3. Separate the transmission solenoid/TRS assembly from the valve body. Installation INSTALLATION Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Overdrive Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 6422 1. Place TRS selector plate in the PARK position. 2. Position the transmission solenoid/TRS assembly onto the valve body. Be sure that both alignment dowels are fully seated in the valve body and that the TRS switch contacts are properly positioned in the selector plate 3. Install the bolts (1) to hold the transmission solenoid/TRS assembly onto the valve body. 4. Tighten the solenoid assembly screws adjacent to the arrows cast into the bottom of the valve body first. Tighten the screws to 6 Nm (50 in.lbs.). 5. Tighten the remainder of the solenoid assembly screws to 6 Nm (50 in.lbs.). 6. Install the valve body into the transmission. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Assembly-Line Pressure Sensor/Variable Force Solenoid Pressure Regulating Solenoid: Locations Assembly-Line Pressure Sensor/Variable Force Solenoid Component ID: 17 Component : ASSEMBLY-LINE PRESSURE SENSOR/VARIABLE FORCE SOLENOID Connector: Name : ASSEMBLY-LINE PRESSURE SENSOR/VARIABLE FORCE SOLENOID Color : BLACK # of pins : 6 Qualifier : (RLE) Pin Circuit Description 1-2 F856 20YL/PK 5 VOLT SUPPLY 3 T38 20YL/BR LINE PRESSURE SIGNAL 4 K900 20DB/DG SENSOR GROUND 5 T16 18YL/OR TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT 6 T118 20DG LP VFS CONTROL Component Location - 19 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Assembly-Line Pressure Sensor/Variable Force Solenoid > Page 6427 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Assembly-Line Pressure Sensor/Variable Force Solenoid > Page 6428 Pressure Regulating Solenoid: Locations Assembly-Transmission Solenoid Component ID 15 Component ID: 15 Component : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID Connector: Name : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID Color : # of pins : 8 Qualifier : (RE) Pin Circuit Description 1 T16 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT 2 F856 18YL/PK 5 VOLT SUPPLY 3 K900 20DB/DG SENSOR GROUND 4 T38 18YL/BR GOVERNOR PRESSURE SENSOR SIGNAL 5 T118 18DG GOVERNOR PRESSURE SOLENOID CONTROL 6 T9 18DG/TN 3-4 SOLENOID CONTROL 7 T75 18YL/LB TORQUE CONVERTER CLUTCH SOLENOID CONTROL 8 T54 18DG/OR TRANSMISSION TEMPERATURE SIGNAL Component Location - 20 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Assembly-Line Pressure Sensor/Variable Force Solenoid > Page 6429 Component Location - 26 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Assembly-Line Pressure Sensor/Variable Force Solenoid > Page 6430 Connector: Name : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID C1 Color : # of pins : 10 Qualifier : (RC) Pin Circuit Description 1 T806 20DG/VT PRESSURE SIGNAL 7 2 T804 20YL/DB PRESSURE SIGNAL 5 3 T54 20DG/OR TRANSMISSION TEMPERATURE SIGNAL 4 T817 20YL/BR LINEAR 3 CONTROL Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Assembly-Line Pressure Sensor/Variable Force Solenoid > Page 6431 5 T813 20DG/LG LINEAR 1 CONTROL 6 T807 20DG/WT PRESSURE SIGNAL 8 7 T803 20DG/BR PRESSURE SIGNAL 4 8 T820 20YL/WT TEMPERATURE SENSOR GROUND 9 T816 20YL/PK LINEAR 3 GROUND 10 T812 20DG/TN LINEAR 1 GROUND Component Location - 20 Component Location - 26 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Assembly-Line Pressure Sensor/Variable Force Solenoid > Page 6432 Connector: Name : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID C2 Color : # of pins : 12 Qualifier : (RC) Pin Circuit Description 1 T800 20DG/BR PRESSURE SIGNAL 1 2 T805 20DG/OR PRESSURE SIGNAL 6 3 T809 20DG/YL SHIFT 2 CONTROL 4 T811 20DG/LB SHIFT 4 CONTROL Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Assembly-Line Pressure Sensor/Variable Force Solenoid > Page 6433 5 T818 20YL/OR LINEAR 4 GROUND 6 T814 20YL/BR LINEAR 2 GROUND 7 T801 20DG/RD PRESSURE SIGNAL 2 8 T802 20DG/PK PRESSURE SIGNAL 3 9 T810 20DG/DB SHIFT 3 CONTROL 10 T808 20DG/GY SHIFT 1 CONTROL 11 T821 20YL/GY LINEAR 4 CONTROL 12 T815 20YL/RD LINEAR 2 CONTROL Component Location - 20 Component Location - 26 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Assembly-Line Pressure Sensor/Variable Force Solenoid > Page 6434 Component ID 19 Component ID: 19 Component : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID Connector: Name : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID Color : # of pins : 8 Qualifier : (RE) Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Assembly-Line Pressure Sensor/Variable Force Solenoid > Page 6435 Pin Circuit Description 1 T16 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT 2 F856 18YL/PK 5 VOLT SUPPLY 3 K900 20DB/DG SENSOR GROUND 4 T38 18YL/BR GOVERNOR PRESSURE SENSOR SIGNAL 5 T118 18DG GOVERNOR PRESSURE SOLENOID CONTROL 6 T9 18DG/TN 3-4 SOLENOID CONTROL 7 T75 18YL/LB TORQUE CONVERTER CLUTCH SOLENOID CONTROL 8 T54 18DG/OR TRANSMISSION TEMPERATURE SIGNAL Component Location - 20 Component Location - 26 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Assembly-Line Pressure Sensor/Variable Force Solenoid > Page 6436 Connector: Name : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID C1 Color : # of pins : 10 Qualifier : (RC) Pin Circuit Description 1 T806 20DG/VT PRESSURE SIGNAL 7 2 T804 20YL/DB PRESSURE SIGNAL 5 3 T54 20DG/OR TRANSMISSION TEMPERATURE SIGNAL 4 T817 20YL/BR LINEAR 3 CONTROL Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Assembly-Line Pressure Sensor/Variable Force Solenoid > Page 6437 5 T813 20DG/LG LINEAR 1 CONTROL 6 T807 20DG/WT PRESSURE SIGNAL 8 7 T803 20DG/BR PRESSURE SIGNAL 4 8 T820 20YL/WT TEMPERATURE SENSOR GROUND 9 T816 20YL/PK LINEAR 3 GROUND 10 T812 20DG/TN LINEAR 1 GROUND Component Location - 20 Component Location - 26 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Assembly-Line Pressure Sensor/Variable Force Solenoid > Page 6438 Connector: Name : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID C2 Color : # of pins : 12 Qualifier : (RC) Pin Circuit Description 1 T800 20DG/BR PRESSURE SIGNAL 1 2 T805 20DG/OR PRESSURE SIGNAL 6 3 T809 20DG/YL SHIFT 2 CONTROL 4 T811 20DG/LB SHIFT 4 CONTROL Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Assembly-Line Pressure Sensor/Variable Force Solenoid > Page 6439 5 T818 20YL/OR LINEAR 4 GROUND 6 T814 20YL/BR LINEAR 2 GROUND 7 T801 20DG/RD PRESSURE SIGNAL 2 8 T802 20DG/PK PRESSURE SIGNAL 3 9 T810 20DG/DB SHIFT 3 CONTROL 10 T808 20DG/GY SHIFT 1 CONTROL 11 T821 20YL/GY LINEAR 4 CONTROL 12 T815 20YL/RD LINEAR 2 CONTROL Component Location - 20 Component Location - 26 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Assembly-Line Pressure Sensor/Variable Force Solenoid > Page 6440 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Assembly-Line Pressure Sensor/Variable Force Solenoid > Page 6441 Pressure Regulating Solenoid: Locations Assembly-Transmission Solenoid/Pressure Switch Component ID: 20 Component : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID/PRESSURE SWITCH Connector: Name : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID/PRESSURE SWITCH Color : LT. BROWN # of pins : 10 Qualifier : (RLE) Pin Circuit Description 1 T60 20YL/GY OD CONTROL 2 T59 20YL/LB UD CONTROL 3 T16 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT 4 T19 18YL/DB 2-4 CONTROL 5 T47 18YL/DG 2-4 PRESSURE SIGNAL 6 T9 20DG/TN OD PRESSURE SIGNAL 7 T20 20DG/WT L/R CONTROL 8-9-10 T50 20YL/TN L/R PRESSURE SIGNAL Component Location - 19 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Assembly-Line Pressure Sensor/Variable Force Solenoid > Page 6442 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Assembly-Line Pressure Sensor/Variable Force Solenoid > Page 6443 Pressure Regulating Solenoid: Locations Assembly-Transmission Solenoid/TRS Component ID: 21 Component : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID/TRS Connector: Name : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID/TRS Color : BLACK # of pins : 23 Qualifier : (RFE) Pin Circuit Description 1-2 T20 20DG/WT L/R CONTROL 3-4 T41 20YL/DB TRS T41 SIGNAL (P/N) 5 T42 20DG/YL TRS T42 SIGNAL 6-- 7 T60 20YL/GY OD SOLENOID CONTROL 8 T3 20DG/DB TRS T3 SIGNAL 9 T1 20DG/LB TRS T1 SIGNAL 10 T16 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT 11 T48 20BR/YL 4C PRESSURE SIGNAL 12 T118 20DG LINE PRESSURE CONTROL 13 T4 20DG/RD TRS T2 SIGNAL 13 T4 20DG/LB TRS T2 SIGNAL 14 T50 20DG/PK L/R PRESSURE SIGNAL 14 T50 20YL/TN L/R PRESSURE SIGNAL 15 T147 20DG/YL 2C PRESSURE SIGNAL 16 T9 20DG/TN OD PRESSURE SIGNAL 17 T59 20YL/LB UD CONTROL 18 T29 20YL/WT UD PRESSURE SIGNAL 19 T259 20YL/DG 4C CONTROL 20 T219 20YL/LG 2C CONTROL 21 T140 20YL/GY MS CONTROL 22 T160 20DG/WT SENSOR GROUND 22 K900 20DB/DG SENSOR GROUND 23 T54 20DG/OR TRANSMISSION TEMPERATURE SIGNAL Component Location - 21 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Assembly-Line Pressure Sensor/Variable Force Solenoid > Page 6444 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Assembly-Line Pressure Sensor/Variable Force Solenoid Pressure Regulating Solenoid: Diagrams Assembly-Line Pressure Sensor/Variable Force Solenoid Component ID: 17 Component : ASSEMBLY-LINE PRESSURE SENSOR/VARIABLE FORCE SOLENOID Connector: Name : ASSEMBLY-LINE PRESSURE SENSOR/VARIABLE FORCE SOLENOID Color : BLACK # of pins : 6 Qualifier : (RLE) Pin Circuit Description 1-2 F856 20YL/PK 5 VOLT SUPPLY 3 T38 20YL/BR LINE PRESSURE SIGNAL 4 K900 20DB/DG SENSOR GROUND 5 T16 18YL/OR TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT 6 T118 20DG LP VFS CONTROL Component Location - 19 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Assembly-Line Pressure Sensor/Variable Force Solenoid > Page 6447 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Assembly-Line Pressure Sensor/Variable Force Solenoid > Page 6448 Pressure Regulating Solenoid: Diagrams Assembly-Transmission Solenoid Component ID 15 Component ID: 15 Component : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID Connector: Name : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID Color : # of pins : 8 Qualifier : (RE) Pin Circuit Description 1 T16 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT 2 F856 18YL/PK 5 VOLT SUPPLY 3 K900 20DB/DG SENSOR GROUND 4 T38 18YL/BR GOVERNOR PRESSURE SENSOR SIGNAL 5 T118 18DG GOVERNOR PRESSURE SOLENOID CONTROL 6 T9 18DG/TN 3-4 SOLENOID CONTROL 7 T75 18YL/LB TORQUE CONVERTER CLUTCH SOLENOID CONTROL 8 T54 18DG/OR TRANSMISSION TEMPERATURE SIGNAL Component Location - 20 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Assembly-Line Pressure Sensor/Variable Force Solenoid > Page 6449 Component Location - 26 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Assembly-Line Pressure Sensor/Variable Force Solenoid > Page 6450 Connector: Name : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID C1 Color : # of pins : 10 Qualifier : (RC) Pin Circuit Description 1 T806 20DG/VT PRESSURE SIGNAL 7 2 T804 20YL/DB PRESSURE SIGNAL 5 3 T54 20DG/OR TRANSMISSION TEMPERATURE SIGNAL 4 T817 20YL/BR LINEAR 3 CONTROL Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Assembly-Line Pressure Sensor/Variable Force Solenoid > Page 6451 5 T813 20DG/LG LINEAR 1 CONTROL 6 T807 20DG/WT PRESSURE SIGNAL 8 7 T803 20DG/BR PRESSURE SIGNAL 4 8 T820 20YL/WT TEMPERATURE SENSOR GROUND 9 T816 20YL/PK LINEAR 3 GROUND 10 T812 20DG/TN LINEAR 1 GROUND Component Location - 20 Component Location - 26 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Assembly-Line Pressure Sensor/Variable Force Solenoid > Page 6452 Connector: Name : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID C2 Color : # of pins : 12 Qualifier : (RC) Pin Circuit Description 1 T800 20DG/BR PRESSURE SIGNAL 1 2 T805 20DG/OR PRESSURE SIGNAL 6 3 T809 20DG/YL SHIFT 2 CONTROL 4 T811 20DG/LB SHIFT 4 CONTROL Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Assembly-Line Pressure Sensor/Variable Force Solenoid > Page 6453 5 T818 20YL/OR LINEAR 4 GROUND 6 T814 20YL/BR LINEAR 2 GROUND 7 T801 20DG/RD PRESSURE SIGNAL 2 8 T802 20DG/PK PRESSURE SIGNAL 3 9 T810 20DG/DB SHIFT 3 CONTROL 10 T808 20DG/GY SHIFT 1 CONTROL 11 T821 20YL/GY LINEAR 4 CONTROL 12 T815 20YL/RD LINEAR 2 CONTROL Component Location - 20 Component Location - 26 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Assembly-Line Pressure Sensor/Variable Force Solenoid > Page 6454 Component ID 19 Component ID: 19 Component : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID Connector: Name : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID Color : # of pins : 8 Qualifier : (RE) Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Assembly-Line Pressure Sensor/Variable Force Solenoid > Page 6455 Pin Circuit Description 1 T16 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT 2 F856 18YL/PK 5 VOLT SUPPLY 3 K900 20DB/DG SENSOR GROUND 4 T38 18YL/BR GOVERNOR PRESSURE SENSOR SIGNAL 5 T118 18DG GOVERNOR PRESSURE SOLENOID CONTROL 6 T9 18DG/TN 3-4 SOLENOID CONTROL 7 T75 18YL/LB TORQUE CONVERTER CLUTCH SOLENOID CONTROL 8 T54 18DG/OR TRANSMISSION TEMPERATURE SIGNAL Component Location - 20 Component Location - 26 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Assembly-Line Pressure Sensor/Variable Force Solenoid > Page 6456 Connector: Name : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID C1 Color : # of pins : 10 Qualifier : (RC) Pin Circuit Description 1 T806 20DG/VT PRESSURE SIGNAL 7 2 T804 20YL/DB PRESSURE SIGNAL 5 3 T54 20DG/OR TRANSMISSION TEMPERATURE SIGNAL 4 T817 20YL/BR LINEAR 3 CONTROL Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Assembly-Line Pressure Sensor/Variable Force Solenoid > Page 6457 5 T813 20DG/LG LINEAR 1 CONTROL 6 T807 20DG/WT PRESSURE SIGNAL 8 7 T803 20DG/BR PRESSURE SIGNAL 4 8 T820 20YL/WT TEMPERATURE SENSOR GROUND 9 T816 20YL/PK LINEAR 3 GROUND 10 T812 20DG/TN LINEAR 1 GROUND Component Location - 20 Component Location - 26 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Assembly-Line Pressure Sensor/Variable Force Solenoid > Page 6458 Connector: Name : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID C2 Color : # of pins : 12 Qualifier : (RC) Pin Circuit Description 1 T800 20DG/BR PRESSURE SIGNAL 1 2 T805 20DG/OR PRESSURE SIGNAL 6 3 T809 20DG/YL SHIFT 2 CONTROL 4 T811 20DG/LB SHIFT 4 CONTROL Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Assembly-Line Pressure Sensor/Variable Force Solenoid > Page 6459 5 T818 20YL/OR LINEAR 4 GROUND 6 T814 20YL/BR LINEAR 2 GROUND 7 T801 20DG/RD PRESSURE SIGNAL 2 8 T802 20DG/PK PRESSURE SIGNAL 3 9 T810 20DG/DB SHIFT 3 CONTROL 10 T808 20DG/GY SHIFT 1 CONTROL 11 T821 20YL/GY LINEAR 4 CONTROL 12 T815 20YL/RD LINEAR 2 CONTROL Component Location - 20 Component Location - 26 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Assembly-Line Pressure Sensor/Variable Force Solenoid > Page 6460 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Assembly-Line Pressure Sensor/Variable Force Solenoid > Page 6461 Pressure Regulating Solenoid: Diagrams Assembly-Transmission Solenoid/Pressure Switch Component ID: 20 Component : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID/PRESSURE SWITCH Connector: Name : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID/PRESSURE SWITCH Color : LT. BROWN # of pins : 10 Qualifier : (RLE) Pin Circuit Description 1 T60 20YL/GY OD CONTROL 2 T59 20YL/LB UD CONTROL 3 T16 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT 4 T19 18YL/DB 2-4 CONTROL 5 T47 18YL/DG 2-4 PRESSURE SIGNAL 6 T9 20DG/TN OD PRESSURE SIGNAL 7 T20 20DG/WT L/R CONTROL 8-9-10 T50 20YL/TN L/R PRESSURE SIGNAL Component Location - 19 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Assembly-Line Pressure Sensor/Variable Force Solenoid > Page 6462 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Assembly-Line Pressure Sensor/Variable Force Solenoid > Page 6463 Pressure Regulating Solenoid: Diagrams Assembly-Transmission Solenoid/TRS Component ID: 21 Component : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID/TRS Connector: Name : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID/TRS Color : BLACK # of pins : 23 Qualifier : (RFE) Pin Circuit Description 1-2 T20 20DG/WT L/R CONTROL 3-4 T41 20YL/DB TRS T41 SIGNAL (P/N) 5 T42 20DG/YL TRS T42 SIGNAL 6-- 7 T60 20YL/GY OD SOLENOID CONTROL 8 T3 20DG/DB TRS T3 SIGNAL 9 T1 20DG/LB TRS T1 SIGNAL 10 T16 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT 11 T48 20BR/YL 4C PRESSURE SIGNAL 12 T118 20DG LINE PRESSURE CONTROL 13 T4 20DG/RD TRS T2 SIGNAL 13 T4 20DG/LB TRS T2 SIGNAL 14 T50 20DG/PK L/R PRESSURE SIGNAL 14 T50 20YL/TN L/R PRESSURE SIGNAL 15 T147 20DG/YL 2C PRESSURE SIGNAL 16 T9 20DG/TN OD PRESSURE SIGNAL 17 T59 20YL/LB UD CONTROL 18 T29 20YL/WT UD PRESSURE SIGNAL 19 T259 20YL/DG 4C CONTROL 20 T219 20YL/LG 2C CONTROL 21 T140 20YL/GY MS CONTROL 22 T160 20DG/WT SENSOR GROUND 22 K900 20DB/DG SENSOR GROUND 23 T54 20DG/OR TRANSMISSION TEMPERATURE SIGNAL Component Location - 21 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Assembly-Line Pressure Sensor/Variable Force Solenoid > Page 6464 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > 42RLE Automatic Transmission Pressure Regulating Solenoid: Description and Operation 42RLE Automatic Transmission Description DESCRIPTION The pressure control solenoid (1) is mounted on the top of the valve body, next to the line pressure sensor (2). The TCM utilizes a closed-loop system to control transmission line pressure. The system contains a variable force style solenoid, the Pressure Control Solenoid. The solenoid is duty cycle controlled by the TCM to vent the unnecessary line pressure supplied by the oil pump back to the sump. The system also contains a variable pressure style sensor, the Line Pressure Sensor, which is a direct input to the TCM. The line pressure solenoid monitors the transmission line pressure and completes the feedback loop to the TCM. The TCM uses this information to adjust its control of the pressure control solenoid to achieve the desired line pressure. Operation OPERATION The pressure control solenoid (PCS) is a variable force (VFS) style solenoid. A VFS solenoid is an electro-hydraulic actuator, combining a solenoid and a regulating valve. The transmission control module varies the current for the PCS, which varies the pressure in the line pressure hydraulic circuit. When the current (duty cycle) of the PCS is low, the pressure in the circuit is higher. At 0 current (0% duty cycle), the pressure is at the maximum value. Conversely, when the current is maximized (100% duty cycle), the pressure in the circuit is at the lowest possible value. Description DESCRIPTION Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 6467 The Solenoid/Pressure Switch Assembly (1) is inside the transmission and mounted to the valve body assembly. The assembly consists of four solenoids that control hydraulic pressure to the L/R, 2/4, OD, and UD friction elements (transmission clutches), and the torque converter clutch. The reverse clutch is controlled by line pressure from the manual valve in the valve body. The solenoids are contained within the Solenoid/Pressure Switch Assembly, and can only be serviced by replacing the assembly. The solenoid assembly also contains pressure switches that monitor and send hydraulic circuit information to the TCM. Likewise, the pressure switches can only be service by replacing the assembly. Operation OPERATION SOLENOIDS The solenoids receive electrical power from the Transmission Control Relay through a single wire. The TCM energizes or operates the solenoids individually by grounding the return wire of the solenoid needed. When a solenoid is energized, the solenoid valve shifts, and a fluid passage is opened or closed (vented or applied), depending on its default operating state. The result is an apply or release of a frictional element. The 2/4 and UD solenoids are normally applied, which allows fluid to pass through in their relaxed or "off" state. By design, this allows transmission limp-in (P,R,N,2) in the event of an electrical failure. The continuity of the solenoids and circuits are periodically tested. Each solenoid is turned on or off depending on its current state. An inductive spike should be detected by the TCM during this test. If no spike is detected, the circuit is tested again to verify the failure. In addition to the periodic testing, the solenoid circuits are tested if a speed ratio or pressure switch error occurs. PRESSURE SWITCHES The TCM relies on three pressure switches to monitor fluid pressure in the L/R, 2/4, and OD hydraulic circuits. The primary purpose of these switches is to help the TCM detect when clutch circuit hydraulic failures occur. The range for the pressure switch closing and opening points is 11-23 psi. Typically the switch opening point will be approximately one psi lower than the closing point. For example, a switch may close at 18 psi and open at 17 psi. The switches are continuously monitored by the TCM for the correct states (open or closed) in each gear as shown in the following chart: Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 6468 A Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) will set if the TCM senses any switch open or closed at the wrong time in a given gear. The TCM also tests the 2/4 and OD pressure switches when they are normally off (OD and 2/4 are tested in 1st gear, OD in 2nd gear, and 2/4 in 3rd gear). The test simply verifies that they are operational, by looking for a closed state when the corresponding element is applied. Immediately after a shift into 1st, 2nd, or 3rd gear with the engine speed above 1000 rpm, the TCM momentarily turns on element pressure to the 2/4 and/or OD clutch circuits to identify that the appropriate switch has closed. If it doesn't close, it is tested again. If the switch fails to close the second time, the appropriate Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) will set. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 6469 Pressure Regulating Solenoid: Description and Operation 545RFE Automatic Transmission Description DESCRIPTION The transmission solenoid/TRS assembly is internal to the transmission and mounted on the valve body assembly. The assembly consists of six solenoids that control hydraulic pressure to the six friction elements (transmission clutches), and the torque converter clutch. The pressure control solenoid is located on the side of the solenoid/TRS assembly. The solenoid/TRS assembly also contains the Transmission Range Sensor (TRS) and five pressure switches that feed information to the TCM. Operation OPERATION SOLENOIDS Solenoids are used to control the L/R, 2C, 4C, OD, and UD friction elements. The reverse clutch is controlled by line pressure and the position of the manual valve in the valve body. All the solenoids are contained within the Solenoid and Pressure Switch Assembly. The solenoid and pressure switch assembly contains one additional solenoid, Multi-Select (MS), which serves primarily to provide 2nd and 3rd gear limp-in operation. The solenoids receive electrical power from the Transmission Control Relay through a single wire. The TCM energizes or operates the solenoids individually by grounding the return wire of the solenoid as necessary. When a solenoid is energized, the solenoid valve shifts, and a fluid passage is opened or closed (vented or applied), depending on its default operating state. The result is an apply or release of a frictional element. The MS and UD solenoids are normally applied to allow transmission limp-in in the event of an electrical failure. The continuity of the solenoids and circuits are periodically tested. Each solenoid is turned on or off depending on its current state. An inductive spike should be detected by the TCM during this test. If no spike is detected, the circuit is tested again to verify the failure. In addition to the periodic testing, the solenoid circuits are tested if a speed ratio or pressure switch error occurs. PRESSURE SWITCHES The TCM relies on five pressure switches to monitor fluid pressure in the L/R, 2C, 4C, UD, and OD hydraulic circuits. The primary purpose of these switches is to help the TCM detect when clutch circuit hydraulic failures occur. The switches close at 23 psi and open at 11 psi, and simply indicate whether or not pressure exists. The switches are continuously monitored by the TCM for the correct states (open or closed) in each gear as shown in the following charts and 545RFE PRESSURE SWITCH STATES: Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 6470 A Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) will set if the TCM senses any switch open or closed at the wrong time in a given gear. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 6471 Pressure Regulating Solenoid: Description and Operation 68RFE Automatic Transmission Description DESCRIPTION The transmission solenoid/TRS assembly is internal to the transmission and mounted on the valve body assembly. The assembly consists of six solenoids that control hydraulic pressure to the six friction elements (transmission clutches), and the torque converter clutch. The pressure control solenoid is located on the side of the solenoid/TRS assembly. The solenoid/TRS assembly also contains the Transmission Range Sensor (TRS) and five pressure switches that feed information to the TCM. Operation OPERATION SOLENOIDS Solenoids are used to control the L/R, 2C, 4C, OD, and UD friction elements. The reverse clutch is controlled by line pressure and the position of the manual valve in the valve body. All the solenoids are contained within the Solenoid and Pressure Switch Assembly. The solenoid and pressure switch assembly contains one additional solenoid, Multi-Select (MS), which serves primarily to provide 3rd gear and reverse limp-in operation. The TCM energizes or operates the solenoids individually by grounding the return wire of the solenoid as necessary. When a solenoid is energized, the solenoid valve shifts, and a fluid passage is opened or closed (vented or applied), depending on its default operating state. The result is an apply or release of a frictional element. The MS and UD solenoids are normally applied to allow transmission limp-in in the event of an electrical failure. The continuity of the solenoids and circuits are periodically tested. Each solenoid is turned on or off depending on its current state. An inductive spike should be detected by the TCM during this test. If no spike is detected, the circuit is tested again to verify the failure. In addition to the periodic testing, the solenoid circuits are tested if a speed ratio or pressure switch error occurs. PRESSURE SWITCHES The TCM relies on five pressure switches to monitor fluid pressure in the L/R, 2C, 4C, UD, and OD hydraulic circuits. The primary purpose of these switches is to help the TCM detect when clutch circuit hydraulic failures occur. The switches close at 23 psi and open at 11 psi, and simply indicate whether or not pressure exists. The switches are continuously monitored by the TCM for the correct states (open or closed) in each gear as shown in the following charts and Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 6472 A Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) will set if the TCM senses any switch open or closed at the wrong time in a given gear. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 42RLE Automatic Transmission Pressure Regulating Solenoid: Service and Repair 42RLE Automatic Transmission Removal REMOVAL 1. Remove the valve body from the transmission. See: Automatic Transmission/Transaxle/Valve Body/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/42RLE Automatic Transmission/Removal 2. Remove the electrical connectors from the pressure control solenoid (1) and the line pressure sensor (2). 3. Remove the screws (6) holding the pressure control solenoid (1) and line pressure sensor (2) to the valve body. 4. Remove the pressure control solenoid and line pressure sensor from the valve body. Installation INSTALLATION 1. Install the pressure control solenoid (1) and line pressure sensor (2) into the valve body. 2. Install the screws (6) to hold the pressure control solenoid (1) and line pressure sensor (2) to the valve body. 3. Install the electrical connectors to the pressure control solenoid (1) and the line pressure sensor (2). 4. Install the valve body into the transmission. See: Automatic Transmission/Transaxle/Valve Body/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/42RLE Automatic Transmission/Installation Removal Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 6475 REMOVAL NOTE: If the Solenoid/Pressure Switch Assembly is being replaced, the Quick Learn Procedure must be performed. See: Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Transmission Control Module/TCM Quick Learn 1. Raise vehicle on hoist. 2. Remove valve body assembly from transmission. See: Automatic Transmission/Transaxle/Valve Body/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/42RLE Automatic Transmission/Removal 3. Remove Solenoid/Pressure Switch Assembly retaining screws (2) from solenoid. 4. Remove Solenoid/Pressure Switch Assembly (1) and screen from valve body (2). Installation INSTALLATION NOTE: If the Solenoid/Pressure Switch assembly is being replaced, the Quick Learn Procedure must be performed. See: Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Transmission Control Module/TCM Quick Learn 1. Install Solenoid/Pressure Switch Assembly (1) and screen (3) to the separator and transfer plates. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 6476 2. Install and tighten retaining screws (2) to 5.5 Nm (50 in. lbs.) torque. 3. Install valve body. See: Automatic Transmission/Transaxle/Valve Body/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/42RLE Automatic Transmission/Installation Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 6477 Pressure Regulating Solenoid: Service and Repair 545RFE Automatic Transmission Removal REMOVAL NOTE: If the Transmission Solenoid/TRS Assembly is being replaced, the Quick Learn Procedure must be performed. See: Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Transmission Control Module/TCM Quick Learn 1. Remove the valve body from the transmission. See: Automatic Transmission/Transaxle/Valve Body/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/545RFE Automatic Transmission/Removal 2. Remove the bolts (1) holding the transmission solenoid/TRS assembly onto the valve body. 3. Separate the transmission solenoid/TRS assembly from the valve body. Installation INSTALLATION Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 6478 1. Place TRS selector plate in the PARK position. 2. Position the transmission solenoid/TRS assembly onto the valve body. Be sure that both alignment dowels are fully seated in the valve body and that the TRS switch contacts are properly positioned in the selector plate 3. Install the bolts (1) to hold the transmission solenoid/TRS assembly onto the valve body. 4. Tighten the solenoid assembly screws adjacent to the arrows cast into the bottom of the valve body first. Tighten the screws to 6 Nm (50 in.lbs.). 5. Tighten the remainder of the solenoid assembly screws to 6 Nm (50 in.lbs.). 6. Install the valve body into the transmission. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 6479 Pressure Regulating Solenoid: Service and Repair 68RFE Automatic Transmission Removal REMOVAL NOTE: If the Transmission Solenoid/TRS Assembly is being replaced, the Quick Learn Procedure must be performed. See: Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Transmission Control Module/TCM Quick Learn 1. Remove the valve body from the transmission. 2. Remove the bolts (1) holding the transmission solenoid/TRS assembly onto the valve body. 3. Separate the transmission solenoid/TRS assembly from the valve body. Installation INSTALLATION Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 6480 1. Place TRS selector plate in the PARK position. 2. Position the transmission solenoid/TRS assembly onto the valve body. Be sure that both alignment dowels are fully seated in the valve body and that the TRS switch contacts are properly positioned in the selector plate 3. Install the bolts (1) to hold the transmission solenoid/TRS assembly onto the valve body. 4. Tighten the solenoid assembly screws adjacent to the arrows cast into the bottom of the valve body first. Tighten the screws to 6 Nm (50 in.lbs.). 5. Tighten the remainder of the solenoid assembly screws to 6 Nm (50 in.lbs.). 6. Install the valve body into the transmission. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Interlock Solenoid > Component Information > Locations Shift Interlock Solenoid: Locations Component ID: 455 Component : SOLENOID-BRAKE TRANSMISSION SHIFT INTERLOCK Connector: Name : SOLENOID-BRAKE TRANSMISSION SHIFT INTERLOCK Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Pin Circuit Description 1 K32 18DB/YL BTSI SOLENOID CONTROL 2 Z101 18BK/VT GROUND Component Location - 47 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Interlock Solenoid > Component Information > Locations > Page 6484 Component Location - 42 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Interlock Solenoid > Component Information > Locations > Page 6485 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Interlock Solenoid > Component Information > Locations > Page 6486 Shift Interlock Solenoid: Diagrams Component ID: 455 Component : SOLENOID-BRAKE TRANSMISSION SHIFT INTERLOCK Connector: Name : SOLENOID-BRAKE TRANSMISSION SHIFT INTERLOCK Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Pin Circuit Description 1 K32 18DB/YL BTSI SOLENOID CONTROL 2 Z101 18BK/VT GROUND Component Location - 47 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Interlock Solenoid > Component Information > Locations > Page 6487 Component Location - 42 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Interlock Solenoid > Component Information > Locations > Page 6488 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Assembly-Transmission Solenoid Shift Solenoid: Locations Assembly-Transmission Solenoid Component ID 15 Component ID: 15 Component : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID Connector: Name : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID Color : # of pins : 8 Qualifier : (RE) Pin Circuit Description 1 T16 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT 2 F856 18YL/PK 5 VOLT SUPPLY 3 K900 20DB/DG SENSOR GROUND 4 T38 18YL/BR GOVERNOR PRESSURE SENSOR SIGNAL 5 T118 18DG GOVERNOR PRESSURE SOLENOID CONTROL 6 T9 18DG/TN 3-4 SOLENOID CONTROL 7 T75 18YL/LB TORQUE CONVERTER CLUTCH SOLENOID CONTROL 8 T54 18DG/OR TRANSMISSION TEMPERATURE SIGNAL Component Location - 20 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Assembly-Transmission Solenoid > Page 6493 Component Location - 26 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Assembly-Transmission Solenoid > Page 6494 Connector: Name : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID C1 Color : # of pins : 10 Qualifier : (RC) Pin Circuit Description 1 T806 20DG/VT PRESSURE SIGNAL 7 2 T804 20YL/DB PRESSURE SIGNAL 5 3 T54 20DG/OR TRANSMISSION TEMPERATURE SIGNAL 4 T817 20YL/BR LINEAR 3 CONTROL Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Assembly-Transmission Solenoid > Page 6495 5 T813 20DG/LG LINEAR 1 CONTROL 6 T807 20DG/WT PRESSURE SIGNAL 8 7 T803 20DG/BR PRESSURE SIGNAL 4 8 T820 20YL/WT TEMPERATURE SENSOR GROUND 9 T816 20YL/PK LINEAR 3 GROUND 10 T812 20DG/TN LINEAR 1 GROUND Component Location - 20 Component Location - 26 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Assembly-Transmission Solenoid > Page 6496 Connector: Name : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID C2 Color : # of pins : 12 Qualifier : (RC) Pin Circuit Description 1 T800 20DG/BR PRESSURE SIGNAL 1 2 T805 20DG/OR PRESSURE SIGNAL 6 3 T809 20DG/YL SHIFT 2 CONTROL 4 T811 20DG/LB SHIFT 4 CONTROL Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Assembly-Transmission Solenoid > Page 6497 5 T818 20YL/OR LINEAR 4 GROUND 6 T814 20YL/BR LINEAR 2 GROUND 7 T801 20DG/RD PRESSURE SIGNAL 2 8 T802 20DG/PK PRESSURE SIGNAL 3 9 T810 20DG/DB SHIFT 3 CONTROL 10 T808 20DG/GY SHIFT 1 CONTROL 11 T821 20YL/GY LINEAR 4 CONTROL 12 T815 20YL/RD LINEAR 2 CONTROL Component Location - 20 Component Location - 26 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Assembly-Transmission Solenoid > Page 6498 Component ID 19 Component ID: 19 Component : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID Connector: Name : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID Color : # of pins : 8 Qualifier : (RE) Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Assembly-Transmission Solenoid > Page 6499 Pin Circuit Description 1 T16 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT 2 F856 18YL/PK 5 VOLT SUPPLY 3 K900 20DB/DG SENSOR GROUND 4 T38 18YL/BR GOVERNOR PRESSURE SENSOR SIGNAL 5 T118 18DG GOVERNOR PRESSURE SOLENOID CONTROL 6 T9 18DG/TN 3-4 SOLENOID CONTROL 7 T75 18YL/LB TORQUE CONVERTER CLUTCH SOLENOID CONTROL 8 T54 18DG/OR TRANSMISSION TEMPERATURE SIGNAL Component Location - 20 Component Location - 26 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Assembly-Transmission Solenoid > Page 6500 Connector: Name : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID C1 Color : # of pins : 10 Qualifier : (RC) Pin Circuit Description 1 T806 20DG/VT PRESSURE SIGNAL 7 2 T804 20YL/DB PRESSURE SIGNAL 5 3 T54 20DG/OR TRANSMISSION TEMPERATURE SIGNAL 4 T817 20YL/BR LINEAR 3 CONTROL Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Assembly-Transmission Solenoid > Page 6501 5 T813 20DG/LG LINEAR 1 CONTROL 6 T807 20DG/WT PRESSURE SIGNAL 8 7 T803 20DG/BR PRESSURE SIGNAL 4 8 T820 20YL/WT TEMPERATURE SENSOR GROUND 9 T816 20YL/PK LINEAR 3 GROUND 10 T812 20DG/TN LINEAR 1 GROUND Component Location - 20 Component Location - 26 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Assembly-Transmission Solenoid > Page 6502 Connector: Name : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID C2 Color : # of pins : 12 Qualifier : (RC) Pin Circuit Description 1 T800 20DG/BR PRESSURE SIGNAL 1 2 T805 20DG/OR PRESSURE SIGNAL 6 3 T809 20DG/YL SHIFT 2 CONTROL 4 T811 20DG/LB SHIFT 4 CONTROL Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Assembly-Transmission Solenoid > Page 6503 5 T818 20YL/OR LINEAR 4 GROUND 6 T814 20YL/BR LINEAR 2 GROUND 7 T801 20DG/RD PRESSURE SIGNAL 2 8 T802 20DG/PK PRESSURE SIGNAL 3 9 T810 20DG/DB SHIFT 3 CONTROL 10 T808 20DG/GY SHIFT 1 CONTROL 11 T821 20YL/GY LINEAR 4 CONTROL 12 T815 20YL/RD LINEAR 2 CONTROL Component Location - 20 Component Location - 26 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Assembly-Transmission Solenoid > Page 6504 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Assembly-Transmission Solenoid > Page 6505 Shift Solenoid: Locations Assembly-Transmission Solenoid/Pressure Switch Component ID: 20 Component : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID/PRESSURE SWITCH Connector: Name : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID/PRESSURE SWITCH Color : LT. BROWN # of pins : 10 Qualifier : (RLE) Pin Circuit Description 1 T60 20YL/GY OD CONTROL 2 T59 20YL/LB UD CONTROL 3 T16 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT 4 T19 18YL/DB 2-4 CONTROL 5 T47 18YL/DG 2-4 PRESSURE SIGNAL 6 T9 20DG/TN OD PRESSURE SIGNAL 7 T20 20DG/WT L/R CONTROL 8-9-10 T50 20YL/TN L/R PRESSURE SIGNAL Component Location - 19 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Assembly-Transmission Solenoid > Page 6506 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Assembly-Transmission Solenoid > Page 6507 Shift Solenoid: Locations Assembly-Transmission Solenoid/TRS Component ID: 21 Component : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID/TRS Connector: Name : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID/TRS Color : BLACK # of pins : 23 Qualifier : (RFE) Pin Circuit Description 1-2 T20 20DG/WT L/R CONTROL 3-4 T41 20YL/DB TRS T41 SIGNAL (P/N) 5 T42 20DG/YL TRS T42 SIGNAL 6-- 7 T60 20YL/GY OD SOLENOID CONTROL 8 T3 20DG/DB TRS T3 SIGNAL 9 T1 20DG/LB TRS T1 SIGNAL 10 T16 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT 11 T48 20BR/YL 4C PRESSURE SIGNAL 12 T118 20DG LINE PRESSURE CONTROL 13 T4 20DG/RD TRS T2 SIGNAL 13 T4 20DG/LB TRS T2 SIGNAL 14 T50 20DG/PK L/R PRESSURE SIGNAL 14 T50 20YL/TN L/R PRESSURE SIGNAL 15 T147 20DG/YL 2C PRESSURE SIGNAL 16 T9 20DG/TN OD PRESSURE SIGNAL 17 T59 20YL/LB UD CONTROL 18 T29 20YL/WT UD PRESSURE SIGNAL 19 T259 20YL/DG 4C CONTROL 20 T219 20YL/LG 2C CONTROL 21 T140 20YL/GY MS CONTROL 22 T160 20DG/WT SENSOR GROUND 22 K900 20DB/DG SENSOR GROUND 23 T54 20DG/OR TRANSMISSION TEMPERATURE SIGNAL Component Location - 21 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Assembly-Transmission Solenoid > Page 6508 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Assembly-Transmission Solenoid Shift Solenoid: Diagrams Assembly-Transmission Solenoid Component ID 15 Component ID: 15 Component : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID Connector: Name : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID Color : # of pins : 8 Qualifier : (RE) Pin Circuit Description 1 T16 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT 2 F856 18YL/PK 5 VOLT SUPPLY 3 K900 20DB/DG SENSOR GROUND 4 T38 18YL/BR GOVERNOR PRESSURE SENSOR SIGNAL 5 T118 18DG GOVERNOR PRESSURE SOLENOID CONTROL 6 T9 18DG/TN 3-4 SOLENOID CONTROL 7 T75 18YL/LB TORQUE CONVERTER CLUTCH SOLENOID CONTROL 8 T54 18DG/OR TRANSMISSION TEMPERATURE SIGNAL Component Location - 20 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Assembly-Transmission Solenoid > Page 6511 Component Location - 26 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Assembly-Transmission Solenoid > Page 6512 Connector: Name : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID C1 Color : # of pins : 10 Qualifier : (RC) Pin Circuit Description 1 T806 20DG/VT PRESSURE SIGNAL 7 2 T804 20YL/DB PRESSURE SIGNAL 5 3 T54 20DG/OR TRANSMISSION TEMPERATURE SIGNAL 4 T817 20YL/BR LINEAR 3 CONTROL Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Assembly-Transmission Solenoid > Page 6513 5 T813 20DG/LG LINEAR 1 CONTROL 6 T807 20DG/WT PRESSURE SIGNAL 8 7 T803 20DG/BR PRESSURE SIGNAL 4 8 T820 20YL/WT TEMPERATURE SENSOR GROUND 9 T816 20YL/PK LINEAR 3 GROUND 10 T812 20DG/TN LINEAR 1 GROUND Component Location - 20 Component Location - 26 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Assembly-Transmission Solenoid > Page 6514 Connector: Name : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID C2 Color : # of pins : 12 Qualifier : (RC) Pin Circuit Description 1 T800 20DG/BR PRESSURE SIGNAL 1 2 T805 20DG/OR PRESSURE SIGNAL 6 3 T809 20DG/YL SHIFT 2 CONTROL 4 T811 20DG/LB SHIFT 4 CONTROL Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Assembly-Transmission Solenoid > Page 6515 5 T818 20YL/OR LINEAR 4 GROUND 6 T814 20YL/BR LINEAR 2 GROUND 7 T801 20DG/RD PRESSURE SIGNAL 2 8 T802 20DG/PK PRESSURE SIGNAL 3 9 T810 20DG/DB SHIFT 3 CONTROL 10 T808 20DG/GY SHIFT 1 CONTROL 11 T821 20YL/GY LINEAR 4 CONTROL 12 T815 20YL/RD LINEAR 2 CONTROL Component Location - 20 Component Location - 26 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Assembly-Transmission Solenoid > Page 6516 Component ID 19 Component ID: 19 Component : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID Connector: Name : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID Color : # of pins : 8 Qualifier : (RE) Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Assembly-Transmission Solenoid > Page 6517 Pin Circuit Description 1 T16 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT 2 F856 18YL/PK 5 VOLT SUPPLY 3 K900 20DB/DG SENSOR GROUND 4 T38 18YL/BR GOVERNOR PRESSURE SENSOR SIGNAL 5 T118 18DG GOVERNOR PRESSURE SOLENOID CONTROL 6 T9 18DG/TN 3-4 SOLENOID CONTROL 7 T75 18YL/LB TORQUE CONVERTER CLUTCH SOLENOID CONTROL 8 T54 18DG/OR TRANSMISSION TEMPERATURE SIGNAL Component Location - 20 Component Location - 26 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Assembly-Transmission Solenoid > Page 6518 Connector: Name : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID C1 Color : # of pins : 10 Qualifier : (RC) Pin Circuit Description 1 T806 20DG/VT PRESSURE SIGNAL 7 2 T804 20YL/DB PRESSURE SIGNAL 5 3 T54 20DG/OR TRANSMISSION TEMPERATURE SIGNAL 4 T817 20YL/BR LINEAR 3 CONTROL Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Assembly-Transmission Solenoid > Page 6519 5 T813 20DG/LG LINEAR 1 CONTROL 6 T807 20DG/WT PRESSURE SIGNAL 8 7 T803 20DG/BR PRESSURE SIGNAL 4 8 T820 20YL/WT TEMPERATURE SENSOR GROUND 9 T816 20YL/PK LINEAR 3 GROUND 10 T812 20DG/TN LINEAR 1 GROUND Component Location - 20 Component Location - 26 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Assembly-Transmission Solenoid > Page 6520 Connector: Name : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID C2 Color : # of pins : 12 Qualifier : (RC) Pin Circuit Description 1 T800 20DG/BR PRESSURE SIGNAL 1 2 T805 20DG/OR PRESSURE SIGNAL 6 3 T809 20DG/YL SHIFT 2 CONTROL 4 T811 20DG/LB SHIFT 4 CONTROL Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Assembly-Transmission Solenoid > Page 6521 5 T818 20YL/OR LINEAR 4 GROUND 6 T814 20YL/BR LINEAR 2 GROUND 7 T801 20DG/RD PRESSURE SIGNAL 2 8 T802 20DG/PK PRESSURE SIGNAL 3 9 T810 20DG/DB SHIFT 3 CONTROL 10 T808 20DG/GY SHIFT 1 CONTROL 11 T821 20YL/GY LINEAR 4 CONTROL 12 T815 20YL/RD LINEAR 2 CONTROL Component Location - 20 Component Location - 26 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Assembly-Transmission Solenoid > Page 6522 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Assembly-Transmission Solenoid > Page 6523 Shift Solenoid: Diagrams Assembly-Transmission Solenoid/Pressure Switch Component ID: 20 Component : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID/PRESSURE SWITCH Connector: Name : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID/PRESSURE SWITCH Color : LT. BROWN # of pins : 10 Qualifier : (RLE) Pin Circuit Description 1 T60 20YL/GY OD CONTROL 2 T59 20YL/LB UD CONTROL 3 T16 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT 4 T19 18YL/DB 2-4 CONTROL 5 T47 18YL/DG 2-4 PRESSURE SIGNAL 6 T9 20DG/TN OD PRESSURE SIGNAL 7 T20 20DG/WT L/R CONTROL 8-9-10 T50 20YL/TN L/R PRESSURE SIGNAL Component Location - 19 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Assembly-Transmission Solenoid > Page 6524 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Assembly-Transmission Solenoid > Page 6525 Shift Solenoid: Diagrams Assembly-Transmission Solenoid/TRS Component ID: 21 Component : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID/TRS Connector: Name : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID/TRS Color : BLACK # of pins : 23 Qualifier : (RFE) Pin Circuit Description 1-2 T20 20DG/WT L/R CONTROL 3-4 T41 20YL/DB TRS T41 SIGNAL (P/N) 5 T42 20DG/YL TRS T42 SIGNAL 6-- 7 T60 20YL/GY OD SOLENOID CONTROL 8 T3 20DG/DB TRS T3 SIGNAL 9 T1 20DG/LB TRS T1 SIGNAL 10 T16 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT 11 T48 20BR/YL 4C PRESSURE SIGNAL 12 T118 20DG LINE PRESSURE CONTROL 13 T4 20DG/RD TRS T2 SIGNAL 13 T4 20DG/LB TRS T2 SIGNAL 14 T50 20DG/PK L/R PRESSURE SIGNAL 14 T50 20YL/TN L/R PRESSURE SIGNAL 15 T147 20DG/YL 2C PRESSURE SIGNAL 16 T9 20DG/TN OD PRESSURE SIGNAL 17 T59 20YL/LB UD CONTROL 18 T29 20YL/WT UD PRESSURE SIGNAL 19 T259 20YL/DG 4C CONTROL 20 T219 20YL/LG 2C CONTROL 21 T140 20YL/GY MS CONTROL 22 T160 20DG/WT SENSOR GROUND 22 K900 20DB/DG SENSOR GROUND 23 T54 20DG/OR TRANSMISSION TEMPERATURE SIGNAL Component Location - 21 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Assembly-Transmission Solenoid > Page 6526 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > 42RLE Automatic Transmission Shift Solenoid: Description and Operation 42RLE Automatic Transmission Description DESCRIPTION The Solenoid/Pressure Switch Assembly (1) is inside the transmission and mounted to the valve body assembly. The assembly consists of four solenoids that control hydraulic pressure to the L/R, 2/4, OD, and UD friction elements (transmission clutches), and the torque converter clutch. The reverse clutch is controlled by line pressure from the manual valve in the valve body. The solenoids are contained within the Solenoid/Pressure Switch Assembly, and can only be serviced by replacing the assembly. The solenoid assembly also contains pressure switches that monitor and send hydraulic circuit information to the TCM. Likewise, the pressure switches can only be service by replacing the assembly. Operation OPERATION SOLENOIDS The solenoids receive electrical power from the Transmission Control Relay through a single wire. The TCM energizes or operates the solenoids individually by grounding the return wire of the solenoid needed. When a solenoid is energized, the solenoid valve shifts, and a fluid passage is opened or closed (vented or applied), depending on its default operating state. The result is an apply or release of a frictional element. The 2/4 and UD solenoids are normally applied, which allows fluid to pass through in their relaxed or "off" state. By design, this allows transmission limp-in (P,R,N,2) in the event of an electrical failure. The continuity of the solenoids and circuits are periodically tested. Each solenoid is turned on or off depending on its current state. An inductive spike should be detected by the TCM during this test. If no spike is detected, the circuit is tested again to verify the failure. In addition to the periodic testing, the solenoid circuits are tested if a speed ratio or pressure switch error occurs. PRESSURE SWITCHES The TCM relies on three pressure switches to monitor fluid pressure in the L/R, 2/4, and OD hydraulic circuits. The primary purpose of these switches is to help the TCM detect when clutch circuit hydraulic failures occur. The range for the pressure switch closing and opening points is 11-23 psi. Typically the switch opening point will be approximately one psi lower than the closing point. For example, a switch may close at 18 psi and open at 17 psi. The switches are continuously monitored by the TCM for the correct states (open or closed) in each gear as shown in the following chart: Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 6529 A Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) will set if the TCM senses any switch open or closed at the wrong time in a given gear. The TCM also tests the 2/4 and OD pressure switches when they are normally off (OD and 2/4 are tested in 1st gear, OD in 2nd gear, and 2/4 in 3rd gear). The test simply verifies that they are operational, by looking for a closed state when the corresponding element is applied. Immediately after a shift into 1st, 2nd, or 3rd gear with the engine speed above 1000 rpm, the TCM momentarily turns on element pressure to the 2/4 and/or OD clutch circuits to identify that the appropriate switch has closed. If it doesn't close, it is tested again. If the switch fails to close the second time, the appropriate Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) will set. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 6530 Shift Solenoid: Description and Operation 545RFE Automatic Transmission Description DESCRIPTION The transmission solenoid/TRS assembly is internal to the transmission and mounted on the valve body assembly. The assembly consists of six solenoids that control hydraulic pressure to the six friction elements (transmission clutches), and the torque converter clutch. The pressure control solenoid is located on the side of the solenoid/TRS assembly. The solenoid/TRS assembly also contains the Transmission Range Sensor (TRS) and five pressure switches that feed information to the TCM. Operation OPERATION SOLENOIDS Solenoids are used to control the L/R, 2C, 4C, OD, and UD friction elements. The reverse clutch is controlled by line pressure and the position of the manual valve in the valve body. All the solenoids are contained within the Solenoid and Pressure Switch Assembly. The solenoid and pressure switch assembly contains one additional solenoid, Multi-Select (MS), which serves primarily to provide 2nd and 3rd gear limp-in operation. The solenoids receive electrical power from the Transmission Control Relay through a single wire. The TCM energizes or operates the solenoids individually by grounding the return wire of the solenoid as necessary. When a solenoid is energized, the solenoid valve shifts, and a fluid passage is opened or closed (vented or applied), depending on its default operating state. The result is an apply or release of a frictional element. The MS and UD solenoids are normally applied to allow transmission limp-in in the event of an electrical failure. The continuity of the solenoids and circuits are periodically tested. Each solenoid is turned on or off depending on its current state. An inductive spike should be detected by the TCM during this test. If no spike is detected, the circuit is tested again to verify the failure. In addition to the periodic testing, the solenoid circuits are tested if a speed ratio or pressure switch error occurs. PRESSURE SWITCHES The TCM relies on five pressure switches to monitor fluid pressure in the L/R, 2C, 4C, UD, and OD hydraulic circuits. The primary purpose of these switches is to help the TCM detect when clutch circuit hydraulic failures occur. The switches close at 23 psi and open at 11 psi, and simply indicate whether or not pressure exists. The switches are continuously monitored by the TCM for the correct states (open or closed) in each gear as shown in the following charts and 545RFE PRESSURE SWITCH STATES: Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 6531 A Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) will set if the TCM senses any switch open or closed at the wrong time in a given gear. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 6532 Shift Solenoid: Description and Operation 68RFE Automatic Transmission Description DESCRIPTION The transmission solenoid/TRS assembly is internal to the transmission and mounted on the valve body assembly. The assembly consists of six solenoids that control hydraulic pressure to the six friction elements (transmission clutches), and the torque converter clutch. The pressure control solenoid is located on the side of the solenoid/TRS assembly. The solenoid/TRS assembly also contains the Transmission Range Sensor (TRS) and five pressure switches that feed information to the TCM. Operation OPERATION SOLENOIDS Solenoids are used to control the L/R, 2C, 4C, OD, and UD friction elements. The reverse clutch is controlled by line pressure and the position of the manual valve in the valve body. All the solenoids are contained within the Solenoid and Pressure Switch Assembly. The solenoid and pressure switch assembly contains one additional solenoid, Multi-Select (MS), which serves primarily to provide 3rd gear and reverse limp-in operation. The TCM energizes or operates the solenoids individually by grounding the return wire of the solenoid as necessary. When a solenoid is energized, the solenoid valve shifts, and a fluid passage is opened or closed (vented or applied), depending on its default operating state. The result is an apply or release of a frictional element. The MS and UD solenoids are normally applied to allow transmission limp-in in the event of an electrical failure. The continuity of the solenoids and circuits are periodically tested. Each solenoid is turned on or off depending on its current state. An inductive spike should be detected by the TCM during this test. If no spike is detected, the circuit is tested again to verify the failure. In addition to the periodic testing, the solenoid circuits are tested if a speed ratio or pressure switch error occurs. PRESSURE SWITCHES The TCM relies on five pressure switches to monitor fluid pressure in the L/R, 2C, 4C, UD, and OD hydraulic circuits. The primary purpose of these switches is to help the TCM detect when clutch circuit hydraulic failures occur. The switches close at 23 psi and open at 11 psi, and simply indicate whether or not pressure exists. The switches are continuously monitored by the TCM for the correct states (open or closed) in each gear as shown in the following charts and Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 6533 A Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) will set if the TCM senses any switch open or closed at the wrong time in a given gear. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 42RLE Automatic Transmission Shift Solenoid: Service and Repair 42RLE Automatic Transmission Removal REMOVAL NOTE: If the Solenoid/Pressure Switch Assembly is being replaced, the Quick Learn Procedure must be performed. See: Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Transmission Control Module/TCM Quick Learn 1. Raise vehicle on hoist. 2. Remove valve body assembly from transmission. See: Automatic Transmission/Transaxle/Valve Body/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/42RLE Automatic Transmission/Removal 3. Remove Solenoid/Pressure Switch Assembly retaining screws (2) from solenoid. 4. Remove Solenoid/Pressure Switch Assembly (1) and screen from valve body (2). Installation INSTALLATION NOTE: If the Solenoid/Pressure Switch assembly is being replaced, the Quick Learn Procedure must be performed. See: Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Transmission Control Module/TCM Quick Learn Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 6536 1. Install Solenoid/Pressure Switch Assembly (1) and screen (3) to the separator and transfer plates. 2. Install and tighten retaining screws (2) to 5.5 Nm (50 in. lbs.) torque. 3. Install valve body. See: Automatic Transmission/Transaxle/Valve Body/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/42RLE Automatic Transmission/Installation Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 6537 Shift Solenoid: Service and Repair 545RFE Automatic Transmission Removal REMOVAL NOTE: If the Transmission Solenoid/TRS Assembly is being replaced, the Quick Learn Procedure must be performed. See: Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Transmission Control Module/TCM Quick Learn 1. Remove the valve body from the transmission. See: Automatic Transmission/Transaxle/Valve Body/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/545RFE Automatic Transmission/Removal 2. Remove the bolts (1) holding the transmission solenoid/TRS assembly onto the valve body. 3. Separate the transmission solenoid/TRS assembly from the valve body. Installation INSTALLATION Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 6538 1. Place TRS selector plate in the PARK position. 2. Position the transmission solenoid/TRS assembly onto the valve body. Be sure that both alignment dowels are fully seated in the valve body and that the TRS switch contacts are properly positioned in the selector plate 3. Install the bolts (1) to hold the transmission solenoid/TRS assembly onto the valve body. 4. Tighten the solenoid assembly screws adjacent to the arrows cast into the bottom of the valve body first. Tighten the screws to 6 Nm (50 in.lbs.). 5. Tighten the remainder of the solenoid assembly screws to 6 Nm (50 in.lbs.). 6. Install the valve body into the transmission. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 6539 Shift Solenoid: Service and Repair 68RFE Automatic Transmission Removal REMOVAL NOTE: If the Transmission Solenoid/TRS Assembly is being replaced, the Quick Learn Procedure must be performed. See: Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Transmission Control Module/TCM Quick Learn 1. Remove the valve body from the transmission. 2. Remove the bolts (1) holding the transmission solenoid/TRS assembly onto the valve body. 3. Separate the transmission solenoid/TRS assembly from the valve body. Installation INSTALLATION Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 6540 1. Place TRS selector plate in the PARK position. 2. Position the transmission solenoid/TRS assembly onto the valve body. Be sure that both alignment dowels are fully seated in the valve body and that the TRS switch contacts are properly positioned in the selector plate 3. Install the bolts (1) to hold the transmission solenoid/TRS assembly onto the valve body. 4. Tighten the solenoid assembly screws adjacent to the arrows cast into the bottom of the valve body first. Tighten the screws to 6 Nm (50 in.lbs.). 5. Tighten the remainder of the solenoid assembly screws to 6 Nm (50 in.lbs.). 6. Install the valve body into the transmission. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Throttle Valve Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation Throttle Valve Solenoid: Description and Operation DESCRIPTION On vehicles equipped with a Cummins diesel engine, the transmission throttle valve cable has been replace by the transmission throttle valve actuator (TTVA). The TTVA consists of an electric DC motor, two potentiometers, and a gear drive system. The TTVA is mechanically connected to the transmission throttle valve in the valve body by the "D" shaped opening in the bottom of the TTVA shaft. Changes in the TTVA position are therefore transferred to the throttle valve and cause changes in the transmission throttle pressure. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Throttle Valve Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 6544 Throttle Valve Solenoid: Adjustments ADJUSTMENT The Transmission Throttle Valve Actuator (TTVA) does not require any mechanical adjustments. All changes in throttle valve position are controlled by the Engine Control Module (ECM). The TTVA does require an initialization period after the actuator has been removed or replaced. After the actuator has been removed or replaced, move the ignition to the ON position for thirty (30) seconds. This will allow the ECM sufficient time to perform the internal calibration procedures to learn the TTVA's current "zero" position. Once this is done, check the ECM for diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs). If no DTCs are set relating to the TTVA, the TTVA is fully calibrated and ready for use. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Throttle Valve Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Throttle Valve Solenoid: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL 1. Remove the bolts (2) holding the transmission throttle valve actuator (TTVA) (1) to the transmission case. 2. Allow the TTVA (1) to rotate clockwise away from the transmission. 3. Remove the wiring connector (2) from the TTVA (1). 4. Lift the TTVA (1) straight upward and off the throttle valve shaft (3). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Throttle Valve Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 6547 Throttle Valve Solenoid: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION 1. Position the transmission throttle valve actuator (TTVA) (1) over the throttle valve shaft (3). 2. Align the D-shaped opening in the bottom of the TTVA to the throttle valve shaft and install the TTVA onto the shaft. 3. Install the wiring connector (2) to the TTVA (1). 4. Rotate the TTVA (1) to the transmission case and install the bolts (2) to hold the TTVA to the transmission. 5. Tighten the bolts to 8.5 Nm (75 in.lbs.). 6. Initialize the TTVA See: Adjustments . Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > 42RLE Automatic Transmission Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid: Description and Operation 42RLE Automatic Transmission Description DESCRIPTION The Solenoid/Pressure Switch Assembly (1) is inside the transmission and mounted to the valve body assembly. The assembly consists of four solenoids that control hydraulic pressure to the L/R, 2/4, OD, and UD friction elements (transmission clutches), and the torque converter clutch. The reverse clutch is controlled by line pressure from the manual valve in the valve body. The solenoids are contained within the Solenoid/Pressure Switch Assembly, and can only be serviced by replacing the assembly. The solenoid assembly also contains pressure switches that monitor and send hydraulic circuit information to the TCM. Likewise, the pressure switches can only be service by replacing the assembly. Operation OPERATION SOLENOIDS The solenoids receive electrical power from the Transmission Control Relay through a single wire. The TCM energizes or operates the solenoids individually by grounding the return wire of the solenoid needed. When a solenoid is energized, the solenoid valve shifts, and a fluid passage is opened or closed (vented or applied), depending on its default operating state. The result is an apply or release of a frictional element. The 2/4 and UD solenoids are normally applied, which allows fluid to pass through in their relaxed or "off" state. By design, this allows transmission limp-in (P,R,N,2) in the event of an electrical failure. The continuity of the solenoids and circuits are periodically tested. Each solenoid is turned on or off depending on its current state. An inductive spike should be detected by the TCM during this test. If no spike is detected, the circuit is tested again to verify the failure. In addition to the periodic testing, the solenoid circuits are tested if a speed ratio or pressure switch error occurs. PRESSURE SWITCHES The TCM relies on three pressure switches to monitor fluid pressure in the L/R, 2/4, and OD hydraulic circuits. The primary purpose of these switches is to help the TCM detect when clutch circuit hydraulic failures occur. The range for the pressure switch closing and opening points is 11-23 psi. Typically the switch opening point will be approximately one psi lower than the closing point. For example, a switch may close at 18 psi and open at 17 psi. The switches are continuously monitored by the TCM for the correct states (open or closed) in each gear as shown in the following chart: Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 6552 A Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) will set if the TCM senses any switch open or closed at the wrong time in a given gear. The TCM also tests the 2/4 and OD pressure switches when they are normally off (OD and 2/4 are tested in 1st gear, OD in 2nd gear, and 2/4 in 3rd gear). The test simply verifies that they are operational, by looking for a closed state when the corresponding element is applied. Immediately after a shift into 1st, 2nd, or 3rd gear with the engine speed above 1000 rpm, the TCM momentarily turns on element pressure to the 2/4 and/or OD clutch circuits to identify that the appropriate switch has closed. If it doesn't close, it is tested again. If the switch fails to close the second time, the appropriate Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) will set. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 6553 Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid: Description and Operation 545RFE Automatic Transmission Description DESCRIPTION The transmission solenoid/TRS assembly is internal to the transmission and mounted on the valve body assembly. The assembly consists of six solenoids that control hydraulic pressure to the six friction elements (transmission clutches), and the torque converter clutch. The pressure control solenoid is located on the side of the solenoid/TRS assembly. The solenoid/TRS assembly also contains the Transmission Range Sensor (TRS) and five pressure switches that feed information to the TCM. Operation OPERATION SOLENOIDS Solenoids are used to control the L/R, 2C, 4C, OD, and UD friction elements. The reverse clutch is controlled by line pressure and the position of the manual valve in the valve body. All the solenoids are contained within the Solenoid and Pressure Switch Assembly. The solenoid and pressure switch assembly contains one additional solenoid, Multi-Select (MS), which serves primarily to provide 2nd and 3rd gear limp-in operation. The solenoids receive electrical power from the Transmission Control Relay through a single wire. The TCM energizes or operates the solenoids individually by grounding the return wire of the solenoid as necessary. When a solenoid is energized, the solenoid valve shifts, and a fluid passage is opened or closed (vented or applied), depending on its default operating state. The result is an apply or release of a frictional element. The MS and UD solenoids are normally applied to allow transmission limp-in in the event of an electrical failure. The continuity of the solenoids and circuits are periodically tested. Each solenoid is turned on or off depending on its current state. An inductive spike should be detected by the TCM during this test. If no spike is detected, the circuit is tested again to verify the failure. In addition to the periodic testing, the solenoid circuits are tested if a speed ratio or pressure switch error occurs. PRESSURE SWITCHES The TCM relies on five pressure switches to monitor fluid pressure in the L/R, 2C, 4C, UD, and OD hydraulic circuits. The primary purpose of these switches is to help the TCM detect when clutch circuit hydraulic failures occur. The switches close at 23 psi and open at 11 psi, and simply indicate whether or not pressure exists. The switches are continuously monitored by the TCM for the correct states (open or closed) in each gear as shown in the following charts and 545RFE PRESSURE SWITCH STATES: Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 6554 A Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) will set if the TCM senses any switch open or closed at the wrong time in a given gear. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 6555 Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid: Description and Operation 68RFE Automatic Transmission Description DESCRIPTION The transmission solenoid/TRS assembly is internal to the transmission and mounted on the valve body assembly. The assembly consists of six solenoids that control hydraulic pressure to the six friction elements (transmission clutches), and the torque converter clutch. The pressure control solenoid is located on the side of the solenoid/TRS assembly. The solenoid/TRS assembly also contains the Transmission Range Sensor (TRS) and five pressure switches that feed information to the TCM. Operation OPERATION SOLENOIDS Solenoids are used to control the L/R, 2C, 4C, OD, and UD friction elements. The reverse clutch is controlled by line pressure and the position of the manual valve in the valve body. All the solenoids are contained within the Solenoid and Pressure Switch Assembly. The solenoid and pressure switch assembly contains one additional solenoid, Multi-Select (MS), which serves primarily to provide 3rd gear and reverse limp-in operation. The TCM energizes or operates the solenoids individually by grounding the return wire of the solenoid as necessary. When a solenoid is energized, the solenoid valve shifts, and a fluid passage is opened or closed (vented or applied), depending on its default operating state. The result is an apply or release of a frictional element. The MS and UD solenoids are normally applied to allow transmission limp-in in the event of an electrical failure. The continuity of the solenoids and circuits are periodically tested. Each solenoid is turned on or off depending on its current state. An inductive spike should be detected by the TCM during this test. If no spike is detected, the circuit is tested again to verify the failure. In addition to the periodic testing, the solenoid circuits are tested if a speed ratio or pressure switch error occurs. PRESSURE SWITCHES The TCM relies on five pressure switches to monitor fluid pressure in the L/R, 2C, 4C, UD, and OD hydraulic circuits. The primary purpose of these switches is to help the TCM detect when clutch circuit hydraulic failures occur. The switches close at 23 psi and open at 11 psi, and simply indicate whether or not pressure exists. The switches are continuously monitored by the TCM for the correct states (open or closed) in each gear as shown in the following charts and Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 6556 A Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) will set if the TCM senses any switch open or closed at the wrong time in a given gear. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 42RLE Automatic Transmission Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid: Service and Repair 42RLE Automatic Transmission Removal REMOVAL NOTE: If the Solenoid/Pressure Switch Assembly is being replaced, the Quick Learn Procedure must be performed. See: Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Transmission Control Module/TCM Quick Learn 1. Raise vehicle on hoist. 2. Remove valve body assembly from transmission. See: Automatic Transmission/Transaxle/Valve Body/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/42RLE Automatic Transmission/Removal 3. Remove Solenoid/Pressure Switch Assembly retaining screws (2) from solenoid. 4. Remove Solenoid/Pressure Switch Assembly (1) and screen from valve body (2). Installation INSTALLATION NOTE: If the Solenoid/Pressure Switch assembly is being replaced, the Quick Learn Procedure must be performed. See: Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Transmission Control Module/TCM Quick Learn Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 6559 1. Install Solenoid/Pressure Switch Assembly (1) and screen (3) to the separator and transfer plates. 2. Install and tighten retaining screws (2) to 5.5 Nm (50 in. lbs.) torque. 3. Install valve body. See: Automatic Transmission/Transaxle/Valve Body/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/42RLE Automatic Transmission/Installation Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 6560 Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid: Service and Repair 545RFE Automatic Transmission Removal REMOVAL NOTE: If the Transmission Solenoid/TRS Assembly is being replaced, the Quick Learn Procedure must be performed. See: Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Transmission Control Module/TCM Quick Learn 1. Remove the valve body from the transmission. See: Automatic Transmission/Transaxle/Valve Body/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/545RFE Automatic Transmission/Removal 2. Remove the bolts (1) holding the transmission solenoid/TRS assembly onto the valve body. 3. Separate the transmission solenoid/TRS assembly from the valve body. Installation INSTALLATION Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 6561 1. Place TRS selector plate in the PARK position. 2. Position the transmission solenoid/TRS assembly onto the valve body. Be sure that both alignment dowels are fully seated in the valve body and that the TRS switch contacts are properly positioned in the selector plate 3. Install the bolts (1) to hold the transmission solenoid/TRS assembly onto the valve body. 4. Tighten the solenoid assembly screws adjacent to the arrows cast into the bottom of the valve body first. Tighten the screws to 6 Nm (50 in.lbs.). 5. Tighten the remainder of the solenoid assembly screws to 6 Nm (50 in.lbs.). 6. Install the valve body into the transmission. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 6562 Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid: Service and Repair 68RFE Automatic Transmission Removal REMOVAL NOTE: If the Transmission Solenoid/TRS Assembly is being replaced, the Quick Learn Procedure must be performed. See: Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Transmission Control Module/TCM Quick Learn 1. Remove the valve body from the transmission. 2. Remove the bolts (1) holding the transmission solenoid/TRS assembly onto the valve body. 3. Separate the transmission solenoid/TRS assembly from the valve body. Installation INSTALLATION Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 6563 1. Place TRS selector plate in the PARK position. 2. Position the transmission solenoid/TRS assembly onto the valve body. Be sure that both alignment dowels are fully seated in the valve body and that the TRS switch contacts are properly positioned in the selector plate 3. Install the bolts (1) to hold the transmission solenoid/TRS assembly onto the valve body. 4. Tighten the solenoid assembly screws adjacent to the arrows cast into the bottom of the valve body first. Tighten the screws to 6 Nm (50 in.lbs.). 5. Tighten the remainder of the solenoid assembly screws to 6 Nm (50 in.lbs.). 6. Install the valve body into the transmission. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Differential > Actuator, Differential Lock > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Actuator: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL 1. Remove actuator wiring connector. 2. Remove actuator (1) bolts (2). 3. Remove actuator (1) from disconnect pocket (2). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Differential > Actuator, Differential Lock > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 6569 Actuator: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION 1. Clean actuator (1) sealing surface and install new gasket (2) if necessary. 2. Align actuator shift fork (1) with disconnect collar (2) and install actuator on disconnect pocket. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Differential > Actuator, Differential Lock > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 6570 3. Install actuator (1) bolts (2) and tighten to 27 Nm (20 ft. lbs.). 4. Install disconnect actuator wiring connector. 5. Verify differential fluid level and add fluid if necessary. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Differential > Solenoid, Differential Lock > Component Information > Locations > Module-Axle Disconnect-Front Solenoid: Locations Module-Axle Disconnect-Front Component ID: 202 Component : MODULE-AXLE DISCONNECT-FRONT Connector: Name : MODULE-AXLE DISCONNECT-FRONT Color : DK. GRAY # of pins : 4 Qualifier : (LD 4WD) Pin Circuit Description 1 Z906 20BK GROUND 2 G304 20VT/DB FRONT AXLE LOCK CONTROL 3 A880 20DB/RD FUSED B(+) 4 G303 20VT/DG FRONT AXLE LOCK SIGNAL Component Location - 35 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Differential > Solenoid, Differential Lock > Component Information > Locations > Module-Axle Disconnect-Front > Page 6575 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Differential > Solenoid, Differential Lock > Component Information > Locations > Module-Axle Disconnect-Front > Page 6576 Solenoid: Locations Solenoid-Locker-Front Component ID: 457 Component : SOLENOID-LOCKER-FRONT Connector: Name : SOLENOID-LOCKER-FRONT Color : BLACK # of pins : 4 Qualifier : (POWER WAGON) Pin Circuit Description 1 T520 16YL/OR FRONT LOCKER SOURCE 2 T521 18YL/BK LOCKER SENSOR SUPPLY 3 T522 18YL/LB FRONT LOCKER SENSOR SENSE 4 T524 16YL/LG FRONT LOCKER RETURN Component Location - 36 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Differential > Solenoid, Differential Lock > Component Information > Locations > Module-Axle Disconnect-Front > Page 6577 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Differential > Solenoid, Differential Lock > Component Information > Locations > Module-Axle Disconnect-Front > Page 6578 Solenoid: Locations Solenoid-Locker-Rear Component ID: 458 Component : SOLENOID-LOCKER-REAR Connector: Name : SOLENOID-LOCKER-REAR Color : BLACK # of pins : 4 Qualifier : (POWER WAGON) Pin Circuit Description 1 T526 16YL/WT REAR LOCKER SOURCE 2 T523 18YL/BK LOCKER SENSOR SUPPLY 3 T527 18YL/TN REAR LOCKER SENSOR SENSE 4 T528 16YL/GY REAR LOCKER RETURN Component Location - 70 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Differential > Solenoid, Differential Lock > Component Information > Locations > Module-Axle Disconnect-Front > Page 6579 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Differential > Solenoid, Differential Lock > Component Information > Diagrams > Module-Axle Disconnect-Front Solenoid: Diagrams Module-Axle Disconnect-Front Component ID: 202 Component : MODULE-AXLE DISCONNECT-FRONT Connector: Name : MODULE-AXLE DISCONNECT-FRONT Color : DK. GRAY # of pins : 4 Qualifier : (LD 4WD) Pin Circuit Description 1 Z906 20BK GROUND 2 G304 20VT/DB FRONT AXLE LOCK CONTROL 3 A880 20DB/RD FUSED B(+) 4 G303 20VT/DG FRONT AXLE LOCK SIGNAL Component Location - 35 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Differential > Solenoid, Differential Lock > Component Information > Diagrams > Module-Axle Disconnect-Front > Page 6582 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Differential > Solenoid, Differential Lock > Component Information > Diagrams > Module-Axle Disconnect-Front > Page 6583 Solenoid: Diagrams Solenoid-Locker-Front Component ID: 457 Component : SOLENOID-LOCKER-FRONT Connector: Name : SOLENOID-LOCKER-FRONT Color : BLACK # of pins : 4 Qualifier : (POWER WAGON) Pin Circuit Description 1 T520 16YL/OR FRONT LOCKER SOURCE 2 T521 18YL/BK LOCKER SENSOR SUPPLY 3 T522 18YL/LB FRONT LOCKER SENSOR SENSE 4 T524 16YL/LG FRONT LOCKER RETURN Component Location - 36 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Differential > Solenoid, Differential Lock > Component Information > Diagrams > Module-Axle Disconnect-Front > Page 6584 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Differential > Solenoid, Differential Lock > Component Information > Diagrams > Module-Axle Disconnect-Front > Page 6585 Solenoid: Diagrams Solenoid-Locker-Rear Component ID: 458 Component : SOLENOID-LOCKER-REAR Connector: Name : SOLENOID-LOCKER-REAR Color : BLACK # of pins : 4 Qualifier : (POWER WAGON) Pin Circuit Description 1 T526 16YL/WT REAR LOCKER SOURCE 2 T523 18YL/BK LOCKER SENSOR SUPPLY 3 T527 18YL/TN REAR LOCKER SENSOR SENSE 4 T528 16YL/GY REAR LOCKER RETURN Component Location - 70 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Differential > Solenoid, Differential Lock > Component Information > Diagrams > Module-Axle Disconnect-Front > Page 6586 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transfer Case > Transfer Case Actuator > Component Information > Locations Transfer Case Actuator: Locations Component ID: 18 Component : ASSEMBLY-SHIFT MOTOR/MODE SENSOR Connector: Name : ASSEMBLY-SHIFT MOTOR/MODE SENSOR Color : BLACK # of pins : 8 Qualifier : (RFE FULL TIME ETC) Pin Circuit Description 1 T103 20YL/OR 5 VOLT SUPPLY 2 D201 20WT/DG MODE SENSOR A 3 G180 20VT/YL SENSOR RETURN 4 T101 16DG SHIFT MOTOR CONTROL B 5 T102 16YL SHIFT MOTOR CONTROL A 6 A940 20RD FUSED B(+) 7 T300 20YL/GY T-CASE MOTOR BRAKE SIGNAL 8-Component Location - 21 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transfer Case > Transfer Case Actuator > Component Information > Locations > Page 6591 Component Location - 24 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transfer Case > Transfer Case Actuator > Component Information > Locations > Page 6592 Component Location - 26 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transfer Case > Transfer Case Actuator > Component Information > Locations > Page 6593 Connector: Name : ASSEMBLY-SHIFT MOTOR/MODE SENSOR Color : DK. GRAY # of pins : 8 Qualifier : (RFE PART TIME ETC/RE ETC) Pin Circuit Description 1 T103 20YL/OR 5 VOLT SUPPLY 2 D201 20WT/DG MODE SENSOR A 3 G180 20VT/YL SENSOR RETURN 4 T101 16DG SHIFT MOTOR CONTROL B Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transfer Case > Transfer Case Actuator > Component Information > Locations > Page 6594 5 T102 16YL SHIFT MOTOR CONTROL A 6 A918 20RD FUSED B(+) 7-8-Component Location - 21 Component Location - 24 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transfer Case > Transfer Case Actuator > Component Information > Locations > Page 6595 Component Location - 26 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transfer Case > Transfer Case Actuator > Component Information > Locations > Page 6596 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transfer Case > Transfer Case Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Component ID 14 Transfer Case Actuator: Diagrams Component ID 14 Component ID: 14 Component : ASSEMBLY-SHIFT MOTOR/MODE SENSOR Connector: Name : ASSEMBLY-SHIFT MOTOR/MODE SENSOR Color : BLACK # of pins : 8 Qualifier : (RFE FULL TIME ETC) Pin Circuit Description 1 T103 20YL/OR 5 VOLT SUPPLY 2 D201 20WT/DG MODE SENSOR A 3 G180 20VT/YL SENSOR RETURN 4 T101 16DG SHIFT MOTOR CONTROL B 5 T102 16YL SHIFT MOTOR CONTROL A 6 A940 20RD FUSED B(+) 7 T300 20YL/GY T-CASE MOTOR BRAKE SIGNAL 8-Connector: Name : ASSEMBLY-SHIFT MOTOR/MODE SENSOR Color : DK. GRAY # of pins : 8 Qualifier : (RFE PART TIME ETC/RE ETC) Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transfer Case > Transfer Case Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Component ID 14 > Page 6599 Pin Circuit Description 1 T103 20YL/OR 5 VOLT SUPPLY 2 D201 20WT/DG MODE SENSOR A 3 G180 20VT/YL SENSOR RETURN 4 T101 16DG SHIFT MOTOR CONTROL B 5 T102 16YL SHIFT MOTOR CONTROL A 6 A918 20RD FUSED B(+) 7-8-- Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transfer Case > Transfer Case Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Component ID 14 > Page 6600 Transfer Case Actuator: Diagrams Component ID 18 Component ID: 18 Component : ASSEMBLY-SHIFT MOTOR/MODE SENSOR Connector: Name : ASSEMBLY-SHIFT MOTOR/MODE SENSOR Color : BLACK # of pins : 8 Qualifier : (RFE FULL TIME ETC) Pin Circuit Description 1 T103 20YL/OR 5 VOLT SUPPLY 2 D201 20WT/DG MODE SENSOR A 3 G180 20VT/YL SENSOR RETURN 4 T101 16DG SHIFT MOTOR CONTROL B 5 T102 16YL SHIFT MOTOR CONTROL A 6 A940 20RD FUSED B(+) 7 T300 20YL/GY T-CASE MOTOR BRAKE SIGNAL 8-Component Location - 21 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transfer Case > Transfer Case Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Component ID 14 > Page 6601 Component Location - 24 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transfer Case > Transfer Case Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Component ID 14 > Page 6602 Component Location - 26 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transfer Case > Transfer Case Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Component ID 14 > Page 6603 Connector: Name : ASSEMBLY-SHIFT MOTOR/MODE SENSOR Color : DK. GRAY # of pins : 8 Qualifier : (RFE PART TIME ETC/RE ETC) Pin Circuit Description 1 T103 20YL/OR 5 VOLT SUPPLY 2 D201 20WT/DG MODE SENSOR A 3 G180 20VT/YL SENSOR RETURN 4 T101 16DG SHIFT MOTOR CONTROL B Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transfer Case > Transfer Case Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Component ID 14 > Page 6604 5 T102 16YL SHIFT MOTOR CONTROL A 6 A918 20RD FUSED B(+) 7-8-Component Location - 21 Component Location - 24 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transfer Case > Transfer Case Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Component ID 14 > Page 6605 Component Location - 26 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transfer Case > Transfer Case Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Component ID 14 > Page 6606 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transfer Case > Transfer Case Actuator > Component Information > Description and Operation > NV243 Transfer Case Transfer Case Actuator: Description and Operation NV243 Transfer Case Description DESCRIPTION The shift motor (2) consists of a permanent magnet D.C. motor with gear reduction to convert a high speed-low torque device into a low speed-high torque device. The output of the device is coupled to a shaft which internally moves the mode and range forks that change the transfer case operating ranges. The motor is rated at 25 amps maximum at 23° C (72° F) with 10 volts at the motor leads. Operation OPERATION The transfer case shift motor responds to the Transfer Case Control Module (TCCM) commands to move the transfer case shift sector bi-directionally, as required, to obtain the transfer case operating mode indicated by the instrument panel mounted selector switch. Description DESCRIPTION The shift motor (2) consists of a permanent magnet D.C. motor with gear reduction to convert a high speed-low torque device into a low speed-high torque device. The output of the device is coupled to a shaft which internally moves the mode and range forks that change the transfer case operating ranges. The motor is rated at 25 amps maximum at 23° C (72° F) with 10 volts at the motor leads. Operation OPERATION The transfer case shift motor responds to the Transfer Case Control Module (TCCM) commands to move the transfer case shift sector bi-directionally, as required, to obtain the transfer case operating mode indicated by the instrument panel mounted selector switch. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transfer Case > Transfer Case Actuator > Component Information > Description and Operation > NV243 Transfer Case > Page 6609 Transfer Case Actuator: Description and Operation NV244 GENII Transfer Case Description DESCRIPTION The shift motor (2) consists of a permanent magnet D.C. motor with gear reduction to convert a high speed-low torque device into a low speed-high torque device. The output of the device is coupled to a shaft which internally moves the mode and range forks that change the transfer case operating ranges. The motor is rated at 25 amps maximum at 23° C (72° F) with 10 volts at the motor leads. Operation OPERATION The transfer case shift motor responds to the Transfer Case Control Module (TCCM) commands to move the transfer case shift sector bi-directionally, as required, to obtain the transfer case operating mode indicated by the instrument panel mounted selector switch. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transfer Case > Transfer Case Actuator > Component Information > Description and Operation > NV243 Transfer Case > Page 6610 Transfer Case Actuator: Description and Operation NV246 Transfer Case Description DESCRIPTION The shift motor consists of a permanent magnet D.C. motor with gear reduction to convert a high speed-low torque device into a low speed-high torque device. The output of the device is coupled to a shaft which internally moves the mode and range forks that change the transfer case operating ranges. The motor is rated at 25 amps maximum at 23° C (72° F) with 10 volts at the motor leads. Operation OPERATION The transfer case shift motor responds to the Front Control Module (FCM) commands to move the transfer case shift sector bi-directionally, as required, to obtain the transfer case operating mode indicated by the instrument panel mounted selector switch. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transfer Case > Transfer Case Actuator > Component Information > Description and Operation > NV243 Transfer Case > Page 6611 Transfer Case Actuator: Description and Operation NV273 Transfer Case Description DESCRIPTION The shift motor (2) consists of a permanent magnet D.C. motor with gear reduction to convert a high speed-low torque device into a low speed-high torque device. The output of the device is coupled to a shaft which internally moves the mode and range forks that change the transfer case operating ranges. The motor is rated at 25 amps maximum at 23° C (72° F) with 10 volts at the motor leads. Operation OPERATION The transfer case shift motor responds to the Transfer Case Control Module (TCCM) commands to move the transfer case shift sector bi-directionally, as required, to obtain the transfer case operating mode indicated by the instrument panel mounted selector switch. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transfer Case > Transfer Case Actuator > Component Information > Service and Repair > NV243 Transfer Case Transfer Case Actuator: Service and Repair NV243 Transfer Case Removal REMOVAL NOTE: New shift motor assemblies are shipped in the 2WD/AWD position. If a new shift motor assembly will be installed, it will be necessary to shift the transfer case to the 2WD/AWD position prior to motor removal. 1. Raise the vehicle on a suitable hoist. 2. Disengage the wiring connectors from the shift motor and mode sensor. 3. Remove the bolts (3) holding the shift motor and mode sensor assembly (2) onto the transfer case (1). 4. Separate the shift motor and mode sensor assembly (2) from the transfer case. Installation INSTALLATION 1. Verify that the shift sector o-ring is clean and properly positioned over the shift sector and against the transfer case. NOTE: Verify that the shift motor position and sector shaft orientation are aligned. It may be necessary to manually shift the transfer case if the shift motor and sector shaft are not aligned. 2. Position the shift motor and mode sensor assembly (2) onto the transfer case (1). 3. Install the bolts (3) to hold the assembly onto the transfer case. Tighten the bolts to 16-24 Nm (12-18 ft.lbs.). CAUTION: If the original shift motor and mode sensor assembly bolts are reused, be sure to use Mopar(R) Lock & Seal or Loctite(TM) 242 to replenish the lock patch material originally found on the bolts 4. Engage the wiring connectors to the shift motor and mode sensor. 5. Refill the transfer case as necessary. 6. Lower vehicle and verify transfer case operation. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transfer Case > Transfer Case Actuator > Component Information > Service and Repair > NV243 Transfer Case > Page 6614 Transfer Case Actuator: Service and Repair NV244 GENII Transfer Case Removal REMOVAL NOTE: New shift motor assemblies are shipped in the 2WD/AWD position. If a new shift motor assembly will be installed, it will be necessary to shift the transfer case to the 2WD/AWD position prior to motor removal. 1. Raise the vehicle on a suitable hoist. 2. Disengage the wiring connectors from the shift motor and mode sensor. 3. Remove the bolts (3) holding the shift motor and mode sensor assembly (2) onto the transfer case (1). 4. Separate the shift motor and mode sensor assembly (2) from the transfer case. Installation INSTALLATION 1. Verify that the shift sector o-ring is clean and properly positioned over the shift sector and against the transfer case. NOTE: Verify that the shift motor position and sector shaft orientation are aligned. It may be necessary to manually shift the transfer case if the shift motor and sector shaft are not aligned. 2. Position the shift motor and mode sensor assembly (2) onto the transfer case (1). 3. Install the bolts (3) to hold the assembly onto the transfer case. Tighten the bolts to 16-24 Nm (12-18 ft.lbs.). CAUTION: If the original shift motor and mode sensor assembly bolts are reused, be sure to use Mopar(R) Lock & Seal or Loctite(TM) 242 to replenish the lock patch material originally found on the bolts 4. Engage the wiring connectors to the shift motor and mode sensor. 5. Refill the transfer case as necessary. 6. Lower vehicle and verify transfer case operation. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transfer Case > Transfer Case Actuator > Component Information > Service and Repair > NV243 Transfer Case > Page 6615 Transfer Case Actuator: Service and Repair NV246 Transfer Case Removal REMOVAL Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transfer Case > Transfer Case Actuator > Component Information > Service and Repair > NV243 Transfer Case > Page 6616 ERROR: stackunderflow OFFENDING COMMAND: ~ STACK: Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transfer Case > Transfer Case Actuator > Component Information > Service and Repair > NV243 Transfer Case > Page 6617 Transfer Case Actuator: Service and Repair NV273 Transfer Case Removal REMOVAL NOTE: New shift motor assemblies are shipped in the 2WD/AWD position. If a new shift motor assembly will be installed, it will be necessary to shift the transfer case to the 2WD/AWD position prior to motor removal. 1. Raise the vehicle on a suitable hoist. 2. Disengage the wiring connectors from the shift motor and mode sensor. 3. Remove the bolts (3) holding the shift motor and mode sensor assembly (2) onto the transfer case (1). 4. Separate the shift motor and mode sensor assembly (2) from the transfer case. Installation INSTALLATION 1. Verify that the shift sector o-ring is clean and properly positioned over the shift sector and against the transfer case. NOTE: Verify that the shift motor position and sector shaft orientation are aligned. It may be necessary to manually shift the transfer case if the shift motor and sector shaft are not aligned. 2. Position the shift motor and mode sensor assembly (2) onto the transfer case (1). 3. Install the bolts (3) to hold the assembly onto the transfer case. Tighten the bolts to 16-24 Nm (12-18 ft.lbs.). CAUTION: If the original shift motor and mode sensor assembly bolts are reused, be sure to use Mopar(R) Lock & Seal or Loctite(TM) 242 to replenish the lock patch material originally found on the bolts 4. Engage the wiring connectors to the shift motor and mode sensor. 5. Refill the transfer case as necessary. 6. Lower vehicle and verify transfer case operation. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Overdrive Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > 42RLE Automatic Transmission Overdrive Solenoid: Description and Operation 42RLE Automatic Transmission Description DESCRIPTION The Solenoid/Pressure Switch Assembly (1) is inside the transmission and mounted to the valve body assembly. The assembly consists of four solenoids that control hydraulic pressure to the L/R, 2/4, OD, and UD friction elements (transmission clutches), and the torque converter clutch. The reverse clutch is controlled by line pressure from the manual valve in the valve body. The solenoids are contained within the Solenoid/Pressure Switch Assembly, and can only be serviced by replacing the assembly. The solenoid assembly also contains pressure switches that monitor and send hydraulic circuit information to the TCM. Likewise, the pressure switches can only be service by replacing the assembly. Operation OPERATION SOLENOIDS The solenoids receive electrical power from the Transmission Control Relay through a single wire. The TCM energizes or operates the solenoids individually by grounding the return wire of the solenoid needed. When a solenoid is energized, the solenoid valve shifts, and a fluid passage is opened or closed (vented or applied), depending on its default operating state. The result is an apply or release of a frictional element. The 2/4 and UD solenoids are normally applied, which allows fluid to pass through in their relaxed or "off" state. By design, this allows transmission limp-in (P,R,N,2) in the event of an electrical failure. The continuity of the solenoids and circuits are periodically tested. Each solenoid is turned on or off depending on its current state. An inductive spike should be detected by the TCM during this test. If no spike is detected, the circuit is tested again to verify the failure. In addition to the periodic testing, the solenoid circuits are tested if a speed ratio or pressure switch error occurs. PRESSURE SWITCHES The TCM relies on three pressure switches to monitor fluid pressure in the L/R, 2/4, and OD hydraulic circuits. The primary purpose of these switches is to help the TCM detect when clutch circuit hydraulic failures occur. The range for the pressure switch closing and opening points is 11-23 psi. Typically the switch opening point will be approximately one psi lower than the closing point. For example, a switch may close at 18 psi and open at 17 psi. The switches are continuously monitored by the TCM for the correct states (open or closed) in each gear as shown in the following chart: Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Overdrive Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 6624 A Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) will set if the TCM senses any switch open or closed at the wrong time in a given gear. The TCM also tests the 2/4 and OD pressure switches when they are normally off (OD and 2/4 are tested in 1st gear, OD in 2nd gear, and 2/4 in 3rd gear). The test simply verifies that they are operational, by looking for a closed state when the corresponding element is applied. Immediately after a shift into 1st, 2nd, or 3rd gear with the engine speed above 1000 rpm, the TCM momentarily turns on element pressure to the 2/4 and/or OD clutch circuits to identify that the appropriate switch has closed. If it doesn't close, it is tested again. If the switch fails to close the second time, the appropriate Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) will set. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Overdrive Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 6625 Overdrive Solenoid: Description and Operation 545RFE Automatic Transmission Description DESCRIPTION The transmission solenoid/TRS assembly is internal to the transmission and mounted on the valve body assembly. The assembly consists of six solenoids that control hydraulic pressure to the six friction elements (transmission clutches), and the torque converter clutch. The pressure control solenoid is located on the side of the solenoid/TRS assembly. The solenoid/TRS assembly also contains the Transmission Range Sensor (TRS) and five pressure switches that feed information to the TCM. Operation OPERATION SOLENOIDS Solenoids are used to control the L/R, 2C, 4C, OD, and UD friction elements. The reverse clutch is controlled by line pressure and the position of the manual valve in the valve body. All the solenoids are contained within the Solenoid and Pressure Switch Assembly. The solenoid and pressure switch assembly contains one additional solenoid, Multi-Select (MS), which serves primarily to provide 2nd and 3rd gear limp-in operation. The solenoids receive electrical power from the Transmission Control Relay through a single wire. The TCM energizes or operates the solenoids individually by grounding the return wire of the solenoid as necessary. When a solenoid is energized, the solenoid valve shifts, and a fluid passage is opened or closed (vented or applied), depending on its default operating state. The result is an apply or release of a frictional element. The MS and UD solenoids are normally applied to allow transmission limp-in in the event of an electrical failure. The continuity of the solenoids and circuits are periodically tested. Each solenoid is turned on or off depending on its current state. An inductive spike should be detected by the TCM during this test. If no spike is detected, the circuit is tested again to verify the failure. In addition to the periodic testing, the solenoid circuits are tested if a speed ratio or pressure switch error occurs. PRESSURE SWITCHES The TCM relies on five pressure switches to monitor fluid pressure in the L/R, 2C, 4C, UD, and OD hydraulic circuits. The primary purpose of these switches is to help the TCM detect when clutch circuit hydraulic failures occur. The switches close at 23 psi and open at 11 psi, and simply indicate whether or not pressure exists. The switches are continuously monitored by the TCM for the correct states (open or closed) in each gear as shown in the following charts and 545RFE PRESSURE SWITCH STATES: Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Overdrive Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 6626 A Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) will set if the TCM senses any switch open or closed at the wrong time in a given gear. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Overdrive Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 6627 Overdrive Solenoid: Description and Operation 68RFE Automatic Transmission Description DESCRIPTION The transmission solenoid/TRS assembly is internal to the transmission and mounted on the valve body assembly. The assembly consists of six solenoids that control hydraulic pressure to the six friction elements (transmission clutches), and the torque converter clutch. The pressure control solenoid is located on the side of the solenoid/TRS assembly. The solenoid/TRS assembly also contains the Transmission Range Sensor (TRS) and five pressure switches that feed information to the TCM. Operation OPERATION SOLENOIDS Solenoids are used to control the L/R, 2C, 4C, OD, and UD friction elements. The reverse clutch is controlled by line pressure and the position of the manual valve in the valve body. All the solenoids are contained within the Solenoid and Pressure Switch Assembly. The solenoid and pressure switch assembly contains one additional solenoid, Multi-Select (MS), which serves primarily to provide 3rd gear and reverse limp-in operation. The TCM energizes or operates the solenoids individually by grounding the return wire of the solenoid as necessary. When a solenoid is energized, the solenoid valve shifts, and a fluid passage is opened or closed (vented or applied), depending on its default operating state. The result is an apply or release of a frictional element. The MS and UD solenoids are normally applied to allow transmission limp-in in the event of an electrical failure. The continuity of the solenoids and circuits are periodically tested. Each solenoid is turned on or off depending on its current state. An inductive spike should be detected by the TCM during this test. If no spike is detected, the circuit is tested again to verify the failure. In addition to the periodic testing, the solenoid circuits are tested if a speed ratio or pressure switch error occurs. PRESSURE SWITCHES The TCM relies on five pressure switches to monitor fluid pressure in the L/R, 2C, 4C, UD, and OD hydraulic circuits. The primary purpose of these switches is to help the TCM detect when clutch circuit hydraulic failures occur. The switches close at 23 psi and open at 11 psi, and simply indicate whether or not pressure exists. The switches are continuously monitored by the TCM for the correct states (open or closed) in each gear as shown in the following charts and Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Overdrive Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 6628 A Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) will set if the TCM senses any switch open or closed at the wrong time in a given gear. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Overdrive Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 42RLE Automatic Transmission Overdrive Solenoid: Service and Repair 42RLE Automatic Transmission Removal REMOVAL NOTE: If the Solenoid/Pressure Switch Assembly is being replaced, the Quick Learn Procedure must be performed. See: Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Transmission Control Module/TCM Quick Learn 1. Raise vehicle on hoist. 2. Remove valve body assembly from transmission. See: Valve Body/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/42RLE Automatic Transmission/Removal 3. Remove Solenoid/Pressure Switch Assembly retaining screws (2) from solenoid. 4. Remove Solenoid/Pressure Switch Assembly (1) and screen from valve body (2). Installation INSTALLATION NOTE: If the Solenoid/Pressure Switch assembly is being replaced, the Quick Learn Procedure must be performed. See: Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Transmission Control Module/TCM Quick Learn Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Overdrive Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 6631 1. Install Solenoid/Pressure Switch Assembly (1) and screen (3) to the separator and transfer plates. 2. Install and tighten retaining screws (2) to 5.5 Nm (50 in. lbs.) torque. 3. Install valve body. See: Valve Body/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/42RLE Automatic Transmission/Installation Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Overdrive Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 6632 Overdrive Solenoid: Service and Repair 545RFE Automatic Transmission Removal REMOVAL NOTE: If the Transmission Solenoid/TRS Assembly is being replaced, the Quick Learn Procedure must be performed. See: Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Transmission Control Module/TCM Quick Learn 1. Remove the valve body from the transmission. See: Valve Body/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/545RFE Automatic Transmission/Removal 2. Remove the bolts (1) holding the transmission solenoid/TRS assembly onto the valve body. 3. Separate the transmission solenoid/TRS assembly from the valve body. Installation INSTALLATION Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Overdrive Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 6633 1. Place TRS selector plate in the PARK position. 2. Position the transmission solenoid/TRS assembly onto the valve body. Be sure that both alignment dowels are fully seated in the valve body and that the TRS switch contacts are properly positioned in the selector plate 3. Install the bolts (1) to hold the transmission solenoid/TRS assembly onto the valve body. 4. Tighten the solenoid assembly screws adjacent to the arrows cast into the bottom of the valve body first. Tighten the screws to 6 Nm (50 in.lbs.). 5. Tighten the remainder of the solenoid assembly screws to 6 Nm (50 in.lbs.). 6. Install the valve body into the transmission. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Overdrive Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 6634 Overdrive Solenoid: Service and Repair 68RFE Automatic Transmission Removal REMOVAL NOTE: If the Transmission Solenoid/TRS Assembly is being replaced, the Quick Learn Procedure must be performed. See: Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Transmission Control Module/TCM Quick Learn 1. Remove the valve body from the transmission. 2. Remove the bolts (1) holding the transmission solenoid/TRS assembly onto the valve body. 3. Separate the transmission solenoid/TRS assembly from the valve body. Installation INSTALLATION Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Overdrive Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 6635 1. Place TRS selector plate in the PARK position. 2. Position the transmission solenoid/TRS assembly onto the valve body. Be sure that both alignment dowels are fully seated in the valve body and that the TRS switch contacts are properly positioned in the selector plate 3. Install the bolts (1) to hold the transmission solenoid/TRS assembly onto the valve body. 4. Tighten the solenoid assembly screws adjacent to the arrows cast into the bottom of the valve body first. Tighten the screws to 6 Nm (50 in.lbs.). 5. Tighten the remainder of the solenoid assembly screws to 6 Nm (50 in.lbs.). 6. Install the valve body into the transmission. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Assembly-Line Pressure Sensor/Variable Force Solenoid Pressure Regulating Solenoid: Locations Assembly-Line Pressure Sensor/Variable Force Solenoid Component ID: 17 Component : ASSEMBLY-LINE PRESSURE SENSOR/VARIABLE FORCE SOLENOID Connector: Name : ASSEMBLY-LINE PRESSURE SENSOR/VARIABLE FORCE SOLENOID Color : BLACK # of pins : 6 Qualifier : (RLE) Pin Circuit Description 1-2 F856 20YL/PK 5 VOLT SUPPLY 3 T38 20YL/BR LINE PRESSURE SIGNAL 4 K900 20DB/DG SENSOR GROUND 5 T16 18YL/OR TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT 6 T118 20DG LP VFS CONTROL Component Location - 19 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Assembly-Line Pressure Sensor/Variable Force Solenoid > Page 6640 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Assembly-Line Pressure Sensor/Variable Force Solenoid > Page 6641 Pressure Regulating Solenoid: Locations Assembly-Transmission Solenoid Component ID 15 Component ID: 15 Component : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID Connector: Name : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID Color : # of pins : 8 Qualifier : (RE) Pin Circuit Description 1 T16 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT 2 F856 18YL/PK 5 VOLT SUPPLY 3 K900 20DB/DG SENSOR GROUND 4 T38 18YL/BR GOVERNOR PRESSURE SENSOR SIGNAL 5 T118 18DG GOVERNOR PRESSURE SOLENOID CONTROL 6 T9 18DG/TN 3-4 SOLENOID CONTROL 7 T75 18YL/LB TORQUE CONVERTER CLUTCH SOLENOID CONTROL 8 T54 18DG/OR TRANSMISSION TEMPERATURE SIGNAL Component Location - 20 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Assembly-Line Pressure Sensor/Variable Force Solenoid > Page 6642 Component Location - 26 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Assembly-Line Pressure Sensor/Variable Force Solenoid > Page 6643 Connector: Name : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID C1 Color : # of pins : 10 Qualifier : (RC) Pin Circuit Description 1 T806 20DG/VT PRESSURE SIGNAL 7 2 T804 20YL/DB PRESSURE SIGNAL 5 3 T54 20DG/OR TRANSMISSION TEMPERATURE SIGNAL 4 T817 20YL/BR LINEAR 3 CONTROL Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Assembly-Line Pressure Sensor/Variable Force Solenoid > Page 6644 5 T813 20DG/LG LINEAR 1 CONTROL 6 T807 20DG/WT PRESSURE SIGNAL 8 7 T803 20DG/BR PRESSURE SIGNAL 4 8 T820 20YL/WT TEMPERATURE SENSOR GROUND 9 T816 20YL/PK LINEAR 3 GROUND 10 T812 20DG/TN LINEAR 1 GROUND Component Location - 20 Component Location - 26 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Assembly-Line Pressure Sensor/Variable Force Solenoid > Page 6645 Connector: Name : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID C2 Color : # of pins : 12 Qualifier : (RC) Pin Circuit Description 1 T800 20DG/BR PRESSURE SIGNAL 1 2 T805 20DG/OR PRESSURE SIGNAL 6 3 T809 20DG/YL SHIFT 2 CONTROL 4 T811 20DG/LB SHIFT 4 CONTROL Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Assembly-Line Pressure Sensor/Variable Force Solenoid > Page 6646 5 T818 20YL/OR LINEAR 4 GROUND 6 T814 20YL/BR LINEAR 2 GROUND 7 T801 20DG/RD PRESSURE SIGNAL 2 8 T802 20DG/PK PRESSURE SIGNAL 3 9 T810 20DG/DB SHIFT 3 CONTROL 10 T808 20DG/GY SHIFT 1 CONTROL 11 T821 20YL/GY LINEAR 4 CONTROL 12 T815 20YL/RD LINEAR 2 CONTROL Component Location - 20 Component Location - 26 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Assembly-Line Pressure Sensor/Variable Force Solenoid > Page 6647 Component ID 19 Component ID: 19 Component : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID Connector: Name : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID Color : # of pins : 8 Qualifier : (RE) Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Assembly-Line Pressure Sensor/Variable Force Solenoid > Page 6648 Pin Circuit Description 1 T16 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT 2 F856 18YL/PK 5 VOLT SUPPLY 3 K900 20DB/DG SENSOR GROUND 4 T38 18YL/BR GOVERNOR PRESSURE SENSOR SIGNAL 5 T118 18DG GOVERNOR PRESSURE SOLENOID CONTROL 6 T9 18DG/TN 3-4 SOLENOID CONTROL 7 T75 18YL/LB TORQUE CONVERTER CLUTCH SOLENOID CONTROL 8 T54 18DG/OR TRANSMISSION TEMPERATURE SIGNAL Component Location - 20 Component Location - 26 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Assembly-Line Pressure Sensor/Variable Force Solenoid > Page 6649 Connector: Name : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID C1 Color : # of pins : 10 Qualifier : (RC) Pin Circuit Description 1 T806 20DG/VT PRESSURE SIGNAL 7 2 T804 20YL/DB PRESSURE SIGNAL 5 3 T54 20DG/OR TRANSMISSION TEMPERATURE SIGNAL 4 T817 20YL/BR LINEAR 3 CONTROL Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Assembly-Line Pressure Sensor/Variable Force Solenoid > Page 6650 5 T813 20DG/LG LINEAR 1 CONTROL 6 T807 20DG/WT PRESSURE SIGNAL 8 7 T803 20DG/BR PRESSURE SIGNAL 4 8 T820 20YL/WT TEMPERATURE SENSOR GROUND 9 T816 20YL/PK LINEAR 3 GROUND 10 T812 20DG/TN LINEAR 1 GROUND Component Location - 20 Component Location - 26 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Assembly-Line Pressure Sensor/Variable Force Solenoid > Page 6651 Connector: Name : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID C2 Color : # of pins : 12 Qualifier : (RC) Pin Circuit Description 1 T800 20DG/BR PRESSURE SIGNAL 1 2 T805 20DG/OR PRESSURE SIGNAL 6 3 T809 20DG/YL SHIFT 2 CONTROL 4 T811 20DG/LB SHIFT 4 CONTROL Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Assembly-Line Pressure Sensor/Variable Force Solenoid > Page 6652 5 T818 20YL/OR LINEAR 4 GROUND 6 T814 20YL/BR LINEAR 2 GROUND 7 T801 20DG/RD PRESSURE SIGNAL 2 8 T802 20DG/PK PRESSURE SIGNAL 3 9 T810 20DG/DB SHIFT 3 CONTROL 10 T808 20DG/GY SHIFT 1 CONTROL 11 T821 20YL/GY LINEAR 4 CONTROL 12 T815 20YL/RD LINEAR 2 CONTROL Component Location - 20 Component Location - 26 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Assembly-Line Pressure Sensor/Variable Force Solenoid > Page 6653 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Assembly-Line Pressure Sensor/Variable Force Solenoid > Page 6654 Pressure Regulating Solenoid: Locations Assembly-Transmission Solenoid/Pressure Switch Component ID: 20 Component : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID/PRESSURE SWITCH Connector: Name : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID/PRESSURE SWITCH Color : LT. BROWN # of pins : 10 Qualifier : (RLE) Pin Circuit Description 1 T60 20YL/GY OD CONTROL 2 T59 20YL/LB UD CONTROL 3 T16 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT 4 T19 18YL/DB 2-4 CONTROL 5 T47 18YL/DG 2-4 PRESSURE SIGNAL 6 T9 20DG/TN OD PRESSURE SIGNAL 7 T20 20DG/WT L/R CONTROL 8-9-10 T50 20YL/TN L/R PRESSURE SIGNAL Component Location - 19 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Assembly-Line Pressure Sensor/Variable Force Solenoid > Page 6655 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Assembly-Line Pressure Sensor/Variable Force Solenoid > Page 6656 Pressure Regulating Solenoid: Locations Assembly-Transmission Solenoid/TRS Component ID: 21 Component : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID/TRS Connector: Name : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID/TRS Color : BLACK # of pins : 23 Qualifier : (RFE) Pin Circuit Description 1-2 T20 20DG/WT L/R CONTROL 3-4 T41 20YL/DB TRS T41 SIGNAL (P/N) 5 T42 20DG/YL TRS T42 SIGNAL 6-- 7 T60 20YL/GY OD SOLENOID CONTROL 8 T3 20DG/DB TRS T3 SIGNAL 9 T1 20DG/LB TRS T1 SIGNAL 10 T16 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT 11 T48 20BR/YL 4C PRESSURE SIGNAL 12 T118 20DG LINE PRESSURE CONTROL 13 T4 20DG/RD TRS T2 SIGNAL 13 T4 20DG/LB TRS T2 SIGNAL 14 T50 20DG/PK L/R PRESSURE SIGNAL 14 T50 20YL/TN L/R PRESSURE SIGNAL 15 T147 20DG/YL 2C PRESSURE SIGNAL 16 T9 20DG/TN OD PRESSURE SIGNAL 17 T59 20YL/LB UD CONTROL 18 T29 20YL/WT UD PRESSURE SIGNAL 19 T259 20YL/DG 4C CONTROL 20 T219 20YL/LG 2C CONTROL 21 T140 20YL/GY MS CONTROL 22 T160 20DG/WT SENSOR GROUND 22 K900 20DB/DG SENSOR GROUND 23 T54 20DG/OR TRANSMISSION TEMPERATURE SIGNAL Component Location - 21 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Assembly-Line Pressure Sensor/Variable Force Solenoid > Page 6657 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Assembly-Line Pressure Sensor/Variable Force Solenoid Pressure Regulating Solenoid: Diagrams Assembly-Line Pressure Sensor/Variable Force Solenoid Component ID: 17 Component : ASSEMBLY-LINE PRESSURE SENSOR/VARIABLE FORCE SOLENOID Connector: Name : ASSEMBLY-LINE PRESSURE SENSOR/VARIABLE FORCE SOLENOID Color : BLACK # of pins : 6 Qualifier : (RLE) Pin Circuit Description 1-2 F856 20YL/PK 5 VOLT SUPPLY 3 T38 20YL/BR LINE PRESSURE SIGNAL 4 K900 20DB/DG SENSOR GROUND 5 T16 18YL/OR TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT 6 T118 20DG LP VFS CONTROL Component Location - 19 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Assembly-Line Pressure Sensor/Variable Force Solenoid > Page 6660 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Assembly-Line Pressure Sensor/Variable Force Solenoid > Page 6661 Pressure Regulating Solenoid: Diagrams Assembly-Transmission Solenoid Component ID 15 Component ID: 15 Component : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID Connector: Name : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID Color : # of pins : 8 Qualifier : (RE) Pin Circuit Description 1 T16 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT 2 F856 18YL/PK 5 VOLT SUPPLY 3 K900 20DB/DG SENSOR GROUND 4 T38 18YL/BR GOVERNOR PRESSURE SENSOR SIGNAL 5 T118 18DG GOVERNOR PRESSURE SOLENOID CONTROL 6 T9 18DG/TN 3-4 SOLENOID CONTROL 7 T75 18YL/LB TORQUE CONVERTER CLUTCH SOLENOID CONTROL 8 T54 18DG/OR TRANSMISSION TEMPERATURE SIGNAL Component Location - 20 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Assembly-Line Pressure Sensor/Variable Force Solenoid > Page 6662 Component Location - 26 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Assembly-Line Pressure Sensor/Variable Force Solenoid > Page 6663 Connector: Name : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID C1 Color : # of pins : 10 Qualifier : (RC) Pin Circuit Description 1 T806 20DG/VT PRESSURE SIGNAL 7 2 T804 20YL/DB PRESSURE SIGNAL 5 3 T54 20DG/OR TRANSMISSION TEMPERATURE SIGNAL 4 T817 20YL/BR LINEAR 3 CONTROL Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Assembly-Line Pressure Sensor/Variable Force Solenoid > Page 6664 5 T813 20DG/LG LINEAR 1 CONTROL 6 T807 20DG/WT PRESSURE SIGNAL 8 7 T803 20DG/BR PRESSURE SIGNAL 4 8 T820 20YL/WT TEMPERATURE SENSOR GROUND 9 T816 20YL/PK LINEAR 3 GROUND 10 T812 20DG/TN LINEAR 1 GROUND Component Location - 20 Component Location - 26 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Assembly-Line Pressure Sensor/Variable Force Solenoid > Page 6665 Connector: Name : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID C2 Color : # of pins : 12 Qualifier : (RC) Pin Circuit Description 1 T800 20DG/BR PRESSURE SIGNAL 1 2 T805 20DG/OR PRESSURE SIGNAL 6 3 T809 20DG/YL SHIFT 2 CONTROL 4 T811 20DG/LB SHIFT 4 CONTROL Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Assembly-Line Pressure Sensor/Variable Force Solenoid > Page 6666 5 T818 20YL/OR LINEAR 4 GROUND 6 T814 20YL/BR LINEAR 2 GROUND 7 T801 20DG/RD PRESSURE SIGNAL 2 8 T802 20DG/PK PRESSURE SIGNAL 3 9 T810 20DG/DB SHIFT 3 CONTROL 10 T808 20DG/GY SHIFT 1 CONTROL 11 T821 20YL/GY LINEAR 4 CONTROL 12 T815 20YL/RD LINEAR 2 CONTROL Component Location - 20 Component Location - 26 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Assembly-Line Pressure Sensor/Variable Force Solenoid > Page 6667 Component ID 19 Component ID: 19 Component : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID Connector: Name : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID Color : # of pins : 8 Qualifier : (RE) Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Assembly-Line Pressure Sensor/Variable Force Solenoid > Page 6668 Pin Circuit Description 1 T16 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT 2 F856 18YL/PK 5 VOLT SUPPLY 3 K900 20DB/DG SENSOR GROUND 4 T38 18YL/BR GOVERNOR PRESSURE SENSOR SIGNAL 5 T118 18DG GOVERNOR PRESSURE SOLENOID CONTROL 6 T9 18DG/TN 3-4 SOLENOID CONTROL 7 T75 18YL/LB TORQUE CONVERTER CLUTCH SOLENOID CONTROL 8 T54 18DG/OR TRANSMISSION TEMPERATURE SIGNAL Component Location - 20 Component Location - 26 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Assembly-Line Pressure Sensor/Variable Force Solenoid > Page 6669 Connector: Name : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID C1 Color : # of pins : 10 Qualifier : (RC) Pin Circuit Description 1 T806 20DG/VT PRESSURE SIGNAL 7 2 T804 20YL/DB PRESSURE SIGNAL 5 3 T54 20DG/OR TRANSMISSION TEMPERATURE SIGNAL 4 T817 20YL/BR LINEAR 3 CONTROL Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Assembly-Line Pressure Sensor/Variable Force Solenoid > Page 6670 5 T813 20DG/LG LINEAR 1 CONTROL 6 T807 20DG/WT PRESSURE SIGNAL 8 7 T803 20DG/BR PRESSURE SIGNAL 4 8 T820 20YL/WT TEMPERATURE SENSOR GROUND 9 T816 20YL/PK LINEAR 3 GROUND 10 T812 20DG/TN LINEAR 1 GROUND Component Location - 20 Component Location - 26 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Assembly-Line Pressure Sensor/Variable Force Solenoid > Page 6671 Connector: Name : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID C2 Color : # of pins : 12 Qualifier : (RC) Pin Circuit Description 1 T800 20DG/BR PRESSURE SIGNAL 1 2 T805 20DG/OR PRESSURE SIGNAL 6 3 T809 20DG/YL SHIFT 2 CONTROL 4 T811 20DG/LB SHIFT 4 CONTROL Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Assembly-Line Pressure Sensor/Variable Force Solenoid > Page 6672 5 T818 20YL/OR LINEAR 4 GROUND 6 T814 20YL/BR LINEAR 2 GROUND 7 T801 20DG/RD PRESSURE SIGNAL 2 8 T802 20DG/PK PRESSURE SIGNAL 3 9 T810 20DG/DB SHIFT 3 CONTROL 10 T808 20DG/GY SHIFT 1 CONTROL 11 T821 20YL/GY LINEAR 4 CONTROL 12 T815 20YL/RD LINEAR 2 CONTROL Component Location - 20 Component Location - 26 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Assembly-Line Pressure Sensor/Variable Force Solenoid > Page 6673 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Assembly-Line Pressure Sensor/Variable Force Solenoid > Page 6674 Pressure Regulating Solenoid: Diagrams Assembly-Transmission Solenoid/Pressure Switch Component ID: 20 Component : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID/PRESSURE SWITCH Connector: Name : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID/PRESSURE SWITCH Color : LT. BROWN # of pins : 10 Qualifier : (RLE) Pin Circuit Description 1 T60 20YL/GY OD CONTROL 2 T59 20YL/LB UD CONTROL 3 T16 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT 4 T19 18YL/DB 2-4 CONTROL 5 T47 18YL/DG 2-4 PRESSURE SIGNAL 6 T9 20DG/TN OD PRESSURE SIGNAL 7 T20 20DG/WT L/R CONTROL 8-9-10 T50 20YL/TN L/R PRESSURE SIGNAL Component Location - 19 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Assembly-Line Pressure Sensor/Variable Force Solenoid > Page 6675 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Assembly-Line Pressure Sensor/Variable Force Solenoid > Page 6676 Pressure Regulating Solenoid: Diagrams Assembly-Transmission Solenoid/TRS Component ID: 21 Component : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID/TRS Connector: Name : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID/TRS Color : BLACK # of pins : 23 Qualifier : (RFE) Pin Circuit Description 1-2 T20 20DG/WT L/R CONTROL 3-4 T41 20YL/DB TRS T41 SIGNAL (P/N) 5 T42 20DG/YL TRS T42 SIGNAL 6-- 7 T60 20YL/GY OD SOLENOID CONTROL 8 T3 20DG/DB TRS T3 SIGNAL 9 T1 20DG/LB TRS T1 SIGNAL 10 T16 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT 11 T48 20BR/YL 4C PRESSURE SIGNAL 12 T118 20DG LINE PRESSURE CONTROL 13 T4 20DG/RD TRS T2 SIGNAL 13 T4 20DG/LB TRS T2 SIGNAL 14 T50 20DG/PK L/R PRESSURE SIGNAL 14 T50 20YL/TN L/R PRESSURE SIGNAL 15 T147 20DG/YL 2C PRESSURE SIGNAL 16 T9 20DG/TN OD PRESSURE SIGNAL 17 T59 20YL/LB UD CONTROL 18 T29 20YL/WT UD PRESSURE SIGNAL 19 T259 20YL/DG 4C CONTROL 20 T219 20YL/LG 2C CONTROL 21 T140 20YL/GY MS CONTROL 22 T160 20DG/WT SENSOR GROUND 22 K900 20DB/DG SENSOR GROUND 23 T54 20DG/OR TRANSMISSION TEMPERATURE SIGNAL Component Location - 21 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Assembly-Line Pressure Sensor/Variable Force Solenoid > Page 6677 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > 42RLE Automatic Transmission Pressure Regulating Solenoid: Description and Operation 42RLE Automatic Transmission Description DESCRIPTION The pressure control solenoid (1) is mounted on the top of the valve body, next to the line pressure sensor (2). The TCM utilizes a closed-loop system to control transmission line pressure. The system contains a variable force style solenoid, the Pressure Control Solenoid. The solenoid is duty cycle controlled by the TCM to vent the unnecessary line pressure supplied by the oil pump back to the sump. The system also contains a variable pressure style sensor, the Line Pressure Sensor, which is a direct input to the TCM. The line pressure solenoid monitors the transmission line pressure and completes the feedback loop to the TCM. The TCM uses this information to adjust its control of the pressure control solenoid to achieve the desired line pressure. Operation OPERATION The pressure control solenoid (PCS) is a variable force (VFS) style solenoid. A VFS solenoid is an electro-hydraulic actuator, combining a solenoid and a regulating valve. The transmission control module varies the current for the PCS, which varies the pressure in the line pressure hydraulic circuit. When the current (duty cycle) of the PCS is low, the pressure in the circuit is higher. At 0 current (0% duty cycle), the pressure is at the maximum value. Conversely, when the current is maximized (100% duty cycle), the pressure in the circuit is at the lowest possible value. Description DESCRIPTION Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 6680 The Solenoid/Pressure Switch Assembly (1) is inside the transmission and mounted to the valve body assembly. The assembly consists of four solenoids that control hydraulic pressure to the L/R, 2/4, OD, and UD friction elements (transmission clutches), and the torque converter clutch. The reverse clutch is controlled by line pressure from the manual valve in the valve body. The solenoids are contained within the Solenoid/Pressure Switch Assembly, and can only be serviced by replacing the assembly. The solenoid assembly also contains pressure switches that monitor and send hydraulic circuit information to the TCM. Likewise, the pressure switches can only be service by replacing the assembly. Operation OPERATION SOLENOIDS The solenoids receive electrical power from the Transmission Control Relay through a single wire. The TCM energizes or operates the solenoids individually by grounding the return wire of the solenoid needed. When a solenoid is energized, the solenoid valve shifts, and a fluid passage is opened or closed (vented or applied), depending on its default operating state. The result is an apply or release of a frictional element. The 2/4 and UD solenoids are normally applied, which allows fluid to pass through in their relaxed or "off" state. By design, this allows transmission limp-in (P,R,N,2) in the event of an electrical failure. The continuity of the solenoids and circuits are periodically tested. Each solenoid is turned on or off depending on its current state. An inductive spike should be detected by the TCM during this test. If no spike is detected, the circuit is tested again to verify the failure. In addition to the periodic testing, the solenoid circuits are tested if a speed ratio or pressure switch error occurs. PRESSURE SWITCHES The TCM relies on three pressure switches to monitor fluid pressure in the L/R, 2/4, and OD hydraulic circuits. The primary purpose of these switches is to help the TCM detect when clutch circuit hydraulic failures occur. The range for the pressure switch closing and opening points is 11-23 psi. Typically the switch opening point will be approximately one psi lower than the closing point. For example, a switch may close at 18 psi and open at 17 psi. The switches are continuously monitored by the TCM for the correct states (open or closed) in each gear as shown in the following chart: Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 6681 A Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) will set if the TCM senses any switch open or closed at the wrong time in a given gear. The TCM also tests the 2/4 and OD pressure switches when they are normally off (OD and 2/4 are tested in 1st gear, OD in 2nd gear, and 2/4 in 3rd gear). The test simply verifies that they are operational, by looking for a closed state when the corresponding element is applied. Immediately after a shift into 1st, 2nd, or 3rd gear with the engine speed above 1000 rpm, the TCM momentarily turns on element pressure to the 2/4 and/or OD clutch circuits to identify that the appropriate switch has closed. If it doesn't close, it is tested again. If the switch fails to close the second time, the appropriate Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) will set. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 6682 Pressure Regulating Solenoid: Description and Operation 545RFE Automatic Transmission Description DESCRIPTION The transmission solenoid/TRS assembly is internal to the transmission and mounted on the valve body assembly. The assembly consists of six solenoids that control hydraulic pressure to the six friction elements (transmission clutches), and the torque converter clutch. The pressure control solenoid is located on the side of the solenoid/TRS assembly. The solenoid/TRS assembly also contains the Transmission Range Sensor (TRS) and five pressure switches that feed information to the TCM. Operation OPERATION SOLENOIDS Solenoids are used to control the L/R, 2C, 4C, OD, and UD friction elements. The reverse clutch is controlled by line pressure and the position of the manual valve in the valve body. All the solenoids are contained within the Solenoid and Pressure Switch Assembly. The solenoid and pressure switch assembly contains one additional solenoid, Multi-Select (MS), which serves primarily to provide 2nd and 3rd gear limp-in operation. The solenoids receive electrical power from the Transmission Control Relay through a single wire. The TCM energizes or operates the solenoids individually by grounding the return wire of the solenoid as necessary. When a solenoid is energized, the solenoid valve shifts, and a fluid passage is opened or closed (vented or applied), depending on its default operating state. The result is an apply or release of a frictional element. The MS and UD solenoids are normally applied to allow transmission limp-in in the event of an electrical failure. The continuity of the solenoids and circuits are periodically tested. Each solenoid is turned on or off depending on its current state. An inductive spike should be detected by the TCM during this test. If no spike is detected, the circuit is tested again to verify the failure. In addition to the periodic testing, the solenoid circuits are tested if a speed ratio or pressure switch error occurs. PRESSURE SWITCHES The TCM relies on five pressure switches to monitor fluid pressure in the L/R, 2C, 4C, UD, and OD hydraulic circuits. The primary purpose of these switches is to help the TCM detect when clutch circuit hydraulic failures occur. The switches close at 23 psi and open at 11 psi, and simply indicate whether or not pressure exists. The switches are continuously monitored by the TCM for the correct states (open or closed) in each gear as shown in the following charts and 545RFE PRESSURE SWITCH STATES: Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 6683 A Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) will set if the TCM senses any switch open or closed at the wrong time in a given gear. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 6684 Pressure Regulating Solenoid: Description and Operation 68RFE Automatic Transmission Description DESCRIPTION The transmission solenoid/TRS assembly is internal to the transmission and mounted on the valve body assembly. The assembly consists of six solenoids that control hydraulic pressure to the six friction elements (transmission clutches), and the torque converter clutch. The pressure control solenoid is located on the side of the solenoid/TRS assembly. The solenoid/TRS assembly also contains the Transmission Range Sensor (TRS) and five pressure switches that feed information to the TCM. Operation OPERATION SOLENOIDS Solenoids are used to control the L/R, 2C, 4C, OD, and UD friction elements. The reverse clutch is controlled by line pressure and the position of the manual valve in the valve body. All the solenoids are contained within the Solenoid and Pressure Switch Assembly. The solenoid and pressure switch assembly contains one additional solenoid, Multi-Select (MS), which serves primarily to provide 3rd gear and reverse limp-in operation. The TCM energizes or operates the solenoids individually by grounding the return wire of the solenoid as necessary. When a solenoid is energized, the solenoid valve shifts, and a fluid passage is opened or closed (vented or applied), depending on its default operating state. The result is an apply or release of a frictional element. The MS and UD solenoids are normally applied to allow transmission limp-in in the event of an electrical failure. The continuity of the solenoids and circuits are periodically tested. Each solenoid is turned on or off depending on its current state. An inductive spike should be detected by the TCM during this test. If no spike is detected, the circuit is tested again to verify the failure. In addition to the periodic testing, the solenoid circuits are tested if a speed ratio or pressure switch error occurs. PRESSURE SWITCHES The TCM relies on five pressure switches to monitor fluid pressure in the L/R, 2C, 4C, UD, and OD hydraulic circuits. The primary purpose of these switches is to help the TCM detect when clutch circuit hydraulic failures occur. The switches close at 23 psi and open at 11 psi, and simply indicate whether or not pressure exists. The switches are continuously monitored by the TCM for the correct states (open or closed) in each gear as shown in the following charts and Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 6685 A Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) will set if the TCM senses any switch open or closed at the wrong time in a given gear. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 42RLE Automatic Transmission Pressure Regulating Solenoid: Service and Repair 42RLE Automatic Transmission Removal REMOVAL 1. Remove the valve body from the transmission. See: Valve Body/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/42RLE Automatic Transmission/Removal 2. Remove the electrical connectors from the pressure control solenoid (1) and the line pressure sensor (2). 3. Remove the screws (6) holding the pressure control solenoid (1) and line pressure sensor (2) to the valve body. 4. Remove the pressure control solenoid and line pressure sensor from the valve body. Installation INSTALLATION 1. Install the pressure control solenoid (1) and line pressure sensor (2) into the valve body. 2. Install the screws (6) to hold the pressure control solenoid (1) and line pressure sensor (2) to the valve body. 3. Install the electrical connectors to the pressure control solenoid (1) and the line pressure sensor (2). 4. Install the valve body into the transmission. See: Valve Body/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/42RLE Automatic Transmission/Installation Removal Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 6688 REMOVAL NOTE: If the Solenoid/Pressure Switch Assembly is being replaced, the Quick Learn Procedure must be performed. See: Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Transmission Control Module/TCM Quick Learn 1. Raise vehicle on hoist. 2. Remove valve body assembly from transmission. See: Valve Body/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/42RLE Automatic Transmission/Removal 3. Remove Solenoid/Pressure Switch Assembly retaining screws (2) from solenoid. 4. Remove Solenoid/Pressure Switch Assembly (1) and screen from valve body (2). Installation INSTALLATION NOTE: If the Solenoid/Pressure Switch assembly is being replaced, the Quick Learn Procedure must be performed. See: Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Transmission Control Module/TCM Quick Learn 1. Install Solenoid/Pressure Switch Assembly (1) and screen (3) to the separator and transfer plates. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 6689 2. Install and tighten retaining screws (2) to 5.5 Nm (50 in. lbs.) torque. 3. Install valve body. See: Valve Body/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/42RLE Automatic Transmission/Installation Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 6690 Pressure Regulating Solenoid: Service and Repair 545RFE Automatic Transmission Removal REMOVAL NOTE: If the Transmission Solenoid/TRS Assembly is being replaced, the Quick Learn Procedure must be performed. See: Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Transmission Control Module/TCM Quick Learn 1. Remove the valve body from the transmission. See: Valve Body/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/545RFE Automatic Transmission/Removal 2. Remove the bolts (1) holding the transmission solenoid/TRS assembly onto the valve body. 3. Separate the transmission solenoid/TRS assembly from the valve body. Installation INSTALLATION Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 6691 1. Place TRS selector plate in the PARK position. 2. Position the transmission solenoid/TRS assembly onto the valve body. Be sure that both alignment dowels are fully seated in the valve body and that the TRS switch contacts are properly positioned in the selector plate 3. Install the bolts (1) to hold the transmission solenoid/TRS assembly onto the valve body. 4. Tighten the solenoid assembly screws adjacent to the arrows cast into the bottom of the valve body first. Tighten the screws to 6 Nm (50 in.lbs.). 5. Tighten the remainder of the solenoid assembly screws to 6 Nm (50 in.lbs.). 6. Install the valve body into the transmission. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 6692 Pressure Regulating Solenoid: Service and Repair 68RFE Automatic Transmission Removal REMOVAL NOTE: If the Transmission Solenoid/TRS Assembly is being replaced, the Quick Learn Procedure must be performed. See: Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Transmission Control Module/TCM Quick Learn 1. Remove the valve body from the transmission. 2. Remove the bolts (1) holding the transmission solenoid/TRS assembly onto the valve body. 3. Separate the transmission solenoid/TRS assembly from the valve body. Installation INSTALLATION Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 6693 1. Place TRS selector plate in the PARK position. 2. Position the transmission solenoid/TRS assembly onto the valve body. Be sure that both alignment dowels are fully seated in the valve body and that the TRS switch contacts are properly positioned in the selector plate 3. Install the bolts (1) to hold the transmission solenoid/TRS assembly onto the valve body. 4. Tighten the solenoid assembly screws adjacent to the arrows cast into the bottom of the valve body first. Tighten the screws to 6 Nm (50 in.lbs.). 5. Tighten the remainder of the solenoid assembly screws to 6 Nm (50 in.lbs.). 6. Install the valve body into the transmission. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Shift Interlock Solenoid > Component Information > Locations Shift Interlock Solenoid: Locations Component ID: 455 Component : SOLENOID-BRAKE TRANSMISSION SHIFT INTERLOCK Connector: Name : SOLENOID-BRAKE TRANSMISSION SHIFT INTERLOCK Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Pin Circuit Description 1 K32 18DB/YL BTSI SOLENOID CONTROL 2 Z101 18BK/VT GROUND Component Location - 47 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Shift Interlock Solenoid > Component Information > Locations > Page 6697 Component Location - 42 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Shift Interlock Solenoid > Component Information > Locations > Page 6698 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Shift Interlock Solenoid > Component Information > Locations > Page 6699 Shift Interlock Solenoid: Diagrams Component ID: 455 Component : SOLENOID-BRAKE TRANSMISSION SHIFT INTERLOCK Connector: Name : SOLENOID-BRAKE TRANSMISSION SHIFT INTERLOCK Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Pin Circuit Description 1 K32 18DB/YL BTSI SOLENOID CONTROL 2 Z101 18BK/VT GROUND Component Location - 47 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Shift Interlock Solenoid > Component Information > Locations > Page 6700 Component Location - 42 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Shift Interlock Solenoid > Component Information > Locations > Page 6701 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Assembly-Transmission Solenoid Shift Solenoid: Locations Assembly-Transmission Solenoid Component ID 15 Component ID: 15 Component : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID Connector: Name : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID Color : # of pins : 8 Qualifier : (RE) Pin Circuit Description 1 T16 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT 2 F856 18YL/PK 5 VOLT SUPPLY 3 K900 20DB/DG SENSOR GROUND 4 T38 18YL/BR GOVERNOR PRESSURE SENSOR SIGNAL 5 T118 18DG GOVERNOR PRESSURE SOLENOID CONTROL 6 T9 18DG/TN 3-4 SOLENOID CONTROL 7 T75 18YL/LB TORQUE CONVERTER CLUTCH SOLENOID CONTROL 8 T54 18DG/OR TRANSMISSION TEMPERATURE SIGNAL Component Location - 20 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Assembly-Transmission Solenoid > Page 6706 Component Location - 26 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Assembly-Transmission Solenoid > Page 6707 Connector: Name : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID C1 Color : # of pins : 10 Qualifier : (RC) Pin Circuit Description 1 T806 20DG/VT PRESSURE SIGNAL 7 2 T804 20YL/DB PRESSURE SIGNAL 5 3 T54 20DG/OR TRANSMISSION TEMPERATURE SIGNAL 4 T817 20YL/BR LINEAR 3 CONTROL Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Assembly-Transmission Solenoid > Page 6708 5 T813 20DG/LG LINEAR 1 CONTROL 6 T807 20DG/WT PRESSURE SIGNAL 8 7 T803 20DG/BR PRESSURE SIGNAL 4 8 T820 20YL/WT TEMPERATURE SENSOR GROUND 9 T816 20YL/PK LINEAR 3 GROUND 10 T812 20DG/TN LINEAR 1 GROUND Component Location - 20 Component Location - 26 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Assembly-Transmission Solenoid > Page 6709 Connector: Name : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID C2 Color : # of pins : 12 Qualifier : (RC) Pin Circuit Description 1 T800 20DG/BR PRESSURE SIGNAL 1 2 T805 20DG/OR PRESSURE SIGNAL 6 3 T809 20DG/YL SHIFT 2 CONTROL 4 T811 20DG/LB SHIFT 4 CONTROL Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Assembly-Transmission Solenoid > Page 6710 5 T818 20YL/OR LINEAR 4 GROUND 6 T814 20YL/BR LINEAR 2 GROUND 7 T801 20DG/RD PRESSURE SIGNAL 2 8 T802 20DG/PK PRESSURE SIGNAL 3 9 T810 20DG/DB SHIFT 3 CONTROL 10 T808 20DG/GY SHIFT 1 CONTROL 11 T821 20YL/GY LINEAR 4 CONTROL 12 T815 20YL/RD LINEAR 2 CONTROL Component Location - 20 Component Location - 26 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Assembly-Transmission Solenoid > Page 6711 Component ID 19 Component ID: 19 Component : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID Connector: Name : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID Color : # of pins : 8 Qualifier : (RE) Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Assembly-Transmission Solenoid > Page 6712 Pin Circuit Description 1 T16 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT 2 F856 18YL/PK 5 VOLT SUPPLY 3 K900 20DB/DG SENSOR GROUND 4 T38 18YL/BR GOVERNOR PRESSURE SENSOR SIGNAL 5 T118 18DG GOVERNOR PRESSURE SOLENOID CONTROL 6 T9 18DG/TN 3-4 SOLENOID CONTROL 7 T75 18YL/LB TORQUE CONVERTER CLUTCH SOLENOID CONTROL 8 T54 18DG/OR TRANSMISSION TEMPERATURE SIGNAL Component Location - 20 Component Location - 26 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Assembly-Transmission Solenoid > Page 6713 Connector: Name : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID C1 Color : # of pins : 10 Qualifier : (RC) Pin Circuit Description 1 T806 20DG/VT PRESSURE SIGNAL 7 2 T804 20YL/DB PRESSURE SIGNAL 5 3 T54 20DG/OR TRANSMISSION TEMPERATURE SIGNAL 4 T817 20YL/BR LINEAR 3 CONTROL Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Assembly-Transmission Solenoid > Page 6714 5 T813 20DG/LG LINEAR 1 CONTROL 6 T807 20DG/WT PRESSURE SIGNAL 8 7 T803 20DG/BR PRESSURE SIGNAL 4 8 T820 20YL/WT TEMPERATURE SENSOR GROUND 9 T816 20YL/PK LINEAR 3 GROUND 10 T812 20DG/TN LINEAR 1 GROUND Component Location - 20 Component Location - 26 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Assembly-Transmission Solenoid > Page 6715 Connector: Name : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID C2 Color : # of pins : 12 Qualifier : (RC) Pin Circuit Description 1 T800 20DG/BR PRESSURE SIGNAL 1 2 T805 20DG/OR PRESSURE SIGNAL 6 3 T809 20DG/YL SHIFT 2 CONTROL 4 T811 20DG/LB SHIFT 4 CONTROL Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Assembly-Transmission Solenoid > Page 6716 5 T818 20YL/OR LINEAR 4 GROUND 6 T814 20YL/BR LINEAR 2 GROUND 7 T801 20DG/RD PRESSURE SIGNAL 2 8 T802 20DG/PK PRESSURE SIGNAL 3 9 T810 20DG/DB SHIFT 3 CONTROL 10 T808 20DG/GY SHIFT 1 CONTROL 11 T821 20YL/GY LINEAR 4 CONTROL 12 T815 20YL/RD LINEAR 2 CONTROL Component Location - 20 Component Location - 26 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Assembly-Transmission Solenoid > Page 6717 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Assembly-Transmission Solenoid > Page 6718 Shift Solenoid: Locations Assembly-Transmission Solenoid/Pressure Switch Component ID: 20 Component : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID/PRESSURE SWITCH Connector: Name : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID/PRESSURE SWITCH Color : LT. BROWN # of pins : 10 Qualifier : (RLE) Pin Circuit Description 1 T60 20YL/GY OD CONTROL 2 T59 20YL/LB UD CONTROL 3 T16 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT 4 T19 18YL/DB 2-4 CONTROL 5 T47 18YL/DG 2-4 PRESSURE SIGNAL 6 T9 20DG/TN OD PRESSURE SIGNAL 7 T20 20DG/WT L/R CONTROL 8-9-10 T50 20YL/TN L/R PRESSURE SIGNAL Component Location - 19 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Assembly-Transmission Solenoid > Page 6719 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Assembly-Transmission Solenoid > Page 6720 Shift Solenoid: Locations Assembly-Transmission Solenoid/TRS Component ID: 21 Component : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID/TRS Connector: Name : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID/TRS Color : BLACK # of pins : 23 Qualifier : (RFE) Pin Circuit Description 1-2 T20 20DG/WT L/R CONTROL 3-4 T41 20YL/DB TRS T41 SIGNAL (P/N) 5 T42 20DG/YL TRS T42 SIGNAL 6-- 7 T60 20YL/GY OD SOLENOID CONTROL 8 T3 20DG/DB TRS T3 SIGNAL 9 T1 20DG/LB TRS T1 SIGNAL 10 T16 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT 11 T48 20BR/YL 4C PRESSURE SIGNAL 12 T118 20DG LINE PRESSURE CONTROL 13 T4 20DG/RD TRS T2 SIGNAL 13 T4 20DG/LB TRS T2 SIGNAL 14 T50 20DG/PK L/R PRESSURE SIGNAL 14 T50 20YL/TN L/R PRESSURE SIGNAL 15 T147 20DG/YL 2C PRESSURE SIGNAL 16 T9 20DG/TN OD PRESSURE SIGNAL 17 T59 20YL/LB UD CONTROL 18 T29 20YL/WT UD PRESSURE SIGNAL 19 T259 20YL/DG 4C CONTROL 20 T219 20YL/LG 2C CONTROL 21 T140 20YL/GY MS CONTROL 22 T160 20DG/WT SENSOR GROUND 22 K900 20DB/DG SENSOR GROUND 23 T54 20DG/OR TRANSMISSION TEMPERATURE SIGNAL Component Location - 21 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Assembly-Transmission Solenoid > Page 6721 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Assembly-Transmission Solenoid Shift Solenoid: Diagrams Assembly-Transmission Solenoid Component ID 15 Component ID: 15 Component : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID Connector: Name : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID Color : # of pins : 8 Qualifier : (RE) Pin Circuit Description 1 T16 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT 2 F856 18YL/PK 5 VOLT SUPPLY 3 K900 20DB/DG SENSOR GROUND 4 T38 18YL/BR GOVERNOR PRESSURE SENSOR SIGNAL 5 T118 18DG GOVERNOR PRESSURE SOLENOID CONTROL 6 T9 18DG/TN 3-4 SOLENOID CONTROL 7 T75 18YL/LB TORQUE CONVERTER CLUTCH SOLENOID CONTROL 8 T54 18DG/OR TRANSMISSION TEMPERATURE SIGNAL Component Location - 20 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Assembly-Transmission Solenoid > Page 6724 Component Location - 26 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Assembly-Transmission Solenoid > Page 6725 Connector: Name : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID C1 Color : # of pins : 10 Qualifier : (RC) Pin Circuit Description 1 T806 20DG/VT PRESSURE SIGNAL 7 2 T804 20YL/DB PRESSURE SIGNAL 5 3 T54 20DG/OR TRANSMISSION TEMPERATURE SIGNAL 4 T817 20YL/BR LINEAR 3 CONTROL Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Assembly-Transmission Solenoid > Page 6726 5 T813 20DG/LG LINEAR 1 CONTROL 6 T807 20DG/WT PRESSURE SIGNAL 8 7 T803 20DG/BR PRESSURE SIGNAL 4 8 T820 20YL/WT TEMPERATURE SENSOR GROUND 9 T816 20YL/PK LINEAR 3 GROUND 10 T812 20DG/TN LINEAR 1 GROUND Component Location - 20 Component Location - 26 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Assembly-Transmission Solenoid > Page 6727 Connector: Name : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID C2 Color : # of pins : 12 Qualifier : (RC) Pin Circuit Description 1 T800 20DG/BR PRESSURE SIGNAL 1 2 T805 20DG/OR PRESSURE SIGNAL 6 3 T809 20DG/YL SHIFT 2 CONTROL 4 T811 20DG/LB SHIFT 4 CONTROL Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Assembly-Transmission Solenoid > Page 6728 5 T818 20YL/OR LINEAR 4 GROUND 6 T814 20YL/BR LINEAR 2 GROUND 7 T801 20DG/RD PRESSURE SIGNAL 2 8 T802 20DG/PK PRESSURE SIGNAL 3 9 T810 20DG/DB SHIFT 3 CONTROL 10 T808 20DG/GY SHIFT 1 CONTROL 11 T821 20YL/GY LINEAR 4 CONTROL 12 T815 20YL/RD LINEAR 2 CONTROL Component Location - 20 Component Location - 26 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Assembly-Transmission Solenoid > Page 6729 Component ID 19 Component ID: 19 Component : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID Connector: Name : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID Color : # of pins : 8 Qualifier : (RE) Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Assembly-Transmission Solenoid > Page 6730 Pin Circuit Description 1 T16 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT 2 F856 18YL/PK 5 VOLT SUPPLY 3 K900 20DB/DG SENSOR GROUND 4 T38 18YL/BR GOVERNOR PRESSURE SENSOR SIGNAL 5 T118 18DG GOVERNOR PRESSURE SOLENOID CONTROL 6 T9 18DG/TN 3-4 SOLENOID CONTROL 7 T75 18YL/LB TORQUE CONVERTER CLUTCH SOLENOID CONTROL 8 T54 18DG/OR TRANSMISSION TEMPERATURE SIGNAL Component Location - 20 Component Location - 26 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Assembly-Transmission Solenoid > Page 6731 Connector: Name : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID C1 Color : # of pins : 10 Qualifier : (RC) Pin Circuit Description 1 T806 20DG/VT PRESSURE SIGNAL 7 2 T804 20YL/DB PRESSURE SIGNAL 5 3 T54 20DG/OR TRANSMISSION TEMPERATURE SIGNAL 4 T817 20YL/BR LINEAR 3 CONTROL Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Assembly-Transmission Solenoid > Page 6732 5 T813 20DG/LG LINEAR 1 CONTROL 6 T807 20DG/WT PRESSURE SIGNAL 8 7 T803 20DG/BR PRESSURE SIGNAL 4 8 T820 20YL/WT TEMPERATURE SENSOR GROUND 9 T816 20YL/PK LINEAR 3 GROUND 10 T812 20DG/TN LINEAR 1 GROUND Component Location - 20 Component Location - 26 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Assembly-Transmission Solenoid > Page 6733 Connector: Name : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID C2 Color : # of pins : 12 Qualifier : (RC) Pin Circuit Description 1 T800 20DG/BR PRESSURE SIGNAL 1 2 T805 20DG/OR PRESSURE SIGNAL 6 3 T809 20DG/YL SHIFT 2 CONTROL 4 T811 20DG/LB SHIFT 4 CONTROL Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Assembly-Transmission Solenoid > Page 6734 5 T818 20YL/OR LINEAR 4 GROUND 6 T814 20YL/BR LINEAR 2 GROUND 7 T801 20DG/RD PRESSURE SIGNAL 2 8 T802 20DG/PK PRESSURE SIGNAL 3 9 T810 20DG/DB SHIFT 3 CONTROL 10 T808 20DG/GY SHIFT 1 CONTROL 11 T821 20YL/GY LINEAR 4 CONTROL 12 T815 20YL/RD LINEAR 2 CONTROL Component Location - 20 Component Location - 26 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Assembly-Transmission Solenoid > Page 6735 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Assembly-Transmission Solenoid > Page 6736 Shift Solenoid: Diagrams Assembly-Transmission Solenoid/Pressure Switch Component ID: 20 Component : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID/PRESSURE SWITCH Connector: Name : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID/PRESSURE SWITCH Color : LT. BROWN # of pins : 10 Qualifier : (RLE) Pin Circuit Description 1 T60 20YL/GY OD CONTROL 2 T59 20YL/LB UD CONTROL 3 T16 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT 4 T19 18YL/DB 2-4 CONTROL 5 T47 18YL/DG 2-4 PRESSURE SIGNAL 6 T9 20DG/TN OD PRESSURE SIGNAL 7 T20 20DG/WT L/R CONTROL 8-9-10 T50 20YL/TN L/R PRESSURE SIGNAL Component Location - 19 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Assembly-Transmission Solenoid > Page 6737 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Assembly-Transmission Solenoid > Page 6738 Shift Solenoid: Diagrams Assembly-Transmission Solenoid/TRS Component ID: 21 Component : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID/TRS Connector: Name : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID/TRS Color : BLACK # of pins : 23 Qualifier : (RFE) Pin Circuit Description 1-2 T20 20DG/WT L/R CONTROL 3-4 T41 20YL/DB TRS T41 SIGNAL (P/N) 5 T42 20DG/YL TRS T42 SIGNAL 6-- 7 T60 20YL/GY OD SOLENOID CONTROL 8 T3 20DG/DB TRS T3 SIGNAL 9 T1 20DG/LB TRS T1 SIGNAL 10 T16 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT 11 T48 20BR/YL 4C PRESSURE SIGNAL 12 T118 20DG LINE PRESSURE CONTROL 13 T4 20DG/RD TRS T2 SIGNAL 13 T4 20DG/LB TRS T2 SIGNAL 14 T50 20DG/PK L/R PRESSURE SIGNAL 14 T50 20YL/TN L/R PRESSURE SIGNAL 15 T147 20DG/YL 2C PRESSURE SIGNAL 16 T9 20DG/TN OD PRESSURE SIGNAL 17 T59 20YL/LB UD CONTROL 18 T29 20YL/WT UD PRESSURE SIGNAL 19 T259 20YL/DG 4C CONTROL 20 T219 20YL/LG 2C CONTROL 21 T140 20YL/GY MS CONTROL 22 T160 20DG/WT SENSOR GROUND 22 K900 20DB/DG SENSOR GROUND 23 T54 20DG/OR TRANSMISSION TEMPERATURE SIGNAL Component Location - 21 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Assembly-Transmission Solenoid > Page 6739 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > 42RLE Automatic Transmission Shift Solenoid: Description and Operation 42RLE Automatic Transmission Description DESCRIPTION The Solenoid/Pressure Switch Assembly (1) is inside the transmission and mounted to the valve body assembly. The assembly consists of four solenoids that control hydraulic pressure to the L/R, 2/4, OD, and UD friction elements (transmission clutches), and the torque converter clutch. The reverse clutch is controlled by line pressure from the manual valve in the valve body. The solenoids are contained within the Solenoid/Pressure Switch Assembly, and can only be serviced by replacing the assembly. The solenoid assembly also contains pressure switches that monitor and send hydraulic circuit information to the TCM. Likewise, the pressure switches can only be service by replacing the assembly. Operation OPERATION SOLENOIDS The solenoids receive electrical power from the Transmission Control Relay through a single wire. The TCM energizes or operates the solenoids individually by grounding the return wire of the solenoid needed. When a solenoid is energized, the solenoid valve shifts, and a fluid passage is opened or closed (vented or applied), depending on its default operating state. The result is an apply or release of a frictional element. The 2/4 and UD solenoids are normally applied, which allows fluid to pass through in their relaxed or "off" state. By design, this allows transmission limp-in (P,R,N,2) in the event of an electrical failure. The continuity of the solenoids and circuits are periodically tested. Each solenoid is turned on or off depending on its current state. An inductive spike should be detected by the TCM during this test. If no spike is detected, the circuit is tested again to verify the failure. In addition to the periodic testing, the solenoid circuits are tested if a speed ratio or pressure switch error occurs. PRESSURE SWITCHES The TCM relies on three pressure switches to monitor fluid pressure in the L/R, 2/4, and OD hydraulic circuits. The primary purpose of these switches is to help the TCM detect when clutch circuit hydraulic failures occur. The range for the pressure switch closing and opening points is 11-23 psi. Typically the switch opening point will be approximately one psi lower than the closing point. For example, a switch may close at 18 psi and open at 17 psi. The switches are continuously monitored by the TCM for the correct states (open or closed) in each gear as shown in the following chart: Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 6742 A Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) will set if the TCM senses any switch open or closed at the wrong time in a given gear. The TCM also tests the 2/4 and OD pressure switches when they are normally off (OD and 2/4 are tested in 1st gear, OD in 2nd gear, and 2/4 in 3rd gear). The test simply verifies that they are operational, by looking for a closed state when the corresponding element is applied. Immediately after a shift into 1st, 2nd, or 3rd gear with the engine speed above 1000 rpm, the TCM momentarily turns on element pressure to the 2/4 and/or OD clutch circuits to identify that the appropriate switch has closed. If it doesn't close, it is tested again. If the switch fails to close the second time, the appropriate Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) will set. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 6743 Shift Solenoid: Description and Operation 545RFE Automatic Transmission Description DESCRIPTION The transmission solenoid/TRS assembly is internal to the transmission and mounted on the valve body assembly. The assembly consists of six solenoids that control hydraulic pressure to the six friction elements (transmission clutches), and the torque converter clutch. The pressure control solenoid is located on the side of the solenoid/TRS assembly. The solenoid/TRS assembly also contains the Transmission Range Sensor (TRS) and five pressure switches that feed information to the TCM. Operation OPERATION SOLENOIDS Solenoids are used to control the L/R, 2C, 4C, OD, and UD friction elements. The reverse clutch is controlled by line pressure and the position of the manual valve in the valve body. All the solenoids are contained within the Solenoid and Pressure Switch Assembly. The solenoid and pressure switch assembly contains one additional solenoid, Multi-Select (MS), which serves primarily to provide 2nd and 3rd gear limp-in operation. The solenoids receive electrical power from the Transmission Control Relay through a single wire. The TCM energizes or operates the solenoids individually by grounding the return wire of the solenoid as necessary. When a solenoid is energized, the solenoid valve shifts, and a fluid passage is opened or closed (vented or applied), depending on its default operating state. The result is an apply or release of a frictional element. The MS and UD solenoids are normally applied to allow transmission limp-in in the event of an electrical failure. The continuity of the solenoids and circuits are periodically tested. Each solenoid is turned on or off depending on its current state. An inductive spike should be detected by the TCM during this test. If no spike is detected, the circuit is tested again to verify the failure. In addition to the periodic testing, the solenoid circuits are tested if a speed ratio or pressure switch error occurs. PRESSURE SWITCHES The TCM relies on five pressure switches to monitor fluid pressure in the L/R, 2C, 4C, UD, and OD hydraulic circuits. The primary purpose of these switches is to help the TCM detect when clutch circuit hydraulic failures occur. The switches close at 23 psi and open at 11 psi, and simply indicate whether or not pressure exists. The switches are continuously monitored by the TCM for the correct states (open or closed) in each gear as shown in the following charts and 545RFE PRESSURE SWITCH STATES: Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 6744 A Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) will set if the TCM senses any switch open or closed at the wrong time in a given gear. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 6745 Shift Solenoid: Description and Operation 68RFE Automatic Transmission Description DESCRIPTION The transmission solenoid/TRS assembly is internal to the transmission and mounted on the valve body assembly. The assembly consists of six solenoids that control hydraulic pressure to the six friction elements (transmission clutches), and the torque converter clutch. The pressure control solenoid is located on the side of the solenoid/TRS assembly. The solenoid/TRS assembly also contains the Transmission Range Sensor (TRS) and five pressure switches that feed information to the TCM. Operation OPERATION SOLENOIDS Solenoids are used to control the L/R, 2C, 4C, OD, and UD friction elements. The reverse clutch is controlled by line pressure and the position of the manual valve in the valve body. All the solenoids are contained within the Solenoid and Pressure Switch Assembly. The solenoid and pressure switch assembly contains one additional solenoid, Multi-Select (MS), which serves primarily to provide 3rd gear and reverse limp-in operation. The TCM energizes or operates the solenoids individually by grounding the return wire of the solenoid as necessary. When a solenoid is energized, the solenoid valve shifts, and a fluid passage is opened or closed (vented or applied), depending on its default operating state. The result is an apply or release of a frictional element. The MS and UD solenoids are normally applied to allow transmission limp-in in the event of an electrical failure. The continuity of the solenoids and circuits are periodically tested. Each solenoid is turned on or off depending on its current state. An inductive spike should be detected by the TCM during this test. If no spike is detected, the circuit is tested again to verify the failure. In addition to the periodic testing, the solenoid circuits are tested if a speed ratio or pressure switch error occurs. PRESSURE SWITCHES The TCM relies on five pressure switches to monitor fluid pressure in the L/R, 2C, 4C, UD, and OD hydraulic circuits. The primary purpose of these switches is to help the TCM detect when clutch circuit hydraulic failures occur. The switches close at 23 psi and open at 11 psi, and simply indicate whether or not pressure exists. The switches are continuously monitored by the TCM for the correct states (open or closed) in each gear as shown in the following charts and Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 6746 A Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) will set if the TCM senses any switch open or closed at the wrong time in a given gear. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 42RLE Automatic Transmission Shift Solenoid: Service and Repair 42RLE Automatic Transmission Removal REMOVAL NOTE: If the Solenoid/Pressure Switch Assembly is being replaced, the Quick Learn Procedure must be performed. See: Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Transmission Control Module/TCM Quick Learn 1. Raise vehicle on hoist. 2. Remove valve body assembly from transmission. See: Valve Body/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/42RLE Automatic Transmission/Removal 3. Remove Solenoid/Pressure Switch Assembly retaining screws (2) from solenoid. 4. Remove Solenoid/Pressure Switch Assembly (1) and screen from valve body (2). Installation INSTALLATION NOTE: If the Solenoid/Pressure Switch assembly is being replaced, the Quick Learn Procedure must be performed. See: Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Transmission Control Module/TCM Quick Learn Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 6749 1. Install Solenoid/Pressure Switch Assembly (1) and screen (3) to the separator and transfer plates. 2. Install and tighten retaining screws (2) to 5.5 Nm (50 in. lbs.) torque. 3. Install valve body. See: Valve Body/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/42RLE Automatic Transmission/Installation Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 6750 Shift Solenoid: Service and Repair 545RFE Automatic Transmission Removal REMOVAL NOTE: If the Transmission Solenoid/TRS Assembly is being replaced, the Quick Learn Procedure must be performed. See: Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Transmission Control Module/TCM Quick Learn 1. Remove the valve body from the transmission. See: Valve Body/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/545RFE Automatic Transmission/Removal 2. Remove the bolts (1) holding the transmission solenoid/TRS assembly onto the valve body. 3. Separate the transmission solenoid/TRS assembly from the valve body. Installation INSTALLATION Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 6751 1. Place TRS selector plate in the PARK position. 2. Position the transmission solenoid/TRS assembly onto the valve body. Be sure that both alignment dowels are fully seated in the valve body and that the TRS switch contacts are properly positioned in the selector plate 3. Install the bolts (1) to hold the transmission solenoid/TRS assembly onto the valve body. 4. Tighten the solenoid assembly screws adjacent to the arrows cast into the bottom of the valve body first. Tighten the screws to 6 Nm (50 in.lbs.). 5. Tighten the remainder of the solenoid assembly screws to 6 Nm (50 in.lbs.). 6. Install the valve body into the transmission. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 6752 Shift Solenoid: Service and Repair 68RFE Automatic Transmission Removal REMOVAL NOTE: If the Transmission Solenoid/TRS Assembly is being replaced, the Quick Learn Procedure must be performed. See: Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Transmission Control Module/TCM Quick Learn 1. Remove the valve body from the transmission. 2. Remove the bolts (1) holding the transmission solenoid/TRS assembly onto the valve body. 3. Separate the transmission solenoid/TRS assembly from the valve body. Installation INSTALLATION Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 6753 1. Place TRS selector plate in the PARK position. 2. Position the transmission solenoid/TRS assembly onto the valve body. Be sure that both alignment dowels are fully seated in the valve body and that the TRS switch contacts are properly positioned in the selector plate 3. Install the bolts (1) to hold the transmission solenoid/TRS assembly onto the valve body. 4. Tighten the solenoid assembly screws adjacent to the arrows cast into the bottom of the valve body first. Tighten the screws to 6 Nm (50 in.lbs.). 5. Tighten the remainder of the solenoid assembly screws to 6 Nm (50 in.lbs.). 6. Install the valve body into the transmission. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Throttle Valve Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation Throttle Valve Solenoid: Description and Operation DESCRIPTION On vehicles equipped with a Cummins diesel engine, the transmission throttle valve cable has been replace by the transmission throttle valve actuator (TTVA). The TTVA consists of an electric DC motor, two potentiometers, and a gear drive system. The TTVA is mechanically connected to the transmission throttle valve in the valve body by the "D" shaped opening in the bottom of the TTVA shaft. Changes in the TTVA position are therefore transferred to the throttle valve and cause changes in the transmission throttle pressure. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Throttle Valve Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 6757 Throttle Valve Solenoid: Adjustments ADJUSTMENT The Transmission Throttle Valve Actuator (TTVA) does not require any mechanical adjustments. All changes in throttle valve position are controlled by the Engine Control Module (ECM). The TTVA does require an initialization period after the actuator has been removed or replaced. After the actuator has been removed or replaced, move the ignition to the ON position for thirty (30) seconds. This will allow the ECM sufficient time to perform the internal calibration procedures to learn the TTVA's current "zero" position. Once this is done, check the ECM for diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs). If no DTCs are set relating to the TTVA, the TTVA is fully calibrated and ready for use. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Throttle Valve Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Throttle Valve Solenoid: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL 1. Remove the bolts (2) holding the transmission throttle valve actuator (TTVA) (1) to the transmission case. 2. Allow the TTVA (1) to rotate clockwise away from the transmission. 3. Remove the wiring connector (2) from the TTVA (1). 4. Lift the TTVA (1) straight upward and off the throttle valve shaft (3). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Throttle Valve Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 6760 Throttle Valve Solenoid: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION 1. Position the transmission throttle valve actuator (TTVA) (1) over the throttle valve shaft (3). 2. Align the D-shaped opening in the bottom of the TTVA to the throttle valve shaft and install the TTVA onto the shaft. 3. Install the wiring connector (2) to the TTVA (1). 4. Rotate the TTVA (1) to the transmission case and install the bolts (2) to hold the TTVA to the transmission. 5. Tighten the bolts to 8.5 Nm (75 in.lbs.). 6. Initialize the TTVA See: Adjustments . Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > 42RLE Automatic Transmission Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid: Description and Operation 42RLE Automatic Transmission Description DESCRIPTION The Solenoid/Pressure Switch Assembly (1) is inside the transmission and mounted to the valve body assembly. The assembly consists of four solenoids that control hydraulic pressure to the L/R, 2/4, OD, and UD friction elements (transmission clutches), and the torque converter clutch. The reverse clutch is controlled by line pressure from the manual valve in the valve body. The solenoids are contained within the Solenoid/Pressure Switch Assembly, and can only be serviced by replacing the assembly. The solenoid assembly also contains pressure switches that monitor and send hydraulic circuit information to the TCM. Likewise, the pressure switches can only be service by replacing the assembly. Operation OPERATION SOLENOIDS The solenoids receive electrical power from the Transmission Control Relay through a single wire. The TCM energizes or operates the solenoids individually by grounding the return wire of the solenoid needed. When a solenoid is energized, the solenoid valve shifts, and a fluid passage is opened or closed (vented or applied), depending on its default operating state. The result is an apply or release of a frictional element. The 2/4 and UD solenoids are normally applied, which allows fluid to pass through in their relaxed or "off" state. By design, this allows transmission limp-in (P,R,N,2) in the event of an electrical failure. The continuity of the solenoids and circuits are periodically tested. Each solenoid is turned on or off depending on its current state. An inductive spike should be detected by the TCM during this test. If no spike is detected, the circuit is tested again to verify the failure. In addition to the periodic testing, the solenoid circuits are tested if a speed ratio or pressure switch error occurs. PRESSURE SWITCHES The TCM relies on three pressure switches to monitor fluid pressure in the L/R, 2/4, and OD hydraulic circuits. The primary purpose of these switches is to help the TCM detect when clutch circuit hydraulic failures occur. The range for the pressure switch closing and opening points is 11-23 psi. Typically the switch opening point will be approximately one psi lower than the closing point. For example, a switch may close at 18 psi and open at 17 psi. The switches are continuously monitored by the TCM for the correct states (open or closed) in each gear as shown in the following chart: Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 6765 A Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) will set if the TCM senses any switch open or closed at the wrong time in a given gear. The TCM also tests the 2/4 and OD pressure switches when they are normally off (OD and 2/4 are tested in 1st gear, OD in 2nd gear, and 2/4 in 3rd gear). The test simply verifies that they are operational, by looking for a closed state when the corresponding element is applied. Immediately after a shift into 1st, 2nd, or 3rd gear with the engine speed above 1000 rpm, the TCM momentarily turns on element pressure to the 2/4 and/or OD clutch circuits to identify that the appropriate switch has closed. If it doesn't close, it is tested again. If the switch fails to close the second time, the appropriate Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) will set. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 6766 Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid: Description and Operation 545RFE Automatic Transmission Description DESCRIPTION The transmission solenoid/TRS assembly is internal to the transmission and mounted on the valve body assembly. The assembly consists of six solenoids that control hydraulic pressure to the six friction elements (transmission clutches), and the torque converter clutch. The pressure control solenoid is located on the side of the solenoid/TRS assembly. The solenoid/TRS assembly also contains the Transmission Range Sensor (TRS) and five pressure switches that feed information to the TCM. Operation OPERATION SOLENOIDS Solenoids are used to control the L/R, 2C, 4C, OD, and UD friction elements. The reverse clutch is controlled by line pressure and the position of the manual valve in the valve body. All the solenoids are contained within the Solenoid and Pressure Switch Assembly. The solenoid and pressure switch assembly contains one additional solenoid, Multi-Select (MS), which serves primarily to provide 2nd and 3rd gear limp-in operation. The solenoids receive electrical power from the Transmission Control Relay through a single wire. The TCM energizes or operates the solenoids individually by grounding the return wire of the solenoid as necessary. When a solenoid is energized, the solenoid valve shifts, and a fluid passage is opened or closed (vented or applied), depending on its default operating state. The result is an apply or release of a frictional element. The MS and UD solenoids are normally applied to allow transmission limp-in in the event of an electrical failure. The continuity of the solenoids and circuits are periodically tested. Each solenoid is turned on or off depending on its current state. An inductive spike should be detected by the TCM during this test. If no spike is detected, the circuit is tested again to verify the failure. In addition to the periodic testing, the solenoid circuits are tested if a speed ratio or pressure switch error occurs. PRESSURE SWITCHES The TCM relies on five pressure switches to monitor fluid pressure in the L/R, 2C, 4C, UD, and OD hydraulic circuits. The primary purpose of these switches is to help the TCM detect when clutch circuit hydraulic failures occur. The switches close at 23 psi and open at 11 psi, and simply indicate whether or not pressure exists. The switches are continuously monitored by the TCM for the correct states (open or closed) in each gear as shown in the following charts and 545RFE PRESSURE SWITCH STATES: Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 6767 A Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) will set if the TCM senses any switch open or closed at the wrong time in a given gear. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 6768 Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid: Description and Operation 68RFE Automatic Transmission Description DESCRIPTION The transmission solenoid/TRS assembly is internal to the transmission and mounted on the valve body assembly. The assembly consists of six solenoids that control hydraulic pressure to the six friction elements (transmission clutches), and the torque converter clutch. The pressure control solenoid is located on the side of the solenoid/TRS assembly. The solenoid/TRS assembly also contains the Transmission Range Sensor (TRS) and five pressure switches that feed information to the TCM. Operation OPERATION SOLENOIDS Solenoids are used to control the L/R, 2C, 4C, OD, and UD friction elements. The reverse clutch is controlled by line pressure and the position of the manual valve in the valve body. All the solenoids are contained within the Solenoid and Pressure Switch Assembly. The solenoid and pressure switch assembly contains one additional solenoid, Multi-Select (MS), which serves primarily to provide 3rd gear and reverse limp-in operation. The TCM energizes or operates the solenoids individually by grounding the return wire of the solenoid as necessary. When a solenoid is energized, the solenoid valve shifts, and a fluid passage is opened or closed (vented or applied), depending on its default operating state. The result is an apply or release of a frictional element. The MS and UD solenoids are normally applied to allow transmission limp-in in the event of an electrical failure. The continuity of the solenoids and circuits are periodically tested. Each solenoid is turned on or off depending on its current state. An inductive spike should be detected by the TCM during this test. If no spike is detected, the circuit is tested again to verify the failure. In addition to the periodic testing, the solenoid circuits are tested if a speed ratio or pressure switch error occurs. PRESSURE SWITCHES The TCM relies on five pressure switches to monitor fluid pressure in the L/R, 2C, 4C, UD, and OD hydraulic circuits. The primary purpose of these switches is to help the TCM detect when clutch circuit hydraulic failures occur. The switches close at 23 psi and open at 11 psi, and simply indicate whether or not pressure exists. The switches are continuously monitored by the TCM for the correct states (open or closed) in each gear as shown in the following charts and Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 6769 A Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) will set if the TCM senses any switch open or closed at the wrong time in a given gear. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 42RLE Automatic Transmission Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid: Service and Repair 42RLE Automatic Transmission Removal REMOVAL NOTE: If the Solenoid/Pressure Switch Assembly is being replaced, the Quick Learn Procedure must be performed. See: Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Transmission Control Module/TCM Quick Learn 1. Raise vehicle on hoist. 2. Remove valve body assembly from transmission. See: Valve Body/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/42RLE Automatic Transmission/Removal 3. Remove Solenoid/Pressure Switch Assembly retaining screws (2) from solenoid. 4. Remove Solenoid/Pressure Switch Assembly (1) and screen from valve body (2). Installation INSTALLATION NOTE: If the Solenoid/Pressure Switch assembly is being replaced, the Quick Learn Procedure must be performed. See: Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Transmission Control Module/TCM Quick Learn Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 6772 1. Install Solenoid/Pressure Switch Assembly (1) and screen (3) to the separator and transfer plates. 2. Install and tighten retaining screws (2) to 5.5 Nm (50 in. lbs.) torque. 3. Install valve body. See: Valve Body/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/42RLE Automatic Transmission/Installation Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 6773 Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid: Service and Repair 545RFE Automatic Transmission Removal REMOVAL NOTE: If the Transmission Solenoid/TRS Assembly is being replaced, the Quick Learn Procedure must be performed. See: Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Transmission Control Module/TCM Quick Learn 1. Remove the valve body from the transmission. See: Valve Body/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/545RFE Automatic Transmission/Removal 2. Remove the bolts (1) holding the transmission solenoid/TRS assembly onto the valve body. 3. Separate the transmission solenoid/TRS assembly from the valve body. Installation INSTALLATION Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 6774 1. Place TRS selector plate in the PARK position. 2. Position the transmission solenoid/TRS assembly onto the valve body. Be sure that both alignment dowels are fully seated in the valve body and that the TRS switch contacts are properly positioned in the selector plate 3. Install the bolts (1) to hold the transmission solenoid/TRS assembly onto the valve body. 4. Tighten the solenoid assembly screws adjacent to the arrows cast into the bottom of the valve body first. Tighten the screws to 6 Nm (50 in.lbs.). 5. Tighten the remainder of the solenoid assembly screws to 6 Nm (50 in.lbs.). 6. Install the valve body into the transmission. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 6775 Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid: Service and Repair 68RFE Automatic Transmission Removal REMOVAL NOTE: If the Transmission Solenoid/TRS Assembly is being replaced, the Quick Learn Procedure must be performed. See: Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Transmission Control Module/TCM Quick Learn 1. Remove the valve body from the transmission. 2. Remove the bolts (1) holding the transmission solenoid/TRS assembly onto the valve body. 3. Separate the transmission solenoid/TRS assembly from the valve body. Installation INSTALLATION Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 6776 1. Place TRS selector plate in the PARK position. 2. Position the transmission solenoid/TRS assembly onto the valve body. Be sure that both alignment dowels are fully seated in the valve body and that the TRS switch contacts are properly positioned in the selector plate 3. Install the bolts (1) to hold the transmission solenoid/TRS assembly onto the valve body. 4. Tighten the solenoid assembly screws adjacent to the arrows cast into the bottom of the valve body first. Tighten the screws to 6 Nm (50 in.lbs.). 5. Tighten the remainder of the solenoid assembly screws to 6 Nm (50 in.lbs.). 6. Install the valve body into the transmission. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Accumulator, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair Accumulator: Service and Repair INSPECTION Inspect the accumulator piston and seal rings. Replace the seal rings if worn or cut. Replace the piston if chipped or cracked. Check condition of the accumulator inner and outer springs. Replace the springs if the coils are cracked, distorted or collapsed. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 200 Control Module: Locations Component ID 200 Component ID: 200 Component : MODULE-TRANSMISSION CONTROL Connector: Name : MODULE-TRANSMISSION CONTROL C1 Color : # of pins : 17 Qualifier : (RC) Pin Circuit Description 1 T52 20DG/OR INPUT SPEED SIGNAL 2-3 K427 18OR/LG POWER TAKEOFF RELAY ENABLE 4-5 T803 20DG/BR PRESSURE SIGNAL 4 6 T800 20DG/BR PRESSURE SIGNAL 1 7-8-9-10 - 11 T804 20YL/DB PRESSURE SIGNAL 5 12 T802 20DG/PK PRESSURE SIGNAL 3 13 - 14 - 15 - 16 T805 20DG/OR PRESSURE SIGNAL 6 17 T801 20DG/RD PRESSURE SIGNAL 2 Component Location - 31 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 200 > Page 6784 Connector: Name : MODULE-TRANSMISSION CONTROL C2 Color : # of pins : 24 Qualifier : (RC) Pin Circuit Description 1 T72 20YL/DB 8 VOLT SUPPLY 2 T14 20DG/BR OUTPUT SPEED SIGNAL 3 F916 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION RELAY OUTPUT 3 T16 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 200 > Page 6785 4 F916 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION RELAY OUTPUT 4 T16 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT 5-6-7 A104 20YL/RD FUSED B(+) 8 Z133 18BK/LG GROUND 9-10 - 11 - 12 - 13 - - 14 T6 20DG TOW/HAUL OVERDRIVE OFF SWITCH SIGNAL 15 T54 20DG/OR TRANSMISSION TEMPERATURE SIGNAL 16 T819 20YL/VT TCC TEMPERATURE SIGNAL 17 Z133 18BK/LG GROUND 18 - 19 T811 20DG/LB SHIFT 4 CONTROL 20 D65 20WT/LG CAN C BUS (+) 21 D64 20WT/LB CAN C BUS (-) 22 - 23 - 24 - Component Location - 31 Connector: Name : MODULE-TRANSMISSION CONTROL C3 Color : # of pins : 31 Qualifier : (RC) Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 200 > Page 6786 Pin Circuit Description 1 T808 20DG/GY SHIFT 1 CONTROL 2-3 T810 20DG/DB SHIFT 3 CONTROL 4-5 T817 20YL/BR LINEAR 3 CONTROL 6 T812 20DG/TN LINEAR 1 GROUND 7 T813 20DG/LG LINEAR 1 CONTROL 8 T815 20YL/RD LINEAR 2 CONTROL 9 T814 20YL/BR LINEAR 2 GROUND 10 T806 20DG/VT PRESSURE SIGNAL 7 11 - 12 - 13 - 14 - - 15 T816 20YL/PK LINEAR 3 GROUND 16 T828 20DG/DB TRS 1 SIGNAL 17 T42 20DG/YL TRS T42 SIGNAL 18 T3 20DG/DB TRS T3 SIGNAL 19 T827 20DG/LB TRS DRIVE SIGNAL 20 T824 20YL/DB TRS PARK SIGNAL 21 T826 20DG/DB TRS REVERSE SIGNAL 22 T809 20DG/YL SHIFT 2 CONTROL 23 - 24 - 25 - 26 T807 20DG/WT PRESSURE SIGNAL 8 27 - 28 T820 20YL/WT TEMPERATURE SENSOR GROUND 29 T825 20DG/YL TRS NEUTRAL SIGNAL 30 T821 20YL/GY LINEAR 4 CONTROL 31 T818 20YL/OR LINEAR 4 GROUND Component Location - 31 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 200 > Page 6787 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 200 > Page 6788 Control Module: Locations Component ID 216 Component ID: 216 Component : MODULE-TRANSMISSION CONTROL Connector: Name : MODULE-TRANSMISSION CONTROL C1 Color : # of pins : 17 Qualifier : (RC) Pin Circuit Description 1 T52 20DG/OR INPUT SPEED SIGNAL 2-3 K427 18OR/LG POWER TAKEOFF RELAY ENABLE 4-5 T803 20DG/BR PRESSURE SIGNAL 4 6 T800 20DG/BR PRESSURE SIGNAL 1 7-8-9-10 - 11 T804 20YL/DB PRESSURE SIGNAL 5 12 T802 20DG/PK PRESSURE SIGNAL 3 13 - 14 - 15 - 16 T805 20DG/OR PRESSURE SIGNAL 6 17 T801 20DG/RD PRESSURE SIGNAL 2 Component Location - 31 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 200 > Page 6789 Connector: Name : MODULE-TRANSMISSION CONTROL C2 Color : # of pins : 24 Qualifier : (RC) Pin Circuit Description 1 T72 20YL/DB 8 VOLT SUPPLY 2 T14 20DG/BR OUTPUT SPEED SIGNAL 3 F916 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION RELAY OUTPUT 3 T16 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 200 > Page 6790 4 F916 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION RELAY OUTPUT 4 T16 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT 5-6-7 A104 20YL/RD FUSED B(+) 8 Z133 18BK/LG GROUND 9-10 - 11 - 12 - 13 - - 14 T6 20DG TOW/HAUL OVERDRIVE OFF SWITCH SIGNAL 15 T54 20DG/OR TRANSMISSION TEMPERATURE SIGNAL 16 T819 20YL/VT TCC TEMPERATURE SIGNAL 17 Z133 18BK/LG GROUND 18 - 19 T811 20DG/LB SHIFT 4 CONTROL 20 D65 20WT/LG CAN C BUS (+) 21 D64 20WT/LB CAN C BUS (-) 22 - 23 - 24 - Component Location - 31 Connector: Name : MODULE-TRANSMISSION CONTROL C3 Color : # of pins : 31 Qualifier : (RC) Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 200 > Page 6791 Pin Circuit Description 1 T808 20DG/GY SHIFT 1 CONTROL 2-3 T810 20DG/DB SHIFT 3 CONTROL 4-5 T817 20YL/BR LINEAR 3 CONTROL 6 T812 20DG/TN LINEAR 1 GROUND 7 T813 20DG/LG LINEAR 1 CONTROL 8 T815 20YL/RD LINEAR 2 CONTROL 9 T814 20YL/BR LINEAR 2 GROUND 10 T806 20DG/VT PRESSURE SIGNAL 7 11 - 12 - 13 - 14 - - 15 T816 20YL/PK LINEAR 3 GROUND 16 T828 20DG/DB TRS 1 SIGNAL 17 T42 20DG/YL TRS T42 SIGNAL 18 T3 20DG/DB TRS T3 SIGNAL 19 T827 20DG/LB TRS DRIVE SIGNAL 20 T824 20YL/DB TRS PARK SIGNAL 21 T826 20DG/DB TRS REVERSE SIGNAL 22 T809 20DG/YL SHIFT 2 CONTROL 23 - 24 - 25 - 26 T807 20DG/WT PRESSURE SIGNAL 8 27 - 28 T820 20YL/WT TEMPERATURE SENSOR GROUND 29 T825 20DG/YL TRS NEUTRAL SIGNAL 30 T821 20YL/GY LINEAR 4 CONTROL 31 T818 20YL/OR LINEAR 4 GROUND Component Location - 31 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 200 > Page 6792 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Component ID 200 Control Module: Diagrams Component ID 200 Component ID: 200 Component : MODULE-TRANSMISSION CONTROL Connector: Name : MODULE-TRANSMISSION CONTROL C1 Color : # of pins : 17 Qualifier : (RC) Pin Circuit Description 1 T52 20DG/OR INPUT SPEED SIGNAL 2-3 K427 18OR/LG POWER TAKEOFF RELAY ENABLE 4-5 T803 20DG/BR PRESSURE SIGNAL 4 6 T800 20DG/BR PRESSURE SIGNAL 1 7-8-9-10 - 11 T804 20YL/DB PRESSURE SIGNAL 5 12 T802 20DG/PK PRESSURE SIGNAL 3 13 - 14 - 15 - 16 T805 20DG/OR PRESSURE SIGNAL 6 17 T801 20DG/RD PRESSURE SIGNAL 2 Component Location - 31 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Component ID 200 > Page 6795 Connector: Name : MODULE-TRANSMISSION CONTROL C2 Color : # of pins : 24 Qualifier : (RC) Pin Circuit Description 1 T72 20YL/DB 8 VOLT SUPPLY 2 T14 20DG/BR OUTPUT SPEED SIGNAL 3 F916 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION RELAY OUTPUT 3 T16 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Component ID 200 > Page 6796 4 F916 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION RELAY OUTPUT 4 T16 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT 5-6-7 A104 20YL/RD FUSED B(+) 8 Z133 18BK/LG GROUND 9-10 - 11 - 12 - 13 - - 14 T6 20DG TOW/HAUL OVERDRIVE OFF SWITCH SIGNAL 15 T54 20DG/OR TRANSMISSION TEMPERATURE SIGNAL 16 T819 20YL/VT TCC TEMPERATURE SIGNAL 17 Z133 18BK/LG GROUND 18 - 19 T811 20DG/LB SHIFT 4 CONTROL 20 D65 20WT/LG CAN C BUS (+) 21 D64 20WT/LB CAN C BUS (-) 22 - 23 - 24 - Component Location - 31 Connector: Name : MODULE-TRANSMISSION CONTROL C3 Color : # of pins : 31 Qualifier : (RC) Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Component ID 200 > Page 6797 Pin Circuit Description 1 T808 20DG/GY SHIFT 1 CONTROL 2-3 T810 20DG/DB SHIFT 3 CONTROL 4-5 T817 20YL/BR LINEAR 3 CONTROL 6 T812 20DG/TN LINEAR 1 GROUND 7 T813 20DG/LG LINEAR 1 CONTROL 8 T815 20YL/RD LINEAR 2 CONTROL 9 T814 20YL/BR LINEAR 2 GROUND 10 T806 20DG/VT PRESSURE SIGNAL 7 11 - 12 - 13 - 14 - - 15 T816 20YL/PK LINEAR 3 GROUND 16 T828 20DG/DB TRS 1 SIGNAL 17 T42 20DG/YL TRS T42 SIGNAL 18 T3 20DG/DB TRS T3 SIGNAL 19 T827 20DG/LB TRS DRIVE SIGNAL 20 T824 20YL/DB TRS PARK SIGNAL 21 T826 20DG/DB TRS REVERSE SIGNAL 22 T809 20DG/YL SHIFT 2 CONTROL 23 - 24 - 25 - 26 T807 20DG/WT PRESSURE SIGNAL 8 27 - 28 T820 20YL/WT TEMPERATURE SENSOR GROUND 29 T825 20DG/YL TRS NEUTRAL SIGNAL 30 T821 20YL/GY LINEAR 4 CONTROL 31 T818 20YL/OR LINEAR 4 GROUND Component Location - 31 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Component ID 200 > Page 6798 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Component ID 200 > Page 6799 Control Module: Diagrams Component ID 216 Component ID: 216 Component : MODULE-TRANSMISSION CONTROL Connector: Name : MODULE-TRANSMISSION CONTROL C1 Color : # of pins : 17 Qualifier : (RC) Pin Circuit Description 1 T52 20DG/OR INPUT SPEED SIGNAL 2-3 K427 18OR/LG POWER TAKEOFF RELAY ENABLE 4-5 T803 20DG/BR PRESSURE SIGNAL 4 6 T800 20DG/BR PRESSURE SIGNAL 1 7-8-9-10 - 11 T804 20YL/DB PRESSURE SIGNAL 5 12 T802 20DG/PK PRESSURE SIGNAL 3 13 - 14 - 15 - 16 T805 20DG/OR PRESSURE SIGNAL 6 17 T801 20DG/RD PRESSURE SIGNAL 2 Component Location - 31 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Component ID 200 > Page 6800 Connector: Name : MODULE-TRANSMISSION CONTROL C2 Color : # of pins : 24 Qualifier : (RC) Pin Circuit Description 1 T72 20YL/DB 8 VOLT SUPPLY 2 T14 20DG/BR OUTPUT SPEED SIGNAL 3 F916 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION RELAY OUTPUT 3 T16 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Component ID 200 > Page 6801 4 F916 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION RELAY OUTPUT 4 T16 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT 5-6-7 A104 20YL/RD FUSED B(+) 8 Z133 18BK/LG GROUND 9-10 - 11 - 12 - 13 - - 14 T6 20DG TOW/HAUL OVERDRIVE OFF SWITCH SIGNAL 15 T54 20DG/OR TRANSMISSION TEMPERATURE SIGNAL 16 T819 20YL/VT TCC TEMPERATURE SIGNAL 17 Z133 18BK/LG GROUND 18 - 19 T811 20DG/LB SHIFT 4 CONTROL 20 D65 20WT/LG CAN C BUS (+) 21 D64 20WT/LB CAN C BUS (-) 22 - 23 - 24 - Component Location - 31 Connector: Name : MODULE-TRANSMISSION CONTROL C3 Color : # of pins : 31 Qualifier : (RC) Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Component ID 200 > Page 6802 Pin Circuit Description 1 T808 20DG/GY SHIFT 1 CONTROL 2-3 T810 20DG/DB SHIFT 3 CONTROL 4-5 T817 20YL/BR LINEAR 3 CONTROL 6 T812 20DG/TN LINEAR 1 GROUND 7 T813 20DG/LG LINEAR 1 CONTROL 8 T815 20YL/RD LINEAR 2 CONTROL 9 T814 20YL/BR LINEAR 2 GROUND 10 T806 20DG/VT PRESSURE SIGNAL 7 11 - 12 - 13 - 14 - - 15 T816 20YL/PK LINEAR 3 GROUND 16 T828 20DG/DB TRS 1 SIGNAL 17 T42 20DG/YL TRS T42 SIGNAL 18 T3 20DG/DB TRS T3 SIGNAL 19 T827 20DG/LB TRS DRIVE SIGNAL 20 T824 20YL/DB TRS PARK SIGNAL 21 T826 20DG/DB TRS REVERSE SIGNAL 22 T809 20DG/YL SHIFT 2 CONTROL 23 - 24 - 25 - 26 T807 20DG/WT PRESSURE SIGNAL 8 27 - 28 T820 20YL/WT TEMPERATURE SENSOR GROUND 29 T825 20DG/YL TRS NEUTRAL SIGNAL 30 T821 20YL/GY LINEAR 4 CONTROL 31 T818 20YL/OR LINEAR 4 GROUND Component Location - 31 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Component ID 200 > Page 6803 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > Transmission Control Module - Description Control Module: Description and Operation Transmission Control Module - Description DESCRIPTION On gasoline vehicles the Transmission Control Module (TCM) (2) may be sub-module within the Powertrain Control Module (PCM) (3). Vehicles equipped 68RFE transmission and a 6.7L Diesel engine, the TCM is housed in the NGC4 controller utilizing only the C1 and C4 connectors (TCM only). The controller is located at the rear of the engine compartment, near the right inner fender. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > Transmission Control Module - Description > Page 6806 On Cab Chassis models equipped with the AS68RC transmission the Transmission Control Module (TCM) has three electrical connectors and is located in the passenger compartment underneath of the left side of the dash panel. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > Transmission Control Module - Description > Page 6807 Control Module: Description and Operation Transmission Control Module - Operation OPERATION RLE and RFE TRANSMISSIONS The Transmission Control Module (TCM) controls all electronic operations of the transmission. The TCM receives information regarding vehicle operation from both direct and indirect inputs, and selects the operational mode of the transmission. Direct inputs are hard wired to, and used specifically by the TCM. Indirect inputs are shared with the TCM via the vehicle communication bus. Some examples of direct inputs to the TCM are: - Battery (B+) voltage - Ignition "ON" voltage - Transmission Control Relay (Switched B+) (if equipped) - Throttle Position Sensor - Crankshaft Position Sensor - Transmission Range Sensor - Pressure Switches - Transmission Temperature Sensor - Input Shaft Speed Sensor - Output Shaft Speed Sensor - Line Pressure Sensor Some examples of indirect inputs to the TCM are: - Target Idle - Torque Reduction Confirmation - Engine Coolant Temperature - Ambient/Battery Temperature - Scan Tool Communication Based on the information received from these various inputs, the TCM determines the appropriate shift schedule and shift points, depending on the present operating conditions and driver demand. This is possible through the control of various direct and indirect outputs. Some examples of TCM direct outputs are: - Transmission Control Relay - Solenoids - Torque Reduction Request Some examples of TCM indirect outputs are: - Transmission Temperature (to PCM) - PRNDL Position (to cluster/CCN) In addition to monitoring inputs and controlling outputs, the TCM has other important responsibilities and functions: - Storing and maintaining Clutch Volume Indexes (CVI) - Storing and selecting appropriate Shift Schedules - System self-diagnostics - Diagnostic capabilities (with scan tool) NOTE: If the TCM has been replaced, the "Quick Learn Procedure" must be performed. See: Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Transmission Control Module/TCM Quick Learn BATTERY FEED A fused, direct battery feed to the TCM is used for continuous power. This battery voltage is necessary to retain memory in the TCM. When the battery (B+) is disconnected, this memory is lost. When the battery (B+) is restored, this memory loss is detected by the TCM and a Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) is set. CLUTCH VOLUME INDEXES (CVI) Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > Transmission Control Module - Description > Page 6808 An important function of the TCM is to monitor Clutch Volume Indexes (CVI). CVIs represent the volume of fluid needed to compress a clutch pack. The TCM monitors gear ratio changes by monitoring the Input and Output Speed Sensors. The Input, or Turbine Speed Sensor sends an electrical signal to the TCM that represents input shaft rpm. The Output Speed Sensor provides the TCM with output shaft speed information. By comparing the two inputs, the TCM can determine transmission gear position. This is important to the CVI calculation because the TCM determines CVIs by monitoring how long it takes for a gear change to occur. Gear ratios can be determined by using the Scan Tool and reading the Input/Output Speed Sensor values in the "Monitors" display. Gear ratio can be obtained by dividing the Input Speed Sensor value by the Output Speed Sensor value. For example, if the input shaft is rotating at 1000 rpm and the output shaft is rotating at 500 rpm, then the TCM can determine that the gear ratio is 2:1. In direct drive (3rd gear), the gear ratio changes to 1:1. The gear ratio changes as clutches are applied and released. By monitoring the length of time it takes for the gear ratio to change following a shift request, the TCM can determine the volume of fluid used to apply or release a friction element. The volume of transmission fluid needed to apply the friction elements are continuously updated for adaptive controls. As friction material wears, the volume of fluid need to apply the element increases. Certain mechanical problems within the input clutch assembly can cause inadequate or out-of-range element volumes. Also, defective Input/Output Speed Sensors and wiring can cause these conditions. The following charts identifies the appropriate clutch volumes and when they are monitored/updated: Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > Transmission Control Module - Description > Page 6809 SHIFT SCHEDULES As mentioned earlier, the TCM has programming that allows it to select a variety of shift schedules. Shift schedule selection is dependent on the following: - Shift lever position - Throttle position - Engine load - Fluid temperature - Software level As driving conditions change, the TCM appropriately adjusts the shift schedule. Refer to the following chart to determine the appropriate operation expected, depending on driving conditions. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > Transmission Control Module - Description > Page 6810 AISIN AS68RC TRANSMISSION The Transmission Control Module (TCM) controls all electronic operations of the transmission. The TCM receives information regarding vehicle operation from both direct and indirect inputs, and selects the operational mode of the transmission. Direct inputs are hard wired to, and used specifically by the TCM. Indirect inputs are shared with the TCM via the vehicle communication bus. Some examples of direct inputs to the TCM are: - Battery (B+) voltage - Ignition "ON" voltage - Transmission Range Sensor - Pressure Switches - Transmission Temperature Sensor - Input Speed Sensor - Output Speed Sensor Some examples of indirect inputs to the TCM are: - Engine/Body Identification - Manifold Pressure - Throttle position - Torque Reduction Confirmation - Engine Coolant Temperature - Exhaust Brake Status (if equipped) - PTO Request (if equipped) - Scan Tool Communication Based on the information received from these various inputs, the TCM determines the appropriate shift schedule and shift points, depending on the present operating conditions and driver demand. This is possible through the control of various direct and indirect outputs. Some examples of TCM direct outputs are: - Exhaust Brake Cut Request (if equipped). - Solenoids. - Torque Reduction Request. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > Transmission Control Module - Description > Page 6811 Some examples of TCM.indirect outputs are: - Transmission Temperature (to PCM). - PRNDL Position (to cluster/CCN). - PTO Status. In addition to monitoring inputs and controlling outputs, the TCM has other important responsibilities and functions: - Storing and maintaining Clutch Volume Indexes (CVI). - Storing and selecting appropriate Shift Schedules. - System self-diagnostics. - Diagnostic capabilities (with scan tool). Clutch filling time is continuously maintained when the vehicle is running. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Differential, Automatic Transaxle > Differential Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Maintenance - Fluid Flushing Information Differential Fluid - A/T: Technical Service Bulletins Maintenance - Fluid Flushing Information NUMBER: 26-001-09 GROUP: Miscellaneous DATE: September 24, 2009 THIS BULLETIN SUPERSEDES TECHNICAL SERVICE BULLETIN 26-003-07, DATED MARCH 30, 2007, WHICH SHOULD BE REMOVED FROM YOUR FILES. THIS IS A COMPLETE REVISION AND NO ASTERISKS HAVE BEEN USED TO HIGHLIGHT REVISIONS. SUBJECT: Fluid Flushing Requirements MODELS: 2005 - 2008 (CS) Pacifica 2006 - 2009 (D1) Ram Truck (3500 Pick Up) 2010 (D2) Ram Truck (3500 Pick Up) 2007 - 2010 (DC) Ram Truck (3500 Chassis Cab) 2005 - 2009 (DH) Ram Truck (1500/2500 Pick Up) 2010 (DJ) Ram Truck (2500 Pick Up) 2005 - 2008 (DR) Ram Truck (1500/2500 Pick Up) 2009 - 2010 (DS) Ram Truck (1500) 2005 - 2009 (HB) Durango 2007 - 2009 (HG) Aspen 2009 - 2010 (JC) Journey 2007 - 2010 (JK) Wrangler 2005 - 2006 (JR) Sebring Sedan & Convertible/Stratus Sedan 2007 - 2010 (JS) Avenger/Sebring 2008 - 2010 (KK) Liberty 2007 - 2010 (KA) Nitro 2005 - 2007 (KJ) Liberty 2009 - 2010 (LC) Challenger 2005 - 2010 (LE) 300C/300C Touring (International Markets) 2005 - 2010 (LX) 300/Magnum/Charger 2007 - 2010 (MK) Compass/Patriot 2005 - 2010 (ND) Dakota 2005 - 2006 (PL) Neon 2007 - 2010 (PM) Caliber 2005 - 2010 (PT) Chrysler PT Cruiser Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Differential, Automatic Transaxle > Differential Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Maintenance - Fluid Flushing Information > Page 6817 2005 - 2007 (RG) Chrysler Voyager (International Markets) 2005 - 2007 (RS) Town & Country/Caravan/Voyager 2009 - 2010 (RT) Town & Country/Grand Caravan 2005 - 2006 (TJ) Wrangler 2005 - 2006 (VA) Sprinter 2007 - 2010 (VB) Sprinter 2005 - 2010 (WH) Grand Cherokee (International Markets) 2005 - 2010 (WK) Grand Cherokee 2006 - 2010 (XH) Commander (International Markets) 2006 - 2010 (XK) Commander 2005 - 2010 (ZB) Viper 2005 - 2007 (ZH) Crossfire DISCUSSION: Chrysler Group vehicle fluid systems do NOT require regular flushing. These systems include: engine oil, transmission oil, axle lube, brake fluid, power steering fluid, and refrigerant. The only exception to this requirement are published in the vehicle maintenance schedules, e.g. engine coolant. Exceptions to this recommendation include only those instances where a failure has occurred and/or the system has become compromised, contaminated or overheated beyond the normal operating range. Chrysler Group does NOT recommend aftermarket chemicals to flush the engine, transmission, brake or steering systems. Chemicals contained in these products can damage the system elastomeric components, and contaminate the component fluid, leading to loss of system/component durability and service life. When necessary, only the original approved system fluid should be used to flush these components using teamPSE(R) approved equipment. If the engine coolant contains a considerable amount of sediment, clean and flush with Mopar Cooling System Flush, p/n 04856977, or equivalent. Follow with a thorough rinsing to remove all deposits and chemicals. Refill with a minimum of a 50% mixture of the specified coolant and distilled water. POLICY: Information Only Disclaimer: This bulletin is supplied as technical information only and is not an authorization for repair. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Maintenance - Fluid Flushing Information Fluid - A/T: Technical Service Bulletins Maintenance - Fluid Flushing Information NUMBER: 26-001-09 GROUP: Miscellaneous DATE: September 24, 2009 THIS BULLETIN SUPERSEDES TECHNICAL SERVICE BULLETIN 26-003-07, DATED MARCH 30, 2007, WHICH SHOULD BE REMOVED FROM YOUR FILES. THIS IS A COMPLETE REVISION AND NO ASTERISKS HAVE BEEN USED TO HIGHLIGHT REVISIONS. SUBJECT: Fluid Flushing Requirements MODELS: 2005 - 2008 (CS) Pacifica 2006 - 2009 (D1) Ram Truck (3500 Pick Up) 2010 (D2) Ram Truck (3500 Pick Up) 2007 - 2010 (DC) Ram Truck (3500 Chassis Cab) 2005 - 2009 (DH) Ram Truck (1500/2500 Pick Up) 2010 (DJ) Ram Truck (2500 Pick Up) 2005 - 2008 (DR) Ram Truck (1500/2500 Pick Up) 2009 - 2010 (DS) Ram Truck (1500) 2005 - 2009 (HB) Durango 2007 - 2009 (HG) Aspen 2009 - 2010 (JC) Journey 2007 - 2010 (JK) Wrangler 2005 - 2006 (JR) Sebring Sedan & Convertible/Stratus Sedan 2007 - 2010 (JS) Avenger/Sebring 2008 - 2010 (KK) Liberty 2007 - 2010 (KA) Nitro 2005 - 2007 (KJ) Liberty 2009 - 2010 (LC) Challenger 2005 - 2010 (LE) 300C/300C Touring (International Markets) 2005 - 2010 (LX) 300/Magnum/Charger 2007 - 2010 (MK) Compass/Patriot 2005 - 2010 (ND) Dakota 2005 - 2006 (PL) Neon 2007 - 2010 (PM) Caliber 2005 - 2010 (PT) Chrysler PT Cruiser Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Maintenance - Fluid Flushing Information > Page 6822 2005 - 2007 (RG) Chrysler Voyager (International Markets) 2005 - 2007 (RS) Town & Country/Caravan/Voyager 2009 - 2010 (RT) Town & Country/Grand Caravan 2005 - 2006 (TJ) Wrangler 2005 - 2006 (VA) Sprinter 2007 - 2010 (VB) Sprinter 2005 - 2010 (WH) Grand Cherokee (International Markets) 2005 - 2010 (WK) Grand Cherokee 2006 - 2010 (XH) Commander (International Markets) 2006 - 2010 (XK) Commander 2005 - 2010 (ZB) Viper 2005 - 2007 (ZH) Crossfire DISCUSSION: Chrysler Group vehicle fluid systems do NOT require regular flushing. These systems include: engine oil, transmission oil, axle lube, brake fluid, power steering fluid, and refrigerant. The only exception to this requirement are published in the vehicle maintenance schedules, e.g. engine coolant. Exceptions to this recommendation include only those instances where a failure has occurred and/or the system has become compromised, contaminated or overheated beyond the normal operating range. Chrysler Group does NOT recommend aftermarket chemicals to flush the engine, transmission, brake or steering systems. Chemicals contained in these products can damage the system elastomeric components, and contaminate the component fluid, leading to loss of system/component durability and service life. When necessary, only the original approved system fluid should be used to flush these components using teamPSE(R) approved equipment. If the engine coolant contains a considerable amount of sediment, clean and flush with Mopar Cooling System Flush, p/n 04856977, or equivalent. Follow with a thorough rinsing to remove all deposits and chemicals. Refill with a minimum of a 50% mixture of the specified coolant and distilled water. POLICY: Information Only Disclaimer: This bulletin is supplied as technical information only and is not an authorization for repair. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Maintenance - Fluid Flushing Information > Page 6823 Fluid - A/T: Technical Service Bulletins A/T - ATF + 4 Fluid Usage NUMBER: 21-014-07 GROUP: Transmission DATE: October 16, 2007 THIS BULLETIN SUPERSEDES TECHNICAL SERVICE BULLETIN 21-010-06, DATED APRIL 14, 2006, WHICH SHOULD BE REMOVED FROM YOUR FILES. ALL REVISIONS ARE HIGHLIGHTED WITH **ASTERISKS** AND INCLUDES THE ADDITION OF THE ASIAN WARNER (AW4) TRANSMISSION AND ADDITIONAL MODELS AND YEARS. SUBJECT: Automatic Transmission Fluid Usage ATF+4 (Type M59602) MODELS: 1989 - 1995 (AA) Spirit/Acclaim/Lebaron Sedan 1989 - 2003 (AB) Ram Van/Wagon 1989 - 1993 (AC) Dynasty/New Yorker/New Yorker Salon 1989 - 1993 (AD) Ram Truck 1989 - 1994 (AG) Daytona 1989 (AH) Lancer/Lebaron GTS 1989 - 1995 (AJ) Lebaron Coupe/Lebaron Convertible 1989 - 1990 (AK) Aries/Reliant 1989 - 1990 (AL) Horizon/Omni 1989 (AM) Diplomat/Gran Fury/New Yorker fifth Avenue 1989 - 2004 (AN) Dakota 1989 - 1994 (AP) Shadow/Sundance 1990 - 1991 (AQ) Maserati 1990 - 1993 (AY) Imperial/New Yorker Fifth Avenue 1994 - 2003 (BR/BE) Ram Truck 2004 - **2008** (CS) Pacifica 1998-2003 (DN) Durango 2002 - **2008** (DR/DH/D1) Ram Truck 2007 - **2008** (DC) Ram 3500 Cab Chassis 1995 - 2000 (FJ) Sebring/Avenger/Talon 1996 - 2000 (GS) Chrysler Voyager (International Market) 2004 - **2008** (HB) Durango **2008 (HG) Aspen** 1995 - 2000 (JA) Cirrus/Stratus/Breeze Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Maintenance - Fluid Flushing Information > Page 6824 2007 - **2008** (JK) Wrangler 2001 - 2006 (JR) Sebring Sedan & Convertible/Stratus Sedan 2007 - **2008** (JS) Avenger/Sebring/Sebring Convertible 1996 - 2000 (JX) Sebring Convertible **2007 - 2008 (KA) Nitro** 2002 - 2007 (KJ) Liberty **2008 (KK) Liberty** **2008 (L2) 300C (China)** 1993 - 2004 (LH) Concorde/Intrepid/Vision/LHS/New Yorker /300M 2005 - **2008** (LX/LE) 300/Magnum/Charger 1996 - 2000 (NS) Town & Country/Caravan/Voyager 1995 - 2005 (PL) Neon 2002 - 2003 (PG) PT Cruiser (International Markets) 2001 - **2008** (PT) PT Cruiser 1997 - 2002 (PR) Prowler 2001 - 2007 (RG) Chrysler Voyager (International Markets) 2001 - 2007 (RS) Town & Country/Caravan/Voyager **2008 (RT) Town & Country/Grand Caravan/Grand Voyager (U.S. & International Markets)** 1997-2006 (TJ) Wrangler 2001 - 2004 (WG) Grand Cherokee (International Markets) Vehicles equipped with Gas engines 1999 - 2004 (WJ) Grand Cherokee 2005 - **2008** (WK/WH) Grand Cherokee 2006 - **2008** (XK/XH) Commander 1989 - 1995 (YJ) Wrangler **1989 - 2001 (XJ) Cherokee** **1989 - 1993 (MJ) Comanche** 1996 - 1998 (ZG) Grand Cherokee (International Markets) 1994 - 1998 (ZJ) Grand Cherokee/Grand Wagoneer NOTE: **AWA (Asian Warner) transmission are now included in this Service Bulletin. ATF+4(R) is recommended for AW-4 (Asian Warner) transmissions** NOTE: This Service Bulletin DOES NOT apply to Sprinter transmissions, Crossfire transmissions, MK/PM vehicles equipped with Continuously Variable Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Maintenance - Fluid Flushing Information > Page 6825 Transmission (CVT) and WG vehicles equipped with a diesel engine (sales code ENF) and a W5J400 or NAG1 transmission (sales code DGJ). DISCUSSION: ATF+4(R) - (Type 9602) is being used as factory fill for Chrysler Group automatic transmissions. ATF+4(R) is recommended for all vehicles equipped with Chrysler Group automatic transmissions EXCEPT FOR THOSE LISTED IN THE NOTE ABOVE. NOTE: ATF+4(R) must always be used in vehicles that were originally filled with ATF+4(R). DO NOT USE ANY OTHER FLUID. NOTE: ATF+4(R) is backward compatible with ATF+3, ATF+2, and ATF+. Additionally, ATF+4(R) can be used to top off vehicles that used ATF+3, ATF+2, or ATF+. NOTE: If ATF+4® is used to service models originally filled with ATF+3, ATF+2, and ATF+ the fluid maintenance schedules listed for that model does not change. The service interval currently in effect for a given model should continue to be followed. Refer to the Service or Owners manual for maintenance schedule directions. In general terms, If ATF+, ATF+2 or ATF+3 was the recommended fluid, it is now recommended to use ATF+4® BENEFITS ^ Better anti-wear properties ^ Improved rust/corrosion prevention ^ Controls oxidation ^ Eliminates deposits ^ Controls friction ^ Retains anti-foaming properties ^ Superior properties for low temperature operation FLUID COLOR Mopar ATF+4(R) has exceptional durability. However, the red dye used in ATF+4(R) is not permanent; as the fluid ages it may become darker or appear brown in color. ATF+4(R) also has a unique odor that may change with age. With ATF+4(R) fluid, color and odor are no longer indicators of fluid condition and do not necessarily support a fluid change. PARTS REQUIRED: POLICY: Information Only Disclaimer: This bulletin is supplied as technical information only and is not an authorization for repair. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications Fluid - A/T: Capacity Specifications Service Fill 42RLE .................................................................................................................................................. ............................................................. 3.8L (4.0 Qt) 45RFE/545RFE 4X2 ............................................................................................................................ ........................................................................................ 5.2L (5.5 Qt) 4X4 ........................................ .............................................................................................................................................................. .............. 6.2L (6.5 Qt) 48RE .................................................................................................................................................... ............................................................. 3.8L (4.0 Qt) 68RFE 4X2 .......................................................................................................................................... .......................................................................... 5.2L (5.5 Qt) 4X4 ...................................................... .............................................................................................................................................................. 6.2L (6.5 Qt) AS68RC ............................................................................................................................................... ............................................................. 6.8L (7.2 Qt) Overhaul * 42RLE .................................................................................................................................................. ............................................................. 8.3L (8.7 Qt) 45RFE/545RFE ................................................................................................................................... ............................................... 14-16L (14.8-16.9 Qt) 48RE .................................................................................................................................................... ............................................... 14-16L (14.8-16.9 Qt) 68RFE ................................................................................................................................................. .......................................... 15.6-16.6L (16.4-17.5 Qt) AS68RC ............................................................................................................................................... ....................................................... 13.0L (13.74 Qt) *Dry fill capacity. Depending on type and size of internal cooler, length and inside diameter of cooler lines, or use of an auxiliary cooler, these figures may vary. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications > Page 6828 Fluid - A/T: Fluid Type Specifications Automatic Transmission Fluid ............................................................................................................. .......................................................... Mopar ATF +4 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Fluid - A/T: Description and Operation Description AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION FLUID AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION (ALL BUT AISIN TRANSMISSION) NOTE: Refer to fluid level checking procedures. Mopar(R) ATF +4, Automatic Transmission Fluid is the recommended fluid for DaimlerChrysler automatic transmissions. Dexron II fluid IS NOT recommended. Clutch chatter can result from the use of improper fluid. Mopar(R) ATF +4, Automatic Transmission Fluid when new is red in color. The ATF is dyed red so it can be identified from other fluids used in the vehicle such as engine oil or antifreeze. The red color is not permanent and is not an indicator of fluid condition. As the vehicle is driven, the ATF will begin to look darker in color and may eventually become brown. This is normal. ATF+4 also has a unique odor that may change with age. Consequently, odor and color cannot be used to indicate the fluid condition or the need for a fluid change. AISIN TRANSMISSION Mopar(R) AS68RC, Automatic Transmission Fluid is the recommended fluid for AISIN AS68RC TRANSMISSION. Mopar(R) AS68RC, Automatic Transmission Fluid when new is red in color. The ATF is dyed red so it can be identified from other fluids used in the vehicle such as engine oil or antifreeze. The red color is not permanent and is not an indicator of fluid condition. As the vehicle is driven, the ATF will begin to look darker in color and may eventually become brown. This is normal. Mopar(R) AS68RC, also has a unique odor that may change with age. Consequently, odor and color cannot be used to indicate the fluid condition or the need for a fluid change. FLUID ADDITIVES Chrysler strongly recommends against the addition of any fluids to the transmission, other than those automatic transmission fluids listed above. Exceptions to this policy are the use of special dyes to aid in detecting fluid leaks. Various "special" additives and supplements exist that claim to improve shift feel and/or quality. These additives and others also claim to improve converter clutch operation and inhibit overheating, oxidation, varnish, and sludge. These claims have not been supported to the satisfaction of Chrysler and these additives must not be used. The use of transmission "sealers" should also be avoided, since they may adversely affect the integrity of transmission seals. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 6831 Fluid - A/T: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION - AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION FLUID The automatic transmission fluid is selected based upon several qualities. The fluid must provide a high level of protection for the internal components by providing a lubricating film between adjacent metal components. The fluid must also be thermally stable so that it can maintain a consistent viscosity through a large temperature range. If the viscosity stays constant through the temperature range of operation, transmission operation and shift feel will remain consistent. Transmission fluid must also be a good conductor of heat. The fluid must absorb heat from the internal transmission components and transfer that heat to the transmission case. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > 42RLE Automatic Transmission Fluid - A/T: Testing and Inspection 42RLE Automatic Transmission Causes Of Burnt Fluid CAUSES OF BURNT FLUID Burnt, discolored fluid is a result of overheating which has two primary causes. 1. A result of restricted fluid flow through the main and/or auxiliary cooler. This condition is usually the result of a faulty or improperly installed drainback valve, a damaged oil cooler, or severe restrictions in the coolers and lines caused by debris or kinked lines. 2. Heavy duty operation with a vehicle not properly equipped for this type of operation. Trailer towing or similar high load operation will overheat the transmission fluid if the vehicle is improperly equipped. Such vehicles should have an auxiliary transmission fluid cooler, a heavy duty cooling system, and the engine/axle ratio combination needed to handle heavy loads. Effects Of Incorrect Fluid Level EFFECTS OF INCORRECT FLUID LEVEL A low fluid level allows the pump to take in air along with the fluid. Air in the fluid will cause fluid pressures to be low and develop slower than normal. If the transmission is overfilled, the gears churn the fluid into foam. This aerates the fluid and causing the same conditions occurring with a low level. In either case, air bubbles cause fluid overheating, oxidation, and varnish buildup which interferes with valve and clutch operation. Foaming also causes fluid expansion which can result in fluid overflow from the transmission vent or fill tube. Fluid overflow can easily be mistaken for a leak if inspection is not careful. Fluid Contamination FLUID CONTAMINATION Transmission fluid contamination is generally a result of: - adding incorrect fluid - failure to clean dipstick and fill tube when checking level - engine coolant entering the fluid - internal failure that generates debris - overheat that generates sludge (fluid breakdown) - failure to replace contaminated converter after repair The use of non-recommended fluids can result in transmission failure. The usual results are erratic shifts, slippage, abnormal wear and eventual failure due to fluid breakdown and sludge formation. Avoid this condition by using recommended fluids only. The dipstick cap and fill tube should be wiped clean before checking fluid level. Dirt, grease and other foreign material on the cap and tube could fall into the tube if not removed beforehand. Take the time to wipe the cap and tube clean before withdrawing the dipstick. Engine coolant in the transmission fluid is generally caused by a cooler malfunction. The only remedy is to replace the radiator as the cooler in the radiator is not a serviceable part. If coolant has circulated through the transmission, an overhaul is necessary. The torque converter should also be replaced whenever a failure generates sludge and debris. This is necessary because normal converter flushing procedures will not remove all contaminants. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 6834 Fluid - A/T: Testing and Inspection 545RFE Automatic Transmission Effects Of Incorrect Fluid Level EFFECTS OF INCORRECT FLUID LEVEL A low fluid level allows the pump to take in air along with the fluid. Air in the fluid will cause fluid pressures to be low and develop slower than normal. If the transmission is overfilled, the gears churn the fluid into foam. This aerates the fluid and causing the same conditions occurring with a low level. In either case, air bubbles cause fluid overheating, oxidation, and varnish buildup which interferes with valve and clutch operation. Foaming also causes fluid expansion which can result in fluid overflow from the transmission vent or fill tube. Fluid overflow can easily be mistaken for a leak if inspection is not careful. Causes Of Burnt Fluid CAUSES OF BURNT FLUID Burnt, discolored fluid is a result of overheating which has three primary causes. 1. Internal clutch slippage, usually caused by low line pressure, inadequate clutch apply pressure, or clutch seal failure. 2. A result of restricted fluid flow through the main and auxiliary cooler. This condition is usually the result of a faulty or improperly installed drainback valve, a damaged oil cooler, or severe restrictions in the coolers and lines caused by debris or kinked lines. 3. Heavy duty operation with a vehicle not properly equipped for this type of operation. Trailer towing or similar high load operation will overheat the transmission fluid if the vehicle is improperly equipped. Such vehicles should have an auxiliary transmission fluid cooler, a heavy duty cooling system, and the engine/axle ratio combination needed to handle heavy loads. Fluid Contamination FLUID CONTAMINATION Transmission fluid contamination is generally a result of: - adding incorrect fluid - failure to clean dipstick and fill tube when checking level - engine coolant entering the fluid - internal failure that generates debris - overheat that generates sludge (fluid breakdown) - failure to replace contaminated converter after repair The use of non-recommended fluids can result in transmission failure. The usual results are erratic shifts, slippage, abnormal wear and eventual failure due to fluid breakdown and sludge formation. Avoid this condition by using recommended fluids only. The dipstick cap and fill tube should be wiped clean before checking fluid level. Dirt, grease and other foreign material on the cap and tube could fall into the tube if not removed beforehand. Take the time to wipe the cap and tube clean before withdrawing the dipstick. Engine coolant in the transmission fluid is generally caused by a cooler malfunction. The only remedy is to replace the radiator as the cooler in the radiator is not a serviceable part. If coolant has circulated through the transmission, an overhaul is necessary. The torque converter should also be replaced whenever a failure generates sludge and debris. This is necessary because normal converter flushing procedures will not remove all contaminants. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 6835 Fluid - A/T: Testing and Inspection 68RFE Automatic Transmission Effects Of Incorrect Fluid Level EFFECTS OF INCORRECT FLUID LEVEL A low fluid level allows the pump to take in air along with the fluid. Air in the fluid will cause fluid pressures to be low and develop slower than normal. If the transmission is overfilled, the gears churn the fluid into foam. This aerates the fluid and causing the same conditions occurring with a low level. In either case, air bubbles cause fluid overheating, oxidation, and varnish buildup which interferes with valve and clutch operation. Foaming also causes fluid expansion which can result in fluid overflow from the transmission vent or fill tube. Fluid overflow can easily be mistaken for a leak if inspection is not careful. Causes Of Burnt Fluid CAUSES OF BURNT FLUID Burnt, discolored fluid is a result of overheating which has three primary causes. 1. Internal clutch slippage, usually caused by low line pressure, inadequate clutch apply pressure, or clutch seal failure. 2. A result of restricted fluid flow through the main and auxiliary cooler. This condition is usually the result of a faulty or improperly installed drainback valve, a damaged oil cooler, or severe restrictions in the coolers and lines caused by debris or kinked lines. 3. Heavy duty operation with a vehicle not properly equipped for this type of operation. Trailer towing or similar high load operation will overheat the transmission fluid if the vehicle is improperly equipped. Such vehicles should have an auxiliary transmission fluid cooler, a heavy duty cooling system, and the engine/axle ratio combination needed to handle heavy loads. Fluid Contamination FLUID CONTAMINATION Transmission fluid contamination is generally a result of: - adding incorrect fluid - failure to clean dipstick and fill tube when checking level - engine coolant entering the fluid - internal failure that generates debris - overheat that generates sludge (fluid breakdown) - failure to replace contaminated converter after repair The use of non-recommended fluids can result in transmission failure. The usual results are erratic shifts, slippage, abnormal wear and eventual failure due to fluid breakdown and sludge formation. Avoid this condition by using recommended fluids only. The dipstick cap and fill tube should be wiped clean before checking fluid level. Dirt, grease and other foreign material on the cap and tube could fall into the tube if not removed beforehand. Take the time to wipe the cap and tube clean before withdrawing the dipstick. Engine coolant in the transmission fluid is generally caused by a cooler malfunction. The only remedy is to replace the radiator as the cooler in the radiator is not a serviceable part. If coolant has circulated through the transmission, an overhaul is necessary. The torque converter should also be replaced whenever a failure generates sludge and debris. This is necessary because normal converter flushing procedures will not remove all contaminants. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 6836 Fluid - A/T: Testing and Inspection 48RE Automatic Transmission Effects Of Incorrect Fluid Level EFFECTS OF INCORRECT FLUID LEVEL A low fluid level allows the pump to take in air along with the fluid. Air in the fluid will cause fluid pressures to be low and develop slower than normal. If the transmission is overfilled, the gears churn the fluid into foam. This aerates the fluid and causing the same conditions occurring with a low level. In either case, air bubbles cause fluid overheating, oxidation, and varnish buildup which interferes with valve and clutch operation. Foaming also causes fluid expansion which can result in fluid overflow from the transmission vent or fill tube. Fluid overflow can easily be mistaken for a leak if inspection is not careful. Causes Of Burnt Fluid CAUSES OF BURNT FLUID Burnt, discolored fluid is a result of overheating which has two primary causes. 1. A result of restricted fluid flow through the main and/or auxiliary cooler. This condition is usually the result of a faulty or improperly installed drainback valve, a damaged oil cooler, or severe restrictions in the coolers and lines caused by debris or kinked lines. 2. Heavy duty operation with a vehicle not properly equipped for this type of operation. Trailer towing or similar high load operation will overheat the transmission fluid if the vehicle is improperly equipped. Such vehicles should have an auxiliary transmission fluid cooler, a heavy duty cooling system, and the engine/axle ratio combination needed to handle heavy loads. Fluid Contamination FLUID CONTAMINATION Transmission fluid contamination is generally a result of: - adding incorrect fluid - failure to clean dipstick and fill tube when checking level - engine coolant entering the fluid - internal failure that generates debris - overheat that generates sludge (fluid breakdown) - failure to replace contaminated converter after repair The use of non-recommended fluids can result in transmission failure. The usual results are erratic shifts, slippage, abnormal wear and eventual failure due to fluid breakdown and sludge formation. Avoid this condition by using recommended fluids only. The dipstick cap and fill tube should be wiped clean before checking fluid level. Dirt, grease and other foreign material on the cap and tube could fall into the tube if not removed beforehand. Take the time to wipe the cap and tube clean before withdrawing the dipstick. Engine coolant in the transmission fluid is generally caused by a cooler malfunction. The only remedy is to replace the radiator as the cooler in the radiator is not a serviceable part. If coolant has circulated through the transmission, an overhaul is necessary. The torque converter should also be replaced whenever a failure generates sludge and debris. This is necessary because normal converter flushing procedures will not remove all contaminants. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 6837 Fluid - A/T: Testing and Inspection AS68RC Automatic Transmission Effects Of Incorrect Fluid Level EFFECTS OF INCORRECT FLUID LEVEL A low fluid level allows the pump to take in air along with the fluid. Air in the fluid will cause fluid pressures to be low and develop slower than normal. If the transmission is overfilled, the gears churn the fluid into foam. This aerates the fluid and causing the same conditions occurring with a low level. In either case, air bubbles cause fluid overheating, oxidation, and varnish buildup which interferes with valve and clutch operation. Foaming also causes fluid expansion which can result in fluid overflow from the transmission vent or fill tube. Fluid overflow can easily be mistaken for a leak if inspection is not careful. Causes Of Burnt Fluid CAUSES OF BURNT FLUID Burnt, discolored fluid is a result of overheating which has three primary causes. 1. Internal clutch slippage, usually caused by low line pressure, inadequate clutch apply pressure, or clutch seal failure. 2. A result of restricted fluid flow through the main and/or auxiliary cooler. 3. Heavy duty operation with a vehicle not properly equipped for this type of operation. Trailer towing or similar high load operation will overheat the transmission fluid if the vehicle is improperly equipped. Such vehicles should have an auxiliary transmission fluid cooler, a heavy duty cooling system, and the engine/axle ratio combination needed to handle heavy loads. Fluid Contamination FLUID CONTAMINATION Transmission fluid contamination is generally a result of: - adding incorrect fluid. - failure to clean dipstick and fill tube when checking level. - engine coolant entering the fluid. - internal failure that generates debris. - overheat that generates sludge (fluid breakdown). - failure to replace contaminated converter after repair. The use of non-recommended fluids can result in transmission failure. The usual results are erratic shifts, slippage, abnormal wear and eventual failure due to fluid breakdown and sludge formation. Avoid this condition by using recommended fluids only. The dipstick cap and fill tube should be wiped clean before checking fluid level. Dirt, grease and other foreign material on the cap and tube could fall into the tube if not removed beforehand. Take the time to wipe the cap and tube clean before withdrawing the dipstick. Engine coolant in the transmission fluid is generally caused by a cooler malfunction. The only remedy is to replace the radiator as the cooler in the radiator is not a serviceable part. If coolant has circulated through the transmission, an overhaul is necessary. The torque converter should be replaced whenever a failure generates sludge and debris. This is necessary because normal converter flushing procedures will not remove all contaminants. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 42RLE Automatic Transmission Fluid - A/T: Service and Repair 42RLE Automatic Transmission Fluid Level Check - 42RLE FLUID LEVEL CHECK The transmission sump has a dipstick to check oil similar to most automatic transmissions. It is located on the left side of the engine. Be sure to wipe all dirt from dipstick handle before removing. The torque converter fills in both the PARK and NEUTRAL positions. Place the selector lever in PARK to be sure that the fluid level check is accurate. The engine should be running at idle speed for at least one minute, with the vehicle on level ground. At normal operating temperature (approximately 82° C or 180° F), the fluid level is correct if it is in the HOT region (cross-hatched area) on the oil level indicator. The fluid level should be in COLD region at 21° C (70° F) fluid temperature. Adjust fluid level as necessary. Use only Mopar(R) ATF+4, Automatic Transmission Fluid. FILL TUBE EQUIPPED WITH INDICATOR 42RLE Fluid Temperature Chart NOTE: Engine and Transmission should be at normal operating temperature before performing this procedure. 1. Start engine and apply parking brake. 2. Connect scan tool and select transmission. 3. Select sensors. 4. Read the transmission temperature value. 5. Compare the fluid temperature value with the chart. 6. Adjust transmission fluid level shown on the dipstick according to the 42RLE Fluid Temperature Chart. Use only Mopar(R) ATF+4, Automatic Transmission Fluid. 7. Check transmission for leaks. CAPPED FILL TUBE 1. Verify that the vehicle is parked on a level surface. 2. Remove the dipstick tube cap. WARNING: There is a risk of accident from vehicle starting off by itself when engine running. There is a risk of injury from contusions and burns if you insert your hands into the engine when it is started or when it is running. Secure vehicle to prevent it from moving off by itself. Wear properly fastened and close-fitting work clothes. Do not touch hot or rotating parts. 3. Actuate the service brake. Start engine and let it run at idle speed in selector lever position "P". 4. Shift through the transmission modes several times with the vehicle stationary and the engine idling 5. Warm up the transmission, wait at least 2 minutes and check the oil level with the engine running. Push the Oil Dipstick 9336 into transmission fill tube until the dipstick tip contacts the oil pan and pull out again, read off oil level, repeat if necessary. NOTE: The dipstick will protrude from the fill tube when installed. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 6840 6. Check transmission oil temperature using the appropriate scan tool. NOTE: The true transmission oil temperature can only be read by a scan tool in REVERSE or any forward gear position. 7. The transmission Oil Dipstick 9336 has indicator marks every 10mm. Determine the height of the oil level on the dipstick and using the height, the transmission temperature, and the Transmission Fluid Graph, determine if the transmission oil level is correct. 8. Add or remove oil as necessary and recheck the oil level. 9. Once the oil level is correct, install the dipstick tube cap. Fluid/Filter Service - 42RLE FLUID/FILTER SERVICE NOTE: Only fluids of the type labeled Mopar(R) ATF+4, Automatic Transmission Fluid, should be used in the transmission sump. A filter change should be made at the time of the transmission oil change. The magnet (on the inside of the oil pan) should also be cleaned with a clean, dry cloth. NOTE: If the transmission is disassembled for any reason, the fluid and filter should be changed. 1. Raise vehicle on a hoist. Place a drain container with a large opening, under transmission oil pan. NOTE: One of the oil pan bolts (5) has a sealing patch applied from the factory. Separate this bolt for reuse. 2. Loosen pan bolts and tap the pan at one corner to break it loose allowing fluid to drain, then remove the oil pan. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 6841 3. Install a new filter and o-ring on bottom of the valve body and tighten retaining screws to 5 Nm (45 in. lbs.). NOTE: Before installing the oil pan bolt (5) in the bolt hole located between the torque converter clutch on and U/D clutch pressure tap circuits, it will be necessary to replenish the sealing patch on the bolt using Mopar(R) Lock & Seal Adhesive. 4. Clean the oil pan and magnet. Reinstall pan using new Mopar(R) Silicone Adhesive sealant. Tighten oil pan bolts to 20 Nm (14.5 ft. lbs.). 5. Pour four quarts of Mopar(R) ATF+4, Automatic Transmission Fluid, through the dipstick opening. 6. Start engine and allow to idle for at least one minute. Then, with parking and service brakes applied, move selector lever momentarily to each position, ending in the park or neutral position. 7. Check the transmission fluid level and add an appropriate amount to bring the transmission fluid level to 3mm (1/8 in.) below the lowest mark on the dipstick. 8. Recheck the fluid level after the transmission has reached normal operating temperature, 82° C (180°F). 9. To prevent dirt from entering transmission, make certain that dipstick is fully seated into the dipstick opening. Transmission Fill - 42RLE TRANSMISSION FILL To avoid overfilling transmission after a fluid change or overhaul, perform the following procedure: 1. Remove dipstick and insert clean funnel in transmission fill tube. 2. Add following initial quantity of Mopar(R) ATF +4 to transmission: a. If only fluid and filter were changed, add 3 pints (1-1/2 quarts) of ATF +4 to transmission. b. If transmission was completely overhauled, torque converter was replaced or drained, and cooler was flushed, add 12 pints (6 quarts) of ATF +4 to transmission. 3. Apply parking brakes. 4. Start and run engine at normal curb idle speed. 5. Apply service brakes, shift transmission through all gear ranges then back to NEUTRAL, set parking brake, and leave engine running at curb idle speed. 6. Remove funnel, insert dipstick and check fluid level. If level is low, add fluid to bring level to MIN mark on dipstick. Check to see if the oil level is equal on both sides of the dipstick. If one side is noticeably higher than the other, the dipstick has picked up some oil from the dipstick tube. Allow the oil to drain down the dipstick tube and re-check. 7. Drive vehicle until transmission fluid is at normal operating temperature. 8. With the engine running at curb idle speed, the gear selector in NEUTRAL, and the parking brake applied, check the transmission fluid level. CAUTION: Do not overfill transmission, fluid foaming and shifting problems can result. 9. Add fluid to bring level up to MAX arrow mark. When fluid level is correct, shut engine off, release park brake, remove funnel, and install dipstick in fill tube. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 6842 Fluid - A/T: Service and Repair 545RFE Automatic Transmission Fluid Level Check - 545RFE FLUID LEVEL CHECK Low fluid level can cause a variety of conditions because it allows the pump to take in air along with the fluid. As in any hydraulic system, air bubbles make the fluid spongy, therefore, pressures will be low and build up slowly. Improper filling can also raise the fluid level too high. When the transmssion has too much fluid, the geartrain churns up foam and cause the same conditions which occur with a low fluid level. In either case, air bubbles can cause overheating and fluid oxidation, and varnishing. This can interfere with normal valve, clutch, and accumulator operation. Foaming can also result in fluid escaping from the transmission vent where it may be mistaken for a leak. The transmission has a dipstick to check oil level. It is located on the right side of the engine. Be sure to wipe all dirt from dipstick handle before removing. The torque converter fills in both the P (PARK) and N (NEUTRAL) positions. Place the selector lever in P (PARK) to be sure that the fluid level check is accurate. The engine should be running at idle speed for at least one minute, with the vehicle on level ground. At normal operating temperature (approximately 82° C. or 180° F), the fluid level is correct if it is in the HOT region (cross-hatched area) on the oil level indicator. The fluid level will be approximately at the upper COLD hole of the dipstick at 21° C (70° F) fluid temperature. FILL TUBE EQUIPPED WITH INDICATOR Transmission Fluid Temperature Chart NOTE: Engine and Transmission should be at normal operating temperature before performing this procedure. After the fluid has been checked, seat the dipstick fully to seal out water and dirt. 1. Start engine and apply parking brake. 2. Shift the transmission into DRIVE for approximately 2 seconds. 3. Shift the transmission into REVERSE for approximately 2 seconds. 4. Shift the transmission into PARK. 5. Hook up scan tool and select transmission. 6. Select sensors. 7. Read the transmission temperature value. 8. Compare the fluid temperature value with the chart. 9. Adjust transmission fluid level shown on the dipstick according to the Transmission Fluid Temperature Chart. NOTE: After adding any fluid to the transmission, wait a minimum of 2 minutes for the oil to fully drain from the fill tube into the transmission before rechecking the fluid level. 10. Check transmission for leaks. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 6843 CAPPED FILL TUBE 1. Verify that the vehicle is parked on a level surface. 2. Remove the dipstick tube cap. WARNING: There is a risk of accident from vehicle starting off by itself when engine is running. There is a risk of injury from contusions and burns if you insert your hands into the engine when it is started or when it is running. Secure vehicle to prevent it from moving off by itself. Wear properly fastened and close-fitting work clothes. Do not touch hot or rotating parts. 3. Actuate the service brake. Start engine and let it run at idle speed in selector lever position "P". 4. Shift through the transmission modes several times with the vehicle stationary and the engine idling. 5. Warm up the transmission, wait at least 2 minutes and check the oil level with the engine running. Push the Oil Dipstick 9336 into transmission fill tube until the dipstick tip contacts the oil pan and pull out again, read off oil level, repeat if necessary. NOTE: The dipstick will protrude from the fill tube when installed. 6. Check transmission oil temperature using the appropriate scan tool. NOTE: The true transmission oil temperature can only be read by a scan tool in REVERSE or any forward gear position. 7. The transmission Oil Dipstick 9336 has indicator marks every 10 mm. Determine the height of the oil level on the dipstick and using the height, the transmission temperature, and the Transmission Fluid Graph, determine if the transmission oil level is correct. 8. Add or remove oil as necessary and recheck the oil level. 9. Once the oil level is correct, install the dipstick tube cap. Fluid And Filter Replacement FLUID AND FILTER REPLACEMENT For proper service intervals See: Maintenance . REMOVAL 1. Hoist and support vehicle on safety stands. 2. Place a large diameter shallow drain pan beneath the transmission pan. 3. Remove bolts holding front and sides of pan to transmission. 4. Loosen bolts holding rear of pan to transmission. 5. Slowly separate front of pan away from transmission allowing the fluid to drain into drain pan. 6. Hold up pan and remove remaining bolts holding pan to transmission. 7. While holding pan level, lower pan away from transmission. 8. Pour remaining fluid in pan into drain pan. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 6844 Transmission Filters - 4X4 Shown 9. Remove the screw holding the primary oil filter (1) to valve body. 10. Separate filter from valve body and oil pump and pour fluid in filter into drain pan. 11. Inspect the oil filter seal in the bottom of the oil pump. If the seal is not installed completely in the oil pump, or is otherwise damaged, then remove and discard the oil filter seal from the bottom of the oil pump. If the seal is installed correctly and is in good condition, it can be reused. 12. If replacing the cooler return filter (2), use Oil Filter Wrench 8321 to remove the filter from the transmission. 13. Dispose of used trans fluid and filter(s) properly. INSPECTION Inspect bottom of pan and magnet for excessive amounts of metal. A light coating of clutch material on the bottom of the pan does not indicate a problem unless accompanied by a slipping condition or shift lag. If fluid and pan are contaminated with excessive amounts of debris, refer to the appropriate diagnostic procedure. CLEANING 1. Using a suitable solvent, clean pan and magnet. 2. Using a suitable gasket scraper, clean original sealing material from surface of transmission case and the transmission pan. INSTALLATION Transmission Filters - 4X4 Shown Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 6845 CAUTION: The primary oil filter seal MUST be fully installed flush against the oil pump body. DO NOT install the seal onto the filter neck and attempt to install the filter and seal as an assembly. Damage to the transmission will result. 1. If necessary, install a new primary oil filter seal in the oil pump inlet bore. Seat the seal in the bore with Installer 6960-A or another suitable tool (appropriately sized drift or socket, the butt end of a hammer etc.). 2. Place replacement filter in position on valve body and into the oil pump. 3. Install screw to hold the primary oil filter (1) to valve body. Tighten screw to 4.5 Nm (40 in. lbs.) torque. 4. Install new cooler return filter (2) onto the transmission, if necessary. Torque the filter to 9.5 Nm (84 in.lbs.). 5. Place bead of Mopar(R) RTV sealant onto the transmission case sealing surface. 6. Place pan in position on transmission. 7. Install bolts to hold pan to transmission. Tighten bolts to 12 Nm (105 in. lbs.) torque. 8. Lower vehicle and fill transmission with MOPAR(R) ATF +4. Transmission Fill TRANSMISSION FILL To avoid overfilling transmission after a fluid change or overhaul, perform the following procedure: 1. Remove dipstick and insert clean funnel in transmission fill tube. 2. Add following initial quantity of Mopar(R) ATF +4 to transmission: a. If only fluid and filter were changed, add 10 pints (5 quarts) of ATF +4 to transmission. b. If transmission was completely overhauled and the torque converter was replaced or drained, add 24 pints (12 quarts) of ATF +4 to transmission. 3. Check the transmission fluid See: Service and Repair/Procedures/545RFE Automatic Transmission/Fluid Level Check - 545RFE and adjust as required. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 6846 Fluid - A/T: Service and Repair 68RFE Automatic Transmission Fluid And Filter Replacement FLUID AND FILTER REPLACEMENT For proper service intervals See: Maintenance . REMOVAL 1. Hoist and support vehicle on safety stands. 2. Place a large diameter shallow drain pan beneath the transmission pan. 3. Remove bolts holding front and sides of pan to transmission. 4. Loosen bolts holding rear of pan to transmission. 5. Slowly separate front of pan away from transmission allowing the fluid to drain into drain pan. 6. Hold up pan and remove remaining bolts holding pan to transmission. 7. While holding pan level, lower pan away from transmission. 8. Pour remaining fluid in pan into drain pan. Transmission Filters - 4X4 Shown 9. Remove the screw holding the primary oil filter (1) to valve body. 10. Separate filter from valve body and oil pump and pour fluid in filter into drain pan. 11. Inspect the oil filter seal in the bottom of the oil pump. If the seal is not installed completely in the oil pump, or is otherwise damaged, then remove and discard the oil filter seal from the bottom of the oil pump. If the seal is installed correctly and is in good condition, it can be reused. 12. If replacing the cooler return filter (2), use Oil Filter Wrench 8321 to remove the filter from the transmission. 13. Dispose of used trans fluid and filter(s) properly. INSPECTION Inspect bottom of pan and magnet for excessive amounts of metal. A light coating of clutch material on the bottom of the pan does not indicate a problem unless accompanied by a slipping condition or shift lag. If fluid and pan are contaminated with excessive amounts of debris, refer to the appropriate diagnostic procedure. CLEANING 1. Using a suitable solvent, clean pan and magnet. 2. Using a suitable gasket scraper, clean original sealing material from surface of transmission case and the transmission pan. INSTALLATION Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 6847 Transmission Filters - 4X4 Shown CAUTION: The primary oil filter seal MUST be fully installed flush against the oil pump body. DO NOT install the seal onto the filter neck and attempt to install the filter and seal as an assembly. Damage to the transmission will result. 1. If necessary, install a new primary oil filter seal in the oil pump inlet bore. Seat the seal in the bore with Installer 6960-A or another suitable tool (appropriately sized drift or socket, the butt end of a hammer etc.). 2. Place replacement filter in position on valve body and into the oil pump. 3. Install screw to hold the primary oil filter (1) to valve body. Tighten screw to 4.5 Nm (40 in. lbs.) torque. 4. Install new cooler return filter (2) onto the transmission, if necessary. Torque the filter to 9.5 Nm (84 in.lbs.). 5. Place bead of Mopar(R) RTV sealant onto the transmission case sealing surface. 6. Place pan in position on transmission. 7. Install bolts to hold pan to transmission. Tighten bolts to 12 Nm (105 in. lbs.) torque. 8. Lower vehicle and fill transmission with MOPAR(R) ATF +4. Fluid Level Check - 68RFE FLUID LEVEL CHECK Low fluid level can cause a variety of conditions because it allows the pump to take in air along with the fluid. As in any hydraulic system, air bubbles make the fluid spongy, therefore, pressures will be low and build up slowly. Improper filling can also raise the fluid level too high. When the transmssion has too much fluid, the geartrain churns up foam and cause the same conditions which occur with a low fluid level. In either case, air bubbles can cause overheating and fluid oxidation, and varnishing. This can interfere with normal valve, clutch, and accumulator operation. Foaming can also result in fluid escaping from the transmission vent where it may be mistaken for a leak. The transmission has a dipstick to check oil level. It is located on the right side of the engine. Be sure to wipe all dirt from dipstick handle before removing. The torque converter fills in both the P (PARK) and N (NEUTRAL) positions. Place the selector lever in P (PARK) to be sure that the fluid level check is accurate. The engine should be running at idle speed for at least one minute, with the vehicle on level ground. At normal operating temperature (approximately 82° C. or 180° F), the fluid level is correct if it is in the HOT region (cross-hatched area) on the oil level indicator. The fluid level will be approximately at the upper COLD hole of the dipstick at 21° C (70° F) fluid temperature. FILL TUBE EQUIPPED WITH INDICATOR Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 6848 68RFE FLUID FILL CHART NOTE: Engine and Transmission should be at normal operating temperature before performing this procedure. After the fluid has been checked, seat the dipstick fully to seal out water and dirt. 1. Start engine and apply parking brake. 2. Shift the transmission into DRIVE for approximately 2 seconds. 3. Shift the transmission into REVERSE for approximately 2 seconds. 4. Shift the transmission into PARK. 5. Hook up scan tool and select transmission. 6. Select sensors. 7. Read the transmission temperature value. 8. Compare the fluid temperature value with the chart. 9. Adjust transmission fluid level shown on the dipstick according to the Transmission Fluid Temperature Chart. NOTE: After adding any fluid to the transmission, wait a minimum of 2 minutes for the oil to fully drain from the fill tube into the transmission before rechecking the fluid level. 10. Check transmission for leaks. CAPPED FILL TUBE 1. Verify that the vehicle is parked on a level surface. 2. Remove the dipstick tube cap. WARNING: There is a risk of accident from vehicle starting off by itself when engine is running. There is a risk of injury from contusions and burns if you insert your hands into the engine when it is started or when it is running. Secure vehicle to prevent it from moving off by itself. Wear properly fastened and close-fitting work clothes. Do not touch hot or rotating parts. 3. Actuate the service brake. Start engine and let it run at idle speed in selector lever position "P". 4. Shift through the transmission modes several times with the vehicle stationary and the engine idling. 5. Warm up the transmission, wait at least 2 minutes and check the oil level with the engine running. Push the Oil Dipstick 9336 into transmission fill tube until the dipstick tip contacts the oil pan and pull out again, read off oil level, repeat if necessary. NOTE: The dipstick will protrude from the fill tube when installed. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 6849 6. Check transmission oil temperature using the appropriate scan tool. NOTE: The true transmission oil temperature can only be read by a scan tool in REVERSE or any forward gear position. 7. The transmission Oil Dipstick 9336 has indicator marks every 10 mm. Determine the height of the oil level on the dipstick and using the height, the transmission temperature, and the Transmission Fluid Graph, determine if the transmission oil level is correct. 8. Add or remove oil as necessary and recheck the oil level. 9. Once the oil level is correct, install the dipstick tube cap. Transmission Fill TRANSMISSION FILL To avoid overfilling transmission after a fluid change or overhaul, perform the following procedure: 1. Remove dipstick and insert clean funnel in transmission fill tube. 2. Add following initial quantity of Mopar(R) ATF +4 to transmission: a. If only fluid and filter were changed, add 10 pints (5 quarts) of ATF +4 to transmission. b. If transmission was completely overhauled and the torque converter was replaced or drained, add 24 pints (12 quarts) of ATF +4 to transmission. 3. Check the transmission fluid See: Service and Repair/Procedures/545RFE Automatic Transmission/Fluid Level Check - 545RFE and adjust as required. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 6850 Fluid - A/T: Service and Repair 48RE Automatic Transmission Fluid Level Check FLUID LEVEL CHECK Low fluid level can cause a variety of conditions because it allows the pump to take in air along with the fluid. As in any hydraulic system, air bubbles make the fluid spongy, therefore, pressures will be low and build up slowly. Improper filling can also raise the fluid level too high. When the transmssion has too much fluid, the geartrain churns up foam and cause the same conditions which occur with a low fluid level. In either case, air bubbles can cause overheating and/or fluid oxidation, and varnishing. This can interfere with normal valve, clutch, and accumulator operation. Foaming can also result in fluid escaping from the transmission vent where it may be mistaken for a leak. After the fluid has been checked, seat the dipstick fully to seal out water and dirt. The transmission has a dipstick to check oil level. It is located on the right side of the engine. Be sure to wipe all dirt from dipstick handle before removing. Fluid level is checked with the engine running at curb idle speed, the transmission in NEUTRAL and the transmission fluid at normal operating temperature. The engine should be running at idle speed for at least one minute, with the vehicle on level ground. The transmission fluid level can be checked two ways. PROCEDURE ONE 1. Transmission fluid must be at normal operating temperature for accurate fluid level check. Drive vehicle if necessary to bring fluid temperature up to normal hot operating temperature of 82°C (180°F). 2. Position vehicle on level surface. 3. Start and run engine at curb idle speed. 4. Apply parking brakes. 5. Shift transmission momentarily into all gear ranges. Then shift transmission back to NEUTRAL. 6. Clean top of filler tube and dipstick to keep dirt from entering tube. 7. Remove dipstick (1) and check fluid level as follows: a. Correct acceptable level is in crosshatch area. b. Correct maximum level is to MAX arrow mark. c. Incorrect level is at or below MIN line. d. If fluid is low, add only enough Mopar(R) ATF +4 to restore correct level. Do not overfill. PROCEDURE TWO Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 6851 1. Start engine and apply parking brake. 2. Shift the transmission into DRIVE for approximately 2 seconds. 3. Shift the transmission into REVERSE for approximately 2 seconds. 4. Shift the transmission into NEUTRAL. 5. Hook up scan tool and select engine. 6. Select sensors. 7. Read the transmission temperature value. 8. Compare the fluid temperature value with the chart. 9. Adjust transmission fluid level shown on the dipstick according to the chart. NOTE: After adding any fluid to the transmission, wait a minimum of 2 minutes for the oil to fully drain from the fill tube into the transmission before rechecking the fluid level. 10. Check transmission for leaks. Fluid And Filter Replacement FLUID AND FILTER REPLACEMENT For proper service intervals See: Maintenance . The service fluid fill after a filter change is approximately 3.8 liters (4.0 quarts). REMOVAL 1. Hoist and support vehicle on safety stands. 2. Place a large diameter shallow drain pan beneath the transmission pan (3). 3. Remove bolts holding front and sides of pan to transmission (1). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 6852 4. Loosen bolts holding rear of pan to transmission. 5. Slowly separate front of pan and reusable gasket (2) away from transmission allowing the fluid to drain into drain pan. 6. Hold up pan and remove remaining bolt holding pan to transmission. 7. While holding pan level, lower pan and gasket away from transmission. 8. Pour remaining fluid in pan into drain pan. 9. Remove screws holding filter (2) to valve body. 10. Separate filter from valve body and pour fluid in filter into drain pan. 11. Dispose of used trans fluid and filter properly. INSTALLATION 1. Position a new transmission oil filter (2) onto the valve body. 2. Install the screws to hold the filter to the valve body. Tighten the screws to 4 Nm (35 in.lbs.). 3. Clean the gasket surfaces of the transmission oil pan (3) and transmission pan rail. NOTE: The transmission pan oil gasket (2) is reusable. Inspect the sealing surfaces of the gasket. If the sealing ribs on both surfaces Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 6853 appear to be in good condition, clean the gasket of any foreign material and reinstall. 4. Position the oil pan gasket (2) onto the oil pan (3). 5. Position the oil pan and gasket onto the transmission and install several bolts to hold the pan and gasket to the transmission. 6. Install the remainder of the oil pan bolts. Tighten the bolts to 13.6 Nm (125 in.lbs.). 7. Lower vehicle and fill transmission. See: Service and Repair/Procedures/48RE Automatic Transmission/Transmission Fill - 48RE Transmission Fill - 48RE TRANSMISSION FILL To avoid overfilling transmission after a fluid change or overhaul, perform the following procedure: 1. Remove dipstick and insert clean funnel in transmission fill tube. 2. Add following initial quantity of Mopar(R) ATF +4 to transmission: a. If only fluid and filter were changed, add 3 pints (1-1/2 quarts) of ATF +4 to transmission. b. If transmission was completely overhauled, torque converter was replaced or drained, and cooler was flushed, add 12 pints (6 quarts) of ATF +4 to transmission. 3. Apply parking brakes. 4. Start and run engine at normal curb idle speed. 5. Apply service brakes, shift transmission through all gear ranges then back to NEUTRAL, set parking brake, and leave engine running at curb idle speed. 6. Remove funnel, insert dipstick and check fluid level. If level is low, add fluid to bring level to MIN mark on dipstick. Check to see if the oil level is equal on both sides of the dipstick. If one side is noticeably higher than the other, the dipstick has picked up some oil from the dipstick tube. Allow the oil to drain down the dipstick tube and re-check. 7. Drive vehicle until transmission fluid is at normal operating temperature. 8. With the engine running at curb idle speed, the gear selector in NEUTRAL, and the parking brake applied, check the transmission fluid level. CAUTION: Do not overfill transmission, fluid foaming and shifting problems can result. 9. Add fluid to bring level up to MAX arrow mark. When fluid level is correct, shut engine off, release park brake, remove funnel, and install dipstick in fill tube. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 6854 Fluid - A/T: Service and Repair AS68RC Automatic Transmission Fluid Level Check FLUID LEVEL CHECK Low fluid level can cause a variety of conditions because it allows the pump to take in air along with the fluid. As in any hydraulic system, air bubbles make the fluid spongy, therefore, pressures will be low and build up slowly. Improper filling can also raise the fluid level too high. When the transmission has too much fluid, the gear train churns up foam and cause the same conditions which occur with a low fluid level. In either case, air bubbles can cause overheating and/or fluid oxidation, and varnishing. This can interfere with normal valve, clutch, and accumulator operation. Foaming can also result in fluid escaping from the transmission vent where it may be mistaken for a leak. After the fluid has been checked, seat the dipstick fully to seal out water and dirt. The transmission has a dipstick to check oil level. Be sure to wipe all dirt from dipstick handle before removing. The torque converter fills in both the P (PARK) and N (NEUTRAL) positions. Place the selector lever in P (PARK) to be sure that the fluid level check is accurate. The engine should be running at idle speed for at least one minute, with the vehicle on level ground. At normal operating temperature (approximately 82° C. or 180° F), the fluid level is correct if it is in the HOT region (cross-hatched area) on the oil level indicator. The fluid level will be approximately at the upper COLD hole of the dipstick at 21° C (70° F) fluid temperature. NOTE: Engine and Transmission should be at normal operating temperature before performing this procedure. Optimum fluid temperature for checking the level should be between 70°C (158°F) and 80°C ( 176°F). 1. Start engine and apply parking brake. 2. Shift the transmission into DRIVE for approximately 2 seconds. 3. Shift the transmission into REVERSE for approximately 2 seconds. 4. Shift the transmission into PARK. 5. Connect the scan tool and select transmission. 6. Select sensors. 7. Read the transmission temperature value. 8. Compare the fluid temperature value with the chart. 9. Adjust transmission fluid level shown on the dipstick according to the Transmission Fluid Temperature Chart. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 6855 NOTE: After adding any fluid to the transmission, wait a minimum of 2 minutes for the oil to fully drain from the fill tube into the transmission before rechecking the fluid level. 10. Check transmission for leaks. Fluid And Filter Replacement FLUID AND FILTER REPLACEMENT REMOVAL DRAIN PLUG 1. Raise vehicle. 2. Place a large diameter drain pan beneath the transmission pan. 3. Remove the drain plug bolt (1) and allow the oil to drain from the transmission pan. 4. Remove the drain pan bolts from the transmission case. 5. Remove the drain pan. TRANSMISSION OIL FILTER Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 6856 6. Remove the transmission oil filter bolts (3). 7. Remove the transmission oil filter and o-ring seal from the valve body (1). INSPECTION OIL PAN MAGNETS Inspect bottom of pan, pick-up magnets (1) and magnetic drain plug (2) and fluid filter for excessive amounts of metal. A light coating of clutch material on the bottom of the pan does not indicate a problem unless accompanied by a slipping condition or shift lag. If fluid and pan are contaminated with excessive amounts of debris, refer to the appropriate diagnostic procedure. CLEANING 1. Using a suitable solvent, clean pan and magnet. 2. Using a suitable gasket scraper, clean original sealing material from surface of transmission case and the transmission pan. INSTALLATION Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 6857 TRANSMISSION OIL FILTER 1. Lubricate the transmission oil filter seal with MOPAR(R) AS68RC ATF. 2. Install the new transmission oil filter (2) in position on valve body (1) and into the oil pump. 3. Install the transmission oil filter bolts (3). 4. Tighten bolts to 10 Nm ( 88 in.lbs. ) torque. 5. Install a new transmission oil pan gasket. 6. Place pan in position on transmission. 7. Install bolts to hold pan to transmission. Tighten bolts to 7 Nm (62 in. lbs.) torque. DRAIN PLUG 8. Install transmission drain plug bolt (1). 9. Tighten oil pan drain plug to 27 Nm ( 20 ft.lbs) torque. 10. Lower vehicle and fill transmission with MOPAR(R) AS68RC ATF. See: Service and Repair/Procedures/AS68RC Automatic Transmission/Transmission Fill - AS68RC Transmission Fill - AS68RC TRANSMISSION FILL Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 6858 To avoid overfilling transmission after a fluid change or overhaul, perform the following procedure: 1. Remove dipstick and insert clean funnel in transmission fill tube. 2. Add following initial quantity of Mopar(R) AS68RC ATF to transmission: a. If only fluid and filter were changed, add 6.8L (7.2 quarts) of AS68RC to transmission. b. If transmission was completely overhauled and the torque converter was replaced or drained, add 13L (13.75 quarts) of Mopar(R) AS68RC ATF to transmission. 3. Check the transmission fluid and adjust as required. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid Filter - A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 42RLE Automatic Transmission Fluid Filter - A/T: Service and Repair 42RLE Automatic Transmission FLUID/FILTER SERVICE NOTE: Only fluids of the type labeled Mopar(R) ATF+4, Automatic Transmission Fluid, should be used in the transmission sump. A filter change should be made at the time of the transmission oil change. The magnet (on the inside of the oil pan) should also be cleaned with a clean, dry cloth. NOTE: If the transmission is disassembled for any reason, the fluid and filter should be changed. 1. Raise vehicle on a hoist. Place a drain container with a large opening, under transmission oil pan. NOTE: One of the oil pan bolts (5) has a sealing patch applied from the factory. Separate this bolt for reuse. 2. Loosen pan bolts and tap the pan at one corner to break it loose allowing fluid to drain, then remove the oil pan. 3. Install a new filter and o-ring on bottom of the valve body and tighten retaining screws to 5 Nm (45 in. lbs.). NOTE: Before installing the oil pan bolt (5) in the bolt hole located between the torque converter clutch on and U/D clutch pressure tap circuits, it will be necessary to replenish the sealing patch on the bolt using Mopar(R) Lock & Seal Adhesive. 4. Clean the oil pan and magnet. Reinstall pan using new Mopar(R) Silicone Adhesive sealant. Tighten oil pan bolts to 20 Nm (14.5 ft. lbs.). 5. Pour four quarts of Mopar(R) ATF+4, Automatic Transmission Fluid, through the dipstick opening. 6. Start engine and allow to idle for at least one minute. Then, with parking and service brakes applied, move selector lever momentarily to each position, ending in the park or neutral position. 7. Check the transmission fluid level and add an appropriate amount to bring the transmission fluid level to 3mm (1/8 in.) below the lowest mark on the dipstick. 8. Recheck the fluid level after the transmission has reached normal operating temperature, 82° C (180°F). 9. To prevent dirt from entering transmission, make certain that dipstick is fully seated into the dipstick opening. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid Filter - A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 6863 Fluid Filter - A/T: Service and Repair 545RFE Automatic Transmission FLUID AND FILTER REPLACEMENT For proper service intervals See: Maintenance . REMOVAL 1. Hoist and support vehicle on safety stands. 2. Place a large diameter shallow drain pan beneath the transmission pan. 3. Remove bolts holding front and sides of pan to transmission. 4. Loosen bolts holding rear of pan to transmission. 5. Slowly separate front of pan away from transmission allowing the fluid to drain into drain pan. 6. Hold up pan and remove remaining bolts holding pan to transmission. 7. While holding pan level, lower pan away from transmission. 8. Pour remaining fluid in pan into drain pan. Transmission Filters - 4X4 Shown 9. Remove the screw holding the primary oil filter (1) to valve body. 10. Separate filter from valve body and oil pump and pour fluid in filter into drain pan. 11. Inspect the oil filter seal in the bottom of the oil pump. If the seal is not installed completely in the oil pump, or is otherwise damaged, then remove and discard the oil filter seal from the bottom of the oil pump. If the seal is installed correctly and is in good condition, it can be reused. 12. If replacing the cooler return filter (2), use Oil Filter Wrench 8321 to remove the filter from the transmission. 13. Dispose of used trans fluid and filter(s) properly. INSPECTION Inspect bottom of pan and magnet for excessive amounts of metal. A light coating of clutch material on the bottom of the pan does not indicate a problem unless accompanied by a slipping condition or shift lag. If fluid and pan are contaminated with excessive amounts of debris, refer to the appropriate diagnostic procedure. CLEANING 1. Using a suitable solvent, clean pan and magnet. 2. Using a suitable gasket scraper, clean original sealing material from surface of transmission case and the transmission pan. INSTALLATION Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid Filter - A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 6864 Transmission Filters - 4X4 Shown CAUTION: The primary oil filter seal MUST be fully installed flush against the oil pump body. DO NOT install the seal onto the filter neck and attempt to install the filter and seal as an assembly. Damage to the transmission will result. 1. If necessary, install a new primary oil filter seal in the oil pump inlet bore. Seat the seal in the bore with Installer 6960-A or another suitable tool (appropriately sized drift or socket, the butt end of a hammer etc.). 2. Place replacement filter in position on valve body and into the oil pump. 3. Install screw to hold the primary oil filter (1) to valve body. Tighten screw to 4.5 Nm (40 in. lbs.) torque. 4. Install new cooler return filter (2) onto the transmission, if necessary. Torque the filter to 9.5 Nm (84 in.lbs.). 5. Place bead of Mopar(R) RTV sealant onto the transmission case sealing surface. 6. Place pan in position on transmission. 7. Install bolts to hold pan to transmission. Tighten bolts to 12 Nm (105 in. lbs.) torque. 8. Lower vehicle and fill transmission with MOPAR(R) ATF +4. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid Filter - A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 6865 Fluid Filter - A/T: Service and Repair 68RFE Automatic Transmission FLUID AND FILTER REPLACEMENT For proper service intervals See: Maintenance . REMOVAL 1. Hoist and support vehicle on safety stands. 2. Place a large diameter shallow drain pan beneath the transmission pan. 3. Remove bolts holding front and sides of pan to transmission. 4. Loosen bolts holding rear of pan to transmission. 5. Slowly separate front of pan away from transmission allowing the fluid to drain into drain pan. 6. Hold up pan and remove remaining bolts holding pan to transmission. 7. While holding pan level, lower pan away from transmission. 8. Pour remaining fluid in pan into drain pan. Transmission Filters - 4X4 Shown 9. Remove the screw holding the primary oil filter (1) to valve body. 10. Separate filter from valve body and oil pump and pour fluid in filter into drain pan. 11. Inspect the oil filter seal in the bottom of the oil pump. If the seal is not installed completely in the oil pump, or is otherwise damaged, then remove and discard the oil filter seal from the bottom of the oil pump. If the seal is installed correctly and is in good condition, it can be reused. 12. If replacing the cooler return filter (2), use Oil Filter Wrench 8321 to remove the filter from the transmission. 13. Dispose of used trans fluid and filter(s) properly. INSPECTION Inspect bottom of pan and magnet for excessive amounts of metal. A light coating of clutch material on the bottom of the pan does not indicate a problem unless accompanied by a slipping condition or shift lag. If fluid and pan are contaminated with excessive amounts of debris, refer to the appropriate diagnostic procedure. CLEANING 1. Using a suitable solvent, clean pan and magnet. 2. Using a suitable gasket scraper, clean original sealing material from surface of transmission case and the transmission pan. INSTALLATION Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid Filter - A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 6866 Transmission Filters - 4X4 Shown CAUTION: The primary oil filter seal MUST be fully installed flush against the oil pump body. DO NOT install the seal onto the filter neck and attempt to install the filter and seal as an assembly. Damage to the transmission will result. 1. If necessary, install a new primary oil filter seal in the oil pump inlet bore. Seat the seal in the bore with Installer 6960-A or another suitable tool (appropriately sized drift or socket, the butt end of a hammer etc.). 2. Place replacement filter in position on valve body and into the oil pump. 3. Install screw to hold the primary oil filter (1) to valve body. Tighten screw to 4.5 Nm (40 in. lbs.) torque. 4. Install new cooler return filter (2) onto the transmission, if necessary. Torque the filter to 9.5 Nm (84 in.lbs.). 5. Place bead of Mopar(R) RTV sealant onto the transmission case sealing surface. 6. Place pan in position on transmission. 7. Install bolts to hold pan to transmission. Tighten bolts to 12 Nm (105 in. lbs.) torque. 8. Lower vehicle and fill transmission with MOPAR(R) ATF +4. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid Filter - A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 6867 Fluid Filter - A/T: Service and Repair 48RE Automatic Transmission FLUID AND FILTER REPLACEMENT For proper service intervals See: Maintenance . The service fluid fill after a filter change is approximately 3.8 liters (4.0 quarts). REMOVAL 1. Hoist and support vehicle on safety stands. 2. Place a large diameter shallow drain pan beneath the transmission pan (3). 3. Remove bolts holding front and sides of pan to transmission (1). 4. Loosen bolts holding rear of pan to transmission. 5. Slowly separate front of pan and reusable gasket (2) away from transmission allowing the fluid to drain into drain pan. 6. Hold up pan and remove remaining bolt holding pan to transmission. 7. While holding pan level, lower pan and gasket away from transmission. 8. Pour remaining fluid in pan into drain pan. 9. Remove screws holding filter (2) to valve body. 10. Separate filter from valve body and pour fluid in filter into drain pan. 11. Dispose of used trans fluid and filter properly. INSTALLATION Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid Filter - A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 6868 1. Position a new transmission oil filter (2) onto the valve body. 2. Install the screws to hold the filter to the valve body. Tighten the screws to 4 Nm (35 in.lbs.). 3. Clean the gasket surfaces of the transmission oil pan (3) and transmission pan rail. NOTE: The transmission pan oil gasket (2) is reusable. Inspect the sealing surfaces of the gasket. If the sealing ribs on both surfaces appear to be in good condition, clean the gasket of any foreign material and reinstall. 4. Position the oil pan gasket (2) onto the oil pan (3). 5. Position the oil pan and gasket onto the transmission and install several bolts to hold the pan and gasket to the transmission. 6. Install the remainder of the oil pan bolts. Tighten the bolts to 13.6 Nm (125 in.lbs.). 7. Lower vehicle and fill transmission. See: Service and Repair/Procedures/48RE Automatic Transmission/Transmission Fill - 48RE Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid Filter - A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 6869 Fluid Filter - A/T: Service and Repair AS68RC Automatic Transmission FLUID AND FILTER REPLACEMENT REMOVAL DRAIN PLUG 1. Raise vehicle. 2. Place a large diameter drain pan beneath the transmission pan. 3. Remove the drain plug bolt (1) and allow the oil to drain from the transmission pan. 4. Remove the drain pan bolts from the transmission case. 5. Remove the drain pan. TRANSMISSION OIL FILTER 6. Remove the transmission oil filter bolts (3). 7. Remove the transmission oil filter and o-ring seal from the valve body (1). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid Filter - A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 6870 INSPECTION OIL PAN MAGNETS Inspect bottom of pan, pick-up magnets (1) and magnetic drain plug (2) and fluid filter for excessive amounts of metal. A light coating of clutch material on the bottom of the pan does not indicate a problem unless accompanied by a slipping condition or shift lag. If fluid and pan are contaminated with excessive amounts of debris, refer to the appropriate diagnostic procedure. CLEANING 1. Using a suitable solvent, clean pan and magnet. 2. Using a suitable gasket scraper, clean original sealing material from surface of transmission case and the transmission pan. INSTALLATION TRANSMISSION OIL FILTER Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid Filter - A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 6871 1. Lubricate the transmission oil filter seal with MOPAR(R) AS68RC ATF. 2. Install the new transmission oil filter (2) in position on valve body (1) and into the oil pump. 3. Install the transmission oil filter bolts (3). 4. Tighten bolts to 10 Nm ( 88 in.lbs. ) torque. 5. Install a new transmission oil pan gasket. 6. Place pan in position on transmission. 7. Install bolts to hold pan to transmission. Tighten bolts to 7 Nm (62 in. lbs.) torque. DRAIN PLUG 8. Install transmission drain plug bolt (1). 9. Tighten oil pan drain plug to 27 Nm ( 20 ft.lbs) torque. 10. Lower vehicle and fill transmission with MOPAR(R) AS68RC ATF. See: Service and Repair/Procedures/AS68RC Automatic Transmission/Transmission Fill - AS68RC Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid Pan, A/T > Component Information > Specifications > 42RLE Automatic Transmission Fluid Pan: Specifications 42RLE Automatic Transmission Transmission Pan Tighten bolts to 20 Nm (14.5 ft. lbs.). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid Pan, A/T > Component Information > Specifications > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 6876 Fluid Pan: Specifications 545RFE Automatic Transmission Transmission Pan Tighten pan bolts to 12 Nm (105 in. lbs.) torque. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid Pan, A/T > Component Information > Specifications > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 6877 Fluid Pan: Specifications 68RFE Automatic Transmission Transmission Pan Tighten pan bolts to 12 Nm (105 in. lbs.) torque. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid Pan, A/T > Component Information > Specifications > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 6878 Fluid Pan: Specifications 48RE Automatic Transmission Transmission Pan Tighten pan bolts to 13.6 Nm (125 in. lbs.) torque. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid Pan, A/T > Component Information > Specifications > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 6879 Fluid Pan: Specifications AS68RC Automatic Transmission Transmission Pan Tighten pan bolts to 7 Nm (62 in. lbs.) torque. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Assembly-Line Pressure Sensor/Variable Force Solenoid Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch: Locations Assembly-Line Pressure Sensor/Variable Force Solenoid Component ID: 17 Component : ASSEMBLY-LINE PRESSURE SENSOR/VARIABLE FORCE SOLENOID Connector: Name : ASSEMBLY-LINE PRESSURE SENSOR/VARIABLE FORCE SOLENOID Color : BLACK # of pins : 6 Qualifier : (RLE) Pin Circuit Description 1-2 F856 20YL/PK 5 VOLT SUPPLY 3 T38 20YL/BR LINE PRESSURE SIGNAL 4 K900 20DB/DG SENSOR GROUND 5 T16 18YL/OR TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT 6 T118 20DG LP VFS CONTROL Component Location - 19 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Assembly-Line Pressure Sensor/Variable Force Solenoid > Page 6884 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Assembly-Line Pressure Sensor/Variable Force Solenoid > Page 6885 Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch: Locations Assembly-Transmission Solenoid/Pressure Switch Component ID: 20 Component : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID/PRESSURE SWITCH Connector: Name : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID/PRESSURE SWITCH Color : LT. BROWN # of pins : 10 Qualifier : (RLE) Pin Circuit Description 1 T60 20YL/GY OD CONTROL 2 T59 20YL/LB UD CONTROL 3 T16 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT 4 T19 18YL/DB 2-4 CONTROL 5 T47 18YL/DG 2-4 PRESSURE SIGNAL 6 T9 20DG/TN OD PRESSURE SIGNAL 7 T20 20DG/WT L/R CONTROL 8-9-10 T50 20YL/TN L/R PRESSURE SIGNAL Component Location - 19 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Assembly-Line Pressure Sensor/Variable Force Solenoid > Page 6886 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Assembly-Line Pressure Sensor/Variable Force Solenoid > Page 6887 Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch: Locations Sensor-Line Pressure Component ID: 425 Component : SENSOR-LINE PRESSURE Connector: Name : SENSOR-LINE PRESSURE Color : BLACK # of pins : 4 Qualifier : (RFE) Pin Circuit Description 1 T160 20DG/WT SENSOR GROUND Pin Circuit Description 1 K900 20DB/DG SENSOR GROUND 2 F856 20YL/PK 5 VOLT SUPPLY 3 T38 20YL/BR LINE PRESSURE SIGNAL 4-- Component Location - 23 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Assembly-Line Pressure Sensor/Variable Force Solenoid > Page 6888 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Assembly-Line Pressure Sensor/Variable Force Solenoid Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch: Diagrams Assembly-Line Pressure Sensor/Variable Force Solenoid Component ID: 17 Component : ASSEMBLY-LINE PRESSURE SENSOR/VARIABLE FORCE SOLENOID Connector: Name : ASSEMBLY-LINE PRESSURE SENSOR/VARIABLE FORCE SOLENOID Color : BLACK # of pins : 6 Qualifier : (RLE) Pin Circuit Description 1-2 F856 20YL/PK 5 VOLT SUPPLY 3 T38 20YL/BR LINE PRESSURE SIGNAL 4 K900 20DB/DG SENSOR GROUND 5 T16 18YL/OR TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT 6 T118 20DG LP VFS CONTROL Component Location - 19 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Assembly-Line Pressure Sensor/Variable Force Solenoid > Page 6891 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Assembly-Line Pressure Sensor/Variable Force Solenoid > Page 6892 Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch: Diagrams Assembly-Transmission Solenoid/Pressure Switch Component ID: 20 Component : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID/PRESSURE SWITCH Connector: Name : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID/PRESSURE SWITCH Color : LT. BROWN # of pins : 10 Qualifier : (RLE) Pin Circuit Description 1 T60 20YL/GY OD CONTROL 2 T59 20YL/LB UD CONTROL 3 T16 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT 4 T19 18YL/DB 2-4 CONTROL 5 T47 18YL/DG 2-4 PRESSURE SIGNAL 6 T9 20DG/TN OD PRESSURE SIGNAL 7 T20 20DG/WT L/R CONTROL 8-9-10 T50 20YL/TN L/R PRESSURE SIGNAL Component Location - 19 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Assembly-Line Pressure Sensor/Variable Force Solenoid > Page 6893 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Assembly-Line Pressure Sensor/Variable Force Solenoid > Page 6894 Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch: Diagrams Sensor-Line Pressure Component ID: 425 Component : SENSOR-LINE PRESSURE Connector: Name : SENSOR-LINE PRESSURE Color : BLACK # of pins : 4 Qualifier : (RFE) Pin Circuit Description 1 T160 20DG/WT SENSOR GROUND Pin Circuit Description 1 K900 20DB/DG SENSOR GROUND 2 F856 20YL/PK 5 VOLT SUPPLY 3 T38 20YL/BR LINE PRESSURE SIGNAL 4-- Component Location - 23 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Assembly-Line Pressure Sensor/Variable Force Solenoid > Page 6895 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > 42RLE Automatic Transmission Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch: Description and Operation 42RLE Automatic Transmission Description DESCRIPTION The line pressure sensor (2) is mounted on the top of the valve body, next to the pressure control solenoid (1). The TCM utilizes a closed-loop system to control transmission line pressure. The system contains a variable force style solenoid, the Pressure Control Solenoid. The solenoid is duty cycle controlled by the TCM to vent the unnecessary line pressure supplied by the oil pump back to the sump. The system also contains a variable pressure style sensor, the Line Pressure Sensor, which is a direct input to the TCM. The line pressure solenoid monitors the transmission line pressure and completes the feedback loop to the TCM. The TCM uses this information to adjust its control of the pressure control solenoid to achieve the desired line pressure. Operation OPERATION The TCM calculates the desired line pressure based upon inputs from the transmission and engine. The TCM calculates the torque input to the transmission and uses that information as the primary input to the calculation. The line pressure is set to a predetermined value during shifts and when the transmission is in the PARK and NEUTRAL positions. This is done to ensure consistent shift quality. During all other operation, the actual line pressure is compared to the desired line pressure and adjustments are made to the pressure control solenoid duty cycle. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 6898 Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch: Description and Operation 545RFE Automatic Transmission Description DESCRIPTION The TCM utilizes a closed-loop system to control transmission line pressure. The system contains a variable force style solenoid, the Pressure Control Solenoid, which is part of the pressure switch assembly. The solenoid is duty cycle controlled by the TCM to vent the unnecessary line pressure supplied by the oil pump back to the pump inlet. The system contains a Line Pressure Sensor, which is a direct input to the TCM. The line pressure sensor monitors the transmission line pressure and completes the feedback loop to the TCM. The TCM uses this information to adjust its control of the pressure control solenoid to achieve the desired line pressure. Operation OPERATION The TCM calculates the desired line pressure based upon inputs from the transmission and engine. The TCM calculates the torque input to the transmission and uses that information as the primary input to the calculation. The line pressure is set to a predetermined value during shifts, to ensure consistent shift quality. During all other operation, the desired line pressure value is adjusted based on torque level and other transmission requirements. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 6899 Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch: Description and Operation 68RFE Automatic Transmission Description DESCRIPTION The TCM utilizes a closed-loop system to control transmission line pressure. The system contains a variable force style solenoid, the Pressure Control Solenoid, which is part of the pressure switch assembly. The solenoid is duty cycle controlled by the TCM to vent the unnecessary line pressure supplied by the oil pump back to the pump inlet. The system contains a Line Pressure Sensor, which is a direct input to the TCM. The line pressure sensor monitors the transmission line pressure and completes the feedback loop to the TCM. The TCM uses this information to adjust its control of the pressure control solenoid to achieve the desired line pressure. Operation OPERATION The TCM calculates the desired line pressure based upon inputs from the transmission and engine. The TCM calculates the torque input to the transmission and uses that information as the primary input to the calculation. The line pressure is set to a predetermined value during shifts, to ensure consistent shift quality. During all other operation, the desired line pressure value is adjusted based on torque level and other transmission requirements. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 42RLE Automatic Transmission Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch: Service and Repair 42RLE Automatic Transmission Removal REMOVAL 1. Remove the valve body from the transmission. See: Valve Body/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/42RLE Automatic Transmission/Removal 2. Remove the electrical connectors from the pressure control solenoid (1) and the line pressure sensor (2). 3. Remove the screws (6) holding the pressure control solenoid (1) and line pressure sensor (2) to the valve body. 4. Remove the pressure control solenoid and line pressure sensor from the valve body. Installation INSTALLATION 1. Install the pressure control solenoid (1) and line pressure sensor (2) into the valve body. 2. Install the screws (6) to hold the pressure control solenoid (1) and line pressure sensor (2) to the valve body. 3. Install the electrical connectors to the pressure control solenoid (1) and the line pressure sensor (2). 4. Install the valve body into the transmission. See: Valve Body/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/42RLE Automatic Transmission/Installation Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 6902 Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch: Service and Repair 545RFE Automatic Transmission Removal REMOVAL 1. Raise vehicle. 2. Place a suitable fluid catch pan under the transmission. 3. Remove the wiring connector from the line pressure sensor (2). 4. Remove the bolt holding the line pressure sensor (2) to the transmission case. 5. Remove the line pressure sensor (2) from the transmission case. Installation INSTALLATION 1. Install the line pressure sensor (2) into the transmission case. 2. Install the bolt to hold the line pressure sensor (2) into the transmission case. Tighten the bolt to 12 Nm (105 in.lbs.). 3. Install the wiring connector onto the line pressure sensor (2). 4. Verify the transmission fluid level. Add fluid as necessary. 5. Lower vehicle. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 6903 Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch: Service and Repair 68RFE Automatic Transmission Removal REMOVAL 1. Raise vehicle. 2. Place a suitable fluid catch pan under the transmission. 3. Remove the wiring connector from the line pressure sensor (2). 4. Remove the bolt holding the line pressure sensor (2) to the transmission case. 5. Remove the line pressure sensor (2) from the transmission case. Installation INSTALLATION 1. Install the line pressure sensor (2) into the transmission case. 2. Install the bolt to hold the line pressure sensor (2) into the transmission case. Tighten the bolt to 12 Nm (105 in.lbs.). 3. Install the wiring connector onto the line pressure sensor (2). 4. Verify the transmission fluid level. Add fluid as necessary. 5. Lower vehicle. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Governor, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Governor: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION Governor pressure is controlled electronically. Components used for governor pressure control include: - Governor body - Valve body transfer plate - Governor pressure solenoid valve - Governor pressure sensor - Fluid temperature thermistor - Throttle position sensor (TPS) - Transmission speed sensor - Powertrain control module (PCM) GOVERNOR PRESSURE SOLENOID VALVE The solenoid valve (2) is a duty-cycle solenoid which regulates the governor pressure needed for upshifts and downshifts. It is an electro-hydraulic device located in the governor body on the valve body transfer plate. GOVERNOR BODY, TRANSFER PLATE, AND PRESSURE SENSOR The governor pressure sensor (2) measures output pressure of the governor pressure solenoid valve. The transfer plate is designed to supply transmission line pressure to the governor pressure solenoid valve and to return governor pressure. The governor pressure solenoid valve is mounted in the governor body (1). The body is bolted to the lower side of the transfer plate. GOVERNOR PRESSURE CURVES There are four governor pressure curves programmed into the transmission control module. The different curves allow the control module to adjust governor pressure for varying conditions. One curve is used for operation when fluid temperature is at, or below, -1°C (30°F). A second curve is used when fluid temperature is at, or above, 10°C (50°F) during normal city or highway driving. A third curve is used during wide-open throttle operation. The fourth curve is used when driving with the transfer case in low range. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Governor, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 6908 Governor: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION Compensation is required for performance variations of two of the input devices. Though the slope of the transfer functions is tightly controlled, offset may vary due to various environmental factors or manufacturing tolerances. The pressure transducer is affected by barometric pressure as well as temperature. Calibration of the zero pressure offset is required to compensate for shifting output due to these factors. Normal calibration will be performed when sump temperature is above 50 degrees F, or in the absence of sump temperature data, after the first 10 minutes of vehicle operation. Calibration of the pressure transducer offset occurs each time the output shaft speed falls below 200 RPM. Calibration shall be repeated each 3 seconds the output shaft speed is below 200 RPM. A 0.5 second pulse of 95% duty cycle is applied to the governor pressure solenoid valve and the transducer output is read during this pulse. Averaging of the transducer signal is necessary to reject electrical noise. Under cold conditions (below 50 degrees F sump), the governor pressure solenoid valve response may be too slow to guarantee 0 psi during the 0.5 second calibration pulse. Calibration pulses are continued during this period, however the transducer output valves are discarded. Transducer offset must be read at key-on, under conditions which promote a stable reading. This value is retained and becomes the offset during the "cold" period of operation. GOVERNOR PRESSURE SOLENOID VALVE The inlet side of the solenoid valve is exposed to normal transmission line pressure. The outlet side of the valve leads to the valve body governor circuit. The solenoid valve regulates line pressure to produce governor pressure. The average current supplied to the solenoid controls governor pressure. One amp current produces zero kPa/psi governor pressure. Zero amps sets the maximum governor pressure. The powertrain control module (PCM) turns on the trans control relay which supplies electrical power to the solenoid valve. Operating voltage is 12 volts (DC). The PCM controls the ground side of the solenoid using the governor pressure solenoid control circuit. GOVERNOR PRESSURE SENSOR The sensor output signal provides the necessary feedback to the PCM. This feedback is needed to adequately control governor pressure. GOVERNOR BODY AND TRANSFER PLATE The transfer plate channels line pressure to the solenoid valve through the governor body. It also channels governor pressure from the solenoid valve to the governor circuit. It is the solenoid valve that develops the necessary governor pressure. GOVERNOR PRESSURE CURVES LOW TRANSMISSION FLUID TEMPERATURE When the transmission fluid is cold the conventional governor can delay shifts, resulting in higher than normal shift speeds and harsh shifts. The electronically controlled low temperature governor pressure curve is higher than normal to make the transmission shift at normal speeds and sooner. The PCM uses a temperature sensor in the transmission oil sump to determine when low temperature governor pressure is needed. NORMAL OPERATION Normal operation is refined through the increased computing power of the PCM and through access to data on engine operating conditions provided by the PCM that were not available with the previous stand-alone electronic module. This facilitated the development of a load adaptive shift strategy - the ability to alter the shift schedule in response to vehicle load condition. One manifestation of this capability is grade "hunting" prevention - the ability of the transmission logic to delay an upshift on a grade if the engine does not have sufficient power to maintain speed in the higher gear. The 3-2 downshift and the potential for hunting between gears occurs with a heavily loaded vehicle or on steep grades. When hunting occurs, it is very objectionable because shifts are frequent and accompanied by large changes in noise and acceleration. WIDE OPEN THROTTLE OPERATION In wide-open throttle (WOT) mode, adaptive memory in the PCM assures that up-shifts occur at the preprogrammed optimum speed. WOT operation is determined from the throttle position sensor, which is also a part of the emission control system. The initial setting for the WOT upshift is below the optimum engine speed. As WOT shifts are repeated, the PCM learns the time required to complete the shifts by comparing the engine speed when the shifts occur to the optimum speed. After each shift, the PCM adjusts the shift point until the optimum speed is reached. The PCM also considers vehicle loading, grade and engine performance changes due to high altitude in determining when to make WOT shifts. It does this by measuring vehicle and engine acceleration and then factoring in the shift time. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Governor, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 6909 TRANSFER CASE LOW RANGE OPERATION On four-wheel drive vehicles operating in low range, the engine can accelerate to its peak more rapidly than in Normal range, resulting in delayed shifts and undesirable engine "flare." The low range governor pressure curve is also higher than normal to initiate upshifts sooner. The PCM compares electronic vehicle speed signal used by the speedometer to the transmission output shaft speed signal to determine when the transfer case is in low range. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Governor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Governor: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL 1. Hoist and support vehicle on safety stands. 2. Remove transmission fluid pan and filter. 3. Disengage wire connectors from pressure sensor (1) and solenoid (2). 4. Remove screws holding pressure solenoid retainer (1) to governor body (2). 5. Separate solenoid retainer from governor. 6. Pull solenoid (1) from governor body (3). 7. Pull pressure sensor from governor body. 8. Remove bolts holding governor body to valve body. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Governor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 6912 9. Separate governor body (1) from valve body. 10. Remove governor body gasket. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Governor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 6913 Governor: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION Before installing the pressure sensor and solenoid in the governor body, replace o-ring seals, clean the gasket surfaces and replace gasket. 1. Place gasket (2) in position on back of governor body (1). 2. Place governor body in position on valve body. 3. Install bolts to hold governor body to valve body. 4. Lubricate o-ring on pressure sensor with transmission fluid. 5. Align pressure sensor to bore in governor body. 6. Push pressure sensor into governor body. 7. Lubricate o-ring (2), on pressure solenoid (1), with transmission fluid. 8. Align pressure solenoid (1) to bore in governor body (3). 9. Push solenoid into governor body. 10. Place solenoid retainer (1) in position on governor (2). 11. Install screws to hold pressure solenoid retainer to governor body. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Governor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 6914 12. Engage wire connectors into pressure sensor (1) and solenoid (2). 13. Install transmission fluid pan and (new) filter. 14. Lower vehicle and road test to verify repair. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Lamps and Indicators A/T > Overdrive Indicator Lamp > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Overdrive Indicator Lamp: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION An overdrive off indicator is standard equipment on all instrument clusters. However, on vehicles not equipped with an optional overdrive automatic transmission, this indicator is electronically disabled. This indicator is located on the right side of the instrument cluster, to the right of the coolant temperature gauge. The overdrive off indicator consists of a stencil-like cutout of the text O/D OFF in the opaque layer of the instrument cluster overlay. The dark outer layer of the overlay prevents the indicator from being clearly visible when it is not illuminated. An amber Light Emitting Diode (LED) behind the cutout in the opaque layer of the overlay causes the indicator to appear in amber through the translucent outer layer of the overlay when it is illuminated from behind by the LED, which is soldered onto the instrument cluster electronic circuit board. When the exterior lighting is turned ON, the illumination intensity of the overdrive off indicator is dimmable, which is adjusted along with the cluster general illumination lighting using the panel lamps dimmer thumbwheel on the headlamp switch. The overdrive off indicator is serviced as a unit with the instrument cluster. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Lamps and Indicators A/T > Overdrive Indicator Lamp > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 6920 Overdrive Indicator Lamp: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The overdrive off indicator gives an indication to the vehicle operator when the overdrive-OFF position of the tow/haul switch has been selected, disabling the electronically controlled overdrive feature of the automatic transmission. This indicator is controlled by a transistor on the instrument cluster circuit board based upon cluster programming and electronic messages received by the cluster from the Powertrain Control Module (PCM) over the Controller Area Network (CAN) data bus. The overdrive off indicator Light Emitting Diode (LED) is completely controlled by the instrument cluster logic circuit, and that logic will only allow this indicator to operate when the instrument cluster receives a battery current input on the fused ignition switch output (run-start) circuit. Therefore, the LED will always be OFF when the ignition switch is in any position except ON or START. The LED only illuminates when it is provided a path to ground by the instrument cluster transistor. The instrument cluster will turn ON the overdrive off indicator for the following reasons: - Overdrive Off Indicator Lamp-On Message - Each time the cluster receives an electronic overdrive off indicator lamp-ON message from the PCM indicating that the overdrive-OFF position of the tow/haul switch has been selected, the indicator will be illuminated. The indicator remains illuminated until the cluster receives a lamp-OFF message from the PCM, or until the ignition switch is turned to the OFF position, whichever occurs first. Actuator Test - Each time the cluster is put through the actuator test, the overdrive off indicator will be turned ON, then OFF again during the bulb check portion of the test to confirm the functionality of the LED and the cluster control circuitry. The PCM continually monitors the tow/haul switch to determine the proper outputs to the automatic transmission. The PCM then sends the proper lamp-ON or lamp-OFF message to the ElectroMechanical Instrument Cluster (EMIC) (also known as the Cab Compartment Node/CCN). For further diagnosis of the overdrive off indicator or the instrument cluster circuitry that controls the indicator, Refer to appropriate testing. For proper diagnosis of the transmission control system, the PCM, the EMIC, the CAN data bus or the electronic communication related to overdrive off indicator operation a diagnostic scan tool is required. Refer to the appropriate diagnostic information. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Lamps and Indicators A/T > Temperature Warning Indicator - A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Temperature Warning Indicator - A/T: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION A transmission over-temperature indicator is standard equipment on all instrument clusters. However, on vehicles not equipped with an optional automatic transmission, this indicator is electronically disabled. This indicator is located in the lower portion of the tachometer dial face in the instrument cluster overlay. The transmission over-temperature indicator consists of a stencil-like cutout of the International Control and Display Symbol icon for Transmission Temperature in the opaque layer of the instrument cluster overlay. The dark outer layer of the overlay prevents the indicator from being clearly visible when it is not illuminated. A red Light Emitting Diode (LED) behind the cutout in the opaque layer of the overlay causes the indicator to appear in red through the translucent outer layer of the overlay when it is illuminated from behind by the LED, which is soldered onto the instrument cluster electronic circuit board. The transmission over-temperature indicator is serviced as a unit with the instrument cluster. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Lamps and Indicators A/T > Temperature Warning Indicator - A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 6925 Temperature Warning Indicator - A/T: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The transmission over-temperature indicator gives an indication to the vehicle operator when the transmission fluid temperature is excessive, which may lead to accelerated transmission component wear or failure. This indicator is controlled by a transistor on the instrument cluster circuit board based upon cluster programming and electronic messages received over the Controller Area Network (CAN) data bus from the Powertrain Control Module (PCM). The transmission over-temperature indicator Light Emitting Diode (LED) is completely controlled by the instrument cluster logic circuit, and that logic will only allow this indicator to operate when the instrument cluster receives a battery current input on the fused ignition switch output (run-start) circuit. Therefore, the LED will always be OFF when the ignition switch is in any position except ON or START. The LED only illuminates when it is provided a path to ground by the instrument cluster transistor. The instrument cluster will turn ON the transmission over-temperature indicator for the following reasons: - Bulb Test - Each time the ignition switch is turned to the ON position the transmission over-temperature indicator is illuminated for about two seconds as a bulb test. - Trans Over-Temp Indicator Lamp-On Message - Each time the cluster receives an electronic trans over-temp indicator lamp-ON message from the PCM indicating that the transmission fluid temperature is 135 °C (275 °F) or higher, the indicator will be illuminated and a single chime tone is sounded. The indicator remains illuminated until the cluster receives a lamp-OFF message from the PCM, or until the ignition switch is turned to the OFF position, whichever occurs first. The chime tone feature will only repeat during the same ignition cycle if the indicator is cycled OFF and then ON again by the appropriate lamp-ON and lamp-OFF messages from the PCM. - Actuator Test - Each time the cluster is put through the actuator test, the transmission over-temperature indicator will be turned ON, then OFF again during the bulb check portion of the test to confirm the functionality of the LED and the cluster control circuitry. The PCM continually monitors the transmission temperature sensor to determine the transmission operating condition. The PCM then sends the proper lamp-ON or lamp-OFF message to the ElectroMechanical Instrument Cluster (EMIC) (also known as the Cab Compartment Node/CCN). If the instrument cluster illuminates the transmission over-temperature indicator due to a high transmission oil temperature condition, it may indicate that the transmission or the transmission cooling system are being overloaded, or that they require service. For further diagnosis of the transmission over-temperature indicator or the instrument cluster circuitry that controls the LED, Refer to appropriate testing. For proper diagnosis of the transmission temperature sensor, the PCM, the EMIC, the CAN data bus or the electronic communication related to transmission over-temperature indicator operation a diagnostic scan tool is required. Refer to the appropriate diagnostic information. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Lamps and Indicators A/T > Transmission Mode Indicator - A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Transmission Mode Indicator - A/T: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION An electronic automatic transmission gear selector indicator is standard factory-installed equipment on this vehicle. However, on vehicles not equipped with an optional automatic transmission, this indicator is electronically disabled. The gear selector indicator information is displayed in an electronic, blue-green Vacuum-Fluorescent Display (VFD) unit. This VFD unit is soldered onto the cluster electronic circuit board and is visible through a window with a smoked clear lens located on the lower edge of the speedometer dial face of the cluster overlay. The dark lens over the VFD prevents the indicator from being clearly visible when it is not illuminated. The gear selector indicator displays the following characters from left to right: P, R, N, D, 2, and 1. Each character appears in a blue-green color and at the same lighting level as the odometer information. Respectively, these characters represent the PARK, REVERSE, NEUTRAL, DRIVE, second gear, and first gear positions of the transmission gear selector lever on the steering column. The indicator illuminates a rectangular box around the character that represents the currently selected lever position. During daylight hours (exterior lamps are OFF) the gear selector indicator is illuminated at full brightness for clear visibility. At night (exterior lamps are ON), the indicator lighting level is adjusted with the other cluster general illumination lamps using the panel lamps dimmer thumbwheel on the headlamp switch. However, a PARADE mode position of the panel lamps dimmer thumbwheel allows the indicator to be illuminated at full brightness if the exterior lamps are turned ON during daylight hours. The gear selector indicator is serviced as a unit with the VFD unit in the instrument cluster. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Lamps and Indicators A/T > Transmission Mode Indicator - A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 6930 Transmission Mode Indicator - A/T: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The electronic gear selector indicator gives an indication to the vehicle operator of the transmission gear that has been selected with the automatic transmission gear selector lever. This indicator is controlled by the instrument cluster circuit board based upon cluster programming. The cluster circuitry automatically configures itself for the proper transmission type based upon the hard wired transmission range sensor mux circuit input to the cluster. The gear selector indicator information is displayed by the odometer/trip odometer Vacuum Fluorescent Display (VFD) unit soldered onto the instrument cluster electronic circuit board, and the VFD will not display the gear selector indicator information after the ignition switch is turned to the OFF position. Each time the cluster is disconnected from battery current for more than about five minutes, it must configure itself for the automatic transmission type that is in the vehicle once it is reconnected to battery current. The instrument cluster circuitry configures the gear selector indicator based upon the following inputs from the transmission range sensor: - Open Circuit - If the cluster is configured for an automatic transmission and the transmission range sensor mux circuit is open, the cluster circuitry controls the gear selector indicator display based upon an electronic selected gear message received from the Transmission Control Module (TCM) over the Controller Area Network (CAN) data bus. If the Transmission Range Sensor (TRS) mux circuit is open and no electronic selected gear messages are received from the TCM within two seconds, the instrument cluster circuitry will not display any gear selector position until the condition is resolved or until the ignition switch is turned to the OFF position, whichever occurs first. - Resolved Circuit - If the transmission range sensor mux circuit is resolved, the cluster circuitry controls the gear selector indicator display based upon the resistance value of the hard wired input from the TRS. If the cluster is configured for an automatic transmission with a TRS input and detects a short to ground or an open in the TRS mux input, the instrument cluster circuitry will not display any gear selector position in the VFD. The VFD display for the short-to-ground and open circuit conditions will continue until the condition is resolved or until the ignition switch is turned to the OFF position, whichever occurs first. - Actuator Test - Each time the cluster is put through the actuator test, the odometer/trip odometer VFD will display all of its characters at once, then step through each character segment individually during the VFD portion of the test to confirm the functionality of the VFD and the cluster control circuitry. On vehicles with a TCM, the TCM continually monitors the TRS, then sends the proper message to the ElectroMechanical Instrument Cluster (EMIC) (also known as the Cab Compartment Node/CCN). On vehicles without a TCM, the EMIC continually monitors the hard wired TRS multiplexed input. On vehicles with a TCM, for proper diagnosis of the TRS, the TCM, the EMIC, the CAN data bus or the electronic communication related to gear selector indicator operation a diagnostic scan tool is required. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Overdrive Assembly, A/T > Overdrive Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > 42RLE Automatic Transmission Overdrive Solenoid: Description and Operation 42RLE Automatic Transmission Description DESCRIPTION The Solenoid/Pressure Switch Assembly (1) is inside the transmission and mounted to the valve body assembly. The assembly consists of four solenoids that control hydraulic pressure to the L/R, 2/4, OD, and UD friction elements (transmission clutches), and the torque converter clutch. The reverse clutch is controlled by line pressure from the manual valve in the valve body. The solenoids are contained within the Solenoid/Pressure Switch Assembly, and can only be serviced by replacing the assembly. The solenoid assembly also contains pressure switches that monitor and send hydraulic circuit information to the TCM. Likewise, the pressure switches can only be service by replacing the assembly. Operation OPERATION SOLENOIDS The solenoids receive electrical power from the Transmission Control Relay through a single wire. The TCM energizes or operates the solenoids individually by grounding the return wire of the solenoid needed. When a solenoid is energized, the solenoid valve shifts, and a fluid passage is opened or closed (vented or applied), depending on its default operating state. The result is an apply or release of a frictional element. The 2/4 and UD solenoids are normally applied, which allows fluid to pass through in their relaxed or "off" state. By design, this allows transmission limp-in (P,R,N,2) in the event of an electrical failure. The continuity of the solenoids and circuits are periodically tested. Each solenoid is turned on or off depending on its current state. An inductive spike should be detected by the TCM during this test. If no spike is detected, the circuit is tested again to verify the failure. In addition to the periodic testing, the solenoid circuits are tested if a speed ratio or pressure switch error occurs. PRESSURE SWITCHES The TCM relies on three pressure switches to monitor fluid pressure in the L/R, 2/4, and OD hydraulic circuits. The primary purpose of these switches is to help the TCM detect when clutch circuit hydraulic failures occur. The range for the pressure switch closing and opening points is 11-23 psi. Typically the switch opening point will be approximately one psi lower than the closing point. For example, a switch may close at 18 psi and open at 17 psi. The switches are continuously monitored by the TCM for the correct states (open or closed) in each gear as shown in the following chart: Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Overdrive Assembly, A/T > Overdrive Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 6936 A Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) will set if the TCM senses any switch open or closed at the wrong time in a given gear. The TCM also tests the 2/4 and OD pressure switches when they are normally off (OD and 2/4 are tested in 1st gear, OD in 2nd gear, and 2/4 in 3rd gear). The test simply verifies that they are operational, by looking for a closed state when the corresponding element is applied. Immediately after a shift into 1st, 2nd, or 3rd gear with the engine speed above 1000 rpm, the TCM momentarily turns on element pressure to the 2/4 and/or OD clutch circuits to identify that the appropriate switch has closed. If it doesn't close, it is tested again. If the switch fails to close the second time, the appropriate Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) will set. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Overdrive Assembly, A/T > Overdrive Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 6937 Overdrive Solenoid: Description and Operation 545RFE Automatic Transmission Description DESCRIPTION The transmission solenoid/TRS assembly is internal to the transmission and mounted on the valve body assembly. The assembly consists of six solenoids that control hydraulic pressure to the six friction elements (transmission clutches), and the torque converter clutch. The pressure control solenoid is located on the side of the solenoid/TRS assembly. The solenoid/TRS assembly also contains the Transmission Range Sensor (TRS) and five pressure switches that feed information to the TCM. Operation OPERATION SOLENOIDS Solenoids are used to control the L/R, 2C, 4C, OD, and UD friction elements. The reverse clutch is controlled by line pressure and the position of the manual valve in the valve body. All the solenoids are contained within the Solenoid and Pressure Switch Assembly. The solenoid and pressure switch assembly contains one additional solenoid, Multi-Select (MS), which serves primarily to provide 2nd and 3rd gear limp-in operation. The solenoids receive electrical power from the Transmission Control Relay through a single wire. The TCM energizes or operates the solenoids individually by grounding the return wire of the solenoid as necessary. When a solenoid is energized, the solenoid valve shifts, and a fluid passage is opened or closed (vented or applied), depending on its default operating state. The result is an apply or release of a frictional element. The MS and UD solenoids are normally applied to allow transmission limp-in in the event of an electrical failure. The continuity of the solenoids and circuits are periodically tested. Each solenoid is turned on or off depending on its current state. An inductive spike should be detected by the TCM during this test. If no spike is detected, the circuit is tested again to verify the failure. In addition to the periodic testing, the solenoid circuits are tested if a speed ratio or pressure switch error occurs. PRESSURE SWITCHES The TCM relies on five pressure switches to monitor fluid pressure in the L/R, 2C, 4C, UD, and OD hydraulic circuits. The primary purpose of these switches is to help the TCM detect when clutch circuit hydraulic failures occur. The switches close at 23 psi and open at 11 psi, and simply indicate whether or not pressure exists. The switches are continuously monitored by the TCM for the correct states (open or closed) in each gear as shown in the following charts and 545RFE PRESSURE SWITCH STATES: Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Overdrive Assembly, A/T > Overdrive Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 6938 A Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) will set if the TCM senses any switch open or closed at the wrong time in a given gear. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Overdrive Assembly, A/T > Overdrive Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 6939 Overdrive Solenoid: Description and Operation 68RFE Automatic Transmission Description DESCRIPTION The transmission solenoid/TRS assembly is internal to the transmission and mounted on the valve body assembly. The assembly consists of six solenoids that control hydraulic pressure to the six friction elements (transmission clutches), and the torque converter clutch. The pressure control solenoid is located on the side of the solenoid/TRS assembly. The solenoid/TRS assembly also contains the Transmission Range Sensor (TRS) and five pressure switches that feed information to the TCM. Operation OPERATION SOLENOIDS Solenoids are used to control the L/R, 2C, 4C, OD, and UD friction elements. The reverse clutch is controlled by line pressure and the position of the manual valve in the valve body. All the solenoids are contained within the Solenoid and Pressure Switch Assembly. The solenoid and pressure switch assembly contains one additional solenoid, Multi-Select (MS), which serves primarily to provide 3rd gear and reverse limp-in operation. The TCM energizes or operates the solenoids individually by grounding the return wire of the solenoid as necessary. When a solenoid is energized, the solenoid valve shifts, and a fluid passage is opened or closed (vented or applied), depending on its default operating state. The result is an apply or release of a frictional element. The MS and UD solenoids are normally applied to allow transmission limp-in in the event of an electrical failure. The continuity of the solenoids and circuits are periodically tested. Each solenoid is turned on or off depending on its current state. An inductive spike should be detected by the TCM during this test. If no spike is detected, the circuit is tested again to verify the failure. In addition to the periodic testing, the solenoid circuits are tested if a speed ratio or pressure switch error occurs. PRESSURE SWITCHES The TCM relies on five pressure switches to monitor fluid pressure in the L/R, 2C, 4C, UD, and OD hydraulic circuits. The primary purpose of these switches is to help the TCM detect when clutch circuit hydraulic failures occur. The switches close at 23 psi and open at 11 psi, and simply indicate whether or not pressure exists. The switches are continuously monitored by the TCM for the correct states (open or closed) in each gear as shown in the following charts and Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Overdrive Assembly, A/T > Overdrive Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 6940 A Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) will set if the TCM senses any switch open or closed at the wrong time in a given gear. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Overdrive Assembly, A/T > Overdrive Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 42RLE Automatic Transmission Overdrive Solenoid: Service and Repair 42RLE Automatic Transmission Removal REMOVAL NOTE: If the Solenoid/Pressure Switch Assembly is being replaced, the Quick Learn Procedure must be performed. See: Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Transmission Control Module/TCM Quick Learn 1. Raise vehicle on hoist. 2. Remove valve body assembly from transmission. See: Valve Body/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/42RLE Automatic Transmission/Removal 3. Remove Solenoid/Pressure Switch Assembly retaining screws (2) from solenoid. 4. Remove Solenoid/Pressure Switch Assembly (1) and screen from valve body (2). Installation INSTALLATION NOTE: If the Solenoid/Pressure Switch assembly is being replaced, the Quick Learn Procedure must be performed. See: Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Transmission Control Module/TCM Quick Learn Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Overdrive Assembly, A/T > Overdrive Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 6943 1. Install Solenoid/Pressure Switch Assembly (1) and screen (3) to the separator and transfer plates. 2. Install and tighten retaining screws (2) to 5.5 Nm (50 in. lbs.) torque. 3. Install valve body. See: Valve Body/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/42RLE Automatic Transmission/Installation Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Overdrive Assembly, A/T > Overdrive Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 6944 Overdrive Solenoid: Service and Repair 545RFE Automatic Transmission Removal REMOVAL NOTE: If the Transmission Solenoid/TRS Assembly is being replaced, the Quick Learn Procedure must be performed. See: Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Transmission Control Module/TCM Quick Learn 1. Remove the valve body from the transmission. See: Valve Body/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/545RFE Automatic Transmission/Removal 2. Remove the bolts (1) holding the transmission solenoid/TRS assembly onto the valve body. 3. Separate the transmission solenoid/TRS assembly from the valve body. Installation INSTALLATION Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Overdrive Assembly, A/T > Overdrive Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 6945 1. Place TRS selector plate in the PARK position. 2. Position the transmission solenoid/TRS assembly onto the valve body. Be sure that both alignment dowels are fully seated in the valve body and that the TRS switch contacts are properly positioned in the selector plate 3. Install the bolts (1) to hold the transmission solenoid/TRS assembly onto the valve body. 4. Tighten the solenoid assembly screws adjacent to the arrows cast into the bottom of the valve body first. Tighten the screws to 6 Nm (50 in.lbs.). 5. Tighten the remainder of the solenoid assembly screws to 6 Nm (50 in.lbs.). 6. Install the valve body into the transmission. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Overdrive Assembly, A/T > Overdrive Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 6946 Overdrive Solenoid: Service and Repair 68RFE Automatic Transmission Removal REMOVAL NOTE: If the Transmission Solenoid/TRS Assembly is being replaced, the Quick Learn Procedure must be performed. See: Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Transmission Control Module/TCM Quick Learn 1. Remove the valve body from the transmission. 2. Remove the bolts (1) holding the transmission solenoid/TRS assembly onto the valve body. 3. Separate the transmission solenoid/TRS assembly from the valve body. Installation INSTALLATION Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Overdrive Assembly, A/T > Overdrive Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 6947 1. Place TRS selector plate in the PARK position. 2. Position the transmission solenoid/TRS assembly onto the valve body. Be sure that both alignment dowels are fully seated in the valve body and that the TRS switch contacts are properly positioned in the selector plate 3. Install the bolts (1) to hold the transmission solenoid/TRS assembly onto the valve body. 4. Tighten the solenoid assembly screws adjacent to the arrows cast into the bottom of the valve body first. Tighten the screws to 6 Nm (50 in.lbs.). 5. Tighten the remainder of the solenoid assembly screws to 6 Nm (50 in.lbs.). 6. Install the valve body into the transmission. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Overdrive Indicator Lamp > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Overdrive Indicator Lamp: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION An overdrive off indicator is standard equipment on all instrument clusters. However, on vehicles not equipped with an optional overdrive automatic transmission, this indicator is electronically disabled. This indicator is located on the right side of the instrument cluster, to the right of the coolant temperature gauge. The overdrive off indicator consists of a stencil-like cutout of the text O/D OFF in the opaque layer of the instrument cluster overlay. The dark outer layer of the overlay prevents the indicator from being clearly visible when it is not illuminated. An amber Light Emitting Diode (LED) behind the cutout in the opaque layer of the overlay causes the indicator to appear in amber through the translucent outer layer of the overlay when it is illuminated from behind by the LED, which is soldered onto the instrument cluster electronic circuit board. When the exterior lighting is turned ON, the illumination intensity of the overdrive off indicator is dimmable, which is adjusted along with the cluster general illumination lighting using the panel lamps dimmer thumbwheel on the headlamp switch. The overdrive off indicator is serviced as a unit with the instrument cluster. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Overdrive Indicator Lamp > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 6952 Overdrive Indicator Lamp: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The overdrive off indicator gives an indication to the vehicle operator when the overdrive-OFF position of the tow/haul switch has been selected, disabling the electronically controlled overdrive feature of the automatic transmission. This indicator is controlled by a transistor on the instrument cluster circuit board based upon cluster programming and electronic messages received by the cluster from the Powertrain Control Module (PCM) over the Controller Area Network (CAN) data bus. The overdrive off indicator Light Emitting Diode (LED) is completely controlled by the instrument cluster logic circuit, and that logic will only allow this indicator to operate when the instrument cluster receives a battery current input on the fused ignition switch output (run-start) circuit. Therefore, the LED will always be OFF when the ignition switch is in any position except ON or START. The LED only illuminates when it is provided a path to ground by the instrument cluster transistor. The instrument cluster will turn ON the overdrive off indicator for the following reasons: - Overdrive Off Indicator Lamp-On Message - Each time the cluster receives an electronic overdrive off indicator lamp-ON message from the PCM indicating that the overdrive-OFF position of the tow/haul switch has been selected, the indicator will be illuminated. The indicator remains illuminated until the cluster receives a lamp-OFF message from the PCM, or until the ignition switch is turned to the OFF position, whichever occurs first. Actuator Test - Each time the cluster is put through the actuator test, the overdrive off indicator will be turned ON, then OFF again during the bulb check portion of the test to confirm the functionality of the LED and the cluster control circuitry. The PCM continually monitors the tow/haul switch to determine the proper outputs to the automatic transmission. The PCM then sends the proper lamp-ON or lamp-OFF message to the ElectroMechanical Instrument Cluster (EMIC) (also known as the Cab Compartment Node/CCN). For further diagnosis of the overdrive off indicator or the instrument cluster circuitry that controls the indicator, Refer to appropriate testing. For proper diagnosis of the transmission control system, the PCM, the EMIC, the CAN data bus or the electronic communication related to overdrive off indicator operation a diagnostic scan tool is required. Refer to the appropriate diagnostic information. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Overdrive Switch, A/T > Component Information > Locations Overdrive Switch: Locations Component ID: 514 Component : SWITCH-TOW/HAUL OVERDRIVE OFF Connector: Name : SWITCH-TOW/HAUL OVERDRIVE OFF Color : NATURAL # of pins : 6 Pin Circuit Description 123 T6 20DG TOW/HAUL OVERDRIVE OFF SWITCH SIGNAL 4 Z71 20LB/BK GROUND 5 T5 20DG/YL AUTOSTICK (ERS)-TOW/HAUL SIGNAL 6 T160 20DG/WT SENSOR GROUND Component Location - 47 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Overdrive Switch, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 6956 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Overdrive Switch, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 6957 Overdrive Switch: Diagrams Component ID: 514 Component : SWITCH-TOW/HAUL OVERDRIVE OFF Connector: Name : SWITCH-TOW/HAUL OVERDRIVE OFF Color : NATURAL # of pins : 6 Pin Circuit Description 123 T6 20DG TOW/HAUL OVERDRIVE OFF SWITCH SIGNAL 4 Z71 20LB/BK GROUND 5 T5 20DG/YL AUTOSTICK (ERS)-TOW/HAUL SIGNAL 6 T160 20DG/WT SENSOR GROUND Component Location - 47 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Overdrive Switch, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 6958 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Overdrive Switch, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 6959 Overdrive Switch: Testing and Inspection DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING - OVERDRIVE ELECTRICAL CONTROLS The tow/haul overdrive off switch, valve body solenoid, case connectors and related wiring can all be tested with a 12 volt test lamp or a volt/ohmmeter. Check continuity of each component when diagnosis indicates this is necessary. Switch and solenoid continuity should be checked whenever the transmission fails to shift into fourth gear range. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Overdrive Switch, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 42RLE Automatic Transmission Overdrive Switch: Service and Repair 42RLE Automatic Transmission Removal REMOVAL 1. Using a plastic trim tool, remove the tow/haul overdrive off switch retainer (2) from the shift lever (1). 2. Pull the switch (2) outwards to release it from the connector in the lever (1). Installation INSTALLATION NOTE: There is enough slack in the wire to pull out the connector from the lever. 1. Pull the connector (2) out of the lever (1) just enough to grasp it. CAUTION: Be careful not to bend the pins on the tow/haul overdrive off switch. Use care when installing the switch, as it is not indexed, and can be accidentally installed incorrectly. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Overdrive Switch, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 6962 2. Install the tow/haul overdrive off switch (3) into the connector (2). 3. Push the tow/haul overdrive off switch (3) and wiring into the shift lever (1). 4. Install the tow/haul overdrive off switch retainer onto the shift lever. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Overdrive Switch, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 6963 Overdrive Switch: Service and Repair 545RFE Automatic Transmission Removal REMOVAL 1. Using a plastic trim tool, remove the tow/haul overdrive off switch retainer (2) from the shift lever (1). 2. Pull the switch (2) outwards to release it from the connector in the lever (1). Installation INSTALLATION NOTE: There is enough slack in the wire to pull out the connector from the lever. 1. Pull the connector (2) out of the lever (1) just enough to grasp it. CAUTION: Be careful not to bend the pins on the tow/haul overdrive off switch. Use care when installing the switch, as it is not indexed, and can be accidentally installed incorrectly. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Overdrive Switch, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 6964 2. Install the tow/haul overdrive off switch (3) into the connector (2). 3. Push the tow/haul overdrive off switch (3) and wiring into the shift lever (1). 4. Install the tow/haul overdrive off switch retainer onto the shift lever. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Overdrive Switch, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 6965 Overdrive Switch: Service and Repair 48RE Automatic Transmission Removal REMOVAL 1. Using a plastic trim tool, remove the tow/haul overdrive off switch retainer (2) from the shift lever (1). 2. Pull the switch (2) outwards to release it from the connector in the lever (1). Installation INSTALLATION NOTE: There is enough slack in the wire to pull out the connector from the lever. 1. Pull the connector (2) out of the lever (1) just enough to grasp it. CAUTION: Be careful not to bend the pins on the tow/haul overdrive off switch. Use care when installing the switch, as it is not indexed, and can be accidentally installed incorrectly. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Overdrive Switch, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 6966 2. Install the tow/haul overdrive off switch (3) into the connector (2). 3. Push the tow/haul overdrive off switch (3) and wiring into the shift lever (1). 4. Install the tow/haul overdrive off switch retainer onto the shift lever. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Overdrive Switch, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 6967 Overdrive Switch: Service and Repair AS68RC Automatic Transmission Removal REMOVAL 1. Using a plastic trim tool, remove the tow/haul overdrive off switch retainer (2) from the shift lever (1). 2. Pull the switch (2) outwards to release it from the connector in the lever (1). Installation INSTALLATION NOTE: There is enough slack in the wire to pull out the connector from the lever. 1. Pull the connector (2) out of the lever (1) just enough to grasp it. CAUTION: Be careful not to bend the pins on the tow/haul overdrive off switch. Use care when installing the switch, as it is not indexed, and can be accidentally installed incorrectly. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Overdrive Switch, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 6968 2. Install the tow/haul overdrive off switch (3) into the connector (2). 3. Push the tow/haul overdrive off switch (3) and wiring into the shift lever (1). 4. Install the tow/haul overdrive off switch retainer onto the shift lever. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Assembly-Line Pressure Sensor/Variable Force Solenoid Pressure Regulating Solenoid: Locations Assembly-Line Pressure Sensor/Variable Force Solenoid Component ID: 17 Component : ASSEMBLY-LINE PRESSURE SENSOR/VARIABLE FORCE SOLENOID Connector: Name : ASSEMBLY-LINE PRESSURE SENSOR/VARIABLE FORCE SOLENOID Color : BLACK # of pins : 6 Qualifier : (RLE) Pin Circuit Description 1-2 F856 20YL/PK 5 VOLT SUPPLY 3 T38 20YL/BR LINE PRESSURE SIGNAL 4 K900 20DB/DG SENSOR GROUND 5 T16 18YL/OR TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT 6 T118 20DG LP VFS CONTROL Component Location - 19 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Assembly-Line Pressure Sensor/Variable Force Solenoid > Page 6973 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Assembly-Line Pressure Sensor/Variable Force Solenoid > Page 6974 Pressure Regulating Solenoid: Locations Assembly-Transmission Solenoid Component ID 15 Component ID: 15 Component : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID Connector: Name : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID Color : # of pins : 8 Qualifier : (RE) Pin Circuit Description 1 T16 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT 2 F856 18YL/PK 5 VOLT SUPPLY 3 K900 20DB/DG SENSOR GROUND 4 T38 18YL/BR GOVERNOR PRESSURE SENSOR SIGNAL 5 T118 18DG GOVERNOR PRESSURE SOLENOID CONTROL 6 T9 18DG/TN 3-4 SOLENOID CONTROL 7 T75 18YL/LB TORQUE CONVERTER CLUTCH SOLENOID CONTROL 8 T54 18DG/OR TRANSMISSION TEMPERATURE SIGNAL Component Location - 20 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Assembly-Line Pressure Sensor/Variable Force Solenoid > Page 6975 Component Location - 26 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Assembly-Line Pressure Sensor/Variable Force Solenoid > Page 6976 Connector: Name : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID C1 Color : # of pins : 10 Qualifier : (RC) Pin Circuit Description 1 T806 20DG/VT PRESSURE SIGNAL 7 2 T804 20YL/DB PRESSURE SIGNAL 5 3 T54 20DG/OR TRANSMISSION TEMPERATURE SIGNAL 4 T817 20YL/BR LINEAR 3 CONTROL Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Assembly-Line Pressure Sensor/Variable Force Solenoid > Page 6977 5 T813 20DG/LG LINEAR 1 CONTROL 6 T807 20DG/WT PRESSURE SIGNAL 8 7 T803 20DG/BR PRESSURE SIGNAL 4 8 T820 20YL/WT TEMPERATURE SENSOR GROUND 9 T816 20YL/PK LINEAR 3 GROUND 10 T812 20DG/TN LINEAR 1 GROUND Component Location - 20 Component Location - 26 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Assembly-Line Pressure Sensor/Variable Force Solenoid > Page 6978 Connector: Name : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID C2 Color : # of pins : 12 Qualifier : (RC) Pin Circuit Description 1 T800 20DG/BR PRESSURE SIGNAL 1 2 T805 20DG/OR PRESSURE SIGNAL 6 3 T809 20DG/YL SHIFT 2 CONTROL 4 T811 20DG/LB SHIFT 4 CONTROL Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Assembly-Line Pressure Sensor/Variable Force Solenoid > Page 6979 5 T818 20YL/OR LINEAR 4 GROUND 6 T814 20YL/BR LINEAR 2 GROUND 7 T801 20DG/RD PRESSURE SIGNAL 2 8 T802 20DG/PK PRESSURE SIGNAL 3 9 T810 20DG/DB SHIFT 3 CONTROL 10 T808 20DG/GY SHIFT 1 CONTROL 11 T821 20YL/GY LINEAR 4 CONTROL 12 T815 20YL/RD LINEAR 2 CONTROL Component Location - 20 Component Location - 26 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Assembly-Line Pressure Sensor/Variable Force Solenoid > Page 6980 Component ID 19 Component ID: 19 Component : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID Connector: Name : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID Color : # of pins : 8 Qualifier : (RE) Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Assembly-Line Pressure Sensor/Variable Force Solenoid > Page 6981 Pin Circuit Description 1 T16 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT 2 F856 18YL/PK 5 VOLT SUPPLY 3 K900 20DB/DG SENSOR GROUND 4 T38 18YL/BR GOVERNOR PRESSURE SENSOR SIGNAL 5 T118 18DG GOVERNOR PRESSURE SOLENOID CONTROL 6 T9 18DG/TN 3-4 SOLENOID CONTROL 7 T75 18YL/LB TORQUE CONVERTER CLUTCH SOLENOID CONTROL 8 T54 18DG/OR TRANSMISSION TEMPERATURE SIGNAL Component Location - 20 Component Location - 26 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Assembly-Line Pressure Sensor/Variable Force Solenoid > Page 6982 Connector: Name : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID C1 Color : # of pins : 10 Qualifier : (RC) Pin Circuit Description 1 T806 20DG/VT PRESSURE SIGNAL 7 2 T804 20YL/DB PRESSURE SIGNAL 5 3 T54 20DG/OR TRANSMISSION TEMPERATURE SIGNAL 4 T817 20YL/BR LINEAR 3 CONTROL Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Assembly-Line Pressure Sensor/Variable Force Solenoid > Page 6983 5 T813 20DG/LG LINEAR 1 CONTROL 6 T807 20DG/WT PRESSURE SIGNAL 8 7 T803 20DG/BR PRESSURE SIGNAL 4 8 T820 20YL/WT TEMPERATURE SENSOR GROUND 9 T816 20YL/PK LINEAR 3 GROUND 10 T812 20DG/TN LINEAR 1 GROUND Component Location - 20 Component Location - 26 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Assembly-Line Pressure Sensor/Variable Force Solenoid > Page 6984 Connector: Name : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID C2 Color : # of pins : 12 Qualifier : (RC) Pin Circuit Description 1 T800 20DG/BR PRESSURE SIGNAL 1 2 T805 20DG/OR PRESSURE SIGNAL 6 3 T809 20DG/YL SHIFT 2 CONTROL 4 T811 20DG/LB SHIFT 4 CONTROL Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Assembly-Line Pressure Sensor/Variable Force Solenoid > Page 6985 5 T818 20YL/OR LINEAR 4 GROUND 6 T814 20YL/BR LINEAR 2 GROUND 7 T801 20DG/RD PRESSURE SIGNAL 2 8 T802 20DG/PK PRESSURE SIGNAL 3 9 T810 20DG/DB SHIFT 3 CONTROL 10 T808 20DG/GY SHIFT 1 CONTROL 11 T821 20YL/GY LINEAR 4 CONTROL 12 T815 20YL/RD LINEAR 2 CONTROL Component Location - 20 Component Location - 26 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Assembly-Line Pressure Sensor/Variable Force Solenoid > Page 6986 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Assembly-Line Pressure Sensor/Variable Force Solenoid > Page 6987 Pressure Regulating Solenoid: Locations Assembly-Transmission Solenoid/Pressure Switch Component ID: 20 Component : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID/PRESSURE SWITCH Connector: Name : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID/PRESSURE SWITCH Color : LT. BROWN # of pins : 10 Qualifier : (RLE) Pin Circuit Description 1 T60 20YL/GY OD CONTROL 2 T59 20YL/LB UD CONTROL 3 T16 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT 4 T19 18YL/DB 2-4 CONTROL 5 T47 18YL/DG 2-4 PRESSURE SIGNAL 6 T9 20DG/TN OD PRESSURE SIGNAL 7 T20 20DG/WT L/R CONTROL 8-9-10 T50 20YL/TN L/R PRESSURE SIGNAL Component Location - 19 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Assembly-Line Pressure Sensor/Variable Force Solenoid > Page 6988 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Assembly-Line Pressure Sensor/Variable Force Solenoid > Page 6989 Pressure Regulating Solenoid: Locations Assembly-Transmission Solenoid/TRS Component ID: 21 Component : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID/TRS Connector: Name : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID/TRS Color : BLACK # of pins : 23 Qualifier : (RFE) Pin Circuit Description 1-2 T20 20DG/WT L/R CONTROL 3-4 T41 20YL/DB TRS T41 SIGNAL (P/N) 5 T42 20DG/YL TRS T42 SIGNAL 6-- 7 T60 20YL/GY OD SOLENOID CONTROL 8 T3 20DG/DB TRS T3 SIGNAL 9 T1 20DG/LB TRS T1 SIGNAL 10 T16 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT 11 T48 20BR/YL 4C PRESSURE SIGNAL 12 T118 20DG LINE PRESSURE CONTROL 13 T4 20DG/RD TRS T2 SIGNAL 13 T4 20DG/LB TRS T2 SIGNAL 14 T50 20DG/PK L/R PRESSURE SIGNAL 14 T50 20YL/TN L/R PRESSURE SIGNAL 15 T147 20DG/YL 2C PRESSURE SIGNAL 16 T9 20DG/TN OD PRESSURE SIGNAL 17 T59 20YL/LB UD CONTROL 18 T29 20YL/WT UD PRESSURE SIGNAL 19 T259 20YL/DG 4C CONTROL 20 T219 20YL/LG 2C CONTROL 21 T140 20YL/GY MS CONTROL 22 T160 20DG/WT SENSOR GROUND 22 K900 20DB/DG SENSOR GROUND 23 T54 20DG/OR TRANSMISSION TEMPERATURE SIGNAL Component Location - 21 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Assembly-Line Pressure Sensor/Variable Force Solenoid > Page 6990 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Assembly-Line Pressure Sensor/Variable Force Solenoid Pressure Regulating Solenoid: Diagrams Assembly-Line Pressure Sensor/Variable Force Solenoid Component ID: 17 Component : ASSEMBLY-LINE PRESSURE SENSOR/VARIABLE FORCE SOLENOID Connector: Name : ASSEMBLY-LINE PRESSURE SENSOR/VARIABLE FORCE SOLENOID Color : BLACK # of pins : 6 Qualifier : (RLE) Pin Circuit Description 1-2 F856 20YL/PK 5 VOLT SUPPLY 3 T38 20YL/BR LINE PRESSURE SIGNAL 4 K900 20DB/DG SENSOR GROUND 5 T16 18YL/OR TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT 6 T118 20DG LP VFS CONTROL Component Location - 19 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Assembly-Line Pressure Sensor/Variable Force Solenoid > Page 6993 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Assembly-Line Pressure Sensor/Variable Force Solenoid > Page 6994 Pressure Regulating Solenoid: Diagrams Assembly-Transmission Solenoid Component ID 15 Component ID: 15 Component : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID Connector: Name : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID Color : # of pins : 8 Qualifier : (RE) Pin Circuit Description 1 T16 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT 2 F856 18YL/PK 5 VOLT SUPPLY 3 K900 20DB/DG SENSOR GROUND 4 T38 18YL/BR GOVERNOR PRESSURE SENSOR SIGNAL 5 T118 18DG GOVERNOR PRESSURE SOLENOID CONTROL 6 T9 18DG/TN 3-4 SOLENOID CONTROL 7 T75 18YL/LB TORQUE CONVERTER CLUTCH SOLENOID CONTROL 8 T54 18DG/OR TRANSMISSION TEMPERATURE SIGNAL Component Location - 20 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Assembly-Line Pressure Sensor/Variable Force Solenoid > Page 6995 Component Location - 26 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Assembly-Line Pressure Sensor/Variable Force Solenoid > Page 6996 Connector: Name : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID C1 Color : # of pins : 10 Qualifier : (RC) Pin Circuit Description 1 T806 20DG/VT PRESSURE SIGNAL 7 2 T804 20YL/DB PRESSURE SIGNAL 5 3 T54 20DG/OR TRANSMISSION TEMPERATURE SIGNAL 4 T817 20YL/BR LINEAR 3 CONTROL Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Assembly-Line Pressure Sensor/Variable Force Solenoid > Page 6997 5 T813 20DG/LG LINEAR 1 CONTROL 6 T807 20DG/WT PRESSURE SIGNAL 8 7 T803 20DG/BR PRESSURE SIGNAL 4 8 T820 20YL/WT TEMPERATURE SENSOR GROUND 9 T816 20YL/PK LINEAR 3 GROUND 10 T812 20DG/TN LINEAR 1 GROUND Component Location - 20 Component Location - 26 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Assembly-Line Pressure Sensor/Variable Force Solenoid > Page 6998 Connector: Name : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID C2 Color : # of pins : 12 Qualifier : (RC) Pin Circuit Description 1 T800 20DG/BR PRESSURE SIGNAL 1 2 T805 20DG/OR PRESSURE SIGNAL 6 3 T809 20DG/YL SHIFT 2 CONTROL 4 T811 20DG/LB SHIFT 4 CONTROL Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Assembly-Line Pressure Sensor/Variable Force Solenoid > Page 6999 5 T818 20YL/OR LINEAR 4 GROUND 6 T814 20YL/BR LINEAR 2 GROUND 7 T801 20DG/RD PRESSURE SIGNAL 2 8 T802 20DG/PK PRESSURE SIGNAL 3 9 T810 20DG/DB SHIFT 3 CONTROL 10 T808 20DG/GY SHIFT 1 CONTROL 11 T821 20YL/GY LINEAR 4 CONTROL 12 T815 20YL/RD LINEAR 2 CONTROL Component Location - 20 Component Location - 26 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Assembly-Line Pressure Sensor/Variable Force Solenoid > Page 7000 Component ID 19 Component ID: 19 Component : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID Connector: Name : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID Color : # of pins : 8 Qualifier : (RE) Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Assembly-Line Pressure Sensor/Variable Force Solenoid > Page 7001 Pin Circuit Description 1 T16 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT 2 F856 18YL/PK 5 VOLT SUPPLY 3 K900 20DB/DG SENSOR GROUND 4 T38 18YL/BR GOVERNOR PRESSURE SENSOR SIGNAL 5 T118 18DG GOVERNOR PRESSURE SOLENOID CONTROL 6 T9 18DG/TN 3-4 SOLENOID CONTROL 7 T75 18YL/LB TORQUE CONVERTER CLUTCH SOLENOID CONTROL 8 T54 18DG/OR TRANSMISSION TEMPERATURE SIGNAL Component Location - 20 Component Location - 26 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Assembly-Line Pressure Sensor/Variable Force Solenoid > Page 7002 Connector: Name : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID C1 Color : # of pins : 10 Qualifier : (RC) Pin Circuit Description 1 T806 20DG/VT PRESSURE SIGNAL 7 2 T804 20YL/DB PRESSURE SIGNAL 5 3 T54 20DG/OR TRANSMISSION TEMPERATURE SIGNAL 4 T817 20YL/BR LINEAR 3 CONTROL Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Assembly-Line Pressure Sensor/Variable Force Solenoid > Page 7003 5 T813 20DG/LG LINEAR 1 CONTROL 6 T807 20DG/WT PRESSURE SIGNAL 8 7 T803 20DG/BR PRESSURE SIGNAL 4 8 T820 20YL/WT TEMPERATURE SENSOR GROUND 9 T816 20YL/PK LINEAR 3 GROUND 10 T812 20DG/TN LINEAR 1 GROUND Component Location - 20 Component Location - 26 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Assembly-Line Pressure Sensor/Variable Force Solenoid > Page 7004 Connector: Name : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID C2 Color : # of pins : 12 Qualifier : (RC) Pin Circuit Description 1 T800 20DG/BR PRESSURE SIGNAL 1 2 T805 20DG/OR PRESSURE SIGNAL 6 3 T809 20DG/YL SHIFT 2 CONTROL 4 T811 20DG/LB SHIFT 4 CONTROL Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Assembly-Line Pressure Sensor/Variable Force Solenoid > Page 7005 5 T818 20YL/OR LINEAR 4 GROUND 6 T814 20YL/BR LINEAR 2 GROUND 7 T801 20DG/RD PRESSURE SIGNAL 2 8 T802 20DG/PK PRESSURE SIGNAL 3 9 T810 20DG/DB SHIFT 3 CONTROL 10 T808 20DG/GY SHIFT 1 CONTROL 11 T821 20YL/GY LINEAR 4 CONTROL 12 T815 20YL/RD LINEAR 2 CONTROL Component Location - 20 Component Location - 26 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Assembly-Line Pressure Sensor/Variable Force Solenoid > Page 7006 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Assembly-Line Pressure Sensor/Variable Force Solenoid > Page 7007 Pressure Regulating Solenoid: Diagrams Assembly-Transmission Solenoid/Pressure Switch Component ID: 20 Component : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID/PRESSURE SWITCH Connector: Name : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID/PRESSURE SWITCH Color : LT. BROWN # of pins : 10 Qualifier : (RLE) Pin Circuit Description 1 T60 20YL/GY OD CONTROL 2 T59 20YL/LB UD CONTROL 3 T16 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT 4 T19 18YL/DB 2-4 CONTROL 5 T47 18YL/DG 2-4 PRESSURE SIGNAL 6 T9 20DG/TN OD PRESSURE SIGNAL 7 T20 20DG/WT L/R CONTROL 8-9-10 T50 20YL/TN L/R PRESSURE SIGNAL Component Location - 19 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Assembly-Line Pressure Sensor/Variable Force Solenoid > Page 7008 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Assembly-Line Pressure Sensor/Variable Force Solenoid > Page 7009 Pressure Regulating Solenoid: Diagrams Assembly-Transmission Solenoid/TRS Component ID: 21 Component : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID/TRS Connector: Name : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID/TRS Color : BLACK # of pins : 23 Qualifier : (RFE) Pin Circuit Description 1-2 T20 20DG/WT L/R CONTROL 3-4 T41 20YL/DB TRS T41 SIGNAL (P/N) 5 T42 20DG/YL TRS T42 SIGNAL 6-- 7 T60 20YL/GY OD SOLENOID CONTROL 8 T3 20DG/DB TRS T3 SIGNAL 9 T1 20DG/LB TRS T1 SIGNAL 10 T16 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT 11 T48 20BR/YL 4C PRESSURE SIGNAL 12 T118 20DG LINE PRESSURE CONTROL 13 T4 20DG/RD TRS T2 SIGNAL 13 T4 20DG/LB TRS T2 SIGNAL 14 T50 20DG/PK L/R PRESSURE SIGNAL 14 T50 20YL/TN L/R PRESSURE SIGNAL 15 T147 20DG/YL 2C PRESSURE SIGNAL 16 T9 20DG/TN OD PRESSURE SIGNAL 17 T59 20YL/LB UD CONTROL 18 T29 20YL/WT UD PRESSURE SIGNAL 19 T259 20YL/DG 4C CONTROL 20 T219 20YL/LG 2C CONTROL 21 T140 20YL/GY MS CONTROL 22 T160 20DG/WT SENSOR GROUND 22 K900 20DB/DG SENSOR GROUND 23 T54 20DG/OR TRANSMISSION TEMPERATURE SIGNAL Component Location - 21 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Assembly-Line Pressure Sensor/Variable Force Solenoid > Page 7010 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > 42RLE Automatic Transmission Pressure Regulating Solenoid: Description and Operation 42RLE Automatic Transmission Description DESCRIPTION The pressure control solenoid (1) is mounted on the top of the valve body, next to the line pressure sensor (2). The TCM utilizes a closed-loop system to control transmission line pressure. The system contains a variable force style solenoid, the Pressure Control Solenoid. The solenoid is duty cycle controlled by the TCM to vent the unnecessary line pressure supplied by the oil pump back to the sump. The system also contains a variable pressure style sensor, the Line Pressure Sensor, which is a direct input to the TCM. The line pressure solenoid monitors the transmission line pressure and completes the feedback loop to the TCM. The TCM uses this information to adjust its control of the pressure control solenoid to achieve the desired line pressure. Operation OPERATION The pressure control solenoid (PCS) is a variable force (VFS) style solenoid. A VFS solenoid is an electro-hydraulic actuator, combining a solenoid and a regulating valve. The transmission control module varies the current for the PCS, which varies the pressure in the line pressure hydraulic circuit. When the current (duty cycle) of the PCS is low, the pressure in the circuit is higher. At 0 current (0% duty cycle), the pressure is at the maximum value. Conversely, when the current is maximized (100% duty cycle), the pressure in the circuit is at the lowest possible value. Description DESCRIPTION Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 7013 The Solenoid/Pressure Switch Assembly (1) is inside the transmission and mounted to the valve body assembly. The assembly consists of four solenoids that control hydraulic pressure to the L/R, 2/4, OD, and UD friction elements (transmission clutches), and the torque converter clutch. The reverse clutch is controlled by line pressure from the manual valve in the valve body. The solenoids are contained within the Solenoid/Pressure Switch Assembly, and can only be serviced by replacing the assembly. The solenoid assembly also contains pressure switches that monitor and send hydraulic circuit information to the TCM. Likewise, the pressure switches can only be service by replacing the assembly. Operation OPERATION SOLENOIDS The solenoids receive electrical power from the Transmission Control Relay through a single wire. The TCM energizes or operates the solenoids individually by grounding the return wire of the solenoid needed. When a solenoid is energized, the solenoid valve shifts, and a fluid passage is opened or closed (vented or applied), depending on its default operating state. The result is an apply or release of a frictional element. The 2/4 and UD solenoids are normally applied, which allows fluid to pass through in their relaxed or "off" state. By design, this allows transmission limp-in (P,R,N,2) in the event of an electrical failure. The continuity of the solenoids and circuits are periodically tested. Each solenoid is turned on or off depending on its current state. An inductive spike should be detected by the TCM during this test. If no spike is detected, the circuit is tested again to verify the failure. In addition to the periodic testing, the solenoid circuits are tested if a speed ratio or pressure switch error occurs. PRESSURE SWITCHES The TCM relies on three pressure switches to monitor fluid pressure in the L/R, 2/4, and OD hydraulic circuits. The primary purpose of these switches is to help the TCM detect when clutch circuit hydraulic failures occur. The range for the pressure switch closing and opening points is 11-23 psi. Typically the switch opening point will be approximately one psi lower than the closing point. For example, a switch may close at 18 psi and open at 17 psi. The switches are continuously monitored by the TCM for the correct states (open or closed) in each gear as shown in the following chart: Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 7014 A Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) will set if the TCM senses any switch open or closed at the wrong time in a given gear. The TCM also tests the 2/4 and OD pressure switches when they are normally off (OD and 2/4 are tested in 1st gear, OD in 2nd gear, and 2/4 in 3rd gear). The test simply verifies that they are operational, by looking for a closed state when the corresponding element is applied. Immediately after a shift into 1st, 2nd, or 3rd gear with the engine speed above 1000 rpm, the TCM momentarily turns on element pressure to the 2/4 and/or OD clutch circuits to identify that the appropriate switch has closed. If it doesn't close, it is tested again. If the switch fails to close the second time, the appropriate Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) will set. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 7015 Pressure Regulating Solenoid: Description and Operation 545RFE Automatic Transmission Description DESCRIPTION The transmission solenoid/TRS assembly is internal to the transmission and mounted on the valve body assembly. The assembly consists of six solenoids that control hydraulic pressure to the six friction elements (transmission clutches), and the torque converter clutch. The pressure control solenoid is located on the side of the solenoid/TRS assembly. The solenoid/TRS assembly also contains the Transmission Range Sensor (TRS) and five pressure switches that feed information to the TCM. Operation OPERATION SOLENOIDS Solenoids are used to control the L/R, 2C, 4C, OD, and UD friction elements. The reverse clutch is controlled by line pressure and the position of the manual valve in the valve body. All the solenoids are contained within the Solenoid and Pressure Switch Assembly. The solenoid and pressure switch assembly contains one additional solenoid, Multi-Select (MS), which serves primarily to provide 2nd and 3rd gear limp-in operation. The solenoids receive electrical power from the Transmission Control Relay through a single wire. The TCM energizes or operates the solenoids individually by grounding the return wire of the solenoid as necessary. When a solenoid is energized, the solenoid valve shifts, and a fluid passage is opened or closed (vented or applied), depending on its default operating state. The result is an apply or release of a frictional element. The MS and UD solenoids are normally applied to allow transmission limp-in in the event of an electrical failure. The continuity of the solenoids and circuits are periodically tested. Each solenoid is turned on or off depending on its current state. An inductive spike should be detected by the TCM during this test. If no spike is detected, the circuit is tested again to verify the failure. In addition to the periodic testing, the solenoid circuits are tested if a speed ratio or pressure switch error occurs. PRESSURE SWITCHES The TCM relies on five pressure switches to monitor fluid pressure in the L/R, 2C, 4C, UD, and OD hydraulic circuits. The primary purpose of these switches is to help the TCM detect when clutch circuit hydraulic failures occur. The switches close at 23 psi and open at 11 psi, and simply indicate whether or not pressure exists. The switches are continuously monitored by the TCM for the correct states (open or closed) in each gear as shown in the following charts and 545RFE PRESSURE SWITCH STATES: Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 7016 A Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) will set if the TCM senses any switch open or closed at the wrong time in a given gear. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 7017 Pressure Regulating Solenoid: Description and Operation 68RFE Automatic Transmission Description DESCRIPTION The transmission solenoid/TRS assembly is internal to the transmission and mounted on the valve body assembly. The assembly consists of six solenoids that control hydraulic pressure to the six friction elements (transmission clutches), and the torque converter clutch. The pressure control solenoid is located on the side of the solenoid/TRS assembly. The solenoid/TRS assembly also contains the Transmission Range Sensor (TRS) and five pressure switches that feed information to the TCM. Operation OPERATION SOLENOIDS Solenoids are used to control the L/R, 2C, 4C, OD, and UD friction elements. The reverse clutch is controlled by line pressure and the position of the manual valve in the valve body. All the solenoids are contained within the Solenoid and Pressure Switch Assembly. The solenoid and pressure switch assembly contains one additional solenoid, Multi-Select (MS), which serves primarily to provide 3rd gear and reverse limp-in operation. The TCM energizes or operates the solenoids individually by grounding the return wire of the solenoid as necessary. When a solenoid is energized, the solenoid valve shifts, and a fluid passage is opened or closed (vented or applied), depending on its default operating state. The result is an apply or release of a frictional element. The MS and UD solenoids are normally applied to allow transmission limp-in in the event of an electrical failure. The continuity of the solenoids and circuits are periodically tested. Each solenoid is turned on or off depending on its current state. An inductive spike should be detected by the TCM during this test. If no spike is detected, the circuit is tested again to verify the failure. In addition to the periodic testing, the solenoid circuits are tested if a speed ratio or pressure switch error occurs. PRESSURE SWITCHES The TCM relies on five pressure switches to monitor fluid pressure in the L/R, 2C, 4C, UD, and OD hydraulic circuits. The primary purpose of these switches is to help the TCM detect when clutch circuit hydraulic failures occur. The switches close at 23 psi and open at 11 psi, and simply indicate whether or not pressure exists. The switches are continuously monitored by the TCM for the correct states (open or closed) in each gear as shown in the following charts and Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 7018 A Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) will set if the TCM senses any switch open or closed at the wrong time in a given gear. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 42RLE Automatic Transmission Pressure Regulating Solenoid: Service and Repair 42RLE Automatic Transmission Removal REMOVAL 1. Remove the valve body from the transmission. See: Valve Body/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/42RLE Automatic Transmission/Removal 2. Remove the electrical connectors from the pressure control solenoid (1) and the line pressure sensor (2). 3. Remove the screws (6) holding the pressure control solenoid (1) and line pressure sensor (2) to the valve body. 4. Remove the pressure control solenoid and line pressure sensor from the valve body. Installation INSTALLATION 1. Install the pressure control solenoid (1) and line pressure sensor (2) into the valve body. 2. Install the screws (6) to hold the pressure control solenoid (1) and line pressure sensor (2) to the valve body. 3. Install the electrical connectors to the pressure control solenoid (1) and the line pressure sensor (2). 4. Install the valve body into the transmission. See: Valve Body/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/42RLE Automatic Transmission/Installation Removal Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 7021 REMOVAL NOTE: If the Solenoid/Pressure Switch Assembly is being replaced, the Quick Learn Procedure must be performed. See: Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Transmission Control Module/TCM Quick Learn 1. Raise vehicle on hoist. 2. Remove valve body assembly from transmission. See: Valve Body/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/42RLE Automatic Transmission/Removal 3. Remove Solenoid/Pressure Switch Assembly retaining screws (2) from solenoid. 4. Remove Solenoid/Pressure Switch Assembly (1) and screen from valve body (2). Installation INSTALLATION NOTE: If the Solenoid/Pressure Switch assembly is being replaced, the Quick Learn Procedure must be performed. See: Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Transmission Control Module/TCM Quick Learn 1. Install Solenoid/Pressure Switch Assembly (1) and screen (3) to the separator and transfer plates. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 7022 2. Install and tighten retaining screws (2) to 5.5 Nm (50 in. lbs.) torque. 3. Install valve body. See: Valve Body/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/42RLE Automatic Transmission/Installation Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 7023 Pressure Regulating Solenoid: Service and Repair 545RFE Automatic Transmission Removal REMOVAL NOTE: If the Transmission Solenoid/TRS Assembly is being replaced, the Quick Learn Procedure must be performed. See: Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Transmission Control Module/TCM Quick Learn 1. Remove the valve body from the transmission. See: Valve Body/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/545RFE Automatic Transmission/Removal 2. Remove the bolts (1) holding the transmission solenoid/TRS assembly onto the valve body. 3. Separate the transmission solenoid/TRS assembly from the valve body. Installation INSTALLATION Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 7024 1. Place TRS selector plate in the PARK position. 2. Position the transmission solenoid/TRS assembly onto the valve body. Be sure that both alignment dowels are fully seated in the valve body and that the TRS switch contacts are properly positioned in the selector plate 3. Install the bolts (1) to hold the transmission solenoid/TRS assembly onto the valve body. 4. Tighten the solenoid assembly screws adjacent to the arrows cast into the bottom of the valve body first. Tighten the screws to 6 Nm (50 in.lbs.). 5. Tighten the remainder of the solenoid assembly screws to 6 Nm (50 in.lbs.). 6. Install the valve body into the transmission. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 7025 Pressure Regulating Solenoid: Service and Repair 68RFE Automatic Transmission Removal REMOVAL NOTE: If the Transmission Solenoid/TRS Assembly is being replaced, the Quick Learn Procedure must be performed. See: Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Transmission Control Module/TCM Quick Learn 1. Remove the valve body from the transmission. 2. Remove the bolts (1) holding the transmission solenoid/TRS assembly onto the valve body. 3. Separate the transmission solenoid/TRS assembly from the valve body. Installation INSTALLATION Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 7026 1. Place TRS selector plate in the PARK position. 2. Position the transmission solenoid/TRS assembly onto the valve body. Be sure that both alignment dowels are fully seated in the valve body and that the TRS switch contacts are properly positioned in the selector plate 3. Install the bolts (1) to hold the transmission solenoid/TRS assembly onto the valve body. 4. Tighten the solenoid assembly screws adjacent to the arrows cast into the bottom of the valve body first. Tighten the screws to 6 Nm (50 in.lbs.). 5. Tighten the remainder of the solenoid assembly screws to 6 Nm (50 in.lbs.). 6. Install the valve body into the transmission. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Relays and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 200 Control Module: Locations Component ID 200 Component ID: 200 Component : MODULE-TRANSMISSION CONTROL Connector: Name : MODULE-TRANSMISSION CONTROL C1 Color : # of pins : 17 Qualifier : (RC) Pin Circuit Description 1 T52 20DG/OR INPUT SPEED SIGNAL 2-3 K427 18OR/LG POWER TAKEOFF RELAY ENABLE 4-5 T803 20DG/BR PRESSURE SIGNAL 4 6 T800 20DG/BR PRESSURE SIGNAL 1 7-8-9-10 - 11 T804 20YL/DB PRESSURE SIGNAL 5 12 T802 20DG/PK PRESSURE SIGNAL 3 13 - 14 - 15 - 16 T805 20DG/OR PRESSURE SIGNAL 6 17 T801 20DG/RD PRESSURE SIGNAL 2 Component Location - 31 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Relays and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 200 > Page 7032 Connector: Name : MODULE-TRANSMISSION CONTROL C2 Color : # of pins : 24 Qualifier : (RC) Pin Circuit Description 1 T72 20YL/DB 8 VOLT SUPPLY 2 T14 20DG/BR OUTPUT SPEED SIGNAL 3 F916 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION RELAY OUTPUT 3 T16 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Relays and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 200 > Page 7033 4 F916 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION RELAY OUTPUT 4 T16 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT 5-6-7 A104 20YL/RD FUSED B(+) 8 Z133 18BK/LG GROUND 9-10 - 11 - 12 - 13 - - 14 T6 20DG TOW/HAUL OVERDRIVE OFF SWITCH SIGNAL 15 T54 20DG/OR TRANSMISSION TEMPERATURE SIGNAL 16 T819 20YL/VT TCC TEMPERATURE SIGNAL 17 Z133 18BK/LG GROUND 18 - 19 T811 20DG/LB SHIFT 4 CONTROL 20 D65 20WT/LG CAN C BUS (+) 21 D64 20WT/LB CAN C BUS (-) 22 - 23 - 24 - Component Location - 31 Connector: Name : MODULE-TRANSMISSION CONTROL C3 Color : # of pins : 31 Qualifier : (RC) Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Relays and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 200 > Page 7034 Pin Circuit Description 1 T808 20DG/GY SHIFT 1 CONTROL 2-3 T810 20DG/DB SHIFT 3 CONTROL 4-5 T817 20YL/BR LINEAR 3 CONTROL 6 T812 20DG/TN LINEAR 1 GROUND 7 T813 20DG/LG LINEAR 1 CONTROL 8 T815 20YL/RD LINEAR 2 CONTROL 9 T814 20YL/BR LINEAR 2 GROUND 10 T806 20DG/VT PRESSURE SIGNAL 7 11 - 12 - 13 - 14 - - 15 T816 20YL/PK LINEAR 3 GROUND 16 T828 20DG/DB TRS 1 SIGNAL 17 T42 20DG/YL TRS T42 SIGNAL 18 T3 20DG/DB TRS T3 SIGNAL 19 T827 20DG/LB TRS DRIVE SIGNAL 20 T824 20YL/DB TRS PARK SIGNAL 21 T826 20DG/DB TRS REVERSE SIGNAL 22 T809 20DG/YL SHIFT 2 CONTROL 23 - 24 - 25 - 26 T807 20DG/WT PRESSURE SIGNAL 8 27 - 28 T820 20YL/WT TEMPERATURE SENSOR GROUND 29 T825 20DG/YL TRS NEUTRAL SIGNAL 30 T821 20YL/GY LINEAR 4 CONTROL 31 T818 20YL/OR LINEAR 4 GROUND Component Location - 31 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Relays and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 200 > Page 7035 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Relays and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 200 > Page 7036 Control Module: Locations Component ID 216 Component ID: 216 Component : MODULE-TRANSMISSION CONTROL Connector: Name : MODULE-TRANSMISSION CONTROL C1 Color : # of pins : 17 Qualifier : (RC) Pin Circuit Description 1 T52 20DG/OR INPUT SPEED SIGNAL 2-3 K427 18OR/LG POWER TAKEOFF RELAY ENABLE 4-5 T803 20DG/BR PRESSURE SIGNAL 4 6 T800 20DG/BR PRESSURE SIGNAL 1 7-8-9-10 - 11 T804 20YL/DB PRESSURE SIGNAL 5 12 T802 20DG/PK PRESSURE SIGNAL 3 13 - 14 - 15 - 16 T805 20DG/OR PRESSURE SIGNAL 6 17 T801 20DG/RD PRESSURE SIGNAL 2 Component Location - 31 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Relays and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 200 > Page 7037 Connector: Name : MODULE-TRANSMISSION CONTROL C2 Color : # of pins : 24 Qualifier : (RC) Pin Circuit Description 1 T72 20YL/DB 8 VOLT SUPPLY 2 T14 20DG/BR OUTPUT SPEED SIGNAL 3 F916 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION RELAY OUTPUT 3 T16 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Relays and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 200 > Page 7038 4 F916 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION RELAY OUTPUT 4 T16 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT 5-6-7 A104 20YL/RD FUSED B(+) 8 Z133 18BK/LG GROUND 9-10 - 11 - 12 - 13 - - 14 T6 20DG TOW/HAUL OVERDRIVE OFF SWITCH SIGNAL 15 T54 20DG/OR TRANSMISSION TEMPERATURE SIGNAL 16 T819 20YL/VT TCC TEMPERATURE SIGNAL 17 Z133 18BK/LG GROUND 18 - 19 T811 20DG/LB SHIFT 4 CONTROL 20 D65 20WT/LG CAN C BUS (+) 21 D64 20WT/LB CAN C BUS (-) 22 - 23 - 24 - Component Location - 31 Connector: Name : MODULE-TRANSMISSION CONTROL C3 Color : # of pins : 31 Qualifier : (RC) Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Relays and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 200 > Page 7039 Pin Circuit Description 1 T808 20DG/GY SHIFT 1 CONTROL 2-3 T810 20DG/DB SHIFT 3 CONTROL 4-5 T817 20YL/BR LINEAR 3 CONTROL 6 T812 20DG/TN LINEAR 1 GROUND 7 T813 20DG/LG LINEAR 1 CONTROL 8 T815 20YL/RD LINEAR 2 CONTROL 9 T814 20YL/BR LINEAR 2 GROUND 10 T806 20DG/VT PRESSURE SIGNAL 7 11 - 12 - 13 - 14 - - 15 T816 20YL/PK LINEAR 3 GROUND 16 T828 20DG/DB TRS 1 SIGNAL 17 T42 20DG/YL TRS T42 SIGNAL 18 T3 20DG/DB TRS T3 SIGNAL 19 T827 20DG/LB TRS DRIVE SIGNAL 20 T824 20YL/DB TRS PARK SIGNAL 21 T826 20DG/DB TRS REVERSE SIGNAL 22 T809 20DG/YL SHIFT 2 CONTROL 23 - 24 - 25 - 26 T807 20DG/WT PRESSURE SIGNAL 8 27 - 28 T820 20YL/WT TEMPERATURE SENSOR GROUND 29 T825 20DG/YL TRS NEUTRAL SIGNAL 30 T821 20YL/GY LINEAR 4 CONTROL 31 T818 20YL/OR LINEAR 4 GROUND Component Location - 31 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Relays and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 200 > Page 7040 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Relays and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Component ID 200 Control Module: Diagrams Component ID 200 Component ID: 200 Component : MODULE-TRANSMISSION CONTROL Connector: Name : MODULE-TRANSMISSION CONTROL C1 Color : # of pins : 17 Qualifier : (RC) Pin Circuit Description 1 T52 20DG/OR INPUT SPEED SIGNAL 2-3 K427 18OR/LG POWER TAKEOFF RELAY ENABLE 4-5 T803 20DG/BR PRESSURE SIGNAL 4 6 T800 20DG/BR PRESSURE SIGNAL 1 7-8-9-10 - 11 T804 20YL/DB PRESSURE SIGNAL 5 12 T802 20DG/PK PRESSURE SIGNAL 3 13 - 14 - 15 - 16 T805 20DG/OR PRESSURE SIGNAL 6 17 T801 20DG/RD PRESSURE SIGNAL 2 Component Location - 31 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Relays and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Component ID 200 > Page 7043 Connector: Name : MODULE-TRANSMISSION CONTROL C2 Color : # of pins : 24 Qualifier : (RC) Pin Circuit Description 1 T72 20YL/DB 8 VOLT SUPPLY 2 T14 20DG/BR OUTPUT SPEED SIGNAL 3 F916 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION RELAY OUTPUT 3 T16 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Relays and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Component ID 200 > Page 7044 4 F916 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION RELAY OUTPUT 4 T16 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT 5-6-7 A104 20YL/RD FUSED B(+) 8 Z133 18BK/LG GROUND 9-10 - 11 - 12 - 13 - - 14 T6 20DG TOW/HAUL OVERDRIVE OFF SWITCH SIGNAL 15 T54 20DG/OR TRANSMISSION TEMPERATURE SIGNAL 16 T819 20YL/VT TCC TEMPERATURE SIGNAL 17 Z133 18BK/LG GROUND 18 - 19 T811 20DG/LB SHIFT 4 CONTROL 20 D65 20WT/LG CAN C BUS (+) 21 D64 20WT/LB CAN C BUS (-) 22 - 23 - 24 - Component Location - 31 Connector: Name : MODULE-TRANSMISSION CONTROL C3 Color : # of pins : 31 Qualifier : (RC) Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Relays and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Component ID 200 > Page 7045 Pin Circuit Description 1 T808 20DG/GY SHIFT 1 CONTROL 2-3 T810 20DG/DB SHIFT 3 CONTROL 4-5 T817 20YL/BR LINEAR 3 CONTROL 6 T812 20DG/TN LINEAR 1 GROUND 7 T813 20DG/LG LINEAR 1 CONTROL 8 T815 20YL/RD LINEAR 2 CONTROL 9 T814 20YL/BR LINEAR 2 GROUND 10 T806 20DG/VT PRESSURE SIGNAL 7 11 - 12 - 13 - 14 - - 15 T816 20YL/PK LINEAR 3 GROUND 16 T828 20DG/DB TRS 1 SIGNAL 17 T42 20DG/YL TRS T42 SIGNAL 18 T3 20DG/DB TRS T3 SIGNAL 19 T827 20DG/LB TRS DRIVE SIGNAL 20 T824 20YL/DB TRS PARK SIGNAL 21 T826 20DG/DB TRS REVERSE SIGNAL 22 T809 20DG/YL SHIFT 2 CONTROL 23 - 24 - 25 - 26 T807 20DG/WT PRESSURE SIGNAL 8 27 - 28 T820 20YL/WT TEMPERATURE SENSOR GROUND 29 T825 20DG/YL TRS NEUTRAL SIGNAL 30 T821 20YL/GY LINEAR 4 CONTROL 31 T818 20YL/OR LINEAR 4 GROUND Component Location - 31 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Relays and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Component ID 200 > Page 7046 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Relays and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Component ID 200 > Page 7047 Control Module: Diagrams Component ID 216 Component ID: 216 Component : MODULE-TRANSMISSION CONTROL Connector: Name : MODULE-TRANSMISSION CONTROL C1 Color : # of pins : 17 Qualifier : (RC) Pin Circuit Description 1 T52 20DG/OR INPUT SPEED SIGNAL 2-3 K427 18OR/LG POWER TAKEOFF RELAY ENABLE 4-5 T803 20DG/BR PRESSURE SIGNAL 4 6 T800 20DG/BR PRESSURE SIGNAL 1 7-8-9-10 - 11 T804 20YL/DB PRESSURE SIGNAL 5 12 T802 20DG/PK PRESSURE SIGNAL 3 13 - 14 - 15 - 16 T805 20DG/OR PRESSURE SIGNAL 6 17 T801 20DG/RD PRESSURE SIGNAL 2 Component Location - 31 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Relays and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Component ID 200 > Page 7048 Connector: Name : MODULE-TRANSMISSION CONTROL C2 Color : # of pins : 24 Qualifier : (RC) Pin Circuit Description 1 T72 20YL/DB 8 VOLT SUPPLY 2 T14 20DG/BR OUTPUT SPEED SIGNAL 3 F916 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION RELAY OUTPUT 3 T16 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Relays and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Component ID 200 > Page 7049 4 F916 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION RELAY OUTPUT 4 T16 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT 5-6-7 A104 20YL/RD FUSED B(+) 8 Z133 18BK/LG GROUND 9-10 - 11 - 12 - 13 - - 14 T6 20DG TOW/HAUL OVERDRIVE OFF SWITCH SIGNAL 15 T54 20DG/OR TRANSMISSION TEMPERATURE SIGNAL 16 T819 20YL/VT TCC TEMPERATURE SIGNAL 17 Z133 18BK/LG GROUND 18 - 19 T811 20DG/LB SHIFT 4 CONTROL 20 D65 20WT/LG CAN C BUS (+) 21 D64 20WT/LB CAN C BUS (-) 22 - 23 - 24 - Component Location - 31 Connector: Name : MODULE-TRANSMISSION CONTROL C3 Color : # of pins : 31 Qualifier : (RC) Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Relays and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Component ID 200 > Page 7050 Pin Circuit Description 1 T808 20DG/GY SHIFT 1 CONTROL 2-3 T810 20DG/DB SHIFT 3 CONTROL 4-5 T817 20YL/BR LINEAR 3 CONTROL 6 T812 20DG/TN LINEAR 1 GROUND 7 T813 20DG/LG LINEAR 1 CONTROL 8 T815 20YL/RD LINEAR 2 CONTROL 9 T814 20YL/BR LINEAR 2 GROUND 10 T806 20DG/VT PRESSURE SIGNAL 7 11 - 12 - 13 - 14 - - 15 T816 20YL/PK LINEAR 3 GROUND 16 T828 20DG/DB TRS 1 SIGNAL 17 T42 20DG/YL TRS T42 SIGNAL 18 T3 20DG/DB TRS T3 SIGNAL 19 T827 20DG/LB TRS DRIVE SIGNAL 20 T824 20YL/DB TRS PARK SIGNAL 21 T826 20DG/DB TRS REVERSE SIGNAL 22 T809 20DG/YL SHIFT 2 CONTROL 23 - 24 - 25 - 26 T807 20DG/WT PRESSURE SIGNAL 8 27 - 28 T820 20YL/WT TEMPERATURE SENSOR GROUND 29 T825 20DG/YL TRS NEUTRAL SIGNAL 30 T821 20YL/GY LINEAR 4 CONTROL 31 T818 20YL/OR LINEAR 4 GROUND Component Location - 31 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Relays and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Component ID 200 > Page 7051 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Relays and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > Transmission Control Module - Description Control Module: Description and Operation Transmission Control Module - Description DESCRIPTION On gasoline vehicles the Transmission Control Module (TCM) (2) may be sub-module within the Powertrain Control Module (PCM) (3). Vehicles equipped 68RFE transmission and a 6.7L Diesel engine, the TCM is housed in the NGC4 controller utilizing only the C1 and C4 connectors (TCM only). The controller is located at the rear of the engine compartment, near the right inner fender. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Relays and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > Transmission Control Module - Description > Page 7054 On Cab Chassis models equipped with the AS68RC transmission the Transmission Control Module (TCM) has three electrical connectors and is located in the passenger compartment underneath of the left side of the dash panel. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Relays and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > Transmission Control Module - Description > Page 7055 Control Module: Description and Operation Transmission Control Module - Operation OPERATION RLE and RFE TRANSMISSIONS The Transmission Control Module (TCM) controls all electronic operations of the transmission. The TCM receives information regarding vehicle operation from both direct and indirect inputs, and selects the operational mode of the transmission. Direct inputs are hard wired to, and used specifically by the TCM. Indirect inputs are shared with the TCM via the vehicle communication bus. Some examples of direct inputs to the TCM are: - Battery (B+) voltage - Ignition "ON" voltage - Transmission Control Relay (Switched B+) (if equipped) - Throttle Position Sensor - Crankshaft Position Sensor - Transmission Range Sensor - Pressure Switches - Transmission Temperature Sensor - Input Shaft Speed Sensor - Output Shaft Speed Sensor - Line Pressure Sensor Some examples of indirect inputs to the TCM are: - Target Idle - Torque Reduction Confirmation - Engine Coolant Temperature - Ambient/Battery Temperature - Scan Tool Communication Based on the information received from these various inputs, the TCM determines the appropriate shift schedule and shift points, depending on the present operating conditions and driver demand. This is possible through the control of various direct and indirect outputs. Some examples of TCM direct outputs are: - Transmission Control Relay - Solenoids - Torque Reduction Request Some examples of TCM indirect outputs are: - Transmission Temperature (to PCM) - PRNDL Position (to cluster/CCN) In addition to monitoring inputs and controlling outputs, the TCM has other important responsibilities and functions: - Storing and maintaining Clutch Volume Indexes (CVI) - Storing and selecting appropriate Shift Schedules - System self-diagnostics - Diagnostic capabilities (with scan tool) NOTE: If the TCM has been replaced, the "Quick Learn Procedure" must be performed. See: Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Transmission Control Module/TCM Quick Learn BATTERY FEED A fused, direct battery feed to the TCM is used for continuous power. This battery voltage is necessary to retain memory in the TCM. When the battery (B+) is disconnected, this memory is lost. When the battery (B+) is restored, this memory loss is detected by the TCM and a Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) is set. CLUTCH VOLUME INDEXES (CVI) Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Relays and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > Transmission Control Module - Description > Page 7056 An important function of the TCM is to monitor Clutch Volume Indexes (CVI). CVIs represent the volume of fluid needed to compress a clutch pack. The TCM monitors gear ratio changes by monitoring the Input and Output Speed Sensors. The Input, or Turbine Speed Sensor sends an electrical signal to the TCM that represents input shaft rpm. The Output Speed Sensor provides the TCM with output shaft speed information. By comparing the two inputs, the TCM can determine transmission gear position. This is important to the CVI calculation because the TCM determines CVIs by monitoring how long it takes for a gear change to occur. Gear ratios can be determined by using the Scan Tool and reading the Input/Output Speed Sensor values in the "Monitors" display. Gear ratio can be obtained by dividing the Input Speed Sensor value by the Output Speed Sensor value. For example, if the input shaft is rotating at 1000 rpm and the output shaft is rotating at 500 rpm, then the TCM can determine that the gear ratio is 2:1. In direct drive (3rd gear), the gear ratio changes to 1:1. The gear ratio changes as clutches are applied and released. By monitoring the length of time it takes for the gear ratio to change following a shift request, the TCM can determine the volume of fluid used to apply or release a friction element. The volume of transmission fluid needed to apply the friction elements are continuously updated for adaptive controls. As friction material wears, the volume of fluid need to apply the element increases. Certain mechanical problems within the input clutch assembly can cause inadequate or out-of-range element volumes. Also, defective Input/Output Speed Sensors and wiring can cause these conditions. The following charts identifies the appropriate clutch volumes and when they are monitored/updated: Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Relays and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > Transmission Control Module - Description > Page 7057 SHIFT SCHEDULES As mentioned earlier, the TCM has programming that allows it to select a variety of shift schedules. Shift schedule selection is dependent on the following: - Shift lever position - Throttle position - Engine load - Fluid temperature - Software level As driving conditions change, the TCM appropriately adjusts the shift schedule. Refer to the following chart to determine the appropriate operation expected, depending on driving conditions. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Relays and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > Transmission Control Module - Description > Page 7058 AISIN AS68RC TRANSMISSION The Transmission Control Module (TCM) controls all electronic operations of the transmission. The TCM receives information regarding vehicle operation from both direct and indirect inputs, and selects the operational mode of the transmission. Direct inputs are hard wired to, and used specifically by the TCM. Indirect inputs are shared with the TCM via the vehicle communication bus. Some examples of direct inputs to the TCM are: - Battery (B+) voltage - Ignition "ON" voltage - Transmission Range Sensor - Pressure Switches - Transmission Temperature Sensor - Input Speed Sensor - Output Speed Sensor Some examples of indirect inputs to the TCM are: - Engine/Body Identification - Manifold Pressure - Throttle position - Torque Reduction Confirmation - Engine Coolant Temperature - Exhaust Brake Status (if equipped) - PTO Request (if equipped) - Scan Tool Communication Based on the information received from these various inputs, the TCM determines the appropriate shift schedule and shift points, depending on the present operating conditions and driver demand. This is possible through the control of various direct and indirect outputs. Some examples of TCM direct outputs are: - Exhaust Brake Cut Request (if equipped). - Solenoids. - Torque Reduction Request. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Relays and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > Transmission Control Module - Description > Page 7059 Some examples of TCM.indirect outputs are: - Transmission Temperature (to PCM). - PRNDL Position (to cluster/CCN). - PTO Status. In addition to monitoring inputs and controlling outputs, the TCM has other important responsibilities and functions: - Storing and maintaining Clutch Volume Indexes (CVI). - Storing and selecting appropriate Shift Schedules. - System self-diagnostics. - Diagnostic capabilities (with scan tool). Clutch filling time is continuously maintained when the vehicle is running. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Relays and Modules - A/T > Transmission Control System Relay, A/T > Component Information > Locations Transmission Control System Relay: Locations Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Relays and Modules - A/T > Transmission Control System Relay, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Transmission Control System Relay: Diagram Information and Instructions Warnings WARNINGS - GENERAL WARNINGS provide information to prevent personal injury and vehicle damage. Below is a list of general warnings that should be followed any time a vehicle is being serviced. WARNING: Always wear safety glasses for eye protection. WARNING: Use safety stands anytime a procedure requires being under a vehicle. WARNING: Be sure that the ignition switch always is in the off position, unless the procedure requires it to be on. WARNING: Set the parking brake when working on any vehicle. An automatic transmission should be in park. A manual transmission should be in neutral. WARNING: Operate the engine only in a well-ventilated area. WARNING: Keep away from moving parts when the engine is running, especially the fan and belts. WARNING: To prevent serious burns, avoid contact with hot parts such as the radiator, exhaust manifold(s), tail pipe, catalytic converter and muffler. WARNING: Do not allow flame or sparks near the battery. Gases are always present in and around the battery. WARNING: Always remove rings, watches, loose hanging jewelry and avoid loose clothing. How to Use Wiring Diagrams DESCRIPTION - HOW TO USE WIRING DIAGRAMS DaimlerChrysler Corporation wiring diagrams are designed to provide information regarding the vehicles wiring content. In order to effectively use the wiring diagrams to diagnose and repair DaimlerChrysler Corporation vehicles, it is important to understand all of their features and characteristics. Diagrams are arranged such that the power (B+) side of the circuit is placed near the top of the page, and the ground (B-) side of the circuit is placed near the bottom of the page. All switches, components, and modules are shown in the at rest position with the doors closed and the key removed from the ignition. Components are shown two ways. A solid line around a component indicates that the component is complete. A dashed line around the component indicates that the component is being shown is not complete. Incomplete components have a reference number to indicate the page where the component is shown complete. It is important to realize that no attempt is made on the diagrams to represent components and wiring as they appear on the vehicle. For example, a short piece of wire is treated the same as a long one. In addition, switches and other components are shown as simply as possible, with regard to function only. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Relays and Modules - A/T > Transmission Control System Relay, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7065 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Relays and Modules - A/T > Transmission Control System Relay, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7066 SYMBOLS International symbols are used throughout the wiring diagrams. These symbols are consistent with those being used around the world. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Relays and Modules - A/T > Transmission Control System Relay, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7067 TERMINOLOGY This is a list of terms and definitions used in the wiring diagrams. LHD - Left Hand Drive Vehicles RHD - Right Hand Drive Vehicles ATX - Automatic Transmissions-Front Wheel Drive MTX Manual Transmissions-Front Wheel Drive Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Relays and Modules - A/T > Transmission Control System Relay, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7068 AT - Automatic Transmissions-Rear Wheel Drive MT - Manual Transmissions-Rear Wheel Drive SOHC - Single Over Head Cam Engine DOHC - Double Over Head Cam Engine Export - Vehicles Built For Sale In Markets Other Than North America Except Export - Vehicles Built For Sale In North America Circuit Functions DESCRIPTION - CIRCUIT FUNCTIONS All circuits in the diagrams use an alpha/numeric code to identify the wire and it's function. To identify which circuit code applies to a system, refer to the Circuit Identification Code Chart. This chart shows the main circuits only and does not show the secondary codes that may apply to some models. Circuit Information DESCRIPTION - CIRCUIT INFORMATION Each wire shown in the diagrams contains a code which identifies the main circuit, a specific part of the main circuit, gage of wire, and color. An example would be A 2 18 LB/YL. This is a Battery Feed circuit, level two, eighteen gauge, light blue with a yellow tracer. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Relays and Modules - A/T > Transmission Control System Relay, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7069 Connector, Ground and Splice Information DESCRIPTION - CONNECTOR, GROUND AND SPLICE INFORMATION CAUTION: Not all connectors are serviced. Some connectors are serviced only with a harness. A typical example might be the Supplemental Restraint System connectors. Always check parts availability before attempting a repair. IDENTIFICATION In-line connectors are identified by a number, as follows: - In-line connectors located in the engine compartment are C100 series numbers. - In-line connectors located in the instrument panel area are C200 series numbers. - In-line connectors located in the body are C300 series numbers. - Jumper harness connectors are C400 series numbers. - Grounds and ground connectors are identified with a "G" and follow the same series numbering as the in-line connectors. - Splices are identified with an "S" and follow the same series numbering as the in-line connectors. In addition, S001-S099 numbers are located in the engine compartment. - Component connectors are identified by the component name instead of a number. Multiple connectors on a component use a C1, C2, etc. identifier. LOCATIONS Vehicle/Locations contains the master connector/ground/splice location index charts with hyperlinks to the applicable location illustrations. The illustrations contain the connector name (or number)/ground number/splice number and component identification. The abbreviation T/O is used in the component location section to indicate a point in which the wiring harness branches out to a component. The abbreviation N/S means Not Shown in the illustrations Section Identification and Information DESCRIPTION - SECTION IDENTIFICATION AND INFORMATION The wiring diagrams are grouped into individual sections. If a component is most likely found in a particular group, it will be shown complete (all wires, Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Relays and Modules - A/T > Transmission Control System Relay, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7070 connectors, and pins) within that group. For example, the Auto Shutdown Relay is most likely to be found in Powertrain Management, so it is shown there complete. It can, however, be shown partially in another group if it contains some associated wiring. Splice diagrams show the entire splice and provide references to other sections the splices serves. Splice Information only contains splice diagrams that are not shown in their entirety somewhere else in the wiring diagrams. Connector Pin-Outs shows each connector and the circuits involved with that connector. The connectors are identified using the name/number on the diagram pages. Removal REMOVAL 1. Disconnect battery. 2. Release Connector Lock (2). 3. Disconnect the connector (3) being repaired from its mating half/component. 4. Remove the dress cover (if applicable) (1). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Relays and Modules - A/T > Transmission Control System Relay, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7071 5. Release the Secondary Terminal Lock, if required (1). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Relays and Modules - A/T > Transmission Control System Relay, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7072 6. Position the connector locking finger away from the terminal using the proper special tool. Pull on the wire to remove the terminal from the connector. Installation Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Relays and Modules - A/T > Transmission Control System Relay, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7073 INSTALLATION 1. Insert the removed terminal in the same cavity on the repair connector. 2. Repeat steps for each terminal in the connector, being sure that all wires are inserted into the proper cavities. For additional connector pin-out identification, refer to the wiring diagrams. 3. When the connector is re-assembled, the secondary terminal lock must be placed in the locked position to prevent terminal push out. 4. Replace dress cover (if applicable). 5. Connect connector to its mating half/component. 6. Connect battery and test all affected systems. Removal REMOVAL 1. Disconnect the battery. 2. Locate the diode in the harness, and remove the protective covering. 3. Remove the diode from the harness, pay attention to the current flow direction (1) (2) (3). Installation INSTALLATION 1. Remove the insulation from the wires in the harness. Only remove enough insulation to solder in the new diode. 2. Install the new diode in the harness, making sure current flow is correct. If necessary, refer to the appropriate wiring diagram for current flow. 3. Solder the connection together using rosin core type solder only. Do not use acid core solder. 4. Tape the diode to the harness using electrical tape. Make sure the diode is completely sealed from the elements. 5. Re-connect the battery and test affected systems. Removal REMOVAL 1. Follow steps for removing terminals described in the connector removal section. 2. Cut the wire 6 inches from the back of the connector. Installation INSTALLATION 1. Select a wire from the terminal repair kit that best matches the color and gage of the wire being repaired. 2. Cut the repair wire to the proper length and remove one-half (1/2) inch of insulation. 3. Splice the repair wire to the wire harness (see wire splicing procedure). See: Service Procedures/Wire Splicing 4. Insert the repaired wire into the connector. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Relays and Modules - A/T > Transmission Control System Relay, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7074 5. Install the connector locking wedge, if required, and reconnect the connector to its mating half/component. 6. Re-tape the wire harness starting at 1-1/2 inches behind the connector and 2 inches past the repair. 7. Connect battery and test all affected systems. Wire Splicing STANDARD PROCEDURE - WIRE SPLICING When splicing a wire, it is important that the correct gage be used as shown in the wiring diagrams. 1. Remove one-half (1/2) inch of insulation from each wire that needs to be spliced. 2. Place a piece of adhesive lined heat shrink tubing on one side of the wire. Make sure the tubing will be long enough to cover and seal the entire repair area. 3. Place the strands of wire overlapping each other inside of the splice clip (1). 4. Using crimping tool (1), Mopar p/n 05019912AA, crimp the splice clip and wires together. 5. Solder (3) the connection (2) together using rosin core type solder (1) only. CAUTION: DO NOT USE ACID CORE SOLDER. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Relays and Modules - A/T > Transmission Control System Relay, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7075 6. Center the heat shrink tubing (2) over the joint and heat using a heat gun. Heat the joint until the tubing is tightly sealed and sealant (1) comes out of both ends of the tubing. Special Tools WIRING/TERMINAL PROBING TOOL PACKAGE 6807 TERMINAL PICK TOOL SET 6680 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Relays and Modules - A/T > Transmission Control System Relay, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7076 TERMINAL REMOVING TOOLS 6932 AND 8638 TERMINAL REMOVING TOOL 6934 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Relays and Modules - A/T > Transmission Control System Relay, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7077 Transmission Control System Relay: Diagnostic Aids Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) Sensitive Devices STANDARD PROCEDURE - ELECTROSTATIC DISCHARGE (ESD) SENSITIVE DEVICES All ESD sensitive components are solid state and a symbol is used to indicate this. When handling any component with this symbol, comply with the following procedures to reduce the possibility of electrostatic charge build up on the body and inadvertent discharge into the component. If it is not known whether the part is ESD sensitive, assume that it is. 1. Always touch a known good ground before handling the part. This should be repeated while handling the part and more frequently after sliding across a seat, sitting down from a standing position, or walking a distance. 2. Avoid touching electrical terminals of the part, unless instructed to do so by a written procedure. 3. When using a voltmeter, be sure to connect the ground lead first. 4. Do not remove the part from it's protective packing until it is time to install the part. 5. Before removing the part from it's package, ground the package to a known good ground on the vehicle. Testing Of Voltage Potential STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING OF VOLTAGE POTENTIAL 1. Connect the ground lead of a voltmeter to a known good ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the voltmeter to the selected test point. The vehicle ignition may need to be turned ON to check voltage. Refer to the appropriate test procedure. Testing For Continuity Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Relays and Modules - A/T > Transmission Control System Relay, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7078 STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING FOR CONTINUITY 1. Remove the fuse (1) for the circuit being checked or, disconnect the battery. 2. Connect one lead of the ohmmeter to one side of the circuit being tested 3. Connect the other lead to the other end of the circuit being tested. Low or no resistance means good continuity. Testing For A Short To Ground STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING FOR A SHORT TO GROUND 1. Remove the fuse and disconnect all items involved with the fuse. 2. Connect a test light or a voltmeter across the terminals of the fuse. 3. Starting at the fuse block, wiggle the wiring harness about six to eight inches apart and watch the voltmeter/test lamp. 4. If the voltmeter registers voltage or the test lamp glows, there is a short to ground in that general area of the wiring harness. Testing For A Short To Ground On Fuses Powering Several Loads STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING FOR A SHORT TO GROUND ON FUSES POWERING SEVERAL LOADS 1. Refer to the wiring diagrams and disconnect or isolate all items on the suspected fused circuits. 2. Replace the blown fuse. 3. Supply power to the fuse by turning ON the ignition switch or re-connecting the battery. 4. Start connecting or energizing the items in the fuse circuit one at a time. When the fuse blows the circuit with the short to ground has been isolated. Testing For A Voltage Drop STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING FOR A VOLTAGE DROP Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Relays and Modules - A/T > Transmission Control System Relay, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7079 1. Connect the positive lead of the voltmeter to the side of the circuit closest to the battery. 2. Connect the other lead of the voltmeter to the other side of the switch, component or circuit. 3. Operate the item. 4. The voltmeter will show the difference in voltage between the two points. Troubleshooting Wiring Problems DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING - WIRING HARNESS TROUBLESHOOTING TOOLS When diagnosing a problem in an electrical circuit there are several common tools necessary. These tools are listed and explained below. - Jumper Wire - This is a test wire used to connect two points of a circuit. It can be used to bypass an open in a circuit. WARNING: Never use a jumper wire across a load, such as a motor, connected between a battery feed and ground. - Voltmeter - Used to check for voltage on a circuit. Always connect the black lead to a known good ground and the red lead to the positive side of the circuit. CAUTION: Most of the electrical components used in today's vehicles are Solid State. When checking voltages in these circuits, use a meter with a 10 - megohm or greater impedance rating. - Ohmmeter - Used to check the resistance between two points of a circuit. Low or no resistance in a circuit means good continuity. CAUTION: Most of the electrical components used in today's vehicles are Solid State. When checking resistance in these circuits use a meter with a 10 - megohm or greater impedance rating. In addition, make sure the power is disconnected from the circuit. Circuits that are powered up by the vehicle's electrical system can cause damage to the equipment and provide false readings. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Relays and Modules - A/T > Transmission Control System Relay, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7080 - Probing Tools - These tools are used for probing terminals in connectors. Select the proper size tool from Special Tool Package 6807, and insert the probing end (2) into the terminal being tested. Use the other end of the tool (1) to insert the meter probe. INTERMITTENT AND POOR CONNECTIONS Most intermittent electrical problems are caused by faulty electrical connections or wiring. It is also possible for a sticking component or relay to cause a problem. Before condemning a component or wiring assembly, check the following items. - Connectors are fully seated - Spread terminals, or terminal push out - Terminals in the wiring assembly are fully seated into the connector/component and locked into position - Dirt or corrosion on the terminals. Any amount of corrosion or dirt could cause an intermittent problem - Damaged connector/component casing exposing the item to dirt or moisture - Wire insulation that has rubbed through causing a short to ground - Some or all of the wiring strands broken inside of the insulation - Wiring broken inside of the insulation TROUBLESHOOTING WIRING PROBLEMS When troubleshooting wiring problems there are six steps which can aid in the procedure. The steps are listed and explained below. Always check for non-factory items added to the vehicle before doing any diagnosis. If the vehicle is equipped with these items, disconnect them to verify these add-on items are not the cause of the problem. 1. Verify the problem. 2. Verify any related symptoms. Do this by performing operational checks on components that are in the same circuit. Refer to the wiring diagrams. 3. Analyze the symptoms. Use the wiring diagrams to determine what the circuit is doing, where the problem most likely is occurring and where the diagnosis will continue. 4. Isolate the problem area. 5. Repair the problem area. 6. Verify the proper operation. For this step, check for proper operation of all items on the repaired circuit. Refer to the wiring diagrams. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Relays and Modules - A/T > Transmission Control System Relay, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7081 Transmission Control System Relay: Connector Views Component ID: 246 Component : RELAY-TRANSMISSION Connector: Name : RELAY-TRANSMISSION Color : # of pins : 4 Pin Circuit Description 1 A916 16RD FUSED B(+) 2 T16 16YL TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT 3 F916 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION RELAY OUTPUT 4 Z420 18BK GROUND Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Relays and Modules - A/T > Transmission Control System Relay, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Transmission Control System Relay: Description and Operation Description The Chrysler Corporation does not provide a description of the 545RFE Transmission control Relay for the 4.7/5.7L engine. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Relays and Modules - A/T > Transmission Control System Relay, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 7084 Transmission Control System Relay: Description and Operation Operation The Chrysler Corporation does not provide operation information for the 545RFE Transmission control Relay for the 4.7/5.7L engine platform. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Seals and Gaskets, A/T > System Information > Service and Repair > 42RLE Automatic Transmission Seals and Gaskets: Service and Repair 42RLE Automatic Transmission Removal REMOVAL 1. Remove the transfer case See: Transfer Case/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Transfer Case - Removal . 2. Using a screw mounted in a slide hammer, remove the adapter housing seal. Installation INSTALLATION 1. Install a new adapter housing seal with Universal Handle C-4171 and Seal Installer C-3860-A. 2. Install the transfer case See: Transfer Case/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Transfer Case - Installation . Removal REMOVAL 1. Raise vehicle. 2. Mark propeller shaft and axle yoke, or companion flange, for alignment reference. 3. Disconnect and remove propeller shaft. 4. Remove old seal with a generic seal remover (1) from overdrive extension housing. Installation INSTALLATION 1. Place seal in position on overdrive housing. 2. Drive seal into overdrive housing with Seal Installer C-3995-A (1). 3. Carefully guide propeller shaft slip yoke into housing and onto output shaft splines. Align marks made at removal and connect propeller shaft to rear axle pinion yoke. Removal REMOVAL 1. Remove the transmission from the vehicle See: Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/42RLE Automatic Transmission/Removal . 2. Remove the torque converter from the transmission bellhousing. 3. Use a screw mounted in a slide hammer to remove oil pump seal. Installation INSTALLATION Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Seals and Gaskets, A/T > System Information > Service and Repair > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 7089 1. Clean and inspect oil pump seal seat. Then install seal using Seal Installer C-4193-A. 2. Clean and inspect torque converter hub. If nicks, scratches or hub wear are found, torque converter replacement will be required. CAUTION: If the torque converter is being replaced, apply a light coating of grease to the crankshaft pilot hole. Also inspect the engine drive plate for cracks. If any cracks are found replace the drive plate. Do not attempt to repair a cracked drive plate. Always use new torque converter to drive plate bolts. 3. Apply a light film of transmission oil to the torque converter hub and oil seal lips. Then install torque converter into transmission. Be sure that the hub lugs mesh with the front pump lugs when installing. 4. Reinstall the transmission into the vehicle. See: Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/42RLE Automatic Transmission/Installation Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Seals and Gaskets, A/T > System Information > Service and Repair > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 7090 Seals and Gaskets: Service and Repair 545RFE Automatic Transmission Removal REMOVAL 1. Remove the transfer case from the transmission. 2. Using a screw mounted on a slide hammer, remove the adapter housing seal. Installation INSTALLATION 1. Clean the adapter seal bore in the adapter housing of any residue or particles remaining from the original seal. 2. Install new oil seal in the adapter housing using Seal Installer C-3860-A (1). A properly installed seal is flush to the face of the seal bore. 3. Install the transfer case onto the transmission. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Seals and Gaskets, A/T > System Information > Service and Repair > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 7091 Seals and Gaskets: Service and Repair 68RFE Automatic Transmission Removal REMOVAL 1. On 4WD vehicles remove the transfer case from the transmission, on 2WD vehicles remove the propeller shaft. 2. Using a pry tool, remove the output shaft seal. Installation INSTALLATION NOTE: On the 2WD models use Seal Installer 8154 with Handle C-4171. 1. Clean the seal bore in the extension housing of any residue or particles remaining from the original seal. 2. Install new oil seal in the extension housing using Handle C-4171 (1) and Seal Installer 10020 (2). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Seals and Gaskets, A/T > System Information > Service and Repair > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 7092 Seals and Gaskets: Service and Repair 48RE Automatic Transmission Removal REMOVAL 1. Raise vehicle. 2. Mark propeller shaft and axle yoke for alignment reference. 3. Disconnect and remove propeller shaft. 4. Remove old seal with a screw mounted in a slide hammer. Installation INSTALLATION 1. Place seal in position on overdrive housing. 2. Drive seal into overdrive housing with Seal Installer 8154 (1) or 9037 (1) if equipped with a dust boot and Handle C-4171. 3. Carefully guide propeller shaft slip yoke into housing and onto output shaft splines. Align marks made at removal and connect propeller shaft to rear axle pinion yoke. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Seals and Gaskets, A/T > System Information > Service and Repair > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 7093 Seals and Gaskets: Service and Repair AS68RC Automatic Transmission Removal REMOVAL 1. Remove the transmission from the vehicle. See: Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/AS68RC Automatic Transmission/Removal 2. Remove the torque converter from the transmission torque converter housing. See: Torque Converter/Service and Repair/AS68RC Automatic Transmission/Removal 3. Use a pry tool to remove oil pump seal. Installation INSTALLATION NOTE: Apply trans jell or petroleum jelly to all slide portions, rolling contacts surfaces, thrust surfaces etc. to prevent burnout during initial operation. Lubricate O-rings and O-ring seals with MOPAR(R) AS68RC ATF. Soak all friction disks in MOPAR(R) AS68RC ATF for at least two hours before assembly of clutch packs. 1. Clean and inspect oil pump seal seat. Then install seal using Converter Hub Seal Installer 9987. 2. Clean and inspect torque converter hub. If nicks, scratches or hub wear are found, torque converter replacement will be required. CAUTION: If the torque converter is being replaced, apply a light coating of grease to the crankshaft pilot hole. Also inspect the engine drive plate for cracks. If any cracks are found replace the drive plate. Do not attempt to repair a cracked drive plate. Always use new torque converter to drive plate bolts. 3. Apply a light film of MOPAR(R) AS68RC ATF oil to the torque converter hub and oil seal lips. Then install torque converter into transmission. Be sure that the hub lugs mesh with the front pump lugs when installing. See: Torque Converter/Service and Repair/AS68RC Automatic Transmission/Installation 4. Install the transmission into the vehicle. See: Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/AS68RC Automatic Transmission/Installation Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Assembly-Line Pressure Sensor/Variable Force Solenoid Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch: Locations Assembly-Line Pressure Sensor/Variable Force Solenoid Component ID: 17 Component : ASSEMBLY-LINE PRESSURE SENSOR/VARIABLE FORCE SOLENOID Connector: Name : ASSEMBLY-LINE PRESSURE SENSOR/VARIABLE FORCE SOLENOID Color : BLACK # of pins : 6 Qualifier : (RLE) Pin Circuit Description 1-2 F856 20YL/PK 5 VOLT SUPPLY 3 T38 20YL/BR LINE PRESSURE SIGNAL 4 K900 20DB/DG SENSOR GROUND 5 T16 18YL/OR TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT 6 T118 20DG LP VFS CONTROL Component Location - 19 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Assembly-Line Pressure Sensor/Variable Force Solenoid > Page 7099 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Assembly-Line Pressure Sensor/Variable Force Solenoid > Page 7100 Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch: Locations Assembly-Transmission Solenoid/Pressure Switch Component ID: 20 Component : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID/PRESSURE SWITCH Connector: Name : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID/PRESSURE SWITCH Color : LT. BROWN # of pins : 10 Qualifier : (RLE) Pin Circuit Description 1 T60 20YL/GY OD CONTROL 2 T59 20YL/LB UD CONTROL 3 T16 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT 4 T19 18YL/DB 2-4 CONTROL 5 T47 18YL/DG 2-4 PRESSURE SIGNAL 6 T9 20DG/TN OD PRESSURE SIGNAL 7 T20 20DG/WT L/R CONTROL 8-9-10 T50 20YL/TN L/R PRESSURE SIGNAL Component Location - 19 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Assembly-Line Pressure Sensor/Variable Force Solenoid > Page 7101 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Assembly-Line Pressure Sensor/Variable Force Solenoid > Page 7102 Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch: Locations Sensor-Line Pressure Component ID: 425 Component : SENSOR-LINE PRESSURE Connector: Name : SENSOR-LINE PRESSURE Color : BLACK # of pins : 4 Qualifier : (RFE) Pin Circuit Description 1 T160 20DG/WT SENSOR GROUND Pin Circuit Description 1 K900 20DB/DG SENSOR GROUND 2 F856 20YL/PK 5 VOLT SUPPLY 3 T38 20YL/BR LINE PRESSURE SIGNAL 4-- Component Location - 23 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Assembly-Line Pressure Sensor/Variable Force Solenoid > Page 7103 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Assembly-Line Pressure Sensor/Variable Force Solenoid Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch: Diagrams Assembly-Line Pressure Sensor/Variable Force Solenoid Component ID: 17 Component : ASSEMBLY-LINE PRESSURE SENSOR/VARIABLE FORCE SOLENOID Connector: Name : ASSEMBLY-LINE PRESSURE SENSOR/VARIABLE FORCE SOLENOID Color : BLACK # of pins : 6 Qualifier : (RLE) Pin Circuit Description 1-2 F856 20YL/PK 5 VOLT SUPPLY 3 T38 20YL/BR LINE PRESSURE SIGNAL 4 K900 20DB/DG SENSOR GROUND 5 T16 18YL/OR TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT 6 T118 20DG LP VFS CONTROL Component Location - 19 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Assembly-Line Pressure Sensor/Variable Force Solenoid > Page 7106 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Assembly-Line Pressure Sensor/Variable Force Solenoid > Page 7107 Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch: Diagrams Assembly-Transmission Solenoid/Pressure Switch Component ID: 20 Component : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID/PRESSURE SWITCH Connector: Name : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID/PRESSURE SWITCH Color : LT. BROWN # of pins : 10 Qualifier : (RLE) Pin Circuit Description 1 T60 20YL/GY OD CONTROL 2 T59 20YL/LB UD CONTROL 3 T16 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT 4 T19 18YL/DB 2-4 CONTROL 5 T47 18YL/DG 2-4 PRESSURE SIGNAL 6 T9 20DG/TN OD PRESSURE SIGNAL 7 T20 20DG/WT L/R CONTROL 8-9-10 T50 20YL/TN L/R PRESSURE SIGNAL Component Location - 19 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Assembly-Line Pressure Sensor/Variable Force Solenoid > Page 7108 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Assembly-Line Pressure Sensor/Variable Force Solenoid > Page 7109 Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch: Diagrams Sensor-Line Pressure Component ID: 425 Component : SENSOR-LINE PRESSURE Connector: Name : SENSOR-LINE PRESSURE Color : BLACK # of pins : 4 Qualifier : (RFE) Pin Circuit Description 1 T160 20DG/WT SENSOR GROUND Pin Circuit Description 1 K900 20DB/DG SENSOR GROUND 2 F856 20YL/PK 5 VOLT SUPPLY 3 T38 20YL/BR LINE PRESSURE SIGNAL 4-- Component Location - 23 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Assembly-Line Pressure Sensor/Variable Force Solenoid > Page 7110 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > 42RLE Automatic Transmission Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch: Description and Operation 42RLE Automatic Transmission Description DESCRIPTION The line pressure sensor (2) is mounted on the top of the valve body, next to the pressure control solenoid (1). The TCM utilizes a closed-loop system to control transmission line pressure. The system contains a variable force style solenoid, the Pressure Control Solenoid. The solenoid is duty cycle controlled by the TCM to vent the unnecessary line pressure supplied by the oil pump back to the sump. The system also contains a variable pressure style sensor, the Line Pressure Sensor, which is a direct input to the TCM. The line pressure solenoid monitors the transmission line pressure and completes the feedback loop to the TCM. The TCM uses this information to adjust its control of the pressure control solenoid to achieve the desired line pressure. Operation OPERATION The TCM calculates the desired line pressure based upon inputs from the transmission and engine. The TCM calculates the torque input to the transmission and uses that information as the primary input to the calculation. The line pressure is set to a predetermined value during shifts and when the transmission is in the PARK and NEUTRAL positions. This is done to ensure consistent shift quality. During all other operation, the actual line pressure is compared to the desired line pressure and adjustments are made to the pressure control solenoid duty cycle. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 7113 Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch: Description and Operation 545RFE Automatic Transmission Description DESCRIPTION The TCM utilizes a closed-loop system to control transmission line pressure. The system contains a variable force style solenoid, the Pressure Control Solenoid, which is part of the pressure switch assembly. The solenoid is duty cycle controlled by the TCM to vent the unnecessary line pressure supplied by the oil pump back to the pump inlet. The system contains a Line Pressure Sensor, which is a direct input to the TCM. The line pressure sensor monitors the transmission line pressure and completes the feedback loop to the TCM. The TCM uses this information to adjust its control of the pressure control solenoid to achieve the desired line pressure. Operation OPERATION The TCM calculates the desired line pressure based upon inputs from the transmission and engine. The TCM calculates the torque input to the transmission and uses that information as the primary input to the calculation. The line pressure is set to a predetermined value during shifts, to ensure consistent shift quality. During all other operation, the desired line pressure value is adjusted based on torque level and other transmission requirements. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 7114 Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch: Description and Operation 68RFE Automatic Transmission Description DESCRIPTION The TCM utilizes a closed-loop system to control transmission line pressure. The system contains a variable force style solenoid, the Pressure Control Solenoid, which is part of the pressure switch assembly. The solenoid is duty cycle controlled by the TCM to vent the unnecessary line pressure supplied by the oil pump back to the pump inlet. The system contains a Line Pressure Sensor, which is a direct input to the TCM. The line pressure sensor monitors the transmission line pressure and completes the feedback loop to the TCM. The TCM uses this information to adjust its control of the pressure control solenoid to achieve the desired line pressure. Operation OPERATION The TCM calculates the desired line pressure based upon inputs from the transmission and engine. The TCM calculates the torque input to the transmission and uses that information as the primary input to the calculation. The line pressure is set to a predetermined value during shifts, to ensure consistent shift quality. During all other operation, the desired line pressure value is adjusted based on torque level and other transmission requirements. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 42RLE Automatic Transmission Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch: Service and Repair 42RLE Automatic Transmission Removal REMOVAL 1. Remove the valve body from the transmission. See: Valve Body/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/42RLE Automatic Transmission/Removal 2. Remove the electrical connectors from the pressure control solenoid (1) and the line pressure sensor (2). 3. Remove the screws (6) holding the pressure control solenoid (1) and line pressure sensor (2) to the valve body. 4. Remove the pressure control solenoid and line pressure sensor from the valve body. Installation INSTALLATION 1. Install the pressure control solenoid (1) and line pressure sensor (2) into the valve body. 2. Install the screws (6) to hold the pressure control solenoid (1) and line pressure sensor (2) to the valve body. 3. Install the electrical connectors to the pressure control solenoid (1) and the line pressure sensor (2). 4. Install the valve body into the transmission. See: Valve Body/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/42RLE Automatic Transmission/Installation Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 7117 Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch: Service and Repair 545RFE Automatic Transmission Removal REMOVAL 1. Raise vehicle. 2. Place a suitable fluid catch pan under the transmission. 3. Remove the wiring connector from the line pressure sensor (2). 4. Remove the bolt holding the line pressure sensor (2) to the transmission case. 5. Remove the line pressure sensor (2) from the transmission case. Installation INSTALLATION 1. Install the line pressure sensor (2) into the transmission case. 2. Install the bolt to hold the line pressure sensor (2) into the transmission case. Tighten the bolt to 12 Nm (105 in.lbs.). 3. Install the wiring connector onto the line pressure sensor (2). 4. Verify the transmission fluid level. Add fluid as necessary. 5. Lower vehicle. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 7118 Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch: Service and Repair 68RFE Automatic Transmission Removal REMOVAL 1. Raise vehicle. 2. Place a suitable fluid catch pan under the transmission. 3. Remove the wiring connector from the line pressure sensor (2). 4. Remove the bolt holding the line pressure sensor (2) to the transmission case. 5. Remove the line pressure sensor (2) from the transmission case. Installation INSTALLATION 1. Install the line pressure sensor (2) into the transmission case. 2. Install the bolt to hold the line pressure sensor (2) into the transmission case. Tighten the bolt to 12 Nm (105 in.lbs.). 3. Install the wiring connector onto the line pressure sensor (2). 4. Verify the transmission fluid level. Add fluid as necessary. 5. Lower vehicle. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Overdrive Switch, A/T > Component Information > Locations Overdrive Switch: Locations Component ID: 514 Component : SWITCH-TOW/HAUL OVERDRIVE OFF Connector: Name : SWITCH-TOW/HAUL OVERDRIVE OFF Color : NATURAL # of pins : 6 Pin Circuit Description 123 T6 20DG TOW/HAUL OVERDRIVE OFF SWITCH SIGNAL 4 Z71 20LB/BK GROUND 5 T5 20DG/YL AUTOSTICK (ERS)-TOW/HAUL SIGNAL 6 T160 20DG/WT SENSOR GROUND Component Location - 47 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Overdrive Switch, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 7122 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Overdrive Switch, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 7123 Overdrive Switch: Diagrams Component ID: 514 Component : SWITCH-TOW/HAUL OVERDRIVE OFF Connector: Name : SWITCH-TOW/HAUL OVERDRIVE OFF Color : NATURAL # of pins : 6 Pin Circuit Description 123 T6 20DG TOW/HAUL OVERDRIVE OFF SWITCH SIGNAL 4 Z71 20LB/BK GROUND 5 T5 20DG/YL AUTOSTICK (ERS)-TOW/HAUL SIGNAL 6 T160 20DG/WT SENSOR GROUND Component Location - 47 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Overdrive Switch, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 7124 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Overdrive Switch, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 7125 Overdrive Switch: Testing and Inspection DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING - OVERDRIVE ELECTRICAL CONTROLS The tow/haul overdrive off switch, valve body solenoid, case connectors and related wiring can all be tested with a 12 volt test lamp or a volt/ohmmeter. Check continuity of each component when diagnosis indicates this is necessary. Switch and solenoid continuity should be checked whenever the transmission fails to shift into fourth gear range. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Overdrive Switch, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 42RLE Automatic Transmission Overdrive Switch: Service and Repair 42RLE Automatic Transmission Removal REMOVAL 1. Using a plastic trim tool, remove the tow/haul overdrive off switch retainer (2) from the shift lever (1). 2. Pull the switch (2) outwards to release it from the connector in the lever (1). Installation INSTALLATION NOTE: There is enough slack in the wire to pull out the connector from the lever. 1. Pull the connector (2) out of the lever (1) just enough to grasp it. CAUTION: Be careful not to bend the pins on the tow/haul overdrive off switch. Use care when installing the switch, as it is not indexed, and can be accidentally installed incorrectly. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Overdrive Switch, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 7128 2. Install the tow/haul overdrive off switch (3) into the connector (2). 3. Push the tow/haul overdrive off switch (3) and wiring into the shift lever (1). 4. Install the tow/haul overdrive off switch retainer onto the shift lever. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Overdrive Switch, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 7129 Overdrive Switch: Service and Repair 545RFE Automatic Transmission Removal REMOVAL 1. Using a plastic trim tool, remove the tow/haul overdrive off switch retainer (2) from the shift lever (1). 2. Pull the switch (2) outwards to release it from the connector in the lever (1). Installation INSTALLATION NOTE: There is enough slack in the wire to pull out the connector from the lever. 1. Pull the connector (2) out of the lever (1) just enough to grasp it. CAUTION: Be careful not to bend the pins on the tow/haul overdrive off switch. Use care when installing the switch, as it is not indexed, and can be accidentally installed incorrectly. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Overdrive Switch, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 7130 2. Install the tow/haul overdrive off switch (3) into the connector (2). 3. Push the tow/haul overdrive off switch (3) and wiring into the shift lever (1). 4. Install the tow/haul overdrive off switch retainer onto the shift lever. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Overdrive Switch, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 7131 Overdrive Switch: Service and Repair 48RE Automatic Transmission Removal REMOVAL 1. Using a plastic trim tool, remove the tow/haul overdrive off switch retainer (2) from the shift lever (1). 2. Pull the switch (2) outwards to release it from the connector in the lever (1). Installation INSTALLATION NOTE: There is enough slack in the wire to pull out the connector from the lever. 1. Pull the connector (2) out of the lever (1) just enough to grasp it. CAUTION: Be careful not to bend the pins on the tow/haul overdrive off switch. Use care when installing the switch, as it is not indexed, and can be accidentally installed incorrectly. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Overdrive Switch, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 7132 2. Install the tow/haul overdrive off switch (3) into the connector (2). 3. Push the tow/haul overdrive off switch (3) and wiring into the shift lever (1). 4. Install the tow/haul overdrive off switch retainer onto the shift lever. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Overdrive Switch, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 7133 Overdrive Switch: Service and Repair AS68RC Automatic Transmission Removal REMOVAL 1. Using a plastic trim tool, remove the tow/haul overdrive off switch retainer (2) from the shift lever (1). 2. Pull the switch (2) outwards to release it from the connector in the lever (1). Installation INSTALLATION NOTE: There is enough slack in the wire to pull out the connector from the lever. 1. Pull the connector (2) out of the lever (1) just enough to grasp it. CAUTION: Be careful not to bend the pins on the tow/haul overdrive off switch. Use care when installing the switch, as it is not indexed, and can be accidentally installed incorrectly. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Overdrive Switch, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 7134 2. Install the tow/haul overdrive off switch (3) into the connector (2). 3. Push the tow/haul overdrive off switch (3) and wiring into the shift lever (1). 4. Install the tow/haul overdrive off switch retainer onto the shift lever. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Shift Solenoid Position Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Shift Solenoid Position Sensor/Switch: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The transmission solenoid/TRS assembly is internal to the transmission and mounted on the valve body assembly. The assembly consists of six solenoids that control hydraulic pressure to the six friction elements (transmission clutches), and the torque converter clutch. The pressure control solenoid is located on the side of the solenoid/TRS assembly. The solenoid/TRS assembly also contains the Transmission Range Sensor (TRS) and five pressure switches that feed information to the TCM. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Shift Solenoid Position Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 7139 Shift Solenoid Position Sensor/Switch: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION SOLENOIDS Solenoids are used to control the L/R, 2C, 4C, OD, and UD friction elements. The reverse clutch is controlled by line pressure and the position of the manual valve in the valve body. All the solenoids are contained within the Solenoid and Pressure Switch Assembly. The solenoid and pressure switch assembly contains one additional solenoid, Multi-Select (MS), which serves primarily to provide 2nd and 3rd gear limp-in operation. The solenoids receive electrical power from the Transmission Control Relay through a single wire. The TCM energizes or operates the solenoids individually by grounding the return wire of the solenoid as necessary. When a solenoid is energized, the solenoid valve shifts, and a fluid passage is opened or closed (vented or applied), depending on its default operating state. The result is an apply or release of a frictional element. The MS and UD solenoids are normally applied to allow transmission limp-in in the event of an electrical failure. The continuity of the solenoids and circuits are periodically tested. Each solenoid is turned on or off depending on its current state. An inductive spike should be detected by the TCM during this test. If no spike is detected, the circuit is tested again to verify the failure. In addition to the periodic testing, the solenoid circuits are tested if a speed ratio or pressure switch error occurs. PRESSURE SWITCHES The TCM relies on five pressure switches to monitor fluid pressure in the L/R, 2C, 4C, UD, and OD hydraulic circuits. The primary purpose of these switches is to help the TCM detect when clutch circuit hydraulic failures occur. The switches close at 23 psi and open at 11 psi, and simply indicate whether or not pressure exists. The switches are continuously monitored by the TCM for the correct states (open or closed) in each gear as shown in the following charts and 545RFE PRESSURE SWITCH STATES: A Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) will set if the TCM senses any switch open or closed at the wrong time in a given gear. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Shift Solenoid Position Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Shift Solenoid Position Sensor/Switch: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL NOTE: If the Transmission Solenoid/TRS Assembly is being replaced, the Quick Learn Procedure must be performed. See: Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Transmission Control Module/TCM Quick Learn 1. Remove the valve body from the transmission. See: Valve Body/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/545RFE Automatic Transmission/Removal 2. Remove the bolts (1) holding the transmission solenoid/TRS assembly onto the valve body. 3. Separate the transmission solenoid/TRS assembly from the valve body. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Shift Solenoid Position Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 7142 Shift Solenoid Position Sensor/Switch: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION 1. Place TRS selector plate in the PARK position. 2. Position the transmission solenoid/TRS assembly onto the valve body. Be sure that both alignment dowels are fully seated in the valve body and that the TRS switch contacts are properly positioned in the selector plate 3. Install the bolts (1) to hold the transmission solenoid/TRS assembly onto the valve body. 4. Tighten the solenoid assembly screws adjacent to the arrows cast into the bottom of the valve body first. Tighten the screws to 6 Nm (50 in.lbs.). 5. Tighten the remainder of the solenoid assembly screws to 6 Nm (50 in.lbs.). 6. Install the valve body into the transmission. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Transmission Range Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Locations Sensor-Transmission Range Component ID: 444 Component : SENSOR-TRANSMISSION RANGE Connector: Name : SENSOR-TRANSMISSION RANGE Color : # of pins : 10 Qualifier : (RC) Pin Circuit Description 1 T825 20DG/YL TRS NEUTRAL SIGNAL 2 T3 20DG/DB TRS T3 SIGNAL 3 T828 20DG/DB TRS 1 SIGNAL 4 F1 20PK/WT FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (OFF-RUN-START) 5 T824 20YL/DB TRS PARK SIGNAL 6 Z157 16BK/LG GROUND 7 T42 20DG/YL TRS T42 SIGNAL 8 T827 20DG/LB TRS DRIVE SIGNAL 9 T826 20DG/DB TRS REVERSE SIGNAL 10 T41 20YL/DB TRS T41 SIGNAL (P/N) Component Location - 20 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Transmission Range > Page 7147 Component Location - 19 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Transmission Range > Page 7148 Component Location - 26 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Transmission Range > Page 7149 Connector: Name : SENSOR-TRANSMISSION RANGE Color : # of pins : 6 Qualifier : (RE) Pin Circuit Description 1-2 T117 20DG/YL TRS SIGNAL 3-4-- Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Transmission Range > Page 7150 5 T917 20YL/TN TRS RETURN 6 T41 20YL/DB TRS T41 SIGNAL (P/N) Component Location - 20 Component Location - 19 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Transmission Range > Page 7151 Component Location - 26 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Transmission Range > Page 7152 Connector: Name : SENSOR-TRANSMISSION RANGE Color : LT. GREEN # of pins : 10 Qualifier : (RLE) Pin Circuit Description 1 T16 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT 2-3 K900 20DB/DG SENSOR GROUND 4 T54 20DG/OR TRANSMISSION TEMPERATURE SIGNAL Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Transmission Range > Page 7153 5-6-7 T1 20DG/LB TRS T1 SIGNAL 8 T3 20DG/DB TRS T3 SIGNAL 9 T42 20DG/YL TRS T42 SIGNAL 10 T41 20YL/DB TRS T41 SIGNAL (P/N) Component Location - 20 Component Location - 19 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Transmission Range > Page 7154 Component Location - 26 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Transmission Range > Page 7155 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Transmission Range > Page 7156 Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Locations Assembly-Transmission Solenoid/TRS Component ID: 21 Component : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID/TRS Connector: Name : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID/TRS Color : BLACK # of pins : 23 Qualifier : (RFE) Pin Circuit Description 1-2 T20 20DG/WT L/R CONTROL 3-4 T41 20YL/DB TRS T41 SIGNAL (P/N) 5 T42 20DG/YL TRS T42 SIGNAL 6-- 7 T60 20YL/GY OD SOLENOID CONTROL 8 T3 20DG/DB TRS T3 SIGNAL 9 T1 20DG/LB TRS T1 SIGNAL 10 T16 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT 11 T48 20BR/YL 4C PRESSURE SIGNAL 12 T118 20DG LINE PRESSURE CONTROL 13 T4 20DG/RD TRS T2 SIGNAL 13 T4 20DG/LB TRS T2 SIGNAL 14 T50 20DG/PK L/R PRESSURE SIGNAL 14 T50 20YL/TN L/R PRESSURE SIGNAL 15 T147 20DG/YL 2C PRESSURE SIGNAL 16 T9 20DG/TN OD PRESSURE SIGNAL 17 T59 20YL/LB UD CONTROL 18 T29 20YL/WT UD PRESSURE SIGNAL 19 T259 20YL/DG 4C CONTROL 20 T219 20YL/LG 2C CONTROL 21 T140 20YL/GY MS CONTROL 22 T160 20DG/WT SENSOR GROUND 22 K900 20DB/DG SENSOR GROUND 23 T54 20DG/OR TRANSMISSION TEMPERATURE SIGNAL Component Location - 21 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Transmission Range > Page 7157 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Transmission Range Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Diagrams Sensor-Transmission Range Component ID: 444 Component : SENSOR-TRANSMISSION RANGE Connector: Name : SENSOR-TRANSMISSION RANGE Color : # of pins : 10 Qualifier : (RC) Pin Circuit Description 1 T825 20DG/YL TRS NEUTRAL SIGNAL 2 T3 20DG/DB TRS T3 SIGNAL 3 T828 20DG/DB TRS 1 SIGNAL 4 F1 20PK/WT FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (OFF-RUN-START) 5 T824 20YL/DB TRS PARK SIGNAL 6 Z157 16BK/LG GROUND 7 T42 20DG/YL TRS T42 SIGNAL 8 T827 20DG/LB TRS DRIVE SIGNAL 9 T826 20DG/DB TRS REVERSE SIGNAL 10 T41 20YL/DB TRS T41 SIGNAL (P/N) Component Location - 20 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Transmission Range > Page 7160 Component Location - 19 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Transmission Range > Page 7161 Component Location - 26 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Transmission Range > Page 7162 Connector: Name : SENSOR-TRANSMISSION RANGE Color : # of pins : 6 Qualifier : (RE) Pin Circuit Description 1-2 T117 20DG/YL TRS SIGNAL 3-4-- Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Transmission Range > Page 7163 5 T917 20YL/TN TRS RETURN 6 T41 20YL/DB TRS T41 SIGNAL (P/N) Component Location - 20 Component Location - 19 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Transmission Range > Page 7164 Component Location - 26 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Transmission Range > Page 7165 Connector: Name : SENSOR-TRANSMISSION RANGE Color : LT. GREEN # of pins : 10 Qualifier : (RLE) Pin Circuit Description 1 T16 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT 2-3 K900 20DB/DG SENSOR GROUND 4 T54 20DG/OR TRANSMISSION TEMPERATURE SIGNAL Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Transmission Range > Page 7166 5-6-7 T1 20DG/LB TRS T1 SIGNAL 8 T3 20DG/DB TRS T3 SIGNAL 9 T42 20DG/YL TRS T42 SIGNAL 10 T41 20YL/DB TRS T41 SIGNAL (P/N) Component Location - 20 Component Location - 19 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Transmission Range > Page 7167 Component Location - 26 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Transmission Range > Page 7168 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Transmission Range > Page 7169 Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Diagrams Assembly-Transmission Solenoid/TRS Component ID: 21 Component : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID/TRS Connector: Name : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID/TRS Color : BLACK # of pins : 23 Qualifier : (RFE) Pin Circuit Description 1-2 T20 20DG/WT L/R CONTROL 3-4 T41 20YL/DB TRS T41 SIGNAL (P/N) 5 T42 20DG/YL TRS T42 SIGNAL 6-- 7 T60 20YL/GY OD SOLENOID CONTROL 8 T3 20DG/DB TRS T3 SIGNAL 9 T1 20DG/LB TRS T1 SIGNAL 10 T16 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT 11 T48 20BR/YL 4C PRESSURE SIGNAL 12 T118 20DG LINE PRESSURE CONTROL 13 T4 20DG/RD TRS T2 SIGNAL 13 T4 20DG/LB TRS T2 SIGNAL 14 T50 20DG/PK L/R PRESSURE SIGNAL 14 T50 20YL/TN L/R PRESSURE SIGNAL 15 T147 20DG/YL 2C PRESSURE SIGNAL 16 T9 20DG/TN OD PRESSURE SIGNAL 17 T59 20YL/LB UD CONTROL 18 T29 20YL/WT UD PRESSURE SIGNAL 19 T259 20YL/DG 4C CONTROL 20 T219 20YL/LG 2C CONTROL 21 T140 20YL/GY MS CONTROL 22 T160 20DG/WT SENSOR GROUND 22 K900 20DB/DG SENSOR GROUND 23 T54 20DG/OR TRANSMISSION TEMPERATURE SIGNAL Component Location - 21 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Transmission Range > Page 7170 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > 42RLE Automatic Transmission Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Description and Operation 42RLE Automatic Transmission Description DESCRIPTION The Transmission Range Sensor (TRS) (2) is mounted to the top of the valve body inside the transmission and can only be serviced by removing the valve body assembly. The electrical connector extends through the transmission case. The Transmission Range Sensor (TRS) has four switch contacts that monitor shift lever position and send the information to the PCM. Operation OPERATION The Transmission Range Sensor (TRS) communicates shift lever position (SLP) to the TCM as a combination of open and closed switches. Each shift lever position has an assigned combination of switch states (open/closed) that the TCM receives from four sense circuits. The TCM interprets this information and determines the appropriate transmission gear position and shift schedule. Since there are four switches, there are 16 possible combinations of open and closed switches (codes). Seven of these codes are related to gear position and three are recognized as "between gear" codes. This results in six codes which should never occur. These are called "invalid" codes. An invalid code will result in a DTC, and the TCM will then determine the shift lever position based on pressure switch data. This allows reasonably normal transmission operation with a TRS failure. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 7173 Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Description and Operation 545RFE Automatic Transmission Description DESCRIPTION The Transmission Range Sensor (TRS) is part of the solenoid module, which is mounted to the top of the valve body inside the transmission. The Transmission Range Sensor (TRS) has five switch contact pins that: - Determine shift lever position - Supply ground to the Starter Relay in Park and Neutral only. - Supply +12 V to the backup lamps in Reverse only. The TRS also has an integrated temperature sensor (thermistor) that communicates transmission temperature to the TCM and PCM. Operation OPERATION The Transmission Range Sensor (TRS) communicates shift lever position to the TCM as a combination of open and closed switches. Each shift lever position has an assigned combination of switch states (open/closed) that the TCM receives from four sense circuits. The TCM interprets this information and determines the appropriate transmission gear position and shift schedule. There are many possible combinations of open and closed switches (codes). Seven of these possible codes are related to gear position and five are recognized as "between gear" codes. This results in many codes which should never occur. These are called "invalid" codes. An invalid code will result in a DTC, and the TCM will then determine the shift lever position based on pressure switch data. This allows reasonably normal transmission operation with a TRS failure. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 7174 Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Description and Operation 68RFE Automatic Transmission Description DESCRIPTION The Transmission Range Sensor (TRS) is part of the solenoid module, which is mounted to the top of the valve body inside the transmission. The Transmission Range Sensor (TRS) has five switch contact pins that: - Determine shift lever position - Supply ground to the Starter Relay in Park and Neutral only. The TRS also has an integrated temperature sensor (thermistor) that communicates transmission temperature to the TCM and PCM. Operation OPERATION The Transmission Range Sensor (TRS) communicates shift lever position to the TCM as a combination of open and closed switches. Each shift lever position has an assigned combination of switch states (open/closed) that the TCM receives from four sense circuits. The TCM interprets this information and determines the appropriate transmission gear position and shift schedule. There are many possible combinations of open and closed switches (codes). Five of these possible codes correspond to valid gear position, there are two codes for the neutral position and three are recognized as "between gear" codes. This results in many codes which should never occur. These are called "invalid" codes. An invalid code will result in a DTC, and the TCM will then determine the shift lever position based on pressure switch data. This allows reasonably normal transmission operation with a TRS failure. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 7175 Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Description and Operation 48RE Automatic Transmission Description DESCRIPTION The Transmission Range Sensor (TRS) has 3 primary functions: - Provide a PARK/NEUTRAL start signal to the engine controller and the starter relay. - Turn the Back-up lamps on when the transmission is in REVERSE and the engine (ignition) is on. - Provide a transmission range signal to the instrument cluster. The sensor is mounted in the transmission housing near the valve body, just above the pan rail. It's in the same position as the Park/Neutral switch on other transmissions. The TRS contacts a cammed surface on the manual valve lever. The cammed surface translates the rotational motion of the manual lever into the linear motion of the sensor. The cammed surface on the manual lever is comprised of two parts controlling the TRS signal: The insulator portion contacts the switch poppet when the manual lever is not in PARK or NEUTRAL. The manual lever itself contacts the poppet when the lever is in PARK or NEUTRAL; providing a ground for the signal from the starter relay and the appropriate engine controller. Operation OPERATION Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 7176 As the switch moves through its linear motion contacts slide across a circuit board which changes the resistance between the range sensing pins of the switch. A power supply on the instrument cluster provides a regulated voltage signal to the switch. The return signal is decoded by the cluster, which then controls the PRNDL display to correspond with the correct transmission range. A bus message of transmission range is also sent by the cluster. In REVERSE range a second contact set closes the circuit providing power to the reverse lamps. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 7177 Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Description and Operation AS68RC Automatic Transmission Description DESCRIPTION TRANSMISSION RANGE SENSOR The transmission range sensor (1) is mounted externally on the left side of the transmission case. Operation OPERATION The transmission range sensor prohibits the vehicle from starting in any gear other than park and neutral. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 7178 Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Testing and Inspection DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING - TRANSMISSION RANGE SENSOR (TRS) NOTE: For all circuit identification in the following steps, Refer to the appropriate Wiring Information. 1. Raise vehicle on suitable hoist. 2. Disconnect the vehicle's shift cable from the manual lever. 3. With the manual lever in the PARK position (the PARK position is with the manual lever moved to the full rearward position), measure the resistance between the Park/Neutral Position Sense pin of the TRS and the transmission case. The resistance should be less than 5 ohms. 4. With the manual lever in the NEUTRAL position (the NEUTRAL position is with the manual lever moved two detents forward of the full rearward position), measure the resistance between the Park/Neutral Position Sense pin of the TRS and the transmission case. The resistance should be less than 5 ohms. 5. If the resistance is greater than 5 ohms in either of the previous steps, check for a dirty contact between the tip of the TRS rod and the valve body manual lever. If the contact is OK, replace the TRS. 6. With the manual lever in the REVERSE position (the REVERSE position is with the manual lever moved one detent forward of the full rearward position), measure the resistance between the Fused Ignition Switch Output and the Back-up Lamp feed pins of the TRS. The resistance should be less than 5 ohms. If the resistance is greater than 5 ohms, replace the TRS. 7. With the manual lever in the PARK position (the PARK position is with the manual lever moved to the full rearward position), measure the resistance between the Transmission Range Sensor MUX and the Transmission Range Sensor 5V Supply pins of the TRS. The resistance should be 522.2 ohms. If the resistance is not correct, replace the TRS. 8. With the manual lever in the REVERSE position (the REVERSE position is with the manual lever moved one detent forward of the full rearward position), measure the resistance between the Transmission Range Sensor MUX and the Transmission Range Sensor 5V Supply pins of the TRS. The resistance should be 206.2 ohms. If the resistance is not correct, replace the TRS. 9. With the manual lever in the NEUTRAL position (the NEUTRAL position is with the manual lever moved two detents forward of the full rearward position), measure the resistance between the Transmission Range Sensor MUX and the Transmission Range Sensor 5V Supply pins of the TRS. The resistance should be 108.6 ohms. If the resistance is not correct, replace the TRS. 10. With the manual lever in the DRIVE position (the DRIVE position is with the manual lever moved three detents forward of the full rearward position), measure the resistance between the Transmission Range Sensor MUX and the Transmission Range Sensor 5V Supply pins of the TRS. The resistance should be 59.9 ohms. If the resistance is not correct, replace the TRS. 11. With the manual lever in the SECOND position (the SECOND position is with the manual lever moved one detent rearward of the full forward position), measure the resistance between the Transmission Range Sensor MUX and the Back-up Lamp feed pins of the TRS. The resistance should be 31.9 ohms. If the resistance is not correct, replace the TRS. 12. With the manual lever in the LOW position (the LOW position is with the manual lever moved to the full forward position), measure the resistance between the Transmission Range Sensor MUX and the Back-up Lamp feed pins of the TRS. The resistance should be 13.7 ohms. If the resistance is not correct, replace the TRS. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 42RLE Automatic Transmission Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Service and Repair 42RLE Automatic Transmission Removal REMOVAL 1. Remove valve body assembly from vehicle. See: Valve Body/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/42RLE Automatic Transmission/Removal 2. Remove the manual shaft seal (1). 3. Remove manual shaft/TRS retaining screw (1). 4. Slide TRS off of manual valve shaft. Installation INSTALLATION Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 7181 1. Install the TRS (2) to the manual shaft. Make sure TRS locating pin rests in manual valve bore slot. 2. Install the TRS/manual shaft retaining screw (1) and torque to 5 Nm (45 in. lbs.) torque. 3. Install the manual shaft seal (1). 4. Install valve body to the transmission. See: Valve Body/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/42RLE Automatic Transmission/Installation Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 7182 Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Service and Repair 48RE Automatic Transmission Removal REMOVAL 1. Raise vehicle and position drain pan under the transmission range sensor (TRS). 2. Move the transmission manual lever to the manual LOW position. The manual LOW position is with the manual lever in the forward-most detent. 3. Disengage the wiring connector from the TRS. 4. Remove the two screws holding the TRS to the TRS mounting bracket. 5. Remove the TRS (3) from the TRS mounting bracket by pulling it straight out of the bracket. 6. If necessary, loosen the TRS mounting bracket (2) in the transmission case using Adapter 8581 (3). 7. If necessary, remove the TRS mounting bracket (2) from the transmission case. Installation INSTALLATION Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 7183 1. Move the transmission manual shaft lever to the manual LOW position. 2. If necessary, install the TRS mounting bracket (2) into the transmission case. Using Adapter 8581 (3), tighten the mounting bracket to 34 Nm (300 in.lbs.). 3. Install the TRS (3) into the mounting bracket (2) with the wiring connector facing the front of the transmission. 4. Install the two screws to hold the TRS to the mounting bracket. Tighten the screws to 5 Nm (45 in.lbs.). 5. Verify proper sensor operation (1-4). 6. Move the transmission manual shaft lever to the PARK position. 7. Connect TRS wiring connector to the TRS and lower vehicle. 8. Refill the transmission fluid to the correct level. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 7184 Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Service and Repair AS68RC Automatic Transmission Removal REMOVAL NOTE: Be certain the transmission is in the park lock position. TRANSMISSION RANGE SENSOR 1. Remove the shift cable from the manual shift lever (2). 2. Disconnect the wire harness from the transmission range sensor. 3. Remove the two nuts (3) from the control shaft. TRS REMOVAL/INSTALLATION Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 7185 4. Pry open the tabs on the stake washer (5), remove the nut (3) and the stake washer (5). 5. Remove the bolts (2). 6. Remove the transmission range sensor (1) from the transmission control shaft (4). Installation INSTALLATION 1. Install the transmission range sensor (3) onto the control shaft (5). 2. Install the stake washer and the nut (4) and hand tighten. 3. With the transmission in neutral install the alignment tool 9983 (6) onto the control shaft (5) and into the alignment hole (1). 4. Install the bolts (2). 5. After aligning the transmission range sensor, tighten the bolts (2) 12.5 Nm (9 ft.lbs.) 6. Remove the alignment tool 9983 (6) 7. Tighten the control shaft nut to 7 Nm (62 in.lbs.) 8. Bend the tabs on the stake washer and nut (4) in at least two places to lock in position. TRANSMISSION RANGE SENSOR Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 7186 9. Install the manual shift lever (2) onto the control shaft. 10. Install the inner nut (3) onto the control shaft. Tighten the inner nut to 12.5 Nm (9 ft.lbs). 11. Install the outer nut (3) onto the control shaft. While holding the inner nut, tighten the outer not to 12.5 Nm (9 ft.lbs) Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Input Speed Transmission Speed Sensor: Locations Sensor-Input Speed Component ID 399 Component ID: 399 Component : SENSOR-INPUT SPEED Connector: Name : SENSOR-INPUT SPEED Color : # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (RC) Pin Circuit Description 1 T52 20DG/OR INPUT SPEED SIGNAL 2 T72 20YL/DB 8 VOLT SUPPLY Component Location - 21 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 7191 Component Location - 19 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 7192 Component Location - 26 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 7193 Connector: Name : SENSOR-INPUT SPEED Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (RFE/RLE) Pin Circuit Description 1 T52 20DG/OR INPUT SPEED SIGNAL 2 T13 20DG/VT SPEED SENSOR GROUND Component Location - 21 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 7194 Component Location - 19 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 7195 Component Location - 26 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 7196 Component ID 420 Component ID: 420 Component : SENSOR-INPUT SPEED Connector: Name : SENSOR-INPUT SPEED Color : # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (RC) Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 7197 Pin Circuit Description 1 T52 20DG/OR INPUT SPEED SIGNAL 2 T72 20YL/DB 8 VOLT SUPPLY Component Location - 21 Component Location - 19 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 7198 Component Location - 26 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 7199 Connector: Name : SENSOR-INPUT SPEED Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (RFE/RLE) Pin Circuit Description 1 T52 20DG/OR INPUT SPEED SIGNAL 2 T13 20DG/VT SPEED SENSOR GROUND Component Location - 21 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 7200 Component Location - 19 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 7201 Component Location - 26 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 7202 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 7203 Transmission Speed Sensor: Locations Sensor-Output Speed Component ID 400 Component ID: 400 Component : SENSOR-OUTPUT SPEED Connector: Name : SENSOR-OUTPUT SPEED Color : # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (RC) Pin Circuit Description 1 T14 20DG/BR OUTPUT SPEED SIGNAL 2 T72 20YL/DB 8 VOLT SUPPLY Component Location - 20 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 7204 Component Location - 21 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 7205 Component Location - 19 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 7206 Component Location - 26 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 7207 Connector: Name : SENSOR-OUTPUT SPEED Color : # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (RE) Pin Circuit Description 1 T14 18DG/BR OUTPUT SPEED SIGNAL 2 T13 18DG/VT SPEED SENSOR GROUND Component Location - 20 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 7208 Component Location - 21 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 7209 Component Location - 19 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 7210 Component Location - 26 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 7211 Connector: Name : SENSOR-OUTPUT SPEED Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (RFE/RLE) Pin Circuit Description 1 T14 20DG/BR OUTPUT SPEED SIGNAL Pin Circuit Description 1 T13 20DG/VT SPEED SENSOR GROUND Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 7212 2 T13 20DG/VT SPEED SENSOR GROUND 2 T14 20DG/BR OUTPUT SPEED SIGNAL Component Location - 20 Component Location - 21 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 7213 Component Location - 19 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 7214 Component Location - 26 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 7215 Component ID 430 Component ID: 430 Component : SENSOR-OUTPUT SPEED Connector: Name : SENSOR-OUTPUT SPEED Color : # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (RC) Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 7216 Pin Circuit Description 1 T14 20DG/BR OUTPUT SPEED SIGNAL 2 T72 20YL/DB 8 VOLT SUPPLY Component Location - 20 Component Location - 21 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 7217 Component Location - 19 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 7218 Component Location - 26 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 7219 Connector: Name : SENSOR-OUTPUT SPEED Color : # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (RE) Pin Circuit Description 1 T14 18DG/BR OUTPUT SPEED SIGNAL 2 T13 18DG/VT SPEED SENSOR GROUND Component Location - 20 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 7220 Component Location - 21 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 7221 Component Location - 19 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 7222 Component Location - 26 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 7223 Connector: Name : SENSOR-OUTPUT SPEED Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (RFE/RLE) Pin Circuit Description 1 T14 20DG/BR OUTPUT SPEED SIGNAL Pin Circuit Description 1 T13 20DG/VT SPEED SENSOR GROUND Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 7224 2 T13 20DG/VT SPEED SENSOR GROUND 2 T14 20DG/BR OUTPUT SPEED SIGNAL Component Location - 20 Component Location - 21 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 7225 Component Location - 19 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 7226 Component Location - 26 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 7227 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Input Speed Transmission Speed Sensor: Diagrams Sensor-Input Speed Component ID 399 Component ID: 399 Component : SENSOR-INPUT SPEED Connector: Name : SENSOR-INPUT SPEED Color : # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (RC) Pin Circuit Description 1 T52 20DG/OR INPUT SPEED SIGNAL 2 T72 20YL/DB 8 VOLT SUPPLY Component Location - 21 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 7230 Component Location - 19 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 7231 Component Location - 26 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 7232 Connector: Name : SENSOR-INPUT SPEED Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (RFE/RLE) Pin Circuit Description 1 T52 20DG/OR INPUT SPEED SIGNAL 2 T13 20DG/VT SPEED SENSOR GROUND Component Location - 21 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 7233 Component Location - 19 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 7234 Component Location - 26 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 7235 Component ID 420 Component ID: 420 Component : SENSOR-INPUT SPEED Connector: Name : SENSOR-INPUT SPEED Color : # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (RC) Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 7236 Pin Circuit Description 1 T52 20DG/OR INPUT SPEED SIGNAL 2 T72 20YL/DB 8 VOLT SUPPLY Component Location - 21 Component Location - 19 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 7237 Component Location - 26 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 7238 Connector: Name : SENSOR-INPUT SPEED Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (RFE/RLE) Pin Circuit Description 1 T52 20DG/OR INPUT SPEED SIGNAL 2 T13 20DG/VT SPEED SENSOR GROUND Component Location - 21 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 7239 Component Location - 19 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 7240 Component Location - 26 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 7241 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 7242 Transmission Speed Sensor: Diagrams Sensor-Output Speed Component ID 400 Component ID: 400 Component : SENSOR-OUTPUT SPEED Connector: Name : SENSOR-OUTPUT SPEED Color : # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (RC) Pin Circuit Description 1 T14 20DG/BR OUTPUT SPEED SIGNAL 2 T72 20YL/DB 8 VOLT SUPPLY Component Location - 20 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 7243 Component Location - 21 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 7244 Component Location - 19 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 7245 Component Location - 26 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 7246 Connector: Name : SENSOR-OUTPUT SPEED Color : # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (RE) Pin Circuit Description 1 T14 18DG/BR OUTPUT SPEED SIGNAL 2 T13 18DG/VT SPEED SENSOR GROUND Component Location - 20 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 7247 Component Location - 21 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 7248 Component Location - 19 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 7249 Component Location - 26 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 7250 Connector: Name : SENSOR-OUTPUT SPEED Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (RFE/RLE) Pin Circuit Description 1 T14 20DG/BR OUTPUT SPEED SIGNAL Pin Circuit Description 1 T13 20DG/VT SPEED SENSOR GROUND Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 7251 2 T13 20DG/VT SPEED SENSOR GROUND 2 T14 20DG/BR OUTPUT SPEED SIGNAL Component Location - 20 Component Location - 21 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 7252 Component Location - 19 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 7253 Component Location - 26 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 7254 Component ID 430 Component ID: 430 Component : SENSOR-OUTPUT SPEED Connector: Name : SENSOR-OUTPUT SPEED Color : # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (RC) Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 7255 Pin Circuit Description 1 T14 20DG/BR OUTPUT SPEED SIGNAL 2 T72 20YL/DB 8 VOLT SUPPLY Component Location - 20 Component Location - 21 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 7256 Component Location - 19 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 7257 Component Location - 26 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 7258 Connector: Name : SENSOR-OUTPUT SPEED Color : # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (RE) Pin Circuit Description 1 T14 18DG/BR OUTPUT SPEED SIGNAL 2 T13 18DG/VT SPEED SENSOR GROUND Component Location - 20 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 7259 Component Location - 21 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 7260 Component Location - 19 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 7261 Component Location - 26 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 7262 Connector: Name : SENSOR-OUTPUT SPEED Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (RFE/RLE) Pin Circuit Description 1 T14 20DG/BR OUTPUT SPEED SIGNAL Pin Circuit Description 1 T13 20DG/VT SPEED SENSOR GROUND Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 7263 2 T13 20DG/VT SPEED SENSOR GROUND 2 T14 20DG/BR OUTPUT SPEED SIGNAL Component Location - 20 Component Location - 21 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 7264 Component Location - 19 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 7265 Component Location - 26 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 7266 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > 42RLE Automatic Transmission Transmission Speed Sensor: Description and Operation 42RLE Automatic Transmission Description DESCRIPTION The Input (1) and Output (2) Speed Sensors are two-wire magnetic pickup devices that generate AC signals as rotation occurs. They are mounted in the left side of the transmission case and are considered primary inputs to the Transmission Control Module (TCM). Operation OPERATION The Input Speed Sensor provides information on how fast the input shaft is rotating. As the teeth of the input clutch hub pass by the sensor coil, an AC voltage is generated and sent to the TCM. The TCM interprets this information as input shaft rpm. The Output Speed Sensor generates an AC signal in a similar fashion, though its coil is excited by rotation of the rear planetary carrier lugs. The TCM interprets this information as output shaft rpm. The TCM compares the input and output speed signals to determine the following: - Transmission gear ratio - Speed ratio error detection - CVI calculation The TCM also compares the input speed signal and the engine speed signal to determine the following: - Torque converter clutch slippage - Torque converter element speed ratio Description DESCRIPTION Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 7269 The Input (1) and Output (2) Speed Sensors are two-wire magnetic pickup devices that generate AC signals as rotation occurs. They are mounted in the left side of the transmission case and are considered primary inputs to the Transmission Control Module (TCM). Operation OPERATION The Input Speed Sensor provides information on how fast the input shaft is rotating. As the teeth of the input clutch hub pass by the sensor coil, an AC voltage is generated and sent to the TCM. The TCM interprets this information as input shaft rpm. The Output Speed Sensor generates an AC signal in a similar fashion, though its coil is excited by rotation of the rear planetary carrier lugs. The TCM interprets this information as output shaft rpm. The TCM compares the input and output speed signals to determine the following: - Transmission gear ratio - Speed ratio error detection - CVI calculation The TCM also compares the input speed signal and the engine speed signal to determine the following: - Torque converter clutch slippage - Torque converter element speed ratio Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 7270 Transmission Speed Sensor: Description and Operation 545RFE Automatic Transmission Description DESCRIPTION The Input and Output Speed Sensors are two-wire magnetic pickup devices that generate AC signals as rotation occurs. They are mounted in the left side of the transmission case and are considered primary inputs to the Transmission Control Module (TCM). Operation OPERATION The Input Speed Sensor provides information on how fast the input shaft is rotating. As the teeth of the input clutch hub pass by the sensor coil, an AC voltage is generated and sent to the TCM. The TCM interprets this information as input shaft rpm. The Output Speed Sensor generates an AC signal in a similar fashion, though its coil is excited by rotation of the park gear teeth. The TCM interprets this information as output shaft rpm. The TCM compares the input and output speed signals to determine the following: - Transmission gear ratio - Speed ratio error detection - CVI calculation The TCM also compares the input speed signal and the engine speed signal to determine the following: - Torque converter clutch slippage - Torque converter element speed ratio Description DESCRIPTION The Input and Output Speed Sensors are two-wire magnetic pickup devices that generate AC signals as rotation occurs. They are mounted in the left side of the transmission case and are considered primary inputs to the Transmission Control Module (TCM). Operation OPERATION The Input Speed Sensor provides information on how fast the input shaft is rotating. As the teeth of the input clutch hub pass by the sensor coil, an AC voltage is generated and sent to the TCM. The TCM interprets this information as input shaft rpm. The Output Speed Sensor generates an AC signal in a similar fashion, though its coil is excited by rotation of the park gear teeth. The TCM interprets this information as output shaft rpm. The TCM compares the input and output speed signals to determine the following: - Transmission gear ratio - Speed ratio error detection - CVI calculation The TCM also compares the input speed signal and the engine speed signal to determine the following: - Torque converter clutch slippage - Torque converter element speed ratio Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 7271 Transmission Speed Sensor: Description and Operation 68RFE Automatic Transmission Description DESCRIPTION The Input and Output Speed Sensors are two-wire magnetic pickup devices that generate AC signals as rotation occurs. They are mounted in the left side of the transmission case and are considered primary inputs to the Transmission Control Module (TCM). Operation OPERATION The Input Speed Sensor provides information on how fast the input shaft is rotating. As the teeth of the input clutch hub pass by the sensor coil, an AC voltage is generated and sent to the TCM. The TCM interprets this information as input shaft rpm. The Output Speed Sensor generates an AC signal in a similar fashion, though its coil is excited by rotation of the park gear teeth. The TCM interprets this information as output shaft rpm. The TCM compares the input and output speed signals to determine the following: - Transmission gear ratio - Speed ratio error detection - CVI calculation The TCM also compares the input speed signal and the engine speed signal to determine the following: - Torque converter clutch slippage - Torque converter element speed ratio Description DESCRIPTION The Input and Output Speed Sensors are two-wire magnetic pickup devices that generate AC signals as rotation occurs. They are mounted in the left side of the transmission case and are considered primary inputs to the Transmission Control Module (TCM). Operation OPERATION The Input Speed Sensor provides information on how fast the input shaft is rotating. As the teeth of the input clutch hub pass by the sensor coil, an AC voltage is generated and sent to the TCM. The TCM interprets this information as input shaft rpm. The Output Speed Sensor generates an AC signal in a similar fashion, though its coil is excited by rotation of the park gear teeth. The TCM interprets this information as output shaft rpm. The TCM compares the input and output speed signals to determine the following: - Transmission gear ratio - Speed ratio error detection - CVI calculation The TCM also compares the input speed signal and the engine speed signal to determine the following: - Torque converter clutch slippage - Torque converter element speed ratio Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 7272 Transmission Speed Sensor: Description and Operation 48RE Automatic Transmission Description DESCRIPTION The speed sensor (1) is located in the overdrive gear case. The sensor is positioned over the park gear and monitors transmission output shaft rotating speed. Operation OPERATION Speed sensor signals are triggered by the park gear lugs as they rotate past the sensor pickup face. Input signals from the sensor are sent to the transmission control module for processing. Signals from this sensor are shared with the powertrain control module. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 7273 Transmission Speed Sensor: Description and Operation AS68RC Automatic Transmission Description DESCRIPTION INPUT AND OUTPUT SPEED SENSORS The Input and Output Speed Sensors are two-wire magnetic pickup devices that generate DC square wave signals as rotation occurs. They are mounted in the left side of the transmission case and are considered primary inputs to the Transmission Control Module (TCM). Operation OPERATION The Input Speed Sensor provides information on how fast the input shaft is rotating. As the "teeth" of the gear pass by the sensor coil, an DC square wave is generated and sent to the TCM. The TCM interprets this information as input shaft rpm. The Output Speed Sensor generates an DC signal in a similar fashion, though its coil is excited by rotation of the rear planetary carrier lugs. The TCM interprets this information as output shaft rpm. The TCM compares the input and output speed signals to determine the following: - Transmission gear ratio - Speed ratio error detection - CVI calculation The TCM also compares the input speed signal and the engine speed signal to determine the following: - Torque converter clutch slippage - Torque converter element speed ratio Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 42RLE Automatic Transmission Transmission Speed Sensor: Service and Repair 42RLE Automatic Transmission Removal REMOVAL 1. Raise vehicle. 2. Place a suitable fluid catch pan under the transmission. 3. Remove the wiring connector from the input speed sensor. NOTE: The speed sensor bolt has a sealing patch applied from the factory. Be sure to reuse the same bolt. 4. Remove the bolt holding the input speed sensor to the transmission case. 5. Remove the input speed sensor from the transmission case. Installation INSTALLATION 1. Install the input speed sensor (1) into the transmission case. NOTE: Before installing the speed sensor bolt, it will be necessary to replenish the sealing patch on the bolt using MOPAR(R) Lock & Seal Adhesive. 2. Install the bolt to hold the input speed sensor into the transmission case. Tighten the bolt to 9 Nm (80 in.lbs.). 3. Install the wiring connector onto the input speed sensor 4. Verify the transmission fluid level. Add fluid as necessary. 5. Lower vehicle. Removal REMOVAL Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 7276 1. Raise vehicle. 2. Place a suitable fluid catch pan under the transmission. 3. Remove the wiring connector from the output speed sensor (2). NOTE: The speed sensor bolt has a sealing patch applied from the factory. Be sure to reuse the same bolt. 4. Remove the bolt holding the output speed sensor to the transmission case. 5. Remove the output speed sensor (2) from the transmission case. Installation INSTALLATION 1. Install the output speed sensor (2) into the transmission case. NOTE: Before installing the speed sensor bolt, it will be necessary to replenish the sealing patch on the bolt using MOPAR(R) Lock & Seal Adhesive. 2. Install the bolt to hold the output speed sensor into the transmission case. Tighten the bolt to 9 Nm (80 in.lbs.). 3. Install the wiring connector onto the output speed sensor 4. Verify the transmission fluid level. Add fluid as necessary. 5. Lower vehicle. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 7277 Transmission Speed Sensor: Service and Repair 545RFE Automatic Transmission Removal REMOVAL 1. Raise vehicle. 2. Place a suitable fluid catch pan under the transmission. 3. Remove the wiring connector from the input speed sensor (3). 4. Remove the bolt holding the input speed sensor to the transmission case. 5. Remove the input speed sensor (3) from the transmission case. Installation INSTALLATION 1. Install the input speed sensor (3) into the transmission case. 2. Install the bolt to hold the input speed sensor (3) into the transmission case. Tighten the bolt to 12 Nm (105 in.lbs.). 3. Install the wiring connector onto the input speed sensor. 4. Verify the transmission fluid level. Add fluid as necessary. 5. Lower vehicle. Removal REMOVAL Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 7278 1. Raise vehicle. 2. Place a suitable fluid catch pan under the transmission. 3. Remove the wiring connector from the output speed sensor (1). 4. Remove the bolt holding the output speed sensor (1) to the transmission case. 5. Remove the output speed sensor (1) from the transmission case. Installation INSTALLATION 1. Install the output speed sensor (1) into the transmission case. 2. Install the bolt to hold the output speed sensor (1) into the transmission case. Tighten the bolt to 12 Nm (105 in.lbs.). 3. Install the wiring connector onto the output speed sensor (1). 4. Verify the transmission fluid level. Add fluid as necessary. 5. Lower vehicle. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 7279 Transmission Speed Sensor: Service and Repair 68RFE Automatic Transmission Removal REMOVAL 1. Raise vehicle. 2. Place a suitable fluid catch pan under the transmission. 3. Remove the wiring connector from the input speed sensor (3). 4. Remove the bolt holding the input speed sensor to the transmission case. 5. Remove the input speed sensor (3) from the transmission case. Installation INSTALLATION 1. Install the input speed sensor (3) into the transmission case. 2. Install the bolt to hold the input speed sensor (3) into the transmission case. Tighten the bolt to 12 Nm (105 in.lbs.). 3. Install the wiring connector onto the input speed sensor. 4. Verify the transmission fluid level. Add fluid as necessary. 5. Lower vehicle. Removal REMOVAL Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 7280 1. Raise vehicle. 2. Place a suitable fluid catch pan under the transmission. 3. Remove the wiring connector from the output speed sensor (1). 4. Remove the bolt holding the output speed sensor (1) to the transmission case. 5. Remove the output speed sensor (1) from the transmission case. Installation INSTALLATION 1. Install the output speed sensor (1) into the transmission case. 2. Install the bolt to hold the output speed sensor (1) into the transmission case. Tighten the bolt to 12 Nm (105 in.lbs.). 3. Install the wiring connector onto the output speed sensor (1). 4. Verify the transmission fluid level. Add fluid as necessary. 5. Lower vehicle. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 7281 Transmission Speed Sensor: Service and Repair AS68RC Automatic Transmission Output Speed Sensor OUTPUT SPEED SENSOR OUTPUT SPEED SENSOR 1. Raise and support the vehicle. 2. Place a suitable fluid catch pan under the transmission. 3. Remove the wiring connector from the output speed sensor. 4. Remove the bolt holding the output speed sensor to the transmission case. 5. Remove the output speed sensor from the transmission case. Input Speed Sensor INPUT SPEED SENSOR INPUT SPEED SENSOR 1. Raise and support the vehicle. 2. Place a suitable fluid catch pan under the transmission. 3. Remove the wiring connector from the input speed sensor. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 7282 4. Remove the bolt holding the input speed sensor to the transmission case. 5. Remove the input speed sensor from the transmission case. Output Speed Sensor OUTPUT SPEED SENSOR NOTE: Apply trans jell to all slide portions, rolling contacts surfaces, thrust surfaces etc. to prevent burnout during initial operation. Lubricate O-rings and O-ring seals with MOPAR(R) AS68RC ATF. Soak all friction disks in MOPAR(R) AS68RC ATF for at least two hours before assembly of clutch packs. OUTPUT SPEED SENSOR 1. Lubricate the output speed sensor o-ring with MOPAR(R) AS68RC ATF. 2. Install the output speed sensor into the transmission case. 3. Tighten the bolt to 8 Nm (70 in.lbs.). 4. Install the wiring connector onto the output speed sensor. 5. Lower vehicle. 6. Verify the transmission fluid level. Add MOPAR(R) AS68RC ATF as necessary. Input Speed Sensor INPUT SPEED SENSOR NOTE: Apply trans jell to all slide portions, rolling contacts surfaces, thrust surfaces etc. to prevent burnout during initial operation. Lubricate O-rings and O-ring seals with MOPAR(R) AS68RC ATF. Soak all friction disks in MOPAR(R) AS68RC ATF for at least two hours before assembly of clutch packs. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 7283 INPUT SPEED SENSOR 1. Lubricate the output speed sensor o-ring with MOPAR(R) AS68RC ATF. 2. Install the input speed sensor into the transmission case. 3. Tighten the bolt to 8 Nm (70 in.lbs.). 4. Install the electrical wiring connector onto the input speed sensor. 5. Lower vehicle. 6. Verify the transmission fluid level. Add MOPAR(R) AS68RC as necessary. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Locations Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch: Locations Component ID: 445 Component : SENSOR-TRANSMISSION TEMPERATURE Connector: Name : SENSOR-TRANSMISSION TEMPERATURE Color : # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (RC) Pin Circuit Description 1 T819 20YL/VT TCC TEMPERATURE SIGNAL 2 T820 20YL/WT TEMPERATURE SENSOR GROUND Component Location - 26 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 7287 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 7288 Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch: Diagrams Component ID: 445 Component : SENSOR-TRANSMISSION TEMPERATURE Connector: Name : SENSOR-TRANSMISSION TEMPERATURE Color : # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (RC) Pin Circuit Description 1 T819 20YL/VT TCC TEMPERATURE SIGNAL 2 T820 20YL/WT TEMPERATURE SENSOR GROUND Component Location - 26 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 7289 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > 545RFE Automatic Transmission Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch: Description and Operation 545RFE Automatic Transmission Description DESCRIPTION The Transmission Range Sensor (TRS) is part of the solenoid module, which is mounted to the top of the valve body inside the transmission. The Transmission Range Sensor (TRS) has five switch contact pins that: - Determine shift lever position - Supply ground to the Starter Relay in Park and Neutral only. - Supply +12 V to the backup lamps in Reverse only. The TRS also has an integrated temperature sensor (thermistor) that communicates transmission temperature to the TCM and PCM. Operation OPERATION The Transmission Range Sensor (TRS) communicates shift lever position to the TCM as a combination of open and closed switches. Each shift lever position has an assigned combination of switch states (open/closed) that the TCM receives from four sense circuits. The TCM interprets this information and determines the appropriate transmission gear position and shift schedule. There are many possible combinations of open and closed switches (codes). Seven of these possible codes are related to gear position and five are recognized as "between gear" codes. This results in many codes which should never occur. These are called "invalid" codes. An invalid code will result in a DTC, and the TCM will then determine the shift lever position based on pressure switch data. This allows reasonably normal transmission operation with a TRS failure. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > 545RFE Automatic Transmission > Page 7292 Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch: Description and Operation 68RFE Automatic Transmission Description DESCRIPTION The Transmission Range Sensor (TRS) is part of the solenoid module, which is mounted to the top of the valve body inside the transmission. The Transmission Range Sensor (TRS) has five switch contact pins that: - Determine shift lever position - Supply ground to the Starter Relay in Park and Neutral only. The TRS also has an integrated temperature sensor (thermistor) that communicates transmission temperature to the TCM and PCM. Operation OPERATION The Transmission Range Sensor (TRS) communicates shift lever position to the TCM as a combination of open and closed switches. Each shift lever position has an assigned combination of switch states (open/closed) that the TCM receives from four sense circuits. The TCM interprets this information and determines the appropriate transmission gear position and shift schedule. There are many possible combinations of open and closed switches (codes). Five of these possible codes correspond to valid gear position, there are two codes for the neutral position and three are recognized as "between gear" codes. This results in many codes which should never occur. These are called "invalid" codes. An invalid code will result in a DTC, and the TCM will then determine the shift lever position based on pressure switch data. This allows reasonably normal transmission operation with a TRS failure. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 42RLE Automatic Transmission Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch: Service and Repair 42RLE Automatic Transmission Removal REMOVAL 1. Remove valve body assembly from vehicle. See: Valve Body/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/42RLE Automatic Transmission/Removal 2. Remove the manual shaft seal (1). 3. Remove manual shaft/TRS retaining screw (1). 4. Slide TRS off of manual valve shaft. Installation INSTALLATION Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 7295 1. Install the TRS (2) to the manual shaft. Make sure TRS locating pin rests in manual valve bore slot. 2. Install the TRS/manual shaft retaining screw (1) and torque to 5 Nm (45 in. lbs.) torque. 3. Install the manual shaft seal (1). 4. Install valve body to the transmission. See: Valve Body/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/42RLE Automatic Transmission/Installation Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 7296 Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch: Service and Repair 48RE Automatic Transmission Removal REMOVAL 1. Raise vehicle and position drain pan under the transmission range sensor (TRS). 2. Move the transmission manual lever to the manual LOW position. The manual LOW position is with the manual lever in the forward-most detent. 3. Disengage the wiring connector from the TRS. 4. Remove the two screws holding the TRS to the TRS mounting bracket. 5. Remove the TRS (3) from the TRS mounting bracket by pulling it straight out of the bracket. 6. If necessary, loosen the TRS mounting bracket (2) in the transmission case using Adapter 8581 (3). 7. If necessary, remove the TRS mounting bracket (2) from the transmission case. Installation INSTALLATION Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 7297 1. Move the transmission manual shaft lever to the manual LOW position. 2. If necessary, install the TRS mounting bracket (2) into the transmission case. Using Adapter 8581 (3), tighten the mounting bracket to 34 Nm (300 in.lbs.). 3. Install the TRS (3) into the mounting bracket (2) with the wiring connector facing the front of the transmission. 4. Install the two screws to hold the TRS to the mounting bracket. Tighten the screws to 5 Nm (45 in.lbs.). 5. Verify proper sensor operation (1-4). 6. Move the transmission manual shaft lever to the PARK position. 7. Connect TRS wiring connector to the TRS and lower vehicle. 8. Refill the transmission fluid to the correct level. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 7298 Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch: Service and Repair AS68RC Automatic Transmission Removal REMOVAL NOTE: Be certain the transmission is in the park lock position. TRANSMISSION RANGE SENSOR 1. Remove the shift cable from the manual shift lever (2). 2. Disconnect the wire harness from the transmission range sensor. 3. Remove the two nuts (3) from the control shaft. TRS REMOVAL/INSTALLATION Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 7299 4. Pry open the tabs on the stake washer (5), remove the nut (3) and the stake washer (5). 5. Remove the bolts (2). 6. Remove the transmission range sensor (1) from the transmission control shaft (4). Installation INSTALLATION 1. Install the transmission range sensor (3) onto the control shaft (5). 2. Install the stake washer and the nut (4) and hand tighten. 3. With the transmission in neutral install the alignment tool 9983 (6) onto the control shaft (5) and into the alignment hole (1). 4. Install the bolts (2). 5. After aligning the transmission range sensor, tighten the bolts (2) 12.5 Nm (9 ft.lbs.) 6. Remove the alignment tool 9983 (6) 7. Tighten the control shaft nut to 7 Nm (62 in.lbs.) 8. Bend the tabs on the stake washer and nut (4) in at least two places to lock in position. TRANSMISSION RANGE SENSOR Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 7300 9. Install the manual shift lever (2) onto the control shaft. 10. Install the inner nut (3) onto the control shaft. Tighten the inner nut to 12.5 Nm (9 ft.lbs). 11. Install the outer nut (3) onto the control shaft. While holding the inner nut, tighten the outer not to 12.5 Nm (9 ft.lbs) Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T > Shift Interlock Solenoid > Component Information > Locations Shift Interlock Solenoid: Locations Component ID: 455 Component : SOLENOID-BRAKE TRANSMISSION SHIFT INTERLOCK Connector: Name : SOLENOID-BRAKE TRANSMISSION SHIFT INTERLOCK Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Pin Circuit Description 1 K32 18DB/YL BTSI SOLENOID CONTROL 2 Z101 18BK/VT GROUND Component Location - 47 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T > Shift Interlock Solenoid > Component Information > Locations > Page 7305 Component Location - 42 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T > Shift Interlock Solenoid > Component Information > Locations > Page 7306 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T > Shift Interlock Solenoid > Component Information > Locations > Page 7307 Shift Interlock Solenoid: Diagrams Component ID: 455 Component : SOLENOID-BRAKE TRANSMISSION SHIFT INTERLOCK Connector: Name : SOLENOID-BRAKE TRANSMISSION SHIFT INTERLOCK Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Pin Circuit Description 1 K32 18DB/YL BTSI SOLENOID CONTROL 2 Z101 18BK/VT GROUND Component Location - 47 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T > Shift Interlock Solenoid > Component Information > Locations > Page 7308 Component Location - 42 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T > Shift Interlock Solenoid > Component Information > Locations > Page 7309 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Assembly-Transmission Solenoid Shift Solenoid: Locations Assembly-Transmission Solenoid Component ID 15 Component ID: 15 Component : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID Connector: Name : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID Color : # of pins : 8 Qualifier : (RE) Pin Circuit Description 1 T16 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT 2 F856 18YL/PK 5 VOLT SUPPLY 3 K900 20DB/DG SENSOR GROUND 4 T38 18YL/BR GOVERNOR PRESSURE SENSOR SIGNAL 5 T118 18DG GOVERNOR PRESSURE SOLENOID CONTROL 6 T9 18DG/TN 3-4 SOLENOID CONTROL 7 T75 18YL/LB TORQUE CONVERTER CLUTCH SOLENOID CONTROL 8 T54 18DG/OR TRANSMISSION TEMPERATURE SIGNAL Component Location - 20 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Assembly-Transmission Solenoid > Page 7314 Component Location - 26 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Assembly-Transmission Solenoid > Page 7315 Connector: Name : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID C1 Color : # of pins : 10 Qualifier : (RC) Pin Circuit Description 1 T806 20DG/VT PRESSURE SIGNAL 7 2 T804 20YL/DB PRESSURE SIGNAL 5 3 T54 20DG/OR TRANSMISSION TEMPERATURE SIGNAL 4 T817 20YL/BR LINEAR 3 CONTROL Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Assembly-Transmission Solenoid > Page 7316 5 T813 20DG/LG LINEAR 1 CONTROL 6 T807 20DG/WT PRESSURE SIGNAL 8 7 T803 20DG/BR PRESSURE SIGNAL 4 8 T820 20YL/WT TEMPERATURE SENSOR GROUND 9 T816 20YL/PK LINEAR 3 GROUND 10 T812 20DG/TN LINEAR 1 GROUND Component Location - 20 Component Location - 26 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Assembly-Transmission Solenoid > Page 7317 Connector: Name : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID C2 Color : # of pins : 12 Qualifier : (RC) Pin Circuit Description 1 T800 20DG/BR PRESSURE SIGNAL 1 2 T805 20DG/OR PRESSURE SIGNAL 6 3 T809 20DG/YL SHIFT 2 CONTROL 4 T811 20DG/LB SHIFT 4 CONTROL Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Assembly-Transmission Solenoid > Page 7318 5 T818 20YL/OR LINEAR 4 GROUND 6 T814 20YL/BR LINEAR 2 GROUND 7 T801 20DG/RD PRESSURE SIGNAL 2 8 T802 20DG/PK PRESSURE SIGNAL 3 9 T810 20DG/DB SHIFT 3 CONTROL 10 T808 20DG/GY SHIFT 1 CONTROL 11 T821 20YL/GY LINEAR 4 CONTROL 12 T815 20YL/RD LINEAR 2 CONTROL Component Location - 20 Component Location - 26 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Assembly-Transmission Solenoid > Page 7319 Component ID 19 Component ID: 19 Component : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID Connector: Name : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID Color : # of pins : 8 Qualifier : (RE) Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Assembly-Transmission Solenoid > Page 7320 Pin Circuit Description 1 T16 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT 2 F856 18YL/PK 5 VOLT SUPPLY 3 K900 20DB/DG SENSOR GROUND 4 T38 18YL/BR GOVERNOR PRESSURE SENSOR SIGNAL 5 T118 18DG GOVERNOR PRESSURE SOLENOID CONTROL 6 T9 18DG/TN 3-4 SOLENOID CONTROL 7 T75 18YL/LB TORQUE CONVERTER CLUTCH SOLENOID CONTROL 8 T54 18DG/OR TRANSMISSION TEMPERATURE SIGNAL Component Location - 20 Component Location - 26 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Assembly-Transmission Solenoid > Page 7321 Connector: Name : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID C1 Color : # of pins : 10 Qualifier : (RC) Pin Circuit Description 1 T806 20DG/VT PRESSURE SIGNAL 7 2 T804 20YL/DB PRESSURE SIGNAL 5 3 T54 20DG/OR TRANSMISSION TEMPERATURE SIGNAL 4 T817 20YL/BR LINEAR 3 CONTROL Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Assembly-Transmission Solenoid > Page 7322 5 T813 20DG/LG LINEAR 1 CONTROL 6 T807 20DG/WT PRESSURE SIGNAL 8 7 T803 20DG/BR PRESSURE SIGNAL 4 8 T820 20YL/WT TEMPERATURE SENSOR GROUND 9 T816 20YL/PK LINEAR 3 GROUND 10 T812 20DG/TN LINEAR 1 GROUND Component Location - 20 Component Location - 26 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Assembly-Transmission Solenoid > Page 7323 Connector: Name : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID C2 Color : # of pins : 12 Qualifier : (RC) Pin Circuit Description 1 T800 20DG/BR PRESSURE SIGNAL 1 2 T805 20DG/OR PRESSURE SIGNAL 6 3 T809 20DG/YL SHIFT 2 CONTROL 4 T811 20DG/LB SHIFT 4 CONTROL Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Assembly-Transmission Solenoid > Page 7324 5 T818 20YL/OR LINEAR 4 GROUND 6 T814 20YL/BR LINEAR 2 GROUND 7 T801 20DG/RD PRESSURE SIGNAL 2 8 T802 20DG/PK PRESSURE SIGNAL 3 9 T810 20DG/DB SHIFT 3 CONTROL 10 T808 20DG/GY SHIFT 1 CONTROL 11 T821 20YL/GY LINEAR 4 CONTROL 12 T815 20YL/RD LINEAR 2 CONTROL Component Location - 20 Component Location - 26 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Assembly-Transmission Solenoid > Page 7325 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Assembly-Transmission Solenoid > Page 7326 Shift Solenoid: Locations Assembly-Transmission Solenoid/Pressure Switch Component ID: 20 Component : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID/PRESSURE SWITCH Connector: Name : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID/PRESSURE SWITCH Color : LT. BROWN # of pins : 10 Qualifier : (RLE) Pin Circuit Description 1 T60 20YL/GY OD CONTROL 2 T59 20YL/LB UD CONTROL 3 T16 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT 4 T19 18YL/DB 2-4 CONTROL 5 T47 18YL/DG 2-4 PRESSURE SIGNAL 6 T9 20DG/TN OD PRESSURE SIGNAL 7 T20 20DG/WT L/R CONTROL 8-9-10 T50 20YL/TN L/R PRESSURE SIGNAL Component Location - 19 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Assembly-Transmission Solenoid > Page 7327 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Assembly-Transmission Solenoid > Page 7328 Shift Solenoid: Locations Assembly-Transmission Solenoid/TRS Component ID: 21 Component : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID/TRS Connector: Name : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID/TRS Color : BLACK # of pins : 23 Qualifier : (RFE) Pin Circuit Description 1-2 T20 20DG/WT L/R CONTROL 3-4 T41 20YL/DB TRS T41 SIGNAL (P/N) 5 T42 20DG/YL TRS T42 SIGNAL 6-- 7 T60 20YL/GY OD SOLENOID CONTROL 8 T3 20DG/DB TRS T3 SIGNAL 9 T1 20DG/LB TRS T1 SIGNAL 10 T16 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT 11 T48 20BR/YL 4C PRESSURE SIGNAL 12 T118 20DG LINE PRESSURE CONTROL 13 T4 20DG/RD TRS T2 SIGNAL 13 T4 20DG/LB TRS T2 SIGNAL 14 T50 20DG/PK L/R PRESSURE SIGNAL 14 T50 20YL/TN L/R PRESSURE SIGNAL 15 T147 20DG/YL 2C PRESSURE SIGNAL 16 T9 20DG/TN OD PRESSURE SIGNAL 17 T59 20YL/LB UD CONTROL 18 T29 20YL/WT UD PRESSURE SIGNAL 19 T259 20YL/DG 4C CONTROL 20 T219 20YL/LG 2C CONTROL 21 T140 20YL/GY MS CONTROL 22 T160 20DG/WT SENSOR GROUND 22 K900 20DB/DG SENSOR GROUND 23 T54 20DG/OR TRANSMISSION TEMPERATURE SIGNAL Component Location - 21 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Assembly-Transmission Solenoid > Page 7329 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Assembly-Transmission Solenoid Shift Solenoid: Diagrams Assembly-Transmission Solenoid Component ID 15 Component ID: 15 Component : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID Connector: Name : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID Color : # of pins : 8 Qualifier : (RE) Pin Circuit Description 1 T16 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT 2 F856 18YL/PK 5 VOLT SUPPLY 3 K900 20DB/DG SENSOR GROUND 4 T38 18YL/BR GOVERNOR PRESSURE SENSOR SIGNAL 5 T118 18DG GOVERNOR PRESSURE SOLENOID CONTROL 6 T9 18DG/TN 3-4 SOLENOID CONTROL 7 T75 18YL/LB TORQUE CONVERTER CLUTCH SOLENOID CONTROL 8 T54 18DG/OR TRANSMISSION TEMPERATURE SIGNAL Component Location - 20 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Assembly-Transmission Solenoid > Page 7332 Component Location - 26 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Assembly-Transmission Solenoid > Page 7333 Connector: Name : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID C1 Color : # of pins : 10 Qualifier : (RC) Pin Circuit Description 1 T806 20DG/VT PRESSURE SIGNAL 7 2 T804 20YL/DB PRESSURE SIGNAL 5 3 T54 20DG/OR TRANSMISSION TEMPERATURE SIGNAL 4 T817 20YL/BR LINEAR 3 CONTROL Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Assembly-Transmission Solenoid > Page 7334 5 T813 20DG/LG LINEAR 1 CONTROL 6 T807 20DG/WT PRESSURE SIGNAL 8 7 T803 20DG/BR PRESSURE SIGNAL 4 8 T820 20YL/WT TEMPERATURE SENSOR GROUND 9 T816 20YL/PK LINEAR 3 GROUND 10 T812 20DG/TN LINEAR 1 GROUND Component Location - 20 Component Location - 26 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Assembly-Transmission Solenoid > Page 7335 Connector: Name : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID C2 Color : # of pins : 12 Qualifier : (RC) Pin Circuit Description 1 T800 20DG/BR PRESSURE SIGNAL 1 2 T805 20DG/OR PRESSURE SIGNAL 6 3 T809 20DG/YL SHIFT 2 CONTROL 4 T811 20DG/LB SHIFT 4 CONTROL Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Assembly-Transmission Solenoid > Page 7336 5 T818 20YL/OR LINEAR 4 GROUND 6 T814 20YL/BR LINEAR 2 GROUND 7 T801 20DG/RD PRESSURE SIGNAL 2 8 T802 20DG/PK PRESSURE SIGNAL 3 9 T810 20DG/DB SHIFT 3 CONTROL 10 T808 20DG/GY SHIFT 1 CONTROL 11 T821 20YL/GY LINEAR 4 CONTROL 12 T815 20YL/RD LINEAR 2 CONTROL Component Location - 20 Component Location - 26 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Assembly-Transmission Solenoid > Page 7337 Component ID 19 Component ID: 19 Component : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID Connector: Name : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID Color : # of pins : 8 Qualifier : (RE) Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Assembly-Transmission Solenoid > Page 7338 Pin Circuit Description 1 T16 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT 2 F856 18YL/PK 5 VOLT SUPPLY 3 K900 20DB/DG SENSOR GROUND 4 T38 18YL/BR GOVERNOR PRESSURE SENSOR SIGNAL 5 T118 18DG GOVERNOR PRESSURE SOLENOID CONTROL 6 T9 18DG/TN 3-4 SOLENOID CONTROL 7 T75 18YL/LB TORQUE CONVERTER CLUTCH SOLENOID CONTROL 8 T54 18DG/OR TRANSMISSION TEMPERATURE SIGNAL Component Location - 20 Component Location - 26 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Assembly-Transmission Solenoid > Page 7339 Connector: Name : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID C1 Color : # of pins : 10 Qualifier : (RC) Pin Circuit Description 1 T806 20DG/VT PRESSURE SIGNAL 7 2 T804 20YL/DB PRESSURE SIGNAL 5 3 T54 20DG/OR TRANSMISSION TEMPERATURE SIGNAL 4 T817 20YL/BR LINEAR 3 CONTROL Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Assembly-Transmission Solenoid > Page 7340 5 T813 20DG/LG LINEAR 1 CONTROL 6 T807 20DG/WT PRESSURE SIGNAL 8 7 T803 20DG/BR PRESSURE SIGNAL 4 8 T820 20YL/WT TEMPERATURE SENSOR GROUND 9 T816 20YL/PK LINEAR 3 GROUND 10 T812 20DG/TN LINEAR 1 GROUND Component Location - 20 Component Location - 26 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Assembly-Transmission Solenoid > Page 7341 Connector: Name : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID C2 Color : # of pins : 12 Qualifier : (RC) Pin Circuit Description 1 T800 20DG/BR PRESSURE SIGNAL 1 2 T805 20DG/OR PRESSURE SIGNAL 6 3 T809 20DG/YL SHIFT 2 CONTROL 4 T811 20DG/LB SHIFT 4 CONTROL Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Assembly-Transmission Solenoid > Page 7342 5 T818 20YL/OR LINEAR 4 GROUND 6 T814 20YL/BR LINEAR 2 GROUND 7 T801 20DG/RD PRESSURE SIGNAL 2 8 T802 20DG/PK PRESSURE SIGNAL 3 9 T810 20DG/DB SHIFT 3 CONTROL 10 T808 20DG/GY SHIFT 1 CONTROL 11 T821 20YL/GY LINEAR 4 CONTROL 12 T815 20YL/RD LINEAR 2 CONTROL Component Location - 20 Component Location - 26 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Assembly-Transmission Solenoid > Page 7343 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Assembly-Transmission Solenoid > Page 7344 Shift Solenoid: Diagrams Assembly-Transmission Solenoid/Pressure Switch Component ID: 20 Component : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID/PRESSURE SWITCH Connector: Name : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID/PRESSURE SWITCH Color : LT. BROWN # of pins : 10 Qualifier : (RLE) Pin Circuit Description 1 T60 20YL/GY OD CONTROL 2 T59 20YL/LB UD CONTROL 3 T16 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT 4 T19 18YL/DB 2-4 CONTROL 5 T47 18YL/DG 2-4 PRESSURE SIGNAL 6 T9 20DG/TN OD PRESSURE SIGNAL 7 T20 20DG/WT L/R CONTROL 8-9-10 T50 20YL/TN L/R PRESSURE SIGNAL Component Location - 19 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Assembly-Transmission Solenoid > Page 7345 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Assembly-Transmission Solenoid > Page 7346 Shift Solenoid: Diagrams Assembly-Transmission Solenoid/TRS Component ID: 21 Component : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID/TRS Connector: Name : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID/TRS Color : BLACK # of pins : 23 Qualifier : (RFE) Pin Circuit Description 1-2 T20 20DG/WT L/R CONTROL 3-4 T41 20YL/DB TRS T41 SIGNAL (P/N) 5 T42 20DG/YL TRS T42 SIGNAL 6-- 7 T60 20YL/GY OD SOLENOID CONTROL 8 T3 20DG/DB TRS T3 SIGNAL 9 T1 20DG/LB TRS T1 SIGNAL 10 T16 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT 11 T48 20BR/YL 4C PRESSURE SIGNAL 12 T118 20DG LINE PRESSURE CONTROL 13 T4 20DG/RD TRS T2 SIGNAL 13 T4 20DG/LB TRS T2 SIGNAL 14 T50 20DG/PK L/R PRESSURE SIGNAL 14 T50 20YL/TN L/R PRESSURE SIGNAL 15 T147 20DG/YL 2C PRESSURE SIGNAL 16 T9 20DG/TN OD PRESSURE SIGNAL 17 T59 20YL/LB UD CONTROL 18 T29 20YL/WT UD PRESSURE SIGNAL 19 T259 20YL/DG 4C CONTROL 20 T219 20YL/LG 2C CONTROL 21 T140 20YL/GY MS CONTROL 22 T160 20DG/WT SENSOR GROUND 22 K900 20DB/DG SENSOR GROUND 23 T54 20DG/OR TRANSMISSION TEMPERATURE SIGNAL Component Location - 21 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Assembly-Transmission Solenoid > Page 7347 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > 42RLE Automatic Transmission Shift Solenoid: Description and Operation 42RLE Automatic Transmission Description DESCRIPTION The Solenoid/Pressure Switch Assembly (1) is inside the transmission and mounted to the valve body assembly. The assembly consists of four solenoids that control hydraulic pressure to the L/R, 2/4, OD, and UD friction elements (transmission clutches), and the torque converter clutch. The reverse clutch is controlled by line pressure from the manual valve in the valve body. The solenoids are contained within the Solenoid/Pressure Switch Assembly, and can only be serviced by replacing the assembly. The solenoid assembly also contains pressure switches that monitor and send hydraulic circuit information to the TCM. Likewise, the pressure switches can only be service by replacing the assembly. Operation OPERATION SOLENOIDS The solenoids receive electrical power from the Transmission Control Relay through a single wire. The TCM energizes or operates the solenoids individually by grounding the return wire of the solenoid needed. When a solenoid is energized, the solenoid valve shifts, and a fluid passage is opened or closed (vented or applied), depending on its default operating state. The result is an apply or release of a frictional element. The 2/4 and UD solenoids are normally applied, which allows fluid to pass through in their relaxed or "off" state. By design, this allows transmission limp-in (P,R,N,2) in the event of an electrical failure. The continuity of the solenoids and circuits are periodically tested. Each solenoid is turned on or off depending on its current state. An inductive spike should be detected by the TCM during this test. If no spike is detected, the circuit is tested again to verify the failure. In addition to the periodic testing, the solenoid circuits are tested if a speed ratio or pressure switch error occurs. PRESSURE SWITCHES The TCM relies on three pressure switches to monitor fluid pressure in the L/R, 2/4, and OD hydraulic circuits. The primary purpose of these switches is to help the TCM detect when clutch circuit hydraulic failures occur. The range for the pressure switch closing and opening points is 11-23 psi. Typically the switch opening point will be approximately one psi lower than the closing point. For example, a switch may close at 18 psi and open at 17 psi. The switches are continuously monitored by the TCM for the correct states (open or closed) in each gear as shown in the following chart: Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 7350 A Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) will set if the TCM senses any switch open or closed at the wrong time in a given gear. The TCM also tests the 2/4 and OD pressure switches when they are normally off (OD and 2/4 are tested in 1st gear, OD in 2nd gear, and 2/4 in 3rd gear). The test simply verifies that they are operational, by looking for a closed state when the corresponding element is applied. Immediately after a shift into 1st, 2nd, or 3rd gear with the engine speed above 1000 rpm, the TCM momentarily turns on element pressure to the 2/4 and/or OD clutch circuits to identify that the appropriate switch has closed. If it doesn't close, it is tested again. If the switch fails to close the second time, the appropriate Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) will set. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 7351 Shift Solenoid: Description and Operation 545RFE Automatic Transmission Description DESCRIPTION The transmission solenoid/TRS assembly is internal to the transmission and mounted on the valve body assembly. The assembly consists of six solenoids that control hydraulic pressure to the six friction elements (transmission clutches), and the torque converter clutch. The pressure control solenoid is located on the side of the solenoid/TRS assembly. The solenoid/TRS assembly also contains the Transmission Range Sensor (TRS) and five pressure switches that feed information to the TCM. Operation OPERATION SOLENOIDS Solenoids are used to control the L/R, 2C, 4C, OD, and UD friction elements. The reverse clutch is controlled by line pressure and the position of the manual valve in the valve body. All the solenoids are contained within the Solenoid and Pressure Switch Assembly. The solenoid and pressure switch assembly contains one additional solenoid, Multi-Select (MS), which serves primarily to provide 2nd and 3rd gear limp-in operation. The solenoids receive electrical power from the Transmission Control Relay through a single wire. The TCM energizes or operates the solenoids individually by grounding the return wire of the solenoid as necessary. When a solenoid is energized, the solenoid valve shifts, and a fluid passage is opened or closed (vented or applied), depending on its default operating state. The result is an apply or release of a frictional element. The MS and UD solenoids are normally applied to allow transmission limp-in in the event of an electrical failure. The continuity of the solenoids and circuits are periodically tested. Each solenoid is turned on or off depending on its current state. An inductive spike should be detected by the TCM during this test. If no spike is detected, the circuit is tested again to verify the failure. In addition to the periodic testing, the solenoid circuits are tested if a speed ratio or pressure switch error occurs. PRESSURE SWITCHES The TCM relies on five pressure switches to monitor fluid pressure in the L/R, 2C, 4C, UD, and OD hydraulic circuits. The primary purpose of these switches is to help the TCM detect when clutch circuit hydraulic failures occur. The switches close at 23 psi and open at 11 psi, and simply indicate whether or not pressure exists. The switches are continuously monitored by the TCM for the correct states (open or closed) in each gear as shown in the following charts and 545RFE PRESSURE SWITCH STATES: Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 7352 A Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) will set if the TCM senses any switch open or closed at the wrong time in a given gear. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 7353 Shift Solenoid: Description and Operation 68RFE Automatic Transmission Description DESCRIPTION The transmission solenoid/TRS assembly is internal to the transmission and mounted on the valve body assembly. The assembly consists of six solenoids that control hydraulic pressure to the six friction elements (transmission clutches), and the torque converter clutch. The pressure control solenoid is located on the side of the solenoid/TRS assembly. The solenoid/TRS assembly also contains the Transmission Range Sensor (TRS) and five pressure switches that feed information to the TCM. Operation OPERATION SOLENOIDS Solenoids are used to control the L/R, 2C, 4C, OD, and UD friction elements. The reverse clutch is controlled by line pressure and the position of the manual valve in the valve body. All the solenoids are contained within the Solenoid and Pressure Switch Assembly. The solenoid and pressure switch assembly contains one additional solenoid, Multi-Select (MS), which serves primarily to provide 3rd gear and reverse limp-in operation. The TCM energizes or operates the solenoids individually by grounding the return wire of the solenoid as necessary. When a solenoid is energized, the solenoid valve shifts, and a fluid passage is opened or closed (vented or applied), depending on its default operating state. The result is an apply or release of a frictional element. The MS and UD solenoids are normally applied to allow transmission limp-in in the event of an electrical failure. The continuity of the solenoids and circuits are periodically tested. Each solenoid is turned on or off depending on its current state. An inductive spike should be detected by the TCM during this test. If no spike is detected, the circuit is tested again to verify the failure. In addition to the periodic testing, the solenoid circuits are tested if a speed ratio or pressure switch error occurs. PRESSURE SWITCHES The TCM relies on five pressure switches to monitor fluid pressure in the L/R, 2C, 4C, UD, and OD hydraulic circuits. The primary purpose of these switches is to help the TCM detect when clutch circuit hydraulic failures occur. The switches close at 23 psi and open at 11 psi, and simply indicate whether or not pressure exists. The switches are continuously monitored by the TCM for the correct states (open or closed) in each gear as shown in the following charts and Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 7354 A Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) will set if the TCM senses any switch open or closed at the wrong time in a given gear. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 42RLE Automatic Transmission Shift Solenoid: Service and Repair 42RLE Automatic Transmission Removal REMOVAL NOTE: If the Solenoid/Pressure Switch Assembly is being replaced, the Quick Learn Procedure must be performed. See: Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Transmission Control Module/TCM Quick Learn 1. Raise vehicle on hoist. 2. Remove valve body assembly from transmission. See: Valve Body/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/42RLE Automatic Transmission/Removal 3. Remove Solenoid/Pressure Switch Assembly retaining screws (2) from solenoid. 4. Remove Solenoid/Pressure Switch Assembly (1) and screen from valve body (2). Installation INSTALLATION NOTE: If the Solenoid/Pressure Switch assembly is being replaced, the Quick Learn Procedure must be performed. See: Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Transmission Control Module/TCM Quick Learn Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 7357 1. Install Solenoid/Pressure Switch Assembly (1) and screen (3) to the separator and transfer plates. 2. Install and tighten retaining screws (2) to 5.5 Nm (50 in. lbs.) torque. 3. Install valve body. See: Valve Body/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/42RLE Automatic Transmission/Installation Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 7358 Shift Solenoid: Service and Repair 545RFE Automatic Transmission Removal REMOVAL NOTE: If the Transmission Solenoid/TRS Assembly is being replaced, the Quick Learn Procedure must be performed. See: Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Transmission Control Module/TCM Quick Learn 1. Remove the valve body from the transmission. See: Valve Body/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/545RFE Automatic Transmission/Removal 2. Remove the bolts (1) holding the transmission solenoid/TRS assembly onto the valve body. 3. Separate the transmission solenoid/TRS assembly from the valve body. Installation INSTALLATION Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 7359 1. Place TRS selector plate in the PARK position. 2. Position the transmission solenoid/TRS assembly onto the valve body. Be sure that both alignment dowels are fully seated in the valve body and that the TRS switch contacts are properly positioned in the selector plate 3. Install the bolts (1) to hold the transmission solenoid/TRS assembly onto the valve body. 4. Tighten the solenoid assembly screws adjacent to the arrows cast into the bottom of the valve body first. Tighten the screws to 6 Nm (50 in.lbs.). 5. Tighten the remainder of the solenoid assembly screws to 6 Nm (50 in.lbs.). 6. Install the valve body into the transmission. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 7360 Shift Solenoid: Service and Repair 68RFE Automatic Transmission Removal REMOVAL NOTE: If the Transmission Solenoid/TRS Assembly is being replaced, the Quick Learn Procedure must be performed. See: Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Transmission Control Module/TCM Quick Learn 1. Remove the valve body from the transmission. 2. Remove the bolts (1) holding the transmission solenoid/TRS assembly onto the valve body. 3. Separate the transmission solenoid/TRS assembly from the valve body. Installation INSTALLATION Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 7361 1. Place TRS selector plate in the PARK position. 2. Position the transmission solenoid/TRS assembly onto the valve body. Be sure that both alignment dowels are fully seated in the valve body and that the TRS switch contacts are properly positioned in the selector plate 3. Install the bolts (1) to hold the transmission solenoid/TRS assembly onto the valve body. 4. Tighten the solenoid assembly screws adjacent to the arrows cast into the bottom of the valve body first. Tighten the screws to 6 Nm (50 in.lbs.). 5. Tighten the remainder of the solenoid assembly screws to 6 Nm (50 in.lbs.). 6. Install the valve body into the transmission. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shifter A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > 42RLE Automatic Transmission Shifter A/T: Description and Operation 42RLE Automatic Transmission Description DESCRIPTION The gear shift mechanism provides six shift positions which are: - Park (P) - Reverse (R) - Neutral (N) - Drive (D) - Manual second (2) - Manual low (1) Operation OPERATION MANUAL LOW (1) range provides FIRST gear only. Overrun braking is also provided in this range. MANUAL SECOND (2) range provides FIRST and SECOND gear only. DRIVE range provides FIRST, SECOND, THIRD and OVERDRIVE FOURTH gear ranges. The shift into OVERDRIVE FOURTH gear range occurs only after the transmission has completed the shift into D THIRD gear range. No further movement of the shift mechanism is required to complete the 3-4 shift. The FOURTH gear upshift occurs automatically when the overdrive selector switch is in the ON position. An upshift to FOURTH gear may not occur or may be delayed in some of the possible shift schedules. See: Control Module/Description and Operation/Transmission Control Module Operation Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shifter A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 7366 Shifter A/T: Description and Operation 545RFE Automatic Transmission Description DESCRIPTION The gear shift mechanism provides six shift positions which are: - Park (P) - Reverse (R) - Neutral (N) - Drive (D) - Manual second (2) - Manual low (1) Operation OPERATION MANUAL LOW (1) range provides first gear only. Maximum engine braking is also provided in this range. MANUAL SECOND (2) range provides first and second gear only. DRIVE range provides FIRST, SECOND, THIRD, OVERDRIVE FOURTH, and OVERDRIVE FIFTH gear ranges. The shift into OVERDRIVE FOURTH and FIFTH gear ranges occurs only after the transmission has completed the shift into D THIRD gear range. No further movement of the shift mechanism is required to complete the 3-4 or 4-5 shifts. The FOURTH and FIFTH gear upshifts occur automatically unless the Tow/Haul or OD Off mode is enabled. No upshift to FOURTH or FIFTH gears will occur if any of the following are true: - The transmission fluid temperature is below 10° C (50° F) or above 121° C (250° F). - The shift to THIRD is not yet complete. - Vehicle speed is too low for the 3-4 or 4-5 shifts to occur. Upshifts into FOURTH or FIFTH will be delayed when the transmission fluid temperature is below 4.5° C (40° F) or above 115.5° C (240° F). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shifter A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 7367 Shifter A/T: Description and Operation 68RFE Automatic Transmission Description DESCRIPTION The gear shift mechanism provides four shift positions which are: - Park (P) - Reverse (R) - Neutral (N) - Drive (D) Operation OPERATION Drive range provides underdrive FIRST, SECOND and THIRD gears, direct FOURTH gear and overdrive FIFTH and SIXTH gears. The shift into overdrive FIFTH and SIXTH gear occurs only after the transmission has completed the shift into FOURTH gear. No other movement of the shift mechanism is required to complete the 4-5 or 5-6 gear shifts. The FOURTH and FIFTH gear upshift occurs automatically unless the Tow/Haul mode is enabled. Upshifts into both overdrive gears, FIFTH and SIXTH, will be delayed when the transmission fluid temperature is below 4.5° C (40° F) or above 115.5° C (240° F). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shifter A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 7368 Shifter A/T: Description and Operation 48RE Automatic Transmission Description DESCRIPTION The gear shift mechanism provides six shift positions which are: - PARK (P) - REVERSE (R) - NEUTRAL (N) - DRIVE (D) - Manual SECOND (2) - Manual LOW (1) Operation OPERATION Manual LOW (1) range provides first gear only. Overrun braking is also provided in this range. Manual SECOND (2) range provides first and second gear only. DRIVE range provides first, second, third, and overdrive fourth gear ranges. The shift into overdrive fourth gear range occurs only after the transmission has completed the shift into D third gear range. No further movement of the shift mechanism is required to complete the 3-4 shift. The fourth gear upshift occurs automatically when the overdrive selector switch is in the ON position. No upshift to fourth gear will occur if any of the following are true: - The transmission fluid temperature is below 10° C (50° F) or above 121° C (250° F). - The shift to third is not yet complete. - Vehicle speed is too low for the 3-4 shift to occur. - Battery temperature is below -5° C (23° F). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shifter A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 7369 Shifter A/T: Description and Operation AS68RC Automatic Transmission Description DESCRIPTION The gear shift mechanism provides seven shift positions which are: - Park (P) - Reverse (R) - Neutral (N) - Drive (D) - Manual Third (3) - Manual second (2) - Manual low (1) Operation OPERATION MANUAL LOW (1) range provides first gear only. Maximum engine braking is also provided in this range. MANUAL SECOND (2) range provides first and second gear only. MANUAL THIRD range provides first, second and third gear only. DRIVE range provides FIRST, SECOND, THIRD, FOURTH, OVERDRIVE FIFTH, OVERDRIVE SIXTH gear ranges. The shift into OVERDRIVE FOURTH and FIFTH gear ranges occurs only after the transmission has completed the shift into D THIRD gear range. The SIXTH gear upshifts occur automatically unless the Tow/Haul or OD Off mode is enabled. No upshift to FIFTH or SIXTH gears will occur if any of the following are true: - The transmission fluid temperature is below 5° C (41° F). - The shift to Fourth is not yet complete. - Vehicle speed is too low for the 4-5 or 5-6 shifts to occur. - Transfer case is in low range. Upshifts into FOURTH or FIFTH will be delayed when the transmission fluid temperature is below 4.5° C (40° F) or above 115.5° C (240° F). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Linkage, A/T > Shift Cable, A/T > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > 42RLE Automatic Transmission Shift Cable: Testing and Inspection 42RLE Automatic Transmission DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING - GEARSHIFT CABLE 1. Engine starts must be possible with shift lever in PARK or NEUTRAL positions only. Engine starts must not be possible in any other gear position. 2. With the shift lever in the: a. PARK position - Apply upward force on the shift arm and remove pressure. Engine starts must be possible. b. PARK position - Apply downward force on the shift arm and remove pressure. Engine starts must be possible. c. NEUTRAL position - Normal position. Engine starts must be possible. d. NEUTRAL position - Engine running and brakes applied, apply upward force on the shift arm. Transmission shall not be able to shift from neutral to reverse. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Linkage, A/T > Shift Cable, A/T > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 7375 Shift Cable: Testing and Inspection 545RFE Automatic Transmission DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING - GEARSHIFT CABLE 1. Engine starts must be possible with shift lever in PARK or NEUTRAL positions only. Engine starts must not be possible in any other gear position. 2. With the shift lever in the: a. PARK position - Apply upward force on the shift arm and remove pressure. Engine starts must be possible. b. PARK position - Apply downward force on the shift arm and remove pressure. Engine starts must be possible. c. NEUTRAL position - Normal position. Engine starts must be possible. d. NEUTRAL position - Engine running and brakes applied, apply upward force on the shift arm. Transmission shall not be able to shift from neutral to reverse. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Linkage, A/T > Shift Cable, A/T > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 7376 Shift Cable: Testing and Inspection 68RFE Automatic Transmission DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING - GEARSHIFT CABLE 1. Engine starts must be possible with shift lever in PARK or NEUTRAL positions only. Engine starts must not be possible in any other gear position. 2. With the shift lever in the: a. PARK position - Apply upward force on the shift arm and remove pressure. Engine starts must be possible. b. PARK position - Apply downward force on the shift arm and remove pressure. Engine starts must be possible. c. NEUTRAL position - Normal position. Engine starts must be possible. d. NEUTRAL position - Engine running and brakes applied, apply upward force on the shift arm. Transmission shall not be able to shift from neutral to reverse. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Linkage, A/T > Shift Cable, A/T > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 7377 Shift Cable: Testing and Inspection 48RE Automatic Transmission DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING - GEARSHIFT CABLE 1. Engine starts must be possible with shift lever in PARK or NEUTRAL positions only. Engine starts must not be possible in any other gear position. 2. With the shift lever in the: a. PARK position - Apply upward force on the shift arm and remove pressure. Engine starts must be possible. b. PARK position - Apply downward force on the shift arm and remove pressure. Engine starts must be possible. c. NEUTRAL position - Normal position. Engine starts must be possible. d. NEUTRAL position - Engine running and brakes applied, apply upward force on the shift arm. Transmission shall not be able to shift from neutral to reverse. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Linkage, A/T > Shift Cable, A/T > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 7378 Shift Cable: Testing and Inspection AS68RC Automatic Transmission DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING - GEARSHIFT CABLE 1. Engine starts must be possible with shift lever in PARK or NEUTRAL positions only. Engine starts must not be possible in any other gear position. 2. With the shift lever in the: a. PARK position - Apply upward force on the shift arm and remove pressure. Engine starts must be possible. b. PARK position - Apply downward force on the shift arm and remove pressure. Engine starts must be possible. c. NEUTRAL position - Normal position. Engine starts must be possible. d. NEUTRAL position - Engine running and brakes applied, apply upward force on the shift arm. Transmission shall not be able to shift from neutral to reverse. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Linkage, A/T > Shift Cable, A/T > Component Information > Adjustments > 42RLE Automatic Transmission Shift Cable: Adjustments 42RLE Automatic Transmission ADJUSTMENTS - GEARSHIFT CABLE NOTE: Always run the shift lever test using the scan tool to help diagnose a potential TRS problem Check adjustment by starting the engine in PARK and NEUTRAL. Adjustment is CORRECT if the engine starts only in these positions. Adjustment is INCORRECT if the engine starts in one but not both positions. If the engine starts in any position other than PARK or NEUTRAL, or if the engine will not start at all, the transmission range sensor may be faulty. Gearshift Adjustment Procedure Gearshift Cable at Steering Column 1. Shift transmission into PARK. 2. Release cable adjuster lock tab (3) (underneath the steering column) to unlock cable. 3. Raise vehicle. 4. Disengage the cable eyelet from the transmission manual shift lever. 5. Verify transmission shift lever is in PARK detent by moving lever fully rearward. Last rearward detent is PARK position. 6. Verify positive engagement of transmission park lock by attempting to rotate propeller shaft. Shaft will not rotate when park lock is engaged. 7. Snap the cable eyelet onto the transmission manual shift lever. 8. Lower vehicle. 9. Lock shift cable by pressing cable adjuster lock tab (3) downward until it snaps into place. 10. Check engine starting. Engine should start only in PARK and NEUTRAL. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Linkage, A/T > Shift Cable, A/T > Component Information > Adjustments > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 7381 Shift Cable: Adjustments 545RFE Automatic Transmission ADJUSTMENTS - GEARSHIFT CABLE NOTE: Always run the shift lever test using the scan tool to help diagnose a potential TRS problem Check adjustment by starting the engine in PARK and NEUTRAL. Adjustment is CORRECT if the engine starts only in these positions. Adjustment is INCORRECT if the engine starts in one but not both positions. If the engine starts in any position other than PARK or NEUTRAL, or if the engine will not start at all, the transmission range sensor may be faulty. Gearshift Adjustment Procedure 1. Shift transmission into PARK. 2. Release cable adjuster lock tab (3) (underneath the steering column) to unlock cable. 3. Raise vehicle. 4. Disengage the cable eyelet from the transmission manual shift lever. 5. Verify transmission shift lever is in PARK detent by moving lever fully rearward. Last rearward detent is PARK position. 6. Verify positive engagement of transmission park lock by attempting to rotate propeller shaft. Shaft will not rotate when park lock is engaged. 7. Snap the cable eyelet onto the transmission manual shift lever. 8. Lower vehicle. 9. Lock shift cable by pressing cable adjuster lock tab (3) downward until it snaps into place. 10. Check engine starting. Engine should start only in PARK and NEUTRAL. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Linkage, A/T > Shift Cable, A/T > Component Information > Adjustments > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 7382 Shift Cable: Adjustments 68RFE Automatic Transmission ADJUSTMENTS - GEARSHIFT CABLE NOTE: Always run the shift lever test using the scan tool to help diagnose a potential TRS problem Check adjustment by starting the engine in PARK and NEUTRAL. Adjustment is CORRECT if the engine starts only in these positions. Adjustment is INCORRECT if the engine starts in one but not both positions. If the engine starts in any position other than PARK or NEUTRAL, or if the engine will not start at all, the transmission range sensor may be faulty. Gearshift Adjustment Procedure 1. Shift transmission into PARK. 2. Release cable adjuster lock tab (3) (underneath the steering column) to unlock cable. 3. Raise vehicle. 4. Disengage the cable eyelet from the transmission manual shift lever. 5. Verify transmission shift lever is in PARK detent by moving lever fully rearward. Last rearward detent is PARK position. 6. Verify positive engagement of transmission park lock by attempting to rotate propeller shaft. Shaft will not rotate when park lock is engaged. 7. Snap the cable eyelet onto the transmission manual shift lever. 8. Lower vehicle. 9. Lock shift cable by pressing cable adjuster lock tab (3) downward until it snaps into place. 10. Check engine starting. Engine should start only in PARK and NEUTRAL. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Linkage, A/T > Shift Cable, A/T > Component Information > Adjustments > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 7383 Shift Cable: Adjustments 48RE Automatic Transmission ADJUSTMENTS - GEARSHIFT CABLE NOTE: Always run the shift lever test using the scan tool to help diagnose a potential TRS problem Check adjustment by starting the engine in PARK and NEUTRAL. Adjustment is CORRECT if the engine starts only in these positions. Adjustment is INCORRECT if the engine starts in one but not both positions. If the engine starts in any position other than PARK or NEUTRAL, or if the engine will not start at all, the transmission range sensor may be faulty. Gearshift Adjustment Procedure 1. Shift transmission into PARK. 2. Release cable adjuster lock tab (3) (underneath the steering column) to unlock cable. 3. Raise vehicle. 4. Disengage the cable eyelet from the transmission manual shift lever. 5. Verify transmission shift lever is in PARK detent by moving lever fully rearward. Last rearward detent is PARK position. 6. Verify positive engagement of transmission park lock by attempting to rotate propeller shaft. Shaft will not rotate when park lock is engaged. 7. Snap the cable eyelet onto the transmission manual shift lever. 8. Lower vehicle. 9. Lock shift cable by pressing cable adjuster lock tab (3) downward until it snaps into place. 10. Check engine starting. Engine should start only in PARK and NEUTRAL. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Linkage, A/T > Shift Cable, A/T > Component Information > Adjustments > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 7384 Shift Cable: Adjustments AS68RC Automatic Transmission ADJUSTMENTS - GEARSHIFT CABLE NOTE: Always run the shift lever test using the scan tool to help diagnose a potential TRS problem Check adjustment by starting the engine in PARK and NEUTRAL. Adjustment is CORRECT if the engine starts only in these positions. Adjustment is INCORRECT if the engine starts in one but not both positions. If the engine starts in any position other than PARK or NEUTRAL, or if the engine will not start at all, the transmission range sensor may be faulty. Gearshift Adjustment Procedure 1. Shift transmission into PARK. 2. Release cable adjuster lock tab (3) (underneath the steering column) to unlock cable. 3. Raise vehicle. 4. Disengage the cable eyelet from the transmission manual shift lever. 5. Verify transmission shift lever is in PARK detent by moving lever fully rearward. Last rearward detent is PARK position. 6. Verify positive engagement of transmission park lock by attempting to rotate propeller shaft. Shaft will not rotate when park lock is engaged. 7. Snap the cable eyelet onto the transmission manual shift lever. 8. Lower vehicle. 9. Lock shift cable by pressing cable adjuster lock tab (3) downward until it snaps into place. 10. Check engine starting. Engine should start only in PARK and NEUTRAL. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Linkage, A/T > Shift Cable, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 42RLE Automatic Transmission Shift Cable: Service and Repair 42RLE Automatic Transmission Removal REMOVAL 1. Shift transmission into PARK. 2. Raise vehicle. 3. Disengage cable (1) eyelet at transmission manual shift lever (3) and pull cable adjuster out of mounting bracket. 4. Lower the vehicle. 5. Remove the dash panel insulation pad as necessary to access the gearshift cable grommet (2). 6. Remove grommet (2) from the dash panel. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Linkage, A/T > Shift Cable, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 7387 Gearshift Cable at Steering Column 7. Remove any steering column (1) trim necessary to access the gearshift cable (2) and BTSI mechanism. 8. Disconnect the BTSI wiring connector (5). 9. Disconnect cable at lower column bracket and shift lever pin and pull the cable through the dash panel opening into the vehicle. 10. Remove gearshift cable (2) from vehicle. Installation INSTALLATION 1. Route the transmission end of the gearshift cable (1) through the opening in the dash panel. 2. Seat the cable grommet (2) into the dash panel opening. Gearshift Cable at Steering Column 3. Snap the cable into the steering column (1) bracket so the retaining ears are engaged and snap the cable eyelet onto the shift lever ball stud. 4. Raise the vehicle. 5. Place the transmission manual shift lever in the "PARK" detent (rearmost) position and rotate prop shaft to ensure transmission is in PARK. 6. Route the gearshift cable through the transmission mounting bracket and secure the cable by snapping the cable retaining ears into the transmission bracket and snapping the cable eyelet on the manual shift lever ball stud. 7. Lower vehicle. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Linkage, A/T > Shift Cable, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 7388 8. Lock the shift cable adjustment by pressing the cable adjuster lock tab (3) downward until it snaps into place. 9. Check for proper operation of the transmission range sensor. 10. Adjust the gearshift cable See: Adjustments/42RLE Automatic Transmissionand BTSI mechanism See: Shift Interlock/Adjustments/42RLE Automatic Transmission . Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Linkage, A/T > Shift Cable, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 7389 Shift Cable: Service and Repair 545RFE Automatic Transmission Removal REMOVAL 1. Shift transmission into PARK. 2. Raise vehicle. 3. Disengage cable (1) eyelet at transmission manual shift lever (3) and pull cable adjuster out of mounting bracket. 4. Lower the vehicle. 5. Remove the dash panel insulation pad as necessary to access the gearshift cable grommet (2). 6. Remove grommet (2) from the dash panel. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Linkage, A/T > Shift Cable, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 7390 7. Remove any steering column (1) trim necessary to access the gearshift cable (2) and BTSI mechanism. 8. Disconnect the BTSI wiring connector (5). 9. Disconnect cable at lower column bracket and shift lever pin and pull the cable through the dash panel opening into the vehicle. 10. Remove gearshift cable (2) from vehicle. Installation INSTALLATION 1. Route the transmission end of the gearshift cable (1) through the opening in the dash panel. 2. Seat the cable grommet (2) into the dash panel opening. 3. Snap the cable into the steering column (1) bracket so the retaining ears are engaged and snap the cable eyelet onto the shift lever ball stud. 4. Raise the vehicle. 5. Place the transmission manual shift lever in the "PARK" detent (rearmost) position and rotate prop shaft to ensure transmission is in PARK. 6. Route the gearshift cable through the transmission mounting bracket and secure the cable by snapping the cable retaining ears into the transmission bracket and snapping the cable eyelet on the manual shift lever ball stud. 7. Lower vehicle. 8. Lock the shift cable adjustment by pressing the cable adjuster lock tab (3) downward until it snaps into place. 9. Check for proper operation of the transmission range sensor. 10. Adjust the gearshift cable See: Shift Interlock/Adjustments/42RLE Automatic Transmission . Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Linkage, A/T > Shift Cable, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 7391 Shift Cable: Service and Repair 68RFE Automatic Transmission Removal REMOVAL 1. Shift transmission into PARK. 2. Raise vehicle. 3. Disengage cable (1) eyelet at transmission manual shift lever (3) and pull cable adjuster out of mounting bracket. 4. Lower the vehicle. 5. Remove the dash panel insulation pad as necessary to access the gearshift cable grommet (2). 6. Remove grommet (2) from the dash panel. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Linkage, A/T > Shift Cable, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 7392 7. Remove any steering column (1) trim necessary to access the gearshift cable (2) and BTSI mechanism. 8. Disconnect the BTSI wiring connector (5). 9. Disconnect cable at lower column bracket and shift lever pin and pull the cable through the dash panel opening into the vehicle. 10. Remove gearshift cable (2) from vehicle. Installation INSTALLATION 1. Route the transmission end of the gearshift cable (1) through the opening in the dash panel. 2. Seat the cable grommet (2) into the dash panel opening. 3. Snap the cable into the steering column (1) bracket so the retaining ears are engaged and snap the cable eyelet onto the shift lever ball stud. 4. Raise the vehicle. 5. Place the transmission manual shift lever in the "PARK" detent (rearmost) position and rotate prop shaft to ensure transmission is in PARK. 6. Route the gearshift cable through the transmission mounting bracket and secure the cable by snapping the cable retaining ears into the transmission bracket and snapping the cable eyelet on the manual shift lever ball stud. 7. Lower vehicle. 8. Lock the shift cable adjustment by pressing the cable adjuster lock tab (3) downward until it snaps into place. 9. Check for proper operation of the transmission range sensor. 10. Adjust the gearshift cable See: Adjustments/68RFE Automatic Transmissionand BTSI mechanism See: Shift Interlock/Adjustments/42RLE Automatic Transmission . Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Linkage, A/T > Shift Cable, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 7393 Shift Cable: Service and Repair 48RE Automatic Transmission Removal REMOVAL 1. Shift transmission into PARK. 2. Raise vehicle. 3. Disengage cable (1) eyelet at transmission manual shift lever (3) and pull cable adjuster out of mounting bracket. 4. Lower the vehicle. 5. Remove the dash panel insulation pad as necessary to access the gearshift cable grommet (2). 6. Remove grommet (2) from the dash panel. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Linkage, A/T > Shift Cable, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 7394 7. Remove any steering column (1) trim necessary to access the gearshift cable (2) and BTSI mechanism. 8. Disconnect the BTSI wiring connector (5). 9. Disconnect cable at lower column bracket and shift lever pin and pull the cable through the dash panel opening into the vehicle. 10. Remove gearshift cable (2) from vehicle. Installation INSTALLATION 1. Route the transmission end of the gearshift cable (1) through the opening in the dash panel. 2. Seat the cable grommet (2) into the dash panel opening. 3. Snap the cable into the steering column (1) bracket so the retaining ears are engaged and snap the cable eyelet onto the shift lever ball stud. 4. Raise the vehicle. 5. Place the transmission manual shift lever in the "PARK" detent (rearmost) position and rotate prop shaft to ensure transmission is in PARK. 6. Route the gearshift cable through the transmission mounting bracket and secure the cable by snapping the cable retaining ears into the transmission bracket and snapping the cable eyelet on the manual shift lever ball stud. 7. Lower vehicle. 8. Lock the shift cable adjustment by pressing the cable adjuster lock tab (3) downward until it snaps into place. 9. Check for proper operation of the transmission range sensor. 10. Adjust the gearshift cable See: Adjustments/48RE Automatic Transmissionand BTSI mechanism See: Shift Interlock/Adjustments/42RLE Automatic Transmission . Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Linkage, A/T > Shift Cable, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 7395 Shift Cable: Service and Repair AS68RC Automatic Transmission Removal REMOVAL 1. Shift transmission into PARK. 2. Raise vehicle. 3. Disconnect the shift cable ball socket (3) at transmission manual shift lever (4) and pull shift cable out of mounting bracket (1). 4. Lower the vehicle. 5. Remove the dash panel insulation pad as necessary to access the gearshift cable grommet (2). 6. Remove grommet (2) from the dash panel. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Linkage, A/T > Shift Cable, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 7396 7. Remove any steering column (1) trim necessary to access the gearshift cable (2) and BTSI mechanism. 8. Disconnect the BTSI wiring connector (5). 9. Disconnect cable at lower column bracket and shift lever pin and pull the cable through the dash panel opening into the vehicle. 10. Remove gearshift cable (2) from vehicle. Installation INSTALLATION 1. Route the transmission end of the gearshift cable (1) through the opening in the dash panel. 2. Seat the cable grommet (2) into the dash panel opening. 3. Snap the cable into the steering column (1) bracket so the retaining ears are engaged and snap the cable eyelet onto the shift lever ball stud. 4. Raise the vehicle. 5. Place the transmission manual shift lever in the "PARK" detent (rearmost) position and rotate prop shaft to ensure transmission is in PARK. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Linkage, A/T > Shift Cable, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 7397 6. Route the gearshift cable through the shift cable mounting bracket (1) and secure the cable by snapping the cable retaining ears into the bracket and by snapping the shift cable ball socket (3) onto the manual shift lever (4) ball stud. 7. Lower vehicle. 8. Lock the shift cable adjustment by pressing the cable adjuster lock tab (3) downward until it snaps into place. 9. Check for proper operation of the transmission range sensor. 10. Adjust the gearshift cable See: Adjustments/AS68RC Automatic Transmissionand BTSI mechanism See: Shift Interlock/Adjustments/AS68RC Automatic Transmission . Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid Position Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Shift Solenoid Position Sensor/Switch: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The transmission solenoid/TRS assembly is internal to the transmission and mounted on the valve body assembly. The assembly consists of six solenoids that control hydraulic pressure to the six friction elements (transmission clutches), and the torque converter clutch. The pressure control solenoid is located on the side of the solenoid/TRS assembly. The solenoid/TRS assembly also contains the Transmission Range Sensor (TRS) and five pressure switches that feed information to the TCM. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid Position Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 7402 Shift Solenoid Position Sensor/Switch: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION SOLENOIDS Solenoids are used to control the L/R, 2C, 4C, OD, and UD friction elements. The reverse clutch is controlled by line pressure and the position of the manual valve in the valve body. All the solenoids are contained within the Solenoid and Pressure Switch Assembly. The solenoid and pressure switch assembly contains one additional solenoid, Multi-Select (MS), which serves primarily to provide 2nd and 3rd gear limp-in operation. The solenoids receive electrical power from the Transmission Control Relay through a single wire. The TCM energizes or operates the solenoids individually by grounding the return wire of the solenoid as necessary. When a solenoid is energized, the solenoid valve shifts, and a fluid passage is opened or closed (vented or applied), depending on its default operating state. The result is an apply or release of a frictional element. The MS and UD solenoids are normally applied to allow transmission limp-in in the event of an electrical failure. The continuity of the solenoids and circuits are periodically tested. Each solenoid is turned on or off depending on its current state. An inductive spike should be detected by the TCM during this test. If no spike is detected, the circuit is tested again to verify the failure. In addition to the periodic testing, the solenoid circuits are tested if a speed ratio or pressure switch error occurs. PRESSURE SWITCHES The TCM relies on five pressure switches to monitor fluid pressure in the L/R, 2C, 4C, UD, and OD hydraulic circuits. The primary purpose of these switches is to help the TCM detect when clutch circuit hydraulic failures occur. The switches close at 23 psi and open at 11 psi, and simply indicate whether or not pressure exists. The switches are continuously monitored by the TCM for the correct states (open or closed) in each gear as shown in the following charts and 545RFE PRESSURE SWITCH STATES: A Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) will set if the TCM senses any switch open or closed at the wrong time in a given gear. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid Position Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Shift Solenoid Position Sensor/Switch: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL NOTE: If the Transmission Solenoid/TRS Assembly is being replaced, the Quick Learn Procedure must be performed. See: Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Transmission Control Module/TCM Quick Learn 1. Remove the valve body from the transmission. See: Valve Body/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/545RFE Automatic Transmission/Removal 2. Remove the bolts (1) holding the transmission solenoid/TRS assembly onto the valve body. 3. Separate the transmission solenoid/TRS assembly from the valve body. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid Position Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 7405 Shift Solenoid Position Sensor/Switch: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION 1. Place TRS selector plate in the PARK position. 2. Position the transmission solenoid/TRS assembly onto the valve body. Be sure that both alignment dowels are fully seated in the valve body and that the TRS switch contacts are properly positioned in the selector plate 3. Install the bolts (1) to hold the transmission solenoid/TRS assembly onto the valve body. 4. Tighten the solenoid assembly screws adjacent to the arrows cast into the bottom of the valve body first. Tighten the screws to 6 Nm (50 in.lbs.). 5. Tighten the remainder of the solenoid assembly screws to 6 Nm (50 in.lbs.). 6. Install the valve body into the transmission. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Temperature Warning Indicator - A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Temperature Warning Indicator - A/T: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION A transmission over-temperature indicator is standard equipment on all instrument clusters. However, on vehicles not equipped with an optional automatic transmission, this indicator is electronically disabled. This indicator is located in the lower portion of the tachometer dial face in the instrument cluster overlay. The transmission over-temperature indicator consists of a stencil-like cutout of the International Control and Display Symbol icon for Transmission Temperature in the opaque layer of the instrument cluster overlay. The dark outer layer of the overlay prevents the indicator from being clearly visible when it is not illuminated. A red Light Emitting Diode (LED) behind the cutout in the opaque layer of the overlay causes the indicator to appear in red through the translucent outer layer of the overlay when it is illuminated from behind by the LED, which is soldered onto the instrument cluster electronic circuit board. The transmission over-temperature indicator is serviced as a unit with the instrument cluster. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Temperature Warning Indicator - A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 7410 Temperature Warning Indicator - A/T: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The transmission over-temperature indicator gives an indication to the vehicle operator when the transmission fluid temperature is excessive, which may lead to accelerated transmission component wear or failure. This indicator is controlled by a transistor on the instrument cluster circuit board based upon cluster programming and electronic messages received over the Controller Area Network (CAN) data bus from the Powertrain Control Module (PCM). The transmission over-temperature indicator Light Emitting Diode (LED) is completely controlled by the instrument cluster logic circuit, and that logic will only allow this indicator to operate when the instrument cluster receives a battery current input on the fused ignition switch output (run-start) circuit. Therefore, the LED will always be OFF when the ignition switch is in any position except ON or START. The LED only illuminates when it is provided a path to ground by the instrument cluster transistor. The instrument cluster will turn ON the transmission over-temperature indicator for the following reasons: - Bulb Test - Each time the ignition switch is turned to the ON position the transmission over-temperature indicator is illuminated for about two seconds as a bulb test. - Trans Over-Temp Indicator Lamp-On Message - Each time the cluster receives an electronic trans over-temp indicator lamp-ON message from the PCM indicating that the transmission fluid temperature is 135 °C (275 °F) or higher, the indicator will be illuminated and a single chime tone is sounded. The indicator remains illuminated until the cluster receives a lamp-OFF message from the PCM, or until the ignition switch is turned to the OFF position, whichever occurs first. The chime tone feature will only repeat during the same ignition cycle if the indicator is cycled OFF and then ON again by the appropriate lamp-ON and lamp-OFF messages from the PCM. - Actuator Test - Each time the cluster is put through the actuator test, the transmission over-temperature indicator will be turned ON, then OFF again during the bulb check portion of the test to confirm the functionality of the LED and the cluster control circuitry. The PCM continually monitors the transmission temperature sensor to determine the transmission operating condition. The PCM then sends the proper lamp-ON or lamp-OFF message to the ElectroMechanical Instrument Cluster (EMIC) (also known as the Cab Compartment Node/CCN). If the instrument cluster illuminates the transmission over-temperature indicator due to a high transmission oil temperature condition, it may indicate that the transmission or the transmission cooling system are being overloaded, or that they require service. For further diagnosis of the transmission over-temperature indicator or the instrument cluster circuitry that controls the LED, Refer to appropriate testing. For proper diagnosis of the transmission temperature sensor, the PCM, the EMIC, the CAN data bus or the electronic communication related to transmission over-temperature indicator operation a diagnostic scan tool is required. Refer to the appropriate diagnostic information. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Throttle Valve Assembly, A/T > Throttle Valve Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation Throttle Valve Solenoid: Description and Operation DESCRIPTION On vehicles equipped with a Cummins diesel engine, the transmission throttle valve cable has been replace by the transmission throttle valve actuator (TTVA). The TTVA consists of an electric DC motor, two potentiometers, and a gear drive system. The TTVA is mechanically connected to the transmission throttle valve in the valve body by the "D" shaped opening in the bottom of the TTVA shaft. Changes in the TTVA position are therefore transferred to the throttle valve and cause changes in the transmission throttle pressure. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Throttle Valve Assembly, A/T > Throttle Valve Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 7415 Throttle Valve Solenoid: Adjustments ADJUSTMENT The Transmission Throttle Valve Actuator (TTVA) does not require any mechanical adjustments. All changes in throttle valve position are controlled by the Engine Control Module (ECM). The TTVA does require an initialization period after the actuator has been removed or replaced. After the actuator has been removed or replaced, move the ignition to the ON position for thirty (30) seconds. This will allow the ECM sufficient time to perform the internal calibration procedures to learn the TTVA's current "zero" position. Once this is done, check the ECM for diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs). If no DTCs are set relating to the TTVA, the TTVA is fully calibrated and ready for use. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Throttle Valve Assembly, A/T > Throttle Valve Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Throttle Valve Solenoid: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL 1. Remove the bolts (2) holding the transmission throttle valve actuator (TTVA) (1) to the transmission case. 2. Allow the TTVA (1) to rotate clockwise away from the transmission. 3. Remove the wiring connector (2) from the TTVA (1). 4. Lift the TTVA (1) straight upward and off the throttle valve shaft (3). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Throttle Valve Assembly, A/T > Throttle Valve Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 7418 Throttle Valve Solenoid: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION 1. Position the transmission throttle valve actuator (TTVA) (1) over the throttle valve shaft (3). 2. Align the D-shaped opening in the bottom of the TTVA to the throttle valve shaft and install the TTVA onto the shaft. 3. Install the wiring connector (2) to the TTVA (1). 4. Rotate the TTVA (1) to the transmission case and install the bolts (2) to hold the TTVA to the transmission. 5. Tighten the bolts to 8.5 Nm (75 in.lbs.). 6. Initialize the TTVA See: Adjustments . Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Throttle Valve Cable/Linkage, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation Throttle Valve Cable/Linkage: Description and Operation DESCRIPTION Transmission throttle valve cable (1) adjustment is extremely important to proper operation. This adjustment positions the throttle valve, which controls shift speed, quality, and part-throttle downshift sensitivity. If cable setting is too loose, early shifts and slippage between shifts may occur. If the setting is too tight, shifts may be delayed and part throttle downshifts may be very sensitive. The transmission throttle valve is operated by a cam on the throttle lever. The throttle lever is operated by an adjustable cable (3). The cable is attached to an arm mounted on the throttle lever shaft. A retaining clip (2) at the engine-end of the cable is removed to provide for cable adjustment. The retaining clip is then installed back onto the throttle valve cable to lock in the adjustment. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Throttle Valve Cable/Linkage, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 7422 Throttle Valve Cable/Linkage: Adjustments ADJUSTMENTS - THROTTLE VALVE CABLE A correctly adjusted throttle valve cable (1) will cause the throttle lever on the transmission to move simultaneously with the throttle body lever (3) from the idle position. Proper adjustment will allow simultaneous movement without causing the transmission throttle lever to either move ahead of, or lag behind the lever on the throttle body. ADJUSTMENT VERIFICATION 1. Turn ignition key to OFF position. 2. Remove air cleaner. 3. Verify that lever on throttle body is at curb idle position. Then verify that the transmission throttle lever is also at idle (fully forward) position. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Throttle Valve Cable/Linkage, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 7423 4. Slide cable off attachment stud on throttle body lever. 5. Compare position (B) of cable end to attachment stud on throttle body lever: - Cable end and attachment stud should be aligned (or centered on one another) to within 1 mm (0.039 in.) in either direction (B). - If cable end and attachment stud are misaligned (off center), cable will have to be adjusted as described in Throttle Valve Cable Adjustment procedure. 6. Reconnect cable end to attachment stud. Then with aid of a helper, observe movement of transmission throttle lever and lever on throttle body. - If both levers move simultaneously from idle to half-throttle and back to idle position, adjustment is correct. - If transmission throttle lever moves ahead of, or lags behind throttle body lever, cable adjustment will be necessary. Or, if throttle body lever prevents transmission lever from returning to closed position, cable adjustment will be necessary. ADJUSTMENT PROCEDURE Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Throttle Valve Cable/Linkage, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 7424 1. Turn ignition switch to OFF position. 2. Remove air cleaner if necessary. 3. Disconnect cable end (3) from attachment stud on throttle lever (1). Carefully slide cable off stud. Do not pry or pull cable off. 4. Verify that transmission throttle lever is in fully closed position. Then be sure lever on throttle body is at curb idle position. 5. Pry the T.V. cable lock (A) into the UP position. This will unlock the cable and allow for readjustment. 6. Apply just enough tension on the T.V. cable (B) to remove any slack in the cable. Pulling too tight will cause the T.V. lever on the transmission to move out of its idle position, which will result in an incorrect T.V. cable adjustment. Slide the sheath of the T.V. cable (D) back and forth until the centerlines of the T.V. cable end (B) and the throttle bell crank lever (C) are aligned within one millimeter (1mm). 7. While holding the T.V. cable in the set position push the T.V. cable lock (A) into the down position. This will lock the present T.V. cable adjustment. NOTE: Be sure that as the cable is pulled forward and centered on the throttle lever stud, the cable housing moves smoothly with the cable. Due to the angle at which the cable housing enters the spring housing, the cable housing may bind slightly and create an incorrect adjustment. 8. Reconnect the T.V. cable (B) to the throttle bellcrank lever (C). 9. Check cable adjustment. Verify transmission throttle lever and lever on throttle body move simultaneously. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter > Component Information > Description and Operation > 42RLE Automatic Transmission Torque Converter: Description and Operation 42RLE Automatic Transmission Description DESCRIPTION The torque converter is a hydraulic device that couples the engine crankshaft to the transmission. The torque converter consists of an outer shell with an internal turbine (1), a stator (4), an overrunning clutch, an impeller (2) and an electronically applied converter clutch (6). The converter clutch provides reduced engine speed and greater fuel economy when engaged. Clutch engagement also provides reduced transmission fluid temperatures. The torque converter hub drives the transmission oil (fluid) pump. The torque converter is a sealed, welded unit that is not repairable and is serviced as an assembly. CAUTION: The torque converter must be replaced if a transmission failure resulted in large amounts of metal or fiber contamination in the fluid. IMPELLER Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter > Component Information > Description and Operation > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 7429 Impeller The impeller is an integral part of the converter housing. The impeller consists of curved blades placed radially along the inside of the housing on the transmission side of the converter. As the converter housing is rotated by the engine, so is the impeller, because they are one and the same and are the driving members of the system. TURBINE Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter > Component Information > Description and Operation > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 7430 Turbine The turbine is the output, or driven, member of the converter. The turbine is mounted within the housing opposite the impeller, but is not attached to the housing. The input shaft is inserted through the center of the impeller and splined into the turbine. The design of the turbine is similar to the impeller, except the blades of the turbine are curved in the opposite direction. STATOR Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter > Component Information > Description and Operation > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 7431 The stator assembly is mounted on a stationary shaft which is an integral part of the oil pump. The stator (1) is located between the impeller (2) and the turbine (4) within the torque converter case. The stator contains an over-running clutch (1-4), which allows the stator to rotate only in a clockwise direction. When the stator is locked against the over-running clutch, the torque multiplication feature of the torque converter is operational. TORQUE CONVERTER CLUTCH (TCC) The TCC was installed to improve the efficiency of the torque converter that is lost to the slippage of the fluid coupling. Although the fluid coupling provides smooth, shock-free power transfer, it is natural for all fluid couplings to slip. If the impeller (3) and turbine (5) were mechanically locked together, a zero slippage condition could be obtained. A hydraulic piston (6) with friction material (7) was added to the turbine assembly (5) to provide this mechanical lock-up. In order to reduce heat build-up in the transmission and buffer the powertrain against torsional vibrations, the TCM can duty cycle the L/R-CC Solenoid to achieve a smooth application of the torque converter clutch. This function, referred to as Electronically Modulated Converter Clutch (EMCC) can occur at various times depending on the following variables: - Shift lever position - Current gear range - Transmission fluid temperature - Engine coolant temperature - Input speed - Throttle angle - Engine speed Operation OPERATION Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter > Component Information > Description and Operation > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 7432 The converter impeller (driving member), which is integral to the converter housing and bolted to the engine drive plate, rotates at engine speed. The converter turbine (driven member), which reacts from fluid pressure generated by the impeller, rotates and turns the transmission input shaft. Torque Converter Fluid Operation - Typical TURBINE As the fluid that was put into motion by the impeller blades strikes the blades of the turbine, some of the energy and rotational force is transferred into the turbine and the input shaft. This causes both of them (turbine and input shaft) to rotate in a clockwise direction following the impeller. As the fluid is leaving the trailing edges of the turbine's blades it continues in a "hindering" direction back toward the impeller. If the fluid is not redirected before it strikes the impeller, it will strike the impeller in such a direction that it would tend to slow it down. STATOR Torque multiplication is achieved by locking the stator's over-running clutch to its shaft. Under stall conditions (the turbine is stationary), the oil leaving the turbine blades strikes the face of the stator blades and tries to rotate them in a counterclockwise direction. When this happens the over-running clutch of the stator locks and holds the stator from rotating. With the stator locked, the oil strikes the stator blades and is redirected into a "helping" direction before it enters the impeller. This circulation of oil from impeller to turbine, turbine to stator, and stator to impeller, can produce a maximum torque multiplication of about 2.4:1. As the turbine begins to match the speed of the impeller, the fluid that was hitting the stator in such as way as to cause it to lock-up is no longer doing so. In this condition of operation, the stator begins to free wheel and the converter acts as a fluid coupling. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter > Component Information > Description and Operation > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 7433 Stator Operation TORQUE CONVERTER CLUTCH (TCC) In a standard torque converter, the impeller and turbine are rotating at about the same speed and the stator is freewheeling, providing no torque multiplication. By applying the turbine's piston and friction material to the front cover, a total converter engagement can be obtained. The result of this engagement is a direct 1:1 mechanical link between the engine and the transmission. The clutch can be engaged in second, third, fourth, and fifth (if applicable) gear ranges depending on overdrive control switch position. If the overdrive control switch is in the normal ON position, the clutch will engage after the shift to fourth gear. If the control switch is in the OFF position, the clutch will engage after the shift to third gear. The TCM controls the torque converter clutch via the L/R-CC Solenoid. There are four TCC operational modes: - No EMCC - Partial EMCC - Full EMCC - Gradual-to-no EMCC NO EMCC Under No EMCC conditions, the L/R Solenoid is OFF. There are several conditions that can result in NO EMCC operations. No EMCC can be initiated due to a fault in the transmission or because the TCM does not see the need for EMCC under current driving conditions. PARTIAL EMCC Partial EMCC operation modulates the L/R Solenoid (duty cycle) to obtain partial torque converter clutch application. Partial EMCC operation is maintained until Full EMCC is called for and actuated. During Partial EMCC some slip does occur. Partial EMCC will usually occur at low speeds, low load and light throttle situations. FULL EMCC During Full EMCC operation, the TCM increases the L/R Solenoid duty cycle to full ON after Partial EMCC control brings the engine speed within the desired slip range of transmission input speed relative to engine rpm. GRADUAL-TO-NO EMCC This operation is to soften the change from Full or Partial EMCC to No EMCC. This is done at mid-throttle by slowly decreasing the L/R Solenoid duty cycle. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter > Component Information > Description and Operation > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 7434 Torque Converter: Description and Operation 545RFE Automatic Transmission Description DESCRIPTION The torque converter is a hydraulic device that couples the engine crankshaft to the transmission. The torque converter consists of an outer shell with an internal turbine (1), a stator (2), an overrunning clutch, an impeller (5), and an electronically applied converter clutch (6). The converter clutch provides reduced engine speed and greater fuel economy when engaged. Clutch engagement also provides reduced transmission fluid temperatures. The torque converter hub (3) drives the transmission oil (fluid) pump and contains an o-ring seal (4) to better control oil flow. The torque converter is a sealed, welded unit that is not repairable and is serviced as an assembly. CAUTION: The torque converter must be replaced if a transmission failure resulted in large amounts of metal or fiber contamination in the fluid. IMPELLER Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter > Component Information > Description and Operation > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 7435 Impeller The impeller is an integral part of the converter housing. The impeller consists of curved blades placed radially along the inside of the housing on the transmission side of the converter. As the converter housing is rotated by the engine, so is the impeller, because they are one and the same and are the driving members of the system. TURBINE Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter > Component Information > Description and Operation > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 7436 Turbine The turbine is the output, or driven, member of the converter. The turbine is mounted within the housing opposite the impeller, but is not attached to the housing. The input shaft is inserted through the center of the impeller and splined into the turbine. The design of the turbine is similar to the impeller, except the blades of the turbine are curved in the opposite direction. STATOR Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter > Component Information > Description and Operation > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 7437 The stator assembly is mounted on a stationary shaft which is an integral part of the oil pump. The stator (1) is located between the impeller (2) and the turbine (4) within the torque converter case. The stator contains an over-running clutch (1-4), which allows the stator to rotate only in a clockwise direction. When the stator is locked against the over-running clutch, the torque multiplication feature of the torque converter is operational. TORQUE CONVERTER CLUTCH (TCC) The TCC was installed to improve the efficiency of the torque converter that is lost to the slippage of the fluid coupling. Although the fluid coupling provides smooth, shock-free power transfer, it is natural for all fluid couplings to slip. If the impeller (3) and turbine (5) were mechanically locked together, a zero slippage condition could be obtained. A hydraulic piston (6) with friction material (7) was added to the turbine assembly (5) to provide this mechanical lock-up. In order to reduce heat build-up in the transmission and buffer the powertrain against torsional vibrations, the TCM can duty cycle the L/R-CC Solenoid to achieve a smooth application of the torque converter clutch. This function, referred to as Electronically Modulated Converter Clutch (EMCC) can occur at various times depending on the following variables: - Shift lever position - Current gear range - Transmission fluid temperature - Engine coolant temperature - Input speed - Throttle angle - Engine speed Operation OPERATION Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter > Component Information > Description and Operation > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 7438 The converter impeller (driving member), which is integral to the converter housing and bolted to the engine drive plate, rotates at engine speed. The converter turbine (driven member), which reacts from fluid pressure generated by the impeller, rotates and turns the transmission input shaft. Torque Converter Fluid Operation - Typical TURBINE As the fluid that was put into motion by the impeller blades strikes the blades of the turbine, some of the energy and rotational force is transferred into the turbine and the input shaft. This causes both of them (turbine and input shaft) to rotate in a clockwise direction following the impeller. As the fluid is leaving the trailing edges of the turbine's blades it continues in a "hindering" direction back toward the impeller. If the fluid is not redirected before it strikes the impeller, it will strike the impeller in such a direction that it would tend to slow it down. STATOR Torque multiplication is achieved by locking the stator's over-running clutch to its shaft. Under stall conditions (the turbine is stationary), the oil leaving the turbine blades strikes the face of the stator blades and tries to rotate them in a counterclockwise direction. When this happens the over-running clutch of the stator locks and holds the stator from rotating. With the stator locked, the oil strikes the stator blades and is redirected into a "helping" direction before it enters the impeller. This circulation of oil from impeller to turbine, turbine to stator, and stator to impeller, can produce a maximum torque multiplication of about 2.4:1. As the turbine begins to match the speed of the impeller, the fluid that was hitting the stator in such as way as to cause it to lock-up is no longer doing so. In this condition of operation, the stator begins to free wheel and the converter acts as a fluid coupling. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter > Component Information > Description and Operation > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 7439 Stator Operation TORQUE CONVERTER CLUTCH (TCC) In a standard torque converter, the impeller and turbine are rotating at about the same speed and the stator is freewheeling, providing no torque multiplication. By applying the turbine's piston and friction material to the front cover, a total converter engagement can be obtained. The result of this engagement is a direct 1:1 mechanical link between the engine and the transmission. The clutch can be engaged in second, third, fourth, and fifth (if applicable) gear ranges depending on overdrive control switch position. If the overdrive control switch is in the normal ON position, the clutch will engage after the shift to fourth gear. If the control switch is in the OFF position, the clutch will engage after the shift to third gear. The TCM controls the torque converter clutch via the L/R-CC Solenoid. There are four TCC operational modes: - No EMCC - Partial EMCC - Full EMCC - Gradual-to-no EMCC NO EMCC Under No EMCC conditions, the L/R Solenoid is OFF. There are several conditions that can result in NO EMCC operations. No EMCC can be initiated due to a fault in the transmission or because the TCM does not see the need for EMCC under current driving conditions. PARTIAL EMCC Partial EMCC operation modulates the L/R Solenoid (duty cycle) to obtain partial torque converter clutch application. Partial EMCC operation is maintained until Full EMCC is called for and actuated. During Partial EMCC some slip does occur. Partial EMCC will usually occur at low speeds, low load and light throttle situations. FULL EMCC During Full EMCC operation, the TCM increases the L/R Solenoid duty cycle to full ON after Partial EMCC control brings the engine speed within the desired slip range of transmission input speed relative to engine rpm. GRADUAL-TO-NO EMCC This operation is to soften the change from Full or Partial EMCC to No EMCC. This is done at mid-throttle by slowly decreasing the L/R Solenoid duty cycle. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter > Component Information > Description and Operation > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 7440 Torque Converter: Description and Operation 68RFE Automatic Transmission Description DESCRIPTION The torque converter is a hydraulic device that couples the engine crankshaft to the transmission. The torque converter consists of an outer shell with an internal turbine (1), a stator (2), an overrunning clutch, an impeller (5), and an electronically applied converter clutch (6). The converter clutch provides reduced engine speed and greater fuel economy when engaged. Clutch engagement also provides reduced transmission fluid temperatures. The torque converter hub (3) drives the transmission oil (fluid) pump and contains an o-ring seal (4) to better control oil flow. The torque converter is a sealed, welded unit that is not repairable and is serviced as an assembly. CAUTION: The torque converter must be replaced if a transmission failure resulted in large amounts of metal or fiber contamination in the fluid. IMPELLER Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter > Component Information > Description and Operation > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 7441 The impeller is an integral part of the converter housing. The impeller consists of curved blades placed radially along the inside of the housing on the transmission side of the converter. As the converter housing is rotated by the engine, so is the impeller, because they are one and the same and are the driving members of the system. TURBINE The turbine is the output, or driven, member of the converter. The turbine is mounted within the housing opposite the impeller, but is not attached to the housing. The input shaft is inserted through the center of the impeller and splined into the turbine. The design of the turbine is similar to the impeller, except the blades of the turbine are curved in the opposite direction. STATOR Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter > Component Information > Description and Operation > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 7442 The stator assembly is mounted on a stationary shaft which is an integral part of the oil pump. The stator (1) is located between the impeller (2) and the turbine (4) within the torque converter case. The stator contains an over-running clutch (1-4), which allows the stator to rotate only in a clockwise direction. When the stator is locked against the over-running clutch, the torque multiplication feature of the torque converter is operational. TORQUE CONVERTER CLUTCH (TCC) Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter > Component Information > Description and Operation > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 7443 The TCC was installed to improve the efficiency of the torque converter that is lost to the slippage of the fluid coupling. Although the fluid coupling provides smooth, shock-free power transfer, it is natural for all fluid couplings to slip. If the impeller (3) and turbine (5) were mechanically locked together, a zero slippage condition could be obtained. A hydraulic piston (6) with friction material (7) was added to the turbine assembly (5) to provide this mechanical lock-up. In order to reduce heat build-up in the transmission and buffer the powertrain against torsional vibrations, the TCM can duty cycle the L/R-CC Solenoid to achieve a smooth application of the torque converter clutch. This function, referred to as Electronically Modulated Converter Clutch (EMCC) can occur at various times depending on the following variables: - Shift lever position - Current gear range - Transmission fluid temperature - Engine coolant temperature - Input speed - Throttle angle - Engine speed Operation OPERATION The converter impeller (driving member), which is integral to the converter housing and bolted to the engine drive plate, rotates at engine speed. The converter turbine (driven member), which reacts from fluid pressure generated by the impeller, rotates and turns the transmission input shaft. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter > Component Information > Description and Operation > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 7444 TURBINE As the fluid that was put into motion by the impeller blades strikes the blades of the turbine, some of the energy and rotational force is transferred into the turbine and the input shaft. This causes both of them (turbine and input shaft) to rotate in a clockwise direction following the impeller. As the fluid is leaving the trailing edges of the turbine's blades it continues in a "hindering" direction back toward the impeller. If the fluid is not redirected before it strikes the impeller, it will strike the impeller in such a direction that it would tend to slow it down. STATOR Torque multiplication is achieved by locking the stator's over-running clutch to its shaft. Under stall conditions (the turbine is stationary), the oil leaving the turbine blades strikes the face of the stator blades and tries to rotate them in a counterclockwise direction. When this happens the over-running clutch of the stator locks and holds the stator from rotating. With the stator locked, the oil strikes the stator blades and is redirected into a "helping" direction before it enters the impeller. This circulation of oil from impeller to turbine, turbine to stator, and stator to impeller, can produce a maximum torque multiplication of about 1.75:1. As the turbine begins to match the speed of the impeller, the fluid that was hitting the stator in such as way as to cause it to lock-up is no longer doing so. In this condition of operation, the stator begins to free wheel and the converter acts as a fluid coupling. TORQUE CONVERTER CLUTCH (TCC) In a standard torque converter, the impeller and turbine are rotating at about the same speed and the stator is freewheeling, providing no torque multiplication. By applying the turbine's piston and friction material to the front cover, a total converter engagement can be obtained. The result of this engagement is a direct 1:1 mechanical link between the engine and the transmission. The clutch can be engaged in all gear ranges except first depending on the Tow/Haul and ERS status. In normal operation, the clutch will engage after the shift to fourth gear. If the Tow/Haul mode is enabled, the clutch will engage after the shift to third (direct) gear. The TCM controls the torque converter clutch via the L/R-CC Solenoid. There are four TCC operational modes: Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter > Component Information > Description and Operation > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 7445 - No EMCC - Partial EMCC - Full EMCC - Gradual EMCC Release NO EMCC Under No EMCC conditions, the L/R Solenoid is OFF. There are several conditions that can result in NO EMCC operations. No EMCC can be initiated due to a fault in the transmission or because the TCM does not see the need for EMCC under current driving conditions. PARTIAL EMCC Partial EMCC operation modulates the L/R Solenoid (duty cycle) to obtain partial torque converter clutch application. Partial EMCC operation is maintained until Full EMCC is called for and actuated. During Partial EMCC some slip does occur. Partial EMCC will usually occur at low speeds, low load and light throttle situations. FULL EMCC During Full EMCC operation, the TCM increases the L/R Solenoid duty cycle to full ON after Partial EMCC control brings the engine speed within the desired slip range of transmission input speed relative to engine rpm. GRADUAL EMCC RELEASE This operation is to soften the change from Full or Partial EMCC to No EMCC. This is done at mid-throttle by slowly decreasing the L/R Solenoid duty cycle. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter > Component Information > Description and Operation > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 7446 Torque Converter: Description and Operation 48RE Automatic Transmission Description DESCRIPTION The torque converter is a hydraulic device that couples the engine crankshaft to the transmission. The torque converter consists of an outer shell with an internal turbine (1), a stator (4), an overrunning clutch, an impeller (2), and an electronically applied converter clutch (6). The converter clutch provides reduced engine speed and greater fuel economy when engaged. Clutch engagement also provides reduced transmission fluid temperatures. The torque converter hub drives the transmission oil (fluid) pump. The torque converter is a sealed, welded unit that is not repairable and is serviced as an assembly. CAUTION: The torque converter must be replaced if a transmission failure resulted in large amounts of metal or fiber contamination in the fluid. IMPELLER Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter > Component Information > Description and Operation > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 7447 Impeller The impeller is an integral part of the converter housing. The impeller consists of curved blades placed radially along the inside of the housing on the transmission side of the converter. As the converter housing is rotated by the engine, so is the impeller, because they are one and the same and are the driving members of the system. TURBINE Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter > Component Information > Description and Operation > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 7448 Turbine The turbine is the output, or driven, member of the converter. The turbine is mounted within the housing opposite the impeller, but is not attached to the housing. The input shaft is inserted through the center of the impeller and splined into the turbine. The design of the turbine is similar to the impeller, except the blades of the turbine are curved in the opposite direction. STATOR The stator assembly is mounted on a stationary shaft which is an integral part of the oil pump. The stator contains an over-running clutch (1-4), which allows the stator to rotate only in a clockwise direction. When the stator is locked against the over-running clutch, the torque multiplication feature of the torque converter is operational. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter > Component Information > Description and Operation > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 7449 The stator (1) is located between the impeller (2) and turbine (4) within the torque converter case. TORQUE CONVERTER CLUTCH (TCC) The TCC was installed to improve the efficiency of the torque converter that is lost to the slippage of the fluid coupling. Although the fluid coupling provides smooth, shock-free power transfer, it is natural for all fluid couplings to slip. If the impeller and turbine were mechanically locked together, a zero slippage condition could be obtained. A hydraulic piston (6) was added to the turbine (5), and a friction material (7) was added to the inside of the front cover (1) to provide this mechanical lock-up. Operation OPERATION Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter > Component Information > Description and Operation > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 7450 Torque Converter Fluid Operation The converter impeller (driving member), which is integral to the converter housing and bolted to the engine drive plate, rotates at engine speed. The converter turbine (driven member), which reacts from fluid pressure generated by the impeller, rotates and turns the transmission input shaft. TURBINE As the fluid that was put into motion by the impeller blades strikes the blades of the turbine, some of the energy and rotational force is transferred into the turbine and the input shaft. This causes both of them (turbine and input shaft) to rotate in a clockwise direction following the impeller. As the fluid is leaving the trailing edges of the turbine's blades it continues in a "hindering" direction back toward the impeller. If the fluid is not redirected before it strikes the impeller, it will strike the impeller in a direction that would tend to slow it down. STATOR Stator Operation Torque multiplication is achieved by locking the stator's over-running clutch to its shaft. Under stall conditions the turbine is stationary and the oil leaving the turbine blades strikes the face of the stator blades and tries to rotate them in a counterclockwise direction. When this happens the overrunning Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter > Component Information > Description and Operation > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 7451 clutch of the stator locks and holds the stator from rotating. With the stator locked, the oil strikes the stator blades (1) and is redirected into a "helping" direction before it enters the impeller. This circulation of oil from impeller to turbine, turbine to stator, and stator to impeller, can produce a maximum torque multiplication of about 1.75:1. As the turbine begins to match the speed of the impeller, the fluid that was hitting the stator in such as way as to cause it to lock-up is no longer doing so. In this condition of operation, the stator begins to free wheel and the converter acts as a fluid coupling. TORQUE CONVERTER CLUTCH (TCC) The torque converter clutch is hydraulically applied or released when fluid is feed or vented from the hydraulic circuit by the torque converter control (TCC) solenoid on the valve body. The torque converter clutch is controlled by the Powertrain Control Module (PCM). The torque converter clutch engages in FOURTH gear, and in THIRD gear under various conditions, such as when the O/D switch is OFF, or when the vehicle is cruising on a level surface after the vehicle has warmed up. The torque converter clutch can also be engaged in the MANUAL SECOND gear position if high transmission temperatures are sensed by the PCM. The torque converter clutch may disengage momentarily when an increase in engine load is sensed by the PCM, such as when the vehicle begins to go uphill or the throttle pressure is increased. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter > Component Information > Description and Operation > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 7452 Torque Converter: Description and Operation AS68RC Automatic Transmission Description DESCRIPTION The torque converter is a hydraulic device that couples the engine crankshaft to the transmission. The torque converter consists of an outer shell with an lock-up damper (1), lock-up piston (3 ), pump impeller (4), turbine runner (5), stator (6), and one-way clutch (7). The converter clutch provides reduced engine speed and greater fuel economy when engaged. Clutch engagement also provides reduced transmission fluid temperatures. The torque converter is a sealed, welded unit that is not repairable and is serviced as an assembly. CAUTION: The torque converter must be replaced if a transmission failure resulted in large amounts of metal or fiber contamination in the fluid. IMPELLER Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter > Component Information > Description and Operation > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 7453 Impeller The impeller is an integral part of the converter housing. The impeller consists of curved blades placed radially along the inside of the housing on the transmission side of the converter. As the converter housing is rotated by the engine, so is the impeller, because they are one and the same and are the driving members of the system. TURBINE Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter > Component Information > Description and Operation > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 7454 Turbine The turbine is the output, or driven, member of the converter. The turbine is mounted within the housing opposite the impeller, but is not attached to the housing. The input shaft is inserted through the center of the impeller and splined into the turbine. The design of the turbine is similar to the impeller, except the blades of the turbine are curved in the opposite direction. STATOR Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter > Component Information > Description and Operation > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 7455 The stator assembly is mounted on a stationary shaft which is an integral part of the oil pump. The stator (1) is located between the impeller (2) and the turbine (4) within the torque converter case. The stator contains an one-way clutch (1-4), which allows the stator to rotate only in a clockwise direction. When the stator is locked against the over-running clutch, the torque multiplication feature of the torque converter is operational. Torque Converter Solenoid In order to reduce heat build-up in the transmission and buffer the powertrain against torsional vibrations, the TCM can duty cycle the Torque Converter Solenoid to achieve a smooth application of the torque converter clutch. This function can occur at various times depending on the following variables: - Shift lever position - Current gear range - Transmission fluid temperature - Engine coolant temperature - Input speed - Throttle angle - Engine speed Operation OPERATION The torque converter transmits engine torque to the transmission. When it is not locked up, it transmits the torque by means of oil. When it is locked up, it transmits the torque by means of the lockup piston. The lockup damper is designed to soften the impact as the torque converter locks up. The torque converter is a 3-element, single-stage, 2-phase type. The term 'single-stage' indicates that there is 1 turbine runner (output element). The term '2-phase' indicates that the mechanism works as a torque converter when the turbine runner is turning slowly relative to the pump impeller and as a fluid coupling when the turbine runner is turning quickly relative to the pump impeller. TORQUE CONVERTER NOT LOCKED UP Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter > Component Information > Description and Operation > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 7456 The torque converter activation pressure is not supplied between the converter front cover and lockup piston via passage (3). The lockup clutch (1) and the plate (2) are therefore disengaged and the lockup function is inactive. TORQUE CONVERTER LOCKED UP The torque converter activation pressure is supplied between the converter front cover and lockup piston via passage (3). The lockup clutch (1) and the plate (2) are therefore engaged and the lockup function is active. TURBINE As the fluid that was put into motion by the impeller blades strikes the blades of the turbine, some of the energy and rotational force is transferred into the turbine and the input shaft. This causes both of them (turbine and input shaft) to rotate in a clockwise direction following the impeller. As the fluid is leaving the trailing edges of the turbine's blades it continues in a "hindering" direction back toward the impeller. If the fluid is not redirected before it strikes the impeller, it will strike the impeller in such a direction that it would tend to slow it down. STATOR Torque multiplication is achieved by locking the stator's one-way clutch to its shaft. Under stall conditions (the turbine is stationary), the oil leaving the turbine blades strikes the face of the stator blades and tries to rotate them in a counterclockwise direction. When this happens the one-way clutch of the stator locks and holds the stator from rotating. With the stator locked, the oil strikes the stator blades and is redirected into a "helping" direction before it enters the impeller. This circulation of oil from impeller to turbine, turbine to stator, and stator to impeller, can produce a maximum torque multiplication of about 2.4:1. As the turbine begins to match the speed of the impeller, the fluid that was hitting the stator in such as way as to cause it to lock-up is no longer doing so. In this condition of operation, the stator begins to free wheel and the converter acts as a fluid coupling. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter > Component Information > Description and Operation > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 7457 Stator Operation TORQUE CONVERTER CLUTCH (TCC) In a standard torque converter, the impeller and turbine are rotating at about the same speed and the stator is freewheeling, providing no torque multiplication. By applying the turbine's piston and friction material to the front cover, a total converter engagement can be obtained. The result of this engagement is a direct 1:1 mechanical link between the engine and the transmission. The clutch can be engaged in second, third, fourth, fifth and, sixth gear ranges. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter > Component Information > Service and Repair > 42RLE Automatic Transmission Torque Converter: Service and Repair 42RLE Automatic Transmission Removal REMOVAL 1. Remove transmission and torque converter from vehicle. 2. Place a suitable drain pan under the converter housing end of the transmission. CAUTION: Verify that transmission is secure on the lifting device or work surface, the center of gravity of the transmission will shift when the torque converter is removed creating an unstable condition. The torque converter is a heavy unit. Use caution when separating the torque converter from the transmission. 3. Pull the torque converter forward until the center hub clears the oil pump seal. 4. Separate the torque converter from the transmission. Installation INSTALLATION NOTE: Check converter hub and drive notches for sharp edges, burrs, scratches, or nicks. Polish the hub and notches with 320/400 grit paper or crocus cloth if necessary. The hub must be smooth to avoid damaging the pump seal at installation. 1. Lubricate oil pump seal lip with transmission fluid. 2. Place torque converter in position on transmission. CAUTION: Do not damage oil pump seal or bushing while inserting torque converter into the front of the transmission. 3. Align torque converter to oil pump seal opening. 4. Insert torque converter hub into oil pump. 5. While pushing torque converter inward, rotate converter until converter is fully seated in the oil pump gears. 6. Check converter seating with a scale (1) and straightedge (2). Surface of converter lugs should be 1/2 in. to rear of straightedge when converter is fully seated. 7. If necessary, temporarily secure converter with C-clamp attached to the converter housing. 8. Install the transmission in the vehicle. 9. Fill the transmission with the recommended fluid. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter > Component Information > Service and Repair > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 7460 Torque Converter: Service and Repair 545RFE Automatic Transmission Removal REMOVAL 1. Remove transmission and torque converter from vehicle. 2. Place a suitable drain pan under the converter housing end of the transmission. CAUTION: Verify that transmission is secure on the lifting device or work surface, the center of gravity of the transmission will shift when the torque converter is removed creating an unstable condition. The torque converter is a heavy unit. Use caution when separating the torque converter from the transmission. 3. Pull the torque converter forward until the center hub clears the oil pump seal. 4. Separate the torque converter from the transmission. Installation INSTALLATION NOTE: Check converter hub and drive flats for sharp edges, burrs, scratches, or nicks. Polish the hub and flats with 320/400 grit paper or crocus cloth if necessary. Verify that the converter hub o-ring is properly installed and is free from debris. The hub must be smooth to avoid damaging the pump seal at installation. 1. Lubricate oil pump seal lip with transmission fluid. 2. Place torque converter in position on transmission. CAUTION: Do not damage oil pump seal or converter hub o-ring while inserting torque converter into the front of the transmission. 3. Align torque converter to oil pump seal opening. 4. Insert torque converter hub into oil pump. 5. While pushing torque converter inward, rotate converter until converter is fully seated in the oil pump gears. 6. Check converter seating with a scale (1) and straightedge (2). Surface of converter lugs should be at least 13 mm (1/2 in.) to rear of straightedge when converter is fully seated. 7. If necessary, temporarily secure converter with C-clamp attached to the converter housing. 8. Install the transmission in the vehicle. 9. Fill the transmission with the recommended fluid. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter > Component Information > Service and Repair > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 7461 Torque Converter: Service and Repair 68RFE Automatic Transmission Removal REMOVAL 1. Remove transmission and torque converter from vehicle. See: Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/68RFE Automatic Transmission/Removal 2. Place a suitable drain pan under the converter housing end of the transmission. CAUTION: Verify that transmission is secure on the lifting device or work surface, the center of gravity of the transmission will shift when the torque converter is removed creating an unstable condition. The torque converter is a heavy unit. Use caution when separating the torque converter from the transmission. 3. Pull the torque converter forward until the center hub clears the oil pump seal. 4. Separate the torque converter from the transmission. Installation INSTALLATION NOTE: Check converter hub and drive flats for sharp edges, burrs, scratches, or nicks. Polish the hub and flats with 800/1000 grit paper or crocus cloth if necessary. Verify that the converter hub o-ring is properly installed and is free from debris. The hub must be smooth to avoid damaging the pump seal at installation. 1. Lubricate oil pump seal lip with transmission fluid. 2. Place torque converter in position on transmission. CAUTION: Do not damage oil pump seal or converter hub o-ring while inserting torque converter into the front of the transmission. 3. Align torque converter to oil pump seal opening. 4. Insert torque converter hub into oil pump. 5. While pushing torque converter inward, rotate converter until converter is fully seated in the oil pump gears. 6. Check converter seating with a scale (1) and straightedge (2). Surface of converter lugs should be at least 25 mm (1in.) to rear of straightedge when converter is fully seated. 7. If necessary, temporarily secure converter with C-clamp attached to the converter housing. 8. Install the transmission in the vehicle. See: Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/68RFE Automatic Transmission/Installation 9. Fill the transmission with the recommended fluid. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter > Component Information > Service and Repair > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 7462 Torque Converter: Service and Repair 48RE Automatic Transmission Removal REMOVAL 1. Remove transmission and torque converter from vehicle. 2. Place a suitable drain pan under the converter housing end of the transmission. CAUTION: Verify that transmission is secure on the lifting device or work surface, the center of gravity of the transmission will shift when the torque converter is removed creating an unstable condition. The torque converter is a heavy unit. Use caution when separating the torque converter from the transmission. 3. Pull the torque converter forward until the center hub clears the oil pump seal. 4. Separate the torque converter from the transmission. Installation INSTALLATION Check converter hub and drive notches for sharp edges, burrs, scratches, or nicks. Polish the hub and notches with 320/400 grit paper or crocus cloth if necessary. The hub must be smooth to avoid damaging the pump seal at installation. 1. Lubricate oil pump seal lip with transmission fluid. 2. Place torque converter in position on transmission. CAUTION: Do not damage oil pump seal or bushing while inserting torque converter into the front of the transmission. 3. Align torque converter to oil pump seal opening. 4. Insert torque converter hub into oil pump. 5. While pushing torque converter inward, rotate converter until converter is fully seated in the oil pump gears. 6. Check converter seating with a scale (1) and straightedge (2). Surface of converter lugs should be 19mm (0.75 in.) to the rear of the straightedge when converter is fully seated. 7. If necessary, temporarily secure converter with C-clamp attached to the converter housing. 8. Install the transmission in the vehicle. 9. Fill the transmission with the recommended fluid. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter > Component Information > Service and Repair > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 7463 Torque Converter: Service and Repair AS68RC Automatic Transmission Removal REMOVAL 1. Remove transmission from vehicle. See: Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/AS68RC Automatic Transmission/Removal 2. Place a suitable drain pan under the converter housing end of the transmission. WARNING: Be certain the transmission is secure when removing the torque converter, the torque converter is very heavy. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury or may be fatal. TC REMOVAL 3. Pull the torque converter forward until the center hub clears the oil pump seal. 4. Separate the torque converter from the transmission. Installation INSTALLATION NOTE: Check converter hub and drive flats for sharp edges, burrs, scratches, or nicks. Polish the hub and flats with 800/10000 grit paper or crocus cloth if necessary. Verify that the oil pump seal is properly installed and is free from debris. The hub must be smooth to avoid damaging the pump seal at installation. TC REMOVAL Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter > Component Information > Service and Repair > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 7464 1. Lubricate oil pump seal lip and input shaft seal rings with MOPAR(R) AS68RC ATF. WARNING: Be certain the transmission is secure when installing the torque converter, the torque converter is very heavy. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury or may be fatal. 2. Place torque converter in position on transmission. CAUTION: Do not damage oil pump seal or input shaft seal rings while inserting torque converter into the front of the transmission. 3. Align torque converter to oil pump seal opening. 4. Insert torque converter hub into oil pump. 5. While pushing torque converter inward, rotate converter until converter is fully seated in the oil pump gears. 6. Install the transmission into the vehicle. See: Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/AS68RC Automatic Transmission/Installation 7. Check converter seating with a scale (1) and straightedge (2). Surface of converter lugs should be at least 28.2 mm (1.12 in.) to rear of straightedge when converter is fully seated. 8. If necessary, temporarily secure converter with C-clamp attached to the converter housing. 9. Install the transmission in the vehicle. See: Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/AS68RC Automatic Transmission/Installation 10. Fill the transmission with the recommended fluid. See: Service and Repair/Procedures/AS68RC Automatic Transmission/Transmission Fill - AS68RC Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Check Valve > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Torque Converter Check Valve: Description and Operation Description GAS ENGINES The drainback valve is located in the transmission cooler outlet (pressure) line. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Check Valve > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 7469 Torque Converter Check Valve: Description and Operation Operation GAS ENGINES The valve prevents fluid from draining from the converter into the cooler and lines when the vehicle is shut down for lengthy periods. Production valves have a hose nipple at one end, while the opposite end is threaded for a flare fitting. All valves have an arrow (or similar mark) to indicate direction of flow through the valve. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Check Valve > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 7470 Torque Converter Check Valve: Service and Repair GAS ENGINES The converter drainback check valve is located in the cooler outlet (pressure) line near the radiator tank. The valve prevents fluid drainback when the vehicle is parked for lengthy periods. The valve check ball is spring loaded and has an opening pressure of approximately 2 psi. The valve is serviced as an assembly; it is not repairable. Do not clean the valve if restricted, or contaminated by sludge, or debris. If the valve fails, or if a transmission malfunction occurs that generates significant amounts of sludge and/or clutch particles and metal shavings, the valve must be replaced. If the valve is restricted, installed backwards, or in the wrong line, it will cause an transmission overheating condition and possible transmission failure. CAUTION: The drainback valve is a one-way flow device. It must be properly oriented in terms of flow direction for the cooler to function properly. The valve must be installed in the pressure line. Otherwise flow will be blocked and would cause an transmission overheating condition and eventual transmission failure. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > 42RLE Automatic Transmission Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid: Description and Operation 42RLE Automatic Transmission Description DESCRIPTION The Solenoid/Pressure Switch Assembly (1) is inside the transmission and mounted to the valve body assembly. The assembly consists of four solenoids that control hydraulic pressure to the L/R, 2/4, OD, and UD friction elements (transmission clutches), and the torque converter clutch. The reverse clutch is controlled by line pressure from the manual valve in the valve body. The solenoids are contained within the Solenoid/Pressure Switch Assembly, and can only be serviced by replacing the assembly. The solenoid assembly also contains pressure switches that monitor and send hydraulic circuit information to the TCM. Likewise, the pressure switches can only be service by replacing the assembly. Operation OPERATION SOLENOIDS The solenoids receive electrical power from the Transmission Control Relay through a single wire. The TCM energizes or operates the solenoids individually by grounding the return wire of the solenoid needed. When a solenoid is energized, the solenoid valve shifts, and a fluid passage is opened or closed (vented or applied), depending on its default operating state. The result is an apply or release of a frictional element. The 2/4 and UD solenoids are normally applied, which allows fluid to pass through in their relaxed or "off" state. By design, this allows transmission limp-in (P,R,N,2) in the event of an electrical failure. The continuity of the solenoids and circuits are periodically tested. Each solenoid is turned on or off depending on its current state. An inductive spike should be detected by the TCM during this test. If no spike is detected, the circuit is tested again to verify the failure. In addition to the periodic testing, the solenoid circuits are tested if a speed ratio or pressure switch error occurs. PRESSURE SWITCHES The TCM relies on three pressure switches to monitor fluid pressure in the L/R, 2/4, and OD hydraulic circuits. The primary purpose of these switches is to help the TCM detect when clutch circuit hydraulic failures occur. The range for the pressure switch closing and opening points is 11-23 psi. Typically the switch opening point will be approximately one psi lower than the closing point. For example, a switch may close at 18 psi and open at 17 psi. The switches are continuously monitored by the TCM for the correct states (open or closed) in each gear as shown in the following chart: Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 7475 A Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) will set if the TCM senses any switch open or closed at the wrong time in a given gear. The TCM also tests the 2/4 and OD pressure switches when they are normally off (OD and 2/4 are tested in 1st gear, OD in 2nd gear, and 2/4 in 3rd gear). The test simply verifies that they are operational, by looking for a closed state when the corresponding element is applied. Immediately after a shift into 1st, 2nd, or 3rd gear with the engine speed above 1000 rpm, the TCM momentarily turns on element pressure to the 2/4 and/or OD clutch circuits to identify that the appropriate switch has closed. If it doesn't close, it is tested again. If the switch fails to close the second time, the appropriate Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) will set. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 7476 Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid: Description and Operation 545RFE Automatic Transmission Description DESCRIPTION The transmission solenoid/TRS assembly is internal to the transmission and mounted on the valve body assembly. The assembly consists of six solenoids that control hydraulic pressure to the six friction elements (transmission clutches), and the torque converter clutch. The pressure control solenoid is located on the side of the solenoid/TRS assembly. The solenoid/TRS assembly also contains the Transmission Range Sensor (TRS) and five pressure switches that feed information to the TCM. Operation OPERATION SOLENOIDS Solenoids are used to control the L/R, 2C, 4C, OD, and UD friction elements. The reverse clutch is controlled by line pressure and the position of the manual valve in the valve body. All the solenoids are contained within the Solenoid and Pressure Switch Assembly. The solenoid and pressure switch assembly contains one additional solenoid, Multi-Select (MS), which serves primarily to provide 2nd and 3rd gear limp-in operation. The solenoids receive electrical power from the Transmission Control Relay through a single wire. The TCM energizes or operates the solenoids individually by grounding the return wire of the solenoid as necessary. When a solenoid is energized, the solenoid valve shifts, and a fluid passage is opened or closed (vented or applied), depending on its default operating state. The result is an apply or release of a frictional element. The MS and UD solenoids are normally applied to allow transmission limp-in in the event of an electrical failure. The continuity of the solenoids and circuits are periodically tested. Each solenoid is turned on or off depending on its current state. An inductive spike should be detected by the TCM during this test. If no spike is detected, the circuit is tested again to verify the failure. In addition to the periodic testing, the solenoid circuits are tested if a speed ratio or pressure switch error occurs. PRESSURE SWITCHES The TCM relies on five pressure switches to monitor fluid pressure in the L/R, 2C, 4C, UD, and OD hydraulic circuits. The primary purpose of these switches is to help the TCM detect when clutch circuit hydraulic failures occur. The switches close at 23 psi and open at 11 psi, and simply indicate whether or not pressure exists. The switches are continuously monitored by the TCM for the correct states (open or closed) in each gear as shown in the following charts and 545RFE PRESSURE SWITCH STATES: Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 7477 A Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) will set if the TCM senses any switch open or closed at the wrong time in a given gear. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 7478 Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid: Description and Operation 68RFE Automatic Transmission Description DESCRIPTION The transmission solenoid/TRS assembly is internal to the transmission and mounted on the valve body assembly. The assembly consists of six solenoids that control hydraulic pressure to the six friction elements (transmission clutches), and the torque converter clutch. The pressure control solenoid is located on the side of the solenoid/TRS assembly. The solenoid/TRS assembly also contains the Transmission Range Sensor (TRS) and five pressure switches that feed information to the TCM. Operation OPERATION SOLENOIDS Solenoids are used to control the L/R, 2C, 4C, OD, and UD friction elements. The reverse clutch is controlled by line pressure and the position of the manual valve in the valve body. All the solenoids are contained within the Solenoid and Pressure Switch Assembly. The solenoid and pressure switch assembly contains one additional solenoid, Multi-Select (MS), which serves primarily to provide 3rd gear and reverse limp-in operation. The TCM energizes or operates the solenoids individually by grounding the return wire of the solenoid as necessary. When a solenoid is energized, the solenoid valve shifts, and a fluid passage is opened or closed (vented or applied), depending on its default operating state. The result is an apply or release of a frictional element. The MS and UD solenoids are normally applied to allow transmission limp-in in the event of an electrical failure. The continuity of the solenoids and circuits are periodically tested. Each solenoid is turned on or off depending on its current state. An inductive spike should be detected by the TCM during this test. If no spike is detected, the circuit is tested again to verify the failure. In addition to the periodic testing, the solenoid circuits are tested if a speed ratio or pressure switch error occurs. PRESSURE SWITCHES The TCM relies on five pressure switches to monitor fluid pressure in the L/R, 2C, 4C, UD, and OD hydraulic circuits. The primary purpose of these switches is to help the TCM detect when clutch circuit hydraulic failures occur. The switches close at 23 psi and open at 11 psi, and simply indicate whether or not pressure exists. The switches are continuously monitored by the TCM for the correct states (open or closed) in each gear as shown in the following charts and Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 7479 A Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) will set if the TCM senses any switch open or closed at the wrong time in a given gear. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 42RLE Automatic Transmission Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid: Service and Repair 42RLE Automatic Transmission Removal REMOVAL NOTE: If the Solenoid/Pressure Switch Assembly is being replaced, the Quick Learn Procedure must be performed. See: Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Transmission Control Module/TCM Quick Learn 1. Raise vehicle on hoist. 2. Remove valve body assembly from transmission. See: Valve Body/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/42RLE Automatic Transmission/Removal 3. Remove Solenoid/Pressure Switch Assembly retaining screws (2) from solenoid. 4. Remove Solenoid/Pressure Switch Assembly (1) and screen from valve body (2). Installation INSTALLATION NOTE: If the Solenoid/Pressure Switch assembly is being replaced, the Quick Learn Procedure must be performed. See: Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Transmission Control Module/TCM Quick Learn Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 7482 1. Install Solenoid/Pressure Switch Assembly (1) and screen (3) to the separator and transfer plates. 2. Install and tighten retaining screws (2) to 5.5 Nm (50 in. lbs.) torque. 3. Install valve body. See: Valve Body/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/42RLE Automatic Transmission/Installation Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 7483 Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid: Service and Repair 545RFE Automatic Transmission Removal REMOVAL NOTE: If the Transmission Solenoid/TRS Assembly is being replaced, the Quick Learn Procedure must be performed. See: Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Transmission Control Module/TCM Quick Learn 1. Remove the valve body from the transmission. See: Valve Body/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/545RFE Automatic Transmission/Removal 2. Remove the bolts (1) holding the transmission solenoid/TRS assembly onto the valve body. 3. Separate the transmission solenoid/TRS assembly from the valve body. Installation INSTALLATION Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 7484 1. Place TRS selector plate in the PARK position. 2. Position the transmission solenoid/TRS assembly onto the valve body. Be sure that both alignment dowels are fully seated in the valve body and that the TRS switch contacts are properly positioned in the selector plate 3. Install the bolts (1) to hold the transmission solenoid/TRS assembly onto the valve body. 4. Tighten the solenoid assembly screws adjacent to the arrows cast into the bottom of the valve body first. Tighten the screws to 6 Nm (50 in.lbs.). 5. Tighten the remainder of the solenoid assembly screws to 6 Nm (50 in.lbs.). 6. Install the valve body into the transmission. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 7485 Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid: Service and Repair 68RFE Automatic Transmission Removal REMOVAL NOTE: If the Transmission Solenoid/TRS Assembly is being replaced, the Quick Learn Procedure must be performed. See: Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Transmission Control Module/TCM Quick Learn 1. Remove the valve body from the transmission. 2. Remove the bolts (1) holding the transmission solenoid/TRS assembly onto the valve body. 3. Separate the transmission solenoid/TRS assembly from the valve body. Installation INSTALLATION Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 7486 1. Place TRS selector plate in the PARK position. 2. Position the transmission solenoid/TRS assembly onto the valve body. Be sure that both alignment dowels are fully seated in the valve body and that the TRS switch contacts are properly positioned in the selector plate 3. Install the bolts (1) to hold the transmission solenoid/TRS assembly onto the valve body. 4. Tighten the solenoid assembly screws adjacent to the arrows cast into the bottom of the valve body first. Tighten the screws to 6 Nm (50 in.lbs.). 5. Tighten the remainder of the solenoid assembly screws to 6 Nm (50 in.lbs.). 6. Install the valve body into the transmission. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Control System Relay, A/T > Component Information > Locations Transmission Control System Relay: Locations Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Control System Relay, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Transmission Control System Relay: Diagram Information and Instructions Warnings WARNINGS - GENERAL WARNINGS provide information to prevent personal injury and vehicle damage. Below is a list of general warnings that should be followed any time a vehicle is being serviced. WARNING: Always wear safety glasses for eye protection. WARNING: Use safety stands anytime a procedure requires being under a vehicle. WARNING: Be sure that the ignition switch always is in the off position, unless the procedure requires it to be on. WARNING: Set the parking brake when working on any vehicle. An automatic transmission should be in park. A manual transmission should be in neutral. WARNING: Operate the engine only in a well-ventilated area. WARNING: Keep away from moving parts when the engine is running, especially the fan and belts. WARNING: To prevent serious burns, avoid contact with hot parts such as the radiator, exhaust manifold(s), tail pipe, catalytic converter and muffler. WARNING: Do not allow flame or sparks near the battery. Gases are always present in and around the battery. WARNING: Always remove rings, watches, loose hanging jewelry and avoid loose clothing. How to Use Wiring Diagrams DESCRIPTION - HOW TO USE WIRING DIAGRAMS DaimlerChrysler Corporation wiring diagrams are designed to provide information regarding the vehicles wiring content. In order to effectively use the wiring diagrams to diagnose and repair DaimlerChrysler Corporation vehicles, it is important to understand all of their features and characteristics. Diagrams are arranged such that the power (B+) side of the circuit is placed near the top of the page, and the ground (B-) side of the circuit is placed near the bottom of the page. All switches, components, and modules are shown in the at rest position with the doors closed and the key removed from the ignition. Components are shown two ways. A solid line around a component indicates that the component is complete. A dashed line around the component indicates that the component is being shown is not complete. Incomplete components have a reference number to indicate the page where the component is shown complete. It is important to realize that no attempt is made on the diagrams to represent components and wiring as they appear on the vehicle. For example, a short piece of wire is treated the same as a long one. In addition, switches and other components are shown as simply as possible, with regard to function only. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Control System Relay, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7492 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Control System Relay, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7493 SYMBOLS International symbols are used throughout the wiring diagrams. These symbols are consistent with those being used around the world. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Control System Relay, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7494 TERMINOLOGY This is a list of terms and definitions used in the wiring diagrams. LHD - Left Hand Drive Vehicles RHD - Right Hand Drive Vehicles ATX - Automatic Transmissions-Front Wheel Drive MTX Manual Transmissions-Front Wheel Drive Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Control System Relay, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7495 AT - Automatic Transmissions-Rear Wheel Drive MT - Manual Transmissions-Rear Wheel Drive SOHC - Single Over Head Cam Engine DOHC - Double Over Head Cam Engine Export - Vehicles Built For Sale In Markets Other Than North America Except Export - Vehicles Built For Sale In North America Circuit Functions DESCRIPTION - CIRCUIT FUNCTIONS All circuits in the diagrams use an alpha/numeric code to identify the wire and it's function. To identify which circuit code applies to a system, refer to the Circuit Identification Code Chart. This chart shows the main circuits only and does not show the secondary codes that may apply to some models. Circuit Information DESCRIPTION - CIRCUIT INFORMATION Each wire shown in the diagrams contains a code which identifies the main circuit, a specific part of the main circuit, gage of wire, and color. An example would be A 2 18 LB/YL. This is a Battery Feed circuit, level two, eighteen gauge, light blue with a yellow tracer. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Control System Relay, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7496 Connector, Ground and Splice Information DESCRIPTION - CONNECTOR, GROUND AND SPLICE INFORMATION CAUTION: Not all connectors are serviced. Some connectors are serviced only with a harness. A typical example might be the Supplemental Restraint System connectors. Always check parts availability before attempting a repair. IDENTIFICATION In-line connectors are identified by a number, as follows: - In-line connectors located in the engine compartment are C100 series numbers. - In-line connectors located in the instrument panel area are C200 series numbers. - In-line connectors located in the body are C300 series numbers. - Jumper harness connectors are C400 series numbers. - Grounds and ground connectors are identified with a "G" and follow the same series numbering as the in-line connectors. - Splices are identified with an "S" and follow the same series numbering as the in-line connectors. In addition, S001-S099 numbers are located in the engine compartment. - Component connectors are identified by the component name instead of a number. Multiple connectors on a component use a C1, C2, etc. identifier. LOCATIONS Vehicle/Locations contains the master connector/ground/splice location index charts with hyperlinks to the applicable location illustrations. The illustrations contain the connector name (or number)/ground number/splice number and component identification. The abbreviation T/O is used in the component location section to indicate a point in which the wiring harness branches out to a component. The abbreviation N/S means Not Shown in the illustrations Section Identification and Information DESCRIPTION - SECTION IDENTIFICATION AND INFORMATION The wiring diagrams are grouped into individual sections. If a component is most likely found in a particular group, it will be shown complete (all wires, Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Control System Relay, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7497 connectors, and pins) within that group. For example, the Auto Shutdown Relay is most likely to be found in Powertrain Management, so it is shown there complete. It can, however, be shown partially in another group if it contains some associated wiring. Splice diagrams show the entire splice and provide references to other sections the splices serves. Splice Information only contains splice diagrams that are not shown in their entirety somewhere else in the wiring diagrams. Connector Pin-Outs shows each connector and the circuits involved with that connector. The connectors are identified using the name/number on the diagram pages. Removal REMOVAL 1. Disconnect battery. 2. Release Connector Lock (2). 3. Disconnect the connector (3) being repaired from its mating half/component. 4. Remove the dress cover (if applicable) (1). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Control System Relay, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7498 5. Release the Secondary Terminal Lock, if required (1). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Control System Relay, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7499 6. Position the connector locking finger away from the terminal using the proper special tool. Pull on the wire to remove the terminal from the connector. Installation Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Control System Relay, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7500 INSTALLATION 1. Insert the removed terminal in the same cavity on the repair connector. 2. Repeat steps for each terminal in the connector, being sure that all wires are inserted into the proper cavities. For additional connector pin-out identification, refer to the wiring diagrams. 3. When the connector is re-assembled, the secondary terminal lock must be placed in the locked position to prevent terminal push out. 4. Replace dress cover (if applicable). 5. Connect connector to its mating half/component. 6. Connect battery and test all affected systems. Removal REMOVAL 1. Disconnect the battery. 2. Locate the diode in the harness, and remove the protective covering. 3. Remove the diode from the harness, pay attention to the current flow direction (1) (2) (3). Installation INSTALLATION 1. Remove the insulation from the wires in the harness. Only remove enough insulation to solder in the new diode. 2. Install the new diode in the harness, making sure current flow is correct. If necessary, refer to the appropriate wiring diagram for current flow. 3. Solder the connection together using rosin core type solder only. Do not use acid core solder. 4. Tape the diode to the harness using electrical tape. Make sure the diode is completely sealed from the elements. 5. Re-connect the battery and test affected systems. Removal REMOVAL 1. Follow steps for removing terminals described in the connector removal section. 2. Cut the wire 6 inches from the back of the connector. Installation INSTALLATION 1. Select a wire from the terminal repair kit that best matches the color and gage of the wire being repaired. 2. Cut the repair wire to the proper length and remove one-half (1/2) inch of insulation. 3. Splice the repair wire to the wire harness (see wire splicing procedure). See: Service Procedures/Wire Splicing 4. Insert the repaired wire into the connector. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Control System Relay, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7501 5. Install the connector locking wedge, if required, and reconnect the connector to its mating half/component. 6. Re-tape the wire harness starting at 1-1/2 inches behind the connector and 2 inches past the repair. 7. Connect battery and test all affected systems. Wire Splicing STANDARD PROCEDURE - WIRE SPLICING When splicing a wire, it is important that the correct gage be used as shown in the wiring diagrams. 1. Remove one-half (1/2) inch of insulation from each wire that needs to be spliced. 2. Place a piece of adhesive lined heat shrink tubing on one side of the wire. Make sure the tubing will be long enough to cover and seal the entire repair area. 3. Place the strands of wire overlapping each other inside of the splice clip (1). 4. Using crimping tool (1), Mopar p/n 05019912AA, crimp the splice clip and wires together. 5. Solder (3) the connection (2) together using rosin core type solder (1) only. CAUTION: DO NOT USE ACID CORE SOLDER. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Control System Relay, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7502 6. Center the heat shrink tubing (2) over the joint and heat using a heat gun. Heat the joint until the tubing is tightly sealed and sealant (1) comes out of both ends of the tubing. Special Tools WIRING/TERMINAL PROBING TOOL PACKAGE 6807 TERMINAL PICK TOOL SET 6680 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Control System Relay, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7503 TERMINAL REMOVING TOOLS 6932 AND 8638 TERMINAL REMOVING TOOL 6934 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Control System Relay, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7504 Transmission Control System Relay: Diagnostic Aids Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) Sensitive Devices STANDARD PROCEDURE - ELECTROSTATIC DISCHARGE (ESD) SENSITIVE DEVICES All ESD sensitive components are solid state and a symbol is used to indicate this. When handling any component with this symbol, comply with the following procedures to reduce the possibility of electrostatic charge build up on the body and inadvertent discharge into the component. If it is not known whether the part is ESD sensitive, assume that it is. 1. Always touch a known good ground before handling the part. This should be repeated while handling the part and more frequently after sliding across a seat, sitting down from a standing position, or walking a distance. 2. Avoid touching electrical terminals of the part, unless instructed to do so by a written procedure. 3. When using a voltmeter, be sure to connect the ground lead first. 4. Do not remove the part from it's protective packing until it is time to install the part. 5. Before removing the part from it's package, ground the package to a known good ground on the vehicle. Testing Of Voltage Potential STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING OF VOLTAGE POTENTIAL 1. Connect the ground lead of a voltmeter to a known good ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the voltmeter to the selected test point. The vehicle ignition may need to be turned ON to check voltage. Refer to the appropriate test procedure. Testing For Continuity Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Control System Relay, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7505 STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING FOR CONTINUITY 1. Remove the fuse (1) for the circuit being checked or, disconnect the battery. 2. Connect one lead of the ohmmeter to one side of the circuit being tested 3. Connect the other lead to the other end of the circuit being tested. Low or no resistance means good continuity. Testing For A Short To Ground STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING FOR A SHORT TO GROUND 1. Remove the fuse and disconnect all items involved with the fuse. 2. Connect a test light or a voltmeter across the terminals of the fuse. 3. Starting at the fuse block, wiggle the wiring harness about six to eight inches apart and watch the voltmeter/test lamp. 4. If the voltmeter registers voltage or the test lamp glows, there is a short to ground in that general area of the wiring harness. Testing For A Short To Ground On Fuses Powering Several Loads STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING FOR A SHORT TO GROUND ON FUSES POWERING SEVERAL LOADS 1. Refer to the wiring diagrams and disconnect or isolate all items on the suspected fused circuits. 2. Replace the blown fuse. 3. Supply power to the fuse by turning ON the ignition switch or re-connecting the battery. 4. Start connecting or energizing the items in the fuse circuit one at a time. When the fuse blows the circuit with the short to ground has been isolated. Testing For A Voltage Drop STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING FOR A VOLTAGE DROP Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Control System Relay, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7506 1. Connect the positive lead of the voltmeter to the side of the circuit closest to the battery. 2. Connect the other lead of the voltmeter to the other side of the switch, component or circuit. 3. Operate the item. 4. The voltmeter will show the difference in voltage between the two points. Troubleshooting Wiring Problems DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING - WIRING HARNESS TROUBLESHOOTING TOOLS When diagnosing a problem in an electrical circuit there are several common tools necessary. These tools are listed and explained below. - Jumper Wire - This is a test wire used to connect two points of a circuit. It can be used to bypass an open in a circuit. WARNING: Never use a jumper wire across a load, such as a motor, connected between a battery feed and ground. - Voltmeter - Used to check for voltage on a circuit. Always connect the black lead to a known good ground and the red lead to the positive side of the circuit. CAUTION: Most of the electrical components used in today's vehicles are Solid State. When checking voltages in these circuits, use a meter with a 10 - megohm or greater impedance rating. - Ohmmeter - Used to check the resistance between two points of a circuit. Low or no resistance in a circuit means good continuity. CAUTION: Most of the electrical components used in today's vehicles are Solid State. When checking resistance in these circuits use a meter with a 10 - megohm or greater impedance rating. In addition, make sure the power is disconnected from the circuit. Circuits that are powered up by the vehicle's electrical system can cause damage to the equipment and provide false readings. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Control System Relay, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7507 - Probing Tools - These tools are used for probing terminals in connectors. Select the proper size tool from Special Tool Package 6807, and insert the probing end (2) into the terminal being tested. Use the other end of the tool (1) to insert the meter probe. INTERMITTENT AND POOR CONNECTIONS Most intermittent electrical problems are caused by faulty electrical connections or wiring. It is also possible for a sticking component or relay to cause a problem. Before condemning a component or wiring assembly, check the following items. - Connectors are fully seated - Spread terminals, or terminal push out - Terminals in the wiring assembly are fully seated into the connector/component and locked into position - Dirt or corrosion on the terminals. Any amount of corrosion or dirt could cause an intermittent problem - Damaged connector/component casing exposing the item to dirt or moisture - Wire insulation that has rubbed through causing a short to ground - Some or all of the wiring strands broken inside of the insulation - Wiring broken inside of the insulation TROUBLESHOOTING WIRING PROBLEMS When troubleshooting wiring problems there are six steps which can aid in the procedure. The steps are listed and explained below. Always check for non-factory items added to the vehicle before doing any diagnosis. If the vehicle is equipped with these items, disconnect them to verify these add-on items are not the cause of the problem. 1. Verify the problem. 2. Verify any related symptoms. Do this by performing operational checks on components that are in the same circuit. Refer to the wiring diagrams. 3. Analyze the symptoms. Use the wiring diagrams to determine what the circuit is doing, where the problem most likely is occurring and where the diagnosis will continue. 4. Isolate the problem area. 5. Repair the problem area. 6. Verify the proper operation. For this step, check for proper operation of all items on the repaired circuit. Refer to the wiring diagrams. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Control System Relay, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7508 Transmission Control System Relay: Connector Views Component ID: 246 Component : RELAY-TRANSMISSION Connector: Name : RELAY-TRANSMISSION Color : # of pins : 4 Pin Circuit Description 1 A916 16RD FUSED B(+) 2 T16 16YL TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT 3 F916 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION RELAY OUTPUT 4 Z420 18BK GROUND Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Control System Relay, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Transmission Control System Relay: Description and Operation Description The Chrysler Corporation does not provide a description of the 545RFE Transmission control Relay for the 4.7/5.7L engine. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Control System Relay, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 7511 Transmission Control System Relay: Description and Operation Operation The Chrysler Corporation does not provide operation information for the 545RFE Transmission control Relay for the 4.7/5.7L engine platform. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Cooler, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Transmission Cooler: Description and Operation Description ALL VEHICLES An air-to-oil transmission oil cooler is standard on all engine packages. The transmission oil cooler is mounted to the front of the radiator above the power steering cooler and Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Cooler, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 7516 Transmission Cooler: Description and Operation Operation GAS ENGINES Transmission oil is routed through the cooler where heat is removed from the transmission oil before returning to the transmission. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Cooler, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures Transmission Cooler: Procedures TRANSMISSION COOLER LINE QUICK CONNECT FITTING DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY DISCONNECT 1. Remove dust cap by pulling it straight back off of quick connect fitting 2. Place disconnect tool Special Tool 8875A onto transmission cooler line with the fingers of the tool facing the quick connect fitting. 3. Slide disconnect tool down the transmission line and engage the fingers of the tool into the retaining clip. When properly engaged in the clip, the tool will fit flush against the quick connect fitting. 4. Rotate the disconnect tool 60° to expand the retaining clip. 5. While holding the disconnect tool against the quick connect fitting, pull back on the transmission cooler line to remove. CONNECT Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Cooler, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 7519 1. Align transmission cooler line with quick connect fitting while pushing straight into the fitting. 2. Push in on transmission cooler line until a "click" is heard or felt. 3. Slide dust cap down the transmission cooler line and snap it over the quick connect fitting until it is fully seated and rotates freely. Dust cap will only snap over quick connect fitting when the transmission cooler line is properly installed. NOTE: If dust cap will not snap into place, repeat assembly step 2. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Cooler, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 7520 Transmission Cooler: Removal and Replacement 3.7L/4.7L/5.7L Engine 3.7L/4.7L/5.7L ENGINE 1. Place a drain pan under the oil cooler lines. 2. Disconnect the transmission oil cooler line quick-connect fitting at the cooler outlet See: Procedures . Plug the cooler lines to prevent oil leakage. 3. Unsnap the transmission cooler tubes from the radiator tank clips. 4. Remove the bolt attaching the transmission cooler to the radiator. 5. Remove oil cooler from the vehicle. Take care not to damage the radiator core or transmission cooler tubes. Water To Oil Cooler REMOVAL - WATER TO OIL COOLER CAUTION: If a leak should occur in the water-to-oil cooler mounted to the side of the engine block, engine coolant may become mixed with transmission fluid. Transmission fluid may also enter engine cooling system. Both cooling system and transmission should be drained and inspected in case of oil cooler leakage. 1. Disconnect both battery negative cables. 2. Remove starter See: Starting and Charging/Starting System/Starter Motor/Service and Repair/Starter Motor - Removal . 3. Drain cooling system See: Engine, Cooling and Exhaust/Cooling System/Service and Repair . 4. Disconnect coolant lines from cooler. NOTE: Use a back-up wrench on the transmission cooler fittings to prevent damage to the cooler. 5. Disconnect transmission oil lines from cooler. Plug cooler lines to prevent oil leakage. 6. Remove cooler bracket to transmission adapter bolt. 7. Remove wire harness push in clip at bottom of coolant bracket. 8. Remove wire harness push in clip at bottom of coolant bracket. 9. Remove two cooler bracket to block bolts. 10. Remove cooler assembly from vehicle. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Cooler, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 7521 3.7L/4.7L/5.7L Engine 3.7L/4.7L/5.7L ENGINE 1. Position the transmission cooler tubes to the front of the radiator by sliding brackets into slots on radiator inlet tank. 2. Snap the transmission cooler tubes into the clips on the side of the radiator tank. 3. Install the transmission cooler attaching bolt. Tighten the bolt to 16 Nm (140 in. lbs.). 4. Inspect the quick connect fittings for debris and install the quick connect fitting on the cooler tube until an audible "click" is heard. Pull apart the connection to verify proper installation and install the secondary latches See: Procedures . 5. Start the engine and check all fittings for leaks. 6. Check the fluid level in the automatic transmission. Water-To-Oil Cooler INSTALLATION - WATER-TO-OIL COOLER Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Cooler, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 7522 1. Position oil cooler on cylinder block. 2. Install 2 capscrews to cylinder block finger tight. 3. Install capscrews at the transmission adapter. Torque bolt to 24 Nm (18 ft. lbs.) 4. Tighten lower mounting bolt to cooler at the cylinder block. Tighten to 77 Nm (57 ft. lbs.). NOTE: Use a back-up wrench on the transmission cooler fittings to prevent damage to the cooler. 5. Tighten upper mounting bolt to cooler at cylinder block to 24 N.m (18 ft. lbs). 6. Install wire harness push in clip at bottom of cooler bracket. 7. Install starter motor See: Starting and Charging/Starting System/Starter Motor/Service and Repair/Starter Motor - Installation . 8. Connect battery negative cables. 9. Fill cooling system See: Engine, Cooling and Exhaust/Cooling System/Service and Repair . 10. Check transmission oil level and fill as necessary. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Mode Indicator - A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Transmission Mode Indicator - A/T: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION An electronic automatic transmission gear selector indicator is standard factory-installed equipment on this vehicle. However, on vehicles not equipped with an optional automatic transmission, this indicator is electronically disabled. The gear selector indicator information is displayed in an electronic, blue-green Vacuum-Fluorescent Display (VFD) unit. This VFD unit is soldered onto the cluster electronic circuit board and is visible through a window with a smoked clear lens located on the lower edge of the speedometer dial face of the cluster overlay. The dark lens over the VFD prevents the indicator from being clearly visible when it is not illuminated. The gear selector indicator displays the following characters from left to right: P, R, N, D, 2, and 1. Each character appears in a blue-green color and at the same lighting level as the odometer information. Respectively, these characters represent the PARK, REVERSE, NEUTRAL, DRIVE, second gear, and first gear positions of the transmission gear selector lever on the steering column. The indicator illuminates a rectangular box around the character that represents the currently selected lever position. During daylight hours (exterior lamps are OFF) the gear selector indicator is illuminated at full brightness for clear visibility. At night (exterior lamps are ON), the indicator lighting level is adjusted with the other cluster general illumination lamps using the panel lamps dimmer thumbwheel on the headlamp switch. However, a PARADE mode position of the panel lamps dimmer thumbwheel allows the indicator to be illuminated at full brightness if the exterior lamps are turned ON during daylight hours. The gear selector indicator is serviced as a unit with the VFD unit in the instrument cluster. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Mode Indicator - A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 7527 Transmission Mode Indicator - A/T: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The electronic gear selector indicator gives an indication to the vehicle operator of the transmission gear that has been selected with the automatic transmission gear selector lever. This indicator is controlled by the instrument cluster circuit board based upon cluster programming. The cluster circuitry automatically configures itself for the proper transmission type based upon the hard wired transmission range sensor mux circuit input to the cluster. The gear selector indicator information is displayed by the odometer/trip odometer Vacuum Fluorescent Display (VFD) unit soldered onto the instrument cluster electronic circuit board, and the VFD will not display the gear selector indicator information after the ignition switch is turned to the OFF position. Each time the cluster is disconnected from battery current for more than about five minutes, it must configure itself for the automatic transmission type that is in the vehicle once it is reconnected to battery current. The instrument cluster circuitry configures the gear selector indicator based upon the following inputs from the transmission range sensor: - Open Circuit - If the cluster is configured for an automatic transmission and the transmission range sensor mux circuit is open, the cluster circuitry controls the gear selector indicator display based upon an electronic selected gear message received from the Transmission Control Module (TCM) over the Controller Area Network (CAN) data bus. If the Transmission Range Sensor (TRS) mux circuit is open and no electronic selected gear messages are received from the TCM within two seconds, the instrument cluster circuitry will not display any gear selector position until the condition is resolved or until the ignition switch is turned to the OFF position, whichever occurs first. - Resolved Circuit - If the transmission range sensor mux circuit is resolved, the cluster circuitry controls the gear selector indicator display based upon the resistance value of the hard wired input from the TRS. If the cluster is configured for an automatic transmission with a TRS input and detects a short to ground or an open in the TRS mux input, the instrument cluster circuitry will not display any gear selector position in the VFD. The VFD display for the short-to-ground and open circuit conditions will continue until the condition is resolved or until the ignition switch is turned to the OFF position, whichever occurs first. - Actuator Test - Each time the cluster is put through the actuator test, the odometer/trip odometer VFD will display all of its characters at once, then step through each character segment individually during the VFD portion of the test to confirm the functionality of the VFD and the cluster control circuitry. On vehicles with a TCM, the TCM continually monitors the TRS, then sends the proper message to the ElectroMechanical Instrument Cluster (EMIC) (also known as the Cab Compartment Node/CCN). On vehicles without a TCM, the EMIC continually monitors the hard wired TRS multiplexed input. On vehicles with a TCM, for proper diagnosis of the TRS, the TCM, the EMIC, the CAN data bus or the electronic communication related to gear selector indicator operation a diagnostic scan tool is required. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Transmission Range Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Locations Sensor-Transmission Range Component ID: 444 Component : SENSOR-TRANSMISSION RANGE Connector: Name : SENSOR-TRANSMISSION RANGE Color : # of pins : 10 Qualifier : (RC) Pin Circuit Description 1 T825 20DG/YL TRS NEUTRAL SIGNAL 2 T3 20DG/DB TRS T3 SIGNAL 3 T828 20DG/DB TRS 1 SIGNAL 4 F1 20PK/WT FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (OFF-RUN-START) 5 T824 20YL/DB TRS PARK SIGNAL 6 Z157 16BK/LG GROUND 7 T42 20DG/YL TRS T42 SIGNAL 8 T827 20DG/LB TRS DRIVE SIGNAL 9 T826 20DG/DB TRS REVERSE SIGNAL 10 T41 20YL/DB TRS T41 SIGNAL (P/N) Component Location - 20 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Transmission Range > Page 7532 Component Location - 19 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Transmission Range > Page 7533 Component Location - 26 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Transmission Range > Page 7534 Connector: Name : SENSOR-TRANSMISSION RANGE Color : # of pins : 6 Qualifier : (RE) Pin Circuit Description 1-2 T117 20DG/YL TRS SIGNAL 3-4-- Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Transmission Range > Page 7535 5 T917 20YL/TN TRS RETURN 6 T41 20YL/DB TRS T41 SIGNAL (P/N) Component Location - 20 Component Location - 19 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Transmission Range > Page 7536 Component Location - 26 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Transmission Range > Page 7537 Connector: Name : SENSOR-TRANSMISSION RANGE Color : LT. GREEN # of pins : 10 Qualifier : (RLE) Pin Circuit Description 1 T16 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT 2-3 K900 20DB/DG SENSOR GROUND 4 T54 20DG/OR TRANSMISSION TEMPERATURE SIGNAL Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Transmission Range > Page 7538 5-6-7 T1 20DG/LB TRS T1 SIGNAL 8 T3 20DG/DB TRS T3 SIGNAL 9 T42 20DG/YL TRS T42 SIGNAL 10 T41 20YL/DB TRS T41 SIGNAL (P/N) Component Location - 20 Component Location - 19 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Transmission Range > Page 7539 Component Location - 26 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Transmission Range > Page 7540 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Transmission Range > Page 7541 Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Locations Assembly-Transmission Solenoid/TRS Component ID: 21 Component : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID/TRS Connector: Name : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID/TRS Color : BLACK # of pins : 23 Qualifier : (RFE) Pin Circuit Description 1-2 T20 20DG/WT L/R CONTROL 3-4 T41 20YL/DB TRS T41 SIGNAL (P/N) 5 T42 20DG/YL TRS T42 SIGNAL 6-- 7 T60 20YL/GY OD SOLENOID CONTROL 8 T3 20DG/DB TRS T3 SIGNAL 9 T1 20DG/LB TRS T1 SIGNAL 10 T16 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT 11 T48 20BR/YL 4C PRESSURE SIGNAL 12 T118 20DG LINE PRESSURE CONTROL 13 T4 20DG/RD TRS T2 SIGNAL 13 T4 20DG/LB TRS T2 SIGNAL 14 T50 20DG/PK L/R PRESSURE SIGNAL 14 T50 20YL/TN L/R PRESSURE SIGNAL 15 T147 20DG/YL 2C PRESSURE SIGNAL 16 T9 20DG/TN OD PRESSURE SIGNAL 17 T59 20YL/LB UD CONTROL 18 T29 20YL/WT UD PRESSURE SIGNAL 19 T259 20YL/DG 4C CONTROL 20 T219 20YL/LG 2C CONTROL 21 T140 20YL/GY MS CONTROL 22 T160 20DG/WT SENSOR GROUND 22 K900 20DB/DG SENSOR GROUND 23 T54 20DG/OR TRANSMISSION TEMPERATURE SIGNAL Component Location - 21 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Transmission Range > Page 7542 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Transmission Range Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Diagrams Sensor-Transmission Range Component ID: 444 Component : SENSOR-TRANSMISSION RANGE Connector: Name : SENSOR-TRANSMISSION RANGE Color : # of pins : 10 Qualifier : (RC) Pin Circuit Description 1 T825 20DG/YL TRS NEUTRAL SIGNAL 2 T3 20DG/DB TRS T3 SIGNAL 3 T828 20DG/DB TRS 1 SIGNAL 4 F1 20PK/WT FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (OFF-RUN-START) 5 T824 20YL/DB TRS PARK SIGNAL 6 Z157 16BK/LG GROUND 7 T42 20DG/YL TRS T42 SIGNAL 8 T827 20DG/LB TRS DRIVE SIGNAL 9 T826 20DG/DB TRS REVERSE SIGNAL 10 T41 20YL/DB TRS T41 SIGNAL (P/N) Component Location - 20 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Transmission Range > Page 7545 Component Location - 19 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Transmission Range > Page 7546 Component Location - 26 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Transmission Range > Page 7547 Connector: Name : SENSOR-TRANSMISSION RANGE Color : # of pins : 6 Qualifier : (RE) Pin Circuit Description 1-2 T117 20DG/YL TRS SIGNAL 3-4-- Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Transmission Range > Page 7548 5 T917 20YL/TN TRS RETURN 6 T41 20YL/DB TRS T41 SIGNAL (P/N) Component Location - 20 Component Location - 19 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Transmission Range > Page 7549 Component Location - 26 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Transmission Range > Page 7550 Connector: Name : SENSOR-TRANSMISSION RANGE Color : LT. GREEN # of pins : 10 Qualifier : (RLE) Pin Circuit Description 1 T16 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT 2-3 K900 20DB/DG SENSOR GROUND 4 T54 20DG/OR TRANSMISSION TEMPERATURE SIGNAL Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Transmission Range > Page 7551 5-6-7 T1 20DG/LB TRS T1 SIGNAL 8 T3 20DG/DB TRS T3 SIGNAL 9 T42 20DG/YL TRS T42 SIGNAL 10 T41 20YL/DB TRS T41 SIGNAL (P/N) Component Location - 20 Component Location - 19 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Transmission Range > Page 7552 Component Location - 26 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Transmission Range > Page 7553 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Transmission Range > Page 7554 Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Diagrams Assembly-Transmission Solenoid/TRS Component ID: 21 Component : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID/TRS Connector: Name : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID/TRS Color : BLACK # of pins : 23 Qualifier : (RFE) Pin Circuit Description 1-2 T20 20DG/WT L/R CONTROL 3-4 T41 20YL/DB TRS T41 SIGNAL (P/N) 5 T42 20DG/YL TRS T42 SIGNAL 6-- 7 T60 20YL/GY OD SOLENOID CONTROL 8 T3 20DG/DB TRS T3 SIGNAL 9 T1 20DG/LB TRS T1 SIGNAL 10 T16 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT 11 T48 20BR/YL 4C PRESSURE SIGNAL 12 T118 20DG LINE PRESSURE CONTROL 13 T4 20DG/RD TRS T2 SIGNAL 13 T4 20DG/LB TRS T2 SIGNAL 14 T50 20DG/PK L/R PRESSURE SIGNAL 14 T50 20YL/TN L/R PRESSURE SIGNAL 15 T147 20DG/YL 2C PRESSURE SIGNAL 16 T9 20DG/TN OD PRESSURE SIGNAL 17 T59 20YL/LB UD CONTROL 18 T29 20YL/WT UD PRESSURE SIGNAL 19 T259 20YL/DG 4C CONTROL 20 T219 20YL/LG 2C CONTROL 21 T140 20YL/GY MS CONTROL 22 T160 20DG/WT SENSOR GROUND 22 K900 20DB/DG SENSOR GROUND 23 T54 20DG/OR TRANSMISSION TEMPERATURE SIGNAL Component Location - 21 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Transmission Range > Page 7555 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > 42RLE Automatic Transmission Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Description and Operation 42RLE Automatic Transmission Description DESCRIPTION The Transmission Range Sensor (TRS) (2) is mounted to the top of the valve body inside the transmission and can only be serviced by removing the valve body assembly. The electrical connector extends through the transmission case. The Transmission Range Sensor (TRS) has four switch contacts that monitor shift lever position and send the information to the PCM. Operation OPERATION The Transmission Range Sensor (TRS) communicates shift lever position (SLP) to the TCM as a combination of open and closed switches. Each shift lever position has an assigned combination of switch states (open/closed) that the TCM receives from four sense circuits. The TCM interprets this information and determines the appropriate transmission gear position and shift schedule. Since there are four switches, there are 16 possible combinations of open and closed switches (codes). Seven of these codes are related to gear position and three are recognized as "between gear" codes. This results in six codes which should never occur. These are called "invalid" codes. An invalid code will result in a DTC, and the TCM will then determine the shift lever position based on pressure switch data. This allows reasonably normal transmission operation with a TRS failure. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 7558 Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Description and Operation 545RFE Automatic Transmission Description DESCRIPTION The Transmission Range Sensor (TRS) is part of the solenoid module, which is mounted to the top of the valve body inside the transmission. The Transmission Range Sensor (TRS) has five switch contact pins that: - Determine shift lever position - Supply ground to the Starter Relay in Park and Neutral only. - Supply +12 V to the backup lamps in Reverse only. The TRS also has an integrated temperature sensor (thermistor) that communicates transmission temperature to the TCM and PCM. Operation OPERATION The Transmission Range Sensor (TRS) communicates shift lever position to the TCM as a combination of open and closed switches. Each shift lever position has an assigned combination of switch states (open/closed) that the TCM receives from four sense circuits. The TCM interprets this information and determines the appropriate transmission gear position and shift schedule. There are many possible combinations of open and closed switches (codes). Seven of these possible codes are related to gear position and five are recognized as "between gear" codes. This results in many codes which should never occur. These are called "invalid" codes. An invalid code will result in a DTC, and the TCM will then determine the shift lever position based on pressure switch data. This allows reasonably normal transmission operation with a TRS failure. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 7559 Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Description and Operation 68RFE Automatic Transmission Description DESCRIPTION The Transmission Range Sensor (TRS) is part of the solenoid module, which is mounted to the top of the valve body inside the transmission. The Transmission Range Sensor (TRS) has five switch contact pins that: - Determine shift lever position - Supply ground to the Starter Relay in Park and Neutral only. The TRS also has an integrated temperature sensor (thermistor) that communicates transmission temperature to the TCM and PCM. Operation OPERATION The Transmission Range Sensor (TRS) communicates shift lever position to the TCM as a combination of open and closed switches. Each shift lever position has an assigned combination of switch states (open/closed) that the TCM receives from four sense circuits. The TCM interprets this information and determines the appropriate transmission gear position and shift schedule. There are many possible combinations of open and closed switches (codes). Five of these possible codes correspond to valid gear position, there are two codes for the neutral position and three are recognized as "between gear" codes. This results in many codes which should never occur. These are called "invalid" codes. An invalid code will result in a DTC, and the TCM will then determine the shift lever position based on pressure switch data. This allows reasonably normal transmission operation with a TRS failure. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 7560 Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Description and Operation 48RE Automatic Transmission Description DESCRIPTION The Transmission Range Sensor (TRS) has 3 primary functions: - Provide a PARK/NEUTRAL start signal to the engine controller and the starter relay. - Turn the Back-up lamps on when the transmission is in REVERSE and the engine (ignition) is on. - Provide a transmission range signal to the instrument cluster. The sensor is mounted in the transmission housing near the valve body, just above the pan rail. It's in the same position as the Park/Neutral switch on other transmissions. The TRS contacts a cammed surface on the manual valve lever. The cammed surface translates the rotational motion of the manual lever into the linear motion of the sensor. The cammed surface on the manual lever is comprised of two parts controlling the TRS signal: The insulator portion contacts the switch poppet when the manual lever is not in PARK or NEUTRAL. The manual lever itself contacts the poppet when the lever is in PARK or NEUTRAL; providing a ground for the signal from the starter relay and the appropriate engine controller. Operation OPERATION Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 7561 As the switch moves through its linear motion contacts slide across a circuit board which changes the resistance between the range sensing pins of the switch. A power supply on the instrument cluster provides a regulated voltage signal to the switch. The return signal is decoded by the cluster, which then controls the PRNDL display to correspond with the correct transmission range. A bus message of transmission range is also sent by the cluster. In REVERSE range a second contact set closes the circuit providing power to the reverse lamps. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 7562 Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Description and Operation AS68RC Automatic Transmission Description DESCRIPTION TRANSMISSION RANGE SENSOR The transmission range sensor (1) is mounted externally on the left side of the transmission case. Operation OPERATION The transmission range sensor prohibits the vehicle from starting in any gear other than park and neutral. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 7563 Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Testing and Inspection DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING - TRANSMISSION RANGE SENSOR (TRS) NOTE: For all circuit identification in the following steps, Refer to the appropriate Wiring Information. 1. Raise vehicle on suitable hoist. 2. Disconnect the vehicle's shift cable from the manual lever. 3. With the manual lever in the PARK position (the PARK position is with the manual lever moved to the full rearward position), measure the resistance between the Park/Neutral Position Sense pin of the TRS and the transmission case. The resistance should be less than 5 ohms. 4. With the manual lever in the NEUTRAL position (the NEUTRAL position is with the manual lever moved two detents forward of the full rearward position), measure the resistance between the Park/Neutral Position Sense pin of the TRS and the transmission case. The resistance should be less than 5 ohms. 5. If the resistance is greater than 5 ohms in either of the previous steps, check for a dirty contact between the tip of the TRS rod and the valve body manual lever. If the contact is OK, replace the TRS. 6. With the manual lever in the REVERSE position (the REVERSE position is with the manual lever moved one detent forward of the full rearward position), measure the resistance between the Fused Ignition Switch Output and the Back-up Lamp feed pins of the TRS. The resistance should be less than 5 ohms. If the resistance is greater than 5 ohms, replace the TRS. 7. With the manual lever in the PARK position (the PARK position is with the manual lever moved to the full rearward position), measure the resistance between the Transmission Range Sensor MUX and the Transmission Range Sensor 5V Supply pins of the TRS. The resistance should be 522.2 ohms. If the resistance is not correct, replace the TRS. 8. With the manual lever in the REVERSE position (the REVERSE position is with the manual lever moved one detent forward of the full rearward position), measure the resistance between the Transmission Range Sensor MUX and the Transmission Range Sensor 5V Supply pins of the TRS. The resistance should be 206.2 ohms. If the resistance is not correct, replace the TRS. 9. With the manual lever in the NEUTRAL position (the NEUTRAL position is with the manual lever moved two detents forward of the full rearward position), measure the resistance between the Transmission Range Sensor MUX and the Transmission Range Sensor 5V Supply pins of the TRS. The resistance should be 108.6 ohms. If the resistance is not correct, replace the TRS. 10. With the manual lever in the DRIVE position (the DRIVE position is with the manual lever moved three detents forward of the full rearward position), measure the resistance between the Transmission Range Sensor MUX and the Transmission Range Sensor 5V Supply pins of the TRS. The resistance should be 59.9 ohms. If the resistance is not correct, replace the TRS. 11. With the manual lever in the SECOND position (the SECOND position is with the manual lever moved one detent rearward of the full forward position), measure the resistance between the Transmission Range Sensor MUX and the Back-up Lamp feed pins of the TRS. The resistance should be 31.9 ohms. If the resistance is not correct, replace the TRS. 12. With the manual lever in the LOW position (the LOW position is with the manual lever moved to the full forward position), measure the resistance between the Transmission Range Sensor MUX and the Back-up Lamp feed pins of the TRS. The resistance should be 13.7 ohms. If the resistance is not correct, replace the TRS. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 42RLE Automatic Transmission Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Service and Repair 42RLE Automatic Transmission Removal REMOVAL 1. Remove valve body assembly from vehicle. See: Valve Body/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/42RLE Automatic Transmission/Removal 2. Remove the manual shaft seal (1). 3. Remove manual shaft/TRS retaining screw (1). 4. Slide TRS off of manual valve shaft. Installation INSTALLATION Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 7566 1. Install the TRS (2) to the manual shaft. Make sure TRS locating pin rests in manual valve bore slot. 2. Install the TRS/manual shaft retaining screw (1) and torque to 5 Nm (45 in. lbs.) torque. 3. Install the manual shaft seal (1). 4. Install valve body to the transmission. See: Valve Body/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/42RLE Automatic Transmission/Installation Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 7567 Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Service and Repair 48RE Automatic Transmission Removal REMOVAL 1. Raise vehicle and position drain pan under the transmission range sensor (TRS). 2. Move the transmission manual lever to the manual LOW position. The manual LOW position is with the manual lever in the forward-most detent. 3. Disengage the wiring connector from the TRS. 4. Remove the two screws holding the TRS to the TRS mounting bracket. 5. Remove the TRS (3) from the TRS mounting bracket by pulling it straight out of the bracket. 6. If necessary, loosen the TRS mounting bracket (2) in the transmission case using Adapter 8581 (3). 7. If necessary, remove the TRS mounting bracket (2) from the transmission case. Installation INSTALLATION Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 7568 1. Move the transmission manual shaft lever to the manual LOW position. 2. If necessary, install the TRS mounting bracket (2) into the transmission case. Using Adapter 8581 (3), tighten the mounting bracket to 34 Nm (300 in.lbs.). 3. Install the TRS (3) into the mounting bracket (2) with the wiring connector facing the front of the transmission. 4. Install the two screws to hold the TRS to the mounting bracket. Tighten the screws to 5 Nm (45 in.lbs.). 5. Verify proper sensor operation (1-4). 6. Move the transmission manual shaft lever to the PARK position. 7. Connect TRS wiring connector to the TRS and lower vehicle. 8. Refill the transmission fluid to the correct level. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 7569 Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Service and Repair AS68RC Automatic Transmission Removal REMOVAL NOTE: Be certain the transmission is in the park lock position. TRANSMISSION RANGE SENSOR 1. Remove the shift cable from the manual shift lever (2). 2. Disconnect the wire harness from the transmission range sensor. 3. Remove the two nuts (3) from the control shaft. TRS REMOVAL/INSTALLATION Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 7570 4. Pry open the tabs on the stake washer (5), remove the nut (3) and the stake washer (5). 5. Remove the bolts (2). 6. Remove the transmission range sensor (1) from the transmission control shaft (4). Installation INSTALLATION 1. Install the transmission range sensor (3) onto the control shaft (5). 2. Install the stake washer and the nut (4) and hand tighten. 3. With the transmission in neutral install the alignment tool 9983 (6) onto the control shaft (5) and into the alignment hole (1). 4. Install the bolts (2). 5. After aligning the transmission range sensor, tighten the bolts (2) 12.5 Nm (9 ft.lbs.) 6. Remove the alignment tool 9983 (6) 7. Tighten the control shaft nut to 7 Nm (62 in.lbs.) 8. Bend the tabs on the stake washer and nut (4) in at least two places to lock in position. TRANSMISSION RANGE SENSOR Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 7571 9. Install the manual shift lever (2) onto the control shaft. 10. Install the inner nut (3) onto the control shaft. Tighten the inner nut to 12.5 Nm (9 ft.lbs). 11. Install the outer nut (3) onto the control shaft. While holding the inner nut, tighten the outer not to 12.5 Nm (9 ft.lbs) Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Input Speed Transmission Speed Sensor: Locations Sensor-Input Speed Component ID 399 Component ID: 399 Component : SENSOR-INPUT SPEED Connector: Name : SENSOR-INPUT SPEED Color : # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (RC) Pin Circuit Description 1 T52 20DG/OR INPUT SPEED SIGNAL 2 T72 20YL/DB 8 VOLT SUPPLY Component Location - 21 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 7576 Component Location - 19 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 7577 Component Location - 26 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 7578 Connector: Name : SENSOR-INPUT SPEED Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (RFE/RLE) Pin Circuit Description 1 T52 20DG/OR INPUT SPEED SIGNAL 2 T13 20DG/VT SPEED SENSOR GROUND Component Location - 21 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 7579 Component Location - 19 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 7580 Component Location - 26 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 7581 Component ID 420 Component ID: 420 Component : SENSOR-INPUT SPEED Connector: Name : SENSOR-INPUT SPEED Color : # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (RC) Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 7582 Pin Circuit Description 1 T52 20DG/OR INPUT SPEED SIGNAL 2 T72 20YL/DB 8 VOLT SUPPLY Component Location - 21 Component Location - 19 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 7583 Component Location - 26 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 7584 Connector: Name : SENSOR-INPUT SPEED Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (RFE/RLE) Pin Circuit Description 1 T52 20DG/OR INPUT SPEED SIGNAL 2 T13 20DG/VT SPEED SENSOR GROUND Component Location - 21 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 7585 Component Location - 19 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 7586 Component Location - 26 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 7587 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 7588 Transmission Speed Sensor: Locations Sensor-Output Speed Component ID 400 Component ID: 400 Component : SENSOR-OUTPUT SPEED Connector: Name : SENSOR-OUTPUT SPEED Color : # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (RC) Pin Circuit Description 1 T14 20DG/BR OUTPUT SPEED SIGNAL 2 T72 20YL/DB 8 VOLT SUPPLY Component Location - 20 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 7589 Component Location - 21 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 7590 Component Location - 19 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 7591 Component Location - 26 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 7592 Connector: Name : SENSOR-OUTPUT SPEED Color : # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (RE) Pin Circuit Description 1 T14 18DG/BR OUTPUT SPEED SIGNAL 2 T13 18DG/VT SPEED SENSOR GROUND Component Location - 20 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 7593 Component Location - 21 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 7594 Component Location - 19 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 7595 Component Location - 26 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 7596 Connector: Name : SENSOR-OUTPUT SPEED Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (RFE/RLE) Pin Circuit Description 1 T14 20DG/BR OUTPUT SPEED SIGNAL Pin Circuit Description 1 T13 20DG/VT SPEED SENSOR GROUND Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 7597 2 T13 20DG/VT SPEED SENSOR GROUND 2 T14 20DG/BR OUTPUT SPEED SIGNAL Component Location - 20 Component Location - 21 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 7598 Component Location - 19 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 7599 Component Location - 26 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 7600 Component ID 430 Component ID: 430 Component : SENSOR-OUTPUT SPEED Connector: Name : SENSOR-OUTPUT SPEED Color : # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (RC) Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 7601 Pin Circuit Description 1 T14 20DG/BR OUTPUT SPEED SIGNAL 2 T72 20YL/DB 8 VOLT SUPPLY Component Location - 20 Component Location - 21 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 7602 Component Location - 19 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 7603 Component Location - 26 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 7604 Connector: Name : SENSOR-OUTPUT SPEED Color : # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (RE) Pin Circuit Description 1 T14 18DG/BR OUTPUT SPEED SIGNAL 2 T13 18DG/VT SPEED SENSOR GROUND Component Location - 20 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 7605 Component Location - 21 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 7606 Component Location - 19 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 7607 Component Location - 26 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 7608 Connector: Name : SENSOR-OUTPUT SPEED Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (RFE/RLE) Pin Circuit Description 1 T14 20DG/BR OUTPUT SPEED SIGNAL Pin Circuit Description 1 T13 20DG/VT SPEED SENSOR GROUND Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 7609 2 T13 20DG/VT SPEED SENSOR GROUND 2 T14 20DG/BR OUTPUT SPEED SIGNAL Component Location - 20 Component Location - 21 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 7610 Component Location - 19 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 7611 Component Location - 26 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 7612 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Input Speed Transmission Speed Sensor: Diagrams Sensor-Input Speed Component ID 399 Component ID: 399 Component : SENSOR-INPUT SPEED Connector: Name : SENSOR-INPUT SPEED Color : # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (RC) Pin Circuit Description 1 T52 20DG/OR INPUT SPEED SIGNAL 2 T72 20YL/DB 8 VOLT SUPPLY Component Location - 21 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 7615 Component Location - 19 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 7616 Component Location - 26 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 7617 Connector: Name : SENSOR-INPUT SPEED Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (RFE/RLE) Pin Circuit Description 1 T52 20DG/OR INPUT SPEED SIGNAL 2 T13 20DG/VT SPEED SENSOR GROUND Component Location - 21 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 7618 Component Location - 19 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 7619 Component Location - 26 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 7620 Component ID 420 Component ID: 420 Component : SENSOR-INPUT SPEED Connector: Name : SENSOR-INPUT SPEED Color : # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (RC) Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 7621 Pin Circuit Description 1 T52 20DG/OR INPUT SPEED SIGNAL 2 T72 20YL/DB 8 VOLT SUPPLY Component Location - 21 Component Location - 19 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 7622 Component Location - 26 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 7623 Connector: Name : SENSOR-INPUT SPEED Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (RFE/RLE) Pin Circuit Description 1 T52 20DG/OR INPUT SPEED SIGNAL 2 T13 20DG/VT SPEED SENSOR GROUND Component Location - 21 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 7624 Component Location - 19 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 7625 Component Location - 26 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 7626 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 7627 Transmission Speed Sensor: Diagrams Sensor-Output Speed Component ID 400 Component ID: 400 Component : SENSOR-OUTPUT SPEED Connector: Name : SENSOR-OUTPUT SPEED Color : # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (RC) Pin Circuit Description 1 T14 20DG/BR OUTPUT SPEED SIGNAL 2 T72 20YL/DB 8 VOLT SUPPLY Component Location - 20 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 7628 Component Location - 21 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 7629 Component Location - 19 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 7630 Component Location - 26 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 7631 Connector: Name : SENSOR-OUTPUT SPEED Color : # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (RE) Pin Circuit Description 1 T14 18DG/BR OUTPUT SPEED SIGNAL 2 T13 18DG/VT SPEED SENSOR GROUND Component Location - 20 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 7632 Component Location - 21 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 7633 Component Location - 19 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 7634 Component Location - 26 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 7635 Connector: Name : SENSOR-OUTPUT SPEED Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (RFE/RLE) Pin Circuit Description 1 T14 20DG/BR OUTPUT SPEED SIGNAL Pin Circuit Description 1 T13 20DG/VT SPEED SENSOR GROUND Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 7636 2 T13 20DG/VT SPEED SENSOR GROUND 2 T14 20DG/BR OUTPUT SPEED SIGNAL Component Location - 20 Component Location - 21 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 7637 Component Location - 19 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 7638 Component Location - 26 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 7639 Component ID 430 Component ID: 430 Component : SENSOR-OUTPUT SPEED Connector: Name : SENSOR-OUTPUT SPEED Color : # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (RC) Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 7640 Pin Circuit Description 1 T14 20DG/BR OUTPUT SPEED SIGNAL 2 T72 20YL/DB 8 VOLT SUPPLY Component Location - 20 Component Location - 21 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 7641 Component Location - 19 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 7642 Component Location - 26 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 7643 Connector: Name : SENSOR-OUTPUT SPEED Color : # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (RE) Pin Circuit Description 1 T14 18DG/BR OUTPUT SPEED SIGNAL 2 T13 18DG/VT SPEED SENSOR GROUND Component Location - 20 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 7644 Component Location - 21 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 7645 Component Location - 19 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 7646 Component Location - 26 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 7647 Connector: Name : SENSOR-OUTPUT SPEED Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (RFE/RLE) Pin Circuit Description 1 T14 20DG/BR OUTPUT SPEED SIGNAL Pin Circuit Description 1 T13 20DG/VT SPEED SENSOR GROUND Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 7648 2 T13 20DG/VT SPEED SENSOR GROUND 2 T14 20DG/BR OUTPUT SPEED SIGNAL Component Location - 20 Component Location - 21 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 7649 Component Location - 19 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 7650 Component Location - 26 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 7651 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > 42RLE Automatic Transmission Transmission Speed Sensor: Description and Operation 42RLE Automatic Transmission Description DESCRIPTION The Input (1) and Output (2) Speed Sensors are two-wire magnetic pickup devices that generate AC signals as rotation occurs. They are mounted in the left side of the transmission case and are considered primary inputs to the Transmission Control Module (TCM). Operation OPERATION The Input Speed Sensor provides information on how fast the input shaft is rotating. As the teeth of the input clutch hub pass by the sensor coil, an AC voltage is generated and sent to the TCM. The TCM interprets this information as input shaft rpm. The Output Speed Sensor generates an AC signal in a similar fashion, though its coil is excited by rotation of the rear planetary carrier lugs. The TCM interprets this information as output shaft rpm. The TCM compares the input and output speed signals to determine the following: - Transmission gear ratio - Speed ratio error detection - CVI calculation The TCM also compares the input speed signal and the engine speed signal to determine the following: - Torque converter clutch slippage - Torque converter element speed ratio Description DESCRIPTION Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 7654 The Input (1) and Output (2) Speed Sensors are two-wire magnetic pickup devices that generate AC signals as rotation occurs. They are mounted in the left side of the transmission case and are considered primary inputs to the Transmission Control Module (TCM). Operation OPERATION The Input Speed Sensor provides information on how fast the input shaft is rotating. As the teeth of the input clutch hub pass by the sensor coil, an AC voltage is generated and sent to the TCM. The TCM interprets this information as input shaft rpm. The Output Speed Sensor generates an AC signal in a similar fashion, though its coil is excited by rotation of the rear planetary carrier lugs. The TCM interprets this information as output shaft rpm. The TCM compares the input and output speed signals to determine the following: - Transmission gear ratio - Speed ratio error detection - CVI calculation The TCM also compares the input speed signal and the engine speed signal to determine the following: - Torque converter clutch slippage - Torque converter element speed ratio Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 7655 Transmission Speed Sensor: Description and Operation 545RFE Automatic Transmission Description DESCRIPTION The Input and Output Speed Sensors are two-wire magnetic pickup devices that generate AC signals as rotation occurs. They are mounted in the left side of the transmission case and are considered primary inputs to the Transmission Control Module (TCM). Operation OPERATION The Input Speed Sensor provides information on how fast the input shaft is rotating. As the teeth of the input clutch hub pass by the sensor coil, an AC voltage is generated and sent to the TCM. The TCM interprets this information as input shaft rpm. The Output Speed Sensor generates an AC signal in a similar fashion, though its coil is excited by rotation of the park gear teeth. The TCM interprets this information as output shaft rpm. The TCM compares the input and output speed signals to determine the following: - Transmission gear ratio - Speed ratio error detection - CVI calculation The TCM also compares the input speed signal and the engine speed signal to determine the following: - Torque converter clutch slippage - Torque converter element speed ratio Description DESCRIPTION The Input and Output Speed Sensors are two-wire magnetic pickup devices that generate AC signals as rotation occurs. They are mounted in the left side of the transmission case and are considered primary inputs to the Transmission Control Module (TCM). Operation OPERATION The Input Speed Sensor provides information on how fast the input shaft is rotating. As the teeth of the input clutch hub pass by the sensor coil, an AC voltage is generated and sent to the TCM. The TCM interprets this information as input shaft rpm. The Output Speed Sensor generates an AC signal in a similar fashion, though its coil is excited by rotation of the park gear teeth. The TCM interprets this information as output shaft rpm. The TCM compares the input and output speed signals to determine the following: - Transmission gear ratio - Speed ratio error detection - CVI calculation The TCM also compares the input speed signal and the engine speed signal to determine the following: - Torque converter clutch slippage - Torque converter element speed ratio Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 7656 Transmission Speed Sensor: Description and Operation 68RFE Automatic Transmission Description DESCRIPTION The Input and Output Speed Sensors are two-wire magnetic pickup devices that generate AC signals as rotation occurs. They are mounted in the left side of the transmission case and are considered primary inputs to the Transmission Control Module (TCM). Operation OPERATION The Input Speed Sensor provides information on how fast the input shaft is rotating. As the teeth of the input clutch hub pass by the sensor coil, an AC voltage is generated and sent to the TCM. The TCM interprets this information as input shaft rpm. The Output Speed Sensor generates an AC signal in a similar fashion, though its coil is excited by rotation of the park gear teeth. The TCM interprets this information as output shaft rpm. The TCM compares the input and output speed signals to determine the following: - Transmission gear ratio - Speed ratio error detection - CVI calculation The TCM also compares the input speed signal and the engine speed signal to determine the following: - Torque converter clutch slippage - Torque converter element speed ratio Description DESCRIPTION The Input and Output Speed Sensors are two-wire magnetic pickup devices that generate AC signals as rotation occurs. They are mounted in the left side of the transmission case and are considered primary inputs to the Transmission Control Module (TCM). Operation OPERATION The Input Speed Sensor provides information on how fast the input shaft is rotating. As the teeth of the input clutch hub pass by the sensor coil, an AC voltage is generated and sent to the TCM. The TCM interprets this information as input shaft rpm. The Output Speed Sensor generates an AC signal in a similar fashion, though its coil is excited by rotation of the park gear teeth. The TCM interprets this information as output shaft rpm. The TCM compares the input and output speed signals to determine the following: - Transmission gear ratio - Speed ratio error detection - CVI calculation The TCM also compares the input speed signal and the engine speed signal to determine the following: - Torque converter clutch slippage - Torque converter element speed ratio Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 7657 Transmission Speed Sensor: Description and Operation 48RE Automatic Transmission Description DESCRIPTION The speed sensor (1) is located in the overdrive gear case. The sensor is positioned over the park gear and monitors transmission output shaft rotating speed. Operation OPERATION Speed sensor signals are triggered by the park gear lugs as they rotate past the sensor pickup face. Input signals from the sensor are sent to the transmission control module for processing. Signals from this sensor are shared with the powertrain control module. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 7658 Transmission Speed Sensor: Description and Operation AS68RC Automatic Transmission Description DESCRIPTION INPUT AND OUTPUT SPEED SENSORS The Input and Output Speed Sensors are two-wire magnetic pickup devices that generate DC square wave signals as rotation occurs. They are mounted in the left side of the transmission case and are considered primary inputs to the Transmission Control Module (TCM). Operation OPERATION The Input Speed Sensor provides information on how fast the input shaft is rotating. As the "teeth" of the gear pass by the sensor coil, an DC square wave is generated and sent to the TCM. The TCM interprets this information as input shaft rpm. The Output Speed Sensor generates an DC signal in a similar fashion, though its coil is excited by rotation of the rear planetary carrier lugs. The TCM interprets this information as output shaft rpm. The TCM compares the input and output speed signals to determine the following: - Transmission gear ratio - Speed ratio error detection - CVI calculation The TCM also compares the input speed signal and the engine speed signal to determine the following: - Torque converter clutch slippage - Torque converter element speed ratio Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 42RLE Automatic Transmission Transmission Speed Sensor: Service and Repair 42RLE Automatic Transmission Removal REMOVAL 1. Raise vehicle. 2. Place a suitable fluid catch pan under the transmission. 3. Remove the wiring connector from the input speed sensor. NOTE: The speed sensor bolt has a sealing patch applied from the factory. Be sure to reuse the same bolt. 4. Remove the bolt holding the input speed sensor to the transmission case. 5. Remove the input speed sensor from the transmission case. Installation INSTALLATION 1. Install the input speed sensor (1) into the transmission case. NOTE: Before installing the speed sensor bolt, it will be necessary to replenish the sealing patch on the bolt using MOPAR(R) Lock & Seal Adhesive. 2. Install the bolt to hold the input speed sensor into the transmission case. Tighten the bolt to 9 Nm (80 in.lbs.). 3. Install the wiring connector onto the input speed sensor 4. Verify the transmission fluid level. Add fluid as necessary. 5. Lower vehicle. Removal REMOVAL Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 7661 1. Raise vehicle. 2. Place a suitable fluid catch pan under the transmission. 3. Remove the wiring connector from the output speed sensor (2). NOTE: The speed sensor bolt has a sealing patch applied from the factory. Be sure to reuse the same bolt. 4. Remove the bolt holding the output speed sensor to the transmission case. 5. Remove the output speed sensor (2) from the transmission case. Installation INSTALLATION 1. Install the output speed sensor (2) into the transmission case. NOTE: Before installing the speed sensor bolt, it will be necessary to replenish the sealing patch on the bolt using MOPAR(R) Lock & Seal Adhesive. 2. Install the bolt to hold the output speed sensor into the transmission case. Tighten the bolt to 9 Nm (80 in.lbs.). 3. Install the wiring connector onto the output speed sensor 4. Verify the transmission fluid level. Add fluid as necessary. 5. Lower vehicle. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 7662 Transmission Speed Sensor: Service and Repair 545RFE Automatic Transmission Removal REMOVAL 1. Raise vehicle. 2. Place a suitable fluid catch pan under the transmission. 3. Remove the wiring connector from the input speed sensor (3). 4. Remove the bolt holding the input speed sensor to the transmission case. 5. Remove the input speed sensor (3) from the transmission case. Installation INSTALLATION 1. Install the input speed sensor (3) into the transmission case. 2. Install the bolt to hold the input speed sensor (3) into the transmission case. Tighten the bolt to 12 Nm (105 in.lbs.). 3. Install the wiring connector onto the input speed sensor. 4. Verify the transmission fluid level. Add fluid as necessary. 5. Lower vehicle. Removal REMOVAL Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 7663 1. Raise vehicle. 2. Place a suitable fluid catch pan under the transmission. 3. Remove the wiring connector from the output speed sensor (1). 4. Remove the bolt holding the output speed sensor (1) to the transmission case. 5. Remove the output speed sensor (1) from the transmission case. Installation INSTALLATION 1. Install the output speed sensor (1) into the transmission case. 2. Install the bolt to hold the output speed sensor (1) into the transmission case. Tighten the bolt to 12 Nm (105 in.lbs.). 3. Install the wiring connector onto the output speed sensor (1). 4. Verify the transmission fluid level. Add fluid as necessary. 5. Lower vehicle. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 7664 Transmission Speed Sensor: Service and Repair 68RFE Automatic Transmission Removal REMOVAL 1. Raise vehicle. 2. Place a suitable fluid catch pan under the transmission. 3. Remove the wiring connector from the input speed sensor (3). 4. Remove the bolt holding the input speed sensor to the transmission case. 5. Remove the input speed sensor (3) from the transmission case. Installation INSTALLATION 1. Install the input speed sensor (3) into the transmission case. 2. Install the bolt to hold the input speed sensor (3) into the transmission case. Tighten the bolt to 12 Nm (105 in.lbs.). 3. Install the wiring connector onto the input speed sensor. 4. Verify the transmission fluid level. Add fluid as necessary. 5. Lower vehicle. Removal REMOVAL Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 7665 1. Raise vehicle. 2. Place a suitable fluid catch pan under the transmission. 3. Remove the wiring connector from the output speed sensor (1). 4. Remove the bolt holding the output speed sensor (1) to the transmission case. 5. Remove the output speed sensor (1) from the transmission case. Installation INSTALLATION 1. Install the output speed sensor (1) into the transmission case. 2. Install the bolt to hold the output speed sensor (1) into the transmission case. Tighten the bolt to 12 Nm (105 in.lbs.). 3. Install the wiring connector onto the output speed sensor (1). 4. Verify the transmission fluid level. Add fluid as necessary. 5. Lower vehicle. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 7666 Transmission Speed Sensor: Service and Repair AS68RC Automatic Transmission Output Speed Sensor OUTPUT SPEED SENSOR OUTPUT SPEED SENSOR 1. Raise and support the vehicle. 2. Place a suitable fluid catch pan under the transmission. 3. Remove the wiring connector from the output speed sensor. 4. Remove the bolt holding the output speed sensor to the transmission case. 5. Remove the output speed sensor from the transmission case. Input Speed Sensor INPUT SPEED SENSOR INPUT SPEED SENSOR 1. Raise and support the vehicle. 2. Place a suitable fluid catch pan under the transmission. 3. Remove the wiring connector from the input speed sensor. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 7667 4. Remove the bolt holding the input speed sensor to the transmission case. 5. Remove the input speed sensor from the transmission case. Output Speed Sensor OUTPUT SPEED SENSOR NOTE: Apply trans jell to all slide portions, rolling contacts surfaces, thrust surfaces etc. to prevent burnout during initial operation. Lubricate O-rings and O-ring seals with MOPAR(R) AS68RC ATF. Soak all friction disks in MOPAR(R) AS68RC ATF for at least two hours before assembly of clutch packs. OUTPUT SPEED SENSOR 1. Lubricate the output speed sensor o-ring with MOPAR(R) AS68RC ATF. 2. Install the output speed sensor into the transmission case. 3. Tighten the bolt to 8 Nm (70 in.lbs.). 4. Install the wiring connector onto the output speed sensor. 5. Lower vehicle. 6. Verify the transmission fluid level. Add MOPAR(R) AS68RC ATF as necessary. Input Speed Sensor INPUT SPEED SENSOR NOTE: Apply trans jell to all slide portions, rolling contacts surfaces, thrust surfaces etc. to prevent burnout during initial operation. Lubricate O-rings and O-ring seals with MOPAR(R) AS68RC ATF. Soak all friction disks in MOPAR(R) AS68RC ATF for at least two hours before assembly of clutch packs. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 7668 INPUT SPEED SENSOR 1. Lubricate the output speed sensor o-ring with MOPAR(R) AS68RC ATF. 2. Install the input speed sensor into the transmission case. 3. Tighten the bolt to 8 Nm (70 in.lbs.). 4. Install the electrical wiring connector onto the input speed sensor. 5. Lower vehicle. 6. Verify the transmission fluid level. Add MOPAR(R) AS68RC as necessary. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Locations Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch: Locations Component ID: 445 Component : SENSOR-TRANSMISSION TEMPERATURE Connector: Name : SENSOR-TRANSMISSION TEMPERATURE Color : # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (RC) Pin Circuit Description 1 T819 20YL/VT TCC TEMPERATURE SIGNAL 2 T820 20YL/WT TEMPERATURE SENSOR GROUND Component Location - 26 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 7672 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 7673 Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch: Diagrams Component ID: 445 Component : SENSOR-TRANSMISSION TEMPERATURE Connector: Name : SENSOR-TRANSMISSION TEMPERATURE Color : # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (RC) Pin Circuit Description 1 T819 20YL/VT TCC TEMPERATURE SIGNAL 2 T820 20YL/WT TEMPERATURE SENSOR GROUND Component Location - 26 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 7674 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > 545RFE Automatic Transmission Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch: Description and Operation 545RFE Automatic Transmission Description DESCRIPTION The Transmission Range Sensor (TRS) is part of the solenoid module, which is mounted to the top of the valve body inside the transmission. The Transmission Range Sensor (TRS) has five switch contact pins that: - Determine shift lever position - Supply ground to the Starter Relay in Park and Neutral only. - Supply +12 V to the backup lamps in Reverse only. The TRS also has an integrated temperature sensor (thermistor) that communicates transmission temperature to the TCM and PCM. Operation OPERATION The Transmission Range Sensor (TRS) communicates shift lever position to the TCM as a combination of open and closed switches. Each shift lever position has an assigned combination of switch states (open/closed) that the TCM receives from four sense circuits. The TCM interprets this information and determines the appropriate transmission gear position and shift schedule. There are many possible combinations of open and closed switches (codes). Seven of these possible codes are related to gear position and five are recognized as "between gear" codes. This results in many codes which should never occur. These are called "invalid" codes. An invalid code will result in a DTC, and the TCM will then determine the shift lever position based on pressure switch data. This allows reasonably normal transmission operation with a TRS failure. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > 545RFE Automatic Transmission > Page 7677 Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch: Description and Operation 68RFE Automatic Transmission Description DESCRIPTION The Transmission Range Sensor (TRS) is part of the solenoid module, which is mounted to the top of the valve body inside the transmission. The Transmission Range Sensor (TRS) has five switch contact pins that: - Determine shift lever position - Supply ground to the Starter Relay in Park and Neutral only. The TRS also has an integrated temperature sensor (thermistor) that communicates transmission temperature to the TCM and PCM. Operation OPERATION The Transmission Range Sensor (TRS) communicates shift lever position to the TCM as a combination of open and closed switches. Each shift lever position has an assigned combination of switch states (open/closed) that the TCM receives from four sense circuits. The TCM interprets this information and determines the appropriate transmission gear position and shift schedule. There are many possible combinations of open and closed switches (codes). Five of these possible codes correspond to valid gear position, there are two codes for the neutral position and three are recognized as "between gear" codes. This results in many codes which should never occur. These are called "invalid" codes. An invalid code will result in a DTC, and the TCM will then determine the shift lever position based on pressure switch data. This allows reasonably normal transmission operation with a TRS failure. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 42RLE Automatic Transmission Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch: Service and Repair 42RLE Automatic Transmission Removal REMOVAL 1. Remove valve body assembly from vehicle. See: Valve Body/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/42RLE Automatic Transmission/Removal 2. Remove the manual shaft seal (1). 3. Remove manual shaft/TRS retaining screw (1). 4. Slide TRS off of manual valve shaft. Installation INSTALLATION Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 7680 1. Install the TRS (2) to the manual shaft. Make sure TRS locating pin rests in manual valve bore slot. 2. Install the TRS/manual shaft retaining screw (1) and torque to 5 Nm (45 in. lbs.) torque. 3. Install the manual shaft seal (1). 4. Install valve body to the transmission. See: Valve Body/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/42RLE Automatic Transmission/Installation Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 7681 Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch: Service and Repair 48RE Automatic Transmission Removal REMOVAL 1. Raise vehicle and position drain pan under the transmission range sensor (TRS). 2. Move the transmission manual lever to the manual LOW position. The manual LOW position is with the manual lever in the forward-most detent. 3. Disengage the wiring connector from the TRS. 4. Remove the two screws holding the TRS to the TRS mounting bracket. 5. Remove the TRS (3) from the TRS mounting bracket by pulling it straight out of the bracket. 6. If necessary, loosen the TRS mounting bracket (2) in the transmission case using Adapter 8581 (3). 7. If necessary, remove the TRS mounting bracket (2) from the transmission case. Installation INSTALLATION Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 7682 1. Move the transmission manual shaft lever to the manual LOW position. 2. If necessary, install the TRS mounting bracket (2) into the transmission case. Using Adapter 8581 (3), tighten the mounting bracket to 34 Nm (300 in.lbs.). 3. Install the TRS (3) into the mounting bracket (2) with the wiring connector facing the front of the transmission. 4. Install the two screws to hold the TRS to the mounting bracket. Tighten the screws to 5 Nm (45 in.lbs.). 5. Verify proper sensor operation (1-4). 6. Move the transmission manual shaft lever to the PARK position. 7. Connect TRS wiring connector to the TRS and lower vehicle. 8. Refill the transmission fluid to the correct level. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 7683 Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch: Service and Repair AS68RC Automatic Transmission Removal REMOVAL NOTE: Be certain the transmission is in the park lock position. TRANSMISSION RANGE SENSOR 1. Remove the shift cable from the manual shift lever (2). 2. Disconnect the wire harness from the transmission range sensor. 3. Remove the two nuts (3) from the control shaft. TRS REMOVAL/INSTALLATION Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 7684 4. Pry open the tabs on the stake washer (5), remove the nut (3) and the stake washer (5). 5. Remove the bolts (2). 6. Remove the transmission range sensor (1) from the transmission control shaft (4). Installation INSTALLATION 1. Install the transmission range sensor (3) onto the control shaft (5). 2. Install the stake washer and the nut (4) and hand tighten. 3. With the transmission in neutral install the alignment tool 9983 (6) onto the control shaft (5) and into the alignment hole (1). 4. Install the bolts (2). 5. After aligning the transmission range sensor, tighten the bolts (2) 12.5 Nm (9 ft.lbs.) 6. Remove the alignment tool 9983 (6) 7. Tighten the control shaft nut to 7 Nm (62 in.lbs.) 8. Bend the tabs on the stake washer and nut (4) in at least two places to lock in position. TRANSMISSION RANGE SENSOR Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 7685 9. Install the manual shift lever (2) onto the control shaft. 10. Install the inner nut (3) onto the control shaft. Tighten the inner nut to 12.5 Nm (9 ft.lbs). 11. Install the outer nut (3) onto the control shaft. While holding the inner nut, tighten the outer not to 12.5 Nm (9 ft.lbs) Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > 42RLE Automatic Transmission Valve Body: Description and Operation 42RLE Automatic Transmission Description DESCRIPTION The valve body assembly consists of a cast aluminum valve body (5), separator plate (4), and transfer plate (3). The valve body contains valves and check balls that control fluid delivery to the torque converter clutch, solenoid/pressure switch assembly, and frictional clutches. Also mounted to the valve body assembly are the solenoid/pressure switch assembly and the transmission range sensor (2). Valve Body - Exploded Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 7690 The valves contained within the valve body (1) include the following: - Regulator valve (8) - Solenoid switch valve (7) - Manual valve (5) - Converter clutch switch valve (6) - Converter clutch control valve (4) - Torque converter regulator valve (2) - Low/Reverse switch valve (3) In addition, the valve body also contains the thermal valve, #2, 3, 4 & 5 check balls and the 2/4 accumulator assembly. Operation OPERATION NOTE: See: Diagrams/Fluid Diagrams/42RLE Automatic Transmission Schematics and Diagrams for a visual aid in determining valve location, operation and design. THERMAL VALVE The thermal valve (1) is a bi-metallic shudder valve that helps control the venting rate of oil pressure in the underdrive clutch passage during release of the clutch. When the oil temperature is approximately 20 degrees Fahrenheit or less, the valve is fully open to assist in venting oil past the U1 orifice (2). At temperatures above 20 degrees, the valve starts to close and becomes fully closed at approximately 140 degrees. The thermal valve is located in the transfer plate of the valve body. REGULATOR VALVE Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 7691 The regulator valve (9) controls hydraulic pressure in the transmission. It receives unregulated pressure from the pump (6), which works against spring tension (8) to maintain oil at specific pressures. A system of sleeves and ports allows the regulator valve to work at one of three predetermined pressure levels. Regulated oil pressure is also referred to as "line pressure." SOLENOID SWITCH VALVE Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 7692 The solenoid switch valve controls line pressure from the LR/CC solenoid (4). In one position, it allows the low/reverse clutch to be pressurized. In the other, it directs line pressure to the converter control and converter clutch valves (7). MANUAL VALVE The manual valve (4) is operated by the mechanical shift linkage. Its primary responsibility is to send line pressure to the appropriate hydraulic circuits and solenoids. The valve has three operating ranges or positions. CONVERTER CLUTCH SWITCH VALVE Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 7693 The main responsibility of the converter clutch switch valve (10) is to control hydraulic pressure applied to the front (off) side of the converter clutch piston. Line pressure from the regulator valve (5) is fed to the torque converter regulator valve (8). The pressure is then directed to the converter clutch switch valve (10) and to the front side of the converter clutch piston. This pressure pushes the piston back and disengages the converter clutch. CONVERTER CLUTCH CONTROL VALVE The converter clutch control valve (5) controls the back (on) side of the torque converter clutch (1). When the controller energizes or modulates the LR/CC solenoid to apply the converter clutch piston, both the converter clutch control valve (5) and the converter control valve move, allowing pressure to be applied to the back side of the clutch. T/C REGULATOR VALVE The torque converter regulator valve slightly regulates the flow of fluid to the torque converter. LOW/REVERSE SWITCH VALVE Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 7694 The low/reverse clutch is applied from different sources, depending on whether low (1st) gear or reverse is selected. The low/reverse switch valve alternates positions depending on from which direction fluid pressure is applied. By design, when the valve is shifted by fluid pressure from one channel, the opposing channel is blocked. The switch valve alienates the possibility of a sticking ball check, thus providing consistent application of the low/reverse clutch under these operating conditions. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 7695 Valve Body: Description and Operation 545RFE Automatic Transmission Description DESCRIPTION Valve Body Components The valve body consists of a cast aluminum valve body, a separator plate, and a transfer plate. The valve body contains valves and check balls that control fluid delivery to the torque converter clutch and frictional clutches. The valve body contains the following components: - Solenoid switch valve - Manual valve - Low/reverse shuttle valve - 5 Accumulators - 7 check balls Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 7696 Operation OPERATION NOTE: Refer to the Hydraulic Schematics for a visual aid in determining valve location, operation and design. SOLENOID SWITCH VALVE The Solenoid Switch Valve (SSV) controls the direction of the transmission fluid when the L/R-TCC solenoid is energized. The Solenoid Switch Valve controls line pressure from the LR-TCC solenoid. In 1st gear, the SSV will be in the downshifted position, thus directing fluid to the L/R clutch circuit. In 2nd, 3rd, 4th, and fifth gears, the solenoid switch valve will be in the upshifted position and directs the fluid into the torque converter clutch (TCC) circuit. When shifting into 1st gear, a special hydraulic sequence is performed to ensure SSV movement into the downshifted position. The L/R pressure switch is monitored to confirm SSV movement. If the movement is not confirmed (the L/R pressure switch does not close), 2nd gear is substituted for 1st. A DTC will be set after three unsuccessful attempts are made to get into 1st gear in one given key start. MANUAL VALVE The manual valve is a relay valve. The purpose of the manual valve is to direct fluid to the correct circuit needed for a specific gear or driving range. The manual valve, as the name implies, is manually operated by the driver with a lever located on the top of the valve body. The valve is connected mechanically by a cable to the gearshift mechanism. The valve is held in each of its positions by a roller detent spring (2) that engages the roostercomb of the TRS selector plate (1). LOW/REVERSE SWITCH VALVE The low/reverse switch valve allows the low/reverse clutch to be operated by either the LR/CC solenoid or the MS solenoid. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 7697 Valve Body: Description and Operation 68RFE Automatic Transmission Description DESCRIPTION The valve body consists of a cast aluminum valve body, a separator plate, and a transfer plate. The valve body contains valves and check balls that control fluid delivery to the torque converter clutch and frictional clutches. The valve body contains the following components: - Solenoid switch valve - Manual valve - Low/reverse shuttle valve - 5 Accumulators - 7 check balls Operation OPERATION NOTE: Refer to the Hydraulic Schematics for a visual aid in determining valve location, operation and design. SOLENOID SWITCH VALVE Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 7698 The Solenoid Switch Valve (SSV) controls the direction of the transmission fluid when the L/R-TCC solenoid is energized. The Solenoid Switch Valve controls line pressure from the LR-TCC solenoid. In 1st gear, the SSV will be in the downshifted position, thus directing fluid to the L/R clutch circuit. In all other gears, the solenoid switch valve will be in the upshifted position and directs the fluid into the torque converter clutch (TCC) circuit. When shifting into 1st gear, a special hydraulic sequence is performed to ensure SSV movement into the downshifted position. The L/R pressure switch is monitored to confirm SSV movement. If the movement is not confirmed (the L/R pressure switch does not close), 2nd gear is substituted for 1st. A DTC will be set after three unsuccessful attempts are made to get into 1st gear in one given key start. MANUAL VALVE The manual valve is a relay valve. The purpose of the manual valve is to direct fluid to the correct circuit needed for a specific gear or driving range. The manual valve, as the name implies, is manually operated by the driver with a lever located on the top of the valve body. The valve is connected mechanically to the gearshift mechanism. The valve is held in each of its positions by a roller detent spring (2) that engages the roostercomb of the TRS selector plate (1). LOW/REVERSE SWITCH VALVE The low/reverse switch valve allows the low/reverse clutch to be operated by either the LR/CC solenoid or the MS solenoid. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 7699 Valve Body: Description and Operation 48RE Automatic Transmission Description DESCRIPTION The valve body consists of a cast aluminum valve body, a separator plate, and transfer plate. The valve body contains valves and check balls that control fluid delivery to the torque converter clutch, bands, and frictional clutches. The valve body contains the following components. By adjusting the spring pressure acting on the regulator valve, transmission line pressure can be adjusted. Upper Housing Control Valve Locations - Regulator valve (2) - Switch valve (3) - Regulator valve spring (4) - Kickdown valve (5) - Kickdown detent (6) - Throttle valve and spring (7) - Manual valve (8) - 1-2 Governor plug (9) - Throttle pressure plug (11) - 2-3 Governor plug (12) - Shuttle valve primary spring (13) Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 7700 Shuttle and Boost Valve Locations - Boost Valve (3) - Boost valve plug (4) - Shuttle valve (9) - Shuttle valve throttle plug (12) Upper Housing Shift Valve and Pressure Plug Locations Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 7701 - 1-2 shift valve (2) - 1-2 control valve - 2-3 shift valve - 2-3 throttle plug - Throttle pressure plug - Limit valve and spring Lower Housing Shift Valves and Springs - 3-4 shift valve - 3-4 timing valve - 3-4 quick fill valve - 3-4 accumulator - Converter clutch lock-up valve - Converter clutch lock-up timing valve Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 7702 Operation OPERATION NOTE: Refer to the Hydraulic Schematics for a visual aid in determining valve location, operation and design. CHECK BALLS REGULATOR VALVE Regulator Valve in Park Position The pressure regulator valve is needed to control the hydraulic pressure within the system and reduce the amount of heat produced in the fluid. The pressure regulator valve is located in the valve body near the manual valve. The pressure regulator valve train controls the maximum pressure in the lines by metering the dumping of fluid back into the sump. Regulated pressure is referred to as "line pressure." The regulator valve has a spring on one end that pushes the valve to the left. This closes a dump (vent) that is used to lower pressure. The closing of the dump will cause the oil pressure to increase. Oil pressure on the opposite end of the valve pushes the valve to the right, opening the dump and lowering oil pressure. The result is spring pressure working against oil pressure to maintain the oil at specific pressures. With the engine running, fluid flows from the pump to the pressure regulator valve, manual valve, and the interconnected circuits. As fluid is sent through passages to the regulator valve, the pressure pushes the valve to the right against the large spring. It is also sent to the reaction areas on the left side of the throttle pressure plug and the line pressure plug. With the gear selector in the PARK position, fluid recirculates through the regulator and manual valves back to the sump. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 7703 Regulator Valve in Neutral Position Meanwhile, the torque converter is filled slowly. In all other gear positions, fluid flows between two right side lands to the switch valve and torque converter. At low pump speeds, the flow is controlled by the pressure valve groove to reduce pressure to the torque converter. After the torque converter and switch valve fill with fluid, the switch valve becomes the controlling metering device for torque converter pressure. The regulator valve then begins to control the line pressure for the other transmission circuits. The balance of the fluid pressure pushing the valve to the right and the spring pressure pushing to the left determines the size of the metering passage at land #2 (land #1 being at the far right of the valve in the diagram). As fluid leaks past the land, it moves into a groove connected to the filter or sump. As the land meters the fluid to the sump, it causes the pressure to reduce and the spring decreases the size of the metering passage. When the size of the metering passage is reduced, the pressure rises again and the size of the land is increased again. Pressure is regulated by this constant balance of hydraulic and spring pressure. Regulator Valve in Drive Position The metering at land #2 establishes the line pressure throughout the transmission. It is varied according to changes in throttle position and the transmission's internal condition within a range of 57-94 psi (except in REVERSE). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 7704 Regulator Valve in Reverse Position The regulated line pressure in REVERSE is held at much higher pressures than in the other gear positions: 145-280 psi. The higher pressure for REVERSE is achieved by the manual valve blocking the supply of line pressure to the reaction area left of land #4. With this pressure blocked, there is less area for pressure to act on to balance the force of the spring on the right. This allows line pressure to push the valve train to the right, reducing the amount of fluid returned to the pump's inlet, increasing line pressure. KICKDOWN VALVE Kickdown Valve - Wide Open Throttle When the throttle valve is as far over to the left as it can go, the maximum line pressure possible will enter the throttle pressure circuit. In this case, throttle pressure will equal line pressure. With the kickdown valve pushed into the bore as far as it will go, fluid initially flows through the annular Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 7705 groove of the 2-3 shift valve (which will be in the direct drive position to the right). After passing the annular groove, the fluid is routed to the spring end of the 2-3 shift valve. Fluid pressure reacting on the area of land #1 overcomes governor pressure, downshifting the 2-3 shift valve into the kickdown, or second gear stage of operation. The valve is held in the kickdown position by throttle pressure routed from a seated check ball (#2). Again, if vehicle speed is low enough, throttle pressure will also push the 1-2 shift valve left to seat its governor plug, and downshift to drive breakaway. KICKDOWN LIMIT VALVE Kickdown Limit Valve - Low Speeds The purpose of the limit valve is to prevent a 3-2 downshift at higher speeds when a part-throttle downshift is not desirable. At these higher speeds only a full throttle 3-2 downshift will occur. At low road speeds the limit valve does not come into play and does not affect the downshifts. Kickdown Limit Valve - High Speeds As the vehicle's speed increases, the governor pressure also increases. The increased governor pressure acts on the reaction area of the bottom land of the limit valve overcoming the spring force trying to push the valve toward the bottom of its bore. This pushes the valve upward against the spring and bottoms the valve against the top of the housing. With the valve bottomed against the housing, the throttle pressure supplied to the valve will be closed off by the bottom land of the limit valve. When the supply of throttle pressure has been shut off, the 3-2 part throttle downshift plug becomes inoperative, because no pressure is acting on its reaction area. 1-2 SHIFT VALVE 1-2 Shift Valve - Before Shift Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 7706 The 1-2 shift valve assembly, or mechanism, consists of: the 1-2 shift valve, governor plug, and a spring on the end of the valve. After the manual valve has been placed into a forward gear range, line pressure is directed to the 1-2 shift valve. As the throttle is depressed, throttle pressure is applied to the right side of the 1-2 shift valve assembly. With throttle pressure applied to the right side of the valve, there is now both spring pressure and throttle pressure acting on the valve, holding it against the governor plug. As the vehicle begins to move and build speed, governor pressure is created and is applied to the left of the valve at the governor plug. 1-2 Shift Valve - After Shift When governor pressure builds to a point where it can overcome the combined force of the spring and throttle pressure on the other side of the valve, the valve will begin to move over to the right. As the valve moves to the right, the middle land of the valve will close off the circuit supplying the throttle pressure to the right side of the valve. When the throttle pressure is closed off, the valve will move even farther to the right, allowing line pressure to enter another circuit and energize the front servo, applying the front band. The governor plug serves a dual purpose: - It allows the shift valves to move either left or right, allowing both upshifts and downshifts. - When in a manual selection position, it will be hydraulically "blocked" into position so no upshift can occur. The physical blocking of the upshift while in the manual "1" position is accomplished by the directing of line pressure between both lands of the governor plug. The line pressure reacts against the larger land of the plug, pushing the plug back against the end plate overcoming governor pressure. With the combination of the line pressure and spring pressure, the valve cannot move, preventing any upshift. 1-2 SHIFT CONTROL VALVE 1-2 Shift Control Valve It contains a valve with four lands and a spring. It is used as both a "relay" and "balanced" valve. The valve has two specific operations: Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 7707 - Aid in quality of the 1-2 upshift. - Aid in the quality and timing of the 3-2 kickdown ranges. When the manual valve is set to the DRIVE position and the transmission is in the first or second gear range, 1-2 shift control or "modulated throttle pressure" is supplied to the middle of the accumulator piston by the 1-2 shift control valve. During the 1-2 upshift, this pressure is used to control the kickdown servo apply pressure that is needed to apply the kickdown and accumulator pistons. Thus, the 1-2 shift point is "cushioned" and the quality is improved. During a WOT kickdown, kickdown pressure is applied between the kickdown valve and the 1-2 shift control valve. This additional pressure is directed to the 1-2 shift control's spring cavity, adding to the spring load on the valve. The result of this increased "modulated" throttle pressure is a firmer WOT upshift. 2-3 SHIFT VALVE 2-3 Shift Valve - Before Shift The 2-3 shift valve mechanism consists of the 2-3 shift valve, governor plug and spring, and a throttle plug. After the 1-2 shift valve has completed its operation and applied the front band, line pressure is directed to the 2-3 shift valve through the connecting passages from the 1-2 shift valve. The line pressure will then dead-end at land #2 until the 2-3 valve is ready to make its shift. Now that the vehicle is in motion and under acceleration, there is throttle pressure being applied to the spring side of the valve and between lands #3 and #4. 2-3 Shift Valve - After Shift As vehicle speed increases, governor pressure increases proportionately, until it becomes great enough to overcome the combined throttle and spring pressure on the right side of the valve. Since the throttle pressure end of the 2-3 shift valve is larger in diameter than the 1-2 shift valve, the 2-3 shift will always happen at a greater speed than the 1-2 shift. When this happens, the governor plug is forced against the shift valve moving it to the right. The shift valve causes land #4 to close the passage supplying throttle pressure to the 2-3 shift valve. Without throttle pressure present in the circuit now, the Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 7708 governor plug will push the valve over far enough to bottom the valve in its bore. This allows land #2 to direct line pressure to the front clutch. After the shift, line pressure is directed to the release side of the kickdown servo. This releases the front band and applies the front clutch, shifting into third gear or direct drive. The rear clutch remains applied, as it has been in the other gears. During a manual "1" or manual "2" gear selection, line pressure is sent between the two lands of the 2-3 governor plug. This line pressure at the governor plug locks the shift valve into the second gear position, preventing an upshift into direct drive. The theory for the blocking of the valve is the same as that of the 1-2 shift valve. If the manual "2" or manual "1" gear position is selected from the drive position, the PCM will control the timing of the downshift by targeting for a high governor pressure. When a safe vehicle speed is reached, the PCM will switch to its normal control governor curve and the downshift will occur. 3-4 SHIFT VALVE 3-4 Shift Valve Before Shift The PCM energizes the overdrive solenoid during the 3-4 upshift. This causes the solenoid check ball to close the vent port allowing line pressure from the 2-3 shift valve to act directly on the 3-4 upshift valve. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 7709 3-4 Shift Valve After Shift Line pressure on the 3-4 shift valve overcomes valve spring pressure moving the valve to the upshift position. This action exposes the feed passages to the 3-4 timing valve, 3-4 quick fill valve, 3-4 accumulator, and ultimately to the overdrive piston. 3-4 TIMING VALVE 3-4 Shift Valve After Shift The 3-4 timing valve is moved by line pressure coming through the 3-4 shift valve or the converter clutch valve. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 7710 3-4 Shift Valve Before Shift After the shift, the timing valve holds the 2-3 shift valve in an upshift position. The purpose is to prevent the 2-3 valve from downshifting while either the overdrive clutch or converter clutch is applied. 3-4 QUICK FILL VALVE 3-4 Shift Valve Before Shift The 3-4 quick fill valve provides faster engagement of the overdrive clutch during 3-4 upshifts. The valve temporarily bypasses the clutch piston feed orifice at the start of a 3-4 upshift. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 7711 3-4 Shift Valve After Shift This exposes a larger passage into the piston retainer resulting in a much faster clutch fill and apply sequence. The quick fill valve does not bypass the regular clutch feed orifice throughout the 3-4 upshift. Instead, once a predetermined pressure develops within the clutch, the valve closes the bypass. Clutch fill is then completed through the regular feed orifice. THROTTLE VALVE Throttle Valve In all gear positions, the throttle valve is being supplied with line pressure. The throttle valve meters and reduces the line pressure that now becomes throttle pressure. The throttle valve is moved by a spring and the kickdown valve, which is mechanically connected to the throttle. The larger the throttle opening, the higher the throttle pressure (to a maximum of line pressure). The smaller the throttle opening, the lower the throttle pressure (to a minimum of zero at idle). As engine speed increases, the increase in pump speed increases pump output. The increase in pressure and volume must be regulated to maintain the balance within the transmission. To do this, throttle pressure is routed to the reaction area on the right side of the throttle pressure plug (in the regulator valve). The higher engine speed and line pressure would open the vent too far and reduce line pressure too much. Throttle pressure, which increases with engine speed (throttle opening), is used to oppose the movement of the pressure valve to help control the metering passage at the vent. The throttle pressure is combined with spring pressure to reduce the force of the throttle pressure plug on the pressure valve. The larger spring at the right closes the regulator valve passage and maintains or increases line pressure. The increased line pressure works against the reaction area of the line pressure plug and the Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 7712 reaction area left of land #3 simultaneously moves the regulator valve train to the right and controls the metering passage. The kickdown valve, along with the throttle valve, serve to delay upshifts until the correct vehicle speed has been reached. It also controls downshifts upon driver demand, or increased engine load. If these valves were not in place, the shift points would be at the same speed for all throttle positions. The kickdown valve is actuated by a cam connected to the throttle. This is accomplished through either a linkage or a cable. The cam forces the kickdown valve toward the throttle valve compressing the spring between them and moving the throttle valve. As the throttle valve land starts to uncover its port, line pressure is "metered" out into the circuits and viewed as throttle pressure. This increased throttle pressure is metered out into the circuits it is applied to: the 1-2 and 2-3 shift valves. When the throttle pressure is high enough, a 3-2 downshift will occur. If the vehicle speed is low enough, a 2-1 downshift will occur. SWITCH VALVE Switch Valve - Torque Converter Unlocked When the transmission is in Drive Second before the TCC application occurs, the pressure regulator valve is supplying torque converter pressure to the switch valve. The switch valve directs this pressure through the transmission input shaft, into the converter, through the converter, back out between the input shaft and the reaction shaft, and back up to the switch valve. From the switch valve, the fluid pressure is directed to the transmission cooler, and lubrication pressure returns from the cooler to lubricate different portions of the transmission. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 7713 Switch Valve - Torque Converter Locked MANUAL VALVE The manual valve is a relay valve. The purpose of the manual valve is to direct fluid to the correct circuit needed for a specific gear or driving range. The manual valve, as the name implies, is manually operated by the driver with a lever located on the side of the valve body. The valve is connected mechanically by either a cable or linkage to the gearshift mechanism. The valve is held in each of its positions by a spring-loaded roller or ball that engages the "roostercomb" of the manual valve lever. Manual Valve Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 7714 Once the TCC control valve has moved to the right, line pressure is directed to the tip of the switch valve, forcing the valve to the right. The switch valve now vents oil from the front of the piston in the torque converter, and supplies line pressure to the (rear) apply side of the torque converter piston. This pressure differential causes the piston to apply against the friction material, cutting off any further flow of line pressure oil. After the switch valve is shuttled right allowing line pressure to engage the TCC, torque converter pressure is directed past the switch valve into the transmission cooler and lubrication circuits. CONVERTER CLUTCH LOCK-UP VALVE The torque converter clutch (TCC) lock-up valve controls the back (ON) side of the torque converter clutch. When the PCM energizes the TCC solenoid to engage the converter clutch piston, pressure is applied to the TCC lock-up valve which moves to the right and applies pressure to the torque converter clutch. CONVERTER CLUTCH LOCK-UP TIMING VALVE The torque converter clutch (TCC) lock-up timing valve is there to block any 4-3 downshift until the TCC is completely unlocked and the clutch is disengaged. SHUTTLE VALVE The assembly is contained in a bore in the valve body above the shift valves. When the manual valve is positioned in the Drive range, throttle pressure acts on the throttle plug of the shuttle valve to move it against a spring, increasing the spring force on the shuttle valve. During a part or full throttle 1-2 upshift, the throttle plug is bottomed by throttle pressure, holding the shuttle valve to the right against governor pressure, and opening a by-pass circuit. The shuttle valve controls the quality of the kickdown shift by restricting the rate of fluid discharge from the front clutch and servo release circuits. During a 3-2 kickdown, fluid discharges through the shuttle by-pass circuit. When the shuttle valve closes the by-pass circuit, fluid discharge is restricted and controlled for the application of the front band. During a 2-3 "lift foot" upshift, the shuttle valve by-passes the restriction to allow full fluid flow through the by-pass groove for a faster release of the band. BOOST VALVE Boost Valve Before Lock-up The boost valve provides increased fluid apply pressure to the overdrive clutch during 3-4 upshifts, and when accelerating in fourth gear. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 7715 Boost Valve After Lock-up The boost valve also serves to increase line pressure during torque converter lock-up. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 7716 Valve Body: Description and Operation AS68RC Automatic Transmission Description DESCRIPTION The valve body consists of a two piece aluminum valve body. Extensive electronic control effected by a microcomputer (the automatic transmission electronic control unit) over the hydraulic circuitry enables precise control over gearshifts. The valve body contains valves and pressure sensors that control fluid delivery to the torque converter clutch, forward clutches, and brake clutches. UPPER VALVE BODY UPPER VALVE BODY The upper valve body contains the following components: - 1 = Combined Drain - 2 = Gain change solenoid valve - 3 = Manual valve - 4 = Modulator valve - 5 = Shift solenoid valve No. 3 - 6 = Shift solenoid valve No. 2 - 7 = Shift valve No. 1 LOWER VALVE BODY Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 7717 LOWER VALVE BODY The lower valve body contains the following components: - 1 = Control valve No. 3 - 2 = Shift solenoid valve No. 4 - 3 = Lockup control valve - 4 = Control valve No. 1 - 5 = Control valve No. 2 SWITCHES AND SOLENOIDS Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 7718 VALVE BODY OIL SWITCH HARNESS There are eight pressure switches and one ATF temperature switch used to inform the Transmission Control Module (TCM) when there is pressure in various hydraulic circuits. Six of them are located on the bottom of the valve body. The remainder are located on the top of the valve body. SWITCHES AND SOLENOIDS Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 7719 VALVE BODY SOLENOID HARNESS Eight solenoids are used to control various shift functions in the transmission. Four are located on the top of the valve body (3, 4) and the remainder are located on the bottom of the valve body. Operation OPERATION LOWER VALVE BODY Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 7720 LOWER VALVE BODY UPPER VALVE BODY Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 7721 UPPER VALVE BODY SWITCHES AND SOLENOIDS Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 7722 VALVE BODY OIL SWITCH HARNESS SWITCHES AND SOLENOIDS Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 7723 VALVE BODY SOLENOID HARNESS Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures Valve Body: Procedures Cleaning CLEANING Valve Body Components Clean the valve housings, valves, plugs, springs, and separator plate with a standard parts cleaning solution only. Do not use gasoline, kerosene, or any type of caustic solution. Do not immerse any of the electrical components in cleaning solution. Clean the electrical components by wiping them off with dry shop towels only. Dry all except the electrical parts with compressed air. Make sure all passages are clean and free from obstructions. Do not use rags or shop towels to dry or wipe off valve body components. Lint from these materials can stick to valve body parts, interfere with valve operation, and clog filters and fluid passages. Inspection INSPECTION Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 7726 Valve Body Components NOTE: Only the INNER accumulator seal ring actually seals the pressure in the bore. The outer seal ring only serves to guide the piston in the bore. Gouges which do not extend past the inner seal ring (and have no raised edges, which could damage the guide ring) are acceptable. The machined accumulator bores often have a tiger-striped appearance. This is NORMAL and does NOT require replacement, as long as the bores are smooth in the inner seal ring area. Inspect all of the valve body mating surfaces for scratches, nicks, burrs, or distortion. Use a straightedge to check surface flatness. Minor scratches may be removed with crocus cloth using only very light pressure. Minor distortion of a valve body mating surface may be corrected by smoothing the surface with a sheet of crocus cloth. Position the crocus cloth on a surface plate, sheet of plate glass or equally flat surface. If distortion is severe or any surfaces are heavily scored, the valve body will have to be replaced. Inspect the valves and plugs for scratches, burrs, nicks, or scores. Minor surface scratches on steel valves and plugs can be removed with crocus cloth but do not round off the edges of the valve or plug lands. Maintaining sharpness of these edges is vitally important. The edges prevent foreign matter from lodging between the valves and plugs and the bore. Inspect all the valve and plug bores in the valve body. Use a penlight to view the bore interiors. Replace the valve body if any bores are distorted or scored. Inspect all of the valve body springs. The springs must be free of distortion, warpage or broken coils. Trial fit each valve and plug in its bore to check freedom of operation. When clean and dry, the valves and plugs should drop freely into the bores. Valve body bores do not change dimensionally with use. If the valve body functioned correctly when new, it will continue to operate properly after cleaning and inspection. It should not be necessary to replace a valve body assembly unless it is damaged in handling. Inspect all the accumulator bores in the valve body. Use a penlight to view the bore interiors. Replace the valve body if any bores are distorted or scored. Inspect all of the accumulator springs. The springs must be free of distortion, warpage or broken coils. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 7727 Inspect all the fluid seals on the valve body. Replace any seals that are cracked, distorted, or damaged in any way. These seals pass fluid pressure directly to the clutches. Any pressure leak at these points, may cause transmission performance problems. Cleaning CLEANING Clean the valve housings, valves, plugs, springs, transfer plate and separator plate with a standard parts cleaning solution only. Do not use gasoline, kerosene, or any type of caustic solution. Do not immerse any of the electrical components in cleaning solution. Clean the electrical components by wiping them off with dry shop towels only. Dry all except the electrical parts with compressed air. Make sure all passages are clean and free from obstructions. Do not use rags or shop towels to dry or wipe off valve body components. Lint from these materials can stick to valve body parts, interfere with valve operation, and clog filters and fluid passages. Inspection INSPECTION Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 7728 NOTE: Only the INNER accumulator seal ring actually seals the pressure in the bore. The outer seal ring only serves to guide the piston in the bore. Gouges which do not extend past the inner seal ring (and have no raised edges, which could damage the guide ring) are acceptable. The machined accumulator bores often have a tiger-striped appearance. This is NORMAL and does NOT require replacement, as long as the bores are smooth in the inner seal ring area. Inspect all of the valve body mating surfaces for scratches, nicks, burrs, or distortion. Use a straightedge to check surface flatness. Minor scratches may be removed with crocus cloth using only very light pressure. Minor distortion of a valve body mating surface may be corrected by smoothing the surface with a sheet of crocus cloth. Position the crocus cloth on a surface plate, sheet of plate glass or equally flat surface. If distortion is severe or any surfaces are heavily scored, the valve body will have to be replaced. Inspect the valves and plugs for scratches, burrs, nicks, or scores. Minor surface scratches on steel valves and plugs can be removed with crocus cloth but do not round off the edges of the valve or plug lands. Maintaining sharpness of these edges is vitally important. The edges prevent foreign matter from lodging between the valves and plugs and the bore. Inspect all the valve and plug bores in the valve body. Use a penlight to view the bore interiors. Replace the valve body if any bores are distorted or scored. Inspect all of the valve body springs. The springs must be free of distortion, warpage or broken coils. Trial fit each valve and plug in its bore to check freedom of operation. When clean and dry, the valves and plugs should drop freely into the bores. Valve body bores do not normally change dimensionally with use. If the valve body functioned correctly when new, it should continue to operate properly after cleaning and inspection. It should not be necessary to replace a valve body assembly unless it is damaged in handling. Inspect all the accumulator bores in the valve body as well as the accumulator piston seal rings, and replace if cut or damaged. Use a penlight to view the bore interiors. Replace the valve body if any bores are distorted or scored. Inspect all of the accumulator springs. The springs must be free of distortion, warpage or broken coils. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 7729 Inspect all the fluid seals on the valve body. Replace any seals that are cracked, distorted, or damaged in any way. These seals pass fluid pressure directly to the clutches. Any pressure leak at these points, may cause transmission performance problems. Cleaning CLEANING Clean the valve housings, valves, plugs, springs, and separator plates with a standard parts cleaning solution only. Do not use gasoline, kerosene, or any type of caustic solution. Do not immerse any of the electrical components in cleaning solution. Clean the governor solenoid and sensor and the dual solenoid and harness assembly by wiping them off with dry shop towels only. Dry all except the electrical parts with compressed air. Make sure all passages are clean and free from obstructions. Do not use rags or shop towels to dry or wipe off valve body components. Lint from these materials can stick to valve body parts, interfere with valve operation, and clog filters and fluid passages. Wipe the governor pressure sensor and solenoid valve with dry, lint free shop towels only. The O-rings on the sensor and solenoid valve are the only serviceable components. Be sure the vent ports in the solenoid valve are open and not blocked by dirt or debris. Replace the valve and/or sensor only when DRB scan tool diagnosis indicates this is necessary. Or, if either part has sustained physical damage (dented, deformed, broken, etc.). CAUTION: Do not turn the small screw at the end of the solenoid valve for any reason. Turning the screw in either direction will ruin solenoid calibration and result in solenoid failure. In addition, the filter on the solenoid valve is NOT serviceable. Do not try to remove the filter as this will damage the valve housing. Inspection INSPECTION Inspect the throttle and manual valve levers and shafts. Do not attempt to straighten a bent shaft or correct a loose lever. Replace these components if worn, bent, loose or damaged in any way. Inspect all of the valve body mating surfaces for scratches, nicks, burrs, or distortion. Use a straightedge to check surface flatness. Minor scratches may be removed with crocus cloth using only very light pressure. Minor distortion of a valve body mating surface may be corrected by smoothing the surface with a sheet of crocus cloth. Position the crocus cloth on a surface plate, sheet of plate glass or equally flat surface. If distortion is severe or any surfaces are heavily scored, the valve body will have to be replaced. CAUTION: Many of the valves and plugs, such as the throttle valve, shuttle valve plug, 1-2 shift valve and 1-2 governor plug, are made of coated aluminum. Aluminum components are identified by the dark color of the special coating applied to the surface (or by testing with a magnet). Do not sand aluminum valves or plugs under any circumstances. This practice could damage the special coating causing the valves/plugs to stick and bind. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 7730 Inspect the valves and plugs for scratches, burrs, nicks, or scores. Minor surface scratches on steel valves and plugs can be removed with crocus cloth but do not round off the edges of the valve or plug lands. Maintaining sharpness of these edges is vitally important. The edges prevent foreign matter from lodging between the valves and plugs and the bore. Inspect all the valve and plug bores in the valve body. Use a penlight to view the bore interiors. Replace the valve body if any bores are distorted or scored. Inspect all of the valve body springs. The springs must be free of distortion, warpage or broken coils. Check the two separator plates for distortion or damage of any kind. Inspect the upper housing, lower housing, 3-4 accumulator housing, and transfer plate carefully. Be sure all fluid passages are clean and clear. Check condition of the upper housing and transfer plate check balls as well. The check balls and ball seats must not be worn or damaged. Trial fit each valve and plug in its bore to check freedom of operation. When clean and dry, the valves and plugs should drop freely into the bores. Valve body bores do not change dimensionally with use. If the valve body functioned correctly when new, it will continue to operate properly after cleaning and inspection. It should not be necessary to replace a valve body assembly unless it is damaged in handling. The only serviceable valve body components are listed below. The remaining valve body components are serviced only as part of a complete valve body assembly. Serviceable parts are: - dual solenoid and harness assembly - solenoid gasket - solenoid case connector O-rings and shoulder bolt - switch valve and spring - pressure adjusting screw and bracket assembly - throttle lever - manual lever and shaft seal - throttle lever shaft seal, washer, and E-clip - fluid filter and screws - detent ball and spring - valve body screws - governor pressure solenoid - governor pressure sensor and retaining clip - park lock rod and E-clip Cleaning CLEANING Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 7731 UPPER VALVE BODY LOWER VALVE BODY Clean the valve housings, valves, plugs, springs, and separator plates with a standard parts cleaning solution only. Do not use gasoline, kerosene, or any type of caustic solution. Do not immerse any of the electrical components in cleaning solution. Clean the electrical components by wiping them off with dry shop towels only. Dry all except the electrical parts with compressed air. Make sure all passages are clean and free from obstructions. Do not use rags or shop towels to dry or wipe off valve body components. Lint from these materials can stick to valve body parts, interfere with valve operation, and clog filters and fluid passages. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 7732 SOLENOID FILTER SCREEN Clean the solenoid filter screen (1), (if equipped). Inspection INSPECTION Inspect all of the valve body mating surfaces for scratches, nicks, burrs, or distortion. Use a straightedge to check surface flatness. Minor scratches may be removed with crocus cloth using only very light pressure. Minor distortion of a valve body mating surface may be corrected by smoothing the surface with a sheet of crocus cloth. Position the crocus cloth on a surface plate, sheet of plate glass or equally flat surface. If distortion is severe or any surfaces are heavily scored, the valve body will have to be replaced. Inspect the valves and plugs for scratches, burrs, nicks, or scores. Minor surface scratches on steel valves and plugs can be removed with crocus cloth but do not round off the edges of the valve or plug lands. Maintaining sharpness of these edges is vitally important. The edges prevent foreign matter from lodging between the valves and plugs and the bore. Inspect all the valve and plug bores in the valve body. Use a penlight to view the bore interiors. Replace the valve body if any bores are distorted or scored. Inspect all of the valve body springs. The springs must be free of distortion, warpage or broken coils. Trial fit each valve and plug in its bore to check freedom of operation. When clean and dry, the valves and plugs should drop freely into the bores. Valve body bores do not change dimensionally with use. If the valve body functioned correctly when new, it will continue to operate properly after cleaning and inspection. It should not be necessary to replace a valve body assembly unless it is damaged in handling. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 7733 SOLENOID FILTER SCREEN Inspect all solenoid filter screens (1). Inspect all the fluid seals in the transmission case. Replace any seals that are cracked, distorted, or damaged in any way. These seals pass fluid pressure directly to the clutches. Any pressure leak at these points, may cause transmission performance problems. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 7734 Valve Body: Removal and Replacement Removal REMOVAL NOTE: The valve body can be removed for service without having to remove the transmission assembly. The valve body can be disassembled for cleaning and inspection of the individual components. See: Service and Repair/Overhaul/545RFE Automatic Transmission/Overhaul (Subassemblies)/Valve Body/Disassembly 1. Shift transmission into PARK. 2. Raise vehicle. 3. Disconnect wires at the solenoid and pressure switch assembly 23 pin electrical connector. 4. Position drain pan under transmission oil pan. 5. Remove transmission oil pan. 6. Remove the primary oil filter (1) from valve body. 7. Remove bolts (1) attaching valve body to transmission case. 8. Lower the valve body and work the electrical connector out of transmission case. 9. Separate the valve body from the transmission. Installation INSTALLATION Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 7735 1. Place TRS selector plate in the PARK position. 2. Place the transmission in the PARK position. 3. Lubricate seal on the solenoid and pressure switch assembly connector with petroleum jelly. 4. Position valve body in transmission and align the manual lever on the valve body to the pin on the transmission manual shift lever. 5. Seat valve body in case and install one or two bolts to hold valve body in place. 6. Tighten valve body bolts alternately and evenly to 12 Nm (105 in. lbs.) torque. 7. Operate the external manual shift lever and ensure that the TRS selector plate moves correctly into all gear range positions. CAUTION: The primary oil filter seal MUST be fully installed flush against the oil pump body. DO NOT install the seal onto the filter neck and attempt to install the filter and seal as an assembly. Damage to the transmission will result. 8. Install a new primary oil filter seal in the oil pump inlet bore. Seat the seal in the bore with the butt end of a hammer, or other suitable tool. 9. Place replacement filter (1) in position on valve body and into the oil pump. 10. Install screw to hold filter to valve body. Tighten screw to 4.5 Nm (40 in. lbs.) torque. 11. Connect the solenoid and pressure switch 23 pin electrical assembly connector. 12. Install oil pan using silicone gasket sealer. Tighten pan bolts to 12 Nm (105 in. lbs.) torque. 13. Lower vehicle and fill transmission with Mopar(R) ATF +4. 14. Check and adjust gearshift cable, if necessary. Removal REMOVAL NOTE: The valve body can be removed for service without having to remove the transmission assembly. The valve body can be disassembled for cleaning and inspection of the individual components. CAUTION: If replacing the valve body an oil pump must be replaced as these are a matched set. Failure to follow these instructions may result in transmission failure and permanent damage. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 7736 DRAIN PLUG 1. Shift transmission into PARK. 2. Raise vehicle. 3. Position drain pan under transmission oil pan. 4. Remove transmission oil pan drain plug (1) and drain oil. 5. Remove transmission oil pan. 6. Remove the transmission filter. 7. Disconnect electrical harness connectors from valve body and position harness aside. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 7737 8. Remove all the bolts, clamp, wave washer, manual detent spring and cover (2-13,15), attaching the valve body (1) to the transmission case (14). 9. Remove the valve body on a slight angle to clear the manual valve shaft (3) from the roostercomb (1). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 7738 OVER HEAD VIEW 10. Remove the three accumulator springs and the three accumulators (1), (2),(3). CAUTION: Do not remove the valve body electrical harnesses from the transmission case unless replacement is required. Failure to follow these instructions may create an external transmission fluid leak path. 11. Remove the bolts (1) securing the valve body electrical harness connectors to the transmission case. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 7739 12. Remove both valve body electrical harnesses (1) from the transmission case. Installation INSTALLATION CAUTION: If the valve body is being replaced the oil pump must also be replaced. Failure to follow these instructions will damage the transmission. NOTE: If the valve body is being replaced, a quick learn must be performed using the scan tool. See: Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Transmission Control Module/TCM Quick Learn NOTE: Apply petroleum grease to all slide portions, rolling contacts surfaces, thrust surfaces etc. to prevent burnout during initial operation. Lubricate O-rings and O-ring seals with MOPAR(R) AS68RC ATF. Soak all friction disks in MOPAR(R) AS68RC ATF for at least two hours before assembly of clutch packs. 1. Lubricate the seals on the electrical connectors with MOPAR(R) AS68RC ATF and install the valve body electrical harnesses (1) into the transmission case. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 7740 2. Install the valve body electrical harness connector bolts. Tighten the bolts to 8 Nm (71 in.lbs.). OVER HEAD VIEW 3. Install the three accumulator springs first and then the three accumulator valves (1), (2),(3). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 7741 VALVE BODY INSTALLATION NOTE: Install valve body on a slight angle and verify that the shaft on the manual shift valve and the roller detent spring (11) has properly engaged the manual valve lever (13). NOTE: Bolts with conical washers are not reusable. 4. Install the valve body onto the transmission case. 5. Install and then tighten the bolts in the following order: a. Install bolts (2*) and (3*) and tighten by hand in order to hold valve body onto transmission case. b. Install detent spring, (10), (11) and bolts (5), (8) with wave washer (9), and tighten by hand. c. Install clamp (12) along with bolt (15) on the prescribed position and tighten by hand. d. Install bolts (15), (4), (6) and (7) on each correct position and tighten by hand. e. Tighten bolts (2*) and (3*) to 10 Nm ( 88 in.lbs.). f. Tighten bolts (4), (5), (6),(7), (15) to 10 Nm ( 88 in.lbs.) and (8) to 5.5 Nm (49 in. lbs.). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 7742 VALVE BODY SOLENOID HARNESS 6. Install the white wire onto the oil pressure switch number seven (5). 7. Install the black wire onto the oil pressure switch number eight (6). 8. Connect the blue/white wire into linear solenoid number three (3). 9. Connect the yellow/black wire into linear solenoid number one (4). 10. Connect the brown/red wire to the oil temperature sensor (7) jumper harness. 11. Connect the orange/green to the upper valve body jumper harness (10). 12. Secure the valve body solenoid harness at clamps (8) and (9). NOTE: There should be no harness wires between the two arrows. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 7743 VALVE BODY OIL SWITCH HARNESS 13. Install the yellow wire onto oil pressure switch number six (9). 14. Install the black wire onto oil pressure switch number three (10). 15. Install the red wire onto oil pressure switch number two (11). 16. Install the brown wire onto oil pressure switch number one (12). 17. Connect the blue/white wire into linear solenoid number four (3). 18. Connect the brown/red wire into linear solenoid number two (6). 19. Connect the yellow wire into the on/off solenoid number three (4). 20. Connect the black wire into the on/off solenoid number two (5). 21. Connect the green wire into the on/off solenoid number one (7). 22. Connect the orange wire into the on/off solenoid number four (8). 23. Secure the oil pressure switch harness that is protected with clamps (13), (14) and (15). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 7744 TRANSMISSION OIL FILTER 24. Lubricate transmission oil filter o-ring with MOPAR(R) AS68RC ATF. 25. Install the transmission oil filter (2) into the valve body (1). 26. Install the bolts (3) and tighten to 10 Nm (88 in.lbs.). OIL PAN MAGNETS NOTE: Before installing the transmission oil pan be certain to inspect and clean the pick-up magnets (1) as well as the magnetic drain plug bolt (2). 27. Using a new gasket install the oil pan onto the transmission case. 28. Tighten oil pan bolts to 7 Nm (62 in.lbs.). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 7745 DRAIN PLUG 29. Install oil pan drain plug bolt (1). Tighten bolt to 27 Nm (20 ft. lbs.) 30. Lower vehicle and fill transmission with MOPAR(R) AS68RC ATF. 31. Check and adjust gearshift cable, if necessary. Removal REMOVAL NOTE: The valve body can be removed for service without having to remove the transmission assembly. The valve body can be disassembled for cleaning and inspection of the individual components. See: Service and Repair/Overhaul/545RFE Automatic Transmission/Overhaul (Subassemblies)/Valve Body/Disassembly Remove Primary Oil Filter 1. Shift transmission into PARK. 2. Raise vehicle. 3. Disconnect wires at the solenoid and pressure switch assembly 23 pin electrical connector. 4. Position drain pan under transmission oil pan. 5. Remove transmission oil pan. 6. Remove the primary oil filter (1) from valve body. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 7746 7. Remove bolts (1) attaching valve body to transmission case. 8. Lower the valve body and work the electrical connector out of transmission case. 9. Separate the valve body from the transmission. Installation INSTALLATION 1. Check condition of seals on valve body and the solenoid and pressure switch assembly. Replace seals if cut or worn. 2. Place TRS selector plate in the PARK position. 3. Place the transmission in the PARK position. 4. Lubricate seal on the solenoid and pressure switch assembly connector with petroleum jelly. 5. Position valve body in transmission and align the manual lever on the valve body to the pin on the transmission manual shift lever. 6. Seat valve body in case and install one or two bolts to hold valve body in place. 7. Tighten valve body bolts alternately and evenly to 12 Nm (105 in. lbs.) torque. 8. Operate the external manual shift lever and ensure that the TRS selector plate moves correctly into all gear range positions. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 7747 Remove Primary Oil Filter CAUTION: The primary oil filter seal MUST be fully installed flush against the oil pump body. DO NOT install the seal onto the filter neck and attempt to install the filter and seal as an assembly. Damage to the transmission will result. 9. Install a new primary oil filter seal in the oil pump inlet bore. Seat the seal in the bore with the butt end of a hammer, or other suitable tool. 10. Place replacement filter (1) in position on valve body and into the oil pump. 11. Install screw to hold filter to valve body. Tighten screw to 4.5 Nm (40 in. lbs.) torque. 12. Connect the solenoid and pressure switch 23 pin electrical assembly connector. 13. Install oil pan using silicone gasket sealer. Tighten pan bolts to 12 Nm (105 in. lbs.) torque. 14. Lower vehicle and fill transmission with Mopar(R) ATF +4. 15. Check and adjust gearshift cable, if necessary. Removal REMOVAL NOTE: If valve body is being reconditioned or replaced, it is necessary to perform the Quick Learn Procedure. See: Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Transmission Control Module/TCM Quick Learn 1. Disconnect the transmission range sensor (5) and solenoid/pressure switch assembly wiring connectors. 2. Disconnect the variable line pressure connector (4), if equipped. 3. Disconnect the shift cable from the shift lever (at the transmission). 4. Move the manual shift lever clockwise as far as it will go. This should be one position past the L position. Then remove the manual shift lever. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 7748 NOTE: One of the oil pan bolts has a sealing patch applied from the factory. Separate this bolts for reuse. 5. Remove transmission pan bolts (2). 6. Remove transmission oil pan (1). 7. Remove oil filter (1) from valve body. It is held in place by two screws. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 7749 8. Remove valve body bolts-to-case (1). CAUTION: The overdrive and underdrive accumulators and springs may fall out when removing the valve body. 9. Carefully remove valve body assembly (1) from the transmission. Installation INSTALLATION 1. Install valve body into position and start bolts (1). Torque valve body to transmission case bolts (1) to 12 Nm (105 in. lbs.) torque. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 7750 2. Install transmission oil filter (1). NOTE: Before installing the oil pan bolt in the bolt hole (5) located between the torque converter clutch on and U/D clutch pressure tap circuits, it will be necessary to replenish the sealing patch on the bolt using MOPAR(R) Lock & Seal Adhesive. 3. Make sure oil pan (1) and case rail are clean and dry. Install an 1/8" bead of RTV to the transmission oil pan and install to case. Tighten bolts (2) to 20 Nm (14.5 ft. lbs.). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 7751 4. Lower vehicle and connect the transmission range sensor (5) connector. 5. Connect solenoid/pressure switch assembly connector. 6. Connect the variable line pressure connector (4), if equipped. 7. Lower vehicle. 8. Fill transmission with ATF+4, Automatic Transmission Fluid. Verify proper fluid level. See: Service and Repair/Procedures/42RLE Automatic Transmission/Transmission Fill - 42RLE NOTE: If the valve body has been reconditioned or replaced, it is necessary to perform the Quick Learn Procedure.See: Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Transmission Control Module See: Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Transmission Control Module/TCM Quick Learn Removal REMOVAL The valve body can be removed for service without having to remove the transmission assembly. The valve body can be disassembled for cleaning and inspection of the individual components. The only replaceable valve body components are: - Manual lever. - Manual lever washer, seal, E-clip, and shaft seal. - Manual lever detent ball. - Throttle lever. - Fluid filter. - Pressure adjusting screw bracket. - Governor pressure solenoid. - Governor pressure sensor (includes transmission temperature thermistor). - Converter clutch/overdrive solenoid assembly and harness. - Governor housing gasket. - Solenoid case connector O-rings. 1. Shift transmission into NEUTRAL. 2. Raise vehicle. 3. Remove gearshift and throttle levers from shaft of valve body manual lever. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 7752 4. Disconnect wires at solenoid case connector (1). 5. Remove the transmission range sensor (2) See: Sensors and Switches - A/T/Transmission Position Switch/Sensor/Service and Repair/48RE Automatic Transmission/Removal . 6. Position drain pan under transmission oil pan. 7. Remove transmission oil pan and gasket. 8. Remove fluid filter from valve body. 9. Remove bolts attaching valve body to transmission case. 10. Lower valve body enough to remove accumulator piston and springs. 11. Work manual lever shaft and electrical connector out of transmission case. 12. Lower valve body (1), rotate valve body away from case, pull park rod (3) out of sprag, and remove valve body. Installation INSTALLATION 1. Check condition of O-ring seals (1) on valve body harness connector (2). Replace seals on connector body if cut or worn. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 7753 2. Check condition of manual lever shaft seal (2) in transmission case. Replace seal if lip is cut or worn. Install new seal with 15/16 deep well socket (1). 3. Check condition of seals on accumulator piston. Install new piston seals, if necessary. 4. Place valve body manual lever in low (1 position) so ball on park lock rod will be easier to install in sprag. 5. Lubricate shaft of manual lever with petroleum jelly. This will ease inserting shaft through seal in case. 6. Lubricate seal rings on valve body harness connector with petroleum jelly. 7. Position valve body in case and work end of park lock rod into and through pawl sprag. Turn propeller shaft to align sprag and park lock teeth if necessary. The rod will click as it enters pawl. Move rod to check engagement. CAUTION: It is possible for the park rod to displace into a cavity just above the pawl sprag during installation. Make sure the rod is actually engaged in the pawl and has not displaced into this cavity. 8. Install accumulator spring and piston into case. Then swing valve body over piston and outer spring to hold it in place. 9. Align accumulator piston and outer spring, manual lever shaft and electrical connector in case. 10. Then seat valve body in case and install one or two bolts to hold valve body in place. 11. Tighten valve body bolts alternately and evenly to 11 Nm (100 in. lbs.) torque. 12. Install new fluid filter on valve body. Tighten filter screws to 4 Nm (35 in. lbs.) torque. 13. Install throttle and gearshift levers on valve body manual lever shaft. 14. Check and adjust front and rear bands if necessary. 15. Install the transmission range sensor See: Sensors and Switches A/T/Transmission Position Switch/Sensor/Service and Repair/48RE Automatic Transmission/Installation 16. Connect solenoid case connector wires. 17. Install oil pan and new gasket. Tighten pan bolts to 13.6 Nm (125 in. lbs.) torque. 18. Lower vehicle and fill transmission with Mopar(R) ATF +4, Automatic Transmission fluid. 19. Check and adjust gearshift and throttle valve cables, if necessary. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 7754 Valve Body: Overhaul Disassembly DISASSEMBLY 1. Remove the bolts (1) holding the solenoid and pressure switch assembly to the valve body. Do not remove the screws on the top of the solenoid and pressure switch assembly. 2. Separate the solenoid and pressure switch assembly from the valve body. 3. Remove the screw holding the detent spring (2) onto the valve body. 4. Remove the detent spring (2) from the valve body. 5. Remove the TRS selector plate (1) from the valve body and the manual valve. 6. Remove the clutch passage seals (3) from the valve body, if necessary. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 7755 Valve Body Components 7. Remove the screws holding the accumulator cover onto the valve body. 8. Remove the accumulator springs and pistons (1, 6-9) from the valve body. Note which accumulator piston and spring belong in each location. 9. Place the valve body on the bench with the transfer plate upward. NOTE: The valve body contains seven check balls. The transfer plate must be placed upward to prevent losing the check balls when the transfer plate is removed from the valve body. 10. Remove the screws holding the valve body to the valve body transfer plate. 11. Remove the transfer plate from the valve body. Note the location of all check balls. 12. Remove the check balls from the valve body. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 7756 Valve Body Components 13. Remove the retainer securing the solenoid switch valve (5) from the valve body. Remove the solenoid switch valve and plugs (5), the manual valve (4) and low reverse shuttle valve and plug (2). Tag each valve and plug combination with location information to aid in assembly. Assembly ASSEMBLY Valve Body Components Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 7757 1. Lubricate valves and the housing valve bores with clean transmission fluid. 2. Install solenoid switch valve and plugs (5) and manual valve (4) into the valve body. 3. Install the retainers to hold each valve into the valve body. 4. Install the valve body check balls into their proper locations. 5. Position the separator and transfer plate onto the valve body. 6. Install the screws to hold the transfer plate to the valve body. Tighten the screws to 6 Nm (50 in. lbs.). Valve Body Components 7. Install the accumulator pistons (1, 6-9) and springs into the valve body in the location from which they were removed. Note that all accumulators Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 7758 except the overdrive have two springs. The overdrive accumulator piston (6) has only one spring. 8. Install the Low / Reverse shuttle valve, plug and retainer (2) into the valve body housing. 9. Position the accumulator cover onto the valve body. 10. Install the screws to hold the accumulator cover onto the valve body. Tighten the screws to 7 Nm (60 in. lbs.). 11. Install the TRS selector plate (1) onto the valve body and the manual valve. 12. Position the detent spring (2) onto the valve body. 13. Install the screw to hold the detent spring (2) onto the valve body. Tighten the screw to 4.5 Nm (40 in. lbs.). 14. Install new clutch passage seals (3) onto the valve body, if necessary. 15. Install the solenoid and pressure switch assembly onto the valve body. 16. Install the bolts (1) to hold the solenoid and pressure switch assembly onto the valve body. Tighten the bolts to 6 Nm (50 in. lbs.). Tighten the bolts adjacent to the arrows cast into the bottom of the transfer plate first. Disassembly DISASSEMBLY Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 7759 1. Remove the bolts (1) holding the solenoid and pressure switch assembly to the valve body. Do not remove the screws on the top of the solenoid and pressure switch assembly. 2. Separate the solenoid and pressure switch assembly from the valve body. 3. Remove the screw holding the detent spring (2) onto the valve body. 4. Remove the detent spring (2) from the valve body. 5. Remove the TRS selector plate (1) from the valve body and the manual valve. 6. Remove the clutch passage seals (3) from the valve body, if necessary. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 7760 7. Remove the screws holding the accumulator cover onto the valve body. 8. Remove the accumulator springs and pistons (1, 6-9) from the valve body. Note which accumulator piston and spring belong in each location. 9. Place the valve body on the bench with the transfer plate upward. NOTE: The valve body contains seven check balls. The transfer plate must be placed upward to prevent losing the check balls when the transfer plate is removed from the valve body. 10. Remove the screws holding the valve body to the valve body transfer plate. 11. Remove the transfer plate from the valve body. Note the location of all check balls. 12. Remove the check balls from the valve body. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 7761 13. Remove the retainer securing the solenoid switch valve (5) from the valve body. Remove the solenoid switch valve and plugs (5), the manual valve (4) and low reverse shuttle valve and plug (2). Tag each valve and plug combination with location information to aid in assembly. Assembly ASSEMBLY 1. Lubricate valves, plugs and the housing valve bores with clean transmission fluid. 2. Install solenoid switch valve and plugs and plugs (5) and the retainer into the valve body. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 7762 3. Install the valve body check balls into their proper locations. 4. Position the separator and transfer plate onto the valve body. 5. Install the screws to hold the transfer plate to the valve body. Tighten the screws to 6 Nm (50 in. lbs.). 6. Install the accumulator piston seal rings onto each accumulator piston. 7. Install the accumulator pistons (1, 6-9) and springs into the valve body in the location from which they were removed. Note that all accumulators except the overdrive have two springs. The overdrive accumulator piston (6) has only one spring. 8. Install the Low / Reverse shuttle valve, plug, and retainer (2) into the valve body housing. 9. Position the accumulator cover onto the valve body. 10. Install the screws to hold the accumulator cover onto the valve body. Tighten the screws to 7 Nm (60 in. lbs.). 11. Install the manual valve (4). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 7763 12. Install the TRS selector plate (1) onto the valve body and the manual valve. 13. Position the detent spring (2) onto the valve body. 14. Install the screw to hold the detent spring (2) onto the valve body. Tighten the screw to 4.5 Nm (40 in. lbs.). 15. Install new clutch passage seals (3) onto the valve body, if necessary. 16. Install the solenoid and pressure switch assembly onto the valve body. 17. Install the bolts (1) to hold the solenoid and pressure switch assembly onto the valve body. Tighten the bolts to 6 Nm (50 in. lbs.). Tighten the bolts adjacent to the arrows cast into the bottom of the transfer plate first. Disassembly DISASSEMBLY CAUTION: Do not clamp any valve body component in a vise. This practice can damage the component resulting in unsatisfactory operation after assembly and installation. Do not use pliers to remove any of the valves, plugs or springs and do not force any of the components out or into place. The valves and valve body housings will be damaged if force is used. Tag or mark the valve body springs for reference as they are removed. Do not allow them to become intermixed. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 7764 1. Disconnect wires from governor pressure sensor and solenoid. 2. Remove screws attaching governor body and retainer plate to transfer plate. 3. Remove retainer plate, governor body and gasket from transfer plate. 4. Remove governor pressure sensor from governor body. 5. Remove governor pressure solenoid by pulling it straight out of bore in governor body. Remove and discard solenoid O-rings if worn, cut, or torn. 6. Remove small shoulder bolt that secures solenoid harness case connector (1) to 3-4 accumulator housing (2). Retain shoulder bolt. Either tape it to harness or thread it back into accumulator housing after connector removal. 7. Unhook overdrive/converter solenoid harness (1) from 3-4 accumulator cover plate (2). 8. Turn valve body over and remove screws that attach overdrive/converter solenoid assembly (1) to valve body. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 7765 9. Remove solenoid and harness (6) assembly from valve body. 10. Remove boost valve cover (1). 11. Remove boost valve retainer (1), valve spring (6), and boost valve (5). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 7766 12. Secure detent ball and spring with Retainer Tool 6583 (1). 13. Remove park rod E-clip (2) and separate rod (3) from manual lever (1). 14. Remove E-clip and washer (2) that retains throttle lever shaft (1) in manual shaft (3). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 7767 15. Remove manual lever (2) and throttle lever (3). Rotate and lift manual lever off valve body and throttle lever shaft. Then slide throttle lever out of valve body. 16. Position pencil magnet (4) next to detent housing to catch detent ball and spring. Then carefully remove Retainer Tool 6583 and remove detent ball (3) and spring (2). 17. Remove screws (2) attaching pressure adjusting screw bracket (3) to valve body and transfer plate. Hold bracket (5) firmly against spring tension while removing last screw (5). 18. Remove adjusting screw bracket (4), line pressure adjusting screw (2), pressure regulator valve spring (5), and switch valve spring (1). Do not remove throttle pressure adjusting screw from bracket and do not disturb setting of either adjusting screw during removal. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 7768 Upper Housing Control Valve Locations 19. Turn upper housing (1) over and remove switch valve (3), regulator valve (2) and spring (4), and manual valve (8). 20. Remove kickdown detent (6), kickdown valve (5), and throttle valve and spring (7). 21. Loosen left-side 3-4 accumulator housing (3) attaching screw (1) about 2-3 threads. Then remove center and right-side housing attaching screws (2). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 7769 22. Carefully rotate 3-4 accumulator housing upward and remove 3-4 shift valve spring and converter clutch valve plug and spring. 23. Remove left-side screw and remove 3-4 accumulator housing (3) from valve body. 24. Bend back tabs on boost valve tube brace (2). 25. Remove boost valve connecting tube (1). Disengage tube from upper housing port first. Then rock opposite end of tube back and forth to work it Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 7770 out of lower housing. CAUTION: Do not use tools to loosen or pry the connecting tube out of the valve body housings. Loosen and remove the tube by hand only. 26. Turn valve body over so lower housing (1) is facing upward. In this position, the two check balls in upper housing will remain in place and not fall out when lower housing and separator plate are removed. 27. Remove screws attaching valve body lower housing (1) to upper housing and transfer plate (3). Note position of boost valve tube brace for assembly reference. 28. Remove lower housing and overdrive separator plate (2) from transfer plate (3). 29. Remove the Number 10 check ball (1) from the transfer plate. The check ball is approximately 4.8 mm (3/16 in.) in diameter. 30. Remove transfer plate (2) from upper housing (1). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 7771 31. Turn transfer plate (1) over so upper housing separator plate (2) is facing upward. 32. Remove upper housing separator plate (2) from transfer plate (1). Note position of filter screen (3) in separator plate for assembly reference. 33. Remove rear clutch steel check ball (1) and rear servo plastic check ball (2) from transfer plate (3). Note check ball location for assembly reference. VALVE BODY UPPER HOUSING 1. Note location of check balls (1, 2) in valve body upper housing. Then remove the one large diameter (2) and the six smaller diameter (1) check balls. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 7772 2. Remove E-clip (1) that secures shuttle valve secondary spring (2) on valve stem (3). Shuttle and Boost Valve Location 3. Remove governor plug and shuttle valve covers (8). 4. Remove throttle plug (12), primary spring (10), shuttle valve (9), secondary spring (7), and spring guides (5). 5. Remove boost valve retainer, spring and valve if not previously removed. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 7773 Upper Housing Shift Valve and Pressure Plug Locations 6. Remove throttle plug and 1-2 and 2-3 governor plugs. 7. Turn upper housing (1) around and remove limit valve (6) and shift valve covers. 8. Remove limit valve housing (5). Then remove retainer, spring, limit valve (7), and 2-3 throttle plug (4) from limit valve housing (5). 9. Remove 1-2 shift control valve and spring (9). 10. Remove 1-2 shift valve and spring (2). 11. Remove 2-3 shift valve and spring (3) from valve body. 12. Remove pressure plug cover (10). 13. Remove throttle pressure plug and spring (12). VALVE BODY LOWER HOUSING Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 7774 Lower Housing Shift Valves and Springs 3-4 ACCUMULATOR HOUSING 1. Remove end plate from housing. 2. Remove piston spring. 3. Remove piston. Remove and discard piston seals. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 7775 4. Remove timing valve cover. 5. Remove 3-4 timing valve and spring. 6. Remove 3-4 quick fill valve, spring and plug. 7. Remove 3-4 shift valve and spring. 8. Remove converter clutch valve, spring and plug. 9. Remove converter clutch timing valve, retainer and valve spring. Assembly ASSEMBLY CAUTION: Do not force valves or plugs into place during reassembly. If the valve body bores, valves and plugs are free of distortion or burrs, the valve body components should all slide into place easily. In addition, do not overtighten the transfer plate and valve body screws during reassembly. Overtightening can distort the housings resulting in valve sticking, cross leakage and unsatisfactory operation. Tighten valve body screws to recommended tightening specifications only. LOWER HOUSING Lower Housing Shift Valves and Springs Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 7776 1. Lubricate valves, springs, and the housing valve and plug bores with clean transmission fluid. 2. Install 3-4 timing valve spring and valve (13) in lower housing. 3. Install 3-4 quick fill valve (18) in lower housing. 4. Install 3-4 quick fill valve spring (18) and plug (12) in housing. 5. Install timing valve end plate (11). Tighten end plate screws to 4 Nm (35 in. lbs.) torque. 3-4 ACCUMULATOR 1. Lubricate accumulator piston, seals and housing piston bore with clean transmission fluid. 2. Install new seal rings (3) on accumulator piston. 3. Install piston (1) and spring (4) in housing. 4. Install end plate on housing (5). TRANSFER PLATE Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 7777 1. Install rear clutch steel check ball (1) and rear servo plastic check ball (2) into the transfer plate (3). 2. Install filter screen (2) in upper housing separator plate (1). 3. Align and position upper housing separator plate (3) on transfer plate (2). 4. Install brace plate (1). Tighten brace attaching screws to 4 Nm (35 in. lbs.) torque. 5. Install remaining separator plate attaching screws. Tighten screws to 4 Nm (35 in. lbs.) torque. UPPER AND LOWER HOUSING 1. Position upper housing so internal passages and check ball seats are facing upward. Then install check balls in housing (1, 2). Seven check balls are used. The single large check ball (2) is approximately 8.7 mm (11/32 in.) diameter. The remaining 6 check balls are approximately 6.3 mm (1/4 in.) in diameter. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 7778 2. Position assembled transfer plate and upper housing separator plate (2) on upper housing. Be sure filter screen (1) is seated in proper housing recess. 3. Install the Number 10 check ball (1) into the transfer plate. The check ball is approximately 4.8 mm (3/16 in.) in diameter. 4. Position lower housing separator plate (3) on transfer plate (2). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 7779 5. Install lower housing (2) on assembled transfer plate (4) and upper housing (3). 6. Install and start all valve body screws by hand except for the screws to hold the boost valve tube brace. Save those screws for later installation. Then tighten screws evenly to 4 Nm (35 in. lbs.) torque. Start at center and work out to sides when tightening screws (1). UPPER HOUSING VALVE AND PLUG Refer to the following graphic, to perform the following steps. 1. Lubricate valves, plugs, springs with clean transmission fluid. 2. Install the boost valve plug (4), boost valve (3), spring (1), and retainer (2) into the housing. 3. Install the boost valve cover (14). Tighten cover plate screws to 4 Nm (35 in. lbs.) torque. 4. Install shuttle valve as follows: a. Insert plastic guides (5) in shuttle valve secondary spring (7) and install spring on end of shuttle valve (9). b. Install shuttle valve (9) into housing. c. Hold shuttle valve in place. d. Compress secondary spring (7) and install E-clip (6) in groove at end of shuttle valve. e. Verify that spring and E-clip are properly seated before proceeding. 5. Install shuttle valve cover plate (8). Tighten cover plate screws to 4 Nm (35 in. lbs.) torque. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 7780 6. Install 1-2 (9) and 2-3 (12) valve governor plugs in valve body. 7. Install shuttle valve primary spring (13) and throttle plug (11). 8. Align and install governor plug cover (11). Tighten cover screws to 4 Nm (35 in. lbs.) torque. 9. Install the switch valve (3). 10. Install the throttle valve and spring (7), kickdown (5), and kickdown detent (6). 11. Install the manual valve (8). 12. Assemble regulator valve (2) and spring (4). Insert assembly in upper housing. Upper Housing Shift Valve and Pressure Plug Locations 13. Install 1-2 (2) and 2-3 (3) shift valves and springs. 14. Install 1-2 shift control valve and spring (9). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 7781 15. Install retainer (8), limit valve and spring (7), and 2-3 throttle plug (4) into the limit valve housing (5). 16. Install the throttle pressure spring and plug (12) and plug sleeve (11). 17. Install pressure plug cover (10) and cover plate (6). Tighten screws to 4 Nm (35 in. lbs.). 18. Install limit valve housing (5) and cover plate (6). Tighten screws to 4 Nm (35 in. lbs.). BOOST VALVE TUBE AND BRACE 1. Position valve body assembly so lower housing (2) is facing upward. 2. Lubricate tube ends and housing ports with transmission fluid or petroleum jelly. 3. Start tube in lower housing port first. Then swing tube downward and work opposite end of tube into upper housing port. 4. Insert and seat each end of tube in housings. 5. Slide tube brace (2) under tube and into alignment with valve body screw holes. 6. Install and finger tighten three screws that secure tube brace to valve body housings. 7. Bend tube brace tabs up and against tube to hold it in position. 8. Tighten all valve body housing screws to 4 Nm (35 in. lbs.) torque after tube and brace are installed. Tighten screws in diagonal pattern starting at center and working outward. 3-4 ACCUMULATOR Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 7782 1. Position converter clutch valve (4) and 3-4 shift valve (3) springs in housing. 2. Loosely attach accumulator housing (2) with right-side screw (1). Install only one screw at this time as accumulator must be free to pivot upward for ease of installation. 3. Install 3-4 shift valve and spring (3). 4. Position plug (2) on end of converter clutch valve spring. Then compress and hold springs and plug in place with fingers of one hand. 5. Swing accumulator housing upward over valve springs and plug. 6. Hold accumulator housing firmly in place and install remaining two attaching screws. Be sure springs and clutch valve plug are properly seated. Tighten screws to 4 Nm (35 in. lbs.). VALVE BODY FINAL 1. Insert manual lever detent spring in upper housing. 2. Position detent ball on end of spring. Then hold detent ball and spring in detent housing with Retainer Tool 6583 (1). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 7783 3. Install throttle lever (1) in upper housing. Then install manual lever (2) over throttle lever and start manual lever into housing. 4. Align manual lever with detent ball and manual valve (3). Hold throttle lever upward. Then press down on manual lever until fully seated. Remove detent ball retainer tool after lever is seated. 5. Then install manual lever seal, washer and E-clip. 6. Verify that throttle lever is aligned with end of kickdown valve (4) stem and that manual lever arm is engaged in manual valve. 7. Lubricate solenoid case connector (1) O-rings and shaft of manual lever with light coat of petroleum jelly. 8. Attach solenoid case connector to 3-4 accumulator with shoulder-type screw. Connector has small locating tang that fits in dimple at top of accumulator housing (2). Seat tang in dimple before tightening connector screw. 9. Install solenoid assembly and gasket. Tighten solenoid attaching screws to 8 Nm (72 in. lbs.) torque. 10. Verify that solenoid wire harness is properly routed. Solenoid harness must be clear of manual lever and park rod and not be pinched between accumulator housing and cover. 11. Position line pressure adjusting screw in adjusting screw bracket. 12. Install switch valve spring on tang at end of adjusting screw bracket. 13. Position adjusting screw bracket on valve body. Align valve springs and press bracket into place. Install short, upper bracket screws first and long bottom screw last. Verify that valve springs and bracket are properly aligned. Then tighten all three bracket screws to 4 Nm (35 in. lbs.) torque. 14. Perform Line Pressure and Throttle Pressure adjustments. See: Adjustments/Valve Body GOVERNOR BODY, SENSOR AND SOLENOID Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 7784 1. Turn valve body assembly over so accumulator side of transfer plate is facing down. 2. Install new O-rings on governor pressure solenoid and sensor. 3. Lubricate solenoid and sensor O-rings with clean transmission fluid. 4. Install governor pressure sensor in governor body. 5. Install governor pressure solenoid in governor body. Push solenoid in until it snaps into place in body. 6. Position governor body gasket on transfer plate. 7. Install retainer plate on governor body and around solenoid. Be sure solenoid connector is positioned in retainer cutout. 8. Align screw holes in governor body and transfer plate. Then install and tighten governor body screws to 4 Nm (35 in. lbs.) torque. 9. Connect harness wires to governor pressure solenoid and governor pressure sensor. 10. Install fluid filter and pan. 11. Lower vehicle. 12. Fill transmission with recommended fluid and road test vehicle to verify repair. Disassembly DISASSEMBLY 1. Remove all the bolts holding the on/off solenoids in place. 2. Remove all the on/off solenoids. 3. Remove the bolts holding the linear solenoid bracket in place and remove solenoid bracket. 4. Remove all the linear solenoids. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 7785 VALVE BODY PRESSURE SENSOR 5. Remove all the pressure sensors from the lower valve body. SEPARATOR PLATE 6. Remove all the bolts connecting the lower valve body to the upper valve body. 7. Disassemble the lower valve body and separator plate from the upper valve body. 8. Remove the separator plate (1). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 7786 UPPER VALVE BODY PRESSURE SENSOR 9. Remove the upper valve body pressure sensors (1). CHECK BALLS 10. Remove all the check balls (1). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 7787 CHECK VALVES 11. Remove all check valves. VALVES 12. Remove all valves (1). Assembly ASSEMBLY NOTE: Apply petroleum grease to all slide portions, rolling contacts surfaces, thrust surfaces etc. to prevent burnout during initial operation. Lubricate O-rings and O-ring seals with MOPAR(R) AS68RC ATF. Soak all friction disks in MOPAR(R) AS68RC ATF for at least two hours before assembly of clutch packs. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 7788 VALVES 1. Install all the valves (1). CHECK VALVES 2. Install all the check valves (1). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 7789 CHECK BALLS 3. Install all the check balls (1). VALVE BODY PRESSURE SENSOR 4. Install the oil pressure switches onto the upper valve body. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 7790 UPPER VALVE BODY PRESSURE SENSOR 5. Tighten the oil pressure switches (1) to 4.4 Nm (38 in lbs.). SEPARATOR PLATE 6. Install the separator plate onto the lower valve body. 7. Install the separator plate (1) bolts and tighten bolts in a crisscross manner to 10 Nm (88 in. lbs.). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 7791 SWITCHES AND SOLENOIDS NOTE: Tighten all bolts in order specified. 8. Install the upper valve body onto the lower valve body. 9. Install the valve body bolts and tighten in a crisscross manner to 5.5 Nm ( 49 in.lbs.). 10. Install oil pressure switch (7) and (8) in the correct positions. 11. Tighten oil pressure switch (7) to 4.4 Nm (39 in.lbs.). 12. Tighten oil pressure switch (8) to 8.5 Nm (75 in.lbs.). 13. Install temperature sensor (11). 14. Install temperature sensor jumper harness (12) onto temperature sensor (11) and secure to valve body. 15. Lubricate o-rings (if equipped) with MOPAR(R) AS68RC ATF and install on/off solenoids (4). 16. Install on/off solenoid bolts (2) and (3). 17. Tighten bolts (2) to 5.5 Nm (49 in.lbs.) and (3) to 10 Nm ( 88 in.lbs.). 18. Lubricate o-rings with MOPAR(R) AS68RC ATF and install linear solenoids (9). 19. Install linear solenoid bracket (10). 20. Install linear solenoid bracket bolts (5) and (6). 21. Tighten linear solenoid bracket bolt (5) to 10 Nm (88 in.lbs.). 22. Tighten linear solenoid bracket bolt (6) to 10 Nm (88 in.lbs.). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 7792 UPPER VALVE BODY HARNESS NOTE: When installing the jumper harness, fix the harness portion that is protected with the clamp. 23. Install the jumper harness (5) into the clamp (4). NOTE: Install the oil pressure switch connector (2) so that the orientation of the connector will be in a range of 0-90 degrees downward. 24. Connect the green wire of the jumper harness to the oil pressure switch (2). NOTE: Install the oil pressure switch connector (3) so that the orientation of the connector will be in a range of 0-45 degrees downward. 25. Connect the orange wire of the jumper harness to the oil pressure switch (3). Disassembly DISASSEMBLY NOTE: If the valve body is being reconditioned or replaced, it is necessary to perform the Quick Learn Procedure using the scan tool See: Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Transmission Control Module/TCM Quick Learn Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 7793 1. Remove the electrical connectors from the pressure control solenoid (1) and the line pressure sensor (2). 2. Remove the screws (6) holding the pressure control solenoid (1) and line pressure sensor (2) to the valve body. 3. Remove the pressure control solenoid and line pressure sensor from the valve body. 4. Remove the shoulder screw (3) holding the variable line pressure header (4) to the valve body. 5. Remove the variable line pressure header from the manual shaft (5). 6. Remove manual shaft seal. 7. Remove manual shaft screw (1). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 7794 8. Remove Transmission Range Sensor (TRS) (1) and manual shaft (2). 9. Remove Solenoid/Pressure Switch Assembly (1) from valve body. 10. Remove valve body stiffener plate (1). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 7795 11. Invert valve body assembly and remove transfer plate-to-valve body screws (1). 12. Remove transfer/separator plate (1) from valve body (2). 13. Remove separator plate-to-transfer plate screws (2). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 7796 14. Remove separator plate (1) from transfer plate (2). 15. Remove the oil screen (1) from the transfer plate. 16. Remove thermal valve (1) from transfer plate. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 7797 Ball Check Location 17. Remove valve body check balls (1-4). Note their location for assembly ease. 18. Remove 2/4 accumulator assembly (1-5). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 7798 19. Remove dual retainer plate (2) from valve body. Use Remover/Installer 6301 (1) to remove plate (2). 20. Remove regulator valve spring retainer (2). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 7799 21. Remove remaining retainers (1, 2). Valve Body Assembly 22. Remove all valves and springs. 23. Cleanliness through entire disassembly and assembly of the valve body cannot be overemphasized. When disassembling, each part should be washed in a suitable solvent, then dried by compressed air. Do not wipe parts with shop towels. All mating surfaces in the valve body are accurately machined; therefore, careful handling of all parts must be exercised to avoid nicks or burrs. Assembly Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 7800 ASSEMBLY NOTE: If the valve body assembly is being reconditioned or replaced, it is necessary to perform the Quick Learn Procedure using the scan tool. See: Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Transmission Control Module/TCM Quick Learn Valve Body Assembly 1. Install all valves and springs as shown. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 7801 2. Using Remover / Installer l regulator valve spring retainer (2). 3. Install dual retainer plate (2) using Remover/Installer 6301 (1). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 7802 4. Verify that all retainers (1, 2) are installed as shown. Retainers should be flush or below valve body surface. 5. Install 2/4 Accumulator components (1-5) as shown. Torque 2/4 Accumulator retainer plate to 5 Nm (45 in. lbs.). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 7803 Ball Check Location 6. Install check balls into position as shown. If necessary, secure them with petrolatum or transmission assembly gel for assembly ease. 7. Install thermal valve (1) to the transfer plate. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 7804 8. Install the oil screen (1) to the transfer plate. 9. Install separator plate (1) to transfer plate (2). 10. Install the two separator plate-to-transfer plate screws (2). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 7805 11. Install the transfer plate (1) to the valve body (2). 12. Install the transfer plate-to-valve body screws (1) and torque to 5 Nm (45 in. lbs.). 13. Install the stiffener plate (1). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 7806 14. Install the solenoid/pressure switch assembly (1) and screws to the transfer plate and torque to 5.5 Nm (50 in. lbs.). 15. Install the manual shaft/rooster comb (3) and transmission range sensor (1) to the valve body. 16. Install the TRS/manual shaft retaining screw (1) and torque to 5 Nm (45 in. lbs.). 17. Install manual shaft seal. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 7807 18. Install the variable line pressure header onto the manual shaft (5). 19. Install the shoulder screw (3) to hold the variable line pressure header (4) to the valve body. 20. Install the pressure control solenoid and line pressure sensor into the valve body. 21. Install the screws (6) to hold the pressure control solenoid (1) and line pressure sensor (2) to the valve body. 22. Install the electrical connectors to the pressure control solenoid (1) and the line pressure sensor (2). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Clutch Disc, M/T > Component Information > Adjustments Clutch Disc: Adjustments PRESSURE PLATE DIAPHRAGM SPRINGS NOTE:Perform the following procedure, when replacing only the clutch disc on Diesel vehicles with Dual Mass Flywheel and self- adjusting pressure plate. The pressure plate must be reset before installing a new disc. 1. Support pressure plate flange with press blocks (3) on a press. 2. Center press ram (2) on the pressure plate diaphragm spring fingers (1). 3. Compress the diaphragm spring fingers (1), until tension is released from the stepped adjusting ring. 4. Place two screwdrivers against two of the three stepped adjusting ring (1) tension spring stops, just ahead of the adjusting ring tension springs on the pressure plate (2). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Clutch Disc, M/T > Component Information > Adjustments > Page 7812 5. Rotate stepped adjusting ring (1) on the pressure plate (2) counterclockwise until the coil springs are fully compressed. Then hold adjusting ring while releasing the press pressure. 6. Remove the screwdrivers. The pressure plate is know adjusted for a new clutch disc. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Clutch Disc, M/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Clutch Disc: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL 1. Support engine with wood block and adjustable jack stand, to prevent strain on engine mounts. 2. Remove transmission and transfer case, if equipped. 3. If pressure plate (3) will be reused, mark (2) the position on flywheel (1) with paint or scriber. Also note location marks on the pressure next to the bolt holes. The mark will be a L or a circle with an X in it. 4. Insert clutch alignment tool (3) through pressure plate (2) and into pilot bushing, to hold disc in place while removing bolts. 5. Loosen pressure plate bolts evenly, a few threads at a time and in a diagonal pattern to prevent warping the plate. 6. Remove bolts completely and remove pressure plate, disc and alignment tool. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Clutch Disc, M/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 7815 Clutch Disc: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION CAUTION: Before installing a clutch disc on the Diesel engine with Dual Mass Flywheel and self-adjusting pressure plate, the pressure plate must be reset. Refer to clutch disc adjustment for procedure. Failure to reset the pressure will result in damage to the clutch disc. 1. Check runout and free operation of new clutch disc. 2. Lubricate crankshaft pilot bearing with a NLGI - 2 rated grease. 3. Install clutch alignment tool in clutch disc hub with the raised side of hub is facing away from the flywheel. NOTE: Flywheel side is imprinted on the disc face. 4. Install alignment tool (3) in pilot bearing and position disc on the flywheel (1). 5. Position pressure plate over disc (2) and onto the flywheel. NOTE: Over the wear life of a clutch disc the pressure plate will loose some of it's clamp load. It is recommended when replacing a worn clutch, the pressure plate is replaced at the same time. 6. Align and hold pressure plate in position and install bolts finger tight. 7. Tighten bolts evenly and a few threads at a time in a diagonal pattern. CAUTION: Bolts must be tightened evenly and to specified torque to avoid warping pressure plate cover. 8. Tighten pressure plate bolts to: - V6 & V8 Engines - 50 Nm (37 ft. lbs.) - Diesel Engines - 30 Nm (22 ft. lbs.) Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Clutch Disc, M/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 7816 9. Remove release lever (3) and release bearing from clutch housing (1). Apply Mopar(TM) high temperature bearing grease to bore (4) of release bearing, release lever (5) contact surfaces and release lever pivot stud (2). 10. Apply light coat of Mopar(TM) high temperature bearing grease to splines (3) of transmission input shaft (1) and to release bearing slide surface of the transmission front bearing retainer (2). CAUTION: Do not over lubricate shaft splines. This can result in grease contamination of the disc. 11. Wipe pilot bearing surface clean. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Clutch Disc, M/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 7817 12. Install release lever and bearing in clutch housing. Verify spring clips (2) that retain lever on pivot ball (4) and release bearing (3) are installed properly. NOTE: If release lever is installed correctly, the lever part number will be toward the bottom of the transmission and right side up. There is also a stamped "I" in the lever which goes to the pivot ball side of the transmission. 13. Install transmission and transfer case if equipped. 14. Check fluid level in clutch master cylinder and depress clutch pedal several time. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Clutch Hydraulic System > Clutch Fluid > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Maintenance - Fluid Flushing Information Clutch Fluid: Technical Service Bulletins Maintenance - Fluid Flushing Information NUMBER: 26-001-09 GROUP: Miscellaneous DATE: September 24, 2009 THIS BULLETIN SUPERSEDES TECHNICAL SERVICE BULLETIN 26-003-07, DATED MARCH 30, 2007, WHICH SHOULD BE REMOVED FROM YOUR FILES. THIS IS A COMPLETE REVISION AND NO ASTERISKS HAVE BEEN USED TO HIGHLIGHT REVISIONS. SUBJECT: Fluid Flushing Requirements MODELS: 2005 - 2008 (CS) Pacifica 2006 - 2009 (D1) Ram Truck (3500 Pick Up) 2010 (D2) Ram Truck (3500 Pick Up) 2007 - 2010 (DC) Ram Truck (3500 Chassis Cab) 2005 - 2009 (DH) Ram Truck (1500/2500 Pick Up) 2010 (DJ) Ram Truck (2500 Pick Up) 2005 - 2008 (DR) Ram Truck (1500/2500 Pick Up) 2009 - 2010 (DS) Ram Truck (1500) 2005 - 2009 (HB) Durango 2007 - 2009 (HG) Aspen 2009 - 2010 (JC) Journey 2007 - 2010 (JK) Wrangler 2005 - 2006 (JR) Sebring Sedan & Convertible/Stratus Sedan 2007 - 2010 (JS) Avenger/Sebring 2008 - 2010 (KK) Liberty 2007 - 2010 (KA) Nitro 2005 - 2007 (KJ) Liberty 2009 - 2010 (LC) Challenger 2005 - 2010 (LE) 300C/300C Touring (International Markets) 2005 - 2010 (LX) 300/Magnum/Charger 2007 - 2010 (MK) Compass/Patriot 2005 - 2010 (ND) Dakota 2005 - 2006 (PL) Neon 2007 - 2010 (PM) Caliber 2005 - 2010 (PT) Chrysler PT Cruiser Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Clutch Hydraulic System > Clutch Fluid > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Maintenance - Fluid Flushing Information > Page 7823 2005 - 2007 (RG) Chrysler Voyager (International Markets) 2005 - 2007 (RS) Town & Country/Caravan/Voyager 2009 - 2010 (RT) Town & Country/Grand Caravan 2005 - 2006 (TJ) Wrangler 2005 - 2006 (VA) Sprinter 2007 - 2010 (VB) Sprinter 2005 - 2010 (WH) Grand Cherokee (International Markets) 2005 - 2010 (WK) Grand Cherokee 2006 - 2010 (XH) Commander (International Markets) 2006 - 2010 (XK) Commander 2005 - 2010 (ZB) Viper 2005 - 2007 (ZH) Crossfire DISCUSSION: Chrysler Group vehicle fluid systems do NOT require regular flushing. These systems include: engine oil, transmission oil, axle lube, brake fluid, power steering fluid, and refrigerant. The only exception to this requirement are published in the vehicle maintenance schedules, e.g. engine coolant. Exceptions to this recommendation include only those instances where a failure has occurred and/or the system has become compromised, contaminated or overheated beyond the normal operating range. Chrysler Group does NOT recommend aftermarket chemicals to flush the engine, transmission, brake or steering systems. Chemicals contained in these products can damage the system elastomeric components, and contaminate the component fluid, leading to loss of system/component durability and service life. When necessary, only the original approved system fluid should be used to flush these components using teamPSE(R) approved equipment. If the engine coolant contains a considerable amount of sediment, clean and flush with Mopar Cooling System Flush, p/n 04856977, or equivalent. Follow with a thorough rinsing to remove all deposits and chemicals. Refill with a minimum of a 50% mixture of the specified coolant and distilled water. POLICY: Information Only Disclaimer: This bulletin is supplied as technical information only and is not an authorization for repair. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Clutch Hydraulic System > Clutch Fluid > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 7824 Clutch Fluid: Specifications Chrysler does not provide a fluid type specification for the master/slave cylinder. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Clutch Pedal Position Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection Clutch Pedal Position Sensor / Switch: Testing and Inspection SWITCH-CLUTCH PEDAL POSITION 1. Disconnect switch 2-wire connector (2) attached to pedal support bracket (1), under instrument panel to left of clutch pedal. 2. Check switch continuity with an ohmmeter while operating clutch pedal. - Pedal Depressed - Continuity - Pedal Released - No Continuity 3. If continuity is not present or always present, replace clutch master cylinder. Switch is not serviced separately. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Clutch Switch > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 472 Clutch Switch: Locations Component ID 472 Component ID: 472 Component : SWITCH-CLUTCH INTERLOCK Connector: Name : SWITCH-CLUTCH INTERLOCK Color : GREEN # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (M/T) Pin Circuit Description 1 T41 20YL/DB TRS T41 SIGNAL (P/N) 2 Z911 20BK GROUND Component Location - 31 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Clutch Switch > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 472 > Page 7832 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Clutch Switch > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 472 > Page 7833 Clutch Switch: Locations Component ID 482 Component ID: 482 Component : SWITCH-CLUTCH INTERLOCK Connector: Name : SWITCH-CLUTCH INTERLOCK Color : GREEN # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (M/T) Pin Circuit Description 1 T41 20YL/DB TRS T41 SIGNAL (P/N) 2 Z911 20BK GROUND Component Location - 31 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Clutch Switch > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 472 > Page 7834 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Clutch Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Component ID 472 Clutch Switch: Diagrams Component ID 472 Component ID: 472 Component : SWITCH-CLUTCH INTERLOCK Connector: Name : SWITCH-CLUTCH INTERLOCK Color : GREEN # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (M/T) Pin Circuit Description 1 T41 20YL/DB TRS T41 SIGNAL (P/N) 2 Z911 20BK GROUND Component Location - 31 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Clutch Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Component ID 472 > Page 7837 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Clutch Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Component ID 472 > Page 7838 Clutch Switch: Diagrams Component ID 482 Component ID: 482 Component : SWITCH-CLUTCH INTERLOCK Connector: Name : SWITCH-CLUTCH INTERLOCK Color : GREEN # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (M/T) Pin Circuit Description 1 T41 20YL/DB TRS T41 SIGNAL (P/N) 2 Z911 20BK GROUND Component Location - 31 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Clutch Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Component ID 472 > Page 7839 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Clutch Release Bearing, M/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Clutch Release Bearing: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL 1. Remove transmission and transfer case, if equipped. 2. Remove spring clip (6). 3. Disconnect release bearing (4) from release lever (3) and remove bearing. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Clutch Release Bearing, M/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 7844 Clutch Release Bearing: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION 1. Inspect bearing slide surface on transmission front bearing retainer. Replace retainer if slide surface is scored, worn, or cracked. 2. Inspect release lever (2) and pivot stud (1). Verify stud is secure and in good condition and lever is not distorted or worn. Replace fork spring clips if bent or damaged. 3. Lubricate input shaft splines, bearing retainer slide surface, pivot stud (1) and release lever pivot surface with Mopar(TM) high temperature bearing grease. 4. Install release fork and release bearing. Verify fork and bearing are properly secured by spring clips and release lever is installed properly. Rear side of release lever has one end with a raised area, which goes toward the slave cylinder side of the transmission. 5. Install transmission and transfer case. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Clutch Release Fork, M/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Clutch Release Fork: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL CAUTION: The hydraulic linkage has a quick disconnect at the slave cylinder. This fitting should never be disconnected or tampered with. Once the hydraulic line is connected to the slave cylinder, it should never be disconnected. 1. Raise and support vehicle. 2. Remove heat shield over hydraulic line. 3. Remove slave cylinder (2) nuts (1) on clutch housing. 4. Remove slave cylinder from clutch housing. 5. Remove plastic clip securing the hydraulic line to the dash panel from the lower dash panel flange. 6. Remove plastic clip securing hydraulic line to the dash panel from the upper dash panel stud. 7. Lower vehicle. 8. Disconnect clutch pedal interlock switch connector (2). 9. Remove clutch master cylinder (1) rod pin (3). 10. Ensure cap on clutch cylinder reservoir is tight. 11. Remove clutch master cylinder nuts holding cylinder to the dash panel. 12. Remove clutch cylinders, reservoir and connecting lines from vehicle. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Clutch Release Fork, M/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 7849 Clutch Release Fork: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION 1. Position cylinders and connecting line in vehicle engine compartment. Position clutch hydraulic line against the dash panel and behind all engine hoses and wiring. 2. Apply a light coating of grease to the inside diameter of the master cylinder push rod eye. 3. Install clutch master cylinder (1) on dash panel and tighten clutch master cylinder nuts to 28 Nm (21 ft. lbs.). 4. Install clutch master cylinder push rod pin (3). 5. Connect clutch pedal position interlock switch connector (2). 6. Install plastic clip securing hydraulic line to the dash panel into the lower dash panel flange. 7. Install plastic clip securing hydraulic line to the dash panel onto the upper dash panel stud. 8. Raise vehicle. 9. Install slave cylinder (2) and verify cylinder rod is properly seated in release lever. 10. Install and tighten slave cylinder nuts (1) to 23 Nm (17 ft. lbs.). 11. If new clutch linkage is being installed, connect the clutch hydraulic line to the clutch slave cylinder. CAUTION: Once the clutch hydraulic line is connected to the slave cylinder, it should never be disconnected. 12. Install heat shield over hydraulic line. 13. Operate linkage several times to verify proper operation. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Pilot Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Pilot Bearing: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL 1. Remove transmission assembly from the vehicle. 2. Remove pressure plate (2) and clutch disc. 3. Remove pilot bearing with an internal puller and slide hammer to remove. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Pilot Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 7854 Pilot Bearing: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION 1. Clean bearing bore with solvent and wipe dry with shop towel. 2. Install new bearing (1) with clutch alignment tool (2) and letter side of the bearing (3) facing the transmission. Bearing should be flush with edge of bearing bore. CAUTION: Do not allow bearing to become cocked and do not recess bearing. 3. Install clutch disc, pressure plate and transmission. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Pressure Plate > Component Information > Specifications Pressure Plate: Specifications INSTALLATION CAUTION: Before installing a clutch disc on the Diesel engine with Dual Mass Flywheel and self-adjusting pressure plate, the pressure plate must be reset. Refer to clutch disc adjustment for procedure. Failure to reset the pressure will result in damage to the clutch disc. 1. Check runout and free operation of new clutch disc. 2. Lubricate crankshaft pilot bearing with a NLGI - 2 rated grease. 3. Install clutch alignment tool in clutch disc hub with the raised side of hub is facing away from the flywheel. NOTE: Flywheel side is imprinted on the disc face. 4. Install alignment tool (3) in pilot bearing and position disc on the flywheel (1). 5. Position pressure plate over disc (2) and onto the flywheel. NOTE: Over the wear life of a clutch disc the pressure plate will loose some of it's clamp load. It is recommended when replacing a worn clutch, the pressure plate is replaced at the same time. 6. Align and hold pressure plate in position and install bolts finger tight. 7. Tighten bolts evenly and a few threads at a time in a diagonal pattern. CAUTION: Bolts must be tightened evenly and to specified torque to avoid warping pressure plate cover. 8. Tighten pressure plate bolts to: - V6 & V8 Engines - 50 Nm (37 ft. lbs.) - Diesel Engines - 30 Nm (22 ft. lbs.) Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Pressure Plate > Component Information > Specifications > Page 7858 9. Remove release lever (3) and release bearing from clutch housing (1). Apply Mopar(TM) high temperature bearing grease to bore (4) of release bearing, release lever (5) contact surfaces and release lever pivot stud (2). 10. Apply light coat of Mopar(TM) high temperature bearing grease to splines (3) of transmission input shaft (1) and to release bearing slide surface of the transmission front bearing retainer (2). CAUTION: Do not over lubricate shaft splines. This can result in grease contamination of the disc. 11. Wipe pilot bearing surface clean. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Pressure Plate > Component Information > Specifications > Page 7859 12. Install release lever and bearing in clutch housing. Verify spring clips (2) that retain lever on pivot ball (4) and release bearing (3) are installed properly. NOTE: If release lever is installed correctly, the lever part number will be toward the bottom of the transmission and right side up. There is also a stamped "I" in the lever which goes to the pivot ball side of the transmission. 13. Install transmission and transfer case if equipped. 14. Check fluid level in clutch master cylinder and depress clutch pedal several time. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT > Differential, CVT > Differential Fluid - CVT > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Maintenance - Fluid Flushing Information Differential Fluid - CVT: Technical Service Bulletins Maintenance - Fluid Flushing Information NUMBER: 26-001-09 GROUP: Miscellaneous DATE: September 24, 2009 THIS BULLETIN SUPERSEDES TECHNICAL SERVICE BULLETIN 26-003-07, DATED MARCH 30, 2007, WHICH SHOULD BE REMOVED FROM YOUR FILES. THIS IS A COMPLETE REVISION AND NO ASTERISKS HAVE BEEN USED TO HIGHLIGHT REVISIONS. SUBJECT: Fluid Flushing Requirements MODELS: 2005 - 2008 (CS) Pacifica 2006 - 2009 (D1) Ram Truck (3500 Pick Up) 2010 (D2) Ram Truck (3500 Pick Up) 2007 - 2010 (DC) Ram Truck (3500 Chassis Cab) 2005 - 2009 (DH) Ram Truck (1500/2500 Pick Up) 2010 (DJ) Ram Truck (2500 Pick Up) 2005 - 2008 (DR) Ram Truck (1500/2500 Pick Up) 2009 - 2010 (DS) Ram Truck (1500) 2005 - 2009 (HB) Durango 2007 - 2009 (HG) Aspen 2009 - 2010 (JC) Journey 2007 - 2010 (JK) Wrangler 2005 - 2006 (JR) Sebring Sedan & Convertible/Stratus Sedan 2007 - 2010 (JS) Avenger/Sebring 2008 - 2010 (KK) Liberty 2007 - 2010 (KA) Nitro 2005 - 2007 (KJ) Liberty 2009 - 2010 (LC) Challenger 2005 - 2010 (LE) 300C/300C Touring (International Markets) 2005 - 2010 (LX) 300/Magnum/Charger 2007 - 2010 (MK) Compass/Patriot 2005 - 2010 (ND) Dakota 2005 - 2006 (PL) Neon 2007 - 2010 (PM) Caliber 2005 - 2010 (PT) Chrysler PT Cruiser Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT > Differential, CVT > Differential Fluid - CVT > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Maintenance - Fluid Flushing Information > Page 7866 2005 - 2007 (RG) Chrysler Voyager (International Markets) 2005 - 2007 (RS) Town & Country/Caravan/Voyager 2009 - 2010 (RT) Town & Country/Grand Caravan 2005 - 2006 (TJ) Wrangler 2005 - 2006 (VA) Sprinter 2007 - 2010 (VB) Sprinter 2005 - 2010 (WH) Grand Cherokee (International Markets) 2005 - 2010 (WK) Grand Cherokee 2006 - 2010 (XH) Commander (International Markets) 2006 - 2010 (XK) Commander 2005 - 2010 (ZB) Viper 2005 - 2007 (ZH) Crossfire DISCUSSION: Chrysler Group vehicle fluid systems do NOT require regular flushing. These systems include: engine oil, transmission oil, axle lube, brake fluid, power steering fluid, and refrigerant. The only exception to this requirement are published in the vehicle maintenance schedules, e.g. engine coolant. Exceptions to this recommendation include only those instances where a failure has occurred and/or the system has become compromised, contaminated or overheated beyond the normal operating range. Chrysler Group does NOT recommend aftermarket chemicals to flush the engine, transmission, brake or steering systems. Chemicals contained in these products can damage the system elastomeric components, and contaminate the component fluid, leading to loss of system/component durability and service life. When necessary, only the original approved system fluid should be used to flush these components using teamPSE(R) approved equipment. If the engine coolant contains a considerable amount of sediment, clean and flush with Mopar Cooling System Flush, p/n 04856977, or equivalent. Follow with a thorough rinsing to remove all deposits and chemicals. Refill with a minimum of a 50% mixture of the specified coolant and distilled water. POLICY: Information Only Disclaimer: This bulletin is supplied as technical information only and is not an authorization for repair. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT > Fluid CVT > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Maintenance - Fluid Flushing Information Fluid - CVT: Technical Service Bulletins Maintenance - Fluid Flushing Information NUMBER: 26-001-09 GROUP: Miscellaneous DATE: September 24, 2009 THIS BULLETIN SUPERSEDES TECHNICAL SERVICE BULLETIN 26-003-07, DATED MARCH 30, 2007, WHICH SHOULD BE REMOVED FROM YOUR FILES. THIS IS A COMPLETE REVISION AND NO ASTERISKS HAVE BEEN USED TO HIGHLIGHT REVISIONS. SUBJECT: Fluid Flushing Requirements MODELS: 2005 - 2008 (CS) Pacifica 2006 - 2009 (D1) Ram Truck (3500 Pick Up) 2010 (D2) Ram Truck (3500 Pick Up) 2007 - 2010 (DC) Ram Truck (3500 Chassis Cab) 2005 - 2009 (DH) Ram Truck (1500/2500 Pick Up) 2010 (DJ) Ram Truck (2500 Pick Up) 2005 - 2008 (DR) Ram Truck (1500/2500 Pick Up) 2009 - 2010 (DS) Ram Truck (1500) 2005 - 2009 (HB) Durango 2007 - 2009 (HG) Aspen 2009 - 2010 (JC) Journey 2007 - 2010 (JK) Wrangler 2005 - 2006 (JR) Sebring Sedan & Convertible/Stratus Sedan 2007 - 2010 (JS) Avenger/Sebring 2008 - 2010 (KK) Liberty 2007 - 2010 (KA) Nitro 2005 - 2007 (KJ) Liberty 2009 - 2010 (LC) Challenger 2005 - 2010 (LE) 300C/300C Touring (International Markets) 2005 - 2010 (LX) 300/Magnum/Charger 2007 - 2010 (MK) Compass/Patriot 2005 - 2010 (ND) Dakota 2005 - 2006 (PL) Neon 2007 - 2010 (PM) Caliber 2005 - 2010 (PT) Chrysler PT Cruiser Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT > Fluid CVT > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Maintenance - Fluid Flushing Information > Page 7871 2005 - 2007 (RG) Chrysler Voyager (International Markets) 2005 - 2007 (RS) Town & Country/Caravan/Voyager 2009 - 2010 (RT) Town & Country/Grand Caravan 2005 - 2006 (TJ) Wrangler 2005 - 2006 (VA) Sprinter 2007 - 2010 (VB) Sprinter 2005 - 2010 (WH) Grand Cherokee (International Markets) 2005 - 2010 (WK) Grand Cherokee 2006 - 2010 (XH) Commander (International Markets) 2006 - 2010 (XK) Commander 2005 - 2010 (ZB) Viper 2005 - 2007 (ZH) Crossfire DISCUSSION: Chrysler Group vehicle fluid systems do NOT require regular flushing. These systems include: engine oil, transmission oil, axle lube, brake fluid, power steering fluid, and refrigerant. The only exception to this requirement are published in the vehicle maintenance schedules, e.g. engine coolant. Exceptions to this recommendation include only those instances where a failure has occurred and/or the system has become compromised, contaminated or overheated beyond the normal operating range. Chrysler Group does NOT recommend aftermarket chemicals to flush the engine, transmission, brake or steering systems. Chemicals contained in these products can damage the system elastomeric components, and contaminate the component fluid, leading to loss of system/component durability and service life. When necessary, only the original approved system fluid should be used to flush these components using teamPSE(R) approved equipment. If the engine coolant contains a considerable amount of sediment, clean and flush with Mopar Cooling System Flush, p/n 04856977, or equivalent. Follow with a thorough rinsing to remove all deposits and chemicals. Refill with a minimum of a 50% mixture of the specified coolant and distilled water. POLICY: Information Only Disclaimer: This bulletin is supplied as technical information only and is not an authorization for repair. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Differential Assembly > Actuators and Solenoids - Differential > Actuator, Differential Lock > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Actuator: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL 1. Remove actuator wiring connector. 2. Remove actuator (1) bolts (2). 3. Remove actuator (1) from disconnect pocket (2). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Differential Assembly > Actuators and Solenoids - Differential > Actuator, Differential Lock > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 7878 Actuator: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION 1. Clean actuator (1) sealing surface and install new gasket (2) if necessary. 2. Align actuator shift fork (1) with disconnect collar (2) and install actuator on disconnect pocket. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Differential Assembly > Actuators and Solenoids - Differential > Actuator, Differential Lock > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 7879 3. Install actuator (1) bolts (2) and tighten to 27 Nm (20 ft. lbs.). 4. Install disconnect actuator wiring connector. 5. Verify differential fluid level and add fluid if necessary. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Differential Assembly > Actuators and Solenoids - Differential > Solenoid, Differential Lock > Component Information > Locations > Module-Axle Disconnect-Front Solenoid: Locations Module-Axle Disconnect-Front Component ID: 202 Component : MODULE-AXLE DISCONNECT-FRONT Connector: Name : MODULE-AXLE DISCONNECT-FRONT Color : DK. GRAY # of pins : 4 Qualifier : (LD 4WD) Pin Circuit Description 1 Z906 20BK GROUND 2 G304 20VT/DB FRONT AXLE LOCK CONTROL 3 A880 20DB/RD FUSED B(+) 4 G303 20VT/DG FRONT AXLE LOCK SIGNAL Component Location - 35 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Differential Assembly > Actuators and Solenoids - Differential > Solenoid, Differential Lock > Component Information > Locations > Module-Axle Disconnect-Front > Page 7884 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Differential Assembly > Actuators and Solenoids - Differential > Solenoid, Differential Lock > Component Information > Locations > Module-Axle Disconnect-Front > Page 7885 Solenoid: Locations Solenoid-Locker-Front Component ID: 457 Component : SOLENOID-LOCKER-FRONT Connector: Name : SOLENOID-LOCKER-FRONT Color : BLACK # of pins : 4 Qualifier : (POWER WAGON) Pin Circuit Description 1 T520 16YL/OR FRONT LOCKER SOURCE 2 T521 18YL/BK LOCKER SENSOR SUPPLY 3 T522 18YL/LB FRONT LOCKER SENSOR SENSE 4 T524 16YL/LG FRONT LOCKER RETURN Component Location - 36 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Differential Assembly > Actuators and Solenoids - Differential > Solenoid, Differential Lock > Component Information > Locations > Module-Axle Disconnect-Front > Page 7886 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Differential Assembly > Actuators and Solenoids - Differential > Solenoid, Differential Lock > Component Information > Locations > Module-Axle Disconnect-Front > Page 7887 Solenoid: Locations Solenoid-Locker-Rear Component ID: 458 Component : SOLENOID-LOCKER-REAR Connector: Name : SOLENOID-LOCKER-REAR Color : BLACK # of pins : 4 Qualifier : (POWER WAGON) Pin Circuit Description 1 T526 16YL/WT REAR LOCKER SOURCE 2 T523 18YL/BK LOCKER SENSOR SUPPLY 3 T527 18YL/TN REAR LOCKER SENSOR SENSE 4 T528 16YL/GY REAR LOCKER RETURN Component Location - 70 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Differential Assembly > Actuators and Solenoids - Differential > Solenoid, Differential Lock > Component Information > Locations > Module-Axle Disconnect-Front > Page 7888 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Differential Assembly > Actuators and Solenoids - Differential > Solenoid, Differential Lock > Component Information > Diagrams > Module-Axle Disconnect-Front Solenoid: Diagrams Module-Axle Disconnect-Front Component ID: 202 Component : MODULE-AXLE DISCONNECT-FRONT Connector: Name : MODULE-AXLE DISCONNECT-FRONT Color : DK. GRAY # of pins : 4 Qualifier : (LD 4WD) Pin Circuit Description 1 Z906 20BK GROUND 2 G304 20VT/DB FRONT AXLE LOCK CONTROL 3 A880 20DB/RD FUSED B(+) 4 G303 20VT/DG FRONT AXLE LOCK SIGNAL Component Location - 35 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Differential Assembly > Actuators and Solenoids - Differential > Solenoid, Differential Lock > Component Information > Diagrams > Module-Axle Disconnect-Front > Page 7891 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Differential Assembly > Actuators and Solenoids - Differential > Solenoid, Differential Lock > Component Information > Diagrams > Module-Axle Disconnect-Front > Page 7892 Solenoid: Diagrams Solenoid-Locker-Front Component ID: 457 Component : SOLENOID-LOCKER-FRONT Connector: Name : SOLENOID-LOCKER-FRONT Color : BLACK # of pins : 4 Qualifier : (POWER WAGON) Pin Circuit Description 1 T520 16YL/OR FRONT LOCKER SOURCE 2 T521 18YL/BK LOCKER SENSOR SUPPLY 3 T522 18YL/LB FRONT LOCKER SENSOR SENSE 4 T524 16YL/LG FRONT LOCKER RETURN Component Location - 36 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Differential Assembly > Actuators and Solenoids - Differential > Solenoid, Differential Lock > Component Information > Diagrams > Module-Axle Disconnect-Front > Page 7893 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Differential Assembly > Actuators and Solenoids - Differential > Solenoid, Differential Lock > Component Information > Diagrams > Module-Axle Disconnect-Front > Page 7894 Solenoid: Diagrams Solenoid-Locker-Rear Component ID: 458 Component : SOLENOID-LOCKER-REAR Connector: Name : SOLENOID-LOCKER-REAR Color : BLACK # of pins : 4 Qualifier : (POWER WAGON) Pin Circuit Description 1 T526 16YL/WT REAR LOCKER SOURCE 2 T523 18YL/BK LOCKER SENSOR SUPPLY 3 T527 18YL/TN REAR LOCKER SENSOR SENSE 4 T528 16YL/GY REAR LOCKER RETURN Component Location - 70 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Differential Assembly > Actuators and Solenoids - Differential > Solenoid, Differential Lock > Component Information > Diagrams > Module-Axle Disconnect-Front > Page 7895 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Differential Assembly > Differential Cover > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Axle - C205FD Differential Cover: Service and Repair Front Axle - C205FD Removal REMOVAL 1. With vehicle in neutral, position vehicle on hoist. 2. Remove vent hose. 3. Remove differential cover (1) bolts (2). 4. Remove cover and drain lubricant. Installation INSTALLATION 1. Apply a 4 mm (0.15 in.) bead of Mopar Silicone Rubber Sealant (1) or equivalent to the cover (2). CAUTION: If housing cover is not installed within 3 to 5 minutes, the cover must be cleaned and new RTV applied. Failure to follow these instructions will result in a leak. 2. Install cover (2) and identification tag. Tighten cover bolts in a criss-cross pattern to 23 Nm (17 ft. lbs.). 3. Fill differential to specifications. 4. Install fill plug. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Differential Assembly > Differential Cover > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Axle - C205FD > Page 7900 Differential Cover: Service and Repair Front Axle - 275FBI Removal REMOVAL 1. With vehicle in neutral, position vehicle on hoist. 2. Remove differential cover (1) fill plug (2). 3. Remove differential cover (1) bolts (2). 4. Remove cover and drain lubricant. Installation INSTALLATION 1. Clean sealing surface on cover and housing. 2. Apply a 4 mm (0.15 in.) bead of Mopar AXLE RTV (1) or equivalent to the housing. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Differential Assembly > Differential Cover > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Axle - C205FD > Page 7901 CAUTION: If housing cover is not installed within 3 to 5 minutes, the cover must be cleaned and new RTV applied. Failure to follow these instructions will result in a leak. 3. Install cover (1) and tighten bolts (2) in a criss-cross pattern to 46 Nm (34 ft. lbs.). 4. Fill differential to specifications. 5. Install cover (1) fill plug (2) and tighten to 60 Nm (44 ft. lbs.). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Differential Assembly > Differential Cover > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Axle - C205FD > Page 7902 Differential Cover: Service and Repair Rear Axle - 9 1/4 Removal REMOVAL 1. With vehicle in neutral, position vehicle on hoist. 2. Remove drain plug. 3. Remove cover bolts. 4. Remove cover and drain lubricant. Installation INSTALLATION 1. Apply a 6.35mm (1/4 in.) bead of Mopar Silicone Rubber Sealant (1) or equivalent to the cover (2). CAUTION: If housing cover is not installed within 3 to 5 minutes, the cover must be cleaned and new RTV applied. Failure to follow these instructions will result in a leak. 2. Install cover and identification tag. Tighten cover bolts in a criss-cross pattern to 41 Nm (30 ft. lbs.). 3. Fill differential with lubricant to specifications. 4. Install fill plug. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Differential Assembly > Differential Lock > Actuator, Differential Lock > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Actuator: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL 1. Remove actuator wiring connector. 2. Remove actuator (1) bolts (2). 3. Remove actuator (1) from disconnect pocket (2). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Differential Assembly > Differential Lock > Actuator, Differential Lock > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 7908 Actuator: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION 1. Clean actuator (1) sealing surface and install new gasket (2) if necessary. 2. Align actuator shift fork (1) with disconnect collar (2) and install actuator on disconnect pocket. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Differential Assembly > Differential Lock > Actuator, Differential Lock > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 7909 3. Install actuator (1) bolts (2) and tighten to 27 Nm (20 ft. lbs.). 4. Install disconnect actuator wiring connector. 5. Verify differential fluid level and add fluid if necessary. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Differential Assembly > Differential Lock > Solenoid, Differential Lock > Component Information > Locations > Module-Axle Disconnect-Front Solenoid: Locations Module-Axle Disconnect-Front Component ID: 202 Component : MODULE-AXLE DISCONNECT-FRONT Connector: Name : MODULE-AXLE DISCONNECT-FRONT Color : DK. GRAY # of pins : 4 Qualifier : (LD 4WD) Pin Circuit Description 1 Z906 20BK GROUND 2 G304 20VT/DB FRONT AXLE LOCK CONTROL 3 A880 20DB/RD FUSED B(+) 4 G303 20VT/DG FRONT AXLE LOCK SIGNAL Component Location - 35 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Differential Assembly > Differential Lock > Solenoid, Differential Lock > Component Information > Locations > Module-Axle Disconnect-Front > Page 7914 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Differential Assembly > Differential Lock > Solenoid, Differential Lock > Component Information > Locations > Module-Axle Disconnect-Front > Page 7915 Solenoid: Locations Solenoid-Locker-Front Component ID: 457 Component : SOLENOID-LOCKER-FRONT Connector: Name : SOLENOID-LOCKER-FRONT Color : BLACK # of pins : 4 Qualifier : (POWER WAGON) Pin Circuit Description 1 T520 16YL/OR FRONT LOCKER SOURCE 2 T521 18YL/BK LOCKER SENSOR SUPPLY 3 T522 18YL/LB FRONT LOCKER SENSOR SENSE 4 T524 16YL/LG FRONT LOCKER RETURN Component Location - 36 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Differential Assembly > Differential Lock > Solenoid, Differential Lock > Component Information > Locations > Module-Axle Disconnect-Front > Page 7916 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Differential Assembly > Differential Lock > Solenoid, Differential Lock > Component Information > Locations > Module-Axle Disconnect-Front > Page 7917 Solenoid: Locations Solenoid-Locker-Rear Component ID: 458 Component : SOLENOID-LOCKER-REAR Connector: Name : SOLENOID-LOCKER-REAR Color : BLACK # of pins : 4 Qualifier : (POWER WAGON) Pin Circuit Description 1 T526 16YL/WT REAR LOCKER SOURCE 2 T523 18YL/BK LOCKER SENSOR SUPPLY 3 T527 18YL/TN REAR LOCKER SENSOR SENSE 4 T528 16YL/GY REAR LOCKER RETURN Component Location - 70 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Differential Assembly > Differential Lock > Solenoid, Differential Lock > Component Information > Locations > Module-Axle Disconnect-Front > Page 7918 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Differential Assembly > Differential Lock > Solenoid, Differential Lock > Component Information > Diagrams > Module-Axle Disconnect-Front Solenoid: Diagrams Module-Axle Disconnect-Front Component ID: 202 Component : MODULE-AXLE DISCONNECT-FRONT Connector: Name : MODULE-AXLE DISCONNECT-FRONT Color : DK. GRAY # of pins : 4 Qualifier : (LD 4WD) Pin Circuit Description 1 Z906 20BK GROUND 2 G304 20VT/DB FRONT AXLE LOCK CONTROL 3 A880 20DB/RD FUSED B(+) 4 G303 20VT/DG FRONT AXLE LOCK SIGNAL Component Location - 35 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Differential Assembly > Differential Lock > Solenoid, Differential Lock > Component Information > Diagrams > Module-Axle Disconnect-Front > Page 7921 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Differential Assembly > Differential Lock > Solenoid, Differential Lock > Component Information > Diagrams > Module-Axle Disconnect-Front > Page 7922 Solenoid: Diagrams Solenoid-Locker-Front Component ID: 457 Component : SOLENOID-LOCKER-FRONT Connector: Name : SOLENOID-LOCKER-FRONT Color : BLACK # of pins : 4 Qualifier : (POWER WAGON) Pin Circuit Description 1 T520 16YL/OR FRONT LOCKER SOURCE 2 T521 18YL/BK LOCKER SENSOR SUPPLY 3 T522 18YL/LB FRONT LOCKER SENSOR SENSE 4 T524 16YL/LG FRONT LOCKER RETURN Component Location - 36 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Differential Assembly > Differential Lock > Solenoid, Differential Lock > Component Information > Diagrams > Module-Axle Disconnect-Front > Page 7923 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Differential Assembly > Differential Lock > Solenoid, Differential Lock > Component Information > Diagrams > Module-Axle Disconnect-Front > Page 7924 Solenoid: Diagrams Solenoid-Locker-Rear Component ID: 458 Component : SOLENOID-LOCKER-REAR Connector: Name : SOLENOID-LOCKER-REAR Color : BLACK # of pins : 4 Qualifier : (POWER WAGON) Pin Circuit Description 1 T526 16YL/WT REAR LOCKER SOURCE 2 T523 18YL/BK LOCKER SENSOR SUPPLY 3 T527 18YL/TN REAR LOCKER SENSOR SENSE 4 T528 16YL/GY REAR LOCKER RETURN Component Location - 70 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Differential Assembly > Differential Lock > Solenoid, Differential Lock > Component Information > Diagrams > Module-Axle Disconnect-Front > Page 7925 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Differential Assembly > Fluid - Differential > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Maintenance - Fluid Flushing Information Fluid - Differential: Technical Service Bulletins Maintenance - Fluid Flushing Information NUMBER: 26-001-09 GROUP: Miscellaneous DATE: September 24, 2009 THIS BULLETIN SUPERSEDES TECHNICAL SERVICE BULLETIN 26-003-07, DATED MARCH 30, 2007, WHICH SHOULD BE REMOVED FROM YOUR FILES. THIS IS A COMPLETE REVISION AND NO ASTERISKS HAVE BEEN USED TO HIGHLIGHT REVISIONS. SUBJECT: Fluid Flushing Requirements MODELS: 2005 - 2008 (CS) Pacifica 2006 - 2009 (D1) Ram Truck (3500 Pick Up) 2010 (D2) Ram Truck (3500 Pick Up) 2007 - 2010 (DC) Ram Truck (3500 Chassis Cab) 2005 - 2009 (DH) Ram Truck (1500/2500 Pick Up) 2010 (DJ) Ram Truck (2500 Pick Up) 2005 - 2008 (DR) Ram Truck (1500/2500 Pick Up) 2009 - 2010 (DS) Ram Truck (1500) 2005 - 2009 (HB) Durango 2007 - 2009 (HG) Aspen 2009 - 2010 (JC) Journey 2007 - 2010 (JK) Wrangler 2005 - 2006 (JR) Sebring Sedan & Convertible/Stratus Sedan 2007 - 2010 (JS) Avenger/Sebring 2008 - 2010 (KK) Liberty 2007 - 2010 (KA) Nitro 2005 - 2007 (KJ) Liberty 2009 - 2010 (LC) Challenger 2005 - 2010 (LE) 300C/300C Touring (International Markets) 2005 - 2010 (LX) 300/Magnum/Charger 2007 - 2010 (MK) Compass/Patriot 2005 - 2010 (ND) Dakota 2005 - 2006 (PL) Neon 2007 - 2010 (PM) Caliber 2005 - 2010 (PT) Chrysler PT Cruiser Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Differential Assembly > Fluid - Differential > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Maintenance - Fluid Flushing Information > Page 7930 2005 - 2007 (RG) Chrysler Voyager (International Markets) 2005 - 2007 (RS) Town & Country/Caravan/Voyager 2009 - 2010 (RT) Town & Country/Grand Caravan 2005 - 2006 (TJ) Wrangler 2005 - 2006 (VA) Sprinter 2007 - 2010 (VB) Sprinter 2005 - 2010 (WH) Grand Cherokee (International Markets) 2005 - 2010 (WK) Grand Cherokee 2006 - 2010 (XH) Commander (International Markets) 2006 - 2010 (XK) Commander 2005 - 2010 (ZB) Viper 2005 - 2007 (ZH) Crossfire DISCUSSION: Chrysler Group vehicle fluid systems do NOT require regular flushing. These systems include: engine oil, transmission oil, axle lube, brake fluid, power steering fluid, and refrigerant. The only exception to this requirement are published in the vehicle maintenance schedules, e.g. engine coolant. Exceptions to this recommendation include only those instances where a failure has occurred and/or the system has become compromised, contaminated or overheated beyond the normal operating range. Chrysler Group does NOT recommend aftermarket chemicals to flush the engine, transmission, brake or steering systems. Chemicals contained in these products can damage the system elastomeric components, and contaminate the component fluid, leading to loss of system/component durability and service life. When necessary, only the original approved system fluid should be used to flush these components using teamPSE(R) approved equipment. If the engine coolant contains a considerable amount of sediment, clean and flush with Mopar Cooling System Flush, p/n 04856977, or equivalent. Follow with a thorough rinsing to remove all deposits and chemicals. Refill with a minimum of a 50% mixture of the specified coolant and distilled water. POLICY: Information Only Disclaimer: This bulletin is supplied as technical information only and is not an authorization for repair. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Differential Assembly > Fluid - Differential > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications Fluid - Differential: Capacity Specifications CORPORATE AXLES Front Axle C205F OPEN ................................................................................. .................................................................................................. 1.6L (56 oz) Front Axle C200F OPEN ..................................................................................................................... .................................................... 1.7L (57.5 ounces) Front Axle C200FE ANTI-SPIN .............................................................................................................................................................. 1.7L (57.5 ounces) Friction Modifier .................................................................................................... ................................................................................ 4.0 ounces (118 ml) Rear Axle 8.25 OPEN .......................................................................................................................... .................................................... 2.08L (4.4 ounces) Rear Axle 8.25 ANTI-SPIN .................................................................................................................. ...................................................... 2.1L (72 ounces) Friction Modifier ................................................ .................................................................................................................................... 4.0 ounces (118 ml) Rear Axle 9.25 OPEN .......................................................................................................................... ....................................................... 2.2L (74 ounces) Rear Axle 9.25 ANTI-SPIN .................................................................................................................. ...................................................... 2.1L (72 ounces) Friction Modifier ................................................ .................................................................................................................................... 4.0 ounces (118 ml) Rear Axle C213R OPEN ..................................................................................................................... ...................................................... 2.07L (70 ounces) Rear Axle C213RE ANTI-SPIN ......................................................................................................................................................... 2.24L (75.5 ounces) Friction Modifier .................................................................................................. .................................................................................. 4.0 ounces (118 ml) DANA AXLES Front Axle 186 FBI OPEN ............................................................................................ .................................................................................... 1.0L (2.1 Pt) Front Axle 186 FIA OPEN ................................................................................................................... ........................................................... 1.24L (2.6 Pt) Front Axle 216 FBI ANTI-SPIN ............................................................................................................ ........................................................... 1.3L (2.7 Pt) Rear Axle 226 RBI OPEN .................................................................................................................... ......................................................... 2.25L (4.75 Pt) Rear Axle 226 RBI ANTI-SPIN ............................................................................................................ ........................................................ 2.25L (4.75 Pt) Friction Modifier ................................................. ........................................................................................................................................... 0.1 ml (3.4 oz) Rear Axle 226 RIA ANTI-SPIN ............................................................................................................ ....................................................................... 1.35L Rear Axle 302 RBI OPEN .................................................................................................................... .......................................................................... 6.6L Rear Axle 302 RBI ANTI-SPIN ............................................................................................................ ......................................................................... 6.6L AMERICAN AXLES Front Axle 9.25 OPEN ........................................................................................ ........................................................................................................... 2.2L Front Axle 9.25 ANTI-SPIN ................................................................................................................. ......................................................................... 2.0L Rear Axle 10.5 OPEN .......................................................................................................................... ........................................................................... 2.5L Rear Axle 10.5 ANTI-SPIN .................................................................................................................. .......................................................................... 2.5L Rear Axle 11.5 OPEN .......................................................................................................................... ........................................................................... 4.2L Rear Axle 11.5 ANTI-SPIN .................................................................................................................. .......................................................................... 4.0L MAGNA AXLES FRONT AXLE 275 FBI OPEN .................................................................................. .................................................................................................... 5.1L Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Differential Assembly > Fluid - Differential > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications > Page 7933 Fluid - Differential: Fluid Type Specifications Front Axle Front Axle Fluid ................................................................................................................................... ............................. GL-5 SAE 75W-90 or equivalent Rear Axle Rear Axle Fluid .......................................................................................................................................... Mopar Synthetic Gear Lubricant SAE 75W-140 Note: Limited-Slip rear axles require the addition of 118 ml (4 oz) Mopar Limited Slip Additive or equivalent. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Differential Assembly > Output Shaft, Differential > Differential Output Shaft Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Differential Output Shaft Bearing: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL 1. Remove half shaft from disconnect side of the axle. 2. Remove disconnect actuator wiring connector. 3. Remove disconnect actuator (1) bolts (2) and remove actuator from disconnect pocket. 4. Remove O-ring (1) and snap ring (2) from output shaft. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Differential Assembly > Output Shaft, Differential > Differential Output Shaft Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 7939 5. Remove disconnect seal (1) bolts (2). 6. Remove output shaft (1) and disconnect seal (2) with Remover 8420A (3) and Slide Hammer C-3752. 7. Slide disconnect collar (1) from intermediate shaft (2) and remove through disconnect pocket. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Differential Assembly > Output Shaft, Differential > Differential Output Shaft Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 7940 8. Remove differential cover. 9. Drive intermediate shaft (1) out of side gear with a hammer and brass punch (2). 10. Remove intermediate shaft (1) from disconnect pocket (2). 11. Install Puller 9766 (1) in intermediate shaft bearing (2) then tighten nut (3) to expand tool in bearing. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Differential Assembly > Output Shaft, Differential > Differential Output Shaft Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 7941 12. Tighten puller (1) nut (2) to remove intermediate shaft bearing from disconnect pocket. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Differential Assembly > Output Shaft, Differential > Differential Output Shaft Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 7942 Differential Output Shaft Bearing: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION 1. Install intermediate shaft bearing (1) with Installer 9767 (2) and Handle C-4171. CAUTION: Bearing must be installed with lettering facing outwards. Failure to follow these instructions will damage the bearing. 2. Install new intermediate shaft snap ring. 3. Install intermediate shaft (1) through disconnect pocket (2) and verify intermediate shaft snap ring is seated in side gear. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Differential Assembly > Output Shaft, Differential > Differential Output Shaft Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 7943 4. Install disconnect collar (1) through disconnect pocket onto intermediate shaft (2). 5. Position disconnect collar (1) on intermediate shaft (2) in 2WD position. 6. Verify output shaft bearing cup (1) is seated in disconnect pocket (2). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Differential Assembly > Output Shaft, Differential > Differential Output Shaft Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 7944 7. Install output shaft (1) in disconnect pocket (2). 8. Install disconnect seal (1) on output shaft (2). 9. Align disconnect seal (1) with bolt holes in disconnect pocket with Pins MD998412 (2). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Differential Assembly > Output Shaft, Differential > Differential Output Shaft Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 7945 10. Install disconnect seal (1) in disconnect pocket with Installer 6761 (2) and a hammer. 11. Install disconnect seal (1) bolts (2) and tighten to 28 Nm (21 ft. lbs.). 12. Install output shaft O-ring (1) and snap ring (2). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Differential Assembly > Output Shaft, Differential > Differential Output Shaft Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 7946 13. Clean actuator (1) sealing surface and install new gasket (2) if necessary. 14. Align actuator shift fork (1) with disconnect collar (2) and install actuator on disconnect pocket. 15. Install disconnect actuator (1) bolts (2) and tighten to 27 Nm (20 ft. lbs.). 16. Install disconnect actuator wiring connector. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Differential Assembly > Output Shaft, Differential > Differential Output Shaft Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 7947 17. Install differential cover and fill differential to specification. 18. Install half shaft. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Differential Assembly > Seals and Gaskets, Differential > System Information > Service and Repair > Front Axle - C205FD Seals and Gaskets: Service and Repair Front Axle - C205FD Removal REMOVAL 1. Remove half shaft from disconnect side of the axle. 2. Remove O-ring (1) and snap ring (2) from the output shaft. 3. Remove disconnect seal (1) bolts (2). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Differential Assembly > Seals and Gaskets, Differential > System Information > Service and Repair > Front Axle - C205FD > Page 7952 4. Remove output shaft and disconnect seal (1) with Remover 8420A (2) and Slide Hammer C-3752. Installation INSTALLATION 1. Verify output shaft bearing cup (1) is seated in disconnect pocket (2). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Differential Assembly > Seals and Gaskets, Differential > System Information > Service and Repair > Front Axle - C205FD > Page 7953 2. Install output shaft (1) in disconnect pocket (2). 3. Install disconnect seal (1) on output shaft (2). 4. Align disconnect seal (1) with bolt holes in disconnect pocket with Pins MD998412 (2). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Differential Assembly > Seals and Gaskets, Differential > System Information > Service and Repair > Front Axle - C205FD > Page 7954 5. Install disconnect seal (1) in disconnect pocket with Installer 6761(2) and a hammer. 6. Install disconnect seal (1) bolts (2) and tighten to 28 Nm (21 ft. lbs.). 7. Install output shaft O-ring (1) and snap ring (2). 8. Install half shaft. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Differential Assembly > Seals and Gaskets, Differential > System Information > Service and Repair > Front Axle - C205FD > Page 7955 9. Verify differential fluid level and add fluid if necessary. Removal REMOVAL 1. Remove half shaft from vehicle. 2. Clean axle seal area. 3. Remove O-ring (1) and snap ring (2) from axle shaft (3). 4. Remove axle with Remove 8420A (2,3,4) and Slide Hammer C-3752. 5. Remove axle shaft seal with a seal puller. Installation INSTALLATION Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Differential Assembly > Seals and Gaskets, Differential > System Information > Service and Repair > Front Axle - C205FD > Page 7956 1. Wipe axle shaft tube bore clean. 2. Install new axle shaft seal with Installer 8694 (1). 3. Install axle shaft with new snap ring and verify axle shaft snap ring is seated in side gear. 4. Install o-ring (1) and snap ring (2) on axle shaft (3). 5. Install half shaft. 6. Verify differential fluid level and add fluid if necessary. Removal REMOVAL Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Differential Assembly > Seals and Gaskets, Differential > System Information > Service and Repair > Front Axle - C205FD > Page 7957 1. With axle in 2WD remove front propeller shaft and left half shaft. 2. Rotate pinion gear three or four times and verify pinion rotates smoothly. 3. Record pinion torque to rotate with an inch pound torque wrench (2), for installation reference. 4. Position Holder 6719 against the companion flange (1) and install a four bolts and washers into the threaded holes and tighten the bolts. 5. Remove pinion nut. 6. Mark a line across the pinion shaft and flange for installation reference. 7. Remove companion flange with (1) Remover C-452 (2). 8. Remove pinion seal with a seal puller. Installation INSTALLATION 1. Apply a light coating of gear lubricant on the lip of pinion seal. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Differential Assembly > Seals and Gaskets, Differential > System Information > Service and Repair > Front Axle - C205FD > Page 7958 2. Install seal with Installer 8695 (2) and Handle C-4171 (1). 3. Install flange on the pinion shaft with the reference marks aligned. 4. Install companion flange onto the pinion with Installer C-3718 and Holder 6719A. 5. Position holder (2) against the companion flange and install four bolts and washers into the threaded holes. Tighten the bolt and washer so that the holder is held to the flange. 6. Install a new pinion nut onto the pinion shaft and tighten the pinion nut until there is zero bearing end-play CAUTION: Do not exceed 271 Nm (200 ft. lbs.) the minimum tightening torque when installing the companion flange at this point. Never loosen pinion nut to decrease pinion bearing rotating torque and never exceed specified preload torque. Failure to follow these instruction will damage the axle. 7. Measure pinion Torque To Rotate with an inch pound torque wrench (2). Pinion Torque To Rotate should be equal to recorded reading plus an additional 0.56 Nm (5 in. lbs.). 8. If rotating torque is low, tighten the pinion nut in 6.8 Nm (5 ft. lbs.) increments until pinion Torque To Rotate is achieved. CAUTION: If maximum tightening torque 475 Nm (350 ft. lbs.) is reached prior to reaching the required rotating torque, the collapsible spacer may have been damaged. Failure to follow these instruction will damage the axle. 9. Install propeller shaft and half shafts. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Differential Assembly > Seals and Gaskets, Differential > System Information > Service and Repair > Front Axle - C205FD > Page 7959 Seals and Gaskets: Service and Repair Front Axle - 9 1/4 AA Removal REMOVAL 1. Remove hub bearings and axle shafts. 2. Remove differential from differential housing (2). 3. Remove differential bearing adjusters (1). 4. Remove axle seals (2) located behind adjusters with Receiver 8498 and Extractor 6310. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Differential Assembly > Seals and Gaskets, Differential > System Information > Service and Repair > Front Axle - C205FD > Page 7960 5. Install Receiver 8498 (1) into the adjuster bore. 6. Install Extractor Rod 6310 with Extractor Foot 6310-9 (2) through the receiver and axle seal. 7. Install Extractor Plate 6310-2 and Nut 6310-7 (2) on the extractor rod (1). 8. Tighten nut (2) on extractor rod (1) to pull seal into the receiver. Installation INSTALLATION 1. Install axle seal on Installer Cups 8885-2 (1) (3) and position cups with seals into the housing. NOTE: Seals are installed with the axle guide facing outward. 2. Install Turnbuckle 8885-1(2) into installer cups and expand the turnbuckle until the seals bottom out in the housing. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Differential Assembly > Seals and Gaskets, Differential > System Information > Service and Repair > Front Axle - C205FD > Page 7961 3. Install adjuster (1) into the differential housing (2). 4. Install differential in housing. 5. Install axle shaft and hub bearings. Removal REMOVAL 1. Mark propeller shaft and pinion flange (1) for installation reference. 2. Remove propeller shaft. 3. Remove hub bearings and axle shafts. 4. Rotate pinion gear three or four times. 5. Record pinion torque to rotate (1) with an inch pound torque wrench (2) for installation reference. 6. Hold pinion flange (1) with Flange Wrench 8979 (2) and remove pinion flange nut and washer. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Differential Assembly > Seals and Gaskets, Differential > System Information > Service and Repair > Front Axle - C205FD > Page 7962 7. Mark a line across the pinion shaft and flange for installation reference. 8. Remove pinion flange (1) with Pinion Flange Puller 8992 (2). 9. Remove pinion seal with a seal puller. Installation INSTALLATION 1. Install new pinion seal with Installer 8882 (2) and Handle C-4171 (1). 2. Apply a light coat of teflon thread sealant, to pinion flange splines. 3. Install flange on the pinion shaft with the reference marks aligned. 4. Lightly tap pinion flange onto the pinion, until a few threads are showing. 5. Install flange washer and new pinion nut. 6. Hold flange (1) with Flange Wrench 8979 (2) and tighten pinion nut until pinion end play is taken up. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Differential Assembly > Seals and Gaskets, Differential > System Information > Service and Repair > Front Axle - C205FD > Page 7963 7. Rotate pinion flange (1) several times to seat bearings. 8. Measure pinion torque to rotate (1) with an inch pound torque wrench (2). Pinion torque to rotate should be equal to recorded reading plus an additional 0.40-0.57 Nm (3-5 in. lbs.). 9. If torque to rotating is low, tighten the pinion nut in 6.8 Nm (5 ft. lbs.) increments until pinion torque to rotate is achieved. 10. Rotate pinion several times then verify pinion torque to rotate again. 11. Install axle shafts and hub bearings. 12. Install propeller shaft with reference marks aligned. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Differential Assembly > Seals and Gaskets, Differential > System Information > Service and Repair > Front Axle - C205FD > Page 7964 Seals and Gaskets: Service and Repair Front Axle - 275FBI Removal REMOVAL 1. With the vehicle in neutral, position vehicle on hoist. 2. Remove brake caliper, caliper adapter, hub extension, rotor and ABS sensor. 3. Bend axle shaft hub nut (1) collar out of the axle keyway. 4. Remove axle shaft hub nut (1). 5. Remove four hub bearing bolts (1) from the back of the steering knuckle. 6. Remove hub bearing from the steering knuckle. 7. Remove axle shaft (1) with hub bearing shim (2) from axle. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Differential Assembly > Seals and Gaskets, Differential > System Information > Service and Repair > Front Axle - C205FD > Page 7965 8. Remove axle seal (1) from axle yoke with seal puller (2). Installation INSTALLATION 1. Install axle shaft seal into axle yoke with Installer 10011 (1) Handle C-4171 (2). 2. Clean axle shaft and apply a thin film of grease to the shaft splines and hub bore. 3. Install axle shaft (1) with hub bearing shim (2) into the axle. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Differential Assembly > Seals and Gaskets, Differential > System Information > Service and Repair > Front Axle - C205FD > Page 7966 4. Install hub bearing in the knuckle. 5. Install hub bearing bolts (1) and tighten to 200 Nm (147 ft. lbs.). 6. Install ABS sensor, brake rotor (1), hub extension (2), caliper adapter and caliper. 7. Install axle hub nut (3) and tighten nut to 330 Nm (243 ft. lbs.). 8. Bend axle shaft hub nut (3) collar into axle keyway with a hammer and punch. Removal REMOVAL 1. With the vehicle in neutral, position vehicle on hoist. 2. Remove propeller shaft. 3. Bend pinion flange (1) nut (2) collar lock out of the pinion shaft keyway. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Differential Assembly > Seals and Gaskets, Differential > System Information > Service and Repair > Front Axle - C205FD > Page 7967 4. Hold pinion flange (1) with Holder C-3281 (2) and remove pinion flange nut. 5. Mark a line across the pinion shaft and flange for installation reference. 6. Remove pinion flange (1) with Pinion Flange Puller 8992 (2). 7. Remove pinion seal with a seal puller. Installation INSTALLATION 1. Install new pinion seal with Installer 10069 (1). 2. Apply a light coat of teflon thread sealant, to pinion flange splines. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Differential Assembly > Seals and Gaskets, Differential > System Information > Service and Repair > Front Axle - C205FD > Page 7968 3. Position flange on pinion shaft with reference marks aligned. 4. Install pinion flange (1) new pinion nut. 5. Hold flange with Holder C-3281 (2) and tighten pinion nut to 500 Nm (369 ft. lbs.). 6. Bend pinion flange (1) nut (2) collar into pinion keyway with a hammer and punch. 7. Install propeller shaft with reference marks aligned. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Differential Assembly > Seals and Gaskets, Differential > System Information > Service and Repair > Front Axle - C205FD > Page 7969 Seals and Gaskets: Service and Repair Rear Axle - 9 1/4 Removal REMOVAL 1. Remove axle shaft. 2. Remove axle shaft seal (1) from the axle tube with a seal puller. Installation INSTALLATION 1. Wipe the axle tube bore clean. Remove any old sealer or burrs from the tube. 2. Coat the lip of the new seal with axle lubricant and install a seal with Installer C-4076-B and Handle C-4735. NOTE: When tool contacts the axle tube, the seal is installed to the correct depth. 3. Install the axle shaft (1). 4. Install differential cover and fill with gear lubricant to the bottom of the fill plug hole. Removal REMOVAL Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Differential Assembly > Seals and Gaskets, Differential > System Information > Service and Repair > Front Axle - C205FD > Page 7970 1. Mark universal joint, companion flange and pinion shaft for installation reference. 2. Remove propeller shaft from the companion flange. 3. Remove the brake rotors to prevent any drag. 4. Rotate companion flange three or four times. 5. Record pinion torque to rotating (1) with an inch pound torque wrench (2). 6. Install two bolts into the companion flange threaded holes, 180° apart. Position Holder 6719A against the companion flange and install and tighten two bolts and washers into the remaining holes. 7. Hold the companion flange with Holder 6719A and remove pinion nut and washer. 8. Mark a line across the pinion shaft and flange for installation reference. 9. Remove companion flange with Puller C-452 (2). 10. Remove pinion seal with seal puller or slide-hammer mounted screw. Installation INSTALLATION Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Differential Assembly > Seals and Gaskets, Differential > System Information > Service and Repair > Front Axle - C205FD > Page 7971 1. Apply a light coating of gear lubricant on the lip of pinion seal. 2. Install new pinion seal (3) with Handle C-4735 and Installer C-4076-B (1). 3. Install flange on the pinion shaft with the reference marks aligned. 4. Install two bolts into the threaded holes in the companion flange, 180° apart. 5. Position Holder 6719A (2) against the companion flange and install a bolt and washer into one of the remaining threaded holes. Tighten the bolts so holder is held to the flange. 6. Install companion flange on pinion shaft with Installer C-3718 and Holder 6719A. 7. Install pinion washer and a new pinion nut. The convex side of the washer must face outward. 8. Hold companion flange with Holder 6719A (2) and tighten pinion nut with a torque wrench (3) to 285 Nm (210 ft. lbs.). NOTE: Do not exceed the minimum torque 285 Nm (210 ft. lbs.) when installing the pinion nut at this point. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Differential Assembly > Seals and Gaskets, Differential > System Information > Service and Repair > Front Axle - C205FD > Page 7972 9. Rotate pinion several times to ensure pinion bearings are seated. 10. Measure pinion torque to rotate (1) with an inch pound torque wrench (2). Pinion torque to rotate should be equal to recorded reading plus an additional 0.56 Nm (5 in. lbs.). If pinion torque to rotate is low, tighten pinion nut in 6.8 Nm (5 ft. lbs.) increments until pinion torque to rotating is achieved. CAUTION: Never loosen pinion nut to decrease pinion bearing rotating torque. If pinion torque to rotating is exceeded, a new collapsible spacer must be installed. Failure to follow these instructions will result in damage to the axle. 11. Install propeller shaft. 12. Install rear brake rotors components. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Differential Assembly > Seals and Gaskets, Differential > System Information > Service and Repair > Front Axle - C205FD > Page 7973 Seals and Gaskets: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL 1. Remove half shaft from disconnect side of the axle. 2. Remove O-ring (1) and snap ring (2) from the output shaft. 3. Remove disconnect seal (1) bolts (2). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Differential Assembly > Seals and Gaskets, Differential > System Information > Service and Repair > Front Axle - C205FD > Page 7974 4. Remove output shaft and disconnect seal (1) with Remover 8420A (2) and Slide Hammer C-3752. Installation INSTALLATION 1. Verify output shaft bearing cup (1) is seated in disconnect pocket (2). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Differential Assembly > Seals and Gaskets, Differential > System Information > Service and Repair > Front Axle - C205FD > Page 7975 2. Install output shaft (1) in disconnect pocket (2). 3. Install disconnect seal (1) on output shaft (2). 4. Align disconnect seal (1) with bolt holes in disconnect pocket with Pins MD998412 (2). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Differential Assembly > Seals and Gaskets, Differential > System Information > Service and Repair > Front Axle - C205FD > Page 7976 5. Install disconnect seal (1) in disconnect pocket with Installer 6761(2) and a hammer. 6. Install disconnect seal (1) bolts (2) and tighten to 28 Nm (21 ft. lbs.). 7. Install output shaft O-ring (1) and snap ring (2). 8. Install half shaft. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Differential Assembly > Seals and Gaskets, Differential > System Information > Service and Repair > Front Axle - C205FD > Page 7977 9. Verify differential fluid level and add fluid if necessary. Removal REMOVAL 1. Remove half shaft from vehicle. 2. Clean axle seal area. 3. Remove O-ring (1) and snap ring (2) from axle shaft (3). 4. Remove axle with Remove 8420A (2,3,4) and Slide Hammer C-3752. 5. Remove axle shaft seal with a seal puller. Installation INSTALLATION Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Differential Assembly > Seals and Gaskets, Differential > System Information > Service and Repair > Front Axle - C205FD > Page 7978 1. Wipe axle shaft tube bore clean. 2. Install new axle shaft seal with Installer 8694 (1). 3. Install axle shaft with new snap ring and verify axle shaft snap ring is seated in side gear. 4. Install o-ring (1) and snap ring (2) on axle shaft (3). 5. Install half shaft. 6. Verify differential fluid level and add fluid if necessary. Removal REMOVAL Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Differential Assembly > Seals and Gaskets, Differential > System Information > Service and Repair > Front Axle - C205FD > Page 7979 1. With axle in 2WD remove front propeller shaft and left half shaft. 2. Rotate pinion gear three or four times and verify pinion rotates smoothly. 3. Record pinion torque to rotate with an inch pound torque wrench (2), for installation reference. 4. Position Holder 6719 against the companion flange (1) and install a four bolts and washers into the threaded holes and tighten the bolts. 5. Remove pinion nut. 6. Mark a line across the pinion shaft and flange for installation reference. 7. Remove companion flange with (1) Remover C-452 (2). 8. Remove pinion seal with a seal puller. Installation INSTALLATION 1. Apply a light coating of gear lubricant on the lip of pinion seal. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Differential Assembly > Seals and Gaskets, Differential > System Information > Service and Repair > Front Axle - C205FD > Page 7980 2. Install seal with Installer 8695 (2) and Handle C-4171 (1). 3. Install flange on the pinion shaft with the reference marks aligned. 4. Install companion flange onto the pinion with Installer C-3718 and Holder 6719A. 5. Position holder (2) against the companion flange and install four bolts and washers into the threaded holes. Tighten the bolt and washer so that the holder is held to the flange. 6. Install a new pinion nut onto the pinion shaft and tighten the pinion nut until there is zero bearing end-play CAUTION: Do not exceed 271 Nm (200 ft. lbs.) the minimum tightening torque when installing the companion flange at this point. Never loosen pinion nut to decrease pinion bearing rotating torque and never exceed specified preload torque. Failure to follow these instruction will damage the axle. 7. Measure pinion Torque To Rotate with an inch pound torque wrench (2). Pinion Torque To Rotate should be equal to recorded reading plus an additional 0.56 Nm (5 in. lbs.). 8. If rotating torque is low, tighten the pinion nut in 6.8 Nm (5 ft. lbs.) increments until pinion Torque To Rotate is achieved. CAUTION: If maximum tightening torque 475 Nm (350 ft. lbs.) is reached prior to reaching the required rotating torque, the collapsible spacer may have been damaged. Failure to follow these instruction will damage the axle. 9. Install propeller shaft and half shafts. Removal Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Differential Assembly > Seals and Gaskets, Differential > System Information > Service and Repair > Front Axle - C205FD > Page 7981 REMOVAL 1. Remove hub bearings and axle shafts. 2. Remove differential from differential housing (2). 3. Remove differential bearing adjusters (1). 4. Remove axle seals (2) located behind adjusters with Receiver 8498 and Extractor 6310. 5. Install Receiver 8498 (1) into the adjuster bore. 6. Install Extractor Rod 6310 with Extractor Foot 6310-9 (2) through the receiver and axle seal. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Differential Assembly > Seals and Gaskets, Differential > System Information > Service and Repair > Front Axle - C205FD > Page 7982 7. Install Extractor Plate 6310-2 and Nut 6310-7 (2) on the extractor rod (1). 8. Tighten nut (2) on extractor rod (1) to pull seal into the receiver. Installation INSTALLATION 1. Install axle seal on Installer Cups 8885-2 (1) (3) and position cups with seals into the housing. NOTE: Seals are installed with the axle guide facing outward. 2. Install Turnbuckle 8885-1(2) into installer cups and expand the turnbuckle until the seals bottom out in the housing. 3. Install adjuster (1) into the differential housing (2). 4. Install differential in housing. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Differential Assembly > Seals and Gaskets, Differential > System Information > Service and Repair > Front Axle - C205FD > Page 7983 5. Install axle shaft and hub bearings. Removal REMOVAL 1. Mark propeller shaft and pinion flange (1) for installation reference. 2. Remove propeller shaft. 3. Remove hub bearings and axle shafts. 4. Rotate pinion gear three or four times. 5. Record pinion torque to rotate (1) with an inch pound torque wrench (2) for installation reference. 6. Hold pinion flange (1) with Flange Wrench 8979 (2) and remove pinion flange nut and washer. 7. Mark a line across the pinion shaft and flange for installation reference. 8. Remove pinion flange (1) with Pinion Flange Puller 8992 (2). 9. Remove pinion seal with a seal puller. Installation Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Differential Assembly > Seals and Gaskets, Differential > System Information > Service and Repair > Front Axle - C205FD > Page 7984 INSTALLATION 1. Install new pinion seal with Installer 8882 (2) and Handle C-4171 (1). 2. Apply a light coat of teflon thread sealant, to pinion flange splines. 3. Install flange on the pinion shaft with the reference marks aligned. 4. Lightly tap pinion flange onto the pinion, until a few threads are showing. 5. Install flange washer and new pinion nut. 6. Hold flange (1) with Flange Wrench 8979 (2) and tighten pinion nut until pinion end play is taken up. 7. Rotate pinion flange (1) several times to seat bearings. 8. Measure pinion torque to rotate (1) with an inch pound torque wrench (2). Pinion torque to rotate should be equal to recorded reading plus an additional 0.40-0.57 Nm (3-5 in. lbs.). 9. If torque to rotating is low, tighten the pinion nut in 6.8 Nm (5 ft. lbs.) increments until pinion torque to rotate is achieved. 10. Rotate pinion several times then verify pinion torque to rotate again. 11. Install axle shafts and hub bearings. 12. Install propeller shaft with reference marks aligned. Removal REMOVAL Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Differential Assembly > Seals and Gaskets, Differential > System Information > Service and Repair > Front Axle - C205FD > Page 7985 1. With the vehicle in neutral, position vehicle on hoist. 2. Remove brake caliper, caliper adapter, hub extension, rotor and ABS sensor. 3. Bend axle shaft hub nut (1) collar out of the axle keyway. 4. Remove axle shaft hub nut (1). 5. Remove four hub bearing bolts (1) from the back of the steering knuckle. 6. Remove hub bearing from the steering knuckle. 7. Remove axle shaft (1) with hub bearing shim (2) from axle. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Differential Assembly > Seals and Gaskets, Differential > System Information > Service and Repair > Front Axle - C205FD > Page 7986 8. Remove axle seal (1) from axle yoke with seal puller (2). Installation INSTALLATION 1. Install axle shaft seal into axle yoke with Installer 10011 (1) Handle C-4171 (2). 2. Clean axle shaft and apply a thin film of grease to the shaft splines and hub bore. 3. Install axle shaft (1) with hub bearing shim (2) into the axle. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Differential Assembly > Seals and Gaskets, Differential > System Information > Service and Repair > Front Axle - C205FD > Page 7987 4. Install hub bearing in the knuckle. 5. Install hub bearing bolts (1) and tighten to 200 Nm (147 ft. lbs.). 6. Install ABS sensor, brake rotor (1), hub extension (2), caliper adapter and caliper. 7. Install axle hub nut (3) and tighten nut to 330 Nm (243 ft. lbs.). 8. Bend axle shaft hub nut (3) collar into axle keyway with a hammer and punch. Removal REMOVAL 1. With the vehicle in neutral, position vehicle on hoist. 2. Remove propeller shaft. 3. Bend pinion flange (1) nut (2) collar lock out of the pinion shaft keyway. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Differential Assembly > Seals and Gaskets, Differential > System Information > Service and Repair > Front Axle - C205FD > Page 7988 4. Hold pinion flange (1) with Holder C-3281 (2) and remove pinion flange nut. 5. Mark a line across the pinion shaft and flange for installation reference. 6. Remove pinion flange (1) with Pinion Flange Puller 8992 (2). 7. Remove pinion seal with a seal puller. Installation INSTALLATION 1. Install new pinion seal with Installer 10069 (1). 2. Apply a light coat of teflon thread sealant, to pinion flange splines. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Differential Assembly > Seals and Gaskets, Differential > System Information > Service and Repair > Front Axle - C205FD > Page 7989 3. Position flange on pinion shaft with reference marks aligned. 4. Install pinion flange (1) new pinion nut. 5. Hold flange with Holder C-3281 (2) and tighten pinion nut to 500 Nm (369 ft. lbs.). 6. Bend pinion flange (1) nut (2) collar into pinion keyway with a hammer and punch. 7. Install propeller shaft with reference marks aligned. Removal REMOVAL 1. Remove axle shaft. 2. Remove axle shaft seal (1) from the axle tube with a seal puller. Installation Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Differential Assembly > Seals and Gaskets, Differential > System Information > Service and Repair > Front Axle - C205FD > Page 7990 INSTALLATION 1. Wipe the axle tube bore clean. Remove any old sealer or burrs from the tube. 2. Coat the lip of the new seal with axle lubricant and install a seal with Installer C-4076-B and Handle C-4735. NOTE: When tool contacts the axle tube, the seal is installed to the correct depth. 3. Install the axle shaft (1). 4. Install differential cover and fill with gear lubricant to the bottom of the fill plug hole. Removal REMOVAL 1. Mark universal joint, companion flange and pinion shaft for installation reference. 2. Remove propeller shaft from the companion flange. 3. Remove the brake rotors to prevent any drag. 4. Rotate companion flange three or four times. 5. Record pinion torque to rotating (1) with an inch pound torque wrench (2). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Differential Assembly > Seals and Gaskets, Differential > System Information > Service and Repair > Front Axle - C205FD > Page 7991 6. Install two bolts into the companion flange threaded holes, 180° apart. Position Holder 6719A against the companion flange and install and tighten two bolts and washers into the remaining holes. 7. Hold the companion flange with Holder 6719A and remove pinion nut and washer. 8. Mark a line across the pinion shaft and flange for installation reference. 9. Remove companion flange with Puller C-452 (2). 10. Remove pinion seal with seal puller or slide-hammer mounted screw. Installation INSTALLATION 1. Apply a light coating of gear lubricant on the lip of pinion seal. 2. Install new pinion seal (3) with Handle C-4735 and Installer C-4076-B (1). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Differential Assembly > Seals and Gaskets, Differential > System Information > Service and Repair > Front Axle - C205FD > Page 7992 3. Install flange on the pinion shaft with the reference marks aligned. 4. Install two bolts into the threaded holes in the companion flange, 180° apart. 5. Position Holder 6719A (2) against the companion flange and install a bolt and washer into one of the remaining threaded holes. Tighten the bolts so holder is held to the flange. 6. Install companion flange on pinion shaft with Installer C-3718 and Holder 6719A. 7. Install pinion washer and a new pinion nut. The convex side of the washer must face outward. 8. Hold companion flange with Holder 6719A (2) and tighten pinion nut with a torque wrench (3) to 285 Nm (210 ft. lbs.). NOTE: Do not exceed the minimum torque 285 Nm (210 ft. lbs.) when installing the pinion nut at this point. 9. Rotate pinion several times to ensure pinion bearings are seated. 10. Measure pinion torque to rotate (1) with an inch pound torque wrench (2). Pinion torque to rotate should be equal to recorded reading plus an additional 0.56 Nm (5 in. lbs.). If pinion torque to rotate is low, tighten pinion nut in 6.8 Nm (5 ft. lbs.) increments until pinion torque to rotating is achieved. CAUTION: Never loosen pinion nut to decrease pinion bearing rotating torque. If pinion torque to rotating is exceeded, a new collapsible spacer must be installed. Failure to follow these instructions will result in damage to the axle. 11. Install propeller shaft. 12. Install rear brake rotors components. Removal Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Differential Assembly > Seals and Gaskets, Differential > System Information > Service and Repair > Front Axle - C205FD > Page 7993 REMOVAL 1. Remove axle shafts. 2. Mark propeller shaft and pinion flange for installation reference and remove shaft. 3. Rotate pinion gear three or four times. 4. Record pinion torque to rotate (1) with an inch pound torque wrench (2). 5. Hold pinion flange (1) with Wrench 8979 (2) and remove pinion flange nut and washer. 6. Mark a line across the pinion shaft and flange for installation reference. 7. Remove pinion flange (1) with Puller 8992 (2). 8. Remove pinion shaft seal with a pry tool or slide hammer mounted screw. Installation INSTALLATION Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Differential Assembly > Seals and Gaskets, Differential > System Information > Service and Repair > Front Axle - C205FD > Page 7994 1. Install new pinion seal with Installer 8896 (2) and Handle C-4171 (1). 2. Apply a light coat of teflon sealant to the pinion flange splines. 3. Install flange on the pinion shaft with the reference marks aligned. 4. Lightly tap the pinion flange onto the pinion until a few threads are showing. 5. Install flange washer and new pinion nut. 6. Hold flange (2) with Flange Wrench 8979 (1) and tighten pinion nut until pinion end play is taken up. 7. Rotate pinion several times to seat bearings. 8. Measure pinion torque to rotate (1) with an inch pound torque wrench (2). Pinion torque to rotate should be equal to recorded reading plus an additional 0.40-0.57 Nm (3-5 in. lbs.). 9. If torque to rotating is low, tighten the pinion nut in 6.8 Nm (5 ft. lbs.) increments until pinion torque to rotate is achieved. 10. Rotate pinion several times then verify pinion torque to rotate again. 11. Install axle shafts. 12. Install propeller shaft with reference marks aligned. 13. Check and fill differential if necessary. Removal REMOVAL Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Differential Assembly > Seals and Gaskets, Differential > System Information > Service and Repair > Front Axle - C205FD > Page 7995 1. Remove axle shafts. 2. Mark the propeller shaft and pinion flange for installation reference. 3. Remove propeller shaft. 4. Rotate pinion gear (1) three or four times. 5. Measure and record the amount of torque necessary to rotate the pinion gear with an inch pound torque wrench (2). 6. Hold pinion flange (1) with Flange Wrench 8979 (2) and remove pinion flange nut. 7. Remove pinion flange (1) with Pinion Flange Puller 8992 (2). 8. Remove pinion shaft seal with a seal puller or slide hammer mounted screw. Installation INSTALLATION Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Differential Assembly > Seals and Gaskets, Differential > System Information > Service and Repair > Front Axle - C205FD > Page 7996 1. Install new pinion seal with Handle C-4171 (1) and Installer 8896 (2). 2. Apply a light coat of teflon sealant to the pinion flange splines. 3. Lightly tap the pinion flange onto the pinion until a few threads are showing. 4. Install flange washer and new pinion nut. 5. Hold pinion flange (2) with Flange Wrench 8979 (1) and tighten pinion nut until pinion end play is taken up. 6. Rotate pinion several times to seat bearings. 7. Measure pinion (1) Torque To Rotate with an inch pound torque wrench (2) and compare it to recorded measurement. Tighten pinion nut in small increments, until pinion Torque To Rotate is 0.40-0.57 Nm (3-5 in. lbs.) greater than recorded measurement. 8. Rotate pinion several times then verify pinion Torque To Rotate again. 9. Install axle shafts. 10. Install propeller shaft with reference marks aligned. 11. Check differential fluid level. Removal REMOVAL Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Differential Assembly > Seals and Gaskets, Differential > System Information > Service and Repair > Front Axle - C205FD > Page 7997 1. Remove propeller shaft. 2. Install Adapter 10054 (1) on pinion flange and bolt (2) in place. 3. Hold pinion flange with Holder 6719A (1) and Adapter 10054 (2). 4. Remove pinion nut with a torque multiplier (1) and ratchet (2). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Differential Assembly > Seals and Gaskets, Differential > System Information > Service and Repair > Front Axle - C205FD > Page 7998 5. Bolt Puller 8992 (1) to Adapter 10054 and remove pinion flange. 6. Remove pinion seal with seal puller. Installation INSTALLATION 1. Install pinion seal in housing (2) with Installer 10055 (1). 2. Install pinion flange on pinion. 3. Install new pinion nut. 4. Install Adapter 10054 (1) on pinion flange and bolt (2) in place. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Differential Assembly > Seals and Gaskets, Differential > System Information > Service and Repair > Front Axle - C205FD > Page 7999 5. Hold pinion flange with Holder 6719A (1) and Adapter 10054 (2). 6. Tighten pinion nut to 937 Nm (689 ft. lbs.) with a torque multiplier (1) and torque wrench (2). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Axle - C205FD Axle Bearing: Service and Repair Front Axle - C205FD Removal REMOVAL 1. Remove half shaft from vehicle. 2. Clean axle seal area. 3. Remove O-ring (1) and snap ring (2) from axle shaft (3). 4. Remove axle with Remove 8420A (2) (3) Collar 8420-3 (4) and Slide Hammer C-3752. 5. Remove axle shaft seal with a seal puller. 6. Install axle shaft bearing Remover C-4660-A (3) in the bearing (1). Then tighten the nut (2) to spread remover in the bearing. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Axle - C205FD > Page 8005 7. Install bearing remove cup (1) bearing (2) and nut (3). Tighten nut (3) to draw the bearing out. Installation INSTALLATION 1. Wipe axle shaft bearing bore clean. 2. Install axle shaft bearing with Installer 5063 (1) and Handle C-4171 (2). CAUTION: Bearing must be installer with lettering facing outwards. Failure to follow these instructions will damage the bearing. 3. Install a new axle shaft seal with Installer 8694 (1). 4. Lubricate seal lip with gear lubricant. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Axle - C205FD > Page 8006 5. Install axle shaft with new snap ring and verify axle shaft snap ring is seated in side gear. 6. Install axle shaft (3) O-ring (1) and snap ring (2). 7. Install half shaft. 8. Verify differential fluid level and add fluid if necessary. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Axle - C205FD > Page 8007 Axle Bearing: Service and Repair Rear Axle - 9 1/4 Removal REMOVAL 1. Remove axle shaft. 2. Remove axle shaft seal from axle tube with a small pry bar. NOTE: The seal and bearing can be removed at the same time with the bearing removal tool. 3. Remove axle shaft bearing with Bearing Remover 6310 (2) (3) (4) (5) and Foot 6310-9 (7). Installation INSTALLATION 1. Wipe axle tube bore clean and remove any old sealer or burrs from the tube. 2. Install axle shaft bearing with Installer C-4198 and Handle C-4171. Drive bearing in until tool contacts the axle tube. NOTE: Bearing is installed with the bearing part number against the installer. 3. Coat lip of the new axle seal with axle lubricant and install with Installer C-4076-B and Handle C-4735. 4. Install the axle shaft (1). 5. Install differential cover and fill with gear lubricant to the bottom of the fill plug hole. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Axle - C205FD > Page 8008 Axle Bearing: Service and Repair Rear Axle - 10 1/2 AA Removal REMOVAL 1. Remove axle shaft flange bolts and remove axle shaft. 2. Remove retainer ring (1) from axle shaft tube. 3. Remove hub bearing nut (1) locking key (2) from axle tube (3). 4. Remove hub bearing nut with Socket 8954. 5. Remove hub and bearings from the axle. 6. Pry out hub bearing seal from the back of the hub. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Axle - C205FD > Page 8009 NOTE: The inner part of the seal (3) may stay on the axle tube (2). This part must also be removed with pry bar (1). 7. Remove rear bearing. 8. Remove hub bearing cups with a hammer and drift. Installation INSTALLATION 1. Install outer hub bearing cup with Installer 8961 and Handle C-4171. 2. Install inner hub bearing cup with Installer 8962 and Handle C-4171. 3. Pack bearings with the appropriate grease. 4. Install rear bearing and install new grease seal with Installer 8963 and Handle C-4171. 5. Slide hub on the axle tube and install front bearing into the hub. 6. Install hub bearing nut with Socket 8954 (1) and torque wrench (2) to 30 Nm (22 ft. lbs.) while rotating the hub. 7. Back off nut about 30° and align next hub nut key slot with axle tube key slot and install locking key. End play should be 0.025-0.25 mm (0.001-0.010 in.). 8. Install retainer ring (1) with ring end in the key slot (2). 9. Install new axle shaft gasket and install axle shaft. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Axle - C205FD > Page 8010 Axle Bearing: Service and Repair Rear Axle - 11 1/2 AA Removal REMOVAL 1. Remove axle shaft flange bolts and remove shaft. 2. Remove retainer ring (1) from the axle shaft tube. 3. Remove hub bearing nut (1) locking key (2) form axle tube (3). 4. Remove hub bearing nut with Socket 8954. 5. Remove hub and bearings from the axle. 6. Pry out hub bearing seal from the back of the hub. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Axle - C205FD > Page 8011 NOTE: The inner part of the seal (3) may stay on the axle tube (2). This part must also be removed with a pry bar (1). 7. Remove rear bearing. 8. Remove hub bearing cups with a hammer and drift. Installation INSTALLATION 1. Install outer hub bearing cup with Installer 8961 and Handle C-4171. 2. Install inner hub bearing cup with Installer 8153 and Handle C-4171. 3. Pack bearings with the appropriate wheel bearing grease. 4. Install rear bearing and install new grease seal with Installer 8963 and Handle C-4171. 5. Slide hub on the axle tube and install front bearing into the hub. 6. Install hub bearing nut with Socket 8954 (1) and tighten with torque wrench (2) to 30 Nm (22 ft. lbs.) while rotating the hub. 7. Back off nut about 30° and align next hub nut key slot with axle tube key slot and install locking key. NOTE: End play should be 0.025-0.25 mm (0.01-0.001 in.) 8. Install retainer ring (1) with ring end in the key slot (2). 9. Install new axle shaft gasket and install the axle shaft. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Axle - C205FD > Page 8012 Axle Bearing: Service and Repair Rear Axle - 302RBI Removal REMOVAL 1. Remove axle bolts (1) from axle flange (2). 2. Remove axle shaft (1) from axle. 3. With Socket 10051 (1) remove hub nut with integrated lock washer from hub (2) spindle. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Axle - C205FD > Page 8013 4. Install hub/rotor Guide 10064 (1) into hub spindle (2). 5. Slide hub/rotor (1) with bearings off hub spindle and hub/rotor Guide 10064 (2). 6. Remove outer bearing (1) from hub (2). 7. Remove hub seal (1) from the back of the hub (2) with seal puller. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Axle - C205FD > Page 8014 8. Remove inner bearing (1) from hub (2). 9. Remove outer bearing cup (1) from hub (2) with a hammer and brass drift. 10. Remove inner bearing cup (1) from hub (2) with hammer and brass drift. Installation INSTALLATION Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Axle - C205FD > Page 8015 1. Install outer hub bearing cup with Installer 10052 (1) and Handle C-4171 (2). 2. Install inner hub bearing cup with Installer 10049 (1) and Handle C-4171 (2). 3. Lubricate and install inner hub bearing (1) into hub (2). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Axle - C205FD > Page 8016 4. Install hub seal with Installer 10053 (1) and Handle C-4171 (2). 5. Lubricate and install outer hub bearing (1) into hub (2). 6. Install hub/rotor Guide 10064 (1) into the axle spindle (2). 7. Install hub/rotor (1) over Guide 10064 (2) onto the axle spindle. CAUTION: Never support hub with just the inner bearing and seal. Failure to follow these instruction will result in damaging the hub seal. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Axle - C205FD > Page 8017 8. Remove Guide 10064 (1) from axle spindle (2). 9. Install hub bearing nut (1) with integrated lock washer (2). NOTE: Integrated lock washer tab must be aligned with the spindle keyway. 10. Tighten hub (1) nut with Socket 10051 (2) to 95 Nm (70 ft. lbs.) while rotating the hub. Then back off nut 90 degrees and retighten nut to 41 Nm (30 ft. lbs.). NOTE: This will set hub to zero end-play. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Axle - C205FD > Page 8018 11. Install new O-ring (1) on axle flange (2). 12. Install axle shaft (1) into the hub (2) and axle. 13. Install axle bolts (1) through axle flange (2) and tighten to 133 Nm (98 ft. lbs.). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Axle - C205FD > Page 8019 14. Remove fill plug (1), from right side of carrier. 15. With axle level, fill carrier with lubricant to the bottom of the fill plug hole. 16. Install fill plug (1) and tighten to 68 Nm (50 ft. lbs.). WHEEL HUB OIL FILL CAUTION: Wheel hub cavities must be filled with lubricate before using axle. Failure to follow these instruction will result in hub bearing damage. 1. Raise right end (1) of axle six inches. Hold in this position for one minute to fill left hub (2) with lubricate. 2. Lower the axle. 3. Raise left end (1) of axle six inches. Hold in this position for one minute to fill right hub (2) with lubricate. 4. Lower the axle. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Axle - C205FD > Page 8020 5. Remove fill plug (1), from right side of carrier. 6. With axle level, fill carrier with lubricant to the bottom of the fill plug hole. NOTE: Axle will require approximately 1.18 L (40 oz.) of additional lubricant. 7. Install fill plug (1) and tighten to 68 Nm (50 ft. lbs.). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly > Axle Shaft > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Axle - C205FD Axle Shaft: Service and Repair Front Axle - C205FD Removal REMOVAL 1. Remove half shaft from vehicle. 2. Clean axle seal area. 3. Remove O-ring (1) and snap ring (2) from axle shaft (3). 4. Remove axle with Remove 8420A (2,3,4) and Slide Hammer C-3752. Installation INSTALLATION Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly > Axle Shaft > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Axle - C205FD > Page 8026 1. Lubricate bearing bore and seal lip with gear lubricant. 2. Install axle shaft with new snap ring and verify axle shaft snap ring is seated in side gear. 3. Install o-ring (1) and snap ring (2) on axle shaft (3). 4. Install half shaft. 5. Verify differential fluid level and add fluid if necessary. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly > Axle Shaft > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Axle - C205FD > Page 8027 Axle Shaft: Service and Repair Front Axle - 9 1/4 AA Removal REMOVAL 1. With the vehicle in neutral, position vehicle on hoist. 2. Remove brake caliper, rotor and ABS wheel speed sensor if equipped. 3. Remove axle shaft (2) cotter pin (3), hub nut (1) and washer. 4. Remove four hub bearing bolts (2) from the back of the steering knuckle. 5. Remove hub bearing from the steering knuckle. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly > Axle Shaft > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Axle - C205FD > Page 8028 6. Remove axle shaft (2) from steering knuckle (1) and axle housing. Installation INSTALLATION 1. Clean axle shaft and apply a thin film of grease to the shaft splines and hub bore. 2. Install axle shaft (2) through the steering knuckle (3) and into the differential side gears. 3. Install hub bearing in the knuckle. 4. Install hub bearing bolts (2) and tighten to 202 Nm (149 ft. lbs.). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly > Axle Shaft > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Axle - C205FD > Page 8029 5. Install ABS wheel speed sensor, brake rotor and caliper. 6. Install axle (2) washer and nut (1). Tighten axle nut to 179 Nm (132 ft. lbs.). 7. Rotate axle several 5 to 10 times to seat the wheel bearing. 8. Tighten axle nut (1) to final torque of 356 Nm (263 ft. lbs.). 9. Align nut to next cotter pin hole and install new cotter pin (3). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly > Axle Shaft > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Axle - C205FD > Page 8030 Axle Shaft: Service and Repair Front Axle - 275FBI Removal REMOVAL 1. With the vehicle in neutral, position vehicle on hoist. 2. Remove brake caliper, caliper adapter, hub extension, rotor and ABS sensor. 3. Bend axle shaft hub nut (1) collar out of the axle keyway. 4. Remove axle shaft hub nut (1). 5. Remove four hub bearing bolts (1) from the back of the steering knuckle. 6. Remove hub bearing from the steering knuckle. 7. Remove axle shaft (1) with hub bearing shim (2) from axle. Installation INSTALLATION Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly > Axle Shaft > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Axle - C205FD > Page 8031 1. Clean axle shaft and apply a thin film of grease to the shaft splines and hub bore. 2. Install axle shaft (1) with hub bearing shim (2) into the axle. 3. Install hub bearing in the knuckle. 4. Install hub bearing bolts (1) and tighten to 200 Nm (147 ft. lbs.). 5. Install ABS sensor, brake rotor (1), hub extension (2), caliper adapter and caliper. 6. Install axle hub nut (3) and tighten nut to 330 Nm (243 ft. lbs.). 7. Bend axle shaft hub nut (3) collar into axle keyway with a hammer and punch. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly > Axle Shaft > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Axle - C205FD > Page 8032 Axle Shaft: Service and Repair Rear Axle - 9 1/4 Removal REMOVAL 1. With vehicle in neutral, position vehicle on hoist. 2. Remove wheel and tire assembly. 3. Remove brake caliper (3), adapter (2) and rotor (1). 4. Remove differential housing cover and drain lubricant. 5. Rotate differential case so pinion mate shaft lock screw is accessible. Remove lock screw (1) and pinion mate shaft (2) from differential case. 6. Push axle shaft (2) inward and remove C-lock (1) from the axle shaft. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly > Axle Shaft > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Axle - C205FD > Page 8033 7. Remove axle shaft (1) carefully to prevent damage to the shaft bearing and seal in the axle tube. Installation INSTALLATION 1. Lubricate bearing bore and seal lip with gear lubricant. 2. Install axle shaft and engage into side gear splines. NOTE: Use care to prevent shaft splines from damaging axle shaft seal. 3. Insert C-lock (1) in end of axle shaft (2) then push axle shaft outward to seat C-lock in side gear (3). 4. Insert pinion shaft into differential case and through thrust washers and differential pinions. 5. Align hole in pinion mate shaft (2) with hole in the differential case and install lock screw (1) with Loctite(R) on the threads. Tighten lock screw to 11 Nm (8 ft. lbs.). 6. Install differential cover and fill with gear lubricant to the bottom of the fill plug hole. 7. Install brake rotor, caliper adapter and caliper. 8. Install wheel and tire. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly > Axle Shaft > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Axle - C205FD > Page 8034 Axle Shaft: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL 1. Remove half shaft from vehicle. 2. Clean axle seal area. 3. Remove O-ring (1) and snap ring (2) from axle shaft (3). 4. Remove axle with Remove 8420A (2,3,4) and Slide Hammer C-3752. Installation INSTALLATION Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly > Axle Shaft > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Axle - C205FD > Page 8035 1. Lubricate bearing bore and seal lip with gear lubricant. 2. Install axle shaft with new snap ring and verify axle shaft snap ring is seated in side gear. 3. Install o-ring (1) and snap ring (2) on axle shaft (3). 4. Install half shaft. 5. Verify differential fluid level and add fluid if necessary. Removal REMOVAL 1. With the vehicle in neutral, position vehicle on hoist. 2. Remove brake caliper, rotor and ABS wheel speed sensor if equipped. 3. Remove axle shaft (2) cotter pin (3), hub nut (1) and washer. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly > Axle Shaft > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Axle - C205FD > Page 8036 4. Remove four hub bearing bolts (2) from the back of the steering knuckle. 5. Remove hub bearing from the steering knuckle. 6. Remove axle shaft (2) from steering knuckle (1) and axle housing. Installation INSTALLATION 1. Clean axle shaft and apply a thin film of grease to the shaft splines and hub bore. 2. Install axle shaft (2) through the steering knuckle (3) and into the differential side gears. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly > Axle Shaft > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Axle - C205FD > Page 8037 3. Install hub bearing in the knuckle. 4. Install hub bearing bolts (2) and tighten to 202 Nm (149 ft. lbs.). 5. Install ABS wheel speed sensor, brake rotor and caliper. 6. Install axle (2) washer and nut (1). Tighten axle nut to 179 Nm (132 ft. lbs.). 7. Rotate axle several 5 to 10 times to seat the wheel bearing. 8. Tighten axle nut (1) to final torque of 356 Nm (263 ft. lbs.). 9. Align nut to next cotter pin hole and install new cotter pin (3). Removal REMOVAL 1. With the vehicle in neutral, position vehicle on hoist. 2. Remove brake caliper, caliper adapter, hub extension, rotor and ABS sensor. 3. Bend axle shaft hub nut (1) collar out of the axle keyway. 4. Remove axle shaft hub nut (1). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly > Axle Shaft > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Axle - C205FD > Page 8038 5. Remove four hub bearing bolts (1) from the back of the steering knuckle. 6. Remove hub bearing from the steering knuckle. 7. Remove axle shaft (1) with hub bearing shim (2) from axle. Installation INSTALLATION 1. Clean axle shaft and apply a thin film of grease to the shaft splines and hub bore. 2. Install axle shaft (1) with hub bearing shim (2) into the axle. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly > Axle Shaft > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Axle - C205FD > Page 8039 3. Install hub bearing in the knuckle. 4. Install hub bearing bolts (1) and tighten to 200 Nm (147 ft. lbs.). 5. Install ABS sensor, brake rotor (1), hub extension (2), caliper adapter and caliper. 6. Install axle hub nut (3) and tighten nut to 330 Nm (243 ft. lbs.). 7. Bend axle shaft hub nut (3) collar into axle keyway with a hammer and punch. Removal REMOVAL 1. With vehicle in neutral, position vehicle on hoist. 2. Remove wheel and tire assembly. 3. Remove brake caliper (3), adapter (2) and rotor (1). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly > Axle Shaft > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Axle - C205FD > Page 8040 4. Remove differential housing cover and drain lubricant. 5. Rotate differential case so pinion mate shaft lock screw is accessible. Remove lock screw (1) and pinion mate shaft (2) from differential case. 6. Push axle shaft (2) inward and remove C-lock (1) from the axle shaft. 7. Remove axle shaft (1) carefully to prevent damage to the shaft bearing and seal in the axle tube. Installation INSTALLATION Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly > Axle Shaft > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Axle - C205FD > Page 8041 1. Lubricate bearing bore and seal lip with gear lubricant. 2. Install axle shaft and engage into side gear splines. NOTE: Use care to prevent shaft splines from damaging axle shaft seal. 3. Insert C-lock (1) in end of axle shaft (2) then push axle shaft outward to seat C-lock in side gear (3). 4. Insert pinion shaft into differential case and through thrust washers and differential pinions. 5. Align hole in pinion mate shaft (2) with hole in the differential case and install lock screw (1) with Loctite(R) on the threads. Tighten lock screw to 11 Nm (8 ft. lbs.). 6. Install differential cover and fill with gear lubricant to the bottom of the fill plug hole. 7. Install brake rotor, caliper adapter and caliper. 8. Install wheel and tire. Removal REMOVAL 1. Remove axle shaft flange (1) bolts (2). 2. Slide axle shaft out of the axle tube. 3. Remove axle shaft gasket. Installation Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly > Axle Shaft > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Axle - C205FD > Page 8042 INSTALLATION NOTE: Axle flange bolts must be replaced or cleaned existing bolts apply Mopar(TM) Lock N' Seal or Loctite(R) 242 on the threads. 1. Clean axle flange and hub. 2. Install new axle shaft gasket. 3. Slide axle shaft into the axle tube. 4. Install axle shaft flange (1) bolts (2) and tighten to 129 Nm (95 ft. lbs.). Removal REMOVAL 1. Remove axle shaft flange (1) bolts (2). 2. Slide axle shaft out of the axle tube. 3. Remove axle shaft gasket. Installation INSTALLATION NOTE: Axle flange bolts must be replaced or use Mopar(TM) Lock N' Seal or Loctite(R) 242 on cleaned existing bolts. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly > Axle Shaft > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Axle - C205FD > Page 8043 1. Clean axle flange and hub. 2. Install new axle shaft gasket. 3. Slide axle shaft into the axle tube. 4. Install axle shaft flange (1) bolts (2) and tighten to 129 Nm ( 95 ft. lbs.). Removal REMOVAL 1. Remove axle shaft bolts (1) from axle flange (2). 2. Slide axle shaft (1) out of the axle. 3. Remove axle shaft O-ring (1) from axle flange (2). Installation INSTALLATION Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly > Axle Shaft > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Axle - C205FD > Page 8044 1. Install new O-ring (1) on axle flange (2). 2. Slide axle shaft (1) into the axle. 3. Install bolts (1) in axle flange (2) and tighten to 133 Nm (98 ft. lbs.). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly > Axle Shaft > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Axle - C205FD > Page 8045 4. Remove fill plug (1), from right side of carrier. 5. With axle level, fill carrier with lubricant to the bottom of the fill plug hole. 6. Install fill plug (1) and tighten to 68 Nm (50 ft. lbs.). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly > Constant Velocity Joint > Component Information > Service and Repair > CV Joint-Outer Constant Velocity Joint: Service and Repair CV Joint-Outer Removal REMOVAL 1. Clamp shaft in a vise (with soft jaws) and support C/V joint. CAUTION: Do not damage C/V housing or half shaft. 2. Remove clamps (2) (4) with a cut-off wheel or grinder. 3. Slide the boot down the shaft. 4. Remove lubricant to expose the C/V joint snap ring (1). 5. Spread snap ring (1) and slide the joint off the shaft. 6. Slide boot off the shaft and discard old boot. 7. Mark alignment marks (1) on the inner race/hub (2), bearing cage (3) and housing with dabs of paint. 8. Clamp C/V joint in a vertical position in a soft jawed vise. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly > Constant Velocity Joint > Component Information > Service and Repair > CV Joint-Outer > Page 8050 9. Press down one side of the bearing cage (3) to gain access to the ball at the opposite side. NOTE: If joint is tight, use a hammer and brass drift to loosen the bearing hub. Do not contact the bearing cage with the drift. 10. Remove ball (4) from the bearing cage (3). 11. Repeat step above until all six balls are removed from the bearing cage. 12. Lift cage and inner race (2) upward and out from the housing (1). 13. Turn inner race 90° in the cage and rotate the inner race/hub out of the cage. Installation INSTALLATION Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly > Constant Velocity Joint > Component Information > Service and Repair > CV Joint-Outer > Page 8051 NOTE: If C/V joint is worn, replace entire C/V joint and boot. 1. Clean all C/V joint components and shaft. 2. Apply a light coat of grease supplied with the joint/boot to the C/V joint components before assembling them. 3. Align the inner race (1) cage (2) and housing according to the alignment reference marks. 4. Insert the inner race (1) into the cage (2) and rotate race into the cage. 5. Rotate the inner race/hub (2) in the cage. 6. Insert cage (2) into the housing. Rotate the cage 90° into the housing (3) so the large bearing hub counterbore is facing outwards. 7. Apply the grease supplied with the joint/boot to the ball races. Spread the grease equally between all the races. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly > Constant Velocity Joint > Component Information > Service and Repair > CV Joint-Outer > Page 8052 8. Tilt inner race/hub (1) and cage (3) and install the balls(4). 9. Place new clamps onto new boot and slide boot onto the shaft to it's original position. 10. Apply the rest of grease to the C/V joint and boot. 11. Install the joint onto the shaft (2). Push the joint onto the shaft until the snap ring (1) seats in the groove (3). NOTE: Pull on the joint to verify the span ring has engaged. 12. Position the boot on the joint in it's original position. NOTE: Verify boot is not twisted and remove any excess air. 13. Secure both boot (5) clamps (2) (4) with Clamp Installer C-4975A. Place tool on clamp bridge and tighten tool until jaws of the tool are closed. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly > Constant Velocity Joint > Component Information > Service and Repair > CV Joint-Outer > Page 8053 Constant Velocity Joint: Service and Repair CV Joint-Inner Removal REMOVAL 1. Clamp shaft in vise (with soft jaws) and support C/V joint. 2. Remove clamps (2) (4) with a cut-off wheel or grinder. CAUTION: Do not damage C/V housing or half shaft with cut-off wheel or grinder. 3. Remove housing (2) from the half shaft and slide boot (1) down shaft. 4. Remove housing bushing from the housing. 5. Remove tripod (2) snap ring (1). 6. Remove tripod (2) and boot from the half shaft. 7. Clean and inspect C/V components for excessive wear and damage. Replace the tripod as a unit only if necessary. Installation Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly > Constant Velocity Joint > Component Information > Service and Repair > CV Joint-Outer > Page 8054 INSTALLATION 1. Clean all C/V joint components and shaft. 2. Slide new boot (1) down the half shaft. 3. Install tripod (2) and tripod snap ring on the half shaft. 4. Pack grease supplied with the joint/boot into the housing and boot. 5. Coat tripod with supplied grease. 6. Install new bushing (1) onto the housing (2). 7. Insert the tripod and shaft in the housing. 8. Position the boot (2) on the housing (5) and shaft (4) in it's original position. NOTE: Verify boot is not twisted and remove any excess air. 9. Measure the distance from the end of the housing to the end of the boot on the shaft. This measurement should be 260 mm (10.25 in.). NOTE: If measurement is not correct, allow more or less air into the boot. 10. Secure both boot clamps (1) (3) with Clamp Installer C-4975A. Place tool on clamp bridge and tighten tool until the jaws of the tool are closed. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly > Universal Joint, Half Shaft/Short Shaft > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Axle - 9 1/4 AA Universal Joint: Service and Repair Front Axle - 9 1/4 AA Removal REMOVAL NOTE: Saturate bearing caps with penetrating oil prior to removal. 1. Remove axle shaft. 2. Remove bearing cap snap rings (1) from stub shaft yoke (2) bearing caps. 3. Position receiver/socket (2) and driver/socket (1) on stub shaft yoke (3) in press. Press bearing cup into receiver/socket (2). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly > Universal Joint, Half Shaft/Short Shaft > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Axle - 9 1/4 AA > Page 8059 4. Remove bearing cap (1) from stub shaft yoke (2). 5. Position receiver/socket (2) under stub shaft yoke (3) remaining bearing cup and driver/socket (1) on U-joint cross in press. Press bearing cup into receiver/socket (2) 6. Remove bearing cap (1) from stub shaft yoke (2). Then remove stub shaft from U-joint cross. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly > Universal Joint, Half Shaft/Short Shaft > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Axle - 9 1/4 AA > Page 8060 7. Remove snap rings (1) from shaft yoke (2) bearing caps. 8. Position receiver/socket (2) and driver/socket (1) on shaft yoke (3) in press. Press bearing cup into receiver/socket (2). 9. Remove bearing cap (1) from shaft yoke (2). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly > Universal Joint, Half Shaft/Short Shaft > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Axle - 9 1/4 AA > Page 8061 10. Position receiver/socket (2) under shaft yoke (3) remaining bearing cup and driver/socket (1) on U-joint cross in press. Press bearing cup into receiver/socket (2) 11. Remove bearing cap (1) from shaft yoke (2). Then remove U-joint cross from shaft yoke. Installation INSTALLATION Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly > Universal Joint, Half Shaft/Short Shaft > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Axle - 9 1/4 AA > Page 8062 CAUTION: Keep cross and bearing cap straight during installation. Failure to follow these instruction will result in damage. 1. Pack bearing caps 1/3 full of wheel bearing lubricant. Apply extreme pressure (EP), lithium-base lubricant to aid in installation. 2. Position cross (1) in the shaft yoke (2). 3. Tap bearing cap into the yoke bores far enough to position cross. 4. Position receiver/socket (1) on shaft yoke and driver/socket (2) on bearing cap in press. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly > Universal Joint, Half Shaft/Short Shaft > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Axle - 9 1/4 AA > Page 8063 5. Press bearing cap into shaft yoke (1) until bearing cap snap ring groove is visible and install snap ring (2). 6. Position receiver/socket (1) on shaft yoke and driver/socket (2) on bearing cap in press. 7. Press bearing cap into shaft yoke (1) until bearing cap snap ring groove is visible and install snap ring (2). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly > Universal Joint, Half Shaft/Short Shaft > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Axle - 9 1/4 AA > Page 8064 8. Install stub shaft yoke (1) on U-joint cross (2). 9. Tap fist bearing cap into the stub shaft yoke bore far enough to position cross. 10. Position receiver/socket (1) on shaft yoke and driver/socket (2) on bearing cap in press. 11. Press bearing cap into stub shaft yoke (1) until bearing cap snap ring groove is visible and install snap ring (2). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly > Universal Joint, Half Shaft/Short Shaft > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Axle - 9 1/4 AA > Page 8065 12. Position receiver/socket (1) on stub shaft yoke and driver/socket (2) on bearing cap in press. 13. Press bearing cap into stub shaft yoke (1) until bearing cap snap ring groove is visible and install snap ring (2). 14. Install axle shaft. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly > Universal Joint, Half Shaft/Short Shaft > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Axle - 9 1/4 AA > Page 8066 Universal Joint: Service and Repair Front Axle - 275FBI Removal REMOVAL 1. Remove bearing cap snap rings (1) from the axle yoke (2) and stub shaft yoke (3). NOTE: Saturate bearing caps with penetrating oil prior to removal. 2. Position receiver/socket (2) and driver/socket (1) on stub shaft yoke (3) in press. Press bearing cup into receiver/socket (2). 3. Remove bearing cap (1) from stub shaft yoke (2). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly > Universal Joint, Half Shaft/Short Shaft > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Axle - 9 1/4 AA > Page 8067 4. Position receiver/socket (2) under stub shaft yoke (3) remaining bearing cup and driver/socket (1) on U-joint cross in press. Press bearing cup into receiver/socket (2) 5. Remove bearing cap (1) from stub shaft yoke (2). Then remove stub shaft from U-joint cross. 6. Position receiver/socket (2) and driver/socket (1) on shaft yoke (3) in press. Press bearing cup into receiver/socket (2). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly > Universal Joint, Half Shaft/Short Shaft > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Axle - 9 1/4 AA > Page 8068 7. Remove bearing cap (1) from shaft yoke (2). 8. Position receiver/socket (2) under shaft yoke (3) remaining bearing cup and driver/socket (1) on U-joint cross in press. Press bearing cup into receiver/socket (2) 9. Remove bearing cap (1) from shaft yoke (2). Then remove U-joint cross from shaft yoke. Installation INSTALLATION Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly > Universal Joint, Half Shaft/Short Shaft > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Axle - 9 1/4 AA > Page 8069 CAUTION: Keep cross and bearing cap straight during installation. Failure to follow these instruction will result in damage. 1. Pack bearing caps 1/3 full of wheel bearing lubricant. Apply extreme pressure (EP), lithium-base lubricant to aid in installation. 2. Position cross (1) in the shaft yoke (2). 3. Tap bearing cap into the yoke bores far enough to position cross. 4. Position receiver/socket (1) on shaft yoke and driver/socket (2) on bearing cap in press. 5. Press bearing cap into shaft yoke until bearing cap snap ring groove is visible and install snap ring. 6. Position receiver/socket (1) on shaft yoke (2) and driver/socket on bearing cap in press. 7. Press bearing cap into shaft yoke until bearing cap snap ring groove is visible and install snap ring. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly > Universal Joint, Half Shaft/Short Shaft > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Axle - 9 1/4 AA > Page 8070 8. Install stub shaft yoke (1) on U-joint cross (2). 9. Tap fist bearing cap into the stub shaft yoke bore far enough to position cross. 10. Position receiver/socket (1) on shaft yoke (2) and driver/socket on bearing cap in press. 11. Press bearing cap into stub shaft yoke until bearing cap snap ring groove is visible and install snap ring. 12. Position receiver/socket (1) on stub shaft yoke and driver/socket (2) on bearing cap in press. 13. Press bearing cap into stub shaft yoke until bearing cap snap ring groove is visible and install snap ring. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Specifications Wheel Bearing: Specifications Wheel Bearing Grease ............................................................................................................. Mopar Multi-Purpose Lubricant NLGI Grade 2 EP, GC-LB Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Hub / Bearing - Removal Wheel Bearing: Service and Repair Front Hub / Bearing - Removal 4X4 - Independent Front Suspension 4X4 1. Raise and support the vehicle. 2. Remove the wheel and tire assembly. 3. Remove the brake caliper and rotor See: Brakes and Traction Control/Disc Brake System/Brake Rotor/Disc/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Brake Rotor - Removal . 4. Remove the ABS wheel speed sensor if equipped, See: Brakes and Traction Control/Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems/Wheel Speed Sensor/Service and Repair/Front Wheel Speed Sensor - Removal . 5. Remove the halfshaft nut. NOTE: Do not strike the knuckle with a hammer to remove the tie rod end or the ball joint. Damage to the steering knuckle will occur. 6. Remove the tie rod end nut and separate the tie rod from the knuckle using remover 9360. 7. Remove the upper ball joint nut and separate the upper ball joint from the knuckle using remover 9360. 8. Pull down on the steering knuckle to separate the halfshaft (2) from the hub/bearing. 9. Remove the three hub/bearing mounting bolts (1) from the steering knuckle. 10. Slide the hub/bearing out of the steering knuckle. 11. Remove the brake dust shield. 2500 & 3500 - 4WD - Link/Coil 2500 & 3500 - 4WD 1. Raise and support the vehicle. 2. Remove the wheel and tire assembly. 3. Remove the hub extension (1) mounting nuts and remove the extension from the rotor if equipped. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Hub / Bearing - Removal > Page 8076 4. Remove the brake caliper, See: Brakes and Traction Control/Disc Brake System/Brake Caliper/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Disc Brake Caliper - Removal . 5. Remove the cotter pin (2) and the hub nut (1) from the axle shaft. 6. Remove the caliper adapter. See: Brakes and Traction Control/Disc Brake System/Brake Caliper/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Disc Brake Caliper Adapter - Removal . 7. Remove the disc brake rotor. See: Brakes and Traction Control/Disc Brake System/Brake Rotor/Disc/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Brake Rotor - Removal . 8. Disconnect the wheel speed sensor wire. 9. Remove the hub/bearing 4 mounting bolts and remove the hub/bearing. 4500 & 5500 - Link/Coil 4500 & 5500 1. Raise and support the vehicle. 2. Remove the wheel and tire assembly. 3. Remove the brake caliper, See: Brakes and Traction Control/Disc Brake System/Brake Caliper/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Disc Brake Caliper - Removal . 4. Remove the caliper adapter. See: Brakes and Traction Control/Disc Brake System/Brake Caliper/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Disc Brake Caliper Adapter - Removal . 5. Remove the hub extension (2) and disc brake rotor (1) See: Brakes and Traction Control/Disc Brake System/Brake Rotor/Disc/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Brake Rotor - Removal . 6. Remove the axle shaft nut (3) from the axle shaft. 7. Disconnect the wheel speed sensor wire and remove the wheel speed sensor bolt (1) from the hub/bearing then remove the sensor (2). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Hub / Bearing - Removal > Page 8077 8. Remove the hub/bearing 4 mounting bolts (1) and remove the hub/bearing. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Hub / Bearing - Removal > Page 8078 Wheel Bearing: Service and Repair Front Hub / Bearing - Installation 4X4 - Independent Front Suspension 4X4 1. Install the brake dust shield (2). 2. Install the hub/bearing (1) into the steering knuckle (3) and tighten the bolts to 163 Nm (120 ft. lbs.). 3. Install the brake rotor and caliper See: Brakes and Traction Control/Disc Brake System/Brake Rotor/Disc/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Brake Rotor - Installation . 4. Install the ABS wheel speed sensor if equipped See: Brakes and Traction Control/Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems/Wheel Speed Sensor/Service and Repair/Front Wheel Speed Sensor - Installation . 5. Install the upper ball joint nut to the steering knuckle and tighten to 54 Nm (40 ft. lbs.) (on 1500 series only an additional 90° turn). 6. Install the tie rod end nut to the steering knuckle and tighten to 61 Nm (45 ft. lbs.) then an additional 90°. 7. Install the halfshaft nut and tighten to 251 Nm (185 ft. lbs.). 8. Install the wheel and tire assembly See: Maintenance/Wheels and Tires/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement . 9. Remove the support and lower vehicle. 2500 & 3500 - 4WD - Link/Coil 2500 & 3500 - 4WD 1. Position the brake shield (1) on bolts. 2. Install the hub/bearing to the knuckle. Tighten the hub/bearing bolts (2) to 202 Nm (149 ft. lbs. 3. Install the hub nut and tighten to 356 Nm (263 ft. lbs.). 4. Install the wheel speed sensor to the hub. See: Brakes and Traction Control/Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems/Wheel Speed Sensor/Service and Repair/Front Wheel Speed Sensor - Installation . 5. Install the disc brake rotor. See: Brakes and Traction Control/Disc Brake System/Brake Rotor/Disc/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Brake Rotor - Installation . Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Hub / Bearing - Removal > Page 8079 6. Install the brake caliper adapter with the caliper, See: Brakes and Traction Control/Disc Brake System/Brake Caliper/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Disc Brake Caliper Adapter - Installation . 7. Install the hub extension and nuts to the front rotor. Tighten nuts to 130 Nm (96 ft.lbs). HD DRW ONLY. 8. Install the wheel and tire assemblies, See: Maintenance/Wheels and Tires/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement . 9. Remove the support and lower the vehicle. 10. Apply the brakes several times to seat the brake shoes and caliper piston. Do not move the vehicle until a firm brake pedal is obtained. 4500 & 5500 - Link/Coil 4500 & 5500 NOTE: If installing a NEW hub/bearing on a 4X4 only Steps 1-3 should be followed for the correct shim size. 1. Measure from the new hub/bearing unit crimp (2) to the flange (3). 2. Choose the correct shim according to the table: 3. Check the shim (2) on the axle shaft (3). Be sure that the shim (2) is placed with the radius side (1) to the joint. 4. Install the hub/bearing to the knuckle. Tighten the hub/bearing bolts (1) to 202 Nm (149 ft. lbs. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Hub / Bearing - Removal > Page 8080 5. Install the axle nut (3) and tighten to 356 Nm (263 ft. lbs.). 6. Install the wheel speed sensor 2) to the hub and tighten the bolt (1). See: Brakes and Traction Control/Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems/Wheel Speed Sensor/Service and Repair/Front Wheel Speed Sensor - Installation . 7. Install the disc brake rotor (1). See: Brakes and Traction Control/Disc Brake System/Brake Rotor/Disc/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Brake Rotor - Installation . 8. Install the hub extension (2) and nuts to the front rotor. Tighten nuts to 130 Nm (96 ft.lbs). 9. Install the brake caliper adapter with the caliper, See: Brakes and Traction Control/Disc Brake System/Brake Caliper/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Disc Brake Caliper Adapter - Installation . 10. Install the wheel and tire assemblies, See: Maintenance/Wheels and Tires/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement . 11. Remove the support and lower the vehicle. 12. Apply the brakes several times to seat the brake shoes and caliper piston. Do not move the vehicle until a firm brake pedal is obtained. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Wheel Hub > Axle Nut > Component Information > Specifications > 4X4 - Independent Front Suspension Axle Nut: Specifications 4X4 - Independent Front Suspension 4X4 Install the halfshaft nut and tighten to 251 Nm (185 ft. lbs.). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Wheel Hub > Axle Nut > Component Information > Specifications > 4X4 - Independent Front Suspension > Page 8086 Axle Nut: Specifications 2500 & 3500 - 4WD - Link/Coil 2500 & 3500 - 4WD Install the hub nut and tighten to 356 Nm (263 ft. lbs.). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Wheel Hub > Axle Nut > Component Information > Specifications > 4X4 - Independent Front Suspension > Page 8087 Axle Nut: Specifications 4500 & 5500 - Link/Coil 4500 & 5500 Install the axle nut (3) and tighten to 356 Nm (263 ft. lbs.). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive/Propeller Shafts, Bearings and Joints > Center Support > Component Information > Adjustments > Center Bearing LD Center Support: Adjustments Center Bearing LD BEARING CENTER Launch shudder is a vibration that occurs at first acceleration from a stop. Shudder vibration usually peaks at the engines highest torque output. Shudder is a symptom associated with vehicles using a two-piece propeller shaft. To decrease shudder, lower the center bearing in 3.0 mm (0.125 in.) increments. Use shim stock or fabricated plates. Do not use washers. Replace the original bolts with the appropriate increased length bolts. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive/Propeller Shafts, Bearings and Joints > Center Support > Component Information > Adjustments > Center Bearing LD > Page 8093 Center Support: Adjustments Center Bearing HD BEARING CENTER Launch shudder is a vibration that occurs at first acceleration from a stop. Shudder vibration usually peaks at the engines highest torque output. Shudder is a symptom associated with vehicles using a two-piece propeller shaft. To decrease shudder, lower the center bearing in 3.0 mm (0.125 in.) increments. Use shim stock or fabricated plates. Do not use washers. Replace the original bolts with the appropriate increased length bolts. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive/Propeller Shafts, Bearings and Joints > Center Support > Component Information > Service and Repair > Center Bearing LD Center Support: Service and Repair Center Bearing LD Removal REMOVAL 1. Remove rear propeller shaft. 2. Make installation reference marks on the shaft (1) and slip yoke (2). 3. Remove slip joint boot (1) clamp (2). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive/Propeller Shafts, Bearings and Joints > Center Support > Component Information > Service and Repair > Center Bearing LD > Page 8096 4. Slide boot (1) off boot collar (2) and separate the two shafts. 5. Position Bearing Splitter Tool 1130 (2) between slinger and center bearing (1). 6. Install Bridge 938 (3) on the splitter (2) and remove center bearing (1). Installation INSTALLATION Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive/Propeller Shafts, Bearings and Joints > Center Support > Component Information > Service and Repair > Center Bearing LD > Page 8097 1. Install new slinger on shaft if removed and drive into position with appropriate installer tool. 2. Install new center bearing (1) and boot collar (2) on shaft. 3. Install bearing (1) and boot collar (2) on shaft with Installer 6052 (3). 4. Clean shaft splines and apply a coat of multi-purpose grease. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive/Propeller Shafts, Bearings and Joints > Center Support > Component Information > Service and Repair > Center Bearing LD > Page 8098 5. Align master splines and slide front and rear half-shafts together. 6. Position slip yoke boot (1) on boot collar and install clamp (2). 7. Install propeller shaft in vehicle. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive/Propeller Shafts, Bearings and Joints > Center Support > Component Information > Service and Repair > Center Bearing LD > Page 8099 Center Support: Service and Repair Center Bearing HD Removal REMOVAL 2500 AND 3500 1. Remove rear propeller shaft. 2. Make installation reference marks on rear shaft (1) and front shaft (2). 3. Remove slip joint boot (1) clamp (2). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive/Propeller Shafts, Bearings and Joints > Center Support > Component Information > Service and Repair > Center Bearing LD > Page 8100 4. Slide boot (1) off boot collar (2) and separate the two shafts. 5. Position Bearing Splitter Tool 1130 (1) between propeller shaft and center bearing (2). 6. Install Bridge 938 (3) on the splitter (1) and remove center bearing. 4500 AND 5500 1. Remove rear propeller shaft. 2. Make installation reference marks on rear shaft, center bearing yoke (1) and front shaft (2). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive/Propeller Shafts, Bearings and Joints > Center Support > Component Information > Service and Repair > Center Bearing LD > Page 8101 3. Remove joint from center bearing yoke. 4. Remove center bearing yoke (1) nut (2) and washer (3). Discard yoke nut. 5. Remove center bearing yoke (1) from shaft with two jaw puller. 6. Position Bearing Splitter Tool 1130 (1) between propeller shaft and center bearing (2). 7. Install Bridge 938 (3) on the splitter (1) and remove center bearing. Installation INSTALLATION 2500 AND 3500 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive/Propeller Shafts, Bearings and Joints > Center Support > Component Information > Service and Repair > Center Bearing LD > Page 8102 1. Slide center bearing (1) and boot collar (2) on shaft. 2. Install boot collar (2) and center bearing (1) with Installer 6448A. 3. Clean shaft splines and apply a coat of multi-purpose grease. 4. Align master splines and slide front and rear half-shafts together. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive/Propeller Shafts, Bearings and Joints > Center Support > Component Information > Service and Repair > Center Bearing LD > Page 8103 5. Slide slip yoke boot (1) on boot collar (2). 6. Install slip yoke boot (1) clamp (2). 7. Install propeller shaft in vehicle. 4500 AND 5500 1. Slide center bearing (1) on shaft (2). 2. Install center bearing (1) with Installer MD 998805 (2). 3. Clean shaft splines and apply a coat of multi-purpose grease. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive/Propeller Shafts, Bearings and Joints > Center Support > Component Information > Service and Repair > Center Bearing LD > Page 8104 4. Install center bearing yoke (1) and front shaft (2) with reference marks aligned. 5. Install center bearing yoke (1) new nut (2) and washer (3). 6. Tighten nut to 678 Nm (500 ft. lbs.). 7. Install joint in center bearing yoke (1). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive/Propeller Shafts, Bearings and Joints > Drive/Propeller Shaft > Component Information > Specifications Drive/Propeller Shaft: Specifications PROPELLER SHAFT Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive/Propeller Shafts, Bearings and Joints > Drive/Propeller Shaft > Component Information > Specifications > Page 8108 Drive/Propeller Shaft: Testing and Inspection PROPELLER SHAFT PROPELLER SHAFT VIBRATION Out-of-round tires or wheels that are out of balance, will cause a low frequency vibration. Driveline vibration can also be caused by loose or damaged engine mounts. Propeller shaft vibration increases with vehicle speed. A vibration that occurs at a specific speed range, is not usually caused by an out of balance propeller shaft. Defective universal joints or an incorrect propeller shaft angle are usually the cause of such a vibration. PROPELLER SHAFT BALANCE If propeller shaft is suspected of being out of balance, use the following procedure. NOTE: Indexing propeller shaft 180 degrees relative to the yoke may eliminate some vibrations. 1. Raise and support vehicle. 2. Clean all foreign material from the propeller shaft and universal joints. 3. Inspect propeller shaft for missing balance weights, broken welds and bent areas. If propeller shaft is bent, it must be replaced. 4. Inspect universal joints for wear and properly installed. 5. Check propeller shaft bolt torques. 6. Remove wheels and install lug nuts to retain brake rotors. 7. Mark and number the shaft six inches from the pinion yoke end at four positions 90 degrees apart. 8. Run and accelerate vehicle until vibration occurs. Note the intensity and speed the vibration occurred. Stop the engine. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive/Propeller Shafts, Bearings and Joints > Drive/Propeller Shaft > Component Information > Specifications > Page 8109 9. Install a screw clamp at position (1). 10. Start engine and check vibration. If there is little or no change move the clamp to the next positions. Repeat the vibration test. NOTE: If there is no difference in vibration at this positions, the vibration may not be the propeller shaft. 11. If vibration decreased, install a second clamp (1) and repeat the test. 12. If additional clamp causes an additional vibration, separate the clamps 1/2 inch (1) above and below the mark. Repeat the vibration test. 13. Increase distance between the clamp screws (1) (2) and repeat test, until the least amount of vibration is noticed. Bend the slack end of the clamps so screws will not loosen. 14. If vibration remains unacceptable, repeat the procedure to the front end of the propeller shaft. 15. Install wheels and lower vehicle. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive/Propeller Shafts, Bearings and Joints > Drive/Propeller Shaft > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures Drive/Propeller Shaft: Procedures Propeller Shaft Angle PROPELLER SHAFT ANGLE ONE PIECE PROPELLER SHAFT This procedure applies to front and rear propeller shafts. NOTE: To obtain output angle (A) on the front propeller shaft equipped with a C/V joint, place inclinometer on machined surface of the C/V joint. 1. Raise vehicle and support the axles as level as possible, allowing the wheels and propeller shaft to turn. 2. Remove universal joint snap rings if equipped, so inclinometer base sits flat. 3. Rotate shaft until transmission/transfer case output yoke bearing is facing downward. NOTE: Always take measurements from front to rear and on the same side of the vehicle. 4. Place Inclinometer 7663 on yoke bearing cap or pinion flange ring parallel to the shaft. Center bubble in sight glass and record measurement (A). This measurement will give you the transmission yoke Output Angle (A). 5. Rotate propeller shaft 90 degrees and place Inclinometer on yoke bearing parallel to the shaft. Center bubble in sight glass and record measurement. This measurement can also be taken at the rear end of the shaft. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive/Propeller Shafts, Bearings and Joints > Drive/Propeller Shaft > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 8112 This measurement will give you the Propeller Shaft Angle (C). 6. Rotate propeller shaft 90 degrees and place inclinometer on companion flange yoke bearing parallel to the shaft. Center bubble in sight glass and record measurement. This measurement will give you the pinion Companion Flange Input Angle (B). 7. Subtract smaller figure from larger (C minus A) to obtain Transmission/Transfer Case Output Operating Angle. 8. Subtract smaller figure from larger (C minus B) to obtain axle Input Operating Angle. Refer to rules and example for additional information. RULES - Good cancellation of U-joint operating angles should be within 1 degree. - Operating angles should be less than 3 degrees. - Operating angles less than 10 degrees for double cardan U-joint. - At least 1/2 of one degree continuous operating propeller shaft angle. TWO PIECE PROPELLER SHAFT Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive/Propeller Shafts, Bearings and Joints > Drive/Propeller Shaft > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 8113 Two piece propeller shaft angles measurement is the same as a one-piece propeller shaft. Lubrication LUBRICATION Vehicles with double cardan universal joint front propeller shaft (1) are equipped with a grease fitting (2). Grease the double cardan universal joint at each oil change. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive/Propeller Shafts, Bearings and Joints > Drive/Propeller Shaft > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 8114 Drive/Propeller Shaft: Removal and Replacement Front LD REMOVAL 1. With vehicle in neutral, position vehicle on hoist. 2. Remove exhaust crossover pipe. 3. Mark a line across the axle companion flange (1), propeller shaft (2), flange yoke (3) and transfer case for installation reference. 4. Remove axle/transfer case companion flange bolts. Remove dust boot clamp (3) from the C/V joint (1) end of the shaft if equipped. 5. Remove propeller shaft. Front HD REMOVAL Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive/Propeller Shafts, Bearings and Joints > Drive/Propeller Shaft > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 8115 1. With vehicle in neutral, position vehicle on hoist. 2. Remove exhaust crossover pipe. 3. Mark a line across axle (3)/transfer case (2) companion flange and propeller shaft flange yokes for installation reference. 4. Remove axle/transfer case companion flange bolts. 5. Remove propeller shaft. Front LD INSTALLATION 1. Install propeller shaft with all reference marks (4) aligned. 2. Install with dust boot clamp at transfer case end. 3. Install new axle companion flange bolts and tighten to 115 Nm (85 ft. lbs.). NOTE: Companion flange bolts incorporate a Loctite(R) patch, new bolts should be used. If bolts are not available, clean bolts and apply Loctite(R) 242 to the threads. 4. Install skid plate, if equipped. Front HD INSTALLATION Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive/Propeller Shafts, Bearings and Joints > Drive/Propeller Shaft > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 8116 1. Install propeller shaft (1) with all reference marks aligned. 2. Install transfer case companion flange (2) bolts and tighten to 88 Nm (65 ft. lbs.). 3. Install new axle companion flange (3) bolts and tighten to 28 Nm (21 ft. lbs.). NOTE: Companion flange bolts incorporate a Loctite(R) patch, new bolts should be used. If bolts are not available, clean bolts and apply Loctite(R) 242 to the threads. 4. Install skid plate, if equipped. Rear LD REMOVAL 1. With vehicle in neutral, position vehicle on hoist. 2. Mark propeller shaft (1) pinion flange (2) and propeller shaft flange (4) with installation reference marks (3). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive/Propeller Shafts, Bearings and Joints > Drive/Propeller Shaft > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 8117 3. If equipped with manual transmission, mark manual transmission flange (1) and propeller shaft (2) flange for installation reference. 4. If equipped with a center bearing (1) mark an outline of the center bearing (1) on the center bearing bracket for installation reference. Then support propeller shaft and remove mounting bolts (2). 5. Remove pinion flange (1) bolts from propeller shaft (2). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive/Propeller Shafts, Bearings and Joints > Drive/Propeller Shaft > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 8118 6. Slide propeller shaft back off automatic transmission/transfer case output shaft, then mark propeller shaft (1) and transmission/transfer case output shaft (2) for installation reference. 7. If equipped with manual transmission remove flange (1) bolts (2). 8. Remove propeller shaft from vehicle. CAUTION: Failure to follow these instructions may result in a driveline vibration. Rear HD REMOVAL Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive/Propeller Shafts, Bearings and Joints > Drive/Propeller Shaft > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 8119 1. With vehicle in neutral, position vehicle on hoist. 2. Mark propeller shaft (1) pinion flange (2) and propeller shaft flange (4) with installation reference marks (3). 3. Mark transmission flange (1) if equipped and propeller shaft flange (2) for installation reference. 4. If equipped with a center bearing (1) mark an outline of the center bearing on the center bearing bracket for installation reference. Then support Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive/Propeller Shafts, Bearings and Joints > Drive/Propeller Shaft > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 8120 propeller shaft and remove center bearing bolts (2). 5. Remove pinion flange (1) bolts from propeller shaft (2). 6. Slide propeller shaft back off automatic transmission/transfer case output shaft, then mark propeller shaft (1) and transmission/transfer case output shaft (2) for installation reference. 7. If equipped with transmission flange (1) remove bolts (2). 8. Remove propeller shaft from vehicle. CAUTION: Failure to follow these instructions may result in a driveline vibration. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive/Propeller Shafts, Bearings and Joints > Drive/Propeller Shaft > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 8121 Rear LD INSTALLATION 1. Slide slip yoke (1) onto automatic transmission/transfer case output shaft (2) with reference marks aligned. 2. If equipped with manual transmission, align transmission flange (1) and propeller shaft reference marks. Install new flange bolts (2) and tighten to 115 Nm (85 ft. lbs.). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive/Propeller Shafts, Bearings and Joints > Drive/Propeller Shaft > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 8122 3. If two piece propeller shaft, align center bearing (1) with reference marks on center bearing bracket and tighten bolts (2) to 54 Nm (40 ft. lbs.). 4. Align reference marks on propeller shaft and pinion flange. Install new companion flange (1) bolts and tighten to 115 Nm (85 ft. lbs.) CAUTION: Failure to follow these instruction may result in a driveline vibration. Rear HD INSTALLATION 1. Slide slip yoke (1) onto automatic transmission/transfer case output shaft (2) with reference marks aligned. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive/Propeller Shafts, Bearings and Joints > Drive/Propeller Shaft > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 8123 2. If equipped with manual transmission, align transmission flange (1) and propeller shaft reference marks. Install new flange bolts (2) and tighten to 115 Nm (85 ft. lbs.). 3. If two piece propeller shaft, align center bearing (1) with reference marks on center bearing bracket and tighten bolts (2) to 54 Nm (40 ft. lbs.). 4. Align reference marks on propeller shaft and pinion flange. Install new companion flange (1) bolts and tighten to 115 Nm (85 ft. lbs.) CAUTION: Failure to follow these instruction may result in a driveline vibration. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive/Propeller Shafts, Bearings and Joints > Drive/Propeller Shaft > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 8124 Drive/Propeller Shaft: Tools and Equipment PROPELLER SHAFT INSTALLER MD998805 SPLITTER 1130 INSTALLER 6052 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive/Propeller Shafts, Bearings and Joints > Drive/Propeller Shaft > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 8125 INSTALLER 6448A INCLINOMETER 7663 BRIDGE 938 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive/Propeller Shafts, Bearings and Joints > Universal Joint, Drive/Propeller Shaft > Component Information > Service and Repair > Universal Joints-Single Cardan Universal Joint: Service and Repair Universal Joints-Single Cardan Disassembly - With Injected Ring DISASSEMBLY - WITH INJECTED RING 1. Place shaft yoke in vise. 2. Position U-joint press (1) with receiver (2) on propeller shaft yoke. 3. Pressed U-joint bearing caps (1) out of shaft yoke (2). 4. Remove lower bearing cap from shaft yoke. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive/Propeller Shafts, Bearings and Joints > Universal Joint, Drive/Propeller Shaft > Component Information > Service and Repair > Universal Joints-Single Cardan > Page 8130 5. Turn shaft over and position press (1) with receiver (2) on shaft yoke. 6. Press remaining U-joint bearing cap out of shaft yoke. 7. Remove flange (1) with U-joint out of shaft yoke (2). 8. Position U-joint press (2) with receiver (1) on flange. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive/Propeller Shafts, Bearings and Joints > Universal Joint, Drive/Propeller Shaft > Component Information > Service and Repair > Universal Joints-Single Cardan > Page 8131 9. Press U-joint bearing caps (1) out of flange (2). 10. Remove bearing cap on the outside of the flange. 11. Position U-joint press (2) with receiver (1) on flange. 12. Press remaining U-joint bearing cap out of flange. 13. Remove U-joint from flange. Disassembly - With Snap Rings DISASSEMBLY - WITH SNAP RINGS 1. Tap outside of bearing cap with a drift to loosen snap ring. 2. Remove snap rings (1) from both sides of yoke. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive/Propeller Shafts, Bearings and Joints > Universal Joint, Drive/Propeller Shaft > Component Information > Service and Repair > Universal Joints-Single Cardan > Page 8132 3. Position yoke with the grease fitting if equipped, pointing up. 4. Position a socket (2) with a inside diameter large enough to receive the bearing cap, beneath the yoke on a press. 5. Place another socket with an outside diameter smaller than bearing cap on the upper bearing cap and press (1) the lower cap through the yoke. NOTE: If bearing cap will not pull out of the yoke after pressing, tap yoke ear near bearing cap to dislodge the cap. 6. Pull bearing cap of the yoke. 7. Turn yoke over in the press and straighten the cross (1). Press the cross until the remaining bearing cap (2) can be removed. CAUTION: If cross or bearing cap are not straight during removal, the bearing cap will score the walls of the yoke bore and damage can occur. Assembly - With Injected Ring ASSEMBLY - WITH INJECTED RING Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive/Propeller Shafts, Bearings and Joints > Universal Joint, Drive/Propeller Shaft > Component Information > Service and Repair > Universal Joints-Single Cardan > Page 8133 NOTE: Replacement joint has internal snap rings. 1. Place joint in flange with one bearing cap. 2. Position press (3) with receiver (1) on flange and bearing cap (2). 3. Press bearing cap until snap ring groove (1) is through the flange (2). 4. Install snap ring (2) on bearing (1). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive/Propeller Shafts, Bearings and Joints > Universal Joint, Drive/Propeller Shaft > Component Information > Service and Repair > Universal Joints-Single Cardan > Page 8134 5. Position press (3) with receiver (2) on remaining bearing cap (1) and flange. 6. Press bearing cap until snap ring groove is through the flange. 7. Install snap ring (1) on bearing cap (2). 8. Install flange (1) with U-joint in yoke (2). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive/Propeller Shafts, Bearings and Joints > Universal Joint, Drive/Propeller Shaft > Component Information > Service and Repair > Universal Joints-Single Cardan > Page 8135 9. Position press (2) with receiver (1) and lower bearing cap (3) on yoke. 10. Press bearing cap until snap ring groove is through the yoke. 11. Install snap ring (2) on bearing cap (1). 12. Position press (2) with receiver (3) on remaining bearing cap (1) and yoke. 13. Press remaining bearing cap until snap ring groove is through the yoke. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive/Propeller Shafts, Bearings and Joints > Universal Joint, Drive/Propeller Shaft > Component Information > Service and Repair > Universal Joints-Single Cardan > Page 8136 14. Install snap ring (2) on bearing cap (1). Assembly - With Snap Rings ASSEMBLY - WITH SNAP RINGS 1. Apply (EP) N.L.G.I. Grade 1 or 2 grease to inside of yoke bores. 2. Position cross (1) in yoke (2) with lube fitting pointing up, if equipped. 3. Place a bearing cap (1) over the cross end (2) and align cap with yoke bore. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive/Propeller Shafts, Bearings and Joints > Universal Joint, Drive/Propeller Shaft > Component Information > Service and Repair > Universal Joints-Single Cardan > Page 8137 4. Press bearing cap into the yoke bore enough to clear snap ring groove. 5. Repeat STEP 3 and STEP 4 to install the opposite bearing cap. NOTE: If joint is stiff or binding, strike the yoke with a soft hammer to seat the needle bearings. 6. Add grease to lube fitting, if equipped. 7. Install propeller shaft. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive/Propeller Shafts, Bearings and Joints > Universal Joint, Drive/Propeller Shaft > Component Information > Service and Repair > Universal Joints-Single Cardan > Page 8138 Universal Joint: Service and Repair Universal Joints-Double Cardan Disassembly DISASSEMBLY 1. Remove propeller shaft. 2. Mark propeller shaft, link yoke and flange yoke for assembly reference. 3. Tap outside of the bearing cap assembly with drift to loosen snap rings. 4. Remove all bearing cap snap rings. 5. Remove grease fittings if equipped. 6. Position a socket on the press with an inside diameter large enough to receive the bearing cap under the link yoke. 7. Place another socket with an outside diameter smaller than the bearing cap on the upper bearing cap. 8. Press one bearing cap from outboard side of the link yoke, enough to grasp the cap with vise jaws. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive/Propeller Shafts, Bearings and Joints > Universal Joint, Drive/Propeller Shaft > Component Information > Service and Repair > Universal Joints-Single Cardan > Page 8139 9. Grasp protruding bearing cap with vise jaws and tap link yoke with a mallet to remove bearing cap. 10. Flip assembly and repeat STEP 6, STEP 7, STEP 8 and STEP 9 to remove the opposite bearing cap. 11. Remove cross centering kit assembly and spring. 12. Press remaining bearing caps out the other end of the link yoke. Assembly ASSEMBLY CAUTION: All alignment marks on the link yoke and propeller shaft yoke must be aligned during assembled. 1. Apply (EP) N.L.G.I. Grade 1 or 2 grease to inside of yoke bores. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive/Propeller Shafts, Bearings and Joints > Universal Joint, Drive/Propeller Shaft > Component Information > Service and Repair > Universal Joints-Single Cardan > Page 8140 2. Fit cross into the propeller shaft yoke. 3. Place bearing cap over the trunnion and align cap with the yoke bore. Keep needle bearings upright in the bearing cap. 4. Press bearing cap into yoke bore enough to clear snap ring groove and install snap-ring. 5. Flip propeller shaft yoke and install other bearing cap onto the opposite trunnion and install a snap ring. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive/Propeller Shafts, Bearings and Joints > Universal Joint, Drive/Propeller Shaft > Component Information > Service and Repair > Universal Joints-Single Cardan > Page 8141 6. Fit link yoke onto remaining trunnions and press both bearing caps into place and install snap rings. 7. Install centering kit assembly inside the link yoke. NOTE: Verify spring is properly positioned. 8. Place two bearing caps on opposite trunnions of the remaining cross. Fit open trunnions into the link yoke bores and bearing caps into the centering kit. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive/Propeller Shafts, Bearings and Joints > Universal Joint, Drive/Propeller Shaft > Component Information > Service and Repair > Universal Joints-Single Cardan > Page 8142 9. Press remaining two bearing caps into place and install snap rings. 10. Tap snap rings to seat them into the grooves. 11. Flexing the joint beyond center, the joint should snap over-center in both directions if correctly assembled. 12. Install propeller shaft. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Flex Plate > Component Information > Specifications Flex Plate: Specifications INSTALLATION 1. Position the flexplate onto the crankshaft and install the bolts hand tight. 2. Tighten the flexplate retaining bolts to 60 Nm (45 ft. lbs.) in the sequence shown. 3. Install the transmission. See: Automatic Transmission/Transaxle/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/545RFE Automatic Transmission/Installation . Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Flex Plate > Component Information > Service and Repair > Installation Flex Plate: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION 1. Position the flexplate onto the crankshaft and install the bolts hand tight. 2. Tighten the flexplate retaining bolts to 60 Nm (45 ft. lbs.) in the sequence shown. 3. Install the transmission. See: Automatic Transmission/Transaxle/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/545RFE Automatic Transmission/Installation . Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Flywheel > Component Information > Description and Operation Flywheel: Description and Operation DESCRIPTION STANDARD FLYWHEEL The standard (3) is a heavy plate bolted to the rear of the crankshaft (1). The flywheel incorporates the ring gear (2) around the outer circumference to mesh with the starter to permit engine cranking. The rear face of the flywheel serves as the driving member to the clutch disc. DUAL MASS FLYWHEEL The Dual Mass Flywheel (1) is used on the Diesel engine with G56 transmission. The flywheel incorporates the ring gear around the outer circumference to mesh with the starter to permit engine cranking. The primary flywheel side is bolted to an adapter plate which is bolted to the crankshaft. The secondary flywheel side (2) serves as the driving member to the clutch disc. Internal springs (3) are used to dampen energy. The Dual Mass Flywheel is serviced as an assembly only and should never be taken apart. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Flywheel > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 8151 Flywheel: Testing and Inspection FLYWHEEL Check flywheel (3) runout whenever misalignment is suspected. Flywheel runout should not exceed 0.08 mm (0.003 in.). Measure runout at the outer edge of the flywheel face with a dial indicator. Mount the indicator on a stud installed in place of one of the flywheel bolts. Common causes of runout are: - heat warpage - improper machining - incorrect bolt tightening - improper seating on crankshaft flange shoulder - foreign material on crankshaft flange Flywheel machining is not recommended. The flywheel clutch surface is machined to a unique contour and machining will negate this feature. Minor flywheel scoring can be cleaned up by hand with 180 grit emery or with surface grinding equipment. Remove only enough material to reduce scoring (approximately 0.001 - 0.003 in.). Heavy stock removal is not recommended. Replace the flywheel if scoring is severe and deeper than 0.076 mm (0.003 in.). Excessive stock removal can result in flywheel cracking or warpage after installation; it can also weaken the flywheel and interfere with proper clutch release. Clean the crankshaft flange before mounting the flywheel. Dirt and grease on the flange surface may cock the flywheel causing excessive runout. Use new bolts when remounting a flywheel and secure the bolts with Mopar(TM) Lock And Seal or equivalent. Tighten flywheel bolts to specified torque only. Overtightening can distort the flywheel hub causing runout. On a Dual Mass Flywheel (1) inspect all springs (2) for damage. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Flywheel > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Flywheel: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL 1. Remove transmission. 2. Loosen pressure plate bolts evenly, a few threads at a time and in a diagonal pattern to prevent warping the plate. 3. Remove bolts completely and remove pressure plate and disc. 4. Remove flywheel bolts and remove flywheel. NOTE: Vehicles with Dual Mass Flywheel use an adapter plate between the flywheel and crank. This plate does not need to be removed. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Flywheel > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 8154 Flywheel: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION 1. Install flywheel on the crankshaft or adapter plate if vehicle has Dual Mass flywheel. 2. Install flywheel bolts and tighten evenly in sequence to 95 Nm (70 ft. lbs.). Vehicles with Dual Mass Flywheel, tighten adapter plate bolts to 55 Nm (40 ft. lbs.). 3. Install clutch. 4. Install transmission. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Lamps and Indicators - Transmission and Drivetrain > Lamps and Indicators - A/T > Overdrive Indicator Lamp > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Overdrive Indicator Lamp: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION An overdrive off indicator is standard equipment on all instrument clusters. However, on vehicles not equipped with an optional overdrive automatic transmission, this indicator is electronically disabled. This indicator is located on the right side of the instrument cluster, to the right of the coolant temperature gauge. The overdrive off indicator consists of a stencil-like cutout of the text O/D OFF in the opaque layer of the instrument cluster overlay. The dark outer layer of the overlay prevents the indicator from being clearly visible when it is not illuminated. An amber Light Emitting Diode (LED) behind the cutout in the opaque layer of the overlay causes the indicator to appear in amber through the translucent outer layer of the overlay when it is illuminated from behind by the LED, which is soldered onto the instrument cluster electronic circuit board. When the exterior lighting is turned ON, the illumination intensity of the overdrive off indicator is dimmable, which is adjusted along with the cluster general illumination lighting using the panel lamps dimmer thumbwheel on the headlamp switch. The overdrive off indicator is serviced as a unit with the instrument cluster. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Lamps and Indicators - Transmission and Drivetrain > Lamps and Indicators - A/T > Overdrive Indicator Lamp > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 8161 Overdrive Indicator Lamp: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The overdrive off indicator gives an indication to the vehicle operator when the overdrive-OFF position of the tow/haul switch has been selected, disabling the electronically controlled overdrive feature of the automatic transmission. This indicator is controlled by a transistor on the instrument cluster circuit board based upon cluster programming and electronic messages received by the cluster from the Powertrain Control Module (PCM) over the Controller Area Network (CAN) data bus. The overdrive off indicator Light Emitting Diode (LED) is completely controlled by the instrument cluster logic circuit, and that logic will only allow this indicator to operate when the instrument cluster receives a battery current input on the fused ignition switch output (run-start) circuit. Therefore, the LED will always be OFF when the ignition switch is in any position except ON or START. The LED only illuminates when it is provided a path to ground by the instrument cluster transistor. The instrument cluster will turn ON the overdrive off indicator for the following reasons: - Overdrive Off Indicator Lamp-On Message - Each time the cluster receives an electronic overdrive off indicator lamp-ON message from the PCM indicating that the overdrive-OFF position of the tow/haul switch has been selected, the indicator will be illuminated. The indicator remains illuminated until the cluster receives a lamp-OFF message from the PCM, or until the ignition switch is turned to the OFF position, whichever occurs first. Actuator Test - Each time the cluster is put through the actuator test, the overdrive off indicator will be turned ON, then OFF again during the bulb check portion of the test to confirm the functionality of the LED and the cluster control circuitry. The PCM continually monitors the tow/haul switch to determine the proper outputs to the automatic transmission. The PCM then sends the proper lamp-ON or lamp-OFF message to the ElectroMechanical Instrument Cluster (EMIC) (also known as the Cab Compartment Node/CCN). For further diagnosis of the overdrive off indicator or the instrument cluster circuitry that controls the indicator, Refer to appropriate testing. For proper diagnosis of the transmission control system, the PCM, the EMIC, the CAN data bus or the electronic communication related to overdrive off indicator operation a diagnostic scan tool is required. Refer to the appropriate diagnostic information. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Lamps and Indicators - Transmission and Drivetrain > Lamps and Indicators - A/T > Temperature Warning Indicator - A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Temperature Warning Indicator - A/T: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION A transmission over-temperature indicator is standard equipment on all instrument clusters. However, on vehicles not equipped with an optional automatic transmission, this indicator is electronically disabled. This indicator is located in the lower portion of the tachometer dial face in the instrument cluster overlay. The transmission over-temperature indicator consists of a stencil-like cutout of the International Control and Display Symbol icon for Transmission Temperature in the opaque layer of the instrument cluster overlay. The dark outer layer of the overlay prevents the indicator from being clearly visible when it is not illuminated. A red Light Emitting Diode (LED) behind the cutout in the opaque layer of the overlay causes the indicator to appear in red through the translucent outer layer of the overlay when it is illuminated from behind by the LED, which is soldered onto the instrument cluster electronic circuit board. The transmission over-temperature indicator is serviced as a unit with the instrument cluster. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Lamps and Indicators - Transmission and Drivetrain > Lamps and Indicators - A/T > Temperature Warning Indicator - A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 8166 Temperature Warning Indicator - A/T: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The transmission over-temperature indicator gives an indication to the vehicle operator when the transmission fluid temperature is excessive, which may lead to accelerated transmission component wear or failure. This indicator is controlled by a transistor on the instrument cluster circuit board based upon cluster programming and electronic messages received over the Controller Area Network (CAN) data bus from the Powertrain Control Module (PCM). The transmission over-temperature indicator Light Emitting Diode (LED) is completely controlled by the instrument cluster logic circuit, and that logic will only allow this indicator to operate when the instrument cluster receives a battery current input on the fused ignition switch output (run-start) circuit. Therefore, the LED will always be OFF when the ignition switch is in any position except ON or START. The LED only illuminates when it is provided a path to ground by the instrument cluster transistor. The instrument cluster will turn ON the transmission over-temperature indicator for the following reasons: - Bulb Test - Each time the ignition switch is turned to the ON position the transmission over-temperature indicator is illuminated for about two seconds as a bulb test. - Trans Over-Temp Indicator Lamp-On Message - Each time the cluster receives an electronic trans over-temp indicator lamp-ON message from the PCM indicating that the transmission fluid temperature is 135 °C (275 °F) or higher, the indicator will be illuminated and a single chime tone is sounded. The indicator remains illuminated until the cluster receives a lamp-OFF message from the PCM, or until the ignition switch is turned to the OFF position, whichever occurs first. The chime tone feature will only repeat during the same ignition cycle if the indicator is cycled OFF and then ON again by the appropriate lamp-ON and lamp-OFF messages from the PCM. - Actuator Test - Each time the cluster is put through the actuator test, the transmission over-temperature indicator will be turned ON, then OFF again during the bulb check portion of the test to confirm the functionality of the LED and the cluster control circuitry. The PCM continually monitors the transmission temperature sensor to determine the transmission operating condition. The PCM then sends the proper lamp-ON or lamp-OFF message to the ElectroMechanical Instrument Cluster (EMIC) (also known as the Cab Compartment Node/CCN). If the instrument cluster illuminates the transmission over-temperature indicator due to a high transmission oil temperature condition, it may indicate that the transmission or the transmission cooling system are being overloaded, or that they require service. For further diagnosis of the transmission over-temperature indicator or the instrument cluster circuitry that controls the LED, Refer to appropriate testing. For proper diagnosis of the transmission temperature sensor, the PCM, the EMIC, the CAN data bus or the electronic communication related to transmission over-temperature indicator operation a diagnostic scan tool is required. Refer to the appropriate diagnostic information. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Lamps and Indicators - Transmission and Drivetrain > Lamps and Indicators - A/T > Transmission Mode Indicator - A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Transmission Mode Indicator - A/T: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION An electronic automatic transmission gear selector indicator is standard factory-installed equipment on this vehicle. However, on vehicles not equipped with an optional automatic transmission, this indicator is electronically disabled. The gear selector indicator information is displayed in an electronic, blue-green Vacuum-Fluorescent Display (VFD) unit. This VFD unit is soldered onto the cluster electronic circuit board and is visible through a window with a smoked clear lens located on the lower edge of the speedometer dial face of the cluster overlay. The dark lens over the VFD prevents the indicator from being clearly visible when it is not illuminated. The gear selector indicator displays the following characters from left to right: P, R, N, D, 2, and 1. Each character appears in a blue-green color and at the same lighting level as the odometer information. Respectively, these characters represent the PARK, REVERSE, NEUTRAL, DRIVE, second gear, and first gear positions of the transmission gear selector lever on the steering column. The indicator illuminates a rectangular box around the character that represents the currently selected lever position. During daylight hours (exterior lamps are OFF) the gear selector indicator is illuminated at full brightness for clear visibility. At night (exterior lamps are ON), the indicator lighting level is adjusted with the other cluster general illumination lamps using the panel lamps dimmer thumbwheel on the headlamp switch. However, a PARADE mode position of the panel lamps dimmer thumbwheel allows the indicator to be illuminated at full brightness if the exterior lamps are turned ON during daylight hours. The gear selector indicator is serviced as a unit with the VFD unit in the instrument cluster. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Lamps and Indicators - Transmission and Drivetrain > Lamps and Indicators - A/T > Transmission Mode Indicator - A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 8171 Transmission Mode Indicator - A/T: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The electronic gear selector indicator gives an indication to the vehicle operator of the transmission gear that has been selected with the automatic transmission gear selector lever. This indicator is controlled by the instrument cluster circuit board based upon cluster programming. The cluster circuitry automatically configures itself for the proper transmission type based upon the hard wired transmission range sensor mux circuit input to the cluster. The gear selector indicator information is displayed by the odometer/trip odometer Vacuum Fluorescent Display (VFD) unit soldered onto the instrument cluster electronic circuit board, and the VFD will not display the gear selector indicator information after the ignition switch is turned to the OFF position. Each time the cluster is disconnected from battery current for more than about five minutes, it must configure itself for the automatic transmission type that is in the vehicle once it is reconnected to battery current. The instrument cluster circuitry configures the gear selector indicator based upon the following inputs from the transmission range sensor: - Open Circuit - If the cluster is configured for an automatic transmission and the transmission range sensor mux circuit is open, the cluster circuitry controls the gear selector indicator display based upon an electronic selected gear message received from the Transmission Control Module (TCM) over the Controller Area Network (CAN) data bus. If the Transmission Range Sensor (TRS) mux circuit is open and no electronic selected gear messages are received from the TCM within two seconds, the instrument cluster circuitry will not display any gear selector position until the condition is resolved or until the ignition switch is turned to the OFF position, whichever occurs first. - Resolved Circuit - If the transmission range sensor mux circuit is resolved, the cluster circuitry controls the gear selector indicator display based upon the resistance value of the hard wired input from the TRS. If the cluster is configured for an automatic transmission with a TRS input and detects a short to ground or an open in the TRS mux input, the instrument cluster circuitry will not display any gear selector position in the VFD. The VFD display for the short-to-ground and open circuit conditions will continue until the condition is resolved or until the ignition switch is turned to the OFF position, whichever occurs first. - Actuator Test - Each time the cluster is put through the actuator test, the odometer/trip odometer VFD will display all of its characters at once, then step through each character segment individually during the VFD portion of the test to confirm the functionality of the VFD and the cluster control circuitry. On vehicles with a TCM, the TCM continually monitors the TRS, then sends the proper message to the ElectroMechanical Instrument Cluster (EMIC) (also known as the Cab Compartment Node/CCN). On vehicles without a TCM, the EMIC continually monitors the hard wired TRS multiplexed input. On vehicles with a TCM, for proper diagnosis of the TRS, the TCM, the EMIC, the CAN data bus or the electronic communication related to gear selector indicator operation a diagnostic scan tool is required. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Lamps and Indicators - Transmission and Drivetrain > Lamps and Indicators - Transfer Case > Four Wheel Drive Indicator Lamp > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Four Wheel Drive Indicator Lamp: Description and Operation Description 4WD Auto Indicator 4WD AUTO INDICATOR A 4WD auto indicator is standard equipment on all instrument clusters. However, on vehicles not equipped with the optional four-wheel drive system and electronically shifted transfer case, this indicator is electronically disabled. The 4WD auto indicator is located on the right side of the instrument cluster, to the right of the oil pressure gauge. The 4WD auto indicator consists of a stencil-like cutout of the text 4WD AUTO in the opaque layer of the instrument cluster overlay. The dark outer layer of the overlay prevents the indicator from being clearly visible when it is not illuminated. An amber Light Emitting Diode (LED) behind the cutout in the opaque layer of the overlay causes the indicator to appear in amber through the translucent outer layer of the overlay when it is illuminated from behind by the LED, which is soldered onto the instrument cluster electronic circuit board. When the exterior lighting is turned ON, the illumination intensity of the 4WD auto indicator is dimmable, which is adjusted along with the cluster general illumination lighting using the panel lamps dimmer thumbwheel on the headlamp switch. The 4WD auto indicator is serviced as a unit with the instrument cluster. 4WD Indicator 4WD INDICATOR Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Lamps and Indicators - Transmission and Drivetrain > Lamps and Indicators - Transfer Case > Four Wheel Drive Indicator Lamp > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 8177 A 4WD indicator is standard equipment on all instrument clusters. However, on vehicles not equipped with an optional four-wheel drive system, this indicator is electronically disabled. The 4WD indicator is located on the right side of the instrument cluster, to the right of the oil pressure gauge. The 4WD indicator consists of a stencil-like cutout of the text 4WD in the opaque layer of the instrument cluster overlay. The dark outer layer of the overlay prevents the indicator from being clearly visible when it is not illuminated. An amber Light Emitting Diode (LED) behind the cutout in the opaque layer of the overlay causes the indicator to appear in amber through the translucent outer layer of the overlay when it is illuminated from behind by the LED, which is soldered onto the instrument cluster electronic circuit board. When the exterior lighting is turned ON, the illumination intensity of the 4WD indicator is dimmable, which is adjusted along with the cluster general illumination lighting using the panel lamps dimmer thumbwheel on the headlamp switch. The 4WD indicator is serviced as a unit with the instrument cluster. 4 Low Indicator 4 LOW INDICATOR A 4 low indicator is standard equipment on all instrument clusters. However, on vehicles not equipped with the optional four-wheel drive system and electronically shifted transfer case, this indicator is electronically disabled. The 4 low indicator is located on the right side of the instrument cluster, to the right of the coolant temperature gauge. The 4 low indicator consists of a stencil-like cutout of the text 4 LOW in the opaque layer of the instrument cluster overlay. The dark outer layer of the overlay prevents the indicator from being clearly visible when it is not illuminated. An amber Light Emitting Diode (LED) behind the cutout in the opaque layer of the overlay causes the indicator to appear in amber through the translucent outer layer of the overlay when it is illuminated from behind by the LED, which is soldered onto the instrument cluster electronic circuit board. When the exterior lighting is turned ON, the illumination intensity of the 4 low indicator is dimmable, which is adjusted along with the cluster general illumination lighting using the panel lamps dimmer thumbwheel on the headlamp switch. The 4 low indicator is serviced as a unit with the instrument cluster. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Lamps and Indicators - Transmission and Drivetrain > Lamps and Indicators - Transfer Case > Four Wheel Drive Indicator Lamp > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 8178 Four Wheel Drive Indicator Lamp: Description and Operation Operation 4WD Auto Indicator 4WD AUTO INDICATOR The 4WD auto indicator gives an indication to the vehicle operator when the electronic transfer case has been shifted into the 4WD auto mode. This indicator is controlled by a transistor on the instrument cluster circuit board based upon cluster programming and electronic messages received by the cluster from the Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) over the Controller Area Network (CAN) data bus. The 4WD auto indicator Light Emitting Diode (LED) is completely controlled by the instrument cluster logic circuit, and that logic will only allow this indicator to operate when the instrument cluster receives a battery current input on the fused ignition switch output (run-start) circuit. Therefore, the LED will always be OFF when the ignition switch is in any position except ON or START. The LED only illuminates when it is provided a path to ground by the instrument cluster transistor. The instrument cluster will turn ON the 4WD auto indicator for the following reasons: - 4WD Auto Indicator Lamp-On Message - Each time the cluster receives an electronic 4WD auto indicator lamp-ON message from the TIPM, the indicator will be illuminated. The indicator remains illuminated until the cluster receives a lamp-OFF message from the TIPM, or until the ignition switch is turned to the OFF position, whichever occurs first. - Actuator Test - Each time the cluster is put through the actuator test, the 4WD auto indicator will be turned ON, then OFF again during the bulb check portion of the test to confirm the functionality of the LED and the cluster control circuitry. The TIPM continually monitors the electronic transfer case through the transfer case shift motor/mode sensor assembly to determine when the 4WD auto mode is engaged. The TIPM then sends the proper lamp-ON or lamp-OFF message to the ElectroMechanical Instrument Cluster (EMIC) (also known as the Cab Compartment Node/CCN). For further diagnosis of the 4WD auto indicator or the instrument cluster circuitry that controls the LED, Refer to appropriate testing. For proper diagnosis of the transfer case shift motor/mode sensor, the TIPM, the EMIC, the CAN data bus or the electronic communication related to 4WD auto indicator operation a diagnostic scan tool is required. Refer to the appropriate diagnostic information. 4WD Indicator 4WD INDICATOR The 4WD indicator gives an indication to the vehicle operator when the transfer case has been shifted into a 4WD mode. This indicator is controlled by a transistor on the instrument cluster circuit board based upon cluster programming and electronic messages received by the cluster from the Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) over the Controller Area Network (CAN) data bus. The 4WD indicator Light Emitting Diode (LED) is completely controlled by the instrument cluster logic circuit, and that logic will only allow this indicator to operate when the instrument cluster receives a battery current input on the fused ignition switch output (run-start) circuit. Therefore, the LED will always be OFF when the ignition switch is in any position except ON or START. The LED only illuminates when it is provided a path to ground by the instrument cluster transistor. The instrument cluster will turn ON the 4WD indicator for the following reasons: - 4WD Indicator Lamp-On Message - Each time the cluster receives an electronic 4WD indicator lamp-ON message from the TIPM, the indicator will be illuminated. The indicator remains illuminated until the cluster receives a lamp-OFF message from the TIPM, or until the ignition switch is turned to the OFF position, whichever occurs first. - Actuator Test - Each time the cluster is put through the actuator test, the 4WD indicator will be turned ON, then OFF again during the bulb check portion of the test to confirm the functionality of the LED and the cluster control circuitry. The TIPM continually monitors the electronic transfer case through the transfer case shift motor/mode sensor assembly or the manual transfer case through the transfer case switch to determine when the 4WD mode is engaged. The TIPM then sends the proper lamp-ON or lamp-OFF message to the ElectroMechanical Instrument Cluster (EMIC) (also known as the Cab Compartment Node/CCN). For further diagnosis of the 4WD indicator or the instrument cluster circuitry that controls the LED, Refer to appropriate testing. For proper diagnosis of the transfer case shift motor/mode sensor, the transfer case switch, the TIPM, the EMIC, the CAN data bus or the electronic communication related to 4WD indicator operation a diagnostic scan tool is required. Refer to the appropriate diagnostic information. 4 Low Indicator 4 LOW INDICATOR The 4 low indicator gives an indication to the vehicle operator when the electronic transfer case has been shifted into the 4WD low mode. This indicator is controlled by a transistor on the instrument cluster circuit board based upon cluster programming and electronic messages received by the cluster from Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Lamps and Indicators - Transmission and Drivetrain > Lamps and Indicators - Transfer Case > Four Wheel Drive Indicator Lamp > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 8179 the Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) over the Controller Area Network (CAN) data bus. The 4 low indicator Light Emitting Diode (LED) is completely controlled by the instrument cluster logic circuit, and that logic will only allow this indicator to operate when the instrument cluster receives a battery current input on the fused ignition switch output (run-start) circuit. Therefore, the LED will always be OFF when the ignition switch is in any position except ON or START. The LED only illuminates when it is provided a path to ground by the instrument cluster transistor. The instrument cluster will turn ON the 4 low indicator for the following reasons: - 4 Low Indicator Lamp-On Message - Each time the cluster receives an electronic 4 low indicator lamp-ON message from the TIPM, the indicator will be illuminated. The indicator remains illuminated until the cluster receives a lamp-OFF message from the TIPM, or until the ignition switch is turned to the OFF position, whichever occurs first. - Actuator Test - Each time the cluster is put through the actuator test, the 4 low indicator will be turned ON, then OFF again during the LED portion of the test to confirm the functionality of the LED and the cluster control circuitry. The TIPM continually monitors the electronic transfer case through the transfer case shift motor/mode sensor assembly to determine when the 4WD low mode is engaged. The TIPM then sends the proper lamp-ON or lamp-OFF message to the ElectroMechanical Instrument Cluster (EMIC) (also known as the Cab Compartment Node/CCN). For further diagnosis of the 4 low indicator or the instrument cluster circuitry that controls the LED, Refer to appropriate testing. For proper diagnosis of the transfer case shift motor/mode sensor, the TIPM, the EMIC, the CAN data bus or the electronic communication related to 4 low indicator operation a diagnostic scan tool is required. Refer to the appropriate diagnostic information. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Lamps and Indicators - Transmission and Drivetrain > Lamps and Indicators - Transfer Case > Malfunction Indicator Lamp - Transfer Case > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Malfunction Indicator Lamp - Transfer Case: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION A service 4WD indicator is standard equipment on all instrument clusters. However, on vehicles not equipped with the optional four-wheel drive system and electronically shifted transfer case, this indicator is electronically disabled. This indicator is located in the lower portion of the tachometer dial face in the instrument cluster overlay. The service 4WD indicator consists of a stencil-like cutout of the text SVC 4WD in the opaque layer of the instrument cluster overlay. The dark outer layer of the overlay prevents the indicator from being clearly visible when it is not illuminated. An amber Light Emitting Diode (LED) behind the cutout in the opaque layer of the overlay causes the indicator to appear in amber through the translucent outer layer of the overlay when it is illuminated from behind by the LED, which is soldered onto the instrument cluster electronic circuit board. The service 4WD indicator is serviced as a unit with the instrument cluster. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Lamps and Indicators - Transmission and Drivetrain > Lamps and Indicators - Transfer Case > Malfunction Indicator Lamp - Transfer Case > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 8184 Malfunction Indicator Lamp - Transfer Case: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The service 4WD indicator gives an indication to the vehicle operator when the Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) has recorded a Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) for an electronic transfer case circuit or component malfunction. This indicator is controlled by a transistor on the instrument cluster circuit board based upon cluster programming and electronic messages received by the cluster from the TIPM over the Controller Area Network (CAN) data bus. The service 4WD indicator Light Emitting Diode (LED) is completely controlled by the instrument cluster logic circuit, and that logic will only allow this indicator to operate when the instrument cluster receives a battery current input on the fused ignition switch output (run-start) circuit. Therefore, the LED will always be OFF when the ignition switch is in any position except ON or START. The LED only illuminates when it is provided a path to ground by the instrument cluster transistor. The instrument cluster will turn ON the service 4WD indicator for the following reasons: - Bulb Test - Each time the ignition switch is turned to the ON position the service 4WD indicator is illuminated for about two seconds as a bulb test. - Service 4WD Indicator Lamp-On Message - Each time the cluster receives an electronic service 4WD indicator lamp-ON message from the TIPM, the service 4WD indicator will be illuminated. The indicator remains illuminated until the cluster receives a lamp-OFF message from the TIPM, or until the ignition switch is turned to the OFF position, whichever occurs first. - Communication Error - If the cluster receives no lamp-ON or lamp-OFF messages from the TIPM for 10 seconds the service 4WD indicator is illuminated by the cluster to indicate a loss of TIPM communication. The indicator remains controlled and illuminated by the cluster until a valid message is received from the TIPM. - Actuator Test - Each time the cluster is put through the actuator test, the service 4WD indicator will be turned ON, then OFF again during the bulb check portion of the test to confirm the functionality of the LED and the cluster control circuitry. The TIPM continually monitors the electronic transfer case control circuits and transfer case shift motor/mode sensor assembly to determine the condition of the system. The TIPM then sends the proper lamp-ON or lamp-OFF message to the ElectroMechanical Instrument Cluster (EMIC) (also known as the Cab Compartment Node/CCN). For further diagnosis of the service 4WD indicator or the instrument cluster circuitry that controls the LED, Refer to appropriate testing. For proper diagnosis of the TIPM, the EMIC, the CAN data bus or the electronic communication related to service 4WD indicator operation a diagnostic scan tool is required. Refer to the appropriate diagnostic information. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Differential, Manual Transaxle > Differential Fluid - M/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Maintenance - Fluid Flushing Information Differential Fluid - M/T: Technical Service Bulletins Maintenance - Fluid Flushing Information NUMBER: 26-001-09 GROUP: Miscellaneous DATE: September 24, 2009 THIS BULLETIN SUPERSEDES TECHNICAL SERVICE BULLETIN 26-003-07, DATED MARCH 30, 2007, WHICH SHOULD BE REMOVED FROM YOUR FILES. THIS IS A COMPLETE REVISION AND NO ASTERISKS HAVE BEEN USED TO HIGHLIGHT REVISIONS. SUBJECT: Fluid Flushing Requirements MODELS: 2005 - 2008 (CS) Pacifica 2006 - 2009 (D1) Ram Truck (3500 Pick Up) 2010 (D2) Ram Truck (3500 Pick Up) 2007 - 2010 (DC) Ram Truck (3500 Chassis Cab) 2005 - 2009 (DH) Ram Truck (1500/2500 Pick Up) 2010 (DJ) Ram Truck (2500 Pick Up) 2005 - 2008 (DR) Ram Truck (1500/2500 Pick Up) 2009 - 2010 (DS) Ram Truck (1500) 2005 - 2009 (HB) Durango 2007 - 2009 (HG) Aspen 2009 - 2010 (JC) Journey 2007 - 2010 (JK) Wrangler 2005 - 2006 (JR) Sebring Sedan & Convertible/Stratus Sedan 2007 - 2010 (JS) Avenger/Sebring 2008 - 2010 (KK) Liberty 2007 - 2010 (KA) Nitro 2005 - 2007 (KJ) Liberty 2009 - 2010 (LC) Challenger 2005 - 2010 (LE) 300C/300C Touring (International Markets) 2005 - 2010 (LX) 300/Magnum/Charger 2007 - 2010 (MK) Compass/Patriot 2005 - 2010 (ND) Dakota 2005 - 2006 (PL) Neon 2007 - 2010 (PM) Caliber 2005 - 2010 (PT) Chrysler PT Cruiser Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Differential, Manual Transaxle > Differential Fluid - M/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Maintenance - Fluid Flushing Information > Page 8191 2005 - 2007 (RG) Chrysler Voyager (International Markets) 2005 - 2007 (RS) Town & Country/Caravan/Voyager 2009 - 2010 (RT) Town & Country/Grand Caravan 2005 - 2006 (TJ) Wrangler 2005 - 2006 (VA) Sprinter 2007 - 2010 (VB) Sprinter 2005 - 2010 (WH) Grand Cherokee (International Markets) 2005 - 2010 (WK) Grand Cherokee 2006 - 2010 (XH) Commander (International Markets) 2006 - 2010 (XK) Commander 2005 - 2010 (ZB) Viper 2005 - 2007 (ZH) Crossfire DISCUSSION: Chrysler Group vehicle fluid systems do NOT require regular flushing. These systems include: engine oil, transmission oil, axle lube, brake fluid, power steering fluid, and refrigerant. The only exception to this requirement are published in the vehicle maintenance schedules, e.g. engine coolant. Exceptions to this recommendation include only those instances where a failure has occurred and/or the system has become compromised, contaminated or overheated beyond the normal operating range. Chrysler Group does NOT recommend aftermarket chemicals to flush the engine, transmission, brake or steering systems. Chemicals contained in these products can damage the system elastomeric components, and contaminate the component fluid, leading to loss of system/component durability and service life. When necessary, only the original approved system fluid should be used to flush these components using teamPSE(R) approved equipment. If the engine coolant contains a considerable amount of sediment, clean and flush with Mopar Cooling System Flush, p/n 04856977, or equivalent. Follow with a thorough rinsing to remove all deposits and chemicals. Refill with a minimum of a 50% mixture of the specified coolant and distilled water. POLICY: Information Only Disclaimer: This bulletin is supplied as technical information only and is not an authorization for repair. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid - M/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Maintenance - Fluid Flushing Information Fluid - M/T: Technical Service Bulletins Maintenance - Fluid Flushing Information NUMBER: 26-001-09 GROUP: Miscellaneous DATE: September 24, 2009 THIS BULLETIN SUPERSEDES TECHNICAL SERVICE BULLETIN 26-003-07, DATED MARCH 30, 2007, WHICH SHOULD BE REMOVED FROM YOUR FILES. THIS IS A COMPLETE REVISION AND NO ASTERISKS HAVE BEEN USED TO HIGHLIGHT REVISIONS. SUBJECT: Fluid Flushing Requirements MODELS: 2005 - 2008 (CS) Pacifica 2006 - 2009 (D1) Ram Truck (3500 Pick Up) 2010 (D2) Ram Truck (3500 Pick Up) 2007 - 2010 (DC) Ram Truck (3500 Chassis Cab) 2005 - 2009 (DH) Ram Truck (1500/2500 Pick Up) 2010 (DJ) Ram Truck (2500 Pick Up) 2005 - 2008 (DR) Ram Truck (1500/2500 Pick Up) 2009 - 2010 (DS) Ram Truck (1500) 2005 - 2009 (HB) Durango 2007 - 2009 (HG) Aspen 2009 - 2010 (JC) Journey 2007 - 2010 (JK) Wrangler 2005 - 2006 (JR) Sebring Sedan & Convertible/Stratus Sedan 2007 - 2010 (JS) Avenger/Sebring 2008 - 2010 (KK) Liberty 2007 - 2010 (KA) Nitro 2005 - 2007 (KJ) Liberty 2009 - 2010 (LC) Challenger 2005 - 2010 (LE) 300C/300C Touring (International Markets) 2005 - 2010 (LX) 300/Magnum/Charger 2007 - 2010 (MK) Compass/Patriot 2005 - 2010 (ND) Dakota 2005 - 2006 (PL) Neon 2007 - 2010 (PM) Caliber 2005 - 2010 (PT) Chrysler PT Cruiser Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid - M/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Maintenance - Fluid Flushing Information > Page 8196 2005 - 2007 (RG) Chrysler Voyager (International Markets) 2005 - 2007 (RS) Town & Country/Caravan/Voyager 2009 - 2010 (RT) Town & Country/Grand Caravan 2005 - 2006 (TJ) Wrangler 2005 - 2006 (VA) Sprinter 2007 - 2010 (VB) Sprinter 2005 - 2010 (WH) Grand Cherokee (International Markets) 2005 - 2010 (WK) Grand Cherokee 2006 - 2010 (XH) Commander (International Markets) 2006 - 2010 (XK) Commander 2005 - 2010 (ZB) Viper 2005 - 2007 (ZH) Crossfire DISCUSSION: Chrysler Group vehicle fluid systems do NOT require regular flushing. These systems include: engine oil, transmission oil, axle lube, brake fluid, power steering fluid, and refrigerant. The only exception to this requirement are published in the vehicle maintenance schedules, e.g. engine coolant. Exceptions to this recommendation include only those instances where a failure has occurred and/or the system has become compromised, contaminated or overheated beyond the normal operating range. Chrysler Group does NOT recommend aftermarket chemicals to flush the engine, transmission, brake or steering systems. Chemicals contained in these products can damage the system elastomeric components, and contaminate the component fluid, leading to loss of system/component durability and service life. When necessary, only the original approved system fluid should be used to flush these components using teamPSE(R) approved equipment. If the engine coolant contains a considerable amount of sediment, clean and flush with Mopar Cooling System Flush, p/n 04856977, or equivalent. Follow with a thorough rinsing to remove all deposits and chemicals. Refill with a minimum of a 50% mixture of the specified coolant and distilled water. POLICY: Information Only Disclaimer: This bulletin is supplied as technical information only and is not an authorization for repair. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid - M/T > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications Fluid - M/T: Capacity Specifications Manual Transmission Fluid Capacity G56 ...................................................................................................................................................... ......................................................... 5.1 L ( 10.7 Pt ) GETRAG 238 ...................................................................................................................................... ........................................................... 2.2 L ( 4.6 Pt ) Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid - M/T > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications > Page 8199 Fluid - M/T: Fluid Type Specifications MANUAL TRANSMISSION LUBRICANT G56 ...................................................................................................................................................... ........................... Mopar ATF +4 Transmission Fluid G238 ................................................................ ............................................................................................................... Mopar ATF +4 Transmission Fluid Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid - M/T > Component Information > Specifications > Page 8200 Fluid - M/T: Description and Operation MANUAL TRANSMISSION NOTE: DaimlerChrysler recommends using Mopar(R) lubricants or lubricants of equal quality. - Getrag 238 - Mopar(R) ATF+4 Transmission Fluid - G 56 - Mopar(R) ATF+4 Transmission Fluid Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches - M/T > Clutch Pedal Position Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection Clutch Pedal Position Sensor / Switch: Testing and Inspection SWITCH-CLUTCH PEDAL POSITION 1. Disconnect switch 2-wire connector (2) attached to pedal support bracket (1), under instrument panel to left of clutch pedal. 2. Check switch continuity with an ohmmeter while operating clutch pedal. - Pedal Depressed - Continuity - Pedal Released - No Continuity 3. If continuity is not present or always present, replace clutch master cylinder. Switch is not serviced separately. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Power Take-Off > Component Information > Diagrams Power Take-Off: Diagrams Component ID: 503 Component : SWITCH-PTO Connector: Name : SWITCH-PTO Color : # of pins : 1 Qualifier : (NGC) Pin Circuit Description 1 G113 20VT PTO SWITCH SENSE Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 200 Control Module: Locations Component ID 200 Component ID: 200 Component : MODULE-TRANSMISSION CONTROL Connector: Name : MODULE-TRANSMISSION CONTROL C1 Color : # of pins : 17 Qualifier : (RC) Pin Circuit Description 1 T52 20DG/OR INPUT SPEED SIGNAL 2-3 K427 18OR/LG POWER TAKEOFF RELAY ENABLE 4-5 T803 20DG/BR PRESSURE SIGNAL 4 6 T800 20DG/BR PRESSURE SIGNAL 1 7-8-9-10 - 11 T804 20YL/DB PRESSURE SIGNAL 5 12 T802 20DG/PK PRESSURE SIGNAL 3 13 - 14 - 15 - 16 T805 20DG/OR PRESSURE SIGNAL 6 17 T801 20DG/RD PRESSURE SIGNAL 2 Component Location - 31 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 200 > Page 8214 Connector: Name : MODULE-TRANSMISSION CONTROL C2 Color : # of pins : 24 Qualifier : (RC) Pin Circuit Description 1 T72 20YL/DB 8 VOLT SUPPLY 2 T14 20DG/BR OUTPUT SPEED SIGNAL 3 F916 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION RELAY OUTPUT 3 T16 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 200 > Page 8215 4 F916 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION RELAY OUTPUT 4 T16 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT 5-6-7 A104 20YL/RD FUSED B(+) 8 Z133 18BK/LG GROUND 9-10 - 11 - 12 - 13 - - 14 T6 20DG TOW/HAUL OVERDRIVE OFF SWITCH SIGNAL 15 T54 20DG/OR TRANSMISSION TEMPERATURE SIGNAL 16 T819 20YL/VT TCC TEMPERATURE SIGNAL 17 Z133 18BK/LG GROUND 18 - 19 T811 20DG/LB SHIFT 4 CONTROL 20 D65 20WT/LG CAN C BUS (+) 21 D64 20WT/LB CAN C BUS (-) 22 - 23 - 24 - Component Location - 31 Connector: Name : MODULE-TRANSMISSION CONTROL C3 Color : # of pins : 31 Qualifier : (RC) Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 200 > Page 8216 Pin Circuit Description 1 T808 20DG/GY SHIFT 1 CONTROL 2-3 T810 20DG/DB SHIFT 3 CONTROL 4-5 T817 20YL/BR LINEAR 3 CONTROL 6 T812 20DG/TN LINEAR 1 GROUND 7 T813 20DG/LG LINEAR 1 CONTROL 8 T815 20YL/RD LINEAR 2 CONTROL 9 T814 20YL/BR LINEAR 2 GROUND 10 T806 20DG/VT PRESSURE SIGNAL 7 11 - 12 - 13 - 14 - - 15 T816 20YL/PK LINEAR 3 GROUND 16 T828 20DG/DB TRS 1 SIGNAL 17 T42 20DG/YL TRS T42 SIGNAL 18 T3 20DG/DB TRS T3 SIGNAL 19 T827 20DG/LB TRS DRIVE SIGNAL 20 T824 20YL/DB TRS PARK SIGNAL 21 T826 20DG/DB TRS REVERSE SIGNAL 22 T809 20DG/YL SHIFT 2 CONTROL 23 - 24 - 25 - 26 T807 20DG/WT PRESSURE SIGNAL 8 27 - 28 T820 20YL/WT TEMPERATURE SENSOR GROUND 29 T825 20DG/YL TRS NEUTRAL SIGNAL 30 T821 20YL/GY LINEAR 4 CONTROL 31 T818 20YL/OR LINEAR 4 GROUND Component Location - 31 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 200 > Page 8217 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 200 > Page 8218 Control Module: Locations Component ID 216 Component ID: 216 Component : MODULE-TRANSMISSION CONTROL Connector: Name : MODULE-TRANSMISSION CONTROL C1 Color : # of pins : 17 Qualifier : (RC) Pin Circuit Description 1 T52 20DG/OR INPUT SPEED SIGNAL 2-3 K427 18OR/LG POWER TAKEOFF RELAY ENABLE 4-5 T803 20DG/BR PRESSURE SIGNAL 4 6 T800 20DG/BR PRESSURE SIGNAL 1 7-8-9-10 - 11 T804 20YL/DB PRESSURE SIGNAL 5 12 T802 20DG/PK PRESSURE SIGNAL 3 13 - 14 - 15 - 16 T805 20DG/OR PRESSURE SIGNAL 6 17 T801 20DG/RD PRESSURE SIGNAL 2 Component Location - 31 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 200 > Page 8219 Connector: Name : MODULE-TRANSMISSION CONTROL C2 Color : # of pins : 24 Qualifier : (RC) Pin Circuit Description 1 T72 20YL/DB 8 VOLT SUPPLY 2 T14 20DG/BR OUTPUT SPEED SIGNAL 3 F916 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION RELAY OUTPUT 3 T16 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 200 > Page 8220 4 F916 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION RELAY OUTPUT 4 T16 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT 5-6-7 A104 20YL/RD FUSED B(+) 8 Z133 18BK/LG GROUND 9-10 - 11 - 12 - 13 - - 14 T6 20DG TOW/HAUL OVERDRIVE OFF SWITCH SIGNAL 15 T54 20DG/OR TRANSMISSION TEMPERATURE SIGNAL 16 T819 20YL/VT TCC TEMPERATURE SIGNAL 17 Z133 18BK/LG GROUND 18 - 19 T811 20DG/LB SHIFT 4 CONTROL 20 D65 20WT/LG CAN C BUS (+) 21 D64 20WT/LB CAN C BUS (-) 22 - 23 - 24 - Component Location - 31 Connector: Name : MODULE-TRANSMISSION CONTROL C3 Color : # of pins : 31 Qualifier : (RC) Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 200 > Page 8221 Pin Circuit Description 1 T808 20DG/GY SHIFT 1 CONTROL 2-3 T810 20DG/DB SHIFT 3 CONTROL 4-5 T817 20YL/BR LINEAR 3 CONTROL 6 T812 20DG/TN LINEAR 1 GROUND 7 T813 20DG/LG LINEAR 1 CONTROL 8 T815 20YL/RD LINEAR 2 CONTROL 9 T814 20YL/BR LINEAR 2 GROUND 10 T806 20DG/VT PRESSURE SIGNAL 7 11 - 12 - 13 - 14 - - 15 T816 20YL/PK LINEAR 3 GROUND 16 T828 20DG/DB TRS 1 SIGNAL 17 T42 20DG/YL TRS T42 SIGNAL 18 T3 20DG/DB TRS T3 SIGNAL 19 T827 20DG/LB TRS DRIVE SIGNAL 20 T824 20YL/DB TRS PARK SIGNAL 21 T826 20DG/DB TRS REVERSE SIGNAL 22 T809 20DG/YL SHIFT 2 CONTROL 23 - 24 - 25 - 26 T807 20DG/WT PRESSURE SIGNAL 8 27 - 28 T820 20YL/WT TEMPERATURE SENSOR GROUND 29 T825 20DG/YL TRS NEUTRAL SIGNAL 30 T821 20YL/GY LINEAR 4 CONTROL 31 T818 20YL/OR LINEAR 4 GROUND Component Location - 31 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 200 > Page 8222 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Component ID 200 Control Module: Diagrams Component ID 200 Component ID: 200 Component : MODULE-TRANSMISSION CONTROL Connector: Name : MODULE-TRANSMISSION CONTROL C1 Color : # of pins : 17 Qualifier : (RC) Pin Circuit Description 1 T52 20DG/OR INPUT SPEED SIGNAL 2-3 K427 18OR/LG POWER TAKEOFF RELAY ENABLE 4-5 T803 20DG/BR PRESSURE SIGNAL 4 6 T800 20DG/BR PRESSURE SIGNAL 1 7-8-9-10 - 11 T804 20YL/DB PRESSURE SIGNAL 5 12 T802 20DG/PK PRESSURE SIGNAL 3 13 - 14 - 15 - 16 T805 20DG/OR PRESSURE SIGNAL 6 17 T801 20DG/RD PRESSURE SIGNAL 2 Component Location - 31 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Component ID 200 > Page 8225 Connector: Name : MODULE-TRANSMISSION CONTROL C2 Color : # of pins : 24 Qualifier : (RC) Pin Circuit Description 1 T72 20YL/DB 8 VOLT SUPPLY 2 T14 20DG/BR OUTPUT SPEED SIGNAL 3 F916 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION RELAY OUTPUT 3 T16 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Component ID 200 > Page 8226 4 F916 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION RELAY OUTPUT 4 T16 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT 5-6-7 A104 20YL/RD FUSED B(+) 8 Z133 18BK/LG GROUND 9-10 - 11 - 12 - 13 - - 14 T6 20DG TOW/HAUL OVERDRIVE OFF SWITCH SIGNAL 15 T54 20DG/OR TRANSMISSION TEMPERATURE SIGNAL 16 T819 20YL/VT TCC TEMPERATURE SIGNAL 17 Z133 18BK/LG GROUND 18 - 19 T811 20DG/LB SHIFT 4 CONTROL 20 D65 20WT/LG CAN C BUS (+) 21 D64 20WT/LB CAN C BUS (-) 22 - 23 - 24 - Component Location - 31 Connector: Name : MODULE-TRANSMISSION CONTROL C3 Color : # of pins : 31 Qualifier : (RC) Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Component ID 200 > Page 8227 Pin Circuit Description 1 T808 20DG/GY SHIFT 1 CONTROL 2-3 T810 20DG/DB SHIFT 3 CONTROL 4-5 T817 20YL/BR LINEAR 3 CONTROL 6 T812 20DG/TN LINEAR 1 GROUND 7 T813 20DG/LG LINEAR 1 CONTROL 8 T815 20YL/RD LINEAR 2 CONTROL 9 T814 20YL/BR LINEAR 2 GROUND 10 T806 20DG/VT PRESSURE SIGNAL 7 11 - 12 - 13 - 14 - - 15 T816 20YL/PK LINEAR 3 GROUND 16 T828 20DG/DB TRS 1 SIGNAL 17 T42 20DG/YL TRS T42 SIGNAL 18 T3 20DG/DB TRS T3 SIGNAL 19 T827 20DG/LB TRS DRIVE SIGNAL 20 T824 20YL/DB TRS PARK SIGNAL 21 T826 20DG/DB TRS REVERSE SIGNAL 22 T809 20DG/YL SHIFT 2 CONTROL 23 - 24 - 25 - 26 T807 20DG/WT PRESSURE SIGNAL 8 27 - 28 T820 20YL/WT TEMPERATURE SENSOR GROUND 29 T825 20DG/YL TRS NEUTRAL SIGNAL 30 T821 20YL/GY LINEAR 4 CONTROL 31 T818 20YL/OR LINEAR 4 GROUND Component Location - 31 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Component ID 200 > Page 8228 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Component ID 200 > Page 8229 Control Module: Diagrams Component ID 216 Component ID: 216 Component : MODULE-TRANSMISSION CONTROL Connector: Name : MODULE-TRANSMISSION CONTROL C1 Color : # of pins : 17 Qualifier : (RC) Pin Circuit Description 1 T52 20DG/OR INPUT SPEED SIGNAL 2-3 K427 18OR/LG POWER TAKEOFF RELAY ENABLE 4-5 T803 20DG/BR PRESSURE SIGNAL 4 6 T800 20DG/BR PRESSURE SIGNAL 1 7-8-9-10 - 11 T804 20YL/DB PRESSURE SIGNAL 5 12 T802 20DG/PK PRESSURE SIGNAL 3 13 - 14 - 15 - 16 T805 20DG/OR PRESSURE SIGNAL 6 17 T801 20DG/RD PRESSURE SIGNAL 2 Component Location - 31 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Component ID 200 > Page 8230 Connector: Name : MODULE-TRANSMISSION CONTROL C2 Color : # of pins : 24 Qualifier : (RC) Pin Circuit Description 1 T72 20YL/DB 8 VOLT SUPPLY 2 T14 20DG/BR OUTPUT SPEED SIGNAL 3 F916 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION RELAY OUTPUT 3 T16 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Component ID 200 > Page 8231 4 F916 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION RELAY OUTPUT 4 T16 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT 5-6-7 A104 20YL/RD FUSED B(+) 8 Z133 18BK/LG GROUND 9-10 - 11 - 12 - 13 - - 14 T6 20DG TOW/HAUL OVERDRIVE OFF SWITCH SIGNAL 15 T54 20DG/OR TRANSMISSION TEMPERATURE SIGNAL 16 T819 20YL/VT TCC TEMPERATURE SIGNAL 17 Z133 18BK/LG GROUND 18 - 19 T811 20DG/LB SHIFT 4 CONTROL 20 D65 20WT/LG CAN C BUS (+) 21 D64 20WT/LB CAN C BUS (-) 22 - 23 - 24 - Component Location - 31 Connector: Name : MODULE-TRANSMISSION CONTROL C3 Color : # of pins : 31 Qualifier : (RC) Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Component ID 200 > Page 8232 Pin Circuit Description 1 T808 20DG/GY SHIFT 1 CONTROL 2-3 T810 20DG/DB SHIFT 3 CONTROL 4-5 T817 20YL/BR LINEAR 3 CONTROL 6 T812 20DG/TN LINEAR 1 GROUND 7 T813 20DG/LG LINEAR 1 CONTROL 8 T815 20YL/RD LINEAR 2 CONTROL 9 T814 20YL/BR LINEAR 2 GROUND 10 T806 20DG/VT PRESSURE SIGNAL 7 11 - 12 - 13 - 14 - - 15 T816 20YL/PK LINEAR 3 GROUND 16 T828 20DG/DB TRS 1 SIGNAL 17 T42 20DG/YL TRS T42 SIGNAL 18 T3 20DG/DB TRS T3 SIGNAL 19 T827 20DG/LB TRS DRIVE SIGNAL 20 T824 20YL/DB TRS PARK SIGNAL 21 T826 20DG/DB TRS REVERSE SIGNAL 22 T809 20DG/YL SHIFT 2 CONTROL 23 - 24 - 25 - 26 T807 20DG/WT PRESSURE SIGNAL 8 27 - 28 T820 20YL/WT TEMPERATURE SENSOR GROUND 29 T825 20DG/YL TRS NEUTRAL SIGNAL 30 T821 20YL/GY LINEAR 4 CONTROL 31 T818 20YL/OR LINEAR 4 GROUND Component Location - 31 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Component ID 200 > Page 8233 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > Transmission Control Module - Description Control Module: Description and Operation Transmission Control Module - Description DESCRIPTION On gasoline vehicles the Transmission Control Module (TCM) (2) may be sub-module within the Powertrain Control Module (PCM) (3). Vehicles equipped 68RFE transmission and a 6.7L Diesel engine, the TCM is housed in the NGC4 controller utilizing only the C1 and C4 connectors (TCM only). The controller is located at the rear of the engine compartment, near the right inner fender. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > Transmission Control Module - Description > Page 8236 On Cab Chassis models equipped with the AS68RC transmission the Transmission Control Module (TCM) has three electrical connectors and is located in the passenger compartment underneath of the left side of the dash panel. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > Transmission Control Module - Description > Page 8237 Control Module: Description and Operation Transmission Control Module - Operation OPERATION RLE and RFE TRANSMISSIONS The Transmission Control Module (TCM) controls all electronic operations of the transmission. The TCM receives information regarding vehicle operation from both direct and indirect inputs, and selects the operational mode of the transmission. Direct inputs are hard wired to, and used specifically by the TCM. Indirect inputs are shared with the TCM via the vehicle communication bus. Some examples of direct inputs to the TCM are: - Battery (B+) voltage - Ignition "ON" voltage - Transmission Control Relay (Switched B+) (if equipped) - Throttle Position Sensor - Crankshaft Position Sensor - Transmission Range Sensor - Pressure Switches - Transmission Temperature Sensor - Input Shaft Speed Sensor - Output Shaft Speed Sensor - Line Pressure Sensor Some examples of indirect inputs to the TCM are: - Target Idle - Torque Reduction Confirmation - Engine Coolant Temperature - Ambient/Battery Temperature - Scan Tool Communication Based on the information received from these various inputs, the TCM determines the appropriate shift schedule and shift points, depending on the present operating conditions and driver demand. This is possible through the control of various direct and indirect outputs. Some examples of TCM direct outputs are: - Transmission Control Relay - Solenoids - Torque Reduction Request Some examples of TCM indirect outputs are: - Transmission Temperature (to PCM) - PRNDL Position (to cluster/CCN) In addition to monitoring inputs and controlling outputs, the TCM has other important responsibilities and functions: - Storing and maintaining Clutch Volume Indexes (CVI) - Storing and selecting appropriate Shift Schedules - System self-diagnostics - Diagnostic capabilities (with scan tool) NOTE: If the TCM has been replaced, the "Quick Learn Procedure" must be performed. See: Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Transmission Control Module/TCM Quick Learn BATTERY FEED A fused, direct battery feed to the TCM is used for continuous power. This battery voltage is necessary to retain memory in the TCM. When the battery (B+) is disconnected, this memory is lost. When the battery (B+) is restored, this memory loss is detected by the TCM and a Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) is set. CLUTCH VOLUME INDEXES (CVI) Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > Transmission Control Module - Description > Page 8238 An important function of the TCM is to monitor Clutch Volume Indexes (CVI). CVIs represent the volume of fluid needed to compress a clutch pack. The TCM monitors gear ratio changes by monitoring the Input and Output Speed Sensors. The Input, or Turbine Speed Sensor sends an electrical signal to the TCM that represents input shaft rpm. The Output Speed Sensor provides the TCM with output shaft speed information. By comparing the two inputs, the TCM can determine transmission gear position. This is important to the CVI calculation because the TCM determines CVIs by monitoring how long it takes for a gear change to occur. Gear ratios can be determined by using the Scan Tool and reading the Input/Output Speed Sensor values in the "Monitors" display. Gear ratio can be obtained by dividing the Input Speed Sensor value by the Output Speed Sensor value. For example, if the input shaft is rotating at 1000 rpm and the output shaft is rotating at 500 rpm, then the TCM can determine that the gear ratio is 2:1. In direct drive (3rd gear), the gear ratio changes to 1:1. The gear ratio changes as clutches are applied and released. By monitoring the length of time it takes for the gear ratio to change following a shift request, the TCM can determine the volume of fluid used to apply or release a friction element. The volume of transmission fluid needed to apply the friction elements are continuously updated for adaptive controls. As friction material wears, the volume of fluid need to apply the element increases. Certain mechanical problems within the input clutch assembly can cause inadequate or out-of-range element volumes. Also, defective Input/Output Speed Sensors and wiring can cause these conditions. The following charts identifies the appropriate clutch volumes and when they are monitored/updated: Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > Transmission Control Module - Description > Page 8239 SHIFT SCHEDULES As mentioned earlier, the TCM has programming that allows it to select a variety of shift schedules. Shift schedule selection is dependent on the following: - Shift lever position - Throttle position - Engine load - Fluid temperature - Software level As driving conditions change, the TCM appropriately adjusts the shift schedule. Refer to the following chart to determine the appropriate operation expected, depending on driving conditions. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > Transmission Control Module - Description > Page 8240 AISIN AS68RC TRANSMISSION The Transmission Control Module (TCM) controls all electronic operations of the transmission. The TCM receives information regarding vehicle operation from both direct and indirect inputs, and selects the operational mode of the transmission. Direct inputs are hard wired to, and used specifically by the TCM. Indirect inputs are shared with the TCM via the vehicle communication bus. Some examples of direct inputs to the TCM are: - Battery (B+) voltage - Ignition "ON" voltage - Transmission Range Sensor - Pressure Switches - Transmission Temperature Sensor - Input Speed Sensor - Output Speed Sensor Some examples of indirect inputs to the TCM are: - Engine/Body Identification - Manifold Pressure - Throttle position - Torque Reduction Confirmation - Engine Coolant Temperature - Exhaust Brake Status (if equipped) - PTO Request (if equipped) - Scan Tool Communication Based on the information received from these various inputs, the TCM determines the appropriate shift schedule and shift points, depending on the present operating conditions and driver demand. This is possible through the control of various direct and indirect outputs. Some examples of TCM direct outputs are: - Exhaust Brake Cut Request (if equipped). - Solenoids. - Torque Reduction Request. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > Transmission Control Module - Description > Page 8241 Some examples of TCM.indirect outputs are: - Transmission Temperature (to PCM). - PRNDL Position (to cluster/CCN). - PTO Status. In addition to monitoring inputs and controlling outputs, the TCM has other important responsibilities and functions: - Storing and maintaining Clutch Volume Indexes (CVI). - Storing and selecting appropriate Shift Schedules. - System self-diagnostics. - Diagnostic capabilities (with scan tool). Clutch filling time is continuously maintained when the vehicle is running. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Transmission Control System Relay, A/T > Component Information > Locations Transmission Control System Relay: Locations Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Transmission Control System Relay, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Transmission Control System Relay: Diagram Information and Instructions Warnings WARNINGS - GENERAL WARNINGS provide information to prevent personal injury and vehicle damage. Below is a list of general warnings that should be followed any time a vehicle is being serviced. WARNING: Always wear safety glasses for eye protection. WARNING: Use safety stands anytime a procedure requires being under a vehicle. WARNING: Be sure that the ignition switch always is in the off position, unless the procedure requires it to be on. WARNING: Set the parking brake when working on any vehicle. An automatic transmission should be in park. A manual transmission should be in neutral. WARNING: Operate the engine only in a well-ventilated area. WARNING: Keep away from moving parts when the engine is running, especially the fan and belts. WARNING: To prevent serious burns, avoid contact with hot parts such as the radiator, exhaust manifold(s), tail pipe, catalytic converter and muffler. WARNING: Do not allow flame or sparks near the battery. Gases are always present in and around the battery. WARNING: Always remove rings, watches, loose hanging jewelry and avoid loose clothing. How to Use Wiring Diagrams DESCRIPTION - HOW TO USE WIRING DIAGRAMS DaimlerChrysler Corporation wiring diagrams are designed to provide information regarding the vehicles wiring content. In order to effectively use the wiring diagrams to diagnose and repair DaimlerChrysler Corporation vehicles, it is important to understand all of their features and characteristics. Diagrams are arranged such that the power (B+) side of the circuit is placed near the top of the page, and the ground (B-) side of the circuit is placed near the bottom of the page. All switches, components, and modules are shown in the at rest position with the doors closed and the key removed from the ignition. Components are shown two ways. A solid line around a component indicates that the component is complete. A dashed line around the component indicates that the component is being shown is not complete. Incomplete components have a reference number to indicate the page where the component is shown complete. It is important to realize that no attempt is made on the diagrams to represent components and wiring as they appear on the vehicle. For example, a short piece of wire is treated the same as a long one. In addition, switches and other components are shown as simply as possible, with regard to function only. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Transmission Control System Relay, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8247 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Transmission Control System Relay, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8248 SYMBOLS International symbols are used throughout the wiring diagrams. These symbols are consistent with those being used around the world. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Transmission Control System Relay, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8249 TERMINOLOGY This is a list of terms and definitions used in the wiring diagrams. LHD - Left Hand Drive Vehicles RHD - Right Hand Drive Vehicles ATX - Automatic Transmissions-Front Wheel Drive MTX Manual Transmissions-Front Wheel Drive Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Transmission Control System Relay, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8250 AT - Automatic Transmissions-Rear Wheel Drive MT - Manual Transmissions-Rear Wheel Drive SOHC - Single Over Head Cam Engine DOHC - Double Over Head Cam Engine Export - Vehicles Built For Sale In Markets Other Than North America Except Export - Vehicles Built For Sale In North America Circuit Functions DESCRIPTION - CIRCUIT FUNCTIONS All circuits in the diagrams use an alpha/numeric code to identify the wire and it's function. To identify which circuit code applies to a system, refer to the Circuit Identification Code Chart. This chart shows the main circuits only and does not show the secondary codes that may apply to some models. Circuit Information DESCRIPTION - CIRCUIT INFORMATION Each wire shown in the diagrams contains a code which identifies the main circuit, a specific part of the main circuit, gage of wire, and color. An example would be A 2 18 LB/YL. This is a Battery Feed circuit, level two, eighteen gauge, light blue with a yellow tracer. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Transmission Control System Relay, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8251 Connector, Ground and Splice Information DESCRIPTION - CONNECTOR, GROUND AND SPLICE INFORMATION CAUTION: Not all connectors are serviced. Some connectors are serviced only with a harness. A typical example might be the Supplemental Restraint System connectors. Always check parts availability before attempting a repair. IDENTIFICATION In-line connectors are identified by a number, as follows: - In-line connectors located in the engine compartment are C100 series numbers. - In-line connectors located in the instrument panel area are C200 series numbers. - In-line connectors located in the body are C300 series numbers. - Jumper harness connectors are C400 series numbers. - Grounds and ground connectors are identified with a "G" and follow the same series numbering as the in-line connectors. - Splices are identified with an "S" and follow the same series numbering as the in-line connectors. In addition, S001-S099 numbers are located in the engine compartment. - Component connectors are identified by the component name instead of a number. Multiple connectors on a component use a C1, C2, etc. identifier. LOCATIONS Vehicle/Locations contains the master connector/ground/splice location index charts with hyperlinks to the applicable location illustrations. The illustrations contain the connector name (or number)/ground number/splice number and component identification. The abbreviation T/O is used in the component location section to indicate a point in which the wiring harness branches out to a component. The abbreviation N/S means Not Shown in the illustrations Section Identification and Information DESCRIPTION - SECTION IDENTIFICATION AND INFORMATION The wiring diagrams are grouped into individual sections. If a component is most likely found in a particular group, it will be shown complete (all wires, Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Transmission Control System Relay, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8252 connectors, and pins) within that group. For example, the Auto Shutdown Relay is most likely to be found in Powertrain Management, so it is shown there complete. It can, however, be shown partially in another group if it contains some associated wiring. Splice diagrams show the entire splice and provide references to other sections the splices serves. Splice Information only contains splice diagrams that are not shown in their entirety somewhere else in the wiring diagrams. Connector Pin-Outs shows each connector and the circuits involved with that connector. The connectors are identified using the name/number on the diagram pages. Removal REMOVAL 1. Disconnect battery. 2. Release Connector Lock (2). 3. Disconnect the connector (3) being repaired from its mating half/component. 4. Remove the dress cover (if applicable) (1). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Transmission Control System Relay, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8253 5. Release the Secondary Terminal Lock, if required (1). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Transmission Control System Relay, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8254 6. Position the connector locking finger away from the terminal using the proper special tool. Pull on the wire to remove the terminal from the connector. Installation Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Transmission Control System Relay, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8255 INSTALLATION 1. Insert the removed terminal in the same cavity on the repair connector. 2. Repeat steps for each terminal in the connector, being sure that all wires are inserted into the proper cavities. For additional connector pin-out identification, refer to the wiring diagrams. 3. When the connector is re-assembled, the secondary terminal lock must be placed in the locked position to prevent terminal push out. 4. Replace dress cover (if applicable). 5. Connect connector to its mating half/component. 6. Connect battery and test all affected systems. Removal REMOVAL 1. Disconnect the battery. 2. Locate the diode in the harness, and remove the protective covering. 3. Remove the diode from the harness, pay attention to the current flow direction (1) (2) (3). Installation INSTALLATION 1. Remove the insulation from the wires in the harness. Only remove enough insulation to solder in the new diode. 2. Install the new diode in the harness, making sure current flow is correct. If necessary, refer to the appropriate wiring diagram for current flow. 3. Solder the connection together using rosin core type solder only. Do not use acid core solder. 4. Tape the diode to the harness using electrical tape. Make sure the diode is completely sealed from the elements. 5. Re-connect the battery and test affected systems. Removal REMOVAL 1. Follow steps for removing terminals described in the connector removal section. 2. Cut the wire 6 inches from the back of the connector. Installation INSTALLATION 1. Select a wire from the terminal repair kit that best matches the color and gage of the wire being repaired. 2. Cut the repair wire to the proper length and remove one-half (1/2) inch of insulation. 3. Splice the repair wire to the wire harness (see wire splicing procedure). See: Service Procedures/Wire Splicing 4. Insert the repaired wire into the connector. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Transmission Control System Relay, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8256 5. Install the connector locking wedge, if required, and reconnect the connector to its mating half/component. 6. Re-tape the wire harness starting at 1-1/2 inches behind the connector and 2 inches past the repair. 7. Connect battery and test all affected systems. Wire Splicing STANDARD PROCEDURE - WIRE SPLICING When splicing a wire, it is important that the correct gage be used as shown in the wiring diagrams. 1. Remove one-half (1/2) inch of insulation from each wire that needs to be spliced. 2. Place a piece of adhesive lined heat shrink tubing on one side of the wire. Make sure the tubing will be long enough to cover and seal the entire repair area. 3. Place the strands of wire overlapping each other inside of the splice clip (1). 4. Using crimping tool (1), Mopar p/n 05019912AA, crimp the splice clip and wires together. 5. Solder (3) the connection (2) together using rosin core type solder (1) only. CAUTION: DO NOT USE ACID CORE SOLDER. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Transmission Control System Relay, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8257 6. Center the heat shrink tubing (2) over the joint and heat using a heat gun. Heat the joint until the tubing is tightly sealed and sealant (1) comes out of both ends of the tubing. Special Tools WIRING/TERMINAL PROBING TOOL PACKAGE 6807 TERMINAL PICK TOOL SET 6680 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Transmission Control System Relay, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8258 TERMINAL REMOVING TOOLS 6932 AND 8638 TERMINAL REMOVING TOOL 6934 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Transmission Control System Relay, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8259 Transmission Control System Relay: Diagnostic Aids Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) Sensitive Devices STANDARD PROCEDURE - ELECTROSTATIC DISCHARGE (ESD) SENSITIVE DEVICES All ESD sensitive components are solid state and a symbol is used to indicate this. When handling any component with this symbol, comply with the following procedures to reduce the possibility of electrostatic charge build up on the body and inadvertent discharge into the component. If it is not known whether the part is ESD sensitive, assume that it is. 1. Always touch a known good ground before handling the part. This should be repeated while handling the part and more frequently after sliding across a seat, sitting down from a standing position, or walking a distance. 2. Avoid touching electrical terminals of the part, unless instructed to do so by a written procedure. 3. When using a voltmeter, be sure to connect the ground lead first. 4. Do not remove the part from it's protective packing until it is time to install the part. 5. Before removing the part from it's package, ground the package to a known good ground on the vehicle. Testing Of Voltage Potential STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING OF VOLTAGE POTENTIAL 1. Connect the ground lead of a voltmeter to a known good ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the voltmeter to the selected test point. The vehicle ignition may need to be turned ON to check voltage. Refer to the appropriate test procedure. Testing For Continuity Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Transmission Control System Relay, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8260 STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING FOR CONTINUITY 1. Remove the fuse (1) for the circuit being checked or, disconnect the battery. 2. Connect one lead of the ohmmeter to one side of the circuit being tested 3. Connect the other lead to the other end of the circuit being tested. Low or no resistance means good continuity. Testing For A Short To Ground STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING FOR A SHORT TO GROUND 1. Remove the fuse and disconnect all items involved with the fuse. 2. Connect a test light or a voltmeter across the terminals of the fuse. 3. Starting at the fuse block, wiggle the wiring harness about six to eight inches apart and watch the voltmeter/test lamp. 4. If the voltmeter registers voltage or the test lamp glows, there is a short to ground in that general area of the wiring harness. Testing For A Short To Ground On Fuses Powering Several Loads STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING FOR A SHORT TO GROUND ON FUSES POWERING SEVERAL LOADS 1. Refer to the wiring diagrams and disconnect or isolate all items on the suspected fused circuits. 2. Replace the blown fuse. 3. Supply power to the fuse by turning ON the ignition switch or re-connecting the battery. 4. Start connecting or energizing the items in the fuse circuit one at a time. When the fuse blows the circuit with the short to ground has been isolated. Testing For A Voltage Drop STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING FOR A VOLTAGE DROP Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Transmission Control System Relay, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8261 1. Connect the positive lead of the voltmeter to the side of the circuit closest to the battery. 2. Connect the other lead of the voltmeter to the other side of the switch, component or circuit. 3. Operate the item. 4. The voltmeter will show the difference in voltage between the two points. Troubleshooting Wiring Problems DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING - WIRING HARNESS TROUBLESHOOTING TOOLS When diagnosing a problem in an electrical circuit there are several common tools necessary. These tools are listed and explained below. - Jumper Wire - This is a test wire used to connect two points of a circuit. It can be used to bypass an open in a circuit. WARNING: Never use a jumper wire across a load, such as a motor, connected between a battery feed and ground. - Voltmeter - Used to check for voltage on a circuit. Always connect the black lead to a known good ground and the red lead to the positive side of the circuit. CAUTION: Most of the electrical components used in today's vehicles are Solid State. When checking voltages in these circuits, use a meter with a 10 - megohm or greater impedance rating. - Ohmmeter - Used to check the resistance between two points of a circuit. Low or no resistance in a circuit means good continuity. CAUTION: Most of the electrical components used in today's vehicles are Solid State. When checking resistance in these circuits use a meter with a 10 - megohm or greater impedance rating. In addition, make sure the power is disconnected from the circuit. Circuits that are powered up by the vehicle's electrical system can cause damage to the equipment and provide false readings. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Transmission Control System Relay, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8262 - Probing Tools - These tools are used for probing terminals in connectors. Select the proper size tool from Special Tool Package 6807, and insert the probing end (2) into the terminal being tested. Use the other end of the tool (1) to insert the meter probe. INTERMITTENT AND POOR CONNECTIONS Most intermittent electrical problems are caused by faulty electrical connections or wiring. It is also possible for a sticking component or relay to cause a problem. Before condemning a component or wiring assembly, check the following items. - Connectors are fully seated - Spread terminals, or terminal push out - Terminals in the wiring assembly are fully seated into the connector/component and locked into position - Dirt or corrosion on the terminals. Any amount of corrosion or dirt could cause an intermittent problem - Damaged connector/component casing exposing the item to dirt or moisture - Wire insulation that has rubbed through causing a short to ground - Some or all of the wiring strands broken inside of the insulation - Wiring broken inside of the insulation TROUBLESHOOTING WIRING PROBLEMS When troubleshooting wiring problems there are six steps which can aid in the procedure. The steps are listed and explained below. Always check for non-factory items added to the vehicle before doing any diagnosis. If the vehicle is equipped with these items, disconnect them to verify these add-on items are not the cause of the problem. 1. Verify the problem. 2. Verify any related symptoms. Do this by performing operational checks on components that are in the same circuit. Refer to the wiring diagrams. 3. Analyze the symptoms. Use the wiring diagrams to determine what the circuit is doing, where the problem most likely is occurring and where the diagnosis will continue. 4. Isolate the problem area. 5. Repair the problem area. 6. Verify the proper operation. For this step, check for proper operation of all items on the repaired circuit. Refer to the wiring diagrams. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Transmission Control System Relay, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8263 Transmission Control System Relay: Connector Views Component ID: 246 Component : RELAY-TRANSMISSION Connector: Name : RELAY-TRANSMISSION Color : # of pins : 4 Pin Circuit Description 1 A916 16RD FUSED B(+) 2 T16 16YL TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT 3 F916 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION RELAY OUTPUT 4 Z420 18BK GROUND Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Transmission Control System Relay, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Transmission Control System Relay: Description and Operation Description The Chrysler Corporation does not provide a description of the 545RFE Transmission control Relay for the 4.7/5.7L engine. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Transmission Control System Relay, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 8266 Transmission Control System Relay: Description and Operation Operation The Chrysler Corporation does not provide operation information for the 545RFE Transmission control Relay for the 4.7/5.7L engine platform. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - Transfer Case > Control Module, Transfer Case > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 197 Control Module: Locations Component ID 197 Component ID: 197 Component : MODULE-FINAL DRIVE CONTROL Connector: Name : MODULE-FINAL DRIVE CONTROL Color : # of pins : 50 Qualifier : (POWER WAGON) A-A1 A121 14RD/YL FUSED B(+) A2 T520 16YL/OR FRONT LOCKER SOURCE A3 T526 16YL/WT REAR LOCKER SOURCE A4 Z935 16BK GROUND A5 Z935 16BK GROUND A6 T524 16YL/LG FRONT LOCKER RETURN A7 T528 16YL/GY REAR LOCKER RETURN A8 T521 20YL/BK LOCKER SENSOR SUPPLY A9 T537 20YL/LG LOCKER SWITCH SUPPLY A10 T523 20YL/BK LOCKER SENSOR SUPPLY A11 - A12 - A13 D65 20WT/LG CAN C BUS (+) A14 D64 20WT/LB CAN C BUS (-) B T527 20YL/TN REAR LOCKER SENSOR SENSE B1 T522 20YL/LB FRONT LOCKER SENSOR SENSE B2 T535 20YL/BR LOCKER SWITCH SENSE B3 - B4 - B5 - B6 - B7 F960 20PK/LG FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) B8 T536 20YL/WT SWITCH SUPPLY B9 - B10 - B11 T531 20YL/TN STABILIZER BAR SWITCH SENSE B12 T532 20YL/GY LOCKER OPEN ILLUMINATION SENSE B13 T533 20YL/LB LOCKER REAR ILLUMINATION SENSE B14 T534 20YL LOCKER FR/RR ILLUMINATION SENSE C T530 20YL/DG STABILIZER BAR DISENGAGE ILLUMINATION SENSE C1 T529 20YL/LG STABILIZER BAR ENGAGE ILLUMINATION SENSE C2 - C3 - - Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - Transfer Case > Control Module, Transfer Case > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 197 > Page 8272 C4 - C5 - C6 - C7 - C8 - C9 - C10 - C11 - C12 - C13 - C14 - - D-E-F-G-H-Component Location - 29 Component Location - 28 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - Transfer Case > Control Module, Transfer Case > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 197 > Page 8273 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - Transfer Case > Control Module, Transfer Case > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 197 > Page 8274 Control Module: Locations Component ID 206 Component ID: 206 Component : MODULE-FINAL DRIVE CONTROL Connector: Name : MODULE-FINAL DRIVE CONTROL Color : # of pins : 50 Qualifier : (POWER WAGON) A-A1 A121 14RD/YL FUSED B(+) A2 T520 16YL/OR FRONT LOCKER SOURCE A3 T526 16YL/WT REAR LOCKER SOURCE A4 Z935 16BK GROUND A5 Z935 16BK GROUND A6 T524 16YL/LG FRONT LOCKER RETURN A7 T528 16YL/GY REAR LOCKER RETURN A8 T521 20YL/BK LOCKER SENSOR SUPPLY A9 T537 20YL/LG LOCKER SWITCH SUPPLY A10 T523 20YL/BK LOCKER SENSOR SUPPLY A11 - A12 - A13 D65 20WT/LG CAN C BUS (+) A14 D64 20WT/LB CAN C BUS (-) B T527 20YL/TN REAR LOCKER SENSOR SENSE B1 T522 20YL/LB FRONT LOCKER SENSOR SENSE B2 T535 20YL/BR LOCKER SWITCH SENSE B3 - B4 - B5 - B6 - B7 F960 20PK/LG FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) B8 T536 20YL/WT SWITCH SUPPLY B9 - B10 - B11 T531 20YL/TN STABILIZER BAR SWITCH SENSE B12 T532 20YL/GY LOCKER OPEN ILLUMINATION SENSE B13 T533 20YL/LB LOCKER REAR ILLUMINATION SENSE B14 T534 20YL LOCKER FR/RR ILLUMINATION SENSE C T530 20YL/DG STABILIZER BAR DISENGAGE ILLUMINATION SENSE C1 T529 20YL/LG STABILIZER BAR ENGAGE ILLUMINATION SENSE C2 - C3 - - Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - Transfer Case > Control Module, Transfer Case > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 197 > Page 8275 C4 - C5 - C6 - C7 - C8 - C9 - C10 - C11 - C12 - C13 - C14 - - D-E-F-G-H-Component Location - 29 Component Location - 28 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - Transfer Case > Control Module, Transfer Case > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 197 > Page 8276 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - Transfer Case > Control Module, Transfer Case > Component Information > Diagrams > Component ID 197 Control Module: Diagrams Component ID 197 Component ID: 197 Component : MODULE-FINAL DRIVE CONTROL Connector: Name : MODULE-FINAL DRIVE CONTROL Color : # of pins : 50 Qualifier : (POWER WAGON) A-A1 A121 14RD/YL FUSED B(+) A2 T520 16YL/OR FRONT LOCKER SOURCE A3 T526 16YL/WT REAR LOCKER SOURCE A4 Z935 16BK GROUND A5 Z935 16BK GROUND A6 T524 16YL/LG FRONT LOCKER RETURN A7 T528 16YL/GY REAR LOCKER RETURN A8 T521 20YL/BK LOCKER SENSOR SUPPLY A9 T537 20YL/LG LOCKER SWITCH SUPPLY A10 T523 20YL/BK LOCKER SENSOR SUPPLY A11 - A12 - A13 D65 20WT/LG CAN C BUS (+) A14 D64 20WT/LB CAN C BUS (-) B T527 20YL/TN REAR LOCKER SENSOR SENSE B1 T522 20YL/LB FRONT LOCKER SENSOR SENSE B2 T535 20YL/BR LOCKER SWITCH SENSE B3 - B4 - B5 - B6 - B7 F960 20PK/LG FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) B8 T536 20YL/WT SWITCH SUPPLY B9 - B10 - B11 T531 20YL/TN STABILIZER BAR SWITCH SENSE B12 T532 20YL/GY LOCKER OPEN ILLUMINATION SENSE B13 T533 20YL/LB LOCKER REAR ILLUMINATION SENSE B14 T534 20YL LOCKER FR/RR ILLUMINATION SENSE C T530 20YL/DG STABILIZER BAR DISENGAGE ILLUMINATION SENSE C1 T529 20YL/LG STABILIZER BAR ENGAGE ILLUMINATION SENSE C2 - C3 - - Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - Transfer Case > Control Module, Transfer Case > Component Information > Diagrams > Component ID 197 > Page 8279 C4 - C5 - C6 - C7 - C8 - C9 - C10 - C11 - C12 - C13 - C14 - - D-E-F-G-H-Component Location - 29 Component Location - 28 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - Transfer Case > Control Module, Transfer Case > Component Information > Diagrams > Component ID 197 > Page 8280 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - Transfer Case > Control Module, Transfer Case > Component Information > Diagrams > Component ID 197 > Page 8281 Control Module: Diagrams Component ID 206 Component ID: 206 Component : MODULE-FINAL DRIVE CONTROL Connector: Name : MODULE-FINAL DRIVE CONTROL Color : # of pins : 50 Qualifier : (POWER WAGON) A-A1 A121 14RD/YL FUSED B(+) A2 T520 16YL/OR FRONT LOCKER SOURCE A3 T526 16YL/WT REAR LOCKER SOURCE A4 Z935 16BK GROUND A5 Z935 16BK GROUND A6 T524 16YL/LG FRONT LOCKER RETURN A7 T528 16YL/GY REAR LOCKER RETURN A8 T521 20YL/BK LOCKER SENSOR SUPPLY A9 T537 20YL/LG LOCKER SWITCH SUPPLY A10 T523 20YL/BK LOCKER SENSOR SUPPLY A11 - A12 - A13 D65 20WT/LG CAN C BUS (+) A14 D64 20WT/LB CAN C BUS (-) B T527 20YL/TN REAR LOCKER SENSOR SENSE B1 T522 20YL/LB FRONT LOCKER SENSOR SENSE B2 T535 20YL/BR LOCKER SWITCH SENSE B3 - B4 - B5 - B6 - B7 F960 20PK/LG FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) B8 T536 20YL/WT SWITCH SUPPLY B9 - B10 - B11 T531 20YL/TN STABILIZER BAR SWITCH SENSE B12 T532 20YL/GY LOCKER OPEN ILLUMINATION SENSE B13 T533 20YL/LB LOCKER REAR ILLUMINATION SENSE B14 T534 20YL LOCKER FR/RR ILLUMINATION SENSE C T530 20YL/DG STABILIZER BAR DISENGAGE ILLUMINATION SENSE C1 T529 20YL/LG STABILIZER BAR ENGAGE ILLUMINATION SENSE C2 - C3 - - Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - Transfer Case > Control Module, Transfer Case > Component Information > Diagrams > Component ID 197 > Page 8282 C4 - C5 - C6 - C7 - C8 - C9 - C10 - C11 - C12 - C13 - C14 - - D-E-F-G-H-Component Location - 29 Component Location - 28 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - Transfer Case > Control Module, Transfer Case > Component Information > Diagrams > Component ID 197 > Page 8283 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - Transfer Case > Control Module, Transfer Case > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Control Module: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The Transfer Case Control Module (TCCM) functionality now resides in the Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM), refer to the TIPM information for location and additional information. The TIPM controls the 4X4 transfer case shift functions via the actuation of a shift motor and utilizing the feedback of a mode sensor assembly. Communication is via the CAN bus. Inputs include user selectable 4X4 modes that include 2WD, AWD, 4HI, 4LO, and Neutral (selections vary with the specific transfer case). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - Transfer Case > Control Module, Transfer Case > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 8286 Control Module: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The Transfer Case Control Module (TCCM) functionality in the Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) utilizes the input from the transfer case mounted mode sensor, the instrument panel mounted selector switch, and the following information from the vehicle's CAN bus to determine if a shift is allowed. - Engine RPM and Vehicle Speed - Diagnostic Requests - Manual Transmission and Brake Applied - PRNDL - Ignition Status - ABS Messages Once the TIP determines that a requested shift is allowed, it actuates the bi-directional shift motor as necessary to achieve the desired transfer case operating mode. The TIPM also monitors the mode sensor while controlling the shift motor to determine the status of the shift attempt. Several items can cause the requested shift not to be completed. If the TIPM has recognized a fault (DTC) of some variety, it will begin operation in one of four Functionality Levels. These levels are: - Level Zero - Normal Operation. - Level One - Only Mode Shifts Are Allowed. - Level Two - Only Mode Shifts and Shifts Into LOW Are Allowed (No Neutral Shifts Are Allowed). - Level Three - No Shifts Are Allowed The TIPM can also be operating in one of three possible power modes. These power modes are: - Full Power Mode is the normal operational mode of the module. This mode is achieved by normal CAN bus traffic being present and the ignition being in the RUN position. Reduced Power Mode will be entered when the ignition has been powered off. In this state, the module will shut down power supplied to external devices, and to electronic interface inputs and outputs. From this state the module can enter either Sleep Mode or Full Power Mode. To enter this mode, the module must receive an ignition message denoting that the ignition is off, or not receive any messages for 5 ±0.5 seconds. To exit this mode, the module must receive one ignition message that denotes that the ignition is in the RUN position. - Sleep Mode will be entered, from the Reduced Power Mode, when no CAN traffic has been sensed for 20 ±1 seconds. If during Sleep Mode the module detects CAN bus traffic, it will revert to the Reduced Power mode while monitoring for ignition messages. It will remain in this state as long as there is traffic other than run or start messages, and will return to Sleep mode if the bus goes without traffic for 20 ±1 seconds. SHIFT REQUIREMENTS If the TIPM is in full power mode and at functionality level zero, it uses the following criteria to determine if a shift is allowed. If any of the driver controllable conditions are not met once the shift request is recognized, the TIPM will solidly illuminate the source position's LED and flash the desired position's LED for all shifts except NEUTRAL. The NEUTRAL shift LED strategy will be discussed later. Mode shifts will be allowed regardless of transmission gear or vehicle speed, whenever the following conditions are met: - Front and rear wheel speed are within 21 km/h (13 mph). - A change in the Selector switch state indicates that a mode shift has been requested. - A valid mode sensor signal is being sensed by the TIPM. - Proper transmit/receive messages are occurring on the CAN bus. - Ignition key switch is in the RUN position. Range shifts will be allowed only if all of the following conditions are met: - Front and rear wheel speed are within 21 km/h (13 mph). - A change in the Selector Switch state indicating a range shift has been requested. - Transmission in NEUTRAL signal must be recognized for at least 1.5 seconds ±100 msec. (Automatic transmissions only) - Proper transmit/receive messages are occurring on the CAN bus. - Clutch signal is recognized for 500 msec ± 50 msec (Manual transmissions only). - Vehicle speed is less than or equal to 4.8 km/h (3 mph). - Ignition key switch is in the RUN position. - A valid mode sensor signal is being sensed by the TIPM. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - Transfer Case > Control Module, Transfer Case > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 8287 A shift into transfer case Neutral will be allowed only if all of the following conditions are met: - Front and rear wheel speed are within 21 km/h (13 mph). - The recessed Neutral Selection switch has been depressed continuously for 4.0 seconds ±100 msec while all shift conditions have been continuously met. - Transmission in NEUTRAL signal recognized from the bus. (Automatic transmissions only) - Clutch signal is recognized from the bus (Manual transmissions only). - Proper message transmissions/receptions are occurring on the CAN bus. - Vehicle speed is less than or equal to 4.8 km/h (3 mph). - Ignition key switch is in the RUN position, engine off. - Foot Brake is applied. - A valid mode sensor signal is being sensed by the TIPM. A shift out of transfer case Neutral will be allowed only if all of the following conditions are met: - Front and rear wheel speed are within 21 km/h (13 mph). - The recessed Neutral Selection switch has been depressed continuously for 1.0 seconds ±100 msec while all shift conditions have been continuously met. - Transmission in NEUTRAL signal recognized from the bus.(Automatic transmissions only) - Clutch signal is recognized from the bus (Manual transmissions only). - Proper message transmissions/receptions are occurring on the CAN bus. - Vehicle speed is less than or equal to 4.8 km/h (3 mph). - Ignition key switch is in the RUN position. - Foot Brake is applied. - A valid mode sensor signal is being sensed by the TIPM. SHIFT SEQUENCES Once all the driver controllable conditions for the requested shift have been met, the TIPM begins a shift timer with a maximum duration of 1 second per 'D' channel transition. If the shift timer expires before the TIPM recognizes to correct mode sensor code, the shift is considered to have been blocked. The blocked shift will increment the blocked shift counter by one. The TIPM strategy for handling blocked shifts will be described later. The process the TIPM performs for the various shifts will be described first. RANGE AND MODE SHIFTS The process for performing all the range and mode shifts are the same. The following steps describe the process. - Allow time for Selector Switch debounce; 250 msec ±50 msec. - Extinguish the source gear's LED while flashing desired transfer case position's LED. - Engage the shift motor for a maximum of 1 second ±100 msec per 'D' channel transition in the destination gear's direction while monitoring the mode sensor channel transitions. - Disengage the shift motor when the correct mode sensor code is recognized. - Solidly illuminate the selected gear's LED. - Transmit a bus message that the transfer case shift is complete. - If the desired mode sensor code is not received after the shift timer expires (ie. a blocked or other condition exists), stop driving the motor and wait for 200 msec ±50 msec. The shift motor is then reversed in the direction back toward the source gear for up to 1.0 seconds ±100 msec. per 'D' channel. The TIPM waits for 2.0 seconds ±50 msec. and repeats the attempt to shift to the desired position. The exception to the preceding sequence is when a shift from 4L to 2WD/AWD is requested. If 2WD/AWD is requested from the 4L position, the transfer case is first driven to the 4H position. If the 4H position is reached, the transfer case is then driven back to the 2WD/AWD position and the shift is considered complete. If the transfer case does not reach any the 4H position, but is in the 2WD/AWD 'D' channel, or the 2WD/AWD between gear position on the 4H side of 2WD/AWD, the shift is also considered complete. SHIFT OUT OF NEUTRAL The following steps describe the process for a shift out of NEUTRAL. - Extinguish the Neutral LED. - Engage the shift motor for a maximum of 1 second ±100 msec toward the transfer case 4H mode position while monitoring the mode sensor channel transitions. - Disengage the shift motor when the correct mode sensor code is recognized. - Extinguish the Neutral LED. - Transmit a bus message that the transfer case shift is complete. - If the desired mode sensor code is not received after the shift timer expires (ie. a blocked or other condition exists), stop driving the motor and wait for 200 msec ±50 msec. The shift motor is then reversed in the direction back toward the source gear for up to 1.0 seconds 100 msec. The Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - Transfer Case > Control Module, Transfer Case > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 8288 TIPM waits for 2.0 seconds ±50 msec. and repeats the attempt to shift to the desired position. - When the Neutral button is released, if the 4H position is the desired position, the shift is complete. Illuminate the 4H LED. - Otherwise when the Neutral button is released, if all of the shift requirements are being met then engage the shift motor towards the desired position for 1 second ±100 msec per 'D' channel. (if requirements for shifting are not met, illuminate the 4H LED and flash the destination LED as an indication to the driver that all of the driver controllable shift conditions are not being met). If this requires another range or mode shift, begin the range/mode shift process. - If the desired mode sensor code is not received after the shift timer expires (i.e. a blocked or other condition exists), refer to the Blocked Shift Strategy. BLOCKED SHIFT STRATEGY When a shift is commanded, the shift motor will be driven towards its destination position, except in the case of shifting out of Neutral if 4L was selected (the transfer case will shift to the 4H position first, before proceeding to 4L). If the shift is blocked on the way to the destination, the TIPM may attempt to drive the motor back to the original position. This process will be allowed to occur 5 times. If the transfer case has reached a non-NEUTRAL 'D' channel during the shift re-attempts, the LED for the achieved gear position is illuminated and the shift attempts are stopped. To re-attempt the desired shift, the selector switch will need to be rotated to the current position until the switch debounce timer expires then a shift will need to be requested again. At the end of the 5th blocked attempt, the shift motor is driven towards the last known 'D' channel position. If this motor drive allows the transfer case to reach the 2WD/AWD 'D' channel, or the 2WD/AWD between gear position on the 4H side of 2WD/AWD, the shift is considered complete and the shift attempts are ended. If the mode sensor is in the NEUTRAL region at the expiration of the shift timer, the TIPM will continue to make the shift attempts according to the blocked shift strategy independent of whether or not the driver controlled conditions are met. For shifts from NEUTRAL, if all 5 attempts fail to reach the desired position (which by default is 4H), the motor will be driven to stall in the direction of 4H or 4L, depending on the achieved position. If the transfer case has reached the 2WD/AWD or 4L between gear position nearest the NEUTRAL positions and the shift conditions are no longer being met, the transfer case will be driven toward the corresponding 'D' channel. Otherwise, the transfer case will be driven in the direction opposite the last attempt with the desired target being 4H or 4L. If the transfer case reaches the 2WD/AWD 'D' channel when being driven in the 4H direction, then one final 1.0 second drive toward 4H is attempted. If the transfer case then reaches any of the 4H positions, the shift is considered complete and the 4H LED is illuminated. If the transfer case is still the 2WD/AWD position, the shift is considered complete and the 2WD/AWD LED is illuminated. NOTE: If after the 5th blocked shift and reversal attempt, if the transfer case position is in the NEUTRAL region, shift attempts will continue until a non-NEUTRAL 'D' channel is reached. SHIFT REVERSAL TARGETS If the shift timer expires (1 second per 'D' channel) and the transfer case has not reached the desired position, all shifts will attempt to return to their original position with the exceptions of: - If the intended shift is going to the High rail from Low and can't make it, but it can make the 2WD/AWD position, the motor stops at that position. The TIPM will not attempt to cross back over NEUTRAL if it does not have to. This means that there was a block on the first attempt to go to 4H and the transfer case has made it through NEUTRAL to a known good position, then the motor will go back only to the 2WD/4WD position and execute the remainder of the attempts from there. - For shifts out of NEUTRAL, any time a shift is commanded out of NEUTRAL, the system needs to get out. The TIPM should never go to NEUTRAL unless the driver is commanding it and all required conditions are being met ENCODER DRIFT CORRECTION Whenever a shift is completed, the TIPM stores the position in memory as the transfer case's intended position. The TIPM continuously monitors the mode sensor and if the mode sensor drifts toward into a NEUTRAL region sensor position for 2.0 seconds, the TIPM will perform a motor drive to correct the drift. The transfer case will be driven toward the intended position for 1.0 seconds 100 msec. The TIPM will wait for 2.0 seconds ±50 msec. and repeat the attempt to shift to the desired position. This will continue until the intended position is reached. SHIFT MOTOR BRAKING Two modes of shift motor braking are employed to improve shift performance, static and dynamic. Static shift motor braking is utilized under the following conditions: - Whenever the transfer case is in the 2WD/AWD or 4L 'D' channel position. - Whenever an invalid mode sensor code is present. Static motor braking is achieved by applying +12V on both shift motor wires. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - Transfer Case > Control Module, Transfer Case > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 8289 NOTE: Static Shift Motor Braking is independent of ignition key position. SHIFT ATTEMPT LIMIT To protect the transfer case system, the TIPM will impose a limit on the number of shifts that can occur over a calibrated time period. The system will monitor the number of 'D' channel segment transitions that occur in any 30 second time period. If the number of segment transitions is 30 or greater, the system will go into a default mode. The default mode of operation for shifting is that the number of allowed 'D' channel transitions permitted to occur will be 3 over each 15 second ±100 msec calibrated window of time. After 5 minutes ±100 msec, the motor can be assumed to have cooled down and the system will revert to normal operation. The following rules also apply to the shift limit: - The attempt limit will not prevent shifts coming out of NEUTRAL, they will be allowed regardless of the counter/timer. - Any shift that is in progress when the counter reaches a maximum count in time will be allowed to complete before the default mode is entered. D-channel transitions during this period will not be counted towards the default mode limit. - A block, regardless of the direction, whether towards destination or back towards reversal target (shift timer expiring), will count as a value of 2 transitions towards the 30 segment transitions to go into default mode as defined above. Current attempt limit values are 30 transitions in 30 seconds and default mode values are 3 transitions every 15 seconds for 5 minutes. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Assembly-Line Pressure Sensor/Variable Force Solenoid Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch: Locations Assembly-Line Pressure Sensor/Variable Force Solenoid Component ID: 17 Component : ASSEMBLY-LINE PRESSURE SENSOR/VARIABLE FORCE SOLENOID Connector: Name : ASSEMBLY-LINE PRESSURE SENSOR/VARIABLE FORCE SOLENOID Color : BLACK # of pins : 6 Qualifier : (RLE) Pin Circuit Description 1-2 F856 20YL/PK 5 VOLT SUPPLY 3 T38 20YL/BR LINE PRESSURE SIGNAL 4 K900 20DB/DG SENSOR GROUND 5 T16 18YL/OR TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT 6 T118 20DG LP VFS CONTROL Component Location - 19 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Assembly-Line Pressure Sensor/Variable Force Solenoid > Page 8296 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Assembly-Line Pressure Sensor/Variable Force Solenoid > Page 8297 Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch: Locations Assembly-Transmission Solenoid/Pressure Switch Component ID: 20 Component : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID/PRESSURE SWITCH Connector: Name : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID/PRESSURE SWITCH Color : LT. BROWN # of pins : 10 Qualifier : (RLE) Pin Circuit Description 1 T60 20YL/GY OD CONTROL 2 T59 20YL/LB UD CONTROL 3 T16 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT 4 T19 18YL/DB 2-4 CONTROL 5 T47 18YL/DG 2-4 PRESSURE SIGNAL 6 T9 20DG/TN OD PRESSURE SIGNAL 7 T20 20DG/WT L/R CONTROL 8-9-10 T50 20YL/TN L/R PRESSURE SIGNAL Component Location - 19 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Assembly-Line Pressure Sensor/Variable Force Solenoid > Page 8298 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Assembly-Line Pressure Sensor/Variable Force Solenoid > Page 8299 Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch: Locations Sensor-Line Pressure Component ID: 425 Component : SENSOR-LINE PRESSURE Connector: Name : SENSOR-LINE PRESSURE Color : BLACK # of pins : 4 Qualifier : (RFE) Pin Circuit Description 1 T160 20DG/WT SENSOR GROUND Pin Circuit Description 1 K900 20DB/DG SENSOR GROUND 2 F856 20YL/PK 5 VOLT SUPPLY 3 T38 20YL/BR LINE PRESSURE SIGNAL 4-- Component Location - 23 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Assembly-Line Pressure Sensor/Variable Force Solenoid > Page 8300 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Assembly-Line Pressure Sensor/Variable Force Solenoid Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch: Diagrams Assembly-Line Pressure Sensor/Variable Force Solenoid Component ID: 17 Component : ASSEMBLY-LINE PRESSURE SENSOR/VARIABLE FORCE SOLENOID Connector: Name : ASSEMBLY-LINE PRESSURE SENSOR/VARIABLE FORCE SOLENOID Color : BLACK # of pins : 6 Qualifier : (RLE) Pin Circuit Description 1-2 F856 20YL/PK 5 VOLT SUPPLY 3 T38 20YL/BR LINE PRESSURE SIGNAL 4 K900 20DB/DG SENSOR GROUND 5 T16 18YL/OR TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT 6 T118 20DG LP VFS CONTROL Component Location - 19 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Assembly-Line Pressure Sensor/Variable Force Solenoid > Page 8303 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Assembly-Line Pressure Sensor/Variable Force Solenoid > Page 8304 Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch: Diagrams Assembly-Transmission Solenoid/Pressure Switch Component ID: 20 Component : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID/PRESSURE SWITCH Connector: Name : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID/PRESSURE SWITCH Color : LT. BROWN # of pins : 10 Qualifier : (RLE) Pin Circuit Description 1 T60 20YL/GY OD CONTROL 2 T59 20YL/LB UD CONTROL 3 T16 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT 4 T19 18YL/DB 2-4 CONTROL 5 T47 18YL/DG 2-4 PRESSURE SIGNAL 6 T9 20DG/TN OD PRESSURE SIGNAL 7 T20 20DG/WT L/R CONTROL 8-9-10 T50 20YL/TN L/R PRESSURE SIGNAL Component Location - 19 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Assembly-Line Pressure Sensor/Variable Force Solenoid > Page 8305 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Assembly-Line Pressure Sensor/Variable Force Solenoid > Page 8306 Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch: Diagrams Sensor-Line Pressure Component ID: 425 Component : SENSOR-LINE PRESSURE Connector: Name : SENSOR-LINE PRESSURE Color : BLACK # of pins : 4 Qualifier : (RFE) Pin Circuit Description 1 T160 20DG/WT SENSOR GROUND Pin Circuit Description 1 K900 20DB/DG SENSOR GROUND 2 F856 20YL/PK 5 VOLT SUPPLY 3 T38 20YL/BR LINE PRESSURE SIGNAL 4-- Component Location - 23 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Assembly-Line Pressure Sensor/Variable Force Solenoid > Page 8307 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > 42RLE Automatic Transmission Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch: Description and Operation 42RLE Automatic Transmission Description DESCRIPTION The line pressure sensor (2) is mounted on the top of the valve body, next to the pressure control solenoid (1). The TCM utilizes a closed-loop system to control transmission line pressure. The system contains a variable force style solenoid, the Pressure Control Solenoid. The solenoid is duty cycle controlled by the TCM to vent the unnecessary line pressure supplied by the oil pump back to the sump. The system also contains a variable pressure style sensor, the Line Pressure Sensor, which is a direct input to the TCM. The line pressure solenoid monitors the transmission line pressure and completes the feedback loop to the TCM. The TCM uses this information to adjust its control of the pressure control solenoid to achieve the desired line pressure. Operation OPERATION The TCM calculates the desired line pressure based upon inputs from the transmission and engine. The TCM calculates the torque input to the transmission and uses that information as the primary input to the calculation. The line pressure is set to a predetermined value during shifts and when the transmission is in the PARK and NEUTRAL positions. This is done to ensure consistent shift quality. During all other operation, the actual line pressure is compared to the desired line pressure and adjustments are made to the pressure control solenoid duty cycle. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 8310 Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch: Description and Operation 545RFE Automatic Transmission Description DESCRIPTION The TCM utilizes a closed-loop system to control transmission line pressure. The system contains a variable force style solenoid, the Pressure Control Solenoid, which is part of the pressure switch assembly. The solenoid is duty cycle controlled by the TCM to vent the unnecessary line pressure supplied by the oil pump back to the pump inlet. The system contains a Line Pressure Sensor, which is a direct input to the TCM. The line pressure sensor monitors the transmission line pressure and completes the feedback loop to the TCM. The TCM uses this information to adjust its control of the pressure control solenoid to achieve the desired line pressure. Operation OPERATION The TCM calculates the desired line pressure based upon inputs from the transmission and engine. The TCM calculates the torque input to the transmission and uses that information as the primary input to the calculation. The line pressure is set to a predetermined value during shifts, to ensure consistent shift quality. During all other operation, the desired line pressure value is adjusted based on torque level and other transmission requirements. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 8311 Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch: Description and Operation 68RFE Automatic Transmission Description DESCRIPTION The TCM utilizes a closed-loop system to control transmission line pressure. The system contains a variable force style solenoid, the Pressure Control Solenoid, which is part of the pressure switch assembly. The solenoid is duty cycle controlled by the TCM to vent the unnecessary line pressure supplied by the oil pump back to the pump inlet. The system contains a Line Pressure Sensor, which is a direct input to the TCM. The line pressure sensor monitors the transmission line pressure and completes the feedback loop to the TCM. The TCM uses this information to adjust its control of the pressure control solenoid to achieve the desired line pressure. Operation OPERATION The TCM calculates the desired line pressure based upon inputs from the transmission and engine. The TCM calculates the torque input to the transmission and uses that information as the primary input to the calculation. The line pressure is set to a predetermined value during shifts, to ensure consistent shift quality. During all other operation, the desired line pressure value is adjusted based on torque level and other transmission requirements. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 42RLE Automatic Transmission Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch: Service and Repair 42RLE Automatic Transmission Removal REMOVAL 1. Remove the valve body from the transmission. See: Automatic Transmission/Transaxle/Valve Body/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/42RLE Automatic Transmission/Removal 2. Remove the electrical connectors from the pressure control solenoid (1) and the line pressure sensor (2). 3. Remove the screws (6) holding the pressure control solenoid (1) and line pressure sensor (2) to the valve body. 4. Remove the pressure control solenoid and line pressure sensor from the valve body. Installation INSTALLATION 1. Install the pressure control solenoid (1) and line pressure sensor (2) into the valve body. 2. Install the screws (6) to hold the pressure control solenoid (1) and line pressure sensor (2) to the valve body. 3. Install the electrical connectors to the pressure control solenoid (1) and the line pressure sensor (2). 4. Install the valve body into the transmission. See: Automatic Transmission/Transaxle/Valve Body/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/42RLE Automatic Transmission/Installation Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 8314 Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch: Service and Repair 545RFE Automatic Transmission Removal REMOVAL 1. Raise vehicle. 2. Place a suitable fluid catch pan under the transmission. 3. Remove the wiring connector from the line pressure sensor (2). 4. Remove the bolt holding the line pressure sensor (2) to the transmission case. 5. Remove the line pressure sensor (2) from the transmission case. Installation INSTALLATION 1. Install the line pressure sensor (2) into the transmission case. 2. Install the bolt to hold the line pressure sensor (2) into the transmission case. Tighten the bolt to 12 Nm (105 in.lbs.). 3. Install the wiring connector onto the line pressure sensor (2). 4. Verify the transmission fluid level. Add fluid as necessary. 5. Lower vehicle. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 8315 Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch: Service and Repair 68RFE Automatic Transmission Removal REMOVAL 1. Raise vehicle. 2. Place a suitable fluid catch pan under the transmission. 3. Remove the wiring connector from the line pressure sensor (2). 4. Remove the bolt holding the line pressure sensor (2) to the transmission case. 5. Remove the line pressure sensor (2) from the transmission case. Installation INSTALLATION 1. Install the line pressure sensor (2) into the transmission case. 2. Install the bolt to hold the line pressure sensor (2) into the transmission case. Tighten the bolt to 12 Nm (105 in.lbs.). 3. Install the wiring connector onto the line pressure sensor (2). 4. Verify the transmission fluid level. Add fluid as necessary. 5. Lower vehicle. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Overdrive Switch, A/T > Component Information > Locations Overdrive Switch: Locations Component ID: 514 Component : SWITCH-TOW/HAUL OVERDRIVE OFF Connector: Name : SWITCH-TOW/HAUL OVERDRIVE OFF Color : NATURAL # of pins : 6 Pin Circuit Description 123 T6 20DG TOW/HAUL OVERDRIVE OFF SWITCH SIGNAL 4 Z71 20LB/BK GROUND 5 T5 20DG/YL AUTOSTICK (ERS)-TOW/HAUL SIGNAL 6 T160 20DG/WT SENSOR GROUND Component Location - 47 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Overdrive Switch, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 8319 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Overdrive Switch, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 8320 Overdrive Switch: Diagrams Component ID: 514 Component : SWITCH-TOW/HAUL OVERDRIVE OFF Connector: Name : SWITCH-TOW/HAUL OVERDRIVE OFF Color : NATURAL # of pins : 6 Pin Circuit Description 123 T6 20DG TOW/HAUL OVERDRIVE OFF SWITCH SIGNAL 4 Z71 20LB/BK GROUND 5 T5 20DG/YL AUTOSTICK (ERS)-TOW/HAUL SIGNAL 6 T160 20DG/WT SENSOR GROUND Component Location - 47 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Overdrive Switch, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 8321 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Overdrive Switch, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 8322 Overdrive Switch: Testing and Inspection DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING - OVERDRIVE ELECTRICAL CONTROLS The tow/haul overdrive off switch, valve body solenoid, case connectors and related wiring can all be tested with a 12 volt test lamp or a volt/ohmmeter. Check continuity of each component when diagnosis indicates this is necessary. Switch and solenoid continuity should be checked whenever the transmission fails to shift into fourth gear range. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Overdrive Switch, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 42RLE Automatic Transmission Overdrive Switch: Service and Repair 42RLE Automatic Transmission Removal REMOVAL 1. Using a plastic trim tool, remove the tow/haul overdrive off switch retainer (2) from the shift lever (1). 2. Pull the switch (2) outwards to release it from the connector in the lever (1). Installation INSTALLATION NOTE: There is enough slack in the wire to pull out the connector from the lever. 1. Pull the connector (2) out of the lever (1) just enough to grasp it. CAUTION: Be careful not to bend the pins on the tow/haul overdrive off switch. Use care when installing the switch, as it is not indexed, and can be accidentally installed incorrectly. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Overdrive Switch, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 8325 2. Install the tow/haul overdrive off switch (3) into the connector (2). 3. Push the tow/haul overdrive off switch (3) and wiring into the shift lever (1). 4. Install the tow/haul overdrive off switch retainer onto the shift lever. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Overdrive Switch, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 8326 Overdrive Switch: Service and Repair 545RFE Automatic Transmission Removal REMOVAL 1. Using a plastic trim tool, remove the tow/haul overdrive off switch retainer (2) from the shift lever (1). 2. Pull the switch (2) outwards to release it from the connector in the lever (1). Installation INSTALLATION NOTE: There is enough slack in the wire to pull out the connector from the lever. 1. Pull the connector (2) out of the lever (1) just enough to grasp it. CAUTION: Be careful not to bend the pins on the tow/haul overdrive off switch. Use care when installing the switch, as it is not indexed, and can be accidentally installed incorrectly. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Overdrive Switch, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 8327 2. Install the tow/haul overdrive off switch (3) into the connector (2). 3. Push the tow/haul overdrive off switch (3) and wiring into the shift lever (1). 4. Install the tow/haul overdrive off switch retainer onto the shift lever. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Overdrive Switch, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 8328 Overdrive Switch: Service and Repair 48RE Automatic Transmission Removal REMOVAL 1. Using a plastic trim tool, remove the tow/haul overdrive off switch retainer (2) from the shift lever (1). 2. Pull the switch (2) outwards to release it from the connector in the lever (1). Installation INSTALLATION NOTE: There is enough slack in the wire to pull out the connector from the lever. 1. Pull the connector (2) out of the lever (1) just enough to grasp it. CAUTION: Be careful not to bend the pins on the tow/haul overdrive off switch. Use care when installing the switch, as it is not indexed, and can be accidentally installed incorrectly. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Overdrive Switch, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 8329 2. Install the tow/haul overdrive off switch (3) into the connector (2). 3. Push the tow/haul overdrive off switch (3) and wiring into the shift lever (1). 4. Install the tow/haul overdrive off switch retainer onto the shift lever. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Overdrive Switch, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 8330 Overdrive Switch: Service and Repair AS68RC Automatic Transmission Removal REMOVAL 1. Using a plastic trim tool, remove the tow/haul overdrive off switch retainer (2) from the shift lever (1). 2. Pull the switch (2) outwards to release it from the connector in the lever (1). Installation INSTALLATION NOTE: There is enough slack in the wire to pull out the connector from the lever. 1. Pull the connector (2) out of the lever (1) just enough to grasp it. CAUTION: Be careful not to bend the pins on the tow/haul overdrive off switch. Use care when installing the switch, as it is not indexed, and can be accidentally installed incorrectly. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Overdrive Switch, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 8331 2. Install the tow/haul overdrive off switch (3) into the connector (2). 3. Push the tow/haul overdrive off switch (3) and wiring into the shift lever (1). 4. Install the tow/haul overdrive off switch retainer onto the shift lever. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Shift Solenoid Position Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Shift Solenoid Position Sensor/Switch: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The transmission solenoid/TRS assembly is internal to the transmission and mounted on the valve body assembly. The assembly consists of six solenoids that control hydraulic pressure to the six friction elements (transmission clutches), and the torque converter clutch. The pressure control solenoid is located on the side of the solenoid/TRS assembly. The solenoid/TRS assembly also contains the Transmission Range Sensor (TRS) and five pressure switches that feed information to the TCM. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Shift Solenoid Position Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 8336 Shift Solenoid Position Sensor/Switch: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION SOLENOIDS Solenoids are used to control the L/R, 2C, 4C, OD, and UD friction elements. The reverse clutch is controlled by line pressure and the position of the manual valve in the valve body. All the solenoids are contained within the Solenoid and Pressure Switch Assembly. The solenoid and pressure switch assembly contains one additional solenoid, Multi-Select (MS), which serves primarily to provide 2nd and 3rd gear limp-in operation. The solenoids receive electrical power from the Transmission Control Relay through a single wire. The TCM energizes or operates the solenoids individually by grounding the return wire of the solenoid as necessary. When a solenoid is energized, the solenoid valve shifts, and a fluid passage is opened or closed (vented or applied), depending on its default operating state. The result is an apply or release of a frictional element. The MS and UD solenoids are normally applied to allow transmission limp-in in the event of an electrical failure. The continuity of the solenoids and circuits are periodically tested. Each solenoid is turned on or off depending on its current state. An inductive spike should be detected by the TCM during this test. If no spike is detected, the circuit is tested again to verify the failure. In addition to the periodic testing, the solenoid circuits are tested if a speed ratio or pressure switch error occurs. PRESSURE SWITCHES The TCM relies on five pressure switches to monitor fluid pressure in the L/R, 2C, 4C, UD, and OD hydraulic circuits. The primary purpose of these switches is to help the TCM detect when clutch circuit hydraulic failures occur. The switches close at 23 psi and open at 11 psi, and simply indicate whether or not pressure exists. The switches are continuously monitored by the TCM for the correct states (open or closed) in each gear as shown in the following charts and 545RFE PRESSURE SWITCH STATES: A Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) will set if the TCM senses any switch open or closed at the wrong time in a given gear. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Shift Solenoid Position Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Shift Solenoid Position Sensor/Switch: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL NOTE: If the Transmission Solenoid/TRS Assembly is being replaced, the Quick Learn Procedure must be performed. See: Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Transmission Control Module/TCM Quick Learn 1. Remove the valve body from the transmission. See: Automatic Transmission/Transaxle/Valve Body/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/545RFE Automatic Transmission/Removal 2. Remove the bolts (1) holding the transmission solenoid/TRS assembly onto the valve body. 3. Separate the transmission solenoid/TRS assembly from the valve body. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Shift Solenoid Position Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 8339 Shift Solenoid Position Sensor/Switch: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION 1. Place TRS selector plate in the PARK position. 2. Position the transmission solenoid/TRS assembly onto the valve body. Be sure that both alignment dowels are fully seated in the valve body and that the TRS switch contacts are properly positioned in the selector plate 3. Install the bolts (1) to hold the transmission solenoid/TRS assembly onto the valve body. 4. Tighten the solenoid assembly screws adjacent to the arrows cast into the bottom of the valve body first. Tighten the screws to 6 Nm (50 in.lbs.). 5. Tighten the remainder of the solenoid assembly screws to 6 Nm (50 in.lbs.). 6. Install the valve body into the transmission. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Transmission Range Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Locations Sensor-Transmission Range Component ID: 444 Component : SENSOR-TRANSMISSION RANGE Connector: Name : SENSOR-TRANSMISSION RANGE Color : # of pins : 10 Qualifier : (RC) Pin Circuit Description 1 T825 20DG/YL TRS NEUTRAL SIGNAL 2 T3 20DG/DB TRS T3 SIGNAL 3 T828 20DG/DB TRS 1 SIGNAL 4 F1 20PK/WT FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (OFF-RUN-START) 5 T824 20YL/DB TRS PARK SIGNAL 6 Z157 16BK/LG GROUND 7 T42 20DG/YL TRS T42 SIGNAL 8 T827 20DG/LB TRS DRIVE SIGNAL 9 T826 20DG/DB TRS REVERSE SIGNAL 10 T41 20YL/DB TRS T41 SIGNAL (P/N) Component Location - 20 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Transmission Range > Page 8344 Component Location - 19 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Transmission Range > Page 8345 Component Location - 26 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Transmission Range > Page 8346 Connector: Name : SENSOR-TRANSMISSION RANGE Color : # of pins : 6 Qualifier : (RE) Pin Circuit Description 1-2 T117 20DG/YL TRS SIGNAL 3-4-- Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Transmission Range > Page 8347 5 T917 20YL/TN TRS RETURN 6 T41 20YL/DB TRS T41 SIGNAL (P/N) Component Location - 20 Component Location - 19 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Transmission Range > Page 8348 Component Location - 26 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Transmission Range > Page 8349 Connector: Name : SENSOR-TRANSMISSION RANGE Color : LT. GREEN # of pins : 10 Qualifier : (RLE) Pin Circuit Description 1 T16 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT 2-3 K900 20DB/DG SENSOR GROUND 4 T54 20DG/OR TRANSMISSION TEMPERATURE SIGNAL Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Transmission Range > Page 8350 5-6-7 T1 20DG/LB TRS T1 SIGNAL 8 T3 20DG/DB TRS T3 SIGNAL 9 T42 20DG/YL TRS T42 SIGNAL 10 T41 20YL/DB TRS T41 SIGNAL (P/N) Component Location - 20 Component Location - 19 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Transmission Range > Page 8351 Component Location - 26 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Transmission Range > Page 8352 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Transmission Range > Page 8353 Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Locations Assembly-Transmission Solenoid/TRS Component ID: 21 Component : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID/TRS Connector: Name : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID/TRS Color : BLACK # of pins : 23 Qualifier : (RFE) Pin Circuit Description 1-2 T20 20DG/WT L/R CONTROL 3-4 T41 20YL/DB TRS T41 SIGNAL (P/N) 5 T42 20DG/YL TRS T42 SIGNAL 6-- 7 T60 20YL/GY OD SOLENOID CONTROL 8 T3 20DG/DB TRS T3 SIGNAL 9 T1 20DG/LB TRS T1 SIGNAL 10 T16 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT 11 T48 20BR/YL 4C PRESSURE SIGNAL 12 T118 20DG LINE PRESSURE CONTROL 13 T4 20DG/RD TRS T2 SIGNAL 13 T4 20DG/LB TRS T2 SIGNAL 14 T50 20DG/PK L/R PRESSURE SIGNAL 14 T50 20YL/TN L/R PRESSURE SIGNAL 15 T147 20DG/YL 2C PRESSURE SIGNAL 16 T9 20DG/TN OD PRESSURE SIGNAL 17 T59 20YL/LB UD CONTROL 18 T29 20YL/WT UD PRESSURE SIGNAL 19 T259 20YL/DG 4C CONTROL 20 T219 20YL/LG 2C CONTROL 21 T140 20YL/GY MS CONTROL 22 T160 20DG/WT SENSOR GROUND 22 K900 20DB/DG SENSOR GROUND 23 T54 20DG/OR TRANSMISSION TEMPERATURE SIGNAL Component Location - 21 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Transmission Range > Page 8354 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Transmission Range Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Diagrams Sensor-Transmission Range Component ID: 444 Component : SENSOR-TRANSMISSION RANGE Connector: Name : SENSOR-TRANSMISSION RANGE Color : # of pins : 10 Qualifier : (RC) Pin Circuit Description 1 T825 20DG/YL TRS NEUTRAL SIGNAL 2 T3 20DG/DB TRS T3 SIGNAL 3 T828 20DG/DB TRS 1 SIGNAL 4 F1 20PK/WT FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (OFF-RUN-START) 5 T824 20YL/DB TRS PARK SIGNAL 6 Z157 16BK/LG GROUND 7 T42 20DG/YL TRS T42 SIGNAL 8 T827 20DG/LB TRS DRIVE SIGNAL 9 T826 20DG/DB TRS REVERSE SIGNAL 10 T41 20YL/DB TRS T41 SIGNAL (P/N) Component Location - 20 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Transmission Range > Page 8357 Component Location - 19 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Transmission Range > Page 8358 Component Location - 26 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Transmission Range > Page 8359 Connector: Name : SENSOR-TRANSMISSION RANGE Color : # of pins : 6 Qualifier : (RE) Pin Circuit Description 1-2 T117 20DG/YL TRS SIGNAL 3-4-- Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Transmission Range > Page 8360 5 T917 20YL/TN TRS RETURN 6 T41 20YL/DB TRS T41 SIGNAL (P/N) Component Location - 20 Component Location - 19 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Transmission Range > Page 8361 Component Location - 26 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Transmission Range > Page 8362 Connector: Name : SENSOR-TRANSMISSION RANGE Color : LT. GREEN # of pins : 10 Qualifier : (RLE) Pin Circuit Description 1 T16 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT 2-3 K900 20DB/DG SENSOR GROUND 4 T54 20DG/OR TRANSMISSION TEMPERATURE SIGNAL Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Transmission Range > Page 8363 5-6-7 T1 20DG/LB TRS T1 SIGNAL 8 T3 20DG/DB TRS T3 SIGNAL 9 T42 20DG/YL TRS T42 SIGNAL 10 T41 20YL/DB TRS T41 SIGNAL (P/N) Component Location - 20 Component Location - 19 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Transmission Range > Page 8364 Component Location - 26 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Transmission Range > Page 8365 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Transmission Range > Page 8366 Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Diagrams Assembly-Transmission Solenoid/TRS Component ID: 21 Component : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID/TRS Connector: Name : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID/TRS Color : BLACK # of pins : 23 Qualifier : (RFE) Pin Circuit Description 1-2 T20 20DG/WT L/R CONTROL 3-4 T41 20YL/DB TRS T41 SIGNAL (P/N) 5 T42 20DG/YL TRS T42 SIGNAL 6-- 7 T60 20YL/GY OD SOLENOID CONTROL 8 T3 20DG/DB TRS T3 SIGNAL 9 T1 20DG/LB TRS T1 SIGNAL 10 T16 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT 11 T48 20BR/YL 4C PRESSURE SIGNAL 12 T118 20DG LINE PRESSURE CONTROL 13 T4 20DG/RD TRS T2 SIGNAL 13 T4 20DG/LB TRS T2 SIGNAL 14 T50 20DG/PK L/R PRESSURE SIGNAL 14 T50 20YL/TN L/R PRESSURE SIGNAL 15 T147 20DG/YL 2C PRESSURE SIGNAL 16 T9 20DG/TN OD PRESSURE SIGNAL 17 T59 20YL/LB UD CONTROL 18 T29 20YL/WT UD PRESSURE SIGNAL 19 T259 20YL/DG 4C CONTROL 20 T219 20YL/LG 2C CONTROL 21 T140 20YL/GY MS CONTROL 22 T160 20DG/WT SENSOR GROUND 22 K900 20DB/DG SENSOR GROUND 23 T54 20DG/OR TRANSMISSION TEMPERATURE SIGNAL Component Location - 21 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Transmission Range > Page 8367 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > 42RLE Automatic Transmission Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Description and Operation 42RLE Automatic Transmission Description DESCRIPTION The Transmission Range Sensor (TRS) (2) is mounted to the top of the valve body inside the transmission and can only be serviced by removing the valve body assembly. The electrical connector extends through the transmission case. The Transmission Range Sensor (TRS) has four switch contacts that monitor shift lever position and send the information to the PCM. Operation OPERATION The Transmission Range Sensor (TRS) communicates shift lever position (SLP) to the TCM as a combination of open and closed switches. Each shift lever position has an assigned combination of switch states (open/closed) that the TCM receives from four sense circuits. The TCM interprets this information and determines the appropriate transmission gear position and shift schedule. Since there are four switches, there are 16 possible combinations of open and closed switches (codes). Seven of these codes are related to gear position and three are recognized as "between gear" codes. This results in six codes which should never occur. These are called "invalid" codes. An invalid code will result in a DTC, and the TCM will then determine the shift lever position based on pressure switch data. This allows reasonably normal transmission operation with a TRS failure. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 8370 Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Description and Operation 545RFE Automatic Transmission Description DESCRIPTION The Transmission Range Sensor (TRS) is part of the solenoid module, which is mounted to the top of the valve body inside the transmission. The Transmission Range Sensor (TRS) has five switch contact pins that: - Determine shift lever position - Supply ground to the Starter Relay in Park and Neutral only. - Supply +12 V to the backup lamps in Reverse only. The TRS also has an integrated temperature sensor (thermistor) that communicates transmission temperature to the TCM and PCM. Operation OPERATION The Transmission Range Sensor (TRS) communicates shift lever position to the TCM as a combination of open and closed switches. Each shift lever position has an assigned combination of switch states (open/closed) that the TCM receives from four sense circuits. The TCM interprets this information and determines the appropriate transmission gear position and shift schedule. There are many possible combinations of open and closed switches (codes). Seven of these possible codes are related to gear position and five are recognized as "between gear" codes. This results in many codes which should never occur. These are called "invalid" codes. An invalid code will result in a DTC, and the TCM will then determine the shift lever position based on pressure switch data. This allows reasonably normal transmission operation with a TRS failure. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 8371 Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Description and Operation 68RFE Automatic Transmission Description DESCRIPTION The Transmission Range Sensor (TRS) is part of the solenoid module, which is mounted to the top of the valve body inside the transmission. The Transmission Range Sensor (TRS) has five switch contact pins that: - Determine shift lever position - Supply ground to the Starter Relay in Park and Neutral only. The TRS also has an integrated temperature sensor (thermistor) that communicates transmission temperature to the TCM and PCM. Operation OPERATION The Transmission Range Sensor (TRS) communicates shift lever position to the TCM as a combination of open and closed switches. Each shift lever position has an assigned combination of switch states (open/closed) that the TCM receives from four sense circuits. The TCM interprets this information and determines the appropriate transmission gear position and shift schedule. There are many possible combinations of open and closed switches (codes). Five of these possible codes correspond to valid gear position, there are two codes for the neutral position and three are recognized as "between gear" codes. This results in many codes which should never occur. These are called "invalid" codes. An invalid code will result in a DTC, and the TCM will then determine the shift lever position based on pressure switch data. This allows reasonably normal transmission operation with a TRS failure. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 8372 Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Description and Operation 48RE Automatic Transmission Description DESCRIPTION The Transmission Range Sensor (TRS) has 3 primary functions: - Provide a PARK/NEUTRAL start signal to the engine controller and the starter relay. - Turn the Back-up lamps on when the transmission is in REVERSE and the engine (ignition) is on. - Provide a transmission range signal to the instrument cluster. The sensor is mounted in the transmission housing near the valve body, just above the pan rail. It's in the same position as the Park/Neutral switch on other transmissions. The TRS contacts a cammed surface on the manual valve lever. The cammed surface translates the rotational motion of the manual lever into the linear motion of the sensor. The cammed surface on the manual lever is comprised of two parts controlling the TRS signal: The insulator portion contacts the switch poppet when the manual lever is not in PARK or NEUTRAL. The manual lever itself contacts the poppet when the lever is in PARK or NEUTRAL; providing a ground for the signal from the starter relay and the appropriate engine controller. Operation OPERATION Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 8373 As the switch moves through its linear motion contacts slide across a circuit board which changes the resistance between the range sensing pins of the switch. A power supply on the instrument cluster provides a regulated voltage signal to the switch. The return signal is decoded by the cluster, which then controls the PRNDL display to correspond with the correct transmission range. A bus message of transmission range is also sent by the cluster. In REVERSE range a second contact set closes the circuit providing power to the reverse lamps. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 8374 Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Description and Operation AS68RC Automatic Transmission Description DESCRIPTION TRANSMISSION RANGE SENSOR The transmission range sensor (1) is mounted externally on the left side of the transmission case. Operation OPERATION The transmission range sensor prohibits the vehicle from starting in any gear other than park and neutral. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 8375 Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Testing and Inspection DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING - TRANSMISSION RANGE SENSOR (TRS) NOTE: For all circuit identification in the following steps, Refer to the appropriate Wiring Information. 1. Raise vehicle on suitable hoist. 2. Disconnect the vehicle's shift cable from the manual lever. 3. With the manual lever in the PARK position (the PARK position is with the manual lever moved to the full rearward position), measure the resistance between the Park/Neutral Position Sense pin of the TRS and the transmission case. The resistance should be less than 5 ohms. 4. With the manual lever in the NEUTRAL position (the NEUTRAL position is with the manual lever moved two detents forward of the full rearward position), measure the resistance between the Park/Neutral Position Sense pin of the TRS and the transmission case. The resistance should be less than 5 ohms. 5. If the resistance is greater than 5 ohms in either of the previous steps, check for a dirty contact between the tip of the TRS rod and the valve body manual lever. If the contact is OK, replace the TRS. 6. With the manual lever in the REVERSE position (the REVERSE position is with the manual lever moved one detent forward of the full rearward position), measure the resistance between the Fused Ignition Switch Output and the Back-up Lamp feed pins of the TRS. The resistance should be less than 5 ohms. If the resistance is greater than 5 ohms, replace the TRS. 7. With the manual lever in the PARK position (the PARK position is with the manual lever moved to the full rearward position), measure the resistance between the Transmission Range Sensor MUX and the Transmission Range Sensor 5V Supply pins of the TRS. The resistance should be 522.2 ohms. If the resistance is not correct, replace the TRS. 8. With the manual lever in the REVERSE position (the REVERSE position is with the manual lever moved one detent forward of the full rearward position), measure the resistance between the Transmission Range Sensor MUX and the Transmission Range Sensor 5V Supply pins of the TRS. The resistance should be 206.2 ohms. If the resistance is not correct, replace the TRS. 9. With the manual lever in the NEUTRAL position (the NEUTRAL position is with the manual lever moved two detents forward of the full rearward position), measure the resistance between the Transmission Range Sensor MUX and the Transmission Range Sensor 5V Supply pins of the TRS. The resistance should be 108.6 ohms. If the resistance is not correct, replace the TRS. 10. With the manual lever in the DRIVE position (the DRIVE position is with the manual lever moved three detents forward of the full rearward position), measure the resistance between the Transmission Range Sensor MUX and the Transmission Range Sensor 5V Supply pins of the TRS. The resistance should be 59.9 ohms. If the resistance is not correct, replace the TRS. 11. With the manual lever in the SECOND position (the SECOND position is with the manual lever moved one detent rearward of the full forward position), measure the resistance between the Transmission Range Sensor MUX and the Back-up Lamp feed pins of the TRS. The resistance should be 31.9 ohms. If the resistance is not correct, replace the TRS. 12. With the manual lever in the LOW position (the LOW position is with the manual lever moved to the full forward position), measure the resistance between the Transmission Range Sensor MUX and the Back-up Lamp feed pins of the TRS. The resistance should be 13.7 ohms. If the resistance is not correct, replace the TRS. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 42RLE Automatic Transmission Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Service and Repair 42RLE Automatic Transmission Removal REMOVAL 1. Remove valve body assembly from vehicle. See: Automatic Transmission/Transaxle/Valve Body/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/42RLE Automatic Transmission/Removal 2. Remove the manual shaft seal (1). 3. Remove manual shaft/TRS retaining screw (1). 4. Slide TRS off of manual valve shaft. Installation INSTALLATION Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 8378 1. Install the TRS (2) to the manual shaft. Make sure TRS locating pin rests in manual valve bore slot. 2. Install the TRS/manual shaft retaining screw (1) and torque to 5 Nm (45 in. lbs.) torque. 3. Install the manual shaft seal (1). 4. Install valve body to the transmission. See: Automatic Transmission/Transaxle/Valve Body/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/42RLE Automatic Transmission/Installation Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 8379 Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Service and Repair 48RE Automatic Transmission Removal REMOVAL 1. Raise vehicle and position drain pan under the transmission range sensor (TRS). 2. Move the transmission manual lever to the manual LOW position. The manual LOW position is with the manual lever in the forward-most detent. 3. Disengage the wiring connector from the TRS. 4. Remove the two screws holding the TRS to the TRS mounting bracket. 5. Remove the TRS (3) from the TRS mounting bracket by pulling it straight out of the bracket. 6. If necessary, loosen the TRS mounting bracket (2) in the transmission case using Adapter 8581 (3). 7. If necessary, remove the TRS mounting bracket (2) from the transmission case. Installation INSTALLATION Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 8380 1. Move the transmission manual shaft lever to the manual LOW position. 2. If necessary, install the TRS mounting bracket (2) into the transmission case. Using Adapter 8581 (3), tighten the mounting bracket to 34 Nm (300 in.lbs.). 3. Install the TRS (3) into the mounting bracket (2) with the wiring connector facing the front of the transmission. 4. Install the two screws to hold the TRS to the mounting bracket. Tighten the screws to 5 Nm (45 in.lbs.). 5. Verify proper sensor operation (1-4). 6. Move the transmission manual shaft lever to the PARK position. 7. Connect TRS wiring connector to the TRS and lower vehicle. 8. Refill the transmission fluid to the correct level. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 8381 Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Service and Repair AS68RC Automatic Transmission Removal REMOVAL NOTE: Be certain the transmission is in the park lock position. TRANSMISSION RANGE SENSOR 1. Remove the shift cable from the manual shift lever (2). 2. Disconnect the wire harness from the transmission range sensor. 3. Remove the two nuts (3) from the control shaft. TRS REMOVAL/INSTALLATION Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 8382 4. Pry open the tabs on the stake washer (5), remove the nut (3) and the stake washer (5). 5. Remove the bolts (2). 6. Remove the transmission range sensor (1) from the transmission control shaft (4). Installation INSTALLATION 1. Install the transmission range sensor (3) onto the control shaft (5). 2. Install the stake washer and the nut (4) and hand tighten. 3. With the transmission in neutral install the alignment tool 9983 (6) onto the control shaft (5) and into the alignment hole (1). 4. Install the bolts (2). 5. After aligning the transmission range sensor, tighten the bolts (2) 12.5 Nm (9 ft.lbs.) 6. Remove the alignment tool 9983 (6) 7. Tighten the control shaft nut to 7 Nm (62 in.lbs.) 8. Bend the tabs on the stake washer and nut (4) in at least two places to lock in position. TRANSMISSION RANGE SENSOR Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 8383 9. Install the manual shift lever (2) onto the control shaft. 10. Install the inner nut (3) onto the control shaft. Tighten the inner nut to 12.5 Nm (9 ft.lbs). 11. Install the outer nut (3) onto the control shaft. While holding the inner nut, tighten the outer not to 12.5 Nm (9 ft.lbs) Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Input Speed Transmission Speed Sensor: Locations Sensor-Input Speed Component ID 399 Component ID: 399 Component : SENSOR-INPUT SPEED Connector: Name : SENSOR-INPUT SPEED Color : # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (RC) Pin Circuit Description 1 T52 20DG/OR INPUT SPEED SIGNAL 2 T72 20YL/DB 8 VOLT SUPPLY Component Location - 21 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 8388 Component Location - 19 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 8389 Component Location - 26 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 8390 Connector: Name : SENSOR-INPUT SPEED Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (RFE/RLE) Pin Circuit Description 1 T52 20DG/OR INPUT SPEED SIGNAL 2 T13 20DG/VT SPEED SENSOR GROUND Component Location - 21 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 8391 Component Location - 19 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 8392 Component Location - 26 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 8393 Component ID 420 Component ID: 420 Component : SENSOR-INPUT SPEED Connector: Name : SENSOR-INPUT SPEED Color : # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (RC) Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 8394 Pin Circuit Description 1 T52 20DG/OR INPUT SPEED SIGNAL 2 T72 20YL/DB 8 VOLT SUPPLY Component Location - 21 Component Location - 19 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 8395 Component Location - 26 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 8396 Connector: Name : SENSOR-INPUT SPEED Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (RFE/RLE) Pin Circuit Description 1 T52 20DG/OR INPUT SPEED SIGNAL 2 T13 20DG/VT SPEED SENSOR GROUND Component Location - 21 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 8397 Component Location - 19 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 8398 Component Location - 26 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 8399 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 8400 Transmission Speed Sensor: Locations Sensor-Output Speed Component ID 400 Component ID: 400 Component : SENSOR-OUTPUT SPEED Connector: Name : SENSOR-OUTPUT SPEED Color : # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (RC) Pin Circuit Description 1 T14 20DG/BR OUTPUT SPEED SIGNAL 2 T72 20YL/DB 8 VOLT SUPPLY Component Location - 20 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 8401 Component Location - 21 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 8402 Component Location - 19 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 8403 Component Location - 26 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 8404 Connector: Name : SENSOR-OUTPUT SPEED Color : # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (RE) Pin Circuit Description 1 T14 18DG/BR OUTPUT SPEED SIGNAL 2 T13 18DG/VT SPEED SENSOR GROUND Component Location - 20 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 8405 Component Location - 21 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 8406 Component Location - 19 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 8407 Component Location - 26 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 8408 Connector: Name : SENSOR-OUTPUT SPEED Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (RFE/RLE) Pin Circuit Description 1 T14 20DG/BR OUTPUT SPEED SIGNAL Pin Circuit Description 1 T13 20DG/VT SPEED SENSOR GROUND Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 8409 2 T13 20DG/VT SPEED SENSOR GROUND 2 T14 20DG/BR OUTPUT SPEED SIGNAL Component Location - 20 Component Location - 21 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 8410 Component Location - 19 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 8411 Component Location - 26 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 8412 Component ID 430 Component ID: 430 Component : SENSOR-OUTPUT SPEED Connector: Name : SENSOR-OUTPUT SPEED Color : # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (RC) Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 8413 Pin Circuit Description 1 T14 20DG/BR OUTPUT SPEED SIGNAL 2 T72 20YL/DB 8 VOLT SUPPLY Component Location - 20 Component Location - 21 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 8414 Component Location - 19 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 8415 Component Location - 26 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 8416 Connector: Name : SENSOR-OUTPUT SPEED Color : # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (RE) Pin Circuit Description 1 T14 18DG/BR OUTPUT SPEED SIGNAL 2 T13 18DG/VT SPEED SENSOR GROUND Component Location - 20 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 8417 Component Location - 21 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 8418 Component Location - 19 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 8419 Component Location - 26 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 8420 Connector: Name : SENSOR-OUTPUT SPEED Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (RFE/RLE) Pin Circuit Description 1 T14 20DG/BR OUTPUT SPEED SIGNAL Pin Circuit Description 1 T13 20DG/VT SPEED SENSOR GROUND Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 8421 2 T13 20DG/VT SPEED SENSOR GROUND 2 T14 20DG/BR OUTPUT SPEED SIGNAL Component Location - 20 Component Location - 21 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 8422 Component Location - 19 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 8423 Component Location - 26 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 8424 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Input Speed Transmission Speed Sensor: Diagrams Sensor-Input Speed Component ID 399 Component ID: 399 Component : SENSOR-INPUT SPEED Connector: Name : SENSOR-INPUT SPEED Color : # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (RC) Pin Circuit Description 1 T52 20DG/OR INPUT SPEED SIGNAL 2 T72 20YL/DB 8 VOLT SUPPLY Component Location - 21 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 8427 Component Location - 19 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 8428 Component Location - 26 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 8429 Connector: Name : SENSOR-INPUT SPEED Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (RFE/RLE) Pin Circuit Description 1 T52 20DG/OR INPUT SPEED SIGNAL 2 T13 20DG/VT SPEED SENSOR GROUND Component Location - 21 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 8430 Component Location - 19 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 8431 Component Location - 26 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 8432 Component ID 420 Component ID: 420 Component : SENSOR-INPUT SPEED Connector: Name : SENSOR-INPUT SPEED Color : # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (RC) Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 8433 Pin Circuit Description 1 T52 20DG/OR INPUT SPEED SIGNAL 2 T72 20YL/DB 8 VOLT SUPPLY Component Location - 21 Component Location - 19 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 8434 Component Location - 26 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 8435 Connector: Name : SENSOR-INPUT SPEED Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (RFE/RLE) Pin Circuit Description 1 T52 20DG/OR INPUT SPEED SIGNAL 2 T13 20DG/VT SPEED SENSOR GROUND Component Location - 21 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 8436 Component Location - 19 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 8437 Component Location - 26 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 8438 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 8439 Transmission Speed Sensor: Diagrams Sensor-Output Speed Component ID 400 Component ID: 400 Component : SENSOR-OUTPUT SPEED Connector: Name : SENSOR-OUTPUT SPEED Color : # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (RC) Pin Circuit Description 1 T14 20DG/BR OUTPUT SPEED SIGNAL 2 T72 20YL/DB 8 VOLT SUPPLY Component Location - 20 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 8440 Component Location - 21 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 8441 Component Location - 19 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 8442 Component Location - 26 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 8443 Connector: Name : SENSOR-OUTPUT SPEED Color : # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (RE) Pin Circuit Description 1 T14 18DG/BR OUTPUT SPEED SIGNAL 2 T13 18DG/VT SPEED SENSOR GROUND Component Location - 20 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 8444 Component Location - 21 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 8445 Component Location - 19 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 8446 Component Location - 26 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 8447 Connector: Name : SENSOR-OUTPUT SPEED Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (RFE/RLE) Pin Circuit Description 1 T14 20DG/BR OUTPUT SPEED SIGNAL Pin Circuit Description 1 T13 20DG/VT SPEED SENSOR GROUND Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 8448 2 T13 20DG/VT SPEED SENSOR GROUND 2 T14 20DG/BR OUTPUT SPEED SIGNAL Component Location - 20 Component Location - 21 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 8449 Component Location - 19 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 8450 Component Location - 26 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 8451 Component ID 430 Component ID: 430 Component : SENSOR-OUTPUT SPEED Connector: Name : SENSOR-OUTPUT SPEED Color : # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (RC) Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 8452 Pin Circuit Description 1 T14 20DG/BR OUTPUT SPEED SIGNAL 2 T72 20YL/DB 8 VOLT SUPPLY Component Location - 20 Component Location - 21 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 8453 Component Location - 19 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 8454 Component Location - 26 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 8455 Connector: Name : SENSOR-OUTPUT SPEED Color : # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (RE) Pin Circuit Description 1 T14 18DG/BR OUTPUT SPEED SIGNAL 2 T13 18DG/VT SPEED SENSOR GROUND Component Location - 20 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 8456 Component Location - 21 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 8457 Component Location - 19 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 8458 Component Location - 26 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 8459 Connector: Name : SENSOR-OUTPUT SPEED Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (RFE/RLE) Pin Circuit Description 1 T14 20DG/BR OUTPUT SPEED SIGNAL Pin Circuit Description 1 T13 20DG/VT SPEED SENSOR GROUND Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 8460 2 T13 20DG/VT SPEED SENSOR GROUND 2 T14 20DG/BR OUTPUT SPEED SIGNAL Component Location - 20 Component Location - 21 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 8461 Component Location - 19 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 8462 Component Location - 26 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 8463 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > 42RLE Automatic Transmission Transmission Speed Sensor: Description and Operation 42RLE Automatic Transmission Description DESCRIPTION The Input (1) and Output (2) Speed Sensors are two-wire magnetic pickup devices that generate AC signals as rotation occurs. They are mounted in the left side of the transmission case and are considered primary inputs to the Transmission Control Module (TCM). Operation OPERATION The Input Speed Sensor provides information on how fast the input shaft is rotating. As the teeth of the input clutch hub pass by the sensor coil, an AC voltage is generated and sent to the TCM. The TCM interprets this information as input shaft rpm. The Output Speed Sensor generates an AC signal in a similar fashion, though its coil is excited by rotation of the rear planetary carrier lugs. The TCM interprets this information as output shaft rpm. The TCM compares the input and output speed signals to determine the following: - Transmission gear ratio - Speed ratio error detection - CVI calculation The TCM also compares the input speed signal and the engine speed signal to determine the following: - Torque converter clutch slippage - Torque converter element speed ratio Description DESCRIPTION Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 8466 The Input (1) and Output (2) Speed Sensors are two-wire magnetic pickup devices that generate AC signals as rotation occurs. They are mounted in the left side of the transmission case and are considered primary inputs to the Transmission Control Module (TCM). Operation OPERATION The Input Speed Sensor provides information on how fast the input shaft is rotating. As the teeth of the input clutch hub pass by the sensor coil, an AC voltage is generated and sent to the TCM. The TCM interprets this information as input shaft rpm. The Output Speed Sensor generates an AC signal in a similar fashion, though its coil is excited by rotation of the rear planetary carrier lugs. The TCM interprets this information as output shaft rpm. The TCM compares the input and output speed signals to determine the following: - Transmission gear ratio - Speed ratio error detection - CVI calculation The TCM also compares the input speed signal and the engine speed signal to determine the following: - Torque converter clutch slippage - Torque converter element speed ratio Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 8467 Transmission Speed Sensor: Description and Operation 545RFE Automatic Transmission Description DESCRIPTION The Input and Output Speed Sensors are two-wire magnetic pickup devices that generate AC signals as rotation occurs. They are mounted in the left side of the transmission case and are considered primary inputs to the Transmission Control Module (TCM). Operation OPERATION The Input Speed Sensor provides information on how fast the input shaft is rotating. As the teeth of the input clutch hub pass by the sensor coil, an AC voltage is generated and sent to the TCM. The TCM interprets this information as input shaft rpm. The Output Speed Sensor generates an AC signal in a similar fashion, though its coil is excited by rotation of the park gear teeth. The TCM interprets this information as output shaft rpm. The TCM compares the input and output speed signals to determine the following: - Transmission gear ratio - Speed ratio error detection - CVI calculation The TCM also compares the input speed signal and the engine speed signal to determine the following: - Torque converter clutch slippage - Torque converter element speed ratio Description DESCRIPTION The Input and Output Speed Sensors are two-wire magnetic pickup devices that generate AC signals as rotation occurs. They are mounted in the left side of the transmission case and are considered primary inputs to the Transmission Control Module (TCM). Operation OPERATION The Input Speed Sensor provides information on how fast the input shaft is rotating. As the teeth of the input clutch hub pass by the sensor coil, an AC voltage is generated and sent to the TCM. The TCM interprets this information as input shaft rpm. The Output Speed Sensor generates an AC signal in a similar fashion, though its coil is excited by rotation of the park gear teeth. The TCM interprets this information as output shaft rpm. The TCM compares the input and output speed signals to determine the following: - Transmission gear ratio - Speed ratio error detection - CVI calculation The TCM also compares the input speed signal and the engine speed signal to determine the following: - Torque converter clutch slippage - Torque converter element speed ratio Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 8468 Transmission Speed Sensor: Description and Operation 68RFE Automatic Transmission Description DESCRIPTION The Input and Output Speed Sensors are two-wire magnetic pickup devices that generate AC signals as rotation occurs. They are mounted in the left side of the transmission case and are considered primary inputs to the Transmission Control Module (TCM). Operation OPERATION The Input Speed Sensor provides information on how fast the input shaft is rotating. As the teeth of the input clutch hub pass by the sensor coil, an AC voltage is generated and sent to the TCM. The TCM interprets this information as input shaft rpm. The Output Speed Sensor generates an AC signal in a similar fashion, though its coil is excited by rotation of the park gear teeth. The TCM interprets this information as output shaft rpm. The TCM compares the input and output speed signals to determine the following: - Transmission gear ratio - Speed ratio error detection - CVI calculation The TCM also compares the input speed signal and the engine speed signal to determine the following: - Torque converter clutch slippage - Torque converter element speed ratio Description DESCRIPTION The Input and Output Speed Sensors are two-wire magnetic pickup devices that generate AC signals as rotation occurs. They are mounted in the left side of the transmission case and are considered primary inputs to the Transmission Control Module (TCM). Operation OPERATION The Input Speed Sensor provides information on how fast the input shaft is rotating. As the teeth of the input clutch hub pass by the sensor coil, an AC voltage is generated and sent to the TCM. The TCM interprets this information as input shaft rpm. The Output Speed Sensor generates an AC signal in a similar fashion, though its coil is excited by rotation of the park gear teeth. The TCM interprets this information as output shaft rpm. The TCM compares the input and output speed signals to determine the following: - Transmission gear ratio - Speed ratio error detection - CVI calculation The TCM also compares the input speed signal and the engine speed signal to determine the following: - Torque converter clutch slippage - Torque converter element speed ratio Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 8469 Transmission Speed Sensor: Description and Operation 48RE Automatic Transmission Description DESCRIPTION The speed sensor (1) is located in the overdrive gear case. The sensor is positioned over the park gear and monitors transmission output shaft rotating speed. Operation OPERATION Speed sensor signals are triggered by the park gear lugs as they rotate past the sensor pickup face. Input signals from the sensor are sent to the transmission control module for processing. Signals from this sensor are shared with the powertrain control module. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 8470 Transmission Speed Sensor: Description and Operation AS68RC Automatic Transmission Description DESCRIPTION INPUT AND OUTPUT SPEED SENSORS The Input and Output Speed Sensors are two-wire magnetic pickup devices that generate DC square wave signals as rotation occurs. They are mounted in the left side of the transmission case and are considered primary inputs to the Transmission Control Module (TCM). Operation OPERATION The Input Speed Sensor provides information on how fast the input shaft is rotating. As the "teeth" of the gear pass by the sensor coil, an DC square wave is generated and sent to the TCM. The TCM interprets this information as input shaft rpm. The Output Speed Sensor generates an DC signal in a similar fashion, though its coil is excited by rotation of the rear planetary carrier lugs. The TCM interprets this information as output shaft rpm. The TCM compares the input and output speed signals to determine the following: - Transmission gear ratio - Speed ratio error detection - CVI calculation The TCM also compares the input speed signal and the engine speed signal to determine the following: - Torque converter clutch slippage - Torque converter element speed ratio Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 42RLE Automatic Transmission Transmission Speed Sensor: Service and Repair 42RLE Automatic Transmission Removal REMOVAL 1. Raise vehicle. 2. Place a suitable fluid catch pan under the transmission. 3. Remove the wiring connector from the input speed sensor. NOTE: The speed sensor bolt has a sealing patch applied from the factory. Be sure to reuse the same bolt. 4. Remove the bolt holding the input speed sensor to the transmission case. 5. Remove the input speed sensor from the transmission case. Installation INSTALLATION 1. Install the input speed sensor (1) into the transmission case. NOTE: Before installing the speed sensor bolt, it will be necessary to replenish the sealing patch on the bolt using MOPAR(R) Lock & Seal Adhesive. 2. Install the bolt to hold the input speed sensor into the transmission case. Tighten the bolt to 9 Nm (80 in.lbs.). 3. Install the wiring connector onto the input speed sensor 4. Verify the transmission fluid level. Add fluid as necessary. 5. Lower vehicle. Removal REMOVAL Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 8473 1. Raise vehicle. 2. Place a suitable fluid catch pan under the transmission. 3. Remove the wiring connector from the output speed sensor (2). NOTE: The speed sensor bolt has a sealing patch applied from the factory. Be sure to reuse the same bolt. 4. Remove the bolt holding the output speed sensor to the transmission case. 5. Remove the output speed sensor (2) from the transmission case. Installation INSTALLATION 1. Install the output speed sensor (2) into the transmission case. NOTE: Before installing the speed sensor bolt, it will be necessary to replenish the sealing patch on the bolt using MOPAR(R) Lock & Seal Adhesive. 2. Install the bolt to hold the output speed sensor into the transmission case. Tighten the bolt to 9 Nm (80 in.lbs.). 3. Install the wiring connector onto the output speed sensor 4. Verify the transmission fluid level. Add fluid as necessary. 5. Lower vehicle. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 8474 Transmission Speed Sensor: Service and Repair 545RFE Automatic Transmission Removal REMOVAL 1. Raise vehicle. 2. Place a suitable fluid catch pan under the transmission. 3. Remove the wiring connector from the input speed sensor (3). 4. Remove the bolt holding the input speed sensor to the transmission case. 5. Remove the input speed sensor (3) from the transmission case. Installation INSTALLATION 1. Install the input speed sensor (3) into the transmission case. 2. Install the bolt to hold the input speed sensor (3) into the transmission case. Tighten the bolt to 12 Nm (105 in.lbs.). 3. Install the wiring connector onto the input speed sensor. 4. Verify the transmission fluid level. Add fluid as necessary. 5. Lower vehicle. Removal REMOVAL Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 8475 1. Raise vehicle. 2. Place a suitable fluid catch pan under the transmission. 3. Remove the wiring connector from the output speed sensor (1). 4. Remove the bolt holding the output speed sensor (1) to the transmission case. 5. Remove the output speed sensor (1) from the transmission case. Installation INSTALLATION 1. Install the output speed sensor (1) into the transmission case. 2. Install the bolt to hold the output speed sensor (1) into the transmission case. Tighten the bolt to 12 Nm (105 in.lbs.). 3. Install the wiring connector onto the output speed sensor (1). 4. Verify the transmission fluid level. Add fluid as necessary. 5. Lower vehicle. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 8476 Transmission Speed Sensor: Service and Repair 68RFE Automatic Transmission Removal REMOVAL 1. Raise vehicle. 2. Place a suitable fluid catch pan under the transmission. 3. Remove the wiring connector from the input speed sensor (3). 4. Remove the bolt holding the input speed sensor to the transmission case. 5. Remove the input speed sensor (3) from the transmission case. Installation INSTALLATION 1. Install the input speed sensor (3) into the transmission case. 2. Install the bolt to hold the input speed sensor (3) into the transmission case. Tighten the bolt to 12 Nm (105 in.lbs.). 3. Install the wiring connector onto the input speed sensor. 4. Verify the transmission fluid level. Add fluid as necessary. 5. Lower vehicle. Removal REMOVAL Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 8477 1. Raise vehicle. 2. Place a suitable fluid catch pan under the transmission. 3. Remove the wiring connector from the output speed sensor (1). 4. Remove the bolt holding the output speed sensor (1) to the transmission case. 5. Remove the output speed sensor (1) from the transmission case. Installation INSTALLATION 1. Install the output speed sensor (1) into the transmission case. 2. Install the bolt to hold the output speed sensor (1) into the transmission case. Tighten the bolt to 12 Nm (105 in.lbs.). 3. Install the wiring connector onto the output speed sensor (1). 4. Verify the transmission fluid level. Add fluid as necessary. 5. Lower vehicle. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 8478 Transmission Speed Sensor: Service and Repair AS68RC Automatic Transmission Output Speed Sensor OUTPUT SPEED SENSOR OUTPUT SPEED SENSOR 1. Raise and support the vehicle. 2. Place a suitable fluid catch pan under the transmission. 3. Remove the wiring connector from the output speed sensor. 4. Remove the bolt holding the output speed sensor to the transmission case. 5. Remove the output speed sensor from the transmission case. Input Speed Sensor INPUT SPEED SENSOR INPUT SPEED SENSOR 1. Raise and support the vehicle. 2. Place a suitable fluid catch pan under the transmission. 3. Remove the wiring connector from the input speed sensor. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 8479 4. Remove the bolt holding the input speed sensor to the transmission case. 5. Remove the input speed sensor from the transmission case. Output Speed Sensor OUTPUT SPEED SENSOR NOTE: Apply trans jell to all slide portions, rolling contacts surfaces, thrust surfaces etc. to prevent burnout during initial operation. Lubricate O-rings and O-ring seals with MOPAR(R) AS68RC ATF. Soak all friction disks in MOPAR(R) AS68RC ATF for at least two hours before assembly of clutch packs. OUTPUT SPEED SENSOR 1. Lubricate the output speed sensor o-ring with MOPAR(R) AS68RC ATF. 2. Install the output speed sensor into the transmission case. 3. Tighten the bolt to 8 Nm (70 in.lbs.). 4. Install the wiring connector onto the output speed sensor. 5. Lower vehicle. 6. Verify the transmission fluid level. Add MOPAR(R) AS68RC ATF as necessary. Input Speed Sensor INPUT SPEED SENSOR NOTE: Apply trans jell to all slide portions, rolling contacts surfaces, thrust surfaces etc. to prevent burnout during initial operation. Lubricate O-rings and O-ring seals with MOPAR(R) AS68RC ATF. Soak all friction disks in MOPAR(R) AS68RC ATF for at least two hours before assembly of clutch packs. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 8480 INPUT SPEED SENSOR 1. Lubricate the output speed sensor o-ring with MOPAR(R) AS68RC ATF. 2. Install the input speed sensor into the transmission case. 3. Tighten the bolt to 8 Nm (70 in.lbs.). 4. Install the electrical wiring connector onto the input speed sensor. 5. Lower vehicle. 6. Verify the transmission fluid level. Add MOPAR(R) AS68RC as necessary. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Locations Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch: Locations Component ID: 445 Component : SENSOR-TRANSMISSION TEMPERATURE Connector: Name : SENSOR-TRANSMISSION TEMPERATURE Color : # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (RC) Pin Circuit Description 1 T819 20YL/VT TCC TEMPERATURE SIGNAL 2 T820 20YL/WT TEMPERATURE SENSOR GROUND Component Location - 26 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 8484 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 8485 Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch: Diagrams Component ID: 445 Component : SENSOR-TRANSMISSION TEMPERATURE Connector: Name : SENSOR-TRANSMISSION TEMPERATURE Color : # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (RC) Pin Circuit Description 1 T819 20YL/VT TCC TEMPERATURE SIGNAL 2 T820 20YL/WT TEMPERATURE SENSOR GROUND Component Location - 26 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 8486 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > 545RFE Automatic Transmission Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch: Description and Operation 545RFE Automatic Transmission Description DESCRIPTION The Transmission Range Sensor (TRS) is part of the solenoid module, which is mounted to the top of the valve body inside the transmission. The Transmission Range Sensor (TRS) has five switch contact pins that: - Determine shift lever position - Supply ground to the Starter Relay in Park and Neutral only. - Supply +12 V to the backup lamps in Reverse only. The TRS also has an integrated temperature sensor (thermistor) that communicates transmission temperature to the TCM and PCM. Operation OPERATION The Transmission Range Sensor (TRS) communicates shift lever position to the TCM as a combination of open and closed switches. Each shift lever position has an assigned combination of switch states (open/closed) that the TCM receives from four sense circuits. The TCM interprets this information and determines the appropriate transmission gear position and shift schedule. There are many possible combinations of open and closed switches (codes). Seven of these possible codes are related to gear position and five are recognized as "between gear" codes. This results in many codes which should never occur. These are called "invalid" codes. An invalid code will result in a DTC, and the TCM will then determine the shift lever position based on pressure switch data. This allows reasonably normal transmission operation with a TRS failure. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > 545RFE Automatic Transmission > Page 8489 Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch: Description and Operation 68RFE Automatic Transmission Description DESCRIPTION The Transmission Range Sensor (TRS) is part of the solenoid module, which is mounted to the top of the valve body inside the transmission. The Transmission Range Sensor (TRS) has five switch contact pins that: - Determine shift lever position - Supply ground to the Starter Relay in Park and Neutral only. The TRS also has an integrated temperature sensor (thermistor) that communicates transmission temperature to the TCM and PCM. Operation OPERATION The Transmission Range Sensor (TRS) communicates shift lever position to the TCM as a combination of open and closed switches. Each shift lever position has an assigned combination of switch states (open/closed) that the TCM receives from four sense circuits. The TCM interprets this information and determines the appropriate transmission gear position and shift schedule. There are many possible combinations of open and closed switches (codes). Five of these possible codes correspond to valid gear position, there are two codes for the neutral position and three are recognized as "between gear" codes. This results in many codes which should never occur. These are called "invalid" codes. An invalid code will result in a DTC, and the TCM will then determine the shift lever position based on pressure switch data. This allows reasonably normal transmission operation with a TRS failure. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 42RLE Automatic Transmission Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch: Service and Repair 42RLE Automatic Transmission Removal REMOVAL 1. Remove valve body assembly from vehicle. See: Automatic Transmission/Transaxle/Valve Body/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/42RLE Automatic Transmission/Removal 2. Remove the manual shaft seal (1). 3. Remove manual shaft/TRS retaining screw (1). 4. Slide TRS off of manual valve shaft. Installation INSTALLATION Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 8492 1. Install the TRS (2) to the manual shaft. Make sure TRS locating pin rests in manual valve bore slot. 2. Install the TRS/manual shaft retaining screw (1) and torque to 5 Nm (45 in. lbs.) torque. 3. Install the manual shaft seal (1). 4. Install valve body to the transmission. See: Automatic Transmission/Transaxle/Valve Body/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/42RLE Automatic Transmission/Installation Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 8493 Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch: Service and Repair 48RE Automatic Transmission Removal REMOVAL 1. Raise vehicle and position drain pan under the transmission range sensor (TRS). 2. Move the transmission manual lever to the manual LOW position. The manual LOW position is with the manual lever in the forward-most detent. 3. Disengage the wiring connector from the TRS. 4. Remove the two screws holding the TRS to the TRS mounting bracket. 5. Remove the TRS (3) from the TRS mounting bracket by pulling it straight out of the bracket. 6. If necessary, loosen the TRS mounting bracket (2) in the transmission case using Adapter 8581 (3). 7. If necessary, remove the TRS mounting bracket (2) from the transmission case. Installation INSTALLATION Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 8494 1. Move the transmission manual shaft lever to the manual LOW position. 2. If necessary, install the TRS mounting bracket (2) into the transmission case. Using Adapter 8581 (3), tighten the mounting bracket to 34 Nm (300 in.lbs.). 3. Install the TRS (3) into the mounting bracket (2) with the wiring connector facing the front of the transmission. 4. Install the two screws to hold the TRS to the mounting bracket. Tighten the screws to 5 Nm (45 in.lbs.). 5. Verify proper sensor operation (1-4). 6. Move the transmission manual shaft lever to the PARK position. 7. Connect TRS wiring connector to the TRS and lower vehicle. 8. Refill the transmission fluid to the correct level. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 8495 Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch: Service and Repair AS68RC Automatic Transmission Removal REMOVAL NOTE: Be certain the transmission is in the park lock position. TRANSMISSION RANGE SENSOR 1. Remove the shift cable from the manual shift lever (2). 2. Disconnect the wire harness from the transmission range sensor. 3. Remove the two nuts (3) from the control shaft. TRS REMOVAL/INSTALLATION Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 8496 4. Pry open the tabs on the stake washer (5), remove the nut (3) and the stake washer (5). 5. Remove the bolts (2). 6. Remove the transmission range sensor (1) from the transmission control shaft (4). Installation INSTALLATION 1. Install the transmission range sensor (3) onto the control shaft (5). 2. Install the stake washer and the nut (4) and hand tighten. 3. With the transmission in neutral install the alignment tool 9983 (6) onto the control shaft (5) and into the alignment hole (1). 4. Install the bolts (2). 5. After aligning the transmission range sensor, tighten the bolts (2) 12.5 Nm (9 ft.lbs.) 6. Remove the alignment tool 9983 (6) 7. Tighten the control shaft nut to 7 Nm (62 in.lbs.) 8. Bend the tabs on the stake washer and nut (4) in at least two places to lock in position. TRANSMISSION RANGE SENSOR Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 8497 9. Install the manual shift lever (2) onto the control shaft. 10. Install the inner nut (3) onto the control shaft. Tighten the inner nut to 12.5 Nm (9 ft.lbs). 11. Install the outer nut (3) onto the control shaft. While holding the inner nut, tighten the outer not to 12.5 Nm (9 ft.lbs) Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - M/T > Clutch Pedal Position Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection Clutch Pedal Position Sensor / Switch: Testing and Inspection SWITCH-CLUTCH PEDAL POSITION 1. Disconnect switch 2-wire connector (2) attached to pedal support bracket (1), under instrument panel to left of clutch pedal. 2. Check switch continuity with an ohmmeter while operating clutch pedal. - Pedal Depressed - Continuity - Pedal Released - No Continuity 3. If continuity is not present or always present, replace clutch master cylinder. Switch is not serviced separately. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Four Wheel Drive Selector Switch > Component Information > Locations Four Wheel Drive Selector Switch: Locations Component ID: 515 Component : SWITCH-TRANSFER CASE SELECTOR Connector: Name : SWITCH-TRANSFER CASE SELECTOR Color : BLACK # of pins : 10 Qualifier : (ETC) Pin Circuit Description 1 K77 20BR/WT TRANSFER CASE POSITION SENSOR INPUT 2-3 K977 20BR/WT MODE SELECT 4 E11 20OR/DB PANEL LAMPS CONTROL 5 Z905 20BK GROUND 6 G95 20VT/BR NEUTRAL INDICATOR 7 F21 20PK/DG FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) 8-9-10 - Component Location - 47 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Four Wheel Drive Selector Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 8506 Component Location - 45 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Four Wheel Drive Selector Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 8507 Component Location - 20 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Four Wheel Drive Selector Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 8508 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Four Wheel Drive Selector Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 8509 Four Wheel Drive Selector Switch: Diagrams Component ID: 515 Component : SWITCH-TRANSFER CASE SELECTOR Connector: Name : SWITCH-TRANSFER CASE SELECTOR Color : BLACK # of pins : 10 Qualifier : (ETC) Pin Circuit Description 1 K77 20BR/WT TRANSFER CASE POSITION SENSOR INPUT 2-3 K977 20BR/WT MODE SELECT 4 E11 20OR/DB PANEL LAMPS CONTROL 5 Z905 20BK GROUND 6 G95 20VT/BR NEUTRAL INDICATOR 7 F21 20PK/DG FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) 8-9-10 - Component Location - 47 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Four Wheel Drive Selector Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 8510 Component Location - 45 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Four Wheel Drive Selector Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 8511 Component Location - 20 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Four Wheel Drive Selector Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 8512 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Four Wheel Drive Selector Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > NV243 Transfer Case Four Wheel Drive Selector Switch: Description and Operation NV243 Transfer Case Description DESCRIPTION The selector switch assembly is mounted in the left side of the vehicle's Instrument Panel (IP) and consists of a rotary knob connected to a resistive network for the mode and range shift selections. Also located in this assembly is a recessed, normally open momentary switch for making shifts into and out of transfer case NEUTRAL. A pen, or similar instrument, is used to make a NEUTRAL shift selection, thus reducing the likelihood of an inadvertent shift request. The selector switch also contains four light emitting diode's (LED's) to indicate the transfer case position and whether a shift is in progress. Operation OPERATION As the position of the selector switch varies, the resistance between the Mode Sensor supply voltage pin and the Mode Sensor output will vary. Hardware, software, and calibrations within the Transfer Case Control Module (TCCM) are provided that interpret the selector switch resistance as given in the table below: For resistances between the ranges B-E shown for each valid position (T-Case NEUTRAL, 4LO, 4HI, 2WD), the TCCM may interpret the resistance as: - either of the neighboring valid positions. - as an invalid fault position. For resistances between the ranges E and F shown for 2WD and in-between positions, the TCCM may interpret the resistance as: - the 2WD position. - an invalid fault position. - a valid in-between position. For resistances between the ranges F and G shown for in-between positions and fault condition (open), the TCCM may interpret the resistance as: Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Four Wheel Drive Selector Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > NV243 Transfer Case > Page 8515 - a valid in-between position. - an invalid fault position. For resistances between the ranges A and B shown for the fault condition (short) and T-Case NEUTRAL, the TCCM may interpret the resistance as: - the T-Case NEUTRAL position. - an invalid fault position. The LED's in the selector assembly are illuminated/flashed in the following manner to indicate a particular condition or state. - A solidly illuminated LED indicates a successfully completed shift and the current operating mode of the transfer case. While a shift has been requested but not yet completed, the LED for the desired transfer case position is flashed. - A flashing operating mode LED for the desired gear indicates that a shift to that position has been requested, but all of the driver controllable conditions have not been met. This is in an attempt to notify the driver that the transmission needs to be put into NEUTRAL, the vehicle speed is too great, or some other condition outlined (other than a diagnostic failure that would prevent this shift) elsewhere See: Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain/Relays and Modules - Transfer Case/Control Module/Description and Operation/Operation is not met. Note that this flashing will continue indefinitely until the conditions are eventually met, or the selector switch position is changed, or if diagnostic routines no longer allow the requested shift. - If the driver attempts to make a shift into transfer case NEUTRAL, and any of the driver controllable conditions are not met, the request will be ignored until all of the conditions are met or until the NEUTRAL select button is released. Additionally the neutral lamp will flash, or begin to flash while the button is depressed and operator controllable conditions are not being met. All of the LED's except the Neutral will flash if any of the operator controllable conditions for shifting are not met while the Neutral button is depressed. This "toggle" type of feature is necessary because the TCCM would interpret another request immediately after the shift into transfer case NEUTRAL has completed. - No LED's illuminated indicate a fault in the transfer case control system. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Four Wheel Drive Selector Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > NV243 Transfer Case > Page 8516 Four Wheel Drive Selector Switch: Description and Operation NV244 GENII Transfer Case Description DESCRIPTION The selector switch assembly is mounted in the left side of the vehicle's Instrument Panel (IP) and consists of a rotary knob connected to a resistive network for the mode and range shift selections. Also located in this assembly is a recessed, normally open momentary switch for making shifts into and out of transfer case NEUTRAL. A pen, or similar instrument, is used to make a NEUTRAL shift selection, thus reducing the likelihood of an inadvertent shift request. The selector switch also contains light emitting diode's (LED's) to indicate the transfer case position and whether a shift is in progress. Operation OPERATION As the position of the selector switch varies, the resistance between the Mode Sensor supply voltage pin and the Mode Sensor output will vary. Hardware, software, and calibrations within the Transfer Case Control Module (TCCM) are provided that interpret the selector switch resistance as given in the table below: For resistances between the ranges B-E shown for each valid position (T-Case NEUTRAL, 4LO, 4HI, AWD), the TCCM may interpret the resistance as: - either of the neighboring valid positions. - as an invalid fault position. For resistances between the ranges E and F shown for AWD and in-between positions, the TCCM may interpret the resistance as: - the AWD position. - an invalid fault position. - a valid in-between position. For resistances between the ranges F and G shown for in-between positions and fault condition (open), the TCCM may interpret the resistance as: - a valid in-between position. - an invalid fault position. For resistances between the ranges A and B shown for the fault condition (short) and , T-Case NEUTRAL, the TCCM may interpret the resistance as: - the T-Case NEUTRAL position. - an invalid fault position. The LED's in the selector assembly are illuminated/flashed in the following manner to indicate a particular condition or state. - A solidly illuminated LED indicates a successfully completed shift and the current operating mode of the transfer case. While a shift has been requested but not yet completed, the LED for the desired transfer case position is flashed. - A flashing operating mode LED for the desired gear indicates that a shift to that position has been requested, but all of the driver controllable conditions have not been met. This is in an attempt to notify the driver that the transmission needs to be put into NEUTRAL, the vehicle speed is too great, or some other condition outlined (other than a diagnostic failure that would prevent this shift) elsewhere See: Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain/Relays and Modules - Transfer Case/Control Module/Description and Operation/Operation is not met. Note that this Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Four Wheel Drive Selector Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > NV243 Transfer Case > Page 8517 flashing will continue indefinitely until the conditions are eventually met, or the selector switch position is changed, or if diagnostic routines no longer allow the requested shift. - If the driver attempts to make a shift into transfer case NEUTRAL, and any of the driver controllable conditions are not met, the request will be ignored until all of the conditions are met or until the NEUTRAL select button is released. Additionally the neutral lamp will flash, or begin to flash while the button is depressed and operator controllable conditions are not being met. All of the LED's except the Neutral will flash if any of the operator controllable conditions for shifting are not met while the Neutral button is depressed. This "toggle" type of feature is necessary because the TCCM would interpret another request immediately after the shift into transfer case NEUTRAL has completed. - No LED's illuminated indicate a fault in the transfer case control system. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Four Wheel Drive Selector Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > NV243 Transfer Case > Page 8518 Four Wheel Drive Selector Switch: Description and Operation NV246 Transfer Case Description DESCRIPTION The selector switch assembly is mounted in the left side of the vehicle's Instrument Panel (IP) and consists of a rotary knob connected to a resistive network for the mode and range shift selections. Also located in this assembly is a recessed, normally open momentary switch for making shifts into and out of transfer case NEUTRAL. A pen, or similar instrument, is used to make a NEUTRAL shift selection, thus reducing the likelihood of an inadvertent shift request. The selector switch also contains light emitting diode's (LED's) to indicate the transfer case position and whether a shift is in progress. Operation OPERATION As the position of the selector switch varies, the resistance between the Mode Sensor supply voltage pin and the Mode Sensor output will vary. Hardware, software, and calibrations within the Transfer Case Control Module (TCCM) are provided that interpret the selector switch resistance as given in the table below: For resistances between the ranges B-E shown for each valid position (T-Case NEUTRAL, 4LO, 4HI, AWD), the TCCM may interpret the resistance as: - either of the neighboring valid positions. - as an invalid fault position. For resistances between the ranges E and F shown for AWD and in-between positions, the TCCM may interpret the resistance as: - the AWD position. - an invalid fault position. - a valid in-between position. For resistances between the ranges F and G shown for in-between positions and fault condition (open), the TCCM may interpret the resistance as: - a valid in-between position. - an invalid fault position. For resistances between the ranges A and B shown for the fault condition (short) and , T-Case NEUTRAL, the TCCM may interpret the resistance as: - the T-Case NEUTRAL position. - an invalid fault position. The LED's in the selector assembly are illuminated/flashed in the following manner to indicate a particular condition or state. - A solidly illuminated LED indicates a successfully completed shift and the current operating mode of the transfer case. While a shift has been requested but not yet completed, the LED for the desired transfer case position is flashed. - A flashing operating mode LED for the desired gear indicates that a shift to that position has been requested, but all of the driver controllable conditions have not been met. This is in an attempt to notify the driver that the transmission needs to be put into NEUTRAL, the vehicle speed is too great, or some other condition outlined (other than a diagnostic failure that would prevent this shift) elsewhere See: Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain/Relays and Modules - Transfer Case/Control Module/Description and Operation/Operation is not met. Note that this Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Four Wheel Drive Selector Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > NV243 Transfer Case > Page 8519 flashing will continue indefinitely until the conditions are eventually met, or the selector switch position is changed, or if diagnostic routines no longer allow the requested shift. - If the driver attempts to make a shift into transfer case NEUTRAL, and any of the driver controllable conditions are not met, the request will be ignored until all of the conditions are met or until the NEUTRAL select button is released. Additionally the neutral lamp will flash, or begin to flash while the button is depressed and operator controllable conditions are not being met. All of the LED's except the Neutral will flash if any of the operator controllable conditions for shifting are not met while the Neutral button is depressed. This "toggle" type of feature is necessary because the TCCM would interpret another request immediately after the shift into transfer case NEUTRAL has completed. - No LED's illuminated indicate a fault in the transfer case control system. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Four Wheel Drive Selector Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > NV243 Transfer Case > Page 8520 Four Wheel Drive Selector Switch: Description and Operation NV273 Transfer Case Description DESCRIPTION The selector switch assembly is mounted in the left side of the vehicle's Instrument Panel (IP) and consists of a rotary knob connected to a resistive network for the mode and range shift selections. Also located in this assembly is a recessed, normally open momentary switch for making shifts into and out of transfer case NEUTRAL. A pen, or similar instrument, is used to make a NEUTRAL shift selection, thus reducing the likelihood of an inadvertent shift request. The selector switch also contains four light emitting diode's (LED's) to indicate the transfer case position and whether a shift is in progress. Operation OPERATION As the position of the selector switch varies, the resistance between the Mode Sensor supply voltage pin and the Mode Sensor output will vary. Hardware, software, and calibrations within the Transfer Case Control Module (TCCM) are provided that interpret the selector switch resistance as given in the table below: For resistances between the ranges B-E shown for each valid position (T-Case NEUTRAL, 4LO, 4HI, 2WD), the TCCM may interpret the resistance as: - either of the neighboring valid positions. - as an invalid fault position. For resistances between the ranges E and F shown for 2WD and in-between positions, the TCCM may interpret the resistance as: - the 2WD position. - an invalid fault position. - a valid in-between position. For resistances between the ranges F and G shown for in-between positions and fault condition (open), the TCCM may interpret the resistance as: Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Four Wheel Drive Selector Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > NV243 Transfer Case > Page 8521 - a valid in-between position. - an invalid fault position. For resistances between the ranges A and B shown for the fault condition (short) and T-Case NEUTRAL, the TCCM may interpret the resistance as: - the T-Case NEUTRAL position. - an invalid fault position. The LED's in the selector assembly are illuminated/flashed in the following manner to indicate a particular condition or state. - A solidly illuminated LED indicates a successfully completed shift and the current operating mode of the transfer case. While a shift has been requested but not yet completed, the LED for the desired transfer case position is flashed. - A flashing operating mode LED for the desired gear indicates that a shift to that position has been requested, but all of the driver controllable conditions have not been met. This is in an attempt to notify the driver that the transmission needs to be put into NEUTRAL, the vehicle speed is too great, or some other condition outlined (other than a diagnostic failure that would prevent this shift) elsewhere See: Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain/Relays and Modules - Transfer Case/Control Module/Description and Operation/Operation is not met. Note that this flashing will continue indefinitely until the conditions are eventually met, or the selector switch position is changed, or if diagnostic routines no longer allow the requested shift. - If the driver attempts to make a shift into transfer case NEUTRAL, and any of the driver controllable conditions are not met, the request will be ignored until all of the conditions are met or until the NEUTRAL select button is released. Additionally the neutral lamp will flash, or begin to flash while the button is depressed and operator controllable conditions are not being met. All of the LED's except the Neutral will flash if any of the operator controllable conditions for shifting are not met while the Neutral button is depressed. This "toggle" type of feature is necessary because the TCCM would interpret another request immediately after the shift into transfer case NEUTRAL has completed. - No LED's illuminated indicate a fault in the transfer case control system. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Gear Sensor/Switch, Transfer Case > Component Information > Locations > Assembly-Shift Motor/Mode Sensor Gear Sensor/Switch: Locations Assembly-Shift Motor/Mode Sensor Component ID: 18 Component : ASSEMBLY-SHIFT MOTOR/MODE SENSOR Connector: Name : ASSEMBLY-SHIFT MOTOR/MODE SENSOR Color : BLACK # of pins : 8 Qualifier : (RFE FULL TIME ETC) Pin Circuit Description 1 T103 20YL/OR 5 VOLT SUPPLY 2 D201 20WT/DG MODE SENSOR A 3 G180 20VT/YL SENSOR RETURN 4 T101 16DG SHIFT MOTOR CONTROL B 5 T102 16YL SHIFT MOTOR CONTROL A 6 A940 20RD FUSED B(+) 7 T300 20YL/GY T-CASE MOTOR BRAKE SIGNAL 8-Component Location - 21 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Gear Sensor/Switch, Transfer Case > Component Information > Locations > Assembly-Shift Motor/Mode Sensor > Page 8526 Component Location - 24 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Gear Sensor/Switch, Transfer Case > Component Information > Locations > Assembly-Shift Motor/Mode Sensor > Page 8527 Component Location - 26 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Gear Sensor/Switch, Transfer Case > Component Information > Locations > Assembly-Shift Motor/Mode Sensor > Page 8528 Connector: Name : ASSEMBLY-SHIFT MOTOR/MODE SENSOR Color : DK. GRAY # of pins : 8 Qualifier : (RFE PART TIME ETC/RE ETC) Pin Circuit Description 1 T103 20YL/OR 5 VOLT SUPPLY 2 D201 20WT/DG MODE SENSOR A 3 G180 20VT/YL SENSOR RETURN 4 T101 16DG SHIFT MOTOR CONTROL B Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Gear Sensor/Switch, Transfer Case > Component Information > Locations > Assembly-Shift Motor/Mode Sensor > Page 8529 5 T102 16YL SHIFT MOTOR CONTROL A 6 A918 20RD FUSED B(+) 7-8-Component Location - 21 Component Location - 24 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Gear Sensor/Switch, Transfer Case > Component Information > Locations > Assembly-Shift Motor/Mode Sensor > Page 8530 Component Location - 26 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Gear Sensor/Switch, Transfer Case > Component Information > Locations > Assembly-Shift Motor/Mode Sensor > Page 8531 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Gear Sensor/Switch, Transfer Case > Component Information > Locations > Assembly-Shift Motor/Mode Sensor > Page 8532 Gear Sensor/Switch: Locations Sensor-Transfer Case Position Component ID: 443 Component : SENSOR-TRANSFER CASE POSITION Connector: Name : SENSOR-TRANSFER CASE POSITION Color : # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (MTC EXCEPT POWER WAGON) Pin Circuit Description 1 D201 20WT/DG MODE SENSOR A Pin Circuit Description 1 D201 18WT/DG MODE SENSOR A 2 Z955 20BK GROUND 2 Z955 18BK GROUND 2 Z901 20BK GROUND Component Location - 22 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Gear Sensor/Switch, Transfer Case > Component Information > Locations > Assembly-Shift Motor/Mode Sensor > Page 8533 Component Location - 25 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Gear Sensor/Switch, Transfer Case > Component Information > Locations > Assembly-Shift Motor/Mode Sensor > Page 8534 Connector: Name : SENSOR-TRANSFER CASE POSITION Color : # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (MTC POWER WAGON) Pin Circuit Description 1 D201 18WT/DG MODE SENSOR A Pin Circuit Description 1 D201 20WT/DG MODE SENSOR A Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Gear Sensor/Switch, Transfer Case > Component Information > Locations > Assembly-Shift Motor/Mode Sensor > Page 8535 2 G180 18VT/YL SENSOR RETURN 2 G180 20VT/YL SENSOR RETURN Component Location - 22 Component Location - 25 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Gear Sensor/Switch, Transfer Case > Component Information > Locations > Assembly-Shift Motor/Mode Sensor > Page 8536 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Gear Sensor/Switch, Transfer Case > Component Information > Diagrams > Assembly-Shift Motor/Mode Sensor Gear Sensor/Switch: Diagrams Assembly-Shift Motor/Mode Sensor Component ID 14 Component ID: 14 Component : ASSEMBLY-SHIFT MOTOR/MODE SENSOR Connector: Name : ASSEMBLY-SHIFT MOTOR/MODE SENSOR Color : BLACK # of pins : 8 Qualifier : (RFE FULL TIME ETC) Pin Circuit Description 1 T103 20YL/OR 5 VOLT SUPPLY 2 D201 20WT/DG MODE SENSOR A 3 G180 20VT/YL SENSOR RETURN 4 T101 16DG SHIFT MOTOR CONTROL B 5 T102 16YL SHIFT MOTOR CONTROL A 6 A940 20RD FUSED B(+) 7 T300 20YL/GY T-CASE MOTOR BRAKE SIGNAL 8-Connector: Name : ASSEMBLY-SHIFT MOTOR/MODE SENSOR Color : DK. GRAY # of pins : 8 Qualifier : (RFE PART TIME ETC/RE ETC) Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Gear Sensor/Switch, Transfer Case > Component Information > Diagrams > Assembly-Shift Motor/Mode Sensor > Page 8539 Pin Circuit Description 1 T103 20YL/OR 5 VOLT SUPPLY 2 D201 20WT/DG MODE SENSOR A 3 G180 20VT/YL SENSOR RETURN 4 T101 16DG SHIFT MOTOR CONTROL B 5 T102 16YL SHIFT MOTOR CONTROL A 6 A918 20RD FUSED B(+) 7-8-Component ID 18 Component ID: 18 Component : ASSEMBLY-SHIFT MOTOR/MODE SENSOR Connector: Name : ASSEMBLY-SHIFT MOTOR/MODE SENSOR Color : BLACK # of pins : 8 Qualifier : (RFE FULL TIME ETC) Pin Circuit Description 1 T103 20YL/OR 5 VOLT SUPPLY 2 D201 20WT/DG MODE SENSOR A 3 G180 20VT/YL SENSOR RETURN 4 T101 16DG SHIFT MOTOR CONTROL B 5 T102 16YL SHIFT MOTOR CONTROL A Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Gear Sensor/Switch, Transfer Case > Component Information > Diagrams > Assembly-Shift Motor/Mode Sensor > Page 8540 6 A940 20RD FUSED B(+) 7 T300 20YL/GY T-CASE MOTOR BRAKE SIGNAL 8-Component Location - 21 Component Location - 24 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Gear Sensor/Switch, Transfer Case > Component Information > Diagrams > Assembly-Shift Motor/Mode Sensor > Page 8541 Component Location - 26 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Gear Sensor/Switch, Transfer Case > Component Information > Diagrams > Assembly-Shift Motor/Mode Sensor > Page 8542 Connector: Name : ASSEMBLY-SHIFT MOTOR/MODE SENSOR Color : DK. GRAY # of pins : 8 Qualifier : (RFE PART TIME ETC/RE ETC) Pin Circuit Description 1 T103 20YL/OR 5 VOLT SUPPLY 2 D201 20WT/DG MODE SENSOR A 3 G180 20VT/YL SENSOR RETURN 4 T101 16DG SHIFT MOTOR CONTROL B Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Gear Sensor/Switch, Transfer Case > Component Information > Diagrams > Assembly-Shift Motor/Mode Sensor > Page 8543 5 T102 16YL SHIFT MOTOR CONTROL A 6 A918 20RD FUSED B(+) 7-8-Component Location - 21 Component Location - 24 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Gear Sensor/Switch, Transfer Case > Component Information > Diagrams > Assembly-Shift Motor/Mode Sensor > Page 8544 Component Location - 26 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Gear Sensor/Switch, Transfer Case > Component Information > Diagrams > Assembly-Shift Motor/Mode Sensor > Page 8545 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Gear Sensor/Switch, Transfer Case > Component Information > Diagrams > Assembly-Shift Motor/Mode Sensor > Page 8546 Gear Sensor/Switch: Diagrams Sensor-Transfer Case Position Component ID: 443 Component : SENSOR-TRANSFER CASE POSITION Connector: Name : SENSOR-TRANSFER CASE POSITION Color : # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (MTC EXCEPT POWER WAGON) Pin Circuit Description 1 D201 20WT/DG MODE SENSOR A Pin Circuit Description 1 D201 18WT/DG MODE SENSOR A 2 Z955 20BK GROUND 2 Z955 18BK GROUND 2 Z901 20BK GROUND Component Location - 22 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Gear Sensor/Switch, Transfer Case > Component Information > Diagrams > Assembly-Shift Motor/Mode Sensor > Page 8547 Component Location - 25 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Gear Sensor/Switch, Transfer Case > Component Information > Diagrams > Assembly-Shift Motor/Mode Sensor > Page 8548 Connector: Name : SENSOR-TRANSFER CASE POSITION Color : # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (MTC POWER WAGON) Pin Circuit Description 1 D201 18WT/DG MODE SENSOR A Pin Circuit Description 1 D201 20WT/DG MODE SENSOR A Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Gear Sensor/Switch, Transfer Case > Component Information > Diagrams > Assembly-Shift Motor/Mode Sensor > Page 8549 2 G180 18VT/YL SENSOR RETURN 2 G180 20VT/YL SENSOR RETURN Component Location - 22 Component Location - 25 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Gear Sensor/Switch, Transfer Case > Component Information > Diagrams > Assembly-Shift Motor/Mode Sensor > Page 8550 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Gear Sensor/Switch, Transfer Case > Component Information > Description and Operation > NV244 GENII Transfer Case Gear Sensor/Switch: Description and Operation NV244 GENII Transfer Case Description DESCRIPTION The transfer case mode sensor is an electronic device whose output can be interpreted to indicate the shift motor shaft's rotary position. The sensor consists of a magnetic ring and four Hall Effect Transistors to create a 4 channel digital device (non-contacting) whose output converts the motor shaft position into a coded signal. The TCCM must supply 5VDC (+/- 0.5v) to the sensor and monitor the shift motor position. The four channels are denoted A, B, C, and D. The sensor is mechanically linked to the shaft of the cam which causes the transfer case shifting. The mode sensor draws less than 53 mA. Operation OPERATION During normal vehicle operation, the Transfer Case Control Module (TCCM) monitors the mode sensor outputs at least every 250 (+/-50) milliseconds when the shift motor is stationary and 400 microseconds when the shift motor is active. A mode sensor signal between 3.8 Volts and 0.8 Volts is considered to be undefined. Refer to SECTOR ANGLES vs.TRANSFER CASE POSITION for the relative angles of the transfer case shift sector versus the interpreted transfer case gear operating mode. Refer to MODE SENSOR CHANNEL STATES for the sensor codes returned to the TCCM for each transfer case mode sensor position. The various between gears positions can also be referred as the transfer case's coarse position. These coarse positions come into play during shift attempts. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Gear Sensor/Switch, Transfer Case > Component Information > Description and Operation > NV244 GENII Transfer Case > Page 8553 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Gear Sensor/Switch, Transfer Case > Component Information > Description and Operation > NV244 GENII Transfer Case > Page 8554 Gear Sensor/Switch: Description and Operation NV246 Transfer Case Description DESCRIPTION The transfer case mode sensor is an electronic device whose output can be interpreted to indicate the shift motor shaft's rotary position. The sensor consists of a magnetic ring and four Hall Effect Transistors to create a 4 channel digital device (non-contacting) whose output converts the motor shaft position into a coded signal. The FCM must supply 5VDC (+/- 0.5v) to the sensor and monitor the shift motor position. The four channels are denoted A, B, C, and D. The sensor is mechanically linked to the shaft of the cam which causes the transfer case shifting. The mode sensor draws less than 53 mA. Operation OPERATION During normal vehicle operation, the Front Control Module (FCM) monitors the mode sensor outputs at least every 250 (+/-50) milliseconds when the shift motor is stationary and 400 microseconds when the shift motor is active. A mode sensor signal between 3.8 Volts and 0.8 Volts is considered to be undefined. Refer to for the relative angles of the transfer case shift sector versus the interpreted transfer case gear operating mode. Refer to the sensor codes returned to the FCM for each transfer case mode sensor position. The various between gears positions can also be referred as the transfer case's coarse position. These coarse positions come into play during shift attempts. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Gear Sensor/Switch, Transfer Case > Component Information > Description and Operation > NV244 GENII Transfer Case > Page 8555 Gear Sensor/Switch: Description and Operation NV271 Transfer Case Description DESCRIPTION The transfer case position sensor is an electronic device whose output can be interpreted to indicate the transfer case's current operating mode. The sensor consists of a five position, resistive multiplexed circuit which returns a specific resistance value to the Powertrain Control Module (PCM) for each transfer case operating mode. The sensor is located on the top of the transfer case, just left of the transfer case centerline and rides against the sector plate roostercomb. The PCM supplies 5VDC (+/- 0.5V) to the sensor and monitors the return voltage to determine the sector plate, and therefore the transfer case, position. Operation OPERATION Position Sensor Linear Movement During normal vehicle operation, the Powertrain Control Module (PCM) monitors the transfer case position sensor return voltage to determine the operating mode of the transfer case. Refer to the Operating Mode Versus Resistance table for the correct resistance for each position. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Gear Sensor/Switch, Transfer Case > Component Information > Description and Operation > NV244 GENII Transfer Case > Page 8556 Gear Sensor/Switch: Description and Operation NV243 Transfer Case Description DESCRIPTION The transfer case mode sensor (1) is an electronic device whose output can be interpreted to indicate the shift motor shaft's rotary position. The sensor consists of a magnetic ring and four Hall Effect Transistors to create a 4 channel digital device (non-contacting) whose output converts the motor shaft position into a coded signal. The TCCM must supply 5VDC (+/- 0.5v) to the sensor and monitor the shift motor position. The four channels are denoted A, B, C, and D. The sensor is mechanically linked to the shaft of the cam which causes the transfer case shifting. The mode sensor draws less than 53 mA. Operation OPERATION During normal vehicle operation, the Transfer Case Control Module (TCCM) monitors the mode sensor outputs at least every 250 (+/-50) milliseconds when the shift motor is stationary and 400 microseconds when the shift motor is active. A mode sensor signal between 3.8 Volts and 0.8 Volts is considered to be undefined. Refer to SECTOR ANGLES vs.TRANSFER CASE POSITION for the relative angles of the transfer case shift sector versus the interpreted transfer case gear operating mode. Refer to MODE SENSOR CHANNEL STATES for the sensor codes returned to the TCCM for each transfer case mode sensor position. The various between gears positions can also be referred as the transfer case's coarse position. These coarse positions come into play during shift attempts. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Gear Sensor/Switch, Transfer Case > Component Information > Description and Operation > NV244 GENII Transfer Case > Page 8557 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Gear Sensor/Switch, Transfer Case > Component Information > Description and Operation > NV244 GENII Transfer Case > Page 8558 Gear Sensor/Switch: Description and Operation NV273 Transfer Case Description DESCRIPTION The transfer case mode sensor (1) is an electronic device whose output can be interpreted to indicate the shift motor shaft's rotary position. The sensor consists of a magnetic ring and four Hall Effect Transistors to create a 4 channel digital device (non-contacting) whose output converts the motor shaft position into a coded signal. The TCCM must supply 5VDC (+/- 0.5v) to the sensor and monitor the shift motor position. The four channels are denoted A, B, C, and D. The sensor is mechanically linked to the shaft of the cam which causes the transfer case shifting. The mode sensor draws less than 53 mA. Operation OPERATION During normal vehicle operation, the Transfer Case Control Module (TCCM) monitors the mode sensor outputs at least every 250 (+/-50) milliseconds when the shift motor is stationary and 400 microseconds when the shift motor is active. A mode sensor signal between 3.8 Volts and 0.8 Volts is considered to be undefined. Refer to SECTOR ANGLES vs.TRANSFER CASE POSITION for the relative angles of the transfer case shift sector versus the interpreted transfer case gear operating mode. Refer to MODE SENSOR CHANNEL STATES for the sensor codes returned to the TCCM for each transfer case mode sensor position. The various between gears positions can also be referred as the transfer case's coarse position. These coarse positions come into play during shift attempts. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Gear Sensor/Switch, Transfer Case > Component Information > Description and Operation > NV244 GENII Transfer Case > Page 8559 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Gear Sensor/Switch, Transfer Case > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Gear Sensor/Switch: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL 1. Raise and support the vehicle. 2. Disengage the transfer case position sensor connector from the position sensor. 3. Remove the position sensor from the transfer case. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Gear Sensor/Switch, Transfer Case > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 8562 Gear Sensor/Switch: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION 1. Inspect the o-ring seal on the transfer case position sensor. Replace the o-ring if necessary. 2. Install the transfer case position sensor into the transfer case. Torque the sensor to 27 Nm (20 ft.lbs.). 3. Engage the transfer case position sensor connector to the position sensor. 4. Lower vehicle. 5. Verify proper sensor operation. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Speed Sensor, Transfer Case > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Prop Shaft Speed-Front Speed Sensor: Locations Sensor-Prop Shaft Speed-Front Component ID: 435 Component : SENSOR-PROP SHAFT SPEED-FRONT Connector: Name : SENSOR-PROP SHAFT SPEED-FRONT Color : # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (FULL TIME ETC) Pin Circuit Description 1 T71 20YL/OR INPUT SPEED SENSOR 2 (N3) RETURN 2 T340 20DG/VT INPUT SPEED SENSOR 2 (N3) SIGNAL Component Location - 21 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Speed Sensor, Transfer Case > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Prop Shaft Speed-Front > Page 8567 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Speed Sensor, Transfer Case > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Prop Shaft Speed-Front > Page 8568 Speed Sensor: Locations Sensor-Prop Shaft Speed-Rear Component ID: 436 Component : SENSOR-PROP SHAFT SPEED-REAR Connector: Name : SENSOR-PROP SHAFT SPEED-REAR Color : # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (FULL TIME ETC) Pin Circuit Description 1 T70 20YL INPUT SPEED SENSOR 1 (N2) SIGNAL 2 T341 20DG/VT INPUT SPEED SENSOR 1 (N2) RETURN Component Location - 21 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Speed Sensor, Transfer Case > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Prop Shaft Speed-Front > Page 8569 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Speed Sensor, Transfer Case > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Prop Shaft Speed-Front Speed Sensor: Diagrams Sensor-Prop Shaft Speed-Front Component ID: 435 Component : SENSOR-PROP SHAFT SPEED-FRONT Connector: Name : SENSOR-PROP SHAFT SPEED-FRONT Color : # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (FULL TIME ETC) Pin Circuit Description 1 T71 20YL/OR INPUT SPEED SENSOR 2 (N3) RETURN 2 T340 20DG/VT INPUT SPEED SENSOR 2 (N3) SIGNAL Component Location - 21 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Speed Sensor, Transfer Case > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Prop Shaft Speed-Front > Page 8572 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Speed Sensor, Transfer Case > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Prop Shaft Speed-Front > Page 8573 Speed Sensor: Diagrams Sensor-Prop Shaft Speed-Rear Component ID: 436 Component : SENSOR-PROP SHAFT SPEED-REAR Connector: Name : SENSOR-PROP SHAFT SPEED-REAR Color : # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (FULL TIME ETC) Pin Circuit Description 1 T70 20YL INPUT SPEED SENSOR 1 (N2) SIGNAL 2 T341 20DG/VT INPUT SPEED SENSOR 1 (N2) RETURN Component Location - 21 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Speed Sensor, Transfer Case > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Prop Shaft Speed-Front > Page 8574 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Speed Sensor, Transfer Case > Component Information > Service and Repair > Sensor-Output Shaft Speed-Front Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Sensor-Output Shaft Speed-Front Removal REMOVAL 1. Raise the vehicle on a suitable hoist. 2. Disengage the wiring connector from the front output shaft speed sensor (1). 3. Remove the front output shaft speed sensor from the transfer case. Installation INSTALLATION 1. Install the front output shaft speed sensor (1) into the transfer case. Tighten the speed sensor to 17 Nm (12.5 ft.lbs.). 2. Engage the wiring connector to the front output shaft speed sensor. 3. Lower the vehicle. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Speed Sensor, Transfer Case > Component Information > Service and Repair > Sensor-Output Shaft Speed-Front > Page 8577 Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Sensor-Output Shaft Speed-Rear Removal REMOVAL 1. Raise the vehicle on a suitable hoist. 2. Disengage the wiring connector from the rear output shaft speed sensor (1). 3. Remove the rear output shaft speed sensor from the transfer case. Installation INSTALLATION 1. Install the rear output shaft speed sensor (1) into the transfer case. Tighten the speed sensor to 17 Nm (12.5 ft.lbs.). 2. Engage the wiring connector to the rear output shaft speed sensor. 3. Lower the vehicle. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Actuators and Solenoids - Transfer Case > Transfer Case Actuator > Component Information > Locations Transfer Case Actuator: Locations Component ID: 18 Component : ASSEMBLY-SHIFT MOTOR/MODE SENSOR Connector: Name : ASSEMBLY-SHIFT MOTOR/MODE SENSOR Color : BLACK # of pins : 8 Qualifier : (RFE FULL TIME ETC) Pin Circuit Description 1 T103 20YL/OR 5 VOLT SUPPLY 2 D201 20WT/DG MODE SENSOR A 3 G180 20VT/YL SENSOR RETURN 4 T101 16DG SHIFT MOTOR CONTROL B 5 T102 16YL SHIFT MOTOR CONTROL A 6 A940 20RD FUSED B(+) 7 T300 20YL/GY T-CASE MOTOR BRAKE SIGNAL 8-Component Location - 21 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Actuators and Solenoids - Transfer Case > Transfer Case Actuator > Component Information > Locations > Page 8583 Component Location - 24 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Actuators and Solenoids - Transfer Case > Transfer Case Actuator > Component Information > Locations > Page 8584 Component Location - 26 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Actuators and Solenoids - Transfer Case > Transfer Case Actuator > Component Information > Locations > Page 8585 Connector: Name : ASSEMBLY-SHIFT MOTOR/MODE SENSOR Color : DK. GRAY # of pins : 8 Qualifier : (RFE PART TIME ETC/RE ETC) Pin Circuit Description 1 T103 20YL/OR 5 VOLT SUPPLY 2 D201 20WT/DG MODE SENSOR A 3 G180 20VT/YL SENSOR RETURN 4 T101 16DG SHIFT MOTOR CONTROL B Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Actuators and Solenoids - Transfer Case > Transfer Case Actuator > Component Information > Locations > Page 8586 5 T102 16YL SHIFT MOTOR CONTROL A 6 A918 20RD FUSED B(+) 7-8-Component Location - 21 Component Location - 24 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Actuators and Solenoids - Transfer Case > Transfer Case Actuator > Component Information > Locations > Page 8587 Component Location - 26 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Actuators and Solenoids - Transfer Case > Transfer Case Actuator > Component Information > Locations > Page 8588 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Actuators and Solenoids - Transfer Case > Transfer Case Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Component ID 14 Transfer Case Actuator: Diagrams Component ID 14 Component ID: 14 Component : ASSEMBLY-SHIFT MOTOR/MODE SENSOR Connector: Name : ASSEMBLY-SHIFT MOTOR/MODE SENSOR Color : BLACK # of pins : 8 Qualifier : (RFE FULL TIME ETC) Pin Circuit Description 1 T103 20YL/OR 5 VOLT SUPPLY 2 D201 20WT/DG MODE SENSOR A 3 G180 20VT/YL SENSOR RETURN 4 T101 16DG SHIFT MOTOR CONTROL B 5 T102 16YL SHIFT MOTOR CONTROL A 6 A940 20RD FUSED B(+) 7 T300 20YL/GY T-CASE MOTOR BRAKE SIGNAL 8-Connector: Name : ASSEMBLY-SHIFT MOTOR/MODE SENSOR Color : DK. GRAY # of pins : 8 Qualifier : (RFE PART TIME ETC/RE ETC) Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Actuators and Solenoids - Transfer Case > Transfer Case Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Component ID 14 > Page 8591 Pin Circuit Description 1 T103 20YL/OR 5 VOLT SUPPLY 2 D201 20WT/DG MODE SENSOR A 3 G180 20VT/YL SENSOR RETURN 4 T101 16DG SHIFT MOTOR CONTROL B 5 T102 16YL SHIFT MOTOR CONTROL A 6 A918 20RD FUSED B(+) 7-8-- Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Actuators and Solenoids - Transfer Case > Transfer Case Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Component ID 14 > Page 8592 Transfer Case Actuator: Diagrams Component ID 18 Component ID: 18 Component : ASSEMBLY-SHIFT MOTOR/MODE SENSOR Connector: Name : ASSEMBLY-SHIFT MOTOR/MODE SENSOR Color : BLACK # of pins : 8 Qualifier : (RFE FULL TIME ETC) Pin Circuit Description 1 T103 20YL/OR 5 VOLT SUPPLY 2 D201 20WT/DG MODE SENSOR A 3 G180 20VT/YL SENSOR RETURN 4 T101 16DG SHIFT MOTOR CONTROL B 5 T102 16YL SHIFT MOTOR CONTROL A 6 A940 20RD FUSED B(+) 7 T300 20YL/GY T-CASE MOTOR BRAKE SIGNAL 8-Component Location - 21 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Actuators and Solenoids - Transfer Case > Transfer Case Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Component ID 14 > Page 8593 Component Location - 24 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Actuators and Solenoids - Transfer Case > Transfer Case Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Component ID 14 > Page 8594 Component Location - 26 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Actuators and Solenoids - Transfer Case > Transfer Case Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Component ID 14 > Page 8595 Connector: Name : ASSEMBLY-SHIFT MOTOR/MODE SENSOR Color : DK. GRAY # of pins : 8 Qualifier : (RFE PART TIME ETC/RE ETC) Pin Circuit Description 1 T103 20YL/OR 5 VOLT SUPPLY 2 D201 20WT/DG MODE SENSOR A 3 G180 20VT/YL SENSOR RETURN 4 T101 16DG SHIFT MOTOR CONTROL B Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Actuators and Solenoids - Transfer Case > Transfer Case Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Component ID 14 > Page 8596 5 T102 16YL SHIFT MOTOR CONTROL A 6 A918 20RD FUSED B(+) 7-8-Component Location - 21 Component Location - 24 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Actuators and Solenoids - Transfer Case > Transfer Case Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Component ID 14 > Page 8597 Component Location - 26 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Actuators and Solenoids - Transfer Case > Transfer Case Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Component ID 14 > Page 8598 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Actuators and Solenoids - Transfer Case > Transfer Case Actuator > Component Information > Description and Operation > NV243 Transfer Case Transfer Case Actuator: Description and Operation NV243 Transfer Case Description DESCRIPTION The shift motor (2) consists of a permanent magnet D.C. motor with gear reduction to convert a high speed-low torque device into a low speed-high torque device. The output of the device is coupled to a shaft which internally moves the mode and range forks that change the transfer case operating ranges. The motor is rated at 25 amps maximum at 23° C (72° F) with 10 volts at the motor leads. Operation OPERATION The transfer case shift motor responds to the Transfer Case Control Module (TCCM) commands to move the transfer case shift sector bi-directionally, as required, to obtain the transfer case operating mode indicated by the instrument panel mounted selector switch. Description DESCRIPTION The shift motor (2) consists of a permanent magnet D.C. motor with gear reduction to convert a high speed-low torque device into a low speed-high torque device. The output of the device is coupled to a shaft which internally moves the mode and range forks that change the transfer case operating ranges. The motor is rated at 25 amps maximum at 23° C (72° F) with 10 volts at the motor leads. Operation OPERATION The transfer case shift motor responds to the Transfer Case Control Module (TCCM) commands to move the transfer case shift sector bi-directionally, as required, to obtain the transfer case operating mode indicated by the instrument panel mounted selector switch. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Actuators and Solenoids - Transfer Case > Transfer Case Actuator > Component Information > Description and Operation > NV243 Transfer Case > Page 8601 Transfer Case Actuator: Description and Operation NV244 GENII Transfer Case Description DESCRIPTION The shift motor (2) consists of a permanent magnet D.C. motor with gear reduction to convert a high speed-low torque device into a low speed-high torque device. The output of the device is coupled to a shaft which internally moves the mode and range forks that change the transfer case operating ranges. The motor is rated at 25 amps maximum at 23° C (72° F) with 10 volts at the motor leads. Operation OPERATION The transfer case shift motor responds to the Transfer Case Control Module (TCCM) commands to move the transfer case shift sector bi-directionally, as required, to obtain the transfer case operating mode indicated by the instrument panel mounted selector switch. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Actuators and Solenoids - Transfer Case > Transfer Case Actuator > Component Information > Description and Operation > NV243 Transfer Case > Page 8602 Transfer Case Actuator: Description and Operation NV246 Transfer Case Description DESCRIPTION The shift motor consists of a permanent magnet D.C. motor with gear reduction to convert a high speed-low torque device into a low speed-high torque device. The output of the device is coupled to a shaft which internally moves the mode and range forks that change the transfer case operating ranges. The motor is rated at 25 amps maximum at 23° C (72° F) with 10 volts at the motor leads. Operation OPERATION The transfer case shift motor responds to the Front Control Module (FCM) commands to move the transfer case shift sector bi-directionally, as required, to obtain the transfer case operating mode indicated by the instrument panel mounted selector switch. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Actuators and Solenoids - Transfer Case > Transfer Case Actuator > Component Information > Description and Operation > NV243 Transfer Case > Page 8603 Transfer Case Actuator: Description and Operation NV273 Transfer Case Description DESCRIPTION The shift motor (2) consists of a permanent magnet D.C. motor with gear reduction to convert a high speed-low torque device into a low speed-high torque device. The output of the device is coupled to a shaft which internally moves the mode and range forks that change the transfer case operating ranges. The motor is rated at 25 amps maximum at 23° C (72° F) with 10 volts at the motor leads. Operation OPERATION The transfer case shift motor responds to the Transfer Case Control Module (TCCM) commands to move the transfer case shift sector bi-directionally, as required, to obtain the transfer case operating mode indicated by the instrument panel mounted selector switch. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Actuators and Solenoids - Transfer Case > Transfer Case Actuator > Component Information > Service and Repair > NV243 Transfer Case Transfer Case Actuator: Service and Repair NV243 Transfer Case Removal REMOVAL NOTE: New shift motor assemblies are shipped in the 2WD/AWD position. If a new shift motor assembly will be installed, it will be necessary to shift the transfer case to the 2WD/AWD position prior to motor removal. 1. Raise the vehicle on a suitable hoist. 2. Disengage the wiring connectors from the shift motor and mode sensor. 3. Remove the bolts (3) holding the shift motor and mode sensor assembly (2) onto the transfer case (1). 4. Separate the shift motor and mode sensor assembly (2) from the transfer case. Installation INSTALLATION 1. Verify that the shift sector o-ring is clean and properly positioned over the shift sector and against the transfer case. NOTE: Verify that the shift motor position and sector shaft orientation are aligned. It may be necessary to manually shift the transfer case if the shift motor and sector shaft are not aligned. 2. Position the shift motor and mode sensor assembly (2) onto the transfer case (1). 3. Install the bolts (3) to hold the assembly onto the transfer case. Tighten the bolts to 16-24 Nm (12-18 ft.lbs.). CAUTION: If the original shift motor and mode sensor assembly bolts are reused, be sure to use Mopar(R) Lock & Seal or Loctite(TM) 242 to replenish the lock patch material originally found on the bolts 4. Engage the wiring connectors to the shift motor and mode sensor. 5. Refill the transfer case as necessary. 6. Lower vehicle and verify transfer case operation. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Actuators and Solenoids - Transfer Case > Transfer Case Actuator > Component Information > Service and Repair > NV243 Transfer Case > Page 8606 Transfer Case Actuator: Service and Repair NV244 GENII Transfer Case Removal REMOVAL NOTE: New shift motor assemblies are shipped in the 2WD/AWD position. If a new shift motor assembly will be installed, it will be necessary to shift the transfer case to the 2WD/AWD position prior to motor removal. 1. Raise the vehicle on a suitable hoist. 2. Disengage the wiring connectors from the shift motor and mode sensor. 3. Remove the bolts (3) holding the shift motor and mode sensor assembly (2) onto the transfer case (1). 4. Separate the shift motor and mode sensor assembly (2) from the transfer case. Installation INSTALLATION 1. Verify that the shift sector o-ring is clean and properly positioned over the shift sector and against the transfer case. NOTE: Verify that the shift motor position and sector shaft orientation are aligned. It may be necessary to manually shift the transfer case if the shift motor and sector shaft are not aligned. 2. Position the shift motor and mode sensor assembly (2) onto the transfer case (1). 3. Install the bolts (3) to hold the assembly onto the transfer case. Tighten the bolts to 16-24 Nm (12-18 ft.lbs.). CAUTION: If the original shift motor and mode sensor assembly bolts are reused, be sure to use Mopar(R) Lock & Seal or Loctite(TM) 242 to replenish the lock patch material originally found on the bolts 4. Engage the wiring connectors to the shift motor and mode sensor. 5. Refill the transfer case as necessary. 6. Lower vehicle and verify transfer case operation. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Actuators and Solenoids - Transfer Case > Transfer Case Actuator > Component Information > Service and Repair > NV243 Transfer Case > Page 8607 Transfer Case Actuator: Service and Repair NV246 Transfer Case Removal REMOVAL Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Actuators and Solenoids - Transfer Case > Transfer Case Actuator > Component Information > Service and Repair > NV243 Transfer Case > Page 8608 ERROR: stackunderflow OFFENDING COMMAND: ~ STACK: Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Actuators and Solenoids - Transfer Case > Transfer Case Actuator > Component Information > Service and Repair > NV243 Transfer Case > Page 8609 Transfer Case Actuator: Service and Repair NV273 Transfer Case Removal REMOVAL NOTE: New shift motor assemblies are shipped in the 2WD/AWD position. If a new shift motor assembly will be installed, it will be necessary to shift the transfer case to the 2WD/AWD position prior to motor removal. 1. Raise the vehicle on a suitable hoist. 2. Disengage the wiring connectors from the shift motor and mode sensor. 3. Remove the bolts (3) holding the shift motor and mode sensor assembly (2) onto the transfer case (1). 4. Separate the shift motor and mode sensor assembly (2) from the transfer case. Installation INSTALLATION 1. Verify that the shift sector o-ring is clean and properly positioned over the shift sector and against the transfer case. NOTE: Verify that the shift motor position and sector shaft orientation are aligned. It may be necessary to manually shift the transfer case if the shift motor and sector shaft are not aligned. 2. Position the shift motor and mode sensor assembly (2) onto the transfer case (1). 3. Install the bolts (3) to hold the assembly onto the transfer case. Tighten the bolts to 16-24 Nm (12-18 ft.lbs.). CAUTION: If the original shift motor and mode sensor assembly bolts are reused, be sure to use Mopar(R) Lock & Seal or Loctite(TM) 242 to replenish the lock patch material originally found on the bolts 4. Engage the wiring connectors to the shift motor and mode sensor. 5. Refill the transfer case as necessary. 6. Lower vehicle and verify transfer case operation. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Control Module, Transfer Case > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 197 Control Module: Locations Component ID 197 Component ID: 197 Component : MODULE-FINAL DRIVE CONTROL Connector: Name : MODULE-FINAL DRIVE CONTROL Color : # of pins : 50 Qualifier : (POWER WAGON) A-A1 A121 14RD/YL FUSED B(+) A2 T520 16YL/OR FRONT LOCKER SOURCE A3 T526 16YL/WT REAR LOCKER SOURCE A4 Z935 16BK GROUND A5 Z935 16BK GROUND A6 T524 16YL/LG FRONT LOCKER RETURN A7 T528 16YL/GY REAR LOCKER RETURN A8 T521 20YL/BK LOCKER SENSOR SUPPLY A9 T537 20YL/LG LOCKER SWITCH SUPPLY A10 T523 20YL/BK LOCKER SENSOR SUPPLY A11 - A12 - A13 D65 20WT/LG CAN C BUS (+) A14 D64 20WT/LB CAN C BUS (-) B T527 20YL/TN REAR LOCKER SENSOR SENSE B1 T522 20YL/LB FRONT LOCKER SENSOR SENSE B2 T535 20YL/BR LOCKER SWITCH SENSE B3 - B4 - B5 - B6 - B7 F960 20PK/LG FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) B8 T536 20YL/WT SWITCH SUPPLY B9 - B10 - B11 T531 20YL/TN STABILIZER BAR SWITCH SENSE B12 T532 20YL/GY LOCKER OPEN ILLUMINATION SENSE B13 T533 20YL/LB LOCKER REAR ILLUMINATION SENSE B14 T534 20YL LOCKER FR/RR ILLUMINATION SENSE C T530 20YL/DG STABILIZER BAR DISENGAGE ILLUMINATION SENSE C1 T529 20YL/LG STABILIZER BAR ENGAGE ILLUMINATION SENSE C2 - C3 - - Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Control Module, Transfer Case > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 197 > Page 8614 C4 - C5 - C6 - C7 - C8 - C9 - C10 - C11 - C12 - C13 - C14 - - D-E-F-G-H-Component Location - 29 Component Location - 28 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Control Module, Transfer Case > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 197 > Page 8615 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Control Module, Transfer Case > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 197 > Page 8616 Control Module: Locations Component ID 206 Component ID: 206 Component : MODULE-FINAL DRIVE CONTROL Connector: Name : MODULE-FINAL DRIVE CONTROL Color : # of pins : 50 Qualifier : (POWER WAGON) A-A1 A121 14RD/YL FUSED B(+) A2 T520 16YL/OR FRONT LOCKER SOURCE A3 T526 16YL/WT REAR LOCKER SOURCE A4 Z935 16BK GROUND A5 Z935 16BK GROUND A6 T524 16YL/LG FRONT LOCKER RETURN A7 T528 16YL/GY REAR LOCKER RETURN A8 T521 20YL/BK LOCKER SENSOR SUPPLY A9 T537 20YL/LG LOCKER SWITCH SUPPLY A10 T523 20YL/BK LOCKER SENSOR SUPPLY A11 - A12 - A13 D65 20WT/LG CAN C BUS (+) A14 D64 20WT/LB CAN C BUS (-) B T527 20YL/TN REAR LOCKER SENSOR SENSE B1 T522 20YL/LB FRONT LOCKER SENSOR SENSE B2 T535 20YL/BR LOCKER SWITCH SENSE B3 - B4 - B5 - B6 - B7 F960 20PK/LG FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) B8 T536 20YL/WT SWITCH SUPPLY B9 - B10 - B11 T531 20YL/TN STABILIZER BAR SWITCH SENSE B12 T532 20YL/GY LOCKER OPEN ILLUMINATION SENSE B13 T533 20YL/LB LOCKER REAR ILLUMINATION SENSE B14 T534 20YL LOCKER FR/RR ILLUMINATION SENSE C T530 20YL/DG STABILIZER BAR DISENGAGE ILLUMINATION SENSE C1 T529 20YL/LG STABILIZER BAR ENGAGE ILLUMINATION SENSE C2 - C3 - - Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Control Module, Transfer Case > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 197 > Page 8617 C4 - C5 - C6 - C7 - C8 - C9 - C10 - C11 - C12 - C13 - C14 - - D-E-F-G-H-Component Location - 29 Component Location - 28 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Control Module, Transfer Case > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 197 > Page 8618 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Control Module, Transfer Case > Component Information > Diagrams > Component ID 197 Control Module: Diagrams Component ID 197 Component ID: 197 Component : MODULE-FINAL DRIVE CONTROL Connector: Name : MODULE-FINAL DRIVE CONTROL Color : # of pins : 50 Qualifier : (POWER WAGON) A-A1 A121 14RD/YL FUSED B(+) A2 T520 16YL/OR FRONT LOCKER SOURCE A3 T526 16YL/WT REAR LOCKER SOURCE A4 Z935 16BK GROUND A5 Z935 16BK GROUND A6 T524 16YL/LG FRONT LOCKER RETURN A7 T528 16YL/GY REAR LOCKER RETURN A8 T521 20YL/BK LOCKER SENSOR SUPPLY A9 T537 20YL/LG LOCKER SWITCH SUPPLY A10 T523 20YL/BK LOCKER SENSOR SUPPLY A11 - A12 - A13 D65 20WT/LG CAN C BUS (+) A14 D64 20WT/LB CAN C BUS (-) B T527 20YL/TN REAR LOCKER SENSOR SENSE B1 T522 20YL/LB FRONT LOCKER SENSOR SENSE B2 T535 20YL/BR LOCKER SWITCH SENSE B3 - B4 - B5 - B6 - B7 F960 20PK/LG FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) B8 T536 20YL/WT SWITCH SUPPLY B9 - B10 - B11 T531 20YL/TN STABILIZER BAR SWITCH SENSE B12 T532 20YL/GY LOCKER OPEN ILLUMINATION SENSE B13 T533 20YL/LB LOCKER REAR ILLUMINATION SENSE B14 T534 20YL LOCKER FR/RR ILLUMINATION SENSE C T530 20YL/DG STABILIZER BAR DISENGAGE ILLUMINATION SENSE C1 T529 20YL/LG STABILIZER BAR ENGAGE ILLUMINATION SENSE C2 - C3 - - Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Control Module, Transfer Case > Component Information > Diagrams > Component ID 197 > Page 8621 C4 - C5 - C6 - C7 - C8 - C9 - C10 - C11 - C12 - C13 - C14 - - D-E-F-G-H-Component Location - 29 Component Location - 28 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Control Module, Transfer Case > Component Information > Diagrams > Component ID 197 > Page 8622 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Control Module, Transfer Case > Component Information > Diagrams > Component ID 197 > Page 8623 Control Module: Diagrams Component ID 206 Component ID: 206 Component : MODULE-FINAL DRIVE CONTROL Connector: Name : MODULE-FINAL DRIVE CONTROL Color : # of pins : 50 Qualifier : (POWER WAGON) A-A1 A121 14RD/YL FUSED B(+) A2 T520 16YL/OR FRONT LOCKER SOURCE A3 T526 16YL/WT REAR LOCKER SOURCE A4 Z935 16BK GROUND A5 Z935 16BK GROUND A6 T524 16YL/LG FRONT LOCKER RETURN A7 T528 16YL/GY REAR LOCKER RETURN A8 T521 20YL/BK LOCKER SENSOR SUPPLY A9 T537 20YL/LG LOCKER SWITCH SUPPLY A10 T523 20YL/BK LOCKER SENSOR SUPPLY A11 - A12 - A13 D65 20WT/LG CAN C BUS (+) A14 D64 20WT/LB CAN C BUS (-) B T527 20YL/TN REAR LOCKER SENSOR SENSE B1 T522 20YL/LB FRONT LOCKER SENSOR SENSE B2 T535 20YL/BR LOCKER SWITCH SENSE B3 - B4 - B5 - B6 - B7 F960 20PK/LG FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) B8 T536 20YL/WT SWITCH SUPPLY B9 - B10 - B11 T531 20YL/TN STABILIZER BAR SWITCH SENSE B12 T532 20YL/GY LOCKER OPEN ILLUMINATION SENSE B13 T533 20YL/LB LOCKER REAR ILLUMINATION SENSE B14 T534 20YL LOCKER FR/RR ILLUMINATION SENSE C T530 20YL/DG STABILIZER BAR DISENGAGE ILLUMINATION SENSE C1 T529 20YL/LG STABILIZER BAR ENGAGE ILLUMINATION SENSE C2 - C3 - - Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Control Module, Transfer Case > Component Information > Diagrams > Component ID 197 > Page 8624 C4 - C5 - C6 - C7 - C8 - C9 - C10 - C11 - C12 - C13 - C14 - - D-E-F-G-H-Component Location - 29 Component Location - 28 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Control Module, Transfer Case > Component Information > Diagrams > Component ID 197 > Page 8625 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Control Module, Transfer Case > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Control Module: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The Transfer Case Control Module (TCCM) functionality now resides in the Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM), refer to the TIPM information for location and additional information. The TIPM controls the 4X4 transfer case shift functions via the actuation of a shift motor and utilizing the feedback of a mode sensor assembly. Communication is via the CAN bus. Inputs include user selectable 4X4 modes that include 2WD, AWD, 4HI, 4LO, and Neutral (selections vary with the specific transfer case). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Control Module, Transfer Case > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 8628 Control Module: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The Transfer Case Control Module (TCCM) functionality in the Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) utilizes the input from the transfer case mounted mode sensor, the instrument panel mounted selector switch, and the following information from the vehicle's CAN bus to determine if a shift is allowed. - Engine RPM and Vehicle Speed - Diagnostic Requests - Manual Transmission and Brake Applied - PRNDL - Ignition Status - ABS Messages Once the TIP determines that a requested shift is allowed, it actuates the bi-directional shift motor as necessary to achieve the desired transfer case operating mode. The TIPM also monitors the mode sensor while controlling the shift motor to determine the status of the shift attempt. Several items can cause the requested shift not to be completed. If the TIPM has recognized a fault (DTC) of some variety, it will begin operation in one of four Functionality Levels. These levels are: - Level Zero - Normal Operation. - Level One - Only Mode Shifts Are Allowed. - Level Two - Only Mode Shifts and Shifts Into LOW Are Allowed (No Neutral Shifts Are Allowed). - Level Three - No Shifts Are Allowed The TIPM can also be operating in one of three possible power modes. These power modes are: - Full Power Mode is the normal operational mode of the module. This mode is achieved by normal CAN bus traffic being present and the ignition being in the RUN position. Reduced Power Mode will be entered when the ignition has been powered off. In this state, the module will shut down power supplied to external devices, and to electronic interface inputs and outputs. From this state the module can enter either Sleep Mode or Full Power Mode. To enter this mode, the module must receive an ignition message denoting that the ignition is off, or not receive any messages for 5 ±0.5 seconds. To exit this mode, the module must receive one ignition message that denotes that the ignition is in the RUN position. - Sleep Mode will be entered, from the Reduced Power Mode, when no CAN traffic has been sensed for 20 ±1 seconds. If during Sleep Mode the module detects CAN bus traffic, it will revert to the Reduced Power mode while monitoring for ignition messages. It will remain in this state as long as there is traffic other than run or start messages, and will return to Sleep mode if the bus goes without traffic for 20 ±1 seconds. SHIFT REQUIREMENTS If the TIPM is in full power mode and at functionality level zero, it uses the following criteria to determine if a shift is allowed. If any of the driver controllable conditions are not met once the shift request is recognized, the TIPM will solidly illuminate the source position's LED and flash the desired position's LED for all shifts except NEUTRAL. The NEUTRAL shift LED strategy will be discussed later. Mode shifts will be allowed regardless of transmission gear or vehicle speed, whenever the following conditions are met: - Front and rear wheel speed are within 21 km/h (13 mph). - A change in the Selector switch state indicates that a mode shift has been requested. - A valid mode sensor signal is being sensed by the TIPM. - Proper transmit/receive messages are occurring on the CAN bus. - Ignition key switch is in the RUN position. Range shifts will be allowed only if all of the following conditions are met: - Front and rear wheel speed are within 21 km/h (13 mph). - A change in the Selector Switch state indicating a range shift has been requested. - Transmission in NEUTRAL signal must be recognized for at least 1.5 seconds ±100 msec. (Automatic transmissions only) - Proper transmit/receive messages are occurring on the CAN bus. - Clutch signal is recognized for 500 msec ± 50 msec (Manual transmissions only). - Vehicle speed is less than or equal to 4.8 km/h (3 mph). - Ignition key switch is in the RUN position. - A valid mode sensor signal is being sensed by the TIPM. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Control Module, Transfer Case > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 8629 A shift into transfer case Neutral will be allowed only if all of the following conditions are met: - Front and rear wheel speed are within 21 km/h (13 mph). - The recessed Neutral Selection switch has been depressed continuously for 4.0 seconds ±100 msec while all shift conditions have been continuously met. - Transmission in NEUTRAL signal recognized from the bus. (Automatic transmissions only) - Clutch signal is recognized from the bus (Manual transmissions only). - Proper message transmissions/receptions are occurring on the CAN bus. - Vehicle speed is less than or equal to 4.8 km/h (3 mph). - Ignition key switch is in the RUN position, engine off. - Foot Brake is applied. - A valid mode sensor signal is being sensed by the TIPM. A shift out of transfer case Neutral will be allowed only if all of the following conditions are met: - Front and rear wheel speed are within 21 km/h (13 mph). - The recessed Neutral Selection switch has been depressed continuously for 1.0 seconds ±100 msec while all shift conditions have been continuously met. - Transmission in NEUTRAL signal recognized from the bus.(Automatic transmissions only) - Clutch signal is recognized from the bus (Manual transmissions only). - Proper message transmissions/receptions are occurring on the CAN bus. - Vehicle speed is less than or equal to 4.8 km/h (3 mph). - Ignition key switch is in the RUN position. - Foot Brake is applied. - A valid mode sensor signal is being sensed by the TIPM. SHIFT SEQUENCES Once all the driver controllable conditions for the requested shift have been met, the TIPM begins a shift timer with a maximum duration of 1 second per 'D' channel transition. If the shift timer expires before the TIPM recognizes to correct mode sensor code, the shift is considered to have been blocked. The blocked shift will increment the blocked shift counter by one. The TIPM strategy for handling blocked shifts will be described later. The process the TIPM performs for the various shifts will be described first. RANGE AND MODE SHIFTS The process for performing all the range and mode shifts are the same. The following steps describe the process. - Allow time for Selector Switch debounce; 250 msec ±50 msec. - Extinguish the source gear's LED while flashing desired transfer case position's LED. - Engage the shift motor for a maximum of 1 second ±100 msec per 'D' channel transition in the destination gear's direction while monitoring the mode sensor channel transitions. - Disengage the shift motor when the correct mode sensor code is recognized. - Solidly illuminate the selected gear's LED. - Transmit a bus message that the transfer case shift is complete. - If the desired mode sensor code is not received after the shift timer expires (ie. a blocked or other condition exists), stop driving the motor and wait for 200 msec ±50 msec. The shift motor is then reversed in the direction back toward the source gear for up to 1.0 seconds ±100 msec. per 'D' channel. The TIPM waits for 2.0 seconds ±50 msec. and repeats the attempt to shift to the desired position. The exception to the preceding sequence is when a shift from 4L to 2WD/AWD is requested. If 2WD/AWD is requested from the 4L position, the transfer case is first driven to the 4H position. If the 4H position is reached, the transfer case is then driven back to the 2WD/AWD position and the shift is considered complete. If the transfer case does not reach any the 4H position, but is in the 2WD/AWD 'D' channel, or the 2WD/AWD between gear position on the 4H side of 2WD/AWD, the shift is also considered complete. SHIFT OUT OF NEUTRAL The following steps describe the process for a shift out of NEUTRAL. - Extinguish the Neutral LED. - Engage the shift motor for a maximum of 1 second ±100 msec toward the transfer case 4H mode position while monitoring the mode sensor channel transitions. - Disengage the shift motor when the correct mode sensor code is recognized. - Extinguish the Neutral LED. - Transmit a bus message that the transfer case shift is complete. - If the desired mode sensor code is not received after the shift timer expires (ie. a blocked or other condition exists), stop driving the motor and wait for 200 msec ±50 msec. The shift motor is then reversed in the direction back toward the source gear for up to 1.0 seconds 100 msec. The Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Control Module, Transfer Case > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 8630 TIPM waits for 2.0 seconds ±50 msec. and repeats the attempt to shift to the desired position. - When the Neutral button is released, if the 4H position is the desired position, the shift is complete. Illuminate the 4H LED. - Otherwise when the Neutral button is released, if all of the shift requirements are being met then engage the shift motor towards the desired position for 1 second ±100 msec per 'D' channel. (if requirements for shifting are not met, illuminate the 4H LED and flash the destination LED as an indication to the driver that all of the driver controllable shift conditions are not being met). If this requires another range or mode shift, begin the range/mode shift process. - If the desired mode sensor code is not received after the shift timer expires (i.e. a blocked or other condition exists), refer to the Blocked Shift Strategy. BLOCKED SHIFT STRATEGY When a shift is commanded, the shift motor will be driven towards its destination position, except in the case of shifting out of Neutral if 4L was selected (the transfer case will shift to the 4H position first, before proceeding to 4L). If the shift is blocked on the way to the destination, the TIPM may attempt to drive the motor back to the original position. This process will be allowed to occur 5 times. If the transfer case has reached a non-NEUTRAL 'D' channel during the shift re-attempts, the LED for the achieved gear position is illuminated and the shift attempts are stopped. To re-attempt the desired shift, the selector switch will need to be rotated to the current position until the switch debounce timer expires then a shift will need to be requested again. At the end of the 5th blocked attempt, the shift motor is driven towards the last known 'D' channel position. If this motor drive allows the transfer case to reach the 2WD/AWD 'D' channel, or the 2WD/AWD between gear position on the 4H side of 2WD/AWD, the shift is considered complete and the shift attempts are ended. If the mode sensor is in the NEUTRAL region at the expiration of the shift timer, the TIPM will continue to make the shift attempts according to the blocked shift strategy independent of whether or not the driver controlled conditions are met. For shifts from NEUTRAL, if all 5 attempts fail to reach the desired position (which by default is 4H), the motor will be driven to stall in the direction of 4H or 4L, depending on the achieved position. If the transfer case has reached the 2WD/AWD or 4L between gear position nearest the NEUTRAL positions and the shift conditions are no longer being met, the transfer case will be driven toward the corresponding 'D' channel. Otherwise, the transfer case will be driven in the direction opposite the last attempt with the desired target being 4H or 4L. If the transfer case reaches the 2WD/AWD 'D' channel when being driven in the 4H direction, then one final 1.0 second drive toward 4H is attempted. If the transfer case then reaches any of the 4H positions, the shift is considered complete and the 4H LED is illuminated. If the transfer case is still the 2WD/AWD position, the shift is considered complete and the 2WD/AWD LED is illuminated. NOTE: If after the 5th blocked shift and reversal attempt, if the transfer case position is in the NEUTRAL region, shift attempts will continue until a non-NEUTRAL 'D' channel is reached. SHIFT REVERSAL TARGETS If the shift timer expires (1 second per 'D' channel) and the transfer case has not reached the desired position, all shifts will attempt to return to their original position with the exceptions of: - If the intended shift is going to the High rail from Low and can't make it, but it can make the 2WD/AWD position, the motor stops at that position. The TIPM will not attempt to cross back over NEUTRAL if it does not have to. This means that there was a block on the first attempt to go to 4H and the transfer case has made it through NEUTRAL to a known good position, then the motor will go back only to the 2WD/4WD position and execute the remainder of the attempts from there. - For shifts out of NEUTRAL, any time a shift is commanded out of NEUTRAL, the system needs to get out. The TIPM should never go to NEUTRAL unless the driver is commanding it and all required conditions are being met ENCODER DRIFT CORRECTION Whenever a shift is completed, the TIPM stores the position in memory as the transfer case's intended position. The TIPM continuously monitors the mode sensor and if the mode sensor drifts toward into a NEUTRAL region sensor position for 2.0 seconds, the TIPM will perform a motor drive to correct the drift. The transfer case will be driven toward the intended position for 1.0 seconds 100 msec. The TIPM will wait for 2.0 seconds ±50 msec. and repeat the attempt to shift to the desired position. This will continue until the intended position is reached. SHIFT MOTOR BRAKING Two modes of shift motor braking are employed to improve shift performance, static and dynamic. Static shift motor braking is utilized under the following conditions: - Whenever the transfer case is in the 2WD/AWD or 4L 'D' channel position. - Whenever an invalid mode sensor code is present. Static motor braking is achieved by applying +12V on both shift motor wires. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Control Module, Transfer Case > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 8631 NOTE: Static Shift Motor Braking is independent of ignition key position. SHIFT ATTEMPT LIMIT To protect the transfer case system, the TIPM will impose a limit on the number of shifts that can occur over a calibrated time period. The system will monitor the number of 'D' channel segment transitions that occur in any 30 second time period. If the number of segment transitions is 30 or greater, the system will go into a default mode. The default mode of operation for shifting is that the number of allowed 'D' channel transitions permitted to occur will be 3 over each 15 second ±100 msec calibrated window of time. After 5 minutes ±100 msec, the motor can be assumed to have cooled down and the system will revert to normal operation. The following rules also apply to the shift limit: - The attempt limit will not prevent shifts coming out of NEUTRAL, they will be allowed regardless of the counter/timer. - Any shift that is in progress when the counter reaches a maximum count in time will be allowed to complete before the default mode is entered. D-channel transitions during this period will not be counted towards the default mode limit. - A block, regardless of the direction, whether towards destination or back towards reversal target (shift timer expiring), will count as a value of 2 transitions towards the 30 segment transitions to go into default mode as defined above. Current attempt limit values are 30 transitions in 30 seconds and default mode values are 3 transitions every 15 seconds for 5 minutes. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Differential, Transfer Case > Differential Fluid Transfer Case > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Maintenance - Fluid Flushing Information Differential Fluid - Transfer Case: Technical Service Bulletins Maintenance - Fluid Flushing Information NUMBER: 26-001-09 GROUP: Miscellaneous DATE: September 24, 2009 THIS BULLETIN SUPERSEDES TECHNICAL SERVICE BULLETIN 26-003-07, DATED MARCH 30, 2007, WHICH SHOULD BE REMOVED FROM YOUR FILES. THIS IS A COMPLETE REVISION AND NO ASTERISKS HAVE BEEN USED TO HIGHLIGHT REVISIONS. SUBJECT: Fluid Flushing Requirements MODELS: 2005 - 2008 (CS) Pacifica 2006 - 2009 (D1) Ram Truck (3500 Pick Up) 2010 (D2) Ram Truck (3500 Pick Up) 2007 - 2010 (DC) Ram Truck (3500 Chassis Cab) 2005 - 2009 (DH) Ram Truck (1500/2500 Pick Up) 2010 (DJ) Ram Truck (2500 Pick Up) 2005 - 2008 (DR) Ram Truck (1500/2500 Pick Up) 2009 - 2010 (DS) Ram Truck (1500) 2005 - 2009 (HB) Durango 2007 - 2009 (HG) Aspen 2009 - 2010 (JC) Journey 2007 - 2010 (JK) Wrangler 2005 - 2006 (JR) Sebring Sedan & Convertible/Stratus Sedan 2007 - 2010 (JS) Avenger/Sebring 2008 - 2010 (KK) Liberty 2007 - 2010 (KA) Nitro 2005 - 2007 (KJ) Liberty 2009 - 2010 (LC) Challenger 2005 - 2010 (LE) 300C/300C Touring (International Markets) 2005 - 2010 (LX) 300/Magnum/Charger 2007 - 2010 (MK) Compass/Patriot 2005 - 2010 (ND) Dakota 2005 - 2006 (PL) Neon 2007 - 2010 (PM) Caliber 2005 - 2010 (PT) Chrysler PT Cruiser Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Differential, Transfer Case > Differential Fluid Transfer Case > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Maintenance - Fluid Flushing Information > Page 8637 2005 - 2007 (RG) Chrysler Voyager (International Markets) 2005 - 2007 (RS) Town & Country/Caravan/Voyager 2009 - 2010 (RT) Town & Country/Grand Caravan 2005 - 2006 (TJ) Wrangler 2005 - 2006 (VA) Sprinter 2007 - 2010 (VB) Sprinter 2005 - 2010 (WH) Grand Cherokee (International Markets) 2005 - 2010 (WK) Grand Cherokee 2006 - 2010 (XH) Commander (International Markets) 2006 - 2010 (XK) Commander 2005 - 2010 (ZB) Viper 2005 - 2007 (ZH) Crossfire DISCUSSION: Chrysler Group vehicle fluid systems do NOT require regular flushing. These systems include: engine oil, transmission oil, axle lube, brake fluid, power steering fluid, and refrigerant. The only exception to this requirement are published in the vehicle maintenance schedules, e.g. engine coolant. Exceptions to this recommendation include only those instances where a failure has occurred and/or the system has become compromised, contaminated or overheated beyond the normal operating range. Chrysler Group does NOT recommend aftermarket chemicals to flush the engine, transmission, brake or steering systems. Chemicals contained in these products can damage the system elastomeric components, and contaminate the component fluid, leading to loss of system/component durability and service life. When necessary, only the original approved system fluid should be used to flush these components using teamPSE(R) approved equipment. If the engine coolant contains a considerable amount of sediment, clean and flush with Mopar Cooling System Flush, p/n 04856977, or equivalent. Follow with a thorough rinsing to remove all deposits and chemicals. Refill with a minimum of a 50% mixture of the specified coolant and distilled water. POLICY: Information Only Disclaimer: This bulletin is supplied as technical information only and is not an authorization for repair. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Fluid - Transfer Case > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Maintenance - Fluid Flushing Information Fluid - Transfer Case: Technical Service Bulletins Maintenance - Fluid Flushing Information NUMBER: 26-001-09 GROUP: Miscellaneous DATE: September 24, 2009 THIS BULLETIN SUPERSEDES TECHNICAL SERVICE BULLETIN 26-003-07, DATED MARCH 30, 2007, WHICH SHOULD BE REMOVED FROM YOUR FILES. THIS IS A COMPLETE REVISION AND NO ASTERISKS HAVE BEEN USED TO HIGHLIGHT REVISIONS. SUBJECT: Fluid Flushing Requirements MODELS: 2005 - 2008 (CS) Pacifica 2006 - 2009 (D1) Ram Truck (3500 Pick Up) 2010 (D2) Ram Truck (3500 Pick Up) 2007 - 2010 (DC) Ram Truck (3500 Chassis Cab) 2005 - 2009 (DH) Ram Truck (1500/2500 Pick Up) 2010 (DJ) Ram Truck (2500 Pick Up) 2005 - 2008 (DR) Ram Truck (1500/2500 Pick Up) 2009 - 2010 (DS) Ram Truck (1500) 2005 - 2009 (HB) Durango 2007 - 2009 (HG) Aspen 2009 - 2010 (JC) Journey 2007 - 2010 (JK) Wrangler 2005 - 2006 (JR) Sebring Sedan & Convertible/Stratus Sedan 2007 - 2010 (JS) Avenger/Sebring 2008 - 2010 (KK) Liberty 2007 - 2010 (KA) Nitro 2005 - 2007 (KJ) Liberty 2009 - 2010 (LC) Challenger 2005 - 2010 (LE) 300C/300C Touring (International Markets) 2005 - 2010 (LX) 300/Magnum/Charger 2007 - 2010 (MK) Compass/Patriot 2005 - 2010 (ND) Dakota 2005 - 2006 (PL) Neon 2007 - 2010 (PM) Caliber 2005 - 2010 (PT) Chrysler PT Cruiser Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Fluid - Transfer Case > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Maintenance - Fluid Flushing Information > Page 8642 2005 - 2007 (RG) Chrysler Voyager (International Markets) 2005 - 2007 (RS) Town & Country/Caravan/Voyager 2009 - 2010 (RT) Town & Country/Grand Caravan 2005 - 2006 (TJ) Wrangler 2005 - 2006 (VA) Sprinter 2007 - 2010 (VB) Sprinter 2005 - 2010 (WH) Grand Cherokee (International Markets) 2005 - 2010 (WK) Grand Cherokee 2006 - 2010 (XH) Commander (International Markets) 2006 - 2010 (XK) Commander 2005 - 2010 (ZB) Viper 2005 - 2007 (ZH) Crossfire DISCUSSION: Chrysler Group vehicle fluid systems do NOT require regular flushing. These systems include: engine oil, transmission oil, axle lube, brake fluid, power steering fluid, and refrigerant. The only exception to this requirement are published in the vehicle maintenance schedules, e.g. engine coolant. Exceptions to this recommendation include only those instances where a failure has occurred and/or the system has become compromised, contaminated or overheated beyond the normal operating range. Chrysler Group does NOT recommend aftermarket chemicals to flush the engine, transmission, brake or steering systems. Chemicals contained in these products can damage the system elastomeric components, and contaminate the component fluid, leading to loss of system/component durability and service life. When necessary, only the original approved system fluid should be used to flush these components using teamPSE(R) approved equipment. If the engine coolant contains a considerable amount of sediment, clean and flush with Mopar Cooling System Flush, p/n 04856977, or equivalent. Follow with a thorough rinsing to remove all deposits and chemicals. Refill with a minimum of a 50% mixture of the specified coolant and distilled water. POLICY: Information Only Disclaimer: This bulletin is supplied as technical information only and is not an authorization for repair. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Fluid - Transfer Case > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications Fluid - Transfer Case: Capacity Specifications Transfer Case Fluid Capacity NV241 GEN II ...................................................................................................................................... ......................................................... 1.6 L ( 3.4 Pt ) NV243 ................................................................ ............................................................................................................................................ 1.6 L ( 3.4 Pt ) NV244 GEN II ............................................................................................................................... ................................................................ 1.6 L ( 3.4 Pt ) NV246 ......................................................... ................................................................................................................................................... 1.9 L ( 4.0 Pt ) NV271 ................................................................................................................................... ....................................................................... 1.89 L ( 4.0 Pt ) NV273 ................................................ .......................................................................................................................................................... 1.89 L ( 4.0 Pt ) Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Fluid - Transfer Case > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications > Page 8645 Fluid - Transfer Case: Fluid Type Specifications Transfer Case Fluid Type All except NVG 246 Automatic Transfer Case Mopar ATF +4, Automatic Transmission Fluid NVG 246 Automatic Transfer Case Only Mopar PN 05179014AA, NVG 246 Automatic Transmission Fluid or equivalent Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Fluid - Transfer Case > Component Information > Description and Operation > Transfer Case - All Except NV246 Fluid - Transfer Case: Description and Operation Transfer Case - All Except NV246 TRANSFER CASE - ALL EXCEPT NV246 Recommended lubricant for the NV241 GENII, NV271, NV243, NV244 GENII, and NV273 transfer cases is Mopar(R) ATF +4, Automatic Transmission Fluid. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Fluid - Transfer Case > Component Information > Description and Operation > Transfer Case - All Except NV246 > Page 8648 Fluid - Transfer Case: Description and Operation Transfer Case - NV246 TRANSFER CASE - NV246 Recommended lubricant for the NV246 transfer case is Mopar(R) NVG 246 Automatic Transmission Fluid or equivalent. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Fluid - Transfer Case > Component Information > Service and Repair > NV241 GENII Transfer Case Fluid - Transfer Case: Service and Repair NV241 GENII Transfer Case STANDARD PROCEDURE - FLUID DRAIN AND REFILL The fill (2) and drain (3) plugs are both in the rear case. 1. Raise vehicle. 2. Position drain pan under transfer case. NOTE: It may be necessary to remove the exhaust y-pipe at the exhaust manifold to properly access the fill and drain plugs. Lowering the exhaust will allow the plugs to be accessed for torquing during installation. See: Engine, Cooling and Exhaust/Exhaust System/Exhaust Pipe/Service and Repair/Exhaust Pipe - Removal 3. Remove drain and fill plugs and drain lubricant completely. 4. Install drain plug. Tighten plug to 20-34 Nm (15-25 ft. lbs.). 5. Remove drain pan. 6. Fill transfer case to bottom edge of fill plug opening with Mopar(R) ATF +4, Automatic Transmission fluid. 7. Install and tighten fill plug to 20-34 Nm (15-25 ft. lbs.). 8. Install the exhaust y-pipe to the exhaust manifold, if removed. See: Engine, Cooling and Exhaust/Exhaust System/Exhaust Pipe/Service and Repair/Exhaust Pipe - Installation 9. Wipe any excess fluid that may have spilled onto the exhaust. 10. Lower vehicle. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Fluid - Transfer Case > Component Information > Service and Repair > NV241 GENII Transfer Case > Page 8651 Fluid - Transfer Case: Service and Repair NV271 Transfer Case STANDARD PROCEDURE - FLUID DRAIN AND REFILL The fill (1) and drain (2) plugs are both in the rear case. 1. Raise vehicle. 2. Position drain pan under transfer case. NOTE: It may be necessary to remove the exhaust y-pipe at the exhaust manifold to properly access the fill and drain plugs. Lowering the exhaust will allow the plugs to be accessed for torquing during installation. See: Engine, Cooling and Exhaust/Exhaust System/Exhaust Pipe/Service and Repair/Exhaust Pipe - Removal 3. Remove drain and fill plugs and drain lubricant completely. 4. Install drain plug. Tighten plug to 20-34 Nm (15-25 ft. lbs.). 5. Remove drain pan. 6. Fill transfer case to bottom edge of fill plug opening with Mopar(R) ATF +4, Automatic Transmission fluid. 7. Install and tighten fill plug to 20-34 Nm (15-25 ft. lbs.). 8. Install the exhaust y-pipe to the exhaust manifold, if removed. See: Engine, Cooling and Exhaust/Exhaust System/Exhaust Pipe/Service and Repair/Exhaust Pipe - Installation 9. Wipe any excess fluid that may have spilled onto the exhaust. 10. Lower vehicle. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Fluid - Transfer Case > Component Information > Service and Repair > NV241 GENII Transfer Case > Page 8652 Fluid - Transfer Case: Service and Repair NV243 Transfer Case STANDARD PROCEDURE - FLUID DRAIN AND REFILL The fill (2) and drain (3) plugs are both in the rear case. 1. Raise vehicle. 2. Position drain pan under transfer case. NOTE: It may be necessary to remove the exhaust y-pipe at the exhaust manifold to properly access the fill and drain plugs. Lowering the exhaust will allow the plugs to be accessed for torquing during installation. See: Engine, Cooling and Exhaust/Exhaust System/Exhaust Pipe/Service and Repair/Exhaust Pipe - Removal 3. Remove drain and fill plugs and drain lubricant completely. 4. Install drain plug. Tighten plug to 20-34 Nm (15-25 ft. lbs.). 5. Remove drain pan. 6. Fill transfer case to bottom edge of fill plug opening with Mopar(R) ATF +4, Automatic Transmission fluid. 7. Install and tighten fill plug to 20-34 Nm (15-25 ft. lbs.). 8. Install the exhaust y-pipe to the exhaust manifold, if removed. See: Engine, Cooling and Exhaust/Exhaust System/Exhaust Pipe/Service and Repair/Exhaust Pipe - Installation 9. Wipe any excess fluid that may have spilled onto the exhaust. 10. Lower vehicle. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Fluid - Transfer Case > Component Information > Service and Repair > NV241 GENII Transfer Case > Page 8653 Fluid - Transfer Case: Service and Repair NV244 GENII Transfer Case STANDARD PROCEDURE - FLUID DRAIN AND REFILL NOTE: The fill (2) and drain (3) plugs are both in the rear case. 1. Raise vehicle. 2. Position drain pan under transfer case. NOTE: It may be necessary to remove the exhaust y-pipe at the exhaust manifold to properly access the fill and drain plugs. Lowering the exhaust will allow the plugs to be accessed for torquing during installation. 3. Remove drain (3) and fill (2) plugs and drain lubricant completely. 4. Install drain plug (3). Tighten plug to 20-34 Nm (15-25 ft. lbs.). 5. Remove drain pan. 6. Fill transfer case to bottom edge of fill plug opening with Mopar(R) ATF +4, Automatic Transmission fluid. 7. Install and tighten fill plug (2) to 20-34 Nm (15-25 ft. lbs.). 8. Install the exhaust y-pipe to the exhaust manifold, if removed. 9. Wipe any excess fluid that may have spilled onto the exhaust. 10. Lower vehicle. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Fluid - Transfer Case > Component Information > Service and Repair > NV241 GENII Transfer Case > Page 8654 Fluid - Transfer Case: Service and Repair NV241 GENII Transfer Case STANDARD PROCEDURE - FLUID DRAIN AND REFILL The fill (2) and drain (3) plugs are both in the rear case. 1. Raise vehicle. 2. Position drain pan under transfer case. NOTE: It may be necessary to remove the exhaust y-pipe at the exhaust manifold to properly access the fill and drain plugs. Lowering the exhaust will allow the plugs to be accessed for torquing during installation. See: Engine, Cooling and Exhaust/Exhaust System/Exhaust Pipe/Service and Repair/Exhaust Pipe - Removal 3. Remove drain and fill plugs and drain lubricant completely. 4. Install drain plug. Tighten plug to 20-34 Nm (15-25 ft. lbs.). 5. Remove drain pan. 6. Fill transfer case to bottom edge of fill plug opening with Mopar(R) ATF +4, Automatic Transmission fluid. 7. Install and tighten fill plug to 20-34 Nm (15-25 ft. lbs.). 8. Install the exhaust y-pipe to the exhaust manifold, if removed. See: Engine, Cooling and Exhaust/Exhaust System/Exhaust Pipe/Service and Repair/Exhaust Pipe - Installation 9. Wipe any excess fluid that may have spilled onto the exhaust. 10. Lower vehicle. NV271 Transfer Case STANDARD PROCEDURE - FLUID DRAIN AND REFILL The fill (1) and drain (2) plugs are both in the rear case. 1. Raise vehicle. 2. Position drain pan under transfer case. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Fluid - Transfer Case > Component Information > Service and Repair > NV241 GENII Transfer Case > Page 8655 NOTE: It may be necessary to remove the exhaust y-pipe at the exhaust manifold to properly access the fill and drain plugs. Lowering the exhaust will allow the plugs to be accessed for torquing during installation. See: Engine, Cooling and Exhaust/Exhaust System/Exhaust Pipe/Service and Repair/Exhaust Pipe - Removal 3. Remove drain and fill plugs and drain lubricant completely. 4. Install drain plug. Tighten plug to 20-34 Nm (15-25 ft. lbs.). 5. Remove drain pan. 6. Fill transfer case to bottom edge of fill plug opening with Mopar(R) ATF +4, Automatic Transmission fluid. 7. Install and tighten fill plug to 20-34 Nm (15-25 ft. lbs.). 8. Install the exhaust y-pipe to the exhaust manifold, if removed. See: Engine, Cooling and Exhaust/Exhaust System/Exhaust Pipe/Service and Repair/Exhaust Pipe - Installation 9. Wipe any excess fluid that may have spilled onto the exhaust. 10. Lower vehicle. NV243 Transfer Case STANDARD PROCEDURE - FLUID DRAIN AND REFILL The fill (2) and drain (3) plugs are both in the rear case. 1. Raise vehicle. 2. Position drain pan under transfer case. NOTE: It may be necessary to remove the exhaust y-pipe at the exhaust manifold to properly access the fill and drain plugs. Lowering the exhaust will allow the plugs to be accessed for torquing during installation. See: Engine, Cooling and Exhaust/Exhaust System/Exhaust Pipe/Service and Repair/Exhaust Pipe - Removal 3. Remove drain and fill plugs and drain lubricant completely. 4. Install drain plug. Tighten plug to 20-34 Nm (15-25 ft. lbs.). 5. Remove drain pan. 6. Fill transfer case to bottom edge of fill plug opening with Mopar(R) ATF +4, Automatic Transmission fluid. 7. Install and tighten fill plug to 20-34 Nm (15-25 ft. lbs.). 8. Install the exhaust y-pipe to the exhaust manifold, if removed. See: Engine, Cooling and Exhaust/Exhaust System/Exhaust Pipe/Service and Repair/Exhaust Pipe - Installation 9. Wipe any excess fluid that may have spilled onto the exhaust. 10. Lower vehicle. NV244 GENII Transfer Case STANDARD PROCEDURE - FLUID DRAIN AND REFILL Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Fluid - Transfer Case > Component Information > Service and Repair > NV241 GENII Transfer Case > Page 8656 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Fluid - Transfer Case > Component Information > Service and Repair > NV241 GENII Transfer Case > Page 8657 ERROR: stackunderflow OFFENDING COMMAND: ~ STACK: Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Four Wheel Drive Indicator Lamp > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Four Wheel Drive Indicator Lamp: Description and Operation Description 4WD Auto Indicator 4WD AUTO INDICATOR A 4WD auto indicator is standard equipment on all instrument clusters. However, on vehicles not equipped with the optional four-wheel drive system and electronically shifted transfer case, this indicator is electronically disabled. The 4WD auto indicator is located on the right side of the instrument cluster, to the right of the oil pressure gauge. The 4WD auto indicator consists of a stencil-like cutout of the text 4WD AUTO in the opaque layer of the instrument cluster overlay. The dark outer layer of the overlay prevents the indicator from being clearly visible when it is not illuminated. An amber Light Emitting Diode (LED) behind the cutout in the opaque layer of the overlay causes the indicator to appear in amber through the translucent outer layer of the overlay when it is illuminated from behind by the LED, which is soldered onto the instrument cluster electronic circuit board. When the exterior lighting is turned ON, the illumination intensity of the 4WD auto indicator is dimmable, which is adjusted along with the cluster general illumination lighting using the panel lamps dimmer thumbwheel on the headlamp switch. The 4WD auto indicator is serviced as a unit with the instrument cluster. 4WD Indicator 4WD INDICATOR Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Four Wheel Drive Indicator Lamp > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 8662 A 4WD indicator is standard equipment on all instrument clusters. However, on vehicles not equipped with an optional four-wheel drive system, this indicator is electronically disabled. The 4WD indicator is located on the right side of the instrument cluster, to the right of the oil pressure gauge. The 4WD indicator consists of a stencil-like cutout of the text 4WD in the opaque layer of the instrument cluster overlay. The dark outer layer of the overlay prevents the indicator from being clearly visible when it is not illuminated. An amber Light Emitting Diode (LED) behind the cutout in the opaque layer of the overlay causes the indicator to appear in amber through the translucent outer layer of the overlay when it is illuminated from behind by the LED, which is soldered onto the instrument cluster electronic circuit board. When the exterior lighting is turned ON, the illumination intensity of the 4WD indicator is dimmable, which is adjusted along with the cluster general illumination lighting using the panel lamps dimmer thumbwheel on the headlamp switch. The 4WD indicator is serviced as a unit with the instrument cluster. 4 Low Indicator 4 LOW INDICATOR A 4 low indicator is standard equipment on all instrument clusters. However, on vehicles not equipped with the optional four-wheel drive system and electronically shifted transfer case, this indicator is electronically disabled. The 4 low indicator is located on the right side of the instrument cluster, to the right of the coolant temperature gauge. The 4 low indicator consists of a stencil-like cutout of the text 4 LOW in the opaque layer of the instrument cluster overlay. The dark outer layer of the overlay prevents the indicator from being clearly visible when it is not illuminated. An amber Light Emitting Diode (LED) behind the cutout in the opaque layer of the overlay causes the indicator to appear in amber through the translucent outer layer of the overlay when it is illuminated from behind by the LED, which is soldered onto the instrument cluster electronic circuit board. When the exterior lighting is turned ON, the illumination intensity of the 4 low indicator is dimmable, which is adjusted along with the cluster general illumination lighting using the panel lamps dimmer thumbwheel on the headlamp switch. The 4 low indicator is serviced as a unit with the instrument cluster. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Four Wheel Drive Indicator Lamp > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 8663 Four Wheel Drive Indicator Lamp: Description and Operation Operation 4WD Auto Indicator 4WD AUTO INDICATOR The 4WD auto indicator gives an indication to the vehicle operator when the electronic transfer case has been shifted into the 4WD auto mode. This indicator is controlled by a transistor on the instrument cluster circuit board based upon cluster programming and electronic messages received by the cluster from the Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) over the Controller Area Network (CAN) data bus. The 4WD auto indicator Light Emitting Diode (LED) is completely controlled by the instrument cluster logic circuit, and that logic will only allow this indicator to operate when the instrument cluster receives a battery current input on the fused ignition switch output (run-start) circuit. Therefore, the LED will always be OFF when the ignition switch is in any position except ON or START. The LED only illuminates when it is provided a path to ground by the instrument cluster transistor. The instrument cluster will turn ON the 4WD auto indicator for the following reasons: - 4WD Auto Indicator Lamp-On Message - Each time the cluster receives an electronic 4WD auto indicator lamp-ON message from the TIPM, the indicator will be illuminated. The indicator remains illuminated until the cluster receives a lamp-OFF message from the TIPM, or until the ignition switch is turned to the OFF position, whichever occurs first. - Actuator Test - Each time the cluster is put through the actuator test, the 4WD auto indicator will be turned ON, then OFF again during the bulb check portion of the test to confirm the functionality of the LED and the cluster control circuitry. The TIPM continually monitors the electronic transfer case through the transfer case shift motor/mode sensor assembly to determine when the 4WD auto mode is engaged. The TIPM then sends the proper lamp-ON or lamp-OFF message to the ElectroMechanical Instrument Cluster (EMIC) (also known as the Cab Compartment Node/CCN). For further diagnosis of the 4WD auto indicator or the instrument cluster circuitry that controls the LED, Refer to appropriate testing. For proper diagnosis of the transfer case shift motor/mode sensor, the TIPM, the EMIC, the CAN data bus or the electronic communication related to 4WD auto indicator operation a diagnostic scan tool is required. Refer to the appropriate diagnostic information. 4WD Indicator 4WD INDICATOR The 4WD indicator gives an indication to the vehicle operator when the transfer case has been shifted into a 4WD mode. This indicator is controlled by a transistor on the instrument cluster circuit board based upon cluster programming and electronic messages received by the cluster from the Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) over the Controller Area Network (CAN) data bus. The 4WD indicator Light Emitting Diode (LED) is completely controlled by the instrument cluster logic circuit, and that logic will only allow this indicator to operate when the instrument cluster receives a battery current input on the fused ignition switch output (run-start) circuit. Therefore, the LED will always be OFF when the ignition switch is in any position except ON or START. The LED only illuminates when it is provided a path to ground by the instrument cluster transistor. The instrument cluster will turn ON the 4WD indicator for the following reasons: - 4WD Indicator Lamp-On Message - Each time the cluster receives an electronic 4WD indicator lamp-ON message from the TIPM, the indicator will be illuminated. The indicator remains illuminated until the cluster receives a lamp-OFF message from the TIPM, or until the ignition switch is turned to the OFF position, whichever occurs first. - Actuator Test - Each time the cluster is put through the actuator test, the 4WD indicator will be turned ON, then OFF again during the bulb check portion of the test to confirm the functionality of the LED and the cluster control circuitry. The TIPM continually monitors the electronic transfer case through the transfer case shift motor/mode sensor assembly or the manual transfer case through the transfer case switch to determine when the 4WD mode is engaged. The TIPM then sends the proper lamp-ON or lamp-OFF message to the ElectroMechanical Instrument Cluster (EMIC) (also known as the Cab Compartment Node/CCN). For further diagnosis of the 4WD indicator or the instrument cluster circuitry that controls the LED, Refer to appropriate testing. For proper diagnosis of the transfer case shift motor/mode sensor, the transfer case switch, the TIPM, the EMIC, the CAN data bus or the electronic communication related to 4WD indicator operation a diagnostic scan tool is required. Refer to the appropriate diagnostic information. 4 Low Indicator 4 LOW INDICATOR The 4 low indicator gives an indication to the vehicle operator when the electronic transfer case has been shifted into the 4WD low mode. This indicator is controlled by a transistor on the instrument cluster circuit board based upon cluster programming and electronic messages received by the cluster from Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Four Wheel Drive Indicator Lamp > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 8664 the Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) over the Controller Area Network (CAN) data bus. The 4 low indicator Light Emitting Diode (LED) is completely controlled by the instrument cluster logic circuit, and that logic will only allow this indicator to operate when the instrument cluster receives a battery current input on the fused ignition switch output (run-start) circuit. Therefore, the LED will always be OFF when the ignition switch is in any position except ON or START. The LED only illuminates when it is provided a path to ground by the instrument cluster transistor. The instrument cluster will turn ON the 4 low indicator for the following reasons: - 4 Low Indicator Lamp-On Message - Each time the cluster receives an electronic 4 low indicator lamp-ON message from the TIPM, the indicator will be illuminated. The indicator remains illuminated until the cluster receives a lamp-OFF message from the TIPM, or until the ignition switch is turned to the OFF position, whichever occurs first. - Actuator Test - Each time the cluster is put through the actuator test, the 4 low indicator will be turned ON, then OFF again during the LED portion of the test to confirm the functionality of the LED and the cluster control circuitry. The TIPM continually monitors the electronic transfer case through the transfer case shift motor/mode sensor assembly to determine when the 4WD low mode is engaged. The TIPM then sends the proper lamp-ON or lamp-OFF message to the ElectroMechanical Instrument Cluster (EMIC) (also known as the Cab Compartment Node/CCN). For further diagnosis of the 4 low indicator or the instrument cluster circuitry that controls the LED, Refer to appropriate testing. For proper diagnosis of the transfer case shift motor/mode sensor, the TIPM, the EMIC, the CAN data bus or the electronic communication related to 4 low indicator operation a diagnostic scan tool is required. Refer to the appropriate diagnostic information. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Four Wheel Drive Selector Switch > Component Information > Locations Four Wheel Drive Selector Switch: Locations Component ID: 515 Component : SWITCH-TRANSFER CASE SELECTOR Connector: Name : SWITCH-TRANSFER CASE SELECTOR Color : BLACK # of pins : 10 Qualifier : (ETC) Pin Circuit Description 1 K77 20BR/WT TRANSFER CASE POSITION SENSOR INPUT 2-3 K977 20BR/WT MODE SELECT 4 E11 20OR/DB PANEL LAMPS CONTROL 5 Z905 20BK GROUND 6 G95 20VT/BR NEUTRAL INDICATOR 7 F21 20PK/DG FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) 8-9-10 - Component Location - 47 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Four Wheel Drive Selector Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 8668 Component Location - 45 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Four Wheel Drive Selector Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 8669 Component Location - 20 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Four Wheel Drive Selector Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 8670 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Four Wheel Drive Selector Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 8671 Four Wheel Drive Selector Switch: Diagrams Component ID: 515 Component : SWITCH-TRANSFER CASE SELECTOR Connector: Name : SWITCH-TRANSFER CASE SELECTOR Color : BLACK # of pins : 10 Qualifier : (ETC) Pin Circuit Description 1 K77 20BR/WT TRANSFER CASE POSITION SENSOR INPUT 2-3 K977 20BR/WT MODE SELECT 4 E11 20OR/DB PANEL LAMPS CONTROL 5 Z905 20BK GROUND 6 G95 20VT/BR NEUTRAL INDICATOR 7 F21 20PK/DG FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) 8-9-10 - Component Location - 47 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Four Wheel Drive Selector Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 8672 Component Location - 45 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Four Wheel Drive Selector Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 8673 Component Location - 20 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Four Wheel Drive Selector Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 8674 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Four Wheel Drive Selector Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > NV243 Transfer Case Four Wheel Drive Selector Switch: Description and Operation NV243 Transfer Case Description DESCRIPTION The selector switch assembly is mounted in the left side of the vehicle's Instrument Panel (IP) and consists of a rotary knob connected to a resistive network for the mode and range shift selections. Also located in this assembly is a recessed, normally open momentary switch for making shifts into and out of transfer case NEUTRAL. A pen, or similar instrument, is used to make a NEUTRAL shift selection, thus reducing the likelihood of an inadvertent shift request. The selector switch also contains four light emitting diode's (LED's) to indicate the transfer case position and whether a shift is in progress. Operation OPERATION As the position of the selector switch varies, the resistance between the Mode Sensor supply voltage pin and the Mode Sensor output will vary. Hardware, software, and calibrations within the Transfer Case Control Module (TCCM) are provided that interpret the selector switch resistance as given in the table below: For resistances between the ranges B-E shown for each valid position (T-Case NEUTRAL, 4LO, 4HI, 2WD), the TCCM may interpret the resistance as: - either of the neighboring valid positions. - as an invalid fault position. For resistances between the ranges E and F shown for 2WD and in-between positions, the TCCM may interpret the resistance as: - the 2WD position. - an invalid fault position. - a valid in-between position. For resistances between the ranges F and G shown for in-between positions and fault condition (open), the TCCM may interpret the resistance as: Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Four Wheel Drive Selector Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > NV243 Transfer Case > Page 8677 - a valid in-between position. - an invalid fault position. For resistances between the ranges A and B shown for the fault condition (short) and T-Case NEUTRAL, the TCCM may interpret the resistance as: - the T-Case NEUTRAL position. - an invalid fault position. The LED's in the selector assembly are illuminated/flashed in the following manner to indicate a particular condition or state. - A solidly illuminated LED indicates a successfully completed shift and the current operating mode of the transfer case. While a shift has been requested but not yet completed, the LED for the desired transfer case position is flashed. - A flashing operating mode LED for the desired gear indicates that a shift to that position has been requested, but all of the driver controllable conditions have not been met. This is in an attempt to notify the driver that the transmission needs to be put into NEUTRAL, the vehicle speed is too great, or some other condition outlined (other than a diagnostic failure that would prevent this shift) elsewhere See: Control Module/Description and Operation/Operation is not met. Note that this flashing will continue indefinitely until the conditions are eventually met, or the selector switch position is changed, or if diagnostic routines no longer allow the requested shift. - If the driver attempts to make a shift into transfer case NEUTRAL, and any of the driver controllable conditions are not met, the request will be ignored until all of the conditions are met or until the NEUTRAL select button is released. Additionally the neutral lamp will flash, or begin to flash while the button is depressed and operator controllable conditions are not being met. All of the LED's except the Neutral will flash if any of the operator controllable conditions for shifting are not met while the Neutral button is depressed. This "toggle" type of feature is necessary because the TCCM would interpret another request immediately after the shift into transfer case NEUTRAL has completed. - No LED's illuminated indicate a fault in the transfer case control system. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Four Wheel Drive Selector Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > NV243 Transfer Case > Page 8678 Four Wheel Drive Selector Switch: Description and Operation NV244 GENII Transfer Case Description DESCRIPTION The selector switch assembly is mounted in the left side of the vehicle's Instrument Panel (IP) and consists of a rotary knob connected to a resistive network for the mode and range shift selections. Also located in this assembly is a recessed, normally open momentary switch for making shifts into and out of transfer case NEUTRAL. A pen, or similar instrument, is used to make a NEUTRAL shift selection, thus reducing the likelihood of an inadvertent shift request. The selector switch also contains light emitting diode's (LED's) to indicate the transfer case position and whether a shift is in progress. Operation OPERATION As the position of the selector switch varies, the resistance between the Mode Sensor supply voltage pin and the Mode Sensor output will vary. Hardware, software, and calibrations within the Transfer Case Control Module (TCCM) are provided that interpret the selector switch resistance as given in the table below: For resistances between the ranges B-E shown for each valid position (T-Case NEUTRAL, 4LO, 4HI, AWD), the TCCM may interpret the resistance as: - either of the neighboring valid positions. - as an invalid fault position. For resistances between the ranges E and F shown for AWD and in-between positions, the TCCM may interpret the resistance as: - the AWD position. - an invalid fault position. - a valid in-between position. For resistances between the ranges F and G shown for in-between positions and fault condition (open), the TCCM may interpret the resistance as: - a valid in-between position. - an invalid fault position. For resistances between the ranges A and B shown for the fault condition (short) and , T-Case NEUTRAL, the TCCM may interpret the resistance as: - the T-Case NEUTRAL position. - an invalid fault position. The LED's in the selector assembly are illuminated/flashed in the following manner to indicate a particular condition or state. - A solidly illuminated LED indicates a successfully completed shift and the current operating mode of the transfer case. While a shift has been requested but not yet completed, the LED for the desired transfer case position is flashed. - A flashing operating mode LED for the desired gear indicates that a shift to that position has been requested, but all of the driver controllable conditions have not been met. This is in an attempt to notify the driver that the transmission needs to be put into NEUTRAL, the vehicle speed is too great, or some other condition outlined (other than a diagnostic failure that would prevent this shift) elsewhere See: Control Module/Description and Operation/Operation is not met. Note that this flashing will continue indefinitely until the conditions are eventually met, Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Four Wheel Drive Selector Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > NV243 Transfer Case > Page 8679 or the selector switch position is changed, or if diagnostic routines no longer allow the requested shift. - If the driver attempts to make a shift into transfer case NEUTRAL, and any of the driver controllable conditions are not met, the request will be ignored until all of the conditions are met or until the NEUTRAL select button is released. Additionally the neutral lamp will flash, or begin to flash while the button is depressed and operator controllable conditions are not being met. All of the LED's except the Neutral will flash if any of the operator controllable conditions for shifting are not met while the Neutral button is depressed. This "toggle" type of feature is necessary because the TCCM would interpret another request immediately after the shift into transfer case NEUTRAL has completed. - No LED's illuminated indicate a fault in the transfer case control system. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Four Wheel Drive Selector Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > NV243 Transfer Case > Page 8680 Four Wheel Drive Selector Switch: Description and Operation NV246 Transfer Case Description DESCRIPTION The selector switch assembly is mounted in the left side of the vehicle's Instrument Panel (IP) and consists of a rotary knob connected to a resistive network for the mode and range shift selections. Also located in this assembly is a recessed, normally open momentary switch for making shifts into and out of transfer case NEUTRAL. A pen, or similar instrument, is used to make a NEUTRAL shift selection, thus reducing the likelihood of an inadvertent shift request. The selector switch also contains light emitting diode's (LED's) to indicate the transfer case position and whether a shift is in progress. Operation OPERATION As the position of the selector switch varies, the resistance between the Mode Sensor supply voltage pin and the Mode Sensor output will vary. Hardware, software, and calibrations within the Transfer Case Control Module (TCCM) are provided that interpret the selector switch resistance as given in the table below: For resistances between the ranges B-E shown for each valid position (T-Case NEUTRAL, 4LO, 4HI, AWD), the TCCM may interpret the resistance as: - either of the neighboring valid positions. - as an invalid fault position. For resistances between the ranges E and F shown for AWD and in-between positions, the TCCM may interpret the resistance as: - the AWD position. - an invalid fault position. - a valid in-between position. For resistances between the ranges F and G shown for in-between positions and fault condition (open), the TCCM may interpret the resistance as: - a valid in-between position. - an invalid fault position. For resistances between the ranges A and B shown for the fault condition (short) and , T-Case NEUTRAL, the TCCM may interpret the resistance as: - the T-Case NEUTRAL position. - an invalid fault position. The LED's in the selector assembly are illuminated/flashed in the following manner to indicate a particular condition or state. - A solidly illuminated LED indicates a successfully completed shift and the current operating mode of the transfer case. While a shift has been requested but not yet completed, the LED for the desired transfer case position is flashed. - A flashing operating mode LED for the desired gear indicates that a shift to that position has been requested, but all of the driver controllable conditions have not been met. This is in an attempt to notify the driver that the transmission needs to be put into NEUTRAL, the vehicle speed is too great, or some other condition outlined (other than a diagnostic failure that would prevent this shift) elsewhere See: Control Module/Description and Operation/Operation is not met. Note that this flashing will continue indefinitely until the conditions are eventually met, Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Four Wheel Drive Selector Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > NV243 Transfer Case > Page 8681 or the selector switch position is changed, or if diagnostic routines no longer allow the requested shift. - If the driver attempts to make a shift into transfer case NEUTRAL, and any of the driver controllable conditions are not met, the request will be ignored until all of the conditions are met or until the NEUTRAL select button is released. Additionally the neutral lamp will flash, or begin to flash while the button is depressed and operator controllable conditions are not being met. All of the LED's except the Neutral will flash if any of the operator controllable conditions for shifting are not met while the Neutral button is depressed. This "toggle" type of feature is necessary because the TCCM would interpret another request immediately after the shift into transfer case NEUTRAL has completed. - No LED's illuminated indicate a fault in the transfer case control system. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Four Wheel Drive Selector Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > NV243 Transfer Case > Page 8682 Four Wheel Drive Selector Switch: Description and Operation NV273 Transfer Case Description DESCRIPTION The selector switch assembly is mounted in the left side of the vehicle's Instrument Panel (IP) and consists of a rotary knob connected to a resistive network for the mode and range shift selections. Also located in this assembly is a recessed, normally open momentary switch for making shifts into and out of transfer case NEUTRAL. A pen, or similar instrument, is used to make a NEUTRAL shift selection, thus reducing the likelihood of an inadvertent shift request. The selector switch also contains four light emitting diode's (LED's) to indicate the transfer case position and whether a shift is in progress. Operation OPERATION As the position of the selector switch varies, the resistance between the Mode Sensor supply voltage pin and the Mode Sensor output will vary. Hardware, software, and calibrations within the Transfer Case Control Module (TCCM) are provided that interpret the selector switch resistance as given in the table below: For resistances between the ranges B-E shown for each valid position (T-Case NEUTRAL, 4LO, 4HI, 2WD), the TCCM may interpret the resistance as: - either of the neighboring valid positions. - as an invalid fault position. For resistances between the ranges E and F shown for 2WD and in-between positions, the TCCM may interpret the resistance as: - the 2WD position. - an invalid fault position. - a valid in-between position. For resistances between the ranges F and G shown for in-between positions and fault condition (open), the TCCM may interpret the resistance as: Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Four Wheel Drive Selector Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > NV243 Transfer Case > Page 8683 - a valid in-between position. - an invalid fault position. For resistances between the ranges A and B shown for the fault condition (short) and T-Case NEUTRAL, the TCCM may interpret the resistance as: - the T-Case NEUTRAL position. - an invalid fault position. The LED's in the selector assembly are illuminated/flashed in the following manner to indicate a particular condition or state. - A solidly illuminated LED indicates a successfully completed shift and the current operating mode of the transfer case. While a shift has been requested but not yet completed, the LED for the desired transfer case position is flashed. - A flashing operating mode LED for the desired gear indicates that a shift to that position has been requested, but all of the driver controllable conditions have not been met. This is in an attempt to notify the driver that the transmission needs to be put into NEUTRAL, the vehicle speed is too great, or some other condition outlined (other than a diagnostic failure that would prevent this shift) elsewhere See: Control Module/Description and Operation/Operation is not met. Note that this flashing will continue indefinitely until the conditions are eventually met, or the selector switch position is changed, or if diagnostic routines no longer allow the requested shift. - If the driver attempts to make a shift into transfer case NEUTRAL, and any of the driver controllable conditions are not met, the request will be ignored until all of the conditions are met or until the NEUTRAL select button is released. Additionally the neutral lamp will flash, or begin to flash while the button is depressed and operator controllable conditions are not being met. All of the LED's except the Neutral will flash if any of the operator controllable conditions for shifting are not met while the Neutral button is depressed. This "toggle" type of feature is necessary because the TCCM would interpret another request immediately after the shift into transfer case NEUTRAL has completed. - No LED's illuminated indicate a fault in the transfer case control system. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Gear Sensor/Switch, Transfer Case > Component Information > Locations > Assembly-Shift Motor/Mode Sensor Gear Sensor/Switch: Locations Assembly-Shift Motor/Mode Sensor Component ID: 18 Component : ASSEMBLY-SHIFT MOTOR/MODE SENSOR Connector: Name : ASSEMBLY-SHIFT MOTOR/MODE SENSOR Color : BLACK # of pins : 8 Qualifier : (RFE FULL TIME ETC) Pin Circuit Description 1 T103 20YL/OR 5 VOLT SUPPLY 2 D201 20WT/DG MODE SENSOR A 3 G180 20VT/YL SENSOR RETURN 4 T101 16DG SHIFT MOTOR CONTROL B 5 T102 16YL SHIFT MOTOR CONTROL A 6 A940 20RD FUSED B(+) 7 T300 20YL/GY T-CASE MOTOR BRAKE SIGNAL 8-Component Location - 21 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Gear Sensor/Switch, Transfer Case > Component Information > Locations > Assembly-Shift Motor/Mode Sensor > Page 8688 Component Location - 24 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Gear Sensor/Switch, Transfer Case > Component Information > Locations > Assembly-Shift Motor/Mode Sensor > Page 8689 Component Location - 26 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Gear Sensor/Switch, Transfer Case > Component Information > Locations > Assembly-Shift Motor/Mode Sensor > Page 8690 Connector: Name : ASSEMBLY-SHIFT MOTOR/MODE SENSOR Color : DK. GRAY # of pins : 8 Qualifier : (RFE PART TIME ETC/RE ETC) Pin Circuit Description 1 T103 20YL/OR 5 VOLT SUPPLY 2 D201 20WT/DG MODE SENSOR A 3 G180 20VT/YL SENSOR RETURN 4 T101 16DG SHIFT MOTOR CONTROL B Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Gear Sensor/Switch, Transfer Case > Component Information > Locations > Assembly-Shift Motor/Mode Sensor > Page 8691 5 T102 16YL SHIFT MOTOR CONTROL A 6 A918 20RD FUSED B(+) 7-8-Component Location - 21 Component Location - 24 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Gear Sensor/Switch, Transfer Case > Component Information > Locations > Assembly-Shift Motor/Mode Sensor > Page 8692 Component Location - 26 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Gear Sensor/Switch, Transfer Case > Component Information > Locations > Assembly-Shift Motor/Mode Sensor > Page 8693 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Gear Sensor/Switch, Transfer Case > Component Information > Locations > Assembly-Shift Motor/Mode Sensor > Page 8694 Gear Sensor/Switch: Locations Sensor-Transfer Case Position Component ID: 443 Component : SENSOR-TRANSFER CASE POSITION Connector: Name : SENSOR-TRANSFER CASE POSITION Color : # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (MTC EXCEPT POWER WAGON) Pin Circuit Description 1 D201 20WT/DG MODE SENSOR A Pin Circuit Description 1 D201 18WT/DG MODE SENSOR A 2 Z955 20BK GROUND 2 Z955 18BK GROUND 2 Z901 20BK GROUND Component Location - 22 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Gear Sensor/Switch, Transfer Case > Component Information > Locations > Assembly-Shift Motor/Mode Sensor > Page 8695 Component Location - 25 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Gear Sensor/Switch, Transfer Case > Component Information > Locations > Assembly-Shift Motor/Mode Sensor > Page 8696 Connector: Name : SENSOR-TRANSFER CASE POSITION Color : # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (MTC POWER WAGON) Pin Circuit Description 1 D201 18WT/DG MODE SENSOR A Pin Circuit Description 1 D201 20WT/DG MODE SENSOR A Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Gear Sensor/Switch, Transfer Case > Component Information > Locations > Assembly-Shift Motor/Mode Sensor > Page 8697 2 G180 18VT/YL SENSOR RETURN 2 G180 20VT/YL SENSOR RETURN Component Location - 22 Component Location - 25 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Gear Sensor/Switch, Transfer Case > Component Information > Locations > Assembly-Shift Motor/Mode Sensor > Page 8698 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Gear Sensor/Switch, Transfer Case > Component Information > Diagrams > Assembly-Shift Motor/Mode Sensor Gear Sensor/Switch: Diagrams Assembly-Shift Motor/Mode Sensor Component ID 14 Component ID: 14 Component : ASSEMBLY-SHIFT MOTOR/MODE SENSOR Connector: Name : ASSEMBLY-SHIFT MOTOR/MODE SENSOR Color : BLACK # of pins : 8 Qualifier : (RFE FULL TIME ETC) Pin Circuit Description 1 T103 20YL/OR 5 VOLT SUPPLY 2 D201 20WT/DG MODE SENSOR A 3 G180 20VT/YL SENSOR RETURN 4 T101 16DG SHIFT MOTOR CONTROL B 5 T102 16YL SHIFT MOTOR CONTROL A 6 A940 20RD FUSED B(+) 7 T300 20YL/GY T-CASE MOTOR BRAKE SIGNAL 8-Connector: Name : ASSEMBLY-SHIFT MOTOR/MODE SENSOR Color : DK. GRAY # of pins : 8 Qualifier : (RFE PART TIME ETC/RE ETC) Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Gear Sensor/Switch, Transfer Case > Component Information > Diagrams > Assembly-Shift Motor/Mode Sensor > Page 8701 Pin Circuit Description 1 T103 20YL/OR 5 VOLT SUPPLY 2 D201 20WT/DG MODE SENSOR A 3 G180 20VT/YL SENSOR RETURN 4 T101 16DG SHIFT MOTOR CONTROL B 5 T102 16YL SHIFT MOTOR CONTROL A 6 A918 20RD FUSED B(+) 7-8-Component ID 18 Component ID: 18 Component : ASSEMBLY-SHIFT MOTOR/MODE SENSOR Connector: Name : ASSEMBLY-SHIFT MOTOR/MODE SENSOR Color : BLACK # of pins : 8 Qualifier : (RFE FULL TIME ETC) Pin Circuit Description 1 T103 20YL/OR 5 VOLT SUPPLY 2 D201 20WT/DG MODE SENSOR A 3 G180 20VT/YL SENSOR RETURN 4 T101 16DG SHIFT MOTOR CONTROL B 5 T102 16YL SHIFT MOTOR CONTROL A Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Gear Sensor/Switch, Transfer Case > Component Information > Diagrams > Assembly-Shift Motor/Mode Sensor > Page 8702 6 A940 20RD FUSED B(+) 7 T300 20YL/GY T-CASE MOTOR BRAKE SIGNAL 8-Component Location - 21 Component Location - 24 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Gear Sensor/Switch, Transfer Case > Component Information > Diagrams > Assembly-Shift Motor/Mode Sensor > Page 8703 Component Location - 26 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Gear Sensor/Switch, Transfer Case > Component Information > Diagrams > Assembly-Shift Motor/Mode Sensor > Page 8704 Connector: Name : ASSEMBLY-SHIFT MOTOR/MODE SENSOR Color : DK. GRAY # of pins : 8 Qualifier : (RFE PART TIME ETC/RE ETC) Pin Circuit Description 1 T103 20YL/OR 5 VOLT SUPPLY 2 D201 20WT/DG MODE SENSOR A 3 G180 20VT/YL SENSOR RETURN 4 T101 16DG SHIFT MOTOR CONTROL B Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Gear Sensor/Switch, Transfer Case > Component Information > Diagrams > Assembly-Shift Motor/Mode Sensor > Page 8705 5 T102 16YL SHIFT MOTOR CONTROL A 6 A918 20RD FUSED B(+) 7-8-Component Location - 21 Component Location - 24 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Gear Sensor/Switch, Transfer Case > Component Information > Diagrams > Assembly-Shift Motor/Mode Sensor > Page 8706 Component Location - 26 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Gear Sensor/Switch, Transfer Case > Component Information > Diagrams > Assembly-Shift Motor/Mode Sensor > Page 8707 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Gear Sensor/Switch, Transfer Case > Component Information > Diagrams > Assembly-Shift Motor/Mode Sensor > Page 8708 Gear Sensor/Switch: Diagrams Sensor-Transfer Case Position Component ID: 443 Component : SENSOR-TRANSFER CASE POSITION Connector: Name : SENSOR-TRANSFER CASE POSITION Color : # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (MTC EXCEPT POWER WAGON) Pin Circuit Description 1 D201 20WT/DG MODE SENSOR A Pin Circuit Description 1 D201 18WT/DG MODE SENSOR A 2 Z955 20BK GROUND 2 Z955 18BK GROUND 2 Z901 20BK GROUND Component Location - 22 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Gear Sensor/Switch, Transfer Case > Component Information > Diagrams > Assembly-Shift Motor/Mode Sensor > Page 8709 Component Location - 25 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Gear Sensor/Switch, Transfer Case > Component Information > Diagrams > Assembly-Shift Motor/Mode Sensor > Page 8710 Connector: Name : SENSOR-TRANSFER CASE POSITION Color : # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (MTC POWER WAGON) Pin Circuit Description 1 D201 18WT/DG MODE SENSOR A Pin Circuit Description 1 D201 20WT/DG MODE SENSOR A Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Gear Sensor/Switch, Transfer Case > Component Information > Diagrams > Assembly-Shift Motor/Mode Sensor > Page 8711 2 G180 18VT/YL SENSOR RETURN 2 G180 20VT/YL SENSOR RETURN Component Location - 22 Component Location - 25 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Gear Sensor/Switch, Transfer Case > Component Information > Diagrams > Assembly-Shift Motor/Mode Sensor > Page 8712 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Gear Sensor/Switch, Transfer Case > Component Information > Description and Operation > NV244 GENII Transfer Case Gear Sensor/Switch: Description and Operation NV244 GENII Transfer Case Description DESCRIPTION The transfer case mode sensor is an electronic device whose output can be interpreted to indicate the shift motor shaft's rotary position. The sensor consists of a magnetic ring and four Hall Effect Transistors to create a 4 channel digital device (non-contacting) whose output converts the motor shaft position into a coded signal. The TCCM must supply 5VDC (+/- 0.5v) to the sensor and monitor the shift motor position. The four channels are denoted A, B, C, and D. The sensor is mechanically linked to the shaft of the cam which causes the transfer case shifting. The mode sensor draws less than 53 mA. Operation OPERATION During normal vehicle operation, the Transfer Case Control Module (TCCM) monitors the mode sensor outputs at least every 250 (+/-50) milliseconds when the shift motor is stationary and 400 microseconds when the shift motor is active. A mode sensor signal between 3.8 Volts and 0.8 Volts is considered to be undefined. Refer to SECTOR ANGLES vs.TRANSFER CASE POSITION for the relative angles of the transfer case shift sector versus the interpreted transfer case gear operating mode. Refer to MODE SENSOR CHANNEL STATES for the sensor codes returned to the TCCM for each transfer case mode sensor position. The various between gears positions can also be referred as the transfer case's coarse position. These coarse positions come into play during shift attempts. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Gear Sensor/Switch, Transfer Case > Component Information > Description and Operation > NV244 GENII Transfer Case > Page 8715 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Gear Sensor/Switch, Transfer Case > Component Information > Description and Operation > NV244 GENII Transfer Case > Page 8716 Gear Sensor/Switch: Description and Operation NV246 Transfer Case Description DESCRIPTION The transfer case mode sensor is an electronic device whose output can be interpreted to indicate the shift motor shaft's rotary position. The sensor consists of a magnetic ring and four Hall Effect Transistors to create a 4 channel digital device (non-contacting) whose output converts the motor shaft position into a coded signal. The FCM must supply 5VDC (+/- 0.5v) to the sensor and monitor the shift motor position. The four channels are denoted A, B, C, and D. The sensor is mechanically linked to the shaft of the cam which causes the transfer case shifting. The mode sensor draws less than 53 mA. Operation OPERATION During normal vehicle operation, the Front Control Module (FCM) monitors the mode sensor outputs at least every 250 (+/-50) milliseconds when the shift motor is stationary and 400 microseconds when the shift motor is active. A mode sensor signal between 3.8 Volts and 0.8 Volts is considered to be undefined. Refer to for the relative angles of the transfer case shift sector versus the interpreted transfer case gear operating mode. Refer to the sensor codes returned to the FCM for each transfer case mode sensor position. The various between gears positions can also be referred as the transfer case's coarse position. These coarse positions come into play during shift attempts. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Gear Sensor/Switch, Transfer Case > Component Information > Description and Operation > NV244 GENII Transfer Case > Page 8717 Gear Sensor/Switch: Description and Operation NV271 Transfer Case Description DESCRIPTION The transfer case position sensor is an electronic device whose output can be interpreted to indicate the transfer case's current operating mode. The sensor consists of a five position, resistive multiplexed circuit which returns a specific resistance value to the Powertrain Control Module (PCM) for each transfer case operating mode. The sensor is located on the top of the transfer case, just left of the transfer case centerline and rides against the sector plate roostercomb. The PCM supplies 5VDC (+/- 0.5V) to the sensor and monitors the return voltage to determine the sector plate, and therefore the transfer case, position. Operation OPERATION Position Sensor Linear Movement During normal vehicle operation, the Powertrain Control Module (PCM) monitors the transfer case position sensor return voltage to determine the operating mode of the transfer case. Refer to the Operating Mode Versus Resistance table for the correct resistance for each position. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Gear Sensor/Switch, Transfer Case > Component Information > Description and Operation > NV244 GENII Transfer Case > Page 8718 Gear Sensor/Switch: Description and Operation NV243 Transfer Case Description DESCRIPTION The transfer case mode sensor (1) is an electronic device whose output can be interpreted to indicate the shift motor shaft's rotary position. The sensor consists of a magnetic ring and four Hall Effect Transistors to create a 4 channel digital device (non-contacting) whose output converts the motor shaft position into a coded signal. The TCCM must supply 5VDC (+/- 0.5v) to the sensor and monitor the shift motor position. The four channels are denoted A, B, C, and D. The sensor is mechanically linked to the shaft of the cam which causes the transfer case shifting. The mode sensor draws less than 53 mA. Operation OPERATION During normal vehicle operation, the Transfer Case Control Module (TCCM) monitors the mode sensor outputs at least every 250 (+/-50) milliseconds when the shift motor is stationary and 400 microseconds when the shift motor is active. A mode sensor signal between 3.8 Volts and 0.8 Volts is considered to be undefined. Refer to SECTOR ANGLES vs.TRANSFER CASE POSITION for the relative angles of the transfer case shift sector versus the interpreted transfer case gear operating mode. Refer to MODE SENSOR CHANNEL STATES for the sensor codes returned to the TCCM for each transfer case mode sensor position. The various between gears positions can also be referred as the transfer case's coarse position. These coarse positions come into play during shift attempts. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Gear Sensor/Switch, Transfer Case > Component Information > Description and Operation > NV244 GENII Transfer Case > Page 8719 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Gear Sensor/Switch, Transfer Case > Component Information > Description and Operation > NV244 GENII Transfer Case > Page 8720 Gear Sensor/Switch: Description and Operation NV273 Transfer Case Description DESCRIPTION The transfer case mode sensor (1) is an electronic device whose output can be interpreted to indicate the shift motor shaft's rotary position. The sensor consists of a magnetic ring and four Hall Effect Transistors to create a 4 channel digital device (non-contacting) whose output converts the motor shaft position into a coded signal. The TCCM must supply 5VDC (+/- 0.5v) to the sensor and monitor the shift motor position. The four channels are denoted A, B, C, and D. The sensor is mechanically linked to the shaft of the cam which causes the transfer case shifting. The mode sensor draws less than 53 mA. Operation OPERATION During normal vehicle operation, the Transfer Case Control Module (TCCM) monitors the mode sensor outputs at least every 250 (+/-50) milliseconds when the shift motor is stationary and 400 microseconds when the shift motor is active. A mode sensor signal between 3.8 Volts and 0.8 Volts is considered to be undefined. Refer to SECTOR ANGLES vs.TRANSFER CASE POSITION for the relative angles of the transfer case shift sector versus the interpreted transfer case gear operating mode. Refer to MODE SENSOR CHANNEL STATES for the sensor codes returned to the TCCM for each transfer case mode sensor position. The various between gears positions can also be referred as the transfer case's coarse position. These coarse positions come into play during shift attempts. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Gear Sensor/Switch, Transfer Case > Component Information > Description and Operation > NV244 GENII Transfer Case > Page 8721 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Gear Sensor/Switch, Transfer Case > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Gear Sensor/Switch: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL 1. Raise and support the vehicle. 2. Disengage the transfer case position sensor connector from the position sensor. 3. Remove the position sensor from the transfer case. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Gear Sensor/Switch, Transfer Case > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 8724 Gear Sensor/Switch: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION 1. Inspect the o-ring seal on the transfer case position sensor. Replace the o-ring if necessary. 2. Install the transfer case position sensor into the transfer case. Torque the sensor to 27 Nm (20 ft.lbs.). 3. Engage the transfer case position sensor connector to the position sensor. 4. Lower vehicle. 5. Verify proper sensor operation. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Lamps and Indicators - Transfer Case > Four Wheel Drive Indicator Lamp > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Four Wheel Drive Indicator Lamp: Description and Operation Description 4WD Auto Indicator 4WD AUTO INDICATOR A 4WD auto indicator is standard equipment on all instrument clusters. However, on vehicles not equipped with the optional four-wheel drive system and electronically shifted transfer case, this indicator is electronically disabled. The 4WD auto indicator is located on the right side of the instrument cluster, to the right of the oil pressure gauge. The 4WD auto indicator consists of a stencil-like cutout of the text 4WD AUTO in the opaque layer of the instrument cluster overlay. The dark outer layer of the overlay prevents the indicator from being clearly visible when it is not illuminated. An amber Light Emitting Diode (LED) behind the cutout in the opaque layer of the overlay causes the indicator to appear in amber through the translucent outer layer of the overlay when it is illuminated from behind by the LED, which is soldered onto the instrument cluster electronic circuit board. When the exterior lighting is turned ON, the illumination intensity of the 4WD auto indicator is dimmable, which is adjusted along with the cluster general illumination lighting using the panel lamps dimmer thumbwheel on the headlamp switch. The 4WD auto indicator is serviced as a unit with the instrument cluster. 4WD Indicator 4WD INDICATOR Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Lamps and Indicators - Transfer Case > Four Wheel Drive Indicator Lamp > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 8730 A 4WD indicator is standard equipment on all instrument clusters. However, on vehicles not equipped with an optional four-wheel drive system, this indicator is electronically disabled. The 4WD indicator is located on the right side of the instrument cluster, to the right of the oil pressure gauge. The 4WD indicator consists of a stencil-like cutout of the text 4WD in the opaque layer of the instrument cluster overlay. The dark outer layer of the overlay prevents the indicator from being clearly visible when it is not illuminated. An amber Light Emitting Diode (LED) behind the cutout in the opaque layer of the overlay causes the indicator to appear in amber through the translucent outer layer of the overlay when it is illuminated from behind by the LED, which is soldered onto the instrument cluster electronic circuit board. When the exterior lighting is turned ON, the illumination intensity of the 4WD indicator is dimmable, which is adjusted along with the cluster general illumination lighting using the panel lamps dimmer thumbwheel on the headlamp switch. The 4WD indicator is serviced as a unit with the instrument cluster. 4 Low Indicator 4 LOW INDICATOR A 4 low indicator is standard equipment on all instrument clusters. However, on vehicles not equipped with the optional four-wheel drive system and electronically shifted transfer case, this indicator is electronically disabled. The 4 low indicator is located on the right side of the instrument cluster, to the right of the coolant temperature gauge. The 4 low indicator consists of a stencil-like cutout of the text 4 LOW in the opaque layer of the instrument cluster overlay. The dark outer layer of the overlay prevents the indicator from being clearly visible when it is not illuminated. An amber Light Emitting Diode (LED) behind the cutout in the opaque layer of the overlay causes the indicator to appear in amber through the translucent outer layer of the overlay when it is illuminated from behind by the LED, which is soldered onto the instrument cluster electronic circuit board. When the exterior lighting is turned ON, the illumination intensity of the 4 low indicator is dimmable, which is adjusted along with the cluster general illumination lighting using the panel lamps dimmer thumbwheel on the headlamp switch. The 4 low indicator is serviced as a unit with the instrument cluster. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Lamps and Indicators - Transfer Case > Four Wheel Drive Indicator Lamp > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 8731 Four Wheel Drive Indicator Lamp: Description and Operation Operation 4WD Auto Indicator 4WD AUTO INDICATOR The 4WD auto indicator gives an indication to the vehicle operator when the electronic transfer case has been shifted into the 4WD auto mode. This indicator is controlled by a transistor on the instrument cluster circuit board based upon cluster programming and electronic messages received by the cluster from the Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) over the Controller Area Network (CAN) data bus. The 4WD auto indicator Light Emitting Diode (LED) is completely controlled by the instrument cluster logic circuit, and that logic will only allow this indicator to operate when the instrument cluster receives a battery current input on the fused ignition switch output (run-start) circuit. Therefore, the LED will always be OFF when the ignition switch is in any position except ON or START. The LED only illuminates when it is provided a path to ground by the instrument cluster transistor. The instrument cluster will turn ON the 4WD auto indicator for the following reasons: - 4WD Auto Indicator Lamp-On Message - Each time the cluster receives an electronic 4WD auto indicator lamp-ON message from the TIPM, the indicator will be illuminated. The indicator remains illuminated until the cluster receives a lamp-OFF message from the TIPM, or until the ignition switch is turned to the OFF position, whichever occurs first. - Actuator Test - Each time the cluster is put through the actuator test, the 4WD auto indicator will be turned ON, then OFF again during the bulb check portion of the test to confirm the functionality of the LED and the cluster control circuitry. The TIPM continually monitors the electronic transfer case through the transfer case shift motor/mode sensor assembly to determine when the 4WD auto mode is engaged. The TIPM then sends the proper lamp-ON or lamp-OFF message to the ElectroMechanical Instrument Cluster (EMIC) (also known as the Cab Compartment Node/CCN). For further diagnosis of the 4WD auto indicator or the instrument cluster circuitry that controls the LED, Refer to appropriate testing. For proper diagnosis of the transfer case shift motor/mode sensor, the TIPM, the EMIC, the CAN data bus or the electronic communication related to 4WD auto indicator operation a diagnostic scan tool is required. Refer to the appropriate diagnostic information. 4WD Indicator 4WD INDICATOR The 4WD indicator gives an indication to the vehicle operator when the transfer case has been shifted into a 4WD mode. This indicator is controlled by a transistor on the instrument cluster circuit board based upon cluster programming and electronic messages received by the cluster from the Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) over the Controller Area Network (CAN) data bus. The 4WD indicator Light Emitting Diode (LED) is completely controlled by the instrument cluster logic circuit, and that logic will only allow this indicator to operate when the instrument cluster receives a battery current input on the fused ignition switch output (run-start) circuit. Therefore, the LED will always be OFF when the ignition switch is in any position except ON or START. The LED only illuminates when it is provided a path to ground by the instrument cluster transistor. The instrument cluster will turn ON the 4WD indicator for the following reasons: - 4WD Indicator Lamp-On Message - Each time the cluster receives an electronic 4WD indicator lamp-ON message from the TIPM, the indicator will be illuminated. The indicator remains illuminated until the cluster receives a lamp-OFF message from the TIPM, or until the ignition switch is turned to the OFF position, whichever occurs first. - Actuator Test - Each time the cluster is put through the actuator test, the 4WD indicator will be turned ON, then OFF again during the bulb check portion of the test to confirm the functionality of the LED and the cluster control circuitry. The TIPM continually monitors the electronic transfer case through the transfer case shift motor/mode sensor assembly or the manual transfer case through the transfer case switch to determine when the 4WD mode is engaged. The TIPM then sends the proper lamp-ON or lamp-OFF message to the ElectroMechanical Instrument Cluster (EMIC) (also known as the Cab Compartment Node/CCN). For further diagnosis of the 4WD indicator or the instrument cluster circuitry that controls the LED, Refer to appropriate testing. For proper diagnosis of the transfer case shift motor/mode sensor, the transfer case switch, the TIPM, the EMIC, the CAN data bus or the electronic communication related to 4WD indicator operation a diagnostic scan tool is required. Refer to the appropriate diagnostic information. 4 Low Indicator 4 LOW INDICATOR The 4 low indicator gives an indication to the vehicle operator when the electronic transfer case has been shifted into the 4WD low mode. This indicator is controlled by a transistor on the instrument cluster circuit board based upon cluster programming and electronic messages received by the cluster from Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Lamps and Indicators - Transfer Case > Four Wheel Drive Indicator Lamp > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 8732 the Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) over the Controller Area Network (CAN) data bus. The 4 low indicator Light Emitting Diode (LED) is completely controlled by the instrument cluster logic circuit, and that logic will only allow this indicator to operate when the instrument cluster receives a battery current input on the fused ignition switch output (run-start) circuit. Therefore, the LED will always be OFF when the ignition switch is in any position except ON or START. The LED only illuminates when it is provided a path to ground by the instrument cluster transistor. The instrument cluster will turn ON the 4 low indicator for the following reasons: - 4 Low Indicator Lamp-On Message - Each time the cluster receives an electronic 4 low indicator lamp-ON message from the TIPM, the indicator will be illuminated. The indicator remains illuminated until the cluster receives a lamp-OFF message from the TIPM, or until the ignition switch is turned to the OFF position, whichever occurs first. - Actuator Test - Each time the cluster is put through the actuator test, the 4 low indicator will be turned ON, then OFF again during the LED portion of the test to confirm the functionality of the LED and the cluster control circuitry. The TIPM continually monitors the electronic transfer case through the transfer case shift motor/mode sensor assembly to determine when the 4WD low mode is engaged. The TIPM then sends the proper lamp-ON or lamp-OFF message to the ElectroMechanical Instrument Cluster (EMIC) (also known as the Cab Compartment Node/CCN). For further diagnosis of the 4 low indicator or the instrument cluster circuitry that controls the LED, Refer to appropriate testing. For proper diagnosis of the transfer case shift motor/mode sensor, the TIPM, the EMIC, the CAN data bus or the electronic communication related to 4 low indicator operation a diagnostic scan tool is required. Refer to the appropriate diagnostic information. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Lamps and Indicators - Transfer Case > Malfunction Indicator Lamp - Transfer Case > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Malfunction Indicator Lamp - Transfer Case: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION A service 4WD indicator is standard equipment on all instrument clusters. However, on vehicles not equipped with the optional four-wheel drive system and electronically shifted transfer case, this indicator is electronically disabled. This indicator is located in the lower portion of the tachometer dial face in the instrument cluster overlay. The service 4WD indicator consists of a stencil-like cutout of the text SVC 4WD in the opaque layer of the instrument cluster overlay. The dark outer layer of the overlay prevents the indicator from being clearly visible when it is not illuminated. An amber Light Emitting Diode (LED) behind the cutout in the opaque layer of the overlay causes the indicator to appear in amber through the translucent outer layer of the overlay when it is illuminated from behind by the LED, which is soldered onto the instrument cluster electronic circuit board. The service 4WD indicator is serviced as a unit with the instrument cluster. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Lamps and Indicators - Transfer Case > Malfunction Indicator Lamp - Transfer Case > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 8737 Malfunction Indicator Lamp - Transfer Case: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The service 4WD indicator gives an indication to the vehicle operator when the Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) has recorded a Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) for an electronic transfer case circuit or component malfunction. This indicator is controlled by a transistor on the instrument cluster circuit board based upon cluster programming and electronic messages received by the cluster from the TIPM over the Controller Area Network (CAN) data bus. The service 4WD indicator Light Emitting Diode (LED) is completely controlled by the instrument cluster logic circuit, and that logic will only allow this indicator to operate when the instrument cluster receives a battery current input on the fused ignition switch output (run-start) circuit. Therefore, the LED will always be OFF when the ignition switch is in any position except ON or START. The LED only illuminates when it is provided a path to ground by the instrument cluster transistor. The instrument cluster will turn ON the service 4WD indicator for the following reasons: - Bulb Test - Each time the ignition switch is turned to the ON position the service 4WD indicator is illuminated for about two seconds as a bulb test. - Service 4WD Indicator Lamp-On Message - Each time the cluster receives an electronic service 4WD indicator lamp-ON message from the TIPM, the service 4WD indicator will be illuminated. The indicator remains illuminated until the cluster receives a lamp-OFF message from the TIPM, or until the ignition switch is turned to the OFF position, whichever occurs first. - Communication Error - If the cluster receives no lamp-ON or lamp-OFF messages from the TIPM for 10 seconds the service 4WD indicator is illuminated by the cluster to indicate a loss of TIPM communication. The indicator remains controlled and illuminated by the cluster until a valid message is received from the TIPM. - Actuator Test - Each time the cluster is put through the actuator test, the service 4WD indicator will be turned ON, then OFF again during the bulb check portion of the test to confirm the functionality of the LED and the cluster control circuitry. The TIPM continually monitors the electronic transfer case control circuits and transfer case shift motor/mode sensor assembly to determine the condition of the system. The TIPM then sends the proper lamp-ON or lamp-OFF message to the ElectroMechanical Instrument Cluster (EMIC) (also known as the Cab Compartment Node/CCN). For further diagnosis of the service 4WD indicator or the instrument cluster circuitry that controls the LED, Refer to appropriate testing. For proper diagnosis of the TIPM, the EMIC, the CAN data bus or the electronic communication related to service 4WD indicator operation a diagnostic scan tool is required. Refer to the appropriate diagnostic information. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Malfunction Indicator Lamp - Transfer Case > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Malfunction Indicator Lamp - Transfer Case: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION A service 4WD indicator is standard equipment on all instrument clusters. However, on vehicles not equipped with the optional four-wheel drive system and electronically shifted transfer case, this indicator is electronically disabled. This indicator is located in the lower portion of the tachometer dial face in the instrument cluster overlay. The service 4WD indicator consists of a stencil-like cutout of the text SVC 4WD in the opaque layer of the instrument cluster overlay. The dark outer layer of the overlay prevents the indicator from being clearly visible when it is not illuminated. An amber Light Emitting Diode (LED) behind the cutout in the opaque layer of the overlay causes the indicator to appear in amber through the translucent outer layer of the overlay when it is illuminated from behind by the LED, which is soldered onto the instrument cluster electronic circuit board. The service 4WD indicator is serviced as a unit with the instrument cluster. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Malfunction Indicator Lamp - Transfer Case > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 8742 Malfunction Indicator Lamp - Transfer Case: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The service 4WD indicator gives an indication to the vehicle operator when the Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) has recorded a Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) for an electronic transfer case circuit or component malfunction. This indicator is controlled by a transistor on the instrument cluster circuit board based upon cluster programming and electronic messages received by the cluster from the TIPM over the Controller Area Network (CAN) data bus. The service 4WD indicator Light Emitting Diode (LED) is completely controlled by the instrument cluster logic circuit, and that logic will only allow this indicator to operate when the instrument cluster receives a battery current input on the fused ignition switch output (run-start) circuit. Therefore, the LED will always be OFF when the ignition switch is in any position except ON or START. The LED only illuminates when it is provided a path to ground by the instrument cluster transistor. The instrument cluster will turn ON the service 4WD indicator for the following reasons: - Bulb Test - Each time the ignition switch is turned to the ON position the service 4WD indicator is illuminated for about two seconds as a bulb test. - Service 4WD Indicator Lamp-On Message - Each time the cluster receives an electronic service 4WD indicator lamp-ON message from the TIPM, the service 4WD indicator will be illuminated. The indicator remains illuminated until the cluster receives a lamp-OFF message from the TIPM, or until the ignition switch is turned to the OFF position, whichever occurs first. - Communication Error - If the cluster receives no lamp-ON or lamp-OFF messages from the TIPM for 10 seconds the service 4WD indicator is illuminated by the cluster to indicate a loss of TIPM communication. The indicator remains controlled and illuminated by the cluster until a valid message is received from the TIPM. - Actuator Test - Each time the cluster is put through the actuator test, the service 4WD indicator will be turned ON, then OFF again during the bulb check portion of the test to confirm the functionality of the LED and the cluster control circuitry. The TIPM continually monitors the electronic transfer case control circuits and transfer case shift motor/mode sensor assembly to determine the condition of the system. The TIPM then sends the proper lamp-ON or lamp-OFF message to the ElectroMechanical Instrument Cluster (EMIC) (also known as the Cab Compartment Node/CCN). For further diagnosis of the service 4WD indicator or the instrument cluster circuitry that controls the LED, Refer to appropriate testing. For proper diagnosis of the TIPM, the EMIC, the CAN data bus or the electronic communication related to service 4WD indicator operation a diagnostic scan tool is required. Refer to the appropriate diagnostic information. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Relays and Modules - Transfer Case > Control Module, Transfer Case > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 197 Control Module: Locations Component ID 197 Component ID: 197 Component : MODULE-FINAL DRIVE CONTROL Connector: Name : MODULE-FINAL DRIVE CONTROL Color : # of pins : 50 Qualifier : (POWER WAGON) A-A1 A121 14RD/YL FUSED B(+) A2 T520 16YL/OR FRONT LOCKER SOURCE A3 T526 16YL/WT REAR LOCKER SOURCE A4 Z935 16BK GROUND A5 Z935 16BK GROUND A6 T524 16YL/LG FRONT LOCKER RETURN A7 T528 16YL/GY REAR LOCKER RETURN A8 T521 20YL/BK LOCKER SENSOR SUPPLY A9 T537 20YL/LG LOCKER SWITCH SUPPLY A10 T523 20YL/BK LOCKER SENSOR SUPPLY A11 - A12 - A13 D65 20WT/LG CAN C BUS (+) A14 D64 20WT/LB CAN C BUS (-) B T527 20YL/TN REAR LOCKER SENSOR SENSE B1 T522 20YL/LB FRONT LOCKER SENSOR SENSE B2 T535 20YL/BR LOCKER SWITCH SENSE B3 - B4 - B5 - B6 - B7 F960 20PK/LG FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) B8 T536 20YL/WT SWITCH SUPPLY B9 - B10 - B11 T531 20YL/TN STABILIZER BAR SWITCH SENSE B12 T532 20YL/GY LOCKER OPEN ILLUMINATION SENSE B13 T533 20YL/LB LOCKER REAR ILLUMINATION SENSE B14 T534 20YL LOCKER FR/RR ILLUMINATION SENSE C T530 20YL/DG STABILIZER BAR DISENGAGE ILLUMINATION SENSE C1 T529 20YL/LG STABILIZER BAR ENGAGE ILLUMINATION SENSE C2 - C3 - - Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Relays and Modules - Transfer Case > Control Module, Transfer Case > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 197 > Page 8748 C4 - C5 - C6 - C7 - C8 - C9 - C10 - C11 - C12 - C13 - C14 - - D-E-F-G-H-Component Location - 29 Component Location - 28 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Relays and Modules - Transfer Case > Control Module, Transfer Case > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 197 > Page 8749 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Relays and Modules - Transfer Case > Control Module, Transfer Case > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 197 > Page 8750 Control Module: Locations Component ID 206 Component ID: 206 Component : MODULE-FINAL DRIVE CONTROL Connector: Name : MODULE-FINAL DRIVE CONTROL Color : # of pins : 50 Qualifier : (POWER WAGON) A-A1 A121 14RD/YL FUSED B(+) A2 T520 16YL/OR FRONT LOCKER SOURCE A3 T526 16YL/WT REAR LOCKER SOURCE A4 Z935 16BK GROUND A5 Z935 16BK GROUND A6 T524 16YL/LG FRONT LOCKER RETURN A7 T528 16YL/GY REAR LOCKER RETURN A8 T521 20YL/BK LOCKER SENSOR SUPPLY A9 T537 20YL/LG LOCKER SWITCH SUPPLY A10 T523 20YL/BK LOCKER SENSOR SUPPLY A11 - A12 - A13 D65 20WT/LG CAN C BUS (+) A14 D64 20WT/LB CAN C BUS (-) B T527 20YL/TN REAR LOCKER SENSOR SENSE B1 T522 20YL/LB FRONT LOCKER SENSOR SENSE B2 T535 20YL/BR LOCKER SWITCH SENSE B3 - B4 - B5 - B6 - B7 F960 20PK/LG FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) B8 T536 20YL/WT SWITCH SUPPLY B9 - B10 - B11 T531 20YL/TN STABILIZER BAR SWITCH SENSE B12 T532 20YL/GY LOCKER OPEN ILLUMINATION SENSE B13 T533 20YL/LB LOCKER REAR ILLUMINATION SENSE B14 T534 20YL LOCKER FR/RR ILLUMINATION SENSE C T530 20YL/DG STABILIZER BAR DISENGAGE ILLUMINATION SENSE C1 T529 20YL/LG STABILIZER BAR ENGAGE ILLUMINATION SENSE C2 - C3 - - Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Relays and Modules - Transfer Case > Control Module, Transfer Case > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 197 > Page 8751 C4 - C5 - C6 - C7 - C8 - C9 - C10 - C11 - C12 - C13 - C14 - - D-E-F-G-H-Component Location - 29 Component Location - 28 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Relays and Modules - Transfer Case > Control Module, Transfer Case > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 197 > Page 8752 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Relays and Modules - Transfer Case > Control Module, Transfer Case > Component Information > Diagrams > Component ID 197 Control Module: Diagrams Component ID 197 Component ID: 197 Component : MODULE-FINAL DRIVE CONTROL Connector: Name : MODULE-FINAL DRIVE CONTROL Color : # of pins : 50 Qualifier : (POWER WAGON) A-A1 A121 14RD/YL FUSED B(+) A2 T520 16YL/OR FRONT LOCKER SOURCE A3 T526 16YL/WT REAR LOCKER SOURCE A4 Z935 16BK GROUND A5 Z935 16BK GROUND A6 T524 16YL/LG FRONT LOCKER RETURN A7 T528 16YL/GY REAR LOCKER RETURN A8 T521 20YL/BK LOCKER SENSOR SUPPLY A9 T537 20YL/LG LOCKER SWITCH SUPPLY A10 T523 20YL/BK LOCKER SENSOR SUPPLY A11 - A12 - A13 D65 20WT/LG CAN C BUS (+) A14 D64 20WT/LB CAN C BUS (-) B T527 20YL/TN REAR LOCKER SENSOR SENSE B1 T522 20YL/LB FRONT LOCKER SENSOR SENSE B2 T535 20YL/BR LOCKER SWITCH SENSE B3 - B4 - B5 - B6 - B7 F960 20PK/LG FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) B8 T536 20YL/WT SWITCH SUPPLY B9 - B10 - B11 T531 20YL/TN STABILIZER BAR SWITCH SENSE B12 T532 20YL/GY LOCKER OPEN ILLUMINATION SENSE B13 T533 20YL/LB LOCKER REAR ILLUMINATION SENSE B14 T534 20YL LOCKER FR/RR ILLUMINATION SENSE C T530 20YL/DG STABILIZER BAR DISENGAGE ILLUMINATION SENSE C1 T529 20YL/LG STABILIZER BAR ENGAGE ILLUMINATION SENSE C2 - C3 - - Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Relays and Modules - Transfer Case > Control Module, Transfer Case > Component Information > Diagrams > Component ID 197 > Page 8755 C4 - C5 - C6 - C7 - C8 - C9 - C10 - C11 - C12 - C13 - C14 - - D-E-F-G-H-Component Location - 29 Component Location - 28 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Relays and Modules - Transfer Case > Control Module, Transfer Case > Component Information > Diagrams > Component ID 197 > Page 8756 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Relays and Modules - Transfer Case > Control Module, Transfer Case > Component Information > Diagrams > Component ID 197 > Page 8757 Control Module: Diagrams Component ID 206 Component ID: 206 Component : MODULE-FINAL DRIVE CONTROL Connector: Name : MODULE-FINAL DRIVE CONTROL Color : # of pins : 50 Qualifier : (POWER WAGON) A-A1 A121 14RD/YL FUSED B(+) A2 T520 16YL/OR FRONT LOCKER SOURCE A3 T526 16YL/WT REAR LOCKER SOURCE A4 Z935 16BK GROUND A5 Z935 16BK GROUND A6 T524 16YL/LG FRONT LOCKER RETURN A7 T528 16YL/GY REAR LOCKER RETURN A8 T521 20YL/BK LOCKER SENSOR SUPPLY A9 T537 20YL/LG LOCKER SWITCH SUPPLY A10 T523 20YL/BK LOCKER SENSOR SUPPLY A11 - A12 - A13 D65 20WT/LG CAN C BUS (+) A14 D64 20WT/LB CAN C BUS (-) B T527 20YL/TN REAR LOCKER SENSOR SENSE B1 T522 20YL/LB FRONT LOCKER SENSOR SENSE B2 T535 20YL/BR LOCKER SWITCH SENSE B3 - B4 - B5 - B6 - B7 F960 20PK/LG FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) B8 T536 20YL/WT SWITCH SUPPLY B9 - B10 - B11 T531 20YL/TN STABILIZER BAR SWITCH SENSE B12 T532 20YL/GY LOCKER OPEN ILLUMINATION SENSE B13 T533 20YL/LB LOCKER REAR ILLUMINATION SENSE B14 T534 20YL LOCKER FR/RR ILLUMINATION SENSE C T530 20YL/DG STABILIZER BAR DISENGAGE ILLUMINATION SENSE C1 T529 20YL/LG STABILIZER BAR ENGAGE ILLUMINATION SENSE C2 - C3 - - Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Relays and Modules - Transfer Case > Control Module, Transfer Case > Component Information > Diagrams > Component ID 197 > Page 8758 C4 - C5 - C6 - C7 - C8 - C9 - C10 - C11 - C12 - C13 - C14 - - D-E-F-G-H-Component Location - 29 Component Location - 28 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Relays and Modules - Transfer Case > Control Module, Transfer Case > Component Information > Diagrams > Component ID 197 > Page 8759 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Relays and Modules - Transfer Case > Control Module, Transfer Case > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Control Module: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The Transfer Case Control Module (TCCM) functionality now resides in the Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM), refer to the TIPM information for location and additional information. The TIPM controls the 4X4 transfer case shift functions via the actuation of a shift motor and utilizing the feedback of a mode sensor assembly. Communication is via the CAN bus. Inputs include user selectable 4X4 modes that include 2WD, AWD, 4HI, 4LO, and Neutral (selections vary with the specific transfer case). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Relays and Modules - Transfer Case > Control Module, Transfer Case > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 8762 Control Module: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The Transfer Case Control Module (TCCM) functionality in the Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) utilizes the input from the transfer case mounted mode sensor, the instrument panel mounted selector switch, and the following information from the vehicle's CAN bus to determine if a shift is allowed. - Engine RPM and Vehicle Speed - Diagnostic Requests - Manual Transmission and Brake Applied - PRNDL - Ignition Status - ABS Messages Once the TIP determines that a requested shift is allowed, it actuates the bi-directional shift motor as necessary to achieve the desired transfer case operating mode. The TIPM also monitors the mode sensor while controlling the shift motor to determine the status of the shift attempt. Several items can cause the requested shift not to be completed. If the TIPM has recognized a fault (DTC) of some variety, it will begin operation in one of four Functionality Levels. These levels are: - Level Zero - Normal Operation. - Level One - Only Mode Shifts Are Allowed. - Level Two - Only Mode Shifts and Shifts Into LOW Are Allowed (No Neutral Shifts Are Allowed). - Level Three - No Shifts Are Allowed The TIPM can also be operating in one of three possible power modes. These power modes are: - Full Power Mode is the normal operational mode of the module. This mode is achieved by normal CAN bus traffic being present and the ignition being in the RUN position. Reduced Power Mode will be entered when the ignition has been powered off. In this state, the module will shut down power supplied to external devices, and to electronic interface inputs and outputs. From this state the module can enter either Sleep Mode or Full Power Mode. To enter this mode, the module must receive an ignition message denoting that the ignition is off, or not receive any messages for 5 ±0.5 seconds. To exit this mode, the module must receive one ignition message that denotes that the ignition is in the RUN position. - Sleep Mode will be entered, from the Reduced Power Mode, when no CAN traffic has been sensed for 20 ±1 seconds. If during Sleep Mode the module detects CAN bus traffic, it will revert to the Reduced Power mode while monitoring for ignition messages. It will remain in this state as long as there is traffic other than run or start messages, and will return to Sleep mode if the bus goes without traffic for 20 ±1 seconds. SHIFT REQUIREMENTS If the TIPM is in full power mode and at functionality level zero, it uses the following criteria to determine if a shift is allowed. If any of the driver controllable conditions are not met once the shift request is recognized, the TIPM will solidly illuminate the source position's LED and flash the desired position's LED for all shifts except NEUTRAL. The NEUTRAL shift LED strategy will be discussed later. Mode shifts will be allowed regardless of transmission gear or vehicle speed, whenever the following conditions are met: - Front and rear wheel speed are within 21 km/h (13 mph). - A change in the Selector switch state indicates that a mode shift has been requested. - A valid mode sensor signal is being sensed by the TIPM. - Proper transmit/receive messages are occurring on the CAN bus. - Ignition key switch is in the RUN position. Range shifts will be allowed only if all of the following conditions are met: - Front and rear wheel speed are within 21 km/h (13 mph). - A change in the Selector Switch state indicating a range shift has been requested. - Transmission in NEUTRAL signal must be recognized for at least 1.5 seconds ±100 msec. (Automatic transmissions only) - Proper transmit/receive messages are occurring on the CAN bus. - Clutch signal is recognized for 500 msec ± 50 msec (Manual transmissions only). - Vehicle speed is less than or equal to 4.8 km/h (3 mph). - Ignition key switch is in the RUN position. - A valid mode sensor signal is being sensed by the TIPM. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Relays and Modules - Transfer Case > Control Module, Transfer Case > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 8763 A shift into transfer case Neutral will be allowed only if all of the following conditions are met: - Front and rear wheel speed are within 21 km/h (13 mph). - The recessed Neutral Selection switch has been depressed continuously for 4.0 seconds ±100 msec while all shift conditions have been continuously met. - Transmission in NEUTRAL signal recognized from the bus. (Automatic transmissions only) - Clutch signal is recognized from the bus (Manual transmissions only). - Proper message transmissions/receptions are occurring on the CAN bus. - Vehicle speed is less than or equal to 4.8 km/h (3 mph). - Ignition key switch is in the RUN position, engine off. - Foot Brake is applied. - A valid mode sensor signal is being sensed by the TIPM. A shift out of transfer case Neutral will be allowed only if all of the following conditions are met: - Front and rear wheel speed are within 21 km/h (13 mph). - The recessed Neutral Selection switch has been depressed continuously for 1.0 seconds ±100 msec while all shift conditions have been continuously met. - Transmission in NEUTRAL signal recognized from the bus.(Automatic transmissions only) - Clutch signal is recognized from the bus (Manual transmissions only). - Proper message transmissions/receptions are occurring on the CAN bus. - Vehicle speed is less than or equal to 4.8 km/h (3 mph). - Ignition key switch is in the RUN position. - Foot Brake is applied. - A valid mode sensor signal is being sensed by the TIPM. SHIFT SEQUENCES Once all the driver controllable conditions for the requested shift have been met, the TIPM begins a shift timer with a maximum duration of 1 second per 'D' channel transition. If the shift timer expires before the TIPM recognizes to correct mode sensor code, the shift is considered to have been blocked. The blocked shift will increment the blocked shift counter by one. The TIPM strategy for handling blocked shifts will be described later. The process the TIPM performs for the various shifts will be described first. RANGE AND MODE SHIFTS The process for performing all the range and mode shifts are the same. The following steps describe the process. - Allow time for Selector Switch debounce; 250 msec ±50 msec. - Extinguish the source gear's LED while flashing desired transfer case position's LED. - Engage the shift motor for a maximum of 1 second ±100 msec per 'D' channel transition in the destination gear's direction while monitoring the mode sensor channel transitions. - Disengage the shift motor when the correct mode sensor code is recognized. - Solidly illuminate the selected gear's LED. - Transmit a bus message that the transfer case shift is complete. - If the desired mode sensor code is not received after the shift timer expires (ie. a blocked or other condition exists), stop driving the motor and wait for 200 msec ±50 msec. The shift motor is then reversed in the direction back toward the source gear for up to 1.0 seconds ±100 msec. per 'D' channel. The TIPM waits for 2.0 seconds ±50 msec. and repeats the attempt to shift to the desired position. The exception to the preceding sequence is when a shift from 4L to 2WD/AWD is requested. If 2WD/AWD is requested from the 4L position, the transfer case is first driven to the 4H position. If the 4H position is reached, the transfer case is then driven back to the 2WD/AWD position and the shift is considered complete. If the transfer case does not reach any the 4H position, but is in the 2WD/AWD 'D' channel, or the 2WD/AWD between gear position on the 4H side of 2WD/AWD, the shift is also considered complete. SHIFT OUT OF NEUTRAL The following steps describe the process for a shift out of NEUTRAL. - Extinguish the Neutral LED. - Engage the shift motor for a maximum of 1 second ±100 msec toward the transfer case 4H mode position while monitoring the mode sensor channel transitions. - Disengage the shift motor when the correct mode sensor code is recognized. - Extinguish the Neutral LED. - Transmit a bus message that the transfer case shift is complete. - If the desired mode sensor code is not received after the shift timer expires (ie. a blocked or other condition exists), stop driving the motor and wait for 200 msec ±50 msec. The shift motor is then reversed in the direction back toward the source gear for up to 1.0 seconds 100 msec. The Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Relays and Modules - Transfer Case > Control Module, Transfer Case > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 8764 TIPM waits for 2.0 seconds ±50 msec. and repeats the attempt to shift to the desired position. - When the Neutral button is released, if the 4H position is the desired position, the shift is complete. Illuminate the 4H LED. - Otherwise when the Neutral button is released, if all of the shift requirements are being met then engage the shift motor towards the desired position for 1 second ±100 msec per 'D' channel. (if requirements for shifting are not met, illuminate the 4H LED and flash the destination LED as an indication to the driver that all of the driver controllable shift conditions are not being met). If this requires another range or mode shift, begin the range/mode shift process. - If the desired mode sensor code is not received after the shift timer expires (i.e. a blocked or other condition exists), refer to the Blocked Shift Strategy. BLOCKED SHIFT STRATEGY When a shift is commanded, the shift motor will be driven towards its destination position, except in the case of shifting out of Neutral if 4L was selected (the transfer case will shift to the 4H position first, before proceeding to 4L). If the shift is blocked on the way to the destination, the TIPM may attempt to drive the motor back to the original position. This process will be allowed to occur 5 times. If the transfer case has reached a non-NEUTRAL 'D' channel during the shift re-attempts, the LED for the achieved gear position is illuminated and the shift attempts are stopped. To re-attempt the desired shift, the selector switch will need to be rotated to the current position until the switch debounce timer expires then a shift will need to be requested again. At the end of the 5th blocked attempt, the shift motor is driven towards the last known 'D' channel position. If this motor drive allows the transfer case to reach the 2WD/AWD 'D' channel, or the 2WD/AWD between gear position on the 4H side of 2WD/AWD, the shift is considered complete and the shift attempts are ended. If the mode sensor is in the NEUTRAL region at the expiration of the shift timer, the TIPM will continue to make the shift attempts according to the blocked shift strategy independent of whether or not the driver controlled conditions are met. For shifts from NEUTRAL, if all 5 attempts fail to reach the desired position (which by default is 4H), the motor will be driven to stall in the direction of 4H or 4L, depending on the achieved position. If the transfer case has reached the 2WD/AWD or 4L between gear position nearest the NEUTRAL positions and the shift conditions are no longer being met, the transfer case will be driven toward the corresponding 'D' channel. Otherwise, the transfer case will be driven in the direction opposite the last attempt with the desired target being 4H or 4L. If the transfer case reaches the 2WD/AWD 'D' channel when being driven in the 4H direction, then one final 1.0 second drive toward 4H is attempted. If the transfer case then reaches any of the 4H positions, the shift is considered complete and the 4H LED is illuminated. If the transfer case is still the 2WD/AWD position, the shift is considered complete and the 2WD/AWD LED is illuminated. NOTE: If after the 5th blocked shift and reversal attempt, if the transfer case position is in the NEUTRAL region, shift attempts will continue until a non-NEUTRAL 'D' channel is reached. SHIFT REVERSAL TARGETS If the shift timer expires (1 second per 'D' channel) and the transfer case has not reached the desired position, all shifts will attempt to return to their original position with the exceptions of: - If the intended shift is going to the High rail from Low and can't make it, but it can make the 2WD/AWD position, the motor stops at that position. The TIPM will not attempt to cross back over NEUTRAL if it does not have to. This means that there was a block on the first attempt to go to 4H and the transfer case has made it through NEUTRAL to a known good position, then the motor will go back only to the 2WD/4WD position and execute the remainder of the attempts from there. - For shifts out of NEUTRAL, any time a shift is commanded out of NEUTRAL, the system needs to get out. The TIPM should never go to NEUTRAL unless the driver is commanding it and all required conditions are being met ENCODER DRIFT CORRECTION Whenever a shift is completed, the TIPM stores the position in memory as the transfer case's intended position. The TIPM continuously monitors the mode sensor and if the mode sensor drifts toward into a NEUTRAL region sensor position for 2.0 seconds, the TIPM will perform a motor drive to correct the drift. The transfer case will be driven toward the intended position for 1.0 seconds 100 msec. The TIPM will wait for 2.0 seconds ±50 msec. and repeat the attempt to shift to the desired position. This will continue until the intended position is reached. SHIFT MOTOR BRAKING Two modes of shift motor braking are employed to improve shift performance, static and dynamic. Static shift motor braking is utilized under the following conditions: - Whenever the transfer case is in the 2WD/AWD or 4L 'D' channel position. - Whenever an invalid mode sensor code is present. Static motor braking is achieved by applying +12V on both shift motor wires. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Relays and Modules - Transfer Case > Control Module, Transfer Case > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 8765 NOTE: Static Shift Motor Braking is independent of ignition key position. SHIFT ATTEMPT LIMIT To protect the transfer case system, the TIPM will impose a limit on the number of shifts that can occur over a calibrated time period. The system will monitor the number of 'D' channel segment transitions that occur in any 30 second time period. If the number of segment transitions is 30 or greater, the system will go into a default mode. The default mode of operation for shifting is that the number of allowed 'D' channel transitions permitted to occur will be 3 over each 15 second ±100 msec calibrated window of time. After 5 minutes ±100 msec, the motor can be assumed to have cooled down and the system will revert to normal operation. The following rules also apply to the shift limit: - The attempt limit will not prevent shifts coming out of NEUTRAL, they will be allowed regardless of the counter/timer. - Any shift that is in progress when the counter reaches a maximum count in time will be allowed to complete before the default mode is entered. D-channel transitions during this period will not be counted towards the default mode limit. - A block, regardless of the direction, whether towards destination or back towards reversal target (shift timer expiring), will count as a value of 2 transitions towards the 30 segment transitions to go into default mode as defined above. Current attempt limit values are 30 transitions in 30 seconds and default mode values are 3 transitions every 15 seconds for 5 minutes. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Seals and Gaskets, Transfer Case > System Information > Service and Repair > NV241 GENII Transfer Case Seals and Gaskets: Service and Repair NV241 GENII Transfer Case Removal REMOVAL 1. Raise and support vehicle. 2. Remove rear propeller shaft. See: Drive/Propeller Shafts, Bearings and Joints/Drive/Propeller Shaft/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement 3. Using a suitable pry tool or slide-hammer mounted screw, remove the extension housing seal. Installation INSTALLATION 1. Clean fluid residue from sealing surface and inspect for defects. 2. Using Seal Installer D-163 (2) and Universal Handle C-4171 (1), install seal in extension housing. 3. Install propeller shaft. See: Drive/Propeller Shafts, Bearings and Joints/Drive/Propeller Shaft/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement 4. Verify proper transfer case fluid level. 5. Lower vehicle. Removal REMOVAL 1. Remove the front propeller shaft See: Drive/Propeller Shafts, Bearings and Joints/Drive/Propeller Shaft/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement . 2. Remove the front propeller shaft seal boot (1) retaining clamp (2). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Seals and Gaskets, Transfer Case > System Information > Service and Repair > NV241 GENII Transfer Case > Page 8770 3. Remove the front propeller shaft seal boot (1). 4. Remove the front output shaft seal slinger (1) by bending (2) the slinger ears away from the transfer case. 5. Using a suitable pry tool (2), remove the slinger (1) from the output shaft using care not to damage the shaft. 6. Using a screw and a slide hammer, remove the front output shaft seal. Installation INSTALLATION 1. Install the new front output shaft seal with Seal Installer MB991168A. 2. Install the front output shaft seal slinger with Oil Slinger Installer 8840. Install the slinger onto the shaft until the tool contacts the rear of the output shaft. 3. Install a new seal boot clamp onto the seal boot. 4. Install the seal boot and clamp onto the slinger hub and tighten the clamp with Axle Clamp Installer C-4975A. 5. Install front propeller shaft See: Drive/Propeller Shafts, Bearings and Joints/Drive/Propeller Shaft/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement . Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Seals and Gaskets, Transfer Case > System Information > Service and Repair > NV241 GENII Transfer Case > Page 8771 Seals and Gaskets: Service and Repair NV243 Transfer Case Removal REMOVAL 1. Raise and support vehicle. 2. Remove rear propeller shaft. See: Drive/Propeller Shafts, Bearings and Joints/Drive/Propeller Shaft/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement 3. Using a suitable pry tool or slide-hammer mounted screw, remove the extension housing seal. Installation INSTALLATION 1. Clean fluid residue from sealing surface and inspect for defects. 2. Using Seal Installer D-163 (2) and Universal Handle C-4171 (1), install seal in extension housing. 3. Install propeller shaft. See: Drive/Propeller Shafts, Bearings and Joints/Drive/Propeller Shaft/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement 4. Verify proper transfer case fluid level. 5. Lower vehicle. Removal REMOVAL 1. Remove the front propeller shaft See: Drive/Propeller Shafts, Bearings and Joints/Drive/Propeller Shaft/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement . 2. Remove the front propeller shaft seal boot (1) retaining clamp (2). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Seals and Gaskets, Transfer Case > System Information > Service and Repair > NV241 GENII Transfer Case > Page 8772 3. Remove the front propeller shaft seal boot (1). 4. Remove the front output shaft seal slinger (1) by bending (2) the slinger ears away from the transfer case. 5. Using a suitable pry tool (2), remove the slinger (1) from the output shaft using care not to damage the shaft. 6. Using a screw and a slide hammer, remove the front output shaft seal. Installation INSTALLATION 1. Install the new front output shaft seal with Seal Installer MB991168A. 2. Install the front output shaft seal slinger with Oil Slinger Installer 8840. Install the slinger onto the shaft until the tool contacts the rear of the output shaft. 3. Install a new seal boot clamp onto the seal boot. 4. Install the seal boot and clamp onto the slinger hub and tighten the clamp with Axle Clamp Installer C-4975A. 5. Install front propeller shaft See: Drive/Propeller Shafts, Bearings and Joints/Drive/Propeller Shaft/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement . Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Seals and Gaskets, Transfer Case > System Information > Service and Repair > NV241 GENII Transfer Case > Page 8773 Seals and Gaskets: Service and Repair NV244 GENII Transfer Case Removal REMOVAL 1. Raise and support vehicle. 2. Remove rear propeller shaft. See: Drive/Propeller Shafts, Bearings and Joints/Drive/Propeller Shaft/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement 3. Using a suitable pry tool or slide-hammer mounted screw, remove the extension housing seal. Installation INSTALLATION 1. Clean fluid residue from sealing surface and inspect for defects. 2. Using Seal Installer D-163 (2) and Universal Handle C-4171 (1), install seal in extension housing. 3. Install propeller shaft. See: Drive/Propeller Shafts, Bearings and Joints/Drive/Propeller Shaft/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement 4. Verify proper transfer case fluid level. 5. Lower vehicle. Removal REMOVAL 1. Remove the front propeller shaft See: Drive/Propeller Shafts, Bearings and Joints/Drive/Propeller Shaft/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement . 2. Remove the front propeller shaft seal boot retaining clamp (2). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Seals and Gaskets, Transfer Case > System Information > Service and Repair > NV241 GENII Transfer Case > Page 8774 3. Remove the front propeller shaft seal boot (1) from the front output shaft seal slinger (2). 4. Remove the front output shaft seal slinger (1) by bending the slinger away (2) from the transfer case. 5. Using a suitable pry tool, remove the slinger from the output shaft using care not to damage the shaft. 6. Using a screw and a slide hammer, remove the front output shaft seal. Installation INSTALLATION 1. Install the new front output shaft seal with Seal Installer MB991168A. 2. Install the front output shaft seal slinger with Oil Slinger Installer 8840. Install the slinger onto the shaft until the tool contacts the rear of the output shaft. 3. Install a new seal boot clamp onto the seal boot. 4. Install the seal boot and clamp onto the slinger hub and tighten the clamp with Axle Clamp Installer C-4975A. 5. Install front propeller shaft See: Drive/Propeller Shafts, Bearings and Joints/Drive/Propeller Shaft/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement . Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Seals and Gaskets, Transfer Case > System Information > Service and Repair > NV241 GENII Transfer Case > Page 8775 Seals and Gaskets: Service and Repair NV246 Transfer Case Removal REMOVAL 1. Raise and support vehicle. 2. Remove rear propeller shaft. See: Drive/Propeller Shafts, Bearings and Joints/Drive/Propeller Shaft/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement 3. Using a suitable pry tool or slide-hammer mounted screw, remove the rear output seal. Installation INSTALLATION 1. Clean fluid residue from sealing surface and inspect for defects. 2. Using Seal Installer D-163 (2) and Universal Handle C-4171 (1), install seal in the rear case half. 3. Install propeller shaft. See: Drive/Propeller Shafts, Bearings and Joints/Drive/Propeller Shaft/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement 4. Verify proper transfer case fluid level. 5. Lower vehicle. Removal REMOVAL 1. Remove the front propeller shaft See: Drive/Propeller Shafts, Bearings and Joints/Drive/Propeller Shaft/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement . 2. Remove the front propeller shaft seal boot (1) retaining clamp (2). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Seals and Gaskets, Transfer Case > System Information > Service and Repair > NV241 GENII Transfer Case > Page 8776 3. Remove the front propeller shaft seal boot (1). 4. Remove the front output shaft seal slinger (1) by bending (2) the slinger ears away from the transfer case. 5. Using a suitable pry tool (2), remove the slinger (1) from the output shaft using care not to damage the shaft. 6. Using a screw and a slide hammer, remove the front output shaft seal. Installation INSTALLATION Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Seals and Gaskets, Transfer Case > System Information > Service and Repair > NV241 GENII Transfer Case > Page 8777 1. Install the new front output shaft seal with Seal Installer MB991168A. 2. Install the front output shaft seal slinger with Oil Slinger Installer 8840. Install the slinger onto the shaft until the tool contacts the rear of the output shaft. 3. Install a new seal boot clamp onto the seal boot. 4. Install the seal boot (1) and clamp onto the slinger hub and tighten the clamp with Axle Clamp Installer C-4975A. 5. Install front propeller shaft See: Drive/Propeller Shafts, Bearings and Joints/Drive/Propeller Shaft/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement . Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Seals and Gaskets, Transfer Case > System Information > Service and Repair > NV241 GENII Transfer Case > Page 8778 Seals and Gaskets: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL 1. Raise and support vehicle. 2. Remove rear propeller shaft. See: Drive/Propeller Shafts, Bearings and Joints/Drive/Propeller Shaft/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement 3. Using a suitable pry tool or slide-hammer mounted screw, remove the extension housing seal. Installation INSTALLATION 1. Clean fluid residue from sealing surface and inspect for defects. 2. Using Seal Installer D-163 (2) and Universal Handle C-4171 (1), install seal in extension housing. 3. Install propeller shaft. See: Drive/Propeller Shafts, Bearings and Joints/Drive/Propeller Shaft/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement 4. Verify proper transfer case fluid level. 5. Lower vehicle. Removal REMOVAL 1. Remove the front propeller shaft See: Drive/Propeller Shafts, Bearings and Joints/Drive/Propeller Shaft/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement . 2. Remove the front propeller shaft seal boot (1) retaining clamp (2). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Seals and Gaskets, Transfer Case > System Information > Service and Repair > NV241 GENII Transfer Case > Page 8779 3. Remove the front propeller shaft seal boot (1). 4. Remove the front output shaft seal slinger (1) by bending (2) the slinger ears away from the transfer case. 5. Using a suitable pry tool (2), remove the slinger (1) from the output shaft using care not to damage the shaft. 6. Using a screw and a slide hammer, remove the front output shaft seal. Installation INSTALLATION 1. Install the new front output shaft seal with Seal Installer MB991168A. 2. Install the front output shaft seal slinger with Oil Slinger Installer 8840. Install the slinger onto the shaft until the tool contacts the rear of the output shaft. 3. Install a new seal boot clamp onto the seal boot. 4. Install the seal boot and clamp onto the slinger hub and tighten the clamp with Axle Clamp Installer C-4975A. 5. Install front propeller shaft See: Drive/Propeller Shafts, Bearings and Joints/Drive/Propeller Shaft/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement . Removal REMOVAL 1. Raise and support vehicle. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Seals and Gaskets, Transfer Case > System Information > Service and Repair > NV241 GENII Transfer Case > Page 8780 2. Remove rear propeller shaft. See: Drive/Propeller Shafts, Bearings and Joints/Drive/Propeller Shaft/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement 3. Using a suitable pry tool or slide-hammer mounted screw, remove the extension housing seal. Installation INSTALLATION 1. Clean fluid residue from sealing surface and inspect for defects. 2. Using Seal Installer D-163 (2) and Universal Handle C-4171 (1), install seal in extension housing. 3. Install propeller shaft. See: Drive/Propeller Shafts, Bearings and Joints/Drive/Propeller Shaft/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement 4. Verify proper transfer case fluid level. 5. Lower vehicle. Removal REMOVAL 1. Remove the front propeller shaft See: Drive/Propeller Shafts, Bearings and Joints/Drive/Propeller Shaft/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement . 2. Remove the front propeller shaft seal boot (1) retaining clamp (2). 3. Remove the front propeller shaft seal boot (1). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Seals and Gaskets, Transfer Case > System Information > Service and Repair > NV241 GENII Transfer Case > Page 8781 4. Remove the front output shaft seal slinger (1) by bending (2) the slinger ears away from the transfer case. 5. Using a suitable pry tool (2), remove the slinger (1) from the output shaft using care not to damage the shaft. 6. Using a screw and a slide hammer, remove the front output shaft seal. Installation INSTALLATION 1. Install the new front output shaft seal with Seal Installer MB991168A. 2. Install the front output shaft seal slinger with Oil Slinger Installer 8840. Install the slinger onto the shaft until the tool contacts the rear of the output shaft. 3. Install a new seal boot clamp onto the seal boot. 4. Install the seal boot and clamp onto the slinger hub and tighten the clamp with Axle Clamp Installer C-4975A. 5. Install front propeller shaft See: Drive/Propeller Shafts, Bearings and Joints/Drive/Propeller Shaft/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement . Removal REMOVAL 1. Raise and support vehicle. 2. Remove rear propeller shaft. See: Drive/Propeller Shafts, Bearings and Joints/Drive/Propeller Shaft/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement 3. Using a suitable pry tool or slide-hammer mounted screw, remove the extension housing seal. Installation INSTALLATION Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Seals and Gaskets, Transfer Case > System Information > Service and Repair > NV241 GENII Transfer Case > Page 8782 1. Clean fluid residue from sealing surface and inspect for defects. 2. Using Seal Installer D-163 (2) and Universal Handle C-4171 (1), install seal in extension housing. 3. Install propeller shaft. See: Drive/Propeller Shafts, Bearings and Joints/Drive/Propeller Shaft/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement 4. Verify proper transfer case fluid level. 5. Lower vehicle. Removal REMOVAL 1. Remove the front propeller shaft See: Drive/Propeller Shafts, Bearings and Joints/Drive/Propeller Shaft/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement . 2. Remove the front propeller shaft seal boot retaining clamp (2). 3. Remove the front propeller shaft seal boot (1) from the front output shaft seal slinger (2). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Seals and Gaskets, Transfer Case > System Information > Service and Repair > NV241 GENII Transfer Case > Page 8783 4. Remove the front output shaft seal slinger (1) by bending the slinger away (2) from the transfer case. 5. Using a suitable pry tool, remove the slinger from the output shaft using care not to damage the shaft. 6. Using a screw and a slide hammer, remove the front output shaft seal. Installation INSTALLATION 1. Install the new front output shaft seal with Seal Installer MB991168A. 2. Install the front output shaft seal slinger with Oil Slinger Installer 8840. Install the slinger onto the shaft until the tool contacts the rear of the output shaft. 3. Install a new seal boot clamp onto the seal boot. 4. Install the seal boot and clamp onto the slinger hub and tighten the clamp with Axle Clamp Installer C-4975A. 5. Install front propeller shaft See: Drive/Propeller Shafts, Bearings and Joints/Drive/Propeller Shaft/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement . Removal REMOVAL 1. Raise and support vehicle. 2. Remove rear propeller shaft. See: Drive/Propeller Shafts, Bearings and Joints/Drive/Propeller Shaft/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement 3. Using a suitable pry tool or slide-hammer mounted screw, remove the rear output seal. Installation INSTALLATION 1. Clean fluid residue from sealing surface and inspect for defects. 2. Using Seal Installer D-163 (2) and Universal Handle C-4171 (1), install seal in the rear case half. 3. Install propeller shaft. See: Drive/Propeller Shafts, Bearings and Joints/Drive/Propeller Shaft/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement 4. Verify proper transfer case fluid level. 5. Lower vehicle. Removal REMOVAL Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Seals and Gaskets, Transfer Case > System Information > Service and Repair > NV241 GENII Transfer Case > Page 8784 1. Remove the front propeller shaft See: Drive/Propeller Shafts, Bearings and Joints/Drive/Propeller Shaft/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement . 2. Remove the front propeller shaft seal boot (1) retaining clamp (2). 3. Remove the front propeller shaft seal boot (1). 4. Remove the front output shaft seal slinger (1) by bending (2) the slinger ears away from the transfer case. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Seals and Gaskets, Transfer Case > System Information > Service and Repair > NV241 GENII Transfer Case > Page 8785 5. Using a suitable pry tool (2), remove the slinger (1) from the output shaft using care not to damage the shaft. 6. Using a screw and a slide hammer, remove the front output shaft seal. Installation INSTALLATION 1. Install the new front output shaft seal with Seal Installer MB991168A. 2. Install the front output shaft seal slinger with Oil Slinger Installer 8840. Install the slinger onto the shaft until the tool contacts the rear of the output shaft. 3. Install a new seal boot clamp onto the seal boot. 4. Install the seal boot (1) and clamp onto the slinger hub and tighten the clamp with Axle Clamp Installer C-4975A. 5. Install front propeller shaft See: Drive/Propeller Shafts, Bearings and Joints/Drive/Propeller Shaft/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement . Removal REMOVAL Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Seals and Gaskets, Transfer Case > System Information > Service and Repair > NV241 GENII Transfer Case > Page 8786 1. Raise and support vehicle. 2. Remove rear propeller shaft. See: Drive/Propeller Shafts, Bearings and Joints/Drive/Propeller Shaft/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement 3. Use a suitable chisel or pry tool to remove the rear extension housing dust boot (2). 4. Use a suitable chisel or pry tool to remove the rear extension housing seal. Installation INSTALLATION 1. Clean fluid residue from sealing surface and inspect for defects. 2. Install the extension housing dust boot and seal assembly with Seal Installer 9037 (3) and Universal Handle C-4171 (2). 3. Install propeller shaft. See: Drive/Propeller Shafts, Bearings and Joints/Drive/Propeller Shaft/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement 4. Verify proper transfer case fluid level. 5. Lower vehicle. Removal REMOVAL Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Seals and Gaskets, Transfer Case > System Information > Service and Repair > NV241 GENII Transfer Case > Page 8787 1. Remove the front propeller shaft See: Drive/Propeller Shafts, Bearings and Joints/Drive/Propeller Shaft/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement . 2. Install two bolts 180° apart into the front output shaft companion flange. 3. Place Yoke Holder 6719 (1) over the bolts (2) and against the companion flange. 4. Remove and discard the front companion flange nut. 5. Remove the companion flange from the front output shaft. It may be necessary to use Pinion Flange Remover 8992 to remove the companion flange. 6. Using a screw and a slide hammer, remove the front output shaft seal. Installation INSTALLATION 1. Install the new front output shaft seal with Seal Installer MB991168A. 2. Install the front companion flange onto the front output shaft. 3. Install two bolts 180° apart into the front output shaft companion flange. 4. Place Yoke Holder 6719 (1) over the bolts (2) and against the companion flange. 5. Install a new front companion flange nut. Tighten the companion flange nut to 176-271 Nm (130-200 ft.lbs.). 6. Install front propeller shaft See: Drive/Propeller Shafts, Bearings and Joints/Drive/Propeller Shaft/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement . Removal REMOVAL Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Seals and Gaskets, Transfer Case > System Information > Service and Repair > NV241 GENII Transfer Case > Page 8788 1. Raise and support vehicle. 2. Remove rear propeller shaft. See: Drive/Propeller Shafts, Bearings and Joints/Drive/Propeller Shaft/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement 3. Use a suitable chisel or pry tool to remove the rear extension housing dust boot (2). 4. Use a suitable chisel or pry tool to remove the rear extension housing seal. Installation INSTALLATION 1. Clean fluid residue from sealing surface and inspect for defects. 2. Install the extension housing dust boot and seal assembly with Seal Installer 9037 (3) and Universal Handle C-4171 (2). 3. Install propeller shaft. See: Drive/Propeller Shafts, Bearings and Joints/Drive/Propeller Shaft/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement 4. Verify proper transfer case fluid level. 5. Lower vehicle. Removal REMOVAL Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Seals and Gaskets, Transfer Case > System Information > Service and Repair > NV241 GENII Transfer Case > Page 8789 1. Remove the front propeller shaft See: Drive/Propeller Shafts, Bearings and Joints/Drive/Propeller Shaft/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement . 2. Install two bolts 180° apart into the front output shaft companion flange. 3. Place Yoke Holder 6719 (1) over the bolts (2) and against the companion flange. 4. Remove and discard the front companion flange nut. 5. Remove the companion flange from the front output shaft. It may be necessary to use Pinion Flange Remover 8992 to remove the companion flange. 6. Using a screw and a slide hammer, remove the front output shaft seal. Installation INSTALLATION 1. Install the new front output shaft seal with Seal Installer MB991168A. 2. Install the front companion flange onto the front output shaft. 3. Install two bolts 180° apart into the front output shaft companion flange. 4. Place Yoke Holder 6719 (1) over the bolts (2) and against the companion flange. 5. Install a new front companion flange nut. Tighten the companion flange nut to 176-271 Nm (130-200 ft.lbs.). 6. Install front propeller shaft See: Drive/Propeller Shafts, Bearings and Joints/Drive/Propeller Shaft/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement . Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Four Wheel Drive Selector Switch > Component Information > Locations Four Wheel Drive Selector Switch: Locations Component ID: 515 Component : SWITCH-TRANSFER CASE SELECTOR Connector: Name : SWITCH-TRANSFER CASE SELECTOR Color : BLACK # of pins : 10 Qualifier : (ETC) Pin Circuit Description 1 K77 20BR/WT TRANSFER CASE POSITION SENSOR INPUT 2-3 K977 20BR/WT MODE SELECT 4 E11 20OR/DB PANEL LAMPS CONTROL 5 Z905 20BK GROUND 6 G95 20VT/BR NEUTRAL INDICATOR 7 F21 20PK/DG FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) 8-9-10 - Component Location - 47 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Four Wheel Drive Selector Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 8794 Component Location - 45 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Four Wheel Drive Selector Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 8795 Component Location - 20 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Four Wheel Drive Selector Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 8796 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Four Wheel Drive Selector Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 8797 Four Wheel Drive Selector Switch: Diagrams Component ID: 515 Component : SWITCH-TRANSFER CASE SELECTOR Connector: Name : SWITCH-TRANSFER CASE SELECTOR Color : BLACK # of pins : 10 Qualifier : (ETC) Pin Circuit Description 1 K77 20BR/WT TRANSFER CASE POSITION SENSOR INPUT 2-3 K977 20BR/WT MODE SELECT 4 E11 20OR/DB PANEL LAMPS CONTROL 5 Z905 20BK GROUND 6 G95 20VT/BR NEUTRAL INDICATOR 7 F21 20PK/DG FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) 8-9-10 - Component Location - 47 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Four Wheel Drive Selector Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 8798 Component Location - 45 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Four Wheel Drive Selector Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 8799 Component Location - 20 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Four Wheel Drive Selector Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 8800 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Four Wheel Drive Selector Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > NV243 Transfer Case Four Wheel Drive Selector Switch: Description and Operation NV243 Transfer Case Description DESCRIPTION The selector switch assembly is mounted in the left side of the vehicle's Instrument Panel (IP) and consists of a rotary knob connected to a resistive network for the mode and range shift selections. Also located in this assembly is a recessed, normally open momentary switch for making shifts into and out of transfer case NEUTRAL. A pen, or similar instrument, is used to make a NEUTRAL shift selection, thus reducing the likelihood of an inadvertent shift request. The selector switch also contains four light emitting diode's (LED's) to indicate the transfer case position and whether a shift is in progress. Operation OPERATION As the position of the selector switch varies, the resistance between the Mode Sensor supply voltage pin and the Mode Sensor output will vary. Hardware, software, and calibrations within the Transfer Case Control Module (TCCM) are provided that interpret the selector switch resistance as given in the table below: For resistances between the ranges B-E shown for each valid position (T-Case NEUTRAL, 4LO, 4HI, 2WD), the TCCM may interpret the resistance as: - either of the neighboring valid positions. - as an invalid fault position. For resistances between the ranges E and F shown for 2WD and in-between positions, the TCCM may interpret the resistance as: - the 2WD position. - an invalid fault position. - a valid in-between position. For resistances between the ranges F and G shown for in-between positions and fault condition (open), the TCCM may interpret the resistance as: Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Four Wheel Drive Selector Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > NV243 Transfer Case > Page 8803 - a valid in-between position. - an invalid fault position. For resistances between the ranges A and B shown for the fault condition (short) and T-Case NEUTRAL, the TCCM may interpret the resistance as: - the T-Case NEUTRAL position. - an invalid fault position. The LED's in the selector assembly are illuminated/flashed in the following manner to indicate a particular condition or state. - A solidly illuminated LED indicates a successfully completed shift and the current operating mode of the transfer case. While a shift has been requested but not yet completed, the LED for the desired transfer case position is flashed. - A flashing operating mode LED for the desired gear indicates that a shift to that position has been requested, but all of the driver controllable conditions have not been met. This is in an attempt to notify the driver that the transmission needs to be put into NEUTRAL, the vehicle speed is too great, or some other condition outlined (other than a diagnostic failure that would prevent this shift) elsewhere See: Control Module/Description and Operation/Operation is not met. Note that this flashing will continue indefinitely until the conditions are eventually met, or the selector switch position is changed, or if diagnostic routines no longer allow the requested shift. - If the driver attempts to make a shift into transfer case NEUTRAL, and any of the driver controllable conditions are not met, the request will be ignored until all of the conditions are met or until the NEUTRAL select button is released. Additionally the neutral lamp will flash, or begin to flash while the button is depressed and operator controllable conditions are not being met. All of the LED's except the Neutral will flash if any of the operator controllable conditions for shifting are not met while the Neutral button is depressed. This "toggle" type of feature is necessary because the TCCM would interpret another request immediately after the shift into transfer case NEUTRAL has completed. - No LED's illuminated indicate a fault in the transfer case control system. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Four Wheel Drive Selector Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > NV243 Transfer Case > Page 8804 Four Wheel Drive Selector Switch: Description and Operation NV244 GENII Transfer Case Description DESCRIPTION The selector switch assembly is mounted in the left side of the vehicle's Instrument Panel (IP) and consists of a rotary knob connected to a resistive network for the mode and range shift selections. Also located in this assembly is a recessed, normally open momentary switch for making shifts into and out of transfer case NEUTRAL. A pen, or similar instrument, is used to make a NEUTRAL shift selection, thus reducing the likelihood of an inadvertent shift request. The selector switch also contains light emitting diode's (LED's) to indicate the transfer case position and whether a shift is in progress. Operation OPERATION As the position of the selector switch varies, the resistance between the Mode Sensor supply voltage pin and the Mode Sensor output will vary. Hardware, software, and calibrations within the Transfer Case Control Module (TCCM) are provided that interpret the selector switch resistance as given in the table below: For resistances between the ranges B-E shown for each valid position (T-Case NEUTRAL, 4LO, 4HI, AWD), the TCCM may interpret the resistance as: - either of the neighboring valid positions. - as an invalid fault position. For resistances between the ranges E and F shown for AWD and in-between positions, the TCCM may interpret the resistance as: - the AWD position. - an invalid fault position. - a valid in-between position. For resistances between the ranges F and G shown for in-between positions and fault condition (open), the TCCM may interpret the resistance as: - a valid in-between position. - an invalid fault position. For resistances between the ranges A and B shown for the fault condition (short) and , T-Case NEUTRAL, the TCCM may interpret the resistance as: - the T-Case NEUTRAL position. - an invalid fault position. The LED's in the selector assembly are illuminated/flashed in the following manner to indicate a particular condition or state. - A solidly illuminated LED indicates a successfully completed shift and the current operating mode of the transfer case. While a shift has been requested but not yet completed, the LED for the desired transfer case position is flashed. - A flashing operating mode LED for the desired gear indicates that a shift to that position has been requested, but all of the driver controllable conditions have not been met. This is in an attempt to notify the driver that the transmission needs to be put into NEUTRAL, the vehicle speed is too great, or some other condition outlined (other than a diagnostic failure that would prevent this shift) elsewhere See: Control Module/Description and Operation/Operation is not met. Note that this flashing will continue indefinitely until the conditions are eventually met, Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Four Wheel Drive Selector Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > NV243 Transfer Case > Page 8805 or the selector switch position is changed, or if diagnostic routines no longer allow the requested shift. - If the driver attempts to make a shift into transfer case NEUTRAL, and any of the driver controllable conditions are not met, the request will be ignored until all of the conditions are met or until the NEUTRAL select button is released. Additionally the neutral lamp will flash, or begin to flash while the button is depressed and operator controllable conditions are not being met. All of the LED's except the Neutral will flash if any of the operator controllable conditions for shifting are not met while the Neutral button is depressed. This "toggle" type of feature is necessary because the TCCM would interpret another request immediately after the shift into transfer case NEUTRAL has completed. - No LED's illuminated indicate a fault in the transfer case control system. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Four Wheel Drive Selector Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > NV243 Transfer Case > Page 8806 Four Wheel Drive Selector Switch: Description and Operation NV246 Transfer Case Description DESCRIPTION The selector switch assembly is mounted in the left side of the vehicle's Instrument Panel (IP) and consists of a rotary knob connected to a resistive network for the mode and range shift selections. Also located in this assembly is a recessed, normally open momentary switch for making shifts into and out of transfer case NEUTRAL. A pen, or similar instrument, is used to make a NEUTRAL shift selection, thus reducing the likelihood of an inadvertent shift request. The selector switch also contains light emitting diode's (LED's) to indicate the transfer case position and whether a shift is in progress. Operation OPERATION As the position of the selector switch varies, the resistance between the Mode Sensor supply voltage pin and the Mode Sensor output will vary. Hardware, software, and calibrations within the Transfer Case Control Module (TCCM) are provided that interpret the selector switch resistance as given in the table below: For resistances between the ranges B-E shown for each valid position (T-Case NEUTRAL, 4LO, 4HI, AWD), the TCCM may interpret the resistance as: - either of the neighboring valid positions. - as an invalid fault position. For resistances between the ranges E and F shown for AWD and in-between positions, the TCCM may interpret the resistance as: - the AWD position. - an invalid fault position. - a valid in-between position. For resistances between the ranges F and G shown for in-between positions and fault condition (open), the TCCM may interpret the resistance as: - a valid in-between position. - an invalid fault position. For resistances between the ranges A and B shown for the fault condition (short) and , T-Case NEUTRAL, the TCCM may interpret the resistance as: - the T-Case NEUTRAL position. - an invalid fault position. The LED's in the selector assembly are illuminated/flashed in the following manner to indicate a particular condition or state. - A solidly illuminated LED indicates a successfully completed shift and the current operating mode of the transfer case. While a shift has been requested but not yet completed, the LED for the desired transfer case position is flashed. - A flashing operating mode LED for the desired gear indicates that a shift to that position has been requested, but all of the driver controllable conditions have not been met. This is in an attempt to notify the driver that the transmission needs to be put into NEUTRAL, the vehicle speed is too great, or some other condition outlined (other than a diagnostic failure that would prevent this shift) elsewhere See: Control Module/Description and Operation/Operation is not met. Note that this flashing will continue indefinitely until the conditions are eventually met, Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Four Wheel Drive Selector Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > NV243 Transfer Case > Page 8807 or the selector switch position is changed, or if diagnostic routines no longer allow the requested shift. - If the driver attempts to make a shift into transfer case NEUTRAL, and any of the driver controllable conditions are not met, the request will be ignored until all of the conditions are met or until the NEUTRAL select button is released. Additionally the neutral lamp will flash, or begin to flash while the button is depressed and operator controllable conditions are not being met. All of the LED's except the Neutral will flash if any of the operator controllable conditions for shifting are not met while the Neutral button is depressed. This "toggle" type of feature is necessary because the TCCM would interpret another request immediately after the shift into transfer case NEUTRAL has completed. - No LED's illuminated indicate a fault in the transfer case control system. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Four Wheel Drive Selector Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > NV243 Transfer Case > Page 8808 Four Wheel Drive Selector Switch: Description and Operation NV273 Transfer Case Description DESCRIPTION The selector switch assembly is mounted in the left side of the vehicle's Instrument Panel (IP) and consists of a rotary knob connected to a resistive network for the mode and range shift selections. Also located in this assembly is a recessed, normally open momentary switch for making shifts into and out of transfer case NEUTRAL. A pen, or similar instrument, is used to make a NEUTRAL shift selection, thus reducing the likelihood of an inadvertent shift request. The selector switch also contains four light emitting diode's (LED's) to indicate the transfer case position and whether a shift is in progress. Operation OPERATION As the position of the selector switch varies, the resistance between the Mode Sensor supply voltage pin and the Mode Sensor output will vary. Hardware, software, and calibrations within the Transfer Case Control Module (TCCM) are provided that interpret the selector switch resistance as given in the table below: For resistances between the ranges B-E shown for each valid position (T-Case NEUTRAL, 4LO, 4HI, 2WD), the TCCM may interpret the resistance as: - either of the neighboring valid positions. - as an invalid fault position. For resistances between the ranges E and F shown for 2WD and in-between positions, the TCCM may interpret the resistance as: - the 2WD position. - an invalid fault position. - a valid in-between position. For resistances between the ranges F and G shown for in-between positions and fault condition (open), the TCCM may interpret the resistance as: Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Four Wheel Drive Selector Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > NV243 Transfer Case > Page 8809 - a valid in-between position. - an invalid fault position. For resistances between the ranges A and B shown for the fault condition (short) and T-Case NEUTRAL, the TCCM may interpret the resistance as: - the T-Case NEUTRAL position. - an invalid fault position. The LED's in the selector assembly are illuminated/flashed in the following manner to indicate a particular condition or state. - A solidly illuminated LED indicates a successfully completed shift and the current operating mode of the transfer case. While a shift has been requested but not yet completed, the LED for the desired transfer case position is flashed. - A flashing operating mode LED for the desired gear indicates that a shift to that position has been requested, but all of the driver controllable conditions have not been met. This is in an attempt to notify the driver that the transmission needs to be put into NEUTRAL, the vehicle speed is too great, or some other condition outlined (other than a diagnostic failure that would prevent this shift) elsewhere See: Control Module/Description and Operation/Operation is not met. Note that this flashing will continue indefinitely until the conditions are eventually met, or the selector switch position is changed, or if diagnostic routines no longer allow the requested shift. - If the driver attempts to make a shift into transfer case NEUTRAL, and any of the driver controllable conditions are not met, the request will be ignored until all of the conditions are met or until the NEUTRAL select button is released. Additionally the neutral lamp will flash, or begin to flash while the button is depressed and operator controllable conditions are not being met. All of the LED's except the Neutral will flash if any of the operator controllable conditions for shifting are not met while the Neutral button is depressed. This "toggle" type of feature is necessary because the TCCM would interpret another request immediately after the shift into transfer case NEUTRAL has completed. - No LED's illuminated indicate a fault in the transfer case control system. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Gear Sensor/Switch, Transfer Case > Component Information > Locations > Assembly-Shift Motor/Mode Sensor Gear Sensor/Switch: Locations Assembly-Shift Motor/Mode Sensor Component ID: 18 Component : ASSEMBLY-SHIFT MOTOR/MODE SENSOR Connector: Name : ASSEMBLY-SHIFT MOTOR/MODE SENSOR Color : BLACK # of pins : 8 Qualifier : (RFE FULL TIME ETC) Pin Circuit Description 1 T103 20YL/OR 5 VOLT SUPPLY 2 D201 20WT/DG MODE SENSOR A 3 G180 20VT/YL SENSOR RETURN 4 T101 16DG SHIFT MOTOR CONTROL B 5 T102 16YL SHIFT MOTOR CONTROL A 6 A940 20RD FUSED B(+) 7 T300 20YL/GY T-CASE MOTOR BRAKE SIGNAL 8-Component Location - 21 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Gear Sensor/Switch, Transfer Case > Component Information > Locations > Assembly-Shift Motor/Mode Sensor > Page 8814 Component Location - 24 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Gear Sensor/Switch, Transfer Case > Component Information > Locations > Assembly-Shift Motor/Mode Sensor > Page 8815 Component Location - 26 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Gear Sensor/Switch, Transfer Case > Component Information > Locations > Assembly-Shift Motor/Mode Sensor > Page 8816 Connector: Name : ASSEMBLY-SHIFT MOTOR/MODE SENSOR Color : DK. GRAY # of pins : 8 Qualifier : (RFE PART TIME ETC/RE ETC) Pin Circuit Description 1 T103 20YL/OR 5 VOLT SUPPLY 2 D201 20WT/DG MODE SENSOR A 3 G180 20VT/YL SENSOR RETURN 4 T101 16DG SHIFT MOTOR CONTROL B Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Gear Sensor/Switch, Transfer Case > Component Information > Locations > Assembly-Shift Motor/Mode Sensor > Page 8817 5 T102 16YL SHIFT MOTOR CONTROL A 6 A918 20RD FUSED B(+) 7-8-Component Location - 21 Component Location - 24 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Gear Sensor/Switch, Transfer Case > Component Information > Locations > Assembly-Shift Motor/Mode Sensor > Page 8818 Component Location - 26 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Gear Sensor/Switch, Transfer Case > Component Information > Locations > Assembly-Shift Motor/Mode Sensor > Page 8819 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Gear Sensor/Switch, Transfer Case > Component Information > Locations > Assembly-Shift Motor/Mode Sensor > Page 8820 Gear Sensor/Switch: Locations Sensor-Transfer Case Position Component ID: 443 Component : SENSOR-TRANSFER CASE POSITION Connector: Name : SENSOR-TRANSFER CASE POSITION Color : # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (MTC EXCEPT POWER WAGON) Pin Circuit Description 1 D201 20WT/DG MODE SENSOR A Pin Circuit Description 1 D201 18WT/DG MODE SENSOR A 2 Z955 20BK GROUND 2 Z955 18BK GROUND 2 Z901 20BK GROUND Component Location - 22 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Gear Sensor/Switch, Transfer Case > Component Information > Locations > Assembly-Shift Motor/Mode Sensor > Page 8821 Component Location - 25 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Gear Sensor/Switch, Transfer Case > Component Information > Locations > Assembly-Shift Motor/Mode Sensor > Page 8822 Connector: Name : SENSOR-TRANSFER CASE POSITION Color : # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (MTC POWER WAGON) Pin Circuit Description 1 D201 18WT/DG MODE SENSOR A Pin Circuit Description 1 D201 20WT/DG MODE SENSOR A Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Gear Sensor/Switch, Transfer Case > Component Information > Locations > Assembly-Shift Motor/Mode Sensor > Page 8823 2 G180 18VT/YL SENSOR RETURN 2 G180 20VT/YL SENSOR RETURN Component Location - 22 Component Location - 25 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Gear Sensor/Switch, Transfer Case > Component Information > Locations > Assembly-Shift Motor/Mode Sensor > Page 8824 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Gear Sensor/Switch, Transfer Case > Component Information > Diagrams > Assembly-Shift Motor/Mode Sensor Gear Sensor/Switch: Diagrams Assembly-Shift Motor/Mode Sensor Component ID 14 Component ID: 14 Component : ASSEMBLY-SHIFT MOTOR/MODE SENSOR Connector: Name : ASSEMBLY-SHIFT MOTOR/MODE SENSOR Color : BLACK # of pins : 8 Qualifier : (RFE FULL TIME ETC) Pin Circuit Description 1 T103 20YL/OR 5 VOLT SUPPLY 2 D201 20WT/DG MODE SENSOR A 3 G180 20VT/YL SENSOR RETURN 4 T101 16DG SHIFT MOTOR CONTROL B 5 T102 16YL SHIFT MOTOR CONTROL A 6 A940 20RD FUSED B(+) 7 T300 20YL/GY T-CASE MOTOR BRAKE SIGNAL 8-Connector: Name : ASSEMBLY-SHIFT MOTOR/MODE SENSOR Color : DK. GRAY # of pins : 8 Qualifier : (RFE PART TIME ETC/RE ETC) Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Gear Sensor/Switch, Transfer Case > Component Information > Diagrams > Assembly-Shift Motor/Mode Sensor > Page 8827 Pin Circuit Description 1 T103 20YL/OR 5 VOLT SUPPLY 2 D201 20WT/DG MODE SENSOR A 3 G180 20VT/YL SENSOR RETURN 4 T101 16DG SHIFT MOTOR CONTROL B 5 T102 16YL SHIFT MOTOR CONTROL A 6 A918 20RD FUSED B(+) 7-8-Component ID 18 Component ID: 18 Component : ASSEMBLY-SHIFT MOTOR/MODE SENSOR Connector: Name : ASSEMBLY-SHIFT MOTOR/MODE SENSOR Color : BLACK # of pins : 8 Qualifier : (RFE FULL TIME ETC) Pin Circuit Description 1 T103 20YL/OR 5 VOLT SUPPLY 2 D201 20WT/DG MODE SENSOR A 3 G180 20VT/YL SENSOR RETURN 4 T101 16DG SHIFT MOTOR CONTROL B 5 T102 16YL SHIFT MOTOR CONTROL A Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Gear Sensor/Switch, Transfer Case > Component Information > Diagrams > Assembly-Shift Motor/Mode Sensor > Page 8828 6 A940 20RD FUSED B(+) 7 T300 20YL/GY T-CASE MOTOR BRAKE SIGNAL 8-Component Location - 21 Component Location - 24 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Gear Sensor/Switch, Transfer Case > Component Information > Diagrams > Assembly-Shift Motor/Mode Sensor > Page 8829 Component Location - 26 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Gear Sensor/Switch, Transfer Case > Component Information > Diagrams > Assembly-Shift Motor/Mode Sensor > Page 8830 Connector: Name : ASSEMBLY-SHIFT MOTOR/MODE SENSOR Color : DK. GRAY # of pins : 8 Qualifier : (RFE PART TIME ETC/RE ETC) Pin Circuit Description 1 T103 20YL/OR 5 VOLT SUPPLY 2 D201 20WT/DG MODE SENSOR A 3 G180 20VT/YL SENSOR RETURN 4 T101 16DG SHIFT MOTOR CONTROL B Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Gear Sensor/Switch, Transfer Case > Component Information > Diagrams > Assembly-Shift Motor/Mode Sensor > Page 8831 5 T102 16YL SHIFT MOTOR CONTROL A 6 A918 20RD FUSED B(+) 7-8-Component Location - 21 Component Location - 24 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Gear Sensor/Switch, Transfer Case > Component Information > Diagrams > Assembly-Shift Motor/Mode Sensor > Page 8832 Component Location - 26 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Gear Sensor/Switch, Transfer Case > Component Information > Diagrams > Assembly-Shift Motor/Mode Sensor > Page 8833 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Gear Sensor/Switch, Transfer Case > Component Information > Diagrams > Assembly-Shift Motor/Mode Sensor > Page 8834 Gear Sensor/Switch: Diagrams Sensor-Transfer Case Position Component ID: 443 Component : SENSOR-TRANSFER CASE POSITION Connector: Name : SENSOR-TRANSFER CASE POSITION Color : # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (MTC EXCEPT POWER WAGON) Pin Circuit Description 1 D201 20WT/DG MODE SENSOR A Pin Circuit Description 1 D201 18WT/DG MODE SENSOR A 2 Z955 20BK GROUND 2 Z955 18BK GROUND 2 Z901 20BK GROUND Component Location - 22 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Gear Sensor/Switch, Transfer Case > Component Information > Diagrams > Assembly-Shift Motor/Mode Sensor > Page 8835 Component Location - 25 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Gear Sensor/Switch, Transfer Case > Component Information > Diagrams > Assembly-Shift Motor/Mode Sensor > Page 8836 Connector: Name : SENSOR-TRANSFER CASE POSITION Color : # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (MTC POWER WAGON) Pin Circuit Description 1 D201 18WT/DG MODE SENSOR A Pin Circuit Description 1 D201 20WT/DG MODE SENSOR A Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Gear Sensor/Switch, Transfer Case > Component Information > Diagrams > Assembly-Shift Motor/Mode Sensor > Page 8837 2 G180 18VT/YL SENSOR RETURN 2 G180 20VT/YL SENSOR RETURN Component Location - 22 Component Location - 25 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Gear Sensor/Switch, Transfer Case > Component Information > Diagrams > Assembly-Shift Motor/Mode Sensor > Page 8838 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Gear Sensor/Switch, Transfer Case > Component Information > Description and Operation > NV244 GENII Transfer Case Gear Sensor/Switch: Description and Operation NV244 GENII Transfer Case Description DESCRIPTION The transfer case mode sensor is an electronic device whose output can be interpreted to indicate the shift motor shaft's rotary position. The sensor consists of a magnetic ring and four Hall Effect Transistors to create a 4 channel digital device (non-contacting) whose output converts the motor shaft position into a coded signal. The TCCM must supply 5VDC (+/- 0.5v) to the sensor and monitor the shift motor position. The four channels are denoted A, B, C, and D. The sensor is mechanically linked to the shaft of the cam which causes the transfer case shifting. The mode sensor draws less than 53 mA. Operation OPERATION During normal vehicle operation, the Transfer Case Control Module (TCCM) monitors the mode sensor outputs at least every 250 (+/-50) milliseconds when the shift motor is stationary and 400 microseconds when the shift motor is active. A mode sensor signal between 3.8 Volts and 0.8 Volts is considered to be undefined. Refer to SECTOR ANGLES vs.TRANSFER CASE POSITION for the relative angles of the transfer case shift sector versus the interpreted transfer case gear operating mode. Refer to MODE SENSOR CHANNEL STATES for the sensor codes returned to the TCCM for each transfer case mode sensor position. The various between gears positions can also be referred as the transfer case's coarse position. These coarse positions come into play during shift attempts. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Gear Sensor/Switch, Transfer Case > Component Information > Description and Operation > NV244 GENII Transfer Case > Page 8841 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Gear Sensor/Switch, Transfer Case > Component Information > Description and Operation > NV244 GENII Transfer Case > Page 8842 Gear Sensor/Switch: Description and Operation NV246 Transfer Case Description DESCRIPTION The transfer case mode sensor is an electronic device whose output can be interpreted to indicate the shift motor shaft's rotary position. The sensor consists of a magnetic ring and four Hall Effect Transistors to create a 4 channel digital device (non-contacting) whose output converts the motor shaft position into a coded signal. The FCM must supply 5VDC (+/- 0.5v) to the sensor and monitor the shift motor position. The four channels are denoted A, B, C, and D. The sensor is mechanically linked to the shaft of the cam which causes the transfer case shifting. The mode sensor draws less than 53 mA. Operation OPERATION During normal vehicle operation, the Front Control Module (FCM) monitors the mode sensor outputs at least every 250 (+/-50) milliseconds when the shift motor is stationary and 400 microseconds when the shift motor is active. A mode sensor signal between 3.8 Volts and 0.8 Volts is considered to be undefined. Refer to for the relative angles of the transfer case shift sector versus the interpreted transfer case gear operating mode. Refer to the sensor codes returned to the FCM for each transfer case mode sensor position. The various between gears positions can also be referred as the transfer case's coarse position. These coarse positions come into play during shift attempts. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Gear Sensor/Switch, Transfer Case > Component Information > Description and Operation > NV244 GENII Transfer Case > Page 8843 Gear Sensor/Switch: Description and Operation NV271 Transfer Case Description DESCRIPTION The transfer case position sensor is an electronic device whose output can be interpreted to indicate the transfer case's current operating mode. The sensor consists of a five position, resistive multiplexed circuit which returns a specific resistance value to the Powertrain Control Module (PCM) for each transfer case operating mode. The sensor is located on the top of the transfer case, just left of the transfer case centerline and rides against the sector plate roostercomb. The PCM supplies 5VDC (+/- 0.5V) to the sensor and monitors the return voltage to determine the sector plate, and therefore the transfer case, position. Operation OPERATION Position Sensor Linear Movement During normal vehicle operation, the Powertrain Control Module (PCM) monitors the transfer case position sensor return voltage to determine the operating mode of the transfer case. Refer to the Operating Mode Versus Resistance table for the correct resistance for each position. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Gear Sensor/Switch, Transfer Case > Component Information > Description and Operation > NV244 GENII Transfer Case > Page 8844 Gear Sensor/Switch: Description and Operation NV243 Transfer Case Description DESCRIPTION The transfer case mode sensor (1) is an electronic device whose output can be interpreted to indicate the shift motor shaft's rotary position. The sensor consists of a magnetic ring and four Hall Effect Transistors to create a 4 channel digital device (non-contacting) whose output converts the motor shaft position into a coded signal. The TCCM must supply 5VDC (+/- 0.5v) to the sensor and monitor the shift motor position. The four channels are denoted A, B, C, and D. The sensor is mechanically linked to the shaft of the cam which causes the transfer case shifting. The mode sensor draws less than 53 mA. Operation OPERATION During normal vehicle operation, the Transfer Case Control Module (TCCM) monitors the mode sensor outputs at least every 250 (+/-50) milliseconds when the shift motor is stationary and 400 microseconds when the shift motor is active. A mode sensor signal between 3.8 Volts and 0.8 Volts is considered to be undefined. Refer to SECTOR ANGLES vs.TRANSFER CASE POSITION for the relative angles of the transfer case shift sector versus the interpreted transfer case gear operating mode. Refer to MODE SENSOR CHANNEL STATES for the sensor codes returned to the TCCM for each transfer case mode sensor position. The various between gears positions can also be referred as the transfer case's coarse position. These coarse positions come into play during shift attempts. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Gear Sensor/Switch, Transfer Case > Component Information > Description and Operation > NV244 GENII Transfer Case > Page 8845 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Gear Sensor/Switch, Transfer Case > Component Information > Description and Operation > NV244 GENII Transfer Case > Page 8846 Gear Sensor/Switch: Description and Operation NV273 Transfer Case Description DESCRIPTION The transfer case mode sensor (1) is an electronic device whose output can be interpreted to indicate the shift motor shaft's rotary position. The sensor consists of a magnetic ring and four Hall Effect Transistors to create a 4 channel digital device (non-contacting) whose output converts the motor shaft position into a coded signal. The TCCM must supply 5VDC (+/- 0.5v) to the sensor and monitor the shift motor position. The four channels are denoted A, B, C, and D. The sensor is mechanically linked to the shaft of the cam which causes the transfer case shifting. The mode sensor draws less than 53 mA. Operation OPERATION During normal vehicle operation, the Transfer Case Control Module (TCCM) monitors the mode sensor outputs at least every 250 (+/-50) milliseconds when the shift motor is stationary and 400 microseconds when the shift motor is active. A mode sensor signal between 3.8 Volts and 0.8 Volts is considered to be undefined. Refer to SECTOR ANGLES vs.TRANSFER CASE POSITION for the relative angles of the transfer case shift sector versus the interpreted transfer case gear operating mode. Refer to MODE SENSOR CHANNEL STATES for the sensor codes returned to the TCCM for each transfer case mode sensor position. The various between gears positions can also be referred as the transfer case's coarse position. These coarse positions come into play during shift attempts. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Gear Sensor/Switch, Transfer Case > Component Information > Description and Operation > NV244 GENII Transfer Case > Page 8847 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Gear Sensor/Switch, Transfer Case > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Gear Sensor/Switch: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL 1. Raise and support the vehicle. 2. Disengage the transfer case position sensor connector from the position sensor. 3. Remove the position sensor from the transfer case. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Gear Sensor/Switch, Transfer Case > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 8850 Gear Sensor/Switch: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION 1. Inspect the o-ring seal on the transfer case position sensor. Replace the o-ring if necessary. 2. Install the transfer case position sensor into the transfer case. Torque the sensor to 27 Nm (20 ft.lbs.). 3. Engage the transfer case position sensor connector to the position sensor. 4. Lower vehicle. 5. Verify proper sensor operation. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Speed Sensor, Transfer Case > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Prop Shaft Speed-Front Speed Sensor: Locations Sensor-Prop Shaft Speed-Front Component ID: 435 Component : SENSOR-PROP SHAFT SPEED-FRONT Connector: Name : SENSOR-PROP SHAFT SPEED-FRONT Color : # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (FULL TIME ETC) Pin Circuit Description 1 T71 20YL/OR INPUT SPEED SENSOR 2 (N3) RETURN 2 T340 20DG/VT INPUT SPEED SENSOR 2 (N3) SIGNAL Component Location - 21 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Speed Sensor, Transfer Case > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Prop Shaft Speed-Front > Page 8855 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Speed Sensor, Transfer Case > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Prop Shaft Speed-Front > Page 8856 Speed Sensor: Locations Sensor-Prop Shaft Speed-Rear Component ID: 436 Component : SENSOR-PROP SHAFT SPEED-REAR Connector: Name : SENSOR-PROP SHAFT SPEED-REAR Color : # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (FULL TIME ETC) Pin Circuit Description 1 T70 20YL INPUT SPEED SENSOR 1 (N2) SIGNAL 2 T341 20DG/VT INPUT SPEED SENSOR 1 (N2) RETURN Component Location - 21 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Speed Sensor, Transfer Case > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Prop Shaft Speed-Front > Page 8857 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Speed Sensor, Transfer Case > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Prop Shaft Speed-Front Speed Sensor: Diagrams Sensor-Prop Shaft Speed-Front Component ID: 435 Component : SENSOR-PROP SHAFT SPEED-FRONT Connector: Name : SENSOR-PROP SHAFT SPEED-FRONT Color : # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (FULL TIME ETC) Pin Circuit Description 1 T71 20YL/OR INPUT SPEED SENSOR 2 (N3) RETURN 2 T340 20DG/VT INPUT SPEED SENSOR 2 (N3) SIGNAL Component Location - 21 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Speed Sensor, Transfer Case > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Prop Shaft Speed-Front > Page 8860 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Speed Sensor, Transfer Case > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Prop Shaft Speed-Front > Page 8861 Speed Sensor: Diagrams Sensor-Prop Shaft Speed-Rear Component ID: 436 Component : SENSOR-PROP SHAFT SPEED-REAR Connector: Name : SENSOR-PROP SHAFT SPEED-REAR Color : # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (FULL TIME ETC) Pin Circuit Description 1 T70 20YL INPUT SPEED SENSOR 1 (N2) SIGNAL 2 T341 20DG/VT INPUT SPEED SENSOR 1 (N2) RETURN Component Location - 21 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Speed Sensor, Transfer Case > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Prop Shaft Speed-Front > Page 8862 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Speed Sensor, Transfer Case > Component Information > Service and Repair > Sensor-Output Shaft Speed-Front Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Sensor-Output Shaft Speed-Front Removal REMOVAL 1. Raise the vehicle on a suitable hoist. 2. Disengage the wiring connector from the front output shaft speed sensor (1). 3. Remove the front output shaft speed sensor from the transfer case. Installation INSTALLATION 1. Install the front output shaft speed sensor (1) into the transfer case. Tighten the speed sensor to 17 Nm (12.5 ft.lbs.). 2. Engage the wiring connector to the front output shaft speed sensor. 3. Lower the vehicle. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Speed Sensor, Transfer Case > Component Information > Service and Repair > Sensor-Output Shaft Speed-Front > Page 8865 Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Sensor-Output Shaft Speed-Rear Removal REMOVAL 1. Raise the vehicle on a suitable hoist. 2. Disengage the wiring connector from the rear output shaft speed sensor (1). 3. Remove the rear output shaft speed sensor from the transfer case. Installation INSTALLATION 1. Install the rear output shaft speed sensor (1) into the transfer case. Tighten the speed sensor to 17 Nm (12.5 ft.lbs.). 2. Engage the wiring connector to the rear output shaft speed sensor. 3. Lower the vehicle. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Shifter Transfer Case > Component Information > Adjustments > Adjustment - NV241 GENII Transfer Case Shift Lever Shifter Transfer Case: Adjustments Adjustment - NV241 GENII Transfer Case Shift Lever ADJUSTMENT - SHIFT LEVER Transfer Case Shifter 1. Move shift lever into 2H position. 2. Raise vehicle. 3. Loosen shift rod lock bolt at trunnion. 4. Check shift rod fit in trunnion. Be sure rod does not bind in trunnion. Lubricate the shift rod and trunnion if necessary. 5. Verify that transfer case shift lever is in 2H detent position. The 2H detent position on the transfer case shift arm is the second position from full forward. 6. Align the adjustment locating hole on the lower shifter lever with the adjustment channel on the shifter bracket assembly. 7. Insert an appropriately sized pin through into the adjustment channel and through the locating hole to hold the shifter in the correct position. 8. Tighten shift rod lock bolt to 10 Nm (90 in. lbs.) torque. 9. Remove the locating pin from the adjustment channel and locating hole. 10. Check shift linkage operation. Be sure transfer case shifts into and operates properly in all ranges. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Shifter Transfer Case > Component Information > Adjustments > Adjustment - NV241 GENII Transfer Case Shift Lever > Page 8870 Shifter Transfer Case: Adjustments Adjustment - NV271 Transfer Case Shift Lever ADJUSTMENT - SHIFT LEVER Transfer Case Shifter 1. Move shift lever into 2H position. 2. Raise vehicle. 3. Loosen shift rod lock bolt at trunnion. 4. Check shift rod fit in trunnion. Be sure rod does not bind in trunnion. Lubricate the shift rod and trunnion if necessary. 5. Verify that transfer case shift lever is in 2H detent position. The 2H detent position on the transfer case shift arm is the second position from full forward. 6. Align the adjustment locating hole on the lower shifter lever with the adjustment channel on the shifter bracket assembly. 7. Insert an appropriately sized pin through into the adjustment channel and through the locating hole to hold the shifter in the correct position. 8. Tighten shift rod lock bolt to 10 Nm (90 in. lbs.) torque. 9. Remove the locating pin from the adjustment channel and locating hole. 10. Check shift linkage operation. Be sure transfer case shifts into and operates properly in all ranges. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Shifter Transfer Case > Component Information > Service and Repair > Transfer Case Shift Lever - Removal Shifter Transfer Case: Service and Repair Transfer Case Shift Lever - Removal NV241 GENII Transfer Case REMOVAL Transfer Case Shifter 1. Shift transfer case into 2H. 2. Raise and support the vehicle. 3. Loosen adjusting trunnion lock bolt and slide shift rod out of trunnion. If rod lacks enough travel to come out of trunnion, push trunnion out of shift lever. 4. Lower vehicle. 5. Remove transfer case shifter knob cap. 6. Remove nut holding shifter knob (2) to shift lever. 7. Remove shifter knob. 8. Remove the shift boot from the shifter console. 9. Remove the bolts securing the shifter mechanism to the floor pan. 10. Separate shift lever mechanism from the vehicle. NV271 Transfer Case REMOVAL Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Shifter Transfer Case > Component Information > Service and Repair > Transfer Case Shift Lever - Removal > Page 8873 Transfer Case Shifter 1. Shift transfer case into 2H. 2. Raise and support the vehicle. 3. Loosen adjusting trunnion lock bolt and slide shift rod out of trunnion. If rod lacks enough travel to come out of trunnion, push trunnion out of shift lever. 4. Lower vehicle. 5. Remove transfer case shifter knob cap. 6. Remove nut holding shifter knob (2) to shift lever. 7. Remove shifter knob. 8. Remove the shift boot from the shifter console. 9. Remove the bolts securing the shifter mechanism to the floor pan. 10. Separate shift lever mechanism from the vehicle. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Shifter Transfer Case > Component Information > Service and Repair > Transfer Case Shift Lever - Removal > Page 8874 Shifter Transfer Case: Service and Repair Transfer Case Shift Lever - Installation NV241 GENII Transfer Case INSTALLATION Transfer Case Shifter 1. If the shifter mechanism does not have a adjustment locating pin installed, align the adjustment channel on the shifter assembly to the locating hole in the lower shift lever and install an appropriately sized pin to retain the position. 2. Position shift lever in vehicle. 3. Install the bolts to hold the shifter mechanism (4) to the floor pan. 4. Raise vehicle. 5. Verify that the transfer case is still in the 2H position. The 2H detent position on the transfer case shift arm is the second position from full forward. 6. Install trunnion to shift lever, if necessary. 7. Install shift rod to trunnion, if necessary. 8. Tighten the shift rod lock bolt to 10 Nm (90 in.lbs.). 9. Remove the shifter adjustment locating pin from the adjustment channel and the locating hole. 10. Lower vehicle. 11. Install the transfer case shifter console. 12. Install the shifter boot and the shifter knob onto the shifter lever. 13. Install nut to hold shifter knob to shift lever. 14. Install shifter knob cap. 15. Verify transfer case operation. NV271 Transfer Case INSTALLATION Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Shifter Transfer Case > Component Information > Service and Repair > Transfer Case Shift Lever - Removal > Page 8875 Transfer Case Shifter 1. If the shifter mechanism does not have a adjustment locating pin installed, align the adjustment channel on the shifter assembly to the locating hole in the lower shift lever and install an appropriately sized pin to retain the position. 2. Position shift lever in vehicle. 3. Install the bolts to hold the shifter mechanism (4) to the floor pan. 4. Raise vehicle. 5. Verify that the transfer case is still in the 2H position. The 2H detent position on the transfer case shift arm is the second position from full forward. 6. Install trunnion to shift lever, if necessary. 7. Install shift rod to trunnion, if necessary. 8. Tighten the shift rod lock bolt to 10 Nm (90 in.lbs.). 9. Remove the shifter adjustment locating pin from the adjustment channel and the locating hole. 10. Lower vehicle. 11. Install the transfer case shifter console. 12. Install the shifter boot and the shifter knob onto the shifter lever. 13. Install nut to hold shifter knob to shift lever. 14. Install shifter knob cap. 15. Verify transfer case operation. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Shift Linkage, Transfer Case > Transfer Case Shift Boot > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Transfer Case Shift Boot: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL 1. Using a small flat-bladed tool, remove the insert (2) from the top of the shift knob (1). 2. Remove the nut (3) that secures the shift knob to the gear shift lever. 3. Remove the gear shift knob (2). 4. Using a trim stick C-4755 or equivalent, disengage the retaining tabs that secure the gear shift boot (3) to the floor console (1) and remove the boot. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Shift Linkage, Transfer Case > Transfer Case Shift Boot > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 8881 Transfer Case Shift Boot: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION 1. Position the gear shift boot (3) over the gear shift lever. 2. Engage the retaining tabs that secure the gear shift boot to the floor console (1). 3. Install the shift knob (2) over the gear shift lever. 4. Install the nut (3) that secures the shift knob (1) to the gear shift lever. Tighten the nut to 27 Nm (20 ft. lbs.). 5. Install the insert (2) into the top of the shift knob. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Speed Sensor, Transfer Case > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Prop Shaft Speed-Front Speed Sensor: Locations Sensor-Prop Shaft Speed-Front Component ID: 435 Component : SENSOR-PROP SHAFT SPEED-FRONT Connector: Name : SENSOR-PROP SHAFT SPEED-FRONT Color : # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (FULL TIME ETC) Pin Circuit Description 1 T71 20YL/OR INPUT SPEED SENSOR 2 (N3) RETURN 2 T340 20DG/VT INPUT SPEED SENSOR 2 (N3) SIGNAL Component Location - 21 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Speed Sensor, Transfer Case > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Prop Shaft Speed-Front > Page 8886 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Speed Sensor, Transfer Case > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Prop Shaft Speed-Front > Page 8887 Speed Sensor: Locations Sensor-Prop Shaft Speed-Rear Component ID: 436 Component : SENSOR-PROP SHAFT SPEED-REAR Connector: Name : SENSOR-PROP SHAFT SPEED-REAR Color : # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (FULL TIME ETC) Pin Circuit Description 1 T70 20YL INPUT SPEED SENSOR 1 (N2) SIGNAL 2 T341 20DG/VT INPUT SPEED SENSOR 1 (N2) RETURN Component Location - 21 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Speed Sensor, Transfer Case > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Prop Shaft Speed-Front > Page 8888 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Speed Sensor, Transfer Case > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Prop Shaft Speed-Front Speed Sensor: Diagrams Sensor-Prop Shaft Speed-Front Component ID: 435 Component : SENSOR-PROP SHAFT SPEED-FRONT Connector: Name : SENSOR-PROP SHAFT SPEED-FRONT Color : # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (FULL TIME ETC) Pin Circuit Description 1 T71 20YL/OR INPUT SPEED SENSOR 2 (N3) RETURN 2 T340 20DG/VT INPUT SPEED SENSOR 2 (N3) SIGNAL Component Location - 21 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Speed Sensor, Transfer Case > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Prop Shaft Speed-Front > Page 8891 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Speed Sensor, Transfer Case > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Prop Shaft Speed-Front > Page 8892 Speed Sensor: Diagrams Sensor-Prop Shaft Speed-Rear Component ID: 436 Component : SENSOR-PROP SHAFT SPEED-REAR Connector: Name : SENSOR-PROP SHAFT SPEED-REAR Color : # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (FULL TIME ETC) Pin Circuit Description 1 T70 20YL INPUT SPEED SENSOR 1 (N2) SIGNAL 2 T341 20DG/VT INPUT SPEED SENSOR 1 (N2) RETURN Component Location - 21 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Speed Sensor, Transfer Case > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Prop Shaft Speed-Front > Page 8893 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Speed Sensor, Transfer Case > Component Information > Service and Repair > Sensor-Output Shaft Speed-Front Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Sensor-Output Shaft Speed-Front Removal REMOVAL 1. Raise the vehicle on a suitable hoist. 2. Disengage the wiring connector from the front output shaft speed sensor (1). 3. Remove the front output shaft speed sensor from the transfer case. Installation INSTALLATION 1. Install the front output shaft speed sensor (1) into the transfer case. Tighten the speed sensor to 17 Nm (12.5 ft.lbs.). 2. Engage the wiring connector to the front output shaft speed sensor. 3. Lower the vehicle. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Speed Sensor, Transfer Case > Component Information > Service and Repair > Sensor-Output Shaft Speed-Front > Page 8896 Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Sensor-Output Shaft Speed-Rear Removal REMOVAL 1. Raise the vehicle on a suitable hoist. 2. Disengage the wiring connector from the rear output shaft speed sensor (1). 3. Remove the rear output shaft speed sensor from the transfer case. Installation INSTALLATION 1. Install the rear output shaft speed sensor (1) into the transfer case. Tighten the speed sensor to 17 Nm (12.5 ft.lbs.). 2. Engage the wiring connector to the rear output shaft speed sensor. 3. Lower the vehicle. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Transfer Case Actuator > Component Information > Locations Transfer Case Actuator: Locations Component ID: 18 Component : ASSEMBLY-SHIFT MOTOR/MODE SENSOR Connector: Name : ASSEMBLY-SHIFT MOTOR/MODE SENSOR Color : BLACK # of pins : 8 Qualifier : (RFE FULL TIME ETC) Pin Circuit Description 1 T103 20YL/OR 5 VOLT SUPPLY 2 D201 20WT/DG MODE SENSOR A 3 G180 20VT/YL SENSOR RETURN 4 T101 16DG SHIFT MOTOR CONTROL B 5 T102 16YL SHIFT MOTOR CONTROL A 6 A940 20RD FUSED B(+) 7 T300 20YL/GY T-CASE MOTOR BRAKE SIGNAL 8-Component Location - 21 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Transfer Case Actuator > Component Information > Locations > Page 8900 Component Location - 24 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Transfer Case Actuator > Component Information > Locations > Page 8901 Component Location - 26 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Transfer Case Actuator > Component Information > Locations > Page 8902 Connector: Name : ASSEMBLY-SHIFT MOTOR/MODE SENSOR Color : DK. GRAY # of pins : 8 Qualifier : (RFE PART TIME ETC/RE ETC) Pin Circuit Description 1 T103 20YL/OR 5 VOLT SUPPLY 2 D201 20WT/DG MODE SENSOR A 3 G180 20VT/YL SENSOR RETURN 4 T101 16DG SHIFT MOTOR CONTROL B Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Transfer Case Actuator > Component Information > Locations > Page 8903 5 T102 16YL SHIFT MOTOR CONTROL A 6 A918 20RD FUSED B(+) 7-8-Component Location - 21 Component Location - 24 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Transfer Case Actuator > Component Information > Locations > Page 8904 Component Location - 26 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Transfer Case Actuator > Component Information > Locations > Page 8905 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Transfer Case Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Component ID 14 Transfer Case Actuator: Diagrams Component ID 14 Component ID: 14 Component : ASSEMBLY-SHIFT MOTOR/MODE SENSOR Connector: Name : ASSEMBLY-SHIFT MOTOR/MODE SENSOR Color : BLACK # of pins : 8 Qualifier : (RFE FULL TIME ETC) Pin Circuit Description 1 T103 20YL/OR 5 VOLT SUPPLY 2 D201 20WT/DG MODE SENSOR A 3 G180 20VT/YL SENSOR RETURN 4 T101 16DG SHIFT MOTOR CONTROL B 5 T102 16YL SHIFT MOTOR CONTROL A 6 A940 20RD FUSED B(+) 7 T300 20YL/GY T-CASE MOTOR BRAKE SIGNAL 8-Connector: Name : ASSEMBLY-SHIFT MOTOR/MODE SENSOR Color : DK. GRAY # of pins : 8 Qualifier : (RFE PART TIME ETC/RE ETC) Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Transfer Case Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Component ID 14 > Page 8908 Pin Circuit Description 1 T103 20YL/OR 5 VOLT SUPPLY 2 D201 20WT/DG MODE SENSOR A 3 G180 20VT/YL SENSOR RETURN 4 T101 16DG SHIFT MOTOR CONTROL B 5 T102 16YL SHIFT MOTOR CONTROL A 6 A918 20RD FUSED B(+) 7-8-- Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Transfer Case Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Component ID 14 > Page 8909 Transfer Case Actuator: Diagrams Component ID 18 Component ID: 18 Component : ASSEMBLY-SHIFT MOTOR/MODE SENSOR Connector: Name : ASSEMBLY-SHIFT MOTOR/MODE SENSOR Color : BLACK # of pins : 8 Qualifier : (RFE FULL TIME ETC) Pin Circuit Description 1 T103 20YL/OR 5 VOLT SUPPLY 2 D201 20WT/DG MODE SENSOR A 3 G180 20VT/YL SENSOR RETURN 4 T101 16DG SHIFT MOTOR CONTROL B 5 T102 16YL SHIFT MOTOR CONTROL A 6 A940 20RD FUSED B(+) 7 T300 20YL/GY T-CASE MOTOR BRAKE SIGNAL 8-Component Location - 21 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Transfer Case Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Component ID 14 > Page 8910 Component Location - 24 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Transfer Case Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Component ID 14 > Page 8911 Component Location - 26 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Transfer Case Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Component ID 14 > Page 8912 Connector: Name : ASSEMBLY-SHIFT MOTOR/MODE SENSOR Color : DK. GRAY # of pins : 8 Qualifier : (RFE PART TIME ETC/RE ETC) Pin Circuit Description 1 T103 20YL/OR 5 VOLT SUPPLY 2 D201 20WT/DG MODE SENSOR A 3 G180 20VT/YL SENSOR RETURN 4 T101 16DG SHIFT MOTOR CONTROL B Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Transfer Case Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Component ID 14 > Page 8913 5 T102 16YL SHIFT MOTOR CONTROL A 6 A918 20RD FUSED B(+) 7-8-Component Location - 21 Component Location - 24 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Transfer Case Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Component ID 14 > Page 8914 Component Location - 26 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Transfer Case Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Component ID 14 > Page 8915 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Transfer Case Actuator > Component Information > Description and Operation > NV243 Transfer Case Transfer Case Actuator: Description and Operation NV243 Transfer Case Description DESCRIPTION The shift motor (2) consists of a permanent magnet D.C. motor with gear reduction to convert a high speed-low torque device into a low speed-high torque device. The output of the device is coupled to a shaft which internally moves the mode and range forks that change the transfer case operating ranges. The motor is rated at 25 amps maximum at 23° C (72° F) with 10 volts at the motor leads. Operation OPERATION The transfer case shift motor responds to the Transfer Case Control Module (TCCM) commands to move the transfer case shift sector bi-directionally, as required, to obtain the transfer case operating mode indicated by the instrument panel mounted selector switch. Description DESCRIPTION The shift motor (2) consists of a permanent magnet D.C. motor with gear reduction to convert a high speed-low torque device into a low speed-high torque device. The output of the device is coupled to a shaft which internally moves the mode and range forks that change the transfer case operating ranges. The motor is rated at 25 amps maximum at 23° C (72° F) with 10 volts at the motor leads. Operation OPERATION The transfer case shift motor responds to the Transfer Case Control Module (TCCM) commands to move the transfer case shift sector bi-directionally, as required, to obtain the transfer case operating mode indicated by the instrument panel mounted selector switch. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Transfer Case Actuator > Component Information > Description and Operation > NV243 Transfer Case > Page 8918 Transfer Case Actuator: Description and Operation NV244 GENII Transfer Case Description DESCRIPTION The shift motor (2) consists of a permanent magnet D.C. motor with gear reduction to convert a high speed-low torque device into a low speed-high torque device. The output of the device is coupled to a shaft which internally moves the mode and range forks that change the transfer case operating ranges. The motor is rated at 25 amps maximum at 23° C (72° F) with 10 volts at the motor leads. Operation OPERATION The transfer case shift motor responds to the Transfer Case Control Module (TCCM) commands to move the transfer case shift sector bi-directionally, as required, to obtain the transfer case operating mode indicated by the instrument panel mounted selector switch. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Transfer Case Actuator > Component Information > Description and Operation > NV243 Transfer Case > Page 8919 Transfer Case Actuator: Description and Operation NV246 Transfer Case Description DESCRIPTION The shift motor consists of a permanent magnet D.C. motor with gear reduction to convert a high speed-low torque device into a low speed-high torque device. The output of the device is coupled to a shaft which internally moves the mode and range forks that change the transfer case operating ranges. The motor is rated at 25 amps maximum at 23° C (72° F) with 10 volts at the motor leads. Operation OPERATION The transfer case shift motor responds to the Front Control Module (FCM) commands to move the transfer case shift sector bi-directionally, as required, to obtain the transfer case operating mode indicated by the instrument panel mounted selector switch. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Transfer Case Actuator > Component Information > Description and Operation > NV243 Transfer Case > Page 8920 Transfer Case Actuator: Description and Operation NV273 Transfer Case Description DESCRIPTION The shift motor (2) consists of a permanent magnet D.C. motor with gear reduction to convert a high speed-low torque device into a low speed-high torque device. The output of the device is coupled to a shaft which internally moves the mode and range forks that change the transfer case operating ranges. The motor is rated at 25 amps maximum at 23° C (72° F) with 10 volts at the motor leads. Operation OPERATION The transfer case shift motor responds to the Transfer Case Control Module (TCCM) commands to move the transfer case shift sector bi-directionally, as required, to obtain the transfer case operating mode indicated by the instrument panel mounted selector switch. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Transfer Case Actuator > Component Information > Service and Repair > NV243 Transfer Case Transfer Case Actuator: Service and Repair NV243 Transfer Case Removal REMOVAL NOTE: New shift motor assemblies are shipped in the 2WD/AWD position. If a new shift motor assembly will be installed, it will be necessary to shift the transfer case to the 2WD/AWD position prior to motor removal. 1. Raise the vehicle on a suitable hoist. 2. Disengage the wiring connectors from the shift motor and mode sensor. 3. Remove the bolts (3) holding the shift motor and mode sensor assembly (2) onto the transfer case (1). 4. Separate the shift motor and mode sensor assembly (2) from the transfer case. Installation INSTALLATION 1. Verify that the shift sector o-ring is clean and properly positioned over the shift sector and against the transfer case. NOTE: Verify that the shift motor position and sector shaft orientation are aligned. It may be necessary to manually shift the transfer case if the shift motor and sector shaft are not aligned. 2. Position the shift motor and mode sensor assembly (2) onto the transfer case (1). 3. Install the bolts (3) to hold the assembly onto the transfer case. Tighten the bolts to 16-24 Nm (12-18 ft.lbs.). CAUTION: If the original shift motor and mode sensor assembly bolts are reused, be sure to use Mopar(R) Lock & Seal or Loctite(TM) 242 to replenish the lock patch material originally found on the bolts 4. Engage the wiring connectors to the shift motor and mode sensor. 5. Refill the transfer case as necessary. 6. Lower vehicle and verify transfer case operation. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Transfer Case Actuator > Component Information > Service and Repair > NV243 Transfer Case > Page 8923 Transfer Case Actuator: Service and Repair NV244 GENII Transfer Case Removal REMOVAL NOTE: New shift motor assemblies are shipped in the 2WD/AWD position. If a new shift motor assembly will be installed, it will be necessary to shift the transfer case to the 2WD/AWD position prior to motor removal. 1. Raise the vehicle on a suitable hoist. 2. Disengage the wiring connectors from the shift motor and mode sensor. 3. Remove the bolts (3) holding the shift motor and mode sensor assembly (2) onto the transfer case (1). 4. Separate the shift motor and mode sensor assembly (2) from the transfer case. Installation INSTALLATION 1. Verify that the shift sector o-ring is clean and properly positioned over the shift sector and against the transfer case. NOTE: Verify that the shift motor position and sector shaft orientation are aligned. It may be necessary to manually shift the transfer case if the shift motor and sector shaft are not aligned. 2. Position the shift motor and mode sensor assembly (2) onto the transfer case (1). 3. Install the bolts (3) to hold the assembly onto the transfer case. Tighten the bolts to 16-24 Nm (12-18 ft.lbs.). CAUTION: If the original shift motor and mode sensor assembly bolts are reused, be sure to use Mopar(R) Lock & Seal or Loctite(TM) 242 to replenish the lock patch material originally found on the bolts 4. Engage the wiring connectors to the shift motor and mode sensor. 5. Refill the transfer case as necessary. 6. Lower vehicle and verify transfer case operation. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Transfer Case Actuator > Component Information > Service and Repair > NV243 Transfer Case > Page 8924 Transfer Case Actuator: Service and Repair NV246 Transfer Case Removal REMOVAL Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Transfer Case Actuator > Component Information > Service and Repair > NV243 Transfer Case > Page 8925 ERROR: stackunderflow OFFENDING COMMAND: ~ STACK: Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Transfer Case Actuator > Component Information > Service and Repair > NV243 Transfer Case > Page 8926 Transfer Case Actuator: Service and Repair NV273 Transfer Case Removal REMOVAL NOTE: New shift motor assemblies are shipped in the 2WD/AWD position. If a new shift motor assembly will be installed, it will be necessary to shift the transfer case to the 2WD/AWD position prior to motor removal. 1. Raise the vehicle on a suitable hoist. 2. Disengage the wiring connectors from the shift motor and mode sensor. 3. Remove the bolts (3) holding the shift motor and mode sensor assembly (2) onto the transfer case (1). 4. Separate the shift motor and mode sensor assembly (2) from the transfer case. Installation INSTALLATION 1. Verify that the shift sector o-ring is clean and properly positioned over the shift sector and against the transfer case. NOTE: Verify that the shift motor position and sector shaft orientation are aligned. It may be necessary to manually shift the transfer case if the shift motor and sector shaft are not aligned. 2. Position the shift motor and mode sensor assembly (2) onto the transfer case (1). 3. Install the bolts (3) to hold the assembly onto the transfer case. Tighten the bolts to 16-24 Nm (12-18 ft.lbs.). CAUTION: If the original shift motor and mode sensor assembly bolts are reused, be sure to use Mopar(R) Lock & Seal or Loctite(TM) 242 to replenish the lock patch material originally found on the bolts 4. Engage the wiring connectors to the shift motor and mode sensor. 5. Refill the transfer case as necessary. 6. Lower vehicle and verify transfer case operation. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Transfer Case Clutch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Disassembly Transfer Case Clutch: Service and Repair Disassembly DISASSEMBLY 1. While applying slight downward pressure on the bearing support, remove the "C" clip with a suitable pry tool. 2. Remove the bearing and support. 3. Remove the reaction plate. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Transfer Case Clutch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Disassembly > Page 8931 4. Remove the return spring. 5. Remove the clutch pack spacer and clutch pack. 6. Remove the inner clutch hub retaining ring. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Transfer Case Clutch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Disassembly > Page 8932 7. Remove the inner clutch hub. 8. Remove the outer clutch hub from the mainshaft. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Transfer Case Clutch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Disassembly > Page 8933 Transfer Case Clutch: Service and Repair Assembly ASSEMBLY 1. Install the outer clutch hub onto the mainshaft. 2. Install the inner clutch hub onto the mainshaft. 3. Install the inner clutch hub retaining ring. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Transfer Case Clutch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Disassembly > Page 8934 4. Starting with a friction disc and ending with the clutch spacer (no tabs), install the clutch pack. 5. Install the return spring. 6. Install the reaction plate. 7. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Transfer Case Clutch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Disassembly > Page 8935 8. Place the support and bearing assembly into a shop press (1) and using a suitable spacer (2), press the bearing support (4) out of the bearing inner race (3). 9. Place the support and bearing assembly into a shop press (1) and using a suitable spacer (2), press the bearing support (3) into the bearing inner race (4). 10. Install the bearing and support into the clutch assembly. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Transfer Case Clutch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Disassembly > Page 8936 11. While applying slight downward pressure on the bearing support, install the "C" clip. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Overdrive Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > 42RLE Automatic Transmission Overdrive Solenoid: Description and Operation 42RLE Automatic Transmission Description DESCRIPTION The Solenoid/Pressure Switch Assembly (1) is inside the transmission and mounted to the valve body assembly. The assembly consists of four solenoids that control hydraulic pressure to the L/R, 2/4, OD, and UD friction elements (transmission clutches), and the torque converter clutch. The reverse clutch is controlled by line pressure from the manual valve in the valve body. The solenoids are contained within the Solenoid/Pressure Switch Assembly, and can only be serviced by replacing the assembly. The solenoid assembly also contains pressure switches that monitor and send hydraulic circuit information to the TCM. Likewise, the pressure switches can only be service by replacing the assembly. Operation OPERATION SOLENOIDS The solenoids receive electrical power from the Transmission Control Relay through a single wire. The TCM energizes or operates the solenoids individually by grounding the return wire of the solenoid needed. When a solenoid is energized, the solenoid valve shifts, and a fluid passage is opened or closed (vented or applied), depending on its default operating state. The result is an apply or release of a frictional element. The 2/4 and UD solenoids are normally applied, which allows fluid to pass through in their relaxed or "off" state. By design, this allows transmission limp-in (P,R,N,2) in the event of an electrical failure. The continuity of the solenoids and circuits are periodically tested. Each solenoid is turned on or off depending on its current state. An inductive spike should be detected by the TCM during this test. If no spike is detected, the circuit is tested again to verify the failure. In addition to the periodic testing, the solenoid circuits are tested if a speed ratio or pressure switch error occurs. PRESSURE SWITCHES The TCM relies on three pressure switches to monitor fluid pressure in the L/R, 2/4, and OD hydraulic circuits. The primary purpose of these switches is to help the TCM detect when clutch circuit hydraulic failures occur. The range for the pressure switch closing and opening points is 11-23 psi. Typically the switch opening point will be approximately one psi lower than the closing point. For example, a switch may close at 18 psi and open at 17 psi. The switches are continuously monitored by the TCM for the correct states (open or closed) in each gear as shown in the following chart: Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Overdrive Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 8944 A Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) will set if the TCM senses any switch open or closed at the wrong time in a given gear. The TCM also tests the 2/4 and OD pressure switches when they are normally off (OD and 2/4 are tested in 1st gear, OD in 2nd gear, and 2/4 in 3rd gear). The test simply verifies that they are operational, by looking for a closed state when the corresponding element is applied. Immediately after a shift into 1st, 2nd, or 3rd gear with the engine speed above 1000 rpm, the TCM momentarily turns on element pressure to the 2/4 and/or OD clutch circuits to identify that the appropriate switch has closed. If it doesn't close, it is tested again. If the switch fails to close the second time, the appropriate Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) will set. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Overdrive Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 8945 Overdrive Solenoid: Description and Operation 545RFE Automatic Transmission Description DESCRIPTION The transmission solenoid/TRS assembly is internal to the transmission and mounted on the valve body assembly. The assembly consists of six solenoids that control hydraulic pressure to the six friction elements (transmission clutches), and the torque converter clutch. The pressure control solenoid is located on the side of the solenoid/TRS assembly. The solenoid/TRS assembly also contains the Transmission Range Sensor (TRS) and five pressure switches that feed information to the TCM. Operation OPERATION SOLENOIDS Solenoids are used to control the L/R, 2C, 4C, OD, and UD friction elements. The reverse clutch is controlled by line pressure and the position of the manual valve in the valve body. All the solenoids are contained within the Solenoid and Pressure Switch Assembly. The solenoid and pressure switch assembly contains one additional solenoid, Multi-Select (MS), which serves primarily to provide 2nd and 3rd gear limp-in operation. The solenoids receive electrical power from the Transmission Control Relay through a single wire. The TCM energizes or operates the solenoids individually by grounding the return wire of the solenoid as necessary. When a solenoid is energized, the solenoid valve shifts, and a fluid passage is opened or closed (vented or applied), depending on its default operating state. The result is an apply or release of a frictional element. The MS and UD solenoids are normally applied to allow transmission limp-in in the event of an electrical failure. The continuity of the solenoids and circuits are periodically tested. Each solenoid is turned on or off depending on its current state. An inductive spike should be detected by the TCM during this test. If no spike is detected, the circuit is tested again to verify the failure. In addition to the periodic testing, the solenoid circuits are tested if a speed ratio or pressure switch error occurs. PRESSURE SWITCHES The TCM relies on five pressure switches to monitor fluid pressure in the L/R, 2C, 4C, UD, and OD hydraulic circuits. The primary purpose of these switches is to help the TCM detect when clutch circuit hydraulic failures occur. The switches close at 23 psi and open at 11 psi, and simply indicate whether or not pressure exists. The switches are continuously monitored by the TCM for the correct states (open or closed) in each gear as shown in the following charts and 545RFE PRESSURE SWITCH STATES: Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Overdrive Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 8946 A Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) will set if the TCM senses any switch open or closed at the wrong time in a given gear. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Overdrive Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 8947 Overdrive Solenoid: Description and Operation 68RFE Automatic Transmission Description DESCRIPTION The transmission solenoid/TRS assembly is internal to the transmission and mounted on the valve body assembly. The assembly consists of six solenoids that control hydraulic pressure to the six friction elements (transmission clutches), and the torque converter clutch. The pressure control solenoid is located on the side of the solenoid/TRS assembly. The solenoid/TRS assembly also contains the Transmission Range Sensor (TRS) and five pressure switches that feed information to the TCM. Operation OPERATION SOLENOIDS Solenoids are used to control the L/R, 2C, 4C, OD, and UD friction elements. The reverse clutch is controlled by line pressure and the position of the manual valve in the valve body. All the solenoids are contained within the Solenoid and Pressure Switch Assembly. The solenoid and pressure switch assembly contains one additional solenoid, Multi-Select (MS), which serves primarily to provide 3rd gear and reverse limp-in operation. The TCM energizes or operates the solenoids individually by grounding the return wire of the solenoid as necessary. When a solenoid is energized, the solenoid valve shifts, and a fluid passage is opened or closed (vented or applied), depending on its default operating state. The result is an apply or release of a frictional element. The MS and UD solenoids are normally applied to allow transmission limp-in in the event of an electrical failure. The continuity of the solenoids and circuits are periodically tested. Each solenoid is turned on or off depending on its current state. An inductive spike should be detected by the TCM during this test. If no spike is detected, the circuit is tested again to verify the failure. In addition to the periodic testing, the solenoid circuits are tested if a speed ratio or pressure switch error occurs. PRESSURE SWITCHES The TCM relies on five pressure switches to monitor fluid pressure in the L/R, 2C, 4C, UD, and OD hydraulic circuits. The primary purpose of these switches is to help the TCM detect when clutch circuit hydraulic failures occur. The switches close at 23 psi and open at 11 psi, and simply indicate whether or not pressure exists. The switches are continuously monitored by the TCM for the correct states (open or closed) in each gear as shown in the following charts and Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Overdrive Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 8948 A Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) will set if the TCM senses any switch open or closed at the wrong time in a given gear. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Overdrive Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 42RLE Automatic Transmission Overdrive Solenoid: Service and Repair 42RLE Automatic Transmission Removal REMOVAL NOTE: If the Solenoid/Pressure Switch Assembly is being replaced, the Quick Learn Procedure must be performed. See: Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Transmission Control Module/TCM Quick Learn 1. Raise vehicle on hoist. 2. Remove valve body assembly from transmission. See: Automatic Transmission/Transaxle/Valve Body/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/42RLE Automatic Transmission/Removal 3. Remove Solenoid/Pressure Switch Assembly retaining screws (2) from solenoid. 4. Remove Solenoid/Pressure Switch Assembly (1) and screen from valve body (2). Installation INSTALLATION NOTE: If the Solenoid/Pressure Switch assembly is being replaced, the Quick Learn Procedure must be performed. See: Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Transmission Control Module/TCM Quick Learn Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Overdrive Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 8951 1. Install Solenoid/Pressure Switch Assembly (1) and screen (3) to the separator and transfer plates. 2. Install and tighten retaining screws (2) to 5.5 Nm (50 in. lbs.) torque. 3. Install valve body. See: Automatic Transmission/Transaxle/Valve Body/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/42RLE Automatic Transmission/Installation Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Overdrive Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 8952 Overdrive Solenoid: Service and Repair 545RFE Automatic Transmission Removal REMOVAL NOTE: If the Transmission Solenoid/TRS Assembly is being replaced, the Quick Learn Procedure must be performed. See: Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Transmission Control Module/TCM Quick Learn 1. Remove the valve body from the transmission. See: Automatic Transmission/Transaxle/Valve Body/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/545RFE Automatic Transmission/Removal 2. Remove the bolts (1) holding the transmission solenoid/TRS assembly onto the valve body. 3. Separate the transmission solenoid/TRS assembly from the valve body. Installation INSTALLATION Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Overdrive Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 8953 1. Place TRS selector plate in the PARK position. 2. Position the transmission solenoid/TRS assembly onto the valve body. Be sure that both alignment dowels are fully seated in the valve body and that the TRS switch contacts are properly positioned in the selector plate 3. Install the bolts (1) to hold the transmission solenoid/TRS assembly onto the valve body. 4. Tighten the solenoid assembly screws adjacent to the arrows cast into the bottom of the valve body first. Tighten the screws to 6 Nm (50 in.lbs.). 5. Tighten the remainder of the solenoid assembly screws to 6 Nm (50 in.lbs.). 6. Install the valve body into the transmission. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Overdrive Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 8954 Overdrive Solenoid: Service and Repair 68RFE Automatic Transmission Removal REMOVAL NOTE: If the Transmission Solenoid/TRS Assembly is being replaced, the Quick Learn Procedure must be performed. See: Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Transmission Control Module/TCM Quick Learn 1. Remove the valve body from the transmission. 2. Remove the bolts (1) holding the transmission solenoid/TRS assembly onto the valve body. 3. Separate the transmission solenoid/TRS assembly from the valve body. Installation INSTALLATION Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Overdrive Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 8955 1. Place TRS selector plate in the PARK position. 2. Position the transmission solenoid/TRS assembly onto the valve body. Be sure that both alignment dowels are fully seated in the valve body and that the TRS switch contacts are properly positioned in the selector plate 3. Install the bolts (1) to hold the transmission solenoid/TRS assembly onto the valve body. 4. Tighten the solenoid assembly screws adjacent to the arrows cast into the bottom of the valve body first. Tighten the screws to 6 Nm (50 in.lbs.). 5. Tighten the remainder of the solenoid assembly screws to 6 Nm (50 in.lbs.). 6. Install the valve body into the transmission. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Assembly-Line Pressure Sensor/Variable Force Solenoid Pressure Regulating Solenoid: Locations Assembly-Line Pressure Sensor/Variable Force Solenoid Component ID: 17 Component : ASSEMBLY-LINE PRESSURE SENSOR/VARIABLE FORCE SOLENOID Connector: Name : ASSEMBLY-LINE PRESSURE SENSOR/VARIABLE FORCE SOLENOID Color : BLACK # of pins : 6 Qualifier : (RLE) Pin Circuit Description 1-2 F856 20YL/PK 5 VOLT SUPPLY 3 T38 20YL/BR LINE PRESSURE SIGNAL 4 K900 20DB/DG SENSOR GROUND 5 T16 18YL/OR TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT 6 T118 20DG LP VFS CONTROL Component Location - 19 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Assembly-Line Pressure Sensor/Variable Force Solenoid > Page 8960 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Assembly-Line Pressure Sensor/Variable Force Solenoid > Page 8961 Pressure Regulating Solenoid: Locations Assembly-Transmission Solenoid Component ID 15 Component ID: 15 Component : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID Connector: Name : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID Color : # of pins : 8 Qualifier : (RE) Pin Circuit Description 1 T16 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT 2 F856 18YL/PK 5 VOLT SUPPLY 3 K900 20DB/DG SENSOR GROUND 4 T38 18YL/BR GOVERNOR PRESSURE SENSOR SIGNAL 5 T118 18DG GOVERNOR PRESSURE SOLENOID CONTROL 6 T9 18DG/TN 3-4 SOLENOID CONTROL 7 T75 18YL/LB TORQUE CONVERTER CLUTCH SOLENOID CONTROL 8 T54 18DG/OR TRANSMISSION TEMPERATURE SIGNAL Component Location - 20 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Assembly-Line Pressure Sensor/Variable Force Solenoid > Page 8962 Component Location - 26 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Assembly-Line Pressure Sensor/Variable Force Solenoid > Page 8963 Connector: Name : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID C1 Color : # of pins : 10 Qualifier : (RC) Pin Circuit Description 1 T806 20DG/VT PRESSURE SIGNAL 7 2 T804 20YL/DB PRESSURE SIGNAL 5 3 T54 20DG/OR TRANSMISSION TEMPERATURE SIGNAL 4 T817 20YL/BR LINEAR 3 CONTROL Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Assembly-Line Pressure Sensor/Variable Force Solenoid > Page 8964 5 T813 20DG/LG LINEAR 1 CONTROL 6 T807 20DG/WT PRESSURE SIGNAL 8 7 T803 20DG/BR PRESSURE SIGNAL 4 8 T820 20YL/WT TEMPERATURE SENSOR GROUND 9 T816 20YL/PK LINEAR 3 GROUND 10 T812 20DG/TN LINEAR 1 GROUND Component Location - 20 Component Location - 26 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Assembly-Line Pressure Sensor/Variable Force Solenoid > Page 8965 Connector: Name : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID C2 Color : # of pins : 12 Qualifier : (RC) Pin Circuit Description 1 T800 20DG/BR PRESSURE SIGNAL 1 2 T805 20DG/OR PRESSURE SIGNAL 6 3 T809 20DG/YL SHIFT 2 CONTROL 4 T811 20DG/LB SHIFT 4 CONTROL Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Assembly-Line Pressure Sensor/Variable Force Solenoid > Page 8966 5 T818 20YL/OR LINEAR 4 GROUND 6 T814 20YL/BR LINEAR 2 GROUND 7 T801 20DG/RD PRESSURE SIGNAL 2 8 T802 20DG/PK PRESSURE SIGNAL 3 9 T810 20DG/DB SHIFT 3 CONTROL 10 T808 20DG/GY SHIFT 1 CONTROL 11 T821 20YL/GY LINEAR 4 CONTROL 12 T815 20YL/RD LINEAR 2 CONTROL Component Location - 20 Component Location - 26 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Assembly-Line Pressure Sensor/Variable Force Solenoid > Page 8967 Component ID 19 Component ID: 19 Component : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID Connector: Name : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID Color : # of pins : 8 Qualifier : (RE) Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Assembly-Line Pressure Sensor/Variable Force Solenoid > Page 8968 Pin Circuit Description 1 T16 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT 2 F856 18YL/PK 5 VOLT SUPPLY 3 K900 20DB/DG SENSOR GROUND 4 T38 18YL/BR GOVERNOR PRESSURE SENSOR SIGNAL 5 T118 18DG GOVERNOR PRESSURE SOLENOID CONTROL 6 T9 18DG/TN 3-4 SOLENOID CONTROL 7 T75 18YL/LB TORQUE CONVERTER CLUTCH SOLENOID CONTROL 8 T54 18DG/OR TRANSMISSION TEMPERATURE SIGNAL Component Location - 20 Component Location - 26 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Assembly-Line Pressure Sensor/Variable Force Solenoid > Page 8969 Connector: Name : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID C1 Color : # of pins : 10 Qualifier : (RC) Pin Circuit Description 1 T806 20DG/VT PRESSURE SIGNAL 7 2 T804 20YL/DB PRESSURE SIGNAL 5 3 T54 20DG/OR TRANSMISSION TEMPERATURE SIGNAL 4 T817 20YL/BR LINEAR 3 CONTROL Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Assembly-Line Pressure Sensor/Variable Force Solenoid > Page 8970 5 T813 20DG/LG LINEAR 1 CONTROL 6 T807 20DG/WT PRESSURE SIGNAL 8 7 T803 20DG/BR PRESSURE SIGNAL 4 8 T820 20YL/WT TEMPERATURE SENSOR GROUND 9 T816 20YL/PK LINEAR 3 GROUND 10 T812 20DG/TN LINEAR 1 GROUND Component Location - 20 Component Location - 26 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Assembly-Line Pressure Sensor/Variable Force Solenoid > Page 8971 Connector: Name : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID C2 Color : # of pins : 12 Qualifier : (RC) Pin Circuit Description 1 T800 20DG/BR PRESSURE SIGNAL 1 2 T805 20DG/OR PRESSURE SIGNAL 6 3 T809 20DG/YL SHIFT 2 CONTROL 4 T811 20DG/LB SHIFT 4 CONTROL Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Assembly-Line Pressure Sensor/Variable Force Solenoid > Page 8972 5 T818 20YL/OR LINEAR 4 GROUND 6 T814 20YL/BR LINEAR 2 GROUND 7 T801 20DG/RD PRESSURE SIGNAL 2 8 T802 20DG/PK PRESSURE SIGNAL 3 9 T810 20DG/DB SHIFT 3 CONTROL 10 T808 20DG/GY SHIFT 1 CONTROL 11 T821 20YL/GY LINEAR 4 CONTROL 12 T815 20YL/RD LINEAR 2 CONTROL Component Location - 20 Component Location - 26 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Assembly-Line Pressure Sensor/Variable Force Solenoid > Page 8973 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Assembly-Line Pressure Sensor/Variable Force Solenoid > Page 8974 Pressure Regulating Solenoid: Locations Assembly-Transmission Solenoid/Pressure Switch Component ID: 20 Component : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID/PRESSURE SWITCH Connector: Name : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID/PRESSURE SWITCH Color : LT. BROWN # of pins : 10 Qualifier : (RLE) Pin Circuit Description 1 T60 20YL/GY OD CONTROL 2 T59 20YL/LB UD CONTROL 3 T16 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT 4 T19 18YL/DB 2-4 CONTROL 5 T47 18YL/DG 2-4 PRESSURE SIGNAL 6 T9 20DG/TN OD PRESSURE SIGNAL 7 T20 20DG/WT L/R CONTROL 8-9-10 T50 20YL/TN L/R PRESSURE SIGNAL Component Location - 19 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Assembly-Line Pressure Sensor/Variable Force Solenoid > Page 8975 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Assembly-Line Pressure Sensor/Variable Force Solenoid > Page 8976 Pressure Regulating Solenoid: Locations Assembly-Transmission Solenoid/TRS Component ID: 21 Component : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID/TRS Connector: Name : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID/TRS Color : BLACK # of pins : 23 Qualifier : (RFE) Pin Circuit Description 1-2 T20 20DG/WT L/R CONTROL 3-4 T41 20YL/DB TRS T41 SIGNAL (P/N) 5 T42 20DG/YL TRS T42 SIGNAL 6-- 7 T60 20YL/GY OD SOLENOID CONTROL 8 T3 20DG/DB TRS T3 SIGNAL 9 T1 20DG/LB TRS T1 SIGNAL 10 T16 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT 11 T48 20BR/YL 4C PRESSURE SIGNAL 12 T118 20DG LINE PRESSURE CONTROL 13 T4 20DG/RD TRS T2 SIGNAL 13 T4 20DG/LB TRS T2 SIGNAL 14 T50 20DG/PK L/R PRESSURE SIGNAL 14 T50 20YL/TN L/R PRESSURE SIGNAL 15 T147 20DG/YL 2C PRESSURE SIGNAL 16 T9 20DG/TN OD PRESSURE SIGNAL 17 T59 20YL/LB UD CONTROL 18 T29 20YL/WT UD PRESSURE SIGNAL 19 T259 20YL/DG 4C CONTROL 20 T219 20YL/LG 2C CONTROL 21 T140 20YL/GY MS CONTROL 22 T160 20DG/WT SENSOR GROUND 22 K900 20DB/DG SENSOR GROUND 23 T54 20DG/OR TRANSMISSION TEMPERATURE SIGNAL Component Location - 21 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Assembly-Line Pressure Sensor/Variable Force Solenoid > Page 8977 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Assembly-Line Pressure Sensor/Variable Force Solenoid Pressure Regulating Solenoid: Diagrams Assembly-Line Pressure Sensor/Variable Force Solenoid Component ID: 17 Component : ASSEMBLY-LINE PRESSURE SENSOR/VARIABLE FORCE SOLENOID Connector: Name : ASSEMBLY-LINE PRESSURE SENSOR/VARIABLE FORCE SOLENOID Color : BLACK # of pins : 6 Qualifier : (RLE) Pin Circuit Description 1-2 F856 20YL/PK 5 VOLT SUPPLY 3 T38 20YL/BR LINE PRESSURE SIGNAL 4 K900 20DB/DG SENSOR GROUND 5 T16 18YL/OR TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT 6 T118 20DG LP VFS CONTROL Component Location - 19 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Assembly-Line Pressure Sensor/Variable Force Solenoid > Page 8980 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Assembly-Line Pressure Sensor/Variable Force Solenoid > Page 8981 Pressure Regulating Solenoid: Diagrams Assembly-Transmission Solenoid Component ID 15 Component ID: 15 Component : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID Connector: Name : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID Color : # of pins : 8 Qualifier : (RE) Pin Circuit Description 1 T16 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT 2 F856 18YL/PK 5 VOLT SUPPLY 3 K900 20DB/DG SENSOR GROUND 4 T38 18YL/BR GOVERNOR PRESSURE SENSOR SIGNAL 5 T118 18DG GOVERNOR PRESSURE SOLENOID CONTROL 6 T9 18DG/TN 3-4 SOLENOID CONTROL 7 T75 18YL/LB TORQUE CONVERTER CLUTCH SOLENOID CONTROL 8 T54 18DG/OR TRANSMISSION TEMPERATURE SIGNAL Component Location - 20 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Assembly-Line Pressure Sensor/Variable Force Solenoid > Page 8982 Component Location - 26 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Assembly-Line Pressure Sensor/Variable Force Solenoid > Page 8983 Connector: Name : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID C1 Color : # of pins : 10 Qualifier : (RC) Pin Circuit Description 1 T806 20DG/VT PRESSURE SIGNAL 7 2 T804 20YL/DB PRESSURE SIGNAL 5 3 T54 20DG/OR TRANSMISSION TEMPERATURE SIGNAL 4 T817 20YL/BR LINEAR 3 CONTROL Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Assembly-Line Pressure Sensor/Variable Force Solenoid > Page 8984 5 T813 20DG/LG LINEAR 1 CONTROL 6 T807 20DG/WT PRESSURE SIGNAL 8 7 T803 20DG/BR PRESSURE SIGNAL 4 8 T820 20YL/WT TEMPERATURE SENSOR GROUND 9 T816 20YL/PK LINEAR 3 GROUND 10 T812 20DG/TN LINEAR 1 GROUND Component Location - 20 Component Location - 26 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Assembly-Line Pressure Sensor/Variable Force Solenoid > Page 8985 Connector: Name : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID C2 Color : # of pins : 12 Qualifier : (RC) Pin Circuit Description 1 T800 20DG/BR PRESSURE SIGNAL 1 2 T805 20DG/OR PRESSURE SIGNAL 6 3 T809 20DG/YL SHIFT 2 CONTROL 4 T811 20DG/LB SHIFT 4 CONTROL Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Assembly-Line Pressure Sensor/Variable Force Solenoid > Page 8986 5 T818 20YL/OR LINEAR 4 GROUND 6 T814 20YL/BR LINEAR 2 GROUND 7 T801 20DG/RD PRESSURE SIGNAL 2 8 T802 20DG/PK PRESSURE SIGNAL 3 9 T810 20DG/DB SHIFT 3 CONTROL 10 T808 20DG/GY SHIFT 1 CONTROL 11 T821 20YL/GY LINEAR 4 CONTROL 12 T815 20YL/RD LINEAR 2 CONTROL Component Location - 20 Component Location - 26 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Assembly-Line Pressure Sensor/Variable Force Solenoid > Page 8987 Component ID 19 Component ID: 19 Component : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID Connector: Name : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID Color : # of pins : 8 Qualifier : (RE) Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Assembly-Line Pressure Sensor/Variable Force Solenoid > Page 8988 Pin Circuit Description 1 T16 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT 2 F856 18YL/PK 5 VOLT SUPPLY 3 K900 20DB/DG SENSOR GROUND 4 T38 18YL/BR GOVERNOR PRESSURE SENSOR SIGNAL 5 T118 18DG GOVERNOR PRESSURE SOLENOID CONTROL 6 T9 18DG/TN 3-4 SOLENOID CONTROL 7 T75 18YL/LB TORQUE CONVERTER CLUTCH SOLENOID CONTROL 8 T54 18DG/OR TRANSMISSION TEMPERATURE SIGNAL Component Location - 20 Component Location - 26 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Assembly-Line Pressure Sensor/Variable Force Solenoid > Page 8989 Connector: Name : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID C1 Color : # of pins : 10 Qualifier : (RC) Pin Circuit Description 1 T806 20DG/VT PRESSURE SIGNAL 7 2 T804 20YL/DB PRESSURE SIGNAL 5 3 T54 20DG/OR TRANSMISSION TEMPERATURE SIGNAL 4 T817 20YL/BR LINEAR 3 CONTROL Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Assembly-Line Pressure Sensor/Variable Force Solenoid > Page 8990 5 T813 20DG/LG LINEAR 1 CONTROL 6 T807 20DG/WT PRESSURE SIGNAL 8 7 T803 20DG/BR PRESSURE SIGNAL 4 8 T820 20YL/WT TEMPERATURE SENSOR GROUND 9 T816 20YL/PK LINEAR 3 GROUND 10 T812 20DG/TN LINEAR 1 GROUND Component Location - 20 Component Location - 26 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Assembly-Line Pressure Sensor/Variable Force Solenoid > Page 8991 Connector: Name : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID C2 Color : # of pins : 12 Qualifier : (RC) Pin Circuit Description 1 T800 20DG/BR PRESSURE SIGNAL 1 2 T805 20DG/OR PRESSURE SIGNAL 6 3 T809 20DG/YL SHIFT 2 CONTROL 4 T811 20DG/LB SHIFT 4 CONTROL Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Assembly-Line Pressure Sensor/Variable Force Solenoid > Page 8992 5 T818 20YL/OR LINEAR 4 GROUND 6 T814 20YL/BR LINEAR 2 GROUND 7 T801 20DG/RD PRESSURE SIGNAL 2 8 T802 20DG/PK PRESSURE SIGNAL 3 9 T810 20DG/DB SHIFT 3 CONTROL 10 T808 20DG/GY SHIFT 1 CONTROL 11 T821 20YL/GY LINEAR 4 CONTROL 12 T815 20YL/RD LINEAR 2 CONTROL Component Location - 20 Component Location - 26 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Assembly-Line Pressure Sensor/Variable Force Solenoid > Page 8993 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Assembly-Line Pressure Sensor/Variable Force Solenoid > Page 8994 Pressure Regulating Solenoid: Diagrams Assembly-Transmission Solenoid/Pressure Switch Component ID: 20 Component : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID/PRESSURE SWITCH Connector: Name : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID/PRESSURE SWITCH Color : LT. BROWN # of pins : 10 Qualifier : (RLE) Pin Circuit Description 1 T60 20YL/GY OD CONTROL 2 T59 20YL/LB UD CONTROL 3 T16 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT 4 T19 18YL/DB 2-4 CONTROL 5 T47 18YL/DG 2-4 PRESSURE SIGNAL 6 T9 20DG/TN OD PRESSURE SIGNAL 7 T20 20DG/WT L/R CONTROL 8-9-10 T50 20YL/TN L/R PRESSURE SIGNAL Component Location - 19 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Assembly-Line Pressure Sensor/Variable Force Solenoid > Page 8995 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Assembly-Line Pressure Sensor/Variable Force Solenoid > Page 8996 Pressure Regulating Solenoid: Diagrams Assembly-Transmission Solenoid/TRS Component ID: 21 Component : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID/TRS Connector: Name : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID/TRS Color : BLACK # of pins : 23 Qualifier : (RFE) Pin Circuit Description 1-2 T20 20DG/WT L/R CONTROL 3-4 T41 20YL/DB TRS T41 SIGNAL (P/N) 5 T42 20DG/YL TRS T42 SIGNAL 6-- 7 T60 20YL/GY OD SOLENOID CONTROL 8 T3 20DG/DB TRS T3 SIGNAL 9 T1 20DG/LB TRS T1 SIGNAL 10 T16 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT 11 T48 20BR/YL 4C PRESSURE SIGNAL 12 T118 20DG LINE PRESSURE CONTROL 13 T4 20DG/RD TRS T2 SIGNAL 13 T4 20DG/LB TRS T2 SIGNAL 14 T50 20DG/PK L/R PRESSURE SIGNAL 14 T50 20YL/TN L/R PRESSURE SIGNAL 15 T147 20DG/YL 2C PRESSURE SIGNAL 16 T9 20DG/TN OD PRESSURE SIGNAL 17 T59 20YL/LB UD CONTROL 18 T29 20YL/WT UD PRESSURE SIGNAL 19 T259 20YL/DG 4C CONTROL 20 T219 20YL/LG 2C CONTROL 21 T140 20YL/GY MS CONTROL 22 T160 20DG/WT SENSOR GROUND 22 K900 20DB/DG SENSOR GROUND 23 T54 20DG/OR TRANSMISSION TEMPERATURE SIGNAL Component Location - 21 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Assembly-Line Pressure Sensor/Variable Force Solenoid > Page 8997 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > 42RLE Automatic Transmission Pressure Regulating Solenoid: Description and Operation 42RLE Automatic Transmission Description DESCRIPTION The pressure control solenoid (1) is mounted on the top of the valve body, next to the line pressure sensor (2). The TCM utilizes a closed-loop system to control transmission line pressure. The system contains a variable force style solenoid, the Pressure Control Solenoid. The solenoid is duty cycle controlled by the TCM to vent the unnecessary line pressure supplied by the oil pump back to the sump. The system also contains a variable pressure style sensor, the Line Pressure Sensor, which is a direct input to the TCM. The line pressure solenoid monitors the transmission line pressure and completes the feedback loop to the TCM. The TCM uses this information to adjust its control of the pressure control solenoid to achieve the desired line pressure. Operation OPERATION The pressure control solenoid (PCS) is a variable force (VFS) style solenoid. A VFS solenoid is an electro-hydraulic actuator, combining a solenoid and a regulating valve. The transmission control module varies the current for the PCS, which varies the pressure in the line pressure hydraulic circuit. When the current (duty cycle) of the PCS is low, the pressure in the circuit is higher. At 0 current (0% duty cycle), the pressure is at the maximum value. Conversely, when the current is maximized (100% duty cycle), the pressure in the circuit is at the lowest possible value. Description DESCRIPTION Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 9000 The Solenoid/Pressure Switch Assembly (1) is inside the transmission and mounted to the valve body assembly. The assembly consists of four solenoids that control hydraulic pressure to the L/R, 2/4, OD, and UD friction elements (transmission clutches), and the torque converter clutch. The reverse clutch is controlled by line pressure from the manual valve in the valve body. The solenoids are contained within the Solenoid/Pressure Switch Assembly, and can only be serviced by replacing the assembly. The solenoid assembly also contains pressure switches that monitor and send hydraulic circuit information to the TCM. Likewise, the pressure switches can only be service by replacing the assembly. Operation OPERATION SOLENOIDS The solenoids receive electrical power from the Transmission Control Relay through a single wire. The TCM energizes or operates the solenoids individually by grounding the return wire of the solenoid needed. When a solenoid is energized, the solenoid valve shifts, and a fluid passage is opened or closed (vented or applied), depending on its default operating state. The result is an apply or release of a frictional element. The 2/4 and UD solenoids are normally applied, which allows fluid to pass through in their relaxed or "off" state. By design, this allows transmission limp-in (P,R,N,2) in the event of an electrical failure. The continuity of the solenoids and circuits are periodically tested. Each solenoid is turned on or off depending on its current state. An inductive spike should be detected by the TCM during this test. If no spike is detected, the circuit is tested again to verify the failure. In addition to the periodic testing, the solenoid circuits are tested if a speed ratio or pressure switch error occurs. PRESSURE SWITCHES The TCM relies on three pressure switches to monitor fluid pressure in the L/R, 2/4, and OD hydraulic circuits. The primary purpose of these switches is to help the TCM detect when clutch circuit hydraulic failures occur. The range for the pressure switch closing and opening points is 11-23 psi. Typically the switch opening point will be approximately one psi lower than the closing point. For example, a switch may close at 18 psi and open at 17 psi. The switches are continuously monitored by the TCM for the correct states (open or closed) in each gear as shown in the following chart: Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 9001 A Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) will set if the TCM senses any switch open or closed at the wrong time in a given gear. The TCM also tests the 2/4 and OD pressure switches when they are normally off (OD and 2/4 are tested in 1st gear, OD in 2nd gear, and 2/4 in 3rd gear). The test simply verifies that they are operational, by looking for a closed state when the corresponding element is applied. Immediately after a shift into 1st, 2nd, or 3rd gear with the engine speed above 1000 rpm, the TCM momentarily turns on element pressure to the 2/4 and/or OD clutch circuits to identify that the appropriate switch has closed. If it doesn't close, it is tested again. If the switch fails to close the second time, the appropriate Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) will set. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 9002 Pressure Regulating Solenoid: Description and Operation 545RFE Automatic Transmission Description DESCRIPTION The transmission solenoid/TRS assembly is internal to the transmission and mounted on the valve body assembly. The assembly consists of six solenoids that control hydraulic pressure to the six friction elements (transmission clutches), and the torque converter clutch. The pressure control solenoid is located on the side of the solenoid/TRS assembly. The solenoid/TRS assembly also contains the Transmission Range Sensor (TRS) and five pressure switches that feed information to the TCM. Operation OPERATION SOLENOIDS Solenoids are used to control the L/R, 2C, 4C, OD, and UD friction elements. The reverse clutch is controlled by line pressure and the position of the manual valve in the valve body. All the solenoids are contained within the Solenoid and Pressure Switch Assembly. The solenoid and pressure switch assembly contains one additional solenoid, Multi-Select (MS), which serves primarily to provide 2nd and 3rd gear limp-in operation. The solenoids receive electrical power from the Transmission Control Relay through a single wire. The TCM energizes or operates the solenoids individually by grounding the return wire of the solenoid as necessary. When a solenoid is energized, the solenoid valve shifts, and a fluid passage is opened or closed (vented or applied), depending on its default operating state. The result is an apply or release of a frictional element. The MS and UD solenoids are normally applied to allow transmission limp-in in the event of an electrical failure. The continuity of the solenoids and circuits are periodically tested. Each solenoid is turned on or off depending on its current state. An inductive spike should be detected by the TCM during this test. If no spike is detected, the circuit is tested again to verify the failure. In addition to the periodic testing, the solenoid circuits are tested if a speed ratio or pressure switch error occurs. PRESSURE SWITCHES The TCM relies on five pressure switches to monitor fluid pressure in the L/R, 2C, 4C, UD, and OD hydraulic circuits. The primary purpose of these switches is to help the TCM detect when clutch circuit hydraulic failures occur. The switches close at 23 psi and open at 11 psi, and simply indicate whether or not pressure exists. The switches are continuously monitored by the TCM for the correct states (open or closed) in each gear as shown in the following charts and 545RFE PRESSURE SWITCH STATES: Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 9003 A Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) will set if the TCM senses any switch open or closed at the wrong time in a given gear. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 9004 Pressure Regulating Solenoid: Description and Operation 68RFE Automatic Transmission Description DESCRIPTION The transmission solenoid/TRS assembly is internal to the transmission and mounted on the valve body assembly. The assembly consists of six solenoids that control hydraulic pressure to the six friction elements (transmission clutches), and the torque converter clutch. The pressure control solenoid is located on the side of the solenoid/TRS assembly. The solenoid/TRS assembly also contains the Transmission Range Sensor (TRS) and five pressure switches that feed information to the TCM. Operation OPERATION SOLENOIDS Solenoids are used to control the L/R, 2C, 4C, OD, and UD friction elements. The reverse clutch is controlled by line pressure and the position of the manual valve in the valve body. All the solenoids are contained within the Solenoid and Pressure Switch Assembly. The solenoid and pressure switch assembly contains one additional solenoid, Multi-Select (MS), which serves primarily to provide 3rd gear and reverse limp-in operation. The TCM energizes or operates the solenoids individually by grounding the return wire of the solenoid as necessary. When a solenoid is energized, the solenoid valve shifts, and a fluid passage is opened or closed (vented or applied), depending on its default operating state. The result is an apply or release of a frictional element. The MS and UD solenoids are normally applied to allow transmission limp-in in the event of an electrical failure. The continuity of the solenoids and circuits are periodically tested. Each solenoid is turned on or off depending on its current state. An inductive spike should be detected by the TCM during this test. If no spike is detected, the circuit is tested again to verify the failure. In addition to the periodic testing, the solenoid circuits are tested if a speed ratio or pressure switch error occurs. PRESSURE SWITCHES The TCM relies on five pressure switches to monitor fluid pressure in the L/R, 2C, 4C, UD, and OD hydraulic circuits. The primary purpose of these switches is to help the TCM detect when clutch circuit hydraulic failures occur. The switches close at 23 psi and open at 11 psi, and simply indicate whether or not pressure exists. The switches are continuously monitored by the TCM for the correct states (open or closed) in each gear as shown in the following charts and Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 9005 A Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) will set if the TCM senses any switch open or closed at the wrong time in a given gear. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 42RLE Automatic Transmission Pressure Regulating Solenoid: Service and Repair 42RLE Automatic Transmission Removal REMOVAL 1. Remove the valve body from the transmission. See: Automatic Transmission/Transaxle/Valve Body/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/42RLE Automatic Transmission/Removal 2. Remove the electrical connectors from the pressure control solenoid (1) and the line pressure sensor (2). 3. Remove the screws (6) holding the pressure control solenoid (1) and line pressure sensor (2) to the valve body. 4. Remove the pressure control solenoid and line pressure sensor from the valve body. Installation INSTALLATION 1. Install the pressure control solenoid (1) and line pressure sensor (2) into the valve body. 2. Install the screws (6) to hold the pressure control solenoid (1) and line pressure sensor (2) to the valve body. 3. Install the electrical connectors to the pressure control solenoid (1) and the line pressure sensor (2). 4. Install the valve body into the transmission. See: Automatic Transmission/Transaxle/Valve Body/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/42RLE Automatic Transmission/Installation Removal Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 9008 REMOVAL NOTE: If the Solenoid/Pressure Switch Assembly is being replaced, the Quick Learn Procedure must be performed. See: Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Transmission Control Module/TCM Quick Learn 1. Raise vehicle on hoist. 2. Remove valve body assembly from transmission. See: Automatic Transmission/Transaxle/Valve Body/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/42RLE Automatic Transmission/Removal 3. Remove Solenoid/Pressure Switch Assembly retaining screws (2) from solenoid. 4. Remove Solenoid/Pressure Switch Assembly (1) and screen from valve body (2). Installation INSTALLATION NOTE: If the Solenoid/Pressure Switch assembly is being replaced, the Quick Learn Procedure must be performed. See: Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Transmission Control Module/TCM Quick Learn 1. Install Solenoid/Pressure Switch Assembly (1) and screen (3) to the separator and transfer plates. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 9009 2. Install and tighten retaining screws (2) to 5.5 Nm (50 in. lbs.) torque. 3. Install valve body. See: Automatic Transmission/Transaxle/Valve Body/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/42RLE Automatic Transmission/Installation Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 9010 Pressure Regulating Solenoid: Service and Repair 545RFE Automatic Transmission Removal REMOVAL NOTE: If the Transmission Solenoid/TRS Assembly is being replaced, the Quick Learn Procedure must be performed. See: Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Transmission Control Module/TCM Quick Learn 1. Remove the valve body from the transmission. See: Automatic Transmission/Transaxle/Valve Body/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/545RFE Automatic Transmission/Removal 2. Remove the bolts (1) holding the transmission solenoid/TRS assembly onto the valve body. 3. Separate the transmission solenoid/TRS assembly from the valve body. Installation INSTALLATION Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 9011 1. Place TRS selector plate in the PARK position. 2. Position the transmission solenoid/TRS assembly onto the valve body. Be sure that both alignment dowels are fully seated in the valve body and that the TRS switch contacts are properly positioned in the selector plate 3. Install the bolts (1) to hold the transmission solenoid/TRS assembly onto the valve body. 4. Tighten the solenoid assembly screws adjacent to the arrows cast into the bottom of the valve body first. Tighten the screws to 6 Nm (50 in.lbs.). 5. Tighten the remainder of the solenoid assembly screws to 6 Nm (50 in.lbs.). 6. Install the valve body into the transmission. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 9012 Pressure Regulating Solenoid: Service and Repair 68RFE Automatic Transmission Removal REMOVAL NOTE: If the Transmission Solenoid/TRS Assembly is being replaced, the Quick Learn Procedure must be performed. See: Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Transmission Control Module/TCM Quick Learn 1. Remove the valve body from the transmission. 2. Remove the bolts (1) holding the transmission solenoid/TRS assembly onto the valve body. 3. Separate the transmission solenoid/TRS assembly from the valve body. Installation INSTALLATION Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 9013 1. Place TRS selector plate in the PARK position. 2. Position the transmission solenoid/TRS assembly onto the valve body. Be sure that both alignment dowels are fully seated in the valve body and that the TRS switch contacts are properly positioned in the selector plate 3. Install the bolts (1) to hold the transmission solenoid/TRS assembly onto the valve body. 4. Tighten the solenoid assembly screws adjacent to the arrows cast into the bottom of the valve body first. Tighten the screws to 6 Nm (50 in.lbs.). 5. Tighten the remainder of the solenoid assembly screws to 6 Nm (50 in.lbs.). 6. Install the valve body into the transmission. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Interlock Solenoid > Component Information > Locations Shift Interlock Solenoid: Locations Component ID: 455 Component : SOLENOID-BRAKE TRANSMISSION SHIFT INTERLOCK Connector: Name : SOLENOID-BRAKE TRANSMISSION SHIFT INTERLOCK Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Pin Circuit Description 1 K32 18DB/YL BTSI SOLENOID CONTROL 2 Z101 18BK/VT GROUND Component Location - 47 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Interlock Solenoid > Component Information > Locations > Page 9017 Component Location - 42 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Interlock Solenoid > Component Information > Locations > Page 9018 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Interlock Solenoid > Component Information > Locations > Page 9019 Shift Interlock Solenoid: Diagrams Component ID: 455 Component : SOLENOID-BRAKE TRANSMISSION SHIFT INTERLOCK Connector: Name : SOLENOID-BRAKE TRANSMISSION SHIFT INTERLOCK Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Pin Circuit Description 1 K32 18DB/YL BTSI SOLENOID CONTROL 2 Z101 18BK/VT GROUND Component Location - 47 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Interlock Solenoid > Component Information > Locations > Page 9020 Component Location - 42 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Interlock Solenoid > Component Information > Locations > Page 9021 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Assembly-Transmission Solenoid Shift Solenoid: Locations Assembly-Transmission Solenoid Component ID 15 Component ID: 15 Component : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID Connector: Name : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID Color : # of pins : 8 Qualifier : (RE) Pin Circuit Description 1 T16 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT 2 F856 18YL/PK 5 VOLT SUPPLY 3 K900 20DB/DG SENSOR GROUND 4 T38 18YL/BR GOVERNOR PRESSURE SENSOR SIGNAL 5 T118 18DG GOVERNOR PRESSURE SOLENOID CONTROL 6 T9 18DG/TN 3-4 SOLENOID CONTROL 7 T75 18YL/LB TORQUE CONVERTER CLUTCH SOLENOID CONTROL 8 T54 18DG/OR TRANSMISSION TEMPERATURE SIGNAL Component Location - 20 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Assembly-Transmission Solenoid > Page 9026 Component Location - 26 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Assembly-Transmission Solenoid > Page 9027 Connector: Name : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID C1 Color : # of pins : 10 Qualifier : (RC) Pin Circuit Description 1 T806 20DG/VT PRESSURE SIGNAL 7 2 T804 20YL/DB PRESSURE SIGNAL 5 3 T54 20DG/OR TRANSMISSION TEMPERATURE SIGNAL 4 T817 20YL/BR LINEAR 3 CONTROL Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Assembly-Transmission Solenoid > Page 9028 5 T813 20DG/LG LINEAR 1 CONTROL 6 T807 20DG/WT PRESSURE SIGNAL 8 7 T803 20DG/BR PRESSURE SIGNAL 4 8 T820 20YL/WT TEMPERATURE SENSOR GROUND 9 T816 20YL/PK LINEAR 3 GROUND 10 T812 20DG/TN LINEAR 1 GROUND Component Location - 20 Component Location - 26 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Assembly-Transmission Solenoid > Page 9029 Connector: Name : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID C2 Color : # of pins : 12 Qualifier : (RC) Pin Circuit Description 1 T800 20DG/BR PRESSURE SIGNAL 1 2 T805 20DG/OR PRESSURE SIGNAL 6 3 T809 20DG/YL SHIFT 2 CONTROL 4 T811 20DG/LB SHIFT 4 CONTROL Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Assembly-Transmission Solenoid > Page 9030 5 T818 20YL/OR LINEAR 4 GROUND 6 T814 20YL/BR LINEAR 2 GROUND 7 T801 20DG/RD PRESSURE SIGNAL 2 8 T802 20DG/PK PRESSURE SIGNAL 3 9 T810 20DG/DB SHIFT 3 CONTROL 10 T808 20DG/GY SHIFT 1 CONTROL 11 T821 20YL/GY LINEAR 4 CONTROL 12 T815 20YL/RD LINEAR 2 CONTROL Component Location - 20 Component Location - 26 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Assembly-Transmission Solenoid > Page 9031 Component ID 19 Component ID: 19 Component : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID Connector: Name : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID Color : # of pins : 8 Qualifier : (RE) Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Assembly-Transmission Solenoid > Page 9032 Pin Circuit Description 1 T16 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT 2 F856 18YL/PK 5 VOLT SUPPLY 3 K900 20DB/DG SENSOR GROUND 4 T38 18YL/BR GOVERNOR PRESSURE SENSOR SIGNAL 5 T118 18DG GOVERNOR PRESSURE SOLENOID CONTROL 6 T9 18DG/TN 3-4 SOLENOID CONTROL 7 T75 18YL/LB TORQUE CONVERTER CLUTCH SOLENOID CONTROL 8 T54 18DG/OR TRANSMISSION TEMPERATURE SIGNAL Component Location - 20 Component Location - 26 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Assembly-Transmission Solenoid > Page 9033 Connector: Name : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID C1 Color : # of pins : 10 Qualifier : (RC) Pin Circuit Description 1 T806 20DG/VT PRESSURE SIGNAL 7 2 T804 20YL/DB PRESSURE SIGNAL 5 3 T54 20DG/OR TRANSMISSION TEMPERATURE SIGNAL 4 T817 20YL/BR LINEAR 3 CONTROL Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Assembly-Transmission Solenoid > Page 9034 5 T813 20DG/LG LINEAR 1 CONTROL 6 T807 20DG/WT PRESSURE SIGNAL 8 7 T803 20DG/BR PRESSURE SIGNAL 4 8 T820 20YL/WT TEMPERATURE SENSOR GROUND 9 T816 20YL/PK LINEAR 3 GROUND 10 T812 20DG/TN LINEAR 1 GROUND Component Location - 20 Component Location - 26 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Assembly-Transmission Solenoid > Page 9035 Connector: Name : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID C2 Color : # of pins : 12 Qualifier : (RC) Pin Circuit Description 1 T800 20DG/BR PRESSURE SIGNAL 1 2 T805 20DG/OR PRESSURE SIGNAL 6 3 T809 20DG/YL SHIFT 2 CONTROL 4 T811 20DG/LB SHIFT 4 CONTROL Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Assembly-Transmission Solenoid > Page 9036 5 T818 20YL/OR LINEAR 4 GROUND 6 T814 20YL/BR LINEAR 2 GROUND 7 T801 20DG/RD PRESSURE SIGNAL 2 8 T802 20DG/PK PRESSURE SIGNAL 3 9 T810 20DG/DB SHIFT 3 CONTROL 10 T808 20DG/GY SHIFT 1 CONTROL 11 T821 20YL/GY LINEAR 4 CONTROL 12 T815 20YL/RD LINEAR 2 CONTROL Component Location - 20 Component Location - 26 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Assembly-Transmission Solenoid > Page 9037 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Assembly-Transmission Solenoid > Page 9038 Shift Solenoid: Locations Assembly-Transmission Solenoid/Pressure Switch Component ID: 20 Component : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID/PRESSURE SWITCH Connector: Name : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID/PRESSURE SWITCH Color : LT. BROWN # of pins : 10 Qualifier : (RLE) Pin Circuit Description 1 T60 20YL/GY OD CONTROL 2 T59 20YL/LB UD CONTROL 3 T16 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT 4 T19 18YL/DB 2-4 CONTROL 5 T47 18YL/DG 2-4 PRESSURE SIGNAL 6 T9 20DG/TN OD PRESSURE SIGNAL 7 T20 20DG/WT L/R CONTROL 8-9-10 T50 20YL/TN L/R PRESSURE SIGNAL Component Location - 19 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Assembly-Transmission Solenoid > Page 9039 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Assembly-Transmission Solenoid > Page 9040 Shift Solenoid: Locations Assembly-Transmission Solenoid/TRS Component ID: 21 Component : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID/TRS Connector: Name : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID/TRS Color : BLACK # of pins : 23 Qualifier : (RFE) Pin Circuit Description 1-2 T20 20DG/WT L/R CONTROL 3-4 T41 20YL/DB TRS T41 SIGNAL (P/N) 5 T42 20DG/YL TRS T42 SIGNAL 6-- 7 T60 20YL/GY OD SOLENOID CONTROL 8 T3 20DG/DB TRS T3 SIGNAL 9 T1 20DG/LB TRS T1 SIGNAL 10 T16 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT 11 T48 20BR/YL 4C PRESSURE SIGNAL 12 T118 20DG LINE PRESSURE CONTROL 13 T4 20DG/RD TRS T2 SIGNAL 13 T4 20DG/LB TRS T2 SIGNAL 14 T50 20DG/PK L/R PRESSURE SIGNAL 14 T50 20YL/TN L/R PRESSURE SIGNAL 15 T147 20DG/YL 2C PRESSURE SIGNAL 16 T9 20DG/TN OD PRESSURE SIGNAL 17 T59 20YL/LB UD CONTROL 18 T29 20YL/WT UD PRESSURE SIGNAL 19 T259 20YL/DG 4C CONTROL 20 T219 20YL/LG 2C CONTROL 21 T140 20YL/GY MS CONTROL 22 T160 20DG/WT SENSOR GROUND 22 K900 20DB/DG SENSOR GROUND 23 T54 20DG/OR TRANSMISSION TEMPERATURE SIGNAL Component Location - 21 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Assembly-Transmission Solenoid > Page 9041 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Assembly-Transmission Solenoid Shift Solenoid: Diagrams Assembly-Transmission Solenoid Component ID 15 Component ID: 15 Component : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID Connector: Name : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID Color : # of pins : 8 Qualifier : (RE) Pin Circuit Description 1 T16 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT 2 F856 18YL/PK 5 VOLT SUPPLY 3 K900 20DB/DG SENSOR GROUND 4 T38 18YL/BR GOVERNOR PRESSURE SENSOR SIGNAL 5 T118 18DG GOVERNOR PRESSURE SOLENOID CONTROL 6 T9 18DG/TN 3-4 SOLENOID CONTROL 7 T75 18YL/LB TORQUE CONVERTER CLUTCH SOLENOID CONTROL 8 T54 18DG/OR TRANSMISSION TEMPERATURE SIGNAL Component Location - 20 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Assembly-Transmission Solenoid > Page 9044 Component Location - 26 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Assembly-Transmission Solenoid > Page 9045 Connector: Name : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID C1 Color : # of pins : 10 Qualifier : (RC) Pin Circuit Description 1 T806 20DG/VT PRESSURE SIGNAL 7 2 T804 20YL/DB PRESSURE SIGNAL 5 3 T54 20DG/OR TRANSMISSION TEMPERATURE SIGNAL 4 T817 20YL/BR LINEAR 3 CONTROL Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Assembly-Transmission Solenoid > Page 9046 5 T813 20DG/LG LINEAR 1 CONTROL 6 T807 20DG/WT PRESSURE SIGNAL 8 7 T803 20DG/BR PRESSURE SIGNAL 4 8 T820 20YL/WT TEMPERATURE SENSOR GROUND 9 T816 20YL/PK LINEAR 3 GROUND 10 T812 20DG/TN LINEAR 1 GROUND Component Location - 20 Component Location - 26 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Assembly-Transmission Solenoid > Page 9047 Connector: Name : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID C2 Color : # of pins : 12 Qualifier : (RC) Pin Circuit Description 1 T800 20DG/BR PRESSURE SIGNAL 1 2 T805 20DG/OR PRESSURE SIGNAL 6 3 T809 20DG/YL SHIFT 2 CONTROL 4 T811 20DG/LB SHIFT 4 CONTROL Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Assembly-Transmission Solenoid > Page 9048 5 T818 20YL/OR LINEAR 4 GROUND 6 T814 20YL/BR LINEAR 2 GROUND 7 T801 20DG/RD PRESSURE SIGNAL 2 8 T802 20DG/PK PRESSURE SIGNAL 3 9 T810 20DG/DB SHIFT 3 CONTROL 10 T808 20DG/GY SHIFT 1 CONTROL 11 T821 20YL/GY LINEAR 4 CONTROL 12 T815 20YL/RD LINEAR 2 CONTROL Component Location - 20 Component Location - 26 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Assembly-Transmission Solenoid > Page 9049 Component ID 19 Component ID: 19 Component : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID Connector: Name : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID Color : # of pins : 8 Qualifier : (RE) Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Assembly-Transmission Solenoid > Page 9050 Pin Circuit Description 1 T16 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT 2 F856 18YL/PK 5 VOLT SUPPLY 3 K900 20DB/DG SENSOR GROUND 4 T38 18YL/BR GOVERNOR PRESSURE SENSOR SIGNAL 5 T118 18DG GOVERNOR PRESSURE SOLENOID CONTROL 6 T9 18DG/TN 3-4 SOLENOID CONTROL 7 T75 18YL/LB TORQUE CONVERTER CLUTCH SOLENOID CONTROL 8 T54 18DG/OR TRANSMISSION TEMPERATURE SIGNAL Component Location - 20 Component Location - 26 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Assembly-Transmission Solenoid > Page 9051 Connector: Name : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID C1 Color : # of pins : 10 Qualifier : (RC) Pin Circuit Description 1 T806 20DG/VT PRESSURE SIGNAL 7 2 T804 20YL/DB PRESSURE SIGNAL 5 3 T54 20DG/OR TRANSMISSION TEMPERATURE SIGNAL 4 T817 20YL/BR LINEAR 3 CONTROL Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Assembly-Transmission Solenoid > Page 9052 5 T813 20DG/LG LINEAR 1 CONTROL 6 T807 20DG/WT PRESSURE SIGNAL 8 7 T803 20DG/BR PRESSURE SIGNAL 4 8 T820 20YL/WT TEMPERATURE SENSOR GROUND 9 T816 20YL/PK LINEAR 3 GROUND 10 T812 20DG/TN LINEAR 1 GROUND Component Location - 20 Component Location - 26 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Assembly-Transmission Solenoid > Page 9053 Connector: Name : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID C2 Color : # of pins : 12 Qualifier : (RC) Pin Circuit Description 1 T800 20DG/BR PRESSURE SIGNAL 1 2 T805 20DG/OR PRESSURE SIGNAL 6 3 T809 20DG/YL SHIFT 2 CONTROL 4 T811 20DG/LB SHIFT 4 CONTROL Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Assembly-Transmission Solenoid > Page 9054 5 T818 20YL/OR LINEAR 4 GROUND 6 T814 20YL/BR LINEAR 2 GROUND 7 T801 20DG/RD PRESSURE SIGNAL 2 8 T802 20DG/PK PRESSURE SIGNAL 3 9 T810 20DG/DB SHIFT 3 CONTROL 10 T808 20DG/GY SHIFT 1 CONTROL 11 T821 20YL/GY LINEAR 4 CONTROL 12 T815 20YL/RD LINEAR 2 CONTROL Component Location - 20 Component Location - 26 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Assembly-Transmission Solenoid > Page 9055 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Assembly-Transmission Solenoid > Page 9056 Shift Solenoid: Diagrams Assembly-Transmission Solenoid/Pressure Switch Component ID: 20 Component : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID/PRESSURE SWITCH Connector: Name : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID/PRESSURE SWITCH Color : LT. BROWN # of pins : 10 Qualifier : (RLE) Pin Circuit Description 1 T60 20YL/GY OD CONTROL 2 T59 20YL/LB UD CONTROL 3 T16 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT 4 T19 18YL/DB 2-4 CONTROL 5 T47 18YL/DG 2-4 PRESSURE SIGNAL 6 T9 20DG/TN OD PRESSURE SIGNAL 7 T20 20DG/WT L/R CONTROL 8-9-10 T50 20YL/TN L/R PRESSURE SIGNAL Component Location - 19 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Assembly-Transmission Solenoid > Page 9057 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Assembly-Transmission Solenoid > Page 9058 Shift Solenoid: Diagrams Assembly-Transmission Solenoid/TRS Component ID: 21 Component : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID/TRS Connector: Name : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID/TRS Color : BLACK # of pins : 23 Qualifier : (RFE) Pin Circuit Description 1-2 T20 20DG/WT L/R CONTROL 3-4 T41 20YL/DB TRS T41 SIGNAL (P/N) 5 T42 20DG/YL TRS T42 SIGNAL 6-- 7 T60 20YL/GY OD SOLENOID CONTROL 8 T3 20DG/DB TRS T3 SIGNAL 9 T1 20DG/LB TRS T1 SIGNAL 10 T16 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT 11 T48 20BR/YL 4C PRESSURE SIGNAL 12 T118 20DG LINE PRESSURE CONTROL 13 T4 20DG/RD TRS T2 SIGNAL 13 T4 20DG/LB TRS T2 SIGNAL 14 T50 20DG/PK L/R PRESSURE SIGNAL 14 T50 20YL/TN L/R PRESSURE SIGNAL 15 T147 20DG/YL 2C PRESSURE SIGNAL 16 T9 20DG/TN OD PRESSURE SIGNAL 17 T59 20YL/LB UD CONTROL 18 T29 20YL/WT UD PRESSURE SIGNAL 19 T259 20YL/DG 4C CONTROL 20 T219 20YL/LG 2C CONTROL 21 T140 20YL/GY MS CONTROL 22 T160 20DG/WT SENSOR GROUND 22 K900 20DB/DG SENSOR GROUND 23 T54 20DG/OR TRANSMISSION TEMPERATURE SIGNAL Component Location - 21 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Assembly-Transmission Solenoid > Page 9059 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > 42RLE Automatic Transmission Shift Solenoid: Description and Operation 42RLE Automatic Transmission Description DESCRIPTION The Solenoid/Pressure Switch Assembly (1) is inside the transmission and mounted to the valve body assembly. The assembly consists of four solenoids that control hydraulic pressure to the L/R, 2/4, OD, and UD friction elements (transmission clutches), and the torque converter clutch. The reverse clutch is controlled by line pressure from the manual valve in the valve body. The solenoids are contained within the Solenoid/Pressure Switch Assembly, and can only be serviced by replacing the assembly. The solenoid assembly also contains pressure switches that monitor and send hydraulic circuit information to the TCM. Likewise, the pressure switches can only be service by replacing the assembly. Operation OPERATION SOLENOIDS The solenoids receive electrical power from the Transmission Control Relay through a single wire. The TCM energizes or operates the solenoids individually by grounding the return wire of the solenoid needed. When a solenoid is energized, the solenoid valve shifts, and a fluid passage is opened or closed (vented or applied), depending on its default operating state. The result is an apply or release of a frictional element. The 2/4 and UD solenoids are normally applied, which allows fluid to pass through in their relaxed or "off" state. By design, this allows transmission limp-in (P,R,N,2) in the event of an electrical failure. The continuity of the solenoids and circuits are periodically tested. Each solenoid is turned on or off depending on its current state. An inductive spike should be detected by the TCM during this test. If no spike is detected, the circuit is tested again to verify the failure. In addition to the periodic testing, the solenoid circuits are tested if a speed ratio or pressure switch error occurs. PRESSURE SWITCHES The TCM relies on three pressure switches to monitor fluid pressure in the L/R, 2/4, and OD hydraulic circuits. The primary purpose of these switches is to help the TCM detect when clutch circuit hydraulic failures occur. The range for the pressure switch closing and opening points is 11-23 psi. Typically the switch opening point will be approximately one psi lower than the closing point. For example, a switch may close at 18 psi and open at 17 psi. The switches are continuously monitored by the TCM for the correct states (open or closed) in each gear as shown in the following chart: Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 9062 A Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) will set if the TCM senses any switch open or closed at the wrong time in a given gear. The TCM also tests the 2/4 and OD pressure switches when they are normally off (OD and 2/4 are tested in 1st gear, OD in 2nd gear, and 2/4 in 3rd gear). The test simply verifies that they are operational, by looking for a closed state when the corresponding element is applied. Immediately after a shift into 1st, 2nd, or 3rd gear with the engine speed above 1000 rpm, the TCM momentarily turns on element pressure to the 2/4 and/or OD clutch circuits to identify that the appropriate switch has closed. If it doesn't close, it is tested again. If the switch fails to close the second time, the appropriate Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) will set. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 9063 Shift Solenoid: Description and Operation 545RFE Automatic Transmission Description DESCRIPTION The transmission solenoid/TRS assembly is internal to the transmission and mounted on the valve body assembly. The assembly consists of six solenoids that control hydraulic pressure to the six friction elements (transmission clutches), and the torque converter clutch. The pressure control solenoid is located on the side of the solenoid/TRS assembly. The solenoid/TRS assembly also contains the Transmission Range Sensor (TRS) and five pressure switches that feed information to the TCM. Operation OPERATION SOLENOIDS Solenoids are used to control the L/R, 2C, 4C, OD, and UD friction elements. The reverse clutch is controlled by line pressure and the position of the manual valve in the valve body. All the solenoids are contained within the Solenoid and Pressure Switch Assembly. The solenoid and pressure switch assembly contains one additional solenoid, Multi-Select (MS), which serves primarily to provide 2nd and 3rd gear limp-in operation. The solenoids receive electrical power from the Transmission Control Relay through a single wire. The TCM energizes or operates the solenoids individually by grounding the return wire of the solenoid as necessary. When a solenoid is energized, the solenoid valve shifts, and a fluid passage is opened or closed (vented or applied), depending on its default operating state. The result is an apply or release of a frictional element. The MS and UD solenoids are normally applied to allow transmission limp-in in the event of an electrical failure. The continuity of the solenoids and circuits are periodically tested. Each solenoid is turned on or off depending on its current state. An inductive spike should be detected by the TCM during this test. If no spike is detected, the circuit is tested again to verify the failure. In addition to the periodic testing, the solenoid circuits are tested if a speed ratio or pressure switch error occurs. PRESSURE SWITCHES The TCM relies on five pressure switches to monitor fluid pressure in the L/R, 2C, 4C, UD, and OD hydraulic circuits. The primary purpose of these switches is to help the TCM detect when clutch circuit hydraulic failures occur. The switches close at 23 psi and open at 11 psi, and simply indicate whether or not pressure exists. The switches are continuously monitored by the TCM for the correct states (open or closed) in each gear as shown in the following charts and 545RFE PRESSURE SWITCH STATES: Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 9064 A Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) will set if the TCM senses any switch open or closed at the wrong time in a given gear. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 9065 Shift Solenoid: Description and Operation 68RFE Automatic Transmission Description DESCRIPTION The transmission solenoid/TRS assembly is internal to the transmission and mounted on the valve body assembly. The assembly consists of six solenoids that control hydraulic pressure to the six friction elements (transmission clutches), and the torque converter clutch. The pressure control solenoid is located on the side of the solenoid/TRS assembly. The solenoid/TRS assembly also contains the Transmission Range Sensor (TRS) and five pressure switches that feed information to the TCM. Operation OPERATION SOLENOIDS Solenoids are used to control the L/R, 2C, 4C, OD, and UD friction elements. The reverse clutch is controlled by line pressure and the position of the manual valve in the valve body. All the solenoids are contained within the Solenoid and Pressure Switch Assembly. The solenoid and pressure switch assembly contains one additional solenoid, Multi-Select (MS), which serves primarily to provide 3rd gear and reverse limp-in operation. The TCM energizes or operates the solenoids individually by grounding the return wire of the solenoid as necessary. When a solenoid is energized, the solenoid valve shifts, and a fluid passage is opened or closed (vented or applied), depending on its default operating state. The result is an apply or release of a frictional element. The MS and UD solenoids are normally applied to allow transmission limp-in in the event of an electrical failure. The continuity of the solenoids and circuits are periodically tested. Each solenoid is turned on or off depending on its current state. An inductive spike should be detected by the TCM during this test. If no spike is detected, the circuit is tested again to verify the failure. In addition to the periodic testing, the solenoid circuits are tested if a speed ratio or pressure switch error occurs. PRESSURE SWITCHES The TCM relies on five pressure switches to monitor fluid pressure in the L/R, 2C, 4C, UD, and OD hydraulic circuits. The primary purpose of these switches is to help the TCM detect when clutch circuit hydraulic failures occur. The switches close at 23 psi and open at 11 psi, and simply indicate whether or not pressure exists. The switches are continuously monitored by the TCM for the correct states (open or closed) in each gear as shown in the following charts and Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 9066 A Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) will set if the TCM senses any switch open or closed at the wrong time in a given gear. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 42RLE Automatic Transmission Shift Solenoid: Service and Repair 42RLE Automatic Transmission Removal REMOVAL NOTE: If the Solenoid/Pressure Switch Assembly is being replaced, the Quick Learn Procedure must be performed. See: Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Transmission Control Module/TCM Quick Learn 1. Raise vehicle on hoist. 2. Remove valve body assembly from transmission. See: Automatic Transmission/Transaxle/Valve Body/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/42RLE Automatic Transmission/Removal 3. Remove Solenoid/Pressure Switch Assembly retaining screws (2) from solenoid. 4. Remove Solenoid/Pressure Switch Assembly (1) and screen from valve body (2). Installation INSTALLATION NOTE: If the Solenoid/Pressure Switch assembly is being replaced, the Quick Learn Procedure must be performed. See: Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Transmission Control Module/TCM Quick Learn Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 9069 1. Install Solenoid/Pressure Switch Assembly (1) and screen (3) to the separator and transfer plates. 2. Install and tighten retaining screws (2) to 5.5 Nm (50 in. lbs.) torque. 3. Install valve body. See: Automatic Transmission/Transaxle/Valve Body/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/42RLE Automatic Transmission/Installation Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 9070 Shift Solenoid: Service and Repair 545RFE Automatic Transmission Removal REMOVAL NOTE: If the Transmission Solenoid/TRS Assembly is being replaced, the Quick Learn Procedure must be performed. See: Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Transmission Control Module/TCM Quick Learn 1. Remove the valve body from the transmission. See: Automatic Transmission/Transaxle/Valve Body/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/545RFE Automatic Transmission/Removal 2. Remove the bolts (1) holding the transmission solenoid/TRS assembly onto the valve body. 3. Separate the transmission solenoid/TRS assembly from the valve body. Installation INSTALLATION Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 9071 1. Place TRS selector plate in the PARK position. 2. Position the transmission solenoid/TRS assembly onto the valve body. Be sure that both alignment dowels are fully seated in the valve body and that the TRS switch contacts are properly positioned in the selector plate 3. Install the bolts (1) to hold the transmission solenoid/TRS assembly onto the valve body. 4. Tighten the solenoid assembly screws adjacent to the arrows cast into the bottom of the valve body first. Tighten the screws to 6 Nm (50 in.lbs.). 5. Tighten the remainder of the solenoid assembly screws to 6 Nm (50 in.lbs.). 6. Install the valve body into the transmission. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 9072 Shift Solenoid: Service and Repair 68RFE Automatic Transmission Removal REMOVAL NOTE: If the Transmission Solenoid/TRS Assembly is being replaced, the Quick Learn Procedure must be performed. See: Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Transmission Control Module/TCM Quick Learn 1. Remove the valve body from the transmission. 2. Remove the bolts (1) holding the transmission solenoid/TRS assembly onto the valve body. 3. Separate the transmission solenoid/TRS assembly from the valve body. Installation INSTALLATION Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 9073 1. Place TRS selector plate in the PARK position. 2. Position the transmission solenoid/TRS assembly onto the valve body. Be sure that both alignment dowels are fully seated in the valve body and that the TRS switch contacts are properly positioned in the selector plate 3. Install the bolts (1) to hold the transmission solenoid/TRS assembly onto the valve body. 4. Tighten the solenoid assembly screws adjacent to the arrows cast into the bottom of the valve body first. Tighten the screws to 6 Nm (50 in.lbs.). 5. Tighten the remainder of the solenoid assembly screws to 6 Nm (50 in.lbs.). 6. Install the valve body into the transmission. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Throttle Valve Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation Throttle Valve Solenoid: Description and Operation DESCRIPTION On vehicles equipped with a Cummins diesel engine, the transmission throttle valve cable has been replace by the transmission throttle valve actuator (TTVA). The TTVA consists of an electric DC motor, two potentiometers, and a gear drive system. The TTVA is mechanically connected to the transmission throttle valve in the valve body by the "D" shaped opening in the bottom of the TTVA shaft. Changes in the TTVA position are therefore transferred to the throttle valve and cause changes in the transmission throttle pressure. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Throttle Valve Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 9077 Throttle Valve Solenoid: Adjustments ADJUSTMENT The Transmission Throttle Valve Actuator (TTVA) does not require any mechanical adjustments. All changes in throttle valve position are controlled by the Engine Control Module (ECM). The TTVA does require an initialization period after the actuator has been removed or replaced. After the actuator has been removed or replaced, move the ignition to the ON position for thirty (30) seconds. This will allow the ECM sufficient time to perform the internal calibration procedures to learn the TTVA's current "zero" position. Once this is done, check the ECM for diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs). If no DTCs are set relating to the TTVA, the TTVA is fully calibrated and ready for use. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Throttle Valve Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Throttle Valve Solenoid: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL 1. Remove the bolts (2) holding the transmission throttle valve actuator (TTVA) (1) to the transmission case. 2. Allow the TTVA (1) to rotate clockwise away from the transmission. 3. Remove the wiring connector (2) from the TTVA (1). 4. Lift the TTVA (1) straight upward and off the throttle valve shaft (3). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Throttle Valve Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 9080 Throttle Valve Solenoid: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION 1. Position the transmission throttle valve actuator (TTVA) (1) over the throttle valve shaft (3). 2. Align the D-shaped opening in the bottom of the TTVA to the throttle valve shaft and install the TTVA onto the shaft. 3. Install the wiring connector (2) to the TTVA (1). 4. Rotate the TTVA (1) to the transmission case and install the bolts (2) to hold the TTVA to the transmission. 5. Tighten the bolts to 8.5 Nm (75 in.lbs.). 6. Initialize the TTVA See: Adjustments . Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > 42RLE Automatic Transmission Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid: Description and Operation 42RLE Automatic Transmission Description DESCRIPTION The Solenoid/Pressure Switch Assembly (1) is inside the transmission and mounted to the valve body assembly. The assembly consists of four solenoids that control hydraulic pressure to the L/R, 2/4, OD, and UD friction elements (transmission clutches), and the torque converter clutch. The reverse clutch is controlled by line pressure from the manual valve in the valve body. The solenoids are contained within the Solenoid/Pressure Switch Assembly, and can only be serviced by replacing the assembly. The solenoid assembly also contains pressure switches that monitor and send hydraulic circuit information to the TCM. Likewise, the pressure switches can only be service by replacing the assembly. Operation OPERATION SOLENOIDS The solenoids receive electrical power from the Transmission Control Relay through a single wire. The TCM energizes or operates the solenoids individually by grounding the return wire of the solenoid needed. When a solenoid is energized, the solenoid valve shifts, and a fluid passage is opened or closed (vented or applied), depending on its default operating state. The result is an apply or release of a frictional element. The 2/4 and UD solenoids are normally applied, which allows fluid to pass through in their relaxed or "off" state. By design, this allows transmission limp-in (P,R,N,2) in the event of an electrical failure. The continuity of the solenoids and circuits are periodically tested. Each solenoid is turned on or off depending on its current state. An inductive spike should be detected by the TCM during this test. If no spike is detected, the circuit is tested again to verify the failure. In addition to the periodic testing, the solenoid circuits are tested if a speed ratio or pressure switch error occurs. PRESSURE SWITCHES The TCM relies on three pressure switches to monitor fluid pressure in the L/R, 2/4, and OD hydraulic circuits. The primary purpose of these switches is to help the TCM detect when clutch circuit hydraulic failures occur. The range for the pressure switch closing and opening points is 11-23 psi. Typically the switch opening point will be approximately one psi lower than the closing point. For example, a switch may close at 18 psi and open at 17 psi. The switches are continuously monitored by the TCM for the correct states (open or closed) in each gear as shown in the following chart: Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 9085 A Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) will set if the TCM senses any switch open or closed at the wrong time in a given gear. The TCM also tests the 2/4 and OD pressure switches when they are normally off (OD and 2/4 are tested in 1st gear, OD in 2nd gear, and 2/4 in 3rd gear). The test simply verifies that they are operational, by looking for a closed state when the corresponding element is applied. Immediately after a shift into 1st, 2nd, or 3rd gear with the engine speed above 1000 rpm, the TCM momentarily turns on element pressure to the 2/4 and/or OD clutch circuits to identify that the appropriate switch has closed. If it doesn't close, it is tested again. If the switch fails to close the second time, the appropriate Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) will set. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 9086 Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid: Description and Operation 545RFE Automatic Transmission Description DESCRIPTION The transmission solenoid/TRS assembly is internal to the transmission and mounted on the valve body assembly. The assembly consists of six solenoids that control hydraulic pressure to the six friction elements (transmission clutches), and the torque converter clutch. The pressure control solenoid is located on the side of the solenoid/TRS assembly. The solenoid/TRS assembly also contains the Transmission Range Sensor (TRS) and five pressure switches that feed information to the TCM. Operation OPERATION SOLENOIDS Solenoids are used to control the L/R, 2C, 4C, OD, and UD friction elements. The reverse clutch is controlled by line pressure and the position of the manual valve in the valve body. All the solenoids are contained within the Solenoid and Pressure Switch Assembly. The solenoid and pressure switch assembly contains one additional solenoid, Multi-Select (MS), which serves primarily to provide 2nd and 3rd gear limp-in operation. The solenoids receive electrical power from the Transmission Control Relay through a single wire. The TCM energizes or operates the solenoids individually by grounding the return wire of the solenoid as necessary. When a solenoid is energized, the solenoid valve shifts, and a fluid passage is opened or closed (vented or applied), depending on its default operating state. The result is an apply or release of a frictional element. The MS and UD solenoids are normally applied to allow transmission limp-in in the event of an electrical failure. The continuity of the solenoids and circuits are periodically tested. Each solenoid is turned on or off depending on its current state. An inductive spike should be detected by the TCM during this test. If no spike is detected, the circuit is tested again to verify the failure. In addition to the periodic testing, the solenoid circuits are tested if a speed ratio or pressure switch error occurs. PRESSURE SWITCHES The TCM relies on five pressure switches to monitor fluid pressure in the L/R, 2C, 4C, UD, and OD hydraulic circuits. The primary purpose of these switches is to help the TCM detect when clutch circuit hydraulic failures occur. The switches close at 23 psi and open at 11 psi, and simply indicate whether or not pressure exists. The switches are continuously monitored by the TCM for the correct states (open or closed) in each gear as shown in the following charts and 545RFE PRESSURE SWITCH STATES: Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 9087 A Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) will set if the TCM senses any switch open or closed at the wrong time in a given gear. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 9088 Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid: Description and Operation 68RFE Automatic Transmission Description DESCRIPTION The transmission solenoid/TRS assembly is internal to the transmission and mounted on the valve body assembly. The assembly consists of six solenoids that control hydraulic pressure to the six friction elements (transmission clutches), and the torque converter clutch. The pressure control solenoid is located on the side of the solenoid/TRS assembly. The solenoid/TRS assembly also contains the Transmission Range Sensor (TRS) and five pressure switches that feed information to the TCM. Operation OPERATION SOLENOIDS Solenoids are used to control the L/R, 2C, 4C, OD, and UD friction elements. The reverse clutch is controlled by line pressure and the position of the manual valve in the valve body. All the solenoids are contained within the Solenoid and Pressure Switch Assembly. The solenoid and pressure switch assembly contains one additional solenoid, Multi-Select (MS), which serves primarily to provide 3rd gear and reverse limp-in operation. The TCM energizes or operates the solenoids individually by grounding the return wire of the solenoid as necessary. When a solenoid is energized, the solenoid valve shifts, and a fluid passage is opened or closed (vented or applied), depending on its default operating state. The result is an apply or release of a frictional element. The MS and UD solenoids are normally applied to allow transmission limp-in in the event of an electrical failure. The continuity of the solenoids and circuits are periodically tested. Each solenoid is turned on or off depending on its current state. An inductive spike should be detected by the TCM during this test. If no spike is detected, the circuit is tested again to verify the failure. In addition to the periodic testing, the solenoid circuits are tested if a speed ratio or pressure switch error occurs. PRESSURE SWITCHES The TCM relies on five pressure switches to monitor fluid pressure in the L/R, 2C, 4C, UD, and OD hydraulic circuits. The primary purpose of these switches is to help the TCM detect when clutch circuit hydraulic failures occur. The switches close at 23 psi and open at 11 psi, and simply indicate whether or not pressure exists. The switches are continuously monitored by the TCM for the correct states (open or closed) in each gear as shown in the following charts and Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 9089 A Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) will set if the TCM senses any switch open or closed at the wrong time in a given gear. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 42RLE Automatic Transmission Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid: Service and Repair 42RLE Automatic Transmission Removal REMOVAL NOTE: If the Solenoid/Pressure Switch Assembly is being replaced, the Quick Learn Procedure must be performed. See: Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Transmission Control Module/TCM Quick Learn 1. Raise vehicle on hoist. 2. Remove valve body assembly from transmission. See: Automatic Transmission/Transaxle/Valve Body/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/42RLE Automatic Transmission/Removal 3. Remove Solenoid/Pressure Switch Assembly retaining screws (2) from solenoid. 4. Remove Solenoid/Pressure Switch Assembly (1) and screen from valve body (2). Installation INSTALLATION NOTE: If the Solenoid/Pressure Switch assembly is being replaced, the Quick Learn Procedure must be performed. See: Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Transmission Control Module/TCM Quick Learn Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 9092 1. Install Solenoid/Pressure Switch Assembly (1) and screen (3) to the separator and transfer plates. 2. Install and tighten retaining screws (2) to 5.5 Nm (50 in. lbs.) torque. 3. Install valve body. See: Automatic Transmission/Transaxle/Valve Body/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/42RLE Automatic Transmission/Installation Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 9093 Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid: Service and Repair 545RFE Automatic Transmission Removal REMOVAL NOTE: If the Transmission Solenoid/TRS Assembly is being replaced, the Quick Learn Procedure must be performed. See: Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Transmission Control Module/TCM Quick Learn 1. Remove the valve body from the transmission. See: Automatic Transmission/Transaxle/Valve Body/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/545RFE Automatic Transmission/Removal 2. Remove the bolts (1) holding the transmission solenoid/TRS assembly onto the valve body. 3. Separate the transmission solenoid/TRS assembly from the valve body. Installation INSTALLATION Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 9094 1. Place TRS selector plate in the PARK position. 2. Position the transmission solenoid/TRS assembly onto the valve body. Be sure that both alignment dowels are fully seated in the valve body and that the TRS switch contacts are properly positioned in the selector plate 3. Install the bolts (1) to hold the transmission solenoid/TRS assembly onto the valve body. 4. Tighten the solenoid assembly screws adjacent to the arrows cast into the bottom of the valve body first. Tighten the screws to 6 Nm (50 in.lbs.). 5. Tighten the remainder of the solenoid assembly screws to 6 Nm (50 in.lbs.). 6. Install the valve body into the transmission. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 9095 Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid: Service and Repair 68RFE Automatic Transmission Removal REMOVAL NOTE: If the Transmission Solenoid/TRS Assembly is being replaced, the Quick Learn Procedure must be performed. See: Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Transmission Control Module/TCM Quick Learn 1. Remove the valve body from the transmission. 2. Remove the bolts (1) holding the transmission solenoid/TRS assembly onto the valve body. 3. Separate the transmission solenoid/TRS assembly from the valve body. Installation INSTALLATION Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 9096 1. Place TRS selector plate in the PARK position. 2. Position the transmission solenoid/TRS assembly onto the valve body. Be sure that both alignment dowels are fully seated in the valve body and that the TRS switch contacts are properly positioned in the selector plate 3. Install the bolts (1) to hold the transmission solenoid/TRS assembly onto the valve body. 4. Tighten the solenoid assembly screws adjacent to the arrows cast into the bottom of the valve body first. Tighten the screws to 6 Nm (50 in.lbs.). 5. Tighten the remainder of the solenoid assembly screws to 6 Nm (50 in.lbs.). 6. Install the valve body into the transmission. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Differential > Actuator, Differential Lock > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Actuator: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL 1. Remove actuator wiring connector. 2. Remove actuator (1) bolts (2). 3. Remove actuator (1) from disconnect pocket (2). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Differential > Actuator, Differential Lock > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 9102 Actuator: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION 1. Clean actuator (1) sealing surface and install new gasket (2) if necessary. 2. Align actuator shift fork (1) with disconnect collar (2) and install actuator on disconnect pocket. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Differential > Actuator, Differential Lock > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 9103 3. Install actuator (1) bolts (2) and tighten to 27 Nm (20 ft. lbs.). 4. Install disconnect actuator wiring connector. 5. Verify differential fluid level and add fluid if necessary. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Differential > Solenoid, Differential Lock > Component Information > Locations > Module-Axle Disconnect-Front Solenoid: Locations Module-Axle Disconnect-Front Component ID: 202 Component : MODULE-AXLE DISCONNECT-FRONT Connector: Name : MODULE-AXLE DISCONNECT-FRONT Color : DK. GRAY # of pins : 4 Qualifier : (LD 4WD) Pin Circuit Description 1 Z906 20BK GROUND 2 G304 20VT/DB FRONT AXLE LOCK CONTROL 3 A880 20DB/RD FUSED B(+) 4 G303 20VT/DG FRONT AXLE LOCK SIGNAL Component Location - 35 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Differential > Solenoid, Differential Lock > Component Information > Locations > Module-Axle Disconnect-Front > Page 9108 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Differential > Solenoid, Differential Lock > Component Information > Locations > Module-Axle Disconnect-Front > Page 9109 Solenoid: Locations Solenoid-Locker-Front Component ID: 457 Component : SOLENOID-LOCKER-FRONT Connector: Name : SOLENOID-LOCKER-FRONT Color : BLACK # of pins : 4 Qualifier : (POWER WAGON) Pin Circuit Description 1 T520 16YL/OR FRONT LOCKER SOURCE 2 T521 18YL/BK LOCKER SENSOR SUPPLY 3 T522 18YL/LB FRONT LOCKER SENSOR SENSE 4 T524 16YL/LG FRONT LOCKER RETURN Component Location - 36 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Differential > Solenoid, Differential Lock > Component Information > Locations > Module-Axle Disconnect-Front > Page 9110 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Differential > Solenoid, Differential Lock > Component Information > Locations > Module-Axle Disconnect-Front > Page 9111 Solenoid: Locations Solenoid-Locker-Rear Component ID: 458 Component : SOLENOID-LOCKER-REAR Connector: Name : SOLENOID-LOCKER-REAR Color : BLACK # of pins : 4 Qualifier : (POWER WAGON) Pin Circuit Description 1 T526 16YL/WT REAR LOCKER SOURCE 2 T523 18YL/BK LOCKER SENSOR SUPPLY 3 T527 18YL/TN REAR LOCKER SENSOR SENSE 4 T528 16YL/GY REAR LOCKER RETURN Component Location - 70 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Differential > Solenoid, Differential Lock > Component Information > Locations > Module-Axle Disconnect-Front > Page 9112 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Differential > Solenoid, Differential Lock > Component Information > Diagrams > Module-Axle Disconnect-Front Solenoid: Diagrams Module-Axle Disconnect-Front Component ID: 202 Component : MODULE-AXLE DISCONNECT-FRONT Connector: Name : MODULE-AXLE DISCONNECT-FRONT Color : DK. GRAY # of pins : 4 Qualifier : (LD 4WD) Pin Circuit Description 1 Z906 20BK GROUND 2 G304 20VT/DB FRONT AXLE LOCK CONTROL 3 A880 20DB/RD FUSED B(+) 4 G303 20VT/DG FRONT AXLE LOCK SIGNAL Component Location - 35 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Differential > Solenoid, Differential Lock > Component Information > Diagrams > Module-Axle Disconnect-Front > Page 9115 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Differential > Solenoid, Differential Lock > Component Information > Diagrams > Module-Axle Disconnect-Front > Page 9116 Solenoid: Diagrams Solenoid-Locker-Front Component ID: 457 Component : SOLENOID-LOCKER-FRONT Connector: Name : SOLENOID-LOCKER-FRONT Color : BLACK # of pins : 4 Qualifier : (POWER WAGON) Pin Circuit Description 1 T520 16YL/OR FRONT LOCKER SOURCE 2 T521 18YL/BK LOCKER SENSOR SUPPLY 3 T522 18YL/LB FRONT LOCKER SENSOR SENSE 4 T524 16YL/LG FRONT LOCKER RETURN Component Location - 36 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Differential > Solenoid, Differential Lock > Component Information > Diagrams > Module-Axle Disconnect-Front > Page 9117 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Differential > Solenoid, Differential Lock > Component Information > Diagrams > Module-Axle Disconnect-Front > Page 9118 Solenoid: Diagrams Solenoid-Locker-Rear Component ID: 458 Component : SOLENOID-LOCKER-REAR Connector: Name : SOLENOID-LOCKER-REAR Color : BLACK # of pins : 4 Qualifier : (POWER WAGON) Pin Circuit Description 1 T526 16YL/WT REAR LOCKER SOURCE 2 T523 18YL/BK LOCKER SENSOR SUPPLY 3 T527 18YL/TN REAR LOCKER SENSOR SENSE 4 T528 16YL/GY REAR LOCKER RETURN Component Location - 70 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Differential > Solenoid, Differential Lock > Component Information > Diagrams > Module-Axle Disconnect-Front > Page 9119 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transfer Case > Transfer Case Actuator > Component Information > Locations Transfer Case Actuator: Locations Component ID: 18 Component : ASSEMBLY-SHIFT MOTOR/MODE SENSOR Connector: Name : ASSEMBLY-SHIFT MOTOR/MODE SENSOR Color : BLACK # of pins : 8 Qualifier : (RFE FULL TIME ETC) Pin Circuit Description 1 T103 20YL/OR 5 VOLT SUPPLY 2 D201 20WT/DG MODE SENSOR A 3 G180 20VT/YL SENSOR RETURN 4 T101 16DG SHIFT MOTOR CONTROL B 5 T102 16YL SHIFT MOTOR CONTROL A 6 A940 20RD FUSED B(+) 7 T300 20YL/GY T-CASE MOTOR BRAKE SIGNAL 8-Component Location - 21 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transfer Case > Transfer Case Actuator > Component Information > Locations > Page 9124 Component Location - 24 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transfer Case > Transfer Case Actuator > Component Information > Locations > Page 9125 Component Location - 26 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transfer Case > Transfer Case Actuator > Component Information > Locations > Page 9126 Connector: Name : ASSEMBLY-SHIFT MOTOR/MODE SENSOR Color : DK. GRAY # of pins : 8 Qualifier : (RFE PART TIME ETC/RE ETC) Pin Circuit Description 1 T103 20YL/OR 5 VOLT SUPPLY 2 D201 20WT/DG MODE SENSOR A 3 G180 20VT/YL SENSOR RETURN 4 T101 16DG SHIFT MOTOR CONTROL B Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transfer Case > Transfer Case Actuator > Component Information > Locations > Page 9127 5 T102 16YL SHIFT MOTOR CONTROL A 6 A918 20RD FUSED B(+) 7-8-Component Location - 21 Component Location - 24 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transfer Case > Transfer Case Actuator > Component Information > Locations > Page 9128 Component Location - 26 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transfer Case > Transfer Case Actuator > Component Information > Locations > Page 9129 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transfer Case > Transfer Case Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Component ID 14 Transfer Case Actuator: Diagrams Component ID 14 Component ID: 14 Component : ASSEMBLY-SHIFT MOTOR/MODE SENSOR Connector: Name : ASSEMBLY-SHIFT MOTOR/MODE SENSOR Color : BLACK # of pins : 8 Qualifier : (RFE FULL TIME ETC) Pin Circuit Description 1 T103 20YL/OR 5 VOLT SUPPLY 2 D201 20WT/DG MODE SENSOR A 3 G180 20VT/YL SENSOR RETURN 4 T101 16DG SHIFT MOTOR CONTROL B 5 T102 16YL SHIFT MOTOR CONTROL A 6 A940 20RD FUSED B(+) 7 T300 20YL/GY T-CASE MOTOR BRAKE SIGNAL 8-Connector: Name : ASSEMBLY-SHIFT MOTOR/MODE SENSOR Color : DK. GRAY # of pins : 8 Qualifier : (RFE PART TIME ETC/RE ETC) Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transfer Case > Transfer Case Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Component ID 14 > Page 9132 Pin Circuit Description 1 T103 20YL/OR 5 VOLT SUPPLY 2 D201 20WT/DG MODE SENSOR A 3 G180 20VT/YL SENSOR RETURN 4 T101 16DG SHIFT MOTOR CONTROL B 5 T102 16YL SHIFT MOTOR CONTROL A 6 A918 20RD FUSED B(+) 7-8-- Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transfer Case > Transfer Case Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Component ID 14 > Page 9133 Transfer Case Actuator: Diagrams Component ID 18 Component ID: 18 Component : ASSEMBLY-SHIFT MOTOR/MODE SENSOR Connector: Name : ASSEMBLY-SHIFT MOTOR/MODE SENSOR Color : BLACK # of pins : 8 Qualifier : (RFE FULL TIME ETC) Pin Circuit Description 1 T103 20YL/OR 5 VOLT SUPPLY 2 D201 20WT/DG MODE SENSOR A 3 G180 20VT/YL SENSOR RETURN 4 T101 16DG SHIFT MOTOR CONTROL B 5 T102 16YL SHIFT MOTOR CONTROL A 6 A940 20RD FUSED B(+) 7 T300 20YL/GY T-CASE MOTOR BRAKE SIGNAL 8-Component Location - 21 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transfer Case > Transfer Case Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Component ID 14 > Page 9134 Component Location - 24 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transfer Case > Transfer Case Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Component ID 14 > Page 9135 Component Location - 26 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transfer Case > Transfer Case Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Component ID 14 > Page 9136 Connector: Name : ASSEMBLY-SHIFT MOTOR/MODE SENSOR Color : DK. GRAY # of pins : 8 Qualifier : (RFE PART TIME ETC/RE ETC) Pin Circuit Description 1 T103 20YL/OR 5 VOLT SUPPLY 2 D201 20WT/DG MODE SENSOR A 3 G180 20VT/YL SENSOR RETURN 4 T101 16DG SHIFT MOTOR CONTROL B Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transfer Case > Transfer Case Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Component ID 14 > Page 9137 5 T102 16YL SHIFT MOTOR CONTROL A 6 A918 20RD FUSED B(+) 7-8-Component Location - 21 Component Location - 24 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transfer Case > Transfer Case Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Component ID 14 > Page 9138 Component Location - 26 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transfer Case > Transfer Case Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Component ID 14 > Page 9139 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transfer Case > Transfer Case Actuator > Component Information > Description and Operation > NV243 Transfer Case Transfer Case Actuator: Description and Operation NV243 Transfer Case Description DESCRIPTION The shift motor (2) consists of a permanent magnet D.C. motor with gear reduction to convert a high speed-low torque device into a low speed-high torque device. The output of the device is coupled to a shaft which internally moves the mode and range forks that change the transfer case operating ranges. The motor is rated at 25 amps maximum at 23° C (72° F) with 10 volts at the motor leads. Operation OPERATION The transfer case shift motor responds to the Transfer Case Control Module (TCCM) commands to move the transfer case shift sector bi-directionally, as required, to obtain the transfer case operating mode indicated by the instrument panel mounted selector switch. Description DESCRIPTION The shift motor (2) consists of a permanent magnet D.C. motor with gear reduction to convert a high speed-low torque device into a low speed-high torque device. The output of the device is coupled to a shaft which internally moves the mode and range forks that change the transfer case operating ranges. The motor is rated at 25 amps maximum at 23° C (72° F) with 10 volts at the motor leads. Operation OPERATION The transfer case shift motor responds to the Transfer Case Control Module (TCCM) commands to move the transfer case shift sector bi-directionally, as required, to obtain the transfer case operating mode indicated by the instrument panel mounted selector switch. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transfer Case > Transfer Case Actuator > Component Information > Description and Operation > NV243 Transfer Case > Page 9142 Transfer Case Actuator: Description and Operation NV244 GENII Transfer Case Description DESCRIPTION The shift motor (2) consists of a permanent magnet D.C. motor with gear reduction to convert a high speed-low torque device into a low speed-high torque device. The output of the device is coupled to a shaft which internally moves the mode and range forks that change the transfer case operating ranges. The motor is rated at 25 amps maximum at 23° C (72° F) with 10 volts at the motor leads. Operation OPERATION The transfer case shift motor responds to the Transfer Case Control Module (TCCM) commands to move the transfer case shift sector bi-directionally, as required, to obtain the transfer case operating mode indicated by the instrument panel mounted selector switch. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transfer Case > Transfer Case Actuator > Component Information > Description and Operation > NV243 Transfer Case > Page 9143 Transfer Case Actuator: Description and Operation NV246 Transfer Case Description DESCRIPTION The shift motor consists of a permanent magnet D.C. motor with gear reduction to convert a high speed-low torque device into a low speed-high torque device. The output of the device is coupled to a shaft which internally moves the mode and range forks that change the transfer case operating ranges. The motor is rated at 25 amps maximum at 23° C (72° F) with 10 volts at the motor leads. Operation OPERATION The transfer case shift motor responds to the Front Control Module (FCM) commands to move the transfer case shift sector bi-directionally, as required, to obtain the transfer case operating mode indicated by the instrument panel mounted selector switch. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transfer Case > Transfer Case Actuator > Component Information > Description and Operation > NV243 Transfer Case > Page 9144 Transfer Case Actuator: Description and Operation NV273 Transfer Case Description DESCRIPTION The shift motor (2) consists of a permanent magnet D.C. motor with gear reduction to convert a high speed-low torque device into a low speed-high torque device. The output of the device is coupled to a shaft which internally moves the mode and range forks that change the transfer case operating ranges. The motor is rated at 25 amps maximum at 23° C (72° F) with 10 volts at the motor leads. Operation OPERATION The transfer case shift motor responds to the Transfer Case Control Module (TCCM) commands to move the transfer case shift sector bi-directionally, as required, to obtain the transfer case operating mode indicated by the instrument panel mounted selector switch. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transfer Case > Transfer Case Actuator > Component Information > Service and Repair > NV243 Transfer Case Transfer Case Actuator: Service and Repair NV243 Transfer Case Removal REMOVAL NOTE: New shift motor assemblies are shipped in the 2WD/AWD position. If a new shift motor assembly will be installed, it will be necessary to shift the transfer case to the 2WD/AWD position prior to motor removal. 1. Raise the vehicle on a suitable hoist. 2. Disengage the wiring connectors from the shift motor and mode sensor. 3. Remove the bolts (3) holding the shift motor and mode sensor assembly (2) onto the transfer case (1). 4. Separate the shift motor and mode sensor assembly (2) from the transfer case. Installation INSTALLATION 1. Verify that the shift sector o-ring is clean and properly positioned over the shift sector and against the transfer case. NOTE: Verify that the shift motor position and sector shaft orientation are aligned. It may be necessary to manually shift the transfer case if the shift motor and sector shaft are not aligned. 2. Position the shift motor and mode sensor assembly (2) onto the transfer case (1). 3. Install the bolts (3) to hold the assembly onto the transfer case. Tighten the bolts to 16-24 Nm (12-18 ft.lbs.). CAUTION: If the original shift motor and mode sensor assembly bolts are reused, be sure to use Mopar(R) Lock & Seal or Loctite(TM) 242 to replenish the lock patch material originally found on the bolts 4. Engage the wiring connectors to the shift motor and mode sensor. 5. Refill the transfer case as necessary. 6. Lower vehicle and verify transfer case operation. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transfer Case > Transfer Case Actuator > Component Information > Service and Repair > NV243 Transfer Case > Page 9147 Transfer Case Actuator: Service and Repair NV244 GENII Transfer Case Removal REMOVAL NOTE: New shift motor assemblies are shipped in the 2WD/AWD position. If a new shift motor assembly will be installed, it will be necessary to shift the transfer case to the 2WD/AWD position prior to motor removal. 1. Raise the vehicle on a suitable hoist. 2. Disengage the wiring connectors from the shift motor and mode sensor. 3. Remove the bolts (3) holding the shift motor and mode sensor assembly (2) onto the transfer case (1). 4. Separate the shift motor and mode sensor assembly (2) from the transfer case. Installation INSTALLATION 1. Verify that the shift sector o-ring is clean and properly positioned over the shift sector and against the transfer case. NOTE: Verify that the shift motor position and sector shaft orientation are aligned. It may be necessary to manually shift the transfer case if the shift motor and sector shaft are not aligned. 2. Position the shift motor and mode sensor assembly (2) onto the transfer case (1). 3. Install the bolts (3) to hold the assembly onto the transfer case. Tighten the bolts to 16-24 Nm (12-18 ft.lbs.). CAUTION: If the original shift motor and mode sensor assembly bolts are reused, be sure to use Mopar(R) Lock & Seal or Loctite(TM) 242 to replenish the lock patch material originally found on the bolts 4. Engage the wiring connectors to the shift motor and mode sensor. 5. Refill the transfer case as necessary. 6. Lower vehicle and verify transfer case operation. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transfer Case > Transfer Case Actuator > Component Information > Service and Repair > NV243 Transfer Case > Page 9148 Transfer Case Actuator: Service and Repair NV246 Transfer Case Removal REMOVAL 1. Raise the vehicle on a suitable hoist. 2. Remove the front propeller shaft. See: Drive/Propeller Shafts, Bearings and Joints/Drive/Propeller Shaft/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement 3. Disengage the wiring connectors from the shift motor and mode sensor. 4. Remove the bolts (1) holding the shift motor and mode sensor assembly (2) onto the transfer case. 5. Separate the shift motor and mode sensor assembly (1) from the transfer case. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transfer Case > Transfer Case Actuator > Component Information > Service and Repair > NV243 Transfer Case > Page 9149 6. Remove the shift motor isolator (1) from the transfer case (2). Installation INSTALLATION 1. Install the shift motor isolator (1) onto the transfer case (2). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transfer Case > Transfer Case Actuator > Component Information > Service and Repair > NV243 Transfer Case > Page 9150 NOTE: Verify that the shift motor position and sector shaft orientation are aligned. It may be necessary to manually shift the transfer case if the shift motor and sector shaft are not aligned. 2. Install the shift motor and mode sensor assembly (1) onto the transfer case. CAUTION: If the original shift motor and mode sensor assembly bolts are reused, be sure to use Mopar(R) Lock & Seal or Loctite(TM) 242 to replenish the lock patch material originally found on the bolts 3. Install the bolts (1) to hold the shift motor and mode sensor assembly (2) onto the transfer case. Tighten the bolts to 23.5 Nm (17 ft.lbs.). 4. Engage the wiring connectors to the shift motor and mode sensor. 5. Install the front propeller shaft. See: Drive/Propeller Shafts, Bearings and Joints/Drive/Propeller Shaft/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement 6. Refill the transfer case as necessary with the correct fluid for the application. 7. Lower vehicle and verify transfer case operation. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transfer Case > Transfer Case Actuator > Component Information > Service and Repair > NV243 Transfer Case > Page 9151 Transfer Case Actuator: Service and Repair NV273 Transfer Case Removal REMOVAL NOTE: New shift motor assemblies are shipped in the 2WD/AWD position. If a new shift motor assembly will be installed, it will be necessary to shift the transfer case to the 2WD/AWD position prior to motor removal. 1. Raise the vehicle on a suitable hoist. 2. Disengage the wiring connectors from the shift motor and mode sensor. 3. Remove the bolts (3) holding the shift motor and mode sensor assembly (2) onto the transfer case (1). 4. Separate the shift motor and mode sensor assembly (2) from the transfer case. Installation INSTALLATION 1. Verify that the shift sector o-ring is clean and properly positioned over the shift sector and against the transfer case. NOTE: Verify that the shift motor position and sector shaft orientation are aligned. It may be necessary to manually shift the transfer case if the shift motor and sector shaft are not aligned. 2. Position the shift motor and mode sensor assembly (2) onto the transfer case (1). 3. Install the bolts (3) to hold the assembly onto the transfer case. Tighten the bolts to 16-24 Nm (12-18 ft.lbs.). CAUTION: If the original shift motor and mode sensor assembly bolts are reused, be sure to use Mopar(R) Lock & Seal or Loctite(TM) 242 to replenish the lock patch material originally found on the bolts 4. Engage the wiring connectors to the shift motor and mode sensor. 5. Refill the transfer case as necessary. 6. Lower vehicle and verify transfer case operation. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Lamps and Indicators Transmission and Drivetrain > Lamps and Indicators - A/T > Overdrive Indicator Lamp > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Overdrive Indicator Lamp: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION An overdrive off indicator is standard equipment on all instrument clusters. However, on vehicles not equipped with an optional overdrive automatic transmission, this indicator is electronically disabled. This indicator is located on the right side of the instrument cluster, to the right of the coolant temperature gauge. The overdrive off indicator consists of a stencil-like cutout of the text O/D OFF in the opaque layer of the instrument cluster overlay. The dark outer layer of the overlay prevents the indicator from being clearly visible when it is not illuminated. An amber Light Emitting Diode (LED) behind the cutout in the opaque layer of the overlay causes the indicator to appear in amber through the translucent outer layer of the overlay when it is illuminated from behind by the LED, which is soldered onto the instrument cluster electronic circuit board. When the exterior lighting is turned ON, the illumination intensity of the overdrive off indicator is dimmable, which is adjusted along with the cluster general illumination lighting using the panel lamps dimmer thumbwheel on the headlamp switch. The overdrive off indicator is serviced as a unit with the instrument cluster. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Lamps and Indicators Transmission and Drivetrain > Lamps and Indicators - A/T > Overdrive Indicator Lamp > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 9158 Overdrive Indicator Lamp: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The overdrive off indicator gives an indication to the vehicle operator when the overdrive-OFF position of the tow/haul switch has been selected, disabling the electronically controlled overdrive feature of the automatic transmission. This indicator is controlled by a transistor on the instrument cluster circuit board based upon cluster programming and electronic messages received by the cluster from the Powertrain Control Module (PCM) over the Controller Area Network (CAN) data bus. The overdrive off indicator Light Emitting Diode (LED) is completely controlled by the instrument cluster logic circuit, and that logic will only allow this indicator to operate when the instrument cluster receives a battery current input on the fused ignition switch output (run-start) circuit. Therefore, the LED will always be OFF when the ignition switch is in any position except ON or START. The LED only illuminates when it is provided a path to ground by the instrument cluster transistor. The instrument cluster will turn ON the overdrive off indicator for the following reasons: - Overdrive Off Indicator Lamp-On Message - Each time the cluster receives an electronic overdrive off indicator lamp-ON message from the PCM indicating that the overdrive-OFF position of the tow/haul switch has been selected, the indicator will be illuminated. The indicator remains illuminated until the cluster receives a lamp-OFF message from the PCM, or until the ignition switch is turned to the OFF position, whichever occurs first. Actuator Test - Each time the cluster is put through the actuator test, the overdrive off indicator will be turned ON, then OFF again during the bulb check portion of the test to confirm the functionality of the LED and the cluster control circuitry. The PCM continually monitors the tow/haul switch to determine the proper outputs to the automatic transmission. The PCM then sends the proper lamp-ON or lamp-OFF message to the ElectroMechanical Instrument Cluster (EMIC) (also known as the Cab Compartment Node/CCN). For further diagnosis of the overdrive off indicator or the instrument cluster circuitry that controls the indicator, Refer to appropriate testing. For proper diagnosis of the transmission control system, the PCM, the EMIC, the CAN data bus or the electronic communication related to overdrive off indicator operation a diagnostic scan tool is required. Refer to the appropriate diagnostic information. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Lamps and Indicators Transmission and Drivetrain > Lamps and Indicators - A/T > Temperature Warning Indicator - A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Temperature Warning Indicator - A/T: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION A transmission over-temperature indicator is standard equipment on all instrument clusters. However, on vehicles not equipped with an optional automatic transmission, this indicator is electronically disabled. This indicator is located in the lower portion of the tachometer dial face in the instrument cluster overlay. The transmission over-temperature indicator consists of a stencil-like cutout of the International Control and Display Symbol icon for Transmission Temperature in the opaque layer of the instrument cluster overlay. The dark outer layer of the overlay prevents the indicator from being clearly visible when it is not illuminated. A red Light Emitting Diode (LED) behind the cutout in the opaque layer of the overlay causes the indicator to appear in red through the translucent outer layer of the overlay when it is illuminated from behind by the LED, which is soldered onto the instrument cluster electronic circuit board. The transmission over-temperature indicator is serviced as a unit with the instrument cluster. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Lamps and Indicators Transmission and Drivetrain > Lamps and Indicators - A/T > Temperature Warning Indicator - A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 9163 Temperature Warning Indicator - A/T: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The transmission over-temperature indicator gives an indication to the vehicle operator when the transmission fluid temperature is excessive, which may lead to accelerated transmission component wear or failure. This indicator is controlled by a transistor on the instrument cluster circuit board based upon cluster programming and electronic messages received over the Controller Area Network (CAN) data bus from the Powertrain Control Module (PCM). The transmission over-temperature indicator Light Emitting Diode (LED) is completely controlled by the instrument cluster logic circuit, and that logic will only allow this indicator to operate when the instrument cluster receives a battery current input on the fused ignition switch output (run-start) circuit. Therefore, the LED will always be OFF when the ignition switch is in any position except ON or START. The LED only illuminates when it is provided a path to ground by the instrument cluster transistor. The instrument cluster will turn ON the transmission over-temperature indicator for the following reasons: - Bulb Test - Each time the ignition switch is turned to the ON position the transmission over-temperature indicator is illuminated for about two seconds as a bulb test. - Trans Over-Temp Indicator Lamp-On Message - Each time the cluster receives an electronic trans over-temp indicator lamp-ON message from the PCM indicating that the transmission fluid temperature is 135 °C (275 °F) or higher, the indicator will be illuminated and a single chime tone is sounded. The indicator remains illuminated until the cluster receives a lamp-OFF message from the PCM, or until the ignition switch is turned to the OFF position, whichever occurs first. The chime tone feature will only repeat during the same ignition cycle if the indicator is cycled OFF and then ON again by the appropriate lamp-ON and lamp-OFF messages from the PCM. - Actuator Test - Each time the cluster is put through the actuator test, the transmission over-temperature indicator will be turned ON, then OFF again during the bulb check portion of the test to confirm the functionality of the LED and the cluster control circuitry. The PCM continually monitors the transmission temperature sensor to determine the transmission operating condition. The PCM then sends the proper lamp-ON or lamp-OFF message to the ElectroMechanical Instrument Cluster (EMIC) (also known as the Cab Compartment Node/CCN). If the instrument cluster illuminates the transmission over-temperature indicator due to a high transmission oil temperature condition, it may indicate that the transmission or the transmission cooling system are being overloaded, or that they require service. For further diagnosis of the transmission over-temperature indicator or the instrument cluster circuitry that controls the LED, Refer to appropriate testing. For proper diagnosis of the transmission temperature sensor, the PCM, the EMIC, the CAN data bus or the electronic communication related to transmission over-temperature indicator operation a diagnostic scan tool is required. Refer to the appropriate diagnostic information. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Lamps and Indicators Transmission and Drivetrain > Lamps and Indicators - A/T > Transmission Mode Indicator - A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Transmission Mode Indicator - A/T: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION An electronic automatic transmission gear selector indicator is standard factory-installed equipment on this vehicle. However, on vehicles not equipped with an optional automatic transmission, this indicator is electronically disabled. The gear selector indicator information is displayed in an electronic, blue-green Vacuum-Fluorescent Display (VFD) unit. This VFD unit is soldered onto the cluster electronic circuit board and is visible through a window with a smoked clear lens located on the lower edge of the speedometer dial face of the cluster overlay. The dark lens over the VFD prevents the indicator from being clearly visible when it is not illuminated. The gear selector indicator displays the following characters from left to right: P, R, N, D, 2, and 1. Each character appears in a blue-green color and at the same lighting level as the odometer information. Respectively, these characters represent the PARK, REVERSE, NEUTRAL, DRIVE, second gear, and first gear positions of the transmission gear selector lever on the steering column. The indicator illuminates a rectangular box around the character that represents the currently selected lever position. During daylight hours (exterior lamps are OFF) the gear selector indicator is illuminated at full brightness for clear visibility. At night (exterior lamps are ON), the indicator lighting level is adjusted with the other cluster general illumination lamps using the panel lamps dimmer thumbwheel on the headlamp switch. However, a PARADE mode position of the panel lamps dimmer thumbwheel allows the indicator to be illuminated at full brightness if the exterior lamps are turned ON during daylight hours. The gear selector indicator is serviced as a unit with the VFD unit in the instrument cluster. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Lamps and Indicators Transmission and Drivetrain > Lamps and Indicators - A/T > Transmission Mode Indicator - A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 9168 Transmission Mode Indicator - A/T: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The electronic gear selector indicator gives an indication to the vehicle operator of the transmission gear that has been selected with the automatic transmission gear selector lever. This indicator is controlled by the instrument cluster circuit board based upon cluster programming. The cluster circuitry automatically configures itself for the proper transmission type based upon the hard wired transmission range sensor mux circuit input to the cluster. The gear selector indicator information is displayed by the odometer/trip odometer Vacuum Fluorescent Display (VFD) unit soldered onto the instrument cluster electronic circuit board, and the VFD will not display the gear selector indicator information after the ignition switch is turned to the OFF position. Each time the cluster is disconnected from battery current for more than about five minutes, it must configure itself for the automatic transmission type that is in the vehicle once it is reconnected to battery current. The instrument cluster circuitry configures the gear selector indicator based upon the following inputs from the transmission range sensor: - Open Circuit - If the cluster is configured for an automatic transmission and the transmission range sensor mux circuit is open, the cluster circuitry controls the gear selector indicator display based upon an electronic selected gear message received from the Transmission Control Module (TCM) over the Controller Area Network (CAN) data bus. If the Transmission Range Sensor (TRS) mux circuit is open and no electronic selected gear messages are received from the TCM within two seconds, the instrument cluster circuitry will not display any gear selector position until the condition is resolved or until the ignition switch is turned to the OFF position, whichever occurs first. - Resolved Circuit - If the transmission range sensor mux circuit is resolved, the cluster circuitry controls the gear selector indicator display based upon the resistance value of the hard wired input from the TRS. If the cluster is configured for an automatic transmission with a TRS input and detects a short to ground or an open in the TRS mux input, the instrument cluster circuitry will not display any gear selector position in the VFD. The VFD display for the short-to-ground and open circuit conditions will continue until the condition is resolved or until the ignition switch is turned to the OFF position, whichever occurs first. - Actuator Test - Each time the cluster is put through the actuator test, the odometer/trip odometer VFD will display all of its characters at once, then step through each character segment individually during the VFD portion of the test to confirm the functionality of the VFD and the cluster control circuitry. On vehicles with a TCM, the TCM continually monitors the TRS, then sends the proper message to the ElectroMechanical Instrument Cluster (EMIC) (also known as the Cab Compartment Node/CCN). On vehicles without a TCM, the EMIC continually monitors the hard wired TRS multiplexed input. On vehicles with a TCM, for proper diagnosis of the TRS, the TCM, the EMIC, the CAN data bus or the electronic communication related to gear selector indicator operation a diagnostic scan tool is required. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Lamps and Indicators Transmission and Drivetrain > Lamps and Indicators - Transfer Case > Four Wheel Drive Indicator Lamp > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Four Wheel Drive Indicator Lamp: Description and Operation Description 4WD Auto Indicator 4WD AUTO INDICATOR A 4WD auto indicator is standard equipment on all instrument clusters. However, on vehicles not equipped with the optional four-wheel drive system and electronically shifted transfer case, this indicator is electronically disabled. The 4WD auto indicator is located on the right side of the instrument cluster, to the right of the oil pressure gauge. The 4WD auto indicator consists of a stencil-like cutout of the text 4WD AUTO in the opaque layer of the instrument cluster overlay. The dark outer layer of the overlay prevents the indicator from being clearly visible when it is not illuminated. An amber Light Emitting Diode (LED) behind the cutout in the opaque layer of the overlay causes the indicator to appear in amber through the translucent outer layer of the overlay when it is illuminated from behind by the LED, which is soldered onto the instrument cluster electronic circuit board. When the exterior lighting is turned ON, the illumination intensity of the 4WD auto indicator is dimmable, which is adjusted along with the cluster general illumination lighting using the panel lamps dimmer thumbwheel on the headlamp switch. The 4WD auto indicator is serviced as a unit with the instrument cluster. 4WD Indicator 4WD INDICATOR Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Lamps and Indicators Transmission and Drivetrain > Lamps and Indicators - Transfer Case > Four Wheel Drive Indicator Lamp > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 9174 A 4WD indicator is standard equipment on all instrument clusters. However, on vehicles not equipped with an optional four-wheel drive system, this indicator is electronically disabled. The 4WD indicator is located on the right side of the instrument cluster, to the right of the oil pressure gauge. The 4WD indicator consists of a stencil-like cutout of the text 4WD in the opaque layer of the instrument cluster overlay. The dark outer layer of the overlay prevents the indicator from being clearly visible when it is not illuminated. An amber Light Emitting Diode (LED) behind the cutout in the opaque layer of the overlay causes the indicator to appear in amber through the translucent outer layer of the overlay when it is illuminated from behind by the LED, which is soldered onto the instrument cluster electronic circuit board. When the exterior lighting is turned ON, the illumination intensity of the 4WD indicator is dimmable, which is adjusted along with the cluster general illumination lighting using the panel lamps dimmer thumbwheel on the headlamp switch. The 4WD indicator is serviced as a unit with the instrument cluster. 4 Low Indicator 4 LOW INDICATOR A 4 low indicator is standard equipment on all instrument clusters. However, on vehicles not equipped with the optional four-wheel drive system and electronically shifted transfer case, this indicator is electronically disabled. The 4 low indicator is located on the right side of the instrument cluster, to the right of the coolant temperature gauge. The 4 low indicator consists of a stencil-like cutout of the text 4 LOW in the opaque layer of the instrument cluster overlay. The dark outer layer of the overlay prevents the indicator from being clearly visible when it is not illuminated. An amber Light Emitting Diode (LED) behind the cutout in the opaque layer of the overlay causes the indicator to appear in amber through the translucent outer layer of the overlay when it is illuminated from behind by the LED, which is soldered onto the instrument cluster electronic circuit board. When the exterior lighting is turned ON, the illumination intensity of the 4 low indicator is dimmable, which is adjusted along with the cluster general illumination lighting using the panel lamps dimmer thumbwheel on the headlamp switch. The 4 low indicator is serviced as a unit with the instrument cluster. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Lamps and Indicators Transmission and Drivetrain > Lamps and Indicators - Transfer Case > Four Wheel Drive Indicator Lamp > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 9175 Four Wheel Drive Indicator Lamp: Description and Operation Operation 4WD Auto Indicator 4WD AUTO INDICATOR The 4WD auto indicator gives an indication to the vehicle operator when the electronic transfer case has been shifted into the 4WD auto mode. This indicator is controlled by a transistor on the instrument cluster circuit board based upon cluster programming and electronic messages received by the cluster from the Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) over the Controller Area Network (CAN) data bus. The 4WD auto indicator Light Emitting Diode (LED) is completely controlled by the instrument cluster logic circuit, and that logic will only allow this indicator to operate when the instrument cluster receives a battery current input on the fused ignition switch output (run-start) circuit. Therefore, the LED will always be OFF when the ignition switch is in any position except ON or START. The LED only illuminates when it is provided a path to ground by the instrument cluster transistor. The instrument cluster will turn ON the 4WD auto indicator for the following reasons: - 4WD Auto Indicator Lamp-On Message - Each time the cluster receives an electronic 4WD auto indicator lamp-ON message from the TIPM, the indicator will be illuminated. The indicator remains illuminated until the cluster receives a lamp-OFF message from the TIPM, or until the ignition switch is turned to the OFF position, whichever occurs first. - Actuator Test - Each time the cluster is put through the actuator test, the 4WD auto indicator will be turned ON, then OFF again during the bulb check portion of the test to confirm the functionality of the LED and the cluster control circuitry. The TIPM continually monitors the electronic transfer case through the transfer case shift motor/mode sensor assembly to determine when the 4WD auto mode is engaged. The TIPM then sends the proper lamp-ON or lamp-OFF message to the ElectroMechanical Instrument Cluster (EMIC) (also known as the Cab Compartment Node/CCN). For further diagnosis of the 4WD auto indicator or the instrument cluster circuitry that controls the LED, Refer to appropriate testing. For proper diagnosis of the transfer case shift motor/mode sensor, the TIPM, the EMIC, the CAN data bus or the electronic communication related to 4WD auto indicator operation a diagnostic scan tool is required. Refer to the appropriate diagnostic information. 4WD Indicator 4WD INDICATOR The 4WD indicator gives an indication to the vehicle operator when the transfer case has been shifted into a 4WD mode. This indicator is controlled by a transistor on the instrument cluster circuit board based upon cluster programming and electronic messages received by the cluster from the Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) over the Controller Area Network (CAN) data bus. The 4WD indicator Light Emitting Diode (LED) is completely controlled by the instrument cluster logic circuit, and that logic will only allow this indicator to operate when the instrument cluster receives a battery current input on the fused ignition switch output (run-start) circuit. Therefore, the LED will always be OFF when the ignition switch is in any position except ON or START. The LED only illuminates when it is provided a path to ground by the instrument cluster transistor. The instrument cluster will turn ON the 4WD indicator for the following reasons: - 4WD Indicator Lamp-On Message - Each time the cluster receives an electronic 4WD indicator lamp-ON message from the TIPM, the indicator will be illuminated. The indicator remains illuminated until the cluster receives a lamp-OFF message from the TIPM, or until the ignition switch is turned to the OFF position, whichever occurs first. - Actuator Test - Each time the cluster is put through the actuator test, the 4WD indicator will be turned ON, then OFF again during the bulb check portion of the test to confirm the functionality of the LED and the cluster control circuitry. The TIPM continually monitors the electronic transfer case through the transfer case shift motor/mode sensor assembly or the manual transfer case through the transfer case switch to determine when the 4WD mode is engaged. The TIPM then sends the proper lamp-ON or lamp-OFF message to the ElectroMechanical Instrument Cluster (EMIC) (also known as the Cab Compartment Node/CCN). For further diagnosis of the 4WD indicator or the instrument cluster circuitry that controls the LED, Refer to appropriate testing. For proper diagnosis of the transfer case shift motor/mode sensor, the transfer case switch, the TIPM, the EMIC, the CAN data bus or the electronic communication related to 4WD indicator operation a diagnostic scan tool is required. Refer to the appropriate diagnostic information. 4 Low Indicator 4 LOW INDICATOR The 4 low indicator gives an indication to the vehicle operator when the electronic transfer case has been shifted into the 4WD low mode. This indicator is controlled by a transistor on the instrument cluster circuit board based upon cluster programming and electronic messages received by the cluster from Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Lamps and Indicators Transmission and Drivetrain > Lamps and Indicators - Transfer Case > Four Wheel Drive Indicator Lamp > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 9176 the Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) over the Controller Area Network (CAN) data bus. The 4 low indicator Light Emitting Diode (LED) is completely controlled by the instrument cluster logic circuit, and that logic will only allow this indicator to operate when the instrument cluster receives a battery current input on the fused ignition switch output (run-start) circuit. Therefore, the LED will always be OFF when the ignition switch is in any position except ON or START. The LED only illuminates when it is provided a path to ground by the instrument cluster transistor. The instrument cluster will turn ON the 4 low indicator for the following reasons: - 4 Low Indicator Lamp-On Message - Each time the cluster receives an electronic 4 low indicator lamp-ON message from the TIPM, the indicator will be illuminated. The indicator remains illuminated until the cluster receives a lamp-OFF message from the TIPM, or until the ignition switch is turned to the OFF position, whichever occurs first. - Actuator Test - Each time the cluster is put through the actuator test, the 4 low indicator will be turned ON, then OFF again during the LED portion of the test to confirm the functionality of the LED and the cluster control circuitry. The TIPM continually monitors the electronic transfer case through the transfer case shift motor/mode sensor assembly to determine when the 4WD low mode is engaged. The TIPM then sends the proper lamp-ON or lamp-OFF message to the ElectroMechanical Instrument Cluster (EMIC) (also known as the Cab Compartment Node/CCN). For further diagnosis of the 4 low indicator or the instrument cluster circuitry that controls the LED, Refer to appropriate testing. For proper diagnosis of the transfer case shift motor/mode sensor, the TIPM, the EMIC, the CAN data bus or the electronic communication related to 4 low indicator operation a diagnostic scan tool is required. Refer to the appropriate diagnostic information. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Lamps and Indicators Transmission and Drivetrain > Lamps and Indicators - Transfer Case > Malfunction Indicator Lamp - Transfer Case > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Malfunction Indicator Lamp - Transfer Case: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION A service 4WD indicator is standard equipment on all instrument clusters. However, on vehicles not equipped with the optional four-wheel drive system and electronically shifted transfer case, this indicator is electronically disabled. This indicator is located in the lower portion of the tachometer dial face in the instrument cluster overlay. The service 4WD indicator consists of a stencil-like cutout of the text SVC 4WD in the opaque layer of the instrument cluster overlay. The dark outer layer of the overlay prevents the indicator from being clearly visible when it is not illuminated. An amber Light Emitting Diode (LED) behind the cutout in the opaque layer of the overlay causes the indicator to appear in amber through the translucent outer layer of the overlay when it is illuminated from behind by the LED, which is soldered onto the instrument cluster electronic circuit board. The service 4WD indicator is serviced as a unit with the instrument cluster. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Lamps and Indicators Transmission and Drivetrain > Lamps and Indicators - Transfer Case > Malfunction Indicator Lamp - Transfer Case > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 9181 Malfunction Indicator Lamp - Transfer Case: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The service 4WD indicator gives an indication to the vehicle operator when the Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) has recorded a Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) for an electronic transfer case circuit or component malfunction. This indicator is controlled by a transistor on the instrument cluster circuit board based upon cluster programming and electronic messages received by the cluster from the TIPM over the Controller Area Network (CAN) data bus. The service 4WD indicator Light Emitting Diode (LED) is completely controlled by the instrument cluster logic circuit, and that logic will only allow this indicator to operate when the instrument cluster receives a battery current input on the fused ignition switch output (run-start) circuit. Therefore, the LED will always be OFF when the ignition switch is in any position except ON or START. The LED only illuminates when it is provided a path to ground by the instrument cluster transistor. The instrument cluster will turn ON the service 4WD indicator for the following reasons: - Bulb Test - Each time the ignition switch is turned to the ON position the service 4WD indicator is illuminated for about two seconds as a bulb test. - Service 4WD Indicator Lamp-On Message - Each time the cluster receives an electronic service 4WD indicator lamp-ON message from the TIPM, the service 4WD indicator will be illuminated. The indicator remains illuminated until the cluster receives a lamp-OFF message from the TIPM, or until the ignition switch is turned to the OFF position, whichever occurs first. - Communication Error - If the cluster receives no lamp-ON or lamp-OFF messages from the TIPM for 10 seconds the service 4WD indicator is illuminated by the cluster to indicate a loss of TIPM communication. The indicator remains controlled and illuminated by the cluster until a valid message is received from the TIPM. - Actuator Test - Each time the cluster is put through the actuator test, the service 4WD indicator will be turned ON, then OFF again during the bulb check portion of the test to confirm the functionality of the LED and the cluster control circuitry. The TIPM continually monitors the electronic transfer case control circuits and transfer case shift motor/mode sensor assembly to determine the condition of the system. The TIPM then sends the proper lamp-ON or lamp-OFF message to the ElectroMechanical Instrument Cluster (EMIC) (also known as the Cab Compartment Node/CCN). For further diagnosis of the service 4WD indicator or the instrument cluster circuitry that controls the LED, Refer to appropriate testing. For proper diagnosis of the TIPM, the EMIC, the CAN data bus or the electronic communication related to service 4WD indicator operation a diagnostic scan tool is required. Refer to the appropriate diagnostic information. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 200 Control Module: Locations Component ID 200 Component ID: 200 Component : MODULE-TRANSMISSION CONTROL Connector: Name : MODULE-TRANSMISSION CONTROL C1 Color : # of pins : 17 Qualifier : (RC) Pin Circuit Description 1 T52 20DG/OR INPUT SPEED SIGNAL 2-3 K427 18OR/LG POWER TAKEOFF RELAY ENABLE 4-5 T803 20DG/BR PRESSURE SIGNAL 4 6 T800 20DG/BR PRESSURE SIGNAL 1 7-8-9-10 - 11 T804 20YL/DB PRESSURE SIGNAL 5 12 T802 20DG/PK PRESSURE SIGNAL 3 13 - 14 - 15 - 16 T805 20DG/OR PRESSURE SIGNAL 6 17 T801 20DG/RD PRESSURE SIGNAL 2 Component Location - 31 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 200 > Page 9188 Connector: Name : MODULE-TRANSMISSION CONTROL C2 Color : # of pins : 24 Qualifier : (RC) Pin Circuit Description 1 T72 20YL/DB 8 VOLT SUPPLY 2 T14 20DG/BR OUTPUT SPEED SIGNAL 3 F916 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION RELAY OUTPUT 3 T16 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 200 > Page 9189 4 F916 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION RELAY OUTPUT 4 T16 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT 5-6-7 A104 20YL/RD FUSED B(+) 8 Z133 18BK/LG GROUND 9-10 - 11 - 12 - 13 - - 14 T6 20DG TOW/HAUL OVERDRIVE OFF SWITCH SIGNAL 15 T54 20DG/OR TRANSMISSION TEMPERATURE SIGNAL 16 T819 20YL/VT TCC TEMPERATURE SIGNAL 17 Z133 18BK/LG GROUND 18 - 19 T811 20DG/LB SHIFT 4 CONTROL 20 D65 20WT/LG CAN C BUS (+) 21 D64 20WT/LB CAN C BUS (-) 22 - 23 - 24 - Component Location - 31 Connector: Name : MODULE-TRANSMISSION CONTROL C3 Color : # of pins : 31 Qualifier : (RC) Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 200 > Page 9190 Pin Circuit Description 1 T808 20DG/GY SHIFT 1 CONTROL 2-3 T810 20DG/DB SHIFT 3 CONTROL 4-5 T817 20YL/BR LINEAR 3 CONTROL 6 T812 20DG/TN LINEAR 1 GROUND 7 T813 20DG/LG LINEAR 1 CONTROL 8 T815 20YL/RD LINEAR 2 CONTROL 9 T814 20YL/BR LINEAR 2 GROUND 10 T806 20DG/VT PRESSURE SIGNAL 7 11 - 12 - 13 - 14 - - 15 T816 20YL/PK LINEAR 3 GROUND 16 T828 20DG/DB TRS 1 SIGNAL 17 T42 20DG/YL TRS T42 SIGNAL 18 T3 20DG/DB TRS T3 SIGNAL 19 T827 20DG/LB TRS DRIVE SIGNAL 20 T824 20YL/DB TRS PARK SIGNAL 21 T826 20DG/DB TRS REVERSE SIGNAL 22 T809 20DG/YL SHIFT 2 CONTROL 23 - 24 - 25 - 26 T807 20DG/WT PRESSURE SIGNAL 8 27 - 28 T820 20YL/WT TEMPERATURE SENSOR GROUND 29 T825 20DG/YL TRS NEUTRAL SIGNAL 30 T821 20YL/GY LINEAR 4 CONTROL 31 T818 20YL/OR LINEAR 4 GROUND Component Location - 31 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 200 > Page 9191 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 200 > Page 9192 Control Module: Locations Component ID 216 Component ID: 216 Component : MODULE-TRANSMISSION CONTROL Connector: Name : MODULE-TRANSMISSION CONTROL C1 Color : # of pins : 17 Qualifier : (RC) Pin Circuit Description 1 T52 20DG/OR INPUT SPEED SIGNAL 2-3 K427 18OR/LG POWER TAKEOFF RELAY ENABLE 4-5 T803 20DG/BR PRESSURE SIGNAL 4 6 T800 20DG/BR PRESSURE SIGNAL 1 7-8-9-10 - 11 T804 20YL/DB PRESSURE SIGNAL 5 12 T802 20DG/PK PRESSURE SIGNAL 3 13 - 14 - 15 - 16 T805 20DG/OR PRESSURE SIGNAL 6 17 T801 20DG/RD PRESSURE SIGNAL 2 Component Location - 31 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 200 > Page 9193 Connector: Name : MODULE-TRANSMISSION CONTROL C2 Color : # of pins : 24 Qualifier : (RC) Pin Circuit Description 1 T72 20YL/DB 8 VOLT SUPPLY 2 T14 20DG/BR OUTPUT SPEED SIGNAL 3 F916 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION RELAY OUTPUT 3 T16 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 200 > Page 9194 4 F916 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION RELAY OUTPUT 4 T16 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT 5-6-7 A104 20YL/RD FUSED B(+) 8 Z133 18BK/LG GROUND 9-10 - 11 - 12 - 13 - - 14 T6 20DG TOW/HAUL OVERDRIVE OFF SWITCH SIGNAL 15 T54 20DG/OR TRANSMISSION TEMPERATURE SIGNAL 16 T819 20YL/VT TCC TEMPERATURE SIGNAL 17 Z133 18BK/LG GROUND 18 - 19 T811 20DG/LB SHIFT 4 CONTROL 20 D65 20WT/LG CAN C BUS (+) 21 D64 20WT/LB CAN C BUS (-) 22 - 23 - 24 - Component Location - 31 Connector: Name : MODULE-TRANSMISSION CONTROL C3 Color : # of pins : 31 Qualifier : (RC) Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 200 > Page 9195 Pin Circuit Description 1 T808 20DG/GY SHIFT 1 CONTROL 2-3 T810 20DG/DB SHIFT 3 CONTROL 4-5 T817 20YL/BR LINEAR 3 CONTROL 6 T812 20DG/TN LINEAR 1 GROUND 7 T813 20DG/LG LINEAR 1 CONTROL 8 T815 20YL/RD LINEAR 2 CONTROL 9 T814 20YL/BR LINEAR 2 GROUND 10 T806 20DG/VT PRESSURE SIGNAL 7 11 - 12 - 13 - 14 - - 15 T816 20YL/PK LINEAR 3 GROUND 16 T828 20DG/DB TRS 1 SIGNAL 17 T42 20DG/YL TRS T42 SIGNAL 18 T3 20DG/DB TRS T3 SIGNAL 19 T827 20DG/LB TRS DRIVE SIGNAL 20 T824 20YL/DB TRS PARK SIGNAL 21 T826 20DG/DB TRS REVERSE SIGNAL 22 T809 20DG/YL SHIFT 2 CONTROL 23 - 24 - 25 - 26 T807 20DG/WT PRESSURE SIGNAL 8 27 - 28 T820 20YL/WT TEMPERATURE SENSOR GROUND 29 T825 20DG/YL TRS NEUTRAL SIGNAL 30 T821 20YL/GY LINEAR 4 CONTROL 31 T818 20YL/OR LINEAR 4 GROUND Component Location - 31 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 200 > Page 9196 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Component ID 200 Control Module: Diagrams Component ID 200 Component ID: 200 Component : MODULE-TRANSMISSION CONTROL Connector: Name : MODULE-TRANSMISSION CONTROL C1 Color : # of pins : 17 Qualifier : (RC) Pin Circuit Description 1 T52 20DG/OR INPUT SPEED SIGNAL 2-3 K427 18OR/LG POWER TAKEOFF RELAY ENABLE 4-5 T803 20DG/BR PRESSURE SIGNAL 4 6 T800 20DG/BR PRESSURE SIGNAL 1 7-8-9-10 - 11 T804 20YL/DB PRESSURE SIGNAL 5 12 T802 20DG/PK PRESSURE SIGNAL 3 13 - 14 - 15 - 16 T805 20DG/OR PRESSURE SIGNAL 6 17 T801 20DG/RD PRESSURE SIGNAL 2 Component Location - 31 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Component ID 200 > Page 9199 Connector: Name : MODULE-TRANSMISSION CONTROL C2 Color : # of pins : 24 Qualifier : (RC) Pin Circuit Description 1 T72 20YL/DB 8 VOLT SUPPLY 2 T14 20DG/BR OUTPUT SPEED SIGNAL 3 F916 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION RELAY OUTPUT 3 T16 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Component ID 200 > Page 9200 4 F916 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION RELAY OUTPUT 4 T16 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT 5-6-7 A104 20YL/RD FUSED B(+) 8 Z133 18BK/LG GROUND 9-10 - 11 - 12 - 13 - - 14 T6 20DG TOW/HAUL OVERDRIVE OFF SWITCH SIGNAL 15 T54 20DG/OR TRANSMISSION TEMPERATURE SIGNAL 16 T819 20YL/VT TCC TEMPERATURE SIGNAL 17 Z133 18BK/LG GROUND 18 - 19 T811 20DG/LB SHIFT 4 CONTROL 20 D65 20WT/LG CAN C BUS (+) 21 D64 20WT/LB CAN C BUS (-) 22 - 23 - 24 - Component Location - 31 Connector: Name : MODULE-TRANSMISSION CONTROL C3 Color : # of pins : 31 Qualifier : (RC) Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Component ID 200 > Page 9201 Pin Circuit Description 1 T808 20DG/GY SHIFT 1 CONTROL 2-3 T810 20DG/DB SHIFT 3 CONTROL 4-5 T817 20YL/BR LINEAR 3 CONTROL 6 T812 20DG/TN LINEAR 1 GROUND 7 T813 20DG/LG LINEAR 1 CONTROL 8 T815 20YL/RD LINEAR 2 CONTROL 9 T814 20YL/BR LINEAR 2 GROUND 10 T806 20DG/VT PRESSURE SIGNAL 7 11 - 12 - 13 - 14 - - 15 T816 20YL/PK LINEAR 3 GROUND 16 T828 20DG/DB TRS 1 SIGNAL 17 T42 20DG/YL TRS T42 SIGNAL 18 T3 20DG/DB TRS T3 SIGNAL 19 T827 20DG/LB TRS DRIVE SIGNAL 20 T824 20YL/DB TRS PARK SIGNAL 21 T826 20DG/DB TRS REVERSE SIGNAL 22 T809 20DG/YL SHIFT 2 CONTROL 23 - 24 - 25 - 26 T807 20DG/WT PRESSURE SIGNAL 8 27 - 28 T820 20YL/WT TEMPERATURE SENSOR GROUND 29 T825 20DG/YL TRS NEUTRAL SIGNAL 30 T821 20YL/GY LINEAR 4 CONTROL 31 T818 20YL/OR LINEAR 4 GROUND Component Location - 31 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Component ID 200 > Page 9202 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Component ID 200 > Page 9203 Control Module: Diagrams Component ID 216 Component ID: 216 Component : MODULE-TRANSMISSION CONTROL Connector: Name : MODULE-TRANSMISSION CONTROL C1 Color : # of pins : 17 Qualifier : (RC) Pin Circuit Description 1 T52 20DG/OR INPUT SPEED SIGNAL 2-3 K427 18OR/LG POWER TAKEOFF RELAY ENABLE 4-5 T803 20DG/BR PRESSURE SIGNAL 4 6 T800 20DG/BR PRESSURE SIGNAL 1 7-8-9-10 - 11 T804 20YL/DB PRESSURE SIGNAL 5 12 T802 20DG/PK PRESSURE SIGNAL 3 13 - 14 - 15 - 16 T805 20DG/OR PRESSURE SIGNAL 6 17 T801 20DG/RD PRESSURE SIGNAL 2 Component Location - 31 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Component ID 200 > Page 9204 Connector: Name : MODULE-TRANSMISSION CONTROL C2 Color : # of pins : 24 Qualifier : (RC) Pin Circuit Description 1 T72 20YL/DB 8 VOLT SUPPLY 2 T14 20DG/BR OUTPUT SPEED SIGNAL 3 F916 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION RELAY OUTPUT 3 T16 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Component ID 200 > Page 9205 4 F916 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION RELAY OUTPUT 4 T16 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT 5-6-7 A104 20YL/RD FUSED B(+) 8 Z133 18BK/LG GROUND 9-10 - 11 - 12 - 13 - - 14 T6 20DG TOW/HAUL OVERDRIVE OFF SWITCH SIGNAL 15 T54 20DG/OR TRANSMISSION TEMPERATURE SIGNAL 16 T819 20YL/VT TCC TEMPERATURE SIGNAL 17 Z133 18BK/LG GROUND 18 - 19 T811 20DG/LB SHIFT 4 CONTROL 20 D65 20WT/LG CAN C BUS (+) 21 D64 20WT/LB CAN C BUS (-) 22 - 23 - 24 - Component Location - 31 Connector: Name : MODULE-TRANSMISSION CONTROL C3 Color : # of pins : 31 Qualifier : (RC) Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Component ID 200 > Page 9206 Pin Circuit Description 1 T808 20DG/GY SHIFT 1 CONTROL 2-3 T810 20DG/DB SHIFT 3 CONTROL 4-5 T817 20YL/BR LINEAR 3 CONTROL 6 T812 20DG/TN LINEAR 1 GROUND 7 T813 20DG/LG LINEAR 1 CONTROL 8 T815 20YL/RD LINEAR 2 CONTROL 9 T814 20YL/BR LINEAR 2 GROUND 10 T806 20DG/VT PRESSURE SIGNAL 7 11 - 12 - 13 - 14 - - 15 T816 20YL/PK LINEAR 3 GROUND 16 T828 20DG/DB TRS 1 SIGNAL 17 T42 20DG/YL TRS T42 SIGNAL 18 T3 20DG/DB TRS T3 SIGNAL 19 T827 20DG/LB TRS DRIVE SIGNAL 20 T824 20YL/DB TRS PARK SIGNAL 21 T826 20DG/DB TRS REVERSE SIGNAL 22 T809 20DG/YL SHIFT 2 CONTROL 23 - 24 - 25 - 26 T807 20DG/WT PRESSURE SIGNAL 8 27 - 28 T820 20YL/WT TEMPERATURE SENSOR GROUND 29 T825 20DG/YL TRS NEUTRAL SIGNAL 30 T821 20YL/GY LINEAR 4 CONTROL 31 T818 20YL/OR LINEAR 4 GROUND Component Location - 31 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Component ID 200 > Page 9207 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > Transmission Control Module - Description Control Module: Description and Operation Transmission Control Module - Description DESCRIPTION On gasoline vehicles the Transmission Control Module (TCM) (2) may be sub-module within the Powertrain Control Module (PCM) (3). Vehicles equipped 68RFE transmission and a 6.7L Diesel engine, the TCM is housed in the NGC4 controller utilizing only the C1 and C4 connectors (TCM only). The controller is located at the rear of the engine compartment, near the right inner fender. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > Transmission Control Module - Description > Page 9210 On Cab Chassis models equipped with the AS68RC transmission the Transmission Control Module (TCM) has three electrical connectors and is located in the passenger compartment underneath of the left side of the dash panel. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > Transmission Control Module - Description > Page 9211 Control Module: Description and Operation Transmission Control Module - Operation OPERATION RLE and RFE TRANSMISSIONS The Transmission Control Module (TCM) controls all electronic operations of the transmission. The TCM receives information regarding vehicle operation from both direct and indirect inputs, and selects the operational mode of the transmission. Direct inputs are hard wired to, and used specifically by the TCM. Indirect inputs are shared with the TCM via the vehicle communication bus. Some examples of direct inputs to the TCM are: - Battery (B+) voltage - Ignition "ON" voltage - Transmission Control Relay (Switched B+) (if equipped) - Throttle Position Sensor - Crankshaft Position Sensor - Transmission Range Sensor - Pressure Switches - Transmission Temperature Sensor - Input Shaft Speed Sensor - Output Shaft Speed Sensor - Line Pressure Sensor Some examples of indirect inputs to the TCM are: - Target Idle - Torque Reduction Confirmation - Engine Coolant Temperature - Ambient/Battery Temperature - Scan Tool Communication Based on the information received from these various inputs, the TCM determines the appropriate shift schedule and shift points, depending on the present operating conditions and driver demand. This is possible through the control of various direct and indirect outputs. Some examples of TCM direct outputs are: - Transmission Control Relay - Solenoids - Torque Reduction Request Some examples of TCM indirect outputs are: - Transmission Temperature (to PCM) - PRNDL Position (to cluster/CCN) In addition to monitoring inputs and controlling outputs, the TCM has other important responsibilities and functions: - Storing and maintaining Clutch Volume Indexes (CVI) - Storing and selecting appropriate Shift Schedules - System self-diagnostics - Diagnostic capabilities (with scan tool) NOTE: If the TCM has been replaced, the "Quick Learn Procedure" must be performed. See: Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Transmission Control Module/TCM Quick Learn BATTERY FEED A fused, direct battery feed to the TCM is used for continuous power. This battery voltage is necessary to retain memory in the TCM. When the battery (B+) is disconnected, this memory is lost. When the battery (B+) is restored, this memory loss is detected by the TCM and a Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) is set. CLUTCH VOLUME INDEXES (CVI) Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > Transmission Control Module - Description > Page 9212 An important function of the TCM is to monitor Clutch Volume Indexes (CVI). CVIs represent the volume of fluid needed to compress a clutch pack. The TCM monitors gear ratio changes by monitoring the Input and Output Speed Sensors. The Input, or Turbine Speed Sensor sends an electrical signal to the TCM that represents input shaft rpm. The Output Speed Sensor provides the TCM with output shaft speed information. By comparing the two inputs, the TCM can determine transmission gear position. This is important to the CVI calculation because the TCM determines CVIs by monitoring how long it takes for a gear change to occur. Gear ratios can be determined by using the Scan Tool and reading the Input/Output Speed Sensor values in the "Monitors" display. Gear ratio can be obtained by dividing the Input Speed Sensor value by the Output Speed Sensor value. For example, if the input shaft is rotating at 1000 rpm and the output shaft is rotating at 500 rpm, then the TCM can determine that the gear ratio is 2:1. In direct drive (3rd gear), the gear ratio changes to 1:1. The gear ratio changes as clutches are applied and released. By monitoring the length of time it takes for the gear ratio to change following a shift request, the TCM can determine the volume of fluid used to apply or release a friction element. The volume of transmission fluid needed to apply the friction elements are continuously updated for adaptive controls. As friction material wears, the volume of fluid need to apply the element increases. Certain mechanical problems within the input clutch assembly can cause inadequate or out-of-range element volumes. Also, defective Input/Output Speed Sensors and wiring can cause these conditions. The following charts identifies the appropriate clutch volumes and when they are monitored/updated: Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > Transmission Control Module - Description > Page 9213 SHIFT SCHEDULES As mentioned earlier, the TCM has programming that allows it to select a variety of shift schedules. Shift schedule selection is dependent on the following: - Shift lever position - Throttle position - Engine load - Fluid temperature - Software level As driving conditions change, the TCM appropriately adjusts the shift schedule. Refer to the following chart to determine the appropriate operation expected, depending on driving conditions. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > Transmission Control Module - Description > Page 9214 AISIN AS68RC TRANSMISSION The Transmission Control Module (TCM) controls all electronic operations of the transmission. The TCM receives information regarding vehicle operation from both direct and indirect inputs, and selects the operational mode of the transmission. Direct inputs are hard wired to, and used specifically by the TCM. Indirect inputs are shared with the TCM via the vehicle communication bus. Some examples of direct inputs to the TCM are: - Battery (B+) voltage - Ignition "ON" voltage - Transmission Range Sensor - Pressure Switches - Transmission Temperature Sensor - Input Speed Sensor - Output Speed Sensor Some examples of indirect inputs to the TCM are: - Engine/Body Identification - Manifold Pressure - Throttle position - Torque Reduction Confirmation - Engine Coolant Temperature - Exhaust Brake Status (if equipped) - PTO Request (if equipped) - Scan Tool Communication Based on the information received from these various inputs, the TCM determines the appropriate shift schedule and shift points, depending on the present operating conditions and driver demand. This is possible through the control of various direct and indirect outputs. Some examples of TCM direct outputs are: - Exhaust Brake Cut Request (if equipped). - Solenoids. - Torque Reduction Request. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > Transmission Control Module - Description > Page 9215 Some examples of TCM.indirect outputs are: - Transmission Temperature (to PCM). - PRNDL Position (to cluster/CCN). - PTO Status. In addition to monitoring inputs and controlling outputs, the TCM has other important responsibilities and functions: - Storing and maintaining Clutch Volume Indexes (CVI). - Storing and selecting appropriate Shift Schedules. - System self-diagnostics. - Diagnostic capabilities (with scan tool). Clutch filling time is continuously maintained when the vehicle is running. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Transmission Control System Relay, A/T > Component Information > Locations Transmission Control System Relay: Locations Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Transmission Control System Relay, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Transmission Control System Relay: Diagram Information and Instructions Warnings WARNINGS - GENERAL WARNINGS provide information to prevent personal injury and vehicle damage. Below is a list of general warnings that should be followed any time a vehicle is being serviced. WARNING: Always wear safety glasses for eye protection. WARNING: Use safety stands anytime a procedure requires being under a vehicle. WARNING: Be sure that the ignition switch always is in the off position, unless the procedure requires it to be on. WARNING: Set the parking brake when working on any vehicle. An automatic transmission should be in park. A manual transmission should be in neutral. WARNING: Operate the engine only in a well-ventilated area. WARNING: Keep away from moving parts when the engine is running, especially the fan and belts. WARNING: To prevent serious burns, avoid contact with hot parts such as the radiator, exhaust manifold(s), tail pipe, catalytic converter and muffler. WARNING: Do not allow flame or sparks near the battery. Gases are always present in and around the battery. WARNING: Always remove rings, watches, loose hanging jewelry and avoid loose clothing. How to Use Wiring Diagrams DESCRIPTION - HOW TO USE WIRING DIAGRAMS DaimlerChrysler Corporation wiring diagrams are designed to provide information regarding the vehicles wiring content. In order to effectively use the wiring diagrams to diagnose and repair DaimlerChrysler Corporation vehicles, it is important to understand all of their features and characteristics. Diagrams are arranged such that the power (B+) side of the circuit is placed near the top of the page, and the ground (B-) side of the circuit is placed near the bottom of the page. All switches, components, and modules are shown in the at rest position with the doors closed and the key removed from the ignition. Components are shown two ways. A solid line around a component indicates that the component is complete. A dashed line around the component indicates that the component is being shown is not complete. Incomplete components have a reference number to indicate the page where the component is shown complete. It is important to realize that no attempt is made on the diagrams to represent components and wiring as they appear on the vehicle. For example, a short piece of wire is treated the same as a long one. In addition, switches and other components are shown as simply as possible, with regard to function only. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Transmission Control System Relay, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9221 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Transmission Control System Relay, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9222 SYMBOLS International symbols are used throughout the wiring diagrams. These symbols are consistent with those being used around the world. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Transmission Control System Relay, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9223 TERMINOLOGY This is a list of terms and definitions used in the wiring diagrams. LHD - Left Hand Drive Vehicles RHD - Right Hand Drive Vehicles ATX - Automatic Transmissions-Front Wheel Drive MTX Manual Transmissions-Front Wheel Drive Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Transmission Control System Relay, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9224 AT - Automatic Transmissions-Rear Wheel Drive MT - Manual Transmissions-Rear Wheel Drive SOHC - Single Over Head Cam Engine DOHC - Double Over Head Cam Engine Export - Vehicles Built For Sale In Markets Other Than North America Except Export - Vehicles Built For Sale In North America Circuit Functions DESCRIPTION - CIRCUIT FUNCTIONS All circuits in the diagrams use an alpha/numeric code to identify the wire and it's function. To identify which circuit code applies to a system, refer to the Circuit Identification Code Chart. This chart shows the main circuits only and does not show the secondary codes that may apply to some models. Circuit Information DESCRIPTION - CIRCUIT INFORMATION Each wire shown in the diagrams contains a code which identifies the main circuit, a specific part of the main circuit, gage of wire, and color. An example would be A 2 18 LB/YL. This is a Battery Feed circuit, level two, eighteen gauge, light blue with a yellow tracer. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Transmission Control System Relay, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9225 Connector, Ground and Splice Information DESCRIPTION - CONNECTOR, GROUND AND SPLICE INFORMATION CAUTION: Not all connectors are serviced. Some connectors are serviced only with a harness. A typical example might be the Supplemental Restraint System connectors. Always check parts availability before attempting a repair. IDENTIFICATION In-line connectors are identified by a number, as follows: - In-line connectors located in the engine compartment are C100 series numbers. - In-line connectors located in the instrument panel area are C200 series numbers. - In-line connectors located in the body are C300 series numbers. - Jumper harness connectors are C400 series numbers. - Grounds and ground connectors are identified with a "G" and follow the same series numbering as the in-line connectors. - Splices are identified with an "S" and follow the same series numbering as the in-line connectors. In addition, S001-S099 numbers are located in the engine compartment. - Component connectors are identified by the component name instead of a number. Multiple connectors on a component use a C1, C2, etc. identifier. LOCATIONS Vehicle/Locations contains the master connector/ground/splice location index charts with hyperlinks to the applicable location illustrations. The illustrations contain the connector name (or number)/ground number/splice number and component identification. The abbreviation T/O is used in the component location section to indicate a point in which the wiring harness branches out to a component. The abbreviation N/S means Not Shown in the illustrations Section Identification and Information DESCRIPTION - SECTION IDENTIFICATION AND INFORMATION The wiring diagrams are grouped into individual sections. If a component is most likely found in a particular group, it will be shown complete (all wires, Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Transmission Control System Relay, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9226 connectors, and pins) within that group. For example, the Auto Shutdown Relay is most likely to be found in Powertrain Management, so it is shown there complete. It can, however, be shown partially in another group if it contains some associated wiring. Splice diagrams show the entire splice and provide references to other sections the splices serves. Splice Information only contains splice diagrams that are not shown in their entirety somewhere else in the wiring diagrams. Connector Pin-Outs shows each connector and the circuits involved with that connector. The connectors are identified using the name/number on the diagram pages. Removal REMOVAL 1. Disconnect battery. 2. Release Connector Lock (2). 3. Disconnect the connector (3) being repaired from its mating half/component. 4. Remove the dress cover (if applicable) (1). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Transmission Control System Relay, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9227 5. Release the Secondary Terminal Lock, if required (1). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Transmission Control System Relay, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9228 6. Position the connector locking finger away from the terminal using the proper special tool. Pull on the wire to remove the terminal from the connector. Installation Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Transmission Control System Relay, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9229 INSTALLATION 1. Insert the removed terminal in the same cavity on the repair connector. 2. Repeat steps for each terminal in the connector, being sure that all wires are inserted into the proper cavities. For additional connector pin-out identification, refer to the wiring diagrams. 3. When the connector is re-assembled, the secondary terminal lock must be placed in the locked position to prevent terminal push out. 4. Replace dress cover (if applicable). 5. Connect connector to its mating half/component. 6. Connect battery and test all affected systems. Removal REMOVAL 1. Disconnect the battery. 2. Locate the diode in the harness, and remove the protective covering. 3. Remove the diode from the harness, pay attention to the current flow direction (1) (2) (3). Installation INSTALLATION 1. Remove the insulation from the wires in the harness. Only remove enough insulation to solder in the new diode. 2. Install the new diode in the harness, making sure current flow is correct. If necessary, refer to the appropriate wiring diagram for current flow. 3. Solder the connection together using rosin core type solder only. Do not use acid core solder. 4. Tape the diode to the harness using electrical tape. Make sure the diode is completely sealed from the elements. 5. Re-connect the battery and test affected systems. Removal REMOVAL 1. Follow steps for removing terminals described in the connector removal section. 2. Cut the wire 6 inches from the back of the connector. Installation INSTALLATION 1. Select a wire from the terminal repair kit that best matches the color and gage of the wire being repaired. 2. Cut the repair wire to the proper length and remove one-half (1/2) inch of insulation. 3. Splice the repair wire to the wire harness (see wire splicing procedure). See: Service Procedures/Wire Splicing 4. Insert the repaired wire into the connector. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Transmission Control System Relay, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9230 5. Install the connector locking wedge, if required, and reconnect the connector to its mating half/component. 6. Re-tape the wire harness starting at 1-1/2 inches behind the connector and 2 inches past the repair. 7. Connect battery and test all affected systems. Wire Splicing STANDARD PROCEDURE - WIRE SPLICING When splicing a wire, it is important that the correct gage be used as shown in the wiring diagrams. 1. Remove one-half (1/2) inch of insulation from each wire that needs to be spliced. 2. Place a piece of adhesive lined heat shrink tubing on one side of the wire. Make sure the tubing will be long enough to cover and seal the entire repair area. 3. Place the strands of wire overlapping each other inside of the splice clip (1). 4. Using crimping tool (1), Mopar p/n 05019912AA, crimp the splice clip and wires together. 5. Solder (3) the connection (2) together using rosin core type solder (1) only. CAUTION: DO NOT USE ACID CORE SOLDER. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Transmission Control System Relay, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9231 6. Center the heat shrink tubing (2) over the joint and heat using a heat gun. Heat the joint until the tubing is tightly sealed and sealant (1) comes out of both ends of the tubing. Special Tools WIRING/TERMINAL PROBING TOOL PACKAGE 6807 TERMINAL PICK TOOL SET 6680 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Transmission Control System Relay, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9232 TERMINAL REMOVING TOOLS 6932 AND 8638 TERMINAL REMOVING TOOL 6934 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Transmission Control System Relay, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9233 Transmission Control System Relay: Diagnostic Aids Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) Sensitive Devices STANDARD PROCEDURE - ELECTROSTATIC DISCHARGE (ESD) SENSITIVE DEVICES All ESD sensitive components are solid state and a symbol is used to indicate this. When handling any component with this symbol, comply with the following procedures to reduce the possibility of electrostatic charge build up on the body and inadvertent discharge into the component. If it is not known whether the part is ESD sensitive, assume that it is. 1. Always touch a known good ground before handling the part. This should be repeated while handling the part and more frequently after sliding across a seat, sitting down from a standing position, or walking a distance. 2. Avoid touching electrical terminals of the part, unless instructed to do so by a written procedure. 3. When using a voltmeter, be sure to connect the ground lead first. 4. Do not remove the part from it's protective packing until it is time to install the part. 5. Before removing the part from it's package, ground the package to a known good ground on the vehicle. Testing Of Voltage Potential STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING OF VOLTAGE POTENTIAL 1. Connect the ground lead of a voltmeter to a known good ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the voltmeter to the selected test point. The vehicle ignition may need to be turned ON to check voltage. Refer to the appropriate test procedure. Testing For Continuity Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Transmission Control System Relay, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9234 STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING FOR CONTINUITY 1. Remove the fuse (1) for the circuit being checked or, disconnect the battery. 2. Connect one lead of the ohmmeter to one side of the circuit being tested 3. Connect the other lead to the other end of the circuit being tested. Low or no resistance means good continuity. Testing For A Short To Ground STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING FOR A SHORT TO GROUND 1. Remove the fuse and disconnect all items involved with the fuse. 2. Connect a test light or a voltmeter across the terminals of the fuse. 3. Starting at the fuse block, wiggle the wiring harness about six to eight inches apart and watch the voltmeter/test lamp. 4. If the voltmeter registers voltage or the test lamp glows, there is a short to ground in that general area of the wiring harness. Testing For A Short To Ground On Fuses Powering Several Loads STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING FOR A SHORT TO GROUND ON FUSES POWERING SEVERAL LOADS 1. Refer to the wiring diagrams and disconnect or isolate all items on the suspected fused circuits. 2. Replace the blown fuse. 3. Supply power to the fuse by turning ON the ignition switch or re-connecting the battery. 4. Start connecting or energizing the items in the fuse circuit one at a time. When the fuse blows the circuit with the short to ground has been isolated. Testing For A Voltage Drop STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING FOR A VOLTAGE DROP Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Transmission Control System Relay, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9235 1. Connect the positive lead of the voltmeter to the side of the circuit closest to the battery. 2. Connect the other lead of the voltmeter to the other side of the switch, component or circuit. 3. Operate the item. 4. The voltmeter will show the difference in voltage between the two points. Troubleshooting Wiring Problems DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING - WIRING HARNESS TROUBLESHOOTING TOOLS When diagnosing a problem in an electrical circuit there are several common tools necessary. These tools are listed and explained below. - Jumper Wire - This is a test wire used to connect two points of a circuit. It can be used to bypass an open in a circuit. WARNING: Never use a jumper wire across a load, such as a motor, connected between a battery feed and ground. - Voltmeter - Used to check for voltage on a circuit. Always connect the black lead to a known good ground and the red lead to the positive side of the circuit. CAUTION: Most of the electrical components used in today's vehicles are Solid State. When checking voltages in these circuits, use a meter with a 10 - megohm or greater impedance rating. - Ohmmeter - Used to check the resistance between two points of a circuit. Low or no resistance in a circuit means good continuity. CAUTION: Most of the electrical components used in today's vehicles are Solid State. When checking resistance in these circuits use a meter with a 10 - megohm or greater impedance rating. In addition, make sure the power is disconnected from the circuit. Circuits that are powered up by the vehicle's electrical system can cause damage to the equipment and provide false readings. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Transmission Control System Relay, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9236 - Probing Tools - These tools are used for probing terminals in connectors. Select the proper size tool from Special Tool Package 6807, and insert the probing end (2) into the terminal being tested. Use the other end of the tool (1) to insert the meter probe. INTERMITTENT AND POOR CONNECTIONS Most intermittent electrical problems are caused by faulty electrical connections or wiring. It is also possible for a sticking component or relay to cause a problem. Before condemning a component or wiring assembly, check the following items. - Connectors are fully seated - Spread terminals, or terminal push out - Terminals in the wiring assembly are fully seated into the connector/component and locked into position - Dirt or corrosion on the terminals. Any amount of corrosion or dirt could cause an intermittent problem - Damaged connector/component casing exposing the item to dirt or moisture - Wire insulation that has rubbed through causing a short to ground - Some or all of the wiring strands broken inside of the insulation - Wiring broken inside of the insulation TROUBLESHOOTING WIRING PROBLEMS When troubleshooting wiring problems there are six steps which can aid in the procedure. The steps are listed and explained below. Always check for non-factory items added to the vehicle before doing any diagnosis. If the vehicle is equipped with these items, disconnect them to verify these add-on items are not the cause of the problem. 1. Verify the problem. 2. Verify any related symptoms. Do this by performing operational checks on components that are in the same circuit. Refer to the wiring diagrams. 3. Analyze the symptoms. Use the wiring diagrams to determine what the circuit is doing, where the problem most likely is occurring and where the diagnosis will continue. 4. Isolate the problem area. 5. Repair the problem area. 6. Verify the proper operation. For this step, check for proper operation of all items on the repaired circuit. Refer to the wiring diagrams. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Transmission Control System Relay, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9237 Transmission Control System Relay: Connector Views Component ID: 246 Component : RELAY-TRANSMISSION Connector: Name : RELAY-TRANSMISSION Color : # of pins : 4 Pin Circuit Description 1 A916 16RD FUSED B(+) 2 T16 16YL TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT 3 F916 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION RELAY OUTPUT 4 Z420 18BK GROUND Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Transmission Control System Relay, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Transmission Control System Relay: Description and Operation Description The Chrysler Corporation does not provide a description of the 545RFE Transmission control Relay for the 4.7/5.7L engine. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Transmission Control System Relay, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 9240 Transmission Control System Relay: Description and Operation Operation The Chrysler Corporation does not provide operation information for the 545RFE Transmission control Relay for the 4.7/5.7L engine platform. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - Transfer Case > Control Module, Transfer Case > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 197 Control Module: Locations Component ID 197 Component ID: 197 Component : MODULE-FINAL DRIVE CONTROL Connector: Name : MODULE-FINAL DRIVE CONTROL Color : # of pins : 50 Qualifier : (POWER WAGON) A-A1 A121 14RD/YL FUSED B(+) A2 T520 16YL/OR FRONT LOCKER SOURCE A3 T526 16YL/WT REAR LOCKER SOURCE A4 Z935 16BK GROUND A5 Z935 16BK GROUND A6 T524 16YL/LG FRONT LOCKER RETURN A7 T528 16YL/GY REAR LOCKER RETURN A8 T521 20YL/BK LOCKER SENSOR SUPPLY A9 T537 20YL/LG LOCKER SWITCH SUPPLY A10 T523 20YL/BK LOCKER SENSOR SUPPLY A11 - A12 - A13 D65 20WT/LG CAN C BUS (+) A14 D64 20WT/LB CAN C BUS (-) B T527 20YL/TN REAR LOCKER SENSOR SENSE B1 T522 20YL/LB FRONT LOCKER SENSOR SENSE B2 T535 20YL/BR LOCKER SWITCH SENSE B3 - B4 - B5 - B6 - B7 F960 20PK/LG FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) B8 T536 20YL/WT SWITCH SUPPLY B9 - B10 - B11 T531 20YL/TN STABILIZER BAR SWITCH SENSE B12 T532 20YL/GY LOCKER OPEN ILLUMINATION SENSE B13 T533 20YL/LB LOCKER REAR ILLUMINATION SENSE B14 T534 20YL LOCKER FR/RR ILLUMINATION SENSE C T530 20YL/DG STABILIZER BAR DISENGAGE ILLUMINATION SENSE C1 T529 20YL/LG STABILIZER BAR ENGAGE ILLUMINATION SENSE C2 - C3 - - Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - Transfer Case > Control Module, Transfer Case > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 197 > Page 9246 C4 - C5 - C6 - C7 - C8 - C9 - C10 - C11 - C12 - C13 - C14 - - D-E-F-G-H-Component Location - 29 Component Location - 28 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - Transfer Case > Control Module, Transfer Case > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 197 > Page 9247 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - Transfer Case > Control Module, Transfer Case > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 197 > Page 9248 Control Module: Locations Component ID 206 Component ID: 206 Component : MODULE-FINAL DRIVE CONTROL Connector: Name : MODULE-FINAL DRIVE CONTROL Color : # of pins : 50 Qualifier : (POWER WAGON) A-A1 A121 14RD/YL FUSED B(+) A2 T520 16YL/OR FRONT LOCKER SOURCE A3 T526 16YL/WT REAR LOCKER SOURCE A4 Z935 16BK GROUND A5 Z935 16BK GROUND A6 T524 16YL/LG FRONT LOCKER RETURN A7 T528 16YL/GY REAR LOCKER RETURN A8 T521 20YL/BK LOCKER SENSOR SUPPLY A9 T537 20YL/LG LOCKER SWITCH SUPPLY A10 T523 20YL/BK LOCKER SENSOR SUPPLY A11 - A12 - A13 D65 20WT/LG CAN C BUS (+) A14 D64 20WT/LB CAN C BUS (-) B T527 20YL/TN REAR LOCKER SENSOR SENSE B1 T522 20YL/LB FRONT LOCKER SENSOR SENSE B2 T535 20YL/BR LOCKER SWITCH SENSE B3 - B4 - B5 - B6 - B7 F960 20PK/LG FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) B8 T536 20YL/WT SWITCH SUPPLY B9 - B10 - B11 T531 20YL/TN STABILIZER BAR SWITCH SENSE B12 T532 20YL/GY LOCKER OPEN ILLUMINATION SENSE B13 T533 20YL/LB LOCKER REAR ILLUMINATION SENSE B14 T534 20YL LOCKER FR/RR ILLUMINATION SENSE C T530 20YL/DG STABILIZER BAR DISENGAGE ILLUMINATION SENSE C1 T529 20YL/LG STABILIZER BAR ENGAGE ILLUMINATION SENSE C2 - C3 - - Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - Transfer Case > Control Module, Transfer Case > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 197 > Page 9249 C4 - C5 - C6 - C7 - C8 - C9 - C10 - C11 - C12 - C13 - C14 - - D-E-F-G-H-Component Location - 29 Component Location - 28 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - Transfer Case > Control Module, Transfer Case > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 197 > Page 9250 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - Transfer Case > Control Module, Transfer Case > Component Information > Diagrams > Component ID 197 Control Module: Diagrams Component ID 197 Component ID: 197 Component : MODULE-FINAL DRIVE CONTROL Connector: Name : MODULE-FINAL DRIVE CONTROL Color : # of pins : 50 Qualifier : (POWER WAGON) A-A1 A121 14RD/YL FUSED B(+) A2 T520 16YL/OR FRONT LOCKER SOURCE A3 T526 16YL/WT REAR LOCKER SOURCE A4 Z935 16BK GROUND A5 Z935 16BK GROUND A6 T524 16YL/LG FRONT LOCKER RETURN A7 T528 16YL/GY REAR LOCKER RETURN A8 T521 20YL/BK LOCKER SENSOR SUPPLY A9 T537 20YL/LG LOCKER SWITCH SUPPLY A10 T523 20YL/BK LOCKER SENSOR SUPPLY A11 - A12 - A13 D65 20WT/LG CAN C BUS (+) A14 D64 20WT/LB CAN C BUS (-) B T527 20YL/TN REAR LOCKER SENSOR SENSE B1 T522 20YL/LB FRONT LOCKER SENSOR SENSE B2 T535 20YL/BR LOCKER SWITCH SENSE B3 - B4 - B5 - B6 - B7 F960 20PK/LG FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) B8 T536 20YL/WT SWITCH SUPPLY B9 - B10 - B11 T531 20YL/TN STABILIZER BAR SWITCH SENSE B12 T532 20YL/GY LOCKER OPEN ILLUMINATION SENSE B13 T533 20YL/LB LOCKER REAR ILLUMINATION SENSE B14 T534 20YL LOCKER FR/RR ILLUMINATION SENSE C T530 20YL/DG STABILIZER BAR DISENGAGE ILLUMINATION SENSE C1 T529 20YL/LG STABILIZER BAR ENGAGE ILLUMINATION SENSE C2 - C3 - - Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - Transfer Case > Control Module, Transfer Case > Component Information > Diagrams > Component ID 197 > Page 9253 C4 - C5 - C6 - C7 - C8 - C9 - C10 - C11 - C12 - C13 - C14 - - D-E-F-G-H-Component Location - 29 Component Location - 28 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - Transfer Case > Control Module, Transfer Case > Component Information > Diagrams > Component ID 197 > Page 9254 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - Transfer Case > Control Module, Transfer Case > Component Information > Diagrams > Component ID 197 > Page 9255 Control Module: Diagrams Component ID 206 Component ID: 206 Component : MODULE-FINAL DRIVE CONTROL Connector: Name : MODULE-FINAL DRIVE CONTROL Color : # of pins : 50 Qualifier : (POWER WAGON) A-A1 A121 14RD/YL FUSED B(+) A2 T520 16YL/OR FRONT LOCKER SOURCE A3 T526 16YL/WT REAR LOCKER SOURCE A4 Z935 16BK GROUND A5 Z935 16BK GROUND A6 T524 16YL/LG FRONT LOCKER RETURN A7 T528 16YL/GY REAR LOCKER RETURN A8 T521 20YL/BK LOCKER SENSOR SUPPLY A9 T537 20YL/LG LOCKER SWITCH SUPPLY A10 T523 20YL/BK LOCKER SENSOR SUPPLY A11 - A12 - A13 D65 20WT/LG CAN C BUS (+) A14 D64 20WT/LB CAN C BUS (-) B T527 20YL/TN REAR LOCKER SENSOR SENSE B1 T522 20YL/LB FRONT LOCKER SENSOR SENSE B2 T535 20YL/BR LOCKER SWITCH SENSE B3 - B4 - B5 - B6 - B7 F960 20PK/LG FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) B8 T536 20YL/WT SWITCH SUPPLY B9 - B10 - B11 T531 20YL/TN STABILIZER BAR SWITCH SENSE B12 T532 20YL/GY LOCKER OPEN ILLUMINATION SENSE B13 T533 20YL/LB LOCKER REAR ILLUMINATION SENSE B14 T534 20YL LOCKER FR/RR ILLUMINATION SENSE C T530 20YL/DG STABILIZER BAR DISENGAGE ILLUMINATION SENSE C1 T529 20YL/LG STABILIZER BAR ENGAGE ILLUMINATION SENSE C2 - C3 - - Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - Transfer Case > Control Module, Transfer Case > Component Information > Diagrams > Component ID 197 > Page 9256 C4 - C5 - C6 - C7 - C8 - C9 - C10 - C11 - C12 - C13 - C14 - - D-E-F-G-H-Component Location - 29 Component Location - 28 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - Transfer Case > Control Module, Transfer Case > Component Information > Diagrams > Component ID 197 > Page 9257 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - Transfer Case > Control Module, Transfer Case > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Control Module: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The Transfer Case Control Module (TCCM) functionality now resides in the Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM), refer to the TIPM information for location and additional information. The TIPM controls the 4X4 transfer case shift functions via the actuation of a shift motor and utilizing the feedback of a mode sensor assembly. Communication is via the CAN bus. Inputs include user selectable 4X4 modes that include 2WD, AWD, 4HI, 4LO, and Neutral (selections vary with the specific transfer case). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - Transfer Case > Control Module, Transfer Case > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 9260 Control Module: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The Transfer Case Control Module (TCCM) functionality in the Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) utilizes the input from the transfer case mounted mode sensor, the instrument panel mounted selector switch, and the following information from the vehicle's CAN bus to determine if a shift is allowed. - Engine RPM and Vehicle Speed - Diagnostic Requests - Manual Transmission and Brake Applied - PRNDL - Ignition Status - ABS Messages Once the TIP determines that a requested shift is allowed, it actuates the bi-directional shift motor as necessary to achieve the desired transfer case operating mode. The TIPM also monitors the mode sensor while controlling the shift motor to determine the status of the shift attempt. Several items can cause the requested shift not to be completed. If the TIPM has recognized a fault (DTC) of some variety, it will begin operation in one of four Functionality Levels. These levels are: - Level Zero - Normal Operation. - Level One - Only Mode Shifts Are Allowed. - Level Two - Only Mode Shifts and Shifts Into LOW Are Allowed (No Neutral Shifts Are Allowed). - Level Three - No Shifts Are Allowed The TIPM can also be operating in one of three possible power modes. These power modes are: - Full Power Mode is the normal operational mode of the module. This mode is achieved by normal CAN bus traffic being present and the ignition being in the RUN position. Reduced Power Mode will be entered when the ignition has been powered off. In this state, the module will shut down power supplied to external devices, and to electronic interface inputs and outputs. From this state the module can enter either Sleep Mode or Full Power Mode. To enter this mode, the module must receive an ignition message denoting that the ignition is off, or not receive any messages for 5 ±0.5 seconds. To exit this mode, the module must receive one ignition message that denotes that the ignition is in the RUN position. - Sleep Mode will be entered, from the Reduced Power Mode, when no CAN traffic has been sensed for 20 ±1 seconds. If during Sleep Mode the module detects CAN bus traffic, it will revert to the Reduced Power mode while monitoring for ignition messages. It will remain in this state as long as there is traffic other than run or start messages, and will return to Sleep mode if the bus goes without traffic for 20 ±1 seconds. SHIFT REQUIREMENTS If the TIPM is in full power mode and at functionality level zero, it uses the following criteria to determine if a shift is allowed. If any of the driver controllable conditions are not met once the shift request is recognized, the TIPM will solidly illuminate the source position's LED and flash the desired position's LED for all shifts except NEUTRAL. The NEUTRAL shift LED strategy will be discussed later. Mode shifts will be allowed regardless of transmission gear or vehicle speed, whenever the following conditions are met: - Front and rear wheel speed are within 21 km/h (13 mph). - A change in the Selector switch state indicates that a mode shift has been requested. - A valid mode sensor signal is being sensed by the TIPM. - Proper transmit/receive messages are occurring on the CAN bus. - Ignition key switch is in the RUN position. Range shifts will be allowed only if all of the following conditions are met: - Front and rear wheel speed are within 21 km/h (13 mph). - A change in the Selector Switch state indicating a range shift has been requested. - Transmission in NEUTRAL signal must be recognized for at least 1.5 seconds ±100 msec. (Automatic transmissions only) - Proper transmit/receive messages are occurring on the CAN bus. - Clutch signal is recognized for 500 msec ± 50 msec (Manual transmissions only). - Vehicle speed is less than or equal to 4.8 km/h (3 mph). - Ignition key switch is in the RUN position. - A valid mode sensor signal is being sensed by the TIPM. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - Transfer Case > Control Module, Transfer Case > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 9261 A shift into transfer case Neutral will be allowed only if all of the following conditions are met: - Front and rear wheel speed are within 21 km/h (13 mph). - The recessed Neutral Selection switch has been depressed continuously for 4.0 seconds ±100 msec while all shift conditions have been continuously met. - Transmission in NEUTRAL signal recognized from the bus. (Automatic transmissions only) - Clutch signal is recognized from the bus (Manual transmissions only). - Proper message transmissions/receptions are occurring on the CAN bus. - Vehicle speed is less than or equal to 4.8 km/h (3 mph). - Ignition key switch is in the RUN position, engine off. - Foot Brake is applied. - A valid mode sensor signal is being sensed by the TIPM. A shift out of transfer case Neutral will be allowed only if all of the following conditions are met: - Front and rear wheel speed are within 21 km/h (13 mph). - The recessed Neutral Selection switch has been depressed continuously for 1.0 seconds ±100 msec while all shift conditions have been continuously met. - Transmission in NEUTRAL signal recognized from the bus.(Automatic transmissions only) - Clutch signal is recognized from the bus (Manual transmissions only). - Proper message transmissions/receptions are occurring on the CAN bus. - Vehicle speed is less than or equal to 4.8 km/h (3 mph). - Ignition key switch is in the RUN position. - Foot Brake is applied. - A valid mode sensor signal is being sensed by the TIPM. SHIFT SEQUENCES Once all the driver controllable conditions for the requested shift have been met, the TIPM begins a shift timer with a maximum duration of 1 second per 'D' channel transition. If the shift timer expires before the TIPM recognizes to correct mode sensor code, the shift is considered to have been blocked. The blocked shift will increment the blocked shift counter by one. The TIPM strategy for handling blocked shifts will be described later. The process the TIPM performs for the various shifts will be described first. RANGE AND MODE SHIFTS The process for performing all the range and mode shifts are the same. The following steps describe the process. - Allow time for Selector Switch debounce; 250 msec ±50 msec. - Extinguish the source gear's LED while flashing desired transfer case position's LED. - Engage the shift motor for a maximum of 1 second ±100 msec per 'D' channel transition in the destination gear's direction while monitoring the mode sensor channel transitions. - Disengage the shift motor when the correct mode sensor code is recognized. - Solidly illuminate the selected gear's LED. - Transmit a bus message that the transfer case shift is complete. - If the desired mode sensor code is not received after the shift timer expires (ie. a blocked or other condition exists), stop driving the motor and wait for 200 msec ±50 msec. The shift motor is then reversed in the direction back toward the source gear for up to 1.0 seconds ±100 msec. per 'D' channel. The TIPM waits for 2.0 seconds ±50 msec. and repeats the attempt to shift to the desired position. The exception to the preceding sequence is when a shift from 4L to 2WD/AWD is requested. If 2WD/AWD is requested from the 4L position, the transfer case is first driven to the 4H position. If the 4H position is reached, the transfer case is then driven back to the 2WD/AWD position and the shift is considered complete. If the transfer case does not reach any the 4H position, but is in the 2WD/AWD 'D' channel, or the 2WD/AWD between gear position on the 4H side of 2WD/AWD, the shift is also considered complete. SHIFT OUT OF NEUTRAL The following steps describe the process for a shift out of NEUTRAL. - Extinguish the Neutral LED. - Engage the shift motor for a maximum of 1 second ±100 msec toward the transfer case 4H mode position while monitoring the mode sensor channel transitions. - Disengage the shift motor when the correct mode sensor code is recognized. - Extinguish the Neutral LED. - Transmit a bus message that the transfer case shift is complete. - If the desired mode sensor code is not received after the shift timer expires (ie. a blocked or other condition exists), stop driving the motor and wait for 200 msec ±50 msec. The shift motor is then reversed in the direction back toward the source gear for up to 1.0 seconds 100 msec. The Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - Transfer Case > Control Module, Transfer Case > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 9262 TIPM waits for 2.0 seconds ±50 msec. and repeats the attempt to shift to the desired position. - When the Neutral button is released, if the 4H position is the desired position, the shift is complete. Illuminate the 4H LED. - Otherwise when the Neutral button is released, if all of the shift requirements are being met then engage the shift motor towards the desired position for 1 second ±100 msec per 'D' channel. (if requirements for shifting are not met, illuminate the 4H LED and flash the destination LED as an indication to the driver that all of the driver controllable shift conditions are not being met). If this requires another range or mode shift, begin the range/mode shift process. - If the desired mode sensor code is not received after the shift timer expires (i.e. a blocked or other condition exists), refer to the Blocked Shift Strategy. BLOCKED SHIFT STRATEGY When a shift is commanded, the shift motor will be driven towards its destination position, except in the case of shifting out of Neutral if 4L was selected (the transfer case will shift to the 4H position first, before proceeding to 4L). If the shift is blocked on the way to the destination, the TIPM may attempt to drive the motor back to the original position. This process will be allowed to occur 5 times. If the transfer case has reached a non-NEUTRAL 'D' channel during the shift re-attempts, the LED for the achieved gear position is illuminated and the shift attempts are stopped. To re-attempt the desired shift, the selector switch will need to be rotated to the current position until the switch debounce timer expires then a shift will need to be requested again. At the end of the 5th blocked attempt, the shift motor is driven towards the last known 'D' channel position. If this motor drive allows the transfer case to reach the 2WD/AWD 'D' channel, or the 2WD/AWD between gear position on the 4H side of 2WD/AWD, the shift is considered complete and the shift attempts are ended. If the mode sensor is in the NEUTRAL region at the expiration of the shift timer, the TIPM will continue to make the shift attempts according to the blocked shift strategy independent of whether or not the driver controlled conditions are met. For shifts from NEUTRAL, if all 5 attempts fail to reach the desired position (which by default is 4H), the motor will be driven to stall in the direction of 4H or 4L, depending on the achieved position. If the transfer case has reached the 2WD/AWD or 4L between gear position nearest the NEUTRAL positions and the shift conditions are no longer being met, the transfer case will be driven toward the corresponding 'D' channel. Otherwise, the transfer case will be driven in the direction opposite the last attempt with the desired target being 4H or 4L. If the transfer case reaches the 2WD/AWD 'D' channel when being driven in the 4H direction, then one final 1.0 second drive toward 4H is attempted. If the transfer case then reaches any of the 4H positions, the shift is considered complete and the 4H LED is illuminated. If the transfer case is still the 2WD/AWD position, the shift is considered complete and the 2WD/AWD LED is illuminated. NOTE: If after the 5th blocked shift and reversal attempt, if the transfer case position is in the NEUTRAL region, shift attempts will continue until a non-NEUTRAL 'D' channel is reached. SHIFT REVERSAL TARGETS If the shift timer expires (1 second per 'D' channel) and the transfer case has not reached the desired position, all shifts will attempt to return to their original position with the exceptions of: - If the intended shift is going to the High rail from Low and can't make it, but it can make the 2WD/AWD position, the motor stops at that position. The TIPM will not attempt to cross back over NEUTRAL if it does not have to. This means that there was a block on the first attempt to go to 4H and the transfer case has made it through NEUTRAL to a known good position, then the motor will go back only to the 2WD/4WD position and execute the remainder of the attempts from there. - For shifts out of NEUTRAL, any time a shift is commanded out of NEUTRAL, the system needs to get out. The TIPM should never go to NEUTRAL unless the driver is commanding it and all required conditions are being met ENCODER DRIFT CORRECTION Whenever a shift is completed, the TIPM stores the position in memory as the transfer case's intended position. The TIPM continuously monitors the mode sensor and if the mode sensor drifts toward into a NEUTRAL region sensor position for 2.0 seconds, the TIPM will perform a motor drive to correct the drift. The transfer case will be driven toward the intended position for 1.0 seconds 100 msec. The TIPM will wait for 2.0 seconds ±50 msec. and repeat the attempt to shift to the desired position. This will continue until the intended position is reached. SHIFT MOTOR BRAKING Two modes of shift motor braking are employed to improve shift performance, static and dynamic. Static shift motor braking is utilized under the following conditions: - Whenever the transfer case is in the 2WD/AWD or 4L 'D' channel position. - Whenever an invalid mode sensor code is present. Static motor braking is achieved by applying +12V on both shift motor wires. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - Transfer Case > Control Module, Transfer Case > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 9263 NOTE: Static Shift Motor Braking is independent of ignition key position. SHIFT ATTEMPT LIMIT To protect the transfer case system, the TIPM will impose a limit on the number of shifts that can occur over a calibrated time period. The system will monitor the number of 'D' channel segment transitions that occur in any 30 second time period. If the number of segment transitions is 30 or greater, the system will go into a default mode. The default mode of operation for shifting is that the number of allowed 'D' channel transitions permitted to occur will be 3 over each 15 second ±100 msec calibrated window of time. After 5 minutes ±100 msec, the motor can be assumed to have cooled down and the system will revert to normal operation. The following rules also apply to the shift limit: - The attempt limit will not prevent shifts coming out of NEUTRAL, they will be allowed regardless of the counter/timer. - Any shift that is in progress when the counter reaches a maximum count in time will be allowed to complete before the default mode is entered. D-channel transitions during this period will not be counted towards the default mode limit. - A block, regardless of the direction, whether towards destination or back towards reversal target (shift timer expiring), will count as a value of 2 transitions towards the 30 segment transitions to go into default mode as defined above. Current attempt limit values are 30 transitions in 30 seconds and default mode values are 3 transitions every 15 seconds for 5 minutes. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Assembly-Line Pressure Sensor/Variable Force Solenoid Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch: Locations Assembly-Line Pressure Sensor/Variable Force Solenoid Component ID: 17 Component : ASSEMBLY-LINE PRESSURE SENSOR/VARIABLE FORCE SOLENOID Connector: Name : ASSEMBLY-LINE PRESSURE SENSOR/VARIABLE FORCE SOLENOID Color : BLACK # of pins : 6 Qualifier : (RLE) Pin Circuit Description 1-2 F856 20YL/PK 5 VOLT SUPPLY 3 T38 20YL/BR LINE PRESSURE SIGNAL 4 K900 20DB/DG SENSOR GROUND 5 T16 18YL/OR TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT 6 T118 20DG LP VFS CONTROL Component Location - 19 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Assembly-Line Pressure Sensor/Variable Force Solenoid > Page 9270 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Assembly-Line Pressure Sensor/Variable Force Solenoid > Page 9271 Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch: Locations Assembly-Transmission Solenoid/Pressure Switch Component ID: 20 Component : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID/PRESSURE SWITCH Connector: Name : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID/PRESSURE SWITCH Color : LT. BROWN # of pins : 10 Qualifier : (RLE) Pin Circuit Description 1 T60 20YL/GY OD CONTROL 2 T59 20YL/LB UD CONTROL 3 T16 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT 4 T19 18YL/DB 2-4 CONTROL 5 T47 18YL/DG 2-4 PRESSURE SIGNAL 6 T9 20DG/TN OD PRESSURE SIGNAL 7 T20 20DG/WT L/R CONTROL 8-9-10 T50 20YL/TN L/R PRESSURE SIGNAL Component Location - 19 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Assembly-Line Pressure Sensor/Variable Force Solenoid > Page 9272 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Assembly-Line Pressure Sensor/Variable Force Solenoid > Page 9273 Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch: Locations Sensor-Line Pressure Component ID: 425 Component : SENSOR-LINE PRESSURE Connector: Name : SENSOR-LINE PRESSURE Color : BLACK # of pins : 4 Qualifier : (RFE) Pin Circuit Description 1 T160 20DG/WT SENSOR GROUND Pin Circuit Description 1 K900 20DB/DG SENSOR GROUND 2 F856 20YL/PK 5 VOLT SUPPLY 3 T38 20YL/BR LINE PRESSURE SIGNAL 4-- Component Location - 23 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Assembly-Line Pressure Sensor/Variable Force Solenoid > Page 9274 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Assembly-Line Pressure Sensor/Variable Force Solenoid Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch: Diagrams Assembly-Line Pressure Sensor/Variable Force Solenoid Component ID: 17 Component : ASSEMBLY-LINE PRESSURE SENSOR/VARIABLE FORCE SOLENOID Connector: Name : ASSEMBLY-LINE PRESSURE SENSOR/VARIABLE FORCE SOLENOID Color : BLACK # of pins : 6 Qualifier : (RLE) Pin Circuit Description 1-2 F856 20YL/PK 5 VOLT SUPPLY 3 T38 20YL/BR LINE PRESSURE SIGNAL 4 K900 20DB/DG SENSOR GROUND 5 T16 18YL/OR TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT 6 T118 20DG LP VFS CONTROL Component Location - 19 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Assembly-Line Pressure Sensor/Variable Force Solenoid > Page 9277 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Assembly-Line Pressure Sensor/Variable Force Solenoid > Page 9278 Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch: Diagrams Assembly-Transmission Solenoid/Pressure Switch Component ID: 20 Component : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID/PRESSURE SWITCH Connector: Name : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID/PRESSURE SWITCH Color : LT. BROWN # of pins : 10 Qualifier : (RLE) Pin Circuit Description 1 T60 20YL/GY OD CONTROL 2 T59 20YL/LB UD CONTROL 3 T16 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT 4 T19 18YL/DB 2-4 CONTROL 5 T47 18YL/DG 2-4 PRESSURE SIGNAL 6 T9 20DG/TN OD PRESSURE SIGNAL 7 T20 20DG/WT L/R CONTROL 8-9-10 T50 20YL/TN L/R PRESSURE SIGNAL Component Location - 19 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Assembly-Line Pressure Sensor/Variable Force Solenoid > Page 9279 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Assembly-Line Pressure Sensor/Variable Force Solenoid > Page 9280 Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch: Diagrams Sensor-Line Pressure Component ID: 425 Component : SENSOR-LINE PRESSURE Connector: Name : SENSOR-LINE PRESSURE Color : BLACK # of pins : 4 Qualifier : (RFE) Pin Circuit Description 1 T160 20DG/WT SENSOR GROUND Pin Circuit Description 1 K900 20DB/DG SENSOR GROUND 2 F856 20YL/PK 5 VOLT SUPPLY 3 T38 20YL/BR LINE PRESSURE SIGNAL 4-- Component Location - 23 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Assembly-Line Pressure Sensor/Variable Force Solenoid > Page 9281 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > 42RLE Automatic Transmission Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch: Description and Operation 42RLE Automatic Transmission Description DESCRIPTION The line pressure sensor (2) is mounted on the top of the valve body, next to the pressure control solenoid (1). The TCM utilizes a closed-loop system to control transmission line pressure. The system contains a variable force style solenoid, the Pressure Control Solenoid. The solenoid is duty cycle controlled by the TCM to vent the unnecessary line pressure supplied by the oil pump back to the sump. The system also contains a variable pressure style sensor, the Line Pressure Sensor, which is a direct input to the TCM. The line pressure solenoid monitors the transmission line pressure and completes the feedback loop to the TCM. The TCM uses this information to adjust its control of the pressure control solenoid to achieve the desired line pressure. Operation OPERATION The TCM calculates the desired line pressure based upon inputs from the transmission and engine. The TCM calculates the torque input to the transmission and uses that information as the primary input to the calculation. The line pressure is set to a predetermined value during shifts and when the transmission is in the PARK and NEUTRAL positions. This is done to ensure consistent shift quality. During all other operation, the actual line pressure is compared to the desired line pressure and adjustments are made to the pressure control solenoid duty cycle. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 9284 Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch: Description and Operation 545RFE Automatic Transmission Description DESCRIPTION The TCM utilizes a closed-loop system to control transmission line pressure. The system contains a variable force style solenoid, the Pressure Control Solenoid, which is part of the pressure switch assembly. The solenoid is duty cycle controlled by the TCM to vent the unnecessary line pressure supplied by the oil pump back to the pump inlet. The system contains a Line Pressure Sensor, which is a direct input to the TCM. The line pressure sensor monitors the transmission line pressure and completes the feedback loop to the TCM. The TCM uses this information to adjust its control of the pressure control solenoid to achieve the desired line pressure. Operation OPERATION The TCM calculates the desired line pressure based upon inputs from the transmission and engine. The TCM calculates the torque input to the transmission and uses that information as the primary input to the calculation. The line pressure is set to a predetermined value during shifts, to ensure consistent shift quality. During all other operation, the desired line pressure value is adjusted based on torque level and other transmission requirements. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 9285 Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch: Description and Operation 68RFE Automatic Transmission Description DESCRIPTION The TCM utilizes a closed-loop system to control transmission line pressure. The system contains a variable force style solenoid, the Pressure Control Solenoid, which is part of the pressure switch assembly. The solenoid is duty cycle controlled by the TCM to vent the unnecessary line pressure supplied by the oil pump back to the pump inlet. The system contains a Line Pressure Sensor, which is a direct input to the TCM. The line pressure sensor monitors the transmission line pressure and completes the feedback loop to the TCM. The TCM uses this information to adjust its control of the pressure control solenoid to achieve the desired line pressure. Operation OPERATION The TCM calculates the desired line pressure based upon inputs from the transmission and engine. The TCM calculates the torque input to the transmission and uses that information as the primary input to the calculation. The line pressure is set to a predetermined value during shifts, to ensure consistent shift quality. During all other operation, the desired line pressure value is adjusted based on torque level and other transmission requirements. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 42RLE Automatic Transmission Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch: Service and Repair 42RLE Automatic Transmission Removal REMOVAL 1. Remove the valve body from the transmission. See: Automatic Transmission/Transaxle/Valve Body/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/42RLE Automatic Transmission/Removal 2. Remove the electrical connectors from the pressure control solenoid (1) and the line pressure sensor (2). 3. Remove the screws (6) holding the pressure control solenoid (1) and line pressure sensor (2) to the valve body. 4. Remove the pressure control solenoid and line pressure sensor from the valve body. Installation INSTALLATION 1. Install the pressure control solenoid (1) and line pressure sensor (2) into the valve body. 2. Install the screws (6) to hold the pressure control solenoid (1) and line pressure sensor (2) to the valve body. 3. Install the electrical connectors to the pressure control solenoid (1) and the line pressure sensor (2). 4. Install the valve body into the transmission. See: Automatic Transmission/Transaxle/Valve Body/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/42RLE Automatic Transmission/Installation Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 9288 Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch: Service and Repair 545RFE Automatic Transmission Removal REMOVAL 1. Raise vehicle. 2. Place a suitable fluid catch pan under the transmission. 3. Remove the wiring connector from the line pressure sensor (2). 4. Remove the bolt holding the line pressure sensor (2) to the transmission case. 5. Remove the line pressure sensor (2) from the transmission case. Installation INSTALLATION 1. Install the line pressure sensor (2) into the transmission case. 2. Install the bolt to hold the line pressure sensor (2) into the transmission case. Tighten the bolt to 12 Nm (105 in.lbs.). 3. Install the wiring connector onto the line pressure sensor (2). 4. Verify the transmission fluid level. Add fluid as necessary. 5. Lower vehicle. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 9289 Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch: Service and Repair 68RFE Automatic Transmission Removal REMOVAL 1. Raise vehicle. 2. Place a suitable fluid catch pan under the transmission. 3. Remove the wiring connector from the line pressure sensor (2). 4. Remove the bolt holding the line pressure sensor (2) to the transmission case. 5. Remove the line pressure sensor (2) from the transmission case. Installation INSTALLATION 1. Install the line pressure sensor (2) into the transmission case. 2. Install the bolt to hold the line pressure sensor (2) into the transmission case. Tighten the bolt to 12 Nm (105 in.lbs.). 3. Install the wiring connector onto the line pressure sensor (2). 4. Verify the transmission fluid level. Add fluid as necessary. 5. Lower vehicle. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Overdrive Switch, A/T > Component Information > Locations Overdrive Switch: Locations Component ID: 514 Component : SWITCH-TOW/HAUL OVERDRIVE OFF Connector: Name : SWITCH-TOW/HAUL OVERDRIVE OFF Color : NATURAL # of pins : 6 Pin Circuit Description 123 T6 20DG TOW/HAUL OVERDRIVE OFF SWITCH SIGNAL 4 Z71 20LB/BK GROUND 5 T5 20DG/YL AUTOSTICK (ERS)-TOW/HAUL SIGNAL 6 T160 20DG/WT SENSOR GROUND Component Location - 47 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Overdrive Switch, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 9293 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Overdrive Switch, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 9294 Overdrive Switch: Diagrams Component ID: 514 Component : SWITCH-TOW/HAUL OVERDRIVE OFF Connector: Name : SWITCH-TOW/HAUL OVERDRIVE OFF Color : NATURAL # of pins : 6 Pin Circuit Description 123 T6 20DG TOW/HAUL OVERDRIVE OFF SWITCH SIGNAL 4 Z71 20LB/BK GROUND 5 T5 20DG/YL AUTOSTICK (ERS)-TOW/HAUL SIGNAL 6 T160 20DG/WT SENSOR GROUND Component Location - 47 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Overdrive Switch, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 9295 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Overdrive Switch, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 9296 Overdrive Switch: Testing and Inspection DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING - OVERDRIVE ELECTRICAL CONTROLS The tow/haul overdrive off switch, valve body solenoid, case connectors and related wiring can all be tested with a 12 volt test lamp or a volt/ohmmeter. Check continuity of each component when diagnosis indicates this is necessary. Switch and solenoid continuity should be checked whenever the transmission fails to shift into fourth gear range. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Overdrive Switch, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 42RLE Automatic Transmission Overdrive Switch: Service and Repair 42RLE Automatic Transmission Removal REMOVAL 1. Using a plastic trim tool, remove the tow/haul overdrive off switch retainer (2) from the shift lever (1). 2. Pull the switch (2) outwards to release it from the connector in the lever (1). Installation INSTALLATION NOTE: There is enough slack in the wire to pull out the connector from the lever. 1. Pull the connector (2) out of the lever (1) just enough to grasp it. CAUTION: Be careful not to bend the pins on the tow/haul overdrive off switch. Use care when installing the switch, as it is not indexed, and can be accidentally installed incorrectly. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Overdrive Switch, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 9299 2. Install the tow/haul overdrive off switch (3) into the connector (2). 3. Push the tow/haul overdrive off switch (3) and wiring into the shift lever (1). 4. Install the tow/haul overdrive off switch retainer onto the shift lever. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Overdrive Switch, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 9300 Overdrive Switch: Service and Repair 545RFE Automatic Transmission Removal REMOVAL 1. Using a plastic trim tool, remove the tow/haul overdrive off switch retainer (2) from the shift lever (1). 2. Pull the switch (2) outwards to release it from the connector in the lever (1). Installation INSTALLATION NOTE: There is enough slack in the wire to pull out the connector from the lever. 1. Pull the connector (2) out of the lever (1) just enough to grasp it. CAUTION: Be careful not to bend the pins on the tow/haul overdrive off switch. Use care when installing the switch, as it is not indexed, and can be accidentally installed incorrectly. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Overdrive Switch, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 9301 2. Install the tow/haul overdrive off switch (3) into the connector (2). 3. Push the tow/haul overdrive off switch (3) and wiring into the shift lever (1). 4. Install the tow/haul overdrive off switch retainer onto the shift lever. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Overdrive Switch, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 9302 Overdrive Switch: Service and Repair 48RE Automatic Transmission Removal REMOVAL 1. Using a plastic trim tool, remove the tow/haul overdrive off switch retainer (2) from the shift lever (1). 2. Pull the switch (2) outwards to release it from the connector in the lever (1). Installation INSTALLATION NOTE: There is enough slack in the wire to pull out the connector from the lever. 1. Pull the connector (2) out of the lever (1) just enough to grasp it. CAUTION: Be careful not to bend the pins on the tow/haul overdrive off switch. Use care when installing the switch, as it is not indexed, and can be accidentally installed incorrectly. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Overdrive Switch, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 9303 2. Install the tow/haul overdrive off switch (3) into the connector (2). 3. Push the tow/haul overdrive off switch (3) and wiring into the shift lever (1). 4. Install the tow/haul overdrive off switch retainer onto the shift lever. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Overdrive Switch, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 9304 Overdrive Switch: Service and Repair AS68RC Automatic Transmission Removal REMOVAL 1. Using a plastic trim tool, remove the tow/haul overdrive off switch retainer (2) from the shift lever (1). 2. Pull the switch (2) outwards to release it from the connector in the lever (1). Installation INSTALLATION NOTE: There is enough slack in the wire to pull out the connector from the lever. 1. Pull the connector (2) out of the lever (1) just enough to grasp it. CAUTION: Be careful not to bend the pins on the tow/haul overdrive off switch. Use care when installing the switch, as it is not indexed, and can be accidentally installed incorrectly. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Overdrive Switch, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 9305 2. Install the tow/haul overdrive off switch (3) into the connector (2). 3. Push the tow/haul overdrive off switch (3) and wiring into the shift lever (1). 4. Install the tow/haul overdrive off switch retainer onto the shift lever. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Shift Solenoid Position Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Shift Solenoid Position Sensor/Switch: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The transmission solenoid/TRS assembly is internal to the transmission and mounted on the valve body assembly. The assembly consists of six solenoids that control hydraulic pressure to the six friction elements (transmission clutches), and the torque converter clutch. The pressure control solenoid is located on the side of the solenoid/TRS assembly. The solenoid/TRS assembly also contains the Transmission Range Sensor (TRS) and five pressure switches that feed information to the TCM. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Shift Solenoid Position Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 9310 Shift Solenoid Position Sensor/Switch: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION SOLENOIDS Solenoids are used to control the L/R, 2C, 4C, OD, and UD friction elements. The reverse clutch is controlled by line pressure and the position of the manual valve in the valve body. All the solenoids are contained within the Solenoid and Pressure Switch Assembly. The solenoid and pressure switch assembly contains one additional solenoid, Multi-Select (MS), which serves primarily to provide 2nd and 3rd gear limp-in operation. The solenoids receive electrical power from the Transmission Control Relay through a single wire. The TCM energizes or operates the solenoids individually by grounding the return wire of the solenoid as necessary. When a solenoid is energized, the solenoid valve shifts, and a fluid passage is opened or closed (vented or applied), depending on its default operating state. The result is an apply or release of a frictional element. The MS and UD solenoids are normally applied to allow transmission limp-in in the event of an electrical failure. The continuity of the solenoids and circuits are periodically tested. Each solenoid is turned on or off depending on its current state. An inductive spike should be detected by the TCM during this test. If no spike is detected, the circuit is tested again to verify the failure. In addition to the periodic testing, the solenoid circuits are tested if a speed ratio or pressure switch error occurs. PRESSURE SWITCHES The TCM relies on five pressure switches to monitor fluid pressure in the L/R, 2C, 4C, UD, and OD hydraulic circuits. The primary purpose of these switches is to help the TCM detect when clutch circuit hydraulic failures occur. The switches close at 23 psi and open at 11 psi, and simply indicate whether or not pressure exists. The switches are continuously monitored by the TCM for the correct states (open or closed) in each gear as shown in the following charts and 545RFE PRESSURE SWITCH STATES: A Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) will set if the TCM senses any switch open or closed at the wrong time in a given gear. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Shift Solenoid Position Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Shift Solenoid Position Sensor/Switch: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL NOTE: If the Transmission Solenoid/TRS Assembly is being replaced, the Quick Learn Procedure must be performed. See: Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Transmission Control Module/TCM Quick Learn 1. Remove the valve body from the transmission. See: Automatic Transmission/Transaxle/Valve Body/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/545RFE Automatic Transmission/Removal 2. Remove the bolts (1) holding the transmission solenoid/TRS assembly onto the valve body. 3. Separate the transmission solenoid/TRS assembly from the valve body. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Shift Solenoid Position Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 9313 Shift Solenoid Position Sensor/Switch: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION 1. Place TRS selector plate in the PARK position. 2. Position the transmission solenoid/TRS assembly onto the valve body. Be sure that both alignment dowels are fully seated in the valve body and that the TRS switch contacts are properly positioned in the selector plate 3. Install the bolts (1) to hold the transmission solenoid/TRS assembly onto the valve body. 4. Tighten the solenoid assembly screws adjacent to the arrows cast into the bottom of the valve body first. Tighten the screws to 6 Nm (50 in.lbs.). 5. Tighten the remainder of the solenoid assembly screws to 6 Nm (50 in.lbs.). 6. Install the valve body into the transmission. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Transmission Range Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Locations Sensor-Transmission Range Component ID: 444 Component : SENSOR-TRANSMISSION RANGE Connector: Name : SENSOR-TRANSMISSION RANGE Color : # of pins : 10 Qualifier : (RC) Pin Circuit Description 1 T825 20DG/YL TRS NEUTRAL SIGNAL 2 T3 20DG/DB TRS T3 SIGNAL 3 T828 20DG/DB TRS 1 SIGNAL 4 F1 20PK/WT FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (OFF-RUN-START) 5 T824 20YL/DB TRS PARK SIGNAL 6 Z157 16BK/LG GROUND 7 T42 20DG/YL TRS T42 SIGNAL 8 T827 20DG/LB TRS DRIVE SIGNAL 9 T826 20DG/DB TRS REVERSE SIGNAL 10 T41 20YL/DB TRS T41 SIGNAL (P/N) Component Location - 20 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Transmission Range > Page 9318 Component Location - 19 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Transmission Range > Page 9319 Component Location - 26 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Transmission Range > Page 9320 Connector: Name : SENSOR-TRANSMISSION RANGE Color : # of pins : 6 Qualifier : (RE) Pin Circuit Description 1-2 T117 20DG/YL TRS SIGNAL 3-4-- Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Transmission Range > Page 9321 5 T917 20YL/TN TRS RETURN 6 T41 20YL/DB TRS T41 SIGNAL (P/N) Component Location - 20 Component Location - 19 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Transmission Range > Page 9322 Component Location - 26 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Transmission Range > Page 9323 Connector: Name : SENSOR-TRANSMISSION RANGE Color : LT. GREEN # of pins : 10 Qualifier : (RLE) Pin Circuit Description 1 T16 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT 2-3 K900 20DB/DG SENSOR GROUND 4 T54 20DG/OR TRANSMISSION TEMPERATURE SIGNAL Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Transmission Range > Page 9324 5-6-7 T1 20DG/LB TRS T1 SIGNAL 8 T3 20DG/DB TRS T3 SIGNAL 9 T42 20DG/YL TRS T42 SIGNAL 10 T41 20YL/DB TRS T41 SIGNAL (P/N) Component Location - 20 Component Location - 19 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Transmission Range > Page 9325 Component Location - 26 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Transmission Range > Page 9326 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Transmission Range > Page 9327 Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Locations Assembly-Transmission Solenoid/TRS Component ID: 21 Component : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID/TRS Connector: Name : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID/TRS Color : BLACK # of pins : 23 Qualifier : (RFE) Pin Circuit Description 1-2 T20 20DG/WT L/R CONTROL 3-4 T41 20YL/DB TRS T41 SIGNAL (P/N) 5 T42 20DG/YL TRS T42 SIGNAL 6-- 7 T60 20YL/GY OD SOLENOID CONTROL 8 T3 20DG/DB TRS T3 SIGNAL 9 T1 20DG/LB TRS T1 SIGNAL 10 T16 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT 11 T48 20BR/YL 4C PRESSURE SIGNAL 12 T118 20DG LINE PRESSURE CONTROL 13 T4 20DG/RD TRS T2 SIGNAL 13 T4 20DG/LB TRS T2 SIGNAL 14 T50 20DG/PK L/R PRESSURE SIGNAL 14 T50 20YL/TN L/R PRESSURE SIGNAL 15 T147 20DG/YL 2C PRESSURE SIGNAL 16 T9 20DG/TN OD PRESSURE SIGNAL 17 T59 20YL/LB UD CONTROL 18 T29 20YL/WT UD PRESSURE SIGNAL 19 T259 20YL/DG 4C CONTROL 20 T219 20YL/LG 2C CONTROL 21 T140 20YL/GY MS CONTROL 22 T160 20DG/WT SENSOR GROUND 22 K900 20DB/DG SENSOR GROUND 23 T54 20DG/OR TRANSMISSION TEMPERATURE SIGNAL Component Location - 21 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Transmission Range > Page 9328 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Transmission Range Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Diagrams Sensor-Transmission Range Component ID: 444 Component : SENSOR-TRANSMISSION RANGE Connector: Name : SENSOR-TRANSMISSION RANGE Color : # of pins : 10 Qualifier : (RC) Pin Circuit Description 1 T825 20DG/YL TRS NEUTRAL SIGNAL 2 T3 20DG/DB TRS T3 SIGNAL 3 T828 20DG/DB TRS 1 SIGNAL 4 F1 20PK/WT FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (OFF-RUN-START) 5 T824 20YL/DB TRS PARK SIGNAL 6 Z157 16BK/LG GROUND 7 T42 20DG/YL TRS T42 SIGNAL 8 T827 20DG/LB TRS DRIVE SIGNAL 9 T826 20DG/DB TRS REVERSE SIGNAL 10 T41 20YL/DB TRS T41 SIGNAL (P/N) Component Location - 20 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Transmission Range > Page 9331 Component Location - 19 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Transmission Range > Page 9332 Component Location - 26 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Transmission Range > Page 9333 Connector: Name : SENSOR-TRANSMISSION RANGE Color : # of pins : 6 Qualifier : (RE) Pin Circuit Description 1-2 T117 20DG/YL TRS SIGNAL 3-4-- Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Transmission Range > Page 9334 5 T917 20YL/TN TRS RETURN 6 T41 20YL/DB TRS T41 SIGNAL (P/N) Component Location - 20 Component Location - 19 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Transmission Range > Page 9335 Component Location - 26 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Transmission Range > Page 9336 Connector: Name : SENSOR-TRANSMISSION RANGE Color : LT. GREEN # of pins : 10 Qualifier : (RLE) Pin Circuit Description 1 T16 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT 2-3 K900 20DB/DG SENSOR GROUND 4 T54 20DG/OR TRANSMISSION TEMPERATURE SIGNAL Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Transmission Range > Page 9337 5-6-7 T1 20DG/LB TRS T1 SIGNAL 8 T3 20DG/DB TRS T3 SIGNAL 9 T42 20DG/YL TRS T42 SIGNAL 10 T41 20YL/DB TRS T41 SIGNAL (P/N) Component Location - 20 Component Location - 19 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Transmission Range > Page 9338 Component Location - 26 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Transmission Range > Page 9339 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Transmission Range > Page 9340 Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Diagrams Assembly-Transmission Solenoid/TRS Component ID: 21 Component : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID/TRS Connector: Name : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID/TRS Color : BLACK # of pins : 23 Qualifier : (RFE) Pin Circuit Description 1-2 T20 20DG/WT L/R CONTROL 3-4 T41 20YL/DB TRS T41 SIGNAL (P/N) 5 T42 20DG/YL TRS T42 SIGNAL 6-- 7 T60 20YL/GY OD SOLENOID CONTROL 8 T3 20DG/DB TRS T3 SIGNAL 9 T1 20DG/LB TRS T1 SIGNAL 10 T16 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT 11 T48 20BR/YL 4C PRESSURE SIGNAL 12 T118 20DG LINE PRESSURE CONTROL 13 T4 20DG/RD TRS T2 SIGNAL 13 T4 20DG/LB TRS T2 SIGNAL 14 T50 20DG/PK L/R PRESSURE SIGNAL 14 T50 20YL/TN L/R PRESSURE SIGNAL 15 T147 20DG/YL 2C PRESSURE SIGNAL 16 T9 20DG/TN OD PRESSURE SIGNAL 17 T59 20YL/LB UD CONTROL 18 T29 20YL/WT UD PRESSURE SIGNAL 19 T259 20YL/DG 4C CONTROL 20 T219 20YL/LG 2C CONTROL 21 T140 20YL/GY MS CONTROL 22 T160 20DG/WT SENSOR GROUND 22 K900 20DB/DG SENSOR GROUND 23 T54 20DG/OR TRANSMISSION TEMPERATURE SIGNAL Component Location - 21 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Transmission Range > Page 9341 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > 42RLE Automatic Transmission Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Description and Operation 42RLE Automatic Transmission Description DESCRIPTION The Transmission Range Sensor (TRS) (2) is mounted to the top of the valve body inside the transmission and can only be serviced by removing the valve body assembly. The electrical connector extends through the transmission case. The Transmission Range Sensor (TRS) has four switch contacts that monitor shift lever position and send the information to the PCM. Operation OPERATION The Transmission Range Sensor (TRS) communicates shift lever position (SLP) to the TCM as a combination of open and closed switches. Each shift lever position has an assigned combination of switch states (open/closed) that the TCM receives from four sense circuits. The TCM interprets this information and determines the appropriate transmission gear position and shift schedule. Since there are four switches, there are 16 possible combinations of open and closed switches (codes). Seven of these codes are related to gear position and three are recognized as "between gear" codes. This results in six codes which should never occur. These are called "invalid" codes. An invalid code will result in a DTC, and the TCM will then determine the shift lever position based on pressure switch data. This allows reasonably normal transmission operation with a TRS failure. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 9344 Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Description and Operation 545RFE Automatic Transmission Description DESCRIPTION The Transmission Range Sensor (TRS) is part of the solenoid module, which is mounted to the top of the valve body inside the transmission. The Transmission Range Sensor (TRS) has five switch contact pins that: - Determine shift lever position - Supply ground to the Starter Relay in Park and Neutral only. - Supply +12 V to the backup lamps in Reverse only. The TRS also has an integrated temperature sensor (thermistor) that communicates transmission temperature to the TCM and PCM. Operation OPERATION The Transmission Range Sensor (TRS) communicates shift lever position to the TCM as a combination of open and closed switches. Each shift lever position has an assigned combination of switch states (open/closed) that the TCM receives from four sense circuits. The TCM interprets this information and determines the appropriate transmission gear position and shift schedule. There are many possible combinations of open and closed switches (codes). Seven of these possible codes are related to gear position and five are recognized as "between gear" codes. This results in many codes which should never occur. These are called "invalid" codes. An invalid code will result in a DTC, and the TCM will then determine the shift lever position based on pressure switch data. This allows reasonably normal transmission operation with a TRS failure. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 9345 Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Description and Operation 68RFE Automatic Transmission Description DESCRIPTION The Transmission Range Sensor (TRS) is part of the solenoid module, which is mounted to the top of the valve body inside the transmission. The Transmission Range Sensor (TRS) has five switch contact pins that: - Determine shift lever position - Supply ground to the Starter Relay in Park and Neutral only. The TRS also has an integrated temperature sensor (thermistor) that communicates transmission temperature to the TCM and PCM. Operation OPERATION The Transmission Range Sensor (TRS) communicates shift lever position to the TCM as a combination of open and closed switches. Each shift lever position has an assigned combination of switch states (open/closed) that the TCM receives from four sense circuits. The TCM interprets this information and determines the appropriate transmission gear position and shift schedule. There are many possible combinations of open and closed switches (codes). Five of these possible codes correspond to valid gear position, there are two codes for the neutral position and three are recognized as "between gear" codes. This results in many codes which should never occur. These are called "invalid" codes. An invalid code will result in a DTC, and the TCM will then determine the shift lever position based on pressure switch data. This allows reasonably normal transmission operation with a TRS failure. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 9346 Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Description and Operation 48RE Automatic Transmission Description DESCRIPTION The Transmission Range Sensor (TRS) has 3 primary functions: - Provide a PARK/NEUTRAL start signal to the engine controller and the starter relay. - Turn the Back-up lamps on when the transmission is in REVERSE and the engine (ignition) is on. - Provide a transmission range signal to the instrument cluster. The sensor is mounted in the transmission housing near the valve body, just above the pan rail. It's in the same position as the Park/Neutral switch on other transmissions. The TRS contacts a cammed surface on the manual valve lever. The cammed surface translates the rotational motion of the manual lever into the linear motion of the sensor. The cammed surface on the manual lever is comprised of two parts controlling the TRS signal: The insulator portion contacts the switch poppet when the manual lever is not in PARK or NEUTRAL. The manual lever itself contacts the poppet when the lever is in PARK or NEUTRAL; providing a ground for the signal from the starter relay and the appropriate engine controller. Operation OPERATION Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 9347 As the switch moves through its linear motion contacts slide across a circuit board which changes the resistance between the range sensing pins of the switch. A power supply on the instrument cluster provides a regulated voltage signal to the switch. The return signal is decoded by the cluster, which then controls the PRNDL display to correspond with the correct transmission range. A bus message of transmission range is also sent by the cluster. In REVERSE range a second contact set closes the circuit providing power to the reverse lamps. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 9348 Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Description and Operation AS68RC Automatic Transmission Description DESCRIPTION TRANSMISSION RANGE SENSOR The transmission range sensor (1) is mounted externally on the left side of the transmission case. Operation OPERATION The transmission range sensor prohibits the vehicle from starting in any gear other than park and neutral. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 9349 Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Testing and Inspection DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING - TRANSMISSION RANGE SENSOR (TRS) NOTE: For all circuit identification in the following steps, Refer to the appropriate Wiring Information. 1. Raise vehicle on suitable hoist. 2. Disconnect the vehicle's shift cable from the manual lever. 3. With the manual lever in the PARK position (the PARK position is with the manual lever moved to the full rearward position), measure the resistance between the Park/Neutral Position Sense pin of the TRS and the transmission case. The resistance should be less than 5 ohms. 4. With the manual lever in the NEUTRAL position (the NEUTRAL position is with the manual lever moved two detents forward of the full rearward position), measure the resistance between the Park/Neutral Position Sense pin of the TRS and the transmission case. The resistance should be less than 5 ohms. 5. If the resistance is greater than 5 ohms in either of the previous steps, check for a dirty contact between the tip of the TRS rod and the valve body manual lever. If the contact is OK, replace the TRS. 6. With the manual lever in the REVERSE position (the REVERSE position is with the manual lever moved one detent forward of the full rearward position), measure the resistance between the Fused Ignition Switch Output and the Back-up Lamp feed pins of the TRS. The resistance should be less than 5 ohms. If the resistance is greater than 5 ohms, replace the TRS. 7. With the manual lever in the PARK position (the PARK position is with the manual lever moved to the full rearward position), measure the resistance between the Transmission Range Sensor MUX and the Transmission Range Sensor 5V Supply pins of the TRS. The resistance should be 522.2 ohms. If the resistance is not correct, replace the TRS. 8. With the manual lever in the REVERSE position (the REVERSE position is with the manual lever moved one detent forward of the full rearward position), measure the resistance between the Transmission Range Sensor MUX and the Transmission Range Sensor 5V Supply pins of the TRS. The resistance should be 206.2 ohms. If the resistance is not correct, replace the TRS. 9. With the manual lever in the NEUTRAL position (the NEUTRAL position is with the manual lever moved two detents forward of the full rearward position), measure the resistance between the Transmission Range Sensor MUX and the Transmission Range Sensor 5V Supply pins of the TRS. The resistance should be 108.6 ohms. If the resistance is not correct, replace the TRS. 10. With the manual lever in the DRIVE position (the DRIVE position is with the manual lever moved three detents forward of the full rearward position), measure the resistance between the Transmission Range Sensor MUX and the Transmission Range Sensor 5V Supply pins of the TRS. The resistance should be 59.9 ohms. If the resistance is not correct, replace the TRS. 11. With the manual lever in the SECOND position (the SECOND position is with the manual lever moved one detent rearward of the full forward position), measure the resistance between the Transmission Range Sensor MUX and the Back-up Lamp feed pins of the TRS. The resistance should be 31.9 ohms. If the resistance is not correct, replace the TRS. 12. With the manual lever in the LOW position (the LOW position is with the manual lever moved to the full forward position), measure the resistance between the Transmission Range Sensor MUX and the Back-up Lamp feed pins of the TRS. The resistance should be 13.7 ohms. If the resistance is not correct, replace the TRS. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 42RLE Automatic Transmission Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Service and Repair 42RLE Automatic Transmission Removal REMOVAL 1. Remove valve body assembly from vehicle. See: Automatic Transmission/Transaxle/Valve Body/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/42RLE Automatic Transmission/Removal 2. Remove the manual shaft seal (1). 3. Remove manual shaft/TRS retaining screw (1). 4. Slide TRS off of manual valve shaft. Installation INSTALLATION Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 9352 1. Install the TRS (2) to the manual shaft. Make sure TRS locating pin rests in manual valve bore slot. 2. Install the TRS/manual shaft retaining screw (1) and torque to 5 Nm (45 in. lbs.) torque. 3. Install the manual shaft seal (1). 4. Install valve body to the transmission. See: Automatic Transmission/Transaxle/Valve Body/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/42RLE Automatic Transmission/Installation Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 9353 Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Service and Repair 48RE Automatic Transmission Removal REMOVAL 1. Raise vehicle and position drain pan under the transmission range sensor (TRS). 2. Move the transmission manual lever to the manual LOW position. The manual LOW position is with the manual lever in the forward-most detent. 3. Disengage the wiring connector from the TRS. 4. Remove the two screws holding the TRS to the TRS mounting bracket. 5. Remove the TRS (3) from the TRS mounting bracket by pulling it straight out of the bracket. 6. If necessary, loosen the TRS mounting bracket (2) in the transmission case using Adapter 8581 (3). 7. If necessary, remove the TRS mounting bracket (2) from the transmission case. Installation INSTALLATION Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 9354 1. Move the transmission manual shaft lever to the manual LOW position. 2. If necessary, install the TRS mounting bracket (2) into the transmission case. Using Adapter 8581 (3), tighten the mounting bracket to 34 Nm (300 in.lbs.). 3. Install the TRS (3) into the mounting bracket (2) with the wiring connector facing the front of the transmission. 4. Install the two screws to hold the TRS to the mounting bracket. Tighten the screws to 5 Nm (45 in.lbs.). 5. Verify proper sensor operation (1-4). 6. Move the transmission manual shaft lever to the PARK position. 7. Connect TRS wiring connector to the TRS and lower vehicle. 8. Refill the transmission fluid to the correct level. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 9355 Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Service and Repair AS68RC Automatic Transmission Removal REMOVAL NOTE: Be certain the transmission is in the park lock position. TRANSMISSION RANGE SENSOR 1. Remove the shift cable from the manual shift lever (2). 2. Disconnect the wire harness from the transmission range sensor. 3. Remove the two nuts (3) from the control shaft. TRS REMOVAL/INSTALLATION Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 9356 4. Pry open the tabs on the stake washer (5), remove the nut (3) and the stake washer (5). 5. Remove the bolts (2). 6. Remove the transmission range sensor (1) from the transmission control shaft (4). Installation INSTALLATION 1. Install the transmission range sensor (3) onto the control shaft (5). 2. Install the stake washer and the nut (4) and hand tighten. 3. With the transmission in neutral install the alignment tool 9983 (6) onto the control shaft (5) and into the alignment hole (1). 4. Install the bolts (2). 5. After aligning the transmission range sensor, tighten the bolts (2) 12.5 Nm (9 ft.lbs.) 6. Remove the alignment tool 9983 (6) 7. Tighten the control shaft nut to 7 Nm (62 in.lbs.) 8. Bend the tabs on the stake washer and nut (4) in at least two places to lock in position. TRANSMISSION RANGE SENSOR Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 9357 9. Install the manual shift lever (2) onto the control shaft. 10. Install the inner nut (3) onto the control shaft. Tighten the inner nut to 12.5 Nm (9 ft.lbs). 11. Install the outer nut (3) onto the control shaft. While holding the inner nut, tighten the outer not to 12.5 Nm (9 ft.lbs) Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Input Speed Transmission Speed Sensor: Locations Sensor-Input Speed Component ID 399 Component ID: 399 Component : SENSOR-INPUT SPEED Connector: Name : SENSOR-INPUT SPEED Color : # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (RC) Pin Circuit Description 1 T52 20DG/OR INPUT SPEED SIGNAL 2 T72 20YL/DB 8 VOLT SUPPLY Component Location - 21 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 9362 Component Location - 19 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 9363 Component Location - 26 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 9364 Connector: Name : SENSOR-INPUT SPEED Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (RFE/RLE) Pin Circuit Description 1 T52 20DG/OR INPUT SPEED SIGNAL 2 T13 20DG/VT SPEED SENSOR GROUND Component Location - 21 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 9365 Component Location - 19 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 9366 Component Location - 26 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 9367 Component ID 420 Component ID: 420 Component : SENSOR-INPUT SPEED Connector: Name : SENSOR-INPUT SPEED Color : # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (RC) Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 9368 Pin Circuit Description 1 T52 20DG/OR INPUT SPEED SIGNAL 2 T72 20YL/DB 8 VOLT SUPPLY Component Location - 21 Component Location - 19 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 9369 Component Location - 26 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 9370 Connector: Name : SENSOR-INPUT SPEED Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (RFE/RLE) Pin Circuit Description 1 T52 20DG/OR INPUT SPEED SIGNAL 2 T13 20DG/VT SPEED SENSOR GROUND Component Location - 21 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 9371 Component Location - 19 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 9372 Component Location - 26 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 9373 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 9374 Transmission Speed Sensor: Locations Sensor-Output Speed Component ID 400 Component ID: 400 Component : SENSOR-OUTPUT SPEED Connector: Name : SENSOR-OUTPUT SPEED Color : # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (RC) Pin Circuit Description 1 T14 20DG/BR OUTPUT SPEED SIGNAL 2 T72 20YL/DB 8 VOLT SUPPLY Component Location - 20 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 9375 Component Location - 21 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 9376 Component Location - 19 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 9377 Component Location - 26 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 9378 Connector: Name : SENSOR-OUTPUT SPEED Color : # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (RE) Pin Circuit Description 1 T14 18DG/BR OUTPUT SPEED SIGNAL 2 T13 18DG/VT SPEED SENSOR GROUND Component Location - 20 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 9379 Component Location - 21 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 9380 Component Location - 19 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 9381 Component Location - 26 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 9382 Connector: Name : SENSOR-OUTPUT SPEED Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (RFE/RLE) Pin Circuit Description 1 T14 20DG/BR OUTPUT SPEED SIGNAL Pin Circuit Description 1 T13 20DG/VT SPEED SENSOR GROUND Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 9383 2 T13 20DG/VT SPEED SENSOR GROUND 2 T14 20DG/BR OUTPUT SPEED SIGNAL Component Location - 20 Component Location - 21 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 9384 Component Location - 19 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 9385 Component Location - 26 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 9386 Component ID 430 Component ID: 430 Component : SENSOR-OUTPUT SPEED Connector: Name : SENSOR-OUTPUT SPEED Color : # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (RC) Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 9387 Pin Circuit Description 1 T14 20DG/BR OUTPUT SPEED SIGNAL 2 T72 20YL/DB 8 VOLT SUPPLY Component Location - 20 Component Location - 21 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 9388 Component Location - 19 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 9389 Component Location - 26 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 9390 Connector: Name : SENSOR-OUTPUT SPEED Color : # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (RE) Pin Circuit Description 1 T14 18DG/BR OUTPUT SPEED SIGNAL 2 T13 18DG/VT SPEED SENSOR GROUND Component Location - 20 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 9391 Component Location - 21 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 9392 Component Location - 19 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 9393 Component Location - 26 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 9394 Connector: Name : SENSOR-OUTPUT SPEED Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (RFE/RLE) Pin Circuit Description 1 T14 20DG/BR OUTPUT SPEED SIGNAL Pin Circuit Description 1 T13 20DG/VT SPEED SENSOR GROUND Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 9395 2 T13 20DG/VT SPEED SENSOR GROUND 2 T14 20DG/BR OUTPUT SPEED SIGNAL Component Location - 20 Component Location - 21 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 9396 Component Location - 19 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 9397 Component Location - 26 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 9398 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Input Speed Transmission Speed Sensor: Diagrams Sensor-Input Speed Component ID 399 Component ID: 399 Component : SENSOR-INPUT SPEED Connector: Name : SENSOR-INPUT SPEED Color : # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (RC) Pin Circuit Description 1 T52 20DG/OR INPUT SPEED SIGNAL 2 T72 20YL/DB 8 VOLT SUPPLY Component Location - 21 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 9401 Component Location - 19 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 9402 Component Location - 26 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 9403 Connector: Name : SENSOR-INPUT SPEED Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (RFE/RLE) Pin Circuit Description 1 T52 20DG/OR INPUT SPEED SIGNAL 2 T13 20DG/VT SPEED SENSOR GROUND Component Location - 21 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 9404 Component Location - 19 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 9405 Component Location - 26 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 9406 Component ID 420 Component ID: 420 Component : SENSOR-INPUT SPEED Connector: Name : SENSOR-INPUT SPEED Color : # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (RC) Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 9407 Pin Circuit Description 1 T52 20DG/OR INPUT SPEED SIGNAL 2 T72 20YL/DB 8 VOLT SUPPLY Component Location - 21 Component Location - 19 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 9408 Component Location - 26 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 9409 Connector: Name : SENSOR-INPUT SPEED Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (RFE/RLE) Pin Circuit Description 1 T52 20DG/OR INPUT SPEED SIGNAL 2 T13 20DG/VT SPEED SENSOR GROUND Component Location - 21 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 9410 Component Location - 19 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 9411 Component Location - 26 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 9412 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 9413 Transmission Speed Sensor: Diagrams Sensor-Output Speed Component ID 400 Component ID: 400 Component : SENSOR-OUTPUT SPEED Connector: Name : SENSOR-OUTPUT SPEED Color : # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (RC) Pin Circuit Description 1 T14 20DG/BR OUTPUT SPEED SIGNAL 2 T72 20YL/DB 8 VOLT SUPPLY Component Location - 20 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 9414 Component Location - 21 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 9415 Component Location - 19 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 9416 Component Location - 26 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 9417 Connector: Name : SENSOR-OUTPUT SPEED Color : # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (RE) Pin Circuit Description 1 T14 18DG/BR OUTPUT SPEED SIGNAL 2 T13 18DG/VT SPEED SENSOR GROUND Component Location - 20 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 9418 Component Location - 21 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 9419 Component Location - 19 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 9420 Component Location - 26 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 9421 Connector: Name : SENSOR-OUTPUT SPEED Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (RFE/RLE) Pin Circuit Description 1 T14 20DG/BR OUTPUT SPEED SIGNAL Pin Circuit Description 1 T13 20DG/VT SPEED SENSOR GROUND Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 9422 2 T13 20DG/VT SPEED SENSOR GROUND 2 T14 20DG/BR OUTPUT SPEED SIGNAL Component Location - 20 Component Location - 21 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 9423 Component Location - 19 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 9424 Component Location - 26 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 9425 Component ID 430 Component ID: 430 Component : SENSOR-OUTPUT SPEED Connector: Name : SENSOR-OUTPUT SPEED Color : # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (RC) Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 9426 Pin Circuit Description 1 T14 20DG/BR OUTPUT SPEED SIGNAL 2 T72 20YL/DB 8 VOLT SUPPLY Component Location - 20 Component Location - 21 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 9427 Component Location - 19 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 9428 Component Location - 26 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 9429 Connector: Name : SENSOR-OUTPUT SPEED Color : # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (RE) Pin Circuit Description 1 T14 18DG/BR OUTPUT SPEED SIGNAL 2 T13 18DG/VT SPEED SENSOR GROUND Component Location - 20 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 9430 Component Location - 21 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 9431 Component Location - 19 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 9432 Component Location - 26 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 9433 Connector: Name : SENSOR-OUTPUT SPEED Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (RFE/RLE) Pin Circuit Description 1 T14 20DG/BR OUTPUT SPEED SIGNAL Pin Circuit Description 1 T13 20DG/VT SPEED SENSOR GROUND Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 9434 2 T13 20DG/VT SPEED SENSOR GROUND 2 T14 20DG/BR OUTPUT SPEED SIGNAL Component Location - 20 Component Location - 21 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 9435 Component Location - 19 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 9436 Component Location - 26 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 9437 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > 42RLE Automatic Transmission Transmission Speed Sensor: Description and Operation 42RLE Automatic Transmission Description DESCRIPTION The Input (1) and Output (2) Speed Sensors are two-wire magnetic pickup devices that generate AC signals as rotation occurs. They are mounted in the left side of the transmission case and are considered primary inputs to the Transmission Control Module (TCM). Operation OPERATION The Input Speed Sensor provides information on how fast the input shaft is rotating. As the teeth of the input clutch hub pass by the sensor coil, an AC voltage is generated and sent to the TCM. The TCM interprets this information as input shaft rpm. The Output Speed Sensor generates an AC signal in a similar fashion, though its coil is excited by rotation of the rear planetary carrier lugs. The TCM interprets this information as output shaft rpm. The TCM compares the input and output speed signals to determine the following: - Transmission gear ratio - Speed ratio error detection - CVI calculation The TCM also compares the input speed signal and the engine speed signal to determine the following: - Torque converter clutch slippage - Torque converter element speed ratio Description DESCRIPTION Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 9440 The Input (1) and Output (2) Speed Sensors are two-wire magnetic pickup devices that generate AC signals as rotation occurs. They are mounted in the left side of the transmission case and are considered primary inputs to the Transmission Control Module (TCM). Operation OPERATION The Input Speed Sensor provides information on how fast the input shaft is rotating. As the teeth of the input clutch hub pass by the sensor coil, an AC voltage is generated and sent to the TCM. The TCM interprets this information as input shaft rpm. The Output Speed Sensor generates an AC signal in a similar fashion, though its coil is excited by rotation of the rear planetary carrier lugs. The TCM interprets this information as output shaft rpm. The TCM compares the input and output speed signals to determine the following: - Transmission gear ratio - Speed ratio error detection - CVI calculation The TCM also compares the input speed signal and the engine speed signal to determine the following: - Torque converter clutch slippage - Torque converter element speed ratio Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 9441 Transmission Speed Sensor: Description and Operation 545RFE Automatic Transmission Description DESCRIPTION The Input and Output Speed Sensors are two-wire magnetic pickup devices that generate AC signals as rotation occurs. They are mounted in the left side of the transmission case and are considered primary inputs to the Transmission Control Module (TCM). Operation OPERATION The Input Speed Sensor provides information on how fast the input shaft is rotating. As the teeth of the input clutch hub pass by the sensor coil, an AC voltage is generated and sent to the TCM. The TCM interprets this information as input shaft rpm. The Output Speed Sensor generates an AC signal in a similar fashion, though its coil is excited by rotation of the park gear teeth. The TCM interprets this information as output shaft rpm. The TCM compares the input and output speed signals to determine the following: - Transmission gear ratio - Speed ratio error detection - CVI calculation The TCM also compares the input speed signal and the engine speed signal to determine the following: - Torque converter clutch slippage - Torque converter element speed ratio Description DESCRIPTION The Input and Output Speed Sensors are two-wire magnetic pickup devices that generate AC signals as rotation occurs. They are mounted in the left side of the transmission case and are considered primary inputs to the Transmission Control Module (TCM). Operation OPERATION The Input Speed Sensor provides information on how fast the input shaft is rotating. As the teeth of the input clutch hub pass by the sensor coil, an AC voltage is generated and sent to the TCM. The TCM interprets this information as input shaft rpm. The Output Speed Sensor generates an AC signal in a similar fashion, though its coil is excited by rotation of the park gear teeth. The TCM interprets this information as output shaft rpm. The TCM compares the input and output speed signals to determine the following: - Transmission gear ratio - Speed ratio error detection - CVI calculation The TCM also compares the input speed signal and the engine speed signal to determine the following: - Torque converter clutch slippage - Torque converter element speed ratio Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 9442 Transmission Speed Sensor: Description and Operation 68RFE Automatic Transmission Description DESCRIPTION The Input and Output Speed Sensors are two-wire magnetic pickup devices that generate AC signals as rotation occurs. They are mounted in the left side of the transmission case and are considered primary inputs to the Transmission Control Module (TCM). Operation OPERATION The Input Speed Sensor provides information on how fast the input shaft is rotating. As the teeth of the input clutch hub pass by the sensor coil, an AC voltage is generated and sent to the TCM. The TCM interprets this information as input shaft rpm. The Output Speed Sensor generates an AC signal in a similar fashion, though its coil is excited by rotation of the park gear teeth. The TCM interprets this information as output shaft rpm. The TCM compares the input and output speed signals to determine the following: - Transmission gear ratio - Speed ratio error detection - CVI calculation The TCM also compares the input speed signal and the engine speed signal to determine the following: - Torque converter clutch slippage - Torque converter element speed ratio Description DESCRIPTION The Input and Output Speed Sensors are two-wire magnetic pickup devices that generate AC signals as rotation occurs. They are mounted in the left side of the transmission case and are considered primary inputs to the Transmission Control Module (TCM). Operation OPERATION The Input Speed Sensor provides information on how fast the input shaft is rotating. As the teeth of the input clutch hub pass by the sensor coil, an AC voltage is generated and sent to the TCM. The TCM interprets this information as input shaft rpm. The Output Speed Sensor generates an AC signal in a similar fashion, though its coil is excited by rotation of the park gear teeth. The TCM interprets this information as output shaft rpm. The TCM compares the input and output speed signals to determine the following: - Transmission gear ratio - Speed ratio error detection - CVI calculation The TCM also compares the input speed signal and the engine speed signal to determine the following: - Torque converter clutch slippage - Torque converter element speed ratio Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 9443 Transmission Speed Sensor: Description and Operation 48RE Automatic Transmission Description DESCRIPTION The speed sensor (1) is located in the overdrive gear case. The sensor is positioned over the park gear and monitors transmission output shaft rotating speed. Operation OPERATION Speed sensor signals are triggered by the park gear lugs as they rotate past the sensor pickup face. Input signals from the sensor are sent to the transmission control module for processing. Signals from this sensor are shared with the powertrain control module. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 9444 Transmission Speed Sensor: Description and Operation AS68RC Automatic Transmission Description DESCRIPTION INPUT AND OUTPUT SPEED SENSORS The Input and Output Speed Sensors are two-wire magnetic pickup devices that generate DC square wave signals as rotation occurs. They are mounted in the left side of the transmission case and are considered primary inputs to the Transmission Control Module (TCM). Operation OPERATION The Input Speed Sensor provides information on how fast the input shaft is rotating. As the "teeth" of the gear pass by the sensor coil, an DC square wave is generated and sent to the TCM. The TCM interprets this information as input shaft rpm. The Output Speed Sensor generates an DC signal in a similar fashion, though its coil is excited by rotation of the rear planetary carrier lugs. The TCM interprets this information as output shaft rpm. The TCM compares the input and output speed signals to determine the following: - Transmission gear ratio - Speed ratio error detection - CVI calculation The TCM also compares the input speed signal and the engine speed signal to determine the following: - Torque converter clutch slippage - Torque converter element speed ratio Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 42RLE Automatic Transmission Transmission Speed Sensor: Service and Repair 42RLE Automatic Transmission Removal REMOVAL 1. Raise vehicle. 2. Place a suitable fluid catch pan under the transmission. 3. Remove the wiring connector from the input speed sensor. NOTE: The speed sensor bolt has a sealing patch applied from the factory. Be sure to reuse the same bolt. 4. Remove the bolt holding the input speed sensor to the transmission case. 5. Remove the input speed sensor from the transmission case. Installation INSTALLATION 1. Install the input speed sensor (1) into the transmission case. NOTE: Before installing the speed sensor bolt, it will be necessary to replenish the sealing patch on the bolt using MOPAR(R) Lock & Seal Adhesive. 2. Install the bolt to hold the input speed sensor into the transmission case. Tighten the bolt to 9 Nm (80 in.lbs.). 3. Install the wiring connector onto the input speed sensor 4. Verify the transmission fluid level. Add fluid as necessary. 5. Lower vehicle. Removal REMOVAL Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 9447 1. Raise vehicle. 2. Place a suitable fluid catch pan under the transmission. 3. Remove the wiring connector from the output speed sensor (2). NOTE: The speed sensor bolt has a sealing patch applied from the factory. Be sure to reuse the same bolt. 4. Remove the bolt holding the output speed sensor to the transmission case. 5. Remove the output speed sensor (2) from the transmission case. Installation INSTALLATION 1. Install the output speed sensor (2) into the transmission case. NOTE: Before installing the speed sensor bolt, it will be necessary to replenish the sealing patch on the bolt using MOPAR(R) Lock & Seal Adhesive. 2. Install the bolt to hold the output speed sensor into the transmission case. Tighten the bolt to 9 Nm (80 in.lbs.). 3. Install the wiring connector onto the output speed sensor 4. Verify the transmission fluid level. Add fluid as necessary. 5. Lower vehicle. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 9448 Transmission Speed Sensor: Service and Repair 545RFE Automatic Transmission Removal REMOVAL 1. Raise vehicle. 2. Place a suitable fluid catch pan under the transmission. 3. Remove the wiring connector from the input speed sensor (3). 4. Remove the bolt holding the input speed sensor to the transmission case. 5. Remove the input speed sensor (3) from the transmission case. Installation INSTALLATION 1. Install the input speed sensor (3) into the transmission case. 2. Install the bolt to hold the input speed sensor (3) into the transmission case. Tighten the bolt to 12 Nm (105 in.lbs.). 3. Install the wiring connector onto the input speed sensor. 4. Verify the transmission fluid level. Add fluid as necessary. 5. Lower vehicle. Removal REMOVAL Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 9449 1. Raise vehicle. 2. Place a suitable fluid catch pan under the transmission. 3. Remove the wiring connector from the output speed sensor (1). 4. Remove the bolt holding the output speed sensor (1) to the transmission case. 5. Remove the output speed sensor (1) from the transmission case. Installation INSTALLATION 1. Install the output speed sensor (1) into the transmission case. 2. Install the bolt to hold the output speed sensor (1) into the transmission case. Tighten the bolt to 12 Nm (105 in.lbs.). 3. Install the wiring connector onto the output speed sensor (1). 4. Verify the transmission fluid level. Add fluid as necessary. 5. Lower vehicle. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 9450 Transmission Speed Sensor: Service and Repair 68RFE Automatic Transmission Removal REMOVAL 1. Raise vehicle. 2. Place a suitable fluid catch pan under the transmission. 3. Remove the wiring connector from the input speed sensor (3). 4. Remove the bolt holding the input speed sensor to the transmission case. 5. Remove the input speed sensor (3) from the transmission case. Installation INSTALLATION 1. Install the input speed sensor (3) into the transmission case. 2. Install the bolt to hold the input speed sensor (3) into the transmission case. Tighten the bolt to 12 Nm (105 in.lbs.). 3. Install the wiring connector onto the input speed sensor. 4. Verify the transmission fluid level. Add fluid as necessary. 5. Lower vehicle. Removal REMOVAL Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 9451 1. Raise vehicle. 2. Place a suitable fluid catch pan under the transmission. 3. Remove the wiring connector from the output speed sensor (1). 4. Remove the bolt holding the output speed sensor (1) to the transmission case. 5. Remove the output speed sensor (1) from the transmission case. Installation INSTALLATION 1. Install the output speed sensor (1) into the transmission case. 2. Install the bolt to hold the output speed sensor (1) into the transmission case. Tighten the bolt to 12 Nm (105 in.lbs.). 3. Install the wiring connector onto the output speed sensor (1). 4. Verify the transmission fluid level. Add fluid as necessary. 5. Lower vehicle. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 9452 Transmission Speed Sensor: Service and Repair AS68RC Automatic Transmission Output Speed Sensor OUTPUT SPEED SENSOR OUTPUT SPEED SENSOR 1. Raise and support the vehicle. 2. Place a suitable fluid catch pan under the transmission. 3. Remove the wiring connector from the output speed sensor. 4. Remove the bolt holding the output speed sensor to the transmission case. 5. Remove the output speed sensor from the transmission case. Input Speed Sensor INPUT SPEED SENSOR INPUT SPEED SENSOR 1. Raise and support the vehicle. 2. Place a suitable fluid catch pan under the transmission. 3. Remove the wiring connector from the input speed sensor. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 9453 4. Remove the bolt holding the input speed sensor to the transmission case. 5. Remove the input speed sensor from the transmission case. Output Speed Sensor OUTPUT SPEED SENSOR NOTE: Apply trans jell to all slide portions, rolling contacts surfaces, thrust surfaces etc. to prevent burnout during initial operation. Lubricate O-rings and O-ring seals with MOPAR(R) AS68RC ATF. Soak all friction disks in MOPAR(R) AS68RC ATF for at least two hours before assembly of clutch packs. OUTPUT SPEED SENSOR 1. Lubricate the output speed sensor o-ring with MOPAR(R) AS68RC ATF. 2. Install the output speed sensor into the transmission case. 3. Tighten the bolt to 8 Nm (70 in.lbs.). 4. Install the wiring connector onto the output speed sensor. 5. Lower vehicle. 6. Verify the transmission fluid level. Add MOPAR(R) AS68RC ATF as necessary. Input Speed Sensor INPUT SPEED SENSOR NOTE: Apply trans jell to all slide portions, rolling contacts surfaces, thrust surfaces etc. to prevent burnout during initial operation. Lubricate O-rings and O-ring seals with MOPAR(R) AS68RC ATF. Soak all friction disks in MOPAR(R) AS68RC ATF for at least two hours before assembly of clutch packs. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 9454 INPUT SPEED SENSOR 1. Lubricate the output speed sensor o-ring with MOPAR(R) AS68RC ATF. 2. Install the input speed sensor into the transmission case. 3. Tighten the bolt to 8 Nm (70 in.lbs.). 4. Install the electrical wiring connector onto the input speed sensor. 5. Lower vehicle. 6. Verify the transmission fluid level. Add MOPAR(R) AS68RC as necessary. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Locations Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch: Locations Component ID: 445 Component : SENSOR-TRANSMISSION TEMPERATURE Connector: Name : SENSOR-TRANSMISSION TEMPERATURE Color : # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (RC) Pin Circuit Description 1 T819 20YL/VT TCC TEMPERATURE SIGNAL 2 T820 20YL/WT TEMPERATURE SENSOR GROUND Component Location - 26 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 9458 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 9459 Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch: Diagrams Component ID: 445 Component : SENSOR-TRANSMISSION TEMPERATURE Connector: Name : SENSOR-TRANSMISSION TEMPERATURE Color : # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (RC) Pin Circuit Description 1 T819 20YL/VT TCC TEMPERATURE SIGNAL 2 T820 20YL/WT TEMPERATURE SENSOR GROUND Component Location - 26 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 9460 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > 545RFE Automatic Transmission Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch: Description and Operation 545RFE Automatic Transmission Description DESCRIPTION The Transmission Range Sensor (TRS) is part of the solenoid module, which is mounted to the top of the valve body inside the transmission. The Transmission Range Sensor (TRS) has five switch contact pins that: - Determine shift lever position - Supply ground to the Starter Relay in Park and Neutral only. - Supply +12 V to the backup lamps in Reverse only. The TRS also has an integrated temperature sensor (thermistor) that communicates transmission temperature to the TCM and PCM. Operation OPERATION The Transmission Range Sensor (TRS) communicates shift lever position to the TCM as a combination of open and closed switches. Each shift lever position has an assigned combination of switch states (open/closed) that the TCM receives from four sense circuits. The TCM interprets this information and determines the appropriate transmission gear position and shift schedule. There are many possible combinations of open and closed switches (codes). Seven of these possible codes are related to gear position and five are recognized as "between gear" codes. This results in many codes which should never occur. These are called "invalid" codes. An invalid code will result in a DTC, and the TCM will then determine the shift lever position based on pressure switch data. This allows reasonably normal transmission operation with a TRS failure. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > 545RFE Automatic Transmission > Page 9463 Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch: Description and Operation 68RFE Automatic Transmission Description DESCRIPTION The Transmission Range Sensor (TRS) is part of the solenoid module, which is mounted to the top of the valve body inside the transmission. The Transmission Range Sensor (TRS) has five switch contact pins that: - Determine shift lever position - Supply ground to the Starter Relay in Park and Neutral only. The TRS also has an integrated temperature sensor (thermistor) that communicates transmission temperature to the TCM and PCM. Operation OPERATION The Transmission Range Sensor (TRS) communicates shift lever position to the TCM as a combination of open and closed switches. Each shift lever position has an assigned combination of switch states (open/closed) that the TCM receives from four sense circuits. The TCM interprets this information and determines the appropriate transmission gear position and shift schedule. There are many possible combinations of open and closed switches (codes). Five of these possible codes correspond to valid gear position, there are two codes for the neutral position and three are recognized as "between gear" codes. This results in many codes which should never occur. These are called "invalid" codes. An invalid code will result in a DTC, and the TCM will then determine the shift lever position based on pressure switch data. This allows reasonably normal transmission operation with a TRS failure. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 42RLE Automatic Transmission Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch: Service and Repair 42RLE Automatic Transmission Removal REMOVAL 1. Remove valve body assembly from vehicle. See: Automatic Transmission/Transaxle/Valve Body/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/42RLE Automatic Transmission/Removal 2. Remove the manual shaft seal (1). 3. Remove manual shaft/TRS retaining screw (1). 4. Slide TRS off of manual valve shaft. Installation INSTALLATION Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 9466 1. Install the TRS (2) to the manual shaft. Make sure TRS locating pin rests in manual valve bore slot. 2. Install the TRS/manual shaft retaining screw (1) and torque to 5 Nm (45 in. lbs.) torque. 3. Install the manual shaft seal (1). 4. Install valve body to the transmission. See: Automatic Transmission/Transaxle/Valve Body/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/42RLE Automatic Transmission/Installation Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 9467 Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch: Service and Repair 48RE Automatic Transmission Removal REMOVAL 1. Raise vehicle and position drain pan under the transmission range sensor (TRS). 2. Move the transmission manual lever to the manual LOW position. The manual LOW position is with the manual lever in the forward-most detent. 3. Disengage the wiring connector from the TRS. 4. Remove the two screws holding the TRS to the TRS mounting bracket. 5. Remove the TRS (3) from the TRS mounting bracket by pulling it straight out of the bracket. 6. If necessary, loosen the TRS mounting bracket (2) in the transmission case using Adapter 8581 (3). 7. If necessary, remove the TRS mounting bracket (2) from the transmission case. Installation INSTALLATION Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 9468 1. Move the transmission manual shaft lever to the manual LOW position. 2. If necessary, install the TRS mounting bracket (2) into the transmission case. Using Adapter 8581 (3), tighten the mounting bracket to 34 Nm (300 in.lbs.). 3. Install the TRS (3) into the mounting bracket (2) with the wiring connector facing the front of the transmission. 4. Install the two screws to hold the TRS to the mounting bracket. Tighten the screws to 5 Nm (45 in.lbs.). 5. Verify proper sensor operation (1-4). 6. Move the transmission manual shaft lever to the PARK position. 7. Connect TRS wiring connector to the TRS and lower vehicle. 8. Refill the transmission fluid to the correct level. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 9469 Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch: Service and Repair AS68RC Automatic Transmission Removal REMOVAL NOTE: Be certain the transmission is in the park lock position. TRANSMISSION RANGE SENSOR 1. Remove the shift cable from the manual shift lever (2). 2. Disconnect the wire harness from the transmission range sensor. 3. Remove the two nuts (3) from the control shaft. TRS REMOVAL/INSTALLATION Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 9470 4. Pry open the tabs on the stake washer (5), remove the nut (3) and the stake washer (5). 5. Remove the bolts (2). 6. Remove the transmission range sensor (1) from the transmission control shaft (4). Installation INSTALLATION 1. Install the transmission range sensor (3) onto the control shaft (5). 2. Install the stake washer and the nut (4) and hand tighten. 3. With the transmission in neutral install the alignment tool 9983 (6) onto the control shaft (5) and into the alignment hole (1). 4. Install the bolts (2). 5. After aligning the transmission range sensor, tighten the bolts (2) 12.5 Nm (9 ft.lbs.) 6. Remove the alignment tool 9983 (6) 7. Tighten the control shaft nut to 7 Nm (62 in.lbs.) 8. Bend the tabs on the stake washer and nut (4) in at least two places to lock in position. TRANSMISSION RANGE SENSOR Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > 42RLE Automatic Transmission > Page 9471 9. Install the manual shift lever (2) onto the control shaft. 10. Install the inner nut (3) onto the control shaft. Tighten the inner nut to 12.5 Nm (9 ft.lbs). 11. Install the outer nut (3) onto the control shaft. While holding the inner nut, tighten the outer not to 12.5 Nm (9 ft.lbs) Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - M/T > Clutch Pedal Position Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection Clutch Pedal Position Sensor / Switch: Testing and Inspection SWITCH-CLUTCH PEDAL POSITION 1. Disconnect switch 2-wire connector (2) attached to pedal support bracket (1), under instrument panel to left of clutch pedal. 2. Check switch continuity with an ohmmeter while operating clutch pedal. - Pedal Depressed - Continuity - Pedal Released - No Continuity 3. If continuity is not present or always present, replace clutch master cylinder. Switch is not serviced separately. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Four Wheel Drive Selector Switch > Component Information > Locations Four Wheel Drive Selector Switch: Locations Component ID: 515 Component : SWITCH-TRANSFER CASE SELECTOR Connector: Name : SWITCH-TRANSFER CASE SELECTOR Color : BLACK # of pins : 10 Qualifier : (ETC) Pin Circuit Description 1 K77 20BR/WT TRANSFER CASE POSITION SENSOR INPUT 2-3 K977 20BR/WT MODE SELECT 4 E11 20OR/DB PANEL LAMPS CONTROL 5 Z905 20BK GROUND 6 G95 20VT/BR NEUTRAL INDICATOR 7 F21 20PK/DG FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) 8-9-10 - Component Location - 47 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Four Wheel Drive Selector Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 9480 Component Location - 45 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Four Wheel Drive Selector Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 9481 Component Location - 20 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Four Wheel Drive Selector Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 9482 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Four Wheel Drive Selector Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 9483 Four Wheel Drive Selector Switch: Diagrams Component ID: 515 Component : SWITCH-TRANSFER CASE SELECTOR Connector: Name : SWITCH-TRANSFER CASE SELECTOR Color : BLACK # of pins : 10 Qualifier : (ETC) Pin Circuit Description 1 K77 20BR/WT TRANSFER CASE POSITION SENSOR INPUT 2-3 K977 20BR/WT MODE SELECT 4 E11 20OR/DB PANEL LAMPS CONTROL 5 Z905 20BK GROUND 6 G95 20VT/BR NEUTRAL INDICATOR 7 F21 20PK/DG FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) 8-9-10 - Component Location - 47 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Four Wheel Drive Selector Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 9484 Component Location - 45 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Four Wheel Drive Selector Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 9485 Component Location - 20 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Four Wheel Drive Selector Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 9486 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Four Wheel Drive Selector Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > NV243 Transfer Case Four Wheel Drive Selector Switch: Description and Operation NV243 Transfer Case Description DESCRIPTION The selector switch assembly is mounted in the left side of the vehicle's Instrument Panel (IP) and consists of a rotary knob connected to a resistive network for the mode and range shift selections. Also located in this assembly is a recessed, normally open momentary switch for making shifts into and out of transfer case NEUTRAL. A pen, or similar instrument, is used to make a NEUTRAL shift selection, thus reducing the likelihood of an inadvertent shift request. The selector switch also contains four light emitting diode's (LED's) to indicate the transfer case position and whether a shift is in progress. Operation OPERATION As the position of the selector switch varies, the resistance between the Mode Sensor supply voltage pin and the Mode Sensor output will vary. Hardware, software, and calibrations within the Transfer Case Control Module (TCCM) are provided that interpret the selector switch resistance as given in the table below: For resistances between the ranges B-E shown for each valid position (T-Case NEUTRAL, 4LO, 4HI, 2WD), the TCCM may interpret the resistance as: - either of the neighboring valid positions. - as an invalid fault position. For resistances between the ranges E and F shown for 2WD and in-between positions, the TCCM may interpret the resistance as: - the 2WD position. - an invalid fault position. - a valid in-between position. For resistances between the ranges F and G shown for in-between positions and fault condition (open), the TCCM may interpret the resistance as: Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Four Wheel Drive Selector Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > NV243 Transfer Case > Page 9489 - a valid in-between position. - an invalid fault position. For resistances between the ranges A and B shown for the fault condition (short) and T-Case NEUTRAL, the TCCM may interpret the resistance as: - the T-Case NEUTRAL position. - an invalid fault position. The LED's in the selector assembly are illuminated/flashed in the following manner to indicate a particular condition or state. - A solidly illuminated LED indicates a successfully completed shift and the current operating mode of the transfer case. While a shift has been requested but not yet completed, the LED for the desired transfer case position is flashed. - A flashing operating mode LED for the desired gear indicates that a shift to that position has been requested, but all of the driver controllable conditions have not been met. This is in an attempt to notify the driver that the transmission needs to be put into NEUTRAL, the vehicle speed is too great, or some other condition outlined (other than a diagnostic failure that would prevent this shift) elsewhere See: Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain/Relays and Modules - Transfer Case/Control Module/Description and Operation/Operation is not met. Note that this flashing will continue indefinitely until the conditions are eventually met, or the selector switch position is changed, or if diagnostic routines no longer allow the requested shift. - If the driver attempts to make a shift into transfer case NEUTRAL, and any of the driver controllable conditions are not met, the request will be ignored until all of the conditions are met or until the NEUTRAL select button is released. Additionally the neutral lamp will flash, or begin to flash while the button is depressed and operator controllable conditions are not being met. All of the LED's except the Neutral will flash if any of the operator controllable conditions for shifting are not met while the Neutral button is depressed. This "toggle" type of feature is necessary because the TCCM would interpret another request immediately after the shift into transfer case NEUTRAL has completed. - No LED's illuminated indicate a fault in the transfer case control system. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Four Wheel Drive Selector Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > NV243 Transfer Case > Page 9490 Four Wheel Drive Selector Switch: Description and Operation NV244 GENII Transfer Case Description DESCRIPTION The selector switch assembly is mounted in the left side of the vehicle's Instrument Panel (IP) and consists of a rotary knob connected to a resistive network for the mode and range shift selections. Also located in this assembly is a recessed, normally open momentary switch for making shifts into and out of transfer case NEUTRAL. A pen, or similar instrument, is used to make a NEUTRAL shift selection, thus reducing the likelihood of an inadvertent shift request. The selector switch also contains light emitting diode's (LED's) to indicate the transfer case position and whether a shift is in progress. Operation OPERATION As the position of the selector switch varies, the resistance between the Mode Sensor supply voltage pin and the Mode Sensor output will vary. Hardware, software, and calibrations within the Transfer Case Control Module (TCCM) are provided that interpret the selector switch resistance as given in the table below: For resistances between the ranges B-E shown for each valid position (T-Case NEUTRAL, 4LO, 4HI, AWD), the TCCM may interpret the resistance as: - either of the neighboring valid positions. - as an invalid fault position. For resistances between the ranges E and F shown for AWD and in-between positions, the TCCM may interpret the resistance as: - the AWD position. - an invalid fault position. - a valid in-between position. For resistances between the ranges F and G shown for in-between positions and fault condition (open), the TCCM may interpret the resistance as: - a valid in-between position. - an invalid fault position. For resistances between the ranges A and B shown for the fault condition (short) and , T-Case NEUTRAL, the TCCM may interpret the resistance as: - the T-Case NEUTRAL position. - an invalid fault position. The LED's in the selector assembly are illuminated/flashed in the following manner to indicate a particular condition or state. - A solidly illuminated LED indicates a successfully completed shift and the current operating mode of the transfer case. While a shift has been requested but not yet completed, the LED for the desired transfer case position is flashed. - A flashing operating mode LED for the desired gear indicates that a shift to that position has been requested, but all of the driver controllable conditions have not been met. This is in an attempt to notify the driver that the transmission needs to be put into NEUTRAL, the vehicle speed is too great, or some other condition outlined (other than a diagnostic failure that would prevent this shift) elsewhere See: Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain/Relays and Modules - Transfer Case/Control Module/Description and Operation/Operation is not met. Note that this Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Four Wheel Drive Selector Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > NV243 Transfer Case > Page 9491 flashing will continue indefinitely until the conditions are eventually met, or the selector switch position is changed, or if diagnostic routines no longer allow the requested shift. - If the driver attempts to make a shift into transfer case NEUTRAL, and any of the driver controllable conditions are not met, the request will be ignored until all of the conditions are met or until the NEUTRAL select button is released. Additionally the neutral lamp will flash, or begin to flash while the button is depressed and operator controllable conditions are not being met. All of the LED's except the Neutral will flash if any of the operator controllable conditions for shifting are not met while the Neutral button is depressed. This "toggle" type of feature is necessary because the TCCM would interpret another request immediately after the shift into transfer case NEUTRAL has completed. - No LED's illuminated indicate a fault in the transfer case control system. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Four Wheel Drive Selector Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > NV243 Transfer Case > Page 9492 Four Wheel Drive Selector Switch: Description and Operation NV246 Transfer Case Description DESCRIPTION The selector switch assembly is mounted in the left side of the vehicle's Instrument Panel (IP) and consists of a rotary knob connected to a resistive network for the mode and range shift selections. Also located in this assembly is a recessed, normally open momentary switch for making shifts into and out of transfer case NEUTRAL. A pen, or similar instrument, is used to make a NEUTRAL shift selection, thus reducing the likelihood of an inadvertent shift request. The selector switch also contains light emitting diode's (LED's) to indicate the transfer case position and whether a shift is in progress. Operation OPERATION As the position of the selector switch varies, the resistance between the Mode Sensor supply voltage pin and the Mode Sensor output will vary. Hardware, software, and calibrations within the Transfer Case Control Module (TCCM) are provided that interpret the selector switch resistance as given in the table below: For resistances between the ranges B-E shown for each valid position (T-Case NEUTRAL, 4LO, 4HI, AWD), the TCCM may interpret the resistance as: - either of the neighboring valid positions. - as an invalid fault position. For resistances between the ranges E and F shown for AWD and in-between positions, the TCCM may interpret the resistance as: - the AWD position. - an invalid fault position. - a valid in-between position. For resistances between the ranges F and G shown for in-between positions and fault condition (open), the TCCM may interpret the resistance as: - a valid in-between position. - an invalid fault position. For resistances between the ranges A and B shown for the fault condition (short) and , T-Case NEUTRAL, the TCCM may interpret the resistance as: - the T-Case NEUTRAL position. - an invalid fault position. The LED's in the selector assembly are illuminated/flashed in the following manner to indicate a particular condition or state. - A solidly illuminated LED indicates a successfully completed shift and the current operating mode of the transfer case. While a shift has been requested but not yet completed, the LED for the desired transfer case position is flashed. - A flashing operating mode LED for the desired gear indicates that a shift to that position has been requested, but all of the driver controllable conditions have not been met. This is in an attempt to notify the driver that the transmission needs to be put into NEUTRAL, the vehicle speed is too great, or some other condition outlined (other than a diagnostic failure that would prevent this shift) elsewhere See: Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain/Relays and Modules - Transfer Case/Control Module/Description and Operation/Operation is not met. Note that this Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Four Wheel Drive Selector Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > NV243 Transfer Case > Page 9493 flashing will continue indefinitely until the conditions are eventually met, or the selector switch position is changed, or if diagnostic routines no longer allow the requested shift. - If the driver attempts to make a shift into transfer case NEUTRAL, and any of the driver controllable conditions are not met, the request will be ignored until all of the conditions are met or until the NEUTRAL select button is released. Additionally the neutral lamp will flash, or begin to flash while the button is depressed and operator controllable conditions are not being met. All of the LED's except the Neutral will flash if any of the operator controllable conditions for shifting are not met while the Neutral button is depressed. This "toggle" type of feature is necessary because the TCCM would interpret another request immediately after the shift into transfer case NEUTRAL has completed. - No LED's illuminated indicate a fault in the transfer case control system. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Four Wheel Drive Selector Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > NV243 Transfer Case > Page 9494 Four Wheel Drive Selector Switch: Description and Operation NV273 Transfer Case Description DESCRIPTION The selector switch assembly is mounted in the left side of the vehicle's Instrument Panel (IP) and consists of a rotary knob connected to a resistive network for the mode and range shift selections. Also located in this assembly is a recessed, normally open momentary switch for making shifts into and out of transfer case NEUTRAL. A pen, or similar instrument, is used to make a NEUTRAL shift selection, thus reducing the likelihood of an inadvertent shift request. The selector switch also contains four light emitting diode's (LED's) to indicate the transfer case position and whether a shift is in progress. Operation OPERATION As the position of the selector switch varies, the resistance between the Mode Sensor supply voltage pin and the Mode Sensor output will vary. Hardware, software, and calibrations within the Transfer Case Control Module (TCCM) are provided that interpret the selector switch resistance as given in the table below: For resistances between the ranges B-E shown for each valid position (T-Case NEUTRAL, 4LO, 4HI, 2WD), the TCCM may interpret the resistance as: - either of the neighboring valid positions. - as an invalid fault position. For resistances between the ranges E and F shown for 2WD and in-between positions, the TCCM may interpret the resistance as: - the 2WD position. - an invalid fault position. - a valid in-between position. For resistances between the ranges F and G shown for in-between positions and fault condition (open), the TCCM may interpret the resistance as: Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Four Wheel Drive Selector Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > NV243 Transfer Case > Page 9495 - a valid in-between position. - an invalid fault position. For resistances between the ranges A and B shown for the fault condition (short) and T-Case NEUTRAL, the TCCM may interpret the resistance as: - the T-Case NEUTRAL position. - an invalid fault position. The LED's in the selector assembly are illuminated/flashed in the following manner to indicate a particular condition or state. - A solidly illuminated LED indicates a successfully completed shift and the current operating mode of the transfer case. While a shift has been requested but not yet completed, the LED for the desired transfer case position is flashed. - A flashing operating mode LED for the desired gear indicates that a shift to that position has been requested, but all of the driver controllable conditions have not been met. This is in an attempt to notify the driver that the transmission needs to be put into NEUTRAL, the vehicle speed is too great, or some other condition outlined (other than a diagnostic failure that would prevent this shift) elsewhere See: Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain/Relays and Modules - Transfer Case/Control Module/Description and Operation/Operation is not met. Note that this flashing will continue indefinitely until the conditions are eventually met, or the selector switch position is changed, or if diagnostic routines no longer allow the requested shift. - If the driver attempts to make a shift into transfer case NEUTRAL, and any of the driver controllable conditions are not met, the request will be ignored until all of the conditions are met or until the NEUTRAL select button is released. Additionally the neutral lamp will flash, or begin to flash while the button is depressed and operator controllable conditions are not being met. All of the LED's except the Neutral will flash if any of the operator controllable conditions for shifting are not met while the Neutral button is depressed. This "toggle" type of feature is necessary because the TCCM would interpret another request immediately after the shift into transfer case NEUTRAL has completed. - No LED's illuminated indicate a fault in the transfer case control system. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Gear Sensor/Switch, Transfer Case > Component Information > Locations > Assembly-Shift Motor/Mode Sensor Gear Sensor/Switch: Locations Assembly-Shift Motor/Mode Sensor Component ID: 18 Component : ASSEMBLY-SHIFT MOTOR/MODE SENSOR Connector: Name : ASSEMBLY-SHIFT MOTOR/MODE SENSOR Color : BLACK # of pins : 8 Qualifier : (RFE FULL TIME ETC) Pin Circuit Description 1 T103 20YL/OR 5 VOLT SUPPLY 2 D201 20WT/DG MODE SENSOR A 3 G180 20VT/YL SENSOR RETURN 4 T101 16DG SHIFT MOTOR CONTROL B 5 T102 16YL SHIFT MOTOR CONTROL A 6 A940 20RD FUSED B(+) 7 T300 20YL/GY T-CASE MOTOR BRAKE SIGNAL 8-Component Location - 21 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Gear Sensor/Switch, Transfer Case > Component Information > Locations > Assembly-Shift Motor/Mode Sensor > Page 9500 Component Location - 24 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Gear Sensor/Switch, Transfer Case > Component Information > Locations > Assembly-Shift Motor/Mode Sensor > Page 9501 Component Location - 26 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Gear Sensor/Switch, Transfer Case > Component Information > Locations > Assembly-Shift Motor/Mode Sensor > Page 9502 Connector: Name : ASSEMBLY-SHIFT MOTOR/MODE SENSOR Color : DK. GRAY # of pins : 8 Qualifier : (RFE PART TIME ETC/RE ETC) Pin Circuit Description 1 T103 20YL/OR 5 VOLT SUPPLY 2 D201 20WT/DG MODE SENSOR A 3 G180 20VT/YL SENSOR RETURN 4 T101 16DG SHIFT MOTOR CONTROL B Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Gear Sensor/Switch, Transfer Case > Component Information > Locations > Assembly-Shift Motor/Mode Sensor > Page 9503 5 T102 16YL SHIFT MOTOR CONTROL A 6 A918 20RD FUSED B(+) 7-8-Component Location - 21 Component Location - 24 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Gear Sensor/Switch, Transfer Case > Component Information > Locations > Assembly-Shift Motor/Mode Sensor > Page 9504 Component Location - 26 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Gear Sensor/Switch, Transfer Case > Component Information > Locations > Assembly-Shift Motor/Mode Sensor > Page 9505 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Gear Sensor/Switch, Transfer Case > Component Information > Locations > Assembly-Shift Motor/Mode Sensor > Page 9506 Gear Sensor/Switch: Locations Sensor-Transfer Case Position Component ID: 443 Component : SENSOR-TRANSFER CASE POSITION Connector: Name : SENSOR-TRANSFER CASE POSITION Color : # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (MTC EXCEPT POWER WAGON) Pin Circuit Description 1 D201 20WT/DG MODE SENSOR A Pin Circuit Description 1 D201 18WT/DG MODE SENSOR A 2 Z955 20BK GROUND 2 Z955 18BK GROUND 2 Z901 20BK GROUND Component Location - 22 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Gear Sensor/Switch, Transfer Case > Component Information > Locations > Assembly-Shift Motor/Mode Sensor > Page 9507 Component Location - 25 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Gear Sensor/Switch, Transfer Case > Component Information > Locations > Assembly-Shift Motor/Mode Sensor > Page 9508 Connector: Name : SENSOR-TRANSFER CASE POSITION Color : # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (MTC POWER WAGON) Pin Circuit Description 1 D201 18WT/DG MODE SENSOR A Pin Circuit Description 1 D201 20WT/DG MODE SENSOR A Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Gear Sensor/Switch, Transfer Case > Component Information > Locations > Assembly-Shift Motor/Mode Sensor > Page 9509 2 G180 18VT/YL SENSOR RETURN 2 G180 20VT/YL SENSOR RETURN Component Location - 22 Component Location - 25 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Gear Sensor/Switch, Transfer Case > Component Information > Locations > Assembly-Shift Motor/Mode Sensor > Page 9510 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Gear Sensor/Switch, Transfer Case > Component Information > Diagrams > Assembly-Shift Motor/Mode Sensor Gear Sensor/Switch: Diagrams Assembly-Shift Motor/Mode Sensor Component ID 14 Component ID: 14 Component : ASSEMBLY-SHIFT MOTOR/MODE SENSOR Connector: Name : ASSEMBLY-SHIFT MOTOR/MODE SENSOR Color : BLACK # of pins : 8 Qualifier : (RFE FULL TIME ETC) Pin Circuit Description 1 T103 20YL/OR 5 VOLT SUPPLY 2 D201 20WT/DG MODE SENSOR A 3 G180 20VT/YL SENSOR RETURN 4 T101 16DG SHIFT MOTOR CONTROL B 5 T102 16YL SHIFT MOTOR CONTROL A 6 A940 20RD FUSED B(+) 7 T300 20YL/GY T-CASE MOTOR BRAKE SIGNAL 8-Connector: Name : ASSEMBLY-SHIFT MOTOR/MODE SENSOR Color : DK. GRAY # of pins : 8 Qualifier : (RFE PART TIME ETC/RE ETC) Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Gear Sensor/Switch, Transfer Case > Component Information > Diagrams > Assembly-Shift Motor/Mode Sensor > Page 9513 Pin Circuit Description 1 T103 20YL/OR 5 VOLT SUPPLY 2 D201 20WT/DG MODE SENSOR A 3 G180 20VT/YL SENSOR RETURN 4 T101 16DG SHIFT MOTOR CONTROL B 5 T102 16YL SHIFT MOTOR CONTROL A 6 A918 20RD FUSED B(+) 7-8-Component ID 18 Component ID: 18 Component : ASSEMBLY-SHIFT MOTOR/MODE SENSOR Connector: Name : ASSEMBLY-SHIFT MOTOR/MODE SENSOR Color : BLACK # of pins : 8 Qualifier : (RFE FULL TIME ETC) Pin Circuit Description 1 T103 20YL/OR 5 VOLT SUPPLY 2 D201 20WT/DG MODE SENSOR A 3 G180 20VT/YL SENSOR RETURN 4 T101 16DG SHIFT MOTOR CONTROL B 5 T102 16YL SHIFT MOTOR CONTROL A Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Gear Sensor/Switch, Transfer Case > Component Information > Diagrams > Assembly-Shift Motor/Mode Sensor > Page 9514 6 A940 20RD FUSED B(+) 7 T300 20YL/GY T-CASE MOTOR BRAKE SIGNAL 8-Component Location - 21 Component Location - 24 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Gear Sensor/Switch, Transfer Case > Component Information > Diagrams > Assembly-Shift Motor/Mode Sensor > Page 9515 Component Location - 26 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Gear Sensor/Switch, Transfer Case > Component Information > Diagrams > Assembly-Shift Motor/Mode Sensor > Page 9516 Connector: Name : ASSEMBLY-SHIFT MOTOR/MODE SENSOR Color : DK. GRAY # of pins : 8 Qualifier : (RFE PART TIME ETC/RE ETC) Pin Circuit Description 1 T103 20YL/OR 5 VOLT SUPPLY 2 D201 20WT/DG MODE SENSOR A 3 G180 20VT/YL SENSOR RETURN 4 T101 16DG SHIFT MOTOR CONTROL B Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Gear Sensor/Switch, Transfer Case > Component Information > Diagrams > Assembly-Shift Motor/Mode Sensor > Page 9517 5 T102 16YL SHIFT MOTOR CONTROL A 6 A918 20RD FUSED B(+) 7-8-Component Location - 21 Component Location - 24 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Gear Sensor/Switch, Transfer Case > Component Information > Diagrams > Assembly-Shift Motor/Mode Sensor > Page 9518 Component Location - 26 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Gear Sensor/Switch, Transfer Case > Component Information > Diagrams > Assembly-Shift Motor/Mode Sensor > Page 9519 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Gear Sensor/Switch, Transfer Case > Component Information > Diagrams > Assembly-Shift Motor/Mode Sensor > Page 9520 Gear Sensor/Switch: Diagrams Sensor-Transfer Case Position Component ID: 443 Component : SENSOR-TRANSFER CASE POSITION Connector: Name : SENSOR-TRANSFER CASE POSITION Color : # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (MTC EXCEPT POWER WAGON) Pin Circuit Description 1 D201 20WT/DG MODE SENSOR A Pin Circuit Description 1 D201 18WT/DG MODE SENSOR A 2 Z955 20BK GROUND 2 Z955 18BK GROUND 2 Z901 20BK GROUND Component Location - 22 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Gear Sensor/Switch, Transfer Case > Component Information > Diagrams > Assembly-Shift Motor/Mode Sensor > Page 9521 Component Location - 25 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Gear Sensor/Switch, Transfer Case > Component Information > Diagrams > Assembly-Shift Motor/Mode Sensor > Page 9522 Connector: Name : SENSOR-TRANSFER CASE POSITION Color : # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (MTC POWER WAGON) Pin Circuit Description 1 D201 18WT/DG MODE SENSOR A Pin Circuit Description 1 D201 20WT/DG MODE SENSOR A Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Gear Sensor/Switch, Transfer Case > Component Information > Diagrams > Assembly-Shift Motor/Mode Sensor > Page 9523 2 G180 18VT/YL SENSOR RETURN 2 G180 20VT/YL SENSOR RETURN Component Location - 22 Component Location - 25 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Gear Sensor/Switch, Transfer Case > Component Information > Diagrams > Assembly-Shift Motor/Mode Sensor > Page 9524 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Gear Sensor/Switch, Transfer Case > Component Information > Description and Operation > NV244 GENII Transfer Case Gear Sensor/Switch: Description and Operation NV244 GENII Transfer Case Description DESCRIPTION The transfer case mode sensor is an electronic device whose output can be interpreted to indicate the shift motor shaft's rotary position. The sensor consists of a magnetic ring and four Hall Effect Transistors to create a 4 channel digital device (non-contacting) whose output converts the motor shaft position into a coded signal. The TCCM must supply 5VDC (+/- 0.5v) to the sensor and monitor the shift motor position. The four channels are denoted A, B, C, and D. The sensor is mechanically linked to the shaft of the cam which causes the transfer case shifting. The mode sensor draws less than 53 mA. Operation OPERATION During normal vehicle operation, the Transfer Case Control Module (TCCM) monitors the mode sensor outputs at least every 250 (+/-50) milliseconds when the shift motor is stationary and 400 microseconds when the shift motor is active. A mode sensor signal between 3.8 Volts and 0.8 Volts is considered to be undefined. Refer to SECTOR ANGLES vs.TRANSFER CASE POSITION for the relative angles of the transfer case shift sector versus the interpreted transfer case gear operating mode. Refer to MODE SENSOR CHANNEL STATES for the sensor codes returned to the TCCM for each transfer case mode sensor position. The various between gears positions can also be referred as the transfer case's coarse position. These coarse positions come into play during shift attempts. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Gear Sensor/Switch, Transfer Case > Component Information > Description and Operation > NV244 GENII Transfer Case > Page 9527 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Gear Sensor/Switch, Transfer Case > Component Information > Description and Operation > NV244 GENII Transfer Case > Page 9528 Gear Sensor/Switch: Description and Operation NV246 Transfer Case Description DESCRIPTION The transfer case mode sensor is an electronic device whose output can be interpreted to indicate the shift motor shaft's rotary position. The sensor consists of a magnetic ring and four Hall Effect Transistors to create a 4 channel digital device (non-contacting) whose output converts the motor shaft position into a coded signal. The FCM must supply 5VDC (+/- 0.5v) to the sensor and monitor the shift motor position. The four channels are denoted A, B, C, and D. The sensor is mechanically linked to the shaft of the cam which causes the transfer case shifting. The mode sensor draws less than 53 mA. Operation OPERATION During normal vehicle operation, the Front Control Module (FCM) monitors the mode sensor outputs at least every 250 (+/-50) milliseconds when the shift motor is stationary and 400 microseconds when the shift motor is active. A mode sensor signal between 3.8 Volts and 0.8 Volts is considered to be undefined. Refer to for the relative angles of the transfer case shift sector versus the interpreted transfer case gear operating mode. Refer to the sensor codes returned to the FCM for each transfer case mode sensor position. The various between gears positions can also be referred as the transfer case's coarse position. These coarse positions come into play during shift attempts. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Gear Sensor/Switch, Transfer Case > Component Information > Description and Operation > NV244 GENII Transfer Case > Page 9529 Gear Sensor/Switch: Description and Operation NV271 Transfer Case Description DESCRIPTION The transfer case position sensor is an electronic device whose output can be interpreted to indicate the transfer case's current operating mode. The sensor consists of a five position, resistive multiplexed circuit which returns a specific resistance value to the Powertrain Control Module (PCM) for each transfer case operating mode. The sensor is located on the top of the transfer case, just left of the transfer case centerline and rides against the sector plate roostercomb. The PCM supplies 5VDC (+/- 0.5V) to the sensor and monitors the return voltage to determine the sector plate, and therefore the transfer case, position. Operation OPERATION Position Sensor Linear Movement During normal vehicle operation, the Powertrain Control Module (PCM) monitors the transfer case position sensor return voltage to determine the operating mode of the transfer case. Refer to the Operating Mode Versus Resistance table for the correct resistance for each position. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Gear Sensor/Switch, Transfer Case > Component Information > Description and Operation > NV244 GENII Transfer Case > Page 9530 Gear Sensor/Switch: Description and Operation NV243 Transfer Case Description DESCRIPTION The transfer case mode sensor (1) is an electronic device whose output can be interpreted to indicate the shift motor shaft's rotary position. The sensor consists of a magnetic ring and four Hall Effect Transistors to create a 4 channel digital device (non-contacting) whose output converts the motor shaft position into a coded signal. The TCCM must supply 5VDC (+/- 0.5v) to the sensor and monitor the shift motor position. The four channels are denoted A, B, C, and D. The sensor is mechanically linked to the shaft of the cam which causes the transfer case shifting. The mode sensor draws less than 53 mA. Operation OPERATION During normal vehicle operation, the Transfer Case Control Module (TCCM) monitors the mode sensor outputs at least every 250 (+/-50) milliseconds when the shift motor is stationary and 400 microseconds when the shift motor is active. A mode sensor signal between 3.8 Volts and 0.8 Volts is considered to be undefined. Refer to SECTOR ANGLES vs.TRANSFER CASE POSITION for the relative angles of the transfer case shift sector versus the interpreted transfer case gear operating mode. Refer to MODE SENSOR CHANNEL STATES for the sensor codes returned to the TCCM for each transfer case mode sensor position. The various between gears positions can also be referred as the transfer case's coarse position. These coarse positions come into play during shift attempts. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Gear Sensor/Switch, Transfer Case > Component Information > Description and Operation > NV244 GENII Transfer Case > Page 9531 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Gear Sensor/Switch, Transfer Case > Component Information > Description and Operation > NV244 GENII Transfer Case > Page 9532 Gear Sensor/Switch: Description and Operation NV273 Transfer Case Description DESCRIPTION The transfer case mode sensor (1) is an electronic device whose output can be interpreted to indicate the shift motor shaft's rotary position. The sensor consists of a magnetic ring and four Hall Effect Transistors to create a 4 channel digital device (non-contacting) whose output converts the motor shaft position into a coded signal. The TCCM must supply 5VDC (+/- 0.5v) to the sensor and monitor the shift motor position. The four channels are denoted A, B, C, and D. The sensor is mechanically linked to the shaft of the cam which causes the transfer case shifting. The mode sensor draws less than 53 mA. Operation OPERATION During normal vehicle operation, the Transfer Case Control Module (TCCM) monitors the mode sensor outputs at least every 250 (+/-50) milliseconds when the shift motor is stationary and 400 microseconds when the shift motor is active. A mode sensor signal between 3.8 Volts and 0.8 Volts is considered to be undefined. Refer to SECTOR ANGLES vs.TRANSFER CASE POSITION for the relative angles of the transfer case shift sector versus the interpreted transfer case gear operating mode. Refer to MODE SENSOR CHANNEL STATES for the sensor codes returned to the TCCM for each transfer case mode sensor position. The various between gears positions can also be referred as the transfer case's coarse position. These coarse positions come into play during shift attempts. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Gear Sensor/Switch, Transfer Case > Component Information > Description and Operation > NV244 GENII Transfer Case > Page 9533 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Gear Sensor/Switch, Transfer Case > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Gear Sensor/Switch: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL 1. Raise and support the vehicle. 2. Disengage the transfer case position sensor connector from the position sensor. 3. Remove the position sensor from the transfer case. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Gear Sensor/Switch, Transfer Case > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 9536 Gear Sensor/Switch: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION 1. Inspect the o-ring seal on the transfer case position sensor. Replace the o-ring if necessary. 2. Install the transfer case position sensor into the transfer case. Torque the sensor to 27 Nm (20 ft.lbs.). 3. Engage the transfer case position sensor connector to the position sensor. 4. Lower vehicle. 5. Verify proper sensor operation. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Speed Sensor, Transfer Case > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Prop Shaft Speed-Front Speed Sensor: Locations Sensor-Prop Shaft Speed-Front Component ID: 435 Component : SENSOR-PROP SHAFT SPEED-FRONT Connector: Name : SENSOR-PROP SHAFT SPEED-FRONT Color : # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (FULL TIME ETC) Pin Circuit Description 1 T71 20YL/OR INPUT SPEED SENSOR 2 (N3) RETURN 2 T340 20DG/VT INPUT SPEED SENSOR 2 (N3) SIGNAL Component Location - 21 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Speed Sensor, Transfer Case > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Prop Shaft Speed-Front > Page 9541 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Speed Sensor, Transfer Case > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Prop Shaft Speed-Front > Page 9542 Speed Sensor: Locations Sensor-Prop Shaft Speed-Rear Component ID: 436 Component : SENSOR-PROP SHAFT SPEED-REAR Connector: Name : SENSOR-PROP SHAFT SPEED-REAR Color : # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (FULL TIME ETC) Pin Circuit Description 1 T70 20YL INPUT SPEED SENSOR 1 (N2) SIGNAL 2 T341 20DG/VT INPUT SPEED SENSOR 1 (N2) RETURN Component Location - 21 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Speed Sensor, Transfer Case > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Prop Shaft Speed-Front > Page 9543 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Speed Sensor, Transfer Case > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Prop Shaft Speed-Front Speed Sensor: Diagrams Sensor-Prop Shaft Speed-Front Component ID: 435 Component : SENSOR-PROP SHAFT SPEED-FRONT Connector: Name : SENSOR-PROP SHAFT SPEED-FRONT Color : # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (FULL TIME ETC) Pin Circuit Description 1 T71 20YL/OR INPUT SPEED SENSOR 2 (N3) RETURN 2 T340 20DG/VT INPUT SPEED SENSOR 2 (N3) SIGNAL Component Location - 21 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Speed Sensor, Transfer Case > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Prop Shaft Speed-Front > Page 9546 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Speed Sensor, Transfer Case > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Prop Shaft Speed-Front > Page 9547 Speed Sensor: Diagrams Sensor-Prop Shaft Speed-Rear Component ID: 436 Component : SENSOR-PROP SHAFT SPEED-REAR Connector: Name : SENSOR-PROP SHAFT SPEED-REAR Color : # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (FULL TIME ETC) Pin Circuit Description 1 T70 20YL INPUT SPEED SENSOR 1 (N2) SIGNAL 2 T341 20DG/VT INPUT SPEED SENSOR 1 (N2) RETURN Component Location - 21 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Speed Sensor, Transfer Case > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Prop Shaft Speed-Front > Page 9548 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Speed Sensor, Transfer Case > Component Information > Service and Repair > Sensor-Output Shaft Speed-Front Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Sensor-Output Shaft Speed-Front Removal REMOVAL 1. Raise the vehicle on a suitable hoist. 2. Disengage the wiring connector from the front output shaft speed sensor (1). 3. Remove the front output shaft speed sensor from the transfer case. Installation INSTALLATION 1. Install the front output shaft speed sensor (1) into the transfer case. Tighten the speed sensor to 17 Nm (12.5 ft.lbs.). 2. Engage the wiring connector to the front output shaft speed sensor. 3. Lower the vehicle. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Speed Sensor, Transfer Case > Component Information > Service and Repair > Sensor-Output Shaft Speed-Front > Page 9551 Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Sensor-Output Shaft Speed-Rear Removal REMOVAL 1. Raise the vehicle on a suitable hoist. 2. Disengage the wiring connector from the rear output shaft speed sensor (1). 3. Remove the rear output shaft speed sensor from the transfer case. Installation INSTALLATION 1. Install the rear output shaft speed sensor (1) into the transfer case. Tighten the speed sensor to 17 Nm (12.5 ft.lbs.). 2. Engage the wiring connector to the rear output shaft speed sensor. 3. Lower the vehicle. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > ABS Light > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description ABS Light: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION An Antilock Brake System (ABS) indicator is standard equipment on all instrument clusters. However, the instrument cluster can be programmed to disable this indicator on vehicles that are not equipped with the ABS or Rear Wheel Anti-Lock (RWAL) brake systems, which are not available in some markets. This indicator is located near the lower edge of the instrument cluster, between the tachometer and the speedometer. The ABS indicator consists of a stencil-like cutout of the International Control and Display Symbol icon for Failure of Anti-lock Braking System in the opaque layer of the instrument cluster overlay. The dark outer layer of the overlay prevents the indicator from being clearly visible when it is not illuminated. An amber Light Emitting Diode (LED) behind the cutout in the opaque layer of the overlay causes the indicator to appear in amber through the translucent outer layer of the overlay when it is illuminated from behind by the LED, which is soldered onto the instrument cluster electronic circuit board. The ABS indicator is serviced as a unit with the instrument cluster. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > ABS Light > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 9558 ABS Light: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The ABS indicator gives an indication to the vehicle operator when the ABS system, or a circuit or component of the system is ineffective. This indicator is controlled by a transistor on the instrument cluster circuit board based upon cluster programming and electronic messages received by the cluster from the Controller Antilock Brake (CAB) over the Controller Area Network (CAN) data bus. The ABS indicator Light Emitting Diode (LED) is completely controlled by the instrument cluster logic circuit, and that logic will only allow this indicator to operate when the instrument cluster receives a battery current input on the fused ignition switch output (run-start) circuit. Therefore, the LED will always be OFF when the ignition switch is in any position except ON or START. The LED only illuminates when it is provided a path to ground by the instrument cluster transistor. The instrument cluster will turn ON the ABS indicator for the following reasons: - Bulb Test - Each time the ignition switch is turned to the ON position the ABS indicator is illuminated for about four seconds as a bulb test. The entire bulb test is a function of the CAB. - ABS Indicator Lamp-On Message - Each time the cluster receives an electronic ABS indicator lamp-ON message from the CAB, the ABS indicator will be illuminated. The indicator remains illuminated until the cluster receives a lamp-OFF message from the CAB, or until the ignition switch is turned to the OFF position, whichever occurs first. Communication Error - If the cluster receives no lamp-ON or lamp-OFF messages from the CAB for five consecutive message cycles, the ABS indicator is illuminated. The indicator remains illuminated until the cluster receives a valid message from the CAB, or until the ignition switch is turned to the OFF position, whichever occurs first. - Actuator Test - Each time the instrument cluster is put through the actuator test, the ABS indicator will be turned ON, then OFF again during the bulb check portion of the test to confirm the functionality of the LED and the cluster control circuitry. - ABS Diagnostic Test - The ABS indicator is blinked ON and OFF by lamp-ON and lamp-OFF messages from the CAB during the performance of the ABS diagnostic tests. The CAB continually monitors the ABS circuits and sensors to decide whether the system is in good operating condition. The CAB then sends the proper lamp-ON or lamp-OFF message to the ElectroMechanical Instrument Cluster (EMIC) (also known as the Cab Compartment Node/CCN). If the CAB sends a lamp-ON message after the bulb test, it indicates that the CAB has detected a system malfunction or that the ABS system has become ineffective. The CAB will store a Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) for any malfunction it detects. Each time the ABS indicator fails to light due to an open or short in the cluster ABS indicator circuit, the cluster sends a message notifying the CAB of the condition, then the instrument cluster and the CAB will each store a DTC. For proper diagnosis of the antilock brake system, the CAB, the EMIC, the CAN data bus or the electronic communication related to ABS indicator operation a diagnostic scan tool is required. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Locations Electronic Brake Control Module: Locations Component ID: 201 Component : MODULE-ANTI-LOCK BRAKES Connector: Name : MODULE-ANTI-LOCK BRAKES Color : # of pins : 46 Qualifier : (AWAL) Pin Circuit Description 1-2 A111 16DG/RD FUSED B(+) 3 D65 20WT/LG CAN C BUS (+) 4-5-6-- 7-8-9-10 - 11 - 12 B9 20DG/LG LEFT FRONT WHEEL SPEED SENSOR (+) 13 B8 20DG/TN LEFT FRONT WHEEL SPEED SENSOR (-) 14 B401 20DG/BR TRAILER TOW DAMPING RELAY CONTROL 15 - 16 Z107 16BK/DG GROUND 17 - 18 D64 20WT/LB CAN C BUS (-) 19 - 20 D465 20WT/GY DYNAMICS SENSOR HIGH DATA LINK 21 - 22 - 23 - 24 - 25 - 26 B7 20DG/VT RIGHT FRONT WHEEL SPEED SENSOR (+) 27 B6 20DG/WT RIGHT FRONT WHEEL SPEED SENSOR (-) 28 - 29 - 30 - 31 A107 12TN/RD FUSED B(+) 32 F960 20PK/LG FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) 33 - 34 D464 20WT/OR DYNAMICS SENSOR LOW DATA LINK Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 9562 35 - 36 - 37 - 38 - 39 - 40 - 41 B3 20DG/YL REAR WHEEL SPEED SENSOR (-) 41 B22 20DG/YL REAR WHEEL SPEED SENSOR (-) 42 B4 20DG/GY REAR WHEEL SPEED SENSOR (+) 42 B222 20DG/WT REAR WHEEL SPEED SENSOR (+) 43 B2 20DG/LB RIGHT REAR WHEEL SPEED SENSOR (+) 44 B1 20DG/OR RIGHT REAR WHEEL SPEED SENSOR (-) 45 Z127 12BK/DG GROUND 46 - Component Location - 32 Component Location - 30 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 9563 Connector: Name : MODULE-ANTI-LOCK BRAKES Color : BLACK # of pins : 14 Qualifier : (RWAL) Pin Circuit Description 1 B222 18DG/WT REAR WHEEL SPEED SENSOR (+) 2 D65 18WT/LG CAN C BUS (+) 3 D64 18WT/LB CAN C BUS (-) 4 F960 20PK/LG FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 9564 5 B9 18DG/LG LEFT FRONT WHEEL SPEED SENSOR (+) 6 Z107 16BK/DG GROUND 7 A111 16DG/RD FUSED B(+) 8 B22 18DG/YL REAR WHEEL SPEED SENSOR (-) 9-10 B8 18DG/TN LEFT FRONT WHEEL SPEED SENSOR (-) 11 - 12 - 13 - 14 - Component Location - 32 Component Location - 30 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 9565 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 9566 Electronic Brake Control Module: Diagrams Component ID: 201 Component : MODULE-ANTI-LOCK BRAKES Connector: Name : MODULE-ANTI-LOCK BRAKES Color : # of pins : 46 Qualifier : (AWAL) Pin Circuit Description 1-2 A111 16DG/RD FUSED B(+) 3 D65 20WT/LG CAN C BUS (+) 4-5-6-- 7-8-9-10 - 11 - 12 B9 20DG/LG LEFT FRONT WHEEL SPEED SENSOR (+) 13 B8 20DG/TN LEFT FRONT WHEEL SPEED SENSOR (-) 14 B401 20DG/BR TRAILER TOW DAMPING RELAY CONTROL 15 - 16 Z107 16BK/DG GROUND 17 - 18 D64 20WT/LB CAN C BUS (-) 19 - 20 D465 20WT/GY DYNAMICS SENSOR HIGH DATA LINK 21 - 22 - 23 - 24 - 25 - 26 B7 20DG/VT RIGHT FRONT WHEEL SPEED SENSOR (+) 27 B6 20DG/WT RIGHT FRONT WHEEL SPEED SENSOR (-) 28 - 29 - 30 - 31 A107 12TN/RD FUSED B(+) 32 F960 20PK/LG FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) 33 - 34 D464 20WT/OR DYNAMICS SENSOR LOW DATA LINK Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 9567 35 - 36 - 37 - 38 - 39 - 40 - 41 B3 20DG/YL REAR WHEEL SPEED SENSOR (-) 41 B22 20DG/YL REAR WHEEL SPEED SENSOR (-) 42 B4 20DG/GY REAR WHEEL SPEED SENSOR (+) 42 B222 20DG/WT REAR WHEEL SPEED SENSOR (+) 43 B2 20DG/LB RIGHT REAR WHEEL SPEED SENSOR (+) 44 B1 20DG/OR RIGHT REAR WHEEL SPEED SENSOR (-) 45 Z127 12BK/DG GROUND 46 - Component Location - 32 Component Location - 30 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 9568 Connector: Name : MODULE-ANTI-LOCK BRAKES Color : BLACK # of pins : 14 Qualifier : (RWAL) Pin Circuit Description 1 B222 18DG/WT REAR WHEEL SPEED SENSOR (+) 2 D65 18WT/LG CAN C BUS (+) 3 D64 18WT/LB CAN C BUS (-) 4 F960 20PK/LG FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 9569 5 B9 18DG/LG LEFT FRONT WHEEL SPEED SENSOR (+) 6 Z107 16BK/DG GROUND 7 A111 16DG/RD FUSED B(+) 8 B22 18DG/YL REAR WHEEL SPEED SENSOR (-) 9-10 B8 18DG/TN LEFT FRONT WHEEL SPEED SENSOR (-) 11 - 12 - 13 - 14 - Component Location - 32 Component Location - 30 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 9570 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Electronic Brake Control Module: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The Antilock Brake Module (ABM) (2) is mounted to the Hydraulic Control Unit (HCU) (3) and operates the ABS system. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 9573 Electronic Brake Control Module: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The ABM voltage source is through the ignition switch in the RUN position. The ABM contains a self check program that illuminates the ABS warning light when a system fault is detected. Faults are stored in a diagnostic program memory and are accessible with the scan tool. ABS faults remain in memory until cleared, or until after the vehicle is started approximately 50 times. Stored faults are not erased if the battery is disconnected. NOTE: If the ABM is being replaced with a new ABM is must be reprogrammed with the use of a scan tool. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Electronic Brake Control Module: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL 1. Remove the negative battery cable from the battery. 2. Pull up on the ABM harness connector release and remove connector. 3. Remove the ABM mounting bolts. 4. Remove the pump connector from the ABM. 5. Remove the ABM from the HCU. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 9576 Electronic Brake Control Module: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION NOTE: If the ABM is being replaced with a new ABM is must be reprogrammed with the use of a scan tool. 1. Install ABM to the HCU. 2. Install the pump connector to the ABM. 3. Install mounting bolts. Tighten to 2 Nm (16 in. lbs.). 4. Install the wiring harness connector to the ABM and push down on the release to secure the connector. 5. Install negative battery cable to the battery. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Hydraulic Control Assembly - Antilock Brakes > Component Information > Description and Operation > Electronic Variable Brake Proportioning Hydraulic Control Assembly - Antilock Brakes: Description and Operation Electronic Variable Brake Proportioning Description DESCRIPTION - ELECTRONIC VARIABLE BRAKE PROPORTIONING Vehicles equipped with ABS use electronic variable brake proportioning (EVBP) to balance front-to-rear braking. The EVBP is used in place of a rear proportioning valve. The EVBP system uses the ABS system to control the slip of the rear wheels in partial braking range. The braking force of the rear wheels is controlled electronically by using the inlet and outlet valves located in the integrated control unit (ICU). Operation OPERATION - ELECTRONIC VARIABLE BRAKE PROPORTIONING EVBP is able to decrease, hold and increase rear brake pressure without activating full ABS control. Upon entry into EVBP the inlet valve for the rear brake circuit is switched on so that the fluid supply from the master cylinder is shut off. In order to decrease the rear brake pressure, the outlet valve for the rear brake circuit is pulsed. This allows fluid to enter the low pressure accumulator (LPA) in the hydraulic control unit (HCU) resulting in a drop in fluid pressure to the rear brakes. In order to increase the rear brake pressure, the outlet valve is switched off and the inlet valve is pulsed. This increases the pressure to the rear brakes. The EVBP will remain functional during many ABS fault modes. If both the red BRAKE and amber ABS warning indicators are illuminated, the EVBP may not be functioning. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Hydraulic Control Assembly - Antilock Brakes > Component Information > Description and Operation > Electronic Variable Brake Proportioning > Page 9581 Hydraulic Control Assembly - Antilock Brakes: Description and Operation Hydraulic Control Unit (HCU) Description DESCRIPTION The HCU (3) consists of a valve body, pump motor, low pressure accumulators, inlet valves, outlet valves and noise attenuators. Operation OPERATION Accumulators in the valve body store extra fluid released to the system for ABS mode operation. The pump provides the fluid volume needed and is operated by a DC type motor. The motor is controlled by the ABM. The valves modulate brake pressure during antilock braking and are controlled by the ABM. The HCU provides three channel pressure control to the front and rear brakes. One channel controls the rear wheel brakes in tandem. The two remaining channels control the front wheel brakes individually. During antilock braking, the solenoid valves are opened and closed as needed. During normal braking, the HCU solenoid valves and pump are not activated. The master cylinder and power booster operate the same as a vehicle without an ABS brake system. NOTE: The three modes mentioned below do occur but not necessarily in the order listed every time. During antilock braking, solenoid valve pressure modulation occurs in three stages, pressure increase, pressure hold, and pressure decrease. The valves are all contained in the valve body portion of the HCU. PRESSURE DECREASE The outlet valve is opened and the inlet valve is closed during the pressure decrease cycle. A pressure decrease cycle is initiated when speed sensor signals indicate high wheel slip at one or more wheels. At this point, the ABM closes the inlet then opens the outlet valve, which also opens the return circuit to the accumulators. Fluid pressure is allowed to bleed off (decrease) as needed to prevent wheel lock. Once the period of high wheel slip has ended, the ABM closes the outlet valve and begins a pressure increase or hold cycle as needed. PRESSURE HOLD Both solenoid valves are closed in the pressure hold cycle but only the inlet valve is energized. Fluid apply pressure in the control channel is maintained at a constant rate. The ABM maintains the hold cycle until sensor inputs indicate a pressure change is necessary. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Hydraulic Control Assembly - Antilock Brakes > Component Information > Description and Operation > Electronic Variable Brake Proportioning > Page 9582 PRESSURE INCREASE The inlet valve is open and the outlet valve is closed during the pressure increase cycle. The pressure increase cycle is used to reapply thew brakes. This cycle controls re-application of fluid apply pressure. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Hydraulic Control Assembly - Antilock Brakes > Component Information > Description and Operation > Electronic Variable Brake Proportioning > Page 9583 Hydraulic Control Assembly - Antilock Brakes: Description and Operation RWAL Valve Description DESCRIPTION Rear Wheel Antilock (RWAL) brake system is standard equipment on 1500 series vehicles. The RWAL brake system is designed to prevent rear wheel lock-up on virtually all types of road surfaces. RWAL braking is desirable because a vehicle which is stopped without locking the rear wheels will retain directional stability. This allows the driver to retain greater control of the vehicle during braking. The valve is located on the drivers side inner fender under the hood. The valve modulates hydraulic pressure to the rear brakes. The RWAL components include: - RWAL Valve(1) - Controller Antilock brake (CAB) - Rear Wheel Speed Sensor (WSS) Operation OPERATION When the brakes are applied, hydraulic fluid is routed from the master cylinder's secondary circuit to the RWAL valve. From there hydraulic fluid is routed to the rear brakes. The Controller Antilock Brake (CAB) contains an Electronic Variable Brake Proportioning (EVBP) control algorithm, which proportions the applied braking force to the rear wheels during braking. The EVBP function of the RWAL system takes the place of a conventional hydraulic proportioning valve. The CAB monitors the rear wheel speed through the rear wheel speed sensor and calculates an estimated vehicle deceleration. When an established deceleration threshold is exceeded, an isolation valve is closed to hold the applied brake pressure to the rear brakes constant. Upon further increases in the estimated vehicle deceleration, the isolation valve is selectively opened to increase rear brake pressure in proportion to the front brake pressure. If impending rear wheel lock-up is sensed, the CAB signals the RWAL valve to modulate hydraulic brake pressure to the rear wheels to prevent lock-up. NORMAL BRAKING Since the RWAL valve also performs the EVBP or proportioning function, vehicle deceleration under normal braking may be sufficient to trigger the EVBP function of the RWAL system without full RWAL activity as would normally occur during an impending rear wheel lock-up. As previously mentioned, the isolation valve is selectively closed and opened to increase rear brake pressure in proportion to the front brake pressure under EVBP control. Slight brake pedal pulsations may be noticed as the isolation valve is opened. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Hydraulic Control Assembly - Antilock Brakes > Component Information > Service and Repair > RWAL Valve Hydraulic Control Assembly - Antilock Brakes: Service and Repair RWAL Valve Removal REMOVAL 1. Disconnect the battery cables from the battery. 2. Remove the battery. 3. Disconnect the electrical harness connector. 4. Remove the brake lines from the RWAL valve (1). 5. Remove RWAL valve mounting nuts (2) and remove the RWAL valve (1). Installation INSTALLATION 1. Install RWAL valve (1) and Tighten the nuts (2) to 15 Nm (11 ft. lbs.). 2. Install the brake lines to the RWAL valve and tighten to 19 Nm (170 in. lbs.). 3. Install the electrical harness connector to the RWAL valve and secure the connector. 4. Install the battery. 5. Install the battery cables to the battery. 6. Bleed ABS brake system See: Brake Bleeding . Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Hydraulic Control Assembly - Antilock Brakes > Component Information > Service and Repair > RWAL Valve > Page 9586 Hydraulic Control Assembly - Antilock Brakes: Service and Repair Hydraulic Control unit (HCU) Installation INSTALLATION NOTE: If the ABM (2) is being replaced with a new ABM is must be reprogrammed with the use of a scan tool. 1. Install HCU/ABM (3) on the mounts to the battery tray (4) and Tighten the bolts to 15 Nm (11 ft. lbs.). 2. Install the brake lines to the HCU (3) and tighten to 19 Nm (170 in. lbs.). 3. Install the electrical harness connectors to the HCU/ABM (3) and push down on the release to secure the connectors. 4. Install the battery. 5. Install the battery cables to the battery. 6. Bleed ABS brake system See: Brake Bleeding . Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Hydraulic Control Assembly - Antilock Brakes > Component Information > Service and Repair > RWAL Valve > Page 9587 Hydraulic Control Assembly - Antilock Brakes: Service and Repair Hydraulic Control unit (HCU) Removal REMOVAL 1. Disconnect the battery cables from the battery. 2. Remove the battery. 3. Disconnect the electrical harness connectors. 4. Remove the brake lines from the HCU (3). 5. Remove HCU/ABM mounting bolts (1) and remove the HCU/ABM (3) from the battery tray (4). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Lateral Accelerometer > Component Information > Locations Lateral Accelerometer: Locations Component ID: 408 Component : SENSOR-DYNAMICS Connector: Name : SENSOR-DYNAMICS Color : # of pins : 6 Pin Circuit Description 1 F960 20PK/LG FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) 2 D465 20WT/GY DYNAMICS SENSOR HIGH DATA LINK 3 D464 20WT/OR DYNAMICS SENSOR LOW DATA LINK 4-5-6 Z608 20BK/LG GROUND Component Location - 52 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Lateral Accelerometer > Component Information > Locations > Page 9591 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Lateral Accelerometer > Component Information > Locations > Page 9592 Lateral Accelerometer: Diagrams Component ID: 408 Component : SENSOR-DYNAMICS Connector: Name : SENSOR-DYNAMICS Color : # of pins : 6 Pin Circuit Description 1 F960 20PK/LG FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) 2 D465 20WT/GY DYNAMICS SENSOR HIGH DATA LINK 3 D464 20WT/OR DYNAMICS SENSOR LOW DATA LINK 4-5-6 Z608 20BK/LG GROUND Component Location - 52 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Lateral Accelerometer > Component Information > Locations > Page 9593 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Lateral Accelerometer > Component Information > Locations > Page 9594 Lateral Accelerometer: Description and Operation DESCRIPTION The Yaw Rate and Lateral Acceleration Sensors are housed into one unit known as the Dynamics Sensor. The sensor is used to measure side-to-side (Lateral) motion and vehicle rotational sensing (how fast the vehicle is turning - Yaw). Yaw and Lateral Acceleration Sensors cannot be serviced separately. The entire Dynamics Sensor must be replaced when necessary. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Lateral Accelerometer > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Lateral Accelerometer: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL 1. Remove the center bezel lower trim panel. 2. Remove the cup holder See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Drink Holders/Service and Repair/Removal . 3. Disconnect the electrical connector (3) for the dynamics sensor (2). 4. Remove the 3 mounting nuts (1) for the sensor (2). 5. Remove the sensor (2) from the vehicle. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Lateral Accelerometer > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 9597 Lateral Accelerometer: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION 1. Install the dynamics sensor on the mounting studs (2). 2. Install the mounting nuts (1) Tighten to 24 Nm (200 in. lbs.). 3. Reconnect the electrical connector (3). 4. Install the cup holder. See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Drink Holders/Service and Repair/Installation . 5. Install the center bezel lower trim panel. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Steering Angle Sensor, Traction Control > Component Information > Locations Steering Angle Sensor: Locations Component ID: 440 Component : SENSOR-STEERING ANGLE Connector: Name : SENSOR-STEERING ANGLE Color : BLACK # of pins : 4 Pin Circuit Description 1 D65 20WT/LG CAN C BUS (+) 2 Z455 20BK/PK GROUND 3 D64 20WT/LB CAN C BUS (-) 4 F202 20PK/GY FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) Component Location - 42 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Steering Angle Sensor, Traction Control > Component Information > Locations > Page 9601 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Steering Angle Sensor, Traction Control > Component Information > Locations > Page 9602 Steering Angle Sensor: Diagrams Component ID: 440 Component : SENSOR-STEERING ANGLE Connector: Name : SENSOR-STEERING ANGLE Color : BLACK # of pins : 4 Pin Circuit Description 1 D65 20WT/LG CAN C BUS (+) 2 Z455 20BK/PK GROUND 3 D64 20WT/LB CAN C BUS (-) 4 F202 20PK/GY FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) Component Location - 42 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Steering Angle Sensor, Traction Control > Component Information > Locations > Page 9603 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Traction Control Indicator Lamp > Component Information > Description and Operation > Electronic Stability Program/Brake Assist System Indicator Traction Control Indicator Lamp: Description and Operation Electronic Stability Program/Brake Assist System Indicator Description DESCRIPTION An Electronic Stability Program/Brake Assist System (ESP/BAS) indicator is only found in the instrument clusters for vehicles equipped with a gasoline engine. However, on vehicles not equipped with the optional ESP/BAS, this indicator is electronically disabled. This indicator is located in the lower portion of the tachometer dial face in the instrument cluster overlay. The ESP/BAS indicator consists of a stencil-like cutout of the text ESP BAS in the opaque layer of the instrument cluster overlay. The dark outer layer of the overlay prevents the indicator from being clearly visible when it is not illuminated. An amber Light Emitting Diode (LED) behind the cutout in the opaque layer of the overlay causes the indicator to appear in amber through the translucent outer layer of the overlay when it is illuminated from behind by the LED, which is soldered onto the instrument cluster electronic circuit board. The ESP/BAS indicator is serviced as a unit with the instrument cluster. Operation OPERATION The ESP/BAS indicator gives an indication to the vehicle operator when a problem has been detected in the Electronic Stability Program (ESP)/Brake Assist System (BAS). This indicator is controlled by a transistor on the instrument cluster circuit board based upon cluster programming and electronic messages received by the cluster from the Controller Antilock Brake (CAB) and the Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) over the Controller Area Network (CAN) data bus. The ESP/BAS indicator Light Emitting Diode (LED) is completely controlled by the instrument cluster logic circuit, and that logic will only allow this indicator to operate when the instrument cluster receives a battery current input on the fused ignition switch output (run-start) circuit. Therefore, the LED will always be OFF when the ignition switch is in any position except ON or START. The LED only illuminates when it is provided a path to ground by the instrument cluster transistor. The instrument cluster will turn ON the ESP/BAS indicator for the following reasons: - Bulb Test - Each time the ignition switch is turned to the ON position the ESP/BAS indicator is illuminated for about four seconds as a bulb test. - ESP/BAS Indicator Lamp-On Message - Each time the cluster receives an electronic ESP/BAS indicator lamp-ON message from the CAB or the TIPM, the ESP/BAS indicator will be illuminated. The indicator remains illuminated until the cluster receives a lamp-OFF message from the CAB or TIPM, or until the ignition switch is turned to the OFF position, whichever occurs first. - Actuator Test - Each time the cluster is put through the actuator test, the ESP/BAS indicator will be turned ON, then OFF again during the bulb check portion of the test to confirm the functionality of the LED and the cluster control circuitry. The CAB and TIPM continually monitor the ESP/BAS system circuits and sensors to decide whether the system is in good operating condition and the proper outputs to the components of the system. The CAB or TIPM then sends the proper lamp-ON or lamp-OFF message to the ElectroMechanical Instrument Cluster (EMIC) (also known as the Cab Compartment Node/CCN). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Traction Control Indicator Lamp > Component Information > Description and Operation > Electronic Stability Program/Brake Assist System Indicator > Page 9608 For proper diagnosis of the ESP/BAS system, the CAB, the TIPM, the EMIC, the CAN data bus or the electronic communication related to ESP/BAS indicator operation a diagnostic scan tool is required. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Traction Control Indicator Lamp > Component Information > Description and Operation > Electronic Stability Program/Brake Assist System Indicator > Page 9609 Traction Control Indicator Lamp: Description and Operation Traction Control Indicator Description DESCRIPTION An Electronic Stability Program/Brake Assist System (ESP/BAS)/Traction Control System (TCS) traction control indicator is only found in the instrument clusters for vehicles equipped with a gasoline engine. However, on vehicles not equipped with the optional ESP/BAS/TCS, this indicator is electronically disabled. This indicator is located in the lower portion of the tachometer dial face in the instrument cluster overlay. The traction control indicator consists of a stencil-like cutout of the International Control and Display Symbol icon for Stability - Anti-Spin in the opaque layer of the instrument cluster overlay. The dark outer layer of the overlay prevents the indicator from being clearly visible when it is not illuminated. An amber Light Emitting Diode (LED) behind the cutout in the opaque layer of the overlay causes the indicator to appear in amber through the translucent outer layer of the overlay when it is illuminated from behind by the LED, which is soldered onto the instrument cluster electronic circuit board. The traction control indicator is serviced as a unit with the instrument cluster. Operation OPERATION The traction control indicator gives an indication to the vehicle operator when the Electronic Stability Program (ESP)/Brake Assist System (BAS)/Traction Control System (TCS) has been activated. This indicator is controlled by a transistor on the instrument cluster circuit board based upon cluster programming and electronic messages received by the cluster from the Controller Antilock Brake (CAB) over the Controller Area Network (CAN) data bus. The traction control indicator is completely controlled by the instrument cluster logic circuit, and that logic will only allow this indicator to operate when the instrument cluster receives a battery current input on the fused ignition switch output (run-start) circuit. Therefore, the indicator will always be OFF when the ignition switch is in any position except ON or START. The indicator only illuminates when it is provided a path to ground by the instrument cluster transistor. The instrument cluster will turn ON the traction control indicator for the following reasons: - Bulb Test - Each time the ignition switch is turned to the ON position the traction control indicator is illuminated for about four seconds as a bulb test. The entire bulb test is a function of the CAB. - Traction Control Indicator Lamp-On Message - Each time the cluster receives an electronic traction control indicator lamp-ON message from the CAB indicating that the ESP/BAS/TCS has been activated, the traction control indicator will be illuminated. The indicator remains illuminated until the cluster receives a lamp-OFF message from the CAB, or until the ignition switch is turned to the OFF position, whichever occurs first. - Actuator Test - Each time the cluster is put through the actuator test, the traction control indicator will be turned ON, then OFF again during the bulb check portion of the test to confirm the functionality of the LED and the cluster control circuitry. The CAB continually monitors the status of the inputs to the ESP/BAS/TCS systems to determine the proper outputs to the components of the Antilock Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Traction Control Indicator Lamp > Component Information > Description and Operation > Electronic Stability Program/Brake Assist System Indicator > Page 9610 Brake System (ABS). The CAB then sends the proper lamp-ON or lamp-OFF message to the ElectroMechanical Instrument Cluster (EMIC) (also known as the Cab Compartment Node/CCN). For further diagnosis of the traction control indicator or the instrument cluster circuitry that controls the indicator, Refer to appropriate testing. For proper diagnosis of the ESP/BAS/TCS, the CAB, the EMIC, the CAN data bus or the electronic communication related to traction control indicator operation a diagnostic scan tool is required. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Traction Control Switch > Component Information > Locations Traction Control Switch: Locations Component ID: 486 Component : SWITCH-ESP Connector: Name : SWITCH-ESP Color : # of pins : 6 Pin Circuit Description 1 Z936 20BK/DG GROUND 2 E11 20OR/DB PANEL LAMPS DRIVER 3 B46 20DG/WT ESP ON/OFF SENSE 4 G94 20VT/DB SENSOR GROUND 5-6-Component Location - 47 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Traction Control Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 9614 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Traction Control Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 9615 Traction Control Switch: Diagrams Component ID: 486 Component : SWITCH-ESP Connector: Name : SWITCH-ESP Color : # of pins : 6 Pin Circuit Description 1 Z936 20BK/DG GROUND 2 E11 20OR/DB PANEL LAMPS DRIVER 3 B46 20DG/WT ESP ON/OFF SENSE 4 G94 20VT/DB SENSOR GROUND 5-6-Component Location - 47 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Traction Control Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 9616 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Traction Control Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 9617 Traction Control Switch: Description and Operation DESCRIPTION The ESP switch is located just below the heater and air conditioner controls in the center stack area of the instrument panel. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Traction Control Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Traction Control Switch: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL 1. Remove the radio trim panel (1). 2. Disconnect the electrical connectors from the radio trim panel. 3. Remove the ESP switch (1) from the switch bank (2). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Traction Control Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 9620 Traction Control Switch: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION 1. Install the new switch (1) in the switch bank (2). 2. Reconnect the electrical connectors for the radio trim panel. 3. Install the radio trim panel (1). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Wheel Speed-ABS-Left Front Wheel Speed Sensor: Locations Sensor-Wheel Speed-ABS-Left Front Component ID: 448 Component : SENSOR-WHEEL SPEED-ABS-LEFT FRONT Connector: Name : SENSOR-WHEEL SPEED-ABS-LEFT FRONT Color : # of pins : 2 Pin Circuit Description 1 B9 20DG/LG LEFT FRONT WHEEL SPEED SENSOR (+) Pin Circuit Description 1 B9 18DG/LG LEFT FRONT WHEEL SPEED SENSOR (+) 2 B8 20DG/TN LEFT FRONT WHEEL SPEED SENSOR (-) 2 B8 18DG/TN LEFT FRONT WHEEL SPEED SENSOR (-) Component Location - 38 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Wheel Speed-ABS-Left Front > Page 9625 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Wheel Speed-ABS-Left Front > Page 9626 Wheel Speed Sensor: Locations Sensor-Wheel Speed-ABS-Rear Component ID: 450 Component : SENSOR-WHEEL SPEED-ABS-REAR Connector: Name : SENSOR-WHEEL SPEED-ABS-REAR Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (EXCEPT ESP) Pin Circuit Description 1 B22 18DG/YL REAR WHEEL SPEED SENSOR (-) 2 B222 18DG/WT REAR WHEEL SPEED SENSOR (+) Component Location - 70 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Wheel Speed-ABS-Left Front > Page 9627 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Wheel Speed-ABS-Left Front > Page 9628 Wheel Speed Sensor: Locations Sensor-Wheel Speed-ABS-Left Rear Component ID: 449 Component : SENSOR-WHEEL SPEED-ABS-LEFT REAR Connector: Name : SENSOR-WHEEL SPEED-ABS-LEFT REAR Color : # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (ESP) Pin Circuit Description 1 B3 18DG/YL REAR WHEEL SPEED SENSOR (-) 2 B4 18DG/GY REAR WHEEL SPEED SENSOR (+) Component Location - 70 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Wheel Speed-ABS-Left Front > Page 9629 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Wheel Speed-ABS-Left Front > Page 9630 Wheel Speed Sensor: Locations Sensor-Wheel Speed-ABS-Right Front Component ID: 451 Component : SENSOR-WHEEL SPEED-ABS-RIGHT FRONT Connector: Name : SENSOR-WHEEL SPEED-ABS-RIGHT FRONT Color : # of pins : 2 Pin Circuit Description 1 B7 20DG/VT RIGHT FRONT WHEEL SPEED SENSOR (+) 2 B6 20DG/WT RIGHT FRONT WHEEL SPEED SENSOR (-) Component Location - 29 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Wheel Speed-ABS-Left Front > Page 9631 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Wheel Speed-ABS-Left Front > Page 9632 Wheel Speed Sensor: Locations Sensor-Wheel Speed-ABS-Right Rear Component ID: 452 Component : SENSOR-WHEEL SPEED-ABS-RIGHT REAR Connector: Name : SENSOR-WHEEL SPEED-ABS-RIGHT REAR Color : # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (ESP) Pin Circuit Description 1 B1 18DG/OR RIGHT REAR WHEEL SPEED SENSOR (-) 2 B2 18DG/LB RIGHT REAR WHEEL SPEED SENSOR (+) Component Location - 70 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Wheel Speed-ABS-Left Front > Page 9633 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Wheel Speed-ABS-Left Front Wheel Speed Sensor: Diagrams Sensor-Wheel Speed-ABS-Left Front Component ID: 448 Component : SENSOR-WHEEL SPEED-ABS-LEFT FRONT Connector: Name : SENSOR-WHEEL SPEED-ABS-LEFT FRONT Color : # of pins : 2 Pin Circuit Description 1 B9 20DG/LG LEFT FRONT WHEEL SPEED SENSOR (+) Pin Circuit Description 1 B9 18DG/LG LEFT FRONT WHEEL SPEED SENSOR (+) 2 B8 20DG/TN LEFT FRONT WHEEL SPEED SENSOR (-) 2 B8 18DG/TN LEFT FRONT WHEEL SPEED SENSOR (-) Component Location - 38 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Wheel Speed-ABS-Left Front > Page 9636 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Wheel Speed-ABS-Left Front > Page 9637 Wheel Speed Sensor: Diagrams Sensor-Wheel Speed-ABS-Rear Component ID: 450 Component : SENSOR-WHEEL SPEED-ABS-REAR Connector: Name : SENSOR-WHEEL SPEED-ABS-REAR Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (EXCEPT ESP) Pin Circuit Description 1 B22 18DG/YL REAR WHEEL SPEED SENSOR (-) 2 B222 18DG/WT REAR WHEEL SPEED SENSOR (+) Component Location - 70 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Wheel Speed-ABS-Left Front > Page 9638 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Wheel Speed-ABS-Left Front > Page 9639 Wheel Speed Sensor: Diagrams Sensor-Wheel Speed-ABS-Left Rear Component ID: 449 Component : SENSOR-WHEEL SPEED-ABS-LEFT REAR Connector: Name : SENSOR-WHEEL SPEED-ABS-LEFT REAR Color : # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (ESP) Pin Circuit Description 1 B3 18DG/YL REAR WHEEL SPEED SENSOR (-) 2 B4 18DG/GY REAR WHEEL SPEED SENSOR (+) Component Location - 70 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Wheel Speed-ABS-Left Front > Page 9640 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Wheel Speed-ABS-Left Front > Page 9641 Wheel Speed Sensor: Diagrams Sensor-Wheel Speed-ABS-Right Front Component ID: 451 Component : SENSOR-WHEEL SPEED-ABS-RIGHT FRONT Connector: Name : SENSOR-WHEEL SPEED-ABS-RIGHT FRONT Color : # of pins : 2 Pin Circuit Description 1 B7 20DG/VT RIGHT FRONT WHEEL SPEED SENSOR (+) 2 B6 20DG/WT RIGHT FRONT WHEEL SPEED SENSOR (-) Component Location - 29 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Wheel Speed-ABS-Left Front > Page 9642 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Wheel Speed-ABS-Left Front > Page 9643 Wheel Speed Sensor: Diagrams Sensor-Wheel Speed-ABS-Right Rear Component ID: 452 Component : SENSOR-WHEEL SPEED-ABS-RIGHT REAR Connector: Name : SENSOR-WHEEL SPEED-ABS-RIGHT REAR Color : # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (ESP) Pin Circuit Description 1 B1 18DG/OR RIGHT REAR WHEEL SPEED SENSOR (-) 2 B2 18DG/LB RIGHT REAR WHEEL SPEED SENSOR (+) Component Location - 70 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Wheel Speed-ABS-Left Front > Page 9644 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Wheel Speed Sensor: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The ABS brake system uses 3 wheel speed sensors. A sensor is mounted to each front hub/bearings. The third sensor is mounted on top of the rear axle differential housing. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 9647 Wheel Speed Sensor: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The Wheel Speed Sensor consists of a magnet (1) surrounded by windings from a single strand of wire (5). The sensor sends a small AC signal to the ABM. This signal is generated by magnetic induction. The magnetic induction is created when a toothed sensor ring (exciter ring or tone wheel) (4) passes the stationary magnetic WSS. When the ring gear is rotated, the exciter ring (4) passes the tip of the WSS. As the exciter ring tooth approaches the tip of the WSS, the magnetic lines of force expand, causing the magnetic field to cut across the sensor's windings (5). This, in turn causes current to flow through the WSS circuit in one direction. When the exciter ring tooth moves away from the sensor tip, the magnetic lines of force collapse cutting the winding in the opposite direction. This causes the current to flow in the opposite direction. Every time a tooth of the exciter ring passes the tip of the WSS, an AC signal is generated current. Each AC signal (positive to negative signal or squarewave) is interpreted by the ABM. It then compares the frequency of the sinewave to a time value to calculate vehicle speed. The ABM continues to monitor the frequency to determine a deceleration rate that would indicate a possible wheel-locking tendency. The signal strength of any magnetic induction sensor is directly affected by: - Magnetic field strength; the stronger the magnetic field, the stronger the signal - Number of windings in the sensor; more windings provide a stronger signal - Exciter ring speed; the faster the exciter ring/tone wheel rotates, the stronger the signal will be - Distance (3) "air gap" between the exciter ring teeth and WSS; the closer the WSS is to the exciter ring/tone wheel, the stronger the signal will be. The WSS is not adjustable. A clearance specification has been established for manufacturing tolerances. If the clearance is not within these specifications, then either the WSS or other components may be damaged. The clearance between the WSS and the exciter ring is 0.005 0.050 in. The assembly plant performs a "Rolls Test" on every vehicle that leaves the assembly plant. One of the test performed is a test of the WSS. To properly test the sensor, the assembly plant connects test equipment to the Data Link Connector (DLC). This connector is located to the right of the steering column and attached to the lower portion of the instrument panel. The rolls test terminal is spliced to the WSS circuit. The vehicle is then driven on a set of rollers and the WSS output is monitored for proper operation. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 9648 Wheel Speed Sensor: Testing and Inspection REAR WHEEL ANTILOCK Diagnosis of base brake conditions which are mechanical in nature should be performed first. This includes brake noise, lack of power assist, parking brake, or vehicle vibration during normal braking. The RWAL brake system performs several self-tests every time the ignition switch is turned on and the vehicle is driven. The CAB monitors the system inputs and outputs circuits to verify the system is operating properly. If the CAB senses a malfunction in the system it will set a DTC into memory and trigger the warning lamp. NOTE: A scan tool is used to diagnose the RWAL system. For test procedures refer to the ABS Electrical Diagnostic Section. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Wheel Speed Sensor - Removal Wheel Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Front Wheel Speed Sensor - Removal Removal REMOVAL 1. Remove the front rotor See: Disc Brake System/Brake Rotor/Disc/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Brake Rotor - Removal . 2. Remove the wheel speed sensor mounting bolt (1) from the hub (3). 3. Remove the wheel speed sensor (2) from the hub (3). 4. Remove the wiring from the clips and disconnect the electrical connector. 4500 & 5500 4500 & 5500 1. Remove the front rotor See: Disc Brake System/Brake Rotor/Disc/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Brake Rotor - Removal . 2. Remove the wheel speed sensor mounting bolt (1) from the hub. 3. Remove the wheel speed sensor (2) from the hub. 4. Remove the wiring from the clips and disconnect the electrical connector. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Wheel Speed Sensor - Removal > Page 9651 Wheel Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Front Wheel Speed Sensor - Installation Installation INSTALLATION 1. Install the wiring to the clips and Reconnect the electrical connector. 2. Install the wheel speed sensor (2) to the hub (3). 3. Install the wheel speed sensor mounting bolt (1) to the hub (3). Tighten the bolt to 21 Nm (190 in. lbs.). 4. Install the front rotor and brake caliper assembly See: Disc Brake System/Brake Rotor/Disc/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Brake Rotor - Installation . 4500 & 5500 4500 & 5500 1. Install the wiring to the clips and Reconnect the electrical connector. 2. Install the wheel speed sensor (2) to the hub. 3. Install the wheel speed sensor mounting bolt (1) to the hub. Tighten the bolt to 13 Nm (110 in. lbs.). 4. Install the front rotor and brake caliper assembly See: Disc Brake System/Brake Rotor/Disc/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Brake Rotor - Installation . Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Wheel Speed Sensor - Removal > Page 9652 Wheel Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Rear Wheel Speed Sensor - Removal RWAL REAR WHEEL SPEED SENSOR (RWAL) 1. Raise the vehicle on a hoist. 2. Remove the brake line mounting nut and remove the brake line from the sensor stud. 3. Remove the mounting stud (2) from the sensor and shield. 4. Remove the sensor (1) and shield from the differential housing (3). 5. Disconnect the sensor wire harness and remove the sensor (1). ESP REAR WHEEL SPEED SENSOR (ESP) 1. Raise the vehicle on a hoist. 2. Disconnect the wheel speed sensor electrical connector (3). 3. Remove the mounting bolt (1) from the sensor (4). 4. Remove the sensor (4) from the brake caliper adapter (2). 4500 & 5500 REAR WHEEL SPEED SENSOR - 4500 & 5500 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Wheel Speed Sensor - Removal > Page 9653 1. Raise the vehicle on a hoist. 2. Disconnect the sensor wire harness (1). 3. Remove the mounting bolt (3). 4. Remove the sensor (4) from the differential housing. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Wheel Speed Sensor - Removal > Page 9654 Wheel Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Rear Wheel Speed Sensor - Installation RWAL REAR WHEEL SPEED SENSOR (RWAL) 1. Connect the harness to the sensor. Be sure the seal is securely in place between the sensor and the wiring connector. 2. Install the O-ring on the sensor (if removed). 3. Insert the sensor (1) in the differential housing (3). 4. Install the sensor shield. 5. Install the sensor mounting stud (2) and tighten to 24 Nm (200 in. lbs.). 6. Install the brake line on the sensor stud (2)and install the nut. 7. Lower the vehicle. ESP REAR WHEEL SPEED SENSOR (ESP) 1. Insert the wheel speed sensor (4) in the brake caliper adapter (2). 2. Install the sensor mounting bolt (1) and tighten to 24 Nm (200 in. lbs.). 3. Reconnect the electrical wiring connector (3) to the sensor (4). 4. Lower the vehicle. 4500 & 5500 REAR WHEEL SPEED SENSOR - 4500 & 5500 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Wheel Speed Sensor - Removal > Page 9655 1. Install the O-ring on the sensor (if removed). 2. Insert the sensor (4) in the differential housing. 3. Install the sensor mounting bolt (3) and tighten to 24 Nm (200 in. lbs.). 4. Connect the harness (1) to the sensor (4). Be sure the seal is securely in place between the sensor and the wiring connector. 5. Lower the vehicle. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Yaw Rate Sensor > Component Information > Locations Yaw Rate Sensor: Locations Component ID: 408 Component : SENSOR-DYNAMICS Connector: Name : SENSOR-DYNAMICS Color : # of pins : 6 Pin Circuit Description 1 F960 20PK/LG FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) 2 D465 20WT/GY DYNAMICS SENSOR HIGH DATA LINK 3 D464 20WT/OR DYNAMICS SENSOR LOW DATA LINK 4-5-6 Z608 20BK/LG GROUND Component Location - 52 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Yaw Rate Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 9659 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Yaw Rate Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 9660 Yaw Rate Sensor: Diagrams Component ID: 408 Component : SENSOR-DYNAMICS Connector: Name : SENSOR-DYNAMICS Color : # of pins : 6 Pin Circuit Description 1 F960 20PK/LG FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) 2 D465 20WT/GY DYNAMICS SENSOR HIGH DATA LINK 3 D464 20WT/OR DYNAMICS SENSOR LOW DATA LINK 4-5-6 Z608 20BK/LG GROUND Component Location - 52 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Yaw Rate Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 9661 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Yaw Rate Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 9662 Yaw Rate Sensor: Description and Operation DESCRIPTION The Yaw Rate and Lateral Acceleration Sensors are housed into one unit known as the Dynamics Sensor. The sensor is used to measure side-to-side (Lateral) motion and vehicle rotational sensing (how fast the vehicle is turning - Yaw). Yaw and Lateral Acceleration Sensors cannot be serviced separately. The entire Dynamics Sensor must be replaced when necessary. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Yaw Rate Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Yaw Rate Sensor: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL 1. Remove the center bezel lower trim panel. 2. Remove the cup holder See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Drink Holders/Service and Repair/Removal . 3. Disconnect the electrical connector (3) for the dynamics sensor (2). 4. Remove the 3 mounting nuts (1) for the sensor (2). 5. Remove the sensor (2) from the vehicle. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Yaw Rate Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 9665 Yaw Rate Sensor: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION 1. Install the dynamics sensor on the mounting studs (2). 2. Install the mounting nuts (1) Tighten to 24 Nm (200 in. lbs.). 3. Reconnect the electrical connector (3). 4. Install the cup holder. See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Drink Holders/Service and Repair/Installation . 5. Install the center bezel lower trim panel. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Bleeding > System Information > Service and Repair > Master Cylinder Bleeding Brake Bleeding: Service and Repair Master Cylinder Bleeding MASTER CYLINDER BLEEDING A new master cylinder should be bled before installation on the vehicle. Required bleeding tools include bleed tubes and a wood dowel to stroke the pistons. Bleed tubes can be fabricated from brake line. 1. Mount master cylinder in vise. 2. Attach bleed tubes to cylinder outlet ports (1). Then position each tube end into reservoir (2). 3. Fill reservoir with fresh brake fluid. 4. Press cylinder pistons inward with wood dowel. Then release pistons and allow them to return under spring pressure. Continue bleeding operations until air bubbles are no longer visible in fluid. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Bleeding > System Information > Service and Repair > Master Cylinder Bleeding > Page 9670 Brake Bleeding: Service and Repair ABS Brake Bleeding ABS BRAKE BLEEDING ABS system bleeding requires conventional bleeding methods plus use of a scan tool. The procedure involves performing a base brake bleeding, followed by use of the scan tool to cycle and bleed the HCU pump and solenoids. A second base brake bleeding procedure is then required to remove any air remaining in the system. 1. Perform base brake bleeding, OR . 2. Connect scan tool to the Data Link Connector. 3. Select ANTILOCK BRAKES, followed by MISCELLANEOUS, then ABS BRAKES. Follow the instructions displayed. When scan tool displays TEST COMPLETE, disconnect scan tool and proceed. 4. Perform base brake bleeding a second time, OR . 5. Top off master cylinder fluid level and verify proper brake operation before moving vehicle. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Bleeding > System Information > Service and Repair > Master Cylinder Bleeding > Page 9671 Brake Bleeding: Service and Repair Base Brakes - Manual Bleeding MANUAL BLEEDING Use Mopar brake fluid, or an equivalent quality fluid meeting SAE J1703-F and DOT 3 standards only. Use fresh, clean fluid from a sealed container at all times. 1. Remove reservoir filler caps and fill reservoir. 2. If calipers were overhauled, open all caliper bleed screws. Then close each bleed screw as fluid starts to drip from it. Top off master cylinder reservoir once more before proceeding. 3. Attach one end of bleed hose (1) to bleed screw and insert opposite end in glass container (2) partially filled with brake fluid. Be sure end of bleed hose is immersed in fluid. NOTE: Bleed procedure should be in this order (1) Right rear (2) Left rear (3) Right front (4) Left front. 4. Open up bleeder, then have a helper press down the brake pedal. Once the pedal is down close the bleeder. Repeat bleeding until fluid stream is clear and free of bubbles. Then move to the next wheel. 5. Before moving the vehicle verify the pedal is firm and not mushy. 6. Top off the brake fluid and install the reservoir cap. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Bleeding > System Information > Service and Repair > Master Cylinder Bleeding > Page 9672 Brake Bleeding: Service and Repair Base Brakes - Pressure Bleeding PRESSURE BLEEDING Use Mopar brake fluid, or an equivalent quality fluid meeting SAE J1703-F and DOT 3 standards only. Use fresh, clean fluid from a sealed container at all times. Follow the manufacturers instructions carefully when using pressure equipment. Do not exceed the tank manufacturers pressure recommendations. Generally, a tank pressure of 15-20 psi is sufficient for bleeding. Fill the bleeder tank with recommended fluid and purge air from the tank lines before bleeding. Do not pressure bleed without a proper master cylinder adapter. The wrong adapter can lead to leakage, or drawing air back into the system. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Bleeding > System Information > Service and Repair > Master Cylinder Bleeding > Page 9673 Brake Bleeding: Service and Repair Booster-Hydro-Boost Brake BLEEDING The hydraulic booster is generally self-bleeding, this procedure will normally bleed the air from the booster. Normal driving and operation of the unit will remove any remaining trapped air. 1. Fill power steering pump reservoir. 2. Disconnect fuel shutdown relay and crank the engine for several seconds. 3. Check fluid level and add if necessary. 4. Connect fuel shutdown relay and start the engine. 5. Turn the steering wheel slowly from lock to lock twice. 6. Stop the engine and discharge the accumulator by depressing the brake pedal 5 times. 7. Start the engine and turn the steering wheel slowly from lock to lock twice. 8. Turn off the engine and check fluid level and add if necessary. NOTE: If fluid foaming occurs, wait for foam to dissipate and repeat steps 7 and 8. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Pedal Assy > Component Information > Description and Operation > Adjustable Pedals Brake Pedal Assy: Description and Operation Adjustable Pedals DESCRIPTION The Adjustable Pedals System (APS) is designed to enable the fore and aft repositioning of the brake and accelerator pedals. This results in improved ergonomics in relation to the steering wheel for taller and shorter drivers. Being able to adjust the pedal positions also allows the driver to set steering wheel tilt and seat position to the most comfortable position. The position of the brake and accelerator pedals can be adjusted without compromising safety or comfort in actuating the pedals. Change of pedal position is accomplished by means of a motor driven screw. Operating the adjustable pedal switch activates the pedal drive motor (1). The pedal drive motor turns a screw that changes the position of the brake and accelerator pedals. The pedal can be moved rearward (closer to the driver) or forward (away from driver). The brake pedal is moved on its drive screw to a position where the driver feels most comfortable. The accelerator pedal is moved at the same time and the same distance as the brake pedal. Neither the pedal drive motor (1) nor drive mechanism are subject to the mechanical stress of brake or accelerator application. - SYSTEM FEATURES: - Range of Adjustment: The pedals may be adjusted up to 3 in. (75 mm) - Pedal Adjustment Speed: 0.5 in./sec (12.5 mm/sec) - Pedal Adjustment Inhibitors: Pedal adjustment is inhibited when the vehicle is in reverse or when cruise control is activated. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Pedal Assy > Component Information > Description and Operation > Adjustable Pedals > Page 9678 Brake Pedal Assy: Description and Operation Pedal Description DESCRIPTION NOTE: The brake pedal is serviced as a complete assembly including accelerator pedal and the bracket. A suspended-type brake pedal is used. The pedal is attached to the pedal support bracket with a pivot shaft pin (3) and bushings (2). If the bushings (2) become dry a spray lubricant can be used to eliminate noises. The booster push rod is attached to the pedal with a clip (1). The pedal (4), bushings (2), pivot pin (3) and support bracket are not serviceable components. Operation OPERATION The brake pedal is attached to the booster push rod. When the pedal is depressed, the primary booster push rod is depressed which moves the booster secondary rod. The booster secondary rod depress the master cylinder piston. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Pedal Assy > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Brake Pedal Assy: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL NOTE: The brake pedal is serviced as a complete assembly including accelerator pedal and the bracket. 1. Disconnect the negative battery cable. 2. Remove the steering column opening cover See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Service and Repair/Steering Column Opening Cover - Removal . 3. Remove the brake lamp switch and discard See: Lighting and Horns/Brake Light Switch/Service and Repair/Removal . 4. On vehicles equipped with adjustable pedals. Disconnect the adjuster cable (1) to the pedal (2). 5. Remove the steering column See: Steering and Suspension/Steering/Steering Column/Service and Repair/Steering Column - Removal . 6. Remove the brake booster (5) See: Power Brake Assist/Vacuum Brake Booster/Service and Repair/Removal See: Power Brake Assist/Hydraulic Brake Booster/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Removal . 7. Disconnect the electrical connectors. 8. Remove the module mounting bolts. 9. Disconnect the accelerator pedal cable. 10. Remove the pedal assembly mounting nuts/fasteners (4). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Pedal Assy > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 9681 Brake Pedal Assy: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION 1. Install the pedal assembly (4) to the vehicle. 2. Install the mounting bolts (3) and tighten to 28 Nm (21 ft. lbs.). 3. Reconnect the accelerator cable (1) to the pedal (2). 4. Install the module mounting bolts and tighten to 38 Nm (28 ft. lbs.). 5. Reconnect the electrical connectors. 6. Install the brake booster See: Power Brake Assist/Vacuum Brake Booster/Service and Repair/Installation See: Power Brake Assist/Hydraulic Brake Booster/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Installation . 7. Install the steering column See: Steering and Suspension/Steering/Steering Column/Service and Repair/Steering Column - Installation . 8. Install a new brake lamp switch. See: Lighting and Horns/Brake Light Switch/Service and Repair/Removal . 9. On vehicles equipped with adjustable brake pedal. Reconnect the electrical connector to the motor and the adjuster cable at the pedal. 10. Install the steering column opening cover See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Service and Repair/Steering Column Opening Cover - Installation . 11. Reconnect the negative battery cable. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Warning Indicator > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Brake Warning Indicator: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION A brake indicator is standard equipment on all instrument clusters. This indicator is located near the lower edge of the instrument cluster, between the tachometer and the speedometer. The brake indicator consists of a stencil-like cutout of the word BRAKE and the International Control and Display Symbol icon for Brake Failure in the opaque layer of the instrument cluster overlay. The dark outer layer of the overlay prevents the indicator from being clearly visible when it is not illuminated. A red Light Emitting Diode (LED) behind the cutout in the opaque layer of the overlay causes the indicator to appear in red through the translucent outer layer of the overlay when it is illuminated from behind by the LED, which is soldered onto the instrument cluster electronic circuit board. The brake indicator is serviced as a unit with the instrument cluster. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Warning Indicator > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 9686 Brake Warning Indicator: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The brake indicator gives an indication to the vehicle operator when the parking brake is applied, when there are certain brake hydraulic system malfunctions as indicated by a low brake hydraulic fluid level condition, or when the brake fluid level switch is disconnected. The brake indicator can also give an indication when certain faults are detected in the Antilock Brake System (ABS). This indicator is controlled by a transistor on the instrument cluster circuit board based upon cluster programming, electronic messages received by the cluster from the Controller Antilock Brake (CAB) over the Controller Area Network (CAN) data bus, and a hard wired input from the park brake switch. The brake indicator Light Emitting Diode (LED) is completely controlled by the instrument cluster logic circuit, and that logic will only allow this indicator to operate when the instrument cluster receives a battery current input on the fused ignition switch output (run-start) circuit. Therefore, the LED will always be OFF when the ignition switch is in any position except ON or START. The LED only illuminates when it is provided a path to ground by the instrument cluster transistor. The instrument cluster will turn ON the brake indicator for the following reasons: - Bulb Test - Each time the ignition switch is turned to the ON position the brake indicator is illuminated for about four seconds as a bulb test. The entire bulb test is a function of the CAB. - Brake Indicator Lamp-On Message - Each time the cluster receives an electronic brake indicator lamp-ON message from the CAB, the brake indicator will be illuminated. The CAB may also send lamp-ON messages as feedback during ABS diagnostic procedures. The indicator remains illuminated until the cluster receives a lamp-OFF message from the CAB, or until the ignition switch is turned to the OFF position, whichever occurs first. - Park Brake Switch Input - Each time the cluster detects ground on the park brake switch sense circuit (park brake switch closed = park brake applied or not fully released) while the ignition switch is in the ON position, the brake indicator flashes ON and OFF. The indicator continues to flash until the park brake switch sense input to the cluster is an open circuit (park brake switch open = park brake fully released), or until the ignition switch is turned to the OFF position, whichever occurs first. - Actuator Test - Each time the instrument cluster is put through the actuator test, the brake indicator will be turned ON, then OFF again during the bulb check portion of the test to confirm the functionality of the LED and the cluster control circuitry. The park brake switch on the park brake pedal mechanism provides a hard wired ground input to the instrument cluster circuitry through the park brake switch sense circuit whenever the park brake is applied or not fully released. The CAB continually monitors the ABS system circuits and sensors, including the brake fluid level switch on the brake master cylinder reservoir, to decide whether the system is in good operating condition. The CAB then sends the proper lamp-ON or lamp-OFF message to the ElectroMechanical Instrument Cluster (EMIC) (also known as the Cab Compartment Node/CCN). If the CAB sends a lamp-ON message after the bulb test, it indicates that the CAB has detected a brake hydraulic system malfunction or that the ABS system has become ineffective. The CAB will store a Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) for any malfunction it detects. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Warning Indicator > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 9687 Brake Warning Indicator: Testing and Inspection BRAKE INDICATOR WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury on vehicles equipped with airbags, disable the Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, airbag, seat belt tensioner, impact sensor, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the SRS. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment. The hard wired park brake switch input to the ElectroMechanical Instrument Cluster (EMIC) (also known as the Cab Compartment Node/CCN) may be diagnosed using conventional diagnostic tools and procedures. Refer to the appropriate wiring information. The wiring information includes wiring diagrams, proper wire and connector repair procedures, details of wire harness routing and retention, connector pin-out information and location views for the various wire harness connectors, splices and grounds. However, conventional diagnostic methods may not prove conclusive in the diagnosis of the EMIC, the Controller Antilock Brake (CAB), the Controller Area Network (CAN) data bus, or the electronic message inputs also used by the EMIC to provide brake indicator operation. The most reliable, efficient, and accurate means to diagnose the EMIC, the CAB, the CAN data bus or the electronic communication related to brake indicator operation requires the use of a diagnostic scan tool. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Brake Caliper: Description and Operation Description Light Duty (LD) Calipers LIGHT DUTY (LD) CALIPERS NOTE: Petroleum based grease should not be used on any of the rubber components of the caliper, Use only Non-Petroleum based grease. The calipers are a dual piston type. The calipers are free to slide laterally, this allows continuous compensation for lining wear. Heavy Duty (HD) Calipers HEAVY DUTY (HD) CALIPERS The calipers are a dual piston type in the front & rear. The calipers are free to slide laterally, this allows continuous compensation for lining wear. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 9693 Brake Caliper: Description and Operation Operation DISC BRAKE CALIPER When the brakes are applied fluid pressure is exerted against the caliper piston (2). The fluid pressure is exerted equally and in all directions. This means pressure exerted against the caliper piston and within the caliper bore will be equal. Fluid pressure applied to the piston is transmitted directly to the inboard brake pad (5). This forces the pad lining against the inner surface of the disc brake rotor. At the same time, fluid pressure within the piston bore forces the caliper to slide inward on the mounting bolts. This action brings the outboard brake pad lining (6) into contact with the outer surface of the disc brake rotor. In summary, fluid pressure acting simultaneously on both piston and caliper, produces a strong clamping action. When sufficient force is applied, friction will attempt to stop the rotors from turning and bring the vehicle to a stop. Application and release of the brake pedal generates only a very slight movement of the caliper and piston. Upon release of the pedal, the caliper and piston return to a rest position. The brake pads do not retract an appreciable distance from the rotor. In fact, clearance is usually at, or close to zero. The reasons for this are to keep road debris from getting between the rotor and lining and in wiping the rotor surface clear each revolution. The caliper piston seal (4) controls the amount of piston (2) extension needed to compensate for normal lining wear. During brake application, the seal is deflected outward by fluid pressure and piston movement (6). When the brakes (and fluid pressure) are released, the seal relaxes and retracts the piston (3). The amount of piston retraction is determined by the amount of seal deflection. Generally the amount is just enough to maintain contact between the piston and inboard brake pad. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures Brake Caliper: Procedures INSPECTION - HEAVY DUTY (HD) The piston is made from a phenolic resin (plastic material) and should be smooth and clean. The piston must be replaced if cracked or scored. Do not attempt to restore a scored piston surface by sanding or polishing. CAUTION: If the caliper piston is replaced, install the same type of piston in the caliper. Never interchange phenolic resin and steel caliper pistons. The pistons, seals, seal grooves, caliper bore and piston tolerances are different. The bore can be lightly polished with a brake hone (3) to remove very minor surface imperfections. The caliper should be replaced if the bore is severely corroded, rusted, scored, or if polishing would increase bore diameter more than 0.025 mm (0.001 inch). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 9696 Brake Caliper: Removal and Replacement Rear REAR CAUTION: Never allow the disc brake caliper to hang from the brake hose. Damage to the brake hose will result. Provide a suitable support to hang the caliper securely. 1. Raise and support vehicle. 2. Remove the wheel and tire assembly. 3. Drain small amount of fluid from master cylinder brake reservoir with suction gun. 4. Remove the brake hose banjo bolt and discard the copper washers if replacing caliper. 5. Remove the caliper slide bolts (3). 6. Remove the caliper (6) from vehicle. Front - 1500 FRONT - 1500 CAUTION: Never allow the disc brake caliper to hang from the brake hose. Damage to the brake hose with result. Provide a suitable support to hang the caliper securely. 1. Raise and support the vehicle. 2. Remove the tire and wheel assembly. 3. Compress the disc brake caliper (6). 4. Remove the banjo bolt (4) and discard the copper washers. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 9697 5. Remove the caliper slide pin bolts (2). 6. Remove the disc brake caliper (1) from the caliper adapter (2). 7. Remove the caliper slide pins from the adapter. Front - 2500 & 3500 FRONT - 2500 & 3500 CAUTION: Never allow the disc brake caliper to hang from the brake hose. Damage to the brake hose will result. Provide a suitable support to hang the caliper securely. 1. Raise and support the vehicle. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 9698 2. Remove the tire and wheel assembly. 3. Compress the disc brake caliper. 4. Remove the banjo bolt and discard the copper washer. 5. Remove the caliper slide bolts. 6. Remove the disc brake caliper. Front - 4500 & 5500 FRONT - 4500 & 5500 CAUTION: Never allow the disc brake caliper to hang from the brake hose. Damage to the brake hose will result. Provide a suitable support to hang the caliper securely. 1. Raise and support the vehicle. 2. Remove the tire and wheel assembly. 3. Compress the disc brake caliper. 4. Remove the banjo bolt (4) and discard the copper washer. 5. Remove the caliper slide bolts (1). 6. Remove the disc brake caliper (2). Rear REAR 1. Install caliper (6) to the caliper adapter (1). 2. Coat the caliper mounting slide pin bolts (3) with silicone grease. Then install and tighten the bolts to 30 Nm (22 ft. lbs.). 3. Install the brake hose banjo bolt if removed. 4. Install the brake hose (4) to the caliper (6) with new seal washers and tighten fitting bolt to 27 Nm (245 in. lbs.). CAUTION: Verify brake hose is not twisted or kinked before tightening fitting bolt. 5. Bleed the base brake system, See: Brake Bleeding OR See: Brake Bleeding . 6. Install the wheel and tire assemblies See: Maintenance/Wheels and Tires/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement . 7. Remove the supports and lower the vehicle. 8. Verify a firm pedal before moving the vehicle. Front - 1500 FRONT - 1500 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 9699 NOTE: Petroleum based grease should not be used on any of the rubber components of the caliper, Use only Non-Petroleum based grease. NOTE: Clean slide pin bores thoroughly to remove any old grease. NOTE: Use grease packets included with kit or Dow Corning-807(R) grease. 1. Thoroughly coat the new slide pins (3) on all working surfaces. 2. Install the boot (2) onto the slide pin (3) and then insert into the adapter (1). 3. Push the pin (3) all the way into the adapter (1) and carefully expel the trapped air by gently pushing on the boot (2) near the slide pin head (3). NOTE: Install a new copper washers on the banjo bolt when installing 4. Install the disc brake caliper (1) to the brake caliper adapter (2). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 9700 5. Install the banjo bolt (4) with new copper washers to the caliper (6). Tighten to 28 Nm (250 in. lbs.) 6. Install the caliper slide pin bolts (2). Tighten to 32 Nm (24 ft. lbs.) 7. Bleed the base brake system, See: Brake Bleeding . 8. Install the tire and wheel assembly, See: Maintenance/Wheels and Tires/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement . 9. Lower the vehicle. Front - 2500 & 3500 FRONT - 2500 & 3500 NOTE: Install a new copper washers on the banjo bolt when installing 1. Install the disc brake caliper. CAUTION: Verify brake hose is not twisted or kinked before tightening fitting bolt. 2. Install the banjo bolt with new copper washers to the caliper. Tighten to 27 Nm (20 ft. lbs.) 3. Install the caliper slide pin bolts. tighten to 32 Nm (24 ft. lbs.) 4. Bleed the base brake system, See: Brake Bleeding . 5. Install the tire and wheel assembly, See: Maintenance/Wheels and Tires/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement . 6. Lower the vehicle. Front - 4500 & 5500 FRONT - 4500 & 5500 NOTE: Install a new copper washers on the banjo bolt when installing 1. Install the disc brake caliper (2). CAUTION: Verify brake hose is not twisted or kinked before tightening fitting bolt. 2. Install the banjo bolt (4) with new copper washers to the caliper. Tighten to 27 Nm (20 ft. lbs.) 3. Install the caliper slide pin bolts (1). tighten to 32 Nm (24 ft. lbs.) 4. Bleed the base brake system, See: Brake Bleeding . 5. Install the tire and wheel assembly, See: Maintenance/Wheels and Tires/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement . Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 9701 6. Lower the vehicle. Rear REAR 1. Raise and support the vehicle. 2. Remove the wheel and tire assembly. 3. Drain a small amount of fluid from master cylinder brake reservoir with a clean suction gun. 4. Bottom the caliper pistons into the caliper by prying the caliper over. 5. Remove the caliper slide bolts. 6. Remove the disc brake caliper from the mount. CAUTION: Never allow the disc brake caliper to hang from the brake hose. Damage to the brake hose will result. Provide a suitable support to hang the caliper securely. 7. Remove the inboard and outboard brake pads (1). 8. Remove the anti-rattle clips (2). 9. Remove the caliper adapter mounting bolts (4). 10. Remove the caliper adapter. Front - (IFS) Independent Front Suspension FRONT - (IFS) INDEPENDENT FRONT SUSPENSION 1. Raise and support the vehicle. 2. Remove the front wheel and tire assembly. 3. Remove the caliper slide pin bolts (4) See: Disc Brake Caliper - Removal . Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 9702 4. Remove the disc brake caliper (1) from the adapter (2). CAUTION: Never allow the disc brake caliper to hang from the brake hose. Damage to the brake hose will result. Provide a suitable support to hang the caliper securely. 5. Remove the inboard (4) and outboard (2) brake pads. See: Brake Pad/Service and Repair/Brake Pads - Removal . 6. Remove the caliper adapter mounting bolts (5). 7. Remove the caliper slide pins from the adapter. Front - HD (Heavy Duty) Link/Coil Suspension FRONT - HD (HEAVY DUTY) LINK/COIL SUSPENSION Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 9703 1. Raise and support the vehicle. 2. Remove the front wheel and tire assembly. 3. Remove the caliper slide pin bolts (1) See: Disc Brake Caliper - Removal . 4. Remove the disc brake caliper (2) from the adapter. CAUTION: Never allow the disc brake caliper to hang from the brake hose. Damage to the brake hose will result. Provide a suitable support to hang the caliper securely. 5. Remove the brake pads. See: Brake Pad/Service and Repair/Brake Pads - Removal . 6. Remove the caliper adapter mounting bolts (5). 7. Remove the caliper slide pins from the adapter. Rear REAR 1. Install the caliper adapter mounting bolts (4). Tighten the mounting bolts to 135 Nm (100 ft.lbs) LD or tighten to 197 Nm (145 ft.lbs.) HD. 2. Install the anti-rattle clips (2). 3. Install the inboard and outboard pads (1). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 9704 4. Install the caliper mounting bolts. 5. Install the tire and wheel assembly. Front - (IFS) Independent Front Suspension FRONT - (IFS) INDEPENDENT FRONT SUSPENSION NOTE: Petroleum based grease should not be used on any of the rubber components of the caliper, Use only a Non-Petroleum based grease, such as Dow Corning-807(R) grease. NOTE: Clean slide pin bores thoroughly to remove any old grease. NOTE: Use grease packets included with kit or Dow Corning-807(R) grease. 1. Thoroughly coat the new slide pins (3) on all working surfaces. 2. Install the boot (2) onto the slide pin (3) and then insert into the adapter (1). 3. Push the pin (3) all the way into the adapter (1) and carefully expel the trapped air by gently pushing on the boot (2) near the slide pin head (3). 4. Install the caliper adapter mounting bolts (5). Tighten the mounting bolts to 176 Nm (130 ft.lbs)LD or Tighten the mounting bolts to 339 Nm (250 ft.lbs)HD. 5. Install the inboard (4) and outboard (2) pads. See: Brake Pad/Service and Repair/Brake Pads Installation . Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 9705 6. Install the caliper (2) and the caliper slide pin bolts (4) See: Disc Brake Caliper - Installation . 7. Install the tire and wheel assembly. See: Maintenance/Wheels and Tires/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement . Front - HD (Heavy Duty) Link/Coil Suspension FRONT - HD (HEAVY DUTY) LINK/COIL SUSPENSION NOTE: Petroleum based grease should not be used on any of the rubber components of the caliper, Use only a Non-Petroleum based grease, such as Dow Corning-807(R) grease. NOTE: Clean slide pin bores thoroughly to remove any old grease. NOTE: Use grease packets included with kit or Dow Corning-807(R) grease. 1. Thoroughly coat the new slide pins (3) on all working surfaces. 2. Install the boot (2) onto the slide pin (3) and then insert into the adapter (1). 3. Push the pin (3) all the way into the adapter (1) and carefully expel the trapped air by gently pushing on the boot (2) near the slide pin head (3). 4. Install the caliper adapter mounting bolts (5). Tighten the mounting bolts to 339 Nm (250 ft.lbs). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 9706 5. Install the brake pads. See: Brake Pad/Service and Repair/Brake Pads - Installation . 6. Install the caliper (2) and the caliper slide pin bolts (1) See: Disc Brake Caliper - Installation . 7. Install the tire and wheel assembly. See: Maintenance/Wheels and Tires/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement . Removal REAR 1. Remove wheel and tire assembly. 2. Remove the disc brake caliper See: Disc Brake Caliper Removal . 3. Remove the caliper adapter See: Disc Brake Caliper Adapter - Removal . 4. Remove the rotor See: Brake Rotor/Disc/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Brake Rotor Removal . 5. Remove the axle shaft See: Transmission and Drivetrain/Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints/Axle Shaft Assembly/Axle Shaft/Service and Repair/Rear Axle - 9 1/4/Removal . 6. Remove the park brake shoes See: Drum Brake System/Brake Shoe/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Removal . 7. Remove the parking brake cable from the brake lever. 8. Remove the bolts (3) attaching the support plate to the axle and remove the support plate. 9. Remove the caliper adapter mount (1) from the axle housing (2). Installation INSTALLATION 1. Install the caliper adapter mount (1) on the axle housing (2). 2. Install support plate on axle flange. Tighten attaching bolts (3) to 68 Nm (50 ft. lbs.) LD or tighten to 203 Nm (150 ft.lbs.) HD. 3. Install parking brake cable in the brake lever. 4. Install the park brake shoes See: Drum Brake System/Brake Shoe/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Installation . 5. Install axle shaft, See: Transmission and Drivetrain/Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints/Axle Shaft Assembly/Axle Shaft/Service and Repair/Rear Axle - 9 1/4/Installation . 6. Adjust brake shoes to drum with brake gauge See: Parking Brake System/Parking Brake Shoe/Adjustments . 7. Install the rotor See: Brake Rotor/Disc/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Brake Rotor - Installation . 8. Install the caliper adapter See: Disc Brake Caliper Adapter - Installation . 9. Install the caliper See: Disc Brake Caliper - Installation . 10. Install wheel and tire assembly. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 9707 Brake Caliper: Overhaul Light Duty (LD) LIGHT DUTY (LD) 1. Drain the brake fluid from caliper. 2. C-clamp (2) a block of wood (1) over one piston. 3. Take another piece of wood and pad it with one-inch thickness of shop towels (2). Place this piece in the outboard shoe side of the caliper in front of the other piston. This will cushion and protect caliper piston during removal. 4. To remove the caliper piston direct short bursts of low pressure air with a blow gun through the caliper brake hose port. Use only enough air pressure to ease the piston out. CAUTION: Do not blow the piston out of the bore with sustained air pressure. This could result in a cracked piston. WARNING: Never attempt to catch the piston as it leaves the bore. This could result in personal injury. 5. Remove the C-clamp and block of wood from the caliper and clamp it over the dust boot of the first piston removed. This will seal the empty piston bore. 6. Move the padded piece of wood in front of the other piston. 7. Remove the second piston using the same procedure with short bursts of low pressure air. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 9708 8. Remove piston dust boots (2) by hand. CAUTION: Do not scratch piston bore while removing the seals. 9. Remove the lip seal from the groove (4) with a pick tool (3). 10. Remove piston seals (2) from caliper (1) by hand. Heavy Duty (HD) HEAVY DUTY (HD) Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 9709 1. Drain the brake fluid from caliper. 2. C-clamp (2) a block of wood (1) over one piston. 3. Take another piece of wood and pad it with one-inch thickness of shop towels (2). Place this piece in the outboard shoe side of the caliper in front of the other piston. This will cushion and protect caliper piston during removal. 4. To remove the caliper piston direct short bursts of low pressure air with a blow gun through the caliper brake hose port. Use only enough air pressure to ease the piston out. CAUTION: Do not blow the piston out of the bore with sustained air pressure. This could result in a cracked piston. WARNING: NEVER ATTEMPT TO CATCH THE PISTON AS IT LEAVES THE BORE. THIS COULD RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY. 5. Remove the C-clamp and block of wood from the caliper and clamp it over the dust boot of the first piston removed. This will seal the empty piston bore. 6. Move the padded piece of wood in front of the other piston. 7. Remove the second piston using the same procedure with short bursts of low pressure air. 8. Remove piston dust boots (2) with a suitable pry tool. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 9710 CAUTION: Do not scratch piston bore while removing the seals. 9. Remove piston seals (3) from caliper (1). 10. Push caliper mounting bolt bushings (3) out of the boot seals (2) and remove the boot seals from the caliper (1). 11. Remove caliper bleed screw. Light Duty (LD) LIGHT DUTY (LD) CAUTION: Dirt, oil, and solvents can damage caliper seals. Insure assembly area is clean and dry. 1. Lubricate caliper pistons, piston seals and piston bores with clean, fresh brake fluid. NOTE: Verify seal is fully seated and not twisted. 2. Install new piston seals (2) into caliper bores (1). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 9711 3. Leave boot (1) dry and slip onto end of piston (2). NOTE: The dust boot lip must be inserted before the piston 4. Slightly pull out lip portion of piston boot (3) so it protrudes past the bottom of the piston (2) and work lip into outermost groove on caliper housing (1). 5. Carefully press the lip (3) into the groove with a suitable tool (4) Avoid using sharp-edged tools This will ensure that the lip is nested into the groove all around before pushing the piston into the bore. 6. Press the piston fully into the bore using special tool C3716-A seal installer (3) with C-4171 Handle (1). 7. Once the piston is pressed into the bottom of the bore, Check to see that the dust boot bellows are not inflated with air. If needed, push in between the dust boot and piston to expel any trapped air. Heavy Duty (HD) HEAVY DUTY (HD) Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 9712 CAUTION: Dirt, oil, and solvents can damage caliper seals. Insure assembly area is clean and dry. 1. Lubricate caliper pistons, piston seals and piston bores with clean, fresh brake fluid. NOTE: Verify seal is fully seated and not twisted. 2. Install new piston seals (3) into caliper bores (2). 3. Lightly lubricate lip of new boot with silicone grease. Install boot on piston and work boot lip into the groove at the top of piston (3). 4. Stretch boot (2) rearward to straighten boot folds, then move boot forward until folds snap into place. 5. Install piston (3) into caliper bore and press piston down to the bottom of the caliper bore by hand or with hammer handle. 6. Seat dust boot in caliper (2) with Handle C-4171 (1) and Installer (3): - 54 mm caliper: Installer C-3716-A 7. Install the second piston and dust boot. 8. Lubricate caliper mounting bolt bushings, boot seals and bores with Mopar brake grease or Dow Corning(R) 807 grease only. CAUTION: Use of alternative grease may cause damage to the boots seals. 9. Install the boot seals into the caliper seal bores and center the seals in the bores. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 9713 10. Install mounting bolt bushings into the boot seals and insure seal lip is engaged into the bushing grooves at either end of the bushing. 11. Install caliper bleed screw. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Pad > Component Information > Service and Repair > Brake Pads - Removal Brake Pad: Service and Repair Brake Pads - Removal Rear REAR 1. Raise and support the vehicle. 2. Remove the rear wheel and tire assemblies. 3. Compress the caliper. 4. Remove caliper slide bolts (3). NOTE: Do not allow brake hose to support caliper assembly. 5. Remove the caliper (3), See: Brake Caliper/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Disc Brake Caliper - Removal and then tilt the top up and off the caliper adapter. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Pad > Component Information > Service and Repair > Brake Pads - Removal > Page 9718 6. Remove inboard brake shoe (1) from the caliper adapter (2). 7. Remove outboard brake shoe (1) from caliper adapter (2). NOTE: Anti-rattle springs are not interchangeable. 8. Remove the top anti-rattle spring (2) from the caliper adapter (1). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Pad > Component Information > Service and Repair > Brake Pads - Removal > Page 9719 9. Remove the top anti-rattle spring (2) from the caliper adapter (1). 1500 1500 1. Raise and support vehicle. 2. Remove the wheel and tire assemblies. 3. Compress the caliper (2). 4. Remove the caliper slide pin bolts (4), See: Brake Caliper/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Disc Brake Caliper - Removal . 5. Remove the caliper (1) from the caliper adapter (2). NOTE: Do not allow brake hose to support caliper assembly. 6. Support and hang the caliper. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Pad > Component Information > Service and Repair > Brake Pads - Removal > Page 9720 7. Remove the inboard brake pad (4) from the caliper adapter (1). 8. Remove the outboard brake pad (2) from the caliper adapter (1). 9. Remove the anti-rattle clips (1) from the pad (2). 2500 & 3500 2500 & 3500 1. Raise and support vehicle. 2. Remove the wheel and tire assemblies. 3. Compress the caliper. 4. Remove the caliper, See: Brake Caliper/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Disc Brake Caliper - Removal . 5. Remove the caliper by tilting the top up and off the caliper adapter. NOTE: Do not allow brake hose to support caliper assembly. 6. Support and hang the caliper. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Pad > Component Information > Service and Repair > Brake Pads - Removal > Page 9721 7. Remove the inboard brake shoe (1) from the caliper adapter (2). 8. Remove the outboard brake shoe (1) from the caliper adapter (2). NOTE: Anti-rattle springs are not interchangeable. 9. Remove the top anti-rattle springs (2) from the caliper adapter (1). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Pad > Component Information > Service and Repair > Brake Pads - Removal > Page 9722 10. Remove the bottom anti-rattle springs (2) from the caliper adapter (1). 4500 & 5500 4500 & 5500 1. Raise and support vehicle. 2. Remove the wheel and tire assemblies. 3. Compress the caliper (2). 4. Remove the caliper (1), See: Brake Caliper/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Disc Brake Caliper - Removal . NOTE: Do not allow brake hose to support caliper assembly. 5. Support and hang the caliper. 6. Remove the brake pads (3) from the caliper adapter (2). NOTE: Anti-rattle springs are not interchangeable. 7. Remove the anti-rattle springs from the caliper adapter (2). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Pad > Component Information > Service and Repair > Brake Pads - Removal > Page 9723 Brake Pad: Service and Repair Brake Pads - Installation Rear REAR 1. Clean caliper mounting adapter (1) and anti-rattle springs (2). 2. Lubricate anti-rattle springs with Mopar brake grease. NOTE: Anti-rattle springs are not interchangeable. 3. Install new top anti-rattle spring (2). 4. Install new bottom anti-rattle spring (1). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Pad > Component Information > Service and Repair > Brake Pads - Removal > Page 9724 5. Install inboard brake shoe (1) in adapter (2). 6. Install outboard brake shoe (1) in adapter (2). 7. Tilt the bottom of the caliper (3) over rotor (1) and under adapter. Then push the top of the caliper down onto the adapter. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Pad > Component Information > Service and Repair > Brake Pads - Removal > Page 9725 8. Install caliper (6), See: Brake Caliper/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Disc Brake Caliper - Installation See: Brake Caliper/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Disc Brake Caliper - Installation . 9. Install wheel and tire assemblies and lower vehicle, See: Maintenance/Wheels and Tires/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement . 10. Apply brakes several times to seat caliper pistons and brake shoes and obtain firm pedal. 11. Top off master cylinder fluid level. 1500 1500 1. Bottom pistons in caliper bore with C-clamp. Place an old brake shoe between a C-clamp and caliper piston. 2. Clean caliper mounting adapter. 3. Install new anti-rattle clips (1) to the brake pads (2). 4. Install inboard brake pad (4) in adapter (1). 5. Install outboard brake pad (2) in adapter (1). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Pad > Component Information > Service and Repair > Brake Pads - Removal > Page 9726 6. Install the caliper (1) over rotor, Then push the caliper onto the adapter (2). 7. Install caliper slide pin bolts (4), See: Brake Caliper/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Disc Brake Caliper - Installation . 8. Install wheel and tire assemblies and lower vehicle, See: Maintenance/Wheels and Tires/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement . 9. Apply brakes several times to seat caliper pistons and brake shoes and obtain firm pedal. 10. Top off master cylinder fluid level. 2500 & 3500 2500 & 3500 1. Bottom pistons in caliper bore with C-clamp. Place an old brake shoe between a C-clamp and caliper piston. 2. Clean caliper mounting adapter (1) and anti-rattle springs (2). 3. Lubricate anti-rattle springs with Mopar brake grease. NOTE: Anti-rattle springs are not interchangeable. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Pad > Component Information > Service and Repair > Brake Pads - Removal > Page 9727 4. Install new top anti-rattle springs (2). 5. Install new bottom anti-rattle springs (1). 6. Install inboard brake shoe (1) in adapter (2). 7. Install outboard brake shoe (1) in adapter (2). 8. Tilt the top of the caliper over rotor and under adapter. Then push the bottom of the caliper down onto the adapter. 9. Install caliper, See: Brake Caliper/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Disc Brake Caliper - Installation . 10. Install wheel and tire assemblies and lower vehicle, See: Maintenance/Wheels and Tires/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement . Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Pad > Component Information > Service and Repair > Brake Pads - Removal > Page 9728 11. Apply brakes several times to seat caliper pistons and brake shoes and obtain firm pedal. 12. Top off master cylinder fluid level. 4500 & 5500 4500 & 5500 1. Bottom pistons in caliper bore with C-clamp. Place an old brake shoe between a C-clamp and caliper piston. 2. Clean caliper mounting adapter (2) and anti-rattle springs. 3. Lubricate anti-rattle springs with Mopar brake grease. NOTE: Anti-rattle springs are not interchangeable. 4. Install new anti-rattle springs. 5. Install the brake pads (3) in adapter (2). 6. Install caliper (1), See: Brake Caliper/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Disc Brake Caliper - Installation . 7. Install wheel and tire assemblies and lower vehicle, See: Maintenance/Wheels and Tires/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement . 8. Apply brakes several times to seat caliper pistons and brake shoes and obtain firm pedal. 9. Top off master cylinder fluid level. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Rotor/Disc > Component Information > Specifications Brake Rotor/Disc: Specifications BASE BRAKE Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Rotor/Disc > Component Information > Specifications > Page 9732 Brake Rotor/Disc: Testing and Inspection DISC BRAKE ROTOR The rotor braking surfaces should not be refinished unless necessary. Light surface rust and scale can be removed with a lathe equipped with dual sanding discs. The rotor surfaces can be restored by machining with a disc brake lathe if surface scoring and wear are light. Replace the rotor for the following conditions: - Severely Scored - Tapered - Hard Spots - Cracked - Below Minimum Thickness ROTOR MINIMUM THICKNESS Measure rotor thickness at the center of the brake shoe contact surface. Replace the rotor if below minimum thickness, or if machining would reduce thickness below the allowable minimum. Rotor minimum thickness is usually specified on the rotor hub. The specification is either stamped or cast into the hub surface. ROTOR RUNOUT Check rotor lateral runout with dial indicator C-3339 (1). Excessive lateral runout will cause brake pedal pulsation and rapid, uneven wear of the brake shoes. Position the dial indicator plunger approximately 25.4 mm (1 in.) inward from the rotor edge. NOTE: Be sure wheel bearing has zero end play before checking rotor runout. Maximum allowable rotor runout is 0.131 mm (0.005 in.) HD. Maximum allowable rotor runout is 0.050 mm (0.002 in.) LD. ROTOR THICKNESS VARIATION Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Rotor/Disc > Component Information > Specifications > Page 9733 Variations in rotor thickness will cause pedal pulsation, noise and shudder. Measure rotor thickness at 6 to 12 points around the rotor face. Position the micrometer (1) approximately 25.4 mm (1 in.) from the rotor (2) outer circumference for each measurement. Thickness should not vary by more than 0.015 mm (0.0059 in.) from point-to-point on the rotor. Machine or replace the rotor if necessary. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Rotor/Disc > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures Brake Rotor/Disc: Procedures STANDARD PROCEDURE NOTE: A hub mounted on-vehicle lathe is highly recommended. This type of lathe trues the rotor to the vehicles hub/bearing. The disc brake rotor can be machined if scored or worn. The on-vehicle lathe must machine both sides of the rotor simultaneously with dual cutter heads. The rotor mounting surface must be clean before placing on the on-vehicle lathe. Equipment capable of machining only one side at a time may produce a tapered rotor This type of rotor machining is not recommended. NOTE: Proper wheel torque is also critical to help prevent any warping of the disc brake rotor. CAUTION: Brake rotors that do not meet minimum thickness specifications before or after machining must be replaced. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Rotor/Disc > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 9736 Brake Rotor/Disc: Removal and Replacement Rear REAR 1. Raise and support the vehicle 2. Remove the tire and wheel assembly. 3. Remove the disc brake caliper (3), See: Brake Caliper/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Disc Brake Caliper - Removal . 4. Remove the caliper adapter (2) bolts. See: Brake Caliper/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Disc Brake Caliper Adapter - Removal 5. Remove the retaining clips and rotor assembly (1). Front - LD FRONT - LD 1. Raise and support the vehicle. 2. Remove the wheel and tire assembly. 3. Remove the caliper (1) with the adaptor bolts (5) from the steering knuckle (4), See: Brake Caliper/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Disc Brake Caliper - Removal and remove caliper adapter assembly (1). NOTE: Do not allow brake hose to support caliper adapter assembly (1). 4. Remove the rotor (2) from the hub/bearing (3). Front - HD FRONT - HD 1. Raise and support the vehicle. 2. Remove the wheel and tire assembly. NOTE: Do not allow brake hose to support caliper adapter assembly. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Rotor/Disc > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 9737 3. Remove the caliper from the steering knuckle, See: Brake Caliper/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Disc Brake Caliper - Removal and remove caliper adapter assembly. 4. Remove the extension to the rotor nuts HD DRW ONLY. 5. Remove the rotor from the hub/bearing wheel studs. Rear Dual Wheels REAR DUAL WHEELS 1. Raise and support the vehicle 2. Remove the tire and wheel assembly. 3. Remove the disc brake caliper, See: Brake Caliper/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Disc Brake Caliper - Removal . 4. Remove the caliper adapter bolts. 5. Remove the rear axle shaft from the housing on dual rear wheels, See: Transmission and Drivetrain/Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints/Axle Shaft Assembly/Axle Shaft/Service and Repair/Rear Axle - 11 1/2 AA/Removal . 6. Remove the hub and rotor assembly. 7. Disassemble the hub from the rotor if needed by removing the bolts (1). Rear REAR Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Rotor/Disc > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 9738 1. Install the rotor (1) to the axle shaft. 2. Install the caliper adapter (2) See: Brake Caliper/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Disc Brake Caliper Adapter - Installation . 3. Install the caliper adapter bolts and tighten the mounting bolts to 135 Nm (100 ft.lbs) LD or 197 Nm (145 ft.lbs) HD. 4. Install the disc brake caliper (3), See: Brake Caliper/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Disc Brake Caliper - Installation . 5. Install the tire and wheel assembly See: Maintenance/Wheels and Tires/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement . 6. Lower the vehicle. Front - LD FRONT - LD 1. Install the rotor (2) onto the hub/bearing (3). 2. Install the caliper adapter assembly (1), See: Brake Caliper/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Disc Brake Caliper - Installation and tighten adapter bolts (5) to 176 Nm (130 ft.lbs.). 3. Install the wheel and tire assembly, See: Maintenance/Wheels and Tires/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement and lower the vehicle. 4. Apply the brakes several times to seat brake pads. Be sure to obtain firm pedal before moving vehicle. Front - HD FRONT - HD 1. Install the hub extension and nuts to the front rotor. Tighten nuts to 130 Nm (96 ft.lbs). HD DRW ONLY. 2. Install the rotor onto the hub/bearing wheel studs. 3. Install the caliper adapter assembly, See: Brake Caliper/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Disc Brake Caliper - Installation and tighten adapter bolts to: 4. Install the wheel and tire assembly, See: Maintenance/Wheels and Tires/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement and lower the vehicle. 5. Apply the brakes several times to seat brake pads. Be sure to obtain firm pedal before moving vehicle. Rear Dual Wheels REAR DUAL WHEELS Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Rotor/Disc > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 9739 1. Install the hub to the rotor. Tighten the bolts (1) to 128 Nm (95 ft. lbs.). 2. Install the hub and rotor assembly. 3. Install the rear axle shaft to the housing with dual wheels, See: Transmission and Drivetrain/Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints/Axle Shaft Assembly/Axle Shaft/Service and Repair/Rear Axle - 11 1/2 AA/Installation . 4. Install the caliper adapter bolts 197 Nm (145 ft.lbs) LD. 5. Install the disc brake caliper, See: Brake Caliper/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Disc Brake Caliper - Installation . 6. Install the tire and wheel assembly, See: Maintenance/Wheels and Tires/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement . 7. Lower the vehicle. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Drum Brake System > Backing Plate > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Backing Plate: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL 1. Remove wheel and tire assembly. 2. Remove the disc brake caliper See: Disc Brake System/Brake Caliper/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Disc Brake Caliper Removal . 3. Remove the caliper adapter See: Disc Brake System/Brake Caliper/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Disc Brake Caliper Adapter Removal . 4. Remove the rotor See: Disc Brake System/Brake Rotor/Disc/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Brake Rotor - Removal . 5. Remove the axle shaft See: Transmission and Drivetrain/Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints/Axle Shaft Assembly/Axle Shaft/Service and Repair/Rear Axle - 9 1/4/Removal . 6. Remove the park brake shoes See: Brake Shoe/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Removal . 7. Remove the parking brake cable from the brake lever. 8. Remove the bolts (2) attaching the support plate (1) to the axle and remove the support plate. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Drum Brake System > Backing Plate > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 9745 Backing Plate: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION 1. Install support plate (1) on axle flange. Tighten attaching bolts (2) to 68 Nm (50 ft. lbs.) LD or 203 Nm (150 ft.lbs) HD. 2. Install parking brake cable in the brake lever. 3. Install the park brake shoes See: Brake Shoe/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Installation . 4. Install axle shaft, See: Transmission and Drivetrain/Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints/Axle Shaft Assembly/Axle Shaft/Service and Repair/Rear Axle - 9 1/4/Installation . 5. Adjust brake shoes to drum with brake gauge See: Parking Brake System/Parking Brake Shoe/Adjustments . 6. Install the rotor See: Disc Brake System/Brake Rotor/Disc/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Brake Rotor - Installation . 7. Install the caliper adapter See: Disc Brake System/Brake Caliper/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Disc Brake Caliper Adapter Installation . 8. Install the caliper See: Disc Brake System/Brake Caliper/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Disc Brake Caliper - Installation . 9. Install the wheel and tire assembly See: Maintenance/Wheels and Tires/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement . Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Drum Brake System > Brake Drum > Component Information > Specifications Brake Drum: Specifications BASE BRAKE Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Drum Brake System > Brake Shoe > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures Brake Shoe: Procedures Cleaning - Rear Drum In Hat Brake CLEANING - REAR DRUM IN HAT BRAKE Clean the individual brake components, including the support plate exterior, with a water dampened cloth or with brake cleaner. Do not use any other cleaning agents. Remove light rust and scale from the brake shoe contact pads on the support plate with fine sandpaper. Inspection - Rear Drum In Hat Brake INSPECTION - REAR DRUM IN HAT BRAKE As a general rule, riveted brake shoes (2) should be replaced when worn to within 0.78 mm (1/32 in.) of the rivet heads. Bonded lining should be replaced when worn to a thickness of 1.6 mm (1/16 in.). Examine the lining contact pattern to determine if the shoes are bent or the drum is tapered. The lining should exhibit contact across its entire width. Shoes (2) exhibiting contact only on one side should be replaced and the drum checked for runout or taper. Inspect the adjuster screw assembly (5). Replace the assembly if the star wheel or threads are damaged, or the components are severely rusted or corroded. Discard the brake springs (3) and retainer components (4) if worn, distorted or collapsed. Also replace the springs if a brake drag condition had occurred. Overheating will distort and weaken the springs. Inspect the brake shoe contact pads on the support plate (1), replace the support plate if any of the pads are worn or rusted through. Also replace the plate (1) if it is bent or distorted. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Drum Brake System > Brake Shoe > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 9753 Brake Shoe: Removal and Replacement Removal REMOVAL 1. Raise and support the vehicle. 2. Remove the tire and wheel assembly. 3. Remove the disc brake caliper, See: Disc Brake System/Brake Caliper/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Disc Brake Caliper Removal . 4. Remove the disc brake rotor, See: Disc Brake System/Brake Rotor/Disc/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Brake Rotor - Removal . 5. Lockout the parking brake cable (2). 6. Disengage the park brake cable (2) from behind the rotor assembly to allow easier disassembly of the park brake shoes. 7. Remove the axle shaft (1) See: Transmission and Drivetrain/Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints/Axle Shaft Assembly/Axle Shaft/Service and Repair/Rear Axle - 11 1/2 AA/Removal . 8. Disassemble the rear park brake shoes (4). Installation Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Drum Brake System > Brake Shoe > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 9754 INSTALLATION NOTE: On a new vehicle or after parking brake lining replacement, it is recommended that the parking brake system be conditioned prior to use. This is done by making one stop from 25 mph on dry pavement or concrete using light to moderate force on the parking brake foot pedal. 1. Reassemble the rear park brake shoes (1) or. 2. Install the axle shaft (1) See: Transmission and Drivetrain/Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints/Axle Shaft Assembly/Axle Shaft/Service and Repair/Rear Axle - 9 1/4/Installation or See: Transmission and Drivetrain/Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints/Axle Shaft Assembly/Axle Shaft/Service and Repair/Rear Axle - 11 1/2 AA/Installation . 3. Install the park brake cable to the lever behind the support plate. 4. Unlock the park brake cable. 5. Install the disc brake rotor See: Disc Brake System/Brake Rotor/Disc/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Brake Rotor - Installation . 6. Install the disc brake caliper See: Disc Brake System/Brake Caliper/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Disc Brake Caliper Installation . 7. Adjust the rear brake shoes See: Parking Brake System/Parking Brake Shoe/Adjustments . 8. Install the tire and wheel assembly See: Maintenance/Wheels and Tires/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement . 9. Lower the vehicle. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Bleeding > System Information > Service and Repair > Master Cylinder Bleeding Brake Bleeding: Service and Repair Master Cylinder Bleeding MASTER CYLINDER BLEEDING A new master cylinder should be bled before installation on the vehicle. Required bleeding tools include bleed tubes and a wood dowel to stroke the pistons. Bleed tubes can be fabricated from brake line. 1. Mount master cylinder in vise. 2. Attach bleed tubes to cylinder outlet ports (1). Then position each tube end into reservoir (2). 3. Fill reservoir with fresh brake fluid. 4. Press cylinder pistons inward with wood dowel. Then release pistons and allow them to return under spring pressure. Continue bleeding operations until air bubbles are no longer visible in fluid. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Bleeding > System Information > Service and Repair > Master Cylinder Bleeding > Page 9760 Brake Bleeding: Service and Repair ABS Brake Bleeding ABS BRAKE BLEEDING ABS system bleeding requires conventional bleeding methods plus use of a scan tool. The procedure involves performing a base brake bleeding, followed by use of the scan tool to cycle and bleed the HCU pump and solenoids. A second base brake bleeding procedure is then required to remove any air remaining in the system. 1. Perform base brake bleeding, OR . 2. Connect scan tool to the Data Link Connector. 3. Select ANTILOCK BRAKES, followed by MISCELLANEOUS, then ABS BRAKES. Follow the instructions displayed. When scan tool displays TEST COMPLETE, disconnect scan tool and proceed. 4. Perform base brake bleeding a second time, OR . 5. Top off master cylinder fluid level and verify proper brake operation before moving vehicle. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Bleeding > System Information > Service and Repair > Master Cylinder Bleeding > Page 9761 Brake Bleeding: Service and Repair Base Brakes - Manual Bleeding MANUAL BLEEDING Use Mopar brake fluid, or an equivalent quality fluid meeting SAE J1703-F and DOT 3 standards only. Use fresh, clean fluid from a sealed container at all times. 1. Remove reservoir filler caps and fill reservoir. 2. If calipers were overhauled, open all caliper bleed screws. Then close each bleed screw as fluid starts to drip from it. Top off master cylinder reservoir once more before proceeding. 3. Attach one end of bleed hose (1) to bleed screw and insert opposite end in glass container (2) partially filled with brake fluid. Be sure end of bleed hose is immersed in fluid. NOTE: Bleed procedure should be in this order (1) Right rear (2) Left rear (3) Right front (4) Left front. 4. Open up bleeder, then have a helper press down the brake pedal. Once the pedal is down close the bleeder. Repeat bleeding until fluid stream is clear and free of bubbles. Then move to the next wheel. 5. Before moving the vehicle verify the pedal is firm and not mushy. 6. Top off the brake fluid and install the reservoir cap. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Bleeding > System Information > Service and Repair > Master Cylinder Bleeding > Page 9762 Brake Bleeding: Service and Repair Base Brakes - Pressure Bleeding PRESSURE BLEEDING Use Mopar brake fluid, or an equivalent quality fluid meeting SAE J1703-F and DOT 3 standards only. Use fresh, clean fluid from a sealed container at all times. Follow the manufacturers instructions carefully when using pressure equipment. Do not exceed the tank manufacturers pressure recommendations. Generally, a tank pressure of 15-20 psi is sufficient for bleeding. Fill the bleeder tank with recommended fluid and purge air from the tank lines before bleeding. Do not pressure bleed without a proper master cylinder adapter. The wrong adapter can lead to leakage, or drawing air back into the system. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Bleeding > System Information > Service and Repair > Master Cylinder Bleeding > Page 9763 Brake Bleeding: Service and Repair Booster-Hydro-Boost Brake BLEEDING The hydraulic booster is generally self-bleeding, this procedure will normally bleed the air from the booster. Normal driving and operation of the unit will remove any remaining trapped air. 1. Fill power steering pump reservoir. 2. Disconnect fuel shutdown relay and crank the engine for several seconds. 3. Check fluid level and add if necessary. 4. Connect fuel shutdown relay and start the engine. 5. Turn the steering wheel slowly from lock to lock twice. 6. Stop the engine and discharge the accumulator by depressing the brake pedal 5 times. 7. Start the engine and turn the steering wheel slowly from lock to lock twice. 8. Turn off the engine and check fluid level and add if necessary. NOTE: If fluid foaming occurs, wait for foam to dissipate and repeat steps 7 and 8. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Brake Caliper: Description and Operation Description Light Duty (LD) Calipers LIGHT DUTY (LD) CALIPERS NOTE: Petroleum based grease should not be used on any of the rubber components of the caliper, Use only Non-Petroleum based grease. The calipers are a dual piston type. The calipers are free to slide laterally, this allows continuous compensation for lining wear. Heavy Duty (HD) Calipers HEAVY DUTY (HD) CALIPERS The calipers are a dual piston type in the front & rear. The calipers are free to slide laterally, this allows continuous compensation for lining wear. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 9768 Brake Caliper: Description and Operation Operation DISC BRAKE CALIPER When the brakes are applied fluid pressure is exerted against the caliper piston (2). The fluid pressure is exerted equally and in all directions. This means pressure exerted against the caliper piston and within the caliper bore will be equal. Fluid pressure applied to the piston is transmitted directly to the inboard brake pad (5). This forces the pad lining against the inner surface of the disc brake rotor. At the same time, fluid pressure within the piston bore forces the caliper to slide inward on the mounting bolts. This action brings the outboard brake pad lining (6) into contact with the outer surface of the disc brake rotor. In summary, fluid pressure acting simultaneously on both piston and caliper, produces a strong clamping action. When sufficient force is applied, friction will attempt to stop the rotors from turning and bring the vehicle to a stop. Application and release of the brake pedal generates only a very slight movement of the caliper and piston. Upon release of the pedal, the caliper and piston return to a rest position. The brake pads do not retract an appreciable distance from the rotor. In fact, clearance is usually at, or close to zero. The reasons for this are to keep road debris from getting between the rotor and lining and in wiping the rotor surface clear each revolution. The caliper piston seal (4) controls the amount of piston (2) extension needed to compensate for normal lining wear. During brake application, the seal is deflected outward by fluid pressure and piston movement (6). When the brakes (and fluid pressure) are released, the seal relaxes and retracts the piston (3). The amount of piston retraction is determined by the amount of seal deflection. Generally the amount is just enough to maintain contact between the piston and inboard brake pad. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures Brake Caliper: Procedures INSPECTION - HEAVY DUTY (HD) The piston is made from a phenolic resin (plastic material) and should be smooth and clean. The piston must be replaced if cracked or scored. Do not attempt to restore a scored piston surface by sanding or polishing. CAUTION: If the caliper piston is replaced, install the same type of piston in the caliper. Never interchange phenolic resin and steel caliper pistons. The pistons, seals, seal grooves, caliper bore and piston tolerances are different. The bore can be lightly polished with a brake hone (3) to remove very minor surface imperfections. The caliper should be replaced if the bore is severely corroded, rusted, scored, or if polishing would increase bore diameter more than 0.025 mm (0.001 inch). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 9771 Brake Caliper: Removal and Replacement Rear REAR CAUTION: Never allow the disc brake caliper to hang from the brake hose. Damage to the brake hose will result. Provide a suitable support to hang the caliper securely. 1. Raise and support vehicle. 2. Remove the wheel and tire assembly. 3. Drain small amount of fluid from master cylinder brake reservoir with suction gun. 4. Remove the brake hose banjo bolt and discard the copper washers if replacing caliper. 5. Remove the caliper slide bolts (3). 6. Remove the caliper (6) from vehicle. Front - 1500 FRONT - 1500 CAUTION: Never allow the disc brake caliper to hang from the brake hose. Damage to the brake hose with result. Provide a suitable support to hang the caliper securely. 1. Raise and support the vehicle. 2. Remove the tire and wheel assembly. 3. Compress the disc brake caliper (6). 4. Remove the banjo bolt (4) and discard the copper washers. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 9772 5. Remove the caliper slide pin bolts (2). 6. Remove the disc brake caliper (1) from the caliper adapter (2). 7. Remove the caliper slide pins from the adapter. Front - 2500 & 3500 FRONT - 2500 & 3500 CAUTION: Never allow the disc brake caliper to hang from the brake hose. Damage to the brake hose will result. Provide a suitable support to hang the caliper securely. 1. Raise and support the vehicle. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 9773 2. Remove the tire and wheel assembly. 3. Compress the disc brake caliper. 4. Remove the banjo bolt and discard the copper washer. 5. Remove the caliper slide bolts. 6. Remove the disc brake caliper. Front - 4500 & 5500 FRONT - 4500 & 5500 CAUTION: Never allow the disc brake caliper to hang from the brake hose. Damage to the brake hose will result. Provide a suitable support to hang the caliper securely. 1. Raise and support the vehicle. 2. Remove the tire and wheel assembly. 3. Compress the disc brake caliper. 4. Remove the banjo bolt (4) and discard the copper washer. 5. Remove the caliper slide bolts (1). 6. Remove the disc brake caliper (2). Rear REAR 1. Install caliper (6) to the caliper adapter (1). 2. Coat the caliper mounting slide pin bolts (3) with silicone grease. Then install and tighten the bolts to 30 Nm (22 ft. lbs.). 3. Install the brake hose banjo bolt if removed. 4. Install the brake hose (4) to the caliper (6) with new seal washers and tighten fitting bolt to 27 Nm (245 in. lbs.). CAUTION: Verify brake hose is not twisted or kinked before tightening fitting bolt. 5. Bleed the base brake system, See: Brake Bleeding OR See: Brake Bleeding . 6. Install the wheel and tire assemblies See: Maintenance/Wheels and Tires/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement . 7. Remove the supports and lower the vehicle. 8. Verify a firm pedal before moving the vehicle. Front - 1500 FRONT - 1500 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 9774 NOTE: Petroleum based grease should not be used on any of the rubber components of the caliper, Use only Non-Petroleum based grease. NOTE: Clean slide pin bores thoroughly to remove any old grease. NOTE: Use grease packets included with kit or Dow Corning-807(R) grease. 1. Thoroughly coat the new slide pins (3) on all working surfaces. 2. Install the boot (2) onto the slide pin (3) and then insert into the adapter (1). 3. Push the pin (3) all the way into the adapter (1) and carefully expel the trapped air by gently pushing on the boot (2) near the slide pin head (3). NOTE: Install a new copper washers on the banjo bolt when installing 4. Install the disc brake caliper (1) to the brake caliper adapter (2). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 9775 5. Install the banjo bolt (4) with new copper washers to the caliper (6). Tighten to 28 Nm (250 in. lbs.) 6. Install the caliper slide pin bolts (2). Tighten to 32 Nm (24 ft. lbs.) 7. Bleed the base brake system, See: Brake Bleeding . 8. Install the tire and wheel assembly, See: Maintenance/Wheels and Tires/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement . 9. Lower the vehicle. Front - 2500 & 3500 FRONT - 2500 & 3500 NOTE: Install a new copper washers on the banjo bolt when installing 1. Install the disc brake caliper. CAUTION: Verify brake hose is not twisted or kinked before tightening fitting bolt. 2. Install the banjo bolt with new copper washers to the caliper. Tighten to 27 Nm (20 ft. lbs.) 3. Install the caliper slide pin bolts. tighten to 32 Nm (24 ft. lbs.) 4. Bleed the base brake system, See: Brake Bleeding . 5. Install the tire and wheel assembly, See: Maintenance/Wheels and Tires/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement . 6. Lower the vehicle. Front - 4500 & 5500 FRONT - 4500 & 5500 NOTE: Install a new copper washers on the banjo bolt when installing 1. Install the disc brake caliper (2). CAUTION: Verify brake hose is not twisted or kinked before tightening fitting bolt. 2. Install the banjo bolt (4) with new copper washers to the caliper. Tighten to 27 Nm (20 ft. lbs.) 3. Install the caliper slide pin bolts (1). tighten to 32 Nm (24 ft. lbs.) 4. Bleed the base brake system, See: Brake Bleeding . 5. Install the tire and wheel assembly, See: Maintenance/Wheels and Tires/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement . Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 9776 6. Lower the vehicle. Rear REAR 1. Raise and support the vehicle. 2. Remove the wheel and tire assembly. 3. Drain a small amount of fluid from master cylinder brake reservoir with a clean suction gun. 4. Bottom the caliper pistons into the caliper by prying the caliper over. 5. Remove the caliper slide bolts. 6. Remove the disc brake caliper from the mount. CAUTION: Never allow the disc brake caliper to hang from the brake hose. Damage to the brake hose will result. Provide a suitable support to hang the caliper securely. 7. Remove the inboard and outboard brake pads (1). 8. Remove the anti-rattle clips (2). 9. Remove the caliper adapter mounting bolts (4). 10. Remove the caliper adapter. Front - (IFS) Independent Front Suspension FRONT - (IFS) INDEPENDENT FRONT SUSPENSION 1. Raise and support the vehicle. 2. Remove the front wheel and tire assembly. 3. Remove the caliper slide pin bolts (4) See: Disc Brake Caliper - Removal . Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 9777 4. Remove the disc brake caliper (1) from the adapter (2). CAUTION: Never allow the disc brake caliper to hang from the brake hose. Damage to the brake hose will result. Provide a suitable support to hang the caliper securely. 5. Remove the inboard (4) and outboard (2) brake pads. See: Disc Brake System/Brake Pad/Service and Repair/Brake Pads - Removal . 6. Remove the caliper adapter mounting bolts (5). 7. Remove the caliper slide pins from the adapter. Front - HD (Heavy Duty) Link/Coil Suspension FRONT - HD (HEAVY DUTY) LINK/COIL SUSPENSION Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 9778 1. Raise and support the vehicle. 2. Remove the front wheel and tire assembly. 3. Remove the caliper slide pin bolts (1) See: Disc Brake Caliper - Removal . 4. Remove the disc brake caliper (2) from the adapter. CAUTION: Never allow the disc brake caliper to hang from the brake hose. Damage to the brake hose will result. Provide a suitable support to hang the caliper securely. 5. Remove the brake pads. See: Disc Brake System/Brake Pad/Service and Repair/Brake Pads Removal . 6. Remove the caliper adapter mounting bolts (5). 7. Remove the caliper slide pins from the adapter. Rear REAR 1. Install the caliper adapter mounting bolts (4). Tighten the mounting bolts to 135 Nm (100 ft.lbs) LD or tighten to 197 Nm (145 ft.lbs.) HD. 2. Install the anti-rattle clips (2). 3. Install the inboard and outboard pads (1). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 9779 4. Install the caliper mounting bolts. 5. Install the tire and wheel assembly. Front - (IFS) Independent Front Suspension FRONT - (IFS) INDEPENDENT FRONT SUSPENSION NOTE: Petroleum based grease should not be used on any of the rubber components of the caliper, Use only a Non-Petroleum based grease, such as Dow Corning-807(R) grease. NOTE: Clean slide pin bores thoroughly to remove any old grease. NOTE: Use grease packets included with kit or Dow Corning-807(R) grease. 1. Thoroughly coat the new slide pins (3) on all working surfaces. 2. Install the boot (2) onto the slide pin (3) and then insert into the adapter (1). 3. Push the pin (3) all the way into the adapter (1) and carefully expel the trapped air by gently pushing on the boot (2) near the slide pin head (3). 4. Install the caliper adapter mounting bolts (5). Tighten the mounting bolts to 176 Nm (130 ft.lbs)LD or Tighten the mounting bolts to 339 Nm (250 ft.lbs)HD. 5. Install the inboard (4) and outboard (2) pads. See: Disc Brake System/Brake Pad/Service and Repair/Brake Pads - Installation . Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 9780 6. Install the caliper (2) and the caliper slide pin bolts (4) See: Disc Brake Caliper - Installation . 7. Install the tire and wheel assembly. See: Maintenance/Wheels and Tires/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement . Front - HD (Heavy Duty) Link/Coil Suspension FRONT - HD (HEAVY DUTY) LINK/COIL SUSPENSION NOTE: Petroleum based grease should not be used on any of the rubber components of the caliper, Use only a Non-Petroleum based grease, such as Dow Corning-807(R) grease. NOTE: Clean slide pin bores thoroughly to remove any old grease. NOTE: Use grease packets included with kit or Dow Corning-807(R) grease. 1. Thoroughly coat the new slide pins (3) on all working surfaces. 2. Install the boot (2) onto the slide pin (3) and then insert into the adapter (1). 3. Push the pin (3) all the way into the adapter (1) and carefully expel the trapped air by gently pushing on the boot (2) near the slide pin head (3). 4. Install the caliper adapter mounting bolts (5). Tighten the mounting bolts to 339 Nm (250 ft.lbs). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 9781 5. Install the brake pads. See: Disc Brake System/Brake Pad/Service and Repair/Brake Pads Installation . 6. Install the caliper (2) and the caliper slide pin bolts (1) See: Disc Brake Caliper Installation . 7. Install the tire and wheel assembly. See: Maintenance/Wheels and Tires/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement . Removal REAR 1. Remove wheel and tire assembly. 2. Remove the disc brake caliper See: Disc Brake Caliper Removal . 3. Remove the caliper adapter See: Disc Brake Caliper Adapter - Removal . 4. Remove the rotor See: Disc Brake System/Brake Rotor/Disc/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Brake Rotor - Removal . 5. Remove the axle shaft See: Transmission and Drivetrain/Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints/Axle Shaft Assembly/Axle Shaft/Service and Repair/Rear Axle - 9 1/4/Removal . 6. Remove the park brake shoes See: Drum Brake System/Brake Shoe/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Removal . 7. Remove the parking brake cable from the brake lever. 8. Remove the bolts (3) attaching the support plate to the axle and remove the support plate. 9. Remove the caliper adapter mount (1) from the axle housing (2). Installation INSTALLATION 1. Install the caliper adapter mount (1) on the axle housing (2). 2. Install support plate on axle flange. Tighten attaching bolts (3) to 68 Nm (50 ft. lbs.) LD or tighten to 203 Nm (150 ft.lbs.) HD. 3. Install parking brake cable in the brake lever. 4. Install the park brake shoes See: Drum Brake System/Brake Shoe/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Installation . 5. Install axle shaft, See: Transmission and Drivetrain/Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints/Axle Shaft Assembly/Axle Shaft/Service and Repair/Rear Axle - 9 1/4/Installation . 6. Adjust brake shoes to drum with brake gauge See: Parking Brake System/Parking Brake Shoe/Adjustments . 7. Install the rotor See: Disc Brake System/Brake Rotor/Disc/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Brake Rotor - Installation . 8. Install the caliper adapter See: Disc Brake Caliper Adapter - Installation . 9. Install the caliper See: Disc Brake Caliper - Installation . 10. Install wheel and tire assembly. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 9782 Brake Caliper: Overhaul Light Duty (LD) LIGHT DUTY (LD) 1. Drain the brake fluid from caliper. 2. C-clamp (2) a block of wood (1) over one piston. 3. Take another piece of wood and pad it with one-inch thickness of shop towels (2). Place this piece in the outboard shoe side of the caliper in front of the other piston. This will cushion and protect caliper piston during removal. 4. To remove the caliper piston direct short bursts of low pressure air with a blow gun through the caliper brake hose port. Use only enough air pressure to ease the piston out. CAUTION: Do not blow the piston out of the bore with sustained air pressure. This could result in a cracked piston. WARNING: Never attempt to catch the piston as it leaves the bore. This could result in personal injury. 5. Remove the C-clamp and block of wood from the caliper and clamp it over the dust boot of the first piston removed. This will seal the empty piston bore. 6. Move the padded piece of wood in front of the other piston. 7. Remove the second piston using the same procedure with short bursts of low pressure air. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 9783 8. Remove piston dust boots (2) by hand. CAUTION: Do not scratch piston bore while removing the seals. 9. Remove the lip seal from the groove (4) with a pick tool (3). 10. Remove piston seals (2) from caliper (1) by hand. Heavy Duty (HD) HEAVY DUTY (HD) Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 9784 1. Drain the brake fluid from caliper. 2. C-clamp (2) a block of wood (1) over one piston. 3. Take another piece of wood and pad it with one-inch thickness of shop towels (2). Place this piece in the outboard shoe side of the caliper in front of the other piston. This will cushion and protect caliper piston during removal. 4. To remove the caliper piston direct short bursts of low pressure air with a blow gun through the caliper brake hose port. Use only enough air pressure to ease the piston out. CAUTION: Do not blow the piston out of the bore with sustained air pressure. This could result in a cracked piston. WARNING: NEVER ATTEMPT TO CATCH THE PISTON AS IT LEAVES THE BORE. THIS COULD RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY. 5. Remove the C-clamp and block of wood from the caliper and clamp it over the dust boot of the first piston removed. This will seal the empty piston bore. 6. Move the padded piece of wood in front of the other piston. 7. Remove the second piston using the same procedure with short bursts of low pressure air. 8. Remove piston dust boots (2) with a suitable pry tool. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 9785 CAUTION: Do not scratch piston bore while removing the seals. 9. Remove piston seals (3) from caliper (1). 10. Push caliper mounting bolt bushings (3) out of the boot seals (2) and remove the boot seals from the caliper (1). 11. Remove caliper bleed screw. Light Duty (LD) LIGHT DUTY (LD) CAUTION: Dirt, oil, and solvents can damage caliper seals. Insure assembly area is clean and dry. 1. Lubricate caliper pistons, piston seals and piston bores with clean, fresh brake fluid. NOTE: Verify seal is fully seated and not twisted. 2. Install new piston seals (2) into caliper bores (1). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 9786 3. Leave boot (1) dry and slip onto end of piston (2). NOTE: The dust boot lip must be inserted before the piston 4. Slightly pull out lip portion of piston boot (3) so it protrudes past the bottom of the piston (2) and work lip into outermost groove on caliper housing (1). 5. Carefully press the lip (3) into the groove with a suitable tool (4) Avoid using sharp-edged tools This will ensure that the lip is nested into the groove all around before pushing the piston into the bore. 6. Press the piston fully into the bore using special tool C3716-A seal installer (3) with C-4171 Handle (1). 7. Once the piston is pressed into the bottom of the bore, Check to see that the dust boot bellows are not inflated with air. If needed, push in between the dust boot and piston to expel any trapped air. Heavy Duty (HD) HEAVY DUTY (HD) Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 9787 CAUTION: Dirt, oil, and solvents can damage caliper seals. Insure assembly area is clean and dry. 1. Lubricate caliper pistons, piston seals and piston bores with clean, fresh brake fluid. NOTE: Verify seal is fully seated and not twisted. 2. Install new piston seals (3) into caliper bores (2). 3. Lightly lubricate lip of new boot with silicone grease. Install boot on piston and work boot lip into the groove at the top of piston (3). 4. Stretch boot (2) rearward to straighten boot folds, then move boot forward until folds snap into place. 5. Install piston (3) into caliper bore and press piston down to the bottom of the caliper bore by hand or with hammer handle. 6. Seat dust boot in caliper (2) with Handle C-4171 (1) and Installer (3): - 54 mm caliper: Installer C-3716-A 7. Install the second piston and dust boot. 8. Lubricate caliper mounting bolt bushings, boot seals and bores with Mopar brake grease or Dow Corning(R) 807 grease only. CAUTION: Use of alternative grease may cause damage to the boots seals. 9. Install the boot seals into the caliper seal bores and center the seals in the bores. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 9788 10. Install mounting bolt bushings into the boot seals and insure seal lip is engaged into the bushing grooves at either end of the bushing. 11. Install caliper bleed screw. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Fluid > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Maintenance - Fluid Flushing Information Brake Fluid: Technical Service Bulletins Maintenance - Fluid Flushing Information NUMBER: 26-001-09 GROUP: Miscellaneous DATE: September 24, 2009 THIS BULLETIN SUPERSEDES TECHNICAL SERVICE BULLETIN 26-003-07, DATED MARCH 30, 2007, WHICH SHOULD BE REMOVED FROM YOUR FILES. THIS IS A COMPLETE REVISION AND NO ASTERISKS HAVE BEEN USED TO HIGHLIGHT REVISIONS. SUBJECT: Fluid Flushing Requirements MODELS: 2005 - 2008 (CS) Pacifica 2006 - 2009 (D1) Ram Truck (3500 Pick Up) 2010 (D2) Ram Truck (3500 Pick Up) 2007 - 2010 (DC) Ram Truck (3500 Chassis Cab) 2005 - 2009 (DH) Ram Truck (1500/2500 Pick Up) 2010 (DJ) Ram Truck (2500 Pick Up) 2005 - 2008 (DR) Ram Truck (1500/2500 Pick Up) 2009 - 2010 (DS) Ram Truck (1500) 2005 - 2009 (HB) Durango 2007 - 2009 (HG) Aspen 2009 - 2010 (JC) Journey 2007 - 2010 (JK) Wrangler 2005 - 2006 (JR) Sebring Sedan & Convertible/Stratus Sedan 2007 - 2010 (JS) Avenger/Sebring 2008 - 2010 (KK) Liberty 2007 - 2010 (KA) Nitro 2005 - 2007 (KJ) Liberty 2009 - 2010 (LC) Challenger 2005 - 2010 (LE) 300C/300C Touring (International Markets) 2005 - 2010 (LX) 300/Magnum/Charger 2007 - 2010 (MK) Compass/Patriot 2005 - 2010 (ND) Dakota 2005 - 2006 (PL) Neon 2007 - 2010 (PM) Caliber 2005 - 2010 (PT) Chrysler PT Cruiser Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Fluid > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Maintenance - Fluid Flushing Information > Page 9793 2005 - 2007 (RG) Chrysler Voyager (International Markets) 2005 - 2007 (RS) Town & Country/Caravan/Voyager 2009 - 2010 (RT) Town & Country/Grand Caravan 2005 - 2006 (TJ) Wrangler 2005 - 2006 (VA) Sprinter 2007 - 2010 (VB) Sprinter 2005 - 2010 (WH) Grand Cherokee (International Markets) 2005 - 2010 (WK) Grand Cherokee 2006 - 2010 (XH) Commander (International Markets) 2006 - 2010 (XK) Commander 2005 - 2010 (ZB) Viper 2005 - 2007 (ZH) Crossfire DISCUSSION: Chrysler Group vehicle fluid systems do NOT require regular flushing. These systems include: engine oil, transmission oil, axle lube, brake fluid, power steering fluid, and refrigerant. The only exception to this requirement are published in the vehicle maintenance schedules, e.g. engine coolant. Exceptions to this recommendation include only those instances where a failure has occurred and/or the system has become compromised, contaminated or overheated beyond the normal operating range. Chrysler Group does NOT recommend aftermarket chemicals to flush the engine, transmission, brake or steering systems. Chemicals contained in these products can damage the system elastomeric components, and contaminate the component fluid, leading to loss of system/component durability and service life. When necessary, only the original approved system fluid should be used to flush these components using teamPSE(R) approved equipment. If the engine coolant contains a considerable amount of sediment, clean and flush with Mopar Cooling System Flush, p/n 04856977, or equivalent. Follow with a thorough rinsing to remove all deposits and chemicals. Refill with a minimum of a 50% mixture of the specified coolant and distilled water. POLICY: Information Only Disclaimer: This bulletin is supplied as technical information only and is not an authorization for repair. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Fluid > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 9794 Brake Fluid: Specifications BRAKE FLUID Mopar DOT 3 and SAE J1703 or equivalent. NOTE: If DOT 3 is not available, the DOT 4 is acceptable. Use only recommended brake fluids. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Fluid > Component Information > Description and Operation > Fluid Brake Fluid: Description and Operation Fluid BRAKE FLUID The brake fluid used in this vehicle must conform to DOT 3 specifications and SAE J1703 standards. No other type of brake fluid is recommended or approved for usage in the vehicle brake system. Use only Mopar brake fluid or an equivalent from a tightly sealed container. CAUTION: Never use reclaimed brake fluid or fluid from a container which has been left open. An open container of brake fluid will absorb moisture from the air and contaminate the fluid. CAUTION: Never use any type of a petroleum-based fluid in the brake hydraulic system. Use of such type fluids will result in seal damage of the vehicle brake hydraulic system causing a failure of the vehicle brake system. Petroleum based fluids would be items such as engine oil, transmission fluid, power steering fluid, etc. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Fluid > Component Information > Description and Operation > Fluid > Page 9797 Brake Fluid: Description and Operation Brake Fluid BRAKE FLUID The brake fluid used in this vehicle must conform to DOT 3 specifications and SAE J1703 standards. No other type of brake fluid is recommended or approved for usage in the vehicle brake system. Use only Mopar brake fluid or an equivalent from a tightly sealed container. CAUTION: Never use reclaimed brake fluid or fluid from a container which has been left open. An open container of brake fluid will absorb moisture from the air and contaminate the fluid. CAUTION: Never use any type of a petroleum-based fluid in the brake hydraulic system. Use of such type fluids will result in seal damage of the vehicle brake hydraulic system causing a failure of the vehicle brake system. Petroleum based fluids would be items such as engine oil, transmission fluid, power steering fluid, etc. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Fluid > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 9798 Brake Fluid: Testing and Inspection BRAKE FLUID CONTAMINATION Indications of fluid contamination are swollen or deteriorated rubber parts. Swollen rubber parts indicate the presence of petroleum in the brake fluid. To test for contamination, put a small amount of drained brake fluid in clear glass jar. If fluid separates into layers, there is mineral oil or other fluid contamination of the brake fluid. If brake fluid is contaminated, drain and thoroughly flush system. Replace master cylinder, proportioning valve, caliper seals, wheel cylinder seals, Antilock Brakes hydraulic unit and all hydraulic fluid hoses. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Fluid > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 9799 Brake Fluid: Service and Repair BRAKE FLUID LEVEL Always clean the master cylinder reservoir (1) and cap (2) before checking fluid level. If not cleaned, dirt could enter the fluid. The fluid fill level is indicated on the side of the master cylinder reservoir (1). The correct fluid level is to the MAX indicator on the side of the reservoir. If necessary, add fluid to the proper level. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Fluid Level Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Locations Brake Fluid Level Sensor/Switch: Locations Component ID: 404 Component : SENSOR-BRAKE FLUID LEVEL Connector: Name : SENSOR-BRAKE FLUID LEVEL Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Pin Circuit Description 1 B20 20DG/OR BRAKE FLUID LEVEL SWITCH SENSE 2 Z420 20BK/OR GROUND Component Location - 32 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Fluid Level Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 9803 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Fluid Level Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 9804 Brake Fluid Level Sensor/Switch: Diagrams Component ID: 404 Component : SENSOR-BRAKE FLUID LEVEL Connector: Name : SENSOR-BRAKE FLUID LEVEL Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Pin Circuit Description 1 B20 20DG/OR BRAKE FLUID LEVEL SWITCH SENSE 2 Z420 20BK/OR GROUND Component Location - 32 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Fluid Level Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 9805 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Hose/Line > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures Brake Hose/Line: Procedures Double Inverted Flaring DOUBLE INVERTED FLARING A preformed metal brake tube is recommended and preferred for all repairs. However, double-wall steel tube can be used for emergency repair when factory replacement parts are not readily available. 1. Cut off damaged tube with Tubing Cutter. 2. Ream cut edges of tubing to ensure proper flare. 3. Install replacement tube nut on the tube. 4. Insert tube in flaring tool. 5. Place gauge form over the end of the tube. 6. Push tubing through flaring tool jaws until tube contacts recessed notch in gauge that matches tube diameter. 7. Tighten the tool bar on the tube 8. Insert plug on gauge in the tube. Then swing compression disc over gauge and center tapered flaring screw in recess of compression disc. 9. Tighten tool handle until plug gauge is squarely seated on jaws of flaring tool. This will start the inverted flare. 10. Remove the plug gauge and complete the inverted flare. ISO Flaring ISO FLARING A preformed metal brake tube is recommended and preferred for all repairs. However, double-wall steel tube can be used for emergency repair when factory replacement parts are not readily available. To make a ISO flare use an ISO flaring tool kit. 1. Cut off damaged tube with Tubing Cutter. 2. Remove any burrs from the inside of the tube. 3. Install tube nut on the tube. 4. Position the tube in the flaring tool flush with the top of the tool bar (6). Then tighten the tool bar on the tube. 5. Install the correct size adaptor (1) on the flaring tool yoke screw. 6. Lubricate the adaptor (2). 7. Align the adaptor and yoke screw over the tube. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Hose/Line > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 9810 8. Turn the yoke screw in until the adaptor is squarely seated on the tool bar. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Hose/Line > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 9811 Brake Hose/Line: Removal and Replacement Front Brake Hose - Heavy Duty (HD) FRONT BRAKE HOSE - HEAVY DUTY (HD) 1. Raise and support vehicle. 2. Remove the brake hose (5) from the brake line (1) located at the frame. 3. Remove the brake hose banjo bolt (4) at the caliper. 4. Remove the mounting bolt securing the brake hose (2) to the axle and remove the wheel speed sensor wire (3) from the brake hose (5). 5. Remove the hose (5). Rear Tube / Hose Assembly REAR TUBE / HOSE ASSEMBLY 1. Raise and support the vehicle. 2. Remove the brake line located at the axle. 3. Remove the mounting bolt (2) for the brake hose (3) at the axle. 4. Remove the banjo bolt (1) at the caliper. 5. Remove the hose. Front Brake Hose FRONT BRAKE HOSE Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Hose/Line > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 9812 1. Raise and support vehicle. 2. Remove the tire and wheel assembly. 3. Remove the brake hose (2) from the brake line located at the frame. 4. Remove the brake hose banjo bolt (3) at the caliper. 5. Remove the mounting bolt securing the brake hose (2) to the frame and remove the wheel speed sensor wire (4) from the brake hose (2). 6. Remove the hose. Rear Brake Hose REAR BRAKE HOSE 1. Raise and support the vehicle. 2. Remove the brake line (3) from the hose (1) at the frame. 3. Remove the brake hose clip (2) at the top of the hose located at the frame. 4. Remove the vent hose (2). 5. Remove the two brake lines (3) at the bottom of the hose (1) located at the axle. 6. Remove the mounting bolt for the brake hose at the axle. 7. Remove the hose. Rear Brake Hose - Heavy Duty (HD) REAR BRAKE HOSE - HEAVY DUTY (HD) Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Hose/Line > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 9813 1. Raise and support the vehicle. 2. Remove the brake line (2) located at the axle. 3. Remove the mounting bolt (4) for the brake hose (3) at the axle. 4. Remove the banjo bolt (2) at the caliper. 5. Remove the hose (3). Front Brake Hose - Heavy Duty (HD) FRONT BRAKE HOSE - HEAVY DUTY (HD) 1. Install the hose (5). 2. Install the mounting bolt (2) for the brake hose (5) at the axle. 3. Install the brake hose banjo bolt (4) at the caliper. 4. Reinstall the wheel speed sensor wire (3) to the brake hose (5). 5. Remove the support and lower the vehicle. 6. Bleed the brake system See: Brake Bleeding . Rear Tube / Hose Assembly REAR TUBE / HOSE ASSEMBLY Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Hose/Line > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 9814 1. Install the hose (3). 2. Install the banjo bolt (1) at the caliper and tighten fitting bolt to 27 Nm (245 in. lbs.). 3. Install the mounting bolt (2) for the brake hose (3) at the axle. 4. Install the brake line located at the axle. 5. Lower the vehicle and remove the support. 6. Bleed the brake system See: Brake Bleeding . Front Brake Hose FRONT BRAKE HOSE 1. Install the hose (3). 2. Install the mounting bolt (1) for the brake hose (3) at the frame. 3. Install the brake hose banjo bolt at the caliper. 4. Reinstall the wheel speed sensor wire (2) to the brake hose. 5. Remove the support and lower the vehicle. 6. Bleed the brake system See: Brake Bleeding . Rear Brake Hose REAR BRAKE HOSE 1. Install the hose (1). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Hose/Line > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 9815 2. Install the mounting bolt for the brake hose (1) at the axle. 3. Install the two brake lines (3) at the bottom of the hose located at the axle. 4. Install the vent hose (2). 5. Install the brake hose clip (2) at the top of the hose (1) located at the frame. 6. Install the brake line (3) to the hose at the frame. 7. Lower the vehicle and remove the support. 8. Bleed the brake system See: Brake Bleeding . Rear Brake Hose - Heavy Duty (HD) REAR BRAKE HOSE - HEAVY DUTY (HD) 1. Install the hose (3). 2. Install the banjo bolt (2) at the caliper and tighten fitting bolt to 27 Nm (245 in. lbs.). 3. Install the mounting bolt (4) for the brake hose (3) at the axle. 4. Install the brake line (2) located at the axle. 5. Lower the vehicle and remove the support. 6. Bleed the brake system See: Brake Bleeding . Removal REMOVAL Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Hose/Line > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 9816 1. Remove the brake lines (1) from the junction block (2). 2. Remove the junction block (2) mounting bolt and remove the junction block from the bracket. Installation INSTALLATION 1. Position the junction block (2) on the bracket and install the mounting bolt. Tighten the mounting bolt to 23 Nm (210 in. lbs.). 2. Install the brake lines (1) into the junction block (2) and tighten to 19-23 Nm (170-200 in. lbs.). 3. Bleed the base brake system, See: Brake Bleeding . Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Hydraulic Control Assembly Antilock Brakes > Component Information > Description and Operation > Electronic Variable Brake Proportioning Hydraulic Control Assembly - Antilock Brakes: Description and Operation Electronic Variable Brake Proportioning Description DESCRIPTION - ELECTRONIC VARIABLE BRAKE PROPORTIONING Vehicles equipped with ABS use electronic variable brake proportioning (EVBP) to balance front-to-rear braking. The EVBP is used in place of a rear proportioning valve. The EVBP system uses the ABS system to control the slip of the rear wheels in partial braking range. The braking force of the rear wheels is controlled electronically by using the inlet and outlet valves located in the integrated control unit (ICU). Operation OPERATION - ELECTRONIC VARIABLE BRAKE PROPORTIONING EVBP is able to decrease, hold and increase rear brake pressure without activating full ABS control. Upon entry into EVBP the inlet valve for the rear brake circuit is switched on so that the fluid supply from the master cylinder is shut off. In order to decrease the rear brake pressure, the outlet valve for the rear brake circuit is pulsed. This allows fluid to enter the low pressure accumulator (LPA) in the hydraulic control unit (HCU) resulting in a drop in fluid pressure to the rear brakes. In order to increase the rear brake pressure, the outlet valve is switched off and the inlet valve is pulsed. This increases the pressure to the rear brakes. The EVBP will remain functional during many ABS fault modes. If both the red BRAKE and amber ABS warning indicators are illuminated, the EVBP may not be functioning. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Hydraulic Control Assembly Antilock Brakes > Component Information > Description and Operation > Electronic Variable Brake Proportioning > Page 9821 Hydraulic Control Assembly - Antilock Brakes: Description and Operation Hydraulic Control Unit (HCU) Description DESCRIPTION The HCU (3) consists of a valve body, pump motor, low pressure accumulators, inlet valves, outlet valves and noise attenuators. Operation OPERATION Accumulators in the valve body store extra fluid released to the system for ABS mode operation. The pump provides the fluid volume needed and is operated by a DC type motor. The motor is controlled by the ABM. The valves modulate brake pressure during antilock braking and are controlled by the ABM. The HCU provides three channel pressure control to the front and rear brakes. One channel controls the rear wheel brakes in tandem. The two remaining channels control the front wheel brakes individually. During antilock braking, the solenoid valves are opened and closed as needed. During normal braking, the HCU solenoid valves and pump are not activated. The master cylinder and power booster operate the same as a vehicle without an ABS brake system. NOTE: The three modes mentioned below do occur but not necessarily in the order listed every time. During antilock braking, solenoid valve pressure modulation occurs in three stages, pressure increase, pressure hold, and pressure decrease. The valves are all contained in the valve body portion of the HCU. PRESSURE DECREASE The outlet valve is opened and the inlet valve is closed during the pressure decrease cycle. A pressure decrease cycle is initiated when speed sensor signals indicate high wheel slip at one or more wheels. At this point, the ABM closes the inlet then opens the outlet valve, which also opens the return circuit to the accumulators. Fluid pressure is allowed to bleed off (decrease) as needed to prevent wheel lock. Once the period of high wheel slip has ended, the ABM closes the outlet valve and begins a pressure increase or hold cycle as needed. PRESSURE HOLD Both solenoid valves are closed in the pressure hold cycle but only the inlet valve is energized. Fluid apply pressure in the control channel is maintained at a constant rate. The ABM maintains the hold cycle until sensor inputs indicate a pressure change is necessary. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Hydraulic Control Assembly Antilock Brakes > Component Information > Description and Operation > Electronic Variable Brake Proportioning > Page 9822 PRESSURE INCREASE The inlet valve is open and the outlet valve is closed during the pressure increase cycle. The pressure increase cycle is used to reapply thew brakes. This cycle controls re-application of fluid apply pressure. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Hydraulic Control Assembly Antilock Brakes > Component Information > Description and Operation > Electronic Variable Brake Proportioning > Page 9823 Hydraulic Control Assembly - Antilock Brakes: Description and Operation RWAL Valve Description DESCRIPTION Rear Wheel Antilock (RWAL) brake system is standard equipment on 1500 series vehicles. The RWAL brake system is designed to prevent rear wheel lock-up on virtually all types of road surfaces. RWAL braking is desirable because a vehicle which is stopped without locking the rear wheels will retain directional stability. This allows the driver to retain greater control of the vehicle during braking. The valve is located on the drivers side inner fender under the hood. The valve modulates hydraulic pressure to the rear brakes. The RWAL components include: - RWAL Valve(1) - Controller Antilock brake (CAB) - Rear Wheel Speed Sensor (WSS) Operation OPERATION When the brakes are applied, hydraulic fluid is routed from the master cylinder's secondary circuit to the RWAL valve. From there hydraulic fluid is routed to the rear brakes. The Controller Antilock Brake (CAB) contains an Electronic Variable Brake Proportioning (EVBP) control algorithm, which proportions the applied braking force to the rear wheels during braking. The EVBP function of the RWAL system takes the place of a conventional hydraulic proportioning valve. The CAB monitors the rear wheel speed through the rear wheel speed sensor and calculates an estimated vehicle deceleration. When an established deceleration threshold is exceeded, an isolation valve is closed to hold the applied brake pressure to the rear brakes constant. Upon further increases in the estimated vehicle deceleration, the isolation valve is selectively opened to increase rear brake pressure in proportion to the front brake pressure. If impending rear wheel lock-up is sensed, the CAB signals the RWAL valve to modulate hydraulic brake pressure to the rear wheels to prevent lock-up. NORMAL BRAKING Since the RWAL valve also performs the EVBP or proportioning function, vehicle deceleration under normal braking may be sufficient to trigger the EVBP function of the RWAL system without full RWAL activity as would normally occur during an impending rear wheel lock-up. As previously mentioned, the isolation valve is selectively closed and opened to increase rear brake pressure in proportion to the front brake pressure under EVBP control. Slight brake pedal pulsations may be noticed as the isolation valve is opened. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Hydraulic Control Assembly Antilock Brakes > Component Information > Service and Repair > RWAL Valve Hydraulic Control Assembly - Antilock Brakes: Service and Repair RWAL Valve Removal REMOVAL 1. Disconnect the battery cables from the battery. 2. Remove the battery. 3. Disconnect the electrical harness connector. 4. Remove the brake lines from the RWAL valve (1). 5. Remove RWAL valve mounting nuts (2) and remove the RWAL valve (1). Installation INSTALLATION 1. Install RWAL valve (1) and Tighten the nuts (2) to 15 Nm (11 ft. lbs.). 2. Install the brake lines to the RWAL valve and tighten to 19 Nm (170 in. lbs.). 3. Install the electrical harness connector to the RWAL valve and secure the connector. 4. Install the battery. 5. Install the battery cables to the battery. 6. Bleed ABS brake system See: Brake Bleeding . Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Hydraulic Control Assembly Antilock Brakes > Component Information > Service and Repair > RWAL Valve > Page 9826 Hydraulic Control Assembly - Antilock Brakes: Service and Repair Hydraulic Control unit (HCU) Installation INSTALLATION NOTE: If the ABM (2) is being replaced with a new ABM is must be reprogrammed with the use of a scan tool. 1. Install HCU/ABM (3) on the mounts to the battery tray (4) and Tighten the bolts to 15 Nm (11 ft. lbs.). 2. Install the brake lines to the HCU (3) and tighten to 19 Nm (170 in. lbs.). 3. Install the electrical harness connectors to the HCU/ABM (3) and push down on the release to secure the connectors. 4. Install the battery. 5. Install the battery cables to the battery. 6. Bleed ABS brake system See: Brake Bleeding . Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Hydraulic Control Assembly Antilock Brakes > Component Information > Service and Repair > RWAL Valve > Page 9827 Hydraulic Control Assembly - Antilock Brakes: Service and Repair Hydraulic Control unit (HCU) Removal REMOVAL 1. Disconnect the battery cables from the battery. 2. Remove the battery. 3. Disconnect the electrical harness connectors. 4. Remove the brake lines from the HCU (3). 5. Remove HCU/ABM mounting bolts (1) and remove the HCU/ABM (3) from the battery tray (4). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Master Cylinder > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Brake Master Cylinder: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION A two-piece master cylinder is used on all models. The cylinder body containing the primary and secondary pistons is made of aluminum. The removable fluid reservoir is made of nylon reinforced with glass fiber. The reservoir stores reserve brake fluid for the hydraulic brake circuits and has a switch for indicating low fluid levels. The reservoir is the only serviceable component. The fluid compartments of the nylon reservoir are interconnected to permit fluid level equalization. However, the equalization feature does not affect circuit separation in the event of a front or rear brake malfunction. The reservoir compartments will retain enough fluid to operate the functioning hydraulic circuit. Care must be exercised when removing/installing the master cylinder connecting lines. The threads in the cylinder fluid ports can be damaged if care is not exercised. Start all brake line fittings by hand to avoid cross threading. The cylinder reservoir can be replaced when necessary. However, the aluminum body section of the master cylinder is not a repairable component. NOTE: If diagnosis indicates that an internal malfunction has occurred, the aluminum body section must be replaced as an assembly. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Master Cylinder > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 9832 Brake Master Cylinder: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The master cylinder bore contains a primary and secondary piston. The primary piston supplies hydraulic pressure to the front brakes. The secondary piston supplies hydraulic pressure to the rear brakes. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Master Cylinder > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 9833 Brake Master Cylinder: Testing and Inspection MASTER CYLINDER/POWER BOOSTER 1. Start engine and check booster vacuum hose connections. A hissing noise indicates vacuum leak. Correct any vacuum leak before proceeding. 2. Stop engine and shift transmission into Neutral. 3. Pump brake pedal until all vacuum reserve in booster is depleted. 4. Press and hold brake pedal under light foot pressure. The pedal should hold firm, if the pedal falls away master cylinder is faulty (internal leakage). 5. Start engine and note pedal action. It should fall away slightly under light foot pressure then hold firm. If no pedal action is discernible, power booster, vacuum supply, or vacuum check valve is faulty. Proceed to the POWER BOOSTER VACUUM TEST. 6. If the POWER BOOSTER VACUUM TEST passes, rebuild booster vacuum reserve as follows: Release brake pedal. Increase engine speed to 1500 rpm, close the throttle and immediately turn off ignition to stop engine. 7. Wait a minimum of 90 seconds and try brake action again. Booster should provide two or more vacuum assisted pedal applications. If vacuum assist is not provided, booster is faulty. POWER BOOSTER VACUUM TEST 1. Connect vacuum gauge (6) to booster check valve (4) with short length of hose (3) and T-fitting (2). 2. Start and run engine at curb idle speed for one minute. 3. Observe the vacuum supply. If vacuum supply is not adequate, repair vacuum supply. 4. Clamp (1) hose (7) shut between intake vacuum source (5) and check valve (4). 5. Stop engine and observe vacuum gauge (6). 6. If vacuum drops more than one inch HG (33 millibars) within 15 seconds, booster diaphragm or check valve is faulty. POWER BOOSTER CHECK VALVE TEST 1. Disconnect vacuum hose from check valve (1). 2. Remove check valve (1) and valve seal (2) from booster (3). 3. Use a hand operated vacuum pump for test. 4. Apply 15-20 inches vacuum at large end of check valve. 5. Plug off the small end to prevent vacuum leakage. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Master Cylinder > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 9834 6. Vacuum should hold steady. If gauge on pump indicates vacuum loss, check valve is faulty and should be replaced. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Master Cylinder > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures Brake Master Cylinder: Procedures MASTER CYLINDER BLEEDING A new master cylinder should be bled before installation on the vehicle. Required bleeding tools include bleed tubes and a wood dowel to stroke the pistons. Bleed tubes can be fabricated from brake line. 1. Mount master cylinder in vise. 2. Attach bleed tubes to cylinder outlet ports (1). Then position each tube end into reservoir (2). 3. Fill reservoir with fresh brake fluid. 4. Press cylinder pistons inward with wood dowel. Then release pistons and allow them to return under spring pressure. Continue bleeding operations until air bubbles are no longer visible in fluid. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Master Cylinder > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 9837 Brake Master Cylinder: Removal and Replacement Removal REMOVAL 1. Install the prop rod on the brake pedal to keep pressure on the brake system. 2. Remove the reservoir cap (1) and siphon fluid into a drain container. 3. Remove the electrical connector from the fluid level switch (3) in the reservoir (2). 4. Remove the reservoir mounting bolt (5). 5. Remove the reservoir (2) from the master cylinder (4) by pulling upwards. 6. Remove old grommets from cylinder body. Installation INSTALLATION CAUTION: Do not use any type of tool to install the grommets. Tools may cut, or tear the grommets creating a leak problem after installation. Install the grommets using finger pressure only. 1. Lubricate the new grommets (6) with clean brake fluid and Install new grommets in cylinder body. Use finger pressure to install and seat grommets (6). 2. Start the reservoir (2) in grommets (6). Then rock the reservoir back and forth while pressing downward to seat it into the grommets. 3. Install the mounting bolt (5) for the reservoir (2) to the master cylinder (4). 4. Reconnect the electrical connector to the fluid reservoir level switch (3). 5. Remove the prop rod from the vehicle. 6. Fill and bleed base brake system, See: Brake Bleeding . All Except Hydroboost ALL EXCEPT HYDROBOOST Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Master Cylinder > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 9838 1. Depress the brake pedal five times to deplete any vacuum that may remain in the booster unit. 2. Siphon and drain the fluid from the reservoir. 3. Disconnect the electrical connector for the low fluid level. 4. Place a towel or rag under the master cylinder outlet port area to protect the vehicle from brake fluid damage. 5. Remove the brake lines (3) from the master cylinder (4). 6. Remove the mounting nuts from the master cylinder (4). 7. Remove the master cylinder (4). NOTE: Gently ease the master cylinder & reservoir assembly away from the booster, During removal the master cylinder should be kept as perpendicular to the front of the booster as possible to avoid excess interference with the booster output rod and in order not to dislodge the output rod from its seat inside the booster. Hydroboost HYDROBOOST 1. Remove the brake lines (5) from the master cylinder (3). 2. Disconnect the electrical connector (1) for the low fluid level. 3. Remove the mounting nut (4) from bottom of the master cylinder (3). 4. Unclip the wiring box (3) next to the master cylinder (4) and move out of the way. 5. Remove the upper mounting nut (2) for the master cylinder. 6. Remove the master cylinder (4). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Master Cylinder > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 9839 NOTE: Using care remove the master cylinder directly forward in order not to dislodge the output rod from its seat inside the booster. All Except Hydroboost ALL EXCEPT HYDROBOOST NOTE: If master cylinder is replaced bleed cylinder before installation. NOTE: Make sure the output rod of the brake booster is in position and retained by a output rod retaining ring, by looking into the boosters master cylinder mounting hole. This position will enable the output rod to enter inside of the master cylinder plunger sleeve during installation. Proper position is obtained when the output rod is centered perpendicular to the master cylinder mounting hole. NOTE: Prior to installing the master cylinder assembly check that there is a vacuum seal present at the shoulder of the master cylinder flange and it's neck. A square seal must be present to ensure vacuum integrity with the booster. 1. Gently install the master cylinder (9) on the booster mounting studs (4). NOTE: Take precautions to locate the master cylinder plunger over the booster output rod, before installing the master cylinder. If correctly fitted the master cylinder should slide easily onto the booster output rod before the mounting studs are engaged in the flange holes of the master cylinder. 2. Install new mounting nuts and tighten to 25 Nm (221 in. lbs.) 3. Install the brake lines and tighten to 19 Nm (170 in. lbs.) 4. Reconnect the electrical connector for the low fluid level switch. 5. Fill and bleed the base brake system. See: Brake Bleeding . Hydroboost HYDROBOOST NOTE: If master cylinder is replaced bleed cylinder before installation. 1. Install the master cylinder (4) on the booster mounting studs. 2. Install a new upper mounting nut (2) and tighten to 25 Nm (221 in. lbs.). 3. Reinstall the wiring box (3) back into position and reclip. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Master Cylinder > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 9840 4. Install a new lower mounting nut (4) and tighten to 25 Nm (221 in. lbs.). 5. Install the brake lines (5) and tighten to 19 Nm (170 in. lbs.) 6. Reconnect the electrical connector (1) for the low fluid level switch. 7. Fill and bleed the base brake system. See: Brake Bleeding . Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake System > Parking Brake Cable > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Parking Brake Cable: Service and Repair Removal Front Parking Brake Cable FRONT PARKING BRAKE CABLE 1. Raise and support vehicle. 2. Lockout the parking brake cable (2). 3. Loosen adjusting nut to create slack in front cable. 4. Remove the front cable from the cable connector. 5. Compress cable end fitting at underbody bracket and remove the cable from the bracket. 6. Lower vehicle. 7. Push ball end of cable out of pedal clevis with small screwdriver. 8. Compress cable end fitting at the pedal bracket (1) and remove the cable (2). 9. Remove the left cowl trim and sill plate. 10. Pull up the carpet and remove the cable from the body clip. 11. Pull up on the cable and remove the cable with the body grommet. Rear Park Brake Cable REAR PARK BRAKE CABLE Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake System > Parking Brake Cable > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 9846 1. Raise and support the vehicle. 2. Lockout the parking brake cable (2). 3. Loosen cable adjuster nut. 4. Remove the rear park brake cable from the intermediate park brake cable. 5. Compress tabs on cable end fitting on the rear park brake cable to the frame mount bracket. Then pull the cable through the bracket. 6. Disengage the park brake cable (2) from behind the rotor assembly. 7. Compress cable tabs on each cable end fitting at the brake cable support plate. 8. Remove the cables from the brake cable support plates. Right Rear Cable RIGHT REAR CABLE 1. Raise and support the vehicle. 2. Lockout the parking brake cable (2). 3. Loosen the brake cable at the equalizer and adjuster nut. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake System > Parking Brake Cable > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 9847 4. Remove the right cable from the front cable. 5. Remove the right cable from the equalizer. 6. Remove the cable from the frame bracket. 7. Remove the cable from the axle bracket. 8. Remove the cable bracket from the shock bracket. 9. Remove the brake cable (4) from the brake lever (3). Left Rear Cable LEFT REAR CABLE 1. Raise and support the vehicle. 2. Lockout the parking brake cable (2). 3. Loosen the brake cable at the equalizer and adjuster nut. 4. Remove the left brake cable from the equalizer. 5. Remove the brake cable (4) from the frame bracket. 6. Remove the brake cable (4) from the brake lever. Rear Brake Cable - 4500 & 5500 REAR BRAKE CABLE - 4500 & 5500 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake System > Parking Brake Cable > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 9848 1. Raise and support the vehicle. 2. Lockout the parking brake cable. 3. Loosen cable adjuster nut. 4. Remove the rear park brake cable from the intermediate park brake cable. 5. Compress tabs on cable end fitting on the rear park brake cable to the frame mount bracket. Then pull the cable through the bracket. 6. Disengage the park brake cable (1) from behind the rotor assembly. 7. Compress cable tabs (3) on each cable end fitting at the brake cable support plate. 8. Remove the cables (4) from the brake cable support plates. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake System > Parking Brake Cable > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 9849 Parking Brake Cable: Service and Repair Installation Front Parking Brake Cable FRONT PARKING BRAKE CABLE 1. From inside the vehicle, insert the cable end fitting (2) into the hole in the pedal assembly (1). 2. Seat the cable retainer in the pedal assembly (1). 3. Engage the cable ball end in clevis on the pedal assembly. 4. Route the cable through the floorpan and install the body grommet. 5. Place the carpet down and install the left cowl trim and sill plate. 6. Raise and support the vehicle. 7. Route the cable through the underbody bracket and seat the cable end fitting in the bracket. 8. Connect the cable to the cable connector. 9. Perform the park brake adjustment procedure, See: Adjustments . 10. Lower the vehicle. Rear Park Brake Cable REAR PARK BRAKE CABLE 1. Push each cable end (2) through the brake cable support plate hole until the cable end fitting tabs lock into place. NOTE: Pull on the cable to ensure it is locked into place. 2. Push the cable through the frame bracket. 3. Lock the left cable end fitting tabs into the frame bracket hole. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake System > Parking Brake Cable > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 9850 4. Install the rear cables into the tensioner rod behind the rear of the brake assembly. 5. Install the cable to the intermediate cable connector. 6. Release and remove the lock out device. 7. Perform the park brake adjustment procedure, See: Adjustments . 8. Remove the supports and lower the vehicle. Right Rear Cable RIGHT REAR CABLE 1. Install the brake cable (2) to the brake lever (3). 2. Install the cable bracket to the shock bracket. 3. Install the cable to the axle bracket. 4. Install the cable to the frame bracket. 5. Install the right cable to the equalizer. 6. Install the right cable to the front cable. 7. Adjust the brake cable at the equalizer and using the adjuster nut. Left Rear Cable LEFT REAR CABLE 1. Install the brake cable (4) to the brake lever. 2. Install the brake cable to the frame bracket. 3. Install the left brake cable to the equalizer. 4. Adjust the brake cable at the equalizer and adjuster nut. Rear Brake Cable - 4500 & 5500 REAR BRAKE CABLE - 4500 & 5500 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake System > Parking Brake Cable > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 9851 1. Install the rear cables (4) into the tensioner rod (1) behind the rear of the brake assembly. 2. Push each cable end (3) through the brake cable support plate hole until the cable end fitting tabs lock into place. NOTE: Pull on the cable to ensure it is locked into place. 3. Push the cable through the frame bracket. 4. Lock the left cable end fitting tabs into the frame bracket hole. 5. Install the cable to the intermediate cable connector. 6. Release and remove the lock out device. 7. Perform the park brake adjustment procedure, See: Adjustments . 8. Remove the supports and lower the vehicle. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake System > Parking Brake Lever > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Parking Brake Lever: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. 2. Reach under the driver side outboard end of the instrument panel to access and unsnap the plastic retainer clip that secures the park brake release linkage rod to the park brake mechanism on the left cowl side inner panel. 3. Disengage the park brake release linkage rod end from the park brake mechanism. 4. Lift the park brake release handle to access and unsnap the plastic retainer clip that secures the park brake release linkage rod to the lever on the back of the park brake release handle. 5. Lower the park brake release handle and reach under the driver side outboard end of the instrument panel to disengage the park brake release linkage rod end from the lever on the back of the park brake release handle. 6. Lift the park brake release handle to access the handle mounting bracket. 7. Using a trim stick (4) or another suitable wide flat-bladed tool, gently pry each of the park brake release handle (6) mounting bracket latch tabs (5) away from the retaining notches in the instrument panel receptacle. 8. With both of the park brake release handle mounting bracket latches released, slide the handle and bracket assembly down and out of the instrument panel receptacle. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake System > Parking Brake Lever > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 9856 Parking Brake Lever: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION 1. Position the park brake release handle to the instrument panel. 2. Slide the handle and bracket assembly up into the instrument panel receptacle until both of the park brake release handle (6) mounting bracket latches are engaged with the notches in the instrument panel receptacle. 3. Lower the park brake release handle and reach under the driver side outboard end of the instrument panel to engage the park brake release linkage rod end with the lever on the back of the park brake release handle (6). 4. Lift the park brake release handle to access and snap the plastic retainer clip that secures the park brake release linkage rod to the lever on the back of the park brake release handle over the linkage rod. 5. Reach under the driver side outboard end of the instrument panel to access and engage the park brake release linkage rod end to the park brake mechanism. 6. Snap the plastic retainer clip that secures the park brake release linkage rod to the park brake mechanism on the left cowl side inner panel over the linkage rod. 7. Reconnect the battery negative cable. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake System > Parking Brake Shoe > Component Information > Adjustments > Parking Brake Shoes Parking Brake Shoe: Adjustments Parking Brake Shoes PARKING BRAKE SHOES CAUTION: Before adjusting the park brake shoes be sure that the park brake pedal is in the fully released position. If park brake pedal is not in the fully released position, the park brake shoes can not be accurately adjusted. 1. Raise vehicle. 2. Remove tire and wheel. 3. Remove disc brake caliper from caliper adapter See: Disc Brake System/Brake Caliper/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Disc Brake Caliper - Removal . 4. Remove rotor from the axle shaft See: Disc Brake System/Brake Rotor/Disc/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Brake Rotor Removal . NOTE: When measuring the brake drum diameter, the diameter should be measured in the center of the area in which the park brake shoes contact the surface of the brake drum. 5. Using Brake Shoe Gauge, Special Tool C-3919 (1), or equivalent, accurately measure the inside diameter of the park brake drum portion (2) of the rotor. 6. Using a ruler (2) that reads in 64th of an inch, accurately read the measurement of the inside diameter of the park brake drum from the special tool (2). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake System > Parking Brake Shoe > Component Information > Adjustments > Parking Brake Shoes > Page 9861 7. Reduce the inside diameter measurement of the brake drum that was taken using Special Tool C-3919 (2) by 1/64 of an inch. Reset Gauge, Brake Shoe, Special Tool C-3919 (2) or the equivalent used, so that the outside measurement jaws are set to the reduced measurement. 8. Place Gauge, Brake Shoe, Special Tool C-3919, or equivalent over the park brake shoes. The special tool must be located diagonally across at the top of one shoe and bottom of opposite shoe (widest point) of the park brake shoes. 9. Using the star wheel adjuster, adjust the park brake shoes until the lining on the park brake shoes just touches the jaws on the special tool. 10. Repeat step 8 above and measure shoes in both directions. 11. Install brake rotor on the axle shaft See: Disc Brake System/Brake Rotor/Disc/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Brake Rotor Installation . 12. Rotate rotor to verify that the park brake shoes are not dragging on the brake drum. If park brake shoes are dragging, remove rotor and back off star wheel adjuster one notch and recheck for brake shoe drag against drum. Continue with the previous step until brake shoes are not dragging on brake drum. 13. Install disc brake caliper on caliper adapter See: Disc Brake System/Brake Caliper/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Disc Brake Caliper - Installation . 14. Install wheel and tire. 15. Tighten the wheel mounting nuts in the proper sequence until all nuts are torqued to half the specified torque. Then repeat the tightening sequence to the full specified torque of 129 Nm (95 ft. lbs.) LD , 197 Nm (145 ft. lbs.) HD SRW , 210 Nm (155 ft. lbs.) HD DRW. 16. Lower vehicle. 17. Apply and release the park brake pedal one time. This will seat and correctly adjust the park brake cables. CAUTION: Before moving vehicle, pump brake pedal several times to ensure the vehicle has a firm enough pedal to stop the vehicle. 18. Road test the vehicle to ensure proper function of the vehicle's brake system. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake System > Parking Brake Shoe > Component Information > Adjustments > Parking Brake Shoes > Page 9862 Parking Brake Shoe: Adjustments With Adjusting Tool WITH ADJUSTING TOOL Adjustment can be made with a standard brake gauge or with adjusting tool. Adjustment is performed with the complete brake assembly installed on the backing plate. 1. Be sure parking brake lever is fully released. 2. Raise vehicle so rear wheels can be rotated freely. 3. Remove plug from each access hole in brake support plates. 4. Loosen parking brake cable adjustment nut until there is slack in front cable. 5. Insert adjusting tool (4) through support plate access hole (1) and engage tool in teeth of adjusting screw star wheel (2). 6. Rotate adjuster screw star wheel (move tool handle upward) until slight drag can be felt when wheel is rotated. 7. Push and hold adjuster lever away from star wheel with thin screwdriver (3). 8. Back off adjuster screw star wheel until brake drag is eliminated. 9. Repeat adjustment at opposite wheel. Be sure adjustment is equal at both wheels. 10. Install support plate access hole plugs. 11. Adjust parking brake cable and lower vehicle. 12. Depress park brake pedal and make sure park brakes hold the vehicle stationary. 13. Release park brake pedal. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake System > Parking Brake Warning Switch > Component Information > Locations Parking Brake Warning Switch: Locations Component ID: 497 Component : SWITCH-PARKING BRAKE Connector: Name : SWITCH-PARKING BRAKE Color : GRAY # of pins : 1 Pin Circuit Description 1 B25 20DG/WT PARK BRAKE SWITCH SENSE Component Location - 31 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake System > Parking Brake Warning Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 9866 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake System > Parking Brake Warning Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 9867 Parking Brake Warning Switch: Diagrams Component ID: 497 Component : SWITCH-PARKING BRAKE Connector: Name : SWITCH-PARKING BRAKE Color : GRAY # of pins : 1 Pin Circuit Description 1 B25 20DG/WT PARK BRAKE SWITCH SENSE Component Location - 31 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake System > Parking Brake Warning Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 9868 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake System > Parking Brake Warning Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Parking Brake Warning Switch: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The park brake switch (1) is located on the park brake lever mechanism on the cowl side inner panel below the instrument panel, to the left of the steering column. This switch includes a spade-type output terminal (3) that connects the switch to the vehicle electrical system through a dedicated take out and connector of the body wire harness. The output terminal is integral to the stationary contact within a molded plastic insulator. A locating tab on the insulator engages a slot in the park brake lever mechanism for positive switch location. External to the insulator is a movable leaf contact with an integral grounding lug (4) on one end and an integral actuating lever and follower (2) on the opposite end. The switch is secured to and grounded by a single screw to the park brake lever mechanism. The park brake switch cannot be adjusted or repaired and, if ineffective or damaged, it must be replaced. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake System > Parking Brake Warning Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 9871 Parking Brake Warning Switch: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The park brake switch is a normally closed, mechanically actuated leaf contact switch that is operated by the park brake lever mechanism. The switch is grounded through its mounting to the park brake lever mechanism and provides a ground input to the ElectroMechanical Instrument Cluster (EMIC) (also known as the Cab Compartment Node/CCN) on a park brake switch sense circuit whenever the park brake is applied, and opens this circuit whenever the park brake is released. The park brake switch sense input to the EMIC is used for control of the brake indicator and may also be used as a logic input for other electronic features in the vehicle. The park brake switch as well as the hard wired inputs and outputs of the switch may be diagnosed using conventional diagnostic tools and procedures. Refer to the appropriate wiring information. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake System > Parking Brake Warning Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 9872 Parking Brake Warning Switch: Testing and Inspection PARK BRAKE SWITCH WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury on vehicles equipped with airbags, disable the Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, airbag, seat belt tensioner, impact sensor, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the SRS. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment. NOTE: If the brake indicator stays ON with the ignition switch in the ON position and the park brake released, or comes ON while driving, the brake system must be diagnosed and repaired prior to performing the following tests. Refer to appropriate testing. If no brake system problem is found, the following procedures will help to locate a shorted or open park brake switch sense circuit, or an ineffective park brake switch. INDICATOR ILLUMINATES DURING BULB TEST, BUT DOES NOT WHEN PARK BRAKE APPLIED 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. Disconnect the body wire harness connector for the park brake switch from the switch terminal. Apply the parking brake. Check for continuity between the park brake switch terminal and a good ground. There should be continuity. If OK, go to STEP 2. If not OK, replace the ineffective park brake switch. 2. Disconnect the instrument panel wire harness connector (Connector C1) for the instrument cluster from the cluster connector receptacle. Check for continuity between the park brake switch sense circuit cavities of the body wire harness connector for the park brake switch and the instrument panel wire harness connector for the instrument cluster. There should be continuity. If not OK, repair the open park brake switch sense circuit between the park brake switch and the instrument cluster as required. INDICATOR REMAINS ILLUMINATED - BRAKE SYSTEM CHECKS OKAY 3. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. Disconnect the body wire harness connector for the park brake switch from the switch terminal. Check for continuity between the terminal of the park brake switch and a good ground. There should be no continuity with the park brake released, and continuity with the park brake applied. If OK, go to STEP 2. If not OK, replace the ineffective park brake switch. 4. Disconnect the instrument panel wire harness connector (Connector C1) for the instrument cluster from the cluster connector receptacle. Check for continuity between the park brake switch sense circuit cavity of the body wire harness connector for the park brake switch and a good ground. There should be no continuity. If not OK, repair the shorted park brake switch sense circuit between the park brake switch and the instrument cluster as required. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake System > Parking Brake Warning Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Parking Brake Warning Switch: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury on vehicles equipped with airbags, disable the Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, airbag, seat belt tensioner, impact sensor, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the SRS. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment. 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. 2. Apply the parking brake. 3. Reach under the left end of the instrument panel to access and disconnect the body wire harness connector (2) from the terminal of the park brake switch (4) located on the park brake lever mechanism (1) on the left cowl side inner panel. 4. Remove the screw (3) that secures the park brake switch to the park brake lever mechanism. 5. Remove the switch from the park brake lever mechanism. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake System > Parking Brake Warning Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 9875 Parking Brake Warning Switch: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury on vehicles equipped with airbags, disable the Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, airbag, seat belt tensioner, impact sensor, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the SRS. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment. 1. Reach under the left end of the instrument panel to position the park brake switch (4) onto the park brake lever mechanism (1) on the left cowl side inner panel. Be certain to engage the locating pin on the back of the switch insulator into the locating slot in the lever mechanism bracket. 2. Install and tighten the screw (3) that secures the park brake switch to the park brake lever mechanism. Tighten the screw to 3 Nm (24 in. lbs.). 3. Reconnect the body wire harness connector (2) to the terminal of the park brake switch. 4. Reconnect the battery negative cable. 5. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position and check for proper brake indicator operation with the parking brake applied, then release the parking brake and check that the brake indicator extinguishes. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Power Brake Assist > Hydraulic Brake Booster > Component Information > Testing and Inspection Hydraulic Brake Booster: Testing and Inspection HYDRAULIC BOOSTER The hydraulic booster uses hydraulic pressure from the power steering pump. Before diagnosing a booster problem, first verify the power steering pump is operating properly. Perform the following checks. - Check the power steering fluid level. - Check the brake fluid level. - Check all power steering hoses and lines for leaks and restrictions. - Check power steering pump pressure. NOISES The hydraulic booster unit will produce certain characteristic booster noises. The noises may occur when the brake pedal is used in a manner not associated with normal braking or driving habits. HISSING A hissing noise may be noticed when above normal brake pedal pressure is applied, 40 lbs. or above. The noise will be more noticeable if the vehicle is not moving. The noise will increase with the brake pedal pressure and an increase of system operating temperature. CLUNK-CHATTER-CLICKING A clunk-chatter-clicking may be noticed when the brake pedal is released quickly, after above normal brake pedal pressure is applied 50-100 lbs. BOOSTER FUNCTION TEST With the engine off depress the brake pedal several times to discharge the accumulator. Then depress the brake pedal using 40 lbs. of force and start the engine. The brake pedal should fall and then push back against your foot. This indicates the booster is operating properly. ACCUMULATOR LEAKDOWN 1. Start the engine, apply the brakes and turn the steering wheel from lock to lock. This will ensure the accumulator is charged. Turn off the engine and let the vehicle sit for one hour. After one hour there should be at least two power assisted brake application with the engine off. If the system does not retain a charge the booster must be replaced. 2. With the engine off depress the brake pedal several times to discharge the accumulator. Grasp the accumulator and see if it wobbles or turns. If it does the accumulator has lost a gas charge and the booster must be replaced. SEAL LEAKAGE If the booster leaks from any of the seals the booster assembly must be replaced. - INPUT ROD SEAL (3): Fluid leakage from rear end of the booster. - PISTON SEAL (6): Fluid leakage from vent at front of booster. - HOUSING SEAL (4): Fluid leakage between housing and housing cover. - SPOOL VALVE SEAL (7): Fluid leakage near spool plug. - RETURN PORT FITTING SEAL (8): Fluid leakage from port fitting. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Power Brake Assist > Hydraulic Brake Booster > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 9880 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Power Brake Assist > Hydraulic Brake Booster > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures Hydraulic Brake Booster: Procedures BLEEDING The hydraulic booster is generally self-bleeding, this procedure will normally bleed the air from the booster. Normal driving and operation of the unit will remove any remaining trapped air. 1. Fill power steering pump reservoir. 2. Disconnect fuel shutdown relay and crank the engine for several seconds. 3. Check fluid level and add if necessary. 4. Connect fuel shutdown relay and start the engine. 5. Turn the steering wheel slowly from lock to lock twice. 6. Stop the engine and discharge the accumulator by depressing the brake pedal 5 times. 7. Start the engine and turn the steering wheel slowly from lock to lock twice. 8. Turn off the engine and check fluid level and add if necessary. NOTE: If fluid foaming occurs, wait for foam to dissipate and repeat steps 7 and 8. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Power Brake Assist > Hydraulic Brake Booster > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 9883 Hydraulic Brake Booster: Removal and Replacement Removal REMOVAL NOTE: If the booster is being replaced because the power steering fluid is contaminated, flush the power steering system before replacing the booster. 1. With engine off depress the brake pedal 5 times to discharge the accumulator. 2. Remove brake lines (5) from master cylinder (3). 3. Remove mounting nuts (4) from the master cylinder. 4. Remove the master cylinder (3). 5. Remove the return hose and the two pressure lines (2) from the hydraulic booster. 6. From inside the vehicle remove the booster push rod clip, washer and rod remove from the brake pedal. 7. Remove the mounting nuts from the hydraulic booster and remove the booster. Installation INSTALLATION 1. Install the hydraulic booster (2) and tighten the mounting nuts to 28 Nm (21 ft. lbs.). 2. Install the booster push rod, washer and clip onto the brake pedal. 3. Install the master cylinder (3) on the mounting studs. and tighten the mounting nuts (4) to 23 Nm (17 ft. lbs.). 4. Install the brake lines (5) to the master cylinder (3) and tighten to 19 Nm (170 in. lbs.). 5. Install the hydraulic booster pressure lines (2) to the booster. 6. Tighten the pressure lines (2) to 41 Nm (30 ft. lbs.). NOTE: Inspect o-rings on the pressure line fittings to insure they are in good condition before installation. Replace o-rings if necessary. 7. Install the return hose to the booster. 8. Bleed base brake system, See: Brake Bleeding . 9. Fill the power steering pump with fluid, See: Steering and Suspension/Steering/Power Steering/Power Steering Bleeding/Service and Repair . CAUTION: MOPAR (MS-9602) ATF+4 is to be used in the power steering system. No other power steering or automatic transmission fluid is to be used in the system. Damage may result to the power steering pump and system if any other fluid is used, and do not overfill. 10. Bleed the hydraulic booster See: Procedures . Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Power Brake Assist > Vacuum Brake Booster > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Vacuum Brake Booster: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION All models use a tandem diaphragm, power brake booster (3). NOTE: The power brake booster is not a repairable component. The booster must be replaced as an assembly if diagnosis indicates a malfunction has occurred. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Power Brake Assist > Vacuum Brake Booster > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 9888 Vacuum Brake Booster: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The booster unit consists of a single housing divided into two by a tandem diaphragm (3). The outer edge of the diaphragm is secured to the housing. A spacer block (2) is located in between the cowl and the booster housing. The booster push rod (1), connects the booster to the brake pedal and master cylinder (4), is attached to the center of the diaphragm. A check valve (5) is used in the booster outlet connected to the engine intake manifold. Power assist is generated by utilizing a combination of vacuum and atmospheric pressure to boost brake assist. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Power Brake Assist > Vacuum Brake Booster > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Vacuum Brake Booster: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL 1. Remove master cylinder. See: Hydraulic System/Brake Master Cylinder/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Master Cylinder Removal . 2. Disconnect vacuum line at booster. 3. Remove clip securing booster push rod to brake pedal See: Brake Pedal Assy/Service and Repair/Removal . 4. Remove the nuts (1) from the booster mounting studs. 5. Remove the booster (2) and gasket from front cowl panel. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Power Brake Assist > Vacuum Brake Booster > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 9891 Vacuum Brake Booster: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION 1. Guide the booster (2) studs into the cowl panel holes and seat the booster on the panel. 2. Install and tighten new booster attaching nuts (1) to 28 Nm (250 in. lbs.). 3. Install the booster push rod on brake pedal and install clip. 4. Install the booster check valve if removed and connect the vacuum hose to the check valve. 5. Install the master cylinder. See: Hydraulic System/Brake Master Cylinder/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Master Cylinder Installation . 6. Fill and bleed the brake system. See: Brake Bleeding . Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Locations Electronic Brake Control Module: Locations Component ID: 201 Component : MODULE-ANTI-LOCK BRAKES Connector: Name : MODULE-ANTI-LOCK BRAKES Color : # of pins : 46 Qualifier : (AWAL) Pin Circuit Description 1-2 A111 16DG/RD FUSED B(+) 3 D65 20WT/LG CAN C BUS (+) 4-5-6-- 7-8-9-10 - 11 - 12 B9 20DG/LG LEFT FRONT WHEEL SPEED SENSOR (+) 13 B8 20DG/TN LEFT FRONT WHEEL SPEED SENSOR (-) 14 B401 20DG/BR TRAILER TOW DAMPING RELAY CONTROL 15 - 16 Z107 16BK/DG GROUND 17 - 18 D64 20WT/LB CAN C BUS (-) 19 - 20 D465 20WT/GY DYNAMICS SENSOR HIGH DATA LINK 21 - 22 - 23 - 24 - 25 - 26 B7 20DG/VT RIGHT FRONT WHEEL SPEED SENSOR (+) 27 B6 20DG/WT RIGHT FRONT WHEEL SPEED SENSOR (-) 28 - 29 - 30 - 31 A107 12TN/RD FUSED B(+) 32 F960 20PK/LG FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) 33 - 34 D464 20WT/OR DYNAMICS SENSOR LOW DATA LINK Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 9896 35 - 36 - 37 - 38 - 39 - 40 - 41 B3 20DG/YL REAR WHEEL SPEED SENSOR (-) 41 B22 20DG/YL REAR WHEEL SPEED SENSOR (-) 42 B4 20DG/GY REAR WHEEL SPEED SENSOR (+) 42 B222 20DG/WT REAR WHEEL SPEED SENSOR (+) 43 B2 20DG/LB RIGHT REAR WHEEL SPEED SENSOR (+) 44 B1 20DG/OR RIGHT REAR WHEEL SPEED SENSOR (-) 45 Z127 12BK/DG GROUND 46 - Component Location - 32 Component Location - 30 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 9897 Connector: Name : MODULE-ANTI-LOCK BRAKES Color : BLACK # of pins : 14 Qualifier : (RWAL) Pin Circuit Description 1 B222 18DG/WT REAR WHEEL SPEED SENSOR (+) 2 D65 18WT/LG CAN C BUS (+) 3 D64 18WT/LB CAN C BUS (-) 4 F960 20PK/LG FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 9898 5 B9 18DG/LG LEFT FRONT WHEEL SPEED SENSOR (+) 6 Z107 16BK/DG GROUND 7 A111 16DG/RD FUSED B(+) 8 B22 18DG/YL REAR WHEEL SPEED SENSOR (-) 9-10 B8 18DG/TN LEFT FRONT WHEEL SPEED SENSOR (-) 11 - 12 - 13 - 14 - Component Location - 32 Component Location - 30 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 9899 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 9900 Electronic Brake Control Module: Diagrams Component ID: 201 Component : MODULE-ANTI-LOCK BRAKES Connector: Name : MODULE-ANTI-LOCK BRAKES Color : # of pins : 46 Qualifier : (AWAL) Pin Circuit Description 1-2 A111 16DG/RD FUSED B(+) 3 D65 20WT/LG CAN C BUS (+) 4-5-6-- 7-8-9-10 - 11 - 12 B9 20DG/LG LEFT FRONT WHEEL SPEED SENSOR (+) 13 B8 20DG/TN LEFT FRONT WHEEL SPEED SENSOR (-) 14 B401 20DG/BR TRAILER TOW DAMPING RELAY CONTROL 15 - 16 Z107 16BK/DG GROUND 17 - 18 D64 20WT/LB CAN C BUS (-) 19 - 20 D465 20WT/GY DYNAMICS SENSOR HIGH DATA LINK 21 - 22 - 23 - 24 - 25 - 26 B7 20DG/VT RIGHT FRONT WHEEL SPEED SENSOR (+) 27 B6 20DG/WT RIGHT FRONT WHEEL SPEED SENSOR (-) 28 - 29 - 30 - 31 A107 12TN/RD FUSED B(+) 32 F960 20PK/LG FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) 33 - 34 D464 20WT/OR DYNAMICS SENSOR LOW DATA LINK Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 9901 35 - 36 - 37 - 38 - 39 - 40 - 41 B3 20DG/YL REAR WHEEL SPEED SENSOR (-) 41 B22 20DG/YL REAR WHEEL SPEED SENSOR (-) 42 B4 20DG/GY REAR WHEEL SPEED SENSOR (+) 42 B222 20DG/WT REAR WHEEL SPEED SENSOR (+) 43 B2 20DG/LB RIGHT REAR WHEEL SPEED SENSOR (+) 44 B1 20DG/OR RIGHT REAR WHEEL SPEED SENSOR (-) 45 Z127 12BK/DG GROUND 46 - Component Location - 32 Component Location - 30 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 9902 Connector: Name : MODULE-ANTI-LOCK BRAKES Color : BLACK # of pins : 14 Qualifier : (RWAL) Pin Circuit Description 1 B222 18DG/WT REAR WHEEL SPEED SENSOR (+) 2 D65 18WT/LG CAN C BUS (+) 3 D64 18WT/LB CAN C BUS (-) 4 F960 20PK/LG FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 9903 5 B9 18DG/LG LEFT FRONT WHEEL SPEED SENSOR (+) 6 Z107 16BK/DG GROUND 7 A111 16DG/RD FUSED B(+) 8 B22 18DG/YL REAR WHEEL SPEED SENSOR (-) 9-10 B8 18DG/TN LEFT FRONT WHEEL SPEED SENSOR (-) 11 - 12 - 13 - 14 - Component Location - 32 Component Location - 30 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 9904 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Electronic Brake Control Module: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The Antilock Brake Module (ABM) (2) is mounted to the Hydraulic Control Unit (HCU) (3) and operates the ABS system. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 9907 Electronic Brake Control Module: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The ABM voltage source is through the ignition switch in the RUN position. The ABM contains a self check program that illuminates the ABS warning light when a system fault is detected. Faults are stored in a diagnostic program memory and are accessible with the scan tool. ABS faults remain in memory until cleared, or until after the vehicle is started approximately 50 times. Stored faults are not erased if the battery is disconnected. NOTE: If the ABM is being replaced with a new ABM is must be reprogrammed with the use of a scan tool. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Electronic Brake Control Module: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL 1. Remove the negative battery cable from the battery. 2. Pull up on the ABM harness connector release and remove connector. 3. Remove the ABM mounting bolts. 4. Remove the pump connector from the ABM. 5. Remove the ABM from the HCU. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 9910 Electronic Brake Control Module: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION NOTE: If the ABM is being replaced with a new ABM is must be reprogrammed with the use of a scan tool. 1. Install ABM to the HCU. 2. Install the pump connector to the ABM. 3. Install mounting bolts. Tighten to 2 Nm (16 in. lbs.). 4. Install the wiring harness connector to the ABM and push down on the release to secure the connector. 5. Install negative battery cable to the battery. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Fluid Level Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Locations Brake Fluid Level Sensor/Switch: Locations Component ID: 404 Component : SENSOR-BRAKE FLUID LEVEL Connector: Name : SENSOR-BRAKE FLUID LEVEL Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Pin Circuit Description 1 B20 20DG/OR BRAKE FLUID LEVEL SWITCH SENSE 2 Z420 20BK/OR GROUND Component Location - 32 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Fluid Level Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 9915 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Fluid Level Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 9916 Brake Fluid Level Sensor/Switch: Diagrams Component ID: 404 Component : SENSOR-BRAKE FLUID LEVEL Connector: Name : SENSOR-BRAKE FLUID LEVEL Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Pin Circuit Description 1 B20 20DG/OR BRAKE FLUID LEVEL SWITCH SENSE 2 Z420 20BK/OR GROUND Component Location - 32 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Fluid Level Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 9917 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Lateral Accelerometer > Component Information > Locations Lateral Accelerometer: Locations Component ID: 408 Component : SENSOR-DYNAMICS Connector: Name : SENSOR-DYNAMICS Color : # of pins : 6 Pin Circuit Description 1 F960 20PK/LG FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) 2 D465 20WT/GY DYNAMICS SENSOR HIGH DATA LINK 3 D464 20WT/OR DYNAMICS SENSOR LOW DATA LINK 4-5-6 Z608 20BK/LG GROUND Component Location - 52 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Lateral Accelerometer > Component Information > Locations > Page 9921 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Lateral Accelerometer > Component Information > Locations > Page 9922 Lateral Accelerometer: Diagrams Component ID: 408 Component : SENSOR-DYNAMICS Connector: Name : SENSOR-DYNAMICS Color : # of pins : 6 Pin Circuit Description 1 F960 20PK/LG FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) 2 D465 20WT/GY DYNAMICS SENSOR HIGH DATA LINK 3 D464 20WT/OR DYNAMICS SENSOR LOW DATA LINK 4-5-6 Z608 20BK/LG GROUND Component Location - 52 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Lateral Accelerometer > Component Information > Locations > Page 9923 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Lateral Accelerometer > Component Information > Locations > Page 9924 Lateral Accelerometer: Description and Operation DESCRIPTION The Yaw Rate and Lateral Acceleration Sensors are housed into one unit known as the Dynamics Sensor. The sensor is used to measure side-to-side (Lateral) motion and vehicle rotational sensing (how fast the vehicle is turning - Yaw). Yaw and Lateral Acceleration Sensors cannot be serviced separately. The entire Dynamics Sensor must be replaced when necessary. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Lateral Accelerometer > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Lateral Accelerometer: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL 1. Remove the center bezel lower trim panel. 2. Remove the cup holder See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Drink Holders/Service and Repair/Removal . 3. Disconnect the electrical connector (3) for the dynamics sensor (2). 4. Remove the 3 mounting nuts (1) for the sensor (2). 5. Remove the sensor (2) from the vehicle. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Lateral Accelerometer > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 9927 Lateral Accelerometer: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION 1. Install the dynamics sensor on the mounting studs (2). 2. Install the mounting nuts (1) Tighten to 24 Nm (200 in. lbs.). 3. Reconnect the electrical connector (3). 4. Install the cup holder. See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Drink Holders/Service and Repair/Installation . 5. Install the center bezel lower trim panel. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake Warning Switch > Component Information > Locations Parking Brake Warning Switch: Locations Component ID: 497 Component : SWITCH-PARKING BRAKE Connector: Name : SWITCH-PARKING BRAKE Color : GRAY # of pins : 1 Pin Circuit Description 1 B25 20DG/WT PARK BRAKE SWITCH SENSE Component Location - 31 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake Warning Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 9931 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake Warning Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 9932 Parking Brake Warning Switch: Diagrams Component ID: 497 Component : SWITCH-PARKING BRAKE Connector: Name : SWITCH-PARKING BRAKE Color : GRAY # of pins : 1 Pin Circuit Description 1 B25 20DG/WT PARK BRAKE SWITCH SENSE Component Location - 31 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake Warning Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 9933 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake Warning Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Parking Brake Warning Switch: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The park brake switch (1) is located on the park brake lever mechanism on the cowl side inner panel below the instrument panel, to the left of the steering column. This switch includes a spade-type output terminal (3) that connects the switch to the vehicle electrical system through a dedicated take out and connector of the body wire harness. The output terminal is integral to the stationary contact within a molded plastic insulator. A locating tab on the insulator engages a slot in the park brake lever mechanism for positive switch location. External to the insulator is a movable leaf contact with an integral grounding lug (4) on one end and an integral actuating lever and follower (2) on the opposite end. The switch is secured to and grounded by a single screw to the park brake lever mechanism. The park brake switch cannot be adjusted or repaired and, if ineffective or damaged, it must be replaced. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake Warning Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 9936 Parking Brake Warning Switch: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The park brake switch is a normally closed, mechanically actuated leaf contact switch that is operated by the park brake lever mechanism. The switch is grounded through its mounting to the park brake lever mechanism and provides a ground input to the ElectroMechanical Instrument Cluster (EMIC) (also known as the Cab Compartment Node/CCN) on a park brake switch sense circuit whenever the park brake is applied, and opens this circuit whenever the park brake is released. The park brake switch sense input to the EMIC is used for control of the brake indicator and may also be used as a logic input for other electronic features in the vehicle. The park brake switch as well as the hard wired inputs and outputs of the switch may be diagnosed using conventional diagnostic tools and procedures. Refer to the appropriate wiring information. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake Warning Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 9937 Parking Brake Warning Switch: Testing and Inspection PARK BRAKE SWITCH WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury on vehicles equipped with airbags, disable the Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, airbag, seat belt tensioner, impact sensor, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the SRS. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment. NOTE: If the brake indicator stays ON with the ignition switch in the ON position and the park brake released, or comes ON while driving, the brake system must be diagnosed and repaired prior to performing the following tests. Refer to appropriate testing. If no brake system problem is found, the following procedures will help to locate a shorted or open park brake switch sense circuit, or an ineffective park brake switch. INDICATOR ILLUMINATES DURING BULB TEST, BUT DOES NOT WHEN PARK BRAKE APPLIED 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. Disconnect the body wire harness connector for the park brake switch from the switch terminal. Apply the parking brake. Check for continuity between the park brake switch terminal and a good ground. There should be continuity. If OK, go to STEP 2. If not OK, replace the ineffective park brake switch. 2. Disconnect the instrument panel wire harness connector (Connector C1) for the instrument cluster from the cluster connector receptacle. Check for continuity between the park brake switch sense circuit cavities of the body wire harness connector for the park brake switch and the instrument panel wire harness connector for the instrument cluster. There should be continuity. If not OK, repair the open park brake switch sense circuit between the park brake switch and the instrument cluster as required. INDICATOR REMAINS ILLUMINATED - BRAKE SYSTEM CHECKS OKAY 3. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. Disconnect the body wire harness connector for the park brake switch from the switch terminal. Check for continuity between the terminal of the park brake switch and a good ground. There should be no continuity with the park brake released, and continuity with the park brake applied. If OK, go to STEP 2. If not OK, replace the ineffective park brake switch. 4. Disconnect the instrument panel wire harness connector (Connector C1) for the instrument cluster from the cluster connector receptacle. Check for continuity between the park brake switch sense circuit cavity of the body wire harness connector for the park brake switch and a good ground. There should be no continuity. If not OK, repair the shorted park brake switch sense circuit between the park brake switch and the instrument cluster as required. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake Warning Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Parking Brake Warning Switch: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury on vehicles equipped with airbags, disable the Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, airbag, seat belt tensioner, impact sensor, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the SRS. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment. 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. 2. Apply the parking brake. 3. Reach under the left end of the instrument panel to access and disconnect the body wire harness connector (2) from the terminal of the park brake switch (4) located on the park brake lever mechanism (1) on the left cowl side inner panel. 4. Remove the screw (3) that secures the park brake switch to the park brake lever mechanism. 5. Remove the switch from the park brake lever mechanism. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake Warning Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 9940 Parking Brake Warning Switch: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury on vehicles equipped with airbags, disable the Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, airbag, seat belt tensioner, impact sensor, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the SRS. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment. 1. Reach under the left end of the instrument panel to position the park brake switch (4) onto the park brake lever mechanism (1) on the left cowl side inner panel. Be certain to engage the locating pin on the back of the switch insulator into the locating slot in the lever mechanism bracket. 2. Install and tighten the screw (3) that secures the park brake switch to the park brake lever mechanism. Tighten the screw to 3 Nm (24 in. lbs.). 3. Reconnect the body wire harness connector (2) to the terminal of the park brake switch. 4. Reconnect the battery negative cable. 5. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position and check for proper brake indicator operation with the parking brake applied, then release the parking brake and check that the brake indicator extinguishes. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Steering Angle Sensor, Traction Control > Component Information > Locations Steering Angle Sensor: Locations Component ID: 440 Component : SENSOR-STEERING ANGLE Connector: Name : SENSOR-STEERING ANGLE Color : BLACK # of pins : 4 Pin Circuit Description 1 D65 20WT/LG CAN C BUS (+) 2 Z455 20BK/PK GROUND 3 D64 20WT/LB CAN C BUS (-) 4 F202 20PK/GY FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) Component Location - 42 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Steering Angle Sensor, Traction Control > Component Information > Locations > Page 9944 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Steering Angle Sensor, Traction Control > Component Information > Locations > Page 9945 Steering Angle Sensor: Diagrams Component ID: 440 Component : SENSOR-STEERING ANGLE Connector: Name : SENSOR-STEERING ANGLE Color : BLACK # of pins : 4 Pin Circuit Description 1 D65 20WT/LG CAN C BUS (+) 2 Z455 20BK/PK GROUND 3 D64 20WT/LB CAN C BUS (-) 4 F202 20PK/GY FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) Component Location - 42 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Steering Angle Sensor, Traction Control > Component Information > Locations > Page 9946 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Traction Control Switch > Component Information > Locations Traction Control Switch: Locations Component ID: 486 Component : SWITCH-ESP Connector: Name : SWITCH-ESP Color : # of pins : 6 Pin Circuit Description 1 Z936 20BK/DG GROUND 2 E11 20OR/DB PANEL LAMPS DRIVER 3 B46 20DG/WT ESP ON/OFF SENSE 4 G94 20VT/DB SENSOR GROUND 5-6-Component Location - 47 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Traction Control Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 9950 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Traction Control Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 9951 Traction Control Switch: Diagrams Component ID: 486 Component : SWITCH-ESP Connector: Name : SWITCH-ESP Color : # of pins : 6 Pin Circuit Description 1 Z936 20BK/DG GROUND 2 E11 20OR/DB PANEL LAMPS DRIVER 3 B46 20DG/WT ESP ON/OFF SENSE 4 G94 20VT/DB SENSOR GROUND 5-6-Component Location - 47 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Traction Control Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 9952 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Traction Control Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 9953 Traction Control Switch: Description and Operation DESCRIPTION The ESP switch is located just below the heater and air conditioner controls in the center stack area of the instrument panel. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Traction Control Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Traction Control Switch: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL 1. Remove the radio trim panel (1). 2. Disconnect the electrical connectors from the radio trim panel. 3. Remove the ESP switch (1) from the switch bank (2). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Traction Control Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 9956 Traction Control Switch: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION 1. Install the new switch (1) in the switch bank (2). 2. Reconnect the electrical connectors for the radio trim panel. 3. Install the radio trim panel (1). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Wheel Speed-ABS-Left Front Wheel Speed Sensor: Locations Sensor-Wheel Speed-ABS-Left Front Component ID: 448 Component : SENSOR-WHEEL SPEED-ABS-LEFT FRONT Connector: Name : SENSOR-WHEEL SPEED-ABS-LEFT FRONT Color : # of pins : 2 Pin Circuit Description 1 B9 20DG/LG LEFT FRONT WHEEL SPEED SENSOR (+) Pin Circuit Description 1 B9 18DG/LG LEFT FRONT WHEEL SPEED SENSOR (+) 2 B8 20DG/TN LEFT FRONT WHEEL SPEED SENSOR (-) 2 B8 18DG/TN LEFT FRONT WHEEL SPEED SENSOR (-) Component Location - 38 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Wheel Speed-ABS-Left Front > Page 9961 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Wheel Speed-ABS-Left Front > Page 9962 Wheel Speed Sensor: Locations Sensor-Wheel Speed-ABS-Rear Component ID: 450 Component : SENSOR-WHEEL SPEED-ABS-REAR Connector: Name : SENSOR-WHEEL SPEED-ABS-REAR Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (EXCEPT ESP) Pin Circuit Description 1 B22 18DG/YL REAR WHEEL SPEED SENSOR (-) 2 B222 18DG/WT REAR WHEEL SPEED SENSOR (+) Component Location - 70 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Wheel Speed-ABS-Left Front > Page 9963 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Wheel Speed-ABS-Left Front > Page 9964 Wheel Speed Sensor: Locations Sensor-Wheel Speed-ABS-Left Rear Component ID: 449 Component : SENSOR-WHEEL SPEED-ABS-LEFT REAR Connector: Name : SENSOR-WHEEL SPEED-ABS-LEFT REAR Color : # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (ESP) Pin Circuit Description 1 B3 18DG/YL REAR WHEEL SPEED SENSOR (-) 2 B4 18DG/GY REAR WHEEL SPEED SENSOR (+) Component Location - 70 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Wheel Speed-ABS-Left Front > Page 9965 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Wheel Speed-ABS-Left Front > Page 9966 Wheel Speed Sensor: Locations Sensor-Wheel Speed-ABS-Right Front Component ID: 451 Component : SENSOR-WHEEL SPEED-ABS-RIGHT FRONT Connector: Name : SENSOR-WHEEL SPEED-ABS-RIGHT FRONT Color : # of pins : 2 Pin Circuit Description 1 B7 20DG/VT RIGHT FRONT WHEEL SPEED SENSOR (+) 2 B6 20DG/WT RIGHT FRONT WHEEL SPEED SENSOR (-) Component Location - 29 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Wheel Speed-ABS-Left Front > Page 9967 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Wheel Speed-ABS-Left Front > Page 9968 Wheel Speed Sensor: Locations Sensor-Wheel Speed-ABS-Right Rear Component ID: 452 Component : SENSOR-WHEEL SPEED-ABS-RIGHT REAR Connector: Name : SENSOR-WHEEL SPEED-ABS-RIGHT REAR Color : # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (ESP) Pin Circuit Description 1 B1 18DG/OR RIGHT REAR WHEEL SPEED SENSOR (-) 2 B2 18DG/LB RIGHT REAR WHEEL SPEED SENSOR (+) Component Location - 70 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Wheel Speed-ABS-Left Front > Page 9969 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Wheel Speed-ABS-Left Front Wheel Speed Sensor: Diagrams Sensor-Wheel Speed-ABS-Left Front Component ID: 448 Component : SENSOR-WHEEL SPEED-ABS-LEFT FRONT Connector: Name : SENSOR-WHEEL SPEED-ABS-LEFT FRONT Color : # of pins : 2 Pin Circuit Description 1 B9 20DG/LG LEFT FRONT WHEEL SPEED SENSOR (+) Pin Circuit Description 1 B9 18DG/LG LEFT FRONT WHEEL SPEED SENSOR (+) 2 B8 20DG/TN LEFT FRONT WHEEL SPEED SENSOR (-) 2 B8 18DG/TN LEFT FRONT WHEEL SPEED SENSOR (-) Component Location - 38 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Wheel Speed-ABS-Left Front > Page 9972 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Wheel Speed-ABS-Left Front > Page 9973 Wheel Speed Sensor: Diagrams Sensor-Wheel Speed-ABS-Rear Component ID: 450 Component : SENSOR-WHEEL SPEED-ABS-REAR Connector: Name : SENSOR-WHEEL SPEED-ABS-REAR Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (EXCEPT ESP) Pin Circuit Description 1 B22 18DG/YL REAR WHEEL SPEED SENSOR (-) 2 B222 18DG/WT REAR WHEEL SPEED SENSOR (+) Component Location - 70 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Wheel Speed-ABS-Left Front > Page 9974 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Wheel Speed-ABS-Left Front > Page 9975 Wheel Speed Sensor: Diagrams Sensor-Wheel Speed-ABS-Left Rear Component ID: 449 Component : SENSOR-WHEEL SPEED-ABS-LEFT REAR Connector: Name : SENSOR-WHEEL SPEED-ABS-LEFT REAR Color : # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (ESP) Pin Circuit Description 1 B3 18DG/YL REAR WHEEL SPEED SENSOR (-) 2 B4 18DG/GY REAR WHEEL SPEED SENSOR (+) Component Location - 70 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Wheel Speed-ABS-Left Front > Page 9976 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Wheel Speed-ABS-Left Front > Page 9977 Wheel Speed Sensor: Diagrams Sensor-Wheel Speed-ABS-Right Front Component ID: 451 Component : SENSOR-WHEEL SPEED-ABS-RIGHT FRONT Connector: Name : SENSOR-WHEEL SPEED-ABS-RIGHT FRONT Color : # of pins : 2 Pin Circuit Description 1 B7 20DG/VT RIGHT FRONT WHEEL SPEED SENSOR (+) 2 B6 20DG/WT RIGHT FRONT WHEEL SPEED SENSOR (-) Component Location - 29 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Wheel Speed-ABS-Left Front > Page 9978 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Wheel Speed-ABS-Left Front > Page 9979 Wheel Speed Sensor: Diagrams Sensor-Wheel Speed-ABS-Right Rear Component ID: 452 Component : SENSOR-WHEEL SPEED-ABS-RIGHT REAR Connector: Name : SENSOR-WHEEL SPEED-ABS-RIGHT REAR Color : # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (ESP) Pin Circuit Description 1 B1 18DG/OR RIGHT REAR WHEEL SPEED SENSOR (-) 2 B2 18DG/LB RIGHT REAR WHEEL SPEED SENSOR (+) Component Location - 70 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Wheel Speed-ABS-Left Front > Page 9980 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Wheel Speed Sensor: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The ABS brake system uses 3 wheel speed sensors. A sensor is mounted to each front hub/bearings. The third sensor is mounted on top of the rear axle differential housing. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 9983 Wheel Speed Sensor: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The Wheel Speed Sensor consists of a magnet (1) surrounded by windings from a single strand of wire (5). The sensor sends a small AC signal to the ABM. This signal is generated by magnetic induction. The magnetic induction is created when a toothed sensor ring (exciter ring or tone wheel) (4) passes the stationary magnetic WSS. When the ring gear is rotated, the exciter ring (4) passes the tip of the WSS. As the exciter ring tooth approaches the tip of the WSS, the magnetic lines of force expand, causing the magnetic field to cut across the sensor's windings (5). This, in turn causes current to flow through the WSS circuit in one direction. When the exciter ring tooth moves away from the sensor tip, the magnetic lines of force collapse cutting the winding in the opposite direction. This causes the current to flow in the opposite direction. Every time a tooth of the exciter ring passes the tip of the WSS, an AC signal is generated current. Each AC signal (positive to negative signal or squarewave) is interpreted by the ABM. It then compares the frequency of the sinewave to a time value to calculate vehicle speed. The ABM continues to monitor the frequency to determine a deceleration rate that would indicate a possible wheel-locking tendency. The signal strength of any magnetic induction sensor is directly affected by: - Magnetic field strength; the stronger the magnetic field, the stronger the signal - Number of windings in the sensor; more windings provide a stronger signal - Exciter ring speed; the faster the exciter ring/tone wheel rotates, the stronger the signal will be - Distance (3) "air gap" between the exciter ring teeth and WSS; the closer the WSS is to the exciter ring/tone wheel, the stronger the signal will be. The WSS is not adjustable. A clearance specification has been established for manufacturing tolerances. If the clearance is not within these specifications, then either the WSS or other components may be damaged. The clearance between the WSS and the exciter ring is 0.005 0.050 in. The assembly plant performs a "Rolls Test" on every vehicle that leaves the assembly plant. One of the test performed is a test of the WSS. To properly test the sensor, the assembly plant connects test equipment to the Data Link Connector (DLC). This connector is located to the right of the steering column and attached to the lower portion of the instrument panel. The rolls test terminal is spliced to the WSS circuit. The vehicle is then driven on a set of rollers and the WSS output is monitored for proper operation. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 9984 Wheel Speed Sensor: Testing and Inspection REAR WHEEL ANTILOCK Diagnosis of base brake conditions which are mechanical in nature should be performed first. This includes brake noise, lack of power assist, parking brake, or vehicle vibration during normal braking. The RWAL brake system performs several self-tests every time the ignition switch is turned on and the vehicle is driven. The CAB monitors the system inputs and outputs circuits to verify the system is operating properly. If the CAB senses a malfunction in the system it will set a DTC into memory and trigger the warning lamp. NOTE: A scan tool is used to diagnose the RWAL system. For test procedures refer to the ABS Electrical Diagnostic Section. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Wheel Speed Sensor - Removal Wheel Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Front Wheel Speed Sensor - Removal Removal REMOVAL 1. Remove the front rotor See: Disc Brake System/Brake Rotor/Disc/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Brake Rotor - Removal . 2. Remove the wheel speed sensor mounting bolt (1) from the hub (3). 3. Remove the wheel speed sensor (2) from the hub (3). 4. Remove the wiring from the clips and disconnect the electrical connector. 4500 & 5500 4500 & 5500 1. Remove the front rotor See: Disc Brake System/Brake Rotor/Disc/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Brake Rotor - Removal . 2. Remove the wheel speed sensor mounting bolt (1) from the hub. 3. Remove the wheel speed sensor (2) from the hub. 4. Remove the wiring from the clips and disconnect the electrical connector. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Wheel Speed Sensor - Removal > Page 9987 Wheel Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Front Wheel Speed Sensor - Installation Installation INSTALLATION 1. Install the wiring to the clips and Reconnect the electrical connector. 2. Install the wheel speed sensor (2) to the hub (3). 3. Install the wheel speed sensor mounting bolt (1) to the hub (3). Tighten the bolt to 21 Nm (190 in. lbs.). 4. Install the front rotor and brake caliper assembly See: Disc Brake System/Brake Rotor/Disc/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Brake Rotor - Installation . 4500 & 5500 4500 & 5500 1. Install the wiring to the clips and Reconnect the electrical connector. 2. Install the wheel speed sensor (2) to the hub. 3. Install the wheel speed sensor mounting bolt (1) to the hub. Tighten the bolt to 13 Nm (110 in. lbs.). 4. Install the front rotor and brake caliper assembly See: Disc Brake System/Brake Rotor/Disc/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Brake Rotor - Installation . Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Wheel Speed Sensor - Removal > Page 9988 Wheel Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Rear Wheel Speed Sensor - Removal RWAL REAR WHEEL SPEED SENSOR (RWAL) 1. Raise the vehicle on a hoist. 2. Remove the brake line mounting nut and remove the brake line from the sensor stud. 3. Remove the mounting stud (2) from the sensor and shield. 4. Remove the sensor (1) and shield from the differential housing (3). 5. Disconnect the sensor wire harness and remove the sensor (1). ESP REAR WHEEL SPEED SENSOR (ESP) 1. Raise the vehicle on a hoist. 2. Disconnect the wheel speed sensor electrical connector (3). 3. Remove the mounting bolt (1) from the sensor (4). 4. Remove the sensor (4) from the brake caliper adapter (2). 4500 & 5500 REAR WHEEL SPEED SENSOR - 4500 & 5500 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Wheel Speed Sensor - Removal > Page 9989 1. Raise the vehicle on a hoist. 2. Disconnect the sensor wire harness (1). 3. Remove the mounting bolt (3). 4. Remove the sensor (4) from the differential housing. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Wheel Speed Sensor - Removal > Page 9990 Wheel Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Rear Wheel Speed Sensor - Installation RWAL REAR WHEEL SPEED SENSOR (RWAL) 1. Connect the harness to the sensor. Be sure the seal is securely in place between the sensor and the wiring connector. 2. Install the O-ring on the sensor (if removed). 3. Insert the sensor (1) in the differential housing (3). 4. Install the sensor shield. 5. Install the sensor mounting stud (2) and tighten to 24 Nm (200 in. lbs.). 6. Install the brake line on the sensor stud (2)and install the nut. 7. Lower the vehicle. ESP REAR WHEEL SPEED SENSOR (ESP) 1. Insert the wheel speed sensor (4) in the brake caliper adapter (2). 2. Install the sensor mounting bolt (1) and tighten to 24 Nm (200 in. lbs.). 3. Reconnect the electrical wiring connector (3) to the sensor (4). 4. Lower the vehicle. 4500 & 5500 REAR WHEEL SPEED SENSOR - 4500 & 5500 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Wheel Speed Sensor - Removal > Page 9991 1. Install the O-ring on the sensor (if removed). 2. Insert the sensor (4) in the differential housing. 3. Install the sensor mounting bolt (3) and tighten to 24 Nm (200 in. lbs.). 4. Connect the harness (1) to the sensor (4). Be sure the seal is securely in place between the sensor and the wiring connector. 5. Lower the vehicle. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Yaw Rate Sensor > Component Information > Locations Yaw Rate Sensor: Locations Component ID: 408 Component : SENSOR-DYNAMICS Connector: Name : SENSOR-DYNAMICS Color : # of pins : 6 Pin Circuit Description 1 F960 20PK/LG FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) 2 D465 20WT/GY DYNAMICS SENSOR HIGH DATA LINK 3 D464 20WT/OR DYNAMICS SENSOR LOW DATA LINK 4-5-6 Z608 20BK/LG GROUND Component Location - 52 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Yaw Rate Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 9995 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Yaw Rate Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 9996 Yaw Rate Sensor: Diagrams Component ID: 408 Component : SENSOR-DYNAMICS Connector: Name : SENSOR-DYNAMICS Color : # of pins : 6 Pin Circuit Description 1 F960 20PK/LG FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) 2 D465 20WT/GY DYNAMICS SENSOR HIGH DATA LINK 3 D464 20WT/OR DYNAMICS SENSOR LOW DATA LINK 4-5-6 Z608 20BK/LG GROUND Component Location - 52 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Yaw Rate Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 9997 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Yaw Rate Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 9998 Yaw Rate Sensor: Description and Operation DESCRIPTION The Yaw Rate and Lateral Acceleration Sensors are housed into one unit known as the Dynamics Sensor. The sensor is used to measure side-to-side (Lateral) motion and vehicle rotational sensing (how fast the vehicle is turning - Yaw). Yaw and Lateral Acceleration Sensors cannot be serviced separately. The entire Dynamics Sensor must be replaced when necessary. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Yaw Rate Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Yaw Rate Sensor: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL 1. Remove the center bezel lower trim panel. 2. Remove the cup holder See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Drink Holders/Service and Repair/Removal . 3. Disconnect the electrical connector (3) for the dynamics sensor (2). 4. Remove the 3 mounting nuts (1) for the sensor (2). 5. Remove the sensor (2) from the vehicle. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Yaw Rate Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 10001 Yaw Rate Sensor: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION 1. Install the dynamics sensor on the mounting studs (2). 2. Install the mounting nuts (1) Tighten to 24 Nm (200 in. lbs.). 3. Reconnect the electrical connector (3). 4. Install the cup holder. See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Drink Holders/Service and Repair/Installation . 5. Install the center bezel lower trim panel. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Sensors and Switches - Starting and Charging > Battery Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Battery Temperature Sensor - Description Battery Temperature Sensor: Description and Operation Battery Temperature Sensor - Description DESCRIPTION The Battery Temperature Sensor (BTS) is used only on the diesel engine. It is attached to the battery tray located under the battery. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Sensors and Switches - Starting and Charging > Battery Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Battery Temperature Sensor - Description > Page 10008 Battery Temperature Sensor: Description and Operation Battery Temperature Sensor - Operation OPERATION The BTS is used to determine the battery temperature and control battery charging rate. This temperature data, along with data from monitored line voltage, is used by the PCM (ECM Diesel) to vary the battery charging rate. System voltage will be higher at colder temperatures and is gradually reduced at warmer temperatures. The PCM sends 5 volts to the sensor and is grounded through the sensor return line. As temperature increases, resistance in the sensor decreases and the detection voltage at the PCM increases. The BTS is also used for OBD II diagnostics. Certain faults and OBD II monitors are either enabled or disabled, depending upon BTS input (for example, disable purge and enable Leak Detection Pump (LDP) and O2 sensor heater tests). Most OBD II monitors are disabled below 20°F. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Sensors and Switches - Starting and Charging > Battery Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Battery Temperature Sensor - Removal Battery Temperature Sensor: Service and Repair Battery Temperature Sensor - Removal REMOVAL The battery temperature sensor (1) is located under the vehicle battery and is attached (snapped into) a mounting hole on battery tray (4). 1. Remove battery. 2. Pry sensor (1) straight up from battery tray mounting hole to gain access to electrical connector (3). 3. Disconnect sensor from engine wire harness electrical connector. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Sensors and Switches - Starting and Charging > Battery Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Battery Temperature Sensor - Removal > Page 10011 Battery Temperature Sensor: Service and Repair Battery Temperature Sensor - Installation INSTALLATION NOTE: The battery temperature sensor (1) is located under the vehicle battery and is attached (snapped into) a mounting hole on battery tray (4). 1. Pull electrical connector (3) up through mounting hole in top of battery tray. 2. Connect sensor. 3. Snap sensor into battery tray. 4. Install battery. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Sensors and Switches - Starting and Charging > Clutch Switch > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 472 Clutch Switch: Locations Component ID 472 Component ID: 472 Component : SWITCH-CLUTCH INTERLOCK Connector: Name : SWITCH-CLUTCH INTERLOCK Color : GREEN # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (M/T) Pin Circuit Description 1 T41 20YL/DB TRS T41 SIGNAL (P/N) 2 Z911 20BK GROUND Component Location - 31 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Sensors and Switches - Starting and Charging > Clutch Switch > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 472 > Page 10016 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Sensors and Switches - Starting and Charging > Clutch Switch > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 472 > Page 10017 Clutch Switch: Locations Component ID 482 Component ID: 482 Component : SWITCH-CLUTCH INTERLOCK Connector: Name : SWITCH-CLUTCH INTERLOCK Color : GREEN # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (M/T) Pin Circuit Description 1 T41 20YL/DB TRS T41 SIGNAL (P/N) 2 Z911 20BK GROUND Component Location - 31 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Sensors and Switches - Starting and Charging > Clutch Switch > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 472 > Page 10018 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Sensors and Switches - Starting and Charging > Clutch Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Component ID 472 Clutch Switch: Diagrams Component ID 472 Component ID: 472 Component : SWITCH-CLUTCH INTERLOCK Connector: Name : SWITCH-CLUTCH INTERLOCK Color : GREEN # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (M/T) Pin Circuit Description 1 T41 20YL/DB TRS T41 SIGNAL (P/N) 2 Z911 20BK GROUND Component Location - 31 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Sensors and Switches - Starting and Charging > Clutch Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Component ID 472 > Page 10021 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Sensors and Switches - Starting and Charging > Clutch Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Component ID 472 > Page 10022 Clutch Switch: Diagrams Component ID 482 Component ID: 482 Component : SWITCH-CLUTCH INTERLOCK Connector: Name : SWITCH-CLUTCH INTERLOCK Color : GREEN # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (M/T) Pin Circuit Description 1 T41 20YL/DB TRS T41 SIGNAL (P/N) 2 Z911 20BK GROUND Component Location - 31 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Sensors and Switches - Starting and Charging > Clutch Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Component ID 472 > Page 10023 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Sensors and Switches - Starting and Charging > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL The ignition key must be in the key cylinder (1) for cylinder removal. 1. Disconnect negative cable from battery. 2. Remove upper and lower covers (shrouds) from steering column. 3. Place shifter in PARK position. 4. A retaining pin is located at the underside of the key cylinder assembly. a. Rotate key to RUN position. b. Press in on retaining pin while pulling key cylinder (1) from ignition switch. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Sensors and Switches - Starting and Charging > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 10029 Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION The ignition key must be in the key cylinder (3) for cylinder installation. 1. Install the key cylinder into the housing using care to align the end of the key cylinder (3) with the ignition switch (1). 2. Push the key cylinder (3) in until it clicks. 3. Replace the upper and lower shrouds. 4. Reconnect the battery. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Sensors and Switches - Starting and Charging > Neutral Safety Switch > Component Information > Locations > Switch-Clutch Interlock Neutral Safety Switch: Locations Switch-Clutch Interlock Component ID 472 Component ID: 472 Component : SWITCH-CLUTCH INTERLOCK Connector: Name : SWITCH-CLUTCH INTERLOCK Color : GREEN # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (M/T) Pin Circuit Description 1 T41 20YL/DB TRS T41 SIGNAL (P/N) 2 Z911 20BK GROUND Component Location - 31 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Sensors and Switches - Starting and Charging > Neutral Safety Switch > Component Information > Locations > Switch-Clutch Interlock > Page 10034 Component ID 482 Component ID: 482 Component : SWITCH-CLUTCH INTERLOCK Connector: Name : SWITCH-CLUTCH INTERLOCK Color : GREEN # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (M/T) Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Sensors and Switches - Starting and Charging > Neutral Safety Switch > Component Information > Locations > Switch-Clutch Interlock > Page 10035 Pin Circuit Description 1 T41 20YL/DB TRS T41 SIGNAL (P/N) 2 Z911 20BK GROUND Component Location - 31 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Sensors and Switches - Starting and Charging > Neutral Safety Switch > Component Information > Locations > Switch-Clutch Interlock > Page 10036 Neutral Safety Switch: Locations Switch-Clutch Interlock/Upstop Component ID: 483 Component : SWITCH-CLUTCH INTERLOCK/UPSTOP Connector: Name : SWITCH-CLUTCH INTERLOCK/UPSTOP Color : # of pins : 6 Qualifier : (6.7L) Pin Circuit Description 1-2-3 T26 18DG/OR CLUTCH INTERLOCK/UPSTOP SWITCH OUTPUT 4 Z993 18BK GROUND 5-6-- Component Location - 31 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Sensors and Switches - Starting and Charging > Neutral Safety Switch > Component Information > Locations > Switch-Clutch Interlock > Page 10037 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Sensors and Switches - Starting and Charging > Neutral Safety Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Switch-Clutch Interlock Neutral Safety Switch: Diagrams Switch-Clutch Interlock Component ID 472 Component ID: 472 Component : SWITCH-CLUTCH INTERLOCK Connector: Name : SWITCH-CLUTCH INTERLOCK Color : GREEN # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (M/T) Pin Circuit Description 1 T41 20YL/DB TRS T41 SIGNAL (P/N) 2 Z911 20BK GROUND Component Location - 31 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Sensors and Switches - Starting and Charging > Neutral Safety Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Switch-Clutch Interlock > Page 10040 Component ID 482 Component ID: 482 Component : SWITCH-CLUTCH INTERLOCK Connector: Name : SWITCH-CLUTCH INTERLOCK Color : GREEN # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (M/T) Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Sensors and Switches - Starting and Charging > Neutral Safety Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Switch-Clutch Interlock > Page 10041 Pin Circuit Description 1 T41 20YL/DB TRS T41 SIGNAL (P/N) 2 Z911 20BK GROUND Component Location - 31 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Sensors and Switches - Starting and Charging > Neutral Safety Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Switch-Clutch Interlock > Page 10042 Neutral Safety Switch: Diagrams Switch-Clutch Interlock/Upstop Component ID: 483 Component : SWITCH-CLUTCH INTERLOCK/UPSTOP Connector: Name : SWITCH-CLUTCH INTERLOCK/UPSTOP Color : # of pins : 6 Qualifier : (6.7L) Pin Circuit Description 1-2-3 T26 18DG/OR CLUTCH INTERLOCK/UPSTOP SWITCH OUTPUT 4 Z993 18BK GROUND 5-6-- Component Location - 31 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Sensors and Switches - Starting and Charging > Neutral Safety Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Switch-Clutch Interlock > Page 10043 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Battery > Jump Starting > System Information > Service and Repair Jump Starting: Service and Repair STANDARD PROCEDURE WARNING: review all safety precautions and warnings in the battery system section. See: Service and Repair/Procedures/Battery Charging - Do not jump start a frozen battery, personal injury can result. - If equipped, do not jump start when maintenance free battery indicator dot is yellow or bright color. - Do not jump start a vehicle when the battery fluid is below the top of lead plates. - Do not allow jumper cable clamps to touch each other when connected to a booster source. - Do not use open flame near battery. - Remove metallic jewelry worn on hands or wrists to avoid injury by accidental arcing of battery current. - When using a high output boosting device, do not allow battery voltage to exceed 16 volts. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. CAUTION: When using another vehicle as a booster, do not allow vehicles to touch. Electrical systems can be damaged on either vehicle. TO JUMP START A DISABLED VEHICLE: 1. Raise hood on disabled vehicle and visually inspect engine compartment for: - Battery cable clamp condition, clean if necessary. - Frozen battery. - Yellow or bright color test indicator, if equipped. - Low battery fluid level. - Generator drive belt condition and tension. - Fuel fumes or leakage, correct if necessary. CAUTION: If the cause of starting problem on disabled vehicle is severe, damage to booster vehicle charging system can result. 2. When using another vehicle as a booster source, park the booster vehicle within cable reach. Turn off all accessories, set the parking brake, place the automatic transmission in PARK or the manual transmission in NEUTRAL and turn the ignition OFF. 3. On disabled vehicle, place gear selector in park or neutral and set park brake. Turn off all accessories. 4. Connect jumper cables to booster battery. RED clamp to positive terminal (+). BLACK clamp to negative terminal (-). DO NOT allow clamps at opposite end of cables to touch, electrical arc will result. Review all warnings in this procedure. 5. On disabled vehicle, connect RED jumper cable clamp to positive (+) terminal. Connect BLACK jumper cable clamp to engine ground as close to the ground cable attaching point as possible. 6. Start the engine in the vehicle which has the booster battery, let the engine idle a few minutes, then start the engine in the vehicle with the discharged battery. CAUTION: Do not crank starter motor on disabled vehicle for more than 15 seconds, starter will overheat and could fail. 7. Allow battery in disabled vehicle to charge to at least 12.4 volts (75% charge) before attempting to start engine. If engine does not start within 15 seconds, stop cranking engine and allow starter to cool (15 min.), before cranking again. DISCONNECT CABLE CLAMPS AS FOLLOWS: - Disconnect BLACK cable clamp from engine ground on disabled vehicle. - When using a Booster vehicle, disconnect BLACK cable clamp from battery negative terminal. Disconnect RED cable clamp from battery positive terminal. - Disconnect RED cable clamp from battery positive terminal on disabled vehicle. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Battery > Battery Cable > Component Information > Description and Operation > Battery Cables - Description Battery Cable: Description and Operation Battery Cables - Description DESCRIPTION The battery cables (1) and (3) are large gauge, stranded copper wires sheathed within a heavy plastic or synthetic rubber insulating jacket. The wire used in the battery cables combines excellent flexibility and reliability with high electrical current carrying capacity. The battery cables feature a stamped brass clamping type female battery terminal crimped onto one end of the battery cable wire and then solder-dipped. A square headed pinch-bolt and hex nut are installed at the open end of the female battery terminal clamp. Large eyelet type terminals are crimped onto the opposite end of the battery cable wire and then solder-dipped. The battery positive cable wires (1) have a red insulating jacket to provide visual identification and feature a larger female battery terminal clamp to allow connection to the larger battery positive terminal post. The battery negative cable wires (3) have a black insulating jacket and a smaller female battery terminal clamp. The battery cables cannot be repaired and, if damaged or inoperative they must be replaced. Both the battery positive and negative cables are available for service replacement. Refer to the appropriate wiring information for the location of the proper battery cable wire harness diagrams. The wiring information also includes proper wire and connector repair procedures, further details on wire harness routing and retention, as well as pin-out and location views for the various wire harness connectors, splices and grounds. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Battery > Battery Cable > Component Information > Description and Operation > Battery Cables - Description > Page 10052 Battery Cable: Description and Operation Battery Cables - Operation OPERATION The battery cables connect the battery terminal posts to the vehicle electrical system. These cables also provide a path back to the battery for electrical current generated by the charging system for restoring the voltage potential of the battery. The female battery terminal clamps on the ends of the battery cable wires provide a strong and reliable connection of the battery cable to the battery terminal posts. The terminal pinch bolts allow the female terminal clamps to be tightened around the male terminal posts on the top of the battery. The eyelet terminals secured to the opposite ends of the battery cable wires provide secure and reliable connection of the battery cables to the vehicle electrical system. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Battery > Battery Cable > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 10053 Battery Cable: Testing and Inspection BATTERY CABLES A voltage drop test will determine if there is excessive resistance in the battery cable terminal connections or the battery cables. If excessive resistance is found in the battery cable connections, the connection point should be disassembled, cleaned of all corrosion or foreign material, then reassembled. Following reassembly, check the voltage drop for the battery cable connection and the battery cable again to confirm repair. When performing the voltage drop test, it is important to remember that the voltage drop is giving an indication of the resistance between the two points at which the voltmeter probes are attached. Example: When testing the resistance of the battery positive cable, touch the voltmeter leads to the battery positive cable terminal clamp and to the battery positive cable eyelet terminal at the starter solenoid B(+) terminal stud. If you probe the battery positive terminal post and the battery positive cable eyelet terminal at the starter solenoid B(+) terminal stud, you are reading the combined voltage drop in the battery positive cable terminal clamp-to-terminal post connection and the battery positive cable. VOLTAGE DROP TEST WARNING: Models equipped with a diesel engine have an automatic shutdown (ASD) relay located in the power distribution center (PDC). Removal of the ASD relay may not prevent the diesel engine from starting. Be certain to disconnect the fuel shutdown solenoid wire harness connector to prevent the engine from starting. Failure to do so may result in personal injury. The following operation will require a voltmeter accurate to 1/10 (0.10) volt. Before performing this test, be certain that the following procedures are accomplished: - The battery is fully-charged and tested, See: Testing and Inspection/Micro 420 Battery Tester . - Fully engage the parking brake. - If the vehicle is equipped with an automatic transmission, place the gearshift selector lever in the Park position. If the vehicle is equipped with a manual transmission, place the gearshift selector lever in the Neutral position and block the clutch pedal in the fully depressed position. - Verify that all lamps and accessories are turned off. 1. Connect the positive lead of the voltmeter (1) to the battery negative terminal post. Connect the negative lead of the voltmeter to the battery negative cable terminal clamp. Rotate and hold the ignition switch in the Start position. Observe the voltmeter. If voltage is detected, correct the poor connection between the battery negative cable terminal clamp and the battery negative terminal post. NOTE: If the vehicle is equipped with two 12v batteries, step #1 must be performed twice, once for each battery. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Battery > Battery Cable > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 10054 2. Connect the positive lead of the voltmeter (1) to the battery positive terminal post. Connect the negative lead of the voltmeter to the battery positive cable terminal clamp. Rotate and hold the ignition switch in the Start position. Observe the voltmeter. If voltage is detected, correct the poor connection between the battery positive cable terminal clamp and the battery positive terminal post. NOTE: If the vehicle is equipped with two 12v batteries, step #2 must be performed twice, once for each battery. 3. Connect the voltmeter (2) to measure between the battery positive cable terminal clamp (1) and the starter solenoid (3) B(+) terminal stud. Rotate and hold the ignition switch in the Start position. Observe the voltmeter. If the reading is above 0.2 volt, clean and tighten the battery positive cable eyelet terminal connection at the starter solenoid B(+) terminal stud. Repeat the test. If the reading is still above 0.2 volt, replace the faulty battery positive cable. NOTE: If the vehicle is equipped with two 12v batteries, step #3 must be performed twice, once for each battery. 4. Connect the voltmeter (1) to measure between the battery (2) negative cable terminal clamp and a good clean ground on the engine block (3). Rotate and hold the ignition switch in the Start position. Observe the voltmeter. If the reading is above 0.2 volt, clean and tighten the battery negative cable eyelet terminal connection to the engine block. Repeat the test. If the reading is still above 0.2 volt, replace the faulty battery negative cable. NOTE: If the vehicle is equipped with two 12v batteries, step #4 must be performed twice, once for each battery. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Battery > Battery Cable > Component Information > Service and Repair > Battery Cables - Removal Battery Cable: Service and Repair Battery Cables - Removal REMOVAL NEGATIVE - GASOLINE ENGINE 1. Turn the ignition switch to the Off position. Be certain that all electrical accessories are turned off. 2. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable terminal clamp (3). 3. Remove the bolt (4) securing the negative cable to the left front fender. 4. One at a time, trace the battery cable retaining pushpins (3) , fasteners and routing clips until the cable is free from the vehicle. 5. Remove the bolt (4) securing the negative cable to the engine. 6. Remove the bolt (6) securing the negative cable to the left frame rail. 7. Remove the battery negative cable from the vehicle. POSITIVE - GASOLINE ENGINE Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Battery > Battery Cable > Component Information > Service and Repair > Battery Cables - Removal > Page 10057 1. Turn the ignition switch to the Off position. Be certain that all electrical accessories are turned off. 2. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable terminal clamp (3). 3. Disconnect the battery positive cable terminal clamp (1). 4. Remove the nut (9) securing the cable to the Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) (5). 5. Disconnect the wire harness connector (6) at the TIPM. 6. Disconnect the wire harness connector (7) pushpin from the TIPM housing. 7. Disconnect the battery cable retaining pushpin (8) securing the cable to the battery tray. 8. Raise the vehicle on a hoist, See: Maintenance/Vehicle Lifting/Service and Repair . 9. Disconnect the battery cable retaining pushpins (1) securing the cable to the left frame rail. 10. Remove the nut (5) securing the cable to the starter solenoid (6). 11. Lower the vehicle. 12. Lift the terminal cap (4) and remove the nut (3) securing the cable (1) to the alternator (2). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Battery > Battery Cable > Component Information > Service and Repair > Battery Cables - Removal > Page 10058 13. Disconnect any remaining pushpins securing the cable to the vehicle. 14. Remove the battery positive cable from the vehicle. NEGATIVE - DIESEL ENGINE - LEFT 1. Turn the ignition switch to the Off position. Be certain that all electrical accessories are turned off. 2. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable terminal clamps (1 and 9). 3. Remove the bolt (4) securing the negative cable to the left front fender. 4. Remove the bolt (6) securing the negative cable (2) to the engine. 5. Remove the bolt (7) securing the negative cable (2) to the left frame rail (1). 6. One at a time, trace the battery cable retaining pushpins, fasteners and routing clips until the cable is free from the vehicle. 7. Remove the battery negative cable from the vehicle. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Battery > Battery Cable > Component Information > Service and Repair > Battery Cables - Removal > Page 10059 NEGATIVE - DIESEL ENGINE - RIGHT 1. Turn the ignition switch to the Off position. Be certain that all electrical accessories are turned off. 2. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable terminal clamps (1 and 9). 3. Remove the bolt (2) securing the negative cable (3) to the right front fender. 4. Remove the bolt (4) securing the negative cable (5) to the engine (6). 5. One at a time, trace the battery cable retaining pushpins, fasteners and routing clips until the cable is free from the vehicle. 6. Remove the battery negative cable from the vehicle. POSITIVE - DIESEL ENGINE - LEFT 1. Turn the ignition switch to the Off position. Be certain that all electrical accessories are turned off. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Battery > Battery Cable > Component Information > Service and Repair > Battery Cables - Removal > Page 10060 2. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable terminal clamps (1 and 9). 3. Remove the nut (8) securing the right battery positive cable terminal (6) to the left battery positive cable terminal clamp (5). 4. Remove the right cable terminal from the left cable terminal clamp. 5. Disconnect the battery positive cable terminal clamp (5). 6. Raise the vehicle on a hoist, See: Maintenance/Vehicle Lifting/Service and Repair . 7. Remove the stud bolt (3) securing the cable to the engine. 8. Lift the terminal cover (4) and remove the nut securing the cable to the starter solenoid (5). 9. Lower the vehicle. 10. One at a time, trace the battery cable retaining pushpins, fasteners and routing clips until the cable is free from the vehicle. 11. Remove the battery positive cable from the vehicle. POSITIVE - DIESEL ENGINE - RIGHT 1. Turn the ignition switch to the Off position. Be certain that all electrical accessories are turned off. 2. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable terminal clamps (1 and 9). 3. Remove the nut (8) securing the right battery positive cable terminal (6) to the left battery positive cable terminal clamp (5). 4. Remove the right cable terminal from the left cable terminal clamp. 5. Remove the battery cable fastener clips (11) to free the cable from the vehicle. 6. Disconnect the right battery positive cable terminal clamp (13). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Battery > Battery Cable > Component Information > Service and Repair > Battery Cables - Removal > Page 10061 7. Lift the terminal cover (1) and remove the nut (7) securing the cable (2) to the alternator (3). 8. One at a time, trace the battery cable retaining pushpins, fasteners and routing clips until the cable is free from the vehicle. 9. Remove the battery positive cable from the vehicle. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Battery > Battery Cable > Component Information > Service and Repair > Battery Cables - Removal > Page 10062 Battery Cable: Service and Repair Battery Cables - Installation INSTALLATION NEGATIVE - GASOLINE ENGINE 1. Position the battery negative cable (5) in the vehicle. 2. One at a time, install the battery cable retaining pushpins (3) , fasteners and routing clips until the cable is secure in the vehicle. 3. Install the bolt (6) securing the negative cable (1) to the left frame rail. 4. Install the bolt (4) securing the negative cable (5) to the engine. 5. Install the bolt (4) securing the negative cable (3) to the left front fender. 6. Connect the battery negative cable terminal clamp (3). 7. Check the vehicle for normal operation. POSITIVE - GASOLINE ENGINE Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Battery > Battery Cable > Component Information > Service and Repair > Battery Cables - Removal > Page 10063 1. Position the battery positive cable (1) in the vehicle. 2. Install the nut (3) securing the cable (1) to the alternator (2). 3. Secure the terminal cap (4) to the alternator stud. 4. Install the cable (1) pushpin into the bracket to the left of the alternator. 5. Raise the vehicle on a hoist, See: Maintenance/Vehicle Lifting/Service and Repair . 6. Install the nut (5) securing the cable to the starter solenoid (6). 7. Connect the battery cable retaining pushpins (1) securing the cable to the left frame rail. 8. Lower the vehicle. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Battery > Battery Cable > Component Information > Service and Repair > Battery Cables - Removal > Page 10064 9. Install the battery cable retaining pushpin (8) securing the cable to the battery tray. 10. Install the wire harness connector (7) pushpin into the Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) (5) housing. 11. Connect the wire harness connector (6) at the TIPM. 12. Install the nut (9) securing the cable to the TIPM. 13. Connect the battery positive cable terminal clamp (1). 14. Connect the battery negative cable terminal clamp (3). 15. Check the vehicle for normal operation. NEGATIVE - DIESEL ENGINE - LEFT 1. Position the battery negative cable (2) in the vehicle. 2. One at a time, install the battery cable retaining pushpins, fasteners and routing clips until the cable is secure in the vehicle. 3. Install the bolt (7) securing the negative cable (2) to the left frame rail (1). 4. Install the bolt (6) securing the negative cable (2) to the engine. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Battery > Battery Cable > Component Information > Service and Repair > Battery Cables - Removal > Page 10065 5. Install the bolt (4) securing the negative cable to the left front fender. 6. Connect the battery negative cable terminal clamps (1 and 9). 7. Check the vehicle for normal operation. NEGATIVE - DIESEL ENGINE - RIGHT 1. Position the battery negative cable (3) in the vehicle. 2. One at a time, install the battery cable retaining pushpins, fasteners and routing clips until the cable is secure in the vehicle. 3. Install the bolt (2) securing the negative cable to the right front fender. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Battery > Battery Cable > Component Information > Service and Repair > Battery Cables - Removal > Page 10066 4. Install the bolt (4) securing the negative cable (5) to the engine (6). 5. Connect the battery negative cable terminal clamps (1 and 9). 6. Check the vehicle for normal operation. POSITIVE - DIESEL ENGINE - LEFT 1. Position the battery positive cable (4) in the vehicle. 2. One at a time, install the battery cable retaining pushpins, fasteners and routing clips until the cable is secure in the vehicle. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Battery > Battery Cable > Component Information > Service and Repair > Battery Cables - Removal > Page 10067 3. Raise the vehicle on a hoist, See: Maintenance/Vehicle Lifting/Service and Repair . 4. Install the nut securing the cable to the starter solenoid (5) and secure the terminal cover (4) in place. 5. Install the stud bolt (3) securing the cable to the engine. 6. Lower the vehicle. 7. Install the battery positive cable terminal clamp (5). 8. Install the right battery positive cable terminal (6) onto the left cable terminal clamp (5). 9. Install the nut (8) securing the right cable terminal (6) to the left positive battery cable terminal clamp (5). 10. Connect the battery negative cable terminal clamps (1 and 9). 11. Check the vehicle for normal operation. POSITIVE - DIESEL ENGINE - RIGHT 1. Position the right battery positive cable (13) in the vehicle. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Battery > Battery Cable > Component Information > Service and Repair > Battery Cables - Removal > Page 10068 2. After positioning the cable install the battery cable fastener clips (11) to the vehicle. 3. Install the right battery positive cable terminal (6) to the left battery positive cable terminal clamp (5). 4. Install the nut (8) securing the right cable terminal (6) to the left cable terminal clamp (5). 5. Connect the right battery positive cable terminal clamp (13). 6. Lift the terminal cover (1) and install the nut (7) securing the cable (2) to the alternator (3). Secure the terminal cover to the alternator. 7. Connect the battery negative cable terminal clamps (1 and 9). 8. Check the vehicle for normal operation. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Battery > Battery Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Battery Temperature Sensor - Description Battery Temperature Sensor: Description and Operation Battery Temperature Sensor - Description DESCRIPTION The Battery Temperature Sensor (BTS) is used only on the diesel engine. It is attached to the battery tray located under the battery. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Battery > Battery Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Battery Temperature Sensor - Description > Page 10073 Battery Temperature Sensor: Description and Operation Battery Temperature Sensor - Operation OPERATION The BTS is used to determine the battery temperature and control battery charging rate. This temperature data, along with data from monitored line voltage, is used by the PCM (ECM Diesel) to vary the battery charging rate. System voltage will be higher at colder temperatures and is gradually reduced at warmer temperatures. The PCM sends 5 volts to the sensor and is grounded through the sensor return line. As temperature increases, resistance in the sensor decreases and the detection voltage at the PCM increases. The BTS is also used for OBD II diagnostics. Certain faults and OBD II monitors are either enabled or disabled, depending upon BTS input (for example, disable purge and enable Leak Detection Pump (LDP) and O2 sensor heater tests). Most OBD II monitors are disabled below 20°F. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Battery > Battery Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Battery Temperature Sensor - Removal Battery Temperature Sensor: Service and Repair Battery Temperature Sensor - Removal REMOVAL The battery temperature sensor (1) is located under the vehicle battery and is attached (snapped into) a mounting hole on battery tray (4). 1. Remove battery. 2. Pry sensor (1) straight up from battery tray mounting hole to gain access to electrical connector (3). 3. Disconnect sensor from engine wire harness electrical connector. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Battery > Battery Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Battery Temperature Sensor - Removal > Page 10076 Battery Temperature Sensor: Service and Repair Battery Temperature Sensor - Installation INSTALLATION NOTE: The battery temperature sensor (1) is located under the vehicle battery and is attached (snapped into) a mounting hole on battery tray (4). 1. Pull electrical connector (3) up through mounting hole in top of battery tray. 2. Connect sensor. 3. Snap sensor into battery tray. 4. Install battery. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Battery > Battery Tray > Component Information > Description and Operation Battery Tray: Description and Operation DESCRIPTION The molded plastic battery tray (1) is located in the left front corner of the engine compartment. On this vehicle, the battery tray also provides an anchor point for the anti-lock brake controller (3), cruise control servo (if equipped) and the integrated power module (4). The battery hold down hardware is contained within the battery tray. A hole in the bottom of the battery tray (2) is fitted with a battery temperature sensor. See: Charging System/Testing and Inspection for additional information on the battery temperature sensor. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Battery > Battery Tray > Component Information > Service and Repair > Battery Retainer - Removal Battery Tray: Service and Repair Battery Retainer - Removal REMOVAL CAUTION: Never operate a vehicle without a battery hold down device properly installed. Damage to the vehicle, components and battery could result. 1. Verify that the ignition switch and all accessories are OFF. 2. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. 3. Remove the bolt (6) from the battery hold down bracket (5) and remove the bracket from the vehicle. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Battery > Battery Tray > Component Information > Service and Repair > Battery Retainer - Removal > Page 10082 Battery Tray: Service and Repair Battery Retainer - Installation INSTALLATION 1. Clean and inspect the battery hold down bracket (5) and bolt (6) See: Service and Repair/Procedures/Battery Cleaning and Inspection . 2. Position the battery hold down bracket in the battery tray. CAUTION: Be certain that the hold down bracket is properly positioned in the battery tray before tightening the hold down bolt or damage to the battery and tray may result. 3. Install and tighten the battery hold down retaining bolt. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Battery > Battery Tray > Component Information > Service and Repair > Battery Retainer - Removal > Page 10083 Battery Tray: Service and Repair Battery Tray - Removal REMOVAL LEFT SIDE 1. Remove the battery (3) from the battery tray See: Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Battery - Removal . 2. Remove the Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) (5) See: Power and Ground Distribution/Power Distribution Module/Service and Repair/Removal . 3. Disconnect the wire harness retainers from the battery tray assembly. 4. Disconnect the purge solenoid (6) from its mounting bracket. 5. Remove the anti-lock brake controller (if equipped) retaining bolts and support the brake controller with mechanics wire. It is not necessary to completely remove the anti-lock brake control unit. 6. Remove the left front wheelhouse splash shield See: Body and Frame/Fender/Front Fender/Front Fender Liner/Service and Repair/Removal . 7. Mark the location of the cruise servo (3) (if equipped) and remove the retaining screws. Position the servo out of the way. 8. Remove the battery temperature sensor from the battery tray See: Battery Temperature Sensor/Service and Repair/Battery Temperature Sensor Removal . 9. Disconnect the left front fender ground wire. 10. Remove the remaining battery tray retaining bolts (2). 11. Remove the battery tray from the vehicle. RIGHT SIDE Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Battery > Battery Tray > Component Information > Service and Repair > Battery Retainer - Removal > Page 10084 1. Remove the battery from the battery tray See: Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Battery - Removal . 2. Remove the right front wheelhouse splash shield, See: Body and Frame/Fender/Front Fender/Front Fender Liner/Service and Repair/Removal . 3. Disconnect the right front fender ground wire. 4. Remove fasteners from grid heater relay bracket. 5. Remove air box. 6. Remove the remaining battery tray retaining bolts. 7. Remove the battery tray from the vehicle. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Battery > Battery Tray > Component Information > Service and Repair > Battery Retainer - Removal > Page 10085 Battery Tray: Service and Repair Battery Tray - Installation INSTALLATION LEFT SIDE 1. Position the battery tray assembly (1) and install the retaining bolts (2). 2. Connect the left front fender ground wire. 3. Install the battery temperature sensor in the battery tray See: Battery Temperature Sensor/Service and Repair/Battery Temperature Sensor Installation . 4. Install the cruise servo (3) (if equipped) and retaining screws. 5. Install the left front wheelhouse splash shield See: Body and Frame/Fender/Front Fender/Front Fender Liner/Service and Repair/Installation . 6. Install the anti-lock brake controller (if equipped). 7. Install the purge solenoid (6) on its mounting bracket. 8. Connect the wire harness retainers on the battery tray assembly. 9. Install the Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) (5) See: Power and Ground Distribution/Power Distribution Module/Service and Repair/Installation . 10. Install the battery (3) See: Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Battery - Installation . RIGHT SIDE Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Battery > Battery Tray > Component Information > Service and Repair > Battery Retainer - Removal > Page 10086 1. Position the battery tray assembly and install the retaining bolts. 2. Connect the right front fender ground wire. 3. Install the air box. 4. Install the grid heater relay bracket. 5. Install the right front wheelhouse splash shield See: Body and Frame/Fender/Front Fender/Front Fender Liner/Service and Repair/Installation . 6. Install the battery See: Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Battery - Installation . Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Specifications Alternator: Specifications GENERATOR RATINGS Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Specifications > Page 10091 Alternator: Locations Component ID: 141 Component : GENERATOR Connector: Name : GENERATOR Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Pin Circuit Description 1 Z816 18BK GROUND Pin Circuit Description 1 K20 18BR/GY GEN FIELD CONTROL 2 K20 19BR/GY GEN FIELD CONTROL 2 A804 18RD GEN SENSE 2 A804 18RD/GY GEN SENSE Component Location - 8 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Specifications > Page 10092 Component Location - 9 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Specifications > Page 10093 Component Location - 11 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Specifications > Page 10094 Component Location - 12 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Specifications > Page 10095 Component Location - 10 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Specifications > Page 10096 Component Location - 36 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Specifications > Page 10097 Connector: Name : GENERATOR-EYELET Color : # of pins : 1 Pin Circuit Description 1 A11 4BR/RD B(+) Component Location - 8 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Specifications > Page 10098 Component Location - 9 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Specifications > Page 10099 Component Location - 11 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Specifications > Page 10100 Component Location - 12 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Specifications > Page 10101 Component Location - 10 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Specifications > Page 10102 Component Location - 36 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Specifications > Page 10103 Connector: Name : GENERATOR-EYELET Color : # of pins : 1 Qualifier : (220 AMP ALTERNATOR) Pin Circuit Description 1 A11 02BR/RD FUSED B(+) Component Location - 8 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Specifications > Page 10104 Component Location - 9 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Specifications > Page 10105 Component Location - 11 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Specifications > Page 10106 Component Location - 12 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Specifications > Page 10107 Component Location - 10 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Specifications > Page 10108 Component Location - 36 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Specifications > Page 10109 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Alternator: Diagram Information and Instructions Warnings WARNINGS - GENERAL WARNINGS provide information to prevent personal injury and vehicle damage. Below is a list of general warnings that should be followed any time a vehicle is being serviced. WARNING: Always wear safety glasses for eye protection. WARNING: Use safety stands anytime a procedure requires being under a vehicle. WARNING: Be sure that the ignition switch always is in the off position, unless the procedure requires it to be on. WARNING: Set the parking brake when working on any vehicle. An automatic transmission should be in park. A manual transmission should be in neutral. WARNING: Operate the engine only in a well-ventilated area. WARNING: Keep away from moving parts when the engine is running, especially the fan and belts. WARNING: To prevent serious burns, avoid contact with hot parts such as the radiator, exhaust manifold(s), tail pipe, catalytic converter and muffler. WARNING: Do not allow flame or sparks near the battery. Gases are always present in and around the battery. WARNING: Always remove rings, watches, loose hanging jewelry and avoid loose clothing. How to Use Wiring Diagrams DESCRIPTION - HOW TO USE WIRING DIAGRAMS DaimlerChrysler Corporation wiring diagrams are designed to provide information regarding the vehicles wiring content. In order to effectively use the wiring diagrams to diagnose and repair DaimlerChrysler Corporation vehicles, it is important to understand all of their features and characteristics. Diagrams are arranged such that the power (B+) side of the circuit is placed near the top of the page, and the ground (B-) side of the circuit is placed near the bottom of the page. All switches, components, and modules are shown in the at rest position with the doors closed and the key removed from the ignition. Components are shown two ways. A solid line around a component indicates that the component is complete. A dashed line around the component indicates that the component is being shown is not complete. Incomplete components have a reference number to indicate the page where the component is shown complete. It is important to realize that no attempt is made on the diagrams to represent components and wiring as they appear on the vehicle. For example, a short piece of wire is treated the same as a long one. In addition, switches and other components are shown as simply as possible, with regard to function only. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10112 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10113 SYMBOLS International symbols are used throughout the wiring diagrams. These symbols are consistent with those being used around the world. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10114 TERMINOLOGY This is a list of terms and definitions used in the wiring diagrams. LHD - Left Hand Drive Vehicles RHD - Right Hand Drive Vehicles ATX - Automatic Transmissions-Front Wheel Drive MTX Manual Transmissions-Front Wheel Drive Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10115 AT - Automatic Transmissions-Rear Wheel Drive MT - Manual Transmissions-Rear Wheel Drive SOHC - Single Over Head Cam Engine DOHC - Double Over Head Cam Engine Export - Vehicles Built For Sale In Markets Other Than North America Except Export - Vehicles Built For Sale In North America Circuit Functions DESCRIPTION - CIRCUIT FUNCTIONS All circuits in the diagrams use an alpha/numeric code to identify the wire and it's function. To identify which circuit code applies to a system, refer to the Circuit Identification Code Chart. This chart shows the main circuits only and does not show the secondary codes that may apply to some models. Circuit Information DESCRIPTION - CIRCUIT INFORMATION Each wire shown in the diagrams contains a code which identifies the main circuit, a specific part of the main circuit, gage of wire, and color. An example would be A 2 18 LB/YL. This is a Battery Feed circuit, level two, eighteen gauge, light blue with a yellow tracer. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10116 Connector, Ground and Splice Information DESCRIPTION - CONNECTOR, GROUND AND SPLICE INFORMATION CAUTION: Not all connectors are serviced. Some connectors are serviced only with a harness. A typical example might be the Supplemental Restraint System connectors. Always check parts availability before attempting a repair. IDENTIFICATION In-line connectors are identified by a number, as follows: - In-line connectors located in the engine compartment are C100 series numbers. - In-line connectors located in the instrument panel area are C200 series numbers. - In-line connectors located in the body are C300 series numbers. - Jumper harness connectors are C400 series numbers. - Grounds and ground connectors are identified with a "G" and follow the same series numbering as the in-line connectors. - Splices are identified with an "S" and follow the same series numbering as the in-line connectors. In addition, S001-S099 numbers are located in the engine compartment. - Component connectors are identified by the component name instead of a number. Multiple connectors on a component use a C1, C2, etc. identifier. LOCATIONS Vehicle/Locations contains the master connector/ground/splice location index charts with hyperlinks to the applicable location illustrations. The illustrations contain the connector name (or number)/ground number/splice number and component identification. The abbreviation T/O is used in the component location section to indicate a point in which the wiring harness branches out to a component. The abbreviation N/S means Not Shown in the illustrations Section Identification and Information DESCRIPTION - SECTION IDENTIFICATION AND INFORMATION The wiring diagrams are grouped into individual sections. If a component is most likely found in a particular group, it will be shown complete (all wires, Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10117 connectors, and pins) within that group. For example, the Auto Shutdown Relay is most likely to be found in Powertrain Management, so it is shown there complete. It can, however, be shown partially in another group if it contains some associated wiring. Splice diagrams show the entire splice and provide references to other sections the splices serves. Splice Information only contains splice diagrams that are not shown in their entirety somewhere else in the wiring diagrams. Connector Pin-Outs shows each connector and the circuits involved with that connector. The connectors are identified using the name/number on the diagram pages. Removal REMOVAL 1. Disconnect battery. 2. Release Connector Lock (2). 3. Disconnect the connector (3) being repaired from its mating half/component. 4. Remove the dress cover (if applicable) (1). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10118 5. Release the Secondary Terminal Lock, if required (1). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10119 6. Position the connector locking finger away from the terminal using the proper special tool. Pull on the wire to remove the terminal from the connector. Installation Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10120 INSTALLATION 1. Insert the removed terminal in the same cavity on the repair connector. 2. Repeat steps for each terminal in the connector, being sure that all wires are inserted into the proper cavities. For additional connector pin-out identification, refer to the wiring diagrams. 3. When the connector is re-assembled, the secondary terminal lock must be placed in the locked position to prevent terminal push out. 4. Replace dress cover (if applicable). 5. Connect connector to its mating half/component. 6. Connect battery and test all affected systems. Removal REMOVAL 1. Disconnect the battery. 2. Locate the diode in the harness, and remove the protective covering. 3. Remove the diode from the harness, pay attention to the current flow direction (1) (2) (3). Installation INSTALLATION 1. Remove the insulation from the wires in the harness. Only remove enough insulation to solder in the new diode. 2. Install the new diode in the harness, making sure current flow is correct. If necessary, refer to the appropriate wiring diagram for current flow. 3. Solder the connection together using rosin core type solder only. Do not use acid core solder. 4. Tape the diode to the harness using electrical tape. Make sure the diode is completely sealed from the elements. 5. Re-connect the battery and test affected systems. Removal REMOVAL 1. Follow steps for removing terminals described in the connector removal section. 2. Cut the wire 6 inches from the back of the connector. Installation INSTALLATION 1. Select a wire from the terminal repair kit that best matches the color and gage of the wire being repaired. 2. Cut the repair wire to the proper length and remove one-half (1/2) inch of insulation. 3. Splice the repair wire to the wire harness (see wire splicing procedure). See: Service Procedures/Wire Splicing 4. Insert the repaired wire into the connector. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10121 5. Install the connector locking wedge, if required, and reconnect the connector to its mating half/component. 6. Re-tape the wire harness starting at 1-1/2 inches behind the connector and 2 inches past the repair. 7. Connect battery and test all affected systems. Wire Splicing STANDARD PROCEDURE - WIRE SPLICING When splicing a wire, it is important that the correct gage be used as shown in the wiring diagrams. 1. Remove one-half (1/2) inch of insulation from each wire that needs to be spliced. 2. Place a piece of adhesive lined heat shrink tubing on one side of the wire. Make sure the tubing will be long enough to cover and seal the entire repair area. 3. Place the strands of wire overlapping each other inside of the splice clip (1). 4. Using crimping tool (1), Mopar p/n 05019912AA, crimp the splice clip and wires together. 5. Solder (3) the connection (2) together using rosin core type solder (1) only. CAUTION: DO NOT USE ACID CORE SOLDER. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10122 6. Center the heat shrink tubing (2) over the joint and heat using a heat gun. Heat the joint until the tubing is tightly sealed and sealant (1) comes out of both ends of the tubing. Special Tools WIRING/TERMINAL PROBING TOOL PACKAGE 6807 TERMINAL PICK TOOL SET 6680 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10123 TERMINAL REMOVING TOOLS 6932 AND 8638 TERMINAL REMOVING TOOL 6934 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10124 Alternator: Diagnostic Aids Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) Sensitive Devices STANDARD PROCEDURE - ELECTROSTATIC DISCHARGE (ESD) SENSITIVE DEVICES All ESD sensitive components are solid state and a symbol is used to indicate this. When handling any component with this symbol, comply with the following procedures to reduce the possibility of electrostatic charge build up on the body and inadvertent discharge into the component. If it is not known whether the part is ESD sensitive, assume that it is. 1. Always touch a known good ground before handling the part. This should be repeated while handling the part and more frequently after sliding across a seat, sitting down from a standing position, or walking a distance. 2. Avoid touching electrical terminals of the part, unless instructed to do so by a written procedure. 3. When using a voltmeter, be sure to connect the ground lead first. 4. Do not remove the part from it's protective packing until it is time to install the part. 5. Before removing the part from it's package, ground the package to a known good ground on the vehicle. Testing Of Voltage Potential STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING OF VOLTAGE POTENTIAL 1. Connect the ground lead of a voltmeter to a known good ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the voltmeter to the selected test point. The vehicle ignition may need to be turned ON to check voltage. Refer to the appropriate test procedure. Testing For Continuity Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10125 STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING FOR CONTINUITY 1. Remove the fuse (1) for the circuit being checked or, disconnect the battery. 2. Connect one lead of the ohmmeter to one side of the circuit being tested 3. Connect the other lead to the other end of the circuit being tested. Low or no resistance means good continuity. Testing For A Short To Ground STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING FOR A SHORT TO GROUND 1. Remove the fuse and disconnect all items involved with the fuse. 2. Connect a test light or a voltmeter across the terminals of the fuse. 3. Starting at the fuse block, wiggle the wiring harness about six to eight inches apart and watch the voltmeter/test lamp. 4. If the voltmeter registers voltage or the test lamp glows, there is a short to ground in that general area of the wiring harness. Testing For A Short To Ground On Fuses Powering Several Loads STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING FOR A SHORT TO GROUND ON FUSES POWERING SEVERAL LOADS 1. Refer to the wiring diagrams and disconnect or isolate all items on the suspected fused circuits. 2. Replace the blown fuse. 3. Supply power to the fuse by turning ON the ignition switch or re-connecting the battery. 4. Start connecting or energizing the items in the fuse circuit one at a time. When the fuse blows the circuit with the short to ground has been isolated. Testing For A Voltage Drop STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING FOR A VOLTAGE DROP Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10126 1. Connect the positive lead of the voltmeter to the side of the circuit closest to the battery. 2. Connect the other lead of the voltmeter to the other side of the switch, component or circuit. 3. Operate the item. 4. The voltmeter will show the difference in voltage between the two points. Troubleshooting Wiring Problems DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING - WIRING HARNESS TROUBLESHOOTING TOOLS When diagnosing a problem in an electrical circuit there are several common tools necessary. These tools are listed and explained below. - Jumper Wire - This is a test wire used to connect two points of a circuit. It can be used to bypass an open in a circuit. WARNING: Never use a jumper wire across a load, such as a motor, connected between a battery feed and ground. - Voltmeter - Used to check for voltage on a circuit. Always connect the black lead to a known good ground and the red lead to the positive side of the circuit. CAUTION: Most of the electrical components used in today's vehicles are Solid State. When checking voltages in these circuits, use a meter with a 10 - megohm or greater impedance rating. - Ohmmeter - Used to check the resistance between two points of a circuit. Low or no resistance in a circuit means good continuity. CAUTION: Most of the electrical components used in today's vehicles are Solid State. When checking resistance in these circuits use a meter with a 10 - megohm or greater impedance rating. In addition, make sure the power is disconnected from the circuit. Circuits that are powered up by the vehicle's electrical system can cause damage to the equipment and provide false readings. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10127 - Probing Tools - These tools are used for probing terminals in connectors. Select the proper size tool from Special Tool Package 6807, and insert the probing end (2) into the terminal being tested. Use the other end of the tool (1) to insert the meter probe. INTERMITTENT AND POOR CONNECTIONS Most intermittent electrical problems are caused by faulty electrical connections or wiring. It is also possible for a sticking component or relay to cause a problem. Before condemning a component or wiring assembly, check the following items. - Connectors are fully seated - Spread terminals, or terminal push out - Terminals in the wiring assembly are fully seated into the connector/component and locked into position - Dirt or corrosion on the terminals. Any amount of corrosion or dirt could cause an intermittent problem - Damaged connector/component casing exposing the item to dirt or moisture - Wire insulation that has rubbed through causing a short to ground - Some or all of the wiring strands broken inside of the insulation - Wiring broken inside of the insulation TROUBLESHOOTING WIRING PROBLEMS When troubleshooting wiring problems there are six steps which can aid in the procedure. The steps are listed and explained below. Always check for non-factory items added to the vehicle before doing any diagnosis. If the vehicle is equipped with these items, disconnect them to verify these add-on items are not the cause of the problem. 1. Verify the problem. 2. Verify any related symptoms. Do this by performing operational checks on components that are in the same circuit. Refer to the wiring diagrams. 3. Analyze the symptoms. Use the wiring diagrams to determine what the circuit is doing, where the problem most likely is occurring and where the diagnosis will continue. 4. Isolate the problem area. 5. Repair the problem area. 6. Verify the proper operation. For this step, check for proper operation of all items on the repaired circuit. Refer to the wiring diagrams. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10128 Alternator: Connector Views Component ID: 141 Component : GENERATOR Connector: Name : GENERATOR Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Pin Circuit Description 1 Z816 18BK GROUND Pin Circuit Description 1 K20 18BR/GY GEN FIELD CONTROL 2 K20 19BR/GY GEN FIELD CONTROL 2 A804 18RD GEN SENSE 2 A804 18RD/GY GEN SENSE Component Location - 8 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10129 Component Location - 9 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10130 Component Location - 11 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10131 Component Location - 12 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10132 Component Location - 10 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10133 Component Location - 36 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10134 Connector: Name : GENERATOR-EYELET Color : # of pins : 1 Pin Circuit Description 1 A11 4BR/RD B(+) Component Location - 8 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10135 Component Location - 9 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10136 Component Location - 11 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10137 Component Location - 12 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10138 Component Location - 10 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10139 Component Location - 36 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10140 Connector: Name : GENERATOR-EYELET Color : # of pins : 1 Qualifier : (220 AMP ALTERNATOR) Pin Circuit Description 1 A11 02BR/RD FUSED B(+) Component Location - 8 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10141 Component Location - 9 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10142 Component Location - 11 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10143 Component Location - 12 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10144 Component Location - 10 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10145 Component Location - 36 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10146 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Description and Operation > Generator Alternator: Description and Operation Generator Description DESCRIPTION The generator is belt-driven by the engine using a serpentine type drive belt. It is serviced only as a complete assembly. If the generator fails for any reason, the entire assembly must be replaced. Operation OPERATION As the energized rotor begins to rotate within the generator, the spinning magnetic field induces a current into the windings of the stator coil. Once the generator begins producing sufficient current, it also provides the current needed to energize the rotor. The stator winding connections deliver the induced alternating current to 3 positive and 3 negative diodes for rectification. From the diodes, rectified direct current is delivered to the vehicle electrical system through the generator battery terminal. Although the generators appear the same externally, different generators with different output ratings are used on this vehicle. Be certain that the replacement generator has the same output rating and part number as the original unit. Noise emitting from the generator may be caused by: worn, loose or defective bearings; a loose or defective drive pulley; incorrect, worn, damaged or misadjusted fan drive belt; loose mounting bolts; a misaligned drive pulley or a defective stator or diode. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Description and Operation > Generator > Page 10149 Alternator: Description and Operation Generator Decoupler Pulley Description DESCRIPTION The generator decoupler is used only with certain engines. The decoupler is used in place of the standard generator drive pulley. Operation OPERATION The generator decoupler is used only with certain engines. The decoupler is a one-way clutch designed to help reduce belt tension fluctuation, vibration, reduce fatigue loads, improve belt life, reduce hub loads on components, and reduce noise. Dry operation is used (no grease or lubricants). The decoupler is not temperature sensitive and also has a low sensitivity to electrical load. The decoupler is a non-serviceable item and is to be replaced as an assembly. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Diagnosis and Testing - Charging System Alternator: Testing and Inspection Diagnosis and Testing - Charging System DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING - CHARGING SYSTEM The following procedures may be used to diagnose the charging system if: - the check gauges lamp (if equipped) is illuminated with the engine running - the voltmeter (if equipped) does not register properly - an undercharged or overcharged battery condition occurs. Remember that an undercharged battery is often caused by: - accessories being left on with the engine not running - a faulty or improperly adjusted switch that allows a lamp to stay on. INSPECTION The PCM (Powertrain Control Module), or ECM (Diesel) monitors critical input and output circuits of the charging system, making sure they are operational. A Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) is assigned to each input and output circuit monitored by the On-Board Diagnostic (OBD) system. Some charging system circuits are checked continuously, and some are checked only under certain conditions. Refer to Diagnostic Trouble Codes in; Powertrain Control Module; Electronic Control Modules for more DTC information. To perform a complete test of the charging system, use a diagnostic scan tool. Perform the following inspections before attaching the scan tool. 1. Inspect the battery condition. 2. Inspect condition of battery cable terminals, battery posts, connections at engine block, starter solenoid and relay. They should be clean and tight. Repair as required. 3. Inspect all fuses in both the fuseblock and Power Distribution Center (PDC) for tightness in receptacles. They should be properly installed and tight. Repair or replace as required. 4. Inspect generator mounting bolts for tightness. Replace or tighten bolts if required. 5. Inspect generator drive belt condition and tension. Tighten or replace belt as required. 6. Inspect automatic belt tensioner (if equipped). 7. Inspect generator electrical connections at generator field, battery output, and ground terminal (if equipped). Also check generator ground wire connection at engine (if equipped). They should all be clean and tight. Repair as required. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Diagnosis and Testing - Charging System > Page 10152 Alternator: Testing and Inspection Diagnosis and Testing - Generator Decoupler DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING - GENERATOR DECOUPLER Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Service and Repair > Generator - Removal Alternator: Service and Repair Generator - Removal REMOVAL 3.7L / 4.7L WARNING: Disconnect negative cable from battery before removing battery output wire (b+ wire) from generator. Failure to do so can result in injury or damage to electrical system. 1. Disconnect negative battery cable at battery. 2. Remove generator drive belt. 3. Unsnap plastic insulator cap from B+ output terminal (3). 4. Remove B+ terminal mounting nut at rear of generator (2). Disconnect terminal from generator. 5. Disconnect field wire connector at rear of generator (4) by pushing on connector tab. 6. Remove 1 rear vertical generator mounting bolt (2). 7. Remove 2 front horizontal generator mounting bolts (1). 8. Remove generator from vehicle. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Service and Repair > Generator - Removal > Page 10155 5.7L WARNING: Disconnect negative cable from battery before removing battery output wire (b+ wire) from generator. Failure to do so can result in injury or damage to electrical system. 1. Disconnect negative battery cable at battery. 2. Remove generator drive belt. 3. Unsnap plastic insulator cap from B+ output terminal. 4. Remove B+ terminal mounting nut at rear of generator. Disconnect terminal from generator. 5. Disconnect field wire connector at rear of generator by pushing on connector tab. 6. Remove generator support bracket nuts (3) and bolt (4) and remove support bracket. 7. Remove 2 generator mounting bolts (1) and (3). 8. Remove generator from vehicle. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Service and Repair > Generator - Removal > Page 10156 Alternator: Service and Repair Generator - Installation INSTALLATION 3.7L / 4.7L 1. Position generator to engine and install 2 horizontal bolts and 1 vertical bolt. 2. Tighten all 3 bolts to 40 ft. lbs. (55 Nm). 3. Snap field wire connector into rear of generator. 4. Install B+ terminal eyelet to generator output stud. Tighten mounting nut to 8.8 ft. lbs. (12 Nm). CAUTION: Never force a belt over a pulley rim using a screwdriver. The synthetic fiber of the belt can be damaged. CAUTION: When installing a serpentine accessory drive belt, the belt MUST be routed correctly. The water pump may be rotating in the wrong direction if the belt is installed incorrectly, causing the engine to overheat. 5. Install generator drive belt. 6. Install negative battery cable to battery. 5.7L 1. Position generator to engine and install 2 mounting bolts. 2. Tighten bolts to 30 ft. lbs. (41 Nm). 3. Position support bracket to front of generator and install bolt and nuts. Tighten bolt/nuts to 30 ft. lbs. (41 Nm). 4. Snap field wire connector into rear of generator. 5. Install B+ terminal eyelet to generator output stud. Tighten mounting nut to 8.8 ft. lbs. (12 Nm). CAUTION: Never force a belt over a pulley rim using a screwdriver. The synthetic fiber of the belt can be damaged. CAUTION: When installing a serpentine accessory drive belt, the belt MUST be routed correctly. The water pump may be rotating in the wrong direction if the belt is installed incorrectly, causing the engine to overheat. 6. Install generator drive belt. 7. Install negative battery cable to battery. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Service and Repair > Generator - Removal > Page 10157 Alternator: Service and Repair Generator Decoupler Pulley Removal REMOVAL The generator decoupler is used only with certain engines. Two different type generator decoupler pulleys are used. One can be identified by the use of machined splines (3). The other decoupler is equipped with a hex opening (2) and will not use splines. Different special tools are required to service each different decoupler. INA Decoupler 1. Disconnect negative battery cable. 2. Remove generator and accessory drive belt. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Service and Repair > Generator - Removal > Page 10158 3. Position Special Tool #8823 (VM.1048) (2) into decoupler (1). 4. Determine if end of generator shaft is hex shaped (2)............ 5. ...... or is splined (2). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Service and Repair > Generator - Removal > Page 10159 6. If hex is used, insert a 10MM deep socket (1) into tool #8823 (VM.1048). 7. If splined, insert a 5/16" 6-point hex driver (1), or a 10MM 12-point triple square driver into tool #8823 (VM.1048). 8. The generator shaft uses conventional right-hand threads to attach decoupler. To break decoupler loose from generator threads, rotate end of tool (1) clockwise or......, Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Service and Repair > Generator - Removal > Page 10160 9. rotate end of tool (1) clockwise. 10. After breaking loose with tool, unthread decoupler by hand from generator. Litens Decoupler 1. Disconnect negative battery cable. 2. Remove generator and accessory drive belt. 3. Position Special Tool #8433 into decoupler. Align to hex end of generator shaft. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Service and Repair > Generator - Removal > Page 10161 4. The generator shaft uses conventional right-hand threads to attach decoupler. To break decoupler loose from generator threads, rotate end of tool clockwise. 5. After breaking loose with tool, unthread decoupler by hand from generator. Installation INSTALLATION INA Decoupler 1. Thread decoupler pulley onto generator shaft by hand (right-hand threads). 2. Position Special Tool #8823 (VM.1048) into decoupler. 3. Determine if end of generator shaft is hex shaped or is splined. If hex is used, insert a 10MM deep socket (1) into tool #8823 (VM.1048) or....... Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Service and Repair > Generator - Removal > Page 10162 4. ......if splined, insert a 5/16" 6-point hex driver (1), or a 10MM 12-point triple square driver into tool #8823 (VM.1048). 5. Do not use an adjustable, ratcheting "click type" torque wrench. Most "click type" wrenches will only allow torque to be applied in a clockwise rotation. Use a dial-type or beam-type wrench. Tighten in counterclockwise rotation and tighten to 110 Nm (81 ft. lbs.). 6. Install accessory drive belt, and generator. 7. Connect negative battery cable. Litens Decoupler 1. Thread decoupler pulley onto generator shaft by hand (right-hand threads). 2. Position Special Tool 8433 into decoupler. Align tool to hex end of generator shaft. 3. Do not use an adjustable, ratcheting "click type" torque wrench. Most "click type" wrenches will only allow torque to be applied in a clockwise rotation. Use a dial-type or beam-type wrench. Tighten in counterclockwise rotation and tighten to 110 Nm (81 ft. lbs.). 4. Install accessory drive belt, and generator. 5. Connect negative battery cable. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Voltage Regulator > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Voltage Regulator: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The Electronic Voltage Regulator (EVR) is not a separate component. It is actually a voltage regulating circuit located within the PCM (Powertrain Control Module) (within the ECM for diesel engines). The EVR is not serviced separately. If replacement is necessary, the PCM must be replaced. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Voltage Regulator > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 10167 Voltage Regulator: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The amount of direct current produced by the generator is controlled by EVR circuitry contained within the PCM. This circuitry is connected in series with the generators second rotor field terminal and its ground. Voltage is regulated by cycling the ground path to control the strength of the rotor magnetic field. The EVR circuitry monitors system line voltage (B+) and battery temperature (refer to Battery Temperature Sensor for more information). It then determines a target charging voltage. If sensed battery voltage is 0.5 volts or lower than the target voltage, the PCM grounds the field winding until sensed battery voltage is 0.5 volts above target voltage. A circuit in the PCM cycles the ground side of the generator field up to 100 times per second (100Hz), but has the capability to ground the field control wire 100% of the time (full field) to achieve the target voltage. If the charging rate cannot be monitored (limp-in), a duty cycle of 25% is used by the PCM in order to have some generator output. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Clutch Switch > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 472 Clutch Switch: Locations Component ID 472 Component ID: 472 Component : SWITCH-CLUTCH INTERLOCK Connector: Name : SWITCH-CLUTCH INTERLOCK Color : GREEN # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (M/T) Pin Circuit Description 1 T41 20YL/DB TRS T41 SIGNAL (P/N) 2 Z911 20BK GROUND Component Location - 31 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Clutch Switch > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 472 > Page 10173 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Clutch Switch > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 472 > Page 10174 Clutch Switch: Locations Component ID 482 Component ID: 482 Component : SWITCH-CLUTCH INTERLOCK Connector: Name : SWITCH-CLUTCH INTERLOCK Color : GREEN # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (M/T) Pin Circuit Description 1 T41 20YL/DB TRS T41 SIGNAL (P/N) 2 Z911 20BK GROUND Component Location - 31 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Clutch Switch > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 472 > Page 10175 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Clutch Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Component ID 472 Clutch Switch: Diagrams Component ID 472 Component ID: 472 Component : SWITCH-CLUTCH INTERLOCK Connector: Name : SWITCH-CLUTCH INTERLOCK Color : GREEN # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (M/T) Pin Circuit Description 1 T41 20YL/DB TRS T41 SIGNAL (P/N) 2 Z911 20BK GROUND Component Location - 31 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Clutch Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Component ID 472 > Page 10178 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Clutch Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Component ID 472 > Page 10179 Clutch Switch: Diagrams Component ID 482 Component ID: 482 Component : SWITCH-CLUTCH INTERLOCK Connector: Name : SWITCH-CLUTCH INTERLOCK Color : GREEN # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (M/T) Pin Circuit Description 1 T41 20YL/DB TRS T41 SIGNAL (P/N) 2 Z911 20BK GROUND Component Location - 31 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Clutch Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Component ID 472 > Page 10180 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL The ignition key must be in the key cylinder (1) for cylinder removal. 1. Disconnect negative cable from battery. 2. Remove upper and lower covers (shrouds) from steering column. 3. Place shifter in PARK position. 4. A retaining pin is located at the underside of the key cylinder assembly. a. Rotate key to RUN position. b. Press in on retaining pin while pulling key cylinder (1) from ignition switch. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 10186 Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION The ignition key must be in the key cylinder (3) for cylinder installation. 1. Install the key cylinder into the housing using care to align the end of the key cylinder (3) with the ignition switch (1). 2. Push the key cylinder (3) in until it clicks. 3. Replace the upper and lower shrouds. 4. Reconnect the battery. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Keyless Starting System > Keyless Start Antenna > Component Information > Description and Operation Keyless Start Antenna: Description and Operation DESCRIPTION The Remote Start Antenna Module Assembly consists of an electrical connection to the WCM/SKREEM (1), a length of coax cable (2), two mounting clips (3) and (4), and a control module/antenna (5). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Keyless Starting System > Keyless Start Antenna > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Keyless Start Antenna: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL The Remote Start Antenna Module Assembly consists of an electrical connection to the WCM/SKREEM (1), a length of coax cable (2), two mounting clips (3) and (4), and a control module/antenna (5). The control module (1) is located behind the instrument panel cluster. The module electrical connector plugs into the WCM/SKREEM at the right side of the steering column. 1. Disconnect and isolate negative battery cable. 2. Remove steering column trim panel (knee blocker). 3. Remove steering column shrouds. 4. Remove IP cluster bezel. 5. Remove IP cluster and its three connectors. 6. Remove two module mounting screws (2) from module (1). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Keyless Starting System > Keyless Start Antenna > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 10193 7. Using a pair of long needle hose pliers, disengage coax cable retainer clip (2) from IP. 8. Disconnect coax cable electrical connector (1) at WCM/SKREEM (2). 9. Remove remote module assembly. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Keyless Starting System > Keyless Start Antenna > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 10194 Keyless Start Antenna: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION The Remote Start Antenna Module Assembly consists of an electrical connection to the WCM/SKREEM (1), a length of coax cable (2), two mounting clips (3) and (4), and a control module/antenna (5). 1. Connect coax cable electrical connector (1) to WCM/SKREEM module (2). Route coax cable and install cable clip (2) to IP. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Keyless Starting System > Keyless Start Antenna > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 10195 2. Position module (1) and install two module mounting screws (2). 3. Install IP cluster and its three connectors. 4. Install IP cluster bezel. 5. Install steering column trim panel (knee blocker). 6. Install steering column shrouds. 7. Connect negative battery cable. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Neutral Safety Switch > Component Information > Locations > Switch-Clutch Interlock Neutral Safety Switch: Locations Switch-Clutch Interlock Component ID 472 Component ID: 472 Component : SWITCH-CLUTCH INTERLOCK Connector: Name : SWITCH-CLUTCH INTERLOCK Color : GREEN # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (M/T) Pin Circuit Description 1 T41 20YL/DB TRS T41 SIGNAL (P/N) 2 Z911 20BK GROUND Component Location - 31 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Neutral Safety Switch > Component Information > Locations > Switch-Clutch Interlock > Page 10200 Component ID 482 Component ID: 482 Component : SWITCH-CLUTCH INTERLOCK Connector: Name : SWITCH-CLUTCH INTERLOCK Color : GREEN # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (M/T) Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Neutral Safety Switch > Component Information > Locations > Switch-Clutch Interlock > Page 10201 Pin Circuit Description 1 T41 20YL/DB TRS T41 SIGNAL (P/N) 2 Z911 20BK GROUND Component Location - 31 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Neutral Safety Switch > Component Information > Locations > Switch-Clutch Interlock > Page 10202 Neutral Safety Switch: Locations Switch-Clutch Interlock/Upstop Component ID: 483 Component : SWITCH-CLUTCH INTERLOCK/UPSTOP Connector: Name : SWITCH-CLUTCH INTERLOCK/UPSTOP Color : # of pins : 6 Qualifier : (6.7L) Pin Circuit Description 1-2-3 T26 18DG/OR CLUTCH INTERLOCK/UPSTOP SWITCH OUTPUT 4 Z993 18BK GROUND 5-6-- Component Location - 31 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Neutral Safety Switch > Component Information > Locations > Switch-Clutch Interlock > Page 10203 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Neutral Safety Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Switch-Clutch Interlock Neutral Safety Switch: Diagrams Switch-Clutch Interlock Component ID 472 Component ID: 472 Component : SWITCH-CLUTCH INTERLOCK Connector: Name : SWITCH-CLUTCH INTERLOCK Color : GREEN # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (M/T) Pin Circuit Description 1 T41 20YL/DB TRS T41 SIGNAL (P/N) 2 Z911 20BK GROUND Component Location - 31 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Neutral Safety Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Switch-Clutch Interlock > Page 10206 Component ID 482 Component ID: 482 Component : SWITCH-CLUTCH INTERLOCK Connector: Name : SWITCH-CLUTCH INTERLOCK Color : GREEN # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (M/T) Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Neutral Safety Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Switch-Clutch Interlock > Page 10207 Pin Circuit Description 1 T41 20YL/DB TRS T41 SIGNAL (P/N) 2 Z911 20BK GROUND Component Location - 31 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Neutral Safety Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Switch-Clutch Interlock > Page 10208 Neutral Safety Switch: Diagrams Switch-Clutch Interlock/Upstop Component ID: 483 Component : SWITCH-CLUTCH INTERLOCK/UPSTOP Connector: Name : SWITCH-CLUTCH INTERLOCK/UPSTOP Color : # of pins : 6 Qualifier : (6.7L) Pin Circuit Description 1-2-3 T26 18DG/OR CLUTCH INTERLOCK/UPSTOP SWITCH OUTPUT 4 Z993 18BK GROUND 5-6-- Component Location - 31 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Neutral Safety Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Switch-Clutch Interlock > Page 10209 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Starter Motor > Component Information > Locations Starter Motor: Locations Component ID: 471 Component : STARTER Connector: Name : STARTER Color : # of pins : 1 Qualifier : (3.7L A/T/4.7L A/T/5.7L) Pin Circuit Description 1 T750 14YL/GY STARTER MOTOR CONTROL OUTPUT Component Location - 36 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Starter Motor > Component Information > Locations > Page 10213 Component Location - 14 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Starter Motor > Component Information > Locations > Page 10214 Connector: Name : STARTER Color : # of pins : 1 Qualifier : (3.7L M/T/4.7L M/T) Pin Circuit Description 1 T750 14YL/GY STARTER MOTOR CONTROL OUTPUT Component Location - 36 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Starter Motor > Component Information > Locations > Page 10215 Component Location - 14 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Starter Motor > Component Information > Locations > Page 10216 Connector: Name : STARTER Color : GRAY # of pins : 1 Qualifier : (DIESEL) Pin Circuit Description 1 T750 14YL/GY STARTER MOTOR CONTROL OUTPUT Component Location - 36 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Starter Motor > Component Information > Locations > Page 10217 Component Location - 14 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Starter Motor > Component Information > Locations > Page 10218 Connector: Name : STARTER-EYELET Color : # of pins : 0 Qualifier : (3.7L/4.7L) Pin Circuit Description 1 A8 6RD B(+) Component Location - 36 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Starter Motor > Component Information > Locations > Page 10219 Component Location - 14 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Starter Motor > Component Information > Locations > Page 10220 Connector: Name : STARTER-EYELET Color : # of pins : 1 Qualifier : (5.7L) Pin Circuit Description 1 A8 6RD B(+) Component Location - 36 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Starter Motor > Component Information > Locations > Page 10221 Component Location - 14 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Starter Motor > Component Information > Locations > Page 10222 Connector: Name : STARTER-EYELET Color : # of pins : 1 Qualifier : (DIESEL) Pin Circuit Description 1 A8 2RD B(+) Component Location - 36 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Starter Motor > Component Information > Locations > Page 10223 Component Location - 14 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Starter Motor > Component Information > Locations > Page 10224 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Starter Motor > Component Information > Locations > Page 10225 Starter Motor: Diagrams Component ID: 471 Component : STARTER Connector: Name : STARTER Color : # of pins : 1 Qualifier : (3.7L A/T/4.7L A/T/5.7L) Pin Circuit Description 1 T750 14YL/GY STARTER MOTOR CONTROL OUTPUT Component Location - 36 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Starter Motor > Component Information > Locations > Page 10226 Component Location - 14 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Starter Motor > Component Information > Locations > Page 10227 Connector: Name : STARTER Color : # of pins : 1 Qualifier : (3.7L M/T/4.7L M/T) Pin Circuit Description 1 T750 14YL/GY STARTER MOTOR CONTROL OUTPUT Component Location - 36 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Starter Motor > Component Information > Locations > Page 10228 Component Location - 14 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Starter Motor > Component Information > Locations > Page 10229 Connector: Name : STARTER Color : GRAY # of pins : 1 Qualifier : (DIESEL) Pin Circuit Description 1 T750 14YL/GY STARTER MOTOR CONTROL OUTPUT Component Location - 36 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Starter Motor > Component Information > Locations > Page 10230 Component Location - 14 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Starter Motor > Component Information > Locations > Page 10231 Connector: Name : STARTER-EYELET Color : # of pins : 0 Qualifier : (3.7L/4.7L) Pin Circuit Description 1 A8 6RD B(+) Component Location - 36 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Starter Motor > Component Information > Locations > Page 10232 Component Location - 14 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Starter Motor > Component Information > Locations > Page 10233 Connector: Name : STARTER-EYELET Color : # of pins : 1 Qualifier : (5.7L) Pin Circuit Description 1 A8 6RD B(+) Component Location - 36 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Starter Motor > Component Information > Locations > Page 10234 Component Location - 14 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Starter Motor > Component Information > Locations > Page 10235 Connector: Name : STARTER-EYELET Color : # of pins : 1 Qualifier : (DIESEL) Pin Circuit Description 1 A8 2RD B(+) Component Location - 36 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Starter Motor > Component Information > Locations > Page 10236 Component Location - 14 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Starter Motor > Component Information > Locations > Page 10237 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Starter Motor > Component Information > Locations > Page 10238 Starter Motor: Testing and Inspection DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING - STARTER MOTOR Correct starter motor operation can be confirmed by performing the following free running bench test. This test can only be performed with starter motor removed from vehicle. 1. Remove starter motor from vehicle. 2. Mount starter motor securely in a soft-jawed bench vise. The vise jaws should be clamped on the mounting flange of starter motor. Never clamp on starter motor by field frame. 3. Connect a suitable volt-ampere tester and a 12-volt battery to starter motor in series, and set ammeter to 100 ampere scale. See instructions provided by manufacturer of volt-ampere tester being used. 4. Install jumper wire from solenoid terminal to solenoid battery terminal. The starter motor should operate. If starter motor fails to operate, replace faulty starter motor assembly. 5. Adjust carbon pile load of tester to obtain free running test voltage. 6. Note reading on ammeter and compare reading to free running test maximum amperage draw. 7. If ammeter reading exceeds maximum amperage draw specification, replace faulty starter motor assembly. STARTER SOLENOID Certain vehicles with certain engines may require starter motor removal for the following test. 1. If necessary, remove starter motor from vehicle. 2. Disconnect solenoid connector wiring from starter motor. 3. Check for continuity between solenoid terminal (2) and solenoid case (3). There should be continuity. If not OK, replace faulty starter motor assembly. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Starter Motor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Starter Motor - Removal Starter Motor: Service and Repair Starter Motor - Removal REMOVAL 3.7L / 4.7L 1. Disconnect and isolate negative battery cable. 2. Raise and support vehicle. 3. Note: If equipped with 4WD and certain transmissions, a support bracket is used between front axle and side of transmission. Remove 2 support bracket bolts at transmission. Pry support bracket slightly to gain access to lower starter mounting bolt. 4. Remove 1 bolt and 1 nut if equipped with a manual transmission. 5. Remove 2 bolts if equipped with an automatic transmission. 6. Move starter motor towards front of vehicle far enough for nose of starter pinion housing to clear housing. Always support starter motor during this process, do not let starter motor hang from wire harness. 7. Tilt nose downwards and lower starter motor far enough to access and remove nut that secures battery positive cable wire harness connector eyelet to solenoid battery terminal stud. Do not let starter motor hang from wire harness. 8. Remove battery positive cable wire harness connector eyelet from solenoid battery terminal stud. 9. Disconnect battery positive cable wire harness connector from solenoid terminal connector receptacle. 10. Remove starter motor. 5.7L Gas 1. Disconnect and isolate negative battery cable. 2. Raise and support vehicle. 3. Note: If equipped with 4WD and certain transmissions, a support bracket is used between front axle and side of transmission. Remove 2 support bracket bolts at transmission. Pry support bracket slightly to gain access to lower starter mounting bolt. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Starter Motor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Starter Motor - Removal > Page 10241 4. Remove 2 mounting bolts. 5. Move starter motor towards front of vehicle far enough for nose of starter pinion housing to clear housing. Always support starter motor during this process, do not let starter motor hang from wire harness. 6. Tilt nose downwards and lower starter motor far enough to access and remove nut that secures battery positive cable wire harness connector eyelet to solenoid battery terminal stud. Do not let starter motor hang from wire harness. 7. Remove battery positive cable wire harness connector eyelet from solenoid battery terminal stud. 8. Disconnect battery positive cable wire harness connector from solenoid terminal connector receptacle. 9. Remove starter motor. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Starter Motor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Starter Motor - Removal > Page 10242 Starter Motor: Service and Repair Starter Motor - Installation INSTALLATION 3.7L / 4.7L 1. Connect solenoid wire to starter motor (snaps on). 2. Position battery cable to solenoid stud. Install and tighten battery cable eyelet nut to 19 ft. lbs. (25 Nm). Do not allow starter motor to hang from wire harness. 3. Position starter motor to transmission. 4. If equipped with automatic transmission, slide cooler tube bracket into position. 5. Install and tighten both bolts (auto. trans.), or 1 nut and 1 bolt (man. trans.) to 50 ft. lbs. (68 Nm). 6. Lower vehicle. 7. Connect negative battery cable. 5.7L 1. Connect solenoid wire to starter motor (snaps on). 2. Position battery cable to solenoid stud. Install and tighten battery cable eyelet nut. Do not allow starter motor to hang from wire harness. 3. Position starter motor to engine. 4. If equipped with automatic transmission, slide cooler tube bracket into position. 5. Install and tighten both mounting bolts to 30 ft. lbs. (41 Nm). 6. Lower vehicle. 7. Connect negative battery cable. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Locations Auxiliary Power Outlet: Locations Component ID: 236 Component : POWER OUTLET Connector: Name : POWER OUTLET Color : GRAY # of pins : 3 Pin Circuit Description 1 A205 18RD/OR FUSED B(+) 2-3 Z737 18BK/LB GROUND Component Location - 47 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Locations > Page 10247 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Auxiliary Power Outlet: Diagram Information and Instructions Warnings WARNINGS - GENERAL WARNINGS provide information to prevent personal injury and vehicle damage. Below is a list of general warnings that should be followed any time a vehicle is being serviced. WARNING: Always wear safety glasses for eye protection. WARNING: Use safety stands anytime a procedure requires being under a vehicle. WARNING: Be sure that the ignition switch always is in the off position, unless the procedure requires it to be on. WARNING: Set the parking brake when working on any vehicle. An automatic transmission should be in park. A manual transmission should be in neutral. WARNING: Operate the engine only in a well-ventilated area. WARNING: Keep away from moving parts when the engine is running, especially the fan and belts. WARNING: To prevent serious burns, avoid contact with hot parts such as the radiator, exhaust manifold(s), tail pipe, catalytic converter and muffler. WARNING: Do not allow flame or sparks near the battery. Gases are always present in and around the battery. WARNING: Always remove rings, watches, loose hanging jewelry and avoid loose clothing. How to Use Wiring Diagrams DESCRIPTION - HOW TO USE WIRING DIAGRAMS DaimlerChrysler Corporation wiring diagrams are designed to provide information regarding the vehicles wiring content. In order to effectively use the wiring diagrams to diagnose and repair DaimlerChrysler Corporation vehicles, it is important to understand all of their features and characteristics. Diagrams are arranged such that the power (B+) side of the circuit is placed near the top of the page, and the ground (B-) side of the circuit is placed near the bottom of the page. All switches, components, and modules are shown in the at rest position with the doors closed and the key removed from the ignition. Components are shown two ways. A solid line around a component indicates that the component is complete. A dashed line around the component indicates that the component is being shown is not complete. Incomplete components have a reference number to indicate the page where the component is shown complete. It is important to realize that no attempt is made on the diagrams to represent components and wiring as they appear on the vehicle. For example, a short piece of wire is treated the same as a long one. In addition, switches and other components are shown as simply as possible, with regard to function only. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10250 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10251 SYMBOLS International symbols are used throughout the wiring diagrams. These symbols are consistent with those being used around the world. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10252 TERMINOLOGY This is a list of terms and definitions used in the wiring diagrams. LHD - Left Hand Drive Vehicles RHD - Right Hand Drive Vehicles ATX - Automatic Transmissions-Front Wheel Drive MTX Manual Transmissions-Front Wheel Drive Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10253 AT - Automatic Transmissions-Rear Wheel Drive MT - Manual Transmissions-Rear Wheel Drive SOHC - Single Over Head Cam Engine DOHC - Double Over Head Cam Engine Export - Vehicles Built For Sale In Markets Other Than North America Except Export - Vehicles Built For Sale In North America Circuit Functions DESCRIPTION - CIRCUIT FUNCTIONS All circuits in the diagrams use an alpha/numeric code to identify the wire and it's function. To identify which circuit code applies to a system, refer to the Circuit Identification Code Chart. This chart shows the main circuits only and does not show the secondary codes that may apply to some models. Circuit Information DESCRIPTION - CIRCUIT INFORMATION Each wire shown in the diagrams contains a code which identifies the main circuit, a specific part of the main circuit, gage of wire, and color. An example would be A 2 18 LB/YL. This is a Battery Feed circuit, level two, eighteen gauge, light blue with a yellow tracer. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10254 Connector, Ground and Splice Information DESCRIPTION - CONNECTOR, GROUND AND SPLICE INFORMATION CAUTION: Not all connectors are serviced. Some connectors are serviced only with a harness. A typical example might be the Supplemental Restraint System connectors. Always check parts availability before attempting a repair. IDENTIFICATION In-line connectors are identified by a number, as follows: - In-line connectors located in the engine compartment are C100 series numbers. - In-line connectors located in the instrument panel area are C200 series numbers. - In-line connectors located in the body are C300 series numbers. - Jumper harness connectors are C400 series numbers. - Grounds and ground connectors are identified with a "G" and follow the same series numbering as the in-line connectors. - Splices are identified with an "S" and follow the same series numbering as the in-line connectors. In addition, S001-S099 numbers are located in the engine compartment. - Component connectors are identified by the component name instead of a number. Multiple connectors on a component use a C1, C2, etc. identifier. LOCATIONS Vehicle/Locations contains the master connector/ground/splice location index charts with hyperlinks to the applicable location illustrations. The illustrations contain the connector name (or number)/ground number/splice number and component identification. The abbreviation T/O is used in the component location section to indicate a point in which the wiring harness branches out to a component. The abbreviation N/S means Not Shown in the illustrations Section Identification and Information DESCRIPTION - SECTION IDENTIFICATION AND INFORMATION The wiring diagrams are grouped into individual sections. If a component is most likely found in a particular group, it will be shown complete (all wires, Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10255 connectors, and pins) within that group. For example, the Auto Shutdown Relay is most likely to be found in Powertrain Management, so it is shown there complete. It can, however, be shown partially in another group if it contains some associated wiring. Splice diagrams show the entire splice and provide references to other sections the splices serves. Splice Information only contains splice diagrams that are not shown in their entirety somewhere else in the wiring diagrams. Connector Pin-Outs shows each connector and the circuits involved with that connector. The connectors are identified using the name/number on the diagram pages. Removal REMOVAL 1. Disconnect battery. 2. Release Connector Lock (2). 3. Disconnect the connector (3) being repaired from its mating half/component. 4. Remove the dress cover (if applicable) (1). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10256 5. Release the Secondary Terminal Lock, if required (1). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10257 6. Position the connector locking finger away from the terminal using the proper special tool. Pull on the wire to remove the terminal from the connector. Installation Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10258 INSTALLATION 1. Insert the removed terminal in the same cavity on the repair connector. 2. Repeat steps for each terminal in the connector, being sure that all wires are inserted into the proper cavities. For additional connector pin-out identification, refer to the wiring diagrams. 3. When the connector is re-assembled, the secondary terminal lock must be placed in the locked position to prevent terminal push out. 4. Replace dress cover (if applicable). 5. Connect connector to its mating half/component. 6. Connect battery and test all affected systems. Removal REMOVAL 1. Disconnect the battery. 2. Locate the diode in the harness, and remove the protective covering. 3. Remove the diode from the harness, pay attention to the current flow direction (1) (2) (3). Installation INSTALLATION 1. Remove the insulation from the wires in the harness. Only remove enough insulation to solder in the new diode. 2. Install the new diode in the harness, making sure current flow is correct. If necessary, refer to the appropriate wiring diagram for current flow. 3. Solder the connection together using rosin core type solder only. Do not use acid core solder. 4. Tape the diode to the harness using electrical tape. Make sure the diode is completely sealed from the elements. 5. Re-connect the battery and test affected systems. Removal REMOVAL 1. Follow steps for removing terminals described in the connector removal section. 2. Cut the wire 6 inches from the back of the connector. Installation INSTALLATION 1. Select a wire from the terminal repair kit that best matches the color and gage of the wire being repaired. 2. Cut the repair wire to the proper length and remove one-half (1/2) inch of insulation. 3. Splice the repair wire to the wire harness (see wire splicing procedure). See: Service Procedures/Wire Splicing 4. Insert the repaired wire into the connector. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10259 5. Install the connector locking wedge, if required, and reconnect the connector to its mating half/component. 6. Re-tape the wire harness starting at 1-1/2 inches behind the connector and 2 inches past the repair. 7. Connect battery and test all affected systems. Wire Splicing STANDARD PROCEDURE - WIRE SPLICING When splicing a wire, it is important that the correct gage be used as shown in the wiring diagrams. 1. Remove one-half (1/2) inch of insulation from each wire that needs to be spliced. 2. Place a piece of adhesive lined heat shrink tubing on one side of the wire. Make sure the tubing will be long enough to cover and seal the entire repair area. 3. Place the strands of wire overlapping each other inside of the splice clip (1). 4. Using crimping tool (1), Mopar p/n 05019912AA, crimp the splice clip and wires together. 5. Solder (3) the connection (2) together using rosin core type solder (1) only. CAUTION: DO NOT USE ACID CORE SOLDER. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10260 6. Center the heat shrink tubing (2) over the joint and heat using a heat gun. Heat the joint until the tubing is tightly sealed and sealant (1) comes out of both ends of the tubing. Special Tools WIRING/TERMINAL PROBING TOOL PACKAGE 6807 TERMINAL PICK TOOL SET 6680 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10261 TERMINAL REMOVING TOOLS 6932 AND 8638 TERMINAL REMOVING TOOL 6934 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10262 Auxiliary Power Outlet: Diagnostic Aids Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) Sensitive Devices STANDARD PROCEDURE - ELECTROSTATIC DISCHARGE (ESD) SENSITIVE DEVICES All ESD sensitive components are solid state and a symbol is used to indicate this. When handling any component with this symbol, comply with the following procedures to reduce the possibility of electrostatic charge build up on the body and inadvertent discharge into the component. If it is not known whether the part is ESD sensitive, assume that it is. 1. Always touch a known good ground before handling the part. This should be repeated while handling the part and more frequently after sliding across a seat, sitting down from a standing position, or walking a distance. 2. Avoid touching electrical terminals of the part, unless instructed to do so by a written procedure. 3. When using a voltmeter, be sure to connect the ground lead first. 4. Do not remove the part from it's protective packing until it is time to install the part. 5. Before removing the part from it's package, ground the package to a known good ground on the vehicle. Testing Of Voltage Potential STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING OF VOLTAGE POTENTIAL 1. Connect the ground lead of a voltmeter to a known good ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the voltmeter to the selected test point. The vehicle ignition may need to be turned ON to check voltage. Refer to the appropriate test procedure. Testing For Continuity Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10263 STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING FOR CONTINUITY 1. Remove the fuse (1) for the circuit being checked or, disconnect the battery. 2. Connect one lead of the ohmmeter to one side of the circuit being tested 3. Connect the other lead to the other end of the circuit being tested. Low or no resistance means good continuity. Testing For A Short To Ground STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING FOR A SHORT TO GROUND 1. Remove the fuse and disconnect all items involved with the fuse. 2. Connect a test light or a voltmeter across the terminals of the fuse. 3. Starting at the fuse block, wiggle the wiring harness about six to eight inches apart and watch the voltmeter/test lamp. 4. If the voltmeter registers voltage or the test lamp glows, there is a short to ground in that general area of the wiring harness. Testing For A Short To Ground On Fuses Powering Several Loads STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING FOR A SHORT TO GROUND ON FUSES POWERING SEVERAL LOADS 1. Refer to the wiring diagrams and disconnect or isolate all items on the suspected fused circuits. 2. Replace the blown fuse. 3. Supply power to the fuse by turning ON the ignition switch or re-connecting the battery. 4. Start connecting or energizing the items in the fuse circuit one at a time. When the fuse blows the circuit with the short to ground has been isolated. Testing For A Voltage Drop STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING FOR A VOLTAGE DROP Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10264 1. Connect the positive lead of the voltmeter to the side of the circuit closest to the battery. 2. Connect the other lead of the voltmeter to the other side of the switch, component or circuit. 3. Operate the item. 4. The voltmeter will show the difference in voltage between the two points. Troubleshooting Wiring Problems DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING - WIRING HARNESS TROUBLESHOOTING TOOLS When diagnosing a problem in an electrical circuit there are several common tools necessary. These tools are listed and explained below. - Jumper Wire - This is a test wire used to connect two points of a circuit. It can be used to bypass an open in a circuit. WARNING: Never use a jumper wire across a load, such as a motor, connected between a battery feed and ground. - Voltmeter - Used to check for voltage on a circuit. Always connect the black lead to a known good ground and the red lead to the positive side of the circuit. CAUTION: Most of the electrical components used in today's vehicles are Solid State. When checking voltages in these circuits, use a meter with a 10 - megohm or greater impedance rating. - Ohmmeter - Used to check the resistance between two points of a circuit. Low or no resistance in a circuit means good continuity. CAUTION: Most of the electrical components used in today's vehicles are Solid State. When checking resistance in these circuits use a meter with a 10 - megohm or greater impedance rating. In addition, make sure the power is disconnected from the circuit. Circuits that are powered up by the vehicle's electrical system can cause damage to the equipment and provide false readings. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10265 - Probing Tools - These tools are used for probing terminals in connectors. Select the proper size tool from Special Tool Package 6807, and insert the probing end (2) into the terminal being tested. Use the other end of the tool (1) to insert the meter probe. INTERMITTENT AND POOR CONNECTIONS Most intermittent electrical problems are caused by faulty electrical connections or wiring. It is also possible for a sticking component or relay to cause a problem. Before condemning a component or wiring assembly, check the following items. - Connectors are fully seated - Spread terminals, or terminal push out - Terminals in the wiring assembly are fully seated into the connector/component and locked into position - Dirt or corrosion on the terminals. Any amount of corrosion or dirt could cause an intermittent problem - Damaged connector/component casing exposing the item to dirt or moisture - Wire insulation that has rubbed through causing a short to ground - Some or all of the wiring strands broken inside of the insulation - Wiring broken inside of the insulation TROUBLESHOOTING WIRING PROBLEMS When troubleshooting wiring problems there are six steps which can aid in the procedure. The steps are listed and explained below. Always check for non-factory items added to the vehicle before doing any diagnosis. If the vehicle is equipped with these items, disconnect them to verify these add-on items are not the cause of the problem. 1. Verify the problem. 2. Verify any related symptoms. Do this by performing operational checks on components that are in the same circuit. Refer to the wiring diagrams. 3. Analyze the symptoms. Use the wiring diagrams to determine what the circuit is doing, where the problem most likely is occurring and where the diagnosis will continue. 4. Isolate the problem area. 5. Repair the problem area. 6. Verify the proper operation. For this step, check for proper operation of all items on the repaired circuit. Refer to the wiring diagrams. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10266 Auxiliary Power Outlet: Connector Views Power Outlet Component ID: 236 Component : POWER OUTLET Connector: Name : POWER OUTLET Color : GRAY # of pins : 3 Pin Circuit Description 1 A205 18RD/OR FUSED B(+) 2-3 Z737 18BK/LB GROUND Component Location - 47 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10267 Power Outlet-Console Component ID: 237 Component : POWER OUTLET-CONSOLE Connector: Name : POWER OUTLET-CONSOLE Color : GRAY # of pins : 3 Pin Circuit Description Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10268 1 A405 18BR FUSED B(+) Pin Circuit Description 1 A405 18RD/DB FUSED B(+) 2-3 Z939 18BK GROUND Power Outlet-Instrument Panel Component ID: 238 Component : POWER OUTLET-INSTRUMENT PANEL Connector: Name : POWER OUTLET-INSTRUMENT PANEL Color : # of pins : 3 Pin Circuit Description 1 F984 16PK/YL FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-ACC) 2-- 3 Z939 18BK GROUND Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10269 Auxiliary Power Outlet: Electrical Diagrams PLEASE NOTE: Some diagrams may appear to be missing because of gaps in the number sequences. These "gaps" are actually for diagrams that do not apply to the vehicle model selected. 8w-41-02 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10270 8w-41-03 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10271 8w-41-04 Other Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by number (i.e. 8W-70-2, etc.) within these diagrams can be found at the vehicle level under Diagrams by Number. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Number Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Description and Operation > Power Outlet-Instrument Panel Auxiliary Power Outlet: Description and Operation Power Outlet-Instrument Panel Description DESCRIPTION A cigar lighter outlet is installed to the left of the center stack area in the lower instrument panel. The cigar lighter outlet is secured by a snap fit within the bezel. The cigar lighter outlet, plastic cap and the knob and heating element unit are available for service replacement. These components cannot be repaired and, if inoperative or damaged, they must be replaced. Operation OPERATION The cigar lighter consists of two major components: a knob and heating element unit, and the cigar lighter base or outlet shell. The receptacle shell is connected to ground, and an insulated contact in the bottom of the shell is connected to battery current. The cigar lighter receives battery voltage from a fuse in the Integrated Power Module (IPM) when the ignition switch is in the Accessory or Run positions. The cigar lighter knob and heating element are encased within a spring-loaded housing, which also features a sliding protective heat shield. When the knob and heating element are inserted in the outlet shell, the heating element resistor coil is grounded through its housing to the outlet shell. If the cigar lighter knob is pushed inward, the heat shield slides up toward the knob exposing the heating element, and the heating element extends from the housing toward the insulated contact in the bottom of the outlet shell. Two small spring-clip retainers are located on either side of the insulated contact inside the bottom of the outlet shell. These clips engage and hold the heating element against the insulated contact long enough for the resistor coil to heat up. When the heating element is engaged with the contact, battery current can flow through the resistor coil to ground, causing the resistor coil to heat. When the resistor coil becomes sufficiently heated, excess heat radiates from the heating element causing the spring-clips to expand. Once the spring-clips expand far enough to release the heating element, the spring-loaded housing forces the knob and heating element to pop back outward to their relaxed position. When the cigar lighter knob and element are pulled out of the outlet shell, the protective heat shield slides downward on the housing so that the heating element is recessed and shielded around its circumference for safety. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Description and Operation > Power Outlet-Instrument Panel > Page 10274 Auxiliary Power Outlet: Description and Operation Power Outlet-Console Description DESCRIPTION Two power outlets are utilized on this model. One in the instrument panel center lower bezel and the other in the center console. The power outlet bases are secured by a snap fit within the instrument panel or trim panel. A plastic protective cap snaps into the power outlet base when the power outlet is not being used, and hangs from the power outlet base mount by an integral bail strap while the power outlet is in use. The power outlet receptacle unit and the accessory power outlet protective cap are available for service. The power outlet receptacle cannot be repaired and, if faulty or damaged, it must be replaced. Operation OPERATION The power outlet base or receptacle shell is connected to ground, and an insulated contact in the bottom of the shell is connected to battery current. The power outlet receives battery voltage from a fuse in the integrated power module at all times. While the power outlet is very similar to a cigar lighter base unit, it does not include the two small spring-clip retainers inside the bottom of the receptacle shell that are used to secure the cigar lighter heating element to the insulated contact. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Cigar Lighter Outlet Auxiliary Power Outlet: Testing and Inspection Cigar Lighter Outlet CIGAR LIGHTER OUTLET For a complete wiring diagram Refer to Diagrams/Electrical. The wiring information includes wiring diagrams, proper wire and connector repair procedures, details of wire harness routing and retention, connector pin-out information and location views for the various wire harness connectors, splices and grounds. 1. Check the fused B(+) fuse in the Integrated Power Module (IPM). If OK, go to STEP 2. If not OK, repair the shorted circuit or component as required and replace the inoperative fuse. 2. Turn the ignition switch to the Run position. Check for battery voltage at the fused B(+) fuse in the IPM. If OK, go to STEP 3. If not OK, repair the open or short as required. 3. Remove the cigar lighter knob and element from the cigar lighter outlet shell. Check for continuity between the inside circumference of the cigar lighter outlet shell and a good ground. there should be continuity. If OK, go to STEP 4. If not OK, go to STEP 5. 4. Turn the ignition switch to the Run position. Check for battery voltage at the insulated contact located at the back of the cigar lighter outlet shell. If OK, replace the inoperative cigar lighter knob and element. If not OK, go to STEP 5. 5. Turn the ignition switch to the Off position. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. Check for continuity between the ground circuit cavity of the cigar lighter wire harness connector and a good ground. There should be continuity. If OK, go to STEP 6. If not OK, repair the open ground circuit to ground as required. 6. Connect the battery negative cable. Turn the ignition switch to the Accessory or Run positions. Check for battery voltage at the fused B(+) circuit cavity of the cigar lighter wire harness connector. If OK, replace the inoperative cigar lighter outlet. If not OK, repair the open fused B(+) circuit to the IPM fuse as required. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Cigar Lighter Outlet > Page 10277 Auxiliary Power Outlet: Testing and Inspection Power Outlet POWER OUTLET For a complete wiring diagram Refer to Diagrams/Electrical. The wiring information includes wiring diagrams, proper wire and connector repair procedures, details of wire harness routing and retention, connector pin-out information and location views for the various wire harness connectors, splices and grounds. 1. Check the fused B(+) fuse in the Integrated Power Module (IPM). If OK, go to STEP 2. If not OK, repair the shorted circuit or component as required and replace the inoperative fuse. 2. Turn the ignition switch to the Run position. Check for battery voltage at the fused B(+) fuse in the IPM. If OK, go to STEP 3. If not OK, repair the open or short as required. 3. Remove the cigar lighter knob and element from the cigar lighter outlet shell. Check for continuity between the inside circumference of the cigar lighter outlet shell and a good ground. there should be continuity. If OK, go to STEP 4. If not OK, go to STEP 5. 4. Turn the ignition switch to the Run position. Check for battery voltage at the insulated contact located at the back of the cigar lighter outlet shell. If OK, replace the inoperative cigar lighter knob and element. If not OK, go to STEP 5. 5. Turn the ignition switch to the Off position. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. Check for continuity between the ground circuit cavity of the cigar lighter wire harness connector and a good ground. There should be continuity. If OK, go to STEP 6. If not OK, repair the open ground circuit to ground as required. 6. Connect the battery negative cable. Turn the ignition switch to the Accessory or Run positions. Check for battery voltage at the fused B(+) circuit cavity of the cigar lighter wire harness connector. If OK, replace the inoperative cigar lighter outlet. If not OK, repair the open fused B(+) circuit to the IPM fuse as required. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Service and Repair > Power Outlet-Instrument Panel Auxiliary Power Outlet: Service and Repair Power Outlet-Instrument Panel Removal REMOVAL 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. 2. Pull the cigar lighter knob and element (1) out of the cigar lighter receptacle base (6), or unsnap the protective cap from the power outlet receptacle base (6). 3. Look inside the cigar lighter or power outlet receptacle base and note the position of the rectangular retaining bosses (3) of the mount that secures the receptacle base to the panel (4). 4. Insert a pair of external snap ring pliers (5) into the cigar lighter or power outlet receptacle base and engage the tips of the pliers with the retaining bosses of the mount. 5. Squeeze the pliers to disengage the mount retaining bosses from the receptacle base and, using a gentle rocking motion, pull the pliers and the receptacle base out of the mount. 6. Pull the receptacle base away from the instrument panel far enough to access the instrument panel wire harness connector (2). 7. Disconnect the instrument panel wire harness connector (2) from the cigar lighter or power outlet receptacle base (6). 8. Remove the cigar lighter or power outlet mount from the instrument panel. Installation INSTALLATION 1. Connect the instrument panel wire harness connector to the cigar lighter or power outlet receptacle base connector receptacle. 2. Install the cigar lighter or power outlet mount into the instrument panel. 3. Align the splines on the outside of the cigar lighter or power outlet receptacle base connector receptacle with the grooves on the inside of the mount. 4. Press firmly on the cigar lighter or power outlet receptacle base until the retaining bosses of the mount are fully engaged in their receptacles. 5. Install the cigar lighter knob and element into the cigar lighter receptacle base, or the protective cap into the power outlet receptacle base. 6. Connect the battery negative cable. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Service and Repair > Power Outlet-Instrument Panel > Page 10280 Auxiliary Power Outlet: Service and Repair Power Outlet-Console Removal REMOVAL 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. 2. Pull the cigar lighter knob and element (1) out of the cigar lighter receptacle base (6), or unsnap the protective cap from the power outlet receptacle base (6). 3. Look inside the cigar lighter or power outlet receptacle base and note the position of the rectangular retaining bosses (3) of the mount that secures the receptacle base to the panel (4). 4. Insert a pair of external snap ring pliers (5) into the cigar lighter or power outlet receptacle base and engage the tips of the pliers with the retaining bosses of the mount. 5. Squeeze the pliers to disengage the mount retaining bosses from the receptacle base and, using a gentle rocking motion, pull the pliers and the receptacle base out of the mount. 6. Pull the receptacle base away from the instrument panel far enough to access the instrument panel wire harness connector (2). 7. Disconnect the instrument panel wire harness connector (2) from the cigar lighter or power outlet receptacle base (6). 8. Remove the cigar lighter or power outlet mount from the instrument panel. Installation INSTALLATION 1. Connect the instrument panel wire harness connector to the cigar lighter or power outlet receptacle base connector receptacle. 2. Install the cigar lighter or power outlet mount into the instrument panel. 3. Align the splines on the outside of the cigar lighter or power outlet receptacle base connector receptacle with the grooves on the inside of the mount. 4. Press firmly on the cigar lighter or power outlet receptacle base until the retaining bosses of the mount are fully engaged in their receptacles. 5. Install the cigar lighter knob and element into the cigar lighter receptacle base, or the protective cap into the power outlet receptacle base. 6. Connect the battery negative cable. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Locations Fuse: Locations An integrated Power Module is located in the engine compartment near the battery. This center contains cartridge fuses and mini fuses. A description of each fuse and component may be stamped on the inside cover otherwise the cavity number of each fuse is stamped on the inside cover that corresponds to the following chart. Underhood Fuses (Integrated Power Module) Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Locations > Page 10284 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Locations > Page 10285 CAUTION: - When installing the Integrated Power Module cover, it is important to ensure the cover is properly positioned and fully latched. Failure to do so may allow water to get into the Integrated Power Module, and possibly result in a electrical system failure. - When replacing a blown fuse, it is important to use only a fuse having the correct amperage rating. The use of a fuse with a rating other than indicated may result in a dangerous electrical system overload. If a properly rated fuse continues to blow, it indicates a problem in the circuit that must be corrected. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Fuse: Diagram Information and Instructions Warnings WARNINGS - GENERAL WARNINGS provide information to prevent personal injury and vehicle damage. Below is a list of general warnings that should be followed any time a vehicle is being serviced. WARNING: Always wear safety glasses for eye protection. WARNING: Use safety stands anytime a procedure requires being under a vehicle. WARNING: Be sure that the ignition switch always is in the off position, unless the procedure requires it to be on. WARNING: Set the parking brake when working on any vehicle. An automatic transmission should be in park. A manual transmission should be in neutral. WARNING: Operate the engine only in a well-ventilated area. WARNING: Keep away from moving parts when the engine is running, especially the fan and belts. WARNING: To prevent serious burns, avoid contact with hot parts such as the radiator, exhaust manifold(s), tail pipe, catalytic converter and muffler. WARNING: Do not allow flame or sparks near the battery. Gases are always present in and around the battery. WARNING: Always remove rings, watches, loose hanging jewelry and avoid loose clothing. How to Use Wiring Diagrams DESCRIPTION - HOW TO USE WIRING DIAGRAMS DaimlerChrysler Corporation wiring diagrams are designed to provide information regarding the vehicles wiring content. In order to effectively use the wiring diagrams to diagnose and repair DaimlerChrysler Corporation vehicles, it is important to understand all of their features and characteristics. Diagrams are arranged such that the power (B+) side of the circuit is placed near the top of the page, and the ground (B-) side of the circuit is placed near the bottom of the page. All switches, components, and modules are shown in the at rest position with the doors closed and the key removed from the ignition. Components are shown two ways. A solid line around a component indicates that the component is complete. A dashed line around the component indicates that the component is being shown is not complete. Incomplete components have a reference number to indicate the page where the component is shown complete. It is important to realize that no attempt is made on the diagrams to represent components and wiring as they appear on the vehicle. For example, a short piece of wire is treated the same as a long one. In addition, switches and other components are shown as simply as possible, with regard to function only. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10288 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10289 SYMBOLS International symbols are used throughout the wiring diagrams. These symbols are consistent with those being used around the world. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10290 TERMINOLOGY This is a list of terms and definitions used in the wiring diagrams. LHD - Left Hand Drive Vehicles RHD - Right Hand Drive Vehicles ATX - Automatic Transmissions-Front Wheel Drive MTX Manual Transmissions-Front Wheel Drive Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10291 AT - Automatic Transmissions-Rear Wheel Drive MT - Manual Transmissions-Rear Wheel Drive SOHC - Single Over Head Cam Engine DOHC - Double Over Head Cam Engine Export - Vehicles Built For Sale In Markets Other Than North America Except Export - Vehicles Built For Sale In North America Circuit Functions DESCRIPTION - CIRCUIT FUNCTIONS All circuits in the diagrams use an alpha/numeric code to identify the wire and it's function. To identify which circuit code applies to a system, refer to the Circuit Identification Code Chart. This chart shows the main circuits only and does not show the secondary codes that may apply to some models. Circuit Information DESCRIPTION - CIRCUIT INFORMATION Each wire shown in the diagrams contains a code which identifies the main circuit, a specific part of the main circuit, gage of wire, and color. An example would be A 2 18 LB/YL. This is a Battery Feed circuit, level two, eighteen gauge, light blue with a yellow tracer. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10292 Connector, Ground and Splice Information DESCRIPTION - CONNECTOR, GROUND AND SPLICE INFORMATION CAUTION: Not all connectors are serviced. Some connectors are serviced only with a harness. A typical example might be the Supplemental Restraint System connectors. Always check parts availability before attempting a repair. IDENTIFICATION In-line connectors are identified by a number, as follows: - In-line connectors located in the engine compartment are C100 series numbers. - In-line connectors located in the instrument panel area are C200 series numbers. - In-line connectors located in the body are C300 series numbers. - Jumper harness connectors are C400 series numbers. - Grounds and ground connectors are identified with a "G" and follow the same series numbering as the in-line connectors. - Splices are identified with an "S" and follow the same series numbering as the in-line connectors. In addition, S001-S099 numbers are located in the engine compartment. - Component connectors are identified by the component name instead of a number. Multiple connectors on a component use a C1, C2, etc. identifier. LOCATIONS Vehicle/Locations contains the master connector/ground/splice location index charts with hyperlinks to the applicable location illustrations. The illustrations contain the connector name (or number)/ground number/splice number and component identification. The abbreviation T/O is used in the component location section to indicate a point in which the wiring harness branches out to a component. The abbreviation N/S means Not Shown in the illustrations Section Identification and Information DESCRIPTION - SECTION IDENTIFICATION AND INFORMATION The wiring diagrams are grouped into individual sections. If a component is most likely found in a particular group, it will be shown complete (all wires, Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10293 connectors, and pins) within that group. For example, the Auto Shutdown Relay is most likely to be found in Powertrain Management, so it is shown there complete. It can, however, be shown partially in another group if it contains some associated wiring. Splice diagrams show the entire splice and provide references to other sections the splices serves. Splice Information only contains splice diagrams that are not shown in their entirety somewhere else in the wiring diagrams. Connector Pin-Outs shows each connector and the circuits involved with that connector. The connectors are identified using the name/number on the diagram pages. Removal REMOVAL 1. Disconnect battery. 2. Release Connector Lock (2). 3. Disconnect the connector (3) being repaired from its mating half/component. 4. Remove the dress cover (if applicable) (1). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10294 5. Release the Secondary Terminal Lock, if required (1). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10295 6. Position the connector locking finger away from the terminal using the proper special tool. Pull on the wire to remove the terminal from the connector. Installation Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10296 INSTALLATION 1. Insert the removed terminal in the same cavity on the repair connector. 2. Repeat steps for each terminal in the connector, being sure that all wires are inserted into the proper cavities. For additional connector pin-out identification, refer to the wiring diagrams. 3. When the connector is re-assembled, the secondary terminal lock must be placed in the locked position to prevent terminal push out. 4. Replace dress cover (if applicable). 5. Connect connector to its mating half/component. 6. Connect battery and test all affected systems. Removal REMOVAL 1. Disconnect the battery. 2. Locate the diode in the harness, and remove the protective covering. 3. Remove the diode from the harness, pay attention to the current flow direction (1) (2) (3). Installation INSTALLATION 1. Remove the insulation from the wires in the harness. Only remove enough insulation to solder in the new diode. 2. Install the new diode in the harness, making sure current flow is correct. If necessary, refer to the appropriate wiring diagram for current flow. 3. Solder the connection together using rosin core type solder only. Do not use acid core solder. 4. Tape the diode to the harness using electrical tape. Make sure the diode is completely sealed from the elements. 5. Re-connect the battery and test affected systems. Removal REMOVAL 1. Follow steps for removing terminals described in the connector removal section. 2. Cut the wire 6 inches from the back of the connector. Installation INSTALLATION 1. Select a wire from the terminal repair kit that best matches the color and gage of the wire being repaired. 2. Cut the repair wire to the proper length and remove one-half (1/2) inch of insulation. 3. Splice the repair wire to the wire harness (see wire splicing procedure). See: Service Procedures/Wire Splicing 4. Insert the repaired wire into the connector. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10297 5. Install the connector locking wedge, if required, and reconnect the connector to its mating half/component. 6. Re-tape the wire harness starting at 1-1/2 inches behind the connector and 2 inches past the repair. 7. Connect battery and test all affected systems. Wire Splicing STANDARD PROCEDURE - WIRE SPLICING When splicing a wire, it is important that the correct gage be used as shown in the wiring diagrams. 1. Remove one-half (1/2) inch of insulation from each wire that needs to be spliced. 2. Place a piece of adhesive lined heat shrink tubing on one side of the wire. Make sure the tubing will be long enough to cover and seal the entire repair area. 3. Place the strands of wire overlapping each other inside of the splice clip (1). 4. Using crimping tool (1), Mopar p/n 05019912AA, crimp the splice clip and wires together. 5. Solder (3) the connection (2) together using rosin core type solder (1) only. CAUTION: DO NOT USE ACID CORE SOLDER. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10298 6. Center the heat shrink tubing (2) over the joint and heat using a heat gun. Heat the joint until the tubing is tightly sealed and sealant (1) comes out of both ends of the tubing. Special Tools WIRING/TERMINAL PROBING TOOL PACKAGE 6807 TERMINAL PICK TOOL SET 6680 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10299 TERMINAL REMOVING TOOLS 6932 AND 8638 TERMINAL REMOVING TOOL 6934 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10300 Fuse: Diagnostic Aids Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) Sensitive Devices STANDARD PROCEDURE - ELECTROSTATIC DISCHARGE (ESD) SENSITIVE DEVICES All ESD sensitive components are solid state and a symbol is used to indicate this. When handling any component with this symbol, comply with the following procedures to reduce the possibility of electrostatic charge build up on the body and inadvertent discharge into the component. If it is not known whether the part is ESD sensitive, assume that it is. 1. Always touch a known good ground before handling the part. This should be repeated while handling the part and more frequently after sliding across a seat, sitting down from a standing position, or walking a distance. 2. Avoid touching electrical terminals of the part, unless instructed to do so by a written procedure. 3. When using a voltmeter, be sure to connect the ground lead first. 4. Do not remove the part from it's protective packing until it is time to install the part. 5. Before removing the part from it's package, ground the package to a known good ground on the vehicle. Testing Of Voltage Potential STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING OF VOLTAGE POTENTIAL 1. Connect the ground lead of a voltmeter to a known good ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the voltmeter to the selected test point. The vehicle ignition may need to be turned ON to check voltage. Refer to the appropriate test procedure. Testing For Continuity Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10301 STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING FOR CONTINUITY 1. Remove the fuse (1) for the circuit being checked or, disconnect the battery. 2. Connect one lead of the ohmmeter to one side of the circuit being tested 3. Connect the other lead to the other end of the circuit being tested. Low or no resistance means good continuity. Testing For A Short To Ground STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING FOR A SHORT TO GROUND 1. Remove the fuse and disconnect all items involved with the fuse. 2. Connect a test light or a voltmeter across the terminals of the fuse. 3. Starting at the fuse block, wiggle the wiring harness about six to eight inches apart and watch the voltmeter/test lamp. 4. If the voltmeter registers voltage or the test lamp glows, there is a short to ground in that general area of the wiring harness. Testing For A Short To Ground On Fuses Powering Several Loads STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING FOR A SHORT TO GROUND ON FUSES POWERING SEVERAL LOADS 1. Refer to the wiring diagrams and disconnect or isolate all items on the suspected fused circuits. 2. Replace the blown fuse. 3. Supply power to the fuse by turning ON the ignition switch or re-connecting the battery. 4. Start connecting or energizing the items in the fuse circuit one at a time. When the fuse blows the circuit with the short to ground has been isolated. Testing For A Voltage Drop STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING FOR A VOLTAGE DROP Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10302 1. Connect the positive lead of the voltmeter to the side of the circuit closest to the battery. 2. Connect the other lead of the voltmeter to the other side of the switch, component or circuit. 3. Operate the item. 4. The voltmeter will show the difference in voltage between the two points. Troubleshooting Wiring Problems DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING - WIRING HARNESS TROUBLESHOOTING TOOLS When diagnosing a problem in an electrical circuit there are several common tools necessary. These tools are listed and explained below. - Jumper Wire - This is a test wire used to connect two points of a circuit. It can be used to bypass an open in a circuit. WARNING: Never use a jumper wire across a load, such as a motor, connected between a battery feed and ground. - Voltmeter - Used to check for voltage on a circuit. Always connect the black lead to a known good ground and the red lead to the positive side of the circuit. CAUTION: Most of the electrical components used in today's vehicles are Solid State. When checking voltages in these circuits, use a meter with a 10 - megohm or greater impedance rating. - Ohmmeter - Used to check the resistance between two points of a circuit. Low or no resistance in a circuit means good continuity. CAUTION: Most of the electrical components used in today's vehicles are Solid State. When checking resistance in these circuits use a meter with a 10 - megohm or greater impedance rating. In addition, make sure the power is disconnected from the circuit. Circuits that are powered up by the vehicle's electrical system can cause damage to the equipment and provide false readings. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10303 - Probing Tools - These tools are used for probing terminals in connectors. Select the proper size tool from Special Tool Package 6807, and insert the probing end (2) into the terminal being tested. Use the other end of the tool (1) to insert the meter probe. INTERMITTENT AND POOR CONNECTIONS Most intermittent electrical problems are caused by faulty electrical connections or wiring. It is also possible for a sticking component or relay to cause a problem. Before condemning a component or wiring assembly, check the following items. - Connectors are fully seated - Spread terminals, or terminal push out - Terminals in the wiring assembly are fully seated into the connector/component and locked into position - Dirt or corrosion on the terminals. Any amount of corrosion or dirt could cause an intermittent problem - Damaged connector/component casing exposing the item to dirt or moisture - Wire insulation that has rubbed through causing a short to ground - Some or all of the wiring strands broken inside of the insulation - Wiring broken inside of the insulation TROUBLESHOOTING WIRING PROBLEMS When troubleshooting wiring problems there are six steps which can aid in the procedure. The steps are listed and explained below. Always check for non-factory items added to the vehicle before doing any diagnosis. If the vehicle is equipped with these items, disconnect them to verify these add-on items are not the cause of the problem. 1. Verify the problem. 2. Verify any related symptoms. Do this by performing operational checks on components that are in the same circuit. Refer to the wiring diagrams. 3. Analyze the symptoms. Use the wiring diagrams to determine what the circuit is doing, where the problem most likely is occurring and where the diagnosis will continue. 4. Isolate the problem area. 5. Repair the problem area. 6. Verify the proper operation. For this step, check for proper operation of all items on the repaired circuit. Refer to the wiring diagrams. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 10304 Fuse: Application and ID An integrated Power Module is located in the engine compartment near the battery. This center contains cartridge fuses and mini fuses. A description of each fuse and component may be stamped on the inside cover otherwise the cavity number of each fuse is stamped on the inside cover that corresponds to the following chart. Underhood Fuses (Integrated Power Module) Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 10305 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 10306 CAUTION: - When installing the Integrated Power Module cover, it is important to ensure the cover is properly positioned and fully latched. Failure to do so may allow water to get into the Integrated Power Module, and possibly result in a electrical system failure. - When replacing a blown fuse, it is important to use only a fuse having the correct amperage rating. The use of a fuse with a rating other than indicated may result in a dangerous electrical system overload. If a properly rated fuse continues to blow, it indicates a problem in the circuit that must be corrected. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Fuse: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION All vehicles are equipped with an Ignition-Off Draw (IOD) fuse that is disconnected within the Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) when the vehicle is shipped from the factory. Dealer personnel are to reconnect the IOD fuse in the TIPM as part of the new vehicle preparation procedures and then disconnect it again until new vehicle delivery to the customer. A laser printed fuse layout map is integral to the TIPM cover to ensure proper fuse identification. The IOD fuse is a 20 ampere mini blade-type fuse. The fuse is secured within a black molded plastic fuse holder and puller unit that serves both as a tool for disconnecting and reconnecting the fuse in the TIPM cavity, and as a fuse holder that conveniently stores the fuse in the same cavity after it has been disconnected. CIRCUITS INCLUDED WITH IOD FUSE - Cluster (CCN) - Diagnostic Connector - Map Lamps - Glove Box Lamp - Courtesy Lamps - Radio - Underhood Lamp Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 10309 Fuse: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The term Ignition-Off Draw (IOD) identifies a normal condition where power is being drained from the battery with the ignition switch in the Off position. The IOD fuse feeds the memory and sleep mode functions for some of the electronic modules in the vehicle as well as various other accessories that require battery current when the ignition switch is in the Off position. The only reason the IOD fuse is disconnected is to reduce the normal IOD of the vehicle electrical system during new vehicle transportation and pre-delivery storage to reduce battery depletion, while still allowing vehicle operation so that the vehicle can be loaded, unloaded and moved as needed by both vehicle transportation company and dealer personnel. The IOD fuse is disconnected from Integrated Power Module (IPM) fuse cavity # 51 when the vehicle is shipped from the assembly plant. Dealer personnel must reconnect the IOD fuse when the vehicle is being prepared for delivery in order to restore full electrical system operation. Once the vehicle is prepared for delivery, the IOD function of this fuse becomes transparent and the fuse that has been assigned the IOD designation becomes only another Fused B(+) circuit fuse. The IOD fuse can be used by the vehicle owner as a convenient means of reducing battery depletion when a vehicle is to be stored for periods not to exceed about thirty days. However, it must be remembered that disconnecting the IOD fuse will not eliminate IOD, but only reduce this normal condition. If a vehicle will be stored for more than about thirty days, the battery negative cable should be disconnected to eliminate normal IOD; and, the battery should be tested and recharged at regular intervals during the vehicle storage period to prevent the battery from becoming discharged or damaged. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Locations Fuse Block: Locations An integrated Power Module is located in the engine compartment near the battery. This center contains cartridge fuses and mini fuses. A description of each fuse and component may be stamped on the inside cover otherwise the cavity number of each fuse is stamped on the inside cover that corresponds to the following chart. Underhood Fuses (Integrated Power Module) Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Locations > Page 10313 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Locations > Page 10314 CAUTION: - When installing the Integrated Power Module cover, it is important to ensure the cover is properly positioned and fully latched. Failure to do so may allow water to get into the Integrated Power Module, and possibly result in a electrical system failure. - When replacing a blown fuse, it is important to use only a fuse having the correct amperage rating. The use of a fuse with a rating other than indicated may result in a dangerous electrical system overload. If a properly rated fuse continues to blow, it indicates a problem in the circuit that must be corrected. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Fuse Block: Diagram Information and Instructions Warnings WARNINGS - GENERAL WARNINGS provide information to prevent personal injury and vehicle damage. Below is a list of general warnings that should be followed any time a vehicle is being serviced. WARNING: Always wear safety glasses for eye protection. WARNING: Use safety stands anytime a procedure requires being under a vehicle. WARNING: Be sure that the ignition switch always is in the off position, unless the procedure requires it to be on. WARNING: Set the parking brake when working on any vehicle. An automatic transmission should be in park. A manual transmission should be in neutral. WARNING: Operate the engine only in a well-ventilated area. WARNING: Keep away from moving parts when the engine is running, especially the fan and belts. WARNING: To prevent serious burns, avoid contact with hot parts such as the radiator, exhaust manifold(s), tail pipe, catalytic converter and muffler. WARNING: Do not allow flame or sparks near the battery. Gases are always present in and around the battery. WARNING: Always remove rings, watches, loose hanging jewelry and avoid loose clothing. How to Use Wiring Diagrams DESCRIPTION - HOW TO USE WIRING DIAGRAMS DaimlerChrysler Corporation wiring diagrams are designed to provide information regarding the vehicles wiring content. In order to effectively use the wiring diagrams to diagnose and repair DaimlerChrysler Corporation vehicles, it is important to understand all of their features and characteristics. Diagrams are arranged such that the power (B+) side of the circuit is placed near the top of the page, and the ground (B-) side of the circuit is placed near the bottom of the page. All switches, components, and modules are shown in the at rest position with the doors closed and the key removed from the ignition. Components are shown two ways. A solid line around a component indicates that the component is complete. A dashed line around the component indicates that the component is being shown is not complete. Incomplete components have a reference number to indicate the page where the component is shown complete. It is important to realize that no attempt is made on the diagrams to represent components and wiring as they appear on the vehicle. For example, a short piece of wire is treated the same as a long one. In addition, switches and other components are shown as simply as possible, with regard to function only. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10317 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10318 SYMBOLS International symbols are used throughout the wiring diagrams. These symbols are consistent with those being used around the world. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10319 TERMINOLOGY This is a list of terms and definitions used in the wiring diagrams. LHD - Left Hand Drive Vehicles RHD - Right Hand Drive Vehicles ATX - Automatic Transmissions-Front Wheel Drive MTX Manual Transmissions-Front Wheel Drive Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10320 AT - Automatic Transmissions-Rear Wheel Drive MT - Manual Transmissions-Rear Wheel Drive SOHC - Single Over Head Cam Engine DOHC - Double Over Head Cam Engine Export - Vehicles Built For Sale In Markets Other Than North America Except Export - Vehicles Built For Sale In North America Circuit Functions DESCRIPTION - CIRCUIT FUNCTIONS All circuits in the diagrams use an alpha/numeric code to identify the wire and it's function. To identify which circuit code applies to a system, refer to the Circuit Identification Code Chart. This chart shows the main circuits only and does not show the secondary codes that may apply to some models. Circuit Information DESCRIPTION - CIRCUIT INFORMATION Each wire shown in the diagrams contains a code which identifies the main circuit, a specific part of the main circuit, gage of wire, and color. An example would be A 2 18 LB/YL. This is a Battery Feed circuit, level two, eighteen gauge, light blue with a yellow tracer. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10321 Connector, Ground and Splice Information DESCRIPTION - CONNECTOR, GROUND AND SPLICE INFORMATION CAUTION: Not all connectors are serviced. Some connectors are serviced only with a harness. A typical example might be the Supplemental Restraint System connectors. Always check parts availability before attempting a repair. IDENTIFICATION In-line connectors are identified by a number, as follows: - In-line connectors located in the engine compartment are C100 series numbers. - In-line connectors located in the instrument panel area are C200 series numbers. - In-line connectors located in the body are C300 series numbers. - Jumper harness connectors are C400 series numbers. - Grounds and ground connectors are identified with a "G" and follow the same series numbering as the in-line connectors. - Splices are identified with an "S" and follow the same series numbering as the in-line connectors. In addition, S001-S099 numbers are located in the engine compartment. - Component connectors are identified by the component name instead of a number. Multiple connectors on a component use a C1, C2, etc. identifier. LOCATIONS Vehicle/Locations contains the master connector/ground/splice location index charts with hyperlinks to the applicable location illustrations. The illustrations contain the connector name (or number)/ground number/splice number and component identification. The abbreviation T/O is used in the component location section to indicate a point in which the wiring harness branches out to a component. The abbreviation N/S means Not Shown in the illustrations Section Identification and Information DESCRIPTION - SECTION IDENTIFICATION AND INFORMATION The wiring diagrams are grouped into individual sections. If a component is most likely found in a particular group, it will be shown complete (all wires, Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10322 connectors, and pins) within that group. For example, the Auto Shutdown Relay is most likely to be found in Powertrain Management, so it is shown there complete. It can, however, be shown partially in another group if it contains some associated wiring. Splice diagrams show the entire splice and provide references to other sections the splices serves. Splice Information only contains splice diagrams that are not shown in their entirety somewhere else in the wiring diagrams. Connector Pin-Outs shows each connector and the circuits involved with that connector. The connectors are identified using the name/number on the diagram pages. Removal REMOVAL 1. Disconnect battery. 2. Release Connector Lock (2). 3. Disconnect the connector (3) being repaired from its mating half/component. 4. Remove the dress cover (if applicable) (1). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10323 5. Release the Secondary Terminal Lock, if required (1). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10324 6. Position the connector locking finger away from the terminal using the proper special tool. Pull on the wire to remove the terminal from the connector. Installation Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10325 INSTALLATION 1. Insert the removed terminal in the same cavity on the repair connector. 2. Repeat steps for each terminal in the connector, being sure that all wires are inserted into the proper cavities. For additional connector pin-out identification, refer to the wiring diagrams. 3. When the connector is re-assembled, the secondary terminal lock must be placed in the locked position to prevent terminal push out. 4. Replace dress cover (if applicable). 5. Connect connector to its mating half/component. 6. Connect battery and test all affected systems. Removal REMOVAL 1. Disconnect the battery. 2. Locate the diode in the harness, and remove the protective covering. 3. Remove the diode from the harness, pay attention to the current flow direction (1) (2) (3). Installation INSTALLATION 1. Remove the insulation from the wires in the harness. Only remove enough insulation to solder in the new diode. 2. Install the new diode in the harness, making sure current flow is correct. If necessary, refer to the appropriate wiring diagram for current flow. 3. Solder the connection together using rosin core type solder only. Do not use acid core solder. 4. Tape the diode to the harness using electrical tape. Make sure the diode is completely sealed from the elements. 5. Re-connect the battery and test affected systems. Removal REMOVAL 1. Follow steps for removing terminals described in the connector removal section. 2. Cut the wire 6 inches from the back of the connector. Installation INSTALLATION 1. Select a wire from the terminal repair kit that best matches the color and gage of the wire being repaired. 2. Cut the repair wire to the proper length and remove one-half (1/2) inch of insulation. 3. Splice the repair wire to the wire harness (see wire splicing procedure). See: Service Procedures/Wire Splicing 4. Insert the repaired wire into the connector. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10326 5. Install the connector locking wedge, if required, and reconnect the connector to its mating half/component. 6. Re-tape the wire harness starting at 1-1/2 inches behind the connector and 2 inches past the repair. 7. Connect battery and test all affected systems. Wire Splicing STANDARD PROCEDURE - WIRE SPLICING When splicing a wire, it is important that the correct gage be used as shown in the wiring diagrams. 1. Remove one-half (1/2) inch of insulation from each wire that needs to be spliced. 2. Place a piece of adhesive lined heat shrink tubing on one side of the wire. Make sure the tubing will be long enough to cover and seal the entire repair area. 3. Place the strands of wire overlapping each other inside of the splice clip (1). 4. Using crimping tool (1), Mopar p/n 05019912AA, crimp the splice clip and wires together. 5. Solder (3) the connection (2) together using rosin core type solder (1) only. CAUTION: DO NOT USE ACID CORE SOLDER. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10327 6. Center the heat shrink tubing (2) over the joint and heat using a heat gun. Heat the joint until the tubing is tightly sealed and sealant (1) comes out of both ends of the tubing. Special Tools WIRING/TERMINAL PROBING TOOL PACKAGE 6807 TERMINAL PICK TOOL SET 6680 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10328 TERMINAL REMOVING TOOLS 6932 AND 8638 TERMINAL REMOVING TOOL 6934 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10329 Fuse Block: Diagnostic Aids Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) Sensitive Devices STANDARD PROCEDURE - ELECTROSTATIC DISCHARGE (ESD) SENSITIVE DEVICES All ESD sensitive components are solid state and a symbol is used to indicate this. When handling any component with this symbol, comply with the following procedures to reduce the possibility of electrostatic charge build up on the body and inadvertent discharge into the component. If it is not known whether the part is ESD sensitive, assume that it is. 1. Always touch a known good ground before handling the part. This should be repeated while handling the part and more frequently after sliding across a seat, sitting down from a standing position, or walking a distance. 2. Avoid touching electrical terminals of the part, unless instructed to do so by a written procedure. 3. When using a voltmeter, be sure to connect the ground lead first. 4. Do not remove the part from it's protective packing until it is time to install the part. 5. Before removing the part from it's package, ground the package to a known good ground on the vehicle. Testing Of Voltage Potential STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING OF VOLTAGE POTENTIAL 1. Connect the ground lead of a voltmeter to a known good ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the voltmeter to the selected test point. The vehicle ignition may need to be turned ON to check voltage. Refer to the appropriate test procedure. Testing For Continuity Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10330 STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING FOR CONTINUITY 1. Remove the fuse (1) for the circuit being checked or, disconnect the battery. 2. Connect one lead of the ohmmeter to one side of the circuit being tested 3. Connect the other lead to the other end of the circuit being tested. Low or no resistance means good continuity. Testing For A Short To Ground STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING FOR A SHORT TO GROUND 1. Remove the fuse and disconnect all items involved with the fuse. 2. Connect a test light or a voltmeter across the terminals of the fuse. 3. Starting at the fuse block, wiggle the wiring harness about six to eight inches apart and watch the voltmeter/test lamp. 4. If the voltmeter registers voltage or the test lamp glows, there is a short to ground in that general area of the wiring harness. Testing For A Short To Ground On Fuses Powering Several Loads STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING FOR A SHORT TO GROUND ON FUSES POWERING SEVERAL LOADS 1. Refer to the wiring diagrams and disconnect or isolate all items on the suspected fused circuits. 2. Replace the blown fuse. 3. Supply power to the fuse by turning ON the ignition switch or re-connecting the battery. 4. Start connecting or energizing the items in the fuse circuit one at a time. When the fuse blows the circuit with the short to ground has been isolated. Testing For A Voltage Drop STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING FOR A VOLTAGE DROP Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10331 1. Connect the positive lead of the voltmeter to the side of the circuit closest to the battery. 2. Connect the other lead of the voltmeter to the other side of the switch, component or circuit. 3. Operate the item. 4. The voltmeter will show the difference in voltage between the two points. Troubleshooting Wiring Problems DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING - WIRING HARNESS TROUBLESHOOTING TOOLS When diagnosing a problem in an electrical circuit there are several common tools necessary. These tools are listed and explained below. - Jumper Wire - This is a test wire used to connect two points of a circuit. It can be used to bypass an open in a circuit. WARNING: Never use a jumper wire across a load, such as a motor, connected between a battery feed and ground. - Voltmeter - Used to check for voltage on a circuit. Always connect the black lead to a known good ground and the red lead to the positive side of the circuit. CAUTION: Most of the electrical components used in today's vehicles are Solid State. When checking voltages in these circuits, use a meter with a 10 - megohm or greater impedance rating. - Ohmmeter - Used to check the resistance between two points of a circuit. Low or no resistance in a circuit means good continuity. CAUTION: Most of the electrical components used in today's vehicles are Solid State. When checking resistance in these circuits use a meter with a 10 - megohm or greater impedance rating. In addition, make sure the power is disconnected from the circuit. Circuits that are powered up by the vehicle's electrical system can cause damage to the equipment and provide false readings. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10332 - Probing Tools - These tools are used for probing terminals in connectors. Select the proper size tool from Special Tool Package 6807, and insert the probing end (2) into the terminal being tested. Use the other end of the tool (1) to insert the meter probe. INTERMITTENT AND POOR CONNECTIONS Most intermittent electrical problems are caused by faulty electrical connections or wiring. It is also possible for a sticking component or relay to cause a problem. Before condemning a component or wiring assembly, check the following items. - Connectors are fully seated - Spread terminals, or terminal push out - Terminals in the wiring assembly are fully seated into the connector/component and locked into position - Dirt or corrosion on the terminals. Any amount of corrosion or dirt could cause an intermittent problem - Damaged connector/component casing exposing the item to dirt or moisture - Wire insulation that has rubbed through causing a short to ground - Some or all of the wiring strands broken inside of the insulation - Wiring broken inside of the insulation TROUBLESHOOTING WIRING PROBLEMS When troubleshooting wiring problems there are six steps which can aid in the procedure. The steps are listed and explained below. Always check for non-factory items added to the vehicle before doing any diagnosis. If the vehicle is equipped with these items, disconnect them to verify these add-on items are not the cause of the problem. 1. Verify the problem. 2. Verify any related symptoms. Do this by performing operational checks on components that are in the same circuit. Refer to the wiring diagrams. 3. Analyze the symptoms. Use the wiring diagrams to determine what the circuit is doing, where the problem most likely is occurring and where the diagnosis will continue. 4. Isolate the problem area. 5. Repair the problem area. 6. Verify the proper operation. For this step, check for proper operation of all items on the repaired circuit. Refer to the wiring diagrams. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 10333 Fuse Block: Application and ID An integrated Power Module is located in the engine compartment near the battery. This center contains cartridge fuses and mini fuses. A description of each fuse and component may be stamped on the inside cover otherwise the cavity number of each fuse is stamped on the inside cover that corresponds to the following chart. Underhood Fuses (Integrated Power Module) Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 10334 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 10335 CAUTION: - When installing the Integrated Power Module cover, it is important to ensure the cover is properly positioned and fully latched. Failure to do so may allow water to get into the Integrated Power Module, and possibly result in a electrical system failure. - When replacing a blown fuse, it is important to use only a fuse having the correct amperage rating. The use of a fuse with a rating other than indicated may result in a dangerous electrical system overload. If a properly rated fuse continues to blow, it indicates a problem in the circuit that must be corrected. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Power Distribution Module: > 08-007-08A > Jul > 08 > Antitheft System - Engine No Crank/No Start Condition Power Distribution Module: Customer Interest Antitheft System - Engine No Crank/No Start Condition NUMBER: 08-007-08 REV. A GROUP: Electrical DATE: July 04,2008 THIS BULLETIN SUPERSEDES TECHNICAL SERVICE BULLETIN 08-007-08, DATED MARCH 04, 2008. THIS IS A COMPLETE REVISION AND NO ASTERISKS HAVE BEEN USED TO HIGHLIGHT REVISIONS. DO NOT ORDER PART NUMBER 05026070AP UNTIL JULY 21, 2008. ALL OTHER PART NUMBERS ARE AVAILABLE NOW. SUBJECT: No Engine Crank Or No Engine Start Due To Electronic Lockup Of The WCM / SKREEM OVERVIEW: This bulletin involves the replacement of the Wireless Control Module (WCM), and if equipped, the replacement of the Electric Steering Column Lock (ELV). The WCM is also referred to as the Sentry Key Remote Entry Module (SKREEM). MODELS: 2007 - 2008 (DR/DH/D1/DC/DM) Ram Truck (1500/2500/3500/4500/5500) 2007 - 2008 (JK) Wrangler 2007 - 2008 (J1) Sebring (China) 2007 - 2008 (JS) Avenger/Sebring 2007 - 2008 (KA) Nitro 2008 (KK) Liberty/Cherokee 2007 - 2008 (MK) Compass/Patriot 2007 - 2008 (PM) Caliber 2006 - 2008 (PT) Chrysler PT Cruiser NOTE: This bulletin applies to vehicles built on or before May 05, 2008 (MDH 0505XX). SYMPTOM/CONDITION: The customer will experience a no engine crank AND a no engine start condition. Also, the remote keyless entry (RKE) system will not operate. This condition may be due to an electrostatic discharge (ESD) from the ignition key into the Wireless Control Module (WCM), causing the WCM to electronically lockup. This condition may occur more frequently in dry and/or cold weather conditions where a sufficient electrostatic charge is more easily produced. This condition is corrected by the replacement of the WCM. DIAGNOSIS: 1. With the condition present (i.e. the vehicle in the no crank / no start condition), connect the StarSCAN(R) scan tool to the vehicle. 2. Turn the ignition switch to the "ON position, and power up the StarSCAN(R). 3. If the WCM is electronically locked up, the StarSCAN(R) will display the WCM as being "off bus". 4. If the no crank / no start condition is present, and the WCM is "off bus", then reset the WCM by temporarily removing the IOD fuse (with the key out of the ignition switch), wait for 10 seconds and then reinstall the IOD fuse. 5. With the IOD fuse reset having been performed, verify that the vehicle will now crank, start, and run. 6. If the condition is temporarily corrected by performing the above steps, and if the part number of the WCM is earlier than the part number of the WCM listed in the part reference table in the Service Bulletin Parts Required Section below, then perform the Repair Procedure. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Power Distribution Module: > 08-007-08A > Jul > 08 > Antitheft System - Engine No Crank/No Start Condition > Page 10344 PARTS REQUIRED: NOTE: The part numbers listed in the following part reference table are to be used as A GUIDE to help determine if the WCM, that is currently in the vehicle, may require replacement. If it is determined that the WCM requires replacement, then ALWAYS REFER TO THE PARTS MANUAL to determine the correct WCM for the specific vehicle in question. In some earlier model years, the WCM may rule (supersede) to one of the part numbers listed in the table. ALWAYS REFER TO THE PARTS MANUAL (not the part reference table) to determine the correct part number ruling (supercedence / substitution). MAKE CERTAIN THAT THE CORRECT WCM IS ORDERED THE FIRST TIME FOR THE SPECIFIC VEHICLE IN QUESTION. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Power Distribution Module: > 08-007-08A > Jul > 08 > Antitheft System - Engine No Crank/No Start Condition > Page 10345 REPAIR PROCEDURE: NOTE: If the vehicle (a JS model vehicle in certain International markets) is equipped with an Electric Steering Column Lock (ELV), then the WCM and the ELV must be replaced. Replace the WCM and then the ELV. Next program the WCM and at least one (1) ignition key BEFORE programming the ELV. IMPORTANT: Not following this repair process correctly will cause the new ELV to fail. NOTE: Insert the ignition key into the ignition lock cylinder. This will move the shaft lock module locking bolt to the unlocked position. LEAVE the key in the lock cylinder while the shaft lock module is being removed. 1. If vehicle is equipped with a Steering Shaft Lock Module (JS - Avenger I Stratus - some International Markets), then the Shaft Lock Module will require replacement. From the Service Info tab select: 8 - Electrical > Vehicle Theft Security - Security Information > Module, Shaft Lock > Removal and Installation. NOTE: The shaft lock module cannot be removed from the steering column while the locking bolt is in the locked position without irreversibly damaging the column. Before attempting service, the ignition key must have been inserted into the ignition lock cylinder. Then rotate the steering wheel from side to side. If the steering wheel can be rotated, the locking bolt is in the unlocked position. Leave the key in the ignition lock cylinder until shaft lock module removal has been completed. If the steering wheel cannot be rotated, test and repair the wiring circuits between the module and the ignition switch as required. If no problem is found in these circuits, the module has failed with the locking bolt in the locked position and both the module and the steering column must be replaced with new units. 2. Replace the WCM/SKREEM. Refer to TechCONNECT for detailed service information. From the Service Info tab select: 8 - Electrical > Vehicle Theft Security - Service Information > Module, Sentry Key Remote Entry > Removal and Installation. NOTE: Obtain the vehicle PIN number prior to programming WCM/SKREEM or ELV. NOTE: If during the following steps the PIN number is properly entered but is rejected, then reenter the PIN number again until it is accepted. 3. After both the WCM/SKREEM and the ELV (if equipped) have been replaced, Program the WCM/SKREEM as follows: a. Turn the ignition key to the ON position, (Engine Off) b. Connect the scan tool (StarSCAN(R)) to the data link connector and turn the ignition to the RUN position, (engine off). c. Select "ECU View." d. Scroll down and select "WCM" in the list of modules. e. Select "Misc. Functions." f. Scroll to "WCM Replaced." g. Press "Start". h. Press "Next". i. Select "Show Keyboard". j. Enter the vehicle PIN number. k. Select "Next". l. Verify PIN is correct. m. Select "Next". n. Follow on-screen prompts to complete WCM function programing for Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPM) and so on. 0. Turn the ignition key to the OFF position. Wait 30 seconds. p. Turn the ignition key to the ON position, (Engine Off) Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Power Distribution Module: > 08-007-08A > Jul > 08 > Antitheft System - Engine No Crank/No Start Condition > Page 10346 q. Select "ECU View". r. Scroll down and select "WCM" in the list of modules. s. Select "Misc. Functions." t. Select "Program Ign. Keys" and follow on-screen prompts. u. Select "Complete". v. Verify ignition key will start vehicle and the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) functions operate. CAUTION: If the vehicle is equipped with a Shaft Lock Module (used in some International Markets on JS model vehicles), then at least one (1 ignition key must have been programmed to the new WCM BEFORE the new Shaft Lock Module is "married" to the new WCM. 4. Is the vehicle equipped with Steering Shaft Lock Module (ELV)? a. Yes >> Proceed to Step # 5. b. No >>Repair is complete. 5. Program the ELV as follows; a. Select "ECU View". b. Scroll down and select "WCM" in the list of modules. c. Select "Misc. Functions". d. Scroll to "ELV Replaced." e. Press "Start". f. When complete, verify steering shaft lock mechanism is operating. Remove and insert key from the ignition lock cylinder and listen for solenoid "click at lower end of column. POLICY: Reimbursable within the provisions of the warranty. TIME ALLOWANCE: Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Power Distribution Module: > 08-007-08A > Jul > 08 > Antitheft System - Engine No Crank/No Start Condition > Page 10347 FAILURE CODE: Disclaimer: This bulletin is supplied as technical information only and is not an authorization for repair. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Power Distribution Module: > 08-007-08A > Jul > 08 > Antitheft System - Engine No Crank/No Start Condition Power Distribution Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Antitheft System - Engine No Crank/No Start Condition NUMBER: 08-007-08 REV. A GROUP: Electrical DATE: July 04,2008 THIS BULLETIN SUPERSEDES TECHNICAL SERVICE BULLETIN 08-007-08, DATED MARCH 04, 2008. THIS IS A COMPLETE REVISION AND NO ASTERISKS HAVE BEEN USED TO HIGHLIGHT REVISIONS. DO NOT ORDER PART NUMBER 05026070AP UNTIL JULY 21, 2008. ALL OTHER PART NUMBERS ARE AVAILABLE NOW. SUBJECT: No Engine Crank Or No Engine Start Due To Electronic Lockup Of The WCM / SKREEM OVERVIEW: This bulletin involves the replacement of the Wireless Control Module (WCM), and if equipped, the replacement of the Electric Steering Column Lock (ELV). The WCM is also referred to as the Sentry Key Remote Entry Module (SKREEM). MODELS: 2007 - 2008 (DR/DH/D1/DC/DM) Ram Truck (1500/2500/3500/4500/5500) 2007 - 2008 (JK) Wrangler 2007 - 2008 (J1) Sebring (China) 2007 - 2008 (JS) Avenger/Sebring 2007 - 2008 (KA) Nitro 2008 (KK) Liberty/Cherokee 2007 - 2008 (MK) Compass/Patriot 2007 - 2008 (PM) Caliber 2006 - 2008 (PT) Chrysler PT Cruiser NOTE: This bulletin applies to vehicles built on or before May 05, 2008 (MDH 0505XX). SYMPTOM/CONDITION: The customer will experience a no engine crank AND a no engine start condition. Also, the remote keyless entry (RKE) system will not operate. This condition may be due to an electrostatic discharge (ESD) from the ignition key into the Wireless Control Module (WCM), causing the WCM to electronically lockup. This condition may occur more frequently in dry and/or cold weather conditions where a sufficient electrostatic charge is more easily produced. This condition is corrected by the replacement of the WCM. DIAGNOSIS: 1. With the condition present (i.e. the vehicle in the no crank / no start condition), connect the StarSCAN(R) scan tool to the vehicle. 2. Turn the ignition switch to the "ON position, and power up the StarSCAN(R). 3. If the WCM is electronically locked up, the StarSCAN(R) will display the WCM as being "off bus". 4. If the no crank / no start condition is present, and the WCM is "off bus", then reset the WCM by temporarily removing the IOD fuse (with the key out of the ignition switch), wait for 10 seconds and then reinstall the IOD fuse. 5. With the IOD fuse reset having been performed, verify that the vehicle will now crank, start, and run. 6. If the condition is temporarily corrected by performing the above steps, and if the part number of the WCM is earlier than the part number of the WCM listed in the part reference table in the Service Bulletin Parts Required Section below, then perform the Repair Procedure. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Power Distribution Module: > 08-007-08A > Jul > 08 > Antitheft System - Engine No Crank/No Start Condition > Page 10353 PARTS REQUIRED: NOTE: The part numbers listed in the following part reference table are to be used as A GUIDE to help determine if the WCM, that is currently in the vehicle, may require replacement. If it is determined that the WCM requires replacement, then ALWAYS REFER TO THE PARTS MANUAL to determine the correct WCM for the specific vehicle in question. In some earlier model years, the WCM may rule (supersede) to one of the part numbers listed in the table. ALWAYS REFER TO THE PARTS MANUAL (not the part reference table) to determine the correct part number ruling (supercedence / substitution). MAKE CERTAIN THAT THE CORRECT WCM IS ORDERED THE FIRST TIME FOR THE SPECIFIC VEHICLE IN QUESTION. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Power Distribution Module: > 08-007-08A > Jul > 08 > Antitheft System - Engine No Crank/No Start Condition > Page 10354 REPAIR PROCEDURE: NOTE: If the vehicle (a JS model vehicle in certain International markets) is equipped with an Electric Steering Column Lock (ELV), then the WCM and the ELV must be replaced. Replace the WCM and then the ELV. Next program the WCM and at least one (1) ignition key BEFORE programming the ELV. IMPORTANT: Not following this repair process correctly will cause the new ELV to fail. NOTE: Insert the ignition key into the ignition lock cylinder. This will move the shaft lock module locking bolt to the unlocked position. LEAVE the key in the lock cylinder while the shaft lock module is being removed. 1. If vehicle is equipped with a Steering Shaft Lock Module (JS - Avenger I Stratus - some International Markets), then the Shaft Lock Module will require replacement. From the Service Info tab select: 8 - Electrical > Vehicle Theft Security - Security Information > Module, Shaft Lock > Removal and Installation. NOTE: The shaft lock module cannot be removed from the steering column while the locking bolt is in the locked position without irreversibly damaging the column. Before attempting service, the ignition key must have been inserted into the ignition lock cylinder. Then rotate the steering wheel from side to side. If the steering wheel can be rotated, the locking bolt is in the unlocked position. Leave the key in the ignition lock cylinder until shaft lock module removal has been completed. If the steering wheel cannot be rotated, test and repair the wiring circuits between the module and the ignition switch as required. If no problem is found in these circuits, the module has failed with the locking bolt in the locked position and both the module and the steering column must be replaced with new units. 2. Replace the WCM/SKREEM. Refer to TechCONNECT for detailed service information. From the Service Info tab select: 8 - Electrical > Vehicle Theft Security - Service Information > Module, Sentry Key Remote Entry > Removal and Installation. NOTE: Obtain the vehicle PIN number prior to programming WCM/SKREEM or ELV. NOTE: If during the following steps the PIN number is properly entered but is rejected, then reenter the PIN number again until it is accepted. 3. After both the WCM/SKREEM and the ELV (if equipped) have been replaced, Program the WCM/SKREEM as follows: a. Turn the ignition key to the ON position, (Engine Off) b. Connect the scan tool (StarSCAN(R)) to the data link connector and turn the ignition to the RUN position, (engine off). c. Select "ECU View." d. Scroll down and select "WCM" in the list of modules. e. Select "Misc. Functions." f. Scroll to "WCM Replaced." g. Press "Start". h. Press "Next". i. Select "Show Keyboard". j. Enter the vehicle PIN number. k. Select "Next". l. Verify PIN is correct. m. Select "Next". n. Follow on-screen prompts to complete WCM function programing for Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPM) and so on. 0. Turn the ignition key to the OFF position. Wait 30 seconds. p. Turn the ignition key to the ON position, (Engine Off) Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Power Distribution Module: > 08-007-08A > Jul > 08 > Antitheft System - Engine No Crank/No Start Condition > Page 10355 q. Select "ECU View". r. Scroll down and select "WCM" in the list of modules. s. Select "Misc. Functions." t. Select "Program Ign. Keys" and follow on-screen prompts. u. Select "Complete". v. Verify ignition key will start vehicle and the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) functions operate. CAUTION: If the vehicle is equipped with a Shaft Lock Module (used in some International Markets on JS model vehicles), then at least one (1 ignition key must have been programmed to the new WCM BEFORE the new Shaft Lock Module is "married" to the new WCM. 4. Is the vehicle equipped with Steering Shaft Lock Module (ELV)? a. Yes >> Proceed to Step # 5. b. No >>Repair is complete. 5. Program the ELV as follows; a. Select "ECU View". b. Scroll down and select "WCM" in the list of modules. c. Select "Misc. Functions". d. Scroll to "ELV Replaced." e. Press "Start". f. When complete, verify steering shaft lock mechanism is operating. Remove and insert key from the ignition lock cylinder and listen for solenoid "click at lower end of column. POLICY: Reimbursable within the provisions of the warranty. TIME ALLOWANCE: Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Power Distribution Module: > 08-007-08A > Jul > 08 > Antitheft System - Engine No Crank/No Start Condition > Page 10356 FAILURE CODE: Disclaimer: This bulletin is supplied as technical information only and is not an authorization for repair. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 199 Power Distribution Module: Locations Component ID 199 Component ID: 199 Component : MODULE-TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER Connector: Name : MODULE-TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER C1 Color : LT. GRAY # of pins : 14 Pin Circuit Description 1 F1 20PK/WT FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (OFF-RUN-START) 2 T41 18YL/DB TRS T41 SIGNAL (P/N) 2 T41 20YL/DB TRS T41 SIGNAL (P/N) 2 T752 20DG/OR STARTER SOLENOID CONTROL 3-4 K31 20BR FUEL PUMP CONTROL 5 W7 20BR/GY WIPER PARK SWITCH SENSE 6-7-8 G932 20VT/TN WASHER FLUID SWITCH RETURN 9 W1 20BR/TN WASHER FLUID SWITCH SENSE 10 T515 20YL/DB TRANSMISSION CONTROL 11 G70 20VT/LB HOOD AJAR SWITCH SENSE 12 - 13 - 14 - Component Location - 33 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 199 > Page 10359 Component Location - 34 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 199 > Page 10360 Connector: Name : MODULE-TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER C10 Color : LT. GRAY # of pins : 22 Pin Circuit Description 1 K342 16BR/WT ASD CONTROL OUTPUT 2 A405 18RD/DB FUSED B(+) 3 A941 18RD FUSED B(+) 4-5 A104 20YL/RD FUSED B(+) Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 199 > Page 10361 6 A310 16RD/LB FUSED B(+) 7 C15 14DB/WT REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER CONTROL OUTPUT 8 F12 14PK/RD FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) 9 T16 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT 10 - 11 X22 18GY/LB HORN CONTROL OUTPUT 12 W3 18BR/WT WIPER LOW SPEED CONTROL OUTPUT 13 Z971 18BK GROUND 14 C16 18DB/GY HEATED MIRROR CONTROL OUTPUT 15 A212 20RD/OR FUSED B(+) 16 - - 17 A121 14RD/YL FUSED B(+) 18 A109 16OR/RD FUEL PUMP CONTROL OUTPUT 19 X21 18GY/YL HORN CONTROL OUTPUT 20 Z953 20BK GROUND 21 T41 20YL/DB TRS T41 SIGNAL (P/N) 22 A400 14TN/RD FUSED B(+) Component Location - 33 Component Location - 34 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 199 > Page 10362 Connector: Name : MODULE-TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER C2 Color : BLACK # of pins : 13 Pin Circuit Description 1-2 W10 20BR WASHER PUMP MOTOR CONTROL 3 F20 20PK/WT IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) 4 A72 20RD/OR ADJUSTABLE PEDALS OUTPUT 5-- Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 199 > Page 10363 6-7-8-9 G304 20VT/DB FRONT AXLE LOCK CONTROL 10 C13 20LB A/C CLUTCH CONTROL 10 C13 20LB/OR A/C CLUTCH CONTROL 11 K51 20BR/WT ASD CONTROL 12 B20 20DG/OR BRAKE FLUID LEVEL SWITCH SENSE 13 Z117 20BK/WT GROUND Component Location - 33 Component Location - 34 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 199 > Page 10364 Connector: Name : MODULE-TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER C3 Color : BLACK # of pins : 22 Pin Circuit Description 1 A209 10RD FUSED B(+) 2-3 F984 18PK/YL FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-ACC) 4-5 F983 20PK/YL FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-ACC) Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 199 > Page 10365 6 A205 18RD/OR FUSED B(+) 7-8 A944 20RD FUSED B(+) 9 A116 16YL/RD FUSED B(+) 10 A118 18RD/OR FUSED B(+) 11 - 12 A918 20RD FUSED B(+) 12 A918 16RD FUSED B(+) 13 F921 20PK/LB FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN) 14 F504 20GY/PK FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN) 15 F202 20PK/GY FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) 16 A930 16RD FUSED B(+) 17 F942 10PK/LG FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) 18 L673 18YL TRAILER TOW LEFT TURN RELAY OUTPUT 19 L674 18LG TRAILER TOW RIGHT TURN RELAY OUTPUT 20 F960 20PK/LG FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) 21 F21 20PK/DG FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) 22 F12 14PK/RD FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) Component Location - 33 Component Location - 34 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 199 > Page 10366 Connector: Name : MODULE-TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER C4 Color : LT. GRAY # of pins : 13 Pin Circuit Description 1 Z118 16BK/YL GROUND 2 T102 16YL SHIFT MOTOR CONTROL A 3 T101 16DG SHIFT MOTOR CONTROL B 4-5-- Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 199 > Page 10367 6-7-8 T300 20YL/GY T-CASE MOTOR BRAKE SIGNAL 9 T103 20YL/OR 5 VOLT SUPPLY 10 D201 20WT/DG MODE SENSOR A 11 G180 20VT/YL SENSOR RETURN 12 A880 20DB/RD FUSED B(+) 13 G303 20VT/DG FRONT AXLE LOCK SIGNAL Component Location - 33 Component Location - 34 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 199 > Page 10368 Connector: Name : MODULE-TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER C5 Color : BLACK # of pins : 10 Pin Circuit Description 1 L61 20WT/LG LEFT FRONT TURN LAMP DRIVER 2 L60 20WT/TN RIGHT FRONT TURN LAMP DRIVER 3 L34 20WT/GY RIGHT HIGH BEAM DRIVER 4 L43 20WT/DB LEFT LOW BEAM DRIVER 5 T340 20DG/VT INPUT SPEED SENSOR 2 (N3) SIGNAL Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 199 > Page 10369 6-7-8 G31 20VT/LG AAT SIGNAL 9 G930 20VT/TN AAT RETURN 10 T71 20YL/OR INPUT SPEED SENSOR 2 (N3) RETURN Component Location - 33 Component Location - 34 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 199 > Page 10370 Connector: Name : MODULE-TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER C6 Color : BROWN # of pins : 16 Pin Circuit Description 1 D65 20WT/LG CAN C BUS (+) 2 D52 20WT/LB DIAGNOSTIC CAN C (+) 3 D55 20WT/OR CAN B BUS (+) 4 L63 20WT/DG LEFT REAR TURN LAMP DRIVER 5-- Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 199 > Page 10371 6 L62 20WT/YL RIGHT REAR TURN LAMP DRIVER 7 L50 20WT/TN BRAKE LAMP SWITCH OUTPUT 8-9 D64 20WT/LB CAN C BUS (-) 10 D51 20WT/BR DIAGNOSTIC CAN C (-) 11 D54 20WT CAN B BUS (-) 12 - 13 - 14 - 15 T70 20YL INPUT SPEED SENSOR 1 (N2) SIGNAL 16 T341 20DG/VT INPUT SPEED SENSOR 1 (N2) RETURN Component Location - 33 Component Location - 34 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 199 > Page 10372 Connector: Name : MODULE-TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER C7 Color : BLUE # of pins : 14 Pin Circuit Description 1-2-3 L44 20WT/TN RIGHT LOW BEAM DRIVER 4 L33 20WT/LG LEFT HIGH BEAM DRIVER 5-- Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 199 > Page 10373 6-7 C818 20LB/OR A/C PRESSURE 5 VOLT SUPPLY 8 L10 20WT/GY FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN) 9-10 - 11 - 12 C18 20LB/BR A/C PRESSURE SIGNAL 13 C918 20BK/LB A/C PRESSURE GROUND 14 T751 20YL IGNITION START Component Location - 33 Component Location - 34 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 199 > Page 10374 Connector: Name : MODULE-TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER C8 Color : LT. GRAY # of pins : 12 Pin Circuit Description 1 A916 16RD FUSED B(+) Pin Circuit Description 1-2 A919 20RD FUSED B(+) Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 199 > Page 10375 3 A106 20LB/RD FUSED B(+) 4 F201 20PK/OR FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) 5 F100 20PK/VT FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN) 6 A100 14RD/VT FUSED B(+) 7 A210 12OR/RD FUSED B(+) 8 A940 18RD FUSED B(+) 9 A103 18GY/RD FUSED B(+) 10 L89 18WT/YL FOG LAMP CONTROL OUTPUT 11 L1 18WT/LG BACKUP LAMP FEED 12 A961 14RD FUEL HEATER CONTROL OUTPUT 12 C123 12LB/WT CONDENSER FAN CONTROL OUTPUT Component Location - 33 Component Location - 34 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 199 > Page 10376 Connector: Name : MODULE-TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER C9 Color : BLACK # of pins : 12 Pin Circuit Description 1 A111 16DG/RD FUSED B(+) 2 T750 14YL/GY STARTER MOTOR CONTROL OUTPUT 3 C3 20DB/YL A/C CLUTCH CONTROL OUTPUT 4 W4 16BR/OR WIPER MOTOR HIGH SPEED FEED 5 A114 18GY/RD FUSED B(+) Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 199 > Page 10377 6 F30 10PK/YL FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-ACC) 7-8 L7 20WT/YL FUSED PARK LAMP FEED 9 L678 18BR FUSED PARK LAMP FEED 10 L70 20WT/GY FUSED PARK LAMP FEED 11 - 12 A107 12TN/RD FUSED B(+) Component Location - 33 Component Location - 34 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 199 > Page 10378 Connector: Name : MODULE-TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER-EYELET Color : # of pins : 1 Qualifier : (DIESEL) Pin Circuit Description 1 A0 6RD B(+) Component Location - 33 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 199 > Page 10379 Component Location - 34 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 199 > Page 10380 Connector: Name : MODULE-TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER-EYELET Color : # of pins : 1 Qualifier : (GAS) Pin Circuit Description 1 A11 8LB B(+) Pin Circuit Description 1 A0 6RD B(+) Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 199 > Page 10381 Component Location - 33 Component Location - 34 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 199 > Page 10382 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 199 > Page 10383 Power Distribution Module: Locations Component ID 215 Component ID: 215 Component : MODULE-TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER Connector: Name : MODULE-TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER C1 Color : LT. GRAY # of pins : 14 Pin Circuit Description 1 F1 20PK/WT FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (OFF-RUN-START) 2 T41 18YL/DB TRS T41 SIGNAL (P/N) 2 T41 20YL/DB TRS T41 SIGNAL (P/N) 2 T752 20DG/OR STARTER SOLENOID CONTROL 3-4 K31 20BR FUEL PUMP CONTROL 5 W7 20BR/GY WIPER PARK SWITCH SENSE 6-7-8 G932 20VT/TN WASHER FLUID SWITCH RETURN 9 W1 20BR/TN WASHER FLUID SWITCH SENSE 10 T515 20YL/DB TRANSMISSION CONTROL 11 G70 20VT/LB HOOD AJAR SWITCH SENSE 12 - 13 - 14 - Component Location - 33 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 199 > Page 10384 Component Location - 34 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 199 > Page 10385 Connector: Name : MODULE-TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER C10 Color : LT. GRAY # of pins : 22 Pin Circuit Description 1 K342 16BR/WT ASD CONTROL OUTPUT 2 A405 18RD/DB FUSED B(+) 3 A941 18RD FUSED B(+) 4-5 A104 20YL/RD FUSED B(+) Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 199 > Page 10386 6 A310 16RD/LB FUSED B(+) 7 C15 14DB/WT REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER CONTROL OUTPUT 8 F12 14PK/RD FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) 9 T16 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT 10 - 11 X22 18GY/LB HORN CONTROL OUTPUT 12 W3 18BR/WT WIPER LOW SPEED CONTROL OUTPUT 13 Z971 18BK GROUND 14 C16 18DB/GY HEATED MIRROR CONTROL OUTPUT 15 A212 20RD/OR FUSED B(+) 16 - - 17 A121 14RD/YL FUSED B(+) 18 A109 16OR/RD FUEL PUMP CONTROL OUTPUT 19 X21 18GY/YL HORN CONTROL OUTPUT 20 Z953 20BK GROUND 21 T41 20YL/DB TRS T41 SIGNAL (P/N) 22 A400 14TN/RD FUSED B(+) Component Location - 33 Component Location - 34 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 199 > Page 10387 Connector: Name : MODULE-TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER C2 Color : BLACK # of pins : 13 Pin Circuit Description 1-2 W10 20BR WASHER PUMP MOTOR CONTROL 3 F20 20PK/WT IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) 4 A72 20RD/OR ADJUSTABLE PEDALS OUTPUT 5-- Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 199 > Page 10388 6-7-8-9 G304 20VT/DB FRONT AXLE LOCK CONTROL 10 C13 20LB A/C CLUTCH CONTROL 10 C13 20LB/OR A/C CLUTCH CONTROL 11 K51 20BR/WT ASD CONTROL 12 B20 20DG/OR BRAKE FLUID LEVEL SWITCH SENSE 13 Z117 20BK/WT GROUND Component Location - 33 Component Location - 34 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 199 > Page 10389 Connector: Name : MODULE-TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER C3 Color : BLACK # of pins : 22 Pin Circuit Description 1 A209 10RD FUSED B(+) 2-3 F984 18PK/YL FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-ACC) 4-5 F983 20PK/YL FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-ACC) Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 199 > Page 10390 6 A205 18RD/OR FUSED B(+) 7-8 A944 20RD FUSED B(+) 9 A116 16YL/RD FUSED B(+) 10 A118 18RD/OR FUSED B(+) 11 - 12 A918 20RD FUSED B(+) 12 A918 16RD FUSED B(+) 13 F921 20PK/LB FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN) 14 F504 20GY/PK FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN) 15 F202 20PK/GY FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) 16 A930 16RD FUSED B(+) 17 F942 10PK/LG FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) 18 L673 18YL TRAILER TOW LEFT TURN RELAY OUTPUT 19 L674 18LG TRAILER TOW RIGHT TURN RELAY OUTPUT 20 F960 20PK/LG FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) 21 F21 20PK/DG FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) 22 F12 14PK/RD FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) Component Location - 33 Component Location - 34 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 199 > Page 10391 Connector: Name : MODULE-TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER C4 Color : LT. GRAY # of pins : 13 Pin Circuit Description 1 Z118 16BK/YL GROUND 2 T102 16YL SHIFT MOTOR CONTROL A 3 T101 16DG SHIFT MOTOR CONTROL B 4-5-- Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 199 > Page 10392 6-7-8 T300 20YL/GY T-CASE MOTOR BRAKE SIGNAL 9 T103 20YL/OR 5 VOLT SUPPLY 10 D201 20WT/DG MODE SENSOR A 11 G180 20VT/YL SENSOR RETURN 12 A880 20DB/RD FUSED B(+) 13 G303 20VT/DG FRONT AXLE LOCK SIGNAL Component Location - 33 Component Location - 34 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 199 > Page 10393 Connector: Name : MODULE-TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER C5 Color : BLACK # of pins : 10 Pin Circuit Description 1 L61 20WT/LG LEFT FRONT TURN LAMP DRIVER 2 L60 20WT/TN RIGHT FRONT TURN LAMP DRIVER 3 L34 20WT/GY RIGHT HIGH BEAM DRIVER 4 L43 20WT/DB LEFT LOW BEAM DRIVER 5 T340 20DG/VT INPUT SPEED SENSOR 2 (N3) SIGNAL Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 199 > Page 10394 6-7-8 G31 20VT/LG AAT SIGNAL 9 G930 20VT/TN AAT RETURN 10 T71 20YL/OR INPUT SPEED SENSOR 2 (N3) RETURN Component Location - 33 Component Location - 34 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 199 > Page 10395 Connector: Name : MODULE-TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER C6 Color : BROWN # of pins : 16 Pin Circuit Description 1 D65 20WT/LG CAN C BUS (+) 2 D52 20WT/LB DIAGNOSTIC CAN C (+) 3 D55 20WT/OR CAN B BUS (+) 4 L63 20WT/DG LEFT REAR TURN LAMP DRIVER 5-- Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 199 > Page 10396 6 L62 20WT/YL RIGHT REAR TURN LAMP DRIVER 7 L50 20WT/TN BRAKE LAMP SWITCH OUTPUT 8-9 D64 20WT/LB CAN C BUS (-) 10 D51 20WT/BR DIAGNOSTIC CAN C (-) 11 D54 20WT CAN B BUS (-) 12 - 13 - 14 - 15 T70 20YL INPUT SPEED SENSOR 1 (N2) SIGNAL 16 T341 20DG/VT INPUT SPEED SENSOR 1 (N2) RETURN Component Location - 33 Component Location - 34 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 199 > Page 10397 Connector: Name : MODULE-TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER C7 Color : BLUE # of pins : 14 Pin Circuit Description 1-2-3 L44 20WT/TN RIGHT LOW BEAM DRIVER 4 L33 20WT/LG LEFT HIGH BEAM DRIVER 5-- Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 199 > Page 10398 6-7 C818 20LB/OR A/C PRESSURE 5 VOLT SUPPLY 8 L10 20WT/GY FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN) 9-10 - 11 - 12 C18 20LB/BR A/C PRESSURE SIGNAL 13 C918 20BK/LB A/C PRESSURE GROUND 14 T751 20YL IGNITION START Component Location - 33 Component Location - 34 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 199 > Page 10399 Connector: Name : MODULE-TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER C8 Color : LT. GRAY # of pins : 12 Pin Circuit Description 1 A916 16RD FUSED B(+) Pin Circuit Description 1-2 A919 20RD FUSED B(+) Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 199 > Page 10400 3 A106 20LB/RD FUSED B(+) 4 F201 20PK/OR FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) 5 F100 20PK/VT FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN) 6 A100 14RD/VT FUSED B(+) 7 A210 12OR/RD FUSED B(+) 8 A940 18RD FUSED B(+) 9 A103 18GY/RD FUSED B(+) 10 L89 18WT/YL FOG LAMP CONTROL OUTPUT 11 L1 18WT/LG BACKUP LAMP FEED 12 A961 14RD FUEL HEATER CONTROL OUTPUT 12 C123 12LB/WT CONDENSER FAN CONTROL OUTPUT Component Location - 33 Component Location - 34 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 199 > Page 10401 Connector: Name : MODULE-TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER C9 Color : BLACK # of pins : 12 Pin Circuit Description 1 A111 16DG/RD FUSED B(+) 2 T750 14YL/GY STARTER MOTOR CONTROL OUTPUT 3 C3 20DB/YL A/C CLUTCH CONTROL OUTPUT 4 W4 16BR/OR WIPER MOTOR HIGH SPEED FEED 5 A114 18GY/RD FUSED B(+) Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 199 > Page 10402 6 F30 10PK/YL FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-ACC) 7-8 L7 20WT/YL FUSED PARK LAMP FEED 9 L678 18BR FUSED PARK LAMP FEED 10 L70 20WT/GY FUSED PARK LAMP FEED 11 - 12 A107 12TN/RD FUSED B(+) Component Location - 33 Component Location - 34 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 199 > Page 10403 Connector: Name : MODULE-TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER-EYELET Color : # of pins : 1 Qualifier : (DIESEL) Pin Circuit Description 1 A0 6RD B(+) Component Location - 33 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 199 > Page 10404 Component Location - 34 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 199 > Page 10405 Connector: Name : MODULE-TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER-EYELET Color : # of pins : 1 Qualifier : (GAS) Pin Circuit Description 1 A11 8LB B(+) Pin Circuit Description 1 A0 6RD B(+) Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 199 > Page 10406 Component Location - 33 Component Location - 34 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 199 > Page 10407 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Component ID 199 Power Distribution Module: Diagrams Component ID 199 Component ID: 199 Component : MODULE-TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER Connector: Name : MODULE-TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER C1 Color : LT. GRAY # of pins : 14 Pin Circuit Description 1 F1 20PK/WT FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (OFF-RUN-START) 2 T41 18YL/DB TRS T41 SIGNAL (P/N) 2 T41 20YL/DB TRS T41 SIGNAL (P/N) 2 T752 20DG/OR STARTER SOLENOID CONTROL 3-4 K31 20BR FUEL PUMP CONTROL 5 W7 20BR/GY WIPER PARK SWITCH SENSE 6-7-8 G932 20VT/TN WASHER FLUID SWITCH RETURN 9 W1 20BR/TN WASHER FLUID SWITCH SENSE 10 T515 20YL/DB TRANSMISSION CONTROL 11 G70 20VT/LB HOOD AJAR SWITCH SENSE 12 - 13 - 14 - Component Location - 33 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Component ID 199 > Page 10410 Component Location - 34 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Component ID 199 > Page 10411 Connector: Name : MODULE-TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER C10 Color : LT. GRAY # of pins : 22 Pin Circuit Description 1 K342 16BR/WT ASD CONTROL OUTPUT 2 A405 18RD/DB FUSED B(+) 3 A941 18RD FUSED B(+) 4-5 A104 20YL/RD FUSED B(+) Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Component ID 199 > Page 10412 6 A310 16RD/LB FUSED B(+) 7 C15 14DB/WT REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER CONTROL OUTPUT 8 F12 14PK/RD FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) 9 T16 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT 10 - 11 X22 18GY/LB HORN CONTROL OUTPUT 12 W3 18BR/WT WIPER LOW SPEED CONTROL OUTPUT 13 Z971 18BK GROUND 14 C16 18DB/GY HEATED MIRROR CONTROL OUTPUT 15 A212 20RD/OR FUSED B(+) 16 - - 17 A121 14RD/YL FUSED B(+) 18 A109 16OR/RD FUEL PUMP CONTROL OUTPUT 19 X21 18GY/YL HORN CONTROL OUTPUT 20 Z953 20BK GROUND 21 T41 20YL/DB TRS T41 SIGNAL (P/N) 22 A400 14TN/RD FUSED B(+) Component Location - 33 Component Location - 34 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Component ID 199 > Page 10413 Connector: Name : MODULE-TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER C2 Color : BLACK # of pins : 13 Pin Circuit Description 1-2 W10 20BR WASHER PUMP MOTOR CONTROL 3 F20 20PK/WT IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) 4 A72 20RD/OR ADJUSTABLE PEDALS OUTPUT 5-- Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Component ID 199 > Page 10414 6-7-8-9 G304 20VT/DB FRONT AXLE LOCK CONTROL 10 C13 20LB A/C CLUTCH CONTROL 10 C13 20LB/OR A/C CLUTCH CONTROL 11 K51 20BR/WT ASD CONTROL 12 B20 20DG/OR BRAKE FLUID LEVEL SWITCH SENSE 13 Z117 20BK/WT GROUND Component Location - 33 Component Location - 34 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Component ID 199 > Page 10415 Connector: Name : MODULE-TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER C3 Color : BLACK # of pins : 22 Pin Circuit Description 1 A209 10RD FUSED B(+) 2-3 F984 18PK/YL FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-ACC) 4-5 F983 20PK/YL FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-ACC) Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Component ID 199 > Page 10416 6 A205 18RD/OR FUSED B(+) 7-8 A944 20RD FUSED B(+) 9 A116 16YL/RD FUSED B(+) 10 A118 18RD/OR FUSED B(+) 11 - 12 A918 20RD FUSED B(+) 12 A918 16RD FUSED B(+) 13 F921 20PK/LB FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN) 14 F504 20GY/PK FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN) 15 F202 20PK/GY FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) 16 A930 16RD FUSED B(+) 17 F942 10PK/LG FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) 18 L673 18YL TRAILER TOW LEFT TURN RELAY OUTPUT 19 L674 18LG TRAILER TOW RIGHT TURN RELAY OUTPUT 20 F960 20PK/LG FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) 21 F21 20PK/DG FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) 22 F12 14PK/RD FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) Component Location - 33 Component Location - 34 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Component ID 199 > Page 10417 Connector: Name : MODULE-TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER C4 Color : LT. GRAY # of pins : 13 Pin Circuit Description 1 Z118 16BK/YL GROUND 2 T102 16YL SHIFT MOTOR CONTROL A 3 T101 16DG SHIFT MOTOR CONTROL B 4-5-- Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Component ID 199 > Page 10418 6-7-8 T300 20YL/GY T-CASE MOTOR BRAKE SIGNAL 9 T103 20YL/OR 5 VOLT SUPPLY 10 D201 20WT/DG MODE SENSOR A 11 G180 20VT/YL SENSOR RETURN 12 A880 20DB/RD FUSED B(+) 13 G303 20VT/DG FRONT AXLE LOCK SIGNAL Component Location - 33 Component Location - 34 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Component ID 199 > Page 10419 Connector: Name : MODULE-TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER C5 Color : BLACK # of pins : 10 Pin Circuit Description 1 L61 20WT/LG LEFT FRONT TURN LAMP DRIVER 2 L60 20WT/TN RIGHT FRONT TURN LAMP DRIVER 3 L34 20WT/GY RIGHT HIGH BEAM DRIVER 4 L43 20WT/DB LEFT LOW BEAM DRIVER 5 T340 20DG/VT INPUT SPEED SENSOR 2 (N3) SIGNAL Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Component ID 199 > Page 10420 6-7-8 G31 20VT/LG AAT SIGNAL 9 G930 20VT/TN AAT RETURN 10 T71 20YL/OR INPUT SPEED SENSOR 2 (N3) RETURN Component Location - 33 Component Location - 34 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Component ID 199 > Page 10421 Connector: Name : MODULE-TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER C6 Color : BROWN # of pins : 16 Pin Circuit Description 1 D65 20WT/LG CAN C BUS (+) 2 D52 20WT/LB DIAGNOSTIC CAN C (+) 3 D55 20WT/OR CAN B BUS (+) 4 L63 20WT/DG LEFT REAR TURN LAMP DRIVER 5-- Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Component ID 199 > Page 10422 6 L62 20WT/YL RIGHT REAR TURN LAMP DRIVER 7 L50 20WT/TN BRAKE LAMP SWITCH OUTPUT 8-9 D64 20WT/LB CAN C BUS (-) 10 D51 20WT/BR DIAGNOSTIC CAN C (-) 11 D54 20WT CAN B BUS (-) 12 - 13 - 14 - 15 T70 20YL INPUT SPEED SENSOR 1 (N2) SIGNAL 16 T341 20DG/VT INPUT SPEED SENSOR 1 (N2) RETURN Component Location - 33 Component Location - 34 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Component ID 199 > Page 10423 Connector: Name : MODULE-TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER C7 Color : BLUE # of pins : 14 Pin Circuit Description 1-2-3 L44 20WT/TN RIGHT LOW BEAM DRIVER 4 L33 20WT/LG LEFT HIGH BEAM DRIVER 5-- Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Component ID 199 > Page 10424 6-7 C818 20LB/OR A/C PRESSURE 5 VOLT SUPPLY 8 L10 20WT/GY FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN) 9-10 - 11 - 12 C18 20LB/BR A/C PRESSURE SIGNAL 13 C918 20BK/LB A/C PRESSURE GROUND 14 T751 20YL IGNITION START Component Location - 33 Component Location - 34 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Component ID 199 > Page 10425 Connector: Name : MODULE-TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER C8 Color : LT. GRAY # of pins : 12 Pin Circuit Description 1 A916 16RD FUSED B(+) Pin Circuit Description 1-2 A919 20RD FUSED B(+) Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Component ID 199 > Page 10426 3 A106 20LB/RD FUSED B(+) 4 F201 20PK/OR FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) 5 F100 20PK/VT FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN) 6 A100 14RD/VT FUSED B(+) 7 A210 12OR/RD FUSED B(+) 8 A940 18RD FUSED B(+) 9 A103 18GY/RD FUSED B(+) 10 L89 18WT/YL FOG LAMP CONTROL OUTPUT 11 L1 18WT/LG BACKUP LAMP FEED 12 A961 14RD FUEL HEATER CONTROL OUTPUT 12 C123 12LB/WT CONDENSER FAN CONTROL OUTPUT Component Location - 33 Component Location - 34 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Component ID 199 > Page 10427 Connector: Name : MODULE-TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER C9 Color : BLACK # of pins : 12 Pin Circuit Description 1 A111 16DG/RD FUSED B(+) 2 T750 14YL/GY STARTER MOTOR CONTROL OUTPUT 3 C3 20DB/YL A/C CLUTCH CONTROL OUTPUT 4 W4 16BR/OR WIPER MOTOR HIGH SPEED FEED 5 A114 18GY/RD FUSED B(+) Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Component ID 199 > Page 10428 6 F30 10PK/YL FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-ACC) 7-8 L7 20WT/YL FUSED PARK LAMP FEED 9 L678 18BR FUSED PARK LAMP FEED 10 L70 20WT/GY FUSED PARK LAMP FEED 11 - 12 A107 12TN/RD FUSED B(+) Component Location - 33 Component Location - 34 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Component ID 199 > Page 10429 Connector: Name : MODULE-TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER-EYELET Color : # of pins : 1 Qualifier : (DIESEL) Pin Circuit Description 1 A0 6RD B(+) Component Location - 33 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Component ID 199 > Page 10430 Component Location - 34 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Component ID 199 > Page 10431 Connector: Name : MODULE-TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER-EYELET Color : # of pins : 1 Qualifier : (GAS) Pin Circuit Description 1 A11 8LB B(+) Pin Circuit Description 1 A0 6RD B(+) Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Component ID 199 > Page 10432 Component Location - 33 Component Location - 34 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Component ID 199 > Page 10433 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Component ID 199 > Page 10434 Power Distribution Module: Diagrams Component ID 215 Component ID: 215 Component : MODULE-TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER Connector: Name : MODULE-TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER C1 Color : LT. GRAY # of pins : 14 Pin Circuit Description 1 F1 20PK/WT FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (OFF-RUN-START) 2 T41 18YL/DB TRS T41 SIGNAL (P/N) 2 T41 20YL/DB TRS T41 SIGNAL (P/N) 2 T752 20DG/OR STARTER SOLENOID CONTROL 3-4 K31 20BR FUEL PUMP CONTROL 5 W7 20BR/GY WIPER PARK SWITCH SENSE 6-7-8 G932 20VT/TN WASHER FLUID SWITCH RETURN 9 W1 20BR/TN WASHER FLUID SWITCH SENSE 10 T515 20YL/DB TRANSMISSION CONTROL 11 G70 20VT/LB HOOD AJAR SWITCH SENSE 12 - 13 - 14 - Component Location - 33 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Component ID 199 > Page 10435 Component Location - 34 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Component ID 199 > Page 10436 Connector: Name : MODULE-TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER C10 Color : LT. GRAY # of pins : 22 Pin Circuit Description 1 K342 16BR/WT ASD CONTROL OUTPUT 2 A405 18RD/DB FUSED B(+) 3 A941 18RD FUSED B(+) 4-5 A104 20YL/RD FUSED B(+) Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Component ID 199 > Page 10437 6 A310 16RD/LB FUSED B(+) 7 C15 14DB/WT REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER CONTROL OUTPUT 8 F12 14PK/RD FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) 9 T16 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT 10 - 11 X22 18GY/LB HORN CONTROL OUTPUT 12 W3 18BR/WT WIPER LOW SPEED CONTROL OUTPUT 13 Z971 18BK GROUND 14 C16 18DB/GY HEATED MIRROR CONTROL OUTPUT 15 A212 20RD/OR FUSED B(+) 16 - - 17 A121 14RD/YL FUSED B(+) 18 A109 16OR/RD FUEL PUMP CONTROL OUTPUT 19 X21 18GY/YL HORN CONTROL OUTPUT 20 Z953 20BK GROUND 21 T41 20YL/DB TRS T41 SIGNAL (P/N) 22 A400 14TN/RD FUSED B(+) Component Location - 33 Component Location - 34 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Component ID 199 > Page 10438 Connector: Name : MODULE-TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER C2 Color : BLACK # of pins : 13 Pin Circuit Description 1-2 W10 20BR WASHER PUMP MOTOR CONTROL 3 F20 20PK/WT IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) 4 A72 20RD/OR ADJUSTABLE PEDALS OUTPUT 5-- Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Component ID 199 > Page 10439 6-7-8-9 G304 20VT/DB FRONT AXLE LOCK CONTROL 10 C13 20LB A/C CLUTCH CONTROL 10 C13 20LB/OR A/C CLUTCH CONTROL 11 K51 20BR/WT ASD CONTROL 12 B20 20DG/OR BRAKE FLUID LEVEL SWITCH SENSE 13 Z117 20BK/WT GROUND Component Location - 33 Component Location - 34 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Component ID 199 > Page 10440 Connector: Name : MODULE-TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER C3 Color : BLACK # of pins : 22 Pin Circuit Description 1 A209 10RD FUSED B(+) 2-3 F984 18PK/YL FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-ACC) 4-5 F983 20PK/YL FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-ACC) Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Component ID 199 > Page 10441 6 A205 18RD/OR FUSED B(+) 7-8 A944 20RD FUSED B(+) 9 A116 16YL/RD FUSED B(+) 10 A118 18RD/OR FUSED B(+) 11 - 12 A918 20RD FUSED B(+) 12 A918 16RD FUSED B(+) 13 F921 20PK/LB FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN) 14 F504 20GY/PK FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN) 15 F202 20PK/GY FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) 16 A930 16RD FUSED B(+) 17 F942 10PK/LG FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) 18 L673 18YL TRAILER TOW LEFT TURN RELAY OUTPUT 19 L674 18LG TRAILER TOW RIGHT TURN RELAY OUTPUT 20 F960 20PK/LG FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) 21 F21 20PK/DG FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) 22 F12 14PK/RD FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) Component Location - 33 Component Location - 34 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Component ID 199 > Page 10442 Connector: Name : MODULE-TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER C4 Color : LT. GRAY # of pins : 13 Pin Circuit Description 1 Z118 16BK/YL GROUND 2 T102 16YL SHIFT MOTOR CONTROL A 3 T101 16DG SHIFT MOTOR CONTROL B 4-5-- Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Component ID 199 > Page 10443 6-7-8 T300 20YL/GY T-CASE MOTOR BRAKE SIGNAL 9 T103 20YL/OR 5 VOLT SUPPLY 10 D201 20WT/DG MODE SENSOR A 11 G180 20VT/YL SENSOR RETURN 12 A880 20DB/RD FUSED B(+) 13 G303 20VT/DG FRONT AXLE LOCK SIGNAL Component Location - 33 Component Location - 34 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Component ID 199 > Page 10444 Connector: Name : MODULE-TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER C5 Color : BLACK # of pins : 10 Pin Circuit Description 1 L61 20WT/LG LEFT FRONT TURN LAMP DRIVER 2 L60 20WT/TN RIGHT FRONT TURN LAMP DRIVER 3 L34 20WT/GY RIGHT HIGH BEAM DRIVER 4 L43 20WT/DB LEFT LOW BEAM DRIVER 5 T340 20DG/VT INPUT SPEED SENSOR 2 (N3) SIGNAL Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Component ID 199 > Page 10445 6-7-8 G31 20VT/LG AAT SIGNAL 9 G930 20VT/TN AAT RETURN 10 T71 20YL/OR INPUT SPEED SENSOR 2 (N3) RETURN Component Location - 33 Component Location - 34 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Component ID 199 > Page 10446 Connector: Name : MODULE-TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER C6 Color : BROWN # of pins : 16 Pin Circuit Description 1 D65 20WT/LG CAN C BUS (+) 2 D52 20WT/LB DIAGNOSTIC CAN C (+) 3 D55 20WT/OR CAN B BUS (+) 4 L63 20WT/DG LEFT REAR TURN LAMP DRIVER 5-- Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Component ID 199 > Page 10447 6 L62 20WT/YL RIGHT REAR TURN LAMP DRIVER 7 L50 20WT/TN BRAKE LAMP SWITCH OUTPUT 8-9 D64 20WT/LB CAN C BUS (-) 10 D51 20WT/BR DIAGNOSTIC CAN C (-) 11 D54 20WT CAN B BUS (-) 12 - 13 - 14 - 15 T70 20YL INPUT SPEED SENSOR 1 (N2) SIGNAL 16 T341 20DG/VT INPUT SPEED SENSOR 1 (N2) RETURN Component Location - 33 Component Location - 34 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Component ID 199 > Page 10448 Connector: Name : MODULE-TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER C7 Color : BLUE # of pins : 14 Pin Circuit Description 1-2-3 L44 20WT/TN RIGHT LOW BEAM DRIVER 4 L33 20WT/LG LEFT HIGH BEAM DRIVER 5-- Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Component ID 199 > Page 10449 6-7 C818 20LB/OR A/C PRESSURE 5 VOLT SUPPLY 8 L10 20WT/GY FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN) 9-10 - 11 - 12 C18 20LB/BR A/C PRESSURE SIGNAL 13 C918 20BK/LB A/C PRESSURE GROUND 14 T751 20YL IGNITION START Component Location - 33 Component Location - 34 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Component ID 199 > Page 10450 Connector: Name : MODULE-TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER C8 Color : LT. GRAY # of pins : 12 Pin Circuit Description 1 A916 16RD FUSED B(+) Pin Circuit Description 1-2 A919 20RD FUSED B(+) Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Component ID 199 > Page 10451 3 A106 20LB/RD FUSED B(+) 4 F201 20PK/OR FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) 5 F100 20PK/VT FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN) 6 A100 14RD/VT FUSED B(+) 7 A210 12OR/RD FUSED B(+) 8 A940 18RD FUSED B(+) 9 A103 18GY/RD FUSED B(+) 10 L89 18WT/YL FOG LAMP CONTROL OUTPUT 11 L1 18WT/LG BACKUP LAMP FEED 12 A961 14RD FUEL HEATER CONTROL OUTPUT 12 C123 12LB/WT CONDENSER FAN CONTROL OUTPUT Component Location - 33 Component Location - 34 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Component ID 199 > Page 10452 Connector: Name : MODULE-TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER C9 Color : BLACK # of pins : 12 Pin Circuit Description 1 A111 16DG/RD FUSED B(+) 2 T750 14YL/GY STARTER MOTOR CONTROL OUTPUT 3 C3 20DB/YL A/C CLUTCH CONTROL OUTPUT 4 W4 16BR/OR WIPER MOTOR HIGH SPEED FEED 5 A114 18GY/RD FUSED B(+) Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Component ID 199 > Page 10453 6 F30 10PK/YL FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-ACC) 7-8 L7 20WT/YL FUSED PARK LAMP FEED 9 L678 18BR FUSED PARK LAMP FEED 10 L70 20WT/GY FUSED PARK LAMP FEED 11 - 12 A107 12TN/RD FUSED B(+) Component Location - 33 Component Location - 34 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Component ID 199 > Page 10454 Connector: Name : MODULE-TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER-EYELET Color : # of pins : 1 Qualifier : (DIESEL) Pin Circuit Description 1 A0 6RD B(+) Component Location - 33 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Component ID 199 > Page 10455 Component Location - 34 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Component ID 199 > Page 10456 Connector: Name : MODULE-TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER-EYELET Color : # of pins : 1 Qualifier : (GAS) Pin Circuit Description 1 A11 8LB B(+) Pin Circuit Description 1 A0 6RD B(+) Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Component ID 199 > Page 10457 Component Location - 33 Component Location - 34 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Component ID 199 > Page 10458 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Power Distribution Module: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The Totally Integrated Power Module (2)(TIPM) is a combination unit that performs the functions of the Power Distribution Center (PDC) and the Front Control Module. The TIPM is a printed circuit board based module that contains fuses, internal relays and a microprocessor that performs the functions previously executed by the FCM. The TIPM (2) is located in the engine compartment, next to the battery (1) and connects directly to the B+ cable (5) via a stud located on top of the unit. The ground connection is via electrical connectors. The TIPM provides the primary means of voltage distribution and protection for the entire vehicle. The molded plastic TIPM housing includes a base and cover. The TIPM cover is easily opened or removed for service and has a fuse and relay layout map integral to the inside surface of the cover. The TIPM housing base and cover are secured in place via mounting tabs. The mounting tabs secure the TIPM (2) to the battery tray mounting bracket (3). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 10461 Power Distribution Module: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION All of the current from the battery and the generator output enters the Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) via a stud on the top of the module. The TIPM cover is removed to access the fuses or relays. Internal connections of all of the power distribution center circuits is accomplished by a combination of bus bars and a printed circuit board. For a complete wiring diagram Refer to Diagrams/Electrical. The wiring information includes wiring diagrams, proper wire and connector repair procedures, details of wire harness routing and retention, connector pin-out information and location views for the various wire harness connectors, splices and grounds. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Power Distribution Module: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. 2. Remove the B+ terminal nut (6) from the Totally Integrated Power Module (2)(TIPM) B+ terminal. Remove the B+ cable (5) from the TIPM (2). 3. Using a suitable flat blade tool, disengage the TIPM (2) upper retaining tabs from the battery tray bracket (3). 4. Grasp the TIPM (1) and rotate the assembly up to free it from its mounting bracket (3). Position the assembly upside down to access the electrical connectors located on the bottom of the unit. 5. Disconnect the electrical connectors (2) by depressing the locking tab and rotating the connector arm outboard, until the connector is free from the Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 10464 TIPM assembly (1). Be certain to pull the connectors straight off. 6. Remove the TIPM (1) from the vehicle. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 10465 Power Distribution Module: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION 1. Position the Totally Integrated Power Module (1)(TIPM) into the vehicle. NOTE: Totally Integrated power module electrical connectors are color coded to ease location reference. 2. Connect the electrical connectors (2) by pushing straight on and rotating the connector arm inboard, until the connector is firmly locked in place on the TIPM assembly (1). 3. Turn the TIPM (1) so that the connector side is facing down. Install the assembly onto the TIPM battery tray bracket (3) making sure to line up the lower retaining tab with the retaining slot in the tray (1). 4. Push the TIPM (1) downward to lock the upper retaining clips into the bracket (3). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 10466 5. Install the B+ terminal cable (5) and nut (6) on the B+ terminal of the TIPM (2). 6. Connect the battery negative cable. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Power Distribution Module: > 08-007-08A > Jul > 08 > Antitheft System - Engine No Crank/No Start Condition Power Distribution Module: Customer Interest Antitheft System - Engine No Crank/No Start Condition NUMBER: 08-007-08 REV. A GROUP: Electrical DATE: July 04,2008 THIS BULLETIN SUPERSEDES TECHNICAL SERVICE BULLETIN 08-007-08, DATED MARCH 04, 2008. THIS IS A COMPLETE REVISION AND NO ASTERISKS HAVE BEEN USED TO HIGHLIGHT REVISIONS. DO NOT ORDER PART NUMBER 05026070AP UNTIL JULY 21, 2008. ALL OTHER PART NUMBERS ARE AVAILABLE NOW. SUBJECT: No Engine Crank Or No Engine Start Due To Electronic Lockup Of The WCM / SKREEM OVERVIEW: This bulletin involves the replacement of the Wireless Control Module (WCM), and if equipped, the replacement of the Electric Steering Column Lock (ELV). The WCM is also referred to as the Sentry Key Remote Entry Module (SKREEM). MODELS: 2007 - 2008 (DR/DH/D1/DC/DM) Ram Truck (1500/2500/3500/4500/5500) 2007 - 2008 (JK) Wrangler 2007 - 2008 (J1) Sebring (China) 2007 - 2008 (JS) Avenger/Sebring 2007 - 2008 (KA) Nitro 2008 (KK) Liberty/Cherokee 2007 - 2008 (MK) Compass/Patriot 2007 - 2008 (PM) Caliber 2006 - 2008 (PT) Chrysler PT Cruiser NOTE: This bulletin applies to vehicles built on or before May 05, 2008 (MDH 0505XX). SYMPTOM/CONDITION: The customer will experience a no engine crank AND a no engine start condition. Also, the remote keyless entry (RKE) system will not operate. This condition may be due to an electrostatic discharge (ESD) from the ignition key into the Wireless Control Module (WCM), causing the WCM to electronically lockup. This condition may occur more frequently in dry and/or cold weather conditions where a sufficient electrostatic charge is more easily produced. This condition is corrected by the replacement of the WCM. DIAGNOSIS: 1. With the condition present (i.e. the vehicle in the no crank / no start condition), connect the StarSCAN(R) scan tool to the vehicle. 2. Turn the ignition switch to the "ON position, and power up the StarSCAN(R). 3. If the WCM is electronically locked up, the StarSCAN(R) will display the WCM as being "off bus". 4. If the no crank / no start condition is present, and the WCM is "off bus", then reset the WCM by temporarily removing the IOD fuse (with the key out of the ignition switch), wait for 10 seconds and then reinstall the IOD fuse. 5. With the IOD fuse reset having been performed, verify that the vehicle will now crank, start, and run. 6. If the condition is temporarily corrected by performing the above steps, and if the part number of the WCM is earlier than the part number of the WCM listed in the part reference table in the Service Bulletin Parts Required Section below, then perform the Repair Procedure. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Power Distribution Module: > 08-007-08A > Jul > 08 > Antitheft System - Engine No Crank/No Start Condition > Page 10476 PARTS REQUIRED: NOTE: The part numbers listed in the following part reference table are to be used as A GUIDE to help determine if the WCM, that is currently in the vehicle, may require replacement. If it is determined that the WCM requires replacement, then ALWAYS REFER TO THE PARTS MANUAL to determine the correct WCM for the specific vehicle in question. In some earlier model years, the WCM may rule (supersede) to one of the part numbers listed in the table. ALWAYS REFER TO THE PARTS MANUAL (not the part reference table) to determine the correct part number ruling (supercedence / substitution). MAKE CERTAIN THAT THE CORRECT WCM IS ORDERED THE FIRST TIME FOR THE SPECIFIC VEHICLE IN QUESTION. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Power Distribution Module: > 08-007-08A > Jul > 08 > Antitheft System - Engine No Crank/No Start Condition > Page 10477 REPAIR PROCEDURE: NOTE: If the vehicle (a JS model vehicle in certain International markets) is equipped with an Electric Steering Column Lock (ELV), then the WCM and the ELV must be replaced. Replace the WCM and then the ELV. Next program the WCM and at least one (1) ignition key BEFORE programming the ELV. IMPORTANT: Not following this repair process correctly will cause the new ELV to fail. NOTE: Insert the ignition key into the ignition lock cylinder. This will move the shaft lock module locking bolt to the unlocked position. LEAVE the key in the lock cylinder while the shaft lock module is being removed. 1. If vehicle is equipped with a Steering Shaft Lock Module (JS - Avenger I Stratus - some International Markets), then the Shaft Lock Module will require replacement. From the Service Info tab select: 8 - Electrical > Vehicle Theft Security - Security Information > Module, Shaft Lock > Removal and Installation. NOTE: The shaft lock module cannot be removed from the steering column while the locking bolt is in the locked position without irreversibly damaging the column. Before attempting service, the ignition key must have been inserted into the ignition lock cylinder. Then rotate the steering wheel from side to side. If the steering wheel can be rotated, the locking bolt is in the unlocked position. Leave the key in the ignition lock cylinder until shaft lock module removal has been completed. If the steering wheel cannot be rotated, test and repair the wiring circuits between the module and the ignition switch as required. If no problem is found in these circuits, the module has failed with the locking bolt in the locked position and both the module and the steering column must be replaced with new units. 2. Replace the WCM/SKREEM. Refer to TechCONNECT for detailed service information. From the Service Info tab select: 8 - Electrical > Vehicle Theft Security - Service Information > Module, Sentry Key Remote Entry > Removal and Installation. NOTE: Obtain the vehicle PIN number prior to programming WCM/SKREEM or ELV. NOTE: If during the following steps the PIN number is properly entered but is rejected, then reenter the PIN number again until it is accepted. 3. After both the WCM/SKREEM and the ELV (if equipped) have been replaced, Program the WCM/SKREEM as follows: a. Turn the ignition key to the ON position, (Engine Off) b. Connect the scan tool (StarSCAN(R)) to the data link connector and turn the ignition to the RUN position, (engine off). c. Select "ECU View." d. Scroll down and select "WCM" in the list of modules. e. Select "Misc. Functions." f. Scroll to "WCM Replaced." g. Press "Start". h. Press "Next". i. Select "Show Keyboard". j. Enter the vehicle PIN number. k. Select "Next". l. Verify PIN is correct. m. Select "Next". n. Follow on-screen prompts to complete WCM function programing for Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPM) and so on. 0. Turn the ignition key to the OFF position. Wait 30 seconds. p. Turn the ignition key to the ON position, (Engine Off) Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Power Distribution Module: > 08-007-08A > Jul > 08 > Antitheft System - Engine No Crank/No Start Condition > Page 10478 q. Select "ECU View". r. Scroll down and select "WCM" in the list of modules. s. Select "Misc. Functions." t. Select "Program Ign. Keys" and follow on-screen prompts. u. Select "Complete". v. Verify ignition key will start vehicle and the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) functions operate. CAUTION: If the vehicle is equipped with a Shaft Lock Module (used in some International Markets on JS model vehicles), then at least one (1 ignition key must have been programmed to the new WCM BEFORE the new Shaft Lock Module is "married" to the new WCM. 4. Is the vehicle equipped with Steering Shaft Lock Module (ELV)? a. Yes >> Proceed to Step # 5. b. No >>Repair is complete. 5. Program the ELV as follows; a. Select "ECU View". b. Scroll down and select "WCM" in the list of modules. c. Select "Misc. Functions". d. Scroll to "ELV Replaced." e. Press "Start". f. When complete, verify steering shaft lock mechanism is operating. Remove and insert key from the ignition lock cylinder and listen for solenoid "click at lower end of column. POLICY: Reimbursable within the provisions of the warranty. TIME ALLOWANCE: Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Power Distribution Module: > 08-007-08A > Jul > 08 > Antitheft System - Engine No Crank/No Start Condition > Page 10479 FAILURE CODE: Disclaimer: This bulletin is supplied as technical information only and is not an authorization for repair. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Power Distribution Module: > 08-007-08A > Jul > 08 > Antitheft System - Engine No Crank/No Start Condition Power Distribution Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Antitheft System - Engine No Crank/No Start Condition NUMBER: 08-007-08 REV. A GROUP: Electrical DATE: July 04,2008 THIS BULLETIN SUPERSEDES TECHNICAL SERVICE BULLETIN 08-007-08, DATED MARCH 04, 2008. THIS IS A COMPLETE REVISION AND NO ASTERISKS HAVE BEEN USED TO HIGHLIGHT REVISIONS. DO NOT ORDER PART NUMBER 05026070AP UNTIL JULY 21, 2008. ALL OTHER PART NUMBERS ARE AVAILABLE NOW. SUBJECT: No Engine Crank Or No Engine Start Due To Electronic Lockup Of The WCM / SKREEM OVERVIEW: This bulletin involves the replacement of the Wireless Control Module (WCM), and if equipped, the replacement of the Electric Steering Column Lock (ELV). The WCM is also referred to as the Sentry Key Remote Entry Module (SKREEM). MODELS: 2007 - 2008 (DR/DH/D1/DC/DM) Ram Truck (1500/2500/3500/4500/5500) 2007 - 2008 (JK) Wrangler 2007 - 2008 (J1) Sebring (China) 2007 - 2008 (JS) Avenger/Sebring 2007 - 2008 (KA) Nitro 2008 (KK) Liberty/Cherokee 2007 - 2008 (MK) Compass/Patriot 2007 - 2008 (PM) Caliber 2006 - 2008 (PT) Chrysler PT Cruiser NOTE: This bulletin applies to vehicles built on or before May 05, 2008 (MDH 0505XX). SYMPTOM/CONDITION: The customer will experience a no engine crank AND a no engine start condition. Also, the remote keyless entry (RKE) system will not operate. This condition may be due to an electrostatic discharge (ESD) from the ignition key into the Wireless Control Module (WCM), causing the WCM to electronically lockup. This condition may occur more frequently in dry and/or cold weather conditions where a sufficient electrostatic charge is more easily produced. This condition is corrected by the replacement of the WCM. DIAGNOSIS: 1. With the condition present (i.e. the vehicle in the no crank / no start condition), connect the StarSCAN(R) scan tool to the vehicle. 2. Turn the ignition switch to the "ON position, and power up the StarSCAN(R). 3. If the WCM is electronically locked up, the StarSCAN(R) will display the WCM as being "off bus". 4. If the no crank / no start condition is present, and the WCM is "off bus", then reset the WCM by temporarily removing the IOD fuse (with the key out of the ignition switch), wait for 10 seconds and then reinstall the IOD fuse. 5. With the IOD fuse reset having been performed, verify that the vehicle will now crank, start, and run. 6. If the condition is temporarily corrected by performing the above steps, and if the part number of the WCM is earlier than the part number of the WCM listed in the part reference table in the Service Bulletin Parts Required Section below, then perform the Repair Procedure. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Power Distribution Module: > 08-007-08A > Jul > 08 > Antitheft System - Engine No Crank/No Start Condition > Page 10485 PARTS REQUIRED: NOTE: The part numbers listed in the following part reference table are to be used as A GUIDE to help determine if the WCM, that is currently in the vehicle, may require replacement. If it is determined that the WCM requires replacement, then ALWAYS REFER TO THE PARTS MANUAL to determine the correct WCM for the specific vehicle in question. In some earlier model years, the WCM may rule (supersede) to one of the part numbers listed in the table. ALWAYS REFER TO THE PARTS MANUAL (not the part reference table) to determine the correct part number ruling (supercedence / substitution). MAKE CERTAIN THAT THE CORRECT WCM IS ORDERED THE FIRST TIME FOR THE SPECIFIC VEHICLE IN QUESTION. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Power Distribution Module: > 08-007-08A > Jul > 08 > Antitheft System - Engine No Crank/No Start Condition > Page 10486 REPAIR PROCEDURE: NOTE: If the vehicle (a JS model vehicle in certain International markets) is equipped with an Electric Steering Column Lock (ELV), then the WCM and the ELV must be replaced. Replace the WCM and then the ELV. Next program the WCM and at least one (1) ignition key BEFORE programming the ELV. IMPORTANT: Not following this repair process correctly will cause the new ELV to fail. NOTE: Insert the ignition key into the ignition lock cylinder. This will move the shaft lock module locking bolt to the unlocked position. LEAVE the key in the lock cylinder while the shaft lock module is being removed. 1. If vehicle is equipped with a Steering Shaft Lock Module (JS - Avenger I Stratus - some International Markets), then the Shaft Lock Module will require replacement. From the Service Info tab select: 8 - Electrical > Vehicle Theft Security - Security Information > Module, Shaft Lock > Removal and Installation. NOTE: The shaft lock module cannot be removed from the steering column while the locking bolt is in the locked position without irreversibly damaging the column. Before attempting service, the ignition key must have been inserted into the ignition lock cylinder. Then rotate the steering wheel from side to side. If the steering wheel can be rotated, the locking bolt is in the unlocked position. Leave the key in the ignition lock cylinder until shaft lock module removal has been completed. If the steering wheel cannot be rotated, test and repair the wiring circuits between the module and the ignition switch as required. If no problem is found in these circuits, the module has failed with the locking bolt in the locked position and both the module and the steering column must be replaced with new units. 2. Replace the WCM/SKREEM. Refer to TechCONNECT for detailed service information. From the Service Info tab select: 8 - Electrical > Vehicle Theft Security - Service Information > Module, Sentry Key Remote Entry > Removal and Installation. NOTE: Obtain the vehicle PIN number prior to programming WCM/SKREEM or ELV. NOTE: If during the following steps the PIN number is properly entered but is rejected, then reenter the PIN number again until it is accepted. 3. After both the WCM/SKREEM and the ELV (if equipped) have been replaced, Program the WCM/SKREEM as follows: a. Turn the ignition key to the ON position, (Engine Off) b. Connect the scan tool (StarSCAN(R)) to the data link connector and turn the ignition to the RUN position, (engine off). c. Select "ECU View." d. Scroll down and select "WCM" in the list of modules. e. Select "Misc. Functions." f. Scroll to "WCM Replaced." g. Press "Start". h. Press "Next". i. Select "Show Keyboard". j. Enter the vehicle PIN number. k. Select "Next". l. Verify PIN is correct. m. Select "Next". n. Follow on-screen prompts to complete WCM function programing for Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPM) and so on. 0. Turn the ignition key to the OFF position. Wait 30 seconds. p. Turn the ignition key to the ON position, (Engine Off) Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Power Distribution Module: > 08-007-08A > Jul > 08 > Antitheft System - Engine No Crank/No Start Condition > Page 10487 q. Select "ECU View". r. Scroll down and select "WCM" in the list of modules. s. Select "Misc. Functions." t. Select "Program Ign. Keys" and follow on-screen prompts. u. Select "Complete". v. Verify ignition key will start vehicle and the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) functions operate. CAUTION: If the vehicle is equipped with a Shaft Lock Module (used in some International Markets on JS model vehicles), then at least one (1 ignition key must have been programmed to the new WCM BEFORE the new Shaft Lock Module is "married" to the new WCM. 4. Is the vehicle equipped with Steering Shaft Lock Module (ELV)? a. Yes >> Proceed to Step # 5. b. No >>Repair is complete. 5. Program the ELV as follows; a. Select "ECU View". b. Scroll down and select "WCM" in the list of modules. c. Select "Misc. Functions". d. Scroll to "ELV Replaced." e. Press "Start". f. When complete, verify steering shaft lock mechanism is operating. Remove and insert key from the ignition lock cylinder and listen for solenoid "click at lower end of column. POLICY: Reimbursable within the provisions of the warranty. TIME ALLOWANCE: Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Power Distribution Module: > 08-007-08A > Jul > 08 > Antitheft System - Engine No Crank/No Start Condition > Page 10488 FAILURE CODE: Disclaimer: This bulletin is supplied as technical information only and is not an authorization for repair. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 199 Power Distribution Module: Locations Component ID 199 Component ID: 199 Component : MODULE-TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER Connector: Name : MODULE-TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER C1 Color : LT. GRAY # of pins : 14 Pin Circuit Description 1 F1 20PK/WT FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (OFF-RUN-START) 2 T41 18YL/DB TRS T41 SIGNAL (P/N) 2 T41 20YL/DB TRS T41 SIGNAL (P/N) 2 T752 20DG/OR STARTER SOLENOID CONTROL 3-4 K31 20BR FUEL PUMP CONTROL 5 W7 20BR/GY WIPER PARK SWITCH SENSE 6-7-8 G932 20VT/TN WASHER FLUID SWITCH RETURN 9 W1 20BR/TN WASHER FLUID SWITCH SENSE 10 T515 20YL/DB TRANSMISSION CONTROL 11 G70 20VT/LB HOOD AJAR SWITCH SENSE 12 - 13 - 14 - Component Location - 33 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 199 > Page 10491 Component Location - 34 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 199 > Page 10492 Connector: Name : MODULE-TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER C10 Color : LT. GRAY # of pins : 22 Pin Circuit Description 1 K342 16BR/WT ASD CONTROL OUTPUT 2 A405 18RD/DB FUSED B(+) 3 A941 18RD FUSED B(+) 4-5 A104 20YL/RD FUSED B(+) Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 199 > Page 10493 6 A310 16RD/LB FUSED B(+) 7 C15 14DB/WT REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER CONTROL OUTPUT 8 F12 14PK/RD FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) 9 T16 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT 10 - 11 X22 18GY/LB HORN CONTROL OUTPUT 12 W3 18BR/WT WIPER LOW SPEED CONTROL OUTPUT 13 Z971 18BK GROUND 14 C16 18DB/GY HEATED MIRROR CONTROL OUTPUT 15 A212 20RD/OR FUSED B(+) 16 - - 17 A121 14RD/YL FUSED B(+) 18 A109 16OR/RD FUEL PUMP CONTROL OUTPUT 19 X21 18GY/YL HORN CONTROL OUTPUT 20 Z953 20BK GROUND 21 T41 20YL/DB TRS T41 SIGNAL (P/N) 22 A400 14TN/RD FUSED B(+) Component Location - 33 Component Location - 34 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 199 > Page 10494 Connector: Name : MODULE-TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER C2 Color : BLACK # of pins : 13 Pin Circuit Description 1-2 W10 20BR WASHER PUMP MOTOR CONTROL 3 F20 20PK/WT IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) 4 A72 20RD/OR ADJUSTABLE PEDALS OUTPUT 5-- Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 199 > Page 10495 6-7-8-9 G304 20VT/DB FRONT AXLE LOCK CONTROL 10 C13 20LB A/C CLUTCH CONTROL 10 C13 20LB/OR A/C CLUTCH CONTROL 11 K51 20BR/WT ASD CONTROL 12 B20 20DG/OR BRAKE FLUID LEVEL SWITCH SENSE 13 Z117 20BK/WT GROUND Component Location - 33 Component Location - 34 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 199 > Page 10496 Connector: Name : MODULE-TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER C3 Color : BLACK # of pins : 22 Pin Circuit Description 1 A209 10RD FUSED B(+) 2-3 F984 18PK/YL FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-ACC) 4-5 F983 20PK/YL FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-ACC) Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 199 > Page 10497 6 A205 18RD/OR FUSED B(+) 7-8 A944 20RD FUSED B(+) 9 A116 16YL/RD FUSED B(+) 10 A118 18RD/OR FUSED B(+) 11 - 12 A918 20RD FUSED B(+) 12 A918 16RD FUSED B(+) 13 F921 20PK/LB FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN) 14 F504 20GY/PK FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN) 15 F202 20PK/GY FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) 16 A930 16RD FUSED B(+) 17 F942 10PK/LG FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) 18 L673 18YL TRAILER TOW LEFT TURN RELAY OUTPUT 19 L674 18LG TRAILER TOW RIGHT TURN RELAY OUTPUT 20 F960 20PK/LG FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) 21 F21 20PK/DG FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) 22 F12 14PK/RD FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) Component Location - 33 Component Location - 34 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 199 > Page 10498 Connector: Name : MODULE-TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER C4 Color : LT. GRAY # of pins : 13 Pin Circuit Description 1 Z118 16BK/YL GROUND 2 T102 16YL SHIFT MOTOR CONTROL A 3 T101 16DG SHIFT MOTOR CONTROL B 4-5-- Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 199 > Page 10499 6-7-8 T300 20YL/GY T-CASE MOTOR BRAKE SIGNAL 9 T103 20YL/OR 5 VOLT SUPPLY 10 D201 20WT/DG MODE SENSOR A 11 G180 20VT/YL SENSOR RETURN 12 A880 20DB/RD FUSED B(+) 13 G303 20VT/DG FRONT AXLE LOCK SIGNAL Component Location - 33 Component Location - 34 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 199 > Page 10500 Connector: Name : MODULE-TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER C5 Color : BLACK # of pins : 10 Pin Circuit Description 1 L61 20WT/LG LEFT FRONT TURN LAMP DRIVER 2 L60 20WT/TN RIGHT FRONT TURN LAMP DRIVER 3 L34 20WT/GY RIGHT HIGH BEAM DRIVER 4 L43 20WT/DB LEFT LOW BEAM DRIVER 5 T340 20DG/VT INPUT SPEED SENSOR 2 (N3) SIGNAL Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 199 > Page 10501 6-7-8 G31 20VT/LG AAT SIGNAL 9 G930 20VT/TN AAT RETURN 10 T71 20YL/OR INPUT SPEED SENSOR 2 (N3) RETURN Component Location - 33 Component Location - 34 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 199 > Page 10502 Connector: Name : MODULE-TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER C6 Color : BROWN # of pins : 16 Pin Circuit Description 1 D65 20WT/LG CAN C BUS (+) 2 D52 20WT/LB DIAGNOSTIC CAN C (+) 3 D55 20WT/OR CAN B BUS (+) 4 L63 20WT/DG LEFT REAR TURN LAMP DRIVER 5-- Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 199 > Page 10503 6 L62 20WT/YL RIGHT REAR TURN LAMP DRIVER 7 L50 20WT/TN BRAKE LAMP SWITCH OUTPUT 8-9 D64 20WT/LB CAN C BUS (-) 10 D51 20WT/BR DIAGNOSTIC CAN C (-) 11 D54 20WT CAN B BUS (-) 12 - 13 - 14 - 15 T70 20YL INPUT SPEED SENSOR 1 (N2) SIGNAL 16 T341 20DG/VT INPUT SPEED SENSOR 1 (N2) RETURN Component Location - 33 Component Location - 34 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 199 > Page 10504 Connector: Name : MODULE-TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER C7 Color : BLUE # of pins : 14 Pin Circuit Description 1-2-3 L44 20WT/TN RIGHT LOW BEAM DRIVER 4 L33 20WT/LG LEFT HIGH BEAM DRIVER 5-- Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 199 > Page 10505 6-7 C818 20LB/OR A/C PRESSURE 5 VOLT SUPPLY 8 L10 20WT/GY FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN) 9-10 - 11 - 12 C18 20LB/BR A/C PRESSURE SIGNAL 13 C918 20BK/LB A/C PRESSURE GROUND 14 T751 20YL IGNITION START Component Location - 33 Component Location - 34 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 199 > Page 10506 Connector: Name : MODULE-TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER C8 Color : LT. GRAY # of pins : 12 Pin Circuit Description 1 A916 16RD FUSED B(+) Pin Circuit Description 1-2 A919 20RD FUSED B(+) Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 199 > Page 10507 3 A106 20LB/RD FUSED B(+) 4 F201 20PK/OR FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) 5 F100 20PK/VT FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN) 6 A100 14RD/VT FUSED B(+) 7 A210 12OR/RD FUSED B(+) 8 A940 18RD FUSED B(+) 9 A103 18GY/RD FUSED B(+) 10 L89 18WT/YL FOG LAMP CONTROL OUTPUT 11 L1 18WT/LG BACKUP LAMP FEED 12 A961 14RD FUEL HEATER CONTROL OUTPUT 12 C123 12LB/WT CONDENSER FAN CONTROL OUTPUT Component Location - 33 Component Location - 34 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 199 > Page 10508 Connector: Name : MODULE-TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER C9 Color : BLACK # of pins : 12 Pin Circuit Description 1 A111 16DG/RD FUSED B(+) 2 T750 14YL/GY STARTER MOTOR CONTROL OUTPUT 3 C3 20DB/YL A/C CLUTCH CONTROL OUTPUT 4 W4 16BR/OR WIPER MOTOR HIGH SPEED FEED 5 A114 18GY/RD FUSED B(+) Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 199 > Page 10509 6 F30 10PK/YL FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-ACC) 7-8 L7 20WT/YL FUSED PARK LAMP FEED 9 L678 18BR FUSED PARK LAMP FEED 10 L70 20WT/GY FUSED PARK LAMP FEED 11 - 12 A107 12TN/RD FUSED B(+) Component Location - 33 Component Location - 34 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 199 > Page 10510 Connector: Name : MODULE-TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER-EYELET Color : # of pins : 1 Qualifier : (DIESEL) Pin Circuit Description 1 A0 6RD B(+) Component Location - 33 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 199 > Page 10511 Component Location - 34 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 199 > Page 10512 Connector: Name : MODULE-TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER-EYELET Color : # of pins : 1 Qualifier : (GAS) Pin Circuit Description 1 A11 8LB B(+) Pin Circuit Description 1 A0 6RD B(+) Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 199 > Page 10513 Component Location - 33 Component Location - 34 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 199 > Page 10514 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 199 > Page 10515 Power Distribution Module: Locations Component ID 215 Component ID: 215 Component : MODULE-TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER Connector: Name : MODULE-TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER C1 Color : LT. GRAY # of pins : 14 Pin Circuit Description 1 F1 20PK/WT FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (OFF-RUN-START) 2 T41 18YL/DB TRS T41 SIGNAL (P/N) 2 T41 20YL/DB TRS T41 SIGNAL (P/N) 2 T752 20DG/OR STARTER SOLENOID CONTROL 3-4 K31 20BR FUEL PUMP CONTROL 5 W7 20BR/GY WIPER PARK SWITCH SENSE 6-7-8 G932 20VT/TN WASHER FLUID SWITCH RETURN 9 W1 20BR/TN WASHER FLUID SWITCH SENSE 10 T515 20YL/DB TRANSMISSION CONTROL 11 G70 20VT/LB HOOD AJAR SWITCH SENSE 12 - 13 - 14 - Component Location - 33 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 199 > Page 10516 Component Location - 34 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 199 > Page 10517 Connector: Name : MODULE-TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER C10 Color : LT. GRAY # of pins : 22 Pin Circuit Description 1 K342 16BR/WT ASD CONTROL OUTPUT 2 A405 18RD/DB FUSED B(+) 3 A941 18RD FUSED B(+) 4-5 A104 20YL/RD FUSED B(+) Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 199 > Page 10518 6 A310 16RD/LB FUSED B(+) 7 C15 14DB/WT REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER CONTROL OUTPUT 8 F12 14PK/RD FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) 9 T16 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT 10 - 11 X22 18GY/LB HORN CONTROL OUTPUT 12 W3 18BR/WT WIPER LOW SPEED CONTROL OUTPUT 13 Z971 18BK GROUND 14 C16 18DB/GY HEATED MIRROR CONTROL OUTPUT 15 A212 20RD/OR FUSED B(+) 16 - - 17 A121 14RD/YL FUSED B(+) 18 A109 16OR/RD FUEL PUMP CONTROL OUTPUT 19 X21 18GY/YL HORN CONTROL OUTPUT 20 Z953 20BK GROUND 21 T41 20YL/DB TRS T41 SIGNAL (P/N) 22 A400 14TN/RD FUSED B(+) Component Location - 33 Component Location - 34 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 199 > Page 10519 Connector: Name : MODULE-TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER C2 Color : BLACK # of pins : 13 Pin Circuit Description 1-2 W10 20BR WASHER PUMP MOTOR CONTROL 3 F20 20PK/WT IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) 4 A72 20RD/OR ADJUSTABLE PEDALS OUTPUT 5-- Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 199 > Page 10520 6-7-8-9 G304 20VT/DB FRONT AXLE LOCK CONTROL 10 C13 20LB A/C CLUTCH CONTROL 10 C13 20LB/OR A/C CLUTCH CONTROL 11 K51 20BR/WT ASD CONTROL 12 B20 20DG/OR BRAKE FLUID LEVEL SWITCH SENSE 13 Z117 20BK/WT GROUND Component Location - 33 Component Location - 34 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 199 > Page 10521 Connector: Name : MODULE-TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER C3 Color : BLACK # of pins : 22 Pin Circuit Description 1 A209 10RD FUSED B(+) 2-3 F984 18PK/YL FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-ACC) 4-5 F983 20PK/YL FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-ACC) Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 199 > Page 10522 6 A205 18RD/OR FUSED B(+) 7-8 A944 20RD FUSED B(+) 9 A116 16YL/RD FUSED B(+) 10 A118 18RD/OR FUSED B(+) 11 - 12 A918 20RD FUSED B(+) 12 A918 16RD FUSED B(+) 13 F921 20PK/LB FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN) 14 F504 20GY/PK FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN) 15 F202 20PK/GY FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) 16 A930 16RD FUSED B(+) 17 F942 10PK/LG FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) 18 L673 18YL TRAILER TOW LEFT TURN RELAY OUTPUT 19 L674 18LG TRAILER TOW RIGHT TURN RELAY OUTPUT 20 F960 20PK/LG FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) 21 F21 20PK/DG FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) 22 F12 14PK/RD FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) Component Location - 33 Component Location - 34 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 199 > Page 10523 Connector: Name : MODULE-TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER C4 Color : LT. GRAY # of pins : 13 Pin Circuit Description 1 Z118 16BK/YL GROUND 2 T102 16YL SHIFT MOTOR CONTROL A 3 T101 16DG SHIFT MOTOR CONTROL B 4-5-- Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 199 > Page 10524 6-7-8 T300 20YL/GY T-CASE MOTOR BRAKE SIGNAL 9 T103 20YL/OR 5 VOLT SUPPLY 10 D201 20WT/DG MODE SENSOR A 11 G180 20VT/YL SENSOR RETURN 12 A880 20DB/RD FUSED B(+) 13 G303 20VT/DG FRONT AXLE LOCK SIGNAL Component Location - 33 Component Location - 34 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 199 > Page 10525 Connector: Name : MODULE-TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER C5 Color : BLACK # of pins : 10 Pin Circuit Description 1 L61 20WT/LG LEFT FRONT TURN LAMP DRIVER 2 L60 20WT/TN RIGHT FRONT TURN LAMP DRIVER 3 L34 20WT/GY RIGHT HIGH BEAM DRIVER 4 L43 20WT/DB LEFT LOW BEAM DRIVER 5 T340 20DG/VT INPUT SPEED SENSOR 2 (N3) SIGNAL Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 199 > Page 10526 6-7-8 G31 20VT/LG AAT SIGNAL 9 G930 20VT/TN AAT RETURN 10 T71 20YL/OR INPUT SPEED SENSOR 2 (N3) RETURN Component Location - 33 Component Location - 34 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 199 > Page 10527 Connector: Name : MODULE-TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER C6 Color : BROWN # of pins : 16 Pin Circuit Description 1 D65 20WT/LG CAN C BUS (+) 2 D52 20WT/LB DIAGNOSTIC CAN C (+) 3 D55 20WT/OR CAN B BUS (+) 4 L63 20WT/DG LEFT REAR TURN LAMP DRIVER 5-- Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 199 > Page 10528 6 L62 20WT/YL RIGHT REAR TURN LAMP DRIVER 7 L50 20WT/TN BRAKE LAMP SWITCH OUTPUT 8-9 D64 20WT/LB CAN C BUS (-) 10 D51 20WT/BR DIAGNOSTIC CAN C (-) 11 D54 20WT CAN B BUS (-) 12 - 13 - 14 - 15 T70 20YL INPUT SPEED SENSOR 1 (N2) SIGNAL 16 T341 20DG/VT INPUT SPEED SENSOR 1 (N2) RETURN Component Location - 33 Component Location - 34 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 199 > Page 10529 Connector: Name : MODULE-TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER C7 Color : BLUE # of pins : 14 Pin Circuit Description 1-2-3 L44 20WT/TN RIGHT LOW BEAM DRIVER 4 L33 20WT/LG LEFT HIGH BEAM DRIVER 5-- Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 199 > Page 10530 6-7 C818 20LB/OR A/C PRESSURE 5 VOLT SUPPLY 8 L10 20WT/GY FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN) 9-10 - 11 - 12 C18 20LB/BR A/C PRESSURE SIGNAL 13 C918 20BK/LB A/C PRESSURE GROUND 14 T751 20YL IGNITION START Component Location - 33 Component Location - 34 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 199 > Page 10531 Connector: Name : MODULE-TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER C8 Color : LT. GRAY # of pins : 12 Pin Circuit Description 1 A916 16RD FUSED B(+) Pin Circuit Description 1-2 A919 20RD FUSED B(+) Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 199 > Page 10532 3 A106 20LB/RD FUSED B(+) 4 F201 20PK/OR FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) 5 F100 20PK/VT FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN) 6 A100 14RD/VT FUSED B(+) 7 A210 12OR/RD FUSED B(+) 8 A940 18RD FUSED B(+) 9 A103 18GY/RD FUSED B(+) 10 L89 18WT/YL FOG LAMP CONTROL OUTPUT 11 L1 18WT/LG BACKUP LAMP FEED 12 A961 14RD FUEL HEATER CONTROL OUTPUT 12 C123 12LB/WT CONDENSER FAN CONTROL OUTPUT Component Location - 33 Component Location - 34 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 199 > Page 10533 Connector: Name : MODULE-TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER C9 Color : BLACK # of pins : 12 Pin Circuit Description 1 A111 16DG/RD FUSED B(+) 2 T750 14YL/GY STARTER MOTOR CONTROL OUTPUT 3 C3 20DB/YL A/C CLUTCH CONTROL OUTPUT 4 W4 16BR/OR WIPER MOTOR HIGH SPEED FEED 5 A114 18GY/RD FUSED B(+) Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 199 > Page 10534 6 F30 10PK/YL FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-ACC) 7-8 L7 20WT/YL FUSED PARK LAMP FEED 9 L678 18BR FUSED PARK LAMP FEED 10 L70 20WT/GY FUSED PARK LAMP FEED 11 - 12 A107 12TN/RD FUSED B(+) Component Location - 33 Component Location - 34 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 199 > Page 10535 Connector: Name : MODULE-TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER-EYELET Color : # of pins : 1 Qualifier : (DIESEL) Pin Circuit Description 1 A0 6RD B(+) Component Location - 33 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 199 > Page 10536 Component Location - 34 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 199 > Page 10537 Connector: Name : MODULE-TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER-EYELET Color : # of pins : 1 Qualifier : (GAS) Pin Circuit Description 1 A11 8LB B(+) Pin Circuit Description 1 A0 6RD B(+) Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 199 > Page 10538 Component Location - 33 Component Location - 34 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 199 > Page 10539 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Component ID 199 Power Distribution Module: Diagrams Component ID 199 Component ID: 199 Component : MODULE-TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER Connector: Name : MODULE-TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER C1 Color : LT. GRAY # of pins : 14 Pin Circuit Description 1 F1 20PK/WT FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (OFF-RUN-START) 2 T41 18YL/DB TRS T41 SIGNAL (P/N) 2 T41 20YL/DB TRS T41 SIGNAL (P/N) 2 T752 20DG/OR STARTER SOLENOID CONTROL 3-4 K31 20BR FUEL PUMP CONTROL 5 W7 20BR/GY WIPER PARK SWITCH SENSE 6-7-8 G932 20VT/TN WASHER FLUID SWITCH RETURN 9 W1 20BR/TN WASHER FLUID SWITCH SENSE 10 T515 20YL/DB TRANSMISSION CONTROL 11 G70 20VT/LB HOOD AJAR SWITCH SENSE 12 - 13 - 14 - Component Location - 33 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Component ID 199 > Page 10542 Component Location - 34 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Component ID 199 > Page 10543 Connector: Name : MODULE-TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER C10 Color : LT. GRAY # of pins : 22 Pin Circuit Description 1 K342 16BR/WT ASD CONTROL OUTPUT 2 A405 18RD/DB FUSED B(+) 3 A941 18RD FUSED B(+) 4-5 A104 20YL/RD FUSED B(+) Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Component ID 199 > Page 10544 6 A310 16RD/LB FUSED B(+) 7 C15 14DB/WT REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER CONTROL OUTPUT 8 F12 14PK/RD FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) 9 T16 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT 10 - 11 X22 18GY/LB HORN CONTROL OUTPUT 12 W3 18BR/WT WIPER LOW SPEED CONTROL OUTPUT 13 Z971 18BK GROUND 14 C16 18DB/GY HEATED MIRROR CONTROL OUTPUT 15 A212 20RD/OR FUSED B(+) 16 - - 17 A121 14RD/YL FUSED B(+) 18 A109 16OR/RD FUEL PUMP CONTROL OUTPUT 19 X21 18GY/YL HORN CONTROL OUTPUT 20 Z953 20BK GROUND 21 T41 20YL/DB TRS T41 SIGNAL (P/N) 22 A400 14TN/RD FUSED B(+) Component Location - 33 Component Location - 34 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Component ID 199 > Page 10545 Connector: Name : MODULE-TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER C2 Color : BLACK # of pins : 13 Pin Circuit Description 1-2 W10 20BR WASHER PUMP MOTOR CONTROL 3 F20 20PK/WT IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) 4 A72 20RD/OR ADJUSTABLE PEDALS OUTPUT 5-- Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Component ID 199 > Page 10546 6-7-8-9 G304 20VT/DB FRONT AXLE LOCK CONTROL 10 C13 20LB A/C CLUTCH CONTROL 10 C13 20LB/OR A/C CLUTCH CONTROL 11 K51 20BR/WT ASD CONTROL 12 B20 20DG/OR BRAKE FLUID LEVEL SWITCH SENSE 13 Z117 20BK/WT GROUND Component Location - 33 Component Location - 34 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Component ID 199 > Page 10547 Connector: Name : MODULE-TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER C3 Color : BLACK # of pins : 22 Pin Circuit Description 1 A209 10RD FUSED B(+) 2-3 F984 18PK/YL FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-ACC) 4-5 F983 20PK/YL FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-ACC) Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Component ID 199 > Page 10548 6 A205 18RD/OR FUSED B(+) 7-8 A944 20RD FUSED B(+) 9 A116 16YL/RD FUSED B(+) 10 A118 18RD/OR FUSED B(+) 11 - 12 A918 20RD FUSED B(+) 12 A918 16RD FUSED B(+) 13 F921 20PK/LB FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN) 14 F504 20GY/PK FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN) 15 F202 20PK/GY FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) 16 A930 16RD FUSED B(+) 17 F942 10PK/LG FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) 18 L673 18YL TRAILER TOW LEFT TURN RELAY OUTPUT 19 L674 18LG TRAILER TOW RIGHT TURN RELAY OUTPUT 20 F960 20PK/LG FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) 21 F21 20PK/DG FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) 22 F12 14PK/RD FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) Component Location - 33 Component Location - 34 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Component ID 199 > Page 10549 Connector: Name : MODULE-TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER C4 Color : LT. GRAY # of pins : 13 Pin Circuit Description 1 Z118 16BK/YL GROUND 2 T102 16YL SHIFT MOTOR CONTROL A 3 T101 16DG SHIFT MOTOR CONTROL B 4-5-- Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Component ID 199 > Page 10550 6-7-8 T300 20YL/GY T-CASE MOTOR BRAKE SIGNAL 9 T103 20YL/OR 5 VOLT SUPPLY 10 D201 20WT/DG MODE SENSOR A 11 G180 20VT/YL SENSOR RETURN 12 A880 20DB/RD FUSED B(+) 13 G303 20VT/DG FRONT AXLE LOCK SIGNAL Component Location - 33 Component Location - 34 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Component ID 199 > Page 10551 Connector: Name : MODULE-TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER C5 Color : BLACK # of pins : 10 Pin Circuit Description 1 L61 20WT/LG LEFT FRONT TURN LAMP DRIVER 2 L60 20WT/TN RIGHT FRONT TURN LAMP DRIVER 3 L34 20WT/GY RIGHT HIGH BEAM DRIVER 4 L43 20WT/DB LEFT LOW BEAM DRIVER 5 T340 20DG/VT INPUT SPEED SENSOR 2 (N3) SIGNAL Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Component ID 199 > Page 10552 6-7-8 G31 20VT/LG AAT SIGNAL 9 G930 20VT/TN AAT RETURN 10 T71 20YL/OR INPUT SPEED SENSOR 2 (N3) RETURN Component Location - 33 Component Location - 34 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Component ID 199 > Page 10553 Connector: Name : MODULE-TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER C6 Color : BROWN # of pins : 16 Pin Circuit Description 1 D65 20WT/LG CAN C BUS (+) 2 D52 20WT/LB DIAGNOSTIC CAN C (+) 3 D55 20WT/OR CAN B BUS (+) 4 L63 20WT/DG LEFT REAR TURN LAMP DRIVER 5-- Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Component ID 199 > Page 10554 6 L62 20WT/YL RIGHT REAR TURN LAMP DRIVER 7 L50 20WT/TN BRAKE LAMP SWITCH OUTPUT 8-9 D64 20WT/LB CAN C BUS (-) 10 D51 20WT/BR DIAGNOSTIC CAN C (-) 11 D54 20WT CAN B BUS (-) 12 - 13 - 14 - 15 T70 20YL INPUT SPEED SENSOR 1 (N2) SIGNAL 16 T341 20DG/VT INPUT SPEED SENSOR 1 (N2) RETURN Component Location - 33 Component Location - 34 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Component ID 199 > Page 10555 Connector: Name : MODULE-TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER C7 Color : BLUE # of pins : 14 Pin Circuit Description 1-2-3 L44 20WT/TN RIGHT LOW BEAM DRIVER 4 L33 20WT/LG LEFT HIGH BEAM DRIVER 5-- Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Component ID 199 > Page 10556 6-7 C818 20LB/OR A/C PRESSURE 5 VOLT SUPPLY 8 L10 20WT/GY FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN) 9-10 - 11 - 12 C18 20LB/BR A/C PRESSURE SIGNAL 13 C918 20BK/LB A/C PRESSURE GROUND 14 T751 20YL IGNITION START Component Location - 33 Component Location - 34 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Component ID 199 > Page 10557 Connector: Name : MODULE-TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER C8 Color : LT. GRAY # of pins : 12 Pin Circuit Description 1 A916 16RD FUSED B(+) Pin Circuit Description 1-2 A919 20RD FUSED B(+) Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Component ID 199 > Page 10558 3 A106 20LB/RD FUSED B(+) 4 F201 20PK/OR FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) 5 F100 20PK/VT FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN) 6 A100 14RD/VT FUSED B(+) 7 A210 12OR/RD FUSED B(+) 8 A940 18RD FUSED B(+) 9 A103 18GY/RD FUSED B(+) 10 L89 18WT/YL FOG LAMP CONTROL OUTPUT 11 L1 18WT/LG BACKUP LAMP FEED 12 A961 14RD FUEL HEATER CONTROL OUTPUT 12 C123 12LB/WT CONDENSER FAN CONTROL OUTPUT Component Location - 33 Component Location - 34 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Component ID 199 > Page 10559 Connector: Name : MODULE-TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER C9 Color : BLACK # of pins : 12 Pin Circuit Description 1 A111 16DG/RD FUSED B(+) 2 T750 14YL/GY STARTER MOTOR CONTROL OUTPUT 3 C3 20DB/YL A/C CLUTCH CONTROL OUTPUT 4 W4 16BR/OR WIPER MOTOR HIGH SPEED FEED 5 A114 18GY/RD FUSED B(+) Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Component ID 199 > Page 10560 6 F30 10PK/YL FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-ACC) 7-8 L7 20WT/YL FUSED PARK LAMP FEED 9 L678 18BR FUSED PARK LAMP FEED 10 L70 20WT/GY FUSED PARK LAMP FEED 11 - 12 A107 12TN/RD FUSED B(+) Component Location - 33 Component Location - 34 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Component ID 199 > Page 10561 Connector: Name : MODULE-TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER-EYELET Color : # of pins : 1 Qualifier : (DIESEL) Pin Circuit Description 1 A0 6RD B(+) Component Location - 33 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Component ID 199 > Page 10562 Component Location - 34 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Component ID 199 > Page 10563 Connector: Name : MODULE-TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER-EYELET Color : # of pins : 1 Qualifier : (GAS) Pin Circuit Description 1 A11 8LB B(+) Pin Circuit Description 1 A0 6RD B(+) Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Component ID 199 > Page 10564 Component Location - 33 Component Location - 34 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Component ID 199 > Page 10565 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Component ID 199 > Page 10566 Power Distribution Module: Diagrams Component ID 215 Component ID: 215 Component : MODULE-TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER Connector: Name : MODULE-TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER C1 Color : LT. GRAY # of pins : 14 Pin Circuit Description 1 F1 20PK/WT FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (OFF-RUN-START) 2 T41 18YL/DB TRS T41 SIGNAL (P/N) 2 T41 20YL/DB TRS T41 SIGNAL (P/N) 2 T752 20DG/OR STARTER SOLENOID CONTROL 3-4 K31 20BR FUEL PUMP CONTROL 5 W7 20BR/GY WIPER PARK SWITCH SENSE 6-7-8 G932 20VT/TN WASHER FLUID SWITCH RETURN 9 W1 20BR/TN WASHER FLUID SWITCH SENSE 10 T515 20YL/DB TRANSMISSION CONTROL 11 G70 20VT/LB HOOD AJAR SWITCH SENSE 12 - 13 - 14 - Component Location - 33 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Component ID 199 > Page 10567 Component Location - 34 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Component ID 199 > Page 10568 Connector: Name : MODULE-TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER C10 Color : LT. GRAY # of pins : 22 Pin Circuit Description 1 K342 16BR/WT ASD CONTROL OUTPUT 2 A405 18RD/DB FUSED B(+) 3 A941 18RD FUSED B(+) 4-5 A104 20YL/RD FUSED B(+) Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Component ID 199 > Page 10569 6 A310 16RD/LB FUSED B(+) 7 C15 14DB/WT REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER CONTROL OUTPUT 8 F12 14PK/RD FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) 9 T16 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT 10 - 11 X22 18GY/LB HORN CONTROL OUTPUT 12 W3 18BR/WT WIPER LOW SPEED CONTROL OUTPUT 13 Z971 18BK GROUND 14 C16 18DB/GY HEATED MIRROR CONTROL OUTPUT 15 A212 20RD/OR FUSED B(+) 16 - - 17 A121 14RD/YL FUSED B(+) 18 A109 16OR/RD FUEL PUMP CONTROL OUTPUT 19 X21 18GY/YL HORN CONTROL OUTPUT 20 Z953 20BK GROUND 21 T41 20YL/DB TRS T41 SIGNAL (P/N) 22 A400 14TN/RD FUSED B(+) Component Location - 33 Component Location - 34 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Component ID 199 > Page 10570 Connector: Name : MODULE-TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER C2 Color : BLACK # of pins : 13 Pin Circuit Description 1-2 W10 20BR WASHER PUMP MOTOR CONTROL 3 F20 20PK/WT IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) 4 A72 20RD/OR ADJUSTABLE PEDALS OUTPUT 5-- Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Component ID 199 > Page 10571 6-7-8-9 G304 20VT/DB FRONT AXLE LOCK CONTROL 10 C13 20LB A/C CLUTCH CONTROL 10 C13 20LB/OR A/C CLUTCH CONTROL 11 K51 20BR/WT ASD CONTROL 12 B20 20DG/OR BRAKE FLUID LEVEL SWITCH SENSE 13 Z117 20BK/WT GROUND Component Location - 33 Component Location - 34 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Component ID 199 > Page 10572 Connector: Name : MODULE-TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER C3 Color : BLACK # of pins : 22 Pin Circuit Description 1 A209 10RD FUSED B(+) 2-3 F984 18PK/YL FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-ACC) 4-5 F983 20PK/YL FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-ACC) Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Component ID 199 > Page 10573 6 A205 18RD/OR FUSED B(+) 7-8 A944 20RD FUSED B(+) 9 A116 16YL/RD FUSED B(+) 10 A118 18RD/OR FUSED B(+) 11 - 12 A918 20RD FUSED B(+) 12 A918 16RD FUSED B(+) 13 F921 20PK/LB FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN) 14 F504 20GY/PK FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN) 15 F202 20PK/GY FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) 16 A930 16RD FUSED B(+) 17 F942 10PK/LG FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) 18 L673 18YL TRAILER TOW LEFT TURN RELAY OUTPUT 19 L674 18LG TRAILER TOW RIGHT TURN RELAY OUTPUT 20 F960 20PK/LG FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) 21 F21 20PK/DG FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) 22 F12 14PK/RD FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) Component Location - 33 Component Location - 34 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Component ID 199 > Page 10574 Connector: Name : MODULE-TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER C4 Color : LT. GRAY # of pins : 13 Pin Circuit Description 1 Z118 16BK/YL GROUND 2 T102 16YL SHIFT MOTOR CONTROL A 3 T101 16DG SHIFT MOTOR CONTROL B 4-5-- Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Component ID 199 > Page 10575 6-7-8 T300 20YL/GY T-CASE MOTOR BRAKE SIGNAL 9 T103 20YL/OR 5 VOLT SUPPLY 10 D201 20WT/DG MODE SENSOR A 11 G180 20VT/YL SENSOR RETURN 12 A880 20DB/RD FUSED B(+) 13 G303 20VT/DG FRONT AXLE LOCK SIGNAL Component Location - 33 Component Location - 34 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Component ID 199 > Page 10576 Connector: Name : MODULE-TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER C5 Color : BLACK # of pins : 10 Pin Circuit Description 1 L61 20WT/LG LEFT FRONT TURN LAMP DRIVER 2 L60 20WT/TN RIGHT FRONT TURN LAMP DRIVER 3 L34 20WT/GY RIGHT HIGH BEAM DRIVER 4 L43 20WT/DB LEFT LOW BEAM DRIVER 5 T340 20DG/VT INPUT SPEED SENSOR 2 (N3) SIGNAL Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Component ID 199 > Page 10577 6-7-8 G31 20VT/LG AAT SIGNAL 9 G930 20VT/TN AAT RETURN 10 T71 20YL/OR INPUT SPEED SENSOR 2 (N3) RETURN Component Location - 33 Component Location - 34 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Component ID 199 > Page 10578 Connector: Name : MODULE-TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER C6 Color : BROWN # of pins : 16 Pin Circuit Description 1 D65 20WT/LG CAN C BUS (+) 2 D52 20WT/LB DIAGNOSTIC CAN C (+) 3 D55 20WT/OR CAN B BUS (+) 4 L63 20WT/DG LEFT REAR TURN LAMP DRIVER 5-- Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Component ID 199 > Page 10579 6 L62 20WT/YL RIGHT REAR TURN LAMP DRIVER 7 L50 20WT/TN BRAKE LAMP SWITCH OUTPUT 8-9 D64 20WT/LB CAN C BUS (-) 10 D51 20WT/BR DIAGNOSTIC CAN C (-) 11 D54 20WT CAN B BUS (-) 12 - 13 - 14 - 15 T70 20YL INPUT SPEED SENSOR 1 (N2) SIGNAL 16 T341 20DG/VT INPUT SPEED SENSOR 1 (N2) RETURN Component Location - 33 Component Location - 34 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Component ID 199 > Page 10580 Connector: Name : MODULE-TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER C7 Color : BLUE # of pins : 14 Pin Circuit Description 1-2-3 L44 20WT/TN RIGHT LOW BEAM DRIVER 4 L33 20WT/LG LEFT HIGH BEAM DRIVER 5-- Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Component ID 199 > Page 10581 6-7 C818 20LB/OR A/C PRESSURE 5 VOLT SUPPLY 8 L10 20WT/GY FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN) 9-10 - 11 - 12 C18 20LB/BR A/C PRESSURE SIGNAL 13 C918 20BK/LB A/C PRESSURE GROUND 14 T751 20YL IGNITION START Component Location - 33 Component Location - 34 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Component ID 199 > Page 10582 Connector: Name : MODULE-TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER C8 Color : LT. GRAY # of pins : 12 Pin Circuit Description 1 A916 16RD FUSED B(+) Pin Circuit Description 1-2 A919 20RD FUSED B(+) Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Component ID 199 > Page 10583 3 A106 20LB/RD FUSED B(+) 4 F201 20PK/OR FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) 5 F100 20PK/VT FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN) 6 A100 14RD/VT FUSED B(+) 7 A210 12OR/RD FUSED B(+) 8 A940 18RD FUSED B(+) 9 A103 18GY/RD FUSED B(+) 10 L89 18WT/YL FOG LAMP CONTROL OUTPUT 11 L1 18WT/LG BACKUP LAMP FEED 12 A961 14RD FUEL HEATER CONTROL OUTPUT 12 C123 12LB/WT CONDENSER FAN CONTROL OUTPUT Component Location - 33 Component Location - 34 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Component ID 199 > Page 10584 Connector: Name : MODULE-TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER C9 Color : BLACK # of pins : 12 Pin Circuit Description 1 A111 16DG/RD FUSED B(+) 2 T750 14YL/GY STARTER MOTOR CONTROL OUTPUT 3 C3 20DB/YL A/C CLUTCH CONTROL OUTPUT 4 W4 16BR/OR WIPER MOTOR HIGH SPEED FEED 5 A114 18GY/RD FUSED B(+) Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Component ID 199 > Page 10585 6 F30 10PK/YL FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-ACC) 7-8 L7 20WT/YL FUSED PARK LAMP FEED 9 L678 18BR FUSED PARK LAMP FEED 10 L70 20WT/GY FUSED PARK LAMP FEED 11 - 12 A107 12TN/RD FUSED B(+) Component Location - 33 Component Location - 34 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Component ID 199 > Page 10586 Connector: Name : MODULE-TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER-EYELET Color : # of pins : 1 Qualifier : (DIESEL) Pin Circuit Description 1 A0 6RD B(+) Component Location - 33 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Component ID 199 > Page 10587 Component Location - 34 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Component ID 199 > Page 10588 Connector: Name : MODULE-TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER-EYELET Color : # of pins : 1 Qualifier : (GAS) Pin Circuit Description 1 A11 8LB B(+) Pin Circuit Description 1 A0 6RD B(+) Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Component ID 199 > Page 10589 Component Location - 33 Component Location - 34 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Component ID 199 > Page 10590 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Power Distribution Module: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The Totally Integrated Power Module (2)(TIPM) is a combination unit that performs the functions of the Power Distribution Center (PDC) and the Front Control Module. The TIPM is a printed circuit board based module that contains fuses, internal relays and a microprocessor that performs the functions previously executed by the FCM. The TIPM (2) is located in the engine compartment, next to the battery (1) and connects directly to the B+ cable (5) via a stud located on top of the unit. The ground connection is via electrical connectors. The TIPM provides the primary means of voltage distribution and protection for the entire vehicle. The molded plastic TIPM housing includes a base and cover. The TIPM cover is easily opened or removed for service and has a fuse and relay layout map integral to the inside surface of the cover. The TIPM housing base and cover are secured in place via mounting tabs. The mounting tabs secure the TIPM (2) to the battery tray mounting bracket (3). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 10593 Power Distribution Module: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION All of the current from the battery and the generator output enters the Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) via a stud on the top of the module. The TIPM cover is removed to access the fuses or relays. Internal connections of all of the power distribution center circuits is accomplished by a combination of bus bars and a printed circuit board. For a complete wiring diagram Refer to Diagrams/Electrical. The wiring information includes wiring diagrams, proper wire and connector repair procedures, details of wire harness routing and retention, connector pin-out information and location views for the various wire harness connectors, splices and grounds. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Power Distribution Module: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. 2. Remove the B+ terminal nut (6) from the Totally Integrated Power Module (2)(TIPM) B+ terminal. Remove the B+ cable (5) from the TIPM (2). 3. Using a suitable flat blade tool, disengage the TIPM (2) upper retaining tabs from the battery tray bracket (3). 4. Grasp the TIPM (1) and rotate the assembly up to free it from its mounting bracket (3). Position the assembly upside down to access the electrical connectors located on the bottom of the unit. 5. Disconnect the electrical connectors (2) by depressing the locking tab and rotating the connector arm outboard, until the connector is free from the Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 10596 TIPM assembly (1). Be certain to pull the connectors straight off. 6. Remove the TIPM (1) from the vehicle. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 10597 Power Distribution Module: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION 1. Position the Totally Integrated Power Module (1)(TIPM) into the vehicle. NOTE: Totally Integrated power module electrical connectors are color coded to ease location reference. 2. Connect the electrical connectors (2) by pushing straight on and rotating the connector arm inboard, until the connector is firmly locked in place on the TIPM assembly (1). 3. Turn the TIPM (1) so that the connector side is facing down. Install the assembly onto the TIPM battery tray bracket (3) making sure to line up the lower retaining tab with the retaining slot in the tray (1). 4. Push the TIPM (1) downward to lock the upper retaining clips into the bracket (3). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 10598 5. Install the B+ terminal cable (5) and nut (6) on the B+ terminal of the TIPM (2). 6. Connect the battery negative cable. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations Relay Box: Locations An integrated Power Module is located in the engine compartment near the battery. This center contains cartridge fuses and mini fuses. A description of each fuse and component may be stamped on the inside cover otherwise the cavity number of each fuse is stamped on the inside cover that corresponds to the following chart. Underhood Fuses (Integrated Power Module) Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Page 10602 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Page 10603 CAUTION: - When installing the Integrated Power Module cover, it is important to ensure the cover is properly positioned and fully latched. Failure to do so may allow water to get into the Integrated Power Module, and possibly result in a electrical system failure. - When replacing a blown fuse, it is important to use only a fuse having the correct amperage rating. The use of a fuse with a rating other than indicated may result in a dangerous electrical system overload. If a properly rated fuse continues to blow, it indicates a problem in the circuit that must be corrected. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Page 10604 Relay Box: Application and ID An integrated Power Module is located in the engine compartment near the battery. This center contains cartridge fuses and mini fuses. A description of each fuse and component may be stamped on the inside cover otherwise the cavity number of each fuse is stamped on the inside cover that corresponds to the following chart. Underhood Fuses (Integrated Power Module) Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Page 10605 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Page 10606 CAUTION: - When installing the Integrated Power Module cover, it is important to ensure the cover is properly positioned and fully latched. Failure to do so may allow water to get into the Integrated Power Module, and possibly result in a electrical system failure. - When replacing a blown fuse, it is important to use only a fuse having the correct amperage rating. The use of a fuse with a rating other than indicated may result in a dangerous electrical system overload. If a properly rated fuse continues to blow, it indicates a problem in the circuit that must be corrected. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations Relay Box: Locations An integrated Power Module is located in the engine compartment near the battery. This center contains cartridge fuses and mini fuses. A description of each fuse and component may be stamped on the inside cover otherwise the cavity number of each fuse is stamped on the inside cover that corresponds to the following chart. Underhood Fuses (Integrated Power Module) Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Page 10610 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Page 10611 CAUTION: - When installing the Integrated Power Module cover, it is important to ensure the cover is properly positioned and fully latched. Failure to do so may allow water to get into the Integrated Power Module, and possibly result in a electrical system failure. - When replacing a blown fuse, it is important to use only a fuse having the correct amperage rating. The use of a fuse with a rating other than indicated may result in a dangerous electrical system overload. If a properly rated fuse continues to blow, it indicates a problem in the circuit that must be corrected. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Page 10612 Relay Box: Application and ID An integrated Power Module is located in the engine compartment near the battery. This center contains cartridge fuses and mini fuses. A description of each fuse and component may be stamped on the inside cover otherwise the cavity number of each fuse is stamped on the inside cover that corresponds to the following chart. Underhood Fuses (Integrated Power Module) Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Page 10613 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Page 10614 CAUTION: - When installing the Integrated Power Module cover, it is important to ensure the cover is properly positioned and fully latched. Failure to do so may allow water to get into the Integrated Power Module, and possibly result in a electrical system failure. - When replacing a blown fuse, it is important to use only a fuse having the correct amperage rating. The use of a fuse with a rating other than indicated may result in a dangerous electrical system overload. If a properly rated fuse continues to blow, it indicates a problem in the circuit that must be corrected. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Locations Auxiliary Power Outlet: Locations Component ID: 236 Component : POWER OUTLET Connector: Name : POWER OUTLET Color : GRAY # of pins : 3 Pin Circuit Description 1 A205 18RD/OR FUSED B(+) 2-3 Z737 18BK/LB GROUND Component Location - 47 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Locations > Page 10619 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Auxiliary Power Outlet: Diagram Information and Instructions Warnings WARNINGS - GENERAL WARNINGS provide information to prevent personal injury and vehicle damage. Below is a list of general warnings that should be followed any time a vehicle is being serviced. WARNING: Always wear safety glasses for eye protection. WARNING: Use safety stands anytime a procedure requires being under a vehicle. WARNING: Be sure that the ignition switch always is in the off position, unless the procedure requires it to be on. WARNING: Set the parking brake when working on any vehicle. An automatic transmission should be in park. A manual transmission should be in neutral. WARNING: Operate the engine only in a well-ventilated area. WARNING: Keep away from moving parts when the engine is running, especially the fan and belts. WARNING: To prevent serious burns, avoid contact with hot parts such as the radiator, exhaust manifold(s), tail pipe, catalytic converter and muffler. WARNING: Do not allow flame or sparks near the battery. Gases are always present in and around the battery. WARNING: Always remove rings, watches, loose hanging jewelry and avoid loose clothing. How to Use Wiring Diagrams DESCRIPTION - HOW TO USE WIRING DIAGRAMS DaimlerChrysler Corporation wiring diagrams are designed to provide information regarding the vehicles wiring content. In order to effectively use the wiring diagrams to diagnose and repair DaimlerChrysler Corporation vehicles, it is important to understand all of their features and characteristics. Diagrams are arranged such that the power (B+) side of the circuit is placed near the top of the page, and the ground (B-) side of the circuit is placed near the bottom of the page. All switches, components, and modules are shown in the at rest position with the doors closed and the key removed from the ignition. Components are shown two ways. A solid line around a component indicates that the component is complete. A dashed line around the component indicates that the component is being shown is not complete. Incomplete components have a reference number to indicate the page where the component is shown complete. It is important to realize that no attempt is made on the diagrams to represent components and wiring as they appear on the vehicle. For example, a short piece of wire is treated the same as a long one. In addition, switches and other components are shown as simply as possible, with regard to function only. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10622 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10623 SYMBOLS International symbols are used throughout the wiring diagrams. These symbols are consistent with those being used around the world. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10624 TERMINOLOGY This is a list of terms and definitions used in the wiring diagrams. LHD - Left Hand Drive Vehicles RHD - Right Hand Drive Vehicles ATX - Automatic Transmissions-Front Wheel Drive MTX Manual Transmissions-Front Wheel Drive Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10625 AT - Automatic Transmissions-Rear Wheel Drive MT - Manual Transmissions-Rear Wheel Drive SOHC - Single Over Head Cam Engine DOHC - Double Over Head Cam Engine Export - Vehicles Built For Sale In Markets Other Than North America Except Export - Vehicles Built For Sale In North America Circuit Functions DESCRIPTION - CIRCUIT FUNCTIONS All circuits in the diagrams use an alpha/numeric code to identify the wire and it's function. To identify which circuit code applies to a system, refer to the Circuit Identification Code Chart. This chart shows the main circuits only and does not show the secondary codes that may apply to some models. Circuit Information DESCRIPTION - CIRCUIT INFORMATION Each wire shown in the diagrams contains a code which identifies the main circuit, a specific part of the main circuit, gage of wire, and color. An example would be A 2 18 LB/YL. This is a Battery Feed circuit, level two, eighteen gauge, light blue with a yellow tracer. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10626 Connector, Ground and Splice Information DESCRIPTION - CONNECTOR, GROUND AND SPLICE INFORMATION CAUTION: Not all connectors are serviced. Some connectors are serviced only with a harness. A typical example might be the Supplemental Restraint System connectors. Always check parts availability before attempting a repair. IDENTIFICATION In-line connectors are identified by a number, as follows: - In-line connectors located in the engine compartment are C100 series numbers. - In-line connectors located in the instrument panel area are C200 series numbers. - In-line connectors located in the body are C300 series numbers. - Jumper harness connectors are C400 series numbers. - Grounds and ground connectors are identified with a "G" and follow the same series numbering as the in-line connectors. - Splices are identified with an "S" and follow the same series numbering as the in-line connectors. In addition, S001-S099 numbers are located in the engine compartment. - Component connectors are identified by the component name instead of a number. Multiple connectors on a component use a C1, C2, etc. identifier. LOCATIONS Vehicle/Locations contains the master connector/ground/splice location index charts with hyperlinks to the applicable location illustrations. The illustrations contain the connector name (or number)/ground number/splice number and component identification. The abbreviation T/O is used in the component location section to indicate a point in which the wiring harness branches out to a component. The abbreviation N/S means Not Shown in the illustrations Section Identification and Information DESCRIPTION - SECTION IDENTIFICATION AND INFORMATION The wiring diagrams are grouped into individual sections. If a component is most likely found in a particular group, it will be shown complete (all wires, Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10627 connectors, and pins) within that group. For example, the Auto Shutdown Relay is most likely to be found in Powertrain Management, so it is shown there complete. It can, however, be shown partially in another group if it contains some associated wiring. Splice diagrams show the entire splice and provide references to other sections the splices serves. Splice Information only contains splice diagrams that are not shown in their entirety somewhere else in the wiring diagrams. Connector Pin-Outs shows each connector and the circuits involved with that connector. The connectors are identified using the name/number on the diagram pages. Removal REMOVAL 1. Disconnect battery. 2. Release Connector Lock (2). 3. Disconnect the connector (3) being repaired from its mating half/component. 4. Remove the dress cover (if applicable) (1). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10628 5. Release the Secondary Terminal Lock, if required (1). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10629 6. Position the connector locking finger away from the terminal using the proper special tool. Pull on the wire to remove the terminal from the connector. Installation Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10630 INSTALLATION 1. Insert the removed terminal in the same cavity on the repair connector. 2. Repeat steps for each terminal in the connector, being sure that all wires are inserted into the proper cavities. For additional connector pin-out identification, refer to the wiring diagrams. 3. When the connector is re-assembled, the secondary terminal lock must be placed in the locked position to prevent terminal push out. 4. Replace dress cover (if applicable). 5. Connect connector to its mating half/component. 6. Connect battery and test all affected systems. Removal REMOVAL 1. Disconnect the battery. 2. Locate the diode in the harness, and remove the protective covering. 3. Remove the diode from the harness, pay attention to the current flow direction (1) (2) (3). Installation INSTALLATION 1. Remove the insulation from the wires in the harness. Only remove enough insulation to solder in the new diode. 2. Install the new diode in the harness, making sure current flow is correct. If necessary, refer to the appropriate wiring diagram for current flow. 3. Solder the connection together using rosin core type solder only. Do not use acid core solder. 4. Tape the diode to the harness using electrical tape. Make sure the diode is completely sealed from the elements. 5. Re-connect the battery and test affected systems. Removal REMOVAL 1. Follow steps for removing terminals described in the connector removal section. 2. Cut the wire 6 inches from the back of the connector. Installation INSTALLATION 1. Select a wire from the terminal repair kit that best matches the color and gage of the wire being repaired. 2. Cut the repair wire to the proper length and remove one-half (1/2) inch of insulation. 3. Splice the repair wire to the wire harness (see wire splicing procedure). See: Service Procedures/Wire Splicing 4. Insert the repaired wire into the connector. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10631 5. Install the connector locking wedge, if required, and reconnect the connector to its mating half/component. 6. Re-tape the wire harness starting at 1-1/2 inches behind the connector and 2 inches past the repair. 7. Connect battery and test all affected systems. Wire Splicing STANDARD PROCEDURE - WIRE SPLICING When splicing a wire, it is important that the correct gage be used as shown in the wiring diagrams. 1. Remove one-half (1/2) inch of insulation from each wire that needs to be spliced. 2. Place a piece of adhesive lined heat shrink tubing on one side of the wire. Make sure the tubing will be long enough to cover and seal the entire repair area. 3. Place the strands of wire overlapping each other inside of the splice clip (1). 4. Using crimping tool (1), Mopar p/n 05019912AA, crimp the splice clip and wires together. 5. Solder (3) the connection (2) together using rosin core type solder (1) only. CAUTION: DO NOT USE ACID CORE SOLDER. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10632 6. Center the heat shrink tubing (2) over the joint and heat using a heat gun. Heat the joint until the tubing is tightly sealed and sealant (1) comes out of both ends of the tubing. Special Tools WIRING/TERMINAL PROBING TOOL PACKAGE 6807 TERMINAL PICK TOOL SET 6680 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10633 TERMINAL REMOVING TOOLS 6932 AND 8638 TERMINAL REMOVING TOOL 6934 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10634 Auxiliary Power Outlet: Diagnostic Aids Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) Sensitive Devices STANDARD PROCEDURE - ELECTROSTATIC DISCHARGE (ESD) SENSITIVE DEVICES All ESD sensitive components are solid state and a symbol is used to indicate this. When handling any component with this symbol, comply with the following procedures to reduce the possibility of electrostatic charge build up on the body and inadvertent discharge into the component. If it is not known whether the part is ESD sensitive, assume that it is. 1. Always touch a known good ground before handling the part. This should be repeated while handling the part and more frequently after sliding across a seat, sitting down from a standing position, or walking a distance. 2. Avoid touching electrical terminals of the part, unless instructed to do so by a written procedure. 3. When using a voltmeter, be sure to connect the ground lead first. 4. Do not remove the part from it's protective packing until it is time to install the part. 5. Before removing the part from it's package, ground the package to a known good ground on the vehicle. Testing Of Voltage Potential STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING OF VOLTAGE POTENTIAL 1. Connect the ground lead of a voltmeter to a known good ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the voltmeter to the selected test point. The vehicle ignition may need to be turned ON to check voltage. Refer to the appropriate test procedure. Testing For Continuity Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10635 STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING FOR CONTINUITY 1. Remove the fuse (1) for the circuit being checked or, disconnect the battery. 2. Connect one lead of the ohmmeter to one side of the circuit being tested 3. Connect the other lead to the other end of the circuit being tested. Low or no resistance means good continuity. Testing For A Short To Ground STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING FOR A SHORT TO GROUND 1. Remove the fuse and disconnect all items involved with the fuse. 2. Connect a test light or a voltmeter across the terminals of the fuse. 3. Starting at the fuse block, wiggle the wiring harness about six to eight inches apart and watch the voltmeter/test lamp. 4. If the voltmeter registers voltage or the test lamp glows, there is a short to ground in that general area of the wiring harness. Testing For A Short To Ground On Fuses Powering Several Loads STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING FOR A SHORT TO GROUND ON FUSES POWERING SEVERAL LOADS 1. Refer to the wiring diagrams and disconnect or isolate all items on the suspected fused circuits. 2. Replace the blown fuse. 3. Supply power to the fuse by turning ON the ignition switch or re-connecting the battery. 4. Start connecting or energizing the items in the fuse circuit one at a time. When the fuse blows the circuit with the short to ground has been isolated. Testing For A Voltage Drop STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING FOR A VOLTAGE DROP Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10636 1. Connect the positive lead of the voltmeter to the side of the circuit closest to the battery. 2. Connect the other lead of the voltmeter to the other side of the switch, component or circuit. 3. Operate the item. 4. The voltmeter will show the difference in voltage between the two points. Troubleshooting Wiring Problems DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING - WIRING HARNESS TROUBLESHOOTING TOOLS When diagnosing a problem in an electrical circuit there are several common tools necessary. These tools are listed and explained below. - Jumper Wire - This is a test wire used to connect two points of a circuit. It can be used to bypass an open in a circuit. WARNING: Never use a jumper wire across a load, such as a motor, connected between a battery feed and ground. - Voltmeter - Used to check for voltage on a circuit. Always connect the black lead to a known good ground and the red lead to the positive side of the circuit. CAUTION: Most of the electrical components used in today's vehicles are Solid State. When checking voltages in these circuits, use a meter with a 10 - megohm or greater impedance rating. - Ohmmeter - Used to check the resistance between two points of a circuit. Low or no resistance in a circuit means good continuity. CAUTION: Most of the electrical components used in today's vehicles are Solid State. When checking resistance in these circuits use a meter with a 10 - megohm or greater impedance rating. In addition, make sure the power is disconnected from the circuit. Circuits that are powered up by the vehicle's electrical system can cause damage to the equipment and provide false readings. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10637 - Probing Tools - These tools are used for probing terminals in connectors. Select the proper size tool from Special Tool Package 6807, and insert the probing end (2) into the terminal being tested. Use the other end of the tool (1) to insert the meter probe. INTERMITTENT AND POOR CONNECTIONS Most intermittent electrical problems are caused by faulty electrical connections or wiring. It is also possible for a sticking component or relay to cause a problem. Before condemning a component or wiring assembly, check the following items. - Connectors are fully seated - Spread terminals, or terminal push out - Terminals in the wiring assembly are fully seated into the connector/component and locked into position - Dirt or corrosion on the terminals. Any amount of corrosion or dirt could cause an intermittent problem - Damaged connector/component casing exposing the item to dirt or moisture - Wire insulation that has rubbed through causing a short to ground - Some or all of the wiring strands broken inside of the insulation - Wiring broken inside of the insulation TROUBLESHOOTING WIRING PROBLEMS When troubleshooting wiring problems there are six steps which can aid in the procedure. The steps are listed and explained below. Always check for non-factory items added to the vehicle before doing any diagnosis. If the vehicle is equipped with these items, disconnect them to verify these add-on items are not the cause of the problem. 1. Verify the problem. 2. Verify any related symptoms. Do this by performing operational checks on components that are in the same circuit. Refer to the wiring diagrams. 3. Analyze the symptoms. Use the wiring diagrams to determine what the circuit is doing, where the problem most likely is occurring and where the diagnosis will continue. 4. Isolate the problem area. 5. Repair the problem area. 6. Verify the proper operation. For this step, check for proper operation of all items on the repaired circuit. Refer to the wiring diagrams. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10638 Auxiliary Power Outlet: Connector Views Power Outlet Component ID: 236 Component : POWER OUTLET Connector: Name : POWER OUTLET Color : GRAY # of pins : 3 Pin Circuit Description 1 A205 18RD/OR FUSED B(+) 2-3 Z737 18BK/LB GROUND Component Location - 47 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10639 Power Outlet-Console Component ID: 237 Component : POWER OUTLET-CONSOLE Connector: Name : POWER OUTLET-CONSOLE Color : GRAY # of pins : 3 Pin Circuit Description Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10640 1 A405 18BR FUSED B(+) Pin Circuit Description 1 A405 18RD/DB FUSED B(+) 2-3 Z939 18BK GROUND Power Outlet-Instrument Panel Component ID: 238 Component : POWER OUTLET-INSTRUMENT PANEL Connector: Name : POWER OUTLET-INSTRUMENT PANEL Color : # of pins : 3 Pin Circuit Description 1 F984 16PK/YL FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-ACC) 2-- 3 Z939 18BK GROUND Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10641 Auxiliary Power Outlet: Electrical Diagrams PLEASE NOTE: Some diagrams may appear to be missing because of gaps in the number sequences. These "gaps" are actually for diagrams that do not apply to the vehicle model selected. 8w-41-02 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10642 8w-41-03 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10643 8w-41-04 Other Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by number (i.e. 8W-70-2, etc.) within these diagrams can be found at the vehicle level under Diagrams by Number. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Number Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Description and Operation > Power Outlet-Instrument Panel Auxiliary Power Outlet: Description and Operation Power Outlet-Instrument Panel Description DESCRIPTION A cigar lighter outlet is installed to the left of the center stack area in the lower instrument panel. The cigar lighter outlet is secured by a snap fit within the bezel. The cigar lighter outlet, plastic cap and the knob and heating element unit are available for service replacement. These components cannot be repaired and, if inoperative or damaged, they must be replaced. Operation OPERATION The cigar lighter consists of two major components: a knob and heating element unit, and the cigar lighter base or outlet shell. The receptacle shell is connected to ground, and an insulated contact in the bottom of the shell is connected to battery current. The cigar lighter receives battery voltage from a fuse in the Integrated Power Module (IPM) when the ignition switch is in the Accessory or Run positions. The cigar lighter knob and heating element are encased within a spring-loaded housing, which also features a sliding protective heat shield. When the knob and heating element are inserted in the outlet shell, the heating element resistor coil is grounded through its housing to the outlet shell. If the cigar lighter knob is pushed inward, the heat shield slides up toward the knob exposing the heating element, and the heating element extends from the housing toward the insulated contact in the bottom of the outlet shell. Two small spring-clip retainers are located on either side of the insulated contact inside the bottom of the outlet shell. These clips engage and hold the heating element against the insulated contact long enough for the resistor coil to heat up. When the heating element is engaged with the contact, battery current can flow through the resistor coil to ground, causing the resistor coil to heat. When the resistor coil becomes sufficiently heated, excess heat radiates from the heating element causing the spring-clips to expand. Once the spring-clips expand far enough to release the heating element, the spring-loaded housing forces the knob and heating element to pop back outward to their relaxed position. When the cigar lighter knob and element are pulled out of the outlet shell, the protective heat shield slides downward on the housing so that the heating element is recessed and shielded around its circumference for safety. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Description and Operation > Power Outlet-Instrument Panel > Page 10646 Auxiliary Power Outlet: Description and Operation Power Outlet-Console Description DESCRIPTION Two power outlets are utilized on this model. One in the instrument panel center lower bezel and the other in the center console. The power outlet bases are secured by a snap fit within the instrument panel or trim panel. A plastic protective cap snaps into the power outlet base when the power outlet is not being used, and hangs from the power outlet base mount by an integral bail strap while the power outlet is in use. The power outlet receptacle unit and the accessory power outlet protective cap are available for service. The power outlet receptacle cannot be repaired and, if faulty or damaged, it must be replaced. Operation OPERATION The power outlet base or receptacle shell is connected to ground, and an insulated contact in the bottom of the shell is connected to battery current. The power outlet receives battery voltage from a fuse in the integrated power module at all times. While the power outlet is very similar to a cigar lighter base unit, it does not include the two small spring-clip retainers inside the bottom of the receptacle shell that are used to secure the cigar lighter heating element to the insulated contact. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Cigar Lighter Outlet Auxiliary Power Outlet: Testing and Inspection Cigar Lighter Outlet CIGAR LIGHTER OUTLET For a complete wiring diagram Refer to Diagrams/Electrical. The wiring information includes wiring diagrams, proper wire and connector repair procedures, details of wire harness routing and retention, connector pin-out information and location views for the various wire harness connectors, splices and grounds. 1. Check the fused B(+) fuse in the Integrated Power Module (IPM). If OK, go to STEP 2. If not OK, repair the shorted circuit or component as required and replace the inoperative fuse. 2. Turn the ignition switch to the Run position. Check for battery voltage at the fused B(+) fuse in the IPM. If OK, go to STEP 3. If not OK, repair the open or short as required. 3. Remove the cigar lighter knob and element from the cigar lighter outlet shell. Check for continuity between the inside circumference of the cigar lighter outlet shell and a good ground. there should be continuity. If OK, go to STEP 4. If not OK, go to STEP 5. 4. Turn the ignition switch to the Run position. Check for battery voltage at the insulated contact located at the back of the cigar lighter outlet shell. If OK, replace the inoperative cigar lighter knob and element. If not OK, go to STEP 5. 5. Turn the ignition switch to the Off position. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. Check for continuity between the ground circuit cavity of the cigar lighter wire harness connector and a good ground. There should be continuity. If OK, go to STEP 6. If not OK, repair the open ground circuit to ground as required. 6. Connect the battery negative cable. Turn the ignition switch to the Accessory or Run positions. Check for battery voltage at the fused B(+) circuit cavity of the cigar lighter wire harness connector. If OK, replace the inoperative cigar lighter outlet. If not OK, repair the open fused B(+) circuit to the IPM fuse as required. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Cigar Lighter Outlet > Page 10649 Auxiliary Power Outlet: Testing and Inspection Power Outlet POWER OUTLET For a complete wiring diagram Refer to Diagrams/Electrical. The wiring information includes wiring diagrams, proper wire and connector repair procedures, details of wire harness routing and retention, connector pin-out information and location views for the various wire harness connectors, splices and grounds. 1. Check the fused B(+) fuse in the Integrated Power Module (IPM). If OK, go to STEP 2. If not OK, repair the shorted circuit or component as required and replace the inoperative fuse. 2. Turn the ignition switch to the Run position. Check for battery voltage at the fused B(+) fuse in the IPM. If OK, go to STEP 3. If not OK, repair the open or short as required. 3. Remove the cigar lighter knob and element from the cigar lighter outlet shell. Check for continuity between the inside circumference of the cigar lighter outlet shell and a good ground. there should be continuity. If OK, go to STEP 4. If not OK, go to STEP 5. 4. Turn the ignition switch to the Run position. Check for battery voltage at the insulated contact located at the back of the cigar lighter outlet shell. If OK, replace the inoperative cigar lighter knob and element. If not OK, go to STEP 5. 5. Turn the ignition switch to the Off position. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. Check for continuity between the ground circuit cavity of the cigar lighter wire harness connector and a good ground. There should be continuity. If OK, go to STEP 6. If not OK, repair the open ground circuit to ground as required. 6. Connect the battery negative cable. Turn the ignition switch to the Accessory or Run positions. Check for battery voltage at the fused B(+) circuit cavity of the cigar lighter wire harness connector. If OK, replace the inoperative cigar lighter outlet. If not OK, repair the open fused B(+) circuit to the IPM fuse as required. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Service and Repair > Power Outlet-Instrument Panel Auxiliary Power Outlet: Service and Repair Power Outlet-Instrument Panel Removal REMOVAL 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. 2. Pull the cigar lighter knob and element (1) out of the cigar lighter receptacle base (6), or unsnap the protective cap from the power outlet receptacle base (6). 3. Look inside the cigar lighter or power outlet receptacle base and note the position of the rectangular retaining bosses (3) of the mount that secures the receptacle base to the panel (4). 4. Insert a pair of external snap ring pliers (5) into the cigar lighter or power outlet receptacle base and engage the tips of the pliers with the retaining bosses of the mount. 5. Squeeze the pliers to disengage the mount retaining bosses from the receptacle base and, using a gentle rocking motion, pull the pliers and the receptacle base out of the mount. 6. Pull the receptacle base away from the instrument panel far enough to access the instrument panel wire harness connector (2). 7. Disconnect the instrument panel wire harness connector (2) from the cigar lighter or power outlet receptacle base (6). 8. Remove the cigar lighter or power outlet mount from the instrument panel. Installation INSTALLATION 1. Connect the instrument panel wire harness connector to the cigar lighter or power outlet receptacle base connector receptacle. 2. Install the cigar lighter or power outlet mount into the instrument panel. 3. Align the splines on the outside of the cigar lighter or power outlet receptacle base connector receptacle with the grooves on the inside of the mount. 4. Press firmly on the cigar lighter or power outlet receptacle base until the retaining bosses of the mount are fully engaged in their receptacles. 5. Install the cigar lighter knob and element into the cigar lighter receptacle base, or the protective cap into the power outlet receptacle base. 6. Connect the battery negative cable. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Service and Repair > Power Outlet-Instrument Panel > Page 10652 Auxiliary Power Outlet: Service and Repair Power Outlet-Console Removal REMOVAL 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. 2. Pull the cigar lighter knob and element (1) out of the cigar lighter receptacle base (6), or unsnap the protective cap from the power outlet receptacle base (6). 3. Look inside the cigar lighter or power outlet receptacle base and note the position of the rectangular retaining bosses (3) of the mount that secures the receptacle base to the panel (4). 4. Insert a pair of external snap ring pliers (5) into the cigar lighter or power outlet receptacle base and engage the tips of the pliers with the retaining bosses of the mount. 5. Squeeze the pliers to disengage the mount retaining bosses from the receptacle base and, using a gentle rocking motion, pull the pliers and the receptacle base out of the mount. 6. Pull the receptacle base away from the instrument panel far enough to access the instrument panel wire harness connector (2). 7. Disconnect the instrument panel wire harness connector (2) from the cigar lighter or power outlet receptacle base (6). 8. Remove the cigar lighter or power outlet mount from the instrument panel. Installation INSTALLATION 1. Connect the instrument panel wire harness connector to the cigar lighter or power outlet receptacle base connector receptacle. 2. Install the cigar lighter or power outlet mount into the instrument panel. 3. Align the splines on the outside of the cigar lighter or power outlet receptacle base connector receptacle with the grooves on the inside of the mount. 4. Press firmly on the cigar lighter or power outlet receptacle base until the retaining bosses of the mount are fully engaged in their receptacles. 5. Install the cigar lighter knob and element into the cigar lighter receptacle base, or the protective cap into the power outlet receptacle base. 6. Connect the battery negative cable. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Locations Fuse: Locations An integrated Power Module is located in the engine compartment near the battery. This center contains cartridge fuses and mini fuses. A description of each fuse and component may be stamped on the inside cover otherwise the cavity number of each fuse is stamped on the inside cover that corresponds to the following chart. Underhood Fuses (Integrated Power Module) Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Locations > Page 10656 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Locations > Page 10657 CAUTION: - When installing the Integrated Power Module cover, it is important to ensure the cover is properly positioned and fully latched. Failure to do so may allow water to get into the Integrated Power Module, and possibly result in a electrical system failure. - When replacing a blown fuse, it is important to use only a fuse having the correct amperage rating. The use of a fuse with a rating other than indicated may result in a dangerous electrical system overload. If a properly rated fuse continues to blow, it indicates a problem in the circuit that must be corrected. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Fuse: Diagram Information and Instructions Warnings WARNINGS - GENERAL WARNINGS provide information to prevent personal injury and vehicle damage. Below is a list of general warnings that should be followed any time a vehicle is being serviced. WARNING: Always wear safety glasses for eye protection. WARNING: Use safety stands anytime a procedure requires being under a vehicle. WARNING: Be sure that the ignition switch always is in the off position, unless the procedure requires it to be on. WARNING: Set the parking brake when working on any vehicle. An automatic transmission should be in park. A manual transmission should be in neutral. WARNING: Operate the engine only in a well-ventilated area. WARNING: Keep away from moving parts when the engine is running, especially the fan and belts. WARNING: To prevent serious burns, avoid contact with hot parts such as the radiator, exhaust manifold(s), tail pipe, catalytic converter and muffler. WARNING: Do not allow flame or sparks near the battery. Gases are always present in and around the battery. WARNING: Always remove rings, watches, loose hanging jewelry and avoid loose clothing. How to Use Wiring Diagrams DESCRIPTION - HOW TO USE WIRING DIAGRAMS DaimlerChrysler Corporation wiring diagrams are designed to provide information regarding the vehicles wiring content. In order to effectively use the wiring diagrams to diagnose and repair DaimlerChrysler Corporation vehicles, it is important to understand all of their features and characteristics. Diagrams are arranged such that the power (B+) side of the circuit is placed near the top of the page, and the ground (B-) side of the circuit is placed near the bottom of the page. All switches, components, and modules are shown in the at rest position with the doors closed and the key removed from the ignition. Components are shown two ways. A solid line around a component indicates that the component is complete. A dashed line around the component indicates that the component is being shown is not complete. Incomplete components have a reference number to indicate the page where the component is shown complete. It is important to realize that no attempt is made on the diagrams to represent components and wiring as they appear on the vehicle. For example, a short piece of wire is treated the same as a long one. In addition, switches and other components are shown as simply as possible, with regard to function only. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10660 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10661 SYMBOLS International symbols are used throughout the wiring diagrams. These symbols are consistent with those being used around the world. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10662 TERMINOLOGY This is a list of terms and definitions used in the wiring diagrams. LHD - Left Hand Drive Vehicles RHD - Right Hand Drive Vehicles ATX - Automatic Transmissions-Front Wheel Drive MTX Manual Transmissions-Front Wheel Drive Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10663 AT - Automatic Transmissions-Rear Wheel Drive MT - Manual Transmissions-Rear Wheel Drive SOHC - Single Over Head Cam Engine DOHC - Double Over Head Cam Engine Export - Vehicles Built For Sale In Markets Other Than North America Except Export - Vehicles Built For Sale In North America Circuit Functions DESCRIPTION - CIRCUIT FUNCTIONS All circuits in the diagrams use an alpha/numeric code to identify the wire and it's function. To identify which circuit code applies to a system, refer to the Circuit Identification Code Chart. This chart shows the main circuits only and does not show the secondary codes that may apply to some models. Circuit Information DESCRIPTION - CIRCUIT INFORMATION Each wire shown in the diagrams contains a code which identifies the main circuit, a specific part of the main circuit, gage of wire, and color. An example would be A 2 18 LB/YL. This is a Battery Feed circuit, level two, eighteen gauge, light blue with a yellow tracer. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10664 Connector, Ground and Splice Information DESCRIPTION - CONNECTOR, GROUND AND SPLICE INFORMATION CAUTION: Not all connectors are serviced. Some connectors are serviced only with a harness. A typical example might be the Supplemental Restraint System connectors. Always check parts availability before attempting a repair. IDENTIFICATION In-line connectors are identified by a number, as follows: - In-line connectors located in the engine compartment are C100 series numbers. - In-line connectors located in the instrument panel area are C200 series numbers. - In-line connectors located in the body are C300 series numbers. - Jumper harness connectors are C400 series numbers. - Grounds and ground connectors are identified with a "G" and follow the same series numbering as the in-line connectors. - Splices are identified with an "S" and follow the same series numbering as the in-line connectors. In addition, S001-S099 numbers are located in the engine compartment. - Component connectors are identified by the component name instead of a number. Multiple connectors on a component use a C1, C2, etc. identifier. LOCATIONS Vehicle/Locations contains the master connector/ground/splice location index charts with hyperlinks to the applicable location illustrations. The illustrations contain the connector name (or number)/ground number/splice number and component identification. The abbreviation T/O is used in the component location section to indicate a point in which the wiring harness branches out to a component. The abbreviation N/S means Not Shown in the illustrations Section Identification and Information DESCRIPTION - SECTION IDENTIFICATION AND INFORMATION The wiring diagrams are grouped into individual sections. If a component is most likely found in a particular group, it will be shown complete (all wires, Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10665 connectors, and pins) within that group. For example, the Auto Shutdown Relay is most likely to be found in Powertrain Management, so it is shown there complete. It can, however, be shown partially in another group if it contains some associated wiring. Splice diagrams show the entire splice and provide references to other sections the splices serves. Splice Information only contains splice diagrams that are not shown in their entirety somewhere else in the wiring diagrams. Connector Pin-Outs shows each connector and the circuits involved with that connector. The connectors are identified using the name/number on the diagram pages. Removal REMOVAL 1. Disconnect battery. 2. Release Connector Lock (2). 3. Disconnect the connector (3) being repaired from its mating half/component. 4. Remove the dress cover (if applicable) (1). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10666 5. Release the Secondary Terminal Lock, if required (1). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10667 6. Position the connector locking finger away from the terminal using the proper special tool. Pull on the wire to remove the terminal from the connector. Installation Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10668 INSTALLATION 1. Insert the removed terminal in the same cavity on the repair connector. 2. Repeat steps for each terminal in the connector, being sure that all wires are inserted into the proper cavities. For additional connector pin-out identification, refer to the wiring diagrams. 3. When the connector is re-assembled, the secondary terminal lock must be placed in the locked position to prevent terminal push out. 4. Replace dress cover (if applicable). 5. Connect connector to its mating half/component. 6. Connect battery and test all affected systems. Removal REMOVAL 1. Disconnect the battery. 2. Locate the diode in the harness, and remove the protective covering. 3. Remove the diode from the harness, pay attention to the current flow direction (1) (2) (3). Installation INSTALLATION 1. Remove the insulation from the wires in the harness. Only remove enough insulation to solder in the new diode. 2. Install the new diode in the harness, making sure current flow is correct. If necessary, refer to the appropriate wiring diagram for current flow. 3. Solder the connection together using rosin core type solder only. Do not use acid core solder. 4. Tape the diode to the harness using electrical tape. Make sure the diode is completely sealed from the elements. 5. Re-connect the battery and test affected systems. Removal REMOVAL 1. Follow steps for removing terminals described in the connector removal section. 2. Cut the wire 6 inches from the back of the connector. Installation INSTALLATION 1. Select a wire from the terminal repair kit that best matches the color and gage of the wire being repaired. 2. Cut the repair wire to the proper length and remove one-half (1/2) inch of insulation. 3. Splice the repair wire to the wire harness (see wire splicing procedure). See: Service Procedures/Wire Splicing 4. Insert the repaired wire into the connector. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10669 5. Install the connector locking wedge, if required, and reconnect the connector to its mating half/component. 6. Re-tape the wire harness starting at 1-1/2 inches behind the connector and 2 inches past the repair. 7. Connect battery and test all affected systems. Wire Splicing STANDARD PROCEDURE - WIRE SPLICING When splicing a wire, it is important that the correct gage be used as shown in the wiring diagrams. 1. Remove one-half (1/2) inch of insulation from each wire that needs to be spliced. 2. Place a piece of adhesive lined heat shrink tubing on one side of the wire. Make sure the tubing will be long enough to cover and seal the entire repair area. 3. Place the strands of wire overlapping each other inside of the splice clip (1). 4. Using crimping tool (1), Mopar p/n 05019912AA, crimp the splice clip and wires together. 5. Solder (3) the connection (2) together using rosin core type solder (1) only. CAUTION: DO NOT USE ACID CORE SOLDER. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10670 6. Center the heat shrink tubing (2) over the joint and heat using a heat gun. Heat the joint until the tubing is tightly sealed and sealant (1) comes out of both ends of the tubing. Special Tools WIRING/TERMINAL PROBING TOOL PACKAGE 6807 TERMINAL PICK TOOL SET 6680 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10671 TERMINAL REMOVING TOOLS 6932 AND 8638 TERMINAL REMOVING TOOL 6934 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10672 Fuse: Diagnostic Aids Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) Sensitive Devices STANDARD PROCEDURE - ELECTROSTATIC DISCHARGE (ESD) SENSITIVE DEVICES All ESD sensitive components are solid state and a symbol is used to indicate this. When handling any component with this symbol, comply with the following procedures to reduce the possibility of electrostatic charge build up on the body and inadvertent discharge into the component. If it is not known whether the part is ESD sensitive, assume that it is. 1. Always touch a known good ground before handling the part. This should be repeated while handling the part and more frequently after sliding across a seat, sitting down from a standing position, or walking a distance. 2. Avoid touching electrical terminals of the part, unless instructed to do so by a written procedure. 3. When using a voltmeter, be sure to connect the ground lead first. 4. Do not remove the part from it's protective packing until it is time to install the part. 5. Before removing the part from it's package, ground the package to a known good ground on the vehicle. Testing Of Voltage Potential STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING OF VOLTAGE POTENTIAL 1. Connect the ground lead of a voltmeter to a known good ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the voltmeter to the selected test point. The vehicle ignition may need to be turned ON to check voltage. Refer to the appropriate test procedure. Testing For Continuity Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10673 STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING FOR CONTINUITY 1. Remove the fuse (1) for the circuit being checked or, disconnect the battery. 2. Connect one lead of the ohmmeter to one side of the circuit being tested 3. Connect the other lead to the other end of the circuit being tested. Low or no resistance means good continuity. Testing For A Short To Ground STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING FOR A SHORT TO GROUND 1. Remove the fuse and disconnect all items involved with the fuse. 2. Connect a test light or a voltmeter across the terminals of the fuse. 3. Starting at the fuse block, wiggle the wiring harness about six to eight inches apart and watch the voltmeter/test lamp. 4. If the voltmeter registers voltage or the test lamp glows, there is a short to ground in that general area of the wiring harness. Testing For A Short To Ground On Fuses Powering Several Loads STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING FOR A SHORT TO GROUND ON FUSES POWERING SEVERAL LOADS 1. Refer to the wiring diagrams and disconnect or isolate all items on the suspected fused circuits. 2. Replace the blown fuse. 3. Supply power to the fuse by turning ON the ignition switch or re-connecting the battery. 4. Start connecting or energizing the items in the fuse circuit one at a time. When the fuse blows the circuit with the short to ground has been isolated. Testing For A Voltage Drop STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING FOR A VOLTAGE DROP Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10674 1. Connect the positive lead of the voltmeter to the side of the circuit closest to the battery. 2. Connect the other lead of the voltmeter to the other side of the switch, component or circuit. 3. Operate the item. 4. The voltmeter will show the difference in voltage between the two points. Troubleshooting Wiring Problems DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING - WIRING HARNESS TROUBLESHOOTING TOOLS When diagnosing a problem in an electrical circuit there are several common tools necessary. These tools are listed and explained below. - Jumper Wire - This is a test wire used to connect two points of a circuit. It can be used to bypass an open in a circuit. WARNING: Never use a jumper wire across a load, such as a motor, connected between a battery feed and ground. - Voltmeter - Used to check for voltage on a circuit. Always connect the black lead to a known good ground and the red lead to the positive side of the circuit. CAUTION: Most of the electrical components used in today's vehicles are Solid State. When checking voltages in these circuits, use a meter with a 10 - megohm or greater impedance rating. - Ohmmeter - Used to check the resistance between two points of a circuit. Low or no resistance in a circuit means good continuity. CAUTION: Most of the electrical components used in today's vehicles are Solid State. When checking resistance in these circuits use a meter with a 10 - megohm or greater impedance rating. In addition, make sure the power is disconnected from the circuit. Circuits that are powered up by the vehicle's electrical system can cause damage to the equipment and provide false readings. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10675 - Probing Tools - These tools are used for probing terminals in connectors. Select the proper size tool from Special Tool Package 6807, and insert the probing end (2) into the terminal being tested. Use the other end of the tool (1) to insert the meter probe. INTERMITTENT AND POOR CONNECTIONS Most intermittent electrical problems are caused by faulty electrical connections or wiring. It is also possible for a sticking component or relay to cause a problem. Before condemning a component or wiring assembly, check the following items. - Connectors are fully seated - Spread terminals, or terminal push out - Terminals in the wiring assembly are fully seated into the connector/component and locked into position - Dirt or corrosion on the terminals. Any amount of corrosion or dirt could cause an intermittent problem - Damaged connector/component casing exposing the item to dirt or moisture - Wire insulation that has rubbed through causing a short to ground - Some or all of the wiring strands broken inside of the insulation - Wiring broken inside of the insulation TROUBLESHOOTING WIRING PROBLEMS When troubleshooting wiring problems there are six steps which can aid in the procedure. The steps are listed and explained below. Always check for non-factory items added to the vehicle before doing any diagnosis. If the vehicle is equipped with these items, disconnect them to verify these add-on items are not the cause of the problem. 1. Verify the problem. 2. Verify any related symptoms. Do this by performing operational checks on components that are in the same circuit. Refer to the wiring diagrams. 3. Analyze the symptoms. Use the wiring diagrams to determine what the circuit is doing, where the problem most likely is occurring and where the diagnosis will continue. 4. Isolate the problem area. 5. Repair the problem area. 6. Verify the proper operation. For this step, check for proper operation of all items on the repaired circuit. Refer to the wiring diagrams. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 10676 Fuse: Application and ID An integrated Power Module is located in the engine compartment near the battery. This center contains cartridge fuses and mini fuses. A description of each fuse and component may be stamped on the inside cover otherwise the cavity number of each fuse is stamped on the inside cover that corresponds to the following chart. Underhood Fuses (Integrated Power Module) Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 10677 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 10678 CAUTION: - When installing the Integrated Power Module cover, it is important to ensure the cover is properly positioned and fully latched. Failure to do so may allow water to get into the Integrated Power Module, and possibly result in a electrical system failure. - When replacing a blown fuse, it is important to use only a fuse having the correct amperage rating. The use of a fuse with a rating other than indicated may result in a dangerous electrical system overload. If a properly rated fuse continues to blow, it indicates a problem in the circuit that must be corrected. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Fuse: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION All vehicles are equipped with an Ignition-Off Draw (IOD) fuse that is disconnected within the Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) when the vehicle is shipped from the factory. Dealer personnel are to reconnect the IOD fuse in the TIPM as part of the new vehicle preparation procedures and then disconnect it again until new vehicle delivery to the customer. A laser printed fuse layout map is integral to the TIPM cover to ensure proper fuse identification. The IOD fuse is a 20 ampere mini blade-type fuse. The fuse is secured within a black molded plastic fuse holder and puller unit that serves both as a tool for disconnecting and reconnecting the fuse in the TIPM cavity, and as a fuse holder that conveniently stores the fuse in the same cavity after it has been disconnected. CIRCUITS INCLUDED WITH IOD FUSE - Cluster (CCN) - Diagnostic Connector - Map Lamps - Glove Box Lamp - Courtesy Lamps - Radio - Underhood Lamp Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 10681 Fuse: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The term Ignition-Off Draw (IOD) identifies a normal condition where power is being drained from the battery with the ignition switch in the Off position. The IOD fuse feeds the memory and sleep mode functions for some of the electronic modules in the vehicle as well as various other accessories that require battery current when the ignition switch is in the Off position. The only reason the IOD fuse is disconnected is to reduce the normal IOD of the vehicle electrical system during new vehicle transportation and pre-delivery storage to reduce battery depletion, while still allowing vehicle operation so that the vehicle can be loaded, unloaded and moved as needed by both vehicle transportation company and dealer personnel. The IOD fuse is disconnected from Integrated Power Module (IPM) fuse cavity # 51 when the vehicle is shipped from the assembly plant. Dealer personnel must reconnect the IOD fuse when the vehicle is being prepared for delivery in order to restore full electrical system operation. Once the vehicle is prepared for delivery, the IOD function of this fuse becomes transparent and the fuse that has been assigned the IOD designation becomes only another Fused B(+) circuit fuse. The IOD fuse can be used by the vehicle owner as a convenient means of reducing battery depletion when a vehicle is to be stored for periods not to exceed about thirty days. However, it must be remembered that disconnecting the IOD fuse will not eliminate IOD, but only reduce this normal condition. If a vehicle will be stored for more than about thirty days, the battery negative cable should be disconnected to eliminate normal IOD; and, the battery should be tested and recharged at regular intervals during the vehicle storage period to prevent the battery from becoming discharged or damaged. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Locations Fuse Block: Locations An integrated Power Module is located in the engine compartment near the battery. This center contains cartridge fuses and mini fuses. A description of each fuse and component may be stamped on the inside cover otherwise the cavity number of each fuse is stamped on the inside cover that corresponds to the following chart. Underhood Fuses (Integrated Power Module) Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Locations > Page 10685 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Locations > Page 10686 CAUTION: - When installing the Integrated Power Module cover, it is important to ensure the cover is properly positioned and fully latched. Failure to do so may allow water to get into the Integrated Power Module, and possibly result in a electrical system failure. - When replacing a blown fuse, it is important to use only a fuse having the correct amperage rating. The use of a fuse with a rating other than indicated may result in a dangerous electrical system overload. If a properly rated fuse continues to blow, it indicates a problem in the circuit that must be corrected. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Fuse Block: Diagram Information and Instructions Warnings WARNINGS - GENERAL WARNINGS provide information to prevent personal injury and vehicle damage. Below is a list of general warnings that should be followed any time a vehicle is being serviced. WARNING: Always wear safety glasses for eye protection. WARNING: Use safety stands anytime a procedure requires being under a vehicle. WARNING: Be sure that the ignition switch always is in the off position, unless the procedure requires it to be on. WARNING: Set the parking brake when working on any vehicle. An automatic transmission should be in park. A manual transmission should be in neutral. WARNING: Operate the engine only in a well-ventilated area. WARNING: Keep away from moving parts when the engine is running, especially the fan and belts. WARNING: To prevent serious burns, avoid contact with hot parts such as the radiator, exhaust manifold(s), tail pipe, catalytic converter and muffler. WARNING: Do not allow flame or sparks near the battery. Gases are always present in and around the battery. WARNING: Always remove rings, watches, loose hanging jewelry and avoid loose clothing. How to Use Wiring Diagrams DESCRIPTION - HOW TO USE WIRING DIAGRAMS DaimlerChrysler Corporation wiring diagrams are designed to provide information regarding the vehicles wiring content. In order to effectively use the wiring diagrams to diagnose and repair DaimlerChrysler Corporation vehicles, it is important to understand all of their features and characteristics. Diagrams are arranged such that the power (B+) side of the circuit is placed near the top of the page, and the ground (B-) side of the circuit is placed near the bottom of the page. All switches, components, and modules are shown in the at rest position with the doors closed and the key removed from the ignition. Components are shown two ways. A solid line around a component indicates that the component is complete. A dashed line around the component indicates that the component is being shown is not complete. Incomplete components have a reference number to indicate the page where the component is shown complete. It is important to realize that no attempt is made on the diagrams to represent components and wiring as they appear on the vehicle. For example, a short piece of wire is treated the same as a long one. In addition, switches and other components are shown as simply as possible, with regard to function only. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10689 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10690 SYMBOLS International symbols are used throughout the wiring diagrams. These symbols are consistent with those being used around the world. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10691 TERMINOLOGY This is a list of terms and definitions used in the wiring diagrams. LHD - Left Hand Drive Vehicles RHD - Right Hand Drive Vehicles ATX - Automatic Transmissions-Front Wheel Drive MTX Manual Transmissions-Front Wheel Drive Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10692 AT - Automatic Transmissions-Rear Wheel Drive MT - Manual Transmissions-Rear Wheel Drive SOHC - Single Over Head Cam Engine DOHC - Double Over Head Cam Engine Export - Vehicles Built For Sale In Markets Other Than North America Except Export - Vehicles Built For Sale In North America Circuit Functions DESCRIPTION - CIRCUIT FUNCTIONS All circuits in the diagrams use an alpha/numeric code to identify the wire and it's function. To identify which circuit code applies to a system, refer to the Circuit Identification Code Chart. This chart shows the main circuits only and does not show the secondary codes that may apply to some models. Circuit Information DESCRIPTION - CIRCUIT INFORMATION Each wire shown in the diagrams contains a code which identifies the main circuit, a specific part of the main circuit, gage of wire, and color. An example would be A 2 18 LB/YL. This is a Battery Feed circuit, level two, eighteen gauge, light blue with a yellow tracer. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10693 Connector, Ground and Splice Information DESCRIPTION - CONNECTOR, GROUND AND SPLICE INFORMATION CAUTION: Not all connectors are serviced. Some connectors are serviced only with a harness. A typical example might be the Supplemental Restraint System connectors. Always check parts availability before attempting a repair. IDENTIFICATION In-line connectors are identified by a number, as follows: - In-line connectors located in the engine compartment are C100 series numbers. - In-line connectors located in the instrument panel area are C200 series numbers. - In-line connectors located in the body are C300 series numbers. - Jumper harness connectors are C400 series numbers. - Grounds and ground connectors are identified with a "G" and follow the same series numbering as the in-line connectors. - Splices are identified with an "S" and follow the same series numbering as the in-line connectors. In addition, S001-S099 numbers are located in the engine compartment. - Component connectors are identified by the component name instead of a number. Multiple connectors on a component use a C1, C2, etc. identifier. LOCATIONS Vehicle/Locations contains the master connector/ground/splice location index charts with hyperlinks to the applicable location illustrations. The illustrations contain the connector name (or number)/ground number/splice number and component identification. The abbreviation T/O is used in the component location section to indicate a point in which the wiring harness branches out to a component. The abbreviation N/S means Not Shown in the illustrations Section Identification and Information DESCRIPTION - SECTION IDENTIFICATION AND INFORMATION The wiring diagrams are grouped into individual sections. If a component is most likely found in a particular group, it will be shown complete (all wires, Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10694 connectors, and pins) within that group. For example, the Auto Shutdown Relay is most likely to be found in Powertrain Management, so it is shown there complete. It can, however, be shown partially in another group if it contains some associated wiring. Splice diagrams show the entire splice and provide references to other sections the splices serves. Splice Information only contains splice diagrams that are not shown in their entirety somewhere else in the wiring diagrams. Connector Pin-Outs shows each connector and the circuits involved with that connector. The connectors are identified using the name/number on the diagram pages. Removal REMOVAL 1. Disconnect battery. 2. Release Connector Lock (2). 3. Disconnect the connector (3) being repaired from its mating half/component. 4. Remove the dress cover (if applicable) (1). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10695 5. Release the Secondary Terminal Lock, if required (1). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10696 6. Position the connector locking finger away from the terminal using the proper special tool. Pull on the wire to remove the terminal from the connector. Installation Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10697 INSTALLATION 1. Insert the removed terminal in the same cavity on the repair connector. 2. Repeat steps for each terminal in the connector, being sure that all wires are inserted into the proper cavities. For additional connector pin-out identification, refer to the wiring diagrams. 3. When the connector is re-assembled, the secondary terminal lock must be placed in the locked position to prevent terminal push out. 4. Replace dress cover (if applicable). 5. Connect connector to its mating half/component. 6. Connect battery and test all affected systems. Removal REMOVAL 1. Disconnect the battery. 2. Locate the diode in the harness, and remove the protective covering. 3. Remove the diode from the harness, pay attention to the current flow direction (1) (2) (3). Installation INSTALLATION 1. Remove the insulation from the wires in the harness. Only remove enough insulation to solder in the new diode. 2. Install the new diode in the harness, making sure current flow is correct. If necessary, refer to the appropriate wiring diagram for current flow. 3. Solder the connection together using rosin core type solder only. Do not use acid core solder. 4. Tape the diode to the harness using electrical tape. Make sure the diode is completely sealed from the elements. 5. Re-connect the battery and test affected systems. Removal REMOVAL 1. Follow steps for removing terminals described in the connector removal section. 2. Cut the wire 6 inches from the back of the connector. Installation INSTALLATION 1. Select a wire from the terminal repair kit that best matches the color and gage of the wire being repaired. 2. Cut the repair wire to the proper length and remove one-half (1/2) inch of insulation. 3. Splice the repair wire to the wire harness (see wire splicing procedure). See: Service Procedures/Wire Splicing 4. Insert the repaired wire into the connector. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10698 5. Install the connector locking wedge, if required, and reconnect the connector to its mating half/component. 6. Re-tape the wire harness starting at 1-1/2 inches behind the connector and 2 inches past the repair. 7. Connect battery and test all affected systems. Wire Splicing STANDARD PROCEDURE - WIRE SPLICING When splicing a wire, it is important that the correct gage be used as shown in the wiring diagrams. 1. Remove one-half (1/2) inch of insulation from each wire that needs to be spliced. 2. Place a piece of adhesive lined heat shrink tubing on one side of the wire. Make sure the tubing will be long enough to cover and seal the entire repair area. 3. Place the strands of wire overlapping each other inside of the splice clip (1). 4. Using crimping tool (1), Mopar p/n 05019912AA, crimp the splice clip and wires together. 5. Solder (3) the connection (2) together using rosin core type solder (1) only. CAUTION: DO NOT USE ACID CORE SOLDER. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10699 6. Center the heat shrink tubing (2) over the joint and heat using a heat gun. Heat the joint until the tubing is tightly sealed and sealant (1) comes out of both ends of the tubing. Special Tools WIRING/TERMINAL PROBING TOOL PACKAGE 6807 TERMINAL PICK TOOL SET 6680 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10700 TERMINAL REMOVING TOOLS 6932 AND 8638 TERMINAL REMOVING TOOL 6934 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10701 Fuse Block: Diagnostic Aids Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) Sensitive Devices STANDARD PROCEDURE - ELECTROSTATIC DISCHARGE (ESD) SENSITIVE DEVICES All ESD sensitive components are solid state and a symbol is used to indicate this. When handling any component with this symbol, comply with the following procedures to reduce the possibility of electrostatic charge build up on the body and inadvertent discharge into the component. If it is not known whether the part is ESD sensitive, assume that it is. 1. Always touch a known good ground before handling the part. This should be repeated while handling the part and more frequently after sliding across a seat, sitting down from a standing position, or walking a distance. 2. Avoid touching electrical terminals of the part, unless instructed to do so by a written procedure. 3. When using a voltmeter, be sure to connect the ground lead first. 4. Do not remove the part from it's protective packing until it is time to install the part. 5. Before removing the part from it's package, ground the package to a known good ground on the vehicle. Testing Of Voltage Potential STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING OF VOLTAGE POTENTIAL 1. Connect the ground lead of a voltmeter to a known good ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the voltmeter to the selected test point. The vehicle ignition may need to be turned ON to check voltage. Refer to the appropriate test procedure. Testing For Continuity Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10702 STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING FOR CONTINUITY 1. Remove the fuse (1) for the circuit being checked or, disconnect the battery. 2. Connect one lead of the ohmmeter to one side of the circuit being tested 3. Connect the other lead to the other end of the circuit being tested. Low or no resistance means good continuity. Testing For A Short To Ground STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING FOR A SHORT TO GROUND 1. Remove the fuse and disconnect all items involved with the fuse. 2. Connect a test light or a voltmeter across the terminals of the fuse. 3. Starting at the fuse block, wiggle the wiring harness about six to eight inches apart and watch the voltmeter/test lamp. 4. If the voltmeter registers voltage or the test lamp glows, there is a short to ground in that general area of the wiring harness. Testing For A Short To Ground On Fuses Powering Several Loads STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING FOR A SHORT TO GROUND ON FUSES POWERING SEVERAL LOADS 1. Refer to the wiring diagrams and disconnect or isolate all items on the suspected fused circuits. 2. Replace the blown fuse. 3. Supply power to the fuse by turning ON the ignition switch or re-connecting the battery. 4. Start connecting or energizing the items in the fuse circuit one at a time. When the fuse blows the circuit with the short to ground has been isolated. Testing For A Voltage Drop STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING FOR A VOLTAGE DROP Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10703 1. Connect the positive lead of the voltmeter to the side of the circuit closest to the battery. 2. Connect the other lead of the voltmeter to the other side of the switch, component or circuit. 3. Operate the item. 4. The voltmeter will show the difference in voltage between the two points. Troubleshooting Wiring Problems DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING - WIRING HARNESS TROUBLESHOOTING TOOLS When diagnosing a problem in an electrical circuit there are several common tools necessary. These tools are listed and explained below. - Jumper Wire - This is a test wire used to connect two points of a circuit. It can be used to bypass an open in a circuit. WARNING: Never use a jumper wire across a load, such as a motor, connected between a battery feed and ground. - Voltmeter - Used to check for voltage on a circuit. Always connect the black lead to a known good ground and the red lead to the positive side of the circuit. CAUTION: Most of the electrical components used in today's vehicles are Solid State. When checking voltages in these circuits, use a meter with a 10 - megohm or greater impedance rating. - Ohmmeter - Used to check the resistance between two points of a circuit. Low or no resistance in a circuit means good continuity. CAUTION: Most of the electrical components used in today's vehicles are Solid State. When checking resistance in these circuits use a meter with a 10 - megohm or greater impedance rating. In addition, make sure the power is disconnected from the circuit. Circuits that are powered up by the vehicle's electrical system can cause damage to the equipment and provide false readings. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10704 - Probing Tools - These tools are used for probing terminals in connectors. Select the proper size tool from Special Tool Package 6807, and insert the probing end (2) into the terminal being tested. Use the other end of the tool (1) to insert the meter probe. INTERMITTENT AND POOR CONNECTIONS Most intermittent electrical problems are caused by faulty electrical connections or wiring. It is also possible for a sticking component or relay to cause a problem. Before condemning a component or wiring assembly, check the following items. - Connectors are fully seated - Spread terminals, or terminal push out - Terminals in the wiring assembly are fully seated into the connector/component and locked into position - Dirt or corrosion on the terminals. Any amount of corrosion or dirt could cause an intermittent problem - Damaged connector/component casing exposing the item to dirt or moisture - Wire insulation that has rubbed through causing a short to ground - Some or all of the wiring strands broken inside of the insulation - Wiring broken inside of the insulation TROUBLESHOOTING WIRING PROBLEMS When troubleshooting wiring problems there are six steps which can aid in the procedure. The steps are listed and explained below. Always check for non-factory items added to the vehicle before doing any diagnosis. If the vehicle is equipped with these items, disconnect them to verify these add-on items are not the cause of the problem. 1. Verify the problem. 2. Verify any related symptoms. Do this by performing operational checks on components that are in the same circuit. Refer to the wiring diagrams. 3. Analyze the symptoms. Use the wiring diagrams to determine what the circuit is doing, where the problem most likely is occurring and where the diagnosis will continue. 4. Isolate the problem area. 5. Repair the problem area. 6. Verify the proper operation. For this step, check for proper operation of all items on the repaired circuit. Refer to the wiring diagrams. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 10705 Fuse Block: Application and ID An integrated Power Module is located in the engine compartment near the battery. This center contains cartridge fuses and mini fuses. A description of each fuse and component may be stamped on the inside cover otherwise the cavity number of each fuse is stamped on the inside cover that corresponds to the following chart. Underhood Fuses (Integrated Power Module) Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 10706 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 10707 CAUTION: - When installing the Integrated Power Module cover, it is important to ensure the cover is properly positioned and fully latched. Failure to do so may allow water to get into the Integrated Power Module, and possibly result in a electrical system failure. - When replacing a blown fuse, it is important to use only a fuse having the correct amperage rating. The use of a fuse with a rating other than indicated may result in a dangerous electrical system overload. If a properly rated fuse continues to blow, it indicates a problem in the circuit that must be corrected. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Power Distribution Module: > 08-007-08A > Jul > 08 > Antitheft System Engine No Crank/No Start Condition Power Distribution Module: Customer Interest Antitheft System - Engine No Crank/No Start Condition NUMBER: 08-007-08 REV. A GROUP: Electrical DATE: July 04,2008 THIS BULLETIN SUPERSEDES TECHNICAL SERVICE BULLETIN 08-007-08, DATED MARCH 04, 2008. THIS IS A COMPLETE REVISION AND NO ASTERISKS HAVE BEEN USED TO HIGHLIGHT REVISIONS. DO NOT ORDER PART NUMBER 05026070AP UNTIL JULY 21, 2008. ALL OTHER PART NUMBERS ARE AVAILABLE NOW. SUBJECT: No Engine Crank Or No Engine Start Due To Electronic Lockup Of The WCM / SKREEM OVERVIEW: This bulletin involves the replacement of the Wireless Control Module (WCM), and if equipped, the replacement of the Electric Steering Column Lock (ELV). The WCM is also referred to as the Sentry Key Remote Entry Module (SKREEM). MODELS: 2007 - 2008 (DR/DH/D1/DC/DM) Ram Truck (1500/2500/3500/4500/5500) 2007 - 2008 (JK) Wrangler 2007 - 2008 (J1) Sebring (China) 2007 - 2008 (JS) Avenger/Sebring 2007 - 2008 (KA) Nitro 2008 (KK) Liberty/Cherokee 2007 - 2008 (MK) Compass/Patriot 2007 - 2008 (PM) Caliber 2006 - 2008 (PT) Chrysler PT Cruiser NOTE: This bulletin applies to vehicles built on or before May 05, 2008 (MDH 0505XX). SYMPTOM/CONDITION: The customer will experience a no engine crank AND a no engine start condition. Also, the remote keyless entry (RKE) system will not operate. This condition may be due to an electrostatic discharge (ESD) from the ignition key into the Wireless Control Module (WCM), causing the WCM to electronically lockup. This condition may occur more frequently in dry and/or cold weather conditions where a sufficient electrostatic charge is more easily produced. This condition is corrected by the replacement of the WCM. DIAGNOSIS: 1. With the condition present (i.e. the vehicle in the no crank / no start condition), connect the StarSCAN(R) scan tool to the vehicle. 2. Turn the ignition switch to the "ON position, and power up the StarSCAN(R). 3. If the WCM is electronically locked up, the StarSCAN(R) will display the WCM as being "off bus". 4. If the no crank / no start condition is present, and the WCM is "off bus", then reset the WCM by temporarily removing the IOD fuse (with the key out of the ignition switch), wait for 10 seconds and then reinstall the IOD fuse. 5. With the IOD fuse reset having been performed, verify that the vehicle will now crank, start, and run. 6. If the condition is temporarily corrected by performing the above steps, and if the part number of the WCM is earlier than the part number of the WCM listed in the part reference table in the Service Bulletin Parts Required Section below, then perform the Repair Procedure. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Power Distribution Module: > 08-007-08A > Jul > 08 > Antitheft System Engine No Crank/No Start Condition > Page 10716 PARTS REQUIRED: NOTE: The part numbers listed in the following part reference table are to be used as A GUIDE to help determine if the WCM, that is currently in the vehicle, may require replacement. If it is determined that the WCM requires replacement, then ALWAYS REFER TO THE PARTS MANUAL to determine the correct WCM for the specific vehicle in question. In some earlier model years, the WCM may rule (supersede) to one of the part numbers listed in the table. ALWAYS REFER TO THE PARTS MANUAL (not the part reference table) to determine the correct part number ruling (supercedence / substitution). MAKE CERTAIN THAT THE CORRECT WCM IS ORDERED THE FIRST TIME FOR THE SPECIFIC VEHICLE IN QUESTION. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Power Distribution Module: > 08-007-08A > Jul > 08 > Antitheft System Engine No Crank/No Start Condition > Page 10717 REPAIR PROCEDURE: NOTE: If the vehicle (a JS model vehicle in certain International markets) is equipped with an Electric Steering Column Lock (ELV), then the WCM and the ELV must be replaced. Replace the WCM and then the ELV. Next program the WCM and at least one (1) ignition key BEFORE programming the ELV. IMPORTANT: Not following this repair process correctly will cause the new ELV to fail. NOTE: Insert the ignition key into the ignition lock cylinder. This will move the shaft lock module locking bolt to the unlocked position. LEAVE the key in the lock cylinder while the shaft lock module is being removed. 1. If vehicle is equipped with a Steering Shaft Lock Module (JS - Avenger I Stratus - some International Markets), then the Shaft Lock Module will require replacement. From the Service Info tab select: 8 - Electrical > Vehicle Theft Security - Security Information > Module, Shaft Lock > Removal and Installation. NOTE: The shaft lock module cannot be removed from the steering column while the locking bolt is in the locked position without irreversibly damaging the column. Before attempting service, the ignition key must have been inserted into the ignition lock cylinder. Then rotate the steering wheel from side to side. If the steering wheel can be rotated, the locking bolt is in the unlocked position. Leave the key in the ignition lock cylinder until shaft lock module removal has been completed. If the steering wheel cannot be rotated, test and repair the wiring circuits between the module and the ignition switch as required. If no problem is found in these circuits, the module has failed with the locking bolt in the locked position and both the module and the steering column must be replaced with new units. 2. Replace the WCM/SKREEM. Refer to TechCONNECT for detailed service information. From the Service Info tab select: 8 - Electrical > Vehicle Theft Security - Service Information > Module, Sentry Key Remote Entry > Removal and Installation. NOTE: Obtain the vehicle PIN number prior to programming WCM/SKREEM or ELV. NOTE: If during the following steps the PIN number is properly entered but is rejected, then reenter the PIN number again until it is accepted. 3. After both the WCM/SKREEM and the ELV (if equipped) have been replaced, Program the WCM/SKREEM as follows: a. Turn the ignition key to the ON position, (Engine Off) b. Connect the scan tool (StarSCAN(R)) to the data link connector and turn the ignition to the RUN position, (engine off). c. Select "ECU View." d. Scroll down and select "WCM" in the list of modules. e. Select "Misc. Functions." f. Scroll to "WCM Replaced." g. Press "Start". h. Press "Next". i. Select "Show Keyboard". j. Enter the vehicle PIN number. k. Select "Next". l. Verify PIN is correct. m. Select "Next". n. Follow on-screen prompts to complete WCM function programing for Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPM) and so on. 0. Turn the ignition key to the OFF position. Wait 30 seconds. p. Turn the ignition key to the ON position, (Engine Off) Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Power Distribution Module: > 08-007-08A > Jul > 08 > Antitheft System Engine No Crank/No Start Condition > Page 10718 q. Select "ECU View". r. Scroll down and select "WCM" in the list of modules. s. Select "Misc. Functions." t. Select "Program Ign. Keys" and follow on-screen prompts. u. Select "Complete". v. Verify ignition key will start vehicle and the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) functions operate. CAUTION: If the vehicle is equipped with a Shaft Lock Module (used in some International Markets on JS model vehicles), then at least one (1 ignition key must have been programmed to the new WCM BEFORE the new Shaft Lock Module is "married" to the new WCM. 4. Is the vehicle equipped with Steering Shaft Lock Module (ELV)? a. Yes >> Proceed to Step # 5. b. No >>Repair is complete. 5. Program the ELV as follows; a. Select "ECU View". b. Scroll down and select "WCM" in the list of modules. c. Select "Misc. Functions". d. Scroll to "ELV Replaced." e. Press "Start". f. When complete, verify steering shaft lock mechanism is operating. Remove and insert key from the ignition lock cylinder and listen for solenoid "click at lower end of column. POLICY: Reimbursable within the provisions of the warranty. TIME ALLOWANCE: Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Power Distribution Module: > 08-007-08A > Jul > 08 > Antitheft System Engine No Crank/No Start Condition > Page 10719 FAILURE CODE: Disclaimer: This bulletin is supplied as technical information only and is not an authorization for repair. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Power Distribution Module: > 08-007-08A > Jul > 08 > Antitheft System - Engine No Crank/No Start Condition Power Distribution Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Antitheft System - Engine No Crank/No Start Condition NUMBER: 08-007-08 REV. A GROUP: Electrical DATE: July 04,2008 THIS BULLETIN SUPERSEDES TECHNICAL SERVICE BULLETIN 08-007-08, DATED MARCH 04, 2008. THIS IS A COMPLETE REVISION AND NO ASTERISKS HAVE BEEN USED TO HIGHLIGHT REVISIONS. DO NOT ORDER PART NUMBER 05026070AP UNTIL JULY 21, 2008. ALL OTHER PART NUMBERS ARE AVAILABLE NOW. SUBJECT: No Engine Crank Or No Engine Start Due To Electronic Lockup Of The WCM / SKREEM OVERVIEW: This bulletin involves the replacement of the Wireless Control Module (WCM), and if equipped, the replacement of the Electric Steering Column Lock (ELV). The WCM is also referred to as the Sentry Key Remote Entry Module (SKREEM). MODELS: 2007 - 2008 (DR/DH/D1/DC/DM) Ram Truck (1500/2500/3500/4500/5500) 2007 - 2008 (JK) Wrangler 2007 - 2008 (J1) Sebring (China) 2007 - 2008 (JS) Avenger/Sebring 2007 - 2008 (KA) Nitro 2008 (KK) Liberty/Cherokee 2007 - 2008 (MK) Compass/Patriot 2007 - 2008 (PM) Caliber 2006 - 2008 (PT) Chrysler PT Cruiser NOTE: This bulletin applies to vehicles built on or before May 05, 2008 (MDH 0505XX). SYMPTOM/CONDITION: The customer will experience a no engine crank AND a no engine start condition. Also, the remote keyless entry (RKE) system will not operate. This condition may be due to an electrostatic discharge (ESD) from the ignition key into the Wireless Control Module (WCM), causing the WCM to electronically lockup. This condition may occur more frequently in dry and/or cold weather conditions where a sufficient electrostatic charge is more easily produced. This condition is corrected by the replacement of the WCM. DIAGNOSIS: 1. With the condition present (i.e. the vehicle in the no crank / no start condition), connect the StarSCAN(R) scan tool to the vehicle. 2. Turn the ignition switch to the "ON position, and power up the StarSCAN(R). 3. If the WCM is electronically locked up, the StarSCAN(R) will display the WCM as being "off bus". 4. If the no crank / no start condition is present, and the WCM is "off bus", then reset the WCM by temporarily removing the IOD fuse (with the key out of the ignition switch), wait for 10 seconds and then reinstall the IOD fuse. 5. With the IOD fuse reset having been performed, verify that the vehicle will now crank, start, and run. 6. If the condition is temporarily corrected by performing the above steps, and if the part number of the WCM is earlier than the part number of the WCM listed in the part reference table in the Service Bulletin Parts Required Section below, then perform the Repair Procedure. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Power Distribution Module: > 08-007-08A > Jul > 08 > Antitheft System - Engine No Crank/No Start Condition > Page 10725 PARTS REQUIRED: NOTE: The part numbers listed in the following part reference table are to be used as A GUIDE to help determine if the WCM, that is currently in the vehicle, may require replacement. If it is determined that the WCM requires replacement, then ALWAYS REFER TO THE PARTS MANUAL to determine the correct WCM for the specific vehicle in question. In some earlier model years, the WCM may rule (supersede) to one of the part numbers listed in the table. ALWAYS REFER TO THE PARTS MANUAL (not the part reference table) to determine the correct part number ruling (supercedence / substitution). MAKE CERTAIN THAT THE CORRECT WCM IS ORDERED THE FIRST TIME FOR THE SPECIFIC VEHICLE IN QUESTION. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Power Distribution Module: > 08-007-08A > Jul > 08 > Antitheft System - Engine No Crank/No Start Condition > Page 10726 REPAIR PROCEDURE: NOTE: If the vehicle (a JS model vehicle in certain International markets) is equipped with an Electric Steering Column Lock (ELV), then the WCM and the ELV must be replaced. Replace the WCM and then the ELV. Next program the WCM and at least one (1) ignition key BEFORE programming the ELV. IMPORTANT: Not following this repair process correctly will cause the new ELV to fail. NOTE: Insert the ignition key into the ignition lock cylinder. This will move the shaft lock module locking bolt to the unlocked position. LEAVE the key in the lock cylinder while the shaft lock module is being removed. 1. If vehicle is equipped with a Steering Shaft Lock Module (JS - Avenger I Stratus - some International Markets), then the Shaft Lock Module will require replacement. From the Service Info tab select: 8 - Electrical > Vehicle Theft Security - Security Information > Module, Shaft Lock > Removal and Installation. NOTE: The shaft lock module cannot be removed from the steering column while the locking bolt is in the locked position without irreversibly damaging the column. Before attempting service, the ignition key must have been inserted into the ignition lock cylinder. Then rotate the steering wheel from side to side. If the steering wheel can be rotated, the locking bolt is in the unlocked position. Leave the key in the ignition lock cylinder until shaft lock module removal has been completed. If the steering wheel cannot be rotated, test and repair the wiring circuits between the module and the ignition switch as required. If no problem is found in these circuits, the module has failed with the locking bolt in the locked position and both the module and the steering column must be replaced with new units. 2. Replace the WCM/SKREEM. Refer to TechCONNECT for detailed service information. From the Service Info tab select: 8 - Electrical > Vehicle Theft Security - Service Information > Module, Sentry Key Remote Entry > Removal and Installation. NOTE: Obtain the vehicle PIN number prior to programming WCM/SKREEM or ELV. NOTE: If during the following steps the PIN number is properly entered but is rejected, then reenter the PIN number again until it is accepted. 3. After both the WCM/SKREEM and the ELV (if equipped) have been replaced, Program the WCM/SKREEM as follows: a. Turn the ignition key to the ON position, (Engine Off) b. Connect the scan tool (StarSCAN(R)) to the data link connector and turn the ignition to the RUN position, (engine off). c. Select "ECU View." d. Scroll down and select "WCM" in the list of modules. e. Select "Misc. Functions." f. Scroll to "WCM Replaced." g. Press "Start". h. Press "Next". i. Select "Show Keyboard". j. Enter the vehicle PIN number. k. Select "Next". l. Verify PIN is correct. m. Select "Next". n. Follow on-screen prompts to complete WCM function programing for Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPM) and so on. 0. Turn the ignition key to the OFF position. Wait 30 seconds. p. Turn the ignition key to the ON position, (Engine Off) Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Power Distribution Module: > 08-007-08A > Jul > 08 > Antitheft System - Engine No Crank/No Start Condition > Page 10727 q. Select "ECU View". r. Scroll down and select "WCM" in the list of modules. s. Select "Misc. Functions." t. Select "Program Ign. Keys" and follow on-screen prompts. u. Select "Complete". v. Verify ignition key will start vehicle and the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) functions operate. CAUTION: If the vehicle is equipped with a Shaft Lock Module (used in some International Markets on JS model vehicles), then at least one (1 ignition key must have been programmed to the new WCM BEFORE the new Shaft Lock Module is "married" to the new WCM. 4. Is the vehicle equipped with Steering Shaft Lock Module (ELV)? a. Yes >> Proceed to Step # 5. b. No >>Repair is complete. 5. Program the ELV as follows; a. Select "ECU View". b. Scroll down and select "WCM" in the list of modules. c. Select "Misc. Functions". d. Scroll to "ELV Replaced." e. Press "Start". f. When complete, verify steering shaft lock mechanism is operating. Remove and insert key from the ignition lock cylinder and listen for solenoid "click at lower end of column. POLICY: Reimbursable within the provisions of the warranty. TIME ALLOWANCE: Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Power Distribution Module: > 08-007-08A > Jul > 08 > Antitheft System - Engine No Crank/No Start Condition > Page 10728 FAILURE CODE: Disclaimer: This bulletin is supplied as technical information only and is not an authorization for repair. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 199 Power Distribution Module: Locations Component ID 199 Component ID: 199 Component : MODULE-TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER Connector: Name : MODULE-TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER C1 Color : LT. GRAY # of pins : 14 Pin Circuit Description 1 F1 20PK/WT FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (OFF-RUN-START) 2 T41 18YL/DB TRS T41 SIGNAL (P/N) 2 T41 20YL/DB TRS T41 SIGNAL (P/N) 2 T752 20DG/OR STARTER SOLENOID CONTROL 3-4 K31 20BR FUEL PUMP CONTROL 5 W7 20BR/GY WIPER PARK SWITCH SENSE 6-7-8 G932 20VT/TN WASHER FLUID SWITCH RETURN 9 W1 20BR/TN WASHER FLUID SWITCH SENSE 10 T515 20YL/DB TRANSMISSION CONTROL 11 G70 20VT/LB HOOD AJAR SWITCH SENSE 12 - 13 - 14 - Component Location - 33 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 199 > Page 10731 Component Location - 34 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 199 > Page 10732 Connector: Name : MODULE-TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER C10 Color : LT. GRAY # of pins : 22 Pin Circuit Description 1 K342 16BR/WT ASD CONTROL OUTPUT 2 A405 18RD/DB FUSED B(+) 3 A941 18RD FUSED B(+) 4-5 A104 20YL/RD FUSED B(+) Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 199 > Page 10733 6 A310 16RD/LB FUSED B(+) 7 C15 14DB/WT REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER CONTROL OUTPUT 8 F12 14PK/RD FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) 9 T16 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT 10 - 11 X22 18GY/LB HORN CONTROL OUTPUT 12 W3 18BR/WT WIPER LOW SPEED CONTROL OUTPUT 13 Z971 18BK GROUND 14 C16 18DB/GY HEATED MIRROR CONTROL OUTPUT 15 A212 20RD/OR FUSED B(+) 16 - - 17 A121 14RD/YL FUSED B(+) 18 A109 16OR/RD FUEL PUMP CONTROL OUTPUT 19 X21 18GY/YL HORN CONTROL OUTPUT 20 Z953 20BK GROUND 21 T41 20YL/DB TRS T41 SIGNAL (P/N) 22 A400 14TN/RD FUSED B(+) Component Location - 33 Component Location - 34 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 199 > Page 10734 Connector: Name : MODULE-TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER C2 Color : BLACK # of pins : 13 Pin Circuit Description 1-2 W10 20BR WASHER PUMP MOTOR CONTROL 3 F20 20PK/WT IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) 4 A72 20RD/OR ADJUSTABLE PEDALS OUTPUT 5-- Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 199 > Page 10735 6-7-8-9 G304 20VT/DB FRONT AXLE LOCK CONTROL 10 C13 20LB A/C CLUTCH CONTROL 10 C13 20LB/OR A/C CLUTCH CONTROL 11 K51 20BR/WT ASD CONTROL 12 B20 20DG/OR BRAKE FLUID LEVEL SWITCH SENSE 13 Z117 20BK/WT GROUND Component Location - 33 Component Location - 34 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 199 > Page 10736 Connector: Name : MODULE-TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER C3 Color : BLACK # of pins : 22 Pin Circuit Description 1 A209 10RD FUSED B(+) 2-3 F984 18PK/YL FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-ACC) 4-5 F983 20PK/YL FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-ACC) Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 199 > Page 10737 6 A205 18RD/OR FUSED B(+) 7-8 A944 20RD FUSED B(+) 9 A116 16YL/RD FUSED B(+) 10 A118 18RD/OR FUSED B(+) 11 - 12 A918 20RD FUSED B(+) 12 A918 16RD FUSED B(+) 13 F921 20PK/LB FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN) 14 F504 20GY/PK FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN) 15 F202 20PK/GY FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) 16 A930 16RD FUSED B(+) 17 F942 10PK/LG FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) 18 L673 18YL TRAILER TOW LEFT TURN RELAY OUTPUT 19 L674 18LG TRAILER TOW RIGHT TURN RELAY OUTPUT 20 F960 20PK/LG FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) 21 F21 20PK/DG FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) 22 F12 14PK/RD FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) Component Location - 33 Component Location - 34 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 199 > Page 10738 Connector: Name : MODULE-TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER C4 Color : LT. GRAY # of pins : 13 Pin Circuit Description 1 Z118 16BK/YL GROUND 2 T102 16YL SHIFT MOTOR CONTROL A 3 T101 16DG SHIFT MOTOR CONTROL B 4-5-- Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 199 > Page 10739 6-7-8 T300 20YL/GY T-CASE MOTOR BRAKE SIGNAL 9 T103 20YL/OR 5 VOLT SUPPLY 10 D201 20WT/DG MODE SENSOR A 11 G180 20VT/YL SENSOR RETURN 12 A880 20DB/RD FUSED B(+) 13 G303 20VT/DG FRONT AXLE LOCK SIGNAL Component Location - 33 Component Location - 34 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 199 > Page 10740 Connector: Name : MODULE-TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER C5 Color : BLACK # of pins : 10 Pin Circuit Description 1 L61 20WT/LG LEFT FRONT TURN LAMP DRIVER 2 L60 20WT/TN RIGHT FRONT TURN LAMP DRIVER 3 L34 20WT/GY RIGHT HIGH BEAM DRIVER 4 L43 20WT/DB LEFT LOW BEAM DRIVER 5 T340 20DG/VT INPUT SPEED SENSOR 2 (N3) SIGNAL Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 199 > Page 10741 6-7-8 G31 20VT/LG AAT SIGNAL 9 G930 20VT/TN AAT RETURN 10 T71 20YL/OR INPUT SPEED SENSOR 2 (N3) RETURN Component Location - 33 Component Location - 34 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 199 > Page 10742 Connector: Name : MODULE-TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER C6 Color : BROWN # of pins : 16 Pin Circuit Description 1 D65 20WT/LG CAN C BUS (+) 2 D52 20WT/LB DIAGNOSTIC CAN C (+) 3 D55 20WT/OR CAN B BUS (+) 4 L63 20WT/DG LEFT REAR TURN LAMP DRIVER 5-- Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 199 > Page 10743 6 L62 20WT/YL RIGHT REAR TURN LAMP DRIVER 7 L50 20WT/TN BRAKE LAMP SWITCH OUTPUT 8-9 D64 20WT/LB CAN C BUS (-) 10 D51 20WT/BR DIAGNOSTIC CAN C (-) 11 D54 20WT CAN B BUS (-) 12 - 13 - 14 - 15 T70 20YL INPUT SPEED SENSOR 1 (N2) SIGNAL 16 T341 20DG/VT INPUT SPEED SENSOR 1 (N2) RETURN Component Location - 33 Component Location - 34 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 199 > Page 10744 Connector: Name : MODULE-TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER C7 Color : BLUE # of pins : 14 Pin Circuit Description 1-2-3 L44 20WT/TN RIGHT LOW BEAM DRIVER 4 L33 20WT/LG LEFT HIGH BEAM DRIVER 5-- Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 199 > Page 10745 6-7 C818 20LB/OR A/C PRESSURE 5 VOLT SUPPLY 8 L10 20WT/GY FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN) 9-10 - 11 - 12 C18 20LB/BR A/C PRESSURE SIGNAL 13 C918 20BK/LB A/C PRESSURE GROUND 14 T751 20YL IGNITION START Component Location - 33 Component Location - 34 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 199 > Page 10746 Connector: Name : MODULE-TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER C8 Color : LT. GRAY # of pins : 12 Pin Circuit Description 1 A916 16RD FUSED B(+) Pin Circuit Description 1-2 A919 20RD FUSED B(+) Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 199 > Page 10747 3 A106 20LB/RD FUSED B(+) 4 F201 20PK/OR FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) 5 F100 20PK/VT FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN) 6 A100 14RD/VT FUSED B(+) 7 A210 12OR/RD FUSED B(+) 8 A940 18RD FUSED B(+) 9 A103 18GY/RD FUSED B(+) 10 L89 18WT/YL FOG LAMP CONTROL OUTPUT 11 L1 18WT/LG BACKUP LAMP FEED 12 A961 14RD FUEL HEATER CONTROL OUTPUT 12 C123 12LB/WT CONDENSER FAN CONTROL OUTPUT Component Location - 33 Component Location - 34 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 199 > Page 10748 Connector: Name : MODULE-TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER C9 Color : BLACK # of pins : 12 Pin Circuit Description 1 A111 16DG/RD FUSED B(+) 2 T750 14YL/GY STARTER MOTOR CONTROL OUTPUT 3 C3 20DB/YL A/C CLUTCH CONTROL OUTPUT 4 W4 16BR/OR WIPER MOTOR HIGH SPEED FEED 5 A114 18GY/RD FUSED B(+) Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 199 > Page 10749 6 F30 10PK/YL FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-ACC) 7-8 L7 20WT/YL FUSED PARK LAMP FEED 9 L678 18BR FUSED PARK LAMP FEED 10 L70 20WT/GY FUSED PARK LAMP FEED 11 - 12 A107 12TN/RD FUSED B(+) Component Location - 33 Component Location - 34 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 199 > Page 10750 Connector: Name : MODULE-TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER-EYELET Color : # of pins : 1 Qualifier : (DIESEL) Pin Circuit Description 1 A0 6RD B(+) Component Location - 33 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 199 > Page 10751 Component Location - 34 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 199 > Page 10752 Connector: Name : MODULE-TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER-EYELET Color : # of pins : 1 Qualifier : (GAS) Pin Circuit Description 1 A11 8LB B(+) Pin Circuit Description 1 A0 6RD B(+) Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 199 > Page 10753 Component Location - 33 Component Location - 34 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 199 > Page 10754 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 199 > Page 10755 Power Distribution Module: Locations Component ID 215 Component ID: 215 Component : MODULE-TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER Connector: Name : MODULE-TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER C1 Color : LT. GRAY # of pins : 14 Pin Circuit Description 1 F1 20PK/WT FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (OFF-RUN-START) 2 T41 18YL/DB TRS T41 SIGNAL (P/N) 2 T41 20YL/DB TRS T41 SIGNAL (P/N) 2 T752 20DG/OR STARTER SOLENOID CONTROL 3-4 K31 20BR FUEL PUMP CONTROL 5 W7 20BR/GY WIPER PARK SWITCH SENSE 6-7-8 G932 20VT/TN WASHER FLUID SWITCH RETURN 9 W1 20BR/TN WASHER FLUID SWITCH SENSE 10 T515 20YL/DB TRANSMISSION CONTROL 11 G70 20VT/LB HOOD AJAR SWITCH SENSE 12 - 13 - 14 - Component Location - 33 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 199 > Page 10756 Component Location - 34 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 199 > Page 10757 Connector: Name : MODULE-TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER C10 Color : LT. GRAY # of pins : 22 Pin Circuit Description 1 K342 16BR/WT ASD CONTROL OUTPUT 2 A405 18RD/DB FUSED B(+) 3 A941 18RD FUSED B(+) 4-5 A104 20YL/RD FUSED B(+) Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 199 > Page 10758 6 A310 16RD/LB FUSED B(+) 7 C15 14DB/WT REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER CONTROL OUTPUT 8 F12 14PK/RD FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) 9 T16 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT 10 - 11 X22 18GY/LB HORN CONTROL OUTPUT 12 W3 18BR/WT WIPER LOW SPEED CONTROL OUTPUT 13 Z971 18BK GROUND 14 C16 18DB/GY HEATED MIRROR CONTROL OUTPUT 15 A212 20RD/OR FUSED B(+) 16 - - 17 A121 14RD/YL FUSED B(+) 18 A109 16OR/RD FUEL PUMP CONTROL OUTPUT 19 X21 18GY/YL HORN CONTROL OUTPUT 20 Z953 20BK GROUND 21 T41 20YL/DB TRS T41 SIGNAL (P/N) 22 A400 14TN/RD FUSED B(+) Component Location - 33 Component Location - 34 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 199 > Page 10759 Connector: Name : MODULE-TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER C2 Color : BLACK # of pins : 13 Pin Circuit Description 1-2 W10 20BR WASHER PUMP MOTOR CONTROL 3 F20 20PK/WT IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) 4 A72 20RD/OR ADJUSTABLE PEDALS OUTPUT 5-- Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 199 > Page 10760 6-7-8-9 G304 20VT/DB FRONT AXLE LOCK CONTROL 10 C13 20LB A/C CLUTCH CONTROL 10 C13 20LB/OR A/C CLUTCH CONTROL 11 K51 20BR/WT ASD CONTROL 12 B20 20DG/OR BRAKE FLUID LEVEL SWITCH SENSE 13 Z117 20BK/WT GROUND Component Location - 33 Component Location - 34 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 199 > Page 10761 Connector: Name : MODULE-TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER C3 Color : BLACK # of pins : 22 Pin Circuit Description 1 A209 10RD FUSED B(+) 2-3 F984 18PK/YL FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-ACC) 4-5 F983 20PK/YL FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-ACC) Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 199 > Page 10762 6 A205 18RD/OR FUSED B(+) 7-8 A944 20RD FUSED B(+) 9 A116 16YL/RD FUSED B(+) 10 A118 18RD/OR FUSED B(+) 11 - 12 A918 20RD FUSED B(+) 12 A918 16RD FUSED B(+) 13 F921 20PK/LB FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN) 14 F504 20GY/PK FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN) 15 F202 20PK/GY FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) 16 A930 16RD FUSED B(+) 17 F942 10PK/LG FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) 18 L673 18YL TRAILER TOW LEFT TURN RELAY OUTPUT 19 L674 18LG TRAILER TOW RIGHT TURN RELAY OUTPUT 20 F960 20PK/LG FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) 21 F21 20PK/DG FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) 22 F12 14PK/RD FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) Component Location - 33 Component Location - 34 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 199 > Page 10763 Connector: Name : MODULE-TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER C4 Color : LT. GRAY # of pins : 13 Pin Circuit Description 1 Z118 16BK/YL GROUND 2 T102 16YL SHIFT MOTOR CONTROL A 3 T101 16DG SHIFT MOTOR CONTROL B 4-5-- Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 199 > Page 10764 6-7-8 T300 20YL/GY T-CASE MOTOR BRAKE SIGNAL 9 T103 20YL/OR 5 VOLT SUPPLY 10 D201 20WT/DG MODE SENSOR A 11 G180 20VT/YL SENSOR RETURN 12 A880 20DB/RD FUSED B(+) 13 G303 20VT/DG FRONT AXLE LOCK SIGNAL Component Location - 33 Component Location - 34 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 199 > Page 10765 Connector: Name : MODULE-TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER C5 Color : BLACK # of pins : 10 Pin Circuit Description 1 L61 20WT/LG LEFT FRONT TURN LAMP DRIVER 2 L60 20WT/TN RIGHT FRONT TURN LAMP DRIVER 3 L34 20WT/GY RIGHT HIGH BEAM DRIVER 4 L43 20WT/DB LEFT LOW BEAM DRIVER 5 T340 20DG/VT INPUT SPEED SENSOR 2 (N3) SIGNAL Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 199 > Page 10766 6-7-8 G31 20VT/LG AAT SIGNAL 9 G930 20VT/TN AAT RETURN 10 T71 20YL/OR INPUT SPEED SENSOR 2 (N3) RETURN Component Location - 33 Component Location - 34 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 199 > Page 10767 Connector: Name : MODULE-TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER C6 Color : BROWN # of pins : 16 Pin Circuit Description 1 D65 20WT/LG CAN C BUS (+) 2 D52 20WT/LB DIAGNOSTIC CAN C (+) 3 D55 20WT/OR CAN B BUS (+) 4 L63 20WT/DG LEFT REAR TURN LAMP DRIVER 5-- Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 199 > Page 10768 6 L62 20WT/YL RIGHT REAR TURN LAMP DRIVER 7 L50 20WT/TN BRAKE LAMP SWITCH OUTPUT 8-9 D64 20WT/LB CAN C BUS (-) 10 D51 20WT/BR DIAGNOSTIC CAN C (-) 11 D54 20WT CAN B BUS (-) 12 - 13 - 14 - 15 T70 20YL INPUT SPEED SENSOR 1 (N2) SIGNAL 16 T341 20DG/VT INPUT SPEED SENSOR 1 (N2) RETURN Component Location - 33 Component Location - 34 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 199 > Page 10769 Connector: Name : MODULE-TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER C7 Color : BLUE # of pins : 14 Pin Circuit Description 1-2-3 L44 20WT/TN RIGHT LOW BEAM DRIVER 4 L33 20WT/LG LEFT HIGH BEAM DRIVER 5-- Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 199 > Page 10770 6-7 C818 20LB/OR A/C PRESSURE 5 VOLT SUPPLY 8 L10 20WT/GY FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN) 9-10 - 11 - 12 C18 20LB/BR A/C PRESSURE SIGNAL 13 C918 20BK/LB A/C PRESSURE GROUND 14 T751 20YL IGNITION START Component Location - 33 Component Location - 34 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 199 > Page 10771 Connector: Name : MODULE-TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER C8 Color : LT. GRAY # of pins : 12 Pin Circuit Description 1 A916 16RD FUSED B(+) Pin Circuit Description 1-2 A919 20RD FUSED B(+) Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 199 > Page 10772 3 A106 20LB/RD FUSED B(+) 4 F201 20PK/OR FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) 5 F100 20PK/VT FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN) 6 A100 14RD/VT FUSED B(+) 7 A210 12OR/RD FUSED B(+) 8 A940 18RD FUSED B(+) 9 A103 18GY/RD FUSED B(+) 10 L89 18WT/YL FOG LAMP CONTROL OUTPUT 11 L1 18WT/LG BACKUP LAMP FEED 12 A961 14RD FUEL HEATER CONTROL OUTPUT 12 C123 12LB/WT CONDENSER FAN CONTROL OUTPUT Component Location - 33 Component Location - 34 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 199 > Page 10773 Connector: Name : MODULE-TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER C9 Color : BLACK # of pins : 12 Pin Circuit Description 1 A111 16DG/RD FUSED B(+) 2 T750 14YL/GY STARTER MOTOR CONTROL OUTPUT 3 C3 20DB/YL A/C CLUTCH CONTROL OUTPUT 4 W4 16BR/OR WIPER MOTOR HIGH SPEED FEED 5 A114 18GY/RD FUSED B(+) Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 199 > Page 10774 6 F30 10PK/YL FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-ACC) 7-8 L7 20WT/YL FUSED PARK LAMP FEED 9 L678 18BR FUSED PARK LAMP FEED 10 L70 20WT/GY FUSED PARK LAMP FEED 11 - 12 A107 12TN/RD FUSED B(+) Component Location - 33 Component Location - 34 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 199 > Page 10775 Connector: Name : MODULE-TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER-EYELET Color : # of pins : 1 Qualifier : (DIESEL) Pin Circuit Description 1 A0 6RD B(+) Component Location - 33 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 199 > Page 10776 Component Location - 34 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 199 > Page 10777 Connector: Name : MODULE-TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER-EYELET Color : # of pins : 1 Qualifier : (GAS) Pin Circuit Description 1 A11 8LB B(+) Pin Circuit Description 1 A0 6RD B(+) Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 199 > Page 10778 Component Location - 33 Component Location - 34 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 199 > Page 10779 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Component ID 199 Power Distribution Module: Diagrams Component ID 199 Component ID: 199 Component : MODULE-TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER Connector: Name : MODULE-TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER C1 Color : LT. GRAY # of pins : 14 Pin Circuit Description 1 F1 20PK/WT FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (OFF-RUN-START) 2 T41 18YL/DB TRS T41 SIGNAL (P/N) 2 T41 20YL/DB TRS T41 SIGNAL (P/N) 2 T752 20DG/OR STARTER SOLENOID CONTROL 3-4 K31 20BR FUEL PUMP CONTROL 5 W7 20BR/GY WIPER PARK SWITCH SENSE 6-7-8 G932 20VT/TN WASHER FLUID SWITCH RETURN 9 W1 20BR/TN WASHER FLUID SWITCH SENSE 10 T515 20YL/DB TRANSMISSION CONTROL 11 G70 20VT/LB HOOD AJAR SWITCH SENSE 12 - 13 - 14 - Component Location - 33 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Component ID 199 > Page 10782 Component Location - 34 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Component ID 199 > Page 10783 Connector: Name : MODULE-TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER C10 Color : LT. GRAY # of pins : 22 Pin Circuit Description 1 K342 16BR/WT ASD CONTROL OUTPUT 2 A405 18RD/DB FUSED B(+) 3 A941 18RD FUSED B(+) 4-5 A104 20YL/RD FUSED B(+) Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Component ID 199 > Page 10784 6 A310 16RD/LB FUSED B(+) 7 C15 14DB/WT REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER CONTROL OUTPUT 8 F12 14PK/RD FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) 9 T16 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT 10 - 11 X22 18GY/LB HORN CONTROL OUTPUT 12 W3 18BR/WT WIPER LOW SPEED CONTROL OUTPUT 13 Z971 18BK GROUND 14 C16 18DB/GY HEATED MIRROR CONTROL OUTPUT 15 A212 20RD/OR FUSED B(+) 16 - - 17 A121 14RD/YL FUSED B(+) 18 A109 16OR/RD FUEL PUMP CONTROL OUTPUT 19 X21 18GY/YL HORN CONTROL OUTPUT 20 Z953 20BK GROUND 21 T41 20YL/DB TRS T41 SIGNAL (P/N) 22 A400 14TN/RD FUSED B(+) Component Location - 33 Component Location - 34 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Component ID 199 > Page 10785 Connector: Name : MODULE-TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER C2 Color : BLACK # of pins : 13 Pin Circuit Description 1-2 W10 20BR WASHER PUMP MOTOR CONTROL 3 F20 20PK/WT IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) 4 A72 20RD/OR ADJUSTABLE PEDALS OUTPUT 5-- Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Component ID 199 > Page 10786 6-7-8-9 G304 20VT/DB FRONT AXLE LOCK CONTROL 10 C13 20LB A/C CLUTCH CONTROL 10 C13 20LB/OR A/C CLUTCH CONTROL 11 K51 20BR/WT ASD CONTROL 12 B20 20DG/OR BRAKE FLUID LEVEL SWITCH SENSE 13 Z117 20BK/WT GROUND Component Location - 33 Component Location - 34 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Component ID 199 > Page 10787 Connector: Name : MODULE-TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER C3 Color : BLACK # of pins : 22 Pin Circuit Description 1 A209 10RD FUSED B(+) 2-3 F984 18PK/YL FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-ACC) 4-5 F983 20PK/YL FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-ACC) Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Component ID 199 > Page 10788 6 A205 18RD/OR FUSED B(+) 7-8 A944 20RD FUSED B(+) 9 A116 16YL/RD FUSED B(+) 10 A118 18RD/OR FUSED B(+) 11 - 12 A918 20RD FUSED B(+) 12 A918 16RD FUSED B(+) 13 F921 20PK/LB FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN) 14 F504 20GY/PK FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN) 15 F202 20PK/GY FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) 16 A930 16RD FUSED B(+) 17 F942 10PK/LG FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) 18 L673 18YL TRAILER TOW LEFT TURN RELAY OUTPUT 19 L674 18LG TRAILER TOW RIGHT TURN RELAY OUTPUT 20 F960 20PK/LG FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) 21 F21 20PK/DG FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) 22 F12 14PK/RD FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) Component Location - 33 Component Location - 34 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Component ID 199 > Page 10789 Connector: Name : MODULE-TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER C4 Color : LT. GRAY # of pins : 13 Pin Circuit Description 1 Z118 16BK/YL GROUND 2 T102 16YL SHIFT MOTOR CONTROL A 3 T101 16DG SHIFT MOTOR CONTROL B 4-5-- Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Component ID 199 > Page 10790 6-7-8 T300 20YL/GY T-CASE MOTOR BRAKE SIGNAL 9 T103 20YL/OR 5 VOLT SUPPLY 10 D201 20WT/DG MODE SENSOR A 11 G180 20VT/YL SENSOR RETURN 12 A880 20DB/RD FUSED B(+) 13 G303 20VT/DG FRONT AXLE LOCK SIGNAL Component Location - 33 Component Location - 34 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Component ID 199 > Page 10791 Connector: Name : MODULE-TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER C5 Color : BLACK # of pins : 10 Pin Circuit Description 1 L61 20WT/LG LEFT FRONT TURN LAMP DRIVER 2 L60 20WT/TN RIGHT FRONT TURN LAMP DRIVER 3 L34 20WT/GY RIGHT HIGH BEAM DRIVER 4 L43 20WT/DB LEFT LOW BEAM DRIVER 5 T340 20DG/VT INPUT SPEED SENSOR 2 (N3) SIGNAL Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Component ID 199 > Page 10792 6-7-8 G31 20VT/LG AAT SIGNAL 9 G930 20VT/TN AAT RETURN 10 T71 20YL/OR INPUT SPEED SENSOR 2 (N3) RETURN Component Location - 33 Component Location - 34 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Component ID 199 > Page 10793 Connector: Name : MODULE-TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER C6 Color : BROWN # of pins : 16 Pin Circuit Description 1 D65 20WT/LG CAN C BUS (+) 2 D52 20WT/LB DIAGNOSTIC CAN C (+) 3 D55 20WT/OR CAN B BUS (+) 4 L63 20WT/DG LEFT REAR TURN LAMP DRIVER 5-- Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Component ID 199 > Page 10794 6 L62 20WT/YL RIGHT REAR TURN LAMP DRIVER 7 L50 20WT/TN BRAKE LAMP SWITCH OUTPUT 8-9 D64 20WT/LB CAN C BUS (-) 10 D51 20WT/BR DIAGNOSTIC CAN C (-) 11 D54 20WT CAN B BUS (-) 12 - 13 - 14 - 15 T70 20YL INPUT SPEED SENSOR 1 (N2) SIGNAL 16 T341 20DG/VT INPUT SPEED SENSOR 1 (N2) RETURN Component Location - 33 Component Location - 34 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Component ID 199 > Page 10795 Connector: Name : MODULE-TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER C7 Color : BLUE # of pins : 14 Pin Circuit Description 1-2-3 L44 20WT/TN RIGHT LOW BEAM DRIVER 4 L33 20WT/LG LEFT HIGH BEAM DRIVER 5-- Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Component ID 199 > Page 10796 6-7 C818 20LB/OR A/C PRESSURE 5 VOLT SUPPLY 8 L10 20WT/GY FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN) 9-10 - 11 - 12 C18 20LB/BR A/C PRESSURE SIGNAL 13 C918 20BK/LB A/C PRESSURE GROUND 14 T751 20YL IGNITION START Component Location - 33 Component Location - 34 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Component ID 199 > Page 10797 Connector: Name : MODULE-TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER C8 Color : LT. GRAY # of pins : 12 Pin Circuit Description 1 A916 16RD FUSED B(+) Pin Circuit Description 1-2 A919 20RD FUSED B(+) Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Component ID 199 > Page 10798 3 A106 20LB/RD FUSED B(+) 4 F201 20PK/OR FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) 5 F100 20PK/VT FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN) 6 A100 14RD/VT FUSED B(+) 7 A210 12OR/RD FUSED B(+) 8 A940 18RD FUSED B(+) 9 A103 18GY/RD FUSED B(+) 10 L89 18WT/YL FOG LAMP CONTROL OUTPUT 11 L1 18WT/LG BACKUP LAMP FEED 12 A961 14RD FUEL HEATER CONTROL OUTPUT 12 C123 12LB/WT CONDENSER FAN CONTROL OUTPUT Component Location - 33 Component Location - 34 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Component ID 199 > Page 10799 Connector: Name : MODULE-TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER C9 Color : BLACK # of pins : 12 Pin Circuit Description 1 A111 16DG/RD FUSED B(+) 2 T750 14YL/GY STARTER MOTOR CONTROL OUTPUT 3 C3 20DB/YL A/C CLUTCH CONTROL OUTPUT 4 W4 16BR/OR WIPER MOTOR HIGH SPEED FEED 5 A114 18GY/RD FUSED B(+) Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Component ID 199 > Page 10800 6 F30 10PK/YL FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-ACC) 7-8 L7 20WT/YL FUSED PARK LAMP FEED 9 L678 18BR FUSED PARK LAMP FEED 10 L70 20WT/GY FUSED PARK LAMP FEED 11 - 12 A107 12TN/RD FUSED B(+) Component Location - 33 Component Location - 34 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Component ID 199 > Page 10801 Connector: Name : MODULE-TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER-EYELET Color : # of pins : 1 Qualifier : (DIESEL) Pin Circuit Description 1 A0 6RD B(+) Component Location - 33 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Component ID 199 > Page 10802 Component Location - 34 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Component ID 199 > Page 10803 Connector: Name : MODULE-TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER-EYELET Color : # of pins : 1 Qualifier : (GAS) Pin Circuit Description 1 A11 8LB B(+) Pin Circuit Description 1 A0 6RD B(+) Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Component ID 199 > Page 10804 Component Location - 33 Component Location - 34 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Component ID 199 > Page 10805 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Component ID 199 > Page 10806 Power Distribution Module: Diagrams Component ID 215 Component ID: 215 Component : MODULE-TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER Connector: Name : MODULE-TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER C1 Color : LT. GRAY # of pins : 14 Pin Circuit Description 1 F1 20PK/WT FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (OFF-RUN-START) 2 T41 18YL/DB TRS T41 SIGNAL (P/N) 2 T41 20YL/DB TRS T41 SIGNAL (P/N) 2 T752 20DG/OR STARTER SOLENOID CONTROL 3-4 K31 20BR FUEL PUMP CONTROL 5 W7 20BR/GY WIPER PARK SWITCH SENSE 6-7-8 G932 20VT/TN WASHER FLUID SWITCH RETURN 9 W1 20BR/TN WASHER FLUID SWITCH SENSE 10 T515 20YL/DB TRANSMISSION CONTROL 11 G70 20VT/LB HOOD AJAR SWITCH SENSE 12 - 13 - 14 - Component Location - 33 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Component ID 199 > Page 10807 Component Location - 34 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Component ID 199 > Page 10808 Connector: Name : MODULE-TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER C10 Color : LT. GRAY # of pins : 22 Pin Circuit Description 1 K342 16BR/WT ASD CONTROL OUTPUT 2 A405 18RD/DB FUSED B(+) 3 A941 18RD FUSED B(+) 4-5 A104 20YL/RD FUSED B(+) Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Component ID 199 > Page 10809 6 A310 16RD/LB FUSED B(+) 7 C15 14DB/WT REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER CONTROL OUTPUT 8 F12 14PK/RD FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) 9 T16 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT 10 - 11 X22 18GY/LB HORN CONTROL OUTPUT 12 W3 18BR/WT WIPER LOW SPEED CONTROL OUTPUT 13 Z971 18BK GROUND 14 C16 18DB/GY HEATED MIRROR CONTROL OUTPUT 15 A212 20RD/OR FUSED B(+) 16 - - 17 A121 14RD/YL FUSED B(+) 18 A109 16OR/RD FUEL PUMP CONTROL OUTPUT 19 X21 18GY/YL HORN CONTROL OUTPUT 20 Z953 20BK GROUND 21 T41 20YL/DB TRS T41 SIGNAL (P/N) 22 A400 14TN/RD FUSED B(+) Component Location - 33 Component Location - 34 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Component ID 199 > Page 10810 Connector: Name : MODULE-TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER C2 Color : BLACK # of pins : 13 Pin Circuit Description 1-2 W10 20BR WASHER PUMP MOTOR CONTROL 3 F20 20PK/WT IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) 4 A72 20RD/OR ADJUSTABLE PEDALS OUTPUT 5-- Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Component ID 199 > Page 10811 6-7-8-9 G304 20VT/DB FRONT AXLE LOCK CONTROL 10 C13 20LB A/C CLUTCH CONTROL 10 C13 20LB/OR A/C CLUTCH CONTROL 11 K51 20BR/WT ASD CONTROL 12 B20 20DG/OR BRAKE FLUID LEVEL SWITCH SENSE 13 Z117 20BK/WT GROUND Component Location - 33 Component Location - 34 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Component ID 199 > Page 10812 Connector: Name : MODULE-TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER C3 Color : BLACK # of pins : 22 Pin Circuit Description 1 A209 10RD FUSED B(+) 2-3 F984 18PK/YL FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-ACC) 4-5 F983 20PK/YL FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-ACC) Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Component ID 199 > Page 10813 6 A205 18RD/OR FUSED B(+) 7-8 A944 20RD FUSED B(+) 9 A116 16YL/RD FUSED B(+) 10 A118 18RD/OR FUSED B(+) 11 - 12 A918 20RD FUSED B(+) 12 A918 16RD FUSED B(+) 13 F921 20PK/LB FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN) 14 F504 20GY/PK FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN) 15 F202 20PK/GY FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) 16 A930 16RD FUSED B(+) 17 F942 10PK/LG FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) 18 L673 18YL TRAILER TOW LEFT TURN RELAY OUTPUT 19 L674 18LG TRAILER TOW RIGHT TURN RELAY OUTPUT 20 F960 20PK/LG FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) 21 F21 20PK/DG FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) 22 F12 14PK/RD FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) Component Location - 33 Component Location - 34 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Component ID 199 > Page 10814 Connector: Name : MODULE-TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER C4 Color : LT. GRAY # of pins : 13 Pin Circuit Description 1 Z118 16BK/YL GROUND 2 T102 16YL SHIFT MOTOR CONTROL A 3 T101 16DG SHIFT MOTOR CONTROL B 4-5-- Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Component ID 199 > Page 10815 6-7-8 T300 20YL/GY T-CASE MOTOR BRAKE SIGNAL 9 T103 20YL/OR 5 VOLT SUPPLY 10 D201 20WT/DG MODE SENSOR A 11 G180 20VT/YL SENSOR RETURN 12 A880 20DB/RD FUSED B(+) 13 G303 20VT/DG FRONT AXLE LOCK SIGNAL Component Location - 33 Component Location - 34 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Component ID 199 > Page 10816 Connector: Name : MODULE-TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER C5 Color : BLACK # of pins : 10 Pin Circuit Description 1 L61 20WT/LG LEFT FRONT TURN LAMP DRIVER 2 L60 20WT/TN RIGHT FRONT TURN LAMP DRIVER 3 L34 20WT/GY RIGHT HIGH BEAM DRIVER 4 L43 20WT/DB LEFT LOW BEAM DRIVER 5 T340 20DG/VT INPUT SPEED SENSOR 2 (N3) SIGNAL Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Component ID 199 > Page 10817 6-7-8 G31 20VT/LG AAT SIGNAL 9 G930 20VT/TN AAT RETURN 10 T71 20YL/OR INPUT SPEED SENSOR 2 (N3) RETURN Component Location - 33 Component Location - 34 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Component ID 199 > Page 10818 Connector: Name : MODULE-TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER C6 Color : BROWN # of pins : 16 Pin Circuit Description 1 D65 20WT/LG CAN C BUS (+) 2 D52 20WT/LB DIAGNOSTIC CAN C (+) 3 D55 20WT/OR CAN B BUS (+) 4 L63 20WT/DG LEFT REAR TURN LAMP DRIVER 5-- Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Component ID 199 > Page 10819 6 L62 20WT/YL RIGHT REAR TURN LAMP DRIVER 7 L50 20WT/TN BRAKE LAMP SWITCH OUTPUT 8-9 D64 20WT/LB CAN C BUS (-) 10 D51 20WT/BR DIAGNOSTIC CAN C (-) 11 D54 20WT CAN B BUS (-) 12 - 13 - 14 - 15 T70 20YL INPUT SPEED SENSOR 1 (N2) SIGNAL 16 T341 20DG/VT INPUT SPEED SENSOR 1 (N2) RETURN Component Location - 33 Component Location - 34 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Component ID 199 > Page 10820 Connector: Name : MODULE-TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER C7 Color : BLUE # of pins : 14 Pin Circuit Description 1-2-3 L44 20WT/TN RIGHT LOW BEAM DRIVER 4 L33 20WT/LG LEFT HIGH BEAM DRIVER 5-- Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Component ID 199 > Page 10821 6-7 C818 20LB/OR A/C PRESSURE 5 VOLT SUPPLY 8 L10 20WT/GY FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN) 9-10 - 11 - 12 C18 20LB/BR A/C PRESSURE SIGNAL 13 C918 20BK/LB A/C PRESSURE GROUND 14 T751 20YL IGNITION START Component Location - 33 Component Location - 34 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Component ID 199 > Page 10822 Connector: Name : MODULE-TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER C8 Color : LT. GRAY # of pins : 12 Pin Circuit Description 1 A916 16RD FUSED B(+) Pin Circuit Description 1-2 A919 20RD FUSED B(+) Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Component ID 199 > Page 10823 3 A106 20LB/RD FUSED B(+) 4 F201 20PK/OR FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) 5 F100 20PK/VT FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN) 6 A100 14RD/VT FUSED B(+) 7 A210 12OR/RD FUSED B(+) 8 A940 18RD FUSED B(+) 9 A103 18GY/RD FUSED B(+) 10 L89 18WT/YL FOG LAMP CONTROL OUTPUT 11 L1 18WT/LG BACKUP LAMP FEED 12 A961 14RD FUEL HEATER CONTROL OUTPUT 12 C123 12LB/WT CONDENSER FAN CONTROL OUTPUT Component Location - 33 Component Location - 34 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Component ID 199 > Page 10824 Connector: Name : MODULE-TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER C9 Color : BLACK # of pins : 12 Pin Circuit Description 1 A111 16DG/RD FUSED B(+) 2 T750 14YL/GY STARTER MOTOR CONTROL OUTPUT 3 C3 20DB/YL A/C CLUTCH CONTROL OUTPUT 4 W4 16BR/OR WIPER MOTOR HIGH SPEED FEED 5 A114 18GY/RD FUSED B(+) Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Component ID 199 > Page 10825 6 F30 10PK/YL FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-ACC) 7-8 L7 20WT/YL FUSED PARK LAMP FEED 9 L678 18BR FUSED PARK LAMP FEED 10 L70 20WT/GY FUSED PARK LAMP FEED 11 - 12 A107 12TN/RD FUSED B(+) Component Location - 33 Component Location - 34 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Component ID 199 > Page 10826 Connector: Name : MODULE-TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER-EYELET Color : # of pins : 1 Qualifier : (DIESEL) Pin Circuit Description 1 A0 6RD B(+) Component Location - 33 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Component ID 199 > Page 10827 Component Location - 34 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Component ID 199 > Page 10828 Connector: Name : MODULE-TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER-EYELET Color : # of pins : 1 Qualifier : (GAS) Pin Circuit Description 1 A11 8LB B(+) Pin Circuit Description 1 A0 6RD B(+) Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Component ID 199 > Page 10829 Component Location - 33 Component Location - 34 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Component ID 199 > Page 10830 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Power Distribution Module: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The Totally Integrated Power Module (2)(TIPM) is a combination unit that performs the functions of the Power Distribution Center (PDC) and the Front Control Module. The TIPM is a printed circuit board based module that contains fuses, internal relays and a microprocessor that performs the functions previously executed by the FCM. The TIPM (2) is located in the engine compartment, next to the battery (1) and connects directly to the B+ cable (5) via a stud located on top of the unit. The ground connection is via electrical connectors. The TIPM provides the primary means of voltage distribution and protection for the entire vehicle. The molded plastic TIPM housing includes a base and cover. The TIPM cover is easily opened or removed for service and has a fuse and relay layout map integral to the inside surface of the cover. The TIPM housing base and cover are secured in place via mounting tabs. The mounting tabs secure the TIPM (2) to the battery tray mounting bracket (3). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 10833 Power Distribution Module: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION All of the current from the battery and the generator output enters the Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) via a stud on the top of the module. The TIPM cover is removed to access the fuses or relays. Internal connections of all of the power distribution center circuits is accomplished by a combination of bus bars and a printed circuit board. For a complete wiring diagram Refer to Diagrams/Electrical. The wiring information includes wiring diagrams, proper wire and connector repair procedures, details of wire harness routing and retention, connector pin-out information and location views for the various wire harness connectors, splices and grounds. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Power Distribution Module: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. 2. Remove the B+ terminal nut (6) from the Totally Integrated Power Module (2)(TIPM) B+ terminal. Remove the B+ cable (5) from the TIPM (2). 3. Using a suitable flat blade tool, disengage the TIPM (2) upper retaining tabs from the battery tray bracket (3). 4. Grasp the TIPM (1) and rotate the assembly up to free it from its mounting bracket (3). Position the assembly upside down to access the electrical connectors located on the bottom of the unit. 5. Disconnect the electrical connectors (2) by depressing the locking tab and rotating the connector arm outboard, until the connector is free from the Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 10836 TIPM assembly (1). Be certain to pull the connectors straight off. 6. Remove the TIPM (1) from the vehicle. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 10837 Power Distribution Module: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION 1. Position the Totally Integrated Power Module (1)(TIPM) into the vehicle. NOTE: Totally Integrated power module electrical connectors are color coded to ease location reference. 2. Connect the electrical connectors (2) by pushing straight on and rotating the connector arm inboard, until the connector is firmly locked in place on the TIPM assembly (1). 3. Turn the TIPM (1) so that the connector side is facing down. Install the assembly onto the TIPM battery tray bracket (3) making sure to line up the lower retaining tab with the retaining slot in the tray (1). 4. Push the TIPM (1) downward to lock the upper retaining clips into the bracket (3). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 10838 5. Install the B+ terminal cable (5) and nut (6) on the B+ terminal of the TIPM (2). 6. Connect the battery negative cable. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Power Distribution Module: > 08-007-08A > Jul > 08 > Antitheft System - Engine No Crank/No Start Condition Power Distribution Module: Customer Interest Antitheft System - Engine No Crank/No Start Condition NUMBER: 08-007-08 REV. A GROUP: Electrical DATE: July 04,2008 THIS BULLETIN SUPERSEDES TECHNICAL SERVICE BULLETIN 08-007-08, DATED MARCH 04, 2008. THIS IS A COMPLETE REVISION AND NO ASTERISKS HAVE BEEN USED TO HIGHLIGHT REVISIONS. DO NOT ORDER PART NUMBER 05026070AP UNTIL JULY 21, 2008. ALL OTHER PART NUMBERS ARE AVAILABLE NOW. SUBJECT: No Engine Crank Or No Engine Start Due To Electronic Lockup Of The WCM / SKREEM OVERVIEW: This bulletin involves the replacement of the Wireless Control Module (WCM), and if equipped, the replacement of the Electric Steering Column Lock (ELV). The WCM is also referred to as the Sentry Key Remote Entry Module (SKREEM). MODELS: 2007 - 2008 (DR/DH/D1/DC/DM) Ram Truck (1500/2500/3500/4500/5500) 2007 - 2008 (JK) Wrangler 2007 - 2008 (J1) Sebring (China) 2007 - 2008 (JS) Avenger/Sebring 2007 - 2008 (KA) Nitro 2008 (KK) Liberty/Cherokee 2007 - 2008 (MK) Compass/Patriot 2007 - 2008 (PM) Caliber 2006 - 2008 (PT) Chrysler PT Cruiser NOTE: This bulletin applies to vehicles built on or before May 05, 2008 (MDH 0505XX). SYMPTOM/CONDITION: The customer will experience a no engine crank AND a no engine start condition. Also, the remote keyless entry (RKE) system will not operate. This condition may be due to an electrostatic discharge (ESD) from the ignition key into the Wireless Control Module (WCM), causing the WCM to electronically lockup. This condition may occur more frequently in dry and/or cold weather conditions where a sufficient electrostatic charge is more easily produced. This condition is corrected by the replacement of the WCM. DIAGNOSIS: 1. With the condition present (i.e. the vehicle in the no crank / no start condition), connect the StarSCAN(R) scan tool to the vehicle. 2. Turn the ignition switch to the "ON position, and power up the StarSCAN(R). 3. If the WCM is electronically locked up, the StarSCAN(R) will display the WCM as being "off bus". 4. If the no crank / no start condition is present, and the WCM is "off bus", then reset the WCM by temporarily removing the IOD fuse (with the key out of the ignition switch), wait for 10 seconds and then reinstall the IOD fuse. 5. With the IOD fuse reset having been performed, verify that the vehicle will now crank, start, and run. 6. If the condition is temporarily corrected by performing the above steps, and if the part number of the WCM is earlier than the part number of the WCM listed in the part reference table in the Service Bulletin Parts Required Section below, then perform the Repair Procedure. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Power Distribution Module: > 08-007-08A > Jul > 08 > Antitheft System - Engine No Crank/No Start Condition > Page 10848 PARTS REQUIRED: NOTE: The part numbers listed in the following part reference table are to be used as A GUIDE to help determine if the WCM, that is currently in the vehicle, may require replacement. If it is determined that the WCM requires replacement, then ALWAYS REFER TO THE PARTS MANUAL to determine the correct WCM for the specific vehicle in question. In some earlier model years, the WCM may rule (supersede) to one of the part numbers listed in the table. ALWAYS REFER TO THE PARTS MANUAL (not the part reference table) to determine the correct part number ruling (supercedence / substitution). MAKE CERTAIN THAT THE CORRECT WCM IS ORDERED THE FIRST TIME FOR THE SPECIFIC VEHICLE IN QUESTION. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Power Distribution Module: > 08-007-08A > Jul > 08 > Antitheft System - Engine No Crank/No Start Condition > Page 10849 REPAIR PROCEDURE: NOTE: If the vehicle (a JS model vehicle in certain International markets) is equipped with an Electric Steering Column Lock (ELV), then the WCM and the ELV must be replaced. Replace the WCM and then the ELV. Next program the WCM and at least one (1) ignition key BEFORE programming the ELV. IMPORTANT: Not following this repair process correctly will cause the new ELV to fail. NOTE: Insert the ignition key into the ignition lock cylinder. This will move the shaft lock module locking bolt to the unlocked position. LEAVE the key in the lock cylinder while the shaft lock module is being removed. 1. If vehicle is equipped with a Steering Shaft Lock Module (JS - Avenger I Stratus - some International Markets), then the Shaft Lock Module will require replacement. From the Service Info tab select: 8 - Electrical > Vehicle Theft Security - Security Information > Module, Shaft Lock > Removal and Installation. NOTE: The shaft lock module cannot be removed from the steering column while the locking bolt is in the locked position without irreversibly damaging the column. Before attempting service, the ignition key must have been inserted into the ignition lock cylinder. Then rotate the steering wheel from side to side. If the steering wheel can be rotated, the locking bolt is in the unlocked position. Leave the key in the ignition lock cylinder until shaft lock module removal has been completed. If the steering wheel cannot be rotated, test and repair the wiring circuits between the module and the ignition switch as required. If no problem is found in these circuits, the module has failed with the locking bolt in the locked position and both the module and the steering column must be replaced with new units. 2. Replace the WCM/SKREEM. Refer to TechCONNECT for detailed service information. From the Service Info tab select: 8 - Electrical > Vehicle Theft Security - Service Information > Module, Sentry Key Remote Entry > Removal and Installation. NOTE: Obtain the vehicle PIN number prior to programming WCM/SKREEM or ELV. NOTE: If during the following steps the PIN number is properly entered but is rejected, then reenter the PIN number again until it is accepted. 3. After both the WCM/SKREEM and the ELV (if equipped) have been replaced, Program the WCM/SKREEM as follows: a. Turn the ignition key to the ON position, (Engine Off) b. Connect the scan tool (StarSCAN(R)) to the data link connector and turn the ignition to the RUN position, (engine off). c. Select "ECU View." d. Scroll down and select "WCM" in the list of modules. e. Select "Misc. Functions." f. Scroll to "WCM Replaced." g. Press "Start". h. Press "Next". i. Select "Show Keyboard". j. Enter the vehicle PIN number. k. Select "Next". l. Verify PIN is correct. m. Select "Next". n. Follow on-screen prompts to complete WCM function programing for Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPM) and so on. 0. Turn the ignition key to the OFF position. Wait 30 seconds. p. Turn the ignition key to the ON position, (Engine Off) Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Power Distribution Module: > 08-007-08A > Jul > 08 > Antitheft System - Engine No Crank/No Start Condition > Page 10850 q. Select "ECU View". r. Scroll down and select "WCM" in the list of modules. s. Select "Misc. Functions." t. Select "Program Ign. Keys" and follow on-screen prompts. u. Select "Complete". v. Verify ignition key will start vehicle and the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) functions operate. CAUTION: If the vehicle is equipped with a Shaft Lock Module (used in some International Markets on JS model vehicles), then at least one (1 ignition key must have been programmed to the new WCM BEFORE the new Shaft Lock Module is "married" to the new WCM. 4. Is the vehicle equipped with Steering Shaft Lock Module (ELV)? a. Yes >> Proceed to Step # 5. b. No >>Repair is complete. 5. Program the ELV as follows; a. Select "ECU View". b. Scroll down and select "WCM" in the list of modules. c. Select "Misc. Functions". d. Scroll to "ELV Replaced." e. Press "Start". f. When complete, verify steering shaft lock mechanism is operating. Remove and insert key from the ignition lock cylinder and listen for solenoid "click at lower end of column. POLICY: Reimbursable within the provisions of the warranty. TIME ALLOWANCE: Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Power Distribution Module: > 08-007-08A > Jul > 08 > Antitheft System - Engine No Crank/No Start Condition > Page 10851 FAILURE CODE: Disclaimer: This bulletin is supplied as technical information only and is not an authorization for repair. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Power Distribution Module: > 08-007-08A > Jul > 08 > Antitheft System - Engine No Crank/No Start Condition Power Distribution Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Antitheft System - Engine No Crank/No Start Condition NUMBER: 08-007-08 REV. A GROUP: Electrical DATE: July 04,2008 THIS BULLETIN SUPERSEDES TECHNICAL SERVICE BULLETIN 08-007-08, DATED MARCH 04, 2008. THIS IS A COMPLETE REVISION AND NO ASTERISKS HAVE BEEN USED TO HIGHLIGHT REVISIONS. DO NOT ORDER PART NUMBER 05026070AP UNTIL JULY 21, 2008. ALL OTHER PART NUMBERS ARE AVAILABLE NOW. SUBJECT: No Engine Crank Or No Engine Start Due To Electronic Lockup Of The WCM / SKREEM OVERVIEW: This bulletin involves the replacement of the Wireless Control Module (WCM), and if equipped, the replacement of the Electric Steering Column Lock (ELV). The WCM is also referred to as the Sentry Key Remote Entry Module (SKREEM). MODELS: 2007 - 2008 (DR/DH/D1/DC/DM) Ram Truck (1500/2500/3500/4500/5500) 2007 - 2008 (JK) Wrangler 2007 - 2008 (J1) Sebring (China) 2007 - 2008 (JS) Avenger/Sebring 2007 - 2008 (KA) Nitro 2008 (KK) Liberty/Cherokee 2007 - 2008 (MK) Compass/Patriot 2007 - 2008 (PM) Caliber 2006 - 2008 (PT) Chrysler PT Cruiser NOTE: This bulletin applies to vehicles built on or before May 05, 2008 (MDH 0505XX). SYMPTOM/CONDITION: The customer will experience a no engine crank AND a no engine start condition. Also, the remote keyless entry (RKE) system will not operate. This condition may be due to an electrostatic discharge (ESD) from the ignition key into the Wireless Control Module (WCM), causing the WCM to electronically lockup. This condition may occur more frequently in dry and/or cold weather conditions where a sufficient electrostatic charge is more easily produced. This condition is corrected by the replacement of the WCM. DIAGNOSIS: 1. With the condition present (i.e. the vehicle in the no crank / no start condition), connect the StarSCAN(R) scan tool to the vehicle. 2. Turn the ignition switch to the "ON position, and power up the StarSCAN(R). 3. If the WCM is electronically locked up, the StarSCAN(R) will display the WCM as being "off bus". 4. If the no crank / no start condition is present, and the WCM is "off bus", then reset the WCM by temporarily removing the IOD fuse (with the key out of the ignition switch), wait for 10 seconds and then reinstall the IOD fuse. 5. With the IOD fuse reset having been performed, verify that the vehicle will now crank, start, and run. 6. If the condition is temporarily corrected by performing the above steps, and if the part number of the WCM is earlier than the part number of the WCM listed in the part reference table in the Service Bulletin Parts Required Section below, then perform the Repair Procedure. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Power Distribution Module: > 08-007-08A > Jul > 08 > Antitheft System - Engine No Crank/No Start Condition > Page 10857 PARTS REQUIRED: NOTE: The part numbers listed in the following part reference table are to be used as A GUIDE to help determine if the WCM, that is currently in the vehicle, may require replacement. If it is determined that the WCM requires replacement, then ALWAYS REFER TO THE PARTS MANUAL to determine the correct WCM for the specific vehicle in question. In some earlier model years, the WCM may rule (supersede) to one of the part numbers listed in the table. ALWAYS REFER TO THE PARTS MANUAL (not the part reference table) to determine the correct part number ruling (supercedence / substitution). MAKE CERTAIN THAT THE CORRECT WCM IS ORDERED THE FIRST TIME FOR THE SPECIFIC VEHICLE IN QUESTION. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Power Distribution Module: > 08-007-08A > Jul > 08 > Antitheft System - Engine No Crank/No Start Condition > Page 10858 REPAIR PROCEDURE: NOTE: If the vehicle (a JS model vehicle in certain International markets) is equipped with an Electric Steering Column Lock (ELV), then the WCM and the ELV must be replaced. Replace the WCM and then the ELV. Next program the WCM and at least one (1) ignition key BEFORE programming the ELV. IMPORTANT: Not following this repair process correctly will cause the new ELV to fail. NOTE: Insert the ignition key into the ignition lock cylinder. This will move the shaft lock module locking bolt to the unlocked position. LEAVE the key in the lock cylinder while the shaft lock module is being removed. 1. If vehicle is equipped with a Steering Shaft Lock Module (JS - Avenger I Stratus - some International Markets), then the Shaft Lock Module will require replacement. From the Service Info tab select: 8 - Electrical > Vehicle Theft Security - Security Information > Module, Shaft Lock > Removal and Installation. NOTE: The shaft lock module cannot be removed from the steering column while the locking bolt is in the locked position without irreversibly damaging the column. Before attempting service, the ignition key must have been inserted into the ignition lock cylinder. Then rotate the steering wheel from side to side. If the steering wheel can be rotated, the locking bolt is in the unlocked position. Leave the key in the ignition lock cylinder until shaft lock module removal has been completed. If the steering wheel cannot be rotated, test and repair the wiring circuits between the module and the ignition switch as required. If no problem is found in these circuits, the module has failed with the locking bolt in the locked position and both the module and the steering column must be replaced with new units. 2. Replace the WCM/SKREEM. Refer to TechCONNECT for detailed service information. From the Service Info tab select: 8 - Electrical > Vehicle Theft Security - Service Information > Module, Sentry Key Remote Entry > Removal and Installation. NOTE: Obtain the vehicle PIN number prior to programming WCM/SKREEM or ELV. NOTE: If during the following steps the PIN number is properly entered but is rejected, then reenter the PIN number again until it is accepted. 3. After both the WCM/SKREEM and the ELV (if equipped) have been replaced, Program the WCM/SKREEM as follows: a. Turn the ignition key to the ON position, (Engine Off) b. Connect the scan tool (StarSCAN(R)) to the data link connector and turn the ignition to the RUN position, (engine off). c. Select "ECU View." d. Scroll down and select "WCM" in the list of modules. e. Select "Misc. Functions." f. Scroll to "WCM Replaced." g. Press "Start". h. Press "Next". i. Select "Show Keyboard". j. Enter the vehicle PIN number. k. Select "Next". l. Verify PIN is correct. m. Select "Next". n. Follow on-screen prompts to complete WCM function programing for Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPM) and so on. 0. Turn the ignition key to the OFF position. Wait 30 seconds. p. Turn the ignition key to the ON position, (Engine Off) Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Power Distribution Module: > 08-007-08A > Jul > 08 > Antitheft System - Engine No Crank/No Start Condition > Page 10859 q. Select "ECU View". r. Scroll down and select "WCM" in the list of modules. s. Select "Misc. Functions." t. Select "Program Ign. Keys" and follow on-screen prompts. u. Select "Complete". v. Verify ignition key will start vehicle and the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) functions operate. CAUTION: If the vehicle is equipped with a Shaft Lock Module (used in some International Markets on JS model vehicles), then at least one (1 ignition key must have been programmed to the new WCM BEFORE the new Shaft Lock Module is "married" to the new WCM. 4. Is the vehicle equipped with Steering Shaft Lock Module (ELV)? a. Yes >> Proceed to Step # 5. b. No >>Repair is complete. 5. Program the ELV as follows; a. Select "ECU View". b. Scroll down and select "WCM" in the list of modules. c. Select "Misc. Functions". d. Scroll to "ELV Replaced." e. Press "Start". f. When complete, verify steering shaft lock mechanism is operating. Remove and insert key from the ignition lock cylinder and listen for solenoid "click at lower end of column. POLICY: Reimbursable within the provisions of the warranty. TIME ALLOWANCE: Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Power Distribution Module: > 08-007-08A > Jul > 08 > Antitheft System - Engine No Crank/No Start Condition > Page 10860 FAILURE CODE: Disclaimer: This bulletin is supplied as technical information only and is not an authorization for repair. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 199 Power Distribution Module: Locations Component ID 199 Component ID: 199 Component : MODULE-TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER Connector: Name : MODULE-TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER C1 Color : LT. GRAY # of pins : 14 Pin Circuit Description 1 F1 20PK/WT FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (OFF-RUN-START) 2 T41 18YL/DB TRS T41 SIGNAL (P/N) 2 T41 20YL/DB TRS T41 SIGNAL (P/N) 2 T752 20DG/OR STARTER SOLENOID CONTROL 3-4 K31 20BR FUEL PUMP CONTROL 5 W7 20BR/GY WIPER PARK SWITCH SENSE 6-7-8 G932 20VT/TN WASHER FLUID SWITCH RETURN 9 W1 20BR/TN WASHER FLUID SWITCH SENSE 10 T515 20YL/DB TRANSMISSION CONTROL 11 G70 20VT/LB HOOD AJAR SWITCH SENSE 12 - 13 - 14 - Component Location - 33 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 199 > Page 10863 Component Location - 34 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 199 > Page 10864 Connector: Name : MODULE-TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER C10 Color : LT. GRAY # of pins : 22 Pin Circuit Description 1 K342 16BR/WT ASD CONTROL OUTPUT 2 A405 18RD/DB FUSED B(+) 3 A941 18RD FUSED B(+) 4-5 A104 20YL/RD FUSED B(+) Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 199 > Page 10865 6 A310 16RD/LB FUSED B(+) 7 C15 14DB/WT REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER CONTROL OUTPUT 8 F12 14PK/RD FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) 9 T16 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT 10 - 11 X22 18GY/LB HORN CONTROL OUTPUT 12 W3 18BR/WT WIPER LOW SPEED CONTROL OUTPUT 13 Z971 18BK GROUND 14 C16 18DB/GY HEATED MIRROR CONTROL OUTPUT 15 A212 20RD/OR FUSED B(+) 16 - - 17 A121 14RD/YL FUSED B(+) 18 A109 16OR/RD FUEL PUMP CONTROL OUTPUT 19 X21 18GY/YL HORN CONTROL OUTPUT 20 Z953 20BK GROUND 21 T41 20YL/DB TRS T41 SIGNAL (P/N) 22 A400 14TN/RD FUSED B(+) Component Location - 33 Component Location - 34 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 199 > Page 10866 Connector: Name : MODULE-TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER C2 Color : BLACK # of pins : 13 Pin Circuit Description 1-2 W10 20BR WASHER PUMP MOTOR CONTROL 3 F20 20PK/WT IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) 4 A72 20RD/OR ADJUSTABLE PEDALS OUTPUT 5-- Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 199 > Page 10867 6-7-8-9 G304 20VT/DB FRONT AXLE LOCK CONTROL 10 C13 20LB A/C CLUTCH CONTROL 10 C13 20LB/OR A/C CLUTCH CONTROL 11 K51 20BR/WT ASD CONTROL 12 B20 20DG/OR BRAKE FLUID LEVEL SWITCH SENSE 13 Z117 20BK/WT GROUND Component Location - 33 Component Location - 34 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 199 > Page 10868 Connector: Name : MODULE-TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER C3 Color : BLACK # of pins : 22 Pin Circuit Description 1 A209 10RD FUSED B(+) 2-3 F984 18PK/YL FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-ACC) 4-5 F983 20PK/YL FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-ACC) Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 199 > Page 10869 6 A205 18RD/OR FUSED B(+) 7-8 A944 20RD FUSED B(+) 9 A116 16YL/RD FUSED B(+) 10 A118 18RD/OR FUSED B(+) 11 - 12 A918 20RD FUSED B(+) 12 A918 16RD FUSED B(+) 13 F921 20PK/LB FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN) 14 F504 20GY/PK FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN) 15 F202 20PK/GY FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) 16 A930 16RD FUSED B(+) 17 F942 10PK/LG FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) 18 L673 18YL TRAILER TOW LEFT TURN RELAY OUTPUT 19 L674 18LG TRAILER TOW RIGHT TURN RELAY OUTPUT 20 F960 20PK/LG FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) 21 F21 20PK/DG FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) 22 F12 14PK/RD FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) Component Location - 33 Component Location - 34 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 199 > Page 10870 Connector: Name : MODULE-TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER C4 Color : LT. GRAY # of pins : 13 Pin Circuit Description 1 Z118 16BK/YL GROUND 2 T102 16YL SHIFT MOTOR CONTROL A 3 T101 16DG SHIFT MOTOR CONTROL B 4-5-- Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 199 > Page 10871 6-7-8 T300 20YL/GY T-CASE MOTOR BRAKE SIGNAL 9 T103 20YL/OR 5 VOLT SUPPLY 10 D201 20WT/DG MODE SENSOR A 11 G180 20VT/YL SENSOR RETURN 12 A880 20DB/RD FUSED B(+) 13 G303 20VT/DG FRONT AXLE LOCK SIGNAL Component Location - 33 Component Location - 34 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 199 > Page 10872 Connector: Name : MODULE-TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER C5 Color : BLACK # of pins : 10 Pin Circuit Description 1 L61 20WT/LG LEFT FRONT TURN LAMP DRIVER 2 L60 20WT/TN RIGHT FRONT TURN LAMP DRIVER 3 L34 20WT/GY RIGHT HIGH BEAM DRIVER 4 L43 20WT/DB LEFT LOW BEAM DRIVER 5 T340 20DG/VT INPUT SPEED SENSOR 2 (N3) SIGNAL Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 199 > Page 10873 6-7-8 G31 20VT/LG AAT SIGNAL 9 G930 20VT/TN AAT RETURN 10 T71 20YL/OR INPUT SPEED SENSOR 2 (N3) RETURN Component Location - 33 Component Location - 34 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 199 > Page 10874 Connector: Name : MODULE-TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER C6 Color : BROWN # of pins : 16 Pin Circuit Description 1 D65 20WT/LG CAN C BUS (+) 2 D52 20WT/LB DIAGNOSTIC CAN C (+) 3 D55 20WT/OR CAN B BUS (+) 4 L63 20WT/DG LEFT REAR TURN LAMP DRIVER 5-- Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 199 > Page 10875 6 L62 20WT/YL RIGHT REAR TURN LAMP DRIVER 7 L50 20WT/TN BRAKE LAMP SWITCH OUTPUT 8-9 D64 20WT/LB CAN C BUS (-) 10 D51 20WT/BR DIAGNOSTIC CAN C (-) 11 D54 20WT CAN B BUS (-) 12 - 13 - 14 - 15 T70 20YL INPUT SPEED SENSOR 1 (N2) SIGNAL 16 T341 20DG/VT INPUT SPEED SENSOR 1 (N2) RETURN Component Location - 33 Component Location - 34 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 199 > Page 10876 Connector: Name : MODULE-TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER C7 Color : BLUE # of pins : 14 Pin Circuit Description 1-2-3 L44 20WT/TN RIGHT LOW BEAM DRIVER 4 L33 20WT/LG LEFT HIGH BEAM DRIVER 5-- Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 199 > Page 10877 6-7 C818 20LB/OR A/C PRESSURE 5 VOLT SUPPLY 8 L10 20WT/GY FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN) 9-10 - 11 - 12 C18 20LB/BR A/C PRESSURE SIGNAL 13 C918 20BK/LB A/C PRESSURE GROUND 14 T751 20YL IGNITION START Component Location - 33 Component Location - 34 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 199 > Page 10878 Connector: Name : MODULE-TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER C8 Color : LT. GRAY # of pins : 12 Pin Circuit Description 1 A916 16RD FUSED B(+) Pin Circuit Description 1-2 A919 20RD FUSED B(+) Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 199 > Page 10879 3 A106 20LB/RD FUSED B(+) 4 F201 20PK/OR FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) 5 F100 20PK/VT FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN) 6 A100 14RD/VT FUSED B(+) 7 A210 12OR/RD FUSED B(+) 8 A940 18RD FUSED B(+) 9 A103 18GY/RD FUSED B(+) 10 L89 18WT/YL FOG LAMP CONTROL OUTPUT 11 L1 18WT/LG BACKUP LAMP FEED 12 A961 14RD FUEL HEATER CONTROL OUTPUT 12 C123 12LB/WT CONDENSER FAN CONTROL OUTPUT Component Location - 33 Component Location - 34 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 199 > Page 10880 Connector: Name : MODULE-TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER C9 Color : BLACK # of pins : 12 Pin Circuit Description 1 A111 16DG/RD FUSED B(+) 2 T750 14YL/GY STARTER MOTOR CONTROL OUTPUT 3 C3 20DB/YL A/C CLUTCH CONTROL OUTPUT 4 W4 16BR/OR WIPER MOTOR HIGH SPEED FEED 5 A114 18GY/RD FUSED B(+) Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 199 > Page 10881 6 F30 10PK/YL FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-ACC) 7-8 L7 20WT/YL FUSED PARK LAMP FEED 9 L678 18BR FUSED PARK LAMP FEED 10 L70 20WT/GY FUSED PARK LAMP FEED 11 - 12 A107 12TN/RD FUSED B(+) Component Location - 33 Component Location - 34 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 199 > Page 10882 Connector: Name : MODULE-TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER-EYELET Color : # of pins : 1 Qualifier : (DIESEL) Pin Circuit Description 1 A0 6RD B(+) Component Location - 33 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 199 > Page 10883 Component Location - 34 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 199 > Page 10884 Connector: Name : MODULE-TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER-EYELET Color : # of pins : 1 Qualifier : (GAS) Pin Circuit Description 1 A11 8LB B(+) Pin Circuit Description 1 A0 6RD B(+) Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 199 > Page 10885 Component Location - 33 Component Location - 34 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 199 > Page 10886 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 199 > Page 10887 Power Distribution Module: Locations Component ID 215 Component ID: 215 Component : MODULE-TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER Connector: Name : MODULE-TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER C1 Color : LT. GRAY # of pins : 14 Pin Circuit Description 1 F1 20PK/WT FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (OFF-RUN-START) 2 T41 18YL/DB TRS T41 SIGNAL (P/N) 2 T41 20YL/DB TRS T41 SIGNAL (P/N) 2 T752 20DG/OR STARTER SOLENOID CONTROL 3-4 K31 20BR FUEL PUMP CONTROL 5 W7 20BR/GY WIPER PARK SWITCH SENSE 6-7-8 G932 20VT/TN WASHER FLUID SWITCH RETURN 9 W1 20BR/TN WASHER FLUID SWITCH SENSE 10 T515 20YL/DB TRANSMISSION CONTROL 11 G70 20VT/LB HOOD AJAR SWITCH SENSE 12 - 13 - 14 - Component Location - 33 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 199 > Page 10888 Component Location - 34 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 199 > Page 10889 Connector: Name : MODULE-TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER C10 Color : LT. GRAY # of pins : 22 Pin Circuit Description 1 K342 16BR/WT ASD CONTROL OUTPUT 2 A405 18RD/DB FUSED B(+) 3 A941 18RD FUSED B(+) 4-5 A104 20YL/RD FUSED B(+) Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 199 > Page 10890 6 A310 16RD/LB FUSED B(+) 7 C15 14DB/WT REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER CONTROL OUTPUT 8 F12 14PK/RD FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) 9 T16 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT 10 - 11 X22 18GY/LB HORN CONTROL OUTPUT 12 W3 18BR/WT WIPER LOW SPEED CONTROL OUTPUT 13 Z971 18BK GROUND 14 C16 18DB/GY HEATED MIRROR CONTROL OUTPUT 15 A212 20RD/OR FUSED B(+) 16 - - 17 A121 14RD/YL FUSED B(+) 18 A109 16OR/RD FUEL PUMP CONTROL OUTPUT 19 X21 18GY/YL HORN CONTROL OUTPUT 20 Z953 20BK GROUND 21 T41 20YL/DB TRS T41 SIGNAL (P/N) 22 A400 14TN/RD FUSED B(+) Component Location - 33 Component Location - 34 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 199 > Page 10891 Connector: Name : MODULE-TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER C2 Color : BLACK # of pins : 13 Pin Circuit Description 1-2 W10 20BR WASHER PUMP MOTOR CONTROL 3 F20 20PK/WT IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) 4 A72 20RD/OR ADJUSTABLE PEDALS OUTPUT 5-- Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 199 > Page 10892 6-7-8-9 G304 20VT/DB FRONT AXLE LOCK CONTROL 10 C13 20LB A/C CLUTCH CONTROL 10 C13 20LB/OR A/C CLUTCH CONTROL 11 K51 20BR/WT ASD CONTROL 12 B20 20DG/OR BRAKE FLUID LEVEL SWITCH SENSE 13 Z117 20BK/WT GROUND Component Location - 33 Component Location - 34 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 199 > Page 10893 Connector: Name : MODULE-TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER C3 Color : BLACK # of pins : 22 Pin Circuit Description 1 A209 10RD FUSED B(+) 2-3 F984 18PK/YL FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-ACC) 4-5 F983 20PK/YL FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-ACC) Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 199 > Page 10894 6 A205 18RD/OR FUSED B(+) 7-8 A944 20RD FUSED B(+) 9 A116 16YL/RD FUSED B(+) 10 A118 18RD/OR FUSED B(+) 11 - 12 A918 20RD FUSED B(+) 12 A918 16RD FUSED B(+) 13 F921 20PK/LB FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN) 14 F504 20GY/PK FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN) 15 F202 20PK/GY FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) 16 A930 16RD FUSED B(+) 17 F942 10PK/LG FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) 18 L673 18YL TRAILER TOW LEFT TURN RELAY OUTPUT 19 L674 18LG TRAILER TOW RIGHT TURN RELAY OUTPUT 20 F960 20PK/LG FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) 21 F21 20PK/DG FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) 22 F12 14PK/RD FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) Component Location - 33 Component Location - 34 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 199 > Page 10895 Connector: Name : MODULE-TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER C4 Color : LT. GRAY # of pins : 13 Pin Circuit Description 1 Z118 16BK/YL GROUND 2 T102 16YL SHIFT MOTOR CONTROL A 3 T101 16DG SHIFT MOTOR CONTROL B 4-5-- Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 199 > Page 10896 6-7-8 T300 20YL/GY T-CASE MOTOR BRAKE SIGNAL 9 T103 20YL/OR 5 VOLT SUPPLY 10 D201 20WT/DG MODE SENSOR A 11 G180 20VT/YL SENSOR RETURN 12 A880 20DB/RD FUSED B(+) 13 G303 20VT/DG FRONT AXLE LOCK SIGNAL Component Location - 33 Component Location - 34 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 199 > Page 10897 Connector: Name : MODULE-TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER C5 Color : BLACK # of pins : 10 Pin Circuit Description 1 L61 20WT/LG LEFT FRONT TURN LAMP DRIVER 2 L60 20WT/TN RIGHT FRONT TURN LAMP DRIVER 3 L34 20WT/GY RIGHT HIGH BEAM DRIVER 4 L43 20WT/DB LEFT LOW BEAM DRIVER 5 T340 20DG/VT INPUT SPEED SENSOR 2 (N3) SIGNAL Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 199 > Page 10898 6-7-8 G31 20VT/LG AAT SIGNAL 9 G930 20VT/TN AAT RETURN 10 T71 20YL/OR INPUT SPEED SENSOR 2 (N3) RETURN Component Location - 33 Component Location - 34 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 199 > Page 10899 Connector: Name : MODULE-TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER C6 Color : BROWN # of pins : 16 Pin Circuit Description 1 D65 20WT/LG CAN C BUS (+) 2 D52 20WT/LB DIAGNOSTIC CAN C (+) 3 D55 20WT/OR CAN B BUS (+) 4 L63 20WT/DG LEFT REAR TURN LAMP DRIVER 5-- Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 199 > Page 10900 6 L62 20WT/YL RIGHT REAR TURN LAMP DRIVER 7 L50 20WT/TN BRAKE LAMP SWITCH OUTPUT 8-9 D64 20WT/LB CAN C BUS (-) 10 D51 20WT/BR DIAGNOSTIC CAN C (-) 11 D54 20WT CAN B BUS (-) 12 - 13 - 14 - 15 T70 20YL INPUT SPEED SENSOR 1 (N2) SIGNAL 16 T341 20DG/VT INPUT SPEED SENSOR 1 (N2) RETURN Component Location - 33 Component Location - 34 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 199 > Page 10901 Connector: Name : MODULE-TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER C7 Color : BLUE # of pins : 14 Pin Circuit Description 1-2-3 L44 20WT/TN RIGHT LOW BEAM DRIVER 4 L33 20WT/LG LEFT HIGH BEAM DRIVER 5-- Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 199 > Page 10902 6-7 C818 20LB/OR A/C PRESSURE 5 VOLT SUPPLY 8 L10 20WT/GY FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN) 9-10 - 11 - 12 C18 20LB/BR A/C PRESSURE SIGNAL 13 C918 20BK/LB A/C PRESSURE GROUND 14 T751 20YL IGNITION START Component Location - 33 Component Location - 34 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 199 > Page 10903 Connector: Name : MODULE-TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER C8 Color : LT. GRAY # of pins : 12 Pin Circuit Description 1 A916 16RD FUSED B(+) Pin Circuit Description 1-2 A919 20RD FUSED B(+) Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 199 > Page 10904 3 A106 20LB/RD FUSED B(+) 4 F201 20PK/OR FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) 5 F100 20PK/VT FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN) 6 A100 14RD/VT FUSED B(+) 7 A210 12OR/RD FUSED B(+) 8 A940 18RD FUSED B(+) 9 A103 18GY/RD FUSED B(+) 10 L89 18WT/YL FOG LAMP CONTROL OUTPUT 11 L1 18WT/LG BACKUP LAMP FEED 12 A961 14RD FUEL HEATER CONTROL OUTPUT 12 C123 12LB/WT CONDENSER FAN CONTROL OUTPUT Component Location - 33 Component Location - 34 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 199 > Page 10905 Connector: Name : MODULE-TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER C9 Color : BLACK # of pins : 12 Pin Circuit Description 1 A111 16DG/RD FUSED B(+) 2 T750 14YL/GY STARTER MOTOR CONTROL OUTPUT 3 C3 20DB/YL A/C CLUTCH CONTROL OUTPUT 4 W4 16BR/OR WIPER MOTOR HIGH SPEED FEED 5 A114 18GY/RD FUSED B(+) Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 199 > Page 10906 6 F30 10PK/YL FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-ACC) 7-8 L7 20WT/YL FUSED PARK LAMP FEED 9 L678 18BR FUSED PARK LAMP FEED 10 L70 20WT/GY FUSED PARK LAMP FEED 11 - 12 A107 12TN/RD FUSED B(+) Component Location - 33 Component Location - 34 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 199 > Page 10907 Connector: Name : MODULE-TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER-EYELET Color : # of pins : 1 Qualifier : (DIESEL) Pin Circuit Description 1 A0 6RD B(+) Component Location - 33 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 199 > Page 10908 Component Location - 34 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 199 > Page 10909 Connector: Name : MODULE-TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER-EYELET Color : # of pins : 1 Qualifier : (GAS) Pin Circuit Description 1 A11 8LB B(+) Pin Circuit Description 1 A0 6RD B(+) Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 199 > Page 10910 Component Location - 33 Component Location - 34 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 199 > Page 10911 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Component ID 199 Power Distribution Module: Diagrams Component ID 199 Component ID: 199 Component : MODULE-TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER Connector: Name : MODULE-TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER C1 Color : LT. GRAY # of pins : 14 Pin Circuit Description 1 F1 20PK/WT FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (OFF-RUN-START) 2 T41 18YL/DB TRS T41 SIGNAL (P/N) 2 T41 20YL/DB TRS T41 SIGNAL (P/N) 2 T752 20DG/OR STARTER SOLENOID CONTROL 3-4 K31 20BR FUEL PUMP CONTROL 5 W7 20BR/GY WIPER PARK SWITCH SENSE 6-7-8 G932 20VT/TN WASHER FLUID SWITCH RETURN 9 W1 20BR/TN WASHER FLUID SWITCH SENSE 10 T515 20YL/DB TRANSMISSION CONTROL 11 G70 20VT/LB HOOD AJAR SWITCH SENSE 12 - 13 - 14 - Component Location - 33 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Component ID 199 > Page 10914 Component Location - 34 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Component ID 199 > Page 10915 Connector: Name : MODULE-TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER C10 Color : LT. GRAY # of pins : 22 Pin Circuit Description 1 K342 16BR/WT ASD CONTROL OUTPUT 2 A405 18RD/DB FUSED B(+) 3 A941 18RD FUSED B(+) 4-5 A104 20YL/RD FUSED B(+) Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Component ID 199 > Page 10916 6 A310 16RD/LB FUSED B(+) 7 C15 14DB/WT REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER CONTROL OUTPUT 8 F12 14PK/RD FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) 9 T16 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT 10 - 11 X22 18GY/LB HORN CONTROL OUTPUT 12 W3 18BR/WT WIPER LOW SPEED CONTROL OUTPUT 13 Z971 18BK GROUND 14 C16 18DB/GY HEATED MIRROR CONTROL OUTPUT 15 A212 20RD/OR FUSED B(+) 16 - - 17 A121 14RD/YL FUSED B(+) 18 A109 16OR/RD FUEL PUMP CONTROL OUTPUT 19 X21 18GY/YL HORN CONTROL OUTPUT 20 Z953 20BK GROUND 21 T41 20YL/DB TRS T41 SIGNAL (P/N) 22 A400 14TN/RD FUSED B(+) Component Location - 33 Component Location - 34 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Component ID 199 > Page 10917 Connector: Name : MODULE-TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER C2 Color : BLACK # of pins : 13 Pin Circuit Description 1-2 W10 20BR WASHER PUMP MOTOR CONTROL 3 F20 20PK/WT IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) 4 A72 20RD/OR ADJUSTABLE PEDALS OUTPUT 5-- Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Component ID 199 > Page 10918 6-7-8-9 G304 20VT/DB FRONT AXLE LOCK CONTROL 10 C13 20LB A/C CLUTCH CONTROL 10 C13 20LB/OR A/C CLUTCH CONTROL 11 K51 20BR/WT ASD CONTROL 12 B20 20DG/OR BRAKE FLUID LEVEL SWITCH SENSE 13 Z117 20BK/WT GROUND Component Location - 33 Component Location - 34 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Component ID 199 > Page 10919 Connector: Name : MODULE-TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER C3 Color : BLACK # of pins : 22 Pin Circuit Description 1 A209 10RD FUSED B(+) 2-3 F984 18PK/YL FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-ACC) 4-5 F983 20PK/YL FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-ACC) Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Component ID 199 > Page 10920 6 A205 18RD/OR FUSED B(+) 7-8 A944 20RD FUSED B(+) 9 A116 16YL/RD FUSED B(+) 10 A118 18RD/OR FUSED B(+) 11 - 12 A918 20RD FUSED B(+) 12 A918 16RD FUSED B(+) 13 F921 20PK/LB FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN) 14 F504 20GY/PK FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN) 15 F202 20PK/GY FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) 16 A930 16RD FUSED B(+) 17 F942 10PK/LG FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) 18 L673 18YL TRAILER TOW LEFT TURN RELAY OUTPUT 19 L674 18LG TRAILER TOW RIGHT TURN RELAY OUTPUT 20 F960 20PK/LG FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) 21 F21 20PK/DG FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) 22 F12 14PK/RD FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) Component Location - 33 Component Location - 34 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Component ID 199 > Page 10921 Connector: Name : MODULE-TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER C4 Color : LT. GRAY # of pins : 13 Pin Circuit Description 1 Z118 16BK/YL GROUND 2 T102 16YL SHIFT MOTOR CONTROL A 3 T101 16DG SHIFT MOTOR CONTROL B 4-5-- Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Component ID 199 > Page 10922 6-7-8 T300 20YL/GY T-CASE MOTOR BRAKE SIGNAL 9 T103 20YL/OR 5 VOLT SUPPLY 10 D201 20WT/DG MODE SENSOR A 11 G180 20VT/YL SENSOR RETURN 12 A880 20DB/RD FUSED B(+) 13 G303 20VT/DG FRONT AXLE LOCK SIGNAL Component Location - 33 Component Location - 34 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Component ID 199 > Page 10923 Connector: Name : MODULE-TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER C5 Color : BLACK # of pins : 10 Pin Circuit Description 1 L61 20WT/LG LEFT FRONT TURN LAMP DRIVER 2 L60 20WT/TN RIGHT FRONT TURN LAMP DRIVER 3 L34 20WT/GY RIGHT HIGH BEAM DRIVER 4 L43 20WT/DB LEFT LOW BEAM DRIVER 5 T340 20DG/VT INPUT SPEED SENSOR 2 (N3) SIGNAL Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Component ID 199 > Page 10924 6-7-8 G31 20VT/LG AAT SIGNAL 9 G930 20VT/TN AAT RETURN 10 T71 20YL/OR INPUT SPEED SENSOR 2 (N3) RETURN Component Location - 33 Component Location - 34 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Component ID 199 > Page 10925 Connector: Name : MODULE-TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER C6 Color : BROWN # of pins : 16 Pin Circuit Description 1 D65 20WT/LG CAN C BUS (+) 2 D52 20WT/LB DIAGNOSTIC CAN C (+) 3 D55 20WT/OR CAN B BUS (+) 4 L63 20WT/DG LEFT REAR TURN LAMP DRIVER 5-- Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Component ID 199 > Page 10926 6 L62 20WT/YL RIGHT REAR TURN LAMP DRIVER 7 L50 20WT/TN BRAKE LAMP SWITCH OUTPUT 8-9 D64 20WT/LB CAN C BUS (-) 10 D51 20WT/BR DIAGNOSTIC CAN C (-) 11 D54 20WT CAN B BUS (-) 12 - 13 - 14 - 15 T70 20YL INPUT SPEED SENSOR 1 (N2) SIGNAL 16 T341 20DG/VT INPUT SPEED SENSOR 1 (N2) RETURN Component Location - 33 Component Location - 34 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Component ID 199 > Page 10927 Connector: Name : MODULE-TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER C7 Color : BLUE # of pins : 14 Pin Circuit Description 1-2-3 L44 20WT/TN RIGHT LOW BEAM DRIVER 4 L33 20WT/LG LEFT HIGH BEAM DRIVER 5-- Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Component ID 199 > Page 10928 6-7 C818 20LB/OR A/C PRESSURE 5 VOLT SUPPLY 8 L10 20WT/GY FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN) 9-10 - 11 - 12 C18 20LB/BR A/C PRESSURE SIGNAL 13 C918 20BK/LB A/C PRESSURE GROUND 14 T751 20YL IGNITION START Component Location - 33 Component Location - 34 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Component ID 199 > Page 10929 Connector: Name : MODULE-TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER C8 Color : LT. GRAY # of pins : 12 Pin Circuit Description 1 A916 16RD FUSED B(+) Pin Circuit Description 1-2 A919 20RD FUSED B(+) Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Component ID 199 > Page 10930 3 A106 20LB/RD FUSED B(+) 4 F201 20PK/OR FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) 5 F100 20PK/VT FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN) 6 A100 14RD/VT FUSED B(+) 7 A210 12OR/RD FUSED B(+) 8 A940 18RD FUSED B(+) 9 A103 18GY/RD FUSED B(+) 10 L89 18WT/YL FOG LAMP CONTROL OUTPUT 11 L1 18WT/LG BACKUP LAMP FEED 12 A961 14RD FUEL HEATER CONTROL OUTPUT 12 C123 12LB/WT CONDENSER FAN CONTROL OUTPUT Component Location - 33 Component Location - 34 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Component ID 199 > Page 10931 Connector: Name : MODULE-TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER C9 Color : BLACK # of pins : 12 Pin Circuit Description 1 A111 16DG/RD FUSED B(+) 2 T750 14YL/GY STARTER MOTOR CONTROL OUTPUT 3 C3 20DB/YL A/C CLUTCH CONTROL OUTPUT 4 W4 16BR/OR WIPER MOTOR HIGH SPEED FEED 5 A114 18GY/RD FUSED B(+) Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Component ID 199 > Page 10932 6 F30 10PK/YL FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-ACC) 7-8 L7 20WT/YL FUSED PARK LAMP FEED 9 L678 18BR FUSED PARK LAMP FEED 10 L70 20WT/GY FUSED PARK LAMP FEED 11 - 12 A107 12TN/RD FUSED B(+) Component Location - 33 Component Location - 34 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Component ID 199 > Page 10933 Connector: Name : MODULE-TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER-EYELET Color : # of pins : 1 Qualifier : (DIESEL) Pin Circuit Description 1 A0 6RD B(+) Component Location - 33 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Component ID 199 > Page 10934 Component Location - 34 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Component ID 199 > Page 10935 Connector: Name : MODULE-TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER-EYELET Color : # of pins : 1 Qualifier : (GAS) Pin Circuit Description 1 A11 8LB B(+) Pin Circuit Description 1 A0 6RD B(+) Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Component ID 199 > Page 10936 Component Location - 33 Component Location - 34 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Component ID 199 > Page 10937 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Component ID 199 > Page 10938 Power Distribution Module: Diagrams Component ID 215 Component ID: 215 Component : MODULE-TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER Connector: Name : MODULE-TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER C1 Color : LT. GRAY # of pins : 14 Pin Circuit Description 1 F1 20PK/WT FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (OFF-RUN-START) 2 T41 18YL/DB TRS T41 SIGNAL (P/N) 2 T41 20YL/DB TRS T41 SIGNAL (P/N) 2 T752 20DG/OR STARTER SOLENOID CONTROL 3-4 K31 20BR FUEL PUMP CONTROL 5 W7 20BR/GY WIPER PARK SWITCH SENSE 6-7-8 G932 20VT/TN WASHER FLUID SWITCH RETURN 9 W1 20BR/TN WASHER FLUID SWITCH SENSE 10 T515 20YL/DB TRANSMISSION CONTROL 11 G70 20VT/LB HOOD AJAR SWITCH SENSE 12 - 13 - 14 - Component Location - 33 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Component ID 199 > Page 10939 Component Location - 34 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Component ID 199 > Page 10940 Connector: Name : MODULE-TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER C10 Color : LT. GRAY # of pins : 22 Pin Circuit Description 1 K342 16BR/WT ASD CONTROL OUTPUT 2 A405 18RD/DB FUSED B(+) 3 A941 18RD FUSED B(+) 4-5 A104 20YL/RD FUSED B(+) Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Component ID 199 > Page 10941 6 A310 16RD/LB FUSED B(+) 7 C15 14DB/WT REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER CONTROL OUTPUT 8 F12 14PK/RD FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) 9 T16 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT 10 - 11 X22 18GY/LB HORN CONTROL OUTPUT 12 W3 18BR/WT WIPER LOW SPEED CONTROL OUTPUT 13 Z971 18BK GROUND 14 C16 18DB/GY HEATED MIRROR CONTROL OUTPUT 15 A212 20RD/OR FUSED B(+) 16 - - 17 A121 14RD/YL FUSED B(+) 18 A109 16OR/RD FUEL PUMP CONTROL OUTPUT 19 X21 18GY/YL HORN CONTROL OUTPUT 20 Z953 20BK GROUND 21 T41 20YL/DB TRS T41 SIGNAL (P/N) 22 A400 14TN/RD FUSED B(+) Component Location - 33 Component Location - 34 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Component ID 199 > Page 10942 Connector: Name : MODULE-TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER C2 Color : BLACK # of pins : 13 Pin Circuit Description 1-2 W10 20BR WASHER PUMP MOTOR CONTROL 3 F20 20PK/WT IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) 4 A72 20RD/OR ADJUSTABLE PEDALS OUTPUT 5-- Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Component ID 199 > Page 10943 6-7-8-9 G304 20VT/DB FRONT AXLE LOCK CONTROL 10 C13 20LB A/C CLUTCH CONTROL 10 C13 20LB/OR A/C CLUTCH CONTROL 11 K51 20BR/WT ASD CONTROL 12 B20 20DG/OR BRAKE FLUID LEVEL SWITCH SENSE 13 Z117 20BK/WT GROUND Component Location - 33 Component Location - 34 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Component ID 199 > Page 10944 Connector: Name : MODULE-TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER C3 Color : BLACK # of pins : 22 Pin Circuit Description 1 A209 10RD FUSED B(+) 2-3 F984 18PK/YL FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-ACC) 4-5 F983 20PK/YL FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-ACC) Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Component ID 199 > Page 10945 6 A205 18RD/OR FUSED B(+) 7-8 A944 20RD FUSED B(+) 9 A116 16YL/RD FUSED B(+) 10 A118 18RD/OR FUSED B(+) 11 - 12 A918 20RD FUSED B(+) 12 A918 16RD FUSED B(+) 13 F921 20PK/LB FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN) 14 F504 20GY/PK FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN) 15 F202 20PK/GY FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) 16 A930 16RD FUSED B(+) 17 F942 10PK/LG FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) 18 L673 18YL TRAILER TOW LEFT TURN RELAY OUTPUT 19 L674 18LG TRAILER TOW RIGHT TURN RELAY OUTPUT 20 F960 20PK/LG FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) 21 F21 20PK/DG FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) 22 F12 14PK/RD FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) Component Location - 33 Component Location - 34 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Component ID 199 > Page 10946 Connector: Name : MODULE-TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER C4 Color : LT. GRAY # of pins : 13 Pin Circuit Description 1 Z118 16BK/YL GROUND 2 T102 16YL SHIFT MOTOR CONTROL A 3 T101 16DG SHIFT MOTOR CONTROL B 4-5-- Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Component ID 199 > Page 10947 6-7-8 T300 20YL/GY T-CASE MOTOR BRAKE SIGNAL 9 T103 20YL/OR 5 VOLT SUPPLY 10 D201 20WT/DG MODE SENSOR A 11 G180 20VT/YL SENSOR RETURN 12 A880 20DB/RD FUSED B(+) 13 G303 20VT/DG FRONT AXLE LOCK SIGNAL Component Location - 33 Component Location - 34 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Component ID 199 > Page 10948 Connector: Name : MODULE-TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER C5 Color : BLACK # of pins : 10 Pin Circuit Description 1 L61 20WT/LG LEFT FRONT TURN LAMP DRIVER 2 L60 20WT/TN RIGHT FRONT TURN LAMP DRIVER 3 L34 20WT/GY RIGHT HIGH BEAM DRIVER 4 L43 20WT/DB LEFT LOW BEAM DRIVER 5 T340 20DG/VT INPUT SPEED SENSOR 2 (N3) SIGNAL Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Component ID 199 > Page 10949 6-7-8 G31 20VT/LG AAT SIGNAL 9 G930 20VT/TN AAT RETURN 10 T71 20YL/OR INPUT SPEED SENSOR 2 (N3) RETURN Component Location - 33 Component Location - 34 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Component ID 199 > Page 10950 Connector: Name : MODULE-TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER C6 Color : BROWN # of pins : 16 Pin Circuit Description 1 D65 20WT/LG CAN C BUS (+) 2 D52 20WT/LB DIAGNOSTIC CAN C (+) 3 D55 20WT/OR CAN B BUS (+) 4 L63 20WT/DG LEFT REAR TURN LAMP DRIVER 5-- Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Component ID 199 > Page 10951 6 L62 20WT/YL RIGHT REAR TURN LAMP DRIVER 7 L50 20WT/TN BRAKE LAMP SWITCH OUTPUT 8-9 D64 20WT/LB CAN C BUS (-) 10 D51 20WT/BR DIAGNOSTIC CAN C (-) 11 D54 20WT CAN B BUS (-) 12 - 13 - 14 - 15 T70 20YL INPUT SPEED SENSOR 1 (N2) SIGNAL 16 T341 20DG/VT INPUT SPEED SENSOR 1 (N2) RETURN Component Location - 33 Component Location - 34 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Component ID 199 > Page 10952 Connector: Name : MODULE-TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER C7 Color : BLUE # of pins : 14 Pin Circuit Description 1-2-3 L44 20WT/TN RIGHT LOW BEAM DRIVER 4 L33 20WT/LG LEFT HIGH BEAM DRIVER 5-- Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Component ID 199 > Page 10953 6-7 C818 20LB/OR A/C PRESSURE 5 VOLT SUPPLY 8 L10 20WT/GY FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN) 9-10 - 11 - 12 C18 20LB/BR A/C PRESSURE SIGNAL 13 C918 20BK/LB A/C PRESSURE GROUND 14 T751 20YL IGNITION START Component Location - 33 Component Location - 34 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Component ID 199 > Page 10954 Connector: Name : MODULE-TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER C8 Color : LT. GRAY # of pins : 12 Pin Circuit Description 1 A916 16RD FUSED B(+) Pin Circuit Description 1-2 A919 20RD FUSED B(+) Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Component ID 199 > Page 10955 3 A106 20LB/RD FUSED B(+) 4 F201 20PK/OR FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) 5 F100 20PK/VT FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN) 6 A100 14RD/VT FUSED B(+) 7 A210 12OR/RD FUSED B(+) 8 A940 18RD FUSED B(+) 9 A103 18GY/RD FUSED B(+) 10 L89 18WT/YL FOG LAMP CONTROL OUTPUT 11 L1 18WT/LG BACKUP LAMP FEED 12 A961 14RD FUEL HEATER CONTROL OUTPUT 12 C123 12LB/WT CONDENSER FAN CONTROL OUTPUT Component Location - 33 Component Location - 34 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Component ID 199 > Page 10956 Connector: Name : MODULE-TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER C9 Color : BLACK # of pins : 12 Pin Circuit Description 1 A111 16DG/RD FUSED B(+) 2 T750 14YL/GY STARTER MOTOR CONTROL OUTPUT 3 C3 20DB/YL A/C CLUTCH CONTROL OUTPUT 4 W4 16BR/OR WIPER MOTOR HIGH SPEED FEED 5 A114 18GY/RD FUSED B(+) Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Component ID 199 > Page 10957 6 F30 10PK/YL FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-ACC) 7-8 L7 20WT/YL FUSED PARK LAMP FEED 9 L678 18BR FUSED PARK LAMP FEED 10 L70 20WT/GY FUSED PARK LAMP FEED 11 - 12 A107 12TN/RD FUSED B(+) Component Location - 33 Component Location - 34 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Component ID 199 > Page 10958 Connector: Name : MODULE-TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER-EYELET Color : # of pins : 1 Qualifier : (DIESEL) Pin Circuit Description 1 A0 6RD B(+) Component Location - 33 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Component ID 199 > Page 10959 Component Location - 34 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Component ID 199 > Page 10960 Connector: Name : MODULE-TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER-EYELET Color : # of pins : 1 Qualifier : (GAS) Pin Circuit Description 1 A11 8LB B(+) Pin Circuit Description 1 A0 6RD B(+) Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Component ID 199 > Page 10961 Component Location - 33 Component Location - 34 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Component ID 199 > Page 10962 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Power Distribution Module: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The Totally Integrated Power Module (2)(TIPM) is a combination unit that performs the functions of the Power Distribution Center (PDC) and the Front Control Module. The TIPM is a printed circuit board based module that contains fuses, internal relays and a microprocessor that performs the functions previously executed by the FCM. The TIPM (2) is located in the engine compartment, next to the battery (1) and connects directly to the B+ cable (5) via a stud located on top of the unit. The ground connection is via electrical connectors. The TIPM provides the primary means of voltage distribution and protection for the entire vehicle. The molded plastic TIPM housing includes a base and cover. The TIPM cover is easily opened or removed for service and has a fuse and relay layout map integral to the inside surface of the cover. The TIPM housing base and cover are secured in place via mounting tabs. The mounting tabs secure the TIPM (2) to the battery tray mounting bracket (3). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 10965 Power Distribution Module: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION All of the current from the battery and the generator output enters the Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) via a stud on the top of the module. The TIPM cover is removed to access the fuses or relays. Internal connections of all of the power distribution center circuits is accomplished by a combination of bus bars and a printed circuit board. For a complete wiring diagram Refer to Diagrams/Electrical. The wiring information includes wiring diagrams, proper wire and connector repair procedures, details of wire harness routing and retention, connector pin-out information and location views for the various wire harness connectors, splices and grounds. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Power Distribution Module: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. 2. Remove the B+ terminal nut (6) from the Totally Integrated Power Module (2)(TIPM) B+ terminal. Remove the B+ cable (5) from the TIPM (2). 3. Using a suitable flat blade tool, disengage the TIPM (2) upper retaining tabs from the battery tray bracket (3). 4. Grasp the TIPM (1) and rotate the assembly up to free it from its mounting bracket (3). Position the assembly upside down to access the electrical connectors located on the bottom of the unit. 5. Disconnect the electrical connectors (2) by depressing the locking tab and rotating the connector arm outboard, until the connector is free from the Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 10968 TIPM assembly (1). Be certain to pull the connectors straight off. 6. Remove the TIPM (1) from the vehicle. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 10969 Power Distribution Module: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION 1. Position the Totally Integrated Power Module (1)(TIPM) into the vehicle. NOTE: Totally Integrated power module electrical connectors are color coded to ease location reference. 2. Connect the electrical connectors (2) by pushing straight on and rotating the connector arm inboard, until the connector is firmly locked in place on the TIPM assembly (1). 3. Turn the TIPM (1) so that the connector side is facing down. Install the assembly onto the TIPM battery tray bracket (3) making sure to line up the lower retaining tab with the retaining slot in the tray (1). 4. Push the TIPM (1) downward to lock the upper retaining clips into the bracket (3). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 10970 5. Install the B+ terminal cable (5) and nut (6) on the B+ terminal of the TIPM (2). 6. Connect the battery negative cable. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations Relay Box: Locations An integrated Power Module is located in the engine compartment near the battery. This center contains cartridge fuses and mini fuses. A description of each fuse and component may be stamped on the inside cover otherwise the cavity number of each fuse is stamped on the inside cover that corresponds to the following chart. Underhood Fuses (Integrated Power Module) Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Page 10974 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Page 10975 CAUTION: - When installing the Integrated Power Module cover, it is important to ensure the cover is properly positioned and fully latched. Failure to do so may allow water to get into the Integrated Power Module, and possibly result in a electrical system failure. - When replacing a blown fuse, it is important to use only a fuse having the correct amperage rating. The use of a fuse with a rating other than indicated may result in a dangerous electrical system overload. If a properly rated fuse continues to blow, it indicates a problem in the circuit that must be corrected. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Page 10976 Relay Box: Application and ID An integrated Power Module is located in the engine compartment near the battery. This center contains cartridge fuses and mini fuses. A description of each fuse and component may be stamped on the inside cover otherwise the cavity number of each fuse is stamped on the inside cover that corresponds to the following chart. Underhood Fuses (Integrated Power Module) Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Page 10977 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Page 10978 CAUTION: - When installing the Integrated Power Module cover, it is important to ensure the cover is properly positioned and fully latched. Failure to do so may allow water to get into the Integrated Power Module, and possibly result in a electrical system failure. - When replacing a blown fuse, it is important to use only a fuse having the correct amperage rating. The use of a fuse with a rating other than indicated may result in a dangerous electrical system overload. If a properly rated fuse continues to blow, it indicates a problem in the circuit that must be corrected. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations Relay Box: Locations An integrated Power Module is located in the engine compartment near the battery. This center contains cartridge fuses and mini fuses. A description of each fuse and component may be stamped on the inside cover otherwise the cavity number of each fuse is stamped on the inside cover that corresponds to the following chart. Underhood Fuses (Integrated Power Module) Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Page 10982 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Page 10983 CAUTION: - When installing the Integrated Power Module cover, it is important to ensure the cover is properly positioned and fully latched. Failure to do so may allow water to get into the Integrated Power Module, and possibly result in a electrical system failure. - When replacing a blown fuse, it is important to use only a fuse having the correct amperage rating. The use of a fuse with a rating other than indicated may result in a dangerous electrical system overload. If a properly rated fuse continues to blow, it indicates a problem in the circuit that must be corrected. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Page 10984 Relay Box: Application and ID An integrated Power Module is located in the engine compartment near the battery. This center contains cartridge fuses and mini fuses. A description of each fuse and component may be stamped on the inside cover otherwise the cavity number of each fuse is stamped on the inside cover that corresponds to the following chart. Underhood Fuses (Integrated Power Module) Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Page 10985 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Page 10986 CAUTION: - When installing the Integrated Power Module cover, it is important to ensure the cover is properly positioned and fully latched. Failure to do so may allow water to get into the Integrated Power Module, and possibly result in a electrical system failure. - When replacing a blown fuse, it is important to use only a fuse having the correct amperage rating. The use of a fuse with a rating other than indicated may result in a dangerous electrical system overload. If a properly rated fuse continues to blow, it indicates a problem in the circuit that must be corrected. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Specifications > Curb Height Measurement (LD) Alignment: Specifications Curb Height Measurement (LD) CURB HEIGHT MEASUREMENT (LD) The wheel alignment is to be checked and all alignment adjustments made with the vehicle at its required curb height specification. Vehicle height is to be checked with the vehicle on a flat, level surface, preferably a vehicle alignment rack. The tires are to be inflated to the recommended pressure. All tires are to be the same size as standard equipment. Vehicle height is checked with the fuel tank full of fuel, and no passenger or luggage compartment load. Inspect the vehicle for bent or weak suspension components. Compare the parts tag on the suspect coil spring(s) to the parts book and the vehicle sales code, checking for a match. Once removed from the vehicle, compare the coil spring height to a correct new or known good coil spring. The heights should vary if the suspect spring is weak. 1. Front - On each side of the vehicle, measure the distance from the center of the rear lower control arm bolt (1) to the ground (2) Record the measurement. Next measure the distance from the spindle center (3) to the ground (4) Record the measurement. 2. Take the two measurements and subtract them to get the curb height specification. 3. Rear 4X2 LD - On each side of the vehicle, measure the distance at the axle tube (1) to the jounce bumper flange (2). 4. Rear 4X4 LD - On each side of the vehicle, measure the distance at the jounce pad welded to the axle tube (1) to the jounce bumper flange (2). 5. Compare the measurements to the specifications listed in the following Curb Height Specifications chart. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Specifications > Curb Height Measurement (LD) > Page 10992 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Specifications > Curb Height Measurement (LD) > Page 10993 Alignment: Specifications Curb Height Measurement (HD) CURB HEIGHT MEASUREMENT (HD) The wheel alignment is to be checked and all alignment adjustments made with the vehicle at its required curb height specification. Vehicle height is to be checked with the vehicle on a flat, level surface, preferably a vehicle alignment rack. The tires are to be inflated to the recommended pressure. All tires are to be the same size as standard equipment. Vehicle height is checked with the fuel tank full of fuel, and no passenger or luggage compartment load. Inspect the vehicle for bent or weak suspension components. Compare the parts tag on the suspect coil spring(s) to the parts book and the vehicle sales code, checking for a match. Once removed from the vehicle, compare the coil spring height to a correct new or known good coil spring. The heights should vary if the suspect spring is weak. 1. Front 4X2 On each side of the vehicle, measure the distance from the top of the jounce bumper flange (2) to the bottom of the frame rail (1). 2. Front 4X4 On each side of the vehicle, measure the distance from the top of the axle (2) to the bottom of the jounce bumper flange (1). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Specifications > Curb Height Measurement (LD) > Page 10994 3. Rear ALL - On each side of the vehicle, measure the distance at the top of the axle tube (2) to the bottom of the frame rail (1). 4. Compare the measurements to the specifications listed in the following Curb Height Specifications chart. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Specifications > Curb Height Measurement (LD) > Page 10995 Alignment: Specifications Wheel Alignment Specifications Ram 1500 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Specifications > Curb Height Measurement (LD) > Page 10996 Ram 2500 SERIES - 4X2 Ram 2500 SERIES - 4X4 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Specifications > Curb Height Measurement (LD) > Page 10997 Ram 2500 SERIES MEGA CAB 4X4 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Specifications > Curb Height Measurement (LD) > Page 10998 Ram 3500 SERIES 4X2 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Specifications > Curb Height Measurement (LD) > Page 10999 Ram 3500 SERIES 4X4 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Specifications > Curb Height Measurement (LD) > Page 11000 Ram 3500 SERIES CAB CHASSIS Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Specifications > Curb Height Measurement (LD) > Page 11001 Ram 4500 SERIES Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Specifications > Curb Height Measurement (LD) > Page 11002 Ram 5500 SERIES Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Description and Operation > Description Alignment: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION NOTE: Suspension components with rubber/urethane bushings should be tightened with the vehicle at normal ride height. It is important to have the springs supporting the weight of the vehicle when the fasteners are torqued. If springs are not at their normal ride position, vehicle ride comfort could be affected and premature bushing wear may occur. Wheel alignment involves the correct positioning of the wheels in relation to the vehicle. The positioning is accomplished through suspension and steering linkage adjustments. An alignment is considered essential for efficient steering, good directional stability and to minimize tire wear. The most important measurements of an alignment are caster, camber and toe. CAUTION: Never attempt to modify suspension or steering components by heating or bending. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 11005 Alignment: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION - CASTER is the forward or rearward tilt of the steering knuckle from vertical. Tilting the top of the knuckle forward provides less positive caster. Tilting the top of the knuckle rearward provides more positive caster. Positive caster promotes directional stability. This angle enables the front wheels to return to a straight ahead position after turns - CAMBER is the inward or outward tilt of the wheel relative to the center of the vehicle. Tilting the top of the wheel inward provides negative camber. Tilting the top of the wheel outward provides positive camber. Incorrect camber will cause wear on the inside or outside edge of the tire - TOE is the difference between the leading inside edges and trailing inside edges of the front tires. Wheel toe position out of specification cause's unstable steering, uneven tire wear and steering wheel off- center. The wheel toe position is the final front wheel alignment adjustment - THRUST ANGLE is the angle of the rear axle relative to the centerline of the vehicle. Incorrect thrust angle can cause off-center steering and excessive tire wear. This angle is not adjustable, damaged component(s) must be replaced to correct the thrust angle Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Description and Operation > Page 11006 Alignment: Testing and Inspection PRE-ALIGNMENT INSPECTION Before starting wheel alignment, the following inspection and necessary corrections must be completed. Refer to Suspension and Steering System Diagnosis Chart below for additional information. 1. Inspect tires for size, air pressure and tread wear. 2. Inspect front wheel bearings for wear. 3. Inspect front wheels for excessive radial or lateral runout and balance. 4. Inspect ball studs, linkage pivot points and steering gear for looseness, roughness or binding. 5. Inspect suspension components for wear and noise. 6. Road test the vehicle. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Service and Repair > Camber and Caster Adjustment Alignment: Service and Repair Camber and Caster Adjustment CAMBER AND CASTER ADJUSTMENT Camber and caster angle adjustments involve changing the position of the lower control arm (2) in conjunction with the slotted holes in the frame brackets (1). Vehicle should be at normal ride height. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Service and Repair > Camber and Caster Adjustment > Page 11009 Alignment: Service and Repair Alignment - Rack and Pinion Steering System ALIGNMENT - RACK AND PINION STEERING SYSTEM CAMBER, CASTER AND TOE ADJUSTMENT Camber and caster angle adjustments involve changing the position of the lower control arm with the slots in the frame brackets (1). CASTER Moving the front or rear position of the lower control arm in or out, will change the caster angle and camber angle significantly. To maintain the camber angle while adjusting caster, move one pivot bolt of the lower control arm in or out. Then move the other pivot bolt of the lower control arm in the opposite direction. To increase positive caster angle, move the rear position of the lower control arm inward (toward the engine). Move the front of the lower control arm outward (away from the engine) slightly until the desired camber angle is obtained. CAMBER Move both pivot bolts of the lower control arm together in or out. This will change the camber angle significantly and little effect on the caster angle. After adjustment is made tighten the lower control arm nuts to proper torque specification. TOE ADJUSTMENT The wheel toe position adjustment is the final adjustment. 1. Start the engine and turn wheels both ways before straightening the wheels. Secure the steering wheel with the front wheels in the straight-ahead position. 2. Loosen the tie rod jam nuts (1). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Service and Repair > Camber and Caster Adjustment > Page 11010 NOTE: Each front wheel should be adjusted for one-half of the total toe position specification. This will ensure the steering wheel will be centered when the wheels are positioned straight-ahead. 3. Adjust the wheel toe position by turning the inner tie rod (2) as necessary. 4. Tighten the tie rod jam nut (1) to 127 Nm (94 ft. lbs.). NOTE: Make sure the toe setting does not change during tightening. 5. Verify the specifications 6. Turn off engine. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Service and Repair > Camber and Caster Adjustment > Page 11011 Alignment: Service and Repair Toe Adjustment - Rack and Pinion Steering System TOE ADJUSTMENT - RACK AND PINION STEERING SYSTEM 1. Start the engine and turn wheels both ways before straightening the wheels. Secure the steering wheel with the front wheels in the straight-ahead position. 2. Loosen the tie rod jam nuts (1). NOTE: Each front wheel should be adjusted for one-half of the total toe position specification. This will ensure the steering wheel will be centered when the wheels are positioned straight-ahead. 3. Adjust the wheel toe position by turning the inner tie rod (2) as necessary. NOTE: Make sure the toe setting does not change during tightening. 4. Tighten the tie rod jam nut (1) to 127 Nm (94 ft. lbs.). 5. Verify the specifications. 6. Road test the vehicle. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Service and Repair > Camber and Caster Adjustment > Page 11012 Alignment: Service and Repair Curb Height Measurement (LD) CURB HEIGHT MEASUREMENT (LD) The wheel alignment is to be checked and all alignment adjustments made with the vehicle at its required curb height specification. Vehicle height is to be checked with the vehicle on a flat, level surface, preferably a vehicle alignment rack. The tires are to be inflated to the recommended pressure. All tires are to be the same size as standard equipment. Vehicle height is checked with the fuel tank full of fuel, and no passenger or luggage compartment load. Inspect the vehicle for bent or weak suspension components. Compare the parts tag on the suspect coil spring(s) to the parts book and the vehicle sales code, checking for a match. Once removed from the vehicle, compare the coil spring height to a correct new or known good coil spring. The heights should vary if the suspect spring is weak. 1. Front - On each side of the vehicle, measure the distance from the center of the rear lower control arm bolt (1) to the ground (2) Record the measurement. Next measure the distance from the spindle center (3) to the ground (4) Record the measurement. 2. Take the two measurements and subtract them to get the curb height specification. 3. Rear 4X2 LD - On each side of the vehicle, measure the distance at the axle tube (1) to the jounce bumper flange (2). 4. Rear 4X4 LD - On each side of the vehicle, measure the distance at the jounce pad welded to the axle tube (1) to the jounce bumper flange (2). 5. Compare the measurements to the specifications listed in the following Curb Height Specifications chart. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Service and Repair > Camber and Caster Adjustment > Page 11013 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Service and Repair > Camber and Caster Adjustment > Page 11014 Alignment: Service and Repair Curb Height Measurement (HD) CURB HEIGHT MEASUREMENT (HD) The wheel alignment is to be checked and all alignment adjustments made with the vehicle at its required curb height specification. Vehicle height is to be checked with the vehicle on a flat, level surface, preferably a vehicle alignment rack. The tires are to be inflated to the recommended pressure. All tires are to be the same size as standard equipment. Vehicle height is checked with the fuel tank full of fuel, and no passenger or luggage compartment load. Inspect the vehicle for bent or weak suspension components. Compare the parts tag on the suspect coil spring(s) to the parts book and the vehicle sales code, checking for a match. Once removed from the vehicle, compare the coil spring height to a correct new or known good coil spring. The heights should vary if the suspect spring is weak. 1. Front 4X2 On each side of the vehicle, measure the distance from the top of the jounce bumper flange (2) to the bottom of the frame rail (1). 2. Front 4X4 On each side of the vehicle, measure the distance from the top of the axle (2) to the bottom of the jounce bumper flange (1). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Service and Repair > Camber and Caster Adjustment > Page 11015 3. Rear ALL - On each side of the vehicle, measure the distance at the top of the axle tube (2) to the bottom of the frame rail (1). 4. Compare the measurements to the specifications listed in the following Curb Height Specifications chart. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Relays and Modules - Steering and Suspension > Relays and Modules - Steering > Steering Mounted Controls Communication Module > Component Information > Locations Steering Mounted Controls Communication Module: Locations Component ID: 214 Component : MODULE-STEERING CONTROL Connector: Name : MODULE-STEERING CONTROL C1 Color : WHITE # of pins : 6 Pin Circuit Description 1 Z909 20BK GROUND 2 X20 20GY/WT RADIO CONTROL MUX 3 V38 20VT/OR S/C SWITCH NO. 2 SIGNAL 4 V37 20VT S/C SWITCH NO. 1 SIGNAL 5 V937 20VT/BR S/C SWITCH RETURN 6 X3 20DG/VT HORN SWITCH SENSE Component Location - 47 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Relays and Modules - Steering and Suspension > Relays and Modules - Steering > Steering Mounted Controls Communication Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 11021 Component Location - 42 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Relays and Modules - Steering and Suspension > Relays and Modules - Steering > Steering Mounted Controls Communication Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 11022 Component Location - 43 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Relays and Modules - Steering and Suspension > Relays and Modules - Steering > Steering Mounted Controls Communication Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 11023 Connector: Name : MODULE-STEERING CONTROL C2 Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (PREMIUM) Pin Circuit Description 1 G902 22WT/BR SWITCH MUX RETURN Pin Circuit Description 1 G902 22WT/BR SWITCH MUX RETURN Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Relays and Modules - Steering and Suspension > Relays and Modules - Steering > Steering Mounted Controls Communication Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 11024 2 X20 22GY/WT RADIO CONTROL MUX 2 X20 22GY/WT RADIO CONTROL MUX Component Location - 47 Component Location - 42 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Relays and Modules - Steering and Suspension > Relays and Modules - Steering > Steering Mounted Controls Communication Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 11025 Component Location - 43 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Relays and Modules - Steering and Suspension > Relays and Modules - Steering > Steering Mounted Controls Communication Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 11026 Connector: Name : MODULE-STEERING CONTROL C3 Color : # of pins : 4 Pin Circuit Description 1 X3 20DG/VT HORN SWITCH SENSE 2 V937 22DB/DG S/C SWITCH RETURN 2 K900 22DB/DG SENSOR GROUND 3 V37 22VT S/C SWITCH NO. 1 SIGNAL 4 V38 22VT/OR S/C SWITCH NO. 2 SIGNAL Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Relays and Modules - Steering and Suspension > Relays and Modules - Steering > Steering Mounted Controls Communication Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 11027 Component Location - 47 Component Location - 42 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Relays and Modules - Steering and Suspension > Relays and Modules - Steering > Steering Mounted Controls Communication Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 11028 Component Location - 43 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Relays and Modules - Steering and Suspension > Relays and Modules - Steering > Steering Mounted Controls Communication Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 11029 Connector: Name : MODULE-STEERING CONTROL C4 Color : YELLOW # of pins : 4 Pin Circuit Description 1 R61 20LG/VT DRIVER SQUIB 2 LINE 1 2 R63 20LG/WT DRIVER SQUIB 2 LINE 2 3 R43 20LG/BR DRIVER SQUIB 1 LINE 1 4 R45 20LG/OR DRIVER SQUIB 1 LINE 2 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Relays and Modules - Steering and Suspension > Relays and Modules - Steering > Steering Mounted Controls Communication Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 11030 Component Location - 47 Component Location - 42 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Relays and Modules - Steering and Suspension > Relays and Modules - Steering > Steering Mounted Controls Communication Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 11031 Component Location - 43 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Relays and Modules - Steering and Suspension > Relays and Modules - Steering > Steering Mounted Controls Communication Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 11032 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Relays and Modules - Steering and Suspension > Relays and Modules - Steering > Steering Mounted Controls Communication Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 11033 Steering Mounted Controls Communication Module: Diagrams Component ID: 214 Component : MODULE-STEERING CONTROL Connector: Name : MODULE-STEERING CONTROL C1 Color : WHITE # of pins : 6 Pin Circuit Description 1 Z909 20BK GROUND 2 X20 20GY/WT RADIO CONTROL MUX 3 V38 20VT/OR S/C SWITCH NO. 2 SIGNAL 4 V37 20VT S/C SWITCH NO. 1 SIGNAL 5 V937 20VT/BR S/C SWITCH RETURN 6 X3 20DG/VT HORN SWITCH SENSE Component Location - 47 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Relays and Modules - Steering and Suspension > Relays and Modules - Steering > Steering Mounted Controls Communication Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 11034 Component Location - 42 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Relays and Modules - Steering and Suspension > Relays and Modules - Steering > Steering Mounted Controls Communication Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 11035 Component Location - 43 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Relays and Modules - Steering and Suspension > Relays and Modules - Steering > Steering Mounted Controls Communication Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 11036 Connector: Name : MODULE-STEERING CONTROL C2 Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (PREMIUM) Pin Circuit Description 1 G902 22WT/BR SWITCH MUX RETURN Pin Circuit Description 1 G902 22WT/BR SWITCH MUX RETURN Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Relays and Modules - Steering and Suspension > Relays and Modules - Steering > Steering Mounted Controls Communication Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 11037 2 X20 22GY/WT RADIO CONTROL MUX 2 X20 22GY/WT RADIO CONTROL MUX Component Location - 47 Component Location - 42 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Relays and Modules - Steering and Suspension > Relays and Modules - Steering > Steering Mounted Controls Communication Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 11038 Component Location - 43 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Relays and Modules - Steering and Suspension > Relays and Modules - Steering > Steering Mounted Controls Communication Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 11039 Connector: Name : MODULE-STEERING CONTROL C3 Color : # of pins : 4 Pin Circuit Description 1 X3 20DG/VT HORN SWITCH SENSE 2 V937 22DB/DG S/C SWITCH RETURN 2 K900 22DB/DG SENSOR GROUND 3 V37 22VT S/C SWITCH NO. 1 SIGNAL 4 V38 22VT/OR S/C SWITCH NO. 2 SIGNAL Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Relays and Modules - Steering and Suspension > Relays and Modules - Steering > Steering Mounted Controls Communication Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 11040 Component Location - 47 Component Location - 42 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Relays and Modules - Steering and Suspension > Relays and Modules - Steering > Steering Mounted Controls Communication Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 11041 Component Location - 43 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Relays and Modules - Steering and Suspension > Relays and Modules - Steering > Steering Mounted Controls Communication Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 11042 Connector: Name : MODULE-STEERING CONTROL C4 Color : YELLOW # of pins : 4 Pin Circuit Description 1 R61 20LG/VT DRIVER SQUIB 2 LINE 1 2 R63 20LG/WT DRIVER SQUIB 2 LINE 2 3 R43 20LG/BR DRIVER SQUIB 1 LINE 1 4 R45 20LG/OR DRIVER SQUIB 1 LINE 2 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Relays and Modules - Steering and Suspension > Relays and Modules - Steering > Steering Mounted Controls Communication Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 11043 Component Location - 47 Component Location - 42 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Relays and Modules - Steering and Suspension > Relays and Modules - Steering > Steering Mounted Controls Communication Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 11044 Component Location - 43 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Relays and Modules - Steering and Suspension > Relays and Modules - Steering > Steering Mounted Controls Communication Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 11045 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Relays and Modules - Steering and Suspension > Relays and Modules - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure Monitor Receiver / Transponder > Component Information > Locations > Transponder-Tire Pressure-Left Front Tire Pressure Monitor Receiver / Transponder: Locations Transponder-Tire Pressure-Left Front Component ID 521 Component ID: 521 Component : TRANSPONDER-TIRE PRESSURE-LEFT FRONT Connector: Name : TRANSPONDER-TIRE PRESSURE-LEFT FRONT Color : # of pins : 6 Pin Circuit Description 1 F504 20GY/PK FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN) 2 D508 20WT/GY COM-LIN TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR LAN 3 Z924 20BK GROUND 4 Z924 20BK GROUND 5-6-- Component Location - 32 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Relays and Modules - Steering and Suspension > Relays and Modules - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure Monitor Receiver / Transponder > Component Information > Locations > Transponder-Tire Pressure-Left Front > Page 11051 Component ID 523 Component ID: 523 Component : TRANSPONDER-TIRE PRESSURE-LEFT FRONT Connector: Name : TRANSPONDER-TIRE PRESSURE-LEFT FRONT Color : # of pins : 6 Pin Circuit Description Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Relays and Modules - Steering and Suspension > Relays and Modules - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure Monitor Receiver / Transponder > Component Information > Locations > Transponder-Tire Pressure-Left Front > Page 11052 1 F504 20GY/PK FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN) 2 D508 20WT/GY COM-LIN TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR LAN 3 Z924 20BK GROUND 4 Z924 20BK GROUND 5-6-Component Location - 32 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Relays and Modules - Steering and Suspension > Relays and Modules - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure Monitor Receiver / Transponder > Component Information > Locations > Transponder-Tire Pressure-Left Front > Page 11053 Tire Pressure Monitor Receiver / Transponder: Locations Transponder-Tire Pressure-Right Front Component ID 522 Component ID: 522 Component : TRANSPONDER-TIRE PRESSURE-RIGHT FRONT Connector: Name : TRANSPONDER-TIRE PRESSURE-RIGHT FRONT Color : # of pins : 6 Pin Circuit Description 1 F504 20GY/PK FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN) 2 D508 20WT/GY COM-LIN TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR LAN 3 Z924 20BK GROUND 4-5 Z924 20BK GROUND 6-- Component Location - 29 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Relays and Modules - Steering and Suspension > Relays and Modules - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure Monitor Receiver / Transponder > Component Information > Locations > Transponder-Tire Pressure-Left Front > Page 11054 Component ID 524 Component ID: 524 Component : TRANSPONDER-TIRE PRESSURE-RIGHT FRONT Connector: Name : TRANSPONDER-TIRE PRESSURE-RIGHT FRONT Color : # of pins : 6 Pin Circuit Description Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Relays and Modules - Steering and Suspension > Relays and Modules - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure Monitor Receiver / Transponder > Component Information > Locations > Transponder-Tire Pressure-Left Front > Page 11055 1 F504 20GY/PK FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN) 2 D508 20WT/GY COM-LIN TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR LAN 3 Z924 20BK GROUND 4-5 Z924 20BK GROUND 6-Component Location - 29 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Relays and Modules - Steering and Suspension > Relays and Modules - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure Monitor Receiver / Transponder > Component Information > Diagrams > Transponder-Tire Pressure-Left Front Tire Pressure Monitor Receiver / Transponder: Diagrams Transponder-Tire Pressure-Left Front Component ID 521 Component ID: 521 Component : TRANSPONDER-TIRE PRESSURE-LEFT FRONT Connector: Name : TRANSPONDER-TIRE PRESSURE-LEFT FRONT Color : # of pins : 6 Pin Circuit Description 1 F504 20GY/PK FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN) 2 D508 20WT/GY COM-LIN TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR LAN 3 Z924 20BK GROUND 4 Z924 20BK GROUND 5-6-- Component Location - 32 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Relays and Modules - Steering and Suspension > Relays and Modules - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure Monitor Receiver / Transponder > Component Information > Diagrams > Transponder-Tire Pressure-Left Front > Page 11058 Component ID 523 Component ID: 523 Component : TRANSPONDER-TIRE PRESSURE-LEFT FRONT Connector: Name : TRANSPONDER-TIRE PRESSURE-LEFT FRONT Color : # of pins : 6 Pin Circuit Description Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Relays and Modules - Steering and Suspension > Relays and Modules - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure Monitor Receiver / Transponder > Component Information > Diagrams > Transponder-Tire Pressure-Left Front > Page 11059 1 F504 20GY/PK FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN) 2 D508 20WT/GY COM-LIN TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR LAN 3 Z924 20BK GROUND 4 Z924 20BK GROUND 5-6-Component Location - 32 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Relays and Modules - Steering and Suspension > Relays and Modules - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure Monitor Receiver / Transponder > Component Information > Diagrams > Transponder-Tire Pressure-Left Front > Page 11060 Tire Pressure Monitor Receiver / Transponder: Diagrams Transponder-Tire Pressure-Right Front Component ID 522 Component ID: 522 Component : TRANSPONDER-TIRE PRESSURE-RIGHT FRONT Connector: Name : TRANSPONDER-TIRE PRESSURE-RIGHT FRONT Color : # of pins : 6 Pin Circuit Description 1 F504 20GY/PK FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN) 2 D508 20WT/GY COM-LIN TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR LAN 3 Z924 20BK GROUND 4-5 Z924 20BK GROUND 6-- Component Location - 29 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Relays and Modules - Steering and Suspension > Relays and Modules - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure Monitor Receiver / Transponder > Component Information > Diagrams > Transponder-Tire Pressure-Left Front > Page 11061 Component ID 524 Component ID: 524 Component : TRANSPONDER-TIRE PRESSURE-RIGHT FRONT Connector: Name : TRANSPONDER-TIRE PRESSURE-RIGHT FRONT Color : # of pins : 6 Pin Circuit Description Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Relays and Modules - Steering and Suspension > Relays and Modules - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure Monitor Receiver / Transponder > Component Information > Diagrams > Transponder-Tire Pressure-Left Front > Page 11062 1 F504 20GY/PK FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN) 2 D508 20WT/GY COM-LIN TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR LAN 3 Z924 20BK GROUND 4-5 Z924 20BK GROUND 6-Component Location - 29 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Relays and Modules - Steering and Suspension > Relays and Modules - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure Monitor Receiver / Transponder > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Tire Pressure Monitor Receiver / Transponder: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION A transponder (2), also known as a trigger module, is located in the front wheel wells (behind the wheelhouse splash shields) of the vehicle to provide the WCM/SKREEM with the location of the front tire pressure sensors on the vehicle. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Relays and Modules - Steering and Suspension > Relays and Modules - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure Monitor Receiver / Transponder > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 11065 Tire Pressure Monitor Receiver / Transponder: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The Wireless Control Module (WCM), commonly referred to as the Sentry Key Remote Entry Module (SKREEM), uses transponders (trigger modules) located in the front wheel wells on the vehicle to provide it with the location of the front tire pressure sensors on the vehicle. Like the base system, the WCM receives RF signals from all four rotating wheel speed sensors. When the WCM needs to know which sensor is located at a particular location on the vehicle, it directs the transponder at that location to send out a low frequency signal to excite the nearby sensor. The WCM then receives that excited signal and knows where that sensor is located. This auto-locating process only happens in the first 10 minutes of any WCM cycle while traveling at speeds above 20 mph (32 km/h) (Each WCM cycle ends when the vehicle has been shut off for a time period of approximately 20 minutes or longer). If the TPMS fails to localize, the TPM indicator lamp will flash on/off for 75 seconds, and remain on solid. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Relays and Modules - Steering and Suspension > Relays and Modules - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure Monitor Receiver / Transponder > Component Information > Service and Repair > TPM Transponder - Removal Tire Pressure Monitor Receiver / Transponder: Service and Repair TPM Transponder - Removal REMOVAL 1. Raise and support the vehicle. 2. Remove the wheel well housing cover. 3. Remove the mounting screw (1) for the transponder (2). 4. Disconnect the electrical connector (3) and remove the transponder (2) from the vehicle. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Relays and Modules - Steering and Suspension > Relays and Modules - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure Monitor Receiver / Transponder > Component Information > Service and Repair > TPM Transponder - Removal > Page 11068 Tire Pressure Monitor Receiver / Transponder: Service and Repair TPM Transponder - Installation INSTALLATION 1. Install the transponder (2) to the vehicle and reconnect the electrical connector (3). 2. Install the mounting screw (1) for the transponder (2) Tighten to 3 Nm (25 in. lbs.). 3. Install the wheel well housing cover. 4. Lower the vehicle. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Suspension > Suspension Mode Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Component ID 473 Suspension Mode Switch: Diagrams Component ID 473 Component ID: 473 Component : SWITCH-DISCONNECTING STABILIZER BAR Connector: Name : SWITCH-DISCONNECTING STABILIZER BAR Color : BLACK # of pins : 12 Pin Circuit Description 1 T537 20YL/LG LOCKER SWITCH SUPPLY 2 T535 20YL/BR LOCKER SWITCH SENSE 3 T531 20YL/TN STABILIZER BAR SWITCH SENSE 4 T536 20YL/WT SWITCH SUPPLY 5 T532 20YL/GY LOCKER OPEN ILLUMINATION SENSE 6 T533 20YL/LB LOCKER REAR ILLUMINATION SENSE 7 T534 20YL LOCKER FR/RR ILLUMINATION SENSE 8 T530 20YL/DG STABILIZER BAR DISENGAGE ILLUMINATION SENSE 9 T529 20YL/LG STABILIZER BAR ENGAGE ILLUMINATION SENSE 10 - 11 E11 20OR/DB PANEL LAMPS DRIVER 12 Z952 20BK GROUND Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Suspension > Suspension Mode Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Component ID 473 > Page 11075 Suspension Mode Switch: Diagrams Component ID 484 Component ID: 484 Component : SWITCH-DISCONNECTING STABILIZER BAR Connector: Name : SWITCH-DISCONNECTING STABILIZER BAR Color : BLACK # of pins : 12 Pin Circuit Description 1 T537 20YL/LG LOCKER SWITCH SUPPLY 2 T535 20YL/BR LOCKER SWITCH SENSE 3 T531 20YL/TN STABILIZER BAR SWITCH SENSE 4 T536 20YL/WT SWITCH SUPPLY 5 T532 20YL/GY LOCKER OPEN ILLUMINATION SENSE 6 T533 20YL/LB LOCKER REAR ILLUMINATION SENSE 7 T534 20YL LOCKER FR/RR ILLUMINATION SENSE 8 T530 20YL/DG STABILIZER BAR DISENGAGE ILLUMINATION SENSE 9 T529 20YL/LG STABILIZER BAR ENGAGE ILLUMINATION SENSE 10 - 11 E11 20OR/DB PANEL LAMPS DRIVER 12 Z952 20BK GROUND Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Service Precautions Tire Pressure Sensor: Service Precautions CAUTION CAUTION: The use of tire sealants is not recommended for vehicles equipped with the Tire Pressure Monitoring system. Tire sealants may clog tire pressure sensors. CAUTION: Tire pressure sensor valve stem caps and cores are specially designed for the sensors. Due to risk of corrosion, do not use a standard valve stem cap or core in a tire pressure sensor in place of the original equipment style sensor cap and core. CAUTION: It is not recommended to install a tire pressure sensor in an aftermarket wheel. Use tire pressure sensors in original style factory wheels only. CAUTION: Any time a sensor is to be reinstalled in a wheel, a new seal, cap and valve core must be installed on the stem to ensure air tight sealing. NOTE: TPM thresholds have been established for the original tire size equipped on the vehicle. Use original size tires only to maintain system accuracy. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Tire Pressure Sensor: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION On vehicles equipped with Tire Pressure Monitoring System, one tire pressure sensor (6) is mounted to each wheel in place of the traditional tire valve stem. Each sensor has an internal battery that lasts up to 10 years. The battery is not serviceable. At the time of battery failure, the sensor (6) must be replaced. The TPM system operates on a 315 MHz radio frequency. The 315 MHz sensors can be easily identified by a GREEN sensor body, with (an triangle insignia) (1). The 433 MHz sensors can be identified by a grey sensor body with an oval insignia. For car applications, there is a 315 MHz TPM sensor with a Black sensor body with an oval insignia. NOTE: This vehicle uses the 315 MHz TPM sensor with the GREEN sensor body. Although 315 MHz and 433 MHz sensors are identical in size and shape, they are not interchangeable. Always make sure the correct color sensor is being used. A RKE-TPM Analyzer can be used to determine the sensor's frequency without having to dismount the tire. The TPM sensors are designed for original style factory wheels. It is not recommended to install a tire pressure sensor in an aftermarket wheel. (This could cause sealing and system performance issues.) The serviceable components of the tire pressure sensor are: - Sensor-To-Wheel Seal (4) - Valve Stem Cap (2) - Valve Stem Core - Valve Stem Nut (3) The valve stem caps and cores used are specifically designed for the tire pressure monitoring sensors. Although similar to standard valve stem caps and cores, they are different. The valve stem cap has a special seal inside to keep moisture and corrosion out. The valve stem core has a special nickel coating to protect from corrosion. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 11082 Tire Pressure Sensor: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION CAUTION: The TPMS has been optimized for the original equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures have been established for the tire size equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system operation or sensor damage may result when using replacement equipment that is not of the same size, type, and/or style. After-market wheels can cause sensor damage. Do not use aftermarket tire sealants or balance beads if your vehicle is equipped with a TPMS, as damage to the sensors may result. CAUTION: After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure always reinstall the valve stem cap. This will prevent moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem, which could damage the Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensor. CAUTION: Tire pressure sensor valve stem caps and cores are specially designed for the sensors. Due to risk of corrosion, do not use a standard valve stem cap or core in a tire pressure sensor in place of the original equipment style sensor cap and core. CAUTION: Any time a sensor is to be reinstalled in a wheel, a new seal, nut, cap and valve core must be installed on the stem to ensure air tight sealing. NOTE: TPM thresholds have been established for the original tire size equipped on the vehicle. Use original size tires only to maintain system accuracy. The battery operated tire pressure sensor is both a transmitter and a receiver. The TPM sensor can be forced to transmit if using a special tool such as a TPM-RKE Analyzer, or from a transponder. The TPM-RKE Analyzer has the ability to change the sensor mode and to diagnose a faulty TPM sensor. Using a TPM-RKE Analyzer can take up to a minute to force a transmission from a sensor. The High Pressure TPM sensor can be in one of the following modes: Sleep Mode - A new TPM sensor will be in this mode. If placed on the vehicle as a road tire, the TPM sensor will transmit once every 20 seconds when the vehicle is driven at speeds over 15 mph (24 km/h). If the vehicle is not moving, the sensor will only transmit on a pressure change greater then 2 psi (13.8 kPA). Driving the vehicle continuously at speeds over 15 mph (24 km/h) for more then 4 minutes will change the sensor state into 30 BLOCK MODE. The TPM sensor will not return to SLEEP MODE. Now, if the vehicle has been stopped for 20 minutes, the TPM sensor state will change to PARK MODE. - Park Mode - This is the correct mode when the vehicle is not moving. The sensor will transmit once every 13 hours to update the WCM, or will transmit on a 2 psi (13.8 kPA) delta change. The sensors will internally take a measurement of the tire pressure every minute to determine a change in tire pressure. - 30 Block Mode - If the vehicle has not been moving for more then 20 minutes, or if the sensor's mode was forced to Park Mode using a TPM-RKE Analyzer, the sensor's operating mode will transition from PARK MODE to 30 BLOCK MODE once the vehicle is driven over 15 mph. In this mode, the sensor will transmit once every 15 seconds when the vehicle is driven at speeds over 15 mph (24 km/h) for the first 30 transmissions. After 8 minutes of continuous driving above 15 mph (24 km/h), the TPM sensor will change to DRIVE MODE. Drive Mode - In this mode, the sensor will transmit once every minute when the vehicle is driven at speeds over 15 mph (24 km/h). At any time that the vehicle speed drops below 15mph, the sensor will not transmit. The sensor mode will still be in drive mode when the sensor reaches speeds over 15 mph (24 km/h). If the vehicle has been stationary for more then 20 minutes, the TPM sensor will change to PARK MODE. Each sensor's (transmitter) broadcast is uniquely coded so that the wireless control module (WCM) can monitor the state of each of the sensors on the four rotating road wheels. The WCM can automatically learn and store the sensor's ID while driving "within 10 minutes continuously above 15 m.p.h. (24 Km/h)" after a sensor has been replaced. The vehicle must be stationary for more then 20 minutes in order to initiate the learning sequence. The sensor IDs can also be programmed using the TPM-RKE Analyzer Tool. Scan each TPM sensor at each road wheel, and store each Sensor ID in the correct location. (LEFT FRONT, LEFT REAR, RIGHT FRONT, and RIGHT REAR) Connect the TPM-RKE Analyzer Tool to the Scan Tool. Then follow the programming steps outlined in the diagnostic Scan Tool for "Program Tire Pressure Sensor ID w/ TPM Tool" under "MISC" for the "WCM/WIRELESS CONTROL MODULE". Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 11083 Tire Pressure Sensor: Testing and Inspection TIRE PRESSURE SENSOR NOTE: Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi (14 to 41 kPa) during normal driving conditions. Do NOT reduce this normal pressure build up. NOTE: Tire pressure will vary with temperature by about 1 psi (6.9 kPa) for every 12 F (6.5 C). This means that when the outside temperature decreases, the tire pressure will also decrease. Tire pressure should always be set based on cold inflation tire pressure. When diagnosing a tire pressure issue, always check air pressure in the tires first with a known accurate air gauge. Adjust air pressure as necessary to that listed on the Tire Inflation Pressure Label (Placard) provided with the vehicle (usually applied to the driver's side B-pillar). After adjusting air pressure in a tire on the vehicle, allow approximately two minutes for the message or indicator lamp to go out. Check the tire pressure indicator lamp in the instrument cluster. If the lamp is illuminating continuously, inspect all the tires for leaks. A water "dunk tank" or other water test may be used to check for leaks around the sensor as long as any water at the valve core is removed once the procedure is completed. The water can be easily expelled from the core area by pushing in on the core for several seconds, allowing escaping air to drive out any moisture. Reinflate the tire as necessary. Always make sure the original valve stem cap is securely installed to keep moisture out of the sensor. If the gauge-read pressure in the tires does not indicate a tire pressure issue, refer to the appropriate diagnostic information. If the indicator lamp is flashing on/off for 75 seconds and then remains on solid, a system fault was detected. Refer to the appropriate diagnostic information. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Tire Pressure Sensor: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL 1. Raise and support vehicle. 2. Remove the tire and wheel assembly. See: Wheels and Tires/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement CAUTION: The cap used on this valve stem contains an O-ring seal to prevent contamination and moisture from entering the valve stem. Retain this valve stem cap for reuse. Do not substitute a regular valve stem cap in its place. CAUTION: The valve stem used on this vehicle is made of aluminum and the core is nickel plated brass. The original valve stem core must be reinstalled and not substituted with a valve stem core made of a different material. This is required to prevent corrosion in the valve stem caused by the different metals. 3. Let the air out of the tire. 4. Remove the nut (3). 5. Push the sensor into the tire (1) (so the sensor is loose inside the tire). 6. Remove the tire from the rim. 7. Retrieve the sensor (1) from the tire. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 11086 Tire Pressure Sensor: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION NOTE: Before reinstalling an existing tire pressure sensor (6), replace valve cap (2), nut (3), valve core and sensor seal (4) to ensure proper sealing. NOTE: The notch/flat should be lined up together and facing towards the wheel during installation. 1. Wipe area clean around sensor/valve stem mounting hole in wheel. Make sure surface of wheel is not damaged. 2. Insert sensor (1) through wheel (2) as shown keeping pressure against rear of metal valve stem (See Arrow). Potted side of sensor is to be positioned toward wheel. Damage to the sensor may occur if the sensor is installed incorrectly. NOTE: A flat on the seal seat is used to key the seat to the sensor housing. The notch/flat should be lined up together and facing towards the wheel during installation. 3. Install sensor nut (3) and hand tighten. NOTE: Before tightening sensor nut, push downward on sensor housing (2) in an attempt to make it flush with interior contour of wheel (1). 4. While holding sensor in position, tighten sensor nut to 6 Nm (53 in. lbs.). CAUTION: Over-tightening the sensor to as much as 10 Nm (88 in. lbs.) may result in sensor separation from the valve stem. Under this condition, the sensor may still function, however, the condition should be corrected immediately. 5. Mount tire on wheel following tire changer manufacturer's instructions, paying special attention to the following to avoid damaging tire pressure sensor: a. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 11087 Rotating Wheel Tire Changers- Once the wheel is mounted to the changer, position the sensor valve stem (2) approximately 180° from the head of the changer (located at 1) in a clockwise direction before rotating the wheel (also in a clockwise direction) to mount the tire. Use this procedure on both the upper and lower tire beads. b. Rotating Tool Tire Changers - Position the wheel on the changer so that the sensor valve stem (1) is located approximately 180° clockwise from the installation end of the mounting/dismounting tool (2) once the tool is mounted for tire installation. Make sure the sensor is clear of the lower bead breaker area (3) to avoid damaging the sensor when the breaker rises. Rotate the tool (2) in a counterclockwise direction to mount the tire. Use this procedure on both the upper and lower tire beads. 6. Adjust air pressure to that listed on Tire Inflation Pressure Label (Placard) provided with vehicle (usually applied to driver's side B-pillar). Make sure original style valve stem cap is securely installed to keep moisture out of sensor. 7. Install tire and wheel assembly on vehicle. See: Wheels and Tires/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement 8. Lower vehicle. 9. If the vehicle has been stationary for more then 20 minutes, drive the vehicle for a minimum of 10 minutes while maintaining a continuous speed above 15 mph (24 km/h). During this time, the system will learn the new sensor ID. A new sensor ID can also be programmed directly into the WCM by using a RKE-TPM Analyzer in conjunction with a Scan Tool. Once the new sensor ID has been programmed, the RKE-TPM Analyzer can be used to update the TPMS by activating the sensor. NOTE: If a sensor cannot be trained, refer to appropriate diagnostic information. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure Warning Reset Switch > Component Information > Locations Tire Pressure Warning Reset Switch: Locations Component ID: 513 Component : SWITCH-TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR Connector: Name : SWITCH-TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR Color : BROWN # of pins : 6 Pin Circuit Description 1 G561 20VT TPM INDICATOR CONTROL 2 E11 20OR/DB PANEL LAMPS DRIVER 3 G562 20VT/YL TPM SWITCH SIGNAL 4 Z600 20BK GROUND 5 F504 20GY/PK NO FUNCTION DEFINED 6-Component Location - 47 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure Warning Reset Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 11091 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure Warning Reset Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 11092 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure Warning Reset Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 11093 Tire Pressure Warning Reset Switch: Diagrams Component ID: 513 Component : SWITCH-TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR Connector: Name : SWITCH-TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR Color : BROWN # of pins : 6 Pin Circuit Description 1 G561 20VT TPM INDICATOR CONTROL 2 E11 20OR/DB PANEL LAMPS DRIVER 3 G562 20VT/YL TPM SWITCH SIGNAL 4 Z600 20BK GROUND 5 F504 20GY/PK NO FUNCTION DEFINED 6-Component Location - 47 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure Warning Reset Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 11094 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Center Link > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Center Link: > H46 > Jun > 09 > Recall - Steering Linkage Defects Technical Service Bulletin # H46 Date: 090609 Recall - Steering Linkage Defects Revised May 2009 Dealer Service Instructions for: Safety Recall H46 - Mopar Steering Linkage NOTE: The service procedure for this recall has been revised and additional labor operations have been added. All previous copies of Safety Recall H46 should be discarded from your files. Models 2003-2004 (DR) Dodge Truck 4x4 (2500/3500 series) 2005 (DH) Dodge Truck 4x4 (2500/3500 series) 2006-2009 (DH) Dodge Truck 4x4 (2500/3500 series or 1500 Mega Cab) 2006-2009 (D1) Dodge Truck 4x4 (3500 series) 2007-2009 (DC) Dodge Truck (3500 series cab chassis) IMPORTANT: This recall only applies to vehicles that had certain Mopar service parts steering components installed. IMPORTANT: Some of the involved vehicles may be in dealer new vehicle inventory. Federal law requires you to complete this recall service on these vehicles before retail delivery. Dealers should also consider this requirement to apply to used vehicle inventory and should perform this recall on vehicles in for service. Involved vehicles can be determined by using the VIP inquiry process. Subject During a prior service appointment, a Mopar service parts steering linkage was installed on about 19,400 of the above vehicles. The drag link inner joint may fracture under certain driving conditions. This could result in a loss of steering control and cause a crash without warning. Also, the steering damper bracket at the tie rod tube may loosen. This could allow the bracket to slide on the tube and may cause increased vehicle turning radius. Repair The steering linkage must be inspected and some steering linkage components may need to be replaced. NOTE: The initial steering linkage inspection process can be done by write up personnel in the write up area (see Step 1 of the service procedure). Vehicles found with original style steering linkage can be immediately returned to the customer. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Center Link > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Center Link: > H46 > Jun > 09 > Recall - Steering Linkage Defects > Page 11104 Parts Information Special Tools The special tools may be required to perform this repair: Completion Reporting and Reimbursement Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Center Link > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Center Link: > H46 > Jun > 09 > Recall - Steering Linkage Defects > Page 11105 Claims for vehicles that have been serviced must be submitted on the DealerCONNECT Claim Entry Screen located on the Service tab. Claims submitted will be used by Chrysler to record recall service completions and provide dealer payments. Use one of the labor operation numbers and time allowances shown. Add the cost of the recall parts package plus applicable dealer allowance to your claim. FOR VEHICLES INSPECTED IN THE WRITE UP AREA: Enter "INSPECT" in the part number section of your claim with a quantity of one (1). Enter $5.00 WITH NO MARK-UP for reimbursement of steering linkage inspection performed in the write up area. NOTE: See the Warranty Administration Manual, Recall Claim Processing Section, for complete recall claim processing instructions. Dealer Notification To view this notification on DealerCONNECT, select "Global Recall System" on the Service tab, then click on the description of this notification. Owner Notification and Service Scheduling All involved vehicle owners known to Chrysler are being notified of the service requirement by first class mail. They are requested to schedule appointments for this service with their dealers. A generic copy of the owner letter is included. Enclosed with each owner letter is an Owner Notification postcard to allow owners to update our records if applicable. Vehicle Lists, Global Recall System, VIP and Dealer Follow Up All involved vehicles have been entered into the DealerCONNECT Global Recall System (GRS) and Vehicle Information Plus (VIP) for dealer inquiry as needed. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Center Link > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Center Link: > H46 > Jun > 09 > Recall - Steering Linkage Defects > Page 11106 GRS provides involved dealers with an updated VIN list of their incomplete vehicles. The owner's name, address and phone number are listed if known. Completed vehicles are removed from GRS within several days of repair claim submission. To use this system, click on the "Service" tab and then click on "Global Recall System." Your dealer's VIN list for each recall displayed can be sorted by: those vehicles that were unsold at recall launch, those with a phone number, city, zip code, or VIN sequence. Dealers must perform this repair on all unsold vehicles before retail delivery. Dealers should also use the VIN list to follow up with all owners to schedule appointments for this repair. Recall VIN lists may contain confidential, restricted owner name and address information that was obtained from the Department of Motor Vehicles of various states. Use of this information is permitted for this recall only and is strictly prohibited from all other use. Additional Information If you have any questions or need assistance in completing this action, please contact your Service and Parts District Manager. Customer Services Field Operations Chrysler Service Procedure NOTE: The initial steering linkage inspection process (Step 1 of the service procedure) can be done by write up personnel in the write up area. Vehicles found with the steering linkage shown in Figure 1 can be immediately returned to the customer. See the "Completion Reporting and Reimbursement" section of this recall for special claims processing information. 1. Look under the front of the vehicle and inspect the steering linkage at the steering damper mounting point: > If the steering damper mounts to the tie rod tube as shown in Figure 1, the steering linkage is good. Return the vehicle to the customer. No further action is required. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Center Link > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Center Link: > H46 > Jun > 09 > Recall - Steering Linkage Defects > Page 11107 > If the steering damper mounts to the tie rod tube as shown in Figure 2, the vehicle will require further inspection and/or repair by a technician. The vehicle should be assigned to a technician and the technician should continue with Step 2 of this procedure. 2. Lift the vehicle on a hoist and inspect the steering linkage drag link for a white part number tag (Figure 3): > If the steering linkage drag link does not have a white part number tag, continue with Step 3 of this procedure. ^ If the steering linkage drag link has a white part number tag: > For 2009 model year trucks, continue with Step 9 of this procedure. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Center Link > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Center Link: > H46 > Jun > 09 > Recall - Steering Linkage Defects > Page 11108 > For 2003 through 2008 model year trucks, continue with Step 5 of this procedure. 3. Inspect the steering damper bracket to tie rod tube mounting u-bolt nuts by putting a 13 mm box-end wrench onto the nut (Figure 4): > If a 13 mm wrench fits the steering damper bracket mounting u-bolt nuts, the bracket and fasteners must be replaced. Continue with Step 4 of this procedure. > If a 13 mm wrench does not fit the steering damper bracket mounting u-bolt nuts, the bracket does not require replacement. Continue with Step 5 of this procedure. 4. Replace the steering damper bracket and fasteners using the following procedure: a. Remove and save the steering damper-to-damper bracket mounting nut (Figure 5). b. Disconnect the steering damper eyelet from the steering damper bracket. c. Remove and discard the four steering damper bracket nuts, two u-bolts and the steering damper bracket (Figure 5). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Center Link > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Center Link: > H46 > Jun > 09 > Recall - Steering Linkage Defects > Page 11109 d. Place the new steering damper carriage bolt through the square hole in the new steering damper bracket. e. Place the new steering damper bracket assembly onto the tie rod tube at the flat spot area on the tube and install the new u-bolts and nuts. Lightly snug the nuts to hold the steering damper bracket in position. f. Center the new steering damper bracket on the flattened area of the tie rod tube. g. Evenly tighten the four steering damper bracket u-bolt nuts to 25 ft. lbs. (34 N.m). Then tighten the four u-bolt nuts to 45 ft. lbs. (61 N.m). h. Connect the steering damper to the steering damper carriage bolt. i. Install the steering damper-to-damper bracket mounting nut and tighten to 75 ft. lbs. (100 N.m). j. Continue with Step 5 of this procedure. 5. For 2009 model year trucks, continue with Step 6 of this procedure. For 2003 through 2008 model year trucks, inspect the pitman arm part number (Figure 6): > If the part number cast into the bottom side of the pitman arm is 68039930AA the pitman arm does not require replacement. > Steering linkage with a white part number tag, continue with Step 9 of this procedure. > Linkage without a white part number tag, replace the inner drag link joint. Continue with Step 6 of this procedure. > If the part number cast into the bottom side of the pitman arm is 52106836AB, or is not legible: > Steering linkage without a white part number tag, replace the inner drag link joint and pitman arm. Continue with Step 7 of this procedure. > Steering linkage with a white part number tag, replace the pitman arm. Continue with Step 8 of this procedure. 6. Replace the inner drag link joint using the following procedure: Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Center Link > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Center Link: > H46 > Jun > 09 > Recall - Steering Linkage Defects > Page 11110 a. Loosen both drag link adjuster sleeve clamp nuts (Figure 7). b. Remove and discard the inner drag link joint to pitman arm nut (Figure 7). c. Use Special Tool C-4150A to separate the steering inner drag link joint from the pitman arm (Figure 8). d. While counting the number of turns, unscrew the steering inner drag link joint from the drag link adjuster sleeve (right handed threads) and discard the drag link inner joint. CAUTION: Do not allow the drag link adjuster sleeve to turn while unscrewing the inner drag link joint. e. Screw in the new inner drag link joint into the drag link adjuster sleeve the same number of turns counted in step 6d. of this procedure. f. Connect the steering inner drag link joint to the pitman arm. g. Install the new steering inner drag link joint nut and tighten the nut to 100 ft. lbs. (135 N.m). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Center Link > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Center Link: > H46 > Jun > 09 > Recall - Steering Linkage Defects > Page 11111 h. With the wheels in the straight ahead position, make sure that both inner and outer steering drag link joint caps are centered over the joint ball stud (Figure 9). CAUTION: Failure to center the drag link inner and outer joint caps over the joint ball studs before tightening the drag link adjuster sleeve clamps could cause joint failure. i. With the adjuster sleeve clamps rotated 45 degrees forward, tighten both drag link adjuster sleeve clamp nuts to 45 ft. lbs. (61 N.m). CAUTION: The drag link adjuster sleeve clamp tabs must be pointing approximately 45 degrees forward before tightening (as shown in Figure 10). Do not allow the adjuster sleeve clamp tabs to hang straight down. j. Lower the vehicle from the hoist. k. Drive the vehicle to verify that the steering wheel is straight. > If the steering wheel is turned to the left, shorten the drag link at the adjuster sleeve located on the drag link. > If the steering wheel is turned to the right, lengthen the drag link at the adjuster sleeve located on the drag link. l. Repeat Step 6k. until steering wheel is straight. m. Continue with Step 9 of this procedure. 7. Replace the inner drag link joint and pitman arm using the following procedure: Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Center Link > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Center Link: > H46 > Jun > 09 > Recall - Steering Linkage Defects > Page 11112 a. Loosen both drag link adjuster sleeve clamp nuts (Figure 7). b. Remove and save the pitman arm retaining nut located on the steering gear output shaft. c. Install pitman arm puller (Special Tool 9615) onto the steering gear output shaft (Figure 11). CAUTION: Failure to use the correct pitman arm puller could cause damage to the steering gear. d. Tighten the pitman arm puller forcing screw until the pitman arm separates from the steering gear output shaft (Figure 11). e. While counting the number of turns, unscrew the steering inner drag link joint (with pitman arm still attached) from the drag link adjuster sleeve (right handed threads) and discard the pitman arm and inner drag link joint. CAUTION: Do not allow the drag link adjuster sleeve to turn while unscrewing the inner drag link joint. f. Screw in the new steering inner drag link joint into the drag link adjuster sleeve the same number of turns counted in step 7e. of this procedure. g. Install the new pitman arm and retaining nut onto the steering gear output shaft. Tighten the pitman arm nut to 225 ft. lbs. (300 N.m). h. Connect the steering inner drag link joint to the pitman arm. i. Install the new steering inner drag link joint nut and tighten the nut to 100 ft. lbs. (135 N.m). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Center Link > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Center Link: > H46 > Jun > 09 > Recall - Steering Linkage Defects > Page 11113 j. With the wheels in the straight ahead position, make sure that both inner and outer steering drag link joint caps are centered over the joint ball stud (Figure 12). CAUTION: Failure to center the drag link inner and outer joint caps over the joint ball studs before tightening the drag link adjuster sleeve clamps could cause joint failure. k. With the adjuster sleeve clamps rotated 45 degrees forward, tighten the drag link adjuster sleeve clamp nuts to 45 ft. lbs. (61 N.m).lbs. CAUTION: The drag link adjuster sleeve clamp tabs must be pointing approximately 45 degrees forward before tightening (as shown in Figure 10). Do not allow the adjuster sleeve clamp tabs to hang straight down. l. Lower the vehicle from the hoist. m. Drive the vehicle to verify that the steering wheel is straight. > If the steering wheel is turned to the left, shorten the drag link at the adjuster sleeve located on the drag link. > If the steering wheel is turned to the right, lengthen the drag link at the adjuster sleeve located on the drag link. n. Repeat Step 7m. until steering wheel is straight. o. Continue with Step 9 of this procedure. 8. Replace the pitman arm using the following procedure: Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Center Link > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Center Link: > H46 > Jun > 09 > Recall - Steering Linkage Defects > Page 11114 a. Remove and discard the inner drag link joint nut (Figure 13). b. Use Special Tool C-4150A to separate the steering inner drag link joint from the pitman arm (Figure 14). CAUTION: Use extreme care not to tear, nick or damage the inner drag link joint rubber boot. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Center Link > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Center Link: > H46 > Jun > 09 > Recall - Steering Linkage Defects > Page 11115 d. Install pitman arm puller (Special Tool 9615) onto the steering gear output shaft (Figure 15). CAUTION: Failure to use the correct pitman arm puller could cause damage to the steering gear. e. Tighten the pitman arm puller forcing screw until the pitman arm separates from the steering gear output shaft (Figure 15). f. Install the new pitman arm. g. Install the pitman arm retaining nut onto the steering gear output shaft. Tighten the pitman arm nut to 225 ft. lbs. (300 N.m). h. Connect the steering inner drag link joint to the pitman arm. i. Install the new steering inner drag link joint nut and tighten the nut to 100 ft. lbs. (135 N.m). j. Lower the vehicle from the hoist. k. Drive the vehicle to verify that the steering wheel is straight. > If the steering wheel is turned to the left, shorten the drag link at the adjuster sleeve located on the drag link. ^ If the steering wheel is turned to the right, lengthen the drag link at the adjuster sleeve located on the drag link. l. Repeat Step 8k. until steering wheel is straight. m. Continue with Step 9 of this procedure. 9. Verify the lower surface of the left outer tie rod socket is parallel to the upper surface of the left knuckle attaching arm using the following procedure: a. Loosen the tie rod tube adjuster sleeve clamps. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Center Link > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Center Link: > H46 > Jun > 09 > Recall - Steering Linkage Defects > Page 11116 b. Rotate the left tie rod until the bottom of the tie rod socket is parallel to the top of the left steering knuckle arm (Figure 16). c. Tighten the tie rod adjuster sleeve clamp nuts to 45 ft.lbs. (61 N.m). CAUTION: Failure to align the left tie rod end parallel to the steering knuckle could cause tie rod end damage. d. Return the vehicle to the customer. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Center Link > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Center Link: > H46 > Jun > 09 > Recall - Steering Linkage Defects > Page 11117 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Center Link > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Center Link: > H36 > May > 09 > Recall - Drag Link/Steering Damper Bracket Defects Technical Service Bulletin # H36 Date: 090529 Recall - Drag Link/Steering Damper Bracket Defects Revised May 2009 Dealer Service Instructions for: Safety Recall H36 Steering Drag Link Inner Joint and Damper Bracket NOTE: The service procedure for this recall has been revised. All previous copies of Safety Recall H36 should be discarded from your files. Models 2008-2009 (DH / D1) Dodge Truck (2500/3500 series or 1500 Mega Cab) NOTE: This recall applies only to the above vehicles equipped with four wheel drive (sales code 5I4) built from February 19, 2008 through October 30, 2008 (MDH 021910 through 103006). 2008-2009 (DC) Dodge Truck (3500 series cab chassis) NOTE: This recall applies only to the above vehicles built from February 19, 2008 through October 30, 2008 (MDH 021910 through 103006). IMPORTANT: Many of the vehicles within the above build period have already been inspected or repaired and, therefore, have been excluded from this recall. IMPORTANT: Some of the involved vehicles may be in dealer new vehicle inventory. Federal law requires you to complete this recall service on these vehicles before retail delivery. Dealers should also consider this requirement to apply to used vehicle inventory and should perform this recall on vehicles in for service. Involved vehicles can be determined by using the VIP inquiry process. Subject The steering drag link inner joint on about 32,700 of the above vehicles may fracture under certain driving conditions. This could result in a loss of steering control and cause a crash without warning. Also the steering damper bracket at the tie rod tube may loosen. This could allow the bracket to slide on the tube and may cause increased vehicle turning radius. Repair The drag link inner joint must be replaced and the steering damper bracket must be inspected and replaced if required. Alternate Transportation Dealers should attempt to minimize customer inconvenience by placing the owner in a loaner vehicle if inspection determines that the steering damper bracket is required and the vehicle must be held overnight. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Center Link > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Center Link: > H36 > May > 09 > Recall - Drag Link/Steering Damper Bracket Defects > Page 11122 Parts Information Each dealer to whom vehicles in the recall were assigned will receive enough Drag Link Inner Joint Packages to service about 20% of those vehicles. Completion Reporting and Reimbursement Claims for vehicles that have been serviced must be submitted on the DealerCONNECT Claim Entry Screen located on the Service tab. Claims submitted will be used by Chrysler to record recall service completions and provide dealer payments. Use one of the labor operation numbers and time allowances shown. Add the cost of the recall parts package plus applicable dealer allowance to your claim. NOTE: See the Warranty Administration Manual, Recall Claim Processing Section, for complete recall claim processing instructions. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Center Link > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Center Link: > H36 > May > 09 > Recall - Drag Link/Steering Damper Bracket Defects > Page 11123 Dealer Notification To view this notification on DealerCONNECT, select "Global Recall System" on the Service tab, then click on the description of this notification. Owner Notification and Service Scheduling All involved vehicle owners known to Chrysler are being notified of the service requirement by first class mail. They are requested to schedule appointments for this service with their dealers. A generic copy of the owner letter is included. Enclosed with each owner letter is an Owner Notification postcard to allow owners to update our records if applicable. Vehicle Lists, Global Recall System, VIP and Dealer Follow Up All involved vehicles have been entered into the DealerCONNECT Global Recall System (GRS) and Vehicle Information Plus (VIP) for dealer inquiry as needed. GRS provides involved dealers with an updated VIN list of their incomplete vehicles. The owner's name, address and phone number are listed if known. Completed vehicles are removed from GRS within several days of repair claim submission. To use this system, click on the "Service" tab and then click on "Global Recall System." Your dealer's VIN list for each recall displayed can be sorted by: those vehicles that were unsold at recall launch, those with a phone number, city, zip code, or VIN sequence. Dealers must perform this repair on all unsold vehicles before retail delivery. Dealers should also use the VIN list to follow up with all owners to schedule appointments for this repair. Recall VIN lists may contain confidential, restricted owner name and address information that was obtained from the Department of Motor Vehicles of various states. Use of this information is permitted for this recall only and is strictly prohibited from all other use. Additional Information If you have any questions or need assistance in completing this action, please contact your Service and Parts District Manager. Customer Services Field Operations Chrysler Service Procedure 1. Lift the vehicle on an appropriate hoist. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Center Link > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Center Link: > H36 > May > 09 > Recall - Drag Link/Steering Damper Bracket Defects > Page 11124 2. Inspect the steering damper bracket mounting nuts by putting a 13 mm box-end wrench onto the nut (Figure 1): > If a 13 mm wrench fits the steering damper bracket mounting nuts, the bracket and fasteners must be replaced. Continue with Step 3 of this procedure. > If a 13 mm wrench does not fit the steering damper bracket mounting nuts, the bracket does not require replacement. Continue with Step 4 of this procedure. 3. Replace the steering damper bracket and fasteners using the following procedure: a. Remove and save the steering damper-to-damper bracket mounting nut (Figure 2). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Center Link > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Center Link: > H36 > May > 09 > Recall - Drag Link/Steering Damper Bracket Defects > Page 11125 b. Disconnect the steering damper from the steering damper bracket. c. Remove and discard the four steering bracket nuts, two u-bolts and the bracket (Figure 2). d. Place the new steering damper carriage bolt through the square hole in the new bracket. e. Place the new steering damper bracket assembly onto the tie rod tube at the flat spot area on the tube and install the new u-bolts and nuts. Lightly snug the nuts to hold the steering damper bracket in position. f. Center the new steering damper bracket on the flattened area of the tie rod tube. g. Evenly tighten the four steering damper bracket u-bolt nuts to 25 ft. lbs. (34 N.m). Then tighten the four u-bolt nuts to 45 ft. lbs. (61 N.m). h. Connect the steering damper to the steering damper carriage bolt. i. Install the steering damper mounting nut and tighten to 75 ft. lbs. (100 N.m). j. Continue with Step 4 of this procedure. 4. Replace the drag link inner joint using the following procedure: a. Loosen both drag link adjuster sleeve clamp nuts (Figure 3). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Center Link > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Center Link: > H36 > May > 09 > Recall - Drag Link/Steering Damper Bracket Defects > Page 11126 ERROR: stackunderflow OFFENDING COMMAND: ~ STACK: Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Center Link > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Center Link: > H46 > Jun > 09 > Recall - Steering Linkage Defects Technical Service Bulletin # H46 Date: 090609 Recall - Steering Linkage Defects Revised May 2009 Dealer Service Instructions for: Safety Recall H46 - Mopar Steering Linkage NOTE: The service procedure for this recall has been revised and additional labor operations have been added. All previous copies of Safety Recall H46 should be discarded from your files. Models 2003-2004 (DR) Dodge Truck 4x4 (2500/3500 series) 2005 (DH) Dodge Truck 4x4 (2500/3500 series) 2006-2009 (DH) Dodge Truck 4x4 (2500/3500 series or 1500 Mega Cab) 2006-2009 (D1) Dodge Truck 4x4 (3500 series) 2007-2009 (DC) Dodge Truck (3500 series cab chassis) IMPORTANT: This recall only applies to vehicles that had certain Mopar service parts steering components installed. IMPORTANT: Some of the involved vehicles may be in dealer new vehicle inventory. Federal law requires you to complete this recall service on these vehicles before retail delivery. Dealers should also consider this requirement to apply to used vehicle inventory and should perform this recall on vehicles in for service. Involved vehicles can be determined by using the VIP inquiry process. Subject During a prior service appointment, a Mopar service parts steering linkage was installed on about 19,400 of the above vehicles. The drag link inner joint may fracture under certain driving conditions. This could result in a loss of steering control and cause a crash without warning. Also, the steering damper bracket at the tie rod tube may loosen. This could allow the bracket to slide on the tube and may cause increased vehicle turning radius. Repair The steering linkage must be inspected and some steering linkage components may need to be replaced. NOTE: The initial steering linkage inspection process can be done by write up personnel in the write up area (see Step 1 of the service procedure). Vehicles found with original style steering linkage can be immediately returned to the customer. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Center Link > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Center Link: > H46 > Jun > 09 > Recall - Steering Linkage Defects > Page 11132 Parts Information Special Tools The special tools may be required to perform this repair: Completion Reporting and Reimbursement Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Center Link > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Center Link: > H46 > Jun > 09 > Recall - Steering Linkage Defects > Page 11133 Claims for vehicles that have been serviced must be submitted on the DealerCONNECT Claim Entry Screen located on the Service tab. Claims submitted will be used by Chrysler to record recall service completions and provide dealer payments. Use one of the labor operation numbers and time allowances shown. Add the cost of the recall parts package plus applicable dealer allowance to your claim. FOR VEHICLES INSPECTED IN THE WRITE UP AREA: Enter "INSPECT" in the part number section of your claim with a quantity of one (1). Enter $5.00 WITH NO MARK-UP for reimbursement of steering linkage inspection performed in the write up area. NOTE: See the Warranty Administration Manual, Recall Claim Processing Section, for complete recall claim processing instructions. Dealer Notification To view this notification on DealerCONNECT, select "Global Recall System" on the Service tab, then click on the description of this notification. Owner Notification and Service Scheduling All involved vehicle owners known to Chrysler are being notified of the service requirement by first class mail. They are requested to schedule appointments for this service with their dealers. A generic copy of the owner letter is included. Enclosed with each owner letter is an Owner Notification postcard to allow owners to update our records if applicable. Vehicle Lists, Global Recall System, VIP and Dealer Follow Up All involved vehicles have been entered into the DealerCONNECT Global Recall System (GRS) and Vehicle Information Plus (VIP) for dealer inquiry as needed. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Center Link > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Center Link: > H46 > Jun > 09 > Recall - Steering Linkage Defects > Page 11134 GRS provides involved dealers with an updated VIN list of their incomplete vehicles. The owner's name, address and phone number are listed if known. Completed vehicles are removed from GRS within several days of repair claim submission. To use this system, click on the "Service" tab and then click on "Global Recall System." Your dealer's VIN list for each recall displayed can be sorted by: those vehicles that were unsold at recall launch, those with a phone number, city, zip code, or VIN sequence. Dealers must perform this repair on all unsold vehicles before retail delivery. Dealers should also use the VIN list to follow up with all owners to schedule appointments for this repair. Recall VIN lists may contain confidential, restricted owner name and address information that was obtained from the Department of Motor Vehicles of various states. Use of this information is permitted for this recall only and is strictly prohibited from all other use. Additional Information If you have any questions or need assistance in completing this action, please contact your Service and Parts District Manager. Customer Services Field Operations Chrysler Service Procedure NOTE: The initial steering linkage inspection process (Step 1 of the service procedure) can be done by write up personnel in the write up area. Vehicles found with the steering linkage shown in Figure 1 can be immediately returned to the customer. See the "Completion Reporting and Reimbursement" section of this recall for special claims processing information. 1. Look under the front of the vehicle and inspect the steering linkage at the steering damper mounting point: > If the steering damper mounts to the tie rod tube as shown in Figure 1, the steering linkage is good. Return the vehicle to the customer. No further action is required. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Center Link > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Center Link: > H46 > Jun > 09 > Recall - Steering Linkage Defects > Page 11135 > If the steering damper mounts to the tie rod tube as shown in Figure 2, the vehicle will require further inspection and/or repair by a technician. The vehicle should be assigned to a technician and the technician should continue with Step 2 of this procedure. 2. Lift the vehicle on a hoist and inspect the steering linkage drag link for a white part number tag (Figure 3): > If the steering linkage drag link does not have a white part number tag, continue with Step 3 of this procedure. ^ If the steering linkage drag link has a white part number tag: > For 2009 model year trucks, continue with Step 9 of this procedure. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Center Link > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Center Link: > H46 > Jun > 09 > Recall - Steering Linkage Defects > Page 11136 > For 2003 through 2008 model year trucks, continue with Step 5 of this procedure. 3. Inspect the steering damper bracket to tie rod tube mounting u-bolt nuts by putting a 13 mm box-end wrench onto the nut (Figure 4): > If a 13 mm wrench fits the steering damper bracket mounting u-bolt nuts, the bracket and fasteners must be replaced. Continue with Step 4 of this procedure. > If a 13 mm wrench does not fit the steering damper bracket mounting u-bolt nuts, the bracket does not require replacement. Continue with Step 5 of this procedure. 4. Replace the steering damper bracket and fasteners using the following procedure: a. Remove and save the steering damper-to-damper bracket mounting nut (Figure 5). b. Disconnect the steering damper eyelet from the steering damper bracket. c. Remove and discard the four steering damper bracket nuts, two u-bolts and the steering damper bracket (Figure 5). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Center Link > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Center Link: > H46 > Jun > 09 > Recall - Steering Linkage Defects > Page 11137 d. Place the new steering damper carriage bolt through the square hole in the new steering damper bracket. e. Place the new steering damper bracket assembly onto the tie rod tube at the flat spot area on the tube and install the new u-bolts and nuts. Lightly snug the nuts to hold the steering damper bracket in position. f. Center the new steering damper bracket on the flattened area of the tie rod tube. g. Evenly tighten the four steering damper bracket u-bolt nuts to 25 ft. lbs. (34 N.m). Then tighten the four u-bolt nuts to 45 ft. lbs. (61 N.m). h. Connect the steering damper to the steering damper carriage bolt. i. Install the steering damper-to-damper bracket mounting nut and tighten to 75 ft. lbs. (100 N.m). j. Continue with Step 5 of this procedure. 5. For 2009 model year trucks, continue with Step 6 of this procedure. For 2003 through 2008 model year trucks, inspect the pitman arm part number (Figure 6): > If the part number cast into the bottom side of the pitman arm is 68039930AA the pitman arm does not require replacement. > Steering linkage with a white part number tag, continue with Step 9 of this procedure. > Linkage without a white part number tag, replace the inner drag link joint. Continue with Step 6 of this procedure. > If the part number cast into the bottom side of the pitman arm is 52106836AB, or is not legible: > Steering linkage without a white part number tag, replace the inner drag link joint and pitman arm. Continue with Step 7 of this procedure. > Steering linkage with a white part number tag, replace the pitman arm. Continue with Step 8 of this procedure. 6. Replace the inner drag link joint using the following procedure: Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Center Link > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Center Link: > H46 > Jun > 09 > Recall - Steering Linkage Defects > Page 11138 a. Loosen both drag link adjuster sleeve clamp nuts (Figure 7). b. Remove and discard the inner drag link joint to pitman arm nut (Figure 7). c. Use Special Tool C-4150A to separate the steering inner drag link joint from the pitman arm (Figure 8). d. While counting the number of turns, unscrew the steering inner drag link joint from the drag link adjuster sleeve (right handed threads) and discard the drag link inner joint. CAUTION: Do not allow the drag link adjuster sleeve to turn while unscrewing the inner drag link joint. e. Screw in the new inner drag link joint into the drag link adjuster sleeve the same number of turns counted in step 6d. of this procedure. f. Connect the steering inner drag link joint to the pitman arm. g. Install the new steering inner drag link joint nut and tighten the nut to 100 ft. lbs. (135 N.m). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Center Link > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Center Link: > H46 > Jun > 09 > Recall - Steering Linkage Defects > Page 11139 h. With the wheels in the straight ahead position, make sure that both inner and outer steering drag link joint caps are centered over the joint ball stud (Figure 9). CAUTION: Failure to center the drag link inner and outer joint caps over the joint ball studs before tightening the drag link adjuster sleeve clamps could cause joint failure. i. With the adjuster sleeve clamps rotated 45 degrees forward, tighten both drag link adjuster sleeve clamp nuts to 45 ft. lbs. (61 N.m). CAUTION: The drag link adjuster sleeve clamp tabs must be pointing approximately 45 degrees forward before tightening (as shown in Figure 10). Do not allow the adjuster sleeve clamp tabs to hang straight down. j. Lower the vehicle from the hoist. k. Drive the vehicle to verify that the steering wheel is straight. > If the steering wheel is turned to the left, shorten the drag link at the adjuster sleeve located on the drag link. > If the steering wheel is turned to the right, lengthen the drag link at the adjuster sleeve located on the drag link. l. Repeat Step 6k. until steering wheel is straight. m. Continue with Step 9 of this procedure. 7. Replace the inner drag link joint and pitman arm using the following procedure: Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Center Link > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Center Link: > H46 > Jun > 09 > Recall - Steering Linkage Defects > Page 11140 a. Loosen both drag link adjuster sleeve clamp nuts (Figure 7). b. Remove and save the pitman arm retaining nut located on the steering gear output shaft. c. Install pitman arm puller (Special Tool 9615) onto the steering gear output shaft (Figure 11). CAUTION: Failure to use the correct pitman arm puller could cause damage to the steering gear. d. Tighten the pitman arm puller forcing screw until the pitman arm separates from the steering gear output shaft (Figure 11). e. While counting the number of turns, unscrew the steering inner drag link joint (with pitman arm still attached) from the drag link adjuster sleeve (right handed threads) and discard the pitman arm and inner drag link joint. CAUTION: Do not allow the drag link adjuster sleeve to turn while unscrewing the inner drag link joint. f. Screw in the new steering inner drag link joint into the drag link adjuster sleeve the same number of turns counted in step 7e. of this procedure. g. Install the new pitman arm and retaining nut onto the steering gear output shaft. Tighten the pitman arm nut to 225 ft. lbs. (300 N.m). h. Connect the steering inner drag link joint to the pitman arm. i. Install the new steering inner drag link joint nut and tighten the nut to 100 ft. lbs. (135 N.m). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Center Link > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Center Link: > H46 > Jun > 09 > Recall - Steering Linkage Defects > Page 11141 j. With the wheels in the straight ahead position, make sure that both inner and outer steering drag link joint caps are centered over the joint ball stud (Figure 12). CAUTION: Failure to center the drag link inner and outer joint caps over the joint ball studs before tightening the drag link adjuster sleeve clamps could cause joint failure. k. With the adjuster sleeve clamps rotated 45 degrees forward, tighten the drag link adjuster sleeve clamp nuts to 45 ft. lbs. (61 N.m).lbs. CAUTION: The drag link adjuster sleeve clamp tabs must be pointing approximately 45 degrees forward before tightening (as shown in Figure 10). Do not allow the adjuster sleeve clamp tabs to hang straight down. l. Lower the vehicle from the hoist. m. Drive the vehicle to verify that the steering wheel is straight. > If the steering wheel is turned to the left, shorten the drag link at the adjuster sleeve located on the drag link. > If the steering wheel is turned to the right, lengthen the drag link at the adjuster sleeve located on the drag link. n. Repeat Step 7m. until steering wheel is straight. o. Continue with Step 9 of this procedure. 8. Replace the pitman arm using the following procedure: Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Center Link > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Center Link: > H46 > Jun > 09 > Recall - Steering Linkage Defects > Page 11142 a. Remove and discard the inner drag link joint nut (Figure 13). b. Use Special Tool C-4150A to separate the steering inner drag link joint from the pitman arm (Figure 14). CAUTION: Use extreme care not to tear, nick or damage the inner drag link joint rubber boot. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Center Link > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Center Link: > H46 > Jun > 09 > Recall - Steering Linkage Defects > Page 11143 d. Install pitman arm puller (Special Tool 9615) onto the steering gear output shaft (Figure 15). CAUTION: Failure to use the correct pitman arm puller could cause damage to the steering gear. e. Tighten the pitman arm puller forcing screw until the pitman arm separates from the steering gear output shaft (Figure 15). f. Install the new pitman arm. g. Install the pitman arm retaining nut onto the steering gear output shaft. Tighten the pitman arm nut to 225 ft. lbs. (300 N.m). h. Connect the steering inner drag link joint to the pitman arm. i. Install the new steering inner drag link joint nut and tighten the nut to 100 ft. lbs. (135 N.m). j. Lower the vehicle from the hoist. k. Drive the vehicle to verify that the steering wheel is straight. > If the steering wheel is turned to the left, shorten the drag link at the adjuster sleeve located on the drag link. ^ If the steering wheel is turned to the right, lengthen the drag link at the adjuster sleeve located on the drag link. l. Repeat Step 8k. until steering wheel is straight. m. Continue with Step 9 of this procedure. 9. Verify the lower surface of the left outer tie rod socket is parallel to the upper surface of the left knuckle attaching arm using the following procedure: a. Loosen the tie rod tube adjuster sleeve clamps. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Center Link > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Center Link: > H46 > Jun > 09 > Recall - Steering Linkage Defects > Page 11144 b. Rotate the left tie rod until the bottom of the tie rod socket is parallel to the top of the left steering knuckle arm (Figure 16). c. Tighten the tie rod adjuster sleeve clamp nuts to 45 ft.lbs. (61 N.m). CAUTION: Failure to align the left tie rod end parallel to the steering knuckle could cause tie rod end damage. d. Return the vehicle to the customer. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Center Link > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Center Link: > H46 > Jun > 09 > Recall - Steering Linkage Defects > Page 11145 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Center Link > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Center Link: > H36 > May > 09 > Recall - Drag Link/Steering Damper Bracket Defects Technical Service Bulletin # H36 Date: 090529 Recall - Drag Link/Steering Damper Bracket Defects Revised May 2009 Dealer Service Instructions for: Safety Recall H36 Steering Drag Link Inner Joint and Damper Bracket NOTE: The service procedure for this recall has been revised. All previous copies of Safety Recall H36 should be discarded from your files. Models 2008-2009 (DH / D1) Dodge Truck (2500/3500 series or 1500 Mega Cab) NOTE: This recall applies only to the above vehicles equipped with four wheel drive (sales code 5I4) built from February 19, 2008 through October 30, 2008 (MDH 021910 through 103006). 2008-2009 (DC) Dodge Truck (3500 series cab chassis) NOTE: This recall applies only to the above vehicles built from February 19, 2008 through October 30, 2008 (MDH 021910 through 103006). IMPORTANT: Many of the vehicles within the above build period have already been inspected or repaired and, therefore, have been excluded from this recall. IMPORTANT: Some of the involved vehicles may be in dealer new vehicle inventory. Federal law requires you to complete this recall service on these vehicles before retail delivery. Dealers should also consider this requirement to apply to used vehicle inventory and should perform this recall on vehicles in for service. Involved vehicles can be determined by using the VIP inquiry process. Subject The steering drag link inner joint on about 32,700 of the above vehicles may fracture under certain driving conditions. This could result in a loss of steering control and cause a crash without warning. Also the steering damper bracket at the tie rod tube may loosen. This could allow the bracket to slide on the tube and may cause increased vehicle turning radius. Repair The drag link inner joint must be replaced and the steering damper bracket must be inspected and replaced if required. Alternate Transportation Dealers should attempt to minimize customer inconvenience by placing the owner in a loaner vehicle if inspection determines that the steering damper bracket is required and the vehicle must be held overnight. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Center Link > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Center Link: > H36 > May > 09 > Recall - Drag Link/Steering Damper Bracket Defects > Page 11150 Parts Information Each dealer to whom vehicles in the recall were assigned will receive enough Drag Link Inner Joint Packages to service about 20% of those vehicles. Completion Reporting and Reimbursement Claims for vehicles that have been serviced must be submitted on the DealerCONNECT Claim Entry Screen located on the Service tab. Claims submitted will be used by Chrysler to record recall service completions and provide dealer payments. Use one of the labor operation numbers and time allowances shown. Add the cost of the recall parts package plus applicable dealer allowance to your claim. NOTE: See the Warranty Administration Manual, Recall Claim Processing Section, for complete recall claim processing instructions. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Center Link > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Center Link: > H36 > May > 09 > Recall - Drag Link/Steering Damper Bracket Defects > Page 11151 Dealer Notification To view this notification on DealerCONNECT, select "Global Recall System" on the Service tab, then click on the description of this notification. Owner Notification and Service Scheduling All involved vehicle owners known to Chrysler are being notified of the service requirement by first class mail. They are requested to schedule appointments for this service with their dealers. A generic copy of the owner letter is included. Enclosed with each owner letter is an Owner Notification postcard to allow owners to update our records if applicable. Vehicle Lists, Global Recall System, VIP and Dealer Follow Up All involved vehicles have been entered into the DealerCONNECT Global Recall System (GRS) and Vehicle Information Plus (VIP) for dealer inquiry as needed. GRS provides involved dealers with an updated VIN list of their incomplete vehicles. The owner's name, address and phone number are listed if known. Completed vehicles are removed from GRS within several days of repair claim submission. To use this system, click on the "Service" tab and then click on "Global Recall System." Your dealer's VIN list for each recall displayed can be sorted by: those vehicles that were unsold at recall launch, those with a phone number, city, zip code, or VIN sequence. Dealers must perform this repair on all unsold vehicles before retail delivery. Dealers should also use the VIN list to follow up with all owners to schedule appointments for this repair. Recall VIN lists may contain confidential, restricted owner name and address information that was obtained from the Department of Motor Vehicles of various states. Use of this information is permitted for this recall only and is strictly prohibited from all other use. Additional Information If you have any questions or need assistance in completing this action, please contact your Service and Parts District Manager. Customer Services Field Operations Chrysler Service Procedure 1. Lift the vehicle on an appropriate hoist. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Center Link > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Center Link: > H36 > May > 09 > Recall - Drag Link/Steering Damper Bracket Defects > Page 11152 2. Inspect the steering damper bracket mounting nuts by putting a 13 mm box-end wrench onto the nut (Figure 1): > If a 13 mm wrench fits the steering damper bracket mounting nuts, the bracket and fasteners must be replaced. Continue with Step 3 of this procedure. > If a 13 mm wrench does not fit the steering damper bracket mounting nuts, the bracket does not require replacement. Continue with Step 4 of this procedure. 3. Replace the steering damper bracket and fasteners using the following procedure: a. Remove and save the steering damper-to-damper bracket mounting nut (Figure 2). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Center Link > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Center Link: > H36 > May > 09 > Recall - Drag Link/Steering Damper Bracket Defects > Page 11153 b. Disconnect the steering damper from the steering damper bracket. c. Remove and discard the four steering bracket nuts, two u-bolts and the bracket (Figure 2). d. Place the new steering damper carriage bolt through the square hole in the new bracket. e. Place the new steering damper bracket assembly onto the tie rod tube at the flat spot area on the tube and install the new u-bolts and nuts. Lightly snug the nuts to hold the steering damper bracket in position. f. Center the new steering damper bracket on the flattened area of the tie rod tube. g. Evenly tighten the four steering damper bracket u-bolt nuts to 25 ft. lbs. (34 N.m). Then tighten the four u-bolt nuts to 45 ft. lbs. (61 N.m). h. Connect the steering damper to the steering damper carriage bolt. i. Install the steering damper mounting nut and tighten to 75 ft. lbs. (100 N.m). j. Continue with Step 4 of this procedure. 4. Replace the drag link inner joint using the following procedure: a. Loosen both drag link adjuster sleeve clamp nuts (Figure 3). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Center Link > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Center Link: > H36 > May > 09 > Recall - Drag Link/Steering Damper Bracket Defects > Page 11154 ERROR: stackunderflow OFFENDING COMMAND: ~ STACK: Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Center Link > Component Information > Service and Repair > Drag Link - Removal Center Link: Service and Repair Drag Link - Removal 2500 & 3500 - Link/Coil 2500 & 3500 1. Remove the drag link nut (2) from the pitman arm side (1). 2. Remove the drag link nut from the knuckle side. 3. Remove the drag link (2) from the right knuckle and pitman arm (1) with Puller C-3894A (3). 4500 & 5500 - Link/Coil 4500 & 5500 1. Remove the drag link nut (1) from the pitman arm side (3). 2. Remove the drag link nut from the knuckle side. 3. Remove the drag link (3) from the right knuckle and pitman arm (2) with Puller C-3894A (1). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Center Link > Component Information > Service and Repair > Drag Link - Removal > Page 11157 Center Link: Service and Repair Drag Link - Installation 2500 & 3500 - Link/Coil 2500 & 3500 1. Install the drag link (2) to the pitman arm (1). Install the nut and tighten to 88 Nm (65 ft. lbs.). 2. Install the drag link to the right steering knuckle. Install the nut and tighten to 54 Nm (40 ft. lbs.). Then an additional 90°. 3. Install tie rod to the left steering knuckle and drag link. Install the nuts and tighten to 54 Nm (40 ft. lbs.). Then an additional 90°. 4. Remove the supports and lower the vehicle to the surface. Center steering wheel and adjust toe, See: Alignment/Service and Repair . 5. After adjustment tighten tie rod adjustment sleeve clamp bolts to 61 Nm (45 ft. lbs.). NOTE: Position the clamp on the sleeve so retaining bolt is located on the bottom side of the sleeve. 4500 & 5500 - Link/Coil 4500 & 5500 1. Install the drag link (6) to the pitman arm (3). Install the nut (1) and tighten to 88 Nm (65 ft. lbs.) install the cotter pin. 2. Install the drag link to the right steering knuckle. Install the nut and tighten to 54 Nm (40 ft. lbs.). Then an additional 90°. 3. Install tie rod to the left steering knuckle and drag link. Install the nuts and tighten to 54 Nm (40 ft. lbs.). Then an additional 90°. 4. Remove the supports and lower the vehicle to the surface. Center steering wheel and adjust toe, See: Alignment/Service and Repair . 5. After adjustment tighten tie rod adjustment sleeve clamp bolts to 61 Nm (45 ft. lbs.). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Front Steering Knuckle > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description - Independent Front Suspension Front Steering Knuckle: Description and Operation Description - Independent Front Suspension DESCRIPTION The knuckle (1) is a single casting with legs machined for the upper and lower ball joints. The knuckle also has machined mounting locations for the front brake calipers and hub bearing. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Front Steering Knuckle > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description - Independent Front Suspension > Page 11162 Front Steering Knuckle: Description and Operation Operation - Independent Front Suspension OPERATION The steering knuckle pivot between the upper and lower ball joint. Steering linkage attached to the knuckle allows the vehicle to be steered. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Front Steering Knuckle > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Steering Knuckle - Removal Front Steering Knuckle: Service and Repair Front Steering Knuckle - Removal (LD) 4X2 & 4X4 - Independent Front Suspension (LD) 4X2 & 4X4 1. Raise and support the vehicle. 2. Remove the wheel and tire assembly. 3. Remove the brake caliper, rotor See: Brakes and Traction Control/Disc Brake System/Brake Rotor/Disc/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Brake Rotor - Removal, shield and ABS wheel speed sensor if equipped See: Brakes and Traction Control/Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems/Wheel Speed Sensor/Service and Repair/Front Wheel Speed Sensor - Removal . 4. Remove the tie rod end nut. Separate the tie rod from the knuckle with Remover 9360. 5. Remove the halfshaft nut (4X4 only). 6. Remove the upper ball joint nut. Separate the ball joint (4) from the knuckle (6) with Remover 9360 (5) Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Front Steering Knuckle > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Steering Knuckle - Removal > Page 11165 CAUTION: When installing puller 8677 to separate the ball joint, be careful not to damage the ball joint seal. 7. Remove the lower ball joint nut. Separate the ball joint from the knuckle with Remover 8677 (2). 8. Remove the steering knuckle (1) from the vehicle. 9. Remove the hub/bearing from the steering knuckle on the bench See: Suspension/Wheel Bearing/Service and Repair/Front Hub / Bearing Removal . 2500 & 3500 - 4WD - Link/Coil 2500 & 3500 - 4WD 1. Remove the hub bearing See: Suspension/Wheel Bearing/Service and Repair/Front Hub / Bearing - Removal . 2. Remove tie-rod or drag link end from the steering knuckle arm. 3. Remove the wheel speed sensor. See: Brakes and Traction Control/Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems/Wheel Speed Sensor/Service and Repair/Front Wheel Speed Sensor - Removal . 4. Loosen the upper ball stud nut.Do not remove the nut at this time. 5. Remove the lower ball joint nut. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Front Steering Knuckle > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Steering Knuckle - Removal > Page 11166 6. Separate the lower ball joint (4) using special tool C-4150A separator (3). 7. Remove the upper ball joint nut. 8. Remove the steering knuckle (2). 4500 & 5500 - Link/Coil 4500 & 5500 1. Remove tie-rod or drag link end from the steering knuckle arm. 2. Remove the disc brake caliper bolts (1) and the disc brake caliper (2). 3. Remove the disc brake caliper adapter bolts (1) and remove the adapter (2). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Front Steering Knuckle > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Steering Knuckle - Removal > Page 11167 4. Remove the disc brake rotor (1) and the hub extension (2). 5. Remove the wheel speed sensor (2) See: Brakes and Traction Control/Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems/Wheel Speed Sensor/Service and Repair/Front Wheel Speed Sensor - Removal . 6. Remove the hub bearing bolts (1) and the hub/bearing See: Suspension/Wheel Bearing/Service and Repair/Front Hub / Bearing - Removal . Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Front Steering Knuckle > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Steering Knuckle - Removal > Page 11168 ERROR: stackunderflow OFFENDING COMMAND: ~ STACK: Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Front Steering Knuckle > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Steering Knuckle - Removal > Page 11169 Front Steering Knuckle: Service and Repair Front Steering Knuckle - Installation (LD) 4X2 & 4X4 - Independent Front Suspension (LD) 4X2 & 4X4 CAUTION: The ball joint stud tapers must be CLEAN and DRY before installing the knuckle. Clean the stud tapers with mineral spirits to remove dirt and grease. NOTE: When installing hub/bearing with ABS brakes, position the speed sensor opening towards the front of the vehicle. 1. Install the hub/bearing to the steering knuckle (1) and tighten the bolts to 163 Nm (120 ft. lbs.). 2. Install the knuckle (1) onto the upper and lower ball joints. 3. Install the upper and lower ball joint nuts. Tighten the upper ball joint nut to 54 Nm (40 ft. lbs.) (an additional 90° turn is required) and the lower ball joint nut to 52 Nm (38 ft. lbs.)(an additional 90° turn is required). 4. Remove the hydraulic jack from the lower suspension arm (4). 5. Install the tie rod end and tighten the nut to 61 Nm (45 ft. lbs.). 6. Install the front halfshaft into the hub/bearing (if equipped). 7. Install the the halfshaft nut and tighten to 251 Nm (185 ft. lbs.) (if equipped). 8. Install the ABS wheel speed sensor (if equipped) See: Brakes and Traction Control/Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems/Wheel Speed Sensor/Service and Repair/Front Wheel Speed Sensor - Installation and brake shield, rotor and caliper See: Brakes and Traction Control/Disc Brake System/Brake Rotor/Disc/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Brake Rotor - Installation . 9. Install the wheel and tire assembly See: Wheels and Tires/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement . 10. Remove the support and lower the vehicle. 11. Perform a wheel alignment See: Alignment/Service and Repair . 2500 & 3500 - 4WD - Link/Coil 2500 & 3500 - 4WD 1. Position the steering knuckle on the ball studs. 2. Install and tighten lower ball stud nut to 47 Nm (35 ft. lbs.) torque. 3. Install and tighten upper ball stud nut to 94 Nm (70 ft. lbs.) torque. 4. Retorque lower ball stud nut to 200 Nm (148 ft. lbs.) torque. 5. Install the hub bearing See: Suspension/Wheel Bearing/Service and Repair/Front Hub / Bearing - Installation . 6. Install tie-rod or drag link end onto the steering knuckle arm. 7. Install the wheel speed sensor. See: Brakes and Traction Control/Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems/Wheel Speed Sensor/Service and Repair/Front Wheel Speed Sensor - Installation . 4500 & 5500 - Link/Coil 4500 & 5500 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Front Steering Knuckle > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Steering Knuckle - Removal > Page 11170 1. Position the steering knuckle (1) on the ball stud. 2. Install and tighten lower ball stud nut (3) to 47 Nm (35 ft. lbs.) torque. 3. Install the upper ball joint (2) into the steering knuckle Tighten to make sure the wheel speed sensor bracket (3) for the wire is installed between the knuckle and ball joint (2). 4. Install and tighten upper ball stud nut (1) to 94 Nm (70 ft. lbs.) torque. 5. Retorque lower ball stud nut to 200 Nm (148 ft. lbs.) torque. 6. Install the hub bearing and tighten the bolts (1) to See: Suspension/Wheel Bearing/Service and Repair/Front Hub / Bearing - Installation . Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Front Steering Knuckle > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Steering Knuckle - Removal > Page 11171 7. Install the wheel speed sensor (2). See: Brakes and Traction Control/Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems/Wheel Speed Sensor/Service and Repair/Front Wheel Speed Sensor - Installation . 8. Install the dust shield (2) if removed. 9. Install the disc brake rotor (1) and extension (2) to the hub/bearing. 10. Install the disc brake caliper adapter (2) and bolts (1). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Front Steering Knuckle > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Steering Knuckle - Removal > Page 11172 11. Install the disc brake caliper (2) and tighten the bolts (1). 12. Install tie-rod or drag link end onto the steering knuckle arm. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Pitman Arm > Component Information > Service and Repair > Pitman Arm - Removal Pitman Arm: Service and Repair Pitman Arm - Removal 2500 & 3500 2500 & 3500 1. Remove the drag link nut (2) from the pitman arm (1). 2. Install puller C-3894-A (3) and separate the drag link (2) from the pitman arm (1). 3. Mark the pitman arm (2) and shaft positions for installation reference. Remove the nut (3) and washer (4) from the pitman arm (2). 4. Remove the pitman arm (4) with Puller 9615 (2) or an equivalent pitman arm puller tool. 4500 & 5500 4500 & 5500 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Pitman Arm > Component Information > Service and Repair > Pitman Arm - Removal > Page 11177 1. Remove the track bar bolt (4) and lower the track bar (5) to allow enough clearance. 2. Remove the drag link nut (4) from the pitman arm (2). 3. Install puller C3894-A (1) or equivalent and separate the drag link (3) from the pitman arm (2). 4. Mark the pitman arm (2) and shaft positions for installation reference. Unstake the nut (5) and the remove from the pitman arm (2). 5. Remove the pitman arm (1) with Puller OTC(R) 5055 (2) or an equivalent pitman arm puller tool. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Pitman Arm > Component Information > Service and Repair > Pitman Arm - Removal > Page 11178 Pitman Arm: Service and Repair Pitman Arm - Installation 2500 & 3500 2500 & 3500 1. Align reference marks and install pitman arm. 2. Install the lock washer and retaining nut on the pitman shaft and tighten nut to 251 Nm (185 ft. lbs.). 3. Install the drag link (1) to the pitman arm (5). Install the nut (4) and tighten to 54 Nm (40 ft. lbs.). Then an additional 90°. 4. Remove the supports and lower the vehicle to the surface. Center steering wheel and adjust toe, See: Alignment/Service and Repair . 5. After adjustment tighten tie rod adjustment sleeve clamp bolts to 61 Nm (45 ft. lbs.). NOTE: Position the clamp on the sleeve so retaining bolt is located on the bottom side of the sleeve. 4500 & 5500 4500 & 5500 NOTE: Care is to be taken to assure the steering gear does not travel more than 25 degrees off center, at the output shaft in either direction, prior to setting of the poppet valves. This is critical during the installation of the pitman arm. Failure to do this will result in the improper setting of the poppet valves. If set improperly the gear will not go into relief bypass and there is potential for heat build up and damage to the steering system. Once set, the poppet valves can not be reset. 1. Align reference marks and install pitman arm (3). 2. Install the retaining nut (2) on the pitman shaft and tighten nut to 300 Nm (225 ft. lbs.). 3. Install the drag link (6) to the pitman arm (3). Install the nut (1) and tighten to 54 Nm (40 ft. lbs.). Then an additional 90°. 4. Install the track bar (5) and tighten the bolt (4) to 54 Nm (40 ft. lbs.) 5. Remove the supports and lower the vehicle to the surface. Center steering wheel and adjust toe, See: Alignment/Service and Repair . 6. After adjustment tighten tie rod adjustment sleeve clamp bolts to 61 Nm (45 ft. lbs.). "SETTING THE POPPET VALVES IN THE STEERING GEAR BOX AFTER ALIGNMENT HAS BEEN PERFORMED" 1. With the engine at idle and the vehicle still on the turn angle plates or with weight off tires, steer the wheels to full travel in one direction until axle stop contact is made (approximately 2 1/8 turns). Maximum input torque to the steering wheel to be applied during this procedure. NOTE: Prior to reaching full turn, approximately 1 3/4 turns, a slight increase in turning effort will be experienced and will remain until Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Pitman Arm > Component Information > Service and Repair > Pitman Arm - Removal > Page 11179 the steering stop is reached. 2. Follow the same procedure while turning the steering wheel in the opposite direction. The poppets are now positioned to trip and reduce pressure as the steered wheels approach the axle stops in either direction. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Bleeding > System Information > Service and Repair Power Steering Bleeding: Service and Repair POWER STEERING SYSTEM BLEEDING WARNING: The fluid level should be checked with engine off to prevent injury from moving components. CAUTION: Mopar(R) Power Steering Fluid + 4 or Mopar(R) ATF+4 Automatic Transmission Fluid is to be used in the power steering system. Both Fluids have the same material standard specifications (MS-9602). No other power steering or automatic transmission fluid is to be used in the system. Damage may result to the power steering pump and system if another fluid is used. Do not overfill the system. CAUTION: If the air is not purged from the power steering system correctly, pump failure could result. NOTE: Be sure the vacuum tool used in the following procedure is clean and free of any fluids. 1. Check the fluid level. As measured on the side of the reservoir, the level should indicate between MAX and MIN when the fluid is at normal ambient temperature. Adjust the fluid level as necessary. See: Power Steering Fluid/Testing and Inspection 2. Tightly insert Power Steering Cap Adapter (4), Special Tool 9688, into the mouth of the reservoir (3). CAUTION: Failure to use a the vacuum pump reservoir (1) may allow power steering fluid to be sucked into the hand vacuum pump. 3. Attach Hand Vacuum Pump (2), Special Tool C-4207 or equivalent, with reservoir (1) attached, to the Power Steering Cap Adapter (4). CAUTION: Do not run the engine while vacuum is applied to the power steering system. Damage to the power steering pump can occur. NOTE: When performing the following step make sure the vacuum level is maintained during the entire time period. 4. Using Hand Vacuum Pump (2), apply 68-85 kPa (20-25 in. Hg) of vacuum to the system for a minimum of three minutes. 5. Slowly release the vacuum and remove the special tools. 6. Adjust the fluid level as necessary. Refer to STEP 1. 7. Repeat STEP 1 through STEP 6 until the fluid no longer drops when vacuum is applied. 8. Start the engine and cycle the steering wheel lock-to-lock three times. NOTE: Do not hold the steering wheel at the stops. 9. Stop the engine and check for leaks at all connections. 10. Check for any signs of air in the reservoir and check the fluid level. If air is present, repeat the procedure as necessary. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Fluid > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Maintenance - Fluid Flushing Information Power Steering Fluid: Technical Service Bulletins Maintenance - Fluid Flushing Information NUMBER: 26-001-09 GROUP: Miscellaneous DATE: September 24, 2009 THIS BULLETIN SUPERSEDES TECHNICAL SERVICE BULLETIN 26-003-07, DATED MARCH 30, 2007, WHICH SHOULD BE REMOVED FROM YOUR FILES. THIS IS A COMPLETE REVISION AND NO ASTERISKS HAVE BEEN USED TO HIGHLIGHT REVISIONS. SUBJECT: Fluid Flushing Requirements MODELS: 2005 - 2008 (CS) Pacifica 2006 - 2009 (D1) Ram Truck (3500 Pick Up) 2010 (D2) Ram Truck (3500 Pick Up) 2007 - 2010 (DC) Ram Truck (3500 Chassis Cab) 2005 - 2009 (DH) Ram Truck (1500/2500 Pick Up) 2010 (DJ) Ram Truck (2500 Pick Up) 2005 - 2008 (DR) Ram Truck (1500/2500 Pick Up) 2009 - 2010 (DS) Ram Truck (1500) 2005 - 2009 (HB) Durango 2007 - 2009 (HG) Aspen 2009 - 2010 (JC) Journey 2007 - 2010 (JK) Wrangler 2005 - 2006 (JR) Sebring Sedan & Convertible/Stratus Sedan 2007 - 2010 (JS) Avenger/Sebring 2008 - 2010 (KK) Liberty 2007 - 2010 (KA) Nitro 2005 - 2007 (KJ) Liberty 2009 - 2010 (LC) Challenger 2005 - 2010 (LE) 300C/300C Touring (International Markets) 2005 - 2010 (LX) 300/Magnum/Charger 2007 - 2010 (MK) Compass/Patriot 2005 - 2010 (ND) Dakota 2005 - 2006 (PL) Neon 2007 - 2010 (PM) Caliber 2005 - 2010 (PT) Chrysler PT Cruiser Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Fluid > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Maintenance - Fluid Flushing Information > Page 11188 2005 - 2007 (RG) Chrysler Voyager (International Markets) 2005 - 2007 (RS) Town & Country/Caravan/Voyager 2009 - 2010 (RT) Town & Country/Grand Caravan 2005 - 2006 (TJ) Wrangler 2005 - 2006 (VA) Sprinter 2007 - 2010 (VB) Sprinter 2005 - 2010 (WH) Grand Cherokee (International Markets) 2005 - 2010 (WK) Grand Cherokee 2006 - 2010 (XH) Commander (International Markets) 2006 - 2010 (XK) Commander 2005 - 2010 (ZB) Viper 2005 - 2007 (ZH) Crossfire DISCUSSION: Chrysler Group vehicle fluid systems do NOT require regular flushing. These systems include: engine oil, transmission oil, axle lube, brake fluid, power steering fluid, and refrigerant. The only exception to this requirement are published in the vehicle maintenance schedules, e.g. engine coolant. Exceptions to this recommendation include only those instances where a failure has occurred and/or the system has become compromised, contaminated or overheated beyond the normal operating range. Chrysler Group does NOT recommend aftermarket chemicals to flush the engine, transmission, brake or steering systems. Chemicals contained in these products can damage the system elastomeric components, and contaminate the component fluid, leading to loss of system/component durability and service life. When necessary, only the original approved system fluid should be used to flush these components using teamPSE(R) approved equipment. If the engine coolant contains a considerable amount of sediment, clean and flush with Mopar Cooling System Flush, p/n 04856977, or equivalent. Follow with a thorough rinsing to remove all deposits and chemicals. Refill with a minimum of a 50% mixture of the specified coolant and distilled water. POLICY: Information Only Disclaimer: This bulletin is supplied as technical information only and is not an authorization for repair. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Fluid > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 11189 Power Steering Fluid: Specifications POWER STEERING FLUID Mopar ATF +4 Automatic Transmission Fluid. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Fluid > Component Information > Description and Operation > Power Steering Fluid Power Steering Fluid: Description and Operation Power Steering Fluid POWER STEERING FLUID Mopar(R) ATF +4, Automatic Transmission Fluid is required in the power steering system. Substitute fluids can induce power steering system failure. Mopar(R) ATF +4, Automatic Transmission Fluid when new is red in color. The ATF is dyed red so it can be identified from other fluids used in the vehicle such as engine oil or antifreeze. The red color is not permanent and is not an indicator of fluid condition. As the vehicle is driven, the ATF will begin to look darker in color and may eventually become brown. This is normal. ATF+4 also has a unique odor that may change with age. Consequently, odor and color cannot be used to indicate the fluid condition or the need for a fluid change. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Fluid > Component Information > Description and Operation > Power Steering Fluid > Page 11192 Power Steering Fluid: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION NOTE: It is normal that some pressure will build up inside the reservoir, especially, with a warm vehicle. A slight popping noise upon removal of the cap is normal. The fluid level should read between the ADD and the FULL COLD marks. When the fluid is hot it should read between ADD and FULL HOT marks. Only add fluid when the vehicle is cold. The recommended fluid for the power steering system is Mopar(R) ATF +4. Mopar(R) ATF+4, when new is red in color. The ATF+4 is dyed red so it can be identified from other fluids used in the vehicle such as engine oil or antifreeze. The red color is not permanent and is not an indicator of fluid condition, As the vehicle is driven, the ATF+4 will begin to look darker in color and may eventually become brown. THIS IS NORMAL. ATF+4 also has a unique odor that may change with age. Consequently, odor and color cannot be used to indicate the fluid condition or the need for a fluid change. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Fluid > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 11193 Power Steering Fluid: Testing and Inspection POWER STEERING FLUID LEVEL CHECKING WARNING: FLUID LEVEL SHOULD BE CHECKED WITH THE ENGINE OFF TO PREVENT PERSONAL INJURY FROM MOVING PARTS. CAUTION: MOPAR(R) ATF+4 is to be used in the power steering system. No other power steering or automatic transmission fluid is to be used in the system. Damage may result to the power steering pump and system if any other fluid is used, and do not overfill. The power steering fluid level can be viewed on the dipstick attached to the filler cap. There are two ranges listed on the dipstick, COLD and HOT. Before opening power steering system, wipe the reservoir filler cap free of dirt and debris. Remove the cap and check the fluid level on its dipstick. When the fluid is at normal ambient temperature, approximately 21°C to 27°C (70°F to 80°F), the fluid level should read between the minimum and maximum area of the cold range. When the fluid is hot, fluid level is allowed to read up to the highest end of the HOT range. Only add fluid when the vehicle is cold. Use only Mopar(R) ATF+4. Do not overfill the power steering system. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Fluid Cooler > Component Information > Service and Repair > Power Steering Fluid Cooler - Removal Power Steering Fluid Cooler: Service and Repair Power Steering Fluid Cooler - Removal REMOVAL 1. Drain and siphon the power steering fluid. 2. Disconnect the return and supply hoses connected to the power steering fluid cooler. 3. Remove the mounting bracket bolts (2) securing the fluid cooler (1) to the brace. (V6&V8;) 4. Remove the mounting bracket bolts (2) one on each side of the cooler (1) securing the fluid cooler (1) to the brace. (Diesel engine) 5. Remove the fluid cooler (1) from the vehicle. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Fluid Cooler > Component Information > Service and Repair > Power Steering Fluid Cooler - Removal > Page 11198 Power Steering Fluid Cooler: Service and Repair Power Steering Fluid Cooler - Installation INSTALLATION 1. Install the fluid cooler (1) to the vehicle. 2. Install the mounting bracket bolts (2) securing the fluid cooler (1) to the brace (V6&V8;). 3. Install the mounting bracket bolts (2) securing the fluid cooler (1) to the brace (Diesel Engine). 4. Reclamp the return and supply hoses (3) to the power steering fluid cooler (1). 5. Refill the power steering fluid See: Power Steering Bleeding/Service and Repair . Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Fluid Reservoir > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Power Steering Fluid Reservoir: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL 1. Drain and siphon the power steering fluid from the reservoir. 2. Remove the serpentine belt. 3. Remove the power steering pump See: Power Steering Pump/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Power Steering Pump - Removal . 4. Remove the reservoir mounting bolts (2). 5. Remove the reservoir (1). 6. Remove the rear bracket to the pump mounting bolts (if equipped). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Fluid Reservoir > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 11203 Power Steering Fluid Reservoir: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION 1. Install the reservoir bracket to the pump housing (if equipped). Do not reuse the o-rings (install new o-rings). Tighten bolts to 7 Nm (62 in. lbs.). NOTE: Ensure the reservoir (1) is fully seated onto the pump (3). 2. Install the reservoir (1) to the bracket/pump body (3). 3. Install the reservoir mounting bolts (2). Tighten bolts to 13 Nm (120 in. lbs.). 4. Install the power steering pump (3) See: Power Steering Pump/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Power Steering Pump - Installation . 5. Install the serpentine drive belt, See: Engine, Cooling and Exhaust/Engine/Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories/Drive Belt/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Accessory Drive Belt - Installation . 6. Fill the power steering pump, See: Power Steering Bleeding/Service and Repair . Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Line/Hose > Component Information > Service and Repair > Power Steering Hoses - Removal Power Steering Line/Hose: Service and Repair Power Steering Hoses - Removal I.F.S. - Return Hose - Gear To Cooler RETURN HOSE - GEAR TO COOLER 1. Drain and siphon the power steering system. 2. Raise and support the vehicle. 3. Disconnect the return hose at the cooler. 4. Disconnect the return hose (1) at the gear. 5. Remove the return hose from the routing clamp at the fan shroud and then remove from the vehicle. I.F.S. - Pressure Hose PRESSURE HOSE 1. Drain and siphon the power steering system. 2. Raise and support the vehicle. 3. Disconnect the pressure hose at the pump. 4. Disconnect the pressure hose (2) at the gear. 5. Remove the pressure hose from the vehicle. I.F.S. - Return Hose - Reservoir To Cooler RETURN HOSE - RESERVOIR TO COOLER 1. Drain and siphon the power steering system. 2. Disconnect the return hose at the reservoir. 3. Raise and support the vehicle. 4. Remove the return hose from the routing clamp at the fan shroud. 5. Disconnect the return hose at the cooler. 6. Remove the hose from the vehicle. Link/Coil - Return Hose - Gear To Cooler RETURN HOSE - GEAR TO COOLER Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Line/Hose > Component Information > Service and Repair > Power Steering Hoses - Removal > Page 11208 1. Drain and siphon the power steering system. 2. Raise and support the vehicle. 3. Disconnect the return hose at the cooler. 4. Disconnect the return hose (2) at the gear. 5. Remove the return hose from the routing clamp at the fan shroud and then remove from the vehicle. Link/Coil - Pressure Hose PRESSURE HOSE 1. Drain and siphon the power steering system. 2. Raise and support the vehicle. 3. Disconnect the pressure hose at the pump. 4. Disconnect the pressure hose (2) at the gear (4). 5. Remove the pressure hose from the vehicle. Link/Coil - Return Hose - Reservoir To Cooler RETURN HOSE - RESERVOIR TO COOLER 1. Drain and siphon the power steering system. 2. Disconnect the return hose at the reservoir. 3. Raise and support the vehicle. 4. Remove the return hose from the routing clamp at the fan shroud. 5. Disconnect the return hose at the cooler. 6. Remove the hose from the vehicle. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Line/Hose > Component Information > Service and Repair > Power Steering Hoses - Removal > Page 11209 Power Steering Line/Hose: Service and Repair Power Steering Hoses - Installation I.F.S. - Return Hose - Gear To Cooler RETURN HOSE - GEAR TO COOLER 1. Install the return hose to the vehicle. 2. Reconnect the return hose at the cooler. 3. Reconnect the return hose (1) at the gear. Tighten the hose to 50 Nm (37 ft. lbs.). 4. Reattach the hose to the routing clip at the fan shroud. 5. Remove the support and lower the vehicle. 6. Refill the power steering system. See: Power Steering Bleeding/Service and Repair I.F.S. - Pressure Hose PRESSURE HOSE NOTE: Be sure to align the pressure hose so it does not contact the fan shroud or the frame rail. 1. Install the pressure hose to the vehicle. 2. Reconnect the pressure hose (2) at the gear. Tighten the hose to 32 Nm (23 ft. lbs.). 3. Reconnect the pressure hose at the pump. Tighten the hose to 31 Nm (23 ft. lbs.). 4. Remove the support and lower the vehicle. 5. Refill the power steering system. See: Power Steering Bleeding/Service and Repair I.F.S. - Return Hose - Reservoir To Cooler RETURN HOSE - RESERVOIR TO COOLER 1. Install the return hose to the vehicle. 2. Reconnect the return hose at the cooler. 3. Reattach the hose to the routing clip at the fan shroud. 4. Remove the support and lower the vehicle. 5. Reconnect the return hose at the reservoir. 6. Refill the power steering system. See: Power Steering Bleeding/Service and Repair Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Line/Hose > Component Information > Service and Repair > Power Steering Hoses - Removal > Page 11210 Link/Coil - Return Hose - Gear To Cooler RETURN HOSE - GEAR TO COOLER 1. Install the return hose to the vehicle. 2. Reconnect the return hose at the cooler. 3. Reconnect the return hose (2) at the gear. Tighten the hose to 51 Nm (38 ft. lbs.). 4. Reattach the hose to the routing clip at the fan shroud. 5. Remove the support and lower the vehicle. 6. Refill the power steering system. See: Power Steering Bleeding/Service and Repair Link/Coil - Pressure Hose PRESSURE HOSE NOTE: Be sure to align the pressure hose so it does not contact the fan shroud or the frame rail. 1. Install the pressure hose to the vehicle. 2. Reconnect the pressure hose (2) at the gear (4). Tighten the hose to 32 Nm (23 ft. lbs.). 3. Reconnect the pressure hose at the pump. Tighten the hose to 36 Nm (27 ft. lbs.). 4. Remove the support and lower the vehicle. 5. Refill the power steering system. See: Power Steering Bleeding/Service and Repair Link/Coil - Return Hose - Reservoir To Cooler RETURN HOSE - RESERVOIR TO COOLER 1. Install the return hose to the vehicle. 2. Reconnect the return hose at the cooler. 3. Reattach the hose to the routing clip at the fan shroud. 4. Remove the support and lower the vehicle. 5. Reconnect the return hose at the reservoir. 6. Refill the power steering system. See: Power Steering Bleeding/Service and Repair Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Pump > Component Information > Specifications Power Steering Pump: Specifications TORQUE Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Pump > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Power Steering Pump: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION CAUTION: MOPAR(R) ATF+4 is to be used in the power steering system. No other power steering or automatic transmission fluid is to be used in the system. Damage may result to the power steering pump and system if any other fluid is used, and do not overfill. The pump is connected to the steering gear via the pressure hose and the return hose. The pump shaft has a pressed-on pulley that is belt driven by the crankshaft pulley. All vehicles are equipped with a power steering fluid cooler. NOTE: Power steering pumps are not interchangeable with pumps installed on other vehicles. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Pump > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 11216 Power Steering Pump: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION Hydraulic pressure is provided for the power steering gear by the belt driven power steering pump (2). The power steering pumps are constant flow rate and displacement, vane-type pumps. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Pump > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Diagnosis and Testing - Pump Leakage Power Steering Pump: Testing and Inspection Diagnosis and Testing - Pump Leakage PUMP LEAKAGE The pump is serviced as an assembly and should not be disassembled. The plastic pump reservoir and the reservoir o-rings can be replaced. Check for leaks in the following areas: - Pump shaft seal behind the pulley - Pump to reservoir O-ring - Reservoir cap - Pressure and return lines - Flow control valve fitting Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Pump > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Diagnosis and Testing - Pump Leakage > Page 11219 Power Steering Pump: Testing and Inspection Diagnosis and Testing - Power Steering Pump and Hoses POWER STEERING PUMP AND HOSES NOTE: This information is designed to be used in conjunction with the diagnostic charts at the beginning of the Steering section. See: Testing and Inspection CHECKING FOR WEAR OF POWER STEERING PUMP INTERNAL COMPONENTS 1. Place gear selector in PARK (or NEUTRAL) with wheels chalked. 2. With the engine idling, have a helper turn the steering wheel. 3. Using an electronic listening tool, determine if noise is coming from the pump. 4. Increase the engine speed and have a helper turn the steering wheel. Does the noise change with load? 5. Replace the power steering pump if excessive noise is present. See: Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Power Steering Pump Removal CHECKING FOR POWER STEERING HOSES TOUCHING BODY OR FRAME OF VEHICLE Check hoses and hose tubes as following: - Inspect hoses and hose tubes for witness marks. If witness marks are present, adjust hose(s) to the proper position by loosening, repositioning and tightening attachments to the specified torque See: Specifications . Do not bend tubing to adjust. Replace the hose assembly if damaged. - Check fastener torque of hose mounting brackets and tube nuts. See: Specifications - Have a helper bump the steering gear off of the stops to induce pressure fluctuations which may move the hose. If hose contact is made, adjust hose(s) to the proper position by loosening, repositioning and tightening attachments to the specified torque See: Specifications . Do not bend tubing to adjust. Replace the hose assembly if damaged. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Pump > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures Power Steering Pump: Procedures FLUSHING POWER STEERING SYSTEM Flushing is required when the power steering/hydraulic booster system fluid has become contaminated. Contaminated fluid in the steering/booster system can cause seal deterioration and affect steering gear/booster spool valve operation. NOTE: The engine should not be run so that all of the fluid is drained from the system. The pump should never be run without fluid. 1. Raise the front end of the vehicle off the ground until the wheels are free to turn. 2. Remove the return line from the pump. NOTE: If vehicle is equipped with a hydraulic booster remove both return lines from the pump. 3. Plug the return line port/ports at the pump. 4. Position the return line/lines into a large container to catch the fluid. 5. While an assistant is filling the pump reservoir start the engine. 6. With the engine running at idle turn the wheel back and forth. NOTE: Do not contact or hold the wheel against the steering stops. 7. Run a quart of fluid through the system then stop the engine and install the return line/lines. 8. Fill the system with fluid and perform Steering Pump Initial Operation, See: Power Steering Bleeding/Service and Repair . 9. Start the engine and run it for fifteen minutes then stop the engine. 10. Remove the return line/lines from the pump and plug the pump port/ports. 11. Pour fresh fluid into the reservoir and check the draining fluid for contamination. If the fluid is still contaminated, then flush the system again. 12. Install the return line/lines and perform Steering Pump Initial Operation, See: Power Steering Bleeding/Service and Repair . Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Pump > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 11222 Power Steering Pump: Removal and Replacement Power Steering Pump - Removal GAS ENGINE 1. Drain and siphon the power steering fluid from the reservoir. 2. Remove the serpentine belt. CAUTION: Do not remove the fitting on the pump that the high pressure hose screws into. The fitting may come loose unless it is backed up using another wrench. If the fitting does come loose, it must be retightened before continuing. (57 - 67 Nm, 40 - 50 lb.ft.). If this fitting comes out of the pump body, the internal spring and valve parts will fall out of the pump and they cannot be reinstalled properly. If this occurs the pump needs to be replaced with a new pump. 3. Disconnect the return hose (3). 4. Disconnect the pressure hose (4). 5. Access to remove the three bolts securing the pump to the cylinder head can be gained thru the pulley holes (1). Power Steering Pump - Installation GAS ENGINE 1. Align the pump with the mounting holes in the left cylinder head. 2. Install 3 pump mounting bolts through the pulley access holes (1). Tighten the bolts to 28 Nm (21 ft. lbs.). 3. Reconnect the pressure line (4) and return hose (3) to the pump and reservoir (2). Tighten the pressure line to 31 Nm (23 ft. lbs.). 4. Install the serpentine drive belt, See: Engine, Cooling and Exhaust/Engine/Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories/Drive Belt/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Accessory Drive Belt - Installation . 5. Fill the power steering pump, See: Power Steering Bleeding/Service and Repair . Power Steering Pump Pulley - Removal REMOVAL Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Pump > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 11223 CAUTION: Do not reuse the old power steering pump pulley it is not intended for reuse. A new pulley must be installed if removed. 1. Remove the power steering pump assembly (1), See: Power Steering Pump - Removal . 2. Remove the pulley (2) from the pump using (OTC(R) 7185) power steering pulley removal tool or equivalent (3). Power Steering Pump Pulley - Installation INSTALLATION CAUTION: Do not reuse the old power steering pump pulley it is not intended for reuse. A new pulley must be installed if removed. 1. Replace the pulley (2) if it's bent, cracked, or loose. 2. Install the pulley (2) on the pump (1) using (OTC(R) 7771) power steering pulley installation tool or equivalent (3) making sure it is flush with the end of the shaft. Ensure the tool and pulley remain aligned with the pump shaft. 3. Install the power steering pump assembly, See: Power Steering Pump - Installation . 4. Run engine until warm (5 min.) and note any belt chirp. If chirp exists, move pulley outward approximately 0.5 mm (0.020 in.). If noise increases, press on 1.0 mm (0.040 in.). Be careful that pulley does not contact mounting bolts. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Relays and Modules - Steering > Steering Mounted Controls Communication Module > Component Information > Locations Steering Mounted Controls Communication Module: Locations Component ID: 214 Component : MODULE-STEERING CONTROL Connector: Name : MODULE-STEERING CONTROL C1 Color : WHITE # of pins : 6 Pin Circuit Description 1 Z909 20BK GROUND 2 X20 20GY/WT RADIO CONTROL MUX 3 V38 20VT/OR S/C SWITCH NO. 2 SIGNAL 4 V37 20VT S/C SWITCH NO. 1 SIGNAL 5 V937 20VT/BR S/C SWITCH RETURN 6 X3 20DG/VT HORN SWITCH SENSE Component Location - 47 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Relays and Modules - Steering > Steering Mounted Controls Communication Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 11228 Component Location - 42 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Relays and Modules - Steering > Steering Mounted Controls Communication Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 11229 Component Location - 43 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Relays and Modules - Steering > Steering Mounted Controls Communication Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 11230 Connector: Name : MODULE-STEERING CONTROL C2 Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (PREMIUM) Pin Circuit Description 1 G902 22WT/BR SWITCH MUX RETURN Pin Circuit Description 1 G902 22WT/BR SWITCH MUX RETURN Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Relays and Modules - Steering > Steering Mounted Controls Communication Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 11231 2 X20 22GY/WT RADIO CONTROL MUX 2 X20 22GY/WT RADIO CONTROL MUX Component Location - 47 Component Location - 42 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Relays and Modules - Steering > Steering Mounted Controls Communication Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 11232 Component Location - 43 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Relays and Modules - Steering > Steering Mounted Controls Communication Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 11233 Connector: Name : MODULE-STEERING CONTROL C3 Color : # of pins : 4 Pin Circuit Description 1 X3 20DG/VT HORN SWITCH SENSE 2 V937 22DB/DG S/C SWITCH RETURN 2 K900 22DB/DG SENSOR GROUND 3 V37 22VT S/C SWITCH NO. 1 SIGNAL 4 V38 22VT/OR S/C SWITCH NO. 2 SIGNAL Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Relays and Modules - Steering > Steering Mounted Controls Communication Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 11234 Component Location - 47 Component Location - 42 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Relays and Modules - Steering > Steering Mounted Controls Communication Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 11235 Component Location - 43 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Relays and Modules - Steering > Steering Mounted Controls Communication Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 11236 Connector: Name : MODULE-STEERING CONTROL C4 Color : YELLOW # of pins : 4 Pin Circuit Description 1 R61 20LG/VT DRIVER SQUIB 2 LINE 1 2 R63 20LG/WT DRIVER SQUIB 2 LINE 2 3 R43 20LG/BR DRIVER SQUIB 1 LINE 1 4 R45 20LG/OR DRIVER SQUIB 1 LINE 2 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Relays and Modules - Steering > Steering Mounted Controls Communication Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 11237 Component Location - 47 Component Location - 42 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Relays and Modules - Steering > Steering Mounted Controls Communication Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 11238 Component Location - 43 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Relays and Modules - Steering > Steering Mounted Controls Communication Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 11239 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Relays and Modules - Steering > Steering Mounted Controls Communication Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 11240 Steering Mounted Controls Communication Module: Diagrams Component ID: 214 Component : MODULE-STEERING CONTROL Connector: Name : MODULE-STEERING CONTROL C1 Color : WHITE # of pins : 6 Pin Circuit Description 1 Z909 20BK GROUND 2 X20 20GY/WT RADIO CONTROL MUX 3 V38 20VT/OR S/C SWITCH NO. 2 SIGNAL 4 V37 20VT S/C SWITCH NO. 1 SIGNAL 5 V937 20VT/BR S/C SWITCH RETURN 6 X3 20DG/VT HORN SWITCH SENSE Component Location - 47 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Relays and Modules - Steering > Steering Mounted Controls Communication Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 11241 Component Location - 42 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Relays and Modules - Steering > Steering Mounted Controls Communication Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 11242 Component Location - 43 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Relays and Modules - Steering > Steering Mounted Controls Communication Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 11243 Connector: Name : MODULE-STEERING CONTROL C2 Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (PREMIUM) Pin Circuit Description 1 G902 22WT/BR SWITCH MUX RETURN Pin Circuit Description 1 G902 22WT/BR SWITCH MUX RETURN Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Relays and Modules - Steering > Steering Mounted Controls Communication Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 11244 2 X20 22GY/WT RADIO CONTROL MUX 2 X20 22GY/WT RADIO CONTROL MUX Component Location - 47 Component Location - 42 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Relays and Modules - Steering > Steering Mounted Controls Communication Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 11245 Component Location - 43 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Relays and Modules - Steering > Steering Mounted Controls Communication Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 11246 Connector: Name : MODULE-STEERING CONTROL C3 Color : # of pins : 4 Pin Circuit Description 1 X3 20DG/VT HORN SWITCH SENSE 2 V937 22DB/DG S/C SWITCH RETURN 2 K900 22DB/DG SENSOR GROUND 3 V37 22VT S/C SWITCH NO. 1 SIGNAL 4 V38 22VT/OR S/C SWITCH NO. 2 SIGNAL Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Relays and Modules - Steering > Steering Mounted Controls Communication Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 11247 Component Location - 47 Component Location - 42 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Relays and Modules - Steering > Steering Mounted Controls Communication Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 11248 Component Location - 43 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Relays and Modules - Steering > Steering Mounted Controls Communication Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 11249 Connector: Name : MODULE-STEERING CONTROL C4 Color : YELLOW # of pins : 4 Pin Circuit Description 1 R61 20LG/VT DRIVER SQUIB 2 LINE 1 2 R63 20LG/WT DRIVER SQUIB 2 LINE 2 3 R43 20LG/BR DRIVER SQUIB 1 LINE 1 4 R45 20LG/OR DRIVER SQUIB 1 LINE 2 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Relays and Modules - Steering > Steering Mounted Controls Communication Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 11250 Component Location - 47 Component Location - 42 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Relays and Modules - Steering > Steering Mounted Controls Communication Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 11251 Component Location - 43 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Relays and Modules - Steering > Steering Mounted Controls Communication Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 11252 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Column > Steering Column Cover > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Steering Column Cover: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL 1. Remove the park brake release handle. See: Brakes and Traction Control/Parking Brake System/Parking Brake Lever/Service and Repair/Removal 2. Remove the two screws that secure the bottom of the steering column opening cover (3) to the instrument panel. 3. Using a trim stick C-4755 or equivalent, release the two retainer clips that secure the top of the steering column opening cover (2) to the instrument panel and remove the cover. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Column > Steering Column Cover > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 11258 4. Remove the screws and remove the knee blocker. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Column > Steering Column Cover > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 11259 Steering Column Cover: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION 1. Install the knee blocker (2) and install the screws (1). 2. Position the steering column opening cover (2) to the instrument panel and fully engage the two upper retainer clips to the instrument panel. 3. Install the two screws that secure the steering column opening cover to the instrument panel. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Column > Steering Column Cover > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 11260 4. Install the park brake release handle. See: Brakes and Traction Control/Parking Brake System/Parking Brake Lever/Service and Repair/Installation Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Column > Steering Column Lock > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Steering Column Lock: > 08-007-08A > Jul > 08 > Antitheft System - Engine No Crank/No Start Condition Steering Column Lock: Customer Interest Antitheft System - Engine No Crank/No Start Condition NUMBER: 08-007-08 REV. A GROUP: Electrical DATE: July 04,2008 THIS BULLETIN SUPERSEDES TECHNICAL SERVICE BULLETIN 08-007-08, DATED MARCH 04, 2008. THIS IS A COMPLETE REVISION AND NO ASTERISKS HAVE BEEN USED TO HIGHLIGHT REVISIONS. DO NOT ORDER PART NUMBER 05026070AP UNTIL JULY 21, 2008. ALL OTHER PART NUMBERS ARE AVAILABLE NOW. SUBJECT: No Engine Crank Or No Engine Start Due To Electronic Lockup Of The WCM / SKREEM OVERVIEW: This bulletin involves the replacement of the Wireless Control Module (WCM), and if equipped, the replacement of the Electric Steering Column Lock (ELV). The WCM is also referred to as the Sentry Key Remote Entry Module (SKREEM). MODELS: 2007 - 2008 (DR/DH/D1/DC/DM) Ram Truck (1500/2500/3500/4500/5500) 2007 - 2008 (JK) Wrangler 2007 - 2008 (J1) Sebring (China) 2007 - 2008 (JS) Avenger/Sebring 2007 - 2008 (KA) Nitro 2008 (KK) Liberty/Cherokee 2007 - 2008 (MK) Compass/Patriot 2007 - 2008 (PM) Caliber 2006 - 2008 (PT) Chrysler PT Cruiser NOTE: This bulletin applies to vehicles built on or before May 05, 2008 (MDH 0505XX). SYMPTOM/CONDITION: The customer will experience a no engine crank AND a no engine start condition. Also, the remote keyless entry (RKE) system will not operate. This condition may be due to an electrostatic discharge (ESD) from the ignition key into the Wireless Control Module (WCM), causing the WCM to electronically lockup. This condition may occur more frequently in dry and/or cold weather conditions where a sufficient electrostatic charge is more easily produced. This condition is corrected by the replacement of the WCM. DIAGNOSIS: 1. With the condition present (i.e. the vehicle in the no crank / no start condition), connect the StarSCAN(R) scan tool to the vehicle. 2. Turn the ignition switch to the "ON position, and power up the StarSCAN(R). 3. If the WCM is electronically locked up, the StarSCAN(R) will display the WCM as being "off bus". 4. If the no crank / no start condition is present, and the WCM is "off bus", then reset the WCM by temporarily removing the IOD fuse (with the key out of the ignition switch), wait for 10 seconds and then reinstall the IOD fuse. 5. With the IOD fuse reset having been performed, verify that the vehicle will now crank, start, and run. 6. If the condition is temporarily corrected by performing the above steps, and if the part number of the WCM is earlier than the part number of the WCM listed in the part reference table in the Service Bulletin Parts Required Section below, then perform the Repair Procedure. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Column > Steering Column Lock > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Steering Column Lock: > 08-007-08A > Jul > 08 > Antitheft System - Engine No Crank/No Start Condition > Page 11269 PARTS REQUIRED: NOTE: The part numbers listed in the following part reference table are to be used as A GUIDE to help determine if the WCM, that is currently in the vehicle, may require replacement. If it is determined that the WCM requires replacement, then ALWAYS REFER TO THE PARTS MANUAL to determine the correct WCM for the specific vehicle in question. In some earlier model years, the WCM may rule (supersede) to one of the part numbers listed in the table. ALWAYS REFER TO THE PARTS MANUAL (not the part reference table) to determine the correct part number ruling (supercedence / substitution). MAKE CERTAIN THAT THE CORRECT WCM IS ORDERED THE FIRST TIME FOR THE SPECIFIC VEHICLE IN QUESTION. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Column > Steering Column Lock > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Steering Column Lock: > 08-007-08A > Jul > 08 > Antitheft System - Engine No Crank/No Start Condition > Page 11270 REPAIR PROCEDURE: NOTE: If the vehicle (a JS model vehicle in certain International markets) is equipped with an Electric Steering Column Lock (ELV), then the WCM and the ELV must be replaced. Replace the WCM and then the ELV. Next program the WCM and at least one (1) ignition key BEFORE programming the ELV. IMPORTANT: Not following this repair process correctly will cause the new ELV to fail. NOTE: Insert the ignition key into the ignition lock cylinder. This will move the shaft lock module locking bolt to the unlocked position. LEAVE the key in the lock cylinder while the shaft lock module is being removed. 1. If vehicle is equipped with a Steering Shaft Lock Module (JS - Avenger I Stratus - some International Markets), then the Shaft Lock Module will require replacement. From the Service Info tab select: 8 - Electrical > Vehicle Theft Security - Security Information > Module, Shaft Lock > Removal and Installation. NOTE: The shaft lock module cannot be removed from the steering column while the locking bolt is in the locked position without irreversibly damaging the column. Before attempting service, the ignition key must have been inserted into the ignition lock cylinder. Then rotate the steering wheel from side to side. If the steering wheel can be rotated, the locking bolt is in the unlocked position. Leave the key in the ignition lock cylinder until shaft lock module removal has been completed. If the steering wheel cannot be rotated, test and repair the wiring circuits between the module and the ignition switch as required. If no problem is found in these circuits, the module has failed with the locking bolt in the locked position and both the module and the steering column must be replaced with new units. 2. Replace the WCM/SKREEM. Refer to TechCONNECT for detailed service information. From the Service Info tab select: 8 - Electrical > Vehicle Theft Security - Service Information > Module, Sentry Key Remote Entry > Removal and Installation. NOTE: Obtain the vehicle PIN number prior to programming WCM/SKREEM or ELV. NOTE: If during the following steps the PIN number is properly entered but is rejected, then reenter the PIN number again until it is accepted. 3. After both the WCM/SKREEM and the ELV (if equipped) have been replaced, Program the WCM/SKREEM as follows: a. Turn the ignition key to the ON position, (Engine Off) b. Connect the scan tool (StarSCAN(R)) to the data link connector and turn the ignition to the RUN position, (engine off). c. Select "ECU View." d. Scroll down and select "WCM" in the list of modules. e. Select "Misc. Functions." f. Scroll to "WCM Replaced." g. Press "Start". h. Press "Next". i. Select "Show Keyboard". j. Enter the vehicle PIN number. k. Select "Next". l. Verify PIN is correct. m. Select "Next". n. Follow on-screen prompts to complete WCM function programing for Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPM) and so on. 0. Turn the ignition key to the OFF position. Wait 30 seconds. p. Turn the ignition key to the ON position, (Engine Off) Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Column > Steering Column Lock > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Steering Column Lock: > 08-007-08A > Jul > 08 > Antitheft System - Engine No Crank/No Start Condition > Page 11271 q. Select "ECU View". r. Scroll down and select "WCM" in the list of modules. s. Select "Misc. Functions." t. Select "Program Ign. Keys" and follow on-screen prompts. u. Select "Complete". v. Verify ignition key will start vehicle and the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) functions operate. CAUTION: If the vehicle is equipped with a Shaft Lock Module (used in some International Markets on JS model vehicles), then at least one (1 ignition key must have been programmed to the new WCM BEFORE the new Shaft Lock Module is "married" to the new WCM. 4. Is the vehicle equipped with Steering Shaft Lock Module (ELV)? a. Yes >> Proceed to Step # 5. b. No >>Repair is complete. 5. Program the ELV as follows; a. Select "ECU View". b. Scroll down and select "WCM" in the list of modules. c. Select "Misc. Functions". d. Scroll to "ELV Replaced." e. Press "Start". f. When complete, verify steering shaft lock mechanism is operating. Remove and insert key from the ignition lock cylinder and listen for solenoid "click at lower end of column. POLICY: Reimbursable within the provisions of the warranty. TIME ALLOWANCE: Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Column > Steering Column Lock > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Steering Column Lock: > 08-007-08A > Jul > 08 > Antitheft System - Engine No Crank/No Start Condition > Page 11272 FAILURE CODE: Disclaimer: This bulletin is supplied as technical information only and is not an authorization for repair. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Column > Steering Column Lock > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Steering Column Lock: > 08-007-08A > Jul > 08 > Antitheft System - Engine No Crank/No Start Condition Steering Column Lock: All Technical Service Bulletins Antitheft System - Engine No Crank/No Start Condition NUMBER: 08-007-08 REV. A GROUP: Electrical DATE: July 04,2008 THIS BULLETIN SUPERSEDES TECHNICAL SERVICE BULLETIN 08-007-08, DATED MARCH 04, 2008. THIS IS A COMPLETE REVISION AND NO ASTERISKS HAVE BEEN USED TO HIGHLIGHT REVISIONS. DO NOT ORDER PART NUMBER 05026070AP UNTIL JULY 21, 2008. ALL OTHER PART NUMBERS ARE AVAILABLE NOW. SUBJECT: No Engine Crank Or No Engine Start Due To Electronic Lockup Of The WCM / SKREEM OVERVIEW: This bulletin involves the replacement of the Wireless Control Module (WCM), and if equipped, the replacement of the Electric Steering Column Lock (ELV). The WCM is also referred to as the Sentry Key Remote Entry Module (SKREEM). MODELS: 2007 - 2008 (DR/DH/D1/DC/DM) Ram Truck (1500/2500/3500/4500/5500) 2007 - 2008 (JK) Wrangler 2007 - 2008 (J1) Sebring (China) 2007 - 2008 (JS) Avenger/Sebring 2007 - 2008 (KA) Nitro 2008 (KK) Liberty/Cherokee 2007 - 2008 (MK) Compass/Patriot 2007 - 2008 (PM) Caliber 2006 - 2008 (PT) Chrysler PT Cruiser NOTE: This bulletin applies to vehicles built on or before May 05, 2008 (MDH 0505XX). SYMPTOM/CONDITION: The customer will experience a no engine crank AND a no engine start condition. Also, the remote keyless entry (RKE) system will not operate. This condition may be due to an electrostatic discharge (ESD) from the ignition key into the Wireless Control Module (WCM), causing the WCM to electronically lockup. This condition may occur more frequently in dry and/or cold weather conditions where a sufficient electrostatic charge is more easily produced. This condition is corrected by the replacement of the WCM. DIAGNOSIS: 1. With the condition present (i.e. the vehicle in the no crank / no start condition), connect the StarSCAN(R) scan tool to the vehicle. 2. Turn the ignition switch to the "ON position, and power up the StarSCAN(R). 3. If the WCM is electronically locked up, the StarSCAN(R) will display the WCM as being "off bus". 4. If the no crank / no start condition is present, and the WCM is "off bus", then reset the WCM by temporarily removing the IOD fuse (with the key out of the ignition switch), wait for 10 seconds and then reinstall the IOD fuse. 5. With the IOD fuse reset having been performed, verify that the vehicle will now crank, start, and run. 6. If the condition is temporarily corrected by performing the above steps, and if the part number of the WCM is earlier than the part number of the WCM listed in the part reference table in the Service Bulletin Parts Required Section below, then perform the Repair Procedure. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Column > Steering Column Lock > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Steering Column Lock: > 08-007-08A > Jul > 08 > Antitheft System - Engine No Crank/No Start Condition > Page 11278 PARTS REQUIRED: NOTE: The part numbers listed in the following part reference table are to be used as A GUIDE to help determine if the WCM, that is currently in the vehicle, may require replacement. If it is determined that the WCM requires replacement, then ALWAYS REFER TO THE PARTS MANUAL to determine the correct WCM for the specific vehicle in question. In some earlier model years, the WCM may rule (supersede) to one of the part numbers listed in the table. ALWAYS REFER TO THE PARTS MANUAL (not the part reference table) to determine the correct part number ruling (supercedence / substitution). MAKE CERTAIN THAT THE CORRECT WCM IS ORDERED THE FIRST TIME FOR THE SPECIFIC VEHICLE IN QUESTION. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Column > Steering Column Lock > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Steering Column Lock: > 08-007-08A > Jul > 08 > Antitheft System - Engine No Crank/No Start Condition > Page 11279 REPAIR PROCEDURE: NOTE: If the vehicle (a JS model vehicle in certain International markets) is equipped with an Electric Steering Column Lock (ELV), then the WCM and the ELV must be replaced. Replace the WCM and then the ELV. Next program the WCM and at least one (1) ignition key BEFORE programming the ELV. IMPORTANT: Not following this repair process correctly will cause the new ELV to fail. NOTE: Insert the ignition key into the ignition lock cylinder. This will move the shaft lock module locking bolt to the unlocked position. LEAVE the key in the lock cylinder while the shaft lock module is being removed. 1. If vehicle is equipped with a Steering Shaft Lock Module (JS - Avenger I Stratus - some International Markets), then the Shaft Lock Module will require replacement. From the Service Info tab select: 8 - Electrical > Vehicle Theft Security - Security Information > Module, Shaft Lock > Removal and Installation. NOTE: The shaft lock module cannot be removed from the steering column while the locking bolt is in the locked position without irreversibly damaging the column. Before attempting service, the ignition key must have been inserted into the ignition lock cylinder. Then rotate the steering wheel from side to side. If the steering wheel can be rotated, the locking bolt is in the unlocked position. Leave the key in the ignition lock cylinder until shaft lock module removal has been completed. If the steering wheel cannot be rotated, test and repair the wiring circuits between the module and the ignition switch as required. If no problem is found in these circuits, the module has failed with the locking bolt in the locked position and both the module and the steering column must be replaced with new units. 2. Replace the WCM/SKREEM. Refer to TechCONNECT for detailed service information. From the Service Info tab select: 8 - Electrical > Vehicle Theft Security - Service Information > Module, Sentry Key Remote Entry > Removal and Installation. NOTE: Obtain the vehicle PIN number prior to programming WCM/SKREEM or ELV. NOTE: If during the following steps the PIN number is properly entered but is rejected, then reenter the PIN number again until it is accepted. 3. After both the WCM/SKREEM and the ELV (if equipped) have been replaced, Program the WCM/SKREEM as follows: a. Turn the ignition key to the ON position, (Engine Off) b. Connect the scan tool (StarSCAN(R)) to the data link connector and turn the ignition to the RUN position, (engine off). c. Select "ECU View." d. Scroll down and select "WCM" in the list of modules. e. Select "Misc. Functions." f. Scroll to "WCM Replaced." g. Press "Start". h. Press "Next". i. Select "Show Keyboard". j. Enter the vehicle PIN number. k. Select "Next". l. Verify PIN is correct. m. Select "Next". n. Follow on-screen prompts to complete WCM function programing for Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPM) and so on. 0. Turn the ignition key to the OFF position. Wait 30 seconds. p. Turn the ignition key to the ON position, (Engine Off) Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Column > Steering Column Lock > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Steering Column Lock: > 08-007-08A > Jul > 08 > Antitheft System - Engine No Crank/No Start Condition > Page 11280 q. Select "ECU View". r. Scroll down and select "WCM" in the list of modules. s. Select "Misc. Functions." t. Select "Program Ign. Keys" and follow on-screen prompts. u. Select "Complete". v. Verify ignition key will start vehicle and the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) functions operate. CAUTION: If the vehicle is equipped with a Shaft Lock Module (used in some International Markets on JS model vehicles), then at least one (1 ignition key must have been programmed to the new WCM BEFORE the new Shaft Lock Module is "married" to the new WCM. 4. Is the vehicle equipped with Steering Shaft Lock Module (ELV)? a. Yes >> Proceed to Step # 5. b. No >>Repair is complete. 5. Program the ELV as follows; a. Select "ECU View". b. Scroll down and select "WCM" in the list of modules. c. Select "Misc. Functions". d. Scroll to "ELV Replaced." e. Press "Start". f. When complete, verify steering shaft lock mechanism is operating. Remove and insert key from the ignition lock cylinder and listen for solenoid "click at lower end of column. POLICY: Reimbursable within the provisions of the warranty. TIME ALLOWANCE: Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Column > Steering Column Lock > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Steering Column Lock: > 08-007-08A > Jul > 08 > Antitheft System - Engine No Crank/No Start Condition > Page 11281 FAILURE CODE: Disclaimer: This bulletin is supplied as technical information only and is not an authorization for repair. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Column > Tilt Wheel Handle > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Tilt Wheel Handle: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL 1. Remove the screw (1) securing the tilt lever knob (2). 2. Remove the steering column opening cover See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Service and Repair/Steering Column Opening Cover - Removal . 3. Remove the lower shroud. NOTE: Use special care not to pry on the clockspring electrical connector when removing or installing the mounting screw located next to the clockspring. 4. Remove the two mounting screws (1) from the tilt lever knob release bracket (3). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Column > Tilt Wheel Handle > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 11286 5. Unseat the rod (2) from the release lever assembly (1). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Column > Tilt Wheel Handle > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 11287 Tilt Wheel Handle: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION 1. Route the rod (2) into the tilt lever release knob bracket (1). 2. Install the tilt lever release knob bracket (3) to the column and install the two new mounting screws (1). Tighten the two screws to 4.5 Nm (40 in. lbs.). 3. Install the lower shroud. 4. Install the steering column opening cover See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Service and Repair/Steering Column Opening Cover - Installation . Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Column > Tilt Wheel Handle > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 11288 5. Install the tilt lever knob (2) and screw (1). Tighten the screw to 4.5 Nm (40 in. lbs.). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Damper > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Steering Damper: > H46 > Jun > 09 > Recall - Steering Linkage Defects Technical Service Bulletin # H46 Date: 090609 Recall - Steering Linkage Defects Revised May 2009 Dealer Service Instructions for: Safety Recall H46 - Mopar Steering Linkage NOTE: The service procedure for this recall has been revised and additional labor operations have been added. All previous copies of Safety Recall H46 should be discarded from your files. Models 2003-2004 (DR) Dodge Truck 4x4 (2500/3500 series) 2005 (DH) Dodge Truck 4x4 (2500/3500 series) 2006-2009 (DH) Dodge Truck 4x4 (2500/3500 series or 1500 Mega Cab) 2006-2009 (D1) Dodge Truck 4x4 (3500 series) 2007-2009 (DC) Dodge Truck (3500 series cab chassis) IMPORTANT: This recall only applies to vehicles that had certain Mopar service parts steering components installed. IMPORTANT: Some of the involved vehicles may be in dealer new vehicle inventory. Federal law requires you to complete this recall service on these vehicles before retail delivery. Dealers should also consider this requirement to apply to used vehicle inventory and should perform this recall on vehicles in for service. Involved vehicles can be determined by using the VIP inquiry process. Subject During a prior service appointment, a Mopar service parts steering linkage was installed on about 19,400 of the above vehicles. The drag link inner joint may fracture under certain driving conditions. This could result in a loss of steering control and cause a crash without warning. Also, the steering damper bracket at the tie rod tube may loosen. This could allow the bracket to slide on the tube and may cause increased vehicle turning radius. Repair The steering linkage must be inspected and some steering linkage components may need to be replaced. NOTE: The initial steering linkage inspection process can be done by write up personnel in the write up area (see Step 1 of the service procedure). Vehicles found with original style steering linkage can be immediately returned to the customer. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Damper > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Steering Damper: > H46 > Jun > 09 > Recall - Steering Linkage Defects > Page 11297 Parts Information Special Tools The special tools may be required to perform this repair: Completion Reporting and Reimbursement Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Damper > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Steering Damper: > H46 > Jun > 09 > Recall - Steering Linkage Defects > Page 11298 Claims for vehicles that have been serviced must be submitted on the DealerCONNECT Claim Entry Screen located on the Service tab. Claims submitted will be used by Chrysler to record recall service completions and provide dealer payments. Use one of the labor operation numbers and time allowances shown. Add the cost of the recall parts package plus applicable dealer allowance to your claim. FOR VEHICLES INSPECTED IN THE WRITE UP AREA: Enter "INSPECT" in the part number section of your claim with a quantity of one (1). Enter $5.00 WITH NO MARK-UP for reimbursement of steering linkage inspection performed in the write up area. NOTE: See the Warranty Administration Manual, Recall Claim Processing Section, for complete recall claim processing instructions. Dealer Notification To view this notification on DealerCONNECT, select "Global Recall System" on the Service tab, then click on the description of this notification. Owner Notification and Service Scheduling All involved vehicle owners known to Chrysler are being notified of the service requirement by first class mail. They are requested to schedule appointments for this service with their dealers. A generic copy of the owner letter is included. Enclosed with each owner letter is an Owner Notification postcard to allow owners to update our records if applicable. Vehicle Lists, Global Recall System, VIP and Dealer Follow Up All involved vehicles have been entered into the DealerCONNECT Global Recall System (GRS) and Vehicle Information Plus (VIP) for dealer inquiry as needed. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Damper > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Steering Damper: > H46 > Jun > 09 > Recall - Steering Linkage Defects > Page 11299 GRS provides involved dealers with an updated VIN list of their incomplete vehicles. The owner's name, address and phone number are listed if known. Completed vehicles are removed from GRS within several days of repair claim submission. To use this system, click on the "Service" tab and then click on "Global Recall System." Your dealer's VIN list for each recall displayed can be sorted by: those vehicles that were unsold at recall launch, those with a phone number, city, zip code, or VIN sequence. Dealers must perform this repair on all unsold vehicles before retail delivery. Dealers should also use the VIN list to follow up with all owners to schedule appointments for this repair. Recall VIN lists may contain confidential, restricted owner name and address information that was obtained from the Department of Motor Vehicles of various states. Use of this information is permitted for this recall only and is strictly prohibited from all other use. Additional Information If you have any questions or need assistance in completing this action, please contact your Service and Parts District Manager. Customer Services Field Operations Chrysler Service Procedure NOTE: The initial steering linkage inspection process (Step 1 of the service procedure) can be done by write up personnel in the write up area. Vehicles found with the steering linkage shown in Figure 1 can be immediately returned to the customer. See the "Completion Reporting and Reimbursement" section of this recall for special claims processing information. 1. Look under the front of the vehicle and inspect the steering linkage at the steering damper mounting point: > If the steering damper mounts to the tie rod tube as shown in Figure 1, the steering linkage is good. Return the vehicle to the customer. No further action is required. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Damper > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Steering Damper: > H46 > Jun > 09 > Recall - Steering Linkage Defects > Page 11300 > If the steering damper mounts to the tie rod tube as shown in Figure 2, the vehicle will require further inspection and/or repair by a technician. The vehicle should be assigned to a technician and the technician should continue with Step 2 of this procedure. 2. Lift the vehicle on a hoist and inspect the steering linkage drag link for a white part number tag (Figure 3): > If the steering linkage drag link does not have a white part number tag, continue with Step 3 of this procedure. ^ If the steering linkage drag link has a white part number tag: > For 2009 model year trucks, continue with Step 9 of this procedure. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Damper > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Steering Damper: > H46 > Jun > 09 > Recall - Steering Linkage Defects > Page 11301 > For 2003 through 2008 model year trucks, continue with Step 5 of this procedure. 3. Inspect the steering damper bracket to tie rod tube mounting u-bolt nuts by putting a 13 mm box-end wrench onto the nut (Figure 4): > If a 13 mm wrench fits the steering damper bracket mounting u-bolt nuts, the bracket and fasteners must be replaced. Continue with Step 4 of this procedure. > If a 13 mm wrench does not fit the steering damper bracket mounting u-bolt nuts, the bracket does not require replacement. Continue with Step 5 of this procedure. 4. Replace the steering damper bracket and fasteners using the following procedure: a. Remove and save the steering damper-to-damper bracket mounting nut (Figure 5). b. Disconnect the steering damper eyelet from the steering damper bracket. c. Remove and discard the four steering damper bracket nuts, two u-bolts and the steering damper bracket (Figure 5). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Damper > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Steering Damper: > H46 > Jun > 09 > Recall - Steering Linkage Defects > Page 11302 d. Place the new steering damper carriage bolt through the square hole in the new steering damper bracket. e. Place the new steering damper bracket assembly onto the tie rod tube at the flat spot area on the tube and install the new u-bolts and nuts. Lightly snug the nuts to hold the steering damper bracket in position. f. Center the new steering damper bracket on the flattened area of the tie rod tube. g. Evenly tighten the four steering damper bracket u-bolt nuts to 25 ft. lbs. (34 N.m). Then tighten the four u-bolt nuts to 45 ft. lbs. (61 N.m). h. Connect the steering damper to the steering damper carriage bolt. i. Install the steering damper-to-damper bracket mounting nut and tighten to 75 ft. lbs. (100 N.m). j. Continue with Step 5 of this procedure. 5. For 2009 model year trucks, continue with Step 6 of this procedure. For 2003 through 2008 model year trucks, inspect the pitman arm part number (Figure 6): > If the part number cast into the bottom side of the pitman arm is 68039930AA the pitman arm does not require replacement. > Steering linkage with a white part number tag, continue with Step 9 of this procedure. > Linkage without a white part number tag, replace the inner drag link joint. Continue with Step 6 of this procedure. > If the part number cast into the bottom side of the pitman arm is 52106836AB, or is not legible: > Steering linkage without a white part number tag, replace the inner drag link joint and pitman arm. Continue with Step 7 of this procedure. > Steering linkage with a white part number tag, replace the pitman arm. Continue with Step 8 of this procedure. 6. Replace the inner drag link joint using the following procedure: Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Damper > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Steering Damper: > H46 > Jun > 09 > Recall - Steering Linkage Defects > Page 11303 a. Loosen both drag link adjuster sleeve clamp nuts (Figure 7). b. Remove and discard the inner drag link joint to pitman arm nut (Figure 7). c. Use Special Tool C-4150A to separate the steering inner drag link joint from the pitman arm (Figure 8). d. While counting the number of turns, unscrew the steering inner drag link joint from the drag link adjuster sleeve (right handed threads) and discard the drag link inner joint. CAUTION: Do not allow the drag link adjuster sleeve to turn while unscrewing the inner drag link joint. e. Screw in the new inner drag link joint into the drag link adjuster sleeve the same number of turns counted in step 6d. of this procedure. f. Connect the steering inner drag link joint to the pitman arm. g. Install the new steering inner drag link joint nut and tighten the nut to 100 ft. lbs. (135 N.m). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Damper > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Steering Damper: > H46 > Jun > 09 > Recall - Steering Linkage Defects > Page 11304 h. With the wheels in the straight ahead position, make sure that both inner and outer steering drag link joint caps are centered over the joint ball stud (Figure 9). CAUTION: Failure to center the drag link inner and outer joint caps over the joint ball studs before tightening the drag link adjuster sleeve clamps could cause joint failure. i. With the adjuster sleeve clamps rotated 45 degrees forward, tighten both drag link adjuster sleeve clamp nuts to 45 ft. lbs. (61 N.m). CAUTION: The drag link adjuster sleeve clamp tabs must be pointing approximately 45 degrees forward before tightening (as shown in Figure 10). Do not allow the adjuster sleeve clamp tabs to hang straight down. j. Lower the vehicle from the hoist. k. Drive the vehicle to verify that the steering wheel is straight. > If the steering wheel is turned to the left, shorten the drag link at the adjuster sleeve located on the drag link. > If the steering wheel is turned to the right, lengthen the drag link at the adjuster sleeve located on the drag link. l. Repeat Step 6k. until steering wheel is straight. m. Continue with Step 9 of this procedure. 7. Replace the inner drag link joint and pitman arm using the following procedure: Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Damper > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Steering Damper: > H46 > Jun > 09 > Recall - Steering Linkage Defects > Page 11305 a. Loosen both drag link adjuster sleeve clamp nuts (Figure 7). b. Remove and save the pitman arm retaining nut located on the steering gear output shaft. c. Install pitman arm puller (Special Tool 9615) onto the steering gear output shaft (Figure 11). CAUTION: Failure to use the correct pitman arm puller could cause damage to the steering gear. d. Tighten the pitman arm puller forcing screw until the pitman arm separates from the steering gear output shaft (Figure 11). e. While counting the number of turns, unscrew the steering inner drag link joint (with pitman arm still attached) from the drag link adjuster sleeve (right handed threads) and discard the pitman arm and inner drag link joint. CAUTION: Do not allow the drag link adjuster sleeve to turn while unscrewing the inner drag link joint. f. Screw in the new steering inner drag link joint into the drag link adjuster sleeve the same number of turns counted in step 7e. of this procedure. g. Install the new pitman arm and retaining nut onto the steering gear output shaft. Tighten the pitman arm nut to 225 ft. lbs. (300 N.m). h. Connect the steering inner drag link joint to the pitman arm. i. Install the new steering inner drag link joint nut and tighten the nut to 100 ft. lbs. (135 N.m). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Damper > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Steering Damper: > H46 > Jun > 09 > Recall - Steering Linkage Defects > Page 11306 j. With the wheels in the straight ahead position, make sure that both inner and outer steering drag link joint caps are centered over the joint ball stud (Figure 12). CAUTION: Failure to center the drag link inner and outer joint caps over the joint ball studs before tightening the drag link adjuster sleeve clamps could cause joint failure. k. With the adjuster sleeve clamps rotated 45 degrees forward, tighten the drag link adjuster sleeve clamp nuts to 45 ft. lbs. (61 N.m).lbs. CAUTION: The drag link adjuster sleeve clamp tabs must be pointing approximately 45 degrees forward before tightening (as shown in Figure 10). Do not allow the adjuster sleeve clamp tabs to hang straight down. l. Lower the vehicle from the hoist. m. Drive the vehicle to verify that the steering wheel is straight. > If the steering wheel is turned to the left, shorten the drag link at the adjuster sleeve located on the drag link. > If the steering wheel is turned to the right, lengthen the drag link at the adjuster sleeve located on the drag link. n. Repeat Step 7m. until steering wheel is straight. o. Continue with Step 9 of this procedure. 8. Replace the pitman arm using the following procedure: Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Damper > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Steering Damper: > H46 > Jun > 09 > Recall - Steering Linkage Defects > Page 11307 a. Remove and discard the inner drag link joint nut (Figure 13). b. Use Special Tool C-4150A to separate the steering inner drag link joint from the pitman arm (Figure 14). CAUTION: Use extreme care not to tear, nick or damage the inner drag link joint rubber boot. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Damper > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Steering Damper: > H46 > Jun > 09 > Recall - Steering Linkage Defects > Page 11308 d. Install pitman arm puller (Special Tool 9615) onto the steering gear output shaft (Figure 15). CAUTION: Failure to use the correct pitman arm puller could cause damage to the steering gear. e. Tighten the pitman arm puller forcing screw until the pitman arm separates from the steering gear output shaft (Figure 15). f. Install the new pitman arm. g. Install the pitman arm retaining nut onto the steering gear output shaft. Tighten the pitman arm nut to 225 ft. lbs. (300 N.m). h. Connect the steering inner drag link joint to the pitman arm. i. Install the new steering inner drag link joint nut and tighten the nut to 100 ft. lbs. (135 N.m). j. Lower the vehicle from the hoist. k. Drive the vehicle to verify that the steering wheel is straight. > If the steering wheel is turned to the left, shorten the drag link at the adjuster sleeve located on the drag link. ^ If the steering wheel is turned to the right, lengthen the drag link at the adjuster sleeve located on the drag link. l. Repeat Step 8k. until steering wheel is straight. m. Continue with Step 9 of this procedure. 9. Verify the lower surface of the left outer tie rod socket is parallel to the upper surface of the left knuckle attaching arm using the following procedure: a. Loosen the tie rod tube adjuster sleeve clamps. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Damper > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Steering Damper: > H46 > Jun > 09 > Recall - Steering Linkage Defects > Page 11309 b. Rotate the left tie rod until the bottom of the tie rod socket is parallel to the top of the left steering knuckle arm (Figure 16). c. Tighten the tie rod adjuster sleeve clamp nuts to 45 ft.lbs. (61 N.m). CAUTION: Failure to align the left tie rod end parallel to the steering knuckle could cause tie rod end damage. d. Return the vehicle to the customer. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Damper > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Steering Damper: > H46 > Jun > 09 > Recall - Steering Linkage Defects > Page 11310 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Damper > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Steering Damper: > H36 > May > 09 > Recall - Drag Link/Steering Damper Bracket Defects Technical Service Bulletin # H36 Date: 090529 Recall - Drag Link/Steering Damper Bracket Defects Revised May 2009 Dealer Service Instructions for: Safety Recall H36 Steering Drag Link Inner Joint and Damper Bracket NOTE: The service procedure for this recall has been revised. All previous copies of Safety Recall H36 should be discarded from your files. Models 2008-2009 (DH / D1) Dodge Truck (2500/3500 series or 1500 Mega Cab) NOTE: This recall applies only to the above vehicles equipped with four wheel drive (sales code 5I4) built from February 19, 2008 through October 30, 2008 (MDH 021910 through 103006). 2008-2009 (DC) Dodge Truck (3500 series cab chassis) NOTE: This recall applies only to the above vehicles built from February 19, 2008 through October 30, 2008 (MDH 021910 through 103006). IMPORTANT: Many of the vehicles within the above build period have already been inspected or repaired and, therefore, have been excluded from this recall. IMPORTANT: Some of the involved vehicles may be in dealer new vehicle inventory. Federal law requires you to complete this recall service on these vehicles before retail delivery. Dealers should also consider this requirement to apply to used vehicle inventory and should perform this recall on vehicles in for service. Involved vehicles can be determined by using the VIP inquiry process. Subject The steering drag link inner joint on about 32,700 of the above vehicles may fracture under certain driving conditions. This could result in a loss of steering control and cause a crash without warning. Also the steering damper bracket at the tie rod tube may loosen. This could allow the bracket to slide on the tube and may cause increased vehicle turning radius. Repair The drag link inner joint must be replaced and the steering damper bracket must be inspected and replaced if required. Alternate Transportation Dealers should attempt to minimize customer inconvenience by placing the owner in a loaner vehicle if inspection determines that the steering damper bracket is required and the vehicle must be held overnight. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Damper > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Steering Damper: > H36 > May > 09 > Recall - Drag Link/Steering Damper Bracket Defects > Page 11315 Parts Information Each dealer to whom vehicles in the recall were assigned will receive enough Drag Link Inner Joint Packages to service about 20% of those vehicles. Completion Reporting and Reimbursement Claims for vehicles that have been serviced must be submitted on the DealerCONNECT Claim Entry Screen located on the Service tab. Claims submitted will be used by Chrysler to record recall service completions and provide dealer payments. Use one of the labor operation numbers and time allowances shown. Add the cost of the recall parts package plus applicable dealer allowance to your claim. NOTE: See the Warranty Administration Manual, Recall Claim Processing Section, for complete recall claim processing instructions. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Damper > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Steering Damper: > H36 > May > 09 > Recall - Drag Link/Steering Damper Bracket Defects > Page 11316 Dealer Notification To view this notification on DealerCONNECT, select "Global Recall System" on the Service tab, then click on the description of this notification. Owner Notification and Service Scheduling All involved vehicle owners known to Chrysler are being notified of the service requirement by first class mail. They are requested to schedule appointments for this service with their dealers. A generic copy of the owner letter is included. Enclosed with each owner letter is an Owner Notification postcard to allow owners to update our records if applicable. Vehicle Lists, Global Recall System, VIP and Dealer Follow Up All involved vehicles have been entered into the DealerCONNECT Global Recall System (GRS) and Vehicle Information Plus (VIP) for dealer inquiry as needed. GRS provides involved dealers with an updated VIN list of their incomplete vehicles. The owner's name, address and phone number are listed if known. Completed vehicles are removed from GRS within several days of repair claim submission. To use this system, click on the "Service" tab and then click on "Global Recall System." Your dealer's VIN list for each recall displayed can be sorted by: those vehicles that were unsold at recall launch, those with a phone number, city, zip code, or VIN sequence. Dealers must perform this repair on all unsold vehicles before retail delivery. Dealers should also use the VIN list to follow up with all owners to schedule appointments for this repair. Recall VIN lists may contain confidential, restricted owner name and address information that was obtained from the Department of Motor Vehicles of various states. Use of this information is permitted for this recall only and is strictly prohibited from all other use. Additional Information If you have any questions or need assistance in completing this action, please contact your Service and Parts District Manager. Customer Services Field Operations Chrysler Service Procedure 1. Lift the vehicle on an appropriate hoist. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Damper > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Steering Damper: > H36 > May > 09 > Recall - Drag Link/Steering Damper Bracket Defects > Page 11317 2. Inspect the steering damper bracket mounting nuts by putting a 13 mm box-end wrench onto the nut (Figure 1): > If a 13 mm wrench fits the steering damper bracket mounting nuts, the bracket and fasteners must be replaced. Continue with Step 3 of this procedure. > If a 13 mm wrench does not fit the steering damper bracket mounting nuts, the bracket does not require replacement. Continue with Step 4 of this procedure. 3. Replace the steering damper bracket and fasteners using the following procedure: a. Remove and save the steering damper-to-damper bracket mounting nut (Figure 2). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Damper > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Steering Damper: > H36 > May > 09 > Recall - Drag Link/Steering Damper Bracket Defects > Page 11318 b. Disconnect the steering damper from the steering damper bracket. c. Remove and discard the four steering bracket nuts, two u-bolts and the bracket (Figure 2). d. Place the new steering damper carriage bolt through the square hole in the new bracket. e. Place the new steering damper bracket assembly onto the tie rod tube at the flat spot area on the tube and install the new u-bolts and nuts. Lightly snug the nuts to hold the steering damper bracket in position. f. Center the new steering damper bracket on the flattened area of the tie rod tube. g. Evenly tighten the four steering damper bracket u-bolt nuts to 25 ft. lbs. (34 N.m). Then tighten the four u-bolt nuts to 45 ft. lbs. (61 N.m). h. Connect the steering damper to the steering damper carriage bolt. i. Install the steering damper mounting nut and tighten to 75 ft. lbs. (100 N.m). j. Continue with Step 4 of this procedure. 4. Replace the drag link inner joint using the following procedure: a. Loosen both drag link adjuster sleeve clamp nuts (Figure 3). b. Remove and discard the drag link inner joint-to-pitman arm retaining nut (Figure 3). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Damper > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Steering Damper: > H36 > May > 09 > Recall - Drag Link/Steering Damper Bracket Defects > Page 11319 c. Using special tool C-4150A, separate the steering drag link inner joint from the pitman arm (Figure 4). d. While counting the number of turns, unscrew the steering drag link inner joint from the drag link adjuster sleeve (right handed threads) (Figure 5). CAUTION: Do not allow the drag link adjuster sleeve to turn while unscrewing the drag link inner joint. e. Screw in the new steering drag link inner joint into the drag link adjuster sleeve the same number of turns counted in step 4d. of this procedure. f. Connect the new steering drag link inner joint to the pitman arm. g. Install the new steering drag link inner joint nut and tighten the nut to 100 ft. lbs. (135 N.m). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Damper > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Steering Damper: > H36 > May > 09 > Recall - Drag Link/Steering Damper Bracket Defects > Page 11320 h. With the wheels in the straight ahead position, make sure that both inner and outer steering drag link joint caps are centered over the joint ball stud (Figure 6). CAUTION: Failure to center/align the drag link inner and outer joint caps over the joint ball studs before tightening the drag link adjuster sleeve clamps could cause joint failure. i. With the adjuster sleeve clamps rotated 45 degrees forward, tighten the drag link adjuster sleeve clamp nuts to 45 ft. lbs. (61 N.m). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Damper > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Steering Damper: > H36 > May > 09 > Recall - Drag Link/Steering Damper Bracket Defects > Page 11321 CAUTION: The drag link adjuster sleeve clamp tabs must be pointing 45 degrees forward before tightening (Figure 7). Do Not allow the adjuster sleeve clamp tabs to hang straight down. 5. Verify the lower surface of the left outer tie rod socket (Figure 8) is parallel to the upper surface of the left knuckle attaching arm using the following procedure: a. Loosen the tie rod tube adjuster sleeve clamps. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Damper > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Steering Damper: > H36 > May > 09 > Recall - Drag Link/Steering Damper Bracket Defects > Page 11322 b. Rotate the left tie rod until the bottom of the tie rod socket is parallel to the top of the left steering knuckle arm (Figure 8). c. Tighten the tie rod adjuster sleeve clamp nuts to 45 ft. lbs. (61 N.m). CAUTION: Failure to align the left tie rod end parallel to the steering knuckle could cause tie rod end damage. d. Return the vehicle to the customer. 6. Lower the vehicle from the hoist. 7. Drive the vehicle to verify that the steering wheel is straight. > If the steering wheel is turned to the left, shorten the drag link at the adjuster sleeve located on the drag link. > If the steering wheel is turned to the right, lengthen the drag link at the adjuster sleeve located on the drag link. 8. Repeat Step 7 until steering wheel is straight. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Damper > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Steering Damper: > H36 > May > 09 > Recall - Drag Link/Steering Damper Bracket Defects > Page 11323 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Damper > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Steering Damper: > H46 > Jun > 09 > Recall - Steering Linkage Defects Technical Service Bulletin # H46 Date: 090609 Recall - Steering Linkage Defects Revised May 2009 Dealer Service Instructions for: Safety Recall H46 - Mopar Steering Linkage NOTE: The service procedure for this recall has been revised and additional labor operations have been added. All previous copies of Safety Recall H46 should be discarded from your files. Models 2003-2004 (DR) Dodge Truck 4x4 (2500/3500 series) 2005 (DH) Dodge Truck 4x4 (2500/3500 series) 2006-2009 (DH) Dodge Truck 4x4 (2500/3500 series or 1500 Mega Cab) 2006-2009 (D1) Dodge Truck 4x4 (3500 series) 2007-2009 (DC) Dodge Truck (3500 series cab chassis) IMPORTANT: This recall only applies to vehicles that had certain Mopar service parts steering components installed. IMPORTANT: Some of the involved vehicles may be in dealer new vehicle inventory. Federal law requires you to complete this recall service on these vehicles before retail delivery. Dealers should also consider this requirement to apply to used vehicle inventory and should perform this recall on vehicles in for service. Involved vehicles can be determined by using the VIP inquiry process. Subject During a prior service appointment, a Mopar service parts steering linkage was installed on about 19,400 of the above vehicles. The drag link inner joint may fracture under certain driving conditions. This could result in a loss of steering control and cause a crash without warning. Also, the steering damper bracket at the tie rod tube may loosen. This could allow the bracket to slide on the tube and may cause increased vehicle turning radius. Repair The steering linkage must be inspected and some steering linkage components may need to be replaced. NOTE: The initial steering linkage inspection process can be done by write up personnel in the write up area (see Step 1 of the service procedure). Vehicles found with original style steering linkage can be immediately returned to the customer. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Damper > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Steering Damper: > H46 > Jun > 09 > Recall - Steering Linkage Defects > Page 11329 Parts Information Special Tools The special tools may be required to perform this repair: Completion Reporting and Reimbursement Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Damper > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Steering Damper: > H46 > Jun > 09 > Recall - Steering Linkage Defects > Page 11330 Claims for vehicles that have been serviced must be submitted on the DealerCONNECT Claim Entry Screen located on the Service tab. Claims submitted will be used by Chrysler to record recall service completions and provide dealer payments. Use one of the labor operation numbers and time allowances shown. Add the cost of the recall parts package plus applicable dealer allowance to your claim. FOR VEHICLES INSPECTED IN THE WRITE UP AREA: Enter "INSPECT" in the part number section of your claim with a quantity of one (1). Enter $5.00 WITH NO MARK-UP for reimbursement of steering linkage inspection performed in the write up area. NOTE: See the Warranty Administration Manual, Recall Claim Processing Section, for complete recall claim processing instructions. Dealer Notification To view this notification on DealerCONNECT, select "Global Recall System" on the Service tab, then click on the description of this notification. Owner Notification and Service Scheduling All involved vehicle owners known to Chrysler are being notified of the service requirement by first class mail. They are requested to schedule appointments for this service with their dealers. A generic copy of the owner letter is included. Enclosed with each owner letter is an Owner Notification postcard to allow owners to update our records if applicable. Vehicle Lists, Global Recall System, VIP and Dealer Follow Up All involved vehicles have been entered into the DealerCONNECT Global Recall System (GRS) and Vehicle Information Plus (VIP) for dealer inquiry as needed. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Damper > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Steering Damper: > H46 > Jun > 09 > Recall - Steering Linkage Defects > Page 11331 GRS provides involved dealers with an updated VIN list of their incomplete vehicles. The owner's name, address and phone number are listed if known. Completed vehicles are removed from GRS within several days of repair claim submission. To use this system, click on the "Service" tab and then click on "Global Recall System." Your dealer's VIN list for each recall displayed can be sorted by: those vehicles that were unsold at recall launch, those with a phone number, city, zip code, or VIN sequence. Dealers must perform this repair on all unsold vehicles before retail delivery. Dealers should also use the VIN list to follow up with all owners to schedule appointments for this repair. Recall VIN lists may contain confidential, restricted owner name and address information that was obtained from the Department of Motor Vehicles of various states. Use of this information is permitted for this recall only and is strictly prohibited from all other use. Additional Information If you have any questions or need assistance in completing this action, please contact your Service and Parts District Manager. Customer Services Field Operations Chrysler Service Procedure NOTE: The initial steering linkage inspection process (Step 1 of the service procedure) can be done by write up personnel in the write up area. Vehicles found with the steering linkage shown in Figure 1 can be immediately returned to the customer. See the "Completion Reporting and Reimbursement" section of this recall for special claims processing information. 1. Look under the front of the vehicle and inspect the steering linkage at the steering damper mounting point: > If the steering damper mounts to the tie rod tube as shown in Figure 1, the steering linkage is good. Return the vehicle to the customer. No further action is required. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Damper > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Steering Damper: > H46 > Jun > 09 > Recall - Steering Linkage Defects > Page 11332 > If the steering damper mounts to the tie rod tube as shown in Figure 2, the vehicle will require further inspection and/or repair by a technician. The vehicle should be assigned to a technician and the technician should continue with Step 2 of this procedure. 2. Lift the vehicle on a hoist and inspect the steering linkage drag link for a white part number tag (Figure 3): > If the steering linkage drag link does not have a white part number tag, continue with Step 3 of this procedure. ^ If the steering linkage drag link has a white part number tag: > For 2009 model year trucks, continue with Step 9 of this procedure. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Damper > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Steering Damper: > H46 > Jun > 09 > Recall - Steering Linkage Defects > Page 11333 > For 2003 through 2008 model year trucks, continue with Step 5 of this procedure. 3. Inspect the steering damper bracket to tie rod tube mounting u-bolt nuts by putting a 13 mm box-end wrench onto the nut (Figure 4): > If a 13 mm wrench fits the steering damper bracket mounting u-bolt nuts, the bracket and fasteners must be replaced. Continue with Step 4 of this procedure. > If a 13 mm wrench does not fit the steering damper bracket mounting u-bolt nuts, the bracket does not require replacement. Continue with Step 5 of this procedure. 4. Replace the steering damper bracket and fasteners using the following procedure: a. Remove and save the steering damper-to-damper bracket mounting nut (Figure 5). b. Disconnect the steering damper eyelet from the steering damper bracket. c. Remove and discard the four steering damper bracket nuts, two u-bolts and the steering damper bracket (Figure 5). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Damper > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Steering Damper: > H46 > Jun > 09 > Recall - Steering Linkage Defects > Page 11334 d. Place the new steering damper carriage bolt through the square hole in the new steering damper bracket. e. Place the new steering damper bracket assembly onto the tie rod tube at the flat spot area on the tube and install the new u-bolts and nuts. Lightly snug the nuts to hold the steering damper bracket in position. f. Center the new steering damper bracket on the flattened area of the tie rod tube. g. Evenly tighten the four steering damper bracket u-bolt nuts to 25 ft. lbs. (34 N.m). Then tighten the four u-bolt nuts to 45 ft. lbs. (61 N.m). h. Connect the steering damper to the steering damper carriage bolt. i. Install the steering damper-to-damper bracket mounting nut and tighten to 75 ft. lbs. (100 N.m). j. Continue with Step 5 of this procedure. 5. For 2009 model year trucks, continue with Step 6 of this procedure. For 2003 through 2008 model year trucks, inspect the pitman arm part number (Figure 6): > If the part number cast into the bottom side of the pitman arm is 68039930AA the pitman arm does not require replacement. > Steering linkage with a white part number tag, continue with Step 9 of this procedure. > Linkage without a white part number tag, replace the inner drag link joint. Continue with Step 6 of this procedure. > If the part number cast into the bottom side of the pitman arm is 52106836AB, or is not legible: > Steering linkage without a white part number tag, replace the inner drag link joint and pitman arm. Continue with Step 7 of this procedure. > Steering linkage with a white part number tag, replace the pitman arm. Continue with Step 8 of this procedure. 6. Replace the inner drag link joint using the following procedure: Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Damper > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Steering Damper: > H46 > Jun > 09 > Recall - Steering Linkage Defects > Page 11335 a. Loosen both drag link adjuster sleeve clamp nuts (Figure 7). b. Remove and discard the inner drag link joint to pitman arm nut (Figure 7). c. Use Special Tool C-4150A to separate the steering inner drag link joint from the pitman arm (Figure 8). d. While counting the number of turns, unscrew the steering inner drag link joint from the drag link adjuster sleeve (right handed threads) and discard the drag link inner joint. CAUTION: Do not allow the drag link adjuster sleeve to turn while unscrewing the inner drag link joint. e. Screw in the new inner drag link joint into the drag link adjuster sleeve the same number of turns counted in step 6d. of this procedure. f. Connect the steering inner drag link joint to the pitman arm. g. Install the new steering inner drag link joint nut and tighten the nut to 100 ft. lbs. (135 N.m). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Damper > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Steering Damper: > H46 > Jun > 09 > Recall - Steering Linkage Defects > Page 11336 h. With the wheels in the straight ahead position, make sure that both inner and outer steering drag link joint caps are centered over the joint ball stud (Figure 9). CAUTION: Failure to center the drag link inner and outer joint caps over the joint ball studs before tightening the drag link adjuster sleeve clamps could cause joint failure. i. With the adjuster sleeve clamps rotated 45 degrees forward, tighten both drag link adjuster sleeve clamp nuts to 45 ft. lbs. (61 N.m). CAUTION: The drag link adjuster sleeve clamp tabs must be pointing approximately 45 degrees forward before tightening (as shown in Figure 10). Do not allow the adjuster sleeve clamp tabs to hang straight down. j. Lower the vehicle from the hoist. k. Drive the vehicle to verify that the steering wheel is straight. > If the steering wheel is turned to the left, shorten the drag link at the adjuster sleeve located on the drag link. > If the steering wheel is turned to the right, lengthen the drag link at the adjuster sleeve located on the drag link. l. Repeat Step 6k. until steering wheel is straight. m. Continue with Step 9 of this procedure. 7. Replace the inner drag link joint and pitman arm using the following procedure: Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Damper > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Steering Damper: > H46 > Jun > 09 > Recall - Steering Linkage Defects > Page 11337 a. Loosen both drag link adjuster sleeve clamp nuts (Figure 7). b. Remove and save the pitman arm retaining nut located on the steering gear output shaft. c. Install pitman arm puller (Special Tool 9615) onto the steering gear output shaft (Figure 11). CAUTION: Failure to use the correct pitman arm puller could cause damage to the steering gear. d. Tighten the pitman arm puller forcing screw until the pitman arm separates from the steering gear output shaft (Figure 11). e. While counting the number of turns, unscrew the steering inner drag link joint (with pitman arm still attached) from the drag link adjuster sleeve (right handed threads) and discard the pitman arm and inner drag link joint. CAUTION: Do not allow the drag link adjuster sleeve to turn while unscrewing the inner drag link joint. f. Screw in the new steering inner drag link joint into the drag link adjuster sleeve the same number of turns counted in step 7e. of this procedure. g. Install the new pitman arm and retaining nut onto the steering gear output shaft. Tighten the pitman arm nut to 225 ft. lbs. (300 N.m). h. Connect the steering inner drag link joint to the pitman arm. i. Install the new steering inner drag link joint nut and tighten the nut to 100 ft. lbs. (135 N.m). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Damper > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Steering Damper: > H46 > Jun > 09 > Recall - Steering Linkage Defects > Page 11338 j. With the wheels in the straight ahead position, make sure that both inner and outer steering drag link joint caps are centered over the joint ball stud (Figure 12). CAUTION: Failure to center the drag link inner and outer joint caps over the joint ball studs before tightening the drag link adjuster sleeve clamps could cause joint failure. k. With the adjuster sleeve clamps rotated 45 degrees forward, tighten the drag link adjuster sleeve clamp nuts to 45 ft. lbs. (61 N.m).lbs. CAUTION: The drag link adjuster sleeve clamp tabs must be pointing approximately 45 degrees forward before tightening (as shown in Figure 10). Do not allow the adjuster sleeve clamp tabs to hang straight down. l. Lower the vehicle from the hoist. m. Drive the vehicle to verify that the steering wheel is straight. > If the steering wheel is turned to the left, shorten the drag link at the adjuster sleeve located on the drag link. > If the steering wheel is turned to the right, lengthen the drag link at the adjuster sleeve located on the drag link. n. Repeat Step 7m. until steering wheel is straight. o. Continue with Step 9 of this procedure. 8. Replace the pitman arm using the following procedure: Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Damper > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Steering Damper: > H46 > Jun > 09 > Recall - Steering Linkage Defects > Page 11339 a. Remove and discard the inner drag link joint nut (Figure 13). b. Use Special Tool C-4150A to separate the steering inner drag link joint from the pitman arm (Figure 14). CAUTION: Use extreme care not to tear, nick or damage the inner drag link joint rubber boot. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Damper > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Steering Damper: > H46 > Jun > 09 > Recall - Steering Linkage Defects > Page 11340 d. Install pitman arm puller (Special Tool 9615) onto the steering gear output shaft (Figure 15). CAUTION: Failure to use the correct pitman arm puller could cause damage to the steering gear. e. Tighten the pitman arm puller forcing screw until the pitman arm separates from the steering gear output shaft (Figure 15). f. Install the new pitman arm. g. Install the pitman arm retaining nut onto the steering gear output shaft. Tighten the pitman arm nut to 225 ft. lbs. (300 N.m). h. Connect the steering inner drag link joint to the pitman arm. i. Install the new steering inner drag link joint nut and tighten the nut to 100 ft. lbs. (135 N.m). j. Lower the vehicle from the hoist. k. Drive the vehicle to verify that the steering wheel is straight. > If the steering wheel is turned to the left, shorten the drag link at the adjuster sleeve located on the drag link. ^ If the steering wheel is turned to the right, lengthen the drag link at the adjuster sleeve located on the drag link. l. Repeat Step 8k. until steering wheel is straight. m. Continue with Step 9 of this procedure. 9. Verify the lower surface of the left outer tie rod socket is parallel to the upper surface of the left knuckle attaching arm using the following procedure: a. Loosen the tie rod tube adjuster sleeve clamps. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Damper > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Steering Damper: > H46 > Jun > 09 > Recall - Steering Linkage Defects > Page 11341 b. Rotate the left tie rod until the bottom of the tie rod socket is parallel to the top of the left steering knuckle arm (Figure 16). c. Tighten the tie rod adjuster sleeve clamp nuts to 45 ft.lbs. (61 N.m). CAUTION: Failure to align the left tie rod end parallel to the steering knuckle could cause tie rod end damage. d. Return the vehicle to the customer. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Damper > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Steering Damper: > H46 > Jun > 09 > Recall - Steering Linkage Defects > Page 11342 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Damper > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Steering Damper: > H36 > May > 09 > Recall - Drag Link/Steering Damper Bracket Defects Technical Service Bulletin # H36 Date: 090529 Recall - Drag Link/Steering Damper Bracket Defects Revised May 2009 Dealer Service Instructions for: Safety Recall H36 Steering Drag Link Inner Joint and Damper Bracket NOTE: The service procedure for this recall has been revised. All previous copies of Safety Recall H36 should be discarded from your files. Models 2008-2009 (DH / D1) Dodge Truck (2500/3500 series or 1500 Mega Cab) NOTE: This recall applies only to the above vehicles equipped with four wheel drive (sales code 5I4) built from February 19, 2008 through October 30, 2008 (MDH 021910 through 103006). 2008-2009 (DC) Dodge Truck (3500 series cab chassis) NOTE: This recall applies only to the above vehicles built from February 19, 2008 through October 30, 2008 (MDH 021910 through 103006). IMPORTANT: Many of the vehicles within the above build period have already been inspected or repaired and, therefore, have been excluded from this recall. IMPORTANT: Some of the involved vehicles may be in dealer new vehicle inventory. Federal law requires you to complete this recall service on these vehicles before retail delivery. Dealers should also consider this requirement to apply to used vehicle inventory and should perform this recall on vehicles in for service. Involved vehicles can be determined by using the VIP inquiry process. Subject The steering drag link inner joint on about 32,700 of the above vehicles may fracture under certain driving conditions. This could result in a loss of steering control and cause a crash without warning. Also the steering damper bracket at the tie rod tube may loosen. This could allow the bracket to slide on the tube and may cause increased vehicle turning radius. Repair The drag link inner joint must be replaced and the steering damper bracket must be inspected and replaced if required. Alternate Transportation Dealers should attempt to minimize customer inconvenience by placing the owner in a loaner vehicle if inspection determines that the steering damper bracket is required and the vehicle must be held overnight. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Damper > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Steering Damper: > H36 > May > 09 > Recall - Drag Link/Steering Damper Bracket Defects > Page 11347 Parts Information Each dealer to whom vehicles in the recall were assigned will receive enough Drag Link Inner Joint Packages to service about 20% of those vehicles. Completion Reporting and Reimbursement Claims for vehicles that have been serviced must be submitted on the DealerCONNECT Claim Entry Screen located on the Service tab. Claims submitted will be used by Chrysler to record recall service completions and provide dealer payments. Use one of the labor operation numbers and time allowances shown. Add the cost of the recall parts package plus applicable dealer allowance to your claim. NOTE: See the Warranty Administration Manual, Recall Claim Processing Section, for complete recall claim processing instructions. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Damper > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Steering Damper: > H36 > May > 09 > Recall - Drag Link/Steering Damper Bracket Defects > Page 11348 Dealer Notification To view this notification on DealerCONNECT, select "Global Recall System" on the Service tab, then click on the description of this notification. Owner Notification and Service Scheduling All involved vehicle owners known to Chrysler are being notified of the service requirement by first class mail. They are requested to schedule appointments for this service with their dealers. A generic copy of the owner letter is included. Enclosed with each owner letter is an Owner Notification postcard to allow owners to update our records if applicable. Vehicle Lists, Global Recall System, VIP and Dealer Follow Up All involved vehicles have been entered into the DealerCONNECT Global Recall System (GRS) and Vehicle Information Plus (VIP) for dealer inquiry as needed. GRS provides involved dealers with an updated VIN list of their incomplete vehicles. The owner's name, address and phone number are listed if known. Completed vehicles are removed from GRS within several days of repair claim submission. To use this system, click on the "Service" tab and then click on "Global Recall System." Your dealer's VIN list for each recall displayed can be sorted by: those vehicles that were unsold at recall launch, those with a phone number, city, zip code, or VIN sequence. Dealers must perform this repair on all unsold vehicles before retail delivery. Dealers should also use the VIN list to follow up with all owners to schedule appointments for this repair. Recall VIN lists may contain confidential, restricted owner name and address information that was obtained from the Department of Motor Vehicles of various states. Use of this information is permitted for this recall only and is strictly prohibited from all other use. Additional Information If you have any questions or need assistance in completing this action, please contact your Service and Parts District Manager. Customer Services Field Operations Chrysler Service Procedure 1. Lift the vehicle on an appropriate hoist. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Damper > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Steering Damper: > H36 > May > 09 > Recall - Drag Link/Steering Damper Bracket Defects > Page 11349 2. Inspect the steering damper bracket mounting nuts by putting a 13 mm box-end wrench onto the nut (Figure 1): > If a 13 mm wrench fits the steering damper bracket mounting nuts, the bracket and fasteners must be replaced. Continue with Step 3 of this procedure. > If a 13 mm wrench does not fit the steering damper bracket mounting nuts, the bracket does not require replacement. Continue with Step 4 of this procedure. 3. Replace the steering damper bracket and fasteners using the following procedure: a. Remove and save the steering damper-to-damper bracket mounting nut (Figure 2). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Damper > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Steering Damper: > H36 > May > 09 > Recall - Drag Link/Steering Damper Bracket Defects > Page 11350 b. Disconnect the steering damper from the steering damper bracket. c. Remove and discard the four steering bracket nuts, two u-bolts and the bracket (Figure 2). d. Place the new steering damper carriage bolt through the square hole in the new bracket. e. Place the new steering damper bracket assembly onto the tie rod tube at the flat spot area on the tube and install the new u-bolts and nuts. Lightly snug the nuts to hold the steering damper bracket in position. f. Center the new steering damper bracket on the flattened area of the tie rod tube. g. Evenly tighten the four steering damper bracket u-bolt nuts to 25 ft. lbs. (34 N.m). Then tighten the four u-bolt nuts to 45 ft. lbs. (61 N.m). h. Connect the steering damper to the steering damper carriage bolt. i. Install the steering damper mounting nut and tighten to 75 ft. lbs. (100 N.m). j. Continue with Step 4 of this procedure. 4. Replace the drag link inner joint using the following procedure: a. Loosen both drag link adjuster sleeve clamp nuts (Figure 3). b. Remove and discard the drag link inner joint-to-pitman arm retaining nut (Figure 3). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Damper > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Steering Damper: > H36 > May > 09 > Recall - Drag Link/Steering Damper Bracket Defects > Page 11351 c. Using special tool C-4150A, separate the steering drag link inner joint from the pitman arm (Figure 4). d. While counting the number of turns, unscrew the steering drag link inner joint from the drag link adjuster sleeve (right handed threads) (Figure 5). CAUTION: Do not allow the drag link adjuster sleeve to turn while unscrewing the drag link inner joint. e. Screw in the new steering drag link inner joint into the drag link adjuster sleeve the same number of turns counted in step 4d. of this procedure. f. Connect the new steering drag link inner joint to the pitman arm. g. Install the new steering drag link inner joint nut and tighten the nut to 100 ft. lbs. (135 N.m). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Damper > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Steering Damper: > H36 > May > 09 > Recall - Drag Link/Steering Damper Bracket Defects > Page 11352 h. With the wheels in the straight ahead position, make sure that both inner and outer steering drag link joint caps are centered over the joint ball stud (Figure 6). CAUTION: Failure to center/align the drag link inner and outer joint caps over the joint ball studs before tightening the drag link adjuster sleeve clamps could cause joint failure. i. With the adjuster sleeve clamps rotated 45 degrees forward, tighten the drag link adjuster sleeve clamp nuts to 45 ft. lbs. (61 N.m). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Damper > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Steering Damper: > H36 > May > 09 > Recall - Drag Link/Steering Damper Bracket Defects > Page 11353 CAUTION: The drag link adjuster sleeve clamp tabs must be pointing 45 degrees forward before tightening (Figure 7). Do Not allow the adjuster sleeve clamp tabs to hang straight down. 5. Verify the lower surface of the left outer tie rod socket (Figure 8) is parallel to the upper surface of the left knuckle attaching arm using the following procedure: a. Loosen the tie rod tube adjuster sleeve clamps. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Damper > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Steering Damper: > H36 > May > 09 > Recall - Drag Link/Steering Damper Bracket Defects > Page 11354 b. Rotate the left tie rod until the bottom of the tie rod socket is parallel to the top of the left steering knuckle arm (Figure 8). c. Tighten the tie rod adjuster sleeve clamp nuts to 45 ft. lbs. (61 N.m). CAUTION: Failure to align the left tie rod end parallel to the steering knuckle could cause tie rod end damage. d. Return the vehicle to the customer. 6. Lower the vehicle from the hoist. 7. Drive the vehicle to verify that the steering wheel is straight. > If the steering wheel is turned to the left, shorten the drag link at the adjuster sleeve located on the drag link. > If the steering wheel is turned to the right, lengthen the drag link at the adjuster sleeve located on the drag link. 8. Repeat Step 7 until steering wheel is straight. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Damper > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Steering Damper: > H36 > May > 09 > Recall - Drag Link/Steering Damper Bracket Defects > Page 11355 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Damper > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Steering Damper: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL 1. Remove the steering damper mounting nuts and bolts (6) at axle. 2. Remove the steering damper mounting nuts and bolts (1) at linkage. 3. Remove the steering damper shock (2) from the linkage using special tool 9360 puller. 4. Remove the damper (2). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Damper > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 11358 Steering Damper: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION 1. Install the steering damper (5) on the axle. Tighten nut (6) to 95 Nm (75 ft. lbs.). 2. Install the steering damper (2) on the linkage. Tighten nut (1) to 81 Nm (60 ft. lbs.). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Gear > Steering Gear Seal > Component Information > Service and Repair > Pitman Shaft Seal Steering Gear Seal: Service and Repair Pitman Shaft Seal Removal GAS - 2500 & 3500 1. Separate the pitman arm from the gear box See: Pitman Arm/Service and Repair/Pitman Arm Removal . 2. Clean exposed end of pitman shaft and housing with a wire brush. 3. Rotate the steering wheel from stop to stop and count the number of turns. 4. Center the steering wheel by rotating it from the stop back 1 1/2 turns to achieve center position. 5. Remove the pitman shaft cover bolts. NOTE: The pitman shaft will not clear the housing if it is not centered. 6. Remove the pitman shaft from the gear. 7. Remove dust seal from the housing with the seal remover adapter tool 8990 (2). CAUTION: Use care not to score the housing bore when prying out seals and washer. 8. Remove retaining ring with snap ring pliers. 9. Remove washer from the housing. NOTE: Tighten the slide hammer seal remover adapter tool 8990 into the seal using wrenches, in order to make a tight fit to pull the seal out. If this is not performed the seal may tear on the removal making it difficult to remove. 10. Remove oil seal from the housing with the seal remover adapter tool 8990 (2) along with slide hammer puller C-3752. Installation GAS - 2500 & 3500 NOTE: Generous amounts of the high temperature grease from the seal kit should be applied to areas between the pitman shaft bearing and oil seals and also between the dust seals and snap ring. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Gear > Steering Gear Seal > Component Information > Service and Repair > Pitman Shaft Seal > Page 11364 1. Coat the oil seal and washer with high temp grease. NOTE: Install the oil seal with the lip facing inward. Flat side of the oil seal should be against the washer. 2. Install the oil seal with pitman shaft seal installer tool 8989 driver (2) and C-4171 handle (1). 3. Install backup washer. 4. Install the retainer ring with snap ring pliers. 5. Coat the dust seal with high temp grease. 6. Install the dust seal with a driver (2) and handle (1). 7. Install pitman shaft protective seal protector 8993 (2) over the shaft. 8. Install the pitman shaft into the steering gear until it fully seats into the bearing. 9. Install the new cover bolts and tighten to 68 Nm (50 ft. lbs.). 10. Install the pitman arm See: Pitman Arm/Service and Repair/Pitman Arm - Installation . Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Gear > Steering Gear Seal > Component Information > Service and Repair > Pitman Shaft Seal > Page 11365 Steering Gear Seal: Service and Repair Steering Gear Input Shaft Seal - Link/Coil - 2500 & 3500 Removal - 2500 & 3500 REMOVAL - 2500 & 3500 1. Remove the steering gear from the vehicle See: Service and Repair/Steering Gear - Removal . CAUTION: Do not overtighten the vise on the gear case. This may affect the adjustment 2. Mount the steering gear upside down over a drain pan in a soft jawed vise. 3. Place a drain pan under the gear and rotate the input shaft back and forth several times lock-to-lock to discharge the fluid from the steering gear 4. Drain all the remaining fluid from the gear. 5. Rotate the input shaft (4) from stop to stop and count the number of turns using a 12 point socket (2). NOTE: The pitman shaft will not clear the housing if it is not centered. 6. Center the input shaft (4) by rotating it from the stop back 1 1/2 turns to achieve center position. 7. Remove the pitman shaft See: Service and Repair/Pitman Shaft - Removal . 8. Remove the four bolts securing the valve housing (1). 9. Remove the valve housing (1) from the steering gear (3). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Gear > Steering Gear Seal > Component Information > Service and Repair > Pitman Shaft Seal > Page 11366 10. Remove the valve housing (1) and wormshaft assembly from the steering gear housing and place the valve housing in a soft jawed vise. 11. Remove the retainer ring (3) set screw (1) from the valve housing. 12. Using special tool retainer ring wrench 8988 (1) to remove the steering gear worm thrust bearing retainer ring. 13. Separate the wormshaft assembly from the valve housing, Then remove the wormshaft assembly from the vise. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Gear > Steering Gear Seal > Component Information > Service and Repair > Pitman Shaft Seal > Page 11367 14. Remove the dust seal (3) with a pick (1). CAUTION: Use care not to score the housing bore when removing seals. 15. Remove the snap ring (2) with snap ring pliers (1). 16. Using slide hammer puller C-3752 (1) with seal remover adapter 8990 (1) remove the oil seal. Installation - 2500 & 3500 INSTALLATION - 2500 & 3500 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Gear > Steering Gear Seal > Component Information > Service and Repair > Pitman Shaft Seal > Page 11368 1. Inspect the piston teflon seals for damage. Replace if needed. NOTE: To replace the teflon seals, use a pick to remove the teflon o-ring and the rubber o-ring underneath. Install a new rubber o-ring in the piston seal grove and a new teflon o-ring over the top of it. 2. Install the valve into the valve housing (1). 3. Thread the retainer ring into the valve housing (1). Tighten to 97 Nm (72 ft. lbs.). NOTE: It is very important to make sure to compensate for the added length of the torque wrench when torquing to proper specifications. 4. Install the retainer ring set screw. Tighten to 2.26 Nm (20 in. lbs.) 5. Clean the steering gear housing. CAUTION: Valve assembly must be centered to the housing (1). 6. Install the valve assembly (2) into the steering gear. Tighten the new bolts to 54 Nm (40 ft. lbs.) 7. Install the input shaft seal protector 8986 (2). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Gear > Steering Gear Seal > Component Information > Service and Repair > Pitman Shaft Seal > Page 11369 8. Coat the new seal in high temp grease and Install the new oil seal using the input shaft seal installer tool 8987 driver (2) and C-4171 handle (3). NOTE: Drive the oil seal into the housing until the outer edge does not quite clear the snap ring groove. 9. Insert the snap ring into the housing. Using the input shaft seal installer 8987 driver (2) and C-4171 handle (3) push the snap ring and oil seal together until the snap ring seats in the groove. NOTE: Generous amounts of the high temperature grease from the seal kit should be applied to areas between the pitman shaft bearing and oil seals and also between the dust seals and snap ring. 10. Install the new dust seal using high temp grease , special tool C-4171 (handle) (3) and 8987 (driver) (2). 11. Check to make sure the gear is centered in the middle tooth (1) before installing the pitman shaft. 12. Install the pitman shaft into the steering gear See: Service and Repair/Pitman Shaft Installation . 13. Perform over-center meshload adjustment See: Adjustments . 14. Install the steering gear to the vehicle See: Service and Repair/Steering Gear - Installation . 15. Perform a wheel alignment See: Alignment/Service and Repair . Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Mounted Controls Communication Module > Component Information > Locations Steering Mounted Controls Communication Module: Locations Component ID: 214 Component : MODULE-STEERING CONTROL Connector: Name : MODULE-STEERING CONTROL C1 Color : WHITE # of pins : 6 Pin Circuit Description 1 Z909 20BK GROUND 2 X20 20GY/WT RADIO CONTROL MUX 3 V38 20VT/OR S/C SWITCH NO. 2 SIGNAL 4 V37 20VT S/C SWITCH NO. 1 SIGNAL 5 V937 20VT/BR S/C SWITCH RETURN 6 X3 20DG/VT HORN SWITCH SENSE Component Location - 47 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Mounted Controls Communication Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 11373 Component Location - 42 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Mounted Controls Communication Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 11374 Component Location - 43 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Mounted Controls Communication Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 11375 Connector: Name : MODULE-STEERING CONTROL C2 Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (PREMIUM) Pin Circuit Description 1 G902 22WT/BR SWITCH MUX RETURN Pin Circuit Description 1 G902 22WT/BR SWITCH MUX RETURN Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Mounted Controls Communication Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 11376 2 X20 22GY/WT RADIO CONTROL MUX 2 X20 22GY/WT RADIO CONTROL MUX Component Location - 47 Component Location - 42 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Mounted Controls Communication Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 11377 Component Location - 43 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Mounted Controls Communication Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 11378 Connector: Name : MODULE-STEERING CONTROL C3 Color : # of pins : 4 Pin Circuit Description 1 X3 20DG/VT HORN SWITCH SENSE 2 V937 22DB/DG S/C SWITCH RETURN 2 K900 22DB/DG SENSOR GROUND 3 V37 22VT S/C SWITCH NO. 1 SIGNAL 4 V38 22VT/OR S/C SWITCH NO. 2 SIGNAL Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Mounted Controls Communication Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 11379 Component Location - 47 Component Location - 42 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Mounted Controls Communication Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 11380 Component Location - 43 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Mounted Controls Communication Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 11381 Connector: Name : MODULE-STEERING CONTROL C4 Color : YELLOW # of pins : 4 Pin Circuit Description 1 R61 20LG/VT DRIVER SQUIB 2 LINE 1 2 R63 20LG/WT DRIVER SQUIB 2 LINE 2 3 R43 20LG/BR DRIVER SQUIB 1 LINE 1 4 R45 20LG/OR DRIVER SQUIB 1 LINE 2 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Mounted Controls Communication Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 11382 Component Location - 47 Component Location - 42 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Mounted Controls Communication Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 11383 Component Location - 43 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Mounted Controls Communication Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 11384 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Mounted Controls Communication Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 11385 Steering Mounted Controls Communication Module: Diagrams Component ID: 214 Component : MODULE-STEERING CONTROL Connector: Name : MODULE-STEERING CONTROL C1 Color : WHITE # of pins : 6 Pin Circuit Description 1 Z909 20BK GROUND 2 X20 20GY/WT RADIO CONTROL MUX 3 V38 20VT/OR S/C SWITCH NO. 2 SIGNAL 4 V37 20VT S/C SWITCH NO. 1 SIGNAL 5 V937 20VT/BR S/C SWITCH RETURN 6 X3 20DG/VT HORN SWITCH SENSE Component Location - 47 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Mounted Controls Communication Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 11386 Component Location - 42 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Mounted Controls Communication Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 11387 Component Location - 43 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Mounted Controls Communication Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 11388 Connector: Name : MODULE-STEERING CONTROL C2 Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (PREMIUM) Pin Circuit Description 1 G902 22WT/BR SWITCH MUX RETURN Pin Circuit Description 1 G902 22WT/BR SWITCH MUX RETURN Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Mounted Controls Communication Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 11389 2 X20 22GY/WT RADIO CONTROL MUX 2 X20 22GY/WT RADIO CONTROL MUX Component Location - 47 Component Location - 42 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Mounted Controls Communication Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 11390 Component Location - 43 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Mounted Controls Communication Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 11391 Connector: Name : MODULE-STEERING CONTROL C3 Color : # of pins : 4 Pin Circuit Description 1 X3 20DG/VT HORN SWITCH SENSE 2 V937 22DB/DG S/C SWITCH RETURN 2 K900 22DB/DG SENSOR GROUND 3 V37 22VT S/C SWITCH NO. 1 SIGNAL 4 V38 22VT/OR S/C SWITCH NO. 2 SIGNAL Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Mounted Controls Communication Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 11392 Component Location - 47 Component Location - 42 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Mounted Controls Communication Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 11393 Component Location - 43 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Mounted Controls Communication Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 11394 Connector: Name : MODULE-STEERING CONTROL C4 Color : YELLOW # of pins : 4 Pin Circuit Description 1 R61 20LG/VT DRIVER SQUIB 2 LINE 1 2 R63 20LG/WT DRIVER SQUIB 2 LINE 2 3 R43 20LG/BR DRIVER SQUIB 1 LINE 1 4 R45 20LG/OR DRIVER SQUIB 1 LINE 2 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Mounted Controls Communication Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 11395 Component Location - 47 Component Location - 42 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Mounted Controls Communication Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 11396 Component Location - 43 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Mounted Controls Communication Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 11397 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Shaft Coupler > Component Information > Service and Repair > Steering Coupling - Removal Steering Shaft Coupler: Service and Repair Steering Coupling - Removal Upper Coupling REMOVAL 1. Disconnect the negative battery cable. NOTE: The steering column on vehicles with an automatic transmission may not be equipped with an internal locking shaft that allows the ignition key cylinder to be locked with the key. Alternative methods of locking the steering wheel for service will have to be used. 2. Lock the steering wheel with the tire in the straight position. 3. Remove and discard the lower pinch bolt. 4. Lower the steering coupler shaft from the column. 5. Remove the upper steering coupling shaft (2) seal by pushing in the four tags (1) securing it to the panel. 6. Remove and discard the lower coupler pinch bolt (1) from the lower steering coupling shaft (1). 7. Remove the upper steering coupling shaft (3) from the vehicle. Lower Coupling - All LD & HD Except 4X4 HD ALL LD & HD EXCEPT 4X4 HD 1. Disconnect the negative battery cable. 2. Raise and support the vehicle. NOTE: The steering column on vehicles with an automatic transmission may not be equipped with an internal locking shaft that allows the ignition key cylinder to be locked with the key. Alternative methods of locking the steering wheel for service will have to be used. 3. Lock the steering wheel with the tire in the straight position. 4. Remove the left front tire and wheel assembly. 5. Mark both coupler connections for proper installation. 6. Remove and discard the upper coupler pinch bolt. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Shaft Coupler > Component Information > Service and Repair > Steering Coupling - Removal > Page 11402 7. Remove and discard the lower coupler pinch bolt. 8. Remove the lower steering shaft coupler. Lower Coupling - 4X4 HD 4X4 HD 1. Disconnect the negative battery cable. 2. Raise and support the vehicle. NOTE: The steering column on vehicles with an automatic transmission may not be equipped with an internal locking shaft that allows the ignition key cylinder to be locked with the key. Alternative methods of locking the steering wheel for service will have to be used. 3. Lock the steering wheel with the tire in the straight position. 4. Remove the left front tire and wheel assembly. 5. Remove and discard the upper coupler pinch bolt (1). 6. Remove and discard the lower coupler pinch bolt (2). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Shaft Coupler > Component Information > Service and Repair > Steering Coupling - Removal > Page 11403 7. Remove the lower steering shaft coupler (3). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Shaft Coupler > Component Information > Service and Repair > Steering Coupling - Removal > Page 11404 Steering Shaft Coupler: Service and Repair Steering Coupling - Installation Upper Coupling INSTALLATION 1. Install the upper steering coupling shaft (3) to the vehicle. 2. Install the upper steering coupling shaft seal (2) by pushing it in securing the four tangs (1) to the panel. NOTE: A new steering coupling shaft pinch bolt for the upper and lower shafts must be used. 3. Install the steering coupler shaft (1) to the column. 4. Install the upper pinch bolt (3) use new bolt and tighten to 57 N.m (42 ft.lbs). 5. Install the shaft to the lower coupler (1). 6. Install the lower pinch bolt (1) use new bolt and tighten to 57 N.m (42 ft.lbs). 7. Unlock the steering wheel. 8. Reconnect the negative battery cable. Lower Coupling - All LD & HD Except 4X4 HD Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Shaft Coupler > Component Information > Service and Repair > Steering Coupling - Removal > Page 11405 ALL LD & HD EXCEPT 4X4 HD 1. Install the coupler to the steering rack & pinion using the marks made in the removal process. 2. Install the coupler to the intermediate shaft using the marks made in the removal process. NOTE: New pinch bolts must be used for reinstallation. 3. Install the lower pinch bolt and tighten to 57 Nm (42 ft. lbs.). 4. Install the upper pinch bolt and tighten to 57 Nm (42 ft. lbs.). 5. Install the left front tire and wheel assembly See: Wheels and Tires/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement . 6. Lower the vehicle. 7. Reconnect the negative battery cable. 8. Unlock the steering wheel. Lower Coupling - 4X4 HD 4X4 HD 1. Install the coupler (2) to the steering gear (3). 2. Install the coupler (3) to the intermediate shaft (2). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Shaft Coupler > Component Information > Service and Repair > Steering Coupling - Removal > Page 11406 NOTE: New pinch bolts must be used for reinstallation. 3. Install the lower pinch bolt (3) and tighten to 28 Nm (250 in. lbs.). 4. Install the upper pinch bolt (1) and tighten to 57 Nm (42 ft. lbs.). 5. Install the left front tire and wheel assembly See: Wheels and Tires/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement . 6. Lower the vehicle. 7. Reconnect the negative battery cable. 8. Unlock the steering wheel. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Wheel > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Steering Wheel: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL 1. Disable and remove the driver's side airbag. See: Restraint Systems/Air Bag Systems/Air Bag/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Driver Airbag - Removal . 2. Partially remove the steering wheel bolt and leave the bolt in the column. 3. Install puller CJ98-1 (2) or equivalent using the top of the bolt to push on. 4. Remove and discard the steering wheel bolt. 5. Remove the steering wheel (1). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Wheel > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 11411 Steering Wheel: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION NOTE: Do not reuse the old steering wheel bolt (a new bolt must be used) 1. Install steering wheel to the column NOTE: Be certain that the steering wheel mounting bolt is tightened to the proper torque specification to ensure proper clockspring operation. 2. Install the new steering wheel bolt. Tighten the bolt to 61 Nm (45 ft. lbs.). 3. Install the driver's side air bag. See: Restraint Systems/Air Bag Systems/Air Bag/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Driver Airbag Installation . Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Tie Rod > Tie Rod End > Component Information > Testing and Inspection Tie Rod End: Testing and Inspection OUTER TIE ROD END NOTE: If the outer tie rod end is equipped with a lubrication fitting, grease the joint then road test the vehicle before performing test. 1. Raise the front of the vehicle. Place safety floor stands under both lower control arms as far outboard as possible. Lower the vehicle to allow the stands to support some or all of the vehicle weight. 2. Remove the front tires. 3. Mount a dial indicator solidly to the vehicle steering knuckle and then zero the dial indicator. 4. Position indicator plunger on the top side of the outer tie rod end. NOTE: The dial indicator plunger must be perpendicular to the machined surface of the outer tie rod end. 5. Position a pry bar in order to pry downwards on the outer tie rod end. 6. If the travel exceeds 0.5 mm (0.020 in.), replace the outer tie rod end See: Service and Repair/Tie Rod End - Removal . 7. If the outer tie rod end is within specs reinstall the front tires See: Wheels and Tires/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement . Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Tie Rod > Tie Rod End > Component Information > Service and Repair > Tie Rod End - Removal Tie Rod End: Service and Repair Tie Rod End - Removal Outer Tie Rod End - Independent Front Suspension OUTER TIE ROD END NOTE: Do not twist the boot anytime during removal or installation. 1. Loosen the jam nut (3). 2. Remove the outer tie rod end nut from the ball stud. 3. Separate the tie rod ball stud (1) from the knuckle with Remover 9360 (2). 4. Unthread the outer tie rod end (1) from the inner tie rod. Inner Tie Rod End - Independent Front Suspension INNER TIE ROD END 1. Remove the outer tie rod end (1) Count the number of turns when removing, this will aid in setting the toe after installation. See: . 2. Remove the jam nut (3). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Tie Rod > Tie Rod End > Component Information > Service and Repair > Tie Rod End - Removal > Page 11418 3. Remove the clamps (1&3) for the inner tie rod boot (2). 4. Remove the boot (2). 5. Install the special tool # 10087-3 socket (2) and # 10087-2 Tube (1) and remove the inner tie rod end. Link/Coil REMOVAL 1. Remove tie rod nuts (1). 2. Remove tie rod (3) from drag link and left knuckle (2) with remover 8677 puller (1). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Tie Rod > Tie Rod End > Component Information > Service and Repair > Tie Rod End - Removal > Page 11419 Tie Rod End: Service and Repair Tie Rod End - Installation Outer Tie Rod End - Independent Front Suspension OUTER TIE ROD END NOTE: Do not twist the boot at anytime during removal or installation. 1. Thread the outer tie rod end (3) onto the inner tie rod (2), to it's original position. 2. Install the outer tie rod end (3) into the steering knuckle. 3. Tighten the ball stud nut on the ball stud to 61 Nm (45 ft. lbs.) then an additional 90°. 4. Set wheel toe pattern, See: Alignment/Service and Repair . 5. Tighten jam nut (1) to 127 Nm (94 ft. lbs.). Inner Tie Rod End - Independent Front Suspension INNER TIE ROD END 1. Thread the inner tie rod (1) to the rack & pinion (2). 2. Tighten the inner tie rod end using special tool # 10087-3 socket (2) and # 10087-2 tube (1) to 115 Nm (85 ft.lbs.). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Tie Rod > Tie Rod End > Component Information > Service and Repair > Tie Rod End - Removal > Page 11420 3. Install the inner tie rod end boot (2) and reclamp (1&3) to the tie rod (4) and rack. 4. Install the jam nut (1) to the inner tie rod end (2). 5. Install the outer tie rod (3) the same number of turns when removed See: . 6. Install the front wheels. 7. Lower the vehicle. 8. Perform toe adjustment. 9. Tighten the jam nut (1) after toe adjustment. Tighten to 50 Nm (37 ft. lbs.). Link/Coil INSTALLATION 1. Install tie rod (2) to the left steering knuckle and drag link. Install the nuts (1) and tighten to 54 Nm (40 ft. lbs.) Then an additional 90°. 2. Remove the supports and lower the vehicle to the surface. Center steering wheel and adjust toe, See: Alignment/Service and Repair . 3. After adjustment tighten tie rod adjustment sleeve clamp bolts to 61 Nm (45 ft. lbs.). NOTE: Position the clamp on the sleeve so retaining bolt is located on the bottom side of the sleeve. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Ball Joint > Component Information > Specifications > Front Upper Ball Joint Ball Joint: Specifications Front Upper Ball Joint Diagnosis and Testing - Independent Front Suspension UPPER BALL JOINT 1. Raise the front of the vehicle. Place safety floor stands under both lower control arms as far outboard as possible. Lower the vehicle to allow the stands to support some or all of the vehicle weight. 2. Remove the front tires. 3. Mount a dial indicator solidly to the frame and then zero the dial indicator. 4. Position dial indicator plunger on the top side of the upper ball joint. NOTE: The dial indicator plunger must be perpendicular to the machined surface of the ball joint. NOTE: Use care not to pry or tear the ball joint boot (5), when checking the free play. 5. Position a pry bar between the steering knuckle and the upper control arm. Pry upwards on the upper control arm. 6. If the travel exceeds 0.5 mm (0.020 in.), replace the upper ball joint See: Service and Repair/Front Upper Ball Joint - Removal . 7. If the upper ball joint is within specs reinstall the front tires See: Wheels and Tires/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement . Diagnosis and Testing - Link/Coil UPPER BALL JOINT To properly diagnose the upper ball joint two readings from the dial indicator are necessary, The two readings must be added together to find a total ball joint movement as identified in the steps below. 1. Raise and support the vehicle. 2. Attach a dial indicator (3) with the indicator resting on either the front or back sides of the steering knuckle (4) as close to the upper ball joint (1) as possible. 3. Set the dial indicator(3) to zero. 4. Grab the tire by pushing in on the top of the tire and pulling out on the bottom of the tire. Record the reading on the dial indicator (3). This will be the first reading. 5. Set the dial indicator (3) back to zero. 6. Grab the tire by pulling in on the top of the tire and pushing out on the bottom of the tire. Record the reading on the dial indicator (3). This will be the second reading. 7. Add the two readings together for a total upper ball joint movement. If this reading is above 1.52 mm (0.060 in) then replacement of the upper ball joint is necessary See: Service and Repair/Front Upper Ball Joint - Removal . Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Ball Joint > Component Information > Specifications > Front Upper Ball Joint > Page 11426 Ball Joint: Specifications Front Lower Ball Joint Diagnosis and Testing - Independent Front Suspension LOWER BALL JOINT 1. Raise the front of the vehicle. Place safety floor stands under both lower control arms as far outboard as possible. Lower the vehicle to allow the stands to support some or all of the vehicle weight. 2. Mount a dial indicator solidly to the top side of the lower control arm and then zero the dial indicator. 3. Position the indicator plunger against the bottom surface of the steering knuckle. NOTE: The dial indicator plunger must be perpendicular to the machined surface of the steering knuckle. 4. Position a pry bar under the tire assembly. Pry upwards on the tire assembly. 5. If the travel exceeds 0.5 mm (0.020 in.), replace the lower ball joint See: Service and Repair/Front Lower Ball Joint - Removal . Diagnosis and Testing - Link/Coil LOWER BALL JOINT To properly diagnose the lower ball joint two readings from the dial indicator are necessary, The two readings must be added together to find a total ball joint movement as identified in the steps below. 1. Raise and support the vehicle. 2. Attach a dial indicator (2) with the indicator resting on the flat part of the steering knuckle (1) by the lower ball stud. 3. Set the dial indicator (2) to zero. NOTE: Use care not to damage the upper ball joint grease seal (3). 4. Pry between the knuckle (4) and the axle tube yoke next to the upper ball joint (2), Record the reading on the dial indicator. This will be the first reading. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Ball Joint > Component Information > Specifications > Front Upper Ball Joint > Page 11427 5. Set the dial indicator (2) back to zero. 6. Set up a jackstand (3) and use a long prybar (1) to lift the knuckle assembly 7. Pry upwards on the flat part of the steering knuckle (5) next to the ball joint stud and nut (2) using the jackstand as leverage. Record the reading on the dial indicator. This will be the second reading. 8. Add the two reading together for a total lower ball joint movement, If this reading is above 2.29 mm (0.090 in) then replacement of the lower ball joint is necessary See: Service and Repair/Front Lower Ball Joint - Removal . Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Ball Joint > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Front Upper Ball Joint Ball Joint: Testing and Inspection Front Upper Ball Joint Diagnosis and Testing - Independent Front Suspension UPPER BALL JOINT 1. Raise the front of the vehicle. Place safety floor stands under both lower control arms as far outboard as possible. Lower the vehicle to allow the stands to support some or all of the vehicle weight. 2. Remove the front tires. 3. Mount a dial indicator solidly to the frame and then zero the dial indicator. 4. Position dial indicator plunger on the top side of the upper ball joint. NOTE: The dial indicator plunger must be perpendicular to the machined surface of the ball joint. NOTE: Use care not to pry or tear the ball joint boot (5), when checking the free play. 5. Position a pry bar between the steering knuckle and the upper control arm. Pry upwards on the upper control arm. 6. If the travel exceeds 0.5 mm (0.020 in.), replace the upper ball joint See: Service and Repair/Front Upper Ball Joint - Removal . 7. If the upper ball joint is within specs reinstall the front tires See: Wheels and Tires/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement . Diagnosis and Testing - Link/Coil UPPER BALL JOINT To properly diagnose the upper ball joint two readings from the dial indicator are necessary, The two readings must be added together to find a total ball joint movement as identified in the steps below. 1. Raise and support the vehicle. 2. Attach a dial indicator (3) with the indicator resting on either the front or back sides of the steering knuckle (4) as close to the upper ball joint (1) as possible. 3. Set the dial indicator(3) to zero. 4. Grab the tire by pushing in on the top of the tire and pulling out on the bottom of the tire. Record the reading on the dial indicator (3). This will be the first reading. 5. Set the dial indicator (3) back to zero. 6. Grab the tire by pulling in on the top of the tire and pushing out on the bottom of the tire. Record the reading on the dial indicator (3). This will be the second reading. 7. Add the two readings together for a total upper ball joint movement. If this reading is above 1.52 mm (0.060 in) then replacement of the upper ball joint is necessary See: Service and Repair/Front Upper Ball Joint - Removal . Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Ball Joint > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Front Upper Ball Joint > Page 11430 Ball Joint: Testing and Inspection Front Lower Ball Joint Diagnosis and Testing - Independent Front Suspension LOWER BALL JOINT 1. Raise the front of the vehicle. Place safety floor stands under both lower control arms as far outboard as possible. Lower the vehicle to allow the stands to support some or all of the vehicle weight. 2. Mount a dial indicator solidly to the top side of the lower control arm and then zero the dial indicator. 3. Position the indicator plunger against the bottom surface of the steering knuckle. NOTE: The dial indicator plunger must be perpendicular to the machined surface of the steering knuckle. 4. Position a pry bar under the tire assembly. Pry upwards on the tire assembly. 5. If the travel exceeds 0.5 mm (0.020 in.), replace the lower ball joint See: Service and Repair/Front Lower Ball Joint - Removal . Diagnosis and Testing - Link/Coil LOWER BALL JOINT To properly diagnose the lower ball joint two readings from the dial indicator are necessary, The two readings must be added together to find a total ball joint movement as identified in the steps below. 1. Raise and support the vehicle. 2. Attach a dial indicator (2) with the indicator resting on the flat part of the steering knuckle (1) by the lower ball stud. 3. Set the dial indicator (2) to zero. NOTE: Use care not to damage the upper ball joint grease seal (3). 4. Pry between the knuckle (4) and the axle tube yoke next to the upper ball joint (2), Record the reading on the dial indicator. This will be the first reading. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Ball Joint > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Front Upper Ball Joint > Page 11431 5. Set the dial indicator (2) back to zero. 6. Set up a jackstand (3) and use a long prybar (1) to lift the knuckle assembly 7. Pry upwards on the flat part of the steering knuckle (5) next to the ball joint stud and nut (2) using the jackstand as leverage. Record the reading on the dial indicator. This will be the second reading. 8. Add the two reading together for a total lower ball joint movement, If this reading is above 2.29 mm (0.090 in) then replacement of the lower ball joint is necessary See: Service and Repair/Front Lower Ball Joint - Removal . Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Ball Joint > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Upper Ball Joint - Removal Ball Joint: Service and Repair Front Upper Ball Joint - Removal Independent Front Suspension REMOVAL 1. Raise vehicle and support the axle. 2. Remove the tire and wheel. 3. Remove the upper ball joint retaining nut. 4. Separate the upper ball joint (4) from the knuckle (6) using separator #9360 (5). 5. Remove the wheel speed sensor wire from the knuckle (HD) and from the upper control arm (LD). 6. Move the knuckle out of the way to allow ball joint removal tool access. 7. Remove the ball joint boot for removal. NOTE: It may be necessary to install a block of wood between the control arm and frame bracket to allow clearance for the ball joint press tool. NOTE: Extreme pressure lubrication must be used on the threaded portions of the tool. This will increase the longevity of the tool and insure proper operation during the removal and installation process. 8. Press the ball joint (4) from the upper control arm (3) using special tools C-4212-F (PRESS) (1), 9770-1 (Receiver) (2) and 9770-2 (Driver) (5). 2500 & 3500 - 4WD - Link/Coil 2500 & 3500 - 4WD 1. Remove the steering knuckle See: Front Steering Knuckle/Service and Repair/Front Steering Knuckle - Removal . 2. Remove the axle shaft from the axle See: Transmission and Drivetrain/Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints/Axle Shaft Assembly/Axle Shaft/Service and Repair/Front Axle - 9 1/4 AA/Removal . Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Ball Joint > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Upper Ball Joint - Removal > Page 11434 3. Position special tool 6761 (RECEIVER) (2) and 8445-3 (DRIVER) (4) with C-4212-F (PRESS)(1) as shown to remove upper ball stud. 4500 & 5500 - Link/Coil 4500 & 5500 NOTE: The upper ball joints screw in and out (they are not pressed in). 1. Remove the wheel and tire assembly. 2. Support the lower part of the steering knuckle. 3. Remove the upper ball joint nut (1). 4. Disconnect the wheel speed sensor wire from the bracket (3). 5. Install a 60 mm socket (1) and unscrew the upper ball joint (2) from the steering knuckle. 6. Remove the wheels speed sensor wire bracket (3). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Ball Joint > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Upper Ball Joint - Removal > Page 11435 Ball Joint: Service and Repair Front Upper Ball Joint - Installation Independent Front Suspension INSTALLATION NOTE: Extreme pressure lubrication must be used on the threaded portions of the tool. This will increase the longevity of the tool and insure proper operation during the removal and installation process. 1. Install the ball joint (3) into the upper control arm (4) and press in using special tools C-4212-F (press) (1), 9652 (Driver) (2) and 8445-1 (Receiver) (5). 2. Install the upper ball joint into the knuckle. 3. Install the upper ball joint retaining nut and tighten to 54 Nm (40 ft. lbs.)(on 1500 series only an additional 90° turn is required) or 68 Nm (50 ft. lbs.)(HD). 4. Install the wheel speed sensor wire to the knuckle (HD) and to the upper control arm (LD). 5. Install the tire and wheel. 6. Remove the supports and lower the vehicle. 7. Perform a wheel alignment See: Alignment/Service and Repair . 2500 & 3500 - 4WD - Link/Coil 2500 & 3500 - 4WD 1. Position special tool 8445-2 (DRIVER) (2) and 8975-5 (RECEIVER) (5) with C-42121-F (PRESS)(1) as shown to install upper ball stud (3). 2. Install the axle shaft into the axle See: Transmission and Drivetrain/Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints/Axle Shaft Assembly/Axle Shaft/Service and Repair/Front Axle - 9 1/4 AA/Installation 3. Install the steering knuckle See: Front Steering Knuckle/Service and Repair/Front Steering Knuckle - Installation . 4500 & 5500 - Link/Coil 4500 & 5500 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Ball Joint > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Upper Ball Joint - Removal > Page 11436 1. Install the wheel speed sensor bracket (3) to the upper ball joint (2). 2. Screw the upper ball joint (2) into the steering knuckle. Tighten to 400 Nm (295 ft.lbs.). 3. Reconnect the wheel speed sensor wire into the bracket (3). 4. Install the upper ball joint mounting nut. Tighten to 200 Nm (148 ft.lbs.) 5. Remove the support from the steering knuckle. 6. Install the tire and wheel assembly. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Ball Joint > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Upper Ball Joint - Removal > Page 11437 Ball Joint: Service and Repair Front Lower Ball Joint - Removal 4X4 (LD) - Independent Front Suspension 4X4 (LD) 1. Remove the tire and wheel assembly. 2. Remove the brake caliper and rotor See: Brakes and Traction Control/Disc Brake System/Brake Rotor/Disc/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Brake Rotor - Removal . 3. Disconnect the tie rod from the steering knuckle See: Steering/Tie Rod/Tie Rod End/Service and Repair/Tie Rod End - Removal . 4. Separate the upper ball joint from the knuckle using remover 9360. 5. Remove the lower ball joint nut and separate the lower ball joint from the steering knuckle (1) using puller 8677 (2). 6. Remove the half shaft nut. 7. Remove the steering knuckle from the vehicle See: Front Steering Knuckle/Service and Repair/Front Steering Knuckle - Removal . 8. Move the half shaft to the side and support the half shaft out of the way. NOTE: Extreme pressure lubrication must be used on the threaded portions of the tool. This will increase the longevity of the tool and insure proper operation during the removal and installation process. 9. Press the ball joint (3) from the lower control arm using special tools C-4212-F (PRESS) (1), 8836-6 (DRIVER) (2) and 8698-2 (RECEIVER) (4). 2500 & 3500 - 4WD - Link/Coil 2500 & 3500 - 4WD Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Ball Joint > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Upper Ball Joint - Removal > Page 11438 1. Remove the steering knuckle See: Front Steering Knuckle/Service and Repair/Front Steering Knuckle - Removal . 2. Remove the axle shaft from the axle See: Transmission and Drivetrain/Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints/Axle Shaft Assembly/Axle Shaft/Service and Repair/Front Axle - 9 1/4 AA/Removal . 3. Remove lower snap ring from the lower ball joint. 4. Position special tool 8975-2 (RECEIVER) (2) and 8975-4 (DRIVER) (4) with tool C4212-F (PRESS)(1) as shown to remove lower ball stud. 4500 & 5500 - Link/Coil 4500 & 5500 1. Remove the axle shaft from the axle. 2. Remove the steering knuckle See: Front Steering Knuckle/Service and Repair/Front Steering Knuckle - Removal . 3. Position special tool 9859-4 (RECEIVER) (4) and 9859-3 (DRIVER) (2) with tool C4212-F (PRESS) (1) s shown to remove lower ball stud. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Ball Joint > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Upper Ball Joint - Removal > Page 11439 Ball Joint: Service and Repair Front Lower Ball Joint - Installation 4X4 (LD) - Independent Front Suspension 4X4 (LD) NOTE: Extreme pressure lubrication must be used on the threaded portions of the tool. This will increase the longevity of the tool and insure proper operation during the removal and installation process. 1. Install the ball joint (4) into the control arm (3) and press in using special tools C-4212-F (press) (1), 8698-1 (driver) (5) and 8698-3 (receiver) (2). 2. Stake the ball joint flange in four evenly spaced places around the ball joint flange, using a chisel and hammer. 3. Remove the support for the halfshaft and install into position. 4. Install the steering knuckle See: Front Steering Knuckle/Service and Repair/Front Steering Knuckle - Installation . 5. Install the tie rod end into the steering knuckle See: Steering/Tie Rod/Tie Rod End/Service and Repair/Tie Rod End - Installation . 6. Install the brake caliper and rotor See: Brakes and Traction Control/Disc Brake System/Brake Rotor/Disc/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Brake Rotor - Installation . 7. Install and tighten the halfshaft nut to 251 Nm (185 ft. lbs.). 8. Install the tire and wheel assembly See: Wheels and Tires/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement . 9. Check the vehicle ride height See: Alignment/Service and Repair . 10. Perform a wheel alignment See: Alignment/Service and Repair . 2500 & 3500 - 4WD - Link/Coil 2500 & 3500 - 4WD 1. Position special tool 8975-1 (DRIVER) (2) and 8975-3 (RECEIVER) (5) with C4212-F (PRESS)(1) as shown to install lower ball stud (3). 2. Install the axle shaft into the axle See: Transmission and Drivetrain/Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints/Axle Shaft Assembly/Axle Shaft/Service and Repair/Front Axle - 9 1/4 AA/Installation 3. Install the steering knuckle See: Front Steering Knuckle/Service and Repair/Front Steering Knuckle - Installation . 4500 & 5500 - Link/Coil Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Ball Joint > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Upper Ball Joint - Removal > Page 11440 4500 & 5500 1. Position special tool 9859-1 (DRIVER) (5) and 9859-2 (RECEIVER) (2) with C4212-F (PRESS) (1) as shown to install lower ball stud (4). 2. Install the steering knuckle See: Front Steering Knuckle/Service and Repair/Front Steering Knuckle - Installation . 3. Install the axle shaft into the axle. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Control Arm > Control Arm Bushing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Control Arm Bushing: Service and Repair Removal Lower Control Arm Bushings - 4X4 (LD) LOWER CONTROL ARM BUSHINGS - 4X4 (LD) 1. Remove the lower control arm See: Service and Repair/Front Lower Control Arm - Removal . 2. Secure the control arm in a soft jaw vise. NOTE: Extreme pressure lubrication must be used on the threaded portions of the tool. This will increase the longevity of the tool and insure proper operation during the removal and installation process. 3. Remove the bushing (3) using special tool C-4212F (PRESS) (1), 9772-6 (receiver) (6), 9772-4 (SPACER) (5) and 9772-3 (driver) (2) Upper Control Arm Bushings - IFS (LD) UPPER CONTROL ARM BUSHINGS - IFS (LD) 1. Remove the upper control arm See: Service and Repair/Front Upper Control Arm - Removal . 2. Secure the control arm in a soft jaw vise. NOTE: Extreme pressure lubrication must be used on the threaded portions of the tool. This will increase the longevity of the tool and insure proper operation during the removal and installation process. 3. Remove the bushing (3) from the upper control arm (5) using special tool C-4212F (PRESS) (1), 9777-3 (receiver) (4), and 9601-1 (driver) (2). Upper Control Arm Bushings - IFS (HD) UPPER CONTROL ARM BUSHINGS - IFS (HD) Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Control Arm > Control Arm Bushing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 11446 1. Remove the upper control arm See: Service and Repair/Front Upper Control Arm - Removal . 2. Secure the control arm in a soft jaw vise. NOTE: Extreme pressure lubrication must be used on the threaded portions of the tool. This will increase the longevity of the tool and insure proper operation during the removal and installation process. 3. Remove the bushing (3) from the upper control arm (5) using special tool C-4212F (PRESS) (1), 9777-3 (receiver) (4), and 9777-2 (driver) (2). Lower Control Arm Shock Bushing - IFS 4X4 LOWER CONTROL ARM SHOCK BUSHING - IFS 4X4 1. Raise and support the vehicle. 2. Remove the tire and wheel assembly. 3. Support the lower control arm outboard end. 4. Remove the caliper adapter with the caliper See: Brakes and Traction Control/Disc Brake System/Brake Caliper/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Disc Brake Caliper Adapter - Removal . 5. Remove the rotor See: Brakes and Traction Control/Disc Brake System/Brake Rotor/Disc/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Brake Rotor - Removal . 6. Remove the upper ball joint retaining nut and separate the upper ball joint (4) from the knuckle (6) using separator 9360 (5). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Control Arm > Control Arm Bushing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 11447 7. Disconnect the wheel speed sensor wire (3) from the knuckle and upper control arm. 8. Remove the stabilizer link lower nut (1). 9. Remove the axle hub nut. 10. Remove the shock lower bolt/nut from the lower control arm (5) then move the shock out of the way to allow the C4212-F press (4) to used. NOTE: Extreme pressure lubrication must be used on the threaded portions of the tool. This will increase the longevity of the tool and insure proper operation during the removal and installation process. 11. Install special tools to press the bushing (3) out of the lower control arm (4) using special tools C-4212-F (Press) (1), 9653-1 (driver) (5) and 9653-2 (Receiver) (2). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Control Arm > Control Arm Bushing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 11448 Control Arm Bushing: Service and Repair Installation Lower Control Arm Bushings - 4X4 (LD) LOWER CONTROL ARM BUSHINGS - 4X4 (LD) FRONT BUSHING NOTE: Extreme pressure lubrication must be used on the threaded portions of the tool. This will increase the longevity of the tool and insure proper operation during the removal and installation process. 1. Install the new bushing (3) into the arm (4) using special tools C4212F (PRESS) (1), 9772-5 (receiver) (5) and 9772-1 (driver) (2) REAR BUSHING 1. Install the new lower control arm bushing (4) into the lower control arm (3) using tools C-4212F (PRESS) (1), 9772-2 (driver) (5) and 9772-5 (receiver) (2). 2. Remove the control arm from the vise. 3. Install the lower control arm See: Service and Repair/Front Lower Control Arm - Installation . 4. Perform a wheel alignment See: Alignment/Service and Repair . Upper Control Arm Bushings - IFS (LD) UPPER CONTROL ARM BUSHINGS - IFS (LD) Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Control Arm > Control Arm Bushing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 11449 1. Install the bushing (3) into the control arm (5) using special tool C-4212F (PRESS) (1), 9770-1 (receiver) (2) and 9771-2 (driver) (4). 2. Remove the control arm from the vise. 3. Install the upper control arm See: Service and Repair/Front Upper Control Arm - Installation . 4. Perform a wheel alignment See: Alignment/Service and Repair . Upper Control Arm Bushings - IFS (HD) UPPER CONTROL ARM BUSHINGS - IFS (HD) 1. Install the bushing (3) into the control arm (5) using special tool C-4212F (PRESS) (1), 9770-1 (receiver) (2) and 9777-1 (driver) (4). 2. Remove the control arm from the vise. 3. Install the upper control arm See: Service and Repair/Front Upper Control Arm - Installation . 4. Perform a wheel alignment See: Alignment/Service and Repair . Lower Control Arm Shock Bushing - IFS 4X4 LOWER CONTROL ARM SHOCK BUSHING - IFS 4X4 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Control Arm > Control Arm Bushing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 11450 NOTE: Extreme pressure lubrication must be used on the threaded portions of the tool. This will increase the longevity of the tool and insure proper operation during the removal and installation process. 1. Install the new shock bushing (3) into the lower control arm (4) using tools C-4212-F (Press) (1), 9653-3 (driver) (2), 9773 (Receiver) (5) will automatically set the depth of the bushing in the control arm. 2. Install the lower part of the shock (5) into the lower control arm shock bushing (7). 3. Install and position bolt (6) so head of bolt is facing rearward of vehicle and hand start nut. Tighten the bolt (6) & nut to 81 Nm (60 ft. lbs.). 4. Install the upper ball joint to the knuckle and install the retaining nut. 5. Install and tighten the axle hub nut. 6. Install the stabilizer link lower nut. 7. Reconnect the wheel speed sensor wiring to the knuckle and upper control arm. 8. Install the rotor See: Brakes and Traction Control/Disc Brake System/Brake Rotor/Disc/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Brake Rotor - Installation . 9. Install the caliper adapter with the caliper See: Brakes and Traction Control/Disc Brake System/Brake Caliper/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Disc Brake Caliper Adapter - Installation . 10. Remove the support from the lower control arm outboard end. 11. Install the tire and wheel assembly See: Wheels and Tires/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement . 12. Remove the support and lower the vehicle. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Cross-Member > Front Cross-Member > System Information > Service and Repair > Front Crossmember - Removal Front Cross-Member: Service and Repair Front Crossmember - Removal REMOVAL 1. Raise and support the vehicle See: Wheels and Tires/Vehicle Lifting/Service and Repair . 2. Remove the front skid plate (2 - if equipped) See: Body and Frame/Frame/Skid Plate/Service and Repair/Front Skid Plate/Removal . Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Cross-Member > Front Cross-Member > System Information > Service and Repair > Front Crossmember - Removal > Page 11456 3. On the 2WD models, remove the bolts (2) and remove the crossmember (1). 4. On the 4WD models, remove the bolts (1) and remove the crossmember (2). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Cross-Member > Front Cross-Member > System Information > Service and Repair > Front Crossmember - Removal > Page 11457 Front Cross-Member: Service and Repair Front Crossmember - Installation INSTALLATION 1. Install the crossmember (1). 2. Install the bolts (2); - On light duty 2WD vehicles, tighten the bolts to 61 Nm (45 ft. lbs.). - On heavy duty 2WD vehicles, tighten the bolts to 75 Nm (55 ft. lbs.). 3. On 4WD models, install the crossmember (2). 4. Install the bolts (1) and tighten to 102 Nm (75 ft. lbs.). 5. Install the front skid plate, if equipped (2) See: Body and Frame/Frame/Skid Plate/Service and Repair/Front Skid Plate/Installation Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Front Steering Knuckle > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description - Independent Front Suspension Front Steering Knuckle: Description and Operation Description - Independent Front Suspension DESCRIPTION The knuckle (1) is a single casting with legs machined for the upper and lower ball joints. The knuckle also has machined mounting locations for the front brake calipers and hub bearing. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Front Steering Knuckle > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description - Independent Front Suspension > Page 11462 Front Steering Knuckle: Description and Operation Operation - Independent Front Suspension OPERATION The steering knuckle pivot between the upper and lower ball joint. Steering linkage attached to the knuckle allows the vehicle to be steered. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Front Steering Knuckle > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Steering Knuckle - Removal Front Steering Knuckle: Service and Repair Front Steering Knuckle - Removal (LD) 4X2 & 4X4 - Independent Front Suspension (LD) 4X2 & 4X4 1. Raise and support the vehicle. 2. Remove the wheel and tire assembly. 3. Remove the brake caliper, rotor See: Brakes and Traction Control/Disc Brake System/Brake Rotor/Disc/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Brake Rotor - Removal, shield and ABS wheel speed sensor if equipped See: Brakes and Traction Control/Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems/Wheel Speed Sensor/Service and Repair/Front Wheel Speed Sensor - Removal . 4. Remove the tie rod end nut. Separate the tie rod from the knuckle with Remover 9360. 5. Remove the halfshaft nut (4X4 only). 6. Remove the upper ball joint nut. Separate the ball joint (4) from the knuckle (6) with Remover 9360 (5) Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Front Steering Knuckle > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Steering Knuckle - Removal > Page 11465 CAUTION: When installing puller 8677 to separate the ball joint, be careful not to damage the ball joint seal. 7. Remove the lower ball joint nut. Separate the ball joint from the knuckle with Remover 8677 (2). 8. Remove the steering knuckle (1) from the vehicle. 9. Remove the hub/bearing from the steering knuckle on the bench See: Wheel Bearing/Service and Repair/Front Hub / Bearing - Removal . 2500 & 3500 - 4WD - Link/Coil 2500 & 3500 - 4WD 1. Remove the hub bearing See: Wheel Bearing/Service and Repair/Front Hub / Bearing - Removal . 2. Remove tie-rod or drag link end from the steering knuckle arm. 3. Remove the wheel speed sensor. See: Brakes and Traction Control/Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems/Wheel Speed Sensor/Service and Repair/Front Wheel Speed Sensor - Removal . 4. Loosen the upper ball stud nut.Do not remove the nut at this time. 5. Remove the lower ball joint nut. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Front Steering Knuckle > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Steering Knuckle - Removal > Page 11466 6. Separate the lower ball joint (4) using special tool C-4150A separator (3). 7. Remove the upper ball joint nut. 8. Remove the steering knuckle (2). 4500 & 5500 - Link/Coil 4500 & 5500 1. Remove tie-rod or drag link end from the steering knuckle arm. 2. Remove the disc brake caliper bolts (1) and the disc brake caliper (2). 3. Remove the disc brake caliper adapter bolts (1) and remove the adapter (2). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Front Steering Knuckle > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Steering Knuckle - Removal > Page 11467 4. Remove the disc brake rotor (1) and the hub extension (2). 5. Remove the wheel speed sensor (2) See: Brakes and Traction Control/Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems/Wheel Speed Sensor/Service and Repair/Front Wheel Speed Sensor - Removal . 6. Remove the hub bearing bolts (1) and the hub/bearing See: Wheel Bearing/Service and Repair/Front Hub / Bearing - Removal . 7. Remove the axle shaft nut (3) if equipped. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Front Steering Knuckle > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Steering Knuckle - Removal > Page 11468 8. Remove the upper ball stud nut (1). 9. Remove the upper ball joint (2) See: Ball Joint/Service and Repair/Front Upper Ball Joint Removal . 10. Remove the lower ball joint nut (3). 11. Separate the lower ball joint (3) from the knuckle (2) using special tool 8677 separator (4). 12. Remove the steering knuckle (2). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Front Steering Knuckle > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Steering Knuckle - Removal > Page 11469 13. Remove the dust shield (2) from the knuckle if needed. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Front Steering Knuckle > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Steering Knuckle - Removal > Page 11470 Front Steering Knuckle: Service and Repair Front Steering Knuckle - Installation (LD) 4X2 & 4X4 - Independent Front Suspension (LD) 4X2 & 4X4 CAUTION: The ball joint stud tapers must be CLEAN and DRY before installing the knuckle. Clean the stud tapers with mineral spirits to remove dirt and grease. NOTE: When installing hub/bearing with ABS brakes, position the speed sensor opening towards the front of the vehicle. 1. Install the hub/bearing to the steering knuckle (1) and tighten the bolts to 163 Nm (120 ft. lbs.). 2. Install the knuckle (1) onto the upper and lower ball joints. 3. Install the upper and lower ball joint nuts. Tighten the upper ball joint nut to 54 Nm (40 ft. lbs.) (an additional 90° turn is required) and the lower ball joint nut to 52 Nm (38 ft. lbs.)(an additional 90° turn is required). 4. Remove the hydraulic jack from the lower suspension arm (4). 5. Install the tie rod end and tighten the nut to 61 Nm (45 ft. lbs.). 6. Install the front halfshaft into the hub/bearing (if equipped). 7. Install the the halfshaft nut and tighten to 251 Nm (185 ft. lbs.) (if equipped). 8. Install the ABS wheel speed sensor (if equipped) See: Brakes and Traction Control/Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems/Wheel Speed Sensor/Service and Repair/Front Wheel Speed Sensor - Installation and brake shield, rotor and caliper See: Brakes and Traction Control/Disc Brake System/Brake Rotor/Disc/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Brake Rotor - Installation . 9. Install the wheel and tire assembly See: Wheels and Tires/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement . 10. Remove the support and lower the vehicle. 11. Perform a wheel alignment See: Alignment/Service and Repair . 2500 & 3500 - 4WD - Link/Coil 2500 & 3500 - 4WD 1. Position the steering knuckle on the ball studs. 2. Install and tighten lower ball stud nut to 47 Nm (35 ft. lbs.) torque. 3. Install and tighten upper ball stud nut to 94 Nm (70 ft. lbs.) torque. 4. Retorque lower ball stud nut to 200 Nm (148 ft. lbs.) torque. 5. Install the hub bearing See: Wheel Bearing/Service and Repair/Front Hub / Bearing - Installation . 6. Install tie-rod or drag link end onto the steering knuckle arm. 7. Install the wheel speed sensor. See: Brakes and Traction Control/Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems/Wheel Speed Sensor/Service and Repair/Front Wheel Speed Sensor - Installation . 4500 & 5500 - Link/Coil 4500 & 5500 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Front Steering Knuckle > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Steering Knuckle - Removal > Page 11471 1. Position the steering knuckle (1) on the ball stud. 2. Install and tighten lower ball stud nut (3) to 47 Nm (35 ft. lbs.) torque. 3. Install the upper ball joint (2) into the steering knuckle Tighten to make sure the wheel speed sensor bracket (3) for the wire is installed between the knuckle and ball joint (2). 4. Install and tighten upper ball stud nut (1) to 94 Nm (70 ft. lbs.) torque. 5. Retorque lower ball stud nut to 200 Nm (148 ft. lbs.) torque. 6. Install the hub bearing and tighten the bolts (1) to See: Wheel Bearing/Service and Repair/Front Hub / Bearing - Installation . Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Front Steering Knuckle > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Steering Knuckle - Removal > Page 11472 7. Install the wheel speed sensor (2). See: Brakes and Traction Control/Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems/Wheel Speed Sensor/Service and Repair/Front Wheel Speed Sensor - Installation . 8. Install the dust shield (2) if removed. 9. Install the disc brake rotor (1) and extension (2) to the hub/bearing. 10. Install the disc brake caliper adapter (2) and bolts (1). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Front Steering Knuckle > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Steering Knuckle - Removal > Page 11473 11. Install the disc brake caliper (2) and tighten the bolts (1). 12. Install tie-rod or drag link end onto the steering knuckle arm. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Lateral Stabilizer Rod > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Lateral Stabilizer Rod: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL 1. Raise and support the axle. 2. Remove the track bar bolts (2) and nuts (3). 3. Remove the track bar (1). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Lateral Stabilizer Rod > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 11478 Lateral Stabilizer Rod: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION 1. Install the track bar (1). 2. Install the new bolts (2) and nuts (3). See torque spec table for the various bolt combinations per application See: Steering/Specifications . 3. Remove the supports under the axle and lower the vehicle to the ground. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Suspension > Suspension Mode Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Component ID 473 Suspension Mode Switch: Diagrams Component ID 473 Component ID: 473 Component : SWITCH-DISCONNECTING STABILIZER BAR Connector: Name : SWITCH-DISCONNECTING STABILIZER BAR Color : BLACK # of pins : 12 Pin Circuit Description 1 T537 20YL/LG LOCKER SWITCH SUPPLY 2 T535 20YL/BR LOCKER SWITCH SENSE 3 T531 20YL/TN STABILIZER BAR SWITCH SENSE 4 T536 20YL/WT SWITCH SUPPLY 5 T532 20YL/GY LOCKER OPEN ILLUMINATION SENSE 6 T533 20YL/LB LOCKER REAR ILLUMINATION SENSE 7 T534 20YL LOCKER FR/RR ILLUMINATION SENSE 8 T530 20YL/DG STABILIZER BAR DISENGAGE ILLUMINATION SENSE 9 T529 20YL/LG STABILIZER BAR ENGAGE ILLUMINATION SENSE 10 - 11 E11 20OR/DB PANEL LAMPS DRIVER 12 Z952 20BK GROUND Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Suspension > Suspension Mode Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Component ID 473 > Page 11484 Suspension Mode Switch: Diagrams Component ID 484 Component ID: 484 Component : SWITCH-DISCONNECTING STABILIZER BAR Connector: Name : SWITCH-DISCONNECTING STABILIZER BAR Color : BLACK # of pins : 12 Pin Circuit Description 1 T537 20YL/LG LOCKER SWITCH SUPPLY 2 T535 20YL/BR LOCKER SWITCH SENSE 3 T531 20YL/TN STABILIZER BAR SWITCH SENSE 4 T536 20YL/WT SWITCH SUPPLY 5 T532 20YL/GY LOCKER OPEN ILLUMINATION SENSE 6 T533 20YL/LB LOCKER REAR ILLUMINATION SENSE 7 T534 20YL LOCKER FR/RR ILLUMINATION SENSE 8 T530 20YL/DG STABILIZER BAR DISENGAGE ILLUMINATION SENSE 9 T529 20YL/LG STABILIZER BAR ENGAGE ILLUMINATION SENSE 10 - 11 E11 20OR/DB PANEL LAMPS DRIVER 12 Z952 20BK GROUND Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Stabilizer Bar, Sway Control > Stabilizer Link > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Stabilizer Link - Removal Stabilizer Link: Service and Repair Front Stabilizer Link - Removal 4X4 - Independent Front Suspension 4X4 NOTE: It may be necessary to remove the other stabilizer link upper nut (4) in order to remove the link (5) being worked on from the vehicle. 1. Raise and support the vehicle. 2. Remove the lower nut (6). 3. Remove the upper nut, retainers and grommets (4). 4. Remove the stabilizer link (5) from the vehicle. Stabilizer Link - Link/Coil STABILIZER LINK 1. Raise and support the vehicle. 2. Hold the stabilizer link (5) shafts with a wrench and remove the link nuts at the stabilizer bar (3). 3. Remove the retainers (1) and grommets (2) from the stabilizer bar links (5). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Stabilizer Bar, Sway Control > Stabilizer Link > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Stabilizer Link - Removal > Page 11490 4. Remove the stabilizer bar link nuts from the axle brackets. 5. Remove the links (2) from the axle brackets with Puller C-3894-A (1). Stabilizer Link With Disconnecting Stabilizer Bar - Link/Coil STABILIZER LINK WITH DISCONNECTING STABILIZER BAR 1. Raise and support the vehicle. 2. Hold the stabilizer link (1) shafts with a wrench and remove the link nuts (3) at the stabilizer bar (2). 3. Remove the stabilizer bar link nuts from the axle brackets (2). 4. Remove the links (1) from the axle brackets (2) with Puller 9360 (3). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Stabilizer Bar, Sway Control > Stabilizer Link > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Stabilizer Link - Removal > Page 11491 Stabilizer Link: Service and Repair Front Stabilizer Link - Installation 4X4 - Independent Front Suspension 4X4 1. Install the stabilizer link (5) to the vehicle. 2. Install the lower nut (6) and Tighten to 102 Nm (75 ft. lbs.). 3. Install the retainers, grommets and upper nut (4) and Tighten to 27 Nm (20 ft. lbs.). 4. Remove the support and lower the vehicle. Stabilizer Link - Link/Coil STABILIZER LINK 1. Install links (5) to the axle bracket (4) and tighten nut to 149 Nm (110 ft. lbs.). 2. Install links (5), retainers (1), grommets (2) and nuts to the stabilizer bar. Hold the link shaft with a wrench and tighten the nuts to 38 Nm (27 ft. lbs.). 3. Remove the supports and lower the vehicle. Stabilizer Link With Disconnecting Stabilizer Bar - Link/Coil STABILIZER LINK WITH DISCONNECTING STABILIZER BAR Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Stabilizer Bar, Sway Control > Stabilizer Link > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Stabilizer Link - Removal > Page 11492 1. Install links (1) to the axle bracket (5) and tighten nut (4) to 149 Nm (110 ft. lbs.). 2. Install links (1) and nuts (3) to the stabilizer bar (2). Hold the link shaft with a wrench and tighten the nuts to 149 Nm (110 ft. lbs.). 3. Remove the supports and lower the vehicle. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Stabilizer Bar, Sway Control > Stabilizer Link > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Stabilizer Link - Removal > Page 11493 Stabilizer Link: Service and Repair Rear Stabilizer Link - Removal REMOVAL 1. Raise and support the vehicle. 2. Remove the upper nut (2) at the frame bracket. 3. Remove the lower link nut (3) at the stabilizer bar (4). 4. Remove the link (1) from the bar. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Stabilizer Bar, Sway Control > Stabilizer Link > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Stabilizer Link - Removal > Page 11494 Stabilizer Link: Service and Repair Rear Stabilizer Link - Installation INSTALLATION 1. Install the link (1) to the bar (4). 2. Install the lower link nut (3) at the stabilizer bar. Tighten the nuts to 38 Nm (27 ft.lbs). 3. Install the upper link nut (2) at the frame bracket. Tighten the bolts to 61 Nm (45 ft.lbs). 4. Lower the vehicle. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Control ( Automatic - Electronic ) > Suspension Mode Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Component ID 473 Suspension Mode Switch: Diagrams Component ID 473 Component ID: 473 Component : SWITCH-DISCONNECTING STABILIZER BAR Connector: Name : SWITCH-DISCONNECTING STABILIZER BAR Color : BLACK # of pins : 12 Pin Circuit Description 1 T537 20YL/LG LOCKER SWITCH SUPPLY 2 T535 20YL/BR LOCKER SWITCH SENSE 3 T531 20YL/TN STABILIZER BAR SWITCH SENSE 4 T536 20YL/WT SWITCH SUPPLY 5 T532 20YL/GY LOCKER OPEN ILLUMINATION SENSE 6 T533 20YL/LB LOCKER REAR ILLUMINATION SENSE 7 T534 20YL LOCKER FR/RR ILLUMINATION SENSE 8 T530 20YL/DG STABILIZER BAR DISENGAGE ILLUMINATION SENSE 9 T529 20YL/LG STABILIZER BAR ENGAGE ILLUMINATION SENSE 10 - 11 E11 20OR/DB PANEL LAMPS DRIVER 12 Z952 20BK GROUND Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Control ( Automatic - Electronic ) > Suspension Mode Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Component ID 473 > Page 11500 Suspension Mode Switch: Diagrams Component ID 484 Component ID: 484 Component : SWITCH-DISCONNECTING STABILIZER BAR Connector: Name : SWITCH-DISCONNECTING STABILIZER BAR Color : BLACK # of pins : 12 Pin Circuit Description 1 T537 20YL/LG LOCKER SWITCH SUPPLY 2 T535 20YL/BR LOCKER SWITCH SENSE 3 T531 20YL/TN STABILIZER BAR SWITCH SENSE 4 T536 20YL/WT SWITCH SUPPLY 5 T532 20YL/GY LOCKER OPEN ILLUMINATION SENSE 6 T533 20YL/LB LOCKER REAR ILLUMINATION SENSE 7 T534 20YL LOCKER FR/RR ILLUMINATION SENSE 8 T530 20YL/DG STABILIZER BAR DISENGAGE ILLUMINATION SENSE 9 T529 20YL/LG STABILIZER BAR ENGAGE ILLUMINATION SENSE 10 - 11 E11 20OR/DB PANEL LAMPS DRIVER 12 Z952 20BK GROUND Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Spring ( Coil / Leaf ) > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Suspension Spring ( Coil / Leaf ): Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The rear suspension system uses a multi-leaf springs and a solid drive axle. The forward end of the springs are mounted to the body rail hangers through rubber bushings. The rearward end of the springs are attached to the body by the use of shackles. The spring and shackles use rubber bushings. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Spring ( Coil / Leaf ) > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 11505 Suspension Spring ( Coil / Leaf ): Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The springs control ride quality and maintain vehicle ride height. The shackles allow the springs to change their length as the vehicle moves over various road conditions. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Spring ( Coil / Leaf ) > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Spring - Removal Suspension Spring ( Coil / Leaf ): Service and Repair Front Spring - Removal 4X4-Coil Over - Independent Front Suspension 4X4-COIL OVER 1. Remove the shock (1) See: Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber/Service and Repair/Front Strut / Shock/Removal . 2. Install the shock assembly (3) in the Branick 7200(R) spring removal/installation tool or equivalent (1). 3. Compress the spring (2). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Spring ( Coil / Leaf ) > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Spring - Removal > Page 11508 4. Position shock wrench 9362 (1), on shock shaft retaining nut. Next, insert 8 mm socket though Wrench onto hex located on end of shock shaft. While holding shock shaft from turning, remove nut from shock shaft using Wrench (1). 5. Remove the upper shock nut. 6. Remove the shock upper mounting plate. 7. Remove and inspect the upper spring isolator (2). 8. Remove the shock. Link/Coil REMOVAL 1. Raise and support the vehicle. Position a hydraulic jack under the axle to support it. 2. Paint or scribe alignment marks on lower suspension arm cam adjusters and axle bracket for installation reference. 3. Remove the upper suspension arm and loosen lower suspension arm bolts. 4. Mark and disconnect the front propeller shaft from the axle 4x4 models. 5. Disconnect the track bar from the frame rail bracket. 6. Disconnect the drag link from pitman arm. 7. Disconnect the stabilizer bar link and shock absorber from the axle. 8. Lower the axle until the spring is free from the upper mount. Remove the coil spring. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Spring ( Coil / Leaf ) > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Spring - Removal > Page 11509 Suspension Spring ( Coil / Leaf ): Service and Repair Front Spring - Installation 4X4-Coil Over - Independent Front Suspension 4X4-COIL OVER 1. Position the shock (1) into the coil spring (3). 2. Install the upper isolator (2). 3. Install the upper shock mounting plate (2). 4. Install the shock upper mounting nut. 5. Install shock wrench 9362 (1) (on end of a torque wrench), on shock shaft retaining nut. Next, insert 8 mm socket though Wrench onto hex located on end of shock shaft. While holding shock shaft from turning, tighten nut using Wrench to 90 Nm (66 ft. lbs.) torque. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Spring ( Coil / Leaf ) > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Spring - Removal > Page 11510 6. Decompress the spring (2). 7. Remove the shock assembly from the spring compressor tool (1). 8. Install the shock assembly (1) See: Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber/Service and Repair/Front Strut / Shock/Installation . Link/Coil INSTALLATION 1. Position the coil spring on the axle pad. 2. Raise the axle into position until the spring seats in the upper mount. 3. Connect the stabilizer bar links and shock absorbers to the axle bracket. Connect the track bar to the frame rail bracket. 4. Install the upper suspension arm. 5. Install the front propeller shaft to the axle 4x4 model. 6. Install drag link to pitman arm and tighten nut to specifications. Install new cotter pin. 7. Remove the supports and lower the vehicle. 8. Tighten the following suspension components to specifications: - Link to stabilizer bar nut. - Lower shock bolt. - Track bar bolt at axle shaft tube bracket. - Upper suspension arm nut at axle bracket. - Upper suspension nut at frame bracket. - Align lower suspension arm reference marks and tighten cam nut. - Lower suspension nut at frame bracket. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Spring ( Coil / Leaf ) > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Spring - Removal > Page 11511 Suspension Spring ( Coil / Leaf ): Service and Repair Rear-Leaf Spring Bushings Removal REMOVAL NOTE: When removing the LD front eye bushing be sure to note the orientation of the "voids" or holes. The voids need to be in line with the main leaf when installing the new bushing or vehicle ride will degrade. 1. Remove the spring from the vehicle. 2. Make small relief cuts in the flared up end of the bushing metal being careful not to cut the spring. Use a punch to bend the flared bushing metal down for push out. 3. Position the spring eye in a press. 4. Press the bushing out with an appropriate size driver. Installation INSTALLATION NOTE: When installing the LD front eye bushing be sure to note the orientation of the "voids" or holes. The voids need to be in line with the main leaf when installing the new bushing or vehicle ride will degrade. 1. Press new bushing into the spring eye with an appropriate size driver. The bushing should be centered in the spring eye. 2. Stake the outer metal of the bushing in a minimum of six points to retain the bushing. 3. Install the spring on the vehicle. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Spring ( Coil / Leaf ) > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Spring - Removal > Page 11512 Suspension Spring ( Coil / Leaf ): Service and Repair Rear Suspension Removal REMOVAL 1. Remove the nut (1) securing the auxiliary spring bumper (2) to the bracket. 2. Remove the auxiliary spring bumper (2). Installation INSTALLATION 1. Install the auxiliary spring bumper (2). 2. Install the nut (1) securing the auxiliary spring bumper (2) to the bracket. Tighten the nut to 25 Nm (34 ft. lbs.). Rear Spring - Removal REMOVAL Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Spring ( Coil / Leaf ) > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Spring - Removal > Page 11513 1. Raise and support the vehicle. 2. Support the axle with a suitable holding fixture. 3. Remove the nuts (2), spring clamp bolts (1) and the plate that attach the spring (3) to the axle. 4. Remove the nuts (2) and bolts from the spring front and rear shackle (3). 5. Remove the spring (1) from the vehicle. Rear Spring - Installation INSTALLATION 1. Position spring (1) on axle shaft tube so spring center bolt is inserted into the locating hole in the axle tube. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Spring ( Coil / Leaf ) > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Spring - Removal > Page 11514 2. Align the front of the spring with the bolt hole in the front bracket. Install the eye pivot bolt and nut (4). 3. Align the rear of the spring (1) into the shackle (3) and install the bolt and nut (2). 4. Tighten the spring front and rear eye pivot bolt snug, Do not torque. 5. Install the spring clamp bolts (1), plate (3) and the retaining nuts (2). 6. Remove the holding fixture for the rear axle. 7. Remove the supports and lower the vehicle so that the weight is being supported by the tires. 8. Tighten the spring clamp retaining nuts (3) to 149 Nm (110 ft. lbs.). 9. Tighten the spring front and rear pivot bolt nuts to 163 Nm (120 ft. lbs.)(LD) or 230 Nm (170 ft. lbs.)(HD). Removal REMOVAL 1. Raise and support the vehicle. 2. Remove both rear tire and wheel assemblies Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Spring ( Coil / Leaf ) > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Spring - Removal > Page 11515 3. Position a large C-Clamp (3) adjacent to the spring clinch clip (1) and clamp the leaves of the spring together CAUTION: When working on the front leaf spring clinch clamps finish the front before starting on the rear to prevent personal injury. 4. Use an appropriate pry bar (2) to bend open the spring clinch clip (1). If necessary, remove the existing spring clinch clip isolators. 5. Use the pry bar (2) to spread apart the leaf (1). The clearance between the leaves should be enough to remove the old liner (if necessary) and install the replacement liner. 6. If necessary, remove the old spring tip liner (1). Installation INSTALLATION 1. With the prybar still inserted between the leaves, install a new spring tip liner onto the leaf. 2. Firmly seat the spring tip liner onto the leaf. A C-Clamp (1) can be used to compress the adjacent leaves together which will seat the liner retaining pin into the hole. NOTE: The spring tip liner is properly installed when the retaining pin is pointing toward the pavement and the wear pad is contacting the leaf spring. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Spring ( Coil / Leaf ) > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Spring - Removal > Page 11516 3. Apply a small amount of lubricant oil onto the tip liner wear pad. 4. Install all the spring tip liners. 5. Place one spring clinch clip isolator (1) onto the outboard side of the spring clinch clip and one isolator on the inboard side of the spring clinch clip. 6. Using large adjustable pliers (2) , close the spring clinch clip (1) until the isolator contacts the leaf spring. CAUTION: Do not use a hammer to close the spring clinch clip. Damage to the isolator may result. 7. Use an appropriate pry bar to bend open the spring clinch clip. If necessary, remove the existing spring clinch clip isolators. 8. Repeat procedure for the other side of the vehicle. 9. Install the tire wheel assemblies. 10. Lower the vehicle. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Diagnosis and Testing - Shock - Independent Front Suspension Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber: Testing and Inspection Diagnosis and Testing - Shock Independent Front Suspension DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING A knocking or rattling noise from a shock absorber may be caused by movement between mounting bushings and metal brackets or attaching components. These noises can usually be stopped by tightening the attaching nuts. If the noise persists, inspect for damaged and worn bushings, and attaching components. Repair as necessary if any of these conditions exist. WARNING: The shock absorbers are under high pressure. Do Not heat or attempt to open the shock absorbers. A squeal noise from the shock absorber may be caused by the hydraulic valving and may be intermittent. This condition is not repairable and the shock absorber must be replaced. A squeak or creak noise coming from the shock area may be related to any of the suspension components or mounts, but not necessarily the shock. NOTE: When inspecting the shock absorber, do not clamp the body or the piston rod. NOTE: Monotube shock absorber compression forces will be much higher than standard shock absorbers. The shock absorbers are not refillable or adjustable. If a malfunction occurs, the shock absorber must be replaced. To check a shock absorber, grasp the tube and invert the shock so the piston rod touches the ground, then compress the shock four or five times. The action throughout each stroke should be smooth and even, and the piston rod should extend from the shock on its own. The shock absorber bushings do not require any type of lubrication. Do not attempt to stop bushing noise by lubricating them. Grease and mineral oil-base lubricants will deteriorate the bushing. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Diagnosis and Testing - Shock - Independent Front Suspension > Page 11521 Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber: Testing and Inspection Diagnosis and Testing - Shock Link/Coil DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING A knocking or rattling noise from a shock absorber (5) may be caused by movement between mounting grommets (1&6) and metal brackets (3) or attaching components. These noises can usually be stopped by tightening the attaching nuts. If the noise persists, inspect for damaged and worn bushings, and attaching components. Repair as necessary if any of these conditions exist. A squeaking noise from the shock absorber may be caused by the hydraulic valving and may be intermittent. This condition is not repairable and the shock absorber must be replaced. The shock absorbers are not refillable or adjustable. If a malfunction occurs, the shock absorber must be replaced. To test a shock absorber, hold it in an upright position and force the piston in and out of the cylinder four or five times. The action throughout each stroke should be smooth and even. The shock absorber bushings do not require any type of lubrication. Do not attempt to stop bushing noise by lubricating them. Grease and mineral oil-base lubricants will deteriorate the bushing. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Strut / Shock Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber: Service and Repair Front Strut / Shock 4X4-Coil Over - Independent Front Suspension 4X4-COIL OVER 1. Raise and support the vehicle. 2. Remove the tire and wheel assembly. 3. Support the lower control arm outboard end. 4. Remove the three upper shock nuts (1). 5. Remove the lower shock bolt (6) and nut. 6. Remove the caliper adapter with the caliper See: Brakes and Traction Control/Disc Brake System/Brake Caliper/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Disc Brake Caliper Adapter - Removal . 7. Remove the rotor See: Brakes and Traction Control/Disc Brake System/Brake Rotor/Disc/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Brake Rotor - Removal . 8. Disconnect the wheel speed sensor wiring from the knuckle and upper control arm. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Strut / Shock > Page 11524 9. Remove the upper ball joint retaining nut and separate the upper ball joint (4) from the knuckle (6) using separator 9360 (5). 10. Remove the stabilizer link lower nut (2). 11. Remove the axle hub nut. 12. Remove the shock assembly (1). Link/Coil REMOVAL Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Strut / Shock > Page 11525 1. Remove the nut, retainer (4) and grommet (1) from the upper stud in the engine compartment. 2. Remove three nuts from the upper shock bracket (3). 3. Remove the lower bolt (4) from the axle bracket. Remove the shock absorber (1) from engine compartment. 4X4-Coil Over - Independent Front Suspension 4X4-COIL OVER NOTE: All suspension components should be tighten with the weight of the vehicle on them (curb height). 1. Install the shock (1) back in place in the vehicle. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Strut / Shock > Page 11526 2. Install the upper part of the shock (2) into the frame bracket (3). 3. Install the upper nuts (1). Tighten to 61 Nm (45 ft. lbs.). 4. Install the lower part of the shock (5) into the lower control arm shock bushing (7). 5. Install and position bolt (6) so head of bolt is facing rearward of vehicle and hand start nut. Tighten the bolt (6) & nut to 210 Nm (155 ft. lbs.). 6. Install the upper ball joint to the knuckle and install the retaining nut. 7. Install and tighten the axle hub nut. 8. Install the stabilizer link lower nut. 9. Reconnect the wheel speed sensor wiring to the knuckle and upper control arm. 10. Install the rotor See: Brakes and Traction Control/Disc Brake System/Brake Rotor/Disc/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Brake Rotor - Installation . 11. Install the caliper adapter with the caliper See: Brakes and Traction Control/Disc Brake System/Brake Caliper/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Disc Brake Caliper Adapter - Installation . 12. Remove the support from the lower control arm outboard end. 13. Install the tire and wheel assembly See: Wheels and Tires/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement . 14. Remove the support and lower the vehicle. Link/Coil INSTALLATION 1. Position the lower retainer (4) and grommet (6) on the upper stud. Insert the shock absorber (5) through the spring from engine compartment. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Strut / Shock > Page 11527 2. Install the lower bolt (4) and tighten to 135 Nm (100 ft. lbs.). 3. Install the upper shock bracket (3) and three nuts. Tighten nuts to 75 Nm (55 ft. lbs.). 4. Install upper grommet (1) and retainer (2). Install upper shock nut and tighten to 54 Nm (40 ft. lbs). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Strut / Shock > Page 11528 Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber: Service and Repair Rear Shock Absorber Removal REMOVAL 1. Raise vehicle and support the axle. NOTE: The rear upper shock attachment uses a flag nut. Do not use an air tool to remove the bolt, the flag may rotate into the bottom of the bed and cause damage. Use a wrench to hold the nut when loosening. 2. Remove the upper shock bolt and nut (1). 3. Remove the lower shock bolt and nut. 4. Remove the rear shock absorber (3) from the vehicle. Installation INSTALLATION 1. Position the shock absorber (3) in the brackets. 2. Install the bolts through the brackets and the shock. Install the flag nut (1) on the top bolt and nut on lower bolt. 3. Tighten the upper and lower bolt/nuts. Tighten to 135 N.m (100 ft. lbs.) 4. Remove the support and lower the vehicle. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Travel Bumper > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Suspension Travel Bumper: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL 1. Remove the two bolts (1) securing the jounce bumper (2) to the bracket. 2. Remove the jounce bumper (2). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Travel Bumper > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 11533 Suspension Travel Bumper: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION 1. Install the jounce bumper (2). 2. Install the two bolts (1) securing the jounce bumper (2) to the bracket. Tighten the bolts to 40 Nm (30 ft. lbs.)(LD) or Tighten the bolts to 61 Nm (45 ft. lbs.)(HD). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Specifications Wheel Bearing: Specifications Wheel Bearing Grease ............................................................................................................. Mopar Multi-Purpose Lubricant NLGI Grade 2 EP, GC-LB Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Hub / Bearing - Removal Wheel Bearing: Service and Repair Front Hub / Bearing - Removal 4X4 - Independent Front Suspension 4X4 1. Raise and support the vehicle. 2. Remove the wheel and tire assembly. 3. Remove the brake caliper and rotor See: Brakes and Traction Control/Disc Brake System/Brake Rotor/Disc/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Brake Rotor - Removal . 4. Remove the ABS wheel speed sensor if equipped, See: Brakes and Traction Control/Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems/Wheel Speed Sensor/Service and Repair/Front Wheel Speed Sensor - Removal . 5. Remove the halfshaft nut. NOTE: Do not strike the knuckle with a hammer to remove the tie rod end or the ball joint. Damage to the steering knuckle will occur. 6. Remove the tie rod end nut and separate the tie rod from the knuckle using remover 9360. 7. Remove the upper ball joint nut and separate the upper ball joint from the knuckle using remover 9360. 8. Pull down on the steering knuckle to separate the halfshaft (2) from the hub/bearing. 9. Remove the three hub/bearing mounting bolts (1) from the steering knuckle. 10. Slide the hub/bearing out of the steering knuckle. 11. Remove the brake dust shield. 2500 & 3500 - 4WD - Link/Coil 2500 & 3500 - 4WD 1. Raise and support the vehicle. 2. Remove the wheel and tire assembly. 3. Remove the hub extension (1) mounting nuts and remove the extension from the rotor if equipped. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Hub / Bearing - Removal > Page 11539 4. Remove the brake caliper, See: Brakes and Traction Control/Disc Brake System/Brake Caliper/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Disc Brake Caliper - Removal . 5. Remove the cotter pin (2) and the hub nut (1) from the axle shaft. 6. Remove the caliper adapter. See: Brakes and Traction Control/Disc Brake System/Brake Caliper/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Disc Brake Caliper Adapter - Removal . 7. Remove the disc brake rotor. See: Brakes and Traction Control/Disc Brake System/Brake Rotor/Disc/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Brake Rotor - Removal . 8. Disconnect the wheel speed sensor wire. 9. Remove the hub/bearing 4 mounting bolts and remove the hub/bearing. 4500 & 5500 - Link/Coil 4500 & 5500 1. Raise and support the vehicle. 2. Remove the wheel and tire assembly. 3. Remove the brake caliper, See: Brakes and Traction Control/Disc Brake System/Brake Caliper/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Disc Brake Caliper - Removal . 4. Remove the caliper adapter. See: Brakes and Traction Control/Disc Brake System/Brake Caliper/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Disc Brake Caliper Adapter - Removal . 5. Remove the hub extension (2) and disc brake rotor (1) See: Brakes and Traction Control/Disc Brake System/Brake Rotor/Disc/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Brake Rotor - Removal . 6. Remove the axle shaft nut (3) from the axle shaft. 7. Disconnect the wheel speed sensor wire and remove the wheel speed sensor bolt (1) from the hub/bearing then remove the sensor (2). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Hub / Bearing - Removal > Page 11540 8. Remove the hub/bearing 4 mounting bolts (1) and remove the hub/bearing. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Hub / Bearing - Removal > Page 11541 Wheel Bearing: Service and Repair Front Hub / Bearing - Installation 4X4 - Independent Front Suspension 4X4 1. Install the brake dust shield (2). 2. Install the hub/bearing (1) into the steering knuckle (3) and tighten the bolts to 163 Nm (120 ft. lbs.). 3. Install the brake rotor and caliper See: Brakes and Traction Control/Disc Brake System/Brake Rotor/Disc/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Brake Rotor - Installation . 4. Install the ABS wheel speed sensor if equipped See: Brakes and Traction Control/Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems/Wheel Speed Sensor/Service and Repair/Front Wheel Speed Sensor - Installation . 5. Install the upper ball joint nut to the steering knuckle and tighten to 54 Nm (40 ft. lbs.) (on 1500 series only an additional 90° turn). 6. Install the tie rod end nut to the steering knuckle and tighten to 61 Nm (45 ft. lbs.) then an additional 90°. 7. Install the halfshaft nut and tighten to 251 Nm (185 ft. lbs.). 8. Install the wheel and tire assembly See: Wheels and Tires/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement . 9. Remove the support and lower vehicle. 2500 & 3500 - 4WD - Link/Coil 2500 & 3500 - 4WD 1. Position the brake shield (1) on bolts. 2. Install the hub/bearing to the knuckle. Tighten the hub/bearing bolts (2) to 202 Nm (149 ft. lbs. 3. Install the hub nut and tighten to 356 Nm (263 ft. lbs.). 4. Install the wheel speed sensor to the hub. See: Brakes and Traction Control/Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems/Wheel Speed Sensor/Service and Repair/Front Wheel Speed Sensor - Installation . 5. Install the disc brake rotor. See: Brakes and Traction Control/Disc Brake System/Brake Rotor/Disc/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Brake Rotor - Installation . Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Hub / Bearing - Removal > Page 11542 6. Install the brake caliper adapter with the caliper, See: Brakes and Traction Control/Disc Brake System/Brake Caliper/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Disc Brake Caliper Adapter - Installation . 7. Install the hub extension and nuts to the front rotor. Tighten nuts to 130 Nm (96 ft.lbs). HD DRW ONLY. 8. Install the wheel and tire assemblies, See: Wheels and Tires/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement . 9. Remove the support and lower the vehicle. 10. Apply the brakes several times to seat the brake shoes and caliper piston. Do not move the vehicle until a firm brake pedal is obtained. 4500 & 5500 - Link/Coil 4500 & 5500 NOTE: If installing a NEW hub/bearing on a 4X4 only Steps 1-3 should be followed for the correct shim size. 1. Measure from the new hub/bearing unit crimp (2) to the flange (3). 2. Choose the correct shim according to the table: 3. Check the shim (2) on the axle shaft (3). Be sure that the shim (2) is placed with the radius side (1) to the joint. 4. Install the hub/bearing to the knuckle. Tighten the hub/bearing bolts (1) to 202 Nm (149 ft. lbs. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Hub / Bearing - Removal > Page 11543 5. Install the axle nut (3) and tighten to 356 Nm (263 ft. lbs.). 6. Install the wheel speed sensor 2) to the hub and tighten the bolt (1). See: Brakes and Traction Control/Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems/Wheel Speed Sensor/Service and Repair/Front Wheel Speed Sensor - Installation . 7. Install the disc brake rotor (1). See: Brakes and Traction Control/Disc Brake System/Brake Rotor/Disc/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Brake Rotor - Installation . 8. Install the hub extension (2) and nuts to the front rotor. Tighten nuts to 130 Nm (96 ft.lbs). 9. Install the brake caliper adapter with the caliper, See: Brakes and Traction Control/Disc Brake System/Brake Caliper/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Disc Brake Caliper Adapter - Installation . 10. Install the wheel and tire assemblies, See: Wheels and Tires/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement . 11. Remove the support and lower the vehicle. 12. Apply the brakes several times to seat the brake shoes and caliper piston. Do not move the vehicle until a firm brake pedal is obtained. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Wheel Hub > Axle Nut > Component Information > Specifications > 4X4 - Independent Front Suspension Axle Nut: Specifications 4X4 - Independent Front Suspension 4X4 Install the halfshaft nut and tighten to 251 Nm (185 ft. lbs.). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Wheel Hub > Axle Nut > Component Information > Specifications > 4X4 - Independent Front Suspension > Page 11549 Axle Nut: Specifications 2500 & 3500 - 4WD - Link/Coil 2500 & 3500 - 4WD Install the hub nut and tighten to 356 Nm (263 ft. lbs.). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Wheel Hub > Axle Nut > Component Information > Specifications > 4X4 - Independent Front Suspension > Page 11550 Axle Nut: Specifications 4500 & 5500 - Link/Coil 4500 & 5500 Install the axle nut (3) and tighten to 356 Nm (263 ft. lbs.). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Vehicle Lifting > Component Information > Service and Repair Vehicle Lifting: Service and Repair STANDARD PROCEDURE WARNING: The hoisting and jack lifting points provided are for a complete vehicle. When a chassis or drivetrain component is removed from a vehicle, the center of gravity is altered making some hoisting conditions unstable. Properly support or secure vehicle to hoisting device when these conditions exist. FLOOR JACK When properly positioned, a floor jack can be used to lift a vehicle. Support the vehicle in the raised position with jack stands at the front and rear ends of the frame rails. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Vehicle Lifting > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 11555 CAUTION: Do not lift vehicle with a floor jack positioned under: - An axle tube. - A body side sill. - A steering linkage component. - A drive shaft. - The engine or transmission oil pan. - The fuel tank. - A front suspension arm. NOTE: Use the correct front frame rail lifting locations only. NOTE: Use the correct rear frame rail lifting locations only. HOIST Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Vehicle Lifting > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 11556 A vehicle can be lifted with: - A single-post, frame-contact hoist. - A twin-post, chassis hoist. - A ramp-type, drive-on hoist. NOTE: When a frame-contact type hoist is used, verify that the lifting pads are positioned properly. NOTE: The forward lifting pads should be positioned against the forward flange of the transmission crossmember brackets at the bottom of the frame rail. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Vehicle Lifting > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 11557 NOTE: The rear lifting pads should be wedged between the forward flange of the leaf spring bracket and the frame rail. Safety stands should be placed under the frame rails at the front and rear ends. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Relays and Modules - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure Monitor Receiver / Transponder > Component Information > Locations > Transponder-Tire Pressure-Left Front Tire Pressure Monitor Receiver / Transponder: Locations Transponder-Tire Pressure-Left Front Component ID 521 Component ID: 521 Component : TRANSPONDER-TIRE PRESSURE-LEFT FRONT Connector: Name : TRANSPONDER-TIRE PRESSURE-LEFT FRONT Color : # of pins : 6 Pin Circuit Description 1 F504 20GY/PK FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN) 2 D508 20WT/GY COM-LIN TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR LAN 3 Z924 20BK GROUND 4 Z924 20BK GROUND 5-6-- Component Location - 32 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Relays and Modules - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure Monitor Receiver / Transponder > Component Information > Locations > Transponder-Tire Pressure-Left Front > Page 11563 Component ID 523 Component ID: 523 Component : TRANSPONDER-TIRE PRESSURE-LEFT FRONT Connector: Name : TRANSPONDER-TIRE PRESSURE-LEFT FRONT Color : # of pins : 6 Pin Circuit Description Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Relays and Modules - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure Monitor Receiver / Transponder > Component Information > Locations > Transponder-Tire Pressure-Left Front > Page 11564 1 F504 20GY/PK FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN) 2 D508 20WT/GY COM-LIN TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR LAN 3 Z924 20BK GROUND 4 Z924 20BK GROUND 5-6-Component Location - 32 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Relays and Modules - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure Monitor Receiver / Transponder > Component Information > Locations > Transponder-Tire Pressure-Left Front > Page 11565 Tire Pressure Monitor Receiver / Transponder: Locations Transponder-Tire Pressure-Right Front Component ID 522 Component ID: 522 Component : TRANSPONDER-TIRE PRESSURE-RIGHT FRONT Connector: Name : TRANSPONDER-TIRE PRESSURE-RIGHT FRONT Color : # of pins : 6 Pin Circuit Description 1 F504 20GY/PK FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN) 2 D508 20WT/GY COM-LIN TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR LAN 3 Z924 20BK GROUND 4-5 Z924 20BK GROUND 6-- Component Location - 29 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Relays and Modules - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure Monitor Receiver / Transponder > Component Information > Locations > Transponder-Tire Pressure-Left Front > Page 11566 Component ID 524 Component ID: 524 Component : TRANSPONDER-TIRE PRESSURE-RIGHT FRONT Connector: Name : TRANSPONDER-TIRE PRESSURE-RIGHT FRONT Color : # of pins : 6 Pin Circuit Description Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Relays and Modules - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure Monitor Receiver / Transponder > Component Information > Locations > Transponder-Tire Pressure-Left Front > Page 11567 1 F504 20GY/PK FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN) 2 D508 20WT/GY COM-LIN TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR LAN 3 Z924 20BK GROUND 4-5 Z924 20BK GROUND 6-Component Location - 29 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Relays and Modules - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure Monitor Receiver / Transponder > Component Information > Diagrams > Transponder-Tire Pressure-Left Front Tire Pressure Monitor Receiver / Transponder: Diagrams Transponder-Tire Pressure-Left Front Component ID 521 Component ID: 521 Component : TRANSPONDER-TIRE PRESSURE-LEFT FRONT Connector: Name : TRANSPONDER-TIRE PRESSURE-LEFT FRONT Color : # of pins : 6 Pin Circuit Description 1 F504 20GY/PK FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN) 2 D508 20WT/GY COM-LIN TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR LAN 3 Z924 20BK GROUND 4 Z924 20BK GROUND 5-6-- Component Location - 32 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Relays and Modules - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure Monitor Receiver / Transponder > Component Information > Diagrams > Transponder-Tire Pressure-Left Front > Page 11570 Component ID 523 Component ID: 523 Component : TRANSPONDER-TIRE PRESSURE-LEFT FRONT Connector: Name : TRANSPONDER-TIRE PRESSURE-LEFT FRONT Color : # of pins : 6 Pin Circuit Description Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Relays and Modules - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure Monitor Receiver / Transponder > Component Information > Diagrams > Transponder-Tire Pressure-Left Front > Page 11571 1 F504 20GY/PK FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN) 2 D508 20WT/GY COM-LIN TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR LAN 3 Z924 20BK GROUND 4 Z924 20BK GROUND 5-6-Component Location - 32 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Relays and Modules - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure Monitor Receiver / Transponder > Component Information > Diagrams > Transponder-Tire Pressure-Left Front > Page 11572 Tire Pressure Monitor Receiver / Transponder: Diagrams Transponder-Tire Pressure-Right Front Component ID 522 Component ID: 522 Component : TRANSPONDER-TIRE PRESSURE-RIGHT FRONT Connector: Name : TRANSPONDER-TIRE PRESSURE-RIGHT FRONT Color : # of pins : 6 Pin Circuit Description 1 F504 20GY/PK FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN) 2 D508 20WT/GY COM-LIN TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR LAN 3 Z924 20BK GROUND 4-5 Z924 20BK GROUND 6-- Component Location - 29 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Relays and Modules - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure Monitor Receiver / Transponder > Component Information > Diagrams > Transponder-Tire Pressure-Left Front > Page 11573 Component ID 524 Component ID: 524 Component : TRANSPONDER-TIRE PRESSURE-RIGHT FRONT Connector: Name : TRANSPONDER-TIRE PRESSURE-RIGHT FRONT Color : # of pins : 6 Pin Circuit Description Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Relays and Modules - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure Monitor Receiver / Transponder > Component Information > Diagrams > Transponder-Tire Pressure-Left Front > Page 11574 1 F504 20GY/PK FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN) 2 D508 20WT/GY COM-LIN TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR LAN 3 Z924 20BK GROUND 4-5 Z924 20BK GROUND 6-Component Location - 29 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Relays and Modules - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure Monitor Receiver / Transponder > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Tire Pressure Monitor Receiver / Transponder: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION A transponder (2), also known as a trigger module, is located in the front wheel wells (behind the wheelhouse splash shields) of the vehicle to provide the WCM/SKREEM with the location of the front tire pressure sensors on the vehicle. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Relays and Modules - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure Monitor Receiver / Transponder > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 11577 Tire Pressure Monitor Receiver / Transponder: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The Wireless Control Module (WCM), commonly referred to as the Sentry Key Remote Entry Module (SKREEM), uses transponders (trigger modules) located in the front wheel wells on the vehicle to provide it with the location of the front tire pressure sensors on the vehicle. Like the base system, the WCM receives RF signals from all four rotating wheel speed sensors. When the WCM needs to know which sensor is located at a particular location on the vehicle, it directs the transponder at that location to send out a low frequency signal to excite the nearby sensor. The WCM then receives that excited signal and knows where that sensor is located. This auto-locating process only happens in the first 10 minutes of any WCM cycle while traveling at speeds above 20 mph (32 km/h) (Each WCM cycle ends when the vehicle has been shut off for a time period of approximately 20 minutes or longer). If the TPMS fails to localize, the TPM indicator lamp will flash on/off for 75 seconds, and remain on solid. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Relays and Modules - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure Monitor Receiver / Transponder > Component Information > Service and Repair > TPM Transponder - Removal Tire Pressure Monitor Receiver / Transponder: Service and Repair TPM Transponder - Removal REMOVAL 1. Raise and support the vehicle. 2. Remove the wheel well housing cover. 3. Remove the mounting screw (1) for the transponder (2). 4. Disconnect the electrical connector (3) and remove the transponder (2) from the vehicle. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Relays and Modules - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure Monitor Receiver / Transponder > Component Information > Service and Repair > TPM Transponder - Removal > Page 11580 Tire Pressure Monitor Receiver / Transponder: Service and Repair TPM Transponder - Installation INSTALLATION 1. Install the transponder (2) to the vehicle and reconnect the electrical connector (3). 2. Install the mounting screw (1) for the transponder (2) Tighten to 3 Nm (25 in. lbs.). 3. Install the wheel well housing cover. 4. Lower the vehicle. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Sensors and Switches - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Service Precautions Tire Pressure Sensor: Service Precautions CAUTION CAUTION: The use of tire sealants is not recommended for vehicles equipped with the Tire Pressure Monitoring system. Tire sealants may clog tire pressure sensors. CAUTION: Tire pressure sensor valve stem caps and cores are specially designed for the sensors. Due to risk of corrosion, do not use a standard valve stem cap or core in a tire pressure sensor in place of the original equipment style sensor cap and core. CAUTION: It is not recommended to install a tire pressure sensor in an aftermarket wheel. Use tire pressure sensors in original style factory wheels only. CAUTION: Any time a sensor is to be reinstalled in a wheel, a new seal, cap and valve core must be installed on the stem to ensure air tight sealing. NOTE: TPM thresholds have been established for the original tire size equipped on the vehicle. Use original size tires only to maintain system accuracy. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Sensors and Switches - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Tire Pressure Sensor: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION On vehicles equipped with Tire Pressure Monitoring System, one tire pressure sensor (6) is mounted to each wheel in place of the traditional tire valve stem. Each sensor has an internal battery that lasts up to 10 years. The battery is not serviceable. At the time of battery failure, the sensor (6) must be replaced. The TPM system operates on a 315 MHz radio frequency. The 315 MHz sensors can be easily identified by a GREEN sensor body, with (an triangle insignia) (1). The 433 MHz sensors can be identified by a grey sensor body with an oval insignia. For car applications, there is a 315 MHz TPM sensor with a Black sensor body with an oval insignia. NOTE: This vehicle uses the 315 MHz TPM sensor with the GREEN sensor body. Although 315 MHz and 433 MHz sensors are identical in size and shape, they are not interchangeable. Always make sure the correct color sensor is being used. A RKE-TPM Analyzer can be used to determine the sensor's frequency without having to dismount the tire. The TPM sensors are designed for original style factory wheels. It is not recommended to install a tire pressure sensor in an aftermarket wheel. (This could cause sealing and system performance issues.) The serviceable components of the tire pressure sensor are: - Sensor-To-Wheel Seal (4) - Valve Stem Cap (2) - Valve Stem Core - Valve Stem Nut (3) The valve stem caps and cores used are specifically designed for the tire pressure monitoring sensors. Although similar to standard valve stem caps and cores, they are different. The valve stem cap has a special seal inside to keep moisture and corrosion out. The valve stem core has a special nickel coating to protect from corrosion. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Sensors and Switches - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 11587 Tire Pressure Sensor: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION CAUTION: The TPMS has been optimized for the original equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures have been established for the tire size equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system operation or sensor damage may result when using replacement equipment that is not of the same size, type, and/or style. After-market wheels can cause sensor damage. Do not use aftermarket tire sealants or balance beads if your vehicle is equipped with a TPMS, as damage to the sensors may result. CAUTION: After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure always reinstall the valve stem cap. This will prevent moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem, which could damage the Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensor. CAUTION: Tire pressure sensor valve stem caps and cores are specially designed for the sensors. Due to risk of corrosion, do not use a standard valve stem cap or core in a tire pressure sensor in place of the original equipment style sensor cap and core. CAUTION: Any time a sensor is to be reinstalled in a wheel, a new seal, nut, cap and valve core must be installed on the stem to ensure air tight sealing. NOTE: TPM thresholds have been established for the original tire size equipped on the vehicle. Use original size tires only to maintain system accuracy. The battery operated tire pressure sensor is both a transmitter and a receiver. The TPM sensor can be forced to transmit if using a special tool such as a TPM-RKE Analyzer, or from a transponder. The TPM-RKE Analyzer has the ability to change the sensor mode and to diagnose a faulty TPM sensor. Using a TPM-RKE Analyzer can take up to a minute to force a transmission from a sensor. The High Pressure TPM sensor can be in one of the following modes: Sleep Mode - A new TPM sensor will be in this mode. If placed on the vehicle as a road tire, the TPM sensor will transmit once every 20 seconds when the vehicle is driven at speeds over 15 mph (24 km/h). If the vehicle is not moving, the sensor will only transmit on a pressure change greater then 2 psi (13.8 kPA). Driving the vehicle continuously at speeds over 15 mph (24 km/h) for more then 4 minutes will change the sensor state into 30 BLOCK MODE. The TPM sensor will not return to SLEEP MODE. Now, if the vehicle has been stopped for 20 minutes, the TPM sensor state will change to PARK MODE. - Park Mode - This is the correct mode when the vehicle is not moving. The sensor will transmit once every 13 hours to update the WCM, or will transmit on a 2 psi (13.8 kPA) delta change. The sensors will internally take a measurement of the tire pressure every minute to determine a change in tire pressure. - 30 Block Mode - If the vehicle has not been moving for more then 20 minutes, or if the sensor's mode was forced to Park Mode using a TPM-RKE Analyzer, the sensor's operating mode will transition from PARK MODE to 30 BLOCK MODE once the vehicle is driven over 15 mph. In this mode, the sensor will transmit once every 15 seconds when the vehicle is driven at speeds over 15 mph (24 km/h) for the first 30 transmissions. After 8 minutes of continuous driving above 15 mph (24 km/h), the TPM sensor will change to DRIVE MODE. Drive Mode - In this mode, the sensor will transmit once every minute when the vehicle is driven at speeds over 15 mph (24 km/h). At any time that the vehicle speed drops below 15mph, the sensor will not transmit. The sensor mode will still be in drive mode when the sensor reaches speeds over 15 mph (24 km/h). If the vehicle has been stationary for more then 20 minutes, the TPM sensor will change to PARK MODE. Each sensor's (transmitter) broadcast is uniquely coded so that the wireless control module (WCM) can monitor the state of each of the sensors on the four rotating road wheels. The WCM can automatically learn and store the sensor's ID while driving "within 10 minutes continuously above 15 m.p.h. (24 Km/h)" after a sensor has been replaced. The vehicle must be stationary for more then 20 minutes in order to initiate the learning sequence. The sensor IDs can also be programmed using the TPM-RKE Analyzer Tool. Scan each TPM sensor at each road wheel, and store each Sensor ID in the correct location. (LEFT FRONT, LEFT REAR, RIGHT FRONT, and RIGHT REAR) Connect the TPM-RKE Analyzer Tool to the Scan Tool. Then follow the programming steps outlined in the diagnostic Scan Tool for "Program Tire Pressure Sensor ID w/ TPM Tool" under "MISC" for the "WCM/WIRELESS CONTROL MODULE". Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Sensors and Switches - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 11588 Tire Pressure Sensor: Testing and Inspection TIRE PRESSURE SENSOR NOTE: Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi (14 to 41 kPa) during normal driving conditions. Do NOT reduce this normal pressure build up. NOTE: Tire pressure will vary with temperature by about 1 psi (6.9 kPa) for every 12 F (6.5 C). This means that when the outside temperature decreases, the tire pressure will also decrease. Tire pressure should always be set based on cold inflation tire pressure. When diagnosing a tire pressure issue, always check air pressure in the tires first with a known accurate air gauge. Adjust air pressure as necessary to that listed on the Tire Inflation Pressure Label (Placard) provided with the vehicle (usually applied to the driver's side B-pillar). After adjusting air pressure in a tire on the vehicle, allow approximately two minutes for the message or indicator lamp to go out. Check the tire pressure indicator lamp in the instrument cluster. If the lamp is illuminating continuously, inspect all the tires for leaks. A water "dunk tank" or other water test may be used to check for leaks around the sensor as long as any water at the valve core is removed once the procedure is completed. The water can be easily expelled from the core area by pushing in on the core for several seconds, allowing escaping air to drive out any moisture. Reinflate the tire as necessary. Always make sure the original valve stem cap is securely installed to keep moisture out of the sensor. If the gauge-read pressure in the tires does not indicate a tire pressure issue, refer to the appropriate diagnostic information. If the indicator lamp is flashing on/off for 75 seconds and then remains on solid, a system fault was detected. Refer to the appropriate diagnostic information. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Sensors and Switches - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Tire Pressure Sensor: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL 1. Raise and support vehicle. 2. Remove the tire and wheel assembly. See: Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement CAUTION: The cap used on this valve stem contains an O-ring seal to prevent contamination and moisture from entering the valve stem. Retain this valve stem cap for reuse. Do not substitute a regular valve stem cap in its place. CAUTION: The valve stem used on this vehicle is made of aluminum and the core is nickel plated brass. The original valve stem core must be reinstalled and not substituted with a valve stem core made of a different material. This is required to prevent corrosion in the valve stem caused by the different metals. 3. Let the air out of the tire. 4. Remove the nut (3). 5. Push the sensor into the tire (1) (so the sensor is loose inside the tire). 6. Remove the tire from the rim. 7. Retrieve the sensor (1) from the tire. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Sensors and Switches - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 11591 Tire Pressure Sensor: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION NOTE: Before reinstalling an existing tire pressure sensor (6), replace valve cap (2), nut (3), valve core and sensor seal (4) to ensure proper sealing. NOTE: The notch/flat should be lined up together and facing towards the wheel during installation. 1. Wipe area clean around sensor/valve stem mounting hole in wheel. Make sure surface of wheel is not damaged. 2. Insert sensor (1) through wheel (2) as shown keeping pressure against rear of metal valve stem (See Arrow). Potted side of sensor is to be positioned toward wheel. Damage to the sensor may occur if the sensor is installed incorrectly. NOTE: A flat on the seal seat is used to key the seat to the sensor housing. The notch/flat should be lined up together and facing towards the wheel during installation. 3. Install sensor nut (3) and hand tighten. NOTE: Before tightening sensor nut, push downward on sensor housing (2) in an attempt to make it flush with interior contour of wheel (1). 4. While holding sensor in position, tighten sensor nut to 6 Nm (53 in. lbs.). CAUTION: Over-tightening the sensor to as much as 10 Nm (88 in. lbs.) may result in sensor separation from the valve stem. Under this condition, the sensor may still function, however, the condition should be corrected immediately. 5. Mount tire on wheel following tire changer manufacturer's instructions, paying special attention to the following to avoid damaging tire pressure sensor: a. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Sensors and Switches - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 11592 Rotating Wheel Tire Changers- Once the wheel is mounted to the changer, position the sensor valve stem (2) approximately 180° from the head of the changer (located at 1) in a clockwise direction before rotating the wheel (also in a clockwise direction) to mount the tire. Use this procedure on both the upper and lower tire beads. b. Rotating Tool Tire Changers - Position the wheel on the changer so that the sensor valve stem (1) is located approximately 180° clockwise from the installation end of the mounting/dismounting tool (2) once the tool is mounted for tire installation. Make sure the sensor is clear of the lower bead breaker area (3) to avoid damaging the sensor when the breaker rises. Rotate the tool (2) in a counterclockwise direction to mount the tire. Use this procedure on both the upper and lower tire beads. 6. Adjust air pressure to that listed on Tire Inflation Pressure Label (Placard) provided with vehicle (usually applied to driver's side B-pillar). Make sure original style valve stem cap is securely installed to keep moisture out of sensor. 7. Install tire and wheel assembly on vehicle. See: Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement 8. Lower vehicle. 9. If the vehicle has been stationary for more then 20 minutes, drive the vehicle for a minimum of 10 minutes while maintaining a continuous speed above 15 mph (24 km/h). During this time, the system will learn the new sensor ID. A new sensor ID can also be programmed directly into the WCM by using a RKE-TPM Analyzer in conjunction with a Scan Tool. Once the new sensor ID has been programmed, the RKE-TPM Analyzer can be used to update the TPMS by activating the sensor. NOTE: If a sensor cannot be trained, refer to appropriate diagnostic information. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Sensors and Switches - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure Warning Reset Switch > Component Information > Locations Tire Pressure Warning Reset Switch: Locations Component ID: 513 Component : SWITCH-TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR Connector: Name : SWITCH-TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR Color : BROWN # of pins : 6 Pin Circuit Description 1 G561 20VT TPM INDICATOR CONTROL 2 E11 20OR/DB PANEL LAMPS DRIVER 3 G562 20VT/YL TPM SWITCH SIGNAL 4 Z600 20BK GROUND 5 F504 20GY/PK NO FUNCTION DEFINED 6-Component Location - 47 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Sensors and Switches - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure Warning Reset Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 11596 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Sensors and Switches - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure Warning Reset Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 11597 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Sensors and Switches - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure Warning Reset Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 11598 Tire Pressure Warning Reset Switch: Diagrams Component ID: 513 Component : SWITCH-TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR Connector: Name : SWITCH-TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR Color : BROWN # of pins : 6 Pin Circuit Description 1 G561 20VT TPM INDICATOR CONTROL 2 E11 20OR/DB PANEL LAMPS DRIVER 3 G562 20VT/YL TPM SWITCH SIGNAL 4 Z600 20BK GROUND 5 F504 20GY/PK NO FUNCTION DEFINED 6-Component Location - 47 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Sensors and Switches - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure Warning Reset Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 11599 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Tire Monitoring System > Low Tire Pressure Indicator > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Low Tire Pressure Indicator: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION A Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM) indicator is standard equipment on all instrument clusters. However, on vehicles not equipped with the optional TPM, this indicator is electronically disabled. This indicator is located in the lower portion of the tachometer dial face in the instrument cluster overlay. The TPM indicator consists of a stencil-like cutout of an icon that represents a cross-section of a tire with a centered exclamation point in the opaque layer of the instrument cluster overlay. The dark outer layer of the overlay prevents the indicator from being clearly visible when it is not illuminated. An amber Light Emitting Diode (LED) behind the cutout in the opaque layer of the overlay causes the indicator to appear in amber through the translucent outer layer of the overlay when it is illuminated from behind by the LED, which is soldered onto the instrument cluster electronic circuit board. The TPM indicator is serviced as a unit with the instrument cluster. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Tire Monitoring System > Low Tire Pressure Indicator > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 11605 Low Tire Pressure Indicator: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM) indicator gives an indication to the vehicle operator of the status of the TPM system. This indicator is controlled by a transistor on the instrument cluster circuit board based upon cluster programming and electronic messages received by the cluster from the Sentry Key REmote Entry Module (SKREEM) over the Controller Area Network (CAN) data bus. The TPM indicator Light Emitting Diode (LED) is completely controlled by the instrument cluster logic circuit, and that logic will only allow this indicator to operate when the instrument cluster receives a battery current input on the fused ignition switch output (run-start) circuit. Therefore, the LED will always be OFF when the ignition switch is in any position except ON or START. The LED only illuminates when it is provide a path to ground by the instrument cluster transistor. The instrument cluster will turn ON the TPM indicator for the following reasons: - Bulb Test - Each time the ignition switch is turned to the ON position, the SKREEM sends an electronic TPM indicator lamp-ON message to the cluster to illuminate the TPM indicator for about three seconds as a bulb test. - TPM Indicator Lamp-On Message - Each time the cluster receives an electronic TPM indicator lamp-ON message from the SKREEM, the TPM indicator will be illuminated. The indicator can be flashed ON and OFF, or illuminated solid, as dictated by the SKREEM message. The indicator remains illuminated until the cluster receives a lamp-OFF message from the SKREEM or until the ignition switch is turned to the OFF position, whichever occurs first. - Communication Error - If the cluster receives no TPM lamp-ON or lamp-OFF messages from the SKREEM for six consecutive seconds, the TPM indicator is illuminated by the instrument cluster. The indicator remains controlled and illuminated by the cluster until a valid lamp-ON or lamp-OFF message is received from the SKREEM. - Actuator Test - Each time the cluster is put through the actuator test, the TPM indicator will be turned ON, then OFF again during the bulb check portion of the test to confirm the functionality of the LED and the cluster control circuitry. The SKREEM performs a self-test each time the ignition switch is turned to the ON position to decide whether the TPM system is in good operating condition and whether the tire inflation pressures are too high or too low. The SKREEM then sends the proper lamp-ON or lamp-OFF message to the ElectroMechanical Instrument Cluster (EMIC) (also known as the Cab Compartment Node/CCN). If the instrument cluster turns ON the TPM indicator after the bulb test, it indicates that the inflation pressure of a tire is too low or that a malfunction has occurred and the TPM system is ineffective. For proper diagnosis of the TPM system, the SKREEM, the EMIC, the CAN data bus or the electronic communication related to TPM indicator operation a diagnostic scan tool is required. Refer to the appropriate diagnostic information. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Tire Monitoring System > Tire Pressure Monitor Receiver / Transponder > Component Information > Locations > Transponder-Tire Pressure-Left Front Tire Pressure Monitor Receiver / Transponder: Locations Transponder-Tire Pressure-Left Front Component ID 521 Component ID: 521 Component : TRANSPONDER-TIRE PRESSURE-LEFT FRONT Connector: Name : TRANSPONDER-TIRE PRESSURE-LEFT FRONT Color : # of pins : 6 Pin Circuit Description 1 F504 20GY/PK FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN) 2 D508 20WT/GY COM-LIN TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR LAN 3 Z924 20BK GROUND 4 Z924 20BK GROUND 5-6-- Component Location - 32 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Tire Monitoring System > Tire Pressure Monitor Receiver / Transponder > Component Information > Locations > Transponder-Tire Pressure-Left Front > Page 11610 Component ID 523 Component ID: 523 Component : TRANSPONDER-TIRE PRESSURE-LEFT FRONT Connector: Name : TRANSPONDER-TIRE PRESSURE-LEFT FRONT Color : # of pins : 6 Pin Circuit Description Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Tire Monitoring System > Tire Pressure Monitor Receiver / Transponder > Component Information > Locations > Transponder-Tire Pressure-Left Front > Page 11611 1 F504 20GY/PK FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN) 2 D508 20WT/GY COM-LIN TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR LAN 3 Z924 20BK GROUND 4 Z924 20BK GROUND 5-6-Component Location - 32 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Tire Monitoring System > Tire Pressure Monitor Receiver / Transponder > Component Information > Locations > Transponder-Tire Pressure-Left Front > Page 11612 Tire Pressure Monitor Receiver / Transponder: Locations Transponder-Tire Pressure-Right Front Component ID 522 Component ID: 522 Component : TRANSPONDER-TIRE PRESSURE-RIGHT FRONT Connector: Name : TRANSPONDER-TIRE PRESSURE-RIGHT FRONT Color : # of pins : 6 Pin Circuit Description 1 F504 20GY/PK FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN) 2 D508 20WT/GY COM-LIN TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR LAN 3 Z924 20BK GROUND 4-5 Z924 20BK GROUND 6-- Component Location - 29 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Tire Monitoring System > Tire Pressure Monitor Receiver / Transponder > Component Information > Locations > Transponder-Tire Pressure-Left Front > Page 11613 Component ID 524 Component ID: 524 Component : TRANSPONDER-TIRE PRESSURE-RIGHT FRONT Connector: Name : TRANSPONDER-TIRE PRESSURE-RIGHT FRONT Color : # of pins : 6 Pin Circuit Description Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Tire Monitoring System > Tire Pressure Monitor Receiver / Transponder > Component Information > Locations > Transponder-Tire Pressure-Left Front > Page 11614 1 F504 20GY/PK FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN) 2 D508 20WT/GY COM-LIN TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR LAN 3 Z924 20BK GROUND 4-5 Z924 20BK GROUND 6-Component Location - 29 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Tire Monitoring System > Tire Pressure Monitor Receiver / Transponder > Component Information > Diagrams > Transponder-Tire Pressure-Left Front Tire Pressure Monitor Receiver / Transponder: Diagrams Transponder-Tire Pressure-Left Front Component ID 521 Component ID: 521 Component : TRANSPONDER-TIRE PRESSURE-LEFT FRONT Connector: Name : TRANSPONDER-TIRE PRESSURE-LEFT FRONT Color : # of pins : 6 Pin Circuit Description 1 F504 20GY/PK FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN) 2 D508 20WT/GY COM-LIN TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR LAN 3 Z924 20BK GROUND 4 Z924 20BK GROUND 5-6-- Component Location - 32 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Tire Monitoring System > Tire Pressure Monitor Receiver / Transponder > Component Information > Diagrams > Transponder-Tire Pressure-Left Front > Page 11617 Component ID 523 Component ID: 523 Component : TRANSPONDER-TIRE PRESSURE-LEFT FRONT Connector: Name : TRANSPONDER-TIRE PRESSURE-LEFT FRONT Color : # of pins : 6 Pin Circuit Description Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Tire Monitoring System > Tire Pressure Monitor Receiver / Transponder > Component Information > Diagrams > Transponder-Tire Pressure-Left Front > Page 11618 1 F504 20GY/PK FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN) 2 D508 20WT/GY COM-LIN TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR LAN 3 Z924 20BK GROUND 4 Z924 20BK GROUND 5-6-Component Location - 32 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Tire Monitoring System > Tire Pressure Monitor Receiver / Transponder > Component Information > Diagrams > Transponder-Tire Pressure-Left Front > Page 11619 Tire Pressure Monitor Receiver / Transponder: Diagrams Transponder-Tire Pressure-Right Front Component ID 522 Component ID: 522 Component : TRANSPONDER-TIRE PRESSURE-RIGHT FRONT Connector: Name : TRANSPONDER-TIRE PRESSURE-RIGHT FRONT Color : # of pins : 6 Pin Circuit Description 1 F504 20GY/PK FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN) 2 D508 20WT/GY COM-LIN TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR LAN 3 Z924 20BK GROUND 4-5 Z924 20BK GROUND 6-- Component Location - 29 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Tire Monitoring System > Tire Pressure Monitor Receiver / Transponder > Component Information > Diagrams > Transponder-Tire Pressure-Left Front > Page 11620 Component ID 524 Component ID: 524 Component : TRANSPONDER-TIRE PRESSURE-RIGHT FRONT Connector: Name : TRANSPONDER-TIRE PRESSURE-RIGHT FRONT Color : # of pins : 6 Pin Circuit Description Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Tire Monitoring System > Tire Pressure Monitor Receiver / Transponder > Component Information > Diagrams > Transponder-Tire Pressure-Left Front > Page 11621 1 F504 20GY/PK FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN) 2 D508 20WT/GY COM-LIN TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR LAN 3 Z924 20BK GROUND 4-5 Z924 20BK GROUND 6-Component Location - 29 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Tire Monitoring System > Tire Pressure Monitor Receiver / Transponder > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Tire Pressure Monitor Receiver / Transponder: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION A transponder (2), also known as a trigger module, is located in the front wheel wells (behind the wheelhouse splash shields) of the vehicle to provide the WCM/SKREEM with the location of the front tire pressure sensors on the vehicle. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Tire Monitoring System > Tire Pressure Monitor Receiver / Transponder > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 11624 Tire Pressure Monitor Receiver / Transponder: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The Wireless Control Module (WCM), commonly referred to as the Sentry Key Remote Entry Module (SKREEM), uses transponders (trigger modules) located in the front wheel wells on the vehicle to provide it with the location of the front tire pressure sensors on the vehicle. Like the base system, the WCM receives RF signals from all four rotating wheel speed sensors. When the WCM needs to know which sensor is located at a particular location on the vehicle, it directs the transponder at that location to send out a low frequency signal to excite the nearby sensor. The WCM then receives that excited signal and knows where that sensor is located. This auto-locating process only happens in the first 10 minutes of any WCM cycle while traveling at speeds above 20 mph (32 km/h) (Each WCM cycle ends when the vehicle has been shut off for a time period of approximately 20 minutes or longer). If the TPMS fails to localize, the TPM indicator lamp will flash on/off for 75 seconds, and remain on solid. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Tire Monitoring System > Tire Pressure Monitor Receiver / Transponder > Component Information > Service and Repair > TPM Transponder - Removal Tire Pressure Monitor Receiver / Transponder: Service and Repair TPM Transponder - Removal REMOVAL 1. Raise and support the vehicle. 2. Remove the wheel well housing cover. 3. Remove the mounting screw (1) for the transponder (2). 4. Disconnect the electrical connector (3) and remove the transponder (2) from the vehicle. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Tire Monitoring System > Tire Pressure Monitor Receiver / Transponder > Component Information > Service and Repair > TPM Transponder - Removal > Page 11627 Tire Pressure Monitor Receiver / Transponder: Service and Repair TPM Transponder - Installation INSTALLATION 1. Install the transponder (2) to the vehicle and reconnect the electrical connector (3). 2. Install the mounting screw (1) for the transponder (2) Tighten to 3 Nm (25 in. lbs.). 3. Install the wheel well housing cover. 4. Lower the vehicle. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Tire Monitoring System > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Service Precautions Tire Pressure Sensor: Service Precautions CAUTION CAUTION: The use of tire sealants is not recommended for vehicles equipped with the Tire Pressure Monitoring system. Tire sealants may clog tire pressure sensors. CAUTION: Tire pressure sensor valve stem caps and cores are specially designed for the sensors. Due to risk of corrosion, do not use a standard valve stem cap or core in a tire pressure sensor in place of the original equipment style sensor cap and core. CAUTION: It is not recommended to install a tire pressure sensor in an aftermarket wheel. Use tire pressure sensors in original style factory wheels only. CAUTION: Any time a sensor is to be reinstalled in a wheel, a new seal, cap and valve core must be installed on the stem to ensure air tight sealing. NOTE: TPM thresholds have been established for the original tire size equipped on the vehicle. Use original size tires only to maintain system accuracy. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Tire Monitoring System > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Tire Pressure Sensor: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION On vehicles equipped with Tire Pressure Monitoring System, one tire pressure sensor (6) is mounted to each wheel in place of the traditional tire valve stem. Each sensor has an internal battery that lasts up to 10 years. The battery is not serviceable. At the time of battery failure, the sensor (6) must be replaced. The TPM system operates on a 315 MHz radio frequency. The 315 MHz sensors can be easily identified by a GREEN sensor body, with (an triangle insignia) (1). The 433 MHz sensors can be identified by a grey sensor body with an oval insignia. For car applications, there is a 315 MHz TPM sensor with a Black sensor body with an oval insignia. NOTE: This vehicle uses the 315 MHz TPM sensor with the GREEN sensor body. Although 315 MHz and 433 MHz sensors are identical in size and shape, they are not interchangeable. Always make sure the correct color sensor is being used. A RKE-TPM Analyzer can be used to determine the sensor's frequency without having to dismount the tire. The TPM sensors are designed for original style factory wheels. It is not recommended to install a tire pressure sensor in an aftermarket wheel. (This could cause sealing and system performance issues.) The serviceable components of the tire pressure sensor are: - Sensor-To-Wheel Seal (4) - Valve Stem Cap (2) - Valve Stem Core - Valve Stem Nut (3) The valve stem caps and cores used are specifically designed for the tire pressure monitoring sensors. Although similar to standard valve stem caps and cores, they are different. The valve stem cap has a special seal inside to keep moisture and corrosion out. The valve stem core has a special nickel coating to protect from corrosion. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Tire Monitoring System > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 11633 Tire Pressure Sensor: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION CAUTION: The TPMS has been optimized for the original equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures have been established for the tire size equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system operation or sensor damage may result when using replacement equipment that is not of the same size, type, and/or style. After-market wheels can cause sensor damage. Do not use aftermarket tire sealants or balance beads if your vehicle is equipped with a TPMS, as damage to the sensors may result. CAUTION: After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure always reinstall the valve stem cap. This will prevent moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem, which could damage the Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensor. CAUTION: Tire pressure sensor valve stem caps and cores are specially designed for the sensors. Due to risk of corrosion, do not use a standard valve stem cap or core in a tire pressure sensor in place of the original equipment style sensor cap and core. CAUTION: Any time a sensor is to be reinstalled in a wheel, a new seal, nut, cap and valve core must be installed on the stem to ensure air tight sealing. NOTE: TPM thresholds have been established for the original tire size equipped on the vehicle. Use original size tires only to maintain system accuracy. The battery operated tire pressure sensor is both a transmitter and a receiver. The TPM sensor can be forced to transmit if using a special tool such as a TPM-RKE Analyzer, or from a transponder. The TPM-RKE Analyzer has the ability to change the sensor mode and to diagnose a faulty TPM sensor. Using a TPM-RKE Analyzer can take up to a minute to force a transmission from a sensor. The High Pressure TPM sensor can be in one of the following modes: Sleep Mode - A new TPM sensor will be in this mode. If placed on the vehicle as a road tire, the TPM sensor will transmit once every 20 seconds when the vehicle is driven at speeds over 15 mph (24 km/h). If the vehicle is not moving, the sensor will only transmit on a pressure change greater then 2 psi (13.8 kPA). Driving the vehicle continuously at speeds over 15 mph (24 km/h) for more then 4 minutes will change the sensor state into 30 BLOCK MODE. The TPM sensor will not return to SLEEP MODE. Now, if the vehicle has been stopped for 20 minutes, the TPM sensor state will change to PARK MODE. - Park Mode - This is the correct mode when the vehicle is not moving. The sensor will transmit once every 13 hours to update the WCM, or will transmit on a 2 psi (13.8 kPA) delta change. The sensors will internally take a measurement of the tire pressure every minute to determine a change in tire pressure. - 30 Block Mode - If the vehicle has not been moving for more then 20 minutes, or if the sensor's mode was forced to Park Mode using a TPM-RKE Analyzer, the sensor's operating mode will transition from PARK MODE to 30 BLOCK MODE once the vehicle is driven over 15 mph. In this mode, the sensor will transmit once every 15 seconds when the vehicle is driven at speeds over 15 mph (24 km/h) for the first 30 transmissions. After 8 minutes of continuous driving above 15 mph (24 km/h), the TPM sensor will change to DRIVE MODE. Drive Mode - In this mode, the sensor will transmit once every minute when the vehicle is driven at speeds over 15 mph (24 km/h). At any time that the vehicle speed drops below 15mph, the sensor will not transmit. The sensor mode will still be in drive mode when the sensor reaches speeds over 15 mph (24 km/h). If the vehicle has been stationary for more then 20 minutes, the TPM sensor will change to PARK MODE. Each sensor's (transmitter) broadcast is uniquely coded so that the wireless control module (WCM) can monitor the state of each of the sensors on the four rotating road wheels. The WCM can automatically learn and store the sensor's ID while driving "within 10 minutes continuously above 15 m.p.h. (24 Km/h)" after a sensor has been replaced. The vehicle must be stationary for more then 20 minutes in order to initiate the learning sequence. The sensor IDs can also be programmed using the TPM-RKE Analyzer Tool. Scan each TPM sensor at each road wheel, and store each Sensor ID in the correct location. (LEFT FRONT, LEFT REAR, RIGHT FRONT, and RIGHT REAR) Connect the TPM-RKE Analyzer Tool to the Scan Tool. Then follow the programming steps outlined in the diagnostic Scan Tool for "Program Tire Pressure Sensor ID w/ TPM Tool" under "MISC" for the "WCM/WIRELESS CONTROL MODULE". Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Tire Monitoring System > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 11634 Tire Pressure Sensor: Testing and Inspection TIRE PRESSURE SENSOR NOTE: Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi (14 to 41 kPa) during normal driving conditions. Do NOT reduce this normal pressure build up. NOTE: Tire pressure will vary with temperature by about 1 psi (6.9 kPa) for every 12 F (6.5 C). This means that when the outside temperature decreases, the tire pressure will also decrease. Tire pressure should always be set based on cold inflation tire pressure. When diagnosing a tire pressure issue, always check air pressure in the tires first with a known accurate air gauge. Adjust air pressure as necessary to that listed on the Tire Inflation Pressure Label (Placard) provided with the vehicle (usually applied to the driver's side B-pillar). After adjusting air pressure in a tire on the vehicle, allow approximately two minutes for the message or indicator lamp to go out. Check the tire pressure indicator lamp in the instrument cluster. If the lamp is illuminating continuously, inspect all the tires for leaks. A water "dunk tank" or other water test may be used to check for leaks around the sensor as long as any water at the valve core is removed once the procedure is completed. The water can be easily expelled from the core area by pushing in on the core for several seconds, allowing escaping air to drive out any moisture. Reinflate the tire as necessary. Always make sure the original valve stem cap is securely installed to keep moisture out of the sensor. If the gauge-read pressure in the tires does not indicate a tire pressure issue, refer to the appropriate diagnostic information. If the indicator lamp is flashing on/off for 75 seconds and then remains on solid, a system fault was detected. Refer to the appropriate diagnostic information. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Tire Monitoring System > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Tire Pressure Sensor: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL 1. Raise and support vehicle. 2. Remove the tire and wheel assembly. See: Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement CAUTION: The cap used on this valve stem contains an O-ring seal to prevent contamination and moisture from entering the valve stem. Retain this valve stem cap for reuse. Do not substitute a regular valve stem cap in its place. CAUTION: The valve stem used on this vehicle is made of aluminum and the core is nickel plated brass. The original valve stem core must be reinstalled and not substituted with a valve stem core made of a different material. This is required to prevent corrosion in the valve stem caused by the different metals. 3. Let the air out of the tire. 4. Remove the nut (3). 5. Push the sensor into the tire (1) (so the sensor is loose inside the tire). 6. Remove the tire from the rim. 7. Retrieve the sensor (1) from the tire. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Tire Monitoring System > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 11637 Tire Pressure Sensor: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION NOTE: Before reinstalling an existing tire pressure sensor (6), replace valve cap (2), nut (3), valve core and sensor seal (4) to ensure proper sealing. NOTE: The notch/flat should be lined up together and facing towards the wheel during installation. 1. Wipe area clean around sensor/valve stem mounting hole in wheel. Make sure surface of wheel is not damaged. 2. Insert sensor (1) through wheel (2) as shown keeping pressure against rear of metal valve stem (See Arrow). Potted side of sensor is to be positioned toward wheel. Damage to the sensor may occur if the sensor is installed incorrectly. NOTE: A flat on the seal seat is used to key the seat to the sensor housing. The notch/flat should be lined up together and facing towards the wheel during installation. 3. Install sensor nut (3) and hand tighten. NOTE: Before tightening sensor nut, push downward on sensor housing (2) in an attempt to make it flush with interior contour of wheel (1). 4. While holding sensor in position, tighten sensor nut to 6 Nm (53 in. lbs.). CAUTION: Over-tightening the sensor to as much as 10 Nm (88 in. lbs.) may result in sensor separation from the valve stem. Under this condition, the sensor may still function, however, the condition should be corrected immediately. 5. Mount tire on wheel following tire changer manufacturer's instructions, paying special attention to the following to avoid damaging tire pressure sensor: a. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Tire Monitoring System > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 11638 Rotating Wheel Tire Changers- Once the wheel is mounted to the changer, position the sensor valve stem (2) approximately 180° from the head of the changer (located at 1) in a clockwise direction before rotating the wheel (also in a clockwise direction) to mount the tire. Use this procedure on both the upper and lower tire beads. b. Rotating Tool Tire Changers - Position the wheel on the changer so that the sensor valve stem (1) is located approximately 180° clockwise from the installation end of the mounting/dismounting tool (2) once the tool is mounted for tire installation. Make sure the sensor is clear of the lower bead breaker area (3) to avoid damaging the sensor when the breaker rises. Rotate the tool (2) in a counterclockwise direction to mount the tire. Use this procedure on both the upper and lower tire beads. 6. Adjust air pressure to that listed on Tire Inflation Pressure Label (Placard) provided with vehicle (usually applied to driver's side B-pillar). Make sure original style valve stem cap is securely installed to keep moisture out of sensor. 7. Install tire and wheel assembly on vehicle. See: Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement 8. Lower vehicle. 9. If the vehicle has been stationary for more then 20 minutes, drive the vehicle for a minimum of 10 minutes while maintaining a continuous speed above 15 mph (24 km/h). During this time, the system will learn the new sensor ID. A new sensor ID can also be programmed directly into the WCM by using a RKE-TPM Analyzer in conjunction with a Scan Tool. Once the new sensor ID has been programmed, the RKE-TPM Analyzer can be used to update the TPMS by activating the sensor. NOTE: If a sensor cannot be trained, refer to appropriate diagnostic information. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Tire Monitoring System > Tire Pressure Warning Reset Switch > Component Information > Locations Tire Pressure Warning Reset Switch: Locations Component ID: 513 Component : SWITCH-TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR Connector: Name : SWITCH-TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR Color : BROWN # of pins : 6 Pin Circuit Description 1 G561 20VT TPM INDICATOR CONTROL 2 E11 20OR/DB PANEL LAMPS DRIVER 3 G562 20VT/YL TPM SWITCH SIGNAL 4 Z600 20BK GROUND 5 F504 20GY/PK NO FUNCTION DEFINED 6-Component Location - 47 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Tire Monitoring System > Tire Pressure Warning Reset Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 11642 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Tire Monitoring System > Tire Pressure Warning Reset Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 11643 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Tire Monitoring System > Tire Pressure Warning Reset Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 11644 Tire Pressure Warning Reset Switch: Diagrams Component ID: 513 Component : SWITCH-TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR Connector: Name : SWITCH-TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR Color : BROWN # of pins : 6 Pin Circuit Description 1 G561 20VT TPM INDICATOR CONTROL 2 E11 20OR/DB PANEL LAMPS DRIVER 3 G562 20VT/YL TPM SWITCH SIGNAL 4 Z600 20BK GROUND 5 F504 20GY/PK NO FUNCTION DEFINED 6-Component Location - 47 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Tire Monitoring System > Tire Pressure Warning Reset Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 11645 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Specifications Tires: Specifications TIRE REVOLUTIONS PER MILE Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Description and Operation > Spare Tire Tires: Description and Operation Spare Tire Spare / Temporary Tire SPARE / TEMPORARY TIRE The temporary spare tire is designed for emergency use only. The original tire should be repaired or replaced at the first opportunity, then reinstalled. Do not exceed speeds of 80 KMH (50 MPH). when using the temporary spare tire. Full Size, Spare Wheel With Matching Tire FULL SIZE, SPARE WHEEL WITH MATCHING TIRE The spare is a full usage wheel with a matching tire, It can be used within the (posted legal) speed limits or distance limitations as of the rest of the vehicles four tires. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Description and Operation > Spare Tire > Page 11651 Tires: Description and Operation Pressure Gauges PRESSURE GAUGES A quality air pressure gauge is recommended to check tire pressure. After checking the air pressure, replace valve cap finger tight. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Description and Operation > Spare Tire > Page 11652 Tires: Description and Operation Tires - Description Tires TIRES Tires are designed and engineered for each specific vehicle. They provide the best overall performance for normal operation. The ride and handling characteristics match the vehicle's requirements. With proper care they will give excellent reliability, traction, skid resistance, and tread life. Driving habits have more effect on tire life than any other factor. Careful drivers will obtain in most cases, much greater mileage than severe use or careless drivers. A few of the driving habits which will shorten the life of any tire are: - Rapid acceleration - Severe brake applications - High speed driving - Excessive speeds on turns - Striking curbs and other obstacles Radial-ply tires are more prone to irregular tread wear. It is important to follow the tire rotation interval See: Service and Repair/Procedures . This will help to achieve a greater tread life. TIRE IDENTIFICATION Tire type, size, aspect ratio and speed rating are encoded in the letters and numbers imprinted on the side wall of the tire. Refer to the chart to decipher the tire identification code. Performance tires have a speed rating letter after the aspect ratio number. The speed rating is not always printed on the tire sidewall. These ratings are: - Q up to 99 mph - S up to 112 mph - T up to 118 mph - U up to 124 mph - H up to 130 mph V up to 149 mph W (consult the tire manufacturer for the specific speed rating) - Z more than 149 mph (consult the tire manufacturer for the specific speed rating) An All Season type tire will have either M + S, M & S or M-S (indicating mud and snow traction) imprinted on the side wall. TIRE CHAINS Tire snow chains may be used on certain models. Radial - Ply Tires RADIAL - PLY TIRES Radial-ply tires improve handling, tread life and ride quality, and decrease rolling resistance. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Description and Operation > Spare Tire > Page 11653 Radial-ply tires must always be used in sets of four. Under no circumstances should they be used on the front only. They may be mixed with temporary spare tires when necessary. A maximum speed of 80 KMH (50 MPH) is recommended while a temporary spare is in use. Radial-ply tires have the same load-carrying capacity as other types of tires of the same size. They also use the same recommended inflation pressures. The use of oversized tires, either in the front or rear of the vehicle, can cause vehicle drive train failure. This could also cause inaccurate wheel speed signals when the vehicle is equipped with Anti-Lock Brakes. The use of tires from different manufactures on the same vehicle is NOT recommended. The proper tire pressure should be maintained on all four tires. Tire Pressure For High Speeds TIRE PRESSURE FOR HIGH SPEEDS For proper tire pressure specification refer to the Owners Manual. Tire Inflation Pressures TIRE INFLATION PRESSURES WARNING: Over or under inflated tires can affect vehicle handling and tread wear. This may cause the tire to fail suddenly, resulting in loss of vehicle control. Under inflation will cause rapid shoulder wear (1), tire flexing, and possible tire failure. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Description and Operation > Spare Tire > Page 11654 Over inflation will cause rapid center wear (1) reduction in the tire's ability to cushion shocks. Improper inflation can cause: - Uneven wear patterns - Reduced tread life - Reduced fuel economy - Unsatisfactory ride - Vehicle drift For proper tire pressure specification refer to the tire label placard usually located on the drivers door latch pillar. Spare / Temporary Tire SPARE / TEMPORARY TIRE The temporary spare tire is designed for emergency use only. The original tire should be repaired or replaced at the first opportunity, then reinstalled. Do not exceed speeds of 80 KMH (50 MPH). when using the temporary spare tire. Replacement Tires REPLACEMENT TIRES The original equipment tires provide a proper balance of many characteristics such as: - Ride - Noise - Handling - Durability - Tread life - Traction - Rolling resistance - Speed capability It is recommended that tires equivalent to the original equipment tires be used when replacement is needed. Failure to use equivalent replacement tires may adversely affect the safety and handling of the vehicle. The use of oversize tires may cause interference with vehicle components. Under extremes of suspension and steering travel, interference with vehicle components may cause tire damage. WARNING: Failure to equip the vehicle with tires having adequate speed capability can result in sudden tire failure. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Tread Wear Indicators Tires: Testing and Inspection Tread Wear Indicators TREAD WEAR INDICATORS Tread wear indicators (3) are molded into the bottom of the tread grooves. When tread depth is 1.6 mm (1/16 in.), the tread wear indicators (3) will appear as a 13 mm (1/2 in.) band. Tire replacement is necessary when indicators appear in two or more grooves or if localized balding occurs. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Tread Wear Indicators > Page 11657 Tires: Testing and Inspection Tire Wear Patterns TIRE WEAR PATTERNS Under inflation will cause wear on the shoulders of tire. Over inflation will cause wear at the center of tire. Excessive camber causes the tire to run at an angle to the road. One side of tread is then worn more than the other. Excessive toe-in or toe-out causes wear on the tread edges and a feathered effect across the tread. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Tread Wear Indicators > Page 11658 Tires: Testing and Inspection Tire Noise Or Vibration TIRE NOISE OR VIBRATION Radial-ply tires are sensitive to force impulses caused by improper mounting, vibration, wheel defects, or possibly tire imbalance. To find out if tires are causing the noise or vibration, drive the vehicle over a smooth road at varying speeds. Note the noise level during acceleration and deceleration. The engine, differential and exhaust noises will change as speed varies, while the tire noise will usually remain constant. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Tread Wear Indicators > Page 11659 Tires: Testing and Inspection Tire / Vehicle Lead TIRE/VEHICLE LEAD Use the following Vehicle Lead Diagnosis And Correction Chart to diagnose and correct a vehicle lead or drift problem. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures Tires: Procedures TIRES Remove the protective coating on the tires before delivery of a vehicle. This coating may cause deterioration of the tires. To remove the protective coating, apply warm water and let it soak for a few minutes. Afterwards, scrub the coating away with a soft bristle brush. Steam cleaning may also be used to remove the coating. NOTE: DO NOT use gasoline, mineral oil, oil-based solvent or a wire brush for cleaning. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 11662 Tires: Removal and Replacement TIRE REPAIR AREA For proper repairing, a radial tire must be removed from the wheel. Repairs should only be made if the defect, or puncture, is in the tread area (1). The tire should be replaced if the puncture is located in the sidewall. Deflate tire completely before removing the tire from the wheel. Use lubrication such as a mild soap solution when dismounting or mounting tire. Use tools free of burrs or sharp edges which could damage the tire or wheel rim. Before mounting tire on wheel, make sure all rust is removed from the rim bead and repaint if necessary. Install wheel on vehicle, and tighten to proper torque specification. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Wheels/Tires - Chrome Clad Wheel Balancing Information Wheels: Technical Service Bulletins Wheels/Tires - Chrome Clad Wheel Balancing Information NUMBER: 22-002-09 GROUP: Wheels/Tires DATE: July 29, 2009 SUBJECT: Chrome Clad Wheel Adapters For Proper Balancing OVERVIEW: This bulletin describes the use of proper wheel adapters when mounting Chrome Clad wheels to wheel balancing equipment. MODELS: 2004-2008 (CS) Pacifica 2007 - 2009 (D1) Ram Truck (3500 Pick Up) 2007 - 2010 DC) Ram Truck (3500 Chassis Cab) 2005 - 2009 (DH) Ram Truck (1500/2500 Pick Up) 2009 - 2010 (DS) Ram Truck (1500) 2004 - 2009 (HB) Durango 2007-2009 (HG) Aspen 2009-2010 (JC) Journey 2007 - 2010 (JK) Wrangler 2008 - 2010 (JS27) Sebring Convertible 2007 - 2010 (JS41) Sebring/Avenger 2007-2010 (KA) Nitro 2002-2007 (KJ) Liberty 2002 - 2007 (KJ) Cherokee (International Markets) 2008 - 2010 (KK) Liberty 2009 - 2010 (LC) Challenger 2005 - 2010 (LE) 300C/300C Touring (International Markets) 2005 - 2010 (LX) 300/Magnum/Charger 2007 - 2010 (MK) Compass/Patriot 2005-2010 (ND) Dakota 2007 - 2001 (PM) Caliber 2001 - 2009 (PT) Chrysler PT Cruiser 2001 - 2007 (RG) Chrysler Voyager (International Markets) 2001 - 2007 (RS) Town & Country/Caravan/Voyager 2008 - 2010 (RI) Town & Country/Grand Caravan Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Wheels/Tires - Chrome Clad Wheel Balancing Information > Page 11667 2008 - 2010 (RI) Town & Country/Grand Voyager (International Markets) 2005 - 2010 (WH) Grand Cherokee (International Markets) 2005-2010 (WK) Grand Cherokee 2006 - 2010 (XH) Commander (International Markets) 2006 - 2010 (XK) Commander NOTE: This information applies to any model equipped with Chrome Clad Wheels. DISCUSSION: Models equipped with Chrome Clad wheels require specific piloting on balance equipment to properly center the wheel and prevent damage to the chrome clad surface. The chrome cladding is not removable or replaceable and has cladding tabs that extend into the wheel bore. Traditional high-taper cones will come into contact with the cladding tabs rather than properly seat on the hub bore chamfer. Many modern aluminum wheel designs cannot be mounted with traditional cones. Direct-Fit Collets should be used to properly mount clad wheels on balance equipment (Fig 1). SPECIAL TOOLS/EQUIPMENT REQUIRED: NOTE: This kit includes the adapters for all Dodge, Chrysler & Jeep models with clad wheels. Individual adapters for specific wheel sizes can be ordered separately. To order a kit or individual adapters, contact Pentastar Service Equipment @ 1-800-223-5623. POLICY: Information Only Disclaimer: This bulletin is supplied as technical information only and is not an authorization for repair. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Description and Operation > Wheel Design Wheels: Description and Operation Wheel Design WHEEL DESIGN The rim size is on the vehicle safety certification label located on the drivers door shut face. Original equipment wheels/rims are designed for operation up to the specified maximum vehicle capacity. All models use stamped steel, cast aluminum or forged aluminum wheels. Every wheel has raised sections between the rim flanges (1) and rim drop well (3) called safety humps. Initial inflation of the tire forces the bead over these raised sections. In case of rapid loss of air pressure, the raised sections help hold the tire on the wheel. The wheel studs and nuts are designed for specific applications. All aluminum and some steel wheels have wheel stud nuts with an enlarged nose. This enlarged nose is necessary to ensure proper retention of the wheels. Do not use replacement studs or nuts with a different design or lesser quality. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Description and Operation > Wheel Design > Page 11670 Wheels: Description and Operation Wheels WHEELS Original equipment wheels are designed for the specified Maximum Vehicle Capacity. All models use steel or aluminum drop center wheels. Aluminum wheels require special balance weights and alignment equipment. 1. On vehicles equipped with dual rear wheels, the rim is an eight stud hole pattern wheel. The wheels have a flat mounting surface (1). 2. The slots (1) in the wheel must be aligned to provide access to the valve stem. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 11671 Wheels: Testing and Inspection WHEEL INSPECTION Inspect wheels for: - Excessive run out - Dents or cracks - Damaged wheel lug nut holes - Air Leaks from any area or surface of the rim NOTE: Do not attempt to repair a wheel by hammering, heating or welding. If a wheel is damaged an original equipment replacement wheel should be used. When obtaining replacement wheels, they should be equivalent in load carrying capacity. The diameter, width, offset, pilot hole and bolt circle of the wheel should be the same as the original wheel. WARNING: Failure to use equivalent replacement wheels may adversely affect the safety and handling of the vehicle. Used wheels are not recommended. The service history of the wheel may have included severe treatment or very high mileage. The rim could fail without warning. WARNING: Daimlerchrysler corporation does not recommend that customers use "reconditioned" wheels (wheels that have been damaged and repaired) because they can result in a sudden catastrophic wheel failure which could cause loss of control and result in injury or death. For Clarification: - Cosmetic refinishing for the purpose of repairing a superficial flaw is an acceptable procedure providing it is limited to paint or clear coat only, the wheel is not modified in any way, and there is no exposure to paint curing heat over 200 degrees Fahrenheit. - Damaged wheels are those which have been bent, broken, cracked or sustained some other physical damage which may have compromised the wheel structure - Repaired indicates that the wheel has been modified through bending, welding, heating, straightening, or material removal to rectify damage. - Re-plating of chrome plated wheels is not an acceptable procedure nor is chrome plating of original equipment painted or polished wheels, as this may alter mechanical properties and affect fatigue life. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Specifications Wheel Bearing: Specifications Wheel Bearing Grease ............................................................................................................. Mopar Multi-Purpose Lubricant NLGI Grade 2 EP, GC-LB Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Hub / Bearing - Removal Wheel Bearing: Service and Repair Front Hub / Bearing - Removal 4X4 - Independent Front Suspension 4X4 1. Raise and support the vehicle. 2. Remove the wheel and tire assembly. 3. Remove the brake caliper and rotor See: Brakes and Traction Control/Disc Brake System/Brake Rotor/Disc/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Brake Rotor - Removal . 4. Remove the ABS wheel speed sensor if equipped, See: Brakes and Traction Control/Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems/Wheel Speed Sensor/Service and Repair/Front Wheel Speed Sensor - Removal . 5. Remove the halfshaft nut. NOTE: Do not strike the knuckle with a hammer to remove the tie rod end or the ball joint. Damage to the steering knuckle will occur. 6. Remove the tie rod end nut and separate the tie rod from the knuckle using remover 9360. 7. Remove the upper ball joint nut and separate the upper ball joint from the knuckle using remover 9360. 8. Pull down on the steering knuckle to separate the halfshaft (2) from the hub/bearing. 9. Remove the three hub/bearing mounting bolts (1) from the steering knuckle. 10. Slide the hub/bearing out of the steering knuckle. 11. Remove the brake dust shield. 2500 & 3500 - 4WD - Link/Coil 2500 & 3500 - 4WD 1. Raise and support the vehicle. 2. Remove the wheel and tire assembly. 3. Remove the hub extension (1) mounting nuts and remove the extension from the rotor if equipped. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Hub / Bearing - Removal > Page 11677 4. Remove the brake caliper, See: Brakes and Traction Control/Disc Brake System/Brake Caliper/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Disc Brake Caliper - Removal . 5. Remove the cotter pin (2) and the hub nut (1) from the axle shaft. 6. Remove the caliper adapter. See: Brakes and Traction Control/Disc Brake System/Brake Caliper/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Disc Brake Caliper Adapter - Removal . 7. Remove the disc brake rotor. See: Brakes and Traction Control/Disc Brake System/Brake Rotor/Disc/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Brake Rotor - Removal . 8. Disconnect the wheel speed sensor wire. 9. Remove the hub/bearing 4 mounting bolts and remove the hub/bearing. 4500 & 5500 - Link/Coil 4500 & 5500 1. Raise and support the vehicle. 2. Remove the wheel and tire assembly. 3. Remove the brake caliper, See: Brakes and Traction Control/Disc Brake System/Brake Caliper/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Disc Brake Caliper - Removal . 4. Remove the caliper adapter. See: Brakes and Traction Control/Disc Brake System/Brake Caliper/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Disc Brake Caliper Adapter - Removal . 5. Remove the hub extension (2) and disc brake rotor (1) See: Brakes and Traction Control/Disc Brake System/Brake Rotor/Disc/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Brake Rotor - Removal . 6. Remove the axle shaft nut (3) from the axle shaft. 7. Disconnect the wheel speed sensor wire and remove the wheel speed sensor bolt (1) from the hub/bearing then remove the sensor (2). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Hub / Bearing - Removal > Page 11678 8. Remove the hub/bearing 4 mounting bolts (1) and remove the hub/bearing. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Hub / Bearing - Removal > Page 11679 Wheel Bearing: Service and Repair Front Hub / Bearing - Installation 4X4 - Independent Front Suspension 4X4 1. Install the brake dust shield (2). 2. Install the hub/bearing (1) into the steering knuckle (3) and tighten the bolts to 163 Nm (120 ft. lbs.). 3. Install the brake rotor and caliper See: Brakes and Traction Control/Disc Brake System/Brake Rotor/Disc/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Brake Rotor - Installation . 4. Install the ABS wheel speed sensor if equipped See: Brakes and Traction Control/Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems/Wheel Speed Sensor/Service and Repair/Front Wheel Speed Sensor - Installation . 5. Install the upper ball joint nut to the steering knuckle and tighten to 54 Nm (40 ft. lbs.) (on 1500 series only an additional 90° turn). 6. Install the tie rod end nut to the steering knuckle and tighten to 61 Nm (45 ft. lbs.) then an additional 90°. 7. Install the halfshaft nut and tighten to 251 Nm (185 ft. lbs.). 8. Install the wheel and tire assembly See: Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement . 9. Remove the support and lower vehicle. 2500 & 3500 - 4WD - Link/Coil 2500 & 3500 - 4WD 1. Position the brake shield (1) on bolts. 2. Install the hub/bearing to the knuckle. Tighten the hub/bearing bolts (2) to 202 Nm (149 ft. lbs. 3. Install the hub nut and tighten to 356 Nm (263 ft. lbs.). 4. Install the wheel speed sensor to the hub. See: Brakes and Traction Control/Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems/Wheel Speed Sensor/Service and Repair/Front Wheel Speed Sensor - Installation . 5. Install the disc brake rotor. See: Brakes and Traction Control/Disc Brake System/Brake Rotor/Disc/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Brake Rotor - Installation . Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Hub / Bearing - Removal > Page 11680 6. Install the brake caliper adapter with the caliper, See: Brakes and Traction Control/Disc Brake System/Brake Caliper/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Disc Brake Caliper Adapter - Installation . 7. Install the hub extension and nuts to the front rotor. Tighten nuts to 130 Nm (96 ft.lbs). HD DRW ONLY. 8. Install the wheel and tire assemblies, See: Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement . 9. Remove the support and lower the vehicle. 10. Apply the brakes several times to seat the brake shoes and caliper piston. Do not move the vehicle until a firm brake pedal is obtained. 4500 & 5500 - Link/Coil 4500 & 5500 NOTE: If installing a NEW hub/bearing on a 4X4 only Steps 1-3 should be followed for the correct shim size. 1. Measure from the new hub/bearing unit crimp (2) to the flange (3). 2. Choose the correct shim according to the table: 3. Check the shim (2) on the axle shaft (3). Be sure that the shim (2) is placed with the radius side (1) to the joint. 4. Install the hub/bearing to the knuckle. Tighten the hub/bearing bolts (1) to 202 Nm (149 ft. lbs. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Hub / Bearing - Removal > Page 11681 5. Install the axle nut (3) and tighten to 356 Nm (263 ft. lbs.). 6. Install the wheel speed sensor 2) to the hub and tighten the bolt (1). See: Brakes and Traction Control/Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems/Wheel Speed Sensor/Service and Repair/Front Wheel Speed Sensor - Installation . 7. Install the disc brake rotor (1). See: Brakes and Traction Control/Disc Brake System/Brake Rotor/Disc/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Brake Rotor - Installation . 8. Install the hub extension (2) and nuts to the front rotor. Tighten nuts to 130 Nm (96 ft.lbs). 9. Install the brake caliper adapter with the caliper, See: Brakes and Traction Control/Disc Brake System/Brake Caliper/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Disc Brake Caliper Adapter - Installation . 10. Install the wheel and tire assemblies, See: Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement . 11. Remove the support and lower the vehicle. 12. Apply the brakes several times to seat the brake shoes and caliper piston. Do not move the vehicle until a firm brake pedal is obtained. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Cover > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Wheel Cover: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL NOTE: The hub caps must be removed before raising the vehicle off the ground. NOTE: You must use the flat end of the hub/cap remover/installer combination tool to pry off the wheel skins. Insert the flat tip completely and using a back and forth motion, loosen the wheel skin. repeat this procedure around the tire until the wheel skin pops off. 1. On 2500/3500 single rear wheel (SRW) models, insert a hub/cap remover/installer combination tool using the blade on the end of the tool to pry the cap off in a back and forth motion. 2. On 3500 models with dual rear wheels (DRW), you must first remove the hub caps. The hub/cap remover/installer combination tool must be inserted in the pry off notch of the rear hub caps. 3. Position the hub/cap remover/installer combination tool and pull out on the tool firmly. The cap should come off. NOTE: Failure to use a back and forth motion could damage the wheel skin chrome finish. 4. The wheel skins can now be removed from the wheel. Use the flat end of the lug nut wrench to pry off the wheel skins. Make sure that the flat end is inserted and use a back and forth motion to remove the wheel skin. 5. On 3500 models front hub caps use the hub/cap remover/installer combination tool to pry off the cap in a back and forth motion. The wheel skins can now be removed. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Cover > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 11686 Wheel Cover: Service and Repair Installation Front FRONT 1. Align the valve stem with the notch in the wheel skin. 2. Seat on side of the wheel skin's wire retainer on to the wheel. 3. Using a rubber mallet, strike the opposite side of the wheel skin until the skin is properly seated. NOTE: The wheel skin and the hub cap are fully seated when there is a consistant gap between the skin/ cap and the wheel. 4. Tug on the hub cap/wheel skin to ensure that they are properly installed. Rear REAR 1. Install one 1 1/2 in. valve stem extension on each rear inner wheel. NOTE: A 3/8 in. drive 10mm deep wheel socket with a 10 in. or greater extension can be used to remove the existing valve stem cap and install the extension. 2. Install one 1 in. valve stem extension on each outer wheel. 3. Align the cooling windows of the wheel skin with the cooling windows of the wheel. Seat one side of the wheel skin's retainer onto the wheel. Using a rubber mallet, strike thew wheel skin on the outer circumference. Strike at several locations around the circumference until the skin is fully seated. NOTE: The wheel skin and the hub cap are fully seated when there is a consistent gap between the skin/cap and the wheel. 4. Tug on the hub/cap wheel skin to ensure that they are properly installed. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Hub > Axle Nut > Component Information > Specifications > 4X4 - Independent Front Suspension Axle Nut: Specifications 4X4 - Independent Front Suspension 4X4 Install the halfshaft nut and tighten to 251 Nm (185 ft. lbs.). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Hub > Axle Nut > Component Information > Specifications > 4X4 - Independent Front Suspension > Page 11692 Axle Nut: Specifications 2500 & 3500 - 4WD - Link/Coil 2500 & 3500 - 4WD Install the hub nut and tighten to 356 Nm (263 ft. lbs.). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Hub > Axle Nut > Component Information > Specifications > 4X4 - Independent Front Suspension > Page 11693 Axle Nut: Specifications 4500 & 5500 - Link/Coil 4500 & 5500 Install the axle nut (3) and tighten to 356 Nm (263 ft. lbs.). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Fastener > Component Information > Specifications Wheel Fastener: Specifications TORQUE Torque Specifications Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Fastener > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Wheel Fastener: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL 1. Raise and support the vehicle. 2. Remove the wheel and tire assembly. 3. Remove the brake caliper, caliper adapter and rotor, See: Brakes and Traction Control/Disc Brake System/Brake Rotor/Disc/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Brake Rotor - Removal . 4. Remove the wheel speed sensor from the hub. 5. Press the stud from the hub using remover C-4150A (1). 6. Remove the stud (2) from the hub (1) through the backing plate access hole (3). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Fastener > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 11699 Wheel Fastener: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION 1. Install the new stud (2) into the hub flange (1). 2. Install three proper sized washers onto the stud, then install lug nut with the flat side of the nut against the washers. 3. Tighten the lug nut until the stud is pulled into the hub flange. Verify that the stud is properly seated into the flange. 4. Remove the lug nut and washers. 5. Install the brake rotor, caliper adapter, and caliper, See: Brakes and Traction Control/Disc Brake System/Brake Rotor/Disc/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Brake Rotor - Installation . 6. Install the wheel speed sensor. 7. Install the wheel and tire assembly, use new lug nut on the stud or studs that were replaced. 8. Remove the support and lower the vehicle. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Accumulator HVAC > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Accumulator HVAC: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION To protect the A/C compressor from any liquid slugging, an A/C accumulator (5) is used in this A/C system to retain any refrigerant that may exit from the evaporator in a liquid state. The A/C accumulator is mounted in the engine compartment between the evaporator outlet tube (2) and the A/C suction line (6). An integral mounting bracket (4) is used to secure the accumulator to the dash panel (3). The A/C low side service port (1) is mounted to the top of the A/C accumulator. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Accumulator HVAC > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 11705 Accumulator HVAC: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION Refrigerant enters the A/C accumulator (1) mostly as a low pressure vapor through the inlet tube (2). Any liquid, oil-laden refrigerant falls to the bottom of the canister, which acts as a separator. A desiccant bag (3) is mounted inside the accumulator canister to absorb any moisture which may have entered and become trapped within the refrigerant system. A filter (4) is also mounted inside the canister to trap any foreign material that may have entered the refrigerant system during assembly. The low pressure vapor exits the A/C accumulator through the outlet tube (5). On this model, the low side service port (6) is located at the top of the A/C accumulator. NOTE: Replacement of the refrigerant line O-ring seals and gaskets is required anytime a refrigerant line is opened. Failure to replace the rubber O-ring seals and metal gaskets could result in a refrigerant system leak. The A/C accumulator has no serviceable parts except for the rubber O-ring seals, low side service port valve, cap and secondary retaining clips. The O-ring seals used on the connections are made from a special type of rubber not affected by R-134a refrigerant. The O-ring seals must be replaced whenever the A/C accumulator is removed and installed. The A/C accumulator cannot be repaired and must be replaced if found to be leaking or damaged, or if an internal failure of the A/C compressor has occurred. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Accumulator HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Accumulator HVAC: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL WARNING: Review the warnings and cautions before performing the following operation See: Service Precautions/Warning and See: Service Precautions/Caution. 1. Disconnect and isolate the negative battery cable. 2. Recover the refrigerant from the refrigerant system See: Service and Repair/Refrigerant System Recovery . 3. Remove the air filter housing cover to gain access to the A/C accumulator (9) See: Engine, Cooling and Exhaust/Engine/Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks/Air Cleaner Housing/Air Filter Element/Service and Repair/Installation . 4. Remove the secondary retaining clip (11) from the spring-lock coupler (1) that secures the A/C suction line (10) to the accumulator outlet tube (2). 5. Using the proper A/C line disconnect tool (Special Tool Kit 7193 or equivalent), disconnect the A/C suction line from the A/C accumulator and remove and discard the O-ring seals See: Coupler HVAC/Service and Repair/Removal . 6. If equipped, disengage the push-pin type wire harness retainer from the plastic wire harness bracket located on the side of the A/C accumulator and position the engine wire harness out of the way. 7. Loosen the bolts (8) that secure the A/C accumulator to the bracket (7) located on the dash panel. 8. Remove the secondary retaining clip (4) from the spring-lock coupler (6) that secures the accumulator inlet tube (3) to the evaporator outlet tube (5). 9. Using the proper A/C line disconnect tool (Special Tool Kit 7193 or equivalent), disconnect the accumulator inlet tube from the evaporator outlet tube and remove and discard the O-ring seals See: Coupler HVAC/Service and Repair/Removal . 10. Install plugs in, or tape over the opened refrigerant system connections. 11. If the A/C accumulator is being replaced, remove the accumulator mounting bolts and the plastic wire harness bracket (if equipped) from the accumulator. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Accumulator HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 11708 Accumulator HVAC: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION CAUTION: Be certain to adjust the refrigerant oil level when servicing the A/C refrigerant system See: Service and Repair/Refrigerant Oil Level. Failure to properly adjust the refrigerant oil level will prevent the A/C system from operating as designed and can cause serious A/C compressor damage. CAUTION: The A/C accumulator must be replaced if an internal failure of the A/C compressor has occurred. Failure to replace the A/C accumulator can cause serious A/C compressor damage. NOTE: When replacing multiple A/C system components, refer to the Refrigerant Oil Capacities chart to determine how much oil should be added to the refrigerant system See: Service and Repair/Refrigerant Oil Level. NOTE: If only the A/C accumulator is being replaced, add 60 milliliters (2 fluid ounces) of refrigerant oil to the refrigerant system. Use only the refrigerant oil of the type recommended for the A/C compressor in the vehicle. NOTE: Replacement of the refrigerant line O-ring seals and gaskets is required anytime a refrigerant line is opened. Failure to replace the rubber O-ring seals and metal gaskets could result in a refrigerant system leak. 1. If the A/C accumulator (9) is being replaced, loosely install the accumulator mounting bolts (8) and the plastic wire harness bracket (if equipped) on to the accumulator. 2. Position the A/C accumulator onto the bracket located on the dash panel (7) in the engine compartment. Do not tighten the accumulator mounting bolts at this time. 3. Remove the tape or plugs from the opened refrigerant system connections. 4. Lubricate new rubber O-ring seals with clean refrigerant oil and install them onto the accumulator tube fittings (1 and 6). Use only the specified seals as they are made of a special material for the R-134a system. Use only refrigerant oil of the type recommended for the A/C compressor in the vehicle. 5. Connect the spring-lock coupler that secures the accumulator inlet tube (3) to the evaporator outlet tube (5) and install the secondary retaining clip (4) See: Coupler HVAC/Service and Repair/Installation . 6. Tighten the accumulator mounting bolts to 6.8 Nm (60 in. lbs.). 7. If equipped, engage the engine wire harness retaining clip to the plastic wire harness bracket located on the side of the A/C accumulator. 8. Connect the A/C suction line (10) to the accumulator outlet tube (2) and install the secondary retaining clip (11) See: Coupler HVAC/Service and Repair/Installation . 9. Install the air filter housing cover See: Engine, Cooling and Exhaust/Engine/Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks/Air Cleaner Housing/Air Filter Element/Service and Repair/Installation . 10. Reconnect the battery negative cable. 11. Evacuate the refrigerant system See: Service and Repair/Refrigerant System Evacuate . 12. If the A/C accumulator is being replaced, add 60 milliliters (2 fluid ounces) of refrigerant oil to the refrigerant system. When replacing multiple A/C system components, refer to the Refrigerant Oil Capacities chart to determine how much oil should be added to the refrigerant system See: Service and Repair/Refrigerant Oil Level . Use only refrigerant oil of the type recommended for the A/C compressor in the vehicle. 13. Charge the refrigerant system See: Service and Repair/Refrigerant System Charge . Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Actuator-Blend Door-Driver Air Door Actuator / Motor: Locations Actuator-Blend Door-Driver Component ID: 1 Component : ACTUATOR-BLEND DOOR-DRIVER Connector: Name : ACTUATOR-BLEND DOOR-DRIVER Color : GRAY # of pins : 2 Pin Circuit Description 1 C34 20DB/LB COMMON DOOR DRIVER 2 C61 20DB/LG BLEND DOOR DRIVER Component Location - 40 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Actuator-Blend Door-Driver > Page 11714 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Actuator-Blend Door-Driver > Page 11715 Air Door Actuator / Motor: Locations Actuator-Blend Door-Passenger Component ID: 2 Component : ACTUATOR-BLEND DOOR-PASSENGER Connector: Name : ACTUATOR-BLEND DOOR-PASSENGER Color : GRAY # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (DUAL ZONE) Pin Circuit Description 1 C34 20DB/LB COMMON DOOR DRIVER 2 C33 20LB/BR PASSENGER BLEND DOOR DRIVER Component Location - 40 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Actuator-Blend Door-Driver > Page 11716 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Actuator-Blend Door-Driver > Page 11717 Air Door Actuator / Motor: Locations Actuator-Mode Door 1 Component ID: 5 Component : ACTUATOR-MODE DOOR 1 Connector: Name : ACTUATOR-MODE DOOR 1 Color : GRAY # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (PANEL TO FLOOR) Pin Circuit Description 1 C34 20DB/LB COMMON DOOR DRIVER 2 C801 20DB/OR MODE DOOR 1 DRIVER Component Location - 40 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Actuator-Blend Door-Driver > Page 11718 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Actuator-Blend Door-Driver > Page 11719 Air Door Actuator / Motor: Locations Actuator-Mode Door 2 Component ID: 6 Component : ACTUATOR-MODE DOOR 2 Connector: Name : ACTUATOR-MODE DOOR 2 Color : GRAY # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (DEFROST TO FLOOR) Pin Circuit Description 1 C34 20DB/LB COMMON DOOR DRIVER 2 C29 20DB/OR MODE DOOR 2 DRIVER Component Location - 40 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Actuator-Blend Door-Driver > Page 11720 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Actuator-Blend Door-Driver Air Door Actuator / Motor: Diagrams Actuator-Blend Door-Driver Component ID: 1 Component : ACTUATOR-BLEND DOOR-DRIVER Connector: Name : ACTUATOR-BLEND DOOR-DRIVER Color : GRAY # of pins : 2 Pin Circuit Description 1 C34 20DB/LB COMMON DOOR DRIVER 2 C61 20DB/LG BLEND DOOR DRIVER Component Location - 40 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Actuator-Blend Door-Driver > Page 11723 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Actuator-Blend Door-Driver > Page 11724 Air Door Actuator / Motor: Diagrams Actuator-Blend Door-Passenger Component ID: 2 Component : ACTUATOR-BLEND DOOR-PASSENGER Connector: Name : ACTUATOR-BLEND DOOR-PASSENGER Color : GRAY # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (DUAL ZONE) Pin Circuit Description 1 C34 20DB/LB COMMON DOOR DRIVER 2 C33 20LB/BR PASSENGER BLEND DOOR DRIVER Component Location - 40 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Actuator-Blend Door-Driver > Page 11725 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Actuator-Blend Door-Driver > Page 11726 Air Door Actuator / Motor: Diagrams Actuator-Mode Door 1 Component ID: 5 Component : ACTUATOR-MODE DOOR 1 Connector: Name : ACTUATOR-MODE DOOR 1 Color : GRAY # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (PANEL TO FLOOR) Pin Circuit Description 1 C34 20DB/LB COMMON DOOR DRIVER 2 C801 20DB/OR MODE DOOR 1 DRIVER Component Location - 40 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Actuator-Blend Door-Driver > Page 11727 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Actuator-Blend Door-Driver > Page 11728 Air Door Actuator / Motor: Diagrams Actuator-Mode Door 2 Component ID: 6 Component : ACTUATOR-MODE DOOR 2 Connector: Name : ACTUATOR-MODE DOOR 2 Color : GRAY # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (DEFROST TO FLOOR) Pin Circuit Description 1 C34 20DB/LB COMMON DOOR DRIVER 2 C29 20DB/OR MODE DOOR 2 DRIVER Component Location - 40 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Actuator-Blend Door-Driver > Page 11729 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Actuator-Blend Door-Driver > Page 11730 Air Door Actuator / Motor: Diagrams Actuator-Recirculation Door Component ID: 7 Component : ACTUATOR-RECIRCULATION DOOR Connector: Name : ACTUATOR-RECIRCULATION DOOR Color : GRAY # of pins : 2 Pin Circuit Description 1 C34 20DB/LB COMMON DOOR DRIVER 2 C32 20DB/TN RECIRCULATION DOOR DRIVER Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component Information > Description and Operation > Blend Door Actuator Air Door Actuator / Motor: Description and Operation Blend Door Actuator Description DESCRIPTION The blend door actuators are reversible, 12-volt direct current (DC), servo motors. Models with the single zone heating-A/C system have a single blend-air door, which is controlled by a single blend door actuator. Models with the dual zone system have two blend-air doors, which are controlled by two blend door actuators. The blend door actuator (1) for the single zone heating-A/C system is located near the center of the HVAC housing (2), close to the dash panel. For the dual zone heating-A/C system, the same blend door actuator used for the single zone system becomes the driver side blend door actuator, which is mechanically connected to only the driver side blend-air door. A second separate blend door actuator (3) located on the top of the HVAC housing is mechanically connected to the passenger side blend-air door. All actuators (1) are interchangeable with each other. Each actuator is contained within an identical black molded plastic housing with an integral wire connector receptacle (2). Each actuator also has an identical output shaft with splines (3) that connect it to its respective door linkage and three integral mounting tabs (4) that allow the actuator to be secured to the HVAC housing. The blend door actuators do not require mechanical indexing to the blend-air doors, as they are electronically calibrated by the A/C-heater control. Operation OPERATION Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component Information > Description and Operation > Blend Door Actuator > Page 11733 The blend door actuators are connected to the A/C-heater control through the vehicle electrical system by a dedicated two-wire lead and connector of the HVAC wire harness. The blend door actuator(s) can move the blend-air door(s) in two directions. When the A/C-heater control pulls the voltage on one side of the motor connection high and the other connection low, the blend-air door will move in one direction. When the A/C-heater control reverses the polarity of the voltage to the motor, the blend-air door moves in the opposite direction. When the A/C-heater control makes the voltage to both connections high or both connections low, the blend-air door stops and will not move. The A/C-heater control uses a pulse-count positioning system to monitor the operation and relative position of the blend door actuator(s) and the blend-air door(s). The A/C-heater control learns the blend-air door stop positions during the calibration procedure and will store a diagnostic trouble code (DTC) for any problems it detects in the blend door actuator circuits. The blend door actuators are diagnosed using a scan tool. The blend door actuators cannot be adjusted or repaired and must be replaced if found inoperative or damaged. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component Information > Description and Operation > Blend Door Actuator > Page 11734 Air Door Actuator / Motor: Description and Operation Mode Door Actuator Description DESCRIPTION The mode door actuators are reversible, 12-volt direct current (DC) servo motors. The heating-A/C systems on this vehicle use two mode door actuators. One for the panel/floor-air door and one for the defrost-air door. Both the defrost door actuator (1) and the panel/floor door actuator (2) and the are located on the driver side end of the HVAC housing (3), close to the dash panel. All actuators (1) are interchangeable with each other. Each actuator is contained within an identical black molded plastic housing with an integral wire connector receptacle (2). Each actuator also has an identical output shaft with splines (3) that connects it to its respective door linkage and three integral mounting tabs (4) that allow the actuator to be secured to the HVAC housing. The mode door actuators do not require mechanical indexing to the mode- air doors, as they are electronically calibrated by the A/C-heater control. Operation OPERATION The mode door actuators are connected to the A/C-heater control through the vehicle electrical system by dedicated two-wire leads and connectors of the HVAC wire harness. The mode door actuators can move the defrost-air door and the panel/floor-air door in two directions. When the A/C-heater control pulls the voltage on one side of the motor connection high and the other connection low, the mode-air door will move in one direction. When the A/C-heater control reverses the polarity of the voltage to the motor, the mode-air door moves in the opposite direction. When the A/C-heater control makes the voltage to both connections high or both connections low, the mode-air door stops and will not move. The A/C-heater control uses a pulse-count positioning system to monitor the operation and relative position of the mode door actuators and the mode-air Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component Information > Description and Operation > Blend Door Actuator > Page 11735 doors. The A/C-heater control learns the mode-air door stop positions during the calibration procedure and will store a diagnostic trouble code (DTC) for any problems it detects in the mode door actuator circuits. The mode door actuators are diagnosed using using a scan tool See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code Tests and Associated Procedures . The mode door actuators cannot be adjusted or repaired and must be replaced if found inoperative or damaged. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component Information > Description and Operation > Blend Door Actuator > Page 11736 Air Door Actuator / Motor: Description and Operation Recirculation Door Actuator Description DESCRIPTION The recirculation door actuator (1) is a reversible 12-volt direct current (DC) servo motor. The single recirculation door actuator is located on the passenger side end of the HVAC housing (2), on the top of the air inlet housing. All actuators (1) are interchangeable with each other. Each actuator is contained within an identical black molded plastic housing with an integral wire connector receptacle (2). Each actuator also has an identical output shaft with splines (3) that connects it to its respective door linkage and three integral mounting tabs (4) that allow the actuator to be secured to the HVAC housing. The recirculation door actuator does not require mechanical indexing to the recirculation-air door, as it is electronically calibrated by the A/C-heater control. Operation OPERATION The recirculation door actuator is connected to the heater-A/C control module through the vehicle electrical system by a dedicated two-wire lead and connector of the HVAC wire harness. The recirculation door actuator can move the recirculation-air door in two directions. When the A/C-heater control pulls the voltage on one side of the motor connection high and the other connection low, the recirculation-air door will move in one direction. When the A/C-heater control makes the voltage to both connections high or both connections low, the recirculation-air door stops and will not move. The A/C-heater control uses a pulse-count positioning system to monitor the operation and relative position of the recirculation door actuator and the recirculation-air door. The A/C-heater control learns the recirculation-air door stop positions during the calibration procedure and will store a diagnostic trouble code (DTC) for any problems it detects in the recirculation door actuator circuits. The recirculation door actuator is diagnosed using a scan tool See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component Information > Description and Operation > Blend Door Actuator > Page 11737 Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code Tests and Associated Procedures . The recirculation door actuator cannot be adjusted or repaired and must be replaced if found inoperative or damaged. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Blend Door Actuator - Removal Air Door Actuator / Motor: Service and Repair Blend Door Actuator - Removal REMOVAL WARNING: Disable the airbag system before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the airbag system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the airbag system. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment and possible personal injury or death. NOTE: The single zone heating-A/C system is equipped with a single blend door actuator. The dual zone system has two blend door actuators, one for the driver side blend-air door and one for the passenger side blend-air door. SINGLE ZONE/DUAL ZONE DRIVER SIDE 1. Disconnect and isolate the negative battery cable. 2. Remove the instrument panel from the vehicle See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Service and Repair/Instrument Panel - Removal . 3. Remove the two screws (1) that secure the blend door actuator (2) to the back of the HVAC housing (3). 4. Remove the blend door actuator from the HVAC housing and disconnect the HVAC wire harness connector (4) from the actuator. 5. Remove the blend door actuator from the vehicle. DUAL ZONE PASSENGER SIDE 6. Disconnect and isolate the negative battery cable. 7. Remove the instrument panel from the vehicle See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Service and Repair/Instrument Panel - Removal . 8. Remove the blend door lever (1) from the blend door actuator output shaft (2) and the blend door linkage (3). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Blend Door Actuator - Removal > Page 11740 9. Remove the two screws (1) that secure the blend door actuator and bracket assembly (2) to the top of the HVAC housing (3). 10. Remove the blend door actuator and bracket assembly from the HVAC housing and disconnect the HVAC wire harness connector (4) from the actuator. 11. Remove the blend door actuator and bracket assembly from the vehicle. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Blend Door Actuator - Removal > Page 11741 Air Door Actuator / Motor: Service and Repair Blend Door Actuator - Installation INSTALLATION NOTE: The single zone heating-A/C system is equipped with a single blend door actuator. The dual zone system has two blend door actuators, one for the driver side blend-air door and one for the passenger side blend-air door. SINGLE ZONE/DUAL ZONE DRIVER SIDE 1. Install the blend door actuator (1) onto the back of the HVAC housing (2). If necessary, rotate the actuator slightly to align the splines on the actuator output shaft (3) with those on the blend door lever (4). 2. Install the screws (1) that secure the blend door actuator (2) to the HVAC housing (3). Tighten the screws to 1.1 Nm (10 in. lbs.). 3. Connect the HVAC wire harness connector (4) to the blend door actuator. 4. Install the instrument panel See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Service and Repair/Instrument Panel Installation . 5. Reconnect the negative battery cable. DUAL ZONE PASSENGER SIDE Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Blend Door Actuator - Removal > Page 11742 6. Install the blend door actuator and bracket assembly (2) onto the top of the HVAC housing (3). 7. Install the screws (1) that secure the blend door actuator and bracket assembly to the HVAC housing. Tighten the screws to 1.1 Nm (10 in. lbs.). 8. Connect the HVAC wire harness connector (4) to the blend door actuator. NOTE: Align the guide pin on the blend door lever with the guides on the blend door linkage during installation of the blend door lever. 9. Install the blend door lever (1) onto the blend door actuator output shaft (2) and the blend door linkage (3). 10. Install the instrument panel See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Service and Repair/Instrument Panel Installation . 11. Reconnect the negative battery cable. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Blend Door Actuator - Removal > Page 11743 Air Door Actuator / Motor: Service and Repair Mode Door Actuator - Removal REMOVAL WARNING: Disable the airbag system before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the airbag system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the airbag system. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in an accidental airbag deployment and possible personal injury or death. NOTE: The heating-A/C system is equipped with two mode door actuators, one for the panel/floor-air door and one for the defrost-air door. PANEL/FLOOR DOOR ACTUATOR 1. Disconnect and isolate the negative battery cable. 2. Remove the instrument panel from the vehicle See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Service and Repair/Instrument Panel - Removal . 3. Remove the screws (1) that secure the panel/floor door actuator (2) to the back of the HVAC housing (3). 4. Remove the panel/floor door actuator from the HVAC housing and disconnect the HVAC wire harness connector (4) from the actuator. 5. Remove the panel/floor door actuator from the vehicle. DEFROST DOOR ACTUATOR 6. Disconnect and isolate the negative battery cable. 7. Remove the instrument panel from the vehicle See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Service and Repair/Instrument Panel - Removal . 8. Remove the screws (1) that secure the defrost door actuator (2) to the back of the HVAC housing (3). 9. Remove the defrost door actuator from the HVAC housing and disconnect the HVAC wire harness connector (4) from the actuator. 10. Remove the defrost door actuator from the vehicle. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Blend Door Actuator - Removal > Page 11744 Air Door Actuator / Motor: Service and Repair Mode Door Actuator - Installation INSTALLATION NOTE: The heating-A/C system is equipped with two mode door actuators, one for the panel/floor-air door and one for the defrost-air door. PANEL/FLOOR DOOR ACTUATOR 1. Install the panel/floor door actuator (1) onto the back of the HVAC housing (2). If necessary, rotate the actuator slightly to align the splines on the actuator output shaft (3) with those on the panel/floor door actuator coupler (4). 2. Install the screws (1) that secure the panel/floor door actuator (2) to the HVAC housing (3). Tighten the screws to 1.1 Nm (10 in. lbs.). 3. Connect the HVAC wire harness connector (4) to the panel/floor door actuator. 4. Install the instrument panel See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Service and Repair/Instrument Panel Installation . 5. Reconnect the negative battery cable. DEFROST DOOR ACTUATOR Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Blend Door Actuator - Removal > Page 11745 6. Install the defrost door actuator (1) onto the back of the HVAC housing (2). If necessary, rotate the actuator slightly to align the splines on the actuator output shaft (3) with those on the defrost door actuator coupler (4). 7. Install the screws (1) that secure the defrost door actuator (2) to the HVAC housing (3). Tighten the screws to 1.1 Nm (10 in. lbs.). 8. Connect the HVAC wire harness connector (4) to the defrost door actuator. 9. Install the instrument panel See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Service and Repair/Instrument Panel Installation . 10. Reconnect the negative battery cable. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Blend Door Actuator - Removal > Page 11746 Air Door Actuator / Motor: Service and Repair Blend Door Actuator - Removal REMOVAL WARNING: Disable the airbag system before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the airbag system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the airbag system. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment and possible personal injury or death. NOTE: The single zone heating-A/C system is equipped with a single blend door actuator. The dual zone system has two blend door actuators, one for the driver side blend-air door and one for the passenger side blend-air door. SINGLE ZONE/DUAL ZONE DRIVER SIDE 1. Disconnect and isolate the negative battery cable. 2. Remove the instrument panel from the vehicle See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Service and Repair/Instrument Panel - Removal . 3. Remove the two screws (1) that secure the blend door actuator (2) to the back of the HVAC housing (3). 4. Remove the blend door actuator from the HVAC housing and disconnect the HVAC wire harness connector (4) from the actuator. 5. Remove the blend door actuator from the vehicle. DUAL ZONE PASSENGER SIDE 6. Disconnect and isolate the negative battery cable. 7. Remove the instrument panel from the vehicle See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Service and Repair/Instrument Panel - Removal . 8. Remove the blend door lever (1) from the blend door actuator output shaft (2) and the blend door linkage (3). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Blend Door Actuator - Removal > Page 11747 9. Remove the two screws (1) that secure the blend door actuator and bracket assembly (2) to the top of the HVAC housing (3). 10. Remove the blend door actuator and bracket assembly from the HVAC housing and disconnect the HVAC wire harness connector (4) from the actuator. 11. Remove the blend door actuator and bracket assembly from the vehicle. Blend Door Actuator - Installation INSTALLATION NOTE: The single zone heating-A/C system is equipped with a single blend door actuator. The dual zone system has two blend door actuators, one for the driver side blend-air door and one for the passenger side blend-air door. SINGLE ZONE/DUAL ZONE DRIVER SIDE 1. Install the blend door actuator (1) onto the back of the HVAC housing (2). If necessary, rotate the actuator slightly to align the splines on the actuator output shaft (3) with those on the blend door lever (4). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Blend Door Actuator - Removal > Page 11748 2. Install the screws (1) that secure the blend door actuator (2) to the HVAC housing (3). Tighten the screws to 1.1 Nm (10 in. lbs.). 3. Connect the HVAC wire harness connector (4) to the blend door actuator. 4. Install the instrument panel See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Service and Repair/Instrument Panel Installation . 5. Reconnect the negative battery cable. DUAL ZONE PASSENGER SIDE 6. Install the blend door actuator and bracket assembly (2) onto the top of the HVAC housing (3). 7. Install the screws (1) that secure the blend door actuator and bracket assembly to the HVAC housing. Tighten the screws to 1.1 Nm (10 in. lbs.). 8. Connect the HVAC wire harness connector (4) to the blend door actuator. NOTE: Align the guide pin on the blend door lever with the guides on the blend door linkage during installation of the blend door lever. 9. Install the blend door lever (1) onto the blend door actuator output shaft (2) and the blend door linkage (3). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Blend Door Actuator - Removal > Page 11749 10. Install the instrument panel See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Service and Repair/Instrument Panel Installation . 11. Reconnect the negative battery cable. Mode Door Actuator - Removal REMOVAL WARNING: Disable the airbag system before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the airbag system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the airbag system. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in an accidental airbag deployment and possible personal injury or death. NOTE: The heating-A/C system is equipped with two mode door actuators, one for the panel/floor-air door and one for the defrost-air door. PANEL/FLOOR DOOR ACTUATOR 1. Disconnect and isolate the negative battery cable. 2. Remove the instrument panel from the vehicle See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Service and Repair/Instrument Panel - Removal . 3. Remove the screws (1) that secure the panel/floor door actuator (2) to the back of the HVAC housing (3). 4. Remove the panel/floor door actuator from the HVAC housing and disconnect the HVAC wire harness connector (4) from the actuator. 5. Remove the panel/floor door actuator from the vehicle. DEFROST DOOR ACTUATOR 6. Disconnect and isolate the negative battery cable. 7. Remove the instrument panel from the vehicle See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Service and Repair/Instrument Panel - Removal . 8. Remove the screws (1) that secure the defrost door actuator (2) to the back of the HVAC housing (3). 9. Remove the defrost door actuator from the HVAC housing and disconnect the HVAC wire harness connector (4) from the actuator. 10. Remove the defrost door actuator from the vehicle. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Blend Door Actuator - Removal > Page 11750 Mode Door Actuator - Installation INSTALLATION NOTE: The heating-A/C system is equipped with two mode door actuators, one for the panel/floor-air door and one for the defrost-air door. PANEL/FLOOR DOOR ACTUATOR 1. Install the panel/floor door actuator (1) onto the back of the HVAC housing (2). If necessary, rotate the actuator slightly to align the splines on the actuator output shaft (3) with those on the panel/floor door actuator coupler (4). 2. Install the screws (1) that secure the panel/floor door actuator (2) to the HVAC housing (3). Tighten the screws to 1.1 Nm (10 in. lbs.). 3. Connect the HVAC wire harness connector (4) to the panel/floor door actuator. 4. Install the instrument panel See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Service and Repair/Instrument Panel Installation . 5. Reconnect the negative battery cable. DEFROST DOOR ACTUATOR Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Blend Door Actuator - Removal > Page 11751 6. Install the defrost door actuator (1) onto the back of the HVAC housing (2). If necessary, rotate the actuator slightly to align the splines on the actuator output shaft (3) with those on the defrost door actuator coupler (4). 7. Install the screws (1) that secure the defrost door actuator (2) to the HVAC housing (3). Tighten the screws to 1.1 Nm (10 in. lbs.). 8. Connect the HVAC wire harness connector (4) to the defrost door actuator. 9. Install the instrument panel See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Service and Repair/Instrument Panel Installation . 10. Reconnect the negative battery cable. Recirculation Door Actuator - Removal REMOVAL WARNING: Disable the airbag system before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the airbag system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the airbag system. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment and possible personal injury or death. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Blend Door Actuator - Removal > Page 11752 1. Disconnect and isolate the negative battery cable. 2. Remove the glove box from the instrument panel See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Glove Compartment/Service and Repair/Instrument Panel Glove Box - Removal . 3. Remove the two screws (1) that secure the recirculation door actuator (2) to the side of the HVAC air inlet housing (3). 4. Remove the recirculation door actuator from the air inlet housing and disconnect the HVAC wire harness connector (4) from the actuator. 5. Remove the recirculation door actuator from the vehicle. Recirculation Door Actuator - Installation INSTALLATION 1. Install the recirculation door actuator (1) onto the side of the HVAC air inlet housing (2). If necessary, rotate the actuator slightly to align the splines on the actuator output shaft (3) with those in the recirculation door actuator coupler (4). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Blend Door Actuator - Removal > Page 11753 2. Install the two screws (1) that secure the recirculation door actuator (2) to the air inlet housing (3). Tighten the screws to 1.1 Nm (10 in. lbs.). 3. Connect the HVAC wire harness connector (4) to the recirculation door actuator. 4. Install the glove box See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Glove Compartment/Service and Repair/Instrument Panel Glove Box Installation . 5. Reconnect the negative battery cable. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Duct > Component Information > Service and Repair > Defroster Ducts Air Duct: Service and Repair Defroster Ducts Removal REMOVAL WARNING: Disable the airbag system before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the airbag system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the airbag system. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment and possible personal injury or death. NOTE: Take the proper precautions to protect the instrument panel from cosmetic damage. 1. Remove the instrument panel and place it on a workbench See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Service and Repair/Instrument Panel - Removal . 2. If required, disconnect the center radio speaker wire harness connector (1) and position it the wire harness lead out of the way. 3. Remove the screw (4) that secures the defroster duct adapter (3) to the instrument panel support. 4. Remove the defroster duct adapter from the defroster duct (5). 5. Remove the six screws (2) that secure the defroster duct to the instrument panel. 6. Remove the defroster duct from the instrument panel. Installation INSTALLATION Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Duct > Component Information > Service and Repair > Defroster Ducts > Page 11758 1. Position the defroster duct (5) into the instrument panel. 2. Install the six screws (2) that secure the defroster duct to the instrument panel. Tighten the screws to 2.2 Nm (20 in. lbs.). 3. Install the defroster duct adapter (3) onto the defroster duct. 4. Install the screw (4) that secures the defroster duct adapter to the instrument panel support. Tighten the screw to 2.2 Nm (20 in. lbs.). 5. If removed, connect the center radio speaker wire harness connector (1) to the speaker. 6. Install the instrument panel See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Service and Repair/Instrument Panel Installation . Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Duct > Component Information > Service and Repair > Defroster Ducts > Page 11759 Air Duct: Service and Repair Floor Console Ducts Removal REMOVAL NOTE: Illustration shown with seat cushions removed for clarity. 1. Remove the floor console See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Console/Service and Repair/Floor Console - Removal . 2. Disengage the floor console duct (1) from the rear duct adapter (3) located at the front of the rear duct (2) below the center front seat and slide the adapter rearward into the rear duct. 3. Disengage the floor console duct from the floor distribution duct (4) located on the bottom of the HVAC housing (5) and remove the console duct from the vehicle. NOTE: Illustration shown with center front seat removed for clarity. 4. If required, remove the front seat See: Body and Frame/Seats/Service and Repair/Seat Removal and remove the three push-pin retainers (1) that secure the rear duct (2) to the bottom of the center seat support (3). 5. Disengage the rear duct from the rear outlet (4) and remove the rear duct. Installation INSTALLATION Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Duct > Component Information > Service and Repair > Defroster Ducts > Page 11760 NOTE: Illustration shown with center front seat removed for clarity. 1. If removed, install the rear duct (2) onto the rear outlet (4). Make sure the duct is fully engaged to the outlet. 2. Install the three push-pin retainers (1) that secure the rear duct to the front seat support (3) and install the front seat See: Body and Frame/Seats/Service and Repair/Seat - Installation . NOTE: Illustration shown with seat cushions removed for clarity. 3. Install the floor console duct (1) onto the floor distribution duct (4) located at the bottom of the HVAC housing (5). Make sure the ducts are fully engaged to each other. 4. Slide the rear duct adapter (3) forward and install the floor console duct onto the rear duct (2). Make sure the ducts are fully engaged to each other. 5. Install the floor console See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Console/Service and Repair/Floor Console - Installation . Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Duct > Component Information > Service and Repair > Defroster Ducts > Page 11761 Air Duct: Service and Repair Floor Ducts Removal REMOVAL WARNING: Disable the airbag system before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the airbag system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the airbag system. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in an accidental airbag deployment and possible personal injury or death. NOTE: Regular Cab model shown. Other models similar. 1. Remove the HVAC housing from the vehicle See: Housing Assembly HVAC/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/HVAC Housing Removal and Installation . 2. Remove the screws (3) that secure the floor distribution duct (1) to the bottom of the HVAC housing (2). 3. Remove the floor distribution duct from the HVAC housing. Installation INSTALLATION NOTE: Regular Cab model shown. Other models similar. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Duct > Component Information > Service and Repair > Defroster Ducts > Page 11762 1. Position the floor distribution duct (1) onto the bottom of the HVAC housing (2). 2. Install the screws (3) that secure the floor distribution duct to the HVAC housing. Tighten the screws to 1.1 Nm (10 in. lbs.). 3. Install the HVAC housing See: Housing Assembly HVAC/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/HVAC Housing - Installation . Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Duct > Component Information > Service and Repair > Defroster Ducts > Page 11763 Air Duct: Service and Repair Instrument Panel Ducts Removal REMOVAL WARNING: Disable the airbag system before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the airbag system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the airbag system. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in an accidental airbag deployment and possible personal injury or death. NOTE: Take the proper precautions to protect the instrument panel from cosmetic damage. 1. Remove the instrument panel and place it on a workbench See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Service and Repair/Instrument Panel - Removal . 2. Remove the radio See: Accessories and Optional Equipment/Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc/Radio/Stereo/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Removal . 3. Remove the defroster duct See: Defroster Ducts/Removal . 4. Remove the two screws (1) that secure the center distribution duct (2) to the instrument panel support (3) and remove the duct. 5. Disconnect the right side instrument panel duct adapter (2) from the right side instrument panel duct (1) and remove the adapter. 6. Remove the screw that secures each intermediate demister duct (3 and 4) to the instrument panel cover. 7. Disconnect the intermediate demister ducts from the demister ducts and remove the intermediate ducts. 8. Disconnect the left side instrument panel duct adapter (6) from the right side instrument panel duct (5) and remove the adapter 9. Remove the instrument panel cover. 10. Remove the three screws that secure each instrument panel duct to the instrument panel support and remove the ducts. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Duct > Component Information > Service and Repair > Defroster Ducts > Page 11764 Installation INSTALLATION 1. Position the instrument panel ducts (1 and 5) onto the instrument panel support. 2. Install the three screws that secure each instrument panel duct to the instrument panel support. Tighten the screws to 2.2 Nm (20 in. lbs.). 3. Install the instrument panel cover. 4. Position the left side instrument panel duct adapter (6) into the instrument panel and connect it to the left panel duct. 5. Position the intermediate demister ducts (3 and 4) into the instrument panel and connect them to the demister ducts. 6. Install the screw that secures each intermediate demister duct to the instrument panel cover. Tighten the screws to 2.2 Nm (20 in. lbs.). 7. Position the right side instrument panel duct adapter (2) into the instrument panel and connect it to the right panel duct. 8. Position the center distribution duct (2) to the instrument panel support (3). 9. Install the two screws (1) that secure the center distribution duct to the instrument panel support. Tighten the screws to 2.2 Nm (20 in. lbs.). 10. Install the defroster duct See: Defroster Ducts/Installation . 11. Install the radio See: Accessories and Optional Equipment/Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc/Radio/Stereo/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Installation . 12. Install the instrument panel See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Service and Repair/Instrument Panel Installation . Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Duct > Component Information > Service and Repair > Defroster Ducts > Page 11765 Air Duct: Service and Repair Instrument Panel Demister Ducts Removal REMOVAL WARNING: Disable the airbag system before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the airbag system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the airbag system. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in an accidental airbag deployment and possible personal injury or death. NOTE: Take the proper precautions to protect the instrument panel from cosmetic damage. 1. Remove the instrument panel and place it on a workbench See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Service and Repair/Instrument Panel - Removal . 2. Remove the radio See: Accessories and Optional Equipment/Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc/Radio/Stereo/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Removal . 3. Remove the defroster duct See: Defroster Ducts/Removal . 4. Remove the two screws (1) that secure the center distribution duct (2) to the instrument panel support (3) and remove the duct. 5. Disconnect the right side instrument panel duct adapter (2) from the right side instrument panel duct (1) and remove the adapter. 6. Remove the screw that secures each intermediate demister duct (3 and 4) to the instrument panel cover. 7. Disconnect the intermediate demister ducts from the demister ducts and remove the intermediate ducts. 8. Disconnect the left side instrument panel duct adapter (6) from the right side instrument panel duct (5) and remove the adapter 9. Remove the instrument panel cover. 10. Remove the two screws that secure each demister duct to the instrument panel cover and remove the ducts. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Duct > Component Information > Service and Repair > Defroster Ducts > Page 11766 Installation INSTALLATION 1. Position the demister ducts onto the instrument panel cover. 2. Install the two screws that secure each demister duct to the instrument panel cover. Tighten the screws to 2.2 Nm (20 in. lbs.). 3. Install the instrument panel cover. 4. Position the left side instrument panel duct adapter (6) into the instrument panel and connect it to the left panel duct. 5. Position the intermediate demister ducts (3 and 4) into the instrument panel and connect them to the demister ducts. 6. Install the screw that secures each intermediate demister duct to the instrument panel cover. Tighten the screws to 2.2 Nm (20 in. lbs.). 7. Position the right side instrument panel duct adapter (2) into the instrument panel and connect it to the right panel duct. 8. Position the center distribution duct (2) to the instrument panel support (3). 9. Install the two screws (1) that secure the center distribution duct to the instrument panel support. Tighten the screws to 2.2 Nm (20 in. lbs.). 10. Install the defroster duct See: Defroster Ducts/Installation . 11. Install the radio See: Accessories and Optional Equipment/Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc/Radio/Stereo/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Installation . 12. Install the instrument panel See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Service and Repair/Instrument Panel Installation . Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Register > Component Information > Description and Operation Air Register: Description and Operation DESCRIPTION There are four defroster air outlets (1) in the defroster grille (2) located on the top of the instrument panel (3). The airflow from the defroster outlets is directed by fixed vanes in the defroster grille and cannot be adjusted. The defroster air outlets are not serviceable from the defroster grille. There are two side window demister air outlets (4). One located on each end of the instrument panel near the A-pillar area. The airflow from the side window demister air outlets is directed by fixed vanes in the outlets and cannot be adjusted. The driver side window demister air outlet is serviced with the instrument cluster bezel and the passenger side demister outlet is serviced with the passenger side instrument panel air outlet. There are four instrument panel air outlets (5). One air outlet is located near the end of the instrument panel facing the rear of the vehicle and two outlets are located on the instrument panel center bezel. Each of the instrument panel air outlets contain a grille with movable vanes that are used to direct or shut off the flow of the conditioned air leaving the instrument panel outlets. The driver side instrument panel air outlet is serviced with the instrument cluster bezel. The passenger side instrument panel air outlet is serviced separately from the instrument panel cover and the two center air outlets are serviced with the center bezel. On Mega Cab models there are two outlets (1) located at the rear of the center front seat support (2). Each of the rear air outlets contain a grille with movable vanes that are used to direct or shut off the flow of the conditioned air leaving the outlets. The rear air outlets are serviced as an assembly. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Register > Component Information > Service and Repair > Air Outlets - Removal Air Register: Service and Repair Air Outlets - Removal Front Passenger Air Outlet REMOVAL-FRONT PASSENGER AIR OUTLET WARNING: Disable the airbag system before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the airbag system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the airbag system. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in an accidental airbag deployment and possible personal injury or death. NOTE: Take the proper precautions to protect the instrument panel from cosmetic damage. 1. Remove the instrument panel and place it on a workbench See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Service and Repair/Instrument Panel - Removal . 2. Remove the instrument panel cover from the instrument panel support. CAUTION: Use care when removing the heads from the heat stakes located on the back of the instrument panel cover. Remove only enough material from the heat stakes to allow removal of the instrument panel air outlet and demister air outlet assembly from the cover. 3. Using an 11 mm (7/16 in.) drill bit, carefully remove the heads from the six heat stakes (1) that secure the passenger side air outlet and demister air outlet assembly (2) to the back of the instrument panel cover (3). CAUTION: Use care when removing the air outlet assembly from the instrument panel cover to prevent damage to the remaining portion of the heat stakes. 4. Carefully remove the air outlet assembly from the instrument panel cover. Rear Seat Air Outlets REMOVAL-REAR SEAT AIR OUTLETS Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Register > Component Information > Service and Repair > Air Outlets - Removal > Page 11772 NOTE: Illustration shown with front seat cushions removed for clarity. 1. Remove the two screws (1) that secure the rear air outlet housing (2) to the rear of the front center seat support (3). 2. Remove the rear air outlet housing and place it on a workbench. 3. Using a trim stick C-4755 or equivalent (1), disengage the retaining tabs that secure the rear air outlets (2) to the rear air outlet housing (3) and gently pry the outlets from the housing (3). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Register > Component Information > Service and Repair > Air Outlets - Removal > Page 11773 Air Register: Service and Repair Air Outlets - Installation Front Passenger Air Outlet INSTALLATION-FRONT PASSENGER AIR OUTLET 1. Position the passenger side instrument panel air outlet and demister air outlet assembly (2) onto the back of the instrument panel cover (3). CAUTION: Always use the retaining screws supplied with the replacement air outlet. Do not use screws longer then 10 mm. Failure to follow this caution may result in damage to the instrument panel cover. CAUTION: Use care when installing the air outlet retaining screws. To prevent damage to the instrument panel cover, do not overtighten the screws. 2. Install six M 4.2 x 9.5 mm screws (1) to secure the air outlet assembly to the instrument panel cover. Carefully tighten the screws securely. 3. Install the instrument panel cover. 4. Install the instrument panel See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Service and Repair/Instrument Panel Installation . Rear Seat Air Outlets INSTALLATION-REAR SEAT AIR OUTLETS NOTE: The air outlets are retained into the air outlet housing by eight retaining tabs. The air outlets must be first installed onto the bottom set of retaining tabs, then the upper set of tabs can be engaged. 1. Position the rear air outlets (1) to the back of the rear air outlet housing (2) and engage the lower set of retaining tabs (3). 2. Gently engage the upper set of retaining tabs (4). Make sure all of the retaining tabs are fully seated. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Register > Component Information > Service and Repair > Air Outlets - Removal > Page 11774 NOTE: Illustration shown with front seat cushions removed for clarity. 3. Position the rear air outlet housing (2) to the rear of the front center seat support (3). 4. Install the two screws (1) that secure the rear air outlet housing to the center seat support. Tighten the screws to 2.2 Nm (20 in. lbs.). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 398 Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC: Locations Component ID 398 Component ID: 398 Component : SENSOR-AMBIENT AIR TEMPERATURE Connector: Name : SENSOR-AMBIENT AIR TEMPERATURE Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Pin Circuit Description 1 G31 20VT/LG AAT SIGNAL 2 G930 20VT/TN AAT RETURN Component Location - 30 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 398 > Page 11779 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 398 > Page 11780 Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC: Locations Component ID 402 Component ID: 402 Component : SENSOR-AMBIENT AIR TEMPERATURE Connector: Name : SENSOR-AMBIENT AIR TEMPERATURE Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Pin Circuit Description 1 G31 20VT/LG AAT SIGNAL 2 G930 20VT/TN AAT RETURN Component Location - 30 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 398 > Page 11781 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Component ID 398 Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC: Diagrams Component ID 398 Component ID: 398 Component : SENSOR-AMBIENT AIR TEMPERATURE Connector: Name : SENSOR-AMBIENT AIR TEMPERATURE Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Pin Circuit Description 1 G31 20VT/LG AAT SIGNAL 2 G930 20VT/TN AAT RETURN Component Location - 30 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Component ID 398 > Page 11784 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Component ID 398 > Page 11785 Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC: Diagrams Component ID 402 Component ID: 402 Component : SENSOR-AMBIENT AIR TEMPERATURE Connector: Name : SENSOR-AMBIENT AIR TEMPERATURE Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Pin Circuit Description 1 G31 20VT/LG AAT SIGNAL 2 G930 20VT/TN AAT RETURN Component Location - 30 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Component ID 398 > Page 11786 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Locations Blower Motor: Locations Component ID: 219 Component : MOTOR-BLOWER Connector: Name : MOTOR-BLOWER Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Pin Circuit Description 1 C70 10DB/YL BLOWER MOTOR HIGH DRIVER 2 F942 10PK/LG FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) Component Location - 40 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Locations > Page 11790 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Blower Motor: Diagram Information and Instructions Warnings WARNINGS - GENERAL WARNINGS provide information to prevent personal injury and vehicle damage. Below is a list of general warnings that should be followed any time a vehicle is being serviced. WARNING: Always wear safety glasses for eye protection. WARNING: Use safety stands anytime a procedure requires being under a vehicle. WARNING: Be sure that the ignition switch always is in the off position, unless the procedure requires it to be on. WARNING: Set the parking brake when working on any vehicle. An automatic transmission should be in park. A manual transmission should be in neutral. WARNING: Operate the engine only in a well-ventilated area. WARNING: Keep away from moving parts when the engine is running, especially the fan and belts. WARNING: To prevent serious burns, avoid contact with hot parts such as the radiator, exhaust manifold(s), tail pipe, catalytic converter and muffler. WARNING: Do not allow flame or sparks near the battery. Gases are always present in and around the battery. WARNING: Always remove rings, watches, loose hanging jewelry and avoid loose clothing. How to Use Wiring Diagrams DESCRIPTION - HOW TO USE WIRING DIAGRAMS DaimlerChrysler Corporation wiring diagrams are designed to provide information regarding the vehicles wiring content. In order to effectively use the wiring diagrams to diagnose and repair DaimlerChrysler Corporation vehicles, it is important to understand all of their features and characteristics. Diagrams are arranged such that the power (B+) side of the circuit is placed near the top of the page, and the ground (B-) side of the circuit is placed near the bottom of the page. All switches, components, and modules are shown in the at rest position with the doors closed and the key removed from the ignition. Components are shown two ways. A solid line around a component indicates that the component is complete. A dashed line around the component indicates that the component is being shown is not complete. Incomplete components have a reference number to indicate the page where the component is shown complete. It is important to realize that no attempt is made on the diagrams to represent components and wiring as they appear on the vehicle. For example, a short piece of wire is treated the same as a long one. In addition, switches and other components are shown as simply as possible, with regard to function only. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11793 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11794 SYMBOLS International symbols are used throughout the wiring diagrams. These symbols are consistent with those being used around the world. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11795 TERMINOLOGY This is a list of terms and definitions used in the wiring diagrams. LHD - Left Hand Drive Vehicles RHD - Right Hand Drive Vehicles ATX - Automatic Transmissions-Front Wheel Drive MTX Manual Transmissions-Front Wheel Drive Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11796 AT - Automatic Transmissions-Rear Wheel Drive MT - Manual Transmissions-Rear Wheel Drive SOHC - Single Over Head Cam Engine DOHC - Double Over Head Cam Engine Export - Vehicles Built For Sale In Markets Other Than North America Except Export - Vehicles Built For Sale In North America Circuit Functions DESCRIPTION - CIRCUIT FUNCTIONS All circuits in the diagrams use an alpha/numeric code to identify the wire and it's function. To identify which circuit code applies to a system, refer to the Circuit Identification Code Chart. This chart shows the main circuits only and does not show the secondary codes that may apply to some models. Circuit Information DESCRIPTION - CIRCUIT INFORMATION Each wire shown in the diagrams contains a code which identifies the main circuit, a specific part of the main circuit, gage of wire, and color. An example would be A 2 18 LB/YL. This is a Battery Feed circuit, level two, eighteen gauge, light blue with a yellow tracer. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11797 Connector, Ground and Splice Information DESCRIPTION - CONNECTOR, GROUND AND SPLICE INFORMATION CAUTION: Not all connectors are serviced. Some connectors are serviced only with a harness. A typical example might be the Supplemental Restraint System connectors. Always check parts availability before attempting a repair. IDENTIFICATION In-line connectors are identified by a number, as follows: - In-line connectors located in the engine compartment are C100 series numbers. - In-line connectors located in the instrument panel area are C200 series numbers. - In-line connectors located in the body are C300 series numbers. - Jumper harness connectors are C400 series numbers. - Grounds and ground connectors are identified with a "G" and follow the same series numbering as the in-line connectors. - Splices are identified with an "S" and follow the same series numbering as the in-line connectors. In addition, S001-S099 numbers are located in the engine compartment. - Component connectors are identified by the component name instead of a number. Multiple connectors on a component use a C1, C2, etc. identifier. LOCATIONS Vehicle/Locations contains the master connector/ground/splice location index charts with hyperlinks to the applicable location illustrations. The illustrations contain the connector name (or number)/ground number/splice number and component identification. The abbreviation T/O is used in the component location section to indicate a point in which the wiring harness branches out to a component. The abbreviation N/S means Not Shown in the illustrations Section Identification and Information DESCRIPTION - SECTION IDENTIFICATION AND INFORMATION The wiring diagrams are grouped into individual sections. If a component is most likely found in a particular group, it will be shown complete (all wires, Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11798 connectors, and pins) within that group. For example, the Auto Shutdown Relay is most likely to be found in Powertrain Management, so it is shown there complete. It can, however, be shown partially in another group if it contains some associated wiring. Splice diagrams show the entire splice and provide references to other sections the splices serves. Splice Information only contains splice diagrams that are not shown in their entirety somewhere else in the wiring diagrams. Connector Pin-Outs shows each connector and the circuits involved with that connector. The connectors are identified using the name/number on the diagram pages. Removal REMOVAL 1. Disconnect battery. 2. Release Connector Lock (2). 3. Disconnect the connector (3) being repaired from its mating half/component. 4. Remove the dress cover (if applicable) (1). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11799 5. Release the Secondary Terminal Lock, if required (1). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11800 6. Position the connector locking finger away from the terminal using the proper special tool. Pull on the wire to remove the terminal from the connector. Installation Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11801 INSTALLATION 1. Insert the removed terminal in the same cavity on the repair connector. 2. Repeat steps for each terminal in the connector, being sure that all wires are inserted into the proper cavities. For additional connector pin-out identification, refer to the wiring diagrams. 3. When the connector is re-assembled, the secondary terminal lock must be placed in the locked position to prevent terminal push out. 4. Replace dress cover (if applicable). 5. Connect connector to its mating half/component. 6. Connect battery and test all affected systems. Removal REMOVAL 1. Disconnect the battery. 2. Locate the diode in the harness, and remove the protective covering. 3. Remove the diode from the harness, pay attention to the current flow direction (1) (2) (3). Installation INSTALLATION 1. Remove the insulation from the wires in the harness. Only remove enough insulation to solder in the new diode. 2. Install the new diode in the harness, making sure current flow is correct. If necessary, refer to the appropriate wiring diagram for current flow. 3. Solder the connection together using rosin core type solder only. Do not use acid core solder. 4. Tape the diode to the harness using electrical tape. Make sure the diode is completely sealed from the elements. 5. Re-connect the battery and test affected systems. Removal REMOVAL 1. Follow steps for removing terminals described in the connector removal section. 2. Cut the wire 6 inches from the back of the connector. Installation INSTALLATION 1. Select a wire from the terminal repair kit that best matches the color and gage of the wire being repaired. 2. Cut the repair wire to the proper length and remove one-half (1/2) inch of insulation. 3. Splice the repair wire to the wire harness (see wire splicing procedure). See: Service Procedures/Wire Splicing 4. Insert the repaired wire into the connector. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11802 5. Install the connector locking wedge, if required, and reconnect the connector to its mating half/component. 6. Re-tape the wire harness starting at 1-1/2 inches behind the connector and 2 inches past the repair. 7. Connect battery and test all affected systems. Wire Splicing STANDARD PROCEDURE - WIRE SPLICING When splicing a wire, it is important that the correct gage be used as shown in the wiring diagrams. 1. Remove one-half (1/2) inch of insulation from each wire that needs to be spliced. 2. Place a piece of adhesive lined heat shrink tubing on one side of the wire. Make sure the tubing will be long enough to cover and seal the entire repair area. 3. Place the strands of wire overlapping each other inside of the splice clip (1). 4. Using crimping tool (1), Mopar p/n 05019912AA, crimp the splice clip and wires together. 5. Solder (3) the connection (2) together using rosin core type solder (1) only. CAUTION: DO NOT USE ACID CORE SOLDER. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11803 6. Center the heat shrink tubing (2) over the joint and heat using a heat gun. Heat the joint until the tubing is tightly sealed and sealant (1) comes out of both ends of the tubing. Special Tools WIRING/TERMINAL PROBING TOOL PACKAGE 6807 TERMINAL PICK TOOL SET 6680 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11804 TERMINAL REMOVING TOOLS 6932 AND 8638 TERMINAL REMOVING TOOL 6934 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11805 Blower Motor: Diagnostic Aids Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) Sensitive Devices STANDARD PROCEDURE - ELECTROSTATIC DISCHARGE (ESD) SENSITIVE DEVICES All ESD sensitive components are solid state and a symbol is used to indicate this. When handling any component with this symbol, comply with the following procedures to reduce the possibility of electrostatic charge build up on the body and inadvertent discharge into the component. If it is not known whether the part is ESD sensitive, assume that it is. 1. Always touch a known good ground before handling the part. This should be repeated while handling the part and more frequently after sliding across a seat, sitting down from a standing position, or walking a distance. 2. Avoid touching electrical terminals of the part, unless instructed to do so by a written procedure. 3. When using a voltmeter, be sure to connect the ground lead first. 4. Do not remove the part from it's protective packing until it is time to install the part. 5. Before removing the part from it's package, ground the package to a known good ground on the vehicle. Testing Of Voltage Potential STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING OF VOLTAGE POTENTIAL 1. Connect the ground lead of a voltmeter to a known good ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the voltmeter to the selected test point. The vehicle ignition may need to be turned ON to check voltage. Refer to the appropriate test procedure. Testing For Continuity Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11806 STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING FOR CONTINUITY 1. Remove the fuse (1) for the circuit being checked or, disconnect the battery. 2. Connect one lead of the ohmmeter to one side of the circuit being tested 3. Connect the other lead to the other end of the circuit being tested. Low or no resistance means good continuity. Testing For A Short To Ground STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING FOR A SHORT TO GROUND 1. Remove the fuse and disconnect all items involved with the fuse. 2. Connect a test light or a voltmeter across the terminals of the fuse. 3. Starting at the fuse block, wiggle the wiring harness about six to eight inches apart and watch the voltmeter/test lamp. 4. If the voltmeter registers voltage or the test lamp glows, there is a short to ground in that general area of the wiring harness. Testing For A Short To Ground On Fuses Powering Several Loads STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING FOR A SHORT TO GROUND ON FUSES POWERING SEVERAL LOADS 1. Refer to the wiring diagrams and disconnect or isolate all items on the suspected fused circuits. 2. Replace the blown fuse. 3. Supply power to the fuse by turning ON the ignition switch or re-connecting the battery. 4. Start connecting or energizing the items in the fuse circuit one at a time. When the fuse blows the circuit with the short to ground has been isolated. Testing For A Voltage Drop STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING FOR A VOLTAGE DROP Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11807 1. Connect the positive lead of the voltmeter to the side of the circuit closest to the battery. 2. Connect the other lead of the voltmeter to the other side of the switch, component or circuit. 3. Operate the item. 4. The voltmeter will show the difference in voltage between the two points. Troubleshooting Wiring Problems DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING - WIRING HARNESS TROUBLESHOOTING TOOLS When diagnosing a problem in an electrical circuit there are several common tools necessary. These tools are listed and explained below. - Jumper Wire - This is a test wire used to connect two points of a circuit. It can be used to bypass an open in a circuit. WARNING: Never use a jumper wire across a load, such as a motor, connected between a battery feed and ground. - Voltmeter - Used to check for voltage on a circuit. Always connect the black lead to a known good ground and the red lead to the positive side of the circuit. CAUTION: Most of the electrical components used in today's vehicles are Solid State. When checking voltages in these circuits, use a meter with a 10 - megohm or greater impedance rating. - Ohmmeter - Used to check the resistance between two points of a circuit. Low or no resistance in a circuit means good continuity. CAUTION: Most of the electrical components used in today's vehicles are Solid State. When checking resistance in these circuits use a meter with a 10 - megohm or greater impedance rating. In addition, make sure the power is disconnected from the circuit. Circuits that are powered up by the vehicle's electrical system can cause damage to the equipment and provide false readings. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11808 - Probing Tools - These tools are used for probing terminals in connectors. Select the proper size tool from Special Tool Package 6807, and insert the probing end (2) into the terminal being tested. Use the other end of the tool (1) to insert the meter probe. INTERMITTENT AND POOR CONNECTIONS Most intermittent electrical problems are caused by faulty electrical connections or wiring. It is also possible for a sticking component or relay to cause a problem. Before condemning a component or wiring assembly, check the following items. - Connectors are fully seated - Spread terminals, or terminal push out - Terminals in the wiring assembly are fully seated into the connector/component and locked into position - Dirt or corrosion on the terminals. Any amount of corrosion or dirt could cause an intermittent problem - Damaged connector/component casing exposing the item to dirt or moisture - Wire insulation that has rubbed through causing a short to ground - Some or all of the wiring strands broken inside of the insulation - Wiring broken inside of the insulation TROUBLESHOOTING WIRING PROBLEMS When troubleshooting wiring problems there are six steps which can aid in the procedure. The steps are listed and explained below. Always check for non-factory items added to the vehicle before doing any diagnosis. If the vehicle is equipped with these items, disconnect them to verify these add-on items are not the cause of the problem. 1. Verify the problem. 2. Verify any related symptoms. Do this by performing operational checks on components that are in the same circuit. Refer to the wiring diagrams. 3. Analyze the symptoms. Use the wiring diagrams to determine what the circuit is doing, where the problem most likely is occurring and where the diagnosis will continue. 4. Isolate the problem area. 5. Repair the problem area. 6. Verify the proper operation. For this step, check for proper operation of all items on the repaired circuit. Refer to the wiring diagrams. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11809 Blower Motor: Connector Views Component ID: 219 Component : MOTOR-BLOWER Connector: Name : MOTOR-BLOWER Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Pin Circuit Description 1 C70 10DB/YL BLOWER MOTOR HIGH DRIVER 2 F942 10PK/LG FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) Component Location - 40 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11810 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Blower Motor: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The blower motor (1) is used to control the velocity of air moving through the HVAC housing by spinning the blower wheel (3) within the HVAC air inlet housing at the selected speed. The blower motor is a 12-volt, direct current (DC) motor mounted within a plastic housing with an integral wire harness connector (2) and squirrel cage-type blower wheel (3) that is secured to the blower motor shaft (4). The blower wheel is positioned within the air inlet housing on the passenger side end of the HVAC housing. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 11813 Blower Motor: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The blower motor is used to control the velocity of air moving through the HVAC housing by spinning the blower wheel within the HVAC air inlet housing at the selected speed. The blower motor will operate whenever the ignition switch is in the Run position and the blower motor control is in any position except Off. The blower motor receives battery current through the totally integrated power module (TIPM) whenever the ignition switch is in the Run position. Blower motor speed is controlled by regulating the ground path through or around the blower motor resistor and through the blower motor control located within the A/C-heater control. The blower motor can be accessed for service from underneath the instrument panel. NOTE: The blower motor is supplied with a 12V feed from the TIPM, through the blower motor resistor, whenever the ignition switch is in the RUN position. Due to an open circuit condition within the blower motor control switch the TIPM is UNABLE to detect an OPEN circuit for the blower motor. The blower motor control system is diagnosed using a scan tool. The blower motor and blower motor wheel are factory balanced as an assembly and cannot be adjusted or repaired and must be replaced if found inoperative or damaged. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 11814 Blower Motor: Testing and Inspection BLOWER MOTOR WARNING: Disable the airbag system before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Disconnect and isolate the negative battery (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the airbag system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment and possible personal injury or death. NOTE: The blower motor is supplied with a 12V feed from the TIPM, through the blower motor resistor, whenever the ignition switch is in the RUN position. Due to an open circuit condition within the blower motor control switch the TIPM is UNABLE to detect an OPEN circuit for the blower motor. To determine if an open condition exists within the blower motor circuit wiring, it is necessary to disconnect the negative battery cable and check for continuity within the blower motor circuits using an ohmmeter. OPERATION Possible causes of an inoperative blower motor include: - Open fuse - Inoperative blower motor resistor - Inoperative blower motor switch - Inoperative blower motor - Inoperative blower motor circuit wiring or wire harness connectors NOISE To determine if the blower motor is the source of the noise, simply switch the blower motor from Off to On. To verify that the blower motor is the source of the noise, unplug the blower motor wire harness connector and operate the heater-A/C system. If the noise goes away, possible causes include: - Foreign material on fresh air inlet screen - Foreign material in blower wheel - Foreign material in HVAC housing - Improper blower motor mounting - Deformed or damaged blower wheel - Worn blower motor bearings or brushes VIBRATION Possible causes of a blower motor vibration include: - Improper blower motor mounting - Foreign material in blower wheel - Deformed or damaged blower wheel - Worn blower motor bearings Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Blower Motor: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL NOTE: The blower motor is located on the passenger side of the vehicle under the instrument panel. The blower motor can be removed from the vehicle without having to remove the HVAC housing. 1. Disconnect and isolate the negative battery cable. 2. Remove the passenger side cowl trim panel See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Trim Panel/Service and Repair/Cowl Trim/Cowl Trim - Removal . 3. Disconnect the HVAC wire harness lead (1) from the blower motor (2). 4. Remove the HVAC wire harness lead from the two wire harness retainers (3). 5. Remove the three screws (4) that secure the blower motor to the bottom of the HVAC housing (5). 6. Remove the blower motor from the HVAC housing. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 11817 Blower Motor: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION 1. Position the blower motor (2) into the bottom of the HVAC housing (5). 2. Install the three screws (4) that secure the blower motor to the HVAC housing. Tighten the screws to 1.7 Nm (15 in. lbs.). 3. Connect the HVAC wire harness lead (1) to the blower motor and install the wire harness lead into the two wire harness retainers (3). 4. Install the passenger side cowl trim panel See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Trim Panel/Service and Repair/Cowl Trim/Cowl Trim Installation . 5. Reconnect the negative battery cable. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor Resistor > Component Information > Locations Blower Motor Resistor: Locations Component ID: 247 Component : RESISTOR-BLOWER MOTOR Connector: Name : RESISTOR-BLOWER MOTOR Color : BLACK # of pins : 4 Pin Circuit Description 1 C72 16DB/OR BLOWER MOTOR M1 DRIVER 2 C70 12DB/YL BLOWER MOTOR HIGH DRIVER 3 C71 16DB/BR BLOWER MOTOR LOW DRIVER 4 C73 14DB/VT BLOWER MOTOR M2 DRIVER Component Location - 40 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor Resistor > Component Information > Locations > Page 11821 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor Resistor > Component Information > Locations > Page 11822 Blower Motor Resistor: Diagrams Component ID: 247 Component : RESISTOR-BLOWER MOTOR Connector: Name : RESISTOR-BLOWER MOTOR Color : BLACK # of pins : 4 Pin Circuit Description 1 C72 16DB/OR BLOWER MOTOR M1 DRIVER 2 C70 12DB/YL BLOWER MOTOR HIGH DRIVER 3 C71 16DB/BR BLOWER MOTOR LOW DRIVER 4 C73 14DB/VT BLOWER MOTOR M2 DRIVER Component Location - 40 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor Resistor > Component Information > Locations > Page 11823 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor Resistor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Blower Motor Resistor: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The blower motor resistor is mounted to the bottom of the HVAC housing, directly behind the glove box. The blower motor resistor consists of a molded plastic mounting plate (1) with an integral wire connector receptacle (2). Concealed behind the mounting plate are coiled resistor wires contained within a ceramic heat sink (3). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor Resistor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 11826 Blower Motor Resistor: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The blower motor resistor is connected to the vehicle electrical system through a dedicated wire lead and connector of the HVAC wire harness. The blower motor resistor has multiple resistor wires, each of which will reduce the current flow through the blower motor to change the blower motor speed. The blower motor control for the heating-A/C system directs the ground path for the blower motor through the correct resistor wire to obtain the selected speed. With the blower motor control in the lowest speed position, the ground path for the blower motor is applied through all of the resistor wires. Each higher speed selected with the blower motor control applies the blower motor ground path through fewer of the resistor wires, increasing the blower motor speed. The blower motor resistor cannot be adjusted or repaired and must be replaced if found inoperative or damaged. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor Resistor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 11827 Blower Motor Resistor: Testing and Inspection BLOWER MOTOR RESISTOR WARNING: Disable the airbag system before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Disconnect and isolate the negative battery (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the airbag system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the airbag system. Failure to take the proper precautions may result in accidental airbag deployment and possible serious or fatal injury. For a complete wiring diagram Refer to Diagrams/Electrical. NOTE:The wiring information includes wiring diagrams, proper wire and connector repair procedures, further details on wire harness routing and retention, as well as pin-out and location views for the various wire harness connectors, splices and grounds. 1. Disconnect and isolate the negative battery cable. 2. Disconnect the wire harness connector from the blower motor resistor See: Service and Repair/Removal . 3. Using an ohmmeter, check for continuity between all of the blower motor resistor terminals. In each case there should be continuity. If OK, repair the wire harness circuits between the blower motor speed control and the blower motor resistor or blower motor as required. If not OK, replace the inoperative blower motor resistor. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor Resistor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Blower Motor Resistor: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL WARNING: Disable the airbag system before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the airbag system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the airbag system. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in an accidental airbag deployment and possible personal injury or death. WARNING: The blower motor resistor may get very hot during normal operation. If the blower motor was turned on prior to servicing the blower motor resistor, wait five minutes to allow the blower motor resistors to cool before performing diagnosis or service. Failure to take this precaution can result in possible personal injury. 1. Disconnect and isolate the negative battery cable. 2. Reach under the instrument panel near the blower motor (5) and disconnect the wire harness connector (2) from the blower motor resistor (4). 3. Remove the two screws (1) that secure the blower motor resistor to the HVAC housing (3). 4. Remove the blower motor resistor from the HVAC housing. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor Resistor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 11830 Blower Motor Resistor: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION 1. Position the blower motor resistor (4) into the opening of the HVAC housing (3) near the blower motor (5). 2. Install the two screws (1) that secure the blower motor resistor to the HVAC housing. Tighten the screws to 1.1 Nm (10 in. lbs.). 3. Connect the wire harness connector (2) to the blower motor resistor. 4. Reconnect the negative battery cable. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Cabin Air Filter > Component Information > Service and Repair Cabin Air Filter: Service and Repair Chrysler provides no information on a Cabin Air Filter for this vehicle. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Cabin Ventilation Grille > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Cabin Ventilation Grille: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL 1. Remove the rear cab trim panel See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Trim Panel/Service and Repair/Rear Cab Back Panel Trim/Removal 2. Disengage the retaining tabs (1) that secure the body vent (3) to the cab back panel (2). 3. Remove the vent through the opening in the cab back panel. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Cabin Ventilation Grille > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 11838 Cabin Ventilation Grille: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION 1. Position the body vent (3) into the opening of the cab back panel (2). 2. Install the body vent into the cab back panel and fully engage the retaining tabs (1). 3. Install the rear cab trim panel See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Trim Panel/Service and Repair/Rear Cab Back Panel Trim/Installation . Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor HVAC > Compressor Clutch > Component Information > Specifications Compressor Clutch: Specifications A/C SYSTEM Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor HVAC > Compressor Clutch > Component Information > Specifications > Page 11843 Compressor Clutch: Locations Component ID: 71 Component : CLUTCH-A/C COMPRESSOR Connector: Name : CLUTCH-A/C COMPRESSOR Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Pin Circuit Description 1 C3 20DB/YL A/C CLUTCH CONTROL OUTPUT 2 Z153 20BK/GY GROUND Component Location - 8 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor HVAC > Compressor Clutch > Component Information > Specifications > Page 11844 Component Location - 5 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor HVAC > Compressor Clutch > Component Information > Specifications > Page 11845 Component Location - 9 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor HVAC > Compressor Clutch > Component Information > Specifications > Page 11846 Component Location - 12 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor HVAC > Compressor Clutch > Component Information > Specifications > Page 11847 Component Location - 16 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor HVAC > Compressor Clutch > Component Information > Specifications > Page 11848 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor HVAC > Compressor Clutch > Component Information > Specifications > Page 11849 Compressor Clutch: Diagrams Component ID: 71 Component : CLUTCH-A/C COMPRESSOR Connector: Name : CLUTCH-A/C COMPRESSOR Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Pin Circuit Description 1 C3 20DB/YL A/C CLUTCH CONTROL OUTPUT 2 Z153 20BK/GY GROUND Component Location - 8 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor HVAC > Compressor Clutch > Component Information > Specifications > Page 11850 Component Location - 5 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor HVAC > Compressor Clutch > Component Information > Specifications > Page 11851 Component Location - 9 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor HVAC > Compressor Clutch > Component Information > Specifications > Page 11852 Component Location - 12 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor HVAC > Compressor Clutch > Component Information > Specifications > Page 11853 Component Location - 16 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor HVAC > Compressor Clutch > Component Information > Specifications > Page 11854 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor HVAC > Compressor Clutch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Compressor Clutch: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION NOTE: Denso 10S17 A/C clutch assembly shown. Visteon HS-18 compressor similar. The A/C compressor clutch assembly consists of a stationary electromagnetic field coil (4), bearing and pulley assembly (3), shims (7) and a clutch plate (2) that is splined to the compressor shaft and secured by a bolt (1). These components provide the means to engage and disengage the A/C compressor from the engine accessory drive belt. The A/C clutch bearing and pulley assembly on both A/C compressors are retained to the front of the compressor with a snap ring (6). The A/C clutch field coil on the Denso 10S17 A/C compressor is also retained to the front of the compressor using a snap ring (5). The field coil on the Visteon HS-18 compressor is pressed onto the front of the compressor. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor HVAC > Compressor Clutch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 11857 Compressor Clutch: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The A/C compressor clutch components provide the means to engage and disengage the A/C compressor from the engine accessory drive belt. When the electromagnetic A/C clutch field coil is energized, it magnetically draws the clutch plate into contact with the clutch pulley and drives the compressor shaft. When the coil is not energized, the pulley freewheels on the clutch hub bearing, which is part of the pulley assembly. A/C compressor clutch engagement is controlled by the powertrain control module (PCM) or the engine control module (ECM), depending on engine application. When the A/C-heater control is set to any A/C position, it sends a request signal on the CAN-B bus to the totally integrated power module (TIPM), which then transfers the request on the CAN-C Bus to the PCM/ECM, which determines if operating conditions are correct for A/C clutch engagement. When all operating conditions have been met, the PCM/ECM sends a signal on a dedicated hard-wired circuit back to the totally integrated power module (TIPM) to energize the internal A/C clutch high side driver. When energized, the A/C clutch high side driver provides battery current to the A/C clutch field coil. The A/C clutch control system is diagnosed using a scan tool. The A/C compressor clutch components cannot be adjusted or repaired and must be replaced if found inoperative or damaged. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor HVAC > Compressor Clutch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 11858 Compressor Clutch: Testing and Inspection A/C COMPRESSOR CLUTCH COIL The A/C compressor clutch coil electrical circuit is controlled by the powertrain control module (PCM) or the engine control module (ECM) (depending on engine application) through the totally integrated power module (TIPM) (refer to the appropriate wiring information for complete HVAC wiring diagrams). Begin testing of a suspected compressor clutch coil problem by performing the preliminary checks. PRELIMINARY CHECKS 1. Using a scan tool, check for diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) in the A/C-heater control, TIPM, PCM/ECM and if equipped with the 8.3L engine, the gateway module. If no DTCs are found, go to STEP 2. If any DTCs are found, repair as required. 2. If the A/C compressor clutch still will not engage, verify the refrigerant charge level See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/Refrigerant System Leaks . If the refrigerant charge level is OK, go to TESTS. If the refrigerant charge level is not OK, adjust the refrigerant charge as required. TESTS 3. Verify the battery state of charge See: Starting and Charging/Battery/Testing and Inspection/Battery . 4. Connect an ammeter (0 to 10 ampere scale selected) in series with the clutch coil feed terminal. Connect a voltmeter (0 to 20 volt scale selected) to measure voltage across the battery and the clutch coil. 5. With the A/C-heater control in the A/C mode and the blower motor at low speed, start the engine and allow it to run at a normal idle speed. 6. The A/C compressor clutch should engage immediately, and the clutch coil supply voltage should be within two volts of the battery voltage. If the coil supply voltage is OK, go to STEP 5. If the coil supply voltage is not within two volts of battery voltage, test the clutch coil feed circuit for excessive voltage drop and repair as necessary. 7. For the acceptable A/C clutch coil current draw specifications See: Specifications/Mechanical Specifications/Heating and Air Conditioning Specifications - A/C System . Specifications apply for a work area temperature of 21° C (70° F). If voltage is more than 12.5 volts, add electrical loads by turning on electrical accessories until voltage reads below 12.5 volts. a. If the A/C clutch coil current reading is zero, the coil is open and must be replaced. b. If the A/C clutch coil current reading is above specifications, the coil is shorted and must be replaced. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor HVAC > Compressor Clutch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures Compressor Clutch: Procedures A/C Clutch Plate Inspection A/C CLUTCH PLATE INSPECTION NOTE: The A/C clutch can be serviced in the vehicle. The refrigerant system can remain fully-charged during compressor clutch, pulley and bearing assembly, or coil replacement. Examine the friction surfaces of the pulley and the clutch plate (2) for wear. The pulley and clutch plate should be replaced if there is excessive wear or scoring. If the friction surfaces are oily, inspect the shaft and nose area of the A/C compressor (1) for refrigerant oil. If refrigerant oil is found, the compressor shaft seal is leaking and the A/C compressor must be replaced. Check the pulley bearing for roughness or excessive leakage of grease. Replace the pulley and bearing assembly, if required. A/C Clutch Break-In A/C CLUTCH BREAK-IN After a new A/C compressor clutch has been installed, cycle the compressor clutch approximately 20 times (5 seconds on, then 5 seconds off). During this procedure, set the A/C-heater controls to the A/C Recirculation Mode, the blower motor in the highest speed position, and the engine speed at 1500 to 2000 rpm. This procedure (burnishing) will seat the opposing friction surfaces and provide a higher compressor clutch torque capability. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor HVAC > Compressor Clutch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 11861 Compressor Clutch: Removal and Replacement Denso A/C Compressor DENSO A/C COMPRESSOR NOTE: The compressor clutch assembly can be serviced with the refrigerant system fully-charged. NOTE: Typical A/C compressor and clutch assembly shown in illustrations. 1. Disconnect and isolate the negative battery cable. 2. Remove the accessory drive belt See: Engine, Cooling and Exhaust/Engine/Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories/Drive Belt/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Accessory Drive Belt - Removal . 3. Disconnect the engine wire harness from the compressor clutch field coil connector (1) located on the top of the A/C compressor (5). 4. Remove the bolts that secure the A/C compressor to the engine and support the A/C compressor. 5. Carefully remove the compressor clutch field coil connector and wire lead from the connector bracket (2). 6. Remove the compressor shaft bolt (3). A band-type oil filter wrench or a strap wrench may be used to hold the clutch plate (4) from rotating during bolt removal. CAUTION: Do not pry between the clutch plate and the pulley and bearing assembly to remove the clutch plate from the compressor shaft as this may damage the clutch plate. NOTE: Use care not to lose any clutch shim(s) during removal of the clutch plate, as they may be reused during the clutch plate installation process. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor HVAC > Compressor Clutch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 11862 7. Tap the clutch plate (2) lightly with a plastic mallet to release it from the splines on the compressor shaft (1) and remove the clutch plate and shim(s) (3). 8. Using Snap Ring Pliers 9764 or equivalent (1), remove the snap ring (2) that secures the pulley and bearing assembly (3) to the front of the A/C compressor and remove the pulley and bearing assembly. 9. Using Snap Ring Pliers 9764 or equivalent (1), remove the snap ring (4) that secures the compressor clutch field coil (2) to the front of the A/C compressor (3) and remove the field coil. Visteon A/C Compressor VISTEON A/C COMPRESSOR NOTE: The A/C compressor clutch can be serviced in the vehicle. The refrigerant system can remain fully-charged during compressor clutch, pulley and bearing assembly or field coil replacement. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor HVAC > Compressor Clutch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 11863 1. Disconnect and isolate negative battery cable. 2. Remove the accessory drive belt See: Engine, Cooling and Exhaust/Engine/Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories/Drive Belt/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Accessory Drive Belt - Removal . 3. Raise and support the vehicle. 4. Disconnect the engine wire harness from the clutch field coil connector (4). 5. Remove the bolts that secure the A/C compressor (5) to the mounting bracket See: Service and Repair/A/C Compressor - Removal . 6. Remove the A/C compressor from the mounting bracket and support the compressor while servicing the clutch. 7. Using compressor clutch holding fixture (Special Tool 9351 in Kit 9349) (1), remove the bolt (2) that secures the clutch plate (3) to the compressor shaft. NOTE: The clutch plate can be removed from the compressor shaft by hand or, if required, pressed off with an 8 x 1.25 mm bolt. NOTE: Clutch plate shim(s) may remain inside the hub of the clutch plate. Be sure to remove all of the shims from inside the hub or from the end of the compressor shaft. 8. Remove the clutch plate and shim(s) from the A/C compressor. If required, install a 8 x 1.25 mm bolt into the center of the clutch plate and turn the bolt clockwise until the clutch plate is completely removed from the A/C compressor. 9. Using Snap Ring Pliers 9764 or equivalent (1), remove the snap ring (2) that secures the pulley and bearing assembly (3) to the front of the A/C compressor (4). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor HVAC > Compressor Clutch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 11864 NOTE: The pulley and bearing assembly can be removed from the compressor by hand or, if required, with a two jaw puller. 10. Remove the pulley and bearing assembly (1) from the front of the A/C compressor (2). If required, install a two jaw puller (3) and turn the puller center-bolt clockwise until the pulley and bearing assembly is completely removed. 11. Remove the plastic retaining clip (1) and the screw (2) that secures the clutch field coil wire lead and connector (3) to the A/C compressor (4). 12. Using compressor field coil remover (Special Tool 9354 in Kit 9349) (1) and a two jaw puller (2), remove the clutch field coil (3) from the front of the A/C compressor (4). Denso A/C Compressor DENSO A/C COMPRESSOR Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor HVAC > Compressor Clutch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 11865 NOTE: Typical A/C compressor and clutch assembly shown in illustrations. 1. Align the dowel pin on the back of the compressor clutch field coil (2) with the hole in the front of the A/C compressor (3) and position the field coil onto the compressor. Be certain that the compressor clutch field coil wire lead is properly routed so that it is not pinched between the A/C compressor and the field coil. CAUTION: The snap ring must be fully and properly seated in the groove or it will vibrate out, resulting in a clutch failure and severe damage to the A/C compressor. NOTE: A new snap ring must be used to secure the compressor clutch field coil to the A/C compressor. The bevel side of the snap ring must face outward and both snap ring eyelets must be oriented to the right or to the left of the field coil dowel pin location on the A/C compressor. 2. Using Snap Ring Pliers 9764 or equivalent (1), install the snap ring (4) that secures the compressor clutch field coil to the front of the A/C compressor. Be certain that the snap ring is fully and properly seated in the groove and oriented correctly. CAUTION: Be certain to position the compressor clutch field coil wire lead so that it is not damaged during A/C compressor pulley and bearing installation. CAUTION: When installing the pulley and bearing assembly, DO NOT mar the friction surfaces of the pulley or premature failure of the clutch will result. 3. Install the pulley and bearing assembly (1) onto the front of the A/C compressor. If necessary, tap the pulley gently with a block of wood (2) placed on the pulley friction surface. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor HVAC > Compressor Clutch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 11866 CAUTION: The snap ring must be fully and properly seated in the groove or it will vibrate out, resulting in a clutch failure and severe damage to the A/C compressor. NOTE: A new snap ring must be used to secure the pulley and bearing assembly to the A/C compressor. The bevel side of the snap ring must face outward. 4. Using Snap Ring Pliers 9764 or equivalent (1), install the snap ring (2) that secures the pulley and bearing assembly (3) to the front of the A/C compressor. Be certain that the snap ring is fully and properly seated in the groove. 5. If the original clutch plate (2) and pulley and bearing assembly are to be reused, reinstall the original shim(s) (3) onto the compressor shaft (1). If a new clutch plate and pulley and bearing assembly are being used, install a trial stack of shims 2.54 mm (0.010 in.) thick onto the compressor shaft. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor HVAC > Compressor Clutch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 11867 6. Install the clutch plate (4) onto the front of the A/C compressor (5). 7. Install the compressor shaft bolt (3). Tighten the bolt to 19 Nm (168 in. lbs.). NOTE: The shims may compress after tightening the shaft bolt. Check the air gap in four or more places to verify the air gap is correct. Spin the pulley before performing a final check of the air gap. NOTE: On models with the clutch plate recessed into the pulley, use a 90° wire gap gauge to measure the clutch air gap. On other models, use a blade type feeler gauge to measure the air gap. 8. With the clutch plate assembled tight against the shim(s), measure the air gap between the clutch plate and the pulley and bearing assembly. The air gap should be between 0.35 - 0.60 mm (0.014 - 0.024 in.). If the air gap is not between specifications, add or subtract shims as needed until the correct air gap is obtained. CAUTION: Be certain that the compressor clutch field coil wire harness is properly routed so that it is not pinched between the A/C compressor and the field coil connector bracket. 9. Carefully route the compressor clutch field coil wire lead behind the connector bracket (2). 10. Install the compressor clutch field coil connector (1) onto the connector bracket. 11. Position the A/C compressor to the engine and install the retaining bolts See: Service and Repair/A/C Compressor - Installation . 12. Connect the engine wire harness to the compressor clutch field coil connector. 13. Install the accessory drive belt See: Engine, Cooling and Exhaust/Engine/Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories/Drive Belt/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Accessory Drive Belt - Installation . 14. Reconnect the negative battery cable. Visteon A/C Compressor VISTEON A/C COMPRESSOR 1. Position the A/C clutch field coil (1) squarely onto the front of the A/C compressor (2). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor HVAC > Compressor Clutch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 11868 CAUTION: Position the A/C clutch field coil so that the coil positioning tabs and the wire harness lead are oriented in the correct direction. Failure to correctly position the field coil on the A/C compressor will result in field coil damage. 2. Align the field coil positioning tabs to the recessed area at the front of the A/C compressor and install the clutch field coil onto the compressor using a two jaw puller (3), compressor field coil installer (Special Tool 9352 in Kit 9349) (4) and the compressor field coil installer spacer (Special Tool 9353 in Kit 9349) (5). 3. Position the clutch field coil wire lead and connector (3) to the A/C compressor (4) and install the plastic retaining clip (1) and the screw (2) that secures the wire lead to the compressor. Tighten the screw to 4 Nm (35 in. lbs.). 4. Align the pulley and bearing assembly (1) squarely onto the front of the A/C compressor (2). NOTE: A distinct change of sound during the clutch pulley tapping process indicates that the pulley and bearing assembly has bottomed out against the compressor housing. 5. Using clutch pulley installer (Special Tool 9355 in Kit 9349) (3) and a hammer (4), install the pulley and bearing assembly onto the front of the A/C compressor. Tap the installer with a hammer until the pulley and bearing assembly has bottomed against the compressor housing. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor HVAC > Compressor Clutch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 11869 CAUTION: If the snap ring is not fully seated in the groove it will vibrate out, resulting in clutch failure and severe damage to the A/C compressor. NOTE: Install the snap ring with the beveled side of the snap ring facing outward. 6. Using Snap Ring Pliers 9764 or equivalent (1), install the snap ring (2) that secures the pulley and bearing assembly (3) to the front of the A/C compressor (4). Make sure the snap ring is properly seated in the groove. 7. Verify that there is adequate clearance for the clutch field coil wire lead and connector (4) between the compressor housing and the pulley. NOTE: When installing an original or a new clutch assembly, try the original shims first. When installing a clutch onto a compressor that previously did not have a clutch, use the 1.0, 0.50 and 0.13 millimeter (0.040, 0.020 and 0.005 inch) shims from the clutch hardware package which is provided with the new clutch. 8. Install the clutch shims onto the compressor shaft. 9. Using compressor clutch holding fixture (Special Tool 9351 in Kit 9349) (1), install the bolt (2) that secures the clutch plate (3) to the A/C compressor (5). Hold the clutch plate stationary with the holding fixture and tighten the bolt to 15 Nm (133 in. lbs.). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor HVAC > Compressor Clutch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 11870 10. Using a feeler gauge (1), check the air gap between the clutch plate (2) and the pulley and bearing assembly (3). If the air gap is not 0.35 to 0.75 millimeter (0.014 to 0.030 inch), add or subtract shims as required. 11. Position the A/C compressor (4) onto the mounting bracket. 12. Install the bolts that secure the A/C compressor to the mounting bracket. Tighten the bolts to 23 Nm (17 ft. lbs.). 13. Connect the engine wire harness to the compressor clutch field coil connector (5). 14. Lower the vehicle. 15. Install the accessory drive belt. 16. Reconnect the negative battery cable. 17. Perform the Clutch Break-in Procedure See: Procedures/A/C Clutch Break-In . Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Condenser HVAC > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Condenser HVAC: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The A/C condenser is located in the front of the engine compartment behind the grille. The A/C condenser is a heat exchanger that allows the high-pressure refrigerant gas being discharged by the A/C compressor to give up its heat to the air passing over the condenser fins, which causes the refrigerant to cool and change to a liquid state. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Condenser HVAC > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 11875 Condenser HVAC: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION When air passes through the fins of the A/C condenser, the high-pressure refrigerant gas within the A/C condenser gives up its heat. The refrigerant then condenses as it leaves the A/C condenser and becomes a high-pressure liquid. The volume of air flowing over the condenser fins is critical to the proper cooling performance of the A/C system. Therefore, it is important that there are no objects placed in front of the radiator grille openings at the front of the vehicle or foreign material on the condenser fins that might obstruct proper air flow. Also, any factory-installed air seals or shrouds must be properly reinstalled following radiator or A/C condenser service. NOTE: Replacement of the refrigerant line O-ring seals and gaskets is required anytime a refrigerant line is disconnected. Failure to replace the rubber O-ring seals and metal gaskets could result in a refrigerant system leak. The A/C condenser has no serviceable parts except for the O-ring seals and gaskets. The O-ring seals used on the connections are made from a special type of rubber not affected by R-134a refrigerant. The O-ring seals and gaskets must be replaced whenever a refrigerant line is removed from the A/C condenser. The A/C condenser cannot be repaired and must be replaced if leaking or damaged. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Condenser HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > A/C Condenser - Removal Condenser HVAC: Service and Repair A/C Condenser - Removal 3.7L/4.7L/5.7L ENGINES WARNING: Refer to the applicable warnings and cautions for this system before performing the following operation See: Service Precautions/Warning and See: Service Precautions/Caution. Failure to follow the warnings and cautions could result in possible personal injury or death. 1. Disconnect and isolate the negative battery cable. 2. Recover the refrigerant from the refrigerant system See: Service and Repair/Refrigerant System Recovery . 3. Disconnect the A/C discharge line and the A/C liquid line from the A/C condenser See: Hose/Line HVAC/Service and Repair/A/C Line Removal and See: Hose/Line HVAC/Service and Repair/A/C Line - Removal . 4. Disconnect the wire harness connector (8) from the A/C condenser cooling fan motor (7). 5. Remove the two bolts (1 and 9) that secure the A/C condenser to the front upper crossmember (2). 6. Carefully lift the A/C condenser and cooling fan assembly to disconnect the lower mounting tabs (6) from the lower mounting flanges (3) and remove the assembly from the engine compartment. 7. If required, place the A/C condenser and the cooling fan assembly on a workbench and remove the four screws (4 and 5) that secure the cooling fan to the A/C condenser and separate the fan from the condenser. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Condenser HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > A/C Condenser - Removal > Page 11878 Condenser HVAC: Service and Repair A/C Condenser - Installation 3.7L/4.7L/5.7L ENGINES CAUTION: Be certain to adjust the refrigerant oil level when servicing the A/C refrigerant system See: Service and Repair/Refrigerant Oil Level. Failure to properly adjust the refrigerant oil level will prevent the A/C system from operating as designed and can cause serious A/C compressor damage. NOTE: When replacing multiple A/C system components, refer to the Refrigerant Oil Capacities chart to determine how much oil should be added to the refrigerant system See: Service and Repair/Refrigerant Oil Level. NOTE: If only the A/C condenser is being replaced, add 30 milliliters (1 fluid ounce) of refrigerant oil to the refrigerant system. Use only refrigerant oil of the type recommended for the A/C compressor in the vehicle. NOTE: Replacement of the refrigerant line O-ring seals and gaskets is required anytime a refrigerant line is opened. Failure to replace the rubber O-ring seals and metal gaskets could result in a refrigerant system leak. NOTE: Be certain that each of the radiator and condenser air seals are installed in their proper locations. These air seals are required for the A/C and engine cooling systems to perform as designed. 1. If removed, install the condenser cooling fan onto the A/C condenser. 2. Install the four screws (4 and 5) that secure the cooling fan to the A/C condenser. Tighten the screws to 2.2 Nm (20 in. lbs.). 3. Position the A/C condenser and cooling fan assembly into the engine compartment. 4. Install the lower mounting tabs (6) into the lower mounting flanges (3). 5. Install the two bolts (1 and 9) that secure the A/C condenser to the upper front crossmember (2). Tighten the bolts to 10.5 Nm (95 in. lbs.). 6. Connect the wire harness connector (8) to the A/C condenser cooling fan motor (7). 7. Connect the A/C discharge line and the A/C liquid line onto the A/C condenser See: Hose/Line HVAC/Service and Repair/A/C Line - Installation and See: Hose/Line HVAC/Service and Repair/A/C Line - Installation . 8. Reconnect the negative battery cable. 9. Evacuate the refrigerant system See: Service and Repair/Refrigerant System Evacuate . 10. If the A/C condenser is being replaced, add 30 milliliters (1 fluid ounce) of refrigerant oil to the refrigerant system. When replacing multiple A/C system components, refer to the Refrigerant Oil Capacities chart to determine how much oil should be added to the refrigerant system See: Service and Repair/Refrigerant Oil Level . Use only refrigerant oil of the type recommended for the A/C compressor in the vehicle. 11. Charge the refrigerant system See: Service and Repair/Refrigerant System Charge . Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Condenser Fan > Condenser Fan Motor > Component Information > Locations Condenser Fan Motor: Locations Component ID: 220 Component : MOTOR-CONDENSER FAN Connector: Name : MOTOR-CONDENSER FAN Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (GAS) A Z823 14BK/DG GROUND A Z823 12BK/DG GROUND B C123 14LB/WT CONDENSER FAN CONTROL OUTPUT B C123 12LB/WT CONDENSER FAN CONTROL OUTPUT Component Location - 31 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Condenser Fan > Condenser Fan Motor > Component Information > Locations > Page 11883 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Condenser Fan > Condenser Fan Motor > Component Information > Locations > Page 11884 Condenser Fan Motor: Diagrams Component ID: 220 Component : MOTOR-CONDENSER FAN Connector: Name : MOTOR-CONDENSER FAN Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (GAS) A Z823 14BK/DG GROUND A Z823 12BK/DG GROUND B C123 14LB/WT CONDENSER FAN CONTROL OUTPUT B C123 12LB/WT CONDENSER FAN CONTROL OUTPUT Component Location - 31 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Condenser Fan > Condenser Fan Motor > Component Information > Locations > Page 11885 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Assembly, HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 80 Control Assembly: Locations Component ID 80 Component ID: 80 Component : CONTROL-A/C-HEATER Connector: Name : CONTROL-A/C-HEATER C1 Color : BLACK # of pins : 16 Pin Circuit Description 1 F921 20PK/LB FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN) 2 Z24 20BK/OR GROUND 3 A919 20RD FUSED B(+) 4-5-6 C21 20DB/LG EVAPORATOR TEMPERATURE SENSOR SIGNAL 7 C121 20DB/DG SENSOR GROUND 8 E16 20OR/GY PANEL LAMPS DRIVER 9 C61 20DB/LG BLEND DOOR DRIVER 10 C29 20DB MODE DOOR 2 DRIVER 11 C32 20DB/TN RECIRCULATION DOOR DRIVER 12 C801 20DB/OR MODE DOOR 1 DRIVER 13 C34 20DB/LB COMMON DOOR DRIVER 14 C33 20LB/BR PASSENGER BLEND DOOR DRIVER 15 D54 20WT CAN B BUS (-) 16 D55 20WT/OR CAN B BUS (+) Component Location - 47 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Assembly, HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 80 > Page 11890 Connector: Name : CONTROL-A/C-HEATER C2 Color : BLACK # of pins : 10 Pin Circuit Description 1-2 C71 16DB/BR BLOWER MOTOR LOW DRIVER 3 C73 14DB/VT BLOWER MOTOR M2 DRIVER 4-5 Z134 10BK/LG GROUND Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Assembly, HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 80 > Page 11891 6-7 C72 16DB/OR BLOWER MOTOR M1 DRIVER 8-9-10 C70 10DB/YL BLOWER MOTOR HIGH DRIVER Component Location - 47 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Assembly, HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 80 > Page 11892 Control Assembly: Locations Component ID 81 Component ID: 81 Component : CONTROL-A/C-HEATER Connector: Name : CONTROL-A/C-HEATER C1 Color : BLACK # of pins : 16 Pin Circuit Description 1 F921 20PK/LB FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN) 2 Z24 20BK/OR GROUND 3 A919 20RD FUSED B(+) 4-5-6 C21 20DB/LG EVAPORATOR TEMPERATURE SENSOR SIGNAL 7 C121 20DB/DG SENSOR GROUND 8 E16 20OR/GY PANEL LAMPS DRIVER 9 C61 20DB/LG BLEND DOOR DRIVER 10 C29 20DB MODE DOOR 2 DRIVER 11 C32 20DB/TN RECIRCULATION DOOR DRIVER 12 C801 20DB/OR MODE DOOR 1 DRIVER 13 C34 20DB/LB COMMON DOOR DRIVER 14 C33 20LB/BR PASSENGER BLEND DOOR DRIVER 15 D54 20WT CAN B BUS (-) 16 D55 20WT/OR CAN B BUS (+) Component Location - 47 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Assembly, HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 80 > Page 11893 Connector: Name : CONTROL-A/C-HEATER C2 Color : BLACK # of pins : 10 Pin Circuit Description 1-2 C71 16DB/BR BLOWER MOTOR LOW DRIVER 3 C73 14DB/VT BLOWER MOTOR M2 DRIVER 4-5 Z134 10BK/LG GROUND Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Assembly, HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 80 > Page 11894 6-7 C72 16DB/OR BLOWER MOTOR M1 DRIVER 8-9-10 C70 10DB/YL BLOWER MOTOR HIGH DRIVER Component Location - 47 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Assembly, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Control Assembly: Diagram Information and Instructions Warnings WARNINGS - GENERAL WARNINGS provide information to prevent personal injury and vehicle damage. Below is a list of general warnings that should be followed any time a vehicle is being serviced. WARNING: Always wear safety glasses for eye protection. WARNING: Use safety stands anytime a procedure requires being under a vehicle. WARNING: Be sure that the ignition switch always is in the off position, unless the procedure requires it to be on. WARNING: Set the parking brake when working on any vehicle. An automatic transmission should be in park. A manual transmission should be in neutral. WARNING: Operate the engine only in a well-ventilated area. WARNING: Keep away from moving parts when the engine is running, especially the fan and belts. WARNING: To prevent serious burns, avoid contact with hot parts such as the radiator, exhaust manifold(s), tail pipe, catalytic converter and muffler. WARNING: Do not allow flame or sparks near the battery. Gases are always present in and around the battery. WARNING: Always remove rings, watches, loose hanging jewelry and avoid loose clothing. How to Use Wiring Diagrams DESCRIPTION - HOW TO USE WIRING DIAGRAMS DaimlerChrysler Corporation wiring diagrams are designed to provide information regarding the vehicles wiring content. In order to effectively use the wiring diagrams to diagnose and repair DaimlerChrysler Corporation vehicles, it is important to understand all of their features and characteristics. Diagrams are arranged such that the power (B+) side of the circuit is placed near the top of the page, and the ground (B-) side of the circuit is placed near the bottom of the page. All switches, components, and modules are shown in the at rest position with the doors closed and the key removed from the ignition. Components are shown two ways. A solid line around a component indicates that the component is complete. A dashed line around the component indicates that the component is being shown is not complete. Incomplete components have a reference number to indicate the page where the component is shown complete. It is important to realize that no attempt is made on the diagrams to represent components and wiring as they appear on the vehicle. For example, a short piece of wire is treated the same as a long one. In addition, switches and other components are shown as simply as possible, with regard to function only. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Assembly, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11897 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Assembly, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11898 SYMBOLS International symbols are used throughout the wiring diagrams. These symbols are consistent with those being used around the world. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Assembly, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11899 TERMINOLOGY This is a list of terms and definitions used in the wiring diagrams. LHD - Left Hand Drive Vehicles RHD - Right Hand Drive Vehicles ATX - Automatic Transmissions-Front Wheel Drive MTX Manual Transmissions-Front Wheel Drive Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Assembly, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11900 AT - Automatic Transmissions-Rear Wheel Drive MT - Manual Transmissions-Rear Wheel Drive SOHC - Single Over Head Cam Engine DOHC - Double Over Head Cam Engine Export - Vehicles Built For Sale In Markets Other Than North America Except Export - Vehicles Built For Sale In North America Circuit Functions DESCRIPTION - CIRCUIT FUNCTIONS All circuits in the diagrams use an alpha/numeric code to identify the wire and it's function. To identify which circuit code applies to a system, refer to the Circuit Identification Code Chart. This chart shows the main circuits only and does not show the secondary codes that may apply to some models. Circuit Information DESCRIPTION - CIRCUIT INFORMATION Each wire shown in the diagrams contains a code which identifies the main circuit, a specific part of the main circuit, gage of wire, and color. An example would be A 2 18 LB/YL. This is a Battery Feed circuit, level two, eighteen gauge, light blue with a yellow tracer. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Assembly, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11901 Connector, Ground and Splice Information DESCRIPTION - CONNECTOR, GROUND AND SPLICE INFORMATION CAUTION: Not all connectors are serviced. Some connectors are serviced only with a harness. A typical example might be the Supplemental Restraint System connectors. Always check parts availability before attempting a repair. IDENTIFICATION In-line connectors are identified by a number, as follows: - In-line connectors located in the engine compartment are C100 series numbers. - In-line connectors located in the instrument panel area are C200 series numbers. - In-line connectors located in the body are C300 series numbers. - Jumper harness connectors are C400 series numbers. - Grounds and ground connectors are identified with a "G" and follow the same series numbering as the in-line connectors. - Splices are identified with an "S" and follow the same series numbering as the in-line connectors. In addition, S001-S099 numbers are located in the engine compartment. - Component connectors are identified by the component name instead of a number. Multiple connectors on a component use a C1, C2, etc. identifier. LOCATIONS Vehicle/Locations contains the master connector/ground/splice location index charts with hyperlinks to the applicable location illustrations. The illustrations contain the connector name (or number)/ground number/splice number and component identification. The abbreviation T/O is used in the component location section to indicate a point in which the wiring harness branches out to a component. The abbreviation N/S means Not Shown in the illustrations Section Identification and Information DESCRIPTION - SECTION IDENTIFICATION AND INFORMATION The wiring diagrams are grouped into individual sections. If a component is most likely found in a particular group, it will be shown complete (all wires, Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Assembly, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11902 connectors, and pins) within that group. For example, the Auto Shutdown Relay is most likely to be found in Powertrain Management, so it is shown there complete. It can, however, be shown partially in another group if it contains some associated wiring. Splice diagrams show the entire splice and provide references to other sections the splices serves. Splice Information only contains splice diagrams that are not shown in their entirety somewhere else in the wiring diagrams. Connector Pin-Outs shows each connector and the circuits involved with that connector. The connectors are identified using the name/number on the diagram pages. Removal REMOVAL 1. Disconnect battery. 2. Release Connector Lock (2). 3. Disconnect the connector (3) being repaired from its mating half/component. 4. Remove the dress cover (if applicable) (1). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Assembly, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11903 5. Release the Secondary Terminal Lock, if required (1). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Assembly, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11904 6. Position the connector locking finger away from the terminal using the proper special tool. Pull on the wire to remove the terminal from the connector. Installation Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Assembly, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11905 INSTALLATION 1. Insert the removed terminal in the same cavity on the repair connector. 2. Repeat steps for each terminal in the connector, being sure that all wires are inserted into the proper cavities. For additional connector pin-out identification, refer to the wiring diagrams. 3. When the connector is re-assembled, the secondary terminal lock must be placed in the locked position to prevent terminal push out. 4. Replace dress cover (if applicable). 5. Connect connector to its mating half/component. 6. Connect battery and test all affected systems. Removal REMOVAL 1. Disconnect the battery. 2. Locate the diode in the harness, and remove the protective covering. 3. Remove the diode from the harness, pay attention to the current flow direction (1) (2) (3). Installation INSTALLATION 1. Remove the insulation from the wires in the harness. Only remove enough insulation to solder in the new diode. 2. Install the new diode in the harness, making sure current flow is correct. If necessary, refer to the appropriate wiring diagram for current flow. 3. Solder the connection together using rosin core type solder only. Do not use acid core solder. 4. Tape the diode to the harness using electrical tape. Make sure the diode is completely sealed from the elements. 5. Re-connect the battery and test affected systems. Removal REMOVAL 1. Follow steps for removing terminals described in the connector removal section. 2. Cut the wire 6 inches from the back of the connector. Installation INSTALLATION 1. Select a wire from the terminal repair kit that best matches the color and gage of the wire being repaired. 2. Cut the repair wire to the proper length and remove one-half (1/2) inch of insulation. 3. Splice the repair wire to the wire harness (see wire splicing procedure). See: Service Procedures/Wire Splicing 4. Insert the repaired wire into the connector. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Assembly, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11906 5. Install the connector locking wedge, if required, and reconnect the connector to its mating half/component. 6. Re-tape the wire harness starting at 1-1/2 inches behind the connector and 2 inches past the repair. 7. Connect battery and test all affected systems. Wire Splicing STANDARD PROCEDURE - WIRE SPLICING When splicing a wire, it is important that the correct gage be used as shown in the wiring diagrams. 1. Remove one-half (1/2) inch of insulation from each wire that needs to be spliced. 2. Place a piece of adhesive lined heat shrink tubing on one side of the wire. Make sure the tubing will be long enough to cover and seal the entire repair area. 3. Place the strands of wire overlapping each other inside of the splice clip (1). 4. Using crimping tool (1), Mopar p/n 05019912AA, crimp the splice clip and wires together. 5. Solder (3) the connection (2) together using rosin core type solder (1) only. CAUTION: DO NOT USE ACID CORE SOLDER. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Assembly, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11907 6. Center the heat shrink tubing (2) over the joint and heat using a heat gun. Heat the joint until the tubing is tightly sealed and sealant (1) comes out of both ends of the tubing. Special Tools WIRING/TERMINAL PROBING TOOL PACKAGE 6807 TERMINAL PICK TOOL SET 6680 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Assembly, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11908 TERMINAL REMOVING TOOLS 6932 AND 8638 TERMINAL REMOVING TOOL 6934 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Assembly, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11909 Control Assembly: Diagnostic Aids Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) Sensitive Devices STANDARD PROCEDURE - ELECTROSTATIC DISCHARGE (ESD) SENSITIVE DEVICES All ESD sensitive components are solid state and a symbol is used to indicate this. When handling any component with this symbol, comply with the following procedures to reduce the possibility of electrostatic charge build up on the body and inadvertent discharge into the component. If it is not known whether the part is ESD sensitive, assume that it is. 1. Always touch a known good ground before handling the part. This should be repeated while handling the part and more frequently after sliding across a seat, sitting down from a standing position, or walking a distance. 2. Avoid touching electrical terminals of the part, unless instructed to do so by a written procedure. 3. When using a voltmeter, be sure to connect the ground lead first. 4. Do not remove the part from it's protective packing until it is time to install the part. 5. Before removing the part from it's package, ground the package to a known good ground on the vehicle. Testing Of Voltage Potential STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING OF VOLTAGE POTENTIAL 1. Connect the ground lead of a voltmeter to a known good ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the voltmeter to the selected test point. The vehicle ignition may need to be turned ON to check voltage. Refer to the appropriate test procedure. Testing For Continuity Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Assembly, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11910 STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING FOR CONTINUITY 1. Remove the fuse (1) for the circuit being checked or, disconnect the battery. 2. Connect one lead of the ohmmeter to one side of the circuit being tested 3. Connect the other lead to the other end of the circuit being tested. Low or no resistance means good continuity. Testing For A Short To Ground STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING FOR A SHORT TO GROUND 1. Remove the fuse and disconnect all items involved with the fuse. 2. Connect a test light or a voltmeter across the terminals of the fuse. 3. Starting at the fuse block, wiggle the wiring harness about six to eight inches apart and watch the voltmeter/test lamp. 4. If the voltmeter registers voltage or the test lamp glows, there is a short to ground in that general area of the wiring harness. Testing For A Short To Ground On Fuses Powering Several Loads STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING FOR A SHORT TO GROUND ON FUSES POWERING SEVERAL LOADS 1. Refer to the wiring diagrams and disconnect or isolate all items on the suspected fused circuits. 2. Replace the blown fuse. 3. Supply power to the fuse by turning ON the ignition switch or re-connecting the battery. 4. Start connecting or energizing the items in the fuse circuit one at a time. When the fuse blows the circuit with the short to ground has been isolated. Testing For A Voltage Drop STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING FOR A VOLTAGE DROP Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Assembly, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11911 1. Connect the positive lead of the voltmeter to the side of the circuit closest to the battery. 2. Connect the other lead of the voltmeter to the other side of the switch, component or circuit. 3. Operate the item. 4. The voltmeter will show the difference in voltage between the two points. Troubleshooting Wiring Problems DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING - WIRING HARNESS TROUBLESHOOTING TOOLS When diagnosing a problem in an electrical circuit there are several common tools necessary. These tools are listed and explained below. - Jumper Wire - This is a test wire used to connect two points of a circuit. It can be used to bypass an open in a circuit. WARNING: Never use a jumper wire across a load, such as a motor, connected between a battery feed and ground. - Voltmeter - Used to check for voltage on a circuit. Always connect the black lead to a known good ground and the red lead to the positive side of the circuit. CAUTION: Most of the electrical components used in today's vehicles are Solid State. When checking voltages in these circuits, use a meter with a 10 - megohm or greater impedance rating. - Ohmmeter - Used to check the resistance between two points of a circuit. Low or no resistance in a circuit means good continuity. CAUTION: Most of the electrical components used in today's vehicles are Solid State. When checking resistance in these circuits use a meter with a 10 - megohm or greater impedance rating. In addition, make sure the power is disconnected from the circuit. Circuits that are powered up by the vehicle's electrical system can cause damage to the equipment and provide false readings. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Assembly, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11912 - Probing Tools - These tools are used for probing terminals in connectors. Select the proper size tool from Special Tool Package 6807, and insert the probing end (2) into the terminal being tested. Use the other end of the tool (1) to insert the meter probe. INTERMITTENT AND POOR CONNECTIONS Most intermittent electrical problems are caused by faulty electrical connections or wiring. It is also possible for a sticking component or relay to cause a problem. Before condemning a component or wiring assembly, check the following items. - Connectors are fully seated - Spread terminals, or terminal push out - Terminals in the wiring assembly are fully seated into the connector/component and locked into position - Dirt or corrosion on the terminals. Any amount of corrosion or dirt could cause an intermittent problem - Damaged connector/component casing exposing the item to dirt or moisture - Wire insulation that has rubbed through causing a short to ground - Some or all of the wiring strands broken inside of the insulation - Wiring broken inside of the insulation TROUBLESHOOTING WIRING PROBLEMS When troubleshooting wiring problems there are six steps which can aid in the procedure. The steps are listed and explained below. Always check for non-factory items added to the vehicle before doing any diagnosis. If the vehicle is equipped with these items, disconnect them to verify these add-on items are not the cause of the problem. 1. Verify the problem. 2. Verify any related symptoms. Do this by performing operational checks on components that are in the same circuit. Refer to the wiring diagrams. 3. Analyze the symptoms. Use the wiring diagrams to determine what the circuit is doing, where the problem most likely is occurring and where the diagnosis will continue. 4. Isolate the problem area. 5. Repair the problem area. 6. Verify the proper operation. For this step, check for proper operation of all items on the repaired circuit. Refer to the wiring diagrams. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Assembly, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11913 Control Assembly: Connector Views Component ID 80 Component ID: 80 Component : CONTROL-A/C-HEATER Connector: Name : CONTROL-A/C-HEATER C1 Color : BLACK # of pins : 16 Pin Circuit Description 1 F921 20PK/LB FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN) 2 Z24 20BK/OR GROUND 3 A919 20RD FUSED B(+) 4-5-6 C21 20DB/LG EVAPORATOR TEMPERATURE SENSOR SIGNAL 7 C121 20DB/DG SENSOR GROUND 8 E16 20OR/GY PANEL LAMPS DRIVER 9 C61 20DB/LG BLEND DOOR DRIVER 10 C29 20DB MODE DOOR 2 DRIVER 11 C32 20DB/TN RECIRCULATION DOOR DRIVER 12 C801 20DB/OR MODE DOOR 1 DRIVER 13 C34 20DB/LB COMMON DOOR DRIVER 14 C33 20LB/BR PASSENGER BLEND DOOR DRIVER 15 D54 20WT CAN B BUS (-) 16 D55 20WT/OR CAN B BUS (+) Component Location - 47 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Assembly, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11914 Connector: Name : CONTROL-A/C-HEATER C2 Color : BLACK # of pins : 10 Pin Circuit Description 1-2 C71 16DB/BR BLOWER MOTOR LOW DRIVER 3 C73 14DB/VT BLOWER MOTOR M2 DRIVER 4-5 Z134 10BK/LG GROUND Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Assembly, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11915 6-7 C72 16DB/OR BLOWER MOTOR M1 DRIVER 8-9-10 C70 10DB/YL BLOWER MOTOR HIGH DRIVER Component Location - 47 Component ID 81 Component ID: 81 Component : CONTROL-A/C-HEATER Connector: Name : CONTROL-A/C-HEATER C1 Color : BLACK # of pins : 16 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Assembly, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11916 Pin Circuit Description 1 F921 20PK/LB FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN) 2 Z24 20BK/OR GROUND 3 A919 20RD FUSED B(+) 4-5-6 C21 20DB/LG EVAPORATOR TEMPERATURE SENSOR SIGNAL 7 C121 20DB/DG SENSOR GROUND 8 E16 20OR/GY PANEL LAMPS DRIVER 9 C61 20DB/LG BLEND DOOR DRIVER 10 C29 20DB MODE DOOR 2 DRIVER 11 C32 20DB/TN RECIRCULATION DOOR DRIVER 12 C801 20DB/OR MODE DOOR 1 DRIVER 13 C34 20DB/LB COMMON DOOR DRIVER 14 C33 20LB/BR PASSENGER BLEND DOOR DRIVER 15 D54 20WT CAN B BUS (-) 16 D55 20WT/OR CAN B BUS (+) Component Location - 47 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Assembly, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11917 Connector: Name : CONTROL-A/C-HEATER C2 Color : BLACK # of pins : 10 Pin Circuit Description 1-2 C71 16DB/BR BLOWER MOTOR LOW DRIVER 3 C73 14DB/VT BLOWER MOTOR M2 DRIVER 4-5 Z134 10BK/LG GROUND Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Assembly, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11918 6-7 C72 16DB/OR BLOWER MOTOR M1 DRIVER 8-9-10 C70 10DB/YL BLOWER MOTOR HIGH DRIVER Component Location - 47 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Assembly, HVAC > Component Information > Description and Operation > Manual Single Zone Control Assembly: Description and Operation Manual Single Zone MANUAL SINGLE ZONE The A/C-heater control (1) for the manual temperature control (MTC) single zone heating-A/C system allows one temperature setting for the entire vehicle. All controls are identified by ISO graphic symbols. The A/C-heater control and integral computer is located in the instrument panel and contains: - a push button A/C on/off control (2). The Snowflake button contains an LED that illuminates when the A/C system is in operation. - a push button rear window defogger on/off control (3) when equipped with the optional rear heated window. The defogger button contains an LED that illuminates when the rear window defogger (EBL) system is in operation. - a rotary control knob for recirculation and mode control of the discharged air (4). - a rotary control knob for temperature control of the discharged air (5). - a rotary control knob for fan speed selection and turning the heating-A/C system off (6). The A/C-heater control is diagnosed using a scan tool See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code Tests and Associated Procedures . The A/C-heater control cannot be adjusted or repaired and must be replaced if found inoperative or damaged. The illumination lamps for the A/C-heater control are available for service replacement. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Assembly, HVAC > Component Information > Description and Operation > Manual Single Zone > Page 11921 Control Assembly: Description and Operation Manual Dual Zone MANUAL DUAL ZONE The A/C-heater control (1) for the manual temperature control (MTC) dual zone heating-A/C system allows both the driver and the front seat passenger the ability to individually regulate air temperature for their side of the vehicle. All controls are identified by ISO graphic symbols. The dual zone A/C-heater control and integral computer is located in the instrument panel and contains: - a push button A/C on/off control (2). The Snowflake button contains an LED that illuminates when the A/C system is in operation. - a push button MAX A/C air recirculation control (3). The Recirculation button contains an LED that illuminates when the recirculation function is activated for high A/C demand. - a push button rear window defogger on/off control (4). The defogger button contains an LED that illuminates when the rear window defogger system is in operation. - two slid-type control levers for individual driver and front seat passenger temperature control of the discharged air (5 and 6). - a rotary control knob for mode control of the discharged air (7). - a rotary control knob for fan speed selection and turning the heating-A/C system off (8). The A/C-heater control is diagnosed using a scan tool See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code Tests and Associated Procedures . The A/C-heater control cannot be adjusted or repaired and must be replaced if found inoperative or damaged. The illumination lamps for the A/C-heater control are available for service replacement. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Assembly, HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > A/C Heater Control - Removal Control Assembly: Service and Repair A/C Heater Control - Removal REMOVAL WARNING: Disable the airbag system before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the airbag system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the airbag system. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in an accidental airbag deployment and possible personal injury or death. NOTE: Single zone A/C-heater control shown. Dual zone similar. 1. Disconnect and isolate the negative battery cable. 2. Remove the center bezel (1) from the instrument panel and disconnect the wire harness connectors (4 and 5) from the back of the A/C-heater control (2) See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Service and Repair/Instrument Panel Center Bezel - Removal . NOTE: Take the proper precautions to protect the front face of the center bezel from cosmetic damage. 3. Place the center bezel on a workbench and remove the four screws (3) that secure the A/C-heater control to the center bezel and remove the control. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Assembly, HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > A/C Heater Control - Removal > Page 11924 Control Assembly: Service and Repair A/C Heater Control - Installation INSTALLATION NOTE: Single zone A/C-heater control shown. Dual zone similar. 1. Position the A/C-heater control (2) into the back of the instrument panel center bezel (1). 2. Install the four screws (3) that secure the A/C-heater control to the center bezel. Tighten the screws to 2.2 Nm (20 in. lbs.). 3. Connect the wire harness connectors (4 and 5) to the back of the A/C-heater control and install the instrument panel center bezel See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Service and Repair/Instrument Panel Center Bezel - Installation . 4. Reconnect the negative battery cable. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Coupler HVAC > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Coupler HVAC: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION Spring-lock type refrigerant line couplers (1 and 4) are used to connect the A/C suction line (6) to the A/C accumulator (5) and, the A/C accumulator and the A/C liquid line to the A/C evaporator tubes (3). Secondary retaining clips (2 and 7) are installed over the connected couplers for added protection. The spring-lock refrigerant line couplers require special disconnect tools for disengaging the two coupler halves. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Coupler HVAC > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 11929 Coupler HVAC: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The spring-lock type refrigerant line coupler is held together by a garter spring (6) inside a circular cage (7) on the male half of the fitting (1). When the two coupler halves are connected, the flared end of the female fitting (2) slips behind the garter spring inside the cage on the male fitting. The garter spring and cage prevent the flared end of the female fitting from pulling out of the cage. Some applications use a connection indicator ring (4) to help indicate when the two coupler halves are fully connected. O-rings (8) are used to seal the coupler connections. These O-rings are compatible with R-134a refrigerant and must be replaced with O-rings made of the same material. A secondary retaining clip (3) is installed over the connected coupler (5) for added protection. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Coupler HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Coupler HVAC: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL WARNING: Refer to the applicable warnings and cautions for this system before performing the following operation See: Service Precautions/Warning and See: Service Precautions/Caution. Failure to follow the warnings and cautions could result in possible personal injury or death. 1. Recover the refrigerant from the refrigerant system See: Service and Repair/Refrigerant System Recovery . 2. Remove the secondary retaining clip from the spring-lock type refrigerant line coupler. 3. Fit the proper size A/C line disconnect tool (Special Tool Kit 7193 or equivalent) over the coupler cage (1). 4. Close the two halves of the A/C line disconnect tool around the coupler (2). NOTE: The garter spring may not release if the A/C line disconnect tool is cocked while pushing it into the coupler cage opening. 5. Push the A/C line disconnect tool into the open side of the coupler cage to expand the garter spring (3). Once the garter spring is expanded, pull on the refrigerant line attached to the female half of the coupler until the flange on the female fitting is separated from the garter spring and cage on the male fitting. 6. Open and remove the A/C line disconnect tool from the refrigerant line coupler (4). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Coupler HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 11932 Coupler HVAC: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION 1. Clean any dirt or foreign material from the spring-lock type refrigerant line coupler. 2. Check to make sure that the garter spring (6) is located within the cage (7) of the male half of the refrigerant line coupler (1), and that the garter spring is not damaged. a. If the garter spring is missing, install a new spring by pushing it into the coupler cage opening. b. If the garter spring is damaged, remove it from the coupler cage with a small hook (DO NOT use a screwdriver) and install a new garter spring. CAUTION: Use only the specified O-rings as they are made of a special material for the R-134a system. The use of any other O-rings may allow the connection to leak. 3. Install new O-rings (8) on the male half of the refrigerant line coupler. 4. Lubricate the O-rings, and the inside of the female half of the refrigerant line coupler (2) with clean R-134a refrigerant oil. Use only refrigerant oil of the type recommended for the A/C compressor in the vehicle. 5. Position the female half of the coupler over the male half of the coupler. 6. Push together firmly on the two halves of the refrigerant line coupler until the garter spring in the cage on the male half of the coupler snaps over the flanged end on the female half of the coupler. 7. Make sure that the refrigerant line coupler is fully engaged by firmly pulling the refrigerant lines away from each other on both sides of the coupler. 8. Install the secondary retaining clip (3) over connected coupler cage (5). 9. Evacuate the refrigerant system See: Service and Repair/Refrigerant System Evacuate . 10. Charge the refrigerant system See: Service and Repair/Refrigerant System Charge . Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Evaporator Core > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Evaporator Core: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION NOTE: Typical A/C evaporator shown. The A/C evaporator (1) for the heating-A/C system is located within the HVAC housing, behind the instrument panel. The A/C evaporator (and insulator (2), when equipped) are positioned in the HVAC housing so that all air entering the housing must pass over the evaporator fins before it is distributed through the heating-A/C system ducts and outlets. However, air passing over the evaporator fins will only be conditioned when the A/C compressor is engaged and circulating refrigerant through the A/C evaporator. The A/C evaporator can be serviced by removing and disassembling the HVAC housing assembly. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Evaporator Core > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 11937 Evaporator Core: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION Refrigerant enters the A/C evaporator through the A/C orifice tube as a low-temperature, low-pressure mixture of liquid and gas. As air flows over the fins of the A/C evaporator, the humidity in the air condenses on the fins, and the heat from the air is absorbed by the refrigerant. Heat absorption causes the refrigerant to boil and vaporize. The refrigerant becomes a low-pressure gas when it leaves the A/C evaporator. NOTE: Replacement of the refrigerant line O-ring seals and gaskets is required anytime a refrigerant line is opened. Failure to replace the rubber O-ring seals and metal gaskets could result in a refrigerant system leak. The A/C evaporator has no serviceable parts. The O-ring seals used on the connections are made from a special type of rubber not affected by R-134a refrigerant. The O-ring seals must be replaced whenever a refrigerant line is removed from the A/C evaporator. The A/C evaporator cannot be repaired and must be replaced if leaking or damaged. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Evaporator Core > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Evaporator Core: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL 1. Remove the HVAC housing and place it on a workbench See: Housing Assembly HVAC/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/HVAC Housing - Removal and Installation . 2. Disassemble the HVAC housing to access the A/C evaporator (3) See: Housing Assembly HVAC/Service and Repair/Overhaul/Disassembly . NOTE: If the foam seal for the A/C evaporator tubes is deformed or damaged, the seal must be replaced. 3. Remove the foam seal (1) from around the tubes of the A/C evaporator. 4. Carefully lift the A/C evaporator out of the upper half of the HVAC housing (2). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Evaporator Core > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 11940 Evaporator Core: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION CAUTION: Be certain to adjust the refrigerant oil level when servicing the A/C refrigerant system See: Service and Repair/Refrigerant Oil Level. Failure to properly adjust the refrigerant oil level will prevent the A/C system from operating as designed and can cause serious A/C compressor damage. NOTE: When replacing multiple A/C system components, refer to the Refrigerant Oil Capacities chart to determine how much oil should be added to the refrigerant system See: Service and Repair/Refrigerant Oil Level. NOTE: If only the A/C evaporator is being replaced, add 60 milliliters (2 fluid ounces) of refrigerant oil to the refrigerant system. Use only refrigerant oil of the type recommended for the A/C compressor in the vehicle. NOTE: Replacement of the refrigerant line O-ring seals and gaskets is required anytime a refrigerant line is opened. Failure to replace the rubber O-ring seals and metal gaskets could result in a refrigerant system leak. 1. Carefully install the A/C evaporator (3) into the upper half of the HVAC housing (2). NOTE: Make sure that the foam seal is properly positioned. 2. Install the foam seal (1) onto the tubes of the A/C evaporator. 3. Assemble the HVAC housing See: Housing Assembly HVAC/Service and Repair/Overhaul/Assembly . 4. Install the HVAC housing See: Housing Assembly HVAC/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/HVAC Housing - Installation . 5. If the A/C evaporator is being replaced, add 60 milliliters (2 fluid ounces) of refrigerant oil to the refrigerant system. When replacing multiple A/C system components, refer to the Refrigerant Oil Capacities chart to determine how much oil should be added to the refrigerant system See: Service and Repair/Refrigerant Oil Level . Use only refrigerant oil of the type recommended for the A/C compressor in the vehicle. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Locations Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch: Locations Component ID: 411 Component : SENSOR-EVAPORATOR TEMPERATURE Connector: Name : SENSOR-EVAPORATOR TEMPERATURE Color : NATURAL # of pins : 2 Pin Circuit Description 1 C121 20DB/DG SENSOR GROUND 2 C21 20DB/LG EVAPORATOR TEMPERATURE SENSOR SIGNAL Component Location - 40 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 11944 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 11945 Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch: Diagrams Component ID: 411 Component : SENSOR-EVAPORATOR TEMPERATURE Connector: Name : SENSOR-EVAPORATOR TEMPERATURE Color : NATURAL # of pins : 2 Pin Circuit Description 1 C121 20DB/DG SENSOR GROUND 2 C21 20DB/LG EVAPORATOR TEMPERATURE SENSOR SIGNAL Component Location - 40 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 11946 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION NOTE: Cutaway of HVAC housing shown for clarity. The evaporator temperature sensor (1) is an electrical thermistor located within a molded plastic case that is inserted into the top of the HVAC housing (2) to measure the temperature of the conditioned air downstream of the A/C evaporator (3). Two terminals within the connector receptacle connect the sensor to the vehicle electrical system through a wire lead and connector of the HVAC wire harness. The external location of the evaporator temperature sensor allows the sensor to be removed or installed without disturbing the refrigerant in the A/C system. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 11949 Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The evaporator temperature sensor monitors the temperature of the conditioned air downstream of the A/C evaporator and supplies an input signal to the A/C-heater control. The A/C-heater control uses the evaporator temperature sensor input signal to optimize A/C system performance and to protect the A/C system from evaporator freezing. The evaporator temperature sensor will change its internal resistance in response to the temperatures it monitors and is connected to the A/C-heater control through sensor ground circuit and a 5-volt reference signal circuit. As the temperature of the A/C evaporator decreases, the internal resistance of the evaporator temperature sensor decreases. The A/C-heater control uses the monitored voltage reading as an indication of evaporator temperature. The A/C-heater control is programmed to respond to this input by requesting the powertrain control module (PCM) or the engine control module (ECM) (depending on engine application) to cycle the A/C compressor clutch as necessary to optimize A/C system performance and to protect the A/C system from evaporator freezing. The evaporator temperature sensor is diagnosed using a scan tool See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/Heating-A/C System Diagnostics . The evaporator temperature sensor cannot be adjusted or repaired and must be replaced if found inoperative or damaged. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL NOTE: Illustration shown with instrument panel removed for clarity. 1. Disconnect and isolate the negative battery cable. 2. Remove the glove box from the instrument panel See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Glove Compartment/Service and Repair/Instrument Panel Glove Box - Removal . 3. Disconnect the HVAC wire harness (1) from the evaporator temperature sensor (2) located on the top of the HVAC housing (3). 4. Remove the evaporator temperature sensor from the HVAC housing by pulling the sensor upward while tipping it forward. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 11952 Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION NOTE: Illustration shown with instrument panel removed for clarity. 1. Install the evaporator temperature sensor (2) into the opening in the top of the HVAC housing (3). Make sure the sensor is fully engage to the housing. 2. Connect the HVAC wire harness (1) to the evaporator temperature sensor. 3. Install the glove box See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Glove Compartment/Service and Repair/Instrument Panel Glove Box Installation . 4. Reconnect the negative battery cable. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Expansion Block/Orifice Tube > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Expansion Block/Orifice Tube: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The fixed A/C orifice tube is installed in the rear section of the A/C liquid line and provides a restriction in the liquid refrigerant line between the A/C condenser and the A/C evaporator. This restriction established the pressure differential between the high and low-pressure sides of the A/C system. The A/C orifice tube includes a diffuser screen (1), O-ring seals (2) to seal it to the inner wall of the A/C liquid line, an inlet filter screen (3) and the fixed orifice (4). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Expansion Block/Orifice Tube > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 11957 Expansion Block/Orifice Tube: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The fixed A/C orifice tube is used to meter the flow of liquid refrigerant into the A/C evaporator. The high-pressure liquid refrigerant from the A/C condenser expands into a low-pressure liquid as it passes through the metering orifice and diffuser screen of the A/C orifice tube. NOTE: A/C orifice tube size is different between gasoline and diesel engines. Be sure to use the correct A/C liquid line when replacement of the A/C orifice tube is required. The A/C orifice tube is not serviceable and the rear section of the A/C liquid line must be replaced if the orifice tube is found inoperative See: Hose/Line HVAC/Description and Operation/Liquid Line . Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Expansion Block/Orifice Tube > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 11958 Expansion Block/Orifice Tube: Testing and Inspection A/C ORIFICE TUBE WARNING: The A/C liquid line between the A/C condenser and the A/C orifice tube can become hot enough to burn the skin. Use extreme caution when performing the following test to prevent possible personal injury. NOTE: The A/C orifice tube can be checked for proper operation using the following procedure. However, the A/C orifice tube is only serviced as a part of the A/C liquid line. If the results of this test indicate that the A/C orifice tube is obstructed or missing, the A/C liquid line must be replaced. 1. Confirm that the refrigerant system is properly charged See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/A/C Performance Test . 2. Start the engine. Turn on the A/C system and confirm that the compressor clutch is engaged. 3. Allow the A/C system to operate for five minutes. 4. Lightly and cautiously touch the A/C liquid line near the condenser outlet at the front of the engine compartment. The A/C liquid line should be hot to the touch. 5. Touch the A/C liquid line near the evaporator inlet at the rear of the engine compartment. The A/C liquid line should be cold to the touch. 6. If there is a distinct temperature differential between the two ends of the A/C liquid line, the A/C orifice tube is in good condition. If there is little or no detectable temperature differential between the two ends of the A/C liquid line, the A/C orifice tube is obstructed or missing and the A/C liquid line must be replaced See: Hose/Line HVAC/Service and Repair/A/C Line - Removal . Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Heater Core > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Heater Core: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The heater core (1) is a heat exchanger made of rows of tubes and fins. The heater core is positioned within the HVAC housing through the panel (2) located at the front of the HVAC housing. The heater core tubes (3) are attached to the front of the heater core and are secured to the HVAC housing by a bracket. The heater core can be serviced by removing the HVAC housing assembly from the vehicle. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Heater Core > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 11963 Heater Core: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION Engine coolant is circulated through the heater hoses to the heater core at all times. As the coolant flows through the heater core, heat is removed from the engine and is transferred to the heater core tubes and fins. Air directed through the heater core picks up the heat from the heater core fins. The blend-air door(s) allows control of the heater output air temperature by regulating the amount of air flowing through the heater core. The blower motor speed controls the volume of air flowing through the HVAC housing. The heater core cannot be repaired and must be replaced if restricted, leaking or damaged. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Heater Core > Component Information > Service and Repair > Installation Heater Core: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION 1. Carefully install the heater core (3) into the front of the HVAC housing. 2. Position the heater core tube bracket (2) onto the HVAC housing. 3. Install the two screws (1) that secure the heater core bracket to the HVAC housing. Tighten the screws to 1.1 Nm (10 in. lbs.). 4. If equipped with the dual zone heating-A/C system, install the linkage rod (4). 5. Install the foam seal onto the heater core tubes. NOTE: If the heater core is being replaced, flush the cooling system See: Engine, Cooling and Exhaust/Cooling System/Service and Repair. 6. Install the HVAC housing See: Housing Assembly HVAC/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/HVAC Housing - Installation . Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Heater Core > Component Information > Service and Repair > Installation > Page 11966 Heater Core: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL WARNING: Disable the airbag system before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Disconnect and isolate the negative battery (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the airbag system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the airbag system. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment and possible personal injury or death. NOTE: Disassembly of the HVAC housing is not required to remove heater core. 1. Remove the HVAC housing See: Housing Assembly HVAC/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/HVAC Housing - Removal and Installation . 2. Remove the foam seal from the heater core tubes. 3. If equipped with the dual zone heating-A/C system, remove the linkage rod (4) to gain access to the heater core (3). 4. Remove the two screws (1) that secure the heater core tube bracket (2) to the HVAC housing and remove the bracket. 5. Carefully pull the heater core out of the front of the HVAC housing. 6. Inspect all foam seals and replace as required. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > High Pressure Safety Valve HVAC > Component Information > Description and Operation > A/C Compressor - Description High Pressure Safety Valve HVAC: Description and Operation A/C Compressor - Description HIGH PRESSURE RELIEF VALVE A high pressure relief valve is located on the A/C compressor. This mechanical valve is designed to vent refrigerant from the A/C system to protect against damage to the A/C compressor and other A/C system components, caused by condenser air flow restriction or an overcharge of refrigerant. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > High Pressure Safety Valve HVAC > Component Information > Description and Operation > A/C Compressor - Description > Page 11971 High Pressure Safety Valve HVAC: Description and Operation A/C Compressor - Operation HIGH PRESSURE RELIEF VALVE The high pressure relief valve vents refrigerant from the A/C system when a discharge pressure of 3445 to 4135 kPa (500 to 600 psi) or above is reached. The high pressure relief valve closes with a minimum discharge pressure of 2756 kPa (400 psi) is reached. The high pressure relief valve vents only enough refrigerant to reduce the A/C system pressure, and then re-seats itself. The majority of the refrigerant is conserved in the A/C system. If the high pressure relief valve vents refrigerant, it does not mean the valve is inoperative. The high pressure relief valve is factory-calibrated and cannot be adjusted or repaired, and must not be removed or otherwise disturbed. The valve is only serviced as a part of the A/C compressor. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Hose/Line HVAC > Component Information > Description and Operation > Discharge Line Hose/Line HVAC: Description and Operation Discharge Line DESCRIPTION The A/C discharge line is the refrigerant line that goes from the A/C compressor to the A/C condenser and has an integral fitting for the A/C pressure transducer See: Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch/Description and Operation/Description . The A/C discharge line is made from light-weight aluminum tubing with braze-less and crimp type fittings and nylon tubes with rubber barrier hose See: Description and Operation/Plumbing/Description . The A/C discharge line for the 5.9L and 6.7L diesel engines is serviced as an assembly with the A/C suction line. NOTE: Replacement of the refrigerant line O-ring seals and gaskets is required anytime a refrigerant line is opened. Failure to replace the rubber O-ring seals and metal gaskets could result in a refrigerant system leak. The A/C discharge line has no serviceable parts except the O-ring seals and gaskets. The O-ring seals used on the connections are made from a special type of rubber not affected by R-134a refrigerant. The O-ring seals and gaskets must be replaced whenever the A/C discharge line is removed. The A/C discharge line cannot be repaired and must be replaced if found to be leaking or damaged. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Hose/Line HVAC > Component Information > Description and Operation > Discharge Line > Page 11976 Hose/Line HVAC: Description and Operation Liquid Line DESCRIPTION The A/C liquid line is the refrigerant line that carries refrigerant from the A/C condenser to the A/C evaporator. The A/C liquid line consists of two separate lines that connect to each other using a spring-lock type refrigerant line coupler See: Coupler HVAC/Description and Operation/Description . The A/C liquid line is made from light-weight aluminum tubing with braze-less and crimp type fittings and nylon tubes with rubber barrier hose. NOTE: A/C orifice tube size is different between gasoline and diesel engines. Be sure to use the correct A/C liquid line when replacement of the A/C orifice tube is required. The front section of the A/C liquid line includes the high-side service port and the rear section of the A/C liquid line includes the A/C fixed orifice tube. NOTE: Replacement of the refrigerant line O-ring seals and gaskets is required anytime a refrigerant line is opened. Failure to replace the rubber O-ring seals and metal gaskets could result in a refrigerant system leak. The A/C liquid line has no serviceable parts except for the O-ring seals and gaskets, high-side service port valve, cap and secondary retaining clip. The O-ring seals used on the connections are made from a special type of rubber not affected by R-134a refrigerant. The O-ring seals and gaskets must be replaced whenever the A/C liquid line is removed. The A/C liquid line cannot be repaired and must be replaced if found to be leaking or damaged, or if the fixed orifice tube is inoperative. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Hose/Line HVAC > Component Information > Description and Operation > Discharge Line > Page 11977 Hose/Line HVAC: Description and Operation Suction Line DESCRIPTION The A/C suction line is the refrigerant line that goes from the A/C evaporator to the A/C compressor. The A/C suction line is made from light-weight aluminum tubing with braze-less and crimp type fittings and nylon tubes with rubber barrier hose See: Description and Operation/Plumbing/Description . The A/C suction line for the 5.9L and 6.7L diesel engines is serviced as an assembly with the A/C discharge line. NOTE: Replacement of the refrigerant line O-ring seals and gaskets is required anytime a refrigerant line is opened. Failure to replace the rubber O-ring seals and metal gaskets could result in a refrigerant system leak. The A/C suction line has no serviceable parts except for the O-ring seals and the secondary retaining clip. The O-ring seals used on the connections are made from a special type of rubber not affected by R-134a refrigerant. The O-ring seals must be replaced whenever the A/C suction line is removed. The A/C suction line cannot be repaired and must be replaced if found to be leaking or damaged. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Hose/Line HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > A/C Line - Removal Hose/Line HVAC: Service and Repair A/C Line - Removal Discharge Line 3.7L/4.7L ENGINES WARNING: Refer to the applicable warnings and cautions for this system before performing the following operation See: Service Precautions/Warning and See: Service Precautions/Caution. Failure to follow the warnings and cautions could result in possible personal injury or death. NOTE: 3.7L engine shown, 4.7L engine similar. 1. Disconnect and isolate the negative battery cable. 2. Recover the refrigerant from the refrigerant system See: Service and Repair/Refrigerant System Recovery . 3. Disconnect the wire harness connector (8) from the A/C pressure transducer (7). 4. Remove the nut (1) that secures the A/C discharge line (9) to the condenser inlet port (3) located near the top of the A/C condenser (2). 5. Disconnect the A/C discharge line from the A/C condenser and remove and discard the O-ring seal and gasket. 6. Install plugs in, or tape over the discharge line fitting and condenser port. 7. Remove the nut (4) that secures the A/C discharge line to the A/C compressor (6). 8. Disconnect the A/C discharge line from the A/C compressor and remove and discard the O-ring seal and gasket. 9. Install plugs in, or tape over the opened refrigerant line fitting and the compressor port. 10. Remove the A/C discharge line from the engine compartment. 11. If necessary, remove the A/C pressure transducer from the A/C discharge line See: Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch/Service and Repair/Removal . Liquid Line 3.7L/4.7L/5.7L ENGINES WARNING: Refer to the applicable warnings and cautions for this system before performing the following operation See: Service Precautions/Warning and See: Service Precautions/Caution. Failure to follow the warnings and cautions could result in possible personal injury or death. NOTE: The A/C liquid line is serviced in two sections. FRONT SECTION Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Hose/Line HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > A/C Line - Removal > Page 11980 1. Disconnect and isolate the negative battery cable. 2. Recover the refrigerant from the refrigerant system See: Service and Repair/Refrigerant System Recovery . 3. Remove the air filter housing and mounting bracket. 4. Remove the plastic cover from the condenser outlet stud. 5. Remove the nut (8) that secures the front section of the A/C liquid line (10) to the A/C condenser (7). 6. Disconnect the A/C liquid line from the A/C condenser and remove and discard the O-ring and gasket. 7. Disengage the A/C liquid line from the body retaining clips (1 and 9). 8. Remove the secondary retaining clip (2) from the spring-lock coupler that secures the front section of the A/C liquid line to the rear section of the liquid line (4). 9. Using the proper A/C line disconnect tool, disconnect the front section of the A/C liquid line from the rear section of the liquid line and remove and discard the O-ring seals See: Coupler HVAC/Service and Repair/Removal . 10. Install plugs in, or tape over the opened ends of the A/C liquid lines and the condenser port. 11. Remove the front section of the A/C liquid line from the engine compartment. REAR SECTION 12. Disconnect and isolate the negative battery cable. 13. Recover the refrigerant from the refrigerant system See: Service and Repair/Refrigerant System Recovery . 14. Remove the air filter housing and mounting bracket. 15. Disengage the rear section of the A/C liquid line (4) from the body retaining clip (3). 16. Remove the secondary retaining clip (2) from the spring-lock coupler that secures the front section of the A/C liquid line (10) to the rear section of the liquid line. 17. Using the proper A/C line disconnect tool (Special Tool Kit 7193 or equivalent), disconnect the front section of the A/C liquid line from the rear section of the liquid line and remove and discard the O-ring seals See: Coupler HVAC/Service and Repair/Removal . 18. Remove the secondary retaining clip (5) from the spring-lock coupler that secures the rear section of the A/C liquid line to the evaporator tube (6). 19. Using the proper A/C line disconnect tool (Special Tool Kit 7193 or equivalent), disconnect the A/C liquid line from the evaporator tube and remove and discard the O-ring seals See: Coupler HVAC/Service and Repair/Removal . Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Hose/Line HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > A/C Line - Removal > Page 11981 20. Install plugs in, or tape over the opened ends of the A/C liquid lines and the evaporator tube. 21. Remove the rear section of the A/C liquid line from the engine compartment. Suction Line 3.7L/4.7L ENGINES WARNING: Refer to the applicable warnings and cautions for this system before performing the following operation See: Service Precautions/Warning and See: Service Precautions/Caution. Failure to follow the warnings and cautions could result in possible personal injury or death. 1. Disconnect and isolate the negative battery cable. 2. Recover the refrigerant from the refrigerant system See: Service and Repair/Refrigerant System Recovery . 3. Remove the air filter housing cover. 4. Remove the nut (4) that secures the A/C suction line (5) to the A/C compressor (6). 5. Disconnect the A/C suction line from the A/C compressor and remove and discard the O-ring seal and gasket. 6. Install plugs in, or tape over the opened refrigerant line fitting and the compressor port. 7. Remove the secondary retaining clip (7) from the spring-lock coupler (1) that secures the A/C suction line (6) to the accumulator (5). 8. Using the proper A/C line disconnect tool (Special Tool Kit 7193 or equivalent), disconnect the A/C suction line from the A/C accumulator See: Coupler HVAC/Service and Repair/Removal . 9. Remove the O-ring seals from the accumulator tube fitting and discard the seals. 10. Install plugs in, or tape over the opened suction line fitting and the accumulator tube. 11. Remove the A/C suction line from the engine compartment. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Hose/Line HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > A/C Line - Removal > Page 11982 Hose/Line HVAC: Service and Repair A/C Line - Installation Discharge Line 3.7L/4.7L ENGINES CAUTION: Be certain to adjust the refrigerant oil level when servicing the A/C refrigerant system See: Service and Repair/Refrigerant Oil Level. Failure to properly adjust the refrigerant oil level will prevent the A/C system from operating as designed and can cause serious A/C compressor damage. NOTE: When replacing multiple A/C system components, refer to the Refrigerant Oil Capacities chart to determine how much oil should be added to the refrigerant system See: Service and Repair/Refrigerant Oil Level. NOTE: Replacement of the refrigerant line O-ring seals and gaskets is required anytime a refrigerant line is opened. Failure to replace the rubber O-ring seals and metal gaskets could result in a refrigerant system leak. NOTE: 3.7L engine shown, 4.7L engine similar. 1. If removed, install the A/C pressure transducer (7) onto the A/C discharge line (9) See: Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch/Service and Repair/Installation . 2. Position the A/C discharge line into the engine compartment. 3. Remove the tape or plugs from the opened discharge line fitting and the condenser port. 4. Lubricate a new O-ring seal with clean refrigerant oil and install it and a new gasket onto the discharge line fitting. Use only the specified O-ring seal as it is made of a special material for the R-134a system. Use only refrigerant oil of the type recommended for the A/C compressor in the vehicle. 5. Install the A/C discharge line onto the A/C condenser (3). 6. Install the nut (1) that secures the A/C discharge line to the A/C condenser. Tighten the nut to 23 Nm (17 ft. lbs.). 7. Remove the tape or plugs from the opened fitting on the A/C discharge line and the compressor port. 8. Lubricate a new O-ring seal with clean refrigerant oil and install it and a new gasket onto the discharge line fitting. Use only the specified seal as it is made of a special material for the R-134a system. Use only refrigerant oil of the type recommended for the A/C compressor in the vehicle. 9. Install the A/C discharge line onto the A/C compressor (6). 10. Install the nut (4) that secures the A/C discharge line to the A/C compressor. Tighten the nut to 23 Nm (17 ft. lbs.). 11. Connect the wire harness connector (8) to the A/C pressure transducer. 12. Reconnect the negative battery cable. 13. Evacuate the refrigerant system See: Service and Repair/Refrigerant System Evacuate . 14. Adjust the refrigerant oil level See: Service and Repair/Refrigerant Oil Level . 15. Charge the refrigerant system See: Service and Repair/Refrigerant System Charge . Liquid Line 3.7L/4.7L/5.7L ENGINES CAUTION: Be certain to adjust the refrigerant oil level when servicing the A/C refrigerant system See: Service and Repair/Refrigerant Oil Level. Failure to properly adjust the refrigerant oil level will prevent the A/C system from operating as designed and can cause serious A/C Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Hose/Line HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > A/C Line - Removal > Page 11983 compressor damage. NOTE: When replacing multiple A/C system components, refer to the Refrigerant Oil Capacities chart to determine how much oil should be added to the refrigerant system See: Service and Repair/Refrigerant Oil Level. NOTE: Replacement of the refrigerant line O-ring seals and gaskets is required anytime a refrigerant line is opened. Failure to replace the rubber O-ring seals and metal gaskets could result in a refrigerant system leak. NOTE: The A/C liquid line is serviced in two sections. FRONT SECTION 1. Position the front section of the A/C liquid line (10) into the engine compartment. 2. Remove the tape or plugs from the opened ends of the A/C liquid lines and the condenser port. 3. Lubricate new O-ring seals with clean refrigerant oil and install them onto the front liquid line spring-lock coupler fitting. Use only the specified O-ring seals as they are made of a special material for the R-134a system. Use only refrigerant oil of the type recommended for the A/C compressor in the vehicle. 4. Connect the front section of the A/C liquid line to the rear section of the liquid line (4) See: Coupler HVAC/Service and Repair/Installation . 5. Install the secondary retaining clip (2) onto the spring-lock coupler that secures the front section of the A/C liquid line onto the rear section of the liquid line. 6. Engage the A/C liquid line into the body retaining clips (1 and 9). 7. Lubricate a new O-ring with clean refrigerant oil and install it and a new gasket onto the front liquid line fitting. Use only the specified O-ring sea as it is made of a special material for the R-134a system. Use only refrigerant oil of the type recommended for the A/C compressor in the vehicle. 8. Connect the front section of the A/C liquid line to the outlet port of the A/C condenser (7). 9. Install the nut (8) that secures the A/C liquid line to the A/C condenser. Tighten the nut to 23 Nm (17 ft. lbs.). 10. Install the plastic cover onto the condenser outlet stud. 11. Install the air filter housing mounting bracket and air filter housing. 12. Reconnect the negative battery cable(s). 13. Evacuate the refrigerant system See: Service and Repair/Refrigerant System Evacuate . 14. Adjust the refrigerant oil level See: Service and Repair/Refrigerant Oil Level . 15. Charge the refrigerant system See: Service and Repair/Refrigerant System Charge . REAR SECTION Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Hose/Line HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > A/C Line - Removal > Page 11984 16. Position the rear section of the A/C liquid line (4) into the engine compartment. 17. Remove the tape or plugs from the opened ends of the A/C liquid lines and the evaporator tube (6). 18. Lubricate new O-ring seals with clean refrigerant oil and install them onto the rear liquid line spring-lock coupler fitting. Use only the specified O-ring seals as they are made of a special material for the R-134a system. Use only refrigerant oil of the type recommended for the A/C compressor in the vehicle. 19. Connect the rear section of the A/C liquid line to the evaporator tube See: Coupler HVAC/Service and Repair/Installation . 20. Install the secondary retaining clip (5) onto the spring-lock coupler that secures the rear section of the A/C liquid line onto the evaporator tube. 21. Engage the A/C liquid line into the body retaining clip (3). 22. Lubricate new O-ring seals with clean refrigerant oil and install them onto the front liquid line spring-lock coupler fitting. Use only the specified O-ring seals as they are made of a special material for the R-134a system. Use only refrigerant oil of the type recommended for the A/C compressor in the vehicle. 23. Connect the rear section of the A/C liquid line to the front section of the liquid line (10) See: Coupler HVAC/Service and Repair/Installation . 24. Install the secondary retaining clip (2) onto the spring-lock coupler that secures the front section of the A/C liquid line to the rear section of the liquid line. 25. Install the air filter housing mounting bracket and air filter housing. 26. Reconnect the negative battery cable. 27. Evacuate the refrigerant system See: Service and Repair/Refrigerant System Evacuate . 28. Adjust the refrigerant oil level See: Service and Repair/Refrigerant Oil Level . 29. Charge the refrigerant system See: Service and Repair/Refrigerant System Charge . Suction Line 3.7L/4.7L ENGINES CAUTION: Be certain to adjust the refrigerant oil level when servicing the A/C refrigerant system See: Service and Repair/Refrigerant Oil Level. Failure to properly adjust the refrigerant oil level will prevent the A/C system from operating as designed and can cause serious A/C compressor damage. NOTE: When replacing multiple A/C system components, refer to the Refrigerant Oil Capacities chart to determine how much oil should be added to the refrigerant system See: Service and Repair/Refrigerant Oil Level. NOTE: Replacement of the refrigerant line O-ring seals and gaskets is required anytime a refrigerant line is opened. Failure to replace the rubber O-ring seals and metal gaskets could result in a refrigerant system leak. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Hose/Line HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > A/C Line - Removal > Page 11985 1. Position the A/C suction line (5) into the engine compartment. 2. Remove the tape or plugs from the opened suction line fitting and the compressor port. 3. Lubricate a new O-ring seal with clean refrigerant oil and install it and a new gasket onto the suction line fitting. Use only the specified O-ring seal as it is made of a special material for the R-134a system. Use only refrigerant oil of the type recommended for the A/C compressor in the vehicle. 4. Install the A/C suction line onto the A/C compressor (6). 5. Install the nut (4) that secures the A/C discharge line to the A/C compressor. Tighten the nut to 23 Nm (17 ft. lbs.). 6. Remove the tape or plugs from the opened suction line fitting and the accumulator tube. 7. Lubricate new rubber O-ring seals with clean refrigerant oil and install them onto the accumulator tube fitting. Use only the specified O-rings as they are made of a special material for the R-134a system. Use only refrigerant oil of the type recommended for the A/C compressor in the vehicle. 8. Connect the A/C suction line (6) to the spring-lock coupler (1) on the accumulator (5) and install the secondary retaining clip (7) See: Coupler HVAC/Service and Repair/Installation . 9. Install the air filter housing cover. 10. Reconnect the negative battery cable. 11. Evacuate the refrigerant system See: Service and Repair/Refrigerant System Evacuate . 12. Adjust the refrigerant oil level See: Service and Repair/Refrigerant Oil Level . 13. Charge the refrigerant system See: Service and Repair/Refrigerant System Charge . Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Housing Assembly HVAC > Component Information > Description and Operation Housing Assembly HVAC: Description and Operation DESCRIPTION All models are equipped with a common HVAC housing assembly that combines A/C and heating capabilities into a single unit mounted within the passenger compartment. The HVAC housing assembly consists of the following: - HVAC housing - The HVAC housing consists of an upper housing (7) and a lower housing (10) that are attached together by screws and is mounted to the dash panel behind the instrument panel. The HVAC housing contains the heater core (9), A/C evaporator (15), blend-air and modeair doors, and has mounting provisions for the air-door actuators (3, 5, 6 and 8), floor distribution duct (4), blower motor (13), blower motor resistor, foam seals (12, 14 and 16) and the HVAC wire harness (11). - Air inlet housing - The air inlet housing (1) is mounted to the right end of the HVAC housing and contains the recirculation-air door and has mounting provisions for the recirculation door actuator (2). The heating-A/C system is a blend-air type system. The blend-air doors control the amount of conditioned air that is allowed to flow through, or around, the heater core. The dual zone heating A/C system uses two blend door actuators while the single zone system uses only one blend door actuator. The A/C system is designed for the use of a non-CFC, R-134a refrigerant and uses an A/C evaporator to cool and dehumidify the incoming air prior to blending it with the heated air. A temperature control determines the discharge air temperature by operating the blend door actuator(s), which moves the blend-air door(s). This allows an almost immediate control of the output air temperature of the system. The mode door actuator operates the mode-air doors which direct the flow of the conditioned air out the various air outlets, depending on the mode selected. The recirculation door actuator operates the recirculation-air door which closes off the fresh air intake and recirculates the air already inside the vehicle. The electric door actuators are connected to the vehicle electrical system by the HVAC wire harness. The blower motor controls the velocity of air flowing through the HVAC housing assembly by spinning the blower wheel within the HVAC housings at the selected speed by use of the blower motor resistor. The HVAC housing must be removed from the vehicle and disassembled for service of the heater core, A/C evaporator, evaporator temperature sensor, blend-air and mode-air doors. The air inlet housing must be removed from HVAC housing and disassembled for service of the recirculation-air door. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Housing Assembly HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Replacement Housing Assembly HVAC: Removal and Replacement Air Inlet Housing Removal and Installation AIR INLET HOUSING WARNING: Refer to the applicable warnings and cautions for this system before performing the following operation See: Service Precautions Failure to follow these instructions may result in possible serious or fatal injury. WARNING: Disable the airbag system before attempting any steering wheel, steering column or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Disconnect and isolate the negative battery (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the airbag system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the airbag system. Failure to follow these instructions may result in accidental airbag deployment and possible serious or fatal injury. NOTE: The air inlet housing does not need to be removed from the HVAC housing for service of the recirculation-air door only See: Air Door NOTE: The air inlet housing does not need to be removed from the HVAC housing for service of the recirculation-air door only See: Air Door 1. Disconnect and isolate the negative battery cable. 2. Drain the engine cooling system. 3. Disconnect the heater hoses from the heater core tubes. 4. Remove the Powertrain Control Module (PCM) to gain access to the two nuts (3) that secure the HVAC housing (1) to the engine compartment side of the dash panel (2) and remove the nuts See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Engine Control Module 5. Remove the instrument panel from the passenger compartment See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim 6. Remove the bolt (5) that secures the HVAC housing (4) to the floor bracket (6). 7. Remove the two nuts (3 and 7) that secure the HVAC housing to the passenger compartment side of the dash panel (1). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Housing Assembly HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Replacement > Page 11991 8. Carefully pull the right side of the HVAC housing rearward to gain access to the front of the air inlet housing. 9. Remove the recirculation door actuator (1) from the air inlet housing (2) and disconnect the HVAC wire harness (4) from the actuator. 10. Remove the two screws (3) that secure the rear of the air inlet housing to the top of the HVAC housing (5). 11. Release the two retaining clips (1) that secure the front of the air inlet housing (2) to the top of the HVAC housing (3) and remove the air inlet housing. NOTE:If the foam seal on the air inlet housing is deformed or damaged, it must be replaced. 12. If required, disassemble the air inlet housing See: Overhaul Installation NOTE: If the foam seal on the air Inlet housing is deformed or damaged, it must be replaced. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Housing Assembly HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Replacement > Page 11992 1. Position the air inlet housing (2) onto the top of the HVAC housing (3). 2. Engage the two retaining clips (1) that secure the front of the air inlet housing to the HVAC housing. 3. Install the two screws (3) that secure the rear of the air inlet housing (2) to the top of the HVAC housing (5). Tighten the screws to 1.1 N.m (10 in. lbs.). 4. Install the recirculation door actuator (1) onto the air inlet housing See: Air Door 5. Connect the HVAC wire harness (4) to the recirculation door actuator. 6. If removed, install the fresh air inlet (2) onto the dash panel (1). 7. Reposition the HVAC housing (4) to the passenger compartment with the mounting studs and the condensate drain tube in their proper locations in the dash panel. 8. Install the two nuts (3 and 7) that secure the HVAC housing to the passenger compartment side of the dash panel. Tighten the nuts to 6.8 N.m (60 in. lbs.). 9. Install the bolt (5) that secures the HVAC housing to the floor bracket (6). Tighten the bolt to 6.8 N.m (60 in.lbs.). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Housing Assembly HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Replacement > Page 11993 10. Install the instrument panel assembly See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim 11. Install the two nuts (3) that secure the HVAC housing (1) to the engine compartment side of the dash panel (2). Tighten the nuts to 6.8 N.m (60 in. lbs.). 12. Install the Powertrain Control Module See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Engine Control Module 13. Connect the heater hoses to the heater core tubes. 14. Reconnect the negative battery cable. 15. Refill the engine cooling system See: Engine, Cooling and Exhaust/Cooling System 16. Initiate the Actuator Calibration function using a scan tool See: Testing and Inspection HVAC Housing - Removal and Installation HVAC HOUSING ASSEMBLY WARNING: Refer to the applicable warnings and cautions for this system before performing the following operation See: Service Precautions/Warning and See: Service Precautions/Caution. Failure to follow the warnings and cautions could result in possible personal injury or death. WARNING: Disable the airbag system before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Disconnect and isolate the negative battery (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the airbag system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the airbag system. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment and possible personal injury or death. NOTE: The HVAC housing must be removed from the vehicle and disassembled for service of the A/C evaporator, evaporator temperature sensor, mode-air and blend-air doors. 1. Disconnect and isolate the negative battery cable. 2. Recover the refrigerant from the refrigerant system See: Service and Repair/Refrigerant System Recovery . 3. Drain the engine cooling system See: Engine, Cooling and Exhaust/Cooling System/Service and Repair . 4. Disconnect the A/C liquid line and the A/C accumulator from the A/C evaporator See: Hose/Line HVAC/Service and Repair/A/C Line - Removal and See: Accumulator HVAC/Service and Repair/Removal . Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Housing Assembly HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Replacement > Page 11994 5. Disconnect the heater hoses from the heater core tubes. 6. Remove the powertrain control module (PCM) to gain access to the two nuts (3) that secure the HVAC housing (1) to the engine compartment side of the dash panel (2) and remove the nuts See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Engine Control Module/Service and Repair/Powertrain Control Module - Removal . 7. On Mega Cab models, remove the floor console duct See: Air Duct/Service and Repair/Floor Console Ducts/Removal . 8. Remove the instrument panel from the passenger compartment See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Service and Repair/Instrument Panel - Removal . 9. Remove the bolt (5) that secures the HVAC housing (4) to the floor bracket (6). 10. Remove the two nuts (3 and 7) that secure the HVAC housing to the passenger compartment side of the dash panel (1). 11. Pull the HVAC housing assembly rearward and remove the housing assembly from the passenger compartment. 12. If required, remove the fresh air inlet (2) from the dash panel (1). HVAC Housing - Installation HVAC HOUSING ASSEMBLY CAUTION: Be certain to adjust the refrigerant oil level when servicing the A/C refrigerant system See: Service and Repair/Refrigerant Oil Level. Failure to properly adjust the refrigerant oil level will prevent the A/C system from operating as designed and can cause serious A/C compressor damage. NOTE: When replacing multiple A/C system components, refer to the Refrigerant Oil Capacities chart to determine how much oil should be added to the refrigerant system See: Service and Repair/Refrigerant Oil Level. NOTE: If the A/C evaporator is being replaced, add 60 milliliters (2 fluid ounces) of refrigerant oil to the refrigerant system. Use only refrigerant oil of the type recommended for the A/C compressor in the vehicle. NOTE: Replacement of the refrigerant line O-ring seals and gaskets is required anytime a refrigerant line is opened. Failure to replace the rubber O-ring seals and metal gaskets could result in a refrigerant system leak. 1. If removed, install the fresh air inlet (2) onto the dash panel (1). 2. Position the HVAC housing assembly (4) into the passenger compartment with the mounting studs and the condensate drain tube in their proper Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Housing Assembly HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Replacement > Page 11995 locations in the dash panel. 3. Install the two nuts (3 and 7) that secure the HVAC housing to the passenger compartment side of the dash panel. Tighten the nuts to 6.8 Nm (60 in. lbs.). 4. Install the bolt (5) that secures the HVAC housing to the floor bracket (6). Tighten the bolt to 6.8 Nm (60 in. lbs.). 5. Install the instrument panel assembly See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Service and Repair/Instrument Panel - Installation . 6. On Mega Cab models, install the floor console duct See: Air Duct/Service and Repair/Floor Console Ducts/Installation . 7. Install the two nuts (3) that secure the HVAC housing (1) to the engine compartment side of the dash panel (2). Tighten the nuts to 6.8 Nm (60 in. lbs.). 8. Install the powertrain control module (PCM) See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Engine Control Module/Service and Repair/Powertrain Control Module - Installation . 9. Connect the heater hoses to the heater core tubes. 10. Connect the A/C liquid line and the A/C accumulator to the A/C evaporator See: Hose/Line HVAC/Service and Repair/A/C Line - Installation and See: Accumulator HVAC/Service and Repair/Installation . 11. Reconnect the negative battery cable. 12. If the heater core is being replaced, flush the cooling system See: Engine, Cooling and Exhaust/Cooling System/Service and Repair . 13. Refill the engine cooling system See: Engine, Cooling and Exhaust/Cooling System/Service and Repair . 14. Evacuate the refrigerant system See: Service and Repair/Refrigerant System Evacuate . 15. If the A/C evaporator is being replaced, add 60 milliliters (2 fluid ounces) of refrigerant oil to the refrigerant system. When replacing multiple A/C system components, refer to the Refrigerant Oil Capacities chart to determine how much oil should be added to the refrigerant system See: Service and Repair/Refrigerant Oil Level . Use only refrigerant oil of the type recommended for the A/C compressor in the vehicle. 16. Charge the refrigerant system See: Service and Repair/Refrigerant System Charge . Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Housing Assembly HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Replacement > Page 11996 Housing Assembly HVAC: Overhaul Air Inlet Housing AIR INLET HOUSING NOTE: The air inlet housing must be removed from HVAC housing and disassembled for service of the recirculation-air door. 1. Remove the air inlet housing (1) from the HVAC housing and place it on a workbench See: Removal and Replacement/HVAC Housing Removal and Installation 2. Remove the two foam insulators (2) from the air inlet housing. 3. To remove the recirculation-air door (1) from the air inlet housing (2), first carefully release the retaining tabs of actuator coupler (3) located on the inside surface of the air inlet housing and pull the actuator coupler out of the pivot shaft of the recirculation-air door. NOTE: If the seals on the air door is deformed or damaged, the air door must be replaced. 4. Remove the recirculation-air door from the air inlet housing. HVAC Housing HVAC HOUSING NOTE: The HVAC housing must be removed from the vehicle and disassembled for service of the A/C evaporator, evaporator temperature sensor, mode-air and blend-air doors. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Housing Assembly HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Replacement > Page 11997 1. Remove the HVAC housing assembly and place it on a workbench See: Removal and Replacement/HVAC Housing - Removal and Installation . 2. Disconnect the HVAC wire harness connectors from the mode door actuators (1), blend door actuators (2) and the recirculation door actuator (3). 3. Remove the screws that secure the mode door actuators and the blend door actuators to the HVAC housing (5) and remove the actuators. 4. Remove the screws that secure the recirculation door actuator to the air inlet housing (4) and remove the actuator. 5. Disconnect the wire harness connectors (1 and 3) from the blower motor resistor (7) and the blower motor (2). 6. Remove the screws (4) that secure the blower motor to the HVAC housing (5) and remove the blower motor. 7. Remove the screws (6) that secure the blower motor resistor to the HVAC housing and remove the resistor. 8. Disconnect the HVAC wire harness (1) from the evaporator temperature sensor (2) and remove the wiring harness and the sensor from the HVAC housing (4). 9. Remove the air inlet housing (3) from the HVAC housing See: Removal and Replacement/HVAC Housing - Removal and Installation . Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Housing Assembly HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Replacement > Page 11998 10. Remove the two screws (1) that secure the panel/floor door outlet (2) to the top of the HVAC housing (4). NOTE: If the foam seal on the panel/floor door outlet is deformed or damaged, it must be replaced. 11. Release the two retaining tabs (3) that secure the panel/floor door outlet to the front of the HVAC housing and remove the door outlet. 12. Remove the three screws (1) that secure the panel/floor door assembly (2) to the top of the HVAC housing (3) and remove the door assembly. 13. To remove the panel/floor-air doors (1) from the panel/floor door plate (2), first carefully release the retaining tabs of actuator coupler (3) located on the inside surface of the door plate and pull the actuator coupler out of the pivot shaft of the panel/floor-air doors. NOTE: If the seals on the air doors is deformed or damaged, the air doors must be replaced. 14. Remove the panel/floor-air doors from the panel/floor door plate. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Housing Assembly HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Replacement > Page 11999 NOTE: If the foam seal for the heater core tubes is deformed or damaged, the seal must be replaced. 15. Remove the foam seal from the heater core tubes. 16. If equipped with the dual zone heating-A/C system, remove the linkage rod (4) to gain access to the heater core (3). 17. Remove the two screws (1) that secure the heater core tube bracket (2) to the HVAC housing and remove the bracket. 18. Carefully pull the heater core out of the front of the HVAC housing. 19. Inspect all heater core foam seals and replace as required. 20. Remove the screws (3) that secure the floor distribution duct (1) to the bottom of the HVAC housing (2). 21. Remove the floor distribution duct from the HVAC housing. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Housing Assembly HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Replacement > Page 12000 22. Carefully disconnect the linkage rod (1) from the two blend-air door levers (2) located on the back of the HVAC housing (3). NOTE: If the foam seal for the evaporator condensate drain tube is deformed or damaged, the seal must be replaced. 23. Remove the foam seal (4) from the evaporator condensate drain tube (5). 24. Remove the fifteen screws (6) that secure the upper and lower HVAC housing halves together and separate the housing halves. 25. Release the three retaining tabs (1) that secure the lower blend door assembly (2) to the lower half of the HVAC housing (3) and remove the door assembly. 26. Release the three retaining tabs that secure the upper blend door assembly to the upper half of the HVAC housing and remove the door assembly. 27. To remove the blend-air doors (1) from each blend door plate (2), first carefully release the retaining tabs of actuator coupler (3) located on the inside surface of the door plate being serviced and pull the actuator coupler out of the pivot shaft of the blend-air doors. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Housing Assembly HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Replacement > Page 12001 NOTE: If the seals on the air doors is deformed or damaged, the air doors must be replaced. 28. Remove the blend-air doors from the blend door plates. 29. Remove the defroster-air doors (1) from the lower half of the HVAC housing (2) by carefully release the retaining tabs of actuator coupler (3) located on the inside surface of the housing and pull the actuator coupler out of the pivot shaft of the defroster-air doors. NOTE: If the seals on the air doors is deformed or damaged, the air doors must be replaced. 30. Remove the defroster-air doors from the HVAC housing. NOTE: If the foam seal for the A/C evaporator tubes is deformed or damaged, the seal must be replaced. 31. Remove the foam seal (1) from around the tubes of the A/C evaporator (3). 32. Carefully lift the A/C evaporator out of the upper half of the HVAC housing (2). Air Inlet Housing AIR INLET HOUSING NOTE: The air inlet housing must be removed from HVAC housing and disassembled for service of the recirculation-air door. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Housing Assembly HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Replacement > Page 12002 NOTE: If the seals on the air door is deformed or damaged, the air door must be replaced. 1. Position the recirculation-air door (1) into the air inlet housing (2). CAUTION: Make sure that the recirculation-air door pivot shaft is properly seated in the pivot seat located in the air inlet housing. 2. Align the actuator coupler (3) with the recirculation-air door pivot shaft and install the coupler until the coupler retaining tabs are fully engaged to the air inlet housing. Be sure to install the coupler with the coupler arm located between the two stop tabs on the air inlet housing. 3. Install the two foam insulators (2) into the air inlet housing (1). 4. Install the air inlet housing onto the HVAC housing See: Removal and Replacement/HVAC Housing - Installation . HVAC Housing HVAC HOUSING CAUTION: Be certain to adjust the refrigerant oil level when servicing the A/C refrigerant system See: Service and Repair/Refrigerant Oil Level. Failure to properly adjust the refrigerant oil level will prevent the A/C system from operating as designed and can cause serious A/C compressor damage. NOTE: When replacing multiple A/C system components, refer to the Refrigerant Oil Capacities chart to determine how much oil should be added to the refrigerant system See: Service and Repair/Refrigerant Oil Level. NOTE: If only the A/C evaporator is being replaced, add 60 milliliters (2 fluid ounces) of refrigerant oil to the refrigerant system. Use only refrigerant oil of the type recommended for the A/C compressor in the vehicle. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Housing Assembly HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Replacement > Page 12003 1. Carefully install the A/C evaporator (3) into the upper half of the HVAC housing (2). 2. Install the foam seal (1) onto the tubes of the A/C evaporator. 3. Install the defroster-air doors (1) into the lower half of the HVAC housing (2). 4. Align the actuator coupler (3) with the defroster-air door pivot shaft and install the coupler into side of the HVAC housing. Be sure to install the coupler with the coupler arm located between the two stop tabs on the HVAC housing. 5. Install the blend-air doors (1) into each of the two blend door plates (2). 6. Align the actuator coupler (3) with each blend-air door pivot shaft and install the coupler into side of each blend door plate. Be sure to install each coupler with the coupler arm located between the two stop tabs on each blend door plate. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Housing Assembly HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Replacement > Page 12004 7. Position the lower blend door assembly (2) into the lower half of the HVAC housing (3) and fully engage the three retaining tabs (1). 8. Position the upper blend door assembly into the upper half of the HVAC housing and fully engage the three retaining tabs. NOTE: Route the wire lead for the evaporator temperature sensor into the opening located on the upper half of the HVAC housing prior to installing the lower half of the HVAC housing. 9. Position the two halves of the HVAC housing together (3). 10. Install the fifteen screws (6) that secure the two housing halves together. Tighten the screws to 1.1 Nm (10 in. lbs.). 11. Install the foam seal (4) onto the evaporator condensate drain tube (5). 12. Connect the linkage rod (1) to the two blend-air door levers (2) located on the back of the HVAC housing. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Housing Assembly HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Replacement > Page 12005 13. Position the front floor distribution duct (1) to the bottom of the HVAC housing (2). 14. Install the screws (3) that secure the front floor distribution duct to the HVAC housing. Tighten the screws to 1.1 Nm (10 in. lbs.). 15. Carefully install the heater core (3) into the front of the HVAC housing. 16. Position the heater core tube bracket (2) onto the HVAC housing. 17. Install the two screws (1) that secure the heater core bracket to the HVAC housing. Tighten the screws to 1.1 Nm (10 in. lbs.). 18. If equipped with the dual zone heating-A/C system, install the linkage rod (4). 19. Install the foam seal onto the heater core tubes. 20. Install the panel/floor-air doors (1) into the panel/floor door plate (2). 21. Align the actuator coupler (3) with the panel/floor-air door pivot shaft and install the coupler into side of the panel/floor door plate. Be sure to install the coupler with the coupler arm located between the two stop tabs on the door plate. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Housing Assembly HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Replacement > Page 12006 22. Position the panel/floor door assembly (2) onto the top of the HVAC housing (3). NOTE: Install the two door springs onto the retaining screws prior to installation. 23. Install the three screws (2) that secure the door assembly to the HVAC housing. Tighten the screws to 1.1 Nm (10 in. lbs.). 24. Position the panel/floor door outlet (2) onto the top of the HVAC housing (3) and fully engage the two retaining tabs (3). 25. Install the two screws (1) that secure the panel/floor door outlet to the HVAC housing. Tighten the screws to 1.1 Nm (10 in. lbs.). 26. Install the air inlet housing (3) onto the top of the HVAC housing (4) See: Removal and Replacement/HVAC Housing - Installation . 27. Install the HVAC wire harness (1) onto the HVAC housing. Make sure the wires are routed through all wiring retainers. 28. Install the evaporator temperature sensor (2) into the opening in the top of the HVAC housing. Make sure the sensor is fully engage to the housing. 29. Connect the HVAC wire harness to the evaporator temperature sensor. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Housing Assembly HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Replacement > Page 12007 30. Position the blower motor resistor (7) and the blower motor (2) into the bottom of the HVAC housing (5). 31. Install the screws (4) that secure the blower motor to the HVAC housing. Tighten the screws to 1.7 Nm (15 in. lbs.). 32. Install the screws (6) that secure the blower motor resistor to the HVAC housing. Tighten the screws to 1.1 Nm (10 in. lbs.). 33. Connect the HVAC wire harness connectors (1 and 3) to blower motor resistor and the blower motor. 34. Position the recirculation door actuator (3) onto the air inlet housing (4) and install the retaining screws. Tighten the screws to 1.1 Nm (10 in. lbs.) 35. Position the mode door actuators (1) and the blend door actuators (2) onto the HVAC housing (5) and install the retaining screws. Tighten the screws to 1.1 Nm (10 in. lbs.). 36. Connect the HVAC wire harness connectors to the actuators. 37. Install the HVAC housing See: Removal and Replacement/HVAC Housing - Installation . 38. If the A/C evaporator is being replaced, add 60 milliliters (2 fluid ounces) of refrigerant oil to the refrigerant system. When replacing multiple A/C system components, refer to the Refrigerant Oil Capacities chart to determine how much oil should be added to the refrigerant system See: Service and Repair/Refrigerant Oil Level . Use only refrigerant oil of the type recommended for the A/C compressor in the vehicle. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Refrigerant > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications Refrigerant: Capacity Specifications REFRIGERANT CHARGE LEVEL Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Refrigerant > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications > Page 12012 Refrigerant: Fluid Type Specifications A/C SYSTEM Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Refrigerant > Component Information > Description and Operation > A/C Refrigerant Refrigerant: Description and Operation A/C Refrigerant A/C REFRIGERANT The refrigerant used in this air conditioning system is a HydroFluoroCarbon (HFC), type R-134a. Unlike R-12, which is a ChloroFluoroCarbon (CFC), R-134a refrigerant does not contain ozone-depleting chlorine. R-134a refrigerant is a non-toxic, non-flammable, clear and colorless liquefied gas. CAUTION: R-134a refrigerant is not compatible with R-12 refrigerant in an A/C system. Even a small amount of R-12 refrigerant added to an R-134a refrigerant system will cause A/C compressor failure. The A/C refrigerant system is filled-for-life at the factory and requires no regular maintenance. Although not required at specific intervals, the charge level should be checked if system performance deteriorates or if a noise or leak is suspected See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/Refrigerant System Leaks . Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Refrigerant > Component Information > Description and Operation > A/C Refrigerant > Page 12015 Refrigerant: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The refrigerant used in this air conditioning system is a HydroFluoroCarbon (HFC), type R-134a. Unlike R-12, which is a ChloroFluoroCarbon (CFC), R-134a refrigerant does not contain ozone-depleting chlorine. R-134a refrigerant is a non-toxic, non-flammable, clear, and colorless liquefied gas. Even though R-134a does not contain chlorine, it must be reclaimed and recycled just like CFC-type refrigerants. This is because R-134a is a greenhouse gas and can contribute to global warming See: Service and Repair/Refrigerant System Recovery . Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Refrigerant > Component Information > Description and Operation > A/C Refrigerant > Page 12016 Refrigerant: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION R-134a refrigerant is not compatible with R-12 refrigerant in an A/C system. Even a small amount of R-12 refrigerant added to an R-134a refrigerant system will cause A/C compressor failure, refrigerant oil sludge or poor A/C system performance. In addition, the polyalkylene glycol (PAG) synthetic refrigerant oils used in an R-134a refrigerant system are not compatible with the mineral-based refrigerant oils used in an R-12 refrigerant system. R-134a refrigerant system service ports, service tool couplers and refrigerant dispensing bottles have all been designed with unique fittings to ensure that an R-134a refrigerant system is not accidentally contaminated with the wrong refrigerant (R-12). There are also labels posted in the engine compartment of the vehicle and on the A/C compressor to identify that the A/C system is equipped with R-134a refrigerant. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Refrigerant > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 12017 Refrigerant: Testing and Inspection REFRIGERANT SYSTEM LEAKS WARNING: R-134a service equipment or vehicle A/C system should not be pressure tested or leak tested with compressed air. Mixture of air and R-134a can be combustible at elevated pressures. These mixtures are potentially dangerous and may result in fire or explosion causing property damage and serious or fatal injury. Avoid breathing A/C refrigerant and lubricant vapor or mist. Exposure may irritate eyes, nose and throat. Use only approved service equipment meeting SAE requirements to discharge an R-134a system. If accidental system discharge occurs, ventilate work area before resuming service. NOTE: If the A/C refrigerant system charge is empty or low, a leak in the A/C system is likely. Visually inspect all A/C lines, fittings and components for an oily residue. Oil residue can be an indicator of an A/C system leak location. NOTE: The only way to correctly determine if the refrigerant system is fully charged with R-134a is to completely evacuate and recharge the A/C system. Connect a suitable manifold gauge set and determine if the static A/C system pressure is above or below 345 kPa (50 psi) See: Tools and Equipment/Refrigerant System Service Equipment . If less than 345 kPa (50 psi), proceed to SYSTEM EMPTY. If greater than 345 kPa (50 psi), go to SYSTEM LOW. SYSTEM EMPTY 1. Evacuate the refrigerant system to the lowest degree of vacuum possible (approximately -88 kPa (- 26 in. Hg) or greater vacuum) See: Service and Repair/Refrigerant System Evacuate . Determine if the system holds a vacuum for 15 minutes. If vacuum is held, a leak is probably not present. If system will not maintain vacuum level, proceed to STEP 2. 2. Prepare and dispense 0.284 kilograms (10 ounces) of R-134a refrigerant into the evacuated refrigerant system See: Service and Repair/Refrigerant System Charge and proceed to STEP 1 of the System Low procedure. SYSTEM LOW 3. Position the vehicle in a wind-free work area. This will aid in detecting small leaks. 4. Operate the heating-A/C system with the engine at idle under the following conditions for at least 5 minutes. - Doors or windows open - Transmission in Park or Neutral with the parking brake set (depending on application) - A/C-heater controls set to outside air, full cool, panel mode, high blower and with A/C compressor engaged CAUTION: A leak detector only designed for R-12 refrigerant will not detect leaks in an R-134a refrigerant system. 5. Shut the vehicle Off and wait 2-7 minutes. Then use an electronic leak detector that is designed to detect R-134a refrigerant and search for leaks. Fittings, lines or components that appear to be oily usually indicate a refrigerant leak. To inspect the A/C evaporator for leaks, insert the leak detector probe into the drain tube opening or an air outlet. A dye for R-134a is available to aid in leak detection. Use only DaimlerChrysler approved refrigerant dye. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Refrigerant > Component Information > Service and Repair > Refrigerant System - Evacuate Refrigerant: Service and Repair Refrigerant System - Evacuate REFRIGERANT SYSTEM EVACUATE NOTE: Special effort must be used to prevent moisture from entering the A/C system oil. Moisture in the oil is very difficult to remove and will cause a reliability problem with the A/C compressor. If an A/C compressor designed to use R-134a refrigerant is left open to the atmosphere for an extended period of time. It is recommended that the refrigerant oil be drained and replaced with new oil or a new A/C compressor be used. This will eliminate the possibility of contaminating the refrigerant system. If the refrigerant system has been open to the atmosphere, it must be evacuated before the system can be filled. Moisture and air mixed with the refrigerant will raise the compressor head pressure above acceptable operating levels. This will reduce the performance of the A/C system and damage the A/C compressor. Moisture will boil at near room temperature when exposed to vacuum. To evacuate the refrigerant system: NOTE: When connecting the service equipment coupling to the line fitting, verify that the valve of the coupling is fully closed. This will reduce the amount of effort required to make the connection. 1. Recover the refrigerant system See: Service and Repair/Refrigerant System Recovery . 2. Connect a suitable charging station, refrigerant recovery machine or a manifold gauge set with vacuum pump and refrigerant recovery equipment See: Tools and Equipment/Refrigerant System Service Equipment . 3. Open the suction and discharge valves and start the vacuum pump. The vacuum pump should run a minimum of 45 minutes prior to charge to eliminate all moisture in system. When the suction gauge reads to the lowest degree of vacuum possible (approximately -88 kPa (- 26 in. Hg) or greater) for 30 minutes, close all valves and turn off vacuum pump. If the system fails to reach specified vacuum, the refrigerant system likely has a leak that must be corrected. If the refrigerant system maintains specified vacuum for at least 30 minutes, start the vacuum pump, open the suction and discharge valves. Then allow the system to evacuate an additional 10 minutes. 4. Close all valves. Turn off and disconnect the vacuum pump. 5. Charge the refrigerant system See: Service and Repair/Refrigerant System Charge . Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Refrigerant > Component Information > Service and Repair > Refrigerant System - Evacuate > Page 12020 Refrigerant: Service and Repair Refrigerant System - Charge REFRIGERANT SYSTEM CHARGE WARNING: Refer to the applicable warnings and cautions for this system before performing the following operation See: Service Precautions/Warning and See: Service Precautions/Caution. Failure to follow the warnings and cautions may result in serious or fatal injury. NOTE: The Underhood HVAC Specification Label contains the refrigerant fill specification of the vehicle being serviced. After all refrigerant system leaks have been repaired and the refrigerant system has been evacuated, a refrigerant charge can be injected into the system or the Underhood HVAC Specification Label for the proper amount of the refrigerant charge. See: Specifications/Capacity Specifications . An R-134a refrigerant recovery/recycling/charging station that meets SAE Standard J2210 must be used to charge the refrigerant system with R-134a refrigerant. Refer to the operating instructions supplied by the equipment manufacturer for proper care and use of this equipment. CHARGING PROCEDURE CAUTION: A small amount of refrigerant oil is removed from the A/C system each time the refrigerant system is recovered and evacuated. Before charging the A/C system, you MUST replenish any oil lost during the recovery process. Refer the equipment manufacturer instructions for more information. 1. Evacuate the refrigerant system See: Service and Repair/Refrigerant System Evacuate . 2. Connect an R-134a refrigerant recovery/recycling/charging station that meets SAE standard J2210 to the refrigerant system. 3. Refer to A/C SPECIFICATIONS or the Underhood HVAC Specification Label for the proper amount of the refrigerant charge. 4. Measure the proper amount of refrigerant and heat it to 52° C (125° F) with the charging station. See the operating instructions supplied by the equipment manufacturer for proper use of this equipment. 5. Open both the suction and discharge valves, then open the charge valve to allow the heated refrigerant to flow into the system. 6. When the transfer of refrigerant has stopped, close both the suction and discharge valves. 7. If all of the refrigerant charge did not transfer from the dispensing device, open all of the windows in the vehicle and set the heating-A/C system controls so that the A/C compressor is engaged and the blower motor is operating at its lowest speed setting. Run the engine at a steady high idle (about 1400 rpm). If the A/C compressor does not engage, test the compressor clutch circuits and repair as required. WARNING: Take care not to open the discharge (high pressure) valve at this time. Failure to follow this warning may result in serious or fatal injury. 8. Open the low-side valve to allow the remaining refrigerant to transfer to the refrigerant system. 9. Disconnect the charging station from the refrigerant system service ports. 10. Reinstall the caps onto the refrigerant system service ports. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Refrigerant > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 12021 Refrigerant: Tools and Equipment REFRIGERANT SYSTEM SERVICE EQUIPMENT WARNING: Eye protection must be worn when servicing an A/C refrigerant system. Turn all valves off (rotate clockwise) on the equipment being used before connecting or disconnecting service equipment from the refrigerant system. Failure to observe these warnings may result in personal injury or death. WARNING: Refer to the applicable warnings and cautions for this system before performing the following operation See: Service Precautions/Warning and See: Service Precautions/Caution. Failure to follow the warnings and cautions could result in possible personal injury or death. When servicing the A/C system, an R-134a refrigerant recovery/recycling/charging station (1) that meets SAE standard J2210 must be used. Contact an automotive service equipment supplier for refrigerant recovery/recycling/charging equipment. Refer to the operating instructions supplied by the equipment manufacturer for proper care and use of this equipment. A manifold gauge set (1) may be needed with some recovery/recycling/charging equipment. The manifold gauge set should have manual shut-off valves (2 and 6), or automatic back-flow valves located at the service port connector end of the manifold gauge set hoses (4 and 5). This will prevent refrigerant from being released into the atmosphere. MANIFOLD GAUGE SET CONNECTIONS CAUTION: Do not use an R-12 manifold gauge set on an R-134a system. The refrigerants are not compatible and system damage will result. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Refrigerant > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 12022 RECOVERY/RECYCLING/EVACUATION/CHARGING HOSE - The center manifold hose (Yellow, or White, with Black stripe) (3) is used to recover, evacuate, and charge the refrigerant system. When the low or high pressure valves on the manifold gauge set are opened, the refrigerant in the system will escape through this hose. HIGH PRESSURE GAUGE HOSE - The high pressure hose (Red with Black stripe) (4) attaches to the high side service port. This service port is located on the A/C discharge line. On this model, an A/C pressure transducer is installed on the high side service port. A/C high-side pressures can be read using a scan tool. LOW PRESSURE GAUGE HOSE - The low pressure hose (Blue with Black stripe) (5) attaches to the low side service port. This service port is located either on the top of the A/C accumulator or on the A/C suction line near the accumulator, depending on engine application. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Refrigerant Oil > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications Refrigerant Oil: Capacity Specifications REFRIGERANT OIL LEVEL When an A/C system is assembled at the factory, all components except the A/C compressor are refrigerant oil free. After the refrigerant system has been charged and operated, the refrigerant oil in the A/C compressor is dispersed throughout the refrigerant system. The accumulator, A/C evaporator, A/C condenser and the A/C compressor will each retain a significant amount of the needed refrigerant oil. It is important to have the correct amount of refrigerant oil in the A/C system. This ensures proper lubrication of the A/C compressor. Too little oil will result in damage to the A/C compressor, while too much oil will reduce the cooling capacity of the A/C system and consequently result in higher discharge air temperatures. CAUTION: The refrigerant oil in the R-134a A/C system is unique depending on the A/C compressor used. Use only PAG oils that are designed to work with R-134a refrigerant and the A/C compressor in the vehicle. Always refer to the A/C Underhood Specification Label for the correct oil designation. The oil container should be kept tightly capped until it is ready for use and then tightly capped after use to prevent contamination from dirt and moisture. Refrigerant oil will quickly absorb any moisture it comes in contact with, therefore, special effort must be used to keep all R-134a system components moisture-free. Moisture in the refrigerant oil is very difficult to remove and will cause a reliability problem with the A/C compressor. NOTE: Most reclaim/recycling equipment will measure the lubricant being removed during recovery. This amount of lubricant should be added back into the system. It will not be necessary to check the oil level in the A/C compressor or to add oil, unless there has been an oil loss. An oil loss may occur due to a rupture or leak from a refrigerant line, a connector fitting, a component, or a component seal. If a leak occurs, add 30 milliliters (1 fluid ounce) of refrigerant oil to the refrigerant system after the repair has been made. Refrigerant oil loss will be evident at the leak point by the presence of a wet, shiny surface around the leak. Refrigerant oil must be added when an A/C accumulator, A/C evaporator or A/C condenser is replaced. See the Refrigerant Oil Capacities chart. The refrigerant oil level in a new A/C compressor must first be adjusted prior to compressor installation (refer to COMPRESSOR OIL DRAIN PROCEDURE). COMPRESSOR OIL DRAIN PROCEDURE CAUTION: Be certain to adjust the refrigerant system oil level when replacing an A/C compressor. Failure to properly drain and measure the refrigerant oil from the A/C compressor can prevent the A/C system from operating as designed and cause serious compressor damage. The A/C compressor is filled with refrigerant oil from the factory. Use the following procedure to drain and measure refrigerant oil from the A/C compressor. 1. Drain all of the refrigerant oil from the old A/C compressor into a clean measured container. 2. Drain all of the refrigerant oil from the new A/C compressor into a clean measured container. 3. Refill the new A/C compressor with the same amount of refrigerant oil that was drained out of the old compressor. Use only clean refrigerant oil of the type recommended for the A/C compressor in the vehicle. 4. Install the new A/C compressor onto the engine See: Compressor HVAC/Service and Repair/A/C Compressor - Installation . Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Refrigerant Oil > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications > Page 12027 Refrigerant Oil: Fluid Type Specifications A/C SYSTEM Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Refrigerant Oil > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Refrigerant Oil: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The refrigerant oil used in R-134a refrigerant systems is a synthetic-based, polyalkylene glycol (PAG), wax-free lubricant. Mineral-based R-12 refrigerant oils are not compatible with PAG oils, and should never be introduced to an R-134a refrigerant system. There are different PAG oils available, and each contains a different additive package. Use only refrigerant oil of the same type as recommended to service the refrigerant system (always refer to the specification tag included with the replacement A/C compressor or the A/C Underhood Specification Label located in the engine compartment). The Denso 10S17 A/C compressor used in this vehicle when equipped with the 3.7L, 4.7L or 5.7L engine is designed to use ND-8 PAG refrigerant oil. Use only this type of refrigerant oil when servicing the A/C compressor for these engines. The Visteon HS-18 A/C compressor used in this vehicle when equipped with 5.9L or 6.7L diesel engine is designed to use VC-46 PAG refrigerant oil. Use only this type of refrigerant oil when servicing this A/C compressor. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Refrigerant Oil > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 12030 Refrigerant Oil: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION After performing any refrigerant recovery or recycling operation, always replenish the refrigerant system with the same amount of the recommended refrigerant oil as was removed. Too little refrigerant oil can cause A/C compressor damage, and too much can reduce A/C system performance. PAG refrigerant oil is more hygroscopic than mineral oil, and will absorb any moisture it comes into contact with, even moisture in the air. The PAG oil container should always be kept tightly capped until it is ready to be used. After use, recap the oil container immediately to prevent moisture contamination. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Refrigerant Oil > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 12031 Refrigerant Oil: Service and Repair REFRIGERANT OIL LEVEL When an A/C system is assembled at the factory, all components except the A/C compressor are refrigerant oil free. After the refrigerant system has been charged and operated, the refrigerant oil in the A/C compressor is dispersed throughout the refrigerant system. The accumulator, A/C evaporator, A/C condenser and the A/C compressor will each retain a significant amount of the needed refrigerant oil. It is important to have the correct amount of refrigerant oil in the A/C system. This ensures proper lubrication of the A/C compressor. Too little oil will result in damage to the A/C compressor, while too much oil will reduce the cooling capacity of the A/C system and consequently result in higher discharge air temperatures. CAUTION: The refrigerant oil in the R-134a A/C system is unique depending on the A/C compressor used. Use only PAG oils that are designed to work with R-134a refrigerant and the A/C compressor in the vehicle. Always refer to the A/C Underhood Specification Label for the correct oil designation. The oil container should be kept tightly capped until it is ready for use and then tightly capped after use to prevent contamination from dirt and moisture. Refrigerant oil will quickly absorb any moisture it comes in contact with, therefore, special effort must be used to keep all R-134a system components moisture-free. Moisture in the refrigerant oil is very difficult to remove and will cause a reliability problem with the A/C compressor. NOTE: Most reclaim/recycling equipment will measure the lubricant being removed during recovery. This amount of lubricant should be added back into the system. It will not be necessary to check the oil level in the A/C compressor or to add oil, unless there has been an oil loss. An oil loss may occur due to a rupture or leak from a refrigerant line, a connector fitting, a component, or a component seal. If a leak occurs, add 30 milliliters (1 fluid ounce) of refrigerant oil to the refrigerant system after the repair has been made. Refrigerant oil loss will be evident at the leak point by the presence of a wet, shiny surface around the leak. Refrigerant oil must be added when an A/C accumulator, A/C evaporator or A/C condenser is replaced. See the Refrigerant Oil Capacities chart. The refrigerant oil level in a new A/C compressor must first be adjusted prior to compressor installation (refer to COMPRESSOR OIL DRAIN PROCEDURE). COMPRESSOR OIL DRAIN PROCEDURE CAUTION: Be certain to adjust the refrigerant system oil level when replacing an A/C compressor. Failure to properly drain and measure the refrigerant oil from the A/C compressor can prevent the A/C system from operating as designed and cause serious compressor damage. The A/C compressor is filled with refrigerant oil from the factory. Use the following procedure to drain and measure refrigerant oil from the A/C compressor. 1. Drain all of the refrigerant oil from the old A/C compressor into a clean measured container. 2. Drain all of the refrigerant oil from the new A/C compressor into a clean measured container. 3. Refill the new A/C compressor with the same amount of refrigerant oil that was drained out of the old compressor. Use only clean refrigerant oil of the type recommended for the A/C compressor in the vehicle. 4. Install the new A/C compressor onto the engine See: Compressor HVAC/Service and Repair/A/C Compressor - Installation . Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch, HVAC > Component Information > Locations Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch: Locations Component ID: 520 Component : TRANSDUCER-A/C PRESSURE Connector: Name : TRANSDUCER-A/C PRESSURE Color : BLACK # of pins : 4 Qualifier : (5.9L) Pin Circuit Description 1 C918 18BK/LB A/C PRESSURE GROUND 2 C818 18LB/OR A/C PRESSURE 5 VOLT SUPPLY 3 C18 18LB/BR A/C PRESSURE SIGNAL 4-Component Location - 8 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch, HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Page 12035 Component Location - 9 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch, HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Page 12036 Component Location - 12 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch, HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Page 12037 Component Location - 16 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch, HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Page 12038 Connector: Name : TRANSDUCER-A/C PRESSURE Color : GRAY # of pins : 4 Qualifier : (6.7L/GAS) Pin Circuit Description 1 C918 18BK/LB A/C PRESSURE GROUND Pin Circuit Description 1 C918 20BK/LB A/C PRESSURE GROUND Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch, HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Page 12039 2 C818 18LB/OR A/C PRESSURE 5 VOLT SUPPLY 2 C818 20LB/OR A/C PRESSURE 5 VOLT SUPPLY 3 C18 18LB/BR A/C PRESSURE SIGNAL 3 C18 20LB/BR A/C PRESSURE SIGNAL 4-Component Location - 8 Component Location - 9 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch, HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Page 12040 Component Location - 12 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch, HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Page 12041 Component Location - 16 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch, HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Page 12042 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch, HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Page 12043 Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch: Diagrams Component ID: 520 Component : TRANSDUCER-A/C PRESSURE Connector: Name : TRANSDUCER-A/C PRESSURE Color : BLACK # of pins : 4 Qualifier : (5.9L) Pin Circuit Description 1 C918 18BK/LB A/C PRESSURE GROUND 2 C818 18LB/OR A/C PRESSURE 5 VOLT SUPPLY 3 C18 18LB/BR A/C PRESSURE SIGNAL 4-Component Location - 8 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch, HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Page 12044 Component Location - 9 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch, HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Page 12045 Component Location - 12 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch, HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Page 12046 Component Location - 16 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch, HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Page 12047 Connector: Name : TRANSDUCER-A/C PRESSURE Color : GRAY # of pins : 4 Qualifier : (6.7L/GAS) Pin Circuit Description 1 C918 18BK/LB A/C PRESSURE GROUND Pin Circuit Description 1 C918 20BK/LB A/C PRESSURE GROUND Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch, HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Page 12048 2 C818 18LB/OR A/C PRESSURE 5 VOLT SUPPLY 2 C818 20LB/OR A/C PRESSURE 5 VOLT SUPPLY 3 C18 18LB/BR A/C PRESSURE SIGNAL 3 C18 20LB/BR A/C PRESSURE SIGNAL 4-Component Location - 8 Component Location - 9 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch, HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Page 12049 Component Location - 12 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch, HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Page 12050 Component Location - 16 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch, HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Page 12051 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch, HVAC > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The A/C pressure transducer (1) is a switch that is installed on a fitting located on the A/C discharge line. An internally threaded fitting on the A/C pressure transducer connects it to the externally threaded Schrader-type fitting on the A/C discharge line. A rubber O-ring seals the connection between the A/C pressure transducer and the discharge line fitting. The A/C pressure transducer is connected to the vehicle electrical system by a molded plastic connector with three terminals. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch, HVAC > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 12054 Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The A/C pressure transducer monitors the pressures in the high side of the refrigerant system through its connection to a fitting on the A/C discharge line and its internal resistance changes in response to the pressures it monitors. The powertrain control module (PCM) or the engine control module (ECM) (depending on engine application) provides a five volt reference signal and a sensor ground to the A/C pressure transducer, then monitors the output voltage of the transducer on a sensor return circuit to determine refrigerant pressure. The PCM/ECM is programmed to respond to this and other sensor inputs by controlling the operation of the A/C compressor clutch and the radiator cooling fan to help optimize A/C system performance and to protect the system components from damage. The PCM/ECM will disengage the A/C compressor clutch when high side pressure rises above 3172 kPa (460 psi) and re-engage the clutch when high side pressure drops below 1999 kPa (290 psi). The A/C pressure transducer will also disengage the A/C compressor clutch if the high side pressure drops below 193 kPa (28 psi) and will re-engage the clutch when the high side pressure rises above 234 kPa (34 psi). If the refrigerant pressure rises above 1655 kPa (240 psi), the PCM will actuate the cooling fan. The A/C pressure transducer signal to the PCM/ECM also prevents the A/C compressor clutch from engaging when ambient temperatures are below about 10° C (50° F) due to the pressure/temperature relationship of the refrigerant. A Schrader-type valve in the A/C discharge line fitting permits the A/C pressure transducer to be removed or installed without disturbing the refrigerant in the A/C system. The A/C pressure transducer is diagnosed using a scan tool. The A/C pressure transducer cannot be adjusted or repaired and must be replaced if found inoperative or damaged. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch, HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL NOTE: It is not necessary to discharge the refrigerant system to replace the A/C pressure transducer. NOTE: Typical A/C pressure transducer and refrigerant line shown. 1. Disconnect and isolate the negative battery cable. 2. Disconnect the wire harness connector (1) from the A/C pressure transducer (2) located on the A/C discharge line (3). 3. Remove the A/C pressure transducer from the fitting on the A/C discharge line and remove and discard the O-ring seal. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch, HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 12057 Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION NOTE: Use only the specified O-ring as it is made of special material for R-134a. Use only refrigerant oil of the type required for the A/C compressor. NOTE: Typical A/C pressure transducer and refrigerant line shown. 1. Lubricate a new rubber O-ring seal (4) with clean refrigerant oil and install it onto the discharge line fitting (3). 2. Install the A/C pressure transducer (2) onto the A/C discharge line. Tighten the A/C pressure transducer to 5.1 Nm (45 in. lbs.). 3. Connect the wire harness connector (1) to the A/C pressure transducer. 4. Reconnect the negative battery cable. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 398 Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC: Locations Component ID 398 Component ID: 398 Component : SENSOR-AMBIENT AIR TEMPERATURE Connector: Name : SENSOR-AMBIENT AIR TEMPERATURE Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Pin Circuit Description 1 G31 20VT/LG AAT SIGNAL 2 G930 20VT/TN AAT RETURN Component Location - 30 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 398 > Page 12063 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 398 > Page 12064 Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC: Locations Component ID 402 Component ID: 402 Component : SENSOR-AMBIENT AIR TEMPERATURE Connector: Name : SENSOR-AMBIENT AIR TEMPERATURE Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Pin Circuit Description 1 G31 20VT/LG AAT SIGNAL 2 G930 20VT/TN AAT RETURN Component Location - 30 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 398 > Page 12065 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Component ID 398 Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC: Diagrams Component ID 398 Component ID: 398 Component : SENSOR-AMBIENT AIR TEMPERATURE Connector: Name : SENSOR-AMBIENT AIR TEMPERATURE Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Pin Circuit Description 1 G31 20VT/LG AAT SIGNAL 2 G930 20VT/TN AAT RETURN Component Location - 30 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Component ID 398 > Page 12068 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Component ID 398 > Page 12069 Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC: Diagrams Component ID 402 Component ID: 402 Component : SENSOR-AMBIENT AIR TEMPERATURE Connector: Name : SENSOR-AMBIENT AIR TEMPERATURE Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Pin Circuit Description 1 G31 20VT/LG AAT SIGNAL 2 G930 20VT/TN AAT RETURN Component Location - 30 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Component ID 398 > Page 12070 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Locations Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch: Locations Component ID: 411 Component : SENSOR-EVAPORATOR TEMPERATURE Connector: Name : SENSOR-EVAPORATOR TEMPERATURE Color : NATURAL # of pins : 2 Pin Circuit Description 1 C121 20DB/DG SENSOR GROUND 2 C21 20DB/LG EVAPORATOR TEMPERATURE SENSOR SIGNAL Component Location - 40 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 12074 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 12075 Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch: Diagrams Component ID: 411 Component : SENSOR-EVAPORATOR TEMPERATURE Connector: Name : SENSOR-EVAPORATOR TEMPERATURE Color : NATURAL # of pins : 2 Pin Circuit Description 1 C121 20DB/DG SENSOR GROUND 2 C21 20DB/LG EVAPORATOR TEMPERATURE SENSOR SIGNAL Component Location - 40 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 12076 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION NOTE: Cutaway of HVAC housing shown for clarity. The evaporator temperature sensor (1) is an electrical thermistor located within a molded plastic case that is inserted into the top of the HVAC housing (2) to measure the temperature of the conditioned air downstream of the A/C evaporator (3). Two terminals within the connector receptacle connect the sensor to the vehicle electrical system through a wire lead and connector of the HVAC wire harness. The external location of the evaporator temperature sensor allows the sensor to be removed or installed without disturbing the refrigerant in the A/C system. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 12079 Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The evaporator temperature sensor monitors the temperature of the conditioned air downstream of the A/C evaporator and supplies an input signal to the A/C-heater control. The A/C-heater control uses the evaporator temperature sensor input signal to optimize A/C system performance and to protect the A/C system from evaporator freezing. The evaporator temperature sensor will change its internal resistance in response to the temperatures it monitors and is connected to the A/C-heater control through sensor ground circuit and a 5-volt reference signal circuit. As the temperature of the A/C evaporator decreases, the internal resistance of the evaporator temperature sensor decreases. The A/C-heater control uses the monitored voltage reading as an indication of evaporator temperature. The A/C-heater control is programmed to respond to this input by requesting the powertrain control module (PCM) or the engine control module (ECM) (depending on engine application) to cycle the A/C compressor clutch as necessary to optimize A/C system performance and to protect the A/C system from evaporator freezing. The evaporator temperature sensor is diagnosed using a scan tool See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/Heating-A/C System Diagnostics . The evaporator temperature sensor cannot be adjusted or repaired and must be replaced if found inoperative or damaged. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL NOTE: Illustration shown with instrument panel removed for clarity. 1. Disconnect and isolate the negative battery cable. 2. Remove the glove box from the instrument panel See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Glove Compartment/Service and Repair/Instrument Panel Glove Box - Removal . 3. Disconnect the HVAC wire harness (1) from the evaporator temperature sensor (2) located on the top of the HVAC housing (3). 4. Remove the evaporator temperature sensor from the HVAC housing by pulling the sensor upward while tipping it forward. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 12082 Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION NOTE: Illustration shown with instrument panel removed for clarity. 1. Install the evaporator temperature sensor (2) into the opening in the top of the HVAC housing (3). Make sure the sensor is fully engage to the housing. 2. Connect the HVAC wire harness (1) to the evaporator temperature sensor. 3. Install the glove box See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Glove Compartment/Service and Repair/Instrument Panel Glove Box Installation . 4. Reconnect the negative battery cable. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch, HVAC > Component Information > Locations Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch: Locations Component ID: 520 Component : TRANSDUCER-A/C PRESSURE Connector: Name : TRANSDUCER-A/C PRESSURE Color : BLACK # of pins : 4 Qualifier : (5.9L) Pin Circuit Description 1 C918 18BK/LB A/C PRESSURE GROUND 2 C818 18LB/OR A/C PRESSURE 5 VOLT SUPPLY 3 C18 18LB/BR A/C PRESSURE SIGNAL 4-Component Location - 8 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch, HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Page 12086 Component Location - 9 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch, HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Page 12087 Component Location - 12 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch, HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Page 12088 Component Location - 16 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch, HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Page 12089 Connector: Name : TRANSDUCER-A/C PRESSURE Color : GRAY # of pins : 4 Qualifier : (6.7L/GAS) Pin Circuit Description 1 C918 18BK/LB A/C PRESSURE GROUND Pin Circuit Description 1 C918 20BK/LB A/C PRESSURE GROUND Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch, HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Page 12090 2 C818 18LB/OR A/C PRESSURE 5 VOLT SUPPLY 2 C818 20LB/OR A/C PRESSURE 5 VOLT SUPPLY 3 C18 18LB/BR A/C PRESSURE SIGNAL 3 C18 20LB/BR A/C PRESSURE SIGNAL 4-Component Location - 8 Component Location - 9 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch, HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Page 12091 Component Location - 12 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch, HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Page 12092 Component Location - 16 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch, HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Page 12093 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch, HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Page 12094 Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch: Diagrams Component ID: 520 Component : TRANSDUCER-A/C PRESSURE Connector: Name : TRANSDUCER-A/C PRESSURE Color : BLACK # of pins : 4 Qualifier : (5.9L) Pin Circuit Description 1 C918 18BK/LB A/C PRESSURE GROUND 2 C818 18LB/OR A/C PRESSURE 5 VOLT SUPPLY 3 C18 18LB/BR A/C PRESSURE SIGNAL 4-Component Location - 8 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch, HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Page 12095 Component Location - 9 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch, HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Page 12096 Component Location - 12 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch, HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Page 12097 Component Location - 16 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch, HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Page 12098 Connector: Name : TRANSDUCER-A/C PRESSURE Color : GRAY # of pins : 4 Qualifier : (6.7L/GAS) Pin Circuit Description 1 C918 18BK/LB A/C PRESSURE GROUND Pin Circuit Description 1 C918 20BK/LB A/C PRESSURE GROUND Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch, HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Page 12099 2 C818 18LB/OR A/C PRESSURE 5 VOLT SUPPLY 2 C818 20LB/OR A/C PRESSURE 5 VOLT SUPPLY 3 C18 18LB/BR A/C PRESSURE SIGNAL 3 C18 20LB/BR A/C PRESSURE SIGNAL 4-Component Location - 8 Component Location - 9 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch, HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Page 12100 Component Location - 12 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch, HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Page 12101 Component Location - 16 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch, HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Page 12102 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch, HVAC > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The A/C pressure transducer (1) is a switch that is installed on a fitting located on the A/C discharge line. An internally threaded fitting on the A/C pressure transducer connects it to the externally threaded Schrader-type fitting on the A/C discharge line. A rubber O-ring seals the connection between the A/C pressure transducer and the discharge line fitting. The A/C pressure transducer is connected to the vehicle electrical system by a molded plastic connector with three terminals. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch, HVAC > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 12105 Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The A/C pressure transducer monitors the pressures in the high side of the refrigerant system through its connection to a fitting on the A/C discharge line and its internal resistance changes in response to the pressures it monitors. The powertrain control module (PCM) or the engine control module (ECM) (depending on engine application) provides a five volt reference signal and a sensor ground to the A/C pressure transducer, then monitors the output voltage of the transducer on a sensor return circuit to determine refrigerant pressure. The PCM/ECM is programmed to respond to this and other sensor inputs by controlling the operation of the A/C compressor clutch and the radiator cooling fan to help optimize A/C system performance and to protect the system components from damage. The PCM/ECM will disengage the A/C compressor clutch when high side pressure rises above 3172 kPa (460 psi) and re-engage the clutch when high side pressure drops below 1999 kPa (290 psi). The A/C pressure transducer will also disengage the A/C compressor clutch if the high side pressure drops below 193 kPa (28 psi) and will re-engage the clutch when the high side pressure rises above 234 kPa (34 psi). If the refrigerant pressure rises above 1655 kPa (240 psi), the PCM will actuate the cooling fan. The A/C pressure transducer signal to the PCM/ECM also prevents the A/C compressor clutch from engaging when ambient temperatures are below about 10° C (50° F) due to the pressure/temperature relationship of the refrigerant. A Schrader-type valve in the A/C discharge line fitting permits the A/C pressure transducer to be removed or installed without disturbing the refrigerant in the A/C system. The A/C pressure transducer is diagnosed using a scan tool. The A/C pressure transducer cannot be adjusted or repaired and must be replaced if found inoperative or damaged. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch, HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL NOTE: It is not necessary to discharge the refrigerant system to replace the A/C pressure transducer. NOTE: Typical A/C pressure transducer and refrigerant line shown. 1. Disconnect and isolate the negative battery cable. 2. Disconnect the wire harness connector (1) from the A/C pressure transducer (2) located on the A/C discharge line (3). 3. Remove the A/C pressure transducer from the fitting on the A/C discharge line and remove and discard the O-ring seal. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch, HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 12108 Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION NOTE: Use only the specified O-ring as it is made of special material for R-134a. Use only refrigerant oil of the type required for the A/C compressor. NOTE: Typical A/C pressure transducer and refrigerant line shown. 1. Lubricate a new rubber O-ring seal (4) with clean refrigerant oil and install it onto the discharge line fitting (3). 2. Install the A/C pressure transducer (2) onto the A/C discharge line. Tighten the A/C pressure transducer to 5.1 Nm (45 in. lbs.). 3. Connect the wire harness connector (1) to the A/C pressure transducer. 4. Reconnect the negative battery cable. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Service Port HVAC > Component Information > Description and Operation Service Port HVAC: Description and Operation DESCRIPTION Two refrigerant system service ports are used to recover/recycle/evacuate/charge and test the A/C refrigerant system. Unique sizes are used on the service ports for the R-134a refrigerant system to ensure the system is not accidentally contaminated with R-12 refrigerant or service equipment used for R-12 refrigerant. The high side service port is located on the A/C discharge line. The A/C pressure transducer is mounted on the high side service port See: Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch/Description and Operation/Description . The low side service port is located either on the top of the A/C accumulator or on the A/C suction line near the accumulator, depending on engine application. Both the high side and low side A/C service port valve cores are serviceable. Each of the service ports has a threaded plastic protective cap installed over it from the factory. After servicing the refrigerant system, always reinstall both of the service port caps. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Service Port HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Service Port HVAC: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL WARNING: Refer to the applicable warnings and cautions for this system before performing the following operation See: Service Precautions/Warning and See: Service Precautions/Caution. Failure to follow the warnings and cautions may result in serious or fatal injury. NOTE: Typical A/C service port shown. 1. Remove the protective cap (1) from the service port (2). 2. Recover the refrigerant from the refrigerant system See: Service and Repair/Refrigerant System Recovery . 3. Using a Schrader-type valve core tool, remove the valve core (3) from the service port. 4. Install a plug in, or tape over the opened service port(s). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Service Port HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 12114 Service Port HVAC: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION NOTE: Typical A/C service port shown. 1. Lubricate the valve core (3) with clean refrigerant oil prior to installation. Use only refrigerant oil of the type recommended for the A/C compressor in the vehicle. 2. Remove the tape or plug from the service port (2). CAUTION: A valve core that is not fully seated in the A/C service port can result in damage to the valve during refrigerant system evacuation and charge. Such damage may result in a loss of system refrigerant while uncoupling the charge adapters. 3. Using a Schrader-type valve core tool, install and tighten the valve core into the service port(s). 4. Evacuate the refrigerant system See: Service and Repair/Refrigerant System Evacuate . 5. Charge the refrigerant system See: Service and Repair/Refrigerant System Charge . NOTE: The protective cap helps aid in service port sealing and helps protect the refrigerant system from contamination. Remember to always reinstall the protective cap onto the service port when refrigerant system service is complete. 6. Install the protective cap (1) onto the service port. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Repairs and Inspections Required After a Collision > System Information > Service and Repair Repairs and Inspections Required After a Collision: Service and Repair SERVICE AFTER A SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT DEPLOYMENT Any vehicle which is to be returned to use following a Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) component deployment, must have the deployed restraints replaced. In addition, if the driver airbag has been deployed, the clockspring must be replaced. If the passenger airbag is deployed, the passenger airbag door must be replaced. The seat belt tensioners are deployed by the same signal that deploys the driver and passenger airbags and must also be replaced if either front airbag has been deployed. If a side curtain airbag has been deployed, the complete airbag unit, the headliner, as well as the upper A, B, and C-pillar trim must be replaced. These components are not intended for reuse and will be damaged or weakened as a result of a SRS component deployment, which may or may not be obvious during a visual inspection. On vehicles with an optional sunroof, the sunroof drain tubes and hoses must be closely inspected following a side curtain airbag deployment. It is also critical that the mounting surfaces and mounting brackets for the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC), side impact sensors, and front impact sensors be closely inspected and restored to their original conditions following any vehicle impact damage. Because the ORC and each impact sensor are used by the SRS to monitor or confirm the direction and severity of a vehicle impact, improper orientation or insecure fastening of these components may cause airbags not to deploy when required, or to deploy when not required. Never attempt to repair the electrically conductive circuits or wiring components related to the SRS. Such repairs can compromise the conductivity and current carrying capacity of those critical electrical circuits, which may cause SRS components not to deploy when required, or to deploy when not required. Any wire harness containing broken, cut, burned or otherwise damaged electrically conductive SRS wiring, terminals or connector components must be removed and replaced with an entire new wire harness. Only minor cuts or abrasions of wire and terminal insulation where the conductive material has not been damaged, or connector insulators where the integrity of the latching and locking mechanisms have not been compromised may be repaired using appropriate methods. All other vehicle components should be closely inspected following any SRS component deployment, but are to be replaced only as required by the extent of the visible damage incurred. AIRBAG SQUIB STATUS Multistage airbags with multiple initiators (squibs) must be checked to determine that all squibs were used during the deployment event. The driver and passenger airbags in this vehicle are deployed by electrical signals generated by the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) through the driver or passenger squib 1 and squib 2 circuits to the two initiators in the airbag inflators. Typically, both initiators are used and all potentially hazardous chemicals are burned during an airbag deployment event. However, it is possible for only one initiator to be used due to an airbag system fault; therefore, it is always necessary to confirm that both initiators have been used in order to avoid the improper handling or disposal of potentially live pyrotechnic or hazardous materials. The following procedure should be performed using a diagnostic scan tool to verify the status of both airbag squibs before either deployed airbag is removed from the vehicle for disposal. CAUTION: Deployed front airbags having two initiators (squibs) in the airbag inflator may or may not have live pyrotechnic material within the inflator. Do not dispose of these airbags unless you are certain of complete deployment. Refer to the Hazardous Substance Control System for information regarding the potentially hazardous properties of the subject component and the proper safe handling procedures. Then dispose of all non-deployed and deployed airbags and seat belt tensioners in a manner consistent with state, provincial, local and federal regulations. 1. Be certain that the diagnostic scan tool contains the latest version of the proper diagnostic software. Connect the scan tool to the 16-way Data Link Connector (DLC). The DLC is located on the driver side lower edge of the instrument panel, outboard of the steering column. 2. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position. 3. Using the scan tool, read and record the active (current) Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) data. Using the active DTC information, refer to the Airbag Squib Status table to determine the status of both driver and passenger airbag squibs. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Repairs and Inspections Required After a Collision > System Information > Service and Repair > Page 12119 NOTE: If none of the Driver or Passenger Squib 1 or 2 open are active codes, the status of the airbag squibs is unknown. In this case the airbag should be handled and disposed of as if the squibs were both live. CLEANUP PROCEDURE Following a Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) component deployment, the vehicle interior will contain a powdery residue. This residue consists primarily of harmless particulate by-products of the small pyrotechnic charge that initiates the propellant used to deploy a SRS component. However, this residue may also contain traces of sodium hydroxide powder, a chemical by-product of the propellant material that is used to generate the inert gas that inflates the airbag. Since sodium hydroxide powder can irritate the skin, eyes, nose, or throat, be certain to wear safety glasses, rubber gloves, and a long-sleeved shirt during cleanup. WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury, if you experience skin irritation during cleanup, run cool water over the affected area. Also, if you experience irritation of the nose or throat, exit the vehicle for fresh air until the irritation ceases. If irritation continues, see a physician. 1. Begin the cleanup by using a vacuum cleaner to remove any residual powder from the vehicle interior. Clean from outside the vehicle and work Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Repairs and Inspections Required After a Collision > System Information > Service and Repair > Page 12120 your way inside, so that you avoid kneeling or sitting on a non-cleaned area. 2. Be certain to vacuum the heater and air conditioning outlets as well. Run the heater and air conditioner blower on the lowest speed setting and vacuum any powder expelled from the outlets. CAUTION: Deployed front airbags having two initiators (squibs) in the airbag inflator may or may not have live pyrotechnic material within the inflator. Do not dispose of these airbags unless you are certain of complete deployment. Refer to AIRBAG SQUIB STATUS. All damaged, ineffective, or non-deployed Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) components which are replaced on vehicles are to be handled and disposed of properly. If an airbag or seat belt tensioner unit is ineffective or damaged and non-deployed, refer to the Hazardous Substance Control System for information regarding the potentially hazardous properties of the subject component and the proper safe handling procedures. Then dispose of all non-deployed and deployed airbags and seat belt tensioners in a manner consistent with state, provincial, local and federal regulations. 3. Next, remove the deployed SRS components from the vehicle. Refer to the appropriate service removal procedures. 4. You may need to vacuum the interior of the vehicle a second time to recover all of the powder. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Locations > Airbag-Side Curtain-Right Air Bag: Locations Airbag-Side Curtain-Right Component ID: 12 Component : AIRBAG-SIDE CURTAIN-RIGHT Connector: Name : AIRBAG-SIDE CURTAIN-RIGHT Color : YELLOW # of pins : 2 Pin Circuit Description 1 R4 20OR/LB RIGHT CURTAIN SQUIB 1 LINE 1 2 R2 20WT/LB RIGHT CURTAIN SQUIB 1 LINE 2 Component Location - 61 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Locations > Airbag-Side Curtain-Right > Page 12126 Component Location - 64 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Locations > Airbag-Side Curtain-Right > Page 12127 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Locations > Airbag-Side Curtain-Right > Page 12128 Air Bag: Locations Airbag-Driver Squib 1 Component ID: 8 Component : AIRBAG-DRIVER SQUIB 1 Connector: Name : AIRBAG-DRIVER SQUIB 1 Color : BLACK # of pins : 0 Pin Circuit Description 1 R43 20LG/LB DRIVER SQUIB 1 LINE 1 2 R45 20LG/OR DRIVER SQUIB 1 LINE 2 Component Location - 43 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Locations > Airbag-Side Curtain-Right > Page 12129 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Locations > Airbag-Side Curtain-Right > Page 12130 Air Bag: Locations Airbag-Driver Squib 2 Component ID: 9 Component : AIRBAG-DRIVER SQUIB 2 Connector: Name : AIRBAG-DRIVER SQUIB 2 Color : BROWN # of pins : 0 Gender : MALE Pin Circuit Description 1 R61 20LG/VT DRIVER SQUIB 2 LINE 1 2 R63 20LG/WT DRIVER SQUIB 2 LINE 2 Component Location - 43 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Locations > Airbag-Side Curtain-Right > Page 12131 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Locations > Airbag-Side Curtain-Right > Page 12132 Air Bag: Locations Airbag-Passenger Squib Component ID: 10 Component : AIRBAG-PASSENGER SQUIB Connector: Name : AIRBAG-PASSENGER SQUIB Color : YELLOW # of pins : 4 Pin Circuit Description 1 R44 20LB/OR PASSENGER SQUIB 1 LINE 2 2 R42 20LB/BR PASSENGER SQUIB 1 LINE 1 3 R64 20LB/WT PASSENGER SQUIB 2 LINE 1 4 R62 20LB/VT PASSENGER SQUIB 2 LINE 2 Component Location - 46 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Locations > Airbag-Side Curtain-Right > Page 12133 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Locations > Airbag-Side Curtain-Right > Page 12134 Air Bag: Locations Airbag-Side Curtain-Left Component ID: 11 Component : AIRBAG-SIDE CURTAIN-LEFT Connector: Name : AIRBAG-SIDE CURTAIN-LEFT Color : YELLOW # of pins : 2 Pin Circuit Description 1 R3 20LB/OR LEFT CURTAIN SQUIB 1 LINE 1 2 R1 20LB/WT LEFT CURTAIN SQUIB 1 LINE 2 Component Location - 58 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Locations > Airbag-Side Curtain-Right > Page 12135 Component Location - 63 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Locations > Airbag-Side Curtain-Right > Page 12136 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Diagrams > Airbag-Side Curtain-Right Air Bag: Diagrams Airbag-Side Curtain-Right Component ID: 12 Component : AIRBAG-SIDE CURTAIN-RIGHT Connector: Name : AIRBAG-SIDE CURTAIN-RIGHT Color : YELLOW # of pins : 2 Pin Circuit Description 1 R4 20OR/LB RIGHT CURTAIN SQUIB 1 LINE 1 2 R2 20WT/LB RIGHT CURTAIN SQUIB 1 LINE 2 Component Location - 61 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Diagrams > Airbag-Side Curtain-Right > Page 12139 Component Location - 64 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Diagrams > Airbag-Side Curtain-Right > Page 12140 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Diagrams > Airbag-Side Curtain-Right > Page 12141 Air Bag: Diagrams Airbag-Driver Squib 1 Component ID: 8 Component : AIRBAG-DRIVER SQUIB 1 Connector: Name : AIRBAG-DRIVER SQUIB 1 Color : BLACK # of pins : 0 Pin Circuit Description 1 R43 20LG/LB DRIVER SQUIB 1 LINE 1 2 R45 20LG/OR DRIVER SQUIB 1 LINE 2 Component Location - 43 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Diagrams > Airbag-Side Curtain-Right > Page 12142 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Diagrams > Airbag-Side Curtain-Right > Page 12143 Air Bag: Diagrams Airbag-Driver Squib 2 Component ID: 9 Component : AIRBAG-DRIVER SQUIB 2 Connector: Name : AIRBAG-DRIVER SQUIB 2 Color : BROWN # of pins : 0 Gender : MALE Pin Circuit Description 1 R61 20LG/VT DRIVER SQUIB 2 LINE 1 2 R63 20LG/WT DRIVER SQUIB 2 LINE 2 Component Location - 43 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Diagrams > Airbag-Side Curtain-Right > Page 12144 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Diagrams > Airbag-Side Curtain-Right > Page 12145 Air Bag: Diagrams Airbag-Passenger Squib Component ID: 10 Component : AIRBAG-PASSENGER SQUIB Connector: Name : AIRBAG-PASSENGER SQUIB Color : YELLOW # of pins : 4 Pin Circuit Description 1 R44 20LB/OR PASSENGER SQUIB 1 LINE 2 2 R42 20LB/BR PASSENGER SQUIB 1 LINE 1 3 R64 20LB/WT PASSENGER SQUIB 2 LINE 1 4 R62 20LB/VT PASSENGER SQUIB 2 LINE 2 Component Location - 46 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Diagrams > Airbag-Side Curtain-Right > Page 12146 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Diagrams > Airbag-Side Curtain-Right > Page 12147 Air Bag: Diagrams Airbag-Side Curtain-Left Component ID: 11 Component : AIRBAG-SIDE CURTAIN-LEFT Connector: Name : AIRBAG-SIDE CURTAIN-LEFT Color : YELLOW # of pins : 2 Pin Circuit Description 1 R3 20LB/OR LEFT CURTAIN SQUIB 1 LINE 1 2 R1 20LB/WT LEFT CURTAIN SQUIB 1 LINE 2 Component Location - 58 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Diagrams > Airbag-Side Curtain-Right > Page 12148 Component Location - 63 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Diagrams > Airbag-Side Curtain-Right > Page 12149 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Description and Operation > Driver Airbag Air Bag: Description and Operation Driver Airbag Description DESCRIPTION The color-keyed, injection molded, thermoplastic driver airbag protective trim cover (2) is the most visible part of the driver airbag. The driver airbag is located in the center of the steering wheel (1), where it is secured with two screws to the armature of the four-spoke steering wheel. All vehicles have a chrome Dodge Ram emblem in the center of the trim cover. Concealed beneath the driver airbag trim cover are the horn switch, the folded airbag cushion, the airbag cushion retainer, the airbag housing, the airbag inflator, and the retainers that secure the inflator to the airbag housing. The airbag cushion, housing (5), and inflator (3) are secured within an integral receptacle molded into the back of the trim cover (4). The four vertical walls of this receptacle have a total of 12 small windows with blocking tabs that are engaged by 12 hook formations around the perimeter of the airbag housing. Each hook is inserted through one of the windows and the blocking tab in each window keeps the hook properly engaged with the trim cover, locking the trim cover securely into place on the airbag housing. The resistive membrane-type horn switch is secured with heat stakes to the inside surface of the driver airbag trim cover, between the trim cover and the folded airbag cushion. The horn switch ground pigtail wire has an eyelet terminal connector that is captured beneath a flanged nut on the upper right inflator mounting stud on the back of the housing. The horn switch feed pigtail wire has a black, molded plastic insulator (1) that is secured by an integral retainer in a locator hole near the upper right corner of the airbag housing and is connected to the vehicle electrical system through a dedicated take out and connector of the steering wheel wire harness. Both horn switch wires are routed through an integral notch in the center of the upper edge of the airbag housing stamping. The airbag used in this vehicle is a multistage, Next Generation-type that complies with revised federal airbag standards to deploy with less force than those used in some prior vehicles. A 71 centimeter (28 inch) diameter, radial deploying fabric cushion with internal tethers is used. The airbag inflator is a dual-initiator, non-azide, pyrotechnic-type unit with four mounting studs and is secured to the stamped metal airbag housing by four flanged hex nuts. Two keyed and color-coded connector receptacles on the driver airbag inflator connect the two inflator initiators to the vehicle electrical system through two yellow-jacketed, two-wire pigtail harnesses of the clockspring. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Description and Operation > Driver Airbag > Page 12152 The driver airbag unit cannot be repaired, and must be replaced if deployed, ineffective or in any way damaged. The driver airbag trim cover and horn switch unit may be disassembled from the driver airbag unit, and is available for separate service replacement. Operation OPERATION The multistage driver airbag is deployed by electrical signals generated by the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) through the driver airbag squib 1 and squib 2 circuits to the two initiators in the airbag inflator. By using two initiators, the airbag can be deployed at multiple levels of force. The force level is controlled by the ORC to suit the monitored impact conditions by providing one of three delay intervals between the electrical signals provided to the two initiators. The longer the delay between these signals, the less forcefully the airbag will deploy. When the ORC sends the proper electrical signals to each initiator, the electrical energy generates enough heat to initiate a small pyrotechnic charge which, in turn ignites chemical pellets within the inflator. Once ignited, these chemical pellets burn rapidly and produce a large quantity of inert gas. The inflator is sealed to the back of the airbag housing and a diffuser in the inflator directs all of the inert gas into the airbag cushion, causing the cushion to inflate. As the cushion inflates, the driver airbag trim cover will split at predetermined breakout lines, then fold back out of the way along with the horn switch unit. Following an airbag deployment, the airbag cushion quickly deflates by venting the inert gas towards the instrument panel through vent holes within the fabric used to construct the back (steering wheel side) panel of the airbag cushion. Some of the chemicals used to create the inert gas may be considered hazardous while in their solid state before they are burned, but they are securely sealed within the airbag inflator. Typically, both initiators are used and all potentially hazardous chemicals are burned during an airbag deployment event. However, it is possible for only one initiator to be used during a deployment due to an airbag system fault; therefore, it is necessary to always confirm that both initiators have been used in order to avoid the improper disposal of potentially live pyrotechnic or hazardous materials. See: Repairs and Inspections Required After a Collision/Service and Repair . The inert gas that is produced when the chemicals are burned is harmless. However, a small amount of residue from the burned chemicals may cause some temporary discomfort if it contacts the skin, eyes, or breathing passages. If skin or eye irritation is noted, rinse the affected area with plenty of cool, clean water. If breathing passages are irritated, move to another area where there is plenty of clean, fresh air to breath. If the irritation is not alleviated by these actions, contact a physician. Proper diagnosis of the driver airbag inflator and squib circuits requires the use of a diagnostic scan tool. Refer to the appropriate diagnostic information. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Description and Operation > Driver Airbag > Page 12153 Air Bag: Description and Operation Passenger Airbag Description DESCRIPTION The horizontal surface of the injection molded, thermoplastic passenger airbag door (1) is the most visible part of the passenger airbag. The passenger airbag door is located above the glove box opening on the top of the instrument panel (2) in front of the front seat passenger seating position. The forward and outboard edges of the airbag door are secured with integral snap features (3) to the instrument panel base trim, while the rearward edge has several interlocking tabs that engage slots in the base trim. Located below the passenger airbag door (2) within the instrument panel is the passenger airbag unit. The passenger airbag unit is secured by two screws through a stamped mounting bracket (5) to a support bracket welded onto the instrument panel structural support. The passenger airbag housing fits into a molded receptacle on the back of the airbag door, where several stamped hook formations on the forward and rearward edges of the airbag housing are engaged in mating small window openings on the forward and rearward flanges of the receptacle to secure the airbag door to the airbag housing. These airbag door fasteners and mounting provisions are all concealed beneath the instrument panel base trim. The passenger airbag unit used in this vehicle is a multistage, Next Generation-type that complies with revised federal airbag standards to deploy with less force than those used in some prior vehicles. The passenger airbag unit consists of a stamped and welded metal housing, the airbag cushion, the airbag inflator, and a stamped metal airbag cushion retainer plate that is secured to the airbag housing with four studs and nuts. The airbag housing contains the airbag inflator and the folded airbag cushion. An approximately 80 centimeter (31.5 inch) wide by 90 centimeter (35.5 inch) high rectangular fabric cushion is used. The airbag inflator (4) is a non-azide, pyrotechnic-type unit that is secured to and sealed within the airbag housing. A short four-wire pigtail harness with a keyed, yellow connector insulator (1) connects the two inflator initiators to the vehicle electrical system through a dedicated take out and connector of the instrument panel wire harness. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Description and Operation > Driver Airbag > Page 12154 The passenger airbag includes the airbag door. This unit cannot be repaired, and must be replaced if deployed, ineffective, or in any way damaged. Operation OPERATION The multistage passenger airbag is deployed by electrical signals generated by the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) through the passenger airbag squib 1 and squib 2 circuits to the two initiators in the airbag inflator. By using two initiators, the airbag can be deployed at multiple levels of force. The force level is controlled by the ORC to suit the monitored impact conditions by providing one of three delay intervals between the electrical signals provided to the two initiators. The longer the delay between these signals, the less forcefully the airbag will deploy. When the ORC sends the proper electrical signals to each initiator, the electrical energy generates enough heat to initiate a small pyrotechnic charge which, in turn ignites chemical pellets within the inflator. Once ignited, these chemical pellets burn rapidly and produce a large quantity of inert gas. The inflator is sealed to the airbag cushion and a diffuser in the inflator directs all of the inert gas into the airbag cushion, causing the cushion to inflate. As the cushion inflates, the passenger airbag door will split at predetermined tear seam lines concealed on the inside surface of the door, then the door will pivot up over the top of the instrument panel and out of the way. Following an airbag deployment, the airbag cushion quickly deflates by venting the inert gas through a vent hole in each fabric side panel of the airbag cushion. Typically, both initiators are used during an airbag deployment event. However, it is possible for only one initiator to be used during a deployment due to an airbag system fault; therefore, it is necessary to always confirm that both initiators have been used in order to avoid the improper disposal of potentially live pyrotechnic materials. See: Repairs and Inspections Required After a Collision/Service and Repair . Proper diagnosis of the passenger airbag inflator and the passenger airbag squib circuits requires the use of a diagnostic scan tool. Refer to the appropriate diagnostic information. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Description and Operation > Driver Airbag > Page 12155 Air Bag: Description and Operation Side Curtain Airbag Description DESCRIPTION Optional side curtain airbags are available for this vehicle when it is also equipped with dual front airbags. These airbags are passive, inflatable, Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) components, and vehicles with this equipment can be readily identified by a molded identification trim button with the SRS - AIRBAG logo located on the headliner above each A-pillar (standard cab), or above each B-pillar (quad cab and mega cab). This system is designed to reduce injuries to the vehicle occupants in the event of a side impact collision. Vehicles equipped with side curtain airbags have two individually controlled curtain airbag units. These airbag units are concealed and mounted above the headliner where they are each secured to one of the roof side rails (5). Each folded airbag cushion is contained within a fabric wrap (8) that extends along the roof rail from the A-pillar (6) at the front of the vehicle to the pillar at the rear of the vehicle. The channel is initially secured during installation with plastic push-in fasteners to the roof rail. A long tether (7) extends down the A-pillar from the front of the airbag cushion, where it is retained to the pillar with plastic push-in routing clips and it is secured to the base of the A-pillar near the belt line with a screw. Mega cab vehicles also have a rear tether that is retained with plastic push-in routing clips and secured to the C-pillar near the back of the cab with a screw. The hybrid-type inflator (3) for each airbag is secured to the roof rail at the rear of the airbag unit behind the B-pillar (standard cab) or C-pillar (quad cab and mega cab), and is connected to the airbag cushion by a long tubular manifold (4). The entire assembly is secured to several spring nuts spaced along the inside of the roof rail with screws. A two-wire take out and connector of the body wire harness with a keyed and latched connector insulator (1) on the B-pillar (standard cab) or C-pillar (quad cab and mega cab) is connected directly to the connector receptacle of the initiator near the back of the airbag inflator. The body wire harness connects each curtain airbag unit to the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC). The side curtain airbag unit cannot be adjusted or repaired and must be replaced if deployed, ineffective, or in any way damaged. Once a side curtain airbag has been deployed, the complete airbag unit, the headliner, the upper A, B, and C-pillar trim, and all other visibly damaged components must be replaced. Operation Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Description and Operation > Driver Airbag > Page 12156 OPERATION Each side curtain airbag is deployed individually by an electrical signal generated by the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) to which it is connected through left or right curtain airbag line 1 and line 2 (or squib) circuits. The hybrid-type inflator assembly for each airbag contains a small canister of highly compressed inert gas. When the ORC sends the proper electrical signal to the airbag inflator, the electrical energy creates enough heat to ignite chemical pellets within the inflator. Once ignited, these chemicals burn rapidly and produce the pressure necessary to rupture a containment disk in the inert gas canister. The inflator and inert gas canister are sealed and connected to a tubular manifold so that all of the released gas is directed into the folded curtain airbag cushion, causing the cushion to inflate. As the airbag cushion inflates it will drop down from the roof rail between the edge of the headliner and the side glass/body pillars to form a curtain-like cushion to protect the vehicle occupants during a side impact collision. The front tethers keep the front portion of the side airbag cushion taut to the side, as does the rear tether for the rear portion of the cushion on mega cab vehicles, thus ensuring that the bag will deploy in the proper position. Following the airbag deployment, the airbag cushion quickly deflates by venting the inert gas through the loose weave of the cushion fabric, and the deflated cushion hangs down loosely from the roof rail. Proper diagnosis of the side curtain airbag inflator and the curtain airbag squib circuits requires the use of a diagnostic scan tool. Refer to the appropriate diagnostic information. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Replacement Air Bag: Removal and Replacement Side Curtain Airbag - Removal REMOVAL WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury on vehicles equipped with airbags, disable the Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, airbag, seat belt tensioner, impact sensor, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the SRS. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment. WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury when removing a deployed airbag, rubber gloves, eye protection, and a long-sleeved shirt should be worn. There may be deposits on the airbag unit and other interior surfaces. In large doses, these deposits may cause irritation to the skin and eyes. WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury, use extreme care to prevent any foreign material from entering the side curtain airbag, or becoming entrapped between the side curtain airbag cushion and the headliner. Failure to observe this warning could result in occupant injuries upon airbag deployment. NOTE: The following procedure is for replacement of an ineffective or damaged side curtain airbag. If the airbag is ineffective or damaged, but not deployed, review the recommended procedures for handling non-deployed supplemental restraints. See: Service and Repair. If the side curtain airbag has been deployed, review the recommended procedures for service after a supplemental restraint deployment before removing the airbag from the vehicle. See: Repairs and Inspections Required After a Collision/Service and Repair. 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. Wait two minutes for the system capacitor to discharge before further service. 2. Remove the headliner from the vehicle. See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Headliner/Service and Repair/Headliner - Removal . 3. On mega cab vehicles only, remove the screw and disengage the two retainers that secure the side curtain airbag rear tether to the inner C-pillar near the cab back panel. 4. Remove the screw (6) that secures the side curtain airbag front tether retainer (5) to the base of the A-pillar near the belt line. 5. Disengage the two side curtain airbag front tether plastic retainer clips (4) from the A-pillar. 6. Disconnect the body wire harness connector (9) for the side curtain airbag from the connector receptacle at the back of the inflator. 7. Working from front to rear, remove the four (standard cab), five (quad cab) or eight (mega cab) screws (3) that secure the side curtain airbag inflator and manifold tube brackets to the spring nuts (2) in the roof rail (1). 8. Disengage the three (standard cab), four (quad cab) or six (mega cab) plastic push-in fasteners (8) that secure the side curtain airbag to the roof rail. 9. Remove the side curtain airbag (7) from the vehicle as a unit. Side Curtain Airbag - Installation INSTALLATION WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury on vehicles equipped with airbags, disable the Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, airbag, seat belt tensioner, impact sensor, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the SRS. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment. WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury when removing a deployed airbag, rubber gloves, eye protection, and a long-sleeved shirt should be worn. There may be deposits on the airbag unit and other interior surfaces. In large doses, these deposits may cause irritation to the skin and Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Replacement > Page 12159 eyes. WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury, use extreme care to prevent any foreign material from entering the side curtain airbag, or becoming entrapped between the side curtain airbag cushion and the headliner. Failure to observe this warning could result in occupant injuries upon airbag deployment. NOTE: The following procedure is for replacement of an ineffective or damaged side curtain airbag. If the airbag is ineffective or damaged, but not deployed, review the recommended procedures for handling non-deployed supplemental restraints. See: Service and Repair. If the side curtain airbag has been deployed, review the recommended procedures for service after a supplemental restraint deployment before removing the airbag from the vehicle. See: Repairs and Inspections Required After a Collision/Service and Repair. 1. Check to be certain that the four (standard cab), six (quad cab) or eight (mega cab) spring nuts (2) are properly installed in the inner roof rail (1) and that they are in good condition. 2. Position the side curtain airbag (7) into the vehicle as a unit. 3. Working from rear to front, align each of the three (standard cab), four (quad cab) or six (mega cab) plastic push-in fasteners (8) on the side curtain airbag with their holes in the inner roof side rail and push them straight in until they are fully seated. 4. Working from rear to front, install and tighten the four (standard cab), five (quad cab) or eight (mega cab) screws (3) that secure the side curtain airbag to the spring nuts in the inner roof rail. Tighten the screws to 6 Nm (50 in. lbs.). 5. Reconnect the body wire harness connector (9) for the side curtain airbag to the connector receptacle at the back of the inflator. Be certain that the connector is fully engaged and latched. 6. Engage the two plastic retainer clips (4) that secure the side curtain airbag front tether to the inner A-pillar. 7. Install and tighten the screw (6) that secures the front tether retainer (5) to the base of the A-pillar near the belt line. Tighten the screw to 6 Nm (55 in. lbs.). 8. On mega cab vehicles only, engage the two retainer clips that secure the side curtain airbag rear tether to the inner C-pillar near the cab back panel. 9. On mega cab vehicles only, install and tighten the screw that secures the rear tether retainer to the inner C-pillar near the cab back panel. Tighten the screw to 6 Nm (55 in. lbs.). 10. Reinstall the headliner into the vehicle. See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Headliner/Service and Repair/Headliner - Installation . WARNING: DO NOT CONNECT THE BATTERY NEGATIVE CABLE. PERSONAL INJURY OR DEATH MAY RESULT IF THE SYSTEM TEST IS NOT PERFORMED FIRST. FOR THE SYSTEM TEST, See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code Tests and Associated Procedures/Verification Tests/Supplemental Restraints Verification Test Driver Airbag - Removal REMOVAL WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury on vehicles equipped with airbags, disable the Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, airbag, seat belt tensioner, impact sensor, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the SRS. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment. WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury when removing a deployed airbag, rubber gloves, eye protection, and a long-sleeved shirt should be worn. There may be deposits on the airbag cushion and other interior surfaces. In large doses, these deposits may cause irritation to the skin and eyes. NOTE: The following procedure is for replacement of an ineffective or damaged driver airbag. If the airbag is ineffective or damaged, but not deployed, review the recommended procedures for handling non-deployed supplemental restraints. See: Service and Repair. If the driver airbag has been deployed, review the recommended procedures for service after a supplemental restraint deployment before removing the airbag from the vehicle. See: Repairs and Inspections Required After a Collision/Service and Repair. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Replacement > Page 12160 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. Wait two minutes for the system capacitor to discharge before further service. 2. From the underside of the steering wheel, remove the two screws (3) that secure the driver airbag (1) to the steering wheel armature (2). CAUTION: Do not pull on the horn switch feed pigtail wire to disengage the connector from the driver airbag housing or to disconnect the horn switch to steering wheel wire harness connection. Improper pulling on this pigtail wire or connection can result in damage to the horn switch membrane or feed circuit. 3. Pull the driver airbag (1) away from the steering wheel far enough to access the three electrical connections on the back of the airbag housing. 4. Disconnect the steering wheel wire harness connector for the horn switch (2) from the horn switch feed pigtail wire connector (4), which is located on the back of the driver airbag housing. CAUTION: Do not pull on the clockspring pigtail wires or pry on the connector insulator to disengage the connector from the driver airbag inflator connector receptacle. Improper removal of these pigtail wires and their connector insulators can result in damage to the airbag circuits or connector insulators. 5. The clockspring driver airbag pigtail wire connectors (3) are secured by integral latches to the airbag inflator connector receptacles, which are located on the back of the driver airbag housing. Depress the latches on each side of the connector insulator and pull the insulators straight out from the airbag inflator to disconnect them from the connector receptacles. 6. Remove the driver airbag from the steering wheel. 7. If the driver airbag has been deployed, the clockspring must be replaced. See: Clockspring Assembly / Spiral Cable/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Removal . Driver Airbag - Installation INSTALLATION WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury on vehicles equipped with airbags, disable the Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, airbag, seat belt tensioner, impact sensor, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the SRS. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Replacement > Page 12161 WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury, use extreme care to prevent any foreign material from entering the driver airbag, or becoming entrapped between the driver airbag cushion and the driver airbag trim cover. Failure to observe this warning could result in occupant injuries upon airbag deployment. WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury, the driver airbag trim cover must never be painted. Replacement airbags are serviced with trim covers in the original colors. Paint may change the way in which the material of the trim cover responds to an airbag deployment. Failure to observe this warning could result in occupant injuries upon airbag deployment. NOTE: The following procedure is for replacement of an ineffective or damaged driver airbag. If the airbag is ineffective or damaged, but not deployed, review the recommended procedures for handling non-deployed supplemental restraints. See: Service and Repair. If the driver airbag has been deployed, review the recommended procedures for service after a supplemental restraint deployment before removing the airbag from the vehicle. See: Repairs and Inspections Required After a Collision/Service and Repair. 1. Position the driver airbag (1) close enough to the steering wheel to reconnect the three electrical connections on the back of the airbag housing. 2. When installing the driver airbag, reconnect the two clockspring driver airbag pigtail wire connectors (3) to the airbag inflator connector receptacles by pressing straight in on the connector. Be certain to engage each keyed and color-coded connector to the matching connector receptacle. You can be certain that each connector is fully engaged in its receptacle by listening carefully for a distinct, audible click as the connector latches snap into place. 3. Reconnect the steering wheel wire harness connector (2) for the horn switch to the horn switch feed pigtail wire connector (4), which is located on the back of the driver airbag housing. 4. Carefully position the driver airbag (1) in the steering wheel (2). Be certain that the clockspring pigtail wires and the steering wheel wire harness in the steering wheel hub area are not pinched between the driver airbag and the steering wheel armature. 5. From the underside of the steering wheel, install and tighten the two screws (3) that secure the driver airbag to the steering wheel armature. Tighten the screws to 10 Nm (90 in. lbs.). WARNING: DO NOT CONNECT THE BATTERY NEGATIVE CABLE. PERSONAL INJURY OR DEATH MAY RESULT IF THE SYSTEM TEST IS NOT PERFORMED FIRST. FOR THE SYSTEM TEST, See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code Tests and Associated Procedures/Verification Tests/Supplemental Restraints Verification Test Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Replacement > Page 12162 Passenger Airbag - Removal REMOVAL WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury on vehicles equipped with airbags, disable the Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, airbag, seat belt tensioner, impact sensor, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the SRS. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment. WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury when removing a deployed airbag, rubber gloves, eye protection, and a long-sleeved shirt should be worn. There may be deposits on the airbag unit and other interior surfaces. In large doses, these deposits may cause irritation to the skin and eyes. NOTE: The following procedure is for replacement of an ineffective or damaged passenger airbag. If the airbag is ineffective or damaged, but not deployed, review the recommended procedures for handling non-deployed supplemental restraints. See: Service and Repair. If the passenger airbag has been deployed, review the recommended procedures for service after a supplemental restraint deployment before removing the airbag from the vehicle. See: Repairs and Inspections Required After a Collision/Service and Repair. 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. Wait two minutes for the system capacitor to discharge before further service. 2. Remove the top cover from the top of the instrument panel. See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Service and Repair/Instrument Panel Cover - Removal . 3. Remove the glove box from the instrument panel. See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Glove Compartment/Service and Repair/Instrument Panel Glove Box - Removal . 4. Reach up into the instrument panel between the upper glove box opening reinforcement and the cross car beam (4) to access and disconnect the instrument panel wire harness connector (2) from the airbag inflator pigtail wire connector on the right side of the instrument panel airbag support bracket. To disconnect the connector: a. Slide the red Connector Position Assurance (CPA) lock on the top of the connector toward the side of the connector. b. Depress the connector latch tab and pull the two halves of the connector straight away from each other. 5. Remove the two screws (3) that secure the passenger airbag lower bracket to the instrument panel airbag support bracket. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Replacement > Page 12163 6. Disengage the airbag inflator pigtail wire connector (1) from the plastic push-in retainer plate (3) on the right side of the instrument panel airbag support bracket. To disengage the connector: a. Using a small screwdriver (4), carefully pry the leading edge of the push-in retainer plate away from the connector insulator far enough to clear the engagement tab (2) on the insulator. b. Pull the connector toward you to slide it off of the push-in retainer plate. 7. Using a trim stick (2) or another suitable wide flat-bladed tool, gently pry the forward, then the outboard edges of the passenger airbag door (1) away from the instrument panel (3) far enough to disengage the snap features on the door from the receptacles in the instrument panel base trim. 8. Remove the passenger airbag and airbag door from the instrument panel as a unit. Passenger Airbag - Installation INSTALLATION WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury on vehicles equipped with airbags, disable the Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, airbag, seat belt tensioner, impact sensor, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the SRS. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment. WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury, use extreme care to prevent any foreign material from entering the passenger airbag, or becoming entrapped between the passenger airbag cushion and the passenger airbag door. Failure to observe this warning could result in occupant injuries upon airbag deployment. WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury, the passenger airbag door must never be painted. Replacement passenger airbag units are serviced with doors in the original colors. Paint may change the way in which the material of the airbag door responds to an airbag deployment. Failure to observe this warning could result in occupant injuries upon airbag deployment. NOTE: The following procedure is for replacement of an ineffective or damaged passenger airbag. If the airbag is ineffective or damaged, but not deployed, review the recommended procedures for handling non-deployed supplemental restraints. See: Service and Repair. If the passenger airbag has been deployed, review the recommended procedures for service after a supplemental restraint deployment before removing the airbag from the vehicle. See: Repairs and Inspections Required After a Collision/Service and Repair. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Replacement > Page 12164 1. Carefully position the passenger airbag and airbag door through the opening in the top of the instrument panel base trim as a unit. Be certain that the rear edge of the passenger airbag lower bracket is engaged in the hook formation (5) of the instrument panel airbag support bracket, and the anti-rotation tabs (1) on either side of the hook are engaged in the two holes in the airbag lower bracket. 2. Install and tighten the two screws (3) that secure the passenger airbag lower bracket to the instrument panel airbag support bracket. Tighten the screws to 6 Nm (55 in. lbs.). 3. Slide the airbag inflator pigtail wire connector onto the plastic push-in retainer plate on the right side of the instrument panel airbag support bracket far enough snap it into place over the engagement tab on the connector insulator. 4. Reconnect the instrument panel wire harness connector to the passenger airbag pigtail wire connector on the right side of the airbag lower mounting bracket. Be certain that the latch on the connector and the red Connector Position Assurance (CPA) lock are each fully engaged. 5. Engage the interlocking tabs on the rear edge of the passenger airbag door into the corresponding slots in the instrument panel base trim. 6. Using hand pressure, push down on the passenger airbag door over each snap feature on both sides and the forward edge of the airbag door until it snaps into its receptacle in the instrument panel base trim. 7. Reinstall the glove box into the instrument panel. See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Glove Compartment/Service and Repair/Instrument Panel Glove Box - Installation . 8. Reinstall the top cover onto the top of the instrument panel. See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Service and Repair/Instrument Panel Cover - Installation . WARNING: DO NOT CONNECT THE BATTERY NEGATIVE CABLE. PERSONAL INJURY OR DEATH MAY RESULT IF THE SYSTEM TEST IS NOT PERFORMED FIRST. FOR THE SYSTEM TEST, See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code Tests and Associated Procedures/Verification Tests/Supplemental Restraints Verification Test Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Replacement > Page 12165 Air Bag: Overhaul Disassembly DISASSEMBLY WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury on vehicles equipped with airbags, disable the Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, airbag, seat belt tensioner, impact sensor, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the SRS. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment. WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury, service of this unit should be performed only by DaimlerChrysler-trained and authorized dealer service technicians. Failure to take the proper precautions or to follow the proper procedures could result in accidental, incomplete, or improper airbag deployment and possible occupant injuries. WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury, use extreme care to prevent any foreign material from entering the driver airbag, or becoming entrapped between the driver airbag cushion and the driver airbag trim cover. Failure to observe this warning could result in occupant injuries upon airbag deployment. WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury, the driver airbag trim cover must never be painted. Replacement trim covers are serviced in the original colors. Paint may change the way in which the material of the trim cover responds to an airbag deployment. Failure to observe this warning could result in occupant injuries upon airbag deployment. NOTE: The following procedures can be used to replace the driver airbag trim cover and horn switch unit for service. If the driver airbag is ineffective or deployed, the entire driver airbag, trim cover and horn switch must be replaced as a unit. 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. Wait two minutes for the system capacitor to discharge before further service. 2. Remove the driver airbag from the steering wheel See: Removal and Replacement/Driver Airbag - Removal . 3. Place the driver airbag on a suitable clean and dry work surface with the trim cover facing down. If the trim cover will be reused, be certain to take the proper precautions to prevent the trim cover from receiving cosmetic damage during the following procedures. 4. Carefully pry the horn switch feed pigtail wire connector (1) away from the back of the driver airbag housing (3) far enough to disengage the integral connector retainer from the locator hole just above the upper right inflator mounting stud. 5. Remove the nut that secures the horn switch ground pigtail wire eyelet terminal (2) to the upper right inflator stud on the back of the driver airbag housing. 6. Remove the horn switch ground pigtail wire eyelet terminal from the upper right inflator stud on the back of the driver airbag housing. 7. Disengage each of the 12 hooks (5 and 6) of the airbag housing from the 12 windows in the vertical walls of the trim cover (4), one wall at a time. Start by disengaging the upper wall, then do each of the two side walls, and finish with the lower wall. To disengage the hooks, use hand pressure to push the adjacent edge of the airbag housing firmly and evenly downward into the trim cover receptacle, while at the same time pushing outward on the upper edge of the receptacle wall. 8. With all of the hooks disengaged, lift the housing, inflator, and cushion as a unit from the receptacle on the back of the driver airbag trim cover. Assembly ASSEMBLY WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury on vehicles equipped with airbags, disable the Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, airbag, seat belt tensioner, impact sensor, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Replacement > Page 12166 Disconnect and isolate the battery negative (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the SRS. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment. WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury, service of this unit should be performed only by DaimlerChrysler-trained and authorized dealer service technicians. Failure to take the proper precautions or to follow the proper procedures could result in accidental, incomplete, or improper airbag deployment and possible occupant injuries. WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury, use extreme care to prevent any foreign material from entering the driver airbag, or becoming entrapped between the driver airbag cushion and the driver airbag trim cover. Failure to observe this warning could result in occupant injuries upon airbag deployment. WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury, the driver airbag trim cover must never be painted. Replacement trim covers are serviced in the original colors. Paint may change the way in which the material of the trim cover responds to an airbag deployment. Failure to observe this warning could result in occupant injuries upon airbag deployment. NOTE: The following procedures can be used to replace the driver airbag trim cover and horn switch unit for service. If the driver airbag is ineffective or deployed, the entire driver airbag, trim cover and horn switch must be replaced as a unit. 1. Place the driver airbag on a suitable work surface with the airbag cushion facing up. 2. Fold the two flaps (1) of cushion material up around the sides and over the top of the airbag cushion retainer strap (2). 3. Position the new driver airbag trim cover over the airbag cushion, then push the receptacle of the trim cover down evenly over the cushion. Be certain that the cushion material flaps remain oriented over the cushion retainer strap as they were in STEP 2. 4. Turn the driver airbag and the new driver airbag trim cover over as a unit, and place the unit on a suitable clean and dry work surface with the airbag cushion facing down. Be certain to take the proper precautions to prevent the trim cover from receiving cosmetic damage during the following procedures. 5. Be certain that the horn switch feed and ground pigtail wires are routed through the clearance notch at the top of the airbag housing (3), between the housing and the upper vertical wall of the trim cover receptacle. 6. Work around the perimeter of the unit engaging each of the 12 hooks (5 and 6) on the driver airbag housing through the 12 windows in the walls of the trim cover receptacle. 7. Install the horn switch ground pigtail wire eyelet terminal (2) over the upper right inflator stud on the back of the driver airbag housing. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Replacement > Page 12167 8. Install and tighten the nut that secures the horn switch ground pigtail wire eyelet terminal to the upper right inflator stud on the back of the driver airbag housing. Tighten the nut to 7 Nm (65 in. lbs.). 9. Using hand pressure, push the integral retainer of the horn switch feed pigtail wire connector (1) into the locator hole just above the upper right inflator mounting stud on the back of the airbag housing. 10. After the driver airbag has been assembled, try pulling the trim cover and the airbag housing away from each other. This action will fully seat the edges of the windows into the cradles of the hooks. 11. Before reinstalling the airbag onto the steering wheel, check that the blocking tab (1) in each of the trim cover windows is oriented over the airbag housing hook (4) as shown. 12. Reinstall the driver airbag onto the steering wheel See: Removal and Replacement/Driver Airbag - Installation. WARNING: DO NOT CONNECT THE BATTERY NEGATIVE CABLE. PERSONAL INJURY OR DEATH MAY RESULT IF THE SYSTEM TEST IS NOT PERFORMED FIRST. FOR THE SYSTEM TEST, See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code Tests and Associated Procedures/Verification Tests/Supplemental Restraints Verification Test Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Locations Air Bag Control Module: Locations Component ID: 210 Component : MODULE-OCCUPANT RESTRAINT CONTROLLER Connector: Name : MODULE-OCCUPANT RESTRAINT CONTROLLER C1 Color : YELLOW # of pins : 24 Pin Circuit Description 1-2-3 D55 20WT/OR CAN B BUS (+) 4 D54 20WT CAN B BUS (-) 5-6 G104 20VT/GY PASSENGER AIRBAG INDICATOR DRIVER 7 R104 20LB/LG PASSENGER AIRBAG MUX SWITCH RETURN 8 R106 20LG/LB PASSENGER AIRBAG MUX SWITCH SENSE 9 R81 20LB/WT LEFT FRONT IMPACT SENSOR GROUND 10 R79 20LB/VT LEFT FRONT IMPACT SENSOR SIGNAL 11 R82 20WT/LB RIGHT FRONT IMPACT SENSOR GROUND 12 R80 20VT/LB RIGHT FRONT IMPACT SENSOR SIGNAL 13 - 14 - 15 - 16 - 17 R43 20LG/BR DRIVER SQUIB 1 LINE 1 18 R45 20LG/OR DRIVER SQUIB 1 LINE 2 19 R44 20LB/OR PASSENGER SQUIB 1 LINE 2 20 R42 20LB/BR PASSENGER SQUIB 1 LINE 1 21 R61 20LG/VT DRIVER SQUIB 2 LINE 1 22 R63 20LG/WT DRIVER SQUIB 2 LINE 2 23 R64 20LB/WT PASSENGER SQUIB 2 LINE 1 24 R62 20LB/VT PASSENGER SQUIB 2 LINE 2 Component Location - 58 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 12171 Component Location - 63 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 12172 Component Location - 51 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 12173 Connector: Name : MODULE-OCCUPANT RESTRAINT CONTROLLER C2 Color : YELLOW # of pins : 32 Pin Circuit Description 1 R2 20WT/LB RIGHT CURTAIN SQUIB 1 LINE 2 2 R4 20OR/LB RIGHT CURTAIN SQUIB 1 LINE 1 3 R3 20LB/OR LEFT CURTAIN SQUIB 1 LINE 1 4 R1 20LB/WT LEFT CURTAIN SQUIB 1 LINE 2 5-- Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 12174 6-7-8-9 R53 20LG/YL DRIVER SEAT BELT TENSIONER LINE 2 10 R55 20LG/DG DRIVER SEAT BELT TENSIONER LINE 1 11 R56 20LB/DG PASSENGER SEAT BELT TENSIONER LINE 1 12 R54 20LB/YL PASSENGER SEAT BELT TENSIONER LINE 2 13 R1 20LB/WT LEFT CURTAIN SQUIB 1 LINE 2 14 R3 20LB/OR LEFT CURTAIN SQUIB 1 LINE 1 15 R4 20OR/LB RIGHT CURTAIN SQUIB 1 LINE 1 16 R2 20WT/LB RIGHT CURTAIN SQUIB 1 LINE 2 17 F201 20PK/OR FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) 18 F100 20PK/VT FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN) 19 - 20 Z104 18BK/LG GROUND 21 - 22 - 23 - 24 - 25 R261 20LB/TN DRIVER SEAT POSITION SENSOR DATA 26 R263 20LB/GY DRIVER SEAT POSITION SENSOR VOLTAGE 27 R14 20TN/LG RIGHT SIDE IMPACT SENSOR 1 SIGNAL 28 R16 20BR/LG RIGHT SIDE IMPACT SENSOR 1 GROUND 29 R15 20LG/BR LEFT SIDE IMPACT SENSOR 1 GROUND 30 R13 20LG/TN LEFT SIDE IMPACT SENSOR 1 SIGNAL 31 - 32 - Component Location - 58 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 12175 Component Location - 63 Component Location - 51 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 12176 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 12177 Air Bag Control Module: Diagrams Component ID: 210 Component : MODULE-OCCUPANT RESTRAINT CONTROLLER Connector: Name : MODULE-OCCUPANT RESTRAINT CONTROLLER C1 Color : YELLOW # of pins : 24 Pin Circuit Description 1-2-3 D55 20WT/OR CAN B BUS (+) 4 D54 20WT CAN B BUS (-) 5-6 G104 20VT/GY PASSENGER AIRBAG INDICATOR DRIVER 7 R104 20LB/LG PASSENGER AIRBAG MUX SWITCH RETURN 8 R106 20LG/LB PASSENGER AIRBAG MUX SWITCH SENSE 9 R81 20LB/WT LEFT FRONT IMPACT SENSOR GROUND 10 R79 20LB/VT LEFT FRONT IMPACT SENSOR SIGNAL 11 R82 20WT/LB RIGHT FRONT IMPACT SENSOR GROUND 12 R80 20VT/LB RIGHT FRONT IMPACT SENSOR SIGNAL 13 - 14 - 15 - 16 - 17 R43 20LG/BR DRIVER SQUIB 1 LINE 1 18 R45 20LG/OR DRIVER SQUIB 1 LINE 2 19 R44 20LB/OR PASSENGER SQUIB 1 LINE 2 20 R42 20LB/BR PASSENGER SQUIB 1 LINE 1 21 R61 20LG/VT DRIVER SQUIB 2 LINE 1 22 R63 20LG/WT DRIVER SQUIB 2 LINE 2 23 R64 20LB/WT PASSENGER SQUIB 2 LINE 1 24 R62 20LB/VT PASSENGER SQUIB 2 LINE 2 Component Location - 58 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 12178 Component Location - 63 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 12179 Component Location - 51 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 12180 Connector: Name : MODULE-OCCUPANT RESTRAINT CONTROLLER C2 Color : YELLOW # of pins : 32 Pin Circuit Description 1 R2 20WT/LB RIGHT CURTAIN SQUIB 1 LINE 2 2 R4 20OR/LB RIGHT CURTAIN SQUIB 1 LINE 1 3 R3 20LB/OR LEFT CURTAIN SQUIB 1 LINE 1 4 R1 20LB/WT LEFT CURTAIN SQUIB 1 LINE 2 5-- Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 12181 6-7-8-9 R53 20LG/YL DRIVER SEAT BELT TENSIONER LINE 2 10 R55 20LG/DG DRIVER SEAT BELT TENSIONER LINE 1 11 R56 20LB/DG PASSENGER SEAT BELT TENSIONER LINE 1 12 R54 20LB/YL PASSENGER SEAT BELT TENSIONER LINE 2 13 R1 20LB/WT LEFT CURTAIN SQUIB 1 LINE 2 14 R3 20LB/OR LEFT CURTAIN SQUIB 1 LINE 1 15 R4 20OR/LB RIGHT CURTAIN SQUIB 1 LINE 1 16 R2 20WT/LB RIGHT CURTAIN SQUIB 1 LINE 2 17 F201 20PK/OR FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) 18 F100 20PK/VT FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN) 19 - 20 Z104 18BK/LG GROUND 21 - 22 - 23 - 24 - 25 R261 20LB/TN DRIVER SEAT POSITION SENSOR DATA 26 R263 20LB/GY DRIVER SEAT POSITION SENSOR VOLTAGE 27 R14 20TN/LG RIGHT SIDE IMPACT SENSOR 1 SIGNAL 28 R16 20BR/LG RIGHT SIDE IMPACT SENSOR 1 GROUND 29 R15 20LG/BR LEFT SIDE IMPACT SENSOR 1 GROUND 30 R13 20LG/TN LEFT SIDE IMPACT SENSOR 1 SIGNAL 31 - 32 - Component Location - 58 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 12182 Component Location - 63 Component Location - 51 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 12183 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag Deactivation Switch > Component Information > Locations Air Bag Deactivation Switch: Locations Component ID: 498 Component : SWITCH-PASSENGER AIRBAG ON/OFF Connector: Name : SWITCH-PASSENGER AIRBAG ON/OFF Color : BLACK # of pins : 6 Pin Circuit Description 1 R106 20LG/LB PASSENGER AIRBAG MUX SWITCH SENSE 2 R104 20LB/LG PASSENGER AIRBAG MUX SWITCH RETURN 3 G104 20VT/GY PASSENGER AIRBAG INDICATOR DRIVER 4 F201 20PK/OR FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) 5-6-Component Location - 47 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag Deactivation Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 12187 Component Location - 45 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag Deactivation Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 12188 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag Deactivation Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 12189 Air Bag Deactivation Switch: Diagrams Component ID: 498 Component : SWITCH-PASSENGER AIRBAG ON/OFF Connector: Name : SWITCH-PASSENGER AIRBAG ON/OFF Color : BLACK # of pins : 6 Pin Circuit Description 1 R106 20LG/LB PASSENGER AIRBAG MUX SWITCH SENSE 2 R104 20LB/LG PASSENGER AIRBAG MUX SWITCH RETURN 3 G104 20VT/GY PASSENGER AIRBAG INDICATOR DRIVER 4 F201 20PK/OR FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) 5-6-Component Location - 47 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag Deactivation Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 12190 Component Location - 45 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag Deactivation Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 12191 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag Deactivation Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Air Bag Deactivation Switch: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The passenger airbag on/off switch (1) is standard equipment on all standard cab versions of this vehicle (except light-duty DR 1500) equipped with the dual front airbag system. This switch is a two-position, resistor multiplexed switch with a single integral amber Light-Emitting Diode (LED), and a non-coded key cylinder-type actuator. The switch is located in the lower right corner of the instrument panel center bezel, near the center of the instrument panel. When the switch is in its installed position, the only components visible through the dedicated opening of the center bezel are the switch bezel (2) and lens, the nomenclature imprinted on the lens, and the key cylinder actuator (3). The OFF position nomenclature of the switch is illuminated and visible only when that switch position is selected. The ON position of the switch is neither visible or illuminated but can be determined by the orientation of the slot of the key cylinder actuator. The remainder of the switch is concealed behind the switch bezel and the instrument panel center bezel. The passenger airbag on/off switch housing is constructed of molded plastic and has three integral mounting tabs. These mounting tabs are used to secure the switch to the back of the molded plastic switch bezel with three small screws. The molded plastic switch bezel also has three integral mounting tabs that are used to secure the switch and bezel unit to the instrument panel center bezel with three additional screws. A molded plastic connector receptacle on the back of the switch housing connects the switch to the vehicle electrical system through a dedicated take out and connector of the instrument panel wire harness. The molded plastic harness connector insulator is keyed and latched to ensure proper and secure switch electrical connections. The passenger airbag on/off switch cannot be adjusted or repaired and, if ineffective or damaged, the switch must be replaced. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag Deactivation Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 12194 Air Bag Deactivation Switch: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The passenger airbag on/off switch allows the customer to turn the passenger airbag function ON or OFF to accommodate certain uses of the right front seating position where airbag protection may not be desired. The OFF indicator of the switch will be illuminated whenever the switch is turned to the OFF position and the ignition switch is in the ON position. The ignition key is the only key or object that should ever be inserted into the key cylinder actuator of the switch. The on/off switch requires only a partial key insertion to fully depress a spring-loaded locking plunger. The spring-loaded locking plunger prevents the user from leaving the key in the switch. The key will be automatically ejected when force is not applied. To actuate the passenger airbag on/off switch, insert the ignition key into the switch key actuator far enough to fully depress the plunger, then rotate the actuator to the desired switch position. When the switch key actuator is rotated to its clockwise stop (the key actuator slot will be aligned with the OFF nomenclature), the OFF indicator is illuminated and the passenger airbag is disabled. When the switch is rotated to its counterclockwise stop (the key actuator slot will be in a vertical position) the OFF indicator will be extinguished and the passenger airbag is enabled. The OFF indicator and the enabling or disabling of the passenger airbag is controlled electronically by the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) based upon inputs it receives from the on/off switch. The passenger airbag on/off switch connects one of two internal resistors in series between the passenger airbag mux switch sense and passenger airbag mux switch return circuits of the ORC. The ORC continually monitors the resistance in these circuits to determine the switch position that has been selected. When the switch is in the OFF position, the ORC provides a ground input to the OFF indicator through the passenger airbag indicator driver circuit, which energizes the Light-Emitting Diode (LED) that illuminates the indicator. The ORC will store a Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) for any fault it detects in the passenger airbag on/off switch or OFF indicator circuits, and will illuminate the airbag indicator in the instrument cluster if a fault is detected. The hard wired circuits between the passenger airbag on/off switch and the ORC may be diagnosed using conventional diagnostic tools and procedures. However, conventional diagnostic methods will not prove conclusive in the diagnosis of the passenger airbag on/off switch or the electronic controls and communication between other modules and devices that provide some features of the supplemental restraint system. The most reliable, efficient, and accurate means to diagnose the passenger airbag on/off switch or the electronic controls and communication related to passenger airbag on/off switch operation requires the use of a diagnostic scan tool. Refer to the appropriate diagnostic information. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag Deactivation Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Air Bag Deactivation Switch: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury on vehicles equipped with airbags, disable the Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, airbag, seat belt tensioner, impact sensor, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the SRS. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment. NOTE: A passenger airbag on/off switch is used only on standard cab vehicles (except light-duty DR 1500) equipped with dual front airbags. Quad cab, mega cab and light-duty DR 1500 standard cab vehicles have a cubby bin installed in the instrument panel center bezel in place of the on/off switch. 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. Wait two minutes for the system capacitor to discharge before further service. 2. Remove the center bezel (1) from the instrument panel. See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Service and Repair/Instrument Panel Center Bezel - Removal . 3. From the back of the center bezel, remove the three screws (2) that secure the passenger airbag on/off switch and bezel unit (3) to the back of the center bezel. 4. Remove the passenger airbag on/off switch and bezel from the center bezel as a unit. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag Deactivation Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 12197 Air Bag Deactivation Switch: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury on vehicles equipped with airbags, disable the Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, airbag, seat belt tensioner, impact sensor, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the SRS. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment. NOTE: A passenger airbag on/off switch is used only on standard cab vehicles (except light-duty DR 1500) equipped with dual front airbags. Quad cab, mega cab and light-duty DR 1500 standard cab vehicles have a cubby bin installed in the instrument panel center bezel in place of the on/off switch. 1. Position the passenger airbag on/off switch and bezel unit (3) to the back of the center bezel (1). 2. Install and tighten the three screws (2) that secure the passenger airbag on/off switch bezel to the back of the center bezel. Tighten the screws to 2 Nm (17 in. lbs.). 3. Reinstall the center bezel onto the instrument panel. See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Service and Repair/Instrument Panel Center Bezel - Installation . 4. Do not reconnect the battery negative cable at this time. The Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) verification test procedure should be performed following service of any SRS component. See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code Tests and Associated Procedures/Verification Tests . Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Clockspring Assembly / Spiral Cable, Air Bag > Component Information > Locations Clockspring Assembly / Spiral Cable: Locations Component ID: 214 Component : MODULE-STEERING CONTROL Connector: Name : MODULE-STEERING CONTROL C1 Color : WHITE # of pins : 6 Pin Circuit Description 1 Z909 20BK GROUND 2 X20 20GY/WT RADIO CONTROL MUX 3 V38 20VT/OR S/C SWITCH NO. 2 SIGNAL 4 V37 20VT S/C SWITCH NO. 1 SIGNAL 5 V937 20VT/BR S/C SWITCH RETURN 6 X3 20DG/VT HORN SWITCH SENSE Component Location - 47 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Clockspring Assembly / Spiral Cable, Air Bag > Component Information > Locations > Page 12201 Component Location - 42 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Clockspring Assembly / Spiral Cable, Air Bag > Component Information > Locations > Page 12202 Component Location - 43 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Clockspring Assembly / Spiral Cable, Air Bag > Component Information > Locations > Page 12203 Connector: Name : MODULE-STEERING CONTROL C2 Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (PREMIUM) Pin Circuit Description 1 G902 22WT/BR SWITCH MUX RETURN Pin Circuit Description 1 G902 22WT/BR SWITCH MUX RETURN Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Clockspring Assembly / Spiral Cable, Air Bag > Component Information > Locations > Page 12204 2 X20 22GY/WT RADIO CONTROL MUX 2 X20 22GY/WT RADIO CONTROL MUX Component Location - 47 Component Location - 42 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Clockspring Assembly / Spiral Cable, Air Bag > Component Information > Locations > Page 12205 Component Location - 43 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Clockspring Assembly / Spiral Cable, Air Bag > Component Information > Locations > Page 12206 Connector: Name : MODULE-STEERING CONTROL C3 Color : # of pins : 4 Pin Circuit Description 1 X3 20DG/VT HORN SWITCH SENSE 2 V937 22DB/DG S/C SWITCH RETURN 2 K900 22DB/DG SENSOR GROUND 3 V37 22VT S/C SWITCH NO. 1 SIGNAL 4 V38 22VT/OR S/C SWITCH NO. 2 SIGNAL Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Clockspring Assembly / Spiral Cable, Air Bag > Component Information > Locations > Page 12207 Component Location - 47 Component Location - 42 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Clockspring Assembly / Spiral Cable, Air Bag > Component Information > Locations > Page 12208 Component Location - 43 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Clockspring Assembly / Spiral Cable, Air Bag > Component Information > Locations > Page 12209 Connector: Name : MODULE-STEERING CONTROL C4 Color : YELLOW # of pins : 4 Pin Circuit Description 1 R61 20LG/VT DRIVER SQUIB 2 LINE 1 2 R63 20LG/WT DRIVER SQUIB 2 LINE 2 3 R43 20LG/BR DRIVER SQUIB 1 LINE 1 4 R45 20LG/OR DRIVER SQUIB 1 LINE 2 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Clockspring Assembly / Spiral Cable, Air Bag > Component Information > Locations > Page 12210 Component Location - 47 Component Location - 42 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Clockspring Assembly / Spiral Cable, Air Bag > Component Information > Locations > Page 12211 Component Location - 43 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Clockspring Assembly / Spiral Cable, Air Bag > Component Information > Locations > Page 12212 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Clockspring Assembly / Spiral Cable, Air Bag > Component Information > Locations > Page 12213 Clockspring Assembly / Spiral Cable: Diagrams Component ID: 214 Component : MODULE-STEERING CONTROL Connector: Name : MODULE-STEERING CONTROL C1 Color : WHITE # of pins : 6 Pin Circuit Description 1 Z909 20BK GROUND 2 X20 20GY/WT RADIO CONTROL MUX 3 V38 20VT/OR S/C SWITCH NO. 2 SIGNAL 4 V37 20VT S/C SWITCH NO. 1 SIGNAL 5 V937 20VT/BR S/C SWITCH RETURN 6 X3 20DG/VT HORN SWITCH SENSE Component Location - 47 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Clockspring Assembly / Spiral Cable, Air Bag > Component Information > Locations > Page 12214 Component Location - 42 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Clockspring Assembly / Spiral Cable, Air Bag > Component Information > Locations > Page 12215 Component Location - 43 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Clockspring Assembly / Spiral Cable, Air Bag > Component Information > Locations > Page 12216 Connector: Name : MODULE-STEERING CONTROL C2 Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (PREMIUM) Pin Circuit Description 1 G902 22WT/BR SWITCH MUX RETURN Pin Circuit Description 1 G902 22WT/BR SWITCH MUX RETURN Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Clockspring Assembly / Spiral Cable, Air Bag > Component Information > Locations > Page 12217 2 X20 22GY/WT RADIO CONTROL MUX 2 X20 22GY/WT RADIO CONTROL MUX Component Location - 47 Component Location - 42 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Clockspring Assembly / Spiral Cable, Air Bag > Component Information > Locations > Page 12218 Component Location - 43 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Clockspring Assembly / Spiral Cable, Air Bag > Component Information > Locations > Page 12219 Connector: Name : MODULE-STEERING CONTROL C3 Color : # of pins : 4 Pin Circuit Description 1 X3 20DG/VT HORN SWITCH SENSE 2 V937 22DB/DG S/C SWITCH RETURN 2 K900 22DB/DG SENSOR GROUND 3 V37 22VT S/C SWITCH NO. 1 SIGNAL 4 V38 22VT/OR S/C SWITCH NO. 2 SIGNAL Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Clockspring Assembly / Spiral Cable, Air Bag > Component Information > Locations > Page 12220 Component Location - 47 Component Location - 42 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Clockspring Assembly / Spiral Cable, Air Bag > Component Information > Locations > Page 12221 Component Location - 43 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Clockspring Assembly / Spiral Cable, Air Bag > Component Information > Locations > Page 12222 Connector: Name : MODULE-STEERING CONTROL C4 Color : YELLOW # of pins : 4 Pin Circuit Description 1 R61 20LG/VT DRIVER SQUIB 2 LINE 1 2 R63 20LG/WT DRIVER SQUIB 2 LINE 2 3 R43 20LG/BR DRIVER SQUIB 1 LINE 1 4 R45 20LG/OR DRIVER SQUIB 1 LINE 2 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Clockspring Assembly / Spiral Cable, Air Bag > Component Information > Locations > Page 12223 Component Location - 47 Component Location - 42 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Clockspring Assembly / Spiral Cable, Air Bag > Component Information > Locations > Page 12224 Component Location - 43 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Clockspring Assembly / Spiral Cable, Air Bag > Component Information > Locations > Page 12225 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Clockspring Assembly / Spiral Cable, Air Bag > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Clockspring Assembly / Spiral Cable: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The clockspring assembly is located near the top of the steering column behind the steering wheel. Two mounting tabs (6) with round holes integral to the sides of the case are secured by two screws onto the multi-function switch mounting housing. For vehicles equipped with the Electronic Stability Program (ESP) the clockspring also includes an integral, internal Steering Angle Sensor (SAS) that is serviced as a unit with the clockspring. The clockspring consists of a flat, round molded plastic case (4) with a stubby tail that hangs below the steering column. Within the plastic case is a spool-like molded plastic rotor with a large exposed hub. The upper surface of the rotor hub has a large center hole, an engagement dowel (5), two short pigtail wires with connectors (1), and two connector receptacles (3) that face toward the steering wheel. Service replacement clocksprings are shipped pre-centered and with a molded plastic locking pin (2) that snaps into a receptacle on the rotor and is engaged with tabs on the upper surface of the clockspring case. The locking pin secures the centered clockspring rotor to the clockspring case during shipment and handling, but must be removed from the clockspring after it is installed on the steering column. See: Service and Repair/Procedures . The lower surface of the case (1) facing toward the instrument panel includes a locating tab (2) that is engaged by a locating pin on the multi-function switch mounting housing, two integral connector receptacles (5) and, on clocksprings with a SAS, an additional applied connector (4) with a short pigtail wire on the lower end, outboard of the two integral connector receptacles. The lower surface of the rotor hub also has a molded plastic turn signal cancel cam with two lobes (3) that is integral to the rotor. Within the plastic case and wound around the rotor spool is a long ribbon-like tape that consists of several thin copper wire leads sandwiched between two thin plastic membranes. The outer end of the tape terminates at the connector receptacles that face the instrument panel, while the inner end of the tape terminates at the pigtail wires and connector receptacles on the hub of the clockspring rotor that face the steering wheel. The clockspring cannot be repaired. If damaged, ineffective or if the driver airbag has been deployed, the clockspring must be replaced. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Clockspring Assembly / Spiral Cable, Air Bag > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 12228 Clockspring Assembly / Spiral Cable: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The clockspring is a mechanical electrical circuit component that is used to provide continuous electrical continuity between the fixed instrument panel wire harness and the electrical components mounted on or in the rotating steering wheel. On this vehicle the rotating electrical components include the driver airbag, the horn switch, the speed control switches, and the remote radio switches, if the vehicle is so equipped. The clockspring case is positioned and secured to the multi-function switch mounting housing near the top of the steering column. The connector receptacles on the tail of the fixed clockspring case connect the clockspring to the vehicle electrical system through two take outs with connectors from the instrument panel wire harness. The clockspring rotor is movable and is keyed by an engagement dowel that is molded onto the rotor hub between two fins that are cast into the lower surface of the steering wheel armature. A yellow rubber boot is installed over the engagement dowel to eliminate contact noise between the dowel and the steering wheel. The two lobes on the turn signal cancel cam on the lower surface of the clockspring rotor hub contact a turn signal cancel actuator of the multi-function switch to provide automatic turn signal cancellation. Two short, yellow-sleeved pigtail wires on the upper surface of the clockspring rotor connect the clockspring to the multistage driver airbag, while a steering wheel wire harness connects the two connector receptacles on the upper surface of the clockspring rotor to the horn switch feed pigtail wire connector and, if the vehicle is so equipped, to the optional speed control and remote radio switches on the steering wheel. Like the clockspring in a timepiece, the clockspring tape has travel limits and can be damaged by being wound too tightly during full stop-to-stop steering wheel rotation. To prevent this from occurring, the clockspring is centered when it is installed on the steering column. Centering the clockspring indexes the clockspring tape to the movable steering components so that the tape can operate within its designed travel limits. However, if the clockspring is removed from the steering column or if the steering shaft is disconnected from the steering gear, the clockspring spool can change position relative to the movable steering components. The clockspring must be re-centered following completion of this service or the tape may be damaged. Service replacement clocksprings are shipped pre-centered and with a plastic locking pin installed. This locking pin should not be removed until the clockspring has been installed on the steering column. If the locking pin is removed before the clockspring is installed on a steering column, the clockspring centering procedure must be performed. See: Service and Repair/Procedures . The clockspring as well as the hard wired inputs and outputs of the clockspring may be diagnosed using conventional diagnostic tools and procedures. Refer to the appropriate wiring information. However, on vehicles equipped with Electronic Stability Program (ESP) conventional diagnostic methods will not prove conclusive in the diagnosis of the Steering Angle Sensor (SAS) within the clockspring or the electronic controls or communication between other modules and devices that provide features of the ESP. The most reliable, efficient, and accurate means to diagnose the SAS or the electronic controls and communication related to ESP operation requires the use of a diagnostic scan tool. Refer to the appropriate diagnostic information. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Clockspring Assembly / Spiral Cable, Air Bag > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures Clockspring Assembly / Spiral Cable: Procedures CLOCKSPRING CENTERING WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury on vehicles equipped with airbags, disable the Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, airbag, seat belt tensioner, impact sensor, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the SRS. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment. NOTE: Before starting this procedure, be certain to turn the steering wheel until the front wheels are in the straight-ahead position. 1. Place the front wheels in the straight-ahead position. 2. Remove the clockspring from the steering column. See: Removal and Replacement/Removal . 3. Rotate the clockspring rotor (7) clockwise to the end of its travel. Do not apply excessive torque. 4. From the end of the clockwise travel, rotate the rotor about two and one-half turns counterclockwise. The engagement dowel (5) should end up at the bottom, and the airbag pigtail wires (1) and connector receptacles (3) should be at the top. Turn the rotor slightly clockwise or counterclockwise as necessary so that the slots for the clockspring locking pin (2) are in alignment. 5. The clockspring is now centered. Secure the clockspring rotor to the clockspring case to maintain clockspring centering until it is reinstalled on the steering column. 6. The front wheels should still be in the straight-ahead position. Reinstall the clockspring onto the steering column. See: Removal and Replacement/Installation . Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Clockspring Assembly / Spiral Cable, Air Bag > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 12231 Clockspring Assembly / Spiral Cable: Removal and Replacement Removal REMOVAL WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury on vehicles equipped with airbags, disable the Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, airbag, seat belt tensioner, impact sensor, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the SRS. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment. NOTE: Before starting this procedure, be certain to turn the steering wheel until the front wheels are in the straight-ahead position. 1. Place the front wheels in the straight ahead position. 2. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. 3. Remove the driver airbag from the steering wheel. See: Air Bag/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Driver Airbag - Removal . 4. Disconnect the steering wheel wire harness connectors from the upper clockspring connector receptacles. CAUTION: Be certain that the screws that secure the steering wheel puller to the steering wheel are fully engaged in the steering wheel armature without passing through the steering wheel and damaging the clockspring. 5. Remove the steering wheel from the steering column. See: Steering and Suspension/Steering/Steering Wheel/Service and Repair/Removal . 6. Remove the steering column opening cover from the instrument panel. See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Service and Repair/Steering Column Opening Cover - Removal . 7. Remove the screw (2) that secures the tilt steering column knob (1) and remove it from the tilt actuator (3) on the left side of the column. 8. From below the steering column, remove the two outboard screws that secure the upper column shroud (1) to the lower shroud (3). 9. Using hand pressure, push gently inward on both sides of the upper shroud above the parting line of the lower shroud to release the snap features that secure the two shroud halves to each other. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Clockspring Assembly / Spiral Cable, Air Bag > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 12232 10. Remove the upper shroud from the lower shroud and the steering column. 11. Remove the one center screw that secures the lower shroud to the steering column (4). 12. Remove the lower shroud from the steering column. 13. Disconnect the two instrument panel wire harness connectors from the two connector receptacles located below the steering column on the back of the clockspring housing. 14. On vehicles equipped with Electronic Stability Program (ESP), disconnect the instrument panel wire harness connector from the applied connector for the Steering Angle Sensor (SAS) located below the steering column on the back of the clockspring housing. 15. Remove the two screws (2) that secure the clockspring (4) to the multi-function switch mounting housing on the steering column (3). 16. Remove the clockspring from the multi-function switch mounting housing. The clockspring cannot be repaired. It must be replaced if ineffective or damaged, or if the driver airbag has been deployed. 17. If the removed clockspring is to be reused, be certain to secure the clockspring rotor to the clockspring case to maintain clockspring centering until it is reinstalled on the steering column. If clockspring centering is not maintained, the clockspring must be centered again before it is reinstalled. See: Procedures . Installation INSTALLATION WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury on vehicles equipped with airbags, disable the Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, airbag, seat belt tensioner, impact sensor, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the SRS. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment. CAUTION: If the clockspring is not properly centered in relation to the steering wheel, steering shaft and steering gear, it may be damaged. See: Procedures. Service replacement clocksprings are shipped pre-centered and with a locking pin installed. This locking pin should not be removed until the clockspring has been installed on the steering column. If the locking pin is removed before the clockspring is installed on a steering column, the clockspring centering procedure must be performed. NOTE: Before starting this procedure, be certain that the front wheels are still in the straight-ahead position. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Clockspring Assembly / Spiral Cable, Air Bag > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 12233 1. While holding the centered clockspring rotor and case stationary in relation to each other, or with the plastic locking pin (1) installed, carefully slide the clockspring down over the steering column (3) upper shaft. 2. Align and seat the hole in the locating tab on the clockspring case over the locating pin on the multi-function switch mounting housing. 3. Install and tighten the two screws (2) that secure the clockspring to the multi-function switch mounting housing. Tighten the screws to 2 Nm (20 in. lbs.). 4. Reconnect the two instrument panel wire harness connectors to the two connector receptacles located below the steering column on the back of the clockspring housing. 5. On vehicles equipped with the Electronic Stability Program (ESP), reconnect the instrument panel wire harness connector to the applied connector for the Steering Angle Sensor (SAS) located below the steering column on the back of the clockspring housing. 6. Position the lower shroud (3) onto the steering column (4). 7. From below the steering column, install and tighten the one center screw that secures the lower shroud to the steering column. Tighten the screw to 2 Nm (20 in. lbs.). 8. Position the upper shroud (1) onto the steering column over the lower shroud. If the vehicle is equipped with an automatic transmission, be certain to engage the gearshift lever gap hider into the opening in the right side of both shroud halves. 9. Align the snap features on the upper shroud with the receptacles on the lower shroud and apply hand pressure to snap them together. 10. Install and tighten the two outboard screws that secure the upper shroud to the lower shroud. Tighten the screws to 2 Nm (20 in. lbs.). 11. Position the tilt steering column knob (1) onto the tilt adjuster actuator (3) on the left side of the steering column, then install and tighten the screw (2) to secure the knob to the actuator. Tighten the screw to 2 Nm (20 in. lbs.). 12. Reinstall the steering column opening cover onto the instrument panel. See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Service and Repair/Steering Column Opening Cover - Installation . 13. If a new clockspring has been installed, remove the plastic locking pin that is securing the clockspring rotor to the clockspring case to maintain clockspring centering. NOTE: When reinstalling the steering wheel, be certain to index the engagement dowel on the upper surface of the clockspring rotor between the two fins cast into the lower surface of the steering wheel armature hub. 14. Reinstall the steering wheel onto the steering column. See: Steering and Suspension/Steering/Steering Wheel/Service and Repair/Installation . 15. Reconnect the steering wheel wire harness connectors to the upper clockspring connector receptacles. Be certain that the steering wheel wire Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Clockspring Assembly / Spiral Cable, Air Bag > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 12234 harness is routed between the steering wheel back trim cover and the steering wheel armature. 16. Reinstall the driver airbag onto the steering wheel. See: Air Bag/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Driver Airbag - Installation . 17. Reconnect the battery negative cable. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Front Impact-Left Impact Sensor: Locations Sensor-Front Impact-Left Component ID: 417 Component : SENSOR-FRONT IMPACT-LEFT Connector: Name : SENSOR-FRONT IMPACT-LEFT Color : YELLOW # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (GAS) Pin Circuit Description 1 R81 20LB/WT LEFT FRONT IMPACT SENSOR GROUND 2 R79 20LB/VT LEFT FRONT IMPACT SENSOR SIGNAL Component Location - 30 Fig.30-Left Engine Compartment Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Front Impact-Left > Page 12239 Impact Sensor: Locations Sensor-Front Impact-Right Component ID: 418 Component : SENSOR-FRONT IMPACT-RIGHT Connector: Name : SENSOR-FRONT IMPACT-RIGHT Color : YELLOW # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (GAS) Pin Circuit Description 1 R82 20WT/LB RIGHT FRONT IMPACT SENSOR GROUND 2 R80 20VT/LB RIGHT FRONT IMPACT SENSOR SIGNAL Component Location - 29 Fig. 29-Right Side Engine Compartment Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Front Impact-Left > Page 12240 Impact Sensor: Locations Sensor-Side Impact-Left 1 Component ID: 438 Component : SENSOR-SIDE IMPACT-LEFT 1 Connector: Name : SENSOR-SIDE IMPACT-LEFT 1 Color : YELLOW # of pins : 4 Pin Circuit Description 1 R13 20LG/TN LEFT SIDE IMPACT SENSOR 1 SIGNAL 2 R15 20LG/BR LEFT SIDE IMPACT SENSOR 1 GROUND 3-4-Component Location - 58 Fig. 58-Left Side Body (Standard Cab) Component Location - 63 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Front Impact-Left > Page 12241 Fig. 63-Left Side Body (Quad Cab/Mega Cab) Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Front Impact-Left > Page 12242 Impact Sensor: Locations Sensor-Side Impact-Right 1 Component ID: 439 Component : SENSOR-SIDE IMPACT-RIGHT 1 Connector: Name : SENSOR-SIDE IMPACT-RIGHT 1 Color : YELLOW # of pins : 4 Pin Circuit Description 1 R14 20TN/LG RIGHT SIDE IMPACT SENSOR 1 SIGNAL 2 R16 20BR/LG RIGHT SIDE IMPACT SENSOR 1 GROUND 3-4-Component Location - 61 Fig. 61-Right Side Body (Standard Cab) Component Location - 64 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Front Impact-Left > Page 12243 Fig. 64-Right Side Body (Quad Cab/Mega Cab) Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Front Impact-Left Impact Sensor: Diagrams Sensor-Front Impact-Left Component ID: 417 Component : SENSOR-FRONT IMPACT-LEFT Connector: Name : SENSOR-FRONT IMPACT-LEFT Color : YELLOW # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (GAS) Pin Circuit Description 1 R81 20LB/WT LEFT FRONT IMPACT SENSOR GROUND 2 R79 20LB/VT LEFT FRONT IMPACT SENSOR SIGNAL Component Location - 30 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Front Impact-Left > Page 12246 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Front Impact-Left > Page 12247 Impact Sensor: Diagrams Sensor-Front Impact-Right Component ID: 418 Component : SENSOR-FRONT IMPACT-RIGHT Connector: Name : SENSOR-FRONT IMPACT-RIGHT Color : YELLOW # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (GAS) Pin Circuit Description 1 R82 20WT/LB RIGHT FRONT IMPACT SENSOR GROUND 2 R80 20VT/LB RIGHT FRONT IMPACT SENSOR SIGNAL Component Location - 29 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Front Impact-Left > Page 12248 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Front Impact-Left > Page 12249 Impact Sensor: Diagrams Sensor-Side Impact-Left 1 Component ID: 438 Component : SENSOR-SIDE IMPACT-LEFT 1 Connector: Name : SENSOR-SIDE IMPACT-LEFT 1 Color : YELLOW # of pins : 4 Pin Circuit Description 1 R13 20LG/TN LEFT SIDE IMPACT SENSOR 1 SIGNAL 2 R15 20LG/BR LEFT SIDE IMPACT SENSOR 1 GROUND 3-4-Component Location - 58 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Front Impact-Left > Page 12250 Component Location - 63 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Front Impact-Left > Page 12251 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Front Impact-Left > Page 12252 Impact Sensor: Diagrams Sensor-Side Impact-Right 1 Component ID: 439 Component : SENSOR-SIDE IMPACT-RIGHT 1 Connector: Name : SENSOR-SIDE IMPACT-RIGHT 1 Color : YELLOW # of pins : 4 Pin Circuit Description 1 R14 20TN/LG RIGHT SIDE IMPACT SENSOR 1 SIGNAL 2 R16 20BR/LG RIGHT SIDE IMPACT SENSOR 1 GROUND 3-4-Component Location - 61 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Front Impact-Left > Page 12253 Component Location - 64 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Front Impact-Left > Page 12254 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Impact Sensor: Description and Operation Description Front FRONT Two front impact sensors (1) are used on this vehicle, one each for the left and right sides of the vehicle. These sensors are mounted remotely from the impact sensor that is internal to the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC). Each front impact sensor is secured with a screw to the back of the right or left end of the lower radiator crossmember within the engine compartment. The sensor housing has an integral connector receptacle (4), an integral anti-rotation pin (3), and an integral mounting hole (2) with a metal sleeve to provide crush protection. The right and left front impact sensors are identical in construction and calibration. A cavity in the center of the molded black plastic impact sensor housing contains the electronic circuitry of the sensor which includes an electronic communication chip and an electronic impact sensor. Potting material fills the cavity to seal and protect the internal electronic circuitry and components. The front impact sensors are each connected to the vehicle electrical system through a dedicated take out and connector of the headlamp and dash wire harness. The front impact sensors cannot be repaired or adjusted and, if damaged or ineffective, they must be replaced. Side SIDE Two side impact sensors (1) are used on this vehicle when it is equipped with the optional side curtain airbags, one each for the left and right sides of the vehicle. These sensors are mounted remotely from the impact sensor that is internal to the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC). Each side sensor is secured with a nut within the right or left B-pillar just above the front seat belt retractors and behind the lower B-pillar trim within the passenger compartment. The sensor housing has an integral connector receptacle (2), an integral mounting stud (3), and an integral anti-rotation pin. The right and left side impact sensors are identical in construction and calibration. A cavity in the center of the molded plastic impact sensor housing contains the electronic circuitry of the sensor which includes an electronic communication chip and an electronic impact sensor. Potting material fills the cavity to seal and protect the internal electronic circuitry and components. The side impact sensors are each connected to the vehicle electrical system through a dedicated take out and connector of the body wire harness. The side impact sensors cannot be repaired or adjusted and, if damaged or ineffective, they must be replaced. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 12257 Impact Sensor: Description and Operation Operation Front FRONT The front impact sensors are electronic accelerometers that sense the rate of vehicle deceleration, which provides verification of the direction and severity of an impact. Each sensor also contains an electronic communication chip that allows the unit to communicate the sensor status as well as sensor fault information to the microprocessor in the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC). The ORC microprocessor continuously monitors all of the passive restraint system electrical circuits to determine the system readiness. If the ORC detects a monitored system fault, it sets a Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) and controls the airbag indicator operation accordingly. The impact sensors each receive battery current and ground through dedicated left and right sensor plus and minus circuits from the ORC. The impact sensors and the ORC communicate by modulating the voltage in the sensor plus circuit. The hard wired circuits between the front impact sensors and the ORC may be diagnosed using conventional diagnostic tools and procedures. Refer to the appropriate wiring information. However, conventional diagnostic methods will not prove conclusive in the diagnosis of the impact sensors or the electronic controls or communication between other modules and devices that provide features of the Supplemental Restraint System (SRS). The most reliable, efficient, and accurate means to diagnose the impact sensors or the electronic controls and communication related to front impact sensor operation requires the use of a diagnostic scan tool. Refer to the appropriate diagnostic information. Side SIDE The side impact sensors are electronic accelerometers that sense the rate of vehicle deceleration, which provides verification of the direction and severity of an impact. Each sensor also contains an electronic communication chip that allows the unit to communicate the sensor status as well as sensor fault information to the microprocessor in the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC). The ORC microprocessor continuously monitors all of the side passive restraint system electrical circuits to determine the system readiness. If the ORC detects a monitored system fault, it sets a Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) and controls the airbag indicator operation accordingly. The impact sensors each receive battery current and ground through left or right sensor plus and minus circuits from the ORC. The impact sensors and the ORC communicate by modulating the voltage in the sensor plus circuit. The hard wired circuits between the side impact sensors and the ORC may be diagnosed using conventional diagnostic tools and procedures. Refer to the appropriate wiring information. However, conventional diagnostic methods will not prove conclusive in the diagnosis of the impact sensors or the electronic controls or communication between other modules and devices that provide features of the Supplemental Restraint System (SRS). The most reliable, efficient, and accurate means to diagnose the impact sensors or the electronic controls and communication related to side impact sensor operation requires the use of a diagnostic scan tool. Refer to the appropriate diagnostic information. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Impact Sensor: Service and Repair Removal Front FRONT WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury on vehicles equipped with airbags, disable the Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, airbag, seat belt tensioner, impact sensor, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the SRS. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment. WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury, never strike or drop the front impact sensor, as it can damage the impact sensor or affect its calibration. The front impact sensor enables the system to deploy the front Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) components. If an impact sensor is accidentally dropped during service, the sensor must be scrapped and replaced with a new unit. Failure to observe this warning could result in accidental, incomplete, or improper front SRS component deployment. 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. Wait two minutes for the system capacitor to discharge before further service. 2. Remove the screw (4) that secures the right or left front impact sensor (3) to the back of the right or left end of the lower radiator crossmember (1). 3. Disconnect the headlamp and dash wire harness connector (2) from the sensor connector receptacle. 4. Remove the right or left front impact sensor from the engine compartment. Side - Mega Cab SIDE - MEGA CAB WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury on vehicles equipped with airbags, disable the Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, airbag, seat belt tensioner, impact sensor, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the SRS. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment. WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury, never strike or drop the side impact sensor, as it can damage the impact sensor or affect its calibration. The side impact sensor enables the system to deploy the side Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) components. If an impact sensor is accidentally dropped during service, the sensor must be scrapped and replaced with a new unit. Failure to observe this warning could result in accidental, incomplete, or improper side SRS component deployment. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 12260 1. Adjust the front seat to its most forward position for easiest access to the B-pillar trim. 2. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. Wait two minutes for the system capacitor to discharge before further service. 3. Remove the nut (3) that secures the stud of the side impact sensor (4) to the inner B-pillar (2). 4. Reach through the large hole above the retractor mounting hole in the inner B-pillar to access the side impact sensor and disengage the anti-rotation pin and mounting stud from the holes in the inner B-pillar. 5. Pull the side impact sensor out through the large hole in the B-pillar far enough to access and disconnect the body wire harness connector (1) from the sensor connector receptacle. 6. Remove the side impact sensor from the B-pillar. Side - Quad Cab SIDE - QUAD CAB WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury on vehicles equipped with airbags, disable the Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, airbag, seat belt tensioner, impact sensor, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the SRS. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment. WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury, never strike or drop the side impact sensor, as it can damage the impact sensor or affect its calibration. The side impact sensor enables the system to deploy the side Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) components. If an impact sensor is accidentally dropped during service, the sensor must be scrapped and replaced with a new unit. Failure to observe this warning could result in accidental, incomplete, or improper side SRS component deployment. 1. Adjust the front seat to its most forward position for easiest access to the B-pillar trim. 2. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. Wait two minutes for the system capacitor to discharge before further service. 3. Remove the nut (3) that secures the stud of the side impact sensor (2) to the inner B-pillar (1). 4. Reach through the large hole above the retractor mounting hole in the inner B-pillar to access the side impact sensor and disengage the anti-rotation pin and mounting stud from the holes in the inner B-pillar. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 12261 5. Pull the side impact sensor out through the large hole in the B-pillar far enough to access and disconnect the body wire harness connector (4) from the sensor connector receptacle. 6. Remove the side impact sensor from the B-pillar. Side - Standard Cab SIDE - STANDARD CAB WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury on vehicles equipped with airbags, disable the Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, airbag, seat belt tensioner, impact sensor, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the SRS. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment. WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury, never strike or drop the side impact sensor, as it can damage the impact sensor or affect its calibration. The side impact sensor enables the system to deploy the side Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) components. If an impact sensor is accidentally dropped during service, the sensor must be scrapped and replaced with a new unit. Failure to observe this warning could result in accidental, incomplete, or improper side SRS component deployment. 1. Adjust the driver or passenger side front seat to its most forward position for easiest access to the B-pillar trim. 2. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. Wait two minutes for the system capacitor to discharge before further service. 3. Remove the front outboard seat belt and retractor from the inside of the B-pillar. See: Seat Belt Systems/Seat Belt Retractor/Service and Repair/Seat Belt and Retractor - Removal . 4. Remove the nut (4) that secures the stud of the side impact sensor (1) to the inner B-pillar. 5. Reach through the retractor mounting hole (3) in the inner B-pillar to access the side impact sensor and disengage the anti-rotation pin and mounting stud from the holes in the inner B-pillar. 6. Pull the side impact sensor out of the B-pillar far enough to access and disconnect the body wire harness connector (2) from the sensor connector receptacle. 7. Remove the sensor from the B-pillar. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 12262 Impact Sensor: Service and Repair Installation Front FRONT WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury on vehicles equipped with airbags, disable the Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, airbag, seat belt tensioner, impact sensor, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the SRS. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment. WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury, never strike or drop the front impact sensor, as it can damage the impact sensor or affect its calibration. The front impact sensor enables the system to deploy the front Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) components. If an impact sensor is accidentally dropped during service, the sensor must be scrapped and replaced with a new unit. Failure to observe this warning could result in accidental, incomplete, or improper front SRS component deployment. 1. Position the right or left front impact sensor (3) into the engine compartment. 2. Reconnect the headlamp and dash wire harness connector (2) to the sensor connector receptacle. 3. Carefully position the sensor onto the back of the right or left end of the lower radiator crossmember (1). Be certain that the anti-rotation pin on the back of the sensor is engaged in the clearance hole of the crossmember. 4. Install and tighten the screw (4) that secures the sensor to the back of the crossmember. Tighten the screw to 10 Nm (90 in. lbs.). 5. Do not reconnect the battery negative cable at this time. The Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) verification test procedure should be performed following service of any SRS component. See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code Tests and Associated Procedures/Verification Tests . Side - Mega Cab SIDE - MEGA CAB WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury on vehicles equipped with airbags, disable the Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, airbag, seat belt tensioner, impact sensor, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the SRS. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment. WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury, never strike or drop the side impact sensor, as it can damage the impact sensor or affect its calibration. The side impact sensor enables the system to deploy the side Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) components. If an impact sensor is accidentally dropped during service, the sensor must be scrapped and replaced with a new unit. Failure to observe this warning could result in accidental, incomplete, or improper side SRS component deployment. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 12263 1. Position the side impact sensor (4) to the large hole above the retractor mounting hole in the inner B-pillar (2). 2. Reconnect the body wire harness connector (1) to the sensor connector receptacle. 3. Reach through the large hole above the retractor mounting hole in the inner B-pillar to position and engage the anti-rotation pin and the stud on the side impact sensor to the locating slot and mounting hole from the inside of the B-pillar. 4. Install and tighten the nut (3) that secures the side impact sensor stud to the inner B-pillar. Tighten the nut to 8 Nm (70 in. lbs.). 5. Do not reconnect the battery negative cable at this time. The Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) verification test procedure should be performed following service of any SRS component. See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code Tests and Associated Procedures/Verification Tests . Side - Quad Cab SIDE - QUAD CAB WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury on vehicles equipped with airbags, disable the Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, airbag, seat belt tensioner, impact sensor, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the SRS. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment. WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury, never strike or drop the side impact sensor, as it can damage the impact sensor or affect its calibration. The side impact sensor enables the system to deploy the side Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) components. If an impact sensor is accidentally dropped during service, the sensor must be scrapped and replaced with a new unit. Failure to observe this warning could result in accidental, incomplete, or improper side SRS component deployment. 1. Position the side impact sensor (2) to the large hole above the retractor mounting hole in the inner B-pillar (1). 2. Reconnect the body wire harness connector (4) to the sensor connector receptacle. 3. Reach through the large hole above the retractor mounting hole in the inner B-pillar to position and engage the anti-rotation pin and the stud on the side impact sensor to the locating slot and mounting hole from the inside of the B-pillar. 4. Install and tighten the nut (3) that secures the side impact sensor stud to the inner B-pillar. Tighten the nut to 8 Nm (70 in. lbs.). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 12264 5. Do not reconnect the battery negative cable at this time. The Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) verification test procedure should be performed following service of any SRS component. See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code Tests and Associated Procedures/Verification Tests . Side - Standard Cab SIDE - STANDARD CAB WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury on vehicles equipped with airbags, disable the Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, airbag, seat belt tensioner, impact sensor, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the SRS. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment. WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury, never strike or drop the side impact sensor, as it can damage the impact sensor or affect its calibration. The side impact sensor enables the system to deploy the side Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) components. If an impact sensor is accidentally dropped during service, the sensor must be scrapped and replaced with a new unit. Failure to observe this warning could result in accidental, incomplete, or improper side SRS component deployment. 1. Position the side impact sensor (1) to the retractor mounting hole (3) in the inner B-pillar. 2. Reconnect the body wire harness connector (2) to the sensor connector receptacle. 3. Reach through the retractor mounting hole in the inner B-pillar to position and engage the anti-rotation pin and the stud on the side impact sensor to the locating slot and mounting hole from the inside of the B-pillar. 4. Install and tighten the nut (4) that secures the side impact sensor stud to the inner B-pillar. Tighten the nut to 8 Nm (70 in. lbs.). 5. Reinstall the front outboard seat belt and retractor to the inside of the B-pillar. See: Seat Belt Systems/Seat Belt Retractor/Service and Repair/Seat Belt and Retractor - Installation . 6. Do not reconnect the battery negative cable at this time. The Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) verification test procedure should be performed following service of any SRS component. See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code Tests and Associated Procedures/Verification Tests . Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Seat Occupant Classification Module - Air Bag > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Seat Occupant Classification Module - Air Bag: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) (1) is located in the passenger compartment of the vehicle, where it is secured by three nuts to three studs on a stamped steel mounting bracket welded onto the top of the floor panel transmission tunnel under the center front seat section or the center floor console, as the vehicle is equipped. Concealed within a hollow in the center of the die cast aluminum ORC housing is the electronic circuitry of the ORC which includes a microprocessor, an electronic impact sensor, an electronic safing sensor, and an energy storage capacitor. A stamped metal cover plate is secured to the bottom of the ORC housing with screws to enclose and protect the internal electronic circuitry and components. An arrow (2) printed on the label (3) on the top of the ORC housing provides a visual verification of the proper orientation of the unit, and should always be pointed toward the front of the vehicle. The ORC housing has integral mounting flanges on three corners. The mounting flange to the right of the connector receptacles (4) has an integral locating pin on its lower surface. Both right side flanges have round mounting holes, while the flange on the left side has a slotted mounting hole. A molded plastic electrical connector (4) with 2 receptacles, one containing 24 terminal pins and the other containing 32 terminal pins, exits the forward facing side of the ORC housing. These terminal pins connect the ORC to the vehicle electrical system through two dedicated take outs and connectors, one each from the instrument panel and the body wire harnesses. A molded plastic protective cover is installed over the ORC to provide additional moisture contamination protection to the unit. Integral latch features on each side of the cover engage a slot (5) on each side of the base of the ORC housing to secure the cover to the ORC. This protective cover must be reinstalled following any service requiring its removal. The impact sensor and safing sensor internal to the ORC are calibrated for the specific vehicle, and are only serviced as a unit with the ORC. In addition, there are unique versions of the ORC for light and heavy-duty vehicles, and for vehicles with or without the optional side curtain airbags. The ORC cannot be repaired or adjusted and, if damaged or ineffective, it must be replaced. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Seat Occupant Classification Module - Air Bag > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 12269 Seat Occupant Classification Module - Air Bag: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The microprocessor in the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) contains the Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) logic circuits and controls all of the SRS components. The ORC uses On-Board Diagnostics (OBD) and can communicate with other electronic modules in the vehicle as well as with the diagnostic scan tool using the Controller Area Network (CAN) data bus. This method of communication is used for control of the airbag indicator in the ElectroMechanical Instrument Cluster (EMIC) (also known as the Cab Compartment Node/CCN) and for SRS diagnosis and testing through the 16-way Data Link Connector (DLC) located on the driver side lower edge of the instrument panel. See: Malfunction Lamp / Indicator/Description and Operation/Operation . The ORC microprocessor continuously monitors all of the SRS electrical circuits to determine the system readiness. If the ORC detects a monitored system fault, it sets an active and stored Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) and sends electronic messages to the EMIC over the CAN data bus to turn ON the airbag indicator. An active fault only remains for the duration of the fault, or in some cases for the duration of the current ignition switch cycle, while a stored fault causes a DTC to be stored in memory by the ORC. For some DTCs, if a fault does not recur for a number of ignition cycles, the ORC will automatically erase the stored DTC. For other internal faults, the stored DTC is latched forever. In standard cab vehicles (except light-duty DR 1500), the ORC also monitors a resistor multiplexed input from the passenger airbag on/off switch. If the passenger airbag on/off switch is set to the OFF position, the ORC turns ON the passenger airbag on/off indicator and will internally disable the passenger airbag and, on light-duty DR 1500 only, the seat belt tensioner from being deployed. The ORC receives battery current through two circuits; a fused ignition switch output (run) circuit through a fuse in the Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM), and a fused ignition switch output (run-start) circuit through a second fuse in the TIPM. The ORC receives ground through a ground circuit and take out of the instrument panel wire harness. This take out has a single eyelet terminal connector that is secured by a ground screw to the instrument panel structural support. These connections allow the ORC to be operational whenever the ignition switch is in the START or ON positions. The ORC also contains an energy-storage capacitor. When the ignition switch is in the START or ON positions, this capacitor is continually being charged with enough electrical energy to deploy the SRS components for up to one second following a battery disconnect or failure. The purpose of the capacitor is to provide backup SRS protection in case there is a loss of battery current supply to the ORC during an impact. Two sensors are contained within the ORC, an electronic impact sensor and a safing sensor. The ORC also monitors inputs from two remote front impact sensors located on the back of the right and left ends of the lower radiator crossmember near the front of the vehicle. The electronic impact sensors are accelerometers that sense the rate of vehicle deceleration, which provide verification of the direction and severity of an impact. On vehicles equipped with optional side curtain airbags the ORC also monitors inputs from two additional remote impact sensors located within both the left and right B-pillars to control deployment of the side curtain airbag units. The safing sensor is an electronic accelerometer sensor within the ORC that provides an additional logic input to the ORC microprocessor. The safing sensor is used to verify the need for a SRS deployment by detecting impact energy of a lesser magnitude than that of the primary electronic impact sensors, and must exceed a safing threshold in order for the airbags to deploy. Vehicles equipped with optional side curtain airbags feature a second safing sensor within the ORC to provide confirmation to the ORC microprocessor of side impact forces. This second safing sensor is a bi-directional unit that detects impact forces from either side of the vehicle. Pre-programmed decision algorithms in the ORC microprocessor determine when the deceleration rate as signaled by the impact sensors and the safing sensors indicate an impact that is severe enough to require SRS protection and, based upon the severity of the monitored impact, determines the level of front airbag deployment force required for each front seating position. When the programmed conditions are met, the ORC sends the proper electrical signals to deploy the dual multistage front airbags at the programmed force levels and, if the vehicle is so equipped, the front seat belt tensioners or either side curtain airbag unit. On standard cab vehicles except light-duty DR 1500, the passenger front airbag will be deployed by the ORC only if enabled by the passenger airbag on/off switch at the time of the impact. The hard wired inputs and outputs for the ORC may be diagnosed using conventional diagnostic tools and procedures. Refer to the appropriate wiring information. However, conventional diagnostic methods will not prove conclusive in the diagnosis of the ORC or the electronic controls or communication between other modules and devices that provide features of the SRS. The most reliable, efficient, and accurate means to diagnose the ORC or the electronic controls and communication related to ORC operation requires the use of a diagnostic scan tool. Refer to the appropriate diagnostic information. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Seat Occupant Classification Module - Air Bag > Component Information > Service and Repair > Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) Module - Removal Seat Occupant Classification Module - Air Bag: Service and Repair Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) Module - Removal MODULE WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury on vehicles equipped with airbags, disable the Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, airbag, seat belt tensioner, impact sensor, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the SRS. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment. WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury, never strike or drop the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC), as it can damage the impact sensor or affect its calibration. The ORC contains the impact sensor, which enables the system to deploy the Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) components. If an ORC is accidentally dropped during service, the module must be scrapped and replaced with a new unit. Failure to observe this warning could result in accidental, incomplete, or improper SRS component deployment. 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. Wait two minutes for the system capacitor to discharge before further service. 2. Remove the protective cover from the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) (1). See: Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) Module Cover Removal . 3. Unlatch and disconnect the two wire harness connectors (3) for the ORC from the ORC connector receptacles (2 and 4) located on the forward facing side of the module. To disconnect the wire harness connectors from the ORC, depress the release tab and lift the lever arm on each connector. 4. Remove the three nuts (2) that secure the ORC (1) to the studs on the ORC mounting bracket (3) on the floor panel transmission tunnel. 5. Remove the ORC from the floor panel transmission tunnel. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Seat Occupant Classification Module - Air Bag > Component Information > Service and Repair > Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) Module - Removal > Page 12272 Seat Occupant Classification Module - Air Bag: Service and Repair Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) Module Cover - Removal COVER WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury on vehicles equipped with airbags, disable the Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, airbag, seat belt tensioner, impact sensor, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the SRS. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment. 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. Wait two minutes for the system capacitor to discharge before further service. NOTE: The front seat assembly must be unfastened from the floor panel, but need not be removed from the vehicle for access to the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) cover for service. 2. Remove the front seat from the vehicle. See: Body and Frame/Seats/Service and Repair/Seat Removal . 3. Using a trim stick or another suitable wide flat-bladed tool, gently pry the latch feature on either side of the ORC cover (1) away from the base of the ORC (2) far enough to disengage the cover from the module. 4. Remove the ORC cover from over the ORC. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Seat Occupant Classification Module - Air Bag > Component Information > Service and Repair > Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) Module - Removal > Page 12273 Seat Occupant Classification Module - Air Bag: Service and Repair Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) Module - Installation MODULE WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury on vehicles equipped with airbags, disable the Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, airbag, seat belt tensioner, impact sensor, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the SRS. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment. WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury, never strike or drop the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC), as it can damage the impact sensor or affect its calibration. The ORC contains the impact sensor, which enables the system to deploy the Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) components. If an ORC is accidentally dropped during service, the module must be scrapped and replaced with a new unit. Failure to observe this warning could result in accidental, incomplete, or improper SRS component deployment. 1. Position the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) (1) over the three studs of the ORC mounting bracket (3) on the floor panel transmission tunnel, then engage the locating pin on the bottom of the right ORC mounting flange into the locating hole in the bracket. When the ORC is correctly positioned, the arrow on the ORC label will be pointed forward in the vehicle. 2. Install and tighten the three nuts (2) that secure the ORC to the bracket on the floor panel transmission tunnel. Tighten the nuts to 10 Nm (7 ft. lbs.). 3. Reconnect the two wire harness connectors (3) for the ORC (1) to the ORC connector receptacles (2 and 4) located on the forward facing side of the module. Be certain that the latches on the connectors are each fully engaged. 4. Reinstall the ORC cover onto the ORC. See: Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) Module Cover - Installation . 5. Do not reconnect the battery negative cable at this time. The Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) verification test procedure should be performed following service of any SRS component. See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code Tests and Associated Procedures/Verification Tests . Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Seat Occupant Classification Module - Air Bag > Component Information > Service and Repair > Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) Module - Removal > Page 12274 Seat Occupant Classification Module - Air Bag: Service and Repair Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) Module Cover - Installation COVER WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury on vehicles equipped with airbags, disable the Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, airbag, seat belt tensioner, impact sensor, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the SRS. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment. 1. Position the ORC cover (1) over the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) (2). 2. Align the latch feature on each side of the ORC cover with the notch in each side at the base of the ORC housing. 3. Using hand pressure, press firmly and evenly downward on the ORC cover until each latch feature is fully engaged with the ORC housing. 4. Reinstall the front seat into the vehicle. See: Body and Frame/Seats/Service and Repair/Seat - Installation . 5. Reconnect the battery negative cable. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Malfunction Lamp / Indicator, Air Bag > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Malfunction Lamp / Indicator: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION An airbag indicator is standard equipment on all instrument clusters. However, the instrument cluster can be programmed to disable this indicator on vehicles that are not equipped with the airbag system, which is not available in some markets. This indicator is located near the upper edge of the instrument cluster, between the tachometer and the speedometer. The airbag indicator consists of a stencil-like cutout of the International Control and Display Symbol icon for Airbag in the opaque layer of the instrument cluster overlay. The dark outer layer of the overlay prevents the indicator from being clearly visible when it is not illuminated. A red Light Emitting Diode (LED) behind the cutout in the opaque layer of the overlay causes the indicator to appear in red through the translucent outer layer of the overlay when it is illuminated from behind by the LED, which is soldered onto the instrument cluster electronic circuit board. The airbag indicator is serviced as a unit with the instrument cluster. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Malfunction Lamp / Indicator, Air Bag > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 12279 Malfunction Lamp / Indicator: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The airbag indicator gives an indication to the vehicle operator when the airbag system, or a circuit or component of the system is ineffective. The airbag indicator is controlled by a transistor on the instrument cluster circuit board based upon cluster programming and electronic messages received by the cluster from the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) over the Controller Area Network (CAN) data bus. The airbag indicator Light Emitting Diode (LED) is completely controlled by the instrument cluster logic circuit, and that logic will only allow this indicator to operate when the instrument cluster receives a battery current input on the fused ignition switch output (run-start) circuit. Therefore, the LED will always be OFF when the ignition switch is in any position except ON or START. The LED only illuminates when it is provided a path to ground by the instrument cluster transistor. The instrument cluster will turn ON the airbag indicator for the following reasons: - Bulb Test - Each time the ignition switch is turned to the ON position the airbag indicator is illuminated for about six to eight seconds. The entire bulb test is a function of the ORC. - Airbag Indicator Lamp-On Message - Each time the cluster receives an electronic airbag indicator lamp-ON message from the ORC, the airbag indicator will be illuminated. The indicator remains illuminated for about twelve seconds or until the cluster receives a lamp-OFF message from the ORC, whichever is longer. This indicator will also be extinguished when the ignition switch is turned to the OFF position. Communication Error - If the cluster receives no lamp-ON or lamp-OFF messages from the ORC for 10 consecutive message cycles, the airbag indicator is illuminated. The indicator remains illuminated until the cluster receives a single lamp-OFF message from the ORC. - Actuator Test - Each time the cluster is put through the actuator test, the airbag indicator will be turned ON, then OFF again during the bulb check portion of the test to confirm the functionality of the LED and the cluster control circuitry. The actuator test illumination of the airbag indicator is a function of the instrument cluster. The ORC continually monitors the airbag system circuits and sensors to decide whether the system is in good operating condition. The ORC then sends the proper lamp-ON or lamp-OFF message to the ElectroMechanical Instrument Cluster (EMIC) (also known as the Cab Compartment Node/CCN). If the ORC sends a lamp-ON message after the bulb test, it indicates that the ORC has detected a system malfunction or that the airbags and seat belt tensioners may not deploy when required, or may deploy when not required. The ORC will store a Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) for any malfunction it detects. Each time the airbag indicator fails to illuminate due to an open or short in the cluster airbag indicator circuit, the cluster sends a message notifying the ORC of the condition, the instrument cluster and the ORC will each store a DTC, and the cluster will flash the seatbelt indicator ON and OFF as a backup to notify the vehicle operator. For proper diagnosis of the airbag system, the ORC, the EMIC, the CAN data bus or the electronic communication related to airbag indicator operation a diagnostic scan tool is required. Refer to the appropriate diagnostic information. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Locations Air Bag Control Module: Locations Component ID: 210 Component : MODULE-OCCUPANT RESTRAINT CONTROLLER Connector: Name : MODULE-OCCUPANT RESTRAINT CONTROLLER C1 Color : YELLOW # of pins : 24 Pin Circuit Description 1-2-3 D55 20WT/OR CAN B BUS (+) 4 D54 20WT CAN B BUS (-) 5-6 G104 20VT/GY PASSENGER AIRBAG INDICATOR DRIVER 7 R104 20LB/LG PASSENGER AIRBAG MUX SWITCH RETURN 8 R106 20LG/LB PASSENGER AIRBAG MUX SWITCH SENSE 9 R81 20LB/WT LEFT FRONT IMPACT SENSOR GROUND 10 R79 20LB/VT LEFT FRONT IMPACT SENSOR SIGNAL 11 R82 20WT/LB RIGHT FRONT IMPACT SENSOR GROUND 12 R80 20VT/LB RIGHT FRONT IMPACT SENSOR SIGNAL 13 - 14 - 15 - 16 - 17 R43 20LG/BR DRIVER SQUIB 1 LINE 1 18 R45 20LG/OR DRIVER SQUIB 1 LINE 2 19 R44 20LB/OR PASSENGER SQUIB 1 LINE 2 20 R42 20LB/BR PASSENGER SQUIB 1 LINE 1 21 R61 20LG/VT DRIVER SQUIB 2 LINE 1 22 R63 20LG/WT DRIVER SQUIB 2 LINE 2 23 R64 20LB/WT PASSENGER SQUIB 2 LINE 1 24 R62 20LB/VT PASSENGER SQUIB 2 LINE 2 Component Location - 58 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 12284 Component Location - 63 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 12285 Component Location - 51 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 12286 Connector: Name : MODULE-OCCUPANT RESTRAINT CONTROLLER C2 Color : YELLOW # of pins : 32 Pin Circuit Description 1 R2 20WT/LB RIGHT CURTAIN SQUIB 1 LINE 2 2 R4 20OR/LB RIGHT CURTAIN SQUIB 1 LINE 1 3 R3 20LB/OR LEFT CURTAIN SQUIB 1 LINE 1 4 R1 20LB/WT LEFT CURTAIN SQUIB 1 LINE 2 5-- Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 12287 6-7-8-9 R53 20LG/YL DRIVER SEAT BELT TENSIONER LINE 2 10 R55 20LG/DG DRIVER SEAT BELT TENSIONER LINE 1 11 R56 20LB/DG PASSENGER SEAT BELT TENSIONER LINE 1 12 R54 20LB/YL PASSENGER SEAT BELT TENSIONER LINE 2 13 R1 20LB/WT LEFT CURTAIN SQUIB 1 LINE 2 14 R3 20LB/OR LEFT CURTAIN SQUIB 1 LINE 1 15 R4 20OR/LB RIGHT CURTAIN SQUIB 1 LINE 1 16 R2 20WT/LB RIGHT CURTAIN SQUIB 1 LINE 2 17 F201 20PK/OR FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) 18 F100 20PK/VT FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN) 19 - 20 Z104 18BK/LG GROUND 21 - 22 - 23 - 24 - 25 R261 20LB/TN DRIVER SEAT POSITION SENSOR DATA 26 R263 20LB/GY DRIVER SEAT POSITION SENSOR VOLTAGE 27 R14 20TN/LG RIGHT SIDE IMPACT SENSOR 1 SIGNAL 28 R16 20BR/LG RIGHT SIDE IMPACT SENSOR 1 GROUND 29 R15 20LG/BR LEFT SIDE IMPACT SENSOR 1 GROUND 30 R13 20LG/TN LEFT SIDE IMPACT SENSOR 1 SIGNAL 31 - 32 - Component Location - 58 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 12288 Component Location - 63 Component Location - 51 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 12289 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 12290 Air Bag Control Module: Diagrams Component ID: 210 Component : MODULE-OCCUPANT RESTRAINT CONTROLLER Connector: Name : MODULE-OCCUPANT RESTRAINT CONTROLLER C1 Color : YELLOW # of pins : 24 Pin Circuit Description 1-2-3 D55 20WT/OR CAN B BUS (+) 4 D54 20WT CAN B BUS (-) 5-6 G104 20VT/GY PASSENGER AIRBAG INDICATOR DRIVER 7 R104 20LB/LG PASSENGER AIRBAG MUX SWITCH RETURN 8 R106 20LG/LB PASSENGER AIRBAG MUX SWITCH SENSE 9 R81 20LB/WT LEFT FRONT IMPACT SENSOR GROUND 10 R79 20LB/VT LEFT FRONT IMPACT SENSOR SIGNAL 11 R82 20WT/LB RIGHT FRONT IMPACT SENSOR GROUND 12 R80 20VT/LB RIGHT FRONT IMPACT SENSOR SIGNAL 13 - 14 - 15 - 16 - 17 R43 20LG/BR DRIVER SQUIB 1 LINE 1 18 R45 20LG/OR DRIVER SQUIB 1 LINE 2 19 R44 20LB/OR PASSENGER SQUIB 1 LINE 2 20 R42 20LB/BR PASSENGER SQUIB 1 LINE 1 21 R61 20LG/VT DRIVER SQUIB 2 LINE 1 22 R63 20LG/WT DRIVER SQUIB 2 LINE 2 23 R64 20LB/WT PASSENGER SQUIB 2 LINE 1 24 R62 20LB/VT PASSENGER SQUIB 2 LINE 2 Component Location - 58 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 12291 Component Location - 63 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 12292 Component Location - 51 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 12293 Connector: Name : MODULE-OCCUPANT RESTRAINT CONTROLLER C2 Color : YELLOW # of pins : 32 Pin Circuit Description 1 R2 20WT/LB RIGHT CURTAIN SQUIB 1 LINE 2 2 R4 20OR/LB RIGHT CURTAIN SQUIB 1 LINE 1 3 R3 20LB/OR LEFT CURTAIN SQUIB 1 LINE 1 4 R1 20LB/WT LEFT CURTAIN SQUIB 1 LINE 2 5-- Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 12294 6-7-8-9 R53 20LG/YL DRIVER SEAT BELT TENSIONER LINE 2 10 R55 20LG/DG DRIVER SEAT BELT TENSIONER LINE 1 11 R56 20LB/DG PASSENGER SEAT BELT TENSIONER LINE 1 12 R54 20LB/YL PASSENGER SEAT BELT TENSIONER LINE 2 13 R1 20LB/WT LEFT CURTAIN SQUIB 1 LINE 2 14 R3 20LB/OR LEFT CURTAIN SQUIB 1 LINE 1 15 R4 20OR/LB RIGHT CURTAIN SQUIB 1 LINE 1 16 R2 20WT/LB RIGHT CURTAIN SQUIB 1 LINE 2 17 F201 20PK/OR FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) 18 F100 20PK/VT FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN) 19 - 20 Z104 18BK/LG GROUND 21 - 22 - 23 - 24 - 25 R261 20LB/TN DRIVER SEAT POSITION SENSOR DATA 26 R263 20LB/GY DRIVER SEAT POSITION SENSOR VOLTAGE 27 R14 20TN/LG RIGHT SIDE IMPACT SENSOR 1 SIGNAL 28 R16 20BR/LG RIGHT SIDE IMPACT SENSOR 1 GROUND 29 R15 20LG/BR LEFT SIDE IMPACT SENSOR 1 GROUND 30 R13 20LG/TN LEFT SIDE IMPACT SENSOR 1 SIGNAL 31 - 32 - Component Location - 58 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 12295 Component Location - 63 Component Location - 51 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 12296 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Classification Module - Air Bag > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Seat Occupant Classification Module - Air Bag: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) (1) is located in the passenger compartment of the vehicle, where it is secured by three nuts to three studs on a stamped steel mounting bracket welded onto the top of the floor panel transmission tunnel under the center front seat section or the center floor console, as the vehicle is equipped. Concealed within a hollow in the center of the die cast aluminum ORC housing is the electronic circuitry of the ORC which includes a microprocessor, an electronic impact sensor, an electronic safing sensor, and an energy storage capacitor. A stamped metal cover plate is secured to the bottom of the ORC housing with screws to enclose and protect the internal electronic circuitry and components. An arrow (2) printed on the label (3) on the top of the ORC housing provides a visual verification of the proper orientation of the unit, and should always be pointed toward the front of the vehicle. The ORC housing has integral mounting flanges on three corners. The mounting flange to the right of the connector receptacles (4) has an integral locating pin on its lower surface. Both right side flanges have round mounting holes, while the flange on the left side has a slotted mounting hole. A molded plastic electrical connector (4) with 2 receptacles, one containing 24 terminal pins and the other containing 32 terminal pins, exits the forward facing side of the ORC housing. These terminal pins connect the ORC to the vehicle electrical system through two dedicated take outs and connectors, one each from the instrument panel and the body wire harnesses. A molded plastic protective cover is installed over the ORC to provide additional moisture contamination protection to the unit. Integral latch features on each side of the cover engage a slot (5) on each side of the base of the ORC housing to secure the cover to the ORC. This protective cover must be reinstalled following any service requiring its removal. The impact sensor and safing sensor internal to the ORC are calibrated for the specific vehicle, and are only serviced as a unit with the ORC. In addition, there are unique versions of the ORC for light and heavy-duty vehicles, and for vehicles with or without the optional side curtain airbags. The ORC cannot be repaired or adjusted and, if damaged or ineffective, it must be replaced. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Classification Module - Air Bag > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 12301 Seat Occupant Classification Module - Air Bag: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The microprocessor in the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) contains the Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) logic circuits and controls all of the SRS components. The ORC uses On-Board Diagnostics (OBD) and can communicate with other electronic modules in the vehicle as well as with the diagnostic scan tool using the Controller Area Network (CAN) data bus. This method of communication is used for control of the airbag indicator in the ElectroMechanical Instrument Cluster (EMIC) (also known as the Cab Compartment Node/CCN) and for SRS diagnosis and testing through the 16-way Data Link Connector (DLC) located on the driver side lower edge of the instrument panel. See: Air Bag Systems/Malfunction Lamp / Indicator/Description and Operation/Operation . The ORC microprocessor continuously monitors all of the SRS electrical circuits to determine the system readiness. If the ORC detects a monitored system fault, it sets an active and stored Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) and sends electronic messages to the EMIC over the CAN data bus to turn ON the airbag indicator. An active fault only remains for the duration of the fault, or in some cases for the duration of the current ignition switch cycle, while a stored fault causes a DTC to be stored in memory by the ORC. For some DTCs, if a fault does not recur for a number of ignition cycles, the ORC will automatically erase the stored DTC. For other internal faults, the stored DTC is latched forever. In standard cab vehicles (except light-duty DR 1500), the ORC also monitors a resistor multiplexed input from the passenger airbag on/off switch. If the passenger airbag on/off switch is set to the OFF position, the ORC turns ON the passenger airbag on/off indicator and will internally disable the passenger airbag and, on light-duty DR 1500 only, the seat belt tensioner from being deployed. The ORC receives battery current through two circuits; a fused ignition switch output (run) circuit through a fuse in the Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM), and a fused ignition switch output (run-start) circuit through a second fuse in the TIPM. The ORC receives ground through a ground circuit and take out of the instrument panel wire harness. This take out has a single eyelet terminal connector that is secured by a ground screw to the instrument panel structural support. These connections allow the ORC to be operational whenever the ignition switch is in the START or ON positions. The ORC also contains an energy-storage capacitor. When the ignition switch is in the START or ON positions, this capacitor is continually being charged with enough electrical energy to deploy the SRS components for up to one second following a battery disconnect or failure. The purpose of the capacitor is to provide backup SRS protection in case there is a loss of battery current supply to the ORC during an impact. Two sensors are contained within the ORC, an electronic impact sensor and a safing sensor. The ORC also monitors inputs from two remote front impact sensors located on the back of the right and left ends of the lower radiator crossmember near the front of the vehicle. The electronic impact sensors are accelerometers that sense the rate of vehicle deceleration, which provide verification of the direction and severity of an impact. On vehicles equipped with optional side curtain airbags the ORC also monitors inputs from two additional remote impact sensors located within both the left and right B-pillars to control deployment of the side curtain airbag units. The safing sensor is an electronic accelerometer sensor within the ORC that provides an additional logic input to the ORC microprocessor. The safing sensor is used to verify the need for a SRS deployment by detecting impact energy of a lesser magnitude than that of the primary electronic impact sensors, and must exceed a safing threshold in order for the airbags to deploy. Vehicles equipped with optional side curtain airbags feature a second safing sensor within the ORC to provide confirmation to the ORC microprocessor of side impact forces. This second safing sensor is a bi-directional unit that detects impact forces from either side of the vehicle. Pre-programmed decision algorithms in the ORC microprocessor determine when the deceleration rate as signaled by the impact sensors and the safing sensors indicate an impact that is severe enough to require SRS protection and, based upon the severity of the monitored impact, determines the level of front airbag deployment force required for each front seating position. When the programmed conditions are met, the ORC sends the proper electrical signals to deploy the dual multistage front airbags at the programmed force levels and, if the vehicle is so equipped, the front seat belt tensioners or either side curtain airbag unit. On standard cab vehicles except light-duty DR 1500, the passenger front airbag will be deployed by the ORC only if enabled by the passenger airbag on/off switch at the time of the impact. The hard wired inputs and outputs for the ORC may be diagnosed using conventional diagnostic tools and procedures. Refer to the appropriate wiring information. However, conventional diagnostic methods will not prove conclusive in the diagnosis of the ORC or the electronic controls or communication between other modules and devices that provide features of the SRS. The most reliable, efficient, and accurate means to diagnose the ORC or the electronic controls and communication related to ORC operation requires the use of a diagnostic scan tool. Refer to the appropriate diagnostic information. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Classification Module - Air Bag > Component Information > Service and Repair > Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) Module - Removal Seat Occupant Classification Module - Air Bag: Service and Repair Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) Module - Removal MODULE WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury on vehicles equipped with airbags, disable the Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, airbag, seat belt tensioner, impact sensor, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the SRS. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment. WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury, never strike or drop the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC), as it can damage the impact sensor or affect its calibration. The ORC contains the impact sensor, which enables the system to deploy the Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) components. If an ORC is accidentally dropped during service, the module must be scrapped and replaced with a new unit. Failure to observe this warning could result in accidental, incomplete, or improper SRS component deployment. 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. Wait two minutes for the system capacitor to discharge before further service. 2. Remove the protective cover from the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) (1). See: Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) Module Cover Removal . 3. Unlatch and disconnect the two wire harness connectors (3) for the ORC from the ORC connector receptacles (2 and 4) located on the forward facing side of the module. To disconnect the wire harness connectors from the ORC, depress the release tab and lift the lever arm on each connector. 4. Remove the three nuts (2) that secure the ORC (1) to the studs on the ORC mounting bracket (3) on the floor panel transmission tunnel. 5. Remove the ORC from the floor panel transmission tunnel. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Classification Module - Air Bag > Component Information > Service and Repair > Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) Module - Removal > Page 12304 Seat Occupant Classification Module - Air Bag: Service and Repair Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) Module Cover - Removal COVER WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury on vehicles equipped with airbags, disable the Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, airbag, seat belt tensioner, impact sensor, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the SRS. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment. 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. Wait two minutes for the system capacitor to discharge before further service. NOTE: The front seat assembly must be unfastened from the floor panel, but need not be removed from the vehicle for access to the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) cover for service. 2. Remove the front seat from the vehicle. See: Body and Frame/Seats/Service and Repair/Seat Removal . 3. Using a trim stick or another suitable wide flat-bladed tool, gently pry the latch feature on either side of the ORC cover (1) away from the base of the ORC (2) far enough to disengage the cover from the module. 4. Remove the ORC cover from over the ORC. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Classification Module - Air Bag > Component Information > Service and Repair > Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) Module - Removal > Page 12305 Seat Occupant Classification Module - Air Bag: Service and Repair Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) Module - Installation MODULE WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury on vehicles equipped with airbags, disable the Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, airbag, seat belt tensioner, impact sensor, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the SRS. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment. WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury, never strike or drop the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC), as it can damage the impact sensor or affect its calibration. The ORC contains the impact sensor, which enables the system to deploy the Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) components. If an ORC is accidentally dropped during service, the module must be scrapped and replaced with a new unit. Failure to observe this warning could result in accidental, incomplete, or improper SRS component deployment. 1. Position the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) (1) over the three studs of the ORC mounting bracket (3) on the floor panel transmission tunnel, then engage the locating pin on the bottom of the right ORC mounting flange into the locating hole in the bracket. When the ORC is correctly positioned, the arrow on the ORC label will be pointed forward in the vehicle. 2. Install and tighten the three nuts (2) that secure the ORC to the bracket on the floor panel transmission tunnel. Tighten the nuts to 10 Nm (7 ft. lbs.). 3. Reconnect the two wire harness connectors (3) for the ORC (1) to the ORC connector receptacles (2 and 4) located on the forward facing side of the module. Be certain that the latches on the connectors are each fully engaged. 4. Reinstall the ORC cover onto the ORC. See: Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) Module Cover - Installation . 5. Do not reconnect the battery negative cable at this time. The Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) verification test procedure should be performed following service of any SRS component. See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code Tests and Associated Procedures/Verification Tests . Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Classification Module - Air Bag > Component Information > Service and Repair > Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) Module - Removal > Page 12306 Seat Occupant Classification Module - Air Bag: Service and Repair Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) Module Cover - Installation COVER WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury on vehicles equipped with airbags, disable the Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, airbag, seat belt tensioner, impact sensor, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the SRS. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment. 1. Position the ORC cover (1) over the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) (2). 2. Align the latch feature on each side of the ORC cover with the notch in each side at the base of the ORC housing. 3. Using hand pressure, press firmly and evenly downward on the ORC cover until each latch feature is fully engaged with the ORC housing. 4. Reinstall the front seat into the vehicle. See: Body and Frame/Seats/Service and Repair/Seat - Installation . 5. Reconnect the battery negative cable. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Child Restraint > Child Seat Tether Attachment > Component Information > Description and Operation Child Seat Tether Attachment: Description and Operation DESCRIPTION Except for the light-duty DR 1500, this vehicle is equipped with a Lower Anchors and Tether for Children, or LATCH child restraint anchorage system. The LATCH system provides for the installation of suitable child restraints in certain seating positions without using the standard equipment seat belt provided for that seating position. Standard cab vehicles are equipped with a fixed-position child restraint upper tether anchor for the front center and outboard seating positions (2); and, except light-duty DR 1500, child restraint lower anchors for the front outboard seating position (1). Quad cab vehicles are equipped with a fixed-position child restraint upper tether anchor strap for the rear center and both rear outboard seating positions (2), and child restraint lower anchors for both rear outboard seating positions (1). All front seat child restraint anchors are deleted on quad cabs. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Child Restraint > Child Seat Tether Attachment > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 12312 Mega cab vehicles are also equipped with a fixed-position child restraint upper tether anchor strap for the rear center and both rear outboard seating positions (2), but have child restraint lower anchors for all three rear seating positions (1). As on quad cabs, all front seat child restraint anchors are deleted on mega cab vehicles. The two upper tether anchors (3) for standard cabs are integral to the upper cab back panel reinforcement and are concealed behind individual trim cover and bezel units (1) that are integral to the cab back trim panel (2). These upper tether anchors cannot be adjusted or repaired and, if ineffective or damaged, they must be replaced as a unit with the upper cab back panel reinforcement. The upper tether anchor trim covers and bezels are serviced as a unit with the cab back trim panel. The three upper tether anchor straps (1) for quad cab and mega cab vehicles are secured to the upper cab back panel (2) reinforcement with screws (3). These anchor straps are concealed behind the upright rear seat back. The upper tether anchor straps are available for individual service replacement. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Child Restraint > Child Seat Tether Attachment > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 12313 The lower anchors (2) for all vehicles (except light-duty DR 1500 standard cab) are integral to their respective front or rear seat cushion frame. Round markers (3) with an imprinted child seat icon on the standard cab front seat back trim cover helps identify the anchor locations for that application because they may be otherwise difficult to see with the seat back in the upright position. These lower anchors are each constructed from round steel bar stock that is formed into a U-shape, then securely welded at each end to the seat cushion frame. They are each accessed from the front of their respective seats, at each side where the seat back meets the seat cushion. These lower anchors cannot be adjusted or repaired and, if ineffective or damaged, they must be replaced as a unit with the seat cushion frame. On quad cab or mega cab vehicles, if the rear seat lower anchors (2) have been bent or broken as a result of a vehicle collision, the latch for the affected rear seat cushion frame unit must also be replaced. WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury during and following any seat belt or child restraint anchor service, carefully inspect all seat belts, buckles, mounting hardware, retractors, tether straps, and anchors for proper installation, operation, or damage. Replace any belt that is cut, frayed, or torn. Straighten any belt that is twisted. Tighten any loose fasteners. Replace any belt that has a damaged or ineffective buckle or retractor. Replace any belt that has a bent or damaged latch plate or anchor plate. Replace any child restraint anchor or the unit to which the anchor is integral that has been bent or damaged. Never attempt to repair a seat belt or child restraint component. Always replace damaged or ineffective seat belt and child restraint components with the correct, new and unused replacement parts listed in the DaimlerChrysler Mopar(R) Parts Catalog. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Child Restraint > Child Seat Tether Attachment > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Child Seat Tether Attachment: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury during and following any seat belt or child restraint anchor service, carefully inspect all seat belts, buckles, mounting hardware, retractors, tether straps, and anchors for proper installation, operation, or damage. Replace any belt that is cut, frayed, or torn. Straighten any belt that is twisted. Tighten any loose fasteners. Replace any belt that has a damaged or ineffective buckle or retractor. Replace any belt that has a bent or damaged latch plate or anchor plate. Replace any child restraint anchor or the unit to which the anchor is integral that has been bent or damaged. Never attempt to repair a seat belt or child restraint component. Always replace damaged or ineffective seat belt and child restraint components with the correct, new and unused replacement parts listed in the DaimlerChrysler Mopar(R) Parts Catalog. NOTE: The following procedure applies only to the rear seat upper child tether straps used on quad cab vehicles. The child restraint anchors used in other vehicles and locations are integral to other components and cannot be serviced separately. 1. Remove the rear seat from the vehicle. See: Body and Frame/Seats/Service and Repair/Seat Removal . 2. Remove the screw (3) that secures the child tether strap (1) to the upper cab back panel (2) reinforcement. 3. Remove the child tether strap from the upper cab back panel reinforcement. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Child Restraint > Child Seat Tether Attachment > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 12316 Child Seat Tether Attachment: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury during and following any seat belt or child restraint anchor service, carefully inspect all seat belts, buckles, mounting hardware, retractors, tether straps, and anchors for proper installation, operation, or damage. Replace any belt that is cut, frayed, or torn. Straighten any belt that is twisted. Tighten any loose fasteners. Replace any belt that has a damaged or ineffective buckle or retractor. Replace any belt that has a bent or damaged latch plate or anchor plate. Replace any child restraint anchor or the unit to which the anchor is integral that has been bent or damaged. Never attempt to repair a seat belt or child restraint component. Always replace damaged or ineffective seat belt and child restraint components with the correct, new and unused replacement parts listed in the DaimlerChrysler Mopar(R) Parts Catalog. NOTE: The following procedure applies only to the rear seat upper child tether straps used on quad cab vehicles. The child restraint anchors used in other vehicles and locations are integral to other components and cannot be serviced separately. 1. Position the child tether strap (1) onto the cab back panel (2) upper reinforcement. 2. Install and tighten the screw (3) that secures the child tether strap to the upper cab back panel reinforcement. Tighten the screw to 14 Nm (10 ft. lbs.). 3. Reinstall the rear seat into the vehicle. See: Body and Frame/Seats/Service and Repair/Seat Installation . Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Seat Belt: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The seat belt retractors used in all seating positions include an inertia-type, emergency locking mechanism (7) as standard equipment. However, the retractor locking mechanisms for all seating positions except the driver side front position are mechanically switchable from an emergency locking retractor to an automatic locking retractor. The primary function of this feature is to securely accommodate a child seat in any seating position of the vehicle without the need for a self-cinching seat belt tip half latch plate unit or another supplemental device that would be required to prevent the seat belt webbing from unwinding freely from the retractor spool of an inertia-type emergency locking retractor mechanism. The automatic locking mechanism is integral to the seat belt and retractor unit and is concealed beneath a molded plastic cover located on one side of the retractor spool. The automatic locking mechanism cannot be adjusted or repaired and, if ineffective or damaged, the entire passenger side front seat belt and retractor unit must be replaced. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 12321 Seat Belt: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The locked mode of the automatic locking retractor is engaged and the retractor is switched from operating as a standard inertia-type emergency locking retractor by first buckling the combination lap and shoulder belt buckle. Then grasp the shoulder belt and pull all of the webbing out of the retractor. Once all of the belt webbing is extracted from the spool, the retractor will automatically become engaged in the pre-locked automatic locking mode and will make a light, audible clicking or ratcheting sound as the shoulder belt is allowed to retract to confirm that the automatic locking mode is now engaged. Once the automatic locking mode is engaged, the retractor will remain locked and the belt will remain tight around whatever it is restraining. The retractor is returned to standard emergency locking (inertia) mode by unbuckling the combination lap and shoulder belt buckle and allowing the belt webbing to be almost fully retracted onto the retractor spool. The emergency locking mode is confirmed by the absence of the light, audible clicking or ratcheting sound as the belt webbing retracts. This mode will allow the belt to unwind from and wind onto the retractor spool freely unless and until a predetermined inertia load is sensed, or until the retractor is again switched to the automatic locking mode. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt > Component Information > Service and Repair > Seat Belt Seat Belt: Service and Repair Seat Belt Removal REMOVAL WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury during and following any seat belt or child restraint anchor service, carefully inspect all seat belts, buckles, mounting hardware, retractors, tether straps, and anchors for proper installation, operation, or damage. Replace any belt that is cut, frayed, or torn. Straighten any belt that is twisted. Tighten any loose fasteners. Replace any belt that has a damaged or ineffective buckle or retractor. Replace any belt that has a bent or damaged latch plate or anchor plate. Replace any child restraint anchor or the unit to which the anchor is integral that has been bent or damaged. Never attempt to repair a seat belt or child restraint component. Always replace damaged or ineffective seat belt and child restraint components with the correct, new and unused replacement parts listed in the DaimlerChrysler Mopar(R) Parts Catalog. NOTE: A fixed position front center seat belt buckle is located on the left side of the front center seat section (20 percent) used on all vehicles. Standard cab vehicles have a unique, fixed position, black, keyed, lower anchor buckle for the three-point center seat belt lower anchor located on the right side of the front center seat section. Quad cab and mega cab vehicles have a fixed position front center seat lap belt located on the right side of the front center seat section. The following procedure applies to the front center seating position belt buckle, the lap belt or the anchor buckle. The three-point front center seat belt and retractor unit is only used on standard cab vehicles. See: Seat Belt Retractor/Service and Repair/Seat Belt and Retractor - Removal. 1. Move the adjacent right or left front outboard seat section (40 percent) to its most forward position and tilt the seat back forward for easiest access to the lower anchor of the front center seat belt buckle, lap belt or anchor buckle (1). 2. On standard cab vehicles only, remove the stowage tray from the rear floor panel behind the seat. See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Trim Panel/Service and Repair/Load Floor - Removal . 3. From behind the front seat, remove the screw (5) that secures the lower anchor of the front center seat belt buckle, lap belt or anchor buckle to the center seat support bracket (3). 4. From the front of the front seat, reach between the side of the center seat cushion (6) and the adjacent right or left front outboard seat cushion to access and remove the seat belt buckle, lap belt or anchor buckle through the elastic strap (2) on the side of the center seat cushion. 5. Remove the front center seat belt buckle, lap belt or anchor buckle unit from the front seat. Installation INSTALLATION WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury during and following any seat belt or child restraint anchor service, carefully inspect all seat belts, buckles, mounting hardware, retractors, tether straps, and anchors for proper installation, operation, or damage. Replace any belt that is cut, frayed, or torn. Straighten any belt that is twisted. Tighten any loose fasteners. Replace any belt that has a damaged or ineffective buckle or retractor. Replace any belt that has a bent or damaged latch plate or anchor plate. Replace any child restraint anchor or the unit to which the anchor is integral that has been bent or damaged. Never attempt to repair a seat belt or child restraint component. Always replace damaged or ineffective seat belt and child restraint components with the correct, new and unused replacement parts listed in the DaimlerChrysler Mopar(R) Parts Catalog. NOTE: A fixed position front center seat belt buckle is located on the left side of the front center seat section (20 percent) used on all vehicles. Standard cab vehicles have a unique, fixed position, black, keyed, lower anchor buckle for the three-point center seat belt lower anchor located on the right side of the front center seat section. Quad cab and mega cab vehicles have a fixed position front center seat lap belt located on the Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt > Component Information > Service and Repair > Seat Belt > Page 12324 right side of the front center seat section. The following procedure applies to the front center seating position belt buckle, the lap belt or the anchor buckle. The three-point front center seat belt and retractor unit is only used on standard cab vehicles. See: Seat Belt Retractor/Service and Repair/Seat Belt and Retractor - Installation. 1. From the front of the front seat, position the front center seat belt buckle, lap belt or anchor buckle unit (1) through the elastic strap (2) on the side of the center seat cushion (6). 2. From the front of the front seat, reach between the side of the center seat cushion and the adjacent right or left front outboard seat cushion to route the lower anchor of the seat belt buckle, lap belt or anchor buckle unit down between the side of the center seat cushion and the adjacent right or left front outboard seat cushion. Be certain that the belt webbing is not twisted. 3. From behind the front seat, position the lower anchor of the seat belt buckle, lap belt or anchor buckle to the center seat support bracket (3). Be certain to engage the anti-rotation tab on the lower anchor into the corresponding hole in the center seat support bracket. 4. Install and tighten the screw (5) that secures the lower anchor of the seat belt buckle, lap belt or anchor buckle to the center seat support bracket. Tighten the screw to 40 Nm (29 ft. lbs.). 5. On standard cab vehicles only, reinstall the stowage tray onto the rear floor panel behind the seat. See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Trim Panel/Service and Repair/Load Floor - Installation . Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt > Component Information > Service and Repair > Seat Belt > Page 12325 Seat Belt: Service and Repair Seat Belt and Retractor - Removal Front Center - Standard Cab FRONT CENTER - STANDARD CAB WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury during and following any seat belt or child restraint anchor service, carefully inspect all seat belts, buckles, mounting hardware, retractors, tether straps, and anchors for proper installation, operation, or damage. Replace any belt that is cut, frayed, or torn. Straighten any belt that is twisted. Tighten any loose fasteners. Replace any belt that has a damaged or ineffective buckle or retractor. Replace any belt that has a bent or damaged latch plate or anchor plate. Replace any child restraint anchor or the unit to which the anchor is integral that has been bent or damaged. Never attempt to repair a seat belt or child restraint component. Always replace damaged or ineffective seat belt and child restraint components with the correct, new and unused replacement parts listed in the DaimlerChrysler Mopar(R) Parts Catalog. NOTE: A front center seat belt and retractor is used only on standard cab vehicles. Quad cab and mega cab vehicles have a lap belt in the front center seating position. See: Seat Belt Buckle/Service and Repair/Seat Belt Buckle - Removal. NOTE: All seat belt retractors except the driver side front retractor include a switchable automatic locking mechanism. See: Seat Belt Retractor/Description and Operation/Description. 1. Reach between the center of the front seat cushion and front seat back to access and unbuckle the front center seat belt lower anchor latch plate from the unique black, keyed lower anchor buckle. Use an ignition key or a small screwdriver to depress the small white release button on the anchor buckle. 2. Move the front seat to its most forward position for easiest access to the front center seat belt and retractor unit. 3. Remove the stowage tray from the rear floor panel behind the seat. See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Trim Panel/Service and Repair/Load Floor - Removal . 4. Using a trim stick or another suitable wide flat-bladed tool, gently pry at each side of the front center seat belt bezel (5) on the cab back trim panel (1) to release the snap features that secure the bezel to the panel. 5. Remove the bezel from the webbing of the front center seat belt (4). 6. Remove the trim from the cab back panel. See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Trim Panel/Service and Repair/Rear Cab Back Panel Trim/Removal . Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt > Component Information > Service and Repair > Seat Belt > Page 12326 7. Remove the two screws (3) that secure the belt bracket (2) of the front center seat belt (7) to the body bracket (1) on the upper cab back panel (8) reinforcement. 8. Remove the belt bracket of the front center seat belt from the body bracket on the upper cab back panel reinforcement. 9. Remove the two screws (4) that secure the front center seat belt retractor bracket (5) to the floor panel (6) near the base of the cab back panel. 10. Remove the front center seat belt and retractor unit from the floor panel. Front Outboard - Quad and Mega Cab FRONT OUTBOARD - QUAD AND MEGA CAB WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury on vehicles equipped with airbags, disable the Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, airbag, seat belt tensioner, impact sensor, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the SRS. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment. WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury during and following any seat belt or child restraint anchor service, carefully inspect all seat belts, buckles, mounting hardware, retractors, tether straps, and anchors for proper installation, operation, or damage. Replace any belt that is cut, frayed, or torn. Straighten any belt that is twisted. Tighten any loose fasteners. Replace any belt that has a damaged or ineffective buckle or retractor. Replace any belt that has a bent or damaged latch plate or anchor plate. Replace any child restraint anchor or the unit to which the anchor is integral that has been bent or damaged. Never attempt to repair a seat belt or child restraint component. Always replace damaged or ineffective seat belt and child restraint components with the correct, new and unused replacement parts listed in the DaimlerChrysler Mopar(R) Parts Catalog. NOTE: The following procedure is for replacement of an ineffective or damaged seat belt and retractor unit. On light-duty DR 1500 the front retractor also includes a seat belt tensioner. If the front seat belt or retractor is ineffective or damaged, but the seat belt tensioner is not deployed, review the recommended procedures for handling non-deployed supplemental restraints. See: Air Bag Systems/Service and Repair. If the seat belt tensioner has been deployed, review the recommended procedures for service after a supplemental restraint deployment before removing the unit from the vehicle. See: Repairs and Inspections Required After a Collision/Service and Repair. NOTE: All seat belt retractors except the driver side front retractor include a switchable automatic locking mechanism. See: Seat Belt Retractor/Description and Operation/Description. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt > Component Information > Service and Repair > Seat Belt > Page 12327 1. Adjust the front seat to its most forward position for easiest access to the front seat belt (2) lower anchor cover (4) and the B-pillar trim. 2. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. Wait two minutes for the system capacitor to discharge before further service. 3. Grasp the upper edge of the lower anchor cover and pull upward to unsnap it from the front seat cushion outboard side shield. 4. Remove the screw (3) that secures the lower anchor to the outboard side of the front seat cushion frame. 5. Unsnap the trim cover (3) from the front seat belt turning loop (5) and discard. 6. Remove the screw (4) that secures the seat belt turning loop to the height adjuster (1) on the upper B-pillar. 7. Remove the seat belt turning loop from the height adjuster. 8. Remove the upper trim (2) from the inside of the B-pillar. See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Trim Panel/Service and Repair/Pillar Trim/B-Pillar Trim . 9. Remove the lower trim (3) from the inside of the B-pillar. See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Trim Panel/Service and Repair/Pillar Trim/B-Pillar Trim . 10. On light-duty DR 1500 only, disconnect the yellow body wire harness connector (5) from the seat belt tensioner initiator on the retractor (7). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt > Component Information > Service and Repair > Seat Belt > Page 12328 11. Disengage the two clips that secure the belt web guide (1) to the B-pillar. 12. Remove the screw (4) that secures the upper retractor bracket to the B-pillar. 13. Remove the screw (6) that secures the lower retractor bracket to the B-pillar. 14. Disengage the locating tab on the upper retractor bracket from the hole in the inner B-pillar. 15. Remove the front outboard seat belt and retractor from the B-pillar as a unit. Front Outboard - Standard Cab FRONT OUTBOARD - STANDARD CAB WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury on vehicles equipped with airbags, disable the Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, airbag, seat belt tensioner, impact sensor, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the SRS. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment. WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury during and following any seat belt or child restraint anchor service, carefully inspect all seat belts, buckles, mounting hardware, retractors, tether straps, and anchors for proper installation, operation, or damage. Replace any belt that is cut, frayed, or torn. Straighten any belt that is twisted. Tighten any loose fasteners. Replace any belt that has a damaged or ineffective buckle or retractor. Replace any belt that has a bent or damaged latch plate or anchor plate. Replace any child restraint anchor or the unit to which the anchor is integral that has been bent or damaged. Never attempt to repair a seat belt or child restraint component. Always replace damaged or ineffective seat belt and child restraint components with the correct, new and unused replacement parts listed in the DaimlerChrysler Mopar(R) Parts Catalog. NOTE: The following procedure is for replacement of an ineffective or damaged seat belt and retractor unit. On light-duty DR 1500 the front retractor also includes a seat belt tensioner. If the front seat belt or retractor is ineffective or damaged, but the seat belt tensioner is not deployed, review the recommended procedures for handling non-deployed supplemental restraints. See: Air Bag Systems/Service and Repair. If the seat belt tensioner has been deployed, review the recommended procedures for service after a supplemental restraint deployment before removing the unit from the vehicle. See: Repairs and Inspections Required After a Collision/Service and Repair. NOTE: The seat belt retractor on the driver side of all standard cab vehicles includes a tension reducer. See: Seat Belt Tensioner/Description and Operation/Seat Belt Tension Reducer/Description. All seat belt retractors except the driver side front retractor include a switchable automatic locking mechanism. See: Seat Belt Retractor/Description and Operation/Description. 1. Adjust the front seat (1) to its most forward position for easiest access to the front seat belt (2) lower anchor cover (4) and the B-pillar trim. 2. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. Wait two minutes for the system capacitor to discharge before further service. 3. Remove the stowage tray from the rear floor panel behind the seat. See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Trim Panel/Service and Repair/Load Floor - Removal . 4. Grasp the upper edge of the lower anchor cover and pull upward to unsnap it from the front seat cushion outboard side shield. 5. Remove the screw (3) that secures the lower anchor to the outboard side of the front seat cushion frame. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt > Component Information > Service and Repair > Seat Belt > Page 12329 6. Unsnap the trim cover (3) from the front seat belt turning loop (5) and discard. 7. Remove the screw (4) that secures the seat belt turning loop to the height adjuster (1) on the upper B-pillar. 8. Remove the seat belt turning loop from the height adjuster. 9. Remove the upper trim (2) from the inside of the B-pillar. See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Trim Panel/Service and Repair/Pillar Trim/B-Pillar Trim . 10. Remove the lower trim (3) from the inside of the B-pillar. See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Trim Panel/Service and Repair/Pillar Trim/B-Pillar Trim 11. On light-duty DR 1500 only, disconnect the yellow body wire harness connector (5) from the seat belt tensioner initiator on the retractor (7). 12. On the driver side only, disconnect the white body wire harness connector from the connector receptacle for the seat belt tension reducer located near the bottom of the retractor. 13. Disengage the two clips that secure the belt web guide (1) to the B-pillar. 14. Remove the screw (4) that secures the upper retractor bracket to the B-pillar. 15. Remove the screw (6) that secures the lower retractor bracket to the B-pillar. 16. Disengage the locating tab on the upper retractor bracket from the hole in the inner B-pillar. 17. Remove the front outboard seat belt and retractor from the B-pillar as a unit. Rear Center - Mega Cab REAR CENTER - MEGA CAB WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury during and following any seat belt or child restraint anchor service, carefully inspect all seat belts, buckles, mounting hardware, retractors, tether straps, and anchors for proper installation, operation, or damage. Replace any belt that is cut, frayed, or torn. Straighten any belt that is twisted. Tighten any loose fasteners. Replace any belt that has a damaged or ineffective buckle or retractor. Replace any belt that has a bent or damaged latch plate or anchor plate. Replace any child restraint anchor or the unit to which the anchor is integral that has been bent or damaged. Never attempt to repair a seat belt or child restraint component. Always replace damaged or ineffective seat belt and child restraint components with the correct, new and unused replacement parts listed in the DaimlerChrysler Mopar(R) Parts Catalog. NOTE: All seat belt retractors except the driver side front retractor include a switchable automatic locking mechanism. See: Seat Belt Retractor/Description and Operation/Description. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt > Component Information > Service and Repair > Seat Belt > Page 12330 1. Fold the 60 percent section of the rear seat back (2) down onto the seat cushion in the cargo storage position, then lift and prop open the seat back filler panel (3) as necessary for easiest access to the rear center seat belt lower anchor and right outboard buckle anchor bracket. 2. Remove the screw (7) that secures the center seat belt lower anchor to the anchor bracket (3) and, from the front of the seat back, pull the belt lower anchor out from between the seat back (1) and the seat cushion (2). 3. Remove the two screws (3) that secure the bezel (2) to the top of the 60 percent section of the rear seat back (1). 4. Remove the bezel from the webbing of the rear center seat belt. 5. Remove the trim cover from the 60 percent section of the rear seat back. See: Body and Frame/Seats/Seat Back/Service and Repair/Seat Back Cushion / Cover - Removal . Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt > Component Information > Service and Repair > Seat Belt > Page 12331 6. Remove the two screws (6) that secure the belt bracket (1) of the rear center seat belt to the top of the seat back frame (3). 7. Disengage the belt bracket of the rear center seat belt from the seat back frame. 8. Remove the screw (4) that secures the rear center seat belt retractor to the seat back frame. 9. Remove the seat belt and retractor from the rear seat back as a unit. Rear Center - Quad Cab REAR CENTER - QUAD CAB WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury during and following any seat belt or child restraint anchor service, carefully inspect all seat belts, buckles, mounting hardware, retractors, tether straps, and anchors for proper installation, operation, or damage. Replace any belt that is cut, frayed, or torn. Straighten any belt that is twisted. Tighten any loose fasteners. Replace any belt that has a damaged or ineffective buckle or retractor. Replace any belt that has a bent or damaged latch plate or anchor plate. Replace any child restraint anchor or the unit to which the anchor is integral that has been bent or damaged. Never attempt to repair a seat belt or child restraint component. Always replace damaged or ineffective seat belt and child restraint components with the correct, new and unused replacement parts listed in the DaimlerChrysler Mopar(R) Parts Catalog. NOTE: The rear center seat belt and retractor is secured to a mounting bracket that includes the right outboard occupant seat belt buckle. The rear right outboard occupant buckle is available for service only as a unit with the center seat belt and retractor. NOTE: All seat belt retractors except the driver side front retractor include a switchable automatic locking mechanism. See: Seat Belt Retractor/Description and Operation/Description. 1. Lift up the rear seat cushion into its stowed position against the rear seat back. 2. Remove the screw (5) that secures the center seat belt lower anchor and the left side of the seat belt retractor mounting bracket to the rear floor panel. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt > Component Information > Service and Repair > Seat Belt > Page 12332 3. Remove the rear seat from the vehicle. On vehicles with the optional 60/40 split rear bench, only the 60 percent section (right side) of the rear seat must be removed. See: Body and Frame/Seats/Service and Repair/Seat - Removal . 4. Lift upward on the forward edge of the rear center seat belt bezel (2) at the top of the cab back panel (1) to release the snap features that secure the bezel to the belt bracket. 5. Remove the bezel from the webbing of the rear center seat belt. 6. Lift the rear center seat belt cover (3) off of the belt bracket at the top of the cab back panel and remove the cover from the webbing of the rear center seat belt. 7. Remove the two screws (4) that secure the belt bracket of the rear center seat belt to the body bracket on the upper cab back panel reinforcement. 8. Remove the belt bracket of the rear center seat belt from the body bracket. 9. Remove the screw (7) that secures the right side of the seat belt retractor mounting bracket and the right outboard occupant buckle (6) unit to the rear floor panel near the base of the cab back panel. 10. Remove the rear center seat belt and retractor unit from the vehicle. Rear Outboard - Mega Cab REAR OUTBOARD - MEGA CAB WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury during and following any seat belt or child restraint anchor service, carefully inspect all seat belts, buckles, mounting hardware, retractors, tether straps, and anchors for proper installation, operation, or damage. Replace any belt that is cut, frayed, or torn. Straighten any belt that is twisted. Tighten any loose fasteners. Replace any belt that has a damaged or ineffective buckle or retractor. Replace any belt that has a bent or damaged latch plate or anchor plate. Replace any child restraint anchor or the unit to which the anchor is integral that has been bent or damaged. Never attempt to repair a seat belt or child restraint component. Always replace damaged or ineffective seat belt and child restraint components with the correct, new and unused replacement parts listed in the DaimlerChrysler Mopar(R) Parts Catalog. NOTE: All seat belt retractors except the driver side front retractor include a switchable automatic locking mechanism. See: Seat Belt Retractor/Description and Operation/Description. 1. Remove the rear seat from the vehicle. See: Body and Frame/Seats/Service and Repair/Seat Removal . 2. Remove the screw (6) that secures the seat belt lower anchor (7) to the base of the inner C-pillar. 3. Unsnap the trim cover (4) from the front seat belt turning loop (3) and discard. 4. Remove the screw (5) that secures the seat belt turning loop to the height adjuster (1) on the upper C-pillar. 5. Remove the seat belt turning loop from the height adjuster. 6. Remove the upper trim (2) from the inside of the C-pillar. See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Trim Panel/Service and Repair/Pillar Trim/C-Pillar Trim Panel-Removal . Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt > Component Information > Service and Repair > Seat Belt > Page 12333 7. Remove the lower trim (2) from the inside of the C-pillar. See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Trim Panel/Service and Repair/Pillar Trim/C-Pillar Trim Panel-Removal 8. Disengage the two clips that secure the belt web guide (5) to the C-pillar. 9. Remove the screw (3) that secures the lower bracket of the retractor (4) to the C-pillar. 10. Disengage the hooks on the upper retractor bracket from the slots in the C-pillar above the retractor mounting hole. 11. Remove the rear outboard seat belt and retractor from the C-pillar as a unit. Rear Outboard - Quad Cab REAR OUTBOARD - QUAD CAB WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury during and following any seat belt or child restraint anchor service, carefully inspect all seat belts, buckles, mounting hardware, retractors, tether straps, and anchors for proper installation, operation, or damage. Replace any belt that is cut, frayed, or torn. Straighten any belt that is twisted. Tighten any loose fasteners. Replace any belt that has a damaged or ineffective buckle or retractor. Replace any belt that has a bent or damaged latch plate or anchor plate. Replace any child restraint anchor or the unit to which the anchor is integral that has been bent or damaged. Never attempt to repair a seat belt or child restraint component. Always replace damaged or ineffective seat belt and child restraint components with the correct, new and unused replacement parts listed in the DaimlerChrysler Mopar(R) Parts Catalog. NOTE: All seat belt retractors except the driver side front retractor include a switchable automatic locking mechanism. See: Seat Belt Retractor/Description and Operation/Description. 1. Remove the rear seat from the vehicle. See: Body and Frame/Seats/Service and Repair/Seat Removal . 2. Remove the screw (5) that secures the seat belt lower anchor (6) to the base of the inner C-pillar. 3. Unsnap the trim cover (3) from the front seat belt turning loop (2) and discard. 4. Remove the screw (4) that secures the seat belt turning loop to the upper C-pillar. 5. Remove the seat belt turning loop from the upper C-pillar. 6. Remove the upper trim (1) from the inside of the C-pillar. See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Trim Panel/Service and Repair/Pillar Trim/C-Pillar Trim Panel-Removal . Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt > Component Information > Service and Repair > Seat Belt > Page 12334 7. Remove the lower trim (2) from the inside of the C-pillar. See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Trim Panel/Service and Repair/Pillar Trim/C-Pillar Trim Panel-Removal 8. Disengage the two clips that secure the belt web guide (5) to the C-pillar. 9. Remove the screw (3) that secures the lower bracket of the retractor (4) to the C-pillar. 10. Disengage the hooks on the upper retractor bracket from the slots in the C-pillar above the retractor mounting hole. 11. Remove the rear outboard seat belt and retractor from the C-pillar as a unit. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt > Component Information > Service and Repair > Seat Belt > Page 12335 Seat Belt: Service and Repair Seat Belt and Retractor - Installation Front Center - Standard Cab FRONT CENTER - STANDARD CAB WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury during and following any seat belt or child restraint anchor service, carefully inspect all seat belts, buckles, mounting hardware, retractors, tether straps, and anchors for proper installation, operation, or damage. Replace any belt that is cut, frayed, or torn. Straighten any belt that is twisted. Tighten any loose fasteners. Replace any belt that has a damaged or ineffective buckle or retractor. Replace any belt that has a bent or damaged latch plate or anchor plate. Replace any child restraint anchor or the unit to which the anchor is integral that has been bent or damaged. Never attempt to repair a seat belt or child restraint component. Always replace damaged or ineffective seat belt and child restraint components with the correct, new and unused replacement parts listed in the DaimlerChrysler Mopar(R) Parts Catalog. NOTE: A front center seat belt and retractor is used only on standard cab vehicles. Quad cab and mega cab vehicles have a lap belt in the front center seating position. See: Seat Belt Buckle/Service and Repair/Seat Belt Buckle - Installation. NOTE: All seat belt retractors except the driver side front retractor include a switchable automatic locking mechanism. See: Seat Belt Retractor/Description and Operation/Description. 1. Position the front center seat belt and retractor unit (5) to the floor panel (6) at the base of the cab back panel (8) to the right of center. 2. Install and tighten the two screws (4) that secure the front center seat belt retractor bracket to the floor panel near the base of the cab back panel. Tighten the screws to 40 Nm (29 ft. lbs.). 3. Position the belt bracket (2) of the front center seat belt (7) to the body bracket (1) on the upper cab back panel reinforcement. 4. Install and tighten the two screws (3) that secure the belt bracket of the front center seat belt to the body bracket on the upper cab back panel reinforcement. Tighten the screws to 20 Nm (15 ft. lbs.). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt > Component Information > Service and Repair > Seat Belt > Page 12336 5. Reinstall the trim (1) onto the cab back panel. See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Trim Panel/Service and Repair/Rear Cab Back Panel Trim/Installation . 6. Route the webbing of the front center seat belt (4) through the bezel (5) and position the bezel to the belt opening near the top of the cab back trim panel. 7. Using hand pressure, press firmly and evenly on each side of the front center seat belt bezel until it snaps into place on the cab back trim panel. 8. Reinstall the stowage tray onto the rear floor panel behind the seat. See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Trim Panel/Service and Repair/Load Floor - Installation . 9. Reach between the center of the front seat cushion and front seat back to access and buckle the front center seat belt lower anchor latch plate to the unique black, keyed lower anchor buckle. Front Outboard - Quad and Mega Cab FRONT OUTBOARD - QUAD AND MEGA CAB WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury on vehicles equipped with airbags, disable the Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, airbag, seat belt tensioner, impact sensor, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the SRS. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment. WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury during and following any seat belt or child restraint anchor service, carefully inspect all seat belts, buckles, mounting hardware, retractors, tether straps, and anchors for proper installation, operation, or damage. Replace any belt that is cut, frayed, or torn. Straighten any belt that is twisted. Tighten any loose fasteners. Replace any belt that has a damaged or ineffective buckle or retractor. Replace any belt that has a bent or damaged latch plate or anchor plate. Replace any child restraint anchor or the unit to which the anchor is integral that has been bent or damaged. Never attempt to repair a seat belt or child restraint component. Always replace damaged or ineffective seat belt and child restraint components with the correct, new and unused replacement parts listed in the DaimlerChrysler Mopar(R) Parts Catalog. NOTE: The following procedure is for replacement of an ineffective or damaged seat belt and retractor unit. On light-duty DR 1500 the front retractor also includes a seat belt tensioner. If the front seat belt or retractor is ineffective or damaged, but the seat belt tensioner is not deployed, review the recommended procedures for handling non-deployed supplemental restraints. See: Air Bag Systems/Service and Repair. If the seat belt tensioner has been deployed, review the recommended procedures for service after a supplemental restraint deployment before removing the unit from the vehicle. See: Repairs and Inspections Required After a Collision/Service and Repair. NOTE: All seat belt retractors except the driver side front retractor include a switchable automatic locking mechanism. See: Seat Belt Retractor/Description and Operation/Description. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt > Component Information > Service and Repair > Seat Belt > Page 12337 1. Position the front outboard seat belt and retractor (7) to the inner B-pillar as a unit. Be certain to engage the tab on the upper retractor bracket into the hole in the B-pillar. 2. Loosely install the screw (6) that secures the lower retractor bracket to the B-pillar. 3. Install and tighten the screw (4) that secures the upper retractor bracket to the B-pillar. Tighten the screw to 12 Nm (105 in. lbs.). 4. Tighten the screw that secures the lower retractor bracket to the B-pillar. Tighten the screw to 39 Nm (29 ft. lbs.). 5. Position the belt web guide (1) to the B-pillar and use hand pressure to press it firmly and evenly until the two clips that secure it snap into place. 6. On light-duty DR 1500 only, reconnect the yellow body wire harness connector (5) to the seat belt tensioner initiator on the retractor. 7. Reinstall the lower trim (3) onto the inside of the B-pillar. Be certain that the turning loop (2) can be accessed from the face of the lower trim after the seat belt webbing is inserted through the slot in the trim. See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Trim Panel/Service and Repair/Pillar Trim/B-Pillar Trim . 8. Reinstall the upper trim (2) onto the inside of the B-pillar. See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Trim Panel/Service and Repair/Pillar Trim/B-Pillar Trim . 9. Position the seat belt turning loop (5) onto the height adjuster (1) on the upper B-pillar. 10. Install and tighten the screw (4) that secures the turning loop to the height adjuster. Tighten the screw to 39 Nm (29 ft. lbs.). 11. Engage the upper edge of a new trim cover (3) over the top of the turning loop. Then squeeze the lower end of the trim cover and the turning loop together firmly and evenly until the engagement tabs of the trim cover snap into the slots of the turning loop. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt > Component Information > Service and Repair > Seat Belt > Page 12338 12. Position the seat belt (2) lower anchor to the mounting hole on the outboard side of the front seat (1) cushion frame. Be certain that the seat belt webbing between the turning loop and the lower anchor is not twisted. 13. Install and tighten the screw (3) that secures the lower anchor to the seat. Tighten the screw to 39 Nm (29 ft. lbs.). 14. Reinstall the lower anchor cover (4) onto the front seat cushion outboard side shield. 15. Do not reconnect the battery negative cable at this time. The Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) verification test procedure should be performed following service of any SRS component. See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code Tests and Associated Procedures/Verification Tests . Front Outboard - Standard Cab FRONT OUTBOARD - STANDARD CAB WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury on vehicles equipped with airbags, disable the Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, airbag, seat belt tensioner, impact sensor, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the SRS. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment. WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury during and following any seat belt or child restraint anchor service, carefully inspect all seat belts, buckles, mounting hardware, retractors, tether straps, and anchors for proper installation, operation, or damage. Replace any belt that is cut, frayed, or torn. Straighten any belt that is twisted. Tighten any loose fasteners. Replace any belt that has a damaged or ineffective buckle or retractor. Replace any belt that has a bent or damaged latch plate or anchor plate. Replace any child restraint anchor or the unit to which the anchor is integral that has been bent or damaged. Never attempt to repair a seat belt or child restraint component. Always replace damaged or ineffective seat belt and child restraint components with the correct, new and unused replacement parts listed in the DaimlerChrysler Mopar(R) Parts Catalog. NOTE: The following procedure is for replacement of an ineffective or damaged seat belt and retractor unit. On light-duty DR 1500 the front retractor also includes a seat belt tensioner. If the front seat belt or retractor is ineffective or damaged, but the seat belt tensioner is not deployed, review the recommended procedures for handling non-deployed supplemental restraints. See: Air Bag Systems/Service and Repair. If the seat belt tensioner has been deployed, review the recommended procedures for service after a supplemental restraint deployment before removing the unit from the vehicle. See: Repairs and Inspections Required After a Collision/Service and Repair. NOTE: The seat belt retractor on the driver side of all standard cab vehicles includes a tension reducer. See: Seat Belt Tensioner/Description and Operation/Seat Belt Tension Reducer/Description. All seat belt retractors except the driver side front retractor include a switchable automatic locking mechanism. See: Seat Belt Retractor/Description and Operation/Description. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt > Component Information > Service and Repair > Seat Belt > Page 12339 1. Position the front outboard seat belt and retractor (7) to the inner B-pillar as a unit. Be certain to engage the tab on the upper retractor bracket into the hole in the B-pillar. 2. Loosely install the screw (6) that secures the lower retractor bracket to the B-pillar. 3. Install and tighten the screw (4) that secures the upper retractor bracket to the B-pillar. Tighten the screw to 12 Nm (105 in. lbs.). 4. Tighten the screw that secures the lower retractor bracket to the B-pillar. Tighten the screw to 39 Nm (29 ft. lbs.). 5. Position the belt web guide (1) to the B-pillar and use hand pressure to press it firmly and evenly until the two clips that secure it snap into place. 6. On light-duty DR 1500 only, reconnect the yellow body wire harness connector (5) to the seat belt tensioner initiator on the retractor. 7. On the driver side only, reconnect the white body wire harness connector to the seat belt tension reducer connector receptacle near the bottom of the retractor. 8. Reinstall the lower trim (3) onto the inside of the B-pillar. Be certain that the turning loop (2) can be accessed from the face of the lower trim after the seat belt webbing is inserted through the slot in the trim. See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Trim Panel/Service and Repair/Pillar Trim/B-Pillar Trim . 9. Reinstall the upper trim (2) onto the inside of the B-pillar. See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Trim Panel/Service and Repair/Pillar Trim/B-Pillar Trim . 10. Position the seat belt turning loop (5) onto the height adjuster (1) on the upper B-pillar. 11. Install and tighten the screw (4) that secures the turning loop to the height adjuster. Tighten the screw to 39 Nm (29 ft. lbs.). 12. Engage the upper edge of a new trim cover (3) over the top of the turning loop. Then squeeze the lower end of the trim cover and the turning loop together firmly and evenly until the engagement tabs of the trim cover snap into the slots of the turning loop. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt > Component Information > Service and Repair > Seat Belt > Page 12340 13. Position the seat belt (2) lower anchor to the mounting hole on the outboard side of the front seat (1) cushion frame. Be certain that the seat belt webbing between the turning loop and the lower anchor is not twisted. 14. Install and tighten the screw (3) that secures the lower anchor to the seat. Tighten the screw to 39 Nm (29 ft. lbs.). 15. Reinstall the lower anchor cover (4) onto the front seat cushion outboard side shield. 16. Reinstall the stowage tray onto the rear floor panel behind the seat. See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Trim Panel/Service and Repair/Load Floor - Installation . 17. Do not reconnect the battery negative cable at this time. The Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) verification test procedure should be performed following service of any SRS component. See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code Tests and Associated Procedures/Verification Tests . Rear Center - Mega Cab REAR CENTER - MEGA CAB WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury during and following any seat belt or child restraint anchor service, carefully inspect all seat belts, buckles, mounting hardware, retractors, tether straps, and anchors for proper installation, operation, or damage. Replace any belt that is cut, frayed, or torn. Straighten any belt that is twisted. Tighten any loose fasteners. Replace any belt that has a damaged or ineffective buckle or retractor. Replace any belt that has a bent or damaged latch plate or anchor plate. Replace any child restraint anchor or the unit to which the anchor is integral that has been bent or damaged. Never attempt to repair a seat belt or child restraint component. Always replace damaged or ineffective seat belt and child restraint components with the correct, new and unused replacement parts listed in the DaimlerChrysler Mopar(R) Parts Catalog. NOTE: All seat belt retractors except the driver side front retractor include a switchable automatic locking mechanism. See: Seat Belt Retractor/Description and Operation/Description. 1. Position the rear center seat belt and retractor unit into the 60 percent section of the rear seat back frame (3). Be certain the tab (5) on the retractor bracket is engaged in the slot in the frame. 2. Install and tighten the screw (4) that secures the rear center seat belt retractor to the seat back frame. Tighten the screw to 60 Nm (44 ft. lbs.). 3. Position the belt bracket (1) of the rear center seat belt onto the top of the seat back frame. Be certain the tab (2) on the bracket is engaged in the slot in the frame. 4. Install and tighten the two screws (6) that secure the belt bracket of the rear center seat belt to the seat back frame. Tighten the screws to 60 Nm (44 ft. lbs.). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt > Component Information > Service and Repair > Seat Belt > Page 12341 5. Reinstall the trim cover onto the 60 percent section of the rear seat back frame. See: Body and Frame/Seats/Seat Back/Service and Repair/Seat Back Cushion / Cover - Installation . 6. Engage the rear center seat belt bezel (2) over the webbing of the rear center seat belt. 7. Position the bezel over the belt bracket on the top of the rear seat back (1). 8. Install and tighten the two screws (3) that secure the bezel to the belt bracket on the top of the rear seat back frame. Tighten the screws to 5 Nm (44 in. lbs.). 9. Route the center seat belt lower anchor between the seat back (1) and the seat cushion (2) and position it to the anchor bracket (3). Be certain the belt webbing is not twisted between the retractor and the anchor bracket. 10. Install and tighten the screw (7) that secures the seat belt lower anchor to the anchor bracket. Tighten the screw to 40 Nm (30 ft. lbs.). 11. Restore the 60 percent seat back filler panel and the seat back to their previous positions. Rear Center - Quad Cab REAR CENTER - QUAD CAB WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury during and following any seat belt or child restraint anchor service, carefully inspect all seat belts, buckles, mounting hardware, retractors, tether straps, and anchors for proper installation, operation, or damage. Replace any belt that is cut, frayed, or torn. Straighten any belt that is twisted. Tighten any loose fasteners. Replace any belt that has a damaged or ineffective buckle or retractor. Replace any belt that has a bent or damaged latch plate or anchor plate. Replace any child restraint anchor or the unit to which the anchor is integral that has been bent or damaged. Never attempt to repair a seat belt or child restraint component. Always replace damaged or ineffective seat belt and child restraint components with the correct, new and unused replacement parts listed in the DaimlerChrysler Mopar(R) Parts Catalog. NOTE: The rear center seat belt and retractor is secured to a mounting bracket that includes the right outboard occupant seat belt buckle. The rear right outboard occupant buckle is available for service only as a unit with the center seat belt and retractor. NOTE: All seat belt retractors except the driver side front retractor include a switchable automatic locking mechanism. See: Seat Belt Retractor/Description and Operation/Description. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt > Component Information > Service and Repair > Seat Belt > Page 12342 1. Position the rear center seat belt retractor and right outboard occupant buckle unit (6) onto the rear floor panel near the base of the cab back panel (1). 2. Loosely install the screw (7) that secures the right side of the seat belt retractor mounting bracket and the right outboard occupant buckle unit to the rear floor panel near the base of the cab back panel. 3. Position the belt bracket of the rear center seat belt onto the body bracket on the upper cab back panel reinforcement. 4. Install and tighten the two screws (4) that secure the belt bracket to the body bracket. Tighten the screws to 20 Nm (15 ft. lbs.). 5. Lift the webbing of the rear center seat belt and slide the cover (3) over the belt bracket at the top of the cab back panel until it is fully seated. 6. Route the rear center seat belt bezel (2) over the webbing of the rear center seat belt. 7. Position the rear center seat belt bezel over the cover and belt bracket at the top of the cab back panel and engage the rearward snap features of the bezel with the belt bracket. Using hand pressure, press firmly and evenly downward on the front of the bezel until it snaps into place over the cover and belt bracket. 8. Reinstall the rear seat into the vehicle. On vehicles with the optional 60/40 split rear bench, only the 60 percent section (right side) of the rear seat must be reinstalled. See: Body and Frame/Seats/Service and Repair/Seat - Installation . 9. Insert the rear center seat belt lower anchor between the rear seat back and the seat cushion, and position the anchor to the left side of the seat belt retractor mounting bracket on the rear floor panel. 10. Install and tighten the screw (5) that secures the center seat belt lower anchor and the left side of the seat belt retractor mounting bracket to the rear floor panel. Tighten the screw to 40 Nm (29 ft. lbs.). 11. Tighten the screw that secures the right side of the seat belt retractor mounting bracket to the rear floor panel to 40 Nm (29 ft. lbs.). 12. Restore the rear seat cushion to its seating position. Rear Outboard - Mega Cab REAR OUTBOARD - MEGA CAB WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury during and following any seat belt or child restraint anchor service, carefully inspect all seat belts, buckles, mounting hardware, retractors, tether straps, and anchors for proper installation, operation, or damage. Replace any belt that is cut, frayed, or torn. Straighten any belt that is twisted. Tighten any loose fasteners. Replace any belt that has a damaged or ineffective buckle or retractor. Replace any belt that has a bent or damaged latch plate or anchor plate. Replace any child restraint anchor or the unit to which the anchor is integral that has been bent or damaged. Never attempt to repair a seat belt or child restraint component. Always replace damaged or ineffective seat belt and child restraint components with the correct, new and unused replacement parts listed in the DaimlerChrysler Mopar(R) Parts Catalog. NOTE: All seat belt retractors except the driver side front retractor include a switchable automatic locking mechanism. See: Seat Belt Retractor/Description and Operation/Description. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt > Component Information > Service and Repair > Seat Belt > Page 12343 1. Position the rear outboard seat belt and retractor (4) to the inner C-pillar as a unit. Be certain to engage the hooks on the upper retractor bracket into the mounting hole in the C-pillar. 2. Install and tighten the screw (3) that secures the lower retractor bracket to the C-pillar. Tighten the screw to 39 Nm (29 ft. lbs.). 3. Position the belt web guide (5) to the B-pillar and use hand pressure to press it firmly and evenly until the two clips that secure it snap into place. 4. Reinstall the lower trim (2) onto the inside of the C-pillar. Be certain that the turning loop (1) can be accessed from the face of the lower trim after the seat belt webbing is inserted through the slot in the trim. See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Trim Panel/Service and Repair/Pillar Trim/C-Pillar Trim Panel-Installation . 5. Reinstall the upper trim (2) onto the inside of the C-pillar. See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Trim Panel/Service and Repair/Pillar Trim/C-Pillar Trim Panel-Installation . 6. Position the seat belt turning loop (3) onto the height adjuster (1) on the upper C-pillar. 7. Install and tighten the screw (5) that secures the turning loop to the height adjuster. Tighten the screw to 39 Nm (29 ft. lbs.). 8. Engage the upper edge of a new trim cover (4) over the top of the turning loop. Then squeeze the lower end of the trim cover and the turning loop together firmly and evenly until the engagement tabs of the trim cover snap into the slots of the turning loop. 9. Position the seat belt lower anchor (7) to the mounting hole at the base of the C-pillar. 10. Install and tighten the screw (6) that secures the lower anchor to the C-pillar. Tighten the screw to 39 Nm (29 ft. lbs.). 11. Reinstall the rear seat into the vehicle. See: Body and Frame/Seats/Service and Repair/Seat - Installation . Rear Outboard - Quad Cab REAR OUTBOARD - QUAD CAB WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury during and following any seat belt or child restraint anchor service, carefully inspect all seat belts, buckles, mounting hardware, retractors, tether straps, and anchors for proper installation, operation, or damage. Replace any belt that is cut, frayed, or torn. Straighten any belt that is twisted. Tighten any loose fasteners. Replace any belt that has a damaged or ineffective buckle or retractor. Replace any belt that has a bent or damaged latch plate or anchor plate. Replace any child restraint anchor or the unit to which the anchor is integral that has been bent or damaged. Never attempt to repair a seat belt or child restraint component. Always replace damaged or ineffective seat belt and child restraint components with the correct, new and unused replacement parts listed in the DaimlerChrysler Mopar(R) Parts Catalog. NOTE: All seat belt retractors except the driver side front retractor include a switchable automatic locking mechanism. See: Seat Belt Retractor/Description and Operation/Description. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt > Component Information > Service and Repair > Seat Belt > Page 12344 1. Position the rear outboard seat belt and retractor (4) to the inner C-pillar as a unit. Be certain to engage the hooks on the upper retractor bracket into the mounting hole in the C-pillar. 2. Install and tighten the screw (3) that secures the lower retractor bracket to the C-pillar. Tighten the screw to 39 Nm (29 ft. lbs.). 3. Position the belt web guide (5) to the B-pillar and use hand pressure to press it firmly and evenly until the two clips that secure it snap into place. 4. Reinstall the lower trim (2) onto the inside of the C-pillar. Be certain that the turning loop (1) can be accessed from the face of the lower trim after the seat belt webbing is inserted through the slot in the trim. See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Trim Panel/Service and Repair/Pillar Trim/C-Pillar Trim Panel-Installation . 5. Reinstall the upper trim (1) onto the inside of the C-pillar. See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Trim Panel/Service and Repair/Pillar Trim/C-Pillar Trim Panel-Installation . 6. Position the seat belt turning loop (2) onto the upper C-pillar. 7. Install and tighten the screw (4) that secures the turning loop to the C-pillar. Tighten the screw to 39 Nm (29 ft. lbs.). 8. Engage the upper edge of a new trim cover (3) over the top of the turning loop. Then squeeze the lower end of the trim cover and the turning loop together firmly and evenly until the engagement tabs of the trim cover snap into the slots of the turning loop. 9. Position the seat belt lower anchor (6) to the mounting hole at the base of the C-pillar. 10. Install and tighten the screw (5) that secures the lower anchor to the C-pillar. Tighten the screw to 39 Nm (29 ft. lbs.). 11. Reinstall the rear seat into the vehicle. See: Body and Frame/Seats/Service and Repair/Seat - Installation . Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Buckle > Component Information > Service and Repair > Seat Belt Buckle - Removal Seat Belt Buckle: Service and Repair Seat Belt Buckle - Removal Front Center and Center Anchor FRONT CENTER AND CENTER ANCHOR WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury during and following any seat belt or child restraint anchor service, carefully inspect all seat belts, buckles, mounting hardware, retractors, tether straps, and anchors for proper installation, operation, or damage. Replace any belt that is cut, frayed, or torn. Straighten any belt that is twisted. Tighten any loose fasteners. Replace any belt that has a damaged or ineffective buckle or retractor. Replace any belt that has a bent or damaged latch plate or anchor plate. Replace any child restraint anchor or the unit to which the anchor is integral that has been bent or damaged. Never attempt to repair a seat belt or child restraint component. Always replace damaged or ineffective seat belt and child restraint components with the correct, new and unused replacement parts listed in the DaimlerChrysler Mopar(R) Parts Catalog. NOTE: A fixed position front center seat belt buckle is located on the left side of the front center seat section (20 percent) used on all vehicles. Standard cab vehicles have a unique, fixed position, black, keyed, lower anchor buckle for the three-point center seat belt lower anchor located on the right side of the front center seat section. Quad cab and mega cab vehicles have a fixed position front center seat lap belt located on the right side of the front center seat section. The following procedure applies to the front center seating position belt buckle, the lap belt or the anchor buckle. The three-point front center seat belt and retractor unit is only used on standard cab vehicles. See: Seat Belt Retractor/Service and Repair/Seat Belt and Retractor - Removal. 1. Move the adjacent right or left front outboard seat section (40 percent) to its most forward position and tilt the seat back forward for easiest access to the lower anchor of the front center seat belt buckle, lap belt or anchor buckle (1). 2. On standard cab vehicles only, remove the stowage tray from the rear floor panel behind the seat. See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Trim Panel/Service and Repair/Load Floor - Removal . 3. From behind the front seat, remove the screw (5) that secures the lower anchor of the front center seat belt buckle, lap belt or anchor buckle to the center seat support bracket (3). 4. From the front of the front seat, reach between the side of the center seat cushion (6) and the adjacent right or left front outboard seat cushion to access and remove the seat belt buckle, lap belt or anchor buckle through the elastic strap (2) on the side of the center seat cushion. 5. Remove the front center seat belt buckle, lap belt or anchor buckle unit from the front seat. Front Outboard FRONT OUTBOARD WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury during and following any seat belt or child restraint anchor service, carefully inspect all seat belts, buckles, mounting hardware, retractors, tether straps, and anchors for proper installation, operation, or damage. Replace any belt that is cut, frayed, or torn. Straighten any belt that is twisted. Tighten any loose fasteners. Replace any belt that has a damaged or ineffective buckle or retractor. Replace any belt that has a bent or damaged latch plate or anchor plate. Replace any child restraint anchor or the unit to which the anchor is integral that has been bent or damaged. Never attempt to repair a seat belt or child restraint component. Always replace damaged or ineffective seat belt and child restraint components with the correct, new and unused replacement parts listed in the DaimlerChrysler Mopar(R) Parts Catalog. NOTE: A traveling front outboard seat belt buckle is located on the inboard side of each front outboard seat section (40 percent) used on all vehicles. The seat belt buckle on the driver side front seat for all vehicles also includes a seat belt switch. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Buckle > Component Information > Service and Repair > Seat Belt Buckle - Removal > Page 12349 1. Move the right or left front outboard seat section to its most rearward position and tilt the seat back forward for easiest access to the front outboard seat belt buckle lower anchor. 2. On standard cab vehicles only, also move the outboard seat section opposite the side from which the buckle is to be removed to its most forward position and tilt the seat back forward. 3. On standard cab vehicles only, remove the stowage tray from the rear floor panel behind the seat. See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Trim Panel/Service and Repair/Load Floor - Removal . 4. For buckles equipped with a seat belt switch, from behind the front seat disconnect the seat belt switch pigtail wire connector (4) from the seat wire harness take out and connector located on the lower inboard side of the seat cushion frame just forward of the buckle lower anchor. 5. From behind the front seat, remove the screw (3) that secures the buckle (1) lower anchor to the lower inboard side of the seat cushion frame. 6. From the front of the front seat, reach between the center seat cushion (2) or center floor console and the right or left front outboard seat cushion to access and remove the front outboard seat belt buckle from the seat. Rear Center Anchor and Right Outboard - Mega Cab REAR CENTER ANCHOR AND RIGHT OUTBOARD - MEGA CAB WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury during and following any seat belt or child restraint anchor service, carefully inspect all seat belts, buckles, mounting hardware, retractors, tether straps, and anchors for proper installation, operation, or damage. Replace any belt that is cut, frayed, or torn. Straighten any belt that is twisted. Tighten any loose fasteners. Replace any belt that has a damaged or ineffective buckle or retractor. Replace any belt that has a bent or damaged latch plate or anchor plate. Replace any child restraint anchor or the unit to which the anchor is integral that has been bent or damaged. Never attempt to repair a seat belt or child restraint component. Always replace damaged or ineffective seat belt and child restraint components with the correct, new and unused replacement parts listed in the DaimlerChrysler Mopar(R) Parts Catalog. NOTE: The rear seat right outboard occupant buckle is serviced as a unit with an anchor bracket. The lower anchor of the rear center seat belt and retractor is also secured to the anchor bracket with a screw so that it can be removed from the anchor bracket and serviced separately from the buckle. See: Seat Belt Retractor/Service and Repair/Seat Belt and Retractor - Removal. 1. Fold the 60 percent section of the rear seat back (2) down onto the seat cushion in the cargo storage position, then lift and prop open the seat back filler panel (3) as necessary for easiest access to the rear center seat belt lower anchor and right outboard buckle anchor bracket. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Buckle > Component Information > Service and Repair > Seat Belt Buckle - Removal > Page 12350 2. Remove the screw (7) that secures the center seat belt lower anchor to the anchor bracket (3) and temporarily secure the belt lower anchor to keep it from being pulled from between the seat back (1) and the seat cushion (2) by the retractor. 3. Remove and discard the screw (6) that secures the buckle anchor bracket and the rear seat rear mounting bracket (5) to the rear floor panel. 4. Remove the nut (4) that secures the buckle anchor bracket to the stud on the rear seat rear mounting bracket. 5. Disengage the buckle from between the seat cushion and the seat back, then remove the anchor bracket and buckle from behind the rear seat as a unit. Rear Center and Left Outboard - Mega Cab REAR CENTER AND LEFT OUTBOARD - MEGA CAB WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury during and following any seat belt or child restraint anchor service, carefully inspect all seat belts, buckles, mounting hardware, retractors, tether straps, and anchors for proper installation, operation, or damage. Replace any belt that is cut, frayed, or torn. Straighten any belt that is twisted. Tighten any loose fasteners. Replace any belt that has a damaged or ineffective buckle or retractor. Replace any belt that has a bent or damaged latch plate or anchor plate. Replace any child restraint anchor or the unit to which the anchor is integral that has been bent or damaged. Never attempt to repair a seat belt or child restraint component. Always replace damaged or ineffective seat belt and child restraint components with the correct, new and unused replacement parts listed in the DaimlerChrysler Mopar(R) Parts Catalog. 1. Fold both the 40 percent section and the 60 percent section of the rear seat back (1 and 2) down onto the seat cushion in the cargo storage position, then lift and prop open the seat back filler panels (3 and 4) as necessary for easiest access to the rear center and left outboard seat belt buckle anchor bracket. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Buckle > Component Information > Service and Repair > Seat Belt Buckle - Removal > Page 12351 2. Remove the four screws (2) that secure the stabilizer bracket (4) to the two inboard seat hinge brackets. 3. Remove the stabilizer bracket from between the seat hinge brackets. 4. Remove and discard the screw (3) that secures the buckle anchor bracket (5) and the rear seat rear mounting bracket to the rear floor panel. 5. Remove the nut (1) that secures the buckle anchor bracket to the stud on the rear seat rear mounting bracket. 6. Disengage the buckles from between the seat cushion and the seat back, then remove the anchor bracket and buckles from between the rear seat sections as a unit. Rear - Quad Cab REAR - QUAD CAB WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury during and following any seat belt or child restraint anchor service, carefully inspect all seat belts, buckles, mounting hardware, retractors, tether straps, and anchors for proper installation, operation, or damage. Replace any belt that is cut, frayed, or torn. Straighten any belt that is twisted. Tighten any loose fasteners. Replace any belt that has a damaged or ineffective buckle or retractor. Replace any belt that has a bent or damaged latch plate or anchor plate. Replace any child restraint anchor or the unit to which the anchor is integral that has been bent or damaged. Never attempt to repair a seat belt or child restraint component. Always replace damaged or ineffective seat belt and child restraint components with the correct, new and unused replacement parts listed in the DaimlerChrysler Mopar(R) Parts Catalog. NOTE: The following removal procedure covers service of the rear seat center and left outboard seat belt buckle units. The rear seat right outboard seat belt buckle is serviced as a unit with the rear seat center seat belt and retractor assembly. See: Seat Belt Retractor/Service and Repair/Seat Belt and Retractor - Removal. 1. Lift up the rear seat cushion into its stowed position against the rear seat back. 2. Remove the screw (2) that secures either the center (4) or the left outboard (3) occupant buckle unit to the rear floor panel near the base of the cab back panel (1). On vehicles with the optional 60/40 split rear bench, the screw that secures the buckle unit also secures one of the rear seat mounting brackets to the rear floor panel. 3. Remove the center or left outboard occupant buckle unit from the rear floor panel or from the rear seat mounting bracket. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Buckle > Component Information > Service and Repair > Seat Belt Buckle - Removal > Page 12352 Seat Belt Buckle: Service and Repair Seat Belt Buckle - Installation Front Center and Center Anchor FRONT CENTER AND CENTER ANCHOR WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury during and following any seat belt or child restraint anchor service, carefully inspect all seat belts, buckles, mounting hardware, retractors, tether straps, and anchors for proper installation, operation, or damage. Replace any belt that is cut, frayed, or torn. Straighten any belt that is twisted. Tighten any loose fasteners. Replace any belt that has a damaged or ineffective buckle or retractor. Replace any belt that has a bent or damaged latch plate or anchor plate. Replace any child restraint anchor or the unit to which the anchor is integral that has been bent or damaged. Never attempt to repair a seat belt or child restraint component. Always replace damaged or ineffective seat belt and child restraint components with the correct, new and unused replacement parts listed in the DaimlerChrysler Mopar(R) Parts Catalog. NOTE: A fixed position front center seat belt buckle is located on the left side of the front center seat section (20 percent) used on all vehicles. Standard cab vehicles have a unique, fixed position, black, keyed, lower anchor buckle for the three-point center seat belt lower anchor located on the right side of the front center seat section. Quad cab and mega cab vehicles have a fixed position front center seat lap belt located on the right side of the front center seat section. The following procedure applies to the front center seating position belt buckle, the lap belt or the anchor buckle. The three-point front center seat belt and retractor unit is only used on standard cab vehicles. See: Seat Belt Retractor/Service and Repair/Seat Belt and Retractor - Installation. 1. From the front of the front seat, position the front center seat belt buckle, lap belt or anchor buckle unit (1) through the elastic strap (2) on the side of the center seat cushion (6). 2. From the front of the front seat, reach between the side of the center seat cushion and the adjacent right or left front outboard seat cushion to route the lower anchor of the seat belt buckle, lap belt or anchor buckle unit down between the side of the center seat cushion and the adjacent right or left front outboard seat cushion. Be certain that the belt webbing is not twisted. 3. From behind the front seat, position the lower anchor of the seat belt buckle, lap belt or anchor buckle to the center seat support bracket (3). Be certain to engage the anti-rotation tab on the lower anchor into the corresponding hole in the center seat support bracket. 4. Install and tighten the screw (5) that secures the lower anchor of the seat belt buckle, lap belt or anchor buckle to the center seat support bracket. Tighten the screw to 40 Nm (29 ft. lbs.). 5. On standard cab vehicles only, reinstall the stowage tray onto the rear floor panel behind the seat. See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Trim Panel/Service and Repair/Load Floor - Installation . Front Outboard FRONT OUTBOARD WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury during and following any seat belt or child restraint anchor service, carefully inspect all seat belts, buckles, mounting hardware, retractors, tether straps, and anchors for proper installation, operation, or damage. Replace any belt that is cut, frayed, or torn. Straighten any belt that is twisted. Tighten any loose fasteners. Replace any belt that has a damaged or ineffective buckle or retractor. Replace any belt that has a bent or damaged latch plate or anchor plate. Replace any child restraint anchor or the unit to which the anchor is integral that has been bent or damaged. Never attempt to repair a seat belt or child restraint component. Always replace damaged or ineffective seat belt and child restraint components with the correct, new and unused replacement parts listed in the DaimlerChrysler Mopar(R) Parts Catalog. NOTE: A traveling front outboard seat belt buckle is located on the inboard side of each front outboard seat section (40 percent) used on all Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Buckle > Component Information > Service and Repair > Seat Belt Buckle - Removal > Page 12353 vehicles. The seat belt buckle on the driver side front seat for all vehicles also includes a seat belt switch. 1. From the front of the front seat, reach between the center seat cushion (2) or center floor console and the right or left front outboard seat cushion to position the front outboard seat belt buckle to the seat. 2. From behind the front seat, position the front outboard seat belt buckle lower anchor to the lower inboard side of the seat cushion frame. Be certain to engage the anti-rotation tab on the lower anchor into the corresponding hole in the seat cushion frame. 3. Install and tighten the screw (3) that secures the front outboard seat belt buckle lower anchor to the seat cushion frame. Tighten the screw to 25 Nm (18 ft. lbs.). 4. For buckles equipped with a seat belt switch, reconnect the seat belt switch pigtail wire connector (4) to the seat wire harness take out and connector located on the lower inboard side of the seat cushion frame just forward of the buckle lower anchor. 5. On standard cab vehicles only, reinstall the stowage tray onto the rear floor panel behind the seat. See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Trim Panel/Service and Repair/Load Floor - Installation . Rear Center Anchor and Right Outboard - Mega Cab REAR CENTER ANCHOR AND RIGHT OUTBOARD - MEGA CAB WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury during and following any seat belt or child restraint anchor service, carefully inspect all seat belts, buckles, mounting hardware, retractors, tether straps, and anchors for proper installation, operation, or damage. Replace any belt that is cut, frayed, or torn. Straighten any belt that is twisted. Tighten any loose fasteners. Replace any belt that has a damaged or ineffective buckle or retractor. Replace any belt that has a bent or damaged latch plate or anchor plate. Replace any child restraint anchor or the unit to which the anchor is integral that has been bent or damaged. Never attempt to repair a seat belt or child restraint component. Always replace damaged or ineffective seat belt and child restraint components with the correct, new and unused replacement parts listed in the DaimlerChrysler Mopar(R) Parts Catalog. NOTE: The rear seat right outboard occupant buckle is serviced as a unit with a mounting bracket. The lower anchor of the rear center seat belt and retractor is also secured to the mounting bracket with a screw so that it can be removed from the mounting bracket and serviced separately from the buckle. See: Seat Belt Retractor/Service and Repair/Seat Belt and Retractor - Removal. 1. Engage the buckle unit between the seat cushion (2) and the seat back (1), then position the anchor bracket (3) to the rear seat rear mounting bracket (5) behind the rear seat as a unit. Be certain to engage the anti-rotation tab on the anchor bracket into the clearance hole in the mounting bracket. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Buckle > Component Information > Service and Repair > Seat Belt Buckle - Removal > Page 12354 2. Install and tighten the nut (4) that secures the buckle anchor bracket to the stud on the rear seat rear mounting bracket. Tighten the nut to 23 Nm (17 ft. lbs.). 3. Install and tighten a new screw (6) to secure the buckle anchor bracket and the rear seat rear mounting bracket to the rear floor panel. Tighten the screw to 47 Nm (35 ft. lbs.). 4. Route the center seat belt lower anchor between the seat back and the seat cushion and position it to the anchor bracket. Be certain the belt webbing is not twisted between the retractor and the anchor bracket. 5. Install and tighten the screw (7) that secures the seat belt lower anchor to the anchor bracket. Tighten the screw to 40 Nm (30 ft. lbs.). 6. Restore the 60 percent seat back filler panel and the seat back to their previous positions. Rear Center and Left Outboard - Mega Cab REAR CENTER AND LEFT OUTBOARD - MEGA CAB WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury during and following any seat belt or child restraint anchor service, carefully inspect all seat belts, buckles, mounting hardware, retractors, tether straps, and anchors for proper installation, operation, or damage. Replace any belt that is cut, frayed, or torn. Straighten any belt that is twisted. Tighten any loose fasteners. Replace any belt that has a damaged or ineffective buckle or retractor. Replace any belt that has a bent or damaged latch plate or anchor plate. Replace any child restraint anchor or the unit to which the anchor is integral that has been bent or damaged. Never attempt to repair a seat belt or child restraint component. Always replace damaged or ineffective seat belt and child restraint components with the correct, new and unused replacement parts listed in the DaimlerChrysler Mopar(R) Parts Catalog. 1. Position the buckles and anchor bracket (5) between the inboard rear seat hinge brackets and engage the buckle units between the seat cushion and the seat back as a unit. Be certain to engage the anti-rotation tab on the anchor bracket into the clearance hole in the rear seat rear mounting bracket. 2. Install and tighten the nut (1) that secures the buckle anchor bracket to the stud on the rear seat rear mounting bracket. Tighten the nut to 23 Nm (17 ft. lbs.). 3. Install and tighten a new screw (3) to secure the buckle anchor bracket and the rear seat rear mounting bracket to the rear floor panel. Tighten the screw to 47 Nm (35 ft. lbs.). 4. Position the stabilizer bracket (4) between the two inboard rear seat hinge brackets. 5. Install and tighten the four screws (2) that secure the stabilizer bracket to the hinge brackets. Tighten the screws to 5 Nm (44 in. lbs.). 6. Restore both seat back filler panels and both seat backs to their previous positions. Rear - Quad Cab REAR - QUAD CAB WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury during and following any seat belt or child restraint anchor service, carefully inspect all seat belts, buckles, mounting hardware, retractors, tether straps, and anchors for proper installation, operation, or damage. Replace any belt that is cut, frayed, or torn. Straighten any belt that is twisted. Tighten any loose fasteners. Replace any belt that has a damaged or ineffective buckle or retractor. Replace any belt that has a bent or damaged latch plate or anchor plate. Replace any child restraint anchor or the unit to which the anchor is integral that has been bent or damaged. Never attempt to repair a seat belt or child restraint component. Always replace damaged or ineffective seat belt and child restraint components with the correct, new and unused replacement parts listed in the DaimlerChrysler Mopar(R) Parts Catalog. NOTE: The following installation procedure covers service of the rear seat center and left outboard seat belt buckle units. The rear seat right outboard seat belt buckle is serviced as a unit with the rear seat center seat belt and retractor assembly. See: Seat Belt Retractor/Service and Repair/Seat Belt and Retractor - Installation. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Buckle > Component Information > Service and Repair > Seat Belt Buckle - Removal > Page 12355 1. Position the center (4) or the left outboard (3) occupant buckle unit onto the rear floor panel or onto the rear seat mounting bracket near the base of the cab back panel (1). On vehicles with the optional 60/40 split rear bench, the screw that secures the buckle unit also secures one of the rear seat mounting brackets to the rear floor panel. 2. Install and tighten the screw (2) that secures the center or the left outboard occupant buckle unit to the rear floor panel. Tighten the screw to 40 Nm (29 ft. lbs.). 3. Restore the rear seat cushion to its seating position. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Buckle Switch > Component Information > Locations Seat Belt Buckle Switch: Locations Component ID: 506 Component : SWITCH-SEAT BELT-DRIVER Connector: Name : SWITCH-SEAT BELT-DRIVER Color : # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (HD) Pin Circuit Description 1 Z951 18BK GROUND 2 G10 20VT/LG SEAT BELT SWITCH SENSE Component Location - 66 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Buckle Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 12359 Connector: Name : SWITCH-SEAT BELT-DRIVER Color : LT. GRAY # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (LD) Pin Circuit Description 1 Z917 20BK GROUND 2 R57 20LG/GY DRIVER SEAT BELT SWITCH SENSE Component Location - 66 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Buckle Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 12360 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Buckle Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 12361 Seat Belt Buckle Switch: Diagrams Component ID: 506 Component : SWITCH-SEAT BELT-DRIVER Connector: Name : SWITCH-SEAT BELT-DRIVER Color : # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (HD) Pin Circuit Description 1 Z951 18BK GROUND 2 G10 20VT/LG SEAT BELT SWITCH SENSE Component Location - 66 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Buckle Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 12362 Connector: Name : SWITCH-SEAT BELT-DRIVER Color : LT. GRAY # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (LD) Pin Circuit Description 1 Z917 20BK GROUND 2 R57 20LG/GY DRIVER SEAT BELT SWITCH SENSE Component Location - 66 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Buckle Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 12363 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Buckle Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Seat Belt Buckle Switch: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION All vehicles are equipped with a driver side seat belt switch that is a small, normally open, single pole, single throw, leaf contact, momentary switch. The driver side seat belt switch is integral to the buckle (1) of the driver side front seat belt buckle, which is located on a stamped steel stanchion secured by a screw (3) to the inboard side of the driver side front seat cushion frame. The seat belt switch is connected to the vehicle electrical system through a two-lead pigtail wire and connector (4) on the seat belt buckle-half, which is connected to a wire harness connector and take out of the seat wire harness routed beneath the driver side front seat cushion in the passenger compartment. The seat belt switch cannot be adjusted or repaired. If ineffective or damaged, the entire driver side front seat belt buckle-half unit must be replaced. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Buckle Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 12366 Seat Belt Buckle Switch: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The driver side seat belt switch is designed to control a path to ground for the seat belt switch sense input of the ElectroMechanical Instrument Cluster (EMIC) (also known as the Cab Compartment Node/CCN). When the driver side front seat belt tip-half is inserted into the seat belt buckle, the switch closes the path to ground; and, when the driver side front seat belt tip-half is removed from the seat belt buckle, the switch opens the ground path. The switch is actuated by the latch mechanism within the seat belt buckle. The seat belt switch is connected in series between ground and the seat belt switch sense input of the instrument cluster. The seat belt switch receives ground at all times through its pigtail wire connection to the seat wire harness from a take out of the body wire harness. An eyelet terminal connector on the body wire harness ground take out is secured beneath a ground screw on the left cowl side inner panel, beneath the instrument panel. The seat belt switch as well as the hard wired inputs and outputs of the switch may be diagnosed using conventional diagnostic tools and procedures. Refer to the appropriate wiring information. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Height Adjuster > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Seat Belt Height Adjuster: Service and Repair Removal Front FRONT WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury during and following any seat belt or child restraint anchor service, carefully inspect all seat belts, buckles, mounting hardware, retractors, tether straps, and anchors for proper installation, operation, or damage. Replace any belt that is cut, frayed, or torn. Straighten any belt that is twisted. Tighten any loose fasteners. Replace any belt that has a damaged or ineffective buckle or retractor. Replace any belt that has a bent or damaged latch plate or anchor plate. Replace any child restraint anchor or the unit to which the anchor is integral that has been bent or damaged. Never attempt to repair a seat belt or child restraint component. Always replace damaged or ineffective seat belt and child restraint components with the correct, new and unused replacement parts listed in the DaimlerChrysler Mopar(R) Parts Catalog. 1. Unsnap the trim cover from the front seat belt turning loop and discard. 2. Remove the screw that secures the seat belt turning loop to the height adjuster (2) on the inside of the upper B-pillar (1). 3. Remove the seat belt turning loop from the height adjuster. 4. Remove the upper trim from the inside of the B-pillar. See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Trim Panel/Service and Repair/Pillar Trim/B-Pillar Trim . 5. Loosen the two screws (3) that secure the height adjuster far enough to remove the adjuster from the upper B-pillar. 6. Disengage the tab near the lower end of the height adjuster from the slot in the sheet metal and remove the adjuster from the inside of the B-pillar. Rear - Mega Cab REAR - MEGA CAB WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury during and following any seat belt or child restraint anchor service, carefully inspect all seat belts, buckles, mounting hardware, retractors, tether straps, and anchors for proper installation, operation, or damage. Replace any belt that is cut, frayed, or torn. Straighten any belt that is twisted. Tighten any loose fasteners. Replace any belt that has a damaged or ineffective buckle or retractor. Replace any belt that has a bent or damaged latch plate or anchor plate. Replace any child restraint anchor or the unit to which the anchor is integral that has been bent or damaged. Never attempt to repair a seat belt or child restraint component. Always replace damaged or ineffective seat belt and child restraint components with the correct, new and unused replacement parts listed in the DaimlerChrysler Mopar(R) Parts Catalog. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Height Adjuster > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 12371 1. Unsnap the trim cover (4) from the front seat belt turning loop (3) and discard. 2. Remove the screw (5) that secures the seat belt turning loop to the height adjuster (1) on the upper C-pillar. 3. Remove the seat belt turning loop from the height adjuster. 4. Remove the upper trim (2) from the inside of the C-pillar. See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Trim Panel/Service and Repair/Pillar Trim/C-Pillar Trim Panel-Removal . 5. Loosen the two screws that secure the height adjuster far enough to remove the adjuster from the upper C-pillar. 6. Disengage the tab of the height adjuster from the slot in the sheet metal and remove the adjuster from the inside of the C-pillar. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Height Adjuster > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 12372 Seat Belt Height Adjuster: Service and Repair Installation Front FRONT WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury during and following any seat belt or child restraint anchor service, carefully inspect all seat belts, buckles, mounting hardware, retractors, tether straps, and anchors for proper installation, operation, or damage. Replace any belt that is cut, frayed, or torn. Straighten any belt that is twisted. Tighten any loose fasteners. Replace any belt that has a damaged or ineffective buckle or retractor. Replace any belt that has a bent or damaged latch plate or anchor plate. Replace any child restraint anchor or the unit to which the anchor is integral that has been bent or damaged. Never attempt to repair a seat belt or child restraint component. Always replace damaged or ineffective seat belt and child restraint components with the correct, new and unused replacement parts listed in the DaimlerChrysler Mopar(R) Parts Catalog. 1. Position the front seat belt turning loop height adjuster (2) to the inside of the B-pillar (1). 2. Engage the tab near the lower end of the height adjuster into the slot in the sheet metal of the inner B-pillar. 3. Hand tighten the lower of the two screws (3) that secure the height adjuster to the B-pillar far enough to keep the tab on the lower end of the adjuster engaged in the B-pillar slot. 4. Install the upper screw that secures the seat belt turning loop height adjuster to the upper B-pillar, then tighten both the upper and lower screws to 39 Nm (29 ft. lbs.). 5. Reinstall the upper trim onto the inside of the B-pillar. See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Trim Panel/Service and Repair/Pillar Trim/B-Pillar Trim . 6. Position the seat belt turning loop onto the height adjuster on the upper B-pillar. 7. Install and tighten the screw that secures the turning loop to the height adjuster. Tighten the screw to 39 Nm (29 ft. lbs.). 8. Engage the upper edge of a new trim cover over the top of the turning loop. Then squeeze the lower end of the trim cover and the turning loop together firmly and evenly until the engagement tabs of the trim cover snap into the slots of the turning loop. Rear - Mega Cab REAR - MEGA CAB WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury during and following any seat belt or child restraint anchor service, carefully inspect all seat belts, buckles, mounting hardware, retractors, tether straps, and anchors for proper installation, operation, or damage. Replace any belt that is cut, frayed, or torn. Straighten any belt that is twisted. Tighten any loose fasteners. Replace any belt that has a damaged or ineffective buckle or retractor. Replace any belt that has a bent or damaged latch plate or anchor plate. Replace any child restraint anchor or the unit to which the anchor is integral that has been bent or damaged. Never attempt to repair a seat belt or child restraint component. Always replace damaged or ineffective seat belt and child restraint components with the correct, new and unused replacement parts listed in the DaimlerChrysler Mopar(R) Parts Catalog. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Height Adjuster > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 12373 1. Position the rear seat belt turning loop height adjuster (1) to the inside of the upper C-pillar. 2. Engage the tab on the height adjuster into the slot in the sheet metal of the inner C-pillar. 3. Hand tighten the lower of the two screws that secure the height adjuster to the C-pillar far enough to keep the tab on the adjuster engaged in the C-pillar slot. 4. Install the upper screw that secures the seat belt turning loop height adjuster to the upper C-pillar, then tighten both the upper and lower screws to 39 Nm (29 ft. lbs.). 5. Reinstall the upper trim (2) onto the inside of the C-pillar. See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Trim Panel/Service and Repair/Pillar Trim/C-Pillar Trim Panel-Installation . 6. Position the seat belt turning loop (3) onto the height adjuster on the upper C-pillar. 7. Install and tighten the screw (5) that secures the turning loop to the height adjuster. Tighten the screw to 39 Nm (29 ft. lbs.). 8. Engage the upper edge of a new trim cover (4) over the top of the turning loop. Then squeeze the lower end of the trim cover and the turning loop together firmly and evenly until the engagement tabs of the trim cover snap into the slots of the turning loop. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Reminder Lamp > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Seat Belt Reminder Lamp: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION A seatbelt indicator is standard equipment on all instrument clusters. The seatbelt indicator is located near the upper edge of the instrument cluster, between the tachometer and the speedometer. The seatbelt indicator consists of a stencil-like cutout of the International Control and Display Symbol icon for Seat Belt in the opaque layer of the instrument cluster overlay. The dark outer layer of the overlay prevents the indicator from being clearly visible when it is not illuminated. A red Light Emitting Diode (LED) behind the cutout in the opaque layer of the overlay causes the indicator to appear in red through the translucent outer layer of the overlay when it is illuminated from behind by the LED, which is soldered onto the instrument cluster electronic circuit board. The seatbelt indicator is serviced as a unit with the instrument cluster. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Reminder Lamp > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 12378 Seat Belt Reminder Lamp: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The seatbelt indicator gives an indication to the vehicle operator of the status of the driver side front seatbelt. This indicator is controlled by a transistor on the instrument cluster circuit board based upon cluster programming and a hard wired input from the seatbelt switch in the driver side front seatbelt buckle through the seat belt indicator driver circuit. The seatbelt indicator also includes a programmable enhanced seatbelt reminder or BELTMINDER feature that is enabled when the vehicle is shipped from the factory. This BELTMINDER feature can be disabled and enabled by the customer using a specific programming event sequence, or by the dealer using a diagnostic scan tool. The seatbelt indicator Light Emitting Diode (LED) is completely controlled by the instrument cluster logic circuit, and that logic will only allow this indicator to operate when the instrument cluster receives a battery current input on the fused ignition switch output (run-start) circuit. Therefore, the LED will always be OFF when the ignition switch is in any position except ON or START. The LED only illuminates when it is provided a path to ground by the instrument cluster transistor. The instrument cluster will turn ON the seatbelt indicator for the following reasons: Seatbelt Reminder Function - Each time the cluster receives a battery current input on the fused ignition switch output (run-start) circuit, the indicator will be illuminated as a seatbelt reminder for about six seconds, or until the ignition switch is turned to the OFF position, whichever occurs first. This reminder function will occur regardless of the status of the seatbelt switch input to the cluster. - Driver Side Front Seatbelt Not Buckled - Beltminder Active - Following the seatbelt reminder function, each time the cluster detects an open circuit on the seat belt indicator driver circuit (seatbelt switch open = seatbelt unbuckled) with the ignition switch in the START or ON positions, the indicator will be illuminated. In addition, if the driver side front seat belt remains unbuckled about 60 seconds after the conclusion of the seatbelt reminder function with the vehicle speed greater than about 8 kilometers-per-hour (5 miles-per-hour), the seatbelt indicator will begin to cycle between flashing ON and OFF for 3 seconds, then lighting solid for 2 seconds. The seatbelt indicator will continue to cycle between flashing and solid illumination for 13 complete cycles, until the seat belt indicator driver input to the cluster is closed to ground (seatbelt switch closed = seatbelt buckled), or until the ignition switch is turned to the OFF position, whichever occurs first. - Driver Side Front Seatbelt Not Buckled - Beltminder Inactive - Following the seatbelt reminder function, each time the cluster detects an open circuit on the seat belt indicator driver circuit (seatbelt switch open = seatbelt unbuckled) with the ignition switch in the START or ON positions, the indicator will be illuminated. The seatbelt indicator remains illuminated until the seat belt indicator driver input to the cluster is closed to ground (seatbelt switch closed = seatbelt buckled), or until the ignition switch is turned to the OFF position, whichever occurs first. - Airbag Indicator Backup - If the instrument cluster detects a fault in the airbag indicator circuit it will send an electronic message indicating the fault to the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC), then flash the seatbelt indicator ON and OFF. The cluster will continue to flash the indicator until the airbag indicator circuit fault is resolved, or until the ignition switch is turned to the OFF position, whichever occurs first. - Actuator Test - Each time the cluster is put through the actuator test, the seatbelt indicator will be turned ON, then OFF again during the bulb check portion of the test to confirm the functionality of the LED and the cluster control circuitry. The seatbelt switch is connected in series between ground and the seat belt indicator driver input to the ElectroMechanical Instrument Cluster (EMIC) (also known as the Cab Compartment Node/CCN). The hard wired seatbelt switch input to the EMIC may be diagnosed using conventional diagnostic tools and procedures. Refer to the appropriate wiring information. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Retractor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Seat Belt Retractor: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The seat belt retractors used in all seating positions include an inertia-type, emergency locking mechanism (7) as standard equipment. However, the retractor locking mechanisms for all seating positions except the driver side front position are mechanically switchable from an emergency locking retractor to an automatic locking retractor. The primary function of this feature is to securely accommodate a child seat in any seating position of the vehicle without the need for a self-cinching seat belt tip half latch plate unit or another supplemental device that would be required to prevent the seat belt webbing from unwinding freely from the retractor spool of an inertia-type emergency locking retractor mechanism. The automatic locking mechanism is integral to the seat belt and retractor unit and is concealed beneath a molded plastic cover located on one side of the retractor spool. The automatic locking mechanism cannot be adjusted or repaired and, if ineffective or damaged, the entire passenger side front seat belt and retractor unit must be replaced. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Retractor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 12383 Seat Belt Retractor: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The locked mode of the automatic locking retractor is engaged and the retractor is switched from operating as a standard inertia-type emergency locking retractor by first buckling the combination lap and shoulder belt buckle. Then grasp the shoulder belt and pull all of the webbing out of the retractor. Once all of the belt webbing is extracted from the spool, the retractor will automatically become engaged in the pre-locked automatic locking mode and will make a light, audible clicking or ratcheting sound as the shoulder belt is allowed to retract to confirm that the automatic locking mode is now engaged. Once the automatic locking mode is engaged, the retractor will remain locked and the belt will remain tight around whatever it is restraining. The retractor is returned to standard emergency locking (inertia) mode by unbuckling the combination lap and shoulder belt buckle and allowing the belt webbing to be almost fully retracted onto the retractor spool. The emergency locking mode is confirmed by the absence of the light, audible clicking or ratcheting sound as the belt webbing retracts. This mode will allow the belt to unwind from and wind onto the retractor spool freely unless and until a predetermined inertia load is sensed, or until the retractor is again switched to the automatic locking mode. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Retractor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Seat Belt and Retractor - Removal Seat Belt Retractor: Service and Repair Seat Belt and Retractor - Removal Front Center - Standard Cab FRONT CENTER - STANDARD CAB WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury during and following any seat belt or child restraint anchor service, carefully inspect all seat belts, buckles, mounting hardware, retractors, tether straps, and anchors for proper installation, operation, or damage. Replace any belt that is cut, frayed, or torn. Straighten any belt that is twisted. Tighten any loose fasteners. Replace any belt that has a damaged or ineffective buckle or retractor. Replace any belt that has a bent or damaged latch plate or anchor plate. Replace any child restraint anchor or the unit to which the anchor is integral that has been bent or damaged. Never attempt to repair a seat belt or child restraint component. Always replace damaged or ineffective seat belt and child restraint components with the correct, new and unused replacement parts listed in the DaimlerChrysler Mopar(R) Parts Catalog. NOTE: A front center seat belt and retractor is used only on standard cab vehicles. Quad cab and mega cab vehicles have a lap belt in the front center seating position. See: Seat Belt Buckle/Service and Repair/Seat Belt Buckle - Removal. NOTE: All seat belt retractors except the driver side front retractor include a switchable automatic locking mechanism. See: Description and Operation/Description. 1. Reach between the center of the front seat cushion and front seat back to access and unbuckle the front center seat belt lower anchor latch plate from the unique black, keyed lower anchor buckle. Use an ignition key or a small screwdriver to depress the small white release button on the anchor buckle. 2. Move the front seat to its most forward position for easiest access to the front center seat belt and retractor unit. 3. Remove the stowage tray from the rear floor panel behind the seat. See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Trim Panel/Service and Repair/Load Floor - Removal . 4. Using a trim stick or another suitable wide flat-bladed tool, gently pry at each side of the front center seat belt bezel (5) on the cab back trim panel (1) to release the snap features that secure the bezel to the panel. 5. Remove the bezel from the webbing of the front center seat belt (4). 6. Remove the trim from the cab back panel. See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Trim Panel/Service and Repair/Rear Cab Back Panel Trim/Removal . Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Retractor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Seat Belt and Retractor - Removal > Page 12386 7. Remove the two screws (3) that secure the belt bracket (2) of the front center seat belt (7) to the body bracket (1) on the upper cab back panel (8) reinforcement. 8. Remove the belt bracket of the front center seat belt from the body bracket on the upper cab back panel reinforcement. 9. Remove the two screws (4) that secure the front center seat belt retractor bracket (5) to the floor panel (6) near the base of the cab back panel. 10. Remove the front center seat belt and retractor unit from the floor panel. Front Outboard - Quad and Mega Cab FRONT OUTBOARD - QUAD AND MEGA CAB WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury on vehicles equipped with airbags, disable the Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, airbag, seat belt tensioner, impact sensor, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the SRS. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment. WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury during and following any seat belt or child restraint anchor service, carefully inspect all seat belts, buckles, mounting hardware, retractors, tether straps, and anchors for proper installation, operation, or damage. Replace any belt that is cut, frayed, or torn. Straighten any belt that is twisted. Tighten any loose fasteners. Replace any belt that has a damaged or ineffective buckle or retractor. Replace any belt that has a bent or damaged latch plate or anchor plate. Replace any child restraint anchor or the unit to which the anchor is integral that has been bent or damaged. Never attempt to repair a seat belt or child restraint component. Always replace damaged or ineffective seat belt and child restraint components with the correct, new and unused replacement parts listed in the DaimlerChrysler Mopar(R) Parts Catalog. NOTE: The following procedure is for replacement of an ineffective or damaged seat belt and retractor unit. On light-duty DR 1500 the front retractor also includes a seat belt tensioner. If the front seat belt or retractor is ineffective or damaged, but the seat belt tensioner is not deployed, review the recommended procedures for handling non-deployed supplemental restraints. See: Air Bag Systems/Service and Repair. If the seat belt tensioner has been deployed, review the recommended procedures for service after a supplemental restraint deployment before removing the unit from the vehicle. See: Repairs and Inspections Required After a Collision/Service and Repair. NOTE: All seat belt retractors except the driver side front retractor include a switchable automatic locking mechanism. See: Description and Operation/Description. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Retractor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Seat Belt and Retractor - Removal > Page 12387 1. Adjust the front seat to its most forward position for easiest access to the front seat belt (2) lower anchor cover (4) and the B-pillar trim. 2. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. Wait two minutes for the system capacitor to discharge before further service. 3. Grasp the upper edge of the lower anchor cover and pull upward to unsnap it from the front seat cushion outboard side shield. 4. Remove the screw (3) that secures the lower anchor to the outboard side of the front seat cushion frame. 5. Unsnap the trim cover (3) from the front seat belt turning loop (5) and discard. 6. Remove the screw (4) that secures the seat belt turning loop to the height adjuster (1) on the upper B-pillar. 7. Remove the seat belt turning loop from the height adjuster. 8. Remove the upper trim (2) from the inside of the B-pillar. See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Trim Panel/Service and Repair/Pillar Trim/B-Pillar Trim . 9. Remove the lower trim (3) from the inside of the B-pillar. See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Trim Panel/Service and Repair/Pillar Trim/B-Pillar Trim . 10. On light-duty DR 1500 only, disconnect the yellow body wire harness connector (5) from the seat belt tensioner initiator on the retractor (7). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Retractor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Seat Belt and Retractor - Removal > Page 12388 11. Disengage the two clips that secure the belt web guide (1) to the B-pillar. 12. Remove the screw (4) that secures the upper retractor bracket to the B-pillar. 13. Remove the screw (6) that secures the lower retractor bracket to the B-pillar. 14. Disengage the locating tab on the upper retractor bracket from the hole in the inner B-pillar. 15. Remove the front outboard seat belt and retractor from the B-pillar as a unit. Front Outboard - Standard Cab FRONT OUTBOARD - STANDARD CAB WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury on vehicles equipped with airbags, disable the Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, airbag, seat belt tensioner, impact sensor, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the SRS. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment. WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury during and following any seat belt or child restraint anchor service, carefully inspect all seat belts, buckles, mounting hardware, retractors, tether straps, and anchors for proper installation, operation, or damage. Replace any belt that is cut, frayed, or torn. Straighten any belt that is twisted. Tighten any loose fasteners. Replace any belt that has a damaged or ineffective buckle or retractor. Replace any belt that has a bent or damaged latch plate or anchor plate. Replace any child restraint anchor or the unit to which the anchor is integral that has been bent or damaged. Never attempt to repair a seat belt or child restraint component. Always replace damaged or ineffective seat belt and child restraint components with the correct, new and unused replacement parts listed in the DaimlerChrysler Mopar(R) Parts Catalog. NOTE: The following procedure is for replacement of an ineffective or damaged seat belt and retractor unit. On light-duty DR 1500 the front retractor also includes a seat belt tensioner. If the front seat belt or retractor is ineffective or damaged, but the seat belt tensioner is not deployed, review the recommended procedures for handling non-deployed supplemental restraints. See: Air Bag Systems/Service and Repair. If the seat belt tensioner has been deployed, review the recommended procedures for service after a supplemental restraint deployment before removing the unit from the vehicle. See: Repairs and Inspections Required After a Collision/Service and Repair. NOTE: The seat belt retractor on the driver side of all standard cab vehicles includes a tension reducer. See: Seat Belt Tensioner/Description and Operation/Seat Belt Tension Reducer/Description. All seat belt retractors except the driver side front retractor include a switchable automatic locking mechanism. See: Description and Operation/Description. 1. Adjust the front seat (1) to its most forward position for easiest access to the front seat belt (2) lower anchor cover (4) and the B-pillar trim. 2. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. Wait two minutes for the system capacitor to discharge before further service. 3. Remove the stowage tray from the rear floor panel behind the seat. See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Trim Panel/Service and Repair/Load Floor - Removal . 4. Grasp the upper edge of the lower anchor cover and pull upward to unsnap it from the front seat cushion outboard side shield. 5. Remove the screw (3) that secures the lower anchor to the outboard side of the front seat cushion frame. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Retractor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Seat Belt and Retractor - Removal > Page 12389 6. Unsnap the trim cover (3) from the front seat belt turning loop (5) and discard. 7. Remove the screw (4) that secures the seat belt turning loop to the height adjuster (1) on the upper B-pillar. 8. Remove the seat belt turning loop from the height adjuster. 9. Remove the upper trim (2) from the inside of the B-pillar. See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Trim Panel/Service and Repair/Pillar Trim/B-Pillar Trim . 10. Remove the lower trim (3) from the inside of the B-pillar. See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Trim Panel/Service and Repair/Pillar Trim/B-Pillar Trim 11. On light-duty DR 1500 only, disconnect the yellow body wire harness connector (5) from the seat belt tensioner initiator on the retractor (7). 12. On the driver side only, disconnect the white body wire harness connector from the connector receptacle for the seat belt tension reducer located near the bottom of the retractor. 13. Disengage the two clips that secure the belt web guide (1) to the B-pillar. 14. Remove the screw (4) that secures the upper retractor bracket to the B-pillar. 15. Remove the screw (6) that secures the lower retractor bracket to the B-pillar. 16. Disengage the locating tab on the upper retractor bracket from the hole in the inner B-pillar. 17. Remove the front outboard seat belt and retractor from the B-pillar as a unit. Rear Center - Mega Cab REAR CENTER - MEGA CAB WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury during and following any seat belt or child restraint anchor service, carefully inspect all seat belts, buckles, mounting hardware, retractors, tether straps, and anchors for proper installation, operation, or damage. Replace any belt that is cut, frayed, or torn. Straighten any belt that is twisted. Tighten any loose fasteners. Replace any belt that has a damaged or ineffective buckle or retractor. Replace any belt that has a bent or damaged latch plate or anchor plate. Replace any child restraint anchor or the unit to which the anchor is integral that has been bent or damaged. Never attempt to repair a seat belt or child restraint component. Always replace damaged or ineffective seat belt and child restraint components with the correct, new and unused replacement parts listed in the DaimlerChrysler Mopar(R) Parts Catalog. NOTE: All seat belt retractors except the driver side front retractor include a switchable automatic locking mechanism. See: Description and Operation/Description. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Retractor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Seat Belt and Retractor - Removal > Page 12390 1. Fold the 60 percent section of the rear seat back (2) down onto the seat cushion in the cargo storage position, then lift and prop open the seat back filler panel (3) as necessary for easiest access to the rear center seat belt lower anchor and right outboard buckle anchor bracket. 2. Remove the screw (7) that secures the center seat belt lower anchor to the anchor bracket (3) and, from the front of the seat back, pull the belt lower anchor out from between the seat back (1) and the seat cushion (2). 3. Remove the two screws (3) that secure the bezel (2) to the top of the 60 percent section of the rear seat back (1). 4. Remove the bezel from the webbing of the rear center seat belt. 5. Remove the trim cover from the 60 percent section of the rear seat back. See: Body and Frame/Seats/Seat Back/Service and Repair/Seat Back Cushion / Cover - Removal . Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Retractor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Seat Belt and Retractor - Removal > Page 12391 6. Remove the two screws (6) that secure the belt bracket (1) of the rear center seat belt to the top of the seat back frame (3). 7. Disengage the belt bracket of the rear center seat belt from the seat back frame. 8. Remove the screw (4) that secures the rear center seat belt retractor to the seat back frame. 9. Remove the seat belt and retractor from the rear seat back as a unit. Rear Center - Quad Cab REAR CENTER - QUAD CAB WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury during and following any seat belt or child restraint anchor service, carefully inspect all seat belts, buckles, mounting hardware, retractors, tether straps, and anchors for proper installation, operation, or damage. Replace any belt that is cut, frayed, or torn. Straighten any belt that is twisted. Tighten any loose fasteners. Replace any belt that has a damaged or ineffective buckle or retractor. Replace any belt that has a bent or damaged latch plate or anchor plate. Replace any child restraint anchor or the unit to which the anchor is integral that has been bent or damaged. Never attempt to repair a seat belt or child restraint component. Always replace damaged or ineffective seat belt and child restraint components with the correct, new and unused replacement parts listed in the DaimlerChrysler Mopar(R) Parts Catalog. NOTE: The rear center seat belt and retractor is secured to a mounting bracket that includes the right outboard occupant seat belt buckle. The rear right outboard occupant buckle is available for service only as a unit with the center seat belt and retractor. NOTE: All seat belt retractors except the driver side front retractor include a switchable automatic locking mechanism. See: Description and Operation/Description. 1. Lift up the rear seat cushion into its stowed position against the rear seat back. 2. Remove the screw (5) that secures the center seat belt lower anchor and the left side of the seat belt retractor mounting bracket to the rear floor panel. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Retractor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Seat Belt and Retractor - Removal > Page 12392 3. Remove the rear seat from the vehicle. On vehicles with the optional 60/40 split rear bench, only the 60 percent section (right side) of the rear seat must be removed. See: Body and Frame/Seats/Service and Repair/Seat - Removal . 4. Lift upward on the forward edge of the rear center seat belt bezel (2) at the top of the cab back panel (1) to release the snap features that secure the bezel to the belt bracket. 5. Remove the bezel from the webbing of the rear center seat belt. 6. Lift the rear center seat belt cover (3) off of the belt bracket at the top of the cab back panel and remove the cover from the webbing of the rear center seat belt. 7. Remove the two screws (4) that secure the belt bracket of the rear center seat belt to the body bracket on the upper cab back panel reinforcement. 8. Remove the belt bracket of the rear center seat belt from the body bracket. 9. Remove the screw (7) that secures the right side of the seat belt retractor mounting bracket and the right outboard occupant buckle (6) unit to the rear floor panel near the base of the cab back panel. 10. Remove the rear center seat belt and retractor unit from the vehicle. Rear Outboard - Mega Cab REAR OUTBOARD - MEGA CAB WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury during and following any seat belt or child restraint anchor service, carefully inspect all seat belts, buckles, mounting hardware, retractors, tether straps, and anchors for proper installation, operation, or damage. Replace any belt that is cut, frayed, or torn. Straighten any belt that is twisted. Tighten any loose fasteners. Replace any belt that has a damaged or ineffective buckle or retractor. Replace any belt that has a bent or damaged latch plate or anchor plate. Replace any child restraint anchor or the unit to which the anchor is integral that has been bent or damaged. Never attempt to repair a seat belt or child restraint component. Always replace damaged or ineffective seat belt and child restraint components with the correct, new and unused replacement parts listed in the DaimlerChrysler Mopar(R) Parts Catalog. NOTE: All seat belt retractors except the driver side front retractor include a switchable automatic locking mechanism. See: Description and Operation/Description. 1. Remove the rear seat from the vehicle. See: Body and Frame/Seats/Service and Repair/Seat Removal . 2. Remove the screw (6) that secures the seat belt lower anchor (7) to the base of the inner C-pillar. 3. Unsnap the trim cover (4) from the front seat belt turning loop (3) and discard. 4. Remove the screw (5) that secures the seat belt turning loop to the height adjuster (1) on the upper C-pillar. 5. Remove the seat belt turning loop from the height adjuster. 6. Remove the upper trim (2) from the inside of the C-pillar. See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Trim Panel/Service and Repair/Pillar Trim/C-Pillar Trim Panel-Removal . Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Retractor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Seat Belt and Retractor - Removal > Page 12393 7. Remove the lower trim (2) from the inside of the C-pillar. See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Trim Panel/Service and Repair/Pillar Trim/C-Pillar Trim Panel-Removal 8. Disengage the two clips that secure the belt web guide (5) to the C-pillar. 9. Remove the screw (3) that secures the lower bracket of the retractor (4) to the C-pillar. 10. Disengage the hooks on the upper retractor bracket from the slots in the C-pillar above the retractor mounting hole. 11. Remove the rear outboard seat belt and retractor from the C-pillar as a unit. Rear Outboard - Quad Cab REAR OUTBOARD - QUAD CAB WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury during and following any seat belt or child restraint anchor service, carefully inspect all seat belts, buckles, mounting hardware, retractors, tether straps, and anchors for proper installation, operation, or damage. Replace any belt that is cut, frayed, or torn. Straighten any belt that is twisted. Tighten any loose fasteners. Replace any belt that has a damaged or ineffective buckle or retractor. Replace any belt that has a bent or damaged latch plate or anchor plate. Replace any child restraint anchor or the unit to which the anchor is integral that has been bent or damaged. Never attempt to repair a seat belt or child restraint component. Always replace damaged or ineffective seat belt and child restraint components with the correct, new and unused replacement parts listed in the DaimlerChrysler Mopar(R) Parts Catalog. NOTE: All seat belt retractors except the driver side front retractor include a switchable automatic locking mechanism. See: Description and Operation/Description. 1. Remove the rear seat from the vehicle. See: Body and Frame/Seats/Service and Repair/Seat Removal . 2. Remove the screw (5) that secures the seat belt lower anchor (6) to the base of the inner C-pillar. 3. Unsnap the trim cover (3) from the front seat belt turning loop (2) and discard. 4. Remove the screw (4) that secures the seat belt turning loop to the upper C-pillar. 5. Remove the seat belt turning loop from the upper C-pillar. 6. Remove the upper trim (1) from the inside of the C-pillar. See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Trim Panel/Service and Repair/Pillar Trim/C-Pillar Trim Panel-Removal . Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Retractor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Seat Belt and Retractor - Removal > Page 12394 7. Remove the lower trim (2) from the inside of the C-pillar. See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Trim Panel/Service and Repair/Pillar Trim/C-Pillar Trim Panel-Removal 8. Disengage the two clips that secure the belt web guide (5) to the C-pillar. 9. Remove the screw (3) that secures the lower bracket of the retractor (4) to the C-pillar. 10. Disengage the hooks on the upper retractor bracket from the slots in the C-pillar above the retractor mounting hole. 11. Remove the rear outboard seat belt and retractor from the C-pillar as a unit. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Retractor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Seat Belt and Retractor - Removal > Page 12395 Seat Belt Retractor: Service and Repair Seat Belt and Retractor - Installation Front Center - Standard Cab FRONT CENTER - STANDARD CAB WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury during and following any seat belt or child restraint anchor service, carefully inspect all seat belts, buckles, mounting hardware, retractors, tether straps, and anchors for proper installation, operation, or damage. Replace any belt that is cut, frayed, or torn. Straighten any belt that is twisted. Tighten any loose fasteners. Replace any belt that has a damaged or ineffective buckle or retractor. Replace any belt that has a bent or damaged latch plate or anchor plate. Replace any child restraint anchor or the unit to which the anchor is integral that has been bent or damaged. Never attempt to repair a seat belt or child restraint component. Always replace damaged or ineffective seat belt and child restraint components with the correct, new and unused replacement parts listed in the DaimlerChrysler Mopar(R) Parts Catalog. NOTE: A front center seat belt and retractor is used only on standard cab vehicles. Quad cab and mega cab vehicles have a lap belt in the front center seating position. See: Seat Belt Buckle/Service and Repair/Seat Belt Buckle - Installation. NOTE: All seat belt retractors except the driver side front retractor include a switchable automatic locking mechanism. See: Description and Operation/Description. 1. Position the front center seat belt and retractor unit (5) to the floor panel (6) at the base of the cab back panel (8) to the right of center. 2. Install and tighten the two screws (4) that secure the front center seat belt retractor bracket to the floor panel near the base of the cab back panel. Tighten the screws to 40 Nm (29 ft. lbs.). 3. Position the belt bracket (2) of the front center seat belt (7) to the body bracket (1) on the upper cab back panel reinforcement. 4. Install and tighten the two screws (3) that secure the belt bracket of the front center seat belt to the body bracket on the upper cab back panel reinforcement. Tighten the screws to 20 Nm (15 ft. lbs.). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Retractor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Seat Belt and Retractor - Removal > Page 12396 5. Reinstall the trim (1) onto the cab back panel. See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Trim Panel/Service and Repair/Rear Cab Back Panel Trim/Installation . 6. Route the webbing of the front center seat belt (4) through the bezel (5) and position the bezel to the belt opening near the top of the cab back trim panel. 7. Using hand pressure, press firmly and evenly on each side of the front center seat belt bezel until it snaps into place on the cab back trim panel. 8. Reinstall the stowage tray onto the rear floor panel behind the seat. See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Trim Panel/Service and Repair/Load Floor - Installation . 9. Reach between the center of the front seat cushion and front seat back to access and buckle the front center seat belt lower anchor latch plate to the unique black, keyed lower anchor buckle. Front Outboard - Quad and Mega Cab FRONT OUTBOARD - QUAD AND MEGA CAB WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury on vehicles equipped with airbags, disable the Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, airbag, seat belt tensioner, impact sensor, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the SRS. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment. WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury during and following any seat belt or child restraint anchor service, carefully inspect all seat belts, buckles, mounting hardware, retractors, tether straps, and anchors for proper installation, operation, or damage. Replace any belt that is cut, frayed, or torn. Straighten any belt that is twisted. Tighten any loose fasteners. Replace any belt that has a damaged or ineffective buckle or retractor. Replace any belt that has a bent or damaged latch plate or anchor plate. Replace any child restraint anchor or the unit to which the anchor is integral that has been bent or damaged. Never attempt to repair a seat belt or child restraint component. Always replace damaged or ineffective seat belt and child restraint components with the correct, new and unused replacement parts listed in the DaimlerChrysler Mopar(R) Parts Catalog. NOTE: The following procedure is for replacement of an ineffective or damaged seat belt and retractor unit. On light-duty DR 1500 the front retractor also includes a seat belt tensioner. If the front seat belt or retractor is ineffective or damaged, but the seat belt tensioner is not deployed, review the recommended procedures for handling non-deployed supplemental restraints. See: Air Bag Systems/Service and Repair. If the seat belt tensioner has been deployed, review the recommended procedures for service after a supplemental restraint deployment before removing the unit from the vehicle. See: Repairs and Inspections Required After a Collision/Service and Repair. NOTE: All seat belt retractors except the driver side front retractor include a switchable automatic locking mechanism. See: Description and Operation/Description. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Retractor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Seat Belt and Retractor - Removal > Page 12397 1. Position the front outboard seat belt and retractor (7) to the inner B-pillar as a unit. Be certain to engage the tab on the upper retractor bracket into the hole in the B-pillar. 2. Loosely install the screw (6) that secures the lower retractor bracket to the B-pillar. 3. Install and tighten the screw (4) that secures the upper retractor bracket to the B-pillar. Tighten the screw to 12 Nm (105 in. lbs.). 4. Tighten the screw that secures the lower retractor bracket to the B-pillar. Tighten the screw to 39 Nm (29 ft. lbs.). 5. Position the belt web guide (1) to the B-pillar and use hand pressure to press it firmly and evenly until the two clips that secure it snap into place. 6. On light-duty DR 1500 only, reconnect the yellow body wire harness connector (5) to the seat belt tensioner initiator on the retractor. 7. Reinstall the lower trim (3) onto the inside of the B-pillar. Be certain that the turning loop (2) can be accessed from the face of the lower trim after the seat belt webbing is inserted through the slot in the trim. See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Trim Panel/Service and Repair/Pillar Trim/B-Pillar Trim . 8. Reinstall the upper trim (2) onto the inside of the B-pillar. See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Trim Panel/Service and Repair/Pillar Trim/B-Pillar Trim . 9. Position the seat belt turning loop (5) onto the height adjuster (1) on the upper B-pillar. 10. Install and tighten the screw (4) that secures the turning loop to the height adjuster. Tighten the screw to 39 Nm (29 ft. lbs.). 11. Engage the upper edge of a new trim cover (3) over the top of the turning loop. Then squeeze the lower end of the trim cover and the turning loop together firmly and evenly until the engagement tabs of the trim cover snap into the slots of the turning loop. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Retractor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Seat Belt and Retractor - Removal > Page 12398 12. Position the seat belt (2) lower anchor to the mounting hole on the outboard side of the front seat (1) cushion frame. Be certain that the seat belt webbing between the turning loop and the lower anchor is not twisted. 13. Install and tighten the screw (3) that secures the lower anchor to the seat. Tighten the screw to 39 Nm (29 ft. lbs.). 14. Reinstall the lower anchor cover (4) onto the front seat cushion outboard side shield. 15. Do not reconnect the battery negative cable at this time. The Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) verification test procedure should be performed following service of any SRS component. See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code Tests and Associated Procedures/Verification Tests . Front Outboard - Standard Cab FRONT OUTBOARD - STANDARD CAB WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury on vehicles equipped with airbags, disable the Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, airbag, seat belt tensioner, impact sensor, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the SRS. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment. WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury during and following any seat belt or child restraint anchor service, carefully inspect all seat belts, buckles, mounting hardware, retractors, tether straps, and anchors for proper installation, operation, or damage. Replace any belt that is cut, frayed, or torn. Straighten any belt that is twisted. Tighten any loose fasteners. Replace any belt that has a damaged or ineffective buckle or retractor. Replace any belt that has a bent or damaged latch plate or anchor plate. Replace any child restraint anchor or the unit to which the anchor is integral that has been bent or damaged. Never attempt to repair a seat belt or child restraint component. Always replace damaged or ineffective seat belt and child restraint components with the correct, new and unused replacement parts listed in the DaimlerChrysler Mopar(R) Parts Catalog. NOTE: The following procedure is for replacement of an ineffective or damaged seat belt and retractor unit. On light-duty DR 1500 the front retractor also includes a seat belt tensioner. If the front seat belt or retractor is ineffective or damaged, but the seat belt tensioner is not deployed, review the recommended procedures for handling non-deployed supplemental restraints. See: Air Bag Systems/Service and Repair. If the seat belt tensioner has been deployed, review the recommended procedures for service after a supplemental restraint deployment before removing the unit from the vehicle. See: Repairs and Inspections Required After a Collision/Service and Repair. NOTE: The seat belt retractor on the driver side of all standard cab vehicles includes a tension reducer. See: Seat Belt Tensioner/Description and Operation/Seat Belt Tension Reducer/Description. All seat belt retractors except the driver side front retractor include a switchable automatic locking mechanism. See: Description and Operation/Description. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Retractor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Seat Belt and Retractor - Removal > Page 12399 1. Position the front outboard seat belt and retractor (7) to the inner B-pillar as a unit. Be certain to engage the tab on the upper retractor bracket into the hole in the B-pillar. 2. Loosely install the screw (6) that secures the lower retractor bracket to the B-pillar. 3. Install and tighten the screw (4) that secures the upper retractor bracket to the B-pillar. Tighten the screw to 12 Nm (105 in. lbs.). 4. Tighten the screw that secures the lower retractor bracket to the B-pillar. Tighten the screw to 39 Nm (29 ft. lbs.). 5. Position the belt web guide (1) to the B-pillar and use hand pressure to press it firmly and evenly until the two clips that secure it snap into place. 6. On light-duty DR 1500 only, reconnect the yellow body wire harness connector (5) to the seat belt tensioner initiator on the retractor. 7. On the driver side only, reconnect the white body wire harness connector to the seat belt tension reducer connector receptacle near the bottom of the retractor. 8. Reinstall the lower trim (3) onto the inside of the B-pillar. Be certain that the turning loop (2) can be accessed from the face of the lower trim after the seat belt webbing is inserted through the slot in the trim. See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Trim Panel/Service and Repair/Pillar Trim/B-Pillar Trim . 9. Reinstall the upper trim (2) onto the inside of the B-pillar. See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Trim Panel/Service and Repair/Pillar Trim/B-Pillar Trim . 10. Position the seat belt turning loop (5) onto the height adjuster (1) on the upper B-pillar. 11. Install and tighten the screw (4) that secures the turning loop to the height adjuster. Tighten the screw to 39 Nm (29 ft. lbs.). 12. Engage the upper edge of a new trim cover (3) over the top of the turning loop. Then squeeze the lower end of the trim cover and the turning loop together firmly and evenly until the engagement tabs of the trim cover snap into the slots of the turning loop. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Retractor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Seat Belt and Retractor - Removal > Page 12400 13. Position the seat belt (2) lower anchor to the mounting hole on the outboard side of the front seat (1) cushion frame. Be certain that the seat belt webbing between the turning loop and the lower anchor is not twisted. 14. Install and tighten the screw (3) that secures the lower anchor to the seat. Tighten the screw to 39 Nm (29 ft. lbs.). 15. Reinstall the lower anchor cover (4) onto the front seat cushion outboard side shield. 16. Reinstall the stowage tray onto the rear floor panel behind the seat. See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Trim Panel/Service and Repair/Load Floor - Installation . 17. Do not reconnect the battery negative cable at this time. The Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) verification test procedure should be performed following service of any SRS component. See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code Tests and Associated Procedures/Verification Tests . Rear Center - Mega Cab REAR CENTER - MEGA CAB WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury during and following any seat belt or child restraint anchor service, carefully inspect all seat belts, buckles, mounting hardware, retractors, tether straps, and anchors for proper installation, operation, or damage. Replace any belt that is cut, frayed, or torn. Straighten any belt that is twisted. Tighten any loose fasteners. Replace any belt that has a damaged or ineffective buckle or retractor. Replace any belt that has a bent or damaged latch plate or anchor plate. Replace any child restraint anchor or the unit to which the anchor is integral that has been bent or damaged. Never attempt to repair a seat belt or child restraint component. Always replace damaged or ineffective seat belt and child restraint components with the correct, new and unused replacement parts listed in the DaimlerChrysler Mopar(R) Parts Catalog. NOTE: All seat belt retractors except the driver side front retractor include a switchable automatic locking mechanism. See: Description and Operation/Description. 1. Position the rear center seat belt and retractor unit into the 60 percent section of the rear seat back frame (3). Be certain the tab (5) on the retractor bracket is engaged in the slot in the frame. 2. Install and tighten the screw (4) that secures the rear center seat belt retractor to the seat back frame. Tighten the screw to 60 Nm (44 ft. lbs.). 3. Position the belt bracket (1) of the rear center seat belt onto the top of the seat back frame. Be certain the tab (2) on the bracket is engaged in the slot in the frame. 4. Install and tighten the two screws (6) that secure the belt bracket of the rear center seat belt to the seat back frame. Tighten the screws to 60 Nm (44 ft. lbs.). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Retractor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Seat Belt and Retractor - Removal > Page 12401 5. Reinstall the trim cover onto the 60 percent section of the rear seat back frame. See: Body and Frame/Seats/Seat Back/Service and Repair/Seat Back Cushion / Cover - Installation . 6. Engage the rear center seat belt bezel (2) over the webbing of the rear center seat belt. 7. Position the bezel over the belt bracket on the top of the rear seat back (1). 8. Install and tighten the two screws (3) that secure the bezel to the belt bracket on the top of the rear seat back frame. Tighten the screws to 5 Nm (44 in. lbs.). 9. Route the center seat belt lower anchor between the seat back (1) and the seat cushion (2) and position it to the anchor bracket (3). Be certain the belt webbing is not twisted between the retractor and the anchor bracket. 10. Install and tighten the screw (7) that secures the seat belt lower anchor to the anchor bracket. Tighten the screw to 40 Nm (30 ft. lbs.). 11. Restore the 60 percent seat back filler panel and the seat back to their previous positions. Rear Center - Quad Cab REAR CENTER - QUAD CAB WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury during and following any seat belt or child restraint anchor service, carefully inspect all seat belts, buckles, mounting hardware, retractors, tether straps, and anchors for proper installation, operation, or damage. Replace any belt that is cut, frayed, or torn. Straighten any belt that is twisted. Tighten any loose fasteners. Replace any belt that has a damaged or ineffective buckle or retractor. Replace any belt that has a bent or damaged latch plate or anchor plate. Replace any child restraint anchor or the unit to which the anchor is integral that has been bent or damaged. Never attempt to repair a seat belt or child restraint component. Always replace damaged or ineffective seat belt and child restraint components with the correct, new and unused replacement parts listed in the DaimlerChrysler Mopar(R) Parts Catalog. NOTE: The rear center seat belt and retractor is secured to a mounting bracket that includes the right outboard occupant seat belt buckle. The rear right outboard occupant buckle is available for service only as a unit with the center seat belt and retractor. NOTE: All seat belt retractors except the driver side front retractor include a switchable automatic locking mechanism. See: Description and Operation/Description. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Retractor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Seat Belt and Retractor - Removal > Page 12402 1. Position the rear center seat belt retractor and right outboard occupant buckle unit (6) onto the rear floor panel near the base of the cab back panel (1). 2. Loosely install the screw (7) that secures the right side of the seat belt retractor mounting bracket and the right outboard occupant buckle unit to the rear floor panel near the base of the cab back panel. 3. Position the belt bracket of the rear center seat belt onto the body bracket on the upper cab back panel reinforcement. 4. Install and tighten the two screws (4) that secure the belt bracket to the body bracket. Tighten the screws to 20 Nm (15 ft. lbs.). 5. Lift the webbing of the rear center seat belt and slide the cover (3) over the belt bracket at the top of the cab back panel until it is fully seated. 6. Route the rear center seat belt bezel (2) over the webbing of the rear center seat belt. 7. Position the rear center seat belt bezel over the cover and belt bracket at the top of the cab back panel and engage the rearward snap features of the bezel with the belt bracket. Using hand pressure, press firmly and evenly downward on the front of the bezel until it snaps into place over the cover and belt bracket. 8. Reinstall the rear seat into the vehicle. On vehicles with the optional 60/40 split rear bench, only the 60 percent section (right side) of the rear seat must be reinstalled. See: Body and Frame/Seats/Service and Repair/Seat - Installation . 9. Insert the rear center seat belt lower anchor between the rear seat back and the seat cushion, and position the anchor to the left side of the seat belt retractor mounting bracket on the rear floor panel. 10. Install and tighten the screw (5) that secures the center seat belt lower anchor and the left side of the seat belt retractor mounting bracket to the rear floor panel. Tighten the screw to 40 Nm (29 ft. lbs.). 11. Tighten the screw that secures the right side of the seat belt retractor mounting bracket to the rear floor panel to 40 Nm (29 ft. lbs.). 12. Restore the rear seat cushion to its seating position. Rear Outboard - Mega Cab REAR OUTBOARD - MEGA CAB WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury during and following any seat belt or child restraint anchor service, carefully inspect all seat belts, buckles, mounting hardware, retractors, tether straps, and anchors for proper installation, operation, or damage. Replace any belt that is cut, frayed, or torn. Straighten any belt that is twisted. Tighten any loose fasteners. Replace any belt that has a damaged or ineffective buckle or retractor. Replace any belt that has a bent or damaged latch plate or anchor plate. Replace any child restraint anchor or the unit to which the anchor is integral that has been bent or damaged. Never attempt to repair a seat belt or child restraint component. Always replace damaged or ineffective seat belt and child restraint components with the correct, new and unused replacement parts listed in the DaimlerChrysler Mopar(R) Parts Catalog. NOTE: All seat belt retractors except the driver side front retractor include a switchable automatic locking mechanism. See: Description and Operation/Description. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Retractor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Seat Belt and Retractor - Removal > Page 12403 1. Position the rear outboard seat belt and retractor (4) to the inner C-pillar as a unit. Be certain to engage the hooks on the upper retractor bracket into the mounting hole in the C-pillar. 2. Install and tighten the screw (3) that secures the lower retractor bracket to the C-pillar. Tighten the screw to 39 Nm (29 ft. lbs.). 3. Position the belt web guide (5) to the B-pillar and use hand pressure to press it firmly and evenly until the two clips that secure it snap into place. 4. Reinstall the lower trim (2) onto the inside of the C-pillar. Be certain that the turning loop (1) can be accessed from the face of the lower trim after the seat belt webbing is inserted through the slot in the trim. See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Trim Panel/Service and Repair/Pillar Trim/C-Pillar Trim Panel-Installation . 5. Reinstall the upper trim (2) onto the inside of the C-pillar. See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Trim Panel/Service and Repair/Pillar Trim/C-Pillar Trim Panel-Installation . 6. Position the seat belt turning loop (3) onto the height adjuster (1) on the upper C-pillar. 7. Install and tighten the screw (5) that secures the turning loop to the height adjuster. Tighten the screw to 39 Nm (29 ft. lbs.). 8. Engage the upper edge of a new trim cover (4) over the top of the turning loop. Then squeeze the lower end of the trim cover and the turning loop together firmly and evenly until the engagement tabs of the trim cover snap into the slots of the turning loop. 9. Position the seat belt lower anchor (7) to the mounting hole at the base of the C-pillar. 10. Install and tighten the screw (6) that secures the lower anchor to the C-pillar. Tighten the screw to 39 Nm (29 ft. lbs.). 11. Reinstall the rear seat into the vehicle. See: Body and Frame/Seats/Service and Repair/Seat - Installation . Rear Outboard - Quad Cab REAR OUTBOARD - QUAD CAB WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury during and following any seat belt or child restraint anchor service, carefully inspect all seat belts, buckles, mounting hardware, retractors, tether straps, and anchors for proper installation, operation, or damage. Replace any belt that is cut, frayed, or torn. Straighten any belt that is twisted. Tighten any loose fasteners. Replace any belt that has a damaged or ineffective buckle or retractor. Replace any belt that has a bent or damaged latch plate or anchor plate. Replace any child restraint anchor or the unit to which the anchor is integral that has been bent or damaged. Never attempt to repair a seat belt or child restraint component. Always replace damaged or ineffective seat belt and child restraint components with the correct, new and unused replacement parts listed in the DaimlerChrysler Mopar(R) Parts Catalog. NOTE: All seat belt retractors except the driver side front retractor include a switchable automatic locking mechanism. See: Description and Operation/Description. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Retractor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Seat Belt and Retractor - Removal > Page 12404 1. Position the rear outboard seat belt and retractor (4) to the inner C-pillar as a unit. Be certain to engage the hooks on the upper retractor bracket into the mounting hole in the C-pillar. 2. Install and tighten the screw (3) that secures the lower retractor bracket to the C-pillar. Tighten the screw to 39 Nm (29 ft. lbs.). 3. Position the belt web guide (5) to the B-pillar and use hand pressure to press it firmly and evenly until the two clips that secure it snap into place. 4. Reinstall the lower trim (2) onto the inside of the C-pillar. Be certain that the turning loop (1) can be accessed from the face of the lower trim after the seat belt webbing is inserted through the slot in the trim. See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Trim Panel/Service and Repair/Pillar Trim/C-Pillar Trim Panel-Installation . 5. Reinstall the upper trim (1) onto the inside of the C-pillar. See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Trim Panel/Service and Repair/Pillar Trim/C-Pillar Trim Panel-Installation . 6. Position the seat belt turning loop (2) onto the upper C-pillar. 7. Install and tighten the screw (4) that secures the turning loop to the C-pillar. Tighten the screw to 39 Nm (29 ft. lbs.). 8. Engage the upper edge of a new trim cover (3) over the top of the turning loop. Then squeeze the lower end of the trim cover and the turning loop together firmly and evenly until the engagement tabs of the trim cover snap into the slots of the turning loop. 9. Position the seat belt lower anchor (6) to the mounting hole at the base of the C-pillar. 10. Install and tighten the screw (5) that secures the lower anchor to the C-pillar. Tighten the screw to 39 Nm (29 ft. lbs.). 11. Reinstall the rear seat into the vehicle. See: Body and Frame/Seats/Service and Repair/Seat - Installation . Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Tensioner > Component Information > Locations > Seat Belt-Tension Reducer-Driver Seat Belt Tensioner: Locations Seat Belt-Tension Reducer-Driver Component ID: 395 Component : SEAT BELT-TENSION REDUCER-DRIVER Connector: Name : SEAT BELT-TENSION REDUCER-DRIVER Color : # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (STANDARD CAB) Pin Circuit Description 1 F983 20PK/YL FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-ACC) 2 R57 20LG/GY DRIVER SEAT BELT SWITCH SENSE Component Location - 58 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Tensioner > Component Information > Locations > Seat Belt-Tension Reducer-Driver > Page 12409 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Tensioner > Component Information > Locations > Seat Belt-Tension Reducer-Driver > Page 12410 Seat Belt Tensioner: Locations Seat Belt-Tensioner-Driver Component ID: 396 Component : SEAT BELT-TENSIONER-DRIVER Connector: Name : SEAT BELT-TENSIONER-DRIVER Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Pin Circuit Description 1 R55 20LG/DG DRIVER SEAT BELT TENSIONER LINE 1 2 R53 20LG/YL DRIVER SEAT BELT TENSIONER LINE 2 Component Location - 58 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Tensioner > Component Information > Locations > Seat Belt-Tension Reducer-Driver > Page 12411 Component Location - 63 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Tensioner > Component Information > Locations > Seat Belt-Tension Reducer-Driver > Page 12412 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Tensioner > Component Information > Locations > Seat Belt-Tension Reducer-Driver > Page 12413 Seat Belt Tensioner: Locations Seat Belt-Tensioner-Passenger Component ID: 397 Component : SEAT BELT-TENSIONER-PASSENGER Connector: Name : SEAT BELT-TENSIONER-PASSENGER Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Pin Circuit Description 1 R56 20LB/DG PASSENGER SEAT BELT TENSIONER LINE 1 2 R54 20LB/YL PASSENGER SEAT BELT TENSIONER LINE 2 Component Location - 61 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Tensioner > Component Information > Locations > Seat Belt-Tension Reducer-Driver > Page 12414 Component Location - 64 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Tensioner > Component Information > Locations > Seat Belt-Tension Reducer-Driver > Page 12415 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Tensioner > Component Information > Diagrams > Seat Belt-Tension Reducer-Driver Seat Belt Tensioner: Diagrams Seat Belt-Tension Reducer-Driver Component ID: 395 Component : SEAT BELT-TENSION REDUCER-DRIVER Connector: Name : SEAT BELT-TENSION REDUCER-DRIVER Color : # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (STANDARD CAB) Pin Circuit Description 1 F983 20PK/YL FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-ACC) 2 R57 20LG/GY DRIVER SEAT BELT SWITCH SENSE Component Location - 58 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Tensioner > Component Information > Diagrams > Seat Belt-Tension Reducer-Driver > Page 12418 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Tensioner > Component Information > Diagrams > Seat Belt-Tension Reducer-Driver > Page 12419 Seat Belt Tensioner: Diagrams Seat Belt-Tensioner-Driver Component ID: 396 Component : SEAT BELT-TENSIONER-DRIVER Connector: Name : SEAT BELT-TENSIONER-DRIVER Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Pin Circuit Description 1 R55 20LG/DG DRIVER SEAT BELT TENSIONER LINE 1 2 R53 20LG/YL DRIVER SEAT BELT TENSIONER LINE 2 Component Location - 58 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Tensioner > Component Information > Diagrams > Seat Belt-Tension Reducer-Driver > Page 12420 Component Location - 63 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Tensioner > Component Information > Diagrams > Seat Belt-Tension Reducer-Driver > Page 12421 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Tensioner > Component Information > Diagrams > Seat Belt-Tension Reducer-Driver > Page 12422 Seat Belt Tensioner: Diagrams Seat Belt-Tensioner-Passenger Component ID: 397 Component : SEAT BELT-TENSIONER-PASSENGER Connector: Name : SEAT BELT-TENSIONER-PASSENGER Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Pin Circuit Description 1 R56 20LB/DG PASSENGER SEAT BELT TENSIONER LINE 1 2 R54 20LB/YL PASSENGER SEAT BELT TENSIONER LINE 2 Component Location - 61 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Tensioner > Component Information > Diagrams > Seat Belt-Tension Reducer-Driver > Page 12423 Component Location - 64 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Tensioner > Component Information > Diagrams > Seat Belt-Tension Reducer-Driver > Page 12424 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Tensioner > Component Information > Description and Operation > Seat Belt-Tensioner Seat Belt Tensioner: Description and Operation Seat Belt-Tensioner Description DESCRIPTION Seat belt tensioners supplement the dual front airbags for the light-duty DR 1500 vehicles. The seat belt tensioners are integral to the front outboard seat belt retractor units, which are secured to the inner B-pillar on the right and left sides of the vehicle. The retractor is concealed beneath the molded plastic inner B-pillar trim. The seat belt tensioner consists primarily of a sprocket/pinion, a steel tube, a cast metal housing, numerous steel balls, a stamped metal ball trap, a torsion bar and a small pyrotechnically activated gas generator with a connector receptacle. All of these components are located on one side of the retractor spool on the outside of the retractor housing except for the torsion bar, which serves as the spindle upon which the retractor spool rides. The seat belt tensioners are controlled by the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) and are connected to the vehicle electrical system through a dedicated take out of the body wire harness by a keyed and latching yellow molded plastic connector insulator to ensure a secure connection. The seat belt tensioners cannot be repaired and, if ineffective or damaged, the entire front seat belt and retractor unit must be replaced. If the front airbags have been deployed, the seat belt tensioners have also been deployed. The seat belt tensioners are not intended for reuse and must be replaced following any front airbag deployment. A growling or grinding sound while attempting to operate the seat belt retractor is a sure indication that the seat belt tensioner has been deployed and requires replacement. See: Seat Belt Retractor/Service and Repair/Seat Belt and Retractor Removal . Operation OPERATION The seat belt tensioners are deployed in conjunction with the dual front airbags by a signal generated by the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) through the driver or passenger seat belt tensioner line 1 and line 2 (or squib) circuits. When the ORC sends the proper electrical signal to the tensioners, the electrical energy generates enough heat to initiate a small pyrotechnic gas generator. The gas generator is installed in one end of a steel tube that contains numerous steel balls. As the gas expands, it pushes the steel balls through the tube into a cast metal housing, where a ball guide directs the balls into engagement with the teeth of a sprocket that is geared to one end of the retractor spool. As the balls drive past the sprocket, the sprocket turns and drives the seat belt retractor spool causing the slack to be removed from the front seat belts. The ball trap captures the balls as they leave the sprocket and are expelled from the housing. Removing excess slack from the front seat belts not only keeps the occupants properly positioned for an airbag deployment following a frontal impact of the vehicle, but also helps to reduce injuries that the occupant might experience in these situations as a result of harmful contact with the steering wheel, steering column, instrument panel or windshield. Also, the seat belt tensioner torsion bar that the retractor spool rides upon is designed to deform in order to control the loading being applied to the occupants by the seat belts during a frontal impact, further reducing the potential for occupant injuries. The ORC monitors the condition of the seat belt tensioners through circuit resistance, and will illuminate the airbag indicator in the ElectroMechanical Instrument Cluster (EMIC) (also known as the Cab Compartment Node/CCN) and store a Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) for any fault that is detected. Proper diagnosis of the seat belt tensioner gas generator and the seat belt tensioner squib circuits requires the use of a diagnostic scan tool. Refer to the appropriate diagnostic information. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Tensioner > Component Information > Description and Operation > Seat Belt-Tensioner > Page 12427 Seat Belt Tensioner: Description and Operation Seat Belt Tension Reducer Description DESCRIPTION A seat belt tension reducer is standard equipment for the driver side front outboard seat belt on standard cab versions of this vehicle. The tension reducer is integral to the retractor unit, which is secured to the inner B-pillar on the left side of the vehicle. The retractor is concealed beneath the molded plastic inner B-pillar trim. The seat belt tension reducer consists primarily of a 12-volt Direct Current (DC) solenoid and an integral connector receptacle that is located on the forward facing end housing of the retractor. The seat belt tension reducer is controlled by a battery current output of the ignition switch and a ground path provided by the seat belt switch, and is connected to the vehicle electrical system through a dedicated take out of the body wire harness by a keyed and latching molded plastic connector insulator to ensure a secure connection. The seat belt tension reducer cannot be repaired and, if ineffective or damaged, the entire driver side front outboard seat belt and retractor unit must be replaced. See: Seat Belt Retractor/Service and Repair/Seat Belt and Retractor - Removal . Operation OPERATION The seat belt tension reducer is controlled by a ground signal received from the seat belt switch on the seat belt switch sense circuit and a battery current signal received from the ignition switch on the fused ignition switch output (run-accessory) circuit. When the seat belt switch is closed (the driver side front seat belt is fastened) and the ignition switch is in the ON or ACCESSORY positions, the seat belt tension reducer solenoid is energized. When the solenoid is energized, it actuates a mechanism within the driver side front outboard seat belt retractor to reduce the normal recoil spring tension exerted by the retractor spool, which is designed to reel in the seat belt webbing onto the spool. When the driver side seat belt is unbuckled or if the ignition switch is turned to any position except ON or ACCESSORY, the tension reducer solenoid is de-energized and the normal recoil spring tension of the retractor is restored. The action of the seat belt tension reducer results in improved seat belt comfort for the driver. Reducing the seat belt retractor recoil spring tension is desirable on standard cab versions of this vehicle and not on the quad cab or mega cab versions due to the different mounting position required for the seat belt turning loop on the B-pillar relative to the driver seat position on the standard cab. The seat belt tension reducer as well as the hard wired inputs and outputs of the tension reducer may be diagnosed using conventional diagnostic tools and procedures. Refer to the appropriate wiring information. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Tensioner > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 12428 Seat Belt Tensioner: Testing and Inspection SEAT BELT TENSION REDUCER Refer to the appropriate wiring information. The wiring information includes wiring diagrams, proper wire and connector repair procedures, details of wire harness routing and retention, connector pin-out information and location views for the various wire harness connectors, splices and grounds. WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury on vehicles equipped with airbags, disable the Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, airbag, seat belt tensioner, impact sensor, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the SRS. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment. 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. Disconnect the body wire harness connector for the seat belt tension reducer from the tension reducer connector receptacle on the driver side front outboard seat belt and retractor unit. Using an ohmmeter, measure the resistance between the seat belt switch sense circuit terminal pin and the fused ignition switch output (run-accessory) circuit terminal pin in the tension reducer connector receptacle on the retractor. Resistance through the tension reducer solenoid coil should be 53 ohms at 20° C (68° F). If OK, go to STEP 2. If not OK, replace the ineffective driver side front outboard seat belt and retractor unit. 2. Check for continuity between the seat belt switch sense circuit cavity of the body wire harness connector for the seat belt tension reducer and a good ground. There should be continuity with the driver side front seat belt buckled, and no continuity with the driver side front seat belt unbuckled. If OK, go to STEP 3. If not OK, repair the shorted or open seat belt switch sense circuit between the tension reducer and the seat belt switch as required. 3. Reconnect the battery negative cable. Check for battery current at the fused ignition switch output (run-accessory) circuit of the body wire harness connector for the seat belt tension reducer. There should be battery current with the ignition switch in the ON or ACCESSORY positions, and no battery current with the ignition switch in any other position. If not OK, repair the shorted or open fused ignition switch output (run-accessory) circuit between the tension reducer and the ignition switch as required. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Locations Seat Sensor/Switch: Locations Component ID: 437 Component : SENSOR-SEAT TRACK POSITION-DRIVER Connector: Name : SENSOR-SEAT TRACK POSITION-DRIVER Color : DK. GRAY # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (EXCEPT HEATED SEATS) Pin Circuit Description 1 R261 20LB/TN DRIVER SEAT POSITION SENSOR DATA 2 R263 20LB/GY DRIVER SEAT POSITION SENSOR VOLTAGE Component Location - 66 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 12432 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 12433 Seat Sensor/Switch: Diagrams Component ID: 437 Component : SENSOR-SEAT TRACK POSITION-DRIVER Connector: Name : SENSOR-SEAT TRACK POSITION-DRIVER Color : DK. GRAY # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (EXCEPT HEATED SEATS) Pin Circuit Description 1 R261 20LB/TN DRIVER SEAT POSITION SENSOR DATA 2 R263 20LB/GY DRIVER SEAT POSITION SENSOR VOLTAGE Component Location - 66 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 12434 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Deactivation Switch > Component Information > Locations Air Bag Deactivation Switch: Locations Component ID: 498 Component : SWITCH-PASSENGER AIRBAG ON/OFF Connector: Name : SWITCH-PASSENGER AIRBAG ON/OFF Color : BLACK # of pins : 6 Pin Circuit Description 1 R106 20LG/LB PASSENGER AIRBAG MUX SWITCH SENSE 2 R104 20LB/LG PASSENGER AIRBAG MUX SWITCH RETURN 3 G104 20VT/GY PASSENGER AIRBAG INDICATOR DRIVER 4 F201 20PK/OR FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) 5-6-Component Location - 47 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Deactivation Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 12439 Component Location - 45 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Deactivation Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 12440 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Deactivation Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 12441 Air Bag Deactivation Switch: Diagrams Component ID: 498 Component : SWITCH-PASSENGER AIRBAG ON/OFF Connector: Name : SWITCH-PASSENGER AIRBAG ON/OFF Color : BLACK # of pins : 6 Pin Circuit Description 1 R106 20LG/LB PASSENGER AIRBAG MUX SWITCH SENSE 2 R104 20LB/LG PASSENGER AIRBAG MUX SWITCH RETURN 3 G104 20VT/GY PASSENGER AIRBAG INDICATOR DRIVER 4 F201 20PK/OR FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) 5-6-Component Location - 47 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Deactivation Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 12442 Component Location - 45 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Deactivation Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 12443 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Deactivation Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Air Bag Deactivation Switch: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The passenger airbag on/off switch (1) is standard equipment on all standard cab versions of this vehicle (except light-duty DR 1500) equipped with the dual front airbag system. This switch is a two-position, resistor multiplexed switch with a single integral amber Light-Emitting Diode (LED), and a non-coded key cylinder-type actuator. The switch is located in the lower right corner of the instrument panel center bezel, near the center of the instrument panel. When the switch is in its installed position, the only components visible through the dedicated opening of the center bezel are the switch bezel (2) and lens, the nomenclature imprinted on the lens, and the key cylinder actuator (3). The OFF position nomenclature of the switch is illuminated and visible only when that switch position is selected. The ON position of the switch is neither visible or illuminated but can be determined by the orientation of the slot of the key cylinder actuator. The remainder of the switch is concealed behind the switch bezel and the instrument panel center bezel. The passenger airbag on/off switch housing is constructed of molded plastic and has three integral mounting tabs. These mounting tabs are used to secure the switch to the back of the molded plastic switch bezel with three small screws. The molded plastic switch bezel also has three integral mounting tabs that are used to secure the switch and bezel unit to the instrument panel center bezel with three additional screws. A molded plastic connector receptacle on the back of the switch housing connects the switch to the vehicle electrical system through a dedicated take out and connector of the instrument panel wire harness. The molded plastic harness connector insulator is keyed and latched to ensure proper and secure switch electrical connections. The passenger airbag on/off switch cannot be adjusted or repaired and, if ineffective or damaged, the switch must be replaced. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Deactivation Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 12446 Air Bag Deactivation Switch: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The passenger airbag on/off switch allows the customer to turn the passenger airbag function ON or OFF to accommodate certain uses of the right front seating position where airbag protection may not be desired. The OFF indicator of the switch will be illuminated whenever the switch is turned to the OFF position and the ignition switch is in the ON position. The ignition key is the only key or object that should ever be inserted into the key cylinder actuator of the switch. The on/off switch requires only a partial key insertion to fully depress a spring-loaded locking plunger. The spring-loaded locking plunger prevents the user from leaving the key in the switch. The key will be automatically ejected when force is not applied. To actuate the passenger airbag on/off switch, insert the ignition key into the switch key actuator far enough to fully depress the plunger, then rotate the actuator to the desired switch position. When the switch key actuator is rotated to its clockwise stop (the key actuator slot will be aligned with the OFF nomenclature), the OFF indicator is illuminated and the passenger airbag is disabled. When the switch is rotated to its counterclockwise stop (the key actuator slot will be in a vertical position) the OFF indicator will be extinguished and the passenger airbag is enabled. The OFF indicator and the enabling or disabling of the passenger airbag is controlled electronically by the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) based upon inputs it receives from the on/off switch. The passenger airbag on/off switch connects one of two internal resistors in series between the passenger airbag mux switch sense and passenger airbag mux switch return circuits of the ORC. The ORC continually monitors the resistance in these circuits to determine the switch position that has been selected. When the switch is in the OFF position, the ORC provides a ground input to the OFF indicator through the passenger airbag indicator driver circuit, which energizes the Light-Emitting Diode (LED) that illuminates the indicator. The ORC will store a Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) for any fault it detects in the passenger airbag on/off switch or OFF indicator circuits, and will illuminate the airbag indicator in the instrument cluster if a fault is detected. The hard wired circuits between the passenger airbag on/off switch and the ORC may be diagnosed using conventional diagnostic tools and procedures. However, conventional diagnostic methods will not prove conclusive in the diagnosis of the passenger airbag on/off switch or the electronic controls and communication between other modules and devices that provide some features of the supplemental restraint system. The most reliable, efficient, and accurate means to diagnose the passenger airbag on/off switch or the electronic controls and communication related to passenger airbag on/off switch operation requires the use of a diagnostic scan tool. Refer to the appropriate diagnostic information. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Deactivation Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Air Bag Deactivation Switch: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury on vehicles equipped with airbags, disable the Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, airbag, seat belt tensioner, impact sensor, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the SRS. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment. NOTE: A passenger airbag on/off switch is used only on standard cab vehicles (except light-duty DR 1500) equipped with dual front airbags. Quad cab, mega cab and light-duty DR 1500 standard cab vehicles have a cubby bin installed in the instrument panel center bezel in place of the on/off switch. 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. Wait two minutes for the system capacitor to discharge before further service. 2. Remove the center bezel (1) from the instrument panel. See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Service and Repair/Instrument Panel Center Bezel - Removal . 3. From the back of the center bezel, remove the three screws (2) that secure the passenger airbag on/off switch and bezel unit (3) to the back of the center bezel. 4. Remove the passenger airbag on/off switch and bezel from the center bezel as a unit. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Deactivation Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 12449 Air Bag Deactivation Switch: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury on vehicles equipped with airbags, disable the Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, airbag, seat belt tensioner, impact sensor, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the SRS. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment. NOTE: A passenger airbag on/off switch is used only on standard cab vehicles (except light-duty DR 1500) equipped with dual front airbags. Quad cab, mega cab and light-duty DR 1500 standard cab vehicles have a cubby bin installed in the instrument panel center bezel in place of the on/off switch. 1. Position the passenger airbag on/off switch and bezel unit (3) to the back of the center bezel (1). 2. Install and tighten the three screws (2) that secure the passenger airbag on/off switch bezel to the back of the center bezel. Tighten the screws to 2 Nm (17 in. lbs.). 3. Reinstall the center bezel onto the instrument panel. See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Service and Repair/Instrument Panel Center Bezel - Installation . 4. Do not reconnect the battery negative cable at this time. The Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) verification test procedure should be performed following service of any SRS component. See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code Tests and Associated Procedures/Verification Tests . Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Front Impact-Left Impact Sensor: Locations Sensor-Front Impact-Left Component ID: 417 Component : SENSOR-FRONT IMPACT-LEFT Connector: Name : SENSOR-FRONT IMPACT-LEFT Color : YELLOW # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (GAS) Pin Circuit Description 1 R81 20LB/WT LEFT FRONT IMPACT SENSOR GROUND 2 R79 20LB/VT LEFT FRONT IMPACT SENSOR SIGNAL Component Location - 30 Fig.30-Left Engine Compartment Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Front Impact-Left > Page 12454 Impact Sensor: Locations Sensor-Front Impact-Right Component ID: 418 Component : SENSOR-FRONT IMPACT-RIGHT Connector: Name : SENSOR-FRONT IMPACT-RIGHT Color : YELLOW # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (GAS) Pin Circuit Description 1 R82 20WT/LB RIGHT FRONT IMPACT SENSOR GROUND 2 R80 20VT/LB RIGHT FRONT IMPACT SENSOR SIGNAL Component Location - 29 Fig. 29-Right Side Engine Compartment Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Front Impact-Left > Page 12455 Impact Sensor: Locations Sensor-Side Impact-Left 1 Component ID: 438 Component : SENSOR-SIDE IMPACT-LEFT 1 Connector: Name : SENSOR-SIDE IMPACT-LEFT 1 Color : YELLOW # of pins : 4 Pin Circuit Description 1 R13 20LG/TN LEFT SIDE IMPACT SENSOR 1 SIGNAL 2 R15 20LG/BR LEFT SIDE IMPACT SENSOR 1 GROUND 3-4-Component Location - 58 Fig. 58-Left Side Body (Standard Cab) Component Location - 63 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Front Impact-Left > Page 12456 Fig. 63-Left Side Body (Quad Cab/Mega Cab) Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Front Impact-Left > Page 12457 Impact Sensor: Locations Sensor-Side Impact-Right 1 Component ID: 439 Component : SENSOR-SIDE IMPACT-RIGHT 1 Connector: Name : SENSOR-SIDE IMPACT-RIGHT 1 Color : YELLOW # of pins : 4 Pin Circuit Description 1 R14 20TN/LG RIGHT SIDE IMPACT SENSOR 1 SIGNAL 2 R16 20BR/LG RIGHT SIDE IMPACT SENSOR 1 GROUND 3-4-Component Location - 61 Fig. 61-Right Side Body (Standard Cab) Component Location - 64 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Front Impact-Left > Page 12458 Fig. 64-Right Side Body (Quad Cab/Mega Cab) Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Front Impact-Left Impact Sensor: Diagrams Sensor-Front Impact-Left Component ID: 417 Component : SENSOR-FRONT IMPACT-LEFT Connector: Name : SENSOR-FRONT IMPACT-LEFT Color : YELLOW # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (GAS) Pin Circuit Description 1 R81 20LB/WT LEFT FRONT IMPACT SENSOR GROUND 2 R79 20LB/VT LEFT FRONT IMPACT SENSOR SIGNAL Component Location - 30 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Front Impact-Left > Page 12461 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Front Impact-Left > Page 12462 Impact Sensor: Diagrams Sensor-Front Impact-Right Component ID: 418 Component : SENSOR-FRONT IMPACT-RIGHT Connector: Name : SENSOR-FRONT IMPACT-RIGHT Color : YELLOW # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (GAS) Pin Circuit Description 1 R82 20WT/LB RIGHT FRONT IMPACT SENSOR GROUND 2 R80 20VT/LB RIGHT FRONT IMPACT SENSOR SIGNAL Component Location - 29 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Front Impact-Left > Page 12463 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Front Impact-Left > Page 12464 Impact Sensor: Diagrams Sensor-Side Impact-Left 1 Component ID: 438 Component : SENSOR-SIDE IMPACT-LEFT 1 Connector: Name : SENSOR-SIDE IMPACT-LEFT 1 Color : YELLOW # of pins : 4 Pin Circuit Description 1 R13 20LG/TN LEFT SIDE IMPACT SENSOR 1 SIGNAL 2 R15 20LG/BR LEFT SIDE IMPACT SENSOR 1 GROUND 3-4-Component Location - 58 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Front Impact-Left > Page 12465 Component Location - 63 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Front Impact-Left > Page 12466 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Front Impact-Left > Page 12467 Impact Sensor: Diagrams Sensor-Side Impact-Right 1 Component ID: 439 Component : SENSOR-SIDE IMPACT-RIGHT 1 Connector: Name : SENSOR-SIDE IMPACT-RIGHT 1 Color : YELLOW # of pins : 4 Pin Circuit Description 1 R14 20TN/LG RIGHT SIDE IMPACT SENSOR 1 SIGNAL 2 R16 20BR/LG RIGHT SIDE IMPACT SENSOR 1 GROUND 3-4-Component Location - 61 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Front Impact-Left > Page 12468 Component Location - 64 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Front Impact-Left > Page 12469 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Impact Sensor: Description and Operation Description Front FRONT Two front impact sensors (1) are used on this vehicle, one each for the left and right sides of the vehicle. These sensors are mounted remotely from the impact sensor that is internal to the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC). Each front impact sensor is secured with a screw to the back of the right or left end of the lower radiator crossmember within the engine compartment. The sensor housing has an integral connector receptacle (4), an integral anti-rotation pin (3), and an integral mounting hole (2) with a metal sleeve to provide crush protection. The right and left front impact sensors are identical in construction and calibration. A cavity in the center of the molded black plastic impact sensor housing contains the electronic circuitry of the sensor which includes an electronic communication chip and an electronic impact sensor. Potting material fills the cavity to seal and protect the internal electronic circuitry and components. The front impact sensors are each connected to the vehicle electrical system through a dedicated take out and connector of the headlamp and dash wire harness. The front impact sensors cannot be repaired or adjusted and, if damaged or ineffective, they must be replaced. Side SIDE Two side impact sensors (1) are used on this vehicle when it is equipped with the optional side curtain airbags, one each for the left and right sides of the vehicle. These sensors are mounted remotely from the impact sensor that is internal to the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC). Each side sensor is secured with a nut within the right or left B-pillar just above the front seat belt retractors and behind the lower B-pillar trim within the passenger compartment. The sensor housing has an integral connector receptacle (2), an integral mounting stud (3), and an integral anti-rotation pin. The right and left side impact sensors are identical in construction and calibration. A cavity in the center of the molded plastic impact sensor housing contains the electronic circuitry of the sensor which includes an electronic communication chip and an electronic impact sensor. Potting material fills the cavity to seal and protect the internal electronic circuitry and components. The side impact sensors are each connected to the vehicle electrical system through a dedicated take out and connector of the body wire harness. The side impact sensors cannot be repaired or adjusted and, if damaged or ineffective, they must be replaced. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 12472 Impact Sensor: Description and Operation Operation Front FRONT The front impact sensors are electronic accelerometers that sense the rate of vehicle deceleration, which provides verification of the direction and severity of an impact. Each sensor also contains an electronic communication chip that allows the unit to communicate the sensor status as well as sensor fault information to the microprocessor in the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC). The ORC microprocessor continuously monitors all of the passive restraint system electrical circuits to determine the system readiness. If the ORC detects a monitored system fault, it sets a Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) and controls the airbag indicator operation accordingly. The impact sensors each receive battery current and ground through dedicated left and right sensor plus and minus circuits from the ORC. The impact sensors and the ORC communicate by modulating the voltage in the sensor plus circuit. The hard wired circuits between the front impact sensors and the ORC may be diagnosed using conventional diagnostic tools and procedures. Refer to the appropriate wiring information. However, conventional diagnostic methods will not prove conclusive in the diagnosis of the impact sensors or the electronic controls or communication between other modules and devices that provide features of the Supplemental Restraint System (SRS). The most reliable, efficient, and accurate means to diagnose the impact sensors or the electronic controls and communication related to front impact sensor operation requires the use of a diagnostic scan tool. Refer to the appropriate diagnostic information. Side SIDE The side impact sensors are electronic accelerometers that sense the rate of vehicle deceleration, which provides verification of the direction and severity of an impact. Each sensor also contains an electronic communication chip that allows the unit to communicate the sensor status as well as sensor fault information to the microprocessor in the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC). The ORC microprocessor continuously monitors all of the side passive restraint system electrical circuits to determine the system readiness. If the ORC detects a monitored system fault, it sets a Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) and controls the airbag indicator operation accordingly. The impact sensors each receive battery current and ground through left or right sensor plus and minus circuits from the ORC. The impact sensors and the ORC communicate by modulating the voltage in the sensor plus circuit. The hard wired circuits between the side impact sensors and the ORC may be diagnosed using conventional diagnostic tools and procedures. Refer to the appropriate wiring information. However, conventional diagnostic methods will not prove conclusive in the diagnosis of the impact sensors or the electronic controls or communication between other modules and devices that provide features of the Supplemental Restraint System (SRS). The most reliable, efficient, and accurate means to diagnose the impact sensors or the electronic controls and communication related to side impact sensor operation requires the use of a diagnostic scan tool. Refer to the appropriate diagnostic information. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Impact Sensor: Service and Repair Removal Front FRONT WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury on vehicles equipped with airbags, disable the Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, airbag, seat belt tensioner, impact sensor, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the SRS. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment. WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury, never strike or drop the front impact sensor, as it can damage the impact sensor or affect its calibration. The front impact sensor enables the system to deploy the front Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) components. If an impact sensor is accidentally dropped during service, the sensor must be scrapped and replaced with a new unit. Failure to observe this warning could result in accidental, incomplete, or improper front SRS component deployment. 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. Wait two minutes for the system capacitor to discharge before further service. 2. Remove the screw (4) that secures the right or left front impact sensor (3) to the back of the right or left end of the lower radiator crossmember (1). 3. Disconnect the headlamp and dash wire harness connector (2) from the sensor connector receptacle. 4. Remove the right or left front impact sensor from the engine compartment. Side - Mega Cab SIDE - MEGA CAB WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury on vehicles equipped with airbags, disable the Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, airbag, seat belt tensioner, impact sensor, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the SRS. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment. WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury, never strike or drop the side impact sensor, as it can damage the impact sensor or affect its calibration. The side impact sensor enables the system to deploy the side Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) components. If an impact sensor is accidentally dropped during service, the sensor must be scrapped and replaced with a new unit. Failure to observe this warning could result in accidental, incomplete, or improper side SRS component deployment. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 12475 1. Adjust the front seat to its most forward position for easiest access to the B-pillar trim. 2. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. Wait two minutes for the system capacitor to discharge before further service. 3. Remove the nut (3) that secures the stud of the side impact sensor (4) to the inner B-pillar (2). 4. Reach through the large hole above the retractor mounting hole in the inner B-pillar to access the side impact sensor and disengage the anti-rotation pin and mounting stud from the holes in the inner B-pillar. 5. Pull the side impact sensor out through the large hole in the B-pillar far enough to access and disconnect the body wire harness connector (1) from the sensor connector receptacle. 6. Remove the side impact sensor from the B-pillar. Side - Quad Cab SIDE - QUAD CAB WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury on vehicles equipped with airbags, disable the Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, airbag, seat belt tensioner, impact sensor, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the SRS. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment. WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury, never strike or drop the side impact sensor, as it can damage the impact sensor or affect its calibration. The side impact sensor enables the system to deploy the side Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) components. If an impact sensor is accidentally dropped during service, the sensor must be scrapped and replaced with a new unit. Failure to observe this warning could result in accidental, incomplete, or improper side SRS component deployment. 1. Adjust the front seat to its most forward position for easiest access to the B-pillar trim. 2. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. Wait two minutes for the system capacitor to discharge before further service. 3. Remove the nut (3) that secures the stud of the side impact sensor (2) to the inner B-pillar (1). 4. Reach through the large hole above the retractor mounting hole in the inner B-pillar to access the side impact sensor and disengage the anti-rotation pin and mounting stud from the holes in the inner B-pillar. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 12476 5. Pull the side impact sensor out through the large hole in the B-pillar far enough to access and disconnect the body wire harness connector (4) from the sensor connector receptacle. 6. Remove the side impact sensor from the B-pillar. Side - Standard Cab SIDE - STANDARD CAB WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury on vehicles equipped with airbags, disable the Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, airbag, seat belt tensioner, impact sensor, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the SRS. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment. WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury, never strike or drop the side impact sensor, as it can damage the impact sensor or affect its calibration. The side impact sensor enables the system to deploy the side Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) components. If an impact sensor is accidentally dropped during service, the sensor must be scrapped and replaced with a new unit. Failure to observe this warning could result in accidental, incomplete, or improper side SRS component deployment. 1. Adjust the driver or passenger side front seat to its most forward position for easiest access to the B-pillar trim. 2. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. Wait two minutes for the system capacitor to discharge before further service. 3. Remove the front outboard seat belt and retractor from the inside of the B-pillar. See: Seat Belt Systems/Seat Belt Retractor/Service and Repair/Seat Belt and Retractor - Removal . 4. Remove the nut (4) that secures the stud of the side impact sensor (1) to the inner B-pillar. 5. Reach through the retractor mounting hole (3) in the inner B-pillar to access the side impact sensor and disengage the anti-rotation pin and mounting stud from the holes in the inner B-pillar. 6. Pull the side impact sensor out of the B-pillar far enough to access and disconnect the body wire harness connector (2) from the sensor connector receptacle. 7. Remove the sensor from the B-pillar. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 12477 Impact Sensor: Service and Repair Installation Front FRONT WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury on vehicles equipped with airbags, disable the Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, airbag, seat belt tensioner, impact sensor, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the SRS. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment. WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury, never strike or drop the front impact sensor, as it can damage the impact sensor or affect its calibration. The front impact sensor enables the system to deploy the front Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) components. If an impact sensor is accidentally dropped during service, the sensor must be scrapped and replaced with a new unit. Failure to observe this warning could result in accidental, incomplete, or improper front SRS component deployment. 1. Position the right or left front impact sensor (3) into the engine compartment. 2. Reconnect the headlamp and dash wire harness connector (2) to the sensor connector receptacle. 3. Carefully position the sensor onto the back of the right or left end of the lower radiator crossmember (1). Be certain that the anti-rotation pin on the back of the sensor is engaged in the clearance hole of the crossmember. 4. Install and tighten the screw (4) that secures the sensor to the back of the crossmember. Tighten the screw to 10 Nm (90 in. lbs.). 5. Do not reconnect the battery negative cable at this time. The Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) verification test procedure should be performed following service of any SRS component. See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code Tests and Associated Procedures/Verification Tests . Side - Mega Cab SIDE - MEGA CAB WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury on vehicles equipped with airbags, disable the Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, airbag, seat belt tensioner, impact sensor, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the SRS. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment. WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury, never strike or drop the side impact sensor, as it can damage the impact sensor or affect its calibration. The side impact sensor enables the system to deploy the side Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) components. If an impact sensor is accidentally dropped during service, the sensor must be scrapped and replaced with a new unit. Failure to observe this warning could result in accidental, incomplete, or improper side SRS component deployment. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 12478 1. Position the side impact sensor (4) to the large hole above the retractor mounting hole in the inner B-pillar (2). 2. Reconnect the body wire harness connector (1) to the sensor connector receptacle. 3. Reach through the large hole above the retractor mounting hole in the inner B-pillar to position and engage the anti-rotation pin and the stud on the side impact sensor to the locating slot and mounting hole from the inside of the B-pillar. 4. Install and tighten the nut (3) that secures the side impact sensor stud to the inner B-pillar. Tighten the nut to 8 Nm (70 in. lbs.). 5. Do not reconnect the battery negative cable at this time. The Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) verification test procedure should be performed following service of any SRS component. See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code Tests and Associated Procedures/Verification Tests . Side - Quad Cab SIDE - QUAD CAB WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury on vehicles equipped with airbags, disable the Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, airbag, seat belt tensioner, impact sensor, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the SRS. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment. WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury, never strike or drop the side impact sensor, as it can damage the impact sensor or affect its calibration. The side impact sensor enables the system to deploy the side Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) components. If an impact sensor is accidentally dropped during service, the sensor must be scrapped and replaced with a new unit. Failure to observe this warning could result in accidental, incomplete, or improper side SRS component deployment. 1. Position the side impact sensor (2) to the large hole above the retractor mounting hole in the inner B-pillar (1). 2. Reconnect the body wire harness connector (4) to the sensor connector receptacle. 3. Reach through the large hole above the retractor mounting hole in the inner B-pillar to position and engage the anti-rotation pin and the stud on the side impact sensor to the locating slot and mounting hole from the inside of the B-pillar. 4. Install and tighten the nut (3) that secures the side impact sensor stud to the inner B-pillar. Tighten the nut to 8 Nm (70 in. lbs.). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 12479 5. Do not reconnect the battery negative cable at this time. The Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) verification test procedure should be performed following service of any SRS component. See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code Tests and Associated Procedures/Verification Tests . Side - Standard Cab SIDE - STANDARD CAB WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury on vehicles equipped with airbags, disable the Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, airbag, seat belt tensioner, impact sensor, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the SRS. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment. WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury, never strike or drop the side impact sensor, as it can damage the impact sensor or affect its calibration. The side impact sensor enables the system to deploy the side Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) components. If an impact sensor is accidentally dropped during service, the sensor must be scrapped and replaced with a new unit. Failure to observe this warning could result in accidental, incomplete, or improper side SRS component deployment. 1. Position the side impact sensor (1) to the retractor mounting hole (3) in the inner B-pillar. 2. Reconnect the body wire harness connector (2) to the sensor connector receptacle. 3. Reach through the retractor mounting hole in the inner B-pillar to position and engage the anti-rotation pin and the stud on the side impact sensor to the locating slot and mounting hole from the inside of the B-pillar. 4. Install and tighten the nut (4) that secures the side impact sensor stud to the inner B-pillar. Tighten the nut to 8 Nm (70 in. lbs.). 5. Reinstall the front outboard seat belt and retractor to the inside of the B-pillar. See: Seat Belt Systems/Seat Belt Retractor/Service and Repair/Seat Belt and Retractor - Installation . 6. Do not reconnect the battery negative cable at this time. The Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) verification test procedure should be performed following service of any SRS component. See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code Tests and Associated Procedures/Verification Tests . Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Buckle Switch > Component Information > Locations Seat Belt Buckle Switch: Locations Component ID: 506 Component : SWITCH-SEAT BELT-DRIVER Connector: Name : SWITCH-SEAT BELT-DRIVER Color : # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (HD) Pin Circuit Description 1 Z951 18BK GROUND 2 G10 20VT/LG SEAT BELT SWITCH SENSE Component Location - 66 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Buckle Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 12483 Connector: Name : SWITCH-SEAT BELT-DRIVER Color : LT. GRAY # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (LD) Pin Circuit Description 1 Z917 20BK GROUND 2 R57 20LG/GY DRIVER SEAT BELT SWITCH SENSE Component Location - 66 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Buckle Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 12484 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Buckle Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 12485 Seat Belt Buckle Switch: Diagrams Component ID: 506 Component : SWITCH-SEAT BELT-DRIVER Connector: Name : SWITCH-SEAT BELT-DRIVER Color : # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (HD) Pin Circuit Description 1 Z951 18BK GROUND 2 G10 20VT/LG SEAT BELT SWITCH SENSE Component Location - 66 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Buckle Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 12486 Connector: Name : SWITCH-SEAT BELT-DRIVER Color : LT. GRAY # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (LD) Pin Circuit Description 1 Z917 20BK GROUND 2 R57 20LG/GY DRIVER SEAT BELT SWITCH SENSE Component Location - 66 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Buckle Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 12487 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Buckle Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Seat Belt Buckle Switch: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION All vehicles are equipped with a driver side seat belt switch that is a small, normally open, single pole, single throw, leaf contact, momentary switch. The driver side seat belt switch is integral to the buckle (1) of the driver side front seat belt buckle, which is located on a stamped steel stanchion secured by a screw (3) to the inboard side of the driver side front seat cushion frame. The seat belt switch is connected to the vehicle electrical system through a two-lead pigtail wire and connector (4) on the seat belt buckle-half, which is connected to a wire harness connector and take out of the seat wire harness routed beneath the driver side front seat cushion in the passenger compartment. The seat belt switch cannot be adjusted or repaired. If ineffective or damaged, the entire driver side front seat belt buckle-half unit must be replaced. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Buckle Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 12490 Seat Belt Buckle Switch: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The driver side seat belt switch is designed to control a path to ground for the seat belt switch sense input of the ElectroMechanical Instrument Cluster (EMIC) (also known as the Cab Compartment Node/CCN). When the driver side front seat belt tip-half is inserted into the seat belt buckle, the switch closes the path to ground; and, when the driver side front seat belt tip-half is removed from the seat belt buckle, the switch opens the ground path. The switch is actuated by the latch mechanism within the seat belt buckle. The seat belt switch is connected in series between ground and the seat belt switch sense input of the instrument cluster. The seat belt switch receives ground at all times through its pigtail wire connection to the seat wire harness from a take out of the body wire harness. An eyelet terminal connector on the body wire harness ground take out is secured beneath a ground screw on the left cowl side inner panel, beneath the instrument panel. The seat belt switch as well as the hard wired inputs and outputs of the switch may be diagnosed using conventional diagnostic tools and procedures. Refer to the appropriate wiring information. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Locations Seat Sensor/Switch: Locations Component ID: 437 Component : SENSOR-SEAT TRACK POSITION-DRIVER Connector: Name : SENSOR-SEAT TRACK POSITION-DRIVER Color : DK. GRAY # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (EXCEPT HEATED SEATS) Pin Circuit Description 1 R261 20LB/TN DRIVER SEAT POSITION SENSOR DATA 2 R263 20LB/GY DRIVER SEAT POSITION SENSOR VOLTAGE Component Location - 66 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 12494 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 12495 Seat Sensor/Switch: Diagrams Component ID: 437 Component : SENSOR-SEAT TRACK POSITION-DRIVER Connector: Name : SENSOR-SEAT TRACK POSITION-DRIVER Color : DK. GRAY # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (EXCEPT HEATED SEATS) Pin Circuit Description 1 R261 20LB/TN DRIVER SEAT POSITION SENSOR DATA 2 R263 20LB/GY DRIVER SEAT POSITION SENSOR VOLTAGE Component Location - 66 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 12496 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antenna > Antenna, Navigation > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Antenna, Navigation: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. 2. Remove the instrument panel top cover See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Service and Repair/Instrument Panel Cover - Removal . 3. Remove the radio See: Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc/Radio/Stereo/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Removal . 4. Remove the antenna mounting fasteners. 5. Cut each end of the cable (1) and leave remaining portion in the instrument panel. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antenna > Antenna, Navigation > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 12503 Antenna, Navigation: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION 1. Position new antenna cable to wire harness. Secure into place. 2. Install antenna mounting fasteners. 3. Install radio See: Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc/Radio/Stereo/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Installation . 4. Install instrument panel top cover See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Service and Repair/Instrument Panel Cover - Installation . 5. Connect battery negative cable. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antenna > Keyless Start Antenna > Component Information > Description and Operation Keyless Start Antenna: Description and Operation DESCRIPTION The Remote Start Antenna Module Assembly consists of an electrical connection to the WCM/SKREEM (1), a length of coax cable (2), two mounting clips (3) and (4), and a control module/antenna (5). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antenna > Keyless Start Antenna > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Keyless Start Antenna: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL The Remote Start Antenna Module Assembly consists of an electrical connection to the WCM/SKREEM (1), a length of coax cable (2), two mounting clips (3) and (4), and a control module/antenna (5). The control module (1) is located behind the instrument panel cluster. The module electrical connector plugs into the WCM/SKREEM at the right side of the steering column. 1. Disconnect and isolate negative battery cable. 2. Remove steering column trim panel (knee blocker). 3. Remove steering column shrouds. 4. Remove IP cluster bezel. 5. Remove IP cluster and its three connectors. 6. Remove two module mounting screws (2) from module (1). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antenna > Keyless Start Antenna > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 12509 7. Using a pair of long needle hose pliers, disengage coax cable retainer clip (2) from IP. 8. Disconnect coax cable electrical connector (1) at WCM/SKREEM (2). 9. Remove remote module assembly. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antenna > Keyless Start Antenna > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 12510 Keyless Start Antenna: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION The Remote Start Antenna Module Assembly consists of an electrical connection to the WCM/SKREEM (1), a length of coax cable (2), two mounting clips (3) and (4), and a control module/antenna (5). 1. Connect coax cable electrical connector (1) to WCM/SKREEM module (2). Route coax cable and install cable clip (2) to IP. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antenna > Keyless Start Antenna > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 12511 2. Position module (1) and install two module mounting screws (2). 3. Install IP cluster and its three connectors. 4. Install IP cluster bezel. 5. Install steering column trim panel (knee blocker). 6. Install steering column shrouds. 7. Connect negative battery cable. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antenna > Antenna, Radio > Antenna Cable > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Antenna Cable: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. 2. Remove the glove box See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Glove Compartment/Service and Repair/Instrument Panel Glove Box Removal . 3. Remove the instrument panel center bezel See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Service and Repair/Instrument Panel Center Bezel - Removal . 4. Remove the radio See: Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc/Radio/Stereo/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Removal . CAUTION: Pulling the antenna cable straight out of the radio without pulling on the locking antenna connector could damage the cable or radio. 5. Disconnect the antenna cable by pulling the locking antenna connector away from the radio. 6. Remove antenna cable from instrument panel by pulling on retaining fasteners. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antenna > Antenna, Radio > Antenna Cable > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 12517 Antenna Cable: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION 1. Install antenna cable (1) to instrument panel by pressing retaining fasteners into position. 2. Connect instrument panel antenna cable to antenna body and cable (2). 3. Install radio See: Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc/Radio/Stereo/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Installation . 4. Install the instrument panel center bezel See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Service and Repair/Instrument Panel Center Bezel - Installation . 5. Install the glove box See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Glove Compartment/Service and Repair/Instrument Panel Glove Box Installation . 6. Connect the battery negative cable. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Alarm System Transponder > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Alarm System Transponder: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION Each ignition key (2) used in the Sentry Key Immobilizer System (SKIS) has a transponder chip included on the circuit board (4) beneath the cover (1) of the integral Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter (3). In addition to having to be cut to match the mechanical coding of the ignition lock cylinder and programmed for operation of the RKE system, each new Sentry Key has a unique transponder identification code that is permanently programmed into it by the manufacturer, and which must be programmed into the Sentry Key REmote Entry Module (SKREEM) (also known as the Wireless Control Module/WCM) to be recognized by the SKIS as a valid key. The Sentry Key transponder cannot be adjusted or repaired. If ineffective or damaged, the entire key and RKE transmitter unit must be replaced. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Alarm System Transponder > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 12523 Alarm System Transponder: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION When the ignition switch is turned to the ON position, the Sentry Key REmote Entry Module (SKREEM) (also known as the Wireless Control Module/WCM) communicates through its antenna with the Sentry Key transponder using a Radio Frequency (RF) signal. The SKREEM then listens for a RF response from the transponder through the same antenna. The Sentry Key transponder chip is within the range of the SKREEM transceiver antenna ring when it is inserted into the ignition lock cylinder. The SKREEM determines whether a valid key is present in the ignition lock cylinder based upon the response from the transponder. If a valid key is detected, that fact is communicated by the SKREEM to the Powertrain Control Module (PCM)/Engine Control Module (ECM) over the Controller Area Network (CAN) data bus, and the PCM/ECM allows the engine to continue running. If the PCM/ECM receives an invalid key message, or receives no message from the SKREEM over the CAN data bus, the engine will be disabled after about two seconds of operation. The ElectroMechanical Instrument Cluster (EMIC) (also known as the Cab Compartment Node/CCN) will also respond to the invalid key message on the CAN data bus by flashing the security indicator ON and OFF. Each Sentry Key has a unique transponder identification code permanently programmed into it by the manufacturer. Likewise, the SKREEM has a unique Secret Key code programmed into it by the manufacturer. When a Sentry Key is programmed into the memory of the SKREEM, the SKREEM stores the transponder identification code from the Sentry Key, and the Sentry Key learns the Secret Key code from the SKREEM. Once the Sentry Key learns the Secret Key code of the SKREEM, it is permanently stored in the memory of the transponder. Therefore, once a Sentry Key has been programmed to a particular vehicle, it cannot be used on any other vehicle. . The SKIS performs a self-test each time the ignition switch is turned to the ON position, and will store key-related fault information in the form of a Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) in SKREEM memory if a Sentry Key transponder problem is detected. The Sentry Key transponder chip can be diagnosed, and any stored DTC can be retrieved using a diagnostic scan tool. Refer to the appropriate diagnostic information. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm) > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 475 Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm): Locations Component ID 475 Component ID: 475 Component : SWITCH-HOOD AJAR Connector: Name : SWITCH-HOOD AJAR Color : # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (GAS) Pin Circuit Description 1 G70 20VT/LB HOOD AJAR SWITCH SENSE 2 G930 20VT/TN AAT RETURN Component Location - 29 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm) > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 475 > Page 12528 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm) > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 475 > Page 12529 Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm): Locations Component ID 492 Component ID: 492 Component : SWITCH-HOOD AJAR Connector: Name : SWITCH-HOOD AJAR Color : # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (GAS) Pin Circuit Description 1 G70 20VT/LB HOOD AJAR SWITCH SENSE 2 G930 20VT/TN AAT RETURN Component Location - 29 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm) > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 475 > Page 12530 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm) > Component Information > Diagrams > Component ID 475 Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm): Diagrams Component ID 475 Component ID: 475 Component : SWITCH-HOOD AJAR Connector: Name : SWITCH-HOOD AJAR Color : # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (GAS) Pin Circuit Description 1 G70 20VT/LB HOOD AJAR SWITCH SENSE 2 G930 20VT/TN AAT RETURN Component Location - 29 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm) > Component Information > Diagrams > Component ID 475 > Page 12533 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm) > Component Information > Diagrams > Component ID 475 > Page 12534 Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm): Diagrams Component ID 492 Component ID: 492 Component : SWITCH-HOOD AJAR Connector: Name : SWITCH-HOOD AJAR Color : # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (GAS) Pin Circuit Description 1 G70 20VT/LB HOOD AJAR SWITCH SENSE 2 G930 20VT/TN AAT RETURN Component Location - 29 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm) > Component Information > Diagrams > Component ID 475 > Page 12535 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm) > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm): Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The hood ajar switch is a normally closed, single pole, spring-loaded plunger actuated switch. This switch has two unique versions that are used in two different applications. One switch is used only on vehicles equipped with the Vehicle Theft Alarm (VTA) system for sale in certain export markets where protection of the underhood area is required equipment. The second switch is used only on domestic vehicles equipped with an optional remote starter system. The molded plastic switch body (5) has an integral molded connector receptacle (1) on the lower end containing two terminal pins. The switch is connected to the vehicle electrical system through a dedicated take out of the headlamp and dash wire harness. Two integral latches (2) lock the switch into a keyed mounting hole in the stamped steel switch mounting bracket. The mounting bracket is secured with screws to the inboard side of the right front fender load beam within the engine compartment. A molded plastic striker secured to the underside of the hood panel inner reinforcement actuates the switch plunger as the hood panel is closed. The switch plunger (3) extends through a mounting collar (4) and a sleeve-like retainer ring on the upper end of the switch body. The retainer ring has a one time, self-adjustment feature that is activated after the switch is installed by closing the hood. The retainer ring is also color-coded to aid in identifying the switch application. A dark brown retainer ring identifies the underhood security switch application, while a white retainer ring identifies the remote starter system application. An installed hood ajar switch cannot be readjusted or repaired. If the switch is damaged, ineffective, or requires readjustment, it must be replaced with a new unit. The hood ajar switch striker is not intended for reuse. If the striker is removed from the hood inner reinforcement for any reason, it must be replaced with a new unit. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm) > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 12538 Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm): Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The hood ajar switches are interchangeable physically, but not functionally. In each case, the hood ajar switch is a normally closed switch that is held open as the spring-loaded switch plunger is depressed by the striker on the inner hood panel reinforcement when the hood panel is closed and latched. When the hood is opened, the spring-loaded switch plunger extends from the switch body and the switch contacts are closed. In the underhood security application (export vehicles only - dark brown retainer ring), the switch is connected in series between ground and the hood ajar switch sense input of the Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM). The TIPM uses an internal resistor pull up to monitor the state of the hood ajar switch contacts. In the remote starter system application (domestic vehicles only - white retainer ring) the switch has a 1 kilohm diagnostic resistor connected in parallel to the switch contacts between the two switch terminals. The switch is connected in series between an output of the TIPM and the hood ajar switch sense input of the TIPM. The TIPM continually monitors this circuit and will store a Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) for any fault that it detects. The components of the switch self-adjustment feature include an integral stop on the shaft of the plunger and a ribbed, ratcheting sleeve-like retainer ring at the top of the switch body from which the plunger extends. With the switch mounting collar secured in its mounting bracket, the plunger is depressed by the striker on the hood inner reinforcement as the hood is closed. As the plunger is depressed, the plunger stop contacts the top of the retainer ring and it is driven downward, ratcheting through the switch mounting collar until the hood is fully closed and latched. The ribs on the retainer ring are engaged within the mounting collar to maintain this adjusted position. The hood ajar switch as well as the hard wired circuits between the switch and the TIPM may be diagnosed using conventional diagnostic tools and procedures. Refer to the appropriate wiring information. However, conventional diagnostic methods will not prove conclusive in the diagnosis of the electronic controls or communication between modules and other devices related to hood ajar switch operation that provide some features of the export vehicle theft or domestic remote starter systems. The most reliable, efficient, and accurate means to diagnose the electronic controls and communication related to hood ajar switch operation requires the use of a diagnostic scan tool. Refer to the appropriate diagnostic information. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm) > Component Information > Service and Repair > Hood Ajar Switch Bracket Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm): Service and Repair Hood Ajar Switch Bracket Removal BRACKET 1. Remove the hood ajar switch (2) from the mounting bracket (3). See: Hood Ajar Switch Removal . 2. Remove the two screws (4) that secure the hood ajar switch bracket to the two rivet nuts (1) in the right front load beam (6). 3. Remove the hood ajar switch mounting bracket from the inboard side of the right front load beam. Installation BRACKET 1. Check to be certain that the two rivet nuts (1) on the inboard side of the right front load beam (6) are in good condition and properly secured. 2. Position the hood ajar switch mounting bracket (3) onto the right front load beam. 3. Install and tighten the two screws (4) that secure the mounting bracket to the load beam. Beginning with the rearward screw, tighten both screws to 8 Nm (71 in. lbs.). 4. Reinstall the hood ajar switch (2) into the mounting bracket. See: Hood Ajar Switch - Installation . Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm) > Component Information > Service and Repair > Hood Ajar Switch Bracket > Page 12541 Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm): Service and Repair Hood Ajar Switch Striker Removal STRIKER NOTE: The hood ajar switch striker is not intended for reuse. If the striker is removed from the hood inner reinforcement for any reason, it must be replaced. 1. Unlatch and open the hood. 2. Using a trim stick or another suitable wide flat-bladed tool, pry the rearward end of the hood ajar switch striker (2) away from the inner hood panel reinforcement (1) far enough to disengage the integral retainers from their mounting holes. 3. Remove the striker from the inner hood panel reinforcement and discard. Installation STRIKER NOTE: The hood ajar switch striker cap is not intended for reuse. If the striker cap is removed from the hood inner reinforcement for any reason, it must be replaced. 1. Position the new hood ajar switch striker (2) to the mounting holes in the inner hood panel reinforcement (1) over the hood ajar switch (3). 2. Using hand pressure, press the hood ajar switch striker upward into the mounting holes in the inner hood panel reinforcement until both integral retainers are fully engaged. 3. Close and latch the hood. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm) > Component Information > Service and Repair > Hood Ajar Switch Bracket > Page 12542 Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm): Service and Repair Hood Ajar Switch - Removal SWITCH 1. Unlatch and open the hood. 2. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. 3. From the top of the mounting bracket (3) on the right front load beam (6), squeeze the two hood ajar switch (2) latch tabs together and pull the switch upward. 4. Pull the hood ajar switch up through the hole in the mounting bracket far enough to access and disconnect the jumper wire harness connector (5) from the switch connector receptacle. 5. Remove the hood ajar switch from the mounting bracket. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm) > Component Information > Service and Repair > Hood Ajar Switch Bracket > Page 12543 Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm): Service and Repair Hood Ajar Switch - Installation SWITCH 1. Position the hood ajar switch (2) near the hole in the mounting bracket (3) on the right front load beam (6). 2. Route the jumper wire harness connector (5) through the switch mounting bracket and reconnect it to the switch connector receptacle. 3. From the top of the mounting bracket, press the switch downward into the mounting hole until the integral switch latch tabs lock it into place. 4. Reconnect the battery negative cable. 5. Close and latch the hood. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Module > Component Information > Locations Keyless Entry Module: Locations Component ID: 213 Component : MODULE-SENTRY KEY REMOTE ENTRY/WCM Connector: Name : MODULE-SENTRY KEY REMOTE ENTRY/WCM Color : BLACK # of pins : 8 Pin Circuit Description 1 G20 20VT/BR IGNITION SWITCH SENSE 2 D508 20WT/GY COM-LIN TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR LAN 3 F20 20PK/WT FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) 4 Z109 20BK/GY GROUND 5 A114 18GY/RD FUSED B(+) 6 D55 20WT/OR CAN B BUS (+) 7 D54 20WT CAN B BUS (-) 8-Component Location - 47 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 12548 Component Location - 41 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 12549 Component Location - 42 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 12550 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 12551 Keyless Entry Module: Diagrams Component ID: 213 Component : MODULE-SENTRY KEY REMOTE ENTRY/WCM Connector: Name : MODULE-SENTRY KEY REMOTE ENTRY/WCM Color : BLACK # of pins : 8 Pin Circuit Description 1 G20 20VT/BR IGNITION SWITCH SENSE 2 D508 20WT/GY COM-LIN TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR LAN 3 F20 20PK/WT FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) 4 Z109 20BK/GY GROUND 5 A114 18GY/RD FUSED B(+) 6 D55 20WT/OR CAN B BUS (+) 7 D54 20WT CAN B BUS (-) 8-Component Location - 47 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 12552 Component Location - 41 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 12553 Component Location - 42 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 12554 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Remote Keyless Entry Module Keyless Entry Module: Description and Operation Remote Keyless Entry Module Description DESCRIPTION When an RKE lock message is sent to the instrument cluster, the instrument cluster actuates the door locks, the interior lighting is turned off, the horn chirps (if this feature is enabled), the park lamps flash (if this feature is enabled) and, if the vehicle is so equipped, the Vehicle Theft Security System (VTSS) is armed. When an RKE unlock message is sent to the instrument cluster, the instrument cluster actuates the driver side front door (or all doors if this feature is enabled) unlock, the interior lighting is turned on and, if the vehicle is so equipped, the VTSS is disarmed. When an RKE panic message is sent to the instrument cluster, the instrument cluster actuates the driver side front door (or all doors if this feature is enabled) unlock, the interior lighting is turned on and, if the vehicle is so equipped, the VTSS is disarmed. The panic message will also cause the exterior lamps (including the headlights) to flash, and the horn to sound for about three minutes, or until a second panic message is sent to the instrument cluster. A vehicle speed of about 25.7 Km/h(15 mph) will also cancel the panic event. Operation OPERATION Whenever the vehicle battery power is interrupted, the Remote Keyless Module (RKE) Module will retain all vehicle access codes in its memory. When replacing or adding a key fob transmitter (maximum of 4) a scan tool is required to program the RKE Module to accept the new Vehicle Access Code if a customer owned transmitter is not available. If a functioning transmitter is available, See: Keyless Entry Transmitter/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Remote Keyless Entry Module > Page 12557 Keyless Entry Module: Description and Operation Sentry Key Remote Entry Module Description DESCRIPTION The Sentry Key REmote Entry Module (SKREEM) (1) is sometimes referred to as the Wireless Control Module (WCM). The SKREEM is the primary component of the Sentry Key Immobilizer System (SKIS). It is also the receiver for the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) system. The SKREEM is located on the right side of the steering column, near the ignition lock cylinder housing and is concealed beneath the steering column shrouds. The molded black plastic housing for the SKREEM has an integral molded plastic halo-like antenna ring (4) that extends from the bottom. When the SKREEM is properly installed on the steering column, the antenna ring is oriented around the circumference of the ignition lock cylinder housing. A single integral connector receptacle (3) is located just behind the antenna ring on the bottom of the SKREEM housing. An integral molded plastic mounting tab (2) on the rear corner of the SKREEM housing has a hole in the center through which a screw passes to secure the unit to the steering column. The SKREEM is connected to the vehicle electrical system through a single take out and connector of the instrument panel wire harness. Two SKREEM modules are used: one for vehicles equipped with RKE only, and one for vehicles equipped with RKE and SKIS. The SKREEM cannot be adjusted or repaired. If ineffective or damaged, the entire SKREEM unit must be replaced. Operation OPERATION The Sentry Key REmote Entry Module (SKREEM) (also known as the Wireless Control Module/WCM) contains a Radio Frequency (RF) transceiver and a microprocessor. The SKREEM transmits RF signals to, and receives RF signals from the Sentry Key transponder through a tuned antenna enclosed within the molded plastic antenna ring integral to the SKREEM housing. If this antenna ring is not mounted properly around the ignition lock cylinder housing, communication problems between the SKREEM and the transponder may arise. These communication problems will result in Sentry Key transponder-related faults. The SKREEM also serves as the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) RF receiver. See: Body and Frame/Locks/Power Locks/Description and Operation/Description . The SKREEM communicates over the Controller Area Network (CAN) data bus with the ElectroMechanical Instrument Cluster (EMIC) (also known as the Cab Compartment Node/CCN), the Powertrain Control Module (PCM)/Engine Control Module (ECM) or the diagnostic scan tool. The SKREEM and the PCM/ECM both use software that includes a rolling code algorithm strategy, which helps to reduce the possibility of unauthorized Sentry Key Immobilizer System (SKIS) disarming. The rolling code algorithm ensures security by preventing an override of the SKIS through the unauthorized substitution of the SKREEM or the PCM/ECM. However, the use of this strategy also means that replacement of either the SKREEM or the PCM/ECM units will require a system initialization procedure to restore system operation. The SKREEM retains in memory the ID numbers of any Sentry Key transponder that is programmed into it. A maximum of eight Sentry Key transponders can be programmed into the SKREEM. For added system security, each SKREEM is programmed with a unique Secret Key code. This code is stored in memory, sent over the CAN data bus to the PCM or ECM, and is encoded to the transponder of every Sentry Key that is programmed into the SKREEM. Therefore, the Secret Key code is a common element that is found in every component of the SKIS. Another security code called a PIN, is used to gain access to the SKREEM Secured Access Mode. The Secured Access Mode is required during service Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Remote Keyless Entry Module > Page 12558 to perform the SKIS initialization and Sentry Key transponder programming procedures. The SKREEM also stores the Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) in its memory, which it learns through a CAN data bus message from the PCM or ECM during SKIS initialization. In the event that a SKREEM replacement is required, the Secret Key code can be transferred to the new SKREEM from the PCM or ECM using a diagnostic scan tool and the SKIS initialization procedure. Proper completion of the SKIS initialization will allow the existing Sentry Keys to be programmed into the new SKREEM so that new keys will not be required. In the event that the original Secret Key code cannot be recovered, SKREEM replacement will also require new Sentry Keys. The diagnostic scan tool will alert the technician during the SKIS initialization procedure if new Sentry Keys are required. When the ignition switch is turned to the ON position, the SKREEM transmits an RF signal to excite the transponder in the ignition key. The SKREEM then waits for an RF signal response from the transponder. If the response received identifies the key as valid, the SKREEM sends an electronic valid key message to the PCM/ECM over the CAN bus. If the response received identifies the key as invalid or if no response is received from the key transponder, the SKREEM sends an invalid key message to the PCM/ECM. The PCM/ECM will enable or disable engine operation based upon the status of the SKREEM messages. It is important to note that the default condition in the PCM or ECM is an invalid key ; therefore, if no message is received from the SKREEM by the PCM or ECM, the engine will be disabled and the vehicle immobilized after two seconds of running. The SKREEM also sends security indicator request messages to the EMIC over the CAN data bus to tell the EMIC how to operate the security indicator. The security indicator request message from the SKREEM tells the EMIC to turn the indicator ON for about three seconds each time the ignition switch is turned to the ON position as a bulb test. After completion of the bulb test, the SKREEM sends security indicator request messages to the EMIC to turn the indicator OFF, turn the indicator ON, or to flash the indicator ON and OFF. If the security indicator flashes or stays ON solid after the bulb test, it signifies a SKIS fault. If the SKREEM detects a system malfunction or the SKIS has become ineffective, the security indicator will stay ON solid. If the SKREEM detects an invalid key or if a key transponder-related fault exists, the security indicator will flash. If the vehicle is equipped with the Customer Learn transponder programming feature, the SKREEM will also send messages to the EMIC to flash the security indicator whenever the Customer Learn programming mode is being utilized. . The SKIS performs a self-test each time the ignition switch is turned to the ON position, and will store fault information in the form of a Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) in SKREEM memory if a system malfunction is detected. The hard wired circuits of the SKREEM may be diagnosed using conventional diagnostic tools and procedures. Refer to the appropriate wiring information. However, conventional diagnostic methods will not prove conclusive in the diagnosis of the SKREEM or the electronic controls or communication between other modules and devices that provide some features of the SKIS. The most reliable, efficient, and accurate means to diagnose the SKREEM or the electronic controls and communication related to SKREEM operation requires the use of a diagnostic scan tool. Refer to the appropriate diagnostic information. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 12559 Keyless Entry Module: Testing and Inspection REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY MODULE The most reliable, efficient, and accurate means to diagnose the power lock system requires the use of a scan tool and the proper Diagnostic Procedures information. Refer to the appropriate wiring information. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Remote Keyless Entry Module Keyless Entry Module: Service and Repair Remote Keyless Entry Module Removal REMOVAL See: Sentry Key Remote Entry Module/Removal Installation INSTALLATION See: Sentry Key Remote Entry Module/Installation Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Remote Keyless Entry Module > Page 12562 Keyless Entry Module: Service and Repair Sentry Key Remote Entry Module Removal REMOVAL WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury on vehicles equipped with airbags, disable the Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, airbag, seat belt tensioner, impact sensor, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the SRS. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment. 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. 2. Remove the screw (2) that secures the tilt steering column knob (1) and remove it from the tilt actuator (3) on the left side of the column. 3. From below the steering column, remove the two outboard screws that secure the upper column shroud (1) to the lower shroud (3). 4. Using hand pressure, push inward on both sides of the upper shroud above the parting line of the lower shroud to release the snap features that secure the two shroud halves to each other. 5. Remove the upper shroud from the lower shroud and the steering column. 6. Remove the one center screw that secures the lower shroud to the steering column (4). 7. Remove the lower shroud from the steering column. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Remote Keyless Entry Module > Page 12563 8. Disconnect the wire harness connector (2) from the Sentry Key REmote Entry Module (SKREEM) (1). 9. Remove the screw (3) that secures the SKREEM (1) to the steering column (2). 10. Disengage the antenna ring from around the ignition lock cylinder housing and remove the SKREEM. Installation INSTALLATION WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury on vehicles equipped with airbags, disable the Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, airbag, seat belt tensioner, impact sensor, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the SRS. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Remote Keyless Entry Module > Page 12564 1. Position the Sentry Key REmote Entry Module (SKREEM) (1) onto the steering column (2) with the antenna ring oriented around the ignition lock cylinder housing. 2. Install and tighten the screw (3) that secures the SKREEM to the steering column housing. Tighten the screw to 2 Nm (20 in. lbs.). 3. Reconnect the wire harness connector (2) to the SKREEM (1). 4. Position the lower shroud (3) onto the steering column (4). 5. From below the steering column, install and tighten the one center screw that secures the lower shroud to the steering column. Tighten the screw to 2 Nm (20 in. lbs.). 6. Position the upper shroud (1) onto the steering column over the lower shroud. On vehicles equipped with an automatic transmission, be certain to engage the gearshift lever gap hider into the opening in the right side of both shroud halves. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Remote Keyless Entry Module > Page 12565 7. Align the snap features on the upper shroud with the receptacles in the lower shroud and apply hand pressure to snap them together. 8. Install and tighten the two outboard screws that secure the upper shroud to the lower shroud. Tighten the screws to 2 Nm (20 in. lbs.). 9. Position the tilt steering column knob (1) onto the tilt adjuster actuator (3) on the left side of the steering column, then install and tighten the screw (2) to secure the knob to the actuator. Tighten the screw to 2 Nm (20 in. lbs.). 10. Reconnect the battery negative cable. NOTE: On vehicles equipped with the optional Sentry Key Immobilizer System (SKIS) if the SKREEM is replaced with a new unit, a diagnostic scan tool MUST be used to initialize the new SKREEM and to program at least two Sentry Key transponders before the vehicle can be operated. See: Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless Starting System > Keyless Start Antenna > Component Information > Description and Operation Keyless Start Antenna: Description and Operation DESCRIPTION The Remote Start Antenna Module Assembly consists of an electrical connection to the WCM/SKREEM (1), a length of coax cable (2), two mounting clips (3) and (4), and a control module/antenna (5). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless Starting System > Keyless Start Antenna > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Keyless Start Antenna: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL The Remote Start Antenna Module Assembly consists of an electrical connection to the WCM/SKREEM (1), a length of coax cable (2), two mounting clips (3) and (4), and a control module/antenna (5). The control module (1) is located behind the instrument panel cluster. The module electrical connector plugs into the WCM/SKREEM at the right side of the steering column. 1. Disconnect and isolate negative battery cable. 2. Remove steering column trim panel (knee blocker). 3. Remove steering column shrouds. 4. Remove IP cluster bezel. 5. Remove IP cluster and its three connectors. 6. Remove two module mounting screws (2) from module (1). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless Starting System > Keyless Start Antenna > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 12572 7. Using a pair of long needle hose pliers, disengage coax cable retainer clip (2) from IP. 8. Disconnect coax cable electrical connector (1) at WCM/SKREEM (2). 9. Remove remote module assembly. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless Starting System > Keyless Start Antenna > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 12573 Keyless Start Antenna: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION The Remote Start Antenna Module Assembly consists of an electrical connection to the WCM/SKREEM (1), a length of coax cable (2), two mounting clips (3) and (4), and a control module/antenna (5). 1. Connect coax cable electrical connector (1) to WCM/SKREEM module (2). Route coax cable and install cable clip (2) to IP. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless Starting System > Keyless Start Antenna > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 12574 2. Position module (1) and install two module mounting screws (2). 3. Install IP cluster and its three connectors. 4. Install IP cluster bezel. 5. Install steering column trim panel (knee blocker). 6. Install steering column shrouds. 7. Connect negative battery cable. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Keyless Entry Transmitter Battery > Component Information > Service and Repair Keyless Entry Transmitter Battery: Service and Repair STANDARD PROCEDURE - RKE TRANSMITTER BATTERIES NOTE: Do not disturb the metal terminal near the batteries. Avoid touching the new batteries. Skin oils may cause battery deterioration. If batteries are touched, clean with rubbing alcohol. The Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter case snaps open and shut for battery access. To replace the RKE transmitter batteries: 1. Using a thin coin, gently pry at the notch in the center seam of the RKE transmitter case halves near the key ring until the two halves unsnap. Be careful not to damage the rubber gasket when separating the case halves. 2. Lift the back half of the transmitter case off of the RKE transmitter. 3. Remove the two batteries from the RKE transmitter. 4. Replace the two batteries with new 3V lithium 2016 cell.Install the batteries with the positive terminal up. Reference the "+ SIDE UP" on the inside of the bottom half of the transmitter case. 5. Align the two RKE transmitter case halves with each other, and squeeze them firmly and evenly together until they snap back into place.Test transmitter operation. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Security Lamp/Indicator > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Security Lamp/Indicator: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION A security indicator is standard equipment on all instrument clusters. However, on vehicles not equipped with the optional Vehicle Theft Security System (VTSS), this indicator is electronically disabled. This indicator is located in the lower right quadrant of the instrument cluster, between the speedometer and the coolant temperature gauge. The security indicator consists of a small round cutout in the opaque layer of the instrument cluster overlay. The dark outer layer of the overlay prevents the indicator from being clearly visible when it is not illuminated. A red Light Emitting Diode (LED) behind the cutout in the opaque layer of the overlay causes the indicator to appear in red through the translucent outer layer of the overlay when it is illuminated from behind by the LED, which is soldered onto the instrument cluster electronic circuit board. The security indicator is serviced as a unit with the instrument cluster. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Security Lamp/Indicator > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 12583 Security Lamp/Indicator: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The security indicator gives an indication to the vehicle operator when the Vehicle Theft Security System (VTSS) is arming or is armed. On vehicles equipped with the Sentry Key Immobilizer System (SKIS), the security indicator also gives an indication to the vehicle operator of the status of the SKIS. This indicator is controlled by a transistor on the instrument cluster circuit board based upon cluster programming, hard wired inputs to the cluster from the various security system components, and electronic messages received by the cluster from the Sentry Key REmote Entry Module (SKREEM) (also known as the Wireless Control Module/WCM) over the Controller Area Network (CAN) data bus. The security indicator Light Emitting Diode (LED) is completely controlled by the instrument cluster logic circuit, and that logic will allow this indicator to operate whenever the instrument cluster receives a battery current input on the fused B(+) circuit. Therefore, the LED can be illuminated regardless of the ignition switch position. The LED only illuminates when it is provided a path to ground by the instrument cluster transistor. Depending upon the programmed condition the indicator can be illuminated solid, flashed at a slow rate (0.5 Hertz, 12.5 percent duty cycle), or flashed at a fast rate (1 Hertz, 50 percent duty cycle). The instrument cluster will turn ON the security indicator for the following reasons: - Bulb Test - Each time the ignition switch is turned to the ON position the security indicator illuminates for about two seconds as a bulb test. The entire bulb test is a function of the SKREEM. VTSS Indication - During the 16 second VTSS arming function, the cluster will flash the security indicator ON and OFF repeatedly at a steady, fast rate to indicate that the VTSS is in the process of arming. Following successful VTSS arming, the cluster flashes the security indicator ON and OFF continuously at a slower rate to indicate that the VTSS is armed. The security indicator continues flashing at the slower rate until the VTSS is disarmed or triggered. If the VTSS has alarmed and rearmed, the cluster will flash the security indicator at a steady, slow rate for about 30 seconds after the VTSS is disarmed. - SKIS Indicator Lamp-On Message - Each time the cluster receives an electronic SKIS indicator lamp-ON message from the SKREEM, the security indicator will be illuminated. The indicator can be flashed ON and OFF, or illuminated solid, as dictated by the SKREEM message. The indicator remains illuminated solid or continues to flash until the cluster receives a lamp-OFF message from the SKREEM, or until the ignition switch is turned to the OFF position, whichever occurs first. For more information on the SKIS and the security indicator control parameters, See: Description and Operation/Vehicle Theft Security - Operation . - Communication Error - If the cluster receives no lamp-ON or lamp-OFF messages from the SKREEM for 10 consecutive message cycles, the security indicator is illuminated by the instrument cluster. The indicator remains controlled and illuminated by the cluster until a valid lamp-ON or lamp-OFF message is received from the SKREEM. - Actuator Test - Each time the instrument cluster is put through the actuator test, the security indicator will be turned ON, then OFF again during the bulb check portion of the test to confirm the functionality of the LED and the cluster control circuitry. The instrument cluster circuitry controls the security indicator whenever the ignition switch is in the OFF position and the VTSS is arming, armed, or alarming. Whenever the ignition switch is in the ON or START positions, the SKREEM performs a self-test to decide whether the SKIS is in good operating condition and whether a valid key is present in the ignition lock cylinder. The SKREEM then sends the proper lamp-ON or lamp-OFF message to the ElectroMechanical Instrument Cluster (EMIC) (also known as the Cab Compartment Node/CCN). If the cluster flashes the security indicator upon ignition ON, or turns ON the security indicator solid after the bulb test, it indicates that a SKIS malfunction has occurred or that the SKIS is ineffective. For proper diagnosis of the VTSS, the SKIS, the SKREEM, the EMIC, the CAN data bus or the electronic communication related to security indicator operation a diagnostic scan tool is required. Refer to the appropriate diagnostic information. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Cellular Phone: > 08-028-08 > Sep > 08 > Cell Phone - Voice Recognition Screen Locks Up Cellular Phone: Customer Interest Cell Phone - Voice Recognition Screen Locks Up NUMBER: 08-028-08 GROUP: Electrical DATE: September 18, 2008 SUBJECT: Voice Recognition Screen Lock-up on REN or REZ Radio Equipped With Hands-Free Communications OVERVIEW: This bulletin involves replacing the Hands Free Module (HFM). MODELS: 2008 (DR/DH/DC/D1) Ram Truck (1500/2500/3500) 2008 (HB) Durango 2008 (HG) Aspen 2008 (JS) Avenger/Sebring (U.S. and International Markets) 2008 (KA) Nitro (U.S. and International Markets) 2008 (KK) Liberty (U.S. and International Markets) 2008 (LX) 300C/Magnum/Charger 2008 (LE) 300/ 300C Touring (International Markets) 2008 (LC) Challenger 2008 (RI) Town & Country/Grand Caravan/Grand Voyager (U.S. and International Markets) 2008 (WK) Grand Cherokee 2008 (WH) Grand Cherokee (International Markets) 2008 (XK) Commander 2008 (XH) Commander (International Markets) NOTE: This bulletin applies to vehicles equipped with radio sales codes REN or REZ and Hands4ree Communications Sales Codes RSP or RSQ built before the following dates: ^ (HB/HG) built before November 13, 2007 (MDH 1113XX) ^ (LX/LC) built before February 28, 2008 (MDH 0228XX) ^ (DR) built before January 26, 2008 (MDH 0126XX) ^ (WK/XK) built before March 2, 2008 (MDH 0302XX) ^ (LE, WH/XH, DH, DC, D1) built before November 6, 2007 (MDH 1106XX) ^ (JS) built before May 6, 2008 (MDH 0506XX) ^ (RT) built before December 13, 2007 (MDH 1213XX) ^ (KK/KA) built before February 26, 2008 (MDH 0226XX) Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Cellular Phone: > 08-028-08 > Sep > 08 > Cell Phone - Voice Recognition Screen Locks Up > Page 12592 SYMPTOM/CONDITION: Customers may experience one of the following conditions: a. A "lock up condition of the radio screen when the Voice Recognition (VR) button is pressed b. When the VR button is pressed, the radio display changes to the phone screen and there is a lack of the "Ready" audio prompt. If the above symptom/condition is experienced, perform the following diagnostic procedure. DIAGNOSIS: 1. Turn ignition key on. 2. Using a Scan Tool (StarSCAN(R)) read and identify the current HFM part number in the vehicle. 3. Is the HFM part number 05064560AC, 05064448AE, 05064561AC, 05064482AE, 05064483AE or greater? a. Yes >> This bulletin does not apply, further diagnosis is required. b. No >> perform the repair procedure. PARTS REQUIRED: REPAIR PROCEDURE: 1. Replace the Hands Free Module. Refer to the service procedure available on DealerCONNECT/TechCONNECT, Group 8 Electrical > 8T Navigation and Telecommunications> MODULE, Hands free remove and Installation procedures. POLICY: Reimbursable within the provisions of the warranty. TIME ALLOWANCE: Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Cellular Phone: > 08-028-08 > Sep > 08 > Cell Phone - Voice Recognition Screen Locks Up > Page 12593 FAILURE CODE: Disclaimer: This bulletin is supplied as technical information only and is not an authorization for repair. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Cellular Phone: > 08-027-08 > Aug > 08 > Cell Phone - UConnect and Voice Recognition Inoperative Cellular Phone: Customer Interest Cell Phone - UConnect and Voice Recognition Inoperative NUMBER: 08-027-08 GROUP: Electrical DATE: August 29, 2008 SUBJECT: UConnect and Voice Recognition Inoperative OVERVIEW: This bulletin involves flashing the Hands Free Module (HFM). MODELS: 2008 (DR/DH/DC/D1) Ram Truck (1500/2500/3500) 2008 (HB) Durango 2008 (HG) Aspen 2008 (JS) Avenger/Sebring (U.S. and International Markets) 2008 (KA) Nitro (U.S. and International Markets) 2008 (KK) Liberty (U.S. and International Markets) 2008 (LX) 300C/Magnum/Charger 2008 (LE) 300/ 300C Touring (International Markets) 2008 (LC) Challenger 2008 (MK49) Compass 2008 (MK74) Patriot 2008 (PM) Caliber 2009 (PT) Chrysler PT Cruiser 2008 (RI) Town & Country/Grand Caravan/Grand Voyager (U.S. and International Markets) 2008 (WK) Grand Cherokee 2008 (WH) Grand Cherokee (International Markets) 2008 (XK) Commander 2008 (XH) Commander (International Markets) NOTE: This bulletin applies to vehicles equipped with Hands-free Communications Sales Codes RSP or RSQ built before the following dates: ^ (DR) built before January 26, 2008 (MDH 0126XX) ^ (HB/HG) built before November 13, 2007 (MDH 1113XX) ^ (LX/LC) built before February 28, 2008 (MDH 0228XX) ^ (WK/XK) built before March 2, 2008 (MDH 0302XX) ^ (LE, WH/XH, DH, DC, D1) built before November 6, 2007 (MDH 1106XX) Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Cellular Phone: > 08-027-08 > Aug > 08 > Cell Phone - UConnect and Voice Recognition Inoperative > Page 12598 ^ (JS) built before May 6, 2008 (MDH 0506XX) ^ (RT) built before December 13, 2007 (MDH 1213XX) ^ (KK/KA) built before February 26, 2008 (MDH 0226XX) ^ (PM/MK) built before December 15, 2007 (MDH 1215XX) ^ (PT) built before November 22, 2007 (MDH 1123XX) SYMPTOM/CONDITION: Customers may experience the following conditions: a. A complete loss of UConnect operation. b. A complete loss of Voice Recognition functionality NOTE: When this condition is present, the HFM will also show as non-responding to part number or diagnostic code request on the bus when using the StarSCAN. The HFM lockup condition can be recovered by removing and replacing the IOD fuse or disconnecting and reconnecting the HFM to the vehicle. The lockup condition may reoccur after a period of time has elapsed. DIAGNOSIS: 1. Does the vehicle exhibit both of the above symptom/conditions? a. No >> This bulletin does not apply, further diagnosis is required. b. YES >> perform the repair procedure. SPECIAL TOOLS/EQUIPMENT REQUIRED: FLASH REPAIR PROCEDURE - USING THE INTERNET TO RETRIEVE THE FLASH FILE: NOTE: Before performing this Repair Procedure, the operating software in the StarSCAN(R); must be programmed with software release level 9.02 or higher. The software release level is visible in the blue header at the top of the StarSCAN(R) screen. NOTE: StarMOBILE standalone or StarMOBILE desktop client CAN NOT be used to perform this procedure. NOTE: The StarSCAN(R) FLASH FILES FOR THIS BULLETIN MUST BE RETRIEVED FROM THE INTERNET. NOTE: The StarSCAN(R) diagnostic scan tool fully supports Internet connectivity. However, to take advantage of this feature you must first configure the Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Cellular Phone: > 08-027-08 > Aug > 08 > Cell Phone - UConnect and Voice Recognition Inoperative > Page 12599 StarSCAN(R) for your dealership's network. Make sure the StarSCAN(R) is configured to the dealership's network before proceeding. For instruction on setting up your StarSCAN(R) for the dealer's network refer to either: "DealerCONNECT > Service > StarSCAN and StarMOBILE tools > Online Documentation", or refer to the StarSCAN(R) Quick Start Networking Guide. The StarSCAN(R) Quick Start Networking Guide is also available on the website under the "Download Center". NOTE: If this flash process is interrupted/aborted, the flash should be restarted. Follow the Abort / Recovery procedures listed below. 1. Remove the fuse for the HFM for 15 seconds and reinstall. This is necessary to restore the HFM communications to the bus. 2. Install a battery charger and verify that the charging rate provides approximately 13.5 volts. Set the battery charger to continuous charge. Do not allow the charger to time out during the flash process. Remove the charger from the battery when the flash process is complete. 3. Connect the CH9410 StarSCAN(R) ethernet cable to the StarSCAN(R) and the dealer's network drop. 4. Connect the CH9404D StarSCAN(R) vehicle cable to the StarSCAN(R) and the vehicle data link connector (DLC). 5. Connect the 9097B, Bluetooth UConnect Flash Adapter, to the StarSCAN(R). 6. Power ON the StarSCAN(R). 7. Select "ECU View". 8. Touch the screen to HFM in the list of modules. 9. Select "More Options 10. Select "ECU Flash". 11. Record the "Resident flash file for Part Number", displayed on the "Flash HFM" screen, for later reference. 12. Select "Browse for New File". Follow the on screen instructions. 13. Highlight the listed HFM calibration. 14. Select "Download to StarSCAN®. 15. Select "Close after the download is complete, then select "Back". 16. Select "Update Controller". Follow the on screen instructions. 17. When the HFM update is complete, select "OK". 18. Verify that the Resident flash file for part number changed at the top of the "Flash HFM" screen. NOTE: Due to the HFM programming procedure, a DTC may be set in other modules (TCM, BCM, SKREEM, etc.) within the vehicle, if so equipped. Some DTC's may cause the MIL to illuminate. From the "Home" screen select "System View". Then select "All DTCs". Press "Clear All Stored DTCs" if there are any DTCs shown on the list. ABORT / RECOVERY (IF REQUIRED): 1. Turn the StarSCAN "OFF". 2. Cycle Ignition "OFF and back "ON". 3. Turn the StarSCAN "ON~. 4. From Home Screen, select "ECU View". 5. Select "HFM". 6. Select "More Options 7. Select "ECU Flash". Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Cellular Phone: > 08-027-08 > Aug > 08 > Cell Phone - UConnect and Voice Recognition Inoperative > Page 12600 8. Highlight the flash file and select "Update Controller". Follow remaining "On screen Prompts". NOTE: If the flash update fails after 3 attempts or you are unable to read the part number following the update completion, replace the Hands Free Module (HFM). POLICY: Reimbursable within the provisions of the warranty. TIME ALLOWANCE: FAILURE CODE: Disclaimer: This bulletin is supplied as technical information only and is not an authorization for repair. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Cellular Phone: > 08-028-08 > Sep > 08 > Cell Phone - Voice Recognition Screen Locks Up Cellular Phone: All Technical Service Bulletins Cell Phone - Voice Recognition Screen Locks Up NUMBER: 08-028-08 GROUP: Electrical DATE: September 18, 2008 SUBJECT: Voice Recognition Screen Lock-up on REN or REZ Radio Equipped With Hands-Free Communications OVERVIEW: This bulletin involves replacing the Hands Free Module (HFM). MODELS: 2008 (DR/DH/DC/D1) Ram Truck (1500/2500/3500) 2008 (HB) Durango 2008 (HG) Aspen 2008 (JS) Avenger/Sebring (U.S. and International Markets) 2008 (KA) Nitro (U.S. and International Markets) 2008 (KK) Liberty (U.S. and International Markets) 2008 (LX) 300C/Magnum/Charger 2008 (LE) 300/ 300C Touring (International Markets) 2008 (LC) Challenger 2008 (RI) Town & Country/Grand Caravan/Grand Voyager (U.S. and International Markets) 2008 (WK) Grand Cherokee 2008 (WH) Grand Cherokee (International Markets) 2008 (XK) Commander 2008 (XH) Commander (International Markets) NOTE: This bulletin applies to vehicles equipped with radio sales codes REN or REZ and Hands4ree Communications Sales Codes RSP or RSQ built before the following dates: ^ (HB/HG) built before November 13, 2007 (MDH 1113XX) ^ (LX/LC) built before February 28, 2008 (MDH 0228XX) ^ (DR) built before January 26, 2008 (MDH 0126XX) ^ (WK/XK) built before March 2, 2008 (MDH 0302XX) ^ (LE, WH/XH, DH, DC, D1) built before November 6, 2007 (MDH 1106XX) ^ (JS) built before May 6, 2008 (MDH 0506XX) ^ (RT) built before December 13, 2007 (MDH 1213XX) ^ (KK/KA) built before February 26, 2008 (MDH 0226XX) Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Cellular Phone: > 08-028-08 > Sep > 08 > Cell Phone - Voice Recognition Screen Locks Up > Page 12606 SYMPTOM/CONDITION: Customers may experience one of the following conditions: a. A "lock up condition of the radio screen when the Voice Recognition (VR) button is pressed b. When the VR button is pressed, the radio display changes to the phone screen and there is a lack of the "Ready" audio prompt. If the above symptom/condition is experienced, perform the following diagnostic procedure. DIAGNOSIS: 1. Turn ignition key on. 2. Using a Scan Tool (StarSCAN(R)) read and identify the current HFM part number in the vehicle. 3. Is the HFM part number 05064560AC, 05064448AE, 05064561AC, 05064482AE, 05064483AE or greater? a. Yes >> This bulletin does not apply, further diagnosis is required. b. No >> perform the repair procedure. PARTS REQUIRED: REPAIR PROCEDURE: 1. Replace the Hands Free Module. Refer to the service procedure available on DealerCONNECT/TechCONNECT, Group 8 Electrical > 8T Navigation and Telecommunications> MODULE, Hands free remove and Installation procedures. POLICY: Reimbursable within the provisions of the warranty. TIME ALLOWANCE: Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Cellular Phone: > 08-028-08 > Sep > 08 > Cell Phone - Voice Recognition Screen Locks Up > Page 12607 FAILURE CODE: Disclaimer: This bulletin is supplied as technical information only and is not an authorization for repair. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Cellular Phone: > 08-027-08 > Aug > 08 > Cell Phone - UConnect and Voice Recognition Inoperative Cellular Phone: All Technical Service Bulletins Cell Phone - UConnect and Voice Recognition Inoperative NUMBER: 08-027-08 GROUP: Electrical DATE: August 29, 2008 SUBJECT: UConnect and Voice Recognition Inoperative OVERVIEW: This bulletin involves flashing the Hands Free Module (HFM). MODELS: 2008 (DR/DH/DC/D1) Ram Truck (1500/2500/3500) 2008 (HB) Durango 2008 (HG) Aspen 2008 (JS) Avenger/Sebring (U.S. and International Markets) 2008 (KA) Nitro (U.S. and International Markets) 2008 (KK) Liberty (U.S. and International Markets) 2008 (LX) 300C/Magnum/Charger 2008 (LE) 300/ 300C Touring (International Markets) 2008 (LC) Challenger 2008 (MK49) Compass 2008 (MK74) Patriot 2008 (PM) Caliber 2009 (PT) Chrysler PT Cruiser 2008 (RI) Town & Country/Grand Caravan/Grand Voyager (U.S. and International Markets) 2008 (WK) Grand Cherokee 2008 (WH) Grand Cherokee (International Markets) 2008 (XK) Commander 2008 (XH) Commander (International Markets) NOTE: This bulletin applies to vehicles equipped with Hands-free Communications Sales Codes RSP or RSQ built before the following dates: ^ (DR) built before January 26, 2008 (MDH 0126XX) ^ (HB/HG) built before November 13, 2007 (MDH 1113XX) ^ (LX/LC) built before February 28, 2008 (MDH 0228XX) ^ (WK/XK) built before March 2, 2008 (MDH 0302XX) ^ (LE, WH/XH, DH, DC, D1) built before November 6, 2007 (MDH 1106XX) Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Cellular Phone: > 08-027-08 > Aug > 08 > Cell Phone - UConnect and Voice Recognition Inoperative > Page 12612 ^ (JS) built before May 6, 2008 (MDH 0506XX) ^ (RT) built before December 13, 2007 (MDH 1213XX) ^ (KK/KA) built before February 26, 2008 (MDH 0226XX) ^ (PM/MK) built before December 15, 2007 (MDH 1215XX) ^ (PT) built before November 22, 2007 (MDH 1123XX) SYMPTOM/CONDITION: Customers may experience the following conditions: a. A complete loss of UConnect operation. b. A complete loss of Voice Recognition functionality NOTE: When this condition is present, the HFM will also show as non-responding to part number or diagnostic code request on the bus when using the StarSCAN. The HFM lockup condition can be recovered by removing and replacing the IOD fuse or disconnecting and reconnecting the HFM to the vehicle. The lockup condition may reoccur after a period of time has elapsed. DIAGNOSIS: 1. Does the vehicle exhibit both of the above symptom/conditions? a. No >> This bulletin does not apply, further diagnosis is required. b. YES >> perform the repair procedure. SPECIAL TOOLS/EQUIPMENT REQUIRED: FLASH REPAIR PROCEDURE - USING THE INTERNET TO RETRIEVE THE FLASH FILE: NOTE: Before performing this Repair Procedure, the operating software in the StarSCAN(R); must be programmed with software release level 9.02 or higher. The software release level is visible in the blue header at the top of the StarSCAN(R) screen. NOTE: StarMOBILE standalone or StarMOBILE desktop client CAN NOT be used to perform this procedure. NOTE: The StarSCAN(R) FLASH FILES FOR THIS BULLETIN MUST BE RETRIEVED FROM THE INTERNET. NOTE: The StarSCAN(R) diagnostic scan tool fully supports Internet connectivity. However, to take advantage of this feature you must first configure the Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Cellular Phone: > 08-027-08 > Aug > 08 > Cell Phone - UConnect and Voice Recognition Inoperative > Page 12613 StarSCAN(R) for your dealership's network. Make sure the StarSCAN(R) is configured to the dealership's network before proceeding. For instruction on setting up your StarSCAN(R) for the dealer's network refer to either: "DealerCONNECT > Service > StarSCAN and StarMOBILE tools > Online Documentation", or refer to the StarSCAN(R) Quick Start Networking Guide. The StarSCAN(R) Quick Start Networking Guide is also available on the website under the "Download Center". NOTE: If this flash process is interrupted/aborted, the flash should be restarted. Follow the Abort / Recovery procedures listed below. 1. Remove the fuse for the HFM for 15 seconds and reinstall. This is necessary to restore the HFM communications to the bus. 2. Install a battery charger and verify that the charging rate provides approximately 13.5 volts. Set the battery charger to continuous charge. Do not allow the charger to time out during the flash process. Remove the charger from the battery when the flash process is complete. 3. Connect the CH9410 StarSCAN(R) ethernet cable to the StarSCAN(R) and the dealer's network drop. 4. Connect the CH9404D StarSCAN(R) vehicle cable to the StarSCAN(R) and the vehicle data link connector (DLC). 5. Connect the 9097B, Bluetooth UConnect Flash Adapter, to the StarSCAN(R). 6. Power ON the StarSCAN(R). 7. Select "ECU View". 8. Touch the screen to HFM in the list of modules. 9. Select "More Options 10. Select "ECU Flash". 11. Record the "Resident flash file for Part Number", displayed on the "Flash HFM" screen, for later reference. 12. Select "Browse for New File". Follow the on screen instructions. 13. Highlight the listed HFM calibration. 14. Select "Download to StarSCAN®. 15. Select "Close after the download is complete, then select "Back". 16. Select "Update Controller". Follow the on screen instructions. 17. When the HFM update is complete, select "OK". 18. Verify that the Resident flash file for part number changed at the top of the "Flash HFM" screen. NOTE: Due to the HFM programming procedure, a DTC may be set in other modules (TCM, BCM, SKREEM, etc.) within the vehicle, if so equipped. Some DTC's may cause the MIL to illuminate. From the "Home" screen select "System View". Then select "All DTCs". Press "Clear All Stored DTCs" if there are any DTCs shown on the list. ABORT / RECOVERY (IF REQUIRED): 1. Turn the StarSCAN "OFF". 2. Cycle Ignition "OFF and back "ON". 3. Turn the StarSCAN "ON~. 4. From Home Screen, select "ECU View". 5. Select "HFM". 6. Select "More Options 7. Select "ECU Flash". Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Cellular Phone: > 08-027-08 > Aug > 08 > Cell Phone - UConnect and Voice Recognition Inoperative > Page 12614 8. Highlight the flash file and select "Update Controller". Follow remaining "On screen Prompts". NOTE: If the flash update fails after 3 attempts or you are unable to read the part number following the update completion, replace the Hands Free Module (HFM). POLICY: Reimbursable within the provisions of the warranty. TIME ALLOWANCE: FAILURE CODE: Disclaimer: This bulletin is supplied as technical information only and is not an authorization for repair. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Cellular Phone: Diagram Information and Instructions Warnings WARNINGS - GENERAL WARNINGS provide information to prevent personal injury and vehicle damage. Below is a list of general warnings that should be followed any time a vehicle is being serviced. WARNING: Always wear safety glasses for eye protection. WARNING: Use safety stands anytime a procedure requires being under a vehicle. WARNING: Be sure that the ignition switch always is in the off position, unless the procedure requires it to be on. WARNING: Set the parking brake when working on any vehicle. An automatic transmission should be in park. A manual transmission should be in neutral. WARNING: Operate the engine only in a well-ventilated area. WARNING: Keep away from moving parts when the engine is running, especially the fan and belts. WARNING: To prevent serious burns, avoid contact with hot parts such as the radiator, exhaust manifold(s), tail pipe, catalytic converter and muffler. WARNING: Do not allow flame or sparks near the battery. Gases are always present in and around the battery. WARNING: Always remove rings, watches, loose hanging jewelry and avoid loose clothing. How to Use Wiring Diagrams DESCRIPTION - HOW TO USE WIRING DIAGRAMS DaimlerChrysler Corporation wiring diagrams are designed to provide information regarding the vehicles wiring content. In order to effectively use the wiring diagrams to diagnose and repair DaimlerChrysler Corporation vehicles, it is important to understand all of their features and characteristics. Diagrams are arranged such that the power (B+) side of the circuit is placed near the top of the page, and the ground (B-) side of the circuit is placed near the bottom of the page. All switches, components, and modules are shown in the at rest position with the doors closed and the key removed from the ignition. Components are shown two ways. A solid line around a component indicates that the component is complete. A dashed line around the component indicates that the component is being shown is not complete. Incomplete components have a reference number to indicate the page where the component is shown complete. It is important to realize that no attempt is made on the diagrams to represent components and wiring as they appear on the vehicle. For example, a short piece of wire is treated the same as a long one. In addition, switches and other components are shown as simply as possible, with regard to function only. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12617 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12618 SYMBOLS International symbols are used throughout the wiring diagrams. These symbols are consistent with those being used around the world. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12619 TERMINOLOGY This is a list of terms and definitions used in the wiring diagrams. LHD - Left Hand Drive Vehicles RHD - Right Hand Drive Vehicles ATX - Automatic Transmissions-Front Wheel Drive MTX Manual Transmissions-Front Wheel Drive Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12620 AT - Automatic Transmissions-Rear Wheel Drive MT - Manual Transmissions-Rear Wheel Drive SOHC - Single Over Head Cam Engine DOHC - Double Over Head Cam Engine Export - Vehicles Built For Sale In Markets Other Than North America Except Export - Vehicles Built For Sale In North America Circuit Functions DESCRIPTION - CIRCUIT FUNCTIONS All circuits in the diagrams use an alpha/numeric code to identify the wire and it's function. To identify which circuit code applies to a system, refer to the Circuit Identification Code Chart. This chart shows the main circuits only and does not show the secondary codes that may apply to some models. Circuit Information DESCRIPTION - CIRCUIT INFORMATION Each wire shown in the diagrams contains a code which identifies the main circuit, a specific part of the main circuit, gage of wire, and color. An example would be A 2 18 LB/YL. This is a Battery Feed circuit, level two, eighteen gauge, light blue with a yellow tracer. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12621 Connector, Ground and Splice Information DESCRIPTION - CONNECTOR, GROUND AND SPLICE INFORMATION CAUTION: Not all connectors are serviced. Some connectors are serviced only with a harness. A typical example might be the Supplemental Restraint System connectors. Always check parts availability before attempting a repair. IDENTIFICATION In-line connectors are identified by a number, as follows: - In-line connectors located in the engine compartment are C100 series numbers. - In-line connectors located in the instrument panel area are C200 series numbers. - In-line connectors located in the body are C300 series numbers. - Jumper harness connectors are C400 series numbers. - Grounds and ground connectors are identified with a "G" and follow the same series numbering as the in-line connectors. - Splices are identified with an "S" and follow the same series numbering as the in-line connectors. In addition, S001-S099 numbers are located in the engine compartment. - Component connectors are identified by the component name instead of a number. Multiple connectors on a component use a C1, C2, etc. identifier. LOCATIONS Vehicle/Locations contains the master connector/ground/splice location index charts with hyperlinks to the applicable location illustrations. The illustrations contain the connector name (or number)/ground number/splice number and component identification. The abbreviation T/O is used in the component location section to indicate a point in which the wiring harness branches out to a component. The abbreviation N/S means Not Shown in the illustrations Section Identification and Information DESCRIPTION - SECTION IDENTIFICATION AND INFORMATION The wiring diagrams are grouped into individual sections. If a component is most likely found in a particular group, it will be shown complete (all wires, Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12622 connectors, and pins) within that group. For example, the Auto Shutdown Relay is most likely to be found in Powertrain Management, so it is shown there complete. It can, however, be shown partially in another group if it contains some associated wiring. Splice diagrams show the entire splice and provide references to other sections the splices serves. Splice Information only contains splice diagrams that are not shown in their entirety somewhere else in the wiring diagrams. Connector Pin-Outs shows each connector and the circuits involved with that connector. The connectors are identified using the name/number on the diagram pages. Removal REMOVAL 1. Disconnect battery. 2. Release Connector Lock (2). 3. Disconnect the connector (3) being repaired from its mating half/component. 4. Remove the dress cover (if applicable) (1). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12623 5. Release the Secondary Terminal Lock, if required (1). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12624 6. Position the connector locking finger away from the terminal using the proper special tool. Pull on the wire to remove the terminal from the connector. Installation Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12625 INSTALLATION 1. Insert the removed terminal in the same cavity on the repair connector. 2. Repeat steps for each terminal in the connector, being sure that all wires are inserted into the proper cavities. For additional connector pin-out identification, refer to the wiring diagrams. 3. When the connector is re-assembled, the secondary terminal lock must be placed in the locked position to prevent terminal push out. 4. Replace dress cover (if applicable). 5. Connect connector to its mating half/component. 6. Connect battery and test all affected systems. Removal REMOVAL 1. Disconnect the battery. 2. Locate the diode in the harness, and remove the protective covering. 3. Remove the diode from the harness, pay attention to the current flow direction (1) (2) (3). Installation INSTALLATION 1. Remove the insulation from the wires in the harness. Only remove enough insulation to solder in the new diode. 2. Install the new diode in the harness, making sure current flow is correct. If necessary, refer to the appropriate wiring diagram for current flow. 3. Solder the connection together using rosin core type solder only. Do not use acid core solder. 4. Tape the diode to the harness using electrical tape. Make sure the diode is completely sealed from the elements. 5. Re-connect the battery and test affected systems. Removal REMOVAL 1. Follow steps for removing terminals described in the connector removal section. 2. Cut the wire 6 inches from the back of the connector. Installation INSTALLATION 1. Select a wire from the terminal repair kit that best matches the color and gage of the wire being repaired. 2. Cut the repair wire to the proper length and remove one-half (1/2) inch of insulation. 3. Splice the repair wire to the wire harness (see wire splicing procedure). See: Service Procedures/Wire Splicing 4. Insert the repaired wire into the connector. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12626 5. Install the connector locking wedge, if required, and reconnect the connector to its mating half/component. 6. Re-tape the wire harness starting at 1-1/2 inches behind the connector and 2 inches past the repair. 7. Connect battery and test all affected systems. Wire Splicing STANDARD PROCEDURE - WIRE SPLICING When splicing a wire, it is important that the correct gage be used as shown in the wiring diagrams. 1. Remove one-half (1/2) inch of insulation from each wire that needs to be spliced. 2. Place a piece of adhesive lined heat shrink tubing on one side of the wire. Make sure the tubing will be long enough to cover and seal the entire repair area. 3. Place the strands of wire overlapping each other inside of the splice clip (1). 4. Using crimping tool (1), Mopar p/n 05019912AA, crimp the splice clip and wires together. 5. Solder (3) the connection (2) together using rosin core type solder (1) only. CAUTION: DO NOT USE ACID CORE SOLDER. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12627 6. Center the heat shrink tubing (2) over the joint and heat using a heat gun. Heat the joint until the tubing is tightly sealed and sealant (1) comes out of both ends of the tubing. Special Tools WIRING/TERMINAL PROBING TOOL PACKAGE 6807 TERMINAL PICK TOOL SET 6680 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12628 TERMINAL REMOVING TOOLS 6932 AND 8638 TERMINAL REMOVING TOOL 6934 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12629 Cellular Phone: Diagnostic Aids Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) Sensitive Devices STANDARD PROCEDURE - ELECTROSTATIC DISCHARGE (ESD) SENSITIVE DEVICES All ESD sensitive components are solid state and a symbol is used to indicate this. When handling any component with this symbol, comply with the following procedures to reduce the possibility of electrostatic charge build up on the body and inadvertent discharge into the component. If it is not known whether the part is ESD sensitive, assume that it is. 1. Always touch a known good ground before handling the part. This should be repeated while handling the part and more frequently after sliding across a seat, sitting down from a standing position, or walking a distance. 2. Avoid touching electrical terminals of the part, unless instructed to do so by a written procedure. 3. When using a voltmeter, be sure to connect the ground lead first. 4. Do not remove the part from it's protective packing until it is time to install the part. 5. Before removing the part from it's package, ground the package to a known good ground on the vehicle. Testing Of Voltage Potential STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING OF VOLTAGE POTENTIAL 1. Connect the ground lead of a voltmeter to a known good ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the voltmeter to the selected test point. The vehicle ignition may need to be turned ON to check voltage. Refer to the appropriate test procedure. Testing For Continuity Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12630 STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING FOR CONTINUITY 1. Remove the fuse (1) for the circuit being checked or, disconnect the battery. 2. Connect one lead of the ohmmeter to one side of the circuit being tested 3. Connect the other lead to the other end of the circuit being tested. Low or no resistance means good continuity. Testing For A Short To Ground STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING FOR A SHORT TO GROUND 1. Remove the fuse and disconnect all items involved with the fuse. 2. Connect a test light or a voltmeter across the terminals of the fuse. 3. Starting at the fuse block, wiggle the wiring harness about six to eight inches apart and watch the voltmeter/test lamp. 4. If the voltmeter registers voltage or the test lamp glows, there is a short to ground in that general area of the wiring harness. Testing For A Short To Ground On Fuses Powering Several Loads STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING FOR A SHORT TO GROUND ON FUSES POWERING SEVERAL LOADS 1. Refer to the wiring diagrams and disconnect or isolate all items on the suspected fused circuits. 2. Replace the blown fuse. 3. Supply power to the fuse by turning ON the ignition switch or re-connecting the battery. 4. Start connecting or energizing the items in the fuse circuit one at a time. When the fuse blows the circuit with the short to ground has been isolated. Testing For A Voltage Drop STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING FOR A VOLTAGE DROP Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12631 1. Connect the positive lead of the voltmeter to the side of the circuit closest to the battery. 2. Connect the other lead of the voltmeter to the other side of the switch, component or circuit. 3. Operate the item. 4. The voltmeter will show the difference in voltage between the two points. Troubleshooting Wiring Problems DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING - WIRING HARNESS TROUBLESHOOTING TOOLS When diagnosing a problem in an electrical circuit there are several common tools necessary. These tools are listed and explained below. - Jumper Wire - This is a test wire used to connect two points of a circuit. It can be used to bypass an open in a circuit. WARNING: Never use a jumper wire across a load, such as a motor, connected between a battery feed and ground. - Voltmeter - Used to check for voltage on a circuit. Always connect the black lead to a known good ground and the red lead to the positive side of the circuit. CAUTION: Most of the electrical components used in today's vehicles are Solid State. When checking voltages in these circuits, use a meter with a 10 - megohm or greater impedance rating. - Ohmmeter - Used to check the resistance between two points of a circuit. Low or no resistance in a circuit means good continuity. CAUTION: Most of the electrical components used in today's vehicles are Solid State. When checking resistance in these circuits use a meter with a 10 - megohm or greater impedance rating. In addition, make sure the power is disconnected from the circuit. Circuits that are powered up by the vehicle's electrical system can cause damage to the equipment and provide false readings. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12632 - Probing Tools - These tools are used for probing terminals in connectors. Select the proper size tool from Special Tool Package 6807, and insert the probing end (2) into the terminal being tested. Use the other end of the tool (1) to insert the meter probe. INTERMITTENT AND POOR CONNECTIONS Most intermittent electrical problems are caused by faulty electrical connections or wiring. It is also possible for a sticking component or relay to cause a problem. Before condemning a component or wiring assembly, check the following items. - Connectors are fully seated - Spread terminals, or terminal push out - Terminals in the wiring assembly are fully seated into the connector/component and locked into position - Dirt or corrosion on the terminals. Any amount of corrosion or dirt could cause an intermittent problem - Damaged connector/component casing exposing the item to dirt or moisture - Wire insulation that has rubbed through causing a short to ground - Some or all of the wiring strands broken inside of the insulation - Wiring broken inside of the insulation TROUBLESHOOTING WIRING PROBLEMS When troubleshooting wiring problems there are six steps which can aid in the procedure. The steps are listed and explained below. Always check for non-factory items added to the vehicle before doing any diagnosis. If the vehicle is equipped with these items, disconnect them to verify these add-on items are not the cause of the problem. 1. Verify the problem. 2. Verify any related symptoms. Do this by performing operational checks on components that are in the same circuit. Refer to the wiring diagrams. 3. Analyze the symptoms. Use the wiring diagrams to determine what the circuit is doing, where the problem most likely is occurring and where the diagnosis will continue. 4. Isolate the problem area. 5. Repair the problem area. 6. Verify the proper operation. For this step, check for proper operation of all items on the repaired circuit. Refer to the wiring diagrams. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Cellular Phone: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION NAVIGATION A optional navigation radio (RB4) is available on this vehicle. The navigation system allows the user to input addresses, points of interest or way points to plan a route to the desired location. The system will provide audible and visual prompts that will direct the user along the desired route. Any variances in the route will cause the navigation system to automatically recalculate the route. The Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) displays turn-by-turn directions to a programmed destination when Turn by Turn Navigation is enabled through Personal Settings. When enabled, the EVIC displays the name of the approaching road at the top of the screen, followed by an arrow to indicate the direction to turn the vehicle, and a count down to indicate the distance to the turn. TELECOMMUNICATIONS The hands-free cellular system on this vehicle uses Bluetooth(TM) technology to provide wireless communication between the operator's compatible cellular telephone and the vehicle's on-board receiver. The system uses voice recognition technology to control operation. The incoming voice is broadcast through the vehicle's radio speakers, automatically overriding any other audio signals on the front speakers when the hands-free system is in use. A microphone in the rearview mirror picks up vehicle occupant's voices. If a call is in progress when the ignition is switched off, the hands-free system will continue to operate for up to 45 seconds as part of the Accessory Relay Delay function. Thereafter, the call can continue on the hand-held telephone. The system will communicate with a telephone that is anywhere within the vehicle. However, covering the hand held phone or the hands-free phone module with a metal object may block the signal. The system will recognize up to seven telephones, each of which is given a spoken identification by the user during the setup process. The system includes Spanish and French voice recognition in addition to English. Two buttons on the rearview mirror, identified with ISO icons, control the system: A "phone" button turns the system on and off; a "voice recognition" (or voice command) button prompts the hands-free system to listen for a voice command. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 12635 Cellular Phone: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION Navigation The optional navigation radio system receives GPS signals from up to eight satellites to display the position and direction of the vehicle. Map information is supplied through a DVD-ROM. An electronic gyro-sensor and the vehicle's speed sensor enable the system to display the present vehicle position even in locations where GPS signals may be blocked. When a destination is selected, the navigation system uses information from the map to quickly calculate a route. As the vehicle is driven along the chosen route, the operator is guided with pictorial displays and voice prompts. TELECOMMUNICATION Two buttons on the rearview mirror, identified with ISO icons, control the system: A "phone" button turns the system on and off; a "voice recognition" (or voice command) button prompts the hands-free system to listen for a voice command. The system includes the following features: - Phone book - Stores telephone numbers for later recall by name or other verbal identification, called a voice tag, and memory location. - Four memory locations - Home, Work, Cellular and Pager. A maximum of 32 unique names or voice tags may be stored at the same time, with a different number in each of the four memory locations. - Voice tag dialing - Dials the number associated with a voice tag and memory location. - Digit dialing - Dials the telephone number by recognizing the names of the digits as they are spoken. - Receiving calls - A voice prompt notifies the user of an incoming call. A voice response accepts or rejects the call without manual intervention. - Privacy Mode - Switches the call to the handheld telephone and the hands-free system and back again using the "voice recognition" (or "voice command") button and a voice command, if desired. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures Cellular Phone: Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures TELECOMMUNICATION Any diagnosis of the Telecommunication system should begin with the use of scan tool. For information on the use of the scan tool, refer to the appropriate Diagnostic Service information. For complete circuit diagrams, refer to the appropriate wiring information. WARNING: On vehicles equipped with airbags, refer to restraint Systems before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment and possible personal injury. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures > Page 12638 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures > Page 12639 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures > Page 12640 Cellular Phone: Component Tests and General Diagnostics TELECOMMUNICATION Any diagnosis of the Telecommunication system should begin with the use of scan tool. For information on the use of the scan tool, refer to the appropriate Diagnostic Service information. For complete circuit diagrams, refer to the appropriate wiring information. WARNING: On vehicles equipped with airbags, refer to restraint Systems before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment and possible personal injury. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures > Page 12641 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures > Page 12642 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Cellular Phone: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. 2. Remove the instrument panel right side end cap. 3. Remove the mounting fasteners. 4. Disconnect the electrical harness connector and remove module. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 12645 Cellular Phone: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION 1. Connect the electrical harness connector and position module. 2. Install and tighten the mounting fasteners. 3. Install the instrument panel right side end cap. 4. Connect battery negative cable. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Instruments - Vehicle Information Center Setup Driver/Vehicle Information Display: Technical Service Bulletins Instruments - Vehicle Information Center Setup NUMBER: 08-002-09 GROUP: Electrical DATE: February 4, 2009 THIS BULLETIN SUPERSEDES TECHNICAL SERVICE BULLETIN 08-014-07, DATED JULY 11, 2007, WHICH SHOULD BE REMOVED FROM YOUR FILES. ALL REVISIONS ARE HIGHLIGHTED WITH **ASTERISKS** AND INCLUDES ADDITIONAL YEARS AND MODELS. SUBJECT: Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) Oil Change Indicator System - Dealer Preferences During Prep MODELS: 2008 (DR) Ram Truck **2009 (HB) Durango** **2009 (HG) Aspen** **2009 (JC) Journey** **2008 - 2009 (KA) Nitro** **2008 - 2009 (KK) Liberty** **2009 (LC) Challenger** **2008 - 2009 (LX) 300 / Magnum / Charger** **2008 - 2009 (RI) Caravan / Town & Country** NOTE: This Bulletin applies to vehicles equipped with a programmable EVIC. DISCUSSION: **Many models now include an oil change indicator system**. This system displays an "Oil Change Required" or "Oil Change" message at appropriate intervals on the instrument cluster. The vehicles listed above may be equipped with a programmable display on the Electronic Vehicle Information Center, (EVIC). The "Oil Change Required message may also include the dealerships name and phone number which can be programmed into the vehicle with the StarSCAN(R) or StarMOBILE(R) scan tool. NOTE: **Other vehicles may be added at any time. Dealers can determine if the feature is available by following the procedures below. If Enable/Disable Dealer Contact Information is active, the feature can be used to enter the servicing dealer's information.** The following procedure describes the steps to add, delete or change a dealership name and phone number on the display. NOTE: If NOT programmed during vehicle prep, customer approval MUST be obtained before adding or changing this information. NOTE: When performing this Procedure, the software release level in the StarSCAN(R) or StarMOBILE(R); must be programmed with the latest level software. The software release level is visible in the blue header at the top of the StarSCAN(R) or StarMOBILE(R) screen. 1. Connect the StarSCAN(R) or StarMOBILE(R). (in Pass-Through Mode) NOTE: To use the StarMOBILE(R) in Pass-Through Mode requires that StarMOBILE(R) be connected to the dealership network via a wired or wireless connection. For more information on how to use the StarMOBILE(R) in Pass-Through Mode, see the StarMOBILE(R) training tutorials available on DealerCONNECT > Service > Repair > StarSCAN(R) and StarMOBILE(R) Tools link or at the website. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Instruments - Vehicle Information Center Setup > Page 12650 2. From the Home Screen, enter "ECU VIEW or "VEHICLE PREP". 3. Select "CCN". 4. Select "Misc. Functions". 5. Select "Enable/Disable Dealer Contact Information". 6. Select "Enable" or "Disable" as desired. 7. If enabled, select "Program Dealer Contact Information" and follow on screen prompts. 8. "Reset will cause display to read: "Contact Dealer" as default. 9. Select finish to exit. POLICY: Information Only Disclaimer: This bulletin is supplied as technical information only and is not an authorization for repair. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 12651 Driver/Vehicle Information Display: Locations Component ID: 204 Component : MODULE-ELECTRONIC OVERHEAD Connector: Name : MODULE-ELECTRONIC OVERHEAD Color : BLACK # of pins : 6 Qualifier : (EXCEPT BASE) Pin Circuit Description 1-2 A114 18GY/RD FUSED B(+) 3 D55 20WT/OR CAN B BUS (+) 4 D54 20WT CAN B BUS (-) 5 Z13 20BK/WT GROUND 6-- Component Location - 53 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 12652 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Driver/Vehicle Information Display: Diagram Information and Instructions Warnings WARNINGS - GENERAL WARNINGS provide information to prevent personal injury and vehicle damage. Below is a list of general warnings that should be followed any time a vehicle is being serviced. WARNING: Always wear safety glasses for eye protection. WARNING: Use safety stands anytime a procedure requires being under a vehicle. WARNING: Be sure that the ignition switch always is in the off position, unless the procedure requires it to be on. WARNING: Set the parking brake when working on any vehicle. An automatic transmission should be in park. A manual transmission should be in neutral. WARNING: Operate the engine only in a well-ventilated area. WARNING: Keep away from moving parts when the engine is running, especially the fan and belts. WARNING: To prevent serious burns, avoid contact with hot parts such as the radiator, exhaust manifold(s), tail pipe, catalytic converter and muffler. WARNING: Do not allow flame or sparks near the battery. Gases are always present in and around the battery. WARNING: Always remove rings, watches, loose hanging jewelry and avoid loose clothing. How to Use Wiring Diagrams DESCRIPTION - HOW TO USE WIRING DIAGRAMS DaimlerChrysler Corporation wiring diagrams are designed to provide information regarding the vehicles wiring content. In order to effectively use the wiring diagrams to diagnose and repair DaimlerChrysler Corporation vehicles, it is important to understand all of their features and characteristics. Diagrams are arranged such that the power (B+) side of the circuit is placed near the top of the page, and the ground (B-) side of the circuit is placed near the bottom of the page. All switches, components, and modules are shown in the at rest position with the doors closed and the key removed from the ignition. Components are shown two ways. A solid line around a component indicates that the component is complete. A dashed line around the component indicates that the component is being shown is not complete. Incomplete components have a reference number to indicate the page where the component is shown complete. It is important to realize that no attempt is made on the diagrams to represent components and wiring as they appear on the vehicle. For example, a short piece of wire is treated the same as a long one. In addition, switches and other components are shown as simply as possible, with regard to function only. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12655 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12656 SYMBOLS International symbols are used throughout the wiring diagrams. These symbols are consistent with those being used around the world. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12657 TERMINOLOGY This is a list of terms and definitions used in the wiring diagrams. LHD - Left Hand Drive Vehicles RHD - Right Hand Drive Vehicles ATX - Automatic Transmissions-Front Wheel Drive MTX Manual Transmissions-Front Wheel Drive Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12658 AT - Automatic Transmissions-Rear Wheel Drive MT - Manual Transmissions-Rear Wheel Drive SOHC - Single Over Head Cam Engine DOHC - Double Over Head Cam Engine Export - Vehicles Built For Sale In Markets Other Than North America Except Export - Vehicles Built For Sale In North America Circuit Functions DESCRIPTION - CIRCUIT FUNCTIONS All circuits in the diagrams use an alpha/numeric code to identify the wire and it's function. To identify which circuit code applies to a system, refer to the Circuit Identification Code Chart. This chart shows the main circuits only and does not show the secondary codes that may apply to some models. Circuit Information DESCRIPTION - CIRCUIT INFORMATION Each wire shown in the diagrams contains a code which identifies the main circuit, a specific part of the main circuit, gage of wire, and color. An example would be A 2 18 LB/YL. This is a Battery Feed circuit, level two, eighteen gauge, light blue with a yellow tracer. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12659 Connector, Ground and Splice Information DESCRIPTION - CONNECTOR, GROUND AND SPLICE INFORMATION CAUTION: Not all connectors are serviced. Some connectors are serviced only with a harness. A typical example might be the Supplemental Restraint System connectors. Always check parts availability before attempting a repair. IDENTIFICATION In-line connectors are identified by a number, as follows: - In-line connectors located in the engine compartment are C100 series numbers. - In-line connectors located in the instrument panel area are C200 series numbers. - In-line connectors located in the body are C300 series numbers. - Jumper harness connectors are C400 series numbers. - Grounds and ground connectors are identified with a "G" and follow the same series numbering as the in-line connectors. - Splices are identified with an "S" and follow the same series numbering as the in-line connectors. In addition, S001-S099 numbers are located in the engine compartment. - Component connectors are identified by the component name instead of a number. Multiple connectors on a component use a C1, C2, etc. identifier. LOCATIONS Vehicle/Locations contains the master connector/ground/splice location index charts with hyperlinks to the applicable location illustrations. The illustrations contain the connector name (or number)/ground number/splice number and component identification. The abbreviation T/O is used in the component location section to indicate a point in which the wiring harness branches out to a component. The abbreviation N/S means Not Shown in the illustrations Section Identification and Information DESCRIPTION - SECTION IDENTIFICATION AND INFORMATION The wiring diagrams are grouped into individual sections. If a component is most likely found in a particular group, it will be shown complete (all wires, Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12660 connectors, and pins) within that group. For example, the Auto Shutdown Relay is most likely to be found in Powertrain Management, so it is shown there complete. It can, however, be shown partially in another group if it contains some associated wiring. Splice diagrams show the entire splice and provide references to other sections the splices serves. Splice Information only contains splice diagrams that are not shown in their entirety somewhere else in the wiring diagrams. Connector Pin-Outs shows each connector and the circuits involved with that connector. The connectors are identified using the name/number on the diagram pages. Removal REMOVAL 1. Disconnect battery. 2. Release Connector Lock (2). 3. Disconnect the connector (3) being repaired from its mating half/component. 4. Remove the dress cover (if applicable) (1). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12661 5. Release the Secondary Terminal Lock, if required (1). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12662 6. Position the connector locking finger away from the terminal using the proper special tool. Pull on the wire to remove the terminal from the connector. Installation Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12663 INSTALLATION 1. Insert the removed terminal in the same cavity on the repair connector. 2. Repeat steps for each terminal in the connector, being sure that all wires are inserted into the proper cavities. For additional connector pin-out identification, refer to the wiring diagrams. 3. When the connector is re-assembled, the secondary terminal lock must be placed in the locked position to prevent terminal push out. 4. Replace dress cover (if applicable). 5. Connect connector to its mating half/component. 6. Connect battery and test all affected systems. Removal REMOVAL 1. Disconnect the battery. 2. Locate the diode in the harness, and remove the protective covering. 3. Remove the diode from the harness, pay attention to the current flow direction (1) (2) (3). Installation INSTALLATION 1. Remove the insulation from the wires in the harness. Only remove enough insulation to solder in the new diode. 2. Install the new diode in the harness, making sure current flow is correct. If necessary, refer to the appropriate wiring diagram for current flow. 3. Solder the connection together using rosin core type solder only. Do not use acid core solder. 4. Tape the diode to the harness using electrical tape. Make sure the diode is completely sealed from the elements. 5. Re-connect the battery and test affected systems. Removal REMOVAL 1. Follow steps for removing terminals described in the connector removal section. 2. Cut the wire 6 inches from the back of the connector. Installation INSTALLATION 1. Select a wire from the terminal repair kit that best matches the color and gage of the wire being repaired. 2. Cut the repair wire to the proper length and remove one-half (1/2) inch of insulation. 3. Splice the repair wire to the wire harness (see wire splicing procedure). See: Service Procedures/Wire Splicing 4. Insert the repaired wire into the connector. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12664 5. Install the connector locking wedge, if required, and reconnect the connector to its mating half/component. 6. Re-tape the wire harness starting at 1-1/2 inches behind the connector and 2 inches past the repair. 7. Connect battery and test all affected systems. Wire Splicing STANDARD PROCEDURE - WIRE SPLICING When splicing a wire, it is important that the correct gage be used as shown in the wiring diagrams. 1. Remove one-half (1/2) inch of insulation from each wire that needs to be spliced. 2. Place a piece of adhesive lined heat shrink tubing on one side of the wire. Make sure the tubing will be long enough to cover and seal the entire repair area. 3. Place the strands of wire overlapping each other inside of the splice clip (1). 4. Using crimping tool (1), Mopar p/n 05019912AA, crimp the splice clip and wires together. 5. Solder (3) the connection (2) together using rosin core type solder (1) only. CAUTION: DO NOT USE ACID CORE SOLDER. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12665 6. Center the heat shrink tubing (2) over the joint and heat using a heat gun. Heat the joint until the tubing is tightly sealed and sealant (1) comes out of both ends of the tubing. Special Tools WIRING/TERMINAL PROBING TOOL PACKAGE 6807 TERMINAL PICK TOOL SET 6680 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12666 TERMINAL REMOVING TOOLS 6932 AND 8638 TERMINAL REMOVING TOOL 6934 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12667 Driver/Vehicle Information Display: Diagnostic Aids Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) Sensitive Devices STANDARD PROCEDURE - ELECTROSTATIC DISCHARGE (ESD) SENSITIVE DEVICES All ESD sensitive components are solid state and a symbol is used to indicate this. When handling any component with this symbol, comply with the following procedures to reduce the possibility of electrostatic charge build up on the body and inadvertent discharge into the component. If it is not known whether the part is ESD sensitive, assume that it is. 1. Always touch a known good ground before handling the part. This should be repeated while handling the part and more frequently after sliding across a seat, sitting down from a standing position, or walking a distance. 2. Avoid touching electrical terminals of the part, unless instructed to do so by a written procedure. 3. When using a voltmeter, be sure to connect the ground lead first. 4. Do not remove the part from it's protective packing until it is time to install the part. 5. Before removing the part from it's package, ground the package to a known good ground on the vehicle. Testing Of Voltage Potential STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING OF VOLTAGE POTENTIAL 1. Connect the ground lead of a voltmeter to a known good ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the voltmeter to the selected test point. The vehicle ignition may need to be turned ON to check voltage. Refer to the appropriate test procedure. Testing For Continuity Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12668 STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING FOR CONTINUITY 1. Remove the fuse (1) for the circuit being checked or, disconnect the battery. 2. Connect one lead of the ohmmeter to one side of the circuit being tested 3. Connect the other lead to the other end of the circuit being tested. Low or no resistance means good continuity. Testing For A Short To Ground STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING FOR A SHORT TO GROUND 1. Remove the fuse and disconnect all items involved with the fuse. 2. Connect a test light or a voltmeter across the terminals of the fuse. 3. Starting at the fuse block, wiggle the wiring harness about six to eight inches apart and watch the voltmeter/test lamp. 4. If the voltmeter registers voltage or the test lamp glows, there is a short to ground in that general area of the wiring harness. Testing For A Short To Ground On Fuses Powering Several Loads STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING FOR A SHORT TO GROUND ON FUSES POWERING SEVERAL LOADS 1. Refer to the wiring diagrams and disconnect or isolate all items on the suspected fused circuits. 2. Replace the blown fuse. 3. Supply power to the fuse by turning ON the ignition switch or re-connecting the battery. 4. Start connecting or energizing the items in the fuse circuit one at a time. When the fuse blows the circuit with the short to ground has been isolated. Testing For A Voltage Drop STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING FOR A VOLTAGE DROP Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12669 1. Connect the positive lead of the voltmeter to the side of the circuit closest to the battery. 2. Connect the other lead of the voltmeter to the other side of the switch, component or circuit. 3. Operate the item. 4. The voltmeter will show the difference in voltage between the two points. Troubleshooting Wiring Problems DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING - WIRING HARNESS TROUBLESHOOTING TOOLS When diagnosing a problem in an electrical circuit there are several common tools necessary. These tools are listed and explained below. - Jumper Wire - This is a test wire used to connect two points of a circuit. It can be used to bypass an open in a circuit. WARNING: Never use a jumper wire across a load, such as a motor, connected between a battery feed and ground. - Voltmeter - Used to check for voltage on a circuit. Always connect the black lead to a known good ground and the red lead to the positive side of the circuit. CAUTION: Most of the electrical components used in today's vehicles are Solid State. When checking voltages in these circuits, use a meter with a 10 - megohm or greater impedance rating. - Ohmmeter - Used to check the resistance between two points of a circuit. Low or no resistance in a circuit means good continuity. CAUTION: Most of the electrical components used in today's vehicles are Solid State. When checking resistance in these circuits use a meter with a 10 - megohm or greater impedance rating. In addition, make sure the power is disconnected from the circuit. Circuits that are powered up by the vehicle's electrical system can cause damage to the equipment and provide false readings. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12670 - Probing Tools - These tools are used for probing terminals in connectors. Select the proper size tool from Special Tool Package 6807, and insert the probing end (2) into the terminal being tested. Use the other end of the tool (1) to insert the meter probe. INTERMITTENT AND POOR CONNECTIONS Most intermittent electrical problems are caused by faulty electrical connections or wiring. It is also possible for a sticking component or relay to cause a problem. Before condemning a component or wiring assembly, check the following items. - Connectors are fully seated - Spread terminals, or terminal push out - Terminals in the wiring assembly are fully seated into the connector/component and locked into position - Dirt or corrosion on the terminals. Any amount of corrosion or dirt could cause an intermittent problem - Damaged connector/component casing exposing the item to dirt or moisture - Wire insulation that has rubbed through causing a short to ground - Some or all of the wiring strands broken inside of the insulation - Wiring broken inside of the insulation TROUBLESHOOTING WIRING PROBLEMS When troubleshooting wiring problems there are six steps which can aid in the procedure. The steps are listed and explained below. Always check for non-factory items added to the vehicle before doing any diagnosis. If the vehicle is equipped with these items, disconnect them to verify these add-on items are not the cause of the problem. 1. Verify the problem. 2. Verify any related symptoms. Do this by performing operational checks on components that are in the same circuit. Refer to the wiring diagrams. 3. Analyze the symptoms. Use the wiring diagrams to determine what the circuit is doing, where the problem most likely is occurring and where the diagnosis will continue. 4. Isolate the problem area. 5. Repair the problem area. 6. Verify the proper operation. For this step, check for proper operation of all items on the repaired circuit. Refer to the wiring diagrams. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12671 Driver/Vehicle Information Display: Connector Views Component ID: 204 Component : MODULE-ELECTRONIC OVERHEAD Connector: Name : MODULE-ELECTRONIC OVERHEAD Color : BLACK # of pins : 6 Qualifier : (EXCEPT BASE) Pin Circuit Description 1-2 A114 18GY/RD FUSED B(+) 3 D55 20WT/OR CAN B BUS (+) 4 D54 20WT CAN B BUS (-) 5 Z13 20BK/WT GROUND 6-- Component Location - 53 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12672 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12673 Driver/Vehicle Information Display: Electrical Diagrams PLEASE NOTE: Some diagrams may appear to be missing because of gaps in the number sequences. These "gaps" are actually for diagrams that do not apply to the vehicle model selected. 8w-49-02 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12674 8w-49-03 Other Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by number (i.e. 8W-70-2, etc.) within these diagrams can be found at the vehicle level under Diagrams by Number. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Number Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Driver/Vehicle Information Display: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION NOTE: The Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) module is sometimes referred to as Electronic Overhead Module (EOM) for the purposes of scan tool and diagnostic information naming. Please treat the EVIC and EOM as one and the same when diagnosing the vehicle. The Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) is located in the overhead console and consists of the following components: - HomeLink(R) transceiver (3) - if equipped - Vacuum-Fluorescent Display (VFD) (6) - Push button function switches (1, 2, 3, 4 and 5) - Replaceable light bulbs to illuminate the push button function switches This system conveniently allows the driver to select a variety of useful information by pressing the function buttons. The EVIC displays information related to the following: - System Status - Vehicle information warning message displays - Tire Pressure Monitor System - If Equipped - Personal Settings (customer programmable features) - Compass display - Outside temperature display - Trip computer functions The EVIC system is comprised of several different components. Those components are: - Instrument Cluster (also known as Cab Compartment Node (CCN)) - Ambient Temperature Sensor - EVIC Module - Controller Area Network (CAN) Data Bus circuit The individual components of the EVIC module are not serviced separately and if damaged or inoperative, must be replaced as a unit. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 12677 Driver/Vehicle Information Display: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) uses both non-switched and ignition switched sources of battery current so that some of its features remain operational at any time, while others may only operate with the ignition switch in the On position. When the ignition switch is turned to the On position, the EVIC display will return to the last function being displayed before the ignition was turned to the Off position. The EVIC system is comprised of several different components that communicate over the Controller Area Network (CAN) Data Bus. If the system is inoperative a scan tool and the appropriate diagnostic information must be used to diagnose the system. The EVIC push buttons are used to operate the different functions of the EVIC system. Pressing and releasing the MENU button (1) will change the mode displayed to one of the Personal Settings. The STEP button (2) is used to make a selection from the Personal Settings displayed at that time. Pressing and releasing the C/T (compass/temperature) button (5) will cause the EVIC to return to the compass/temperature/trip computer display mode from any other mode. From the compass/temperature/trip computer display mode the STEP button (2) is used to scroll through and make selections in the Trip Functions. Pressing and releasing the RESET button (4) resets the trip computer screen displayed at that time. EVIC DISPLAY MODES SYSTEM STATUS MODE Displays warnings and user interaction messages. Critical text warnings will be displayed until the failure is corrected. Non-critical text warnings will be displayed for 60 seconds. The driver can scroll to view multiple messages by using the STEP button. When the appropriate conditions exist, the EVIC displays the following messages: - TURN SIGNALS ON (with a continuous warning chime) - RKE BATTERY LOW (with a single chime) - PERSONAL SETTINGS NOT AVAILABLE - Vehicle Not in Park - LEFT/RIGHT FRONT DOOR AJAR (one or more, with a single chime if speed is above 1 mph) - LEFT/RIGHT REAR DOOR AJAR (one or more, with a single chime if speed is above 1 mph) - DOOR(S) AJAR (with a single chime if vehicle is in motion) - LOW WASHER FLUID (with a single chime) - SERVICE PARK ASSIST SYSTEM (with a single chime) - OIL CHANGE REQUIRED (with single chime) - LEFT FRONT TURN LAMP OUT - RIGHT FRONT TURN LAMP OUT - LEFT REAR TURN LAMP OUT - RIGHT REAR TURN LAMP OUT - SERVICE PARK ASSIST SYSTEM - CATALYST FULL SEE OWNER MANUAL - CATALYST STAT lllll 99% - CATALYST FULL SERVICE REQUIRED - SERVICE AIR FILTER - SERVICE CCV FILTER - COOLANT LOW - ESP SYSTEM DEACTIVATED Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 12678 - AUTO HIGH BEAMS ON - AUTO HIGH BEAMS OFF PERSONAL SETTINGS MODE (CUSTOMER PROGRAMMABLE FEATURES) Allows the driver to set and recall features when the transmission is in Park by pressing and releasing the MENU button until Personal Settings is displayed in the EVIC. If the transmission is not in PARK the EVIC will display NOT AVAILABLE and VEHICLE NOT IN PARK. The following personal settings can be set and recalled by pressing the STEP button: - "LANGUAGE" - When in this display you may select one of three languages for all display nomenclature, including the trip functions. Press the RESET button while in this display to select English, Espanol, or Francois. Then, as you continue, the information will display in the selected language. - "AUTO DOOR LOCKS > YES" - When ON is selected, all doors will lock automatically when the vehicle reaches a speed of 15 mph (24 km/h). To make your selection, press and release the RESET button until "ON" or "OFF" appears. - "AUTO UNLOCK ON EXIT > YES" - When ON is selected, all doors will unlock when the vehicle is stopped and the transmission is in the P (Park) or N (Neutral) position and the driver's door is opened. To make your selection, press and release the RESET button until "ON" or "OFF" appears. - "RKE UNLOCK DRV DR 1st" - When DRV DR 1st is selected, only the driver's door will unlock on the first press of the remote keyless entry unlock button. When Driver Door 1st Press is selected, you must press of the remote keyless entry unlock button twice to unlock the passenger's doors. To make your selection, press and release the RESET button until "DRV DR 1st " appears. - "RKE UNLOCK ALL DR 1ST" - When All ALL DR 1ST is selected, all of the doors will unlock on the first press of the remote keyless entry unlock button. To make your selection, press and release the RESET button until "All DR 1st" appears. - "SOUND HORN W/LOCK > YES" - When ON is selected, a short horn sound will occur when the remote keyless entry "Lock" button is pressed. This feature may be selected with or without the flash lights on lock/unlock feature. To make your selection, press and release the RESET button until "ON" or "OFF" appears. - "FLASH LIGHTS w/LOCK > YES" - When ON is selected, the front and rear turn signals will flash when the doors are locked or unlocked with the remote keyless entry transmitter. This feature may be selected with or without the sound horn on lock feature selected. To make your selection, press and release the RESET button until "ON" or "OFF" appears. - "HEAD LAMP OFF DELAY > 0 SEC" - When this feature is selected, the driver can choose to have the headlights remain on for 0, 30, 60, or 90 seconds when exiting the vehicle. To make your selection, press and release the RESET button until "0," "30," "60," or "90" appears. - "KEY OFF POWER DELAY > OFF" - When this feature is selected, the power window switches, radio, hands-free system (if equipped), DVD video system (if equipped) and power outlets will remain active for up to 60 minutes after the ignition switch is turned off. Opening a vehicle door will cancel this feature. To make your selection, press and release the RESET button until "Off," "45 sec.," "5 min.," "10 min." appears. - "ILLUMINATED APRCH > OFF" - When this feature is selected, the headlights will activate and remain on for up to 90 seconds when the doors are unlocked with the remote keyless entry transmitter. To make your selection, press and release the RESET button until "OFF," "30 sec.," "60 sec.," or "90 sec." appears. - "UNIT IN > US/METRIC" - The EVIC, odometer can be changed between English and Metric units of measure. To make your selection, press and release the RESET button until "US" or "METRIC" appears. - "COMPASS VARIANCE > 1" - Press the RESET button to change the compass variance setting. See: Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators/Compass/Service and Repair/Procedures/Electronic Vehicle Information Center - Standard Procedures/Compass Variance Adjustment - EVIC for additional information. - "COMPASS CALIBRATE > YES" - Press the RESET button to calibrate the compass. See: Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators/Compass/Service and Repair/Procedures/Electronic Vehicle Information Center - Standard Procedures/Manual Compass Calibration - EVIC for additional information. COMPASS/TEMPERATURE/TRIP COMPUTER MODE This display provides the outside temperature, one of the eight compass headings to indicate the direction the vehicle is facing, and vehicle trip information. The compass and temperature display is the normal display. When the C/T button is pressed the EVIC returns to the compass/temperature display from all other functions. The trip computer function will be displayed if the STEP button is pressed from the Compass/Temperature display mode. The trip computer displays the following information: - TRIP - Shows the total distance traveled since the last reset. To reset the TRIP function, press and hold the RESET button. - ELAPSED TIME - Shows the total elapsed time of travel since the last reset. Elapsed time will increment when the ignition switch is in the ON/RUN or START positions. - UNIT IN US/METRIC - Press the RESET button to toggle between US and METRIC. - AVG. MPG - Shows the average fuel economy since the last reset. When the fuel economy is reset, the display will show dashes for two seconds. Then the history information will be erased, and the averaging will continue from the last fuel average reading before the reset. (Example: If your Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) displays 18 AVG. MPG and the RESET button is pressed, the previous averaging history will be erased and the display will return to the 18 AVG. MPG, not to 0 AVG. MPG). The display may take several miles for the value to change dependent upon driving habits. - MI TO EMPTY (Distance To Empty) - Shows the estimated distance that can be traveled with the fuel remaining in the tank. This estimated distance is determined by a weighted average of fuel economy, according to the current fuel tank level. Distance MI TO EMPTY cannot be reset through the RESET button. When the DTE value is less than 30 miles (48 km) estimated driving distance, the DTE display will change to a text Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 12679 display of "LOW FUEL." This display will continue until the vehicle runs out of fuel. Adding a significant amount of fuel to the vehicle will turn off the "LOW FUEL" text and a new DTE value will display. UNIVERSAL GARAGE DOOR (HOMELINK(R)) TRANSCEIVER The EVIC features a driver-interactive display which includes HomeLink(R) system messages. For additional information on the HomeLink(R) transceiver See: Garage Door Opener Transmitter/Description and Operation/Description . Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 12680 Driver/Vehicle Information Display: Testing and Inspection ELECTRONIC VEHICLE INFORMATION CENTER The Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) data is obtained from several components on the Controller Area Network (CAN) Data Bus circuit. The EVIC will not function properly if the bus messages from any of these components is not received. If no EVIC data is displayed, check the CAN Data Bus circuit communications, the Instrument Cluster (also known as Cab Compartment Node (CCN)) functions and the Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM). If the problem with the EVIC is an inaccurate or scrambled display, refer to SELF- DIAGNOSTIC TEST. If the problem with the EVIC is incorrect Vacuum Fluorescent Display (VFD) dimming levels, use a scan tool and the proper Diagnostic Procedures Information to test for the correct dimming message inputs being received from the CCN or TIPM over the CAN data bus circuit. If the problem is a no-display condition, use the following procedure. For complete circuit diagrams, refer to the appropriate wiring information. The wiring information includes wiring diagrams, proper wire and connector repair procedures, details of wire harness routing and retention, connector pin-out information and location views for the various wire harness connectors, splices and grounds. 1. Remove the overhead console from the headliner See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Console/Service and Repair/Overhead Console/Removal . 2. Inspect the Ignition Off Draw (IOD) fuse in the TIPM. If the IOD fuse is OK and in place, go to STEP 3. If not OK, repair the open IOD fuse circuit as required. 3. Check for battery voltage at the overhead console electrical connector. If OK, go to STEP 4. If not OK, Check for battery voltage at the appropriate B(+) fuse in the TIPM, repair the open fused B(+) circuit as required. 4. Turn the ignition switch to the On position. Check the fused ignition switch output circuit(s) at the overhead console electrical connector. If OK, go to STEP 5. If not OK, repair the open or shorted circuit as required. 5. Turn the ignition switch to the Off position. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. Check for continuity between the ground circuit cavity of the overhead console electrical connector and a good ground. There should be continuity. If OK, refer to SELF- DIAGNOSTIC TEST for further diagnosis of the EVIC module and the CAN data bus circuit. If not OK, repair the open ground circuit as required. SELF- DIAGNOSTIC TEST NOTE: The EVIC self - test can also be performed using a scan tool. Navigate to the Auto Self Test screen under System Tests of the scan tool and initiate the EVIC self - test. A self-diagnostic test is used to determine that the EVIC is operating properly electrically. Initiate the self-diagnostic test as follows: 1. With the ignition switch in the Off position, simultaneously depress and hold the STEP and RESET buttons while rotating the ignition switch to the Run/On position. 2. Continue to hold both buttons depressed until the EVIC enters the display segment test. In this test, all of the Vacuum Fluorescent Display (VFD) segments are lighted while the EVIC performs the following checks: Non-Volatile Memory Status (NVM) - RAM Status - ROM Status - ASIC Communication Status - Compass Status - DC Status - CAN Data Bus Communications Status NOTE: If the EVIC module is equipped with the Universal Transmitter (also known as HomeLink(R)), the module also checks "HomeLink(R) Communication Test Status". 3. Following completion of these tests, the EVIC will display one of two messages: "Self Test: FAIL" or "Self Test: PASS." In addition to the FAIL/PASS message the EVIC will display the current software version (SW V xx.xx.xxx) below the FAIL/PASS info. Press the RESET or STEP button to exit and enter normal mode. Respond to these test results as follows: If no test result message is displayed, but EVIC operation is still improper, the use of a scan tool and the proper Diagnostic Procedures Information are required for further diagnosis. - If the "Self Test: FAIL" message is displayed, the EVIC is inoperative and must be replaced. - If the "Self Test: PASS" message is displayed, the EVIC is OK, no faults are present. - If any VFD segment does not light during the display segment test, the EVIC is inoperative and must be replaced. If the first seven tests pass, the EVIC shall verify that all the required CAN bus messages are present on the CAN bus. If all required messages are present on the CAN bus, the EVIC will automatically return to normal operation after sixty seconds. The EVIC can also be returned to normal operation any time during the test by pressing the STEP , C/T , RESET or US/M buttons. NOTE: Pressing the STEP or RESET buttons during any portion of the EVIC Self - Diagnostic Test Procedure will cause the EVIC to exit diagnostics and return to compass/temperature mode. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 12681 NOTE: If the compass functions, but accuracy is suspect, it may be necessary to perform a variance adjustment. This procedure allows the compass unit to accommodate variations in the earth's magnetic field strength, based on geographic location. NOTE: If the compass reading has blanked out, and only "CAL" appears in the display, demagnetizing may be necessary to remove excessive residual magnetic fields from the vehicle. Check for stored Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) and follow the proper Diagnostic Procedures Information as needed. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures Driver/Vehicle Information Display: Procedures Manual Compass Calibration - EVIC MANUAL COMPASS CALIBRATION CAUTION: Do not place any external magnets, such as magnetic roof mount antennas, in the vicinity of the overhead console. Do not use magnetic tools when servicing the overhead console. NOTE: Whenever the compass is calibrated manually, the variance number must also be reset. See: Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators/Compass/Service and Repair/Procedures/Electronic Vehicle Information Center - Standard Procedures/Compass Variance Adjustment - EVIC for the appropriate procedure. The electronic compass unit features a self-calibrating design, which simplifies the calibration procedure. This feature automatically updates the compass calibration while the vehicle is being driven. This allows the compass unit to compensate for small changes in the residual magnetism that the vehicle may acquire during normal use. If the compass readings appear to be erratic or the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) displays "CAL", perform the following manual calibration procedure. Also, any time EVIC service replacement components are installed, they must be calibrated using this procedure. Do not attempt to calibrate the compass near large metal objects such as other vehicles, large buildings, or bridges; or, near overhead or underground power lines. Calibrate the compass manually as follows: 1. Turn the ignition switch to the On/Run position. Press and release the MENU push button (1) until "Personal Settings" is displayed. 2. Press the STEP push button (4) until "Calibrate Compass YES" is displayed. 3. Momentarily depress and release the RESET push button (2) to initiate the calibration procedure. The message "CAL will appear in the Compass/Temperature display. 4. Slowly drive the vehicle on a level surface, away from large metal objects and power lines, through one or two complete circles not exceeding 8 km/h (5 mph). The "CAL" message will disappear from the display to indicate that the compass is now calibrated. NOTE: A blank compass display indicates that vehicle degaussing (demagnetizing) may be necessary. NOTE: If the "CAL" message remains in the display, either there is excessive magnetism near the compass, or the EVIC is inoperative. Attempt the calibration procedure at least one more time before performing EVIC diagnosis. NOTE: If the wrong direction is still indicated in the compass display, the area selected for calibration may be too close to a strong magnetic field. Repeat the manual calibration procedure in another location. Compass Demagnetizing - EVIC COMPASS DEMAGNETIZING Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 12684 A degaussing tool (Special Tool 6029) is used to demagnetize, or degauss, the overhead console forward mounting screw and the roof panel above the overhead console. Equivalent units must be rated as continuous duty for 110/115 volts and 60 Hz. They must also have a field strength of over 350 gauss at 7 millimeters (0.25 inch) beyond the tip of the probe. To demagnetize the roof panel and the overhead console forward mounting screw, proceed as follows: 1. Be certain that the ignition switch is in the Off position, before you begin the demagnetizing procedure. 2. Connect the degaussing tool to an electrical outlet, while keeping the tool at least 61 centimeters (2 feet) away from the compass unit. 3. Slowly approach the head of the overhead console forward mounting screw with the degaussing tool connected. 4. Contact the head of the screw with the plastic coated tip of the degaussing tool for about two seconds. 5. With the degaussing tool still energized, slowly back it away from the screw. When the tip of the tool is at least 61 centimeters (2 feet) from the screw head, disconnect the tool. To demagnetize the roof panel proceed as follows: 6. Place a piece of paper approximately 22 by 28 centimeters (8.5 by 11 inches), oriented on the vehicle lengthwise from front to rear, on the center line of the roof at the windshield header. The purpose of the paper is to protect the roof panel from scratches, and to define the area to be demagnetized. 7. Connect the degaussing tool to an electrical outlet, while keeping the tool at least 61 centimeters (2 feet) away from the compass unit. 8. Slowly approach the center line of the roof panel at the windshield header, with the degaussing tool connected. 9. Contact the roof panel with the plastic coated tip of the degaussing tool. Be sure that the template is in place to avoid scratching the roof panel. Using a slow, back-and-forth sweeping motion, and allowing 13 millimeters (0.50 inch) between passes, move the tool at least 11 centimeters (4 inches) to each side of the roof center line, and 28 centimeters (11 inches) back from the windshield header. 10. With the degaussing tool still energized, slowly back it away from the roof panel. When the tip of the tool is at least 61 centimeters (2 feet) from the roof panel, disconnect the tool. 11. Calibrate the compass, See: Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators/Compass/Service and Repair/Procedures/Electronic Vehicle Information Center - Standard Procedures/Manual Compass Calibration - EVIC and adjust the compass variance, See: Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators/Compass/Service and Repair/Procedures/Electronic Vehicle Information Center - Standard Procedures/Compass Variance Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 12685 Adjustment - EVIC . Compass Variance Adjustment - EVIC COMPASS VARIANCE ADJUSTMENT Compass variance, also known as magnetic declination, is the difference in angle between magnetic north and true geographic north. In some geographic locations, the difference between magnetic and geographic north is great enough to cause the compass to give false readings. If this problem occurs, the compass variance must be set. NOTE: If the vehicle is taken on long trips into a new variance zone the compass function may be effected. Compass variance may need to be adjusted to the new zone number to function properly. NOTE: The default for the compass variance from the factory is 8. To set the compass variance: 1. Using the Variance Settings Map, find your geographic location and note the zone number. 2. Turn the ignition switch to the On/Run position. Press and release the MENU push button (1) until "Personal Settings" is displayed. 3. Press the STEP push button (4) until "Compass Variance" is displayed. 4. Momentarily depress and release the RESET push button (2) to toggle through the zone numbers (1-15), until the zone number for your geographic location appears in the display. 5. Momentarily depress and release the C/T push button (5) to enter the displayed zone number into the compass unit memory. 6. Confirm that the correct directions are now indicated by the compass. Electronic Vehicle Information Center Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 12686 PERFORM SERVICE INDICATOR - RESET The "Perform Service" message will display on the Electronic Vehicle Information Center each time you turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position to indicate a emission maintenance is required. To reset the "Perform Service" indicator system (after performing the scheduled maintenance) refer to the following procedure: - 1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position (Do not start engine). - 2. Press and release the brake pedal two times. - 3. Fully depress the accelerator pedal slowly two times within 10 seconds. - 4. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF/LOCK position. NOTE: If the indicator message illumination when you start the vehicle, the "Perform Service" indicator did not reset. If necessary repeat this procedure. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 12687 Driver/Vehicle Information Display: Removal and Replacement Electronic Vehicle Information Center ELECTRONIC VEHICLE INFORMATION CENTER 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. 2. Remove the overhead console (3) from the headliner See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Console/Service and Repair/Overhead Console/Removal . 3. Remove the screws (2) that secure the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) (3) to the overhead console housing (1). 4. Remove the EVIC (3) from the overhead console housing (1). Bulb - EVIC Control BULB - EVIC CONTROL WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury on vehicles equipped with airbags, disable the Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, airbag, seat belt tensioner, impact sensor, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the SRS. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment. NOTE: There are provisions for up to four bulb/bulb holder units on the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) circuit board. The two outboard bulbs illuminate the EVIC push buttons, while the two center bulbs illuminate the optional universal transmitter push buttons. Therefore, the center bulb locations are only populated on vehicles equipped with the optional universal transmitter. 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. 2. Remove the overhead console (1) from the headliner. See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Console/Service and Repair/Overhead Console/Removal . 3. Use a small thin-bladed screwdriver to rotate the bulb holder (3) counterclockwise about 30 degrees to unlock it from the keyed opening in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) unit (2) circuit board. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 12688 4. Pull the bulb holder and bulb straight out of the circuit board. Electronic Vehicle Information Center ELECTRONIC VEHICLE INFORMATION CENTER NOTE: If a new Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) has been installed, the compass will have to be calibrated and the variance set. See: Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators/Compass/Service and Repair/Procedures/Electronic Vehicle Information Center Standard Procedures/Manual Compass Calibration - EVIC and See: Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators/Compass/Service and Repair/Procedures/Electronic Vehicle Information Center - Standard Procedures/Compass Variance Adjustment - EVIC for the appropriate procedures. 1. Position the EVIC (3) onto the overhead console housing (1). 2. Install the screws (2) that secure the EVIC (3) to the overhead console housing (1). Tighten the screws to 2 Nm (20 in. lbs.). 3. Install the overhead console (1) onto the headliner See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Console/Service and Repair/Overhead Console/Installation . 4. Reconnect the battery negative cable. Bulb - EVIC Control BULB - EVIC CONTROL WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury on vehicles equipped with airbags, disable the Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, airbag, seat belt tensioner, impact sensor, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the SRS. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment. CAUTION: Always use the correct bulb size and type for replacement. An incorrect bulb size or type may overheat and cause damage to the lamp, the socket or the lamp wiring. NOTE: There are provisions for up to four bulb/bulb holder units on the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) circuit board. The two outboard bulbs illuminate the EVIC push buttons, while the two center bulbs illuminate the optional universal transmitter push buttons. Therefore, the center bulb locations are only populated on vehicles equipped with the optional universal transmitter. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 12689 1. Align the bulb holder and bulb (3) with the keyed opening in the circuit board of the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) (2). 2. Insert the bulb holder and bulb straight into the circuit board until the bulb holder is firmly seated. 3. Using a small thin-bladed screwdriver, rotate the bulb holder clockwise about 30 degrees on the circuit board to lock it into place. 4. Reinstall the overhead console (1) onto the headliner. See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Console/Service and Repair/Overhead Console/Installation . 5. Reconnect the battery negative cable. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Entertainment Systems > Television / Monitor > Component Information > Locations Television / Monitor: Locations Component ID: 193 Component : MEDIA SYSTEM-MONITOR/DVD Connector: Name : MEDIA SYSTEM-MONITOR/DVD Color : BLACK # of pins : 12 Pin Circuit Description 1 X510 20DG/LB RIGHT AUDIO AUX 2 X916 20GY/OR SDARS AUDIO RETURN 3 X521 20GY/LB LEFT AUDIO AUX 4-5-6 A114 18GY/RD FUSED B(+) 7 X511 20GY/LG LEFT AUDIO AUX 8 X910 20GY/DG AUX AUDIO RETURN 9 X522 20GY/DB RIGHT AUDIO AUX 10 D55 20WT/OR CAN B BUS (+) 11 D54 20WT CAN B BUS (-) 12 Z957 18BK GROUND Component Location - 54 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Entertainment Systems > Television / Monitor > Component Information > Locations > Page 12694 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Entertainment Systems > Television / Monitor > Component Information > Locations > Page 12695 Television / Monitor: Diagrams Component ID: 193 Component : MEDIA SYSTEM-MONITOR/DVD Connector: Name : MEDIA SYSTEM-MONITOR/DVD Color : BLACK # of pins : 12 Pin Circuit Description 1 X510 20DG/LB RIGHT AUDIO AUX 2 X916 20GY/OR SDARS AUDIO RETURN 3 X521 20GY/LB LEFT AUDIO AUX 4-5-6 A114 18GY/RD FUSED B(+) 7 X511 20GY/LG LEFT AUDIO AUX 8 X910 20GY/DG AUX AUDIO RETURN 9 X522 20GY/DB RIGHT AUDIO AUX 10 D55 20WT/OR CAN B BUS (+) 11 D54 20WT CAN B BUS (-) 12 Z957 18BK GROUND Component Location - 54 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Entertainment Systems > Television / Monitor > Component Information > Locations > Page 12696 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Entertainment Systems > Television / Monitor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Television / Monitor: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The video entertainment system, consist of: - Battery powered remote control - Two headsets - Video monitor/DVD Player located on the headliner. In addition to video DVDs, the system will play audio DVDs, audio CDs, MP3 audio disc, and video CDs. There are plug-in jacks on the monitor/player to show video directly from a video camera, connect video games for display on the screen, and play music directly from a MP3 player. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Entertainment Systems > Television / Monitor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 12699 Television / Monitor: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION A seven inch (diagonal measurement) liquid crystal display (LCD) screen supports both 3 X 4 and 6 X 9 video formats. The hinged screen latches in the closed position and swings down for viewing. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Entertainment Systems > Television / Monitor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Television / Monitor: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL WARNING: Disable the airbag system before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, seat belt tensioner, side airbag, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the airbag system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the airbag system. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment and possible personal injury. 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. 2. Remove the two mounting fasteners. 3. Using a trim stick, press the retaining clip at the rear of the monitor (3). Move the monitor from side to side to release from headliner (2). 4. Disconnect electrical harness connector (1) and remove monitor. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Entertainment Systems > Television / Monitor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 12702 Television / Monitor: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION 1. Connect electrical harness connector (1) to monitor (3). 2. Position monitor and press into place. 3. Install and tighten mounting fasteners. 4. Connect battery negative cable. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Garage Door Opener Transmitter > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Garage Door Opener Transmitter: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION NOTE: The Compass Mini-Trip Computer (CMTC) and Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) modules are sometimes referred to as Electronic Overhead Modules (EOM) for the purposes of scan tool and diagnostic information naming. Please treat the CMTC, EVIC and EOM as one and the same when diagnosing the vehicle. NOTE: Overhead console with Compass Mini-Trip Computer (CMTC) shown. Overhead console with Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) is similar. The HomeLink(R) transceiver is integral to the CMTC or EVIC modules. The only visible component of the HomeLink(R) transceiver are the three push buttons (3). The buttons are marked with one, two or three dots, respectively, for identification of each channel. Each of the three HomeLink(R) transceiver push buttons controls an independent radio transmitter channel. Each of these three channels can be trained to transmit a different radio frequency signal for the remote operation of garage door openers, motorized gate openers, home or office lighting, security systems or just about any other device that can be equipped with a radio receiver in the 286 to 399 Megahertz (MHz) frequency range for remote operation. The HomeLink(R) transceiver is capable of operating systems using either rolling code or non-rolling code technology. The HomeLink(R) transceiver cannot be repaired, and is available for service only as part of the CMTC or EVIC modules. This unit includes the push button switches for both the HomeLink(R) transceiver and CMTC or EVIC, The Vacuum-Fluorescent Display (VFD) and the plastic module case. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Garage Door Opener Transmitter > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 12707 Garage Door Opener Transmitter: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The HomeLink(R) transceiver receives battery feed through the Ignition Off Draw (IOD) fuse circuit of the vehicle. It operates on a non-switched source of battery current so the unit will remain functional, regardless of the ignition switch position. It can learn and store three separate transmitter radio frequency codes to operate garage door openers, security gates and security lighting. The Compass Mini-Trip Computer (CMTC) or Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) display provides visual feedback to the driver, showing which transmitter button is pressed. The system will not send operating signals if the vehicle theft security alarm is armed. This prevents a perpetrator from breaking into a vehicle parked outside a home and using the HomeLink(R) transceiver system to enter the home. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Garage Door Opener Transmitter > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Component Tests and General Diagnostics Garage Door Opener Transmitter: Component Tests and General Diagnostics HOMELINK(R) TRANSCEIVER RADIO FREQUENCY DETECTOR #9001 If the HomeLink(R) transceiver is inoperative, but the Compass Mini-Trip Computer (CMTC) or Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) Vacuum-Fluorescent Display (VFD) is operating normally, See: Programming and Relearning/Programming Homelink(R) Transceiver Codes for instructions on training the HomeLink(R) transceiver. Retrain the HomeLink(R) transceiver with a known good hand held transmitter as instructed and test the HomeLink(R) transceiver operation again. If the unit is still inoperative, test it with the Radio Frequency Detector special tool 9001 as described below: 1. Turn the Radio Frequency (RF) Detector ON. A "chirp" will sound and the green power Light Emitting Diode (LED) indicator will light. If the green LED does not light, replace the battery. 2. Hold the RF detector within one inch of the TRAINED HomeLink(R) transceiver and press any of the transceiver buttons. 3. The red signal detection LEDs will light and the tool will beep if a radio signal is detected. Repeat this test for each button. If any button is inoperative, replace the CMTC or EVIC modules. For complete circuit diagrams, refer to the appropriate wiring information. The wiring information includes wiring diagrams, proper wire and connector repair procedures, details of wire harness routing and retention, connector pin-out information and location views for the various wire harness connectors, splices and grounds. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Garage Door Opener Transmitter > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Component Tests and General Diagnostics > Page 12710 Garage Door Opener Transmitter: Programming and Relearning Programming Homelink(R) Transceiver Codes PROGRAMMING HOMELINK(R) TRANSCEIVER CODES WARNING: Vehicle exhaust contains carbon monoxide, a dangerous gas. Do not run the vehicle's exhaust while training the transceiver. Exhaust gas can cause serious injury or death. WARNING: Your motorized door or gate may open and close while you are training the HomeLink(R) transceiver if the vehicle is in range of the motorized device. Do not train the HomeLink(R) transceiver if people or pets are in the path of the door or gate. A moving door or gate can cause serious injury or death to people and pets or damage to objects. NOTE: When programming a garage door opener, it is advised to park outside the garage. It is also recommended that a new battery be placed in the hand-held transmitter of the device being programmed to the HomeLink(R) transceiver for quicker training and accurate transmission of the radio-frequency signal. NOTE: If programing the HomeLink(R) transceiver is unsuccessful using the following procedure, refer to the current customer assistance phone number. Programming Common HomeLink(R) Transceiver Codes (Compass Mini - Trip Computer (CMTC) Equipped Models) - Press and hold the two outer HomeLink(R) transceiver buttons, and release only when the indicator light begins to flash (after 20 seconds). Do not hold the buttons for longer than 30 seconds and do not repeat step one to program a second and/or third hand-held transmitter to the remaining two HomeLink(R) transceiver buttons. - Position the end of your hand-held transmitter 3-8 cm (1-3 inches) away from the HomeLink(R) transceiver buttons while keeping the indicator light in view. - Simultaneously press and hold both the HomeLink(R) transceiver button that you want to train and the hand-held transmitter button. Do not release the buttons until step 4 has been completed. NOTE: Some gate operators and garage door openers may require you to replace this Programming Step 3 with procedures noted in the "Gate Operator/Canadian Programming" section. - The HomeLink(R) transceiver indicator light will flash slowly and then rapidly after HomeLink(R) successfully receives the frequency signal from the hand-held transmitter. Release both buttons after the indicator light changes from the slow to rapid flash. - Press and hold the just trained HomeLink(R) transceiver button and observe the indicator light. If the indicator light stays on constantly, programming is complete and your device should activate when the button is pressed and released. NOTE: To program the remaining two buttons, begin with "Programming" step 2. Do not repeat step 1. If the indicator light blinks rapidly for two seconds and then turns to a constant light, continue with "Programming" steps 6-8 to complete the programming of a rolling code equipped device (most commonly a garage door opener). - At the garage door opener receiver (motor-head unit) in the garage, locate the "learn" or "smart" button. This can usually be found where the hanging antenna wire is attached to the motor-head unit. - Firmly press and release the "learn" or "smart" button. (The name and color of the button may vary by manufacturer.) NOTE: There are 30 seconds in which to initiate step 8. - Return to the vehicle and firmly press, hold for two seconds and release the programmed HomeLink(R) transceiver button. Repeat the "press/hold/release" sequence a second time, and, depending on the brand of the garage door opener (or other rolling code equipped device), repeat this sequence a third time to complete the programming. The HomeLink(R) transceiver should now activate your rolling code equipped device. NOTE: To program the remaining two HomeLink(R) transceiver buttons, begin with "Programming" step 2. Do not repeat step 1. Programming Common HomeLink(R) Transceiver Codes (Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) Equipped Models) - Press and hold the two outer HomeLink(R) transceiver buttons, the EVIC will display "CLEARING CHANNELS" , do not release the buttons until "CHANNELS CLEARED" is displayed on the EVIC (after approximately 20 seconds). Do not hold the buttons for longer than 30 seconds and do not repeat step one to program a second and/or third hand-held transmitter to the remaining two HomeLink(R) transceiver buttons. The HomeLink(R) transceiver is now in the train (or learning) mode - Position the end of your hand-held transmitter 3-8 cm (1-3 inches) away from the HomeLink(R) transceiver buttons while keeping the EVIC display in view. - Simultaneously press and hold both the HomeLink(R) transceiver button that you want to train and the hand-held transmitter button. Do not Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Garage Door Opener Transmitter > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Component Tests and General Diagnostics > Page 12711 release the buttons until step 4 has been completed. The EVIC will display "CHANNEL X TRAINING", once the HomeLink(R) transceiver is programmed the EVIC will display "CHANNEL X TRAINED". X refers to the desired channel being trained (1,2 or 3). NOTE: Some gate operators and garage door openers may require you to replace this Programming Step 3 with procedures noted in the "Gate Operator/Canadian Programming" section. - Once "CHANNEL X TRAINED" is displayed on the EVIC, release both buttons. Programming is now complete. When the HomeLink(R) transceiver button is subsequently pressed, "CHANNEL X TRANSMIT" is displayed on the EVIC and your device should be activated, (garage door should open). NOTE: To program the remaining two buttons, begin with "Programming" step 2. Do not repeat step 1. If the EVIC display shows "CHANNEL X TRANSMIT" (where X is channel 1,2 or 3) but your device does not activate, the device may be equipped with a "rolling code" system. Continue with the following steps five through seven to complete the programming of a rolling code equipped device (most commonly a garage door opener manufactured after 1995). The assistance of a second person may make the following programming steps quicker and easier. - At the garage door opener receiver (motor-head unit) in the garage, locate the "learn" or "smart" button. This can usually be found where the hanging antenna wire is attached to the motor-head unit. - Firmly press and release the "learn" or "smart" button. (The name and color of the button may vary by manufacturer.) NOTE: There are 30 seconds in which to initiate step 8. - Return to the vehicle and firmly press, hold for two seconds and release the programmed HomeLink(R) transceiver button. Repeat the "press/hold/release" sequence a second time, and, depending on the brand of the garage door opener (or other rolling code equipped device), repeat this sequence a third time to complete the programming. The HomeLink(R) transceiver should now activate your rolling code equipped device. NOTE: To program the remaining two HomeLink(R) transceiver buttons, begin with "Programming" step 2. Do not repeat step 1. Canadian Programming/Gate Programming Canadian radio-frequency laws require transmitter signals to "time-out" (or quit) after several seconds of transmission which may not be long enough for the HomeLink(R) transceiver to pick up the signal during programming. Similar to this Canadian law, some U.S. gate operators are designed to "time-out" in the same manner. If you live in Canada or you are having difficulties programming a gate operator by using the "Programming" procedures (regardless of where you live), replace "Programming Common HomeLink(R) Transceiver Codes" step 3 with the following: NOTE: When programming a garage door opener or gate operator, it is advised to unplug the device or move the vehicle out of range during the "cycling" process to prevent possible overheating. - 3. Continue to press and hold the HomeLink(R) transceiver button while you press and release every two seconds ("cycle") your hand-held transmitter until the frequency signal has successfully been accepted. (On CMTC equipped vehicles, the indicator light will flash slowly and then rapidly.) (On EVIC equipped vehicles, the EVIC will display "CHANNEL X TRAINING" and then "CHANNEL X TRAINED".) Proceed with "Programming" step 4 to complete. Reprogramming Homelink(R) Transceiver Codes REPROGRAMMING HOMELINK(R) TRANSCEIVER CODES WARNING: Vehicle exhaust contains carbon monoxide, a dangerous gas. Do not run the vehicle's exhaust while training the HomeLink(R) transceiver. Exhaust gas can cause serious injury or death. WARNING: Your motorized door or gate may open and close while you are training the HomeLink(R) transceiver if the vehicle is in range of the motorized device. Do not train the HomeLink(R) transceiver if people or pets are in the path of the door or gate. A moving door or gate can cause serious injury or death to people and pets or damage to objects. NOTE: If programing the HomeLink(R) transceiver is unsuccessful using the following procedure, refer to the current customer assistance phone number. Reprogramming Basic HomeLink(R) Transceiver Codes (Compass Mini - Trip Computer (CMTC) Equipped vehicles) To program a device to the HomeLink(R) transceiver using a button previously trained, follow these steps: - Press and hold the desired HomeLink(R) transceiver button. DO NOT release the button. The indicator light will begin to flash after 20 seconds. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Garage Door Opener Transmitter > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Component Tests and General Diagnostics > Page 12712 Without releasing the HomeLink(R) transceiver button, proceed to step 2. - Position the end of your hand-held transmitter 3-8 cm (1-3 inches) away from the HomeLink(R) transceiver button while keeping the indicator light in view. - Simultaneously press and hold both the HomeLink(R) transceiver button that you want to train and the hand-held transmitter buttons. Do not release the buttons until step 4 has been completed. NOTE: Some gate operators and garage door openers may require you to replace this Reprogramming Step 3 with procedures noted in the "Gate Operator/Canadian Programming" section. - The HomeLink(R) transceiver indicator light will flash slowly and then rapidly after it successfully receives the frequency signal from the hand-held transmitter. Release both buttons after the indicator light changes from the slow to the rapid flash. - Press and hold the just trained HomeLink(R) transceiver button and observe the indicator light. If the indicator light stays on constantly, reprogramming is complete and your device should activate when the button is pressed and released. NOTE: If the indicator light blinks rapidly for two seconds and then turns to a constant light, continue with "Reprogramming" steps 6-8 to complete the programming of a rolling code equipped device (most commonly a garage door opener). - At the garage door opener receiver (motor-head unit) in the garage, locate the "learn" or "smart" button. This can usually be found where the hanging antenna wire is attached to the motor-head unit. - Firmly press and release the "learn" or "smart" button. (The name and color of the button may vary by manufacturer.) NOTE: There are 30 seconds in which to initiate step 8. - Return to the vehicle and firmly press, hold for two seconds and release the reprogrammed HomeLink(R) transceiver button. Repeat the "press/hold/release" sequence a second time, and, depending on the brand of the garage door opener (or other rolling code equipped device), repeat this sequence a third time to complete the reprogramming. The HomeLink(R) transceiver should now activate your rolling code equipped device. Reprogramming Basic HomeLink(R) Transceiver Codes (Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) Equipped Vehicles) To program a device to the HomeLink(R) transceiver using a button previously trained, follow these steps: - Press and hold the desired HomeLink(R) transceiver button. DO NOT release the button. The EVIC will display "CHANNEL X TRANSMIT" for 20 seconds and then change to "CHANNEL X TRAINING". Without releasing the HomeLink(R) transceiver button, proceed to step 2. - Position the end of your hand-held transmitter 3-8 cm (1-3 inches) away from the HomeLink(R) transceiver button while keeping the EVIC display in view. - Simultaneously press and hold both the HomeLink(R) transceiver button that you want to train and the hand-held transmitter buttons. Do not release the buttons until step 4 has been completed. The EVIC will display "CHANNEL X TRAINING", once the HomeLink(R) transceiver is programmed the EVIC will display "CHANNEL X TRAINED". X refers to the desired channel being trained (1,2 or 3). NOTE: Some gate operators and garage door openers may require you to replace this Reprogramming Step 3 with procedures noted in the "Gate Operator/Canadian Programming" section. - Once "CHANNEL X TRAINED" is displayed on the EVIC, release both buttons. Programming is now complete. When the HomeLink(R) transceiver button is subsequently pressed, "CHANNEL X TRANSMIT" is displayed on the EVIC and your device should be activated, (garage door should open). NOTE: If the EVIC display shows "CHANNEL X TRANSMIT" (where X is channel 1,2 or 3) but your device does not activate, the device may be equipped with a "rolling code" system. Continue with the following steps 5 through 7 to complete the programming of a rolling code equipped device (most commonly a garage door opener manufactured after 1995). The assistance of a second person may make the following programming steps quicker and easier. - At the garage door opener receiver (motor-head unit) in the garage, locate the "learn" or "smart" button. This can usually be found where the hanging antenna wire is attached to the motor-head unit. - Firmly press and release the "learn" or "smart" button. (The name and color of the button may vary by manufacturer.) NOTE: There are 30 seconds in which to initiate step 7. - Return to the vehicle and firmly press, hold for two seconds and release the reprogrammed HomeLink(R) transceiver button. Repeat the "press/hold/release" sequence a second time, and, depending on the brand of the garage door opener (or other rolling code equipped device), repeat this sequence a third time to complete the reprogramming. The HomeLink(R) transceiver should now activate your rolling code equipped device. Canadian Programming/Gate Programming Canadian radio-frequency laws require transmitter signals to "time-out" (or quit) after several seconds of transmission which may not be long enough for Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Garage Door Opener Transmitter > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Component Tests and General Diagnostics > Page 12713 the HomeLink(R) transceiver to pick up the signal during programming. Similar to this Canadian law, some U.S. gate operators are designed to "time-out" in the same manner. If you live in Canada or you are having difficulties programming a gate operator by using the "Programming" procedures (regardless of where you live), replace "Programming Common HomeLink(R) Transceiver Codes" step 3 with the following: NOTE: When programming a garage door opener or gate operator, it is advised to unplug the device or move the vehicle out of range during the "cycling" process to prevent possible overheating. - 3. Continue to press and hold the HomeLink(R) transceiver button while you press and release every two seconds ("cycle") your hand-held transmitter until the frequency signal has successfully been accepted. (On CMTC equipped vehicles, the indicator light will flash slowly and then rapidly.) (On EVIC equipped vehicles, the EVIC will display "CHANNEL X TRAINING" and then "CHANNEL X TRAINED".) Proceed with "Programming" step 4 to complete. Erasing Homelink(R) Transceiver Codes ERASING HOMELINK(R) TRANSCEIVER CODES NOTE: Individual channels cannot be erased. Erasing the HomeLink(R) transceiver codes will erase ALL programmed codes. Erasing Homelink(R) Transceiver Codes (Compass Mini - Trip Computer (CMTC) Equipped Vehicles. To erase programming from all three buttons (individual buttons cannot be erased but can be "reprogrammed"), follow the step noted: - Press and hold the two outer HomeLink(R) transceiver buttons until the indicator light begins to flash-after 20 seconds. Release both buttons. Do not hold for longer that 30 seconds. HomeLink(R) is now in the train (or learning) mode and can be programmed at any time beginning with "Programming" See: Programming Homelink(R) Transceiver Codes . Erasing Homelink(R) Transceiver Codes (Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) Equipped Vehicles. To erase programming from all three buttons (individual buttons cannot be erased but can be "reprogrammed"), follow the step noted: - Press and hold the two outer HomeLink(R) transceiver buttons until the EVIC displays "CLEARING CHANNELS" , do not release the buttons until "CHANNELS CLEARED" is displayed on the EVIC (after approximately 20 seconds). Release both buttons. Do not hold for longer that 30 seconds. HomeLink(R) is now in the train (or learning) mode and can be programmed at any time beginning with "Programming" See: Programming Homelink(R) Transceiver Codes . Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Memory Positioning Systems > System Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Memory Positioning Systems: Diagram Information and Instructions Warnings WARNINGS - GENERAL WARNINGS provide information to prevent personal injury and vehicle damage. Below is a list of general warnings that should be followed any time a vehicle is being serviced. WARNING: Always wear safety glasses for eye protection. WARNING: Use safety stands anytime a procedure requires being under a vehicle. WARNING: Be sure that the ignition switch always is in the off position, unless the procedure requires it to be on. WARNING: Set the parking brake when working on any vehicle. An automatic transmission should be in park. A manual transmission should be in neutral. WARNING: Operate the engine only in a well-ventilated area. WARNING: Keep away from moving parts when the engine is running, especially the fan and belts. WARNING: To prevent serious burns, avoid contact with hot parts such as the radiator, exhaust manifold(s), tail pipe, catalytic converter and muffler. WARNING: Do not allow flame or sparks near the battery. Gases are always present in and around the battery. WARNING: Always remove rings, watches, loose hanging jewelry and avoid loose clothing. How to Use Wiring Diagrams DESCRIPTION - HOW TO USE WIRING DIAGRAMS DaimlerChrysler Corporation wiring diagrams are designed to provide information regarding the vehicles wiring content. In order to effectively use the wiring diagrams to diagnose and repair DaimlerChrysler Corporation vehicles, it is important to understand all of their features and characteristics. Diagrams are arranged such that the power (B+) side of the circuit is placed near the top of the page, and the ground (B-) side of the circuit is placed near the bottom of the page. All switches, components, and modules are shown in the at rest position with the doors closed and the key removed from the ignition. Components are shown two ways. A solid line around a component indicates that the component is complete. A dashed line around the component indicates that the component is being shown is not complete. Incomplete components have a reference number to indicate the page where the component is shown complete. It is important to realize that no attempt is made on the diagrams to represent components and wiring as they appear on the vehicle. For example, a short piece of wire is treated the same as a long one. In addition, switches and other components are shown as simply as possible, with regard to function only. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Memory Positioning Systems > System Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12718 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Memory Positioning Systems > System Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12719 SYMBOLS International symbols are used throughout the wiring diagrams. These symbols are consistent with those being used around the world. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Memory Positioning Systems > System Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12720 TERMINOLOGY This is a list of terms and definitions used in the wiring diagrams. LHD - Left Hand Drive Vehicles RHD - Right Hand Drive Vehicles ATX - Automatic Transmissions-Front Wheel Drive MTX Manual Transmissions-Front Wheel Drive Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Memory Positioning Systems > System Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12721 AT - Automatic Transmissions-Rear Wheel Drive MT - Manual Transmissions-Rear Wheel Drive SOHC - Single Over Head Cam Engine DOHC - Double Over Head Cam Engine Export - Vehicles Built For Sale In Markets Other Than North America Except Export - Vehicles Built For Sale In North America Circuit Functions DESCRIPTION - CIRCUIT FUNCTIONS All circuits in the diagrams use an alpha/numeric code to identify the wire and it's function. To identify which circuit code applies to a system, refer to the Circuit Identification Code Chart. This chart shows the main circuits only and does not show the secondary codes that may apply to some models. Circuit Information DESCRIPTION - CIRCUIT INFORMATION Each wire shown in the diagrams contains a code which identifies the main circuit, a specific part of the main circuit, gage of wire, and color. An example would be A 2 18 LB/YL. This is a Battery Feed circuit, level two, eighteen gauge, light blue with a yellow tracer. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Memory Positioning Systems > System Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12722 Connector, Ground and Splice Information DESCRIPTION - CONNECTOR, GROUND AND SPLICE INFORMATION CAUTION: Not all connectors are serviced. Some connectors are serviced only with a harness. A typical example might be the Supplemental Restraint System connectors. Always check parts availability before attempting a repair. IDENTIFICATION In-line connectors are identified by a number, as follows: - In-line connectors located in the engine compartment are C100 series numbers. - In-line connectors located in the instrument panel area are C200 series numbers. - In-line connectors located in the body are C300 series numbers. - Jumper harness connectors are C400 series numbers. - Grounds and ground connectors are identified with a "G" and follow the same series numbering as the in-line connectors. - Splices are identified with an "S" and follow the same series numbering as the in-line connectors. In addition, S001-S099 numbers are located in the engine compartment. - Component connectors are identified by the component name instead of a number. Multiple connectors on a component use a C1, C2, etc. identifier. LOCATIONS Vehicle/Locations contains the master connector/ground/splice location index charts with hyperlinks to the applicable location illustrations. The illustrations contain the connector name (or number)/ground number/splice number and component identification. The abbreviation T/O is used in the component location section to indicate a point in which the wiring harness branches out to a component. The abbreviation N/S means Not Shown in the illustrations Section Identification and Information DESCRIPTION - SECTION IDENTIFICATION AND INFORMATION The wiring diagrams are grouped into individual sections. If a component is most likely found in a particular group, it will be shown complete (all wires, Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Memory Positioning Systems > System Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12723 connectors, and pins) within that group. For example, the Auto Shutdown Relay is most likely to be found in Powertrain Management, so it is shown there complete. It can, however, be shown partially in another group if it contains some associated wiring. Splice diagrams show the entire splice and provide references to other sections the splices serves. Splice Information only contains splice diagrams that are not shown in their entirety somewhere else in the wiring diagrams. Connector Pin-Outs shows each connector and the circuits involved with that connector. The connectors are identified using the name/number on the diagram pages. Removal REMOVAL 1. Disconnect battery. 2. Release Connector Lock (2). 3. Disconnect the connector (3) being repaired from its mating half/component. 4. Remove the dress cover (if applicable) (1). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Memory Positioning Systems > System Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12724 5. Release the Secondary Terminal Lock, if required (1). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Memory Positioning Systems > System Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12725 6. Position the connector locking finger away from the terminal using the proper special tool. Pull on the wire to remove the terminal from the connector. Installation Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Memory Positioning Systems > System Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12726 INSTALLATION 1. Insert the removed terminal in the same cavity on the repair connector. 2. Repeat steps for each terminal in the connector, being sure that all wires are inserted into the proper cavities. For additional connector pin-out identification, refer to the wiring diagrams. 3. When the connector is re-assembled, the secondary terminal lock must be placed in the locked position to prevent terminal push out. 4. Replace dress cover (if applicable). 5. Connect connector to its mating half/component. 6. Connect battery and test all affected systems. Removal REMOVAL 1. Disconnect the battery. 2. Locate the diode in the harness, and remove the protective covering. 3. Remove the diode from the harness, pay attention to the current flow direction (1) (2) (3). Installation INSTALLATION 1. Remove the insulation from the wires in the harness. Only remove enough insulation to solder in the new diode. 2. Install the new diode in the harness, making sure current flow is correct. If necessary, refer to the appropriate wiring diagram for current flow. 3. Solder the connection together using rosin core type solder only. Do not use acid core solder. 4. Tape the diode to the harness using electrical tape. Make sure the diode is completely sealed from the elements. 5. Re-connect the battery and test affected systems. Removal REMOVAL 1. Follow steps for removing terminals described in the connector removal section. 2. Cut the wire 6 inches from the back of the connector. Installation INSTALLATION 1. Select a wire from the terminal repair kit that best matches the color and gage of the wire being repaired. 2. Cut the repair wire to the proper length and remove one-half (1/2) inch of insulation. 3. Splice the repair wire to the wire harness (see wire splicing procedure). See: Service Procedures/Wire Splicing 4. Insert the repaired wire into the connector. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Memory Positioning Systems > System Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12727 5. Install the connector locking wedge, if required, and reconnect the connector to its mating half/component. 6. Re-tape the wire harness starting at 1-1/2 inches behind the connector and 2 inches past the repair. 7. Connect battery and test all affected systems. Wire Splicing STANDARD PROCEDURE - WIRE SPLICING When splicing a wire, it is important that the correct gage be used as shown in the wiring diagrams. 1. Remove one-half (1/2) inch of insulation from each wire that needs to be spliced. 2. Place a piece of adhesive lined heat shrink tubing on one side of the wire. Make sure the tubing will be long enough to cover and seal the entire repair area. 3. Place the strands of wire overlapping each other inside of the splice clip (1). 4. Using crimping tool (1), Mopar p/n 05019912AA, crimp the splice clip and wires together. 5. Solder (3) the connection (2) together using rosin core type solder (1) only. CAUTION: DO NOT USE ACID CORE SOLDER. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Memory Positioning Systems > System Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12728 6. Center the heat shrink tubing (2) over the joint and heat using a heat gun. Heat the joint until the tubing is tightly sealed and sealant (1) comes out of both ends of the tubing. Special Tools WIRING/TERMINAL PROBING TOOL PACKAGE 6807 TERMINAL PICK TOOL SET 6680 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Memory Positioning Systems > System Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12729 TERMINAL REMOVING TOOLS 6932 AND 8638 TERMINAL REMOVING TOOL 6934 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Memory Positioning Systems > System Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12730 Memory Positioning Systems: Diagnostic Aids Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) Sensitive Devices STANDARD PROCEDURE - ELECTROSTATIC DISCHARGE (ESD) SENSITIVE DEVICES All ESD sensitive components are solid state and a symbol is used to indicate this. When handling any component with this symbol, comply with the following procedures to reduce the possibility of electrostatic charge build up on the body and inadvertent discharge into the component. If it is not known whether the part is ESD sensitive, assume that it is. 1. Always touch a known good ground before handling the part. This should be repeated while handling the part and more frequently after sliding across a seat, sitting down from a standing position, or walking a distance. 2. Avoid touching electrical terminals of the part, unless instructed to do so by a written procedure. 3. When using a voltmeter, be sure to connect the ground lead first. 4. Do not remove the part from it's protective packing until it is time to install the part. 5. Before removing the part from it's package, ground the package to a known good ground on the vehicle. Testing Of Voltage Potential STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING OF VOLTAGE POTENTIAL 1. Connect the ground lead of a voltmeter to a known good ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the voltmeter to the selected test point. The vehicle ignition may need to be turned ON to check voltage. Refer to the appropriate test procedure. Testing For Continuity Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Memory Positioning Systems > System Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12731 STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING FOR CONTINUITY 1. Remove the fuse (1) for the circuit being checked or, disconnect the battery. 2. Connect one lead of the ohmmeter to one side of the circuit being tested 3. Connect the other lead to the other end of the circuit being tested. Low or no resistance means good continuity. Testing For A Short To Ground STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING FOR A SHORT TO GROUND 1. Remove the fuse and disconnect all items involved with the fuse. 2. Connect a test light or a voltmeter across the terminals of the fuse. 3. Starting at the fuse block, wiggle the wiring harness about six to eight inches apart and watch the voltmeter/test lamp. 4. If the voltmeter registers voltage or the test lamp glows, there is a short to ground in that general area of the wiring harness. Testing For A Short To Ground On Fuses Powering Several Loads STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING FOR A SHORT TO GROUND ON FUSES POWERING SEVERAL LOADS 1. Refer to the wiring diagrams and disconnect or isolate all items on the suspected fused circuits. 2. Replace the blown fuse. 3. Supply power to the fuse by turning ON the ignition switch or re-connecting the battery. 4. Start connecting or energizing the items in the fuse circuit one at a time. When the fuse blows the circuit with the short to ground has been isolated. Testing For A Voltage Drop STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING FOR A VOLTAGE DROP Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Memory Positioning Systems > System Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12732 1. Connect the positive lead of the voltmeter to the side of the circuit closest to the battery. 2. Connect the other lead of the voltmeter to the other side of the switch, component or circuit. 3. Operate the item. 4. The voltmeter will show the difference in voltage between the two points. Troubleshooting Wiring Problems DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING - WIRING HARNESS TROUBLESHOOTING TOOLS When diagnosing a problem in an electrical circuit there are several common tools necessary. These tools are listed and explained below. - Jumper Wire - This is a test wire used to connect two points of a circuit. It can be used to bypass an open in a circuit. WARNING: Never use a jumper wire across a load, such as a motor, connected between a battery feed and ground. - Voltmeter - Used to check for voltage on a circuit. Always connect the black lead to a known good ground and the red lead to the positive side of the circuit. CAUTION: Most of the electrical components used in today's vehicles are Solid State. When checking voltages in these circuits, use a meter with a 10 - megohm or greater impedance rating. - Ohmmeter - Used to check the resistance between two points of a circuit. Low or no resistance in a circuit means good continuity. CAUTION: Most of the electrical components used in today's vehicles are Solid State. When checking resistance in these circuits use a meter with a 10 - megohm or greater impedance rating. In addition, make sure the power is disconnected from the circuit. Circuits that are powered up by the vehicle's electrical system can cause damage to the equipment and provide false readings. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Memory Positioning Systems > System Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12733 - Probing Tools - These tools are used for probing terminals in connectors. Select the proper size tool from Special Tool Package 6807, and insert the probing end (2) into the terminal being tested. Use the other end of the tool (1) to insert the meter probe. INTERMITTENT AND POOR CONNECTIONS Most intermittent electrical problems are caused by faulty electrical connections or wiring. It is also possible for a sticking component or relay to cause a problem. Before condemning a component or wiring assembly, check the following items. - Connectors are fully seated - Spread terminals, or terminal push out - Terminals in the wiring assembly are fully seated into the connector/component and locked into position - Dirt or corrosion on the terminals. Any amount of corrosion or dirt could cause an intermittent problem - Damaged connector/component casing exposing the item to dirt or moisture - Wire insulation that has rubbed through causing a short to ground - Some or all of the wiring strands broken inside of the insulation - Wiring broken inside of the insulation TROUBLESHOOTING WIRING PROBLEMS When troubleshooting wiring problems there are six steps which can aid in the procedure. The steps are listed and explained below. Always check for non-factory items added to the vehicle before doing any diagnosis. If the vehicle is equipped with these items, disconnect them to verify these add-on items are not the cause of the problem. 1. Verify the problem. 2. Verify any related symptoms. Do this by performing operational checks on components that are in the same circuit. Refer to the wiring diagrams. 3. Analyze the symptoms. Use the wiring diagrams to determine what the circuit is doing, where the problem most likely is occurring and where the diagnosis will continue. 4. Isolate the problem area. 5. Repair the problem area. 6. Verify the proper operation. For this step, check for proper operation of all items on the repaired circuit. Refer to the wiring diagrams. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Navigation System: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION NAVIGATION A optional navigation radio (RB4) is available on this vehicle. The navigation system allows the user to input addresses, points of interest or way points to plan a route to the desired location. The system will provide audible and visual prompts that will direct the user along the desired route. Any variances in the route will cause the navigation system to automatically recalculate the route. The Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) displays turn-by-turn directions to a programmed destination when Turn by Turn Navigation is enabled through Personal Settings. When enabled, the EVIC displays the name of the approaching road at the top of the screen, followed by an arrow to indicate the direction to turn the vehicle, and a count down to indicate the distance to the turn. TELECOMMUNICATIONS The hands-free cellular system on this vehicle uses Bluetooth(TM) technology to provide wireless communication between the operator's compatible cellular telephone and the vehicle's on-board receiver. The system uses voice recognition technology to control operation. The incoming voice is broadcast through the vehicle's radio speakers, automatically overriding any other audio signals on the front speakers when the hands-free system is in use. A microphone in the rearview mirror picks up vehicle occupant's voices. If a call is in progress when the ignition is switched off, the hands-free system will continue to operate for up to 45 seconds as part of the Accessory Relay Delay function. Thereafter, the call can continue on the hand-held telephone. The system will communicate with a telephone that is anywhere within the vehicle. However, covering the hand held phone or the hands-free phone module with a metal object may block the signal. The system will recognize up to seven telephones, each of which is given a spoken identification by the user during the setup process. The system includes Spanish and French voice recognition in addition to English. Two buttons on the rearview mirror, identified with ISO icons, control the system: A "phone" button turns the system on and off; a "voice recognition" (or voice command) button prompts the hands-free system to listen for a voice command. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 12738 Navigation System: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION Navigation The optional navigation radio system receives GPS signals from up to eight satellites to display the position and direction of the vehicle. Map information is supplied through a DVD-ROM. An electronic gyro-sensor and the vehicle's speed sensor enable the system to display the present vehicle position even in locations where GPS signals may be blocked. When a destination is selected, the navigation system uses information from the map to quickly calculate a route. As the vehicle is driven along the chosen route, the operator is guided with pictorial displays and voice prompts. TELECOMMUNICATION Two buttons on the rearview mirror, identified with ISO icons, control the system: A "phone" button turns the system on and off; a "voice recognition" (or voice command) button prompts the hands-free system to listen for a voice command. The system includes the following features: - Phone book - Stores telephone numbers for later recall by name or other verbal identification, called a voice tag, and memory location. - Four memory locations - Home, Work, Cellular and Pager. A maximum of 32 unique names or voice tags may be stored at the same time, with a different number in each of the four memory locations. - Voice tag dialing - Dials the number associated with a voice tag and memory location. - Digit dialing - Dials the telephone number by recognizing the names of the digits as they are spoken. - Receiving calls - A voice prompt notifies the user of an incoming call. A voice response accepts or rejects the call without manual intervention. - Privacy Mode - Switches the call to the handheld telephone and the hands-free system and back again using the "voice recognition" (or "voice command") button and a voice command, if desired. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Pedal Positioning System > Pedal Positioning Motor > Component Information > Locations Pedal Positioning Motor: Locations Component ID: 218 Component : MOTOR-ADJUSTABLE PEDALS Connector: Name : MOTOR-ADJUSTABLE PEDALS Color : LT. GRAY # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (EXCEPT BASE) Pin Circuit Description 1 P206 18LG/LB ADJUSTABLE PEDALS MOTOR REVERSE 2 P205 18LG/WT ADJUSTABLE PEDALS MOTOR FORWARD Component Location - 49 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Pedal Positioning System > Pedal Positioning Motor > Component Information > Locations > Page 12743 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Pedal Positioning System > Pedal Positioning Motor > Component Information > Locations > Page 12744 Pedal Positioning Motor: Diagrams Component ID: 218 Component : MOTOR-ADJUSTABLE PEDALS Connector: Name : MOTOR-ADJUSTABLE PEDALS Color : LT. GRAY # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (EXCEPT BASE) Pin Circuit Description 1 P206 18LG/LB ADJUSTABLE PEDALS MOTOR REVERSE 2 P205 18LG/WT ADJUSTABLE PEDALS MOTOR FORWARD Component Location - 49 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Pedal Positioning System > Pedal Positioning Motor > Component Information > Locations > Page 12745 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Pedal Positioning System > Pedal Positioning Motor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Pedal Positioning Motor: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL 1. Disconnect the negative battery cable. 2. Remove the kneeblocker See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Service and Repair/Steering Column Opening Cover - Removal . 3. Remove the brake light switch and discard See: Lighting and Horns/Brake Light Switch/Service and Repair/Removal . 4. Disconnect the adjustable pedal cables from the brake and accelerator pedals Also clutch pedal if equipped with a manual transmission. 5. Disconnect the electrical connector. 6. Unclip the cable fasteners to the support. 7. Remove the one mounting bolt (2) for the adjustable pedal motor (1). 8. Remove the adjustable pedal motor (1) with the cables. NOTE: Adjustable pedal cables are not serviceable. If they need service the adjustable pedal motor with the cables must be installed. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Pedal Positioning System > Pedal Positioning Motor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 12748 Pedal Positioning Motor: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION NOTE: Adjustable pedal cables are not serviceable. If they need service the adjustable pedal motor with the cables must be installed. 1. Install the adjustable pedal motor (1) with the cables. 2. Install the one mounting bolt (2) for the adjustable pedal motor (1). 3. Clip the cable fasteners to the support. 4. Reconnect the electrical connector. 5. Reconnect the adjustable pedal cables to the brake and accelerator pedals Also clutch pedal if equipped with a manual transmission. 6. Install the new brake light switch See: Lighting and Horns/Brake Light Switch/Service and Repair/Removal . 7. Install the kneeblocker See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Service and Repair/Steering Column Opening Cover - Installation . 8. Reconnect the negative battery cable. 9. Check for proper operation of the pedals. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Pedal Positioning System > Pedal Positioning Switch > Component Information > Locations Pedal Positioning Switch: Locations Component ID: 480 Component : SWITCH-ADJUSTABLE PEDALS Connector: Name : SWITCH-ADJUSTABLE PEDALS Color : BLUE # of pins : 6 Qualifier : (EXCEPT BASE) Pin Circuit Description 1 P206 18LG/LB ADJUSTABLE PEDALS MOTOR REARWARD 2 A72 18RD/OR ADJUSTABLE PEDALS OUTPUT 3-4 Z146 18BK GROUND 5 F504 20GY/PK FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN) 6 P205 18LG/WT ADJUSTABLE PEDALS MOTOR FORWARD Component Location - 44 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Pedal Positioning System > Pedal Positioning Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 12752 Component Location - 50 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Pedal Positioning System > Pedal Positioning Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 12753 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Pedal Positioning System > Pedal Positioning Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 12754 Pedal Positioning Switch: Diagrams Component ID: 480 Component : SWITCH-ADJUSTABLE PEDALS Connector: Name : SWITCH-ADJUSTABLE PEDALS Color : BLUE # of pins : 6 Qualifier : (EXCEPT BASE) Pin Circuit Description 1 P206 18LG/LB ADJUSTABLE PEDALS MOTOR REARWARD 2 A72 18RD/OR ADJUSTABLE PEDALS OUTPUT 3-4 Z146 18BK GROUND 5 F504 20GY/PK FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN) 6 P205 18LG/WT ADJUSTABLE PEDALS MOTOR FORWARD Component Location - 44 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Pedal Positioning System > Pedal Positioning Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 12755 Component Location - 50 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Pedal Positioning System > Pedal Positioning Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 12756 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Pedal Positioning System > Pedal Positioning Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Pedal Positioning Switch: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL 1. Remove the lower drivers side bezel (4) See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Service and Repair/Instrument Panel Driver Side Bezel/Removal . 2. Disconnect the electrical connector (3) from the adjustable pedal switch (2). 3. Remove the switch (2) from the lower drivers side bezel (4) by squeezing the retaining clips together and pushing the switch outwards. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Pedal Positioning System > Pedal Positioning Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 12759 Pedal Positioning Switch: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION 1. Install the switch (2) to the lower drivers side bezel (4) by pushing the switch inwards seating the retaining clips to the lower drivers side bezel (4). 2. Reconnect the electrical connector (3) to the adjustable pedal switch (2). 3. Install the lower drivers side bezel (4) See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Service and Repair/Instrument Panel Driver Side Bezel/Installation . Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Amplifier, Sound System > Component Information > Locations Amplifier: Locations Component ID: 13 Component : AMPLIFIER-RADIO Connector: Name : AMPLIFIER-RADIO C1 Color : WHITE # of pins : 20 Qualifier : (PREMIUM) Pin Circuit Description 1 X209 18GY/OR LEFT INSTRUMENT PANEL SPEAKER (+) 2 X208 18GY/DG RIGHT INSTRUMENT PANEL SPEAKER (+) 3 X200 18GY/BR CENTER INSTRUMENT PANEL SPEAKER (+) 4 A116 16YL/RD FUSED B(+) 5-6 D55 20WT/OR CAN B BUS (+) 7 X51 20DG/DB LEFT REAR SPEAKER (+) 8 X52 20GY/DB RIGHT REAR SPEAKER (+) 9 Z907 18BK GROUND 10 X299 18GY/YL LEFT INSTRUMENT PANEL SPEAKER (-) 11 X298 18GY/LG RIGHT INSTRUMENT PANEL SPEAKER (-) 12 X290 18GY/OR CENTER INSTRUMENT PANEL SPEAKER (-) 13 A116 16YL/RD FUSED B(+) 14 - 15 - 16 - 17 D54 20WT CAN B BUS (-) 18 X57 20DG/OR LEFT REAR SPEAKER (-) 19 X58 20GY/OR RIGHT REAR SPEAKER (-) 20 Z513 18BK GROUND Component Location - 46 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Amplifier, Sound System > Component Information > Locations > Page 12764 Connector: Name : AMPLIFIER-RADIO C2 Color : WHITE # of pins : 14 Qualifier : (PREMIUM) Pin Circuit Description 1 X153 18DG/YL LEFT FRONT DOOR SPEAKER (+) 2 X154 18GY/YL RIGHT FRONT DOOR SPEAKER (+) 3 X205 18GY/LG LEFT REAR SPEAKER (+) 4 X206 18DG/LG RIGHT REAR SPEAKER (+) Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Amplifier, Sound System > Component Information > Locations > Page 12765 5-6-7 X155 18DG/LB LEFT FRONT DOOR SPEAKER (-) 8 X156 18GY/LB RIGHT FRONT DOOR SPEAKER (-) 9 X295 18GY/DG LEFT REAR SPEAKER (-) 10 - 11 - 12 X296 18DG/GY RIGHT REAR SPEAKER (-) 13 - 14 - Component Location - 46 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Amplifier, Sound System > Component Information > Locations > Page 12766 Amplifier: Diagrams Component ID: 13 Component : AMPLIFIER-RADIO Connector: Name : AMPLIFIER-RADIO C1 Color : WHITE # of pins : 20 Qualifier : (PREMIUM) Pin Circuit Description 1 X209 18GY/OR LEFT INSTRUMENT PANEL SPEAKER (+) 2 X208 18GY/DG RIGHT INSTRUMENT PANEL SPEAKER (+) 3 X200 18GY/BR CENTER INSTRUMENT PANEL SPEAKER (+) 4 A116 16YL/RD FUSED B(+) 5-6 D55 20WT/OR CAN B BUS (+) 7 X51 20DG/DB LEFT REAR SPEAKER (+) 8 X52 20GY/DB RIGHT REAR SPEAKER (+) 9 Z907 18BK GROUND 10 X299 18GY/YL LEFT INSTRUMENT PANEL SPEAKER (-) 11 X298 18GY/LG RIGHT INSTRUMENT PANEL SPEAKER (-) 12 X290 18GY/OR CENTER INSTRUMENT PANEL SPEAKER (-) 13 A116 16YL/RD FUSED B(+) 14 - 15 - 16 - 17 D54 20WT CAN B BUS (-) 18 X57 20DG/OR LEFT REAR SPEAKER (-) 19 X58 20GY/OR RIGHT REAR SPEAKER (-) 20 Z513 18BK GROUND Component Location - 46 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Amplifier, Sound System > Component Information > Locations > Page 12767 Connector: Name : AMPLIFIER-RADIO C2 Color : WHITE # of pins : 14 Qualifier : (PREMIUM) Pin Circuit Description 1 X153 18DG/YL LEFT FRONT DOOR SPEAKER (+) 2 X154 18GY/YL RIGHT FRONT DOOR SPEAKER (+) 3 X205 18GY/LG LEFT REAR SPEAKER (+) 4 X206 18DG/LG RIGHT REAR SPEAKER (+) Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Amplifier, Sound System > Component Information > Locations > Page 12768 5-6-7 X155 18DG/LB LEFT FRONT DOOR SPEAKER (-) 8 X156 18GY/LB RIGHT FRONT DOOR SPEAKER (-) 9 X295 18GY/DG LEFT REAR SPEAKER (-) 10 - 11 - 12 X296 18DG/GY RIGHT REAR SPEAKER (-) 13 - 14 - Component Location - 46 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Amplifier, Sound System > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Amplifier: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The optional Infinity premium speaker system includes a separate Infinity audio power amplifier. The amplifier is an eight-channel unit rated at 368 total output watts. The amplifier is located behind the glove box. If equipped, an additional amplifier rated at 140 watts is located under the center passenger seat. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Amplifier, Sound System > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 12771 Amplifier: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The power amplifier electronically increases the frequency response of the normal audio signal output from the radio amplifier in order to improve the acoustic performance of the speakers. On vehicles equipped with an amplifier, the amplifier section of the radio becomes a pre-amplifier. The amplifier receives audio signal inputs for speaker channels from the radio, then sends amplified audio outputs through six separate channels with dedicated feed and return circuits to the individual speakers. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Amplifier, Sound System > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Amplifier: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL INSTRUMENT PANEL MOUNTED 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. 2. Remove glove box See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Glove Compartment/Service and Repair/Instrument Panel Glove Box Removal . 3. Remove instrument panel center bezel See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Service and Repair/Instrument Panel Center Bezel - Removal . 4. Disconnect electrical harness connector (4) from amplifier (2) 5. Remove mounting bolts (3) and amplifier. CENTER SEAT MOUNTED 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. 2. Raise center seat cushion to access amplifier. 3. Remove mounting fasteners. 4. Disconnect electrical harness connector and remove amplifier. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Amplifier, Sound System > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 12774 Amplifier: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION INSTRUMENT PANEL MOUNTED 1. Connect electrical harness connector (4) and install amplifier (2). 2. Install and tighten mounting bolts (3). 3. Install instrument panel center bezel See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Service and Repair/Instrument Panel Center Bezel - Installation . 4. Install glove box See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Glove Compartment/Service and Repair/Instrument Panel Glove Box Installation . 5. Connect battery negative cable. CENTER SEAT MOUNTED 1. Connect electrical harness connector and position amplifier. 2. Install and tighten mounting fasteners. 3. Lower center seat. 4. Connect battery negative cable. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Radio/Stereo > Radio Receiver > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Radio Receiver: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL NOTE: If the owner's satellite service was active before the satellite receiver module was replaced the new satellite receiver module will have to be activated. The existing satellite receiver module will have to be deactivated before the replacement satellite receiver module can be activated. To activate Sirius satellite radio service, call Sirius at their toll-free number. Please have the following information available when activating a system: - Electronic Serial Number / Sirius Identification Number (ESN/SID) of the unit to be replaced - ESN/SID of the replacement receiver - Vehicle Owner's name and address - VIN The ESN/SID number can be obtained through the radio display by following the steps in the satellite radio owners manual. The vehicle must be outside with the audio system powered on, in the satellite radio mode, to receive the activation signal. 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. 2. Remove the glove box. 3. Disconnect the antenna cable and electrical harness connectors. 4. Remove the three mounting fasteners securing the receiver to the bracket. 5. Remove the satellite receiver. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Radio/Stereo > Radio Receiver > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 12780 Radio Receiver: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION NOTE: If the owner's satellite service was active before the satellite receiver was replaced, the new satellite receiver will have to be activated. The existing satellite receiver will have to be deactivated before the replacement satellite receiver can be activated. To activate Sirius satellite radio service, call Sirius at their toll-free number. Please have the following information available when activating a system: - Electronic Serial Number / Sirius Identification Number (ESN/SID) of the unit to be replaced - ESN/SID of the replacement receiver - Vehicle Owner's name and address - VIN The ESN/SID number can be obtained through the radio display by following the steps in the satellite radio owners manual. The vehicle must be outside with the audio system powered on, in the satellite radio mode, to receive the activation signal. 1. Position module and install mounting fasteners. Tighten fasteners. 2. Connect antenna cable and electrical harness connector to receiver. 3. Connect battery negative cable. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Radio/Stereo > Radio/Stereo Noise Filter > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Radio/Stereo Noise Filter: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION Radio noise suppression devices are Installed on this vehicle. Radio Frequency Interference (RFI) and Electromagnetic Interference (EMI) can be produced by any on-board or external source of electromagnetic energy. These electromagnetic energy sources can radiate electromagnetic signals through the air, or conduct them through the vehicle electrical system. When the audio system converts RFI or EMI to an audible acoustic wave form, it is referred to as radio noise. This undesirable radio noise is generally manifested in the form of "buzzing," "hissing," "popping," "clicking," "crackling," and/or "whirring" sounds. In most cases, RFI and EMI radio noise can be suppressed using a combination of vehicle and component grounding, filtering and shielding techniques. This vehicle is equipped with factory-installed radio noise suppression devices that were designed to minimize exposure to typical sources of RFI and EMI; thereby, minimizing radio noise complaints. Factory-installed radio noise suppression is accomplished primarily through circuitry or devices that are integral to the factory-installed radios, audio power amplifiers and other on-board electrical components such as generators, wiper motors, blower motors, and fuel pumps that have been found to be potential sources of RFI or EMI. External radio noise suppression devices that are used on this vehicle to control RFI or EMI, and can be serviced, include the following: - Engine-to-body ground strap - This length of braided ground strap has an eyelet terminal connector crimped to each end. One end is secured to the engine cylinder head(s). The other is secured to the plenum at the exhaust heat shield forward/outer attaching stud. - Resistor-type spark plugs - This type of spark plug has an internal resistor connected in series between the spark plug terminal and the center electrode to help reduce the production of electromagnetic radiation that can result in radio noise. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Radio/Stereo > Radio/Stereo Noise Filter > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 12785 Radio/Stereo Noise Filter: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION There are two common strategies that can be used to suppress Radio Frequency Interference (RFI) and Electromagnetic Interference (EMI) radio noise. The first suppression strategy involves preventing the production of RFI and EMI electromagnetic signals at their sources. The second suppression strategy involves preventing the reception of RFI and EMI electromagnetic signals by the audio system components. The use of braided ground straps in key locations is part of the RFI and EMI prevention strategy. These ground straps ensure adequate ground paths, particularly for high current components such as many of those found in the starting, charging, ignition, engine control and transmission control systems. An insufficient ground path for any of these high current components may result in radio noise caused by induced voltages created as the high current seeks alternative ground paths through components or circuits intended for use by, or in close proximity to the audio system components or circuits. Preventing the reception of RFI and EMI is accomplished by ensuring that the audio system components are correctly installed in the vehicle. Loose, corroded or improperly soldered wire harness connections, improperly routed wiring and inadequate audio system component grounding can all contribute to the reception of RFI and EMI. A properly grounded antenna body and radio chassis, as well as a shielded antenna coaxial cable with clean and tight connections will each help reduce the potential for reception of RFI and EMI. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Radio/Stereo > Radio/Stereo Noise Filter > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Radio/Stereo Noise Filter: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL BED TO CAB 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. 2. Remove the attaching bolts and strap. ENGINE TO HEAT SHIELD - 3.7L ENGINE 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. 2. Remove the attaching bolts (2) from the cylinder heads. 3. Remove nut (3) from heat shield (1) and remove strap (2). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Radio/Stereo > Radio/Stereo Noise Filter > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 12788 ENGINE TO HEAT SHIELD - 4.7L AND 5.7L ENGINE 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. 2. Remove the attaching bolts (2) from the cylinder heads. 3. Remove nut (3) from heat shield (1) and remove strap (2). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Radio/Stereo > Radio/Stereo Noise Filter > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 12789 Radio/Stereo Noise Filter: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION BED TO CAB 1. Install the ground strap (3) and mounting fasteners (4). 2. Tighten mounting fasteners. 3. Connect the battery negative cable. ENGINE TO HEAT SHIELD 1. Install the mounting fastener (3) and ground strap (2) to the heat shield (1). 2. Tighten mounting fastener. 3. Install the retaining bolt and ground strap to the engine cylinder heads. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Radio/Stereo > Radio/Stereo Noise Filter > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 12790 4. Tighten the retaining bolts. 5. Connect the battery negative cable. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Radio/Stereo > Remote Switch, Audio - Stereo > Component Information > Locations > Switch-Remote Radio-Left Remote Switch: Locations Switch-Remote Radio-Left Component ID: 504 Component : SWITCH-REMOTE RADIO-LEFT Connector: Name : SWITCH-REMOTE RADIO-LEFT Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Pin Circuit Description 1 X20 22GY/WT RADIO CONTROL MUX 2 G902 22WT/BR GROUND Component Location - 43 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Radio/Stereo > Remote Switch, Audio - Stereo > Component Information > Locations > Switch-Remote Radio-Left > Page 12795 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Radio/Stereo > Remote Switch, Audio - Stereo > Component Information > Locations > Switch-Remote Radio-Left > Page 12796 Remote Switch: Locations Switch-Remote Radio-Right Component ID: 505 Component : SWITCH-REMOTE RADIO-RIGHT Connector: Name : SWITCH-REMOTE RADIO-RIGHT Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Pin Circuit Description 1 X20 22GY/WT RADIO CONTROL MUX 2 G902 22WT/BR GROUND Component Location - 43 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Radio/Stereo > Remote Switch, Audio - Stereo > Component Information > Locations > Switch-Remote Radio-Left > Page 12797 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Radio/Stereo > Remote Switch, Audio - Stereo > Component Information > Diagrams > Switch-Remote Radio-Left Remote Switch: Diagrams Switch-Remote Radio-Left Component ID: 504 Component : SWITCH-REMOTE RADIO-LEFT Connector: Name : SWITCH-REMOTE RADIO-LEFT Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Pin Circuit Description 1 X20 22GY/WT RADIO CONTROL MUX 2 G902 22WT/BR GROUND Component Location - 43 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Radio/Stereo > Remote Switch, Audio - Stereo > Component Information > Diagrams > Switch-Remote Radio-Left > Page 12800 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Radio/Stereo > Remote Switch, Audio - Stereo > Component Information > Diagrams > Switch-Remote Radio-Left > Page 12801 Remote Switch: Diagrams Switch-Remote Radio-Right Component ID: 505 Component : SWITCH-REMOTE RADIO-RIGHT Connector: Name : SWITCH-REMOTE RADIO-RIGHT Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Pin Circuit Description 1 X20 22GY/WT RADIO CONTROL MUX 2 G902 22WT/BR GROUND Component Location - 43 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Radio/Stereo > Remote Switch, Audio - Stereo > Component Information > Diagrams > Switch-Remote Radio-Left > Page 12802 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Radio/Stereo > Remote Switch, Audio - Stereo > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Remote Switch: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION Two rocker-type switches (if equipped) are mounted on the back (instrument panel side) of the steering wheel spokes. The switch on the left spoke is the seek switch and has seek up, seek down, and preset station advance functions. The switch on the right spoke is the volume control switch and has volume up, and volume down functions. The switch on the right spoke also includes a "mode" control that allows the driver to sequentially select AM radio, FM radio, cassette player, CD player or CD changer (if equipped). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Radio/Stereo > Remote Switch, Audio - Stereo > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 12805 Remote Switch: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The six switches in the two remote radio switch units are normally open, resistor multiplexed momentary switches that are hard wired to the Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) through the clockspring. The TIPM sends a five volt reference signal to both switch units on one circuit, and senses the status of all of the switches by reading the voltage drop on a second circuit. When the TIPM senses an input (voltage drop) from any one of the remote radio switches, it sends the proper switch status messages on the Programmable Communication Interface (PCI) data bus network to the radio receiver. The electronic circuitry within the radio receiver is programmed to respond to these remote radio switch status messages by adjusting the radio settings as requested. For diagnosis of the TIPM or the PCI data bus, the use of a scan tool and the proper Diagnostic Procedures information is recommended. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Radio/Stereo > Remote Switch, Audio - Stereo > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 12806 Remote Switch: Testing and Inspection REMOTE SWITCHES Any diagnosis of the Audio system should begin with the use of scan tool. For information on the use of the scan tool, refer to the appropriate Diagnostic Service information. For a complete wiring diagram Refer to Diagrams/Electrical. WARNING: Disable the airbag system before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, seat belt tensioner, side airbag, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the airbag system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the airbag system. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment and possible personal injury. 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. 2. Remove the remote radio switch(es) from the steering wheel See: Service and Repair/Removal . 3. Use an ohmmeter to check the switch resistances as shown in the Remote Radio Switch Test chart. If the remote radio switch resistances check OK, go to STEP 4. If not OK, replace the faulty switch. 4. Connect the battery negative cable. Turn the ignition switch to the On position. Check for 5 volts at the radio control mux circuit cavities of the steering wheel wire harness connectors for both remote radio switches. If OK, go to STEP 5. If not OK, repair the open or shorted radio control mux circuit to the Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) as required. 5. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. Disconnect the 22-way instrument panel wire harness connector from the TIPM. Check for continuity between the remote radio switch ground circuit cavities of the steering wheel wire harness connectors for both remote radio switches and a good ground. There should be no continuity. If OK, go to STEP 6. If not OK, repair the shorted remote radio switch ground circuit to the TIPM as required. 6. Check for continuity between the remote radio switch ground circuit cavities of the steering wheel wire harness connectors for both remote radio switches and the 22-way instrument panel wire harness connector for the TIPM. There should be continuity. If OK, refer to the proper Diagnostic Procedures manual to test the TIPM and the PCI data bus. If not OK, repair the open remote radio switch ground circuit as required. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Radio/Stereo > Remote Switch, Audio - Stereo > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Remote Switch: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL WARNING: Disable the airbag system before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, seat belt tensioner, side airbag, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the airbag system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the airbag system. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment and possible personal injury. 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. 2. Remove the driver airbag See: Restraint Systems/Air Bag Systems/Air Bag/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Driver Airbag Removal . 3. Remove the speed control switches (2) See: Cruise Control/Cruise Control Switch/Service and Repair/Removal . 4. Unplug the wire harness connector from the remote radio switch (1). 5. Depress the tabs on each side of each switch and push the switch through the rear steering wheel cover. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Radio/Stereo > Remote Switch, Audio - Stereo > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 12809 Remote Switch: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION WARNING: Disable the airbag system before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, seat belt tensioner, side airbag, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the airbag system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the airbag system. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment and possible personal injury. 1. Install remote radio switch (1) to the steering wheel. 2. Connect the wire harness to the remote radio switch. 3. Install the speed control switches (2) See: Cruise Control/Cruise Control Switch/Service and Repair/Installation . 4. Install the driver airbag See: Restraint Systems/Air Bag Systems/Air Bag/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Driver Airbag Installation . 5. Connect the battery negative cable. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Speaker > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Speaker: > 08-024-07A > Nov > 07 > Audio System - Distorted Sound From Speakers Speaker: Customer Interest Audio System - Distorted Sound From Speakers NUMBER: 08-024-07 REV. A GROUP: Electrical DATE: November 30, 2007 THIS BULLETIN SUPERSEDES TECHNICAL SERVICE BULLETIN 08-024-07, DATED OCTOBER 10, 2007, WHICH SHOULD BE REMOVED FROM YOUR FILES. ALL REVISIONS ARE HIGHLIGHTED WITH **ASTERISKS** AND INCLUDE THE ADDITION OF A NEW MODEL. SUBJECT: Distorted Sound In Door Speaker, Rear Quarter Speaker Or Rear Shelf Speaker With The Radio On OVERVIEW: This bulletin involves replacing all 6x9 base (non-premium sound system) speakers in the vehicle. MODELS: 2007 - 2008 (LE) 300, Touring (International Markets) 2007 - 2008 (LX) 300, Charger, Magnum 2007 (L2) 300 (China) 2007-2008 (JS) Avenger/Sebring/Sebring Convertible 2007 - 2008 (MK) Compass/Patriot 2007 - 2008 (PM) Caliber 2007 - 2008 (WK) Grand Cherokee 2007 - 2008 (WH) Grand Cherokee (International Markets) 2007 - 2008 (XK) Commander 2007 - 2008 (XH) Commander (International markets) 2007 - 2008 (DR) Ram truck 2007 - 2008 (DH/D1/DC) Ram Truck (2500 & 3500) 2008 (RT) Town & Country/Grand Caravan/Grand Voyager (U.S. and International Markets) **2007 (RS/RG) Town & Country/Caravan/Voyager (U.S. and International Markets)** NOTE: This bulletin applies to vehicles built between February 26, 2007 (MDH 0226XX) and September 4, 2007 (MDH 0904XX) and sales code RCB, RCG or RCD SYMPTOM/CONDITION: Some customers may experience a "distorted sound in one or more 6x9 (non-premium sound system) speakers with the radio on. DIAGNOSIS: If the Symptom/Condition is present, perform the Repair Procedure. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Speaker > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Speaker: > 08-024-07A > Nov > 07 > Audio System - Distorted Sound From Speakers > Page 12818 PARTS REQUIRED: REPAIR PROCEDURE: 1. Replace all the 6x9 speakers in the vehicle following the procedures available in DealerCONNECT > TechCONNECT > 8 - Electrical > Radio > Speaker > Removal and Installation. Refer to table below for 6x9 speaker quantities and location details. POLICY: Reimbursable within the provisions of the warranty. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Speaker > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Speaker: > 08-024-07A > Nov > 07 > Audio System - Distorted Sound From Speakers > Page 12819 TIME ALLOWANCE: FAILURE CODE: Disclaimer: This bulletin is supplied as technical information only and is not an authorization for repair. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Speaker > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Speaker: > 08-024-07A > Nov > 07 > Audio System - Distorted Sound From Speakers Speaker: All Technical Service Bulletins Audio System - Distorted Sound From Speakers NUMBER: 08-024-07 REV. A GROUP: Electrical DATE: November 30, 2007 THIS BULLETIN SUPERSEDES TECHNICAL SERVICE BULLETIN 08-024-07, DATED OCTOBER 10, 2007, WHICH SHOULD BE REMOVED FROM YOUR FILES. ALL REVISIONS ARE HIGHLIGHTED WITH **ASTERISKS** AND INCLUDE THE ADDITION OF A NEW MODEL. SUBJECT: Distorted Sound In Door Speaker, Rear Quarter Speaker Or Rear Shelf Speaker With The Radio On OVERVIEW: This bulletin involves replacing all 6x9 base (non-premium sound system) speakers in the vehicle. MODELS: 2007 - 2008 (LE) 300, Touring (International Markets) 2007 - 2008 (LX) 300, Charger, Magnum 2007 (L2) 300 (China) 2007-2008 (JS) Avenger/Sebring/Sebring Convertible 2007 - 2008 (MK) Compass/Patriot 2007 - 2008 (PM) Caliber 2007 - 2008 (WK) Grand Cherokee 2007 - 2008 (WH) Grand Cherokee (International Markets) 2007 - 2008 (XK) Commander 2007 - 2008 (XH) Commander (International markets) 2007 - 2008 (DR) Ram truck 2007 - 2008 (DH/D1/DC) Ram Truck (2500 & 3500) 2008 (RT) Town & Country/Grand Caravan/Grand Voyager (U.S. and International Markets) **2007 (RS/RG) Town & Country/Caravan/Voyager (U.S. and International Markets)** NOTE: This bulletin applies to vehicles built between February 26, 2007 (MDH 0226XX) and September 4, 2007 (MDH 0904XX) and sales code RCB, RCG or RCD SYMPTOM/CONDITION: Some customers may experience a "distorted sound in one or more 6x9 (non-premium sound system) speakers with the radio on. DIAGNOSIS: If the Symptom/Condition is present, perform the Repair Procedure. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Speaker > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Speaker: > 08-024-07A > Nov > 07 > Audio System - Distorted Sound From Speakers > Page 12825 PARTS REQUIRED: REPAIR PROCEDURE: 1. Replace all the 6x9 speakers in the vehicle following the procedures available in DealerCONNECT > TechCONNECT > 8 - Electrical > Radio > Speaker > Removal and Installation. Refer to table below for 6x9 speaker quantities and location details. POLICY: Reimbursable within the provisions of the warranty. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Speaker > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Speaker: > 08-024-07A > Nov > 07 > Audio System - Distorted Sound From Speakers > Page 12826 TIME ALLOWANCE: FAILURE CODE: Disclaimer: This bulletin is supplied as technical information only and is not an authorization for repair. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Speaker > Component Information > Locations > Speaker-Instrument Panel-Center Speaker: Locations Speaker-Instrument Panel-Center Component ID: 464 Component : SPEAKER-INSTRUMENT PANEL-CENTER Connector: Name : SPEAKER-INSTRUMENT PANEL-CENTER Color : WHITE # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (SLT/SLT+) Pin Circuit Description 1 X200 18GY/BR CENTER INSTRUMENT PANEL SPEAKER (+) 2 X290 18GY/OR CENTER INSTRUMENT PANEL SPEAKER (-) Component Location - 47 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Speaker > Component Information > Locations > Speaker-Instrument Panel-Center > Page 12829 Component Location - 46 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Speaker > Component Information > Locations > Speaker-Instrument Panel-Center > Page 12830 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Speaker > Component Information > Locations > Speaker-Instrument Panel-Center > Page 12831 Speaker: Locations Speaker-Instrument Panel-Left Component ID: 465 Component : SPEAKER-INSTRUMENT PANEL-LEFT Connector: Name : SPEAKER-INSTRUMENT PANEL-LEFT Color : WHITE # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (SLT/SLT+) Pin Circuit Description 1 X209 18GY/OR LEFT INSTRUMENT PANEL SPEAKER (+) 2 X299 18GY/YL LEFT INSTRUMENT PANEL SPEAKER (-) Component Location - 46 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Speaker > Component Information > Locations > Speaker-Instrument Panel-Center > Page 12832 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Speaker > Component Information > Locations > Speaker-Instrument Panel-Center > Page 12833 Speaker: Locations Speaker-Instrument Panel-Right Component ID: 466 Component : SPEAKER-INSTRUMENT PANEL-RIGHT Connector: Name : SPEAKER-INSTRUMENT PANEL-RIGHT Color : WHITE # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (SLT/SLT+) Pin Circuit Description 1 X208 18GY/DG RIGHT INSTRUMENT PANEL SPEAKER (+) 2 X298 18GY/LG RIGHT INSTRUMENT PANEL SPEAKER (-) Component Location - 46 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Speaker > Component Information > Locations > Speaker-Instrument Panel-Center > Page 12834 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Speaker > Component Information > Locations > Speaker-Instrument Panel-Center > Page 12835 Speaker: Locations Speaker-Left Front Door Component ID: 467 Component : SPEAKER-LEFT FRONT DOOR Connector: Name : SPEAKER-LEFT FRONT DOOR Color : WHITE # of pins : 3 Pin Circuit Description 1 X155 18DG/LB LEFT FRONT DOOR SPEAKER (-) 2-3 X153 18DG/YL LEFT FRONT DOOR SPEAKER (+) Component Location - 55 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Speaker > Component Information > Locations > Speaker-Instrument Panel-Center > Page 12836 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Speaker > Component Information > Locations > Speaker-Instrument Panel-Center > Page 12837 Speaker: Locations Speaker-Instrument Panel-Center Component ID: 464 Component : SPEAKER-INSTRUMENT PANEL-CENTER Connector: Name : SPEAKER-INSTRUMENT PANEL-CENTER Color : WHITE # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (SLT/SLT+) Pin Circuit Description 1 X200 18GY/BR CENTER INSTRUMENT PANEL SPEAKER (+) 2 X290 18GY/OR CENTER INSTRUMENT PANEL SPEAKER (-) Component Location - 47 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Speaker > Component Information > Locations > Speaker-Instrument Panel-Center > Page 12838 Component Location - 46 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Speaker > Component Information > Locations > Speaker-Instrument Panel-Center > Page 12839 Speaker-Instrument Panel-Left Component ID: 465 Component : SPEAKER-INSTRUMENT PANEL-LEFT Connector: Name : SPEAKER-INSTRUMENT PANEL-LEFT Color : WHITE # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (SLT/SLT+) Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Speaker > Component Information > Locations > Speaker-Instrument Panel-Center > Page 12840 Pin Circuit Description 1 X209 18GY/OR LEFT INSTRUMENT PANEL SPEAKER (+) 2 X299 18GY/YL LEFT INSTRUMENT PANEL SPEAKER (-) Component Location - 46 Speaker-Instrument Panel-Right Component ID: 466 Component : SPEAKER-INSTRUMENT PANEL-RIGHT Connector: Name : SPEAKER-INSTRUMENT PANEL-RIGHT Color : WHITE # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (SLT/SLT+) Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Speaker > Component Information > Locations > Speaker-Instrument Panel-Center > Page 12841 Pin Circuit Description 1 X208 18GY/DG RIGHT INSTRUMENT PANEL SPEAKER (+) 2 X298 18GY/LG RIGHT INSTRUMENT PANEL SPEAKER (-) Component Location - 46 Speaker-Left Front Door Component ID: 467 Component : SPEAKER-LEFT FRONT DOOR Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Speaker > Component Information > Locations > Speaker-Instrument Panel-Center > Page 12842 Connector: Name : SPEAKER-LEFT FRONT DOOR Color : WHITE # of pins : 3 Pin Circuit Description 1 X155 18DG/LB LEFT FRONT DOOR SPEAKER (-) 2-3 X153 18DG/YL LEFT FRONT DOOR SPEAKER (+) Component Location - 55 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Speaker > Component Information > Locations > Speaker-Instrument Panel-Center > Page 12843 Speaker-Left Rear Component ID: 468 Component : SPEAKER-LEFT REAR Connector: Name : SPEAKER-LEFT REAR Color : WHITE # of pins : 3 Pin Circuit Description Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Speaker > Component Information > Locations > Speaker-Instrument Panel-Center > Page 12844 1 X205 18GY/LG LEFT REAR SPEAKER (+) 2-3 X295 18GY/DG LEFT REAR SPEAKER (-) Component Location - 58 Component Location - 57 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Speaker > Component Information > Locations > Speaker-Instrument Panel-Center > Page 12845 Speaker-Right Front Door Component ID: 469 Component : SPEAKER-RIGHT FRONT DOOR Connector: Name : SPEAKER-RIGHT FRONT DOOR Color : WHITE # of pins : 3 Pin Circuit Description Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Speaker > Component Information > Locations > Speaker-Instrument Panel-Center > Page 12846 1 X156 18GY/LB RIGHT FRONT DOOR SPEAKER (-) 2-3 X154 18DG/YL RIGHT FRONT DOOR SPEAKER (+) 3 X154 18GY/YL RIGHT FRONT DOOR SPEAKER (+) Component Location - 56 Speaker-Right Rear Component ID: 470 Component : SPEAKER-RIGHT REAR Connector: Name : SPEAKER-RIGHT REAR Color : WHITE # of pins : 3 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Speaker > Component Information > Locations > Speaker-Instrument Panel-Center > Page 12847 Pin Circuit Description 1 X206 18GY/LG RIGHT REAR SPEAKER (+) Pin Circuit Description 1 X206 18DG/LG RIGHT REAR SPEAKER (+) 2-3 X296 18GY/DG RIGHT REAR SPEAKER (-) 3 X296 18DG/GY RIGHT REAR SPEAKER (-) Component Location - 57 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Speaker > Component Information > Locations > Speaker-Instrument Panel-Center > Page 12848 Component Location - 61 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Speaker > Component Information > Diagrams > Speaker-Instrument Panel-Center Speaker: Diagrams Speaker-Instrument Panel-Center Component ID: 464 Component : SPEAKER-INSTRUMENT PANEL-CENTER Connector: Name : SPEAKER-INSTRUMENT PANEL-CENTER Color : WHITE # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (SLT/SLT+) Pin Circuit Description 1 X200 18GY/BR CENTER INSTRUMENT PANEL SPEAKER (+) 2 X290 18GY/OR CENTER INSTRUMENT PANEL SPEAKER (-) Component Location - 47 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Speaker > Component Information > Diagrams > Speaker-Instrument Panel-Center > Page 12851 Component Location - 46 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Speaker > Component Information > Diagrams > Speaker-Instrument Panel-Center > Page 12852 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Speaker > Component Information > Diagrams > Speaker-Instrument Panel-Center > Page 12853 Speaker: Diagrams Speaker-Instrument Panel-Left Component ID: 465 Component : SPEAKER-INSTRUMENT PANEL-LEFT Connector: Name : SPEAKER-INSTRUMENT PANEL-LEFT Color : WHITE # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (SLT/SLT+) Pin Circuit Description 1 X209 18GY/OR LEFT INSTRUMENT PANEL SPEAKER (+) 2 X299 18GY/YL LEFT INSTRUMENT PANEL SPEAKER (-) Component Location - 46 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Speaker > Component Information > Diagrams > Speaker-Instrument Panel-Center > Page 12854 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Speaker > Component Information > Diagrams > Speaker-Instrument Panel-Center > Page 12855 Speaker: Diagrams Speaker-Instrument Panel-Right Component ID: 466 Component : SPEAKER-INSTRUMENT PANEL-RIGHT Connector: Name : SPEAKER-INSTRUMENT PANEL-RIGHT Color : WHITE # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (SLT/SLT+) Pin Circuit Description 1 X208 18GY/DG RIGHT INSTRUMENT PANEL SPEAKER (+) 2 X298 18GY/LG RIGHT INSTRUMENT PANEL SPEAKER (-) Component Location - 46 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Speaker > Component Information > Diagrams > Speaker-Instrument Panel-Center > Page 12856 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Speaker > Component Information > Diagrams > Speaker-Instrument Panel-Center > Page 12857 Speaker: Diagrams Speaker-Left Front Door Component ID: 467 Component : SPEAKER-LEFT FRONT DOOR Connector: Name : SPEAKER-LEFT FRONT DOOR Color : WHITE # of pins : 3 Pin Circuit Description 1 X155 18DG/LB LEFT FRONT DOOR SPEAKER (-) 2-3 X153 18DG/YL LEFT FRONT DOOR SPEAKER (+) Component Location - 55 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Speaker > Component Information > Diagrams > Speaker-Instrument Panel-Center > Page 12858 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Speaker > Component Information > Diagrams > Speaker-Instrument Panel-Center > Page 12859 Speaker: Diagrams Speaker-Instrument Panel-Center Component ID: 464 Component : SPEAKER-INSTRUMENT PANEL-CENTER Connector: Name : SPEAKER-INSTRUMENT PANEL-CENTER Color : WHITE # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (SLT/SLT+) Pin Circuit Description 1 X200 18GY/BR CENTER INSTRUMENT PANEL SPEAKER (+) 2 X290 18GY/OR CENTER INSTRUMENT PANEL SPEAKER (-) Component Location - 47 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Speaker > Component Information > Diagrams > Speaker-Instrument Panel-Center > Page 12860 Component Location - 46 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Speaker > Component Information > Diagrams > Speaker-Instrument Panel-Center > Page 12861 Speaker-Instrument Panel-Left Component ID: 465 Component : SPEAKER-INSTRUMENT PANEL-LEFT Connector: Name : SPEAKER-INSTRUMENT PANEL-LEFT Color : WHITE # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (SLT/SLT+) Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Speaker > Component Information > Diagrams > Speaker-Instrument Panel-Center > Page 12862 Pin Circuit Description 1 X209 18GY/OR LEFT INSTRUMENT PANEL SPEAKER (+) 2 X299 18GY/YL LEFT INSTRUMENT PANEL SPEAKER (-) Component Location - 46 Speaker-Instrument Panel-Right Component ID: 466 Component : SPEAKER-INSTRUMENT PANEL-RIGHT Connector: Name : SPEAKER-INSTRUMENT PANEL-RIGHT Color : WHITE # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (SLT/SLT+) Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Speaker > Component Information > Diagrams > Speaker-Instrument Panel-Center > Page 12863 Pin Circuit Description 1 X208 18GY/DG RIGHT INSTRUMENT PANEL SPEAKER (+) 2 X298 18GY/LG RIGHT INSTRUMENT PANEL SPEAKER (-) Component Location - 46 Speaker-Left Front Door Component ID: 467 Component : SPEAKER-LEFT FRONT DOOR Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Speaker > Component Information > Diagrams > Speaker-Instrument Panel-Center > Page 12864 Connector: Name : SPEAKER-LEFT FRONT DOOR Color : WHITE # of pins : 3 Pin Circuit Description 1 X155 18DG/LB LEFT FRONT DOOR SPEAKER (-) 2-3 X153 18DG/YL LEFT FRONT DOOR SPEAKER (+) Component Location - 55 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Speaker > Component Information > Diagrams > Speaker-Instrument Panel-Center > Page 12865 Speaker-Left Rear Component ID: 468 Component : SPEAKER-LEFT REAR Connector: Name : SPEAKER-LEFT REAR Color : WHITE # of pins : 3 Pin Circuit Description Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Speaker > Component Information > Diagrams > Speaker-Instrument Panel-Center > Page 12866 1 X205 18GY/LG LEFT REAR SPEAKER (+) 2-3 X295 18GY/DG LEFT REAR SPEAKER (-) Component Location - 58 Component Location - 57 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Speaker > Component Information > Diagrams > Speaker-Instrument Panel-Center > Page 12867 Speaker-Right Front Door Component ID: 469 Component : SPEAKER-RIGHT FRONT DOOR Connector: Name : SPEAKER-RIGHT FRONT DOOR Color : WHITE # of pins : 3 Pin Circuit Description Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Speaker > Component Information > Diagrams > Speaker-Instrument Panel-Center > Page 12868 1 X156 18GY/LB RIGHT FRONT DOOR SPEAKER (-) 2-3 X154 18DG/YL RIGHT FRONT DOOR SPEAKER (+) 3 X154 18GY/YL RIGHT FRONT DOOR SPEAKER (+) Component Location - 56 Speaker-Right Rear Component ID: 470 Component : SPEAKER-RIGHT REAR Connector: Name : SPEAKER-RIGHT REAR Color : WHITE # of pins : 3 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Speaker > Component Information > Diagrams > Speaker-Instrument Panel-Center > Page 12869 Pin Circuit Description 1 X206 18GY/LG RIGHT REAR SPEAKER (+) Pin Circuit Description 1 X206 18DG/LG RIGHT REAR SPEAKER (+) 2-3 X296 18GY/DG RIGHT REAR SPEAKER (-) 3 X296 18DG/GY RIGHT REAR SPEAKER (-) Component Location - 57 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Speaker > Component Information > Diagrams > Speaker-Instrument Panel-Center > Page 12870 Component Location - 61 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Speaker > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Speaker: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION STANDARD The standard equipment speaker system includes speakers in four locations. One 15.2 X 22.8 centimeter (6 X 9 inch) full-range speaker is located in each front door. There is also one full-range 13.3 centimeter (5.25 inch) diameter full-range speaker located in each rear door (quad cab) or B-pillar (regular cab). PREMIUM The optional premium speaker system features eleven Premium model speakers in seven locations. Each of the standard speakers is replaced with Premium model speakers. One 8.8 centimeter (3.50 inch) diameter speaker is located on each end of the instrument panel top pad. One 6.3 centimeter (2.50 inch) diameter speaker is located in the center of the instrument panel top pad. One 15.2 X 22.8 centimeter (6 X 9 inch) Premium speaker is located in each front door. There is also one coaxial 13.3 centimeter (5.25 inch) diameter Premium full-range speaker located in each rear door (quad cab) or B-pillar (regular cab). The premium speaker system also includes a power amplifier mounted behind the glove box. The total available power of the premium speaker system is 368 watts. If equipped, a 25.4 centimeter (10 inch) subwoofer is located behind the center passenger seat along with a amplifier (rated at 150 watts) located under the center passenger seat. The total available power if equipped with the subwoofer and second power amplifier is 518 watts. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Speaker > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 12873 Speaker: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION Two wires connected to each speaker, one feed circuit (+) and one return circuit (-), allow the audio output signal electrical current to flow through the voice coil. For a complete wiring diagram Refer to Diagrams/Electrical. The wiring information includes wiring diagrams, proper wire and connector repair procedures, details of wire harness routing and retention, connector pin-out information and location views for the various wire harness connectors, splices and grounds. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Speaker > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 12874 Speaker: Testing and Inspection SPEAKER Any diagnosis of the Audio system should begin with the use of a scan tool. For information on the use of the scan tool, refer to the appropriate Diagnostic Service information. Refer to the appropriate wiring information. WARNING: Disable the airbag system before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, seat belt tensioner, side airbag, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the airbag system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the airbag system. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment and possible personal injury. CAUTION: The speaker output of the radio is a "floating ground" system. Do not allow any speaker lead to short to ground, as damage to the radio and/or amplifier may result. 1. If all speakers are inoperative, check the fuses in the Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM). If OK, go to Step 2. If not OK, repair the shorted circuit or component as required and replace the faulty fuse. 2. Check the amplifier fuse (if equipped) in the TIPM. If OK, go to Step 3. If not OK, repair the shorted circuit or component as required and replace the faulty fuse. 3. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position. Turn the radio receiver ON. Adjust the balance and fader control controls to check the performance of each individual speaker. Note the speaker locations that are not performing correctly. Go to Step 4. 4. Turn the radio receiver OFF. Turn the ignition OFF. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. If vehicle is not equipped with an amplifier , remove the radio receiver. If vehicle is equipped with an amplifier, disconnect wire harness connector at output side of amplifier. Go to Step 5. 5. Check both the speaker feed (+) circuit and return (-) circuit cavities for the inoperative speaker at the radio receiver wire harness connector for continuity to ground. There should be no continuity. If OK, go to Step 6. If not OK, repair the shorted speaker feed (+) and/or return (-) circuits(s) to the speaker as required. 6. Disconnect wire harness connector at the inoperative speaker. Check for continuity between the speaker feed (+) circuit cavities of the radio receiver wire harness connector or if equipped, the amplifier wire harness connector and the speaker wire harness connector. Repeat the check between the speaker return (-) circuit cavities of the radio receiver wire harness connector and the speaker wire harness connector. In each case, there should be continuity. If OK, replace the faulty speaker. If not OK, repair the open speaker feed (+) and/or return (-) circuits(s) as required. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Speaker > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Speaker: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL FRONT DOOR SPEAKER 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. 2. Remove front door trim panel See: Body and Frame/Doors, Hood and Trunk/Doors/Front Door/Front Door Panel/Service and Repair/Front Door Trim Panel - Removal . 3. Remove mounting fasteners. 4. Disconnect electrical harness connector and remove speaker. INSTRUMENT PANEL CENTER SPEAKER 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. 2. Remove instrument panel top cover See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Service and Repair/Instrument Panel Cover - Removal . 3. Remove speaker mounting fasteners. 4. Disconnect electrical harness connector and remove speaker. INSTRUMENT PANEL END SPEAKER Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Speaker > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 12877 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. 2. Remove instrument panel top cover See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Service and Repair/Instrument Panel Cover - Removal . 3. Remove speaker mounting fasteners. 4. Disconnect electrical harness connector and remove speaker. REAR CAB SIDE SPEAKER 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. 2. Remove B-pillar lower trim See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Trim Panel/Service and Repair/Pillar Trim/B-Pillar Trim . 3. Remove speaker mounting fasteners. 4. Disconnect electrical harness connector and remove speaker. REAR DOOR SPEAKER 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. 2. Remove rear door trim panel See: Body and Frame/Doors, Hood and Trunk/Doors/Rear Door/Rear Door Panel/Service and Repair/Rear Door Trim Panel - Removal . 3. Remove speaker mounting fasteners. 4. Disconnect electrical harness connector and remove speaker. SUBWOOFER - REGULAR CAB Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Speaker > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 12878 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. 2. Remove mounting fasteners to subwoofer housing. 3. Disconnect electrical harness connector. 4. Remove subwoofer from vehicle. SUBWOOFER - QUAD CAB Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Speaker > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 12879 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. 2. Raise left rear seat to access subwoofer. 3. Disconnect electrical harness connector. 4. Remove mounting fasteners and remove subwoofer. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Speaker > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 12880 Speaker: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION FRONT DOOR SPEAKER 1. Connect electrical harness connector and install speaker. 2. Install and tighten mounting fasteners. 3. Install front door trim panel See: Body and Frame/Doors, Hood and Trunk/Doors/Front Door/Front Door Panel/Service and Repair/Front Door Trim Panel - Installation . 4. Connect battery negative cable. INSTRUMENT PANEL CENTER SPEAKER 1. Connect electrical harness connector and install speaker. 2. Install and tighten mounting fasteners. 3. Install instrument panel top cover See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Service and Repair/Instrument Panel Cover - Installation . 4. Connect battery negative cable. INSTRUMENT PANEL END SPEAKER Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Speaker > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 12881 1. Connect electrical harness connector and install speaker. 2. Install and tighten mounting fasteners. 3. Install instrument panel top cover See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Service and Repair/Instrument Panel Cover - Installation . 4. Connect battery negative cable. REAR CAB SIDE SPEAKER 1. Connect electrical harness connector and install speaker. 2. Install and tighten mounting fasteners. 3. Install B-pillar lower trim See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Trim Panel/Service and Repair/Pillar Trim/B-Pillar Trim . 4. Connect battery negative cable. REAR DOOR SPEAKER 1. Connect electrical harness connector and install speaker. 2. Install and tighten mounting fasteners. 3. Install rear door trim panel See: Body and Frame/Doors, Hood and Trunk/Doors/Rear Door/Rear Door Panel/Service and Repair/Rear Door Trim Panel - Installation . 4. Connect battery negative cable. SUBWOOFER - REGULAR CAB Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Speaker > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 12882 1. Position subwoofer housing into the vehicle. 2. Connect electrical harness connector. 3. Install mounting fasteners. 4. Connect battery negative cable. SUBWOOFER - QUAD CAB Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Speaker > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 12883 1. Position subwoofer to vehicle. 2. Connect electrical harness connector. 3. Install and tighten mounting fasteners. 4. Lower seat. 5. Connect battery negative cable. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Keyless Entry Module > Component Information > Locations Keyless Entry Module: Locations Component ID: 213 Component : MODULE-SENTRY KEY REMOTE ENTRY/WCM Connector: Name : MODULE-SENTRY KEY REMOTE ENTRY/WCM Color : BLACK # of pins : 8 Pin Circuit Description 1 G20 20VT/BR IGNITION SWITCH SENSE 2 D508 20WT/GY COM-LIN TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR LAN 3 F20 20PK/WT FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) 4 Z109 20BK/GY GROUND 5 A114 18GY/RD FUSED B(+) 6 D55 20WT/OR CAN B BUS (+) 7 D54 20WT CAN B BUS (-) 8-Component Location - 47 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Keyless Entry Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 12888 Component Location - 41 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Keyless Entry Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 12889 Component Location - 42 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Keyless Entry Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 12890 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Keyless Entry Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 12891 Keyless Entry Module: Diagrams Component ID: 213 Component : MODULE-SENTRY KEY REMOTE ENTRY/WCM Connector: Name : MODULE-SENTRY KEY REMOTE ENTRY/WCM Color : BLACK # of pins : 8 Pin Circuit Description 1 G20 20VT/BR IGNITION SWITCH SENSE 2 D508 20WT/GY COM-LIN TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR LAN 3 F20 20PK/WT FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) 4 Z109 20BK/GY GROUND 5 A114 18GY/RD FUSED B(+) 6 D55 20WT/OR CAN B BUS (+) 7 D54 20WT CAN B BUS (-) 8-Component Location - 47 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Keyless Entry Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 12892 Component Location - 41 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Keyless Entry Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 12893 Component Location - 42 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Keyless Entry Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 12894 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Keyless Entry Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Remote Keyless Entry Module Keyless Entry Module: Description and Operation Remote Keyless Entry Module Description DESCRIPTION When an RKE lock message is sent to the instrument cluster, the instrument cluster actuates the door locks, the interior lighting is turned off, the horn chirps (if this feature is enabled), the park lamps flash (if this feature is enabled) and, if the vehicle is so equipped, the Vehicle Theft Security System (VTSS) is armed. When an RKE unlock message is sent to the instrument cluster, the instrument cluster actuates the driver side front door (or all doors if this feature is enabled) unlock, the interior lighting is turned on and, if the vehicle is so equipped, the VTSS is disarmed. When an RKE panic message is sent to the instrument cluster, the instrument cluster actuates the driver side front door (or all doors if this feature is enabled) unlock, the interior lighting is turned on and, if the vehicle is so equipped, the VTSS is disarmed. The panic message will also cause the exterior lamps (including the headlights) to flash, and the horn to sound for about three minutes, or until a second panic message is sent to the instrument cluster. A vehicle speed of about 25.7 Km/h(15 mph) will also cancel the panic event. Operation OPERATION Whenever the vehicle battery power is interrupted, the Remote Keyless Module (RKE) Module will retain all vehicle access codes in its memory. When replacing or adding a key fob transmitter (maximum of 4) a scan tool is required to program the RKE Module to accept the new Vehicle Access Code if a customer owned transmitter is not available. If a functioning transmitter is available, See: Antitheft and Alarm Systems/Keyless Entry/Keyless Entry Transmitter/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Keyless Entry Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Remote Keyless Entry Module > Page 12897 Keyless Entry Module: Description and Operation Sentry Key Remote Entry Module Description DESCRIPTION The Sentry Key REmote Entry Module (SKREEM) (1) is sometimes referred to as the Wireless Control Module (WCM). The SKREEM is the primary component of the Sentry Key Immobilizer System (SKIS). It is also the receiver for the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) system. The SKREEM is located on the right side of the steering column, near the ignition lock cylinder housing and is concealed beneath the steering column shrouds. The molded black plastic housing for the SKREEM has an integral molded plastic halo-like antenna ring (4) that extends from the bottom. When the SKREEM is properly installed on the steering column, the antenna ring is oriented around the circumference of the ignition lock cylinder housing. A single integral connector receptacle (3) is located just behind the antenna ring on the bottom of the SKREEM housing. An integral molded plastic mounting tab (2) on the rear corner of the SKREEM housing has a hole in the center through which a screw passes to secure the unit to the steering column. The SKREEM is connected to the vehicle electrical system through a single take out and connector of the instrument panel wire harness. Two SKREEM modules are used: one for vehicles equipped with RKE only, and one for vehicles equipped with RKE and SKIS. The SKREEM cannot be adjusted or repaired. If ineffective or damaged, the entire SKREEM unit must be replaced. Operation OPERATION The Sentry Key REmote Entry Module (SKREEM) (also known as the Wireless Control Module/WCM) contains a Radio Frequency (RF) transceiver and a microprocessor. The SKREEM transmits RF signals to, and receives RF signals from the Sentry Key transponder through a tuned antenna enclosed within the molded plastic antenna ring integral to the SKREEM housing. If this antenna ring is not mounted properly around the ignition lock cylinder housing, communication problems between the SKREEM and the transponder may arise. These communication problems will result in Sentry Key transponder-related faults. The SKREEM also serves as the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) RF receiver. See: Body and Frame/Locks/Power Locks/Description and Operation/Description . The SKREEM communicates over the Controller Area Network (CAN) data bus with the ElectroMechanical Instrument Cluster (EMIC) (also known as the Cab Compartment Node/CCN), the Powertrain Control Module (PCM)/Engine Control Module (ECM) or the diagnostic scan tool. The SKREEM and the PCM/ECM both use software that includes a rolling code algorithm strategy, which helps to reduce the possibility of unauthorized Sentry Key Immobilizer System (SKIS) disarming. The rolling code algorithm ensures security by preventing an override of the SKIS through the unauthorized substitution of the SKREEM or the PCM/ECM. However, the use of this strategy also means that replacement of either the SKREEM or the PCM/ECM units will require a system initialization procedure to restore system operation. The SKREEM retains in memory the ID numbers of any Sentry Key transponder that is programmed into it. A maximum of eight Sentry Key transponders can be programmed into the SKREEM. For added system security, each SKREEM is programmed with a unique Secret Key code. This code is stored in memory, sent over the CAN data bus to the PCM or ECM, and is encoded to the transponder of every Sentry Key that is programmed into the SKREEM. Therefore, the Secret Key code is a common element that is found in every component of the SKIS. Another security code called a PIN, is used to gain access to the SKREEM Secured Access Mode. The Secured Access Mode is required during service Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Keyless Entry Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Remote Keyless Entry Module > Page 12898 to perform the SKIS initialization and Sentry Key transponder programming procedures. The SKREEM also stores the Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) in its memory, which it learns through a CAN data bus message from the PCM or ECM during SKIS initialization. In the event that a SKREEM replacement is required, the Secret Key code can be transferred to the new SKREEM from the PCM or ECM using a diagnostic scan tool and the SKIS initialization procedure. Proper completion of the SKIS initialization will allow the existing Sentry Keys to be programmed into the new SKREEM so that new keys will not be required. In the event that the original Secret Key code cannot be recovered, SKREEM replacement will also require new Sentry Keys. The diagnostic scan tool will alert the technician during the SKIS initialization procedure if new Sentry Keys are required. When the ignition switch is turned to the ON position, the SKREEM transmits an RF signal to excite the transponder in the ignition key. The SKREEM then waits for an RF signal response from the transponder. If the response received identifies the key as valid, the SKREEM sends an electronic valid key message to the PCM/ECM over the CAN bus. If the response received identifies the key as invalid or if no response is received from the key transponder, the SKREEM sends an invalid key message to the PCM/ECM. The PCM/ECM will enable or disable engine operation based upon the status of the SKREEM messages. It is important to note that the default condition in the PCM or ECM is an invalid key ; therefore, if no message is received from the SKREEM by the PCM or ECM, the engine will be disabled and the vehicle immobilized after two seconds of running. The SKREEM also sends security indicator request messages to the EMIC over the CAN data bus to tell the EMIC how to operate the security indicator. The security indicator request message from the SKREEM tells the EMIC to turn the indicator ON for about three seconds each time the ignition switch is turned to the ON position as a bulb test. After completion of the bulb test, the SKREEM sends security indicator request messages to the EMIC to turn the indicator OFF, turn the indicator ON, or to flash the indicator ON and OFF. If the security indicator flashes or stays ON solid after the bulb test, it signifies a SKIS fault. If the SKREEM detects a system malfunction or the SKIS has become ineffective, the security indicator will stay ON solid. If the SKREEM detects an invalid key or if a key transponder-related fault exists, the security indicator will flash. If the vehicle is equipped with the Customer Learn transponder programming feature, the SKREEM will also send messages to the EMIC to flash the security indicator whenever the Customer Learn programming mode is being utilized. . The SKIS performs a self-test each time the ignition switch is turned to the ON position, and will store fault information in the form of a Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) in SKREEM memory if a system malfunction is detected. The hard wired circuits of the SKREEM may be diagnosed using conventional diagnostic tools and procedures. Refer to the appropriate wiring information. However, conventional diagnostic methods will not prove conclusive in the diagnosis of the SKREEM or the electronic controls or communication between other modules and devices that provide some features of the SKIS. The most reliable, efficient, and accurate means to diagnose the SKREEM or the electronic controls and communication related to SKREEM operation requires the use of a diagnostic scan tool. Refer to the appropriate diagnostic information. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Keyless Entry Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 12899 Keyless Entry Module: Testing and Inspection REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY MODULE The most reliable, efficient, and accurate means to diagnose the power lock system requires the use of a scan tool and the proper Diagnostic Procedures information. Refer to the appropriate wiring information. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Keyless Entry Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Remote Keyless Entry Module Keyless Entry Module: Service and Repair Remote Keyless Entry Module Removal REMOVAL See: Sentry Key Remote Entry Module/Removal Installation INSTALLATION See: Sentry Key Remote Entry Module/Installation Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Keyless Entry Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Remote Keyless Entry Module > Page 12902 Keyless Entry Module: Service and Repair Sentry Key Remote Entry Module Removal REMOVAL WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury on vehicles equipped with airbags, disable the Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, airbag, seat belt tensioner, impact sensor, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the SRS. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment. 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. 2. Remove the screw (2) that secures the tilt steering column knob (1) and remove it from the tilt actuator (3) on the left side of the column. 3. From below the steering column, remove the two outboard screws that secure the upper column shroud (1) to the lower shroud (3). 4. Using hand pressure, push inward on both sides of the upper shroud above the parting line of the lower shroud to release the snap features that secure the two shroud halves to each other. 5. Remove the upper shroud from the lower shroud and the steering column. 6. Remove the one center screw that secures the lower shroud to the steering column (4). 7. Remove the lower shroud from the steering column. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Keyless Entry Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Remote Keyless Entry Module > Page 12903 8. Disconnect the wire harness connector (2) from the Sentry Key REmote Entry Module (SKREEM) (1). 9. Remove the screw (3) that secures the SKREEM (1) to the steering column (2). 10. Disengage the antenna ring from around the ignition lock cylinder housing and remove the SKREEM. Installation INSTALLATION WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury on vehicles equipped with airbags, disable the Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, airbag, seat belt tensioner, impact sensor, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the SRS. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Keyless Entry Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Remote Keyless Entry Module > Page 12904 1. Position the Sentry Key REmote Entry Module (SKREEM) (1) onto the steering column (2) with the antenna ring oriented around the ignition lock cylinder housing. 2. Install and tighten the screw (3) that secures the SKREEM to the steering column housing. Tighten the screw to 2 Nm (20 in. lbs.). 3. Reconnect the wire harness connector (2) to the SKREEM (1). 4. Position the lower shroud (3) onto the steering column (4). 5. From below the steering column, install and tighten the one center screw that secures the lower shroud to the steering column. Tighten the screw to 2 Nm (20 in. lbs.). 6. Position the upper shroud (1) onto the steering column over the lower shroud. On vehicles equipped with an automatic transmission, be certain to engage the gearshift lever gap hider into the opening in the right side of both shroud halves. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Keyless Entry Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Remote Keyless Entry Module > Page 12905 7. Align the snap features on the upper shroud with the receptacles in the lower shroud and apply hand pressure to snap them together. 8. Install and tighten the two outboard screws that secure the upper shroud to the lower shroud. Tighten the screws to 2 Nm (20 in. lbs.). 9. Position the tilt steering column knob (1) onto the tilt adjuster actuator (3) on the left side of the steering column, then install and tighten the screw (2) to secure the knob to the actuator. Tighten the screw to 2 Nm (20 in. lbs.). 10. Reconnect the battery negative cable. NOTE: On vehicles equipped with the optional Sentry Key Immobilizer System (SKIS) if the SKREEM is replaced with a new unit, a diagnostic scan tool MUST be used to initialize the new SKREEM and to program at least two Sentry Key transponders before the vehicle can be operated. See: Antitheft and Alarm Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing Module > Component Information > Locations Towing Module: Locations Component ID: 203 Component : MODULE-BRAKE PROVISION Connector: Name : MODULE-BRAKE PROVISION Color : BLUE # of pins : 4 Pin Circuit Description 1 Z998 18BK GROUND 2 L50 18WT/TN BRAKE LAMP SWITCH OUTPUT 3 B40 14DG TRAILER TOW BRAKE B(+) 4 A400 14TN/RD FUSED B(+) Component Location - 31 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 12909 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 12910 Towing Module: Diagrams Component ID: 203 Component : MODULE-BRAKE PROVISION Connector: Name : MODULE-BRAKE PROVISION Color : BLUE # of pins : 4 Pin Circuit Description 1 Z998 18BK GROUND 2 L50 18WT/TN BRAKE LAMP SWITCH OUTPUT 3 B40 14DG TRAILER TOW BRAKE B(+) 4 A400 14TN/RD FUSED B(+) Component Location - 31 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 12911 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Voice Activation Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Voice Activation Module: > 08-028-08 > Sep > 08 > Cell Phone - Voice Recognition Screen Locks Up Voice Activation Module: Customer Interest Cell Phone - Voice Recognition Screen Locks Up NUMBER: 08-028-08 GROUP: Electrical DATE: September 18, 2008 SUBJECT: Voice Recognition Screen Lock-up on REN or REZ Radio Equipped With Hands-Free Communications OVERVIEW: This bulletin involves replacing the Hands Free Module (HFM). MODELS: 2008 (DR/DH/DC/D1) Ram Truck (1500/2500/3500) 2008 (HB) Durango 2008 (HG) Aspen 2008 (JS) Avenger/Sebring (U.S. and International Markets) 2008 (KA) Nitro (U.S. and International Markets) 2008 (KK) Liberty (U.S. and International Markets) 2008 (LX) 300C/Magnum/Charger 2008 (LE) 300/ 300C Touring (International Markets) 2008 (LC) Challenger 2008 (RI) Town & Country/Grand Caravan/Grand Voyager (U.S. and International Markets) 2008 (WK) Grand Cherokee 2008 (WH) Grand Cherokee (International Markets) 2008 (XK) Commander 2008 (XH) Commander (International Markets) NOTE: This bulletin applies to vehicles equipped with radio sales codes REN or REZ and Hands4ree Communications Sales Codes RSP or RSQ built before the following dates: ^ (HB/HG) built before November 13, 2007 (MDH 1113XX) ^ (LX/LC) built before February 28, 2008 (MDH 0228XX) ^ (DR) built before January 26, 2008 (MDH 0126XX) ^ (WK/XK) built before March 2, 2008 (MDH 0302XX) ^ (LE, WH/XH, DH, DC, D1) built before November 6, 2007 (MDH 1106XX) ^ (JS) built before May 6, 2008 (MDH 0506XX) ^ (RT) built before December 13, 2007 (MDH 1213XX) ^ (KK/KA) built before February 26, 2008 (MDH 0226XX) Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Voice Activation Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Voice Activation Module: > 08-028-08 > Sep > 08 > Cell Phone - Voice Recognition Screen Locks Up > Page 12920 SYMPTOM/CONDITION: Customers may experience one of the following conditions: a. A "lock up condition of the radio screen when the Voice Recognition (VR) button is pressed b. When the VR button is pressed, the radio display changes to the phone screen and there is a lack of the "Ready" audio prompt. If the above symptom/condition is experienced, perform the following diagnostic procedure. DIAGNOSIS: 1. Turn ignition key on. 2. Using a Scan Tool (StarSCAN(R)) read and identify the current HFM part number in the vehicle. 3. Is the HFM part number 05064560AC, 05064448AE, 05064561AC, 05064482AE, 05064483AE or greater? a. Yes >> This bulletin does not apply, further diagnosis is required. b. No >> perform the repair procedure. PARTS REQUIRED: REPAIR PROCEDURE: 1. Replace the Hands Free Module. Refer to the service procedure available on DealerCONNECT/TechCONNECT, Group 8 Electrical > 8T Navigation and Telecommunications> MODULE, Hands free remove and Installation procedures. POLICY: Reimbursable within the provisions of the warranty. TIME ALLOWANCE: Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Voice Activation Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Voice Activation Module: > 08-028-08 > Sep > 08 > Cell Phone - Voice Recognition Screen Locks Up > Page 12921 FAILURE CODE: Disclaimer: This bulletin is supplied as technical information only and is not an authorization for repair. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Voice Activation Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Voice Activation Module: > 08-028-08 > Sep > 08 > Cell Phone - Voice Recognition Screen Locks Up Voice Activation Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Cell Phone - Voice Recognition Screen Locks Up NUMBER: 08-028-08 GROUP: Electrical DATE: September 18, 2008 SUBJECT: Voice Recognition Screen Lock-up on REN or REZ Radio Equipped With Hands-Free Communications OVERVIEW: This bulletin involves replacing the Hands Free Module (HFM). MODELS: 2008 (DR/DH/DC/D1) Ram Truck (1500/2500/3500) 2008 (HB) Durango 2008 (HG) Aspen 2008 (JS) Avenger/Sebring (U.S. and International Markets) 2008 (KA) Nitro (U.S. and International Markets) 2008 (KK) Liberty (U.S. and International Markets) 2008 (LX) 300C/Magnum/Charger 2008 (LE) 300/ 300C Touring (International Markets) 2008 (LC) Challenger 2008 (RI) Town & Country/Grand Caravan/Grand Voyager (U.S. and International Markets) 2008 (WK) Grand Cherokee 2008 (WH) Grand Cherokee (International Markets) 2008 (XK) Commander 2008 (XH) Commander (International Markets) NOTE: This bulletin applies to vehicles equipped with radio sales codes REN or REZ and Hands4ree Communications Sales Codes RSP or RSQ built before the following dates: ^ (HB/HG) built before November 13, 2007 (MDH 1113XX) ^ (LX/LC) built before February 28, 2008 (MDH 0228XX) ^ (DR) built before January 26, 2008 (MDH 0126XX) ^ (WK/XK) built before March 2, 2008 (MDH 0302XX) ^ (LE, WH/XH, DH, DC, D1) built before November 6, 2007 (MDH 1106XX) ^ (JS) built before May 6, 2008 (MDH 0506XX) ^ (RT) built before December 13, 2007 (MDH 1213XX) ^ (KK/KA) built before February 26, 2008 (MDH 0226XX) Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Voice Activation Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Voice Activation Module: > 08-028-08 > Sep > 08 > Cell Phone - Voice Recognition Screen Locks Up > Page 12927 SYMPTOM/CONDITION: Customers may experience one of the following conditions: a. A "lock up condition of the radio screen when the Voice Recognition (VR) button is pressed b. When the VR button is pressed, the radio display changes to the phone screen and there is a lack of the "Ready" audio prompt. If the above symptom/condition is experienced, perform the following diagnostic procedure. DIAGNOSIS: 1. Turn ignition key on. 2. Using a Scan Tool (StarSCAN(R)) read and identify the current HFM part number in the vehicle. 3. Is the HFM part number 05064560AC, 05064448AE, 05064561AC, 05064482AE, 05064483AE or greater? a. Yes >> This bulletin does not apply, further diagnosis is required. b. No >> perform the repair procedure. PARTS REQUIRED: REPAIR PROCEDURE: 1. Replace the Hands Free Module. Refer to the service procedure available on DealerCONNECT/TechCONNECT, Group 8 Electrical > 8T Navigation and Telecommunications> MODULE, Hands free remove and Installation procedures. POLICY: Reimbursable within the provisions of the warranty. TIME ALLOWANCE: Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Voice Activation Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Voice Activation Module: > 08-028-08 > Sep > 08 > Cell Phone - Voice Recognition Screen Locks Up > Page 12928 FAILURE CODE: Disclaimer: This bulletin is supplied as technical information only and is not an authorization for repair. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Voice Activation Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 12929 Voice Activation Module: Locations Component ID: 208 Component : MODULE-HANDS FREE Connector: Name : MODULE-HANDS FREE Color : DK. GRAY # of pins : 22 Pin Circuit Description 1 A114 18GY/RD FUSED B(+) 2-3-4 D54 20WT CAN B BUS (-) 5 X722 20LB/DG MICROPHONE 2 IN (+) 6-7-- 8 X716 20GY/TN LEFT AUDIO OUTPUT 9 X776 20TN/GY RIGHT AUDIO OUTPUT 10 X795 20DG COMMON AUDIO OUTPUT 11 - 12 - 13 - 14 D55 20WT/OR CAN B BUS (+) 15 - 16 X712 20DG/LB MICROPHONE 1 IN (+) 17 X792 20LB/DG MICROPHONE IN (-) 18 - 19 - 20 X793 20DG/YL MICROPHONE FEED 21 X835 20OR/GY SENSOR GROUND 22 Z970 18BK GROUND Component Location - 46 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Voice Activation Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 12930 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Voice Activation Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 12931 Voice Activation Module: Diagrams Component ID: 208 Component : MODULE-HANDS FREE Connector: Name : MODULE-HANDS FREE Color : DK. GRAY # of pins : 22 Pin Circuit Description 1 A114 18GY/RD FUSED B(+) 2-3-4 D54 20WT CAN B BUS (-) 5 X722 20LB/DG MICROPHONE 2 IN (+) 6-7-- 8 X716 20GY/TN LEFT AUDIO OUTPUT 9 X776 20TN/GY RIGHT AUDIO OUTPUT 10 X795 20DG COMMON AUDIO OUTPUT 11 - 12 - 13 - 14 D55 20WT/OR CAN B BUS (+) 15 - 16 X712 20DG/LB MICROPHONE 1 IN (+) 17 X792 20LB/DG MICROPHONE IN (-) 18 - 19 - 20 X793 20DG/YL MICROPHONE FEED 21 X835 20OR/GY SENSOR GROUND 22 Z970 18BK GROUND Component Location - 46 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Voice Activation Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 12932 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Winch Relay > Component Information > Description and Operation Winch Relay: Description and Operation DESCRIPTION RELAY PACK Electrical operation of the control assembly consists of four heavy duty relays, a thermal-switch located on the motor armature brush holder and a Low Voltage Interrupt (LVI) located in the control assembly. The thermal-switch interrupts the power-in function and the LVI affects both the power-in and power-out functions and must be reset by allowing the charging circuit voltage to rise above 10 volts for more than 30 seconds. The thermal switch is reset only by allowing the winch motor to cool adequately (about 30 minutes). Relay number 1 and 3 control current flow through the field windings and relay number 2 and 4 supply current to the motor armature. Operation In the power-out mode, relay number 2 and 3 are energized by the remote control switch. Current flows from the positive battery terminal through relay number 3 then through the black motor cable to the number 2 and number 1 field windings. From the black motor cable current then flows through solenoid number 2 to the motor armature to ground. In power-in mode, relay number 1 and 4 are energized. Current again flows from the battery positive cable, but this time current flows through solenoid number 1 then through field winding number 1. Current flowing in the reverse direction through the field windings cause the motor to turn in the opposite direction. From the red motor cable current then flows through relay number 4 to the black cable going to the motor armature to ground. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Winch Relay > Component Information > Service and Repair > Relay Winch Relay: Service and Repair Relay Removal REMOVAL 1. Remove the relay pack (1). See: Relay Pack/Removal 2. Remove the nuts (2 & 3), disconnect the cables and remove the bus straps (4). NOTE: Relay #4 shown, all others similar. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Winch Relay > Component Information > Service and Repair > Relay > Page 12938 3. Remove the nuts (1) and disconnect the control wires (2). 4. Slide the relay (1) out of the retaining tab (2) and remove. Installation INSTALLATION NOTE: Relay #4 shown, all others similar. 1. Slide the relay (1) into the retaining tab (2). 2. Install the control wires (2) and install the nuts (1). 3. Tighten the nuts to 3 Nm (25 in. lbs.). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Winch Relay > Component Information > Service and Repair > Relay > Page 12939 4. Install the bus straps (4) and connect the cables. 5. Install the nuts (2 & 3) and tighten to 9.5 Nm (85 in. lbs.). 6. Install the relay pack (1). See: Relay Pack/Installation Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Winch Relay > Component Information > Service and Repair > Relay > Page 12940 Winch Relay: Service and Repair Relay Pack Removal REMOVAL 1. Disconnect and isolate battery negative cable (3). 2. Remove the winch assembly (2). See: Winch/Service and Repair/Winch/Removal 3. Remove the nut and disconnect the red battery positive cable (1). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Winch Relay > Component Information > Service and Repair > Relay > Page 12941 NOTE: Relay #4 shown, all others similar. 4. Remove the control wire nuts (1) and disconnect the control wires (2) from each relay. Installation INSTALLATION NOTE: Relay #4 shown, all others similar. 1. Install the control wires (2) to all the relays and install the nuts (1). 2. Tighten the nuts to 3 Nm (25 in. lbs.). 3. Install the red battery positive cable (1) and install the switch wire. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Winch Relay > Component Information > Service and Repair > Relay > Page 12942 4. Install the nut and tighten to 10 Nm (85 in. lbs.). 5. Install the relay pack cover (1) and install the three screws (2). 6. Install the winch assembly (2). See: Winch/Service and Repair/Winch/Installation 7. Connect the battery negative cable (3) and verify winch operation. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm) > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 475 Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm): Locations Component ID 475 Component ID: 475 Component : SWITCH-HOOD AJAR Connector: Name : SWITCH-HOOD AJAR Color : # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (GAS) Pin Circuit Description 1 G70 20VT/LB HOOD AJAR SWITCH SENSE 2 G930 20VT/TN AAT RETURN Component Location - 29 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm) > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 475 > Page 12948 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm) > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 475 > Page 12949 Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm): Locations Component ID 492 Component ID: 492 Component : SWITCH-HOOD AJAR Connector: Name : SWITCH-HOOD AJAR Color : # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (GAS) Pin Circuit Description 1 G70 20VT/LB HOOD AJAR SWITCH SENSE 2 G930 20VT/TN AAT RETURN Component Location - 29 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm) > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 475 > Page 12950 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm) > Component Information > Diagrams > Component ID 475 Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm): Diagrams Component ID 475 Component ID: 475 Component : SWITCH-HOOD AJAR Connector: Name : SWITCH-HOOD AJAR Color : # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (GAS) Pin Circuit Description 1 G70 20VT/LB HOOD AJAR SWITCH SENSE 2 G930 20VT/TN AAT RETURN Component Location - 29 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm) > Component Information > Diagrams > Component ID 475 > Page 12953 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm) > Component Information > Diagrams > Component ID 475 > Page 12954 Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm): Diagrams Component ID 492 Component ID: 492 Component : SWITCH-HOOD AJAR Connector: Name : SWITCH-HOOD AJAR Color : # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (GAS) Pin Circuit Description 1 G70 20VT/LB HOOD AJAR SWITCH SENSE 2 G930 20VT/TN AAT RETURN Component Location - 29 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm) > Component Information > Diagrams > Component ID 475 > Page 12955 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm) > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm): Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The hood ajar switch is a normally closed, single pole, spring-loaded plunger actuated switch. This switch has two unique versions that are used in two different applications. One switch is used only on vehicles equipped with the Vehicle Theft Alarm (VTA) system for sale in certain export markets where protection of the underhood area is required equipment. The second switch is used only on domestic vehicles equipped with an optional remote starter system. The molded plastic switch body (5) has an integral molded connector receptacle (1) on the lower end containing two terminal pins. The switch is connected to the vehicle electrical system through a dedicated take out of the headlamp and dash wire harness. Two integral latches (2) lock the switch into a keyed mounting hole in the stamped steel switch mounting bracket. The mounting bracket is secured with screws to the inboard side of the right front fender load beam within the engine compartment. A molded plastic striker secured to the underside of the hood panel inner reinforcement actuates the switch plunger as the hood panel is closed. The switch plunger (3) extends through a mounting collar (4) and a sleeve-like retainer ring on the upper end of the switch body. The retainer ring has a one time, self-adjustment feature that is activated after the switch is installed by closing the hood. The retainer ring is also color-coded to aid in identifying the switch application. A dark brown retainer ring identifies the underhood security switch application, while a white retainer ring identifies the remote starter system application. An installed hood ajar switch cannot be readjusted or repaired. If the switch is damaged, ineffective, or requires readjustment, it must be replaced with a new unit. The hood ajar switch striker is not intended for reuse. If the striker is removed from the hood inner reinforcement for any reason, it must be replaced with a new unit. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm) > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 12958 Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm): Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The hood ajar switches are interchangeable physically, but not functionally. In each case, the hood ajar switch is a normally closed switch that is held open as the spring-loaded switch plunger is depressed by the striker on the inner hood panel reinforcement when the hood panel is closed and latched. When the hood is opened, the spring-loaded switch plunger extends from the switch body and the switch contacts are closed. In the underhood security application (export vehicles only - dark brown retainer ring), the switch is connected in series between ground and the hood ajar switch sense input of the Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM). The TIPM uses an internal resistor pull up to monitor the state of the hood ajar switch contacts. In the remote starter system application (domestic vehicles only - white retainer ring) the switch has a 1 kilohm diagnostic resistor connected in parallel to the switch contacts between the two switch terminals. The switch is connected in series between an output of the TIPM and the hood ajar switch sense input of the TIPM. The TIPM continually monitors this circuit and will store a Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) for any fault that it detects. The components of the switch self-adjustment feature include an integral stop on the shaft of the plunger and a ribbed, ratcheting sleeve-like retainer ring at the top of the switch body from which the plunger extends. With the switch mounting collar secured in its mounting bracket, the plunger is depressed by the striker on the hood inner reinforcement as the hood is closed. As the plunger is depressed, the plunger stop contacts the top of the retainer ring and it is driven downward, ratcheting through the switch mounting collar until the hood is fully closed and latched. The ribs on the retainer ring are engaged within the mounting collar to maintain this adjusted position. The hood ajar switch as well as the hard wired circuits between the switch and the TIPM may be diagnosed using conventional diagnostic tools and procedures. Refer to the appropriate wiring information. However, conventional diagnostic methods will not prove conclusive in the diagnosis of the electronic controls or communication between modules and other devices related to hood ajar switch operation that provide some features of the export vehicle theft or domestic remote starter systems. The most reliable, efficient, and accurate means to diagnose the electronic controls and communication related to hood ajar switch operation requires the use of a diagnostic scan tool. Refer to the appropriate diagnostic information. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm) > Component Information > Service and Repair > Hood Ajar Switch Bracket Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm): Service and Repair Hood Ajar Switch Bracket Removal BRACKET 1. Remove the hood ajar switch (2) from the mounting bracket (3). See: Hood Ajar Switch Removal . 2. Remove the two screws (4) that secure the hood ajar switch bracket to the two rivet nuts (1) in the right front load beam (6). 3. Remove the hood ajar switch mounting bracket from the inboard side of the right front load beam. Installation BRACKET 1. Check to be certain that the two rivet nuts (1) on the inboard side of the right front load beam (6) are in good condition and properly secured. 2. Position the hood ajar switch mounting bracket (3) onto the right front load beam. 3. Install and tighten the two screws (4) that secure the mounting bracket to the load beam. Beginning with the rearward screw, tighten both screws to 8 Nm (71 in. lbs.). 4. Reinstall the hood ajar switch (2) into the mounting bracket. See: Hood Ajar Switch - Installation . Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm) > Component Information > Service and Repair > Hood Ajar Switch Bracket > Page 12961 Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm): Service and Repair Hood Ajar Switch Striker Removal STRIKER NOTE: The hood ajar switch striker is not intended for reuse. If the striker is removed from the hood inner reinforcement for any reason, it must be replaced. 1. Unlatch and open the hood. 2. Using a trim stick or another suitable wide flat-bladed tool, pry the rearward end of the hood ajar switch striker (2) away from the inner hood panel reinforcement (1) far enough to disengage the integral retainers from their mounting holes. 3. Remove the striker from the inner hood panel reinforcement and discard. Installation STRIKER NOTE: The hood ajar switch striker cap is not intended for reuse. If the striker cap is removed from the hood inner reinforcement for any reason, it must be replaced. 1. Position the new hood ajar switch striker (2) to the mounting holes in the inner hood panel reinforcement (1) over the hood ajar switch (3). 2. Using hand pressure, press the hood ajar switch striker upward into the mounting holes in the inner hood panel reinforcement until both integral retainers are fully engaged. 3. Close and latch the hood. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm) > Component Information > Service and Repair > Hood Ajar Switch Bracket > Page 12962 Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm): Service and Repair Hood Ajar Switch - Removal SWITCH 1. Unlatch and open the hood. 2. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. 3. From the top of the mounting bracket (3) on the right front load beam (6), squeeze the two hood ajar switch (2) latch tabs together and pull the switch upward. 4. Pull the hood ajar switch up through the hole in the mounting bracket far enough to access and disconnect the jumper wire harness connector (5) from the switch connector receptacle. 5. Remove the hood ajar switch from the mounting bracket. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm) > Component Information > Service and Repair > Hood Ajar Switch Bracket > Page 12963 Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm): Service and Repair Hood Ajar Switch - Installation SWITCH 1. Position the hood ajar switch (2) near the hole in the mounting bracket (3) on the right front load beam (6). 2. Route the jumper wire harness connector (5) through the switch mounting bracket and reconnect it to the switch connector receptacle. 3. From the top of the mounting bracket, press the switch downward into the mounting hole until the integral switch latch tabs lock it into place. 4. Reconnect the battery negative cable. 5. Close and latch the hood. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Pedal Positioning Switch > Component Information > Locations Pedal Positioning Switch: Locations Component ID: 480 Component : SWITCH-ADJUSTABLE PEDALS Connector: Name : SWITCH-ADJUSTABLE PEDALS Color : BLUE # of pins : 6 Qualifier : (EXCEPT BASE) Pin Circuit Description 1 P206 18LG/LB ADJUSTABLE PEDALS MOTOR REARWARD 2 A72 18RD/OR ADJUSTABLE PEDALS OUTPUT 3-4 Z146 18BK GROUND 5 F504 20GY/PK FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN) 6 P205 18LG/WT ADJUSTABLE PEDALS MOTOR FORWARD Component Location - 44 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Pedal Positioning Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 12967 Component Location - 50 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Pedal Positioning Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 12968 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Pedal Positioning Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 12969 Pedal Positioning Switch: Diagrams Component ID: 480 Component : SWITCH-ADJUSTABLE PEDALS Connector: Name : SWITCH-ADJUSTABLE PEDALS Color : BLUE # of pins : 6 Qualifier : (EXCEPT BASE) Pin Circuit Description 1 P206 18LG/LB ADJUSTABLE PEDALS MOTOR REARWARD 2 A72 18RD/OR ADJUSTABLE PEDALS OUTPUT 3-4 Z146 18BK GROUND 5 F504 20GY/PK FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN) 6 P205 18LG/WT ADJUSTABLE PEDALS MOTOR FORWARD Component Location - 44 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Pedal Positioning Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 12970 Component Location - 50 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Pedal Positioning Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 12971 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Pedal Positioning Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Pedal Positioning Switch: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL 1. Remove the lower drivers side bezel (4) See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Service and Repair/Instrument Panel Driver Side Bezel/Removal . 2. Disconnect the electrical connector (3) from the adjustable pedal switch (2). 3. Remove the switch (2) from the lower drivers side bezel (4) by squeezing the retaining clips together and pushing the switch outwards. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Pedal Positioning Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 12974 Pedal Positioning Switch: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION 1. Install the switch (2) to the lower drivers side bezel (4) by pushing the switch inwards seating the retaining clips to the lower drivers side bezel (4). 2. Reconnect the electrical connector (3) to the adjustable pedal switch (2). 3. Install the lower drivers side bezel (4) See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Service and Repair/Instrument Panel Driver Side Bezel/Installation . Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Remote Switch, Audio - Stereo > Component Information > Locations > Switch-Remote Radio-Left Remote Switch: Locations Switch-Remote Radio-Left Component ID: 504 Component : SWITCH-REMOTE RADIO-LEFT Connector: Name : SWITCH-REMOTE RADIO-LEFT Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Pin Circuit Description 1 X20 22GY/WT RADIO CONTROL MUX 2 G902 22WT/BR GROUND Component Location - 43 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Remote Switch, Audio - Stereo > Component Information > Locations > Switch-Remote Radio-Left > Page 12979 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Remote Switch, Audio - Stereo > Component Information > Locations > Switch-Remote Radio-Left > Page 12980 Remote Switch: Locations Switch-Remote Radio-Right Component ID: 505 Component : SWITCH-REMOTE RADIO-RIGHT Connector: Name : SWITCH-REMOTE RADIO-RIGHT Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Pin Circuit Description 1 X20 22GY/WT RADIO CONTROL MUX 2 G902 22WT/BR GROUND Component Location - 43 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Remote Switch, Audio - Stereo > Component Information > Locations > Switch-Remote Radio-Left > Page 12981 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Remote Switch, Audio - Stereo > Component Information > Diagrams > Switch-Remote Radio-Left Remote Switch: Diagrams Switch-Remote Radio-Left Component ID: 504 Component : SWITCH-REMOTE RADIO-LEFT Connector: Name : SWITCH-REMOTE RADIO-LEFT Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Pin Circuit Description 1 X20 22GY/WT RADIO CONTROL MUX 2 G902 22WT/BR GROUND Component Location - 43 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Remote Switch, Audio - Stereo > Component Information > Diagrams > Switch-Remote Radio-Left > Page 12984 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Remote Switch, Audio - Stereo > Component Information > Diagrams > Switch-Remote Radio-Left > Page 12985 Remote Switch: Diagrams Switch-Remote Radio-Right Component ID: 505 Component : SWITCH-REMOTE RADIO-RIGHT Connector: Name : SWITCH-REMOTE RADIO-RIGHT Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Pin Circuit Description 1 X20 22GY/WT RADIO CONTROL MUX 2 G902 22WT/BR GROUND Component Location - 43 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Remote Switch, Audio - Stereo > Component Information > Diagrams > Switch-Remote Radio-Left > Page 12986 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Remote Switch, Audio - Stereo > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Remote Switch: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION Two rocker-type switches (if equipped) are mounted on the back (instrument panel side) of the steering wheel spokes. The switch on the left spoke is the seek switch and has seek up, seek down, and preset station advance functions. The switch on the right spoke is the volume control switch and has volume up, and volume down functions. The switch on the right spoke also includes a "mode" control that allows the driver to sequentially select AM radio, FM radio, cassette player, CD player or CD changer (if equipped). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Remote Switch, Audio - Stereo > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 12989 Remote Switch: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The six switches in the two remote radio switch units are normally open, resistor multiplexed momentary switches that are hard wired to the Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) through the clockspring. The TIPM sends a five volt reference signal to both switch units on one circuit, and senses the status of all of the switches by reading the voltage drop on a second circuit. When the TIPM senses an input (voltage drop) from any one of the remote radio switches, it sends the proper switch status messages on the Programmable Communication Interface (PCI) data bus network to the radio receiver. The electronic circuitry within the radio receiver is programmed to respond to these remote radio switch status messages by adjusting the radio settings as requested. For diagnosis of the TIPM or the PCI data bus, the use of a scan tool and the proper Diagnostic Procedures information is recommended. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Remote Switch, Audio - Stereo > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 12990 Remote Switch: Testing and Inspection REMOTE SWITCHES Any diagnosis of the Audio system should begin with the use of scan tool. For information on the use of the scan tool, refer to the appropriate Diagnostic Service information. For a complete wiring diagram Refer to Diagrams/Electrical. WARNING: Disable the airbag system before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, seat belt tensioner, side airbag, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the airbag system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the airbag system. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment and possible personal injury. 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. 2. Remove the remote radio switch(es) from the steering wheel See: Service and Repair/Removal . 3. Use an ohmmeter to check the switch resistances as shown in the Remote Radio Switch Test chart. If the remote radio switch resistances check OK, go to STEP 4. If not OK, replace the faulty switch. 4. Connect the battery negative cable. Turn the ignition switch to the On position. Check for 5 volts at the radio control mux circuit cavities of the steering wheel wire harness connectors for both remote radio switches. If OK, go to STEP 5. If not OK, repair the open or shorted radio control mux circuit to the Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) as required. 5. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. Disconnect the 22-way instrument panel wire harness connector from the TIPM. Check for continuity between the remote radio switch ground circuit cavities of the steering wheel wire harness connectors for both remote radio switches and a good ground. There should be no continuity. If OK, go to STEP 6. If not OK, repair the shorted remote radio switch ground circuit to the TIPM as required. 6. Check for continuity between the remote radio switch ground circuit cavities of the steering wheel wire harness connectors for both remote radio switches and the 22-way instrument panel wire harness connector for the TIPM. There should be continuity. If OK, refer to the proper Diagnostic Procedures manual to test the TIPM and the PCI data bus. If not OK, repair the open remote radio switch ground circuit as required. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Remote Switch, Audio - Stereo > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Remote Switch: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL WARNING: Disable the airbag system before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, seat belt tensioner, side airbag, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the airbag system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the airbag system. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment and possible personal injury. 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. 2. Remove the driver airbag See: Restraint Systems/Air Bag Systems/Air Bag/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Driver Airbag Removal . 3. Remove the speed control switches (2) See: Cruise Control/Cruise Control Switch/Service and Repair/Removal . 4. Unplug the wire harness connector from the remote radio switch (1). 5. Depress the tabs on each side of each switch and push the switch through the rear steering wheel cover. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Remote Switch, Audio - Stereo > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 12993 Remote Switch: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION WARNING: Disable the airbag system before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, seat belt tensioner, side airbag, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the airbag system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the airbag system. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment and possible personal injury. 1. Install remote radio switch (1) to the steering wheel. 2. Connect the wire harness to the remote radio switch. 3. Install the speed control switches (2) See: Cruise Control/Cruise Control Switch/Service and Repair/Installation . 4. Install the driver airbag See: Restraint Systems/Air Bag Systems/Air Bag/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Driver Airbag Installation . 5. Connect the battery negative cable. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Steering Mounted Controls Communication Module > Component Information > Locations Steering Mounted Controls Communication Module: Locations Component ID: 214 Component : MODULE-STEERING CONTROL Connector: Name : MODULE-STEERING CONTROL C1 Color : WHITE # of pins : 6 Pin Circuit Description 1 Z909 20BK GROUND 2 X20 20GY/WT RADIO CONTROL MUX 3 V38 20VT/OR S/C SWITCH NO. 2 SIGNAL 4 V37 20VT S/C SWITCH NO. 1 SIGNAL 5 V937 20VT/BR S/C SWITCH RETURN 6 X3 20DG/VT HORN SWITCH SENSE Component Location - 47 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Steering Mounted Controls Communication Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 12997 Component Location - 42 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Steering Mounted Controls Communication Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 12998 Component Location - 43 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Steering Mounted Controls Communication Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 12999 Connector: Name : MODULE-STEERING CONTROL C2 Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (PREMIUM) Pin Circuit Description 1 G902 22WT/BR SWITCH MUX RETURN Pin Circuit Description 1 G902 22WT/BR SWITCH MUX RETURN Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Steering Mounted Controls Communication Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 13000 2 X20 22GY/WT RADIO CONTROL MUX 2 X20 22GY/WT RADIO CONTROL MUX Component Location - 47 Component Location - 42 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Steering Mounted Controls Communication Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 13001 Component Location - 43 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Steering Mounted Controls Communication Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 13002 Connector: Name : MODULE-STEERING CONTROL C3 Color : # of pins : 4 Pin Circuit Description 1 X3 20DG/VT HORN SWITCH SENSE 2 V937 22DB/DG S/C SWITCH RETURN 2 K900 22DB/DG SENSOR GROUND 3 V37 22VT S/C SWITCH NO. 1 SIGNAL 4 V38 22VT/OR S/C SWITCH NO. 2 SIGNAL Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Steering Mounted Controls Communication Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 13003 Component Location - 47 Component Location - 42 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Steering Mounted Controls Communication Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 13004 Component Location - 43 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Steering Mounted Controls Communication Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 13005 Connector: Name : MODULE-STEERING CONTROL C4 Color : YELLOW # of pins : 4 Pin Circuit Description 1 R61 20LG/VT DRIVER SQUIB 2 LINE 1 2 R63 20LG/WT DRIVER SQUIB 2 LINE 2 3 R43 20LG/BR DRIVER SQUIB 1 LINE 1 4 R45 20LG/OR DRIVER SQUIB 1 LINE 2 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Steering Mounted Controls Communication Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 13006 Component Location - 47 Component Location - 42 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Steering Mounted Controls Communication Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 13007 Component Location - 43 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Steering Mounted Controls Communication Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 13008 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Steering Mounted Controls Communication Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 13009 Steering Mounted Controls Communication Module: Diagrams Component ID: 214 Component : MODULE-STEERING CONTROL Connector: Name : MODULE-STEERING CONTROL C1 Color : WHITE # of pins : 6 Pin Circuit Description 1 Z909 20BK GROUND 2 X20 20GY/WT RADIO CONTROL MUX 3 V38 20VT/OR S/C SWITCH NO. 2 SIGNAL 4 V37 20VT S/C SWITCH NO. 1 SIGNAL 5 V937 20VT/BR S/C SWITCH RETURN 6 X3 20DG/VT HORN SWITCH SENSE Component Location - 47 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Steering Mounted Controls Communication Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 13010 Component Location - 42 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Steering Mounted Controls Communication Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 13011 Component Location - 43 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Steering Mounted Controls Communication Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 13012 Connector: Name : MODULE-STEERING CONTROL C2 Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (PREMIUM) Pin Circuit Description 1 G902 22WT/BR SWITCH MUX RETURN Pin Circuit Description 1 G902 22WT/BR SWITCH MUX RETURN Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Steering Mounted Controls Communication Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 13013 2 X20 22GY/WT RADIO CONTROL MUX 2 X20 22GY/WT RADIO CONTROL MUX Component Location - 47 Component Location - 42 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Steering Mounted Controls Communication Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 13014 Component Location - 43 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Steering Mounted Controls Communication Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 13015 Connector: Name : MODULE-STEERING CONTROL C3 Color : # of pins : 4 Pin Circuit Description 1 X3 20DG/VT HORN SWITCH SENSE 2 V937 22DB/DG S/C SWITCH RETURN 2 K900 22DB/DG SENSOR GROUND 3 V37 22VT S/C SWITCH NO. 1 SIGNAL 4 V38 22VT/OR S/C SWITCH NO. 2 SIGNAL Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Steering Mounted Controls Communication Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 13016 Component Location - 47 Component Location - 42 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Steering Mounted Controls Communication Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 13017 Component Location - 43 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Steering Mounted Controls Communication Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 13018 Connector: Name : MODULE-STEERING CONTROL C4 Color : YELLOW # of pins : 4 Pin Circuit Description 1 R61 20LG/VT DRIVER SQUIB 2 LINE 1 2 R63 20LG/WT DRIVER SQUIB 2 LINE 2 3 R43 20LG/BR DRIVER SQUIB 1 LINE 1 4 R45 20LG/OR DRIVER SQUIB 1 LINE 2 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Steering Mounted Controls Communication Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 13019 Component Location - 47 Component Location - 42 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Steering Mounted Controls Communication Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 13020 Component Location - 43 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Steering Mounted Controls Communication Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 13021 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Towing Information > System Information > Service and Repair > Towing Towing Information: Service and Repair Towing STANDARD PROCEDURE A vehicle equipped with SAE approved sling-type towing equipment can be used to tow all vehicles. When towing a 4WD vehicle using a wheel-lift towing device, use tow dollies under the opposite end of the vehicle. A vehicle with flat-bed device can also be used to transport a disabled vehicle. A wooden crossbeam may be required for proper connection when using the sling-type, front-end towing method. SAFETY PRECAUTIONS CAUTION: The following safety precautions must be observed when towing a vehicle: - Secure loose and protruding parts. - Always use a safety chain system that is independent of the lifting and towing equipment. - Do not allow towing equipment to contact the disabled vehicle's fuel tank. - Do not allow anyone under the disabled vehicle while it is lifted by the towing device. - Do not allow passengers to ride in a vehicle being towed. - Always observe state and local laws regarding towing regulations. - Do not tow a vehicle in a manner that could jeopardize the safety of the operator, pedestrians or other motorists. - Do not attach tow chains, T-hooks, J-hooks, or a tow sling to a bumper, steering linkage, drive shafts or a non-reinforced frame hole. - Do not tow a heavily loaded vehicle. Damage to the cab, cargo box or frame may result. Use a flatbed device to transport a loaded vehicle. GROUND CLEARANCE CAUTION: If vehicle is towed with wheels removed, install lug nuts to retain brake drums or rotors. A towed vehicle should be raised until lifted wheels are a minimum 100 mm (4 in) from the ground. Be sure there is adequate ground clearance at the opposite end of the vehicle, especially when towing over rough terrain or steep rises in the road. If necessary, remove the wheels from the lifted end of the vehicle and lower the vehicle closer to the ground, to increase the ground clearance at the opposite end of the vehicle. Install lug nuts on wheel attaching studs to retain brake drums or rotors. RAMP ANGLE If a vehicle with flat-bed towing equipment is used, the approach ramp angle should not exceed 15 degrees. TOWING WHEN KEYS ARE NOT AVAILABLE When the vehicle is locked and keys are not available, use a flat bed hauler. A Wheel-lift or Sling-type device can be used on 4WD vehicles provided all the wheels are lifted off the ground using tow dollies. FOUR-WHEEL-DRIVE VEHICLE TOWING DaimlerChrysler Corporation recommends that a vehicle be transported on a flat-bed device. A Wheel-lift or Sling-type device can be used provided all Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Towing Information > System Information > Service and Repair > Towing > Page 13027 the wheels are lifted off the ground using tow dollies. WARNING: When towing a disabled vehicle and the drive wheels are secured in a wheel lift or tow dollies, ensure the transmission is in the park position (automatic transmission) or a forward drive gear (manual transmission). CAUTION: Many vehicles are equipped with air dams, spoilers, and/or ground effect panels. To avoid component damage, a wheel-lift towing vehicle or a flat-bed hauling vehicle is recommended. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Towing Information > System Information > Service and Repair > Towing > Page 13028 Towing Information: Service and Repair Trailer Towing - NAFTA TRAILER TOWING - NAFTA In this section you will find safety tips and information on limits to the type of towing you can reasonably do with your vehicle. Before towing a trailer carefully review this information to tow your load as efficiently and safely as possible. To maintain warranty coverage, follow the requirements and recommendations concerning vehicles used for trailer towing. Common Towing Definitions The following trailer towing related definitions will assist you in understanding the following information: Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle. This includes driver, passengers, cargo and tongue weight. The total load must be limited so that you do not exceed the GVWR. Gross Trailer Weight (GTW) The gross trailer weight (GTW) is the weight of the trailer plus the weight of all cargo, consumables and equipment (permanent or temporary) loaded in or on the trailer in its "loaded and ready for operation" condition. The recommended way to measure GTW is to put your fully loaded trailer on a vehicle scale. The entire weight of the trailer must be supported by the scale. Gross Combination Weight Rating (GCWR) The gross combination weight rating (GCWR) is the total permissible weight of your vehicle and trailer when weighed in combination. (Note that GCWR ratings include a 68 kg (150 lbs) allowance for the presence of a driver). Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front and rear axles. Distribute the load over the front and rear axles evenly. Make sure that you do not exceed either front or rear GAWR. WARNING: It is important that you do not exceed the maximum front or rear GAWR. A dangerous driving condition can result if either rating is exceeded. You could lose control of the vehicle and have an accident. Tongue Weight (TW) The downward force exerted on the hitch ball by the trailer. In most cases it should not be less than 10% or more than 15% of the trailer load. You must consider this as part of the load on your vehicle. Frontal Area The maximum height and maximum width of the front of a trailer. Trailer Sway Control The trailer sway control is a telescoping link that can be installed between the hitch receiver and the trailer tongue that typically provides adjustable friction associated with the telescoping motion to dampen any unwanted trailer swaying motions while traveling. Weight-Carrying Hitch A weight-carrying hitch supports the trailer tongue weight, just as if it were luggage located at a hitch ball or some other connecting point of the truck. These kind of hitches are the most popular on the market today and they're commonly used to tow small- and medium-sized trailers. Weight-Distributing Hitch A weight-distributing system works by applying leverage through spring (load) bars. They are typically used for heavier loads, to distribute trailer tongue weight to the tow vehicle's front axle and the trailer axle(s). When used in accordance with the manufacturers' directions, it provides for a more level ride, offering more consistent steering and brake control thereby enhancing towing safety. The addition of a friction / hydraulic sway control also dampens sway caused by traffic and crosswinds and contributes positively to tow vehicle and trailer stability. Trailer sway control and a weight distributing (load equalizing) hitch are recommended for heavier Tongue Weights (TW) and may be required depending on Vehicle and Trailer configuration / loading to comply with gross axle weight rating (GAWR) requirements. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Towing Information > System Information > Service and Repair > Towing > Page 13029 WARNING: An improperly adjusted Weight Distributing Hitch system may reduce handling, stability, braking performance, and could result in an accident. Weight Distributing Systems may not be compatible with Surge Brake Couplers. Consult with your hitch and trailer manufacturer or a reputable Recreational Vehicle dealer for additional information. Fifth-Wheel Hitch A special high platform with a coupling that mounts over the rear axle of the tow vehicle in the truck bed. Connects a vehicle and fifth-wheel trailer with a coupling king pin. Gooseneck Hitch The gooseneck hitch employs a pivoted coupling arm which attaches to a ball mounted in the bed of a pickup truck. The coupling arm connects to the hitch mounted over the rear axle in the truck bed. Trailer Hitch Classification The rear bumper is intended to tow trailers up to 2,000 lbs (907 kg) without added equipment or alterations to the standard equipment. Your vehicle may be factory equipped for safe towing of trailers weighing over 2,000 lbs (907 kg) with the optional Trailer Tow Prep Package. See your dealer for package content. The following chart provides the industry standard for the maximum trailer weight a given trailer hitch class can tow and should be used to assist you in selecting the correct trailer hitch for your intended towing condition. All trailer hitches should be professionally installed on your vehicle. Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings) Trailer and Tongue Weight Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Towing Information > System Information > Service and Repair > Towing > Page 13030 Always load a trailer with 60% to 65% of the weight in the front of the trailer. This places 10% to 15% of the Gross Trailer Weight (GTW) on the tow hitch of your vehicle. Loads balanced over the wheels or heavier in the rear can cause the trailer to swayseverely side to side which will cause loss of control of vehicle and trailer. Failure to load trailers heavier in front is the cause of many trailer accidents. Never exceed the maximum tongue weight stamped on your bumper or trailer hitch. Consider the following items when computing the weight on the rear axle of the vehicle: - The tongue weight of the trailer. - The weight of any other type of cargo or equipment put in or on your vehicle. - The weight of the driver and all passengers. NOTE: Remember that everything put into or on the trailer adds to the load on your vehicle. Also, additional factory-installed options, or dealer-installed options, must be considered as part of the total load on your vehicle. Towing Requirements To promote proper break-in of your new vehicle drivetrain components the following guidelines are recommended: CAUTION: - Avoid towing a trailer for the first 500 miles (805 km) of vehicle operation. Doing so may damage your vehicle. - During the first 500 miles (805 km) of trailer towing, limit your speed to 50 mph (80 km/h). WARNING: Your vehicle may require special axle lubricant. Perform the maintenance listed of this manual. When towing a trailer, never exceed the GAWR, or GCWR, ratings. WARNING: Improper towing can lead to an injury accident. Follow these guidelines to make your trailer towing as safe as possible: Make certain that the load is secured in the trailer and will not shift during travel. When trailering cargo that is not fully secured, dynamic load shifts can occur that may be difficult for the driver to control. You could lose control of your vehicle and have an accident. - When hauling cargo or towing a trailer, do not overload your vehicle or trailer. Overloading can cause a loss of control, poor performance or damage to brakes, axle, engine, transmission, steering, suspension, chassis structure or tires. - Safety chains must always be used between your vehicle and trailer. Always connect the chains to the frame or hook retainers of the vehicle hitch. Cross the chains under the trailer tongue and allow enough slack for turning corners. - Vehicles with trailers should not be parked on a grade. When parking, apply the parking brake on the tow vehicle. Put the tow vehicle automatic transmission in P for Park. With a manual transmission, shift the transmission into reverse. And with four-wheel-drive vehicles, make sure the transfer case is not in neutral. Always, block or "chock" the trailer wheels. - GCWR must not be exceeded. - Total weight must be distributed between the tow vehicle and the trailer such that the following four ratings are not exceeded: - GVWR - GTW - GAWR - Tongue weight rating for the trailer hitch utilized (This requirement may limit the ability to always achieve the 10% to 15% range of tongue weight as a percentage of total trailer weight). Towing Requirements - Tires - Do not attempt to tow a trailer while using a compact spare tire. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Towing Information > System Information > Service and Repair > Towing > Page 13031 - Proper tire inflation pressures are essential to the safe and satisfactory operation of your vehicle. - Also, check the trailer tires for proper tire inflation pressures before trailer usage. - Check for signs of tire wear or visible tire damage before towing a trailer. - When replacing tires, Replacing tires with a higher load carrying capacity will not increase the vehicle's GVWR and GAWR limits. Towing Requirements - Trailer Brakes - Do not interconnect the hydraulic brake system or vacuum system of your vehicle with that of the trailer. This could cause inadequate braking and possible personal injury. - An electronically actuated trailer brake controller is required when towing a trailer with electronically actuated brakes. When towing a trailer equipped with a hydraulic surge actuated brake system, an electronic brake controller is not required. - Trailer brakes are recommended for trailers over 1,000 lbs (454 kg) and required for trailers in excess of 2,000 lbs (907 kg). CAUTION: If the trailer weighs more than 1,000 lbs (454 kg) loaded, it should have its own brakes and they should be of adequate capacity. Failure to do this could lead to accelerated brake lining wear, higher brake pedal effort, and longer stopping distances. WARNING: Do not connect trailer brakes to your vehicle's hydraulic brake lines. It can overload your brake system and cause it to fail. You might not have brakes when you need them and could have an accident. Towing any trailer will increase your stopping distance. When towing you should allow for additional space between your vehicle and the vehicle in front of you. Failure to do so could result in an accident. Towing Requirements - Trailer Lights & Wiring Whenever you pull a trailer, regardless of the trailer size, stop lights and turn signals on the trailer are required for motoring safety. The Trailer Tow Package may include a 4 and 7 pin wiring harness. Use a factory approved trailer harness and connector. NOTE: Do not cut or splice wiring into the vehicles wiring harness. The electrical connections are all complete to the vehicle but you must mate the harness to a trailer connector. Refer to the following illustrations. Towing Tips Before setting out on a trip, practice turning, stopping and backing the trailer in an area away from heavy traffic. If using a manual transmission vehicle for trailer towing, all starts must be in FIRST gear to avoid excessive clutch slippage. Towing Tips - Automatic Transmission Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Towing Information > System Information > Service and Repair > Towing > Page 13032 The "D" range can be selected when towing. However, if frequent shifting occurs while in this range, the "TOW HAUL" or "OD/OFF" range should be selected. NOTE: Using the "TOW HAUL" or "OD/OFF" range while operating the vehicle under heavy operating conditions will improve performance and extend transmission life by reducing excessive shifting and heat build up. This action will also provide better engine braking. The automatic transmission fluid and filter should be changed if you REGULARLY tow a trailer for more than 45 minutes of continuous operation. NOTE: Check the automatic transmission fluid level before towing. Towing Tips - Tow/Haul (If Equipped) To reduce potential for automatic transmission overheating, turn the "TOW HAUL OD/OFF" feature ON when driving in hilly areas or shift the transmission to Drive position 2 on more severe grades. Towing Tips - Electronic Speed Control (If Equipped) - Don't use in hilly terrain or with heavy loads. - When using the speed control, if you experience speed drops greater than 10 mph (16 km/h), disengage until you can get back to cruising speed. - Use speed control in flat terrain and with light loads to maximize fuel efficiency. Towing Tips - Cooling System To reduce potential for engine and transmission overheating, take the following actions: - City Driving - When stopped for short periods of time, put transmission in neutral and increase engine idle speed. - Highway Driving - Reduce speed. - Air Conditioning - Turn off temporarily. - refer to Cooling System Operating information in the Maintenance section of this manual for more information. Trailer Towing Mirrors - If Equipped These mirrors are designed with an adjustable mirror head to provide a greater vision range when towing extra-wide loads. To change position inboard or outboard, the mirror head should be rotated (flipped Out or In). A small blindspot mirror is integrated onto the main mirror surface. NOTE: Fold the 7 x 10 inch trailer towing mirrors rearward prior to entering an automated car wash. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Towing Hook / Bracket > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Towing Hook / Bracket: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL 1. Remove front bumper See: Body and Frame/Bumper/Front Bumper/Service and Repair/Removal . 2. Remove the bolts (2) and remove the tow hook assembly (3). 3. If the vehicle is a Heavy Duty , then remove the bolts (1) and remove the tow hook (2). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Towing Hook / Bracket > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 13037 Towing Hook / Bracket: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION 1. Install the tow hook assembly (3) and bolts (2) hand tight. 2. If vehicle is a Heavy Duty , install the tow hook (2) and bolts (1) hand tight. 3. Install the front bumper See: Body and Frame/Bumper/Front Bumper/Service and Repair/Installation . 4. Line up the tow hooks/tow hook assembly and tighten the bolts to 68 Nm (50 ft. lbs.). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Towing Module > Component Information > Locations Towing Module: Locations Component ID: 203 Component : MODULE-BRAKE PROVISION Connector: Name : MODULE-BRAKE PROVISION Color : BLUE # of pins : 4 Pin Circuit Description 1 Z998 18BK GROUND 2 L50 18WT/TN BRAKE LAMP SWITCH OUTPUT 3 B40 14DG TRAILER TOW BRAKE B(+) 4 A400 14TN/RD FUSED B(+) Component Location - 31 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Towing Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 13041 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Towing Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 13042 Towing Module: Diagrams Component ID: 203 Component : MODULE-BRAKE PROVISION Connector: Name : MODULE-BRAKE PROVISION Color : BLUE # of pins : 4 Pin Circuit Description 1 Z998 18BK GROUND 2 L50 18WT/TN BRAKE LAMP SWITCH OUTPUT 3 B40 14DG TRAILER TOW BRAKE B(+) 4 A400 14TN/RD FUSED B(+) Component Location - 31 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Towing Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 13043 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Connector > Component Information > Locations > Relay-Trailer Tow Damping Trailer Connector: Locations Relay-Trailer Tow Damping Component ID: 245 Component : RELAY-TRAILER TOW DAMPING Connector: Name : RELAY-TRAILER TOW DAMPING Color : # of pins : 5 Pin Circuit Description 1 A103 18GY/RD FUSED B(+) 2 B401 20DG/BR TRAILER TOW DAMPING RELAY CONTROL 3-4 L50 18WT/TN BRAKE LAMP SWITCH OUTPUT 5 F960 20PK/LG FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) Component Location - 33 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Connector > Component Information > Locations > Relay-Trailer Tow Damping > Page 13048 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Connector > Component Information > Locations > Relay-Trailer Tow Damping > Page 13049 Trailer Connector: Locations Wiring-Trailer Tow Component ID: 531 Component : WIRING-TRAILER TOW Connector: Name : WIRING-TRAILER TOW Color : # of pins : 1 Qualifier : (BOX OFF) Pin Circuit Description 1 L678 18BR FUSED PARK LAMP FEED Pin Circuit Description 1 Z927 14BK GROUND Pin Circuit Description 1 A100 14RD/VT FUSED B(+) Pin Circuit Description 1 B40 14DG TRAILER TOW BRAKE B(+) Pin Circuit Description 1 L1 18WT/LG BACKUP LAMP FEED Pin Circuit Description 1 L673 18YL TRAILER TOW LEFT TURN RELAY OUTPUT Pin Circuit Description 1 L674 18LG TRAILER TOW RIGHT TURN RELAY OUTPUT Component Location - 70 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Connector > Component Information > Locations > Relay-Trailer Tow Damping > Page 13050 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Connector > Component Information > Locations > Relay-Trailer Tow Damping > Page 13051 Trailer Connector: Locations Wiring-Trailer Tow 4-Way Component ID: 532 Component : WIRING-TRAILER TOW 4-WAY Connector: Name : WIRING-TRAILER TOW 4-WAY Color : BLACK # of pins : 4 Pin Circuit Description 1 Z927 14BK GROUND 2 L678 18BR FUSED PARK LAMP FEED 3 L673 18YL TRAILER TOW LEFT TURN RELAY OUTPUT 4 L674 18LG TRAILER TOW RIGHT TURN RELAY OUTPUT Component Location - 70 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Connector > Component Information > Locations > Relay-Trailer Tow Damping > Page 13052 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Connector > Component Information > Locations > Relay-Trailer Tow Damping > Page 13053 Trailer Connector: Locations Wiring-Trailer Tow 7-Way Component ID: 533 Component : WIRING-TRAILER TOW 7-WAY Connector: Name : WIRING-TRAILER TOW 7-WAY Color : BLACK # of pins : 10 Pin Circuit Description 1-2 L674 18LG TRAILER TOW RIGHT TURN RELAY OUTPUT 3 L1 18WT/LG BACKUP LAMP FEED 4 A100 14RD/VT FUSED B(+) 5 L678 18BR FUSED PARK LAMP FEED 6-7 B40 14DG TRAILER TOW BRAKE B(+) 8 Z927 14BK GROUND 9 Z927 14BK GROUND 10 L673 18YL TRAILER TOW LEFT TURN RELAY OUTPUT Component Location - 73 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Connector > Component Information > Locations > Relay-Trailer Tow Damping > Page 13054 Component Location - 70 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Connector > Component Information > Locations > Relay-Trailer Tow Damping > Page 13055 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Trailer Connector: Diagram Information and Instructions Warnings WARNINGS - GENERAL WARNINGS provide information to prevent personal injury and vehicle damage. Below is a list of general warnings that should be followed any time a vehicle is being serviced. WARNING: Always wear safety glasses for eye protection. WARNING: Use safety stands anytime a procedure requires being under a vehicle. WARNING: Be sure that the ignition switch always is in the off position, unless the procedure requires it to be on. WARNING: Set the parking brake when working on any vehicle. An automatic transmission should be in park. A manual transmission should be in neutral. WARNING: Operate the engine only in a well-ventilated area. WARNING: Keep away from moving parts when the engine is running, especially the fan and belts. WARNING: To prevent serious burns, avoid contact with hot parts such as the radiator, exhaust manifold(s), tail pipe, catalytic converter and muffler. WARNING: Do not allow flame or sparks near the battery. Gases are always present in and around the battery. WARNING: Always remove rings, watches, loose hanging jewelry and avoid loose clothing. How to Use Wiring Diagrams DESCRIPTION - HOW TO USE WIRING DIAGRAMS DaimlerChrysler Corporation wiring diagrams are designed to provide information regarding the vehicles wiring content. In order to effectively use the wiring diagrams to diagnose and repair DaimlerChrysler Corporation vehicles, it is important to understand all of their features and characteristics. Diagrams are arranged such that the power (B+) side of the circuit is placed near the top of the page, and the ground (B-) side of the circuit is placed near the bottom of the page. All switches, components, and modules are shown in the at rest position with the doors closed and the key removed from the ignition. Components are shown two ways. A solid line around a component indicates that the component is complete. A dashed line around the component indicates that the component is being shown is not complete. Incomplete components have a reference number to indicate the page where the component is shown complete. It is important to realize that no attempt is made on the diagrams to represent components and wiring as they appear on the vehicle. For example, a short piece of wire is treated the same as a long one. In addition, switches and other components are shown as simply as possible, with regard to function only. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13058 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13059 SYMBOLS International symbols are used throughout the wiring diagrams. These symbols are consistent with those being used around the world. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13060 TERMINOLOGY This is a list of terms and definitions used in the wiring diagrams. LHD - Left Hand Drive Vehicles RHD - Right Hand Drive Vehicles ATX - Automatic Transmissions-Front Wheel Drive MTX Manual Transmissions-Front Wheel Drive Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13061 AT - Automatic Transmissions-Rear Wheel Drive MT - Manual Transmissions-Rear Wheel Drive SOHC - Single Over Head Cam Engine DOHC - Double Over Head Cam Engine Export - Vehicles Built For Sale In Markets Other Than North America Except Export - Vehicles Built For Sale In North America Circuit Functions DESCRIPTION - CIRCUIT FUNCTIONS All circuits in the diagrams use an alpha/numeric code to identify the wire and it's function. To identify which circuit code applies to a system, refer to the Circuit Identification Code Chart. This chart shows the main circuits only and does not show the secondary codes that may apply to some models. Circuit Information DESCRIPTION - CIRCUIT INFORMATION Each wire shown in the diagrams contains a code which identifies the main circuit, a specific part of the main circuit, gage of wire, and color. An example would be A 2 18 LB/YL. This is a Battery Feed circuit, level two, eighteen gauge, light blue with a yellow tracer. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13062 Connector, Ground and Splice Information DESCRIPTION - CONNECTOR, GROUND AND SPLICE INFORMATION CAUTION: Not all connectors are serviced. Some connectors are serviced only with a harness. A typical example might be the Supplemental Restraint System connectors. Always check parts availability before attempting a repair. IDENTIFICATION In-line connectors are identified by a number, as follows: - In-line connectors located in the engine compartment are C100 series numbers. - In-line connectors located in the instrument panel area are C200 series numbers. - In-line connectors located in the body are C300 series numbers. - Jumper harness connectors are C400 series numbers. - Grounds and ground connectors are identified with a "G" and follow the same series numbering as the in-line connectors. - Splices are identified with an "S" and follow the same series numbering as the in-line connectors. In addition, S001-S099 numbers are located in the engine compartment. - Component connectors are identified by the component name instead of a number. Multiple connectors on a component use a C1, C2, etc. identifier. LOCATIONS Vehicle/Locations contains the master connector/ground/splice location index charts with hyperlinks to the applicable location illustrations. The illustrations contain the connector name (or number)/ground number/splice number and component identification. The abbreviation T/O is used in the component location section to indicate a point in which the wiring harness branches out to a component. The abbreviation N/S means Not Shown in the illustrations Section Identification and Information DESCRIPTION - SECTION IDENTIFICATION AND INFORMATION The wiring diagrams are grouped into individual sections. If a component is most likely found in a particular group, it will be shown complete (all wires, Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13063 connectors, and pins) within that group. For example, the Auto Shutdown Relay is most likely to be found in Powertrain Management, so it is shown there complete. It can, however, be shown partially in another group if it contains some associated wiring. Splice diagrams show the entire splice and provide references to other sections the splices serves. Splice Information only contains splice diagrams that are not shown in their entirety somewhere else in the wiring diagrams. Connector Pin-Outs shows each connector and the circuits involved with that connector. The connectors are identified using the name/number on the diagram pages. Removal REMOVAL 1. Disconnect battery. 2. Release Connector Lock (2). 3. Disconnect the connector (3) being repaired from its mating half/component. 4. Remove the dress cover (if applicable) (1). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13064 5. Release the Secondary Terminal Lock, if required (1). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13065 6. Position the connector locking finger away from the terminal using the proper special tool. Pull on the wire to remove the terminal from the connector. Installation Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13066 INSTALLATION 1. Insert the removed terminal in the same cavity on the repair connector. 2. Repeat steps for each terminal in the connector, being sure that all wires are inserted into the proper cavities. For additional connector pin-out identification, refer to the wiring diagrams. 3. When the connector is re-assembled, the secondary terminal lock must be placed in the locked position to prevent terminal push out. 4. Replace dress cover (if applicable). 5. Connect connector to its mating half/component. 6. Connect battery and test all affected systems. Removal REMOVAL 1. Disconnect the battery. 2. Locate the diode in the harness, and remove the protective covering. 3. Remove the diode from the harness, pay attention to the current flow direction (1) (2) (3). Installation INSTALLATION 1. Remove the insulation from the wires in the harness. Only remove enough insulation to solder in the new diode. 2. Install the new diode in the harness, making sure current flow is correct. If necessary, refer to the appropriate wiring diagram for current flow. 3. Solder the connection together using rosin core type solder only. Do not use acid core solder. 4. Tape the diode to the harness using electrical tape. Make sure the diode is completely sealed from the elements. 5. Re-connect the battery and test affected systems. Removal REMOVAL 1. Follow steps for removing terminals described in the connector removal section. 2. Cut the wire 6 inches from the back of the connector. Installation INSTALLATION 1. Select a wire from the terminal repair kit that best matches the color and gage of the wire being repaired. 2. Cut the repair wire to the proper length and remove one-half (1/2) inch of insulation. 3. Splice the repair wire to the wire harness (see wire splicing procedure). See: Service Procedures/Wire Splicing 4. Insert the repaired wire into the connector. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13067 5. Install the connector locking wedge, if required, and reconnect the connector to its mating half/component. 6. Re-tape the wire harness starting at 1-1/2 inches behind the connector and 2 inches past the repair. 7. Connect battery and test all affected systems. Wire Splicing STANDARD PROCEDURE - WIRE SPLICING When splicing a wire, it is important that the correct gage be used as shown in the wiring diagrams. 1. Remove one-half (1/2) inch of insulation from each wire that needs to be spliced. 2. Place a piece of adhesive lined heat shrink tubing on one side of the wire. Make sure the tubing will be long enough to cover and seal the entire repair area. 3. Place the strands of wire overlapping each other inside of the splice clip (1). 4. Using crimping tool (1), Mopar p/n 05019912AA, crimp the splice clip and wires together. 5. Solder (3) the connection (2) together using rosin core type solder (1) only. CAUTION: DO NOT USE ACID CORE SOLDER. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13068 6. Center the heat shrink tubing (2) over the joint and heat using a heat gun. Heat the joint until the tubing is tightly sealed and sealant (1) comes out of both ends of the tubing. Special Tools WIRING/TERMINAL PROBING TOOL PACKAGE 6807 TERMINAL PICK TOOL SET 6680 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13069 TERMINAL REMOVING TOOLS 6932 AND 8638 TERMINAL REMOVING TOOL 6934 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13070 Trailer Connector: Diagnostic Aids Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) Sensitive Devices STANDARD PROCEDURE - ELECTROSTATIC DISCHARGE (ESD) SENSITIVE DEVICES All ESD sensitive components are solid state and a symbol is used to indicate this. When handling any component with this symbol, comply with the following procedures to reduce the possibility of electrostatic charge build up on the body and inadvertent discharge into the component. If it is not known whether the part is ESD sensitive, assume that it is. 1. Always touch a known good ground before handling the part. This should be repeated while handling the part and more frequently after sliding across a seat, sitting down from a standing position, or walking a distance. 2. Avoid touching electrical terminals of the part, unless instructed to do so by a written procedure. 3. When using a voltmeter, be sure to connect the ground lead first. 4. Do not remove the part from it's protective packing until it is time to install the part. 5. Before removing the part from it's package, ground the package to a known good ground on the vehicle. Testing Of Voltage Potential STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING OF VOLTAGE POTENTIAL 1. Connect the ground lead of a voltmeter to a known good ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the voltmeter to the selected test point. The vehicle ignition may need to be turned ON to check voltage. Refer to the appropriate test procedure. Testing For Continuity Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13071 STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING FOR CONTINUITY 1. Remove the fuse (1) for the circuit being checked or, disconnect the battery. 2. Connect one lead of the ohmmeter to one side of the circuit being tested 3. Connect the other lead to the other end of the circuit being tested. Low or no resistance means good continuity. Testing For A Short To Ground STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING FOR A SHORT TO GROUND 1. Remove the fuse and disconnect all items involved with the fuse. 2. Connect a test light or a voltmeter across the terminals of the fuse. 3. Starting at the fuse block, wiggle the wiring harness about six to eight inches apart and watch the voltmeter/test lamp. 4. If the voltmeter registers voltage or the test lamp glows, there is a short to ground in that general area of the wiring harness. Testing For A Short To Ground On Fuses Powering Several Loads STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING FOR A SHORT TO GROUND ON FUSES POWERING SEVERAL LOADS 1. Refer to the wiring diagrams and disconnect or isolate all items on the suspected fused circuits. 2. Replace the blown fuse. 3. Supply power to the fuse by turning ON the ignition switch or re-connecting the battery. 4. Start connecting or energizing the items in the fuse circuit one at a time. When the fuse blows the circuit with the short to ground has been isolated. Testing For A Voltage Drop STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING FOR A VOLTAGE DROP Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13072 1. Connect the positive lead of the voltmeter to the side of the circuit closest to the battery. 2. Connect the other lead of the voltmeter to the other side of the switch, component or circuit. 3. Operate the item. 4. The voltmeter will show the difference in voltage between the two points. Troubleshooting Wiring Problems DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING - WIRING HARNESS TROUBLESHOOTING TOOLS When diagnosing a problem in an electrical circuit there are several common tools necessary. These tools are listed and explained below. - Jumper Wire - This is a test wire used to connect two points of a circuit. It can be used to bypass an open in a circuit. WARNING: Never use a jumper wire across a load, such as a motor, connected between a battery feed and ground. - Voltmeter - Used to check for voltage on a circuit. Always connect the black lead to a known good ground and the red lead to the positive side of the circuit. CAUTION: Most of the electrical components used in today's vehicles are Solid State. When checking voltages in these circuits, use a meter with a 10 - megohm or greater impedance rating. - Ohmmeter - Used to check the resistance between two points of a circuit. Low or no resistance in a circuit means good continuity. CAUTION: Most of the electrical components used in today's vehicles are Solid State. When checking resistance in these circuits use a meter with a 10 - megohm or greater impedance rating. In addition, make sure the power is disconnected from the circuit. Circuits that are powered up by the vehicle's electrical system can cause damage to the equipment and provide false readings. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13073 - Probing Tools - These tools are used for probing terminals in connectors. Select the proper size tool from Special Tool Package 6807, and insert the probing end (2) into the terminal being tested. Use the other end of the tool (1) to insert the meter probe. INTERMITTENT AND POOR CONNECTIONS Most intermittent electrical problems are caused by faulty electrical connections or wiring. It is also possible for a sticking component or relay to cause a problem. Before condemning a component or wiring assembly, check the following items. - Connectors are fully seated - Spread terminals, or terminal push out - Terminals in the wiring assembly are fully seated into the connector/component and locked into position - Dirt or corrosion on the terminals. Any amount of corrosion or dirt could cause an intermittent problem - Damaged connector/component casing exposing the item to dirt or moisture - Wire insulation that has rubbed through causing a short to ground - Some or all of the wiring strands broken inside of the insulation - Wiring broken inside of the insulation TROUBLESHOOTING WIRING PROBLEMS When troubleshooting wiring problems there are six steps which can aid in the procedure. The steps are listed and explained below. Always check for non-factory items added to the vehicle before doing any diagnosis. If the vehicle is equipped with these items, disconnect them to verify these add-on items are not the cause of the problem. 1. Verify the problem. 2. Verify any related symptoms. Do this by performing operational checks on components that are in the same circuit. Refer to the wiring diagrams. 3. Analyze the symptoms. Use the wiring diagrams to determine what the circuit is doing, where the problem most likely is occurring and where the diagnosis will continue. 4. Isolate the problem area. 5. Repair the problem area. 6. Verify the proper operation. For this step, check for proper operation of all items on the repaired circuit. Refer to the wiring diagrams. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13074 Trailer Connector: Connector Views Relay-Trailer Tow Damping Component ID: 245 Component : RELAY-TRAILER TOW DAMPING Connector: Name : RELAY-TRAILER TOW DAMPING Color : # of pins : 5 Pin Circuit Description 1 A103 18GY/RD FUSED B(+) 2 B401 20DG/BR TRAILER TOW DAMPING RELAY CONTROL 3-4 L50 18WT/TN BRAKE LAMP SWITCH OUTPUT 5 F960 20PK/LG FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) Component Location - 33 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13075 Wiring-Trailer Tow Component ID: 531 Component : WIRING-TRAILER TOW Connector: Name : WIRING-TRAILER TOW Color : # of pins : 1 Qualifier : (BOX OFF) Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13076 Pin Circuit Description 1 L678 18BR FUSED PARK LAMP FEED Pin Circuit Description 1 Z927 14BK GROUND Pin Circuit Description 1 A100 14RD/VT FUSED B(+) Pin Circuit Description 1 B40 14DG TRAILER TOW BRAKE B(+) Pin Circuit Description 1 L1 18WT/LG BACKUP LAMP FEED Pin Circuit Description 1 L673 18YL TRAILER TOW LEFT TURN RELAY OUTPUT Pin Circuit Description 1 L674 18LG TRAILER TOW RIGHT TURN RELAY OUTPUT Component Location - 70 Wiring-Trailer Tow 4-Way Component ID: 532 Component : WIRING-TRAILER TOW 4-WAY Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13077 Connector: Name : WIRING-TRAILER TOW 4-WAY Color : BLACK # of pins : 4 Pin Circuit Description 1 Z927 14BK GROUND 2 L678 18BR FUSED PARK LAMP FEED 3 L673 18YL TRAILER TOW LEFT TURN RELAY OUTPUT 4 L674 18LG TRAILER TOW RIGHT TURN RELAY OUTPUT Component Location - 70 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13078 Wiring-Trailer Tow 7-Way Component ID: 533 Component : WIRING-TRAILER TOW 7-WAY Connector: Name : WIRING-TRAILER TOW 7-WAY Color : BLACK # of pins : 10 Pin Circuit Description Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13079 1-2 L674 18LG TRAILER TOW RIGHT TURN RELAY OUTPUT 3 L1 18WT/LG BACKUP LAMP FEED 4 A100 14RD/VT FUSED B(+) 5 L678 18BR FUSED PARK LAMP FEED 6-7 B40 14DG TRAILER TOW BRAKE B(+) 8 Z927 14BK GROUND 9 Z927 14BK GROUND 10 L673 18YL TRAILER TOW LEFT TURN RELAY OUTPUT Component Location - 73 Component Location - 70 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13080 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13081 Trailer Connector: Electrical Diagrams PLEASE NOTE: Some diagrams may appear to be missing because of gaps in the number sequences. These "gaps" are actually for diagrams that do not apply to the vehicle model selected. 8w-54-02 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13082 8w-54-03 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13083 8w-54-04 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13084 8w-54-05 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13085 8w-54-06 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13086 8w-54-07 Other Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by number (i.e. 8W-70-2, etc.) within these diagrams can be found at the vehicle level under Diagrams by Number. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Number Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Hitch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Trailer Hitch: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL 1. Remove the rear bumper See: Body and Frame/Bumper/Rear Bumper/Service and Repair/Removal . 2. On Light Duty Vehicles , remove the hitch bolts (7) 3. On Heavy Duty Vehicles , remove the hitch bolts (8) Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Hitch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 13091 4. Disconnect all wire harness support push pins. 5. Remove the rear two cargo box bolts (3) and loosen the remaining bolts See: Body and Frame/Truck Bed/Service and Repair/Cargo Box Removal . 6. Using a suitable lifting device, lift and support the rear of the cargo box and remove the hitch. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Hitch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 13092 Trailer Hitch: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION 1. On Light Duty Vehicles , install the hitch (5) onto the frame rails and make sure the locators (1 and 2) on the inside of the hitch brackets are engaged with the holes in the top of the frame rails properly. 2. Install the hitch bolts (7) and tighten to 170 Nm (125 ft. lbs.). 3. Connect all wire harness support push pins. 4. On Heavy Duty Vehicles , install the hitch (5) onto the frame rails and make sure the locators (1 and 2) on the inside of the hitch brackets are engaged with the holes in the top of the frame rails properly. 5. Install the hitch bolts (8) and tighten to 170 Nm (125 ft. lbs.). 6. Connect all wire harness support push pins. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Hitch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 13093 7. Lower the cargo box and install the rear bolts (3) See: Body and Frame/Truck Bed/Service and Repair/Cargo Box - Installation . 8. Install the rear bumper See: Body and Frame/Bumper/Rear Bumper/Service and Repair/Installation . Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Trailer Lamps: Diagram Information and Instructions Warnings WARNINGS - GENERAL WARNINGS provide information to prevent personal injury and vehicle damage. Below is a list of general warnings that should be followed any time a vehicle is being serviced. WARNING: Always wear safety glasses for eye protection. WARNING: Use safety stands anytime a procedure requires being under a vehicle. WARNING: Be sure that the ignition switch always is in the off position, unless the procedure requires it to be on. WARNING: Set the parking brake when working on any vehicle. An automatic transmission should be in park. A manual transmission should be in neutral. WARNING: Operate the engine only in a well-ventilated area. WARNING: Keep away from moving parts when the engine is running, especially the fan and belts. WARNING: To prevent serious burns, avoid contact with hot parts such as the radiator, exhaust manifold(s), tail pipe, catalytic converter and muffler. WARNING: Do not allow flame or sparks near the battery. Gases are always present in and around the battery. WARNING: Always remove rings, watches, loose hanging jewelry and avoid loose clothing. How to Use Wiring Diagrams DESCRIPTION - HOW TO USE WIRING DIAGRAMS DaimlerChrysler Corporation wiring diagrams are designed to provide information regarding the vehicles wiring content. In order to effectively use the wiring diagrams to diagnose and repair DaimlerChrysler Corporation vehicles, it is important to understand all of their features and characteristics. Diagrams are arranged such that the power (B+) side of the circuit is placed near the top of the page, and the ground (B-) side of the circuit is placed near the bottom of the page. All switches, components, and modules are shown in the at rest position with the doors closed and the key removed from the ignition. Components are shown two ways. A solid line around a component indicates that the component is complete. A dashed line around the component indicates that the component is being shown is not complete. Incomplete components have a reference number to indicate the page where the component is shown complete. It is important to realize that no attempt is made on the diagrams to represent components and wiring as they appear on the vehicle. For example, a short piece of wire is treated the same as a long one. In addition, switches and other components are shown as simply as possible, with regard to function only. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13098 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13099 SYMBOLS International symbols are used throughout the wiring diagrams. These symbols are consistent with those being used around the world. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13100 TERMINOLOGY This is a list of terms and definitions used in the wiring diagrams. LHD - Left Hand Drive Vehicles RHD - Right Hand Drive Vehicles ATX - Automatic Transmissions-Front Wheel Drive MTX Manual Transmissions-Front Wheel Drive Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13101 AT - Automatic Transmissions-Rear Wheel Drive MT - Manual Transmissions-Rear Wheel Drive SOHC - Single Over Head Cam Engine DOHC - Double Over Head Cam Engine Export - Vehicles Built For Sale In Markets Other Than North America Except Export - Vehicles Built For Sale In North America Circuit Functions DESCRIPTION - CIRCUIT FUNCTIONS All circuits in the diagrams use an alpha/numeric code to identify the wire and it's function. To identify which circuit code applies to a system, refer to the Circuit Identification Code Chart. This chart shows the main circuits only and does not show the secondary codes that may apply to some models. Circuit Information DESCRIPTION - CIRCUIT INFORMATION Each wire shown in the diagrams contains a code which identifies the main circuit, a specific part of the main circuit, gage of wire, and color. An example would be A 2 18 LB/YL. This is a Battery Feed circuit, level two, eighteen gauge, light blue with a yellow tracer. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13102 Connector, Ground and Splice Information DESCRIPTION - CONNECTOR, GROUND AND SPLICE INFORMATION CAUTION: Not all connectors are serviced. Some connectors are serviced only with a harness. A typical example might be the Supplemental Restraint System connectors. Always check parts availability before attempting a repair. IDENTIFICATION In-line connectors are identified by a number, as follows: - In-line connectors located in the engine compartment are C100 series numbers. - In-line connectors located in the instrument panel area are C200 series numbers. - In-line connectors located in the body are C300 series numbers. - Jumper harness connectors are C400 series numbers. - Grounds and ground connectors are identified with a "G" and follow the same series numbering as the in-line connectors. - Splices are identified with an "S" and follow the same series numbering as the in-line connectors. In addition, S001-S099 numbers are located in the engine compartment. - Component connectors are identified by the component name instead of a number. Multiple connectors on a component use a C1, C2, etc. identifier. LOCATIONS Vehicle/Locations contains the master connector/ground/splice location index charts with hyperlinks to the applicable location illustrations. The illustrations contain the connector name (or number)/ground number/splice number and component identification. The abbreviation T/O is used in the component location section to indicate a point in which the wiring harness branches out to a component. The abbreviation N/S means Not Shown in the illustrations Section Identification and Information DESCRIPTION - SECTION IDENTIFICATION AND INFORMATION The wiring diagrams are grouped into individual sections. If a component is most likely found in a particular group, it will be shown complete (all wires, Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13103 connectors, and pins) within that group. For example, the Auto Shutdown Relay is most likely to be found in Powertrain Management, so it is shown there complete. It can, however, be shown partially in another group if it contains some associated wiring. Splice diagrams show the entire splice and provide references to other sections the splices serves. Splice Information only contains splice diagrams that are not shown in their entirety somewhere else in the wiring diagrams. Connector Pin-Outs shows each connector and the circuits involved with that connector. The connectors are identified using the name/number on the diagram pages. Removal REMOVAL 1. Disconnect battery. 2. Release Connector Lock (2). 3. Disconnect the connector (3) being repaired from its mating half/component. 4. Remove the dress cover (if applicable) (1). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13104 5. Release the Secondary Terminal Lock, if required (1). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13105 6. Position the connector locking finger away from the terminal using the proper special tool. Pull on the wire to remove the terminal from the connector. Installation Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13106 INSTALLATION 1. Insert the removed terminal in the same cavity on the repair connector. 2. Repeat steps for each terminal in the connector, being sure that all wires are inserted into the proper cavities. For additional connector pin-out identification, refer to the wiring diagrams. 3. When the connector is re-assembled, the secondary terminal lock must be placed in the locked position to prevent terminal push out. 4. Replace dress cover (if applicable). 5. Connect connector to its mating half/component. 6. Connect battery and test all affected systems. Removal REMOVAL 1. Disconnect the battery. 2. Locate the diode in the harness, and remove the protective covering. 3. Remove the diode from the harness, pay attention to the current flow direction (1) (2) (3). Installation INSTALLATION 1. Remove the insulation from the wires in the harness. Only remove enough insulation to solder in the new diode. 2. Install the new diode in the harness, making sure current flow is correct. If necessary, refer to the appropriate wiring diagram for current flow. 3. Solder the connection together using rosin core type solder only. Do not use acid core solder. 4. Tape the diode to the harness using electrical tape. Make sure the diode is completely sealed from the elements. 5. Re-connect the battery and test affected systems. Removal REMOVAL 1. Follow steps for removing terminals described in the connector removal section. 2. Cut the wire 6 inches from the back of the connector. Installation INSTALLATION 1. Select a wire from the terminal repair kit that best matches the color and gage of the wire being repaired. 2. Cut the repair wire to the proper length and remove one-half (1/2) inch of insulation. 3. Splice the repair wire to the wire harness (see wire splicing procedure). See: Service Procedures/Wire Splicing 4. Insert the repaired wire into the connector. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13107 5. Install the connector locking wedge, if required, and reconnect the connector to its mating half/component. 6. Re-tape the wire harness starting at 1-1/2 inches behind the connector and 2 inches past the repair. 7. Connect battery and test all affected systems. Wire Splicing STANDARD PROCEDURE - WIRE SPLICING When splicing a wire, it is important that the correct gage be used as shown in the wiring diagrams. 1. Remove one-half (1/2) inch of insulation from each wire that needs to be spliced. 2. Place a piece of adhesive lined heat shrink tubing on one side of the wire. Make sure the tubing will be long enough to cover and seal the entire repair area. 3. Place the strands of wire overlapping each other inside of the splice clip (1). 4. Using crimping tool (1), Mopar p/n 05019912AA, crimp the splice clip and wires together. 5. Solder (3) the connection (2) together using rosin core type solder (1) only. CAUTION: DO NOT USE ACID CORE SOLDER. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13108 6. Center the heat shrink tubing (2) over the joint and heat using a heat gun. Heat the joint until the tubing is tightly sealed and sealant (1) comes out of both ends of the tubing. Special Tools WIRING/TERMINAL PROBING TOOL PACKAGE 6807 TERMINAL PICK TOOL SET 6680 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13109 TERMINAL REMOVING TOOLS 6932 AND 8638 TERMINAL REMOVING TOOL 6934 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13110 Trailer Lamps: Diagnostic Aids Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) Sensitive Devices STANDARD PROCEDURE - ELECTROSTATIC DISCHARGE (ESD) SENSITIVE DEVICES All ESD sensitive components are solid state and a symbol is used to indicate this. When handling any component with this symbol, comply with the following procedures to reduce the possibility of electrostatic charge build up on the body and inadvertent discharge into the component. If it is not known whether the part is ESD sensitive, assume that it is. 1. Always touch a known good ground before handling the part. This should be repeated while handling the part and more frequently after sliding across a seat, sitting down from a standing position, or walking a distance. 2. Avoid touching electrical terminals of the part, unless instructed to do so by a written procedure. 3. When using a voltmeter, be sure to connect the ground lead first. 4. Do not remove the part from it's protective packing until it is time to install the part. 5. Before removing the part from it's package, ground the package to a known good ground on the vehicle. Testing Of Voltage Potential STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING OF VOLTAGE POTENTIAL 1. Connect the ground lead of a voltmeter to a known good ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the voltmeter to the selected test point. The vehicle ignition may need to be turned ON to check voltage. Refer to the appropriate test procedure. Testing For Continuity Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13111 STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING FOR CONTINUITY 1. Remove the fuse (1) for the circuit being checked or, disconnect the battery. 2. Connect one lead of the ohmmeter to one side of the circuit being tested 3. Connect the other lead to the other end of the circuit being tested. Low or no resistance means good continuity. Testing For A Short To Ground STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING FOR A SHORT TO GROUND 1. Remove the fuse and disconnect all items involved with the fuse. 2. Connect a test light or a voltmeter across the terminals of the fuse. 3. Starting at the fuse block, wiggle the wiring harness about six to eight inches apart and watch the voltmeter/test lamp. 4. If the voltmeter registers voltage or the test lamp glows, there is a short to ground in that general area of the wiring harness. Testing For A Short To Ground On Fuses Powering Several Loads STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING FOR A SHORT TO GROUND ON FUSES POWERING SEVERAL LOADS 1. Refer to the wiring diagrams and disconnect or isolate all items on the suspected fused circuits. 2. Replace the blown fuse. 3. Supply power to the fuse by turning ON the ignition switch or re-connecting the battery. 4. Start connecting or energizing the items in the fuse circuit one at a time. When the fuse blows the circuit with the short to ground has been isolated. Testing For A Voltage Drop STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING FOR A VOLTAGE DROP Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13112 1. Connect the positive lead of the voltmeter to the side of the circuit closest to the battery. 2. Connect the other lead of the voltmeter to the other side of the switch, component or circuit. 3. Operate the item. 4. The voltmeter will show the difference in voltage between the two points. Troubleshooting Wiring Problems DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING - WIRING HARNESS TROUBLESHOOTING TOOLS When diagnosing a problem in an electrical circuit there are several common tools necessary. These tools are listed and explained below. - Jumper Wire - This is a test wire used to connect two points of a circuit. It can be used to bypass an open in a circuit. WARNING: Never use a jumper wire across a load, such as a motor, connected between a battery feed and ground. - Voltmeter - Used to check for voltage on a circuit. Always connect the black lead to a known good ground and the red lead to the positive side of the circuit. CAUTION: Most of the electrical components used in today's vehicles are Solid State. When checking voltages in these circuits, use a meter with a 10 - megohm or greater impedance rating. - Ohmmeter - Used to check the resistance between two points of a circuit. Low or no resistance in a circuit means good continuity. CAUTION: Most of the electrical components used in today's vehicles are Solid State. When checking resistance in these circuits use a meter with a 10 - megohm or greater impedance rating. In addition, make sure the power is disconnected from the circuit. Circuits that are powered up by the vehicle's electrical system can cause damage to the equipment and provide false readings. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13113 - Probing Tools - These tools are used for probing terminals in connectors. Select the proper size tool from Special Tool Package 6807, and insert the probing end (2) into the terminal being tested. Use the other end of the tool (1) to insert the meter probe. INTERMITTENT AND POOR CONNECTIONS Most intermittent electrical problems are caused by faulty electrical connections or wiring. It is also possible for a sticking component or relay to cause a problem. Before condemning a component or wiring assembly, check the following items. - Connectors are fully seated - Spread terminals, or terminal push out - Terminals in the wiring assembly are fully seated into the connector/component and locked into position - Dirt or corrosion on the terminals. Any amount of corrosion or dirt could cause an intermittent problem - Damaged connector/component casing exposing the item to dirt or moisture - Wire insulation that has rubbed through causing a short to ground - Some or all of the wiring strands broken inside of the insulation - Wiring broken inside of the insulation TROUBLESHOOTING WIRING PROBLEMS When troubleshooting wiring problems there are six steps which can aid in the procedure. The steps are listed and explained below. Always check for non-factory items added to the vehicle before doing any diagnosis. If the vehicle is equipped with these items, disconnect them to verify these add-on items are not the cause of the problem. 1. Verify the problem. 2. Verify any related symptoms. Do this by performing operational checks on components that are in the same circuit. Refer to the wiring diagrams. 3. Analyze the symptoms. Use the wiring diagrams to determine what the circuit is doing, where the problem most likely is occurring and where the diagnosis will continue. 4. Isolate the problem area. 5. Repair the problem area. 6. Verify the proper operation. For this step, check for proper operation of all items on the repaired circuit. Refer to the wiring diagrams. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Trailer Lamps: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The rear body wire harness on the rear frame (1) of all vehicles is equipped with a take out with a standard, light-duty 4-pin trailer tow connector (2) that is secured to the top of the trailer hitch platform (4) behind the rear bumper. Vehicles equipped with an optional factory-installed trailer towing package have a second take out with a connector (3) that plugs into a receptacle in the back of a heavy duty, sealed, 7-pin trailer tow connector that is located near the center of the rear bumper. Vehicles equipped with the trailer tow package also include an electric trailer brake wiring provision that terminates at a connector located on top of the large body harness connection under the instrument panel to the left of the brake pedal, as well as an electric trailer brake pigtail harness and an instruction card (1) that are stored in the glove box (2) when the vehicle is shipped from the factory. Refer to the appropriate wiring information. The wiring information includes wiring diagrams, proper wire and connector repair procedures, further details on wire harness routing and retention, as well as pin-out and location views for the various wire harness connectors, splices and grounds. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 13116 Trailer Lamps: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The standard 4-pin trailer tow connector contains the following vehicle circuits: park/tail lamps, left stop/turn lamp, right stop/turn lamp, and ground. The optional trailer towing package 7-way connector contains the same circuits as the 4-pin connector plus the following additional circuits: backup lamp, trailer battery and electric brake. If an aftermarket electric brake controller is used, the electric brake pigtail harness supplied will make installation easier. The connection (blue 4-way connector) for the harness is located under the instrument panel to the left of the brake pedal on top of the large body harness connection. Refer to the appropriate wiring information. The battery line of this harness may be used to charge the trailer battery. However, a battery isolation unit is not supplied and the trailer battery may discharge the vehicle battery while the engine is not running. The battery line is protected by a fuse or a circuit breaker. The trailer tow connectors as well as the hard wired inputs and outputs of the connectors may be diagnosed using conventional diagnostic tools and procedures. Refer to the appropriate wiring information. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Trailer Lamps: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. 2. Reach behind the center of the rear bumper to access and disconnect the connector (2) of the body wire harness from the 7-way trailer tow connector (1). 3. Remove the four screws (3) that secure the 7-way trailer tow connector (2) to the tapping plate (4) behind the rear bumper. 4. Remove the 7-way trailer tow connector from the face of the rear bumper and the tapping plate from behind the rear bumper. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 13119 Trailer Lamps: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION 1. Position the 7-way trailer tow connector (2) into the mounting hole on the face of the rear bumper (1). 2. Position the tapping plate (4) over the 7-way trailer tow connector on the back of the rear bumper. 3. Install and tighten the four screws (3) that secure the 7-way trailer tow connector to the tapping plate. Tighten the screws to 2 Nm (17 in. lbs.). 4. Reach behind the center of the rear bumper to access and reconnect the connector (2) of the body wire harness to the 7-way trailer tow connector (1). 5. Reconnect the battery negative cable. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Lighting Relay > Component Information > Locations Trailer Lighting Relay: Locations Dodge Ram Trucks, 2006-2009 all,Trailer Tow lamp relay is not serviceable. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Lighting Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 13123 Trailer Lighting Relay: Diagrams Dodge Ram Trucks, 2006-2009 all, do not use a trailer tow relay. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Trailer Connector > Component Information > Locations > Relay-Trailer Tow Damping Trailer Connector: Locations Relay-Trailer Tow Damping Component ID: 245 Component : RELAY-TRAILER TOW DAMPING Connector: Name : RELAY-TRAILER TOW DAMPING Color : # of pins : 5 Pin Circuit Description 1 A103 18GY/RD FUSED B(+) 2 B401 20DG/BR TRAILER TOW DAMPING RELAY CONTROL 3-4 L50 18WT/TN BRAKE LAMP SWITCH OUTPUT 5 F960 20PK/LG FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) Component Location - 33 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Trailer Connector > Component Information > Locations > Relay-Trailer Tow Damping > Page 13128 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Trailer Connector > Component Information > Locations > Relay-Trailer Tow Damping > Page 13129 Trailer Connector: Locations Wiring-Trailer Tow Component ID: 531 Component : WIRING-TRAILER TOW Connector: Name : WIRING-TRAILER TOW Color : # of pins : 1 Qualifier : (BOX OFF) Pin Circuit Description 1 L678 18BR FUSED PARK LAMP FEED Pin Circuit Description 1 Z927 14BK GROUND Pin Circuit Description 1 A100 14RD/VT FUSED B(+) Pin Circuit Description 1 B40 14DG TRAILER TOW BRAKE B(+) Pin Circuit Description 1 L1 18WT/LG BACKUP LAMP FEED Pin Circuit Description 1 L673 18YL TRAILER TOW LEFT TURN RELAY OUTPUT Pin Circuit Description 1 L674 18LG TRAILER TOW RIGHT TURN RELAY OUTPUT Component Location - 70 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Trailer Connector > Component Information > Locations > Relay-Trailer Tow Damping > Page 13130 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Trailer Connector > Component Information > Locations > Relay-Trailer Tow Damping > Page 13131 Trailer Connector: Locations Wiring-Trailer Tow 4-Way Component ID: 532 Component : WIRING-TRAILER TOW 4-WAY Connector: Name : WIRING-TRAILER TOW 4-WAY Color : BLACK # of pins : 4 Pin Circuit Description 1 Z927 14BK GROUND 2 L678 18BR FUSED PARK LAMP FEED 3 L673 18YL TRAILER TOW LEFT TURN RELAY OUTPUT 4 L674 18LG TRAILER TOW RIGHT TURN RELAY OUTPUT Component Location - 70 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Trailer Connector > Component Information > Locations > Relay-Trailer Tow Damping > Page 13132 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Trailer Connector > Component Information > Locations > Relay-Trailer Tow Damping > Page 13133 Trailer Connector: Locations Wiring-Trailer Tow 7-Way Component ID: 533 Component : WIRING-TRAILER TOW 7-WAY Connector: Name : WIRING-TRAILER TOW 7-WAY Color : BLACK # of pins : 10 Pin Circuit Description 1-2 L674 18LG TRAILER TOW RIGHT TURN RELAY OUTPUT 3 L1 18WT/LG BACKUP LAMP FEED 4 A100 14RD/VT FUSED B(+) 5 L678 18BR FUSED PARK LAMP FEED 6-7 B40 14DG TRAILER TOW BRAKE B(+) 8 Z927 14BK GROUND 9 Z927 14BK GROUND 10 L673 18YL TRAILER TOW LEFT TURN RELAY OUTPUT Component Location - 73 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Trailer Connector > Component Information > Locations > Relay-Trailer Tow Damping > Page 13134 Component Location - 70 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Trailer Connector > Component Information > Locations > Relay-Trailer Tow Damping > Page 13135 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Trailer Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Trailer Connector: Diagram Information and Instructions Warnings WARNINGS - GENERAL WARNINGS provide information to prevent personal injury and vehicle damage. Below is a list of general warnings that should be followed any time a vehicle is being serviced. WARNING: Always wear safety glasses for eye protection. WARNING: Use safety stands anytime a procedure requires being under a vehicle. WARNING: Be sure that the ignition switch always is in the off position, unless the procedure requires it to be on. WARNING: Set the parking brake when working on any vehicle. An automatic transmission should be in park. A manual transmission should be in neutral. WARNING: Operate the engine only in a well-ventilated area. WARNING: Keep away from moving parts when the engine is running, especially the fan and belts. WARNING: To prevent serious burns, avoid contact with hot parts such as the radiator, exhaust manifold(s), tail pipe, catalytic converter and muffler. WARNING: Do not allow flame or sparks near the battery. Gases are always present in and around the battery. WARNING: Always remove rings, watches, loose hanging jewelry and avoid loose clothing. How to Use Wiring Diagrams DESCRIPTION - HOW TO USE WIRING DIAGRAMS DaimlerChrysler Corporation wiring diagrams are designed to provide information regarding the vehicles wiring content. In order to effectively use the wiring diagrams to diagnose and repair DaimlerChrysler Corporation vehicles, it is important to understand all of their features and characteristics. Diagrams are arranged such that the power (B+) side of the circuit is placed near the top of the page, and the ground (B-) side of the circuit is placed near the bottom of the page. All switches, components, and modules are shown in the at rest position with the doors closed and the key removed from the ignition. Components are shown two ways. A solid line around a component indicates that the component is complete. A dashed line around the component indicates that the component is being shown is not complete. Incomplete components have a reference number to indicate the page where the component is shown complete. It is important to realize that no attempt is made on the diagrams to represent components and wiring as they appear on the vehicle. For example, a short piece of wire is treated the same as a long one. In addition, switches and other components are shown as simply as possible, with regard to function only. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Trailer Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13138 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Trailer Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13139 SYMBOLS International symbols are used throughout the wiring diagrams. These symbols are consistent with those being used around the world. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Trailer Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13140 TERMINOLOGY This is a list of terms and definitions used in the wiring diagrams. LHD - Left Hand Drive Vehicles RHD - Right Hand Drive Vehicles ATX - Automatic Transmissions-Front Wheel Drive MTX Manual Transmissions-Front Wheel Drive Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Trailer Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13141 AT - Automatic Transmissions-Rear Wheel Drive MT - Manual Transmissions-Rear Wheel Drive SOHC - Single Over Head Cam Engine DOHC - Double Over Head Cam Engine Export - Vehicles Built For Sale In Markets Other Than North America Except Export - Vehicles Built For Sale In North America Circuit Functions DESCRIPTION - CIRCUIT FUNCTIONS All circuits in the diagrams use an alpha/numeric code to identify the wire and it's function. To identify which circuit code applies to a system, refer to the Circuit Identification Code Chart. This chart shows the main circuits only and does not show the secondary codes that may apply to some models. Circuit Information DESCRIPTION - CIRCUIT INFORMATION Each wire shown in the diagrams contains a code which identifies the main circuit, a specific part of the main circuit, gage of wire, and color. An example would be A 2 18 LB/YL. This is a Battery Feed circuit, level two, eighteen gauge, light blue with a yellow tracer. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Trailer Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13142 Connector, Ground and Splice Information DESCRIPTION - CONNECTOR, GROUND AND SPLICE INFORMATION CAUTION: Not all connectors are serviced. Some connectors are serviced only with a harness. A typical example might be the Supplemental Restraint System connectors. Always check parts availability before attempting a repair. IDENTIFICATION In-line connectors are identified by a number, as follows: - In-line connectors located in the engine compartment are C100 series numbers. - In-line connectors located in the instrument panel area are C200 series numbers. - In-line connectors located in the body are C300 series numbers. - Jumper harness connectors are C400 series numbers. - Grounds and ground connectors are identified with a "G" and follow the same series numbering as the in-line connectors. - Splices are identified with an "S" and follow the same series numbering as the in-line connectors. In addition, S001-S099 numbers are located in the engine compartment. - Component connectors are identified by the component name instead of a number. Multiple connectors on a component use a C1, C2, etc. identifier. LOCATIONS Vehicle/Locations contains the master connector/ground/splice location index charts with hyperlinks to the applicable location illustrations. The illustrations contain the connector name (or number)/ground number/splice number and component identification. The abbreviation T/O is used in the component location section to indicate a point in which the wiring harness branches out to a component. The abbreviation N/S means Not Shown in the illustrations Section Identification and Information DESCRIPTION - SECTION IDENTIFICATION AND INFORMATION The wiring diagrams are grouped into individual sections. If a component is most likely found in a particular group, it will be shown complete (all wires, Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Trailer Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13143 connectors, and pins) within that group. For example, the Auto Shutdown Relay is most likely to be found in Powertrain Management, so it is shown there complete. It can, however, be shown partially in another group if it contains some associated wiring. Splice diagrams show the entire splice and provide references to other sections the splices serves. Splice Information only contains splice diagrams that are not shown in their entirety somewhere else in the wiring diagrams. Connector Pin-Outs shows each connector and the circuits involved with that connector. The connectors are identified using the name/number on the diagram pages. Removal REMOVAL 1. Disconnect battery. 2. Release Connector Lock (2). 3. Disconnect the connector (3) being repaired from its mating half/component. 4. Remove the dress cover (if applicable) (1). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Trailer Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13144 5. Release the Secondary Terminal Lock, if required (1). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Trailer Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13145 6. Position the connector locking finger away from the terminal using the proper special tool. Pull on the wire to remove the terminal from the connector. Installation Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Trailer Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13146 INSTALLATION 1. Insert the removed terminal in the same cavity on the repair connector. 2. Repeat steps for each terminal in the connector, being sure that all wires are inserted into the proper cavities. For additional connector pin-out identification, refer to the wiring diagrams. 3. When the connector is re-assembled, the secondary terminal lock must be placed in the locked position to prevent terminal push out. 4. Replace dress cover (if applicable). 5. Connect connector to its mating half/component. 6. Connect battery and test all affected systems. Removal REMOVAL 1. Disconnect the battery. 2. Locate the diode in the harness, and remove the protective covering. 3. Remove the diode from the harness, pay attention to the current flow direction (1) (2) (3). Installation INSTALLATION 1. Remove the insulation from the wires in the harness. Only remove enough insulation to solder in the new diode. 2. Install the new diode in the harness, making sure current flow is correct. If necessary, refer to the appropriate wiring diagram for current flow. 3. Solder the connection together using rosin core type solder only. Do not use acid core solder. 4. Tape the diode to the harness using electrical tape. Make sure the diode is completely sealed from the elements. 5. Re-connect the battery and test affected systems. Removal REMOVAL 1. Follow steps for removing terminals described in the connector removal section. 2. Cut the wire 6 inches from the back of the connector. Installation INSTALLATION 1. Select a wire from the terminal repair kit that best matches the color and gage of the wire being repaired. 2. Cut the repair wire to the proper length and remove one-half (1/2) inch of insulation. 3. Splice the repair wire to the wire harness (see wire splicing procedure). See: Service Procedures/Wire Splicing 4. Insert the repaired wire into the connector. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Trailer Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13147 5. Install the connector locking wedge, if required, and reconnect the connector to its mating half/component. 6. Re-tape the wire harness starting at 1-1/2 inches behind the connector and 2 inches past the repair. 7. Connect battery and test all affected systems. Wire Splicing STANDARD PROCEDURE - WIRE SPLICING When splicing a wire, it is important that the correct gage be used as shown in the wiring diagrams. 1. Remove one-half (1/2) inch of insulation from each wire that needs to be spliced. 2. Place a piece of adhesive lined heat shrink tubing on one side of the wire. Make sure the tubing will be long enough to cover and seal the entire repair area. 3. Place the strands of wire overlapping each other inside of the splice clip (1). 4. Using crimping tool (1), Mopar p/n 05019912AA, crimp the splice clip and wires together. 5. Solder (3) the connection (2) together using rosin core type solder (1) only. CAUTION: DO NOT USE ACID CORE SOLDER. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Trailer Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13148 6. Center the heat shrink tubing (2) over the joint and heat using a heat gun. Heat the joint until the tubing is tightly sealed and sealant (1) comes out of both ends of the tubing. Special Tools WIRING/TERMINAL PROBING TOOL PACKAGE 6807 TERMINAL PICK TOOL SET 6680 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Trailer Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13149 TERMINAL REMOVING TOOLS 6932 AND 8638 TERMINAL REMOVING TOOL 6934 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Trailer Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13150 Trailer Connector: Diagnostic Aids Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) Sensitive Devices STANDARD PROCEDURE - ELECTROSTATIC DISCHARGE (ESD) SENSITIVE DEVICES All ESD sensitive components are solid state and a symbol is used to indicate this. When handling any component with this symbol, comply with the following procedures to reduce the possibility of electrostatic charge build up on the body and inadvertent discharge into the component. If it is not known whether the part is ESD sensitive, assume that it is. 1. Always touch a known good ground before handling the part. This should be repeated while handling the part and more frequently after sliding across a seat, sitting down from a standing position, or walking a distance. 2. Avoid touching electrical terminals of the part, unless instructed to do so by a written procedure. 3. When using a voltmeter, be sure to connect the ground lead first. 4. Do not remove the part from it's protective packing until it is time to install the part. 5. Before removing the part from it's package, ground the package to a known good ground on the vehicle. Testing Of Voltage Potential STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING OF VOLTAGE POTENTIAL 1. Connect the ground lead of a voltmeter to a known good ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the voltmeter to the selected test point. The vehicle ignition may need to be turned ON to check voltage. Refer to the appropriate test procedure. Testing For Continuity Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Trailer Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13151 STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING FOR CONTINUITY 1. Remove the fuse (1) for the circuit being checked or, disconnect the battery. 2. Connect one lead of the ohmmeter to one side of the circuit being tested 3. Connect the other lead to the other end of the circuit being tested. Low or no resistance means good continuity. Testing For A Short To Ground STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING FOR A SHORT TO GROUND 1. Remove the fuse and disconnect all items involved with the fuse. 2. Connect a test light or a voltmeter across the terminals of the fuse. 3. Starting at the fuse block, wiggle the wiring harness about six to eight inches apart and watch the voltmeter/test lamp. 4. If the voltmeter registers voltage or the test lamp glows, there is a short to ground in that general area of the wiring harness. Testing For A Short To Ground On Fuses Powering Several Loads STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING FOR A SHORT TO GROUND ON FUSES POWERING SEVERAL LOADS 1. Refer to the wiring diagrams and disconnect or isolate all items on the suspected fused circuits. 2. Replace the blown fuse. 3. Supply power to the fuse by turning ON the ignition switch or re-connecting the battery. 4. Start connecting or energizing the items in the fuse circuit one at a time. When the fuse blows the circuit with the short to ground has been isolated. Testing For A Voltage Drop STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING FOR A VOLTAGE DROP Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Trailer Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13152 1. Connect the positive lead of the voltmeter to the side of the circuit closest to the battery. 2. Connect the other lead of the voltmeter to the other side of the switch, component or circuit. 3. Operate the item. 4. The voltmeter will show the difference in voltage between the two points. Troubleshooting Wiring Problems DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING - WIRING HARNESS TROUBLESHOOTING TOOLS When diagnosing a problem in an electrical circuit there are several common tools necessary. These tools are listed and explained below. - Jumper Wire - This is a test wire used to connect two points of a circuit. It can be used to bypass an open in a circuit. WARNING: Never use a jumper wire across a load, such as a motor, connected between a battery feed and ground. - Voltmeter - Used to check for voltage on a circuit. Always connect the black lead to a known good ground and the red lead to the positive side of the circuit. CAUTION: Most of the electrical components used in today's vehicles are Solid State. When checking voltages in these circuits, use a meter with a 10 - megohm or greater impedance rating. - Ohmmeter - Used to check the resistance between two points of a circuit. Low or no resistance in a circuit means good continuity. CAUTION: Most of the electrical components used in today's vehicles are Solid State. When checking resistance in these circuits use a meter with a 10 - megohm or greater impedance rating. In addition, make sure the power is disconnected from the circuit. Circuits that are powered up by the vehicle's electrical system can cause damage to the equipment and provide false readings. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Trailer Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13153 - Probing Tools - These tools are used for probing terminals in connectors. Select the proper size tool from Special Tool Package 6807, and insert the probing end (2) into the terminal being tested. Use the other end of the tool (1) to insert the meter probe. INTERMITTENT AND POOR CONNECTIONS Most intermittent electrical problems are caused by faulty electrical connections or wiring. It is also possible for a sticking component or relay to cause a problem. Before condemning a component or wiring assembly, check the following items. - Connectors are fully seated - Spread terminals, or terminal push out - Terminals in the wiring assembly are fully seated into the connector/component and locked into position - Dirt or corrosion on the terminals. Any amount of corrosion or dirt could cause an intermittent problem - Damaged connector/component casing exposing the item to dirt or moisture - Wire insulation that has rubbed through causing a short to ground - Some or all of the wiring strands broken inside of the insulation - Wiring broken inside of the insulation TROUBLESHOOTING WIRING PROBLEMS When troubleshooting wiring problems there are six steps which can aid in the procedure. The steps are listed and explained below. Always check for non-factory items added to the vehicle before doing any diagnosis. If the vehicle is equipped with these items, disconnect them to verify these add-on items are not the cause of the problem. 1. Verify the problem. 2. Verify any related symptoms. Do this by performing operational checks on components that are in the same circuit. Refer to the wiring diagrams. 3. Analyze the symptoms. Use the wiring diagrams to determine what the circuit is doing, where the problem most likely is occurring and where the diagnosis will continue. 4. Isolate the problem area. 5. Repair the problem area. 6. Verify the proper operation. For this step, check for proper operation of all items on the repaired circuit. Refer to the wiring diagrams. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Trailer Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13154 Trailer Connector: Connector Views Relay-Trailer Tow Damping Component ID: 245 Component : RELAY-TRAILER TOW DAMPING Connector: Name : RELAY-TRAILER TOW DAMPING Color : # of pins : 5 Pin Circuit Description 1 A103 18GY/RD FUSED B(+) 2 B401 20DG/BR TRAILER TOW DAMPING RELAY CONTROL 3-4 L50 18WT/TN BRAKE LAMP SWITCH OUTPUT 5 F960 20PK/LG FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) Component Location - 33 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Trailer Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13155 Wiring-Trailer Tow Component ID: 531 Component : WIRING-TRAILER TOW Connector: Name : WIRING-TRAILER TOW Color : # of pins : 1 Qualifier : (BOX OFF) Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Trailer Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13156 Pin Circuit Description 1 L678 18BR FUSED PARK LAMP FEED Pin Circuit Description 1 Z927 14BK GROUND Pin Circuit Description 1 A100 14RD/VT FUSED B(+) Pin Circuit Description 1 B40 14DG TRAILER TOW BRAKE B(+) Pin Circuit Description 1 L1 18WT/LG BACKUP LAMP FEED Pin Circuit Description 1 L673 18YL TRAILER TOW LEFT TURN RELAY OUTPUT Pin Circuit Description 1 L674 18LG TRAILER TOW RIGHT TURN RELAY OUTPUT Component Location - 70 Wiring-Trailer Tow 4-Way Component ID: 532 Component : WIRING-TRAILER TOW 4-WAY Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Trailer Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13157 Connector: Name : WIRING-TRAILER TOW 4-WAY Color : BLACK # of pins : 4 Pin Circuit Description 1 Z927 14BK GROUND 2 L678 18BR FUSED PARK LAMP FEED 3 L673 18YL TRAILER TOW LEFT TURN RELAY OUTPUT 4 L674 18LG TRAILER TOW RIGHT TURN RELAY OUTPUT Component Location - 70 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Trailer Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13158 Wiring-Trailer Tow 7-Way Component ID: 533 Component : WIRING-TRAILER TOW 7-WAY Connector: Name : WIRING-TRAILER TOW 7-WAY Color : BLACK # of pins : 10 Pin Circuit Description Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Trailer Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13159 1-2 L674 18LG TRAILER TOW RIGHT TURN RELAY OUTPUT 3 L1 18WT/LG BACKUP LAMP FEED 4 A100 14RD/VT FUSED B(+) 5 L678 18BR FUSED PARK LAMP FEED 6-7 B40 14DG TRAILER TOW BRAKE B(+) 8 Z927 14BK GROUND 9 Z927 14BK GROUND 10 L673 18YL TRAILER TOW LEFT TURN RELAY OUTPUT Component Location - 73 Component Location - 70 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Trailer Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13160 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Trailer Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13161 Trailer Connector: Electrical Diagrams PLEASE NOTE: Some diagrams may appear to be missing because of gaps in the number sequences. These "gaps" are actually for diagrams that do not apply to the vehicle model selected. 8w-54-02 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Trailer Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13162 8w-54-03 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Trailer Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13163 8w-54-04 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Trailer Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13164 8w-54-05 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Trailer Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13165 8w-54-06 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Trailer Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13166 8w-54-07 Other Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by number (i.e. 8W-70-2, etc.) within these diagrams can be found at the vehicle level under Diagrams by Number. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Number Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Trip Computer > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Trip Computer: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION NOTE: The Compass Mini-Trip Computer (CMTC) module is sometimes referred to as Electronic Overhead Module (EOM) for the purposes of scan tool and diagnostic information naming. Please treat the CMTC and EOM as one and the same when diagnosing the vehicle. The Compass Mini-Trip Computer (CMTC) is located in the overhead console and consists of the following components: - HomeLink(R) transceiver (3) - if equipped - Vacuum-Fluorescent Display (VFD) (6) - Push button function switches (1, 2, 3, 4 and 5) - Replaceable light bulbs to illuminate the push button function switches The CMTC contains a central processing unit and interfaces with other electronic modules in the vehicle on the Controller Area Network (CAN) data bus. The CAN data bus allows the sharing of sensor information. This helps to reduce wire harness complexity, reduce internal controller hardware, and reduce component sensor current loads. At the same time, this system provides increased reliability, enhanced diagnostics, and allows the addition of many new feature capabilities. The individual components of the CMTC module are not serviced separately and if damaged or inoperative, must be replaced as a unit. The CMTC provides several electronic functions and features. Some of the functions and features that the CMTC supports and/or controls, include the following display options: - Compass and Temperature - provides the outside temperature and one of eight compass readings to indicate the direction the vehicle is facing. - Trip Odometer (ODO) - shows the distance travelled since the last trip computer reset. - Average Fuel Economy (AVG ECO) - shows the average fuel economy since the last reset. Average fuel economy is a running average of the amount of fuel used and the distance the vehicle has traveled. When the fuel economy is reset, the display will momentarily blank. Then, the display will show the same value as before the rest. The reset value is based on a minimal amount of fuel used and the distance traveled from the previous drive cycle. The display may take several miles for this value to change dependent upon driving habits. - Distance To Empty (DTE) - shows the estimated distance that can be traveled with the fuel remaining in the tank. This estimated distance is determined by weighted average of the instantaneous and average fuel economy, according to the current fuel tank level. This is not resettable. Significant changes in driving style or vehicle loading will greatly affect the actual drivable distance of the vehicle, regardless of the DTE displayed value. When the DTE value is less than 30 miles estimated driving distance, the DTE display will change to an alternating test display of "LO" and "FUEL". This display will continue until the vehicle runs out of fuel. Adding a significant amount of fuel to the vehicle will turn off the "LO FUEL" text and a new DTE value will be displayed, based on the current values in the DTE calculation and the current fuel tank level. Elapsed time (ET) - shows the accumulated ignition-on time since the last trip computer reset. - Blank screen - the compass mini-trip computer VFD is turned off or in Blank Screen Mode. COMPASS NOTE: If the compass functions, but accuracy is suspect, it may be necessary to perform a variance adjustment. This procedure allows the compass unit to accommodate variances in the earth's magnetic field strength, based on geographic location. See: Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators/Compass/Service and Repair/Procedures/Compass Mini-Trip Computer/Compass Variance Adjustment - CMTC for the appropriate procedure. While in the compass/temperature mode, the compass will display the direction in which the vehicle is pointed using the eight major compass headings (Examples: north is N, northeast is NE). The auto-calibrating compass unit requires no manual adjusting in normal use. The only calibration that may Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Trip Computer > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 13171 prove necessary is to drive the vehicle in one or two complete circles, on level ground, not exceeding 8 km/h (5 mph). This will reorient the compass unit to its vehicle. The compass unit also will compensate for vehicle magnetism acquired during normal use. However, avoid placing anything magnetic directly on the roof of the vehicle. Magnetic mounts for an antenna, a repair order hat, or a funeral procession flag can exceed the compensating ability of the compass unit if placed on the roof panel. Magnetic bit drivers used on the fasteners that hold the overhead console assembly to the roof header can also affect compass operation. If the vehicle roof should become magnetized, See: Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators/Compass/Service and Repair/Procedures/Compass Mini-Trip Computer/Compass Demagnetizing - CMTC to restore proper compass operation. TEMPERATURE NOTE: The displayed temperature is not an instant reading of conditions, but an average temperature. It may take the temperature display several minutes to respond to a major temperature change, such as driving out of a heated garage into winter temperatures. The temperature displays the outside ambient temperature in whole degrees. The temperature display can be toggled from Fahrenheit to Celsius using the U.S./Metric push button. Displayed temperature reading stays in the temperature unit memory. When the ignition switch is turned to the On position, the temperature will display the memory temperature if the engine OFF time is less than 255 minutes. If the engine OFF time is more than 255 minutes, the temperature will display the actual temperature sensed by the ambient temperature sensor. The temperature display update interval varies with the vehicle speed. The temperature function is supported by an ambient temperature sensor. This sensor is mounted outside the passenger compartment near the front and center of the vehicle, and is hard wired to the Front Control Module (FCM). The instrument cluster, also known as the Cab Compartment Node (CCN) averages and filters the ambient temperature signal and supplies it to other modules on the CAN data bus. Data input for all other compass mini-trip computer functions, including VFD dimming level, is received through CAN data bus messages. The maximum temperature displayed is 66°C (140° F). It could take several miles for the accurate temperature to be displayed as the CCN filters out heat from the engine compartment. The CMTC uses its internal programming and all of these inputs to calculate and display the requested data. If the data displayed is incorrect, perform the self-diagnostic tests, as described in this group. If these tests prove inconclusive, the use of a scan tool and the proper Diagnostic Procedures Information are recommended for further testing of the CMTC and the CAN data bus. NOTE: The CMTC will display min and max temperatures of -40° C (-40° F) and 66°C (140° F). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Trip Computer > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 13172 Trip Computer: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The Compass Mini-Trip Computer (CMTC) only operates with the ignition switch in the On position and the Ignition Off Draw (IOD) fuse functioning and in place. When the ignition switch is turned to the On position, all of the segments in the CMTC Vacuum-Fluorescent Display (VFD) will be turned off for one second, then the display will return to the last function being displayed before the ignition was turned to the Off position. With the ignition switch in the On position, momentarily depressing and releasing the STEP push button (4) will cause the CMTC to change its mode of operation. Momentarily depressing and releasing the U.S./M push button (1) will cause the unit to toggle between U.S. and Metric measurements. Momentarily depressing and releasing the C/T (compass/temperature) push button (5) will cause the CMTC to return to the compass/temperature display mode from any other mode. Pressing the RESET push button (2) for more than one second with the ignition switch in the On position will reset the following CMTC functions: - Average Fuel Economy (AVG ECO) - Trip Odometer (ODO) - Elapsed Time (ET) However, the reset will only occur if the function currently displayed is a function that can be reset. If the RESET push button is pressed twice within two seconds while in any of the three resettable functions (AVG ECO, ODO, ET), all three of these functions will be reset. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Trip Computer > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 13173 Trip Computer: Testing and Inspection COMPASS MINI-TRIP COMPUTER NOTE: The temperature, fuel economy, distance to empty and trip odometer are calculated in the Cab Compartment Node (CCN) and transferred to the Compass Mini-Trip Computer (CMTC) for display. If the CMTC and Vacuum Fluorescent Display (VFD) test OK, testing of the CCN and Controller Area Network (CAN) data bus circuit may be necessary. Refer to the proper Diagnostic Procedures Information to test the CCN and CAN data bus circuit. If the problem with the CMTC is an inaccurate or scrambled display, refer to SELF- DIAGNOSTIC TEST. If the problem with the CMTC is incorrect Vacuum Fluorescent Display (VFD) dimming levels, use a scan tool and the proper Diagnostic Procedures Information to test for the correct dimming message inputs being received from the Cab Compartment Node (CCN) or Front Control Module (FCM) over the Controller Area Network (CAN) data bus circuit. If the problem is a no-display condition, use the following procedure. For complete circuit diagrams, refer to the appropriate wiring information. The wiring information includes wiring diagrams, proper wire and connector repair procedures, details of wire harness routing and retention, connector pin-out information and location views for the various wire harness connectors, splices and grounds. 1. Remove the overhead console from the headliner See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Console/Service and Repair/Overhead Console/Removal . 2. Inspect the Ignition Off Draw (IOD) fuse in the Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM). If the IOD fuse is OK and in place, go to STEP 3. If not OK, repair the open IOD fuse circuit as required. 3. Check for battery voltage at the overhead console electrical connector. If OK, go to STEP 4. If not OK, Check for battery voltage at the appropriate B(+) fuse in the Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM), repair the open fused B(+) circuit as required. 4. Turn the ignition switch to the On position. Check the fused ignition switch output circuit(s) at the overhead console electrical connector. If OK, go to STEP 5. If not OK, repair the open or shorted circuit as required. 5. Turn the ignition switch to the Off position. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. Check for continuity between the ground circuit cavity of the overhead console electrical connector and a good ground. There should be continuity. If OK, refer to SELF- DIAGNOSTIC TEST for further diagnosis of the CMTC module and the CAN data bus circuit. If not OK, repair the open ground circuit as required. SELF- DIAGNOSTIC TEST NOTE: The CMTC self - test can also be performed using a scan tool. Navigate to the Auto Self Test screen under System Tests of the scan tool and initiate the CMTC self - test. A self-diagnostic test is used to determine that the CMTC is operating properly electrically. Initiate the self-diagnostic test as follows: 1. With the ignition switch in the Off position, simultaneously depress and hold the STEP and RESET buttons while rotating the ignition switch to the Run/On position. 2. Continue to hold both buttons depressed until the CMTC enters the display segment test. In this test, all of the Vacuum Fluorescent Display (VFD) segments are lighted while the CMTC performs the following checks: Non-Volatile Memory Status (NVM) - RAM Status - ROM Status - ASIC Communication Status - Compass Status - DC Status - CAN Data Bus Communications Status NOTE: If the CMTC module is equipped with the Universal Transmitter (also known as HomeLink(R)), the module also checks "HomeLink(R) Communication Test Status". 3. Following completion of these tests, the CMTC will display one of two messages: "FAIL" or "PASS." Press the RESET or STEP button to exit and enter normal mode. Respond to these test results as follows: If no test result message is displayed, but CMTC operation is still improper, the use of a scan tool and the proper Diagnostic Procedures Information are required for further diagnosis. - If the "FAIL" message is displayed, the CMTC is inoperative and must be replaced. - If the "PASS" message is displayed, the CMTC is OK, no faults are present. - If any VFD segment does not light during the display segment test, the CMTC is inoperative and must be replaced. If the first seven tests pass, the CMTC shall verify that all the required CAN bus messages are present on the CAN bus. If all required messages are present on the CAN bus, the CMTC will automatically return to normal operation after sixty seconds. The CMTC can also be returned to normal operation any time during the test by pressing the STEP , CT , RESET or US/M buttons. NOTE: Pressing the STEP or RESET buttons during any portion of the CMTC Self - Diagnostic Test Procedure will cause the CMTC to exit diagnostics and return to compass/temperature mode. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Trip Computer > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 13174 NOTE: If the compass functions, but accuracy is suspect, it may be necessary to perform a variance adjustment. This procedure allows the compass unit to accommodate variations in the earth's magnetic field strength, based on geographic location. NOTE: If the compass reading has blanked out, and only "CAL" appears in the display, demagnetizing may be necessary to remove excessive residual magnetic fields from the vehicle. Check for stored Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) and follow the proper Diagnostic Procedures Information as needed. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Trip Computer > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures Trip Computer: Procedures Manual Compass Calibration - CMTC MANUAL COMPASS CALIBRATION CAUTION: Do not place any external magnets, such as magnetic roof mount antennas, in the vicinity of the overhead console. Do not use magnetic tools when servicing the overhead console. NOTE: Whenever the compass is calibrated manually, the variance number must also be reset. See: Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators/Compass/Service and Repair/Procedures/Compass Mini-Trip Computer/Compass Variance Adjustment - CMTC for the appropriate procedure. The electronic compass unit features a self-calibrating design, which simplifies the calibration procedure. This feature automatically updates the compass calibration while the vehicle is being driven. This allows the compass unit to compensate for small changes in the residual magnetism that the vehicle may acquire during normal use. If the compass readings appear to be erratic or out of calibration, perform the following calibration procedure. Also, new service replacement Compass Mini-Trip Computer (CMTC) modules must have their compass calibrated using this procedure. Do not attempt to calibrate the compass near large metal objects such as other vehicles, large buildings, or bridges; or, near overhead or underground power lines. Calibrate the compass manually as follows: 1. Turn the ignition switch to the On position. If the compass/temperature data is not currently being displayed, momentarily depress and release the C/T push button (5) to return to the compass/temperature display. 2. Depress and hold the RESET push button (2). Hold the push button down until "CAL" appears in the display. This takes about ten seconds. 3. Slowly drive the vehicle on a level surface, away from large metal objects and power lines, through one or two complete circles not exceeding 8 km/h (5 mph). The "CAL" message will disappear from the display to indicate that the compass is now calibrated. NOTE: A blank compass display indicates that vehicle degaussing (demagnetizing) may be necessary. NOTE: If the "CAL" message remains in the display, either there is excessive magnetism near the compass, or the CMTC is inoperative. Attempt the calibration procedure at least one more time before performing CMTC diagnosis. NOTE: If the wrong direction is still indicated in the compass display, the area selected for calibration may be too close to a strong magnetic field. Repeat the calibration procedure in another location. Compass Demagnetizing - CMTC COMPASS DEMAGNETIZING Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Trip Computer > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 13177 A degaussing tool (Special Tool 6029) is used to demagnetize, or degauss, the overhead console forward mounting screw and the roof panel above the overhead console. Equivalent units must be rated as continuous duty for 110/115 volts and 60 Hz. They must also have a field strength of over 350 gauss at 7 millimeters (0.25 inch) beyond the tip of the probe. To demagnetize the roof panel and the overhead console forward mounting screw, proceed as follows: 1. Be certain that the ignition switch is in the Off position, before you begin the demagnetizing procedure. 2. Connect the degaussing tool to an electrical outlet, while keeping the tool at least 61 centimeters (2 feet) away from the compass unit. 3. Slowly approach the head of the overhead console forward mounting screw with the degaussing tool connected. 4. Contact the head of the screw with the plastic coated tip of the degaussing tool for about two seconds. 5. With the degaussing tool still energized, slowly back it away from the screw. When the tip of the tool is at least 61 centimeters (2 feet) from the screw head, disconnect the tool. 6. Place a piece of paper approximately 22 by 28 centimeters (8.5 by 11 inches), oriented on the vehicle lengthwise from front to rear, on the center line of the roof at the windshield header. The purpose of the paper is to protect the roof panel from scratches, and to define the area to be demagnetized. 7. Connect the degaussing tool to an electrical outlet, while keeping the tool at least 61 centimeters (2 feet) away from the compass unit. 8. Slowly approach the center line of the roof panel at the windshield header, with the degaussing tool connected. 9. Contact the roof panel with the plastic coated tip of the degaussing tool. Be sure that the template is in place to avoid scratching the roof panel. Using a slow, back-and-forth sweeping motion, and allowing 13 millimeters (0.50 inch) between passes, move the tool at least 11 centimeters (4 inches) to each side of the roof center line, and 28 centimeters (11 inches) back from the windshield header. 10. With the degaussing tool still energized, slowly back it away from the roof panel. When the tip of the tool is at least 61 centimeters (2 feet) from the roof panel, disconnect the tool. 11. Calibrate the compass, See: Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators/Compass/Service and Repair/Procedures/Compass Mini-Trip Computer/Manual Compass Calibration - CMTC and adjust the compass variance, See: Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators/Compass/Service and Repair/Procedures/Compass Mini-Trip Computer/Compass Variance Adjustment - CMTC . Compass Variance Adjustment - CMTC Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Trip Computer > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 13178 COMPASS VARIANCE ADJUSTMENT Compass variance, also known as magnetic declination, is the difference in angle between magnetic north and true geographic north. In some geographic locations, the difference between magnetic and geographic north is great enough to cause the compass to give false readings. If this problem occurs, the compass variance must be set. NOTE: If the vehicle is taken on long trips into a new variance zone the compass function may be effected. Compass variance may need to be adjusted to the new zone number to function properly. NOTE: The default for the compass variance from the factory is 8. To set the compass variance: 1. Using the Variance Settings Map, find your geographic location and note the zone number. 2. Turn the ignition switch to the On/Run position. If the compass/temperature data is not currently being displayed, momentarily depress and release the C/T push button (5) to return to the compass/temperature display. 3. Press and hold the RESET push button (2) down for approximately five seconds. The last variance zone number will be displayed. 4. Momentarily depress and release the STEP push button (4) to toggle through the zone numbers (1-15), until the zone number for your geographic location appears in the display. 5. Momentarily depress and release the RESET push button (2) to enter the displayed zone number into the compass unit memory. 6. Confirm that the correct directions are now indicated by the compass. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Trip Computer > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 13179 Trip Computer: Removal and Replacement Compass Mini - Trip Computer COMPASS MINI - TRIP COMPUTER 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. 2. Remove the overhead console (3) from the headliner See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Console/Service and Repair/Overhead Console/Removal . 3. Remove the screws (1) that secure the Compass Mini - Trip Computer (CMTC) (4) to the overhead console housing (3). 4. Remove the CMTC (4) from the overhead console housing (3). Bulb - CMTC Control BULB - CMTC CONTROL WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury on vehicles equipped with airbags, disable the Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, airbag, seat belt tensioner, impact sensor, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the SRS. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment. NOTE: There are provisions for up to three bulb/bulb holder units on the Compass Mini-Trip Computer (CMTC) circuit board. The two outboard bulbs illuminate the CMTC push buttons, while the center bulb illuminates the optional universal transmitter push buttons. Therefore, the center bulb location is only populated on vehicles equipped with the optional universal transmitter. 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. 2. Remove the overhead console (1) from the headliner. See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Console/Service and Repair/Overhead Console/Removal . 3. Use a small thin-bladed screwdriver to rotate the bulb holder (3) counterclockwise about 30 degrees to unlock it from the keyed opening in the Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Trip Computer > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 13180 Compass Mini-Trip Computer (CMTC) unit (2) circuit board. 4. Pull the bulb holder and bulb straight out of the circuit board. Compass Mini - Trip Computer COMPASS MINI - TRIP COMPUTER NOTE: If a new Compass Mini - Trip Computer has been installed, the compass will have to be calibrated and the variance set. See: Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators/Compass/Service and Repair/Procedures/Compass Mini-Trip Computer/Manual Compass Calibration - CMTC and See: Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators/Compass/Service and Repair/Procedures/Compass Mini-Trip Computer/Compass Variance Adjustment - CMTC for the appropriate procedures. 1. Position the CMTC (4) onto the overhead console housing (3). 2. Install the screws (1) that secure the CMTC (4) to the overhead console housing (3). Tighten the screws to 2 Nm (20 in. lbs.). 3. Install the overhead console (3) onto the headliner See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Console/Service and Repair/Overhead Console/Installation . 4. Reconnect the battery negative cable. Bulb - CMTC Control BULB - CMTC CONTROL WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury on vehicles equipped with airbags, disable the Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, airbag, seat belt tensioner, impact sensor, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the SRS. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment. CAUTION: Always use the correct bulb size and type for replacement. An incorrect bulb size or type may overheat and cause damage to the lamp, the socket or the lamp wiring. NOTE: There are provisions for up to three bulb/bulb holder units on the Compass Mini-Trip Computer (CMTC) circuit board. The two outboard bulbs illuminate the CMTC push buttons, while the center bulb illuminates the optional universal transmitter push buttons. Therefore, the center bulb location is only populated on vehicles equipped with the optional universal transmitter. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Trip Computer > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 13181 1. Align the bulb holder and bulb (3) with the keyed opening in the circuit board of the Compass Mini-Trip Computer (CMTC) (2). 2. Insert the bulb holder and bulb straight into the circuit board until the bulb holder is firmly seated. 3. Using a small thin-bladed screwdriver, rotate the bulb holder clockwise about 30 degrees on the circuit board to lock it into place. 4. Reinstall the overhead console (1) onto the headliner. See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Console/Service and Repair/Overhead Console/Installation . 5. Reconnect the battery negative cable. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Voice Activation System > Voice Activation Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Voice Activation Module: > 08-028-08 > Sep > 08 > Cell Phone - Voice Recognition Screen Locks Up Voice Activation Module: Customer Interest Cell Phone - Voice Recognition Screen Locks Up NUMBER: 08-028-08 GROUP: Electrical DATE: September 18, 2008 SUBJECT: Voice Recognition Screen Lock-up on REN or REZ Radio Equipped With Hands-Free Communications OVERVIEW: This bulletin involves replacing the Hands Free Module (HFM). MODELS: 2008 (DR/DH/DC/D1) Ram Truck (1500/2500/3500) 2008 (HB) Durango 2008 (HG) Aspen 2008 (JS) Avenger/Sebring (U.S. and International Markets) 2008 (KA) Nitro (U.S. and International Markets) 2008 (KK) Liberty (U.S. and International Markets) 2008 (LX) 300C/Magnum/Charger 2008 (LE) 300/ 300C Touring (International Markets) 2008 (LC) Challenger 2008 (RI) Town & Country/Grand Caravan/Grand Voyager (U.S. and International Markets) 2008 (WK) Grand Cherokee 2008 (WH) Grand Cherokee (International Markets) 2008 (XK) Commander 2008 (XH) Commander (International Markets) NOTE: This bulletin applies to vehicles equipped with radio sales codes REN or REZ and Hands4ree Communications Sales Codes RSP or RSQ built before the following dates: ^ (HB/HG) built before November 13, 2007 (MDH 1113XX) ^ (LX/LC) built before February 28, 2008 (MDH 0228XX) ^ (DR) built before January 26, 2008 (MDH 0126XX) ^ (WK/XK) built before March 2, 2008 (MDH 0302XX) ^ (LE, WH/XH, DH, DC, D1) built before November 6, 2007 (MDH 1106XX) ^ (JS) built before May 6, 2008 (MDH 0506XX) ^ (RT) built before December 13, 2007 (MDH 1213XX) ^ (KK/KA) built before February 26, 2008 (MDH 0226XX) Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Voice Activation System > Voice Activation Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Voice Activation Module: > 08-028-08 > Sep > 08 > Cell Phone - Voice Recognition Screen Locks Up > Page 13191 SYMPTOM/CONDITION: Customers may experience one of the following conditions: a. A "lock up condition of the radio screen when the Voice Recognition (VR) button is pressed b. When the VR button is pressed, the radio display changes to the phone screen and there is a lack of the "Ready" audio prompt. If the above symptom/condition is experienced, perform the following diagnostic procedure. DIAGNOSIS: 1. Turn ignition key on. 2. Using a Scan Tool (StarSCAN(R)) read and identify the current HFM part number in the vehicle. 3. Is the HFM part number 05064560AC, 05064448AE, 05064561AC, 05064482AE, 05064483AE or greater? a. Yes >> This bulletin does not apply, further diagnosis is required. b. No >> perform the repair procedure. PARTS REQUIRED: REPAIR PROCEDURE: 1. Replace the Hands Free Module. Refer to the service procedure available on DealerCONNECT/TechCONNECT, Group 8 Electrical > 8T Navigation and Telecommunications> MODULE, Hands free remove and Installation procedures. POLICY: Reimbursable within the provisions of the warranty. TIME ALLOWANCE: Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Voice Activation System > Voice Activation Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Voice Activation Module: > 08-028-08 > Sep > 08 > Cell Phone - Voice Recognition Screen Locks Up > Page 13192 FAILURE CODE: Disclaimer: This bulletin is supplied as technical information only and is not an authorization for repair. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Voice Activation System > Voice Activation Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Voice Activation Module: > 08-028-08 > Sep > 08 > Cell Phone - Voice Recognition Screen Locks Up Voice Activation Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Cell Phone - Voice Recognition Screen Locks Up NUMBER: 08-028-08 GROUP: Electrical DATE: September 18, 2008 SUBJECT: Voice Recognition Screen Lock-up on REN or REZ Radio Equipped With Hands-Free Communications OVERVIEW: This bulletin involves replacing the Hands Free Module (HFM). MODELS: 2008 (DR/DH/DC/D1) Ram Truck (1500/2500/3500) 2008 (HB) Durango 2008 (HG) Aspen 2008 (JS) Avenger/Sebring (U.S. and International Markets) 2008 (KA) Nitro (U.S. and International Markets) 2008 (KK) Liberty (U.S. and International Markets) 2008 (LX) 300C/Magnum/Charger 2008 (LE) 300/ 300C Touring (International Markets) 2008 (LC) Challenger 2008 (RI) Town & Country/Grand Caravan/Grand Voyager (U.S. and International Markets) 2008 (WK) Grand Cherokee 2008 (WH) Grand Cherokee (International Markets) 2008 (XK) Commander 2008 (XH) Commander (International Markets) NOTE: This bulletin applies to vehicles equipped with radio sales codes REN or REZ and Hands4ree Communications Sales Codes RSP or RSQ built before the following dates: ^ (HB/HG) built before November 13, 2007 (MDH 1113XX) ^ (LX/LC) built before February 28, 2008 (MDH 0228XX) ^ (DR) built before January 26, 2008 (MDH 0126XX) ^ (WK/XK) built before March 2, 2008 (MDH 0302XX) ^ (LE, WH/XH, DH, DC, D1) built before November 6, 2007 (MDH 1106XX) ^ (JS) built before May 6, 2008 (MDH 0506XX) ^ (RT) built before December 13, 2007 (MDH 1213XX) ^ (KK/KA) built before February 26, 2008 (MDH 0226XX) Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Voice Activation System > Voice Activation Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Voice Activation Module: > 08-028-08 > Sep > 08 > Cell Phone - Voice Recognition Screen Locks Up > Page 13198 SYMPTOM/CONDITION: Customers may experience one of the following conditions: a. A "lock up condition of the radio screen when the Voice Recognition (VR) button is pressed b. When the VR button is pressed, the radio display changes to the phone screen and there is a lack of the "Ready" audio prompt. If the above symptom/condition is experienced, perform the following diagnostic procedure. DIAGNOSIS: 1. Turn ignition key on. 2. Using a Scan Tool (StarSCAN(R)) read and identify the current HFM part number in the vehicle. 3. Is the HFM part number 05064560AC, 05064448AE, 05064561AC, 05064482AE, 05064483AE or greater? a. Yes >> This bulletin does not apply, further diagnosis is required. b. No >> perform the repair procedure. PARTS REQUIRED: REPAIR PROCEDURE: 1. Replace the Hands Free Module. Refer to the service procedure available on DealerCONNECT/TechCONNECT, Group 8 Electrical > 8T Navigation and Telecommunications> MODULE, Hands free remove and Installation procedures. POLICY: Reimbursable within the provisions of the warranty. TIME ALLOWANCE: Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Voice Activation System > Voice Activation Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Voice Activation Module: > 08-028-08 > Sep > 08 > Cell Phone - Voice Recognition Screen Locks Up > Page 13199 FAILURE CODE: Disclaimer: This bulletin is supplied as technical information only and is not an authorization for repair. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Voice Activation System > Voice Activation Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 13200 Voice Activation Module: Locations Component ID: 208 Component : MODULE-HANDS FREE Connector: Name : MODULE-HANDS FREE Color : DK. GRAY # of pins : 22 Pin Circuit Description 1 A114 18GY/RD FUSED B(+) 2-3-4 D54 20WT CAN B BUS (-) 5 X722 20LB/DG MICROPHONE 2 IN (+) 6-7-- 8 X716 20GY/TN LEFT AUDIO OUTPUT 9 X776 20TN/GY RIGHT AUDIO OUTPUT 10 X795 20DG COMMON AUDIO OUTPUT 11 - 12 - 13 - 14 D55 20WT/OR CAN B BUS (+) 15 - 16 X712 20DG/LB MICROPHONE 1 IN (+) 17 X792 20LB/DG MICROPHONE IN (-) 18 - 19 - 20 X793 20DG/YL MICROPHONE FEED 21 X835 20OR/GY SENSOR GROUND 22 Z970 18BK GROUND Component Location - 46 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Voice Activation System > Voice Activation Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 13201 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Voice Activation System > Voice Activation Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 13202 Voice Activation Module: Diagrams Component ID: 208 Component : MODULE-HANDS FREE Connector: Name : MODULE-HANDS FREE Color : DK. GRAY # of pins : 22 Pin Circuit Description 1 A114 18GY/RD FUSED B(+) 2-3-4 D54 20WT CAN B BUS (-) 5 X722 20LB/DG MICROPHONE 2 IN (+) 6-7-- 8 X716 20GY/TN LEFT AUDIO OUTPUT 9 X776 20TN/GY RIGHT AUDIO OUTPUT 10 X795 20DG COMMON AUDIO OUTPUT 11 - 12 - 13 - 14 D55 20WT/OR CAN B BUS (+) 15 - 16 X712 20DG/LB MICROPHONE 1 IN (+) 17 X792 20LB/DG MICROPHONE IN (-) 18 - 19 - 20 X793 20DG/YL MICROPHONE FEED 21 X835 20OR/GY SENSOR GROUND 22 Z970 18BK GROUND Component Location - 46 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Voice Activation System > Voice Activation Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 13203 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Winch > Winch Cable > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Winch Cable: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL 1. Move the clutch lever (2) to "Free Spool" and disengage the wire rope. Pull out a portion to give it some slack. 2. Remove the clip (2), pin (1) and remove the hook (5) from the wire rope (4). 3. Pull the wire rope out and unwind the winch drum (1). 4. Remove the bolt (2) and remove the rope (3). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Winch > Winch Cable > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 13209 Winch Cable: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION WARNING: Always keep hands and clothing clear of the wire rope, hook and fairlead opening during operation and when spooling. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury or death. CAUTION: Wire rope must spool on the winch drum in the direction indicated. 1. Feed the new wire rope end (3) through the guide rollers. 2. Attach the flat side of the wire rope end (3) to the winch drum (1), apply red thread locker to the threads and install the bolt (2). 3. Wrap the wire rope around the spool approximately one time, in the direction indicated on the spool. 4. Tighten the bolt to 3 Nm (25 in. lbs.). 5. Arrange the wire rope so it will not kink or tangle when spooled. 6. Lock the winch drum by rotating the clutch lever (2) on the winch to "Engage." NOTE: Always make sure the clutch is engaged or disengaged fully. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Winch > Winch Cable > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 13210 7. Connect the remote control to the socket. 8. Install the hook (5), the pin (1) and clip (2) to the end of the wire rope (4). 9. Keep the rope under light tension and spool the rope back onto the winch drum in even layers. 10. Stop frequently to tighten and straighten the layers as necessary. 11. Repeat this process until the winch hook (5) is the same distance from the winch as the full length of the remote control. 12. Using the hook strap, walk the wire rope towards the guide rollers, carefully spooling in the remaining wire rope by pulsing the remote control switch. NOTE: If you do not have the hook strap, use a length of cord or similar when handling the hook during servicing of the winch. 13. Store the winch hook on the most outboard loop of the tow hook and remove the slack from the wire rope. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Winch > Winch Motor > Component Information > Description and Operation Winch Motor: Description and Operation DESCRIPTION MOTOR The winch is driven on one end by a two direction electric motor powered by the vehicle electrical system. The motor is internally protected by a thermal switch that is activated when the motor gets too hot to operate efficiently. Winch motor controls consist of a relay pack mounted to the motor, and a remote control connected to the relay pack with a cord. The winch power source cables are connected to the relay pack which in turn feeds power to the winch motor through electrical cable connections. The main function of the relay pack is to allow the operator to switch the winch on and off in both directions. The winch relay pack also includes a Low Voltage Interrupt (LVI) used to prevent winch operation in the event of battery power dropping below 10 volts. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Winch > Winch Motor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Winch Motor - Removal Winch Motor: Service and Repair Winch Motor - Removal REMOVAL 1. Remove the winch assembly (2). See: Service and Repair/Winch/Removal 2. Separate one of the roller shaft clips (1), remove the shaft (3) and the roller (4). 3. Remove the bolts (3) and separate the support bracket (1) from the winch assembly (2). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Winch > Winch Motor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Winch Motor - Removal > Page 13216 4. Remove the relay pack (1). See: Winch Relay/Service and Repair/Relay Pack/Removal 5. Stand winch assembly on the clutch end with the motor up to make it easier to align the motor coupler and drive shaft. 6. Remove the two motor mounting bolts (1) and carefully lift the motor (2) off of the drum assembly. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Winch > Winch Motor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Winch Motor - Removal > Page 13217 Winch Motor: Service and Repair Winch Motor - Installation INSTALLATION 1. With the winch assembly (1) standing on the clutch side verify that the motor coupler (2) is centered in the drive shaft opening (3). 2. Position the motor drive shaft into the motor coupler splines and install the motor (2). 3. Install the bolts (1) and tighten to 9 Nm (82 in. lbs.). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Winch > Winch Motor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Winch Motor - Removal > Page 13218 4. Install the relay pack (1). See: Winch Relay/Service and Repair/Relay Pack/Installation 5. Install the support bracket (1) and install the bolts (3). 6. Tighten the bolts to 108 Nm (80 ft. lbs.). 7. Position the wire rope through the roller opening and install the roller (4), shaft (3) and clip (1). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Winch > Winch Motor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Winch Motor - Removal > Page 13219 8. Install the winch assembly (2). See: Service and Repair/Winch/Installation Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Winch > Winch Motor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Winch Motor - Removal > Page 13220 Winch Motor: Service and Repair Motor-Tie Rods Removal REMOVAL 1. Remove the winch assembly. See: Service and Repair/Winch/Removal 2. Remove the bolts and remove the damaged tie rod(s). Installation INSTALLATION 1. Install the tie rod(s) and install the bolts. 2. Tighten the bolts to 23 Nm (17 ft. lbs.). 3. Install the winch assembly. See: Service and Repair/Winch/Installation Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Winch > Winch Relay > Component Information > Description and Operation Winch Relay: Description and Operation DESCRIPTION RELAY PACK Electrical operation of the control assembly consists of four heavy duty relays, a thermal-switch located on the motor armature brush holder and a Low Voltage Interrupt (LVI) located in the control assembly. The thermal-switch interrupts the power-in function and the LVI affects both the power-in and power-out functions and must be reset by allowing the charging circuit voltage to rise above 10 volts for more than 30 seconds. The thermal switch is reset only by allowing the winch motor to cool adequately (about 30 minutes). Relay number 1 and 3 control current flow through the field windings and relay number 2 and 4 supply current to the motor armature. Operation In the power-out mode, relay number 2 and 3 are energized by the remote control switch. Current flows from the positive battery terminal through relay number 3 then through the black motor cable to the number 2 and number 1 field windings. From the black motor cable current then flows through solenoid number 2 to the motor armature to ground. In power-in mode, relay number 1 and 4 are energized. Current again flows from the battery positive cable, but this time current flows through solenoid number 1 then through field winding number 1. Current flowing in the reverse direction through the field windings cause the motor to turn in the opposite direction. From the red motor cable current then flows through relay number 4 to the black cable going to the motor armature to ground. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Winch > Winch Relay > Component Information > Service and Repair > Relay Winch Relay: Service and Repair Relay Removal REMOVAL 1. Remove the relay pack (1). See: Relay Pack/Removal 2. Remove the nuts (2 & 3), disconnect the cables and remove the bus straps (4). NOTE: Relay #4 shown, all others similar. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Winch > Winch Relay > Component Information > Service and Repair > Relay > Page 13226 3. Remove the nuts (1) and disconnect the control wires (2). 4. Slide the relay (1) out of the retaining tab (2) and remove. Installation INSTALLATION NOTE: Relay #4 shown, all others similar. 1. Slide the relay (1) into the retaining tab (2). 2. Install the control wires (2) and install the nuts (1). 3. Tighten the nuts to 3 Nm (25 in. lbs.). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Winch > Winch Relay > Component Information > Service and Repair > Relay > Page 13227 4. Install the bus straps (4) and connect the cables. 5. Install the nuts (2 & 3) and tighten to 9.5 Nm (85 in. lbs.). 6. Install the relay pack (1). See: Relay Pack/Installation Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Winch > Winch Relay > Component Information > Service and Repair > Relay > Page 13228 Winch Relay: Service and Repair Relay Pack Removal REMOVAL 1. Disconnect and isolate battery negative cable (3). 2. Remove the winch assembly (2). See: Service and Repair/Winch/Removal 3. Remove the nut and disconnect the red battery positive cable (1). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Winch > Winch Relay > Component Information > Service and Repair > Relay > Page 13229 NOTE: Relay #4 shown, all others similar. 4. Remove the control wire nuts (1) and disconnect the control wires (2) from each relay. Installation INSTALLATION NOTE: Relay #4 shown, all others similar. 1. Install the control wires (2) to all the relays and install the nuts (1). 2. Tighten the nuts to 3 Nm (25 in. lbs.). 3. Install the red battery positive cable (1) and install the switch wire. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Winch > Winch Relay > Component Information > Service and Repair > Relay > Page 13230 4. Install the nut and tighten to 10 Nm (85 in. lbs.). 5. Install the relay pack cover (1) and install the three screws (2). 6. Install the winch assembly (2). See: Service and Repair/Winch/Installation 7. Connect the battery negative cable (3) and verify winch operation. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Winch > Winch Roller / Cable Guide > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Winch Roller / Cable Guide: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL 1. Move the clutch lever (2) to "Free Spool" and disengage the wire rope. Pull out a portion to give it some slack. 2. Remove the clips (1). 3. Remove the roller axle rods (3) and remove the rollers (4) from the support bracket (2). 4. Separate the bushings (1) from the rollers (2) and replace if necessary. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Winch > Winch Roller / Cable Guide > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 13235 5. Remove the clips (3). 6. Remove the roller axle rods (2) and remove the rollers (4) from the support bracket (1). 7. Separate the bushings (2) from the rollers (1) and replace if necessary. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Winch > Winch Roller / Cable Guide > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 13236 Winch Roller / Cable Guide: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION 1. Install the roller bushings (2) onto the rollers (1). 2. Install the rollers (4) and install the axle rods (2). 3. Install the clips (3). 4. Install the roller bushings (1) onto the rollers (2). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Winch > Winch Roller / Cable Guide > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 13237 5. Install the roller axle rods (3) and install the rollers (4) onto the support bracket (2). 6. Install the clips (1). 7. Store the winch hook on the most outboard loop of the tow hook. 8. Engage the clutch lever (2) and remove the slack from the wire rope. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Body Control Module: Diagram Information and Instructions Warnings WARNINGS - GENERAL WARNINGS provide information to prevent personal injury and vehicle damage. Below is a list of general warnings that should be followed any time a vehicle is being serviced. WARNING: Always wear safety glasses for eye protection. WARNING: Use safety stands anytime a procedure requires being under a vehicle. WARNING: Be sure that the ignition switch always is in the off position, unless the procedure requires it to be on. WARNING: Set the parking brake when working on any vehicle. An automatic transmission should be in park. A manual transmission should be in neutral. WARNING: Operate the engine only in a well-ventilated area. WARNING: Keep away from moving parts when the engine is running, especially the fan and belts. WARNING: To prevent serious burns, avoid contact with hot parts such as the radiator, exhaust manifold(s), tail pipe, catalytic converter and muffler. WARNING: Do not allow flame or sparks near the battery. Gases are always present in and around the battery. WARNING: Always remove rings, watches, loose hanging jewelry and avoid loose clothing. How to Use Wiring Diagrams DESCRIPTION - HOW TO USE WIRING DIAGRAMS DaimlerChrysler Corporation wiring diagrams are designed to provide information regarding the vehicles wiring content. In order to effectively use the wiring diagrams to diagnose and repair DaimlerChrysler Corporation vehicles, it is important to understand all of their features and characteristics. Diagrams are arranged such that the power (B+) side of the circuit is placed near the top of the page, and the ground (B-) side of the circuit is placed near the bottom of the page. All switches, components, and modules are shown in the at rest position with the doors closed and the key removed from the ignition. Components are shown two ways. A solid line around a component indicates that the component is complete. A dashed line around the component indicates that the component is being shown is not complete. Incomplete components have a reference number to indicate the page where the component is shown complete. It is important to realize that no attempt is made on the diagrams to represent components and wiring as they appear on the vehicle. For example, a short piece of wire is treated the same as a long one. In addition, switches and other components are shown as simply as possible, with regard to function only. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13244 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13245 SYMBOLS International symbols are used throughout the wiring diagrams. These symbols are consistent with those being used around the world. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13246 TERMINOLOGY This is a list of terms and definitions used in the wiring diagrams. LHD - Left Hand Drive Vehicles RHD - Right Hand Drive Vehicles ATX - Automatic Transmissions-Front Wheel Drive MTX Manual Transmissions-Front Wheel Drive Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13247 AT - Automatic Transmissions-Rear Wheel Drive MT - Manual Transmissions-Rear Wheel Drive SOHC - Single Over Head Cam Engine DOHC - Double Over Head Cam Engine Export - Vehicles Built For Sale In Markets Other Than North America Except Export - Vehicles Built For Sale In North America Circuit Functions DESCRIPTION - CIRCUIT FUNCTIONS All circuits in the diagrams use an alpha/numeric code to identify the wire and it's function. To identify which circuit code applies to a system, refer to the Circuit Identification Code Chart. This chart shows the main circuits only and does not show the secondary codes that may apply to some models. Circuit Information DESCRIPTION - CIRCUIT INFORMATION Each wire shown in the diagrams contains a code which identifies the main circuit, a specific part of the main circuit, gage of wire, and color. An example would be A 2 18 LB/YL. This is a Battery Feed circuit, level two, eighteen gauge, light blue with a yellow tracer. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13248 Connector, Ground and Splice Information DESCRIPTION - CONNECTOR, GROUND AND SPLICE INFORMATION CAUTION: Not all connectors are serviced. Some connectors are serviced only with a harness. A typical example might be the Supplemental Restraint System connectors. Always check parts availability before attempting a repair. IDENTIFICATION In-line connectors are identified by a number, as follows: - In-line connectors located in the engine compartment are C100 series numbers. - In-line connectors located in the instrument panel area are C200 series numbers. - In-line connectors located in the body are C300 series numbers. - Jumper harness connectors are C400 series numbers. - Grounds and ground connectors are identified with a "G" and follow the same series numbering as the in-line connectors. - Splices are identified with an "S" and follow the same series numbering as the in-line connectors. In addition, S001-S099 numbers are located in the engine compartment. - Component connectors are identified by the component name instead of a number. Multiple connectors on a component use a C1, C2, etc. identifier. LOCATIONS Vehicle/Locations contains the master connector/ground/splice location index charts with hyperlinks to the applicable location illustrations. The illustrations contain the connector name (or number)/ground number/splice number and component identification. The abbreviation T/O is used in the component location section to indicate a point in which the wiring harness branches out to a component. The abbreviation N/S means Not Shown in the illustrations Section Identification and Information DESCRIPTION - SECTION IDENTIFICATION AND INFORMATION The wiring diagrams are grouped into individual sections. If a component is most likely found in a particular group, it will be shown complete (all wires, Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13249 connectors, and pins) within that group. For example, the Auto Shutdown Relay is most likely to be found in Powertrain Management, so it is shown there complete. It can, however, be shown partially in another group if it contains some associated wiring. Splice diagrams show the entire splice and provide references to other sections the splices serves. Splice Information only contains splice diagrams that are not shown in their entirety somewhere else in the wiring diagrams. Connector Pin-Outs shows each connector and the circuits involved with that connector. The connectors are identified using the name/number on the diagram pages. Removal REMOVAL 1. Disconnect battery. 2. Release Connector Lock (2). 3. Disconnect the connector (3) being repaired from its mating half/component. 4. Remove the dress cover (if applicable) (1). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13250 5. Release the Secondary Terminal Lock, if required (1). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13251 6. Position the connector locking finger away from the terminal using the proper special tool. Pull on the wire to remove the terminal from the connector. Installation Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13252 INSTALLATION 1. Insert the removed terminal in the same cavity on the repair connector. 2. Repeat steps for each terminal in the connector, being sure that all wires are inserted into the proper cavities. For additional connector pin-out identification, refer to the wiring diagrams. 3. When the connector is re-assembled, the secondary terminal lock must be placed in the locked position to prevent terminal push out. 4. Replace dress cover (if applicable). 5. Connect connector to its mating half/component. 6. Connect battery and test all affected systems. Removal REMOVAL 1. Disconnect the battery. 2. Locate the diode in the harness, and remove the protective covering. 3. Remove the diode from the harness, pay attention to the current flow direction (1) (2) (3). Installation INSTALLATION 1. Remove the insulation from the wires in the harness. Only remove enough insulation to solder in the new diode. 2. Install the new diode in the harness, making sure current flow is correct. If necessary, refer to the appropriate wiring diagram for current flow. 3. Solder the connection together using rosin core type solder only. Do not use acid core solder. 4. Tape the diode to the harness using electrical tape. Make sure the diode is completely sealed from the elements. 5. Re-connect the battery and test affected systems. Removal REMOVAL 1. Follow steps for removing terminals described in the connector removal section. 2. Cut the wire 6 inches from the back of the connector. Installation INSTALLATION 1. Select a wire from the terminal repair kit that best matches the color and gage of the wire being repaired. 2. Cut the repair wire to the proper length and remove one-half (1/2) inch of insulation. 3. Splice the repair wire to the wire harness (see wire splicing procedure). See: Service Procedures/Wire Splicing 4. Insert the repaired wire into the connector. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13253 5. Install the connector locking wedge, if required, and reconnect the connector to its mating half/component. 6. Re-tape the wire harness starting at 1-1/2 inches behind the connector and 2 inches past the repair. 7. Connect battery and test all affected systems. Wire Splicing STANDARD PROCEDURE - WIRE SPLICING When splicing a wire, it is important that the correct gage be used as shown in the wiring diagrams. 1. Remove one-half (1/2) inch of insulation from each wire that needs to be spliced. 2. Place a piece of adhesive lined heat shrink tubing on one side of the wire. Make sure the tubing will be long enough to cover and seal the entire repair area. 3. Place the strands of wire overlapping each other inside of the splice clip (1). 4. Using crimping tool (1), Mopar p/n 05019912AA, crimp the splice clip and wires together. 5. Solder (3) the connection (2) together using rosin core type solder (1) only. CAUTION: DO NOT USE ACID CORE SOLDER. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13254 6. Center the heat shrink tubing (2) over the joint and heat using a heat gun. Heat the joint until the tubing is tightly sealed and sealant (1) comes out of both ends of the tubing. Special Tools WIRING/TERMINAL PROBING TOOL PACKAGE 6807 TERMINAL PICK TOOL SET 6680 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13255 TERMINAL REMOVING TOOLS 6932 AND 8638 TERMINAL REMOVING TOOL 6934 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13256 Body Control Module: Diagnostic Aids Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) Sensitive Devices STANDARD PROCEDURE - ELECTROSTATIC DISCHARGE (ESD) SENSITIVE DEVICES All ESD sensitive components are solid state and a symbol is used to indicate this. When handling any component with this symbol, comply with the following procedures to reduce the possibility of electrostatic charge build up on the body and inadvertent discharge into the component. If it is not known whether the part is ESD sensitive, assume that it is. 1. Always touch a known good ground before handling the part. This should be repeated while handling the part and more frequently after sliding across a seat, sitting down from a standing position, or walking a distance. 2. Avoid touching electrical terminals of the part, unless instructed to do so by a written procedure. 3. When using a voltmeter, be sure to connect the ground lead first. 4. Do not remove the part from it's protective packing until it is time to install the part. 5. Before removing the part from it's package, ground the package to a known good ground on the vehicle. Testing Of Voltage Potential STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING OF VOLTAGE POTENTIAL 1. Connect the ground lead of a voltmeter to a known good ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the voltmeter to the selected test point. The vehicle ignition may need to be turned ON to check voltage. Refer to the appropriate test procedure. Testing For Continuity Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13257 STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING FOR CONTINUITY 1. Remove the fuse (1) for the circuit being checked or, disconnect the battery. 2. Connect one lead of the ohmmeter to one side of the circuit being tested 3. Connect the other lead to the other end of the circuit being tested. Low or no resistance means good continuity. Testing For A Short To Ground STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING FOR A SHORT TO GROUND 1. Remove the fuse and disconnect all items involved with the fuse. 2. Connect a test light or a voltmeter across the terminals of the fuse. 3. Starting at the fuse block, wiggle the wiring harness about six to eight inches apart and watch the voltmeter/test lamp. 4. If the voltmeter registers voltage or the test lamp glows, there is a short to ground in that general area of the wiring harness. Testing For A Short To Ground On Fuses Powering Several Loads STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING FOR A SHORT TO GROUND ON FUSES POWERING SEVERAL LOADS 1. Refer to the wiring diagrams and disconnect or isolate all items on the suspected fused circuits. 2. Replace the blown fuse. 3. Supply power to the fuse by turning ON the ignition switch or re-connecting the battery. 4. Start connecting or energizing the items in the fuse circuit one at a time. When the fuse blows the circuit with the short to ground has been isolated. Testing For A Voltage Drop STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING FOR A VOLTAGE DROP Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13258 1. Connect the positive lead of the voltmeter to the side of the circuit closest to the battery. 2. Connect the other lead of the voltmeter to the other side of the switch, component or circuit. 3. Operate the item. 4. The voltmeter will show the difference in voltage between the two points. Troubleshooting Wiring Problems DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING - WIRING HARNESS TROUBLESHOOTING TOOLS When diagnosing a problem in an electrical circuit there are several common tools necessary. These tools are listed and explained below. - Jumper Wire - This is a test wire used to connect two points of a circuit. It can be used to bypass an open in a circuit. WARNING: Never use a jumper wire across a load, such as a motor, connected between a battery feed and ground. - Voltmeter - Used to check for voltage on a circuit. Always connect the black lead to a known good ground and the red lead to the positive side of the circuit. CAUTION: Most of the electrical components used in today's vehicles are Solid State. When checking voltages in these circuits, use a meter with a 10 - megohm or greater impedance rating. - Ohmmeter - Used to check the resistance between two points of a circuit. Low or no resistance in a circuit means good continuity. CAUTION: Most of the electrical components used in today's vehicles are Solid State. When checking resistance in these circuits use a meter with a 10 - megohm or greater impedance rating. In addition, make sure the power is disconnected from the circuit. Circuits that are powered up by the vehicle's electrical system can cause damage to the equipment and provide false readings. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13259 - Probing Tools - These tools are used for probing terminals in connectors. Select the proper size tool from Special Tool Package 6807, and insert the probing end (2) into the terminal being tested. Use the other end of the tool (1) to insert the meter probe. INTERMITTENT AND POOR CONNECTIONS Most intermittent electrical problems are caused by faulty electrical connections or wiring. It is also possible for a sticking component or relay to cause a problem. Before condemning a component or wiring assembly, check the following items. - Connectors are fully seated - Spread terminals, or terminal push out - Terminals in the wiring assembly are fully seated into the connector/component and locked into position - Dirt or corrosion on the terminals. Any amount of corrosion or dirt could cause an intermittent problem - Damaged connector/component casing exposing the item to dirt or moisture - Wire insulation that has rubbed through causing a short to ground - Some or all of the wiring strands broken inside of the insulation - Wiring broken inside of the insulation TROUBLESHOOTING WIRING PROBLEMS When troubleshooting wiring problems there are six steps which can aid in the procedure. The steps are listed and explained below. Always check for non-factory items added to the vehicle before doing any diagnosis. If the vehicle is equipped with these items, disconnect them to verify these add-on items are not the cause of the problem. 1. Verify the problem. 2. Verify any related symptoms. Do this by performing operational checks on components that are in the same circuit. Refer to the wiring diagrams. 3. Analyze the symptoms. Use the wiring diagrams to determine what the circuit is doing, where the problem most likely is occurring and where the diagnosis will continue. 4. Isolate the problem area. 5. Repair the problem area. 6. Verify the proper operation. For this step, check for proper operation of all items on the repaired circuit. Refer to the wiring diagrams. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Bumper > Front Bumper > Front Bumper Cover / Fascia > System Information > Service and Repair > Removal Front Bumper Cover / Fascia: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL ST/SLT/SLT+ 1. Remove the two screws (4) at each trailing edge of the fascia. 2. Remove the four push pin fasteners (5) from the upper edge of the close out panel. 3. Using a trim stick (special tool #C-4755) or equivalent, carefully release the six lower clips and remove the close out panel. 4. Using a trim stick or equivalent, carefully remove the step pad (1). 5. Remove and discard the four push pin fasteners (5) and remove the fascia. SPORT 1. Raise and support the vehicle See: Maintenance/Vehicle Lifting/Service and Repair . Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Bumper > Front Bumper > Front Bumper Cover / Fascia > System Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 13266 2. Remove the three screws (3) at each trailing edge of the fascia. 3. Remove the five lower screws (8). 4. Remove and discard the four upper push pins (7). 5. Using a trim stick (special tool #C-4755) or equivalent, carefully release the six lower clips and remove the close out panel. 6. Using a trim stick or equivalent, carefully remove the step pad (1). 7. Spread the fascia (2) out at the wheels and remove from the vehicle. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Bumper > Front Bumper > Front Bumper Cover / Fascia > System Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 13267 Front Bumper Cover / Fascia: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION ST/SLT/SLT+ NOTE: The left and right inboard bumper to bracket attachments must be secured before installing the fascia and step pad. 1. Install the fascia. 2. Position the close out panel and seat the 6 lower clips fully. 3. Install four new upper push pin fasteners (5). 4. Position the step pad (1) onto the fascia (2) and fully seat the attachment clips. 5. Align the fascia to the fender with a 19 mm (0.75 inch) gap and install the two screws at each trailing edge of the fascia. SPORT NOTE: The left and right inboard bumper to bracket attachments must be secured before installing the fascia and step pad. 1. Position the fascia (2) onto the bumper. 2. Position the step pad (1) onto the fascia (2) and fully seat the attachment clips. 3. Install four new upper push pin fasteners (7). 4. Install the five lower screws (8). 5. Install the three screws (3) at each trailing edge of the fascia. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Bumper > Rear Bumper > System Information > Service and Repair > Removal Rear Bumper: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL 1. Raise and support the vehicle See: Maintenance/Vehicle Lifting/Service and Repair . 2. Remove the license plate. 3. Remove the bolts behind the plate. 4. Disconnect the license plate light electrical connectors. 5. Disconnect the trailer light connector electrical connection (if equipped). 6. Remove the two bolts along the front upper edge of the bumper near the frame tips. 7. Support the bumper with a suitable lifting device. 8. Remove the bolts attaching the bumper support brackets (4) to the trailer hitch (1). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Bumper > Rear Bumper > System Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 13272 Rear Bumper: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION 1. Align the holes in the bumpers to the trailer hitch pins and install the bumper. 2. Loosely install the hitch bolts (2) in the support bracket (4). 3. Install the front upper edge to the trailer hitch bolts (2) and tighten to 54 Nm (40 ft. lbs.). 4. Install the license plate reinforcement to hitch bolts (2) and tighten to 54 Nm (40 ft. lbs.). 5. Tighten the left bumper bracket bolts (3) to 54 Nm (40 ft. lbs.). 6. Tighten the right bumper bracket bolts (3) to 54 Nm (40 ft. lbs.). 7. Connect the trailer light connector electrical connection (if equipped). 8. Connect the license plate light electrical connectors. 9. Install the license plate. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Cabin Ventilation Grille > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Cabin Ventilation Grille: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL 1. Remove the rear cab trim panel See: Interior Moulding / Trim/Trim Panel/Service and Repair/Rear Cab Back Panel Trim/Removal 2. Disengage the retaining tabs (1) that secure the body vent (3) to the cab back panel (2). 3. Remove the vent through the opening in the cab back panel. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Cabin Ventilation Grille > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 13277 Cabin Ventilation Grille: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION 1. Position the body vent (3) into the opening of the cab back panel (2). 2. Install the body vent into the cab back panel and fully engage the retaining tabs (1). 3. Install the rear cab trim panel See: Interior Moulding / Trim/Trim Panel/Service and Repair/Rear Cab Back Panel Trim/Installation . Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Cowl > Cowl Moulding / Trim > System Information > Service and Repair > Removal Cowl Moulding / Trim: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL 1. Remove the wiper arms See: Wiper and Washer Systems/Wiper Arm/Service and Repair/Wiper Arms - Removal . 2. Disconnect the cowl plenum washer hose from the washer supply hose at the molded plastic in-line fitting See: Wiper and Washer Systems/Windshield Washer Hose/Description and Operation/Description . 3. Remove the cowl weather seal from the front of the dash panel and the cowl grille (2). 4. Remove the six push pin fasteners (1) that secure the front of the cowl grille to the dash panel. 5. Remove the two screws (3) that secure the rear corners of the cowl grille to the dash panel and remove the grille. 6. If necessary, remove the washer nozzles and the cowl plenum washer hose from the cowl grille See: Wiper and Washer Systems/Windshield Washer Spray Nozzle/Service and Repair/Removal . Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Cowl > Cowl Moulding / Trim > System Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 13283 Cowl Moulding / Trim: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION 1. If removed, install the washer nozzles and the cowl plenum washer hose onto the cowl grille (2) See: Wiper and Washer Systems/Windshield Washer Spray Nozzle/Service and Repair/Installation . 2. Position the cowl grille onto the dash panel. 3. Install the two screws (3) and the six push-pin fasteners (1) that secure the cowl grille to the dash panel. 4. Install the cowl weather seal onto the front of the dash panel and the cowl grille. 5. Connect the cowl plenum washer hose to the washer supply hose at the molded plastic in-line fitting See: Wiper and Washer Systems/Windshield Washer Hose/Description and Operation/Description . 6. Install the wiper arms See: Wiper and Washer Systems/Wiper Arm/Service and Repair/Wiper Arms - Installation . Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Handle > Front Door Exterior Handle > System Information > Service and Repair > Front Door Exterior Handle - Installation Front Door Exterior Handle: Service and Repair Front Door Exterior Handle - Installation INSTALLATION 1. Position the exterior handle (1) into the door (4). 2. Install the two nuts (2) that secure the exterior handle to the door. Tighten the nuts to 10 Nm (89 in. lbs.). 3. Connect the actuator rods (6 and 8) for the door latch (5) to the exterior handle. 4. If equipped, connect the exterior handle wire lead (7) to the door wire harness connector (3). 5. Install the door glass See: Front Door Window Glass/Service and Repair/Front Door Glass - Installation . 6. Reconnect the negative battery cable. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Handle > Front Door Exterior Handle > System Information > Service and Repair > Front Door Exterior Handle - Installation > Page 13292 Front Door Exterior Handle: Service and Repair Front Door Exterior Handle - Removal REMOVAL 1. Disconnect and isolate the negative battery cable. 2. Remove the door glass See: Front Door Window Glass/Service and Repair/Front Door Glass - Removal . 3. If equipped, disconnect the exterior handle wire lead (7) from the door wire harness connector (3). 4. Disconnect the actuator rods (6 and 8) for the door latch (5) from the exterior handle (1). 5. Remove the two nuts (2) that secure the exterior handle to the door (4) and remove the handle. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Handle > Front Door Interior Handle > System Information > Service and Repair > Removal Front Door Interior Handle: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL 1. Remove the door trim panel See: Front Door Panel/Service and Repair/Front Door Trim Panel Removal . 2. Position the water dam out of the way and disconnect the actuator rod (3) from interior door handle actuator (5) and the door latch (2), if necessary. 3. Remove the two nuts (4) that secure the interior door handle actuator to the door (1) and remove the actuator. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Handle > Front Door Interior Handle > System Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 13297 Front Door Interior Handle: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION 1. Position the interior door handle actuator (5) onto the door (1). 2. Install the two nuts (4) that secure the interior door handle actuator to the door. Tighten the nuts to 10 Nm (89 in. lbs.). 3. Connect the actuator rod (3) to the interior door handle actuator and the door latch (2), if removed. 4. Reposition the water dam and install the door trim panel See: Front Door Panel/Service and Repair/Front Door Trim Panel - Installation . Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Hinge > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Front Door Hinge: > 23-018-10 > Oct > 10 > Body - Lower Door Hinge Popping Groaning Noises Front Door Hinge: Customer Interest Body - Lower Door Hinge Popping Groaning Noises NUMBER: 23-018-10 GROUP: Body DATE: October 21, 2010 THIS BULLETIN SUPERSEDES TECHNICAL SERVICE BULLETIN 23-016-06, DATED MARCH 18, 2006, WHICH SHOULD BE REMOVED FROM YOUR FILES. THIS IS A COMPLETE REVISION AND NO ASTERISKS HAVE BEEN USED TO HIGHLIGHT REVISIONS. SUBJECT: Lower Door Hinges Make Popping or Groan When Opened Or Closed OVERVIEW: This bulletin involves spraying white lithium grease between the roller and roller pin while avoiding getting grease on the. This needs to be done to all lower door hinges. CAUTION: Be careful not to spray grease on the outside of the roller or roller cam. If grease is allowed to get on the outside of the roller or roller cam it must be cleaned off using a clean shop towel. Grease left on the outside of the roller and roller cam may also cause a noise. MODELS: 2009 - 2010 (DS) Ram Truck (1500 Pick Up) 2005 - 2010 (DH) Ram Truck (1500/2500 Pick Up) 2010 (DJ) Ram Truck (2500 Pick Up) 2004 - 2010 (HB) Durango 2007 - 2010 (HG) Aspen 2007 - 2010 (JC) Journey 2007 - 2010 (JS) Avenger/Sebring 2007 - 2010 (KK) Liberty 2007 - 2010 (KA) Nitro 2008 - 2010 (LC) Challenger 2006 - 2010 (LE) Chrysler 300C (International Markets) 2007 - 2010 (LX) 300/Charger/Magnum 2007 - 2010 (MK) Compass/Patriot 2005 - 2010 (ND) Dakota 2007 - 2010 (PM) Caliber 2006 - 2010 (WH) Grand Cherokee (International Markets) 2005 - 2010 (WK) Grand Cherokee 2006 - 2010 (WH) Commander (International Markets) 2006 - 2010 (XK) Commander SYMPTOM/CONDITION: The lower door hinges make a moderate to loud popping/groan sound when the door is opened or closed. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Hinge > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Front Door Hinge: > 23-018-10 > Oct > 10 > Body - Lower Door Hinge Popping Groaning Noises > Page 13306 This is due to the roller axle not being properly maintained with grease. DIAGNOSIS: Open the doors and listen for the popping or groan sound from the lower hinge, if the sound is present perform the Repair Procedure. PARTS REQUIRED: REPAIR PROCEDURE: 1. Open door. 2. With straw installed on the lithium grease spray can (p/n 04318066AB), spray a very small amount of grease between the roller pin and inside roller surface (axle). (Fig. 1). CAUTION: Be careful not to spray grease on the outside of the roller or roller cam. If grease is allowed to get on the outside of the roller or roller cam it must be cleaned off using a clean shop towel. Grease left on the outside of the roller and roller cam may also cause a noise. 3. Open and close the door 10 times to work the grease onto the roller axle. 4. Wipe away any excess grease in the sprayed area. 5. Repeat steps 1 through 4 for every door. POLICY: Reimbursable within the provisions of the warranty. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Hinge > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Front Door Hinge: > 23-018-10 > Oct > 10 > Body - Lower Door Hinge Popping Groaning Noises > Page 13307 TIME ALLOWANCE: FAILURE CODE: Disclaimer: This bulletin is supplied as technical information only and is not an authorization for repair. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Hinge > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Door Hinge: > 23-018-10 > Oct > 10 > Body - Lower Door Hinge Popping Groaning Noises Front Door Hinge: All Technical Service Bulletins Body - Lower Door Hinge Popping Groaning Noises NUMBER: 23-018-10 GROUP: Body DATE: October 21, 2010 THIS BULLETIN SUPERSEDES TECHNICAL SERVICE BULLETIN 23-016-06, DATED MARCH 18, 2006, WHICH SHOULD BE REMOVED FROM YOUR FILES. THIS IS A COMPLETE REVISION AND NO ASTERISKS HAVE BEEN USED TO HIGHLIGHT REVISIONS. SUBJECT: Lower Door Hinges Make Popping or Groan When Opened Or Closed OVERVIEW: This bulletin involves spraying white lithium grease between the roller and roller pin while avoiding getting grease on the. This needs to be done to all lower door hinges. CAUTION: Be careful not to spray grease on the outside of the roller or roller cam. If grease is allowed to get on the outside of the roller or roller cam it must be cleaned off using a clean shop towel. Grease left on the outside of the roller and roller cam may also cause a noise. MODELS: 2009 - 2010 (DS) Ram Truck (1500 Pick Up) 2005 - 2010 (DH) Ram Truck (1500/2500 Pick Up) 2010 (DJ) Ram Truck (2500 Pick Up) 2004 - 2010 (HB) Durango 2007 - 2010 (HG) Aspen 2007 - 2010 (JC) Journey 2007 - 2010 (JS) Avenger/Sebring 2007 - 2010 (KK) Liberty 2007 - 2010 (KA) Nitro 2008 - 2010 (LC) Challenger 2006 - 2010 (LE) Chrysler 300C (International Markets) 2007 - 2010 (LX) 300/Charger/Magnum 2007 - 2010 (MK) Compass/Patriot 2005 - 2010 (ND) Dakota 2007 - 2010 (PM) Caliber 2006 - 2010 (WH) Grand Cherokee (International Markets) 2005 - 2010 (WK) Grand Cherokee 2006 - 2010 (WH) Commander (International Markets) 2006 - 2010 (XK) Commander SYMPTOM/CONDITION: The lower door hinges make a moderate to loud popping/groan sound when the door is opened or closed. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Hinge > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Door Hinge: > 23-018-10 > Oct > 10 > Body - Lower Door Hinge Popping Groaning Noises > Page 13313 This is due to the roller axle not being properly maintained with grease. DIAGNOSIS: Open the doors and listen for the popping or groan sound from the lower hinge, if the sound is present perform the Repair Procedure. PARTS REQUIRED: REPAIR PROCEDURE: 1. Open door. 2. With straw installed on the lithium grease spray can (p/n 04318066AB), spray a very small amount of grease between the roller pin and inside roller surface (axle). (Fig. 1). CAUTION: Be careful not to spray grease on the outside of the roller or roller cam. If grease is allowed to get on the outside of the roller or roller cam it must be cleaned off using a clean shop towel. Grease left on the outside of the roller and roller cam may also cause a noise. 3. Open and close the door 10 times to work the grease onto the roller axle. 4. Wipe away any excess grease in the sprayed area. 5. Repeat steps 1 through 4 for every door. POLICY: Reimbursable within the provisions of the warranty. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Hinge > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Door Hinge: > 23-018-10 > Oct > 10 > Body - Lower Door Hinge Popping Groaning Noises > Page 13314 TIME ALLOWANCE: FAILURE CODE: Disclaimer: This bulletin is supplied as technical information only and is not an authorization for repair. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Hinge > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Door Hinge: > Page 13315 Front Door Hinge: By Symptom Technical Service Bulletin # 23-018-10 Date: 101021 Body - Lower Door Hinge Popping Groaning Noises NUMBER: 23-018-10 GROUP: Body DATE: October 21, 2010 THIS BULLETIN SUPERSEDES TECHNICAL SERVICE BULLETIN 23-016-06, DATED MARCH 18, 2006, WHICH SHOULD BE REMOVED FROM YOUR FILES. THIS IS A COMPLETE REVISION AND NO ASTERISKS HAVE BEEN USED TO HIGHLIGHT REVISIONS. SUBJECT: Lower Door Hinges Make Popping or Groan When Opened Or Closed OVERVIEW: This bulletin involves spraying white lithium grease between the roller and roller pin while avoiding getting grease on the. This needs to be done to all lower door hinges. CAUTION: Be careful not to spray grease on the outside of the roller or roller cam. If grease is allowed to get on the outside of the roller or roller cam it must be cleaned off using a clean shop towel. Grease left on the outside of the roller and roller cam may also cause a noise. MODELS: 2009 - 2010 (DS) Ram Truck (1500 Pick Up) 2005 - 2010 (DH) Ram Truck (1500/2500 Pick Up) 2010 (DJ) Ram Truck (2500 Pick Up) 2004 - 2010 (HB) Durango 2007 - 2010 (HG) Aspen 2007 - 2010 (JC) Journey 2007 - 2010 (JS) Avenger/Sebring 2007 - 2010 (KK) Liberty 2007 - 2010 (KA) Nitro 2008 - 2010 (LC) Challenger 2006 - 2010 (LE) Chrysler 300C (International Markets) 2007 - 2010 (LX) 300/Charger/Magnum 2007 - 2010 (MK) Compass/Patriot 2005 - 2010 (ND) Dakota 2007 - 2010 (PM) Caliber 2006 - 2010 (WH) Grand Cherokee (International Markets) 2005 - 2010 (WK) Grand Cherokee 2006 - 2010 (WH) Commander (International Markets) 2006 - 2010 (XK) Commander Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Hinge > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Door Hinge: > Page 13316 SYMPTOM/CONDITION: The lower door hinges make a moderate to loud popping/groan sound when the door is opened or closed. This is due to the roller axle not being properly maintained with grease. DIAGNOSIS: Open the doors and listen for the popping or groan sound from the lower hinge, if the sound is present perform the Repair Procedure. PARTS REQUIRED: REPAIR PROCEDURE: 1. Open door. 2. With straw installed on the lithium grease spray can (p/n 04318066AB), spray a very small amount of grease between the roller pin and inside roller surface (axle). (Fig. 1). CAUTION: Be careful not to spray grease on the outside of the roller or roller cam. If grease is allowed to get on the outside of the roller or roller cam it must be cleaned off using a clean shop towel. Grease left on the outside of the roller and roller cam may also cause a noise. 3. Open and close the door 10 times to work the grease onto the roller axle. 4. Wipe away any excess grease in the sprayed area. 5. Repeat steps 1 through 4 for every door. POLICY: Reimbursable within the provisions of the warranty. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Hinge > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Door Hinge: > Page 13317 TIME ALLOWANCE: FAILURE CODE: Disclaimer: This bulletin is supplied as technical information only and is not an authorization for repair. Technical Service Bulletin # 23-018-10 Date: 101021 Body - Lower Door Hinge Popping Groaning Noises NUMBER: 23-018-10 GROUP: Body DATE: October 21, 2010 THIS BULLETIN SUPERSEDES TECHNICAL SERVICE BULLETIN 23-016-06, DATED MARCH 18, 2006, WHICH SHOULD BE REMOVED FROM YOUR FILES. THIS IS A COMPLETE REVISION AND NO ASTERISKS HAVE BEEN USED TO HIGHLIGHT REVISIONS. SUBJECT: Lower Door Hinges Make Popping or Groan When Opened Or Closed OVERVIEW: This bulletin involves spraying white lithium grease between the roller and roller pin while avoiding getting grease on the. This needs to be done to all lower door hinges. CAUTION: Be careful not to spray grease on the outside of the roller or roller cam. If grease is allowed to get on the outside of the roller or roller cam it must be cleaned off using a clean shop towel. Grease left on the outside of the roller and roller cam may also cause a noise. MODELS: 2009 - 2010 (DS) Ram Truck (1500 Pick Up) 2005 - 2010 (DH) Ram Truck (1500/2500 Pick Up) 2010 (DJ) Ram Truck (2500 Pick Up) 2004 - 2010 (HB) Durango 2007 - 2010 (HG) Aspen 2007 - 2010 (JC) Journey 2007 - 2010 (JS) Avenger/Sebring 2007 - 2010 (KK) Liberty 2007 - 2010 (KA) Nitro 2008 - 2010 (LC) Challenger 2006 - 2010 (LE) Chrysler 300C (International Markets) 2007 - 2010 (LX) 300/Charger/Magnum Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Hinge > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Door Hinge: > Page 13318 2007 - 2010 (MK) Compass/Patriot 2005 - 2010 (ND) Dakota 2007 - 2010 (PM) Caliber 2006 - 2010 (WH) Grand Cherokee (International Markets) 2005 - 2010 (WK) Grand Cherokee 2006 - 2010 (WH) Commander (International Markets) 2006 - 2010 (XK) Commander SYMPTOM/CONDITION: The lower door hinges make a moderate to loud popping/groan sound when the door is opened or closed. This is due to the roller axle not being properly maintained with grease. DIAGNOSIS: Open the doors and listen for the popping or groan sound from the lower hinge, if the sound is present perform the Repair Procedure. PARTS REQUIRED: REPAIR PROCEDURE: 1. Open door. 2. With straw installed on the lithium grease spray can (p/n 04318066AB), spray a very small amount of grease between the roller pin and inside roller surface (axle). (Fig. 1). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Hinge > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Door Hinge: > Page 13319 CAUTION: Be careful not to spray grease on the outside of the roller or roller cam. If grease is allowed to get on the outside of the roller or roller cam it must be cleaned off using a clean shop towel. Grease left on the outside of the roller and roller cam may also cause a noise. 3. Open and close the door 10 times to work the grease onto the roller axle. 4. Wipe away any excess grease in the sprayed area. 5. Repeat steps 1 through 4 for every door. POLICY: Reimbursable within the provisions of the warranty. TIME ALLOWANCE: FAILURE CODE: Disclaimer: This bulletin is supplied as technical information only and is not an authorization for repair. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Hinge > System Information > Service and Repair > Front Door Hinge - Installation Front Door Hinge: Service and Repair Front Door Hinge - Installation INSTALLATION NOTE: A suitable body sealant should be used when removing or moving the hinges. 1. Install the hinges and bolts. 2. Tighten the upper hinge bolt (1) to hinge pillar to 28 Nm (21 ft. lbs.). 3. Tighten the lower hinge bolt (2) to hinge pillar to 28 Nm (21 ft. lbs.). 4. Tighten the remaining hinge to hinge pillar bolts (3) and (4) to 28 Nm (21 ft. lbs.). 5. Install the door. See: Service and Repair/Front Door - Installation Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Latch > System Information > Adjustments Front Door Latch: Adjustments ADJUSTMENTS 1. Locate the access hole in the door to adjust the door latch (1) and remove the mylar tape (2). 2. Loosen latch adjusting screw (3) threw access slot in door shut face (1/2 to 1 full turn). 3. Operate the door handles several times to reduce any possible linkage binding and tighten the adjustment screw to 3 Nm (30 in. lbs.). 4. Operate the door handles again to verify proper operation and reinstall the mylar tape. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Latch > System Information > Service and Repair > Front Door Latch - Removal Front Door Latch: Service and Repair Front Door Latch - Removal REMOVAL 1. Raise the window to the full up position and remove the door trim panel See: Front Door Panel/Service and Repair/Front Door Trim Panel Removal . 2. Position the water dam out of the way and disconnect the actuator rod (3) from the door latch (2) and the interior door handle actuator (5) and remove the rod. 3. Disconnect the door wire harness connector (2) from the door latch (3). 4. Remove the three bolts (4) that secure the door latch to the door (1) and remove the latch. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Latch > System Information > Service and Repair > Front Door Latch - Removal > Page 13327 Front Door Latch: Service and Repair Front Door Latch - Installation INSTALLATION 1. Position the door latch (3) into the door (1). 2. Install the three bolts (4) that secure the door latch to the door. Tighten the bolts to 10 Nm (89 in. lbs.). 3. Connect the door wire harness connector (2) to the door latch. 4. Connect the actuator rod (3) to the door latch (2) and the interior door handle actuator (5). 5. Reposition the water dam to the door (1) and install the door trim panel See: Front Door Panel/Service and Repair/Front Door Trim Panel Installation . 6. If necessary, adjust the latch See: Adjustments . Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Panel > System Information > Service and Repair > Front Door Trim Panel - Removal Front Door Panel: Service and Repair Front Door Trim Panel - Removal REMOVAL 1. Remove the screw (1) that secures the interior door handle (2) to the interior door handle actuator (3). 2. Remove the interior door handle from the interior door handle actuator. 3. If equipped, remove the manual window crank (1) using a window crank removal tool (2). 4. Remove the two screws (2) that secure the door trim panel (3) to the two screw inserts (1). 5. Remove the two screws (4) that secure the door trim panel to the bottom of the door. CAUTION: The door trim panel is attached to the door by molded plastic retaining clips that are integral to the door trim panel. Do not pull the door trim panel directly off of the door or damage to the trim panel and/or the power switch assembly will occur. 6. Lift the door trim panel straight upward to disconnect the molded plastic retaining clips (5) from the door. 7. If equipped, disconnect the door wire harness from the power door switch assembly and remove the door trim panel. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Panel > System Information > Service and Repair > Front Door Trim Panel - Removal > Page 13332 Front Door Panel: Service and Repair Front Door Trim Panel - Installation INSTALLATION 1. If equipped, connect the door wire harness to the power door switch assembly. CAUTION: The door trim panel is attached to the door by molded plastic retaining clips that are integral to the door trim panel. Do not force the door trim panel onto the door or damage to the trim panel and/or the power switch assembly will occur. 2. Position the door trim panel (3) and align the molded plastic retaining clips (5) to the door. 3. Push the door trim panel straight downward until all of the retaining clips are fully engaged to the door. 4. Install the two screws (2) that secure the door trim panel to the two screw inserts (1). 5. Install the two screws (4) that secure the door trim panel to the bottom of the door. 6. If equipped, install the manual window crank. 7. Position the interior door handle (2) onto the interior door handle actuator (3). 8. Install the screw (1) that secures the interior door handle to the interior door handle actuator. Tighten the screw securely. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Panel > System Information > Service and Repair > Front Door Trim Panel - Removal > Page 13333 Front Door Panel: Service and Repair Front Door Waterdam Removal REMOVAL 1. Remove the interior door handle actuator See: Front Door Handle/Front Door Interior Handle/Service and Repair/Removal . 2. Remove the speaker See: Accessories and Optional Equipment/Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc/Speaker/Service and Repair/Removal . CAUTION: Do not allow the water dam adhesive to become contaminated with dirt or other foreign substances. If the water dam becomes contaminated or damaged, replace it. 3. Carefully remove the water dam (1) from around the perimeter of the door (2). 4. Separate the water dam from the interior handle actuator rod and the door wire harness (if equipped) and remove the water dam. Installation INSTALLATION CAUTION: Do not allow the water dam or adhesive to become contaminated with dirt or other foreign substances. If the water dam becomes contaminated or damaged, replace it. NOTE: Be sure that the water dam is fully sealed around the perimeter of the door. 1. Position the interior handle actuator rod and the wire harness (if equipped) through the holes in the water dam (1) and install the water dam to the door (2). 2. Install the speaker See: Accessories and Optional Equipment/Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc/Speaker/Service and Repair/Installation 3. Install the interior door handle actuator See: Front Door Handle/Front Door Interior Handle/Service and Repair/Installation . Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Panel > System Information > Service and Repair > Front Door Trim Panel - Removal > Page 13334 Front Door Panel: Service and Repair Front Door Side View Mirror Flag Removal REMOVAL 1. Remove the door trim panel (4) See: Front Door Trim Panel - Removal . CAUTION: Do not use a drill to remove the heat stakes. The remaining portions of the heat stake studs are needed for installation purposes. Failure to follow this caution may require door trim panel replacement. 2. Remove the heat stakes (3) using a razor knife or equivalent. 3. Release the tabs (2) and remove the mirror flag (1) from the door trim panel. Installation INSTALLATION NOTE: Clean any excess heat stake material off of the heat stake studs to aid in mirror flag installation. 1. Install the mirror flag (1) over the tabs (2) and install the screws (3) into the heat stake studs. 2. Install the door trim panel (4) See: Front Door Trim Panel - Installation Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Striker > System Information > Adjustments Front Door Striker: Adjustments ADJUSTMENTS 1. Using a grease pencil or equivalent, mark the location of the door latch striker (1) on the B-pillar (2) to aid in adjustment. 2. Loosen the two bolts (3) that secure the door latch striker to the B-pillar. 3. To adjust the rear gap and flush measurement, change the position of the door latch striker and then tighten the two bolts to 28 Nm (21 ft. lbs.) . 4. Verify correct door and latch position. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Striker > System Information > Service and Repair > Removal Front Door Striker: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL 1. Using a grease pencil or equivalent, mark the location of the door latch striker (1) on the B-pillar (2). 2. Remove the two bolts (3) that secure the door latch striker to the B-pillar and remove the striker. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Striker > System Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 13340 Front Door Striker: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION 1. Position the door latch striker (1) onto the B-pillar (2) and loosely install the two bolts (3). 2. Align the door latch striker to the B-pillar using the reference marks made during the removal procedure and tighten the bolts to 28 Nm (21 ft. lbs.). 3. If necessary, adjust the door latch striker See: Adjustments . Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Weatherstrip > Component Information > Service and Repair > A-Pillar Weatherstrip Retainer Front Door Weatherstrip: Service and Repair A-Pillar Weatherstrip Retainer Removal REMOVAL 1. Remove the drip rail weatherstrip retainer (1) See: Drip Rail Weatherstrip - Removal . 2. Remove the five screws (8) and remove the A-pillar weatherstrip retainer (7). Installation INSTALLATION 1. Install the A-pillar weatherstrip retainer (7) and install the screws (8). 2. Install the drip rail weatherstrip retainer (1) See: Drip Rail Weatherstrip - Installation . Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Weatherstrip > Component Information > Service and Repair > A-Pillar Weatherstrip Retainer > Page 13345 Front Door Weatherstrip: Service and Repair Drip Rail Weatherstrip - Removal REMOVAL 1. Open the doors and separate the weatherstrip (3) from the drip rail and a-pillar retainers (1 and 7). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Weatherstrip > Component Information > Service and Repair > A-Pillar Weatherstrip Retainer > Page 13346 Front Door Weatherstrip: Service and Repair Drip Rail Weatherstrip - Installation INSTALLATION 1. Position the weatherstrip (3) onto the drip rail and a-pillar retainers (1 and 7) and seat fully. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Weatherstrip > Component Information > Service and Repair > A-Pillar Weatherstrip Retainer > Page 13347 Front Door Weatherstrip: Service and Repair Door Opening Seal Removal REMOVAL FRONT DOOR SEAL 1. Remove the cowl trim panel (1) See: Interior Moulding / Trim/Trim Panel/Service and Repair/Cowl Trim/Cowl Trim - Removal . 2. If vehicle is a Standard Cab , remove the lower b-pillar trim panel (3) See: Interior Moulding / Trim/Trim Panel/Service and Repair/Pillar Trim/B-Pillar Trim . Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Weatherstrip > Component Information > Service and Repair > A-Pillar Weatherstrip Retainer > Page 13348 3. If vehicle is a Quad Cab , remove the lower b-pillar trim panel (1) See: Interior Moulding / Trim/Trim Panel/Service and Repair/Pillar Trim/B-Pillar Trim . 4. Separate the front door opening seal (6) from the door opening flange. REAR DOOR SEAL 1. Remove the lower b-pillar trim panel (1) See: Interior Moulding / Trim/Trim Panel/Service and Repair/Pillar Trim/B-Pillar Trim . Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Weatherstrip > Component Information > Service and Repair > A-Pillar Weatherstrip Retainer > Page 13349 2. Remove the lower c-pillar trim (1) See: Interior Moulding / Trim/Trim Panel/Service and Repair/Pillar Trim/C-Pillar Trim Panel-Removal . 3. Separate the rear door opening seal (5) from the door opening flange. Installation INSTALLATION FRONT DOOR SEAL Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Weatherstrip > Component Information > Service and Repair > A-Pillar Weatherstrip Retainer > Page 13350 1. Position the front door seal (6) to the bottom of the door opening, with bulb facing outboard, starting the installation at the center of the lower flange. Press the seal onto the sill flange and work around the perimeter of the door opening until fully seated. Work in one direction, smoothing the seal to avoid puckers or wrinkles. 2. If vehicle is a Standard Cab , install the lower b-pillar trim (3) See: Interior Moulding / Trim/Trim Panel/Service and Repair/Pillar Trim/B-Pillar Trim . 3. If vehicle is a Quad Cab , install the lower b-pillar trim (1) See: Interior Moulding / Trim/Trim Panel/Service and Repair/Pillar Trim/B-Pillar Trim . Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Weatherstrip > Component Information > Service and Repair > A-Pillar Weatherstrip Retainer > Page 13351 4. Install the cowl trim panel (1) See: Interior Moulding / Trim/Trim Panel/Service and Repair/Cowl Trim/Cowl Trim - Installation NOTE: When installing a new weatherstrip on the front door opening, remove the tear strip starting at the splice and moving around the front of the door to the back of the opening. REAR DOOR SEAL 1. Position the rear door seal to the bottom of the door opening, with bulb facing outboard, starting the installation at the center of the lower flange. Press the seal onto the sill flange and work around the perimeter of the door opening until fully seated. Work in one direction, smoothing the seal to avoid puckers or wrinkles. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Weatherstrip > Component Information > Service and Repair > A-Pillar Weatherstrip Retainer > Page 13352 2. Install the lower c-pillar trim (1) See: Interior Moulding / Trim/Trim Panel/Service and Repair/Pillar Trim/C-Pillar Trim Panel-Installation . 3. Install the lower b-pillar trim (1) See: Interior Moulding / Trim/Trim Panel/Service and Repair/Pillar Trim/B-Pillar Trim . NOTE: When installing a new weatherstrip on the rear door opening, remove the tear strip starting at the splice and moving around the back of the door to the front of the opening. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Weatherstrip > Component Information > Service and Repair > A-Pillar Weatherstrip Retainer > Page 13353 Front Door Weatherstrip: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL 1. Remove the drip rail weatherstrip retainer (1) See: Drip Rail Weatherstrip - Removal . 2. Remove the five screws (8) and remove the A-pillar weatherstrip retainer (7). Installation INSTALLATION 1. Install the A-pillar weatherstrip retainer (7) and install the screws (8). 2. Install the drip rail weatherstrip retainer (1) See: Drip Rail Weatherstrip - Installation . Drip Rail Weatherstrip - Removal REMOVAL Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Weatherstrip > Component Information > Service and Repair > A-Pillar Weatherstrip Retainer > Page 13354 1. Open the doors and separate the weatherstrip (3) from the drip rail and a-pillar retainers (1 and 7). Drip Rail Weatherstrip - Installation INSTALLATION 1. Position the weatherstrip (3) onto the drip rail and a-pillar retainers (1 and 7) and seat fully. Removal REMOVAL FRONT DOOR SEAL Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Weatherstrip > Component Information > Service and Repair > A-Pillar Weatherstrip Retainer > Page 13355 1. Remove the cowl trim panel (1) See: Interior Moulding / Trim/Trim Panel/Service and Repair/Cowl Trim/Cowl Trim - Removal . 2. If vehicle is a Standard Cab , remove the lower b-pillar trim panel (3) See: Interior Moulding / Trim/Trim Panel/Service and Repair/Pillar Trim/B-Pillar Trim . 3. If vehicle is a Quad Cab , remove the lower b-pillar trim panel (1) See: Interior Moulding / Trim/Trim Panel/Service and Repair/Pillar Trim/B-Pillar Trim . Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Weatherstrip > Component Information > Service and Repair > A-Pillar Weatherstrip Retainer > Page 13356 4. Separate the front door opening seal (6) from the door opening flange. REAR DOOR SEAL 1. Remove the lower b-pillar trim panel (1) See: Interior Moulding / Trim/Trim Panel/Service and Repair/Pillar Trim/B-Pillar Trim . 2. Remove the lower c-pillar trim (1) See: Interior Moulding / Trim/Trim Panel/Service and Repair/Pillar Trim/C-Pillar Trim Panel-Removal . Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Weatherstrip > Component Information > Service and Repair > A-Pillar Weatherstrip Retainer > Page 13357 3. Separate the rear door opening seal (5) from the door opening flange. Installation INSTALLATION FRONT DOOR SEAL 1. Position the front door seal (6) to the bottom of the door opening, with bulb facing outboard, starting the installation at the center of the lower flange. Press the seal onto the sill flange and work around the perimeter of the door opening until fully seated. Work in one direction, smoothing the seal to avoid puckers or wrinkles. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Weatherstrip > Component Information > Service and Repair > A-Pillar Weatherstrip Retainer > Page 13358 2. If vehicle is a Standard Cab , install the lower b-pillar trim (3) See: Interior Moulding / Trim/Trim Panel/Service and Repair/Pillar Trim/B-Pillar Trim . 3. If vehicle is a Quad Cab , install the lower b-pillar trim (1) See: Interior Moulding / Trim/Trim Panel/Service and Repair/Pillar Trim/B-Pillar Trim . 4. Install the cowl trim panel (1) See: Interior Moulding / Trim/Trim Panel/Service and Repair/Cowl Trim/Cowl Trim - Installation NOTE: When installing a new weatherstrip on the front door opening, remove the tear strip starting at the splice and moving around the front of the door to the back of the opening. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Weatherstrip > Component Information > Service and Repair > A-Pillar Weatherstrip Retainer > Page 13359 REAR DOOR SEAL 1. Position the rear door seal to the bottom of the door opening, with bulb facing outboard, starting the installation at the center of the lower flange. Press the seal onto the sill flange and work around the perimeter of the door opening until fully seated. Work in one direction, smoothing the seal to avoid puckers or wrinkles. 2. Install the lower c-pillar trim (1) See: Interior Moulding / Trim/Trim Panel/Service and Repair/Pillar Trim/C-Pillar Trim Panel-Installation . 3. Install the lower b-pillar trim (1) See: Interior Moulding / Trim/Trim Panel/Service and Repair/Pillar Trim/B-Pillar Trim . Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Weatherstrip > Component Information > Service and Repair > A-Pillar Weatherstrip Retainer > Page 13360 NOTE: When installing a new weatherstrip on the rear door opening, remove the tear strip starting at the splice and moving around the back of the door to the front of the opening. Drip Rail Weatherstrip Retainer - Removal REMOVAL 1. Separate the drip rail weatherstrip (3) from the weatherstrip retainer (1). 2. Remove the seven screws (2) and remove the retainer (1). Drip Rail Weatherstrip Retainer - Installation INSTALLATION 1. Install the weatherstrip retainer (1) and install the seven screws (2). 2. Position the weatherstrip (3) over the retainer flange and seat fully. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Window Glass > Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Door Outer Belt Molding Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: Service and Repair Front Door Outer Belt Molding Removal REMOVAL 1. Remove the screw (4) and separate the belt molding (1) from the door (5) flange from the back to the front. Installation INSTALLATION 1. Position the belt molding (1) onto the door (5) flange and seat fully. 2. Install the screw (4). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Window Glass > Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Door Outer Belt Molding > Page 13366 Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: Service and Repair Front Door Glass Run Weatherstrip Removal REMOVAL 1. Remove the door glass See: Service and Repair/Front Door Glass - Removal . 2. Separate the front door glass run weatherstrip (2) out of the door frame (5) and remove through the window opening. Installation INSTALLATION Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Window Glass > Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Door Outer Belt Molding > Page 13367 NOTE: A mixture of soap and water may be used to aid installation of the weatherstrip into the corners. 1. Position the front door glass run weatherstrip (2) into the door (5) through the window opening. 2. Position the weatherstrip into the upper corners and seat firmly. 3. From back to front, seat the weatherstrip between the corners and then down the sides firmly. 4. Install the door glass See: Service and Repair/Front Door Glass - Installation . Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Window Glass > Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Door Outer Belt Molding > Page 13368 Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: Service and Repair Front Door Inner Belt Molding Removal REMOVAL 1. Remove the door trim panel (3) See: Front Door Panel/Service and Repair/Front Door Trim Panel - Removal 2. Separate the belt molding (1) from the door (3) mounting flange from the back to the front. Installation INSTALLATION 1. Position the belt molding (1) and seat onto the door (3) mounting flange fully. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Window Glass > Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Door Outer Belt Molding > Page 13369 2. Install the door trim panel (3) See: Front Door Panel/Service and Repair/Front Door Trim Panel Installation . Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Window Regulator > System Information > Service and Repair > Front Door Window Regulator - Removal Front Door Window Regulator: Service and Repair Front Door Window Regulator - Removal Power REMOVAL 1. Remove the inner belt molding See: Front Door Window Glass/Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip/Service and Repair/Front Door Inner Belt Molding/Removal . 2. Remove the waterdam See: Front Door Panel/Service and Repair/Front Door Waterdam/Removal . 3. Remove the electric window switch from the door trim panel and connect it to the door wire harness See: Sensors and Switches/Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass/Power Window Switch/Service and Repair/Removal . 4. Raise the door glass to the position shown. 5. Remove the two nuts (1) that secure the door glass to the window regulator (2) through the two sight windows (3 and 4) and disengage the door glass from the regulator. 6. Position the door glass to the full up position and secure the glass using a wooden wedge or an equivalent. 7. Lower the window regulator (4) and remove the two nuts (3) that secure the regulator stabilizer (1) to the door (2). 8. Remove the bolt (5) that secures the window regulator to the door and loosen the other two regulator bolts (7). 9. Slide the window regulator upward and disengage the two regulator bolts from the door. 10. Remove the window regulator through the opening in the door and disconnect the door wire harness (6). Manual REMOVAL Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Window Regulator > System Information > Service and Repair > Front Door Window Regulator - Removal > Page 13374 1. Remove the inner belt molding See: Front Door Window Glass/Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip/Service and Repair/Front Door Inner Belt Molding/Removal . 2. Remove the waterdam See: Front Door Panel/Service and Repair/Front Door Waterdam/Removal . 3. Reinstall the manual window crank and raise the door glass to the position shown. 4. Remove the two nuts (1) that secure the door glass to the window regulator (2) through the two sight windows (3 and 4) and disengage the door glass from the regulator. 5. Position the door glass to the full up position and secure the glass using a wooden wedge or an equivalent. 6. Lower the window regulator (4) and remove the two nuts (3) that secure the regulator stabilizer (1) to the door (2). 7. Remove the two bolts (5) that secure the window regulator to the door and loosen the other two regulator bolts (6). 8. Slide the window regulator upward and disengage the two regulator bolts from the door. 9. Remove the window regulator through the opening in the door. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Window Regulator > System Information > Service and Repair > Front Door Window Regulator - Removal > Page 13375 Front Door Window Regulator: Service and Repair Front Door Window Regulator - Installation Power INSTALLATION 1. Connect the door wire harness (6) to the window regulator (4) and install the regulator through the opening in the door (2). 2. Engage the two regulator bolts (7) to the door. 3. Install the bolt (5) that secure the window regulator to the door and tighten all three regulator bolts to 10 Nm (89 in. lbs.). 4. Position the regulator stabilizer (1) into the door and install the two nuts (3). Tighten the nuts to 10 Nm (89 in. lbs.). 5. Raise the window regulator (2) to the position shown. 6. Support the window glass and remove the wooden wedge or equivalent. 7. Position the window glass to the window regulator and install the two nuts (1) thought the two sight windows (3 and 4). Tighten the nuts to 10 Nm (89 in. lbs.). 8. Disconnect the electric window switch from the door wire harness and reinstall the switch onto the door trim panel See: Sensors and Switches/Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass/Power Window Switch/Service and Repair/Installation . 9. Install the waterdam See: Front Door Panel/Service and Repair/Front Door Waterdam/Installation . 10. Install the inner belt molding See: Front Door Window Glass/Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip/Service and Repair/Front Door Inner Belt Molding/Installation . Manual INSTALLATION Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Window Regulator > System Information > Service and Repair > Front Door Window Regulator - Removal > Page 13376 1. Install the window regulator (4) through the opening in the door (2). 2. Engage the two regulator bolts (6) to the door. 3. Install the two bolt (5) that secure the window regulator to the door and tighten all four regulator bolts to 10 Nm (89 in. lbs.). 4. Position the regulator stabilizer (1) into the door and install the two nuts (3). Tighten the nuts to 10 Nm (89 in. lbs.). 5. Raise the window regulator (2) to the position shown and remove the manual window crank. 6. Support the window glass and remove the wooden wedge or equivalent. 7. Position the window glass to the window regulator and install the two nuts (1) thought the two sight windows (3 and 4). Tighten the nuts to 10 Nm (89 in. lbs.). 8. Install the waterdam See: Front Door Panel/Service and Repair/Front Door Waterdam/Installation . 9. Install the inner belt molding See: Front Door Window Glass/Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip/Service and Repair/Front Door Inner Belt Molding/Installation . Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Handle > Rear Door Exterior Handle > System Information > Service and Repair > Rear Door Exterior Handle - Removal Rear Door Exterior Handle: Service and Repair Rear Door Exterior Handle - Removal REMOVAL 1. Remove the front glass run channel See: Windows and Glass/Windows/Window Track/Service and Repair/Rear Door Glass Run Channel Removal . 2. Disconnect the actuator rod (1) from the exterior door handle (2). 3. Remove the two nuts (3) that secure the exterior door handle to the door and remove the handle. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Handle > Rear Door Exterior Handle > System Information > Service and Repair > Rear Door Exterior Handle - Removal > Page 13383 Rear Door Exterior Handle: Service and Repair Rear Door Exterior Handle - Installation INSTALLATION 1. Position the exterior handle (2) into the door. 2. Install the two nuts (3) that secure the exterior handle to the door. Tighten the nuts to 10 Nm (89 in. lbs.). 3. Connect the actuator rod (1) to the exterior handle. 4. Install the front glass run channel See: Windows and Glass/Windows/Window Track/Service and Repair/Rear Door Glass Run Channel Installation . Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Handle > Rear Door Interior Handle > System Information > Service and Repair > Removal Rear Door Interior Handle: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL 1. Remove the door trim panel See: Rear Door Panel/Service and Repair/Rear Door Trim Panel Removal . 2. Position the water dam out of the way and disconnect the actuator rod (2) from interior door handle actuator (3). 3. Remove the two bolts (1) that secure the interior door handle actuator to the door and remove the actuator. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Handle > Rear Door Interior Handle > System Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 13388 Rear Door Interior Handle: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION 1. Position the interior door handle actuator (3) onto the door. 2. Install the two bolts (1) that secure the interior door handle actuator to the door. Tighten the bolts to 10 Nm (89 in. lbs.). 3. Connect the actuator rod (2) to the interior door handle actuator. 4. Reposition the water dam and install the door trim panel See: Rear Door Panel/Service and Repair/Rear Door Trim Panel - Installation . Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Hinge > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Rear Door Hinge: > 23-018-10 > Oct > 10 > Body - Lower Door Hinge Popping Groaning Noises Rear Door Hinge: Customer Interest Body - Lower Door Hinge Popping Groaning Noises NUMBER: 23-018-10 GROUP: Body DATE: October 21, 2010 THIS BULLETIN SUPERSEDES TECHNICAL SERVICE BULLETIN 23-016-06, DATED MARCH 18, 2006, WHICH SHOULD BE REMOVED FROM YOUR FILES. THIS IS A COMPLETE REVISION AND NO ASTERISKS HAVE BEEN USED TO HIGHLIGHT REVISIONS. SUBJECT: Lower Door Hinges Make Popping or Groan When Opened Or Closed OVERVIEW: This bulletin involves spraying white lithium grease between the roller and roller pin while avoiding getting grease on the. This needs to be done to all lower door hinges. CAUTION: Be careful not to spray grease on the outside of the roller or roller cam. If grease is allowed to get on the outside of the roller or roller cam it must be cleaned off using a clean shop towel. Grease left on the outside of the roller and roller cam may also cause a noise. MODELS: 2009 - 2010 (DS) Ram Truck (1500 Pick Up) 2005 - 2010 (DH) Ram Truck (1500/2500 Pick Up) 2010 (DJ) Ram Truck (2500 Pick Up) 2004 - 2010 (HB) Durango 2007 - 2010 (HG) Aspen 2007 - 2010 (JC) Journey 2007 - 2010 (JS) Avenger/Sebring 2007 - 2010 (KK) Liberty 2007 - 2010 (KA) Nitro 2008 - 2010 (LC) Challenger 2006 - 2010 (LE) Chrysler 300C (International Markets) 2007 - 2010 (LX) 300/Charger/Magnum 2007 - 2010 (MK) Compass/Patriot 2005 - 2010 (ND) Dakota 2007 - 2010 (PM) Caliber 2006 - 2010 (WH) Grand Cherokee (International Markets) 2005 - 2010 (WK) Grand Cherokee 2006 - 2010 (WH) Commander (International Markets) 2006 - 2010 (XK) Commander SYMPTOM/CONDITION: The lower door hinges make a moderate to loud popping/groan sound when the door is opened or closed. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Hinge > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Rear Door Hinge: > 23-018-10 > Oct > 10 > Body - Lower Door Hinge Popping Groaning Noises > Page 13397 This is due to the roller axle not being properly maintained with grease. DIAGNOSIS: Open the doors and listen for the popping or groan sound from the lower hinge, if the sound is present perform the Repair Procedure. PARTS REQUIRED: REPAIR PROCEDURE: 1. Open door. 2. With straw installed on the lithium grease spray can (p/n 04318066AB), spray a very small amount of grease between the roller pin and inside roller surface (axle). (Fig. 1). CAUTION: Be careful not to spray grease on the outside of the roller or roller cam. If grease is allowed to get on the outside of the roller or roller cam it must be cleaned off using a clean shop towel. Grease left on the outside of the roller and roller cam may also cause a noise. 3. Open and close the door 10 times to work the grease onto the roller axle. 4. Wipe away any excess grease in the sprayed area. 5. Repeat steps 1 through 4 for every door. POLICY: Reimbursable within the provisions of the warranty. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Hinge > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Rear Door Hinge: > 23-018-10 > Oct > 10 > Body - Lower Door Hinge Popping Groaning Noises > Page 13398 TIME ALLOWANCE: FAILURE CODE: Disclaimer: This bulletin is supplied as technical information only and is not an authorization for repair. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Hinge > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Door Hinge: > 23-018-10 > Oct > 10 > Body - Lower Door Hinge Popping Groaning Noises Rear Door Hinge: All Technical Service Bulletins Body - Lower Door Hinge Popping Groaning Noises NUMBER: 23-018-10 GROUP: Body DATE: October 21, 2010 THIS BULLETIN SUPERSEDES TECHNICAL SERVICE BULLETIN 23-016-06, DATED MARCH 18, 2006, WHICH SHOULD BE REMOVED FROM YOUR FILES. THIS IS A COMPLETE REVISION AND NO ASTERISKS HAVE BEEN USED TO HIGHLIGHT REVISIONS. SUBJECT: Lower Door Hinges Make Popping or Groan When Opened Or Closed OVERVIEW: This bulletin involves spraying white lithium grease between the roller and roller pin while avoiding getting grease on the. This needs to be done to all lower door hinges. CAUTION: Be careful not to spray grease on the outside of the roller or roller cam. If grease is allowed to get on the outside of the roller or roller cam it must be cleaned off using a clean shop towel. Grease left on the outside of the roller and roller cam may also cause a noise. MODELS: 2009 - 2010 (DS) Ram Truck (1500 Pick Up) 2005 - 2010 (DH) Ram Truck (1500/2500 Pick Up) 2010 (DJ) Ram Truck (2500 Pick Up) 2004 - 2010 (HB) Durango 2007 - 2010 (HG) Aspen 2007 - 2010 (JC) Journey 2007 - 2010 (JS) Avenger/Sebring 2007 - 2010 (KK) Liberty 2007 - 2010 (KA) Nitro 2008 - 2010 (LC) Challenger 2006 - 2010 (LE) Chrysler 300C (International Markets) 2007 - 2010 (LX) 300/Charger/Magnum 2007 - 2010 (MK) Compass/Patriot 2005 - 2010 (ND) Dakota 2007 - 2010 (PM) Caliber 2006 - 2010 (WH) Grand Cherokee (International Markets) 2005 - 2010 (WK) Grand Cherokee 2006 - 2010 (WH) Commander (International Markets) 2006 - 2010 (XK) Commander SYMPTOM/CONDITION: The lower door hinges make a moderate to loud popping/groan sound when the door is opened or closed. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Hinge > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Door Hinge: > 23-018-10 > Oct > 10 > Body - Lower Door Hinge Popping Groaning Noises > Page 13404 This is due to the roller axle not being properly maintained with grease. DIAGNOSIS: Open the doors and listen for the popping or groan sound from the lower hinge, if the sound is present perform the Repair Procedure. PARTS REQUIRED: REPAIR PROCEDURE: 1. Open door. 2. With straw installed on the lithium grease spray can (p/n 04318066AB), spray a very small amount of grease between the roller pin and inside roller surface (axle). (Fig. 1). CAUTION: Be careful not to spray grease on the outside of the roller or roller cam. If grease is allowed to get on the outside of the roller or roller cam it must be cleaned off using a clean shop towel. Grease left on the outside of the roller and roller cam may also cause a noise. 3. Open and close the door 10 times to work the grease onto the roller axle. 4. Wipe away any excess grease in the sprayed area. 5. Repeat steps 1 through 4 for every door. POLICY: Reimbursable within the provisions of the warranty. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Hinge > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Door Hinge: > 23-018-10 > Oct > 10 > Body - Lower Door Hinge Popping Groaning Noises > Page 13405 TIME ALLOWANCE: FAILURE CODE: Disclaimer: This bulletin is supplied as technical information only and is not an authorization for repair. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Hinge > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Door Hinge: > Page 13406 Rear Door Hinge: By Symptom Technical Service Bulletin # 23-018-10 Date: 101021 Body - Lower Door Hinge Popping Groaning Noises NUMBER: 23-018-10 GROUP: Body DATE: October 21, 2010 THIS BULLETIN SUPERSEDES TECHNICAL SERVICE BULLETIN 23-016-06, DATED MARCH 18, 2006, WHICH SHOULD BE REMOVED FROM YOUR FILES. THIS IS A COMPLETE REVISION AND NO ASTERISKS HAVE BEEN USED TO HIGHLIGHT REVISIONS. SUBJECT: Lower Door Hinges Make Popping or Groan When Opened Or Closed OVERVIEW: This bulletin involves spraying white lithium grease between the roller and roller pin while avoiding getting grease on the. This needs to be done to all lower door hinges. CAUTION: Be careful not to spray grease on the outside of the roller or roller cam. If grease is allowed to get on the outside of the roller or roller cam it must be cleaned off using a clean shop towel. Grease left on the outside of the roller and roller cam may also cause a noise. MODELS: 2009 - 2010 (DS) Ram Truck (1500 Pick Up) 2005 - 2010 (DH) Ram Truck (1500/2500 Pick Up) 2010 (DJ) Ram Truck (2500 Pick Up) 2004 - 2010 (HB) Durango 2007 - 2010 (HG) Aspen 2007 - 2010 (JC) Journey 2007 - 2010 (JS) Avenger/Sebring 2007 - 2010 (KK) Liberty 2007 - 2010 (KA) Nitro 2008 - 2010 (LC) Challenger 2006 - 2010 (LE) Chrysler 300C (International Markets) 2007 - 2010 (LX) 300/Charger/Magnum 2007 - 2010 (MK) Compass/Patriot 2005 - 2010 (ND) Dakota 2007 - 2010 (PM) Caliber 2006 - 2010 (WH) Grand Cherokee (International Markets) 2005 - 2010 (WK) Grand Cherokee 2006 - 2010 (WH) Commander (International Markets) 2006 - 2010 (XK) Commander Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Hinge > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Door Hinge: > Page 13407 SYMPTOM/CONDITION: The lower door hinges make a moderate to loud popping/groan sound when the door is opened or closed. This is due to the roller axle not being properly maintained with grease. DIAGNOSIS: Open the doors and listen for the popping or groan sound from the lower hinge, if the sound is present perform the Repair Procedure. PARTS REQUIRED: REPAIR PROCEDURE: 1. Open door. 2. With straw installed on the lithium grease spray can (p/n 04318066AB), spray a very small amount of grease between the roller pin and inside roller surface (axle). (Fig. 1). CAUTION: Be careful not to spray grease on the outside of the roller or roller cam. If grease is allowed to get on the outside of the roller or roller cam it must be cleaned off using a clean shop towel. Grease left on the outside of the roller and roller cam may also cause a noise. 3. Open and close the door 10 times to work the grease onto the roller axle. 4. Wipe away any excess grease in the sprayed area. 5. Repeat steps 1 through 4 for every door. POLICY: Reimbursable within the provisions of the warranty. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Hinge > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Door Hinge: > Page 13408 TIME ALLOWANCE: FAILURE CODE: Disclaimer: This bulletin is supplied as technical information only and is not an authorization for repair. Technical Service Bulletin # 23-018-10 Date: 101021 Body - Lower Door Hinge Popping Groaning Noises NUMBER: 23-018-10 GROUP: Body DATE: October 21, 2010 THIS BULLETIN SUPERSEDES TECHNICAL SERVICE BULLETIN 23-016-06, DATED MARCH 18, 2006, WHICH SHOULD BE REMOVED FROM YOUR FILES. THIS IS A COMPLETE REVISION AND NO ASTERISKS HAVE BEEN USED TO HIGHLIGHT REVISIONS. SUBJECT: Lower Door Hinges Make Popping or Groan When Opened Or Closed OVERVIEW: This bulletin involves spraying white lithium grease between the roller and roller pin while avoiding getting grease on the. This needs to be done to all lower door hinges. CAUTION: Be careful not to spray grease on the outside of the roller or roller cam. If grease is allowed to get on the outside of the roller or roller cam it must be cleaned off using a clean shop towel. Grease left on the outside of the roller and roller cam may also cause a noise. MODELS: 2009 - 2010 (DS) Ram Truck (1500 Pick Up) 2005 - 2010 (DH) Ram Truck (1500/2500 Pick Up) 2010 (DJ) Ram Truck (2500 Pick Up) 2004 - 2010 (HB) Durango 2007 - 2010 (HG) Aspen 2007 - 2010 (JC) Journey 2007 - 2010 (JS) Avenger/Sebring 2007 - 2010 (KK) Liberty 2007 - 2010 (KA) Nitro 2008 - 2010 (LC) Challenger 2006 - 2010 (LE) Chrysler 300C (International Markets) 2007 - 2010 (LX) 300/Charger/Magnum Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Hinge > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Door Hinge: > Page 13409 2007 - 2010 (MK) Compass/Patriot 2005 - 2010 (ND) Dakota 2007 - 2010 (PM) Caliber 2006 - 2010 (WH) Grand Cherokee (International Markets) 2005 - 2010 (WK) Grand Cherokee 2006 - 2010 (WH) Commander (International Markets) 2006 - 2010 (XK) Commander SYMPTOM/CONDITION: The lower door hinges make a moderate to loud popping/groan sound when the door is opened or closed. This is due to the roller axle not being properly maintained with grease. DIAGNOSIS: Open the doors and listen for the popping or groan sound from the lower hinge, if the sound is present perform the Repair Procedure. PARTS REQUIRED: REPAIR PROCEDURE: 1. Open door. 2. With straw installed on the lithium grease spray can (p/n 04318066AB), spray a very small amount of grease between the roller pin and inside roller surface (axle). (Fig. 1). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Hinge > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Door Hinge: > Page 13410 CAUTION: Be careful not to spray grease on the outside of the roller or roller cam. If grease is allowed to get on the outside of the roller or roller cam it must be cleaned off using a clean shop towel. Grease left on the outside of the roller and roller cam may also cause a noise. 3. Open and close the door 10 times to work the grease onto the roller axle. 4. Wipe away any excess grease in the sprayed area. 5. Repeat steps 1 through 4 for every door. POLICY: Reimbursable within the provisions of the warranty. TIME ALLOWANCE: FAILURE CODE: Disclaimer: This bulletin is supplied as technical information only and is not an authorization for repair. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Hinge > System Information > Service and Repair > Rear Door Hinge - Removal Rear Door Hinge: Service and Repair Rear Door Hinge - Removal REMOVAL NOTE: It is not necessary to remove the door to replace the hinges if they are replaced one at a time. NOTE: The epoxy coated washers should not be removed from the hinge. If the washers are removed the door may have to be re-adjusted. 1. Open the front door UPPER HINGE 1. Using a grease pencil or equivalent, mark the position of the hinge (2) on the door and b-pillar. 2. Remove the nut (1) and bolt (9) attaching the hinge (2) to the door. 3. Remove the three bolts (6) attaching the hinge to the b-pillar and remove the hinge. LOWER HINGE Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Hinge > System Information > Service and Repair > Rear Door Hinge - Removal > Page 13413 1. Using a grease pencil or equivalent, mark the position of the hinge on the door and b-pillar. 2. Remove the lower b-pillar trim. See: Interior Moulding / Trim/Trim Panel/Service and Repair/Pillar Trim/B-Pillar Trim 3. Remove the nut (1) and bolt (9) attaching the hinge to the door. 4. Remove the two bolts (5) attaching the hinge to the b-pillar. 5. From the inside of the vehicle remove the remaining bolt (4) attaching the hinge to the b-pillar and remove the hinge. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Hinge > System Information > Service and Repair > Rear Door Hinge - Removal > Page 13414 Rear Door Hinge: Service and Repair Rear Door Hinge - Installation INSTALLATION UPPER HINGE 1. Install the hinge to door washers, if there were removed previously, nut (1) and bolt (9) and tighten to 28 Nm (21 ft. lbs.). 2. Tighten the upper hinge bolt (2) to 28 Nm (21 ft. lbs.). 3. Tighten the upper hinge bolt (1) to 28 Nm (21 ft. lbs.). 4. Tighten the upper hinge bolt (3) to 28 Nm (21 ft. lbs.). 5. Adjust the door if needed. See: Adjustments LOWER HINGE Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Hinge > System Information > Service and Repair > Rear Door Hinge - Removal > Page 13415 1. Install the hinge and install the b-pillar bolts. 2. Tighten the upper hinge bolt (2) to 28 Nm (21 ft. lbs.). 3. Tighten the upper hinge bolt (1) to 28 Nm (21 ft. lbs.). 4. Tighten the upper hinge bolt (3) to 28 Nm (21 ft. lbs.). 5. Install the hinge to door washers, if there were removed previously, nut and bolt and tighten to 28 Nm (21 ft. lbs.). 6. Adjust the door if needed. See: Adjustments 7. Install the lower b-pillar trim. See: Interior Moulding / Trim/Trim Panel/Service and Repair/Pillar Trim/B-Pillar Trim Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Latch > System Information > Adjustments Rear Door Latch: Adjustments ADJUSTMENTS 1. Locate the access hole in the door to adjust the door latch (1) and remove the mylar tape (2). 2. Loosen the adjustment screw (3). 3. Operate the door handles several times to reduce any possible linkage binding and tighten the adjustment screw to 3 Nm (30 in. lbs.). 4. Operate the door handles again to verify proper operation and reinstall the mylar tape. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Latch > System Information > Service and Repair > Rear Door Latch - Removal Rear Door Latch: Service and Repair Rear Door Latch - Removal REMOVAL 1. Raise the window to the full up position and remove the door trim panel See: Rear Door Panel/Service and Repair/Rear Door Trim Panel Removal . 2. Position the water dam out of the way and disconnect the actuator rod (1) from the interior door handle actuator (2) and the door latch (5) and remove the rod. 3. Disconnect the two actuator rods (3 and 4) from the door latch. 4. Disconnect the door wire harness connector (2) from the door latch (3). 5. Remove the three bolts (4) that secure the door latch to the door (1) and remove the latch. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Latch > System Information > Service and Repair > Rear Door Latch - Removal > Page 13421 Rear Door Latch: Service and Repair Rear Door Latch - Installation INSTALLATION 1. Position the door latch (3) into the door (1). 2. Install the three bolts (4) that secure the door latch to the door. Tighten the bolts to 10 Nm (89 in. lbs.). 3. Connect the door wire harness connector (2) to the door latch. 4. Connect the two actuator rods (3 and 4) to the door latch (5) 5. Connect the actuator rod (1) to the door latch and the interior door handle actuator (2). 6. Reposition the water dam to the door and install the door trim panel See: Rear Door Panel/Service and Repair/Rear Door Trim Panel Installation . 7. If necessary, adjust the latch See: Adjustments . Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Panel > System Information > Service and Repair > Rear Door Trim Panel - Removal Rear Door Panel: Service and Repair Rear Door Trim Panel - Removal REMOVAL 1. Remove the screw (3) that secures the interior door handle (2) to the interior door handle actuator (1). 2. Remove the interior door handle from the interior door handle actuator. 3. If equipped, remove the manual window crank (2) using a window crank removal tool (1). 4. Remove the screw (4) that secures the door trim panel (5) to the screw insert located in the center of the door (1). CAUTION: The door trim panel is attached to the door by molded plastic retaining clips that are integral to the door trim panel. Do not pull the door trim panel directly off of the door or damage to the trim panel and/or the power switch assembly will occur. 5. Lift the door trim panel straight upward to disconnect the molded plastic retaining clips (3) from the door. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Panel > System Information > Service and Repair > Rear Door Trim Panel - Removal > Page 13426 6. If equipped, disconnect the door wire harness (2) from the power door switch assembly and remove the door trim panel. Mega Cab 1. Remove the screws (3) that secures the door trim panel to the door. CAUTION: The door trim panel is attached to the door by molded plastic retaining clips (4) that are integral to the door trim panel. Do not pull the door trim panel directly off of the door or damage to the trim panel and/or the power switch assembly will occur. 2. Lift the door trim panel straight upward to disconnect the molded plastic retaining clips (4) from the door. 3. If equipped, disconnect the door wire harness (2) from the power door switch assembly and remove the door trim panel. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Panel > System Information > Service and Repair > Rear Door Trim Panel - Removal > Page 13427 Rear Door Panel: Service and Repair Rear Door Trim Panel - Installation INSTALLATION 1. If equipped, connect the door wire harness (2) to the power door switch assembly. CAUTION: The door trim panel is attached to the door by molded plastic retaining clips that are integral to the door trim panel. Do not force the door trim panel onto the door or damage to the trim panel and/or the power switch assembly will occur. 2. Position the door trim panel (5) and align the molded plastic retaining clips (3) to the door (1). 3. Push the door trim panel straight downward until all of the retaining clips are fully engaged to the door. 4. Install the screw (4) that secures the door trim panel to the screw insert located in the center of the door. 5. if equipped, install the manual window crank. Mega Cab 1. If equipped, connect the door wire harness (2) to the power door switch assembly. CAUTION: The door trim panel is attached to the door by molded plastic retaining clips (4) that are integral to the door trim panel. Do not force the door trim panel onto the door or damage to the trim panel and/or the power switch assembly will occur. 2. Position the trim panel to the door and insert the door lock (1) through the hole in the trim panel. 3. Position the door trim panel and align the molded plastic retaining clips (4) to the door slots (5). 4. Push the door trim panel straight downward until all of the retaining clips are fully engaged to the door. 5. Install the screws (3). 6. if equipped, install the manual window crank. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Panel > System Information > Service and Repair > Rear Door Trim Panel - Removal > Page 13428 Rear Door Panel: Service and Repair Rear Door Waterdam Removal REMOVAL 1. Remove the interior door handle actuator See: Rear Door Handle/Rear Door Interior Handle/Service and Repair/Removal . 2. Remove the speaker See: Accessories and Optional Equipment/Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc/Speaker/Service and Repair/Removal . CAUTION: Do not allow the water dam adhesive to become contaminated with dirt or other foreign substances. If the water dam becomes contaminated or damaged, replace it. 3. Carefully remove the water dam (1) from around the perimeter of the rear door (2). 4. Separate the water dam from the interior handle actuator rod and the door wire harness (if equipped) and remove the water dam. Installation INSTALLATION CAUTION: Do not allow the water dam or adhesive to become contaminated with dirt or other foreign substances. If the water dam becomes contaminated or damaged, replace it. NOTE: Be sure that the water dam is fully sealed around the perimeter of the door. 1. Position the interior handle actuator rod and the wire harness (if equipped) through the holes in the water dam (1) and install the water dam to the door (2). 2. Install the speaker See: Accessories and Optional Equipment/Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc/Speaker/Service and Repair/Installation 3. Install the interior door handle actuator See: Rear Door Handle/Rear Door Interior Handle/Service and Repair/Installation . Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Striker > System Information > Adjustments Rear Door Striker: Adjustments ADJUSTMENTS 1. Using a grease pencil or equivalent, mark the location of the door latch striker (1) on the C-pillar (2) to aid in adjustment. 2. Loosen the two bolts (3) that secure the door latch striker to the C-pillar. 3. To adjust the rear gap and flush measurement, change the position of the door latch striker and then tighten the two bolts to 28 Nm (21 ft. lbs.) . 4. Verify correct door and latch position. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Striker > System Information > Service and Repair > Removal Rear Door Striker: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL 1. Using a grease pencil or equivalent, mark the location of the door latch striker (1) on the C-pillar (2). 2. Remove the two bolts (3) that secure the door latch striker to the C-pillar and remove the striker. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Striker > System Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 13434 Rear Door Striker: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION 1. Position the door latch striker (1) onto the C-pillar (2) and loosely install the two bolts (3). 2. Align the door latch striker to the C-pillar using the reference marks made during the removal procedure and tighten the bolts to 28 Nm (21 ft. lbs.). 3. If necessary, adjust the door latch striker See: Adjustments . Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Weatherstrip > Component Information > Service and Repair > A-Pillar Weatherstrip Retainer Rear Door Weatherstrip: Service and Repair A-Pillar Weatherstrip Retainer Removal REMOVAL 1. Remove the drip rail weatherstrip retainer (1) See: Front Door/Front Door Weatherstrip/Service and Repair/Drip Rail Weatherstrip - Removal . 2. Remove the five screws (8) and remove the A-pillar weatherstrip retainer (7). Installation INSTALLATION 1. Install the A-pillar weatherstrip retainer (7) and install the screws (8). 2. Install the drip rail weatherstrip retainer (1) See: Front Door/Front Door Weatherstrip/Service and Repair/Drip Rail Weatherstrip - Installation . Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Weatherstrip > Component Information > Service and Repair > A-Pillar Weatherstrip Retainer > Page 13439 Rear Door Weatherstrip: Service and Repair Drip Rail Weatherstrip - Removal REMOVAL 1. Open the doors and separate the weatherstrip (3) from the drip rail and a-pillar retainers (1 and 7). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Weatherstrip > Component Information > Service and Repair > A-Pillar Weatherstrip Retainer > Page 13440 Rear Door Weatherstrip: Service and Repair Drip Rail Weatherstrip - Installation INSTALLATION 1. Position the weatherstrip (3) onto the drip rail and a-pillar retainers (1 and 7) and seat fully. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Weatherstrip > Component Information > Service and Repair > A-Pillar Weatherstrip Retainer > Page 13441 Rear Door Weatherstrip: Service and Repair Door Opening Seal Removal REMOVAL FRONT DOOR SEAL 1. Remove the cowl trim panel (1) See: Interior Moulding / Trim/Trim Panel/Service and Repair/Cowl Trim/Cowl Trim - Removal . 2. If vehicle is a Standard Cab , remove the lower b-pillar trim panel (3) See: Interior Moulding / Trim/Trim Panel/Service and Repair/Pillar Trim/B-Pillar Trim . Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Weatherstrip > Component Information > Service and Repair > A-Pillar Weatherstrip Retainer > Page 13442 3. If vehicle is a Quad Cab , remove the lower b-pillar trim panel (1) See: Interior Moulding / Trim/Trim Panel/Service and Repair/Pillar Trim/B-Pillar Trim . 4. Separate the front door opening seal (6) from the door opening flange. REAR DOOR SEAL 1. Remove the lower b-pillar trim panel (1) See: Interior Moulding / Trim/Trim Panel/Service and Repair/Pillar Trim/B-Pillar Trim . Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Weatherstrip > Component Information > Service and Repair > A-Pillar Weatherstrip Retainer > Page 13443 2. Remove the lower c-pillar trim (1) See: Interior Moulding / Trim/Trim Panel/Service and Repair/Pillar Trim/C-Pillar Trim Panel-Removal . 3. Separate the rear door opening seal (5) from the door opening flange. Installation INSTALLATION FRONT DOOR SEAL Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Weatherstrip > Component Information > Service and Repair > A-Pillar Weatherstrip Retainer > Page 13444 1. Position the front door seal (6) to the bottom of the door opening, with bulb facing outboard, starting the installation at the center of the lower flange. Press the seal onto the sill flange and work around the perimeter of the door opening until fully seated. Work in one direction, smoothing the seal to avoid puckers or wrinkles. 2. If vehicle is a Standard Cab , install the lower b-pillar trim (3) See: Interior Moulding / Trim/Trim Panel/Service and Repair/Pillar Trim/B-Pillar Trim . 3. If vehicle is a Quad Cab , install the lower b-pillar trim (1) See: Interior Moulding / Trim/Trim Panel/Service and Repair/Pillar Trim/B-Pillar Trim . Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Weatherstrip > Component Information > Service and Repair > A-Pillar Weatherstrip Retainer > Page 13445 4. Install the cowl trim panel (1) See: Interior Moulding / Trim/Trim Panel/Service and Repair/Cowl Trim/Cowl Trim - Installation NOTE: When installing a new weatherstrip on the front door opening, remove the tear strip starting at the splice and moving around the front of the door to the back of the opening. REAR DOOR SEAL 1. Position the rear door seal to the bottom of the door opening, with bulb facing outboard, starting the installation at the center of the lower flange. Press the seal onto the sill flange and work around the perimeter of the door opening until fully seated. Work in one direction, smoothing the seal to avoid puckers or wrinkles. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Weatherstrip > Component Information > Service and Repair > A-Pillar Weatherstrip Retainer > Page 13446 2. Install the lower c-pillar trim (1) See: Interior Moulding / Trim/Trim Panel/Service and Repair/Pillar Trim/C-Pillar Trim Panel-Installation . 3. Install the lower b-pillar trim (1) See: Interior Moulding / Trim/Trim Panel/Service and Repair/Pillar Trim/B-Pillar Trim . NOTE: When installing a new weatherstrip on the rear door opening, remove the tear strip starting at the splice and moving around the back of the door to the front of the opening. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Weatherstrip > Component Information > Service and Repair > A-Pillar Weatherstrip Retainer > Page 13447 Rear Door Weatherstrip: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL 1. Remove the drip rail weatherstrip retainer (1) See: Front Door/Front Door Weatherstrip/Service and Repair/Drip Rail Weatherstrip - Removal . 2. Remove the five screws (8) and remove the A-pillar weatherstrip retainer (7). Installation INSTALLATION 1. Install the A-pillar weatherstrip retainer (7) and install the screws (8). 2. Install the drip rail weatherstrip retainer (1) See: Front Door/Front Door Weatherstrip/Service and Repair/Drip Rail Weatherstrip - Installation . Drip Rail Weatherstrip - Removal REMOVAL Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Weatherstrip > Component Information > Service and Repair > A-Pillar Weatherstrip Retainer > Page 13448 1. Open the doors and separate the weatherstrip (3) from the drip rail and a-pillar retainers (1 and 7). Drip Rail Weatherstrip - Installation INSTALLATION 1. Position the weatherstrip (3) onto the drip rail and a-pillar retainers (1 and 7) and seat fully. Removal REMOVAL FRONT DOOR SEAL Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Weatherstrip > Component Information > Service and Repair > A-Pillar Weatherstrip Retainer > Page 13449 1. Remove the cowl trim panel (1) See: Interior Moulding / Trim/Trim Panel/Service and Repair/Cowl Trim/Cowl Trim - Removal . 2. If vehicle is a Standard Cab , remove the lower b-pillar trim panel (3) See: Interior Moulding / Trim/Trim Panel/Service and Repair/Pillar Trim/B-Pillar Trim . 3. If vehicle is a Quad Cab , remove the lower b-pillar trim panel (1) See: Interior Moulding / Trim/Trim Panel/Service and Repair/Pillar Trim/B-Pillar Trim . Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Weatherstrip > Component Information > Service and Repair > A-Pillar Weatherstrip Retainer > Page 13450 4. Separate the front door opening seal (6) from the door opening flange. REAR DOOR SEAL 1. Remove the lower b-pillar trim panel (1) See: Interior Moulding / Trim/Trim Panel/Service and Repair/Pillar Trim/B-Pillar Trim . 2. Remove the lower c-pillar trim (1) See: Interior Moulding / Trim/Trim Panel/Service and Repair/Pillar Trim/C-Pillar Trim Panel-Removal . Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Weatherstrip > Component Information > Service and Repair > A-Pillar Weatherstrip Retainer > Page 13451 3. Separate the rear door opening seal (5) from the door opening flange. Installation INSTALLATION FRONT DOOR SEAL 1. Position the front door seal (6) to the bottom of the door opening, with bulb facing outboard, starting the installation at the center of the lower flange. Press the seal onto the sill flange and work around the perimeter of the door opening until fully seated. Work in one direction, smoothing the seal to avoid puckers or wrinkles. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Weatherstrip > Component Information > Service and Repair > A-Pillar Weatherstrip Retainer > Page 13452 2. If vehicle is a Standard Cab , install the lower b-pillar trim (3) See: Interior Moulding / Trim/Trim Panel/Service and Repair/Pillar Trim/B-Pillar Trim . 3. If vehicle is a Quad Cab , install the lower b-pillar trim (1) See: Interior Moulding / Trim/Trim Panel/Service and Repair/Pillar Trim/B-Pillar Trim . 4. Install the cowl trim panel (1) See: Interior Moulding / Trim/Trim Panel/Service and Repair/Cowl Trim/Cowl Trim - Installation NOTE: When installing a new weatherstrip on the front door opening, remove the tear strip starting at the splice and moving around the front of the door to the back of the opening. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Weatherstrip > Component Information > Service and Repair > A-Pillar Weatherstrip Retainer > Page 13453 REAR DOOR SEAL 1. Position the rear door seal to the bottom of the door opening, with bulb facing outboard, starting the installation at the center of the lower flange. Press the seal onto the sill flange and work around the perimeter of the door opening until fully seated. Work in one direction, smoothing the seal to avoid puckers or wrinkles. 2. Install the lower c-pillar trim (1) See: Interior Moulding / Trim/Trim Panel/Service and Repair/Pillar Trim/C-Pillar Trim Panel-Installation . 3. Install the lower b-pillar trim (1) See: Interior Moulding / Trim/Trim Panel/Service and Repair/Pillar Trim/B-Pillar Trim . Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Weatherstrip > Component Information > Service and Repair > A-Pillar Weatherstrip Retainer > Page 13454 NOTE: When installing a new weatherstrip on the rear door opening, remove the tear strip starting at the splice and moving around the back of the door to the front of the opening. Drip Rail Weatherstrip Retainer - Removal REMOVAL 1. Separate the drip rail weatherstrip (3) from the weatherstrip retainer (1). 2. Remove the seven screws (2) and remove the retainer (1). Drip Rail Weatherstrip Retainer - Installation INSTALLATION 1. Install the weatherstrip retainer (1) and install the seven screws (2). 2. Position the weatherstrip (3) over the retainer flange and seat fully. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Window Glass > Rear Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Service and Repair > Rear Door Outer Belt Molding Rear Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: Service and Repair Rear Door Outer Belt Molding Removal REMOVAL 1. Remove the screw (3) and separate the belt molding (1) from the door (2) flange from the back to the front. Installation INSTALLATION 1. Position the belt molding (1) onto the door (2) flange and seat fully. 2. Install the screw (3). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Window Glass > Rear Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Service and Repair > Rear Door Outer Belt Molding > Page 13460 Rear Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: Service and Repair Rear Door Glass Run Weatherstrip Removal REMOVAL 1. Lower the glass. 2. Separate the rear door glass run weatherstrip (5) out of the door frame (2) and remove through the window opening. Installation INSTALLATION NOTE: A mixture of soap and water may be used to aid installation of the weatherstrip into the corners. 1. Position the rear door glass run weatherstrip (5) into the door (2) through the window opening. 2. Position the weatherstrip (5) into the upper corners and seat firmly. 3. From back to front, seat the weatherstrip (5) between the corners and then down the sides firmly. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Window Glass > Rear Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Service and Repair > Rear Door Outer Belt Molding > Page 13461 Rear Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: Service and Repair Rear Door Inner Belt Molding Removal REMOVAL 1. Remove the door trim panel (5) See: Rear Door Panel/Service and Repair/Rear Door Trim Panel - Removal . 2. Separate the belt molding (2) from the rear door mounting flange from the back to the front. Installation INSTALLATION 1. Position the belt molding (2) and seat onto the rear door mounting flange fully. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Window Glass > Rear Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Service and Repair > Rear Door Outer Belt Molding > Page 13462 2. Install the door trim panel (5) See: Rear Door Panel/Service and Repair/Rear Door Trim Panel Installation . Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Window Regulator > System Information > Service and Repair > Rear Door Window Regulator - Removal Rear Door Window Regulator: Service and Repair Rear Door Window Regulator - Removal Power REMOVAL 1. Remove the inner belt molding See: Rear Door Window Glass/Rear Door Window Glass Weatherstrip/Service and Repair/Rear Door Inner Belt Molding/Removal . 2. Remove the waterdam See: Rear Door Panel/Service and Repair/Rear Door Waterdam/Removal . 3. Remove the electric window switch from the door trim panel and connect it to the door wire harness See: Sensors and Switches/Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass/Power Window Switch/Service and Repair/Removal . 4. Raise the door glass to the position shown. 5. Remove the two nuts (1) that secure the door glass (2) to the window regulator (3) through the speaker opening (5) and the sight window (4) and disengage the door glass from the regulator. 6. Position the door glass to the full up position and secure the glass using a wooden wedge or an equivalent. 7. Lower the window regulator and remove the two nuts (1) that secure the regulator stabilizer to the door. 8. Remove the bolts (2) that secures the window regulator to the door and loosen the other two regulator bolts (3). 9. Slide the window regulator upward and disengage the two regulator bolts from the door. 10. Remove the window regulator through the opening in the door and disconnect the door wire harness (4). Manual REMOVAL Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Window Regulator > System Information > Service and Repair > Rear Door Window Regulator - Removal > Page 13467 1. Remove the inner belt molding See: Rear Door Window Glass/Rear Door Window Glass Weatherstrip/Service and Repair/Rear Door Inner Belt Molding/Removal . 2. Remove the waterdam See: Rear Door Panel/Service and Repair/Rear Door Waterdam/Removal . 3. Reinstall the manual window crank and raise the door glass to the position shown. 4. Remove the two nuts (1) that secure the door glass (2) to the window regulator (3) through the speaker opening (5) and the sight window (4) and disengage the door glass from the regulator. 5. Position the door glass to the full up position and secure the glass using a wooden wedge or an equivalent. 6. Lower the window regulator (5) and remove the two nuts (3) that secure the regulator stabilizer (4) to the door (1). 7. Remove the two bolts (2) that secure the window regulator to the door and loosen the other two regulator bolts (6). 8. Slide the window regulator upward and disengage the two regulator bolts from the door. 9. Remove the window regulator through the opening in the door. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Window Regulator > System Information > Service and Repair > Rear Door Window Regulator - Removal > Page 13468 Rear Door Window Regulator: Service and Repair Rear Door Window Regulator - Installation Power INSTALLATION 1. Connect the door wire harness (4) to the window regulator and install the regulator through the opening in the door. 2. Engage the two regulator bolts (3) to the door. 3. Install the regulator bolts (2) that secures the window regulator to the door and tighten all regulator bolts to 10 Nm (89 in. lbs.). 4. Position the regulator stabilizer into the door and install the two nuts. Tighten the nuts to 10 Nm (89 in. lbs.). 5. Raise the window regulator (3) to the position shown. 6. Support the door glass (2) and remove the wooden wedge or equivalent. 7. Position the door glass to the window regulator and install the two nuts (1) that secure the door glass to the window regulator (3) through the sight window (4) and the speaker opening (5). Tighten the nuts to 10 Nm (89 in. lbs.). 8. Disconnect the electric window switch from the door wire harness and reinstall the switch onto the door trim panel See: Sensors and Switches/Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass/Power Window Switch/Service and Repair/Installation . 9. Install the waterdam See: Rear Door Panel/Service and Repair/Rear Door Waterdam/Installation . 10. Install the inner belt molding See: Rear Door Window Glass/Rear Door Window Glass Weatherstrip/Service and Repair/Rear Door Inner Belt Molding/Installation . Manual INSTALLATION Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Window Regulator > System Information > Service and Repair > Rear Door Window Regulator - Removal > Page 13469 1. Install the window regulator (5) through the opening in the door (1). 2. Engage the two regulator bolts (6) to the door. 3. Install the two bolts (2) that secure the window regulator to the door and tighten all four regulator bolts to 10 Nm (89 in. lbs.). 4. Position the regulator stabilizer (4) onto the door and install the two nuts (3). Tighten the nuts to 10 Nm (89 in. lbs.). 5. Raise the window regulator (3) to the position shown and remove the manual window crank. 6. Support the door glass (2) and remove the wooden wedge or equivalent. 7. Position the door glass to the window regulator and install the two nuts (1) that secure the door glass to the window regulator through the sight window (4) and the speaker opening (5). Tighten the nuts to 10 Nm (89 in. lbs.). 8. Install the waterdam See: Rear Door Panel/Service and Repair/Rear Door Waterdam/Installation . 9. Install the inner belt molding See: Rear Door Window Glass/Rear Door Window Glass Weatherstrip/Service and Repair/Rear Door Inner Belt Molding/Installation . Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Fuel Door > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Fuel Door: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL 1. Open the fuel filler door (1). 2. Remove the two bolts (2) that secure the fuel filler door to the cargo box and remove the door. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Fuel Door > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 13474 Fuel Door: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION 1. Position and align the fuel filler door (1) to the cargo box. 2. Install the two bolts (2) that secure the fuel filler door to the cargo box. Tighten the bolts to 9 Nm (80 in. lbs.). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Hood > Hood Hinge > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Hood Hinge: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL NOTE: It is not necessary to remove the hood to replace the hood hinges. Hood hinges can be replaced one at a time. 1. Remove the cowl grille See: Cowl/Cowl Moulding / Trim . 2. Using a grease pencil or equivalent, mark the position of the hood hinge (3) on the hood for the hinge being serviced. 3. Support the hood and disconnect the support cylinder from the hood See: Hood Shock / Support/Service and Repair/Removal . 4. Remove the two nuts that secure the hood to the hood hinge. 5. Remove the bolt (2) that secures the front fender (1) to the hood hinge. 6. Remove the wheelhouse splash shield See: Fender/Front Fender/Front Fender Liner/Service and Repair/Removal . 7. Remove the bolts (3) that secure the hood hinge (2) to the fender rail (1). 8. Slide the hood hinge forward and remove the hinge. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Hood > Hood Hinge > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 13480 Hood Hinge: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION NOTE: It is not necessary to remove the hood to replace the hood hinges. Hood hinges can be replaced one at a time. 1. Position the hood hinge (2) onto the fender rail (1) and slide it rearward to its installed location. 2. Install the bolts (3) that secure the hood hinge to the fender rail. Tighten the bolts to 20 Nm (15 ft. lbs.). 3. Install the bolt (2) that secures the front fender (1) to the hood hinge (3). Tighten the bolt to 12.5 Nm (9 ft. lbs.). 4. Loosely install the two nuts that secure the hood to the hood hinge. 5. Align the hood to the hood hinge using the reference marks made during the Removal procedure and tighten the nuts to 23 Nm (17 ft. lbs.). 6. Install the support cylinder See: Hood Shock / Support/Service and Repair/Installation . 7. If required, adjust the hood to the correct position . 8. Install the wheelhouse splash shield See: Fender/Front Fender/Front Fender Liner/Service and Repair/Installation . 9. Install the cowl grille See: Cowl/Cowl Moulding / Trim . Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Hood > Hood Latch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Hood Latch Hood Latch: Service and Repair Hood Latch Removal REMOVAL 1. Using a grease pencil or equivalent, mark the position of the hood latch (1) on the upper radiator crossmember. 2. Remove the two bolts (3) that secure the hood latch to the upper radiator crossmember. 3. Disconnect the hood latch cable (2) from the hood latch and remove the latch. Installation INSTALLATION 1. Connect the hood latch cable (2) to the hood latch (1). 2. Position the hood latch to the upper radiator crossmember and loosely install the two bolts (3) that secure the latch to the crossmember. 3. Align the hood latch to the upper radiator crossmember using the reference marks made during the Removal procedure and tighten the bolts to 11 Nm (8 ft. lbs.). 4. If required, adjust the hood to the correct position . Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Hood > Hood Latch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Hood Latch > Page 13485 Hood Latch: Service and Repair Latch Striker / Secondary Catch Removal REMOVAL 1. Disconnect the release handle (4) from the secondary hood latch and striker assembly (2) and remove the handle from the grille frame (5). 2. Remove the two bolts (3) that secure the secondary hood latch and striker assembly to the hood and remove the assembly. Installation INSTALLATION 1. Position the secondary hood latch and striker assembly (2) to the hood. 2. Install the two bolts (3) that secure the secondary hood latch and striker assembly to the hood. Tighten the bolts to 11 Nm (8 ft. lbs.). 3. Install the release handle (4) through the grille frame (5) and connect it to the secondary hood latch. 4. If required, adjust the hood to the correct position . Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Hood > Hood Latch Release Cable > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Hood Latch Release Cable: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL 1. Remove the hood latch See: Hood Latch/Service and Repair/Hood Latch/Removal . 2. Remove the battery tray from the left side of the engine compartment See: Starting and Charging/Battery/Battery Tray/Service and Repair/Battery Tray - Removal . 3. Remove the three hood release cable retainers from the upper radiator crossmember and the left fender rail. 4. From inside the vehicle, remove the two bolts (1) that secure the hood release handle (2) to the instrument panel bracket (3). 5. Remove the grommet (4) from the cowl panel and remove the hood release cable and handle assembly. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Hood > Hood Latch Release Cable > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 13490 Hood Latch Release Cable: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION 1. Route the hood release cable through the cowl panel and install the grommet (4). 2. Position the hood release handle (2) onto the instrument panel bracket (3). 3. Install the two bolts (1) that secure the hood release handle to the instrument panel bracket. Tighten the bolts to 9 Nm (80 in. lbs.). 4. Route the hood release cable along the left fender rail and the upper radiator crossmember and install the three hood release cable retainers. 5. Install the battery tray to the left side of the engine compartment See: Starting and Charging/Battery/Battery Tray/Service and Repair/Battery Tray - Installation . 6. Install the hood latch See: Hood Latch/Service and Repair/Hood Latch/Installation . Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Hood > Hood Shock / Support > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Hood Shock / Support: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL NOTE: The hood support cylinders can be replaced one at a time. 1. Open and support the hood. CAUTION: Do not pull on the hood support cylinders at the middle of the support cylinder during removal. Failure to follow this caution can result in damage to the hood support cylinders. 2. Using a small flat bladed tool, or equivalent (3), release the retaining clip (2) at each end of the support cylinder while carefully pulling the ball socket (1) away from the ball stud (4). NOTE: Lift the clips (1) only enough to release the ball studs (3). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Hood > Hood Shock / Support > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 13495 3. Disconnect the hood support cylinder (5) from the hood (1) and the fender rail (3). 4. If required, remove the upper ball stud (2) from hood and the lower ball stud (4) from the fender rail. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Hood > Hood Shock / Support > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 13496 Hood Shock / Support: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION 1. If removed, install the upper ball stud (2) onto the hood (1) and the lower ball stud (4) onto the fender rail (3). Install the ball studs securely. CAUTION: Do not push on the hood support cylinders at the middle of the support cylinder during installation. Failure to follow this caution can result in damage to the hood support cylinders. NOTE: Install the hood support cylinders with the cylinder end connected to the hood as shown. NOTE: If required, only release each retaining clip enough to install the ball socket onto the ball stud. 2. Install the hood support cylinder (5) over the upper and lower ball studs and fully engage the retaining clips. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Hood > Hood Switch / Sensor > Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm) > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 475 Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm): Locations Component ID 475 Component ID: 475 Component : SWITCH-HOOD AJAR Connector: Name : SWITCH-HOOD AJAR Color : # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (GAS) Pin Circuit Description 1 G70 20VT/LB HOOD AJAR SWITCH SENSE 2 G930 20VT/TN AAT RETURN Component Location - 29 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Hood > Hood Switch / Sensor > Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm) > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 475 > Page 13502 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Hood > Hood Switch / Sensor > Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm) > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 475 > Page 13503 Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm): Locations Component ID 492 Component ID: 492 Component : SWITCH-HOOD AJAR Connector: Name : SWITCH-HOOD AJAR Color : # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (GAS) Pin Circuit Description 1 G70 20VT/LB HOOD AJAR SWITCH SENSE 2 G930 20VT/TN AAT RETURN Component Location - 29 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Hood > Hood Switch / Sensor > Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm) > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 475 > Page 13504 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Hood > Hood Switch / Sensor > Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm) > Component Information > Diagrams > Component ID 475 Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm): Diagrams Component ID 475 Component ID: 475 Component : SWITCH-HOOD AJAR Connector: Name : SWITCH-HOOD AJAR Color : # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (GAS) Pin Circuit Description 1 G70 20VT/LB HOOD AJAR SWITCH SENSE 2 G930 20VT/TN AAT RETURN Component Location - 29 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Hood > Hood Switch / Sensor > Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm) > Component Information > Diagrams > Component ID 475 > Page 13507 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Hood > Hood Switch / Sensor > Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm) > Component Information > Diagrams > Component ID 475 > Page 13508 Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm): Diagrams Component ID 492 Component ID: 492 Component : SWITCH-HOOD AJAR Connector: Name : SWITCH-HOOD AJAR Color : # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (GAS) Pin Circuit Description 1 G70 20VT/LB HOOD AJAR SWITCH SENSE 2 G930 20VT/TN AAT RETURN Component Location - 29 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Hood > Hood Switch / Sensor > Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm) > Component Information > Diagrams > Component ID 475 > Page 13509 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Hood > Hood Switch / Sensor > Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm) > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm): Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The hood ajar switch is a normally closed, single pole, spring-loaded plunger actuated switch. This switch has two unique versions that are used in two different applications. One switch is used only on vehicles equipped with the Vehicle Theft Alarm (VTA) system for sale in certain export markets where protection of the underhood area is required equipment. The second switch is used only on domestic vehicles equipped with an optional remote starter system. The molded plastic switch body (5) has an integral molded connector receptacle (1) on the lower end containing two terminal pins. The switch is connected to the vehicle electrical system through a dedicated take out of the headlamp and dash wire harness. Two integral latches (2) lock the switch into a keyed mounting hole in the stamped steel switch mounting bracket. The mounting bracket is secured with screws to the inboard side of the right front fender load beam within the engine compartment. A molded plastic striker secured to the underside of the hood panel inner reinforcement actuates the switch plunger as the hood panel is closed. The switch plunger (3) extends through a mounting collar (4) and a sleeve-like retainer ring on the upper end of the switch body. The retainer ring has a one time, self-adjustment feature that is activated after the switch is installed by closing the hood. The retainer ring is also color-coded to aid in identifying the switch application. A dark brown retainer ring identifies the underhood security switch application, while a white retainer ring identifies the remote starter system application. An installed hood ajar switch cannot be readjusted or repaired. If the switch is damaged, ineffective, or requires readjustment, it must be replaced with a new unit. The hood ajar switch striker is not intended for reuse. If the striker is removed from the hood inner reinforcement for any reason, it must be replaced with a new unit. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Hood > Hood Switch / Sensor > Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm) > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 13512 Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm): Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The hood ajar switches are interchangeable physically, but not functionally. In each case, the hood ajar switch is a normally closed switch that is held open as the spring-loaded switch plunger is depressed by the striker on the inner hood panel reinforcement when the hood panel is closed and latched. When the hood is opened, the spring-loaded switch plunger extends from the switch body and the switch contacts are closed. In the underhood security application (export vehicles only - dark brown retainer ring), the switch is connected in series between ground and the hood ajar switch sense input of the Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM). The TIPM uses an internal resistor pull up to monitor the state of the hood ajar switch contacts. In the remote starter system application (domestic vehicles only - white retainer ring) the switch has a 1 kilohm diagnostic resistor connected in parallel to the switch contacts between the two switch terminals. The switch is connected in series between an output of the TIPM and the hood ajar switch sense input of the TIPM. The TIPM continually monitors this circuit and will store a Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) for any fault that it detects. The components of the switch self-adjustment feature include an integral stop on the shaft of the plunger and a ribbed, ratcheting sleeve-like retainer ring at the top of the switch body from which the plunger extends. With the switch mounting collar secured in its mounting bracket, the plunger is depressed by the striker on the hood inner reinforcement as the hood is closed. As the plunger is depressed, the plunger stop contacts the top of the retainer ring and it is driven downward, ratcheting through the switch mounting collar until the hood is fully closed and latched. The ribs on the retainer ring are engaged within the mounting collar to maintain this adjusted position. The hood ajar switch as well as the hard wired circuits between the switch and the TIPM may be diagnosed using conventional diagnostic tools and procedures. Refer to the appropriate wiring information. However, conventional diagnostic methods will not prove conclusive in the diagnosis of the electronic controls or communication between modules and other devices related to hood ajar switch operation that provide some features of the export vehicle theft or domestic remote starter systems. The most reliable, efficient, and accurate means to diagnose the electronic controls and communication related to hood ajar switch operation requires the use of a diagnostic scan tool. Refer to the appropriate diagnostic information. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Hood > Hood Switch / Sensor > Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm) > Component Information > Service and Repair > Hood Ajar Switch Bracket Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm): Service and Repair Hood Ajar Switch Bracket Removal BRACKET 1. Remove the hood ajar switch (2) from the mounting bracket (3). See: Hood Ajar Switch Removal . 2. Remove the two screws (4) that secure the hood ajar switch bracket to the two rivet nuts (1) in the right front load beam (6). 3. Remove the hood ajar switch mounting bracket from the inboard side of the right front load beam. Installation BRACKET 1. Check to be certain that the two rivet nuts (1) on the inboard side of the right front load beam (6) are in good condition and properly secured. 2. Position the hood ajar switch mounting bracket (3) onto the right front load beam. 3. Install and tighten the two screws (4) that secure the mounting bracket to the load beam. Beginning with the rearward screw, tighten both screws to 8 Nm (71 in. lbs.). 4. Reinstall the hood ajar switch (2) into the mounting bracket. See: Hood Ajar Switch - Installation . Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Hood > Hood Switch / Sensor > Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm) > Component Information > Service and Repair > Hood Ajar Switch Bracket > Page 13515 Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm): Service and Repair Hood Ajar Switch Striker Removal STRIKER NOTE: The hood ajar switch striker is not intended for reuse. If the striker is removed from the hood inner reinforcement for any reason, it must be replaced. 1. Unlatch and open the hood. 2. Using a trim stick or another suitable wide flat-bladed tool, pry the rearward end of the hood ajar switch striker (2) away from the inner hood panel reinforcement (1) far enough to disengage the integral retainers from their mounting holes. 3. Remove the striker from the inner hood panel reinforcement and discard. Installation STRIKER NOTE: The hood ajar switch striker cap is not intended for reuse. If the striker cap is removed from the hood inner reinforcement for any reason, it must be replaced. 1. Position the new hood ajar switch striker (2) to the mounting holes in the inner hood panel reinforcement (1) over the hood ajar switch (3). 2. Using hand pressure, press the hood ajar switch striker upward into the mounting holes in the inner hood panel reinforcement until both integral retainers are fully engaged. 3. Close and latch the hood. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Hood > Hood Switch / Sensor > Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm) > Component Information > Service and Repair > Hood Ajar Switch Bracket > Page 13516 Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm): Service and Repair Hood Ajar Switch - Removal SWITCH 1. Unlatch and open the hood. 2. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. 3. From the top of the mounting bracket (3) on the right front load beam (6), squeeze the two hood ajar switch (2) latch tabs together and pull the switch upward. 4. Pull the hood ajar switch up through the hole in the mounting bracket far enough to access and disconnect the jumper wire harness connector (5) from the switch connector receptacle. 5. Remove the hood ajar switch from the mounting bracket. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Hood > Hood Switch / Sensor > Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm) > Component Information > Service and Repair > Hood Ajar Switch Bracket > Page 13517 Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm): Service and Repair Hood Ajar Switch - Installation SWITCH 1. Position the hood ajar switch (2) near the hole in the mounting bracket (3) on the right front load beam (6). 2. Route the jumper wire harness connector (5) through the switch mounting bracket and reconnect it to the switch connector receptacle. 3. From the top of the mounting bracket, press the switch downward into the mounting hole until the integral switch latch tabs lock it into place. 4. Reconnect the battery negative cable. 5. Close and latch the hood. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Exterior Moulding / Trim > Body Emblem > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Body Emblem: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL NAME PLATES NOTE: Mega Cab model shown in the illustration. Exterior name plates and decals for all other cab models are similar. Exterior name plate and decal usage vary by model. 1. As a guide for installation, apply a length of masking tape on the body (1), parallel to the top edge and, to one end of the name plate or decal (2) being removed. CAUTION: Do not exceed 52° C (120° F) when heating name plates, decals or body panels. Failure to follow this caution may result in damage to the name plates, decals and/or the vehicle paint finish. 2. If the temperature is below 21° C (70° F), warm the name plate or decal with a heat lamp or heat gun. NOTE: The exterior name plates are attached to the body with adhesive tape. 3. Using a trim stick C-4755 or equivalent, carefully remove the name plate or decal from the body panel, as necessary. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Exterior Moulding / Trim > Body Emblem > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 13523 Body Emblem: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION NAME PLATES NOTE: Mega Cab model shown in the illustration. Exterior name plates and decals for all other cab models are similar. Exterior name plate and decal usage vary by model. 1. Thoroughly clean all residue from the name plate or decal attachment areas of the body (1). 2. Wipe the attachment areas with a clean, lint-free cloth, moistened with a 50% solution of water and alcohol and then wipe dry the areas immediately with a dry, lint-free cloth. CAUTION: Do not exceed 52° C (120° F) when heating name plates, decals or body panels. Failure to follow this caution may result in damage to the name plates, decals and/or the vehicle paint finish. NOTE: If ambient temperatures are below 21° C (70° F), warm the name plate or decal and body panel with a heat lamp or gun to assure proper adhesion. 3. Remove the protective covering from the back of name plate or decal (2) and position the name plate or decal onto the body using the previously installed guide tape. NOTE: To ensure proper name plate or decal adhesion, apply consistent and uniform pressure of approximately 40 p.s.i. over the entire surface of each name plate or decal. 4. Install the name plate or decal onto the body. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Exterior Moulding / Trim > Cowl Moulding / Trim > System Information > Service and Repair > Removal Cowl Moulding / Trim: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL 1. Remove the wiper arms See: Wiper and Washer Systems/Wiper Arm/Service and Repair/Wiper Arms - Removal . 2. Disconnect the cowl plenum washer hose from the washer supply hose at the molded plastic in-line fitting See: Wiper and Washer Systems/Windshield Washer Hose/Description and Operation/Description . 3. Remove the cowl weather seal from the front of the dash panel and the cowl grille (2). 4. Remove the six push pin fasteners (1) that secure the front of the cowl grille to the dash panel. 5. Remove the two screws (3) that secure the rear corners of the cowl grille to the dash panel and remove the grille. 6. If necessary, remove the washer nozzles and the cowl plenum washer hose from the cowl grille See: Wiper and Washer Systems/Windshield Washer Spray Nozzle/Service and Repair/Removal . Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Exterior Moulding / Trim > Cowl Moulding / Trim > System Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 13528 Cowl Moulding / Trim: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION 1. If removed, install the washer nozzles and the cowl plenum washer hose onto the cowl grille (2) See: Wiper and Washer Systems/Windshield Washer Spray Nozzle/Service and Repair/Installation . 2. Position the cowl grille onto the dash panel. 3. Install the two screws (3) and the six push-pin fasteners (1) that secure the cowl grille to the dash panel. 4. Install the cowl weather seal onto the front of the dash panel and the cowl grille. 5. Connect the cowl plenum washer hose to the washer supply hose at the molded plastic in-line fitting See: Wiper and Washer Systems/Windshield Washer Hose/Description and Operation/Description . 6. Install the wiper arms See: Wiper and Washer Systems/Wiper Arm/Service and Repair/Wiper Arms - Installation . Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Exterior Moulding / Trim > Lower Side Moulding / Trim > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Lower Side Moulding / Trim: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL NOTE: Quad Cab model shown in the illustration. Body side moldings for Regular cab models are similar. 1. As a guide for installation, apply a length of masking tape on the rocker panels (1), parallel to the top edge and, to one end of the body side molding (2 and 3) being removed CAUTION: Do not exceed 52° C (120° F) when heating the moldings or rocker panels. Failure to follow this caution may result in damage to the moldings and/or the vehicle paint finish. 2. If the temperature is below 21° C (70° F), warm the body side moldings with a heat lamp or heat gun. NOTE: The body side moldings are attached to the cab with adhesive tape. 3. Using a trim stick C-4755 or equivalent, carefully remove the moldings from the rocker panels, as necessary. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Exterior Moulding / Trim > Lower Side Moulding / Trim > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 13533 Lower Side Moulding / Trim: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION NOTE: Quad Cab model shown in the illustration. Body side moldings for Regular cab models are similar. 1. Thoroughly clean all residue from the molding attachment areas of the rocker panels (1). 2. Wipe the attachment areas with a clean, lint-free cloth, moistened with a 50% solution of water and alcohol and then wipe dry the areas immediately with a dry, lint-free cloth. CAUTION: Do not exceed 52° C (120° F) when heating the moldings or rocker panels. Failure to follow this caution may result in damage to the moldings and/or the vehicle paint finish. NOTE: If ambient temperatures are below 21° C (70° F), warm the body side molding and rocker panel with a heat lamp or gun to assure proper adhesion. 3. Remove the protective covering from the back of the body side molding (2 and 3) and position the molding onto the rocker panel using the previously installed guide tape. NOTE: To ensure proper molding adhesion, apply consistent and uniform pressure of approximately 40 p.s.i. over the entire surface of each body side molding. 4. Install the body side molding onto the rocker panel. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Fender > Front Fender > Front Fender Liner > System Information > Service and Repair > Removal Front Fender Liner: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL 1. Open the hood and disengage any wiring or component retaining clips from the front splash shield (4) (depending on application and shield being serviced). 2. Raise and support the vehicle. 3. Remove the eight screws (3) that secure the front splash shield to the fender rail (1) and the front fender (2). 4. Disconnect the front splash shield from the support bracket located on the front bumper and remove the splash shield. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Fender > Front Fender > Front Fender Liner > System Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 13540 Front Fender Liner: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION 1. Install the front edge of the front splash shield (4) into the support bracket located on the front bumper. 2. Position the front splash shield onto the fender rail (1) and the front fender (2). 3. Install the eight screws (3) that secure the front splash shield to the fender rail and the front fender. Tighten the screws to 5 Nm (44 in. lbs.). 4. Lower the vehicle and engage any wiring or component retaining clips to the front splash shield (depending on application and shield being serviced). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Fender > Rear Fender > Rear Fender Liner > System Information > Service and Repair > Removal Rear Fender Liner: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL 1. Raise and support the vehicle. 2. Remove the three screws (2) that secure the rear splash shield (3) to the cargo box (1) and remove the splash shield. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Fender > Rear Fender > Rear Fender Liner > System Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 13546 Rear Fender Liner: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION 1. Position the rear splash shield (3) onto the cargo box (1). 2. Install the three screws (2) that secure the rear splash shield to the cargo box. Tighten the screws to 5 Nm (44 in. lbs.). 3. Lower the vehicle. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Body / Frame Mount Bushing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Body / Frame Mount Bushing: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL NOTE: Quad Cab model shown in the illustration. Body isolators for Regular cab models are similar. 1. Loosen all cab to frame mounting bolts (5) (six Regular cab, eight Quad Cab). 2. Remove the mounting bolts and rebound cushions (3) as necessary. NOTE: If servicing the rear isolators (2), remove the reinforcement plates (6) and the washers (4). 3. Using a floor jack and wooden block under the cab sill (1), lift the body to gain access to the isolators and remove the isolators as necessary. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Body / Frame Mount Bushing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 13552 Body / Frame Mount Bushing: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION CAUTION: Whenever a body isolator bolt requires servicing or tightening, it is necessary to remove the bolt and install new thread locker compound to the threads. NOTE: Quad Cab model shown in the illustration. Body isolators for Regular cab models are similar. 1. Position the isolators (2) under the cab as necessary. CAUTION: If servicing the rear isolators, install the reinforcement plates (6) and the washers (4). 2. Lower the cab onto the isolators and install the mounting bolts (5) and rebound cushions (3) as necessary (six Regular cab, eight Quad Cab). 3. Tighten the mounting bolts to 81 Nm (60 ft. lbs.). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Cross-Member > Front Cross-Member > System Information > Service and Repair > Front Crossmember - Removal Front Cross-Member: Service and Repair Front Crossmember - Removal REMOVAL 1. Raise and support the vehicle See: Maintenance/Vehicle Lifting/Service and Repair . 2. Remove the front skid plate (2 - if equipped) See: Skid Plate/Service and Repair/Front Skid Plate/Removal . Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Cross-Member > Front Cross-Member > System Information > Service and Repair > Front Crossmember - Removal > Page 13558 3. On the 2WD models, remove the bolts (2) and remove the crossmember (1). 4. On the 4WD models, remove the bolts (1) and remove the crossmember (2). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Cross-Member > Front Cross-Member > System Information > Service and Repair > Front Crossmember - Removal > Page 13559 Front Cross-Member: Service and Repair Front Crossmember - Installation INSTALLATION 1. Install the crossmember (1). 2. Install the bolts (2); - On light duty 2WD vehicles, tighten the bolts to 61 Nm (45 ft. lbs.). - On heavy duty 2WD vehicles, tighten the bolts to 75 Nm (55 ft. lbs.). 3. On 4WD models, install the crossmember (2). 4. Install the bolts (1) and tighten to 102 Nm (75 ft. lbs.). 5. Install the front skid plate, if equipped (2) See: Skid Plate/Service and Repair/Front Skid Plate/Installation Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Skid Plate > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Skid Plate Skid Plate: Service and Repair Front Skid Plate Removal REMOVAL 1. Raise and support the vehicle See: Maintenance/Vehicle Lifting/Service and Repair . 2. Remove the bolts (3). 3. Slide skid plate (2) back off of the crossmember (1) and remove. Installation INSTALLATION Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Skid Plate > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Skid Plate > Page 13564 1. Snap the rear tabs over the front crossmember (1) and install the skid plate (2). 2. Install the bolts (3) and tighten to 34 Nm (25 ft. lbs.). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Skid Plate > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Skid Plate > Page 13565 Skid Plate: Service and Repair Transfer Case Skid Plate Removal REMOVAL 1. Raise and support the vehicle See: Maintenance/Vehicle Lifting/Service and Repair . 2. Support the skid plate (3) and remove the bolts (4). 3. Remove the skid plate (3). 4. Support the skid plate crossmember (2) and remove the bolts (1). 5. Remove the skid plate crossmember (2). Installation INSTALLATION Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Skid Plate > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Skid Plate > Page 13566 1. Install the skid plate crossmember (2) and bolts (1). 2. Tighten the bolts (1) to 34 Nm (25 ft. lbs.). 3. Install the skid plate (3) and bolts (4). 4. Tighten the bolts (4) to 34 Nm (25 ft. lbs.). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Trailer Hitch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Trailer Hitch: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL 1. Remove the rear bumper See: Bumper/Rear Bumper/Service and Repair/Removal . 2. On Light Duty Vehicles , remove the hitch bolts (7) 3. On Heavy Duty Vehicles , remove the hitch bolts (8) Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Trailer Hitch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 13571 4. Disconnect all wire harness support push pins. 5. Remove the rear two cargo box bolts (3) and loosen the remaining bolts See: Truck Bed/Service and Repair/Cargo Box - Removal . 6. Using a suitable lifting device, lift and support the rear of the cargo box and remove the hitch. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Trailer Hitch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 13572 Trailer Hitch: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION 1. On Light Duty Vehicles , install the hitch (5) onto the frame rails and make sure the locators (1 and 2) on the inside of the hitch brackets are engaged with the holes in the top of the frame rails properly. 2. Install the hitch bolts (7) and tighten to 170 Nm (125 ft. lbs.). 3. Connect all wire harness support push pins. 4. On Heavy Duty Vehicles , install the hitch (5) onto the frame rails and make sure the locators (1 and 2) on the inside of the hitch brackets are engaged with the holes in the top of the frame rails properly. 5. Install the hitch bolts (8) and tighten to 170 Nm (125 ft. lbs.). 6. Connect all wire harness support push pins. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Trailer Hitch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 13573 7. Lower the cargo box and install the rear bolts (3) See: Truck Bed/Service and Repair/Cargo Box - Installation . 8. Install the rear bumper See: Bumper/Rear Bumper/Service and Repair/Installation . Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Grille > Component Information > Service and Repair > Grille Frame Grille: Service and Repair Grille Frame Removal REMOVAL 1. Remove the grille See: Grille - Removal . 2. Remove the six screws (3) that secure the grille frame (2) to the hood (1) and remove the frame. Installation INSTALLATION 1. Position the grille frame (2) onto the hood (1). 2. Install the six screws (3) that secure the grille frame to the hood. Tighten the screws to 5 Nm (44 in. lbs.). 3. Install the grille See: Grille Installation . Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Grille > Component Information > Service and Repair > Grille Frame > Page 13578 Grille: Service and Repair Grille - Removal REMOVAL 1. Open the hood (2) and remove the six screws (5) that secure the grille (3) to the grille frame (4). 2. Remove the six nuts (1) that secure the grille to the hood and remove the grille. 3. If required, remove the grille frame from the hood See: Grille Frame/Removal . Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Grille > Component Information > Service and Repair > Grille Frame > Page 13579 Grille: Service and Repair Grille - Installation INSTALLATION 1. If removed, install the grille frame (4) See: Grille Frame/Installation . 2. Position and align the grille (3) onto the hood (2) 3. Install the six nuts (1) that secure the grille to the hood. Tighten the nuts to 5 Nm (44 in. lbs.). 4. Install the six screws (5) that secure the grille to the grille frame. Tighten the screws to 2.2 Nm (20 in. lbs.). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Carpet > Component Information > Service and Repair > Carpet - Removal Carpet: Service and Repair Carpet - Removal REMOVAL NOTE: Carpet for Quad Cab model shown. Regular cab similar. 1. Remove the front seats See: Seats/Service and Repair/Seat - Removal . 2. If equipped, remove the floor console See: Console/Service and Repair/Floor Console - Removal . 3. If equipped, remove the three bolts (1) that secure the rear storage compartment (2) to the floor panel (3) and remove the storage compartment from the rear trim panel (4). 4. On Quad Cab models, remove the rear seats (1) See: Seats/Service and Repair/Seat - Removal . 5. On Quad Cab models, remove the rear cup holder (2) using a trim stick C-4755 or equivalent. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Carpet > Component Information > Service and Repair > Carpet - Removal > Page 13585 6. Remove the lower B-pillar trim panels See: Trim Panel/Service and Repair/Pillar Trim/B-Pillar Trim . 7. On Quad Cab models, remove the bolt that secures the lower seat belt anchor to the floor panel near the B-pillars See: Restraint Systems/Seat Belt Systems/Seat Belt Retractor/Service and Repair/Seat Belt and Retractor - Removal . 8. Remove the retaining screw (1) that secures the jack assembly (2) to the floor panel (3) and remove the jack assembly. 9. Remove the two bolts (4) that secure the jack assembly to the floor panel. 10. For trucks equipped with a scissor type jack, remove the bolts (1) and remove the jack (2). 11. Remove the screws and remove the load floor storage strap snaps (1). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Carpet > Component Information > Service and Repair > Carpet - Removal > Page 13586 12. On Quad Cab models, remove the eleven push-pin fasteners (1) that secure the rear of the carpet (2) to the floor panel (3). 13. Remove the carpet from the vehicle. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Carpet > Component Information > Service and Repair > Carpet - Removal > Page 13587 Carpet: Service and Repair Carpet - Installation INSTALLATION NOTE: Carpet for Quad Cab model shown. Regular cab similar. 1. Position the carpet (2) into the vehicle. 2. On Quad Cab models, install the eleven push-pin fasteners (1) that secure the carpet to the floor panel (3). 3. Install the load floor storage snaps and screws (1). 4. On trucks equipped with a scissor jack, install the jack and install the bolts (1). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Carpet > Component Information > Service and Repair > Carpet - Removal > Page 13588 5. Install the two bolts (4) that secure the jack assembly (2) to the floor panel (3). 6. Position the jack assembly onto the two bolts and install the retaining screw (1). Tighten the screw securely. 7. On Quad Cab models, install the bolt that secures the lower seat belt anchors the floor panel near the B-pillars See: Restraint Systems/Seat Belt Systems/Seat Belt Retractor/Service and Repair/Seat Belt and Retractor - Installation . Tighten the bolt to 40 Nm (30 ft. lbs.). 8. Install the lower B-pillar trim panels See: Trim Panel/Service and Repair/Pillar Trim/B-Pillar Trim . 9. On Quad Cab models, install the rear seat (1) See: Seats/Service and Repair/Seat - Installation . 10. On Quad Cab models, install the rear cup holder (2). 11. If equipped, position the rear storage compartment (2) onto the rear cab trim panel (4) and install the three bolts (1). Tighten the bolts to 6 Nm (55 in. lbs.). 12. If equipped, install the floor console See: Console/Service and Repair/Floor Console Installation . 13. Install the front seats See: Seats/Service and Repair/Seat - Installation . Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Console > Console Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams Console Lamp: Diagrams Component ID: 160 Component : LAMP-CENTER CONSOLE Connector: Name : LAMP-CENTER CONSOLE Color : # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (LOWER BUCKET) Gender : FEMALE Pin Circuit Description 1 Z939 18BK GROUND 2 M228 18YL/LB GLOVE BOX LAMP DRIVER Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Drink Holders > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Drink Holders: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL 1. If equipped, remove the floor console, See: Console/Service and Repair/Floor Console Removal . 2. Remove the bezel (2). 3. Remove the screws (2) and remove the cup holder (1). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Drink Holders > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 13597 Drink Holders: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION 1. Position the cup holder (2) onto the clips (1) and seat fully. 2. Install the screws (2). 3. Position the bezel and seat the clips fully. 4. Install the floor console if necessary, See: Console/Service and Repair/Floor Console - Installation . Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Glove Compartment > Component Information > Service and Repair > Glove Box Door Latch - Removal Glove Compartment: Service and Repair Glove Box Door Latch - Removal REMOVAL 1. Remove the glove box and place it on a workbench See: Instrument Panel Glove Box - Removal . 2. Remove the 15 screws (1) that secure the glove box bin (2) and the inner glove box door panel (3) to the outer glove box door panel (4). 3. Remove the glove box bin and the inner glove box door panel from the outer glove box door panel. 4. Remove the two screws (1) that secure the glove box latch (2) to the outer glove box door panel (3) and remove the latch. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Glove Compartment > Component Information > Service and Repair > Glove Box Door Latch - Removal > Page 13602 Glove Compartment: Service and Repair Glove Box Door Latch - Installation INSTALLATION 1. Position the glove box latch (2) into the outer glove box door panel (3). 2. Install the two screws (1) that secure the glove box latch to the outer glove box door panel. Tighten the screws to 2 Nm (17 in. lbs.). 3. Position the inner glove box door panel (3) and the glove box bin (2) onto the outer glove box door panel (4). 4. Install the fifteen screws (1) that secure the inner glove box door panel and the glove box bin to the outer glove box door panel. Tighten the screws to 2 Nm (17 in. lbs.). 5. Install the glove box See: Instrument Panel Glove Box - Installation . Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Glove Compartment > Component Information > Service and Repair > Glove Box Door Latch - Removal > Page 13603 Glove Compartment: Service and Repair Instrument Panel Glove Box - Removal REMOVAL 1. Open the glove box (1). 2. Release the two glove box stops (2) and lower the glove box downward past the stops. 3. Disengage the glove box hinges from the instrument panel and remove the glove box. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Glove Compartment > Component Information > Service and Repair > Glove Box Door Latch - Removal > Page 13604 Glove Compartment: Service and Repair Instrument Panel Glove Box - Installation INSTALLATION 1. Engage the hinges of the glove box (1) to the instrument panel. 2. Press downward on the back edge of the glove box bin and raise the glove box past the two stops (2). 3. Close the glove box. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Headliner > Component Information > Service and Repair > Headliner - Removal Headliner: Service and Repair Headliner - Removal REMOVAL NOTE: Headliner for Quad Cab model shown. Regular cab similar. 1. On Mega Cab models, remove the front seats, See: Seats/Service and Repair/Seat - Removal . 2. Remove the A-pillar trim panels See: Passenger Assist Handle/Service and Repair/A-Pillar Trim/Grab Handle/Removal . 3. Remove the upper B-pillar trim panels See: Trim Panel/Service and Repair/Pillar Trim/B-Pillar Trim . 4. On Quad Cab models, remove the upper C-pillar trim panels See: Trim Panel/Service and Repair/Pillar Trim/C-Pillar Trim Panel-Removal . 5. Disconnect the wire harness connector (1) located at the left A-pillar from the headliner wire harness (2). 6. Disconnect the headliner wire harness connector (3) from the inside rear view mirror. 7. Remove the overhead console See: Console/Service and Repair/Overhead Console/Removal . 8. Remove the sun visors (4) See: Sun Visor/Service and Repair/Sun Visor - Removal . 9. Remove the sun visor supports (5) See: Sun Visor/Service and Repair/Sun Visor Support - Removal . 10. Remove the dome lamp (6) See: Lighting and Horns/Dome Lamp/Service and Repair/Dome Lamp - Removal . 11. Remove the two coat hooks (7) See: Trim Panel/Service and Repair/Coat Hook - Removal . 12. Lower the rear of the headliner (9) downward from the roof panel (10) and disconnect the headliner wire harness connector (8) from the center high mounted stop lamp. 13. Lower the front of the headliner downward and remove the headliner through the passenger door opening. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Headliner > Component Information > Service and Repair > Headliner - Removal > Page 13609 Headliner: Service and Repair Headliner - Installation INSTALLATION NOTE: Headliner for Quad Cab model shown. Regular cab similar. 1. Position the headliner (9) into the vehicle through the passenger door opening. 2. Connect the headliner wire harness connector (8) to the center high mounted stop lamp. 3. Raise the rear of the headliner upward and install the two coat hooks (7) See: Trim Panel/Service and Repair/Coat Hook - Installation . 4. Raise the front of the headliner upward and install the sun visor supports (5) See: Sun Visor/Service and Repair/Sun Visor Support - Installation . 5. Install the sun visors (4) See: Sun Visor/Service and Repair/Sun Visor - Installation . 6. Install the dome lamp (6) See: Lighting and Horns/Dome Lamp/Service and Repair/Dome Lamp - Installation . 7. Install the overhead console See: Console/Service and Repair/Overhead Console/Installation . 8. Connect the headliner wire harness connector (3) to the inside rear view mirror 9. Connect the headliner wire harness (2) to the wire harness connector (1) located at the left A-pillar. 10. On Quad Cab models, install the upper C-pillar trim panel See: Trim Panel/Service and Repair/Pillar Trim/C-Pillar Trim Panel-Installation . 11. Install the upper B-pillar trim panels See: Trim Panel/Service and Repair/Pillar Trim/B-Pillar Trim . 12. Install the upper A-pillar trim panels. See: Passenger Assist Handle/Service and Repair/A-Pillar Trim/Grab Handle/Installation . 13. On Mega Cab models, install the front seats, See: Seats/Service and Repair/Seat - Installation . Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Passenger Assist Handle > Component Information > Service and Repair > A-Pillar Trim/Grab Handle Passenger Assist Handle: Service and Repair A-Pillar Trim/Grab Handle Removal REMOVAL 1. Using a small flat-bladed tool, carefully open the two fastener covers (3) located in the a-pillar trim panel (2). 2. Remove the two bolts (4) that secure the a-pillar trim panel to the a-pillar (1) and remove the trim panel. Installation INSTALLATION 1. Position the locating tab of the A-pillar trim panel (2) into the slot located in the top of the instrument panel. 2. Install the A-pillar trim panel onto the A-pillar (1) and install the two bolts (4). Tighten the bolts to 6 Nm (55 in. lbs.). 3. Close the two fastener covers (3) located in the A-pillar trim panel. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Passenger Assist Handle > Component Information > Service and Repair > A-Pillar Trim/Grab Handle > Page 13614 Passenger Assist Handle: Service and Repair B-Pillar Grab Handle Removal REMOVAL 1. Using a small flat-bladed tool, carefully open the two fastener covers (2) located on the grab handle (1). 2. Remove the two bolts (3) that secure the grab handle to the B-pillar and remove the grab handle. Installation INSTALLATION 1. Install the grab handle (1) onto the B-pillar and install the two bolts (3). Tighten the bolts to 6 Nm (55 in. lbs.). 2. Close the two fastener covers (2) located on the grab handle. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Scuff Plate > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Scuff Plate: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL 1. Using a trim stick C-4755 or equivalent, disengage the retaining tabs of the sill trim panel (1) from the retainer clips in the rear door sill (2) and remove the trim panel. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Scuff Plate > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 13619 Scuff Plate: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION 1. Position the sill trim panel (1) onto the rear door sill (2). 2. Engage the retaining tabs that secure the sill trim panel to the rear door sill. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Sun Visor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Sun Visor - Removal Sun Visor: Service and Repair Sun Visor - Removal REMOVAL 1. Remove the three screws (1) that secure each sun visor (2) to the roof panel and remove the visor from the headliner (3). 2. If equipped, disconnect the wire harness connector for the illuminated vanity mirror (4). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Sun Visor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Sun Visor - Removal > Page 13624 Sun Visor: Service and Repair Sun Visor - Installation INSTALLATION 1. If equipped, connect the wire harness connector for the illuminated vanity mirror (4). 2. Position the sun visor (2) onto the headliner (3). 3. Install the three screws (1) that secure each sun visor to the roof panel. Tighten the screws to 2.2 Nm (20 in. lbs.). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Sun Visor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Sun Visor - Removal > Page 13625 Sun Visor: Service and Repair Sun Visor Support - Removal REMOVAL 1. Using a trim stick C-4755 or equivalent, disengage the release clip (3) as shown and remove the sun visor support (1) from the headliner (2) Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Sun Visor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Sun Visor - Removal > Page 13626 Sun Visor: Service and Repair Sun Visor Support - Installation INSTALLATION 1. Position the sun visor support (1) through the headliner (2) and fully seat the base of the support to the roof panel. 2. Engage the release clip (3). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Trim Panel > Component Information > Service and Repair > Coat Hook - Removal Trim Panel: Service and Repair Coat Hook - Removal REMOVAL 1. Using a trim stick C-4755 or equivalent, disengage the release clip (2) as shown and remove the coat hook (1) from the headliner (3) Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Trim Panel > Component Information > Service and Repair > Coat Hook - Removal > Page 13631 Trim Panel: Service and Repair Coat Hook - Installation INSTALLATION 1. Position the coat hook (1) through the headliner (3) and fully seat the base of the support to the roof panel. 2. Engage the release clip (2). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Trim Panel > Component Information > Service and Repair > Coat Hook - Removal > Page 13632 Trim Panel: Service and Repair Cowl Trim Cowl Trim - Removal REMOVAL 1. Using a trim stick C-4755 or equivalent, disengage the retaining tabs of the cowl trim panel (1) from the retainer clips (2) in the door sill (3). 2. Pull the cowl trim panel rearward and remove it from the vehicle. Cowl Trim - Installation INSTALLATION 1. Position the cowl trim panel (1) onto the door sill (3). 2. Push the cowl trim panel forward and then engage the retaining tabs that secure the sill trim panel to the rear door sill. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Trim Panel > Component Information > Service and Repair > Coat Hook - Removal > Page 13633 Trim Panel: Service and Repair Front Door Trim Panel Front Door Trim Panel - Removal REMOVAL 1. Remove the screw (1) that secures the interior door handle (2) to the interior door handle actuator (3). 2. Remove the interior door handle from the interior door handle actuator. 3. If equipped, remove the manual window crank (1) using a window crank removal tool (2). 4. Remove the two screws (2) that secure the door trim panel (3) to the two screw inserts (1). 5. Remove the two screws (4) that secure the door trim panel to the bottom of the door. CAUTION: The door trim panel is attached to the door by molded plastic retaining clips that are integral to the door trim panel. Do not pull the door trim panel directly off of the door or damage to the trim panel and/or the power switch assembly will occur. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Trim Panel > Component Information > Service and Repair > Coat Hook - Removal > Page 13634 6. Lift the door trim panel straight upward to disconnect the molded plastic retaining clips (5) from the door. 7. If equipped, disconnect the door wire harness from the power door switch assembly and remove the door trim panel. Front Door Trim Panel - Installation INSTALLATION 1. If equipped, connect the door wire harness to the power door switch assembly. CAUTION: The door trim panel is attached to the door by molded plastic retaining clips that are integral to the door trim panel. Do not force the door trim panel onto the door or damage to the trim panel and/or the power switch assembly will occur. 2. Position the door trim panel (3) and align the molded plastic retaining clips (5) to the door. 3. Push the door trim panel straight downward until all of the retaining clips are fully engaged to the door. 4. Install the two screws (2) that secure the door trim panel to the two screw inserts (1). 5. Install the two screws (4) that secure the door trim panel to the bottom of the door. 6. If equipped, install the manual window crank. 7. Position the interior door handle (2) onto the interior door handle actuator (3). 8. Install the screw (1) that secures the interior door handle to the interior door handle actuator. Tighten the screw securely. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Trim Panel > Component Information > Service and Repair > Coat Hook - Removal > Page 13635 Trim Panel: Service and Repair Coat Hook - Removal REMOVAL 1. Using a trim stick C-4755 or equivalent, disengage the release clip (2) as shown and remove the coat hook (1) from the headliner (3) Coat Hook - Installation INSTALLATION 1. Position the coat hook (1) through the headliner (3) and fully seat the base of the support to the roof panel. 2. Engage the release clip (2). Cowl Trim - Removal REMOVAL Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Trim Panel > Component Information > Service and Repair > Coat Hook - Removal > Page 13636 1. Using a trim stick C-4755 or equivalent, disengage the retaining tabs of the cowl trim panel (1) from the retainer clips (2) in the door sill (3). 2. Pull the cowl trim panel rearward and remove it from the vehicle. Cowl Trim - Installation INSTALLATION 1. Position the cowl trim panel (1) onto the door sill (3). 2. Push the cowl trim panel forward and then engage the retaining tabs that secure the sill trim panel to the rear door sill. Front Door Trim Panel - Removal REMOVAL Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Trim Panel > Component Information > Service and Repair > Coat Hook - Removal > Page 13637 1. Remove the screw (1) that secures the interior door handle (2) to the interior door handle actuator (3). 2. Remove the interior door handle from the interior door handle actuator. 3. If equipped, remove the manual window crank (1) using a window crank removal tool (2). 4. Remove the two screws (2) that secure the door trim panel (3) to the two screw inserts (1). 5. Remove the two screws (4) that secure the door trim panel to the bottom of the door. CAUTION: The door trim panel is attached to the door by molded plastic retaining clips that are integral to the door trim panel. Do not pull the door trim panel directly off of the door or damage to the trim panel and/or the power switch assembly will occur. 6. Lift the door trim panel straight upward to disconnect the molded plastic retaining clips (5) from the door. 7. If equipped, disconnect the door wire harness from the power door switch assembly and remove the door trim panel. Front Door Trim Panel - Installation INSTALLATION Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Trim Panel > Component Information > Service and Repair > Coat Hook - Removal > Page 13638 1. If equipped, connect the door wire harness to the power door switch assembly. CAUTION: The door trim panel is attached to the door by molded plastic retaining clips that are integral to the door trim panel. Do not force the door trim panel onto the door or damage to the trim panel and/or the power switch assembly will occur. 2. Position the door trim panel (3) and align the molded plastic retaining clips (5) to the door. 3. Push the door trim panel straight downward until all of the retaining clips are fully engaged to the door. 4. Install the two screws (2) that secure the door trim panel to the two screw inserts (1). 5. Install the two screws (4) that secure the door trim panel to the bottom of the door. 6. If equipped, install the manual window crank. 7. Position the interior door handle (2) onto the interior door handle actuator (3). 8. Install the screw (1) that secures the interior door handle to the interior door handle actuator. Tighten the screw securely. Load Floor - Removal REMOVAL 1. Move the rear seat cushion (1) to the up position. 2. Remove the two nuts (2) that secure the rear of the load floor (3) to the floor panel. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Trim Panel > Component Information > Service and Repair > Coat Hook - Removal > Page 13639 3. Move the load floor (2) to the up position. 4. Remove the two bolts (3) that secure the load floor to the floor panel (1) and remove the load floor. 5. If required, remove the support cylinder (4) See: Load Floor - Removal . Load Floor - Installation INSTALLATION 1. If removed, install the load floor support cylinder (4) See: Load Floor - Installation . 2. Position the load floor (2) into the vehicle and install the two bolts (3) that secure it to the floor panel (1). Tighten the bolts to 40 Nm (30 ft. lbs.). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Trim Panel > Component Information > Service and Repair > Coat Hook - Removal > Page 13640 3. Move the load floor (3) to the down position and install the two nuts (2) that secure the load floor to the floor panel. Tighten the nuts to 25 Nm (18 ft. lbs.). 4. Move the rear seat cushion (1) to the down position. Removal REMOVAL 1. Using a small flat-bladed tool, carefully open the two fastener covers (3) located in the a-pillar trim panel (2). 2. Remove the two bolts (4) that secure the a-pillar trim panel to the a-pillar (1) and remove the trim panel. Installation INSTALLATION Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Trim Panel > Component Information > Service and Repair > Coat Hook - Removal > Page 13641 1. Position the locating tab of the A-pillar trim panel (2) into the slot located in the top of the instrument panel. 2. Install the A-pillar trim panel onto the A-pillar (1) and install the two bolts (4). Tighten the bolts to 6 Nm (55 in. lbs.). 3. Close the two fastener covers (3) located in the A-pillar trim panel. Removal REMOVAL REGULAR CAB 1. Remove the cowl trim panel See: Cowl Trim/Cowl Trim - Removal . 2. Remove the upper B-pillar trim panel See: Pillar Trim/B-Pillar Trim . 3. Remove the bolt (2) that secures the seat belt (1) to the bottom of the B-pillar (4) and position the seat belt out of the way. 4. Using a trim stick C-4755 or equivalent, disengage the retaining tabs that secure the lower B-pillar trim panel (3) to the B-pillar. 5. Remove the seat belt from the lower B-pillar trim panel through the slot provided and remove the trim panel. QUAD CAB Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Trim Panel > Component Information > Service and Repair > Coat Hook - Removal > Page 13642 6. Remove the cowl trim panel See: Cowl Trim/Cowl Trim - Removal . 7. Remove the rear door sill trim cover See: Scuff Plate/Service and Repair/Removal . 8. Remove the upper B-pillar trim panel See: Pillar Trim/B-Pillar Trim . 9. Using a trim stick C-4755 or equivalent, disengage the retaining tabs that secure the lower B-pillar trim panel (1) to the B-pillar (2). 10. Remove the seat belt (3) from the lower B-pillar trim panel through the slot provided and remove the trim panel. Installation INSTALLATION REGULAR CAB 1. Route the seat belt (1) through the slot in the lower B-pillar trim panel (3) and position the trim panel to the B-pillar (4). 2. Engage the retaining tabs that secure the lower B-pillar trim panel to the B-pillar. 3. Install the bolt (2) that secures the seat belt to the bottom of the B-pillar. Tighten the bolt to 40 Nm (30 ft. lbs.). 4. Install the upper B-pillar trim panel See: Pillar Trim/B-Pillar Trim . 5. Install the cowl trim panel See: Cowl Trim/Cowl Trim - Installation . QUAD CAB Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Trim Panel > Component Information > Service and Repair > Coat Hook - Removal > Page 13643 6. Route the seat belt (3) through the slot in the lower B-pillar trim panel (1) and position the trim panel to the B-pillar (2). 7. Engage the retaining tabs that secure the lower B-pillar trim panel to the B-pillar. 8. Install the upper B-pillar trim panel See: Pillar Trim/B-Pillar Trim . 9. Install the rear door sill trim cover See: Scuff Plate/Service and Repair/Installation . 10. Install the cowl trim panel See: Cowl Trim/Cowl Trim - Installation . Removal REMOVAL REGULAR CAB 1. Remove the cap (1) and then the bolt (2) that secures the seat belt (3) to the top of the B-pillar (4) and position the seat belt out of the way. 2. Using a trim stick C-4755 or equivalent, disengage the retaining tabs that secure the upper B-pillar trim panel (5) to the B-pillar and remove the trim panel. QUAD CAB Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Trim Panel > Component Information > Service and Repair > Coat Hook - Removal > Page 13644 3. Using a small flat-bladed tool, carefully open the two fastener covers (2) located on the grab handle (1). 4. Remove the two bolts (3) that secure the grab handle to the B-pillar and remove the grab handle. 5. Remove the cap (1) and the bolt (2) that secures the seat belt (3) to the top of the B-pillar (4) and position the seat belt out of the way. 6. Using a trim stick C-4755 or equivalent, disengage the retaining tabs that secure the upper B-pillar trim panel (5) to the B-pillar and remove the trim panel. Installation INSTALLATION REGULAR CAB Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Trim Panel > Component Information > Service and Repair > Coat Hook - Removal > Page 13645 1. Position the upper B-pillar trim panel (5) to the B-pillar (4). 2. Engage the retaining tabs that secure the upper B-pillar trim panel to the B-pillar. 3. Install the bolt (2) that secures the seat belt (3) to the top of the B-pillar. Tighten the bolt to 40 Nm (30 ft. lbs.). 4. Install the cap (1) onto the seat belt. QUAD CAB 5. Position the upper B-pillar trim panel (5) to the B-pillar (4). 6. Engage the retaining tabs that secure the upper B-pillar trim panel to the B-pillar. 7. Install the bolt (2) that secures the seat belt (3) to the top of the B-pillar. Tighten the bolt to 40 Nm (30 ft. lbs.). 8. Install the cap (1) onto the seat belt. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Trim Panel > Component Information > Service and Repair > Coat Hook - Removal > Page 13646 9. Install the grab handle (1) onto the B-pillar and install the two bolts (3). Tighten the bolts to 6 Nm (55 in. lbs.). 10. Close the two fastener covers (2) located on the grab handle. Lower REMOVAL 1. Remove the upper C-pillar trim panel See: Pillar Trim/C-Pillar Trim Panel-Removal . 2. Remove the bolt (3) that secures the seat belt (2) to the bottom of the C-pillar (4) and position the seat belt out of the way. 3. Using a trim stick C-4755 or equivalent, disengage the retaining tabs that secure the lower C-pillar trim panel (1) to the C-pillar. 4. Remove the seat belt from the lower C-pillar trim panel through the slot provided and remove the trim panel. Upper REMOVAL 1. Remove the cap (1) and then the bolt (2) that secures the seat belt (3) to the top of the C-pillar (4) and position the seat belt out of the way. 2. Using a trim stick C-4755 or equivalent, disengage the retaining tabs that secure the upper C-pillar trim panel (5) to the C-pillar and remove the trim panel. Lower INSTALLATION Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Trim Panel > Component Information > Service and Repair > Coat Hook - Removal > Page 13647 1. Route the seat belt (2) through the slot in the lower C-pillar trim panel (1) and position the trim panel to the C-pillar (4). 2. Engage the retaining tabs that secure the lower C-pillar trim panel to the C-pillar. 3. Install the bolt (3) that secures the seat belt to the bottom of the C-pillar. Tighten the bolt to 40 Nm (30 ft. lbs.). 4. Install the upper C-pillar trim panel See: Pillar Trim/C-Pillar Trim Panel-Installation . Upper INSTALLATION 1. Position the upper C-pillar trim panel (5) to the C-pillar (4). 2. Engage the retaining tabs that secure the upper C-pillar trim panel to the C-pillar. 3. Install the bolt (2) that secures the seat belt (3) to the top of the C-pillar. Tighten the bolt to 40 Nm (30 ft. lbs.). 4. Install the cap (1) onto the seat belt. Removal REMOVAL Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Trim Panel > Component Information > Service and Repair > Coat Hook - Removal > Page 13648 1. If equipped, remove the three bolts (1) that secure the rear storage compartment (2) to the floor panel (3) and remove the storage compartment from the rear cab trim panel (4). 2. If equipped, using a trim stick C-4755 or equivalent, disengage the latch (4) for the utility hook cover (3) and open the cover to gain access to the screw (1) that secures the utility hook (2) to the rear cab back panel. 3. On Regular cab models, remove the lower B-pillar trim panels See: Pillar Trim/B-Pillar Trim . 4. On Regular cab models, remove the utility hook (3) or the storage bin latch (4) (depending on application) from the rear cab trim panel (1) and remove the trim panel. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Trim Panel > Component Information > Service and Repair > Coat Hook - Removal > Page 13649 5. On Quad Cab models, remove the child seat tether straps from the rear cab back panel (2) See: Restraint Systems/Seat Belt Systems/Child Restraint/Child Seat Tether Attachment/Service and Repair/Removal . 6. On Quad Cab models, remove the center seat belt trim bezel See: Restraint Systems/Seat Belt Systems/Seat Belt Retractor/Service and Repair/Seat Belt and Retractor - Removal . 7. On Quad Cab models, remove the lower C-pillar trim panels See: Pillar Trim/C-Pillar Trim Panel-Removal . 8. On Quad Cab models, remove the two push-pin fasteners (1 and 4) that secure the rear cab trim panel (3) to the rear cab back panel and remove the trim panel. Installation INSTALLATION 1. On Quad Cab models, position the rear cab trim panel (3) onto the rear cab back panel (2) and install the two push-pin fasteners (1 and 4). 2. On Quad Cab models, install the lower C-pillar trim panels See: Pillar Trim/C-Pillar Trim Panel-Installation . 3. On Quad Cab models, install the center seat belt trim bezel See: Restraint Systems/Seat Belt Systems/Seat Belt Retractor/Service and Repair/Seat Belt and Retractor - Installation 4. On Quad Cab models, install the child seat tether straps See: Restraint Systems/Seat Belt Systems/Child Restraint/Child Seat Tether Attachment/Service and Repair/Installation . 5. On Regular cab models, position the rear cab trim panel (1) onto the rear cab back panel (2) and install the utility hook (3) or the storage bin latch (4) (depending on application). 6. On Regular cab models, install the lower B-pillar trim panels See: Pillar Trim/B-Pillar Trim . Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Trim Panel > Component Information > Service and Repair > Coat Hook - Removal > Page 13650 7. If equipped, position the rear storage compartment (2) onto the rear cab trim panel (4) and install the three bolts (1). Tighten the bolts to 6 Nm (55 in. lbs.). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Utility Storage Compartment > Component Information > Service and Repair > Under Seat Storage Bin Lid - Removal Utility Storage Compartment: Service and Repair Under Seat Storage Bin Lid - Removal REMOVAL NOTE: Do not reuse the seat fasteners, always replace with new ones. 1. Open the center seat cushion/storage bin. 2. Position the seat cushion cover aside, remove the hinge bolts (2) and discard. 3. Remove the seat cushion (4). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Utility Storage Compartment > Component Information > Service and Repair > Under Seat Storage Bin Lid - Removal > Page 13655 Utility Storage Compartment: Service and Repair Under Seat Storage Bin Lid - Installation INSTALLATION NOTE: Do not reuse the seat fasteners, always replace with new ones. 1. Position the center seat cushion (4) on the hinges (3) and install new bolts (2). 2. Tighten the bolts (2) to 20 Nm (15 ft. lbs.). 3. Position the cushion cover back over the hinges. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Utility Storage Compartment > Component Information > Service and Repair > Under Seat Storage Bin Lid - Removal > Page 13656 Utility Storage Compartment: Service and Repair Under Seat Storage Bin - Removal REMOVAL 1. Remove the amplifier, if equipped. See: Accessories and Optional Equipment/Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc/Amplifier/Service and Repair/Removal 2. Remove the center seat cushion. See: Seats/Seat Cushion/Service and Repair/Center Seat Cushion - Removal 3. Remove the six screws and remove the bin. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Utility Storage Compartment > Component Information > Service and Repair > Under Seat Storage Bin Lid - Removal > Page 13657 Utility Storage Compartment: Service and Repair Under Seat Storage Bin - Installation INSTALLATION 1. Install the bin over the seat cushion hinges and install the six screws. 2. Install the center seat cushion. See: Seats/Seat Cushion/Service and Repair/Center Seat Cushion - Installation 3. Install the amplifier, if equipped. See: Accessories and Optional Equipment/Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc/Amplifier/Service and Repair/Installation Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Utility Storage Compartment > Component Information > Service and Repair > Under Seat Storage Bin Lid - Removal > Page 13658 Utility Storage Compartment: Service and Repair Under Seat Storage Bin Lid - Removal REMOVAL NOTE: Do not reuse the seat fasteners, always replace with new ones. 1. Open the center seat cushion/storage bin. 2. Position the seat cushion cover aside, remove the hinge bolts (2) and discard. 3. Remove the seat cushion (4). Under Seat Storage Bin Lid - Installation INSTALLATION NOTE: Do not reuse the seat fasteners, always replace with new ones. 1. Position the center seat cushion (4) on the hinges (3) and install new bolts (2). 2. Tighten the bolts (2) to 20 Nm (15 ft. lbs.). 3. Position the cushion cover back over the hinges. Under Seat Storage Bin - Removal REMOVAL Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Utility Storage Compartment > Component Information > Service and Repair > Under Seat Storage Bin Lid - Removal > Page 13659 1. Remove the amplifier, if equipped. See: Accessories and Optional Equipment/Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc/Amplifier/Service and Repair/Removal 2. Remove the center seat cushion. See: Seats/Seat Cushion/Service and Repair/Center Seat Cushion - Removal 3. Remove the six screws and remove the bin. Under Seat Storage Bin - Installation INSTALLATION 1. Install the bin over the seat cushion hinges and install the six screws. 2. Install the center seat cushion. See: Seats/Seat Cushion/Service and Repair/Center Seat Cushion - Installation 3. Install the amplifier, if equipped. See: Accessories and Optional Equipment/Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc/Amplifier/Service and Repair/Installation Removal REMOVAL 1. Remove the under seat storage bin. See: Under Seat Storage Bin - Removal 2. Disconnect the j-straps and remove the cover. Installation INSTALLATION 1. Install the storage bin cover and connect the j-straps. 2. Install the under seat storage bin. See: Under Seat Storage Bin - Installation Removal REMOVAL 1. Open the under seat storage bin. 2. Remove the two screws and remove the latch assembly. Installation INSTALLATION 1. Install the latch assembly and install the screws. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Door Locks > Door Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Door Lock Cylinder: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL 1. Remove the exterior door handle (1) See: Doors, Hood and Trunk/Doors/Front Door/Front Door Handle/Front Door Exterior Handle/Service and Repair/Front Door Exterior Handle - Removal . 2. Remove the clip (3) that secures the lock cylinder lever (5) and the electric lock switch (4), if equipped, to the door lock cylinder (6). 3. Remove the screw (2) that secures the door lock cylinder to the exterior handle and remove the lock cylinder. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Door Locks > Door Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 13666 Door Lock Cylinder: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION 1. Position the door lock cylinder (6) into the exterior door handle (1). 2. Install the screw (2) that secures the door lock cylinder to the exterior door handle. Tighten the screw securely. 3. Install the electric lock switch (4), if equipped, and the lock cylinder lever (5) to the door lock cylinder. 4. Install the clip (3) that secures the lock cylinder lever and the electric lock switch, if equipped, to the door lock cylinder. 5. Install the exterior door handle See: Doors, Hood and Trunk/Doors/Front Door/Front Door Handle/Front Door Exterior Handle/Service and Repair/Front Door Exterior Handle - Installation . Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Module > Component Information > Locations Keyless Entry Module: Locations Component ID: 213 Component : MODULE-SENTRY KEY REMOTE ENTRY/WCM Connector: Name : MODULE-SENTRY KEY REMOTE ENTRY/WCM Color : BLACK # of pins : 8 Pin Circuit Description 1 G20 20VT/BR IGNITION SWITCH SENSE 2 D508 20WT/GY COM-LIN TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR LAN 3 F20 20PK/WT FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) 4 Z109 20BK/GY GROUND 5 A114 18GY/RD FUSED B(+) 6 D55 20WT/OR CAN B BUS (+) 7 D54 20WT CAN B BUS (-) 8-Component Location - 47 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 13671 Component Location - 41 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 13672 Component Location - 42 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 13673 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 13674 Keyless Entry Module: Diagrams Component ID: 213 Component : MODULE-SENTRY KEY REMOTE ENTRY/WCM Connector: Name : MODULE-SENTRY KEY REMOTE ENTRY/WCM Color : BLACK # of pins : 8 Pin Circuit Description 1 G20 20VT/BR IGNITION SWITCH SENSE 2 D508 20WT/GY COM-LIN TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR LAN 3 F20 20PK/WT FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) 4 Z109 20BK/GY GROUND 5 A114 18GY/RD FUSED B(+) 6 D55 20WT/OR CAN B BUS (+) 7 D54 20WT CAN B BUS (-) 8-Component Location - 47 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 13675 Component Location - 41 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 13676 Component Location - 42 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 13677 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Remote Keyless Entry Module Keyless Entry Module: Description and Operation Remote Keyless Entry Module Description DESCRIPTION When an RKE lock message is sent to the instrument cluster, the instrument cluster actuates the door locks, the interior lighting is turned off, the horn chirps (if this feature is enabled), the park lamps flash (if this feature is enabled) and, if the vehicle is so equipped, the Vehicle Theft Security System (VTSS) is armed. When an RKE unlock message is sent to the instrument cluster, the instrument cluster actuates the driver side front door (or all doors if this feature is enabled) unlock, the interior lighting is turned on and, if the vehicle is so equipped, the VTSS is disarmed. When an RKE panic message is sent to the instrument cluster, the instrument cluster actuates the driver side front door (or all doors if this feature is enabled) unlock, the interior lighting is turned on and, if the vehicle is so equipped, the VTSS is disarmed. The panic message will also cause the exterior lamps (including the headlights) to flash, and the horn to sound for about three minutes, or until a second panic message is sent to the instrument cluster. A vehicle speed of about 25.7 Km/h(15 mph) will also cancel the panic event. Operation OPERATION Whenever the vehicle battery power is interrupted, the Remote Keyless Module (RKE) Module will retain all vehicle access codes in its memory. When replacing or adding a key fob transmitter (maximum of 4) a scan tool is required to program the RKE Module to accept the new Vehicle Access Code if a customer owned transmitter is not available. If a functioning transmitter is available, See: Keyless Entry Transmitter/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Remote Keyless Entry Module > Page 13680 Keyless Entry Module: Description and Operation Sentry Key Remote Entry Module Description DESCRIPTION The Sentry Key REmote Entry Module (SKREEM) (1) is sometimes referred to as the Wireless Control Module (WCM). The SKREEM is the primary component of the Sentry Key Immobilizer System (SKIS). It is also the receiver for the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) system. The SKREEM is located on the right side of the steering column, near the ignition lock cylinder housing and is concealed beneath the steering column shrouds. The molded black plastic housing for the SKREEM has an integral molded plastic halo-like antenna ring (4) that extends from the bottom. When the SKREEM is properly installed on the steering column, the antenna ring is oriented around the circumference of the ignition lock cylinder housing. A single integral connector receptacle (3) is located just behind the antenna ring on the bottom of the SKREEM housing. An integral molded plastic mounting tab (2) on the rear corner of the SKREEM housing has a hole in the center through which a screw passes to secure the unit to the steering column. The SKREEM is connected to the vehicle electrical system through a single take out and connector of the instrument panel wire harness. Two SKREEM modules are used: one for vehicles equipped with RKE only, and one for vehicles equipped with RKE and SKIS. The SKREEM cannot be adjusted or repaired. If ineffective or damaged, the entire SKREEM unit must be replaced. Operation OPERATION The Sentry Key REmote Entry Module (SKREEM) (also known as the Wireless Control Module/WCM) contains a Radio Frequency (RF) transceiver and a microprocessor. The SKREEM transmits RF signals to, and receives RF signals from the Sentry Key transponder through a tuned antenna enclosed within the molded plastic antenna ring integral to the SKREEM housing. If this antenna ring is not mounted properly around the ignition lock cylinder housing, communication problems between the SKREEM and the transponder may arise. These communication problems will result in Sentry Key transponder-related faults. The SKREEM also serves as the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) RF receiver. See: Power Locks/Description and Operation/Description . The SKREEM communicates over the Controller Area Network (CAN) data bus with the ElectroMechanical Instrument Cluster (EMIC) (also known as the Cab Compartment Node/CCN), the Powertrain Control Module (PCM)/Engine Control Module (ECM) or the diagnostic scan tool. The SKREEM and the PCM/ECM both use software that includes a rolling code algorithm strategy, which helps to reduce the possibility of unauthorized Sentry Key Immobilizer System (SKIS) disarming. The rolling code algorithm ensures security by preventing an override of the SKIS through the unauthorized substitution of the SKREEM or the PCM/ECM. However, the use of this strategy also means that replacement of either the SKREEM or the PCM/ECM units will require a system initialization procedure to restore system operation. The SKREEM retains in memory the ID numbers of any Sentry Key transponder that is programmed into it. A maximum of eight Sentry Key transponders can be programmed into the SKREEM. For added system security, each SKREEM is programmed with a unique Secret Key code. This code is stored in memory, sent over the CAN data bus to the PCM or ECM, and is encoded to the transponder of every Sentry Key that is programmed into the SKREEM. Therefore, the Secret Key code is a common element that is found in every component of the SKIS. Another security code called a PIN, is used to gain access to the SKREEM Secured Access Mode. The Secured Access Mode is required during service to perform the SKIS initialization and Sentry Key transponder programming procedures. The SKREEM also stores the Vehicle Identification Number Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Remote Keyless Entry Module > Page 13681 (VIN) in its memory, which it learns through a CAN data bus message from the PCM or ECM during SKIS initialization. In the event that a SKREEM replacement is required, the Secret Key code can be transferred to the new SKREEM from the PCM or ECM using a diagnostic scan tool and the SKIS initialization procedure. Proper completion of the SKIS initialization will allow the existing Sentry Keys to be programmed into the new SKREEM so that new keys will not be required. In the event that the original Secret Key code cannot be recovered, SKREEM replacement will also require new Sentry Keys. The diagnostic scan tool will alert the technician during the SKIS initialization procedure if new Sentry Keys are required. When the ignition switch is turned to the ON position, the SKREEM transmits an RF signal to excite the transponder in the ignition key. The SKREEM then waits for an RF signal response from the transponder. If the response received identifies the key as valid, the SKREEM sends an electronic valid key message to the PCM/ECM over the CAN bus. If the response received identifies the key as invalid or if no response is received from the key transponder, the SKREEM sends an invalid key message to the PCM/ECM. The PCM/ECM will enable or disable engine operation based upon the status of the SKREEM messages. It is important to note that the default condition in the PCM or ECM is an invalid key ; therefore, if no message is received from the SKREEM by the PCM or ECM, the engine will be disabled and the vehicle immobilized after two seconds of running. The SKREEM also sends security indicator request messages to the EMIC over the CAN data bus to tell the EMIC how to operate the security indicator. The security indicator request message from the SKREEM tells the EMIC to turn the indicator ON for about three seconds each time the ignition switch is turned to the ON position as a bulb test. After completion of the bulb test, the SKREEM sends security indicator request messages to the EMIC to turn the indicator OFF, turn the indicator ON, or to flash the indicator ON and OFF. If the security indicator flashes or stays ON solid after the bulb test, it signifies a SKIS fault. If the SKREEM detects a system malfunction or the SKIS has become ineffective, the security indicator will stay ON solid. If the SKREEM detects an invalid key or if a key transponder-related fault exists, the security indicator will flash. If the vehicle is equipped with the Customer Learn transponder programming feature, the SKREEM will also send messages to the EMIC to flash the security indicator whenever the Customer Learn programming mode is being utilized. . The SKIS performs a self-test each time the ignition switch is turned to the ON position, and will store fault information in the form of a Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) in SKREEM memory if a system malfunction is detected. The hard wired circuits of the SKREEM may be diagnosed using conventional diagnostic tools and procedures. Refer to the appropriate wiring information. However, conventional diagnostic methods will not prove conclusive in the diagnosis of the SKREEM or the electronic controls or communication between other modules and devices that provide some features of the SKIS. The most reliable, efficient, and accurate means to diagnose the SKREEM or the electronic controls and communication related to SKREEM operation requires the use of a diagnostic scan tool. Refer to the appropriate diagnostic information. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 13682 Keyless Entry Module: Testing and Inspection REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY MODULE The most reliable, efficient, and accurate means to diagnose the power lock system requires the use of a scan tool and the proper Diagnostic Procedures information. Refer to the appropriate wiring information. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Remote Keyless Entry Module Keyless Entry Module: Service and Repair Remote Keyless Entry Module Removal REMOVAL See: Sentry Key Remote Entry Module/Removal Installation INSTALLATION See: Sentry Key Remote Entry Module/Installation Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Remote Keyless Entry Module > Page 13685 Keyless Entry Module: Service and Repair Sentry Key Remote Entry Module Removal REMOVAL WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury on vehicles equipped with airbags, disable the Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, airbag, seat belt tensioner, impact sensor, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the SRS. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment. 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. 2. Remove the screw (2) that secures the tilt steering column knob (1) and remove it from the tilt actuator (3) on the left side of the column. 3. From below the steering column, remove the two outboard screws that secure the upper column shroud (1) to the lower shroud (3). 4. Using hand pressure, push inward on both sides of the upper shroud above the parting line of the lower shroud to release the snap features that secure the two shroud halves to each other. 5. Remove the upper shroud from the lower shroud and the steering column. 6. Remove the one center screw that secures the lower shroud to the steering column (4). 7. Remove the lower shroud from the steering column. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Remote Keyless Entry Module > Page 13686 8. Disconnect the wire harness connector (2) from the Sentry Key REmote Entry Module (SKREEM) (1). 9. Remove the screw (3) that secures the SKREEM (1) to the steering column (2). 10. Disengage the antenna ring from around the ignition lock cylinder housing and remove the SKREEM. Installation INSTALLATION WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury on vehicles equipped with airbags, disable the Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, airbag, seat belt tensioner, impact sensor, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the SRS. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Remote Keyless Entry Module > Page 13687 1. Position the Sentry Key REmote Entry Module (SKREEM) (1) onto the steering column (2) with the antenna ring oriented around the ignition lock cylinder housing. 2. Install and tighten the screw (3) that secures the SKREEM to the steering column housing. Tighten the screw to 2 Nm (20 in. lbs.). 3. Reconnect the wire harness connector (2) to the SKREEM (1). 4. Position the lower shroud (3) onto the steering column (4). 5. From below the steering column, install and tighten the one center screw that secures the lower shroud to the steering column. Tighten the screw to 2 Nm (20 in. lbs.). 6. Position the upper shroud (1) onto the steering column over the lower shroud. On vehicles equipped with an automatic transmission, be certain to engage the gearshift lever gap hider into the opening in the right side of both shroud halves. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Remote Keyless Entry Module > Page 13688 7. Align the snap features on the upper shroud with the receptacles in the lower shroud and apply hand pressure to snap them together. 8. Install and tighten the two outboard screws that secure the upper shroud to the lower shroud. Tighten the screws to 2 Nm (20 in. lbs.). 9. Position the tilt steering column knob (1) onto the tilt adjuster actuator (3) on the left side of the steering column, then install and tighten the screw (2) to secure the knob to the actuator. Tighten the screw to 2 Nm (20 in. lbs.). 10. Reconnect the battery negative cable. NOTE: On vehicles equipped with the optional Sentry Key Immobilizer System (SKIS) if the SKREEM is replaced with a new unit, a diagnostic scan tool MUST be used to initialize the new SKREEM and to program at least two Sentry Key transponders before the vehicle can be operated. See: Accessories and Optional Equipment/Antitheft and Alarm Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Starting System > Keyless Start Antenna > Component Information > Description and Operation Keyless Start Antenna: Description and Operation DESCRIPTION The Remote Start Antenna Module Assembly consists of an electrical connection to the WCM/SKREEM (1), a length of coax cable (2), two mounting clips (3) and (4), and a control module/antenna (5). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Starting System > Keyless Start Antenna > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Keyless Start Antenna: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL The Remote Start Antenna Module Assembly consists of an electrical connection to the WCM/SKREEM (1), a length of coax cable (2), two mounting clips (3) and (4), and a control module/antenna (5). The control module (1) is located behind the instrument panel cluster. The module electrical connector plugs into the WCM/SKREEM at the right side of the steering column. 1. Disconnect and isolate negative battery cable. 2. Remove steering column trim panel (knee blocker). 3. Remove steering column shrouds. 4. Remove IP cluster bezel. 5. Remove IP cluster and its three connectors. 6. Remove two module mounting screws (2) from module (1). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Starting System > Keyless Start Antenna > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 13695 7. Using a pair of long needle hose pliers, disengage coax cable retainer clip (2) from IP. 8. Disconnect coax cable electrical connector (1) at WCM/SKREEM (2). 9. Remove remote module assembly. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Starting System > Keyless Start Antenna > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 13696 Keyless Start Antenna: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION The Remote Start Antenna Module Assembly consists of an electrical connection to the WCM/SKREEM (1), a length of coax cable (2), two mounting clips (3) and (4), and a control module/antenna (5). 1. Connect coax cable electrical connector (1) to WCM/SKREEM module (2). Route coax cable and install cable clip (2) to IP. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Starting System > Keyless Start Antenna > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 13697 2. Position module (1) and install two module mounting screws (2). 3. Install IP cluster and its three connectors. 4. Install IP cluster bezel. 5. Install steering column trim panel (knee blocker). 6. Install steering column shrouds. 7. Connect negative battery cable. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Keyless Entry Transmitter Battery > Component Information > Service and Repair Keyless Entry Transmitter Battery: Service and Repair STANDARD PROCEDURE - RKE TRANSMITTER BATTERIES NOTE: Do not disturb the metal terminal near the batteries. Avoid touching the new batteries. Skin oils may cause battery deterioration. If batteries are touched, clean with rubbing alcohol. The Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter case snaps open and shut for battery access. To replace the RKE transmitter batteries: 1. Using a thin coin, gently pry at the notch in the center seam of the RKE transmitter case halves near the key ring until the two halves unsnap. Be careful not to damage the rubber gasket when separating the case halves. 2. Lift the back half of the transmitter case off of the RKE transmitter. 3. Remove the two batteries from the RKE transmitter. 4. Replace the two batteries with new 3V lithium 2016 cell.Install the batteries with the positive terminal up. Reference the "+ SIDE UP" on the inside of the bottom half of the transmitter case. 5. Align the two RKE transmitter case halves with each other, and squeeze them firmly and evenly together until they snap back into place.Test transmitter operation. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Power Locks > Power Door Lock Actuator > Component Information > Locations > Latch-Door-Driver Power Door Lock Actuator: Locations Latch-Door-Driver Component ID: 188 Component : LATCH-DOOR-DRIVER Connector: Name : LATCH-DOOR-DRIVER Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (BASE) Pin Circuit Description 1 G75 20VT DRIVER DOOR AJAR SWITCH SENSE 2 Z917 20BK GROUND Component Location - 55 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Power Locks > Power Door Lock Actuator > Component Information > Locations > Latch-Door-Driver > Page 13707 Connector: Name : LATCH-DOOR-DRIVER Color : BLACK # of pins : 4 Qualifier : (POWER LOCKS) Pin Circuit Description 1 G75 20VT DRIVER DOOR AJAR SWITCH SENSE 2 Z917 20BK GROUND 3 P1 18TN/LG DOOR UNLOCK DRIVER LEFT FRONT 4 P393 18LG DOOR LOCK DRIVER LEFT DOORS Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Power Locks > Power Door Lock Actuator > Component Information > Locations > Latch-Door-Driver > Page 13708 Component Location - 55 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Power Locks > Power Door Lock Actuator > Component Information > Locations > Latch-Door-Driver > Page 13709 Power Door Lock Actuator: Locations Latch-Door-Left Rear Component ID: 189 Component : LATCH-DOOR-LEFT REAR Connector: Name : LATCH-DOOR-LEFT REAR Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (BASE) Pin Circuit Description 1 G77 20VT/GY LEFT REAR DOOR AJAR SWITCH SENSE 2 Z917 20BK GROUND Component Location - 57 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Power Locks > Power Door Lock Actuator > Component Information > Locations > Latch-Door-Driver > Page 13710 Connector: Name : LATCH-DOOR-LEFT REAR Color : BLACK # of pins : 4 Qualifier : (POWER LOCKS) Pin Circuit Description 1 G77 20VT/GY LEFT REAR DOOR AJAR SWITCH SENSE 2 Z917 20BK GROUND 3 P5 18TN/OR DOOR UNLOCK DRIVER LEFT REAR 4 P393 18LG DOOR LOCK DRIVER LEFT DOORS Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Power Locks > Power Door Lock Actuator > Component Information > Locations > Latch-Door-Driver > Page 13711 Component Location - 57 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Power Locks > Power Door Lock Actuator > Component Information > Locations > Latch-Door-Driver > Page 13712 Power Door Lock Actuator: Locations Latch-Door-Passenger Component ID: 190 Component : LATCH-DOOR-PASSENGER Connector: Name : LATCH-DOOR-PASSENGER Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (BASE) Pin Circuit Description 1 G74 20VT DRIVER DOOR AJAR SWITCH SENSE 2 Z917 20BK GROUND Component Location - 56 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Power Locks > Power Door Lock Actuator > Component Information > Locations > Latch-Door-Driver > Page 13713 Connector: Name : LATCH-DOOR-PASSENGER Color : BLACK # of pins : 4 Qualifier : (POWER LOCKS) Pin Circuit Description 1 G74 20VT/WT PASSENGER DOOR AJAR SWITCH SENSE 2 Z917 20BK GROUND 3 G778 18VT/LB DOOR UNLOCK DRIVER RIGHT DOORS 4 P392 18LG/DB DOOR LOCK DRIVER RIGHT DOORS Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Power Locks > Power Door Lock Actuator > Component Information > Locations > Latch-Door-Driver > Page 13714 Component Location - 56 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Power Locks > Power Door Lock Actuator > Component Information > Locations > Latch-Door-Driver > Page 13715 Power Door Lock Actuator: Locations Latch-Door-Right Rear Component ID: 191 Component : LATCH-DOOR-RIGHT REAR Connector: Name : LATCH-DOOR-RIGHT REAR Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (BASE) Pin Circuit Description 1 G76 20VT/GY RIGHT REAR DOOR AJAR SWITCH SENSE 2 Z917 20BK GROUND Component Location - 57 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Power Locks > Power Door Lock Actuator > Component Information > Locations > Latch-Door-Driver > Page 13716 Connector: Name : LATCH-DOOR-RIGHT REAR Color : BLACK # of pins : 4 Qualifier : (POWER LOCKS) Pin Circuit Description 1 G76 20VT/GY RIGHT REAR DOOR AJAR SWITCH SENSE 2 Z917 20BK GROUND 3 G778 18TN/OR DOOR UNLOCK DRIVER RIGHT DOORS 4 P392 18LG DOOR LOCK DRIVER RIGHT DOORS Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Power Locks > Power Door Lock Actuator > Component Information > Locations > Latch-Door-Driver > Page 13717 Component Location - 57 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Power Locks > Power Door Lock Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Latch-Door-Driver Power Door Lock Actuator: Diagrams Latch-Door-Driver Component ID: 188 Component : LATCH-DOOR-DRIVER Connector: Name : LATCH-DOOR-DRIVER Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (BASE) Pin Circuit Description 1 G75 20VT DRIVER DOOR AJAR SWITCH SENSE 2 Z917 20BK GROUND Component Location - 55 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Power Locks > Power Door Lock Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Latch-Door-Driver > Page 13720 Connector: Name : LATCH-DOOR-DRIVER Color : BLACK # of pins : 4 Qualifier : (POWER LOCKS) Pin Circuit Description 1 G75 20VT DRIVER DOOR AJAR SWITCH SENSE 2 Z917 20BK GROUND 3 P1 18TN/LG DOOR UNLOCK DRIVER LEFT FRONT 4 P393 18LG DOOR LOCK DRIVER LEFT DOORS Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Power Locks > Power Door Lock Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Latch-Door-Driver > Page 13721 Component Location - 55 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Power Locks > Power Door Lock Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Latch-Door-Driver > Page 13722 Power Door Lock Actuator: Diagrams Latch-Door-Left Rear Component ID: 189 Component : LATCH-DOOR-LEFT REAR Connector: Name : LATCH-DOOR-LEFT REAR Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (BASE) Pin Circuit Description 1 G77 20VT/GY LEFT REAR DOOR AJAR SWITCH SENSE 2 Z917 20BK GROUND Component Location - 57 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Power Locks > Power Door Lock Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Latch-Door-Driver > Page 13723 Connector: Name : LATCH-DOOR-LEFT REAR Color : BLACK # of pins : 4 Qualifier : (POWER LOCKS) Pin Circuit Description 1 G77 20VT/GY LEFT REAR DOOR AJAR SWITCH SENSE 2 Z917 20BK GROUND 3 P5 18TN/OR DOOR UNLOCK DRIVER LEFT REAR 4 P393 18LG DOOR LOCK DRIVER LEFT DOORS Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Power Locks > Power Door Lock Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Latch-Door-Driver > Page 13724 Component Location - 57 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Power Locks > Power Door Lock Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Latch-Door-Driver > Page 13725 Power Door Lock Actuator: Diagrams Latch-Door-Passenger Component ID: 190 Component : LATCH-DOOR-PASSENGER Connector: Name : LATCH-DOOR-PASSENGER Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (BASE) Pin Circuit Description 1 G74 20VT DRIVER DOOR AJAR SWITCH SENSE 2 Z917 20BK GROUND Component Location - 56 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Power Locks > Power Door Lock Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Latch-Door-Driver > Page 13726 Connector: Name : LATCH-DOOR-PASSENGER Color : BLACK # of pins : 4 Qualifier : (POWER LOCKS) Pin Circuit Description 1 G74 20VT/WT PASSENGER DOOR AJAR SWITCH SENSE 2 Z917 20BK GROUND 3 G778 18VT/LB DOOR UNLOCK DRIVER RIGHT DOORS 4 P392 18LG/DB DOOR LOCK DRIVER RIGHT DOORS Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Power Locks > Power Door Lock Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Latch-Door-Driver > Page 13727 Component Location - 56 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Power Locks > Power Door Lock Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Latch-Door-Driver > Page 13728 Power Door Lock Actuator: Diagrams Latch-Door-Right Rear Component ID: 191 Component : LATCH-DOOR-RIGHT REAR Connector: Name : LATCH-DOOR-RIGHT REAR Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (BASE) Pin Circuit Description 1 G76 20VT/GY RIGHT REAR DOOR AJAR SWITCH SENSE 2 Z917 20BK GROUND Component Location - 57 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Power Locks > Power Door Lock Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Latch-Door-Driver > Page 13729 Connector: Name : LATCH-DOOR-RIGHT REAR Color : BLACK # of pins : 4 Qualifier : (POWER LOCKS) Pin Circuit Description 1 G76 20VT/GY RIGHT REAR DOOR AJAR SWITCH SENSE 2 Z917 20BK GROUND 3 G778 18TN/OR DOOR UNLOCK DRIVER RIGHT DOORS 4 P392 18LG DOOR LOCK DRIVER RIGHT DOORS Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Power Locks > Power Door Lock Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Latch-Door-Driver > Page 13730 Component Location - 57 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Power Locks > Power Door Lock Actuator > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Power Door Lock Actuator: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The lock mechanisms are actuated by a reversible electric motor mounted within each door. The power lock motors are integral to the door latch units. The power lock motors cannot be adjusted or repaired and, if faulty or damaged, the door latch unit must be replaced. For replacement of the front door latch See: Doors, Hood and Trunk/Doors/Front Door/Front Door Latch/Service and Repair/Front Door Latch - Removal . For replacement of the rear door latch See: Doors, Hood and Trunk/Doors/Rear Door/Rear Door Latch/Service and Repair/Rear Door Latch - Removal . Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Power Locks > Power Door Lock Actuator > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 13733 Power Door Lock Actuator: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The door lock motors are controlled by the instrument cluster. A positive and negative battery connection to the two motor terminals will cause the motor to move in one direction. Reversing the current will cause the motor to move in the opposite direction. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Power Locks > Power Door Lock Switch > Component Information > Locations > Switch-Door Lock-Passenger Power Door Lock Switch: Locations Switch-Door Lock-Passenger Component ID: 485 Component : SWITCH-DOOR LOCK-PASSENGER Connector: Name : SWITCH-DOOR LOCK-PASSENGER Color : NATURAL # of pins : 6 Pin Circuit Description 1 G160 20VT/LG PASSENGER DOOR LOCK SWITCH MUX 2 F21 20PK/DG FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) 3-4-5 Z917 20BK GROUND 6-Component Location - 56 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Power Locks > Power Door Lock Switch > Component Information > Locations > Switch-Door Lock-Passenger > Page 13738 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Power Locks > Power Door Lock Switch > Component Information > Locations > Switch-Door Lock-Passenger > Page 13739 Power Door Lock Switch: Locations Switch-Window/Door Lock-Driver Component ID: 518 Component : SWITCH-WINDOW/DOOR LOCK-DRIVER Connector: Name : SWITCH-WINDOW/DOOR LOCK-DRIVER C1 Color : BLUE # of pins : 12 Pin Circuit Description 1 Q612 14OR/DB RIGHT REAR WINDOW DRIVER (DOWN) 2 Q412 14OR/LB RIGHT REAR WINDOW DRIVER (UP) 3 Q16 12OR/TN MASTER WINDOW SWITCH RIGHT FRONT (UP) 4 Q411 14OR/WT LEFT REAR WINDOW DRIVER (UP) 5 Q11 14OR/LG LEFT FRONT WINDOW DRIVER (UP) 6 Q26 12OR/GY MASTER WINDOW SWITCH RIGHT FRONT (DOWN) 7 G161 20VT/DG DRIVER DOOR LOCK SWITCH MUX 8 Z939 12BK GROUND 9 F30 12PK/YL FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-ACC) 10 Q611 14OR/GY LEFT REAR WINDOW DRIVER (DOWN) 11 Z939 18BK GROUND 12 Q21 14OR/WT LEFT FRONT WINDOW DRIVER (DOWN) Component Location - 55 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Power Locks > Power Door Lock Switch > Component Information > Locations > Switch-Door Lock-Passenger > Page 13740 Connector: Name : SWITCH-WINDOW/DOOR LOCK-DRIVER C2 Color : BLUE # of pins : 8 Pin Circuit Description 1 P71 20TN/DG LEFT MIRROR UP DRIVER 2 P195 18LG/YL LEFT MIRROR COMMON DRIVER (RIGHT/DOWN) 3 A940 18RD FUSED B(+) 4 P74 18TN/OR RIGHT MIRROR LEFT DRIVER 5 Z939 18BK GROUND Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Power Locks > Power Door Lock Switch > Component Information > Locations > Switch-Door Lock-Passenger > Page 13741 6 P75 20TN/LG LEFT MIRROR LEFT DRIVER 7 P72 18TN/GY RIGHT MIRROR UP DRIVER 8 Q15 12OR/LB WINDOW LOCK OUT SWITCH OUTPUT Component Location - 55 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Power Locks > Power Door Lock Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Switch-Door Lock-Passenger Power Door Lock Switch: Diagrams Switch-Door Lock-Passenger Component ID: 485 Component : SWITCH-DOOR LOCK-PASSENGER Connector: Name : SWITCH-DOOR LOCK-PASSENGER Color : NATURAL # of pins : 6 Pin Circuit Description 1 G160 20VT/LG PASSENGER DOOR LOCK SWITCH MUX 2 F21 20PK/DG FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) 3-4-5 Z917 20BK GROUND 6-Component Location - 56 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Power Locks > Power Door Lock Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Switch-Door Lock-Passenger > Page 13744 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Power Locks > Power Door Lock Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Switch-Door Lock-Passenger > Page 13745 Power Door Lock Switch: Diagrams Switch-Window/Door Lock-Driver Component ID 479 Component ID: 479 Component : SWITCH-WINDOW/DOOR LOCK-DRIVER Connector: Name : SWITCH-WINDOW/DOOR LOCK-DRIVER C1 Color : BLUE # of pins : 12 Pin Circuit Description 1 Q612 14OR/DB RIGHT REAR WINDOW DRIVER (DOWN) 2 Q412 14OR/LB RIGHT REAR WINDOW DRIVER (UP) 3 Q16 12OR/TN MASTER WINDOW SWITCH RIGHT FRONT (UP) 4 Q411 14OR/WT LEFT REAR WINDOW DRIVER (UP) 5 Q11 14OR/LG LEFT FRONT WINDOW DRIVER (UP) 6 Q26 12OR/GY MASTER WINDOW SWITCH RIGHT FRONT (DOWN) 7 G161 20VT/DG DRIVER DOOR LOCK SWITCH MUX 8 Z939 12BK GROUND 9 F30 12PK/YL FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-ACC) 10 Q611 14OR/GY LEFT REAR WINDOW DRIVER (DOWN) 11 Z939 18BK GROUND 12 Q21 14OR/WT LEFT FRONT WINDOW DRIVER (DOWN) Connector: Name : SWITCH-WINDOW/DOOR LOCK-DRIVER C2 Color : BLUE # of pins : 8 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Power Locks > Power Door Lock Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Switch-Door Lock-Passenger > Page 13746 Pin Circuit Description 1 P71 20TN/DG LEFT MIRROR UP DRIVER 2 P195 18LG/YL LEFT MIRROR COMMON DRIVER (RIGHT/DOWN) 3 A940 18RD FUSED B(+) 4 P74 18TN/OR RIGHT MIRROR LEFT DRIVER 5 Z939 18BK GROUND 6 P75 20TN/LG LEFT MIRROR LEFT DRIVER 7 P72 18TN/GY RIGHT MIRROR UP DRIVER 8 Q15 12OR/LB WINDOW LOCK OUT SWITCH OUTPUT Component ID 518 Component ID: 518 Component : SWITCH-WINDOW/DOOR LOCK-DRIVER Connector: Name : SWITCH-WINDOW/DOOR LOCK-DRIVER C1 Color : BLUE # of pins : 12 Pin Circuit Description 1 Q612 14OR/DB RIGHT REAR WINDOW DRIVER (DOWN) 2 Q412 14OR/LB RIGHT REAR WINDOW DRIVER (UP) 3 Q16 12OR/TN MASTER WINDOW SWITCH RIGHT FRONT (UP) 4 Q411 14OR/WT LEFT REAR WINDOW DRIVER (UP) 5 Q11 14OR/LG LEFT FRONT WINDOW DRIVER (UP) 6 Q26 12OR/GY MASTER WINDOW SWITCH RIGHT FRONT (DOWN) Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Power Locks > Power Door Lock Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Switch-Door Lock-Passenger > Page 13747 7 G161 20VT/DG DRIVER DOOR LOCK SWITCH MUX 8 Z939 12BK GROUND 9 F30 12PK/YL FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-ACC) 10 Q611 14OR/GY LEFT REAR WINDOW DRIVER (DOWN) 11 Z939 18BK GROUND 12 Q21 14OR/WT LEFT FRONT WINDOW DRIVER (DOWN) Component Location - 55 Connector: Name : SWITCH-WINDOW/DOOR LOCK-DRIVER C2 Color : BLUE # of pins : 8 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Power Locks > Power Door Lock Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Switch-Door Lock-Passenger > Page 13748 Pin Circuit Description 1 P71 20TN/DG LEFT MIRROR UP DRIVER 2 P195 18LG/YL LEFT MIRROR COMMON DRIVER (RIGHT/DOWN) 3 A940 18RD FUSED B(+) 4 P74 18TN/OR RIGHT MIRROR LEFT DRIVER 5 Z939 18BK GROUND 6 P75 20TN/LG LEFT MIRROR LEFT DRIVER 7 P72 18TN/GY RIGHT MIRROR UP DRIVER 8 Q15 12OR/LB WINDOW LOCK OUT SWITCH OUTPUT Component Location - 55 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Power Locks > Power Door Lock Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Switch-Door Lock-Passenger > Page 13749 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Power Locks > Power Door Lock Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Power Door Lock Switch: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION A window/lock switch is used on all models equipped with power locks, power windows, and power mirrors. The window/lock switch houses the following switches: - Power Lock Switch - A two-way, momentary, resistor multiplexed switch to control the power lock system. - Power Mirror Selector Switch - A three-position rocker switch selects the right or left power mirror for adjustment, or turns the power mirror system Off. - Power Mirror Adjustment Switches - Four momentary, arrowhead shaped, directional switches allow the driver to adjust the selected power mirror in the Up, Down, Right, or Left directions. - Power Window Lockout Switch - A two-way, latching, push-button switch allows the vehicle operator to lock out the power window switches on each passenger door so that the passenger door power windows may be operated only from the master switches. - Power Window Switches - A two-way, momentary power window switch for the driver side front door. This switch also has a second detent in the Down direction and internal circuitry to provide an Auto-Down feature for the driver side front door power window. In addition to the power window switch for its own door, there are individual master switches for each passenger door power window. The window/lock switch also incorporates several green Light-Emitting Diodes (LEDs) that illuminate the power lock and power window switch paddles, and the power mirror switch directional buttons to improve switch visibility. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Power Locks > Power Door Lock Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 13752 Power Door Lock Switch: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The window/lock switch combines a power lock switch, a driver power window switch with an Auto-down feature, master switches for each passenger door power window, a power window lockout switch, a power mirror selector switch, and four power mirror adjustment switches in a single unit. Power Lock Switch The power lock switch circuitry is connected in series between ground and the driver door switch mux input of the instrument cluster. Each power lock switch position (Lock, Unlock, and Neutral) provides a different resistance value to the instrument cluster input, which allows the instrument cluster to sense the switch position. Based upon the power lock switch input, the instrument cluster controls the battery and ground feed outputs to the individual power lock motors to lock or unlock the door latches. The Light-Emitting Diode (LED) in the power lock switch is connected to battery current through the power window circuit breaker in the Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) on a fused ignition switch output (run-acc) circuit. The switch will be illuminated whenever the ignition switch is in the On or Accessory positions. Power Window Switches The power window switch circuitry is connected to battery current through a circuit breaker in the Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) on a fused ignition switch output (run-acc) circuit so that the power windows will operate whenever the ignition switch is in the On or Accessory positions. Each two-way, momentary master passenger power window switch provides battery current and ground to the individual power window switches on each passenger door so that the power window switch controls the battery current and ground feeds to its respective power window motor. The switch for the driver side front door power window is labeled "Auto" and includes an auto-down feature. When this switch is depressed to a second momentary detent position and released, the driver door power window is automatically operated through an internal circuit and relay to its fully lowered position. The Auto-down event is cancelled if the switch paddle is depressed a second time in either the Up or Down direction. When the two position window lockout switch is depressed and latched in the lockout position, the battery current feed to each of the individual passenger power window switches is interrupted so that the passenger door power windows can only be operated from the master switches. The window lockout switch also controls the battery current feed for the LED in each passenger power window switch so that the switch will not be illuminated when it is locked out. Power Mirror Switches The power mirror switch circuitry is connected to battery current through a fuse in the TIPM on a fused B(+) circuit so that the power mirrors remain operational regardless of the ignition switch position. A rocker type selector switch has three positions, one to select the right mirror, one to select the left mirror, and a neutral Off position. After the right or left mirror is selected, one of four directional buttons is depressed to move the selected mirror Up, Down, Right or Left. The power mirror switch circuitry controls the battery current and ground feeds to each of the four (two in each mirror head) power mirror motors. The Light-Emitting Diode (LED) in the power mirror switch is connected to battery current through the power window circuit breaker in the TIPM on a fused ignition switch output (run-acc) circuit so that the switch directional buttons will be illuminated whenever the ignition switch is in the On or Accessory positions. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Power Locks > Power Door Lock Switch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Power Lock Switch Power Door Lock Switch: Testing and Inspection Power Lock Switch POWER LOCK SWITCH The Light-Emitting Diode (LED) illumination lamp of the power lock switch receives battery current through a fuse in the Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) on a fused ignition switch output (run) circuit. The power lock switch on the driver side front door trim panel is integral to the window/lock switch. See: Diagnosis and Testing If the power lock switch operates, but the LED is inoperative, check for battery current at the switch with the ignition switch in the On position. If OK, replace the faulty switch. Refer to the appropriate wiring information. 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. Remove the power lock switch from the door trim panel. Disconnect the door wire harness connector for the power lock switch from the switch connector receptacle. 2. Test the power lock switch resistance. See the Power Lock Switch Test chart to determine if the resistance is correct for the switch in each switch position. If not OK, replace the faulty power lock switch as required. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Power Locks > Power Door Lock Switch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Power Lock Switch > Page 13755 Power Door Lock Switch: Testing and Inspection Diagnosis and Testing WINDOW/LOCK SWITCH The Light-Emitting Diode (LED) illumination lamps for all of the Driver Door Module (DDM) power window, power lock, and power mirror switches receive battery current through the power window circuit breaker in the Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM). If all of the LED's are inoperative in the DDM, be certain to diagnose the power window system before replacing the switch unit. See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code Tests and Associated Procedures . If only one LED in the DDM is inoperative, replace the faulty DDM. If the driver side front door power window operates in a normal manner, but the Auto-Down feature is inoperative, replace the faulty DDM. Refer to the appropriate wiring information. 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. Remove the DDM from the door trim panel. Disconnect the door wire harness connectors for the DDM from the DDM connector receptacles. 2. Test the DDM switch continuity. See the Driver Door Module Switch Tests chart to determine if the continuity is correct for the suspect switches in each switch position. If not OK, replace the faulty DDM as required. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Power Locks > Power Door Lock Switch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Power Lock Switch > Page 13756 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Power Locks > Power Door Lock Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Power Lock Switch Power Door Lock Switch: Service and Repair Power Lock Switch Removal REMOVAL The power lock switch on the driver side front door trim panel is integral to the window/lock switch. See: Window/Door Lock Switch/Removal 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. 2. Remove the door trim panel. See: Doors, Hood and Trunk/Doors/Front Door/Front Door Panel/Service and Repair/Front Door Trim Panel Removal 3. Remove the switch from the trim panel bezel. Installation INSTALLATION 1. Insert switch to trim panel bezel. 2. Install door trim panel See: Doors, Hood and Trunk/Doors/Front Door/Front Door Panel/Service and Repair/Front Door Trim Panel - Installation . 3. Connect battery negative cable. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Power Locks > Power Door Lock Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Power Lock Switch > Page 13759 Power Door Lock Switch: Service and Repair Window/Door Lock Switch Removal REMOVAL 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. 2. Remove the door trim panel See: Doors, Hood and Trunk/Doors/Front Door/Front Door Panel/Service and Repair/Front Door Trim Panel Removal . 3. Remove the switch from the trim panel bezel. Installation INSTALLATION 1. Install switch to trim panel bezel. 2. Install door trim panel See: Doors, Hood and Trunk/Doors/Front Door/Front Door Panel/Service and Repair/Front Door Trim Panel - Installation . 3. Connect battery negative cable. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Mirrors > Memory Positioning Systems > System Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Memory Positioning Systems: Diagram Information and Instructions Warnings WARNINGS - GENERAL WARNINGS provide information to prevent personal injury and vehicle damage. Below is a list of general warnings that should be followed any time a vehicle is being serviced. WARNING: Always wear safety glasses for eye protection. WARNING: Use safety stands anytime a procedure requires being under a vehicle. WARNING: Be sure that the ignition switch always is in the off position, unless the procedure requires it to be on. WARNING: Set the parking brake when working on any vehicle. An automatic transmission should be in park. A manual transmission should be in neutral. WARNING: Operate the engine only in a well-ventilated area. WARNING: Keep away from moving parts when the engine is running, especially the fan and belts. WARNING: To prevent serious burns, avoid contact with hot parts such as the radiator, exhaust manifold(s), tail pipe, catalytic converter and muffler. WARNING: Do not allow flame or sparks near the battery. Gases are always present in and around the battery. WARNING: Always remove rings, watches, loose hanging jewelry and avoid loose clothing. How to Use Wiring Diagrams DESCRIPTION - HOW TO USE WIRING DIAGRAMS DaimlerChrysler Corporation wiring diagrams are designed to provide information regarding the vehicles wiring content. In order to effectively use the wiring diagrams to diagnose and repair DaimlerChrysler Corporation vehicles, it is important to understand all of their features and characteristics. Diagrams are arranged such that the power (B+) side of the circuit is placed near the top of the page, and the ground (B-) side of the circuit is placed near the bottom of the page. All switches, components, and modules are shown in the at rest position with the doors closed and the key removed from the ignition. Components are shown two ways. A solid line around a component indicates that the component is complete. A dashed line around the component indicates that the component is being shown is not complete. Incomplete components have a reference number to indicate the page where the component is shown complete. It is important to realize that no attempt is made on the diagrams to represent components and wiring as they appear on the vehicle. For example, a short piece of wire is treated the same as a long one. In addition, switches and other components are shown as simply as possible, with regard to function only. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Mirrors > Memory Positioning Systems > System Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13765 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Mirrors > Memory Positioning Systems > System Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13766 SYMBOLS International symbols are used throughout the wiring diagrams. These symbols are consistent with those being used around the world. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Mirrors > Memory Positioning Systems > System Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13767 TERMINOLOGY This is a list of terms and definitions used in the wiring diagrams. LHD - Left Hand Drive Vehicles RHD - Right Hand Drive Vehicles ATX - Automatic Transmissions-Front Wheel Drive MTX Manual Transmissions-Front Wheel Drive Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Mirrors > Memory Positioning Systems > System Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13768 AT - Automatic Transmissions-Rear Wheel Drive MT - Manual Transmissions-Rear Wheel Drive SOHC - Single Over Head Cam Engine DOHC - Double Over Head Cam Engine Export - Vehicles Built For Sale In Markets Other Than North America Except Export - Vehicles Built For Sale In North America Circuit Functions DESCRIPTION - CIRCUIT FUNCTIONS All circuits in the diagrams use an alpha/numeric code to identify the wire and it's function. To identify which circuit code applies to a system, refer to the Circuit Identification Code Chart. This chart shows the main circuits only and does not show the secondary codes that may apply to some models. Circuit Information DESCRIPTION - CIRCUIT INFORMATION Each wire shown in the diagrams contains a code which identifies the main circuit, a specific part of the main circuit, gage of wire, and color. An example would be A 2 18 LB/YL. This is a Battery Feed circuit, level two, eighteen gauge, light blue with a yellow tracer. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Mirrors > Memory Positioning Systems > System Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13769 Connector, Ground and Splice Information DESCRIPTION - CONNECTOR, GROUND AND SPLICE INFORMATION CAUTION: Not all connectors are serviced. Some connectors are serviced only with a harness. A typical example might be the Supplemental Restraint System connectors. Always check parts availability before attempting a repair. IDENTIFICATION In-line connectors are identified by a number, as follows: - In-line connectors located in the engine compartment are C100 series numbers. - In-line connectors located in the instrument panel area are C200 series numbers. - In-line connectors located in the body are C300 series numbers. - Jumper harness connectors are C400 series numbers. - Grounds and ground connectors are identified with a "G" and follow the same series numbering as the in-line connectors. - Splices are identified with an "S" and follow the same series numbering as the in-line connectors. In addition, S001-S099 numbers are located in the engine compartment. - Component connectors are identified by the component name instead of a number. Multiple connectors on a component use a C1, C2, etc. identifier. LOCATIONS Vehicle/Locations contains the master connector/ground/splice location index charts with hyperlinks to the applicable location illustrations. The illustrations contain the connector name (or number)/ground number/splice number and component identification. The abbreviation T/O is used in the component location section to indicate a point in which the wiring harness branches out to a component. The abbreviation N/S means Not Shown in the illustrations Section Identification and Information DESCRIPTION - SECTION IDENTIFICATION AND INFORMATION The wiring diagrams are grouped into individual sections. If a component is most likely found in a particular group, it will be shown complete (all wires, Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Mirrors > Memory Positioning Systems > System Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13770 connectors, and pins) within that group. For example, the Auto Shutdown Relay is most likely to be found in Powertrain Management, so it is shown there complete. It can, however, be shown partially in another group if it contains some associated wiring. Splice diagrams show the entire splice and provide references to other sections the splices serves. Splice Information only contains splice diagrams that are not shown in their entirety somewhere else in the wiring diagrams. Connector Pin-Outs shows each connector and the circuits involved with that connector. The connectors are identified using the name/number on the diagram pages. Removal REMOVAL 1. Disconnect battery. 2. Release Connector Lock (2). 3. Disconnect the connector (3) being repaired from its mating half/component. 4. Remove the dress cover (if applicable) (1). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Mirrors > Memory Positioning Systems > System Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13771 5. Release the Secondary Terminal Lock, if required (1). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Mirrors > Memory Positioning Systems > System Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13772 6. Position the connector locking finger away from the terminal using the proper special tool. Pull on the wire to remove the terminal from the connector. Installation Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Mirrors > Memory Positioning Systems > System Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13773 INSTALLATION 1. Insert the removed terminal in the same cavity on the repair connector. 2. Repeat steps for each terminal in the connector, being sure that all wires are inserted into the proper cavities. For additional connector pin-out identification, refer to the wiring diagrams. 3. When the connector is re-assembled, the secondary terminal lock must be placed in the locked position to prevent terminal push out. 4. Replace dress cover (if applicable). 5. Connect connector to its mating half/component. 6. Connect battery and test all affected systems. Removal REMOVAL 1. Disconnect the battery. 2. Locate the diode in the harness, and remove the protective covering. 3. Remove the diode from the harness, pay attention to the current flow direction (1) (2) (3). Installation INSTALLATION 1. Remove the insulation from the wires in the harness. Only remove enough insulation to solder in the new diode. 2. Install the new diode in the harness, making sure current flow is correct. If necessary, refer to the appropriate wiring diagram for current flow. 3. Solder the connection together using rosin core type solder only. Do not use acid core solder. 4. Tape the diode to the harness using electrical tape. Make sure the diode is completely sealed from the elements. 5. Re-connect the battery and test affected systems. Removal REMOVAL 1. Follow steps for removing terminals described in the connector removal section. 2. Cut the wire 6 inches from the back of the connector. Installation INSTALLATION 1. Select a wire from the terminal repair kit that best matches the color and gage of the wire being repaired. 2. Cut the repair wire to the proper length and remove one-half (1/2) inch of insulation. 3. Splice the repair wire to the wire harness (see wire splicing procedure). See: Service Procedures/Wire Splicing 4. Insert the repaired wire into the connector. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Mirrors > Memory Positioning Systems > System Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13774 5. Install the connector locking wedge, if required, and reconnect the connector to its mating half/component. 6. Re-tape the wire harness starting at 1-1/2 inches behind the connector and 2 inches past the repair. 7. Connect battery and test all affected systems. Wire Splicing STANDARD PROCEDURE - WIRE SPLICING When splicing a wire, it is important that the correct gage be used as shown in the wiring diagrams. 1. Remove one-half (1/2) inch of insulation from each wire that needs to be spliced. 2. Place a piece of adhesive lined heat shrink tubing on one side of the wire. Make sure the tubing will be long enough to cover and seal the entire repair area. 3. Place the strands of wire overlapping each other inside of the splice clip (1). 4. Using crimping tool (1), Mopar p/n 05019912AA, crimp the splice clip and wires together. 5. Solder (3) the connection (2) together using rosin core type solder (1) only. CAUTION: DO NOT USE ACID CORE SOLDER. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Mirrors > Memory Positioning Systems > System Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13775 6. Center the heat shrink tubing (2) over the joint and heat using a heat gun. Heat the joint until the tubing is tightly sealed and sealant (1) comes out of both ends of the tubing. Special Tools WIRING/TERMINAL PROBING TOOL PACKAGE 6807 TERMINAL PICK TOOL SET 6680 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Mirrors > Memory Positioning Systems > System Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13776 TERMINAL REMOVING TOOLS 6932 AND 8638 TERMINAL REMOVING TOOL 6934 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Mirrors > Memory Positioning Systems > System Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13777 Memory Positioning Systems: Diagnostic Aids Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) Sensitive Devices STANDARD PROCEDURE - ELECTROSTATIC DISCHARGE (ESD) SENSITIVE DEVICES All ESD sensitive components are solid state and a symbol is used to indicate this. When handling any component with this symbol, comply with the following procedures to reduce the possibility of electrostatic charge build up on the body and inadvertent discharge into the component. If it is not known whether the part is ESD sensitive, assume that it is. 1. Always touch a known good ground before handling the part. This should be repeated while handling the part and more frequently after sliding across a seat, sitting down from a standing position, or walking a distance. 2. Avoid touching electrical terminals of the part, unless instructed to do so by a written procedure. 3. When using a voltmeter, be sure to connect the ground lead first. 4. Do not remove the part from it's protective packing until it is time to install the part. 5. Before removing the part from it's package, ground the package to a known good ground on the vehicle. Testing Of Voltage Potential STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING OF VOLTAGE POTENTIAL 1. Connect the ground lead of a voltmeter to a known good ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the voltmeter to the selected test point. The vehicle ignition may need to be turned ON to check voltage. Refer to the appropriate test procedure. Testing For Continuity Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Mirrors > Memory Positioning Systems > System Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13778 STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING FOR CONTINUITY 1. Remove the fuse (1) for the circuit being checked or, disconnect the battery. 2. Connect one lead of the ohmmeter to one side of the circuit being tested 3. Connect the other lead to the other end of the circuit being tested. Low or no resistance means good continuity. Testing For A Short To Ground STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING FOR A SHORT TO GROUND 1. Remove the fuse and disconnect all items involved with the fuse. 2. Connect a test light or a voltmeter across the terminals of the fuse. 3. Starting at the fuse block, wiggle the wiring harness about six to eight inches apart and watch the voltmeter/test lamp. 4. If the voltmeter registers voltage or the test lamp glows, there is a short to ground in that general area of the wiring harness. Testing For A Short To Ground On Fuses Powering Several Loads STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING FOR A SHORT TO GROUND ON FUSES POWERING SEVERAL LOADS 1. Refer to the wiring diagrams and disconnect or isolate all items on the suspected fused circuits. 2. Replace the blown fuse. 3. Supply power to the fuse by turning ON the ignition switch or re-connecting the battery. 4. Start connecting or energizing the items in the fuse circuit one at a time. When the fuse blows the circuit with the short to ground has been isolated. Testing For A Voltage Drop STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING FOR A VOLTAGE DROP Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Mirrors > Memory Positioning Systems > System Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13779 1. Connect the positive lead of the voltmeter to the side of the circuit closest to the battery. 2. Connect the other lead of the voltmeter to the other side of the switch, component or circuit. 3. Operate the item. 4. The voltmeter will show the difference in voltage between the two points. Troubleshooting Wiring Problems DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING - WIRING HARNESS TROUBLESHOOTING TOOLS When diagnosing a problem in an electrical circuit there are several common tools necessary. These tools are listed and explained below. - Jumper Wire - This is a test wire used to connect two points of a circuit. It can be used to bypass an open in a circuit. WARNING: Never use a jumper wire across a load, such as a motor, connected between a battery feed and ground. - Voltmeter - Used to check for voltage on a circuit. Always connect the black lead to a known good ground and the red lead to the positive side of the circuit. CAUTION: Most of the electrical components used in today's vehicles are Solid State. When checking voltages in these circuits, use a meter with a 10 - megohm or greater impedance rating. - Ohmmeter - Used to check the resistance between two points of a circuit. Low or no resistance in a circuit means good continuity. CAUTION: Most of the electrical components used in today's vehicles are Solid State. When checking resistance in these circuits use a meter with a 10 - megohm or greater impedance rating. In addition, make sure the power is disconnected from the circuit. Circuits that are powered up by the vehicle's electrical system can cause damage to the equipment and provide false readings. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Mirrors > Memory Positioning Systems > System Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13780 - Probing Tools - These tools are used for probing terminals in connectors. Select the proper size tool from Special Tool Package 6807, and insert the probing end (2) into the terminal being tested. Use the other end of the tool (1) to insert the meter probe. INTERMITTENT AND POOR CONNECTIONS Most intermittent electrical problems are caused by faulty electrical connections or wiring. It is also possible for a sticking component or relay to cause a problem. Before condemning a component or wiring assembly, check the following items. - Connectors are fully seated - Spread terminals, or terminal push out - Terminals in the wiring assembly are fully seated into the connector/component and locked into position - Dirt or corrosion on the terminals. Any amount of corrosion or dirt could cause an intermittent problem - Damaged connector/component casing exposing the item to dirt or moisture - Wire insulation that has rubbed through causing a short to ground - Some or all of the wiring strands broken inside of the insulation - Wiring broken inside of the insulation TROUBLESHOOTING WIRING PROBLEMS When troubleshooting wiring problems there are six steps which can aid in the procedure. The steps are listed and explained below. Always check for non-factory items added to the vehicle before doing any diagnosis. If the vehicle is equipped with these items, disconnect them to verify these add-on items are not the cause of the problem. 1. Verify the problem. 2. Verify any related symptoms. Do this by performing operational checks on components that are in the same circuit. Refer to the wiring diagrams. 3. Analyze the symptoms. Use the wiring diagrams to determine what the circuit is doing, where the problem most likely is occurring and where the diagnosis will continue. 4. Isolate the problem area. 5. Repair the problem area. 6. Verify the proper operation. For this step, check for proper operation of all items on the repaired circuit. Refer to the wiring diagrams. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Paint: > 23-046-07 > Oct > 07 > Body - Horizontal Paint Surface Etching Paint: Customer Interest Body - Horizontal Paint Surface Etching NUMBER: 23-046-07 GROUP: Body DATE: October 30, 2007 THIS BULLETIN SUPERSEDES TECHNICAL SERVICE BULLETIN 23-003-06, DATED JANUARY 19, 2006, WHICH SHOULD BE REMOVED FROM YOUR FILES. ALL REVISIONS ARE HIGHLIGHTED WITH **ASTERISKS** AND INCLUDE ADDITIONAL YEARS AND MODELS. SUBJECT: Paint Repair - Etching OVERVIEW: This bulletin involves evaluating the paint condition on all horizontal panels for etching and using the procedures listed in the Paint Condition Deck p/n 81-316-0507 or using the information listed in this bulletin MODELS: 2006 - (CS) Pacifica **2008** 2006 - (DR/D1/DC/DH) Ram Truck **2008** 2006 - (HB) Durango **2008** **2007 - 2008 (HG) Aspen** 2006 (JR) Sebring Convertible/Sebring Sedan/Stratus Sedan **2007 - 2008 (JS) Sebring/Sebring Convertible/Avenger** **2007 - 2008 (JK) Wrangler** **2007 - 2008 (KA) Nitro** 2006- (KJ) Liberty **2007** **2008 (KK) Liberty 2006 - (LX) 300/Magnum/**Charger** **2008** **2007 - 2008 (MK) Compass/Patriot** 2006- (ND) Dakota **2008** **2007 - 2008 (PM) Caliber** 2006 - (RS) Town & Country/Caravan **2007** **2008 (RI) Town & Country/Grand Caravan** 2006 (TJ) Wrangler 2005 - (WK) Grand Cherokee **2008** 2006 - (XK) Commander Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Paint: > 23-046-07 > Oct > 07 > Body - Horizontal Paint Surface Etching > Page 13790 **2008** DIAGNOSIS: Inspect the vehicle horizontal panels for the appearance of an etched surface (picture available in "PAINT CONDITION DECK" - publication number 81-316-0507 - see "INSECT ETCH" graphic). Two procedures are available depending on the severity of the condition. Repair Procedure "A" is for conditions that do not show through to primer and Repair Procedure "B" is for conditions that show primer within the etch area. PARTS REQUIRED: SPECIAL TOOLS/EQUIPMENT REQUIRED: REPAIR PROCEDURE "A" FINESSE: 1. Clean with Mopar Car Wash Concentrate, and water. 2. Wipe with an alcohol based cleaner 3. Evaluate the paint condition. 4. Measure and record paint film thickness in areas to be sanded using an electronic mil gauge (PSE). 5. Use 2000 grit sand paper mounted to a ridged backer to remove all etching. 6. If you remove more than 0.5 mil of clear coat you will need to refinish using repair procedure "B" refinish. 7. If refinishing is not required polish sanded areas using Mopar Compound Power Cleaner # BSMM8432. 8. Remove swirl marks using Mopar Swirl Free polish # BSMM8232. 9. Detail vehicle as required. REPAIR PROCEDURE "B" REFINISH: 1. Clean with Mopar Car Wash Concentrate, and water. 2. Wipe with an alcohol based cleaner 3. Evaluate the paint condition. 4. DA surface with 600 grit sand paper. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Paint: > 23-046-07 > Oct > 07 > Body - Horizontal Paint Surface Etching > Page 13791 5. Clean with appropriate solvent per paint supplier recommendations. 6. Feather edge the damaged areas. 7. Apply corrosion resistant primer to bare metal spots if they exist. 8. Spot prime with primer surfacer. 9. Block sand the primer surfacer. 10. Final sand per paint suppliers recommendations. 11. Clean with appropriate solvent. 12. Tack off the repair area. 13. Apply basecoat with appropriate hardener per paint supplier recommendations. 14. Allow flash time per paint suppliers recommendations and tack off area. 15. Apply clear coat per paint suppliers recommendations. 16. Detail vehicle as required. NOTE: No clear coat spot Repair should be performed on class "A" surfaces. POLICY: Reimbursable within the provisions of the warranty. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Paint: > 23-046-07 > Oct > 07 > Body - Horizontal Paint Surface Etching > Page 13792 TIME ALLOWANCE: FAILURE CODE: Disclaimer: This bulletin is supplied as technical information only and is not an authorization for repair. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Paint: > 23-046-07 > Oct > 07 > Body - Horizontal Paint Surface Etching Paint: All Technical Service Bulletins Body - Horizontal Paint Surface Etching NUMBER: 23-046-07 GROUP: Body DATE: October 30, 2007 THIS BULLETIN SUPERSEDES TECHNICAL SERVICE BULLETIN 23-003-06, DATED JANUARY 19, 2006, WHICH SHOULD BE REMOVED FROM YOUR FILES. ALL REVISIONS ARE HIGHLIGHTED WITH **ASTERISKS** AND INCLUDE ADDITIONAL YEARS AND MODELS. SUBJECT: Paint Repair - Etching OVERVIEW: This bulletin involves evaluating the paint condition on all horizontal panels for etching and using the procedures listed in the Paint Condition Deck p/n 81-316-0507 or using the information listed in this bulletin MODELS: 2006 - (CS) Pacifica **2008** 2006 - (DR/D1/DC/DH) Ram Truck **2008** 2006 - (HB) Durango **2008** **2007 - 2008 (HG) Aspen** 2006 (JR) Sebring Convertible/Sebring Sedan/Stratus Sedan **2007 - 2008 (JS) Sebring/Sebring Convertible/Avenger** **2007 - 2008 (JK) Wrangler** **2007 - 2008 (KA) Nitro** 2006- (KJ) Liberty **2007** **2008 (KK) Liberty 2006 - (LX) 300/Magnum/**Charger** **2008** **2007 - 2008 (MK) Compass/Patriot** 2006- (ND) Dakota **2008** **2007 - 2008 (PM) Caliber** 2006 - (RS) Town & Country/Caravan **2007** **2008 (RI) Town & Country/Grand Caravan** 2006 (TJ) Wrangler 2005 - (WK) Grand Cherokee **2008** 2006 - (XK) Commander Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Paint: > 23-046-07 > Oct > 07 > Body - Horizontal Paint Surface Etching > Page 13798 **2008** DIAGNOSIS: Inspect the vehicle horizontal panels for the appearance of an etched surface (picture available in "PAINT CONDITION DECK" - publication number 81-316-0507 - see "INSECT ETCH" graphic). Two procedures are available depending on the severity of the condition. Repair Procedure "A" is for conditions that do not show through to primer and Repair Procedure "B" is for conditions that show primer within the etch area. PARTS REQUIRED: SPECIAL TOOLS/EQUIPMENT REQUIRED: REPAIR PROCEDURE "A" FINESSE: 1. Clean with Mopar Car Wash Concentrate, and water. 2. Wipe with an alcohol based cleaner 3. Evaluate the paint condition. 4. Measure and record paint film thickness in areas to be sanded using an electronic mil gauge (PSE). 5. Use 2000 grit sand paper mounted to a ridged backer to remove all etching. 6. If you remove more than 0.5 mil of clear coat you will need to refinish using repair procedure "B" refinish. 7. If refinishing is not required polish sanded areas using Mopar Compound Power Cleaner # BSMM8432. 8. Remove swirl marks using Mopar Swirl Free polish # BSMM8232. 9. Detail vehicle as required. REPAIR PROCEDURE "B" REFINISH: 1. Clean with Mopar Car Wash Concentrate, and water. 2. Wipe with an alcohol based cleaner 3. Evaluate the paint condition. 4. DA surface with 600 grit sand paper. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Paint: > 23-046-07 > Oct > 07 > Body - Horizontal Paint Surface Etching > Page 13799 5. Clean with appropriate solvent per paint supplier recommendations. 6. Feather edge the damaged areas. 7. Apply corrosion resistant primer to bare metal spots if they exist. 8. Spot prime with primer surfacer. 9. Block sand the primer surfacer. 10. Final sand per paint suppliers recommendations. 11. Clean with appropriate solvent. 12. Tack off the repair area. 13. Apply basecoat with appropriate hardener per paint supplier recommendations. 14. Allow flash time per paint suppliers recommendations and tack off area. 15. Apply clear coat per paint suppliers recommendations. 16. Detail vehicle as required. NOTE: No clear coat spot Repair should be performed on class "A" surfaces. POLICY: Reimbursable within the provisions of the warranty. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Paint: > 23-046-07 > Oct > 07 > Body - Horizontal Paint Surface Etching > Page 13800 TIME ALLOWANCE: FAILURE CODE: Disclaimer: This bulletin is supplied as technical information only and is not an authorization for repair. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Paint: > Page 13801 Paint: By Symptom Technical Service Bulletin # 23-046-07 Date: 071030 Body - Horizontal Paint Surface Etching NUMBER: 23-046-07 GROUP: Body DATE: October 30, 2007 THIS BULLETIN SUPERSEDES TECHNICAL SERVICE BULLETIN 23-003-06, DATED JANUARY 19, 2006, WHICH SHOULD BE REMOVED FROM YOUR FILES. ALL REVISIONS ARE HIGHLIGHTED WITH **ASTERISKS** AND INCLUDE ADDITIONAL YEARS AND MODELS. SUBJECT: Paint Repair - Etching OVERVIEW: This bulletin involves evaluating the paint condition on all horizontal panels for etching and using the procedures listed in the Paint Condition Deck p/n 81-316-0507 or using the information listed in this bulletin MODELS: 2006 - (CS) Pacifica **2008** 2006 - (DR/D1/DC/DH) Ram Truck **2008** 2006 - (HB) Durango **2008** **2007 - 2008 (HG) Aspen** 2006 (JR) Sebring Convertible/Sebring Sedan/Stratus Sedan **2007 - 2008 (JS) Sebring/Sebring Convertible/Avenger** **2007 - 2008 (JK) Wrangler** **2007 - 2008 (KA) Nitro** 2006- (KJ) Liberty **2007** **2008 (KK) Liberty 2006 - (LX) 300/Magnum/**Charger** **2008** **2007 - 2008 (MK) Compass/Patriot** 2006- (ND) Dakota **2008** **2007 - 2008 (PM) Caliber** 2006 - (RS) Town & Country/Caravan **2007** **2008 (RI) Town & Country/Grand Caravan** 2006 (TJ) Wrangler 2005 - (WK) Grand Cherokee Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Paint: > Page 13802 **2008** 2006 - (XK) Commander **2008** DIAGNOSIS: Inspect the vehicle horizontal panels for the appearance of an etched surface (picture available in "PAINT CONDITION DECK" - publication number 81-316-0507 - see "INSECT ETCH" graphic). Two procedures are available depending on the severity of the condition. Repair Procedure "A" is for conditions that do not show through to primer and Repair Procedure "B" is for conditions that show primer within the etch area. PARTS REQUIRED: SPECIAL TOOLS/EQUIPMENT REQUIRED: REPAIR PROCEDURE "A" FINESSE: 1. Clean with Mopar Car Wash Concentrate, and water. 2. Wipe with an alcohol based cleaner 3. Evaluate the paint condition. 4. Measure and record paint film thickness in areas to be sanded using an electronic mil gauge (PSE). 5. Use 2000 grit sand paper mounted to a ridged backer to remove all etching. 6. If you remove more than 0.5 mil of clear coat you will need to refinish using repair procedure "B" refinish. 7. If refinishing is not required polish sanded areas using Mopar Compound Power Cleaner # BSMM8432. 8. Remove swirl marks using Mopar Swirl Free polish # BSMM8232. 9. Detail vehicle as required. REPAIR PROCEDURE "B" REFINISH: 1. Clean with Mopar Car Wash Concentrate, and water. 2. Wipe with an alcohol based cleaner 3. Evaluate the paint condition. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Paint: > Page 13803 4. DA surface with 600 grit sand paper. 5. Clean with appropriate solvent per paint supplier recommendations. 6. Feather edge the damaged areas. 7. Apply corrosion resistant primer to bare metal spots if they exist. 8. Spot prime with primer surfacer. 9. Block sand the primer surfacer. 10. Final sand per paint suppliers recommendations. 11. Clean with appropriate solvent. 12. Tack off the repair area. 13. Apply basecoat with appropriate hardener per paint supplier recommendations. 14. Allow flash time per paint suppliers recommendations and tack off area. 15. Apply clear coat per paint suppliers recommendations. 16. Detail vehicle as required. NOTE: No clear coat spot Repair should be performed on class "A" surfaces. POLICY: Reimbursable within the provisions of the warranty. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Paint: > Page 13804 TIME ALLOWANCE: FAILURE CODE: Disclaimer: This bulletin is supplied as technical information only and is not an authorization for repair. Technical Service Bulletin # 23-046-07 Date: 071030 Body - Horizontal Paint Surface Etching NUMBER: 23-046-07 GROUP: Body DATE: October 30, 2007 THIS BULLETIN SUPERSEDES TECHNICAL SERVICE BULLETIN 23-003-06, DATED JANUARY 19, 2006, WHICH SHOULD BE REMOVED FROM YOUR FILES. ALL REVISIONS ARE HIGHLIGHTED WITH **ASTERISKS** AND INCLUDE ADDITIONAL YEARS AND MODELS. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Paint: > Page 13805 SUBJECT: Paint Repair - Etching OVERVIEW: This bulletin involves evaluating the paint condition on all horizontal panels for etching and using the procedures listed in the Paint Condition Deck p/n 81-316-0507 or using the information listed in this bulletin MODELS: 2006 - (CS) Pacifica **2008** 2006 - (DR/D1/DC/DH) Ram Truck **2008** 2006 - (HB) Durango **2008** **2007 - 2008 (HG) Aspen** 2006 (JR) Sebring Convertible/Sebring Sedan/Stratus Sedan **2007 - 2008 (JS) Sebring/Sebring Convertible/Avenger** **2007 - 2008 (JK) Wrangler** **2007 - 2008 (KA) Nitro** 2006- (KJ) Liberty **2007** **2008 (KK) Liberty 2006 - (LX) 300/Magnum/**Charger** **2008** **2007 - 2008 (MK) Compass/Patriot** 2006- (ND) Dakota **2008** **2007 - 2008 (PM) Caliber** 2006 - (RS) Town & Country/Caravan **2007** **2008 (RI) Town & Country/Grand Caravan** 2006 (TJ) Wrangler 2005 - (WK) Grand Cherokee **2008** 2006 - (XK) Commander **2008** DIAGNOSIS: Inspect the vehicle horizontal panels for the appearance of an etched surface (picture available in "PAINT CONDITION DECK" - publication number 81-316-0507 - see "INSECT ETCH" graphic). Two procedures are available depending on the severity of the condition. Repair Procedure "A" is for conditions that do not show through to primer and Repair Procedure "B" is for conditions that show primer within the etch area. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Paint: > Page 13806 PARTS REQUIRED: SPECIAL TOOLS/EQUIPMENT REQUIRED: REPAIR PROCEDURE "A" FINESSE: 1. Clean with Mopar Car Wash Concentrate, and water. 2. Wipe with an alcohol based cleaner 3. Evaluate the paint condition. 4. Measure and record paint film thickness in areas to be sanded using an electronic mil gauge (PSE). 5. Use 2000 grit sand paper mounted to a ridged backer to remove all etching. 6. If you remove more than 0.5 mil of clear coat you will need to refinish using repair procedure "B" refinish. 7. If refinishing is not required polish sanded areas using Mopar Compound Power Cleaner # BSMM8432. 8. Remove swirl marks using Mopar Swirl Free polish # BSMM8232. 9. Detail vehicle as required. REPAIR PROCEDURE "B" REFINISH: 1. Clean with Mopar Car Wash Concentrate, and water. 2. Wipe with an alcohol based cleaner 3. Evaluate the paint condition. 4. DA surface with 600 grit sand paper. 5. Clean with appropriate solvent per paint supplier recommendations. 6. Feather edge the damaged areas. 7. Apply corrosion resistant primer to bare metal spots if they exist. 8. Spot prime with primer surfacer. 9. Block sand the primer surfacer. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Paint: > Page 13807 10. Final sand per paint suppliers recommendations. 11. Clean with appropriate solvent. 12. Tack off the repair area. 13. Apply basecoat with appropriate hardener per paint supplier recommendations. 14. Allow flash time per paint suppliers recommendations and tack off area. 15. Apply clear coat per paint suppliers recommendations. 16. Detail vehicle as required. NOTE: No clear coat spot Repair should be performed on class "A" surfaces. POLICY: Reimbursable within the provisions of the warranty. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Paint: > Page 13808 TIME ALLOWANCE: FAILURE CODE: Disclaimer: This bulletin is supplied as technical information only and is not an authorization for repair. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Application and ID > Paint Codes Paint: Application and ID Paint Codes PAINT CODES Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Application and ID > Paint Codes > Page 13811 Paint: Application and ID Paint Code Location PAINT CODE LOCATION (TYPICAL-ALL MODELS) Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Description and Operation > Basecoat/Clearcoat Finish - Description Paint: Description and Operation Basecoat/Clearcoat Finish - Description DESCRIPTION The original equipment paint finish is a multi step process that involves cleaning, applying electro de-position (E-coat), anti-chip primer, basecoat, and clearcoat steps. CAUTION: Do not use abrasive chemicals, abrasive compounds or harsh alkaline based cleaning solvents on the painted surfaces of a vehicle. Failure to follow this caution can result in damage to vehicle finish. On most vehicles a two-part paint application (basecoat/clearcoat) is used. Color paint that is applied to primer is called basecoat. A clear coat paint is then applied to protect the basecoat from ultraviolet light and to provide a durable high-gloss finish. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Description and Operation > Basecoat/Clearcoat Finish - Description > Page 13814 Paint: Description and Operation Paint Touch-up - Description DESCRIPTION If the painted metal surface of a vehicle becomes scratched or chipped, it should be touched-up as soon as possible to avoid corrosion. WARNING: Use an OSHA approved respirator and safety glasses when spraying paint or solvents in a confined area. Failure to follow this warning may result in possible personal injury or death. When repairing painted metal surfaces, for best results, use MOPAR(R) Scratch Filler/Primer, Touch-Up Paints and Clear Top Coat. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Service and Repair > Paint Touch-Up Paint: Service and Repair Paint Touch-Up PAINT TOUCH-UP 1. Scrape any loose paint and corrosion from inside the scratch or chip. WARNING: Avoid prolonged skin contact with petroleum or alcohol-based cleaning solvents. Failure to follow this warning can result in possible personal injury or death. 2. Clean affected area with MOPAR(R) Tar/Road Oil Remover or equivalent, and allow to dry. 3. Fill the inside of the scratch or chip with a coat of filler/primer. Do not overlap primer onto good surface finish. The applicator brush should be wet enough to puddle-fill the scratch or chip without running. Do not stroke brush applicator on body surface. Allow the filler/primer to dry hard. 4. Cover the filler/primer with color touch-up paint. Do not overlap touch-up color onto the original color coat around the scratch or chip. Butt the new color to the original color, if possible. Do not stroke applicator brush on body surface. Allow touch-up paint to dry hard. 5. On vehicles without clearcoat, the touch-up color can be lightly finesse sanded (1500 grit) and polished with rubbing compound. 6. On vehicles with clearcoat, apply clear top coat to touch-up paint with the same technique as described in STEP 4. Allow clear top coat to dry hard. If desired, the clearcoat can be lightly finesse sanded (1500 grit) and polished with rubbing compound. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Service and Repair > Paint Touch-Up > Page 13817 Paint: Service and Repair Finesse Sanding, Buffing, And Polishing - Description DESCRIPTION CAUTION: Do not remove more than 0.5 mils of clearcoat finish when sanding, hand buffing or polishing. Basecoat paint must retain clearcoat for durability. CAUTION: If the finish has been finesse sanded in the past, it cannot be repeated. Failure to follow this caution can result in damage to vehicle finish. NOTE: Finesse sanding should only be performed by a trained automotive paint technician. Minor acid etching, orange peel, or smudging in a clearcoat or single-stage finish can be reduced with light finesse sanding, hand buffing and polishing. Use a Paint Thickness Gauge #PR-ETG-2X or equivalent to determine clearcoat or single-stage paint thickness before and after the repair. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Radiator Support > Component Information > Service and Repair > Radiator Upper Crossmember - Installation Radiator Support: Service and Repair Radiator Upper Crossmember - Installation INSTALLATION 1. Position and align the upper radiator crossmember (2) to the fender rails. 2. Install the four bolts (1 and 3) that secure the upper radiator crossmember to the fender rails. Tighten the bolts to 28 Nm (21 ft. lbs.). 3. Install the bolts (1 and 2) that secure the A/C condenser and the radiator to the upper radiator crossmember (3). Tighten the bolts to 8 Nm (75 in. lbs.). 4. Install the hood latch See: Doors, Hood and Trunk/Hood/Hood Latch/Service and Repair/Hood Latch/Installation . Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Radiator Support > Component Information > Service and Repair > Radiator Upper Crossmember - Installation > Page 13822 Radiator Support: Service and Repair Radiator Upper Crossmember - Removal REMOVAL Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Radiator Support > Component Information > Service and Repair > Radiator Upper Crossmember - Installation > Page 13823 ERROR: undefined OFFENDING COMMAND: ‘~ STACK: Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Keyless Entry Module > Component Information > Locations Keyless Entry Module: Locations Component ID: 213 Component : MODULE-SENTRY KEY REMOTE ENTRY/WCM Connector: Name : MODULE-SENTRY KEY REMOTE ENTRY/WCM Color : BLACK # of pins : 8 Pin Circuit Description 1 G20 20VT/BR IGNITION SWITCH SENSE 2 D508 20WT/GY COM-LIN TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR LAN 3 F20 20PK/WT FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) 4 Z109 20BK/GY GROUND 5 A114 18GY/RD FUSED B(+) 6 D55 20WT/OR CAN B BUS (+) 7 D54 20WT CAN B BUS (-) 8-Component Location - 47 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Keyless Entry Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 13828 Component Location - 41 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Keyless Entry Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 13829 Component Location - 42 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Keyless Entry Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 13830 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Keyless Entry Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 13831 Keyless Entry Module: Diagrams Component ID: 213 Component : MODULE-SENTRY KEY REMOTE ENTRY/WCM Connector: Name : MODULE-SENTRY KEY REMOTE ENTRY/WCM Color : BLACK # of pins : 8 Pin Circuit Description 1 G20 20VT/BR IGNITION SWITCH SENSE 2 D508 20WT/GY COM-LIN TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR LAN 3 F20 20PK/WT FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) 4 Z109 20BK/GY GROUND 5 A114 18GY/RD FUSED B(+) 6 D55 20WT/OR CAN B BUS (+) 7 D54 20WT CAN B BUS (-) 8-Component Location - 47 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Keyless Entry Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 13832 Component Location - 41 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Keyless Entry Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 13833 Component Location - 42 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Keyless Entry Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 13834 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Keyless Entry Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Remote Keyless Entry Module Keyless Entry Module: Description and Operation Remote Keyless Entry Module Description DESCRIPTION When an RKE lock message is sent to the instrument cluster, the instrument cluster actuates the door locks, the interior lighting is turned off, the horn chirps (if this feature is enabled), the park lamps flash (if this feature is enabled) and, if the vehicle is so equipped, the Vehicle Theft Security System (VTSS) is armed. When an RKE unlock message is sent to the instrument cluster, the instrument cluster actuates the driver side front door (or all doors if this feature is enabled) unlock, the interior lighting is turned on and, if the vehicle is so equipped, the VTSS is disarmed. When an RKE panic message is sent to the instrument cluster, the instrument cluster actuates the driver side front door (or all doors if this feature is enabled) unlock, the interior lighting is turned on and, if the vehicle is so equipped, the VTSS is disarmed. The panic message will also cause the exterior lamps (including the headlights) to flash, and the horn to sound for about three minutes, or until a second panic message is sent to the instrument cluster. A vehicle speed of about 25.7 Km/h(15 mph) will also cancel the panic event. Operation OPERATION Whenever the vehicle battery power is interrupted, the Remote Keyless Module (RKE) Module will retain all vehicle access codes in its memory. When replacing or adding a key fob transmitter (maximum of 4) a scan tool is required to program the RKE Module to accept the new Vehicle Access Code if a customer owned transmitter is not available. If a functioning transmitter is available, See: Locks/Keyless Entry/Keyless Entry Transmitter/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Keyless Entry Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Remote Keyless Entry Module > Page 13837 Keyless Entry Module: Description and Operation Sentry Key Remote Entry Module Description DESCRIPTION The Sentry Key REmote Entry Module (SKREEM) (1) is sometimes referred to as the Wireless Control Module (WCM). The SKREEM is the primary component of the Sentry Key Immobilizer System (SKIS). It is also the receiver for the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) system. The SKREEM is located on the right side of the steering column, near the ignition lock cylinder housing and is concealed beneath the steering column shrouds. The molded black plastic housing for the SKREEM has an integral molded plastic halo-like antenna ring (4) that extends from the bottom. When the SKREEM is properly installed on the steering column, the antenna ring is oriented around the circumference of the ignition lock cylinder housing. A single integral connector receptacle (3) is located just behind the antenna ring on the bottom of the SKREEM housing. An integral molded plastic mounting tab (2) on the rear corner of the SKREEM housing has a hole in the center through which a screw passes to secure the unit to the steering column. The SKREEM is connected to the vehicle electrical system through a single take out and connector of the instrument panel wire harness. Two SKREEM modules are used: one for vehicles equipped with RKE only, and one for vehicles equipped with RKE and SKIS. The SKREEM cannot be adjusted or repaired. If ineffective or damaged, the entire SKREEM unit must be replaced. Operation OPERATION The Sentry Key REmote Entry Module (SKREEM) (also known as the Wireless Control Module/WCM) contains a Radio Frequency (RF) transceiver and a microprocessor. The SKREEM transmits RF signals to, and receives RF signals from the Sentry Key transponder through a tuned antenna enclosed within the molded plastic antenna ring integral to the SKREEM housing. If this antenna ring is not mounted properly around the ignition lock cylinder housing, communication problems between the SKREEM and the transponder may arise. These communication problems will result in Sentry Key transponder-related faults. The SKREEM also serves as the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) RF receiver. See: Locks/Power Locks/Description and Operation/Description . The SKREEM communicates over the Controller Area Network (CAN) data bus with the ElectroMechanical Instrument Cluster (EMIC) (also known as the Cab Compartment Node/CCN), the Powertrain Control Module (PCM)/Engine Control Module (ECM) or the diagnostic scan tool. The SKREEM and the PCM/ECM both use software that includes a rolling code algorithm strategy, which helps to reduce the possibility of unauthorized Sentry Key Immobilizer System (SKIS) disarming. The rolling code algorithm ensures security by preventing an override of the SKIS through the unauthorized substitution of the SKREEM or the PCM/ECM. However, the use of this strategy also means that replacement of either the SKREEM or the PCM/ECM units will require a system initialization procedure to restore system operation. The SKREEM retains in memory the ID numbers of any Sentry Key transponder that is programmed into it. A maximum of eight Sentry Key transponders can be programmed into the SKREEM. For added system security, each SKREEM is programmed with a unique Secret Key code. This code is stored in memory, sent over the CAN data bus to the PCM or ECM, and is encoded to the transponder of every Sentry Key that is programmed into the SKREEM. Therefore, the Secret Key code is a common element that is found in every component of the SKIS. Another security code called a PIN, is used to gain access to the SKREEM Secured Access Mode. The Secured Access Mode is required during service to perform the SKIS initialization and Sentry Key transponder programming procedures. The SKREEM also stores the Vehicle Identification Number Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Keyless Entry Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Remote Keyless Entry Module > Page 13838 (VIN) in its memory, which it learns through a CAN data bus message from the PCM or ECM during SKIS initialization. In the event that a SKREEM replacement is required, the Secret Key code can be transferred to the new SKREEM from the PCM or ECM using a diagnostic scan tool and the SKIS initialization procedure. Proper completion of the SKIS initialization will allow the existing Sentry Keys to be programmed into the new SKREEM so that new keys will not be required. In the event that the original Secret Key code cannot be recovered, SKREEM replacement will also require new Sentry Keys. The diagnostic scan tool will alert the technician during the SKIS initialization procedure if new Sentry Keys are required. When the ignition switch is turned to the ON position, the SKREEM transmits an RF signal to excite the transponder in the ignition key. The SKREEM then waits for an RF signal response from the transponder. If the response received identifies the key as valid, the SKREEM sends an electronic valid key message to the PCM/ECM over the CAN bus. If the response received identifies the key as invalid or if no response is received from the key transponder, the SKREEM sends an invalid key message to the PCM/ECM. The PCM/ECM will enable or disable engine operation based upon the status of the SKREEM messages. It is important to note that the default condition in the PCM or ECM is an invalid key ; therefore, if no message is received from the SKREEM by the PCM or ECM, the engine will be disabled and the vehicle immobilized after two seconds of running. The SKREEM also sends security indicator request messages to the EMIC over the CAN data bus to tell the EMIC how to operate the security indicator. The security indicator request message from the SKREEM tells the EMIC to turn the indicator ON for about three seconds each time the ignition switch is turned to the ON position as a bulb test. After completion of the bulb test, the SKREEM sends security indicator request messages to the EMIC to turn the indicator OFF, turn the indicator ON, or to flash the indicator ON and OFF. If the security indicator flashes or stays ON solid after the bulb test, it signifies a SKIS fault. If the SKREEM detects a system malfunction or the SKIS has become ineffective, the security indicator will stay ON solid. If the SKREEM detects an invalid key or if a key transponder-related fault exists, the security indicator will flash. If the vehicle is equipped with the Customer Learn transponder programming feature, the SKREEM will also send messages to the EMIC to flash the security indicator whenever the Customer Learn programming mode is being utilized. . The SKIS performs a self-test each time the ignition switch is turned to the ON position, and will store fault information in the form of a Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) in SKREEM memory if a system malfunction is detected. The hard wired circuits of the SKREEM may be diagnosed using conventional diagnostic tools and procedures. Refer to the appropriate wiring information. However, conventional diagnostic methods will not prove conclusive in the diagnosis of the SKREEM or the electronic controls or communication between other modules and devices that provide some features of the SKIS. The most reliable, efficient, and accurate means to diagnose the SKREEM or the electronic controls and communication related to SKREEM operation requires the use of a diagnostic scan tool. Refer to the appropriate diagnostic information. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Keyless Entry Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 13839 Keyless Entry Module: Testing and Inspection REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY MODULE The most reliable, efficient, and accurate means to diagnose the power lock system requires the use of a scan tool and the proper Diagnostic Procedures information. Refer to the appropriate wiring information. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Keyless Entry Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Remote Keyless Entry Module Keyless Entry Module: Service and Repair Remote Keyless Entry Module Removal REMOVAL See: Sentry Key Remote Entry Module/Removal Installation INSTALLATION See: Sentry Key Remote Entry Module/Installation Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Keyless Entry Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Remote Keyless Entry Module > Page 13842 Keyless Entry Module: Service and Repair Sentry Key Remote Entry Module Removal REMOVAL WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury on vehicles equipped with airbags, disable the Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, airbag, seat belt tensioner, impact sensor, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the SRS. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment. 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. 2. Remove the screw (2) that secures the tilt steering column knob (1) and remove it from the tilt actuator (3) on the left side of the column. 3. From below the steering column, remove the two outboard screws that secure the upper column shroud (1) to the lower shroud (3). 4. Using hand pressure, push inward on both sides of the upper shroud above the parting line of the lower shroud to release the snap features that secure the two shroud halves to each other. 5. Remove the upper shroud from the lower shroud and the steering column. 6. Remove the one center screw that secures the lower shroud to the steering column (4). 7. Remove the lower shroud from the steering column. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Keyless Entry Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Remote Keyless Entry Module > Page 13843 8. Disconnect the wire harness connector (2) from the Sentry Key REmote Entry Module (SKREEM) (1). 9. Remove the screw (3) that secures the SKREEM (1) to the steering column (2). 10. Disengage the antenna ring from around the ignition lock cylinder housing and remove the SKREEM. Installation INSTALLATION WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury on vehicles equipped with airbags, disable the Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, airbag, seat belt tensioner, impact sensor, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the SRS. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Keyless Entry Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Remote Keyless Entry Module > Page 13844 1. Position the Sentry Key REmote Entry Module (SKREEM) (1) onto the steering column (2) with the antenna ring oriented around the ignition lock cylinder housing. 2. Install and tighten the screw (3) that secures the SKREEM to the steering column housing. Tighten the screw to 2 Nm (20 in. lbs.). 3. Reconnect the wire harness connector (2) to the SKREEM (1). 4. Position the lower shroud (3) onto the steering column (4). 5. From below the steering column, install and tighten the one center screw that secures the lower shroud to the steering column. Tighten the screw to 2 Nm (20 in. lbs.). 6. Position the upper shroud (1) onto the steering column over the lower shroud. On vehicles equipped with an automatic transmission, be certain to engage the gearshift lever gap hider into the opening in the right side of both shroud halves. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Keyless Entry Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Remote Keyless Entry Module > Page 13845 7. Align the snap features on the upper shroud with the receptacles in the lower shroud and apply hand pressure to snap them together. 8. Install and tighten the two outboard screws that secure the upper shroud to the lower shroud. Tighten the screws to 2 Nm (20 in. lbs.). 9. Position the tilt steering column knob (1) onto the tilt adjuster actuator (3) on the left side of the steering column, then install and tighten the screw (2) to secure the knob to the actuator. Tighten the screw to 2 Nm (20 in. lbs.). 10. Reconnect the battery negative cable. NOTE: On vehicles equipped with the optional Sentry Key Immobilizer System (SKIS) if the SKREEM is replaced with a new unit, a diagnostic scan tool MUST be used to initialize the new SKREEM and to program at least two Sentry Key transponders before the vehicle can be operated. See: Accessories and Optional Equipment/Antitheft and Alarm Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sun Shade > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Sun Shade: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL 1. Remove the drain channel. See: Sunroof / Moonroof Drain/Service and Repair/Channel-Drain/Removal 2. Push up the front center of the sunshade (1) to pop out the front two feet. 3. Rotate the sunshade (2) so that the other feet (1) are removed from the guide track. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sun Shade > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 13852 Sun Shade: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION 1. Verify the sunshade track is free of obstructions like the trim lace/ring. 2. Start with sunshade (2) at an angle with one foot (1) in the track. 3. Rotate the sunshade so the other rear foot is in the track as well as the 2 other feet (3) on the same side as the first foot. 4. To insert the remaining two feet (2) apply force to the middle front of sunshade (3) and guide them into the track. 5. Check that all the feet are in the right track and verify sunshade operation. 6. Install the drain channel. See: Sunroof / Moonroof Drain/Service and Repair/Channel-Drain/Installation Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Cable > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 23-004-08 > Jan > 08 > Body - Ratcheting Noise When Operating Sunroof Sunroof / Moonroof Cable: Customer Interest Body - Ratcheting Noise When Operating Sunroof NUMBER: 23-004-08 GROUP: Body DATE: January 16, 2008 THIS BULLETIN SUPERSEDES SERVICE BULLETIN 23-045-06 DATED OCTOBER 14, 2006 AND 23-51-06 DATED NOVEMBER 4, 2006. ALL REVISIONS ARE HIGHLIGHTED WITH **ASTERISKS** AND INCLUDE THE ADDITION OF WH/XH/L2 MODELS AND 2008 MODEL YEAR VEHICLES. SUBJECT: Ratcheting Sound During Sunroof Operation OVERVIEW: This bulletin involves replacing the sunroof drive cable conduit. MODELS: 2004 - **2008** (DR) Ram Truck **2007 (L2) 300C (China)** 2005 - **2008** (LE) 300C/300C Touring (International Markets) 2005 - 2008 (LX) 300/Charger/Magnum **2005 - 2008 (WH) Grand Cherokee (International Markets)** 2005 - **2008** (WK) Grand Cherokee **2006 - 2008 (XH) Commander (International Markets)** 2006 - 2008 (XK) Commander NOTE: This bulletin applies to DR/L2/LE/LX/WH/WK models with a Power Sunroof (sales code GWA) built before October 31, 2007 (MDH1031XX) and XH models with a Power Sunroof (sales code GWF) built before December 19, 2007 (MDH1219XX) and XK models with a Power Sunroof (sales code GWF) built before November 07, 2007 (MDH1107XX). SYMPTOM/CONDITION: A ratcheting sound is heard from sunroof module as the glass approaches the full open position. DIAGNOSIS: Lower the headliner to view the rear of the sunroof module assembly. Inspect the cable conduit tube(s) located at the rear corners of the sunroof module assembly for a kinked condition. Kinked condition most frequently occurs at passenger rear corner. If a kinked conduit is discovered, perform the appropriate Repair Procedure based on the vehicle below. PARTS REQUIRED: REPAIR PROCEDURE - DRIL2/LE/LX/WH/WK: 1. Ensure the sunroof module is in the full closed position. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Cable > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 23-004-08 > Jan > 08 > Body - Ratcheting Noise When Operating Sunroof > Page 13861 2. Remove M6 mounting bolts (4) at rear portion of sunroof module. 3. Remove the kinked cable conduit(s) from sunroof module retaining features starting from the end at the metal clip and work back to motor area, see (Fig 1). 4. Assemble new cable conduit, p/n 68003812AA, in reverse order of Step # 3) by inserting the flared end over the exposed end of the drive cable. Insure the flared end is sitting in the notch on the rear bulk head of sunroof module, (Fig 2). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Cable > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 23-004-08 > Jan > 08 > Body - Ratcheting Noise When Operating Sunroof > Page 13862 5. Snap the cable conduit into the retaining features in the rear bulk head (5 places) with the end of the tube retained in spring clip on the aluminum guide. Ensure the clip is within the provided scribe lines on aluminum guide, (Fig 3). 6. Torque the mounting bolts to 9 Nm (80 in. lbs.). 7. Operate Sunroof module. 8. Install headliner. REPAIR PROCEDURE - XH/XK: 1. Put the sunroof in the closed or vent position. 2. Drop headliner right front corner, by removing the right side A-pillar trim, B-pillar trim sun visor, sun visor clip and rear view mirror. 3. Look at and/or feel the drive cable conduit in the radius above the drain hose this is where the conduit will be kinked. 4. Remove 2 sunroof mounting fasteners, (Fig 4). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Cable > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 23-004-08 > Jan > 08 > Body - Ratcheting Noise When Operating Sunroof > Page 13863 5. Remove conduit from clip at side of sunroof module, (Fig 5). 6. Push the conduit up and inboard to release it from the retention feature on the front beam, (Fig 6) item 4. 7. Push the conduit up to release it from the additional retention features, (Fig. 6) item 2. 8. Pull the conduit out from over/off the drive cable. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Cable > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 23-004-08 > Jan > 08 > Body - Ratcheting Noise When Operating Sunroof > Page 13864 9. Slide the new conduit, p/n 68003816AA, back over the drive cable. See (Fig. 6) item 1, to ensure conduit is seated into notch to the rear of the steel drive cable tube. 10. Secure the conduit in the retention features shown in (Fig. 6). 11. Install the conduit in the side clip. 12. Operate the sunroof to ensure the ratcheting noise is eliminated. 13. Install the mounting bolts. 14. Install the headliner, A-pillar trim, sun visor and visor clip. POLICY: Reimbursable within the provisions of the warranty. TIME ALLOWANCE: FAILURE CODE: Disclaimer: This bulletin is supplied as technical information only and is not an authorization for repair. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Cable > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 23-004-08 > Jan > 08 > Body - Ratcheting Noise When Operating Sunroof Sunroof / Moonroof Cable: All Technical Service Bulletins Body - Ratcheting Noise When Operating Sunroof NUMBER: 23-004-08 GROUP: Body DATE: January 16, 2008 THIS BULLETIN SUPERSEDES SERVICE BULLETIN 23-045-06 DATED OCTOBER 14, 2006 AND 23-51-06 DATED NOVEMBER 4, 2006. ALL REVISIONS ARE HIGHLIGHTED WITH **ASTERISKS** AND INCLUDE THE ADDITION OF WH/XH/L2 MODELS AND 2008 MODEL YEAR VEHICLES. SUBJECT: Ratcheting Sound During Sunroof Operation OVERVIEW: This bulletin involves replacing the sunroof drive cable conduit. MODELS: 2004 - **2008** (DR) Ram Truck **2007 (L2) 300C (China)** 2005 - **2008** (LE) 300C/300C Touring (International Markets) 2005 - 2008 (LX) 300/Charger/Magnum **2005 - 2008 (WH) Grand Cherokee (International Markets)** 2005 - **2008** (WK) Grand Cherokee **2006 - 2008 (XH) Commander (International Markets)** 2006 - 2008 (XK) Commander NOTE: This bulletin applies to DR/L2/LE/LX/WH/WK models with a Power Sunroof (sales code GWA) built before October 31, 2007 (MDH1031XX) and XH models with a Power Sunroof (sales code GWF) built before December 19, 2007 (MDH1219XX) and XK models with a Power Sunroof (sales code GWF) built before November 07, 2007 (MDH1107XX). SYMPTOM/CONDITION: A ratcheting sound is heard from sunroof module as the glass approaches the full open position. DIAGNOSIS: Lower the headliner to view the rear of the sunroof module assembly. Inspect the cable conduit tube(s) located at the rear corners of the sunroof module assembly for a kinked condition. Kinked condition most frequently occurs at passenger rear corner. If a kinked conduit is discovered, perform the appropriate Repair Procedure based on the vehicle below. PARTS REQUIRED: REPAIR PROCEDURE - DRIL2/LE/LX/WH/WK: 1. Ensure the sunroof module is in the full closed position. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Cable > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 23-004-08 > Jan > 08 > Body - Ratcheting Noise When Operating Sunroof > Page 13870 2. Remove M6 mounting bolts (4) at rear portion of sunroof module. 3. Remove the kinked cable conduit(s) from sunroof module retaining features starting from the end at the metal clip and work back to motor area, see (Fig 1). 4. Assemble new cable conduit, p/n 68003812AA, in reverse order of Step # 3) by inserting the flared end over the exposed end of the drive cable. Insure the flared end is sitting in the notch on the rear bulk head of sunroof module, (Fig 2). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Cable > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 23-004-08 > Jan > 08 > Body - Ratcheting Noise When Operating Sunroof > Page 13871 5. Snap the cable conduit into the retaining features in the rear bulk head (5 places) with the end of the tube retained in spring clip on the aluminum guide. Ensure the clip is within the provided scribe lines on aluminum guide, (Fig 3). 6. Torque the mounting bolts to 9 Nm (80 in. lbs.). 7. Operate Sunroof module. 8. Install headliner. REPAIR PROCEDURE - XH/XK: 1. Put the sunroof in the closed or vent position. 2. Drop headliner right front corner, by removing the right side A-pillar trim, B-pillar trim sun visor, sun visor clip and rear view mirror. 3. Look at and/or feel the drive cable conduit in the radius above the drain hose this is where the conduit will be kinked. 4. Remove 2 sunroof mounting fasteners, (Fig 4). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Cable > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 23-004-08 > Jan > 08 > Body - Ratcheting Noise When Operating Sunroof > Page 13872 5. Remove conduit from clip at side of sunroof module, (Fig 5). 6. Push the conduit up and inboard to release it from the retention feature on the front beam, (Fig 6) item 4. 7. Push the conduit up to release it from the additional retention features, (Fig. 6) item 2. 8. Pull the conduit out from over/off the drive cable. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Cable > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 23-004-08 > Jan > 08 > Body - Ratcheting Noise When Operating Sunroof > Page 13873 9. Slide the new conduit, p/n 68003816AA, back over the drive cable. See (Fig. 6) item 1, to ensure conduit is seated into notch to the rear of the steel drive cable tube. 10. Secure the conduit in the retention features shown in (Fig. 6). 11. Install the conduit in the side clip. 12. Operate the sunroof to ensure the ratcheting noise is eliminated. 13. Install the mounting bolts. 14. Install the headliner, A-pillar trim, sun visor and visor clip. POLICY: Reimbursable within the provisions of the warranty. TIME ALLOWANCE: FAILURE CODE: Disclaimer: This bulletin is supplied as technical information only and is not an authorization for repair. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Cable > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Sunroof / Moonroof Cable: > 23-017-08 > May > 08 > Body - Tailgate Cables Appear To Be of Unequal Lengths Tailgate Limiter: All Technical Service Bulletins Body - Tailgate Cables Appear To Be of Unequal Lengths NUMBER: 23-017-08 GROUP: Body DATE: May 10, 2008 SUBJECT: Tailgate - Side Check Cables Appear To Be Of Unequal Lengths OVERVIEW: This bulletin involves tensioning the tailgate check cable(s) MODELS: 2008 (DR/DH/D1) Ram Truck (1500/2500/3500) NOTE: This bulletin applies to vehicles built on or before May 07, 2008 (MDH 0507XX). SYMPTOM/CONDITION: One of the two side tailgate check cables may not be properly tensioned. This condition may cause an appearance, to the customer, that the tailgate side check cables are of unequal lengths and may lead to unnecessary replacement of the check cable(s). The left side check cable will more often appear to be the check cable that is longer, or loose in appearance. DIAGNOSIS: If the above condition is present perform the Repair Procedure. REPAIR PROCEDURE: 1. Fully open the tailgate. 2. Locate the tailgate check cable that appears loose or longer in length. 3. Remove the loose / longer in appearance check cable from its attachment point at the cargo box / bed body (Fig. 1). Do not disconnect the loose / longer in appearance check cable from the tailgate. 4. With the other side tailgate check cable still properly attached at both ends, carefully close the tailgate so as not to damage the loose check cable, Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Cable > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Sunroof / Moonroof Cable: > 23-017-08 > May > 08 > Body - Tailgate Cables Appear To Be of Unequal Lengths > Page 13879 bed body, or tailgate. 5. Open the tailgate fully with a hard, rapid motion. Then carefully close the tailgate so as to not damage the loose check cable, bed body, or tailgate. 6. Repeat the above step several times (as necessary). This action will correctly tension and seat the attached check cable 7. Install the loose check cable to the cargo box / bed body and verify appearance of both check cables. POLICY: Reimbursable within the provisions of the warranty. TIME ALLOWANCE: FAILURE CODE: Disclaimer: This bulletin is supplied as technical information only and is not an authorization for repair. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Cable > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Sunroof / Moonroof Cable: > 23-017-08 > May > 08 > Body - Tailgate Cables Appear To Be of Unequal Lengths > Page 13885 bed body, or tailgate. 5. Open the tailgate fully with a hard, rapid motion. Then carefully close the tailgate so as to not damage the loose check cable, bed body, or tailgate. 6. Repeat the above step several times (as necessary). This action will correctly tension and seat the attached check cable 7. Install the loose check cable to the cargo box / bed body and verify appearance of both check cables. POLICY: Reimbursable within the provisions of the warranty. TIME ALLOWANCE: FAILURE CODE: Disclaimer: This bulletin is supplied as technical information only and is not an authorization for repair. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Cable Housing > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Sunroof / Moonroof Cable Housing: > 23-004-08 > Jan > 08 > Body - Ratcheting Noise When Operating Sunroof Sunroof / Moonroof Cable Housing: Customer Interest Body - Ratcheting Noise When Operating Sunroof NUMBER: 23-004-08 GROUP: Body DATE: January 16, 2008 THIS BULLETIN SUPERSEDES SERVICE BULLETIN 23-045-06 DATED OCTOBER 14, 2006 AND 23-51-06 DATED NOVEMBER 4, 2006. ALL REVISIONS ARE HIGHLIGHTED WITH **ASTERISKS** AND INCLUDE THE ADDITION OF WH/XH/L2 MODELS AND 2008 MODEL YEAR VEHICLES. SUBJECT: Ratcheting Sound During Sunroof Operation OVERVIEW: This bulletin involves replacing the sunroof drive cable conduit. MODELS: 2004 - **2008** (DR) Ram Truck **2007 (L2) 300C (China)** 2005 - **2008** (LE) 300C/300C Touring (International Markets) 2005 - 2008 (LX) 300/Charger/Magnum **2005 - 2008 (WH) Grand Cherokee (International Markets)** 2005 - **2008** (WK) Grand Cherokee **2006 - 2008 (XH) Commander (International Markets)** 2006 - 2008 (XK) Commander NOTE: This bulletin applies to DR/L2/LE/LX/WH/WK models with a Power Sunroof (sales code GWA) built before October 31, 2007 (MDH1031XX) and XH models with a Power Sunroof (sales code GWF) built before December 19, 2007 (MDH1219XX) and XK models with a Power Sunroof (sales code GWF) built before November 07, 2007 (MDH1107XX). SYMPTOM/CONDITION: A ratcheting sound is heard from sunroof module as the glass approaches the full open position. DIAGNOSIS: Lower the headliner to view the rear of the sunroof module assembly. Inspect the cable conduit tube(s) located at the rear corners of the sunroof module assembly for a kinked condition. Kinked condition most frequently occurs at passenger rear corner. If a kinked conduit is discovered, perform the appropriate Repair Procedure based on the vehicle below. PARTS REQUIRED: REPAIR PROCEDURE - DRIL2/LE/LX/WH/WK: 1. Ensure the sunroof module is in the full closed position. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Cable Housing > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Sunroof / Moonroof Cable Housing: > 23-004-08 > Jan > 08 > Body - Ratcheting Noise When Operating Sunroof > Page 13894 2. Remove M6 mounting bolts (4) at rear portion of sunroof module. 3. Remove the kinked cable conduit(s) from sunroof module retaining features starting from the end at the metal clip and work back to motor area, see (Fig 1). 4. Assemble new cable conduit, p/n 68003812AA, in reverse order of Step # 3) by inserting the flared end over the exposed end of the drive cable. Insure the flared end is sitting in the notch on the rear bulk head of sunroof module, (Fig 2). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Cable Housing > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Sunroof / Moonroof Cable Housing: > 23-004-08 > Jan > 08 > Body - Ratcheting Noise When Operating Sunroof > Page 13895 5. Snap the cable conduit into the retaining features in the rear bulk head (5 places) with the end of the tube retained in spring clip on the aluminum guide. Ensure the clip is within the provided scribe lines on aluminum guide, (Fig 3). 6. Torque the mounting bolts to 9 Nm (80 in. lbs.). 7. Operate Sunroof module. 8. Install headliner. REPAIR PROCEDURE - XH/XK: 1. Put the sunroof in the closed or vent position. 2. Drop headliner right front corner, by removing the right side A-pillar trim, B-pillar trim sun visor, sun visor clip and rear view mirror. 3. Look at and/or feel the drive cable conduit in the radius above the drain hose this is where the conduit will be kinked. 4. Remove 2 sunroof mounting fasteners, (Fig 4). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Cable Housing > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Sunroof / Moonroof Cable Housing: > 23-004-08 > Jan > 08 > Body - Ratcheting Noise When Operating Sunroof > Page 13896 5. Remove conduit from clip at side of sunroof module, (Fig 5). 6. Push the conduit up and inboard to release it from the retention feature on the front beam, (Fig 6) item 4. 7. Push the conduit up to release it from the additional retention features, (Fig. 6) item 2. 8. Pull the conduit out from over/off the drive cable. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Cable Housing > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Sunroof / Moonroof Cable Housing: > 23-004-08 > Jan > 08 > Body - Ratcheting Noise When Operating Sunroof > Page 13897 9. Slide the new conduit, p/n 68003816AA, back over the drive cable. See (Fig. 6) item 1, to ensure conduit is seated into notch to the rear of the steel drive cable tube. 10. Secure the conduit in the retention features shown in (Fig. 6). 11. Install the conduit in the side clip. 12. Operate the sunroof to ensure the ratcheting noise is eliminated. 13. Install the mounting bolts. 14. Install the headliner, A-pillar trim, sun visor and visor clip. POLICY: Reimbursable within the provisions of the warranty. TIME ALLOWANCE: FAILURE CODE: Disclaimer: This bulletin is supplied as technical information only and is not an authorization for repair. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Cable Housing > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Sunroof / Moonroof Cable Housing: > 23-004-08 > Jan > 08 > Body - Ratcheting Noise When Operating Sunroof Sunroof / Moonroof Cable Housing: All Technical Service Bulletins Body - Ratcheting Noise When Operating Sunroof NUMBER: 23-004-08 GROUP: Body DATE: January 16, 2008 THIS BULLETIN SUPERSEDES SERVICE BULLETIN 23-045-06 DATED OCTOBER 14, 2006 AND 23-51-06 DATED NOVEMBER 4, 2006. ALL REVISIONS ARE HIGHLIGHTED WITH **ASTERISKS** AND INCLUDE THE ADDITION OF WH/XH/L2 MODELS AND 2008 MODEL YEAR VEHICLES. SUBJECT: Ratcheting Sound During Sunroof Operation OVERVIEW: This bulletin involves replacing the sunroof drive cable conduit. MODELS: 2004 - **2008** (DR) Ram Truck **2007 (L2) 300C (China)** 2005 - **2008** (LE) 300C/300C Touring (International Markets) 2005 - 2008 (LX) 300/Charger/Magnum **2005 - 2008 (WH) Grand Cherokee (International Markets)** 2005 - **2008** (WK) Grand Cherokee **2006 - 2008 (XH) Commander (International Markets)** 2006 - 2008 (XK) Commander NOTE: This bulletin applies to DR/L2/LE/LX/WH/WK models with a Power Sunroof (sales code GWA) built before October 31, 2007 (MDH1031XX) and XH models with a Power Sunroof (sales code GWF) built before December 19, 2007 (MDH1219XX) and XK models with a Power Sunroof (sales code GWF) built before November 07, 2007 (MDH1107XX). SYMPTOM/CONDITION: A ratcheting sound is heard from sunroof module as the glass approaches the full open position. DIAGNOSIS: Lower the headliner to view the rear of the sunroof module assembly. Inspect the cable conduit tube(s) located at the rear corners of the sunroof module assembly for a kinked condition. Kinked condition most frequently occurs at passenger rear corner. If a kinked conduit is discovered, perform the appropriate Repair Procedure based on the vehicle below. PARTS REQUIRED: REPAIR PROCEDURE - DRIL2/LE/LX/WH/WK: 1. Ensure the sunroof module is in the full closed position. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Cable Housing > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Sunroof / Moonroof Cable Housing: > 23-004-08 > Jan > 08 > Body - Ratcheting Noise When Operating Sunroof > Page 13903 2. Remove M6 mounting bolts (4) at rear portion of sunroof module. 3. Remove the kinked cable conduit(s) from sunroof module retaining features starting from the end at the metal clip and work back to motor area, see (Fig 1). 4. Assemble new cable conduit, p/n 68003812AA, in reverse order of Step # 3) by inserting the flared end over the exposed end of the drive cable. Insure the flared end is sitting in the notch on the rear bulk head of sunroof module, (Fig 2). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Cable Housing > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Sunroof / Moonroof Cable Housing: > 23-004-08 > Jan > 08 > Body - Ratcheting Noise When Operating Sunroof > Page 13904 5. Snap the cable conduit into the retaining features in the rear bulk head (5 places) with the end of the tube retained in spring clip on the aluminum guide. Ensure the clip is within the provided scribe lines on aluminum guide, (Fig 3). 6. Torque the mounting bolts to 9 Nm (80 in. lbs.). 7. Operate Sunroof module. 8. Install headliner. REPAIR PROCEDURE - XH/XK: 1. Put the sunroof in the closed or vent position. 2. Drop headliner right front corner, by removing the right side A-pillar trim, B-pillar trim sun visor, sun visor clip and rear view mirror. 3. Look at and/or feel the drive cable conduit in the radius above the drain hose this is where the conduit will be kinked. 4. Remove 2 sunroof mounting fasteners, (Fig 4). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Cable Housing > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Sunroof / Moonroof Cable Housing: > 23-004-08 > Jan > 08 > Body - Ratcheting Noise When Operating Sunroof > Page 13905 5. Remove conduit from clip at side of sunroof module, (Fig 5). 6. Push the conduit up and inboard to release it from the retention feature on the front beam, (Fig 6) item 4. 7. Push the conduit up to release it from the additional retention features, (Fig. 6) item 2. 8. Pull the conduit out from over/off the drive cable. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Cable Housing > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Sunroof / Moonroof Cable Housing: > 23-004-08 > Jan > 08 > Body - Ratcheting Noise When Operating Sunroof > Page 13906 9. Slide the new conduit, p/n 68003816AA, back over the drive cable. See (Fig. 6) item 1, to ensure conduit is seated into notch to the rear of the steel drive cable tube. 10. Secure the conduit in the retention features shown in (Fig. 6). 11. Install the conduit in the side clip. 12. Operate the sunroof to ensure the ratcheting noise is eliminated. 13. Install the mounting bolts. 14. Install the headliner, A-pillar trim, sun visor and visor clip. POLICY: Reimbursable within the provisions of the warranty. TIME ALLOWANCE: FAILURE CODE: Disclaimer: This bulletin is supplied as technical information only and is not an authorization for repair. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Motor > Component Information > Diagrams Sunroof / Moonroof Motor: Diagrams Component ID: 217 Component : MOTOR/MODULE-SUNROOF Connector: Name : MOTOR/MODULE-SUNROOF Color : LT. GRAY # of pins : 10 Pin Circuit Description 1-2 Q4 20OR/YL SUNROOF VENT SWITCH SENSE 3 Q3 20OR/TN SUNROOF OPEN SWITCH SENSE 4 D54 20WT CAN B BUS (-) 5 D55 20WT/OR CAN B BUS (+) 6 Z964 14BK GROUND 7 Q5 20OR/LB SUNROOF CLOSE SWITCH SENSE 8 A310 14RD/LB FUSED B(+) 9-10 Q6 20OR/LG SUNROOF SWITCH SUPPLY Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Motor > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Component Tests and General Diagnostics Sunroof / Moonroof Motor: Component Tests and General Diagnostics MOTOR/MODULE - SUNROOF Any diagnosis of the power sunroof system should begin with the use of a scan tool and the proper Diagnostic Procedures Information. The scan tool can provide confirmation that the Controller Area Network (CAN) Data Bus is functional, that all of the electronic modules are sending and receiving the proper messages on the CAN Data Bus, and that the power sunroof motor is being sent the proper hard wired output by the sunroof switch. Refer to the appropriate diagnostic information. NOTE: If there is no sunroof movement when the "OPEN" or "CLOSED" button are pushed but the sunroof operates when the "VENT" button is pushed and held the sunroof motor/module is out of calibration. Complete the sunroof position calibration procedure prior to performing any sunroof diagnostics, See: Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Sunroof Position Calibration. The wire harness connectors for the sunroof motor/module are located above the vehicle headliner. Removal of the headliner may be necessary for access to the connector and proper diagnosis of the motor/module, See: Interior Moulding / Trim/Headliner/Service and Repair/Headliner - Removal . For complete circuit diagrams, refer to the appropriate wiring information. The wiring information includes wiring diagrams, proper wire and connector repair procedures, details of wire harness routing and retention, connector pin-out information and location views for the various wire harness connectors, splices and grounds. 1. Verify that all other power accessories are in proper operating condition. If not, a common electrical problem may exist. 2. Disconnect the sunroof motor/module connector directly at the motor/module (not at the headliner in-line connector). Connect a test light between the harness connector pin 6 and a known good B+ circuit. The test light should illuminate brightly. If OK, go to STEP 3. If not OK repair the ground circuit as necessary. 3. Connect a test light between the harness connector pin 8 and a known good ground. The test light should illuminate brightly. If OK, go to STEP 4. If not OK repair the B+ circuit as necessary. 4. Using an ohmmeter check the sunroof switch feed circuit for continuity between the sunroof motor/module and sunroof switch. Continuity should be present. If OK replace the inoperative motor/module, See: Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Sunroof Motor With Control Unit - Removal . If not OK repair the sunroof switch feed circuit as necessary. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Motor > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Component Tests and General Diagnostics > Page 13912 Sunroof / Moonroof Motor: Programming and Relearning MOTOR/MODULE INITIALIZATION NOTE: Verify the battery is in good condition prior to performing this procedure. Do not leave the vehicle on a battery charger while performing this procedure. If the voltage at the sunroof motor/module drops below 11 volts or exceeds 15 volts at anytime while this procedure is being performed, the motor/module initialization procedure will not be properly completed. 1. Turn the ignition to the RUN position. 2. Press the vent button on the power sunroof switch and hold until the sunroof glass panel has moved to the full vent position and the motor movement has stopped for at least 1 second. 3. Press the close position on the power sunroof switch and release. The sunroof glass panel should continue travel to the full closed position. This will be considered the first sunroof closed position in a series of four sunroof closes. 4. Press the vent button on the power sunroof switch and release. The sunroof glass panel should move to the full vent position. After the sunroof motor/module has stopped, press the close position on the power sunroof switch and release. The sunroof glass panel should continue travel to the full closed position. This will be considered the second sunroof closed position in a series of four sunroof closes. 5. Continue to move the sunroof glass to the "vent" then "closed" positions two more times so that the sunroof glass has moved to the closed position a total of four times starting with the first sunroof close in step 3. 6. Press the open position on the power sunroof switch and release. The sunroof glass panel should continue travel to the full open position. 7. Press the close position on the power sunroof switch and release. The sunroof glass panel should continue travel to the full closed position. This will be considered the first sunroof closed position in a series of five sunroof closes. 8. Press the open position on the power sunroof switch and release. The sunroof glass panel should move to the full open position. After the sunroof motor/module has stopped, press the close position on the power sunroof switch and release. The sunroof glass panel should continue travel to the full closed position. Continue to move the sunroof glass to the "open" then "closed" position four more times so that the sunroof glass has moved to the closed position a total of five times starting with the first sunroof close in step 7. Verify proper EFL calibration by placing a standard pencil at the front of the sunroof and then moving the sunroof to the full closed position. The sunroof should reverse direction upon contact without damage to the pencil. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Motor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures Sunroof / Moonroof Motor: Procedures SUNROOF POSITION CALIBRATION Press the power sunroof switch (Open, Closed, and Vent). If no movement occurs when either the open switch or closed switch is pressed, but the system does move when the vent button is pressed and held, the system is not calibrated. Perform the following procedure to position calibrate the power sunroof system. 1. Turn the ignition to the RUN position. 2. Press the vent button on the power sunroof switch and hold until the sunroof glass panel has moved to the full vent position and the motor movement has stopped for at least 1 second. 3. Press the close switch on the power sunroof switch and hold for a moment (at least 100ms) and release. The sunroof glass panel should continue travel to the full close position. If the sunroof glass panel does not return to the full close position, refer to the appropriate diagnostic information for full system diagnosis. 4. Verify proper system operation. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Motor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 13915 Sunroof / Moonroof Motor: Removal and Replacement Sunroof Motor With Control Unit - Removal REMOVAL WARNING: Do not attempt to move or reposition the sunroof glass panel or drive cables with the motor/module removed. Vehicle/sunroof damage or personal injury may result. WARNING: The sunroof must first be calibrated and the Motor/Module Initialization Procedure must be completed any time a sunroof motor/module is replaced with a new component. Failure to perform this procedure could result in vehicle damage and/or personal injury. See: Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning for the appropriate procedure. 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable. 2. Remove the vehicle headliner, See: Interior Moulding / Trim/Headliner/Service and Repair/Headliner - Removal . 3. Remove the power sunroof motor/module electrical connector (2). 4. Remove the retaining screws (3) and remove the motor/module (1) from the vehicle. Sunroof Motor With Control Unit - Installation INSTALLATION WARNING: Do not attempt to move or reposition the sunroof glass panel or drive cables with the motor/module removed. Vehicle/sunroof damage or personal injury may result. WARNING: The sunroof must first be calibrated and the Motor/Module Initialization Procedure must be completed any time a sunroof motor/module is replaced with a new component. Failure to perform this procedure could result in vehicle damage and/or personal injury. See: Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning for the appropriate procedure. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Motor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 13916 1. Position the power sunroof motor/module (1) in the vehicle. 2. Install the motor/module retaining screws (3). Tighten the screws to 4 Nm (35 in. lbs.). 3. Connect the motor/module electrical connector (2). 4. Partially install the vehicle headliner and connect all remaining sunroof electrical connectors, See: Interior Moulding / Trim/Headliner/Service and Repair/Headliner - Installation . 5. Connect the battery negative cable. 6. Perform the sunroof position calibration, See: Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Sunroof Position Calibration . 7. Perform the Motor/Module Initialization Procedure, See: Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning . 8. Complete the vehicle headliner installation, See: Interior Moulding / Trim/Headliner/Service and Repair/Headliner - Installation . 9. Verify proper operation of the power sunroof system. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Switch > Component Information > Locations Sunroof / Moonroof Switch: Locations Component ID: 512 Component : SWITCH-SUNROOF Connector: Name : SWITCH-SUNROOF Color : BLACK # of pins : 4 A Q4 20OR/YL SUNROOF VENT SWITCH SENSE B Q6 20OR/LG SUNROOF SWITCH SUPPLY C Q3 20OR/TN SUNROOF OPEN SWITCH SENSE D Q5 20OR/LB SUNROOF CLOSE SWITCH SENSE Component Location - 53 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 13920 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 13921 Sunroof / Moonroof Switch: Diagrams Component ID: 512 Component : SWITCH-SUNROOF Connector: Name : SWITCH-SUNROOF Color : BLACK # of pins : 4 A Q4 20OR/YL SUNROOF VENT SWITCH SENSE B Q6 20OR/LG SUNROOF SWITCH SUPPLY C Q3 20OR/TN SUNROOF OPEN SWITCH SENSE D Q5 20OR/LB SUNROOF CLOSE SWITCH SENSE Component Location - 53 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 13922 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Sunroof Switch Sunroof / Moonroof Switch: Description and Operation Sunroof Switch Description DESCRIPTION The power sunroof switch (3) is a combination push-button and rocker switch module mounted in the overhead console. The sunroof switch is a direct contact unit that is directly wired to the sunroof motor/module assembly. The sunroof switch performs the following functions: - Power sunroof open (back of switch pushed) - Power sunroof closed (front of switch pushed) - Power sunroof vent (switch center button pushed) The power sunroof switch is part of the overhead console assembly and cannot be replaced separately. If the switch is damaged or inoperative the overhead console must be replaced, See: Interior Moulding / Trim/Console/Service and Repair/Overhead Console/Removal . Operation OPERATION The power sunroof switch is hard wired to the sunroof motor/module assembly. The switch receives battery current from the motor/module when the ignition switch is in the RUN and ACCESSORY positions. When one of the switch positions is pressed it sends battery current back to the motor/module, signaling it to move the power sunroof to the appropriate position. The motor/module will perform one of the following functions: - Power sunroof open (back of switch pushed) - Power sunroof closed (front of switch pushed) - Power sunroof vent (switch center button pushed) Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 13925 Sunroof / Moonroof Switch: Testing and Inspection SWITCH - POWER SUNROOF For complete circuit diagrams, refer to the appropriate wiring information. The wiring information includes wiring diagrams, proper wire and connector repair procedures, details of wire harness routing and retention, connector pin-out information and location views for the various wire harness connectors, splices and grounds. If completing the appropriate diagnostic information results in the sunroof switch being inoperative, perform the following test prior to switch replacement. 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. 2. Remove the overhead console, See: Interior Moulding / Trim/Console/Service and Repair/Overhead Console/Removal . 3. Disconnect the power sunroof switch wire harness connector. 4. Using an ohmmeter, test the continuity of the power sunroof switch in each switch position. Refer to the POWER SUNROOF SWITCH CONTINUITY TABLE. If OK, inspect the wiring harness and connectors for damage. Use a scan tool and the proper Diagnostic Procedures Information to complete diagnosis of the power sunroof system. If not OK, replace the overhead console. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Track > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Sunroof / Moonroof Track: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL 1. Place the sunroof in the vent position. 2. Remove the sunroof assembly. See: Service and Repair/Removal 3. Remove the motor. See: Sunroof / Moonroof Motor/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Sunroof Motor With Control Unit - Removal 4. Remove the glass. See: Sunroof / Moonroof Panel/Service and Repair/Removal 5. Remove the wind deflector. See: Sunroof / Moonroof Windguard/Service and Repair/Removal 6. Separate the drain channel arms (2) from the guide mechanisms (1) one at a time. CAUTION: Do not pry the channel arms apart at the same time or you could break the drain channel. 7. Slide the drain channel rearward out of the way. 8. Remove the hard stop screw from the frame. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Track > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 13930 9. Push the drive cable and guide plate forward past the hard stop screw location until the glass guide comes loose. 10. Rotate the guide (1) up and out of the front beam (3) and release the front foot (2) from the channel guide. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Track > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 13931 Sunroof / Moonroof Track: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION 1. With the drive cable plate aligned insert the front foot (2) into the guide channel and engage the feet with the front beam (3). 2. Rotate the guide plate (1) inboard until the feet of the guide are engaged into the front beam (2). 3. Push the guide assembly (1) and drive cable rearward past the hard stop location. 4. Install the hard stop screw (2) and push the drive cable and guide assembly (1) up against the hard stop screw (2). 5. Verify that the opposite guide assembly is also positioned up against the hard stop screw. 6. Install the wind deflector as necessary. See: Sunroof / Moonroof Windguard/Service and Repair/Installation Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Track > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 13932 7. Install the motor as necessary. See: Sunroof / Moonroof Motor/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Sunroof Motor With Control Unit Installation 8. Install the drain channel arms (3) into the mechanism (1) holes one at a time with the reinforcements on the inside of mechanism arms (2). CAUTION: Do not pry the channel arms apart at the same time or you could break the drain channel. 9. Install the sunroof assembly into the vehicle. See: Service and Repair/Installation 10. Perform the sunroof position calibration, See: Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Sunroof Position Calibration . 11. Perform the Excessive Force Limitation (EFL) calibration, . 12. Install the glass as necessary. See: Sunroof / Moonroof Panel/Service and Repair/Installation 13. Adjust sunroof glass to fit flush with roof line See: Sunroof / Moonroof Panel/Adjustments . 14. Verify proper operation of the power sunroof system. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Windguard > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Sunroof / Moonroof Windguard: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL 1. Open the sunroof fully. 2. Remove the strap screws (3) from the beam area (1) and release the strap (2). 3. Rotate the deflector up and remove springs (2) from the holes in the frame (1). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Windguard > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 13937 Sunroof / Moonroof Windguard: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION 1. Position the deflector spring arms (2) into the holes of the frame (1). 2. Rotate the deflector down, attach the straps (2) and install the strap screws (1). 3. Verify sunroof operation and alignment. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Drain > Component Information > Service and Repair > Channel-Drain Sunroof / Moonroof Drain: Service and Repair Channel-Drain Removal REMOVAL 1. Remove glass panel. See: Sunroof / Moonroof Panel/Service and Repair/Removal 2. Separate the drain channel arms (2) from the guide mechanisms (1) one at a time. CAUTION: Do not pry the channel arms apart at the same time or you could break the drain channel. 3. Carefully slide the drain channel (1) forward to the notches (2) in the frame and remove from the vehicle. Installation INSTALLATION Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Drain > Component Information > Service and Repair > Channel-Drain > Page 13942 1. Carefully position the drain channel (1) into the notches (2) in the frame and slide rearward. 2. Install the drain channel arms (3) into the mechanism (1) holes one at a time with the reinforcements on the inside of mechanism arms. CAUTION: Do not pry the channel arms apart at the same time or you could break the drain channel. 3. Install the sunroof glass. See: Sunroof / Moonroof Panel/Service and Repair/Installation Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Drain > Component Information > Service and Repair > Channel-Drain > Page 13943 Sunroof / Moonroof Drain: Service and Repair Hose-Drain Removal REMOVAL FRONT HOSES 1. Remove headliner See: Interior Moulding / Trim/Headliner/Service and Repair/Headliner Removal . 2. Disconnect the drain hose from the sunroof housing (1). 3. Separate the lower tube from the grommet in the body (3). 4. Drain any liquid from hose connection, if necessary. 5. Release the clips (2) and remove the tube. REAR HOUSING HOSE 1. Remove headliner See: Interior Moulding / Trim/Headliner/Service and Repair/Headliner Removal . 2. Disconnect the drain hose from the sunroof housing (1).* Front tube shown, rear tube similar. 3. Drain any liquid from hose connection, if necessary. 4. Release the push pin fasteners (2) and separate the lower tube from the grommet in the body (3). Installation INSTALLATION FRONT HOSES Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Drain > Component Information > Service and Repair > Channel-Drain > Page 13944 1. Position the lower portion through the grommet in the body (3). 2. Connect the new drain tube to the sunroof housing (1) and test drainage. 3. Position the tube support clips (2) and seat fully. 4. Install headliner See: Interior Moulding / Trim/Headliner/Service and Repair/Headliner - Installation . REAR HOUSING HOSE 1. Install the rear tube and seat the push pin fasteners (2) fully.* Front tube shown, rear similar. 2. Position the lower portion through the grommet in the body (3). 3. Connect the new drain tube to the sunroof housing (1) and test drainage. 4. Install headliner See: Interior Moulding / Trim/Headliner/Service and Repair/Headliner - Installation . Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Interior Trim Panel > Component Information > Service and Repair > Cover-Guide Mechanism Sunroof / Moonroof Interior Trim Panel: Service and Repair Cover-Guide Mechanism Removal REMOVAL 1. Move the glass panel to the full closed position. 2. Slide sunshade rearward to the open position. 3. Separate the mechanism covers (2) from the tabs (1) on the glass panel. 4. Hold both mechanism covers down and open the sunroof fully. 5. Slide the mechanism covers (1) out the front of the guide in the frame (2). Installation INSTALLATION Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Interior Trim Panel > Component Information > Service and Repair > Cover-Guide Mechanism > Page 13949 1. With the sunroof in the open position, snap the mechanism cover (2) into the lower guide channel. 2. Hold down each cover and close the sunroof. 3. Snap the upper portion of the cover (2) into the retaining clips (1) on the glass panel between the locating features. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Interior Trim Panel > Component Information > Service and Repair > Cover-Guide Mechanism > Page 13950 Sunroof / Moonroof Interior Trim Panel: Service and Repair Trim Ring Removal REMOVAL 1. Remove the headliner. See: Interior Moulding / Trim/Headliner/Service and Repair/Headliner Removal 2. Remove the 12 nuts (1) and roll the trim ring off the headliner off the retaining flanges (2). Installation INSTALLATION 1. Position trim ring support flanges (2) over the headliner and seat the trim ring fully. 2. Install the 12 nuts (1) onto the support studs. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Panel > Component Information > Adjustments Sunroof / Moonroof Panel: Adjustments ADJUSTMENT 1. Move the sunshade rearward to the open position. 2. Separate the mechanism covers (2) from the tabs (1) on the glass panel. 3. Verify the sunroof glass panel is in the fully closed position. 4. Loosen the forward attaching screws (3) on each side enough to permit the front of the glass to adjust up or down. 5. Adjust the front surface of the sunroof glass panel 0.00 mm to 2 mm (0.00 in. to 0.08 in.) below the top surface of the roof. 6. Tighten the front glass panel attaching screws to 3.5 Nm (30 in. lbs.). 7. Loosen the rear screws (3) on each side enough to make the rear adjustment. 8. Adjust the rear surface of the sunroof glass panel 0.00 mm to 2 mm (0.03 in. to 0.08 in.) above the top surface of the roof. 9. Tighten the rear glass panel attaching screws to 3.5 Nm (30 in. lbs.). 10. Check for proper fit. If not OK, repeat glass panel adjustment. 11. Position the mechanism covers (2) over the glass tabs (1) between the locating features and seat fully. 12. Verify sunroof operation and alignment. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Panel > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Sunroof / Moonroof Panel: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL 1. Move the glass panel to the full closed position. 2. Slide sunshade rearward to the open position. 3. Separate the mechanism covers (2) from the tabs (1) on the glass panel. 4. Remove the glass panel screws (3). 5. Lift off glass panel and remove from vehicle. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Panel > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 13956 Sunroof / Moonroof Panel: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION 1. Position glass panel on to mechanism lift arms. CAUTION: Verify that the retaining tabs are located on the INSIDE of the guide mechanism arms. 2. Start the attaching screws (3). 3. Connect a 12v power supply and verify that the sunroof is in the closed position. 4. Adjust sunroof glass to fit flush with roof line See: Adjustments . 5. Tighten the screws (3) to 3.5 Nm (30 in. lbs.). 6. Position the mechanism covers (2) over the glass tabs (1) between the locating features and seat fully. 7. Verify sunroof operation and alignment. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Head Rest > Component Information > Service and Repair > Headrest - Removal Head Rest: Service and Repair Headrest - Removal REMOVAL 1. Raise the headrest. 2. Press the headrest release button and remove the headrest. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Head Rest > Component Information > Service and Repair > Headrest - Removal > Page 13962 Head Rest: Service and Repair Headrest - Installation INSTALLATION 1. Position the headrest. 2. Press the release button and install the headrest. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Memory Positioning Systems > System Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Memory Positioning Systems: Diagram Information and Instructions Warnings WARNINGS - GENERAL WARNINGS provide information to prevent personal injury and vehicle damage. Below is a list of general warnings that should be followed any time a vehicle is being serviced. WARNING: Always wear safety glasses for eye protection. WARNING: Use safety stands anytime a procedure requires being under a vehicle. WARNING: Be sure that the ignition switch always is in the off position, unless the procedure requires it to be on. WARNING: Set the parking brake when working on any vehicle. An automatic transmission should be in park. A manual transmission should be in neutral. WARNING: Operate the engine only in a well-ventilated area. WARNING: Keep away from moving parts when the engine is running, especially the fan and belts. WARNING: To prevent serious burns, avoid contact with hot parts such as the radiator, exhaust manifold(s), tail pipe, catalytic converter and muffler. WARNING: Do not allow flame or sparks near the battery. Gases are always present in and around the battery. WARNING: Always remove rings, watches, loose hanging jewelry and avoid loose clothing. How to Use Wiring Diagrams DESCRIPTION - HOW TO USE WIRING DIAGRAMS DaimlerChrysler Corporation wiring diagrams are designed to provide information regarding the vehicles wiring content. In order to effectively use the wiring diagrams to diagnose and repair DaimlerChrysler Corporation vehicles, it is important to understand all of their features and characteristics. Diagrams are arranged such that the power (B+) side of the circuit is placed near the top of the page, and the ground (B-) side of the circuit is placed near the bottom of the page. All switches, components, and modules are shown in the at rest position with the doors closed and the key removed from the ignition. Components are shown two ways. A solid line around a component indicates that the component is complete. A dashed line around the component indicates that the component is being shown is not complete. Incomplete components have a reference number to indicate the page where the component is shown complete. It is important to realize that no attempt is made on the diagrams to represent components and wiring as they appear on the vehicle. For example, a short piece of wire is treated the same as a long one. In addition, switches and other components are shown as simply as possible, with regard to function only. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Memory Positioning Systems > System Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13967 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Memory Positioning Systems > System Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13968 SYMBOLS International symbols are used throughout the wiring diagrams. These symbols are consistent with those being used around the world. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Memory Positioning Systems > System Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13969 TERMINOLOGY This is a list of terms and definitions used in the wiring diagrams. LHD - Left Hand Drive Vehicles RHD - Right Hand Drive Vehicles ATX - Automatic Transmissions-Front Wheel Drive MTX Manual Transmissions-Front Wheel Drive Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Memory Positioning Systems > System Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13970 AT - Automatic Transmissions-Rear Wheel Drive MT - Manual Transmissions-Rear Wheel Drive SOHC - Single Over Head Cam Engine DOHC - Double Over Head Cam Engine Export - Vehicles Built For Sale In Markets Other Than North America Except Export - Vehicles Built For Sale In North America Circuit Functions DESCRIPTION - CIRCUIT FUNCTIONS All circuits in the diagrams use an alpha/numeric code to identify the wire and it's function. To identify which circuit code applies to a system, refer to the Circuit Identification Code Chart. This chart shows the main circuits only and does not show the secondary codes that may apply to some models. Circuit Information DESCRIPTION - CIRCUIT INFORMATION Each wire shown in the diagrams contains a code which identifies the main circuit, a specific part of the main circuit, gage of wire, and color. An example would be A 2 18 LB/YL. This is a Battery Feed circuit, level two, eighteen gauge, light blue with a yellow tracer. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Memory Positioning Systems > System Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13971 Connector, Ground and Splice Information DESCRIPTION - CONNECTOR, GROUND AND SPLICE INFORMATION CAUTION: Not all connectors are serviced. Some connectors are serviced only with a harness. A typical example might be the Supplemental Restraint System connectors. Always check parts availability before attempting a repair. IDENTIFICATION In-line connectors are identified by a number, as follows: - In-line connectors located in the engine compartment are C100 series numbers. - In-line connectors located in the instrument panel area are C200 series numbers. - In-line connectors located in the body are C300 series numbers. - Jumper harness connectors are C400 series numbers. - Grounds and ground connectors are identified with a "G" and follow the same series numbering as the in-line connectors. - Splices are identified with an "S" and follow the same series numbering as the in-line connectors. In addition, S001-S099 numbers are located in the engine compartment. - Component connectors are identified by the component name instead of a number. Multiple connectors on a component use a C1, C2, etc. identifier. LOCATIONS Vehicle/Locations contains the master connector/ground/splice location index charts with hyperlinks to the applicable location illustrations. The illustrations contain the connector name (or number)/ground number/splice number and component identification. The abbreviation T/O is used in the component location section to indicate a point in which the wiring harness branches out to a component. The abbreviation N/S means Not Shown in the illustrations Section Identification and Information DESCRIPTION - SECTION IDENTIFICATION AND INFORMATION The wiring diagrams are grouped into individual sections. If a component is most likely found in a particular group, it will be shown complete (all wires, Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Memory Positioning Systems > System Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13972 connectors, and pins) within that group. For example, the Auto Shutdown Relay is most likely to be found in Powertrain Management, so it is shown there complete. It can, however, be shown partially in another group if it contains some associated wiring. Splice diagrams show the entire splice and provide references to other sections the splices serves. Splice Information only contains splice diagrams that are not shown in their entirety somewhere else in the wiring diagrams. Connector Pin-Outs shows each connector and the circuits involved with that connector. The connectors are identified using the name/number on the diagram pages. Removal REMOVAL 1. Disconnect battery. 2. Release Connector Lock (2). 3. Disconnect the connector (3) being repaired from its mating half/component. 4. Remove the dress cover (if applicable) (1). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Memory Positioning Systems > System Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13973 5. Release the Secondary Terminal Lock, if required (1). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Memory Positioning Systems > System Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13974 6. Position the connector locking finger away from the terminal using the proper special tool. Pull on the wire to remove the terminal from the connector. Installation Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Memory Positioning Systems > System Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13975 INSTALLATION 1. Insert the removed terminal in the same cavity on the repair connector. 2. Repeat steps for each terminal in the connector, being sure that all wires are inserted into the proper cavities. For additional connector pin-out identification, refer to the wiring diagrams. 3. When the connector is re-assembled, the secondary terminal lock must be placed in the locked position to prevent terminal push out. 4. Replace dress cover (if applicable). 5. Connect connector to its mating half/component. 6. Connect battery and test all affected systems. Removal REMOVAL 1. Disconnect the battery. 2. Locate the diode in the harness, and remove the protective covering. 3. Remove the diode from the harness, pay attention to the current flow direction (1) (2) (3). Installation INSTALLATION 1. Remove the insulation from the wires in the harness. Only remove enough insulation to solder in the new diode. 2. Install the new diode in the harness, making sure current flow is correct. If necessary, refer to the appropriate wiring diagram for current flow. 3. Solder the connection together using rosin core type solder only. Do not use acid core solder. 4. Tape the diode to the harness using electrical tape. Make sure the diode is completely sealed from the elements. 5. Re-connect the battery and test affected systems. Removal REMOVAL 1. Follow steps for removing terminals described in the connector removal section. 2. Cut the wire 6 inches from the back of the connector. Installation INSTALLATION 1. Select a wire from the terminal repair kit that best matches the color and gage of the wire being repaired. 2. Cut the repair wire to the proper length and remove one-half (1/2) inch of insulation. 3. Splice the repair wire to the wire harness (see wire splicing procedure). See: Service Procedures/Wire Splicing 4. Insert the repaired wire into the connector. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Memory Positioning Systems > System Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13976 5. Install the connector locking wedge, if required, and reconnect the connector to its mating half/component. 6. Re-tape the wire harness starting at 1-1/2 inches behind the connector and 2 inches past the repair. 7. Connect battery and test all affected systems. Wire Splicing STANDARD PROCEDURE - WIRE SPLICING When splicing a wire, it is important that the correct gage be used as shown in the wiring diagrams. 1. Remove one-half (1/2) inch of insulation from each wire that needs to be spliced. 2. Place a piece of adhesive lined heat shrink tubing on one side of the wire. Make sure the tubing will be long enough to cover and seal the entire repair area. 3. Place the strands of wire overlapping each other inside of the splice clip (1). 4. Using crimping tool (1), Mopar p/n 05019912AA, crimp the splice clip and wires together. 5. Solder (3) the connection (2) together using rosin core type solder (1) only. CAUTION: DO NOT USE ACID CORE SOLDER. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Memory Positioning Systems > System Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13977 6. Center the heat shrink tubing (2) over the joint and heat using a heat gun. Heat the joint until the tubing is tightly sealed and sealant (1) comes out of both ends of the tubing. Special Tools WIRING/TERMINAL PROBING TOOL PACKAGE 6807 TERMINAL PICK TOOL SET 6680 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Memory Positioning Systems > System Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13978 TERMINAL REMOVING TOOLS 6932 AND 8638 TERMINAL REMOVING TOOL 6934 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Memory Positioning Systems > System Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13979 Memory Positioning Systems: Diagnostic Aids Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) Sensitive Devices STANDARD PROCEDURE - ELECTROSTATIC DISCHARGE (ESD) SENSITIVE DEVICES All ESD sensitive components are solid state and a symbol is used to indicate this. When handling any component with this symbol, comply with the following procedures to reduce the possibility of electrostatic charge build up on the body and inadvertent discharge into the component. If it is not known whether the part is ESD sensitive, assume that it is. 1. Always touch a known good ground before handling the part. This should be repeated while handling the part and more frequently after sliding across a seat, sitting down from a standing position, or walking a distance. 2. Avoid touching electrical terminals of the part, unless instructed to do so by a written procedure. 3. When using a voltmeter, be sure to connect the ground lead first. 4. Do not remove the part from it's protective packing until it is time to install the part. 5. Before removing the part from it's package, ground the package to a known good ground on the vehicle. Testing Of Voltage Potential STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING OF VOLTAGE POTENTIAL 1. Connect the ground lead of a voltmeter to a known good ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the voltmeter to the selected test point. The vehicle ignition may need to be turned ON to check voltage. Refer to the appropriate test procedure. Testing For Continuity Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Memory Positioning Systems > System Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13980 STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING FOR CONTINUITY 1. Remove the fuse (1) for the circuit being checked or, disconnect the battery. 2. Connect one lead of the ohmmeter to one side of the circuit being tested 3. Connect the other lead to the other end of the circuit being tested. Low or no resistance means good continuity. Testing For A Short To Ground STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING FOR A SHORT TO GROUND 1. Remove the fuse and disconnect all items involved with the fuse. 2. Connect a test light or a voltmeter across the terminals of the fuse. 3. Starting at the fuse block, wiggle the wiring harness about six to eight inches apart and watch the voltmeter/test lamp. 4. If the voltmeter registers voltage or the test lamp glows, there is a short to ground in that general area of the wiring harness. Testing For A Short To Ground On Fuses Powering Several Loads STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING FOR A SHORT TO GROUND ON FUSES POWERING SEVERAL LOADS 1. Refer to the wiring diagrams and disconnect or isolate all items on the suspected fused circuits. 2. Replace the blown fuse. 3. Supply power to the fuse by turning ON the ignition switch or re-connecting the battery. 4. Start connecting or energizing the items in the fuse circuit one at a time. When the fuse blows the circuit with the short to ground has been isolated. Testing For A Voltage Drop STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING FOR A VOLTAGE DROP Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Memory Positioning Systems > System Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13981 1. Connect the positive lead of the voltmeter to the side of the circuit closest to the battery. 2. Connect the other lead of the voltmeter to the other side of the switch, component or circuit. 3. Operate the item. 4. The voltmeter will show the difference in voltage between the two points. Troubleshooting Wiring Problems DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING - WIRING HARNESS TROUBLESHOOTING TOOLS When diagnosing a problem in an electrical circuit there are several common tools necessary. These tools are listed and explained below. - Jumper Wire - This is a test wire used to connect two points of a circuit. It can be used to bypass an open in a circuit. WARNING: Never use a jumper wire across a load, such as a motor, connected between a battery feed and ground. - Voltmeter - Used to check for voltage on a circuit. Always connect the black lead to a known good ground and the red lead to the positive side of the circuit. CAUTION: Most of the electrical components used in today's vehicles are Solid State. When checking voltages in these circuits, use a meter with a 10 - megohm or greater impedance rating. - Ohmmeter - Used to check the resistance between two points of a circuit. Low or no resistance in a circuit means good continuity. CAUTION: Most of the electrical components used in today's vehicles are Solid State. When checking resistance in these circuits use a meter with a 10 - megohm or greater impedance rating. In addition, make sure the power is disconnected from the circuit. Circuits that are powered up by the vehicle's electrical system can cause damage to the equipment and provide false readings. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Memory Positioning Systems > System Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 13982 - Probing Tools - These tools are used for probing terminals in connectors. Select the proper size tool from Special Tool Package 6807, and insert the probing end (2) into the terminal being tested. Use the other end of the tool (1) to insert the meter probe. INTERMITTENT AND POOR CONNECTIONS Most intermittent electrical problems are caused by faulty electrical connections or wiring. It is also possible for a sticking component or relay to cause a problem. Before condemning a component or wiring assembly, check the following items. - Connectors are fully seated - Spread terminals, or terminal push out - Terminals in the wiring assembly are fully seated into the connector/component and locked into position - Dirt or corrosion on the terminals. Any amount of corrosion or dirt could cause an intermittent problem - Damaged connector/component casing exposing the item to dirt or moisture - Wire insulation that has rubbed through causing a short to ground - Some or all of the wiring strands broken inside of the insulation - Wiring broken inside of the insulation TROUBLESHOOTING WIRING PROBLEMS When troubleshooting wiring problems there are six steps which can aid in the procedure. The steps are listed and explained below. Always check for non-factory items added to the vehicle before doing any diagnosis. If the vehicle is equipped with these items, disconnect them to verify these add-on items are not the cause of the problem. 1. Verify the problem. 2. Verify any related symptoms. Do this by performing operational checks on components that are in the same circuit. Refer to the wiring diagrams. 3. Analyze the symptoms. Use the wiring diagrams to determine what the circuit is doing, where the problem most likely is occurring and where the diagnosis will continue. 4. Isolate the problem area. 5. Repair the problem area. 6. Verify the proper operation. For this step, check for proper operation of all items on the repaired circuit. Refer to the wiring diagrams. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Power Seat Motor > Component Information > Locations > Motor-Seat Adjuster-Driver Horizontal Power Seat Motor: Locations Motor-Seat Adjuster-Driver Horizontal Component ID: 223 Component : MOTOR-SEAT ADJUSTER-DRIVER HORIZONTAL Connector: Name : MOTOR-SEAT ADJUSTER-DRIVER HORIZONTAL Color : # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (HD) Pin Circuit Description 1 P17 12LG/DG DRIVER SEAT HORIZONTAL REARWARD DRIVER 2 P15 12LG/BR DRIVER SEAT HORIZONTAL FORWARD DRIVER Component Location - 66 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Power Seat Motor > Component Information > Locations > Motor-Seat Adjuster-Driver Horizontal > Page 13987 Connector: Name : MOTOR-SEAT ADJUSTER-DRIVER HORIZONTAL Color : BLACK # of pins : 5 Qualifier : (LD) Pin Circuit Description 1 P15 12LG/WT DRIVER SEAT HORIZONTAL FORWARD DRIVER 2-3-4-- Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Power Seat Motor > Component Information > Locations > Motor-Seat Adjuster-Driver Horizontal > Page 13988 5 P17 12LG/DG DRIVER SEAT HORIZONTAL REARWARD DRIVER Component Location - 66 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Power Seat Motor > Component Information > Locations > Motor-Seat Adjuster-Driver Horizontal > Page 13989 Power Seat Motor: Locations Motor-Seat Adjuster-Front Driver Vertical Component ID: 224 Component : MOTOR-SEAT ADJUSTER-FRONT DRIVER VERTICAL Connector: Name : MOTOR-SEAT ADJUSTER-FRONT DRIVER VERTICAL Color : # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (HD) Pin Circuit Description 1 P19 12LG/LB DRIVER SEAT FRONT UP DRIVER 2 P21 12LG/TN DRIVER SEAT FRONT DOWN DRIVER Component Location - 66 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Power Seat Motor > Component Information > Locations > Motor-Seat Adjuster-Driver Horizontal > Page 13990 Connector: Name : MOTOR-SEAT ADJUSTER-FRONT DRIVER VERTICAL Color : BLACK # of pins : 5 Qualifier : (LD) Pin Circuit Description 1 P21 12LG/TN DRIVER SEAT FRONT DOWN DRIVER 2-3-4-- Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Power Seat Motor > Component Information > Locations > Motor-Seat Adjuster-Driver Horizontal > Page 13991 5 P19 12LG/LB DRIVER SEAT FRONT UP DRIVER Component Location - 66 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Power Seat Motor > Component Information > Locations > Motor-Seat Adjuster-Driver Horizontal > Page 13992 Power Seat Motor: Locations Motor-Seat Adjuster-Front Passenger Vertical Component ID: 225 Component : MOTOR-SEAT ADJUSTER-FRONT PASSENGER VERTICAL Connector: Name : MOTOR-SEAT ADJUSTER-FRONT PASSENGER VERTICAL Color : # of pins : 2 Pin Circuit Description 1 P18 12LG/OR PASSENGER SEAT FRONT DOWN DRIVER 2 P20 12LG/LB PASSENGER SEAT FRONT UP DRIVER Component Location - 67 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Power Seat Motor > Component Information > Locations > Motor-Seat Adjuster-Driver Horizontal > Page 13993 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Power Seat Motor > Component Information > Locations > Motor-Seat Adjuster-Driver Horizontal > Page 13994 Power Seat Motor: Locations Motor-Seat Adjuster-Passenger Horizontal Component ID: 226 Component : MOTOR-SEAT ADJUSTER-PASSENGER HORIZONTAL Connector: Name : MOTOR-SEAT ADJUSTER-PASSENGER HORIZONTAL Color : # of pins : 2 Pin Circuit Description 1 P16 12LG/BR PASSENGER SEAT HORIZONTAL REARWARD DRIVER 2 P14 12LG/OR PASSENGER SEAT HORIZONTAL FORWARD DRIVER Component Location - 67 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Power Seat Motor > Component Information > Locations > Motor-Seat Adjuster-Driver Horizontal > Page 13995 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Power Seat Motor > Component Information > Locations > Motor-Seat Adjuster-Driver Horizontal > Page 13996 Power Seat Motor: Locations Motor-Seat Adjuster-Driver Horizontal Component ID: 223 Component : MOTOR-SEAT ADJUSTER-DRIVER HORIZONTAL Connector: Name : MOTOR-SEAT ADJUSTER-DRIVER HORIZONTAL Color : # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (HD) Pin Circuit Description 1 P17 12LG/DG DRIVER SEAT HORIZONTAL REARWARD DRIVER 2 P15 12LG/BR DRIVER SEAT HORIZONTAL FORWARD DRIVER Component Location - 66 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Power Seat Motor > Component Information > Locations > Motor-Seat Adjuster-Driver Horizontal > Page 13997 Connector: Name : MOTOR-SEAT ADJUSTER-DRIVER HORIZONTAL Color : BLACK # of pins : 5 Qualifier : (LD) Pin Circuit Description 1 P15 12LG/WT DRIVER SEAT HORIZONTAL FORWARD DRIVER 2-3-4-- Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Power Seat Motor > Component Information > Locations > Motor-Seat Adjuster-Driver Horizontal > Page 13998 5 P17 12LG/DG DRIVER SEAT HORIZONTAL REARWARD DRIVER Component Location - 66 Motor-Seat Adjuster-Front Driver Vertical Component ID: 224 Component : MOTOR-SEAT ADJUSTER-FRONT DRIVER VERTICAL Connector: Name : MOTOR-SEAT ADJUSTER-FRONT DRIVER VERTICAL Color : # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (HD) Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Power Seat Motor > Component Information > Locations > Motor-Seat Adjuster-Driver Horizontal > Page 13999 Pin Circuit Description 1 P19 12LG/LB DRIVER SEAT FRONT UP DRIVER 2 P21 12LG/TN DRIVER SEAT FRONT DOWN DRIVER Component Location - 66 Connector: Name : MOTOR-SEAT ADJUSTER-FRONT DRIVER VERTICAL Color : BLACK # of pins : 5 Qualifier : (LD) Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Power Seat Motor > Component Information > Locations > Motor-Seat Adjuster-Driver Horizontal > Page 14000 Pin Circuit Description 1 P21 12LG/TN DRIVER SEAT FRONT DOWN DRIVER 2-3-4-5 P19 12LG/LB DRIVER SEAT FRONT UP DRIVER Component Location - 66 Motor-Seat Adjuster-Front Passenger Vertical Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Power Seat Motor > Component Information > Locations > Motor-Seat Adjuster-Driver Horizontal > Page 14001 Component ID: 225 Component : MOTOR-SEAT ADJUSTER-FRONT PASSENGER VERTICAL Connector: Name : MOTOR-SEAT ADJUSTER-FRONT PASSENGER VERTICAL Color : # of pins : 2 Pin Circuit Description 1 P18 12LG/OR PASSENGER SEAT FRONT DOWN DRIVER 2 P20 12LG/LB PASSENGER SEAT FRONT UP DRIVER Component Location - 67 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Power Seat Motor > Component Information > Locations > Motor-Seat Adjuster-Driver Horizontal > Page 14002 Motor-Seat Adjuster-Passenger Horizontal Component ID: 226 Component : MOTOR-SEAT ADJUSTER-PASSENGER HORIZONTAL Connector: Name : MOTOR-SEAT ADJUSTER-PASSENGER HORIZONTAL Color : # of pins : 2 Pin Circuit Description Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Power Seat Motor > Component Information > Locations > Motor-Seat Adjuster-Driver Horizontal > Page 14003 1 P16 12LG/BR PASSENGER SEAT HORIZONTAL REARWARD DRIVER 2 P14 12LG/OR PASSENGER SEAT HORIZONTAL FORWARD DRIVER Component Location - 67 Motor-Seat Adjuster-Rear Driver Vertical Component ID: 227 Component : MOTOR-SEAT ADJUSTER-REAR DRIVER VERTICAL Connector: Name : MOTOR-SEAT ADJUSTER-REAR DRIVER VERTICAL Color : # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (HD) Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Power Seat Motor > Component Information > Locations > Motor-Seat Adjuster-Driver Horizontal > Page 14004 Pin Circuit Description 1 P11 12LG/YL DRIVER SEAT REAR UP DRIVER 2 P13 12LG/OR DRIVER SEAT REAR DOWN DRIVER Component Location - 66 Connector: Name : MOTOR-SEAT ADJUSTER-REAR DRIVER VERTICAL Color : BLACK # of pins : 5 Qualifier : (LD) Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Power Seat Motor > Component Information > Locations > Motor-Seat Adjuster-Driver Horizontal > Page 14005 Pin Circuit Description 1 P11 12LG/YL DRIVER SEAT REAR UP DRIVER 2-3-4-5 P13 12LG/OR DRIVER SEAT REAR DOWN DRIVER Component Location - 66 Motor-Seat Adjuster-Rear Passenger Vertical Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Power Seat Motor > Component Information > Locations > Motor-Seat Adjuster-Driver Horizontal > Page 14006 Component ID: 228 Component : MOTOR-SEAT ADJUSTER-REAR PASSENGER VERTICAL Connector: Name : MOTOR-SEAT ADJUSTER-REAR PASSENGER VERTICAL Color : # of pins : 2 Pin Circuit Description 1 P10 12LG/TN PASSENGER SEAT REAR DOWN DRIVER 2 P12 12LG/YL PASSENGER SEAT REAR UP DRIVER Component Location - 67 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Power Seat Motor > Component Information > Locations > Motor-Seat Adjuster-Driver Horizontal > Page 14007 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Power Seat Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Motor-Seat Adjuster-Driver Horizontal Power Seat Motor: Diagrams Motor-Seat Adjuster-Driver Horizontal Component ID: 223 Component : MOTOR-SEAT ADJUSTER-DRIVER HORIZONTAL Connector: Name : MOTOR-SEAT ADJUSTER-DRIVER HORIZONTAL Color : # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (HD) Pin Circuit Description 1 P17 12LG/DG DRIVER SEAT HORIZONTAL REARWARD DRIVER 2 P15 12LG/BR DRIVER SEAT HORIZONTAL FORWARD DRIVER Component Location - 66 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Power Seat Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Motor-Seat Adjuster-Driver Horizontal > Page 14010 Connector: Name : MOTOR-SEAT ADJUSTER-DRIVER HORIZONTAL Color : BLACK # of pins : 5 Qualifier : (LD) Pin Circuit Description 1 P15 12LG/WT DRIVER SEAT HORIZONTAL FORWARD DRIVER 2-3-4-- Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Power Seat Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Motor-Seat Adjuster-Driver Horizontal > Page 14011 5 P17 12LG/DG DRIVER SEAT HORIZONTAL REARWARD DRIVER Component Location - 66 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Power Seat Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Motor-Seat Adjuster-Driver Horizontal > Page 14012 Power Seat Motor: Diagrams Motor-Seat Adjuster-Front Driver Vertical Component ID: 224 Component : MOTOR-SEAT ADJUSTER-FRONT DRIVER VERTICAL Connector: Name : MOTOR-SEAT ADJUSTER-FRONT DRIVER VERTICAL Color : # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (HD) Pin Circuit Description 1 P19 12LG/LB DRIVER SEAT FRONT UP DRIVER 2 P21 12LG/TN DRIVER SEAT FRONT DOWN DRIVER Component Location - 66 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Power Seat Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Motor-Seat Adjuster-Driver Horizontal > Page 14013 Connector: Name : MOTOR-SEAT ADJUSTER-FRONT DRIVER VERTICAL Color : BLACK # of pins : 5 Qualifier : (LD) Pin Circuit Description 1 P21 12LG/TN DRIVER SEAT FRONT DOWN DRIVER 2-3-4-- Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Power Seat Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Motor-Seat Adjuster-Driver Horizontal > Page 14014 5 P19 12LG/LB DRIVER SEAT FRONT UP DRIVER Component Location - 66 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Power Seat Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Motor-Seat Adjuster-Driver Horizontal > Page 14015 Power Seat Motor: Diagrams Motor-Seat Adjuster-Front Passenger Vertical Component ID: 225 Component : MOTOR-SEAT ADJUSTER-FRONT PASSENGER VERTICAL Connector: Name : MOTOR-SEAT ADJUSTER-FRONT PASSENGER VERTICAL Color : # of pins : 2 Pin Circuit Description 1 P18 12LG/OR PASSENGER SEAT FRONT DOWN DRIVER 2 P20 12LG/LB PASSENGER SEAT FRONT UP DRIVER Component Location - 67 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Power Seat Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Motor-Seat Adjuster-Driver Horizontal > Page 14016 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Power Seat Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Motor-Seat Adjuster-Driver Horizontal > Page 14017 Power Seat Motor: Diagrams Motor-Seat Adjuster-Passenger Horizontal Component ID: 226 Component : MOTOR-SEAT ADJUSTER-PASSENGER HORIZONTAL Connector: Name : MOTOR-SEAT ADJUSTER-PASSENGER HORIZONTAL Color : # of pins : 2 Pin Circuit Description 1 P16 12LG/BR PASSENGER SEAT HORIZONTAL REARWARD DRIVER 2 P14 12LG/OR PASSENGER SEAT HORIZONTAL FORWARD DRIVER Component Location - 67 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Power Seat Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Motor-Seat Adjuster-Driver Horizontal > Page 14018 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Power Seat Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Motor-Seat Adjuster-Driver Horizontal > Page 14019 Power Seat Motor: Diagrams Motor-Seat Adjuster-Driver Horizontal Component ID: 223 Component : MOTOR-SEAT ADJUSTER-DRIVER HORIZONTAL Connector: Name : MOTOR-SEAT ADJUSTER-DRIVER HORIZONTAL Color : # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (HD) Pin Circuit Description 1 P17 12LG/DG DRIVER SEAT HORIZONTAL REARWARD DRIVER 2 P15 12LG/BR DRIVER SEAT HORIZONTAL FORWARD DRIVER Component Location - 66 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Power Seat Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Motor-Seat Adjuster-Driver Horizontal > Page 14020 Connector: Name : MOTOR-SEAT ADJUSTER-DRIVER HORIZONTAL Color : BLACK # of pins : 5 Qualifier : (LD) Pin Circuit Description 1 P15 12LG/WT DRIVER SEAT HORIZONTAL FORWARD DRIVER 2-3-4-- Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Power Seat Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Motor-Seat Adjuster-Driver Horizontal > Page 14021 5 P17 12LG/DG DRIVER SEAT HORIZONTAL REARWARD DRIVER Component Location - 66 Motor-Seat Adjuster-Front Driver Vertical Component ID: 224 Component : MOTOR-SEAT ADJUSTER-FRONT DRIVER VERTICAL Connector: Name : MOTOR-SEAT ADJUSTER-FRONT DRIVER VERTICAL Color : # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (HD) Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Power Seat Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Motor-Seat Adjuster-Driver Horizontal > Page 14022 Pin Circuit Description 1 P19 12LG/LB DRIVER SEAT FRONT UP DRIVER 2 P21 12LG/TN DRIVER SEAT FRONT DOWN DRIVER Component Location - 66 Connector: Name : MOTOR-SEAT ADJUSTER-FRONT DRIVER VERTICAL Color : BLACK # of pins : 5 Qualifier : (LD) Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Power Seat Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Motor-Seat Adjuster-Driver Horizontal > Page 14023 Pin Circuit Description 1 P21 12LG/TN DRIVER SEAT FRONT DOWN DRIVER 2-3-4-5 P19 12LG/LB DRIVER SEAT FRONT UP DRIVER Component Location - 66 Motor-Seat Adjuster-Front Passenger Vertical Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Power Seat Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Motor-Seat Adjuster-Driver Horizontal > Page 14024 Component ID: 225 Component : MOTOR-SEAT ADJUSTER-FRONT PASSENGER VERTICAL Connector: Name : MOTOR-SEAT ADJUSTER-FRONT PASSENGER VERTICAL Color : # of pins : 2 Pin Circuit Description 1 P18 12LG/OR PASSENGER SEAT FRONT DOWN DRIVER 2 P20 12LG/LB PASSENGER SEAT FRONT UP DRIVER Component Location - 67 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Power Seat Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Motor-Seat Adjuster-Driver Horizontal > Page 14025 Motor-Seat Adjuster-Passenger Horizontal Component ID: 226 Component : MOTOR-SEAT ADJUSTER-PASSENGER HORIZONTAL Connector: Name : MOTOR-SEAT ADJUSTER-PASSENGER HORIZONTAL Color : # of pins : 2 Pin Circuit Description Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Power Seat Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Motor-Seat Adjuster-Driver Horizontal > Page 14026 1 P16 12LG/BR PASSENGER SEAT HORIZONTAL REARWARD DRIVER 2 P14 12LG/OR PASSENGER SEAT HORIZONTAL FORWARD DRIVER Component Location - 67 Motor-Seat Adjuster-Rear Driver Vertical Component ID: 227 Component : MOTOR-SEAT ADJUSTER-REAR DRIVER VERTICAL Connector: Name : MOTOR-SEAT ADJUSTER-REAR DRIVER VERTICAL Color : # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (HD) Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Power Seat Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Motor-Seat Adjuster-Driver Horizontal > Page 14027 Pin Circuit Description 1 P11 12LG/YL DRIVER SEAT REAR UP DRIVER 2 P13 12LG/OR DRIVER SEAT REAR DOWN DRIVER Component Location - 66 Connector: Name : MOTOR-SEAT ADJUSTER-REAR DRIVER VERTICAL Color : BLACK # of pins : 5 Qualifier : (LD) Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Power Seat Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Motor-Seat Adjuster-Driver Horizontal > Page 14028 Pin Circuit Description 1 P11 12LG/YL DRIVER SEAT REAR UP DRIVER 2-3-4-5 P13 12LG/OR DRIVER SEAT REAR DOWN DRIVER Component Location - 66 Motor-Seat Adjuster-Rear Passenger Vertical Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Power Seat Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Motor-Seat Adjuster-Driver Horizontal > Page 14029 Component ID: 228 Component : MOTOR-SEAT ADJUSTER-REAR PASSENGER VERTICAL Connector: Name : MOTOR-SEAT ADJUSTER-REAR PASSENGER VERTICAL Color : # of pins : 2 Pin Circuit Description 1 P10 12LG/TN PASSENGER SEAT REAR DOWN DRIVER 2 P12 12LG/YL PASSENGER SEAT REAR UP DRIVER Component Location - 67 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Power Seat Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Motor-Seat Adjuster-Driver Horizontal > Page 14030 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Power Seat Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Switch-Seat-Driver Power Seat Switch: Diagrams Switch-Seat-Driver Component ID 476 Component ID: 476 Component : SWITCH-SEAT-DRIVER Connector: Name : SWITCH-SEAT-DRIVER Color : # of pins : 12 Qualifier : (HD) A A210 12OR/RD FUSED B(+) B Z939 14BK GROUND C-E P11 12LG/YL DRIVER SEAT REAR UP DRIVER F-G Z939 14BK GROUND H A210 12OR/RD FUSED B(+) J P13 12LG/OR DRIVER SEAT REAR DOWN DRIVER K P17 12LG/DG DRIVER SEAT HORIZONTAL REARWARD DRIVER L P15 12LG/BR DRIVER SEAT HORIZONTAL FORWARD DRIVER M P19 12LG/LB DRIVER SEAT FRONT UP DRIVER N P21 12LG/TN DRIVER SEAT FRONT DOWN DRIVER Connector: Name : SWITCH-SEAT-DRIVER Color : GRAY # of pins : 8 Qualifier : (LD) Gender : MALE Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Power Seat Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Switch-Seat-Driver > Page 14035 Pin Circuit Description 1 P19 12LG/LB DRIVER SEAT FRONT UP DRIVER 2 Z939 14BK GROUND 3 P15 12LG/WT DRIVER SEAT HORIZONTAL FORWARD DRIVER 4 A210 12OR/RD FUSED B(+) 5 P11 12LG/YL DRIVER SEAT REAR UP DRIVER 6 P17 12LG/DG DRIVER SEAT HORIZONTAL REARWARD DRIVER 7 P13 12LG/OR DRIVER SEAT REAR DOWN DRIVER 8 P21 12LG/TN DRIVER SEAT FRONT DOWN DRIVER Component ID 507 Component ID: 507 Component : SWITCH-SEAT-DRIVER Connector: Name : SWITCH-SEAT-DRIVER Color : # of pins : 12 Qualifier : (HD) A A210 12OR/RD FUSED B(+) B Z939 14BK GROUND C-E P11 12LG/YL DRIVER SEAT REAR UP DRIVER F-G Z939 14BK GROUND H A210 12OR/RD FUSED B(+) Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Power Seat Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Switch-Seat-Driver > Page 14036 J P13 12LG/OR DRIVER SEAT REAR DOWN DRIVER K P17 12LG/DG DRIVER SEAT HORIZONTAL REARWARD DRIVER L P15 12LG/BR DRIVER SEAT HORIZONTAL FORWARD DRIVER M P19 12LG/LB DRIVER SEAT FRONT UP DRIVER N P21 12LG/TN DRIVER SEAT FRONT DOWN DRIVER Connector: Name : SWITCH-SEAT-DRIVER Color : GRAY # of pins : 8 Qualifier : (LD) Gender : MALE Pin Circuit Description 1 P19 12LG/LB DRIVER SEAT FRONT UP DRIVER 2 Z939 14BK GROUND 3 P15 12LG/WT DRIVER SEAT HORIZONTAL FORWARD DRIVER 4 A210 12OR/RD FUSED B(+) 5 P11 12LG/YL DRIVER SEAT REAR UP DRIVER 6 P17 12LG/DG DRIVER SEAT HORIZONTAL REARWARD DRIVER 7 P13 12LG/OR DRIVER SEAT REAR DOWN DRIVER 8 P21 12LG/TN DRIVER SEAT FRONT DOWN DRIVER Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Power Seat Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Switch-Seat-Driver > Page 14037 Power Seat Switch: Diagrams Switch-Seat-Passenger Component ID 477 Component ID: 477 Component : SWITCH-SEAT-PASSENGER Connector: Name : SWITCH-SEAT-PASSENGER Color : # of pins : 12 A A210 12OR/RD FUSED B(+) B Z939 14BK GROUND C-E P12 12LG/YL PASSENGER SEAT REAR UP DRIVER F-G Z939 14BK GROUND H A210 12OR/RD FUSED B(+) J P10 12LG/TN PASSENGER SEAT REAR DOWN DRIVER K P16 12LG/BR PASSENGER SEAT HORIZONTAL REARWARD DRIVER L P14 12LG/OR PASSENGER SEAT HORIZONTAL FORWARD DRIVER M P20 12LG/LB PASSENGER SEAT FRONT UP DRIVER N P18 12LG/OR PASSENGER SEAT FRONT DOWN DRIVER Component ID 508 Component ID: 508 Component : SWITCH-SEAT-PASSENGER Connector: Name : SWITCH-SEAT-PASSENGER Color : # of pins : 12 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Power Seat Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Switch-Seat-Driver > Page 14038 A A210 12OR/RD FUSED B(+) B Z939 14BK GROUND C-E P12 12LG/YL PASSENGER SEAT REAR UP DRIVER F-G Z939 14BK GROUND H A210 12OR/RD FUSED B(+) J P10 12LG/TN PASSENGER SEAT REAR DOWN DRIVER K P16 12LG/BR PASSENGER SEAT HORIZONTAL REARWARD DRIVER L P14 12LG/OR PASSENGER SEAT HORIZONTAL FORWARD DRIVER M P20 12LG/LB PASSENGER SEAT FRONT UP DRIVER N P18 12LG/OR PASSENGER SEAT FRONT DOWN DRIVER Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Power Seat Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Power Seat Switch: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The power seats on this vehicle can be adjusted in eight different directions, up, down, front up, front down, rear up, rear down, rearward and forward. The power seat switch is located on the outboard side of the seat cushion on the seat cushion side shield. The individual switches in the power seat switch assembly cannot be repaired. If one switch is damaged or inoperative, the entire power seat switch assembly must be replaced. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Power Seat Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 14041 Power Seat Switch: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION When a power switch control knob or knobs are actuated, a battery feed and a ground path are applied through the switch contacts to the power seat track adjuster motor. The selected adjuster motor operates to move the seat track or recliner through its drive unit in the selected direction until the switch is released, or until the travel limit of the adjuster is reached. When the switch is moved in the opposite direction, the battery feed and ground path to the motor are reversed through the switch contacts. This causes the adjuster motor to run in the opposite direction. No power seat switch should be held applied in any direction after the adjuster has reached its travel limit. The power seat adjuster motors each contain a self-resetting circuit breaker to protect them from overload. However, consecutive or frequent resetting of the circuit breaker must not be allowed to continue, or the motor may be damaged. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Power Seat Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 14042 Power Seat Switch: Testing and Inspection POWER SEAT SWITCH For complete circuit diagrams, refer to the appropriate wiring information. The wiring information includes wiring diagrams, proper wire and connector repair procedures, details of wire harness routing and retention, connector pin-out information and location views for the various wire harness connectors, splices and grounds. 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. 2. Remove the power seat switch from the power seat. 3. Using an ohmmeter to test the continuity of the power seat switches in each position. Refer to the POWER SEAT SWITCH TEST TABLE. If OK, See: Seat Track/Testing and Inspection . If not OK, replace the inoperative power seat switch. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Power Seat Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Power Seat Switch - Removal Power Seat Switch: Service and Repair Power Seat Switch - Removal REMOVAL 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. 2. Remove the seat cushion side shield from the seat. 3. Pull the switch bezel or side shield unit (1) out from the seat far enough to access the switch wire harness connector. Gently pry the locking tabs of the switch away from the wire harness connector and carefully unplug the connector from the power seat switch module (2). 4. Remove the screws (3) that secure the power seat switch (2) to the side shield unit (1). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Power Seat Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Power Seat Switch - Removal > Page 14045 Power Seat Switch: Service and Repair Power Seat Switch - Installation INSTALLATION 1. Position the power seat switch (2) on the seat cushion side shield (1) and install the screws (3). 2. Connect the electrical connector. 3. Install the seat cushion side shield on the seat. 4. Connect the battery negative cable. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Back > Component Information > Service and Repair > Center Armrest / Seat Back Seat Back: Service and Repair Center Armrest / Seat Back Removal REMOVAL 1. Before proceeding with the following repair procedure, review all warnings and cautions. See: Restraint Systems/Service Precautions NOTE: Do not reuse the seat fasteners, always replace with new ones. 2. Remove the center seat See: Service and Repair/Seat - Removal . 3. Disconnect the storage bin/cushion cover j-straps and position aside. 4. Remove and discard the hinge bolts (2) and separate the seat back from the storage bin/cushion (1). Installation INSTALLATION 1. Before proceeding with the following repair procedure, review all warnings and cautions. See: Restraint Systems/Service Precautions NOTE: Do not reuse the seat fasteners, always replace with new ones. 2. Install the seat back onto the storage bin/cushion (1) and install new hinge bolts (2). 3. Tighten the hinge to storage bin/cushion bolts (2) to 25 Nm (18 ft. lbs.). 4. Connect the storage bin/cushion cover j-straps. 5. Install the center seat See: Service and Repair/Seat - Installation . Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Back > Component Information > Service and Repair > Center Armrest / Seat Back > Page 14050 Seat Back: Service and Repair Center Seat Back Inertia Hinge Cover Removal REMOVAL NOTE: Free pivot hinge cover is removed with the free pivot hinge See: Center Seat Back Hinge/Removal. 1. For the inertia hinge cover disconnect the zip strip (1). 2. Position aside the storage bin/cushion cover (4). 3. Remove the pivot bolt (5). 4. Open the hinge cover at the bottom and remove the hinge cover (1). Installation INSTALLATION Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Back > Component Information > Service and Repair > Center Armrest / Seat Back > Page 14051 NOTE: Free pivot hinge cover is installed with the free pivot hinge See: Center Seat Back Hinge/Installation. 1. Position the hinge cover (1) over the hinge (2) and close over the lock tabs (3). 2. Install the pivot bolt (5) and tighten to 10 Nm (89 in. lbs.). 3. Reposition the storage bin/cushion cover (4). 4. Connect the zip strip (1). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Back > Component Information > Service and Repair > Center Armrest / Seat Back > Page 14052 Seat Back: Service and Repair Center Seat Back Hinge Removal REMOVAL FREE PIVOT/HINGE COVER NOTE: Do not reuse the seat fasteners, always replace with new ones. 1. Remove the seat back See: Center Armrest / Seat Back/Removal . 2. Disconnect the storage bin/cushion cover j-strap and position aside. 3. Remove and discard the pivot bolt (1). 4. Remove the hinge spacer (2). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Back > Component Information > Service and Repair > Center Armrest / Seat Back > Page 14053 5. Open the hinge cover flap (1) and remove the wire harness (5 - if equipped). 6. Remove the cover (3) from the hinge (4). INERTIA HINGE NOTE: Do not reuse the seat fasteners, always replace with new ones. 1. Remove the seat back See: Center Armrest / Seat Back/Removal . 2. Remove the seat back inertia hinge cover See: Center Seat Back Inertia Hinge Cover/Removal . 3. Remove and discard the inertia hinge bolts (1) and remove the hinge (3). Installation INSTALLATION FREE PIVOT HINGE/COVER Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Back > Component Information > Service and Repair > Center Armrest / Seat Back > Page 14054 NOTE: Do not reuse the seat fasteners, always replace with new ones. 1. Position the pivot hinge cover (3) over the pivot hinge (4) and install the 12v power supply harness (5 - if equipped) into the channel. 2. Close the hinge cover (1) flat and position the spacer (2) into place. 3. Align the stop pin (3) with the spacer (2) and hinge (1) and install the assembly onto the seat back. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Back > Component Information > Service and Repair > Center Armrest / Seat Back > Page 14055 4. Install a new pivot bolt (1) and tighten to 25 Nm (18 ft. lbs.). 5. Install the center seat back See: Center Armrest / Seat Back/Installation . INERTIA HINGE NOTE: Do not reuse the seat fasteners, always replace with new ones. 1. Install the inertia hinge (3) onto the center seat back (2) and install new bolts (1). 2. Tighten the bolts (1) to 25 Nm (18 ft. lbs.). 3. Install the seat back inertia hinge covers See: Center Seat Back Inertia Hinge Cover/Installation . 4. Install the center seat back See: Center Armrest / Seat Back/Installation . Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Back > Component Information > Service and Repair > Center Armrest / Seat Back > Page 14056 Seat Back: Service and Repair Center Seat Back Lid Removal REMOVAL 1. Open the center armrest/seat back. 2. Remove the four screws attaching the hinge to the storage bin/cushion and remove the lid. Installation INSTALLATION 1. Position the center seat back lid onto the storage bin/cushion and install the screws. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Back > Component Information > Service and Repair > Center Armrest / Seat Back > Page 14057 Seat Back: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL 1. Before proceeding with the following repair procedure, review all warnings and cautions. See: Restraint Systems/Service Precautions NOTE: Do not reuse the seat fasteners, always replace with new ones. 2. Remove the center seat See: Service and Repair/Seat - Removal . 3. Disconnect the storage bin/cushion cover j-straps and position aside. 4. Remove and discard the hinge bolts (2) and separate the seat back from the storage bin/cushion (1). Installation INSTALLATION 1. Before proceeding with the following repair procedure, review all warnings and cautions. See: Restraint Systems/Service Precautions NOTE: Do not reuse the seat fasteners, always replace with new ones. 2. Install the seat back onto the storage bin/cushion (1) and install new hinge bolts (2). 3. Tighten the hinge to storage bin/cushion bolts (2) to 25 Nm (18 ft. lbs.). 4. Connect the storage bin/cushion cover j-straps. 5. Install the center seat See: Service and Repair/Seat - Installation . Removal REMOVAL Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Back > Component Information > Service and Repair > Center Armrest / Seat Back > Page 14058 NOTE: Free pivot hinge cover is removed with the free pivot hinge See: Center Seat Back Hinge/Removal. 1. For the inertia hinge cover disconnect the zip strip (1). 2. Position aside the storage bin/cushion cover (4). 3. Remove the pivot bolt (5). 4. Open the hinge cover at the bottom and remove the hinge cover (1). Installation INSTALLATION Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Back > Component Information > Service and Repair > Center Armrest / Seat Back > Page 14059 NOTE: Free pivot hinge cover is installed with the free pivot hinge See: Center Seat Back Hinge/Installation. 1. Position the hinge cover (1) over the hinge (2) and close over the lock tabs (3). 2. Install the pivot bolt (5) and tighten to 10 Nm (89 in. lbs.). 3. Reposition the storage bin/cushion cover (4). 4. Connect the zip strip (1). Removal REMOVAL FREE PIVOT/HINGE COVER Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Back > Component Information > Service and Repair > Center Armrest / Seat Back > Page 14060 NOTE: Do not reuse the seat fasteners, always replace with new ones. 1. Remove the seat back See: Center Armrest / Seat Back/Removal . 2. Disconnect the storage bin/cushion cover j-strap and position aside. 3. Remove and discard the pivot bolt (1). 4. Remove the hinge spacer (2). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Back > Component Information > Service and Repair > Center Armrest / Seat Back > Page 14061 5. Open the hinge cover flap (1) and remove the wire harness (5 - if equipped). 6. Remove the cover (3) from the hinge (4). INERTIA HINGE NOTE: Do not reuse the seat fasteners, always replace with new ones. 1. Remove the seat back See: Center Armrest / Seat Back/Removal . 2. Remove the seat back inertia hinge cover See: Center Seat Back Inertia Hinge Cover/Removal . 3. Remove and discard the inertia hinge bolts (1) and remove the hinge (3). Installation INSTALLATION FREE PIVOT HINGE/COVER Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Back > Component Information > Service and Repair > Center Armrest / Seat Back > Page 14062 NOTE: Do not reuse the seat fasteners, always replace with new ones. 1. Position the pivot hinge cover (3) over the pivot hinge (4) and install the 12v power supply harness (5 - if equipped) into the channel. 2. Close the hinge cover (1) flat and position the spacer (2) into place. 3. Align the stop pin (3) with the spacer (2) and hinge (1) and install the assembly onto the seat back. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Back > Component Information > Service and Repair > Center Armrest / Seat Back > Page 14063 4. Install a new pivot bolt (1) and tighten to 25 Nm (18 ft. lbs.). 5. Install the center seat back See: Center Armrest / Seat Back/Installation . INERTIA HINGE NOTE: Do not reuse the seat fasteners, always replace with new ones. 1. Install the inertia hinge (3) onto the center seat back (2) and install new bolts (1). 2. Tighten the bolts (1) to 25 Nm (18 ft. lbs.). 3. Install the seat back inertia hinge covers See: Center Seat Back Inertia Hinge Cover/Installation . 4. Install the center seat back See: Center Armrest / Seat Back/Installation . Removal REMOVAL 1. Open the center armrest/seat back. 2. Remove the four screws attaching the hinge to the storage bin/cushion and remove the lid. Installation INSTALLATION 1. Position the center seat back lid onto the storage bin/cushion and install the screws. Seat Back - Removal REMOVAL Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Back > Component Information > Service and Repair > Center Armrest / Seat Back > Page 14064 1. Remove the rear seat See: Service and Repair/Seat - Removal . 2. Remove the seat back bolts (1) and remove the seat back (4). Seat Back - Installation INSTALLATION 1. Install the seat back (4) and install the bolts (1). 2. Tighten the bolts (1) to 25 Nm (18 ft. lbs.). 3. Install the rear seat See: Service and Repair/Seat - Installation . Removal REMOVAL 1. Remove the rear seat See: Service and Repair/Seat - Removal . 2. Remove bolts (2) and remove the loop (1). Installation INSTALLATION Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Back > Component Information > Service and Repair > Center Armrest / Seat Back > Page 14065 1. Install the loop (1) and install the bolts (2). 2. Tighten the bolts (2) to 12 Nm (9 ft. lbs.). 3. Install the seat See: Service and Repair/Seat - Installation . Front REMOVAL 1. Remove the front seat See: Service and Repair/Seat - Removal . 2. Remove the lumbar handle and bezel (if equipped) See: Service and Repair/Lumbar Support Handle/Bezel/Removal . 3. Remove the headrest sleeves See: Head Rest/Service and Repair/Headrest Sleeve - Removal . 4. Unzip the zip strip at the lower end of the seat back and remove the seat back cover and cushion. Rear REMOVAL 1. Remove the rear seat back. See: Seat Back - Removal 2. Remove the headrest sleeves. See: Head Rest/Service and Repair/Headrest Sleeve - Removal 3. Unzip the zip strip at the bottom of the seat back and remove the cover. Rear - Mega Cab REMOVAL 1. Fold both rear seats flat. 2. Remove the filler panels from the rear seat to storage compartment. 3. Separate the J-straps at the bottom of the seat back. 4. Remove both hinge covers from the back section being worked on. 5. Remove the lower anchor for the center seat belt. 6. Disconnect the lower cable attachment from the seat back release. 7. Remove the four bolts and remove the seat back from the seat. 8. Mark the location of the cables at the cushion and remove. 9. Remove the upper cushion pivot bolts. 10. Remove the lower cushion pivot bolts. 11. Remove the cushion from the seat. 12. Remove the seat release/recline handle. 13. Separate the J-straps for the cover to the seat pan. 14. Remove the cover/cushion from the seat pan and separate the foam from the cover. Front INSTALLATION 1. Install the seat back cushion and cover onto the seat frame assembly. 2. Connect the zip strip at the bottom of the seat back. 3. Install the headrest sleeves. See: Head Rest/Service and Repair/Headrest Sleeve - Installation 4. Install the lumbar bezel and handle, if equipped. See: Service and Repair/Lumbar Support Handle/Bezel/Installation 5. Install the seat. See: Service and Repair/Seat - Installation Rear INSTALLATION Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Back > Component Information > Service and Repair > Center Armrest / Seat Back > Page 14066 1. Install the seat back cover and connect the zip strip. 2. Install the headrest sleeves. See: Head Rest/Service and Repair/Headrest Sleeve - Installation 3. Install the seat back. See: Seat Back Installation Rear - Mega Cab INSTALLATION 1. Place cover over the foam and install onto the seat pan. 2. Connect the J-straps to the pan. 3. Install the release/recliner handle. 4. Install the cushion assembly onto the seat assembly. 5. Install the lower cushion pivot bolts. 6. Install the upper cushion pivot bolts. 7. Install the cables at the cushion using the marks made during removal. 8. Install the seat back onto the seat and install the four bolts. 9. Connect the lower cable attachment for the seat back release. 10. Install the lower anchor for the center seat belt. 11. Install the hinge covers. 12. Connect the J-straps at the bottom of the seat back being worked on. 13. Install the filler panels. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cushion > Component Information > Service and Repair > Center Seat Cushion Cover Seat Cushion: Service and Repair Center Seat Cushion Cover Removal REMOVAL 1. Remove the center seat cushion or underseat storage bin lid. See: Interior Moulding / Trim/Utility Storage Compartment/Service and Repair/Under Seat Storage Bin Lid - Removal 2. Disconnect the zip strips and remove the cover from the cushion. Installation INSTALLATION 1. Install the cover over the center seat cushion and connect the zip strips. 2. Install the center seat cushion or under seat storage bin lid. See: Interior Moulding / Trim/Utility Storage Compartment/Service and Repair/Under Seat Storage Bin Lid - Installation Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cushion > Component Information > Service and Repair > Center Seat Cushion Cover > Page 14071 Seat Cushion: Service and Repair Seat Cushion Frame - Rear Removal REMOVAL 1. Remove the seat cushion/cover See: Seat Cushion / Cover - Removal . 2. Remove the bolts (3) and remove the seat cushion frame (2). Installation INSTALLATION 1. Install the seat cushion frame (2) onto the rear seat cushion hinges (4). 2. Install the bolts (3) and tighten to 85 Nm (63 ft. lbs.). 3. Install the seat cushion/cover See: Seat Cushion / Cover Installation . Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cushion > Component Information > Service and Repair > Center Seat Cushion Cover > Page 14072 Seat Cushion: Service and Repair Center Seat Cushion - Removal REMOVAL 1. Remove the center seat. See: Service and Repair/Seat - Removal 2. Remove the center armrest/seat back. See: Seat Back/Service and Repair/Center Armrest / Seat Back/Removal Center Seat Cushion - Installation INSTALLATION 1. Install the center armrest/seat back. See: Seat Back/Service and Repair/Center Armrest / Seat Back/Installation 2. Install the center seat. See: Service and Repair/Seat - Installation Removal REMOVAL 1. Remove the center seat cushion or underseat storage bin lid. See: Interior Moulding / Trim/Utility Storage Compartment/Service and Repair/Under Seat Storage Bin Lid - Removal 2. Disconnect the zip strips and remove the cover from the cushion. Installation INSTALLATION 1. Install the cover over the center seat cushion and connect the zip strips. 2. Install the center seat cushion or under seat storage bin lid. See: Interior Moulding / Trim/Utility Storage Compartment/Service and Repair/Under Seat Storage Bin Lid - Installation Removal REMOVAL 1. Remove the seat cushion/cover See: Seat Cushion / Cover - Removal . 2. Remove the bolts (3) and remove the seat cushion frame (2). Installation INSTALLATION Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cushion > Component Information > Service and Repair > Center Seat Cushion Cover > Page 14073 1. Install the seat cushion frame (2) onto the rear seat cushion hinges (4). 2. Install the bolts (3) and tighten to 85 Nm (63 ft. lbs.). 3. Install the seat cushion/cover See: Seat Cushion / Cover Installation . Front Seat REMOVAL 1. Remove the front seat. See: Service and Repair/Seat - Removal 2. Remove the screw and remove the recliner handle. 3. Remove the two screws and remove the power seat controls, if equipped, and disconnect the electrical connector. 4. Disconnect the j-straps and remove the seat cushion and cover. Rear Seat REMOVAL 1. Remove the rear seat. See: Service and Repair/Seat - Removal 2. Separate the zip strip at the rear of the seat cushion and remove the cushion and cover. Rear Seat - Mega Cab REMOVAL 1. Fold both rear seats flat. 2. Remove the filler panels from the rear seat to storage compartment. 3. Separate the J-straps at the bottom of the seat back. 4. Remove both hinge covers from the back section being worked on. 5. Remove the lower anchor for the center seat belt. 6. Disconnect the lower cable attachment from the seat back release. 7. Remove the four bolts and remove the seat back from the seat. 8. Remove the screw and remove the seat back release bezel. 9. Mark the location of the release cables at the cushion and remove. 10. Remove the upper cushion pivot bolts. 11. Remove the lower cushion pivot bolts. 12. Remove the cushion from the seat. 13. Remove the seat release lever from the cushion. 14. Separate the J-straps securing the cover to the seat pan. 15. Remove the foam and cover from the seat pan. 16. Separate the foam from the cover. Front Seat INSTALLATION 1. Position the seat cushion and cover onto the frame assembly and connect the j-straps. 2. Connect the power seat control switch electrical connector, if equipped. 3. Install the power seat control switch and install the two screws, if equipped. 4. Install the recliner handle and install the screw. 5. Install the front seat. See: Service and Repair/Seat - Installation Rear Seat INSTALLATION Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cushion > Component Information > Service and Repair > Center Seat Cushion Cover > Page 14074 1. Install the seat cushion and cover over the cushion frame assembly and connect the zip strip. 2. Install the seat. See: Service and Repair/Seat - Installation Rear Seat - Mega Cab INSTALLATION 1. Position the seat cushion foam into the cover. 2. Position the cushion assembly onto the seat pan. 3. Connect the J-straps securing the cover to the seat pan. 4. Install the seat release lever. 5. Install the cushion assembly onto the seat assembly. 6. Install the lower cushion pivot bolts. 7. Install the upper cushion pivot bolts. 8. Install the release cables using the marks created during removal. 9. Install the seat back release bezel and install the screw. 10. Install the seat back and install the four bolts. 11. Connect the lower cable attachment from the seat back release. 12. Install the lower anchor fro the center seat belt. 13. Install both hinge covers for the back section seat back. 14. Connect the J-straps at the bottom of the seat back. 15. Install the filler panels for the rear storage compartment. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Locations > Heater-Seat Cushion-Driver Seat Heater: Locations Heater-Seat Cushion-Driver Component ID: 144 Component : HEATER-SEAT CUSHION-DRIVER Connector: Name : HEATER-SEAT CUSHION-DRIVER Color : GREEN # of pins : 2 Pin Circuit Description 1 P693 18RD/DB DRIVER SEAT HEATER SUPPLY 2 Z939 18BK GROUND Component Location - 66 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Locations > Heater-Seat Cushion-Driver > Page 14079 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Locations > Heater-Seat Cushion-Driver > Page 14080 Seat Heater: Locations Heater-Seat Cushion-Passenger Component ID: 145 Component : HEATER-SEAT CUSHION-PASSENGER Connector: Name : HEATER-SEAT CUSHION-PASSENGER Color : GREEN # of pins : 2 Pin Circuit Description 1 P95 16LG/WT PASSENGER SEAT HEATER SUPPLY 2 Z939 18BK GROUND Component Location - 67 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Locations > Heater-Seat Cushion-Driver > Page 14081 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Heater-Seat Cushion-Driver Seat Heater: Diagrams Heater-Seat Cushion-Driver Component ID: 144 Component : HEATER-SEAT CUSHION-DRIVER Connector: Name : HEATER-SEAT CUSHION-DRIVER Color : GREEN # of pins : 2 Pin Circuit Description 1 P693 18RD/DB DRIVER SEAT HEATER SUPPLY 2 Z939 18BK GROUND Component Location - 66 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Heater-Seat Cushion-Driver > Page 14084 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Heater-Seat Cushion-Driver > Page 14085 Seat Heater: Diagrams Heater-Seat Cushion-Passenger Component ID: 145 Component : HEATER-SEAT CUSHION-PASSENGER Connector: Name : HEATER-SEAT CUSHION-PASSENGER Color : GREEN # of pins : 2 Pin Circuit Description 1 P95 16LG/WT PASSENGER SEAT HEATER SUPPLY 2 Z939 18BK GROUND Component Location - 67 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Heater-Seat Cushion-Driver > Page 14086 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Description and Operation > Heated Seats - Description Seat Heater: Description and Operation Heated Seats - Description DESCRIPTION WARNING: The front passenger seat assembly contains critical components that affect the front passenger airbag deployment. Correctly functioning front passenger seat components are critical for the Occupant Classification System (OCS) to properly classify the front passenger and calculate the proper airbag deployment. Unapproved modifications or service procedures to the front passenger seat assembly, its related components, or trim cover may inadvertently change the airbag deployment in case of a frontal crash. This could result in death or serious injury to the front seat passenger if the vehicle is involved in an accident. The following requirements must be strictly adhered to: - Do not modify the front passenger seat assembly or components in any way. - Do not modify the front seat center console or center position seat in any way. - Do not use prior or future model year seat trim covers not designated for the specific model being repaired. Always use the correct seat trim cover specified for the vehicle. - Do not replace the seat trim cover with an aftermarket trim cover. - Do not add a secondary trim cover other than those approved by DaimlerChrysler/Mopar. - At no time should any Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) component or SRS related component or fastener be modified or replaced with any part except those which are approved by DaimlerChrysler/Mopar. Vehicles with the heated seat option can be visually identified by the two heated seat switches located in the center stack of the instrument panel. The heated seat system allows the driver and front seat passenger to select from two different levels of electrical seat heating (HI/LO). The heated seat system for this vehicle includes the following major components: Heated Seat Switch/Module - Two heated seat switch/modules are used per vehicle, including two Light-Emitting Diode (LED) indicator lamps for heat level indication. One switch/module for the driver and one for the passenger front seats. The switch/modules contain the solid state electronic control and diagnostic logic circuitry for the heated seat system. The switch/modules are mounted in the front center floor console. - Heated Seat Elements - Four heated seat elements are used per vehicle, one for each front seat back and one for each front seat cushion. The elements are integral to the individual front seat and seat back cushions and cannot be removed from the cushions, once installed at the factory. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Description and Operation > Heated Seats - Description > Page 14089 Seat Heater: Description and Operation Heated Seats - Operation OPERATION The heated seat system operates on battery current received through a fuse in the Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM). Fused ignition switch output (run) circuits are used, so that the heated seat system will only operate when the ignition switch is in the On position. The heated seat system will turn Off automatically whenever the ignition switch is turned to any position except On. A Heated Seat Switch/Module is used to control the heated seat system. The switch/module responds to heated seat switch/module button input and ignition switch status inputs by controlling the 12v output to the front seat heating elements through integral solid-state relays. When either of the heated seat switch/module buttons are depressed the heating element for the selected seat is energized. Amber Light Emitting Diodes (LEDS) on the side of each switch/module indicate the level of heat in use: Two LEDs are illuminated for high, one for low, and none for off. Pressing the switch/module button once will select high-level heating. Pressing the button a second time will select low-level heating. Pressing the button a third time will shut the heating elements off. The heated seat switch/module energizes an integral solid-state relay, which supplies battery current to the heating elements. When high-temperature heating is selected, the heaters provide a boosted heat level during the first four minutes of operation after heating is activated. The heat output then drops to the normal high-temperature level. If high-level heating is selected, the control system will automatically switch to the low level after two hours of continuous operation. At that time, the number of illuminated LEDs changes from two to one, indicating the change. Operation on the low setting will continue indefinitely until the switch/module button is pushed to turn the system off. The system will automatically turn off the heating elements if it detects an OPEN or LOW short in the heating element circuit. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Description and Operation > Heated Seats - Description > Page 14090 Seat Heater: Description and Operation Heated Seat Element - Description DESCRIPTION Vehicles equipped with the optional heated seat system have two, carbon fiber heated seat elements, located in each front seat. One heating element is used for each seat cushion and another for each seat back. Each of the heated seat element consists of multiple heating circuits operating in parallel throughout the carbon fiber element. The heated seat elements are captured between the leather trim cover and the seat cushion assembly. If a malfunction occurs in one or more of the individual carbon fiber circuits, the others will continue to provide heat. The heated seat elements cannot be repaired. If found to be damaged or inoperative, a new heating element assembly must be installed. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Description and Operation > Heated Seats - Description > Page 14091 Seat Heater: Description and Operation Heated Seat Element - Operation OPERATION One end of the heated seat element is connected to ground at all times through a splice under the seat. Battery current is directed to the other end of the heated seat element by the heated seat switch/module. The heated seat switch/module will energize the heated seat element when the heated seat switch/module button is depressed in the Low or High position. As electrical current passes through the heated seat element, the resistance of the wire used in the element disperses some of the electrical current in the form of heat. The heat produced by the heated seat element then radiates through the underside of the seat cushion and seat back trim covers, warming the seat cover and its occupant. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Heated Seat System Seat Heater: Testing and Inspection Heated Seat System HEATED SEAT SYSTEM There are two methods of diagnosing the heated seat system. The "HEATED SEAT SYSTEM SELF-DIAGNOSIS" is to be performed when the system is inoperative and one or more of the heated seat switch/module Light Emitting Diode (LED) indicator lamps are flashing. The "HEATED SEAT SYSTEM BASE DIAGNOSIS" is to be performed when the system is inoperative and no LEDs are flashing or lighting when the switch/module buttons are pressed. HEATED SEAT SYSTEM SELF-DIAGNOSIS NOTE: Before testing the individual components in the heated seat system, check the vehicles battery open-circuit voltage and charging system performance. If the vehicles electrical system is defective or weak it may not be suppling sufficient energy to operate the heated seat system. The heated seat system is capable of performing some self-diagnostics. The following table depicts the various monitored failures which will be reported to the vehicle operator or technician by flashing the individual heated seat switch/module Light Emitting Diode (LED) indicator lamps. Refer to the Heated Seat System Self-Diagnosis table for failure identification. The driver side heated seat switch/module indicator lamps will flash if a failure occurs in the driver side heated seat, and the passenger side heated seat switch/module indicator lamps will flash for a passenger side heated seat failure. If a monitored heated seat system failure occurs, the switch/module indicator lamps will flash at a pulse rate of about one-half second on, followed by about one-half second off for a duration of about one minute after the switch/module for the faulty heated seat is depressed in either the Low or High direction. This process will repeat every time the faulty heated seat switch/module is actuated until the problem has been corrected. Before testing the individual components in the heated seat system, check the vehicles battery open-circuit voltage and charging system performance. If the vehicles electrical system is defective or weak it may not be suppling sufficient energy to operate the heated seat system. For complete circuit diagrams, refer to the appropriate wiring information. The wiring information includes wiring diagrams, proper wire and connector repair procedures, details of wire harness routing and retention, connector pin-out information and location views for the various wire harness connectors, splices and grounds. Diagnostic logic is built into the heated seat switch/module to help locate the problem by the most efficient means possible. Anytime a problem is suspected, locate the diagnosis and testing procedure for the component in question and follow the steps until the specific problem is located and resolved. Once the problem is thought to be corrected, verify correct system operation. If the heated seat system is functioning correctly return the vehicle to service. If a problem could not be verified such as not finding anything wrong when following the diagnostic procedure, this is a good indication that a INTERMITTENT problem may be present. You must then attempt to find the intermittent problem, such as moving the heating element within the seat while testing continuity or wiggling the wire harness's/electrical connectors under the seat while testing continuity. Always, eliminate all other potential problems before attempting to replace the heated seat switch/module. HEATED SEAT SYSTEM BASE DIAGNOSIS NOTE: Before testing the individual components in the heated seat system, check the vehicles battery open-circuit voltage and charging system performance. If the vehicles electrical system is defective or weak it may not be suppling sufficient energy to operate the heated seat system. For complete circuit diagrams, refer to the appropriate wiring information. The wiring information includes wiring diagrams, proper wire and connector repair procedures, details of wire harness routing and retention, connector pin-out information and location views for the various wire harness connectors, splices and grounds. PRELIMINARY TEST - If a single LED indicator lamp for one heated seat switch/module does not operate and the heated seat elements heat, replace the switch with the inoperative indicator lamp See: Seat Heater Switch/Service and Repair/Heated Seat Switch - Removal . - If both LED indicator lamps for a heated seat switch/module operate, but the heated seat elements do not heat, See: Heated Seat Element - Diagnosis and Testing to check the suspect heated seat elements. If the elements test OK, proceed to STEP 1. - If both seats (driver and passenger) fail to heat and the indicator lamps on the heated seat switch/modules for both seats fail to operate, test the heated seat fuses in the Integrated Power Module (IPM). If the heated seat fuses check OK, go to STEP 1. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Heated Seat System > Page 14094 DRIVER HEATED SEAT SWITCH/MODULE 1. Remove the heated seat switch/modules, See: Seat Heater Switch/Service and Repair/Heated Seat Switch - Removal . 2. Connect the battery negative cable. 3. Turn the ignition to the "RUN" position. 4. Check for battery voltage on terminals 4 and 6 of the switch/module connector of the inoperative seat. Battery voltage should be present on both terminals. If OK go to STEP 5. If NOT OK repair the open or shorted fused B(+) circuit as required. 5. Check for continuity between ground terminal 1 of the switch/module connector of the inoperative seat and a good ground. If OK go to STEP 6. If NOT OK, repair the open or shorted ground circuit as required. 6. Check for continuity between the heated seat element supply circuit terminal 3 of the switch/module connector of the inoperative seat and the heated seat element connector of the inoperative seat. If OK go to STEP 7. If NOT OK, repair the open or shorted supply circuit as required. 7. Perform the heated seat element diagnosis for the inoperative seat. See: Heated Seat Element Diagnosis and Testing to check the suspect heated seat elements. If the elements test OK, replace the inoperative heated seat switch/module, See: Seat Heater Switch/Service and Repair/Heated Seat Switch - Removal for the appropriate procedure. If NOT OK, replace the inoperative heated seat element, See: Service and Repair/Heated Seat Element - Removal for the appropriate procedure. PASSENGER HEATED SEAT SWITCH/MODULE 8. Remove the heated seat switch/modules, See: Seat Heater Switch/Service and Repair/Heated Seat Switch - Removal . 9. Connect the battery negative cable. 10. Turn the ignition to the "RUN" position. 11. Check for battery voltage on terminals 4 and 6 of the switch/module connector of the inoperative seat. Battery voltage should be present on both terminals. If OK go to STEP 5. If NOT OK repair the open or shorted fused B(+) circuit as required. 12. Check for continuity between ground terminal 1 of the switch/module connector of the inoperative seat and a good ground. If OK go to STEP 6. If NOT OK, repair the open or shorted ground circuit as required. 13. Check for continuity between the heated seat element supply circuit terminal 3 of the switch/module connector of the inoperative seat and the heated seat element connector of the inoperative seat. If OK go to STEP 7. If NOT OK, repair the open or shorted supply circuit as required. 14. Perform the heated seat element diagnosis for the inoperative seat. See: Heated Seat Element - Diagnosis and Testing to check the suspect heated seat elements. If the elements test OK, replace the inoperative heated seat switch/module, See: Seat Heater Switch/Service and Repair/Heated Seat Switch - Removal for the appropriate procedure. If NOT OK, replace the inoperative heated seat element, See: Service and Repair/Heated Seat Element - Removal for the appropriate procedure. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Heated Seat System > Page 14095 Seat Heater: Testing and Inspection Heated Seat Element - Diagnosis and Testing HEATED SEAT ELEMENT Refer to the appropriate wiring information for complete circuit schematic or connector pin-out information. The wire harness connectors (2&3) for the heating elements are located under the seat (1). NOTE: When checking heated seat elements for continuity, be certain to move the heating element being checked. Moving the element, such as sitting in the seat will eliminate the possibility of an intermittent open in the element which would only be evident if the element was in a certain position. Failure to check the element in various positions could result in an incomplete test. 1. Locate and disconnect the seat electrical connector. 2. Check the resistance between the circuit leading in and out of the suspect heated seat element. The resistance should be between 3.8 - 4.8 ohms for a seat cushion element and 4.3 - 5.4 ohms for a seat back element. If OK, See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code Tests and Associated Procedures . If not OK, replace the inoperative heated seat element. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Service and Repair > Heated Seat Element - Removal Seat Heater: Service and Repair Heated Seat Element - Removal REMOVAL NOTE: Do not remove the factory installed heating elements (3) from the seat or seat back cushions. The original element is permanently attached and cannot be removed without permanent damage. The replacement heating element is designed to be applied directly on top of the inoperative factory installed heating element. 1. Disconnect and isolate the negative battery cable. 2. Remove the appropriate seat cushion, or seat back trim cover, See: Seat Back/Service and Repair/Seat Back Cushion / Cover - Removal . 3. Disconnect the inoperative heated seat cushion or seat back element electrical connectors (2). 4. Locate the wires leading from the inoperative heating element and cut them off flush with the edge of the original heating element. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Service and Repair > Heated Seat Element - Removal > Page 14098 Seat Heater: Service and Repair Heated Seat Element - Installation INSTALLATION 1. Peel off the adhesive backing on the back of the replacement heating element (2) and stick directly on top of the factory installed heating element (1). CAUTION: During the installation of the replacement heating element, be careful not to fold or crease the element assembly. Folds or creases will cause premature failure. 2. Connect the new heating element electrical connectors (3&4). 3. Connect the battery negative cable. 4. Verify heated seat system operation. 5. Install the appropriate seat cushion, or seat back trim cover, See: Seat Back/Service and Repair/Seat Back Cushion / Cover - Installation . NOTE: Make certain the seat wire harness is correctly routed through the seat and seat back. The excess wire between the cushion and back elements should be securely tucked between the rear of the cushion foam and the rear carpet flap of the trim cover. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater Switch > Component Information > Locations > Switch-Heated Seat-Driver Seat Heater Switch: Locations Switch-Heated Seat-Driver Component ID: 490 Component : SWITCH-HEATED SEAT-DRIVER Connector: Name : SWITCH-HEATED SEAT-DRIVER Color : DK. GRAY # of pins : 6 Pin Circuit Description 1 Z301 20TN/BK GROUND 2 P301 20LG/OR PANEL LAMPS DRIVER 3 P693 18LG/WT DRIVER SEAT HEATER SUPPLY 4 A930 16RD FUSED B(+) 5-6 A930 16RD FUSED B(+) Component Location - 47 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater Switch > Component Information > Locations > Switch-Heated Seat-Driver > Page 14103 Component Location - 45 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater Switch > Component Information > Locations > Switch-Heated Seat-Driver > Page 14104 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater Switch > Component Information > Locations > Switch-Heated Seat-Driver > Page 14105 Seat Heater Switch: Locations Switch-Heated Seat-Passenger Component ID: 491 Component : SWITCH-HEATED SEAT-PASSENGER Connector: Name : SWITCH-HEATED SEAT-PASSENGER Color : GREEN # of pins : 6 Pin Circuit Description 1 Z302 20LG/BK GROUND 2 P301 20LG/OR PANEL LAMPS DRIVER 3 P95 18LG/WT PASSENGER SEAT HEATER SUPPLY 4 A930 16RD FUSED B(+) 5-6 A930 16RD FUSED B(+) Component Location - 47 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater Switch > Component Information > Locations > Switch-Heated Seat-Driver > Page 14106 Component Location - 45 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater Switch > Component Information > Locations > Switch-Heated Seat-Driver > Page 14107 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Switch-Heated Seat-Driver Seat Heater Switch: Diagrams Switch-Heated Seat-Driver Component ID: 490 Component : SWITCH-HEATED SEAT-DRIVER Connector: Name : SWITCH-HEATED SEAT-DRIVER Color : DK. GRAY # of pins : 6 Pin Circuit Description 1 Z301 20TN/BK GROUND 2 P301 20LG/OR PANEL LAMPS DRIVER 3 P693 18LG/WT DRIVER SEAT HEATER SUPPLY 4 A930 16RD FUSED B(+) 5-6 A930 16RD FUSED B(+) Component Location - 47 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Switch-Heated Seat-Driver > Page 14110 Component Location - 45 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Switch-Heated Seat-Driver > Page 14111 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Switch-Heated Seat-Driver > Page 14112 Seat Heater Switch: Diagrams Switch-Heated Seat-Passenger Component ID: 491 Component : SWITCH-HEATED SEAT-PASSENGER Connector: Name : SWITCH-HEATED SEAT-PASSENGER Color : GREEN # of pins : 6 Pin Circuit Description 1 Z302 20LG/BK GROUND 2 P301 20LG/OR PANEL LAMPS DRIVER 3 P95 18LG/WT PASSENGER SEAT HEATER SUPPLY 4 A930 16RD FUSED B(+) 5-6 A930 16RD FUSED B(+) Component Location - 47 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Switch-Heated Seat-Driver > Page 14113 Component Location - 45 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Switch-Heated Seat-Driver > Page 14114 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Seat Heater Switch: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION Momentary contact push button switch/modules mounted in the instrument panel center bezel operate the heated seat system. Each heated seat switch/module has two Light-Emitting Diode (LED) indicator lamps, which indicate the selected level (Low or High) of the seat heater. Pressing the switch/module button initiates heat. Heat remains on until switched off or until the ignition is turned off. If switched off by the ignition, a switch/module button must be pressed to restart heating. The switch/modules contain the solid state electronic control and diagnostic logic circuitry for the heated seat system. If any of the heated seat elements are inoperative or damaged one or more of the LED lamps in the switch/module for the effected seat will flash. The LED indicator lamps in each heated seat switch/module cannot be repaired. If the LED lamps are faulty or damaged, or the switch/module is inoperative or damaged the individual heated seat switch/module assembly must be replaced. See: Service and Repair/Heated Seat Switch Removal for the switch/module replacement procedure. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 14117 Seat Heater Switch: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION A Heated Seat Switch/Module is used to control the heated seat system. The heated seat switch/modules receive battery current through a fused ignition switch output (run) circuit when the ignition switch is in the On position. The switch/module responds to heated seat switch/module button input and ignition switch status inputs by controlling the 12v output to the front seat heating elements through integral solid-state relays. When either of the heated seat switch/module buttons are depressed the heating element for the selected seat is energized. Amber Light Emitting Diodes (LEDS) on the side of each switch/module indicate the level of heat in use: Two LEDs are illuminated for high, one for low, and none for off. Pressing the switch/module button once will select high-level heating. Pressing the button a second time will select low-level heating. Pressing the button a third time will shut the heating elements off. The heated seat switch/module energizes an integral solid-state relay, which supplies battery current to the heating elements. When high-temperature heating is selected, the heaters provide a boosted heat level during the first four minutes of operation after heating is activated. The heat output then drops to the normal high-temperature level. If high-level heating is selected, the control system will automatically switch to the low level after two hours of continuous operation. At that time, the number of illuminated LEDs changes from two to one, indicating the change. Operation on the low setting will continue indefinitely until the switch/module button is pushed to turn the system off. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Heated Seat Switch - Removal Seat Heater Switch: Service and Repair Heated Seat Switch - Removal REMOVAL 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. 2. Remove the instrument panel center bezel, See: Interior Moulding / Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Service and Repair/Instrument Panel Center Bezel - Removal . 3. Disconnect the switch/module electrical connectors. 4. Using an appropriate flat bladed tool, remove the heated seat switch/module from the bezel. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Heated Seat Switch - Removal > Page 14120 Seat Heater Switch: Service and Repair Heated Seat Switch - Installation INSTALLATION 1. Align the tabs of the switch/module to the instrument panel center bezel and gently push together until the tabs are securely in place. 2. Connect the switch/module electrical connectors. 3. Install the instrument panel center bezel, See: Interior Moulding / Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Service and Repair/Instrument Panel Center Bezel - Installation . 4. Connect the battery negative cable. 5. Verify heated seat system operation. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Track > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Seat Track: > 23-003-09 > Feb > 09 > Interior - Scrape/Click/Squeal From Seat Track Seat Track: Customer Interest Interior - Scrape/Click/Squeal From Seat Track NUMBER: 23-003-09 GROUP: Body DATE: 02-27-09 SUBJECT: Scraping, Clicking Or Squeal Sound From Seat Track OVERVIEW: This bulletin involves applying white lithium grease to the seat tracks for front seats equipped with manually operated fore-aft adjusters. MODELS: 2008 (DR) 1500 Ram Pick up 2008 (JK) Wrangler 2008 (KA) Nitro 2008 (KK) Liberty NOTE: This bulletin applies to vehicles built on or before July 1, 2008 (MDH O7OIXX). SYMPTOM/CONDITION: The seats may make a squeal, clicking or scraping sound when: i. Stopping and accelerating ii. Driving around corners iii. Adjusting the seat This may be more noticeable at colder ambient temperatures. DIAGNOSIS: If the customer describes this condition, perform the Repair Procedure. PARTS REQUIRED: NOTE: Do not use aerosol spray white lithium grease. This grease is not thick enough. NOTE: One tube of grease can treat more than 10 vehicles. REPAIR PROCEDURE: 1. Open door. 2. Slide driver seat to full forward position. 3. Lubricate the seat track with (p/n 68003883AA). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Track > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Seat Track: > 23-003-09 > Feb > 09 > Interior - Scrape/Click/Squeal From Seat Track > Page 14129 a. Squeeze a dab of grease the size of a nickel on both inner surfaces of the fixed outboard lower rail where 'teeth' point down (Fig 1) b. Squeeze a dab of grease the size of a nickel on both inner surfaces of the fixed inboard lower rail where 'teeth' point down (Fig 1). 4. Move the seat back and forth a few times to distribute the grease along the track. 5. Repeat steps 2, 3 and 4 for the passenger seat. POLICY: Reimbursable within the provisions of the warranty. TIME ALLOWANCE: FAILURE CODE: Disclaimer: This bulletin is supplied as technical information only and is not an authorization for repair. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Track > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Seat Track: > 23-003-09 > Feb > 09 > Interior - Scrape/Click/Squeal From Seat Track Seat Track: All Technical Service Bulletins Interior - Scrape/Click/Squeal From Seat Track NUMBER: 23-003-09 GROUP: Body DATE: 02-27-09 SUBJECT: Scraping, Clicking Or Squeal Sound From Seat Track OVERVIEW: This bulletin involves applying white lithium grease to the seat tracks for front seats equipped with manually operated fore-aft adjusters. MODELS: 2008 (DR) 1500 Ram Pick up 2008 (JK) Wrangler 2008 (KA) Nitro 2008 (KK) Liberty NOTE: This bulletin applies to vehicles built on or before July 1, 2008 (MDH O7OIXX). SYMPTOM/CONDITION: The seats may make a squeal, clicking or scraping sound when: i. Stopping and accelerating ii. Driving around corners iii. Adjusting the seat This may be more noticeable at colder ambient temperatures. DIAGNOSIS: If the customer describes this condition, perform the Repair Procedure. PARTS REQUIRED: NOTE: Do not use aerosol spray white lithium grease. This grease is not thick enough. NOTE: One tube of grease can treat more than 10 vehicles. REPAIR PROCEDURE: 1. Open door. 2. Slide driver seat to full forward position. 3. Lubricate the seat track with (p/n 68003883AA). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Track > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Seat Track: > 23-003-09 > Feb > 09 > Interior - Scrape/Click/Squeal From Seat Track > Page 14135 a. Squeeze a dab of grease the size of a nickel on both inner surfaces of the fixed outboard lower rail where 'teeth' point down (Fig 1) b. Squeeze a dab of grease the size of a nickel on both inner surfaces of the fixed inboard lower rail where 'teeth' point down (Fig 1). 4. Move the seat back and forth a few times to distribute the grease along the track. 5. Repeat steps 2, 3 and 4 for the passenger seat. POLICY: Reimbursable within the provisions of the warranty. TIME ALLOWANCE: FAILURE CODE: Disclaimer: This bulletin is supplied as technical information only and is not an authorization for repair. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Track > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Seat Track: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The eight-way power seat option includes a power seat track assembly (1) located under each front seat. The power seat track assembly replaces the standard manually operated seat tracks. The lower half of the power seat track is secured at the front with two bolts to the floor panel seat cross member, and at the rear with two bolts to the floor panel. Four nuts secure the bottom of the seat cushion frame to the upper half of the power seat track unit. The power seat track assembly cannot be repaired, and is serviced only as a complete assembly. If any component in this assembly is inoperative or damaged, the entire power seat track must be replaced. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Track > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 14138 Seat Track: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The power seat track unit includes three reversible electric motors that are secured to the upper half of the track unit. Each motor moves the seat adjuster through a combination of worm-drive gearboxes and screw-type drive units. The front and rear of the seat are operated by two separate vertical adjustment motors. These motors can be operated independently of each other, tilting the entire seat assembly forward or rearward; or, they can be operated in unison by selecting the proper power seat switch functions, which will raise or lower the entire seat assembly. The third motor is the horizontal adjustment motor, which moves the seat track in the forward and rearward directions. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Track > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 14139 Seat Track: Testing and Inspection POWER SEAT TRACK For complete circuit diagrams, refer to the appropriate wiring information. The wiring information includes wiring diagrams, proper wire and connector repair procedures, details of wire harness routing and retention, connector pin-out information and location views for the various wire harness connectors, splices and grounds. Operate the power seat switch to move all three seat motors in each direction. The seat should move in each of the selected directions. If the power seat track fails to operate in only one direction, move the seat track a short distance in the opposite direction and test again to be certain that the track is not at its travel limit. If the power seat track still fails to operate in only one direction, See: Power Seat Switch/Testing and Inspection for power seat switch diagnosis. If the power seat track fails to operate in more than one direction, proceed as follows: 1. Check the power seat fuse in the integrated power module. If OK, go to STEP 2. If not OK, repair the circuit as necessary and replace the inoperative fuse. 2. Remove the power seat switch from the seat. Check for battery voltage at the fused B(+) circuit cavity of the power seat switch wire harness connector. If OK, go to STEP 3. If not OK, repair the open circuit to the integrated power module as required. 3. Check for continuity between the ground circuit cavity of the power seat switch wire harness connector and a good ground. There should be continuity. If OK, go to STEP 4. If not OK, repair the open circuit to ground as required. 4. Test the power seat switch, See: Power Seat Switch/Testing and Inspection . If the switch tests OK, check the wire harness between the power seat switch and the motor for shorts or opens. If the circuits check OK, replace the inoperative power seat track (adjuster) assembly. If the circuits are not OK, repair the wire harness as required. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Track > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Seat Track: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL 1. Remove the appropriate seat from the vehicle. See: Service and Repair/Seat - Removal . 2. Remove the power seat switch from the seat. See: Power Seat Switch/Service and Repair/Power Seat Switch - Removal . 3. Remove four seat track mounting nuts from cushion pan. 4. Disconnect the power seat electrical connectors and remove the seat track from the seat cushion. 5. Remove the necessary components that must be transferred to the replacement seat track (seat belt buckles, wire harness, etc.). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Track > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 14142 Seat Track: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION 1. Install the necessary components that must be transferred to the replacement seat track (seat belt buckles, wire harness, etc.). 2. Position the seat track and install the retaining nuts on the seat cushion pan studs. Torque the bolts to 25 Nm. 3. Route and connect the power seat electrical connectors on the seat track and cushion pan. 4. Install the power seat switch on the seat. See: Power Seat Switch/Service and Repair/Power Seat Switch - Installation . 5. Install the seat in the vehicle See: Service and Repair/Seat - Installation . 6. Connect the battery negative cable. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Hood Switch / Sensor > Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm) > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 475 Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm): Locations Component ID 475 Component ID: 475 Component : SWITCH-HOOD AJAR Connector: Name : SWITCH-HOOD AJAR Color : # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (GAS) Pin Circuit Description 1 G70 20VT/LB HOOD AJAR SWITCH SENSE 2 G930 20VT/TN AAT RETURN Component Location - 29 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Hood Switch / Sensor > Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm) > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 475 > Page 14149 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Hood Switch / Sensor > Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm) > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 475 > Page 14150 Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm): Locations Component ID 492 Component ID: 492 Component : SWITCH-HOOD AJAR Connector: Name : SWITCH-HOOD AJAR Color : # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (GAS) Pin Circuit Description 1 G70 20VT/LB HOOD AJAR SWITCH SENSE 2 G930 20VT/TN AAT RETURN Component Location - 29 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Hood Switch / Sensor > Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm) > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 475 > Page 14151 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Hood Switch / Sensor > Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm) > Component Information > Diagrams > Component ID 475 Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm): Diagrams Component ID 475 Component ID: 475 Component : SWITCH-HOOD AJAR Connector: Name : SWITCH-HOOD AJAR Color : # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (GAS) Pin Circuit Description 1 G70 20VT/LB HOOD AJAR SWITCH SENSE 2 G930 20VT/TN AAT RETURN Component Location - 29 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Hood Switch / Sensor > Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm) > Component Information > Diagrams > Component ID 475 > Page 14154 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Hood Switch / Sensor > Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm) > Component Information > Diagrams > Component ID 475 > Page 14155 Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm): Diagrams Component ID 492 Component ID: 492 Component : SWITCH-HOOD AJAR Connector: Name : SWITCH-HOOD AJAR Color : # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (GAS) Pin Circuit Description 1 G70 20VT/LB HOOD AJAR SWITCH SENSE 2 G930 20VT/TN AAT RETURN Component Location - 29 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Hood Switch / Sensor > Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm) > Component Information > Diagrams > Component ID 475 > Page 14156 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Hood Switch / Sensor > Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm) > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm): Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The hood ajar switch is a normally closed, single pole, spring-loaded plunger actuated switch. This switch has two unique versions that are used in two different applications. One switch is used only on vehicles equipped with the Vehicle Theft Alarm (VTA) system for sale in certain export markets where protection of the underhood area is required equipment. The second switch is used only on domestic vehicles equipped with an optional remote starter system. The molded plastic switch body (5) has an integral molded connector receptacle (1) on the lower end containing two terminal pins. The switch is connected to the vehicle electrical system through a dedicated take out of the headlamp and dash wire harness. Two integral latches (2) lock the switch into a keyed mounting hole in the stamped steel switch mounting bracket. The mounting bracket is secured with screws to the inboard side of the right front fender load beam within the engine compartment. A molded plastic striker secured to the underside of the hood panel inner reinforcement actuates the switch plunger as the hood panel is closed. The switch plunger (3) extends through a mounting collar (4) and a sleeve-like retainer ring on the upper end of the switch body. The retainer ring has a one time, self-adjustment feature that is activated after the switch is installed by closing the hood. The retainer ring is also color-coded to aid in identifying the switch application. A dark brown retainer ring identifies the underhood security switch application, while a white retainer ring identifies the remote starter system application. An installed hood ajar switch cannot be readjusted or repaired. If the switch is damaged, ineffective, or requires readjustment, it must be replaced with a new unit. The hood ajar switch striker is not intended for reuse. If the striker is removed from the hood inner reinforcement for any reason, it must be replaced with a new unit. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Hood Switch / Sensor > Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm) > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 14159 Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm): Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The hood ajar switches are interchangeable physically, but not functionally. In each case, the hood ajar switch is a normally closed switch that is held open as the spring-loaded switch plunger is depressed by the striker on the inner hood panel reinforcement when the hood panel is closed and latched. When the hood is opened, the spring-loaded switch plunger extends from the switch body and the switch contacts are closed. In the underhood security application (export vehicles only - dark brown retainer ring), the switch is connected in series between ground and the hood ajar switch sense input of the Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM). The TIPM uses an internal resistor pull up to monitor the state of the hood ajar switch contacts. In the remote starter system application (domestic vehicles only - white retainer ring) the switch has a 1 kilohm diagnostic resistor connected in parallel to the switch contacts between the two switch terminals. The switch is connected in series between an output of the TIPM and the hood ajar switch sense input of the TIPM. The TIPM continually monitors this circuit and will store a Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) for any fault that it detects. The components of the switch self-adjustment feature include an integral stop on the shaft of the plunger and a ribbed, ratcheting sleeve-like retainer ring at the top of the switch body from which the plunger extends. With the switch mounting collar secured in its mounting bracket, the plunger is depressed by the striker on the hood inner reinforcement as the hood is closed. As the plunger is depressed, the plunger stop contacts the top of the retainer ring and it is driven downward, ratcheting through the switch mounting collar until the hood is fully closed and latched. The ribs on the retainer ring are engaged within the mounting collar to maintain this adjusted position. The hood ajar switch as well as the hard wired circuits between the switch and the TIPM may be diagnosed using conventional diagnostic tools and procedures. Refer to the appropriate wiring information. However, conventional diagnostic methods will not prove conclusive in the diagnosis of the electronic controls or communication between modules and other devices related to hood ajar switch operation that provide some features of the export vehicle theft or domestic remote starter systems. The most reliable, efficient, and accurate means to diagnose the electronic controls and communication related to hood ajar switch operation requires the use of a diagnostic scan tool. Refer to the appropriate diagnostic information. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Hood Switch / Sensor > Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm) > Component Information > Service and Repair > Hood Ajar Switch Bracket Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm): Service and Repair Hood Ajar Switch Bracket Removal BRACKET 1. Remove the hood ajar switch (2) from the mounting bracket (3). See: Hood Ajar Switch Removal . 2. Remove the two screws (4) that secure the hood ajar switch bracket to the two rivet nuts (1) in the right front load beam (6). 3. Remove the hood ajar switch mounting bracket from the inboard side of the right front load beam. Installation BRACKET 1. Check to be certain that the two rivet nuts (1) on the inboard side of the right front load beam (6) are in good condition and properly secured. 2. Position the hood ajar switch mounting bracket (3) onto the right front load beam. 3. Install and tighten the two screws (4) that secure the mounting bracket to the load beam. Beginning with the rearward screw, tighten both screws to 8 Nm (71 in. lbs.). 4. Reinstall the hood ajar switch (2) into the mounting bracket. See: Hood Ajar Switch - Installation . Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Hood Switch / Sensor > Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm) > Component Information > Service and Repair > Hood Ajar Switch Bracket > Page 14162 Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm): Service and Repair Hood Ajar Switch Striker Removal STRIKER NOTE: The hood ajar switch striker is not intended for reuse. If the striker is removed from the hood inner reinforcement for any reason, it must be replaced. 1. Unlatch and open the hood. 2. Using a trim stick or another suitable wide flat-bladed tool, pry the rearward end of the hood ajar switch striker (2) away from the inner hood panel reinforcement (1) far enough to disengage the integral retainers from their mounting holes. 3. Remove the striker from the inner hood panel reinforcement and discard. Installation STRIKER NOTE: The hood ajar switch striker cap is not intended for reuse. If the striker cap is removed from the hood inner reinforcement for any reason, it must be replaced. 1. Position the new hood ajar switch striker (2) to the mounting holes in the inner hood panel reinforcement (1) over the hood ajar switch (3). 2. Using hand pressure, press the hood ajar switch striker upward into the mounting holes in the inner hood panel reinforcement until both integral retainers are fully engaged. 3. Close and latch the hood. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Hood Switch / Sensor > Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm) > Component Information > Service and Repair > Hood Ajar Switch Bracket > Page 14163 Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm): Service and Repair Hood Ajar Switch - Removal SWITCH 1. Unlatch and open the hood. 2. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. 3. From the top of the mounting bracket (3) on the right front load beam (6), squeeze the two hood ajar switch (2) latch tabs together and pull the switch upward. 4. Pull the hood ajar switch up through the hole in the mounting bracket far enough to access and disconnect the jumper wire harness connector (5) from the switch connector receptacle. 5. Remove the hood ajar switch from the mounting bracket. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Hood Switch / Sensor > Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm) > Component Information > Service and Repair > Hood Ajar Switch Bracket > Page 14164 Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm): Service and Repair Hood Ajar Switch - Installation SWITCH 1. Position the hood ajar switch (2) near the hole in the mounting bracket (3) on the right front load beam (6). 2. Route the jumper wire harness connector (5) through the switch mounting bracket and reconnect it to the switch connector receptacle. 3. From the top of the mounting bracket, press the switch downward into the mounting hole until the integral switch latch tabs lock it into place. 4. Reconnect the battery negative cable. 5. Close and latch the hood. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Pedal Positioning Switch > Component Information > Locations Pedal Positioning Switch: Locations Component ID: 480 Component : SWITCH-ADJUSTABLE PEDALS Connector: Name : SWITCH-ADJUSTABLE PEDALS Color : BLUE # of pins : 6 Qualifier : (EXCEPT BASE) Pin Circuit Description 1 P206 18LG/LB ADJUSTABLE PEDALS MOTOR REARWARD 2 A72 18RD/OR ADJUSTABLE PEDALS OUTPUT 3-4 Z146 18BK GROUND 5 F504 20GY/PK FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN) 6 P205 18LG/WT ADJUSTABLE PEDALS MOTOR FORWARD Component Location - 44 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Pedal Positioning Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 14168 Component Location - 50 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Pedal Positioning Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 14169 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Pedal Positioning Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 14170 Pedal Positioning Switch: Diagrams Component ID: 480 Component : SWITCH-ADJUSTABLE PEDALS Connector: Name : SWITCH-ADJUSTABLE PEDALS Color : BLUE # of pins : 6 Qualifier : (EXCEPT BASE) Pin Circuit Description 1 P206 18LG/LB ADJUSTABLE PEDALS MOTOR REARWARD 2 A72 18RD/OR ADJUSTABLE PEDALS OUTPUT 3-4 Z146 18BK GROUND 5 F504 20GY/PK FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN) 6 P205 18LG/WT ADJUSTABLE PEDALS MOTOR FORWARD Component Location - 44 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Pedal Positioning Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 14171 Component Location - 50 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Pedal Positioning Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 14172 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Pedal Positioning Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Pedal Positioning Switch: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL 1. Remove the lower drivers side bezel (4) See: Interior Moulding / Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Service and Repair/Instrument Panel Driver Side Bezel/Removal . 2. Disconnect the electrical connector (3) from the adjustable pedal switch (2). 3. Remove the switch (2) from the lower drivers side bezel (4) by squeezing the retaining clips together and pushing the switch outwards. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Pedal Positioning Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 14175 Pedal Positioning Switch: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION 1. Install the switch (2) to the lower drivers side bezel (4) by pushing the switch inwards seating the retaining clips to the lower drivers side bezel (4). 2. Reconnect the electrical connector (3) to the adjustable pedal switch (2). 3. Install the lower drivers side bezel (4) See: Interior Moulding / Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Service and Repair/Instrument Panel Driver Side Bezel/Installation . Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Door Lock Switch > Component Information > Locations > Switch-Door Lock-Passenger Power Door Lock Switch: Locations Switch-Door Lock-Passenger Component ID: 485 Component : SWITCH-DOOR LOCK-PASSENGER Connector: Name : SWITCH-DOOR LOCK-PASSENGER Color : NATURAL # of pins : 6 Pin Circuit Description 1 G160 20VT/LG PASSENGER DOOR LOCK SWITCH MUX 2 F21 20PK/DG FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) 3-4-5 Z917 20BK GROUND 6-Component Location - 56 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Door Lock Switch > Component Information > Locations > Switch-Door Lock-Passenger > Page 14180 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Door Lock Switch > Component Information > Locations > Switch-Door Lock-Passenger > Page 14181 Power Door Lock Switch: Locations Switch-Window/Door Lock-Driver Component ID: 518 Component : SWITCH-WINDOW/DOOR LOCK-DRIVER Connector: Name : SWITCH-WINDOW/DOOR LOCK-DRIVER C1 Color : BLUE # of pins : 12 Pin Circuit Description 1 Q612 14OR/DB RIGHT REAR WINDOW DRIVER (DOWN) 2 Q412 14OR/LB RIGHT REAR WINDOW DRIVER (UP) 3 Q16 12OR/TN MASTER WINDOW SWITCH RIGHT FRONT (UP) 4 Q411 14OR/WT LEFT REAR WINDOW DRIVER (UP) 5 Q11 14OR/LG LEFT FRONT WINDOW DRIVER (UP) 6 Q26 12OR/GY MASTER WINDOW SWITCH RIGHT FRONT (DOWN) 7 G161 20VT/DG DRIVER DOOR LOCK SWITCH MUX 8 Z939 12BK GROUND 9 F30 12PK/YL FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-ACC) 10 Q611 14OR/GY LEFT REAR WINDOW DRIVER (DOWN) 11 Z939 18BK GROUND 12 Q21 14OR/WT LEFT FRONT WINDOW DRIVER (DOWN) Component Location - 55 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Door Lock Switch > Component Information > Locations > Switch-Door Lock-Passenger > Page 14182 Connector: Name : SWITCH-WINDOW/DOOR LOCK-DRIVER C2 Color : BLUE # of pins : 8 Pin Circuit Description 1 P71 20TN/DG LEFT MIRROR UP DRIVER 2 P195 18LG/YL LEFT MIRROR COMMON DRIVER (RIGHT/DOWN) 3 A940 18RD FUSED B(+) 4 P74 18TN/OR RIGHT MIRROR LEFT DRIVER 5 Z939 18BK GROUND Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Door Lock Switch > Component Information > Locations > Switch-Door Lock-Passenger > Page 14183 6 P75 20TN/LG LEFT MIRROR LEFT DRIVER 7 P72 18TN/GY RIGHT MIRROR UP DRIVER 8 Q15 12OR/LB WINDOW LOCK OUT SWITCH OUTPUT Component Location - 55 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Door Lock Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Switch-Door Lock-Passenger Power Door Lock Switch: Diagrams Switch-Door Lock-Passenger Component ID: 485 Component : SWITCH-DOOR LOCK-PASSENGER Connector: Name : SWITCH-DOOR LOCK-PASSENGER Color : NATURAL # of pins : 6 Pin Circuit Description 1 G160 20VT/LG PASSENGER DOOR LOCK SWITCH MUX 2 F21 20PK/DG FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) 3-4-5 Z917 20BK GROUND 6-Component Location - 56 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Door Lock Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Switch-Door Lock-Passenger > Page 14186 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Door Lock Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Switch-Door Lock-Passenger > Page 14187 Power Door Lock Switch: Diagrams Switch-Window/Door Lock-Driver Component ID 479 Component ID: 479 Component : SWITCH-WINDOW/DOOR LOCK-DRIVER Connector: Name : SWITCH-WINDOW/DOOR LOCK-DRIVER C1 Color : BLUE # of pins : 12 Pin Circuit Description 1 Q612 14OR/DB RIGHT REAR WINDOW DRIVER (DOWN) 2 Q412 14OR/LB RIGHT REAR WINDOW DRIVER (UP) 3 Q16 12OR/TN MASTER WINDOW SWITCH RIGHT FRONT (UP) 4 Q411 14OR/WT LEFT REAR WINDOW DRIVER (UP) 5 Q11 14OR/LG LEFT FRONT WINDOW DRIVER (UP) 6 Q26 12OR/GY MASTER WINDOW SWITCH RIGHT FRONT (DOWN) 7 G161 20VT/DG DRIVER DOOR LOCK SWITCH MUX 8 Z939 12BK GROUND 9 F30 12PK/YL FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-ACC) 10 Q611 14OR/GY LEFT REAR WINDOW DRIVER (DOWN) 11 Z939 18BK GROUND 12 Q21 14OR/WT LEFT FRONT WINDOW DRIVER (DOWN) Connector: Name : SWITCH-WINDOW/DOOR LOCK-DRIVER C2 Color : BLUE # of pins : 8 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Door Lock Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Switch-Door Lock-Passenger > Page 14188 Pin Circuit Description 1 P71 20TN/DG LEFT MIRROR UP DRIVER 2 P195 18LG/YL LEFT MIRROR COMMON DRIVER (RIGHT/DOWN) 3 A940 18RD FUSED B(+) 4 P74 18TN/OR RIGHT MIRROR LEFT DRIVER 5 Z939 18BK GROUND 6 P75 20TN/LG LEFT MIRROR LEFT DRIVER 7 P72 18TN/GY RIGHT MIRROR UP DRIVER 8 Q15 12OR/LB WINDOW LOCK OUT SWITCH OUTPUT Component ID 518 Component ID: 518 Component : SWITCH-WINDOW/DOOR LOCK-DRIVER Connector: Name : SWITCH-WINDOW/DOOR LOCK-DRIVER C1 Color : BLUE # of pins : 12 Pin Circuit Description 1 Q612 14OR/DB RIGHT REAR WINDOW DRIVER (DOWN) 2 Q412 14OR/LB RIGHT REAR WINDOW DRIVER (UP) 3 Q16 12OR/TN MASTER WINDOW SWITCH RIGHT FRONT (UP) 4 Q411 14OR/WT LEFT REAR WINDOW DRIVER (UP) 5 Q11 14OR/LG LEFT FRONT WINDOW DRIVER (UP) 6 Q26 12OR/GY MASTER WINDOW SWITCH RIGHT FRONT (DOWN) Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Door Lock Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Switch-Door Lock-Passenger > Page 14189 7 G161 20VT/DG DRIVER DOOR LOCK SWITCH MUX 8 Z939 12BK GROUND 9 F30 12PK/YL FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-ACC) 10 Q611 14OR/GY LEFT REAR WINDOW DRIVER (DOWN) 11 Z939 18BK GROUND 12 Q21 14OR/WT LEFT FRONT WINDOW DRIVER (DOWN) Component Location - 55 Connector: Name : SWITCH-WINDOW/DOOR LOCK-DRIVER C2 Color : BLUE # of pins : 8 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Door Lock Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Switch-Door Lock-Passenger > Page 14190 Pin Circuit Description 1 P71 20TN/DG LEFT MIRROR UP DRIVER 2 P195 18LG/YL LEFT MIRROR COMMON DRIVER (RIGHT/DOWN) 3 A940 18RD FUSED B(+) 4 P74 18TN/OR RIGHT MIRROR LEFT DRIVER 5 Z939 18BK GROUND 6 P75 20TN/LG LEFT MIRROR LEFT DRIVER 7 P72 18TN/GY RIGHT MIRROR UP DRIVER 8 Q15 12OR/LB WINDOW LOCK OUT SWITCH OUTPUT Component Location - 55 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Door Lock Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Switch-Door Lock-Passenger > Page 14191 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Door Lock Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Power Door Lock Switch: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION A window/lock switch is used on all models equipped with power locks, power windows, and power mirrors. The window/lock switch houses the following switches: - Power Lock Switch - A two-way, momentary, resistor multiplexed switch to control the power lock system. - Power Mirror Selector Switch - A three-position rocker switch selects the right or left power mirror for adjustment, or turns the power mirror system Off. - Power Mirror Adjustment Switches - Four momentary, arrowhead shaped, directional switches allow the driver to adjust the selected power mirror in the Up, Down, Right, or Left directions. - Power Window Lockout Switch - A two-way, latching, push-button switch allows the vehicle operator to lock out the power window switches on each passenger door so that the passenger door power windows may be operated only from the master switches. - Power Window Switches - A two-way, momentary power window switch for the driver side front door. This switch also has a second detent in the Down direction and internal circuitry to provide an Auto-Down feature for the driver side front door power window. In addition to the power window switch for its own door, there are individual master switches for each passenger door power window. The window/lock switch also incorporates several green Light-Emitting Diodes (LEDs) that illuminate the power lock and power window switch paddles, and the power mirror switch directional buttons to improve switch visibility. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Door Lock Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 14194 Power Door Lock Switch: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The window/lock switch combines a power lock switch, a driver power window switch with an Auto-down feature, master switches for each passenger door power window, a power window lockout switch, a power mirror selector switch, and four power mirror adjustment switches in a single unit. Power Lock Switch The power lock switch circuitry is connected in series between ground and the driver door switch mux input of the instrument cluster. Each power lock switch position (Lock, Unlock, and Neutral) provides a different resistance value to the instrument cluster input, which allows the instrument cluster to sense the switch position. Based upon the power lock switch input, the instrument cluster controls the battery and ground feed outputs to the individual power lock motors to lock or unlock the door latches. The Light-Emitting Diode (LED) in the power lock switch is connected to battery current through the power window circuit breaker in the Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) on a fused ignition switch output (run-acc) circuit. The switch will be illuminated whenever the ignition switch is in the On or Accessory positions. Power Window Switches The power window switch circuitry is connected to battery current through a circuit breaker in the Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) on a fused ignition switch output (run-acc) circuit so that the power windows will operate whenever the ignition switch is in the On or Accessory positions. Each two-way, momentary master passenger power window switch provides battery current and ground to the individual power window switches on each passenger door so that the power window switch controls the battery current and ground feeds to its respective power window motor. The switch for the driver side front door power window is labeled "Auto" and includes an auto-down feature. When this switch is depressed to a second momentary detent position and released, the driver door power window is automatically operated through an internal circuit and relay to its fully lowered position. The Auto-down event is cancelled if the switch paddle is depressed a second time in either the Up or Down direction. When the two position window lockout switch is depressed and latched in the lockout position, the battery current feed to each of the individual passenger power window switches is interrupted so that the passenger door power windows can only be operated from the master switches. The window lockout switch also controls the battery current feed for the LED in each passenger power window switch so that the switch will not be illuminated when it is locked out. Power Mirror Switches The power mirror switch circuitry is connected to battery current through a fuse in the TIPM on a fused B(+) circuit so that the power mirrors remain operational regardless of the ignition switch position. A rocker type selector switch has three positions, one to select the right mirror, one to select the left mirror, and a neutral Off position. After the right or left mirror is selected, one of four directional buttons is depressed to move the selected mirror Up, Down, Right or Left. The power mirror switch circuitry controls the battery current and ground feeds to each of the four (two in each mirror head) power mirror motors. The Light-Emitting Diode (LED) in the power mirror switch is connected to battery current through the power window circuit breaker in the TIPM on a fused ignition switch output (run-acc) circuit so that the switch directional buttons will be illuminated whenever the ignition switch is in the On or Accessory positions. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Door Lock Switch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Power Lock Switch Power Door Lock Switch: Testing and Inspection Power Lock Switch POWER LOCK SWITCH The Light-Emitting Diode (LED) illumination lamp of the power lock switch receives battery current through a fuse in the Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) on a fused ignition switch output (run) circuit. The power lock switch on the driver side front door trim panel is integral to the window/lock switch. See: Diagnosis and Testing If the power lock switch operates, but the LED is inoperative, check for battery current at the switch with the ignition switch in the On position. If OK, replace the faulty switch. Refer to the appropriate wiring information. 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. Remove the power lock switch from the door trim panel. Disconnect the door wire harness connector for the power lock switch from the switch connector receptacle. 2. Test the power lock switch resistance. See the Power Lock Switch Test chart to determine if the resistance is correct for the switch in each switch position. If not OK, replace the faulty power lock switch as required. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Door Lock Switch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Power Lock Switch > Page 14197 Power Door Lock Switch: Testing and Inspection Diagnosis and Testing WINDOW/LOCK SWITCH The Light-Emitting Diode (LED) illumination lamps for all of the Driver Door Module (DDM) power window, power lock, and power mirror switches receive battery current through the power window circuit breaker in the Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM). If all of the LED's are inoperative in the DDM, be certain to diagnose the power window system before replacing the switch unit. See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code Tests and Associated Procedures . If only one LED in the DDM is inoperative, replace the faulty DDM. If the driver side front door power window operates in a normal manner, but the Auto-Down feature is inoperative, replace the faulty DDM. Refer to the appropriate wiring information. 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. Remove the DDM from the door trim panel. Disconnect the door wire harness connectors for the DDM from the DDM connector receptacles. 2. Test the DDM switch continuity. See the Driver Door Module Switch Tests chart to determine if the continuity is correct for the suspect switches in each switch position. If not OK, replace the faulty DDM as required. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Door Lock Switch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Power Lock Switch > Page 14198 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Door Lock Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Power Lock Switch Power Door Lock Switch: Service and Repair Power Lock Switch Removal REMOVAL The power lock switch on the driver side front door trim panel is integral to the window/lock switch. See: Window/Door Lock Switch/Removal 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. 2. Remove the door trim panel. See: Doors, Hood and Trunk/Doors/Front Door/Front Door Panel/Service and Repair/Front Door Trim Panel Removal 3. Remove the switch from the trim panel bezel. Installation INSTALLATION 1. Insert switch to trim panel bezel. 2. Install door trim panel See: Doors, Hood and Trunk/Doors/Front Door/Front Door Panel/Service and Repair/Front Door Trim Panel - Installation . 3. Connect battery negative cable. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Door Lock Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Power Lock Switch > Page 14201 Power Door Lock Switch: Service and Repair Window/Door Lock Switch Removal REMOVAL 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. 2. Remove the door trim panel See: Doors, Hood and Trunk/Doors/Front Door/Front Door Panel/Service and Repair/Front Door Trim Panel Removal . 3. Remove the switch from the trim panel bezel. Installation INSTALLATION 1. Install switch to trim panel bezel. 2. Install door trim panel See: Doors, Hood and Trunk/Doors/Front Door/Front Door Panel/Service and Repair/Front Door Trim Panel - Installation . 3. Connect battery negative cable. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Seat Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Switch-Seat-Driver Power Seat Switch: Diagrams Switch-Seat-Driver Component ID 476 Component ID: 476 Component : SWITCH-SEAT-DRIVER Connector: Name : SWITCH-SEAT-DRIVER Color : # of pins : 12 Qualifier : (HD) A A210 12OR/RD FUSED B(+) B Z939 14BK GROUND C-E P11 12LG/YL DRIVER SEAT REAR UP DRIVER F-G Z939 14BK GROUND H A210 12OR/RD FUSED B(+) J P13 12LG/OR DRIVER SEAT REAR DOWN DRIVER K P17 12LG/DG DRIVER SEAT HORIZONTAL REARWARD DRIVER L P15 12LG/BR DRIVER SEAT HORIZONTAL FORWARD DRIVER M P19 12LG/LB DRIVER SEAT FRONT UP DRIVER N P21 12LG/TN DRIVER SEAT FRONT DOWN DRIVER Connector: Name : SWITCH-SEAT-DRIVER Color : GRAY # of pins : 8 Qualifier : (LD) Gender : MALE Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Seat Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Switch-Seat-Driver > Page 14206 Pin Circuit Description 1 P19 12LG/LB DRIVER SEAT FRONT UP DRIVER 2 Z939 14BK GROUND 3 P15 12LG/WT DRIVER SEAT HORIZONTAL FORWARD DRIVER 4 A210 12OR/RD FUSED B(+) 5 P11 12LG/YL DRIVER SEAT REAR UP DRIVER 6 P17 12LG/DG DRIVER SEAT HORIZONTAL REARWARD DRIVER 7 P13 12LG/OR DRIVER SEAT REAR DOWN DRIVER 8 P21 12LG/TN DRIVER SEAT FRONT DOWN DRIVER Component ID 507 Component ID: 507 Component : SWITCH-SEAT-DRIVER Connector: Name : SWITCH-SEAT-DRIVER Color : # of pins : 12 Qualifier : (HD) A A210 12OR/RD FUSED B(+) B Z939 14BK GROUND C-E P11 12LG/YL DRIVER SEAT REAR UP DRIVER F-G Z939 14BK GROUND H A210 12OR/RD FUSED B(+) Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Seat Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Switch-Seat-Driver > Page 14207 J P13 12LG/OR DRIVER SEAT REAR DOWN DRIVER K P17 12LG/DG DRIVER SEAT HORIZONTAL REARWARD DRIVER L P15 12LG/BR DRIVER SEAT HORIZONTAL FORWARD DRIVER M P19 12LG/LB DRIVER SEAT FRONT UP DRIVER N P21 12LG/TN DRIVER SEAT FRONT DOWN DRIVER Connector: Name : SWITCH-SEAT-DRIVER Color : GRAY # of pins : 8 Qualifier : (LD) Gender : MALE Pin Circuit Description 1 P19 12LG/LB DRIVER SEAT FRONT UP DRIVER 2 Z939 14BK GROUND 3 P15 12LG/WT DRIVER SEAT HORIZONTAL FORWARD DRIVER 4 A210 12OR/RD FUSED B(+) 5 P11 12LG/YL DRIVER SEAT REAR UP DRIVER 6 P17 12LG/DG DRIVER SEAT HORIZONTAL REARWARD DRIVER 7 P13 12LG/OR DRIVER SEAT REAR DOWN DRIVER 8 P21 12LG/TN DRIVER SEAT FRONT DOWN DRIVER Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Seat Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Switch-Seat-Driver > Page 14208 Power Seat Switch: Diagrams Switch-Seat-Passenger Component ID 477 Component ID: 477 Component : SWITCH-SEAT-PASSENGER Connector: Name : SWITCH-SEAT-PASSENGER Color : # of pins : 12 A A210 12OR/RD FUSED B(+) B Z939 14BK GROUND C-E P12 12LG/YL PASSENGER SEAT REAR UP DRIVER F-G Z939 14BK GROUND H A210 12OR/RD FUSED B(+) J P10 12LG/TN PASSENGER SEAT REAR DOWN DRIVER K P16 12LG/BR PASSENGER SEAT HORIZONTAL REARWARD DRIVER L P14 12LG/OR PASSENGER SEAT HORIZONTAL FORWARD DRIVER M P20 12LG/LB PASSENGER SEAT FRONT UP DRIVER N P18 12LG/OR PASSENGER SEAT FRONT DOWN DRIVER Component ID 508 Component ID: 508 Component : SWITCH-SEAT-PASSENGER Connector: Name : SWITCH-SEAT-PASSENGER Color : # of pins : 12 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Seat Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Switch-Seat-Driver > Page 14209 A A210 12OR/RD FUSED B(+) B Z939 14BK GROUND C-E P12 12LG/YL PASSENGER SEAT REAR UP DRIVER F-G Z939 14BK GROUND H A210 12OR/RD FUSED B(+) J P10 12LG/TN PASSENGER SEAT REAR DOWN DRIVER K P16 12LG/BR PASSENGER SEAT HORIZONTAL REARWARD DRIVER L P14 12LG/OR PASSENGER SEAT HORIZONTAL FORWARD DRIVER M P20 12LG/LB PASSENGER SEAT FRONT UP DRIVER N P18 12LG/OR PASSENGER SEAT FRONT DOWN DRIVER Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Seat Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Power Seat Switch: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The power seats on this vehicle can be adjusted in eight different directions, up, down, front up, front down, rear up, rear down, rearward and forward. The power seat switch is located on the outboard side of the seat cushion on the seat cushion side shield. The individual switches in the power seat switch assembly cannot be repaired. If one switch is damaged or inoperative, the entire power seat switch assembly must be replaced. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Seat Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 14212 Power Seat Switch: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION When a power switch control knob or knobs are actuated, a battery feed and a ground path are applied through the switch contacts to the power seat track adjuster motor. The selected adjuster motor operates to move the seat track or recliner through its drive unit in the selected direction until the switch is released, or until the travel limit of the adjuster is reached. When the switch is moved in the opposite direction, the battery feed and ground path to the motor are reversed through the switch contacts. This causes the adjuster motor to run in the opposite direction. No power seat switch should be held applied in any direction after the adjuster has reached its travel limit. The power seat adjuster motors each contain a self-resetting circuit breaker to protect them from overload. However, consecutive or frequent resetting of the circuit breaker must not be allowed to continue, or the motor may be damaged. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Seat Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 14213 Power Seat Switch: Testing and Inspection POWER SEAT SWITCH For complete circuit diagrams, refer to the appropriate wiring information. The wiring information includes wiring diagrams, proper wire and connector repair procedures, details of wire harness routing and retention, connector pin-out information and location views for the various wire harness connectors, splices and grounds. 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. 2. Remove the power seat switch from the power seat. 3. Using an ohmmeter to test the continuity of the power seat switches in each position. Refer to the POWER SEAT SWITCH TEST TABLE. If OK, See: Seats/Seat Track/Testing and Inspection . If not OK, replace the inoperative power seat switch. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Seat Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Power Seat Switch - Removal Power Seat Switch: Service and Repair Power Seat Switch - Removal REMOVAL 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. 2. Remove the seat cushion side shield from the seat. 3. Pull the switch bezel or side shield unit (1) out from the seat far enough to access the switch wire harness connector. Gently pry the locking tabs of the switch away from the wire harness connector and carefully unplug the connector from the power seat switch module (2). 4. Remove the screws (3) that secure the power seat switch (2) to the side shield unit (1). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Seat Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Power Seat Switch - Removal > Page 14216 Power Seat Switch: Service and Repair Power Seat Switch - Installation INSTALLATION 1. Position the power seat switch (2) on the seat cushion side shield (1) and install the screws (3). 2. Connect the electrical connector. 3. Install the seat cushion side shield on the seat. 4. Connect the battery negative cable. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Switch > Component Information > Locations > Switch-Heated Seat-Driver Seat Heater Switch: Locations Switch-Heated Seat-Driver Component ID: 490 Component : SWITCH-HEATED SEAT-DRIVER Connector: Name : SWITCH-HEATED SEAT-DRIVER Color : DK. GRAY # of pins : 6 Pin Circuit Description 1 Z301 20TN/BK GROUND 2 P301 20LG/OR PANEL LAMPS DRIVER 3 P693 18LG/WT DRIVER SEAT HEATER SUPPLY 4 A930 16RD FUSED B(+) 5-6 A930 16RD FUSED B(+) Component Location - 47 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Switch > Component Information > Locations > Switch-Heated Seat-Driver > Page 14221 Component Location - 45 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Switch > Component Information > Locations > Switch-Heated Seat-Driver > Page 14222 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Switch > Component Information > Locations > Switch-Heated Seat-Driver > Page 14223 Seat Heater Switch: Locations Switch-Heated Seat-Passenger Component ID: 491 Component : SWITCH-HEATED SEAT-PASSENGER Connector: Name : SWITCH-HEATED SEAT-PASSENGER Color : GREEN # of pins : 6 Pin Circuit Description 1 Z302 20LG/BK GROUND 2 P301 20LG/OR PANEL LAMPS DRIVER 3 P95 18LG/WT PASSENGER SEAT HEATER SUPPLY 4 A930 16RD FUSED B(+) 5-6 A930 16RD FUSED B(+) Component Location - 47 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Switch > Component Information > Locations > Switch-Heated Seat-Driver > Page 14224 Component Location - 45 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Switch > Component Information > Locations > Switch-Heated Seat-Driver > Page 14225 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Switch-Heated Seat-Driver Seat Heater Switch: Diagrams Switch-Heated Seat-Driver Component ID: 490 Component : SWITCH-HEATED SEAT-DRIVER Connector: Name : SWITCH-HEATED SEAT-DRIVER Color : DK. GRAY # of pins : 6 Pin Circuit Description 1 Z301 20TN/BK GROUND 2 P301 20LG/OR PANEL LAMPS DRIVER 3 P693 18LG/WT DRIVER SEAT HEATER SUPPLY 4 A930 16RD FUSED B(+) 5-6 A930 16RD FUSED B(+) Component Location - 47 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Switch-Heated Seat-Driver > Page 14228 Component Location - 45 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Switch-Heated Seat-Driver > Page 14229 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Switch-Heated Seat-Driver > Page 14230 Seat Heater Switch: Diagrams Switch-Heated Seat-Passenger Component ID: 491 Component : SWITCH-HEATED SEAT-PASSENGER Connector: Name : SWITCH-HEATED SEAT-PASSENGER Color : GREEN # of pins : 6 Pin Circuit Description 1 Z302 20LG/BK GROUND 2 P301 20LG/OR PANEL LAMPS DRIVER 3 P95 18LG/WT PASSENGER SEAT HEATER SUPPLY 4 A930 16RD FUSED B(+) 5-6 A930 16RD FUSED B(+) Component Location - 47 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Switch-Heated Seat-Driver > Page 14231 Component Location - 45 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Switch-Heated Seat-Driver > Page 14232 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Seat Heater Switch: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION Momentary contact push button switch/modules mounted in the instrument panel center bezel operate the heated seat system. Each heated seat switch/module has two Light-Emitting Diode (LED) indicator lamps, which indicate the selected level (Low or High) of the seat heater. Pressing the switch/module button initiates heat. Heat remains on until switched off or until the ignition is turned off. If switched off by the ignition, a switch/module button must be pressed to restart heating. The switch/modules contain the solid state electronic control and diagnostic logic circuitry for the heated seat system. If any of the heated seat elements are inoperative or damaged one or more of the LED lamps in the switch/module for the effected seat will flash. The LED indicator lamps in each heated seat switch/module cannot be repaired. If the LED lamps are faulty or damaged, or the switch/module is inoperative or damaged the individual heated seat switch/module assembly must be replaced. See: Service and Repair/Heated Seat Switch Removal for the switch/module replacement procedure. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 14235 Seat Heater Switch: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION A Heated Seat Switch/Module is used to control the heated seat system. The heated seat switch/modules receive battery current through a fused ignition switch output (run) circuit when the ignition switch is in the On position. The switch/module responds to heated seat switch/module button input and ignition switch status inputs by controlling the 12v output to the front seat heating elements through integral solid-state relays. When either of the heated seat switch/module buttons are depressed the heating element for the selected seat is energized. Amber Light Emitting Diodes (LEDS) on the side of each switch/module indicate the level of heat in use: Two LEDs are illuminated for high, one for low, and none for off. Pressing the switch/module button once will select high-level heating. Pressing the button a second time will select low-level heating. Pressing the button a third time will shut the heating elements off. The heated seat switch/module energizes an integral solid-state relay, which supplies battery current to the heating elements. When high-temperature heating is selected, the heaters provide a boosted heat level during the first four minutes of operation after heating is activated. The heat output then drops to the normal high-temperature level. If high-level heating is selected, the control system will automatically switch to the low level after two hours of continuous operation. At that time, the number of illuminated LEDs changes from two to one, indicating the change. Operation on the low setting will continue indefinitely until the switch/module button is pushed to turn the system off. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Heated Seat Switch - Removal Seat Heater Switch: Service and Repair Heated Seat Switch - Removal REMOVAL 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. 2. Remove the instrument panel center bezel, See: Interior Moulding / Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Service and Repair/Instrument Panel Center Bezel - Removal . 3. Disconnect the switch/module electrical connectors. 4. Using an appropriate flat bladed tool, remove the heated seat switch/module from the bezel. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Heated Seat Switch - Removal > Page 14238 Seat Heater Switch: Service and Repair Heated Seat Switch - Installation INSTALLATION 1. Align the tabs of the switch/module to the instrument panel center bezel and gently push together until the tabs are securely in place. 2. Connect the switch/module electrical connectors. 3. Install the instrument panel center bezel, See: Interior Moulding / Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Service and Repair/Instrument Panel Center Bezel - Installation . 4. Connect the battery negative cable. 5. Verify heated seat system operation. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Sunroof / Moonroof Switch > Component Information > Locations Sunroof / Moonroof Switch: Locations Component ID: 512 Component : SWITCH-SUNROOF Connector: Name : SWITCH-SUNROOF Color : BLACK # of pins : 4 A Q4 20OR/YL SUNROOF VENT SWITCH SENSE B Q6 20OR/LG SUNROOF SWITCH SUPPLY C Q3 20OR/TN SUNROOF OPEN SWITCH SENSE D Q5 20OR/LB SUNROOF CLOSE SWITCH SENSE Component Location - 53 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Sunroof / Moonroof Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 14242 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Sunroof / Moonroof Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 14243 Sunroof / Moonroof Switch: Diagrams Component ID: 512 Component : SWITCH-SUNROOF Connector: Name : SWITCH-SUNROOF Color : BLACK # of pins : 4 A Q4 20OR/YL SUNROOF VENT SWITCH SENSE B Q6 20OR/LG SUNROOF SWITCH SUPPLY C Q3 20OR/TN SUNROOF OPEN SWITCH SENSE D Q5 20OR/LB SUNROOF CLOSE SWITCH SENSE Component Location - 53 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Sunroof / Moonroof Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 14244 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Sunroof / Moonroof Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Sunroof Switch Sunroof / Moonroof Switch: Description and Operation Sunroof Switch Description DESCRIPTION The power sunroof switch (3) is a combination push-button and rocker switch module mounted in the overhead console. The sunroof switch is a direct contact unit that is directly wired to the sunroof motor/module assembly. The sunroof switch performs the following functions: - Power sunroof open (back of switch pushed) - Power sunroof closed (front of switch pushed) - Power sunroof vent (switch center button pushed) The power sunroof switch is part of the overhead console assembly and cannot be replaced separately. If the switch is damaged or inoperative the overhead console must be replaced, See: Interior Moulding / Trim/Console/Service and Repair/Overhead Console/Removal . Operation OPERATION The power sunroof switch is hard wired to the sunroof motor/module assembly. The switch receives battery current from the motor/module when the ignition switch is in the RUN and ACCESSORY positions. When one of the switch positions is pressed it sends battery current back to the motor/module, signaling it to move the power sunroof to the appropriate position. The motor/module will perform one of the following functions: - Power sunroof open (back of switch pushed) - Power sunroof closed (front of switch pushed) - Power sunroof vent (switch center button pushed) Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Sunroof / Moonroof Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 14247 Sunroof / Moonroof Switch: Testing and Inspection SWITCH - POWER SUNROOF For complete circuit diagrams, refer to the appropriate wiring information. The wiring information includes wiring diagrams, proper wire and connector repair procedures, details of wire harness routing and retention, connector pin-out information and location views for the various wire harness connectors, splices and grounds. If completing the appropriate diagnostic information results in the sunroof switch being inoperative, perform the following test prior to switch replacement. 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. 2. Remove the overhead console, See: Interior Moulding / Trim/Console/Service and Repair/Overhead Console/Removal . 3. Disconnect the power sunroof switch wire harness connector. 4. Using an ohmmeter, test the continuity of the power sunroof switch in each switch position. Refer to the POWER SUNROOF SWITCH CONTINUITY TABLE. If OK, inspect the wiring harness and connectors for damage. Use a scan tool and the proper Diagnostic Procedures Information to complete diagnosis of the power sunroof system. If not OK, replace the overhead console. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sound Proofing / Insulation > Component Information > Locations Sound Proofing / Insulation: Locations NVH/SOUND DEADENER LOCATIONS Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sound Proofing / Insulation > Component Information > Locations > Page 14251 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sound Proofing / Insulation > Component Information > Locations > Page 14252 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sound Proofing / Insulation > Component Information > Locations > Page 14253 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Spoilers, Flaps, and Air Dams > Air Dam > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Air Dam: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL 1. Remove the two outboard screws. 2. Remove the three middle screws and remove the air dam. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Spoilers, Flaps, and Air Dams > Air Dam > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 14259 Air Dam: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION 1. Position the air dam onto the bumper and seat the carrot type fasteners fully. 2. Starting at the center screw install the three middle screws. 3. Install the two outboard screws. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Tailgate > Tailgate Cover > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Tailgate Cover: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL 1. Open the tailgate (1) and remove the tailgate liner, if equipped. 2. Remove the ten bolts (2) that secure the tailgate cover (3) to the inside of the tailgate and remove the cover. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Tailgate > Tailgate Cover > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 14265 Tailgate Cover: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION 1. Position the tailgate cover (3) onto the inside of the tailgate (1). 2. Install the ten bolts (2) that secure the tailgate cover to the tailgate. Tighten the bolts securely. 3. If equipped, install the tailgate liner onto the tailgate. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Tailgate > Tailgate Hinge > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Tailgate Hinge: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL 1. Remove the tailgate See: Service and Repair/Removal . 2. If required, remove the bushing (3) from each tailgate hinge (1). 3. Remove the two bolts (4) that secure each tailgate hinge (1) to the cargo box (2) and remove the hinge(s) as necessary. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Tailgate > Tailgate Hinge > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 14270 Tailgate Hinge: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION 1. Position the tailgate hinge(s) onto the cargo box (2) as necessary. 2. Install the two bolts (4) that secure each tailgate hinge to the cargo box. Tighten the bolts to 34 Nm (25 ft. lbs.). 3. If removed, install the bushing (3) onto each tailgate hinge. 4. Install the tailgate See: Service and Repair/Installation . Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Tailgate > Tailgate Latch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Tailgate Latch: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL 1. Open the tailgate and remove the tailgate liner, if equipped. 2. Remove the ten bolts (5) that secure the tailgate cover (4) to the inside of the tailgate and remove the cover. 3. Using a grease pencil or equivalent, mark the actuator rod (3) at the control (2) for the latch (1) being serviced. 4. Disconnect the actuator rod from the control. 5. Remove the two bolts (7 and 8) that secure the latch (5) to the tailgate (4) and position the tailgate check cable (6) out of the way. 6. Remove the latch and actuator rod from the tailgate as an assembly. 7. If required, remove the actuator rod from the latch. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Tailgate > Tailgate Latch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 14275 Tailgate Latch: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION 1. If removed, install the actuator rod onto the latch (5) being serviced. 2. Install the latch and actuator rod into the tailgate (4) as an assembly. 3. Position the tailgate check cable (6) onto the tailgate and install the two bolts (7 and 8) that secure the latch and the check cable to the tailgate. Tighten the bolts to 23 Nm (17 ft. lbs.). 4. Locate the actuator rod (3) to the control (2) using the reference mark made during the removal procedure and connect the rod to the control. 5. Position the tailgate cover (4) onto the inside of the tailgate. 6. Install the ten bolts (5) that secure the tailgate cover to the tailgate. Tighten the bolts securely. 7. If equipped, install the tailgate liner onto the tailgate. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Tailgate > Tailgate Limiter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Tailgate Limiter: > 23-017-08 > May > 08 > Body - Tailgate Cables Appear To Be of Unequal Lengths Tailgate Limiter: Customer Interest Body - Tailgate Cables Appear To Be of Unequal Lengths NUMBER: 23-017-08 GROUP: Body DATE: May 10, 2008 SUBJECT: Tailgate - Side Check Cables Appear To Be Of Unequal Lengths OVERVIEW: This bulletin involves tensioning the tailgate check cable(s) MODELS: 2008 (DR/DH/D1) Ram Truck (1500/2500/3500) NOTE: This bulletin applies to vehicles built on or before May 07, 2008 (MDH 0507XX). SYMPTOM/CONDITION: One of the two side tailgate check cables may not be properly tensioned. This condition may cause an appearance, to the customer, that the tailgate side check cables are of unequal lengths and may lead to unnecessary replacement of the check cable(s). The left side check cable will more often appear to be the check cable that is longer, or loose in appearance. DIAGNOSIS: If the above condition is present perform the Repair Procedure. REPAIR PROCEDURE: 1. Fully open the tailgate. 2. Locate the tailgate check cable that appears loose or longer in length. 3. Remove the loose / longer in appearance check cable from its attachment point at the cargo box / bed body (Fig. 1). Do not disconnect the loose / longer in appearance check cable from the tailgate. 4. With the other side tailgate check cable still properly attached at both ends, carefully close the tailgate so as not to damage the loose check cable, Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Tailgate > Tailgate Limiter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Tailgate Limiter: > 23-017-08 > May > 08 > Body - Tailgate Cables Appear To Be of Unequal Lengths > Page 14284 bed body, or tailgate. 5. Open the tailgate fully with a hard, rapid motion. Then carefully close the tailgate so as to not damage the loose check cable, bed body, or tailgate. 6. Repeat the above step several times (as necessary). This action will correctly tension and seat the attached check cable 7. Install the loose check cable to the cargo box / bed body and verify appearance of both check cables. POLICY: Reimbursable within the provisions of the warranty. TIME ALLOWANCE: FAILURE CODE: Disclaimer: This bulletin is supplied as technical information only and is not an authorization for repair. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Tailgate > Tailgate Limiter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Tailgate Limiter: > 23-017-08 > May > 08 > Body - Tailgate Cables Appear To Be of Unequal Lengths Tailgate Limiter: All Technical Service Bulletins Body - Tailgate Cables Appear To Be of Unequal Lengths NUMBER: 23-017-08 GROUP: Body DATE: May 10, 2008 SUBJECT: Tailgate - Side Check Cables Appear To Be Of Unequal Lengths OVERVIEW: This bulletin involves tensioning the tailgate check cable(s) MODELS: 2008 (DR/DH/D1) Ram Truck (1500/2500/3500) NOTE: This bulletin applies to vehicles built on or before May 07, 2008 (MDH 0507XX). SYMPTOM/CONDITION: One of the two side tailgate check cables may not be properly tensioned. This condition may cause an appearance, to the customer, that the tailgate side check cables are of unequal lengths and may lead to unnecessary replacement of the check cable(s). The left side check cable will more often appear to be the check cable that is longer, or loose in appearance. DIAGNOSIS: If the above condition is present perform the Repair Procedure. REPAIR PROCEDURE: 1. Fully open the tailgate. 2. Locate the tailgate check cable that appears loose or longer in length. 3. Remove the loose / longer in appearance check cable from its attachment point at the cargo box / bed body (Fig. 1). Do not disconnect the loose / longer in appearance check cable from the tailgate. 4. With the other side tailgate check cable still properly attached at both ends, carefully close the tailgate so as not to damage the loose check cable, Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Tailgate > Tailgate Limiter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Tailgate Limiter: > 23-017-08 > May > 08 > Body - Tailgate Cables Appear To Be of Unequal Lengths > Page 14290 bed body, or tailgate. 5. Open the tailgate fully with a hard, rapid motion. Then carefully close the tailgate so as to not damage the loose check cable, bed body, or tailgate. 6. Repeat the above step several times (as necessary). This action will correctly tension and seat the attached check cable 7. Install the loose check cable to the cargo box / bed body and verify appearance of both check cables. POLICY: Reimbursable within the provisions of the warranty. TIME ALLOWANCE: FAILURE CODE: Disclaimer: This bulletin is supplied as technical information only and is not an authorization for repair. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Tailgate > Tailgate Release Handle > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Tailgate Release Handle: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL 1. Open the tailgate and remove the tailgate liner, if equipped. 2. Remove the ten bolts (5) that secure the tailgate cover (4) to the inside of the tailgate and remove the cover. 3. Using a grease pencil or equivalent, mark the location of the actuator rods (3) at the control (2). 4. Disconnect the actuator rods from the control. 5. Remove the two nuts (3) that secure the release handle (1) and the control (2) to the tailgate (4). 6. Remove the control and the release handle from the tailgate. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Tailgate > Tailgate Release Handle > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 14295 Tailgate Release Handle: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION 1. Position the release handle and the control onto the tailgate. 2. Install the two nuts that secure the release handle and control to the tailgate. Tighten the nuts to 7 Nm (60 in. lbs.). 3. Locate the actuator rods (3) to the control (2) using the reference marks made during the removal procedure and connect the rods to the control. 4. Position the tailgate cover (4) onto the inside of the tailgate. 5. Install the ten bolts (5) that secure the tailgate cover to the tailgate. Tighten the bolts securely. 6. If equipped, install the tailgate liner onto the tailgate. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Tailgate > Tailgate Shock / Support > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Tailgate Shock / Support: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL 1. Open the tailgate and locate the tailgate check cable (3) on the left and right of the cargo box below the tailgate striker (1) as necessary. 2. Pry the cable lock tab(s) (4) outward using a screwdriver or flat bladed tool (2) and remove the tailgate check cable(s) from the cargo box. 3. Remove the bolt (1) that secures the tailgate check cable (2) to the left and right side of the tailgate (3) as necessary. 4. Remove the tailgate check cable(s) from the tailgate. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Tailgate > Tailgate Shock / Support > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 14300 Tailgate Shock / Support: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION 1. Position the tailgate check cable (2) onto the left and right side of the tailgate (3) as necessary. 2. Install the bolt (1) that secures the small end of the tailgate check cable(s) to the tailgate. Tighten the bolt(s) to 23 Nm (17 ft. lbs.). 3. Position the tailgate check cable (3) to the left and right side of the cargo box below the tailgate striker (1) as necessary. 4. Install the large end of the tailgate check cable(s) onto the cargo box. Make sure that the cable lock tab(s) (4) fully engage. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Tailgate > Tailgate Striker > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Tailgate Striker: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL 1. Open the tailgate and using a grease pencil or equivalent, mark the location of the tailgate striker (1) being serviced. 2. Remove the striker from the cargo box (2). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Tailgate > Tailgate Striker > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 14305 Tailgate Striker: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION 1. Position the striker (1) onto the cargo box (2) using the reference mark made during the removal procedure. 2. Tighten the striker to 34 Nm (25 ft. lbs.). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Tie Down Hook / Bracket > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Tie Down Hook / Bracket: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL 1. Remove the two bolts (1) that secure each cargo box tie down (2) to the cargo bed and remove the cleats as necessary. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Tie Down Hook / Bracket > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 14310 Tie Down Hook / Bracket: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION 1. Position the cargo box tie downs (2) to the cargo box as necessary. 2. Install the two bolts (1) that secure each cargo box tie down to the cargo box. Tighten the bolts to 34 Nm (25 ft. lbs.). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Towing Hook / Bracket > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Towing Hook / Bracket: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL 1. Remove front bumper See: Bumper/Front Bumper/Service and Repair/Removal . 2. Remove the bolts (2) and remove the tow hook assembly (3). 3. If the vehicle is a Heavy Duty , then remove the bolts (1) and remove the tow hook (2). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Towing Hook / Bracket > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 14315 Towing Hook / Bracket: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION 1. Install the tow hook assembly (3) and bolts (2) hand tight. 2. If vehicle is a Heavy Duty , install the tow hook (2) and bolts (1) hand tight. 3. Install the front bumper See: Bumper/Front Bumper/Service and Repair/Installation . 4. Line up the tow hooks/tow hook assembly and tighten the bolts to 68 Nm (50 ft. lbs.). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Truck Bed > Component Information > Service and Repair > Cargo Box Removal Truck Bed: Service and Repair Cargo Box - Removal REMOVAL NOTE: Long cargo box shown in illustration. Short cargo box similar. 1. Remove the screws (1) that secure the fuel filler (2) to the cargo box (3). 2. Remove the fuel filler from the cargo box and position it out of the way. 3. If necessary, remove the fuel filler door from the cargo box See: Doors, Hood and Trunk/Fuel Door/Service and Repair/Removal . 4. Disconnect the tail lamp wire harness from the underbody wire harness .See: Locations 5. If necessary, remove the tail lamp units and wire harness from the cargo box See: Lighting and Horns/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Rear Lamp Unit - Removal . 6. If necessary, remove the tailgate See: Tailgate/Service and Repair/Removal . 7. If necessary, remove the rear bumper See: Bumper/Rear Bumper/Service and Repair/Removal . 8. Remove the bolts (3) that secure the cargo box (1) to the frame (2) (six short box, eight long box) and remove the cargo box. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Truck Bed > Component Information > Service and Repair > Cargo Box Removal > Page 14320 Truck Bed: Service and Repair Cargo Box - Installation INSTALLATION NOTE: Long cargo box shown in illustration. Short cargo box similar. 1. Position the cargo box (1) onto the frame (2) and loosely install the bolts (3) (six short box, eight long box). 2. Align the cargo box to the cab and tighten the bolts to 108 Nm (80 ft. lbs.). 3. If removed, install tail lamp units and wire harness onto the cargo box See: Lighting and Horns/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Rear Lamp Unit - Installation . 4. Connect the tail lamp wire harness to the underbody wire harness See: Locations . 5. If removed, install the tailgate See: Tailgate/Service and Repair/Installation . 6. If removed, install the rear bumper See: Bumper/Rear Bumper/Service and Repair/Installation . 7. If removed, install the fuel filler door See: Doors, Hood and Trunk/Fuel Door/Service and Repair/Installation . 8. Position the fuel filler (2) to the cargo box (3). 9. Install the screws (1) that secure the fuel filler to the cargo box. Tighten the screws to 2.2 Nm (20 in. lbs.). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Unibody > Cowl > Cowl Moulding / Trim > System Information > Service and Repair > Removal Cowl Moulding / Trim: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL 1. Remove the wiper arms See: Wiper and Washer Systems/Wiper Arm/Service and Repair/Wiper Arms - Removal . 2. Disconnect the cowl plenum washer hose from the washer supply hose at the molded plastic in-line fitting See: Wiper and Washer Systems/Windshield Washer Hose/Description and Operation/Description . 3. Remove the cowl weather seal from the front of the dash panel and the cowl grille (2). 4. Remove the six push pin fasteners (1) that secure the front of the cowl grille to the dash panel. 5. Remove the two screws (3) that secure the rear corners of the cowl grille to the dash panel and remove the grille. 6. If necessary, remove the washer nozzles and the cowl plenum washer hose from the cowl grille See: Wiper and Washer Systems/Windshield Washer Spray Nozzle/Service and Repair/Removal . Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Unibody > Cowl > Cowl Moulding / Trim > System Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 14327 Cowl Moulding / Trim: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION 1. If removed, install the washer nozzles and the cowl plenum washer hose onto the cowl grille (2) See: Wiper and Washer Systems/Windshield Washer Spray Nozzle/Service and Repair/Installation . 2. Position the cowl grille onto the dash panel. 3. Install the two screws (3) and the six push-pin fasteners (1) that secure the cowl grille to the dash panel. 4. Install the cowl weather seal onto the front of the dash panel and the cowl grille. 5. Connect the cowl plenum washer hose to the washer supply hose at the molded plastic in-line fitting See: Wiper and Washer Systems/Windshield Washer Hose/Description and Operation/Description . 6. Install the wiper arms See: Wiper and Washer Systems/Wiper Arm/Service and Repair/Wiper Arms - Installation . Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Weatherstrip > Front Door Weatherstrip > Component Information > Service and Repair > A-Pillar Weatherstrip Retainer Front Door Weatherstrip: Service and Repair A-Pillar Weatherstrip Retainer Removal REMOVAL 1. Remove the drip rail weatherstrip retainer (1) See: Drip Rail Weatherstrip - Removal . 2. Remove the five screws (8) and remove the A-pillar weatherstrip retainer (7). Installation INSTALLATION 1. Install the A-pillar weatherstrip retainer (7) and install the screws (8). 2. Install the drip rail weatherstrip retainer (1) See: Drip Rail Weatherstrip - Installation . Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Weatherstrip > Front Door Weatherstrip > Component Information > Service and Repair > A-Pillar Weatherstrip Retainer > Page 14333 Front Door Weatherstrip: Service and Repair Drip Rail Weatherstrip - Removal REMOVAL 1. Open the doors and separate the weatherstrip (3) from the drip rail and a-pillar retainers (1 and 7). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Weatherstrip > Front Door Weatherstrip > Component Information > Service and Repair > A-Pillar Weatherstrip Retainer > Page 14334 Front Door Weatherstrip: Service and Repair Drip Rail Weatherstrip - Installation INSTALLATION 1. Position the weatherstrip (3) onto the drip rail and a-pillar retainers (1 and 7) and seat fully. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Weatherstrip > Front Door Weatherstrip > Component Information > Service and Repair > A-Pillar Weatherstrip Retainer > Page 14335 Front Door Weatherstrip: Service and Repair Door Opening Seal Removal REMOVAL FRONT DOOR SEAL 1. Remove the cowl trim panel (1) See: Interior Moulding / Trim/Trim Panel/Service and Repair/Cowl Trim/Cowl Trim - Removal . 2. If vehicle is a Standard Cab , remove the lower b-pillar trim panel (3) See: Interior Moulding / Trim/Trim Panel/Service and Repair/Pillar Trim/B-Pillar Trim . Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Weatherstrip > Front Door Weatherstrip > Component Information > Service and Repair > A-Pillar Weatherstrip Retainer > Page 14336 3. If vehicle is a Quad Cab , remove the lower b-pillar trim panel (1) See: Interior Moulding / Trim/Trim Panel/Service and Repair/Pillar Trim/B-Pillar Trim . 4. Separate the front door opening seal (6) from the door opening flange. REAR DOOR SEAL 1. Remove the lower b-pillar trim panel (1) See: Interior Moulding / Trim/Trim Panel/Service and Repair/Pillar Trim/B-Pillar Trim . Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Weatherstrip > Front Door Weatherstrip > Component Information > Service and Repair > A-Pillar Weatherstrip Retainer > Page 14337 2. Remove the lower c-pillar trim (1) See: Interior Moulding / Trim/Trim Panel/Service and Repair/Pillar Trim/C-Pillar Trim Panel-Removal . 3. Separate the rear door opening seal (5) from the door opening flange. Installation INSTALLATION FRONT DOOR SEAL Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Weatherstrip > Front Door Weatherstrip > Component Information > Service and Repair > A-Pillar Weatherstrip Retainer > Page 14338 1. Position the front door seal (6) to the bottom of the door opening, with bulb facing outboard, starting the installation at the center of the lower flange. Press the seal onto the sill flange and work around the perimeter of the door opening until fully seated. Work in one direction, smoothing the seal to avoid puckers or wrinkles. 2. If vehicle is a Standard Cab , install the lower b-pillar trim (3) See: Interior Moulding / Trim/Trim Panel/Service and Repair/Pillar Trim/B-Pillar Trim . 3. If vehicle is a Quad Cab , install the lower b-pillar trim (1) See: Interior Moulding / Trim/Trim Panel/Service and Repair/Pillar Trim/B-Pillar Trim . Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Weatherstrip > Front Door Weatherstrip > Component Information > Service and Repair > A-Pillar Weatherstrip Retainer > Page 14339 4. Install the cowl trim panel (1) See: Interior Moulding / Trim/Trim Panel/Service and Repair/Cowl Trim/Cowl Trim - Installation NOTE: When installing a new weatherstrip on the front door opening, remove the tear strip starting at the splice and moving around the front of the door to the back of the opening. REAR DOOR SEAL 1. Position the rear door seal to the bottom of the door opening, with bulb facing outboard, starting the installation at the center of the lower flange. Press the seal onto the sill flange and work around the perimeter of the door opening until fully seated. Work in one direction, smoothing the seal to avoid puckers or wrinkles. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Weatherstrip > Front Door Weatherstrip > Component Information > Service and Repair > A-Pillar Weatherstrip Retainer > Page 14340 2. Install the lower c-pillar trim (1) See: Interior Moulding / Trim/Trim Panel/Service and Repair/Pillar Trim/C-Pillar Trim Panel-Installation . 3. Install the lower b-pillar trim (1) See: Interior Moulding / Trim/Trim Panel/Service and Repair/Pillar Trim/B-Pillar Trim . NOTE: When installing a new weatherstrip on the rear door opening, remove the tear strip starting at the splice and moving around the back of the door to the front of the opening. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Weatherstrip > Front Door Weatherstrip > Component Information > Service and Repair > A-Pillar Weatherstrip Retainer > Page 14341 Front Door Weatherstrip: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL 1. Remove the drip rail weatherstrip retainer (1) See: Drip Rail Weatherstrip - Removal . 2. Remove the five screws (8) and remove the A-pillar weatherstrip retainer (7). Installation INSTALLATION 1. Install the A-pillar weatherstrip retainer (7) and install the screws (8). 2. Install the drip rail weatherstrip retainer (1) See: Drip Rail Weatherstrip - Installation . Drip Rail Weatherstrip - Removal REMOVAL Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Weatherstrip > Front Door Weatherstrip > Component Information > Service and Repair > A-Pillar Weatherstrip Retainer > Page 14342 1. Open the doors and separate the weatherstrip (3) from the drip rail and a-pillar retainers (1 and 7). Drip Rail Weatherstrip - Installation INSTALLATION 1. Position the weatherstrip (3) onto the drip rail and a-pillar retainers (1 and 7) and seat fully. Removal REMOVAL FRONT DOOR SEAL Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Weatherstrip > Front Door Weatherstrip > Component Information > Service and Repair > A-Pillar Weatherstrip Retainer > Page 14343 1. Remove the cowl trim panel (1) See: Interior Moulding / Trim/Trim Panel/Service and Repair/Cowl Trim/Cowl Trim - Removal . 2. If vehicle is a Standard Cab , remove the lower b-pillar trim panel (3) See: Interior Moulding / Trim/Trim Panel/Service and Repair/Pillar Trim/B-Pillar Trim . 3. If vehicle is a Quad Cab , remove the lower b-pillar trim panel (1) See: Interior Moulding / Trim/Trim Panel/Service and Repair/Pillar Trim/B-Pillar Trim . Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Weatherstrip > Front Door Weatherstrip > Component Information > Service and Repair > A-Pillar Weatherstrip Retainer > Page 14344 4. Separate the front door opening seal (6) from the door opening flange. REAR DOOR SEAL 1. Remove the lower b-pillar trim panel (1) See: Interior Moulding / Trim/Trim Panel/Service and Repair/Pillar Trim/B-Pillar Trim . 2. Remove the lower c-pillar trim (1) See: Interior Moulding / Trim/Trim Panel/Service and Repair/Pillar Trim/C-Pillar Trim Panel-Removal . Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Weatherstrip > Front Door Weatherstrip > Component Information > Service and Repair > A-Pillar Weatherstrip Retainer > Page 14345 3. Separate the rear door opening seal (5) from the door opening flange. Installation INSTALLATION FRONT DOOR SEAL 1. Position the front door seal (6) to the bottom of the door opening, with bulb facing outboard, starting the installation at the center of the lower flange. Press the seal onto the sill flange and work around the perimeter of the door opening until fully seated. Work in one direction, smoothing the seal to avoid puckers or wrinkles. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Weatherstrip > Front Door Weatherstrip > Component Information > Service and Repair > A-Pillar Weatherstrip Retainer > Page 14346 2. If vehicle is a Standard Cab , install the lower b-pillar trim (3) See: Interior Moulding / Trim/Trim Panel/Service and Repair/Pillar Trim/B-Pillar Trim . 3. If vehicle is a Quad Cab , install the lower b-pillar trim (1) See: Interior Moulding / Trim/Trim Panel/Service and Repair/Pillar Trim/B-Pillar Trim . 4. Install the cowl trim panel (1) See: Interior Moulding / Trim/Trim Panel/Service and Repair/Cowl Trim/Cowl Trim - Installation NOTE: When installing a new weatherstrip on the front door opening, remove the tear strip starting at the splice and moving around the front of the door to the back of the opening. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Weatherstrip > Front Door Weatherstrip > Component Information > Service and Repair > A-Pillar Weatherstrip Retainer > Page 14347 REAR DOOR SEAL 1. Position the rear door seal to the bottom of the door opening, with bulb facing outboard, starting the installation at the center of the lower flange. Press the seal onto the sill flange and work around the perimeter of the door opening until fully seated. Work in one direction, smoothing the seal to avoid puckers or wrinkles. 2. Install the lower c-pillar trim (1) See: Interior Moulding / Trim/Trim Panel/Service and Repair/Pillar Trim/C-Pillar Trim Panel-Installation . 3. Install the lower b-pillar trim (1) See: Interior Moulding / Trim/Trim Panel/Service and Repair/Pillar Trim/B-Pillar Trim . Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Weatherstrip > Front Door Weatherstrip > Component Information > Service and Repair > A-Pillar Weatherstrip Retainer > Page 14348 NOTE: When installing a new weatherstrip on the rear door opening, remove the tear strip starting at the splice and moving around the back of the door to the front of the opening. Drip Rail Weatherstrip Retainer - Removal REMOVAL 1. Separate the drip rail weatherstrip (3) from the weatherstrip retainer (1). 2. Remove the seven screws (2) and remove the retainer (1). Drip Rail Weatherstrip Retainer - Installation INSTALLATION 1. Install the weatherstrip retainer (1) and install the seven screws (2). 2. Position the weatherstrip (3) over the retainer flange and seat fully. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Weatherstrip > Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Door Outer Belt Molding Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: Service and Repair Front Door Outer Belt Molding Removal REMOVAL 1. Remove the screw (4) and separate the belt molding (1) from the door (5) flange from the back to the front. Installation INSTALLATION 1. Position the belt molding (1) onto the door (5) flange and seat fully. 2. Install the screw (4). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Weatherstrip > Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Door Outer Belt Molding > Page 14353 Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: Service and Repair Front Door Glass Run Weatherstrip Removal REMOVAL 1. Remove the door glass See: Doors, Hood and Trunk/Doors/Front Door/Front Door Window Glass/Service and Repair/Front Door Glass Removal . 2. Separate the front door glass run weatherstrip (2) out of the door frame (5) and remove through the window opening. Installation INSTALLATION Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Weatherstrip > Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Door Outer Belt Molding > Page 14354 NOTE: A mixture of soap and water may be used to aid installation of the weatherstrip into the corners. 1. Position the front door glass run weatherstrip (2) into the door (5) through the window opening. 2. Position the weatherstrip into the upper corners and seat firmly. 3. From back to front, seat the weatherstrip between the corners and then down the sides firmly. 4. Install the door glass See: Doors, Hood and Trunk/Doors/Front Door/Front Door Window Glass/Service and Repair/Front Door Glass Installation . Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Weatherstrip > Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Door Outer Belt Molding > Page 14355 Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: Service and Repair Front Door Inner Belt Molding Removal REMOVAL 1. Remove the door trim panel (3) See: Doors, Hood and Trunk/Doors/Front Door/Front Door Panel/Service and Repair/Front Door Trim Panel Removal 2. Separate the belt molding (1) from the door (3) mounting flange from the back to the front. Installation INSTALLATION 1. Position the belt molding (1) and seat onto the door (3) mounting flange fully. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Weatherstrip > Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Door Outer Belt Molding > Page 14356 2. Install the door trim panel (3) See: Doors, Hood and Trunk/Doors/Front Door/Front Door Panel/Service and Repair/Front Door Trim Panel Installation . Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Weatherstrip > Rear Door Weatherstrip > Component Information > Service and Repair > A-Pillar Weatherstrip Retainer Rear Door Weatherstrip: Service and Repair A-Pillar Weatherstrip Retainer Removal REMOVAL 1. Remove the drip rail weatherstrip retainer (1) See: Front Door Weatherstrip/Service and Repair/Drip Rail Weatherstrip - Removal . 2. Remove the five screws (8) and remove the A-pillar weatherstrip retainer (7). Installation INSTALLATION 1. Install the A-pillar weatherstrip retainer (7) and install the screws (8). 2. Install the drip rail weatherstrip retainer (1) See: Front Door Weatherstrip/Service and Repair/Drip Rail Weatherstrip Installation . Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Weatherstrip > Rear Door Weatherstrip > Component Information > Service and Repair > A-Pillar Weatherstrip Retainer > Page 14361 Rear Door Weatherstrip: Service and Repair Drip Rail Weatherstrip - Removal REMOVAL 1. Open the doors and separate the weatherstrip (3) from the drip rail and a-pillar retainers (1 and 7). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Weatherstrip > Rear Door Weatherstrip > Component Information > Service and Repair > A-Pillar Weatherstrip Retainer > Page 14362 Rear Door Weatherstrip: Service and Repair Drip Rail Weatherstrip - Installation INSTALLATION 1. Position the weatherstrip (3) onto the drip rail and a-pillar retainers (1 and 7) and seat fully. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Weatherstrip > Rear Door Weatherstrip > Component Information > Service and Repair > A-Pillar Weatherstrip Retainer > Page 14363 Rear Door Weatherstrip: Service and Repair Door Opening Seal Removal REMOVAL FRONT DOOR SEAL 1. Remove the cowl trim panel (1) See: Interior Moulding / Trim/Trim Panel/Service and Repair/Cowl Trim/Cowl Trim - Removal . 2. If vehicle is a Standard Cab , remove the lower b-pillar trim panel (3) See: Interior Moulding / Trim/Trim Panel/Service and Repair/Pillar Trim/B-Pillar Trim . Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Weatherstrip > Rear Door Weatherstrip > Component Information > Service and Repair > A-Pillar Weatherstrip Retainer > Page 14364 3. If vehicle is a Quad Cab , remove the lower b-pillar trim panel (1) See: Interior Moulding / Trim/Trim Panel/Service and Repair/Pillar Trim/B-Pillar Trim . 4. Separate the front door opening seal (6) from the door opening flange. REAR DOOR SEAL 1. Remove the lower b-pillar trim panel (1) See: Interior Moulding / Trim/Trim Panel/Service and Repair/Pillar Trim/B-Pillar Trim . Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Weatherstrip > Rear Door Weatherstrip > Component Information > Service and Repair > A-Pillar Weatherstrip Retainer > Page 14365 2. Remove the lower c-pillar trim (1) See: Interior Moulding / Trim/Trim Panel/Service and Repair/Pillar Trim/C-Pillar Trim Panel-Removal . 3. Separate the rear door opening seal (5) from the door opening flange. Installation INSTALLATION FRONT DOOR SEAL Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Weatherstrip > Rear Door Weatherstrip > Component Information > Service and Repair > A-Pillar Weatherstrip Retainer > Page 14366 1. Position the front door seal (6) to the bottom of the door opening, with bulb facing outboard, starting the installation at the center of the lower flange. Press the seal onto the sill flange and work around the perimeter of the door opening until fully seated. Work in one direction, smoothing the seal to avoid puckers or wrinkles. 2. If vehicle is a Standard Cab , install the lower b-pillar trim (3) See: Interior Moulding / Trim/Trim Panel/Service and Repair/Pillar Trim/B-Pillar Trim . 3. If vehicle is a Quad Cab , install the lower b-pillar trim (1) See: Interior Moulding / Trim/Trim Panel/Service and Repair/Pillar Trim/B-Pillar Trim . Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Weatherstrip > Rear Door Weatherstrip > Component Information > Service and Repair > A-Pillar Weatherstrip Retainer > Page 14367 4. Install the cowl trim panel (1) See: Interior Moulding / Trim/Trim Panel/Service and Repair/Cowl Trim/Cowl Trim - Installation NOTE: When installing a new weatherstrip on the front door opening, remove the tear strip starting at the splice and moving around the front of the door to the back of the opening. REAR DOOR SEAL 1. Position the rear door seal to the bottom of the door opening, with bulb facing outboard, starting the installation at the center of the lower flange. Press the seal onto the sill flange and work around the perimeter of the door opening until fully seated. Work in one direction, smoothing the seal to avoid puckers or wrinkles. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Weatherstrip > Rear Door Weatherstrip > Component Information > Service and Repair > A-Pillar Weatherstrip Retainer > Page 14368 2. Install the lower c-pillar trim (1) See: Interior Moulding / Trim/Trim Panel/Service and Repair/Pillar Trim/C-Pillar Trim Panel-Installation . 3. Install the lower b-pillar trim (1) See: Interior Moulding / Trim/Trim Panel/Service and Repair/Pillar Trim/B-Pillar Trim . NOTE: When installing a new weatherstrip on the rear door opening, remove the tear strip starting at the splice and moving around the back of the door to the front of the opening. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Weatherstrip > Rear Door Weatherstrip > Component Information > Service and Repair > A-Pillar Weatherstrip Retainer > Page 14369 Rear Door Weatherstrip: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL 1. Remove the drip rail weatherstrip retainer (1) See: Front Door Weatherstrip/Service and Repair/Drip Rail Weatherstrip - Removal . 2. Remove the five screws (8) and remove the A-pillar weatherstrip retainer (7). Installation INSTALLATION 1. Install the A-pillar weatherstrip retainer (7) and install the screws (8). 2. Install the drip rail weatherstrip retainer (1) See: Front Door Weatherstrip/Service and Repair/Drip Rail Weatherstrip Installation . Drip Rail Weatherstrip - Removal REMOVAL Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Weatherstrip > Rear Door Weatherstrip > Component Information > Service and Repair > A-Pillar Weatherstrip Retainer > Page 14370 1. Open the doors and separate the weatherstrip (3) from the drip rail and a-pillar retainers (1 and 7). Drip Rail Weatherstrip - Installation INSTALLATION 1. Position the weatherstrip (3) onto the drip rail and a-pillar retainers (1 and 7) and seat fully. Removal REMOVAL FRONT DOOR SEAL Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Weatherstrip > Rear Door Weatherstrip > Component Information > Service and Repair > A-Pillar Weatherstrip Retainer > Page 14371 1. Remove the cowl trim panel (1) See: Interior Moulding / Trim/Trim Panel/Service and Repair/Cowl Trim/Cowl Trim - Removal . 2. If vehicle is a Standard Cab , remove the lower b-pillar trim panel (3) See: Interior Moulding / Trim/Trim Panel/Service and Repair/Pillar Trim/B-Pillar Trim . 3. If vehicle is a Quad Cab , remove the lower b-pillar trim panel (1) See: Interior Moulding / Trim/Trim Panel/Service and Repair/Pillar Trim/B-Pillar Trim . Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Weatherstrip > Rear Door Weatherstrip > Component Information > Service and Repair > A-Pillar Weatherstrip Retainer > Page 14372 4. Separate the front door opening seal (6) from the door opening flange. REAR DOOR SEAL 1. Remove the lower b-pillar trim panel (1) See: Interior Moulding / Trim/Trim Panel/Service and Repair/Pillar Trim/B-Pillar Trim . 2. Remove the lower c-pillar trim (1) See: Interior Moulding / Trim/Trim Panel/Service and Repair/Pillar Trim/C-Pillar Trim Panel-Removal . Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Weatherstrip > Rear Door Weatherstrip > Component Information > Service and Repair > A-Pillar Weatherstrip Retainer > Page 14373 3. Separate the rear door opening seal (5) from the door opening flange. Installation INSTALLATION FRONT DOOR SEAL 1. Position the front door seal (6) to the bottom of the door opening, with bulb facing outboard, starting the installation at the center of the lower flange. Press the seal onto the sill flange and work around the perimeter of the door opening until fully seated. Work in one direction, smoothing the seal to avoid puckers or wrinkles. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Weatherstrip > Rear Door Weatherstrip > Component Information > Service and Repair > A-Pillar Weatherstrip Retainer > Page 14374 2. If vehicle is a Standard Cab , install the lower b-pillar trim (3) See: Interior Moulding / Trim/Trim Panel/Service and Repair/Pillar Trim/B-Pillar Trim . 3. If vehicle is a Quad Cab , install the lower b-pillar trim (1) See: Interior Moulding / Trim/Trim Panel/Service and Repair/Pillar Trim/B-Pillar Trim . 4. Install the cowl trim panel (1) See: Interior Moulding / Trim/Trim Panel/Service and Repair/Cowl Trim/Cowl Trim - Installation NOTE: When installing a new weatherstrip on the front door opening, remove the tear strip starting at the splice and moving around the front of the door to the back of the opening. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Weatherstrip > Rear Door Weatherstrip > Component Information > Service and Repair > A-Pillar Weatherstrip Retainer > Page 14375 REAR DOOR SEAL 1. Position the rear door seal to the bottom of the door opening, with bulb facing outboard, starting the installation at the center of the lower flange. Press the seal onto the sill flange and work around the perimeter of the door opening until fully seated. Work in one direction, smoothing the seal to avoid puckers or wrinkles. 2. Install the lower c-pillar trim (1) See: Interior Moulding / Trim/Trim Panel/Service and Repair/Pillar Trim/C-Pillar Trim Panel-Installation . 3. Install the lower b-pillar trim (1) See: Interior Moulding / Trim/Trim Panel/Service and Repair/Pillar Trim/B-Pillar Trim . Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Weatherstrip > Rear Door Weatherstrip > Component Information > Service and Repair > A-Pillar Weatherstrip Retainer > Page 14376 NOTE: When installing a new weatherstrip on the rear door opening, remove the tear strip starting at the splice and moving around the back of the door to the front of the opening. Drip Rail Weatherstrip Retainer - Removal REMOVAL 1. Separate the drip rail weatherstrip (3) from the weatherstrip retainer (1). 2. Remove the seven screws (2) and remove the retainer (1). Drip Rail Weatherstrip Retainer - Installation INSTALLATION 1. Install the weatherstrip retainer (1) and install the seven screws (2). 2. Position the weatherstrip (3) over the retainer flange and seat fully. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Weatherstrip > Rear Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Service and Repair > Rear Door Outer Belt Molding Rear Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: Service and Repair Rear Door Outer Belt Molding Removal REMOVAL 1. Remove the screw (3) and separate the belt molding (1) from the door (2) flange from the back to the front. Installation INSTALLATION 1. Position the belt molding (1) onto the door (2) flange and seat fully. 2. Install the screw (3). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Weatherstrip > Rear Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Service and Repair > Rear Door Outer Belt Molding > Page 14381 Rear Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: Service and Repair Rear Door Glass Run Weatherstrip Removal REMOVAL 1. Lower the glass. 2. Separate the rear door glass run weatherstrip (5) out of the door frame (2) and remove through the window opening. Installation INSTALLATION NOTE: A mixture of soap and water may be used to aid installation of the weatherstrip into the corners. 1. Position the rear door glass run weatherstrip (5) into the door (2) through the window opening. 2. Position the weatherstrip (5) into the upper corners and seat firmly. 3. From back to front, seat the weatherstrip (5) between the corners and then down the sides firmly. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Weatherstrip > Rear Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Service and Repair > Rear Door Outer Belt Molding > Page 14382 Rear Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: Service and Repair Rear Door Inner Belt Molding Removal REMOVAL 1. Remove the door trim panel (5) See: Doors, Hood and Trunk/Doors/Rear Door/Rear Door Panel/Service and Repair/Rear Door Trim Panel Removal . 2. Separate the belt molding (2) from the rear door mounting flange from the back to the front. Installation INSTALLATION 1. Position the belt molding (2) and seat onto the rear door mounting flange fully. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Weatherstrip > Rear Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Service and Repair > Rear Door Outer Belt Molding > Page 14383 2. Install the door trim panel (5) See: Doors, Hood and Trunk/Doors/Rear Door/Rear Door Panel/Service and Repair/Rear Door Trim Panel Installation . Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Cruise Control Servo > Component Information > Diagrams > Component ID 453 Cruise Control Servo: Diagrams Component ID 453 Component ID: 453 Component : SERVO-SPEED CONTROL Connector: Name : SERVO-SPEED CONTROL Color : BLACK # of pins : 4 Qualifier : (GAS EXCEPT 3.7L/5.7L) Pin Circuit Description 1 V36 20VT/YL S/C VACUUM SOL CONTROL 2 V35 20VT/OR S/C VENT SOL CONTROL 3 V30 20VT/WT S/C BRAKE SWITCH OUTPUT 4 Z913 20BK GROUND Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Cruise Control Servo > Component Information > Diagrams > Component ID 453 > Page 14389 Cruise Control Servo: Diagrams Component ID 454 Component ID: 454 Component : SERVO-SPEED CONTROL Connector: Name : SERVO-SPEED CONTROL Color : BLACK # of pins : 4 Qualifier : (GAS EXCEPT 3.7L/5.7L) Pin Circuit Description 1 V36 20VT/YL S/C VACUUM SOL CONTROL 2 V35 20VT/OR S/C VENT SOL CONTROL 3 V30 20VT/WT S/C BRAKE SWITCH OUTPUT 4 Z913 20BK GROUND Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Cruise Control Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Switch-Speed Control-Left Cruise Control Switch: Diagrams Switch-Speed Control-Left Component ID: 509 Component : SWITCH-SPEED CONTROL-LEFT Connector: Name : SWITCH-SPEED CONTROL-LEFT Color : BLACK # of pins : 3 A V38 22VT/OR S/C SWITCH NO. 2 SIGNAL B V937 22DB/DG S/C SWITCH RETURN C V37 22VT S/C SWITCH NO. 1 SIGNAL Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Cruise Control Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Switch-Speed Control-Left > Page 14394 Cruise Control Switch: Diagrams Switch-Speed Control-Right Component ID: 510 Component : SWITCH-SPEED CONTROL-RIGHT Connector: Name : SWITCH-SPEED CONTROL-RIGHT Color : BLACK # of pins : 3 A V38 22VT/OR S/C SWITCH NO. 2 SIGNAL B V937 22DB/DG S/C SWITCH RETURN C V37 22VT S/C SWITCH NO. 1 SIGNAL Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Cruise Control Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Cruise Control Switch: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL Depending on engine control computer (JTEC having a 3-plug connector or 5.7L V-8 NGC having a 4-plug connector), 2 types of switches are used. Both types of switches are internally and externally different. The switches used with the NGC system have attached pigtail leads. The switch used with the JTEC system does not have an attached pigtail lead. 1. Remove switch mounting screw (2). 2. Pull switch (2) from steering wheel. 3. Unplug electrical connector from switch, or, if equipped, switch pigtail wire harness from steering wheel wire harness (4) and remove switch. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Cruise Control Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 14397 Cruise Control Switch: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION 1. Plug electrical connector into switch, or, if equipped, connect pigtail wire harness to steering wheel wire harness. Be sure wires are not pinched. 2. Position switch to steering wheel. 3. Install switch mounting screw and tighten 15 in. lbs. ( 1.7 Nm). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Sensors and Switches - Cruise Control > Cruise Control Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Switch-Speed Control-Left Cruise Control Switch: Diagrams Switch-Speed Control-Left Component ID: 509 Component : SWITCH-SPEED CONTROL-LEFT Connector: Name : SWITCH-SPEED CONTROL-LEFT Color : BLACK # of pins : 3 A V38 22VT/OR S/C SWITCH NO. 2 SIGNAL B V937 22DB/DG S/C SWITCH RETURN C V37 22VT S/C SWITCH NO. 1 SIGNAL Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Sensors and Switches - Cruise Control > Cruise Control Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Switch-Speed Control-Left > Page 14403 Cruise Control Switch: Diagrams Switch-Speed Control-Right Component ID: 510 Component : SWITCH-SPEED CONTROL-RIGHT Connector: Name : SWITCH-SPEED CONTROL-RIGHT Color : BLACK # of pins : 3 A V38 22VT/OR S/C SWITCH NO. 2 SIGNAL B V937 22DB/DG S/C SWITCH RETURN C V37 22VT S/C SWITCH NO. 1 SIGNAL Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Sensors and Switches - Cruise Control > Cruise Control Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Cruise Control Switch: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL Depending on engine control computer (JTEC having a 3-plug connector or 5.7L V-8 NGC having a 4-plug connector), 2 types of switches are used. Both types of switches are internally and externally different. The switches used with the NGC system have attached pigtail leads. The switch used with the JTEC system does not have an attached pigtail lead. 1. Remove switch mounting screw (2). 2. Pull switch (2) from steering wheel. 3. Unplug electrical connector from switch, or, if equipped, switch pigtail wire harness from steering wheel wire harness (4) and remove switch. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Sensors and Switches - Cruise Control > Cruise Control Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 14406 Cruise Control Switch: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION 1. Plug electrical connector into switch, or, if equipped, connect pigtail wire harness to steering wheel wire harness. Be sure wires are not pinched. 2. Position switch to steering wheel. 3. Install switch mounting screw and tighten 15 in. lbs. ( 1.7 Nm). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > ABS Light > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description ABS Light: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION An Antilock Brake System (ABS) indicator is standard equipment on all instrument clusters. However, the instrument cluster can be programmed to disable this indicator on vehicles that are not equipped with the ABS or Rear Wheel Anti-Lock (RWAL) brake systems, which are not available in some markets. This indicator is located near the lower edge of the instrument cluster, between the tachometer and the speedometer. The ABS indicator consists of a stencil-like cutout of the International Control and Display Symbol icon for Failure of Anti-lock Braking System in the opaque layer of the instrument cluster overlay. The dark outer layer of the overlay prevents the indicator from being clearly visible when it is not illuminated. An amber Light Emitting Diode (LED) behind the cutout in the opaque layer of the overlay causes the indicator to appear in amber through the translucent outer layer of the overlay when it is illuminated from behind by the LED, which is soldered onto the instrument cluster electronic circuit board. The ABS indicator is serviced as a unit with the instrument cluster. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > ABS Light > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 14412 ABS Light: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The ABS indicator gives an indication to the vehicle operator when the ABS system, or a circuit or component of the system is ineffective. This indicator is controlled by a transistor on the instrument cluster circuit board based upon cluster programming and electronic messages received by the cluster from the Controller Antilock Brake (CAB) over the Controller Area Network (CAN) data bus. The ABS indicator Light Emitting Diode (LED) is completely controlled by the instrument cluster logic circuit, and that logic will only allow this indicator to operate when the instrument cluster receives a battery current input on the fused ignition switch output (run-start) circuit. Therefore, the LED will always be OFF when the ignition switch is in any position except ON or START. The LED only illuminates when it is provided a path to ground by the instrument cluster transistor. The instrument cluster will turn ON the ABS indicator for the following reasons: - Bulb Test - Each time the ignition switch is turned to the ON position the ABS indicator is illuminated for about four seconds as a bulb test. The entire bulb test is a function of the CAB. - ABS Indicator Lamp-On Message - Each time the cluster receives an electronic ABS indicator lamp-ON message from the CAB, the ABS indicator will be illuminated. The indicator remains illuminated until the cluster receives a lamp-OFF message from the CAB, or until the ignition switch is turned to the OFF position, whichever occurs first. Communication Error - If the cluster receives no lamp-ON or lamp-OFF messages from the CAB for five consecutive message cycles, the ABS indicator is illuminated. The indicator remains illuminated until the cluster receives a valid message from the CAB, or until the ignition switch is turned to the OFF position, whichever occurs first. - Actuator Test - Each time the instrument cluster is put through the actuator test, the ABS indicator will be turned ON, then OFF again during the bulb check portion of the test to confirm the functionality of the LED and the cluster control circuitry. - ABS Diagnostic Test - The ABS indicator is blinked ON and OFF by lamp-ON and lamp-OFF messages from the CAB during the performance of the ABS diagnostic tests. The CAB continually monitors the ABS circuits and sensors to decide whether the system is in good operating condition. The CAB then sends the proper lamp-ON or lamp-OFF message to the ElectroMechanical Instrument Cluster (EMIC) (also known as the Cab Compartment Node/CCN). If the CAB sends a lamp-ON message after the bulb test, it indicates that the CAB has detected a system malfunction or that the ABS system has become ineffective. The CAB will store a Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) for any malfunction it detects. Each time the ABS indicator fails to light due to an open or short in the cluster ABS indicator circuit, the cluster sends a message notifying the CAB of the condition, then the instrument cluster and the CAB will each store a DTC. For proper diagnosis of the antilock brake system, the CAB, the EMIC, the CAN data bus or the electronic communication related to ABS indicator operation a diagnostic scan tool is required. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Audible Warning Device > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Audible Warning Device: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION A chime warning system is standard factory-installed equipment. The chime warning system uses an electromechanical transducer and an electromechanical relay that are soldered onto the electronic circuit board inside of the ElectroMechanical Instrument Cluster (EMIC) (1) to provide audible indications of various vehicle conditions that may require the attention of the vehicle operator or occupants. The EMIC also includes the hardware and software necessary to serve as the electronic body control module and is sometimes referred to as the Cab Compartment Node or CCN. The electromechanical transducer generates beep tones and chime tones, while the electromechanical relay generates click tones to emulate the sounds associated with conventional turn signal and hazard warning flasher operation. The microprocessor-based EMIC utilizes electronic chime request messages received from other modules in the vehicle over the Controller Area Network (CAN) data bus along with hard wired inputs to monitor many sensors and switches throughout the vehicle. In response to those inputs, the circuitry and programming of the EMIC allow it to control the audible outputs that are produced through its on-board transducer and relay. The EMIC is capable of producing the following audible outputs: - Slow Rate Repetitive Click - Repeated click tones that are issued at a slow rate of about 50 clicks per minute. Fast Rate Repetitive Click - Repeated click tones that are issued at a fast rate of more than about 100 clicks per minute. Fixed Duration Beep - A short, sharp, single tactile beep tone. - Single Chime Tone - A single chime tone. - Slow Rate Repetitive Chime - Repeated chime tones that are issued at a slow rate of about 50 chimes per minute. - Fast Rate Repetitive Chime - Repeated chime tones that are issued at a fast rate of about 180 chimes per minute. Hard wired circuitry connects the EMIC and the various chime warning system switch and sensor inputs to their modules and to each other through the electrical system of the vehicle. These hard wired circuits are integral to several wire harnesses, which are routed throughout the vehicle and retained by many different methods. These circuits may be connected to each other, to the vehicle electrical system and to the EMIC through the use of a combination of soldered splices, splice block connectors, and many different types of wire harness terminal connectors and insulators. Refer to the appropriate wiring information. The wiring information includes wiring diagrams, proper wire and connector repair procedures, further details on wire harness routing and retention, as well as pin-out and location views for the various wire harness connectors, splices and grounds. The EMIC chime warning system circuits and components cannot be adjusted or repaired. If the EMIC circuitry, the on-board transducer or the relay are Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Audible Warning Device > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 14417 damaged or ineffective, the EMIC unit must be replaced. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Audible Warning Device > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 14418 Audible Warning Device: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The chime warning system operates on battery voltage received through a fuse in the Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) on a non-switched fused B(+) circuit so that the system may operate regardless of the ignition switch position. The chime warning system also monitors the ignition switch position so that some chime features are functional only with the ignition switch in the ON position, while others are functional regardless of the ignition switch position. The chime warning system provides an audible indication to the vehicle operator or occupants under the following conditions: - Airbag Indicator Warning - The ElectroMechanical Instrument Cluster (EMIC) (also known as the Cab Compartment Node/CCN) transducer will generate one short chime when the ignition switch is in the ON position, and an electronic message is received over the Controller Area Network (CAN) data bus from the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) requesting airbag indicator illumination. This warning will only occur following completion of the airbag indicator bulb test, and will only occur once during any ignition cycle. - Compass Mini-Trip Computer Global Reset - The EMIC transducer will generate one short chime when the ignition switch is in the ON position, and an electronic message is received over the CAN data bus from the optional Compass Mini-Trip Computer (CMTC) requesting that the CMTC average fuel economy, trip odometer and distance to empty data be reset. The CMTC monitors hard wired inputs from the US/M (United States/Metric) and RESET button switches to determine the proper reset messages to send to the EMIC. - Door Ajar Indicator Warning - The EMIC transducer will generate one short chime when the ignition switch is in the ON position, a hard wired input is received indicating that the status of any door ajar switch has changed, and an electronic message is received over the CAN data bus indicating that the vehicle is moving. - Electronic Stability Program/Brake Assist System Warning - The EMIC transducer will generate one short chime when the Electronic Stability Program (ESP)/Brake Assist System (BAS) has been manually disabled by the vehicle operator using the ESP/BAS traction control switch on the instrument panel. - Electronic Stability Program/Brake Assist System Fault Warning - The EMIC transducer will generate one short chime each time the Electronic Stability Program (ESP)/Brake Assist System (BAS) indicator is illuminated in the instrument cluster. This warning indicates a failure condition has been monitored affecting the operation of the ESP/BAS related components or circuits. This warning will only occur following completion of the ESP/BAS indicator bulb test, and will only occur once during any ignition cycle. - Engine Coolant Temperature High Warning (Diesel Engine Only) - The EMIC transducer will generate a single chime tone when the check gauges indicator is illuminated for a high or critical engine coolant temperature condition. The EMIC uses electronic engine coolant temperature messages received from the diesel Engine Control Module (ECM) over the CAN data bus to illuminate the check gauges indicator for a coolant temperature high condition. - Electronic Vehicle Information Center Data Reset - The EMIC transducer will generate one short chime when the ignition switch is in the ON position, and an electronic message is received over the CAN data bus from the optional Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) requesting that the EVIC average fuel economy, trip odometer, distance to empty or customer programmable features data be reset. The EVIC monitors hard wired inputs from the EVIC control push button switches to determine the proper reset messages to send to the EMIC. - Fasten Seat Belt Indicator Warning - The EMIC transducer will generate repetitive chimes at a slow rate to announce that a hard wired input from the seat belt switch indicates that the driver side front seat belt is not fastened with the ignition switch in the ON position. The chime warning system also supports the enhanced seatbelt reminder (beltminder) when this feature is enabled. See: Seat Belt Reminder Lamp/Description and Operation/Operation . - Head/Park Lamps-On Warning - The EMIC transducer will generate repetitive chimes at a fast rate to indicate that hard wired inputs from the driver door ajar switch, the headlamp switch, and the ignition switch indicate that the exterior lamps are turned ON with the driver side front door opened and the ignition switch in the OFF position. The chimes will continue to sound until the exterior lamps are turned OFF, the driver side front door is closed, or the ignition switch is turned to the ON position, whichever occurs first. - Key-In-Ignition Warning - The EMIC transducer will generate repetitive chimes at a fast rate to indicate that hard wired inputs from the driver door ajar switch, the ignition switch, and the key-in ignition switch circuitry of the ignition switch indicate that the key is in the ignition lock cylinder with the driver side front door open and the ignition switch in the OFF position. The chimes will continue to sound until the key is removed from the ignition lock cylinder, the driver side front door is closed, or the ignition switch is turned to the ON position, whichever occurs first. - Low Fuel Indicator Warning - The EMIC transducer will generate one short chime when the low fuel indicator is illuminated by the instrument cluster circuitry. This chime will only occur once during any ignition cycle. - Low Oil Pressure Warning (Diesel Engine Only) - The EMIC transducer will generate repetitive chimes at a fast rate when the check gauges indicator is illuminated for a low oil pressure condition. The EMIC uses electronic engine speed and oil pressure messages received from the diesel Engine Control Module (ECM) over the CAN data bus indicating that the engine is running and that the oil pressure is low to illuminate the check gauges indicator. The chimes will continue to sound for five seconds, until the oil pressure message indicates that the oil pressure is not low, or until the engine speed message indicates that the engine is not running, whichever occurs first. This chime will only occur once during any ignition cycle. - Low Wash Indicator Warning - The EMIC transducer will generate one short chime when the low washer fluid indicator is illuminated by the instrument cluster circuitry. This chime will only occur once during any ignition cycle. - Overspeed Warning - The EMIC transducer will generate repetitive chimes at a slow rate to indicate that the vehicle speed is over a pre-programmed speed value. The EMIC monitors electronic vehicle speed messages received over the CAN data bus. This feature is only enabled on an EMIC that has been programmed with a Middle East Gulf Coast Country (GCC) country code. - Park Brake Reminder - The EMIC transducer will generate one short chime to announce that the hard wired input from the park brake switch Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Audible Warning Device > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 14419 and an electronic vehicle speed message received over the CAN data bus indicate that the park brake is applied and the vehicle is moving. This chime will repeat each time the input conditions are met. - Sentry Key Customer Learn Mode Announcement - The EMIC transducer will generate one short chime to confirm that an electronic Customer Learn mode message has been received over the CAN data bus to indicate that the Sentry Key REmote Entry Module (SKREEM) (also known as the Wireless Control Module/WCM) is prepared for programming additional sentry key transponders. This chime feature is only active on vehicles equipped with the optional Sentry Key system, and sold in a market where Customer Learn programming is an allowed feature. - Trans Overtemp Indicator Warning - On vehicles equipped with an automatic transmission only, the EMIC transducer will generate repetitive chimes at a slow rate when the transmission overtemp indicator is illuminated by the instrument cluster circuitry for a high or critical transmission fluid temperature condition. This chime will repeat each time the trans overtemp indicator is cycled from OFF to ON. - Turn Signal/Hazard Warning Flasher Emulation - The EMIC relay will generate repetitive clicks at a slow rate to emulate an electromechanical flasher when the turn signal or hazard warning system are operating. The EMIC relay will generate repetitive clicks at a fast rate to indicate that the right or left turn signals are operating with one or more bulbs ineffective. In either case, the clicks will continue until the turn signal and hazard warning systems are turned OFF. - Turn Signal On Warning - The EMIC transducer will generate repetitive chimes at a slow rate to indicate that a turn signal has been active continuously for 1.6 kilometers (1 mile) with the vehicle speed greater than 22 kilometers-per-hour (15 miles-per hour). Vehicles built for markets other than the United States and Canada have a revised distance threshold of 4 kilometers (2.49 miles) for this feature. The chime will continue until the turn signal input becomes inactive or until the electronic vehicle speed message indicates that the speed is less than 22 kilometers-per-hour (15 miles-per-hour), whichever occurs first. The hazard warning flashers will not activate this chime feature. Warning Indicator Announcement - The EMIC transducer will generate one short chime each time the check gauges indicator is illuminated by the instrument cluster circuitry. The check gauges indicator may be illuminated when any critical engine or transmission systems are operating outside of their normal parameters. The instrument cluster monitors electronic messages received over the CAN data bus to determine when to illuminate the check gauges indicator. The EMIC provides chime service for all available features in the chime warning system. The EMIC relies upon its internal programming, numerous hard wired inputs, and electronic message inputs received from other modules over the CAN data bus network to provide the chime warning system features. The internal programming of the EMIC determines the priority of each chime request input that is received, as well as the rate and duration of each chime that is to be generated. The hard wired circuits between components related to the chime warning system may be diagnosed using conventional diagnostic tools and procedures. Refer to the appropriate wiring information. The wiring information includes wiring diagrams, proper wire and connector repair procedures, details of wire harness routing and retention, connector pin-out information and location views for the various wire harness connectors, splices and grounds. However, conventional diagnostic methods will not prove conclusive in the diagnosis of the chime warning system or the electronic controls or communication between modules and other devices that provide some features of the chime warning system. The most reliable, efficient, and accurate means to diagnose the chime warning system or the electronic controls and communication related to chime warning system operation requires the use of a diagnostic scan tool. Refer to the appropriate diagnostic information. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Audible Warning Device > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 14420 Audible Warning Device: Testing and Inspection CHIME WARNING SYSTEM WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury on vehicles equipped with airbags, disable the Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, airbag, seat belt tensioner, impact sensor, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the SRS. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment. The hard wired circuits between components related to the chime warning system may be diagnosed using conventional diagnostic tools and procedures. Refer to the appropriate wiring information. The wiring information includes wiring diagrams, proper wire and connector repair procedures, details of wire harness routing and retention, connector pin-out information and location views for the various wire harness connectors, splices and grounds. However, conventional diagnostic methods will not prove conclusive in the diagnosis of the chime warning system or the electronic controls or communication between modules and other devices that provide some features of the chime warning system. The most reliable, efficient, and accurate means to diagnose the chime warning system or the electronic controls and communication related to chime warning system operation requires the use of a diagnostic scan tool. Refer to the appropriate diagnostic information. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Brake Warning Indicator > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Brake Warning Indicator: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION A brake indicator is standard equipment on all instrument clusters. This indicator is located near the lower edge of the instrument cluster, between the tachometer and the speedometer. The brake indicator consists of a stencil-like cutout of the word BRAKE and the International Control and Display Symbol icon for Brake Failure in the opaque layer of the instrument cluster overlay. The dark outer layer of the overlay prevents the indicator from being clearly visible when it is not illuminated. A red Light Emitting Diode (LED) behind the cutout in the opaque layer of the overlay causes the indicator to appear in red through the translucent outer layer of the overlay when it is illuminated from behind by the LED, which is soldered onto the instrument cluster electronic circuit board. The brake indicator is serviced as a unit with the instrument cluster. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Brake Warning Indicator > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 14425 Brake Warning Indicator: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The brake indicator gives an indication to the vehicle operator when the parking brake is applied, when there are certain brake hydraulic system malfunctions as indicated by a low brake hydraulic fluid level condition, or when the brake fluid level switch is disconnected. The brake indicator can also give an indication when certain faults are detected in the Antilock Brake System (ABS). This indicator is controlled by a transistor on the instrument cluster circuit board based upon cluster programming, electronic messages received by the cluster from the Controller Antilock Brake (CAB) over the Controller Area Network (CAN) data bus, and a hard wired input from the park brake switch. The brake indicator Light Emitting Diode (LED) is completely controlled by the instrument cluster logic circuit, and that logic will only allow this indicator to operate when the instrument cluster receives a battery current input on the fused ignition switch output (run-start) circuit. Therefore, the LED will always be OFF when the ignition switch is in any position except ON or START. The LED only illuminates when it is provided a path to ground by the instrument cluster transistor. The instrument cluster will turn ON the brake indicator for the following reasons: - Bulb Test - Each time the ignition switch is turned to the ON position the brake indicator is illuminated for about four seconds as a bulb test. The entire bulb test is a function of the CAB. - Brake Indicator Lamp-On Message - Each time the cluster receives an electronic brake indicator lamp-ON message from the CAB, the brake indicator will be illuminated. The CAB may also send lamp-ON messages as feedback during ABS diagnostic procedures. The indicator remains illuminated until the cluster receives a lamp-OFF message from the CAB, or until the ignition switch is turned to the OFF position, whichever occurs first. - Park Brake Switch Input - Each time the cluster detects ground on the park brake switch sense circuit (park brake switch closed = park brake applied or not fully released) while the ignition switch is in the ON position, the brake indicator flashes ON and OFF. The indicator continues to flash until the park brake switch sense input to the cluster is an open circuit (park brake switch open = park brake fully released), or until the ignition switch is turned to the OFF position, whichever occurs first. - Actuator Test - Each time the instrument cluster is put through the actuator test, the brake indicator will be turned ON, then OFF again during the bulb check portion of the test to confirm the functionality of the LED and the cluster control circuitry. The park brake switch on the park brake pedal mechanism provides a hard wired ground input to the instrument cluster circuitry through the park brake switch sense circuit whenever the park brake is applied or not fully released. The CAB continually monitors the ABS system circuits and sensors, including the brake fluid level switch on the brake master cylinder reservoir, to decide whether the system is in good operating condition. The CAB then sends the proper lamp-ON or lamp-OFF message to the ElectroMechanical Instrument Cluster (EMIC) (also known as the Cab Compartment Node/CCN). If the CAB sends a lamp-ON message after the bulb test, it indicates that the CAB has detected a brake hydraulic system malfunction or that the ABS system has become ineffective. The CAB will store a Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) for any malfunction it detects. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Brake Warning Indicator > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 14426 Brake Warning Indicator: Testing and Inspection BRAKE INDICATOR WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury on vehicles equipped with airbags, disable the Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, airbag, seat belt tensioner, impact sensor, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the SRS. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment. The hard wired park brake switch input to the ElectroMechanical Instrument Cluster (EMIC) (also known as the Cab Compartment Node/CCN) may be diagnosed using conventional diagnostic tools and procedures. Refer to the appropriate wiring information. The wiring information includes wiring diagrams, proper wire and connector repair procedures, details of wire harness routing and retention, connector pin-out information and location views for the various wire harness connectors, splices and grounds. However, conventional diagnostic methods may not prove conclusive in the diagnosis of the EMIC, the Controller Antilock Brake (CAB), the Controller Area Network (CAN) data bus, or the electronic message inputs also used by the EMIC to provide brake indicator operation. The most reliable, efficient, and accurate means to diagnose the EMIC, the CAB, the CAN data bus or the electronic communication related to brake indicator operation requires the use of a diagnostic scan tool. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Charge Lamp/Indicator > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Charge Lamp/Indicator: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION A charging indicator is standard equipment only in the four-gauge instrument clusters of all ST vehicles with a gasoline engine. The charging indicator is located on the left side of the instrument cluster, to the left of the fuel gauge. The charging indicator consists of a stencil-like cutout of the International Control and Display Symbol icon for Battery Charging Condition in the opaque layer of the instrument cluster overlay. The dark outer layer of the overlay prevents the indicator from being clearly visible when it is not illuminated. A red Light Emitting Diode (LED) behind the cutout in the opaque layer of the overlay causes the indicator to appear in red through the translucent outer layer of the overlay when it is illuminated from behind by the LED, which is soldered onto the instrument cluster electronic circuit board. The charging indicator is serviced as a unit with the instrument cluster. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Charge Lamp/Indicator > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 14431 Charge Lamp/Indicator: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The charging indicator gives an indication to the vehicle operator when the electrical system voltage is too low or too high. This indicator is controlled by a transistor on the instrument cluster circuit board based upon cluster programming and electronic messages received by the cluster from the Powertrain Control Module (PCM) over the Controller Area Network (CAN) data bus. The charging indicator Light Emitting Diode (LED) is completely controlled by the instrument cluster logic circuit, and that logic will only allow this indicator to operate when the instrument cluster receives a battery current input on the fused ignition switch output (run-start) circuit. Therefore, the LED will always be OFF when the ignition switch is in any position except ON or START. The LED only illuminates when it is provided a path to ground by the instrument cluster transistor. The instrument cluster will turn ON the charging indicator for the following reasons: - Bulb Test - Each time the ignition switch is turned to the ON position the charging indicator is illuminated by the instrument cluster for about two seconds as a bulb test. - Voltage Low Message - Each time the cluster receives an electronic system voltage message from the PCM indicating the voltage is low (less than about 11.5 volts is a charge fail condition), the charging indicator will be illuminated. The indicator remains illuminated until the cluster receives a message from the PCM indicating the voltage is normal (greater than about 12.0 volts, but less than 16.0 volts), or until the ignition switch is turned to the OFF position, whichever occurs first. - Voltage High Message - Each time the cluster receives an electronic system voltage message from the PCM indicating the voltage is high (greater than about 16.0 volts), the charging indicator will be illuminated. The indicator remains illuminated until the cluster receives a message from the PCM indicating the voltage is normal (less than about 15.5 volts, but greater than 11.5 volts), or until the ignition switch is turned to the OFF position, whichever occurs first. - Actuator Test - Each time the cluster is put through the actuator test, the charging indicator will be turned ON, then OFF again during the bulb check portion of the test to confirm the functionality of the LED and the cluster control circuitry. The PCM continually monitors the electrical system voltage to control the generator output. The PCM then sends the proper messages to the ElectroMechanical Instrument Cluster (EMIC) (also known as the Cab Compartment Node/CCN). If the instrument cluster turns ON the charging indicator due to a charge fail or voltage high condition, it may indicate that the charging system requires service. For further diagnosis of the charging indicator or the instrument cluster circuitry that controls the indicator, Refer to appropriate testing. For proper diagnosis of the charging system, the PCM, the EMIC, the CAN data bus or the electronic communication related to charging indicator operation a diagnostic scan tool is required. Refer to the appropriate diagnostic information. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Check Gauges Lamp > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Check Gauges Lamp: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION A check gauges indicator is standard equipment on all instrument clusters except for ST vehicles with a gasoline engine. The check gauges indicator is located on the left side of the instrument cluster, to the left of the voltage gauge. The check gauges indicator consists of a stencil-like cutout of the words CHECK GAGES in the opaque layer of the instrument cluster overlay. The dark outer layer of the overlay prevents the indicator from being clearly visible when it is not illuminated. A red Light Emitting Diode (LED) behind the cutout in the opaque layer of the overlay causes the indicator to appear in red through the translucent outer layer of the overlay when it is illuminated from behind by the LED, which is soldered onto the instrument cluster electronic circuit board. The check gauges indicator is serviced as a unit with the instrument cluster. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Check Gauges Lamp > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 14436 Check Gauges Lamp: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The check gauges indicator gives an indication to the vehicle operator when certain instrument cluster gauge readings reflect a condition requiring immediate attention. This indicator is controlled by a transistor on the instrument cluster circuit board based upon cluster programming and electronic messages received by the cluster from the Powertrain Control Module (PCM) on vehicles equipped with a gasoline engine, or from the Engine Control Module (ECM) on vehicles equipped with a diesel engine over the Controller Area Network (CAN) data bus. The check gauges indicator Light Emitting Diode (LED) is completely controlled by the instrument cluster logic circuit, and that logic will only allow this indicator to operate when the instrument cluster receives a battery current input on the fused ignition switch output (run-start) circuit. Therefore, the LED will always be OFF when the ignition switch is in any position except ON or START. The LED only illuminates when it is provided a path to ground by the instrument cluster transistor. The instrument cluster will turn ON the check gauges indicator for the following reasons: - Bulb Test - Each time the ignition switch is turned to the ON position the check gauges indicator is illuminated for about two seconds as a bulb test. - Engine Temperature High Message - Each time the cluster receives three consecutive electronic messages from the PCM or ECM indicating the engine coolant temperature is high, the check gauges indicator will be illuminated and a single chime is sounded. The indicator remains illuminated until the cluster receives a message from the PCM or ECM indicating that the engine coolant temperature is not high, or until the ignition switch is turned to the OFF position, whichever occurs first. - Engine Oil Pressure Low Message - Each time the cluster receives three consecutive electronic messages from the PCM or ECM indicating the engine oil pressure is low, the check gauges indicator will be illuminated and a single chime is sounded. The indicator remains illuminated until the cluster receives a message from the PCM or ECM indicating that the engine oil pressure is not low, or until the ignition switch is turned to the OFF position, whichever occurs first. The cluster will only turn the indicator ON in response to an engine oil pressure low message if the engine speed is greater than zero. - System Voltage Low (Charge Fail) Message - Each time the cluster receives three consecutive electronic messages from the PCM or ECM indicating the electrical system voltage is low (charge fail condition) or that the battery temperature sensor input is an open circuit, the check gauges indicator will be illuminated and a single chime is sounded. The indicator remains illuminated until the cluster receives a single message from the PCM or ECM indicating the electrical system voltage is not low, or until the ignition switch is turned to the OFF position, whichever occurs first. - System Voltage High Message - Each time the cluster receives three consecutive electronic messages from the PCM or ECM indicating the electrical system voltage is high, the check gauges indicator will be illuminated and a single chime is sounded. The indicator remains illuminated until the cluster receives a single message from the PCM or ECM indicating the electrical system voltage is not high, or until the ignition switch is turned to the OFF position, whichever occurs first. - Actuator Test - Each time the cluster is put through the actuator test, the check gauges indicator will be turned ON, then OFF again during the bulb check portion of the test to confirm the functionality of the LED and the cluster control circuitry. The PCM (gasoline engine) or ECM (diesel engine) continually monitors the engine temperature, oil pressure and electrical system voltage, then sends the proper messages to the ElectroMechanical Instrument Cluster (EMIC) (also known as the Cab Compartment Node/CCN). For further diagnosis of the check gauges indicator or the instrument cluster circuitry that controls the LED, Refer to appropriate testing. For proper diagnosis of the PCM, the ECM, the EMIC, the CAN data bus or the electronic communication related to check gauges indicator operation a diagnostic scan tool is required. Refer to the appropriate diagnostic information. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information > Locations Cigarette Lighter: Locations Component ID: 192 Component : LIGHTER-CIGAR Connector: Name : LIGHTER-CIGAR Color : GRAY # of pins : 3 Pin Circuit Description 1 F984 18PK/YL FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-ACC) 2-3 Z736 18BK/YL GROUND Component Location - 47 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information > Locations > Page 14440 Component Location - 44 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information > Locations > Page 14441 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Cigarette Lighter: Diagram Information and Instructions Warnings WARNINGS - GENERAL WARNINGS provide information to prevent personal injury and vehicle damage. Below is a list of general warnings that should be followed any time a vehicle is being serviced. WARNING: Always wear safety glasses for eye protection. WARNING: Use safety stands anytime a procedure requires being under a vehicle. WARNING: Be sure that the ignition switch always is in the off position, unless the procedure requires it to be on. WARNING: Set the parking brake when working on any vehicle. An automatic transmission should be in park. A manual transmission should be in neutral. WARNING: Operate the engine only in a well-ventilated area. WARNING: Keep away from moving parts when the engine is running, especially the fan and belts. WARNING: To prevent serious burns, avoid contact with hot parts such as the radiator, exhaust manifold(s), tail pipe, catalytic converter and muffler. WARNING: Do not allow flame or sparks near the battery. Gases are always present in and around the battery. WARNING: Always remove rings, watches, loose hanging jewelry and avoid loose clothing. How to Use Wiring Diagrams DESCRIPTION - HOW TO USE WIRING DIAGRAMS DaimlerChrysler Corporation wiring diagrams are designed to provide information regarding the vehicles wiring content. In order to effectively use the wiring diagrams to diagnose and repair DaimlerChrysler Corporation vehicles, it is important to understand all of their features and characteristics. Diagrams are arranged such that the power (B+) side of the circuit is placed near the top of the page, and the ground (B-) side of the circuit is placed near the bottom of the page. All switches, components, and modules are shown in the at rest position with the doors closed and the key removed from the ignition. Components are shown two ways. A solid line around a component indicates that the component is complete. A dashed line around the component indicates that the component is being shown is not complete. Incomplete components have a reference number to indicate the page where the component is shown complete. It is important to realize that no attempt is made on the diagrams to represent components and wiring as they appear on the vehicle. For example, a short piece of wire is treated the same as a long one. In addition, switches and other components are shown as simply as possible, with regard to function only. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14444 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14445 SYMBOLS International symbols are used throughout the wiring diagrams. These symbols are consistent with those being used around the world. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14446 TERMINOLOGY This is a list of terms and definitions used in the wiring diagrams. LHD - Left Hand Drive Vehicles RHD - Right Hand Drive Vehicles ATX - Automatic Transmissions-Front Wheel Drive MTX Manual Transmissions-Front Wheel Drive Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14447 AT - Automatic Transmissions-Rear Wheel Drive MT - Manual Transmissions-Rear Wheel Drive SOHC - Single Over Head Cam Engine DOHC - Double Over Head Cam Engine Export - Vehicles Built For Sale In Markets Other Than North America Except Export - Vehicles Built For Sale In North America Circuit Functions DESCRIPTION - CIRCUIT FUNCTIONS All circuits in the diagrams use an alpha/numeric code to identify the wire and it's function. To identify which circuit code applies to a system, refer to the Circuit Identification Code Chart. This chart shows the main circuits only and does not show the secondary codes that may apply to some models. Circuit Information DESCRIPTION - CIRCUIT INFORMATION Each wire shown in the diagrams contains a code which identifies the main circuit, a specific part of the main circuit, gage of wire, and color. An example would be A 2 18 LB/YL. This is a Battery Feed circuit, level two, eighteen gauge, light blue with a yellow tracer. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14448 Connector, Ground and Splice Information DESCRIPTION - CONNECTOR, GROUND AND SPLICE INFORMATION CAUTION: Not all connectors are serviced. Some connectors are serviced only with a harness. A typical example might be the Supplemental Restraint System connectors. Always check parts availability before attempting a repair. IDENTIFICATION In-line connectors are identified by a number, as follows: - In-line connectors located in the engine compartment are C100 series numbers. - In-line connectors located in the instrument panel area are C200 series numbers. - In-line connectors located in the body are C300 series numbers. - Jumper harness connectors are C400 series numbers. - Grounds and ground connectors are identified with a "G" and follow the same series numbering as the in-line connectors. - Splices are identified with an "S" and follow the same series numbering as the in-line connectors. In addition, S001-S099 numbers are located in the engine compartment. - Component connectors are identified by the component name instead of a number. Multiple connectors on a component use a C1, C2, etc. identifier. LOCATIONS Vehicle/Locations contains the master connector/ground/splice location index charts with hyperlinks to the applicable location illustrations. The illustrations contain the connector name (or number)/ground number/splice number and component identification. The abbreviation T/O is used in the component location section to indicate a point in which the wiring harness branches out to a component. The abbreviation N/S means Not Shown in the illustrations Section Identification and Information DESCRIPTION - SECTION IDENTIFICATION AND INFORMATION The wiring diagrams are grouped into individual sections. If a component is most likely found in a particular group, it will be shown complete (all wires, Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14449 connectors, and pins) within that group. For example, the Auto Shutdown Relay is most likely to be found in Powertrain Management, so it is shown there complete. It can, however, be shown partially in another group if it contains some associated wiring. Splice diagrams show the entire splice and provide references to other sections the splices serves. Splice Information only contains splice diagrams that are not shown in their entirety somewhere else in the wiring diagrams. Connector Pin-Outs shows each connector and the circuits involved with that connector. The connectors are identified using the name/number on the diagram pages. Removal REMOVAL 1. Disconnect battery. 2. Release Connector Lock (2). 3. Disconnect the connector (3) being repaired from its mating half/component. 4. Remove the dress cover (if applicable) (1). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14450 5. Release the Secondary Terminal Lock, if required (1). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14451 6. Position the connector locking finger away from the terminal using the proper special tool. Pull on the wire to remove the terminal from the connector. Installation Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14452 INSTALLATION 1. Insert the removed terminal in the same cavity on the repair connector. 2. Repeat steps for each terminal in the connector, being sure that all wires are inserted into the proper cavities. For additional connector pin-out identification, refer to the wiring diagrams. 3. When the connector is re-assembled, the secondary terminal lock must be placed in the locked position to prevent terminal push out. 4. Replace dress cover (if applicable). 5. Connect connector to its mating half/component. 6. Connect battery and test all affected systems. Removal REMOVAL 1. Disconnect the battery. 2. Locate the diode in the harness, and remove the protective covering. 3. Remove the diode from the harness, pay attention to the current flow direction (1) (2) (3). Installation INSTALLATION 1. Remove the insulation from the wires in the harness. Only remove enough insulation to solder in the new diode. 2. Install the new diode in the harness, making sure current flow is correct. If necessary, refer to the appropriate wiring diagram for current flow. 3. Solder the connection together using rosin core type solder only. Do not use acid core solder. 4. Tape the diode to the harness using electrical tape. Make sure the diode is completely sealed from the elements. 5. Re-connect the battery and test affected systems. Removal REMOVAL 1. Follow steps for removing terminals described in the connector removal section. 2. Cut the wire 6 inches from the back of the connector. Installation INSTALLATION 1. Select a wire from the terminal repair kit that best matches the color and gage of the wire being repaired. 2. Cut the repair wire to the proper length and remove one-half (1/2) inch of insulation. 3. Splice the repair wire to the wire harness (see wire splicing procedure). See: Service Procedures/Wire Splicing 4. Insert the repaired wire into the connector. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14453 5. Install the connector locking wedge, if required, and reconnect the connector to its mating half/component. 6. Re-tape the wire harness starting at 1-1/2 inches behind the connector and 2 inches past the repair. 7. Connect battery and test all affected systems. Wire Splicing STANDARD PROCEDURE - WIRE SPLICING When splicing a wire, it is important that the correct gage be used as shown in the wiring diagrams. 1. Remove one-half (1/2) inch of insulation from each wire that needs to be spliced. 2. Place a piece of adhesive lined heat shrink tubing on one side of the wire. Make sure the tubing will be long enough to cover and seal the entire repair area. 3. Place the strands of wire overlapping each other inside of the splice clip (1). 4. Using crimping tool (1), Mopar p/n 05019912AA, crimp the splice clip and wires together. 5. Solder (3) the connection (2) together using rosin core type solder (1) only. CAUTION: DO NOT USE ACID CORE SOLDER. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14454 6. Center the heat shrink tubing (2) over the joint and heat using a heat gun. Heat the joint until the tubing is tightly sealed and sealant (1) comes out of both ends of the tubing. Special Tools WIRING/TERMINAL PROBING TOOL PACKAGE 6807 TERMINAL PICK TOOL SET 6680 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14455 TERMINAL REMOVING TOOLS 6932 AND 8638 TERMINAL REMOVING TOOL 6934 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14456 Cigarette Lighter: Diagnostic Aids Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) Sensitive Devices STANDARD PROCEDURE - ELECTROSTATIC DISCHARGE (ESD) SENSITIVE DEVICES All ESD sensitive components are solid state and a symbol is used to indicate this. When handling any component with this symbol, comply with the following procedures to reduce the possibility of electrostatic charge build up on the body and inadvertent discharge into the component. If it is not known whether the part is ESD sensitive, assume that it is. 1. Always touch a known good ground before handling the part. This should be repeated while handling the part and more frequently after sliding across a seat, sitting down from a standing position, or walking a distance. 2. Avoid touching electrical terminals of the part, unless instructed to do so by a written procedure. 3. When using a voltmeter, be sure to connect the ground lead first. 4. Do not remove the part from it's protective packing until it is time to install the part. 5. Before removing the part from it's package, ground the package to a known good ground on the vehicle. Testing Of Voltage Potential STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING OF VOLTAGE POTENTIAL 1. Connect the ground lead of a voltmeter to a known good ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the voltmeter to the selected test point. The vehicle ignition may need to be turned ON to check voltage. Refer to the appropriate test procedure. Testing For Continuity Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14457 STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING FOR CONTINUITY 1. Remove the fuse (1) for the circuit being checked or, disconnect the battery. 2. Connect one lead of the ohmmeter to one side of the circuit being tested 3. Connect the other lead to the other end of the circuit being tested. Low or no resistance means good continuity. Testing For A Short To Ground STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING FOR A SHORT TO GROUND 1. Remove the fuse and disconnect all items involved with the fuse. 2. Connect a test light or a voltmeter across the terminals of the fuse. 3. Starting at the fuse block, wiggle the wiring harness about six to eight inches apart and watch the voltmeter/test lamp. 4. If the voltmeter registers voltage or the test lamp glows, there is a short to ground in that general area of the wiring harness. Testing For A Short To Ground On Fuses Powering Several Loads STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING FOR A SHORT TO GROUND ON FUSES POWERING SEVERAL LOADS 1. Refer to the wiring diagrams and disconnect or isolate all items on the suspected fused circuits. 2. Replace the blown fuse. 3. Supply power to the fuse by turning ON the ignition switch or re-connecting the battery. 4. Start connecting or energizing the items in the fuse circuit one at a time. When the fuse blows the circuit with the short to ground has been isolated. Testing For A Voltage Drop STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING FOR A VOLTAGE DROP Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14458 1. Connect the positive lead of the voltmeter to the side of the circuit closest to the battery. 2. Connect the other lead of the voltmeter to the other side of the switch, component or circuit. 3. Operate the item. 4. The voltmeter will show the difference in voltage between the two points. Troubleshooting Wiring Problems DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING - WIRING HARNESS TROUBLESHOOTING TOOLS When diagnosing a problem in an electrical circuit there are several common tools necessary. These tools are listed and explained below. - Jumper Wire - This is a test wire used to connect two points of a circuit. It can be used to bypass an open in a circuit. WARNING: Never use a jumper wire across a load, such as a motor, connected between a battery feed and ground. - Voltmeter - Used to check for voltage on a circuit. Always connect the black lead to a known good ground and the red lead to the positive side of the circuit. CAUTION: Most of the electrical components used in today's vehicles are Solid State. When checking voltages in these circuits, use a meter with a 10 - megohm or greater impedance rating. - Ohmmeter - Used to check the resistance between two points of a circuit. Low or no resistance in a circuit means good continuity. CAUTION: Most of the electrical components used in today's vehicles are Solid State. When checking resistance in these circuits use a meter with a 10 - megohm or greater impedance rating. In addition, make sure the power is disconnected from the circuit. Circuits that are powered up by the vehicle's electrical system can cause damage to the equipment and provide false readings. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14459 - Probing Tools - These tools are used for probing terminals in connectors. Select the proper size tool from Special Tool Package 6807, and insert the probing end (2) into the terminal being tested. Use the other end of the tool (1) to insert the meter probe. INTERMITTENT AND POOR CONNECTIONS Most intermittent electrical problems are caused by faulty electrical connections or wiring. It is also possible for a sticking component or relay to cause a problem. Before condemning a component or wiring assembly, check the following items. - Connectors are fully seated - Spread terminals, or terminal push out - Terminals in the wiring assembly are fully seated into the connector/component and locked into position - Dirt or corrosion on the terminals. Any amount of corrosion or dirt could cause an intermittent problem - Damaged connector/component casing exposing the item to dirt or moisture - Wire insulation that has rubbed through causing a short to ground - Some or all of the wiring strands broken inside of the insulation - Wiring broken inside of the insulation TROUBLESHOOTING WIRING PROBLEMS When troubleshooting wiring problems there are six steps which can aid in the procedure. The steps are listed and explained below. Always check for non-factory items added to the vehicle before doing any diagnosis. If the vehicle is equipped with these items, disconnect them to verify these add-on items are not the cause of the problem. 1. Verify the problem. 2. Verify any related symptoms. Do this by performing operational checks on components that are in the same circuit. Refer to the wiring diagrams. 3. Analyze the symptoms. Use the wiring diagrams to determine what the circuit is doing, where the problem most likely is occurring and where the diagnosis will continue. 4. Isolate the problem area. 5. Repair the problem area. 6. Verify the proper operation. For this step, check for proper operation of all items on the repaired circuit. Refer to the wiring diagrams. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14460 Cigarette Lighter: Connector Views Component ID: 192 Component : LIGHTER-CIGAR Connector: Name : LIGHTER-CIGAR Color : GRAY # of pins : 3 Pin Circuit Description 1 F984 18PK/YL FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-ACC) 2-3 Z736 18BK/YL GROUND Component Location - 47 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14461 Component Location - 44 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14462 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14463 Cigarette Lighter: Electrical Diagrams PLEASE NOTE: Some diagrams may appear to be missing because of gaps in the number sequences. These "gaps" are actually for diagrams that do not apply to the vehicle model selected. 8w-41-02 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14464 8w-41-03 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14465 8w-41-04 Other Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by number (i.e. 8W-70-2, etc.) within these diagrams can be found at the vehicle level under Diagrams by Number. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Number Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Compass > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Compass: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION NOTE: The Compass Mini-Trip Computer (CMTC) module is sometimes referred to as Electronic Overhead Module (EOM) for the purposes of scan tool and diagnostic information naming. Please treat the CMTC and EOM as one and the same when diagnosing the vehicle. The Compass Mini-Trip Computer (CMTC) is located in the overhead console and consists of the following components: - HomeLink(R) transceiver (3) - if equipped - Vacuum-Fluorescent Display (VFD) (6) - Push button function switches (1, 2, 3, 4 and 5) - Replaceable light bulbs to illuminate the push button function switches The CMTC contains a central processing unit and interfaces with other electronic modules in the vehicle on the Controller Area Network (CAN) data bus. The CAN data bus allows the sharing of sensor information. This helps to reduce wire harness complexity, reduce internal controller hardware, and reduce component sensor current loads. At the same time, this system provides increased reliability, enhanced diagnostics, and allows the addition of many new feature capabilities. The individual components of the CMTC module are not serviced separately and if damaged or inoperative, must be replaced as a unit. The CMTC provides several electronic functions and features. Some of the functions and features that the CMTC supports and/or controls, include the following display options: - Compass and Temperature - provides the outside temperature and one of eight compass readings to indicate the direction the vehicle is facing. - Trip Odometer (ODO) - shows the distance travelled since the last trip computer reset. - Average Fuel Economy (AVG ECO) - shows the average fuel economy since the last reset. Average fuel economy is a running average of the amount of fuel used and the distance the vehicle has traveled. When the fuel economy is reset, the display will momentarily blank. Then, the display will show the same value as before the rest. The reset value is based on a minimal amount of fuel used and the distance traveled from the previous drive cycle. The display may take several miles for this value to change dependent upon driving habits. - Distance To Empty (DTE) - shows the estimated distance that can be traveled with the fuel remaining in the tank. This estimated distance is determined by weighted average of the instantaneous and average fuel economy, according to the current fuel tank level. This is not resettable. Significant changes in driving style or vehicle loading will greatly affect the actual drivable distance of the vehicle, regardless of the DTE displayed value. When the DTE value is less than 30 miles estimated driving distance, the DTE display will change to an alternating test display of "LO" and "FUEL". This display will continue until the vehicle runs out of fuel. Adding a significant amount of fuel to the vehicle will turn off the "LO FUEL" text and a new DTE value will be displayed, based on the current values in the DTE calculation and the current fuel tank level. Elapsed time (ET) - shows the accumulated ignition-on time since the last trip computer reset. - Blank screen - the compass mini-trip computer VFD is turned off or in Blank Screen Mode. COMPASS NOTE: If the compass functions, but accuracy is suspect, it may be necessary to perform a variance adjustment. This procedure allows the compass unit to accommodate variances in the earth's magnetic field strength, based on geographic location. See: Service and Repair/Procedures/Compass Mini-Trip Computer/Compass Variance Adjustment - CMTC for the appropriate procedure. While in the compass/temperature mode, the compass will display the direction in which the vehicle is pointed using the eight major compass headings (Examples: north is N, northeast is NE). The auto-calibrating compass unit requires no manual adjusting in normal use. The only calibration that may prove necessary is to drive the vehicle in one or two complete circles, on level ground, not exceeding 8 km/h (5 mph). This will reorient the compass unit Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Compass > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 14470 to its vehicle. The compass unit also will compensate for vehicle magnetism acquired during normal use. However, avoid placing anything magnetic directly on the roof of the vehicle. Magnetic mounts for an antenna, a repair order hat, or a funeral procession flag can exceed the compensating ability of the compass unit if placed on the roof panel. Magnetic bit drivers used on the fasteners that hold the overhead console assembly to the roof header can also affect compass operation. If the vehicle roof should become magnetized, See: Service and Repair/Procedures/Compass Mini-Trip Computer/Compass Demagnetizing - CMTC to restore proper compass operation. TEMPERATURE NOTE: The displayed temperature is not an instant reading of conditions, but an average temperature. It may take the temperature display several minutes to respond to a major temperature change, such as driving out of a heated garage into winter temperatures. The temperature displays the outside ambient temperature in whole degrees. The temperature display can be toggled from Fahrenheit to Celsius using the U.S./Metric push button. Displayed temperature reading stays in the temperature unit memory. When the ignition switch is turned to the On position, the temperature will display the memory temperature if the engine OFF time is less than 255 minutes. If the engine OFF time is more than 255 minutes, the temperature will display the actual temperature sensed by the ambient temperature sensor. The temperature display update interval varies with the vehicle speed. The temperature function is supported by an ambient temperature sensor. This sensor is mounted outside the passenger compartment near the front and center of the vehicle, and is hard wired to the Front Control Module (FCM). The instrument cluster, also known as the Cab Compartment Node (CCN) averages and filters the ambient temperature signal and supplies it to other modules on the CAN data bus. Data input for all other compass mini-trip computer functions, including VFD dimming level, is received through CAN data bus messages. The maximum temperature displayed is 66°C (140° F). It could take several miles for the accurate temperature to be displayed as the CCN filters out heat from the engine compartment. The CMTC uses its internal programming and all of these inputs to calculate and display the requested data. If the data displayed is incorrect, perform the self-diagnostic tests, as described in this group. If these tests prove inconclusive, the use of a scan tool and the proper Diagnostic Procedures Information are recommended for further testing of the CMTC and the CAN data bus. NOTE: The CMTC will display min and max temperatures of -40° C (-40° F) and 66°C (140° F). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Compass > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 14471 Compass: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The Compass Mini-Trip Computer (CMTC) only operates with the ignition switch in the On position and the Ignition Off Draw (IOD) fuse functioning and in place. When the ignition switch is turned to the On position, all of the segments in the CMTC Vacuum-Fluorescent Display (VFD) will be turned off for one second, then the display will return to the last function being displayed before the ignition was turned to the Off position. With the ignition switch in the On position, momentarily depressing and releasing the STEP push button (4) will cause the CMTC to change its mode of operation. Momentarily depressing and releasing the U.S./M push button (1) will cause the unit to toggle between U.S. and Metric measurements. Momentarily depressing and releasing the C/T (compass/temperature) push button (5) will cause the CMTC to return to the compass/temperature display mode from any other mode. Pressing the RESET push button (2) for more than one second with the ignition switch in the On position will reset the following CMTC functions: - Average Fuel Economy (AVG ECO) - Trip Odometer (ODO) - Elapsed Time (ET) However, the reset will only occur if the function currently displayed is a function that can be reset. If the RESET push button is pressed twice within two seconds while in any of the three resettable functions (AVG ECO, ODO, ET), all three of these functions will be reset. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Compass > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 14472 Compass: Testing and Inspection COMPASS MINI-TRIP COMPUTER NOTE: The temperature, fuel economy, distance to empty and trip odometer are calculated in the Cab Compartment Node (CCN) and transferred to the Compass Mini-Trip Computer (CMTC) for display. If the CMTC and Vacuum Fluorescent Display (VFD) test OK, testing of the CCN and Controller Area Network (CAN) data bus circuit may be necessary. Refer to the proper Diagnostic Procedures Information to test the CCN and CAN data bus circuit. If the problem with the CMTC is an inaccurate or scrambled display, refer to SELF- DIAGNOSTIC TEST. If the problem with the CMTC is incorrect Vacuum Fluorescent Display (VFD) dimming levels, use a scan tool and the proper Diagnostic Procedures Information to test for the correct dimming message inputs being received from the Cab Compartment Node (CCN) or Front Control Module (FCM) over the Controller Area Network (CAN) data bus circuit. If the problem is a no-display condition, use the following procedure. For complete circuit diagrams, refer to the appropriate wiring information. The wiring information includes wiring diagrams, proper wire and connector repair procedures, details of wire harness routing and retention, connector pin-out information and location views for the various wire harness connectors, splices and grounds. 1. Remove the overhead console from the headliner See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Console/Service and Repair/Overhead Console/Removal . 2. Inspect the Ignition Off Draw (IOD) fuse in the Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM). If the IOD fuse is OK and in place, go to STEP 3. If not OK, repair the open IOD fuse circuit as required. 3. Check for battery voltage at the overhead console electrical connector. If OK, go to STEP 4. If not OK, Check for battery voltage at the appropriate B(+) fuse in the Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM), repair the open fused B(+) circuit as required. 4. Turn the ignition switch to the On position. Check the fused ignition switch output circuit(s) at the overhead console electrical connector. If OK, go to STEP 5. If not OK, repair the open or shorted circuit as required. 5. Turn the ignition switch to the Off position. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. Check for continuity between the ground circuit cavity of the overhead console electrical connector and a good ground. There should be continuity. If OK, refer to SELF- DIAGNOSTIC TEST for further diagnosis of the CMTC module and the CAN data bus circuit. If not OK, repair the open ground circuit as required. SELF- DIAGNOSTIC TEST NOTE: The CMTC self - test can also be performed using a scan tool. Navigate to the Auto Self Test screen under System Tests of the scan tool and initiate the CMTC self - test. A self-diagnostic test is used to determine that the CMTC is operating properly electrically. Initiate the self-diagnostic test as follows: 1. With the ignition switch in the Off position, simultaneously depress and hold the STEP and RESET buttons while rotating the ignition switch to the Run/On position. 2. Continue to hold both buttons depressed until the CMTC enters the display segment test. In this test, all of the Vacuum Fluorescent Display (VFD) segments are lighted while the CMTC performs the following checks: Non-Volatile Memory Status (NVM) - RAM Status - ROM Status - ASIC Communication Status - Compass Status - DC Status - CAN Data Bus Communications Status NOTE: If the CMTC module is equipped with the Universal Transmitter (also known as HomeLink(R)), the module also checks "HomeLink(R) Communication Test Status". 3. Following completion of these tests, the CMTC will display one of two messages: "FAIL" or "PASS." Press the RESET or STEP button to exit and enter normal mode. Respond to these test results as follows: If no test result message is displayed, but CMTC operation is still improper, the use of a scan tool and the proper Diagnostic Procedures Information are required for further diagnosis. - If the "FAIL" message is displayed, the CMTC is inoperative and must be replaced. - If the "PASS" message is displayed, the CMTC is OK, no faults are present. - If any VFD segment does not light during the display segment test, the CMTC is inoperative and must be replaced. If the first seven tests pass, the CMTC shall verify that all the required CAN bus messages are present on the CAN bus. If all required messages are present on the CAN bus, the CMTC will automatically return to normal operation after sixty seconds. The CMTC can also be returned to normal operation any time during the test by pressing the STEP , CT , RESET or US/M buttons. NOTE: Pressing the STEP or RESET buttons during any portion of the CMTC Self - Diagnostic Test Procedure will cause the CMTC to exit diagnostics and return to compass/temperature mode. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Compass > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 14473 NOTE: If the compass functions, but accuracy is suspect, it may be necessary to perform a variance adjustment. This procedure allows the compass unit to accommodate variations in the earth's magnetic field strength, based on geographic location. NOTE: If the compass reading has blanked out, and only "CAL" appears in the display, demagnetizing may be necessary to remove excessive residual magnetic fields from the vehicle. Check for stored Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) and follow the proper Diagnostic Procedures Information as needed. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Compass > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures Compass: Procedures Manual Compass Calibration - CMTC MANUAL COMPASS CALIBRATION CAUTION: Do not place any external magnets, such as magnetic roof mount antennas, in the vicinity of the overhead console. Do not use magnetic tools when servicing the overhead console. NOTE: Whenever the compass is calibrated manually, the variance number must also be reset. See: Compass Mini-Trip Computer/Compass Variance Adjustment - CMTC for the appropriate procedure. The electronic compass unit features a self-calibrating design, which simplifies the calibration procedure. This feature automatically updates the compass calibration while the vehicle is being driven. This allows the compass unit to compensate for small changes in the residual magnetism that the vehicle may acquire during normal use. If the compass readings appear to be erratic or out of calibration, perform the following calibration procedure. Also, new service replacement Compass Mini-Trip Computer (CMTC) modules must have their compass calibrated using this procedure. Do not attempt to calibrate the compass near large metal objects such as other vehicles, large buildings, or bridges; or, near overhead or underground power lines. Calibrate the compass manually as follows: 1. Turn the ignition switch to the On position. If the compass/temperature data is not currently being displayed, momentarily depress and release the C/T push button (5) to return to the compass/temperature display. 2. Depress and hold the RESET push button (2). Hold the push button down until "CAL" appears in the display. This takes about ten seconds. 3. Slowly drive the vehicle on a level surface, away from large metal objects and power lines, through one or two complete circles not exceeding 8 km/h (5 mph). The "CAL" message will disappear from the display to indicate that the compass is now calibrated. NOTE: A blank compass display indicates that vehicle degaussing (demagnetizing) may be necessary. NOTE: If the "CAL" message remains in the display, either there is excessive magnetism near the compass, or the CMTC is inoperative. Attempt the calibration procedure at least one more time before performing CMTC diagnosis. NOTE: If the wrong direction is still indicated in the compass display, the area selected for calibration may be too close to a strong magnetic field. Repeat the calibration procedure in another location. Compass Demagnetizing - CMTC COMPASS DEMAGNETIZING Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Compass > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 14476 A degaussing tool (Special Tool 6029) is used to demagnetize, or degauss, the overhead console forward mounting screw and the roof panel above the overhead console. Equivalent units must be rated as continuous duty for 110/115 volts and 60 Hz. They must also have a field strength of over 350 gauss at 7 millimeters (0.25 inch) beyond the tip of the probe. To demagnetize the roof panel and the overhead console forward mounting screw, proceed as follows: 1. Be certain that the ignition switch is in the Off position, before you begin the demagnetizing procedure. 2. Connect the degaussing tool to an electrical outlet, while keeping the tool at least 61 centimeters (2 feet) away from the compass unit. 3. Slowly approach the head of the overhead console forward mounting screw with the degaussing tool connected. 4. Contact the head of the screw with the plastic coated tip of the degaussing tool for about two seconds. 5. With the degaussing tool still energized, slowly back it away from the screw. When the tip of the tool is at least 61 centimeters (2 feet) from the screw head, disconnect the tool. 6. Place a piece of paper approximately 22 by 28 centimeters (8.5 by 11 inches), oriented on the vehicle lengthwise from front to rear, on the center line of the roof at the windshield header. The purpose of the paper is to protect the roof panel from scratches, and to define the area to be demagnetized. 7. Connect the degaussing tool to an electrical outlet, while keeping the tool at least 61 centimeters (2 feet) away from the compass unit. 8. Slowly approach the center line of the roof panel at the windshield header, with the degaussing tool connected. 9. Contact the roof panel with the plastic coated tip of the degaussing tool. Be sure that the template is in place to avoid scratching the roof panel. Using a slow, back-and-forth sweeping motion, and allowing 13 millimeters (0.50 inch) between passes, move the tool at least 11 centimeters (4 inches) to each side of the roof center line, and 28 centimeters (11 inches) back from the windshield header. 10. With the degaussing tool still energized, slowly back it away from the roof panel. When the tip of the tool is at least 61 centimeters (2 feet) from the roof panel, disconnect the tool. 11. Calibrate the compass, See: Compass Mini-Trip Computer/Manual Compass Calibration CMTC and adjust the compass variance, See: Compass Mini-Trip Computer/Compass Variance Adjustment - CMTC . Compass Variance Adjustment - CMTC COMPASS VARIANCE ADJUSTMENT Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Compass > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 14477 Compass variance, also known as magnetic declination, is the difference in angle between magnetic north and true geographic north. In some geographic locations, the difference between magnetic and geographic north is great enough to cause the compass to give false readings. If this problem occurs, the compass variance must be set. NOTE: If the vehicle is taken on long trips into a new variance zone the compass function may be effected. Compass variance may need to be adjusted to the new zone number to function properly. NOTE: The default for the compass variance from the factory is 8. To set the compass variance: 1. Using the Variance Settings Map, find your geographic location and note the zone number. 2. Turn the ignition switch to the On/Run position. If the compass/temperature data is not currently being displayed, momentarily depress and release the C/T push button (5) to return to the compass/temperature display. 3. Press and hold the RESET push button (2) down for approximately five seconds. The last variance zone number will be displayed. 4. Momentarily depress and release the STEP push button (4) to toggle through the zone numbers (1-15), until the zone number for your geographic location appears in the display. 5. Momentarily depress and release the RESET push button (2) to enter the displayed zone number into the compass unit memory. 6. Confirm that the correct directions are now indicated by the compass. Manual Compass Calibration - EVIC MANUAL COMPASS CALIBRATION CAUTION: Do not place any external magnets, such as magnetic roof mount antennas, in the vicinity of the overhead console. Do not use magnetic tools when servicing the overhead console. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Compass > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 14478 NOTE: Whenever the compass is calibrated manually, the variance number must also be reset. See: Electronic Vehicle Information Center - Standard Procedures/Compass Variance Adjustment EVIC for the appropriate procedure. The electronic compass unit features a self-calibrating design, which simplifies the calibration procedure. This feature automatically updates the compass calibration while the vehicle is being driven. This allows the compass unit to compensate for small changes in the residual magnetism that the vehicle may acquire during normal use. If the compass readings appear to be erratic or the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) displays "CAL", perform the following manual calibration procedure. Also, any time EVIC service replacement components are installed, they must be calibrated using this procedure. Do not attempt to calibrate the compass near large metal objects such as other vehicles, large buildings, or bridges; or, near overhead or underground power lines. Calibrate the compass manually as follows: 1. Turn the ignition switch to the On/Run position. Press and release the MENU push button (1) until "Personal Settings" is displayed. 2. Press the STEP push button (4) until "Calibrate Compass YES" is displayed. 3. Momentarily depress and release the RESET push button (2) to initiate the calibration procedure. The message "CAL will appear in the Compass /Temperature display. 4. Slowly drive the vehicle on a level surface, away from large metal objects and power lines, through one or two complete circles not exceeding 8 km/h (5 mph). The "CAL" message will disappear from the display to indicate that the compass is now calibrated. NOTE: A blank compass display indicates that vehicle degaussing (demagnetizing) may be necessary. NOTE: If the "CAL" message remains in the display, either there is excessive magnetism near the compass, or the EVIC is inoperative. Attempt the calibration procedure at least one more time before performing EVIC diagnosis. NOTE: If the wrong direction is still indicated in the compass display, the area selected for calibration may be too close to a strong magnetic field. Repeat the manual calibration procedure in another location. Compass Demagnetizing - EVIC COMPASS DEMAGNETIZING A degaussing tool (Special Tool 6029) is used to demagnetize, or degauss, the overhead console forward mounting screw and the roof panel above the overhead console. Equivalent units must be rated as continuous duty for 110/115 volts and 60 Hz. They must also have a field strength of over 350 gauss at 7 millimeters (0.25 inch) beyond the tip of the probe. To demagnetize the roof panel and the overhead console forward mounting screw, proceed as follows: Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Compass > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 14479 1. Be certain that the ignition switch is in the Off position, before you begin the demagnetizing procedure. 2. Connect the degaussing tool to an electrical outlet, while keeping the tool at least 61 centimeters (2 feet) away from the compass unit. 3. Slowly approach the head of the overhead console forward mounting screw with the degaussing tool connected. 4. Contact the head of the screw with the plastic coated tip of the degaussing tool for about two seconds. 5. With the degaussing tool still energized, slowly back it away from the screw. When the tip of the tool is at least 61 centimeters (2 feet) from the screw head, disconnect the tool. To demagnetize the roof panel proceed as follows: 6. Place a piece of paper approximately 22 by 28 centimeters (8.5 by 11 inches), oriented on the vehicle lengthwise from front to rear, on the center line of the roof at the windshield header. The purpose of the paper is to protect the roof panel from scratches, and to define the area to be demagnetized. 7. Connect the degaussing tool to an electrical outlet, while keeping the tool at least 61 centimeters (2 feet) away from the compass unit. 8. Slowly approach the center line of the roof panel at the windshield header, with the degaussing tool connected. 9. Contact the roof panel with the plastic coated tip of the degaussing tool. Be sure that the template is in place to avoid scratching the roof panel. Using a slow, back-and-forth sweeping motion, and allowing 13 millimeters (0.50 inch) between passes, move the tool at least 11 centimeters (4 inches) to each side of the roof center line, and 28 centimeters (11 inches) back from the windshield header. 10. With the degaussing tool still energized, slowly back it away from the roof panel. When the tip of the tool is at least 61 centimeters (2 feet) from the roof panel, disconnect the tool. 11. Calibrate the compass, See: Electronic Vehicle Information Center - Standard Procedures/Manual Compass Calibration - EVIC and adjust the compass variance, See: Electronic Vehicle Information Center - Standard Procedures/Compass Variance Adjustment - EVIC . Compass Variance Adjustment - EVIC COMPASS VARIANCE ADJUSTMENT Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Compass > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 14480 Compass variance, also known as magnetic declination, is the difference in angle between magnetic north and true geographic north. In some geographic locations, the difference between magnetic and geographic north is great enough to cause the compass to give false readings. If this problem occurs, the compass variance must be set. NOTE: If the vehicle is taken on long trips into a new variance zone the compass function may be effected. Compass variance may need to be adjusted to the new zone number to function properly. NOTE: The default for the compass variance from the factory is 8. To set the compass variance: 1. Using the Variance Settings Map, find your geographic location and note the zone number. 2. Turn the ignition switch to the On/Run position. Press and release the MENU push button (1) until "Personal Settings" is displayed. 3. Press the STEP push button (4) until "Compass Variance" is displayed. 4. Momentarily depress and release the RESET push button (2) to toggle through the zone numbers (1-15), until the zone number for your geographic location appears in the display. 5. Momentarily depress and release the C/T push button (5) to enter the displayed zone number into the compass unit memory. 6. Confirm that the correct directions are now indicated by the compass. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Compass > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 14481 Compass: Removal and Replacement Compass Mini - Trip Computer COMPASS MINI - TRIP COMPUTER 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. 2. Remove the overhead console (3) from the headliner See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Console/Service and Repair/Overhead Console/Removal . 3. Remove the screws (1) that secure the Compass Mini - Trip Computer (CMTC) (4) to the overhead console housing (3). 4. Remove the CMTC (4) from the overhead console housing (3). Bulb - CMTC Control BULB - CMTC CONTROL WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury on vehicles equipped with airbags, disable the Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, airbag, seat belt tensioner, impact sensor, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the SRS. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment. NOTE: There are provisions for up to three bulb/bulb holder units on the Compass Mini-Trip Computer (CMTC) circuit board. The two outboard bulbs illuminate the CMTC push buttons, while the center bulb illuminates the optional universal transmitter push buttons. Therefore, the center bulb location is only populated on vehicles equipped with the optional universal transmitter. 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. 2. Remove the overhead console (1) from the headliner. See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Console/Service and Repair/Overhead Console/Removal . 3. Use a small thin-bladed screwdriver to rotate the bulb holder (3) counterclockwise about 30 degrees to unlock it from the keyed opening in the Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Compass > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 14482 Compass Mini-Trip Computer (CMTC) unit (2) circuit board. 4. Pull the bulb holder and bulb straight out of the circuit board. Compass Mini - Trip Computer COMPASS MINI - TRIP COMPUTER NOTE: If a new Compass Mini - Trip Computer has been installed, the compass will have to be calibrated and the variance set. See: Procedures/Compass Mini-Trip Computer/Manual Compass Calibration - CMTC and See: Procedures/Compass Mini-Trip Computer/Compass Variance Adjustment - CMTC for the appropriate procedures. 1. Position the CMTC (4) onto the overhead console housing (3). 2. Install the screws (1) that secure the CMTC (4) to the overhead console housing (3). Tighten the screws to 2 Nm (20 in. lbs.). 3. Install the overhead console (3) onto the headliner See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Console/Service and Repair/Overhead Console/Installation . 4. Reconnect the battery negative cable. Bulb - CMTC Control BULB - CMTC CONTROL WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury on vehicles equipped with airbags, disable the Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, airbag, seat belt tensioner, impact sensor, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the SRS. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment. CAUTION: Always use the correct bulb size and type for replacement. An incorrect bulb size or type may overheat and cause damage to the lamp, the socket or the lamp wiring. NOTE: There are provisions for up to three bulb/bulb holder units on the Compass Mini-Trip Computer (CMTC) circuit board. The two outboard bulbs illuminate the CMTC push buttons, while the center bulb illuminates the optional universal transmitter push buttons. Therefore, the center bulb location is only populated on vehicles equipped with the optional universal transmitter. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Compass > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 14483 1. Align the bulb holder and bulb (3) with the keyed opening in the circuit board of the Compass Mini-Trip Computer (CMTC) (2). 2. Insert the bulb holder and bulb straight into the circuit board until the bulb holder is firmly seated. 3. Using a small thin-bladed screwdriver, rotate the bulb holder clockwise about 30 degrees on the circuit board to lock it into place. 4. Reinstall the overhead console (1) onto the headliner. See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Console/Service and Repair/Overhead Console/Installation . 5. Reconnect the battery negative cable. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cruise Control Indicator Lamp > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Cruise Control Indicator Lamp: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION A cruise indicator is standard equipment on all instrument clusters. However, on vehicles not equipped with the optional speed control system, this indicator is electronically disabled. The cruise indicator is located on the left side of the cluster, to the left of the fuel gauge. The cruise indicator consists of a stencil-like cutout of the word CRUISE in the opaque layer of the instrument cluster overlay. The dark outer layer of the overlay prevents the indicator from being clearly visible when it is not illuminated. A green Light Emitting Diode (LED) behind the cutout in the opaque layer of the overlay causes the indicator to appear in green through the translucent outer layer of the overlay when it is illuminated from behind by the LED, which is soldered onto the instrument cluster electronic circuit board. When the exterior lighting is turned ON the illumination intensity of the cruise indicator is dimmable, which is adjusted along with the cluster general illumination lighting using the panel lamps dimmer thumbwheel on the headlamp switch. The cruise indicator is serviced as a unit with the instrument cluster. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cruise Control Indicator Lamp > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 14488 Cruise Control Indicator Lamp: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The cruise indicator gives an indication to the vehicle operator when the speed control system is ON, regardless of whether the speed control is engaged. This indicator is controlled by a transistor on the instrument cluster circuit board based upon cluster programming and electronic messages received by the cluster from the Powertrain Control Module (PCM) over the Controller Area Network (CAN) data bus. The cruise indicator Light Emitting Diode (LED) is completely controlled by the instrument cluster logic circuit, and that logic will only allow this indicator to operate when the instrument cluster receives a battery current input on the fused ignition switch output (run-start) circuit. Therefore, the LED will always be OFF when the ignition switch is in any position except ON or START. The LED only illuminates when it is provided a path to ground by the instrument cluster transistor. The instrument cluster will turn ON the cruise indicator for the following reasons: - Cruise Indicator Lamp-On Message - Each time the cluster receives an electronic cruise indicator lamp-ON message from the PCM indicating the speed control system is ON, the cruise indicator is illuminated. The indicator remains illuminated until the cluster receives a lamp-OFF message from the PCM or until the ignition switch is turned to the OFF position, whichever occurs first. - Actuator Test - Each time the cluster is put through the actuator test, the cruise indicator will be turned ON, then OFF again during the bulb check portion of the test to confirm the functionality of the LED and the cluster control circuitry. The PCM continually monitors the speed control switches to determine the proper outputs to the speed control servo. The PCM then sends the proper lamp-ON or lamp-OFF message to the ElectroMechanical Instrument Cluster (EMIC) (also known as the Cab Compartment Node/CCN). For further diagnosis of the cruise indicator or the instrument cluster circuitry that controls the LED, Refer to appropriate testing. For proper diagnosis of the speed control system, the PCM, the EMIC, the CAN data bus or the electronic communication related to cruise indicator operation a diagnostic scan tool is required. Refer to the appropriate diagnostic information. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Door/Trunk Ajar Indicator/Lamp > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Door/Trunk Ajar Indicator/Lamp: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION A door ajar indicator is standard equipment on all instrument clusters. This indicator appears within the odometer Vacuum Fluorescent Display (VFD) unit. The door ajar indicator consists of a textual door message which appears in place of the odometer information in the odometer display. The odometer VFD is soldered onto the cluster electronic circuit board, and is visible through a window with a smoked clear lens located on the lower edge of the speedometer gauge dial face of the cluster overlay. The dark lens over the VFD prevents it from being clearly visible when it is not illuminated. The door ajar textual message appears in the same blue-green color and at the same lighting level as the odometer information when it is illuminated by the instrument cluster electronic circuit board. The door ajar indicator is serviced as a unit with the VFD in the instrument cluster. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Door/Trunk Ajar Indicator/Lamp > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 14493 Door/Trunk Ajar Indicator/Lamp: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The door ajar indicator gives an indication to the vehicle operator that one or more of the passenger compartment doors may be open or not completely latched. This indicator is controlled by the instrument cluster logic circuit based upon cluster programming and hard wired inputs received by the cluster from the door ajar switches located in each door latch unit. The door ajar indicator function of the Vacuum Fluorescent Display (VFD) is completely controlled by the instrument cluster logic circuit, and that logic will only allow this indicator to operate when the instrument cluster receives a battery current input on the fused ignition switch output (run-start) circuit. Therefore, the VFD door ajar indication will always be OFF when the ignition switch is in any position except ON or START. The instrument cluster will turn ON the door ajar indicator for the following reasons: - Door Ajar Switch Input - Each time the cluster detects ground on any one of the door ajar switch sense circuits (door ajar switch closed = door is open or not completely latched) the door ajar indicator will be illuminated. The indicator remains illuminated until all of the door ajar switch sense inputs to the cluster are an open circuit (door ajar switch open = door fully closed), until the cluster has completed an interior lamps load shed (about five minutes), or until the ignition switch is turned to the OFF position, whichever occurs first. The ElectroMechanical Instrument Cluster (EMIC) (also known as the Cab Compartment Node/CCN) continually monitors the door ajar switches to determine the status of the doors. For further diagnosis of the door ajar indicator or the instrument cluster circuitry that controls the indicator, Refer to appropriate testing. The hard wired door ajar switches and circuits related to door ajar indicator operation may be diagnosed using conventional diagnostic tools and procedures. Refer to the appropriate wiring information. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Door Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Door Switch: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION This vehicle has up to four door ajar switches, one for each door. Each switch is concealed within and integral to its respective door latch unit. The switches are momentary leaf contact-type units that are actuated by the mechanisms internal to the door latch. A short pigtail wire and connector on each door latch connects the door ajar switch to the vehicle electrical system through its respective door wire harness. The door ajar switches cannot be adjusted or repaired and, if ineffective or damaged, the door latch unit must be replaced. See: Body and Frame/Doors, Hood and Trunk/Doors/Front Door/Front Door Latch/Service and Repair/Front Door Latch - Removal or See: Body and Frame/Doors, Hood and Trunk/Doors/Rear Door/Rear Door Latch/Service and Repair/Rear Door Latch - Removal . Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Door Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 14498 Door Switch: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The door ajar switches are actuated by the mechanisms internal to the door latch. When a door is closed and properly latched, its door ajar switch is an open circuit. When a door is open or only partially latched, the door ajar switch is a closed circuit. The door ajar switches are hard wired in series between a body ground and the ElectroMechanical Instrument Cluster (EMIC) (also known as the Cab Compartment Node/CCN). The EMIC reads the hard wired door ajar switch inputs through internal pull-ups, then uses these inputs to control many electronic functions and features of the vehicle. The EMIC also sends the proper electronic door ajar switch status messages to other electronic modules in the vehicle over the Controller Area Network (CAN) data bus. The door ajar switches as well as the hard wired inputs and outputs of the switches may be diagnosed using conventional diagnostic tools and procedures. Refer to the appropriate wiring information. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Instruments - Vehicle Information Center Setup Driver/Vehicle Information Display: Technical Service Bulletins Instruments - Vehicle Information Center Setup NUMBER: 08-002-09 GROUP: Electrical DATE: February 4, 2009 THIS BULLETIN SUPERSEDES TECHNICAL SERVICE BULLETIN 08-014-07, DATED JULY 11, 2007, WHICH SHOULD BE REMOVED FROM YOUR FILES. ALL REVISIONS ARE HIGHLIGHTED WITH **ASTERISKS** AND INCLUDES ADDITIONAL YEARS AND MODELS. SUBJECT: Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) Oil Change Indicator System - Dealer Preferences During Prep MODELS: 2008 (DR) Ram Truck **2009 (HB) Durango** **2009 (HG) Aspen** **2009 (JC) Journey** **2008 - 2009 (KA) Nitro** **2008 - 2009 (KK) Liberty** **2009 (LC) Challenger** **2008 - 2009 (LX) 300 / Magnum / Charger** **2008 - 2009 (RI) Caravan / Town & Country** NOTE: This Bulletin applies to vehicles equipped with a programmable EVIC. DISCUSSION: **Many models now include an oil change indicator system**. This system displays an "Oil Change Required" or "Oil Change" message at appropriate intervals on the instrument cluster. The vehicles listed above may be equipped with a programmable display on the Electronic Vehicle Information Center, (EVIC). The "Oil Change Required message may also include the dealerships name and phone number which can be programmed into the vehicle with the StarSCAN(R) or StarMOBILE(R) scan tool. NOTE: **Other vehicles may be added at any time. Dealers can determine if the feature is available by following the procedures below. If Enable/Disable Dealer Contact Information is active, the feature can be used to enter the servicing dealer's information.** The following procedure describes the steps to add, delete or change a dealership name and phone number on the display. NOTE: If NOT programmed during vehicle prep, customer approval MUST be obtained before adding or changing this information. NOTE: When performing this Procedure, the software release level in the StarSCAN(R) or StarMOBILE(R); must be programmed with the latest level software. The software release level is visible in the blue header at the top of the StarSCAN(R) or StarMOBILE(R) screen. 1. Connect the StarSCAN(R) or StarMOBILE(R). (in Pass-Through Mode) NOTE: To use the StarMOBILE(R) in Pass-Through Mode requires that StarMOBILE(R) be connected to the dealership network via a wired or wireless connection. For more information on how to use the StarMOBILE(R) in Pass-Through Mode, see the StarMOBILE(R) training tutorials available on DealerCONNECT > Service > Repair > StarSCAN(R) and StarMOBILE(R) Tools link or at the website. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Instruments - Vehicle Information Center Setup > Page 14503 2. From the Home Screen, enter "ECU VIEW or "VEHICLE PREP". 3. Select "CCN". 4. Select "Misc. Functions". 5. Select "Enable/Disable Dealer Contact Information". 6. Select "Enable" or "Disable" as desired. 7. If enabled, select "Program Dealer Contact Information" and follow on screen prompts. 8. "Reset will cause display to read: "Contact Dealer" as default. 9. Select finish to exit. POLICY: Information Only Disclaimer: This bulletin is supplied as technical information only and is not an authorization for repair. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 14504 Driver/Vehicle Information Display: Locations Component ID: 204 Component : MODULE-ELECTRONIC OVERHEAD Connector: Name : MODULE-ELECTRONIC OVERHEAD Color : BLACK # of pins : 6 Qualifier : (EXCEPT BASE) Pin Circuit Description 1-2 A114 18GY/RD FUSED B(+) 3 D55 20WT/OR CAN B BUS (+) 4 D54 20WT CAN B BUS (-) 5 Z13 20BK/WT GROUND 6-- Component Location - 53 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 14505 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Driver/Vehicle Information Display: Diagram Information and Instructions Warnings WARNINGS - GENERAL WARNINGS provide information to prevent personal injury and vehicle damage. Below is a list of general warnings that should be followed any time a vehicle is being serviced. WARNING: Always wear safety glasses for eye protection. WARNING: Use safety stands anytime a procedure requires being under a vehicle. WARNING: Be sure that the ignition switch always is in the off position, unless the procedure requires it to be on. WARNING: Set the parking brake when working on any vehicle. An automatic transmission should be in park. A manual transmission should be in neutral. WARNING: Operate the engine only in a well-ventilated area. WARNING: Keep away from moving parts when the engine is running, especially the fan and belts. WARNING: To prevent serious burns, avoid contact with hot parts such as the radiator, exhaust manifold(s), tail pipe, catalytic converter and muffler. WARNING: Do not allow flame or sparks near the battery. Gases are always present in and around the battery. WARNING: Always remove rings, watches, loose hanging jewelry and avoid loose clothing. How to Use Wiring Diagrams DESCRIPTION - HOW TO USE WIRING DIAGRAMS DaimlerChrysler Corporation wiring diagrams are designed to provide information regarding the vehicles wiring content. In order to effectively use the wiring diagrams to diagnose and repair DaimlerChrysler Corporation vehicles, it is important to understand all of their features and characteristics. Diagrams are arranged such that the power (B+) side of the circuit is placed near the top of the page, and the ground (B-) side of the circuit is placed near the bottom of the page. All switches, components, and modules are shown in the at rest position with the doors closed and the key removed from the ignition. Components are shown two ways. A solid line around a component indicates that the component is complete. A dashed line around the component indicates that the component is being shown is not complete. Incomplete components have a reference number to indicate the page where the component is shown complete. It is important to realize that no attempt is made on the diagrams to represent components and wiring as they appear on the vehicle. For example, a short piece of wire is treated the same as a long one. In addition, switches and other components are shown as simply as possible, with regard to function only. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14508 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14509 SYMBOLS International symbols are used throughout the wiring diagrams. These symbols are consistent with those being used around the world. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14510 TERMINOLOGY This is a list of terms and definitions used in the wiring diagrams. LHD - Left Hand Drive Vehicles RHD - Right Hand Drive Vehicles ATX - Automatic Transmissions-Front Wheel Drive MTX Manual Transmissions-Front Wheel Drive Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14511 AT - Automatic Transmissions-Rear Wheel Drive MT - Manual Transmissions-Rear Wheel Drive SOHC - Single Over Head Cam Engine DOHC - Double Over Head Cam Engine Export - Vehicles Built For Sale In Markets Other Than North America Except Export - Vehicles Built For Sale In North America Circuit Functions DESCRIPTION - CIRCUIT FUNCTIONS All circuits in the diagrams use an alpha/numeric code to identify the wire and it's function. To identify which circuit code applies to a system, refer to the Circuit Identification Code Chart. This chart shows the main circuits only and does not show the secondary codes that may apply to some models. Circuit Information DESCRIPTION - CIRCUIT INFORMATION Each wire shown in the diagrams contains a code which identifies the main circuit, a specific part of the main circuit, gage of wire, and color. An example would be A 2 18 LB/YL. This is a Battery Feed circuit, level two, eighteen gauge, light blue with a yellow tracer. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14512 Connector, Ground and Splice Information DESCRIPTION - CONNECTOR, GROUND AND SPLICE INFORMATION CAUTION: Not all connectors are serviced. Some connectors are serviced only with a harness. A typical example might be the Supplemental Restraint System connectors. Always check parts availability before attempting a repair. IDENTIFICATION In-line connectors are identified by a number, as follows: - In-line connectors located in the engine compartment are C100 series numbers. - In-line connectors located in the instrument panel area are C200 series numbers. - In-line connectors located in the body are C300 series numbers. - Jumper harness connectors are C400 series numbers. - Grounds and ground connectors are identified with a "G" and follow the same series numbering as the in-line connectors. - Splices are identified with an "S" and follow the same series numbering as the in-line connectors. In addition, S001-S099 numbers are located in the engine compartment. - Component connectors are identified by the component name instead of a number. Multiple connectors on a component use a C1, C2, etc. identifier. LOCATIONS Vehicle/Locations contains the master connector/ground/splice location index charts with hyperlinks to the applicable location illustrations. The illustrations contain the connector name (or number)/ground number/splice number and component identification. The abbreviation T/O is used in the component location section to indicate a point in which the wiring harness branches out to a component. The abbreviation N/S means Not Shown in the illustrations Section Identification and Information DESCRIPTION - SECTION IDENTIFICATION AND INFORMATION The wiring diagrams are grouped into individual sections. If a component is most likely found in a particular group, it will be shown complete (all wires, Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14513 connectors, and pins) within that group. For example, the Auto Shutdown Relay is most likely to be found in Powertrain Management, so it is shown there complete. It can, however, be shown partially in another group if it contains some associated wiring. Splice diagrams show the entire splice and provide references to other sections the splices serves. Splice Information only contains splice diagrams that are not shown in their entirety somewhere else in the wiring diagrams. Connector Pin-Outs shows each connector and the circuits involved with that connector. The connectors are identified using the name/number on the diagram pages. Removal REMOVAL 1. Disconnect battery. 2. Release Connector Lock (2). 3. Disconnect the connector (3) being repaired from its mating half/component. 4. Remove the dress cover (if applicable) (1). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14514 5. Release the Secondary Terminal Lock, if required (1). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14515 6. Position the connector locking finger away from the terminal using the proper special tool. Pull on the wire to remove the terminal from the connector. Installation Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14516 INSTALLATION 1. Insert the removed terminal in the same cavity on the repair connector. 2. Repeat steps for each terminal in the connector, being sure that all wires are inserted into the proper cavities. For additional connector pin-out identification, refer to the wiring diagrams. 3. When the connector is re-assembled, the secondary terminal lock must be placed in the locked position to prevent terminal push out. 4. Replace dress cover (if applicable). 5. Connect connector to its mating half/component. 6. Connect battery and test all affected systems. Removal REMOVAL 1. Disconnect the battery. 2. Locate the diode in the harness, and remove the protective covering. 3. Remove the diode from the harness, pay attention to the current flow direction (1) (2) (3). Installation INSTALLATION 1. Remove the insulation from the wires in the harness. Only remove enough insulation to solder in the new diode. 2. Install the new diode in the harness, making sure current flow is correct. If necessary, refer to the appropriate wiring diagram for current flow. 3. Solder the connection together using rosin core type solder only. Do not use acid core solder. 4. Tape the diode to the harness using electrical tape. Make sure the diode is completely sealed from the elements. 5. Re-connect the battery and test affected systems. Removal REMOVAL 1. Follow steps for removing terminals described in the connector removal section. 2. Cut the wire 6 inches from the back of the connector. Installation INSTALLATION 1. Select a wire from the terminal repair kit that best matches the color and gage of the wire being repaired. 2. Cut the repair wire to the proper length and remove one-half (1/2) inch of insulation. 3. Splice the repair wire to the wire harness (see wire splicing procedure). See: Service Procedures/Wire Splicing 4. Insert the repaired wire into the connector. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14517 5. Install the connector locking wedge, if required, and reconnect the connector to its mating half/component. 6. Re-tape the wire harness starting at 1-1/2 inches behind the connector and 2 inches past the repair. 7. Connect battery and test all affected systems. Wire Splicing STANDARD PROCEDURE - WIRE SPLICING When splicing a wire, it is important that the correct gage be used as shown in the wiring diagrams. 1. Remove one-half (1/2) inch of insulation from each wire that needs to be spliced. 2. Place a piece of adhesive lined heat shrink tubing on one side of the wire. Make sure the tubing will be long enough to cover and seal the entire repair area. 3. Place the strands of wire overlapping each other inside of the splice clip (1). 4. Using crimping tool (1), Mopar p/n 05019912AA, crimp the splice clip and wires together. 5. Solder (3) the connection (2) together using rosin core type solder (1) only. CAUTION: DO NOT USE ACID CORE SOLDER. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14518 6. Center the heat shrink tubing (2) over the joint and heat using a heat gun. Heat the joint until the tubing is tightly sealed and sealant (1) comes out of both ends of the tubing. Special Tools WIRING/TERMINAL PROBING TOOL PACKAGE 6807 TERMINAL PICK TOOL SET 6680 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14519 TERMINAL REMOVING TOOLS 6932 AND 8638 TERMINAL REMOVING TOOL 6934 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14520 Driver/Vehicle Information Display: Diagnostic Aids Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) Sensitive Devices STANDARD PROCEDURE - ELECTROSTATIC DISCHARGE (ESD) SENSITIVE DEVICES All ESD sensitive components are solid state and a symbol is used to indicate this. When handling any component with this symbol, comply with the following procedures to reduce the possibility of electrostatic charge build up on the body and inadvertent discharge into the component. If it is not known whether the part is ESD sensitive, assume that it is. 1. Always touch a known good ground before handling the part. This should be repeated while handling the part and more frequently after sliding across a seat, sitting down from a standing position, or walking a distance. 2. Avoid touching electrical terminals of the part, unless instructed to do so by a written procedure. 3. When using a voltmeter, be sure to connect the ground lead first. 4. Do not remove the part from it's protective packing until it is time to install the part. 5. Before removing the part from it's package, ground the package to a known good ground on the vehicle. Testing Of Voltage Potential STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING OF VOLTAGE POTENTIAL 1. Connect the ground lead of a voltmeter to a known good ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the voltmeter to the selected test point. The vehicle ignition may need to be turned ON to check voltage. Refer to the appropriate test procedure. Testing For Continuity Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14521 STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING FOR CONTINUITY 1. Remove the fuse (1) for the circuit being checked or, disconnect the battery. 2. Connect one lead of the ohmmeter to one side of the circuit being tested 3. Connect the other lead to the other end of the circuit being tested. Low or no resistance means good continuity. Testing For A Short To Ground STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING FOR A SHORT TO GROUND 1. Remove the fuse and disconnect all items involved with the fuse. 2. Connect a test light or a voltmeter across the terminals of the fuse. 3. Starting at the fuse block, wiggle the wiring harness about six to eight inches apart and watch the voltmeter/test lamp. 4. If the voltmeter registers voltage or the test lamp glows, there is a short to ground in that general area of the wiring harness. Testing For A Short To Ground On Fuses Powering Several Loads STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING FOR A SHORT TO GROUND ON FUSES POWERING SEVERAL LOADS 1. Refer to the wiring diagrams and disconnect or isolate all items on the suspected fused circuits. 2. Replace the blown fuse. 3. Supply power to the fuse by turning ON the ignition switch or re-connecting the battery. 4. Start connecting or energizing the items in the fuse circuit one at a time. When the fuse blows the circuit with the short to ground has been isolated. Testing For A Voltage Drop STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING FOR A VOLTAGE DROP Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14522 1. Connect the positive lead of the voltmeter to the side of the circuit closest to the battery. 2. Connect the other lead of the voltmeter to the other side of the switch, component or circuit. 3. Operate the item. 4. The voltmeter will show the difference in voltage between the two points. Troubleshooting Wiring Problems DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING - WIRING HARNESS TROUBLESHOOTING TOOLS When diagnosing a problem in an electrical circuit there are several common tools necessary. These tools are listed and explained below. - Jumper Wire - This is a test wire used to connect two points of a circuit. It can be used to bypass an open in a circuit. WARNING: Never use a jumper wire across a load, such as a motor, connected between a battery feed and ground. - Voltmeter - Used to check for voltage on a circuit. Always connect the black lead to a known good ground and the red lead to the positive side of the circuit. CAUTION: Most of the electrical components used in today's vehicles are Solid State. When checking voltages in these circuits, use a meter with a 10 - megohm or greater impedance rating. - Ohmmeter - Used to check the resistance between two points of a circuit. Low or no resistance in a circuit means good continuity. CAUTION: Most of the electrical components used in today's vehicles are Solid State. When checking resistance in these circuits use a meter with a 10 - megohm or greater impedance rating. In addition, make sure the power is disconnected from the circuit. Circuits that are powered up by the vehicle's electrical system can cause damage to the equipment and provide false readings. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14523 - Probing Tools - These tools are used for probing terminals in connectors. Select the proper size tool from Special Tool Package 6807, and insert the probing end (2) into the terminal being tested. Use the other end of the tool (1) to insert the meter probe. INTERMITTENT AND POOR CONNECTIONS Most intermittent electrical problems are caused by faulty electrical connections or wiring. It is also possible for a sticking component or relay to cause a problem. Before condemning a component or wiring assembly, check the following items. - Connectors are fully seated - Spread terminals, or terminal push out - Terminals in the wiring assembly are fully seated into the connector/component and locked into position - Dirt or corrosion on the terminals. Any amount of corrosion or dirt could cause an intermittent problem - Damaged connector/component casing exposing the item to dirt or moisture - Wire insulation that has rubbed through causing a short to ground - Some or all of the wiring strands broken inside of the insulation - Wiring broken inside of the insulation TROUBLESHOOTING WIRING PROBLEMS When troubleshooting wiring problems there are six steps which can aid in the procedure. The steps are listed and explained below. Always check for non-factory items added to the vehicle before doing any diagnosis. If the vehicle is equipped with these items, disconnect them to verify these add-on items are not the cause of the problem. 1. Verify the problem. 2. Verify any related symptoms. Do this by performing operational checks on components that are in the same circuit. Refer to the wiring diagrams. 3. Analyze the symptoms. Use the wiring diagrams to determine what the circuit is doing, where the problem most likely is occurring and where the diagnosis will continue. 4. Isolate the problem area. 5. Repair the problem area. 6. Verify the proper operation. For this step, check for proper operation of all items on the repaired circuit. Refer to the wiring diagrams. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14524 Driver/Vehicle Information Display: Connector Views Component ID: 204 Component : MODULE-ELECTRONIC OVERHEAD Connector: Name : MODULE-ELECTRONIC OVERHEAD Color : BLACK # of pins : 6 Qualifier : (EXCEPT BASE) Pin Circuit Description 1-2 A114 18GY/RD FUSED B(+) 3 D55 20WT/OR CAN B BUS (+) 4 D54 20WT CAN B BUS (-) 5 Z13 20BK/WT GROUND 6-- Component Location - 53 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14525 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14526 Driver/Vehicle Information Display: Electrical Diagrams PLEASE NOTE: Some diagrams may appear to be missing because of gaps in the number sequences. These "gaps" are actually for diagrams that do not apply to the vehicle model selected. 8w-49-02 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14527 8w-49-03 Other Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by number (i.e. 8W-70-2, etc.) within these diagrams can be found at the vehicle level under Diagrams by Number. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Number Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Driver/Vehicle Information Display: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION NOTE: The Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) module is sometimes referred to as Electronic Overhead Module (EOM) for the purposes of scan tool and diagnostic information naming. Please treat the EVIC and EOM as one and the same when diagnosing the vehicle. The Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) is located in the overhead console and consists of the following components: - HomeLink(R) transceiver (3) - if equipped - Vacuum-Fluorescent Display (VFD) (6) - Push button function switches (1, 2, 3, 4 and 5) - Replaceable light bulbs to illuminate the push button function switches This system conveniently allows the driver to select a variety of useful information by pressing the function buttons. The EVIC displays information related to the following: - System Status - Vehicle information warning message displays - Tire Pressure Monitor System - If Equipped - Personal Settings (customer programmable features) - Compass display - Outside temperature display - Trip computer functions The EVIC system is comprised of several different components. Those components are: - Instrument Cluster (also known as Cab Compartment Node (CCN)) - Ambient Temperature Sensor - EVIC Module - Controller Area Network (CAN) Data Bus circuit The individual components of the EVIC module are not serviced separately and if damaged or inoperative, must be replaced as a unit. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 14530 Driver/Vehicle Information Display: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) uses both non-switched and ignition switched sources of battery current so that some of its features remain operational at any time, while others may only operate with the ignition switch in the On position. When the ignition switch is turned to the On position, the EVIC display will return to the last function being displayed before the ignition was turned to the Off position. The EVIC system is comprised of several different components that communicate over the Controller Area Network (CAN) Data Bus. If the system is inoperative a scan tool and the appropriate diagnostic information must be used to diagnose the system. The EVIC push buttons are used to operate the different functions of the EVIC system. Pressing and releasing the MENU button (1) will change the mode displayed to one of the Personal Settings. The STEP button (2) is used to make a selection from the Personal Settings displayed at that time. Pressing and releasing the C/T (compass/temperature) button (5) will cause the EVIC to return to the compass/temperature/trip computer display mode from any other mode. From the compass/temperature/trip computer display mode the STEP button (2) is used to scroll through and make selections in the Trip Functions. Pressing and releasing the RESET button (4) resets the trip computer screen displayed at that time. EVIC DISPLAY MODES SYSTEM STATUS MODE Displays warnings and user interaction messages. Critical text warnings will be displayed until the failure is corrected. Non-critical text warnings will be displayed for 60 seconds. The driver can scroll to view multiple messages by using the STEP button. When the appropriate conditions exist, the EVIC displays the following messages: - TURN SIGNALS ON (with a continuous warning chime) - RKE BATTERY LOW (with a single chime) - PERSONAL SETTINGS NOT AVAILABLE - Vehicle Not in Park - LEFT/RIGHT FRONT DOOR AJAR (one or more, with a single chime if speed is above 1 mph) - LEFT/RIGHT REAR DOOR AJAR (one or more, with a single chime if speed is above 1 mph) - DOOR(S) AJAR (with a single chime if vehicle is in motion) - LOW WASHER FLUID (with a single chime) - SERVICE PARK ASSIST SYSTEM (with a single chime) - OIL CHANGE REQUIRED (with single chime) - LEFT FRONT TURN LAMP OUT - RIGHT FRONT TURN LAMP OUT - LEFT REAR TURN LAMP OUT - RIGHT REAR TURN LAMP OUT - SERVICE PARK ASSIST SYSTEM - CATALYST FULL SEE OWNER MANUAL - CATALYST STAT lllll 99% - CATALYST FULL SERVICE REQUIRED - SERVICE AIR FILTER - SERVICE CCV FILTER - COOLANT LOW - ESP SYSTEM DEACTIVATED Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 14531 - AUTO HIGH BEAMS ON - AUTO HIGH BEAMS OFF PERSONAL SETTINGS MODE (CUSTOMER PROGRAMMABLE FEATURES) Allows the driver to set and recall features when the transmission is in Park by pressing and releasing the MENU button until Personal Settings is displayed in the EVIC. If the transmission is not in PARK the EVIC will display NOT AVAILABLE and VEHICLE NOT IN PARK. The following personal settings can be set and recalled by pressing the STEP button: - "LANGUAGE" - When in this display you may select one of three languages for all display nomenclature, including the trip functions. Press the RESET button while in this display to select English, Espanol, or Francois. Then, as you continue, the information will display in the selected language. - "AUTO DOOR LOCKS > YES" - When ON is selected, all doors will lock automatically when the vehicle reaches a speed of 15 mph (24 km/h). To make your selection, press and release the RESET button until "ON" or "OFF" appears. - "AUTO UNLOCK ON EXIT > YES" - When ON is selected, all doors will unlock when the vehicle is stopped and the transmission is in the P (Park) or N (Neutral) position and the driver's door is opened. To make your selection, press and release the RESET button until "ON" or "OFF" appears. - "RKE UNLOCK DRV DR 1st" - When DRV DR 1st is selected, only the driver's door will unlock on the first press of the remote keyless entry unlock button. When Driver Door 1st Press is selected, you must press of the remote keyless entry unlock button twice to unlock the passenger's doors. To make your selection, press and release the RESET button until "DRV DR 1st " appears. - "RKE UNLOCK ALL DR 1ST" - When All ALL DR 1ST is selected, all of the doors will unlock on the first press of the remote keyless entry unlock button. To make your selection, press and release the RESET button until "All DR 1st" appears. - "SOUND HORN W/LOCK > YES" - When ON is selected, a short horn sound will occur when the remote keyless entry "Lock" button is pressed. This feature may be selected with or without the flash lights on lock/unlock feature. To make your selection, press and release the RESET button until "ON" or "OFF" appears. - "FLASH LIGHTS w/LOCK > YES" - When ON is selected, the front and rear turn signals will flash when the doors are locked or unlocked with the remote keyless entry transmitter. This feature may be selected with or without the sound horn on lock feature selected. To make your selection, press and release the RESET button until "ON" or "OFF" appears. - "HEAD LAMP OFF DELAY > 0 SEC" - When this feature is selected, the driver can choose to have the headlights remain on for 0, 30, 60, or 90 seconds when exiting the vehicle. To make your selection, press and release the RESET button until "0," "30," "60," or "90" appears. - "KEY OFF POWER DELAY > OFF" - When this feature is selected, the power window switches, radio, hands-free system (if equipped), DVD video system (if equipped) and power outlets will remain active for up to 60 minutes after the ignition switch is turned off. Opening a vehicle door will cancel this feature. To make your selection, press and release the RESET button until "Off," "45 sec.," "5 min.," "10 min." appears. - "ILLUMINATED APRCH > OFF" - When this feature is selected, the headlights will activate and remain on for up to 90 seconds when the doors are unlocked with the remote keyless entry transmitter. To make your selection, press and release the RESET button until "OFF," "30 sec.," "60 sec.," or "90 sec." appears. - "UNIT IN > US/METRIC" - The EVIC, odometer can be changed between English and Metric units of measure. To make your selection, press and release the RESET button until "US" or "METRIC" appears. - "COMPASS VARIANCE > 1" - Press the RESET button to change the compass variance setting. See: Compass/Service and Repair/Procedures/Electronic Vehicle Information Center - Standard Procedures/Compass Variance Adjustment - EVIC for additional information. - "COMPASS CALIBRATE > YES" - Press the RESET button to calibrate the compass. See: Compass/Service and Repair/Procedures/Electronic Vehicle Information Center - Standard Procedures/Manual Compass Calibration - EVIC for additional information. COMPASS/TEMPERATURE/TRIP COMPUTER MODE This display provides the outside temperature, one of the eight compass headings to indicate the direction the vehicle is facing, and vehicle trip information. The compass and temperature display is the normal display. When the C/T button is pressed the EVIC returns to the compass/temperature display from all other functions. The trip computer function will be displayed if the STEP button is pressed from the Compass/Temperature display mode. The trip computer displays the following information: - TRIP - Shows the total distance traveled since the last reset. To reset the TRIP function, press and hold the RESET button. - ELAPSED TIME - Shows the total elapsed time of travel since the last reset. Elapsed time will increment when the ignition switch is in the ON/RUN or START positions. - UNIT IN US/METRIC - Press the RESET button to toggle between US and METRIC. - AVG. MPG - Shows the average fuel economy since the last reset. When the fuel economy is reset, the display will show dashes for two seconds. Then the history information will be erased, and the averaging will continue from the last fuel average reading before the reset. (Example: If your Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) displays 18 AVG. MPG and the RESET button is pressed, the previous averaging history will be erased and the display will return to the 18 AVG. MPG, not to 0 AVG. MPG). The display may take several miles for the value to change dependent upon driving habits. - MI TO EMPTY (Distance To Empty) - Shows the estimated distance that can be traveled with the fuel remaining in the tank. This estimated distance is determined by a weighted average of fuel economy, according to the current fuel tank level. Distance MI TO EMPTY cannot be reset through the RESET button. When the DTE value is less than 30 miles (48 km) estimated driving distance, the DTE display will change to a text display of "LOW FUEL." This display will continue until the vehicle runs out of fuel. Adding a significant amount of fuel to the vehicle will turn Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 14532 off the "LOW FUEL" text and a new DTE value will display. UNIVERSAL GARAGE DOOR (HOMELINK(R)) TRANSCEIVER The EVIC features a driver-interactive display which includes HomeLink(R) system messages. For additional information on the HomeLink(R) transceiver See: Accessories and Optional Equipment/Garage Door Opener Transmitter/Description and Operation/Description . Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 14533 Driver/Vehicle Information Display: Testing and Inspection ELECTRONIC VEHICLE INFORMATION CENTER The Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) data is obtained from several components on the Controller Area Network (CAN) Data Bus circuit. The EVIC will not function properly if the bus messages from any of these components is not received. If no EVIC data is displayed, check the CAN Data Bus circuit communications, the Instrument Cluster (also known as Cab Compartment Node (CCN)) functions and the Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM). If the problem with the EVIC is an inaccurate or scrambled display, refer to SELF- DIAGNOSTIC TEST. If the problem with the EVIC is incorrect Vacuum Fluorescent Display (VFD) dimming levels, use a scan tool and the proper Diagnostic Procedures Information to test for the correct dimming message inputs being received from the CCN or TIPM over the CAN data bus circuit. If the problem is a no-display condition, use the following procedure. For complete circuit diagrams, refer to the appropriate wiring information. The wiring information includes wiring diagrams, proper wire and connector repair procedures, details of wire harness routing and retention, connector pin-out information and location views for the various wire harness connectors, splices and grounds. 1. Remove the overhead console from the headliner See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Console/Service and Repair/Overhead Console/Removal . 2. Inspect the Ignition Off Draw (IOD) fuse in the TIPM. If the IOD fuse is OK and in place, go to STEP 3. If not OK, repair the open IOD fuse circuit as required. 3. Check for battery voltage at the overhead console electrical connector. If OK, go to STEP 4. If not OK, Check for battery voltage at the appropriate B(+) fuse in the TIPM, repair the open fused B(+) circuit as required. 4. Turn the ignition switch to the On position. Check the fused ignition switch output circuit(s) at the overhead console electrical connector. If OK, go to STEP 5. If not OK, repair the open or shorted circuit as required. 5. Turn the ignition switch to the Off position. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. Check for continuity between the ground circuit cavity of the overhead console electrical connector and a good ground. There should be continuity. If OK, refer to SELF- DIAGNOSTIC TEST for further diagnosis of the EVIC module and the CAN data bus circuit. If not OK, repair the open ground circuit as required. SELF- DIAGNOSTIC TEST NOTE: The EVIC self - test can also be performed using a scan tool. Navigate to the Auto Self Test screen under System Tests of the scan tool and initiate the EVIC self - test. A self-diagnostic test is used to determine that the EVIC is operating properly electrically. Initiate the self-diagnostic test as follows: 1. With the ignition switch in the Off position, simultaneously depress and hold the STEP and RESET buttons while rotating the ignition switch to the Run/On position. 2. Continue to hold both buttons depressed until the EVIC enters the display segment test. In this test, all of the Vacuum Fluorescent Display (VFD) segments are lighted while the EVIC performs the following checks: Non-Volatile Memory Status (NVM) - RAM Status - ROM Status - ASIC Communication Status - Compass Status - DC Status - CAN Data Bus Communications Status NOTE: If the EVIC module is equipped with the Universal Transmitter (also known as HomeLink(R)), the module also checks "HomeLink(R) Communication Test Status". 3. Following completion of these tests, the EVIC will display one of two messages: "Self Test: FAIL" or "Self Test: PASS." In addition to the FAIL/PASS message the EVIC will display the current software version (SW V xx.xx.xxx) below the FAIL/PASS info. Press the RESET or STEP button to exit and enter normal mode. Respond to these test results as follows: If no test result message is displayed, but EVIC operation is still improper, the use of a scan tool and the proper Diagnostic Procedures Information are required for further diagnosis. - If the "Self Test: FAIL" message is displayed, the EVIC is inoperative and must be replaced. - If the "Self Test: PASS" message is displayed, the EVIC is OK, no faults are present. - If any VFD segment does not light during the display segment test, the EVIC is inoperative and must be replaced. If the first seven tests pass, the EVIC shall verify that all the required CAN bus messages are present on the CAN bus. If all required messages are present on the CAN bus, the EVIC will automatically return to normal operation after sixty seconds. The EVIC can also be returned to normal operation any time during the test by pressing the STEP , C/T , RESET or US/M buttons. NOTE: Pressing the STEP or RESET buttons during any portion of the EVIC Self - Diagnostic Test Procedure will cause the EVIC to exit diagnostics and return to compass/temperature mode. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 14534 NOTE: If the compass functions, but accuracy is suspect, it may be necessary to perform a variance adjustment. This procedure allows the compass unit to accommodate variations in the earth's magnetic field strength, based on geographic location. NOTE: If the compass reading has blanked out, and only "CAL" appears in the display, demagnetizing may be necessary to remove excessive residual magnetic fields from the vehicle. Check for stored Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) and follow the proper Diagnostic Procedures Information as needed. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures Driver/Vehicle Information Display: Procedures Manual Compass Calibration - EVIC MANUAL COMPASS CALIBRATION CAUTION: Do not place any external magnets, such as magnetic roof mount antennas, in the vicinity of the overhead console. Do not use magnetic tools when servicing the overhead console. NOTE: Whenever the compass is calibrated manually, the variance number must also be reset. See: Compass/Service and Repair/Procedures/Electronic Vehicle Information Center - Standard Procedures/Compass Variance Adjustment - EVIC for the appropriate procedure. The electronic compass unit features a self-calibrating design, which simplifies the calibration procedure. This feature automatically updates the compass calibration while the vehicle is being driven. This allows the compass unit to compensate for small changes in the residual magnetism that the vehicle may acquire during normal use. If the compass readings appear to be erratic or the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) displays "CAL", perform the following manual calibration procedure. Also, any time EVIC service replacement components are installed, they must be calibrated using this procedure. Do not attempt to calibrate the compass near large metal objects such as other vehicles, large buildings, or bridges; or, near overhead or underground power lines. Calibrate the compass manually as follows: 1. Turn the ignition switch to the On/Run position. Press and release the MENU push button (1) until "Personal Settings" is displayed. 2. Press the STEP push button (4) until "Calibrate Compass YES" is displayed. 3. Momentarily depress and release the RESET push button (2) to initiate the calibration procedure. The message "CAL will appear in the Compass/Temperature display. 4. Slowly drive the vehicle on a level surface, away from large metal objects and power lines, through one or two complete circles not exceeding 8 km/h (5 mph). The "CAL" message will disappear from the display to indicate that the compass is now calibrated. NOTE: A blank compass display indicates that vehicle degaussing (demagnetizing) may be necessary. NOTE: If the "CAL" message remains in the display, either there is excessive magnetism near the compass, or the EVIC is inoperative. Attempt the calibration procedure at least one more time before performing EVIC diagnosis. NOTE: If the wrong direction is still indicated in the compass display, the area selected for calibration may be too close to a strong magnetic field. Repeat the manual calibration procedure in another location. Compass Demagnetizing - EVIC COMPASS DEMAGNETIZING Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 14537 A degaussing tool (Special Tool 6029) is used to demagnetize, or degauss, the overhead console forward mounting screw and the roof panel above the overhead console. Equivalent units must be rated as continuous duty for 110/115 volts and 60 Hz. They must also have a field strength of over 350 gauss at 7 millimeters (0.25 inch) beyond the tip of the probe. To demagnetize the roof panel and the overhead console forward mounting screw, proceed as follows: 1. Be certain that the ignition switch is in the Off position, before you begin the demagnetizing procedure. 2. Connect the degaussing tool to an electrical outlet, while keeping the tool at least 61 centimeters (2 feet) away from the compass unit. 3. Slowly approach the head of the overhead console forward mounting screw with the degaussing tool connected. 4. Contact the head of the screw with the plastic coated tip of the degaussing tool for about two seconds. 5. With the degaussing tool still energized, slowly back it away from the screw. When the tip of the tool is at least 61 centimeters (2 feet) from the screw head, disconnect the tool. To demagnetize the roof panel proceed as follows: 6. Place a piece of paper approximately 22 by 28 centimeters (8.5 by 11 inches), oriented on the vehicle lengthwise from front to rear, on the center line of the roof at the windshield header. The purpose of the paper is to protect the roof panel from scratches, and to define the area to be demagnetized. 7. Connect the degaussing tool to an electrical outlet, while keeping the tool at least 61 centimeters (2 feet) away from the compass unit. 8. Slowly approach the center line of the roof panel at the windshield header, with the degaussing tool connected. 9. Contact the roof panel with the plastic coated tip of the degaussing tool. Be sure that the template is in place to avoid scratching the roof panel. Using a slow, back-and-forth sweeping motion, and allowing 13 millimeters (0.50 inch) between passes, move the tool at least 11 centimeters (4 inches) to each side of the roof center line, and 28 centimeters (11 inches) back from the windshield header. 10. With the degaussing tool still energized, slowly back it away from the roof panel. When the tip of the tool is at least 61 centimeters (2 feet) from the roof panel, disconnect the tool. 11. Calibrate the compass, See: Compass/Service and Repair/Procedures/Electronic Vehicle Information Center - Standard Procedures/Manual Compass Calibration - EVIC and adjust the compass variance, See: Compass/Service and Repair/Procedures/Electronic Vehicle Information Center - Standard Procedures/Compass Variance Adjustment - EVIC . Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 14538 Compass Variance Adjustment - EVIC COMPASS VARIANCE ADJUSTMENT Compass variance, also known as magnetic declination, is the difference in angle between magnetic north and true geographic north. In some geographic locations, the difference between magnetic and geographic north is great enough to cause the compass to give false readings. If this problem occurs, the compass variance must be set. NOTE: If the vehicle is taken on long trips into a new variance zone the compass function may be effected. Compass variance may need to be adjusted to the new zone number to function properly. NOTE: The default for the compass variance from the factory is 8. To set the compass variance: 1. Using the Variance Settings Map, find your geographic location and note the zone number. 2. Turn the ignition switch to the On/Run position. Press and release the MENU push button (1) until "Personal Settings" is displayed. 3. Press the STEP push button (4) until "Compass Variance" is displayed. 4. Momentarily depress and release the RESET push button (2) to toggle through the zone numbers (1-15), until the zone number for your geographic location appears in the display. 5. Momentarily depress and release the C/T push button (5) to enter the displayed zone number into the compass unit memory. 6. Confirm that the correct directions are now indicated by the compass. Electronic Vehicle Information Center PERFORM SERVICE INDICATOR - RESET Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 14539 The "Perform Service" message will display on the Electronic Vehicle Information Center each time you turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position to indicate a emission maintenance is required. To reset the "Perform Service" indicator system (after performing the scheduled maintenance) refer to the following procedure: - 1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position (Do not start engine). - 2. Press and release the brake pedal two times. - 3. Fully depress the accelerator pedal slowly two times within 10 seconds. - 4. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF/LOCK position. NOTE: If the indicator message illumination when you start the vehicle, the "Perform Service" indicator did not reset. If necessary repeat this procedure. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 14540 Driver/Vehicle Information Display: Removal and Replacement Electronic Vehicle Information Center ELECTRONIC VEHICLE INFORMATION CENTER 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. 2. Remove the overhead console (3) from the headliner See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Console/Service and Repair/Overhead Console/Removal . 3. Remove the screws (2) that secure the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) (3) to the overhead console housing (1). 4. Remove the EVIC (3) from the overhead console housing (1). Bulb - EVIC Control BULB - EVIC CONTROL WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury on vehicles equipped with airbags, disable the Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, airbag, seat belt tensioner, impact sensor, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the SRS. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment. NOTE: There are provisions for up to four bulb/bulb holder units on the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) circuit board. The two outboard bulbs illuminate the EVIC push buttons, while the two center bulbs illuminate the optional universal transmitter push buttons. Therefore, the center bulb locations are only populated on vehicles equipped with the optional universal transmitter. 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. 2. Remove the overhead console (1) from the headliner. See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Console/Service and Repair/Overhead Console/Removal . 3. Use a small thin-bladed screwdriver to rotate the bulb holder (3) counterclockwise about 30 degrees to unlock it from the keyed opening in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) unit (2) circuit board. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 14541 4. Pull the bulb holder and bulb straight out of the circuit board. Electronic Vehicle Information Center ELECTRONIC VEHICLE INFORMATION CENTER NOTE: If a new Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) has been installed, the compass will have to be calibrated and the variance set. See: Compass/Service and Repair/Procedures/Electronic Vehicle Information Center - Standard Procedures/Manual Compass Calibration - EVIC and See: Compass/Service and Repair/Procedures/Electronic Vehicle Information Center - Standard Procedures/Compass Variance Adjustment - EVIC for the appropriate procedures. 1. Position the EVIC (3) onto the overhead console housing (1). 2. Install the screws (2) that secure the EVIC (3) to the overhead console housing (1). Tighten the screws to 2 Nm (20 in. lbs.). 3. Install the overhead console (1) onto the headliner See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Console/Service and Repair/Overhead Console/Installation . 4. Reconnect the battery negative cable. Bulb - EVIC Control BULB - EVIC CONTROL WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury on vehicles equipped with airbags, disable the Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, airbag, seat belt tensioner, impact sensor, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the SRS. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment. CAUTION: Always use the correct bulb size and type for replacement. An incorrect bulb size or type may overheat and cause damage to the lamp, the socket or the lamp wiring. NOTE: There are provisions for up to four bulb/bulb holder units on the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) circuit board. The two outboard bulbs illuminate the EVIC push buttons, while the two center bulbs illuminate the optional universal transmitter push buttons. Therefore, the center bulb locations are only populated on vehicles equipped with the optional universal transmitter. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 14542 1. Align the bulb holder and bulb (3) with the keyed opening in the circuit board of the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) (2). 2. Insert the bulb holder and bulb straight into the circuit board until the bulb holder is firmly seated. 3. Using a small thin-bladed screwdriver, rotate the bulb holder clockwise about 30 degrees on the circuit board to lock it into place. 4. Reinstall the overhead console (1) onto the headliner. See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Console/Service and Repair/Overhead Console/Installation . 5. Reconnect the battery negative cable. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Electronic Throttle Control Indicator > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Electronic Throttle Control Indicator: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION An Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) indicator is standard equipment on all instrument clusters. However, on vehicles not equipped with the optional 5.7 liter gasoline engine, this indicator is electronically disabled. This indicator is located in the lower portion of the tachometer dial face in the instrument cluster overlay. The ETC indicator consists of a stencil-like cutout of the International Control and Display Symbol icon for Electronic Throttle Control in the opaque layer of the instrument cluster overlay. The dark outer layer of the overlay prevents the indicator from being clearly visible when it is not illuminated. A red Light Emitting Diode (LED) behind the cutout in the opaque layer of the overlay causes the indicator to appear in red through the translucent outer layer of the overlay when it is illuminated from behind by the LED, which is soldered onto the instrument cluster electronic circuit board. The ETC indicator is serviced as a unit with the instrument cluster. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Electronic Throttle Control Indicator > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 14547 Electronic Throttle Control Indicator: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) indicator gives an indication to the vehicle operator when the ETC system, or a circuit or component of the system is ineffective. The ETC indicator is controlled by a transistor on the instrument cluster circuit board based upon cluster programming and electronic messages received by the cluster from the Powertrain Control Module (PCM) over the Controller Area Network (CAN) data bus. The ETC indicator Light Emitting Diode (LED) is completely controlled by the instrument cluster logic circuit, and that logic will only allow this indicator to operate when the instrument cluster receives a battery current input on the fused ignition switch output (run-start) circuit. Therefore, the LED will always be OFF when the ignition switch is in any position except ON or START. The LED only illuminates when it is provided a path to ground by the instrument cluster transistor. The instrument cluster will turn ON the ETC indicator for the following reasons: - Bulb Test - Each time the ignition switch is turned to the ON position the ETC indicator is illuminated for about six seconds. The entire bulb test is a function of the PCM. - ETC Indicator Lamp-On Message - Each time the cluster receives an electronic ETC indicator lamp-ON message from the PCM, the ETC indicator will be illuminated. The indicator can be flashed ON and OFF, or illuminated solid, as dictated by the PCM message. The indicator remains illuminated solid or continues to flash for about 12 seconds or until the cluster receives a lamp-OFF message from the PCM, whichever is longer. If the indicator is illuminated solid with the engine running the vehicle will usually remain drivable. If the indicator is flashing with the engine running the vehicle may require towing. A flashing indicator means the ETC system requires immediate service. The indicator will be extinguished when the ignition switch is turned to the OFF position. - Communication Error - If the cluster receives no lamp-ON or lamp-OFF messages from the PCM for three consecutive seconds, the ETC indicator is illuminated. The indicator remains illuminated until the cluster receives a single lamp-OFF message from the PCM. - Actuator Test - Each time the cluster is put through the actuator test, the ETC indicator will be turned ON, then OFF again during the bulb check portion of the test to confirm the functionality of the LED and the cluster control circuitry. The actuator test illumination of the ETC indicator is a function of the PCM. The PCM continually monitors the ETC system circuits and sensors to decide whether the system is in good operating condition. The PCM then sends the proper lamp-ON or lamp-OFF message to the ElectroMechanical Instrument Cluster (EMIC) (also known as the Cab Compartment Node/CCN). If the PCM sends a lamp-ON message after the bulb test, it indicates that the PCM has detected an ETC system malfunction or that the ETC system is ineffective. The PCM will store a Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) for any malfunction it detects. Each time the ETC indicator fails to illuminate due to an open or short in the cluster ETC indicator circuit, the cluster sends a message notifying the PCM of the condition, then the EMIC and the PCM will each store a DTC. For proper diagnosis of the ETC system, the PCM, the EMIC, the CAN data bus or the electronic communication related to ETC indicator operation a diagnostic scan tool is required. Refer to the appropriate diagnostic information. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Fog/Driving Lamp Indicator > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Fog/Driving Lamp Indicator: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION A fog lamp indicator is standard equipment on all instrument clusters. However, on vehicles not equipped with optional fog lamps, this indicator is electronically disabled. This indicator is located within the odometer/trip odometer Vacuum Fluorescent Display (VFD) unit. The fog lamp indicator consists of the International Control and Display Symbol icon for Front Fog Light in the lower left corner of the VFD unit. The VFD unit is soldered onto the instrument cluster electronic circuit board, and is visible through a window with a smoked clear lens located on the lower edge of the speedometer gauge dial face of the cluster overlay. The dark lens over the VFD prevents the icon from being clearly visible when it is not illuminated. The fog lamp indicator icon appears in a blue-green color and at the same lighting level as the odometer information when it is illuminated by the instrument cluster electronic circuit board. During daylight hours (exterior lamps are OFF) the VFD unit is illuminated at full brightness for clear visibility. At night (exterior lamps are ON), the VFD unit lighting level is adjusted with the other cluster illumination lamps using the panel lamps dimmer function of the interior lighting thumbwheel on the headlamp switch. However, a PARADE mode position of the thumbwheel allows the VFD unit to be illuminated at full brightness if the exterior lamps are turned ON during daylight hours. The fog lamp indicator is serviced as a unit with the VFD unit in the instrument cluster. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Fog/Driving Lamp Indicator > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 14552 Fog/Driving Lamp Indicator: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The fog lamp indicator gives an indication to the vehicle operator whenever the optional fog lamps are illuminated. This indicator is controlled by the instrument cluster circuit board based upon cluster programming and electronic messages received by the cluster from the Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) over the Controller Area Network (CAN) data bus. The fog lamp indicator is completely controlled by the instrument cluster logic circuit, and that logic will only allow this indicator to operate when the instrument cluster receives a battery current input on the fused ignition switch output (run-start) circuit. Therefore, the indicator will always be OFF when the ignition switch is in any position except ON or START. The indicator only illuminates when it is energized by the instrument cluster logic circuit. The instrument cluster will turn ON the fog lamp indicator for the following reasons: - Fog Indicator Lamp-On Message - Each time the cluster receives an electronic fog indicator lamp-ON message from the TIPM indicating the fog lamp circuit is energized, the fog lamp indicator will be illuminated. The indicator remains illuminated until the cluster receives a lamp-OFF message from the TIPM, until the ignition switch is turned to the OFF position or until the exterior lamp load shedding (battery saver) timed interval expires, whichever occurs first. - Actuator Test - Each time the cluster is put through the actuator test, the fog lamp indicator will be turned ON, then OFF again during the VFD portion of the test to confirm the functionality of the VFD and the cluster control circuitry. The TIPM continually monitors electronic exterior lighting switch status messages from the ElectroMechanical Instrument Cluster (EMIC) (also known as the Cab Compartment Node/CCN) to determine the appropriate outputs to the fog lamps. The TIPM activates or deactivates the fog lamp circuit then sends the proper lamp-ON or lamp-OFF message back to the EMIC. For further diagnosis of the fog lamp indicator or the instrument cluster circuitry that controls the indicator, Refer to appropriate testing. For proper diagnosis of the fog lamp system, the TIPM, the EMIC, the CAN data bus or the electronic communication related to fog lamp indicator operation a diagnostic scan tool is required. Refer to the appropriate diagnostic information. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Four Wheel Drive Indicator Lamp > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Four Wheel Drive Indicator Lamp: Description and Operation Description 4WD Auto Indicator 4WD AUTO INDICATOR A 4WD auto indicator is standard equipment on all instrument clusters. However, on vehicles not equipped with the optional four-wheel drive system and electronically shifted transfer case, this indicator is electronically disabled. The 4WD auto indicator is located on the right side of the instrument cluster, to the right of the oil pressure gauge. The 4WD auto indicator consists of a stencil-like cutout of the text 4WD AUTO in the opaque layer of the instrument cluster overlay. The dark outer layer of the overlay prevents the indicator from being clearly visible when it is not illuminated. An amber Light Emitting Diode (LED) behind the cutout in the opaque layer of the overlay causes the indicator to appear in amber through the translucent outer layer of the overlay when it is illuminated from behind by the LED, which is soldered onto the instrument cluster electronic circuit board. When the exterior lighting is turned ON, the illumination intensity of the 4WD auto indicator is dimmable, which is adjusted along with the cluster general illumination lighting using the panel lamps dimmer thumbwheel on the headlamp switch. The 4WD auto indicator is serviced as a unit with the instrument cluster. 4WD Indicator 4WD INDICATOR Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Four Wheel Drive Indicator Lamp > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 14557 A 4WD indicator is standard equipment on all instrument clusters. However, on vehicles not equipped with an optional four-wheel drive system, this indicator is electronically disabled. The 4WD indicator is located on the right side of the instrument cluster, to the right of the oil pressure gauge. The 4WD indicator consists of a stencil-like cutout of the text 4WD in the opaque layer of the instrument cluster overlay. The dark outer layer of the overlay prevents the indicator from being clearly visible when it is not illuminated. An amber Light Emitting Diode (LED) behind the cutout in the opaque layer of the overlay causes the indicator to appear in amber through the translucent outer layer of the overlay when it is illuminated from behind by the LED, which is soldered onto the instrument cluster electronic circuit board. When the exterior lighting is turned ON, the illumination intensity of the 4WD indicator is dimmable, which is adjusted along with the cluster general illumination lighting using the panel lamps dimmer thumbwheel on the headlamp switch. The 4WD indicator is serviced as a unit with the instrument cluster. 4 Low Indicator 4 LOW INDICATOR A 4 low indicator is standard equipment on all instrument clusters. However, on vehicles not equipped with the optional four-wheel drive system and electronically shifted transfer case, this indicator is electronically disabled. The 4 low indicator is located on the right side of the instrument cluster, to the right of the coolant temperature gauge. The 4 low indicator consists of a stencil-like cutout of the text 4 LOW in the opaque layer of the instrument cluster overlay. The dark outer layer of the overlay prevents the indicator from being clearly visible when it is not illuminated. An amber Light Emitting Diode (LED) behind the cutout in the opaque layer of the overlay causes the indicator to appear in amber through the translucent outer layer of the overlay when it is illuminated from behind by the LED, which is soldered onto the instrument cluster electronic circuit board. When the exterior lighting is turned ON, the illumination intensity of the 4 low indicator is dimmable, which is adjusted along with the cluster general illumination lighting using the panel lamps dimmer thumbwheel on the headlamp switch. The 4 low indicator is serviced as a unit with the instrument cluster. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Four Wheel Drive Indicator Lamp > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 14558 Four Wheel Drive Indicator Lamp: Description and Operation Operation 4WD Auto Indicator 4WD AUTO INDICATOR The 4WD auto indicator gives an indication to the vehicle operator when the electronic transfer case has been shifted into the 4WD auto mode. This indicator is controlled by a transistor on the instrument cluster circuit board based upon cluster programming and electronic messages received by the cluster from the Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) over the Controller Area Network (CAN) data bus. The 4WD auto indicator Light Emitting Diode (LED) is completely controlled by the instrument cluster logic circuit, and that logic will only allow this indicator to operate when the instrument cluster receives a battery current input on the fused ignition switch output (run-start) circuit. Therefore, the LED will always be OFF when the ignition switch is in any position except ON or START. The LED only illuminates when it is provided a path to ground by the instrument cluster transistor. The instrument cluster will turn ON the 4WD auto indicator for the following reasons: - 4WD Auto Indicator Lamp-On Message - Each time the cluster receives an electronic 4WD auto indicator lamp-ON message from the TIPM, the indicator will be illuminated. The indicator remains illuminated until the cluster receives a lamp-OFF message from the TIPM, or until the ignition switch is turned to the OFF position, whichever occurs first. - Actuator Test - Each time the cluster is put through the actuator test, the 4WD auto indicator will be turned ON, then OFF again during the bulb check portion of the test to confirm the functionality of the LED and the cluster control circuitry. The TIPM continually monitors the electronic transfer case through the transfer case shift motor/mode sensor assembly to determine when the 4WD auto mode is engaged. The TIPM then sends the proper lamp-ON or lamp-OFF message to the ElectroMechanical Instrument Cluster (EMIC) (also known as the Cab Compartment Node/CCN). For further diagnosis of the 4WD auto indicator or the instrument cluster circuitry that controls the LED, Refer to appropriate testing. For proper diagnosis of the transfer case shift motor/mode sensor, the TIPM, the EMIC, the CAN data bus or the electronic communication related to 4WD auto indicator operation a diagnostic scan tool is required. Refer to the appropriate diagnostic information. 4WD Indicator 4WD INDICATOR The 4WD indicator gives an indication to the vehicle operator when the transfer case has been shifted into a 4WD mode. This indicator is controlled by a transistor on the instrument cluster circuit board based upon cluster programming and electronic messages received by the cluster from the Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) over the Controller Area Network (CAN) data bus. The 4WD indicator Light Emitting Diode (LED) is completely controlled by the instrument cluster logic circuit, and that logic will only allow this indicator to operate when the instrument cluster receives a battery current input on the fused ignition switch output (run-start) circuit. Therefore, the LED will always be OFF when the ignition switch is in any position except ON or START. The LED only illuminates when it is provided a path to ground by the instrument cluster transistor. The instrument cluster will turn ON the 4WD indicator for the following reasons: - 4WD Indicator Lamp-On Message - Each time the cluster receives an electronic 4WD indicator lamp-ON message from the TIPM, the indicator will be illuminated. The indicator remains illuminated until the cluster receives a lamp-OFF message from the TIPM, or until the ignition switch is turned to the OFF position, whichever occurs first. - Actuator Test - Each time the cluster is put through the actuator test, the 4WD indicator will be turned ON, then OFF again during the bulb check portion of the test to confirm the functionality of the LED and the cluster control circuitry. The TIPM continually monitors the electronic transfer case through the transfer case shift motor/mode sensor assembly or the manual transfer case through the transfer case switch to determine when the 4WD mode is engaged. The TIPM then sends the proper lamp-ON or lamp-OFF message to the ElectroMechanical Instrument Cluster (EMIC) (also known as the Cab Compartment Node/CCN). For further diagnosis of the 4WD indicator or the instrument cluster circuitry that controls the LED, Refer to appropriate testing. For proper diagnosis of the transfer case shift motor/mode sensor, the transfer case switch, the TIPM, the EMIC, the CAN data bus or the electronic communication related to 4WD indicator operation a diagnostic scan tool is required. Refer to the appropriate diagnostic information. 4 Low Indicator 4 LOW INDICATOR The 4 low indicator gives an indication to the vehicle operator when the electronic transfer case has been shifted into the 4WD low mode. This indicator is controlled by a transistor on the instrument cluster circuit board based upon cluster programming and electronic messages received by the cluster from Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Four Wheel Drive Indicator Lamp > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 14559 the Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) over the Controller Area Network (CAN) data bus. The 4 low indicator Light Emitting Diode (LED) is completely controlled by the instrument cluster logic circuit, and that logic will only allow this indicator to operate when the instrument cluster receives a battery current input on the fused ignition switch output (run-start) circuit. Therefore, the LED will always be OFF when the ignition switch is in any position except ON or START. The LED only illuminates when it is provided a path to ground by the instrument cluster transistor. The instrument cluster will turn ON the 4 low indicator for the following reasons: - 4 Low Indicator Lamp-On Message - Each time the cluster receives an electronic 4 low indicator lamp-ON message from the TIPM, the indicator will be illuminated. The indicator remains illuminated until the cluster receives a lamp-OFF message from the TIPM, or until the ignition switch is turned to the OFF position, whichever occurs first. - Actuator Test - Each time the cluster is put through the actuator test, the 4 low indicator will be turned ON, then OFF again during the LED portion of the test to confirm the functionality of the LED and the cluster control circuitry. The TIPM continually monitors the electronic transfer case through the transfer case shift motor/mode sensor assembly to determine when the 4WD low mode is engaged. The TIPM then sends the proper lamp-ON or lamp-OFF message to the ElectroMechanical Instrument Cluster (EMIC) (also known as the Cab Compartment Node/CCN). For further diagnosis of the 4 low indicator or the instrument cluster circuitry that controls the LED, Refer to appropriate testing. For proper diagnosis of the transfer case shift motor/mode sensor, the TIPM, the EMIC, the CAN data bus or the electronic communication related to 4 low indicator operation a diagnostic scan tool is required. Refer to the appropriate diagnostic information. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Fuel Filler Cap Warning Indicator > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Fuel Filler Cap Warning Indicator: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION A gas cap indicator is standard equipment on all instrument clusters. However, on vehicles equipped with the optional diesel engine, this indicator is electronically disabled. The gas cap indication appears within the odometer Vacuum Fluorescent Display (VFD) unit. The gas cap indicator consists of a textual gASCAP message which appears in place of the odometer/trip odometer information in the display. The odometer VFD is soldered onto the cluster electronic circuit board, and is visible through a window with a smoked clear lens located on the lower edge of the speedometer gauge dial face of the cluster overlay. The dark lens over the VFD prevents it from being clearly visible when it is not illuminated. The gas cap textual message appears in the same blue-green color and at the same lighting level as the odometer/trip odometer information when it is illuminated by the instrument cluster electronic circuit board. The gas cap indicator is serviced as a unit with the VFD in the instrument cluster. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Fuel Filler Cap Warning Indicator > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 14564 Fuel Filler Cap Warning Indicator: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The gas cap indicator gives an indication to the vehicle operator when there is a gross leak detected in the on-board fuel vapor recovery system. This indicator is controlled by the instrument cluster logic circuit based upon cluster programming and electronic messages received over the Controller Area Network (CAN) data bus from the Powertrain Control Module (PCM). The gas cap indicator function of the odometer Vacuum Fluorescent Display (VFD) unit is completely controlled by the instrument cluster logic circuit, and that logic will only allow this indicator to operate when the instrument cluster receives a battery current input on the fused ignition switch output (run-start) circuit. Therefore, the VFD gas cap indication will always be OFF when the ignition switch is in any position except ON or START. The instrument cluster will turn ON the gas cap indicator for the following reasons: - Gas Cap Indicator Lamp-On Message - Each time the cluster receives an electronic gas cap indicator lamp-ON message from the PCM indicating there is a gross leak in the vapor recovery system, the gas cap indicator will be illuminated. If the ignition switch is in the ON position and the vehicle is not moving when the message is received, the VFD will repeatedly and sequentially cycle the gas cap indication in two second intervals with the odometer/trip odometer information and any other active textual warnings. If the vehicle is moving, or once the cluster of a non-moving vehicle receives an electronic vehicle speed message from the PCM indicating a speed greater than zero, the warning sequence will consist of three complete display cycles with an audible single chime tone accompanying each cycle, then revert to only the visual gas cap indication and odometer/trip odometer display cycling until the cluster receives a message indicating there is no gross leak in the vapor recovery system, or until the ignition switch is turned to the OFF position, whichever occurs first. The VFD can be reverted to the odometer display and any currently displayed textual messages suspended by momentarily depressing and releasing the odometer/trip odometer reset switch button on the front of the cluster. The PCM continually monitors the on board vapor recovery system to determine whether there are air leaks in the system. The PCM then sends the proper electronic messages to the ElectroMechanical Instrument Cluster (EMIC) (also known as the Cab Compartment Node/CCN). If the EMIC turns ON the gas cap indicator due to a monitored gross leak in the vapor recovery system, it may indicate that the gas cap has been removed or is improperly installed. For proper diagnosis of the on board vapor recovery system, the PCM, the EMIC, the CAN data bus or the electronic communication related to gas cap indicator operation a diagnostic scan tool is required. Refer to the appropriate diagnostic information. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Fuel Gauge > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Fuel Gauge: Diagram Information and Instructions Warnings WARNINGS - GENERAL WARNINGS provide information to prevent personal injury and vehicle damage. Below is a list of general warnings that should be followed any time a vehicle is being serviced. WARNING: Always wear safety glasses for eye protection. WARNING: Use safety stands anytime a procedure requires being under a vehicle. WARNING: Be sure that the ignition switch always is in the off position, unless the procedure requires it to be on. WARNING: Set the parking brake when working on any vehicle. An automatic transmission should be in park. A manual transmission should be in neutral. WARNING: Operate the engine only in a well-ventilated area. WARNING: Keep away from moving parts when the engine is running, especially the fan and belts. WARNING: To prevent serious burns, avoid contact with hot parts such as the radiator, exhaust manifold(s), tail pipe, catalytic converter and muffler. WARNING: Do not allow flame or sparks near the battery. Gases are always present in and around the battery. WARNING: Always remove rings, watches, loose hanging jewelry and avoid loose clothing. How to Use Wiring Diagrams DESCRIPTION - HOW TO USE WIRING DIAGRAMS DaimlerChrysler Corporation wiring diagrams are designed to provide information regarding the vehicles wiring content. In order to effectively use the wiring diagrams to diagnose and repair DaimlerChrysler Corporation vehicles, it is important to understand all of their features and characteristics. Diagrams are arranged such that the power (B+) side of the circuit is placed near the top of the page, and the ground (B-) side of the circuit is placed near the bottom of the page. All switches, components, and modules are shown in the at rest position with the doors closed and the key removed from the ignition. Components are shown two ways. A solid line around a component indicates that the component is complete. A dashed line around the component indicates that the component is being shown is not complete. Incomplete components have a reference number to indicate the page where the component is shown complete. It is important to realize that no attempt is made on the diagrams to represent components and wiring as they appear on the vehicle. For example, a short piece of wire is treated the same as a long one. In addition, switches and other components are shown as simply as possible, with regard to function only. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Fuel Gauge > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14569 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Fuel Gauge > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14570 SYMBOLS International symbols are used throughout the wiring diagrams. These symbols are consistent with those being used around the world. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Fuel Gauge > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14571 TERMINOLOGY This is a list of terms and definitions used in the wiring diagrams. LHD - Left Hand Drive Vehicles RHD - Right Hand Drive Vehicles ATX - Automatic Transmissions-Front Wheel Drive MTX Manual Transmissions-Front Wheel Drive Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Fuel Gauge > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14572 AT - Automatic Transmissions-Rear Wheel Drive MT - Manual Transmissions-Rear Wheel Drive SOHC - Single Over Head Cam Engine DOHC - Double Over Head Cam Engine Export - Vehicles Built For Sale In Markets Other Than North America Except Export - Vehicles Built For Sale In North America Circuit Functions DESCRIPTION - CIRCUIT FUNCTIONS All circuits in the diagrams use an alpha/numeric code to identify the wire and it's function. To identify which circuit code applies to a system, refer to the Circuit Identification Code Chart. This chart shows the main circuits only and does not show the secondary codes that may apply to some models. Circuit Information DESCRIPTION - CIRCUIT INFORMATION Each wire shown in the diagrams contains a code which identifies the main circuit, a specific part of the main circuit, gage of wire, and color. An example would be A 2 18 LB/YL. This is a Battery Feed circuit, level two, eighteen gauge, light blue with a yellow tracer. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Fuel Gauge > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14573 Connector, Ground and Splice Information DESCRIPTION - CONNECTOR, GROUND AND SPLICE INFORMATION CAUTION: Not all connectors are serviced. Some connectors are serviced only with a harness. A typical example might be the Supplemental Restraint System connectors. Always check parts availability before attempting a repair. IDENTIFICATION In-line connectors are identified by a number, as follows: - In-line connectors located in the engine compartment are C100 series numbers. - In-line connectors located in the instrument panel area are C200 series numbers. - In-line connectors located in the body are C300 series numbers. - Jumper harness connectors are C400 series numbers. - Grounds and ground connectors are identified with a "G" and follow the same series numbering as the in-line connectors. - Splices are identified with an "S" and follow the same series numbering as the in-line connectors. In addition, S001-S099 numbers are located in the engine compartment. - Component connectors are identified by the component name instead of a number. Multiple connectors on a component use a C1, C2, etc. identifier. LOCATIONS Vehicle/Locations contains the master connector/ground/splice location index charts with hyperlinks to the applicable location illustrations. The illustrations contain the connector name (or number)/ground number/splice number and component identification. The abbreviation T/O is used in the component location section to indicate a point in which the wiring harness branches out to a component. The abbreviation N/S means Not Shown in the illustrations Section Identification and Information DESCRIPTION - SECTION IDENTIFICATION AND INFORMATION The wiring diagrams are grouped into individual sections. If a component is most likely found in a particular group, it will be shown complete (all wires, Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Fuel Gauge > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14574 connectors, and pins) within that group. For example, the Auto Shutdown Relay is most likely to be found in Powertrain Management, so it is shown there complete. It can, however, be shown partially in another group if it contains some associated wiring. Splice diagrams show the entire splice and provide references to other sections the splices serves. Splice Information only contains splice diagrams that are not shown in their entirety somewhere else in the wiring diagrams. Connector Pin-Outs shows each connector and the circuits involved with that connector. The connectors are identified using the name/number on the diagram pages. Removal REMOVAL 1. Disconnect battery. 2. Release Connector Lock (2). 3. Disconnect the connector (3) being repaired from its mating half/component. 4. Remove the dress cover (if applicable) (1). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Fuel Gauge > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14575 5. Release the Secondary Terminal Lock, if required (1). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Fuel Gauge > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14576 6. Position the connector locking finger away from the terminal using the proper special tool. Pull on the wire to remove the terminal from the connector. Installation Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Fuel Gauge > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14577 INSTALLATION 1. Insert the removed terminal in the same cavity on the repair connector. 2. Repeat steps for each terminal in the connector, being sure that all wires are inserted into the proper cavities. For additional connector pin-out identification, refer to the wiring diagrams. 3. When the connector is re-assembled, the secondary terminal lock must be placed in the locked position to prevent terminal push out. 4. Replace dress cover (if applicable). 5. Connect connector to its mating half/component. 6. Connect battery and test all affected systems. Removal REMOVAL 1. Disconnect the battery. 2. Locate the diode in the harness, and remove the protective covering. 3. Remove the diode from the harness, pay attention to the current flow direction (1) (2) (3). Installation INSTALLATION 1. Remove the insulation from the wires in the harness. Only remove enough insulation to solder in the new diode. 2. Install the new diode in the harness, making sure current flow is correct. If necessary, refer to the appropriate wiring diagram for current flow. 3. Solder the connection together using rosin core type solder only. Do not use acid core solder. 4. Tape the diode to the harness using electrical tape. Make sure the diode is completely sealed from the elements. 5. Re-connect the battery and test affected systems. Removal REMOVAL 1. Follow steps for removing terminals described in the connector removal section. 2. Cut the wire 6 inches from the back of the connector. Installation INSTALLATION 1. Select a wire from the terminal repair kit that best matches the color and gage of the wire being repaired. 2. Cut the repair wire to the proper length and remove one-half (1/2) inch of insulation. 3. Splice the repair wire to the wire harness (see wire splicing procedure). See: Service Procedures/Wire Splicing 4. Insert the repaired wire into the connector. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Fuel Gauge > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14578 5. Install the connector locking wedge, if required, and reconnect the connector to its mating half/component. 6. Re-tape the wire harness starting at 1-1/2 inches behind the connector and 2 inches past the repair. 7. Connect battery and test all affected systems. Wire Splicing STANDARD PROCEDURE - WIRE SPLICING When splicing a wire, it is important that the correct gage be used as shown in the wiring diagrams. 1. Remove one-half (1/2) inch of insulation from each wire that needs to be spliced. 2. Place a piece of adhesive lined heat shrink tubing on one side of the wire. Make sure the tubing will be long enough to cover and seal the entire repair area. 3. Place the strands of wire overlapping each other inside of the splice clip (1). 4. Using crimping tool (1), Mopar p/n 05019912AA, crimp the splice clip and wires together. 5. Solder (3) the connection (2) together using rosin core type solder (1) only. CAUTION: DO NOT USE ACID CORE SOLDER. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Fuel Gauge > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14579 6. Center the heat shrink tubing (2) over the joint and heat using a heat gun. Heat the joint until the tubing is tightly sealed and sealant (1) comes out of both ends of the tubing. Special Tools WIRING/TERMINAL PROBING TOOL PACKAGE 6807 TERMINAL PICK TOOL SET 6680 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Fuel Gauge > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14580 TERMINAL REMOVING TOOLS 6932 AND 8638 TERMINAL REMOVING TOOL 6934 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Fuel Gauge > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14581 Fuel Gauge: Diagnostic Aids Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) Sensitive Devices STANDARD PROCEDURE - ELECTROSTATIC DISCHARGE (ESD) SENSITIVE DEVICES All ESD sensitive components are solid state and a symbol is used to indicate this. When handling any component with this symbol, comply with the following procedures to reduce the possibility of electrostatic charge build up on the body and inadvertent discharge into the component. If it is not known whether the part is ESD sensitive, assume that it is. 1. Always touch a known good ground before handling the part. This should be repeated while handling the part and more frequently after sliding across a seat, sitting down from a standing position, or walking a distance. 2. Avoid touching electrical terminals of the part, unless instructed to do so by a written procedure. 3. When using a voltmeter, be sure to connect the ground lead first. 4. Do not remove the part from it's protective packing until it is time to install the part. 5. Before removing the part from it's package, ground the package to a known good ground on the vehicle. Testing Of Voltage Potential STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING OF VOLTAGE POTENTIAL 1. Connect the ground lead of a voltmeter to a known good ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the voltmeter to the selected test point. The vehicle ignition may need to be turned ON to check voltage. Refer to the appropriate test procedure. Testing For Continuity Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Fuel Gauge > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14582 STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING FOR CONTINUITY 1. Remove the fuse (1) for the circuit being checked or, disconnect the battery. 2. Connect one lead of the ohmmeter to one side of the circuit being tested 3. Connect the other lead to the other end of the circuit being tested. Low or no resistance means good continuity. Testing For A Short To Ground STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING FOR A SHORT TO GROUND 1. Remove the fuse and disconnect all items involved with the fuse. 2. Connect a test light or a voltmeter across the terminals of the fuse. 3. Starting at the fuse block, wiggle the wiring harness about six to eight inches apart and watch the voltmeter/test lamp. 4. If the voltmeter registers voltage or the test lamp glows, there is a short to ground in that general area of the wiring harness. Testing For A Short To Ground On Fuses Powering Several Loads STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING FOR A SHORT TO GROUND ON FUSES POWERING SEVERAL LOADS 1. Refer to the wiring diagrams and disconnect or isolate all items on the suspected fused circuits. 2. Replace the blown fuse. 3. Supply power to the fuse by turning ON the ignition switch or re-connecting the battery. 4. Start connecting or energizing the items in the fuse circuit one at a time. When the fuse blows the circuit with the short to ground has been isolated. Testing For A Voltage Drop STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING FOR A VOLTAGE DROP Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Fuel Gauge > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14583 1. Connect the positive lead of the voltmeter to the side of the circuit closest to the battery. 2. Connect the other lead of the voltmeter to the other side of the switch, component or circuit. 3. Operate the item. 4. The voltmeter will show the difference in voltage between the two points. Troubleshooting Wiring Problems DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING - WIRING HARNESS TROUBLESHOOTING TOOLS When diagnosing a problem in an electrical circuit there are several common tools necessary. These tools are listed and explained below. - Jumper Wire - This is a test wire used to connect two points of a circuit. It can be used to bypass an open in a circuit. WARNING: Never use a jumper wire across a load, such as a motor, connected between a battery feed and ground. - Voltmeter - Used to check for voltage on a circuit. Always connect the black lead to a known good ground and the red lead to the positive side of the circuit. CAUTION: Most of the electrical components used in today's vehicles are Solid State. When checking voltages in these circuits, use a meter with a 10 - megohm or greater impedance rating. - Ohmmeter - Used to check the resistance between two points of a circuit. Low or no resistance in a circuit means good continuity. CAUTION: Most of the electrical components used in today's vehicles are Solid State. When checking resistance in these circuits use a meter with a 10 - megohm or greater impedance rating. In addition, make sure the power is disconnected from the circuit. Circuits that are powered up by the vehicle's electrical system can cause damage to the equipment and provide false readings. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Fuel Gauge > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14584 - Probing Tools - These tools are used for probing terminals in connectors. Select the proper size tool from Special Tool Package 6807, and insert the probing end (2) into the terminal being tested. Use the other end of the tool (1) to insert the meter probe. INTERMITTENT AND POOR CONNECTIONS Most intermittent electrical problems are caused by faulty electrical connections or wiring. It is also possible for a sticking component or relay to cause a problem. Before condemning a component or wiring assembly, check the following items. - Connectors are fully seated - Spread terminals, or terminal push out - Terminals in the wiring assembly are fully seated into the connector/component and locked into position - Dirt or corrosion on the terminals. Any amount of corrosion or dirt could cause an intermittent problem - Damaged connector/component casing exposing the item to dirt or moisture - Wire insulation that has rubbed through causing a short to ground - Some or all of the wiring strands broken inside of the insulation - Wiring broken inside of the insulation TROUBLESHOOTING WIRING PROBLEMS When troubleshooting wiring problems there are six steps which can aid in the procedure. The steps are listed and explained below. Always check for non-factory items added to the vehicle before doing any diagnosis. If the vehicle is equipped with these items, disconnect them to verify these add-on items are not the cause of the problem. 1. Verify the problem. 2. Verify any related symptoms. Do this by performing operational checks on components that are in the same circuit. Refer to the wiring diagrams. 3. Analyze the symptoms. Use the wiring diagrams to determine what the circuit is doing, where the problem most likely is occurring and where the diagnosis will continue. 4. Isolate the problem area. 5. Repair the problem area. 6. Verify the proper operation. For this step, check for proper operation of all items on the repaired circuit. Refer to the wiring diagrams. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Fuel Gauge > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Fuel Gauge: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION A fuel gauge is standard equipment on all instrument clusters. This gauge is located in the lower left quadrant of the instrument cluster, below the voltage gauge. This gauge consists of a movable gauge needle or pointer controlled by the instrument cluster circuitry and a fixed 90 degree scale on the cluster overlay that reads left-to-right from E (or Empty) to F (or Full). An International Control and Display Symbol icon for Fuel is located on the cluster overlay, directly below the right end of the gauge scale. An arrowhead pointed to the left side of the vehicle is imprinted on the cluster overlay next to the Fuel icon on the gauge to provide the driver with a reminder as to the location of the fuel filler access. On vehicles equipped with a diesel engine, text that specifies DIESEL ONLY is located across the fuel gauge below the gauge scale, but above the hub of the gauge needle. The fuel gauge graphics are black against a white field except for a single red graduation at the low end of the gauge scale making them clearly visible within the instrument cluster in daylight. When illuminated from behind by the panel lamps dimmer controlled cluster general illumination lighting with the exterior lamps turned ON, the black gauge graphics appear blue-green and the red graphics still appear red. The gauge needle has internal optical illumination. Gauge illumination is provided by replaceable incandescent bulb and holder units located on the instrument cluster electronic circuit board. The fuel gauge is serviced as a unit with the instrument cluster. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Fuel Gauge > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 14587 Fuel Gauge: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The fuel gauge gives an indication to the vehicle operator of the level of fuel in the fuel tank. This gauge is controlled by the instrument cluster circuit board based upon cluster programming and a hard wired input received by the cluster from the fuel level sending unit on the fuel pump module in the fuel tank. The fuel gauge is an air core magnetic unit that receives battery current on the instrument cluster electronic circuit board through the fused ignition switch output (run-start) circuit whenever the ignition switch is in the ON or START positions. The cluster is programmed to move the gauge needle back to the low end of the scale after the ignition switch is turned to the OFF position. The instrument cluster circuitry controls the gauge needle position and provides the following features: - Fuel Level Sending Unit Input - The cluster provides a constant current source to the fuel level sending unit and monitors a return input on a fuel level sense circuit. The resistance through the fuel level sending unit increases as the fuel level falls and decreases as the fuel level rises causing changes in the fuel level sense input voltage. The cluster programming applies an algorithm to calculate the proper fuel gauge needle position based upon the fuel level sense input, then moves the gauge needle to the proper relative position on the gauge scale. This algorithm is used to dampen gauge needle movement against the negative effect that fuel sloshing within the fuel tank can have on accurate inputs from the fuel tank sending unit to the cluster. - Less Than 15 Percent Tank Full Input - Each time the fuel level sense input to the cluster indicates the fuel tank is about 15 percent full or less for 10 consecutive seconds and the vehicle speed is zero, or for 60 consecutive seconds and the vehicle speed is greater than zero, the gauge needle is moved to about the one-sixteenth graduation on the gauge scale, the low fuel indicator is illuminated, and a single chime tone is sounded. The low fuel indicator remains illuminated until the fuel level sense input is greater than about 15 percent full for 10 consecutive seconds and the vehicle speed is zero, or for 60 consecutive seconds and the vehicle speed is greater than zero, or until the ignition switch is turned to the OFF position, whichever occurs first. The chime tone feature will only repeat during the same ignition cycle if the low fuel indicator is cycled OFF and then ON again by the appropriate inputs from the fuel level sending unit. - Less Than Empty Stop Input - Each time the cluster receives a fuel level sense input that indicates the fuel level in the fuel tank is less than the EMPTY gauge needle stop position, the gauge needle is moved to the low end of the gauge scale and the low fuel indicator is illuminated immediately. This input would indicate that the fuel level sense input to the cluster is a short circuit. - More Than Full Stop Input - Each time the cluster receives a fuel level sense input that indicates the fuel level in the fuel tank is more than the FULL gauge needle stop position, the gauge needle is moved to the low end of the gauge scale and the low fuel indicator is illuminated immediately. This input would indicate that the fuel level sense input to the cluster is an open circuit. - Actuator Test - Each time the cluster is put through the actuator test, the fuel gauge needle will be swept to several calibration points on the gauge scale in a prescribed sequence in order to confirm the functionality of the gauge and the cluster control circuitry. The ElectroMechanical Instrument Cluster (EMIC) (also known as the Cab Compartment Node/CCN) continually monitors the fuel tank sending unit to determine the level of fuel in the fuel tank. The EMIC then sends the proper electronic fuel level message to other electronic modules in the vehicle over the Controller Area Network (CAN) data bus. For further diagnosis of the fuel gauge or the instrument cluster circuitry that controls the gauge, Refer to appropriate testing. For proper diagnosis of the fuel tank sending unit, the EMIC, the CAN data bus or the electronic communication related to fuel gauge operation or fuel level data processing a diagnostic scan tool is required. Refer to the appropriate diagnostic information. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Fuel Gauge Sender > Component Information > Locations Fuel Gauge Sender: Locations DESCRIPTION The fuel pump module assembly is located on the top of the fuel tank. The complete assembly contains the following components: - A combination fuel filter/fuel pressure regulator - A separate fuel pick-up, or inlet filter - An electric fuel pump - A lockring to retain pump module to tank - A soft gasket between tank flange and module - A fuel gauge sending unit (fuel level sensor) - Fuel line connection The fuel gauge sending unit may be serviced separately. If the electrical fuel pump, primary inlet filter, fuel filter or fuel pressure regulator require service, the fuel pump module must be replaced. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Fuel Gauge Sender > Component Information > Description and Operation > Fuel Level Sending Unit / Sensor Fuel Gauge Sender: Description and Operation Fuel Level Sending Unit / Sensor DESCRIPTION The fuel gauge sending unit (fuel level sensor) is attached to the fuel pump module. The sending unit consists of a float, an arm, and a variable resistor track (card). The sensor is non-serviceable. If replacement is necessary, the fuel pump module assembly must be replaced. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Fuel Gauge Sender > Component Information > Description and Operation > Fuel Level Sending Unit / Sensor > Page 14593 Fuel Gauge Sender: Description and Operation Fuel Pump Module Description DESCRIPTION The fuel pump module assembly is located on the top of the fuel tank. The complete assembly contains the following components: - A combination fuel filter/fuel pressure regulator - A separate fuel pick-up, or inlet filter - An electric fuel pump - A lockring to retain pump module to tank - A soft gasket between tank flange and module - A fuel gauge sending unit (fuel level sensor) - Fuel line connection The fuel gauge sending unit may be serviced separately. If the electrical fuel pump, primary inlet filter, fuel filter or fuel pressure regulator require service, the fuel pump module must be replaced. Operation OPERATION Refer to Fuel Pump, Inlet Filter, Fuel Filter / Fuel Pressure Regulator and Fuel Gauge Sending Unit. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Fuel Gauge Sender > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Fuel Gauge Sender: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL WARNING: The fuel system may be under a constant pressure (even with the engine off). Before servicing the fuel pump module, the fuel system pressure must be released. 1. Drain and remove fuel tank. Refer to Fuel Tank Removal/Installation. 2. Remove plastic fuel pump module cover (1) by pushing pegs (2) outward. 3. Note rotational position of module before attempting removal. An indexing arrow is located on top of module for this purpose. 4. Position Special Tool 9340 (3) into notches on outside edge of lockring (5). 5. Install 1/2 inch drive breaker bar (1) to tool 9340 (3). 6. Rotate breaker bar counter-clockwise to remove lockring (5). 7. Remove lockring. The module will spring up slightly when lockring is removed. 8. Remove module from fuel tank. Be careful not to bend float arm while removing. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Fuel Gauge Sender > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 14596 Fuel Gauge Sender: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION 1. Using a new seal (gasket), position fuel pump module into opening in fuel tank. 2. Position lockring (5) over top of fuel pump module. 3. Rotate module until embossed alignment arrow points to center alignment mark. This step must be performed to prevent float from contacting side of fuel tank. Also be sure fuel fitting on top of pump module is pointed to drivers side of vehicle. 4. Install Special Tool 9340 (3) to lockring. 5. Install 1/2 inch drive breaker (1) into Special Tool 9340 (3). 6. Tighten lockring (clockwise) until all seven notches have engaged. 7. Snap plastic fuel pump module cover (1) to pump module. 8. Install fuel tank. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Instrument Cluster / Carrier > Instrument Panel Bulb > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Instrument Panel Bulb: Service and Repair Removal Bulb - EVIC Control BULB - EVIC CONTROL WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury on vehicles equipped with airbags, disable the Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, airbag, seat belt tensioner, impact sensor, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the SRS. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment. NOTE: There are provisions for up to four bulb/bulb holder units on the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) circuit board. The two outboard bulbs illuminate the EVIC push buttons, while the two center bulbs illuminate the optional universal transmitter push buttons. Therefore, the center bulb locations are only populated on vehicles equipped with the optional universal transmitter. 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. 2. Remove the overhead console (1) from the headliner. See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Console/Service and Repair/Overhead Console/Removal . 3. Use a small thin-bladed screwdriver to rotate the bulb holder (3) counterclockwise about 30 degrees to unlock it from the keyed opening in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) unit (2) circuit board. 4. Pull the bulb holder and bulb straight out of the circuit board. Bulb - A/C-Heat Control BULB - A/C-HEAT CONTROL WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury on vehicles equipped with airbags, disable the Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, airbag, seat belt tensioner, impact sensor, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the SRS. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment. NOTE: There may be minor variations in the locations of the bulb/bulb holder units on the back of the single zone A/C-heater controls as a result of various optional control units. However, the bulb types and service procedures are identical for each of these bulbs. The illumination provisions for the dual zone A/C-heater controls are NOT serviceable. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Instrument Cluster / Carrier > Instrument Panel Bulb > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 14602 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. 2. Remove the center bezel from the instrument panel. See: Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Service and Repair/Instrument Panel Center Bezel Removal . 3. Use a small thin-bladed screwdriver to rotate the bulb holder (2) counterclockwise about 30 degrees to unlock it from the keyed opening in the A/C-heater control (1) circuit board. 4. Pull the bulb holder and bulb straight out of the circuit board. Bulb - CMTC Control BULB - CMTC CONTROL WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury on vehicles equipped with airbags, disable the Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, airbag, seat belt tensioner, impact sensor, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the SRS. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment. NOTE: There are provisions for up to three bulb/bulb holder units on the Compass Mini-Trip Computer (CMTC) circuit board. The two outboard bulbs illuminate the CMTC push buttons, while the center bulb illuminates the optional universal transmitter push buttons. Therefore, the center bulb location is only populated on vehicles equipped with the optional universal transmitter. 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. 2. Remove the overhead console (1) from the headliner. See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Console/Service and Repair/Overhead Console/Removal . 3. Use a small thin-bladed screwdriver to rotate the bulb holder (3) counterclockwise about 30 degrees to unlock it from the keyed opening in the Compass Mini-Trip Computer (CMTC) unit (2) circuit board. 4. Pull the bulb holder and bulb straight out of the circuit board. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Instrument Cluster / Carrier > Instrument Panel Bulb > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 14603 Instrument Panel Bulb: Service and Repair Installation Bulb - EVIC Control BULB - EVIC CONTROL WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury on vehicles equipped with airbags, disable the Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, airbag, seat belt tensioner, impact sensor, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the SRS. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment. CAUTION: Always use the correct bulb size and type for replacement. An incorrect bulb size or type may overheat and cause damage to the lamp, the socket or the lamp wiring. NOTE: There are provisions for up to four bulb/bulb holder units on the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) circuit board. The two outboard bulbs illuminate the EVIC push buttons, while the two center bulbs illuminate the optional universal transmitter push buttons. Therefore, the center bulb locations are only populated on vehicles equipped with the optional universal transmitter. 1. Align the bulb holder and bulb (3) with the keyed opening in the circuit board of the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) (2). 2. Insert the bulb holder and bulb straight into the circuit board until the bulb holder is firmly seated. 3. Using a small thin-bladed screwdriver, rotate the bulb holder clockwise about 30 degrees on the circuit board to lock it into place. 4. Reinstall the overhead console (1) onto the headliner. See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Console/Service and Repair/Overhead Console/Installation . 5. Reconnect the battery negative cable. Bulb - A/C-Heat Control BULB - A/C-HEAT CONTROL WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury on vehicles equipped with airbags, disable the Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, airbag, seat belt tensioner, impact sensor, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the SRS. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment. CAUTION: Always use the correct bulb size and type for replacement. An incorrect bulb size or type may overheat and cause damage to the lamp, the socket or the lamp wiring. NOTE: There may be minor variations in the locations of the bulb/bulb holder units on the back of the single zone A/C-heater controls as a result of various optional control units. However, the bulb types and service procedures are identical for each of these bulbs. The illumination provisions for the dual zone A/C-heater controls are NOT serviceable. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Instrument Cluster / Carrier > Instrument Panel Bulb > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 14604 1. Align the bulb holder and bulb (2) with the keyed opening in the circuit board of the A/C-heater control (1). 2. Insert the bulb holder and bulb straight into the circuit board until the bulb holder is firmly seated. 3. Using a small thin-bladed screwdriver, rotate the bulb holder clockwise about 30 degrees on the circuit board to lock it into place. 4. Reinstall the center bezel onto the instrument panel. See: Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Service and Repair/Instrument Panel Center Bezel Installation . 5. Reconnect the battery negative cable. Bulb - CMTC Control BULB - CMTC CONTROL WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury on vehicles equipped with airbags, disable the Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, airbag, seat belt tensioner, impact sensor, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the SRS. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment. CAUTION: Always use the correct bulb size and type for replacement. An incorrect bulb size or type may overheat and cause damage to the lamp, the socket or the lamp wiring. NOTE: There are provisions for up to three bulb/bulb holder units on the Compass Mini-Trip Computer (CMTC) circuit board. The two outboard bulbs illuminate the CMTC push buttons, while the center bulb illuminates the optional universal transmitter push buttons. Therefore, the center bulb location is only populated on vehicles equipped with the optional universal transmitter. 1. Align the bulb holder and bulb (3) with the keyed opening in the circuit board of the Compass Mini-Trip Computer (CMTC) (2). 2. Insert the bulb holder and bulb straight into the circuit board until the bulb holder is firmly seated. 3. Using a small thin-bladed screwdriver, rotate the bulb holder clockwise about 30 degrees on the circuit board to lock it into place. 4. Reinstall the overhead console (1) onto the headliner. See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Console/Service and Repair/Overhead Console/Installation . 5. Reconnect the battery negative cable. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Low Fuel Lamp/Indicator > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Low Fuel Lamp/Indicator: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION A low fuel indicator is standard equipment on all instrument clusters. This indicator is located on the left side of the instrument cluster, to the left of the fuel gauge. The low fuel indicator consists of a stencil-like cutout of the International Control and Display Symbol icon for Fuel in the opaque layer of the instrument cluster overlay. The dark outer layer of the overlay prevents the indicator from being clearly visible when it is not illuminated. An amber Light Emitting Diode (LED) behind the cutout in the opaque layer of the overlay causes the indicator to appear in amber through the translucent outer layer of the overlay when it is illuminated from behind by the LED, which is soldered onto the instrument cluster electronic circuit board. The low fuel indicator is serviced as a unit with the instrument cluster. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Low Fuel Lamp/Indicator > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 14609 Low Fuel Lamp/Indicator: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The low fuel indicator gives an indication to the vehicle operator when the level of fuel in the fuel tank becomes low. This indicator is controlled by a transistor on the instrument cluster circuit board based upon cluster programming and a hard wired input received by the cluster from the fuel level sending unit on the fuel pump module in the fuel tank. The low fuel indicator Light Emitting Diode (LED) is completely controlled by the instrument cluster logic circuit, and that logic will only allow this indicator to operate when the instrument cluster receives a battery current input on the fused ignition switch output (run-start) circuit. Therefore, the LED will always be OFF when the ignition switch is in any position except ON or START. The LED only illuminates when it is provided a path to ground by the instrument cluster transistor. The instrument cluster will turn ON the low fuel indicator for the following reasons: - Bulb Test - Each time the ignition switch is turned to the ON position the low fuel indicator is illuminated for about two seconds as a bulb test. - Less Than 15 Percent Tank Full Input - The cluster provides a constant current source to the fuel level sending unit and monitors a return input on a fuel level sense circuit. The resistance through the fuel level sending unit increases as the fuel level falls and decreases as the fuel level rises causing changes in the sense input voltage. Each time the fuel level sense input to the cluster indicates the fuel tank is about 15 percent full or less for 10 consecutive seconds and the vehicle speed is zero, or for 60 consecutive seconds and the vehicle speed is greater than zero, the fuel gauge needle is moved to about the one-sixteenth graduation on the gauge scale, the low fuel indicator is illuminated, and a single chime tone is sounded. The low fuel indicator remains illuminated until the fuel level sense input indicates that the fuel tank is greater than about 15 percent full for 10 consecutive seconds and the vehicle speed is zero, or for 60 consecutive seconds and the vehicle speed is greater than zero, or until the ignition switch is turned to the OFF position, whichever occurs first. The chime tone feature will only repeat during the same ignition cycle if the low fuel indicator is cycled OFF and then ON again by the appropriate inputs from the fuel level sending unit. - Less Than Empty Stop Input - Each time the cluster receives a fuel level sense input that indicates the fuel level in the fuel tank is less than the E (or Empty) gauge needle stop position, the gauge needle is moved to the low end of the gauge scale and the low fuel indicator is illuminated immediately. This input would indicate that the fuel level sense input to the cluster is a short circuit. - More Than Full Stop Input - Each time the cluster receives a fuel level sense input that indicates the fuel level in the fuel tank is more than the F (or Full) gauge needle stop position, the gauge needle is moved to the low end of the gauge scale and the low fuel indicator is illuminated immediately. This input would indicate that the fuel level sense input to the cluster is an open circuit. - Actuator Test - Each time the cluster is put through the actuator test, the low fuel indicator will be turned ON, then OFF again during the bulb check portion of the test to confirm the functionality of the LED and the cluster control circuitry. The ElectroMechanical Instrument Cluster (EMIC) (also known as the Cab Compartment Node/CCN) continually monitors the fuel tank sending unit to determine the level of fuel in the fuel tank. The EMIC then sends the proper electronic fuel level message to other electronic modules in the vehicle over the Controller Area Network (CAN) data bus. For further diagnosis of the low fuel indicator or the instrument cluster circuitry that controls the LED, Refer to appropriate testing. For proper diagnosis of the fuel tank sending unit, the EMIC, the CAN data bus or the electronic communication related to low fuel indicator operation or fuel level data processing a diagnostic scan tool is required. Refer to the appropriate diagnostic information. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Low Tire Pressure Indicator > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Low Tire Pressure Indicator: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION A Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM) indicator is standard equipment on all instrument clusters. However, on vehicles not equipped with the optional TPM, this indicator is electronically disabled. This indicator is located in the lower portion of the tachometer dial face in the instrument cluster overlay. The TPM indicator consists of a stencil-like cutout of an icon that represents a cross-section of a tire with a centered exclamation point in the opaque layer of the instrument cluster overlay. The dark outer layer of the overlay prevents the indicator from being clearly visible when it is not illuminated. An amber Light Emitting Diode (LED) behind the cutout in the opaque layer of the overlay causes the indicator to appear in amber through the translucent outer layer of the overlay when it is illuminated from behind by the LED, which is soldered onto the instrument cluster electronic circuit board. The TPM indicator is serviced as a unit with the instrument cluster. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Low Tire Pressure Indicator > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 14614 Low Tire Pressure Indicator: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM) indicator gives an indication to the vehicle operator of the status of the TPM system. This indicator is controlled by a transistor on the instrument cluster circuit board based upon cluster programming and electronic messages received by the cluster from the Sentry Key REmote Entry Module (SKREEM) over the Controller Area Network (CAN) data bus. The TPM indicator Light Emitting Diode (LED) is completely controlled by the instrument cluster logic circuit, and that logic will only allow this indicator to operate when the instrument cluster receives a battery current input on the fused ignition switch output (run-start) circuit. Therefore, the LED will always be OFF when the ignition switch is in any position except ON or START. The LED only illuminates when it is provide a path to ground by the instrument cluster transistor. The instrument cluster will turn ON the TPM indicator for the following reasons: - Bulb Test - Each time the ignition switch is turned to the ON position, the SKREEM sends an electronic TPM indicator lamp-ON message to the cluster to illuminate the TPM indicator for about three seconds as a bulb test. - TPM Indicator Lamp-On Message - Each time the cluster receives an electronic TPM indicator lamp-ON message from the SKREEM, the TPM indicator will be illuminated. The indicator can be flashed ON and OFF, or illuminated solid, as dictated by the SKREEM message. The indicator remains illuminated until the cluster receives a lamp-OFF message from the SKREEM or until the ignition switch is turned to the OFF position, whichever occurs first. - Communication Error - If the cluster receives no TPM lamp-ON or lamp-OFF messages from the SKREEM for six consecutive seconds, the TPM indicator is illuminated by the instrument cluster. The indicator remains controlled and illuminated by the cluster until a valid lamp-ON or lamp-OFF message is received from the SKREEM. - Actuator Test - Each time the cluster is put through the actuator test, the TPM indicator will be turned ON, then OFF again during the bulb check portion of the test to confirm the functionality of the LED and the cluster control circuitry. The SKREEM performs a self-test each time the ignition switch is turned to the ON position to decide whether the TPM system is in good operating condition and whether the tire inflation pressures are too high or too low. The SKREEM then sends the proper lamp-ON or lamp-OFF message to the ElectroMechanical Instrument Cluster (EMIC) (also known as the Cab Compartment Node/CCN). If the instrument cluster turns ON the TPM indicator after the bulb test, it indicates that the inflation pressure of a tire is too low or that a malfunction has occurred and the TPM system is ineffective. For proper diagnosis of the TPM system, the SKREEM, the EMIC, the CAN data bus or the electronic communication related to TPM indicator operation a diagnostic scan tool is required. Refer to the appropriate diagnostic information. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Maintenance Required Lamp/Indicator > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Instruments - Oil Change Indicator System Service Maintenance Required Lamp/Indicator: Technical Service Bulletins Instruments - Oil Change Indicator System Service NUMBER: 08-014-07 GROUP: Electrical DATE: July 11, 2007 SUBJECT: Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) Oil Change Indicator System Service MODELS: 2008 (DR) Ram Truck 2008 (LX) 300 / Magnum / Charger NOTE: This Bulletin applies to vehicles equipped with a programmable EVIC (sales code LAZ). DISCUSSION: The oil change indicator system is being introduced on most 2008 models. This system displays a "Oil change Required" or "Oil Change" message at appropriate intervals on the instrument cluster. The vehicles listed above may be equipped with a programmable display on the Electronic Vehicle Information Center, (EVIC). The "Oil Change Required" message may also include the dealerships name and phone number which can be programmed into the vehicle with the StarSCAN(R) or StarMOBILE(R) scan tool. The following procedure describes the steps to add, delete or change a dealership name and phone number on the display. NOTE: If NOT programmed during vehicle prep, customer approval MUST be obtained before adding or changing this information. NOTE: When performing this Procedure, the software release level in the StarSCAN(R) or StarMOBILE(R); must be programmed with 8.01 level software or higher. The software release level is visible in the blue header at the top of the StarSCAN(R) or StarMOBILE(R) screen. 1. Connect the StarSCAN(R) or StarMOBILE(R).(in Pass-Through Mode) NOTE: To use the StarMOBILE(R) in Pass-Through Mode requires that StarMOBILE(R) be connected to the dealership network via a wired or wireless connection. For more information on how to use the StarMOBILE(R) in Pass-Through Mode, see the StarMOBILE(R) training tutorials available on DealerCONNECT > Service > Repair > StarSCAN(R) and StarMOBILE(R) Tools link or at the website. 2. From the Home Screen, enter "ECU VIEW" or "VEHICLE PREP". 3. Select "CCN". 4. Select "Misc. Functions". 5. Select "Enable/Disable Dealer Contact Information". 6. Select "Enable" or "Disable" as desired. 7. If enabled, select "Program Dealer Contact Information" and follow on screen prompts. 8. "Reset" will cause display to read: "Contact Dealer" as default. 9. Select finish to exit. POLICY: Information Only Disclaimer: This bulletin is supplied as technical information only and is not an authorization for repair. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Maintenance Required Lamp/Indicator > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 14619 Maintenance Required Lamp/Indicator: Service and Repair DaimlerChrysler provides no information regarding a Maintenance Required Lamp/Indicator. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Malfunction Indicator Lamp > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Malfunction Indicator Lamp: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION A Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) is standard equipment on all instrument clusters. This indicator is located near the lower edge of the instrument cluster, between the tachometer and the speedometer. The MIL consists of a stencil-like cutout of the International Control and Display Symbol icon for Engine in the opaque layer of the instrument cluster overlay. The dark outer layer of the overlay prevents the indicator from being clearly visible when it is not illuminated. An amber Light Emitting Diode (LED) behind the cutout in the opaque layer of the overlay causes the indicator to appear in amber through the translucent outer layer of the overlay when it is illuminated from behind by the LED, which is soldered onto the instrument cluster electronic circuit board. The MIL is serviced as a unit with the instrument cluster. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Malfunction Indicator Lamp > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 14624 Malfunction Indicator Lamp: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) gives an indication to the vehicle operator when the Powertrain Control Module (PCM) on vehicles with a gasoline engine, or the Engine Control Module (ECM) on vehicles with a diesel engine has recorded a Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) for an On-Board Diagnostics II (OBDII) emissions-related circuit or component malfunction. The MIL is controlled by a transistor on the instrument cluster circuit board based upon cluster programming and electronic messages received by the cluster from the PCM or ECM over the Controller Area Network (CAN) data bus. The MIL Light Emitting Diode (LED) is completely controlled by the instrument cluster logic circuit, and that logic will only allow this indicator to operate when the instrument cluster receives a battery current input on the fused ignition switch output (run-start) circuit. Therefore, the LED will always be OFF when the ignition switch is in any position except ON or START. The LED only illuminates when it is provided a path to ground by the instrument cluster transistor. The instrument cluster will turn ON the MIL for the following reasons: - Bulb Test - Each time the ignition switch is turned to the ON position the indicator is illuminated for about two seconds as a bulb test. The entire bulb test is a function of the PCM or ECM. - MIL Lamp-On Message - Each time the cluster receives an electronic MIL lamp-ON message from the PCM or ECM, the indicator will be illuminated. The indicator can be flashed ON and OFF, or illuminated solid, as dictated by the PCM or ECM message. For some DTCs, if a problem does not recur, the PCM or ECM will send a lamp-OFF message automatically. Other DTCs may require that a fault be repaired and the PCM or ECM be reset before a lamp-OFF message will be sent. - Communication Error - If the cluster receives no lamp-ON or lamp-OFF messages from the PCM or ECM for about 10 seconds, the MIL is illuminated by the instrument cluster to indicate a loss of bus communication. The indicator remains controlled and illuminated by the cluster until a valid message is received from the PCM or ECM. - Actuator Test - Each time the cluster is put through the actuator test, the MIL indicator will be turned ON during the bulb check portion of the test to confirm the functionality of the LED and the cluster control circuitry. The PCM or ECM continually monitors the fuel and emissions system circuits and sensors to decide whether the system is in good operating condition. The PCM or ECM then sends the proper lamp-ON or lamp-OFF message to the ElectroMechanical Instrument Cluster (EMIC) (also known as the Cab Compartment Node/CCN). If the EMIC turns ON the MIL after the bulb test, it may indicate that a malfunction has occurred and that the fuel and emissions systems may require service. For proper diagnosis of the fuel and emissions systems, the PCM, the ECM, the EMIC, the CAN data bus or the electronic communication related to MIL operation a diagnostic scan tool is required. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Malfunction Indicator Lamp - Transfer Case > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Malfunction Indicator Lamp - Transfer Case: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION A service 4WD indicator is standard equipment on all instrument clusters. However, on vehicles not equipped with the optional four-wheel drive system and electronically shifted transfer case, this indicator is electronically disabled. This indicator is located in the lower portion of the tachometer dial face in the instrument cluster overlay. The service 4WD indicator consists of a stencil-like cutout of the text SVC 4WD in the opaque layer of the instrument cluster overlay. The dark outer layer of the overlay prevents the indicator from being clearly visible when it is not illuminated. An amber Light Emitting Diode (LED) behind the cutout in the opaque layer of the overlay causes the indicator to appear in amber through the translucent outer layer of the overlay when it is illuminated from behind by the LED, which is soldered onto the instrument cluster electronic circuit board. The service 4WD indicator is serviced as a unit with the instrument cluster. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Malfunction Indicator Lamp - Transfer Case > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 14629 Malfunction Indicator Lamp - Transfer Case: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The service 4WD indicator gives an indication to the vehicle operator when the Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) has recorded a Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) for an electronic transfer case circuit or component malfunction. This indicator is controlled by a transistor on the instrument cluster circuit board based upon cluster programming and electronic messages received by the cluster from the TIPM over the Controller Area Network (CAN) data bus. The service 4WD indicator Light Emitting Diode (LED) is completely controlled by the instrument cluster logic circuit, and that logic will only allow this indicator to operate when the instrument cluster receives a battery current input on the fused ignition switch output (run-start) circuit. Therefore, the LED will always be OFF when the ignition switch is in any position except ON or START. The LED only illuminates when it is provided a path to ground by the instrument cluster transistor. The instrument cluster will turn ON the service 4WD indicator for the following reasons: - Bulb Test - Each time the ignition switch is turned to the ON position the service 4WD indicator is illuminated for about two seconds as a bulb test. - Service 4WD Indicator Lamp-On Message - Each time the cluster receives an electronic service 4WD indicator lamp-ON message from the TIPM, the service 4WD indicator will be illuminated. The indicator remains illuminated until the cluster receives a lamp-OFF message from the TIPM, or until the ignition switch is turned to the OFF position, whichever occurs first. - Communication Error - If the cluster receives no lamp-ON or lamp-OFF messages from the TIPM for 10 seconds the service 4WD indicator is illuminated by the cluster to indicate a loss of TIPM communication. The indicator remains controlled and illuminated by the cluster until a valid message is received from the TIPM. - Actuator Test - Each time the cluster is put through the actuator test, the service 4WD indicator will be turned ON, then OFF again during the bulb check portion of the test to confirm the functionality of the LED and the cluster control circuitry. The TIPM continually monitors the electronic transfer case control circuits and transfer case shift motor/mode sensor assembly to determine the condition of the system. The TIPM then sends the proper lamp-ON or lamp-OFF message to the ElectroMechanical Instrument Cluster (EMIC) (also known as the Cab Compartment Node/CCN). For further diagnosis of the service 4WD indicator or the instrument cluster circuitry that controls the LED, Refer to appropriate testing. For proper diagnosis of the TIPM, the EMIC, the CAN data bus or the electronic communication related to service 4WD indicator operation a diagnostic scan tool is required. Refer to the appropriate diagnostic information. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Odometer > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Odometer: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION An odometer and trip odometer are standard factory-installed equipment in all instrument clusters. The odometer, trip odometer, and engine hours information are displayed in a common electronic, blue-green Vacuum-Fluorescent Display (VFD) unit. This VFD unit is soldered onto the cluster electronic circuit board and is visible through a window with a smoked lens located on the lower edge of the speedometer gauge dial face of the cluster overlay. The dark lens over the VFD prevents the indicator from being clearly visible when it is not illuminated. The odometer, trip odometer, and engine hours information are not displayed simultaneously. The trip odometer reset switch on the instrument cluster circuit board toggles the display between odometer and trip odometer modes by depressing the odometer/trip odometer switch button that extends through the lower edge of the cluster lens, just left of the tachometer. When the trip odometer information is displayed, the word TRIP is also illuminated in the lower right corner of the VFD in a blue-green color and at the same lighting level as the trip odometer information. The engine hours information replaces the selected odometer or trip odometer information whenever the ignition switch is in the ON position and the engine is not running. The odometer, trip odometer, and engine hours information is stored in the instrument cluster memory. This information can be increased when the proper inputs are provided to the instrument cluster, but the information cannot be decreased. The odometer can display values up to 999,999 kilometers (999,999 miles). The odometer latches at these values, and will not roll over to zero. The trip odometer can display values up to 999.9 kilometers (999.9 miles) before it rolls over to zero. Engine hours are displayed in the format, hr9999. The cluster will accumulate values up to 9,999 hours before the display rolls over to zero. The odometer display does not have a decimal point and will not show values less than a full unit (kilometer or mile), while the trip odometer display does have a decimal point and will show tenths of a unit (kilometer or mile). The unit of measure (kilometers or miles) for the odometer and trip odometer display is not shown in the VFD. The unit of measure for the instrument cluster odometer/trip odometer is selected at the time that it is manufactured, and cannot be changed. The odometer also has a RENTAL CAR mode, which will illuminate the odometer information in the VFD whenever the driver side front door is opened with the ignition switch in the OFF or ACCESSORY positions. During daylight hours (exterior lamps are OFF) the odometer VFD is illuminated at full brightness for clear visibility. At night (exterior lamps are ON), the VFD lighting level is adjusted with the other cluster general illumination lamps using the panel lamps dimmer thumbwheel on the headlamp switch. However, a PARADE mode position of the panel lamps dimmer thumbwheel allows the VFD to be illuminated at full brightness if the exterior lamps are turned ON during daylight hours. The odometer/trip odometer VFD, the trip odometer switch, and the trip odometer switch button are serviced as a unit with the instrument cluster. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Odometer > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 14634 Odometer: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The odometer and trip odometer give an indication to the vehicle operator of the distance the vehicle has traveled. The engine hours give an indication of the cumulative engine-ON time. This indicator is controlled by the instrument cluster circuitry based upon cluster programming and electronic messages received by the cluster from the Powertrain Control Module (PCM) or Engine Control Module (ECM) over the Controller Area Network (CAN) data bus. The odometer, trip odometer and engine hours information are displayed by the instrument cluster Vacuum Fluorescent Display (VFD). The VFD will display the odometer information whenever the driver side front door is opened with the ignition switch in the OFF or ACCESSORY positions, and will display the last previously selected odometer or trip odometer information when the ignition switch is turned to the ON or START positions. The instrument cluster circuitry controls the VFD and provides the following features: - Odometer/Trip Odometer Display Toggling - Actuating the trip odometer reset switch button momentarily with the VFD illuminated will toggle the display between the odometer and trip odometer information. Each time the VFD is illuminated with the ignition switch in the ON or START positions, the display will automatically return to the last mode previously selected (odometer or trip odometer). - Engine Hours Display Toggling - When the trip odometer reset switch button is pressed and held for longer than about six seconds with the ignition switch in the ON position and the engine speed message from the PCM is zero, the trip odometer information will be momentarily displayed, then the engine hours information will be displayed. The VFD must be displaying the odometer information when the trip odometer reset switch button is pressed in order to toggle to the engine hours display. The engine hours will remain displayed for about 30 seconds, until the engine speed message is greater than zero, or until the ignition switch is turned to the OFF position, whichever occurs first. - Trip Odometer Reset - When the trip odometer reset switch button is pressed and held for longer than about two seconds with the ignition switch in the ON or START position, the trip odometer will be reset to 0.0 kilometers (miles). The VFD must be displaying the trip odometer information in order for the trip odometer information to be reset. - GASCAP Message Display - On vehicles manufactured with a United States country code, each time the cluster receives an electronic message from the PCM indicating a monitored leak in the evaporative emissions system, the cluster replaces the displayed odometer/trip odometer value with the textual message, GASCAP. This message serves as a reminder to the vehicle operator to check that the gas cap is properly installed and tightened, but could also indicate another source of air leakage in the on-board evaporative and vapor recovery emissions systems. Unless the leak is corrected, this message will latch and remain displayed during the current and each subsequent ignition cycle until the trip odometer reset button is pressed and released momentarily, which will revert the display to the odometer/trip odometer information that was last displayed for the remainder of that ignition cycle. Once the source of a leak has been corrected, either momentarily pressing the trip odometer reset button or cycling the ignition switch will unlatch the message and return the odometer/trip odometer to normal operation. - Communication Error - If the cluster fails to receive an electronic distance message during normal operation, it will hold and display the last data received until the ignition switch is turned to the OFF position. If the cluster does not receive a distance message within one second after the ignition switch is turned to the ON position, it will display the last distance value stored in the cluster memory. If the cluster is unable to display distance information due to an error internal to the cluster, the VFD will display Error. - Actuator Test - Each time the cluster is put through the actuator test, the odometer VFD will display all of its segments simultaneously, then step through each character segment individually during the VFD portion of the test to confirm the functionality of the VFD and the cluster control circuitry. The PCM continually monitors the vehicle speed pulse information received from the Vehicle Speed Sensor (VSS) or the Controller Anti-lock Brake (CAB) and engine speed pulse information received from the crankshaft position sensor, then sends the proper messages to the ElectroMechanical Instrument Cluster (EMIC) (also known as the Cab Compartment Node/CCN). For further diagnosis of the odometer/trip odometer or the instrument cluster circuitry that controls these functions, Refer to appropriate testing. For proper diagnosis of the VSS, the crankshaft position sensor, the CAB, the PCM, the EMIC, the CAN data bus or the electronic communication related to odometer/trip odometer operation a diagnostic scan tool is required. Refer to the appropriate diagnostic information. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Oil Change Reminder Lamp > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 18-005-08B > Aug > 08 > Engine Controls False Oil Change Indicator Oil Change Reminder Lamp: Customer Interest Engine Controls - False Oil Change Indicator NUMBER: 18-005-08 REV. B GROUP: Vehicle Performance DATE: August 20, 2008 THIS BULLETIN SUPERSEDES TECHNICAL SERVICE BULLETIN 18-005-08 REV. A, DATED JUNE 13, 2008, WHICH SHOULD BE REMOVED FROM YOUR FILES. ALL REVISIONS ARE HIGHLIGHTED WITH **ASTERISKS** AND INCLUDE ADDITIONAL MODELS. THE StarSCAN(R) FLASH FILES FOR THIS BULLETIN MUST BE RETRIEVED FROM THE INTERNET. StarSCAN(R) SOFTWARE LEVEL MUST BE AT RELEASE 8.05 OR HIGHER FOR THIS BULLETIN. StarMOBILE STANDALONE MODE OR StarMOBILE DESKTOP CLIENT MAY ALSO BE USED TO PERFORM THIS PROCEDURE. SUBJECT: FLASH: Turn Off Oil Change Indicator Message OVERVIEW: This bulletin involves selectively erasing and reprogramming the Powertrain Control Module (PCM). MODELS: **2008 (DR) Ram Truck (International Markets)** **2008 (HB) Durango (International Markets)** **2007 - 2008 (JK) Wrangler (International Markets)** **2007 (JK) wrangler** **2008 (KA) Nitro (International Markets)** **2008 (ND) Dakota (International Markets)** 2008 (WH) Grand Cherokee (International Markets) 2008 (XH) Commander (International Markets) NOTE: This bulletin applies to: - **2007 JK vehicles built with a 3.8L engine (sales code EGK) after June 17, 2008 (MDH 0617XX)** - **2008 JK vehicles built with a 3.8L engine (sales code EGK) before April 28, 2008 (MDH 0428XX)** - **2008 DR/HB/ND vehicles built with a 4.7L engine (sales code EVE )** - WK/WH vehicles built with a 4.7L engine (sales code EVE) built before January 25, 2008 (0125XXMDH) - KA vehicles equipped with a 4.0L engine (sales code EGS) built before July 8.2008 (MDH 0708XX) SYMPTOM/CONDITION: Some international vehicle's may experience message on the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) or in the Odometer that tells the driver an oil change is necessary after 3000 miles. This message should not be displayed for these international vehicles and this PCM flash will turn this feature off. DIAGNOSIS: Using a Scan Tool (StarSCAN(R)) with the appropriate Diagnostic Procedures available in TechCONNECT, verify all engine systems are functioning as designed. If DTC's are present record them on the repair order and repair as necessary before proceeding further with this bulletin. If no DTC's are present, perform the Repair Procedure. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Oil Change Reminder Lamp > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 18-005-08B > Aug > 08 > Engine Controls False Oil Change Indicator > Page 14643 SPECIAL TOOLS / EQUIPMENT REQUIRED: REPAIR PROCEDURE - USING THE INTERNET TO RETRIEVE THE FLASH FILE: NOTE: Before performing this Repair Procedure, the operating software in the StarSCAN(R) must be programmed with software release level 8.05 or higher. The software release level is visible in the blue header at the top of the StarSCAN(R) screen. NOTE: The StarSCAN(R) diagnostic scan tool fully supports Internet connectivity. However, to take advantage of this feature you must first configure the StarSCAN(R) for your dealership's network. Make sure the StarSCAN(R) is configured to the dealership's network before proceeding. For instruction on setting up your StarSCAN(R) for the dealer's network refer to either: "DealerCONNECT > Service > StarSCAN and StarMOBILE tools > Online Documentation", or refer to the StarSCAN(R) Quick Start Networking Guide. The StarSCAN(R) Quick Start Networking Guide is also available on the website under the "Download Center". NOTE: If this flash process is interrupted/aborted, the flash should be restarted. 1. Open the hood and install a battery charger. Using a voltmeter, verify that the charging rate provides 13.2 - 13.5 volts. Set the battery charger to continuous charge. Do not allow the charger to time out during the flash process. Remove the charger from the battery when the flash process is complete. NOTE: Do not allow the charging voltage to climb above 13.5 volts during the flash process. 2. Connect the CH9410 StarSCAN(R) ethernet cable to the StarSCAN(R) and the dealer's network drop. 3. Connect the CH9404D StarSCAN(R) vehicle cable to the StarSCAN(R) and the vehicle. 4. Power ON the StarSCAN(R). 5. Turn the ignition switch on. 6. Retrieve the old PCM part number. Using the StarSCAN(R) at the "Home" screen: a. Select "ECU View" b. Touch the screen to highlight the PCM in the list of modules. c. Select "More Options" d. Select "ECU Flash". e. Record the part number at the top of the "Flash PCM" screen for later reference. f. Select "Browse for New File". Follow the on screen instructions. g. Select "Download to Scantool". h. Select "Close" after the download is complete, then select "Back". i. Highlight the listed calibration. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Oil Change Reminder Lamp > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 18-005-08B > Aug > 08 > Engine Controls False Oil Change Indicator > Page 14644 j. Select "Update Controller". k. When the update is complete, select "OK". 7. Verify the part number at the top of the "Flash PCM" screen has updated to the new part number. NOTE: Due to the PCM programming procedure, a DTC may be set in other modules within the vehicle, if so equipped. Some DTC's may cause the MIL to illuminate. From the "Home" screen select "System View". Then select "All DTCs". Press "Clear All Stored DTCs" if there are any DTCs shown on the list. POLICY: Reimbursable within the provisions of the warranty. TIME ALLOWANCE: FAILURE CODE: Disclaimer: This bulletin is supplied as technical information only and is not an authorization for repair. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Oil Change Reminder Lamp > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Oil Change Reminder Lamp: > 08-002-09 > Feb > 09 > Instruments - Vehicle Information Center Setup Oil Change Reminder Lamp: All Technical Service Bulletins Instruments - Vehicle Information Center Setup NUMBER: 08-002-09 GROUP: Electrical DATE: February 4, 2009 THIS BULLETIN SUPERSEDES TECHNICAL SERVICE BULLETIN 08-014-07, DATED JULY 11, 2007, WHICH SHOULD BE REMOVED FROM YOUR FILES. ALL REVISIONS ARE HIGHLIGHTED WITH **ASTERISKS** AND INCLUDES ADDITIONAL YEARS AND MODELS. SUBJECT: Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) Oil Change Indicator System - Dealer Preferences During Prep MODELS: 2008 (DR) Ram Truck **2009 (HB) Durango** **2009 (HG) Aspen** **2009 (JC) Journey** **2008 - 2009 (KA) Nitro** **2008 - 2009 (KK) Liberty** **2009 (LC) Challenger** **2008 - 2009 (LX) 300 / Magnum / Charger** **2008 - 2009 (RI) Caravan / Town & Country** NOTE: This Bulletin applies to vehicles equipped with a programmable EVIC. DISCUSSION: **Many models now include an oil change indicator system**. This system displays an "Oil Change Required" or "Oil Change" message at appropriate intervals on the instrument cluster. The vehicles listed above may be equipped with a programmable display on the Electronic Vehicle Information Center, (EVIC). The "Oil Change Required message may also include the dealerships name and phone number which can be programmed into the vehicle with the StarSCAN(R) or StarMOBILE(R) scan tool. NOTE: **Other vehicles may be added at any time. Dealers can determine if the feature is available by following the procedures below. If Enable/Disable Dealer Contact Information is active, the feature can be used to enter the servicing dealer's information.** The following procedure describes the steps to add, delete or change a dealership name and phone number on the display. NOTE: If NOT programmed during vehicle prep, customer approval MUST be obtained before adding or changing this information. NOTE: When performing this Procedure, the software release level in the StarSCAN(R) or StarMOBILE(R); must be programmed with the latest level software. The software release level is visible in the blue header at the top of the StarSCAN(R) or StarMOBILE(R) screen. 1. Connect the StarSCAN(R) or StarMOBILE(R). (in Pass-Through Mode) NOTE: To use the StarMOBILE(R) in Pass-Through Mode requires that StarMOBILE(R) be connected to the dealership network via a wired or wireless connection. For more information on how to use the StarMOBILE(R) in Pass-Through Mode, see the StarMOBILE(R) training tutorials available on DealerCONNECT > Service > Repair > StarSCAN(R) and StarMOBILE(R) Tools link or at the website. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Oil Change Reminder Lamp > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Oil Change Reminder Lamp: > 08-002-09 > Feb > 09 > Instruments - Vehicle Information Center Setup > Page 14650 2. From the Home Screen, enter "ECU VIEW or "VEHICLE PREP". 3. Select "CCN". 4. Select "Misc. Functions". 5. Select "Enable/Disable Dealer Contact Information". 6. Select "Enable" or "Disable" as desired. 7. If enabled, select "Program Dealer Contact Information" and follow on screen prompts. 8. "Reset will cause display to read: "Contact Dealer" as default. 9. Select finish to exit. POLICY: Information Only Disclaimer: This bulletin is supplied as technical information only and is not an authorization for repair. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Oil Change Reminder Lamp > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Oil Change Reminder Lamp: > 18-005-08B > Aug > 08 > Engine Controls - False Oil Change Indicator Oil Change Reminder Lamp: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine Controls - False Oil Change Indicator NUMBER: 18-005-08 REV. B GROUP: Vehicle Performance DATE: August 20, 2008 THIS BULLETIN SUPERSEDES TECHNICAL SERVICE BULLETIN 18-005-08 REV. A, DATED JUNE 13, 2008, WHICH SHOULD BE REMOVED FROM YOUR FILES. ALL REVISIONS ARE HIGHLIGHTED WITH **ASTERISKS** AND INCLUDE ADDITIONAL MODELS. THE StarSCAN(R) FLASH FILES FOR THIS BULLETIN MUST BE RETRIEVED FROM THE INTERNET. StarSCAN(R) SOFTWARE LEVEL MUST BE AT RELEASE 8.05 OR HIGHER FOR THIS BULLETIN. StarMOBILE STANDALONE MODE OR StarMOBILE DESKTOP CLIENT MAY ALSO BE USED TO PERFORM THIS PROCEDURE. SUBJECT: FLASH: Turn Off Oil Change Indicator Message OVERVIEW: This bulletin involves selectively erasing and reprogramming the Powertrain Control Module (PCM). MODELS: **2008 (DR) Ram Truck (International Markets)** **2008 (HB) Durango (International Markets)** **2007 - 2008 (JK) Wrangler (International Markets)** **2007 (JK) wrangler** **2008 (KA) Nitro (International Markets)** **2008 (ND) Dakota (International Markets)** 2008 (WH) Grand Cherokee (International Markets) 2008 (XH) Commander (International Markets) NOTE: This bulletin applies to: - **2007 JK vehicles built with a 3.8L engine (sales code EGK) after June 17, 2008 (MDH 0617XX)** - **2008 JK vehicles built with a 3.8L engine (sales code EGK) before April 28, 2008 (MDH 0428XX)** - **2008 DR/HB/ND vehicles built with a 4.7L engine (sales code EVE )** - WK/WH vehicles built with a 4.7L engine (sales code EVE) built before January 25, 2008 (0125XXMDH) - KA vehicles equipped with a 4.0L engine (sales code EGS) built before July 8.2008 (MDH 0708XX) SYMPTOM/CONDITION: Some international vehicle's may experience message on the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) or in the Odometer that tells the driver an oil change is necessary after 3000 miles. This message should not be displayed for these international vehicles and this PCM flash will turn this feature off. DIAGNOSIS: Using a Scan Tool (StarSCAN(R)) with the appropriate Diagnostic Procedures available in TechCONNECT, verify all engine systems are functioning as designed. If DTC's are present record them on the repair order and repair as necessary before proceeding further with this bulletin. If no DTC's are present, perform the Repair Procedure. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Oil Change Reminder Lamp > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Oil Change Reminder Lamp: > 18-005-08B > Aug > 08 > Engine Controls - False Oil Change Indicator > Page 14655 SPECIAL TOOLS / EQUIPMENT REQUIRED: REPAIR PROCEDURE - USING THE INTERNET TO RETRIEVE THE FLASH FILE: NOTE: Before performing this Repair Procedure, the operating software in the StarSCAN(R) must be programmed with software release level 8.05 or higher. The software release level is visible in the blue header at the top of the StarSCAN(R) screen. NOTE: The StarSCAN(R) diagnostic scan tool fully supports Internet connectivity. However, to take advantage of this feature you must first configure the StarSCAN(R) for your dealership's network. Make sure the StarSCAN(R) is configured to the dealership's network before proceeding. For instruction on setting up your StarSCAN(R) for the dealer's network refer to either: "DealerCONNECT > Service > StarSCAN and StarMOBILE tools > Online Documentation", or refer to the StarSCAN(R) Quick Start Networking Guide. The StarSCAN(R) Quick Start Networking Guide is also available on the website under the "Download Center". NOTE: If this flash process is interrupted/aborted, the flash should be restarted. 1. Open the hood and install a battery charger. Using a voltmeter, verify that the charging rate provides 13.2 - 13.5 volts. Set the battery charger to continuous charge. Do not allow the charger to time out during the flash process. Remove the charger from the battery when the flash process is complete. NOTE: Do not allow the charging voltage to climb above 13.5 volts during the flash process. 2. Connect the CH9410 StarSCAN(R) ethernet cable to the StarSCAN(R) and the dealer's network drop. 3. Connect the CH9404D StarSCAN(R) vehicle cable to the StarSCAN(R) and the vehicle. 4. Power ON the StarSCAN(R). 5. Turn the ignition switch on. 6. Retrieve the old PCM part number. Using the StarSCAN(R) at the "Home" screen: a. Select "ECU View" b. Touch the screen to highlight the PCM in the list of modules. c. Select "More Options" d. Select "ECU Flash". e. Record the part number at the top of the "Flash PCM" screen for later reference. f. Select "Browse for New File". Follow the on screen instructions. g. Select "Download to Scantool". h. Select "Close" after the download is complete, then select "Back". i. Highlight the listed calibration. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Oil Change Reminder Lamp > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Oil Change Reminder Lamp: > 18-005-08B > Aug > 08 > Engine Controls - False Oil Change Indicator > Page 14656 j. Select "Update Controller". k. When the update is complete, select "OK". 7. Verify the part number at the top of the "Flash PCM" screen has updated to the new part number. NOTE: Due to the PCM programming procedure, a DTC may be set in other modules within the vehicle, if so equipped. Some DTC's may cause the MIL to illuminate. From the "Home" screen select "System View". Then select "All DTCs". Press "Clear All Stored DTCs" if there are any DTCs shown on the list. POLICY: Reimbursable within the provisions of the warranty. TIME ALLOWANCE: FAILURE CODE: Disclaimer: This bulletin is supplied as technical information only and is not an authorization for repair. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Oil Change Reminder Lamp > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Oil Change Reminder Lamp: > 08-002-09 > Feb > 09 > Instruments - Vehicle Information Center Setup Oil Change Reminder Lamp: All Technical Service Bulletins Instruments - Vehicle Information Center Setup NUMBER: 08-002-09 GROUP: Electrical DATE: February 4, 2009 THIS BULLETIN SUPERSEDES TECHNICAL SERVICE BULLETIN 08-014-07, DATED JULY 11, 2007, WHICH SHOULD BE REMOVED FROM YOUR FILES. ALL REVISIONS ARE HIGHLIGHTED WITH **ASTERISKS** AND INCLUDES ADDITIONAL YEARS AND MODELS. SUBJECT: Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) Oil Change Indicator System - Dealer Preferences During Prep MODELS: 2008 (DR) Ram Truck **2009 (HB) Durango** **2009 (HG) Aspen** **2009 (JC) Journey** **2008 - 2009 (KA) Nitro** **2008 - 2009 (KK) Liberty** **2009 (LC) Challenger** **2008 - 2009 (LX) 300 / Magnum / Charger** **2008 - 2009 (RI) Caravan / Town & Country** NOTE: This Bulletin applies to vehicles equipped with a programmable EVIC. DISCUSSION: **Many models now include an oil change indicator system**. This system displays an "Oil Change Required" or "Oil Change" message at appropriate intervals on the instrument cluster. The vehicles listed above may be equipped with a programmable display on the Electronic Vehicle Information Center, (EVIC). The "Oil Change Required message may also include the dealerships name and phone number which can be programmed into the vehicle with the StarSCAN(R) or StarMOBILE(R) scan tool. NOTE: **Other vehicles may be added at any time. Dealers can determine if the feature is available by following the procedures below. If Enable/Disable Dealer Contact Information is active, the feature can be used to enter the servicing dealer's information.** The following procedure describes the steps to add, delete or change a dealership name and phone number on the display. NOTE: If NOT programmed during vehicle prep, customer approval MUST be obtained before adding or changing this information. NOTE: When performing this Procedure, the software release level in the StarSCAN(R) or StarMOBILE(R); must be programmed with the latest level software. The software release level is visible in the blue header at the top of the StarSCAN(R) or StarMOBILE(R) screen. 1. Connect the StarSCAN(R) or StarMOBILE(R). (in Pass-Through Mode) NOTE: To use the StarMOBILE(R) in Pass-Through Mode requires that StarMOBILE(R) be connected to the dealership network via a wired or wireless connection. For more information on how to use the StarMOBILE(R) in Pass-Through Mode, see the StarMOBILE(R) training tutorials available on DealerCONNECT > Service > Repair > StarSCAN(R) and StarMOBILE(R) Tools link or at the website. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Oil Change Reminder Lamp > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Oil Change Reminder Lamp: > 08-002-09 > Feb > 09 > Instruments - Vehicle Information Center Setup > Page 14662 2. From the Home Screen, enter "ECU VIEW or "VEHICLE PREP". 3. Select "CCN". 4. Select "Misc. Functions". 5. Select "Enable/Disable Dealer Contact Information". 6. Select "Enable" or "Disable" as desired. 7. If enabled, select "Program Dealer Contact Information" and follow on screen prompts. 8. "Reset will cause display to read: "Contact Dealer" as default. 9. Select finish to exit. POLICY: Information Only Disclaimer: This bulletin is supplied as technical information only and is not an authorization for repair. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Oil Change Reminder Lamp > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Oil Change Reminder Lamp: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION A change oil indicator is standard equipment on all instrument clusters. However, on vehicles manufactured for export markets or vehicles equipped with the optional diesel engine, this indicator is electronically disabled. The change oil indication appears within the odometer Vacuum Fluorescent Display (VFD) unit. The change oil indicator consists of cycling textual CHAngE and OIL messages which appear in place of the odometer information in the odometer display. The odometer VFD is soldered onto the cluster electronic circuit board, and is visible through a window with a smoked clear lens located on the lower edge of the speedometer gauge dial face of the cluster overlay. The dark lens over the VFD prevents it from being clearly visible when it is not illuminated. The change oil textual messages appear in the same blue-green color and at the same lighting level as the odometer information when they are illuminated by the instrument cluster electronic circuit board. The change oil indicator is serviced as a unit with the VFD in the instrument cluster. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Oil Change Reminder Lamp > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 14665 Oil Change Reminder Lamp: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The change oil indicator gives an indication to the vehicle operator when a duty-cycle algorithm contained within the software of the Powertrain Control Module (PCM) determines that a recommended oil change interval has been attained. This indicator is controlled by the instrument cluster logic circuit based upon cluster programming and electronic messages received over the Controller Area Network (CAN) data bus from the PCM. The change oil indicator function of the odometer Vacuum Fluorescent Display (VFD) unit is completely controlled by the instrument cluster logic circuit, and that logic will only allow this indicator to operate when the instrument cluster receives a battery current input on the fused ignition switch output (run-start) circuit. Therefore, the odometer VFD change oil indication will always be OFF when the ignition switch is in any position except ON or START. The instrument cluster will turn ON the change oil indicator for the following reasons: - Change Oil Indicator Lamp-On Message - Each time the ignition switch is turned to the ON position and the cluster receives an electronic change oil indicator lamp-ON message from the PCM indicating that a duty-cycle based recommended oil change interval has been attained, the change oil indicator will be illuminated for about three seconds, until the trip odometer reset switch button is depressed, or until the ignition switch is turned to the OFF position, whichever occurs first. - Change Oil Indicator Reset Procedure - Once an engine oil change has been completed, the PCM duty cycle counters can be reset using the following procedure. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position, but DO NOT start the engine. Slowly depress and release the accelerator pedal fully three times within ten seconds. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position. If the change oil indicator illuminates the next time the engine is started, repeat this procedure. The PCM continually monitors numerous sensor inputs to determine the duty-cycles to which the engine is being subjected. A pre-programmed algorithm within the PCM then determines when to send the proper lamp-ON or lamp-OFF message to the ElectroMechanical Instrument Cluster (EMIC) (also known as the Cab Compartment Node/CCN). For proper diagnosis of the change oil indicator, the PCM, the EMIC, the CAN data bus or the electronic communication related to change oil indicator operation a diagnostic scan tool is required. Refer to the appropriate diagnostic information. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Oil Change Reminder Lamp > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 14666 Oil Change Reminder Lamp: Service and Repair OIL CHANGE INDICATOR - RESET To reset the "Oil Change Required" indicator (after performing the scheduled maintenance) refer to the following procedure: - 1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position (Do not start engine). - 2. Fully depress the accelerator pedal slowly three times within 10 seconds. - 3. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF/LOCK position. NOTE: If the "Oil Change Required" indicator message illuminates when you start the vehicle, the indicator did not reset. If necessary repeat this procedure. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Oil Pressure Gauge > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Oil Pressure Gauge: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION An oil pressure gauge is standard equipment on all instrument clusters except for ST vehicles with a gasoline engine. This gauge is located in the upper right quadrant of the instrument cluster, above the coolant temperature gauge. This gauge consists of a movable gauge needle or pointer controlled by the instrument cluster circuitry and a fixed 90 degree scale on the cluster overlay that reads left-to-right from L (or Low) to H (or High) for gasoline engines. On vehicles with a diesel engine the scale reads from 0 kPa to 760 kPa in markets where a metric instrument cluster is specified, or from 0 psi to 110 psi in all other markets. An International Control and Display Symbol icon for Engine Oil is located on the cluster overlay, directly below the left end of the gauge scale. The oil pressure gauge graphics are black against a white field except for a single red graduation at the low end of the gauge scale making them clearly visible within the instrument cluster in daylight. When illuminated from behind by the panel lamps dimmer controlled cluster general illumination lighting with the exterior lamps turned ON, the black graphics appear blue-green and the red graphics still appear red. The gauge needle has internal optical illumination. Gauge illumination is provided by replaceable incandescent bulb and holder units located on the instrument cluster electronic circuit board. The oil pressure gauge is serviced as a unit with the instrument cluster. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Oil Pressure Gauge > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 14671 Oil Pressure Gauge: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The oil pressure gauge gives an indication to the vehicle operator of the engine oil pressure. This gauge is controlled by the instrument cluster circuit board based upon cluster programming and electronic messages received by the cluster from the Powertrain Control Module (PCM) on vehicles with a gasoline engine, or from the Engine Control Module (ECM) on vehicles equipped with a diesel engine over the Controller Area Network (CAN) data bus. The oil pressure gauge is an air core magnetic unit that receives battery current on the instrument cluster electronic circuit board through the fused ignition switch output (run-start) circuit whenever the ignition switch is in the ON or START positions. The cluster is programmed to move the gauge needle back to the low end of the scale after the ignition switch is turned to the OFF position. The instrument cluster circuitry controls the gauge needle position and provides the following features: - Engine Oil Pressure Message - The instrument cluster circuitry restricts the oil pressure gauge needle operation in order to provide readings that are consistent with customer expectations. Each time the cluster receives an electronic engine oil pressure message from the PCM or ECM indicating the pressure is above about 41 kPa (6 psi) the cluster holds the gauge needle at a point near the middle increment within the normal range on the gauge scale. Engine Oil Pressure Low Message - Each time the cluster receives three consecutive electronic engine oil pressure messages from the PCM or ECM indicating the pressure is below about 41 kPa (6 psi), the gauge needle is moved to the red graduation at the far left end of the gauge scale, the check gauges indicator is illuminated, and a single chime tone is generated. The gauge needle remains at the left end of the gauge scale and the check gauges indicator remains illuminated until the cluster receives a message from the PCM or ECM indicating that the pressure is above about 41 kPa (6 psi), or until the ignition switch is turned to the OFF position, whichever occurs first. The cluster will only turn ON the check gauges indicator in response to a low pressure message if the engine speed is greater than zero. - Communication Error - If the cluster fails to receive an engine oil pressure message, it will hold the gauge needle at the last indication for about 10 seconds, or until the ignition switch is turned to the OFF position, whichever occurs first. After 10 seconds, the cluster will move the gauge needle to the low end of the gauge scale. - Actuator Test - Each time the cluster is put through the actuator test, the oil pressure gauge needle will be swept to several calibration points on the gauge scale in a prescribed sequence in order to confirm the functionality of the gauge and the cluster control circuitry. The PCM (gasoline engines) or ECM (diesel engines) continually monitors the engine oil pressure sensor to determine the engine oil pressure. The PCM or ECM then sends the proper messages to the ElectroMechanical Instrument Cluster (EMIC) (also known as the Cab Compartment Node/CCN). If the instrument cluster turns ON the check gauges indicator due to a low oil pressure gauge reading, it may indicate that the engine or the engine oiling system requires service. For proper diagnosis of the engine oil pressure sensor, the PCM, the ECM, the EMIC, the CAN data bus or the electronic communication related to oil pressure gauge operation a diagnostic scan tool is required. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Oil Pressure Sender > Component Information > Locations Oil Pressure Sender: Locations Component ID: 496 Component : SWITCH-OIL PRESSURE Connector: Name : SWITCH-OIL PRESSURE Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Pin Circuit Description 1 G6 18VT/GY OIL PRESSURE SIGNAL Pin Circuit Description 1 G6 16VT/GY OIL PRESSURE SIGNAL 2-Component Location - 8 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Oil Pressure Sender > Component Information > Locations > Page 14675 Component Location - 11 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Oil Pressure Sender > Component Information > Locations > Page 14676 Component Location - 12 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Oil Pressure Sender > Component Information > Locations > Page 14677 Component Location - 14 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Oil Pressure Sender > Component Information > Locations > Page 14678 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Oil Pressure Sender > Component Information > Locations > Page 14679 Oil Pressure Sender: Diagrams Component ID: 496 Component : SWITCH-OIL PRESSURE Connector: Name : SWITCH-OIL PRESSURE Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Pin Circuit Description 1 G6 18VT/GY OIL PRESSURE SIGNAL Pin Circuit Description 1 G6 16VT/GY OIL PRESSURE SIGNAL 2-Component Location - 8 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Oil Pressure Sender > Component Information > Locations > Page 14680 Component Location - 11 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Oil Pressure Sender > Component Information > Locations > Page 14681 Component Location - 12 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Oil Pressure Sender > Component Information > Locations > Page 14682 Component Location - 14 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Oil Pressure Sender > Component Information > Locations > Page 14683 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Oil Pressure Sender > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Oil Pressure Sender: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The oil pressure switch is a pressure sensitive switch that is activated by the engine's oil pressure (in the main oil gallery). The switch is a two terminal device (one terminal is provided to the wiring harness and the other terminal is the switch's metal housing that screws into the engine block). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Oil Pressure Sender > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 14686 Oil Pressure Sender: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The oil pressure switch is normally "Closed." The switch changes from a "Closed" circuit to an "Open" circuit, on increasing pressure of 7 PSIG. The oil pressure switch changes from an "Open" circuit to a "Closed" circuit, on decreasing pressure, between 2 PSIG and 4 PSIG. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Oil Pressure Sender > Component Information > Service and Repair > Engine Oil Pressure Sensor/Switch - Installation Oil Pressure Sender: Service and Repair Engine Oil Pressure Sensor/Switch - Installation INSTALLATION 1. Install oil pressure sender. 2. Connect oil pressure sender wire. 3. Install front splash shield. 4. Lower vehicle. 5. Connect the negative battery cable. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Oil Pressure Sender > Component Information > Service and Repair > Engine Oil Pressure Sensor/Switch - Installation > Page 14689 Oil Pressure Sender: Service and Repair Engine Oil Pressure Sensor/Switch - Removal REMOVAL 1. Disconnect the negative cable from the battery. 2. Raise vehicle on hoist. 3. Remove front splash shield. 4. Disconnect oil pressure sender wire (4). 5. Remove the pressure sender (2). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Oil Pressure Warning Lamp/Indicator > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Oil Pressure Warning Lamp/Indicator: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION A low oil pressure indicator is standard equipment only in the four-gauge instrument clusters of all ST vehicles with a gasoline engine. This indicator is located on the left side of the instrument cluster, to the left of the fuel gauge. The low oil pressure indicator consists of a stencil-like cutout of the International Control and Display Symbol icon for Engine Oil in the opaque layer of the instrument cluster overlay. The dark outer layer of the overlay prevents the indicator from being clearly visible when it is not illuminated. A red Light Emitting Diode (LED) behind the cutout in the opaque layer of the overlay causes the icon to appear in red through the translucent outer layer of the overlay when it is illuminated from behind by the LED, which is soldered onto the instrument cluster electronic circuit board. The low oil pressure indicator is serviced as a unit with the instrument cluster. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Oil Pressure Warning Lamp/Indicator > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 14694 Oil Pressure Warning Lamp/Indicator: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The low oil pressure indicator gives an indication to the vehicle operator when the engine oil pressure reading reflects a condition requiring immediate attention. This indicator is controlled by a transistor on the instrument cluster circuit board based upon cluster programming and electronic messages received by the cluster from the Powertrain Control Module (PCM) over the Controller Area Network (CAN) data bus. The low oil pressure indicator Light Emitting Diode (LED) is completely controlled by the instrument cluster logic circuit, and that logic will only allow this indicator to operate when the instrument cluster receives a battery current input on the fused ignition switch output (run-start) circuit. Therefore, the LED will always be OFF when the ignition switch is in any position except ON or START. The LED only illuminates when it is provided a path to ground by the instrument cluster transistor. The instrument cluster will turn ON the low oil pressure indicator for the following reasons: - Engine Oil Pressure Low Message - Each time the cluster receives an electronic engine oil pressure message from the PCM indicating the pressure is about 6.9 kPa (1 psi) or lower, the low oil pressure indicator will be illuminated. The indicator remains illuminated until the cluster receives a message from the PCM indicating that the pressure is above about 6.9 kPa (1 psi), or until the ignition switch is turned to the OFF position, whichever occurs first. The cluster will only turn the indicator ON in response to low engine oil pressure if the engine speed is greater than zero. Actuator Test - Each time the cluster is put through the actuator test, the low oil pressure indicator will be turned ON, then OFF again during the bulb check portion of the test to confirm the functionality of the LED and the cluster control circuitry. The PCM continually monitors the engine oil pressure sensor to determine the engine oil pressure. The PCM then sends the proper messages to the ElectroMechanical Instrument Cluster (EMIC) (also known as the Cab Compartment Node/CCN). For further diagnosis of the low oil pressure indicator or the instrument cluster circuitry that controls the LED, Refer to appropriate testing. For proper diagnosis of the engine oil pressure sensor, the PCM, the EMIC, the CAN data bus or the electronic communication related to low oil pressure indicator operation a diagnostic scan tool is required. Refer to the appropriate diagnostic information. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Outside Temperature Display > Outside Temperature Display Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Outside Temperature Display Sensor: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The ambient temperature sensor is a variable resistor mounted to a bracket that is secured with a screw to the left side of the radiator yoke, behind the radiator grille and in front of the engine compartment. The ambient temperature sensor cannot be adjusted or repaired and, if inoperative or damaged, it must be replaced. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Outside Temperature Display > Outside Temperature Display Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 14700 Outside Temperature Display Sensor: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The ambient temperature sensor is a variable resistor that operates on a five-volt reference signal sent by the Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM). The resistance in the sensor changes as temperature changes, changing the temperature sensor signal circuit voltage to the TIPM. Based upon the resistance in the sensor, the TIPM senses a specific voltage on the temperature sensor signal circuit. The TIPM then translates the voltage into a temperature reading that it sent over the Programmable Communications Interface (PCI) data bus circuit to other modules utilizing temperature information. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Outside Temperature Display > Outside Temperature Display Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 14701 Outside Temperature Display Sensor: Testing and Inspection AMBIENT TEMPERATURE SENSOR The temperature function is supported by the ambient temperature sensor, a wiring circuit, and the Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM). When the sensor is exposed to temperatures above 60° C (140° F), or if the sensor circuit is shorted, 60° C (130/140° F) will appear in the display in place of the temperature. When the sensor is exposed to temperatures below - 40° C (- 40° F) or if the sensor circuit is open, - 40° C (- 40° F) will appear in the display for Compass Mini - Trip Computer (CMTC) equipped vehicles and - - ° C (- - ° F) will be displayed on Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) equipped vehicles. The ambient temperature sensor circuit can be diagnosed using the following Temperature System Test, and Sensor Test. If the temperature sensor and circuit are confirmed to be OK, but the temperature display is inoperative or incorrect, test the Compass Mini - Trip Computer (CMTC), See: Compass/Testing and Inspection or Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC), See: Driver/Vehicle Information Display/Testing and Inspection as applicable. TEMPERATURE SYSTEM TEST For complete circuit diagrams, refer to the appropriate wiring information. The wiring information includes wiring diagrams, proper wire and connector repair procedures, details of wire harness routing and retention, connector pin-out information and location views for the various wire harness connectors, splices and grounds. NOTE: Temperature readings do not update immediately. Allow up to 60 seconds after the ignition switch is turned to the On position for readings to meet test specifications. 1. Turn the ignition switch to the Off position. Disconnect the wire harness connector from the ambient temperature sensor. 2. Turn the ignition switch to the On position. The CMTC display should now read - 40° C (- 40° F) or the EVIC display should now read - - ° C (- ° F). If OK, go to STEP 3. If not OK, repair the shorted sensor return circuit or ambient temperature sensor signal circuit to the ambient temperature sensor as required. 3. Turn the ignition switch to the Off position. Taking care not to damage the wire terminals, connect a jumper wire between the two terminals in the body half of the ambient temperature sensor harness connector. 4. Turn the ignition switch to the On position. The CMTC or EVIC display should now read 60° C (130/140° F). If OK, go to STEP 5. If not OK, repair the open sensor return circuit or ambient temperature sensor signal circuit to the ambient temperature sensor as required. 5. Clear any Diagnostic Trouble Codes that may have been set while performing the test. Perform further diagnosis of the Compass Mini - Trip Computer (CMTC), See: Compass/Testing and Inspection or Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC), See: Driver/Vehicle Information Display/Testing and Inspection as applicable. SENSOR TEST 1. Turn the ignition switch to the Off position. Disconnect the ambient temperature sensor harness connector. 2. Measure the resistance of the ambient temperature sensor. At - 40° C (- 40° F), the sensor resistance is 336 Kohms. At 55° C (130° F), the sensor resistance is 2.488 Kohms. The sensor resistance should read between these two values. If OK, perform further diagnosis of the Compass Mini - Trip Computer (CMTC), See: Compass/Testing and Inspection or Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC), See: Driver/Vehicle Information Display/Testing and Inspection as applicable. If not OK, replace the inoperative ambient temperature sensor. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Outside Temperature Display > Outside Temperature Display Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Outside Temperature Display Sensor: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL 1. Open the hood. 2. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. 3. Working on the underside of the hood, remove screw holding sensor to hood panel. 4. Disconnect the sensor electrical connector and remove sensor from vehicle. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Outside Temperature Display > Outside Temperature Display Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 14704 Outside Temperature Display Sensor: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION 1. Connect the sensor electrical connector. 2. Working on the underside of the hood, install screw holding sensor to hood panel. 3. Connect the battery negative cable. 4. Close the hood. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Overdrive Indicator Lamp > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Overdrive Indicator Lamp: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION An overdrive off indicator is standard equipment on all instrument clusters. However, on vehicles not equipped with an optional overdrive automatic transmission, this indicator is electronically disabled. This indicator is located on the right side of the instrument cluster, to the right of the coolant temperature gauge. The overdrive off indicator consists of a stencil-like cutout of the text O/D OFF in the opaque layer of the instrument cluster overlay. The dark outer layer of the overlay prevents the indicator from being clearly visible when it is not illuminated. An amber Light Emitting Diode (LED) behind the cutout in the opaque layer of the overlay causes the indicator to appear in amber through the translucent outer layer of the overlay when it is illuminated from behind by the LED, which is soldered onto the instrument cluster electronic circuit board. When the exterior lighting is turned ON, the illumination intensity of the overdrive off indicator is dimmable, which is adjusted along with the cluster general illumination lighting using the panel lamps dimmer thumbwheel on the headlamp switch. The overdrive off indicator is serviced as a unit with the instrument cluster. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Overdrive Indicator Lamp > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 14709 Overdrive Indicator Lamp: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The overdrive off indicator gives an indication to the vehicle operator when the overdrive-OFF position of the tow/haul switch has been selected, disabling the electronically controlled overdrive feature of the automatic transmission. This indicator is controlled by a transistor on the instrument cluster circuit board based upon cluster programming and electronic messages received by the cluster from the Powertrain Control Module (PCM) over the Controller Area Network (CAN) data bus. The overdrive off indicator Light Emitting Diode (LED) is completely controlled by the instrument cluster logic circuit, and that logic will only allow this indicator to operate when the instrument cluster receives a battery current input on the fused ignition switch output (run-start) circuit. Therefore, the LED will always be OFF when the ignition switch is in any position except ON or START. The LED only illuminates when it is provided a path to ground by the instrument cluster transistor. The instrument cluster will turn ON the overdrive off indicator for the following reasons: - Overdrive Off Indicator Lamp-On Message - Each time the cluster receives an electronic overdrive off indicator lamp-ON message from the PCM indicating that the overdrive-OFF position of the tow/haul switch has been selected, the indicator will be illuminated. The indicator remains illuminated until the cluster receives a lamp-OFF message from the PCM, or until the ignition switch is turned to the OFF position, whichever occurs first. Actuator Test - Each time the cluster is put through the actuator test, the overdrive off indicator will be turned ON, then OFF again during the bulb check portion of the test to confirm the functionality of the LED and the cluster control circuitry. The PCM continually monitors the tow/haul switch to determine the proper outputs to the automatic transmission. The PCM then sends the proper lamp-ON or lamp-OFF message to the ElectroMechanical Instrument Cluster (EMIC) (also known as the Cab Compartment Node/CCN). For further diagnosis of the overdrive off indicator or the instrument cluster circuitry that controls the indicator, Refer to appropriate testing. For proper diagnosis of the transmission control system, the PCM, the EMIC, the CAN data bus or the electronic communication related to overdrive off indicator operation a diagnostic scan tool is required. Refer to the appropriate diagnostic information. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Parking Brake Warning Switch > Component Information > Locations Parking Brake Warning Switch: Locations Component ID: 497 Component : SWITCH-PARKING BRAKE Connector: Name : SWITCH-PARKING BRAKE Color : GRAY # of pins : 1 Pin Circuit Description 1 B25 20DG/WT PARK BRAKE SWITCH SENSE Component Location - 31 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Parking Brake Warning Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 14713 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Parking Brake Warning Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 14714 Parking Brake Warning Switch: Diagrams Component ID: 497 Component : SWITCH-PARKING BRAKE Connector: Name : SWITCH-PARKING BRAKE Color : GRAY # of pins : 1 Pin Circuit Description 1 B25 20DG/WT PARK BRAKE SWITCH SENSE Component Location - 31 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Parking Brake Warning Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 14715 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Parking Brake Warning Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Parking Brake Warning Switch: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The park brake switch (1) is located on the park brake lever mechanism on the cowl side inner panel below the instrument panel, to the left of the steering column. This switch includes a spade-type output terminal (3) that connects the switch to the vehicle electrical system through a dedicated take out and connector of the body wire harness. The output terminal is integral to the stationary contact within a molded plastic insulator. A locating tab on the insulator engages a slot in the park brake lever mechanism for positive switch location. External to the insulator is a movable leaf contact with an integral grounding lug (4) on one end and an integral actuating lever and follower (2) on the opposite end. The switch is secured to and grounded by a single screw to the park brake lever mechanism. The park brake switch cannot be adjusted or repaired and, if ineffective or damaged, it must be replaced. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Parking Brake Warning Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 14718 Parking Brake Warning Switch: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The park brake switch is a normally closed, mechanically actuated leaf contact switch that is operated by the park brake lever mechanism. The switch is grounded through its mounting to the park brake lever mechanism and provides a ground input to the ElectroMechanical Instrument Cluster (EMIC) (also known as the Cab Compartment Node/CCN) on a park brake switch sense circuit whenever the park brake is applied, and opens this circuit whenever the park brake is released. The park brake switch sense input to the EMIC is used for control of the brake indicator and may also be used as a logic input for other electronic features in the vehicle. The park brake switch as well as the hard wired inputs and outputs of the switch may be diagnosed using conventional diagnostic tools and procedures. Refer to the appropriate wiring information. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Parking Brake Warning Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 14719 Parking Brake Warning Switch: Testing and Inspection PARK BRAKE SWITCH WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury on vehicles equipped with airbags, disable the Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, airbag, seat belt tensioner, impact sensor, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the SRS. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment. NOTE: If the brake indicator stays ON with the ignition switch in the ON position and the park brake released, or comes ON while driving, the brake system must be diagnosed and repaired prior to performing the following tests. Refer to appropriate testing. If no brake system problem is found, the following procedures will help to locate a shorted or open park brake switch sense circuit, or an ineffective park brake switch. INDICATOR ILLUMINATES DURING BULB TEST, BUT DOES NOT WHEN PARK BRAKE APPLIED 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. Disconnect the body wire harness connector for the park brake switch from the switch terminal. Apply the parking brake. Check for continuity between the park brake switch terminal and a good ground. There should be continuity. If OK, go to STEP 2. If not OK, replace the ineffective park brake switch. 2. Disconnect the instrument panel wire harness connector (Connector C1) for the instrument cluster from the cluster connector receptacle. Check for continuity between the park brake switch sense circuit cavities of the body wire harness connector for the park brake switch and the instrument panel wire harness connector for the instrument cluster. There should be continuity. If not OK, repair the open park brake switch sense circuit between the park brake switch and the instrument cluster as required. INDICATOR REMAINS ILLUMINATED - BRAKE SYSTEM CHECKS OKAY 3. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. Disconnect the body wire harness connector for the park brake switch from the switch terminal. Check for continuity between the terminal of the park brake switch and a good ground. There should be no continuity with the park brake released, and continuity with the park brake applied. If OK, go to STEP 2. If not OK, replace the ineffective park brake switch. 4. Disconnect the instrument panel wire harness connector (Connector C1) for the instrument cluster from the cluster connector receptacle. Check for continuity between the park brake switch sense circuit cavity of the body wire harness connector for the park brake switch and a good ground. There should be no continuity. If not OK, repair the shorted park brake switch sense circuit between the park brake switch and the instrument cluster as required. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Parking Brake Warning Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Parking Brake Warning Switch: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury on vehicles equipped with airbags, disable the Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, airbag, seat belt tensioner, impact sensor, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the SRS. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment. 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. 2. Apply the parking brake. 3. Reach under the left end of the instrument panel to access and disconnect the body wire harness connector (2) from the terminal of the park brake switch (4) located on the park brake lever mechanism (1) on the left cowl side inner panel. 4. Remove the screw (3) that secures the park brake switch to the park brake lever mechanism. 5. Remove the switch from the park brake lever mechanism. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Parking Brake Warning Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 14722 Parking Brake Warning Switch: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury on vehicles equipped with airbags, disable the Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, airbag, seat belt tensioner, impact sensor, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the SRS. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment. 1. Reach under the left end of the instrument panel to position the park brake switch (4) onto the park brake lever mechanism (1) on the left cowl side inner panel. Be certain to engage the locating pin on the back of the switch insulator into the locating slot in the lever mechanism bracket. 2. Install and tighten the screw (3) that secures the park brake switch to the park brake lever mechanism. Tighten the screw to 3 Nm (24 in. lbs.). 3. Reconnect the body wire harness connector (2) to the terminal of the park brake switch. 4. Reconnect the battery negative cable. 5. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position and check for proper brake indicator operation with the parking brake applied, then release the parking brake and check that the brake indicator extinguishes. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Seat Belt Reminder Lamp > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Seat Belt Reminder Lamp: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION A seatbelt indicator is standard equipment on all instrument clusters. The seatbelt indicator is located near the upper edge of the instrument cluster, between the tachometer and the speedometer. The seatbelt indicator consists of a stencil-like cutout of the International Control and Display Symbol icon for Seat Belt in the opaque layer of the instrument cluster overlay. The dark outer layer of the overlay prevents the indicator from being clearly visible when it is not illuminated. A red Light Emitting Diode (LED) behind the cutout in the opaque layer of the overlay causes the indicator to appear in red through the translucent outer layer of the overlay when it is illuminated from behind by the LED, which is soldered onto the instrument cluster electronic circuit board. The seatbelt indicator is serviced as a unit with the instrument cluster. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Seat Belt Reminder Lamp > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 14727 Seat Belt Reminder Lamp: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The seatbelt indicator gives an indication to the vehicle operator of the status of the driver side front seatbelt. This indicator is controlled by a transistor on the instrument cluster circuit board based upon cluster programming and a hard wired input from the seatbelt switch in the driver side front seatbelt buckle through the seat belt indicator driver circuit. The seatbelt indicator also includes a programmable enhanced seatbelt reminder or BELTMINDER feature that is enabled when the vehicle is shipped from the factory. This BELTMINDER feature can be disabled and enabled by the customer using a specific programming event sequence, or by the dealer using a diagnostic scan tool. The seatbelt indicator Light Emitting Diode (LED) is completely controlled by the instrument cluster logic circuit, and that logic will only allow this indicator to operate when the instrument cluster receives a battery current input on the fused ignition switch output (run-start) circuit. Therefore, the LED will always be OFF when the ignition switch is in any position except ON or START. The LED only illuminates when it is provided a path to ground by the instrument cluster transistor. The instrument cluster will turn ON the seatbelt indicator for the following reasons: Seatbelt Reminder Function - Each time the cluster receives a battery current input on the fused ignition switch output (run-start) circuit, the indicator will be illuminated as a seatbelt reminder for about six seconds, or until the ignition switch is turned to the OFF position, whichever occurs first. This reminder function will occur regardless of the status of the seatbelt switch input to the cluster. - Driver Side Front Seatbelt Not Buckled - Beltminder Active - Following the seatbelt reminder function, each time the cluster detects an open circuit on the seat belt indicator driver circuit (seatbelt switch open = seatbelt unbuckled) with the ignition switch in the START or ON positions, the indicator will be illuminated. In addition, if the driver side front seat belt remains unbuckled about 60 seconds after the conclusion of the seatbelt reminder function with the vehicle speed greater than about 8 kilometers-per-hour (5 miles-per-hour), the seatbelt indicator will begin to cycle between flashing ON and OFF for 3 seconds, then lighting solid for 2 seconds. The seatbelt indicator will continue to cycle between flashing and solid illumination for 13 complete cycles, until the seat belt indicator driver input to the cluster is closed to ground (seatbelt switch closed = seatbelt buckled), or until the ignition switch is turned to the OFF position, whichever occurs first. - Driver Side Front Seatbelt Not Buckled - Beltminder Inactive - Following the seatbelt reminder function, each time the cluster detects an open circuit on the seat belt indicator driver circuit (seatbelt switch open = seatbelt unbuckled) with the ignition switch in the START or ON positions, the indicator will be illuminated. The seatbelt indicator remains illuminated until the seat belt indicator driver input to the cluster is closed to ground (seatbelt switch closed = seatbelt buckled), or until the ignition switch is turned to the OFF position, whichever occurs first. - Airbag Indicator Backup - If the instrument cluster detects a fault in the airbag indicator circuit it will send an electronic message indicating the fault to the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC), then flash the seatbelt indicator ON and OFF. The cluster will continue to flash the indicator until the airbag indicator circuit fault is resolved, or until the ignition switch is turned to the OFF position, whichever occurs first. - Actuator Test - Each time the cluster is put through the actuator test, the seatbelt indicator will be turned ON, then OFF again during the bulb check portion of the test to confirm the functionality of the LED and the cluster control circuitry. The seatbelt switch is connected in series between ground and the seat belt indicator driver input to the ElectroMechanical Instrument Cluster (EMIC) (also known as the Cab Compartment Node/CCN). The hard wired seatbelt switch input to the EMIC may be diagnosed using conventional diagnostic tools and procedures. Refer to the appropriate wiring information. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Door Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Door Switch: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION This vehicle has up to four door ajar switches, one for each door. Each switch is concealed within and integral to its respective door latch unit. The switches are momentary leaf contact-type units that are actuated by the mechanisms internal to the door latch. A short pigtail wire and connector on each door latch connects the door ajar switch to the vehicle electrical system through its respective door wire harness. The door ajar switches cannot be adjusted or repaired and, if ineffective or damaged, the door latch unit must be replaced. See: Body and Frame/Doors, Hood and Trunk/Doors/Front Door/Front Door Latch/Service and Repair/Front Door Latch - Removal or See: Body and Frame/Doors, Hood and Trunk/Doors/Rear Door/Rear Door Latch/Service and Repair/Rear Door Latch - Removal . Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Door Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 14733 Door Switch: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The door ajar switches are actuated by the mechanisms internal to the door latch. When a door is closed and properly latched, its door ajar switch is an open circuit. When a door is open or only partially latched, the door ajar switch is a closed circuit. The door ajar switches are hard wired in series between a body ground and the ElectroMechanical Instrument Cluster (EMIC) (also known as the Cab Compartment Node/CCN). The EMIC reads the hard wired door ajar switch inputs through internal pull-ups, then uses these inputs to control many electronic functions and features of the vehicle. The EMIC also sends the proper electronic door ajar switch status messages to other electronic modules in the vehicle over the Controller Area Network (CAN) data bus. The door ajar switches as well as the hard wired inputs and outputs of the switches may be diagnosed using conventional diagnostic tools and procedures. Refer to the appropriate wiring information. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Fuel Gauge Sender > Component Information > Locations Fuel Gauge Sender: Locations DESCRIPTION The fuel pump module assembly is located on the top of the fuel tank. The complete assembly contains the following components: - A combination fuel filter/fuel pressure regulator - A separate fuel pick-up, or inlet filter - An electric fuel pump - A lockring to retain pump module to tank - A soft gasket between tank flange and module - A fuel gauge sending unit (fuel level sensor) - Fuel line connection The fuel gauge sending unit may be serviced separately. If the electrical fuel pump, primary inlet filter, fuel filter or fuel pressure regulator require service, the fuel pump module must be replaced. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Fuel Gauge Sender > Component Information > Description and Operation > Fuel Level Sending Unit / Sensor Fuel Gauge Sender: Description and Operation Fuel Level Sending Unit / Sensor DESCRIPTION The fuel gauge sending unit (fuel level sensor) is attached to the fuel pump module. The sending unit consists of a float, an arm, and a variable resistor track (card). The sensor is non-serviceable. If replacement is necessary, the fuel pump module assembly must be replaced. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Fuel Gauge Sender > Component Information > Description and Operation > Fuel Level Sending Unit / Sensor > Page 14739 Fuel Gauge Sender: Description and Operation Fuel Pump Module Description DESCRIPTION The fuel pump module assembly is located on the top of the fuel tank. The complete assembly contains the following components: - A combination fuel filter/fuel pressure regulator - A separate fuel pick-up, or inlet filter - An electric fuel pump - A lockring to retain pump module to tank - A soft gasket between tank flange and module - A fuel gauge sending unit (fuel level sensor) - Fuel line connection The fuel gauge sending unit may be serviced separately. If the electrical fuel pump, primary inlet filter, fuel filter or fuel pressure regulator require service, the fuel pump module must be replaced. Operation OPERATION Refer to Fuel Pump, Inlet Filter, Fuel Filter / Fuel Pressure Regulator and Fuel Gauge Sending Unit. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Fuel Gauge Sender > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Fuel Gauge Sender: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL WARNING: The fuel system may be under a constant pressure (even with the engine off). Before servicing the fuel pump module, the fuel system pressure must be released. 1. Drain and remove fuel tank. Refer to Fuel Tank Removal/Installation. 2. Remove plastic fuel pump module cover (1) by pushing pegs (2) outward. 3. Note rotational position of module before attempting removal. An indexing arrow is located on top of module for this purpose. 4. Position Special Tool 9340 (3) into notches on outside edge of lockring (5). 5. Install 1/2 inch drive breaker bar (1) to tool 9340 (3). 6. Rotate breaker bar counter-clockwise to remove lockring (5). 7. Remove lockring. The module will spring up slightly when lockring is removed. 8. Remove module from fuel tank. Be careful not to bend float arm while removing. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Fuel Gauge Sender > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 14742 Fuel Gauge Sender: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION 1. Using a new seal (gasket), position fuel pump module into opening in fuel tank. 2. Position lockring (5) over top of fuel pump module. 3. Rotate module until embossed alignment arrow points to center alignment mark. This step must be performed to prevent float from contacting side of fuel tank. Also be sure fuel fitting on top of pump module is pointed to drivers side of vehicle. 4. Install Special Tool 9340 (3) to lockring. 5. Install 1/2 inch drive breaker (1) into Special Tool 9340 (3). 6. Tighten lockring (clockwise) until all seven notches have engaged. 7. Snap plastic fuel pump module cover (1) to pump module. 8. Install fuel tank. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Outside Temperature Display Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Outside Temperature Display Sensor: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The ambient temperature sensor is a variable resistor mounted to a bracket that is secured with a screw to the left side of the radiator yoke, behind the radiator grille and in front of the engine compartment. The ambient temperature sensor cannot be adjusted or repaired and, if inoperative or damaged, it must be replaced. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Outside Temperature Display Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 14747 Outside Temperature Display Sensor: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The ambient temperature sensor is a variable resistor that operates on a five-volt reference signal sent by the Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM). The resistance in the sensor changes as temperature changes, changing the temperature sensor signal circuit voltage to the TIPM. Based upon the resistance in the sensor, the TIPM senses a specific voltage on the temperature sensor signal circuit. The TIPM then translates the voltage into a temperature reading that it sent over the Programmable Communications Interface (PCI) data bus circuit to other modules utilizing temperature information. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Outside Temperature Display Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 14748 Outside Temperature Display Sensor: Testing and Inspection AMBIENT TEMPERATURE SENSOR The temperature function is supported by the ambient temperature sensor, a wiring circuit, and the Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM). When the sensor is exposed to temperatures above 60° C (140° F), or if the sensor circuit is shorted, 60° C (130/140° F) will appear in the display in place of the temperature. When the sensor is exposed to temperatures below - 40° C (- 40° F) or if the sensor circuit is open, - 40° C (- 40° F) will appear in the display for Compass Mini - Trip Computer (CMTC) equipped vehicles and - - ° C (- - ° F) will be displayed on Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) equipped vehicles. The ambient temperature sensor circuit can be diagnosed using the following Temperature System Test, and Sensor Test. If the temperature sensor and circuit are confirmed to be OK, but the temperature display is inoperative or incorrect, test the Compass Mini - Trip Computer (CMTC), See: Compass/Testing and Inspection or Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC), See: Driver/Vehicle Information Display/Testing and Inspection as applicable. TEMPERATURE SYSTEM TEST For complete circuit diagrams, refer to the appropriate wiring information. The wiring information includes wiring diagrams, proper wire and connector repair procedures, details of wire harness routing and retention, connector pin-out information and location views for the various wire harness connectors, splices and grounds. NOTE: Temperature readings do not update immediately. Allow up to 60 seconds after the ignition switch is turned to the On position for readings to meet test specifications. 1. Turn the ignition switch to the Off position. Disconnect the wire harness connector from the ambient temperature sensor. 2. Turn the ignition switch to the On position. The CMTC display should now read - 40° C (- 40° F) or the EVIC display should now read - - ° C (- ° F). If OK, go to STEP 3. If not OK, repair the shorted sensor return circuit or ambient temperature sensor signal circuit to the ambient temperature sensor as required. 3. Turn the ignition switch to the Off position. Taking care not to damage the wire terminals, connect a jumper wire between the two terminals in the body half of the ambient temperature sensor harness connector. 4. Turn the ignition switch to the On position. The CMTC or EVIC display should now read 60° C (130/140° F). If OK, go to STEP 5. If not OK, repair the open sensor return circuit or ambient temperature sensor signal circuit to the ambient temperature sensor as required. 5. Clear any Diagnostic Trouble Codes that may have been set while performing the test. Perform further diagnosis of the Compass Mini - Trip Computer (CMTC), See: Compass/Testing and Inspection or Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC), See: Driver/Vehicle Information Display/Testing and Inspection as applicable. SENSOR TEST 1. Turn the ignition switch to the Off position. Disconnect the ambient temperature sensor harness connector. 2. Measure the resistance of the ambient temperature sensor. At - 40° C (- 40° F), the sensor resistance is 336 Kohms. At 55° C (130° F), the sensor resistance is 2.488 Kohms. The sensor resistance should read between these two values. If OK, perform further diagnosis of the Compass Mini - Trip Computer (CMTC), See: Compass/Testing and Inspection or Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC), See: Driver/Vehicle Information Display/Testing and Inspection as applicable. If not OK, replace the inoperative ambient temperature sensor. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Outside Temperature Display Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Outside Temperature Display Sensor: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL 1. Open the hood. 2. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. 3. Working on the underside of the hood, remove screw holding sensor to hood panel. 4. Disconnect the sensor electrical connector and remove sensor from vehicle. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Outside Temperature Display Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 14751 Outside Temperature Display Sensor: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION 1. Connect the sensor electrical connector. 2. Working on the underside of the hood, install screw holding sensor to hood panel. 3. Connect the battery negative cable. 4. Close the hood. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Parking Brake Warning Switch > Component Information > Locations Parking Brake Warning Switch: Locations Component ID: 497 Component : SWITCH-PARKING BRAKE Connector: Name : SWITCH-PARKING BRAKE Color : GRAY # of pins : 1 Pin Circuit Description 1 B25 20DG/WT PARK BRAKE SWITCH SENSE Component Location - 31 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Parking Brake Warning Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 14755 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Parking Brake Warning Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 14756 Parking Brake Warning Switch: Diagrams Component ID: 497 Component : SWITCH-PARKING BRAKE Connector: Name : SWITCH-PARKING BRAKE Color : GRAY # of pins : 1 Pin Circuit Description 1 B25 20DG/WT PARK BRAKE SWITCH SENSE Component Location - 31 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Parking Brake Warning Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 14757 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Parking Brake Warning Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Parking Brake Warning Switch: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The park brake switch (1) is located on the park brake lever mechanism on the cowl side inner panel below the instrument panel, to the left of the steering column. This switch includes a spade-type output terminal (3) that connects the switch to the vehicle electrical system through a dedicated take out and connector of the body wire harness. The output terminal is integral to the stationary contact within a molded plastic insulator. A locating tab on the insulator engages a slot in the park brake lever mechanism for positive switch location. External to the insulator is a movable leaf contact with an integral grounding lug (4) on one end and an integral actuating lever and follower (2) on the opposite end. The switch is secured to and grounded by a single screw to the park brake lever mechanism. The park brake switch cannot be adjusted or repaired and, if ineffective or damaged, it must be replaced. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Parking Brake Warning Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 14760 Parking Brake Warning Switch: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The park brake switch is a normally closed, mechanically actuated leaf contact switch that is operated by the park brake lever mechanism. The switch is grounded through its mounting to the park brake lever mechanism and provides a ground input to the ElectroMechanical Instrument Cluster (EMIC) (also known as the Cab Compartment Node/CCN) on a park brake switch sense circuit whenever the park brake is applied, and opens this circuit whenever the park brake is released. The park brake switch sense input to the EMIC is used for control of the brake indicator and may also be used as a logic input for other electronic features in the vehicle. The park brake switch as well as the hard wired inputs and outputs of the switch may be diagnosed using conventional diagnostic tools and procedures. Refer to the appropriate wiring information. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Parking Brake Warning Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 14761 Parking Brake Warning Switch: Testing and Inspection PARK BRAKE SWITCH WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury on vehicles equipped with airbags, disable the Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, airbag, seat belt tensioner, impact sensor, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the SRS. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment. NOTE: If the brake indicator stays ON with the ignition switch in the ON position and the park brake released, or comes ON while driving, the brake system must be diagnosed and repaired prior to performing the following tests. Refer to appropriate testing. If no brake system problem is found, the following procedures will help to locate a shorted or open park brake switch sense circuit, or an ineffective park brake switch. INDICATOR ILLUMINATES DURING BULB TEST, BUT DOES NOT WHEN PARK BRAKE APPLIED 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. Disconnect the body wire harness connector for the park brake switch from the switch terminal. Apply the parking brake. Check for continuity between the park brake switch terminal and a good ground. There should be continuity. If OK, go to STEP 2. If not OK, replace the ineffective park brake switch. 2. Disconnect the instrument panel wire harness connector (Connector C1) for the instrument cluster from the cluster connector receptacle. Check for continuity between the park brake switch sense circuit cavities of the body wire harness connector for the park brake switch and the instrument panel wire harness connector for the instrument cluster. There should be continuity. If not OK, repair the open park brake switch sense circuit between the park brake switch and the instrument cluster as required. INDICATOR REMAINS ILLUMINATED - BRAKE SYSTEM CHECKS OKAY 3. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. Disconnect the body wire harness connector for the park brake switch from the switch terminal. Check for continuity between the terminal of the park brake switch and a good ground. There should be no continuity with the park brake released, and continuity with the park brake applied. If OK, go to STEP 2. If not OK, replace the ineffective park brake switch. 4. Disconnect the instrument panel wire harness connector (Connector C1) for the instrument cluster from the cluster connector receptacle. Check for continuity between the park brake switch sense circuit cavity of the body wire harness connector for the park brake switch and a good ground. There should be no continuity. If not OK, repair the shorted park brake switch sense circuit between the park brake switch and the instrument cluster as required. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Parking Brake Warning Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Parking Brake Warning Switch: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury on vehicles equipped with airbags, disable the Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, airbag, seat belt tensioner, impact sensor, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the SRS. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment. 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. 2. Apply the parking brake. 3. Reach under the left end of the instrument panel to access and disconnect the body wire harness connector (2) from the terminal of the park brake switch (4) located on the park brake lever mechanism (1) on the left cowl side inner panel. 4. Remove the screw (3) that secures the park brake switch to the park brake lever mechanism. 5. Remove the switch from the park brake lever mechanism. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Parking Brake Warning Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 14764 Parking Brake Warning Switch: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury on vehicles equipped with airbags, disable the Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, airbag, seat belt tensioner, impact sensor, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the SRS. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment. 1. Reach under the left end of the instrument panel to position the park brake switch (4) onto the park brake lever mechanism (1) on the left cowl side inner panel. Be certain to engage the locating pin on the back of the switch insulator into the locating slot in the lever mechanism bracket. 2. Install and tighten the screw (3) that secures the park brake switch to the park brake lever mechanism. Tighten the screw to 3 Nm (24 in. lbs.). 3. Reconnect the body wire harness connector (2) to the terminal of the park brake switch. 4. Reconnect the battery negative cable. 5. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position and check for proper brake indicator operation with the parking brake applied, then release the parking brake and check that the brake indicator extinguishes. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Speedometer Head > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Speedometer Head: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION A speedometer is standard equipment on all instrument clusters. The speedometer is located next to the tachometer, just to the right of center in the instrument cluster. The speedometer consists of a movable gauge needle or pointer controlled by the instrument cluster circuitry and a fixed 210 degree primary scale on the gauge dial face. The speedometer reads left-to-right either from 0 to 120 mph, or from 0 to 200 km/h, depending upon the market for which the vehicle is manufactured. Each version also has a secondary inner scale on the gauge dial face that provides the equivalent opposite units from the primary scale. Text appearing on the cluster overlay just below the hub of the speedometer needle abbreviates the unit of measure for the primary scale (either MPH or km/h ), followed by the unit of measure for the secondary scale. The speedometer graphics are black (primary scale) and blue (secondary scale) against a white field making them clearly visible within the instrument cluster in daylight. When illuminated from behind by the panel lamps dimmer controlled cluster general illumination lighting with the exterior lamps turned ON, the black graphics appear blue-green and the blue graphics appear light blue. The gauge needle has internal optical illumination. Gauge illumination is provided by replaceable incandescent bulb and holder units located on the instrument cluster electronic circuit board. The speedometer is serviced as a unit with the instrument cluster. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Speedometer Head > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 14769 Speedometer Head: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The speedometer gives an indication to the vehicle operator of the vehicle road speed. This gauge is controlled by the instrument cluster circuit board based upon cluster programming and electronic messages received by the cluster from the Powertrain Control Module (PCM) over the Controller Area Network (CAN) data bus. The speedometer is an air core magnetic unit that receives battery current on the instrument cluster electronic circuit board through the fused ignition switch output (run-start) circuit whenever the ignition switch is in the ON or START positions. The cluster is programmed to move the gauge needle back to the low end of the scale after the ignition switch is turned to the OFF position. The instrument cluster circuitry controls the gauge needle position and provides the following features: - Vehicle Speed Message - Each time the cluster receives an electronicvehicle speed message from the PCM it will calculate the correct vehicle speed reading and position the gauge needle at that relative speed position on the gauge scale. The cluster will receive a new message and reposition the gauge pointer accordingly about every 88 milliseconds. The gauge needle will continually be positioned at the relative vehicle speed position on the gauge scale until the vehicle stops moving, or until the ignition switch is turned to the OFF position, whichever occurs first. - Communication Error - If the cluster fails to receive a speed message, it will hold the gauge needle at the last indication for about three seconds, or until the ignition switch is turned to the OFF position, whichever occurs first. After three seconds, the gauge needle will return to the left end of the gauge scale. - Actuator Test - Each time the cluster is put through the actuator test, the speedometer needle will be swept to several calibration points on the gauge scale in a prescribed sequence in order to confirm the functionality of the gauge and the cluster control circuitry. The PCM continually monitors the Vehicle Speed Sensor (VSS) or electronic wheel speed messages from the Controller Anti-lock Brake (CAB) to determine the vehicle road speed. The PCM then sends the proper vehicle speed messages to the ElectroMechanical Instrument Cluster (EMIC) (also known as the Cab Compartment Node/CCN). For further diagnosis of the speedometer or the instrument cluster circuitry that controls the gauge, Refer to appropriate testing. For proper diagnosis of the VSS, the CAB, the PCM, the EMIC, the CAN data bus or the electronic communication related to speedometer operation a diagnostic scan tool is required. Refer to the appropriate diagnostic information. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Tachometer > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Tachometer: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION A tachometer is standard equipment on all instrument clusters. The tachometer is located to the left of the speedometer, just to the left of center in the instrument cluster. The tachometer consists of a movable gauge needle or pointer controlled by the instrument cluster circuitry and a fixed 210 degree scale on the gauge dial face. The tachometer reads left-to-right from 0 to 7 for gasoline engines, or from 0 to 5 for diesel engines. The text RPM X 1000 is imprinted on the cluster overlay directly below the hub of the tachometer needle. This text identifies that each number on the tachometer scale is to be multiplied by 1000 rpm. The tachometer graphics are black against a white field making them clearly visible within the instrument cluster in daylight. When illuminated from behind by the panel lamps dimmer controlled cluster general illumination lighting with the exterior lamps turned ON, the black graphics appear blue-green and the red graphics still appear red. The gauge needle has internal optical illumination. Gauge illumination is provided by a replaceable incandescent bulb and holder unit located on the instrument cluster electronic circuit board. The tachometer is serviced as a unit with the instrument cluster. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Tachometer > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 14774 Tachometer: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The tachometer gives an indication to the vehicle operator of the engine speed. This gauge is controlled by the instrument cluster circuit board based upon cluster programming and electronic messages received by the cluster from the Powertrain Control Module (PCM) on vehicles with a gasoline engine, or from the Engine Control Module (ECM) on vehicles equipped with a diesel engine over the Controller Area Network (CAN) data bus. The tachometer is an air core magnetic unit that receives battery current on the instrument cluster electronic circuit board through the fused ignition switch output (run-start) circuit whenever the ignition switch is in the ON or START positions. The cluster is programmed to move the gauge needle back to the low end of the scale after the ignition switch is turned to the OFF position. The instrument cluster circuitry controls the gauge needle position and provides the following features: - Engine Speed Message - Each time the cluster receives an electronic engine speed message from the PCM or ECM it will calculate the correct engine speed reading and position the gauge needle at that relative speed position on the gauge scale. The cluster will receive a new message and reposition the gauge pointer accordingly about every 88 milliseconds. The gauge needle will continually be repositioned at the relative engine speed position on the gauge scale until the engine stops running, or until the ignition switch is turned to the OFF position, whichever occurs first. - Communication Error - If the cluster fails to receive a speed message, it will hold the gauge needle at the last indication for about three seconds, or until the ignition switch is turned to the OFF position, whichever occurs first. After three seconds, the gauge needle will return to the left end of the gauge scale. - Actuator Test - Each time the cluster is put through the actuator test, the tachometer needle will be swept to several calibration points on the gauge scale in a prescribed sequence in order to confirm the functionality of the gauge and the cluster control circuitry. On vehicles with a gasoline engine, the PCM continually monitors the crankshaft position sensor to determine the engine speed. On vehicles with a diesel engine, the ECM continually monitors the engine speed sensor to determine the engine speed. The PCM or ECM then sends the proper engine speed messages to the ElectroMechanical Instrument Cluster (EMIC) (also known as the Cab Compartment Node/CCN). For further diagnosis of the tachometer or the instrument cluster circuitry that controls the gauge, Refer to appropriate testing. For proper diagnosis of the crankshaft position sensor, the engine speed sensor, the PCM, the ECM, the EMIC, the CAN data bus or the electronic communication related to tachometer operation a diagnostic scan tool is required. Refer to the appropriate diagnostic information. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Temperature Gauge > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Temperature Gauge: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION An engine coolant temperature gauge is standard equipment on all instrument clusters. The engine coolant temperature gauge is located in the lower right quadrant of the instrument cluster, below the oil pressure gauge. The gauge consists of a movable gauge needle or pointer controlled by the instrument cluster circuitry and a fixed 90 degree scale on the cluster overlay that reads left-to-right from C (or Cold) to H (or Hot) for gasoline engines. On vehicles with a diesel engine, the scale reads from 60 °C to 120 °C in markets where a metric instrument cluster is specified, or from 140 °F to 245 °F in all other markets. An International Control and Display Symbol icon for Engine Coolant Temperature is located on the cluster overlay, directly below the left end of the gauge scale. The engine coolant temperature gauge graphics are black against a white field except for a single red graduation at the high end of the gauge scale making them clearly visible within the instrument cluster in daylight. When illuminated from behind by the panel lamps dimmer controlled cluster illumination lighting with the exterior lamps turned ON, the black gauge graphics appear blue-green and the red graphics still appear red. The gauge needle has internal optical illumination. Gauge illumination is provided by replaceable incandescent bulb and holder units located on the instrument cluster electronic circuit board. The engine coolant temperature gauge is serviced as a unit with the instrument cluster. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Temperature Gauge > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 14779 Temperature Gauge: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The engine coolant temperature gauge gives an indication to the vehicle operator of the engine coolant temperature. This gauge is controlled by the instrument cluster circuit board based upon cluster programming and electronic messages received by the cluster from the Powertrain Control Module (PCM) on vehicles equipped with a gasoline engine, or the Engine Control Module (ECM) on vehicles equipped with a diesel engine over the Controller Area Network (CAN) data bus. The engine coolant temperature gauge is an air core magnetic unit that receives battery current on the instrument cluster electronic circuit board through the fused ignition switch output (run-start) circuit whenever the ignition switch is in the ON or START positions. The cluster is programmed to move the gauge needle back to the low end of the scale after the ignition switch is turned to the OFF position. The instrument cluster circuitry controls the gauge needle position and provides the following features: - Engine Temperature Message - Each time the cluster receives an electronic engine temperature message from the PCM or ECM indicating the temperature is between the low end of normal [about 54 °C (130 °F) for gasoline engines, or about 60 °C (140 °F) for diesel engines] and the high end of normal [about 122 °C (252 °F) for gasoline engines, or about 116 °C (240 °F) for diesel engines], the gauge needle is moved to the actual relative temperature position on the gauge scale. Engine Temperature Low Message - Each time the cluster receives an electronic engine temperature message from the PCM or ECM indicating the temperature is below the low end of normal [about 54 °C (130 °F) for gasoline engines, or about 60 °C (140 °F) for diesel engines], the gauge needle is held at the graduation on the far left end of the gauge scale. The gauge needle remains at the low end of the gauge scale until the cluster receives a message from the PCM or ECM indicating the temperature is above about 54 °C (130 °F) for gasoline engines, or about 60 ° C (140 °F) for diesel engines, or until the ignition switch is turned to the OFF position, whichever occurs first. - Engine Temperature High Message - Each time the cluster receives three consecutive electronic engine temperature messages from the PCM or ECM indicating the temperature is above about 122 °C (252 °F) for gasoline engines, or about 116 °C (240 °F) for diesel engines, the gauge needle is moved to the red increment or zone at the far right end of gauge scale, the check gauges indicator is illuminated, and a single chime tone is sounded. The gauge needle remains at the high end of the gauge scale and the check gauges indicator remains illuminated until the cluster receives a message from the PCM or ECM indicating that the temperature is below about 122 °C (252 °F) for gasoline engines, or about 116 °C (240 °F) for diesel engines, or until the ignition switch is turned to the OFF position, whichever occurs first. The chime tone feature will only repeat during the same ignition cycle if the check gauges indicator is cycled OFF and then ON again by the appropriate messages from the PCM or ECM. - Communication Error - If the cluster fails to receive an engine temperature message, it will hold the gauge needle at the last indication for about 10 seconds or until the ignition switch is turned to the OFF position, whichever occurs first. After 10 seconds, the cluster will move the gauge needle to the low end of the gauge scale. - Actuator Test - Each time the cluster is put through the actuator test, the engine coolant temperature gauge needle will be swept to several calibration points on the gauge scale in a prescribed sequence in order to confirm the functionality of the gauge and the cluster control circuitry. The PCM (gasoline engine) or ECM (diesel engine) continually monitors the engine coolant temperature sensor to determine the engine operating temperature. The PCM or ECM then sends the proper messages to the ElectroMechanical Instrument Cluster (EMIC) (also known as the Cab Compartment Node/CCN). If the instrument cluster turns ON the check gauges indicator due to a high engine temperature gauge reading, it may indicate that the engine or the engine cooling system requires service. For proper diagnosis of the engine coolant temperature sensor, the PCM, the ECM, the EMIC, the CAN data bus or the electronic communication related to engine coolant temperature gauge operation a diagnostic scan tool is required. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Temperature Warning Indicator - A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Temperature Warning Indicator - A/T: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION A transmission over-temperature indicator is standard equipment on all instrument clusters. However, on vehicles not equipped with an optional automatic transmission, this indicator is electronically disabled. This indicator is located in the lower portion of the tachometer dial face in the instrument cluster overlay. The transmission over-temperature indicator consists of a stencil-like cutout of the International Control and Display Symbol icon for Transmission Temperature in the opaque layer of the instrument cluster overlay. The dark outer layer of the overlay prevents the indicator from being clearly visible when it is not illuminated. A red Light Emitting Diode (LED) behind the cutout in the opaque layer of the overlay causes the indicator to appear in red through the translucent outer layer of the overlay when it is illuminated from behind by the LED, which is soldered onto the instrument cluster electronic circuit board. The transmission over-temperature indicator is serviced as a unit with the instrument cluster. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Temperature Warning Indicator - A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 14784 Temperature Warning Indicator - A/T: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The transmission over-temperature indicator gives an indication to the vehicle operator when the transmission fluid temperature is excessive, which may lead to accelerated transmission component wear or failure. This indicator is controlled by a transistor on the instrument cluster circuit board based upon cluster programming and electronic messages received over the Controller Area Network (CAN) data bus from the Powertrain Control Module (PCM). The transmission over-temperature indicator Light Emitting Diode (LED) is completely controlled by the instrument cluster logic circuit, and that logic will only allow this indicator to operate when the instrument cluster receives a battery current input on the fused ignition switch output (run-start) circuit. Therefore, the LED will always be OFF when the ignition switch is in any position except ON or START. The LED only illuminates when it is provided a path to ground by the instrument cluster transistor. The instrument cluster will turn ON the transmission over-temperature indicator for the following reasons: - Bulb Test - Each time the ignition switch is turned to the ON position the transmission over-temperature indicator is illuminated for about two seconds as a bulb test. - Trans Over-Temp Indicator Lamp-On Message - Each time the cluster receives an electronic trans over-temp indicator lamp-ON message from the PCM indicating that the transmission fluid temperature is 135 °C (275 °F) or higher, the indicator will be illuminated and a single chime tone is sounded. The indicator remains illuminated until the cluster receives a lamp-OFF message from the PCM, or until the ignition switch is turned to the OFF position, whichever occurs first. The chime tone feature will only repeat during the same ignition cycle if the indicator is cycled OFF and then ON again by the appropriate lamp-ON and lamp-OFF messages from the PCM. - Actuator Test - Each time the cluster is put through the actuator test, the transmission over-temperature indicator will be turned ON, then OFF again during the bulb check portion of the test to confirm the functionality of the LED and the cluster control circuitry. The PCM continually monitors the transmission temperature sensor to determine the transmission operating condition. The PCM then sends the proper lamp-ON or lamp-OFF message to the ElectroMechanical Instrument Cluster (EMIC) (also known as the Cab Compartment Node/CCN). If the instrument cluster illuminates the transmission over-temperature indicator due to a high transmission oil temperature condition, it may indicate that the transmission or the transmission cooling system are being overloaded, or that they require service. For further diagnosis of the transmission over-temperature indicator or the instrument cluster circuitry that controls the LED, Refer to appropriate testing. For proper diagnosis of the transmission temperature sensor, the PCM, the EMIC, the CAN data bus or the electronic communication related to transmission over-temperature indicator operation a diagnostic scan tool is required. Refer to the appropriate diagnostic information. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Tire Monitoring System > Low Tire Pressure Indicator > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Low Tire Pressure Indicator: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION A Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM) indicator is standard equipment on all instrument clusters. However, on vehicles not equipped with the optional TPM, this indicator is electronically disabled. This indicator is located in the lower portion of the tachometer dial face in the instrument cluster overlay. The TPM indicator consists of a stencil-like cutout of an icon that represents a cross-section of a tire with a centered exclamation point in the opaque layer of the instrument cluster overlay. The dark outer layer of the overlay prevents the indicator from being clearly visible when it is not illuminated. An amber Light Emitting Diode (LED) behind the cutout in the opaque layer of the overlay causes the indicator to appear in amber through the translucent outer layer of the overlay when it is illuminated from behind by the LED, which is soldered onto the instrument cluster electronic circuit board. The TPM indicator is serviced as a unit with the instrument cluster. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Tire Monitoring System > Low Tire Pressure Indicator > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 14790 Low Tire Pressure Indicator: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM) indicator gives an indication to the vehicle operator of the status of the TPM system. This indicator is controlled by a transistor on the instrument cluster circuit board based upon cluster programming and electronic messages received by the cluster from the Sentry Key REmote Entry Module (SKREEM) over the Controller Area Network (CAN) data bus. The TPM indicator Light Emitting Diode (LED) is completely controlled by the instrument cluster logic circuit, and that logic will only allow this indicator to operate when the instrument cluster receives a battery current input on the fused ignition switch output (run-start) circuit. Therefore, the LED will always be OFF when the ignition switch is in any position except ON or START. The LED only illuminates when it is provide a path to ground by the instrument cluster transistor. The instrument cluster will turn ON the TPM indicator for the following reasons: - Bulb Test - Each time the ignition switch is turned to the ON position, the SKREEM sends an electronic TPM indicator lamp-ON message to the cluster to illuminate the TPM indicator for about three seconds as a bulb test. - TPM Indicator Lamp-On Message - Each time the cluster receives an electronic TPM indicator lamp-ON message from the SKREEM, the TPM indicator will be illuminated. The indicator can be flashed ON and OFF, or illuminated solid, as dictated by the SKREEM message. The indicator remains illuminated until the cluster receives a lamp-OFF message from the SKREEM or until the ignition switch is turned to the OFF position, whichever occurs first. - Communication Error - If the cluster receives no TPM lamp-ON or lamp-OFF messages from the SKREEM for six consecutive seconds, the TPM indicator is illuminated by the instrument cluster. The indicator remains controlled and illuminated by the cluster until a valid lamp-ON or lamp-OFF message is received from the SKREEM. - Actuator Test - Each time the cluster is put through the actuator test, the TPM indicator will be turned ON, then OFF again during the bulb check portion of the test to confirm the functionality of the LED and the cluster control circuitry. The SKREEM performs a self-test each time the ignition switch is turned to the ON position to decide whether the TPM system is in good operating condition and whether the tire inflation pressures are too high or too low. The SKREEM then sends the proper lamp-ON or lamp-OFF message to the ElectroMechanical Instrument Cluster (EMIC) (also known as the Cab Compartment Node/CCN). If the instrument cluster turns ON the TPM indicator after the bulb test, it indicates that the inflation pressure of a tire is too low or that a malfunction has occurred and the TPM system is ineffective. For proper diagnosis of the TPM system, the SKREEM, the EMIC, the CAN data bus or the electronic communication related to TPM indicator operation a diagnostic scan tool is required. Refer to the appropriate diagnostic information. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Tire Monitoring System > Tire Pressure Monitor Receiver / Transponder > Component Information > Locations > Transponder-Tire Pressure-Left Front Tire Pressure Monitor Receiver / Transponder: Locations Transponder-Tire Pressure-Left Front Component ID 521 Component ID: 521 Component : TRANSPONDER-TIRE PRESSURE-LEFT FRONT Connector: Name : TRANSPONDER-TIRE PRESSURE-LEFT FRONT Color : # of pins : 6 Pin Circuit Description 1 F504 20GY/PK FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN) 2 D508 20WT/GY COM-LIN TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR LAN 3 Z924 20BK GROUND 4 Z924 20BK GROUND 5-6-- Component Location - 32 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Tire Monitoring System > Tire Pressure Monitor Receiver / Transponder > Component Information > Locations > Transponder-Tire Pressure-Left Front > Page 14795 Component ID 523 Component ID: 523 Component : TRANSPONDER-TIRE PRESSURE-LEFT FRONT Connector: Name : TRANSPONDER-TIRE PRESSURE-LEFT FRONT Color : # of pins : 6 Pin Circuit Description Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Tire Monitoring System > Tire Pressure Monitor Receiver / Transponder > Component Information > Locations > Transponder-Tire Pressure-Left Front > Page 14796 1 F504 20GY/PK FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN) 2 D508 20WT/GY COM-LIN TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR LAN 3 Z924 20BK GROUND 4 Z924 20BK GROUND 5-6-Component Location - 32 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Tire Monitoring System > Tire Pressure Monitor Receiver / Transponder > Component Information > Locations > Transponder-Tire Pressure-Left Front > Page 14797 Tire Pressure Monitor Receiver / Transponder: Locations Transponder-Tire Pressure-Right Front Component ID 522 Component ID: 522 Component : TRANSPONDER-TIRE PRESSURE-RIGHT FRONT Connector: Name : TRANSPONDER-TIRE PRESSURE-RIGHT FRONT Color : # of pins : 6 Pin Circuit Description 1 F504 20GY/PK FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN) 2 D508 20WT/GY COM-LIN TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR LAN 3 Z924 20BK GROUND 4-5 Z924 20BK GROUND 6-- Component Location - 29 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Tire Monitoring System > Tire Pressure Monitor Receiver / Transponder > Component Information > Locations > Transponder-Tire Pressure-Left Front > Page 14798 Component ID 524 Component ID: 524 Component : TRANSPONDER-TIRE PRESSURE-RIGHT FRONT Connector: Name : TRANSPONDER-TIRE PRESSURE-RIGHT FRONT Color : # of pins : 6 Pin Circuit Description Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Tire Monitoring System > Tire Pressure Monitor Receiver / Transponder > Component Information > Locations > Transponder-Tire Pressure-Left Front > Page 14799 1 F504 20GY/PK FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN) 2 D508 20WT/GY COM-LIN TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR LAN 3 Z924 20BK GROUND 4-5 Z924 20BK GROUND 6-Component Location - 29 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Tire Monitoring System > Tire Pressure Monitor Receiver / Transponder > Component Information > Diagrams > Transponder-Tire Pressure-Left Front Tire Pressure Monitor Receiver / Transponder: Diagrams Transponder-Tire Pressure-Left Front Component ID 521 Component ID: 521 Component : TRANSPONDER-TIRE PRESSURE-LEFT FRONT Connector: Name : TRANSPONDER-TIRE PRESSURE-LEFT FRONT Color : # of pins : 6 Pin Circuit Description 1 F504 20GY/PK FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN) 2 D508 20WT/GY COM-LIN TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR LAN 3 Z924 20BK GROUND 4 Z924 20BK GROUND 5-6-- Component Location - 32 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Tire Monitoring System > Tire Pressure Monitor Receiver / Transponder > Component Information > Diagrams > Transponder-Tire Pressure-Left Front > Page 14802 Component ID 523 Component ID: 523 Component : TRANSPONDER-TIRE PRESSURE-LEFT FRONT Connector: Name : TRANSPONDER-TIRE PRESSURE-LEFT FRONT Color : # of pins : 6 Pin Circuit Description Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Tire Monitoring System > Tire Pressure Monitor Receiver / Transponder > Component Information > Diagrams > Transponder-Tire Pressure-Left Front > Page 14803 1 F504 20GY/PK FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN) 2 D508 20WT/GY COM-LIN TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR LAN 3 Z924 20BK GROUND 4 Z924 20BK GROUND 5-6-Component Location - 32 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Tire Monitoring System > Tire Pressure Monitor Receiver / Transponder > Component Information > Diagrams > Transponder-Tire Pressure-Left Front > Page 14804 Tire Pressure Monitor Receiver / Transponder: Diagrams Transponder-Tire Pressure-Right Front Component ID 522 Component ID: 522 Component : TRANSPONDER-TIRE PRESSURE-RIGHT FRONT Connector: Name : TRANSPONDER-TIRE PRESSURE-RIGHT FRONT Color : # of pins : 6 Pin Circuit Description 1 F504 20GY/PK FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN) 2 D508 20WT/GY COM-LIN TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR LAN 3 Z924 20BK GROUND 4-5 Z924 20BK GROUND 6-- Component Location - 29 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Tire Monitoring System > Tire Pressure Monitor Receiver / Transponder > Component Information > Diagrams > Transponder-Tire Pressure-Left Front > Page 14805 Component ID 524 Component ID: 524 Component : TRANSPONDER-TIRE PRESSURE-RIGHT FRONT Connector: Name : TRANSPONDER-TIRE PRESSURE-RIGHT FRONT Color : # of pins : 6 Pin Circuit Description Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Tire Monitoring System > Tire Pressure Monitor Receiver / Transponder > Component Information > Diagrams > Transponder-Tire Pressure-Left Front > Page 14806 1 F504 20GY/PK FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN) 2 D508 20WT/GY COM-LIN TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR LAN 3 Z924 20BK GROUND 4-5 Z924 20BK GROUND 6-Component Location - 29 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Tire Monitoring System > Tire Pressure Monitor Receiver / Transponder > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Tire Pressure Monitor Receiver / Transponder: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION A transponder (2), also known as a trigger module, is located in the front wheel wells (behind the wheelhouse splash shields) of the vehicle to provide the WCM/SKREEM with the location of the front tire pressure sensors on the vehicle. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Tire Monitoring System > Tire Pressure Monitor Receiver / Transponder > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 14809 Tire Pressure Monitor Receiver / Transponder: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The Wireless Control Module (WCM), commonly referred to as the Sentry Key Remote Entry Module (SKREEM), uses transponders (trigger modules) located in the front wheel wells on the vehicle to provide it with the location of the front tire pressure sensors on the vehicle. Like the base system, the WCM receives RF signals from all four rotating wheel speed sensors. When the WCM needs to know which sensor is located at a particular location on the vehicle, it directs the transponder at that location to send out a low frequency signal to excite the nearby sensor. The WCM then receives that excited signal and knows where that sensor is located. This auto-locating process only happens in the first 10 minutes of any WCM cycle while traveling at speeds above 20 mph (32 km/h) (Each WCM cycle ends when the vehicle has been shut off for a time period of approximately 20 minutes or longer). If the TPMS fails to localize, the TPM indicator lamp will flash on/off for 75 seconds, and remain on solid. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Tire Monitoring System > Tire Pressure Monitor Receiver / Transponder > Component Information > Service and Repair > TPM Transponder - Removal Tire Pressure Monitor Receiver / Transponder: Service and Repair TPM Transponder - Removal REMOVAL 1. Raise and support the vehicle. 2. Remove the wheel well housing cover. 3. Remove the mounting screw (1) for the transponder (2). 4. Disconnect the electrical connector (3) and remove the transponder (2) from the vehicle. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Tire Monitoring System > Tire Pressure Monitor Receiver / Transponder > Component Information > Service and Repair > TPM Transponder - Removal > Page 14812 Tire Pressure Monitor Receiver / Transponder: Service and Repair TPM Transponder - Installation INSTALLATION 1. Install the transponder (2) to the vehicle and reconnect the electrical connector (3). 2. Install the mounting screw (1) for the transponder (2) Tighten to 3 Nm (25 in. lbs.). 3. Install the wheel well housing cover. 4. Lower the vehicle. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Tire Monitoring System > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Service Precautions Tire Pressure Sensor: Service Precautions CAUTION CAUTION: The use of tire sealants is not recommended for vehicles equipped with the Tire Pressure Monitoring system. Tire sealants may clog tire pressure sensors. CAUTION: Tire pressure sensor valve stem caps and cores are specially designed for the sensors. Due to risk of corrosion, do not use a standard valve stem cap or core in a tire pressure sensor in place of the original equipment style sensor cap and core. CAUTION: It is not recommended to install a tire pressure sensor in an aftermarket wheel. Use tire pressure sensors in original style factory wheels only. CAUTION: Any time a sensor is to be reinstalled in a wheel, a new seal, cap and valve core must be installed on the stem to ensure air tight sealing. NOTE: TPM thresholds have been established for the original tire size equipped on the vehicle. Use original size tires only to maintain system accuracy. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Tire Monitoring System > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Tire Pressure Sensor: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION On vehicles equipped with Tire Pressure Monitoring System, one tire pressure sensor (6) is mounted to each wheel in place of the traditional tire valve stem. Each sensor has an internal battery that lasts up to 10 years. The battery is not serviceable. At the time of battery failure, the sensor (6) must be replaced. The TPM system operates on a 315 MHz radio frequency. The 315 MHz sensors can be easily identified by a GREEN sensor body, with (an triangle insignia) (1). The 433 MHz sensors can be identified by a grey sensor body with an oval insignia. For car applications, there is a 315 MHz TPM sensor with a Black sensor body with an oval insignia. NOTE: This vehicle uses the 315 MHz TPM sensor with the GREEN sensor body. Although 315 MHz and 433 MHz sensors are identical in size and shape, they are not interchangeable. Always make sure the correct color sensor is being used. A RKE-TPM Analyzer can be used to determine the sensor's frequency without having to dismount the tire. The TPM sensors are designed for original style factory wheels. It is not recommended to install a tire pressure sensor in an aftermarket wheel. (This could cause sealing and system performance issues.) The serviceable components of the tire pressure sensor are: - Sensor-To-Wheel Seal (4) - Valve Stem Cap (2) - Valve Stem Core - Valve Stem Nut (3) The valve stem caps and cores used are specifically designed for the tire pressure monitoring sensors. Although similar to standard valve stem caps and cores, they are different. The valve stem cap has a special seal inside to keep moisture and corrosion out. The valve stem core has a special nickel coating to protect from corrosion. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Tire Monitoring System > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 14818 Tire Pressure Sensor: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION CAUTION: The TPMS has been optimized for the original equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures have been established for the tire size equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system operation or sensor damage may result when using replacement equipment that is not of the same size, type, and/or style. After-market wheels can cause sensor damage. Do not use aftermarket tire sealants or balance beads if your vehicle is equipped with a TPMS, as damage to the sensors may result. CAUTION: After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure always reinstall the valve stem cap. This will prevent moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem, which could damage the Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensor. CAUTION: Tire pressure sensor valve stem caps and cores are specially designed for the sensors. Due to risk of corrosion, do not use a standard valve stem cap or core in a tire pressure sensor in place of the original equipment style sensor cap and core. CAUTION: Any time a sensor is to be reinstalled in a wheel, a new seal, nut, cap and valve core must be installed on the stem to ensure air tight sealing. NOTE: TPM thresholds have been established for the original tire size equipped on the vehicle. Use original size tires only to maintain system accuracy. The battery operated tire pressure sensor is both a transmitter and a receiver. The TPM sensor can be forced to transmit if using a special tool such as a TPM-RKE Analyzer, or from a transponder. The TPM-RKE Analyzer has the ability to change the sensor mode and to diagnose a faulty TPM sensor. Using a TPM-RKE Analyzer can take up to a minute to force a transmission from a sensor. The High Pressure TPM sensor can be in one of the following modes: Sleep Mode - A new TPM sensor will be in this mode. If placed on the vehicle as a road tire, the TPM sensor will transmit once every 20 seconds when the vehicle is driven at speeds over 15 mph (24 km/h). If the vehicle is not moving, the sensor will only transmit on a pressure change greater then 2 psi (13.8 kPA). Driving the vehicle continuously at speeds over 15 mph (24 km/h) for more then 4 minutes will change the sensor state into 30 BLOCK MODE. The TPM sensor will not return to SLEEP MODE. Now, if the vehicle has been stopped for 20 minutes, the TPM sensor state will change to PARK MODE. - Park Mode - This is the correct mode when the vehicle is not moving. The sensor will transmit once every 13 hours to update the WCM, or will transmit on a 2 psi (13.8 kPA) delta change. The sensors will internally take a measurement of the tire pressure every minute to determine a change in tire pressure. - 30 Block Mode - If the vehicle has not been moving for more then 20 minutes, or if the sensor's mode was forced to Park Mode using a TPM-RKE Analyzer, the sensor's operating mode will transition from PARK MODE to 30 BLOCK MODE once the vehicle is driven over 15 mph. In this mode, the sensor will transmit once every 15 seconds when the vehicle is driven at speeds over 15 mph (24 km/h) for the first 30 transmissions. After 8 minutes of continuous driving above 15 mph (24 km/h), the TPM sensor will change to DRIVE MODE. Drive Mode - In this mode, the sensor will transmit once every minute when the vehicle is driven at speeds over 15 mph (24 km/h). At any time that the vehicle speed drops below 15mph, the sensor will not transmit. The sensor mode will still be in drive mode when the sensor reaches speeds over 15 mph (24 km/h). If the vehicle has been stationary for more then 20 minutes, the TPM sensor will change to PARK MODE. Each sensor's (transmitter) broadcast is uniquely coded so that the wireless control module (WCM) can monitor the state of each of the sensors on the four rotating road wheels. The WCM can automatically learn and store the sensor's ID while driving "within 10 minutes continuously above 15 m.p.h. (24 Km/h)" after a sensor has been replaced. The vehicle must be stationary for more then 20 minutes in order to initiate the learning sequence. The sensor IDs can also be programmed using the TPM-RKE Analyzer Tool. Scan each TPM sensor at each road wheel, and store each Sensor ID in the correct location. (LEFT FRONT, LEFT REAR, RIGHT FRONT, and RIGHT REAR) Connect the TPM-RKE Analyzer Tool to the Scan Tool. Then follow the programming steps outlined in the diagnostic Scan Tool for "Program Tire Pressure Sensor ID w/ TPM Tool" under "MISC" for the "WCM/WIRELESS CONTROL MODULE". Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Tire Monitoring System > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 14819 Tire Pressure Sensor: Testing and Inspection TIRE PRESSURE SENSOR NOTE: Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi (14 to 41 kPa) during normal driving conditions. Do NOT reduce this normal pressure build up. NOTE: Tire pressure will vary with temperature by about 1 psi (6.9 kPa) for every 12 F (6.5 C). This means that when the outside temperature decreases, the tire pressure will also decrease. Tire pressure should always be set based on cold inflation tire pressure. When diagnosing a tire pressure issue, always check air pressure in the tires first with a known accurate air gauge. Adjust air pressure as necessary to that listed on the Tire Inflation Pressure Label (Placard) provided with the vehicle (usually applied to the driver's side B-pillar). After adjusting air pressure in a tire on the vehicle, allow approximately two minutes for the message or indicator lamp to go out. Check the tire pressure indicator lamp in the instrument cluster. If the lamp is illuminating continuously, inspect all the tires for leaks. A water "dunk tank" or other water test may be used to check for leaks around the sensor as long as any water at the valve core is removed once the procedure is completed. The water can be easily expelled from the core area by pushing in on the core for several seconds, allowing escaping air to drive out any moisture. Reinflate the tire as necessary. Always make sure the original valve stem cap is securely installed to keep moisture out of the sensor. If the gauge-read pressure in the tires does not indicate a tire pressure issue, refer to the appropriate diagnostic information. If the indicator lamp is flashing on/off for 75 seconds and then remains on solid, a system fault was detected. Refer to the appropriate diagnostic information. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Tire Monitoring System > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Tire Pressure Sensor: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL 1. Raise and support vehicle. 2. Remove the tire and wheel assembly. See: Maintenance/Wheels and Tires/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement CAUTION: The cap used on this valve stem contains an O-ring seal to prevent contamination and moisture from entering the valve stem. Retain this valve stem cap for reuse. Do not substitute a regular valve stem cap in its place. CAUTION: The valve stem used on this vehicle is made of aluminum and the core is nickel plated brass. The original valve stem core must be reinstalled and not substituted with a valve stem core made of a different material. This is required to prevent corrosion in the valve stem caused by the different metals. 3. Let the air out of the tire. 4. Remove the nut (3). 5. Push the sensor into the tire (1) (so the sensor is loose inside the tire). 6. Remove the tire from the rim. 7. Retrieve the sensor (1) from the tire. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Tire Monitoring System > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 14822 Tire Pressure Sensor: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION NOTE: Before reinstalling an existing tire pressure sensor (6), replace valve cap (2), nut (3), valve core and sensor seal (4) to ensure proper sealing. NOTE: The notch/flat should be lined up together and facing towards the wheel during installation. 1. Wipe area clean around sensor/valve stem mounting hole in wheel. Make sure surface of wheel is not damaged. 2. Insert sensor (1) through wheel (2) as shown keeping pressure against rear of metal valve stem (See Arrow). Potted side of sensor is to be positioned toward wheel. Damage to the sensor may occur if the sensor is installed incorrectly. NOTE: A flat on the seal seat is used to key the seat to the sensor housing. The notch/flat should be lined up together and facing towards the wheel during installation. 3. Install sensor nut (3) and hand tighten. NOTE: Before tightening sensor nut, push downward on sensor housing (2) in an attempt to make it flush with interior contour of wheel (1). 4. While holding sensor in position, tighten sensor nut to 6 Nm (53 in. lbs.). CAUTION: Over-tightening the sensor to as much as 10 Nm (88 in. lbs.) may result in sensor separation from the valve stem. Under this condition, the sensor may still function, however, the condition should be corrected immediately. 5. Mount tire on wheel following tire changer manufacturer's instructions, paying special attention to the following to avoid damaging tire pressure sensor: a. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Tire Monitoring System > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 14823 Rotating Wheel Tire Changers- Once the wheel is mounted to the changer, position the sensor valve stem (2) approximately 180° from the head of the changer (located at 1) in a clockwise direction before rotating the wheel (also in a clockwise direction) to mount the tire. Use this procedure on both the upper and lower tire beads. b. Rotating Tool Tire Changers - Position the wheel on the changer so that the sensor valve stem (1) is located approximately 180° clockwise from the installation end of the mounting/dismounting tool (2) once the tool is mounted for tire installation. Make sure the sensor is clear of the lower bead breaker area (3) to avoid damaging the sensor when the breaker rises. Rotate the tool (2) in a counterclockwise direction to mount the tire. Use this procedure on both the upper and lower tire beads. 6. Adjust air pressure to that listed on Tire Inflation Pressure Label (Placard) provided with vehicle (usually applied to driver's side B-pillar). Make sure original style valve stem cap is securely installed to keep moisture out of sensor. 7. Install tire and wheel assembly on vehicle. See: Maintenance/Wheels and Tires/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement 8. Lower vehicle. 9. If the vehicle has been stationary for more then 20 minutes, drive the vehicle for a minimum of 10 minutes while maintaining a continuous speed above 15 mph (24 km/h). During this time, the system will learn the new sensor ID. A new sensor ID can also be programmed directly into the WCM by using a RKE-TPM Analyzer in conjunction with a Scan Tool. Once the new sensor ID has been programmed, the RKE-TPM Analyzer can be used to update the TPMS by activating the sensor. NOTE: If a sensor cannot be trained, refer to appropriate diagnostic information. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Tire Monitoring System > Tire Pressure Warning Reset Switch > Component Information > Locations Tire Pressure Warning Reset Switch: Locations Component ID: 513 Component : SWITCH-TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR Connector: Name : SWITCH-TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR Color : BROWN # of pins : 6 Pin Circuit Description 1 G561 20VT TPM INDICATOR CONTROL 2 E11 20OR/DB PANEL LAMPS DRIVER 3 G562 20VT/YL TPM SWITCH SIGNAL 4 Z600 20BK GROUND 5 F504 20GY/PK NO FUNCTION DEFINED 6-Component Location - 47 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Tire Monitoring System > Tire Pressure Warning Reset Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 14827 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Tire Monitoring System > Tire Pressure Warning Reset Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 14828 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Tire Monitoring System > Tire Pressure Warning Reset Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 14829 Tire Pressure Warning Reset Switch: Diagrams Component ID: 513 Component : SWITCH-TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR Connector: Name : SWITCH-TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR Color : BROWN # of pins : 6 Pin Circuit Description 1 G561 20VT TPM INDICATOR CONTROL 2 E11 20OR/DB PANEL LAMPS DRIVER 3 G562 20VT/YL TPM SWITCH SIGNAL 4 Z600 20BK GROUND 5 F504 20GY/PK NO FUNCTION DEFINED 6-Component Location - 47 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Tire Monitoring System > Tire Pressure Warning Reset Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 14830 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Traction Control Indicator Lamp > Component Information > Description and Operation > Electronic Stability Program/Brake Assist System Indicator Traction Control Indicator Lamp: Description and Operation Electronic Stability Program/Brake Assist System Indicator Description DESCRIPTION An Electronic Stability Program/Brake Assist System (ESP/BAS) indicator is only found in the instrument clusters for vehicles equipped with a gasoline engine. However, on vehicles not equipped with the optional ESP/BAS, this indicator is electronically disabled. This indicator is located in the lower portion of the tachometer dial face in the instrument cluster overlay. The ESP/BAS indicator consists of a stencil-like cutout of the text ESP BAS in the opaque layer of the instrument cluster overlay. The dark outer layer of the overlay prevents the indicator from being clearly visible when it is not illuminated. An amber Light Emitting Diode (LED) behind the cutout in the opaque layer of the overlay causes the indicator to appear in amber through the translucent outer layer of the overlay when it is illuminated from behind by the LED, which is soldered onto the instrument cluster electronic circuit board. The ESP/BAS indicator is serviced as a unit with the instrument cluster. Operation OPERATION The ESP/BAS indicator gives an indication to the vehicle operator when a problem has been detected in the Electronic Stability Program (ESP)/Brake Assist System (BAS). This indicator is controlled by a transistor on the instrument cluster circuit board based upon cluster programming and electronic messages received by the cluster from the Controller Antilock Brake (CAB) and the Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) over the Controller Area Network (CAN) data bus. The ESP/BAS indicator Light Emitting Diode (LED) is completely controlled by the instrument cluster logic circuit, and that logic will only allow this indicator to operate when the instrument cluster receives a battery current input on the fused ignition switch output (run-start) circuit. Therefore, the LED will always be OFF when the ignition switch is in any position except ON or START. The LED only illuminates when it is provided a path to ground by the instrument cluster transistor. The instrument cluster will turn ON the ESP/BAS indicator for the following reasons: - Bulb Test - Each time the ignition switch is turned to the ON position the ESP/BAS indicator is illuminated for about four seconds as a bulb test. - ESP/BAS Indicator Lamp-On Message - Each time the cluster receives an electronic ESP/BAS indicator lamp-ON message from the CAB or the TIPM, the ESP/BAS indicator will be illuminated. The indicator remains illuminated until the cluster receives a lamp-OFF message from the CAB or TIPM, or until the ignition switch is turned to the OFF position, whichever occurs first. - Actuator Test - Each time the cluster is put through the actuator test, the ESP/BAS indicator will be turned ON, then OFF again during the bulb check portion of the test to confirm the functionality of the LED and the cluster control circuitry. The CAB and TIPM continually monitor the ESP/BAS system circuits and sensors to decide whether the system is in good operating condition and the proper outputs to the components of the system. The CAB or TIPM then sends the proper lamp-ON or lamp-OFF message to the ElectroMechanical Instrument Cluster (EMIC) (also known as the Cab Compartment Node/CCN). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Traction Control Indicator Lamp > Component Information > Description and Operation > Electronic Stability Program/Brake Assist System Indicator > Page 14835 For proper diagnosis of the ESP/BAS system, the CAB, the TIPM, the EMIC, the CAN data bus or the electronic communication related to ESP/BAS indicator operation a diagnostic scan tool is required. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Traction Control Indicator Lamp > Component Information > Description and Operation > Electronic Stability Program/Brake Assist System Indicator > Page 14836 Traction Control Indicator Lamp: Description and Operation Traction Control Indicator Description DESCRIPTION An Electronic Stability Program/Brake Assist System (ESP/BAS)/Traction Control System (TCS) traction control indicator is only found in the instrument clusters for vehicles equipped with a gasoline engine. However, on vehicles not equipped with the optional ESP/BAS/TCS, this indicator is electronically disabled. This indicator is located in the lower portion of the tachometer dial face in the instrument cluster overlay. The traction control indicator consists of a stencil-like cutout of the International Control and Display Symbol icon for Stability - Anti-Spin in the opaque layer of the instrument cluster overlay. The dark outer layer of the overlay prevents the indicator from being clearly visible when it is not illuminated. An amber Light Emitting Diode (LED) behind the cutout in the opaque layer of the overlay causes the indicator to appear in amber through the translucent outer layer of the overlay when it is illuminated from behind by the LED, which is soldered onto the instrument cluster electronic circuit board. The traction control indicator is serviced as a unit with the instrument cluster. Operation OPERATION The traction control indicator gives an indication to the vehicle operator when the Electronic Stability Program (ESP)/Brake Assist System (BAS)/Traction Control System (TCS) has been activated. This indicator is controlled by a transistor on the instrument cluster circuit board based upon cluster programming and electronic messages received by the cluster from the Controller Antilock Brake (CAB) over the Controller Area Network (CAN) data bus. The traction control indicator is completely controlled by the instrument cluster logic circuit, and that logic will only allow this indicator to operate when the instrument cluster receives a battery current input on the fused ignition switch output (run-start) circuit. Therefore, the indicator will always be OFF when the ignition switch is in any position except ON or START. The indicator only illuminates when it is provided a path to ground by the instrument cluster transistor. The instrument cluster will turn ON the traction control indicator for the following reasons: - Bulb Test - Each time the ignition switch is turned to the ON position the traction control indicator is illuminated for about four seconds as a bulb test. The entire bulb test is a function of the CAB. - Traction Control Indicator Lamp-On Message - Each time the cluster receives an electronic traction control indicator lamp-ON message from the CAB indicating that the ESP/BAS/TCS has been activated, the traction control indicator will be illuminated. The indicator remains illuminated until the cluster receives a lamp-OFF message from the CAB, or until the ignition switch is turned to the OFF position, whichever occurs first. - Actuator Test - Each time the cluster is put through the actuator test, the traction control indicator will be turned ON, then OFF again during the bulb check portion of the test to confirm the functionality of the LED and the cluster control circuitry. The CAB continually monitors the status of the inputs to the ESP/BAS/TCS systems to determine the proper outputs to the components of the Antilock Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Traction Control Indicator Lamp > Component Information > Description and Operation > Electronic Stability Program/Brake Assist System Indicator > Page 14837 Brake System (ABS). The CAB then sends the proper lamp-ON or lamp-OFF message to the ElectroMechanical Instrument Cluster (EMIC) (also known as the Cab Compartment Node/CCN). For further diagnosis of the traction control indicator or the instrument cluster circuitry that controls the indicator, Refer to appropriate testing. For proper diagnosis of the ESP/BAS/TCS, the CAB, the EMIC, the CAN data bus or the electronic communication related to traction control indicator operation a diagnostic scan tool is required. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Transmission Mode Indicator - A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Transmission Mode Indicator - A/T: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION An electronic automatic transmission gear selector indicator is standard factory-installed equipment on this vehicle. However, on vehicles not equipped with an optional automatic transmission, this indicator is electronically disabled. The gear selector indicator information is displayed in an electronic, blue-green Vacuum-Fluorescent Display (VFD) unit. This VFD unit is soldered onto the cluster electronic circuit board and is visible through a window with a smoked clear lens located on the lower edge of the speedometer dial face of the cluster overlay. The dark lens over the VFD prevents the indicator from being clearly visible when it is not illuminated. The gear selector indicator displays the following characters from left to right: P, R, N, D, 2, and 1. Each character appears in a blue-green color and at the same lighting level as the odometer information. Respectively, these characters represent the PARK, REVERSE, NEUTRAL, DRIVE, second gear, and first gear positions of the transmission gear selector lever on the steering column. The indicator illuminates a rectangular box around the character that represents the currently selected lever position. During daylight hours (exterior lamps are OFF) the gear selector indicator is illuminated at full brightness for clear visibility. At night (exterior lamps are ON), the indicator lighting level is adjusted with the other cluster general illumination lamps using the panel lamps dimmer thumbwheel on the headlamp switch. However, a PARADE mode position of the panel lamps dimmer thumbwheel allows the indicator to be illuminated at full brightness if the exterior lamps are turned ON during daylight hours. The gear selector indicator is serviced as a unit with the VFD unit in the instrument cluster. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Transmission Mode Indicator - A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 14842 Transmission Mode Indicator - A/T: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The electronic gear selector indicator gives an indication to the vehicle operator of the transmission gear that has been selected with the automatic transmission gear selector lever. This indicator is controlled by the instrument cluster circuit board based upon cluster programming. The cluster circuitry automatically configures itself for the proper transmission type based upon the hard wired transmission range sensor mux circuit input to the cluster. The gear selector indicator information is displayed by the odometer/trip odometer Vacuum Fluorescent Display (VFD) unit soldered onto the instrument cluster electronic circuit board, and the VFD will not display the gear selector indicator information after the ignition switch is turned to the OFF position. Each time the cluster is disconnected from battery current for more than about five minutes, it must configure itself for the automatic transmission type that is in the vehicle once it is reconnected to battery current. The instrument cluster circuitry configures the gear selector indicator based upon the following inputs from the transmission range sensor: - Open Circuit - If the cluster is configured for an automatic transmission and the transmission range sensor mux circuit is open, the cluster circuitry controls the gear selector indicator display based upon an electronic selected gear message received from the Transmission Control Module (TCM) over the Controller Area Network (CAN) data bus. If the Transmission Range Sensor (TRS) mux circuit is open and no electronic selected gear messages are received from the TCM within two seconds, the instrument cluster circuitry will not display any gear selector position until the condition is resolved or until the ignition switch is turned to the OFF position, whichever occurs first. - Resolved Circuit - If the transmission range sensor mux circuit is resolved, the cluster circuitry controls the gear selector indicator display based upon the resistance value of the hard wired input from the TRS. If the cluster is configured for an automatic transmission with a TRS input and detects a short to ground or an open in the TRS mux input, the instrument cluster circuitry will not display any gear selector position in the VFD. The VFD display for the short-to-ground and open circuit conditions will continue until the condition is resolved or until the ignition switch is turned to the OFF position, whichever occurs first. - Actuator Test - Each time the cluster is put through the actuator test, the odometer/trip odometer VFD will display all of its characters at once, then step through each character segment individually during the VFD portion of the test to confirm the functionality of the VFD and the cluster control circuitry. On vehicles with a TCM, the TCM continually monitors the TRS, then sends the proper message to the ElectroMechanical Instrument Cluster (EMIC) (also known as the Cab Compartment Node/CCN). On vehicles without a TCM, the EMIC continually monitors the hard wired TRS multiplexed input. On vehicles with a TCM, for proper diagnosis of the TRS, the TCM, the EMIC, the CAN data bus or the electronic communication related to gear selector indicator operation a diagnostic scan tool is required. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Volt Meter Gauge > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Volt Meter Gauge: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION A voltage gauge is standard equipment on all instrument clusters except the ST vehicles with a gasoline engine. This gauge is located in the upper left quadrant of the instrument cluster, above the fuel gauge. This gauge consists of a movable gauge needle or pointer controlled by the instrument cluster circuitry and a fixed 90 degree scale on the cluster overlay that reads left-to-right from L (or Low) to H (or High) for gasoline engines. On vehicles with a diesel engine, the scale reads from 8 to 18 volts. An International Control and Display Symbol icon for Battery Charging Condition is located on the cluster overlay, directly below the right end of the gauge scale. The voltage gauge graphics are black against a white field except for a single red graduation at each end of the gauge scale making them clearly visible within the instrument cluster in daylight. When illuminated from behind by the panel lamps dimmer controlled cluster general illumination lighting with the exterior lamps turned ON, the black graphics appear blue-green and the red graphics still appear red. The gauge needle has internal optical illumination. Gauge illumination is provided by a replaceable incandescent bulb and holder unit located on the instrument cluster electronic circuit board. The voltage gauge is serviced as a unit with the instrument cluster. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Volt Meter Gauge > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 14847 Volt Meter Gauge: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The voltage gauge gives an indication to the vehicle operator of the electrical system voltage. This gauge is controlled by the instrument cluster circuit board based upon cluster programming and electronic messages received by the cluster from the Powertrain Control Module (PCM) on vehicles equipped with a gasoline engine, or from the Engine Control Module (ECM) on vehicles equipped with a diesel engine over the Controller Area Network (CAN) data bus. The voltage gauge is an air core magnetic unit that receives battery current on the instrument cluster electronic circuit board through the fused ignition switch output (run-start) circuit whenever the ignition switch is in the ON or START positions. The cluster is programmed to move the gauge needle back to the left end of the scale after the ignition switch is turned to the OFF position. The instrument cluster circuitry controls the gauge needle position and provides the following features: - System Voltage Message - Each time the cluster receives an electronic system voltage message from the PCM or ECM indicating the voltage is between about 9.5 volts and about 15 volts, the gauge needle is moved to the relative voltage position on the gauge scale. - System Voltage Low (Charge Fail) Message - Each time the cluster receives three consecutive electronic system voltage messages from the PCM or ECM indicating the voltage is less than about 9 volts (charge fail condition) or that the battery temperature sensor input is an open circuit, the gauge needle is moved to the graduation on the far left end of the gauge scale and the check gauges indicator is illuminated. The gauge needle remains at the far left end of the gauge scale and the check gauges indicator remains illuminated until the cluster receives a single message from the PCM or ECM indicating the voltage is greater than about 9.5 volts (but less than about 15.5 volts), or until the ignition switch is turned to the OFF position, whichever occurs first. On vehicles equipped with the optional diesel engine, the ECM is programmed to restrict the voltage gauge needle to a position above the graduation on the far left end of the gauge scale and suppress the check engine indicator operation until after the engine intake manifold air heater has completed a pre-heat or post-heat cycle. - System Voltage High Message - Each time the cluster receives 3 consecutive electronic system voltage messages from the PCM or ECM indicating the voltage is greater than about 15.5 volts, the gauge needle is moved to the graduation on the far right end of the gauge scale and the check gauges indicator is illuminated. The gauge needle remains at the right end of the gauge scale and the check gauges indicator remains illuminated until the cluster receives a message from the PCM or ECM indicating the voltage is less than about 15.0 volts (but greater than about 9.5 volts), or until the ignition switch is turned to the OFF position, whichever occurs first. - Communication Error - If the cluster fails to receive a system voltage message, it will hold the gauge needle at the last indication for about three seconds, or until the ignition switch is turned to the OFF position, whichever occurs first. After three seconds, the cluster will move the gauge needle to the far left end of the gauge scale. - Actuator Test - Each time the cluster is put through the actuator test, the voltage gauge needle will be swept to several calibration points on the gauge scale in a prescribed sequence in order to confirm the functionality of the gauge and the cluster control circuitry. The PCM (gasoline engine) or ECM (diesel engine) continually monitors the system voltage to control the generator output. The PCM or ECM then sends the proper system voltage message to the ElectroMechanical Instrument Cluster (EMIC) (also known as the Cab Compartment Node/CCN). If the instrument cluster turns ON the check gauges indicator due to a charge fail or voltage high condition, it may indicate that the charging system requires service. For proper diagnosis of the charging system, the PCM, the ECM, the EMIC, the CAN data bus or the electronic communication related to voltage gauge operation a diagnostic scan tool is required. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Backup Lamp > Backup Lamp Switch > Component Information > Locations Backup Lamp Switch: Locations Component ID: 481 Component : SWITCH-BACKUP LAMP Connector: Name : SWITCH-BACKUP LAMP Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (3.7L M/T/4.7L M/T) Pin Circuit Description 1 Z965 20BK GROUND 2 L10 20WT/GY FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN) Component Location - 22 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Backup Lamp > Backup Lamp Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 14853 Component Location - 24 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Backup Lamp > Backup Lamp Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 14854 Component Location - 25 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Backup Lamp > Backup Lamp Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 14855 Connector: Name : SWITCH-BACKUP LAMP Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (M/T 5.7L HD/DIESEL M/T) Pin Circuit Description 1 Z965 20BK GROUND 2 L10 20WT/GY FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN) Component Location - 22 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Backup Lamp > Backup Lamp Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 14856 Component Location - 24 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Backup Lamp > Backup Lamp Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 14857 Component Location - 25 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Backup Lamp > Backup Lamp Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 14858 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Backup Lamp > Backup Lamp Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 14859 Backup Lamp Switch: Diagrams Component ID: 481 Component : SWITCH-BACKUP LAMP Connector: Name : SWITCH-BACKUP LAMP Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (3.7L M/T/4.7L M/T) Pin Circuit Description 1 Z965 20BK GROUND 2 L10 20WT/GY FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN) Component Location - 22 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Backup Lamp > Backup Lamp Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 14860 Component Location - 24 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Backup Lamp > Backup Lamp Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 14861 Component Location - 25 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Backup Lamp > Backup Lamp Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 14862 Connector: Name : SWITCH-BACKUP LAMP Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (M/T 5.7L HD/DIESEL M/T) Pin Circuit Description 1 Z965 20BK GROUND 2 L10 20WT/GY FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN) Component Location - 22 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Backup Lamp > Backup Lamp Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 14863 Component Location - 24 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Backup Lamp > Backup Lamp Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 14864 Component Location - 25 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Backup Lamp > Backup Lamp Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 14865 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Backup Lamp > Backup Lamp Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Backup Lamp Switch: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION Vehicles equipped with a manual transmission have a normally open, spring-loaded plunger type backup lamp switch (2). Vehicles with an optional electronic automatic transmission have a Transmission Range Sensor (TRS) that is used to perform several functions, including that of the backup lamp switch. The TRS is described in further detail elsewhere in this service information. Refer to the service and diagnostic information for the automatic transmission type installed in the vehicle. The backup lamp switch is located in a threaded hole on the side of the manual transmission housing. The switch has a threaded body and a hex formation near the plunger end of the switch. An integral connector receptacle at the end of the switch opposite the plunger connects the switch to the vehicle electrical system through a take out and connector of the engine wire harness. When installed, only the switch connector and the hex formation are visible on the outside of the transmission housing. The backup lamp switch cannot be adjusted or repaired and, if ineffective or damaged, the entire switch unit must be replaced. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Backup Lamp > Backup Lamp Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 14868 Backup Lamp Switch: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The backup lamp switch controls the flow of battery voltage to the backup lamp bulbs through an output on the backup lamp feed circuit. The switch plunger is mechanically actuated by the gearshift mechanism within the transmission, which will depress the switch plunger and close the switch contacts whenever the REVERSE gear has been selected. The switch receives battery voltage through a fuse in the Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) on a fused ignition switch output (run) circuit whenever the ignition switch is in the ON position. The backup lamp switch as well as the hard wired inputs and outputs of the switch may be diagnosed using conventional diagnostic tools and procedures. Refer to the appropriate wiring information. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Backup Lamp > Backup Lamp Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 14869 Backup Lamp Switch: Testing and Inspection BACKUP LAMP SWITCH 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. 2. Raise and support the vehicle. 3. Locate and disconnect the engine wire harness connector for the backup lamp switch. 4. Check for continuity between the two terminal pins in the backup lamp switch connector receptacle. a. With the gear selector lever in the REVERSE position, there should be continuity. b. With the gear selector lever in any position other than REVERSE, there should be no continuity. 5. If the switch fails either of these two continuity tests, replace the ineffective backup lamp switch. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Brake Light Bulb > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Brake Light Bulb: Service and Repair Removal Bulb - Cab and Chassis BULB - CAB AND CHASSIS NOTE: The rear lamp unit contains two bulbs: the park/turn signal/brake/license plate, and the backup. The service procedures for each bulb are the same, only the bulb sizes and types may differ. 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. 2. Remove the four screws (1) that secure the lens (2) to the rear lamp unit housing (5). 3. Push the backup lamp bulb (4), or the park/turn signal/brake/license plate bulb (7) slightly into its socket (3) or (6), then rotate the bulb counterclockwise about 30 degrees to unlock it. 4. Pull the base of the bulb straight out of the socket. Bulb - Pick-Up BULB - PICK-UP NOTE: The rear lamp unit contains two bulbs: park/stop/turn signal/side marker and backup. The service procedures for each bulb are the same, only the bulb sizes and types may differ. 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. 2. Remove the rear lamp unit (1) from the end of the quarter panel. See: Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Rear Lamp Unit Removal . 3. Disconnect the wire harness connector (3) from the park/stop/turn signal/side marker (2) or the backup (4) bulb socket on the back of the lamp housing. 4. Firmly grasp the socket on the back of the housing and rotate it counterclockwise about 30 degrees to unlock it. 5. Pull the socket and bulb straight out from the keyed opening in the housing. 6. Pull the base of the bulb straight out of the socket. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Brake Light Bulb > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 14875 Brake Light Bulb: Service and Repair Installation Bulb - Cab and Chassis BULB - CAB AND CHASSIS CAUTION: Always use the correct bulb size and type for replacement. An incorrect bulb size or type may overheat and cause damage to the lamp, the socket or the lamp wiring. NOTE: The rear lamp unit contains two bulbs: the park/turn signal/brake/license plate, and the backup. The service procedures for each bulb are the same, only the bulb sizes and types may differ. 1. Align the base of the backup lamp bulb (4), or the park/turn signal/brake/license plate lamp bulb (7) with its socket (3) or (6). 2. Push the bulb straight into the socket until the base is firmly seated, then rotate the bulb clockwise about 30 degrees to lock it into place. 3. Position the lens (2) to the rear lamp unit housing (5). 4. Install and tighten the four screws (1) that secure the lens to the housing. Tighten the screws to 2 Nm (20 in. lbs.). 5. Reconnect the battery negative cable. Bulb - Pick-Up BULB - PICK-UP CAUTION: Always use the correct bulb size and type for replacement. An incorrect bulb size or type may overheat and cause damage to the lamp, the socket or the lamp wiring. NOTE: The rear lamp unit contains two bulbs: park/stop/turn signal/side marker and backup. The service procedures for each bulb are the same, only the bulb sizes and types may differ. 1. Align the base of the bulb with the park/stop/turn signal/side marker (2) or the backup (4) bulb socket. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Brake Light Bulb > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 14876 2. Push the bulb straight into the socket until the base is firmly seated. 3. Align the socket and bulb with the keyed opening on the back of the rear lamp unit housing (1). 4. Insert the socket and bulb into the housing until the socket is firmly seated. 5. Rotate the socket clockwise about 30 degrees to lock it into place. 6. Reconnect the wire harness connector (3) to the socket. 7. Reinstall the rear lamp unit onto the end of the quarter panel. See: Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Rear Lamp Unit - Installation . 8. Reconnect the battery negative cable. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Light Switch > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 478 Brake Light Switch: Locations Component ID 478 Component ID: 478 Component : SWITCH-STOPLAMP Connector: Name : SWITCH-STOPLAMP Color : BLACK # of pins : 6 Pin Circuit Description 1 A103 18GY/RD FUSED B(+) 2 L50 18WT/TN BRAKE LAMP SWITCH OUTPUT 3 V30 20VT/WT S/C BRAKE SWITCH OUTPUT 4 V32 20VT/YL BRAKE SWITCH NO. 2 SIGNAL 5 Z429 20BK/OR GROUND 6 B29 20DG/WT BRAKE SWITCH NO. 1 SIGNAL Component Location - 41 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Light Switch > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 478 > Page 14881 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Light Switch > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 478 > Page 14882 Brake Light Switch: Locations Component ID 511 Component ID: 511 Component : SWITCH-STOPLAMP Connector: Name : SWITCH-STOPLAMP Color : BLACK # of pins : 6 Pin Circuit Description 1 A103 18GY/RD FUSED B(+) 2 L50 18WT/TN BRAKE LAMP SWITCH OUTPUT 3 V30 20VT/WT S/C BRAKE SWITCH OUTPUT 4 V32 20VT/YL BRAKE SWITCH NO. 2 SIGNAL 5 Z429 20BK/OR GROUND 6 B29 20DG/WT BRAKE SWITCH NO. 1 SIGNAL Component Location - 41 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Light Switch > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 478 > Page 14883 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Light Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Component ID 478 Brake Light Switch: Diagrams Component ID 478 Component ID: 478 Component : SWITCH-STOPLAMP Connector: Name : SWITCH-STOPLAMP Color : BLACK # of pins : 6 Pin Circuit Description 1 A103 18GY/RD FUSED B(+) 2 L50 18WT/TN BRAKE LAMP SWITCH OUTPUT 3 V30 20VT/WT S/C BRAKE SWITCH OUTPUT 4 V32 20VT/YL BRAKE SWITCH NO. 2 SIGNAL 5 Z429 20BK/OR GROUND 6 B29 20DG/WT BRAKE SWITCH NO. 1 SIGNAL Component Location - 41 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Light Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Component ID 478 > Page 14886 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Light Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Component ID 478 > Page 14887 Brake Light Switch: Diagrams Component ID 511 Component ID: 511 Component : SWITCH-STOPLAMP Connector: Name : SWITCH-STOPLAMP Color : BLACK # of pins : 6 Pin Circuit Description 1 A103 18GY/RD FUSED B(+) 2 L50 18WT/TN BRAKE LAMP SWITCH OUTPUT 3 V30 20VT/WT S/C BRAKE SWITCH OUTPUT 4 V32 20VT/YL BRAKE SWITCH NO. 2 SIGNAL 5 Z429 20BK/OR GROUND 6 B29 20DG/WT BRAKE SWITCH NO. 1 SIGNAL Component Location - 41 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Light Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Component ID 478 > Page 14888 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Light Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Brake Light Switch: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The brake lamp switch (2) is a three circuit, spring-loaded plunger actuated switch that is secured to the steering column support bracket under the instrument panel on the driver side of the vehicle. The molded plastic switch housing has an integral connector receptacle (1) containing six terminal pins and featuring a Connector Position Assurance (CPA) lock. The switch is connected to the vehicle electrical system through a dedicated take out of the instrument panel wire harness. The switch plunger (3) extends through a mounting collar (4) on one end of the switch housing. The plunger has a one time telescoping self-adjustment feature that is activated after the switch is installed by moving an adjustment release lever (5) on the opposite end of the switch housing clockwise, until it locks into a position that is horizontal and parallel to the connector receptacle. An installed brake lamp switch cannot be readjusted or repaired. If the switch is damaged, ineffective, or removed from its mounting position for any reason, it must be replaced with a new unit. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Light Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 14891 Brake Light Switch: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The brake lamp switch controls three independent circuits. These circuits are described as follows: - Brake Lamp Switch Circuit - A normally open brake lamp switch circuit receives a battery voltage input, and supplies this battery voltage to the brake lamps and the Controller Antilock Brake (CAB) on a brake lamp switch output circuit only when the brake pedal is depressed (brake lamp switch plunger released). - Brake Lamp Switch Signal Circuit - A normally closed brake lamp switch signal circuit receives a direct path to ground, and supplies this ground input to the Powertrain Control Module (PCM) on a brake lamp switch sense circuit only when the brake pedal is released (brake lamp switch plunger is depressed). - Speed Control Circuit - A normally closed speed control circuit receives a battery voltage input from the Powertrain Control Module on a speed control supply circuit, and supplies this battery voltage to the speed control servo solenoids (dump, vacuum, and vent) on a speed control brake switch output circuit only when the speed control system is turned ON and the brake pedal is released (brake lamp switch plunger is depressed). The components of the self-adjusting brake switch plunger consist of a two-piece telescoping plunger, a split plunger locking collar, and a release wedge. The release lever has a shaft with a wedge that spreads the plunger locking collar to an open or released position. After the switch is installed and the brake pedal is released, the plunger telescopes to the correct adjustment position. When the release lever is moved to the release position, the wedge is disengaged from the locking collar causing the collar to apply a clamping pressure to the two plunger halves, fixing the plunger length. The brake lamp switch as well as the hard wired inputs and outputs of the switch may be diagnosed using conventional diagnostic tools and procedures. Refer to the appropriate wiring information. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Light Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 14892 Brake Light Switch: Testing and Inspection BRAKE LAMP SWITCH WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury on vehicles equipped with airbags, disable the Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, airbag, seat belt tensioner, impact sensor, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the SRS. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment. 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. CAUTION: Do not remove the brake lamp switch from the mounting bracket. The self-adjusting switch plunger is a one time only feature. If the switch is removed from the mounting bracket, it MUST be replaced with a new switch. 2. Disconnect the wire harness connector from the brake lamp switch. 3. Using an ohmmeter, perform the continuity tests at the terminal pins (1) in the brake lamp switch connector receptacle as shown in the Brake Lamp Switch Tests table. 4. If the switch fails any of the continuity tests, replace the ineffective brake lamp switch as required. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Light Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Brake Light Switch: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury on vehicles equipped with airbags, disable the Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, airbag, seat belt tensioner, impact sensor, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the SRS. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment. 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. 2. Locate the brake lamp switch (2) near the support bracket on the lower steering column (1). 3. Disconnect the wire harness connector (3) from the brake lamp switch. 4. Rotate the brake lamp switch housing clockwise about 30 degrees to align the tabs on the switch locking collar with the keyed hole in the switch mounting bracket. 5. Pull the switch straight back from the keyed hole to remove it from the bracket. CAUTION: The brake lamp switch self-adjusting switch plunger is a one time only feature. If the switch is removed from the mounting bracket, it MUST be replaced with a new switch. 6. Discard the removed brake lamp switch. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Light Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 14895 Brake Light Switch: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury on vehicles equipped with airbags, disable the Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, airbag, seat belt tensioner, impact sensor, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the SRS. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment. CAUTION: The brake lamp switch self-adjusting switch plunger is a one time only feature. If the switch is removed from the mounting bracket, it MUST be replaced with a new switch. 1. Depress and hold the brake pedal in the depressed position. 2. Align the tabs on the brake lamp switch locking collar with the keyed hole in the switch mounting bracket on the lower steering column (1). 3. Insert the tabs on the brake lamp switch locking collar through the keyed hole in the switch mounting bracket until the switch housing (2) is firmly seated against the bracket. 4. Rotate the switch housing counterclockwise about 30 degrees to engage the tabs on the locking collar with the switch mounting bracket. CAUTION: Do not release or pull up on the brake pedal before the switch plunger adjustment has been completed. 5. Release the brake pedal, but do not pull it upward. 6. Rotate the plunger adjustment release lever (4) clockwise until it locks into place. The lever should be parallel to the brake lamp switch connector receptacle. This action will set the switch plunger length to a final adjustment position and cannot be undone. If not performed properly the first time, a new brake lamp switch must be installed. 7. Reconnect the wire harness connector (3) to the brake lamp switch. 8. Reconnect the battery negative cable. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Cargo Lamp > Component Information > Locations Cargo Lamp: Locations Component ID: 177 Component : LAMP-HIGH MOUNTED STOP/CARGO Connector: Name : LAMP-HIGH MOUNTED STOP/CARGO Color : WHITE # of pins : 4 Pin Circuit Description 1 L14 20WT/RD CARGO LAMP DRIVER 2 Z964 20BK GROUND 3 Z964 20BK GROUND 4 L50 18WT/TN BRAKE LAMP SWITCH OUTPUT Component Location - 68 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Cargo Lamp > Component Information > Locations > Page 14899 Component Location - 53 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Cargo Lamp > Component Information > Locations > Page 14900 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Cargo Lamp > Component Information > Locations > Page 14901 Cargo Lamp: Diagrams Component ID: 177 Component : LAMP-HIGH MOUNTED STOP/CARGO Connector: Name : LAMP-HIGH MOUNTED STOP/CARGO Color : WHITE # of pins : 4 Pin Circuit Description 1 L14 20WT/RD CARGO LAMP DRIVER 2 Z964 20BK GROUND 3 Z964 20BK GROUND 4 L50 18WT/TN BRAKE LAMP SWITCH OUTPUT Component Location - 68 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Cargo Lamp > Component Information > Locations > Page 14902 Component Location - 53 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Cargo Lamp > Component Information > Locations > Page 14903 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Cargo Lamp > Component Information > Service and Repair > Cargo Lamp - Removal Cargo Lamp: Service and Repair Cargo Lamp - Removal REMOVAL NOTE: The Center High Mounted Stop Lamp (CHMSL) may house up to three bulbs. The center bulb is the CHMSL bulb and illuminates through a red lens, while on vehicles so equipped the two outboard bulbs are for the cargo lamps and illuminate through clear lenses. The bulb types and service procedures are identical for all three of these bulbs. 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. 2. Remove the two screws that secure the CHMSL to the rear cab roof header panel. 3. Pull the CHMSL lens and housing (1) away from the header panel far enough to access the lamp wiring and bulb sockets on the back of the lamp. 4. Firmly grasp either outboard socket (3) on the back of the lamp housing and rotate it counterclockwise about 30 degrees to unlock it. 5. Pull the socket and bulb straight out from the keyed opening in the housing. 6. Pull the base of the bulb (2) straight out of the socket. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Cargo Lamp > Component Information > Service and Repair > Cargo Lamp - Removal > Page 14906 Cargo Lamp: Service and Repair Cargo Lamp - Installation INSTALLATION CAUTION: Always use the correct bulb size and type for replacement. An incorrect bulb size or type may overheat and cause damage to the lamp, the socket or the lamp wiring. NOTE: The Center High Mounted Stop Lamp (CHMSL) may house up to three bulbs. The center bulb is the CHMSL bulb and illuminates through a red lens, while on vehicles so equipped the two outboard bulbs are for the cargo lamps and illuminate through clear lenses. The bulb types and service procedures are identical for all three of these bulbs. 1. Align the base of the bulb (2) with the socket (3). 2. Push the bulb straight into the socket until the base is firmly seated. 3. Align the socket and bulb with either keyed outboard opening on the back of CHMSL housing (1). 4. Insert the socket and bulb into the housing until the socket is firmly seated. 5. Rotate the socket clockwise about 30 degrees to lock it into place. 6. Position the CHMSL into the opening in the rear cab roof header panel. 7. Install and tighten the two screws (passenger side first) that secure the CHMSL to the header panel. Tighten the screws to 2 Nm (20 in. lbs.). 8. Reconnect the battery negative cable. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Center Mounted Brake Lamp > Center Mounted Brake Lamp Bulb > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Center Mounted Brake Lamp Bulb: Service and Repair Removal BULB NOTE: The Center High Mounted Stop Lamp (CHMSL) may house up to three bulbs. The center bulb is the CHMSL bulb and illuminates through a red lens, while on vehicles so equipped the two outboard bulbs are for the cargo lamps and illuminate through clear lenses. The bulb types and service procedures are identical for all three of these bulbs. 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. 2. Remove the two screws that secure the CHMSL to the rear cab roof header panel. 3. Pull the CHMSL lens and housing (1) away from the header panel far enough to access the lamp wiring and bulb sockets (3) on the back of the lamp. 4. Firmly grasp the center socket on the back of the lamp housing and rotate it counterclockwise about 30 degrees to unlock it. 5. Pull the socket and bulb straight out from the keyed opening in the housing. 6. Pull the base of the bulb (2) straight out of the socket. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Center Mounted Brake Lamp > Center Mounted Brake Lamp Bulb > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 14912 Center Mounted Brake Lamp Bulb: Service and Repair Installation BULB CAUTION: Always use the correct bulb size and type for replacement. An incorrect bulb size or type may overheat and cause damage to the lamp, the socket or the lamp wiring. NOTE: The Center High Mounted Stop Lamp (CHMSL) may house up to three bulbs. The center bulb is the CHMSL bulb and illuminates through a red lens, while on vehicles so equipped the two outboard bulbs are for the cargo lamps and illuminate through clear lenses. The bulb types and service procedures are identical for all three of these bulbs. 1. Align the base of the CHMSL bulb (2) with the socket (3). 2. Push the bulb straight into the socket until the base is firmly seated. 3. Align the socket and bulb with the keyed opening on the back of CHMSL housing (1). 4. Insert the socket and bulb into the housing until the socket is firmly seated. 5. Rotate the socket clockwise about 30 degrees to lock it into place. 6. Position the CHMSL into the opening in the rear cab roof header panel. 7. Install and tighten the two screws (passenger side first) that secure the CHMSL to the header panel. Tighten the screws to 2 Nm (20 in. lbs.). 8. Reconnect the battery negative cable. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Clearance Lamp > Clearance Lamp Bulb > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Clearance Lamp Bulb: Service and Repair Removal BULB 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. 2. Remove the cab clearance lamp (1) from the roof panel. See: Service and Repair/Clearance Lamp - Removal . 3. Pull the base of the bulb (3) straight out of the socket (2). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Clearance Lamp > Clearance Lamp Bulb > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 14918 Clearance Lamp Bulb: Service and Repair Installation BULB CAUTION: Always use the correct bulb size and type for replacement. An incorrect bulb size or type may overheat and cause damage to the lamp, the socket or the lamp wiring. 1. Align the base of the bulb (3) with the socket (2). 2. Push the bulb straight into the socket until the base is firmly seated. 3. Reinstall the cab clearance lamp (1) onto the roof panel. See: Service and Repair/Clearance Lamp - Installation . 4. Reconnect the battery negative cable. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Cornering Lamp > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Lighting - Information On Exterior Lamp Lens Fogging Cornering Lamp: Technical Service Bulletins Lighting - Information On Exterior Lamp Lens Fogging NUMBER: 23-035-07 GROUP: Body DATE: August 08, 2007 THIS BULLETIN SUPERSEDES TECHNICAL SERVICE BULLETIN 23-041-06, DATED SEPTEMBER 27, 2006, WHICH SHOULD BE REMOVED FROM YOUR FILES. THIS IS A COMPLETE REVISION AND NO ASTERISKS HAVE BEEN USED TO HIGHLIGHT REVISIONS. SUBJECT: Exterior Lamp - Lens Fogging MODELS: 2006 - 2008 (CS) Pacifica 2006 - 2008 (DC/DM) Ram Truck - Cab & Chassis (3500/4500/5500) 2006 - 2008 (DR/DH/D1) Ram Truck - Pick-up (1500/2500/3500) 2006 - 2008 (HB/HG) Durango/Aspen 2007 - 2008 (JK) Wrangler 2006 (JR) Stratus/Sebring 2006 - 2007 (JR27) Sebring Convertible 2007 - 2008 (JS) Sebring/Avenger 2008 (JS27) Sebring Convertible 2007 - 2008 (KA) Nitro 2006 - 2007 (KJ) Liberty/Cherokee 2008 (KK) Liberty/Cherokee 2006 - 2008 (LX/LE) 300/Magnum/Charger 2007 - 2008 (MK49) Compass 2007 - 2008 (MK74) Patriot 2006 - 2008 (ND) Dakota 2007 - 2008 (PM) Caliber 2006 - 2008 (PT) PT Cruiser 2006 - 2007 (RS/RG) Town & Country/Caravan/Voyager 2008 (RT) Town & Country/Caravan/Voyager 2006-2008 (WK/WH) Grand Cherokee 2006 - 2008 (XK/XH) Commander DISCUSSION: Some customers may report that on occasion, vehicle exterior lamp assemblies are fogged with a light layer of condensation on the inside of the lenses. This may be reported after the lamps have been turned on and brought up to operating temperature, turned off, and then rapidly cooled by cold water (such as rain, or the water from a car wash). Lens fogging can also occur under certain atmospheric conditions after a vehicle has been parked outside overnight (i.e., a warm humid day followed by clear cool night). This will usually clear as atmospheric conditions change to allow the condensation to change back into a vapor. Turning the lamps on will usually accelerate this process. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Cornering Lamp > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Lighting - Information On Exterior Lamp Lens Fogging > Page 14923 A lamp that has large amounts of water droplets visible on most internal surfaces indicates a problem with the lamp sealing that has allowed water to enter the lamp. In this instance, the customer is likely to report that moisture in the lamp is always present and never disappears. A lamp that exhibits internal moisture permanently should be replaced. POLICY: Information Only Disclaimer: This bulletin is supplied as technical information only and is not an authorization for repair. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Console Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams Console Lamp: Diagrams Component ID: 160 Component : LAMP-CENTER CONSOLE Connector: Name : LAMP-CENTER CONSOLE Color : # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (LOWER BUCKET) Gender : FEMALE Pin Circuit Description 1 Z939 18BK GROUND 2 M228 18YL/LB GLOVE BOX LAMP DRIVER Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Courtesy Lamp Bulb > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Courtesy Lamp Bulb: Service and Repair Removal BULB WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury on vehicles equipped with airbags, disable the Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, airbag, seat belt tensioner, impact sensor, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the SRS. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment. 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. 2. Remove the center bezel lamp unit (4) from the instrument panel center support structure. See: Service and Repair/Center Bezel Lamp Removal . 3. Depress the latch tab (2) and slide the hood (1) off of the end of the lamp housing. 4. Pull the base of the bulb (3) straight out of the bulb holder within the lamp housing. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Courtesy Lamp Bulb > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 14932 Courtesy Lamp Bulb: Service and Repair Installation BULB WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury on vehicles equipped with airbags, disable the Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, airbag, seat belt tensioner, impact sensor, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the SRS. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment. CAUTION: Always use the correct bulb size and type for replacement. An incorrect bulb size or type may overheat and cause damage to the lamp, the socket or the lamp wiring. 1. Align the base of the center bezel lamp bulb (3) with the bulb holder within the lamp housing (4). 2. Push the bulb straight into the bulb holder until the base is firmly seated. 3. Slide the hood (1) over the end of the lamp housing until the latch tab (2) snaps into place. 4. Reinstall the lamp unit into the instrument panel center support structure. See: Service and Repair/Center Bezel Lamp Installation . 5. Reconnect the battery negative cable. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Glove Box Lamp > Component Information > Locations Glove Box Lamp: Locations Component ID: 174 Component : LAMP-GLOVE BOX Connector: Name : LAMP-GLOVE BOX Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Pin Circuit Description 1 Z328 20BK/TN GROUND 2 M228 20YL/LB GLOVE BOX LAMP DRIVER Component Location - 46 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Glove Box Lamp > Component Information > Locations > Page 14936 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Glove Box Lamp > Component Information > Locations > Page 14937 Glove Box Lamp: Diagrams Component ID: 174 Component : LAMP-GLOVE BOX Connector: Name : LAMP-GLOVE BOX Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Pin Circuit Description 1 Z328 20BK/TN GROUND 2 M228 20YL/LB GLOVE BOX LAMP DRIVER Component Location - 46 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Glove Box Lamp > Component Information > Locations > Page 14938 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Glove Box Lamp > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Glove Box Lamp: Service and Repair Removal Bulb BULB WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury on vehicles equipped with airbags, disable the Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, airbag, seat belt tensioner, impact sensor, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the SRS. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment. 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. 2. Open the glove box door. 3. Reach through the window (3) in the instrument panel glove box opening (1) to access the bulb on the side of the glove box lamp and switch unit (2). 4. Pull the base of the bulb straight out of the bulb holder. Lamp/Switch LAMP/SWITCH WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury on vehicles equipped with airbags, disable the Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, airbag, seat belt tensioner, impact sensor, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the SRS. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Glove Box Lamp > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 14941 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. 2. Open the glove box door. 3. Reach through the window in the instrument panel (2) glove box opening behind the switch to access and depress the retaining latch on either side of the glove box lamp and switch unit (3). 4. While holding the retaining latch depressed, push the glove box lamp and switch unit out through the mounting hole in the face of the instrument panel. 5. Disconnect the wire harness connector (1) from the glove box lamp and switch. 6. Remove the lamp and switch unit from the instrument panel. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Glove Box Lamp > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 14942 Glove Box Lamp: Service and Repair Installation Bulb BULB WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury on vehicles equipped with airbags, disable the Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, airbag, seat belt tensioner, impact sensor, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the SRS. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment. CAUTION: Always use the correct bulb size and type for replacement. An incorrect bulb size or type may overheat and cause damage to the lamp, the socket or the lamp wiring. 1. Reach through the window (3) in the instrument panel glove box opening (1) to align the base of the bulb with the bulb holder on the side of the glove box lamp and switch unit (2). 2. Push the bulb straight into the bulb holder until the base is firmly seated. 3. Close the glove box door. 4. Reconnect the battery negative cable. Lamp/Switch LAMP/SWITCH WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury on vehicles equipped with airbags, disable the Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, airbag, seat belt tensioner, impact sensor, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the SRS. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Glove Box Lamp > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 14943 1. Position the glove box lamp and switch unit (3) to the instrument panel (2) glove box opening. 2. Reconnect the wire harness connector (1) to the lamp and switch unit. 3. Feed the wire harness back through the switch mounting hole. 4. Align the lamp and switch unit with the mounting hole in the instrument panel. 5. Using hand pressure, push the lamp and switch unit firmly and evenly into the mounting hole until it is fully seated. 6. Close the glove box door. 7. Reconnect the battery negative cable. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Glove Box Lamp Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Glove Box Lamp Switch: Service and Repair Removal LAMP/SWITCH WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury on vehicles equipped with airbags, disable the Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, airbag, seat belt tensioner, impact sensor, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the SRS. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment. 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. 2. Open the glove box door. 3. Reach through the window in the instrument panel (2) glove box opening behind the switch to access and depress the retaining latch on either side of the glove box lamp and switch unit (3). 4. While holding the retaining latch depressed, push the glove box lamp and switch unit out through the mounting hole in the face of the instrument panel. 5. Disconnect the wire harness connector (1) from the glove box lamp and switch. 6. Remove the lamp and switch unit from the instrument panel. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Glove Box Lamp Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 14948 Glove Box Lamp Switch: Service and Repair Installation LAMP/SWITCH WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury on vehicles equipped with airbags, disable the Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, airbag, seat belt tensioner, impact sensor, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the SRS. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment. 1. Position the glove box lamp and switch unit (3) to the instrument panel (2) glove box opening. 2. Reconnect the wire harness connector (1) to the lamp and switch unit. 3. Feed the wire harness back through the switch mounting hole. 4. Align the lamp and switch unit with the mounting hole in the instrument panel. 5. Using hand pressure, push the lamp and switch unit firmly and evenly into the mounting hole until it is fully seated. 6. Close the glove box door. 7. Reconnect the battery negative cable. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Daytime Running Lamp > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Lighting - Information On Exterior Lamp Lens Fogging Daytime Running Lamp: Technical Service Bulletins Lighting - Information On Exterior Lamp Lens Fogging NUMBER: 23-035-07 GROUP: Body DATE: August 08, 2007 THIS BULLETIN SUPERSEDES TECHNICAL SERVICE BULLETIN 23-041-06, DATED SEPTEMBER 27, 2006, WHICH SHOULD BE REMOVED FROM YOUR FILES. THIS IS A COMPLETE REVISION AND NO ASTERISKS HAVE BEEN USED TO HIGHLIGHT REVISIONS. SUBJECT: Exterior Lamp - Lens Fogging MODELS: 2006 - 2008 (CS) Pacifica 2006 - 2008 (DC/DM) Ram Truck - Cab & Chassis (3500/4500/5500) 2006 - 2008 (DR/DH/D1) Ram Truck - Pick-up (1500/2500/3500) 2006 - 2008 (HB/HG) Durango/Aspen 2007 - 2008 (JK) Wrangler 2006 (JR) Stratus/Sebring 2006 - 2007 (JR27) Sebring Convertible 2007 - 2008 (JS) Sebring/Avenger 2008 (JS27) Sebring Convertible 2007 - 2008 (KA) Nitro 2006 - 2007 (KJ) Liberty/Cherokee 2008 (KK) Liberty/Cherokee 2006 - 2008 (LX/LE) 300/Magnum/Charger 2007 - 2008 (MK49) Compass 2007 - 2008 (MK74) Patriot 2006 - 2008 (ND) Dakota 2007 - 2008 (PM) Caliber 2006 - 2008 (PT) PT Cruiser 2006 - 2007 (RS/RG) Town & Country/Caravan/Voyager 2008 (RT) Town & Country/Caravan/Voyager 2006-2008 (WK/WH) Grand Cherokee 2006 - 2008 (XK/XH) Commander DISCUSSION: Some customers may report that on occasion, vehicle exterior lamp assemblies are fogged with a light layer of condensation on the inside of the lenses. This may be reported after the lamps have been turned on and brought up to operating temperature, turned off, and then rapidly cooled by cold water (such as rain, or the water from a car wash). Lens fogging can also occur under certain atmospheric conditions after a vehicle has been parked outside overnight (i.e., a warm humid day followed by clear cool night). This will usually clear as atmospheric conditions change to allow the condensation to change back into a vapor. Turning the lamps on will usually accelerate this process. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Daytime Running Lamp > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Lighting - Information On Exterior Lamp Lens Fogging > Page 14953 A lamp that has large amounts of water droplets visible on most internal surfaces indicates a problem with the lamp sealing that has allowed water to enter the lamp. In this instance, the customer is likely to report that moisture in the lamp is always present and never disappears. A lamp that exhibits internal moisture permanently should be replaced. POLICY: Information Only Disclaimer: This bulletin is supplied as technical information only and is not an authorization for repair. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Daytime Running Lamp > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 14954 Daytime Running Lamp: Description and Operation Vehicles manufactured for sale in Canada illuminate the high beam filament of both headlamp bulbs at a reduced intensity when the engine is running, the parking brakes are released and the exterior lamps are turned off. The TIPM must be programmed with the appropriately for this feature to be enabled. Once enabled, anytime the TIPM receives electronic messages over the CAN data bus from the PCM indicating the engine is running and from the EMIC indicating the status of the headlamp switch exterior lighting input is Off, the TIPM See: Maintenance/Fuses and Circuit Breakers/Fuse/Locationsprovides a pulse width modulated voltage output to the proper headlamp bulb filaments through the right and left high beam feed circuits to produce illumination at a reduced intensity. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Dome Lamp > Dome Lamp Bulb > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Dome Lamp Bulb: Service and Repair Removal Dual Lamp - Bulb DUAL LAMP - BULB 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. 2. Remove the dome lamp (2) from the headliner. See: Service and Repair/Dome Lamp - Removal . 3. With the lamp lens (1) in the open position, carefully unsnap the bulb (3) from the two bulb holders within the dome lamp housing. Single Lamp - Bulb SINGLE LAMP - BULB NOTE: There are two types of single lamp dome lamps available in this vehicle: one with a switch that is activated by depressing the lamp lens, and one without a switch. The bulb types and service procedures are identical for both of these lamps. 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. 2. Insert the tip of a small flat-bladed screwdriver into the notch on one side of the dome lamp between the lens (4) and the lamp housing (1). 3. Gently pry the notched edge of the lens downward until it unsnaps from the housing. 4. Swing the notched end of the lens downward far enough to access the bulb (3). 5. Carefully unsnap the bulb from the two bulb holders within the dome lamp housing. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Dome Lamp > Dome Lamp Bulb > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 14960 Dome Lamp Bulb: Service and Repair Installation Dual Lamp - Bulb DUAL LAMP - BULB CAUTION: Always use the correct bulb size and type for replacement. An incorrect bulb size or type may overheat and cause damage to the lamp, the socket or the lamp wiring. 1. With the dome lamp lens (1) in the open position, align the ends of the bulb (3) with the two bulb holders within the dome lamp housing (2). 2. Carefully press the bulb firmly and evenly into the bulb holders until it snaps into place. 3. Reinstall the lamp into the headliner. See: Service and Repair/Dome Lamp - Installation . 4. Reconnect the battery negative cable. Single Lamp - Bulb SINGLE LAMP - BULB CAUTION: Always use the correct bulb size and type for replacement. An incorrect bulb size or type may overheat and cause damage to the lamp, the socket or the lamp wiring. NOTE: There are two types of single lamp dome lamps available in this vehicle: one with a switch that is activated by depressing the lamp lens, and one without a switch. The bulb types and service procedures are identical for both of these lamps. 1. Align the ends of the bulb (3) with the two bulb holders within the dome lamp housing (1). 2. Carefully press the bulb firmly and evenly into the bulb holders until it snaps into place. 3. Swing the notched end of the lens (4) up into position against the housing, then press upward on the lens firmly and evenly until it snaps into the housing. 4. Reconnect the battery negative cable. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Door Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Door Switch: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION This vehicle has up to four door ajar switches, one for each door. Each switch is concealed within and integral to its respective door latch unit. The switches are momentary leaf contact-type units that are actuated by the mechanisms internal to the door latch. A short pigtail wire and connector on each door latch connects the door ajar switch to the vehicle electrical system through its respective door wire harness. The door ajar switches cannot be adjusted or repaired and, if ineffective or damaged, the door latch unit must be replaced. See: Body and Frame/Doors, Hood and Trunk/Doors/Front Door/Front Door Latch/Service and Repair/Front Door Latch - Removal or See: Body and Frame/Doors, Hood and Trunk/Doors/Rear Door/Rear Door Latch/Service and Repair/Rear Door Latch - Removal . Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Door Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 14965 Door Switch: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The door ajar switches are actuated by the mechanisms internal to the door latch. When a door is closed and properly latched, its door ajar switch is an open circuit. When a door is open or only partially latched, the door ajar switch is a closed circuit. The door ajar switches are hard wired in series between a body ground and the ElectroMechanical Instrument Cluster (EMIC) (also known as the Cab Compartment Node/CCN). The EMIC reads the hard wired door ajar switch inputs through internal pull-ups, then uses these inputs to control many electronic functions and features of the vehicle. The EMIC also sends the proper electronic door ajar switch status messages to other electronic modules in the vehicle over the Controller Area Network (CAN) data bus. The door ajar switches as well as the hard wired inputs and outputs of the switches may be diagnosed using conventional diagnostic tools and procedures. Refer to the appropriate wiring information. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Fog/Driving Lamp > Fog/Driving Lamp Bulb > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Fog/Driving Lamp Bulb: Service and Repair Removal BULB CAUTION: Do not contaminate the bulb glass by touching it with your fingers or by allowing it to contact other oily surfaces. Shortened bulb life will result. 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. 2. Reach under and behind the front fascia to access the front fog lamp housing (1) on the back of the front bumper (4). 3. Disconnect the wire harness connector (3) from the fog lamp bulb (2). 4. Firmly grasp the bulb on the back of the housing and rotate it counterclockwise about 30 degrees to unlock it. 5. Pull the bulb straight out from the keyed opening in the housing. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Fog/Driving Lamp > Fog/Driving Lamp Bulb > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 14971 Fog/Driving Lamp Bulb: Service and Repair Installation BULB CAUTION: Always use the correct bulb size and type for replacement. An incorrect bulb size or type may overheat and cause damage to the lamp, the socket or the lamp wiring. CAUTION: Do not contaminate the bulb glass by touching it with your fingers or by allowing it to contact other oily surfaces. Shortened bulb life will result. 1. Align the fog lamp bulb (2) with the keyed opening on the back of the front fog lamp housing (1). 2. Insert the bulb into the housing until it is firmly seated. 3. Rotate the bulb clockwise about 30 degrees to lock it into place. The bulb connector receptacle should be pointed straight downward. 4. Reconnect the wire harness connector (3) to the bulb. 5. Reconnect the battery negative cable. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Fog/Driving Lamp > Fog/Driving Lamp Indicator > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Fog/Driving Lamp Indicator: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION A fog lamp indicator is standard equipment on all instrument clusters. However, on vehicles not equipped with optional fog lamps, this indicator is electronically disabled. This indicator is located within the odometer/trip odometer Vacuum Fluorescent Display (VFD) unit. The fog lamp indicator consists of the International Control and Display Symbol icon for Front Fog Light in the lower left corner of the VFD unit. The VFD unit is soldered onto the instrument cluster electronic circuit board, and is visible through a window with a smoked clear lens located on the lower edge of the speedometer gauge dial face of the cluster overlay. The dark lens over the VFD prevents the icon from being clearly visible when it is not illuminated. The fog lamp indicator icon appears in a blue-green color and at the same lighting level as the odometer information when it is illuminated by the instrument cluster electronic circuit board. During daylight hours (exterior lamps are OFF) the VFD unit is illuminated at full brightness for clear visibility. At night (exterior lamps are ON), the VFD unit lighting level is adjusted with the other cluster illumination lamps using the panel lamps dimmer function of the interior lighting thumbwheel on the headlamp switch. However, a PARADE mode position of the thumbwheel allows the VFD unit to be illuminated at full brightness if the exterior lamps are turned ON during daylight hours. The fog lamp indicator is serviced as a unit with the VFD unit in the instrument cluster. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Fog/Driving Lamp > Fog/Driving Lamp Indicator > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 14976 Fog/Driving Lamp Indicator: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The fog lamp indicator gives an indication to the vehicle operator whenever the optional fog lamps are illuminated. This indicator is controlled by the instrument cluster circuit board based upon cluster programming and electronic messages received by the cluster from the Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) over the Controller Area Network (CAN) data bus. The fog lamp indicator is completely controlled by the instrument cluster logic circuit, and that logic will only allow this indicator to operate when the instrument cluster receives a battery current input on the fused ignition switch output (run-start) circuit. Therefore, the indicator will always be OFF when the ignition switch is in any position except ON or START. The indicator only illuminates when it is energized by the instrument cluster logic circuit. The instrument cluster will turn ON the fog lamp indicator for the following reasons: - Fog Indicator Lamp-On Message - Each time the cluster receives an electronic fog indicator lamp-ON message from the TIPM indicating the fog lamp circuit is energized, the fog lamp indicator will be illuminated. The indicator remains illuminated until the cluster receives a lamp-OFF message from the TIPM, until the ignition switch is turned to the OFF position or until the exterior lamp load shedding (battery saver) timed interval expires, whichever occurs first. - Actuator Test - Each time the cluster is put through the actuator test, the fog lamp indicator will be turned ON, then OFF again during the VFD portion of the test to confirm the functionality of the VFD and the cluster control circuitry. The TIPM continually monitors electronic exterior lighting switch status messages from the ElectroMechanical Instrument Cluster (EMIC) (also known as the Cab Compartment Node/CCN) to determine the appropriate outputs to the fog lamps. The TIPM activates or deactivates the fog lamp circuit then sends the proper lamp-ON or lamp-OFF message back to the EMIC. For further diagnosis of the fog lamp indicator or the instrument cluster circuitry that controls the indicator, Refer to appropriate testing. For proper diagnosis of the fog lamp system, the TIPM, the EMIC, the CAN data bus or the electronic communication related to fog lamp indicator operation a diagnostic scan tool is required. Refer to the appropriate diagnostic information. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Hazard Warning Lamps > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Lighting - Information On Exterior Lamp Lens Fogging Hazard Warning Lamps: Technical Service Bulletins Lighting - Information On Exterior Lamp Lens Fogging NUMBER: 23-035-07 GROUP: Body DATE: August 08, 2007 THIS BULLETIN SUPERSEDES TECHNICAL SERVICE BULLETIN 23-041-06, DATED SEPTEMBER 27, 2006, WHICH SHOULD BE REMOVED FROM YOUR FILES. THIS IS A COMPLETE REVISION AND NO ASTERISKS HAVE BEEN USED TO HIGHLIGHT REVISIONS. SUBJECT: Exterior Lamp - Lens Fogging MODELS: 2006 - 2008 (CS) Pacifica 2006 - 2008 (DC/DM) Ram Truck - Cab & Chassis (3500/4500/5500) 2006 - 2008 (DR/DH/D1) Ram Truck - Pick-up (1500/2500/3500) 2006 - 2008 (HB/HG) Durango/Aspen 2007 - 2008 (JK) Wrangler 2006 (JR) Stratus/Sebring 2006 - 2007 (JR27) Sebring Convertible 2007 - 2008 (JS) Sebring/Avenger 2008 (JS27) Sebring Convertible 2007 - 2008 (KA) Nitro 2006 - 2007 (KJ) Liberty/Cherokee 2008 (KK) Liberty/Cherokee 2006 - 2008 (LX/LE) 300/Magnum/Charger 2007 - 2008 (MK49) Compass 2007 - 2008 (MK74) Patriot 2006 - 2008 (ND) Dakota 2007 - 2008 (PM) Caliber 2006 - 2008 (PT) PT Cruiser 2006 - 2007 (RS/RG) Town & Country/Caravan/Voyager 2008 (RT) Town & Country/Caravan/Voyager 2006-2008 (WK/WH) Grand Cherokee 2006 - 2008 (XK/XH) Commander DISCUSSION: Some customers may report that on occasion, vehicle exterior lamp assemblies are fogged with a light layer of condensation on the inside of the lenses. This may be reported after the lamps have been turned on and brought up to operating temperature, turned off, and then rapidly cooled by cold water (such as rain, or the water from a car wash). Lens fogging can also occur under certain atmospheric conditions after a vehicle has been parked outside overnight (i.e., a warm humid day followed by clear cool night). This will usually clear as atmospheric conditions change to allow the condensation to change back into a vapor. Turning the lamps on will usually accelerate this process. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Hazard Warning Lamps > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Lighting - Information On Exterior Lamp Lens Fogging > Page 14981 A lamp that has large amounts of water droplets visible on most internal surfaces indicates a problem with the lamp sealing that has allowed water to enter the lamp. In this instance, the customer is likely to report that moisture in the lamp is always present and never disappears. A lamp that exhibits internal moisture permanently should be replaced. POLICY: Information Only Disclaimer: This bulletin is supplied as technical information only and is not an authorization for repair. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Hazard Warning Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Hazard Warning Lamps: Diagram Information and Instructions Warnings WARNINGS - GENERAL WARNINGS provide information to prevent personal injury and vehicle damage. Below is a list of general warnings that should be followed any time a vehicle is being serviced. WARNING: Always wear safety glasses for eye protection. WARNING: Use safety stands anytime a procedure requires being under a vehicle. WARNING: Be sure that the ignition switch always is in the off position, unless the procedure requires it to be on. WARNING: Set the parking brake when working on any vehicle. An automatic transmission should be in park. A manual transmission should be in neutral. WARNING: Operate the engine only in a well-ventilated area. WARNING: Keep away from moving parts when the engine is running, especially the fan and belts. WARNING: To prevent serious burns, avoid contact with hot parts such as the radiator, exhaust manifold(s), tail pipe, catalytic converter and muffler. WARNING: Do not allow flame or sparks near the battery. Gases are always present in and around the battery. WARNING: Always remove rings, watches, loose hanging jewelry and avoid loose clothing. How to Use Wiring Diagrams DESCRIPTION - HOW TO USE WIRING DIAGRAMS DaimlerChrysler Corporation wiring diagrams are designed to provide information regarding the vehicles wiring content. In order to effectively use the wiring diagrams to diagnose and repair DaimlerChrysler Corporation vehicles, it is important to understand all of their features and characteristics. Diagrams are arranged such that the power (B+) side of the circuit is placed near the top of the page, and the ground (B-) side of the circuit is placed near the bottom of the page. All switches, components, and modules are shown in the at rest position with the doors closed and the key removed from the ignition. Components are shown two ways. A solid line around a component indicates that the component is complete. A dashed line around the component indicates that the component is being shown is not complete. Incomplete components have a reference number to indicate the page where the component is shown complete. It is important to realize that no attempt is made on the diagrams to represent components and wiring as they appear on the vehicle. For example, a short piece of wire is treated the same as a long one. In addition, switches and other components are shown as simply as possible, with regard to function only. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Hazard Warning Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14984 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Hazard Warning Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14985 SYMBOLS International symbols are used throughout the wiring diagrams. These symbols are consistent with those being used around the world. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Hazard Warning Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14986 TERMINOLOGY This is a list of terms and definitions used in the wiring diagrams. LHD - Left Hand Drive Vehicles RHD - Right Hand Drive Vehicles ATX - Automatic Transmissions-Front Wheel Drive MTX Manual Transmissions-Front Wheel Drive Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Hazard Warning Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14987 AT - Automatic Transmissions-Rear Wheel Drive MT - Manual Transmissions-Rear Wheel Drive SOHC - Single Over Head Cam Engine DOHC - Double Over Head Cam Engine Export - Vehicles Built For Sale In Markets Other Than North America Except Export - Vehicles Built For Sale In North America Circuit Functions DESCRIPTION - CIRCUIT FUNCTIONS All circuits in the diagrams use an alpha/numeric code to identify the wire and it's function. To identify which circuit code applies to a system, refer to the Circuit Identification Code Chart. This chart shows the main circuits only and does not show the secondary codes that may apply to some models. Circuit Information DESCRIPTION - CIRCUIT INFORMATION Each wire shown in the diagrams contains a code which identifies the main circuit, a specific part of the main circuit, gage of wire, and color. An example would be A 2 18 LB/YL. This is a Battery Feed circuit, level two, eighteen gauge, light blue with a yellow tracer. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Hazard Warning Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14988 Connector, Ground and Splice Information DESCRIPTION - CONNECTOR, GROUND AND SPLICE INFORMATION CAUTION: Not all connectors are serviced. Some connectors are serviced only with a harness. A typical example might be the Supplemental Restraint System connectors. Always check parts availability before attempting a repair. IDENTIFICATION In-line connectors are identified by a number, as follows: - In-line connectors located in the engine compartment are C100 series numbers. - In-line connectors located in the instrument panel area are C200 series numbers. - In-line connectors located in the body are C300 series numbers. - Jumper harness connectors are C400 series numbers. - Grounds and ground connectors are identified with a "G" and follow the same series numbering as the in-line connectors. - Splices are identified with an "S" and follow the same series numbering as the in-line connectors. In addition, S001-S099 numbers are located in the engine compartment. - Component connectors are identified by the component name instead of a number. Multiple connectors on a component use a C1, C2, etc. identifier. LOCATIONS Vehicle/Locations contains the master connector/ground/splice location index charts with hyperlinks to the applicable location illustrations. The illustrations contain the connector name (or number)/ground number/splice number and component identification. The abbreviation T/O is used in the component location section to indicate a point in which the wiring harness branches out to a component. The abbreviation N/S means Not Shown in the illustrations Section Identification and Information DESCRIPTION - SECTION IDENTIFICATION AND INFORMATION The wiring diagrams are grouped into individual sections. If a component is most likely found in a particular group, it will be shown complete (all wires, Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Hazard Warning Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14989 connectors, and pins) within that group. For example, the Auto Shutdown Relay is most likely to be found in Powertrain Management, so it is shown there complete. It can, however, be shown partially in another group if it contains some associated wiring. Splice diagrams show the entire splice and provide references to other sections the splices serves. Splice Information only contains splice diagrams that are not shown in their entirety somewhere else in the wiring diagrams. Connector Pin-Outs shows each connector and the circuits involved with that connector. The connectors are identified using the name/number on the diagram pages. Removal REMOVAL 1. Disconnect battery. 2. Release Connector Lock (2). 3. Disconnect the connector (3) being repaired from its mating half/component. 4. Remove the dress cover (if applicable) (1). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Hazard Warning Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14990 5. Release the Secondary Terminal Lock, if required (1). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Hazard Warning Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14991 6. Position the connector locking finger away from the terminal using the proper special tool. Pull on the wire to remove the terminal from the connector. Installation Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Hazard Warning Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14992 INSTALLATION 1. Insert the removed terminal in the same cavity on the repair connector. 2. Repeat steps for each terminal in the connector, being sure that all wires are inserted into the proper cavities. For additional connector pin-out identification, refer to the wiring diagrams. 3. When the connector is re-assembled, the secondary terminal lock must be placed in the locked position to prevent terminal push out. 4. Replace dress cover (if applicable). 5. Connect connector to its mating half/component. 6. Connect battery and test all affected systems. Removal REMOVAL 1. Disconnect the battery. 2. Locate the diode in the harness, and remove the protective covering. 3. Remove the diode from the harness, pay attention to the current flow direction (1) (2) (3). Installation INSTALLATION 1. Remove the insulation from the wires in the harness. Only remove enough insulation to solder in the new diode. 2. Install the new diode in the harness, making sure current flow is correct. If necessary, refer to the appropriate wiring diagram for current flow. 3. Solder the connection together using rosin core type solder only. Do not use acid core solder. 4. Tape the diode to the harness using electrical tape. Make sure the diode is completely sealed from the elements. 5. Re-connect the battery and test affected systems. Removal REMOVAL 1. Follow steps for removing terminals described in the connector removal section. 2. Cut the wire 6 inches from the back of the connector. Installation INSTALLATION 1. Select a wire from the terminal repair kit that best matches the color and gage of the wire being repaired. 2. Cut the repair wire to the proper length and remove one-half (1/2) inch of insulation. 3. Splice the repair wire to the wire harness (see wire splicing procedure). See: Service Procedures/Wire Splicing 4. Insert the repaired wire into the connector. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Hazard Warning Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14993 5. Install the connector locking wedge, if required, and reconnect the connector to its mating half/component. 6. Re-tape the wire harness starting at 1-1/2 inches behind the connector and 2 inches past the repair. 7. Connect battery and test all affected systems. Wire Splicing STANDARD PROCEDURE - WIRE SPLICING When splicing a wire, it is important that the correct gage be used as shown in the wiring diagrams. 1. Remove one-half (1/2) inch of insulation from each wire that needs to be spliced. 2. Place a piece of adhesive lined heat shrink tubing on one side of the wire. Make sure the tubing will be long enough to cover and seal the entire repair area. 3. Place the strands of wire overlapping each other inside of the splice clip (1). 4. Using crimping tool (1), Mopar p/n 05019912AA, crimp the splice clip and wires together. 5. Solder (3) the connection (2) together using rosin core type solder (1) only. CAUTION: DO NOT USE ACID CORE SOLDER. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Hazard Warning Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14994 6. Center the heat shrink tubing (2) over the joint and heat using a heat gun. Heat the joint until the tubing is tightly sealed and sealant (1) comes out of both ends of the tubing. Special Tools WIRING/TERMINAL PROBING TOOL PACKAGE 6807 TERMINAL PICK TOOL SET 6680 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Hazard Warning Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14995 TERMINAL REMOVING TOOLS 6932 AND 8638 TERMINAL REMOVING TOOL 6934 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Hazard Warning Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14996 Hazard Warning Lamps: Diagnostic Aids Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) Sensitive Devices STANDARD PROCEDURE - ELECTROSTATIC DISCHARGE (ESD) SENSITIVE DEVICES All ESD sensitive components are solid state and a symbol is used to indicate this. When handling any component with this symbol, comply with the following procedures to reduce the possibility of electrostatic charge build up on the body and inadvertent discharge into the component. If it is not known whether the part is ESD sensitive, assume that it is. 1. Always touch a known good ground before handling the part. This should be repeated while handling the part and more frequently after sliding across a seat, sitting down from a standing position, or walking a distance. 2. Avoid touching electrical terminals of the part, unless instructed to do so by a written procedure. 3. When using a voltmeter, be sure to connect the ground lead first. 4. Do not remove the part from it's protective packing until it is time to install the part. 5. Before removing the part from it's package, ground the package to a known good ground on the vehicle. Testing Of Voltage Potential STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING OF VOLTAGE POTENTIAL 1. Connect the ground lead of a voltmeter to a known good ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the voltmeter to the selected test point. The vehicle ignition may need to be turned ON to check voltage. Refer to the appropriate test procedure. Testing For Continuity Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Hazard Warning Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14997 STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING FOR CONTINUITY 1. Remove the fuse (1) for the circuit being checked or, disconnect the battery. 2. Connect one lead of the ohmmeter to one side of the circuit being tested 3. Connect the other lead to the other end of the circuit being tested. Low or no resistance means good continuity. Testing For A Short To Ground STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING FOR A SHORT TO GROUND 1. Remove the fuse and disconnect all items involved with the fuse. 2. Connect a test light or a voltmeter across the terminals of the fuse. 3. Starting at the fuse block, wiggle the wiring harness about six to eight inches apart and watch the voltmeter/test lamp. 4. If the voltmeter registers voltage or the test lamp glows, there is a short to ground in that general area of the wiring harness. Testing For A Short To Ground On Fuses Powering Several Loads STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING FOR A SHORT TO GROUND ON FUSES POWERING SEVERAL LOADS 1. Refer to the wiring diagrams and disconnect or isolate all items on the suspected fused circuits. 2. Replace the blown fuse. 3. Supply power to the fuse by turning ON the ignition switch or re-connecting the battery. 4. Start connecting or energizing the items in the fuse circuit one at a time. When the fuse blows the circuit with the short to ground has been isolated. Testing For A Voltage Drop STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING FOR A VOLTAGE DROP Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Hazard Warning Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14998 1. Connect the positive lead of the voltmeter to the side of the circuit closest to the battery. 2. Connect the other lead of the voltmeter to the other side of the switch, component or circuit. 3. Operate the item. 4. The voltmeter will show the difference in voltage between the two points. Troubleshooting Wiring Problems DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING - WIRING HARNESS TROUBLESHOOTING TOOLS When diagnosing a problem in an electrical circuit there are several common tools necessary. These tools are listed and explained below. - Jumper Wire - This is a test wire used to connect two points of a circuit. It can be used to bypass an open in a circuit. WARNING: Never use a jumper wire across a load, such as a motor, connected between a battery feed and ground. - Voltmeter - Used to check for voltage on a circuit. Always connect the black lead to a known good ground and the red lead to the positive side of the circuit. CAUTION: Most of the electrical components used in today's vehicles are Solid State. When checking voltages in these circuits, use a meter with a 10 - megohm or greater impedance rating. - Ohmmeter - Used to check the resistance between two points of a circuit. Low or no resistance in a circuit means good continuity. CAUTION: Most of the electrical components used in today's vehicles are Solid State. When checking resistance in these circuits use a meter with a 10 - megohm or greater impedance rating. In addition, make sure the power is disconnected from the circuit. Circuits that are powered up by the vehicle's electrical system can cause damage to the equipment and provide false readings. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Hazard Warning Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 14999 - Probing Tools - These tools are used for probing terminals in connectors. Select the proper size tool from Special Tool Package 6807, and insert the probing end (2) into the terminal being tested. Use the other end of the tool (1) to insert the meter probe. INTERMITTENT AND POOR CONNECTIONS Most intermittent electrical problems are caused by faulty electrical connections or wiring. It is also possible for a sticking component or relay to cause a problem. Before condemning a component or wiring assembly, check the following items. - Connectors are fully seated - Spread terminals, or terminal push out - Terminals in the wiring assembly are fully seated into the connector/component and locked into position - Dirt or corrosion on the terminals. Any amount of corrosion or dirt could cause an intermittent problem - Damaged connector/component casing exposing the item to dirt or moisture - Wire insulation that has rubbed through causing a short to ground - Some or all of the wiring strands broken inside of the insulation - Wiring broken inside of the insulation TROUBLESHOOTING WIRING PROBLEMS When troubleshooting wiring problems there are six steps which can aid in the procedure. The steps are listed and explained below. Always check for non-factory items added to the vehicle before doing any diagnosis. If the vehicle is equipped with these items, disconnect them to verify these add-on items are not the cause of the problem. 1. Verify the problem. 2. Verify any related symptoms. Do this by performing operational checks on components that are in the same circuit. Refer to the wiring diagrams. 3. Analyze the symptoms. Use the wiring diagrams to determine what the circuit is doing, where the problem most likely is occurring and where the diagnosis will continue. 4. Isolate the problem area. 5. Repair the problem area. 6. Verify the proper operation. For this step, check for proper operation of all items on the repaired circuit. Refer to the wiring diagrams. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Headlamp > Headlamp Bulb > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Headlamp Bulb: Service and Repair Removal BULB - HEADLAMP CAUTION: Do not contaminate the bulb glass by touching it with your fingers or by allowing it to contact other oily surfaces. Shortened bulb life will result. 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. 2. Remove the front lamp unit (1) from the front fender. See: Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Front Lamp Unit - Removal . 3. Firmly grasp the headlamp bulb (2) on the back of the front lamp unit housing and rotate it counterclockwise about 30 degrees to unlock it. 4. Pull the bulb straight out from the keyed opening in the housing. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Headlamp > Headlamp Bulb > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 15005 Headlamp Bulb: Service and Repair Installation BULB - HEADLAMP CAUTION: Always use the correct bulb size and type for replacement. An incorrect bulb size or type may overheat and cause damage to the lamp, the socket or the lamp wiring. CAUTION: Do not contaminate the bulb glass by touching it with your fingers or by allowing it to contact other oily surfaces. Shortened bulb life will result. 1. Align the headlamp bulb (2) with the keyed opening on the back of the front lamp unit housing (1). 2. Insert the bulb into the housing until it is firmly seated. 3. Rotate the bulb clockwise about 30 degrees to lock it into place. 4. Reinstall the front lamp unit onto the front fender. See: Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Front Lamp Unit - Installation . 5. Reconnect the battery negative cable. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Headlamp > Headlamp Switch > Component Information > Locations Headlamp Switch: Locations Component ID: 489 Component : SWITCH-HEADLAMP Connector: Name : SWITCH-HEADLAMP Color : BLACK # of pins : 10 Pin Circuit Description 1 L116 20WT/LG HEADLAMP/FOG LAMP SWITCH SIGNAL 2 E2 20OR/BR PANEL LAMPS DIMMER SIGNAL 3 L115 20WT/YL HEADLAMP SWITCH RETURN 4 E19 20OR/BR HEADLAMP SWITCH DIMMER SIGNAL 5 Z407 20BK/OR GROUND 6 L914 20WT/LG CARGO LAMP SWITCH SIGNAL 7-- 8-9-10 - Component Location - 44 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Headlamp > Headlamp Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 15009 Component Location - 50 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Headlamp > Headlamp Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 15010 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Headlamp > Headlamp Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 15011 Headlamp Switch: Diagrams Component ID: 489 Component : SWITCH-HEADLAMP Connector: Name : SWITCH-HEADLAMP Color : BLACK # of pins : 10 Pin Circuit Description 1 L116 20WT/LG HEADLAMP/FOG LAMP SWITCH SIGNAL 2 E2 20OR/BR PANEL LAMPS DIMMER SIGNAL 3 L115 20WT/YL HEADLAMP SWITCH RETURN 4 E19 20OR/BR HEADLAMP SWITCH DIMMER SIGNAL 5 Z407 20BK/OR GROUND 6 L914 20WT/LG CARGO LAMP SWITCH SIGNAL 7-- 8-9-10 - Component Location - 44 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Headlamp > Headlamp Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 15012 Component Location - 50 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Headlamp > Headlamp Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 15013 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Headlamp > Headlamp Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Headlamp Switch: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The headlamp switch (1) is located on the instrument panel, to the left of the steering column. Two different switches are used. The standard switch features a three-position rotary knob (4) for exterior lighting control, a thumbwheel (2) for panel lamps dimming and interior lighting control, and a momentary push button (3) for cargo lamp control. An optional switch has a momentary PUSH function added to the rotary knob for front fog lamp control. Each of these switches is constructed of molded plastic. The rotary knob is molded plastic and knurled around its circumference to ease operator control. The thumbwheel is also plastic and knurled. On vehicles with optional fog lamps the rotary knob also has the text PUSH and an International Control and Display Symbol icon for Front Fog Light applied to it. The cargo lamp push button is plastic with a smooth finish and the text CARGO applied to it. The switch face plate is also labeled with graphics and icons to clearly identify the many functions of the rotary knob and thumbwheel. Three screws secure the switch to the back of the cluster bezel through integral mounting flanges that are molded to each side of the switch housing. The back of the switch housing has an integral connector receptacle containing terminal pins that connect the switch to the vehicle electrical system through a dedicated take out and connector of the instrument panel wire harness. A panel dimmer controlled incandescent bulb soldered to the circuit board within the switch provides back lighting for visibility at night, but is not serviceable. The headlamp switch cannot be repaired and, if ineffective or damaged, it must be replaced. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Headlamp > Headlamp Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 15016 Headlamp Switch: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The headlamp switch uses two resistor multiplexed outputs and one conventional output to control the many functions and features it provides. The switch receives a clean ground from the ElectroMechanical Instrument Cluster (EMIC) (also known as the Cab Compartment Node/CCN) on a headlamp switch return circuit. It then provides outputs to the EMIC on a headlamp switch signal circuit to control exterior lighting functions, on a panel lamps dimmer signal circuit to control panel dimmer and interior lighting functions, and on a cargo lamp return circuit to control the cargo lamps. The switch illumination circuit receives a path to ground at all times through the left instrument panel ground circuit. The illumination level is controlled by a Pulse-Width Modulated (PWM) output received from the EMIC on a headlamp switch illumination control circuit. The EMIC controls this output based upon the dimmer signal select mux input from the headlamp switch. The headlamp switch operates as follows: - Cargo Lamps Control - The cargo lamp push button on the headlamp switch is depressed to activate or deactivate the cargo lamps. The headlamp switch provides an output to the EMIC, and the EMIC responds by providing the appropriate cargo lighting control outputs through its internal cargo lamp driver circuit. Front Fog Lamps Control - For vehicles so equipped, the rotary knob on the headlamp switch is depressed to activate or deactivate the optional front fog lamps. The headlamp switch provides an output to the EMIC, and the EMIC responds by sending electronic fog lamp switch status messages to the Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) over the Controller Area Network (CAN) data bus. The TIPM responds by energizing or de-energizing the front fog lamps and by sending an electronic message back to the EMIC to control the front fog lamp indicator. - Exterior Lighting Control - The rotary knob on the headlamp switch is rotated to a detent position to activate or deactivate the exterior lighting. The headlamp switch provides an output to the EMIC, and the EMIC responds by sending electronic exterior lighting switch status messages to the TIPM over the CAN data bus. The TIPM responds by energizing or de-energizing the park lamp and the high or low beam headlamp circuits, and by sending an electronic message back to the EMIC to control the high beam indicator. The TIPM also remembers which headlamp beams were last selected with the multi-function switch, and energizes those beams by default the next time the headlamps are turned ON. - Interior Lighting Control - The thumbwheel on the headlamp switch is rotated to the dome DEFEAT, dome ON, PARADE mode, or one of the six panel dimmer detent positions to control the interior courtesy/dome and panel lamps. The headlamp switch provides an output to the EMIC, and the EMIC responds by providing the appropriate interior lighting control outputs through its internal courtesy lamp driver circuits, electronic dimming level messages to other modules over the CAN data bus, and the proper PWM outputs to control dimming levels through several panel dimmer illumination control driver circuits. The headlamp switch as well as the hard wired inputs and outputs of the switch may be diagnosed using conventional diagnostic tools and procedures. Refer to the appropriate wiring information. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Headlamp > Headlamp Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 15017 Headlamp Switch: Testing and Inspection HEADLAMP SWITCH WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury on vehicles equipped with airbags, disable the Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, airbag, seat belt tensioner, impact sensor, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the SRS. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment. 1. Remove the cluster bezel from the instrument panel See: Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators/Instrument Cluster / Carrier/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Instrument Panel Cluster Bezel - Removal . 2. Disconnect the wire harness connector from the back of the headlamp switch. 3. Using an ohmmeter, test the resistance or continuity between the terminals of the switch as shown in the Headlamp Switch Tests table. 4. If the switch fails any of the tests, replace the ineffective headlamp switch as required. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Headlamp > Headlamp Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Headlamp Switch: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury on vehicles equipped with airbags, disable the Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, airbag, seat belt tensioner, impact sensor, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the SRS. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment. 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. 2. Remove the cluster bezel (1) from the instrument panel. See: Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators/Instrument Cluster / Carrier/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Instrument Panel Cluster Bezel - Removal . 3. Disconnect the wire harness connector (3) from the back of the headlamp switch (4). 4. Place the cluster bezel face down on a suitable work surface. Be certain to take the proper precautions to protect the face of the bezel from cosmetic damage. 5. Remove the three screws (2) that secure the headlamp switch to the back of the cluster bezel. 6. Remove the headlamp switch from the cluster bezel. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Headlamp > Headlamp Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 15020 Headlamp Switch: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury on vehicles equipped with airbags, disable the Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, airbag, seat belt tensioner, impact sensor, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the SRS. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment. 1. Position the headlamp switch (4) to the back of the cluster bezel (1). 2. Install and tighten the three screws (2) that secure the headlamp switch to the cluster bezel. Tighten the screws to 2 Nm (20 in. lbs.). 3. Position the cluster bezel close enough to the instrument panel to reconnect the wire harness connector (3) to the back of the headlamp switch. 4. Reinstall the cluster bezel onto the instrument panel. See: Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators/Instrument Cluster / Carrier/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Instrument Panel Cluster Bezel - Installation . 5. Reconnect the battery negative cable. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Hi-Beam Indicator Lamp > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Hi-Beam Indicator Lamp: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION A high beam indicator is standard equipment on all instrument clusters. This indicator is located near the upper edge of the instrument cluster, between the tachometer and the speedometer. The high beam indicator consists of a stencil-like cutout of the International Control and Display Symbol icon for High Beam in the opaque layer of the instrument cluster overlay. The dark outer layer of the overlay prevents the indicator from being clearly visible when it is not illuminated. A blue Light Emitting Diode (LED) behind the cutout in the opaque layer of the overlay causes the indicator to appear in blue through the translucent outer layer of the overlay when it is illuminated from behind by the LED, which is soldered onto the instrument cluster electronic circuit board. The high beam indicator is serviced as a unit with the instrument cluster. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Hi-Beam Indicator Lamp > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 15025 Hi-Beam Indicator Lamp: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The high beam indicator gives an indication to the vehicle operator whenever the headlamp high beams are illuminated. This indicator is controlled by a transistor on the instrument cluster circuit board based upon cluster programming and a hard wired multiplex input received by the cluster from the headlamp beam select switch circuitry of the multi-function switch on the washer/beam select switch mux circuit. The high beam indicator Light Emitting Diode (LED) is completely controlled by the instrument cluster logic circuit, and that logic will allow this indicator to operate whenever the instrument cluster receives a battery current input on the fused B(+) circuit. Therefore, the LED can be illuminated regardless of the ignition switch position. The LED only illuminates when it is provided a path to ground by the instrument cluster transistor. The instrument cluster will turn ON the high beam indicator for the following reasons: - High Beam Headlamps-On Input - Each time the cluster detects a high beam headlamps-ON input from the headlamp beam select switch circuitry of the multi-function switch on the washer/beam select switch mux circuit, the headlamp high beams and the high beam indicator will be illuminated. The indicator remains illuminated until the cluster receives a high beam headlamps-OFF input from the multi-function switch, or until the exterior lamp load shedding (battery saver) timed interval expires, whichever occurs first. - Actuator Test - Each time the cluster is put through the actuator test, the high beam indicator will be turned ON, then OFF again during the bulb check portion of the test to confirm the functionality of the LED and the cluster control circuitry. The ElectroMechanical Instrument Cluster (EMIC) (also known as the Cab Compartment Node/CCN) continually monitors the headlamp switch and the multi-function switch to determine the proper headlamp low beam and high beam control. The EMIC then sends the proper electronic low beam and high beam lamp-ON and lamp-OFF messages to the Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) over the Controller Area Network (CAN) data bus and controls the high beam indicator operation accordingly. For further diagnosis of the high beam indicator or the instrument cluster circuitry that controls the indicator, Refer to appropriate testing. The hard wired headlamp switch and multi-function switch inputs and circuits related to high beam indicator operation may be diagnosed using conventional diagnostic tools and procedures. Refer to the appropriate wiring information. For proper diagnosis of the TIPM, the EMIC, the CAN data bus or the electronic communication related to high beam indicator operation a diagnostic scan tool is required. Refer to the appropriate diagnostic information. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Horn > Horn Relay > Component Information > Locations Horn Relay: Locations Dodge Ram Trucks from 2006 to 2009, do not use a horn relay. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Horn > Horn Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 15030 Horn Relay: Description and Operation Dodge Ram Trucks from 2006 to 2009, do not use a horn relay. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Horn > Horn Switch > Component Information > Diagrams Horn Switch: Diagrams Component ID: 493 Component : SWITCH-HORN Connector: Name : SWITCH-HORN Color : WHITE # of pins : 2 Pin Circuit Description 1 X3 20DG/VT HORN SWITCH SENSE 2-- Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > License Plate Lamp > License Plate Bulb > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal License Plate Bulb: Service and Repair Removal BULB NOTE: This procedure is for vehicles with a pick-up bed only. On cab and chassis vehicles the license plate lamp is integral to the left rear lamp unit. The park/brake/turn signal bulb within the left rear lamp unit provides illumination for the license plate lamp function on all cab and chassis vehicles. 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. 2. Reach under the rear bumper near the center to access the back of either of the two license plate lamp housings (3). 3. Firmly grasp the socket (2) on the back of the housing and rotate it counterclockwise about 30 degrees to unlock it. 4. Pull the socket and bulb (1) straight out from the keyed opening in the housing. 5. Pull the base of the bulb straight out of the socket. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > License Plate Lamp > License Plate Bulb > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 15039 License Plate Bulb: Service and Repair Installation BULB CAUTION: Always use the correct bulb size and type for replacement. An incorrect bulb size or type may overheat and cause damage to the lamp, the socket or the lamp wiring. NOTE: This procedure is for vehicles with a pick-up bed only. On cab and chassis vehicles the license plate lamp is integral to the left rear lamp unit. The park/brake/turn signal bulb within the left rear lamp unit provides illumination for the license plate lamp function on all cab and chassis vehicles. 1. Align the base of the bulb (1) with the license plate lamp socket (2). 2. Push the bulb straight into the socket until the base is firmly seated. 3. Align the socket and bulb with the keyed opening on the back of the license plate lamp housing (3). 4. Insert the socket and bulb into the housing until the socket is firmly seated. 5. Rotate the socket clockwise about 30 degrees to lock it into place. 6. Reconnect the battery negative cable. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Map Light > Map Light Bulb > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Map Light Bulb: Service and Repair Removal Bulb - With Sunroof BULB - WITH SUNROOF NOTE: On vehicles equipped with an optional overhead console the standard front dome lamp is replaced by two combination dome and reading lamps that are integral to the console housing. Each of these lamps is controlled by the door ajar switches on the courtesy lamp circuit, but also are independently controlled by a switch that is activated by depressing the lamp lens. The bulb types and service procedures are identical for both of these lamps. NOTE: The overhead console reading lamp switches and bulb holders are serviced as a unit with the overhead console wire harness. 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. 2. Remove the overhead console (3) from the headliner. See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Console/Service and Repair/Overhead Console/Removal . 3. Firmly grasp the back of the reading lamp bulb socket (1) and unsnap it from the overhead console lamp housing. 4. Pull the socket and bulb (2) straight out from the keyed opening in the lamp housing. 5. Pull the base of the bulb straight out of the socket. Bulb - Without Sunroof BULB - WITHOUT SUNROOF NOTE: On vehicles equipped with an optional overhead console the standard front dome lamp is replaced by two combination dome and reading lamps that are integral to the console housing. Each of these lamps is controlled by the door ajar switches on the courtesy lamp circuit, but also are independently controlled by a switch that is activated by depressing the lamp lens. The bulb types and service procedures are identical for both of these lamps. NOTE: The overhead console reading lamp switches and bulb holders are serviced as a unit with the overhead console wire harness. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Map Light > Map Light Bulb > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 15045 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. 2. Using a small thin-bladed screwdriver, gently pry between each side of the lamp lens and the overhead console housing (1) to unsnap the pivot tabs (3) on the lens from the pivots in the lamp housing. 3. With the lens disengaged from both pivots, pull the front of the lens forward far enough to disengage the tab (2) on the rear edge of the lens from the slot in the rear of the overhead console lamp housing. 4. Remove the lens from the housing. 5. Carefully unsnap the bulb (2) from the two bulb holders (1) within the overhead console lamp housing. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Map Light > Map Light Bulb > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 15046 Map Light Bulb: Service and Repair Installation Bulb - With Sunroof BULB - WITH SUNROOF CAUTION: Always use the correct bulb size and type for replacement. An incorrect bulb size or type may overheat and cause damage to the lamp, the socket or the lamp wiring. NOTE: On vehicles equipped with an optional overhead console the standard front dome lamp is replaced by two combination dome and reading lamps that are integral to the console housing. Each of these lamps is controlled by the door ajar switches on the courtesy lamp circuit, but also are independently controlled by a switch that is activated by depressing the lamp lens. The bulb types and service procedures are identical for both of these lamps. NOTE: The overhead console reading lamp switches and bulb holders are serviced as a unit with the overhead console wire harness. 1. Align the base of the overhead console reading lamp bulb (2) with the socket (1). 2. Push the bulb straight into the socket until the base is firmly seated. 3. Align the socket and bulb with the keyed opening on the back of lamp housing in the overhead console. 4. Insert the socket and bulb into the housing and press firmly on the back of the socket until it snaps into place and is firmly seated. 5. Reinstall the overhead console onto the headliner. See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Console/Service and Repair/Overhead Console/Installation . 6. Reconnect the battery negative cable. Bulb - Without Sunroof BULB - WITHOUT SUNROOF CAUTION: Always use the correct bulb size and type for replacement. An incorrect bulb size or type may overheat and cause damage to the lamp, the socket or the lamp wiring. NOTE: On vehicles equipped with an optional overhead console the standard front dome lamp is replaced by two combination dome and reading lamps that are integral to the console housing. Each of these lamps is controlled by the door ajar switches on the courtesy lamp circuit, but also are independently controlled by a switch that is activated by depressing the lamp lens. The bulb types and service procedures are identical for both of these lamps. NOTE: The overhead console reading lamp switches and bulb holders are serviced as a unit with the overhead console wire harness. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Map Light > Map Light Bulb > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 15047 1. Align the ends of the bulb (2) with the two bulb holders (1) within the overhead console lamp housing. 2. Carefully press the bulb firmly and evenly into the bulb holders until it snaps into place. 3. Position the lens tab (2) into the slot in the rear of the overhead console (1) lamp housing. 4. Align the pivot tabs (3) on each side of the lens with the pivots within the overhead console lamp housing. 5. Press firmly and evenly on the lens over both pivot locations until both pivot tabs snap back onto the pivots within the housing. 6. Reconnect the battery negative cable. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Marker Lamp > Marker Lamp Bulb > Component Information > Service and Repair > Marker Lamp Bulb Marker Lamp Bulb: Service and Repair Marker Lamp Bulb Rear Fender BULB - REAR FENDER NOTE: These lamps are used on vehicles with a pick-up bed and dual rear wheels only. A lamp with an amber lens is located on the rear fender ahead of each rear wheel opening, and a lamp with a red lens is located on the rear fender behind each rear wheel opening. The bulb types and service procedures are identical for all four of these lamps. 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. 2. Using hand pressure, press the rear edge of the rear fender marker lamp lens/housing (4) toward the front of the vehicle against the spring pressure of the retaining clip, then pull the rear edge of the lamp outward to disengage it from the mounting hole in the rear fender. 3. Pull the lamp out from the rear fender far enough to access the bulb socket (1) on the back of the lamp lens/housing. 4. Firmly grasp the bulb socket on the back of the lamp lens/housing and rotate it counterclockwise about 30 degrees to unlock it. 5. Pull the socket and bulb straight out from the keyed opening in the housing. 6. Pull the base of the bulb (3) straight out of the socket. Tailgate BULB - TAILGATE NOTE: This lamp is used on vehicles with a pick-up bed and dual rear wheels only. A lamp with a red lens and containing three bulbs is located on the rearward facing surface of the pick-up bed sill below the tailgate. The bulb types and service procedures are identical for all three of these bulbs. 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. 2. Remove the two screws that secure the outboard ends of the tailgate marker lamp lens/housing (1) to the rearward facing surface of the sill panel. 3. Pull the marker lamp out from the sill panel far enough to access the sockets (3) on the bottom of the lamp housing. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Marker Lamp > Marker Lamp Bulb > Component Information > Service and Repair > Marker Lamp Bulb > Page 15053 4. Firmly grasp the marker lamp socket on the bottom of the lamp housing and rotate it counterclockwise about 30 degrees to unlock it. 5. Pull the socket and bulb (2) straight out from the keyed opening in the housing. 6. Pull the base of the bulb straight out of the socket. Rear Fender BULB - REAR FENDER CAUTION: Always use the correct bulb size and type for replacement. An incorrect bulb size or type may overheat and cause damage to the lamp, the socket or the lamp wiring. NOTE: These lamps are used on vehicles with a pick-up bed and dual rear wheels only. A lamp with an amber lens is located on the rear fender ahead of each rear wheel opening, and a lamp with a red lens is located on the rear fender behind each rear wheel opening. The bulb types and service procedures are identical for all four of these lamps. 1. Align the base of the bulb (3) with the socket (1). 2. Push the bulb straight into the socket until the base is firmly seated. 3. Be certain that a rubber O-ring seal (2) is properly installed and in good condition around the base of the bulb socket. 4. Align the socket and bulb with the keyed opening on the back of the rear fender marker lamp lens/housing (4). 5. Insert the socket and bulb into the housing until the socket is firmly seated. 6. Rotate the socket clockwise about 30 degrees to lock it into place. 7. Engage the front edge of the marker lamp into the front edge of the mounting hole in the rear fender. 8. Using hand pressure, press the rear edge of the marker lamp lens/housing toward the front of the vehicle against the spring pressure of the retaining clip, then push the rear edge of the lamp into the rear of the mounting hole in the rear fender. 9. Reconnect the battery negative cable. Tailgate BULB - TAILGATE CAUTION: Always use the correct bulb size and type for replacement. An incorrect bulb size or type may overheat and cause damage to the lamp, the socket or the lamp wiring. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Marker Lamp > Marker Lamp Bulb > Component Information > Service and Repair > Marker Lamp Bulb > Page 15054 NOTE: This lamp is used on vehicles with a pick-up bed and dual rear wheels only. A lamp with a red lens and containing three bulbs is located on the rearward facing surface of the pick-up bed sill below the tailgate. The bulb types and service procedures are identical for all three of these bulbs. 1. Align the base of the bulb (2) with the socket (3). 2. Push the bulb straight into the socket until the base is firmly seated. 3. Align the socket and bulb with the keyed opening on the bottom of the tailgate marker lamp lens/housing (1). 4. Insert the socket and bulb into the housing until the socket is firmly seated. 5. Rotate the socket clockwise about 30 degrees to lock it into place. 6. Position the marker lamp to the outer surface of the sill panel. 7. Install and tighten the two screws that secure the marker lamp lens/housing to the tailgate panel. Tighten the screws to 2 Nm (20 in. lbs.). 8. Reconnect the battery negative cable. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Marker Lamp > Marker Lamp Bulb > Component Information > Service and Repair > Marker Lamp Bulb > Page 15055 Marker Lamp Bulb: Service and Repair Front Lamp Unit Removal BULB - FRONT SIDE MARKER 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. 2. Remove the front lamp unit (1) from the front fender. See: Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Front Lamp Unit - Removal . 3. Firmly grasp the front side marker bulb socket (5) on the back of the front lamp unit housing and rotate it counterclockwise about 30 degrees to unlock it. 4. Pull the socket and bulb straight out from the keyed opening in the housing. 5. Pull the base of the bulb straight out of the socket. Installation BULB - FRONT SIDE MARKER CAUTION: Always use the correct bulb size and type for replacement. An incorrect bulb size or type may overheat and cause damage to the lamp, the socket or the lamp wiring. 1. Align the base of the bulb with the front side marker bulb socket (5). 2. Push the bulb straight into the socket until the base is firmly seated. 3. Align the socket and bulb with the keyed opening on the back of the front lamp unit housing (1). 4. Insert the socket and bulb into the housing until the socket is firmly seated. 5. Rotate the socket clockwise about 30 degrees to lock it into place. 6. Reinstall the front lamp unit onto the front fender. See: Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Front Lamp Unit - Installation . 7. Reconnect the battery negative cable. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Parking Lamp > Parking Lamp Relay > Component Information > Locations Parking Lamp Relay: Locations Dodge Ram Trucks, 2006-2009 all, do not use a parking lamp relay. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Parking Lamp > Parking Lamp Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 15060 Parking Lamp Relay: Description and Operation Dodge Ram Trucks, 2006-2009 all, do not use a parking lamp relay. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Parking Lamp > Parking Light Bulb > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Parking Light Bulb: Service and Repair Removal BULB - PARK/TURN SIGNAL 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. 2. Remove the front lamp unit (1) from the front fender. See: Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Front Lamp Unit - Removal . 3. Firmly grasp the park/turn signal bulb socket (3) on the back of the front lamp unit housing and rotate it counterclockwise about 30 degrees to unlock it. 4. Pull the socket and bulb straight out from the keyed opening in the housing. 5. Pull the base of the bulb (2) straight out of the socket (1). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Parking Lamp > Parking Light Bulb > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 15065 Parking Light Bulb: Service and Repair Installation BULB - PARK/TURN SIGNAL CAUTION: Always use the correct bulb size and type for replacement. An incorrect bulb size or type may overheat and cause damage to the lamp, the socket or the lamp wiring. 1. Align the base of the bulb (2) with the park/turn signal bulb socket (1). 2. Push the bulb straight into the socket until the base is firmly seated. 3. Align the socket and bulb (3) with the keyed opening on the back of the front lamp unit housing (1). 4. Insert the socket and bulb into the housing until the socket is firmly seated. 5. Rotate the socket clockwise about 30 degrees to lock it into place. 6. Reinstall the front lamp unit onto the front fender. See: Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Front Lamp Unit - Installation . 7. Reconnect the battery negative cable. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Horn Relay > Component Information > Locations Horn Relay: Locations Dodge Ram Trucks from 2006 to 2009, do not use a horn relay. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Horn Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 15070 Horn Relay: Description and Operation Dodge Ram Trucks from 2006 to 2009, do not use a horn relay. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Parking Lamp Relay > Component Information > Locations Parking Lamp Relay: Locations Dodge Ram Trucks, 2006-2009 all, do not use a parking lamp relay. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Parking Lamp Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 15074 Parking Lamp Relay: Description and Operation Dodge Ram Trucks, 2006-2009 all, do not use a parking lamp relay. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lighting Relay > Component Information > Locations Trailer Lighting Relay: Locations Dodge Ram Trucks, 2006-2009 all,Trailer Tow lamp relay is not serviceable. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lighting Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 15078 Trailer Lighting Relay: Diagrams Dodge Ram Trucks, 2006-2009 all, do not use a trailer tow relay. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Backup Lamp Switch > Component Information > Locations Backup Lamp Switch: Locations Component ID: 481 Component : SWITCH-BACKUP LAMP Connector: Name : SWITCH-BACKUP LAMP Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (3.7L M/T/4.7L M/T) Pin Circuit Description 1 Z965 20BK GROUND 2 L10 20WT/GY FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN) Component Location - 22 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Backup Lamp Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 15083 Component Location - 24 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Backup Lamp Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 15084 Component Location - 25 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Backup Lamp Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 15085 Connector: Name : SWITCH-BACKUP LAMP Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (M/T 5.7L HD/DIESEL M/T) Pin Circuit Description 1 Z965 20BK GROUND 2 L10 20WT/GY FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN) Component Location - 22 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Backup Lamp Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 15086 Component Location - 24 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Backup Lamp Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 15087 Component Location - 25 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Backup Lamp Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 15088 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Backup Lamp Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 15089 Backup Lamp Switch: Diagrams Component ID: 481 Component : SWITCH-BACKUP LAMP Connector: Name : SWITCH-BACKUP LAMP Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (3.7L M/T/4.7L M/T) Pin Circuit Description 1 Z965 20BK GROUND 2 L10 20WT/GY FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN) Component Location - 22 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Backup Lamp Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 15090 Component Location - 24 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Backup Lamp Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 15091 Component Location - 25 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Backup Lamp Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 15092 Connector: Name : SWITCH-BACKUP LAMP Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (M/T 5.7L HD/DIESEL M/T) Pin Circuit Description 1 Z965 20BK GROUND 2 L10 20WT/GY FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN) Component Location - 22 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Backup Lamp Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 15093 Component Location - 24 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Backup Lamp Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 15094 Component Location - 25 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Backup Lamp Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 15095 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Backup Lamp Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Backup Lamp Switch: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION Vehicles equipped with a manual transmission have a normally open, spring-loaded plunger type backup lamp switch (2). Vehicles with an optional electronic automatic transmission have a Transmission Range Sensor (TRS) that is used to perform several functions, including that of the backup lamp switch. The TRS is described in further detail elsewhere in this service information. Refer to the service and diagnostic information for the automatic transmission type installed in the vehicle. The backup lamp switch is located in a threaded hole on the side of the manual transmission housing. The switch has a threaded body and a hex formation near the plunger end of the switch. An integral connector receptacle at the end of the switch opposite the plunger connects the switch to the vehicle electrical system through a take out and connector of the engine wire harness. When installed, only the switch connector and the hex formation are visible on the outside of the transmission housing. The backup lamp switch cannot be adjusted or repaired and, if ineffective or damaged, the entire switch unit must be replaced. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Backup Lamp Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 15098 Backup Lamp Switch: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The backup lamp switch controls the flow of battery voltage to the backup lamp bulbs through an output on the backup lamp feed circuit. The switch plunger is mechanically actuated by the gearshift mechanism within the transmission, which will depress the switch plunger and close the switch contacts whenever the REVERSE gear has been selected. The switch receives battery voltage through a fuse in the Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) on a fused ignition switch output (run) circuit whenever the ignition switch is in the ON position. The backup lamp switch as well as the hard wired inputs and outputs of the switch may be diagnosed using conventional diagnostic tools and procedures. Refer to the appropriate wiring information. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Backup Lamp Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 15099 Backup Lamp Switch: Testing and Inspection BACKUP LAMP SWITCH 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. 2. Raise and support the vehicle. 3. Locate and disconnect the engine wire harness connector for the backup lamp switch. 4. Check for continuity between the two terminal pins in the backup lamp switch connector receptacle. a. With the gear selector lever in the REVERSE position, there should be continuity. b. With the gear selector lever in any position other than REVERSE, there should be no continuity. 5. If the switch fails either of these two continuity tests, replace the ineffective backup lamp switch. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Brake Light Switch > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 478 Brake Light Switch: Locations Component ID 478 Component ID: 478 Component : SWITCH-STOPLAMP Connector: Name : SWITCH-STOPLAMP Color : BLACK # of pins : 6 Pin Circuit Description 1 A103 18GY/RD FUSED B(+) 2 L50 18WT/TN BRAKE LAMP SWITCH OUTPUT 3 V30 20VT/WT S/C BRAKE SWITCH OUTPUT 4 V32 20VT/YL BRAKE SWITCH NO. 2 SIGNAL 5 Z429 20BK/OR GROUND 6 B29 20DG/WT BRAKE SWITCH NO. 1 SIGNAL Component Location - 41 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Brake Light Switch > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 478 > Page 15104 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Brake Light Switch > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 478 > Page 15105 Brake Light Switch: Locations Component ID 511 Component ID: 511 Component : SWITCH-STOPLAMP Connector: Name : SWITCH-STOPLAMP Color : BLACK # of pins : 6 Pin Circuit Description 1 A103 18GY/RD FUSED B(+) 2 L50 18WT/TN BRAKE LAMP SWITCH OUTPUT 3 V30 20VT/WT S/C BRAKE SWITCH OUTPUT 4 V32 20VT/YL BRAKE SWITCH NO. 2 SIGNAL 5 Z429 20BK/OR GROUND 6 B29 20DG/WT BRAKE SWITCH NO. 1 SIGNAL Component Location - 41 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Brake Light Switch > Component Information > Locations > Component ID 478 > Page 15106 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Brake Light Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Component ID 478 Brake Light Switch: Diagrams Component ID 478 Component ID: 478 Component : SWITCH-STOPLAMP Connector: Name : SWITCH-STOPLAMP Color : BLACK # of pins : 6 Pin Circuit Description 1 A103 18GY/RD FUSED B(+) 2 L50 18WT/TN BRAKE LAMP SWITCH OUTPUT 3 V30 20VT/WT S/C BRAKE SWITCH OUTPUT 4 V32 20VT/YL BRAKE SWITCH NO. 2 SIGNAL 5 Z429 20BK/OR GROUND 6 B29 20DG/WT BRAKE SWITCH NO. 1 SIGNAL Component Location - 41 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Brake Light Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Component ID 478 > Page 15109 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Brake Light Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Component ID 478 > Page 15110 Brake Light Switch: Diagrams Component ID 511 Component ID: 511 Component : SWITCH-STOPLAMP Connector: Name : SWITCH-STOPLAMP Color : BLACK # of pins : 6 Pin Circuit Description 1 A103 18GY/RD FUSED B(+) 2 L50 18WT/TN BRAKE LAMP SWITCH OUTPUT 3 V30 20VT/WT S/C BRAKE SWITCH OUTPUT 4 V32 20VT/YL BRAKE SWITCH NO. 2 SIGNAL 5 Z429 20BK/OR GROUND 6 B29 20DG/WT BRAKE SWITCH NO. 1 SIGNAL Component Location - 41 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Brake Light Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Component ID 478 > Page 15111 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Brake Light Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Brake Light Switch: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The brake lamp switch (2) is a three circuit, spring-loaded plunger actuated switch that is secured to the steering column support bracket under the instrument panel on the driver side of the vehicle. The molded plastic switch housing has an integral connector receptacle (1) containing six terminal pins and featuring a Connector Position Assurance (CPA) lock. The switch is connected to the vehicle electrical system through a dedicated take out of the instrument panel wire harness. The switch plunger (3) extends through a mounting collar (4) on one end of the switch housing. The plunger has a one time telescoping self-adjustment feature that is activated after the switch is installed by moving an adjustment release lever (5) on the opposite end of the switch housing clockwise, until it locks into a position that is horizontal and parallel to the connector receptacle. An installed brake lamp switch cannot be readjusted or repaired. If the switch is damaged, ineffective, or removed from its mounting position for any reason, it must be replaced with a new unit. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Brake Light Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 15114 Brake Light Switch: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The brake lamp switch controls three independent circuits. These circuits are described as follows: - Brake Lamp Switch Circuit - A normally open brake lamp switch circuit receives a battery voltage input, and supplies this battery voltage to the brake lamps and the Controller Antilock Brake (CAB) on a brake lamp switch output circuit only when the brake pedal is depressed (brake lamp switch plunger released). - Brake Lamp Switch Signal Circuit - A normally closed brake lamp switch signal circuit receives a direct path to ground, and supplies this ground input to the Powertrain Control Module (PCM) on a brake lamp switch sense circuit only when the brake pedal is released (brake lamp switch plunger is depressed). - Speed Control Circuit - A normally closed speed control circuit receives a battery voltage input from the Powertrain Control Module on a speed control supply circuit, and supplies this battery voltage to the speed control servo solenoids (dump, vacuum, and vent) on a speed control brake switch output circuit only when the speed control system is turned ON and the brake pedal is released (brake lamp switch plunger is depressed). The components of the self-adjusting brake switch plunger consist of a two-piece telescoping plunger, a split plunger locking collar, and a release wedge. The release lever has a shaft with a wedge that spreads the plunger locking collar to an open or released position. After the switch is installed and the brake pedal is released, the plunger telescopes to the correct adjustment position. When the release lever is moved to the release position, the wedge is disengaged from the locking collar causing the collar to apply a clamping pressure to the two plunger halves, fixing the plunger length. The brake lamp switch as well as the hard wired inputs and outputs of the switch may be diagnosed using conventional diagnostic tools and procedures. Refer to the appropriate wiring information. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Brake Light Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 15115 Brake Light Switch: Testing and Inspection BRAKE LAMP SWITCH WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury on vehicles equipped with airbags, disable the Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, airbag, seat belt tensioner, impact sensor, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the SRS. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment. 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. CAUTION: Do not remove the brake lamp switch from the mounting bracket. The self-adjusting switch plunger is a one time only feature. If the switch is removed from the mounting bracket, it MUST be replaced with a new switch. 2. Disconnect the wire harness connector from the brake lamp switch. 3. Using an ohmmeter, perform the continuity tests at the terminal pins (1) in the brake lamp switch connector receptacle as shown in the Brake Lamp Switch Tests table. 4. If the switch fails any of the continuity tests, replace the ineffective brake lamp switch as required. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Brake Light Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Brake Light Switch: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury on vehicles equipped with airbags, disable the Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, airbag, seat belt tensioner, impact sensor, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the SRS. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment. 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. 2. Locate the brake lamp switch (2) near the support bracket on the lower steering column (1). 3. Disconnect the wire harness connector (3) from the brake lamp switch. 4. Rotate the brake lamp switch housing clockwise about 30 degrees to align the tabs on the switch locking collar with the keyed hole in the switch mounting bracket. 5. Pull the switch straight back from the keyed hole to remove it from the bracket. CAUTION: The brake lamp switch self-adjusting switch plunger is a one time only feature. If the switch is removed from the mounting bracket, it MUST be replaced with a new switch. 6. Discard the removed brake lamp switch. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Brake Light Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 15118 Brake Light Switch: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury on vehicles equipped with airbags, disable the Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, airbag, seat belt tensioner, impact sensor, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the SRS. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment. CAUTION: The brake lamp switch self-adjusting switch plunger is a one time only feature. If the switch is removed from the mounting bracket, it MUST be replaced with a new switch. 1. Depress and hold the brake pedal in the depressed position. 2. Align the tabs on the brake lamp switch locking collar with the keyed hole in the switch mounting bracket on the lower steering column (1). 3. Insert the tabs on the brake lamp switch locking collar through the keyed hole in the switch mounting bracket until the switch housing (2) is firmly seated against the bracket. 4. Rotate the switch housing counterclockwise about 30 degrees to engage the tabs on the locking collar with the switch mounting bracket. CAUTION: Do not release or pull up on the brake pedal before the switch plunger adjustment has been completed. 5. Release the brake pedal, but do not pull it upward. 6. Rotate the plunger adjustment release lever (4) clockwise until it locks into place. The lever should be parallel to the brake lamp switch connector receptacle. This action will set the switch plunger length to a final adjustment position and cannot be undone. If not performed properly the first time, a new brake lamp switch must be installed. 7. Reconnect the wire harness connector (3) to the brake lamp switch. 8. Reconnect the battery negative cable. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Combination Switch > Component Information > Locations Combination Switch: Locations Component ID: 495 Component : SWITCH-MULTIFUNCTION Connector: Name : SWITCH-MULTIFUNCTION Color : BLACK # of pins : 4 Pin Circuit Description 1 G194 20VT/LG WASH/BEAM SELECT SWITCH SIGNAL 2 L900 20WT/YL WIPER/TURN/BEAM SELECT SWITCH RETURN 3 L12 20WT/OR TURN LAMPS SWITCH SIGNAL 4 W52 20BR/YL INTERMITTENT WIPER SWITCH SIGNAL Component Location - 47 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Combination Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 15122 Component Location - 42 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Combination Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 15123 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Combination Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 15124 Combination Switch: Diagrams Component ID: 495 Component : SWITCH-MULTIFUNCTION Connector: Name : SWITCH-MULTIFUNCTION Color : BLACK # of pins : 4 Pin Circuit Description 1 G194 20VT/LG WASH/BEAM SELECT SWITCH SIGNAL 2 L900 20WT/YL WIPER/TURN/BEAM SELECT SWITCH RETURN 3 L12 20WT/OR TURN LAMPS SWITCH SIGNAL 4 W52 20BR/YL INTERMITTENT WIPER SWITCH SIGNAL Component Location - 47 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Combination Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 15125 Component Location - 42 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Combination Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 15126 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Combination Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Combination Switch: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The multi-function switch (3) is located on the steering column, just below the steering wheel. The only visible components of the multi-function switch are the control stalk (2) and control knob (1) that extend through the steering column shrouds on the left side of the column, and the hazard warning push button (4) that extends through the shroud on the top of the column. The remainder of the switch including its mounting provisions, its electrical connection, and the turn signal cancel actuator (5) are concealed beneath the shrouds. The switch housing and controls are constructed of molded black plastic. Each of the switch controls has white International Control and Display Symbol graphics applied to it, which clearly identify its many functions. Three integral locating posts on the switch housing, one on the top and two on the bottom, slide into channels in a receptacle on the left side of the multi-function switch mounting housing near the top of the steering column to ensure proper positioning of the switch. Then two screws secure the switch to the mounting housing. A single integral connector receptacle containing four terminal pins on the back of the switch housing connects the switch to the vehicle electrical system through a dedicated take out and connector of the instrument panel wire harness. The multi-function switch provides the vehicle operator with a control interface for the following functions: - Hazard Warning Control - The multi-function switch hazard warning push button provides two detent positions (ON and OFF) to control the hazard warning lamps. Headlamp Beam Selection - The multi-function switch control stalk provides detent switching for selection of the headlamp HIGH or LOW beams. There is also an intermediate momentary position that allows the headlamp high beam circuits to be momentarily flashed to provide an optical horn feature (sometimes referred to as flash-to-pass) as an optical signalling device. - Turn Signal Control - The multi-function switch control stalk provides momentary non-detent (lane change) switching or detent switching with automatic cancellation for both the left and right turn signal lamps. - Washer Control - The multi-function switch control knob provides a momentary WASH position for washer system operation. - Wiper Control - The multi-function switch control knob provides two continuous wipe switch positions, LOW speed or HIGH speed; and an intermittent wipe mode with five delay interval positions. The multi-function switch cannot be adjusted or repaired. If any function of the switch is ineffective, or if the switch is damaged, the entire switch must be replaced as a unit. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Combination Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 15129 Combination Switch: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The multi-function switch uses resistor multiplexing to control the many functions and features it provides using only three hard wired output circuits. The switch receives a clean ground from the ElectroMechanical Instrument Cluster (EMIC) (also known as the Cab Compartment Node/CCN) on a multi-function switch return circuit. It then provides outputs to the EMIC on a wash/beam select switch signal circuit to control washer and headlamp beam selection, on an intermittent wiper switch signal circuit to control wipers, and on a turn lamps switch signal circuit to control turn signal and hazard warning functions. The multi-function switch operates as follows: - Hazard Warning Control - The hazard warning push button of the multi-function switch is depressed to activate the hazard warning system, and depressed again to turn the system OFF. When the push button is actuated, the multi-function switch provides an output to the EMIC, and the EMIC responds by sending electronic hazard switch status messages to the Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) over the Controller Area Network (CAN) data bus. The TIPM then energizes and flashes or de-energizes both the left and right turn signal circuits to provide the visual hazard warning. - Headlamp Beam Selection - The control stalk of the multi-function switch is pulled towards the steering wheel past a detent to actuate the integral beam select switch circuitry, or to an intermediate, momentary position before the detent to actuate the optical horn feature. Each time the control stalk is actuated to a detent position, the opposite headlamp beam from what is currently selected will be energized. Each time the control stalk is actuated to the momentary position with the headlamps turned OFF, the headlamp high beams will be illuminated for as long as the control stalk is held in this position. The multi-function switch provides an output to the EMIC, and the EMIC responds by sending electronic beam select switch status messages to the TIPM over the CAN data bus. The TIPM energizes or de-energizes the selected LOW or HIGH beam circuits. - Turn Signal Control - The control stalk of the multi-function switch is moved upward to activate the RIGHT turn signal circuitry, and, downward to activate the LEFT turn signal circuitry. The turn signal switch has a detent position in each direction that provides turn signals with automatic cancellation, and an intermediate, momentary position in each direction that automatically provides three turn signal blinks as a LANE CHANGE feature when the control stalk is tapped or will energize the turn signals for as long as the control stalk is held in the momentary position. When the control stalk is moved to a detent turn signal switch position, the cancel actuator extends toward the center of the steering column. A turn signal cancel cam that is integral to the clockspring rotates with the steering wheel and the cam lobes contact the cancel actuator when it is extended from the multi-function switch. When the steering wheel is rotated during a turning maneuver, one of the two turn signal cancel cam lobes will contact the turn signal cancel actuator. The cancel actuator latches against the cancel cam rotation in the direction opposite that which is signaled. If the LEFT turn signal detent is selected, the lobes of the cancel cam will ratchet past the cancel actuator when the steering wheel is rotated to the left, but will unlatch the cancel actuator as the steering wheel rotates to the right and returns to center, which will cancel the turn signal event and release the control stalk from the detent so it returns to the neutral OFF position. When a turn signal is activated, the multi-function switch provides an output to the EMIC, and the EMIC responds by sending electronic turn signal switch status messages to the TIPM over the CAN data bus. The TIPM energizes and flashes or de-energizes the selected left or right turn signal circuits. - Washer Control - The control knob on the end of the multi-function switch control stalk is depressed towards the steering column to momentarily activate the washer pump in the WASH mode. The washer pump will continue to operate in the washer mode until the control knob is released. The multi-function switch provides an output to the EMIC, and the EMIC responds by sending electronic washer switch status messages to the TIPM over the CAN data bus. The TIPM responds by energizing or de-energizing the washer pump in the washer mode. - Wiper Control - The control knob on the end of the multi-function switch control stalk is rotated to one of the continuous wiper detents, to one of five intermittent wiper detents, or to the OFF position to select the wiper mode. The multi-function switch provides an output to the EMIC, and the EMIC responds by sending electronic wiper switch status messages to the TIPM over the CAN data bus. The TIPM responds by energizing or de-energizing the wiper motor. The TIPM is programmed to operate the wiper motor at the selected low or high continuous wipe speed, and to provide the selected electronically controlled speed-sensitive intermittent wipe or wipe-after-wash mode features. The multi-function switch as well as the hard wired inputs and outputs of the switch may be diagnosed using conventional diagnostic tools and procedures. Refer to the appropriate wiring information. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Combination Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 15130 Combination Switch: Testing and Inspection MULTI-FUNCTION SWITCH WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury on vehicles equipped with airbags, disable the Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, airbag, seat belt tensioner, impact sensor, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the SRS. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment. 1. Remove the multi-function switch from the switch mounting housing on the steering column. See: Service and Repair/Removal . 2. Disconnect the wire harness connector from the back of the multi-function switch. 3. Using an ohmmeter, test the resistance between the terminals of the switch as shown in the Multi-Function Switch Tests table. 4. If the switch fails any of the tests, replace the ineffective multi-function switch as required. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Combination Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Combination Switch: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury on vehicles equipped with airbags, disable the Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, airbag, seat belt tensioner, impact sensor, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the SRS. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment. 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. 2. Remove the driver airbag from the steering wheel. See: Restraint Systems/Air Bag Systems/Air Bag/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Driver Airbag - Removal . 3. Disconnect the steering wheel wire harness connectors from the upper clockspring connector receptacles. CAUTION: Be certain that the screws that secure the steering wheel puller to the steering wheel are fully engaged in the steering wheel armature without passing through the steering wheel and damaging the clockspring. 4. Remove the steering wheel from the steering column. See: Steering and Suspension/Steering/Steering Wheel/Service and Repair/Removal . 5. Remove the screw (2) that secures the tilt steering column knob (1) and remove it from the tilt actuator (3) on the left side of the column. 6. From below the steering column, remove the two outboard screws that secure the upper column shroud (1) to the lower shroud (3). 7. Using hand pressure, press inward on both sides of the upper shroud above the parting line of the lower shroud to release the snap features that secure the two shroud halves to each other. 8. Remove the upper shroud from the lower shroud and the steering column. 9. Remove the one center screw that secures the lower shroud to the steering column (4). 10. Remove the lower shroud from the steering column. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Combination Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 15133 11. Disconnect the wire harness connector (2) from the back of the multi-function switch housing (1). 12. Remove the two screws (4) that secure the switch to the multi-function switch mounting housing (3). 13. Grasp the switch control stalk and pull it toward the left side of the vehicle to remove the switch from the mounting housing. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Combination Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 15134 Combination Switch: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury on vehicles equipped with airbags, disable the Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, airbag, seat belt tensioner, impact sensor, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the SRS. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment. 1. Slide the multi-function switch (1) into the multi-function switch mounting housing (3) from the left side. Be certain that the alignment pins on the top and bottom of the switch are properly engaged in the channels of the mounting housing. 2. Install and tighten the two screws (4) that secure the switch to the mounting housing. Tighten the screws to 2 Nm (20 in. lbs.). 3. Reconnect the wire harness connector (2) to the back of the switch housing. 4. Position the lower shroud (3) onto the steering column (4). 5. From below the steering column, install and tighten the one center screw that secures the lower shroud to the steering column. Tighten the screw to 2 Nm (20 in. lbs.). 6. Position the upper shroud (1) onto the steering column over the lower shroud. On vehicles equipped with an automatic transmission, be certain to engage the gearshift lever gap hider into the opening in the right side of both shroud halves. 7. Align the snap features on the upper shroud with the receptacles in the lower shroud and apply hand pressure to snap them together. 8. Install and tighten the two outboard screws that secure the upper shroud to the lower shroud. Tighten the screws to 2 Nm (20 in. lbs.). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Combination Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 15135 9. Position the tilt steering column knob (1) onto the tilt adjuster actuator (3) on the left side of the steering column, then install and tighten the screw (2) to secure the knob to the actuator. Tighten the screw to 2 Nm (20 in. lbs.). NOTE: When reinstalling the steering wheel, be certain to index the yellow rubber booted engagement dowel on the upper surface of the clockspring rotor between the two fins cast into the lower surface of the steering wheel armature hub. 10. Reinstall the steering wheel onto the steering column. See: Steering and Suspension/Steering/Steering Wheel/Service and Repair/Installation . 11. Reconnect the steering wheel wire harness connectors to the upper clockspring connector receptacles. Be certain that the steering wheel wire harness is routed between the steering wheel back trim cover and the steering wheel armature. 12. Reinstall the driver airbag onto the steering wheel. See: Restraint Systems/Air Bag Systems/Air Bag/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Driver Airbag - Installation . 13. Reconnect the battery negative cable. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Door Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Door Switch: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION This vehicle has up to four door ajar switches, one for each door. Each switch is concealed within and integral to its respective door latch unit. The switches are momentary leaf contact-type units that are actuated by the mechanisms internal to the door latch. A short pigtail wire and connector on each door latch connects the door ajar switch to the vehicle electrical system through its respective door wire harness. The door ajar switches cannot be adjusted or repaired and, if ineffective or damaged, the door latch unit must be replaced. See: Body and Frame/Doors, Hood and Trunk/Doors/Front Door/Front Door Latch/Service and Repair/Front Door Latch - Removal or See: Body and Frame/Doors, Hood and Trunk/Doors/Rear Door/Rear Door Latch/Service and Repair/Rear Door Latch - Removal . Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Door Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 15140 Door Switch: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The door ajar switches are actuated by the mechanisms internal to the door latch. When a door is closed and properly latched, its door ajar switch is an open circuit. When a door is open or only partially latched, the door ajar switch is a closed circuit. The door ajar switches are hard wired in series between a body ground and the ElectroMechanical Instrument Cluster (EMIC) (also known as the Cab Compartment Node/CCN). The EMIC reads the hard wired door ajar switch inputs through internal pull-ups, then uses these inputs to control many electronic functions and features of the vehicle. The EMIC also sends the proper electronic door ajar switch status messages to other electronic modules in the vehicle over the Controller Area Network (CAN) data bus. The door ajar switches as well as the hard wired inputs and outputs of the switches may be diagnosed using conventional diagnostic tools and procedures. Refer to the appropriate wiring information. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Glove Box Lamp Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Glove Box Lamp Switch: Service and Repair Removal LAMP/SWITCH WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury on vehicles equipped with airbags, disable the Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, airbag, seat belt tensioner, impact sensor, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the SRS. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment. 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. 2. Open the glove box door. 3. Reach through the window in the instrument panel (2) glove box opening behind the switch to access and depress the retaining latch on either side of the glove box lamp and switch unit (3). 4. While holding the retaining latch depressed, push the glove box lamp and switch unit out through the mounting hole in the face of the instrument panel. 5. Disconnect the wire harness connector (1) from the glove box lamp and switch. 6. Remove the lamp and switch unit from the instrument panel. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Glove Box Lamp Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 15145 Glove Box Lamp Switch: Service and Repair Installation LAMP/SWITCH WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury on vehicles equipped with airbags, disable the Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, airbag, seat belt tensioner, impact sensor, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the SRS. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment. 1. Position the glove box lamp and switch unit (3) to the instrument panel (2) glove box opening. 2. Reconnect the wire harness connector (1) to the lamp and switch unit. 3. Feed the wire harness back through the switch mounting hole. 4. Align the lamp and switch unit with the mounting hole in the instrument panel. 5. Using hand pressure, push the lamp and switch unit firmly and evenly into the mounting hole until it is fully seated. 6. Close the glove box door. 7. Reconnect the battery negative cable. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Headlamp Switch > Component Information > Locations Headlamp Switch: Locations Component ID: 489 Component : SWITCH-HEADLAMP Connector: Name : SWITCH-HEADLAMP Color : BLACK # of pins : 10 Pin Circuit Description 1 L116 20WT/LG HEADLAMP/FOG LAMP SWITCH SIGNAL 2 E2 20OR/BR PANEL LAMPS DIMMER SIGNAL 3 L115 20WT/YL HEADLAMP SWITCH RETURN 4 E19 20OR/BR HEADLAMP SWITCH DIMMER SIGNAL 5 Z407 20BK/OR GROUND 6 L914 20WT/LG CARGO LAMP SWITCH SIGNAL 7-- 8-9-10 - Component Location - 44 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Headlamp Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 15149 Component Location - 50 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Headlamp Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 15150 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Headlamp Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 15151 Headlamp Switch: Diagrams Component ID: 489 Component : SWITCH-HEADLAMP Connector: Name : SWITCH-HEADLAMP Color : BLACK # of pins : 10 Pin Circuit Description 1 L116 20WT/LG HEADLAMP/FOG LAMP SWITCH SIGNAL 2 E2 20OR/BR PANEL LAMPS DIMMER SIGNAL 3 L115 20WT/YL HEADLAMP SWITCH RETURN 4 E19 20OR/BR HEADLAMP SWITCH DIMMER SIGNAL 5 Z407 20BK/OR GROUND 6 L914 20WT/LG CARGO LAMP SWITCH SIGNAL 7-- 8-9-10 - Component Location - 44 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Headlamp Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 15152 Component Location - 50 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Headlamp Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 15153 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Headlamp Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Headlamp Switch: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The headlamp switch (1) is located on the instrument panel, to the left of the steering column. Two different switches are used. The standard switch features a three-position rotary knob (4) for exterior lighting control, a thumbwheel (2) for panel lamps dimming and interior lighting control, and a momentary push button (3) for cargo lamp control. An optional switch has a momentary PUSH function added to the rotary knob for front fog lamp control. Each of these switches is constructed of molded plastic. The rotary knob is molded plastic and knurled around its circumference to ease operator control. The thumbwheel is also plastic and knurled. On vehicles with optional fog lamps the rotary knob also has the text PUSH and an International Control and Display Symbol icon for Front Fog Light applied to it. The cargo lamp push button is plastic with a smooth finish and the text CARGO applied to it. The switch face plate is also labeled with graphics and icons to clearly identify the many functions of the rotary knob and thumbwheel. Three screws secure the switch to the back of the cluster bezel through integral mounting flanges that are molded to each side of the switch housing. The back of the switch housing has an integral connector receptacle containing terminal pins that connect the switch to the vehicle electrical system through a dedicated take out and connector of the instrument panel wire harness. A panel dimmer controlled incandescent bulb soldered to the circuit board within the switch provides back lighting for visibility at night, but is not serviceable. The headlamp switch cannot be repaired and, if ineffective or damaged, it must be replaced. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Headlamp Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 15156 Headlamp Switch: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The headlamp switch uses two resistor multiplexed outputs and one conventional output to control the many functions and features it provides. The switch receives a clean ground from the ElectroMechanical Instrument Cluster (EMIC) (also known as the Cab Compartment Node/CCN) on a headlamp switch return circuit. It then provides outputs to the EMIC on a headlamp switch signal circuit to control exterior lighting functions, on a panel lamps dimmer signal circuit to control panel dimmer and interior lighting functions, and on a cargo lamp return circuit to control the cargo lamps. The switch illumination circuit receives a path to ground at all times through the left instrument panel ground circuit. The illumination level is controlled by a Pulse-Width Modulated (PWM) output received from the EMIC on a headlamp switch illumination control circuit. The EMIC controls this output based upon the dimmer signal select mux input from the headlamp switch. The headlamp switch operates as follows: - Cargo Lamps Control - The cargo lamp push button on the headlamp switch is depressed to activate or deactivate the cargo lamps. The headlamp switch provides an output to the EMIC, and the EMIC responds by providing the appropriate cargo lighting control outputs through its internal cargo lamp driver circuit. Front Fog Lamps Control - For vehicles so equipped, the rotary knob on the headlamp switch is depressed to activate or deactivate the optional front fog lamps. The headlamp switch provides an output to the EMIC, and the EMIC responds by sending electronic fog lamp switch status messages to the Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) over the Controller Area Network (CAN) data bus. The TIPM responds by energizing or de-energizing the front fog lamps and by sending an electronic message back to the EMIC to control the front fog lamp indicator. - Exterior Lighting Control - The rotary knob on the headlamp switch is rotated to a detent position to activate or deactivate the exterior lighting. The headlamp switch provides an output to the EMIC, and the EMIC responds by sending electronic exterior lighting switch status messages to the TIPM over the CAN data bus. The TIPM responds by energizing or de-energizing the park lamp and the high or low beam headlamp circuits, and by sending an electronic message back to the EMIC to control the high beam indicator. The TIPM also remembers which headlamp beams were last selected with the multi-function switch, and energizes those beams by default the next time the headlamps are turned ON. - Interior Lighting Control - The thumbwheel on the headlamp switch is rotated to the dome DEFEAT, dome ON, PARADE mode, or one of the six panel dimmer detent positions to control the interior courtesy/dome and panel lamps. The headlamp switch provides an output to the EMIC, and the EMIC responds by providing the appropriate interior lighting control outputs through its internal courtesy lamp driver circuits, electronic dimming level messages to other modules over the CAN data bus, and the proper PWM outputs to control dimming levels through several panel dimmer illumination control driver circuits. The headlamp switch as well as the hard wired inputs and outputs of the switch may be diagnosed using conventional diagnostic tools and procedures. Refer to the appropriate wiring information. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Headlamp Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 15157 Headlamp Switch: Testing and Inspection HEADLAMP SWITCH WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury on vehicles equipped with airbags, disable the Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, airbag, seat belt tensioner, impact sensor, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the SRS. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment. 1. Remove the cluster bezel from the instrument panel See: Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators/Instrument Cluster / Carrier/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Instrument Panel Cluster Bezel - Removal . 2. Disconnect the wire harness connector from the back of the headlamp switch. 3. Using an ohmmeter, test the resistance or continuity between the terminals of the switch as shown in the Headlamp Switch Tests table. 4. If the switch fails any of the tests, replace the ineffective headlamp switch as required. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Headlamp Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Headlamp Switch: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury on vehicles equipped with airbags, disable the Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, airbag, seat belt tensioner, impact sensor, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the SRS. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment. 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. 2. Remove the cluster bezel (1) from the instrument panel. See: Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators/Instrument Cluster / Carrier/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Instrument Panel Cluster Bezel - Removal . 3. Disconnect the wire harness connector (3) from the back of the headlamp switch (4). 4. Place the cluster bezel face down on a suitable work surface. Be certain to take the proper precautions to protect the face of the bezel from cosmetic damage. 5. Remove the three screws (2) that secure the headlamp switch to the back of the cluster bezel. 6. Remove the headlamp switch from the cluster bezel. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Headlamp Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 15160 Headlamp Switch: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury on vehicles equipped with airbags, disable the Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, airbag, seat belt tensioner, impact sensor, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the SRS. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment. 1. Position the headlamp switch (4) to the back of the cluster bezel (1). 2. Install and tighten the three screws (2) that secure the headlamp switch to the cluster bezel. Tighten the screws to 2 Nm (20 in. lbs.). 3. Position the cluster bezel close enough to the instrument panel to reconnect the wire harness connector (3) to the back of the headlamp switch. 4. Reinstall the cluster bezel onto the instrument panel. See: Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators/Instrument Cluster / Carrier/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Instrument Panel Cluster Bezel - Installation . 5. Reconnect the battery negative cable. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Horn Switch > Component Information > Diagrams Horn Switch: Diagrams Component ID: 493 Component : SWITCH-HORN Connector: Name : SWITCH-HORN Color : WHITE # of pins : 2 Pin Circuit Description 1 X3 20DG/VT HORN SWITCH SENSE 2-- Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Tail Light Bulb > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Tail Light Bulb: Service and Repair Removal Bulb - Cab and Chassis BULB - CAB AND CHASSIS NOTE: The rear lamp unit contains two bulbs: the park/turn signal/brake/license plate, and the backup. The service procedures for each bulb are the same, only the bulb sizes and types may differ. 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. 2. Remove the four screws (1) that secure the lens (2) to the rear lamp unit housing (5). 3. Push the backup lamp bulb (4), or the park/turn signal/brake/license plate bulb (7) slightly into its socket (3) or (6), then rotate the bulb counterclockwise about 30 degrees to unlock it. 4. Pull the base of the bulb straight out of the socket. Bulb - Pick-Up BULB - PICK-UP NOTE: The rear lamp unit contains two bulbs: park/stop/turn signal/side marker and backup. The service procedures for each bulb are the same, only the bulb sizes and types may differ. 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. 2. Remove the rear lamp unit (1) from the end of the quarter panel. See: Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Rear Lamp Unit Removal . 3. Disconnect the wire harness connector (3) from the park/stop/turn signal/side marker (2) or the backup (4) bulb socket on the back of the lamp housing. 4. Firmly grasp the socket on the back of the housing and rotate it counterclockwise about 30 degrees to unlock it. 5. Pull the socket and bulb straight out from the keyed opening in the housing. 6. Pull the base of the bulb straight out of the socket. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Tail Light Bulb > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 15169 Tail Light Bulb: Service and Repair Installation Bulb - Cab and Chassis BULB - CAB AND CHASSIS CAUTION: Always use the correct bulb size and type for replacement. An incorrect bulb size or type may overheat and cause damage to the lamp, the socket or the lamp wiring. NOTE: The rear lamp unit contains two bulbs: the park/turn signal/brake/license plate, and the backup. The service procedures for each bulb are the same, only the bulb sizes and types may differ. 1. Align the base of the backup lamp bulb (4), or the park/turn signal/brake/license plate lamp bulb (7) with its socket (3) or (6). 2. Push the bulb straight into the socket until the base is firmly seated, then rotate the bulb clockwise about 30 degrees to lock it into place. 3. Position the lens (2) to the rear lamp unit housing (5). 4. Install and tighten the four screws (1) that secure the lens to the housing. Tighten the screws to 2 Nm (20 in. lbs.). 5. Reconnect the battery negative cable. Bulb - Pick-Up BULB - PICK-UP CAUTION: Always use the correct bulb size and type for replacement. An incorrect bulb size or type may overheat and cause damage to the lamp, the socket or the lamp wiring. NOTE: The rear lamp unit contains two bulbs: park/stop/turn signal/side marker and backup. The service procedures for each bulb are the same, only the bulb sizes and types may differ. 1. Align the base of the bulb with the park/stop/turn signal/side marker (2) or the backup (4) bulb socket. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Tail Light Bulb > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 15170 2. Push the bulb straight into the socket until the base is firmly seated. 3. Align the socket and bulb with the keyed opening on the back of the rear lamp unit housing (1). 4. Insert the socket and bulb into the housing until the socket is firmly seated. 5. Rotate the socket clockwise about 30 degrees to lock it into place. 6. Reconnect the wire harness connector (3) to the socket. 7. Reinstall the rear lamp unit onto the end of the quarter panel. See: Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Rear Lamp Unit - Installation . 8. Reconnect the battery negative cable. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Trailer Lamps: Diagram Information and Instructions Warnings WARNINGS - GENERAL WARNINGS provide information to prevent personal injury and vehicle damage. Below is a list of general warnings that should be followed any time a vehicle is being serviced. WARNING: Always wear safety glasses for eye protection. WARNING: Use safety stands anytime a procedure requires being under a vehicle. WARNING: Be sure that the ignition switch always is in the off position, unless the procedure requires it to be on. WARNING: Set the parking brake when working on any vehicle. An automatic transmission should be in park. A manual transmission should be in neutral. WARNING: Operate the engine only in a well-ventilated area. WARNING: Keep away from moving parts when the engine is running, especially the fan and belts. WARNING: To prevent serious burns, avoid contact with hot parts such as the radiator, exhaust manifold(s), tail pipe, catalytic converter and muffler. WARNING: Do not allow flame or sparks near the battery. Gases are always present in and around the battery. WARNING: Always remove rings, watches, loose hanging jewelry and avoid loose clothing. How to Use Wiring Diagrams DESCRIPTION - HOW TO USE WIRING DIAGRAMS DaimlerChrysler Corporation wiring diagrams are designed to provide information regarding the vehicles wiring content. In order to effectively use the wiring diagrams to diagnose and repair DaimlerChrysler Corporation vehicles, it is important to understand all of their features and characteristics. Diagrams are arranged such that the power (B+) side of the circuit is placed near the top of the page, and the ground (B-) side of the circuit is placed near the bottom of the page. All switches, components, and modules are shown in the at rest position with the doors closed and the key removed from the ignition. Components are shown two ways. A solid line around a component indicates that the component is complete. A dashed line around the component indicates that the component is being shown is not complete. Incomplete components have a reference number to indicate the page where the component is shown complete. It is important to realize that no attempt is made on the diagrams to represent components and wiring as they appear on the vehicle. For example, a short piece of wire is treated the same as a long one. In addition, switches and other components are shown as simply as possible, with regard to function only. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 15175 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 15176 SYMBOLS International symbols are used throughout the wiring diagrams. These symbols are consistent with those being used around the world. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 15177 TERMINOLOGY This is a list of terms and definitions used in the wiring diagrams. LHD - Left Hand Drive Vehicles RHD - Right Hand Drive Vehicles ATX - Automatic Transmissions-Front Wheel Drive MTX Manual Transmissions-Front Wheel Drive Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 15178 AT - Automatic Transmissions-Rear Wheel Drive MT - Manual Transmissions-Rear Wheel Drive SOHC - Single Over Head Cam Engine DOHC - Double Over Head Cam Engine Export - Vehicles Built For Sale In Markets Other Than North America Except Export - Vehicles Built For Sale In North America Circuit Functions DESCRIPTION - CIRCUIT FUNCTIONS All circuits in the diagrams use an alpha/numeric code to identify the wire and it's function. To identify which circuit code applies to a system, refer to the Circuit Identification Code Chart. This chart shows the main circuits only and does not show the secondary codes that may apply to some models. Circuit Information DESCRIPTION - CIRCUIT INFORMATION Each wire shown in the diagrams contains a code which identifies the main circuit, a specific part of the main circuit, gage of wire, and color. An example would be A 2 18 LB/YL. This is a Battery Feed circuit, level two, eighteen gauge, light blue with a yellow tracer. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 15179 Connector, Ground and Splice Information DESCRIPTION - CONNECTOR, GROUND AND SPLICE INFORMATION CAUTION: Not all connectors are serviced. Some connectors are serviced only with a harness. A typical example might be the Supplemental Restraint System connectors. Always check parts availability before attempting a repair. IDENTIFICATION In-line connectors are identified by a number, as follows: - In-line connectors located in the engine compartment are C100 series numbers. - In-line connectors located in the instrument panel area are C200 series numbers. - In-line connectors located in the body are C300 series numbers. - Jumper harness connectors are C400 series numbers. - Grounds and ground connectors are identified with a "G" and follow the same series numbering as the in-line connectors. - Splices are identified with an "S" and follow the same series numbering as the in-line connectors. In addition, S001-S099 numbers are located in the engine compartment. - Component connectors are identified by the component name instead of a number. Multiple connectors on a component use a C1, C2, etc. identifier. LOCATIONS Vehicle/Locations contains the master connector/ground/splice location index charts with hyperlinks to the applicable location illustrations. The illustrations contain the connector name (or number)/ground number/splice number and component identification. The abbreviation T/O is used in the component location section to indicate a point in which the wiring harness branches out to a component. The abbreviation N/S means Not Shown in the illustrations Section Identification and Information DESCRIPTION - SECTION IDENTIFICATION AND INFORMATION The wiring diagrams are grouped into individual sections. If a component is most likely found in a particular group, it will be shown complete (all wires, Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 15180 connectors, and pins) within that group. For example, the Auto Shutdown Relay is most likely to be found in Powertrain Management, so it is shown there complete. It can, however, be shown partially in another group if it contains some associated wiring. Splice diagrams show the entire splice and provide references to other sections the splices serves. Splice Information only contains splice diagrams that are not shown in their entirety somewhere else in the wiring diagrams. Connector Pin-Outs shows each connector and the circuits involved with that connector. The connectors are identified using the name/number on the diagram pages. Removal REMOVAL 1. Disconnect battery. 2. Release Connector Lock (2). 3. Disconnect the connector (3) being repaired from its mating half/component. 4. Remove the dress cover (if applicable) (1). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 15181 5. Release the Secondary Terminal Lock, if required (1). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 15182 6. Position the connector locking finger away from the terminal using the proper special tool. Pull on the wire to remove the terminal from the connector. Installation Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 15183 INSTALLATION 1. Insert the removed terminal in the same cavity on the repair connector. 2. Repeat steps for each terminal in the connector, being sure that all wires are inserted into the proper cavities. For additional connector pin-out identification, refer to the wiring diagrams. 3. When the connector is re-assembled, the secondary terminal lock must be placed in the locked position to prevent terminal push out. 4. Replace dress cover (if applicable). 5. Connect connector to its mating half/component. 6. Connect battery and test all affected systems. Removal REMOVAL 1. Disconnect the battery. 2. Locate the diode in the harness, and remove the protective covering. 3. Remove the diode from the harness, pay attention to the current flow direction (1) (2) (3). Installation INSTALLATION 1. Remove the insulation from the wires in the harness. Only remove enough insulation to solder in the new diode. 2. Install the new diode in the harness, making sure current flow is correct. If necessary, refer to the appropriate wiring diagram for current flow. 3. Solder the connection together using rosin core type solder only. Do not use acid core solder. 4. Tape the diode to the harness using electrical tape. Make sure the diode is completely sealed from the elements. 5. Re-connect the battery and test affected systems. Removal REMOVAL 1. Follow steps for removing terminals described in the connector removal section. 2. Cut the wire 6 inches from the back of the connector. Installation INSTALLATION 1. Select a wire from the terminal repair kit that best matches the color and gage of the wire being repaired. 2. Cut the repair wire to the proper length and remove one-half (1/2) inch of insulation. 3. Splice the repair wire to the wire harness (see wire splicing procedure). See: Service Procedures/Wire Splicing 4. Insert the repaired wire into the connector. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 15184 5. Install the connector locking wedge, if required, and reconnect the connector to its mating half/component. 6. Re-tape the wire harness starting at 1-1/2 inches behind the connector and 2 inches past the repair. 7. Connect battery and test all affected systems. Wire Splicing STANDARD PROCEDURE - WIRE SPLICING When splicing a wire, it is important that the correct gage be used as shown in the wiring diagrams. 1. Remove one-half (1/2) inch of insulation from each wire that needs to be spliced. 2. Place a piece of adhesive lined heat shrink tubing on one side of the wire. Make sure the tubing will be long enough to cover and seal the entire repair area. 3. Place the strands of wire overlapping each other inside of the splice clip (1). 4. Using crimping tool (1), Mopar p/n 05019912AA, crimp the splice clip and wires together. 5. Solder (3) the connection (2) together using rosin core type solder (1) only. CAUTION: DO NOT USE ACID CORE SOLDER. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 15185 6. Center the heat shrink tubing (2) over the joint and heat using a heat gun. Heat the joint until the tubing is tightly sealed and sealant (1) comes out of both ends of the tubing. Special Tools WIRING/TERMINAL PROBING TOOL PACKAGE 6807 TERMINAL PICK TOOL SET 6680 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 15186 TERMINAL REMOVING TOOLS 6932 AND 8638 TERMINAL REMOVING TOOL 6934 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 15187 Trailer Lamps: Diagnostic Aids Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) Sensitive Devices STANDARD PROCEDURE - ELECTROSTATIC DISCHARGE (ESD) SENSITIVE DEVICES All ESD sensitive components are solid state and a symbol is used to indicate this. When handling any component with this symbol, comply with the following procedures to reduce the possibility of electrostatic charge build up on the body and inadvertent discharge into the component. If it is not known whether the part is ESD sensitive, assume that it is. 1. Always touch a known good ground before handling the part. This should be repeated while handling the part and more frequently after sliding across a seat, sitting down from a standing position, or walking a distance. 2. Avoid touching electrical terminals of the part, unless instructed to do so by a written procedure. 3. When using a voltmeter, be sure to connect the ground lead first. 4. Do not remove the part from it's protective packing until it is time to install the part. 5. Before removing the part from it's package, ground the package to a known good ground on the vehicle. Testing Of Voltage Potential STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING OF VOLTAGE POTENTIAL 1. Connect the ground lead of a voltmeter to a known good ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the voltmeter to the selected test point. The vehicle ignition may need to be turned ON to check voltage. Refer to the appropriate test procedure. Testing For Continuity Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 15188 STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING FOR CONTINUITY 1. Remove the fuse (1) for the circuit being checked or, disconnect the battery. 2. Connect one lead of the ohmmeter to one side of the circuit being tested 3. Connect the other lead to the other end of the circuit being tested. Low or no resistance means good continuity. Testing For A Short To Ground STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING FOR A SHORT TO GROUND 1. Remove the fuse and disconnect all items involved with the fuse. 2. Connect a test light or a voltmeter across the terminals of the fuse. 3. Starting at the fuse block, wiggle the wiring harness about six to eight inches apart and watch the voltmeter/test lamp. 4. If the voltmeter registers voltage or the test lamp glows, there is a short to ground in that general area of the wiring harness. Testing For A Short To Ground On Fuses Powering Several Loads STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING FOR A SHORT TO GROUND ON FUSES POWERING SEVERAL LOADS 1. Refer to the wiring diagrams and disconnect or isolate all items on the suspected fused circuits. 2. Replace the blown fuse. 3. Supply power to the fuse by turning ON the ignition switch or re-connecting the battery. 4. Start connecting or energizing the items in the fuse circuit one at a time. When the fuse blows the circuit with the short to ground has been isolated. Testing For A Voltage Drop STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING FOR A VOLTAGE DROP Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 15189 1. Connect the positive lead of the voltmeter to the side of the circuit closest to the battery. 2. Connect the other lead of the voltmeter to the other side of the switch, component or circuit. 3. Operate the item. 4. The voltmeter will show the difference in voltage between the two points. Troubleshooting Wiring Problems DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING - WIRING HARNESS TROUBLESHOOTING TOOLS When diagnosing a problem in an electrical circuit there are several common tools necessary. These tools are listed and explained below. - Jumper Wire - This is a test wire used to connect two points of a circuit. It can be used to bypass an open in a circuit. WARNING: Never use a jumper wire across a load, such as a motor, connected between a battery feed and ground. - Voltmeter - Used to check for voltage on a circuit. Always connect the black lead to a known good ground and the red lead to the positive side of the circuit. CAUTION: Most of the electrical components used in today's vehicles are Solid State. When checking voltages in these circuits, use a meter with a 10 - megohm or greater impedance rating. - Ohmmeter - Used to check the resistance between two points of a circuit. Low or no resistance in a circuit means good continuity. CAUTION: Most of the electrical components used in today's vehicles are Solid State. When checking resistance in these circuits use a meter with a 10 - megohm or greater impedance rating. In addition, make sure the power is disconnected from the circuit. Circuits that are powered up by the vehicle's electrical system can cause damage to the equipment and provide false readings. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 15190 - Probing Tools - These tools are used for probing terminals in connectors. Select the proper size tool from Special Tool Package 6807, and insert the probing end (2) into the terminal being tested. Use the other end of the tool (1) to insert the meter probe. INTERMITTENT AND POOR CONNECTIONS Most intermittent electrical problems are caused by faulty electrical connections or wiring. It is also possible for a sticking component or relay to cause a problem. Before condemning a component or wiring assembly, check the following items. - Connectors are fully seated - Spread terminals, or terminal push out - Terminals in the wiring assembly are fully seated into the connector/component and locked into position - Dirt or corrosion on the terminals. Any amount of corrosion or dirt could cause an intermittent problem - Damaged connector/component casing exposing the item to dirt or moisture - Wire insulation that has rubbed through causing a short to ground - Some or all of the wiring strands broken inside of the insulation - Wiring broken inside of the insulation TROUBLESHOOTING WIRING PROBLEMS When troubleshooting wiring problems there are six steps which can aid in the procedure. The steps are listed and explained below. Always check for non-factory items added to the vehicle before doing any diagnosis. If the vehicle is equipped with these items, disconnect them to verify these add-on items are not the cause of the problem. 1. Verify the problem. 2. Verify any related symptoms. Do this by performing operational checks on components that are in the same circuit. Refer to the wiring diagrams. 3. Analyze the symptoms. Use the wiring diagrams to determine what the circuit is doing, where the problem most likely is occurring and where the diagnosis will continue. 4. Isolate the problem area. 5. Repair the problem area. 6. Verify the proper operation. For this step, check for proper operation of all items on the repaired circuit. Refer to the wiring diagrams. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Trailer Lamps: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The rear body wire harness on the rear frame (1) of all vehicles is equipped with a take out with a standard, light-duty 4-pin trailer tow connector (2) that is secured to the top of the trailer hitch platform (4) behind the rear bumper. Vehicles equipped with an optional factory-installed trailer towing package have a second take out with a connector (3) that plugs into a receptacle in the back of a heavy duty, sealed, 7-pin trailer tow connector that is located near the center of the rear bumper. Vehicles equipped with the trailer tow package also include an electric trailer brake wiring provision that terminates at a connector located on top of the large body harness connection under the instrument panel to the left of the brake pedal, as well as an electric trailer brake pigtail harness and an instruction card (1) that are stored in the glove box (2) when the vehicle is shipped from the factory. Refer to the appropriate wiring information. The wiring information includes wiring diagrams, proper wire and connector repair procedures, further details on wire harness routing and retention, as well as pin-out and location views for the various wire harness connectors, splices and grounds. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 15193 Trailer Lamps: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The standard 4-pin trailer tow connector contains the following vehicle circuits: park/tail lamps, left stop/turn lamp, right stop/turn lamp, and ground. The optional trailer towing package 7-way connector contains the same circuits as the 4-pin connector plus the following additional circuits: backup lamp, trailer battery and electric brake. If an aftermarket electric brake controller is used, the electric brake pigtail harness supplied will make installation easier. The connection (blue 4-way connector) for the harness is located under the instrument panel to the left of the brake pedal on top of the large body harness connection. Refer to the appropriate wiring information. The battery line of this harness may be used to charge the trailer battery. However, a battery isolation unit is not supplied and the trailer battery may discharge the vehicle battery while the engine is not running. The battery line is protected by a fuse or a circuit breaker. The trailer tow connectors as well as the hard wired inputs and outputs of the connectors may be diagnosed using conventional diagnostic tools and procedures. Refer to the appropriate wiring information. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Trailer Lamps: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. 2. Reach behind the center of the rear bumper to access and disconnect the connector (2) of the body wire harness from the 7-way trailer tow connector (1). 3. Remove the four screws (3) that secure the 7-way trailer tow connector (2) to the tapping plate (4) behind the rear bumper. 4. Remove the 7-way trailer tow connector from the face of the rear bumper and the tapping plate from behind the rear bumper. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 15196 Trailer Lamps: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION 1. Position the 7-way trailer tow connector (2) into the mounting hole on the face of the rear bumper (1). 2. Position the tapping plate (4) over the 7-way trailer tow connector on the back of the rear bumper. 3. Install and tighten the four screws (3) that secure the 7-way trailer tow connector to the tapping plate. Tighten the screws to 2 Nm (17 in. lbs.). 4. Reach behind the center of the rear bumper to access and reconnect the connector (2) of the body wire harness to the 7-way trailer tow connector (1). 5. Reconnect the battery negative cable. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lighting Relay > Component Information > Locations Trailer Lighting Relay: Locations Dodge Ram Trucks, 2006-2009 all,Trailer Tow lamp relay is not serviceable. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lighting Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 15200 Trailer Lighting Relay: Diagrams Dodge Ram Trucks, 2006-2009 all, do not use a trailer tow relay. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Turn Signals > Combination Switch > Component Information > Locations Combination Switch: Locations Component ID: 495 Component : SWITCH-MULTIFUNCTION Connector: Name : SWITCH-MULTIFUNCTION Color : BLACK # of pins : 4 Pin Circuit Description 1 G194 20VT/LG WASH/BEAM SELECT SWITCH SIGNAL 2 L900 20WT/YL WIPER/TURN/BEAM SELECT SWITCH RETURN 3 L12 20WT/OR TURN LAMPS SWITCH SIGNAL 4 W52 20BR/YL INTERMITTENT WIPER SWITCH SIGNAL Component Location - 47 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Turn Signals > Combination Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 15205 Component Location - 42 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Turn Signals > Combination Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 15206 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Turn Signals > Combination Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 15207 Combination Switch: Diagrams Component ID: 495 Component : SWITCH-MULTIFUNCTION Connector: Name : SWITCH-MULTIFUNCTION Color : BLACK # of pins : 4 Pin Circuit Description 1 G194 20VT/LG WASH/BEAM SELECT SWITCH SIGNAL 2 L900 20WT/YL WIPER/TURN/BEAM SELECT SWITCH RETURN 3 L12 20WT/OR TURN LAMPS SWITCH SIGNAL 4 W52 20BR/YL INTERMITTENT WIPER SWITCH SIGNAL Component Location - 47 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Turn Signals > Combination Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 15208 Component Location - 42 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Turn Signals > Combination Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 15209 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Turn Signals > Combination Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Combination Switch: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The multi-function switch (3) is located on the steering column, just below the steering wheel. The only visible components of the multi-function switch are the control stalk (2) and control knob (1) that extend through the steering column shrouds on the left side of the column, and the hazard warning push button (4) that extends through the shroud on the top of the column. The remainder of the switch including its mounting provisions, its electrical connection, and the turn signal cancel actuator (5) are concealed beneath the shrouds. The switch housing and controls are constructed of molded black plastic. Each of the switch controls has white International Control and Display Symbol graphics applied to it, which clearly identify its many functions. Three integral locating posts on the switch housing, one on the top and two on the bottom, slide into channels in a receptacle on the left side of the multi-function switch mounting housing near the top of the steering column to ensure proper positioning of the switch. Then two screws secure the switch to the mounting housing. A single integral connector receptacle containing four terminal pins on the back of the switch housing connects the switch to the vehicle electrical system through a dedicated take out and connector of the instrument panel wire harness. The multi-function switch provides the vehicle operator with a control interface for the following functions: - Hazard Warning Control - The multi-function switch hazard warning push button provides two detent positions (ON and OFF) to control the hazard warning lamps. Headlamp Beam Selection - The multi-function switch control stalk provides detent switching for selection of the headlamp HIGH or LOW beams. There is also an intermediate momentary position that allows the headlamp high beam circuits to be momentarily flashed to provide an optical horn feature (sometimes referred to as flash-to-pass) as an optical signalling device. - Turn Signal Control - The multi-function switch control stalk provides momentary non-detent (lane change) switching or detent switching with automatic cancellation for both the left and right turn signal lamps. - Washer Control - The multi-function switch control knob provides a momentary WASH position for washer system operation. - Wiper Control - The multi-function switch control knob provides two continuous wipe switch positions, LOW speed or HIGH speed; and an intermittent wipe mode with five delay interval positions. The multi-function switch cannot be adjusted or repaired. If any function of the switch is ineffective, or if the switch is damaged, the entire switch must be replaced as a unit. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Turn Signals > Combination Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 15212 Combination Switch: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The multi-function switch uses resistor multiplexing to control the many functions and features it provides using only three hard wired output circuits. The switch receives a clean ground from the ElectroMechanical Instrument Cluster (EMIC) (also known as the Cab Compartment Node/CCN) on a multi-function switch return circuit. It then provides outputs to the EMIC on a wash/beam select switch signal circuit to control washer and headlamp beam selection, on an intermittent wiper switch signal circuit to control wipers, and on a turn lamps switch signal circuit to control turn signal and hazard warning functions. The multi-function switch operates as follows: - Hazard Warning Control - The hazard warning push button of the multi-function switch is depressed to activate the hazard warning system, and depressed again to turn the system OFF. When the push button is actuated, the multi-function switch provides an output to the EMIC, and the EMIC responds by sending electronic hazard switch status messages to the Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) over the Controller Area Network (CAN) data bus. The TIPM then energizes and flashes or de-energizes both the left and right turn signal circuits to provide the visual hazard warning. - Headlamp Beam Selection - The control stalk of the multi-function switch is pulled towards the steering wheel past a detent to actuate the integral beam select switch circuitry, or to an intermediate, momentary position before the detent to actuate the optical horn feature. Each time the control stalk is actuated to a detent position, the opposite headlamp beam from what is currently selected will be energized. Each time the control stalk is actuated to the momentary position with the headlamps turned OFF, the headlamp high beams will be illuminated for as long as the control stalk is held in this position. The multi-function switch provides an output to the EMIC, and the EMIC responds by sending electronic beam select switch status messages to the TIPM over the CAN data bus. The TIPM energizes or de-energizes the selected LOW or HIGH beam circuits. - Turn Signal Control - The control stalk of the multi-function switch is moved upward to activate the RIGHT turn signal circuitry, and, downward to activate the LEFT turn signal circuitry. The turn signal switch has a detent position in each direction that provides turn signals with automatic cancellation, and an intermediate, momentary position in each direction that automatically provides three turn signal blinks as a LANE CHANGE feature when the control stalk is tapped or will energize the turn signals for as long as the control stalk is held in the momentary position. When the control stalk is moved to a detent turn signal switch position, the cancel actuator extends toward the center of the steering column. A turn signal cancel cam that is integral to the clockspring rotates with the steering wheel and the cam lobes contact the cancel actuator when it is extended from the multi-function switch. When the steering wheel is rotated during a turning maneuver, one of the two turn signal cancel cam lobes will contact the turn signal cancel actuator. The cancel actuator latches against the cancel cam rotation in the direction opposite that which is signaled. If the LEFT turn signal detent is selected, the lobes of the cancel cam will ratchet past the cancel actuator when the steering wheel is rotated to the left, but will unlatch the cancel actuator as the steering wheel rotates to the right and returns to center, which will cancel the turn signal event and release the control stalk from the detent so it returns to the neutral OFF position. When a turn signal is activated, the multi-function switch provides an output to the EMIC, and the EMIC responds by sending electronic turn signal switch status messages to the TIPM over the CAN data bus. The TIPM energizes and flashes or de-energizes the selected left or right turn signal circuits. - Washer Control - The control knob on the end of the multi-function switch control stalk is depressed towards the steering column to momentarily activate the washer pump in the WASH mode. The washer pump will continue to operate in the washer mode until the control knob is released. The multi-function switch provides an output to the EMIC, and the EMIC responds by sending electronic washer switch status messages to the TIPM over the CAN data bus. The TIPM responds by energizing or de-energizing the washer pump in the washer mode. - Wiper Control - The control knob on the end of the multi-function switch control stalk is rotated to one of the continuous wiper detents, to one of five intermittent wiper detents, or to the OFF position to select the wiper mode. The multi-function switch provides an output to the EMIC, and the EMIC responds by sending electronic wiper switch status messages to the TIPM over the CAN data bus. The TIPM responds by energizing or de-energizing the wiper motor. The TIPM is programmed to operate the wiper motor at the selected low or high continuous wipe speed, and to provide the selected electronically controlled speed-sensitive intermittent wipe or wipe-after-wash mode features. The multi-function switch as well as the hard wired inputs and outputs of the switch may be diagnosed using conventional diagnostic tools and procedures. Refer to the appropriate wiring information. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Turn Signals > Combination Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 15213 Combination Switch: Testing and Inspection MULTI-FUNCTION SWITCH WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury on vehicles equipped with airbags, disable the Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, airbag, seat belt tensioner, impact sensor, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the SRS. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment. 1. Remove the multi-function switch from the switch mounting housing on the steering column. See: Service and Repair/Removal . 2. Disconnect the wire harness connector from the back of the multi-function switch. 3. Using an ohmmeter, test the resistance between the terminals of the switch as shown in the Multi-Function Switch Tests table. 4. If the switch fails any of the tests, replace the ineffective multi-function switch as required. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Turn Signals > Combination Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Combination Switch: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury on vehicles equipped with airbags, disable the Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, airbag, seat belt tensioner, impact sensor, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the SRS. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment. 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. 2. Remove the driver airbag from the steering wheel. See: Restraint Systems/Air Bag Systems/Air Bag/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Driver Airbag - Removal . 3. Disconnect the steering wheel wire harness connectors from the upper clockspring connector receptacles. CAUTION: Be certain that the screws that secure the steering wheel puller to the steering wheel are fully engaged in the steering wheel armature without passing through the steering wheel and damaging the clockspring. 4. Remove the steering wheel from the steering column. See: Steering and Suspension/Steering/Steering Wheel/Service and Repair/Removal . 5. Remove the screw (2) that secures the tilt steering column knob (1) and remove it from the tilt actuator (3) on the left side of the column. 6. From below the steering column, remove the two outboard screws that secure the upper column shroud (1) to the lower shroud (3). 7. Using hand pressure, press inward on both sides of the upper shroud above the parting line of the lower shroud to release the snap features that secure the two shroud halves to each other. 8. Remove the upper shroud from the lower shroud and the steering column. 9. Remove the one center screw that secures the lower shroud to the steering column (4). 10. Remove the lower shroud from the steering column. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Turn Signals > Combination Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 15216 11. Disconnect the wire harness connector (2) from the back of the multi-function switch housing (1). 12. Remove the two screws (4) that secure the switch to the multi-function switch mounting housing (3). 13. Grasp the switch control stalk and pull it toward the left side of the vehicle to remove the switch from the mounting housing. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Turn Signals > Combination Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 15217 Combination Switch: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury on vehicles equipped with airbags, disable the Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, airbag, seat belt tensioner, impact sensor, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the SRS. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment. 1. Slide the multi-function switch (1) into the multi-function switch mounting housing (3) from the left side. Be certain that the alignment pins on the top and bottom of the switch are properly engaged in the channels of the mounting housing. 2. Install and tighten the two screws (4) that secure the switch to the mounting housing. Tighten the screws to 2 Nm (20 in. lbs.). 3. Reconnect the wire harness connector (2) to the back of the switch housing. 4. Position the lower shroud (3) onto the steering column (4). 5. From below the steering column, install and tighten the one center screw that secures the lower shroud to the steering column. Tighten the screw to 2 Nm (20 in. lbs.). 6. Position the upper shroud (1) onto the steering column over the lower shroud. On vehicles equipped with an automatic transmission, be certain to engage the gearshift lever gap hider into the opening in the right side of both shroud halves. 7. Align the snap features on the upper shroud with the receptacles in the lower shroud and apply hand pressure to snap them together. 8. Install and tighten the two outboard screws that secure the upper shroud to the lower shroud. Tighten the screws to 2 Nm (20 in. lbs.). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Turn Signals > Combination Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 15218 9. Position the tilt steering column knob (1) onto the tilt adjuster actuator (3) on the left side of the steering column, then install and tighten the screw (2) to secure the knob to the actuator. Tighten the screw to 2 Nm (20 in. lbs.). NOTE: When reinstalling the steering wheel, be certain to index the yellow rubber booted engagement dowel on the upper surface of the clockspring rotor between the two fins cast into the lower surface of the steering wheel armature hub. 10. Reinstall the steering wheel onto the steering column. See: Steering and Suspension/Steering/Steering Wheel/Service and Repair/Installation . 11. Reconnect the steering wheel wire harness connectors to the upper clockspring connector receptacles. Be certain that the steering wheel wire harness is routed between the steering wheel back trim cover and the steering wheel armature. 12. Reinstall the driver airbag onto the steering wheel. See: Restraint Systems/Air Bag Systems/Air Bag/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Driver Airbag - Installation . 13. Reconnect the battery negative cable. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Turn Signals > Turn Signal Cancel Cam > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Turn Signal Cancel Cam: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The turn signal cancel cam (3) is concealed within the steering column. The turn signal cancel cam consists of two lobes on a molded plastic ring that is snapped into the lower hub of the clockspring rotor. The clockspring mechanism provides turn signal cancellation as well as a constant electrical connection between the horn switch, driver airbag, speed control switches, and remote radio switches on the steering wheel and the instrument panel wire harness on the steering column. The housing of the clockspring (2) is secured to the multi-function switch mounting housing on the steering column and remains stationary. The rotor of the clockspring, including the turn signal cancel cam lobes rotate with the steering wheel. The turn signal cancel cam is serviced as a unit with the clockspring and cannot be repaired. If ineffective or damaged, the entire clockspring unit must be replaced. See: Restraint Systems/Air Bag Systems/Clockspring Assembly / Spiral Cable/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Removal . Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Turn Signals > Turn Signal Cancel Cam > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 15223 Turn Signal Cancel Cam: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION When the multi-function switch control stalk is moved to a latched turn signal position, a turn signal cancel actuator is extended from the inside surface of the switch housing toward the turn signal cancel cam. As the steering wheel is rotated to complete the turn, one of the two cam lobes will contact the actuator, automatically cancelling the turn signal event and releasing the latched multi-function switch control stalk to the neutral (OFF) position. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Turn Signals > Turn Signal Flasher > Component Information > Description and Operation Turn Signal Flasher: Description and Operation Dodge Ram Trucks, 2004-2009 All, do not use a turn signal flasher relay. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Turn Signals > Turn Signal Indicator > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Turn Signal Indicator: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION Two turn signal indicators, one right and one left, are standard equipment on all instrument clusters. The turn signal indicators are located near the upper edge of the instrument cluster, the left indicator to the left of the tachometer and the right indicator to the right of the speedometer. Each turn signal indicator consists of a stencil-like cutout of the International Control and Display Symbol icon for Turn Warning in the opaque layer of the instrument cluster overlay. The dark outer layer of the overlay prevents these indicators from being clearly visible when they are not illuminated. A green Light Emitting Diode (LED) behind each cutout in the opaque layer of the overlay causes each indicator to appear in green through the translucent outer layer of the overlay when it is illuminated from behind by the LED, which is soldered onto the instrument cluster electronic circuit board. The turn signal indicators are serviced as a unit with the instrument cluster. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Turn Signals > Turn Signal Indicator > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 15231 Turn Signal Indicator: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The turn signal indicators give an indication to the vehicle operator that the turn signal (left or right indicator flashing) or hazard warning (both left and right indicators flashing) have been selected and are operating. These indicators are controlled by transistors on the instrument cluster electronic circuit board based upon cluster programming, a hard wired multiplex input received by the cluster from the turn signal and hazard warning switch circuitry of the multi-function switch on the turn/hazard switch mux circuit, and electronic messages received from the Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) over the Controller Area Network (CAN) data bus. Each turn signal indicator Light Emitting Diode (LED) is completely controlled by the instrument cluster logic circuit, and that logic will allow this indicator to operate whenever the instrument cluster receives a battery current input on the fused B(+) circuit. Therefore, each LED can be illuminated regardless of the ignition switch position. The LED only illuminates when it is provided a path to ground by the instrument cluster transistor. The instrument cluster will turn ON the turn signal indicators for the following reasons: - Turn Signal-On Input - Each time the cluster detects a turn signal-ON input from the turn signal switch circuitry of the multi-function switch on the turn/hazard switch mux circuit, it sends the appropriate electronic turn signal switch status messages to the TIPM over the CAN data bus. The TIPM responds to these messages by controlling a battery voltage output and the flash rate for either the right or left turn signal lamps. The TIPM also sends the appropriate electronic messages back to the cluster to control the flash rate of the turn signal indicators, as well as to control the click rate of an electromechanical relay soldered onto the cluster electronic circuit board that emulates the sound emitted by a conventional turn signal flasher. The turn signal indicators continue to flash ON and OFF until the cluster receives a turn signal-OFF input from the multi-function switch, or until the ignition switch is turned to the OFF position, whichever occurs first. - Hazard Warning-On Input - Each time the cluster detects a hazard warning-ON input from the hazard warning switch circuitry of the multi-function switch on the turn/hazard switch mux circuit, it sends the appropriate electronic hazard switch status messages to the TIPM over the CAN data bus. The TIPM responds to these messages by controlling a battery voltage output and the flash rate for each of the right and left turn signal lamps. The TIPM also sends the appropriate electronic messages back to the cluster to control the flash rate of the turn signal indicators , as well as to control the click rate of an electromechanical relay soldered onto the cluster electronic circuit board that emulates the sound emitted by a conventional hazard warning flasher. The turn signal indicators continue to flash ON and OFF until the cluster receives a hazard warning-OFF input from the multi-function switch. - Lamp Out Mode - If the TIPM detects an ineffective turn signal lamp or circuit, it increases the flash rate for the remaining operative turn signals and sends an electronic message to the instrument cluster. The instrument cluster then increases the flash rate of the turn signal indicators and the click rate of the electromechanical relay to provide an indication of the problem to the vehicle operator. - Actuator Test - Each time the cluster is put through the actuator test, the turn signal indicators will be turned ON, then OFF again during the bulb check portion of the test to confirm the functionality of each LED and the cluster control circuitry. The ElectroMechanical Instrument Cluster (EMIC) (also known as the Cab Compartment Node/CCN) continually monitors the multi-function switch and electronic messages from the TIPM to determine the proper turn signal and hazard warning indicator operation. For further diagnosis of the turn signal indicators or the instrument cluster circuitry that controls the indicators, Refer to appropriate testing. For proper diagnosis of the turn signal and hazard warning system, the multi-function switch, the TIPM, the EMIC, the CAN data bus or the electronic communication related to turn signal indicator operation a diagnostic scan tool is required. Refer to the appropriate diagnostic information. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Turn Signals > Turn Signal Lamp > Turn Signal Bulb > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Lamp Unit Turn Signal Bulb: Service and Repair Front Lamp Unit Removal BULB - PARK/TURN SIGNAL 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. 2. Remove the front lamp unit (1) from the front fender. See: Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Front Lamp Unit - Removal . 3. Firmly grasp the park/turn signal bulb socket (3) on the back of the front lamp unit housing and rotate it counterclockwise about 30 degrees to unlock it. 4. Pull the socket and bulb straight out from the keyed opening in the housing. 5. Pull the base of the bulb (2) straight out of the socket (1). Installation BULB - PARK/TURN SIGNAL CAUTION: Always use the correct bulb size and type for replacement. An incorrect bulb size or type may overheat and cause damage to the lamp, the socket or the lamp wiring. 1. Align the base of the bulb (2) with the park/turn signal bulb socket (1). 2. Push the bulb straight into the socket until the base is firmly seated. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Turn Signals > Turn Signal Lamp > Turn Signal Bulb > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Lamp Unit > Page 15237 3. Align the socket and bulb (3) with the keyed opening on the back of the front lamp unit housing (1). 4. Insert the socket and bulb into the housing until the socket is firmly seated. 5. Rotate the socket clockwise about 30 degrees to lock it into place. 6. Reinstall the front lamp unit onto the front fender. See: Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Front Lamp Unit - Installation . 7. Reconnect the battery negative cable. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Turn Signals > Turn Signal Lamp > Turn Signal Bulb > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Lamp Unit > Page 15238 Turn Signal Bulb: Service and Repair Tail/Stop/Turn Lamp Bulb - Cab and Chassis BULB - CAB AND CHASSIS NOTE: The rear lamp unit contains two bulbs: the park/turn signal/brake/license plate, and the backup. The service procedures for each bulb are the same, only the bulb sizes and types may differ. 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. 2. Remove the four screws (1) that secure the lens (2) to the rear lamp unit housing (5). 3. Push the backup lamp bulb (4), or the park/turn signal/brake/license plate bulb (7) slightly into its socket (3) or (6), then rotate the bulb counterclockwise about 30 degrees to unlock it. 4. Pull the base of the bulb straight out of the socket. Bulb - Pick-Up BULB - PICK-UP NOTE: The rear lamp unit contains two bulbs: park/stop/turn signal/side marker and backup. The service procedures for each bulb are the same, only the bulb sizes and types may differ. 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. 2. Remove the rear lamp unit (1) from the end of the quarter panel. See: Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Rear Lamp Unit Removal . 3. Disconnect the wire harness connector (3) from the park/stop/turn signal/side marker (2) or the backup (4) bulb socket on the back of the lamp housing. 4. Firmly grasp the socket on the back of the housing and rotate it counterclockwise about 30 degrees to unlock it. 5. Pull the socket and bulb straight out from the keyed opening in the housing. 6. Pull the base of the bulb straight out of the socket. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Turn Signals > Turn Signal Lamp > Turn Signal Bulb > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Lamp Unit > Page 15239 Bulb - Cab and Chassis BULB - CAB AND CHASSIS CAUTION: Always use the correct bulb size and type for replacement. An incorrect bulb size or type may overheat and cause damage to the lamp, the socket or the lamp wiring. NOTE: The rear lamp unit contains two bulbs: the park/turn signal/brake/license plate, and the backup. The service procedures for each bulb are the same, only the bulb sizes and types may differ. 1. Align the base of the backup lamp bulb (4), or the park/turn signal/brake/license plate lamp bulb (7) with its socket (3) or (6). 2. Push the bulb straight into the socket until the base is firmly seated, then rotate the bulb clockwise about 30 degrees to lock it into place. 3. Position the lens (2) to the rear lamp unit housing (5). 4. Install and tighten the four screws (1) that secure the lens to the housing. Tighten the screws to 2 Nm (20 in. lbs.). 5. Reconnect the battery negative cable. Bulb - Pick-Up BULB - PICK-UP CAUTION: Always use the correct bulb size and type for replacement. An incorrect bulb size or type may overheat and cause damage to the lamp, the socket or the lamp wiring. NOTE: The rear lamp unit contains two bulbs: park/stop/turn signal/side marker and backup. The service procedures for each bulb are the same, only the bulb sizes and types may differ. 1. Align the base of the bulb with the park/stop/turn signal/side marker (2) or the backup (4) bulb socket. 2. Push the bulb straight into the socket until the base is firmly seated. 3. Align the socket and bulb with the keyed opening on the back of the rear lamp unit housing (1). 4. Insert the socket and bulb into the housing until the socket is firmly seated. 5. Rotate the socket clockwise about 30 degrees to lock it into place. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Turn Signals > Turn Signal Lamp > Turn Signal Bulb > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Lamp Unit > Page 15240 6. Reconnect the wire harness connector (3) to the socket. 7. Reinstall the rear lamp unit onto the end of the quarter panel. See: Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Rear Lamp Unit Installation . 8. Reconnect the battery negative cable. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Underhood Lamp > Underhood Light Bulb > Component Information > Service and Repair > Underhood Lamp Bulb - Removal Underhood Light Bulb: Service and Repair Underhood Lamp Bulb - Removal BULB 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. 2. Insert a small flat bladed tool in the access slot between the underhood lamp housing (1) and the lamp lens (2). 3. Gently pry the lens until it unsnaps from the lamp housing. 4. Depress the bulb holder (2) inward far enough to disengage the terminal loops (3) of the bulb (1) and remove the bulb from the lamp housing (4). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Underhood Lamp > Underhood Light Bulb > Component Information > Service and Repair > Underhood Lamp Bulb - Removal > Page 15246 Underhood Light Bulb: Service and Repair Underhood Lamp Bulb - Installation BULB CAUTION: Always use the correct bulb size and type for replacement. An incorrect bulb size or type may overheat and cause damage to the lamp, the socket or the lamp wiring. 1. Engage one of the terminal loops (3) of the bulb (1) over the bulb holder closest to the connector receptacle of the underhood lamp housing (4). 2. Depress the other bulb holder (2) inward far enough to engage the remaining bulb terminal loop. 3. Position the lens (2) over the lamp housing and use hand pressure to press the lens firmly and evenly onto the housing until it snaps into place. 4. Reconnect the battery negative cable. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Vanity Lamp > Component Information > Locations > Lamp-Vanity-Left Vanity Lamp: Locations Lamp-Vanity-Left Component ID: 186 Component : LAMP-VANITY-LEFT Connector: Name : LAMP-VANITY-LEFT Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (LIGHT PACKAGE) A M288 20YL/GY READING LAMPS DRIVER B Z964 20BK GROUND Component Location - 53 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Vanity Lamp > Component Information > Locations > Lamp-Vanity-Left > Page 15251 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Vanity Lamp > Component Information > Locations > Lamp-Vanity-Left > Page 15252 Vanity Lamp: Locations Lamp-Vanity-Right Component ID: 187 Component : LAMP-VANITY-RIGHT Connector: Name : LAMP-VANITY-RIGHT Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (LIGHT PACKAGE) A M288 20YL/GY READING LAMPS DRIVER B Z964 20BK GROUND Component Location - 53 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Vanity Lamp > Component Information > Locations > Lamp-Vanity-Left > Page 15253 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Vanity Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Lamp-Vanity-Left Vanity Lamp: Diagrams Lamp-Vanity-Left Component ID: 186 Component : LAMP-VANITY-LEFT Connector: Name : LAMP-VANITY-LEFT Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (LIGHT PACKAGE) A M288 20YL/GY READING LAMPS DRIVER B Z964 20BK GROUND Component Location - 53 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Vanity Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Lamp-Vanity-Left > Page 15256 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Vanity Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Lamp-Vanity-Left > Page 15257 Vanity Lamp: Diagrams Lamp-Vanity-Right Component ID: 187 Component : LAMP-VANITY-RIGHT Connector: Name : LAMP-VANITY-RIGHT Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (LIGHT PACKAGE) A M288 20YL/GY READING LAMPS DRIVER B Z964 20BK GROUND Component Location - 53 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Vanity Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Lamp-Vanity-Left > Page 15258 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Vanity Lamp > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal - Bulb Vanity Lamp: Service and Repair Removal - Bulb REMOVAL - BULB NOTE: Vehicles equipped with optional vanity lamps have a mirror with a single lamp that is integral to each sun visor. Each lamp is independently controlled by an integral switch that is automatically actuated by the mirror cover. The bulb types and service procedures are identical for each of these lamps. 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. 2. Insert a small flat-bladed screwdriver on either side near the top or the bottom between the vanity lamp lens (2) and the lamp housing of the sun visor (1). 3. Carefully pry the lens outward until it unsnaps from the lamp housing. 4. Using small needle-nose pliers, carefully grasp the bulb (2) and pull the base out of the lamp socket. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Vanity Lamp > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal - Bulb > Page 15261 Vanity Lamp: Service and Repair Installation - Bulb INSTALLATION - BULB CAUTION: Always use the correct bulb size and type for replacement. An incorrect bulb size or type may overheat and cause damage to the lamp, the socket or the lamp wiring. NOTE: Vehicles equipped with optional vanity lamps have a mirror with a single lamp that is integral to each sun visor. Each lamp is independently controlled by an integral switch that is automatically actuated by the mirror cover. The bulb types and service procedures are identical for each of these lamps. 1. Using small needle-nose pliers, carefully grasp the vanity lamp bulb (2) and align the base of the bulb with the socket in the lamp housing of the sun visor (1). 2. Push the bulb straight into the socket until the base is fully seated. 3. Insert one tab on the top or the bottom of the lens (2) into the appropriate slot at the top or bottom of the lamp housing. 4. Flex the lens far enough to engage the loose tab into its slot in the lamp housing. 5. Reconnect the battery negative cable. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Heated Glass Element > Heated Glass Element Relay > Component Information > Locations Heated Glass Element Relay: Locations Dodge Ram Trucks 2006-2009, do not use a heated window relay. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Heated Glass Element > Heated Glass Element Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 15267 Heated Glass Element Relay: Description and Operation Dodge Ram Trucks 2006-2009, do not use a heated window relay. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Heated Glass Element > Heated Glass Element Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Heated Glass Element Switch: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The switch for the rear window defogger (EBL) system (1) is integrated into the A/C-heater control (2), which is located in the center of the instrument panel. When the rear window defogger switch is pressed to ON, a request signal is sent on the CAN-B Bus to the totally integrated power module (TIPM) to operate the EBL system. When the high side driver in the totally integrated power module (TIPM) is energized, current is directed to the rear defogger grid lines and to the heated side view mirrors. The grid lines heat the glass to help clear the surface of fog or frost. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Heated Glass Element > Heated Glass Element Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 15272 Heated Glass Element Switch: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION An amber indicator will illuminate when the rear window defogger switch is activated. When activated, the switch sends a request signal to the to the totally integrated power module (TIPM) to energize the internal EBL high side driver to provide battery current to the rear window defogger grid lines and to the heated side view mirrors. NOTE: The EBL system turns off automatically after 15 minutes of initial operation. Each following activation cycle of the EBL system will last 10 minutes. The EBL system will be automatically turned off after an initial programmed time interval of about 15 minutes, as long as the ignition switch is in RUN. After the initial time interval has expired, if the rear window defogger switch is pressed to ON again during the same ignition cycle, the EBL system will automatically turn off after about 10 minutes. The EBL system will automatically shut off if the ignition switch is turned to any position other than RUN, or it can be turned off manually by pressing the rear window defogger switch a second time. The rear window defogger switch is diagnosed using a scan tool. The rear window defogger switch and the rear window defogger indicator cannot be repaired and the A/C-heater control must be replaced if found inoperative or damaged See: Heating and Air Conditioning/Control Assembly/Service and Repair/A/C Heater Control - Removal . Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Rear Defogger > Rear Defogger Relay > Component Information > Locations Rear Defogger Relay: Locations Dodge Ram Trucks 2006-2009, do not use a heated window relay. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Rear Defogger > Rear Defogger Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 15277 Rear Defogger Relay: Description and Operation Dodge Ram Trucks 2006-2009, do not use a heated window relay. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Relays and Modules - Windows and Glass > Heated Glass Element Relay > Component Information > Locations Heated Glass Element Relay: Locations Dodge Ram Trucks 2006-2009, do not use a heated window relay. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Relays and Modules - Windows and Glass > Heated Glass Element Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 15282 Heated Glass Element Relay: Description and Operation Dodge Ram Trucks 2006-2009, do not use a heated window relay. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Relays and Modules - Windows and Glass > Rear Defogger Relay > Component Information > Locations Rear Defogger Relay: Locations Dodge Ram Trucks 2006-2009, do not use a heated window relay. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Relays and Modules - Windows and Glass > Rear Defogger Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 15286 Rear Defogger Relay: Description and Operation Dodge Ram Trucks 2006-2009, do not use a heated window relay. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Heated Glass Element Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Heated Glass Element Switch: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The switch for the rear window defogger (EBL) system (1) is integrated into the A/C-heater control (2), which is located in the center of the instrument panel. When the rear window defogger switch is pressed to ON, a request signal is sent on the CAN-B Bus to the totally integrated power module (TIPM) to operate the EBL system. When the high side driver in the totally integrated power module (TIPM) is energized, current is directed to the rear defogger grid lines and to the heated side view mirrors. The grid lines heat the glass to help clear the surface of fog or frost. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Heated Glass Element Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 15292 Heated Glass Element Switch: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION An amber indicator will illuminate when the rear window defogger switch is activated. When activated, the switch sends a request signal to the to the totally integrated power module (TIPM) to energize the internal EBL high side driver to provide battery current to the rear window defogger grid lines and to the heated side view mirrors. NOTE: The EBL system turns off automatically after 15 minutes of initial operation. Each following activation cycle of the EBL system will last 10 minutes. The EBL system will be automatically turned off after an initial programmed time interval of about 15 minutes, as long as the ignition switch is in RUN. After the initial time interval has expired, if the rear window defogger switch is pressed to ON again during the same ignition cycle, the EBL system will automatically turn off after about 10 minutes. The EBL system will automatically shut off if the ignition switch is turned to any position other than RUN, or it can be turned off manually by pressing the rear window defogger switch a second time. The rear window defogger switch is diagnosed using a scan tool. The rear window defogger switch and the rear window defogger indicator cannot be repaired and the A/C-heater control must be replaced if found inoperative or damaged See: Heating and Air Conditioning/Control Assembly/Service and Repair/A/C Heater Control - Removal . Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Locations > Switch-Power Sliding Backlite Power Window Switch: Locations Switch-Power Sliding Backlite Component ID: 499 Component : SWITCH-POWER SLIDING BACKLITE Connector: Name : SWITCH-POWER SLIDING BACKLITE Color : BLACK # of pins : 8 Qualifier : (QUAD CAB/EXCEPT BASE) Pin Circuit Description 1-2 Z974 12BK GROUND 3 Z975 12BK GROUND 4 F30 12PK/YL FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-ACC) 5 Q950 12OR/LG POWER BACKLITE OPEN (+) 6 P301 20LG/OR PANEL LAMPS DRIVER 7 Z976 20BK GROUND 8 Q951 12OR/VT POWER BACKLITE OPEN (-) Component Location - 47 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Locations > Switch-Power Sliding Backlite > Page 15297 Component Location - 45 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Locations > Switch-Power Sliding Backlite > Page 15298 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Locations > Switch-Power Sliding Backlite > Page 15299 Power Window Switch: Locations Switch-Power Window-Left Rear Component ID: 500 Component : SWITCH-POWER WINDOW-LEFT REAR Connector: Name : SWITCH-POWER WINDOW-LEFT REAR Color : BLUE # of pins : 6 Pin Circuit Description 1 Q111 14TN/YL DRIVER REAR WINDOW DRIVER (UP) Pin Circuit Description 1 Q211 14TN/LB DRIVER REAR WINDOW DRIVER (DOWN) 2 Q611 14OR/GY LEFT REAR WINDOW DRIVER (DOWN) 3-4 Q411 14OR/WT LEFT REAR WINDOW DRIVER (UP) 5 Q211 14TN/LB DRIVER REAR WINDOW DRIVER (DOWN) 5 Q111 14TN/YL DRIVER REAR WINDOW DRIVER (UP) 6 Q15 14OR/LB POWER WINDOW SWITCH FEED Component Location - 57 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Locations > Switch-Power Sliding Backlite > Page 15300 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Locations > Switch-Power Sliding Backlite > Page 15301 Power Window Switch: Locations Switch-Power Window-Passenger Component ID: 501 Component : SWITCH-POWER WINDOW-PASSENGER Connector: Name : SWITCH-POWER WINDOW-PASSENGER Color : BLUE # of pins : 6 Pin Circuit Description 1 Q12 12OR/BR RIGHT FRONT WINDOW DRIVER (UP) 2 Q26 12OR/GY MASTER WINDOW SWITCH RIGHT FRONT (DOWN) 3-4 Q16 12OR/TN MASTER WINDOW SWITCH RIGHT FRONT (UP) 5 Q22 12OR/VT RIGHT FRONT WINDOW DRIVER (DOWN) 6 Q15 12OR/LB POWER WINDOW SWITCH FEED Component Location - 56 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Locations > Switch-Power Sliding Backlite > Page 15302 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Locations > Switch-Power Sliding Backlite > Page 15303 Power Window Switch: Locations Switch-Power Window-Right Rear Component ID: 502 Component : SWITCH-POWER WINDOW-RIGHT REAR Connector: Name : SWITCH-POWER WINDOW-RIGHT REAR Color : BLUE # of pins : 6 Pin Circuit Description 1 Q112 14TN/YL PASSENGER REAR WINDOW DRIVER (UP) Pin Circuit Description 1 Q212 14TN/LB PASSENGER REAR WINDOW DRIVER (DOWN) 2 Q612 14OR/GY RIGHT REAR WINDOW DRIVER (DOWN) 3-4 Q412 14OR/WT RIGHT REAR WINDOW DRIVER (UP) 5 Q212 14TN/LB PASSENGER REAR WINDOW DRIVER (DOWN) 5 Q112 14TN/YL PASSENGER REAR WINDOW DRIVER (UP) 6 Q15 14TN/LG POWER WINDOW SWITCH FEED Component Location - 57 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Locations > Switch-Power Sliding Backlite > Page 15304 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Locations > Switch-Power Sliding Backlite > Page 15305 Power Window Switch: Locations Switch-Window/Door Lock-Driver Component ID: 518 Component : SWITCH-WINDOW/DOOR LOCK-DRIVER Connector: Name : SWITCH-WINDOW/DOOR LOCK-DRIVER C1 Color : BLUE # of pins : 12 Pin Circuit Description 1 Q612 14OR/DB RIGHT REAR WINDOW DRIVER (DOWN) 2 Q412 14OR/LB RIGHT REAR WINDOW DRIVER (UP) 3 Q16 12OR/TN MASTER WINDOW SWITCH RIGHT FRONT (UP) 4 Q411 14OR/WT LEFT REAR WINDOW DRIVER (UP) 5 Q11 14OR/LG LEFT FRONT WINDOW DRIVER (UP) 6 Q26 12OR/GY MASTER WINDOW SWITCH RIGHT FRONT (DOWN) 7 G161 20VT/DG DRIVER DOOR LOCK SWITCH MUX 8 Z939 12BK GROUND 9 F30 12PK/YL FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-ACC) 10 Q611 14OR/GY LEFT REAR WINDOW DRIVER (DOWN) 11 Z939 18BK GROUND 12 Q21 14OR/WT LEFT FRONT WINDOW DRIVER (DOWN) Component Location - 55 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Locations > Switch-Power Sliding Backlite > Page 15306 Connector: Name : SWITCH-WINDOW/DOOR LOCK-DRIVER C2 Color : BLUE # of pins : 8 Pin Circuit Description 1 P71 20TN/DG LEFT MIRROR UP DRIVER 2 P195 18LG/YL LEFT MIRROR COMMON DRIVER (RIGHT/DOWN) 3 A940 18RD FUSED B(+) 4 P74 18TN/OR RIGHT MIRROR LEFT DRIVER 5 Z939 18BK GROUND Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Locations > Switch-Power Sliding Backlite > Page 15307 6 P75 20TN/LG LEFT MIRROR LEFT DRIVER 7 P72 18TN/GY RIGHT MIRROR UP DRIVER 8 Q15 12OR/LB WINDOW LOCK OUT SWITCH OUTPUT Component Location - 55 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Switch-Power Sliding Backlite Power Window Switch: Diagrams Switch-Power Sliding Backlite Component ID: 499 Component : SWITCH-POWER SLIDING BACKLITE Connector: Name : SWITCH-POWER SLIDING BACKLITE Color : BLACK # of pins : 8 Qualifier : (QUAD CAB/EXCEPT BASE) Pin Circuit Description 1-2 Z974 12BK GROUND 3 Z975 12BK GROUND 4 F30 12PK/YL FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-ACC) 5 Q950 12OR/LG POWER BACKLITE OPEN (+) 6 P301 20LG/OR PANEL LAMPS DRIVER 7 Z976 20BK GROUND 8 Q951 12OR/VT POWER BACKLITE OPEN (-) Component Location - 47 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Switch-Power Sliding Backlite > Page 15310 Component Location - 45 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Switch-Power Sliding Backlite > Page 15311 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Switch-Power Sliding Backlite > Page 15312 Power Window Switch: Diagrams Switch-Power Window-Left Rear Component ID: 500 Component : SWITCH-POWER WINDOW-LEFT REAR Connector: Name : SWITCH-POWER WINDOW-LEFT REAR Color : BLUE # of pins : 6 Pin Circuit Description 1 Q111 14TN/YL DRIVER REAR WINDOW DRIVER (UP) Pin Circuit Description 1 Q211 14TN/LB DRIVER REAR WINDOW DRIVER (DOWN) 2 Q611 14OR/GY LEFT REAR WINDOW DRIVER (DOWN) 3-4 Q411 14OR/WT LEFT REAR WINDOW DRIVER (UP) 5 Q211 14TN/LB DRIVER REAR WINDOW DRIVER (DOWN) 5 Q111 14TN/YL DRIVER REAR WINDOW DRIVER (UP) 6 Q15 14OR/LB POWER WINDOW SWITCH FEED Component Location - 57 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Switch-Power Sliding Backlite > Page 15313 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Switch-Power Sliding Backlite > Page 15314 Power Window Switch: Diagrams Switch-Power Window-Passenger Component ID: 501 Component : SWITCH-POWER WINDOW-PASSENGER Connector: Name : SWITCH-POWER WINDOW-PASSENGER Color : BLUE # of pins : 6 Pin Circuit Description 1 Q12 12OR/BR RIGHT FRONT WINDOW DRIVER (UP) 2 Q26 12OR/GY MASTER WINDOW SWITCH RIGHT FRONT (DOWN) 3-4 Q16 12OR/TN MASTER WINDOW SWITCH RIGHT FRONT (UP) 5 Q22 12OR/VT RIGHT FRONT WINDOW DRIVER (DOWN) 6 Q15 12OR/LB POWER WINDOW SWITCH FEED Component Location - 56 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Switch-Power Sliding Backlite > Page 15315 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Switch-Power Sliding Backlite > Page 15316 Power Window Switch: Diagrams Switch-Power Window-Right Rear Component ID: 502 Component : SWITCH-POWER WINDOW-RIGHT REAR Connector: Name : SWITCH-POWER WINDOW-RIGHT REAR Color : BLUE # of pins : 6 Pin Circuit Description 1 Q112 14TN/YL PASSENGER REAR WINDOW DRIVER (UP) Pin Circuit Description 1 Q212 14TN/LB PASSENGER REAR WINDOW DRIVER (DOWN) 2 Q612 14OR/GY RIGHT REAR WINDOW DRIVER (DOWN) 3-4 Q412 14OR/WT RIGHT REAR WINDOW DRIVER (UP) 5 Q212 14TN/LB PASSENGER REAR WINDOW DRIVER (DOWN) 5 Q112 14TN/YL PASSENGER REAR WINDOW DRIVER (UP) 6 Q15 14TN/LG POWER WINDOW SWITCH FEED Component Location - 57 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Switch-Power Sliding Backlite > Page 15317 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Switch-Power Sliding Backlite > Page 15318 Power Window Switch: Diagrams Switch-Window/Door Lock-Driver Component ID 479 Component ID: 479 Component : SWITCH-WINDOW/DOOR LOCK-DRIVER Connector: Name : SWITCH-WINDOW/DOOR LOCK-DRIVER C1 Color : BLUE # of pins : 12 Pin Circuit Description 1 Q612 14OR/DB RIGHT REAR WINDOW DRIVER (DOWN) 2 Q412 14OR/LB RIGHT REAR WINDOW DRIVER (UP) 3 Q16 12OR/TN MASTER WINDOW SWITCH RIGHT FRONT (UP) 4 Q411 14OR/WT LEFT REAR WINDOW DRIVER (UP) 5 Q11 14OR/LG LEFT FRONT WINDOW DRIVER (UP) 6 Q26 12OR/GY MASTER WINDOW SWITCH RIGHT FRONT (DOWN) 7 G161 20VT/DG DRIVER DOOR LOCK SWITCH MUX 8 Z939 12BK GROUND 9 F30 12PK/YL FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-ACC) 10 Q611 14OR/GY LEFT REAR WINDOW DRIVER (DOWN) 11 Z939 18BK GROUND 12 Q21 14OR/WT LEFT FRONT WINDOW DRIVER (DOWN) Connector: Name : SWITCH-WINDOW/DOOR LOCK-DRIVER C2 Color : BLUE # of pins : 8 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Switch-Power Sliding Backlite > Page 15319 Pin Circuit Description 1 P71 20TN/DG LEFT MIRROR UP DRIVER 2 P195 18LG/YL LEFT MIRROR COMMON DRIVER (RIGHT/DOWN) 3 A940 18RD FUSED B(+) 4 P74 18TN/OR RIGHT MIRROR LEFT DRIVER 5 Z939 18BK GROUND 6 P75 20TN/LG LEFT MIRROR LEFT DRIVER 7 P72 18TN/GY RIGHT MIRROR UP DRIVER 8 Q15 12OR/LB WINDOW LOCK OUT SWITCH OUTPUT Component ID 518 Component ID: 518 Component : SWITCH-WINDOW/DOOR LOCK-DRIVER Connector: Name : SWITCH-WINDOW/DOOR LOCK-DRIVER C1 Color : BLUE # of pins : 12 Pin Circuit Description 1 Q612 14OR/DB RIGHT REAR WINDOW DRIVER (DOWN) 2 Q412 14OR/LB RIGHT REAR WINDOW DRIVER (UP) 3 Q16 12OR/TN MASTER WINDOW SWITCH RIGHT FRONT (UP) 4 Q411 14OR/WT LEFT REAR WINDOW DRIVER (UP) 5 Q11 14OR/LG LEFT FRONT WINDOW DRIVER (UP) 6 Q26 12OR/GY MASTER WINDOW SWITCH RIGHT FRONT (DOWN) Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Switch-Power Sliding Backlite > Page 15320 7 G161 20VT/DG DRIVER DOOR LOCK SWITCH MUX 8 Z939 12BK GROUND 9 F30 12PK/YL FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-ACC) 10 Q611 14OR/GY LEFT REAR WINDOW DRIVER (DOWN) 11 Z939 18BK GROUND 12 Q21 14OR/WT LEFT FRONT WINDOW DRIVER (DOWN) Component Location - 55 Connector: Name : SWITCH-WINDOW/DOOR LOCK-DRIVER C2 Color : BLUE # of pins : 8 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Switch-Power Sliding Backlite > Page 15321 Pin Circuit Description 1 P71 20TN/DG LEFT MIRROR UP DRIVER 2 P195 18LG/YL LEFT MIRROR COMMON DRIVER (RIGHT/DOWN) 3 A940 18RD FUSED B(+) 4 P74 18TN/OR RIGHT MIRROR LEFT DRIVER 5 Z939 18BK GROUND 6 P75 20TN/LG LEFT MIRROR LEFT DRIVER 7 P72 18TN/GY RIGHT MIRROR UP DRIVER 8 Q15 12OR/LB WINDOW LOCK OUT SWITCH OUTPUT Component Location - 55 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Switch-Power Sliding Backlite > Page 15322 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 15323 Power Window Switch: Testing and Inspection WINDOW SWITCH The Light-Emitting Diode (LED) illumination lamps for all of the power window and lock switch and bezel unit switch paddles receive battery current through the power window circuit breaker in the junction block. If all of the LEDs are inoperative in both the power window and lock switch units and the power windows are inoperative. See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code Tests and Associated Procedures If the power windows operate, but any or all of the LEDs are inoperative, the power window and lock switch units with the inoperative LED(s) is faulty and must be replaced. For complete circuit diagrams, refer to the appropriate wiring information. 1. Check the fuse in the Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) and the circuit breaker located near the park brake pedal. If OK, go to STEP 2. If not OK, replace the faulty fuse or circuit breaker. 2. Turn the ignition switch to the On position. Check for battery voltage at the fuse in the Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM). If OK, turn the ignition switch to the Off position and go to STEP 3. If not OK, check circuit breaker and repair the circuit to the ignition switch as required. 3. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. Remove the power window switch unit from the door trim panel (passenger doors). The drivers door switch is included with the window/lock switch See: Body and Frame/Locks/Power Locks/Power Door Lock Switch/Testing and Inspection/Diagnosis and Testing for service procedures. Unplug the wire harness connector from the switch unit. 4. Test the power window switch continuity. See the Power Window Switch Continuity charts to determine if the continuity is correct in the Off, Up and Down switch positions. If OK, See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code Tests and Associated Procedures . If not OK, replace the faulty switch. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Power Window Switch: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL FRONT PASSENGER 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. 2. Remove the door trim panel. See: Body and Frame/Doors, Hood and Trunk/Doors/Front Door/Front Door Panel/Service and Repair/Front Door Trim Panel - Removal 3. Remove the switch from the trim panel bezel. REAR PASSENGER 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. 2. Remove the door trim panel. See: Body and Frame/Doors, Hood and Trunk/Doors/Rear Door/Rear Door Panel/Service and Repair/Rear Door Trim Panel - Removal 3. Gently pry switch from door trim panel. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 15326 Power Window Switch: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION FRONT PASSENGER 1. Insert switch to trim panel bezel. 2. Install door trim panel. See: Body and Frame/Doors, Hood and Trunk/Doors/Front Door/Front Door Panel/Service and Repair/Front Door Trim Panel - Installation 3. Connect battery negative cable. REAR PASSENGER 1. Install switch to door trim panel 2. Install door trim panel. See: Body and Frame/Doors, Hood and Trunk/Doors/Rear Door/Rear Door Panel/Service and Repair/Rear Door Trim Panel - Installation 3. Connect battery negative cable. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Motor > Component Information > Locations > Motor-Power Sliding Backlite Power Window Motor: Locations Motor-Power Sliding Backlite Component ID: 222 Component : MOTOR-POWER SLIDING BACKLITE Connector: Name : MOTOR-POWER SLIDING BACKLITE Color : # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (QUAD CAB/EXCEPT BASE) Pin Circuit Description 1 Q950 12OR/LG POWER BACKLITE OPEN (+) 2 Q951 12OR/VT POWER BACKLITE OPEN (-) Component Location - 64 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Motor > Component Information > Locations > Motor-Power Sliding Backlite > Page 15332 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Motor > Component Information > Locations > Motor-Power Sliding Backlite > Page 15333 Power Window Motor: Locations Motor-Window-Driver Component ID: 229 Component : MOTOR-WINDOW-DRIVER Connector: Name : MOTOR-WINDOW-DRIVER Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 A Q21 14OR/WT DRIVER WINDOW DRIVER DOWN B Q11 14OR/LG DRIVER WINDOW DRIVER UP Component Location - 55 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Motor > Component Information > Locations > Motor-Power Sliding Backlite > Page 15334 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Motor > Component Information > Locations > Motor-Power Sliding Backlite > Page 15335 Power Window Motor: Locations Motor-Window-Left Rear Component ID: 230 Component : MOTOR-WINDOW-LEFT REAR Connector: Name : MOTOR-WINDOW-LEFT REAR Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 A Q211 14TN/LB DRIVER REAR WINDOW DRIVER (DOWN) B Q111 14TN/YL DRIVER REAR WINDOW DRIVER (UP) Component Location - 57 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Motor > Component Information > Locations > Motor-Power Sliding Backlite > Page 15336 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Motor > Component Information > Locations > Motor-Power Sliding Backlite > Page 15337 Power Window Motor: Locations Motor-Window-Passenger Component ID: 231 Component : MOTOR-WINDOW-PASSENGER Connector: Name : MOTOR-WINDOW-PASSENGER Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 A Q22 12OR/VT PASSENGER WINDOW DRIVER DOWN B Q12 12OR/BR PASSENGER WINDOW DRIVER UP Component Location - 56 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Motor > Component Information > Locations > Motor-Power Sliding Backlite > Page 15338 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Motor > Component Information > Locations > Motor-Power Sliding Backlite > Page 15339 Power Window Motor: Locations Motor-Window-Right Rear Component ID: 232 Component : MOTOR-WINDOW-RIGHT REAR Connector: Name : MOTOR-WINDOW-RIGHT REAR Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 A Q212 14TN/LB PASSENGER REAR WINDOW DRIVER (DOWN) B Q112 14TN/YL PASSENGER REAR WINDOW DRIVER (UP) Component Location - 57 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Motor > Component Information > Locations > Motor-Power Sliding Backlite > Page 15340 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Motor-Power Sliding Backlite Power Window Motor: Diagrams Motor-Power Sliding Backlite Component ID: 222 Component : MOTOR-POWER SLIDING BACKLITE Connector: Name : MOTOR-POWER SLIDING BACKLITE Color : # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (QUAD CAB/EXCEPT BASE) Pin Circuit Description 1 Q950 12OR/LG POWER BACKLITE OPEN (+) 2 Q951 12OR/VT POWER BACKLITE OPEN (-) Component Location - 64 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Motor-Power Sliding Backlite > Page 15343 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Motor-Power Sliding Backlite > Page 15344 Power Window Motor: Diagrams Motor-Window-Driver Component ID: 229 Component : MOTOR-WINDOW-DRIVER Connector: Name : MOTOR-WINDOW-DRIVER Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 A Q21 14OR/WT DRIVER WINDOW DRIVER DOWN B Q11 14OR/LG DRIVER WINDOW DRIVER UP Component Location - 55 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Motor-Power Sliding Backlite > Page 15345 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Motor-Power Sliding Backlite > Page 15346 Power Window Motor: Diagrams Motor-Window-Left Rear Component ID: 230 Component : MOTOR-WINDOW-LEFT REAR Connector: Name : MOTOR-WINDOW-LEFT REAR Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 A Q211 14TN/LB DRIVER REAR WINDOW DRIVER (DOWN) B Q111 14TN/YL DRIVER REAR WINDOW DRIVER (UP) Component Location - 57 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Motor-Power Sliding Backlite > Page 15347 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Motor-Power Sliding Backlite > Page 15348 Power Window Motor: Diagrams Motor-Window-Passenger Component ID: 231 Component : MOTOR-WINDOW-PASSENGER Connector: Name : MOTOR-WINDOW-PASSENGER Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 A Q22 12OR/VT PASSENGER WINDOW DRIVER DOWN B Q12 12OR/BR PASSENGER WINDOW DRIVER UP Component Location - 56 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Motor-Power Sliding Backlite > Page 15349 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Motor-Power Sliding Backlite > Page 15350 Power Window Motor: Diagrams Motor-Window-Right Rear Component ID: 232 Component : MOTOR-WINDOW-RIGHT REAR Connector: Name : MOTOR-WINDOW-RIGHT REAR Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 A Q212 14TN/LB PASSENGER REAR WINDOW DRIVER (DOWN) B Q112 14TN/YL PASSENGER REAR WINDOW DRIVER (UP) Component Location - 57 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Motor-Power Sliding Backlite > Page 15351 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Motor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Power Window Motor: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. 2. Remove the rear seats See: Body and Frame/Seats/Service and Repair/Seat - Removal . 3. Remove the rear cab back panel See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Trim Panel/Service and Repair/Rear Cab Back Panel Trim/Removal . 4. Remove the 2 mounting bolts (1). 5. Disconnect the electrical connector to the power motor. 6. Rotate the assembly and remove the 3 screws (1) that attach the motor to the regulator. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Motor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 15354 Power Window Motor: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION 1. Install the power motor to the regulator with the 3 screws (1). 2. Connect the electrical connector to the power motor. 3. Install the 2 mounting bolts (1). 4. Install the rear cab back panel See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Trim Panel/Service and Repair/Rear Cab Back Panel Trim/Installation . 5. Install the rear seats See: Body and Frame/Seats/Service and Repair/Seat - Installation . 6. Connect the battery negative cable. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Locations > Switch-Power Sliding Backlite Power Window Switch: Locations Switch-Power Sliding Backlite Component ID: 499 Component : SWITCH-POWER SLIDING BACKLITE Connector: Name : SWITCH-POWER SLIDING BACKLITE Color : BLACK # of pins : 8 Qualifier : (QUAD CAB/EXCEPT BASE) Pin Circuit Description 1-2 Z974 12BK GROUND 3 Z975 12BK GROUND 4 F30 12PK/YL FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-ACC) 5 Q950 12OR/LG POWER BACKLITE OPEN (+) 6 P301 20LG/OR PANEL LAMPS DRIVER 7 Z976 20BK GROUND 8 Q951 12OR/VT POWER BACKLITE OPEN (-) Component Location - 47 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Locations > Switch-Power Sliding Backlite > Page 15359 Component Location - 45 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Locations > Switch-Power Sliding Backlite > Page 15360 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Locations > Switch-Power Sliding Backlite > Page 15361 Power Window Switch: Locations Switch-Power Window-Left Rear Component ID: 500 Component : SWITCH-POWER WINDOW-LEFT REAR Connector: Name : SWITCH-POWER WINDOW-LEFT REAR Color : BLUE # of pins : 6 Pin Circuit Description 1 Q111 14TN/YL DRIVER REAR WINDOW DRIVER (UP) Pin Circuit Description 1 Q211 14TN/LB DRIVER REAR WINDOW DRIVER (DOWN) 2 Q611 14OR/GY LEFT REAR WINDOW DRIVER (DOWN) 3-4 Q411 14OR/WT LEFT REAR WINDOW DRIVER (UP) 5 Q211 14TN/LB DRIVER REAR WINDOW DRIVER (DOWN) 5 Q111 14TN/YL DRIVER REAR WINDOW DRIVER (UP) 6 Q15 14OR/LB POWER WINDOW SWITCH FEED Component Location - 57 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Locations > Switch-Power Sliding Backlite > Page 15362 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Locations > Switch-Power Sliding Backlite > Page 15363 Power Window Switch: Locations Switch-Power Window-Passenger Component ID: 501 Component : SWITCH-POWER WINDOW-PASSENGER Connector: Name : SWITCH-POWER WINDOW-PASSENGER Color : BLUE # of pins : 6 Pin Circuit Description 1 Q12 12OR/BR RIGHT FRONT WINDOW DRIVER (UP) 2 Q26 12OR/GY MASTER WINDOW SWITCH RIGHT FRONT (DOWN) 3-4 Q16 12OR/TN MASTER WINDOW SWITCH RIGHT FRONT (UP) 5 Q22 12OR/VT RIGHT FRONT WINDOW DRIVER (DOWN) 6 Q15 12OR/LB POWER WINDOW SWITCH FEED Component Location - 56 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Locations > Switch-Power Sliding Backlite > Page 15364 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Locations > Switch-Power Sliding Backlite > Page 15365 Power Window Switch: Locations Switch-Power Window-Right Rear Component ID: 502 Component : SWITCH-POWER WINDOW-RIGHT REAR Connector: Name : SWITCH-POWER WINDOW-RIGHT REAR Color : BLUE # of pins : 6 Pin Circuit Description 1 Q112 14TN/YL PASSENGER REAR WINDOW DRIVER (UP) Pin Circuit Description 1 Q212 14TN/LB PASSENGER REAR WINDOW DRIVER (DOWN) 2 Q612 14OR/GY RIGHT REAR WINDOW DRIVER (DOWN) 3-4 Q412 14OR/WT RIGHT REAR WINDOW DRIVER (UP) 5 Q212 14TN/LB PASSENGER REAR WINDOW DRIVER (DOWN) 5 Q112 14TN/YL PASSENGER REAR WINDOW DRIVER (UP) 6 Q15 14TN/LG POWER WINDOW SWITCH FEED Component Location - 57 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Locations > Switch-Power Sliding Backlite > Page 15366 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Locations > Switch-Power Sliding Backlite > Page 15367 Power Window Switch: Locations Switch-Window/Door Lock-Driver Component ID: 518 Component : SWITCH-WINDOW/DOOR LOCK-DRIVER Connector: Name : SWITCH-WINDOW/DOOR LOCK-DRIVER C1 Color : BLUE # of pins : 12 Pin Circuit Description 1 Q612 14OR/DB RIGHT REAR WINDOW DRIVER (DOWN) 2 Q412 14OR/LB RIGHT REAR WINDOW DRIVER (UP) 3 Q16 12OR/TN MASTER WINDOW SWITCH RIGHT FRONT (UP) 4 Q411 14OR/WT LEFT REAR WINDOW DRIVER (UP) 5 Q11 14OR/LG LEFT FRONT WINDOW DRIVER (UP) 6 Q26 12OR/GY MASTER WINDOW SWITCH RIGHT FRONT (DOWN) 7 G161 20VT/DG DRIVER DOOR LOCK SWITCH MUX 8 Z939 12BK GROUND 9 F30 12PK/YL FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-ACC) 10 Q611 14OR/GY LEFT REAR WINDOW DRIVER (DOWN) 11 Z939 18BK GROUND 12 Q21 14OR/WT LEFT FRONT WINDOW DRIVER (DOWN) Component Location - 55 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Locations > Switch-Power Sliding Backlite > Page 15368 Connector: Name : SWITCH-WINDOW/DOOR LOCK-DRIVER C2 Color : BLUE # of pins : 8 Pin Circuit Description 1 P71 20TN/DG LEFT MIRROR UP DRIVER 2 P195 18LG/YL LEFT MIRROR COMMON DRIVER (RIGHT/DOWN) 3 A940 18RD FUSED B(+) 4 P74 18TN/OR RIGHT MIRROR LEFT DRIVER 5 Z939 18BK GROUND Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Locations > Switch-Power Sliding Backlite > Page 15369 6 P75 20TN/LG LEFT MIRROR LEFT DRIVER 7 P72 18TN/GY RIGHT MIRROR UP DRIVER 8 Q15 12OR/LB WINDOW LOCK OUT SWITCH OUTPUT Component Location - 55 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Switch-Power Sliding Backlite Power Window Switch: Diagrams Switch-Power Sliding Backlite Component ID: 499 Component : SWITCH-POWER SLIDING BACKLITE Connector: Name : SWITCH-POWER SLIDING BACKLITE Color : BLACK # of pins : 8 Qualifier : (QUAD CAB/EXCEPT BASE) Pin Circuit Description 1-2 Z974 12BK GROUND 3 Z975 12BK GROUND 4 F30 12PK/YL FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-ACC) 5 Q950 12OR/LG POWER BACKLITE OPEN (+) 6 P301 20LG/OR PANEL LAMPS DRIVER 7 Z976 20BK GROUND 8 Q951 12OR/VT POWER BACKLITE OPEN (-) Component Location - 47 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Switch-Power Sliding Backlite > Page 15372 Component Location - 45 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Switch-Power Sliding Backlite > Page 15373 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Switch-Power Sliding Backlite > Page 15374 Power Window Switch: Diagrams Switch-Power Window-Left Rear Component ID: 500 Component : SWITCH-POWER WINDOW-LEFT REAR Connector: Name : SWITCH-POWER WINDOW-LEFT REAR Color : BLUE # of pins : 6 Pin Circuit Description 1 Q111 14TN/YL DRIVER REAR WINDOW DRIVER (UP) Pin Circuit Description 1 Q211 14TN/LB DRIVER REAR WINDOW DRIVER (DOWN) 2 Q611 14OR/GY LEFT REAR WINDOW DRIVER (DOWN) 3-4 Q411 14OR/WT LEFT REAR WINDOW DRIVER (UP) 5 Q211 14TN/LB DRIVER REAR WINDOW DRIVER (DOWN) 5 Q111 14TN/YL DRIVER REAR WINDOW DRIVER (UP) 6 Q15 14OR/LB POWER WINDOW SWITCH FEED Component Location - 57 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Switch-Power Sliding Backlite > Page 15375 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Switch-Power Sliding Backlite > Page 15376 Power Window Switch: Diagrams Switch-Power Window-Passenger Component ID: 501 Component : SWITCH-POWER WINDOW-PASSENGER Connector: Name : SWITCH-POWER WINDOW-PASSENGER Color : BLUE # of pins : 6 Pin Circuit Description 1 Q12 12OR/BR RIGHT FRONT WINDOW DRIVER (UP) 2 Q26 12OR/GY MASTER WINDOW SWITCH RIGHT FRONT (DOWN) 3-4 Q16 12OR/TN MASTER WINDOW SWITCH RIGHT FRONT (UP) 5 Q22 12OR/VT RIGHT FRONT WINDOW DRIVER (DOWN) 6 Q15 12OR/LB POWER WINDOW SWITCH FEED Component Location - 56 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Switch-Power Sliding Backlite > Page 15377 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Switch-Power Sliding Backlite > Page 15378 Power Window Switch: Diagrams Switch-Power Window-Right Rear Component ID: 502 Component : SWITCH-POWER WINDOW-RIGHT REAR Connector: Name : SWITCH-POWER WINDOW-RIGHT REAR Color : BLUE # of pins : 6 Pin Circuit Description 1 Q112 14TN/YL PASSENGER REAR WINDOW DRIVER (UP) Pin Circuit Description 1 Q212 14TN/LB PASSENGER REAR WINDOW DRIVER (DOWN) 2 Q612 14OR/GY RIGHT REAR WINDOW DRIVER (DOWN) 3-4 Q412 14OR/WT RIGHT REAR WINDOW DRIVER (UP) 5 Q212 14TN/LB PASSENGER REAR WINDOW DRIVER (DOWN) 5 Q112 14TN/YL PASSENGER REAR WINDOW DRIVER (UP) 6 Q15 14TN/LG POWER WINDOW SWITCH FEED Component Location - 57 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Switch-Power Sliding Backlite > Page 15379 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Switch-Power Sliding Backlite > Page 15380 Power Window Switch: Diagrams Switch-Window/Door Lock-Driver Component ID 479 Component ID: 479 Component : SWITCH-WINDOW/DOOR LOCK-DRIVER Connector: Name : SWITCH-WINDOW/DOOR LOCK-DRIVER C1 Color : BLUE # of pins : 12 Pin Circuit Description 1 Q612 14OR/DB RIGHT REAR WINDOW DRIVER (DOWN) 2 Q412 14OR/LB RIGHT REAR WINDOW DRIVER (UP) 3 Q16 12OR/TN MASTER WINDOW SWITCH RIGHT FRONT (UP) 4 Q411 14OR/WT LEFT REAR WINDOW DRIVER (UP) 5 Q11 14OR/LG LEFT FRONT WINDOW DRIVER (UP) 6 Q26 12OR/GY MASTER WINDOW SWITCH RIGHT FRONT (DOWN) 7 G161 20VT/DG DRIVER DOOR LOCK SWITCH MUX 8 Z939 12BK GROUND 9 F30 12PK/YL FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-ACC) 10 Q611 14OR/GY LEFT REAR WINDOW DRIVER (DOWN) 11 Z939 18BK GROUND 12 Q21 14OR/WT LEFT FRONT WINDOW DRIVER (DOWN) Connector: Name : SWITCH-WINDOW/DOOR LOCK-DRIVER C2 Color : BLUE # of pins : 8 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Switch-Power Sliding Backlite > Page 15381 Pin Circuit Description 1 P71 20TN/DG LEFT MIRROR UP DRIVER 2 P195 18LG/YL LEFT MIRROR COMMON DRIVER (RIGHT/DOWN) 3 A940 18RD FUSED B(+) 4 P74 18TN/OR RIGHT MIRROR LEFT DRIVER 5 Z939 18BK GROUND 6 P75 20TN/LG LEFT MIRROR LEFT DRIVER 7 P72 18TN/GY RIGHT MIRROR UP DRIVER 8 Q15 12OR/LB WINDOW LOCK OUT SWITCH OUTPUT Component ID 518 Component ID: 518 Component : SWITCH-WINDOW/DOOR LOCK-DRIVER Connector: Name : SWITCH-WINDOW/DOOR LOCK-DRIVER C1 Color : BLUE # of pins : 12 Pin Circuit Description 1 Q612 14OR/DB RIGHT REAR WINDOW DRIVER (DOWN) 2 Q412 14OR/LB RIGHT REAR WINDOW DRIVER (UP) 3 Q16 12OR/TN MASTER WINDOW SWITCH RIGHT FRONT (UP) 4 Q411 14OR/WT LEFT REAR WINDOW DRIVER (UP) 5 Q11 14OR/LG LEFT FRONT WINDOW DRIVER (UP) 6 Q26 12OR/GY MASTER WINDOW SWITCH RIGHT FRONT (DOWN) Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Switch-Power Sliding Backlite > Page 15382 7 G161 20VT/DG DRIVER DOOR LOCK SWITCH MUX 8 Z939 12BK GROUND 9 F30 12PK/YL FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-ACC) 10 Q611 14OR/GY LEFT REAR WINDOW DRIVER (DOWN) 11 Z939 18BK GROUND 12 Q21 14OR/WT LEFT FRONT WINDOW DRIVER (DOWN) Component Location - 55 Connector: Name : SWITCH-WINDOW/DOOR LOCK-DRIVER C2 Color : BLUE # of pins : 8 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Switch-Power Sliding Backlite > Page 15383 Pin Circuit Description 1 P71 20TN/DG LEFT MIRROR UP DRIVER 2 P195 18LG/YL LEFT MIRROR COMMON DRIVER (RIGHT/DOWN) 3 A940 18RD FUSED B(+) 4 P74 18TN/OR RIGHT MIRROR LEFT DRIVER 5 Z939 18BK GROUND 6 P75 20TN/LG LEFT MIRROR LEFT DRIVER 7 P72 18TN/GY RIGHT MIRROR UP DRIVER 8 Q15 12OR/LB WINDOW LOCK OUT SWITCH OUTPUT Component Location - 55 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Switch-Power Sliding Backlite > Page 15384 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 15385 Power Window Switch: Testing and Inspection WINDOW SWITCH The Light-Emitting Diode (LED) illumination lamps for all of the power window and lock switch and bezel unit switch paddles receive battery current through the power window circuit breaker in the junction block. If all of the LEDs are inoperative in both the power window and lock switch units and the power windows are inoperative. See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code Tests and Associated Procedures If the power windows operate, but any or all of the LEDs are inoperative, the power window and lock switch units with the inoperative LED(s) is faulty and must be replaced. For complete circuit diagrams, refer to the appropriate wiring information. 1. Check the fuse in the Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) and the circuit breaker located near the park brake pedal. If OK, go to STEP 2. If not OK, replace the faulty fuse or circuit breaker. 2. Turn the ignition switch to the On position. Check for battery voltage at the fuse in the Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM). If OK, turn the ignition switch to the Off position and go to STEP 3. If not OK, check circuit breaker and repair the circuit to the ignition switch as required. 3. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. Remove the power window switch unit from the door trim panel (passenger doors). The drivers door switch is included with the window/lock switch See: Body and Frame/Locks/Power Locks/Power Door Lock Switch/Testing and Inspection/Diagnosis and Testing for service procedures. Unplug the wire harness connector from the switch unit. 4. Test the power window switch continuity. See the Power Window Switch Continuity charts to determine if the continuity is correct in the Off, Up and Down switch positions. If OK, See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code Tests and Associated Procedures . If not OK, replace the faulty switch. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Power Window Switch: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL FRONT PASSENGER 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. 2. Remove the door trim panel. See: Body and Frame/Doors, Hood and Trunk/Doors/Front Door/Front Door Panel/Service and Repair/Front Door Trim Panel - Removal 3. Remove the switch from the trim panel bezel. REAR PASSENGER 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. 2. Remove the door trim panel. See: Body and Frame/Doors, Hood and Trunk/Doors/Rear Door/Rear Door Panel/Service and Repair/Rear Door Trim Panel - Removal 3. Gently pry switch from door trim panel. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 15388 Power Window Switch: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION FRONT PASSENGER 1. Insert switch to trim panel bezel. 2. Install door trim panel. See: Body and Frame/Doors, Hood and Trunk/Doors/Front Door/Front Door Panel/Service and Repair/Front Door Trim Panel - Installation 3. Connect battery negative cable. REAR PASSENGER 1. Install switch to door trim panel 2. Install door trim panel. See: Body and Frame/Doors, Hood and Trunk/Doors/Rear Door/Rear Door Panel/Service and Repair/Rear Door Trim Panel - Installation 3. Connect battery negative cable. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Back Window Glass > Component Information > Service and Repair > Backlite Back Window Glass: Service and Repair Backlite Removal REMOVAL CAUTION: It is difficult to salvage the backlite during the removal operation. The backlite is part of the structural support for the roof. The urethane bonding used to secure the glass to the fence is difficult to cut or clean from any surface. Since the molding is set in urethane, it is unlikely it would be salvaged. Before removing the backlite, check the availability from the parts supplier. NOTE: The backlite is attached to the window frame with urethane adhesive. The urethane adhesive is applied cold and seals the surface area between the window opening and the glass. The primer adheres the urethane adhesive to the backlite. 1. Roll down door glass. 2. Remove headliner (9) See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Headliner/Service and Repair/Headliner - Removal . 3. On standard cab models remove the upper b-pillar trim (5) See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Trim Panel/Service and Repair/Pillar Trim/B-Pillar Trim . Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Back Window Glass > Component Information > Service and Repair > Backlite > Page 15394 4. On quad cab models remove the upper c-pillar trim (5) See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Trim Panel/Service and Repair/Pillar Trim/C-Pillar Trim Panel-Removal . 5. Bend backlite retaining tab (2) inward against glass. 6. Disconnect the rear window defogger electrical connector (if equipped). 7. Using a suitable pneumatic knife from inside the vehicle, cut urethane holding backlite frame to opening fence. 8. Separate glass (1) from vehicle. Installation INSTALLATION 1. Clean urethane adhesive from around backlite opening fence. 2. If necessary, apply black-out primer to outer edge of replacement backlite frame (1). 3. If black-out primer was pre-applied on backlite, clean bonding surface with Isopropyl alcohol and clean lint free cloth. Allow 3 minutes for drying time. 4. Apply black-out primer to backlite opening fence. 5. Apply a 13 mm (0.5 in.) bead of urethane (4) around the perimeter of the window frame bonding surface (1). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Back Window Glass > Component Information > Service and Repair > Backlite > Page 15395 6. Set glass (1) on lower fence and move glass forward into opening. 7. Firmly push glass (1) against rear window glass opening fence. 8. Bend tabs around edges of backlite opening fence to retain glass. 9. Clean excess urethane from exterior with MOPAR(R), Super Clean or equivalent. 10. Allow urethane to cure at least 24 hours (full cure is 72 hours). 11. Water test to verify repair before returning vehicle to service. 12. Connect the rear window defogger electrical connector, if equipped. 13. On standard cab models, install the upper b-pillar trim (5) See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Trim Panel/Service and Repair/Pillar Trim/B-Pillar Trim . 14. On quad cab models, install the upper c-pillar trim (5) See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Trim Panel/Service and Repair/Pillar Trim/C-Pillar Trim Panel-Installation . Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Back Window Glass > Component Information > Service and Repair > Backlite > Page 15396 15. Install the headliner (9) See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Headliner/Service and Repair/Headliner - Installation . Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Back Window Glass > Component Information > Service and Repair > Backlite > Page 15397 Back Window Glass: Service and Repair Backlite Vent Glass Removal REMOVAL 1. Slide the upper run channel (1) out of the window frame (2). 2. Slide the vent glass (3) upward to remove from the lower window frame (2). 3. Lower the glass (3) out of the upper window frame (2) and remove. Installation INSTALLATION 1. Slide the vent glass (3) upper edge into window frame (2) and insert the lower edge into the lower molding. 2. Position the upper run channel (1) into the window frame (2) and slide it into place. 3. Verify vent glass (3) operation. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Front Door Window Glass > Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Door Outer Belt Molding Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: Service and Repair Front Door Outer Belt Molding Removal REMOVAL 1. Remove the screw (4) and separate the belt molding (1) from the door (5) flange from the back to the front. Installation INSTALLATION 1. Position the belt molding (1) onto the door (5) flange and seat fully. 2. Install the screw (4). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Front Door Window Glass > Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Door Outer Belt Molding > Page 15403 Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: Service and Repair Front Door Glass Run Weatherstrip Removal REMOVAL 1. Remove the door glass See: Service and Repair/Front Door Glass - Removal . 2. Separate the front door glass run weatherstrip (2) out of the door frame (5) and remove through the window opening. Installation INSTALLATION Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Front Door Window Glass > Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Door Outer Belt Molding > Page 15404 NOTE: A mixture of soap and water may be used to aid installation of the weatherstrip into the corners. 1. Position the front door glass run weatherstrip (2) into the door (5) through the window opening. 2. Position the weatherstrip into the upper corners and seat firmly. 3. From back to front, seat the weatherstrip between the corners and then down the sides firmly. 4. Install the door glass See: Service and Repair/Front Door Glass - Installation . Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Front Door Window Glass > Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Door Outer Belt Molding > Page 15405 Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: Service and Repair Front Door Inner Belt Molding Removal REMOVAL 1. Remove the door trim panel (3) See: Body and Frame/Doors, Hood and Trunk/Doors/Front Door/Front Door Panel/Service and Repair/Front Door Trim Panel - Removal 2. Separate the belt molding (1) from the door (3) mounting flange from the back to the front. Installation INSTALLATION 1. Position the belt molding (1) and seat onto the door (3) mounting flange fully. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Front Door Window Glass > Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Door Outer Belt Molding > Page 15406 2. Install the door trim panel (3) See: Body and Frame/Doors, Hood and Trunk/Doors/Front Door/Front Door Panel/Service and Repair/Front Door Trim Panel - Installation . Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Rear Door Window Glass > Rear Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Service and Repair > Rear Door Outer Belt Molding Rear Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: Service and Repair Rear Door Outer Belt Molding Removal REMOVAL 1. Remove the screw (3) and separate the belt molding (1) from the door (2) flange from the back to the front. Installation INSTALLATION 1. Position the belt molding (1) onto the door (2) flange and seat fully. 2. Install the screw (3). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Rear Door Window Glass > Rear Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Service and Repair > Rear Door Outer Belt Molding > Page 15412 Rear Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: Service and Repair Rear Door Glass Run Weatherstrip Removal REMOVAL 1. Lower the glass. 2. Separate the rear door glass run weatherstrip (5) out of the door frame (2) and remove through the window opening. Installation INSTALLATION NOTE: A mixture of soap and water may be used to aid installation of the weatherstrip into the corners. 1. Position the rear door glass run weatherstrip (5) into the door (2) through the window opening. 2. Position the weatherstrip (5) into the upper corners and seat firmly. 3. From back to front, seat the weatherstrip (5) between the corners and then down the sides firmly. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Rear Door Window Glass > Rear Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Service and Repair > Rear Door Outer Belt Molding > Page 15413 Rear Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: Service and Repair Rear Door Inner Belt Molding Removal REMOVAL 1. Remove the door trim panel (5) See: Body and Frame/Doors, Hood and Trunk/Doors/Rear Door/Rear Door Panel/Service and Repair/Rear Door Trim Panel - Removal . 2. Separate the belt molding (2) from the rear door mounting flange from the back to the front. Installation INSTALLATION 1. Position the belt molding (2) and seat onto the rear door mounting flange fully. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Rear Door Window Glass > Rear Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Service and Repair > Rear Door Outer Belt Molding > Page 15414 2. Install the door trim panel (5) See: Body and Frame/Doors, Hood and Trunk/Doors/Rear Door/Rear Door Panel/Service and Repair/Rear Door Trim Panel - Installation . Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Regulator > Back Window Regulator > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Back Window Regulator: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. 2. Remove the rear seats See: Body and Frame/Seats/Service and Repair/Seat - Removal . 3. Remove the rear cab back panel See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Trim Panel/Service and Repair/Rear Cab Back Panel Trim/Removal . 4. Remove the two mounting bolts (1). 5. Disconnect the electrical connector to the power motor. 6. Separate the cable housings from the glass track (1). 7. Disconnect the cable ends from the vent glass (2). 8. Separate the support clips (5) and remove the regulator assembly (3). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Regulator > Back Window Regulator > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 15420 Back Window Regulator: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION 1. Connect the cable ends to the vent glass (2). 2. Install the cable housings into the glass tracks (1). 3. Fasten the support clips (5). 4. Install the 2 mounting bolts (1). 5. Install the rear cab back panel See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Trim Panel/Service and Repair/Rear Cab Back Panel Trim/Installation . 6. Install the rear seats See: Body and Frame/Seats/Service and Repair/Seat - Installation . 7. Connect the battery negative cable. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Regulator > Front Door Window Regulator > System Information > Service and Repair > Front Door Window Regulator - Removal Front Door Window Regulator: Service and Repair Front Door Window Regulator - Removal Power REMOVAL 1. Remove the inner belt molding See: Window Glass/Front Door Window Glass/Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip/Service and Repair/Front Door Inner Belt Molding/Removal . 2. Remove the waterdam See: Body and Frame/Doors, Hood and Trunk/Doors/Front Door/Front Door Panel/Service and Repair/Front Door Waterdam/Removal . 3. Remove the electric window switch from the door trim panel and connect it to the door wire harness See: Power Window Switch/Service and Repair/Removal . 4. Raise the door glass to the position shown. 5. Remove the two nuts (1) that secure the door glass to the window regulator (2) through the two sight windows (3 and 4) and disengage the door glass from the regulator. 6. Position the door glass to the full up position and secure the glass using a wooden wedge or an equivalent. 7. Lower the window regulator (4) and remove the two nuts (3) that secure the regulator stabilizer (1) to the door (2). 8. Remove the bolt (5) that secures the window regulator to the door and loosen the other two regulator bolts (7). 9. Slide the window regulator upward and disengage the two regulator bolts from the door. 10. Remove the window regulator through the opening in the door and disconnect the door wire harness (6). Manual REMOVAL Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Regulator > Front Door Window Regulator > System Information > Service and Repair > Front Door Window Regulator - Removal > Page 15425 1. Remove the inner belt molding See: Window Glass/Front Door Window Glass/Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip/Service and Repair/Front Door Inner Belt Molding/Removal . 2. Remove the waterdam See: Body and Frame/Doors, Hood and Trunk/Doors/Front Door/Front Door Panel/Service and Repair/Front Door Waterdam/Removal . 3. Reinstall the manual window crank and raise the door glass to the position shown. 4. Remove the two nuts (1) that secure the door glass to the window regulator (2) through the two sight windows (3 and 4) and disengage the door glass from the regulator. 5. Position the door glass to the full up position and secure the glass using a wooden wedge or an equivalent. 6. Lower the window regulator (4) and remove the two nuts (3) that secure the regulator stabilizer (1) to the door (2). 7. Remove the two bolts (5) that secure the window regulator to the door and loosen the other two regulator bolts (6). 8. Slide the window regulator upward and disengage the two regulator bolts from the door. 9. Remove the window regulator through the opening in the door. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Regulator > Front Door Window Regulator > System Information > Service and Repair > Front Door Window Regulator - Removal > Page 15426 Front Door Window Regulator: Service and Repair Front Door Window Regulator - Installation Power INSTALLATION 1. Connect the door wire harness (6) to the window regulator (4) and install the regulator through the opening in the door (2). 2. Engage the two regulator bolts (7) to the door. 3. Install the bolt (5) that secure the window regulator to the door and tighten all three regulator bolts to 10 Nm (89 in. lbs.). 4. Position the regulator stabilizer (1) into the door and install the two nuts (3). Tighten the nuts to 10 Nm (89 in. lbs.). 5. Raise the window regulator (2) to the position shown. 6. Support the window glass and remove the wooden wedge or equivalent. 7. Position the window glass to the window regulator and install the two nuts (1) thought the two sight windows (3 and 4). Tighten the nuts to 10 Nm (89 in. lbs.). 8. Disconnect the electric window switch from the door wire harness and reinstall the switch onto the door trim panel See: Power Window Switch/Service and Repair/Installation . 9. Install the waterdam See: Body and Frame/Doors, Hood and Trunk/Doors/Front Door/Front Door Panel/Service and Repair/Front Door Waterdam/Installation . 10. Install the inner belt molding See: Window Glass/Front Door Window Glass/Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip/Service and Repair/Front Door Inner Belt Molding/Installation . Manual INSTALLATION Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Regulator > Front Door Window Regulator > System Information > Service and Repair > Front Door Window Regulator - Removal > Page 15427 1. Install the window regulator (4) through the opening in the door (2). 2. Engage the two regulator bolts (6) to the door. 3. Install the two bolt (5) that secure the window regulator to the door and tighten all four regulator bolts to 10 Nm (89 in. lbs.). 4. Position the regulator stabilizer (1) into the door and install the two nuts (3). Tighten the nuts to 10 Nm (89 in. lbs.). 5. Raise the window regulator (2) to the position shown and remove the manual window crank. 6. Support the window glass and remove the wooden wedge or equivalent. 7. Position the window glass to the window regulator and install the two nuts (1) thought the two sight windows (3 and 4). Tighten the nuts to 10 Nm (89 in. lbs.). 8. Install the waterdam See: Body and Frame/Doors, Hood and Trunk/Doors/Front Door/Front Door Panel/Service and Repair/Front Door Waterdam/Installation . 9. Install the inner belt molding See: Window Glass/Front Door Window Glass/Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip/Service and Repair/Front Door Inner Belt Molding/Installation . Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Regulator > Rear Door Window Regulator > System Information > Service and Repair > Rear Door Window Regulator - Removal Rear Door Window Regulator: Service and Repair Rear Door Window Regulator - Removal Power REMOVAL 1. Remove the inner belt molding See: Window Glass/Rear Door Window Glass/Rear Door Window Glass Weatherstrip/Service and Repair/Rear Door Inner Belt Molding/Removal . 2. Remove the waterdam See: Body and Frame/Doors, Hood and Trunk/Doors/Rear Door/Rear Door Panel/Service and Repair/Rear Door Waterdam/Removal . 3. Remove the electric window switch from the door trim panel and connect it to the door wire harness See: Power Window Switch/Service and Repair/Removal . 4. Raise the door glass to the position shown. 5. Remove the two nuts (1) that secure the door glass (2) to the window regulator (3) through the speaker opening (5) and the sight window (4) and disengage the door glass from the regulator. 6. Position the door glass to the full up position and secure the glass using a wooden wedge or an equivalent. 7. Lower the window regulator and remove the two nuts (1) that secure the regulator stabilizer to the door. 8. Remove the bolts (2) that secures the window regulator to the door and loosen the other two regulator bolts (3). 9. Slide the window regulator upward and disengage the two regulator bolts from the door. 10. Remove the window regulator through the opening in the door and disconnect the door wire harness (4). Manual REMOVAL Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Regulator > Rear Door Window Regulator > System Information > Service and Repair > Rear Door Window Regulator - Removal > Page 15432 1. Remove the inner belt molding See: Window Glass/Rear Door Window Glass/Rear Door Window Glass Weatherstrip/Service and Repair/Rear Door Inner Belt Molding/Removal . 2. Remove the waterdam See: Body and Frame/Doors, Hood and Trunk/Doors/Rear Door/Rear Door Panel/Service and Repair/Rear Door Waterdam/Removal . 3. Reinstall the manual window crank and raise the door glass to the position shown. 4. Remove the two nuts (1) that secure the door glass (2) to the window regulator (3) through the speaker opening (5) and the sight window (4) and disengage the door glass from the regulator. 5. Position the door glass to the full up position and secure the glass using a wooden wedge or an equivalent. 6. Lower the window regulator (5) and remove the two nuts (3) that secure the regulator stabilizer (4) to the door (1). 7. Remove the two bolts (2) that secure the window regulator to the door and loosen the other two regulator bolts (6). 8. Slide the window regulator upward and disengage the two regulator bolts from the door. 9. Remove the window regulator through the opening in the door. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Regulator > Rear Door Window Regulator > System Information > Service and Repair > Rear Door Window Regulator - Removal > Page 15433 Rear Door Window Regulator: Service and Repair Rear Door Window Regulator - Installation Power INSTALLATION 1. Connect the door wire harness (4) to the window regulator and install the regulator through the opening in the door. 2. Engage the two regulator bolts (3) to the door. 3. Install the regulator bolts (2) that secures the window regulator to the door and tighten all regulator bolts to 10 Nm (89 in. lbs.). 4. Position the regulator stabilizer into the door and install the two nuts. Tighten the nuts to 10 Nm (89 in. lbs.). 5. Raise the window regulator (3) to the position shown. 6. Support the door glass (2) and remove the wooden wedge or equivalent. 7. Position the door glass to the window regulator and install the two nuts (1) that secure the door glass to the window regulator (3) through the sight window (4) and the speaker opening (5). Tighten the nuts to 10 Nm (89 in. lbs.). 8. Disconnect the electric window switch from the door wire harness and reinstall the switch onto the door trim panel See: Power Window Switch/Service and Repair/Installation . 9. Install the waterdam See: Body and Frame/Doors, Hood and Trunk/Doors/Rear Door/Rear Door Panel/Service and Repair/Rear Door Waterdam/Installation . 10. Install the inner belt molding See: Window Glass/Rear Door Window Glass/Rear Door Window Glass Weatherstrip/Service and Repair/Rear Door Inner Belt Molding/Installation . Manual INSTALLATION Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Regulator > Rear Door Window Regulator > System Information > Service and Repair > Rear Door Window Regulator - Removal > Page 15434 1. Install the window regulator (5) through the opening in the door (1). 2. Engage the two regulator bolts (6) to the door. 3. Install the two bolts (2) that secure the window regulator to the door and tighten all four regulator bolts to 10 Nm (89 in. lbs.). 4. Position the regulator stabilizer (4) onto the door and install the two nuts (3). Tighten the nuts to 10 Nm (89 in. lbs.). 5. Raise the window regulator (3) to the position shown and remove the manual window crank. 6. Support the door glass (2) and remove the wooden wedge or equivalent. 7. Position the door glass to the window regulator and install the two nuts (1) that secure the door glass to the window regulator through the sight window (4) and the speaker opening (5). Tighten the nuts to 10 Nm (89 in. lbs.). 8. Install the waterdam See: Body and Frame/Doors, Hood and Trunk/Doors/Rear Door/Rear Door Panel/Service and Repair/Rear Door Waterdam/Installation . 9. Install the inner belt molding See: Window Glass/Rear Door Window Glass/Rear Door Window Glass Weatherstrip/Service and Repair/Rear Door Inner Belt Molding/Installation . Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Track > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Door Glass Run Channel - Removal Window Track: Service and Repair Front Door Glass Run Channel - Removal Front-All Models FRONT-ALL MODELS 1. Raise the window glass to the full up position and remove the window regulator See: Window Regulator/Front Door Window Regulator/Service and Repair/Front Door Window Regulator - Removal . 2. Loosen the two bolts (2 and 3) that secure the front glass run channel (1) to the door (5). 3. Slide the front glass run channel upward and disengage it from the door. 4. Remove the front glass run channel from the door through the door panel opening (4). 5. If required, remove the weatherstrip from the front glass run channel. Rear-Quad Cab REAR-QUAD CAB 1. Raise the window glass to the full up position and remove the window regulator See: Window Regulator/Front Door Window Regulator/Service and Repair/Front Door Window Regulator - Removal . 2. Remove the lower bolt (1) that secures the rear glass run channel (3) to the door. 3. Loosen the upper bolt (4) that secures the rear glass run channel to the door. 4. Slide the rear glass run channel upward and disengage the upper screw from the door. 5. Remove the rear glass run channel from the door through the door panel opening (2). 6. If required, remove the weatherstrip from the rear glass run channel. Rear-Standard Cab Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Track > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Door Glass Run Channel - Removal > Page 15439 REAR-STANDARD CAB 1. Raise the window glass to the full up position and remove the window regulator See: Window Regulator/Front Door Window Regulator/Service and Repair/Front Door Window Regulator - Removal . 2. Remove the two bolts (1) that secure the rear glass run channel (2) to the door. 3. Remove the rear glass run channel from the door through the door panel opening (3). 4. If required, remove the weatherstrip from the rear glass run channel. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Track > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Door Glass Run Channel - Removal > Page 15440 Window Track: Service and Repair Front Door Glass Run Channel - Installation Front-All Models FRONT-ALL MODELS 1. If removed, install the weatherstrip onto the front glass run channel (1). 2. Position the front glass run channel into the door (5) through the door panel opening (4). 3. Engage the two bolts (2 and 3) that secure the front glass run channel to the door. Tighten the bolts to 10 Nm (89 in. lbs.). 4. Install the window regulator and verify correct window operation See: Window Regulator/Front Door Window Regulator/Service and Repair/Front Door Window Regulator - Installation . Rear-Quad Cab REAR-QUAD CAB 1. If removed, install the weatherstrip onto the rear glass run channel (3). 2. Position the rear glass run channel into the door through the door panel opening (2). 3. Engage the upper bolt (4) that secures the rear glass run channel to the door. 4. Install the lower bolt (1) that secures the rear glass run channel to the door. Tighten both the upper and lower bolts to 10 Nm (89 in. lbs.). 5. Install the window regulator and verify correct window operation See: Window Regulator/Front Door Window Regulator/Service and Repair/Front Door Window Regulator - Installation . Rear-Standard Cab REAR-STANDARD CAB Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Track > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Door Glass Run Channel - Removal > Page 15441 1. If removed, install the weatherstrip onto the rear glass run channel (2). 2. Position the rear glass run channel into the door through the door panel opening (3). 3. Install the two bolts (1) that secure the rear glass run channel to the door. Tighten the bolts to 10 Nm (89 in. lbs.). 4. Install the window regulator and verify correct window operation See: Window Regulator/Front Door Window Regulator/Service and Repair/Front Door Window Regulator - Installation . Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Track > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Door Glass Run Channel - Removal > Page 15442 Window Track: Service and Repair Rear Door Glass Run Channel - Removal Front FRONT 1. Raise the window glass to the full up position and remove the window regulator See: Window Regulator/Rear Door Window Regulator/Service and Repair/Rear Door Window Regulator - Removal . 2. Remove the two bolts (1) that secure the front glass run channel (2) to the door and remove the run channel through the door panel opening. 3. If required, remove the weatherstrip from the front glass run channel. Mega Cab Models 1. Raise the window glass to the full up position and remove the window regulator See: Window Regulator/Rear Door Window Regulator/Service and Repair/Rear Door Window Regulator - Removal . 2. Remove the two bolts (1 & 3) that secure the front glass run channel (2) to the door and remove the run channel through the door panel opening. 3. If required, remove the weatherstrip from the front glass run channel. Rear REAR Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Track > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Door Glass Run Channel - Removal > Page 15443 1. Raise the window glass to the full up position and remove the window regulator See: Window Regulator/Rear Door Window Regulator/Service and Repair/Rear Door Window Regulator - Removal . 2. Remove the two bolts (2) that secure the rear glass run channel (1) to the door and remove the run channel through the door panel opening. 3. If required, remove the weatherstrip from the rear glass run channel. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Track > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Door Glass Run Channel - Removal > Page 15444 Window Track: Service and Repair Rear Door Glass Run Channel - Installation Front FRONT 1. If removed, install the weatherstrip onto the front glass run channel (2). 2. Position the front glass run channel into the door through the door panel opening. 3. Install the two bolts (1) that secure the front glass run channel to the door. Tighten the bolts to 10 Nm (89 in. lbs.). 4. Install the window regulator and verify correct window operation See: Window Regulator/Rear Door Window Regulator/Service and Repair/Rear Door Window Regulator - Installation . Mega Cab Models 1. If removed, install the weatherstrip onto the front glass run channel (2). 2. Position the front glass run channel into the door through the door panel opening. 3. Install the two bolts (1 & 3) that secure the front glass run channel to the door. Tighten the bolts to 10 Nm (89 in. lbs.). 4. Install the window regulator and verify correct window operation See: Window Regulator/Rear Door Window Regulator/Service and Repair/Rear Door Window Regulator - Installation . Rear REAR Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Track > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Door Glass Run Channel - Removal > Page 15445 1. If removed, install the weatherstrip onto the rear glass run channel (1). 2. Position the rear glass run channel into the door through the door panel opening. 3. Install the two bolts (2) that secure the rear glass run channel to the door. Tighten the bolts to 10 Nm (89 in. lbs.). 4. Install the window regulator and verify correct window operation See: Window Regulator/Rear Door Window Regulator/Service and Repair/Rear Door Window Regulator - Installation . Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windshield > Component Information > Service Precautions Windshield: Service Precautions WINDSHIELD SAFETY PRECAUTIONS Do not operate the vehicle within 24 hours of windshield installation. It takes at least 24 hours for urethane adhesive to cure. If it is not cured, the windshield may not perform properly in an accident. Urethane adhesives are applied as a system. Use glass cleaner, glass prep solvent, glass primer, PVC (vinyl) primer and pinch weld (fence) primer provided by the adhesive manufacturer. If not, structural integrity could be compromised. DaimlerChrysler does not recommend glass adhesive by brand. Technicians should review product labels and technical data sheets, and use only adhesives that their manufactures warranty and will restore a vehicle to the requirements of FMVSS 212. Technicians should also insure that primers and cleaners are compatible with the particular adhesive used. Be sure to refer to the urethane manufacturer's directions for curing time specifications and do not use adhesive after its expiration date. Vapors that are emitted from the urethane adhesive or primer could cause personal injury or death. Use them in a well-ventilated area. Skin contact with urethane adhesive should be avoided. Personal injury or death may result. Always wear eye and hand protection when working with glass. Protect all painted and trimmed surfaces from coming in contact with urethane or primers. Be careful not to damage painted surfaces when removing moldings or cutting urethane around windshield. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windshield > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Windshield: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL 1. Remove inside rear view mirror (3) See: Body and Frame/Mirrors/Service and Repair/Rear View Mirror - Removal . 2. Remove cowl grille (2) See: Body and Frame/Cowl/Cowl Moulding / Trim . 3. Remove the a-pillar weatherstrip retainer (1) See: Body and Frame/Doors, Hood and Trunk/Doors/Front Door/Front Door Weatherstrip/Service and Repair/A-Pillar Weatherstrip Retainer/Removal . Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windshield > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 15451 4. Remove the a-pillar trim panels (2) See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Passenger Assist Handle/Service and Repair/A-Pillar Trim/Grab Handle/Removal . 5. Remove the headliner (9) and from the inside of the vehicle, cut the upper urethane bonding from around windshield upper edge using a suitable sharp cold knife (C-4849). A pneumatic cutting device can be used but is not recommended See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Headliner/Service and Repair/Headliner - Removal . 6. From the outside of the vehicle, cut urethane bonding from the remaining sides of the windshield using a suitable sharp cold knife (C-4849). A pneumatic cutting device can be used but is not recommended. 7. Separate windshield from vehicle. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windshield > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 15452 Windshield: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION WARNING: Allow the urethane at least 24 hours to cure before returning the vehicle to use. CAUTION: Roll down the left and right front door glass and open the rear glass slider (if available) before installing windshield. This is to avoid pressurizing the passenger compartment if a door is slammed before the urethane is cured. The potential for water leaks can result. The windshield fence should be cleaned of most of its old urethane bonding material. A small amount of old urethane, approximately 1-2 mm in height, should remain on the fence. Do not grind off or completely remove all old urethane from the fence, the paint finish and bonding strength will be adversely affected. 1. Place replacement windshield (1) into windshield opening and position glass in the center of the opening against the support spacers (3). Mark the outside surface of the glass at the support spacers (3) with a grease pencil or pieces of masking tape and ink pen to use as a reference (2) for installation. Remove replacement windshield from windshield opening. 2. Position the windshield (1) inside up on a suitable work surface with two padded, wood 10 cm by 10 cm by 50 cm (4 in. by 4 in. by 20 in.) blocks (3), placed parallel 75 cm (2.5 ft.) apart. 3. Clean inside of windshield with MOPAR(R) Glass Cleaner and lint-free cloth. 4. Apply clear glass primer 25 mm (1 in.) wide around perimeter of windshield and wipe with a new clean and dry lintfree cloth. 5. Apply black-out primer onto the glass using the windshield molding as a guide. The primer should be 15 mm (5/8 in.) wide on the top and sides of the glass and 25 mm (1 in.) on the bottom of windshield. Allow at least three minutes drying time. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windshield > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 15453 6. Locate NEW support spacers (3) on support brackets and adjust to lowest height. 7. Position seven new foam spacers (4 and 3) on the inside surface of the windshield, flush with the lower and side edges. 8. Position three new foam spacers (1) on the inside surface of the windshield, at a minimum distance of 3 mm (0.12 in.) from the top edge of the windshield. 9. The urethane bead should be shaped in a triangular cross-section, this can be achieved by notching the tip of the applicator. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windshield > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 15454 10. Apply a 13 mm (1/2 in.) high and 10 mm (3/8 in.) wide bead of urethane around the perimeter of windshield (2). At the top, apply the bead 7 mm (1/4 in.) inboard from the glass edge. On the other three sides apply the bead 14 mm (0.55 in.) inboard from the glass edge. 11. Install the a-pillar trim (2) See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Passenger Assist Handle/Service and Repair/A-Pillar Trim/Grab Handle/Installation . 12. With the aid of a helper, position the windshield (2) over the windshield opening. Align the reference marks at the bottom of the windshield to the support spacers (3). 13. Slowly lower windshield glass (2) to the fence opening guiding the lower corners into proper position. Beginning at the bottom and continuing to the top, push glass (2) onto fence along the A-Pillars. Push windshield (2) inward to the fence at the bottom corners. 14. Push windshield (2) upward, setting the windshield to roof gap to 1.5 mm (0.06 in.) to 3 mm (0.12 in.) and ratchet up the adjustable support brackets. 15. Using clean water, lightly mist the support spacers (3). 16. Clean excess urethane from exterior with MOPAR(R) Super Clean or equivalent. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windshield > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 15455 17. Install cowl grille (2) See: Body and Frame/Cowl/Cowl Moulding / Trim . 18. Install rear view mirror support bracket (4) See: Body and Frame/Mirrors/Service and Repair/Rear View Mirror Support Bracket - Installation . 19. Install rear view mirror (3) See: Body and Frame/Mirrors/Service and Repair/Rear View Mirror - Installation . 20. Install the a-pillar weatherstrip retainer (1) See: Body and Frame/Doors, Hood and Trunk/Doors/Front Door/Front Door Weatherstrip/Service and Repair/A-Pillar Weatherstrip Retainer/Installation 21. After urethane has cured, remove tape strips and water test windshield to verify repair. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Check Valve, Washer > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Check Valve: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION A single washer system check valve is standard equipment on this vehicle, and is installed in the washer system plumbing. The check valve is integral to the washer nozzle plumbing Y fitting (2) located in the cowl plenum area beneath the cowl plenum cover/grille panel near the base of the windshield. The check valve consists of a molded plastic body with a raised arrowhead (4) molded into its center section that indicates the direction of the flow through the valve, and three barbed hose nipples (1 and 3) formed in a Y configuration on the outside circumference of the center section of the valve body. The check valve cannot be adjusted or repaired and, if ineffective or damaged, it must be replaced. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Check Valve, Washer > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 15461 Check Valve: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The check valve provides more than one function in this application. It serves as a Y connector fitting between the engine compartment and washer nozzle sections of the washer supply hose. It prevents washer fluid from draining out of the washer supply hoses back to the washer reservoir. This drain-back would result in a lengthy delay from when the washer switch is actuated until washer fluid was dispensed through the washer nozzles, because the washer pump would have to refill the washer plumbing from the reservoir to the nozzles. Such a drain-back condition could also result in water, dirt, or other outside contaminants being siphoned into the washer system through the washer nozzle orifice. This water could subsequently freeze and plug the nozzle, while other contaminants could interfere with proper nozzle operation and cause improper nozzle spray patterns. In addition, the check valve prevents washer fluid from siphoning through the washer nozzles after the washer system is turned OFF. When the washer pump pressurizes and pumps washer fluid from the reservoir through the washer plumbing, the fluid pressure (5) unseats a diaphragm (3) from over a sump well within the valve by overriding the pressure applied to a piston (2) by a spring (1). With the diaphragm unseated, washer fluid is allowed to flow toward the two washer nozzles (4). When the washer pump stops operating, the spring pressure on the piston seats the diaphragm over the sump well in the valve and fluid flow in either direction within the washer plumbing is prevented. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Check Valve, Washer > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Check Valve: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL 1. Remove both wiper arms from the wiper pivots. See: Wiper Arm/Service and Repair/Wiper Arms - Removal . 2. Unlatch and open the hood. 3. Remove the cowl plenum cover/grille panel from over the cowl plenum. See: Body and Frame/Cowl/Cowl Moulding / Trim/Service and Repair/Removal . 4. From the underside of the cowl plenum cover/grille panel (5), disconnect the cowl plenum (4) and washer nozzle hoses (1 and 6) from the three barbed nipples of the check valve (2). 5. Remove the check valve from the underside of the cowl plenum cover/grille panel. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Check Valve, Washer > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 15464 Check Valve: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION 1. Position the check valve (2) to the underside of the cowl plenum cover/grille panel (5). Be certain that the flow direction arrow molded into the check valve body is oriented towards the washer nozzles. 2. From the underside of the cowl plenum cover/grille panel, reconnect the cowl plenum (4) and washer nozzle hoses (1 and 6) to the three barbed nipples of the check valve. 3. Reinstall the cowl plenum cover/grille panel over the cowl plenum. See: Body and Frame/Cowl/Cowl Moulding / Trim/Service and Repair/Installation . 4. Close and latch the hood. 5. Reinstall both wiper arms onto the wiper pivots. See: Wiper Arm/Service and Repair/Wiper Arms - Installation . Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Relays and Modules - Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Relay > Component Information > Locations Wiper Relay: Locations Dodge Ram 2006-2008, 1500-5500 all, do not use a wiper relay. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Relays and Modules - Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 15469 Wiper Relay: Description and Operation Dodge Ram 2006-2009, does not use a wiper relay. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Sensors and Switches - Wiper and Washer Systems > Washer Fluid Level Switch > Component Information > Locations Washer Fluid Level Switch: Locations Component ID: 516 Component : SWITCH-WASHER FLUID LEVEL Connector: Name : SWITCH-WASHER FLUID LEVEL Color : LT. GRAY # of pins : 2 Pin Circuit Description 1 G932 20VT/TN WASHER FLUID SWITCH RETURN 2 W1 20BR/TN WASHER FLUID SWITCH SENSE Component Location - 29 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Sensors and Switches - Wiper and Washer Systems > Washer Fluid Level Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 15474 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Sensors and Switches - Wiper and Washer Systems > Washer Fluid Level Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 15475 Washer Fluid Level Switch: Diagrams Component ID: 516 Component : SWITCH-WASHER FLUID LEVEL Connector: Name : SWITCH-WASHER FLUID LEVEL Color : LT. GRAY # of pins : 2 Pin Circuit Description 1 G932 20VT/TN WASHER FLUID SWITCH RETURN 2 W1 20BR/TN WASHER FLUID SWITCH SENSE Component Location - 29 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Sensors and Switches - Wiper and Washer Systems > Washer Fluid Level Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 15476 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Sensors and Switches - Wiper and Washer Systems > Washer Fluid Level Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Washer Fluid Level Switch: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The washer fluid level switch (3) is a two-pin conductivity sensor with no moving parts mounted on the rearward facing side of the washer reservoir adjacent to the washer pump/motor unit in the engine compartment. Only the molded plastic switch mounting flange and the integral connector receptacle (4) are visible when the switch is installed in the reservoir. A short nipple formation (1) extends from the inner surface of the switch mounting flange, and a barb on the nipple is pressed through a rubber grommet seal installed in the mounting hole of the reservoir. Two over-molded pins or electrodes (2) extend from the back of the nipple formation. The washer fluid level switch cannot be adjusted or repaired. If ineffective or damaged, the switch must be replaced. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Sensors and Switches - Wiper and Washer Systems > Washer Fluid Level Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 15479 Washer Fluid Level Switch: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The washer fluid level switch uses fluid conductivity to monitor the level of the washer fluid in the washer reservoir. Electricity is conducted between the two switch pins or electrodes only when they are immersed in the washer fluid, which closes the switch circuit. When the fluid level in the washer reservoir falls below the pins, electrical current cannot be conducted and the switch becomes an open circuit, which signals a low fluid condition. In order to prevent an electrical charge from accumulating in the electrical leads of the switch, the switch receives current that is pulsed from the Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) located in the engine compartment near the battery. The TIPM monitors the switch return signal and is programmed to respond to three consecutive open switch readings by sending an electronic washer fluid indicator lamp-ON message to the ElectroMechanical Instrument Cluster (EMIC) (also known as the Cab Compartment Node/CCN) over the Controller Area Network (CAN) data bus. The EMIC responds to this message by illuminating the washer fluid indicator and by sounding an audible chime tone warning. The washer fluid level switch is connected to the vehicle electrical system through a dedicated take out and connector of the right (gasoline engines) or left (diesel engines) headlamp and dash wire harness. The switch is connected in series between a sensor return circuit and the washer fluid switch sense input to the TIPM. The washer fluid level switch and the hard wired circuits between the switch and the TIPM may be diagnosed using conventional diagnostic tools and procedures. Refer to the appropriate wiring information. However, conventional diagnostic methods will not prove conclusive in the diagnosis of the washer fluid level switch or the electronic controls or communication between other modules and devices that provide some features of the wiper and washer systems. The most reliable, efficient, and accurate means to diagnose the washer fluid level switch or the electronic controls and communication related to washer fluid level switch operation requires the use of a diagnostic scan tool. Refer to the appropriate diagnostic information. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Sensors and Switches - Wiper and Washer Systems > Washer Fluid Level Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Washer Fluid Level Switch: Service and Repair Removal Diesel Engine DIESEL ENGINE NOTE: The washer fluid level switch can be removed from the washer reservoir without removing the reservoir from the vehicle. 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. 2. Disconnect the washer hose (4) from the barbed outlet nipple of the washer pump/motor unit (3) and allow the washer fluid to drain into a clean container for reuse. 3. Disconnect the left headlamp and dash wire harness (1) connector for the washer fluid level switch (5) from the switch connector receptacle. 4. Using a trim stick or another suitable wide flat-bladed tool, gently pry the barbed nipple of the washer fluid level switch out of the rubber grommet seal in the washer reservoir sump (2). Care must be taken not to damage the reservoir. 5. Remove the switch from the reservoir. 6. Remove the rubber grommet seal from the mounting hole in the washer reservoir and discard. Gasoline Engine GASOLINE ENGINE NOTE: The washer fluid level switch can be removed from the washer reservoir without removing the reservoir from the vehicle. 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. 2. Disconnect the washer hose (1) from the barbed outlet nipple of the washer pump/motor unit (5) and allow the washer fluid to drain into a clean container for reuse. 3. Disconnect the right headlamp and dash wire harness (4) connector for the washer fluid level switch (3) from the switch connector receptacle. 4. Using a trim stick or another suitable wide flat-bladed tool, gently pry the barbed nipple of the washer fluid level switch out of the rubber grommet seal in the washer reservoir sump (2). Care must be taken not to damage the reservoir. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Sensors and Switches - Wiper and Washer Systems > Washer Fluid Level Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 15482 5. Remove the switch from the reservoir. 6. Remove the rubber grommet seal from the mounting hole in the washer reservoir and discard. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Sensors and Switches - Wiper and Washer Systems > Washer Fluid Level Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 15483 Washer Fluid Level Switch: Service and Repair Installation Diesel Engine DIESEL ENGINE 1. Install a new rubber grommet seal into the washer fluid level switch mounting hole in the washer reservoir (2). Always use a new rubber grommet seal on the reservoir. 2. Insert the nipple formation of the switch (5) through the rubber grommet seal and in the reservoir. 3. Using hand pressure, press firmly and evenly on the switch mounting flange until the barbed nipple is fully seated in the rubber grommet seal in the reservoir. The flat edge of the switch mounting flange should be pointed upward. 4. Reconnect the left headlamp and dash wire harness (1) connector for the switch to the switch connector receptacle. 5. Reconnect the removed washer hose (4) to the barbed outlet nipple of the washer pump/motor unit (3). 6. Refill the washer reservoir with the washer fluid drained from the reservoir during the removal procedure. 7. Reconnect the battery negative cable. Gasoline Engine GASOLINE ENGINE 1. Install a new rubber grommet seal into the washer fluid level switch mounting hole in the washer reservoir (2). Always use a new rubber grommet seal on the reservoir. 2. Insert the nipple formation of the switch (3) through the rubber grommet seal in the reservoir. 3. Using hand pressure, press firmly and evenly on the switch mounting flange until the barbed nipple is fully seated in the rubber grommet seal in the reservoir. The flat edge of the switch mounting flange should be pointed upward. 4. Reconnect the right headlamp and dash wire harness (4) connector to the switch connector receptacle. 5. Reconnect the removed washer hose (1) to the barbed outlet nipple of the washer pump/motor unit (5). 6. Refill the washer reservoir with the washer fluid drained from the reservoir during the removal procedure. 7. Reconnect the battery negative cable. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Washer Fluid Level Indicator > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Washer Fluid Level Indicator: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION A washer fluid indicator is standard equipment on all instrument clusters. This indicator is located within the odometer/trip odometer Vacuum Fluorescent Display (VFD) unit. However, on vehicles equipped with the optional Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) the washer fluid indicator in the odometer VFD is electronically suppressed so as not to duplicate indications that are provided by the EVIC. The washer fluid indicator consists of the text LoWASH , which appears in place of the odometer/trip odometer information in the odometer VFD unit. The odometer VFD is soldered onto the cluster electronic circuit board and is visible through a window with a smoked clear lens located on the lower edge of the speedometer gauge dial face of the cluster overlay. The dark lens over the VFD prevents it from being clearly visible when it is not illuminated. The washer fluid indicator appears in the same blue-green color and at the same lighting level as the odometer/trip odometer information when it is illuminated by the instrument cluster electronic circuit board. The washer fluid indicator is serviced as a unit with the instrument cluster. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Washer Fluid Level Indicator > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 15488 Washer Fluid Level Indicator: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The washer fluid indicator gives an indication to the vehicle operator that the fluid level in the washer reservoir is low. This indicator is controlled by the instrument cluster logic circuit based upon cluster programming and electronic messages received by the cluster from the Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) over the Controller Area Network (CAN) data bus. The washer fluid indicator function of the Vacuum Fluorescent Display (VFD) is completely controlled by the instrument cluster logic circuit, and that logic will only allow this indicator to operate when the instrument cluster receives a battery current input on the fused ignition switch output (run-start) circuit. Therefore, the VFD washer fluid indication will always be OFF when the ignition switch is in any position except ON or START. The instrument cluster will turn ON the washer fluid indicator for the following reasons: - Washer Fluid Indicator Lamp-On Message - Each time the cluster receives an electronic washer fluid indicator lamp-ON message from the TIPM indicating that a low washer condition has been detected for 60 consecutive seconds, the washer fluid indicator is illuminated and a single chime tone is sounded. The indicator remains illuminated until the cluster receives lamp-OFF messages for 60 consecutive seconds from the TIPM, or until the ignition switch is turned to the OFF position, whichever occurs first. The chime tone feature will only repeat during the same ignition cycle if the washer fluid indicator is cycled OFF and then ON again by the appropriate lamp-ON and lamp-OFF messages from the TIPM. The TIPM continually monitors the washer fluid level switch in the washer reservoir to determine the level of the washer fluid. The TIPM then sends the proper lamp-ON or lamp-OFF message to the ElectroMechanical Instrument Cluster (EMIC) (also known as the Cab Compartment Node/CCN). For further diagnosis of the washer fluid indicator or the instrument cluster circuitry that controls the indicator, Refer to appropriate testing. For proper diagnosis of the washer fluid level switch, the TIPM, the EMIC, the CAN data bus or the electronic communication related to washer fluid indicator operation a diagnostic scan tool is required. Refer to the appropriate diagnostic information. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Washer Fluid Level Switch > Component Information > Locations Washer Fluid Level Switch: Locations Component ID: 516 Component : SWITCH-WASHER FLUID LEVEL Connector: Name : SWITCH-WASHER FLUID LEVEL Color : LT. GRAY # of pins : 2 Pin Circuit Description 1 G932 20VT/TN WASHER FLUID SWITCH RETURN 2 W1 20BR/TN WASHER FLUID SWITCH SENSE Component Location - 29 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Washer Fluid Level Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 15492 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Washer Fluid Level Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 15493 Washer Fluid Level Switch: Diagrams Component ID: 516 Component : SWITCH-WASHER FLUID LEVEL Connector: Name : SWITCH-WASHER FLUID LEVEL Color : LT. GRAY # of pins : 2 Pin Circuit Description 1 G932 20VT/TN WASHER FLUID SWITCH RETURN 2 W1 20BR/TN WASHER FLUID SWITCH SENSE Component Location - 29 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Washer Fluid Level Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 15494 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Washer Fluid Level Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Washer Fluid Level Switch: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The washer fluid level switch (3) is a two-pin conductivity sensor with no moving parts mounted on the rearward facing side of the washer reservoir adjacent to the washer pump/motor unit in the engine compartment. Only the molded plastic switch mounting flange and the integral connector receptacle (4) are visible when the switch is installed in the reservoir. A short nipple formation (1) extends from the inner surface of the switch mounting flange, and a barb on the nipple is pressed through a rubber grommet seal installed in the mounting hole of the reservoir. Two over-molded pins or electrodes (2) extend from the back of the nipple formation. The washer fluid level switch cannot be adjusted or repaired. If ineffective or damaged, the switch must be replaced. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Washer Fluid Level Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 15497 Washer Fluid Level Switch: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The washer fluid level switch uses fluid conductivity to monitor the level of the washer fluid in the washer reservoir. Electricity is conducted between the two switch pins or electrodes only when they are immersed in the washer fluid, which closes the switch circuit. When the fluid level in the washer reservoir falls below the pins, electrical current cannot be conducted and the switch becomes an open circuit, which signals a low fluid condition. In order to prevent an electrical charge from accumulating in the electrical leads of the switch, the switch receives current that is pulsed from the Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) located in the engine compartment near the battery. The TIPM monitors the switch return signal and is programmed to respond to three consecutive open switch readings by sending an electronic washer fluid indicator lamp-ON message to the ElectroMechanical Instrument Cluster (EMIC) (also known as the Cab Compartment Node/CCN) over the Controller Area Network (CAN) data bus. The EMIC responds to this message by illuminating the washer fluid indicator and by sounding an audible chime tone warning. The washer fluid level switch is connected to the vehicle electrical system through a dedicated take out and connector of the right (gasoline engines) or left (diesel engines) headlamp and dash wire harness. The switch is connected in series between a sensor return circuit and the washer fluid switch sense input to the TIPM. The washer fluid level switch and the hard wired circuits between the switch and the TIPM may be diagnosed using conventional diagnostic tools and procedures. Refer to the appropriate wiring information. However, conventional diagnostic methods will not prove conclusive in the diagnosis of the washer fluid level switch or the electronic controls or communication between other modules and devices that provide some features of the wiper and washer systems. The most reliable, efficient, and accurate means to diagnose the washer fluid level switch or the electronic controls and communication related to washer fluid level switch operation requires the use of a diagnostic scan tool. Refer to the appropriate diagnostic information. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Washer Fluid Level Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Washer Fluid Level Switch: Service and Repair Removal Diesel Engine DIESEL ENGINE NOTE: The washer fluid level switch can be removed from the washer reservoir without removing the reservoir from the vehicle. 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. 2. Disconnect the washer hose (4) from the barbed outlet nipple of the washer pump/motor unit (3) and allow the washer fluid to drain into a clean container for reuse. 3. Disconnect the left headlamp and dash wire harness (1) connector for the washer fluid level switch (5) from the switch connector receptacle. 4. Using a trim stick or another suitable wide flat-bladed tool, gently pry the barbed nipple of the washer fluid level switch out of the rubber grommet seal in the washer reservoir sump (2). Care must be taken not to damage the reservoir. 5. Remove the switch from the reservoir. 6. Remove the rubber grommet seal from the mounting hole in the washer reservoir and discard. Gasoline Engine GASOLINE ENGINE NOTE: The washer fluid level switch can be removed from the washer reservoir without removing the reservoir from the vehicle. 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. 2. Disconnect the washer hose (1) from the barbed outlet nipple of the washer pump/motor unit (5) and allow the washer fluid to drain into a clean container for reuse. 3. Disconnect the right headlamp and dash wire harness (4) connector for the washer fluid level switch (3) from the switch connector receptacle. 4. Using a trim stick or another suitable wide flat-bladed tool, gently pry the barbed nipple of the washer fluid level switch out of the rubber grommet seal in the washer reservoir sump (2). Care must be taken not to damage the reservoir. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Washer Fluid Level Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 15500 5. Remove the switch from the reservoir. 6. Remove the rubber grommet seal from the mounting hole in the washer reservoir and discard. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Washer Fluid Level Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 15501 Washer Fluid Level Switch: Service and Repair Installation Diesel Engine DIESEL ENGINE 1. Install a new rubber grommet seal into the washer fluid level switch mounting hole in the washer reservoir (2). Always use a new rubber grommet seal on the reservoir. 2. Insert the nipple formation of the switch (5) through the rubber grommet seal and in the reservoir. 3. Using hand pressure, press firmly and evenly on the switch mounting flange until the barbed nipple is fully seated in the rubber grommet seal in the reservoir. The flat edge of the switch mounting flange should be pointed upward. 4. Reconnect the left headlamp and dash wire harness (1) connector for the switch to the switch connector receptacle. 5. Reconnect the removed washer hose (4) to the barbed outlet nipple of the washer pump/motor unit (3). 6. Refill the washer reservoir with the washer fluid drained from the reservoir during the removal procedure. 7. Reconnect the battery negative cable. Gasoline Engine GASOLINE ENGINE 1. Install a new rubber grommet seal into the washer fluid level switch mounting hole in the washer reservoir (2). Always use a new rubber grommet seal on the reservoir. 2. Insert the nipple formation of the switch (3) through the rubber grommet seal in the reservoir. 3. Using hand pressure, press firmly and evenly on the switch mounting flange until the barbed nipple is fully seated in the rubber grommet seal in the reservoir. The flat edge of the switch mounting flange should be pointed upward. 4. Reconnect the right headlamp and dash wire harness (4) connector to the switch connector receptacle. 5. Reconnect the removed washer hose (1) to the barbed outlet nipple of the washer pump/motor unit (5). 6. Refill the washer reservoir with the washer fluid drained from the reservoir during the removal procedure. 7. Reconnect the battery negative cable. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield Washer Hose > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Windshield Washer Hose: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The washer plumbing consists of a small diameter rubber reservoir washer hose that is routed from the barbed outlet nipple of the electric washer pump/motor unit on the washer reservoir through a trough molded into the back of the reservoir above the washer pump to the engine compartment washer hose to the right side of the engine cooling module. On vehicles equipped with an optional diesel engine, the reservoir washer hose is routed through routing clips on the top of the radiator fan shroud from the washer reservoir on the left side of the radiator to the engine compartment washer hose on the right side of the radiator. The engine compartment washer hose is contained within the right headlamp and dash wire harness (2), which is routed through the engine compartment along the top of the right front fender wheel house to the dash panel. This hose is connected to the washer reservoir washer hose at one end (5) and to the cowl plenum washer hose at the other end (3) with molded plastic in-line fittings that have a barbed nipple on each end. The cowl plenum washer hose (4) is routed from the engine compartment into the cowl plenum area through a trough formation located near the right end of the cowl plenum cover/grille panel. The cowl plenum washer hose is connected to the washer system check valve/Y fitting on the underside of the cowl plenum cover/grille panel. The cowl plenum washer hose and the two washer nozzle hoses are routed through integral routing clips on the underside of the cowl plenum cover/grille panel. The cowl plenum washer hose is connected to one nipple on the Y fitting and the two washer nozzle hoses are connected to the other two nipples. The washer nozzle hoses are then routed along the underside of the cowl plenum cover/grille panel to the two washer nozzles. Washer hose is available for service only as roll stock, which must then be cut to length. The molded plastic washer hose fittings cannot be repaired. If these fittings are ineffective or damaged, they must be replaced. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield Washer Hose > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 15506 Windshield Washer Hose: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION Washer fluid in the washer reservoir is pressurized and fed by the washer pump/motor through the washer system plumbing and fittings to the two washer nozzles. Whenever routing the washer hose or a wire harness containing a washer hose, it must be routed away from hot, sharp, or moving parts; and, sharp bends that might pinch the hose must be avoided. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield Washer Pump > Component Information > Locations Windshield Washer Pump: Locations Component ID: 239 Component : PUMP-WASHER-WINDSHIELD Connector: Name : PUMP-WASHER-WINDSHIELD Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Pin Circuit Description 1 Z945 20BK GROUND 2 W10 20BR WASHER PUMP MOTOR CONTROL Component Location - 29 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield Washer Pump > Component Information > Locations > Page 15510 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield Washer Pump > Component Information > Locations > Page 15511 Windshield Washer Pump: Diagrams Component ID: 239 Component : PUMP-WASHER-WINDSHIELD Connector: Name : PUMP-WASHER-WINDSHIELD Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Pin Circuit Description 1 Z945 20BK GROUND 2 W10 20BR WASHER PUMP MOTOR CONTROL Component Location - 29 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield Washer Pump > Component Information > Locations > Page 15512 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield Washer Pump > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Windshield Washer Pump: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The washer pump/motor unit (1) is located on the rearward facing surface of the washer reservoir, in the right (gasoline engines) or left (diesel engines) front corner of the engine compartment. A small permanently lubricated and sealed electric motor is coupled to the rotor-type washer pump. A seal flange with a barbed inlet nipple (6) on the pump housing passes through a rubber grommet seal installed in a dedicated mounting hole of the washer reservoir. A removable molded plastic filter screen (7) inserted into the inlet nipple prevents most debris from entering the pump housing. When the pump is installed in the reservoir a barbed outlet nipple (5) on the pump housing connects the unit to the washer system through a short washer reservoir hose. The washer pump/motor unit is retained on the reservoir by the interference fit between the barbed pump inlet nipple and the grommet seal, which is a light press fit. The top of the washer pump is also secured to the washer reservoir by the use of a snap post (2) on the motor housing and a snap post receptacle molded into the reservoir that allows for mounting of the washer pump without the use of fasteners. An integral connector receptacle (3) on the top of the motor housing connects the unit to the vehicle electrical system. The washer pump/motor unit cannot be repaired. If ineffective or damaged, the entire washer pump/motor unit must be replaced. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield Washer Pump > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 15515 Windshield Washer Pump: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The washer pump/motor unit features a small Direct Current (DC) electric motor. The motor is connected to the vehicle electrical system through a single take out and two-cavity connector of the right (gasoline engines) or left (diesel engines) headlamp and dash wire harness. The motor is grounded at all times through another take out of the right (gasoline engines) or left (diesel engines) headlamp and dash wire harness. On vehicles with a gasoline engine, a single eyelet terminal connector is secured by a nut to a ground stud located on the right front fender inner shield in the engine compartment. On vehicles with a diesel engine, an eyelet terminal connector is secured by a ground screw to the left front fender inner shield in the engine compartment. The motor receives battery current on a washer pump/motor control circuit. The washer pump/motor control circuit is energized through a high side driver within the Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) whenever the TIPM receives an electronic message requesting washer system operation from the ElectroMechanical Instrument Cluster (EMIC) (also known as the Cab Compartment Node/CCN) over the Controller Area Network (CAN) data bus. The EMIC monitors a resistor multiplexed hard wired input from the momentary washer switch contacts within the multi-function switch on the steering column to determine when it should issue the electronic message requesting washer system operation. Washer fluid is gravity-fed from the washer reservoir to the inlet side of the washer pump. When the pump motor is energized, the motor spins the rotor within the washer pump. The spinning pump rotor pressurizes the washer fluid and forces it through the pump outlet nipple, the washer plumbing, and the washer nozzles onto the windshield glass. The washer pump/motor unit and the hard wired motor control circuits from the TIPM may be diagnosed using conventional diagnostic tools and procedures. Refer to the appropriate wiring information. However, conventional diagnostic methods will not prove conclusive in the diagnosis of the washer pump/motor unit or the electronic controls or communication between other modules and devices that provide some features of the wiper and washer system. The most reliable, efficient, and accurate means to diagnose the washer pump/motor unit or the electronic controls and communication related to washer pump/motor unit operation requires the use of a diagnostic scan tool. Refer to the appropriate diagnostic information. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield Washer Pump > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Windshield Washer Pump: Service and Repair Removal Diesel Engine DIESEL ENGINE NOTE: The washer pump/motor unit can be removed from the washer reservoir without removing the reservoir from the vehicle. 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. 2. Disconnect the washer hose from the barbed outlet nipple (8) of the washer pump/motor unit and allow the washer fluid to drain into a clean container for reuse. 3. Disconnect the left headlamp and dash wire harness connector from the washer pump/motor unit connector receptacle (1). 4. Firmly grasp the top of the washer pump/motor housing. 5. Pull lightly outward on the top of the washer pump/motor housing, away from the washer reservoir (6) far enough to disengage the snap post (2) on the top of the motor from the receptacle (3) in the reservoir. 6. Pull the washer pump/motor unit straight out from the washer reservoir far enough to disengage the barbed pump inlet nipple (7) from the rubber grommet seal (4) in the reservoir. 7. Remove the washer pump/motor unit from behind the washer reservoir. 8. Remove the rubber grommet seal from the pump mounting hole in the reservoir and discard. Gasoline Engine GASOLINE ENGINE NOTE: The washer pump/motor unit can be removed from the washer reservoir without removing the reservoir from the vehicle. 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. 2. Disconnect the washer hose from the barbed outlet nipple (8) of the washer pump/motor unit and allow the washer fluid to drain into a clean container for reuse. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield Washer Pump > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 15518 3. Disconnect the right headlamp and dash wire harness connector from the washer pump/motor unit connector receptacle (1). 4. Firmly grasp the top of the washer pump/motor housing. 5. Pull lightly outward on the top of the washer pump/motor housing, away from the washer reservoir (6) far enough to disengage the snap post (2) on the top of the motor from the receptacle (3) in the reservoir. 6. Pull the washer pump/motor unit straight out from the washer reservoir far enough to disengage the barbed pump inlet nipple (7) from the rubber grommet seal (4) in the reservoir. 7. Remove the washer pump/motor unit from behind the washer reservoir. 8. Remove the rubber grommet seal from the washer pump mounting hole in the reservoir and discard. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield Washer Pump > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 15519 Windshield Washer Pump: Service and Repair Installation Diesel Engine DIESEL ENGINE 1. Install a new rubber grommet seal (4) into the washer pump mounting hole in the washer reservoir (6). Always use a new rubber grommet seal on the reservoir. 2. Position the barbed inlet nipple (7) of the washer pump to the rubber grommet seal in the reservoir. 3. Using hand pressure, press firmly and evenly on the washer pump/motor unit until the barbed inlet nipple is fully seated in the rubber grommet seal in the pump mounting hole of the reservoir. 4. Align the snap post (2) on the top of the pump motor housing with the snap post receptacle (3) in the washer reservoir. 5. Using hand pressure, press firmly and evenly on the top of washer pump/motor unit until the snap post snaps into the receptacle. 6. Reconnect the washer reservoir hose to the barbed pump outlet nipple (8). 7. Reconnect the left headlamp and dash wire harness connector to the washer pump/motor unit connector receptacle (1). 8. Refill the washer reservoir with the washer fluid drained from the reservoir during the removal procedure. 9. Reconnect the battery negative cable. Gasoline Engine GASOLINE ENGINE 1. Install a new rubber grommet seal (4) into the washer pump mounting hole in the washer reservoir (6). Always use a new rubber grommet seal on the reservoir. 2. Position the barbed inlet nipple (7) of the washer pump to the rubber grommet seal in the reservoir. 3. Using hand pressure, press firmly and evenly on the washer pump/motor unit until the barbed inlet nipple is fully seated in the rubber grommet seal in the pump mounting hole of the reservoir. 4. Align the snap post (2) on the top of the pump motor housing with the snap post receptacle (3) in the washer reservoir. 5. Using hand pressure, press firmly and evenly on the top of washer pump/motor unit until the snap post snaps into the receptacle. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield Washer Pump > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 15520 6. Reconnect the reservoir washer hose to the barbed pump outlet nipple (8). 7. Reconnect the right headlamp and dash wire harness connector to the washer pump/motor unit connector receptacle (1). 8. Refill the washer reservoir with the washer fluid drained from the reservoir during the removal procedure. 9. Reconnect the battery negative cable. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield Washer Reservoir > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Windshield Washer Reservoir: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION Except on 5.9L diesel vehicles, the molded plastic washer fluid reservoir (1) is integral to the engine coolant overflow bottle. On gas vehicles, the reservoir (4) is located on the right rearward facing surface of the engine cooling module shroud in the right front corner of the engine compartment. On 5.9L diesel vehicles, the molded plastic washer fluid reservoir is separate from the engine coolant overflow bottle and is mounted on the rearward facing surface of the left vertical member of the radiator support in the engine compartment. On 6.7L diesel, the molded plastic washer fluid reservoir is again integral to the engine coolant overflow bottle and is mounted on the rearward facing surface of the left vertical member of the radiator support in the engine compartment. These reservoirs are constructed of a translucent plastic that allows the fluid level to be inspected without removing the reservoir caps. A bright yellow plastic filler cap (2) with a rubber seal snaps over the open end of the washer reservoir filler neck and can be easily distinguished from the coolant overflow bottle cap (3) by an International Control and Display Symbol icon for Windshield Washer and the text WASHER FLUID ONLY molded into it. The cap hinges on and is secured to a molded-in hook formation on the top of the reservoir just behind the filler neck when it is removed for inspecting or adjusting the fluid level in the reservoir. Except on diesel vehicles, the washer reservoir is secured to the cooling module radiator shroud with two integral tabs at the bottom, and through two integral mounting brackets with two screws at the top. The two bottom tabs are inserted into two slots near the bottom of the shroud, while the two screws secure the mounting brackets to integral mounting points near the top of the shroud. On diesel vehicles, the washer reservoir is secured through an integral post formation at the bottom into a bracket at the base of the left vertical member of the radiator support and with two screws through integral mounting brackets to the front end structure. There are separate, dedicated holes on the lower end of each reservoir provided for the mounting of the washer/pump motor unit (6) and the washer fluid level switch (5). An integral molded receptacle for the washer pump and a routing trough for the washer hose are molded into each reservoir to allow for mounting of the washer pump/motor unit without the use of fasteners. Except on 5.9L diesel vehicles, the washer reservoir is serviced only as a unit with the engine coolant reserve bottle. A washer reservoir cannot be repaired and, if ineffective or damaged, the unit must be replaced. The washer pump/motor unit, the washer fluid level switch, their rubber grommet seals, as well as the reservoir filler cap are each available for individual service replacement. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield Washer Reservoir > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 15525 Windshield Washer Reservoir: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The washer fluid reservoir provides a secure, on-vehicle storage location for a large reserve of washer fluid for operation of the washer system. The washer reservoir filler neck provides a clearly marked and readily accessible point from which to add washer fluid to the reservoir. The washer/pump motor unit is located in a sump area near the bottom of the reservoir to be certain that washer fluid will be available to the pump as the fluid level in the reservoir becomes depleted. The washer fluid level switch is mounted just above the washer pump inlet nipple in the sump area of the reservoir so that there will be adequate warning to the vehicle operator that the washer fluid level is low, well before the washer system will no longer operate. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield Washer Reservoir > Component Information > Service and Repair > Washer Reservoir - Removal Windshield Washer Reservoir: Service and Repair Washer Reservoir - Removal Gasoline Engine GASOLINE ENGINE 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. 2. Disconnect the coolant overflow hose (3) from the nipple on the radiator filler neck. It is not necessary to open or drain the engine cooling system. See: Engine, Cooling and Exhaust/Cooling System/Coolant Reservoir/Service and Repair/Coolant Recovery Container - Removal . 3. Disconnect the reservoir washer hose (4) from the barbed nipple of the inline fitting at the engine compartment washer hose in the right headlamp and dash wire harness and allow the washer fluid to drain from the reservoir into a clean container for reuse. 4. Disconnect the right headlamp and dash wire harness connector from the washer fluid level switch connector receptacle (5). 5. Disconnect the right headlamp and dash wire harness connector from the washer pump/motor unit connector receptacle (7). 6. Remove the two screws (2) that secure the reservoir mounting brackets to the top of the radiator shroud. 7. Grasp the bottom of the washer reservoir (1) firmly with both hands and pull the unit sharply upward to disengage the locking feature on the washer reservoir from the depression in the radiator shroud. 8. Continue lifting the washer reservoir upward far enough to disengage the two mounting tabs at the bottom from the two slots (6) at the bottom of the radiator shroud. 9. Remove the washer reservoir from the right side of the engine compartment. 5.9L Diesel Engine 5.9L DIESEL ENGINE 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. 2. Disengage the reservoir washer hose (4) from the integral routing clips on the top of the radiator fan shroud. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield Washer Reservoir > Component Information > Service and Repair > Washer Reservoir - Removal > Page 15528 3. Disconnect the reservoir washer hose from the barbed nipple of the inline fitting at the engine compartment washer hose in the right headlamp and dash wire harness and allow the washer fluid to drain from the reservoir into a clean container for reuse. 4. Disconnect the left headlamp and dash wire harness (1) connector from the washer fluid level switch connector receptacle (5). 5. Disconnect the left headlamp and dash wire harness connector from the washer pump/motor unit connector receptacle (3). 6. Remove the two screws (3) that secure the washer reservoir (4) to the left vertical member of the radiator support (2). 7. Lift the washer reservoir far enough to disengage the locator post on the bottom of the washer reservoir from the locator hole in the bracket at the base of the left vertical member of the radiator support. 8. Remove the washer reservoir from the left side of the engine compartment. 6.7L Diesel Engine 6.7L DIESEL ENGINE 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. 2. Disconnect the coolant overflow hose from the nipple on the radiator filler neck. It is not necessary to open or drain the engine cooling system. See: Engine, Cooling and Exhaust/Cooling System/Coolant Reservoir/Service and Repair/Coolant Recovery Container - Removal . 3. Disengage the reservoir washer hose from the integral routing clips on the top of the radiator fan shroud. 4. Disconnect the reservoir washer hose from the barbed nipple of the inline fitting at the engine compartment washer hose in the right headlamp and dash wire harness and allow the washer fluid to drain from the reservoir (2) into a clean container for reuse. 5. Disconnect the left headlamp and dash wire harness connector (5) from the washer fluid level switch connector receptacle (4). 6. Disconnect the left headlamp and dash wire harness connector (1) from the washer pump/motor unit connector receptacle (3). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield Washer Reservoir > Component Information > Service and Repair > Washer Reservoir - Removal > Page 15529 7. Remove the two screws (2) that secure the washer reservoir (1) to the left vertical member and left lower horizontal member of the radiator support. 8. Lift the washer reservoir far enough to disengage the locator post (3) on the bottom of the coolant reserve bottle from the locator hole in the bracket (4) at the base of the left vertical member of the radiator support. 9. Remove the washer reservoir from the left side of the engine compartment. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield Washer Reservoir > Component Information > Service and Repair > Washer Reservoir - Removal > Page 15530 Windshield Washer Reservoir: Service and Repair Washer Reservoir - Installation Gasoline Engine GASOLINE ENGINE 1. Position the washer reservoir (1) into the right side of the engine compartment. 2. Align and insert the two mounting tabs at the bottom of the reservoir into the two slots (6) at the bottom of the radiator shroud. 3. Place both hands on the top of the washer reservoir and push the unit downward far enough for the locking feature on the washer reservoir to snap into the depression in the radiator shroud. 4. Install and tighten the two screws (2) that secure the mounting brackets at the top of the reservoir to the mounting provisions at the top of the radiator shroud. Tighten the screws to 7 Nm (60 in. lbs.). 5. Reconnect the right headlamp and dash wire harness connector to the washer pump/motor unit connector receptacle (7). 6. Reconnect the right headlamp and dash wire harness connector to the washer fluid level switch connector receptacle (5). 7. Reconnect the reservoir washer hose (4) to the barbed nipple of the inline fitting at the engine compartment washer hose in the right headlamp and dash wire harness. 8. Reconnect the coolant overflow hose (3) to the nipple on the radiator filler neck. See: Engine, Cooling and Exhaust/Cooling System/Coolant Reservoir/Service and Repair/Coolant Recovery Container - Installation . 9. Refill the washer reservoir with the washer fluid drained from the reservoir during the removal procedure. 10. Reconnect the battery negative cable. 11. Check and adjust the coolant level in the coolant overflow bottle as necessary. See: Engine, Cooling and Exhaust/Cooling System/Service and Repair . 5.9L Diesel Engine 5.9L DIESEL ENGINE 1. Position the locator post on the bottom of the washer reservoir (4) into the locator hole in the bracket at the base of the left vertical member of the radiator support (2) on the left side of the engine compartment. 2. Install and tighten the two screws (3) that secure the washer reservoir to the radiator support. Tighten the screws to 10 Nm (85 in. lbs.). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield Washer Reservoir > Component Information > Service and Repair > Washer Reservoir - Removal > Page 15531 3. Reconnect the left headlamp and dash wire harness (1) connector to the washer pump/motor unit connector receptacle (3). 4. Reconnect the left headlamp and dash wire harness connector to the washer fluid level switch connector receptacle (5). 5. Reconnect the reservoir washer hose (4) to the barbed nipple of the inline fitting at the engine compartment washer hose in the right headlamp and dash wire harness. 6. Engage the reservoir washer hose into the integral routing clips on the top of the radiator fan shroud. 7. Refill the washer reservoir (2) with the washer fluid drained from the reservoir during the removal procedure. 8. Reconnect the battery negative cable. 6.7L Diesel Engine 6.7L DIESEL ENGINE 1. Position the locator post (3) on the bottom of the coolant reserve bottle into the locator hole in the bracket (4) at the base of the left vertical member of the radiator support on the left side of the engine compartment. 2. Install and tighten the two screws (2) that secure the washer reservoir (1) to the left vertical member and left lower horizontal member of the radiator support. Tighten the screws to 10 Nm (85 in. lbs.). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield Washer Reservoir > Component Information > Service and Repair > Washer Reservoir - Removal > Page 15532 3. Reconnect the left headlamp and dash wire harness (1) connector to the washer pump/motor unit connector receptacle (3). 4. Reconnect the left headlamp and dash wire harness connector (5) to the washer fluid level switch connector receptacle (4). 5. Reconnect the reservoir washer hose to the barbed nipple of the inline fitting at the engine compartment washer hose in the right headlamp and dash wire harness. 6. Engage the reservoir washer hose into the integral routing clips on the top of the radiator fan shroud. 7. Reconnect the coolant overflow hose to the nipple on the radiator filler neck. See: Engine, Cooling and Exhaust/Cooling System/Coolant Reservoir/Service and Repair/Coolant Recovery Container - Installation . 8. Refill the washer reservoir (2) with the washer fluid drained from the reservoir during the removal procedure. 9. Reconnect the battery negative cable. 10. Check and adjust the coolant level in the coolant overflow bottle as necessary. See: Engine, Cooling and Exhaust/Cooling System/Service and Repair . Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield Washer Spray Nozzle > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Windshield Washer Spray Nozzle: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The fluidic washer nozzles (1) are constructed of molded plastic. Each nozzle has two integral latches (2) and an anti-rotation tab (4) that secure them in dedicated holes in the cowl plenum cover/grille panel located near the base of the windshield The domed upper surface of the washer nozzle is visible on the top of the plenum cover/grille panel, and the nozzle orifice (5) is oriented towards the windshield glass. The washer plumbing fittings (3) for the washer nozzles extend below the cowl plenum cover/grille panel. The cowl plenum cover/grille panel must be removed from the vehicle to access the nozzles for service. The washer nozzles cannot be adjusted or repaired. If ineffective or damaged, they must be replaced. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield Washer Spray Nozzle > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 15537 Windshield Washer Spray Nozzle: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The two washer nozzles are designed to dispense washer fluid into the wiper pattern area on the outside of the windshield glass. Pressurized washer fluid is fed to each nozzle from the washer reservoir by the washer pump/motor unit through a single hose, which is attached to a barbed nipple on each washer nozzle below the cowl plenum cover/grille panel. A fluidic matrix within the washer nozzle causes the pressurized washer fluid to be emitted from the nozzle orifice as an oscillating stream to more effectively cover a larger area of the glass to be cleaned. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield Washer Spray Nozzle > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Windshield Washer Spray Nozzle: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL 1. Remove both wiper arms from the wiper pivots. See: Wiper Arm/Service and Repair/Wiper Arms - Removal . 2. Unlatch and open the hood. 3. Remove the cowl plenum cover/grille panel from over the cowl plenum. See: Body and Frame/Cowl/Cowl Moulding / Trim/Service and Repair/Removal . 4. From the underside of the cowl plenum cover/grille panel (1), disconnect the washer nozzle hose from the barbed nipple (3) of the washer nozzle. 5. From the underside of the cowl plenum cover/grille panel, release the integral latch features (6) of the washer nozzle and push the nozzle out through the mounting hole toward the top side of the cowl plenum cover/grille panel. 6. Remove the washer nozzle from the top of the cowl plenum cover/grille panel. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield Washer Spray Nozzle > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 15540 Windshield Washer Spray Nozzle: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION 1. From the top of the cowl plenum cover/grille panel, position the nipple end of the washer nozzle through the mounting hole and engage the anti-rotation tabs (2 and 4) of the nozzle into the anti-rotation notches in the mounting hole. 2. Using hand pressure, push firmly and evenly on the top of the washer nozzle until the integral latch features (6) lock into place on the underside of the cowl plenum cover/grille panel (1). 3. From the underside of the cowl plenum cover/grille panel, reconnect the washer hose to the barbed nipple (3) of the washer nozzle. 4. Reinstall the washer nozzle hose into its routing clips on the underside of the cowl plenum cover/grille panel. 5. Reinstall the cowl plenum cover/grille panel over the cowl plenum. See: Body and Frame/Cowl/Cowl Moulding / Trim/Service and Repair/Installation . 6. Close and latch the hood. 7. Reinstall both wiper arms onto the wiper pivots. See: Wiper Arm/Service and Repair/Wiper Arms - Installation . Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Arm > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Wiper Arm: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The wiper arms are the rigid members located between the wiper pivots protruding from the cowl plenum cover/grille panel near the base of the windshield and the wiper blades on the windshield glass. Both wiper arms feature an over-center hinge that allows easy access to the windshield glass for cleaning. The wiper arms each have a die cast metal pivot end (3) with a large internally serrated socket formation at one end. A key (4) within the socket formation indexes the wiper arm to a keyway in the pivot shaft to provide wiper alignment, and a spring-loaded latch (5) on the underside of the pivot end locks the unit to the pivot shaft when it is fully installed. The wide end of a tapered, stamped steel channel (8) hinges on and is secured with a hinge pin (6) to the blade end of both the right and left wiper arm pivot ends. One end of a long, rigid, stamped steel strap (2), with a small hole near its pivot end, is riveted and crimped within the narrow end of the stamped steel channel. The tip of the wiper blade end of this strap is bent back under itself to form a small hook (1). Concealed within the stamped steel channel, one end of a long spring (7) is engaged with a wire hook on the underside of the die cast pivot end, while the other end of the spring is hooked through the small hole in the steel strap. The entire wiper arm has a satin black finish applied to all of its visible surfaces. The right and left wiper arms are unique and are not interchangeable. A wiper arm cannot be adjusted or repaired. If damaged or ineffective, the entire wiper arm unit must be replaced. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Arm > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 15545 Wiper Arm: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The wiper arms are designed to mechanically transmit the motion from the wiper pivots to the wiper blades. The wiper arm must be properly indexed to the wiper pivot in order to maintain the proper wiper blade travel on the glass. The serrated and keyed socket formation in the wiper arm pivot end interlocks with the serrations and keyway on the outer circumference of the wiper pivot shaft, providing positive engagement and alignment of this connection. The latch positively locks the wiper arm to the wiper pivot shaft when the arm is fully installed. The spring-loaded wiper arm hinge controls the down-force applied through the tip of the wiper arm to the wiper blade on the glass. The hook formation on the tip of the wiper arm provides a cradle for securing and latching the wiper blade pivot block to the wiper arm. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Arm > Component Information > Service and Repair > Wiper Arms - Removal Wiper Arm: Service and Repair Wiper Arms - Removal REMOVAL 1. Lift the wiper arm to its over-center position to hold the wiper blade off of the glass and relieve the spring tension on the wiper arm to wiper pivot shaft connection. 2. Pull the latch (2) on the pivot end (1) of the wiper arm outward. 3. Using a slight rocking action, disengage and remove the wiper arm pivot end from the wiper pivot shaft. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Arm > Component Information > Service and Repair > Wiper Arms - Removal > Page 15548 Wiper Arm: Service and Repair Wiper Arms - Installation INSTALLATION NOTE: The right and left wiper arms are not interchangeable. The right wiper arm is slightly longer than the left. Be certain that each wiper arm is installed on the proper wiper pivot. 1. Place the wiper arm hinge in its over-center position prior to attempting installation. 2. The wiper arms are indexed to the wiper pivot shafts with integral keys in the wiper arm pivot ends (1) and keyways in the wiper pivot shafts. Align the key of the wiper arm to the keyway on the wiper pivot shaft. 3. Once the wiper blade is aligned, push the pivot end of the wiper arm down firmly and evenly over the wiper pivot shaft until it is fully engaged. When the wiper arm is fully engaged on the wiper pivot, the spring-loaded latch (2) will snap back into place against the wiper arm pivot end. 4. Gently lower the wiper arm until the wiper blade is in position on the windshield glass. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Blade > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Wiper Blade: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION Each wiper blade is secured by an integral latching pivot block (3) to the hook formation on the tip of each wiper arm, and rests on the glass near the base of the windshield when the wipers are not in operation. The wiper blade consists of the following components: - Superstructure (1) - The superstructure includes several stamped steel bridges and links with claw formations that grip the wiper blade element. Also included in this unit is the latching, molded plastic pivot block that secures the superstructure to the wiper arm. All of the metal components of the wiper blade have a satin black finish applied. - Element (2) - The wiper element or squeegee is the resilient rubber member of the wiper blade that contacts the glass. - Flexor (7) - The flexor is a rigid metal component running along the length of each side of the wiper element where it is gripped by the claws (6) of the superstructure. The right and left wiper blades are 60.00 centimeters (23.62 inches) long, and are interchangeable. They have non-replaceable rubber elements (squeegees). The wiper blades cannot be adjusted or repaired. If ineffective, worn, or damaged the entire wiper blade unit must be replaced. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Blade > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 15553 Wiper Blade: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The wiper blades are moved back and forth across the glass by the wiper arms when the wipers are being operated. The wiper blade superstructure is the flexible frame that grips the wiper blade element and evenly distributes the force of the spring-loaded wiper arm along the length of the element. The combination of the wiper arm force and the flexibility of the superstructure makes the element conform to and maintain proper contact with the glass, even as the blade is moved over the varied curvature that may be encountered across the glass surface. The wiper element flexor provides the claws of the blade superstructure with a rigid, yet flexible component on the element which can be gripped. The rubber element is designed to be stiff enough to maintain an even cleaning edge as it is drawn across the glass, yet resilient enough to conform to the glass surface and flip from one cleaning edge to the other each time the wiper blade changes directions. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Blade > Component Information > Service and Repair > Wiper Blades - Removal Wiper Blade: Service and Repair Wiper Blades - Removal REMOVAL CAUTION: Do not allow the wiper arm to spring back against the glass without the wiper blade in place or the glass may be damaged. NOTE: The notched end of the wiper element flexor should always be oriented towards the end of the wiper blade that is nearest to the wiper pivot. 1. Lift the wiper arm (2) to raise the wiper blade and element (6) off of the glass, until the wiper arm hinge is in its over-center position. 2. To remove the blade from the arm, depress the latch release tab (4) on the pivot block (3) under the tip of the arm downward (toward the wiper element and away from the wiper arm) and slide the blade away from the tip towards the pivot end of the arm far enough to disengage the pivot block from the hook formation (5) on the end of the arm. 3. Extract the hook formation on the tip of the wiper arm through the opening in the wiper blade superstructure (1) just ahead of the pivot block. 4. Gently lower the tip of the wiper arm onto the glass. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Blade > Component Information > Service and Repair > Wiper Blades - Removal > Page 15556 Wiper Blade: Service and Repair Wiper Blades - Installation INSTALLATION CAUTION: Do not allow the wiper arm to spring back against the glass without the wiper blade in place or the glass may be damaged. NOTE: The notched end of the wiper element flexor should always be oriented towards the end of the wiper blade that is nearest to the wiper pivot. 1. Lift the wiper arm (2) off of the windshield glass, until the wiper arm hinge is in its over-center position. 2. Position the wiper blade near the hook formation (5) on the tip of the arm with the notched end of the wiper element flexor oriented towards the end of the wiper arm that is nearest to the wiper pivot. 3. Insert the hook formation on the tip of the arm through the opening in the blade superstructure (1) ahead of the pivot block (3) far enough to engage the pivot block into the hook. 4. Slide the pivot block up into the hook formation on the tip of the wiper arm until the latch release tab (4) snaps into its locked position. Latch engagement will be accompanied by an audible click. 5. Gently lower the wiper blade and element (6) onto the glass. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Wiper Motor: > J11 > Aug > 09 > Recall - Windshield Wiper Motor Replacement Technical Service Bulletin # J11 Date: 090821 Recall - Windshield Wiper Motor Replacement August 2009 Dealer Service Instructions for: Safety Recall J11 Mopar Windshield Wiper Motor Models 2002-2008 (DR) Dodge Truck (1500 series pickup) 2005-2009 (DH) Dodge Truck (2500 series pickup) 2006-2009 (D1) Dodge Truck (3500 series pickup) 2007-2008 (DC) Dodge Truck (3500 series cab chassis) 2008 (DM) Dodge Truck (4500/5500 series cab chassis) NOTE: This recall applies only to the above vehicles that had the original windshield wiper motor replaced with a Mopar service parts windshield wiper motor. IMPORTANT: Some of the involved vehicles may be in dealer used vehicle inventory. Dealers should complete this recall service on these vehicles before retail delivery. Dealers should also perform this recall on vehicles in for service. Involved vehicles can be determined by using the VIP inquiry process. Subject During a prior service appointment, a Mopar service parts windshield wiper motor may have been installed on about 1,000 of the above vehicles. These replacement wiper motors may fail under certain operating conditions. A loss of windshield wipers could limit the driver's visibility and cause a crash without warning. Repair The windshield wiper motor must be inspected. Vehicles equipped with a Mopar service parts windshield wiper motor must have the motor replaced. Parts Information Special Tools No special tools are required to perform this service procedure. Completion Reporting and Reimbursement Claims for vehicles that have been serviced must be submitted on the DealerCONNECT Claim Entry Screen located on the Service tab. Claims submitted will be used by Chrysler to record recall service completions and provide dealer payments. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Wiper Motor: > J11 > Aug > 09 > Recall - Windshield Wiper Motor Replacement > Page 15565 Use the labor operation number and time allowance shown. Add the cost of the recall parts package plus applicable dealer allowance to your claim. NOTE: See the Warranty Administration Manual, Recall Claim Processing Section, for complete recall claim processing instructions. Dealer Notification To view this notification on DealerCONNECT, select "Global Recall System" on the Service tab, then click on the description of this notification. Owner Notification and Service Scheduling All involved vehicle owners known to Chrysler are being notified of the service requirement by first class mail. They are requested to schedule appointments for this service with their dealers. A generic copy of the owner letter is included. Enclosed with each owner letter is an Owner Notification postcard to allow owners to update our records if applicable. Dealers are encouraged to consider alternative scheduling and servicing approaches for this recall. This repair does not require hoists or other full service facility special equipment and is a Chrysler Mobile Service approved repair. Vehicle Lists, Global Recall System, VIP and Dealer Follow Up All involved vehicles have been entered into the DealerCONNECT Global Recall System (GRS) and Vehicle Information Plus (VIP) for dealer inquiry as needed. GRS provides involved dealers with an updated VIN list of their incomplete vehicles. The owner's name, address and phone number are listed if known. Completed vehicles are removed from GRS within several days of repair claim submission. To use this system, click on the "Service" tab and then click on "Global Recall System." Your dealer's VIN list for each recall displayed can be sorted by: those vehicles that were unsold at recall launch, those with a phone number, city, zip code, or VIN sequence. Dealers must perform this repair on all unsold vehicles before retail delivery. Dealers should also use the VIN list to follow up with all owners to schedule appointments for this repair. Recall VIN lists may contain confidential, restricted owner name and address information that was obtained from the Department of Motor Vehicles of various states. Use of this information is permitted for this recall only and is strictly prohibited from all other use. Additional Information If you have any questions or need assistance in completing this action, please contact your Service and Parts District Manager. Customer Services Field Operations Chrysler Group LLC Service Procedure 1. Remove the right and left wiper arms from the wiper pivots. 2. Open the hood. 3. Disconnect and isolate the negative battery cable(s). 4. Remove the plenum cover sound deadening pad. 5. Remove the plastic cowl plenum cover panel from the cowl plenum to expose the wiper motor. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Wiper Motor: > J11 > Aug > 09 > Recall - Windshield Wiper Motor Replacement > Page 15566 6. Inspect the windshield wiper motor: > If the wiper motor has two rubber mounting bushings (Figure 1), the wiper motor is original and is not involved in this recall. Continue with Step 21 of this procedure. NOTE: If the original wiper motor requires some type of repair, the repair cost is the responsibility of the vehicle owner. > If the windshield wiper motor has one rubber mounting bushing (Figure 2), the wiper motor is a Mopar replacement motor and is involved in this recall. Continue with Step 7 of this procedure. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Wiper Motor: > J11 > Aug > 09 > Recall - Windshield Wiper Motor Replacement > Page 15567 7. Disconnect the wiper motor electrical connector (Figure 3). 8. Remove the wiper motor linkage arm retaining nut from the wiper motor shaft (Figure 3). 9. Remove the wiper motor linkage arm from the motor shaft. NOTE: Do not disconnect the wiper motor linkage arm from the remaining wiper linkage. 10. Remove the three wiper motor retaining bolts (Figure 4). 11. Remove the wiper motor from the vehicle. 12. Transfer the rubber isolator from the old wiper motor onto the new wiper motor (Figure 4). 13. Discard the old wiper motor. 14. Place the new wiper motor into position. 15. Install the three wiper motor retaining bolts (Figure 4). 16. Tighten the upper wiper motor retaining bolts to 70 in. lbs. (8 N.m). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Wiper Motor: > J11 > Aug > 09 > Recall - Windshield Wiper Motor Replacement > Page 15568 17. Tighten the lower mounting bolt to 75 in. lbs. (8.5 N.m). 18. Connect the wiper motor electrical connector (Figure 3). 19. Install the wiper motor linkage arm to the wiper motor shaft as shown in Figure 5. NOTE: The arms for the wiper pivots must be pointing downward (forward). 20. Install the wiper motor linkage arm nut and tighten the nut to 204 in.lbs. (23 N.m). 21. Install the plastic cowl plenum cover panel. 22. Install the plenum cover sound deadening pad. 23. Connect the negative battery cable(s) to the negative battery post(s). 24. Close the hood. 25. Install the right and left wiper arms onto the wiper pivots and verify that the wiper arm retaining clips are engaged. 26. Cycle the windshield wipers to verify proper operation and the wiper blade park position. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Wiper Motor: > J11 > Aug > 09 > Recall - Windshield Wiper Motor Replacement > Page 15569 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Wiper Motor: > J10 > Aug > 09 > Recall - Wiper Motor Replacement Technical Service Bulletin # J10 Date: 090810 Recall - Wiper Motor Replacement August 2009 Dealer Service Instructions for: Safety Recall J10 Windshield Wiper Motor Models 2008 (DR) Dodge Truck (1500 series pickup) 2008-2009 (DH) Dodge Truck (2500 series pickup) 2008-2009 (D1) Dodge Truck (3500 series pickup) 2008-2009 (DC) Dodge Truck (3500 series cab chassis) 2008-2009 (DM) Dodge Truck (4500/5500 series cab chassis) NOTE: This recall applies only to the above vehicles built through October 24, 2008 (MDH 102409). IMPORTANT: Some of the involved vehicles may be in dealer new vehicle inventory. Federal law requires you to complete this recall service on these vehicles before retail delivery. Dealers should also consider this requirement to apply to used vehicle inventory and should perform this recall on vehicles in for service. Involved vehicles can be determined by using the VIP inquiry process. Subject The windshield wiper motor on about 65,000 of the above vehicles may fail under certain operating conditions. A loss of windshield wipers could limit the driver's visibility and cause a crash without warning. Repair The windshield wiper motor must be replaced. Parts Information Special Tools No special tools are required to perform this service procedure. Completion Reporting and Reimbursement Claims for vehicles that have been serviced must be submitted on the DealerCONNECT Claim Entry Screen located on the Service tab. Claims submitted will be used by Chrysler to record recall service completions and provide dealer payments. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Wiper Motor: > J10 > Aug > 09 > Recall - Wiper Motor Replacement > Page 15574 Use the labor operation number and time allowance: NOTE: See the Warranty Administration Manual, Recall Claim Processing Section, for complete recall claim processing instructions. Dealer Notification To view this notification on DealerCONNECT, select "Global Recall System" on the Service tab, then click on the description of this notification. Owner Notification and Service Scheduling All involved vehicle owners known to Chrysler are being notified of the service requirement by first class mail. They are requested to schedule appointments for this service with their dealers. A generic copy of the owner letter is included. Enclosed with each owner letter is an Owner Notification postcard to allow owners to update our records if applicable. Dealers are encouraged to consider alternative scheduling and servicing approaches for this recall. This repair does not require hoists or other full service facility special equipment and is a Chrysler Mobile Service approved repair. Vehicle Lists, Global Recall System, VIP and Dealer Follow Up All involved vehicles have been entered into the DealerCONNECT Global Recall System (GRS) and Vehicle Information Plus (VIP) for dealer inquiry as needed. GRS provides involved dealers with an updated VIN list of their incomplete vehicles. The owner's name, address and phone number are listed if known. Completed vehicles are removed from GRS within several days of repair claim submission. To use this system, click on the "Service" tab and then click on "Global Recall System." Your dealer's VIN list for each recall displayed can be sorted by: those vehicles that were unsold at recall launch, those with a phone number, city, zip code, or VIN sequence. Dealers must perform this repair on all unsold vehicles before retail delivery. Dealers should also use the VIN list to follow up with all owners to schedule appointments for this repair. Recall VIN lists may contain confidential, restricted owner name and address information that was obtained from the Department of Motor Vehicles of various states. Use of this information is permitted for this recall only and is strictly prohibited from all other use. Additional Information If you have any questions or need assistance in completing this action, please contact your Service and Parts District Manager. Customer Services Field Operations Chrysler Group LLC Service Procedure 1. Remove the right and left wiper arms from the wiper pivots. 2. Open the hood. 3. Disconnect and isolate the negative battery cable(s). 4. For vehicles equipped with a diesel engine, remove the plenum cover sound deadening pad. 5. Remove the plastic cowl plenum cover panel from the cowl plenum. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Wiper Motor: > J10 > Aug > 09 > Recall - Wiper Motor Replacement > Page 15575 6. Disconnect the wiper motor electrical connector (Figure 1). 7. Remove the wiper motor linkage arm retaining nut from the wiper motor shaft (Figure 1) 8. Remove the wiper motor linkage arm from the motor shaft. NOTE: Do not disconnect the wiper motor linkage arm from the remaining wiper linkage. 9. Remove the three wiper motor retaining bolts (Figure 2). 10. Remove the wiper motor from the vehicle. 11. Transfer the rubber isolator from the old wiper motor onto the new wiper motor (Figure 2). 12. Discard the old wiper motor. 13. Place the new wiper motor into position. 14. Install the three wiper motor retaining bolts (Figure 2). 15. Tighten the upper wiper motor retaining bolts to 70 in. lbs. (8 N.m). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Wiper Motor: > J10 > Aug > 09 > Recall - Wiper Motor Replacement > Page 15576 16. Tighten the lower mounting bolt to 75 in. lbs. (8.5 N.m). 17. Connect the wiper motor electrical connector (Figure 1). 18. Install the wiper motor linkage arm to the wiper motor shaft as shown in Figure 3. NOTE: The arms for the wiper pivots must be pointing downward (forward). 19. Install the wiper motor linkage arm nut and tighten the nut to 204 in. lbs. (23 N.m). 20. Install the plastic cowl plenum cover. 21. For vehicles equipped with a diesel engine, install the plenum cover sound deadening pad. 22. Connect the negative battery cable(s) to the negative battery post(s). 23. Close the hood. 24. Install the right and left wiper arms onto the wiper pivots and verify arm retaining clip is engaged. 25. Cycle the wipers to verify proper operation and wiper blade park position. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Wiper Motor: > J10 > Aug > 09 > Recall - Wiper Motor Replacement > Page 15577 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Wiper Motor: > NHTSA09V084000 > Mar > 09 > Recall 09V084000: Wiper Module Replacement Wiper Motor: Recalls Recall 09V084000: Wiper Module Replacement VEHICLE MAKE/MODEL: MODEL YEAR(S): Dodge/RAM 2008-2009 MANUFACTURER: Chrysler LLC. MFR'S REPORT DATE: March 09, 2009 NHTSA CAMPAIGN ID NUMBER: 09V084000 NHTSA ACTION NUMBER: N/A COMPONENT: VISIBILITY: Windshield Wiper/Washer: Motor POTENTIAL NUMBER OF UNITS AFFECTED: 72136 SUMMARY: Chrysler is recalling 72,136 M/Y 2008-2009 light and heavy duty RAM pickup trucks. The windshield wiper module motor assembly may be susceptible to water intrusion that could result in partial or complete loss of windshield wiping capability. CONSEQUENCE: When the wiper system fails, the operator will have reduced visibility which could result in a crash. REMEDY: Dealers will replace the wiper module assemblies with vented wiper motor housings free of charge. The manufacturer has not yet provided an owner notification schedule. Owners may contact Chrysler at 1-800-853-1403. NOTES: Chrysler recall No. J10. Owners may also contact The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration's Vehicle Safety Hotline at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY 1-800-424-9153), or go to http://www.safercar.gov. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiper Motor: > J11 > Aug > 09 > Recall - Windshield Wiper Motor Replacement Technical Service Bulletin # J11 Date: 090821 Recall - Windshield Wiper Motor Replacement August 2009 Dealer Service Instructions for: Safety Recall J11 Mopar Windshield Wiper Motor Models 2002-2008 (DR) Dodge Truck (1500 series pickup) 2005-2009 (DH) Dodge Truck (2500 series pickup) 2006-2009 (D1) Dodge Truck (3500 series pickup) 2007-2008 (DC) Dodge Truck (3500 series cab chassis) 2008 (DM) Dodge Truck (4500/5500 series cab chassis) NOTE: This recall applies only to the above vehicles that had the original windshield wiper motor replaced with a Mopar service parts windshield wiper motor. IMPORTANT: Some of the involved vehicles may be in dealer used vehicle inventory. Dealers should complete this recall service on these vehicles before retail delivery. Dealers should also perform this recall on vehicles in for service. Involved vehicles can be determined by using the VIP inquiry process. Subject During a prior service appointment, a Mopar service parts windshield wiper motor may have been installed on about 1,000 of the above vehicles. These replacement wiper motors may fail under certain operating conditions. A loss of windshield wipers could limit the driver's visibility and cause a crash without warning. Repair The windshield wiper motor must be inspected. Vehicles equipped with a Mopar service parts windshield wiper motor must have the motor replaced. Parts Information Special Tools No special tools are required to perform this service procedure. Completion Reporting and Reimbursement Claims for vehicles that have been serviced must be submitted on the DealerCONNECT Claim Entry Screen located on the Service tab. Claims submitted will be used by Chrysler to record recall service completions and provide dealer payments. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiper Motor: > J11 > Aug > 09 > Recall - Windshield Wiper Motor Replacement > Page 15587 Use the labor operation number and time allowance shown. Add the cost of the recall parts package plus applicable dealer allowance to your claim. NOTE: See the Warranty Administration Manual, Recall Claim Processing Section, for complete recall claim processing instructions. Dealer Notification To view this notification on DealerCONNECT, select "Global Recall System" on the Service tab, then click on the description of this notification. Owner Notification and Service Scheduling All involved vehicle owners known to Chrysler are being notified of the service requirement by first class mail. They are requested to schedule appointments for this service with their dealers. A generic copy of the owner letter is included. Enclosed with each owner letter is an Owner Notification postcard to allow owners to update our records if applicable. Dealers are encouraged to consider alternative scheduling and servicing approaches for this recall. This repair does not require hoists or other full service facility special equipment and is a Chrysler Mobile Service approved repair. Vehicle Lists, Global Recall System, VIP and Dealer Follow Up All involved vehicles have been entered into the DealerCONNECT Global Recall System (GRS) and Vehicle Information Plus (VIP) for dealer inquiry as needed. GRS provides involved dealers with an updated VIN list of their incomplete vehicles. The owner's name, address and phone number are listed if known. Completed vehicles are removed from GRS within several days of repair claim submission. To use this system, click on the "Service" tab and then click on "Global Recall System." Your dealer's VIN list for each recall displayed can be sorted by: those vehicles that were unsold at recall launch, those with a phone number, city, zip code, or VIN sequence. Dealers must perform this repair on all unsold vehicles before retail delivery. Dealers should also use the VIN list to follow up with all owners to schedule appointments for this repair. Recall VIN lists may contain confidential, restricted owner name and address information that was obtained from the Department of Motor Vehicles of various states. Use of this information is permitted for this recall only and is strictly prohibited from all other use. Additional Information If you have any questions or need assistance in completing this action, please contact your Service and Parts District Manager. Customer Services Field Operations Chrysler Group LLC Service Procedure 1. Remove the right and left wiper arms from the wiper pivots. 2. Open the hood. 3. Disconnect and isolate the negative battery cable(s). 4. Remove the plenum cover sound deadening pad. 5. Remove the plastic cowl plenum cover panel from the cowl plenum to expose the wiper motor. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiper Motor: > J11 > Aug > 09 > Recall - Windshield Wiper Motor Replacement > Page 15588 6. Inspect the windshield wiper motor: > If the wiper motor has two rubber mounting bushings (Figure 1), the wiper motor is original and is not involved in this recall. Continue with Step 21 of this procedure. NOTE: If the original wiper motor requires some type of repair, the repair cost is the responsibility of the vehicle owner. > If the windshield wiper motor has one rubber mounting bushing (Figure 2), the wiper motor is a Mopar replacement motor and is involved in this recall. Continue with Step 7 of this procedure. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiper Motor: > J11 > Aug > 09 > Recall - Windshield Wiper Motor Replacement > Page 15589 7. Disconnect the wiper motor electrical connector (Figure 3). 8. Remove the wiper motor linkage arm retaining nut from the wiper motor shaft (Figure 3). 9. Remove the wiper motor linkage arm from the motor shaft. NOTE: Do not disconnect the wiper motor linkage arm from the remaining wiper linkage. 10. Remove the three wiper motor retaining bolts (Figure 4). 11. Remove the wiper motor from the vehicle. 12. Transfer the rubber isolator from the old wiper motor onto the new wiper motor (Figure 4). 13. Discard the old wiper motor. 14. Place the new wiper motor into position. 15. Install the three wiper motor retaining bolts (Figure 4). 16. Tighten the upper wiper motor retaining bolts to 70 in. lbs. (8 N.m). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiper Motor: > J11 > Aug > 09 > Recall - Windshield Wiper Motor Replacement > Page 15590 17. Tighten the lower mounting bolt to 75 in. lbs. (8.5 N.m). 18. Connect the wiper motor electrical connector (Figure 3). 19. Install the wiper motor linkage arm to the wiper motor shaft as shown in Figure 5. NOTE: The arms for the wiper pivots must be pointing downward (forward). 20. Install the wiper motor linkage arm nut and tighten the nut to 204 in.lbs. (23 N.m). 21. Install the plastic cowl plenum cover panel. 22. Install the plenum cover sound deadening pad. 23. Connect the negative battery cable(s) to the negative battery post(s). 24. Close the hood. 25. Install the right and left wiper arms onto the wiper pivots and verify that the wiper arm retaining clips are engaged. 26. Cycle the windshield wipers to verify proper operation and the wiper blade park position. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiper Motor: > J11 > Aug > 09 > Recall - Windshield Wiper Motor Replacement > Page 15591 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiper Motor: > J10 > Aug > 09 > Recall - Wiper Motor Replacement Technical Service Bulletin # J10 Date: 090810 Recall - Wiper Motor Replacement August 2009 Dealer Service Instructions for: Safety Recall J10 Windshield Wiper Motor Models 2008 (DR) Dodge Truck (1500 series pickup) 2008-2009 (DH) Dodge Truck (2500 series pickup) 2008-2009 (D1) Dodge Truck (3500 series pickup) 2008-2009 (DC) Dodge Truck (3500 series cab chassis) 2008-2009 (DM) Dodge Truck (4500/5500 series cab chassis) NOTE: This recall applies only to the above vehicles built through October 24, 2008 (MDH 102409). IMPORTANT: Some of the involved vehicles may be in dealer new vehicle inventory. Federal law requires you to complete this recall service on these vehicles before retail delivery. Dealers should also consider this requirement to apply to used vehicle inventory and should perform this recall on vehicles in for service. Involved vehicles can be determined by using the VIP inquiry process. Subject The windshield wiper motor on about 65,000 of the above vehicles may fail under certain operating conditions. A loss of windshield wipers could limit the driver's visibility and cause a crash without warning. Repair The windshield wiper motor must be replaced. Parts Information Special Tools No special tools are required to perform this service procedure. Completion Reporting and Reimbursement Claims for vehicles that have been serviced must be submitted on the DealerCONNECT Claim Entry Screen located on the Service tab. Claims submitted will be used by Chrysler to record recall service completions and provide dealer payments. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiper Motor: > J10 > Aug > 09 > Recall - Wiper Motor Replacement > Page 15596 Use the labor operation number and time allowance: NOTE: See the Warranty Administration Manual, Recall Claim Processing Section, for complete recall claim processing instructions. Dealer Notification To view this notification on DealerCONNECT, select "Global Recall System" on the Service tab, then click on the description of this notification. Owner Notification and Service Scheduling All involved vehicle owners known to Chrysler are being notified of the service requirement by first class mail. They are requested to schedule appointments for this service with their dealers. A generic copy of the owner letter is included. Enclosed with each owner letter is an Owner Notification postcard to allow owners to update our records if applicable. Dealers are encouraged to consider alternative scheduling and servicing approaches for this recall. This repair does not require hoists or other full service facility special equipment and is a Chrysler Mobile Service approved repair. Vehicle Lists, Global Recall System, VIP and Dealer Follow Up All involved vehicles have been entered into the DealerCONNECT Global Recall System (GRS) and Vehicle Information Plus (VIP) for dealer inquiry as needed. GRS provides involved dealers with an updated VIN list of their incomplete vehicles. The owner's name, address and phone number are listed if known. Completed vehicles are removed from GRS within several days of repair claim submission. To use this system, click on the "Service" tab and then click on "Global Recall System." Your dealer's VIN list for each recall displayed can be sorted by: those vehicles that were unsold at recall launch, those with a phone number, city, zip code, or VIN sequence. Dealers must perform this repair on all unsold vehicles before retail delivery. Dealers should also use the VIN list to follow up with all owners to schedule appointments for this repair. Recall VIN lists may contain confidential, restricted owner name and address information that was obtained from the Department of Motor Vehicles of various states. Use of this information is permitted for this recall only and is strictly prohibited from all other use. Additional Information If you have any questions or need assistance in completing this action, please contact your Service and Parts District Manager. Customer Services Field Operations Chrysler Group LLC Service Procedure 1. Remove the right and left wiper arms from the wiper pivots. 2. Open the hood. 3. Disconnect and isolate the negative battery cable(s). 4. For vehicles equipped with a diesel engine, remove the plenum cover sound deadening pad. 5. Remove the plastic cowl plenum cover panel from the cowl plenum. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiper Motor: > J10 > Aug > 09 > Recall - Wiper Motor Replacement > Page 15597 6. Disconnect the wiper motor electrical connector (Figure 1). 7. Remove the wiper motor linkage arm retaining nut from the wiper motor shaft (Figure 1) 8. Remove the wiper motor linkage arm from the motor shaft. NOTE: Do not disconnect the wiper motor linkage arm from the remaining wiper linkage. 9. Remove the three wiper motor retaining bolts (Figure 2). 10. Remove the wiper motor from the vehicle. 11. Transfer the rubber isolator from the old wiper motor onto the new wiper motor (Figure 2). 12. Discard the old wiper motor. 13. Place the new wiper motor into position. 14. Install the three wiper motor retaining bolts (Figure 2). 15. Tighten the upper wiper motor retaining bolts to 70 in. lbs. (8 N.m). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiper Motor: > J10 > Aug > 09 > Recall - Wiper Motor Replacement > Page 15598 16. Tighten the lower mounting bolt to 75 in. lbs. (8.5 N.m). 17. Connect the wiper motor electrical connector (Figure 1). 18. Install the wiper motor linkage arm to the wiper motor shaft as shown in Figure 3. NOTE: The arms for the wiper pivots must be pointing downward (forward). 19. Install the wiper motor linkage arm nut and tighten the nut to 204 in. lbs. (23 N.m). 20. Install the plastic cowl plenum cover. 21. For vehicles equipped with a diesel engine, install the plenum cover sound deadening pad. 22. Connect the negative battery cable(s) to the negative battery post(s). 23. Close the hood. 24. Install the right and left wiper arms onto the wiper pivots and verify arm retaining clip is engaged. 25. Cycle the wipers to verify proper operation and wiper blade park position. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiper Motor: > J10 > Aug > 09 > Recall - Wiper Motor Replacement > Page 15599 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiper Motor: > NHTSA09V084000 > Mar > 09 > Recall 09V084000: Wiper Module Replacement Wiper Motor: All Technical Service Bulletins Recall 09V084000: Wiper Module Replacement VEHICLE MAKE/MODEL: MODEL YEAR(S): Dodge/RAM 2008-2009 MANUFACTURER: Chrysler LLC. MFR'S REPORT DATE: March 09, 2009 NHTSA CAMPAIGN ID NUMBER: 09V084000 NHTSA ACTION NUMBER: N/A COMPONENT: VISIBILITY: Windshield Wiper/Washer: Motor POTENTIAL NUMBER OF UNITS AFFECTED: 72136 SUMMARY: Chrysler is recalling 72,136 M/Y 2008-2009 light and heavy duty RAM pickup trucks. The windshield wiper module motor assembly may be susceptible to water intrusion that could result in partial or complete loss of windshield wiping capability. CONSEQUENCE: When the wiper system fails, the operator will have reduced visibility which could result in a crash. REMEDY: Dealers will replace the wiper module assemblies with vented wiper motor housings free of charge. The manufacturer has not yet provided an owner notification schedule. Owners may contact Chrysler at 1-800-853-1403. NOTES: Chrysler recall No. J10. Owners may also contact The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration's Vehicle Safety Hotline at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY 1-800-424-9153), or go to http://www.safercar.gov. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 15604 Wiper Motor: Locations Component ID: 233 Component : MOTOR-WIPER-FRONT Connector: Name : MOTOR-WIPER-FRONT Color : # of pins : 4 A W4 12BR/OR WIPER MOTOR HIGH SPEED FEED A W4 16BR/OR WIPER MOTOR HIGH SPEED FEED B W3 18BR/WT WIPER LOW SPEED CONTROL OUTPUT C Z103 12BK/WT GROUND C Z103 16BK/WT GROUND D W7 20BR/GY WIPER PARK SWITCH SENSE Component Location - 32 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 15605 Component Location - 30 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 15606 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Wiper Motor: Diagram Information and Instructions Warnings WARNINGS - GENERAL WARNINGS provide information to prevent personal injury and vehicle damage. Below is a list of general warnings that should be followed any time a vehicle is being serviced. WARNING: Always wear safety glasses for eye protection. WARNING: Use safety stands anytime a procedure requires being under a vehicle. WARNING: Be sure that the ignition switch always is in the off position, unless the procedure requires it to be on. WARNING: Set the parking brake when working on any vehicle. An automatic transmission should be in park. A manual transmission should be in neutral. WARNING: Operate the engine only in a well-ventilated area. WARNING: Keep away from moving parts when the engine is running, especially the fan and belts. WARNING: To prevent serious burns, avoid contact with hot parts such as the radiator, exhaust manifold(s), tail pipe, catalytic converter and muffler. WARNING: Do not allow flame or sparks near the battery. Gases are always present in and around the battery. WARNING: Always remove rings, watches, loose hanging jewelry and avoid loose clothing. How to Use Wiring Diagrams DESCRIPTION - HOW TO USE WIRING DIAGRAMS DaimlerChrysler Corporation wiring diagrams are designed to provide information regarding the vehicles wiring content. In order to effectively use the wiring diagrams to diagnose and repair DaimlerChrysler Corporation vehicles, it is important to understand all of their features and characteristics. Diagrams are arranged such that the power (B+) side of the circuit is placed near the top of the page, and the ground (B-) side of the circuit is placed near the bottom of the page. All switches, components, and modules are shown in the at rest position with the doors closed and the key removed from the ignition. Components are shown two ways. A solid line around a component indicates that the component is complete. A dashed line around the component indicates that the component is being shown is not complete. Incomplete components have a reference number to indicate the page where the component is shown complete. It is important to realize that no attempt is made on the diagrams to represent components and wiring as they appear on the vehicle. For example, a short piece of wire is treated the same as a long one. In addition, switches and other components are shown as simply as possible, with regard to function only. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 15609 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 15610 SYMBOLS International symbols are used throughout the wiring diagrams. These symbols are consistent with those being used around the world. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 15611 TERMINOLOGY This is a list of terms and definitions used in the wiring diagrams. LHD - Left Hand Drive Vehicles RHD - Right Hand Drive Vehicles ATX - Automatic Transmissions-Front Wheel Drive MTX Manual Transmissions-Front Wheel Drive Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 15612 AT - Automatic Transmissions-Rear Wheel Drive MT - Manual Transmissions-Rear Wheel Drive SOHC - Single Over Head Cam Engine DOHC - Double Over Head Cam Engine Export - Vehicles Built For Sale In Markets Other Than North America Except Export - Vehicles Built For Sale In North America Circuit Functions DESCRIPTION - CIRCUIT FUNCTIONS All circuits in the diagrams use an alpha/numeric code to identify the wire and it's function. To identify which circuit code applies to a system, refer to the Circuit Identification Code Chart. This chart shows the main circuits only and does not show the secondary codes that may apply to some models. Circuit Information DESCRIPTION - CIRCUIT INFORMATION Each wire shown in the diagrams contains a code which identifies the main circuit, a specific part of the main circuit, gage of wire, and color. An example would be A 2 18 LB/YL. This is a Battery Feed circuit, level two, eighteen gauge, light blue with a yellow tracer. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 15613 Connector, Ground and Splice Information DESCRIPTION - CONNECTOR, GROUND AND SPLICE INFORMATION CAUTION: Not all connectors are serviced. Some connectors are serviced only with a harness. A typical example might be the Supplemental Restraint System connectors. Always check parts availability before attempting a repair. IDENTIFICATION In-line connectors are identified by a number, as follows: - In-line connectors located in the engine compartment are C100 series numbers. - In-line connectors located in the instrument panel area are C200 series numbers. - In-line connectors located in the body are C300 series numbers. - Jumper harness connectors are C400 series numbers. - Grounds and ground connectors are identified with a "G" and follow the same series numbering as the in-line connectors. - Splices are identified with an "S" and follow the same series numbering as the in-line connectors. In addition, S001-S099 numbers are located in the engine compartment. - Component connectors are identified by the component name instead of a number. Multiple connectors on a component use a C1, C2, etc. identifier. LOCATIONS Vehicle/Locations contains the master connector/ground/splice location index charts with hyperlinks to the applicable location illustrations. The illustrations contain the connector name (or number)/ground number/splice number and component identification. The abbreviation T/O is used in the component location section to indicate a point in which the wiring harness branches out to a component. The abbreviation N/S means Not Shown in the illustrations Section Identification and Information DESCRIPTION - SECTION IDENTIFICATION AND INFORMATION The wiring diagrams are grouped into individual sections. If a component is most likely found in a particular group, it will be shown complete (all wires, Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 15614 connectors, and pins) within that group. For example, the Auto Shutdown Relay is most likely to be found in Powertrain Management, so it is shown there complete. It can, however, be shown partially in another group if it contains some associated wiring. Splice diagrams show the entire splice and provide references to other sections the splices serves. Splice Information only contains splice diagrams that are not shown in their entirety somewhere else in the wiring diagrams. Connector Pin-Outs shows each connector and the circuits involved with that connector. The connectors are identified using the name/number on the diagram pages. Removal REMOVAL 1. Disconnect battery. 2. Release Connector Lock (2). 3. Disconnect the connector (3) being repaired from its mating half/component. 4. Remove the dress cover (if applicable) (1). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 15615 5. Release the Secondary Terminal Lock, if required (1). Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 15616 6. Position the connector locking finger away from the terminal using the proper special tool. Pull on the wire to remove the terminal from the connector. Installation Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 15617 INSTALLATION 1. Insert the removed terminal in the same cavity on the repair connector. 2. Repeat steps for each terminal in the connector, being sure that all wires are inserted into the proper cavities. For additional connector pin-out identification, refer to the wiring diagrams. 3. When the connector is re-assembled, the secondary terminal lock must be placed in the locked position to prevent terminal push out. 4. Replace dress cover (if applicable). 5. Connect connector to its mating half/component. 6. Connect battery and test all affected systems. Removal REMOVAL 1. Disconnect the battery. 2. Locate the diode in the harness, and remove the protective covering. 3. Remove the diode from the harness, pay attention to the current flow direction (1) (2) (3). Installation INSTALLATION 1. Remove the insulation from the wires in the harness. Only remove enough insulation to solder in the new diode. 2. Install the new diode in the harness, making sure current flow is correct. If necessary, refer to the appropriate wiring diagram for current flow. 3. Solder the connection together using rosin core type solder only. Do not use acid core solder. 4. Tape the diode to the harness using electrical tape. Make sure the diode is completely sealed from the elements. 5. Re-connect the battery and test affected systems. Removal REMOVAL 1. Follow steps for removing terminals described in the connector removal section. 2. Cut the wire 6 inches from the back of the connector. Installation INSTALLATION 1. Select a wire from the terminal repair kit that best matches the color and gage of the wire being repaired. 2. Cut the repair wire to the proper length and remove one-half (1/2) inch of insulation. 3. Splice the repair wire to the wire harness (see wire splicing procedure). See: Service Procedures/Wire Splicing 4. Insert the repaired wire into the connector. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 15618 5. Install the connector locking wedge, if required, and reconnect the connector to its mating half/component. 6. Re-tape the wire harness starting at 1-1/2 inches behind the connector and 2 inches past the repair. 7. Connect battery and test all affected systems. Wire Splicing STANDARD PROCEDURE - WIRE SPLICING When splicing a wire, it is important that the correct gage be used as shown in the wiring diagrams. 1. Remove one-half (1/2) inch of insulation from each wire that needs to be spliced. 2. Place a piece of adhesive lined heat shrink tubing on one side of the wire. Make sure the tubing will be long enough to cover and seal the entire repair area. 3. Place the strands of wire overlapping each other inside of the splice clip (1). 4. Using crimping tool (1), Mopar p/n 05019912AA, crimp the splice clip and wires together. 5. Solder (3) the connection (2) together using rosin core type solder (1) only. CAUTION: DO NOT USE ACID CORE SOLDER. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 15619 6. Center the heat shrink tubing (2) over the joint and heat using a heat gun. Heat the joint until the tubing is tightly sealed and sealant (1) comes out of both ends of the tubing. Special Tools WIRING/TERMINAL PROBING TOOL PACKAGE 6807 TERMINAL PICK TOOL SET 6680 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 15620 TERMINAL REMOVING TOOLS 6932 AND 8638 TERMINAL REMOVING TOOL 6934 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 15621 Wiper Motor: Diagnostic Aids Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) Sensitive Devices STANDARD PROCEDURE - ELECTROSTATIC DISCHARGE (ESD) SENSITIVE DEVICES All ESD sensitive components are solid state and a symbol is used to indicate this. When handling any component with this symbol, comply with the following procedures to reduce the possibility of electrostatic charge build up on the body and inadvertent discharge into the component. If it is not known whether the part is ESD sensitive, assume that it is. 1. Always touch a known good ground before handling the part. This should be repeated while handling the part and more frequently after sliding across a seat, sitting down from a standing position, or walking a distance. 2. Avoid touching electrical terminals of the part, unless instructed to do so by a written procedure. 3. When using a voltmeter, be sure to connect the ground lead first. 4. Do not remove the part from it's protective packing until it is time to install the part. 5. Before removing the part from it's package, ground the package to a known good ground on the vehicle. Testing Of Voltage Potential STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING OF VOLTAGE POTENTIAL 1. Connect the ground lead of a voltmeter to a known good ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the voltmeter to the selected test point. The vehicle ignition may need to be turned ON to check voltage. Refer to the appropriate test procedure. Testing For Continuity Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 15622 STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING FOR CONTINUITY 1. Remove the fuse (1) for the circuit being checked or, disconnect the battery. 2. Connect one lead of the ohmmeter to one side of the circuit being tested 3. Connect the other lead to the other end of the circuit being tested. Low or no resistance means good continuity. Testing For A Short To Ground STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING FOR A SHORT TO GROUND 1. Remove the fuse and disconnect all items involved with the fuse. 2. Connect a test light or a voltmeter across the terminals of the fuse. 3. Starting at the fuse block, wiggle the wiring harness about six to eight inches apart and watch the voltmeter/test lamp. 4. If the voltmeter registers voltage or the test lamp glows, there is a short to ground in that general area of the wiring harness. Testing For A Short To Ground On Fuses Powering Several Loads STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING FOR A SHORT TO GROUND ON FUSES POWERING SEVERAL LOADS 1. Refer to the wiring diagrams and disconnect or isolate all items on the suspected fused circuits. 2. Replace the blown fuse. 3. Supply power to the fuse by turning ON the ignition switch or re-connecting the battery. 4. Start connecting or energizing the items in the fuse circuit one at a time. When the fuse blows the circuit with the short to ground has been isolated. Testing For A Voltage Drop STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING FOR A VOLTAGE DROP Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 15623 1. Connect the positive lead of the voltmeter to the side of the circuit closest to the battery. 2. Connect the other lead of the voltmeter to the other side of the switch, component or circuit. 3. Operate the item. 4. The voltmeter will show the difference in voltage between the two points. Troubleshooting Wiring Problems DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING - WIRING HARNESS TROUBLESHOOTING TOOLS When diagnosing a problem in an electrical circuit there are several common tools necessary. These tools are listed and explained below. - Jumper Wire - This is a test wire used to connect two points of a circuit. It can be used to bypass an open in a circuit. WARNING: Never use a jumper wire across a load, such as a motor, connected between a battery feed and ground. - Voltmeter - Used to check for voltage on a circuit. Always connect the black lead to a known good ground and the red lead to the positive side of the circuit. CAUTION: Most of the electrical components used in today's vehicles are Solid State. When checking voltages in these circuits, use a meter with a 10 - megohm or greater impedance rating. - Ohmmeter - Used to check the resistance between two points of a circuit. Low or no resistance in a circuit means good continuity. CAUTION: Most of the electrical components used in today's vehicles are Solid State. When checking resistance in these circuits use a meter with a 10 - megohm or greater impedance rating. In addition, make sure the power is disconnected from the circuit. Circuits that are powered up by the vehicle's electrical system can cause damage to the equipment and provide false readings. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 15624 - Probing Tools - These tools are used for probing terminals in connectors. Select the proper size tool from Special Tool Package 6807, and insert the probing end (2) into the terminal being tested. Use the other end of the tool (1) to insert the meter probe. INTERMITTENT AND POOR CONNECTIONS Most intermittent electrical problems are caused by faulty electrical connections or wiring. It is also possible for a sticking component or relay to cause a problem. Before condemning a component or wiring assembly, check the following items. - Connectors are fully seated - Spread terminals, or terminal push out - Terminals in the wiring assembly are fully seated into the connector/component and locked into position - Dirt or corrosion on the terminals. Any amount of corrosion or dirt could cause an intermittent problem - Damaged connector/component casing exposing the item to dirt or moisture - Wire insulation that has rubbed through causing a short to ground - Some or all of the wiring strands broken inside of the insulation - Wiring broken inside of the insulation TROUBLESHOOTING WIRING PROBLEMS When troubleshooting wiring problems there are six steps which can aid in the procedure. The steps are listed and explained below. Always check for non-factory items added to the vehicle before doing any diagnosis. If the vehicle is equipped with these items, disconnect them to verify these add-on items are not the cause of the problem. 1. Verify the problem. 2. Verify any related symptoms. Do this by performing operational checks on components that are in the same circuit. Refer to the wiring diagrams. 3. Analyze the symptoms. Use the wiring diagrams to determine what the circuit is doing, where the problem most likely is occurring and where the diagnosis will continue. 4. Isolate the problem area. 5. Repair the problem area. 6. Verify the proper operation. For this step, check for proper operation of all items on the repaired circuit. Refer to the wiring diagrams. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 15625 Wiper Motor: Connector Views Component ID: 233 Component : MOTOR-WIPER-FRONT Connector: Name : MOTOR-WIPER-FRONT Color : # of pins : 4 A W4 12BR/OR WIPER MOTOR HIGH SPEED FEED A W4 16BR/OR WIPER MOTOR HIGH SPEED FEED B W3 18BR/WT WIPER LOW SPEED CONTROL OUTPUT C Z103 12BK/WT GROUND C Z103 16BK/WT GROUND D W7 20BR/GY WIPER PARK SWITCH SENSE Component Location - 32 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 15626 Component Location - 30 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 15627 Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Wiper Motor: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The wiper module is secured with screws through three rubber grommet-type insulators (5) to the cowl plenum panel. The module is concealed beneath the molded plastic cowl plenum cover/grille panel between the base of the windshield and the rear edge of the hood panel. The ends of the pivot shafts protruding through openings in the cowl plenum cover/grille panel to drive the wiper arms and blades are the only visible components of the wiper module. The wiper module consists of the following major components: - Bracket - The wiper module bracket consists of a long tubular steel main member (2) that has a die cast pivot bracket (1) at each end to which the two wiper pivots are secured. A stamped steel clamp secures the center of the tubular member to the die cast bracket integral to the wiper motor with two screws. Crank Arm (10) - The wiper motor crank arm is a stamped steel unit with a slotted hole on the driven end that is secured to the wiper motor output shaft with a nut, and has a long ball stud secured to the drive end to accept the wiper linkage. - Linkage (2) - Two tubular steel drive links connect the wiper motor crank arm to the wiper pivot lever arms. The left side drive link has a plastic socket-type bushing (6) on each end. The right side drive link has a plastic socket-type bushing on one end, and a plastic sleeve-type bushing on the other end. The socket-type bushing on one end of each drive link is snap-fit over the ball stud on the lever arm (8) of its respective pivot. The right side drive link sleeve-type bushing end is then fit over the motor crank arm ball stud, and the other socket-type bushing of the left side drive link is snap-fit over the exposed end of the wiper motor crank arm ball stud. - Motor (11) - The wiper motor features an integral die cast bracket to which the wiper module bracket is secured with a stamped steel clamp and two screws near the top and which has a single rubber insulated mounting ear at the bottom. This die casting also serves as the wiper motor transmission housing from which the wiper motor output shaft exits. A nut secures the wiper motor crank arm to the motor output shaft. The two-speed permanent magnet wiper motor features an integral transmission, an internal park switch, and an internal automatic resetting circuit breaker. A short pigtail wire and connector connect the wiper motor to the vehicle electrical system through a dedicated take out and connector of the headlamp and dash wire harness. Pivots (2) - The two wiper pivots are secured within the die cast pivot brackets on the outboard ends of the wiper module main member. The lever arms that extend from the center of the pivot shafts each have a ball stud on their end. The upper end of each pivot shaft where the wiper arms will be fastened each has a serrated driver with a keyway. The lower ends of the pivot shafts are installed through lubricated bushings in the pivot brackets and are secured with snap rings. The wiper module cannot be adjusted or repaired. If any component of the module is ineffective or damaged, the entire wiper module unit must be replaced. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 15630 Wiper Motor: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The wiper module operation is controlled by the battery current inputs received by the wiper motor from the Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM). The wiper motor speed is controlled by current flow to either the low speed or the high speed set of brushes. The park switch is a single pole, single throw, momentary switch within the wiper motor that is mechanically actuated by the wiper motor transmission components. The park switch alternately opens and closes the wiper park switch sense circuit to ground, depending upon the position of the wipers on the glass. This feature allows the motor to complete its current wipe cycle after the wiper system has been turned OFF, and to park the wiper blades in the lowest portion of the wipe pattern. The automatic resetting circuit breaker protects the motor from overloads. The wiper motor crank arm, the two wiper linkage members, and the two driven wiper pivots mechanically convert the rotary output of the wiper motor to the back and forth wiping motion of the wiper arms and blades on the glass. The hard wired inputs and outputs of the front wiper motor may be diagnosed using conventional diagnostic tools and procedures. Refer to the appropriate wiring information. However, conventional diagnostic methods will not prove conclusive in the diagnosis of the wiper motor or the electronic controls or communication between other modules and devices that provide some features of the wiper and washer system. The most reliable, efficient, and accurate means to diagnose the wiper motor or the electronic controls and communication related to wiper motor operation requires the use of a diagnostic scan tool. Refer to the appropriate diagnostic information. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Wiper Module - Removal Wiper Motor: Service and Repair Wiper Module - Removal REMOVAL 1. Remove both wiper arms (4) from the wiper pivots. See: Wiper Arm/Service and Repair/Wiper Arms - Removal . 2. Unlatch and open the hood. 3. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. 4. Remove the cowl plenum cover/grille panel (5) from over the cowl plenum (8). See: Body and Frame/Cowl/Cowl Moulding / Trim/Service and Repair/Removal . 5. Disconnect the left headlamp and dash wire harness connector (7) from the wiper motor pigtail wire connector. 6. Remove the two screws (9) that secure the wiper module (6) to the top of the cowl plenum panel at the pivot brackets. 7. Remove the screw that secures the wiper module to the bottom of the cowl plenum panel. 8. Remove the wiper module from the cowl plenum panel as a unit. Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Wiper Module - Removal > Page 15633 Wiper Motor: Service and Repair Wiper Module - Installation INSTALLATION 1. Position the wiper module (6) into the cowl plenum (8) as a unit. 2. Install the two screws (9) that secure the wiper module to the top of the cowl plenum panel at the pivot brackets. Tighten the screw on the driver side, followed by the screw on the passenger side. Tighten the screws to 8 Nm (75 in. lbs.). 3. Install and tighten the screw that secures the wiper module to the bottom of the cowl plenum panel. Tighten the screw to 8 Nm (75 in. lbs.). 4. Reconnect the left headlamp and dash wire harness connector (7) to the wiper motor pigtail wire connector. 5. Reinstall the cowl plenum cover/grille panel (5) over the cowl plenum. See: Body and Frame/Cowl/Cowl Moulding / Trim/Service and Repair/Installation . 6. Reconnect the battery negative cable. 7. Close and latch the hood. 8. Reinstall both wiper arms (4) onto the wiper pivots. See: Wiper Arm/Service and Repair/Wiper Arms - Installation . Dodge Ram 1500 4wd Workshop Manual (Truck V8-4.7L (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Relay > Component Information > Locations Wiper Relay: Locations Dodge Ram 2006-2008, 1500-5500 all, do not use a wiper relay.